.dmp". The file name cannot be changed. Note If you have defined your user page as the Web server's home page, direct access to the service data by entering the CPU's IP address is not possible. You will find further information on reading out service data via a user-defined page in the Web server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) function manual. Procedure using STEP 7 A description of how to save service data is available under the keyword "Save service data" in STEP 7 online help. Procedure via the SIMATIC memory card Use the SIMATIC memory card to read out the service data only if you are no longer able to communicate with the CPU via Ethernet. In all other cases it is preferable to read out the service data via the Web server or STEP 7. The procedure using the SIMATIC memory card is more time-consuming than the other options for reading out the service data. You must also ensure before reading out that there is sufficient memory space on the SIMATIC memory card. To read service data using the SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps: 1. Insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of your PC / programming device. 2. Open the job file S7_JOB.S7S in an editor. 3. Overwrite the entry PROGRAM with the string DUMP in the editor. Do not use any spaces/line breaks/quotation marks to ensure that the file size is exactly 4 bytes. 4. Save the file under the existing file name. 5. Ensure that the SIMATIC memory card is not write protected and insert it in the card slot of the CPU. Pay attention to the procedure described in Removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card on the CPU (Page 213). Result: The CPU writes the service data file DUMP.S7S to the SIMATIC memory card and remains in STOP mode. The transfer of the service data has been completed as soon as the STOP LED stops flashing and lights up continuously. If the transfer was successful, only the STOP LED lights up. If transfer was not successful, the STOP LED and the ERROR LED flash. In case of an error, the CPU stores a text file with a note on the error that occurred in the DUMP.S7S folder. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 281 15 Technical specifications Introduction This chapter lists the technical specifications of the system: The standards and test values that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system complies with and fulfills. The test criteria according to which the ET 200SP distributed I/O system was tested. Technical specifications for the modules The technical specifications of the individual modules can be found in the manuals of the modules themselves. In the event of deviations between the statements in this document and the manuals, the statements in the manuals take priority. 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes Currently valid markings and approvals Note Information on the components of the ET 200SP The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Distributed I/O system 282 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes Safety information WARNING Personal injury and damage to property may occur In hazardous areas, personal injury and damage to property may occur if you disconnect plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system when disconnecting plug-in connections in hazardous areas. WARNING Explosion hazard If you replace components, compliance with Class I, Div. 2 or zone 2 may become invalid. WARNING Area of application This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D; Class I, zone 2, Group IIC, or in non-hazardous areas. Five safety rules for work in or on electrical installations A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined for work in or on electrical installations as a preventative measure against electrical accidents: 1. Isolate 2. Secure against switching on again 3. Verify that the equipment is not live 4. Ground and short-circuit 5. Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an electrical system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order. It is assumed that every electrician is familiar with these rules. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 283 Technical specifications 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes CE marking The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the general and safety-related requirements of the following directives and conforms to the harmonized standards (EN) for programmable controllers published in the official journals of the European Union: 2014/35/EU "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (Low Voltage Directive) 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) 2014/34/EU "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive) 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive) 2006/42/EC "Machinery Directive" for ET 200SP fail-safe modules The EC declarations of conformity are available for the responsible authorities at: Siemens AG Digital Factory Factory Automation DF FA AS SYS Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg They are also available for download on the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/) website, keyword "Declaration of Conformity". cULus approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) OR Distributed I/O system 284 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes cULus HAZ. LOC. approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location) APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations. WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS. OR CSA CSA C22.2 (Industrial Control Equipment Motor Controllers) OR UL UL 60947-4-2 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear OR Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 285 Technical specifications 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes FM approval Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 ANSI/ISA 82.02.01 (IEC 61010-1) CSA C22.2 No. 213 CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Installation Instructions for FM WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations. WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS. OR ATEX approval According to EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) OR IECEx approval According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements) Distributed I/O system 286 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes RCM (C-Tick) Declaration of conformity for Australia/New Zealand The ET 200SP distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of the standards EN 61000-6-4. Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas. (A) . Marking for the Eurasian Customs Union EAC (Eurasian Conformity) Customs Union of Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan Declaration of conformity with the technical requirements of the Customs Union (TR CU). IEC 61131 The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements and criteria of the standard IEC 61131-2 (Programmable logic controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests). IEC 60947 The motor starters belonging to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system meet the requirements and criteria of the IEC 60947 standard. PROFINET standard The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158 Type 10. PROFIBUS standard The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158 Type 3. IO-Link standard The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61131-9. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 287 Technical specifications 15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes Shipbuilding approval Classification societies: ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) BV (Bureau Veritas) DNV-GL (Det Norske Veritas - Germanischer Lloyd) LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai) KR (Korean Register of Shipping) CCS (China Classification Society) Use in industrial environments The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in industrial environments. It meets the following standards for this type of use: Requirements on interference emission EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011 Requirements on immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005 Use in mixed areas Under specific prerequisites you can use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a mixed area. A mixed area is used for residential purposes and for commercial operations that do not significantly impact the residential purpose. If you want to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, you must ensure that its radio frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with EN 61000-6-3. Suitable measures for observing these limits for use in a mixed area are, for example: Installation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in grounded control cabinets Use of filters in the supply lines An additional individual acceptance test is also required. Use in residential areas Note ET 200SP distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas. If you are using the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, radio and TV reception may be affected. Reference The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Distributed I/O system 288 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility 15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Definition Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment. Among other things, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system also meets the requirements of the EMC legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite is that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical equipment. EMC in accordance with NE21 The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the EMC specifications of the NAMUR recommendation NE21. Pulse-shaped disturbance variables of the ET 200SP system The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with regard to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. Table 15- 1 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Electrostatic discharge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2 Air discharge 8 kV 3 Contact discharge: 6 kV 3 2 kV (power supply line) 3 2 kV (signal line >30 m) 3 Burst pulses (fast transients) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4 Equivalent to severity 1 kV (signal cable <30 m) High-energy single pulse (surge) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 External protective circuit required (see Function manual Designing interferencefree controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)) * Asymmetric coupling 2 kV (power supply lines) DC with protective elements 2 kV (signal lines/data lines only >30 m) with protective elements if necessary * Symmetric coupling 3 1 kV (power supply line) DC with protective elements 1 kV (signal line/data line only >30 m) with protective elements if necessary Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 289 Technical specifications 15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Pulse-shaped disturbance variables of motor starters The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP motor starters with regard to pulse-shaped interference. Table 15- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Equivalent to severity Burst pulses (fast transients) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4, tested with 5 kHz. 3 2 kV (24 V supply cables) 2 kV (500 V AC infeed*) 1 kV (signal cable <30 m) If you mount the motor starter to the right of a 15 mm or 20 mm I/O module or immediately next to a head module, use a dummy module. You will find further information in "Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit (Page 42)." High-energy single pulse (surge) in 500 V AC infeed accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV conducted interference - phase to ground 3 1 kV conducted interference - phase to phase 24 V supply cable: 1 kV conducted interference - phase to ground **) 0.5 kV conducted interference - phase to phase **) **) An RC circuit is not required for hybrid switching devices. If higher values (2 kV (phase to ground) or 1 kV (phase to phase) are required, you will need an additional external protective circuit (see Designing interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual). Sinusoidal disturbance variables The tables below show the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables. RF radiation Table 15- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated 80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz 10 V/m 3 V/m Corresponds to degree of severity 3 80% AM (1 kHz) RF coupling Distributed I/O system 290 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Table 15- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 Corresponds to degree of severity (10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3 10 Vrms unmodulated 80% AM (1 kHz) 150 source impedance Emission of radio frequency interference Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016 (measured at a distance of 10 m). Table 15- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields Frequency Interference emission 30 MHz to 230 MHz <40 dB (V/m) Q 230 MHz to 1000 MHz <47 dB (V/m) Q 1 GHz to 3 GHz <66 dB (V/m) P 3 GHz to 6 GHz <70 dB (V/m) P Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016. Table 15- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply Frequency Interference emission 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (V/m)Q < 66 dB (V/m) M 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz < 73 dB (V/m)Q < 60 dB (V/m) M Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 291 Technical specifications 15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules 15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules Protecting ET 200SP with fail-safe modules against overvoltages If your equipment requires protection from overvoltage, we recommend that you use an external protective circuit (surge filter) between the load voltage power supply and the load voltage input of the BaseUnits to ensure surge immunity for the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules. Note Overvoltage protection measures always require a case-by-case examination of the entire plant. Almost complete protection from overvoltages, however, can only be achieved if the entire building surroundings have been designed for overvoltage protection. In particular, this involves structural measures in the building design phase. For detailed information regarding overvoltage protection, we recommend that you contact your Siemens representative or a company specializing in lightning protection. Distributed I/O system 292 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules The following figure shows an example configuration with fail-safe modules. Voltage is supplied by one power supply unit. Note, however, that the total current of the modules fed by the power supply unit must not exceed the permissible limits. You can also use multiple power supply units. Figure 15-1 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with failsafe modules Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 293 Technical specifications 15.4 Shipping and storage conditions Figure 15-2 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with fail-safe modules Name Part number of Dehn Co. A = BVT AVD 24 918 422 B = DCO RK D 5 24 919 986 C = The external protective circuit required at the outputs of the modules F-PM-E power module load group can be found in the Designing interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual. Distributed I/O system 294 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.4 Shipping and storage conditions 15.4 Shipping and storage conditions Introduction The ET 200SP distributed I/O system exceeds requirements in terms of shipping and storage conditions according to IEC 61131-2. The following information applies to modules that are shipped and/or stored in their original packaging. Table 15- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules Type of condition Permissible range Free fall (in shipping package) 1 m Temperature From -40 C to +70 C Barometric pressure from 1140 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of -1000 to 3500 m) Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation Sinusoidal oscillations according to IEC 60068-2-6 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Impact acc. to IEC 60068-2-271) 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks 1) Not applicable to motor starters Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 295 Technical specifications 15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions Operating conditions The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations. The operating conditions are based on the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3: Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements) Class 3K3 (climatic requirements) You will find the permissible ambient conditions for the motor starter in the Technical data of the motor starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/21859/td). Mechanical environmental conditions The following table shows the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal vibrations. Table 15- 8 Mechanical environmental conditions Frequency band ET 200SP with IM 1556 DP HF, BusAdapters BA 2xFC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC and BA LC/FC 5 f 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude 8.4 f 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration 10 f 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude 60 f 1000 Hz 5 g constant acceleration ET 200SP with ET 200SP with BusAdapters BA 2xRJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA LC/RJ45 ET 200SP with digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5 A --- --- --- Distributed I/O system 296 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions Tests of mechanical environmental conditions The following table provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the tests of environmental mechanical conditions. Table 15- 9 Tests of mechanical environmental conditions Condition tested Test standard Comment Vibrations Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 (sinusoidal) Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 2) BA 2xRJ45, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA LC/RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA, digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A * 5 Hz f 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude * 8.4 Hz f 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration IM 155-6 DP HF, BA 2xFC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC, BA LC/FC * 10 Hz f 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude * 60 Hz f 1000 Hz, 5 g constant acceleration Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three vertically aligned axes Shock 2) Shock, tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: Half-sine Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three vertically aligned axes Repetitive shock 1) 2) Shock, tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: Half-sine Shock intensity: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration Direction of shock: 1000 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three vertically aligned axes 1) Not applicable in the case of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A 2) Not applicable for motor starters Climatic environmental conditions The table below shows the permissible climatic environmental conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system: Table 15- 10 Climatic environmental conditions Environmental conditions Temperature: horiz. mounting position: vertical mounting position: Permissible range 0 to 60 C 0 to 50 C Comments - Permitted temperature change 10 K/h - Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation Barometric pressure from 1140 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 2000 m Pollutant concentration ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 - SIPLUS products based on ET 200SP are offered for reliable operation under heavy to extreme operating conditions. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 297 Technical specifications 15.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage 15.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Insulation The insulation for the I/O modules is designed in accordance with the requirements of EN 61131-2:2007. The insulation for the motor starters is designed in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60947-1. Note In the case of modules with 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) supply voltage, galvanic isolations are tested with 707 V DC (type test). Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131 Pollution degree 2 Overvoltage category: II Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 60947 Pollution degree 2 Overvoltage category: III Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007 The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets protection class I and includes parts of protection classes II and III. The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for a functional earth FE. Recommendation: For a configuration immune to interference, the line for the ground should have a cross-section > 6 mm2. The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I. Distributed I/O system 298 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Technical specifications 15.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, which means: Protection against contact with standard probes Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm No protection against water Note Use a BU cover To meet the requirements of the degree of protection "IP20", fit a BU cover onto unfitted BaseUnits. To ensure touch safety, fit a cover onto the opening of the infeed bus contacts belonging to the last plugged-in motor starter BaseUnit. Rated voltage for operation The ET 200SP distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances listed in the following table. Note the supply voltage of each module when selecting the rated voltage. Table 15- 11 Rated voltage for operation Rated voltage Tolerance range 24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1) 18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2) 120 V AC 93 to 132 V AC 230 V AC 400 V AC 1) 15.7 187 to 264 V AC 3) 48 to 500 V AC Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according to IEC 60364-4-41 2) Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g. as in the case of three-phase bridge power rectification 3) Valid for the infeed bus of the modules and BaseUnits of motor starters only Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres See product information "Use of subassemblies/modules in Zone 2 Hazardous Area" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19692172). Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 299 Dimension drawings A.1 A Shield connector Dimensional diagram of the shield connector Figure A-1 A.2 Dimensional diagram of the shield connector Labeling strip Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (roll) Figure A-2 Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (roll) Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (DIN A4 sheet) The product information for the labeling strips (DIN A4 sheets) is available for download on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Product/6ES7193-6LA100AA0). Distributed I/O system 300 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Dimension drawings A.3 Reference identification labels A.3 Reference identification labels Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet Figure A-3 Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 301 B Accessories/spare parts Accessories for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Table B- 1 Accessories, general Accessories, general Packing unit Article number Cover for the BusAdapter interface 5 units 6ES7591-3AA00-0AA0 PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector 1 unit 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0 Server module (spare part) 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0 BU cover * 15 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0 * 20 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0 10 units 6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0 24 V DC connector (spare part) Shield connection for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield 5 units terminals) 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0 Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0 10 units Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules) * 1 unit Roll, light gray labeling strips (with a total of 500 strips), film, for labeling with thermal transfer roll printer 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0 * Roll, yellow labeling strips (with a total of 500 strips), film, for labeling with thermal transfer roll printer 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0 * DIN A4 sheets, light gray labeling strips (with a total of 1000 labels), paper, perforated, for labeling with laser printer 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0 * DIN A4 sheets, yellow labeling strips (with a total of 1000 labels), paper, perforated, for labeling with laser printer 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0 Electronic coding element (type H) (spare part) 5 units 6ES7193-6EH00-1AA0 Electronic coding element (type F, for fail-safe modules) (spare part) 5 units 6ES7193-6EF00-1AA0 Mounting rails, tinned steel strip * Length: 483 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA11 * Length: 530 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA21 * Length: 830 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA31 * Length: 2000 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA41 Distributed I/O system 302 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Accessories/spare parts Table B- 2 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide Packing unit Article number 16 process terminals (see I/O module manual) * Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 10 units 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC01 10 units 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC01 50 units 6ES7193-6CP01-4MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC02 10 units 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC02 50 units 6ES7193-6CP02-4MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), gray (terminals 13 to 16); color code CC03 10 units 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), blue (terminals 13 to 16); color code CC04 10 units 6ES7193-6CP04-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 and 14), blue (terminals 15 and 16) 10 units 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0 10 AUX terminals (for BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B) * Yellow-green (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC71 10 units 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0 * Red (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC72 10 units 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0 * Blue (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC73 10 units 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0 * Blue (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC73 50 units 6ES7193-6CP73-4AA0 10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T) * Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals 1 to 5C); color code CC74 10 units 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0 10 units 6ES7193-6CP62-2MA0 10 units 6ES7193-6CP63-2MA0 16 potential terminals (for PotDis-BU-P1/x-R) * Red (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC62 16 potential terminals (for PotDis-BU-P2/x-B) * Blue (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC63 18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-P1-R) * Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 10 units 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-P2-B) * Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 10 units 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 10 units 6ES7193-6CP11-2MT0 18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-BR-W) * Yellow/green (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC11 Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 303 Accessories/spare parts Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide Packing unit Article number * Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 10 units 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0 * Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 10 units 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-n.c.-G) * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Table B- 3 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 20 mm wide Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), Packing unit 20 mm wide Article number 12 process terminals (see I/O module manual) * Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 12); color code CC41 10 units 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 and 10), blue (terminals 11 and 12), color code CC42 10 units 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0 6 process terminals (see I/O module manual) * Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), blue (terminal 6); color code CC51 10 units 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0 * Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals 3 and 4), blue (terminal 6); color code CC52 10 units 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0 4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B) * Yellow-green (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC81 10 units 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0 * Red (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC82 10 units 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0 * Blue (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC83 10 units 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0 2 AUX terminals (for BU20-P6+A2+4D, BU20-P6+A2+4B) * Yellow-green (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC84 10 units 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0 * Red (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC85 10 units 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0 * Blue (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC86 10 units 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0 Capacity Packing unit Article number 4 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LCxx-0AA0 12 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LExx-0AA0 24 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LFxx-0AA0 256 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LL02-0AA0 Table B- 4 SIMATIC memory card accessories Distributed I/O system 304 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Accessories/spare parts Capacity Packing unit Article number 2 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LPxx-0AA0 32 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LTxx-0AA0 Short designation Packing unit Article number 3DI/LC module (connecting terminal) 1 unit 3RK1908-1AA00-0BP0 Fan 1 unit 3RW4928-8VB00 BU cover 30 1 unit 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0 Touch protection cover for the infeed bus 10 units 3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0 Mechanical bracket for BaseUnit 5 units 3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0 Table B- 5 Accessories for motor starters Components for lightning protection (lightning protection zone transition 0B to 1, 1 to 2 and 2 to 3) You must install overvoltage protection devices in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for lightning protection purposes. You can find more information in the Designing interferencefree controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual. Online catalog Additional article numbers for ET 200SP can be found on the Internet (http://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and online ordering system. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 305 Accessories/spare parts B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules Overvoltage arrestors for fail-safe modules Note This section only lists the overvoltage arrestors that may be used to protect the fail-safe modules. Be sure to observe the detailed information on lightning protection and overvoltage protection of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in Electromagnetic compatibility of failsafe modules (Page 292). Components for overvoltage protection of fail-safe modules (lightning protection zone transition 0B to 1) The overvoltage arrestors are only required for unshielded cables. The Configuring interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) Function Manual lists the overvoltage arrestors which you may use for fail-safe modules. Distributed I/O system 306 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH C Calculating the leakage resistance Introduction If you wish to protect the ET 200SP using a ground-fault detector or a residual current circuit breaker, then you need the leakage resistance to select the correct safety components. Ohmic resistance When determining the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP, you must take into account the ohmic resistance from the RC combination of the module in question: Table C- 1 Ohmic resistance Module Ohmic resistance from RC network CPU/interface module 10 M (5 %) BaseUnit BU15...D 10 M (5 %) BaseUnit BU30-MSx 10 M (5 %) Formula You can calculate the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP using the following formula if you protect all of the modules listed above with one ground-fault detector: RET200SP = Rmodule / N RET200SP = Leakage resistance of the ET 200SP Rmodule = Leakage resistance of a module N = Number of BaseUnits BU15...D and interface module in the ET 200SP RCPU/IM = RBU15...D = RModule = 9.5 M RCPU/IM = Leakage resistance of CP/interface module RBU15...D = Leakage resistance of the BaseUnit BU15...D If you protect the modules listed above within an ET 200SP with several ground-fault detectors, you must determine the leakage resistance for each individual ground-fault detector. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 307 Calculating the leakage resistance Example The structure of an ET 200SP system consists of an IM 155-6 PN ST, two BaseUnits BU15...D and various input and output modules. The entire ET 200SP is protected with one ground-fault detector: Figure C-1 Calculation example for leakage resistance Distributed I/O system 308 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Safety-relevant symbols D.1 D Safety-related symbols for devices without Ex protection The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located in your SIMATIC device, its packaging or the accompanying documentation. Symbol Meaning General warning sign Caution/Notice You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains information about the potential risks and enable you to recognize risks and implement countermeasures. Read the information provided by the product documentation. ISO 7010 M002 Ensure the device is only installed by electrically skilled person. IEC 60417 No. 6182 Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected minimum and maximum ambient temperature. Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC regulations. Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dangerous. ANSI Z535.2 Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV. IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment" Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for indoor use. Note that an enclosure is required for installing the device. Enclosures are considered: * Standing control cabinet * Serial control cabinet * Terminal boxes * Wall enclosure Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 309 Safety-relevant symbols D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located in your SIMATIC device, its packaging or the accompanying documentation. Symbol Meaning The assigned safety symbols apply to devices with Ex approval. You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains information about the potential risks and enable you to recognize risks and implement countermeasures. Read the information provided by the product documentation. ISO 7010 M002 Ensure the device is only installed by electrically skilled person. IEC 60417 No. 6182 Observe the mechanical rating of the device. Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected minimum and maximum ambient temperature. Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC regulations. When the device is under voltage, note that it may not be installed or removed, or plugged or pulled. Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dangerous. ANSI Z535.2 Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV. IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment" Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for indoor use. Distributed I/O system 310 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Safety-relevant symbols D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection Symbol Meaning For Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, be aware that the device may only be used when it is installed in an enclosure with a degree of protection IP54. For Zone 22 potentially explosive atmospheres, be aware that the device may only be used when it is installed in an enclosure with a degree of protection IP6x. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 311 Glossary 1oo1 evaluation Type of sensor evaluation - in the case of the 1oo1 evaluation, there is one sensor with a 1-channel connection to the F module. 1oo2 evaluation Type of sensor evaluation - in the case of 1oo2 evaluation , two input channels are assigned one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors. The input signals are compared internally for equivalence or nonequivalence. Acknowledgment time During the acknowledgment time, the F-I/O acknowledge the sign of life specified by the F-CPU. The acknowledgment time is included in the calculation of the monitoring time and response time of the overall fail-safe system. Actuator Actuators are, for example, power relays or contactors for switching on load devices or load devices themselves (e.g. directly controlled solenoid valves). Automation system Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process sequences of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions depending on the automation task. AUX bus Self-assembling bus, can be used individually, for example, as a protective conductor bus or for additional required voltage. Availability Availability is the probability that a system is functional at a specific point in time. Availability can be increased by redundancy, e.g., by using multiple -> sensors at thesame measuring point. Distributed I/O system 312 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary AWG (American Wire Gauge) A standard measure for conductors used in the USA, which is assigned to a specific crosssectional area of a conductor or wire. Each AWG number represents a jump of 26% in the cross-sectional area. The thicker the wire, the smaller the AWG number. BaseUnit BaseUnits realize the electrical and mechanical connection of the I/O modules with the interface module and the server module. The inserted I/O module determines the signals at the terminals of the BaseUnits. Depending on the selected BaseUnit, only certain terminals are available. BaseUnit, dark-colored Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the left adjacent module to the subsequent modules on the right. BaseUnit, light-colored Inserted as first BaseUnit and opens a new potential group with electrical isolation. The power and AUX buses are separate from the adjacent module on the left. It feeds the supply voltage. Baud rate Speed at which data is transferred, indicating the number of transmitted bits per second (baud rate = bit rate). BU cover Cover for unused slots on the BaseUnit or placeholder for planned I/O modules. For a future expansion, the reference identification label of the planned I/O module can be kept here. Bus Joint transmission path to which all participants of a fieldbus system are connected; has two defined ends. BusAdapter Enables free selection of the connection technology for the PROFINET fieldbus. Channel fault Channel-specific fault, such as a wire break or short circuit. In channel-specific passivation, the affected channel is either automatically reintegrated or the fail-safe module must be removed and reinserted after the fault has been eliminated. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 313 Glossary Channel group The channels of a module are grouped together in a channel group. Certain parameters in STEP 7 can only be assigned to channel groups, rather than to individual channels. Channel number Channel numbers are used to uniquely identify the inputs and outputs of a module and to assign channel-specific diagnostic messages. Channel-specific passivation With this type of passivation, only the affected channel is passivated in the event of a channel fault. In the event of a module fault, all channels of the fail-safe module are passivated. Configuration Systematic arrangement of the individual modules. Configuration control Function that enables a flexible adjustment of the actual configuration based on a configured maximum configuration via the user program. Input, output and diagnostics addresses remain unchanged. Connecting to common potential Configuring a new potential group for which a new infeed is set up for the supply voltage. Connection plug Physical connection between device and cable. CPU The CPU uses the integrated system power supply to supply the electronics of the modules via the backplane bus. The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user program. The user program is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the work memory of the CPU. The PROFINET interfaces of the CPU establish an Industrial Ethernet connection. The CPUs of the ET 200SP support operation as an IO controller, Idevice or standalone CPU. CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Distributed I/O system 314 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary CRC signature The validity of the process values in the safety frame, the accuracy of the assigned address references, and the safety-related parameters are validated by means of the CRC signature in the safety frame. Crimping Procedure in which two components, e.g. end sleeve and cable, are connected with each other by plastic strain. Dark period Dark periods occur during shutdown tests and complete bit pattern tests. The fail-safe output module switches test-related zero signals to the active output. This output is then briefly disabled (= dark period). An adequate carrier actuator will not respond to this and will remain activated. Derating Derating allows devices to be used even in harsh operating conditions by selectively restricting the output capacity. In the case of motor starters, this usually refers to operation at high ambient temperatures. Device name Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name. An IO device is delivered without a device name. An IO device can only be addressed by the IO controller after it has been assigned a device name via the PG/PC or via the topology, e.g. for the transfer of configuration data (such as IP address) during startup or for the exchange of user data during cyclic operation. Diagnostics Monitoring functions for the recognition, localization, classification, display and further evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This increases the availability of plants because commissioning times and downtimes are reduced. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 315 Glossary Discrepancy analysis The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non-equivalence is used for fail-safe applications to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same levels). A check is performed to determine whether the difference (for nonequivalence testing: the same levels) has disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this means that a discrepancy error exists. The discrepancy analysis compares the two input signals of the 1oo2 sensor evaluation in the fail-safe input module. Discrepancy time Configurable time for the discrepancy analysis. If the discrepancy time is set too high, the fault detection time and fault reaction time are extended unnecessarily. If the discrepancy time is set too low, availability is decreased unnecessarily since a discrepancy error is detected when, in reality, no error exists. Distributed I/O system System with input and output modules that are configured on a distributed basis, far away from the CPU controlling them. DP Distributed I/O system Earth Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point. Equipotential bonding Electrical connection (potential equalization conductor) that brings the bodies of electrical equipment and other conductive bodies to the same or almost the same potential, in order to prevent disruptive or dangerous voltages between these bodies. Explosion protection Requirement for the use of electrical equipment in hazardous areas in accordance with DIN EN 60079-0. Fail-safe modules ET 200SP modules with integrated safety functions that can be used for safety-related operation (safety mode). Distributed I/O system 316 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary Fail-safe systems Fail-safe systems (F-systems) remain in a safe state or immediately assume another safe state as soon as particular failures occur. Fault reaction time The maximum fault reaction time of an F-system defines the interval between the occurrence of any fault and a safe reaction at all affected fail-safe outputs. For F-system overall: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the occurrence of any fault in any F-I/O and a safe response at the relevant fail-safe output. For digital inputs: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction on the backplane bus. For digital outputs: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the digital output. Fault tolerance time The fault tolerance time of a process is the time a process can be left unattended without risk to life and limb of the operating personnel, or damage to the environment. Any type of F-system control is tolerated within this fault tolerance time, i.e. the F-system can control its processes incorrectly or even not at all. The fault tolerance time depends on the type of process and must be determined on a case-by-case basis. F-CPU An F-CPU is a central processing unit with fail-safe capability that is permitted for use in SIMATIC Safety. A standard user program can also be run on the F-CPU. F-I/O Collective name for fail-safe inputs and outputs available in SIMATIC S7 for integration into the SIMATIC Safety F-system. Available F-I/O modules: Fail-safe I/O module for ET 200eco Fail-safe signal modules S7-300 (F-SMs) Fail-safe modules for ET 200S Fail-safe modules for ET 200SP Fail-safe modules for ET 200MP Fail-safe DP standard slaves Fail-safe PA field devices Fail-safe IO devices Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 317 Glossary Firmware update Upgrade of firmware for modules (interface modules, I/O modules etc.), e.g. after function extensions, to the newest firmware version (update). F-monitoring time PROFIsafe monitoring time F-Systems fail-safe systems Functional ground Functional ground is a low-impedance current path between electric circuits and ground. It is not designed as a safety measure but instead, for example, as a measure to improve interference immunity. Ground All interconnected, inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous contact voltage, even in the event of a fault. Grounding Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode by means of a grounding system. GSD file As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET or PROFIBUS device that are necessary for its configuration in XML format. I/O modules All modules, with the exception of the motor starters, that can be operated with a CPU or an interface module. Identification data Information that is saved in modules and that supports the user in checking the plant configuration and locating hardware changes. Infeed system The infeed system with the terminals L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE enables several SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters to be supplied using a single infeed terminal. Distributed I/O system 318 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary Interface module Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O system via a fieldbus to the CPU (IO controller) and prepares the data for and from I/O modules. IO-Link IO-Link is a point-to-point connection to conventional and intelligent sensors/actuators by unshielded standard cables in proven 3-wire technology. IO-Link is downward compatible to all DI/DQ sensors/actuators. Switching status channel and data channel are designed in proven 24 V DC technology. Line All the modules attached to a mounting rail. Load current supply Supply of modules like the interface module, power supply modules, I/O modules, and (if applicable) sensors and actuators. MAC address Device identification unique worldwide, which is already assigned to each PROFINET device in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes for the device ID (serial number). The MAC address is usually legible on the device. Main switch Every industrial machine that falls under the scope of DIN EN 60204 Part 1 (VDE 0113, Part 1) must be equipped with a main switch that disconnects all electrical equipment from the network while cleaning, maintenance, and repair work is being carried out, as well as during long periods of downtime. Usually a switch which can be operated by hand that is stipulated for electrical or mechanical prevention of a hazard. The main switch can also function as an EMERGENCY-OFF device. The main switch must meet the following requirements: Externally accessible mechanical rotary lock. Only one OFF position and one ON position with allocated stops. Two positions labeled "0" and "I". 4th lockable OFF position. Cover for the power supply terminals to protect against accidental contact. The switching capacity must correspond to AC-23 for motor switches and AC-22 for loadbreak switches (utilization category). Switch position displayed automatically. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 319 Glossary Module fault Module faults can be external faults (e.g. missing load voltage) or internal faults (e.g. processor failure). Internal faults always require module replacement. Monitoring time PROFIsafe monitoring time Motor starter Motor starter is the generic term for direct-on-line and reversing starters. M-switch Each fail-safe digital output of ET 200SP F-modules consists of a P-switch DO-Px (current sourcing) and an M-switch DO-Mx (current sinking). The load is connected between the Pswitch and M-switch. The two switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the load. Node Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. IO device via PROFINET IO. Nonequivalent sensor A nonequivalent sensor is a two-way switch that is connected to two inputs of an F-I/O (via 2 channels) in fail-safe systems (for 1oo2 evaluation of sensor signals). Overload release Overcurrent release that provides protection against overload. Parameter assignment Parameter assignment is the transfer of parameters from the IO controller/DP master to the IO device/DP slave. Passivation If an F-I/O module detects a fault it switches either the affected channel or all channels to a safe state, i.e. the channels of this F-I/O module are passivated. The F-I/O module signals the detected faults to the F-CPU. When passivating channels at F-I/O with inputs, the F-System provides fail-safe values for the safety program instead of the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs. When passivating channels at F-I/O with outputs, the F-system returns fail-safe values (0) to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program. Distributed I/O system 320 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Performance Level Performance Level (PL) in accordance with ISO 13849-1 or EN ISO 13849-1 Potential group Group of I/O modules that are jointly supplied with voltage. Prewiring Wiring the electrics on a mounting rail before the I/O modules are connected. Process image (I/O) The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the input modules are transmitted to the process image input. At the end of the cyclic program, the process image output is transmitted as signal state to the output modules. Product version (ES) = Functional status (FS) The product version or functional status provides information on the hardware version of the module. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, process and fieldbus standard that is specified in IEC 61158 Type 3. It specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system. PROFIBUS is available with the following protocols: DP (= Distributed Periphery), FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation) or TF (= Technological Functions). PROFINET PROcess FIeld NETwork, open industrial Ethernet standard which continues PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation and engineering model by PROFIBUS International e.V., defined as an automation standard. PROFINET IO controller Device used to address connected I/O devices (e.g. distributed I/O systems). This means: The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned I/O devices. The IO controller often corresponds to the CPU in which the automation program is running. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 321 Glossary PROFINET IO Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the scope of PROFINET. PROFINET IO device Distributed field device that can be assigned to one or more IO controllers (e.g. distributed I/O system, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches). PROFIsafe Safety-oriented PROFINET I/O bus profile for communication between the safety program and the F-I/O module in a fail-safe system. PROFIsafe address The PROFIsafe address (code name according to IEC 61784-3-3: 2010) is used to protect standard addressing mechanisms such as IP addresses. The PROFIsafe address consists of the F-source address and F-destination address. Every fail-safe module therefore has two address portions, the F-source address and the F-destination address. The PROFIsafe address must be configured in the hardware and network editor. PROFIsafe monitoring time Monitoring time for safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O Proof-test interval Period after which a component must be forced to fail-safe state, that is, it is either replaced with an unused component, or is proven faultless. Provider-Consumer principle Principle of data communication on the PROFINET IO: in contrast to PROFIBUS, both parties are independent providers when sending data. P-switch M-switch Push-in terminal Push-in connections are a form of spring-loaded terminals allowing wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors equipped with end sleeves. Distributed I/O system 322 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary Redundancy, availability-enhancing Multiple instances of components with the objective of maintaining component functionality in the event of hardware faults. Redundancy, safety-enhancing Multiple availability of components with the aim of exposing hardware faults based on comparison; such as 1oo2 evaluation in fail-safe modules. Reference identification In accordance with EN 81346, a specific object is clearly referenced in relation to the system to whose components the object belongs. Thus, unique identification of the modules in the entire system is possible. Reference potential Potential from which the voltages of the participating circuits are considered and/or measured. Reintegration After the elimination of a fault, it is necessary to ensure the reintegration (depassivation) of the F-I/O. Reintegration (switchover from fail-safe values to process values) occurs either automatically or only after a user acknowledgment in the safety program. In the case of a fail-safe input module, the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs are made available to thesafety program again after reintegration. In the case of a fail-safe output module, the fail-safe system transfers the output values in the safety program to the fail-safe outputs again. RIOforFA-Safety Remote IO for Factory Automation with PROFIsafe; Profile for F-I/O RoHS EC Directive 2011/65/EU concerning the restriction of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic devices regulates the use of hazardous substances in devices and components. The English abbreviation RoHS is used to refer to this directive: (Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances), as well as all related measures for implementing it into national legislation. Safe state The basic principle of the safety concept in F-systems is the existence of a safe state for all process variables. For the digital F-I/O, for example, the safe state is the value "0". Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 323 Glossary Safety class Safety level (Safety Integrity Level) SIL according to IEC 61508:2010. The higher the Safety Integrity Level, the more rigid the measures for prevention of systematic faults and for management of systematic faults and hardware failures. The fail-safe modules support operation in safety mode up to safety class SIL3. Safety frame In safety mode, data are transferred between the F-CPU and F-I/O in a safety frame. Safety function A mechanism integrated in the F-CPU and F-I/O that enables their use in the fail-safe system SIMATIC Safety. According to IEC 61508:2010: A safety function is implemented by a safety system in order to maintain or force a system safe state in the event of a specific fault. Safety mode Operating mode of F-I/O that enables safety-related communication via safety frames. ET 200SP fail-safe modules can only used in safety mode. Safety program Safety-related user program Safety-related communication Communication used to exchange fail-safe data. Self-assembling voltage buses Three internal, self-assembling buses (P1, P2 and AUX) that supply the I/O modules with power. SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Sensor evaluation There are two types of sensor evaluation: 1oo1 evaluation - sensor signal is read once 1oo2 evaluation - sensor signal is read in twice by the same F-module and compared internally Distributed I/O system 324 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary Sensors Sensors are used for the accurate detection of routes, positions, velocities, rotational speeds, masses, etc. in the form of digital and analog signals. Server module The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP. Service life Period of time for which the switching device will work properly under normal operating conditions. This is specified as the number of operating cycles, the electrical durability (e.g. contact erosion), and the mechanical durability (e.g. operating cycles without load). SIL (Safety Integrity Level) Discrete level (one of three possibilities) for defining safety integrity specifications of safetyrelated control functions. Safety integrity level 3 is the highest possible level, level 1 the lowest. Slave station A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master. SNMP SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for diagnosing and also configuring the Ethernet infrastructure. In the office area and in automation technology, devices support a wide range of manufacturers on the Ethernet SNMP. SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applications with PROFINET. Standard mode Operating mode of F-I/O in which standard communication is possible by means of safety frames, but not safety-related communication. Fail-safe ET 200SP modules can only be operated in safety mode. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 325 Glossary Switch PROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passive cable - the bus. By contrast, Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each communication node is interconnected directly with precisely one other communication node. If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication node is connected to the port of an active network component - the switch. Other communications devices (including switches) can then be connected to the other ports of the switch. The connection between a communication node and the switch remains a point-to-point connection. The task of a switch is thus to regenerate and distribute received signals. The switch "learns" the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches and only forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or switch. A switch has a specific number of connections (ports). You connect at most one PROFINET device or additional switch to each port. Technology object A technology object supports you in the configuration and commissioning of a technological function. The properties of real objects are represented by the technology objects in the controller. Real objects can be, for example, controlled systems or drives. The technology object includes all data of the real object that is required for its open-loop or closed-loop control, and it signals the status information. TIA Portal Totally Integrated Automation Portal The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation. The software optimizes all operating, machine and process sequences. Total current Sum of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module. TWIN end sleeve End sleeve for two cables Type of coordination 1 The motor starter may be non-operational after a short circuit has been cleared. Damage to the motor starter is permissible. Distributed I/O system 326 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Glossary Types of coordination The IEC 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) standard distinguishes between two types of coordination referred to as coordination type "1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably and safely with both types of coordination; the only differences are in the extent of the damage sustained by the device following a short circuit. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 327 Index 2 24 V DC supply, 88 3 3DI/LC module, 35, 123 Assembling, 124 Connections, 111 Disassembling, 126 Functions, 111 3-wire connection, 61 A Accessible devices Firmware update, 261 Accessories, 302 Addressing, 139 Basics, 139 Application in industrial environments, 288 in mixed areas, 288 in residential areas, 288 Approvals, 282 Assembling, 77 3DI/LC module, 123 BU cover, 86 Infeed bus, 81 Assembly/disassembly position, 122 AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus), 53 B BaseUnit, 30, 36 Assembling, 77, 121 Disassembling, 254 Modules with temperature measurement, 41 Modules without temperature measurement, 40 Mounting, dismantling, 74 Potential group, 50, 55 Replacing the terminal box, 255 Types, 36 wiring, 102 Wiring, 107 Wiring rules, 99 BU cover Assembling, 86 Description, 32 Installation, 118 BusAdapter, 29 C Cable shield, 105 Changes Compared to previous version, 17 Changing type Coding element, 251 I/O module, 251 Climatic environmental conditions, 297 Color identification label, 128 Description, 34 Installing, 130 Commissioning, 199, 200, 207 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card, 213 Reset to factory settings, 268 Startup, 212 Components ET 200SP at a glance, 27 In accordance with DIN VDE regulation, 95 Configuration, 20 Basics, Error! Bookmark not defined. Electrical, 97 On grounded reference potential, 94 Configuration control, 172 Configuration example, 201, 203, 205, 207, 209, 211 Configuration software, 134 Configuring, 134 Properties of the CPUs, 139 Connecting Cable shield, 105 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module, 117 Control data record, 181 S7-1500, 179 CPU Backup/restore contents, 232 Reading out service data, 280 Reset to factory settings, 264 Synchronizing the time, 234 Distributed I/O system 328 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Index D G Degree of protection, 299 Dimensional diagram Labeling strip, 300 Reference identification label, 301 Shield connector, 300 Disassembling, 254 Dummy module mounting, 69 Grounding Configuration on grounded reference potential, 94 Graphical overview of ET 200SP, 96 E Electrical isolation, 97 Electrical relationships, 97 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 289 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility), 289 EMERGENCY STOP devices, 87 Environmental conditions Climatic, 297 Mechanical, 296 ET 200SP Area of application, 20 Commissioning, 199 Components, 27 Configuration example, 21, 24 Configuring, 134 Overall configuration, 96 Rules and regulations for operation, 87 Selecting a BaseUnit, 36 Short-circuit / overload protection, 95 Example ET 200SP configuration, 21, 24 Leakage resistance, 308 Potential group, configuration, 60 F Factory settings, 264 Fan, 35 Mounting, 120 FAQ Emergency address, 233 Removing a SIMATIC memory card, 242 Repairing the SIMATIC memory card, 243 Trace function, 279 Firmware update, 257 I I/O module, 31 Changing type, 251 Inserting or removing, 247 Installation, 118 replace, 253 Identification data, 225 Incoming supply, grounded, 94 Infeed bus Assembling, 82 Cover, 35 Infeed bus cover, 35 Installation BaseUnit, 74 BU cover, 118 I/O module, 118, 247 Installation position, 64 Interface module, 70 Minimum clearances, 66 Mounting rail, 65 Rules, 66 Server module, 80 Installation position, 64 Insulation, 298 Interface module, 28 Connecting the supply voltage, 113 Mounting, dismantling, 70 RESET, 268 Reset to factory settings, 268 Wiring rules, 99 Interference-free design, 68 L Labeling strip Dimensional diagram, 300 Labeling strips, 34 Installing, 132 Leakage resistance, 307 Lightning protection, 88 Line voltage, 88 Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 329 Index M Maintenance, 247 Changing type, 251 Firmware update, 257 Reading out service data, 280 Removal and insertion, 247 Replacing modules, 253 Replacing the terminal box, 255 Reset to factory settings, 264 Test functions, 273 Marking, 127 Color coding, factory setting, 127 Optional, 128 Maximum configuration, 48 Maximum cycle time, (Cycle monitoring time) Mechanical bracket, 35 Mounting, 84 Mechanical environmental conditions, 296 Memory reset Automatic, 222 Basics, 221 Manual, 222 Minimum clearances, 66 Motor starter, 31 Assembling, 77, 121 Disassembling, 121, 254 Mounting, 52, 66, 81, 86 Dummy module, 69 Mechanical bracket, 83 Mounting rail, 27, 65 N Network Time Protocol, 234 NTP procedure, 234 RUN, 217 Setting the startup behavior, 216 STARTUP, 215 STOP, 217 Operating position, 122 Option handling, (See configuration control) Overall configuration, 96 Overload behavior, 149 Overview, graphic Grounding the ET 200SP, 96 P Parking position/OFF, 122 Password provider, 166 PELV, 94 Potential distributor module, 30 Installing, 79 Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit, 45 Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock, 46 Potential group Configuration example, 60 Forming, 50, 55 Operating principle, graphical overview, 54, 55 Process image Inputs and outputs, 142 Process image partition Updating in the user program, 143 updating, automatically, 143 PROFINET IO, 199 Protection, 162, 167, 170 Access levels, 162 Behavior of a password-protected CPU, 165 Copy protection, 170 Know-how protection, 167 Protection against short circuit, 93 Protection class, 298, 298 O OBs, 146 Event source, 147 Events, 149 Overload behavior, 149 Priorities, 146 Priorities and runtime behavior, 148 Queue, 146 Start events, 146 Threshold mechanism, 150 Time error OB, 150 Operating modes Basics, 214 Operating mode transitions, 218 R Radio interference, 288, 291 Rated voltage, 299 Reading out service data, 280 Reassigning parameters, 224 Reference identification label, 34, 128 Dimensional diagram, 301 Installing, 133 Remove, 247 Replacement Coding element, 253 Distributed I/O system 330 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH Index I/O module, 253 Terminal box on the BaseUnit, 255 Replacing the terminal box, 255 RESET, 268 Reset to factory settings, 268 with RESET button, 268 S Safe electrical isolation, 94 Safety rules, 283 Server module, 33 Mounting, dismantling, 80 Shield connection Description, 34 Shield connector Dimensional diagram, 300 Shipping conditions, 295 Short-circuit and overload protection according to DIN VDE regulation, 95 Short-circuit protection, 93 SIMATIC ET 200SP, 19 SIMATIC Memory Card, 240, 245, 246 Basics, 240 Firmware card, 245 Possible applications, 246 Program card, 245 repairing, 243 Updating firmware, 246 Spare parts, 302 Standards, 282 Starting up the ET 200SP, 212 Storage conditions, 295 Supply of external components, 63 Supply voltage, 113 Connecting, 113 Potential group, 50, 55 Synchronizing the time, 234 V Video sequence, 109 W Wiring BaseUnit, 107 BaseUnits, 102 General rules for ET 200SP, 87 Rules, 99 Z Zone 2 potentially explosive atmosphere, 299 T Technical specifications Climatic environmental conditions, 297 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 289 Mechanical environmental conditions, 296 Shipping and storage conditions, 295 Standards and approvals, 282 Test functions, 273 Test voltage, 298 Distributed I/O system System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 331 Preface ___________________ Module overview of 1 ET 200SP SIMATIC ET 200SP Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information 01/2019 A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03799595-BB 01/2019 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2019. All rights reserved Preface Validity This product information supplements the documentation for the ET 200SP and takes precedence over our system manuals, function manuals and product manuals. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 3 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 2 Module overview of ET 200SP ................................................................................................................ 5 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules ............................................................ 5 1.2 CPUs ...................................................................................................................................... 12 1.3 Interface modules................................................................................................................... 13 1.4 BaseUnits ............................................................................................................................... 15 1.5 I/O modules ............................................................................................................................ 17 1.6 Motor starters ......................................................................................................................... 19 1.7 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 20 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation ............................................................................................ 25 2.1 System manual ...................................................................................................................... 25 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 BaseUnits manual .................................................................................................................. 27 Special consideration for BaseUnits with functional versions < 04........................................ 27 Terminal labeling of the PotDis-TB ........................................................................................ 28 2.3 CPU manuals ......................................................................................................................... 29 2.4 Interface module manuals ...................................................................................................... 30 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 I/O module manuals ............................................................................................................... 35 Digital module device manuals .............................................................................................. 37 Analog module device manuals ............................................................................................. 41 Communications module manuals ......................................................................................... 45 Device manuals Technology modules ................................................................................... 47 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 4 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 1 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules Contents This product information includes amendments and corrections to the documentation of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Which I/O modules / motor starters fit on a BaseUnit? The following table provides an overview of the I/O modules / motor starters that fit on the corresponding compatible BaseUnits: Table 1- 1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0 P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+ P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T 0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T for process terminals P16+A0+ 2B Digital I/O modules DI 16x24VDC ST CC00 DI 8x24VDC ST CC01 DI 8x24VDC HF CC01 DI 8x24VDC HS CC01 DI 8x24VDC BA CC01 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 5 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules I/O module BaseUnit BU15BU type A0 BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0 P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+ P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T 0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T for process terminals P16+A0+ 2B DI 8x24VDC SRC BA CC02 DI 8xNAMUR HF CC01 DI 4x120..230VAC ST CC41 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST CC00 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST CC02 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5 ST CC02 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF CC02 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA CC02 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA CC01 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 6 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules I/O module BaseUnit BU15BU type A0 BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0 P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+ P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T 0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T for process terminals P16+A0+ 2B DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST CC41 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF CC20 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF CC02 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS CC00 RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST CC00 RQ 4x120VDC230VAC/5A NO ST --- --- RQ 4x120VDC230VAC/5A NO MA ST --- --- Analog I/O modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4wire HF CC00 AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF CC00 AI 8xU BA CC02 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 7 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules I/O module BaseUnit BU15BU type A0 BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0 P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+ P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T 0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T for process terminals P16+A0+ 2B AI 2xU ST CC00 AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST CC05 AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST CC03 AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF CC05 AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS CC00 AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA CC01 AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST CC03 AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART CC03 AQ 2xU ST CC00 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 8 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules I/O module BaseUnit BU15BU type A0 BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0 P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+ P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T 0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T for process terminals P16+A0+ 2B AQ 2xI ST CC00 AQ 4xU/I ST CC00 AQ 2xU/I HS CC00 AQ 2xU/I HF CC00 AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST --- --- AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST --- --- AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF CC20 AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF CC20 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 9 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules I/O module BaseUnit BU15BU type A0 BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0 P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+ P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T 0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T for process terminals P16+A0+ 2B Fail-safe modules F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST CC52 F-DI 8x24VDC HF CC01 F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF CC02 F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF CC02 F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VA C/5A F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF CM 4xIO-Link CC42 CC00 Communication modules CC04 CM AS-i Master ST F-CM AS-i Safety ST CM PtP --- --- --- --- --- ----- Technology modules TM Count 1x24V --- TM PosInput 1 --- --- TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V --- --- --- --- --- --- TM Pulse 2x24V SIWAREX WP321 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 10 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules Table 1- 2 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and motor starters Motor starters BaseUnit BU30MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6 with infeed 24 V DC and 500 V AC with infeed 500 V AC with infeed 24 V DC without infeed with infeed 500 V AC and F-DI terminals without infeed with F-DI terminals Color-coded label for process terminals Direct starter DS 0.3 - 1 A HF * --- --- DS 0.9 - 3 A HF * --- --- DS 2.8 - 9 A HF * --- --- DS 4.0 - 12 A HF * --- --- Reversing starter RS 0.3 - 1 A HF * --- --- RS 0.9 - 3 A HF * --- --- RS 2.8 - 9 A HF * --- --- RS 4.0 - 12 A HF * Failsafe direct starter F-DS 0.3 - 1 A HF --- --- F-DS 0.9 - 3 A HF --- --- F-DS 2.8 - 9 A HF --- --- --- --- F-DS 4.0 - 12 A HF Fail-safe reversing starter F-RS 0.3 - 1 A HF --- --- F-RS 0.9 - 3 A HF --- --- F-RS 2.8 - 9 A HF --- --- F-RS 4.0 - 12 A HF --- --- * The F-DI terminals do not have a function in this combination. Table 1- 3 Combination possibilities between potential distributor BaseUnit and potential distributor terminal block Potential distributor terminal block Potential distributor BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P1/D-R PotDis-BU-P1/B-R PotDis-BU-P2/D-B PotDis-BU-P2/B-B PotDis-TB-P1-R PotDis-TB-P2-B PotDis-TB-n.c.-G PotDis-TB-BR-W Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 11 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.2 CPUs 1.2 CPUs CPUs CPU Number in pack Article number CPU 1510SP-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7510-1DJ0x-0AB0 CPU 1510SP F-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7510-1SJ0x-0AB0 CPU 1512SP-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7512-1DK0x-0AB0 CPU 1512SP F-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7512-1SK0x-0AB0 CPU 1515SP PC with server module Pack of 1 6ES7677-2AAxx-0xx0 Important differences between CPUs...PN Features CPU 1510SP-1 PN Bus connection PROFINET: PROFINET: BusAdapter (port 1, 2) BusAdapter (port 1, 2) * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware version 1.6) BA 2xFC (as of firmware version V1.6) RJ45, integrated (port 3) * CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN * BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware version 1.6) * BA 2xFC (as of firmware version V1.6) * BA 2xSCRJ (as of firmware V1.8)1 * BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as of firmware V1.8)1 * BA SCRJ/FC (as of firmware V1.8)1 * BA 2xLC (as of firmware V2.0)1 * BA LC/RJ45 (as of firmware V2.0)1 * BA LC/FC (as of firmware V2.0)1 RJ45, integrated (port 3) PROFIBUS: PROFIBUS DP connection socket via CM DP communication module Number of modules 64 Data work memory 750 KB 750 KB 1 MB Code work memory 100 KB 150 KB 200 KB Address space 1280 bytes/2560 Multi hot-swapping Can be used for safety applications (supports PROFIsafe V2.0) 1 MB 300 KB bytes2 Yes No Yes No Yes 1 Only with article numbers 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 and 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0 2 Only 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0, 6ES7512-1SJ01-0AB0, 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 and 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0 with FW version V2.0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 12 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.3 Interface modules Note The CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST communication modules are supported as of firmware V1.8 of the CPUs. Note the following additional requirements: CM AS-i Master ST: * Firmware version of the CM AS-i Master ST: V1.1 * STEP 7 (TIA Portal): V13 SP1 Update 4 or higher F-CM AS-i Safety ST * Firmware version of the CM AS-i Safety ST: V1.0 * STEP 7 (TIA Portal): as of V13 SP1 Update 4 and HSP0070 V3.0 1.3 Interface modules Interface modules Interface modules Number in pack Article number Interface module IM 155-6 PN BA Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 Interface module IM 155-6 PN ST * with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 and server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AA01-0BN0 * with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 Interface module IM 155-6 PN HS with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0 Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF with PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0) and server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 13 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.3 Interface modules Important differences between the interface modules Features Bus connection IM 155-6 PN IM 155-6 PN ST BA IM 155-6 PN/2 HF PROFINET: PROFINET: 2xRJ45, integrated BusAdapter * * IM 155-6 PN HS IM 155-6 DP HF PROFINET: PROFINET: PROFIBUS: BusAdapter BusAdapter PROFIBUS DP connection socket IM 155-6 PN/3 HF BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware V1.0) BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware V2.0) * BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware V4.0) BA 2xFC (as of firmware V2.0) * BA 2xFC (as of firmware V4.0) BA 2xSCRJ (as of firmware V2.2) * BA 2xSCRJ (as of firmware V4.0) * BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as of firmware V3.1) * BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as of firmware V4.0) * BA SCRJ/FC (as of * firmware V3.1) BA SCRJ/FC (as of firmware V4.0) * BA 2xLC (as of firmware V3.3) * BA 2xLC (as of firmware V4.0) * BA LC/RJ45 (as of firmware V3.3) * BA LC/RJ45 (as of firmware V4.0) * BA LC/FC (as of firmware V3.3) * BA LC/FC (as of firmware V4.0) * * BA 2xFC (as of firmware V1.0) * Number of modules 12 32 RESET button No Yes 64 30 32 IM 155-6 PN/2 HF: Yes Yes Not necessary IM 155-6 PN/3 HF: No Address space (I/O data) 32 bytes 798 bytes 1440 bytes 968 bytes 244 bytes Multi hotswapping No No Yes Yes Yes Table 1- 4 Station expansion via ET-Connection (mixed configuration ET 200SP/ET 200AL) Modules Number in pack Article number BU-Send Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0 BA-Send 1xFC Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 14 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.4 BaseUnits 1.4 BaseUnits BaseUnits Table 1- 5 BaseUnits for I/O modules BU type BaseUnits (short name) Color-coded labels* Packaging unit Article number A0 BU15-P16+A10+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0 A10: CC71 to CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2DA0 P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2DA0 P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BA0 A10: CC71 to CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2BA0 P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2BA0 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP40-0DA1 A0 BU15-P16+A0+2D A0 BU15-P16+A10+2B A0 BU15-P16+A0+2B A1 BU15-P16+A0+12D/T P16: CC00 to CC05 12D: CC74 A1 BU15-P16+A0+2D/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA1 A1 BU15-P16+A0+12B/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP40-0BA1 A1 BU15-P16+A0+2B/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA1 B0 BU20-P12+A4+0B A4: CC81 to CC83 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2BB0 B1 BU20-P12+A0+4B P12: CC41 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1 C0 BU20-P6+A2+4D P6: CC51, CC52 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1 12B: CC74 A2: CC84 to CC86 C1 BU20-P6+A2+4B P6: CC51 A2: CC84 to CC86 D0 BU20-P12+A0+0B --- Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0 F0 BU20-P8+A4+0B P8: CC42 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BF0 U0 BU20-P16+A0+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BU0 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2BU0 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DU0 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2DU0 U0 BU20-P16+A0+2B P16: CC00 to CC05 * not included in the scope of delivery of the BaseUnit Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 15 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.4 BaseUnits Table 1- 6 PotDis type BaseUnit PotDis Potential distributor (short name) Color coded labels Packaging unit Article number P1 PotDis-BU-P1/D-R CC62 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP1 P1 PotDis-BU-P1/B-R CC62 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP1 P2 PotDis-BU-P2/D-B CC63 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP2 P2 PotDis-BU-P2/B-B CC63 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP2 Table 1- 7 BaseUnit PotDis-TB Terminal block type Terminal block (short Color coded labels name) Packaging unit Article number P1 PotDis-TB-P1-R CC12 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP1 P2 PotDis-TB-P2-B CC13 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP2 N0 PotDis-TB-n.c.-G CC10 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TN0 P0 PotDis-TB-BR-W CC10 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP0 Table 1- 8 BaseUnits for motor starters BU type BaseUnits (short name) Color-coded labels Packaging unit Article number MS1 BU30-MS1 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0AP0 MS2 BU30-MS2 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0CP0 MS3 BU30-MS3 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0BP0 MS4 BU30-MS4 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0DP0 MS5 BU30-MS5 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0EP0 MS6 BU30-MS6 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0FP0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 16 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.5 I/O modules 1.5 I/O modules I/O modules Digital I/O modules Number in pack Article number DI 16x24VDC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BH01-2BA0 Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BF01-2BA0 Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 DI 8x24VDC ST DI 8x24VDC HF 10 units 6ES7131-6BF00-2CA0 DI 8x24VDC HS Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0 DI 8xNAMUR HF Pack of 1 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0 DI 8x24VDC BA Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BF01-2AA0 DI 8x24VDC SRC BA Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0 DI 4x120..230VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BH01-2BA0 Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BF01-2BA0 Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 10 units 6ES7132-6BF00-2CA0 Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BF01-2AA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BD20-2BA0 Pack of 1 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1 Pack of 10 6ES7132-6FD00-2BB1 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0 RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 Pack of 10 6ES7132-6HD01-2BB1 Pack of 1 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 17 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.5 I/O modules Analog I/O modules Number in pack Article number AI 8xU BA Pack of 1 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1 AI 2xU ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1 AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 Pack of 10 6ES7134-6HD01-2BA1 AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1 AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1 AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1 AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 10 units 6ES7134-6GD01-2BA1 Pack of 1 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Pack of 10 6ES7134-6JF00-2CA1 Pack of 1 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Pack of 10 6ES7134-6JD00-2CA1 AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Pack of 1 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1 AQ 2xU ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1 AQ 2xI ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1 AQ 4xU/I ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 AQ 2xU/I HF Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1 AQ 2xU/I HS Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1 AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 Fail-safe modules Number in pack Article number F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Pack of 1 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 F-DI 8x24VDC HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0 F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0 F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0 F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Pack of 1 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0 F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1 Communication modules Number in pack Article number CM 4xIO-Link Pack of 1 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0 CM AS-i Master ST Pack of 1 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1 F-CM AS-i Safety ST Pack of 1 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1 CM PtP Pack of 1 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 CM DP (for CPU) Pack of 1 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0 AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 18 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.6 Motor starters Technology modules Number in pack Article number TM Count 1x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 TM PosInput 1 Pack of 1 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 TM Pulse 2x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6DB00-0BB1 SIWAREX WP321 Pack of 1 7MH4138-6AA00-0BA0 Direct starter Packaging unit Article number DS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AB00-0CP0 DS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AC00-0CP0 DS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AD00-0CP0 DS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AE00-0CP0 Reversing starter Packaging unit Article number RS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 RS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BC00-0CP0 RS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BD00-0CP0 RS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BE00-0CP0 Failsafe direct starter Number in pack Article number F-DS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CB00-0CP0 F-DS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CC00-0CP0 F-DS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CD00-0CP0 F-DS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CE00-0CP0 Fail-safe reversing starter Number in pack Article number F-RS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DB00-0CP0 F-RS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DC00-0CP0 F-RS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DD00-0CP0 F-RS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DE00-0CP0 1.6 Motor starters Motor starters Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 19 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.7 Accessories 1.7 Accessories Accessories General accessories Packaging unit Article number BusAdapter * BA 2xRJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 * BA 2xFC (PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect Ethernet connection) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 * BA 2xSCRJ (PROFINET BusAdapter with POF/PCF fiber-optic cable connection) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 * BA SCRJ/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with fiber-optic cable FOC standard RJ45 connector) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 * BA SCRJ/FC (media converter, PROFINET bus adapter with fiber-optic cable FOC direct connection of bus cable) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 * BA 2xLC (PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic cable connection) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0 * BA LC/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0 * BA LC/FC (Media converter, PROFINET bus adapter with glass fiber-optic cable direct connection of bus cable) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0 PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector Pack of 1 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0 Server module (spare part) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0 BU cover * 15 mm wide Pack of 5 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0 * 20 mm wide Pack of 5 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0 Shield connector for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield terminals) Pack of 5 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0 Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0 Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules) * Roll, light gray (with a total of 500 labeling strips) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0 * Roll, yellow (with a total of 500 labeling strips) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0 * DIN A4 sheets, light gray (with a total of 1000 labeling strips) Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0 * DIN A4 sheets, yellow (with a total of 1000 labeling strips) Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0 Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip * Length: 483 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA11 * Length: 530 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA21 * Length: 830 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA31 * Length: 2000 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA41 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 20 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.7 Accessories Accessories, color identification labels (pushin terminals), 15 mm wide Packaging unit Article number 16 process terminals (you can find additional information in the I/O Module manual) * Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC01 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 16); color code CC02 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), gray (terminals 13 to 16); color code CC03 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), blue (terminals 13 to 16); color code CC04 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP04-2MA0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 and 14), blue (terminals 15 and 16); color code CC05 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0 10 AUX terminals (for BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B) * Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 10A); color code CC71 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0 * Red (terminals 1A to 10A); color code CC72 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0 * Blue (terminals 1A to 10A); color code CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0 10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T) * Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals 1 Pack of 10 to 5C); color code CC74 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 21 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.7 Accessories Accessories, color identification labels (pushin terminals), 20 mm wide Packaging unit Article number 12 process terminals (you can find additional information in the I/O Module manual) * Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 12); color code CC41 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 and 10), blue (terminals 11 and 12), color code CC42 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0 6 process terminals (you can find additional information in the I/O Module manual) * Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), blue (terminal 6); color code CC51 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0 * Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals 3 and 4), blue (terminal 6); color code CC52 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0 4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B) * Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 4A); color code CC81 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0 * Red (terminals 1A to 4A); color code CC82 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0 * Blue (terminals 1A to 4A); color code CC83 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0 2 AUX terminals (for BU20-P6+A2+4D, BU20-P6+A2+4B) * Yellow-green (terminals 1A and 2A); color code CC84 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0 * Red (terminals 1A and 2A); color code CC85 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0 * Blue (terminals 1A and 2A); color code CC86 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 22 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Module overview of ET 200SP 1.7 Accessories Accessories, color identification labels (pushin terminals) PotDis Packaging unit Article number PotDis-BU, 16 potential terminals * Red for PotDis-BU-P1/x-R (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC62 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP62-2MA0 * Blue for PotDis-BU-P2/x-B (terminals 1 to 16), color code CC63 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP63-2MA0 PotDis-TB-P1-R, 18 potential terminals * Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 PotDis-TB-P2-B, 18 potential terminals * Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 23 Module overview of ET 200SP 1.7 Accessories Accessories, color identification labels (pushin terminals) PotDis Packaging unit Article number PotDis-TB-BR-W, 18 potential terminals * Yellow/green (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC11 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP11-2MT0 * Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0 * Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0 * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0 PotDis-TB-n.c.-G, 18 potential terminals * Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Accessories for motor starter Packaging unit Article number 3DI / LC module Pack of 1 3RK1908-1AA00-0BP0 Fan Pack of 1 3RW4928-8VB00 Additional mechanical bracket for BaseUnit Pack of 1 3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0 Cover for an empty BaseUnit Pack of 1 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0 Touch protection cover for infeed bus Pack of 1 3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 24 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.1 2 System manual System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O system, Edition 02/2018 Section 10.2 Creating the control data record For the configuration control (option handling) you can plug the following communication modules: CM DP CP 1542SP-1 CP 1543SP-1 CP 1542SP-1 IRC BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC For the communication modules listed above special slot rules apply for use with the ET 200SP CPUs applies: If you plug the communication modules in the central configuration control as mentioned above (e.g. CM DP), then these modules cannot be influenced by the configuration control. You must therefore leave these modules in the slots preassigned in the station master and enter the slot numbers from the station master in the control data record ("Station option slot = Station master slot"). In a station option, all slots up to the module furthest from the CPU (see list above) must be present in the control data record. Section 13.6 Firmware update Modules with firmware version V0.0.0 do not support the "firmware update" function. Section 15.5 Climatic ambient conditions Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 25 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.1 System manual The following table shows the permissible climatic ambient conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system: Table 2- 1 Climatic ambient conditions Ambient conditions Permitted range Comments From 0 C to 60 C From 0 C to 50 C Information on extended temperature ranges are defined in the respective product data sheet. Permitted temperature change 10 K/h - Relative humidity From 10% to 95% Without condensation or icing. Air pressure From 1140 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of 1000 m to 2000 m Temperature: Horizontal mounting position: Vertical mounting position: Pollutant concentration ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 - SIPLUS products based on ET 200SP are offered for reliable operation under heavy to extreme operating conditions. Using the distributed IO system ET 200SP over 2000 m above sea level. The maximum "operating elevation in relation to sea level" depends on the module and is described in the technical specifications of the respective module. For altitudes > 2000 m the following constraints apply for the maximum specified ambient temperature: Restrictions of the maximum ambient temperature specified with regard to the operating altitude Operating altitude Derating factor for ambient temperature 1) -1000 m to 2000 m 1.0 2000 m to 3000 m 0.9 3000 m to 4000 m 0.8 4000 m to 5000 m 0.7 1) Base value for application of the derating factor is the maximum permissible ambient temperature in C for 2000 m. Note * Linear interpolation between altitudes is permissible. * The derating factors compensate for the decreasing cooling effect of air in higher altitudes due to lower density. * Note the mounting position of the respective module in the technical specifications. The basis is the standard IEC 61131-2:2017. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 26 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.2 BaseUnits manual Note Power supplies Make sure that the power supplies you use are rated for altitudes > 2000 m. Details about certification on the components of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP Fail-safe modules are certified for operation in safety mode up to the maximum altitude listed in the product data sheet (in accordance with IEC 61508-1: 2010, EN ISO 13849-1: 2015 and EN 62061:2005/ A2:2015). All other markings and certifications are currently based on an altitude of up to 2000 m. Effects on the availability of modules The higher cosmic radiation present during operation at altitudes above 2000 m will also start to have an effect on the failure rate of electronic components (the so-called soft error rate). In rare cases this can result in a transition of the module into the safe state, especially for fail-safe modules. However, the functional safety of the module is fully retained. 2.2 BaseUnits manual 2.2.1 Special consideration for BaseUnits with functional versions < 04 The following BaseUnits with functional version < 04 can only be used in potential groups with rated voltages 48 V DC or 24 V AC: BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+4B (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1). BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+0B (6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0). Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 27 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.2 BaseUnits manual 2.2.2 Terminal labeling of the PotDis-TB New specification of the terminal labeling New specification offers the following advantages: Unique terminal numbering per slot, even though the same reference identifier is used for the PotDis-BU and the PotDis-TB of a slot. Best possible readability Shortest possible designation to keep the work for conductor labeling as low as possible Compliant with ECAD rules Complies with the previous ET 200SP Logic You can continue using the color identification label CC00 Terminal labeling of the PotDis-TB B1 to B18. To save space the preceding character "B" is printed once at the top and may not be covered by the color identification labels. Terminal labeling of the PotDis-BU 1 to 16, the supply terminals P1 and P2. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 28 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.3 CPU manuals 2.3 CPU manuals Manual CPU 1512SP-1 PN, Edition 09/2016 Section 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU MT1/MT2 LEDs on BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC Table 2- 2 Status and error displays of MT1/MT2 LEDs LED Meaning Solution MT1/MT2* No error --- Off On * Fiber-optic error Causes and measures for the transmission route: * Maintenance demanded: Attenuation through the fiber-optic cable is so high that operation will soon no longer be possible. * Replacement of fiber-optic cable if damaged or aged * Correct installation of the PROFINET connector/PROFINET connections * Adherence to maximum length of 50 m for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable * Secure fit of the FOC connector. * Only available on BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ Section 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC The maximum length of the PCF-GI fiber-optic cable is 250 m. Device manuals CPU 1510SP-1 PN and CPU 1512SP-1 PN, Edition 09/2016 "LED" instruction You can read the status (e.g. "On" or "Off") of LEDs of a CPU or a module using the "LED" instruction. Note, however, that is not possible to read the LED status of the LINK RX/TX LEDs of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN and CPU 1512SP-1 PN. You can find additional information on the "LED" instruction in the STEP 7 online help. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 29 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.4 Interface module manuals 2.4 Interface module manuals Configuration notes on interface modules depending on the I/O modules Module IM IM 155-6 PN ST 1556 PN IM 155-6 PN HF IM IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.2 and higher 1556 IM 155-6 PN/3 HF V4.2 and higher BA IM 155-DP HF PN HS Firm- V3.2 V1.0 V1.1 V3.1 V3.3 V4.1 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V3.0 V3.1 V3.3 V4.2 V4.0 V1.0 V1.1 V3.0 V3.1 V4.2 ware version AI 2xI 2-/4wire ST V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- AI 2xU ST V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- AI 2xU/I 2-/4wire HF V2.0 AI 8xI 2-/4wire BA V1.0 --- --- --- --- AI 8xU BA V1.0 --- --- --- --- AI Energy Meter 400VA C ST V3.0 AI Energy Meter 480VA C ST V4.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- AI Energy Meter 480VA C/CT HF V6.0 AI Energy Meter 480VA C/RC HF V6.0 AQ 2xI ST V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- AQ 2xU ST V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- DI 8x24VD C BA V1.0 --- --- --- --- DI 8x24VD C HS V1.0 --- --- --- --- DI 8x24VD C HF V2.0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 30 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.4 Interface module manuals Module IM IM 155-6 PN ST 1556 PN IM 155-6 PN HF IM IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.2 and higher 1556 IM 155-6 PN/3 HF V4.2 and higher BA IM 155-DP HF PN HS Firm- V3.2 V1.0 V1.1 V3.1 V3.3 V4.1 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V3.0 V3.1 V3.3 V4.2 V4.0 V1.0 V1.1 V3.0 V3.1 V4.2 ware version DI 16x24V DC ST V1.1 DQ 4x24VD C/2A HS V1.0 --- --- --- --- DQ 4x24VD C/2A HF V2.0 DQ 4x24 ... 230VA C/2A HF V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- RQ 4x120V DC230VA C/5A NO MA ST V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- DQ 8x24VD C/0.5A HF V2.0 DQ 8x24VD C/0.5A BA V1.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- DQ 16x24V DC/0.5 A BA V0.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- DQ 16x24V DC/0.5 A ST V1.1 PotDisTB-P1R - --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- PotDisTB-P2B - --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- PotDisTB-n.c.G - --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- PotDisTB-BRW - --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- This combination is not permitted in the configuration Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 31 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.4 Interface module manuals Compilation error with IM 155-6 PN HF as of V2.1, IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0 Affected components: IM 155-6 PN HF as of V2.1 IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0 A compilation error can occur in isochronous mode of the ET200SP (IM 155-6 PN HF as of V2.1, IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0) with the setting "From OB" even if the settings are valid. The typical error message is: "The specific Ti value is invalid" or "The specific To value is invalid". But other error messages are possible as well. Solution: Upgrade the module description of the IM in this case. You can upgrade the module description of the IM in the network view or in the device view of the inspector window with the function "Update module description". The error can still occur with the current module description after the first compilation. If you have selected valid settings, the error will no longer occur with the subsequent compilation. IM 155-6 PN ST Manual, Edition 04/2017 Response times The response time of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of: Backplane bus cycle time Operating system processing Note Validity of the formula The following formula applies to the ET 200SP backplane bus. The formula does not apply to the ET-Connection bus. Backplane bus cycle time The backplane bus cycle time is the time the interface module requires to output new output data, read new input data and then copy the data to the PROFINET send buffer. The backplane bus cycle time is the result of the update time configured for the interface module as IO device and amounts to at least 1 ms. If the configured update time 1 ms, the backplane bus cycle time is equal to the configured update time. If the configured update time < 1 ms, the backplane bus cycle time is the product of an integer multiple of the configured update time. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 32 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.4 Interface module manuals Table 2- 3 Example calculation Configured update time Backplane bus cycle time (integer multiple, minimum 1 ms) 250 s 4 x 250 s = 1000 s 750 s 2 x 750 s = 1500 s 1000 s 1000 s 2000 s 2000 s Operating system processing time The operating system processing time is calculated based on the following formula: Operating system processing time output Operating system processing time_output[s] = 147 + 3.775 number_m + 0.275 bytes_out Operating system processing time input Operating system processing time_input[s] = 158.3 + 2.325 number_m + 0.325 bytes_in Explanation of the parameters: Number_m: Total number of all modules (incl. server module) Bytes_out: Sum of all output bytes Bytes_in: Sum of all input bytes Calculating the response time Response time output The response time output of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of: Backplane bus cycle time Operating system processing time_output. Response time input The response time input of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of: Backplane bus cycle time Operating system processing time_input. IM 155-6 PN HF manual, Edition 12/2015 Section 3.1 Pin assignment PROFINET interface X1 Port 2: If autonegotiation is disabled, the RJ-45 socket (X1 Port 2) has the switch assignment (MDI-X). Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 33 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.4 Interface module manuals IM 155-6 PN HS manual, Edition 09/2016 Section 3.1 Pin assignment PROFINET interface X1 Port 2: If autonegotiation is disabled, the RJ-45 socket (X1 Port 2) has the switch assignment (MDIX). Section 7 Technical specifications The PROFINET certification of network Class 3 is in preparation. Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC: The maximum length of the PCF-GI fiber-optic cable is 250 m. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 34 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals 2.5 I/O module manuals Configuration notes on the I/O modules (supplement to Product overview section in the manual) I/O module Digital input modules Article number Firmware version 6ES7131-6BH000BA0 V1.1.0 DI 8x24VDC BA 6ES7131-6BF000AA0 V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0229 V5.0 DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF000BA0 V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0229 V4.0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF000CA0 V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0229 V6.0 6ES7131-6BF000DA0 V1.0.2 Integrated as of HSP0229 V5.0 V14 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA 6ES7132-6BF000AA1 V1.0.0 HSP0162 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD200BA0 V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0230 V4.0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF000BA0 V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0230 V4.0 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH000BA0 V1.1.0 HSP0162 V13 SP1 or higher HSP0230 V6.0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF000CA0 V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0230 V6.0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 6ES7132-6BD200CA0 V2.0.0 6ES7132-6BD200DA0 V1.0.2 Integrated as of HSP0230 V5.0 V14 DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A 6ES7132-6FD00ST 0BB1 V1.0 as of V13 HSP0230 V3.0 DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A 6ES7132-6FD00HF 0CU0 V1.0.0 as of V14 with HSP0240 HSP 0230 as of V8.0 RQ 4x120VDC230VAC/5A NO ST 6ES7132-6HD000BB1 V1.0.0 HSP0128 HSP0232 V5.0 RQ 4x120VDC230VAC/5A NO MA ST 6ES7132-6MD000BB1 V1.0.0 HSP0162 HSP0232 V6.0 DI 16x24VDC ST DI 8x24VDC HS Digital output modules DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 V5.5 SP3 HSP0162 HSP0229 V6.0 V13 SP1 or higher V13 SP1 Update 4 or higher HSP0230 V6.0 V13 SP1 or higher V13 SP1 Update 4 or higher HSP0163 HSP0230 V6.0 V13 SP1 Update 4 or higher V13 SP1 or higher Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 35 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals I/O module Analog input modules Analog output modules Article number Firmware version STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 V5.5 SP3 AI 8xU BA 6ES7134-6FF000AA1 V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0227 V5.0 AI 2xU ST 6ES7134-6FB000BA1 V1.0.0 HSP0160 V13 SP1 or higher HSP0227 V6.0 AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 6ES71346GF000AA1 V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0227 V5.0 AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD000BA1 V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0227 V4.0 AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GB000BA1 V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0227 V6.0 AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD000BA1 V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0227 V4.0 AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6HB000CA1 V2.0.0 HSP0161 HSP0227 V6.0 V13 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP4 HF7 or higher AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS 6ES7134-6HB000DA1 V2.0.1 Integrated as of HSP0227 V5.0 V14 AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST 6ES7134-6PA010BD0 V3.0.0 V13 SP1 Update 4 HSP0159 HSP0227 V6.0 AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST 6ES7134-6PA200BD0 V4.0.0 V13 SP1 Update 4 HSP0159 HSP0227 V6.0 AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF 6ES7134-6PA000CU0 V6.0.0 V15 or higher with HSP0253 V5.5 SP3 or higher AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF 6ES7134-6PA200CU0 V6.0.0 V15 or higher with HSP0253 V5.5 SP3 or higher AQ 2xU ST 6ES7135-6FB000BA1 V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0228 V6.0 6ES7135-6GB000BA1 V1.0.0 AQ 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD000BA1 V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 AQ 2xU/I HS 6ES7135-6HB000DA1 V2.0.1 Integrated as of HSP0228 V5.0 V14 AQ 2xI ST V13 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP4 HF7 or higher V13 SP1 or higher HSP0160 HSP0228 V6.0 V13 SP1 or higher HSP0228 V4.0 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 36 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals 2.5.1 Digital module device manuals Manuals for I/O modules ST, BA When you have deactivated all channels of the I/O module, a diagnostics alarm is still generated in the case of a fault if the "Missing supply voltage L+" diagnostics is enabled. For the following I/O modules, this behavior is corrected as of firmware version > V1.1.0: DI 16x24VDC ST DI 8x24VDC ST DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST DQ 8x24VDC/0.5 A ST DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A ST Manuals for digital input modules with wire-break detection When wire-break detection is configured the module requires a low quiescent current at the digital input in case of "0" signal for the monitoring. The parallel connection of a resistor with 25 k to 45 k is required in order that this quiescent current can flow when encoder contacts are open. If wire-break detection is disabled in the configuration, no parallel connection of the resistor is required. If wire-break detection is configured, connect a resistor with 25 k to 45 k parallel to each mechanical encoder contact. Figure 2-1 Connect mechanical encoder contact with resistor Manuals DI 4x120...230VAC ST, Edition 02/2014; DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A ST, Edition 02/2014 Section 4.3 Address space If you have enabled value status, the module returns value status 1, regardless of the state of the connected supply voltage. Manual DI 8x24VDC HF, Edition 02/2014 Section 6.1 Technical specifications 24 V encoder supply - Output current, max.: 700 mA, total current Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 37 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals Manual DI 8xNAMUR HF, Edition 02/2014 Section A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record With data records 0 to 7, you can configure individual channels. When the interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (PROFIBUS DP) is used and data records 0 and 1 are read, the module returns the diagnostics data records and not the parameter data records of the DI 8xNAMUR HF. DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS manual, Edition 09/2016 Section 6.1 Technical specifications For this module, the marine approval for the bridge and deck zone is valid from a bus cycle time of at least 250 s. Manual DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module, Edition 03/2015 Section 3.1 Pin assignment; Supply voltage fuse protection The module has neither short-circuit protection nor overload protection. Protect the module from being destroyed by impermissible high current and install a fine fuse in the supply line. The maximum rated current of the fine fuse depends on the hardware function status (FS) of the module. HW functional status of the module Max. rated current of fuse Tripping characteristic FS 3 8A Quick response FS 4 10 A Quick response Section 6.1 Technical specifications, Switching frequency with inductive load The switching frequency of the outputs with inductive loads is max. 0.5 Hz. Higher switching frequency is possible in spite of this, and depends on the alternating voltage and switched inductors or the power factor of the electric motor used. Alternating voltage Condition Max. switching frequency 200 VAC or lower --- 10 Hz 200 VAC or higher * Power factor of the electric motor cos > 0.35 * Electric motor must only be turned off after startup (no jogging mode). 10 Hz Electric motors which are turned off during startup could create inductive shutoff voltages > 600 V , which could destroy the output electronics (Triac). Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 38 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST manual, Edition 07/2014 Section 4.2 Explanation of the parameters (as of functional version FS-05 of DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST) Diagnostics: Wire break: The module responds to a wire break as follows: Disabled: - Channel status LED lit green - Output voltage present at channel Enabled: - Channel status LED is off - Output is switched off - In addition, the wire break diagnostics is signaled and the DIAG LED on the module flashes red Note If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off. This prevents undefined load switching and supports detection of a faulty channel for module diagnostics. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 39 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF Manual, Edition 02/2018 Section 3.1.1. und 4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram The following figure shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type U0 (3-wire connection) in combination with a potential distribution module and terminal block. For a 3-wire connection you connect the protective earth (PE) of the actuator to the terminal block. Figure 2-2 3-wire connection of actuators with potential distribution module at the digital output module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST manual, Edition 03/2015 and RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST manual, Edition 12/2015 Section 3.1 Wiring and block diagram The AUX terminals of the self-assembling voltage bus can be used for the connection of the protective conductor (PE) or for voltages up to a maximum of 24 V DC. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 40 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals 2.5.2 Analog module device manuals Manuals for analog input modules Manual Edition AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 03/2015 AI 8xU BA 03/2015 AI 2xU ST 12/2015 AI 4xI 2-wire 4..20mA HART 11/2014 AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 12/2015 Section 5.2 Parameters Note Please note that the settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the cycle time of the module. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter. Manuals AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, Edition 12/2015; AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015 For configuration with STEP 7 V13 or higher (TIA Portal), real values between -7x1028 and +7x1028 can be input. This is true for configuration via HSP and via GSD file (PROFINET). For configuration with STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 as of HF7, configuration by means of GSD file (PROFINET) with REAL values of -1.175x1038 to +3.402x1038 is possible. With STEP 7 SP4 to HF6, parameter assignment of REAL values is not possible. Functions that require REAL values are not available in this case. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 41 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF, Edition 07/2018, and AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF, Edition 07/2018 device manuals Section A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module parameter block Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 42 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals Section D.5 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Table D7 - Total energy L1L2L3 (ID249 or F9h) Table 2- 4 Total energy L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Reserved BYTE - - - 3 Reserved BYTE - - - 4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 220 8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 221 11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 222 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 223 20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 24 Reserved BYTE - - - 25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 Manuals AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, Edition 12/2015; AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015 Requirements for the operation of the AI Energy Meter on slot 1 of the ET 200SP: Interface module / CPU AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) IM 155-6 PN BA (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for all IM 155-6 PN BA IM 155-6 PN ST (6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 PN ST from firmware version V3.1 and higher and functional status FS 07 IM 155-6 PN HF (6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 PN HF from firmware version V3.0 and higher and functional status FS 05 IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7 155-6BU00-0CN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 DP HF from firmware version V3.0 and higher CPU 1510SP-1 PN, CPU 1512SP-1 PN, CPU 1515SP PC Can be operated on slot 1 for all CPUs Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 43 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals In the manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015 In the device manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, the measured value ID and the associated measured variables for the complete performance are reversed. The correct association is shown in the table below: Measured value Measured variables ID Unit 34 Total active power L1L2L3 W 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 var 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 VA 65 Max. total active power W 66 Max. total reactive power var 67 Max. total apparent power VA 95 Min. total active power W 96 Min. total reactive power var 97 Min. total apparent power VA If you use the user-data mapping via data record DS 130, please note that the texts for the measured variables are also displayed incorrectly during configuration. During configuration of the measured variables for the total active, reactive, and apparent power, select the following texts: Desired measured variable for the user-data mapping Text to select during configuration Total active power L1L2L3 Total apparent power L1L2L3 (ID00034) Total reactive power L1L2L3 Total active power L1L2L3 (ID00035) Total apparent power L1L2L3 Total reactive power L1L2L3 (ID00036) Max. total active power Max. total apparent power (ID00065) Max. total reactive power Max. total active power (ID00066) Max. total apparent power Max. total reactive power (ID00067) Min. total active power Min. total apparent power (ID00095) Min. total reactive power Min. total active power (ID00096) Min. total apparent power Min. total reactive power (ID00097) The project configuration modification described above is no longer required if the following tools and GSD files are used: STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V14 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227 GSD file GSDML-V2.32-ET200SP-20160706 Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 44 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals Manual for AQ 2xU/I HF, Edition 02/2014 Section 3.1 Wiring and block diagram, pin assignment You can now also use the 3-wire connection in addition to the 2-wire and 4-wire connection for the analog module AQ 2xU/I HF. Pin assignment for AQ 2xU/I HF Voltage 2-wire connection Voltage 3-wire connection Voltage 4-wire connection Explanation * Qn+: Analog output voltage/current (positive), channel n * Qn-: Analog output voltage/current (negative), channel n * Sn+: Sensor line positive, channel n * Sn-: Sensor line negative, channel n The 3-wire connection and 4-wire connection make compensation for line impedance possible. The compensation is not possible for 2-wire connections due to the missing sensor cable. 2.5.3 Communications module manuals Communications module CM DP, Edition 12/2014 The communications module CM DP supports the PROFIsafe protocol V2. Exception: Fail-safe modules that only support PROFIsafe V1 mode. Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 45 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals Communications module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link, Edition 10/2017 Section Connecting, Wiring and block diagram Connection: 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode: 2-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals 3-wire connection PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color-coded labels with color code CC04 and CC71 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to the left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Cn Communication signal, DI, DQ 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) RES Reserved, must not be assigned M Ground USn Supply voltage (positive) Figure 2-3 Terminal assignment for 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system 46 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2.5 I/O module manuals 2.5.4 Device manuals Technology modules Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V, Edition 09/2015 Supplement in the section Preface Please read the information about Open Source Software on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740777). Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 47 PROFIenergy product information SIMATIC ET 200SP PROFIenergy product information Product Information 12/2015 A5E03871936-AH 1 ___________________ PROFIenergy Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03871936-AH 11/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2015. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 PROFIenergy .......................................................................................................................................... 4 1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 4 1.2 Principle of operation ................................................................................................................ 6 1.3 Parameter assignment .............................................................................................................. 9 1.4 PROFIenergy control data records .........................................................................................11 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.5.1 1.5.5.2 1.5.5.3 I/O modules .............................................................................................................................12 Digital input module ................................................................................................................12 Digital output modules ............................................................................................................14 Analog input modules .............................................................................................................15 Analog output module .............................................................................................................17 IO-Link Master ........................................................................................................................19 DI operating mode ..................................................................................................................19 DQ operating mode.................................................................................................................21 IO-Link operating mode ..........................................................................................................22 PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 3 PROFIenergy 1 Security information For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). 1.1 Introduction Introduction PROFIenergy is a data interface based on PROFINET for switching off consumers centrally and in a coordinated manner during idle times, regardless of the manufacturer or device type. The goal is that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required. The majority of the energy is saved by the process itself; the PROFINET device itself only contributes a few watts of saving potential. This operating mode is termed "pause" in PROFIenergy. The PROFINET devices are turned off by special commands in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller. No additional hardware is required; the PROFIenergy commands are directly interpreted by the PROFINET devices. The device which provides the PROFIenergy interface and supports the required control data record has the so-called PE-Entity, the access point for these control data records. This PE-Entity is located on the interface module as a substitute for I/O modules that do not have their own PE-Entity. I/O modules that have their own PE-Entity are always addressed directly. PROFIenergy product information 4 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.1 Introduction Requirements Interface module IM 155-6 PN ST Interface module IM 155-6 PN HF ET 200SP I/O modules which support PROFIenergy - Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) - Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) - Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) - Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) - Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) - Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0) - Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) - Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0) - Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) - Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0) - Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) - Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0) - Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0) - Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD000BB1) - Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) - Analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) - Analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1) - Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) - Analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1) - Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA0) - Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) - Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) - Analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) - Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) - Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) - Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) User program for sending the parameter data record, index 3 User program with the function blocks for controlling the PROFIenergy commands ("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816). PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 5 PROFIenergy 1.2 Principle of operation Procedure 1. Create the parameter data record, Index 3 in STEP 7 2. Transfer the parameter data record to the interface module with the instruction "WRREC" - SFB 53. 3. Create the user program with the FBs for controlling the PROFIenergy commands ("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816 ). 4. Transfer the user program to the CPU. Additional information System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System Device manual Interface Module Device manuals Digital and Analog I/O Modules System manual PROFINET System Description You will find additional information on PROFIenergy services, parameters of the service IDs on the Internet under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802. Additional information on PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816 ) is available in the online help for STEP 7 V5.5 as of SP2 "Help on System Functions/System Function Blocks". 1.2 Principle of operation "Pause" control and "Pause" behavior At the beginning and end of pauses, you enable or disable the pause function of the system; the IO controller then sends the PROFIenergy command "Start_Pause" or "End_Pause" to the PROFINET devices. The device then interprets the contents of the PROFIenergy command and switches on or off. The interface module is the PE-Entity for I/O modules with PROFIenergy capability of the ET 200SP. Other PROFIenergy commands allow device information to be accessed during the pauses. You can use these commands to transfer the "Start_Pause" / "End_Pause" command in good time. Note A complete PROFIenergy sequence consists of the commands "Start_Pause" and "End_Pause". Always observe this sequence during programming. PROFIenergy product information 6 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.2 Principle of operation LED displays In general, PROFIenergy does not have an effect on the LED display. Please see the device manuals of the relevant I/O modules for exceptions. Response to error detection All channels whose pause mode is set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report errors as in productive operation. The following rules apply to channels which switch to a pause mode other than "PE_MODE_PROCEED": All errors that are unrelated to the switch to "Pause" are reported. If error recognition is possible during "Pause", these errors continue to be reported. All error messages which are caused by the switch to "Pause" are suppressed. The following applies if error recognition is not possible during the "Pause": - The status of errors already pending before the "Pause" is retained. - Incoming and outgoing errors are reported once the "pause" has ended. Note Switching to "Pause" and out of "Pause" may cause an error to be reported. Additional information Additional information on diagnostics can be found in the I/O module device manuals. Hardware interrupt No hardware interrupts are triggered within the "pause". The hardware interrupts are reevaluated when the "pause" ends. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 7 PROFIenergy 1.2 Principle of operation "Pause" behavior under certain operating conditions A "Pause" is ended in the following cases: Table 1- 1 Ending a "pause" Ending a "pause" Explanation The supply voltage 1L+ of the interface module has failed The "pause" is exited and can be re-activated by resending the PROFIenergy parameter assignment followed by the "Start_Pause" command. * Controller stop1 * Controller failure (connection interrupted)1 * Firmware update * Reset to factory settings * Deactivation of the IO device1 The I/O module is pulled and plugged Station stop1 * Removal of more than one I/O module (depending on the interface module used) * Dismounting of the server module The "pause" is exited , the PROFIenergy parameter assignment is still on the I/O module and the "pause" can be re-activated by the "Start_Pause" command. Failure of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O module. Modification of the parameter settings of the I/O module during operation using data record 128 1 The substitute value behavior is activated. PROFIenergy product information 8 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.3 Parameter assignment 1.3 Parameter assignment Parameter assignment Parameter assignment of PROFIenergy takes place by means of the user program and parameter data record (version2), index 3. The interface module distributes the PROFIenergy parameters to the I/O modules. The parameter assignment of an additional pause behavior is possible immediately after the start of the previous "Pause". The required state for the following pause is activated with a new "Start_Pause" command. The parameter assignment can be written as often as necessary. The interface module checks the distribution of the parameters to the I/O modules and returns the result of the write job by means of return value. In the case of a negative return value, there are one or more I/O modules that have not accepted the parameter data record. In this case, the I/O modules respond according to their last valid PROFIenergy parameter assignment with an incoming "Start_Pause" command. Parameter assignment by means of the parameter data record has to be repeated in case of an I/O module failure or station failure. ET 200SP supports the setting for the behavior of one "Pause". If a different response is required for an additional "Pause", you will have to assign parameters again. Note Effect: The response (shutdown) of the I/O modules to PROFIenergy is related to the slot, which means that all channels of the slot show the same behavior. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 9 PROFIenergy 1.3 Parameter assignment Parameter data record You specify which I/O modules (slots) are controlled with PROFIenergy commands in the parameter data record for PROFIenergy. The content of the parameter data record for PROFIenergy, index 3 is described below; you can create it yourself and transmit it to the interface module. Table 1- 2 Parameter data record for PROFIenergy (version 2), index 3 Byte Element Coding Explanation 0 Version 02D Cannot be modified 1 Number of blocks 01D to n Slots 1 to n depending 2 Block 1 Slot number 00D Mode on the number of slots supported by the interface module and * the current configuration of the ET 200SP. Unassigned 01D to n 3 * I/O module slot with PROFIenergy 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED, proceed at "Pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN, shut down at "Pause" 1 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE, last output or measured value is retained 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE, substitute value "0" 2 : : : 128 Block 64 Slot number See Block 1 129 : Mode 1 The specific behavior depends on the used I/O module (with a digital input module, for example, the sensor supply is turned off or the outputs of an analog output module are de-energized) 2 An analog output module (e. g. with the output range 0 mA to 20 mA, 20 mA) or a digital output module issues the value "0". Error messages The feedback data record returns the following error messages, if needed: Table 1- 3 Error messages Error code Meaning 80B1H Impermissible length Check the length of the data record 80E0H Error in header information Check the data record header information 80E1H Parameter error Check the content of the data record and correct the parameter assignment error before starting the "Pause". Parameter assignment errors which are not corrected can result in incorrect I/O module shutdown behavior. * At least one I/O module does not support PROFIenergy * A parameter value has been incorrectly encoded PROFIenergy product information 10 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.4 PROFIenergy control data records 1.4 PROFIenergy control data records PROFIenergy control data records The control data record for PROFIenergy, Index 80A0H, supports the following services of the Common Application Profile PROFIenergy V1.0 for the IM 155-6 PN ST, IM 155-6 PN HF: Table 1- 4 Control data records for PROFIenergy Service Service ID Meaning Start pause 1 01H Assuming the configured Pause behavior, suppressing all associated diagnostics data End Pause 02H Leaving the pause Query Modes 03H Reads the supported modes PEM status 04H * Request List Energy Saving Modes * Request Get Mode (Energy Saving Mode Data) Reads the PROFIenergy status Status messages: PE_Identify 1 05H * 00H: PROFIenergy is ready for operation * 01H: "Pause" is active * FFH: "Pause" is not active Reads the supported PROFIenergy services The minimum (configurable) pause time for the ET 200SP is 10 s. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 11 PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules 1.5 I/O modules 1.5.1 Digital input module Requirements Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Display DI 8x24VDC ST/ DI 8x24VDC HF/ DI 8x24VDC HS The channel LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the terminal. Switching off the sensor supply also switches off the channel LED if an external sensor supply is connected. DI 8xNAMUR The channel LEDs correspond to the signal state supplied by the I/O module. Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is applied. All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in productive operation. The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode: Sensor supply switch-off upon the start of "pause" does not result in the messages "Line break" or "Short circuit". "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition is not possible during the "pause": - Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained. - After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are reported correspondingly. PROFIenergy product information 12 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128 "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 5 Mode parameter Element Coding Explanation Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Shut down at "Pause" 1 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE * Sensor supply switched off 2 * Pause substitute value: 0B Last value at "pause" * Sensor supply switched off 2 * Pause substitute value: Last input value Substitute value at "pause" * Sensor supply switched off 2 * Pause substitute value: Configured pause substitute value 1 DI 8xNAMUR HF: A channel is set to "inverted". During the "pause", the PE substitute value is read in 1:1 (as in the parameter settings and not inverted again). 2 DI 8x24VDC ST: As there is only one sensor supply for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at a "pause" if all channel parameters have been set to switch off. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 13 PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules 1.5.2 Digital output modules Requirements Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0) Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0) Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0) Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Display The channel LEDs are directly affected by the output value at the terminal. Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is applied. Line break and short circuit error recognition continues to be possible during the "pause". All channels therefore report errors as in productive operation, regardless of their pause mode. Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ (exception: The DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST remains in "Pause") Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128 "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module PROFIenergy product information 14 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 6 Mode parameter Element Coding Explanation Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause" * 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause" * 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE 1.5.3 Pause substitute value: Last output value is maintained1 Substitute value at "pause" * 1 Pause substitute value: 0B Pause substitute value: Configured pause substitute value is output DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS: In the "Pulse width modulation" mode, the last value is output as frequency. Analog input modules Requirements Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA0) Display The channel LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 15 PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is applied. All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in productive operation. The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode: Sensor supply switch-off upon the start of "pause" does not result in the message "Line break". "Line break", "Short circuit", "High limit exceeded" and "Low limit exceeded" error recognition is not possible during the "pause": - Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained. - After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are reported correspondingly. Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128 "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module PROFIenergy product information 16 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 7 Mode parameter Element Coding Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause" 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE 1 1.5.4 Explanation * Sensor supply switched off 1 * Pause substitute value: 7FFFH Last value at "pause" * Sensor supply switched off 1 * Pause substitute value: Last input value Substitute value at "pause" * Sensor supply switched off 1 * Pause substitute value: Configured pause substitute value AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST, AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST, AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST, AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS: As there is only one sensor supply for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at a "pause" if all channels have been configured to switch off. Analog output module Requirements Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Display The channel LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 17 PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is applied. All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in productive operation. The following applies to all channels which switch to the pause mode "PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN": "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition is not possible during the pause. - Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained. - Incoming and outgoing errors are reported once the "pause" has ended. The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode: "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition continues to be possible during the pause. These errors are reported. The selection of an incorrect pause substitute value which does not correspond to the output range may result in the message "High limit exceeded" or "Low limit exceeded". The pause substitute output value effective at the terminal is limited to the high or low control limit for the output range. Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128 "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module PROFIenergy product information 18 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 8 Mode parameter Element Coding Explanation Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause" * 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause" * 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Pause substitute value: Last output value is maintained Substitute value at "pause" * 1.5.5 Outputs free from current and voltage Pause substitute value: Configured pause substitute value is output IO-Link Master Requirements Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Note The minimum pause time (10 s) must be observed. If it is undershot, problems may occur with the restart of IO-Link communication. 1.5.5.1 DI operating mode Display Switching off the supply voltage USn (port) also switches off the associated channel status LED Qn if an external supply voltage is connected. Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is adopted. PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 19 PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 9 Mode parameter Element Coding Explanation Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause" 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE * Supply voltage USn (port) switched off * Pause substitute value: 0B Last value at "pause" * Supply voltage USn (port) switched off * Pause substitute value: Last input value Substitute value at "pause" * Supply voltage USn (port) switched off * Pause substitute value: Configured pause substitute value PROFIenergy product information 20 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules 1.5.5.2 DQ operating mode Display The channel status LEDs Qn show the output value. Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is adopted. Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 10 Mode parameter Element Coding Explanation Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause" * 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause" * 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Pause substitute value: 0B Pause substitute value: Last output value is maintained Substitute value at "pause" * Pause substitute value: Configured pause substitute value is output PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 21 PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules 1.5.5.3 IO-Link operating mode Display When supply voltage USn (port) is switched off, the associated port status LED Cn and port error LED Fn are also switched off. Response to error detection The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless of whether the pause status is adopted. All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" and "PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE" in pause mode report errors as in productive operation. The following conditions apply to all channels (ports) which switch to a different pause mode ("PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN" and "PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE"): Switching off the supply voltage USn (port) at the start of "pause" does not result in the messages "Line break" or "Short circuit". Error detection is not possible during the "pause" (no IO-Link device communication): - Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained. - After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are reported correspondingly. Ending a "pause" The pause is ended in the following cases: Failure of the supply voltage L+ Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters "End_Pause" command Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module PROFIenergy product information 22 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH PROFIenergy 1.5 I/O modules Mode parameter Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the "Parameter assignment" chapter. Table 1- 11 Mode parameter Element Coding Explanation Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause" 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause" 3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE2 4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE * Supply voltage USn (port) switched off1 * Pause substitute value (input): 0B * Supply voltage USn (port) switched off * Last input and output value is maintained see: 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN 1 Supply voltage USn of the assigned port is switched off. Result: The IO-Link device fails. 2 With time-based IO, the IO-Link master behaves according to 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN PROFIenergy product information Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 23 Product Information Mixed ___________________ Preface Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 1 ___________________ Application planning SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Mounting ET 200SP Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information 3 ___________________ Connection 4 ___________________ Configuring 5 ___________________ BaseUnit BU-Send 6 ___________________ BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 02/2016 A5E33344611-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33344611-AC 02/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2016. All rights reserved Preface Scope This product information supplements the ET 200SP system manual documentation. Security information For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 3 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Application planning ................................................................................................................................ 5 2 Mounting ................................................................................................................................................. 8 3 Connection ............................................................................................................................................. 9 4 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 13 5 BaseUnit BU-Send ................................................................................................................................ 17 6 5.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 17 5.2 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 18 5.3 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 19 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC................................................................................................................... 20 6.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 20 6.2 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 22 6.3 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 22 6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display.................................................................................... 23 6.5 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 4 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC Application planning 1 Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection You have the option of integrating the I/O modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (IP65/IP67) in a configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (IP20). The figure below shows a combination of the modules of the ET 200AL and ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Image 1-1 Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 5 Application planning Requirement The following components support mixed configuration: Interface module - IM 155-6 PN HF (V3.0 or higher) - IM 155-6 PN ST (V3.1 or higher) - IM 155-6 DP HF (V3.0 or higher) CPU - CPU 1510SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) - CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) - CPU 1512SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) - CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC ET-Connection cable Power cable Rules You must observe the following rules when assembling a mixed configuration: The bus length of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system must not exceed 1 m (without interface module, including BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module) A maximum of 16 ET 200AL I/O modules can be connected to ET-Connection. The maximum length of the bus cable for ET-Connection between BA-Send and the first module or between two modules is 15 m. The following table shows which firmware versions of your IM or CPU support which maximum bus cable length. IM/CPU 2m 5m 10 m 15 m IM 155-6 PN HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.3 or higher IM 155-6 PN ST V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.3 or higher IM 155-6 DP HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher -- CPU 1510SP-1 PN V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher CPU 1512SP-1 PN V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 6 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC Application planning Procedure To assemble a multi-tier configuration, follow these steps: 1. Install the BaseUnit BU-Send to the immediate right of the ET 200SP CPU/interface module. When the BaseUnit BU-Send is used next to the ET 200SP CPU, a CM DP and an Ethernet CP or a maximum of 2 Ethernet CPs can be inserted between the CPU and BUSend. 2. Then mount the additional BaseUnits / I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and the server module. 3. Connect the bus cable for ET-Connection to the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and mount this on the BaseUnit BU-Send. 4. Screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade. 5. Connect the other end of the bus cable for ET-Connection (with M8 connector) to the first ET 200AL I/O module (X30 socket ET-Connection IN). 6. Connect the supply voltage (24 V DC) to the ET 200AL I/O modules (X80 connector). Note Firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module When you run a firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module, ET-Connection is briefly interrupted by the restart of the module. All downstream ET 200AL I/O modules report a pull/plug interrupt. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 7 2 Mounting Introduction For the connection of the ET 200AL I/O module via ET-Connection to the ET 200SP, you require the BaseUnit BU-Send with the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC. Requirement The mounting rail is mounted. The interface module is mounted. Required tools 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the BusAdapter) Mounting BaseUnit BU-Send To mount the BaseUnit BU-Send, follow these steps: 1. Mount the BU-Send to the right of the CPU/interface module. 2. Swivel the BU-Send back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place. 3. Move the BU-Send to the left until you hear it click into place on the CPU/interface module. Image 2-1 Mounting BU-Send 4. Mount the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC only after you have connected the bus cable for ET-Connection (see section Connecting (Page 9)). Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 8 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 3 Connection Introduction You connect the ET 200AL I/O modules via the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC using ETConnection. BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Connection element for ET-Connection bus cable Image 3-1 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Required tools Screwdriver with 3 to 3.5 mm blade Required accessories Use the bus cable for ET-Connection as connecting cable between the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and the ET 200AL I/O modules. We recommend using the stripping tool for ET-Connection (6ES7194-2KA00-0AA0) with blade cassette green (6GK1901-1B...). This guarantees fast and safe stripping. The bus cable for ET-Connection M8, prefabricated on one side with 1 x M8 connector, 4pole, shielded, is available in the following lengths: Length 2 m: 6ES7194-2LH20-0AC0 Length 5 m: 6ES7194-2LH50-0AC0 Length 10 m: 6ES7194-2LN10-0AC0 Length 15 m: 6ES7194-2LN15-0AB0 Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 9 Connection Procedure To connect the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC, follow these steps: 1. Strip the sheath of the bus cable at the open end as follows: Image 3-2 Connecting cable Use the stripping tool for ET-Connection to do this. The relevant settings are shown on the tool. 2. Pull back the locking slide of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and open the cover of the connection element. 3. Lift the cable routing up as far as it will go. 4. Insert the unstripped single cores of the bus cable (according to the imprinted color coding) into the cable routing as far as they will go and press the cable routing down as far as it will go. 5. Close the cover of the connection element and push the locking slide forward. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 10 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC Connection 6. Connect and screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque.) To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade. 7. Connect the M8 connector of the bus cable to the first ET 200AL I/O module (socket X30 ET-Connection IN). For more information about wiring the ET 200AL I/O module refer to the system manual of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. Locking slide Cable routing Image 3-3 Shield contact Bus cable for ET-Connection Connection of the BusAdapeter BA-Send 1xFC Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 11 Connection BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC mounted BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Image 3-4 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC mounted Bus cable for ET-Connection Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 12 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 4 Configuring Introduction The mixed configuration allows the connection of up to 16 ET 200AL I/O modules to the ET 200SP via ET-Connection. The figure below shows the configuration of the ET-Connection and the assignment of the slots. ET 200SP I/O modules ET 200SP server module Slots 1st ET 200AL I/O module 16th ET 200AL I/O module ET-Connection PROFINET IO Image 4-1 Mixed configuration For more information about connecting the ET-Connection, supply voltages, actuators and sensors, refer to the ET 200AL system manual. Configuration with a CPU In a configuration with a CPU, a maximum of 2 slots can be used immediately to the right of the CPU with CM DP module or Ethernet CP. Combinations are also possible, i.e. CM DP module and one Ethernet CP or two Ethernet CPs. BU-Send and BA-Send should always be inserted to the immediate right of the CM/CP. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 13 Configuring Rules Observe the following rules when configuring: With mixed configurations, the following maximum configuration is possible: - 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6 PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF and CPUs) slots for ET 200SP modules - 16 slots for ET 200AL I/O modules - 1 slot for BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC - 1 slot for server module. The mixed configuration may contain a maximum of 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6 PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF) ET 200SP I/O modules. The server module can also be mounted right next to the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC. Supported functions: Function Mixed configuration ET 200SP IM ET 200AL I/O modules on ET-Connection CPU Isochronous mode -- -- Configuration control Shared device PROFIenergy -- -- -- -- System redundancy S2 Configuring Observe the following points when configuring: BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module must be configured. With BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC, no parameters are available. Arrangement of the modules in the configuration: - Configure the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC downstream from the interface module in slot 1. Position the ET 200SP modules behind it. - Configure the ET 200AL I/O modules from slot 66 (PROFINET)/67 (CPU)/34 (PROFIBUS). The layout of the modules represents a preset configuration and is independent of the configuration control. The system redundancy S2 function is not available in a mixed configuration. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 14 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC Configuring Configuration example An example of a mixed configuration is shown below: Hardware configuration ET 200SP I/O modules ET 200SP server module Slots PROFINET IO 2nd ET 200AL I/O module 3rd ET 200AL I/O module 4th ET 200AL I/O module ET-Connection 1st ET 200AL I/O module Image 4-2 Mixed configuration Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 15 Configuring Configuring configuration example Table 4- 1 Overview Mixed configuration Module Slot ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN HF 0 ET 200AL BA-Send 1xFC 1 DI 16x24VDC ST 2 DI 16x24VDC ST 3 DI 16x24VDC ST 4 Server module 5 DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 66 DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8 67 AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 68 CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 69 Note Configuration using PROFIBUS GSD file When you use the PROFIBUS GSD file for the configuration, you must configure the gaps between the server module and the first ET 200AL I/O module with BU-Cover. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 16 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC BaseUnit BU-Send 5.1 5 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0 View Image 5-1 BaseUnit BU-Send Properties BaseUnit suitable for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 17 BaseUnit BU-Send 5.2 Connection 5.2 Connection Pin assignment The BaseUnit BU-Send has only one slot for an expansion module. No other connections are available. Schematic circuit diagram Backplane bus BA-Send 1xFC expansion module Image 5-2 Schematic circuit diagram BU-Send Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 18 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC BaseUnit BU-Send 5.3 Technical specifications 5.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit BU-Send 6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0 Product type designation BaseUnit BU-Send Installation type/mounting Rack mounting possible Yes Front installation possible Yes Rail mounting possible Yes Wall/direct mounting possible No Hardware configuration Slots Number of slots 1 Plug-in modules, other Yes; BusAdapter BA-Send Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 32 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 19 6 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6.1 Properties Article number 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics ((Connection for ET-CONNECTION)) Article number Functional version Image 6-1 View of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 20 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: BusAdapter for the direct connection of ET-Connection Connects the interface module via ET-Connection with the ET 200AL I/O modules Supports all ET 200AL I/O modules The module supports the following functions: Identification data I&M 0 to 3. See system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Maximum configuration 16 ET 200AL I/O modules 15 m bus cable between BusAdapter BA Send and the first ET 200AL I/O module and between two ET 200AL I/O modules. Supported functions: Function Mixed configuration ET 200SP IM ET 200AL I/O modules on ET-Connection CPU Isochronous mode -- -- Configuration control Shared device PROFIenergy -- -- -- -- System redundancy S2 Accessories The following components must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Reference identification label Stripping tool for ET-Connection Bus cables for ET-Connection See also You can find more information on accessories and additional components in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 21 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6.2 Pin assignment 6.2 Pin assignment ET-Connection with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC The following table shows the signal names and the designations for the pin assignment of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC. Table 6- 1 ET-Connection pin assignment with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC View 6.3 Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit data + 2 RD Receive data + 3 TD_N Transmit data - 4 RD_N Receive data - Schematic circuit diagram Schematic circuit diagram Image 6-2 Schematic circuit diagram for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 22 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display 6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display LED display The figure below shows the LED display (status and fault display) of the BusAdapter BASend 1xFC. DIAG (green/red) Image 6-3 LED display Meaning of the LED display The table below explains the meaning of the status and fault display. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 23 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6.5 Technical specifications DIAG LED Table 6- 2 Status and fault display DIAG DIAG LED Meaning Remedy There is no connection between the ET-Connection interface of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET 200AL. Check whether the bus cable is interrupted. The interface module does not support the BA-Send 1xFC. Run a firmware update. --- On There is a connection between the ET-Connection interface of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET 200AL. Check the ET-Connection device. Flashes There is (at least) one diagnostics alarm of an ET-Connection device. Group error for all ET-Connection bus nodes. Off Set configuration does not match the Check the configuration of the ET-Connection to see actual configuration on the ETwhether a module is missing or defective, or whether a Connection. non-configured module is wired. 6.5 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Cable length * Copper cables 15 m; as of IM firmware V3.3: Bus nodes between BA-Send and the first ET-Connection as well as between all other bus nodes. ET-Connection Number of interfaces ET-Connection 1 FC (FastConnect) Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. 60 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Weights Weight, approx. 44 g Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL 24 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC User calibration of analog modules 1 ___________________ Security information 2 ___________________ Introduction SIMATIC ET 200SP User calibration of analog modules Product Information 3 ___________________ Requirement 4 ___________________ Mode of operation 5 ___________________ Performing user calibration 6 ___________________ Example A ___________________ Appendix A 09/2014 A5E34352075-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34352075-AA 10/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 Security information ................................................................................................................................ 5 2 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 6 3 Requirement ........................................................................................................................................... 8 4 Mode of operation ................................................................................................................................... 9 5 6 4.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 9 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Data set structure....................................................................................................................10 Job data set ............................................................................................................................11 Acknowledgment data set .......................................................................................................15 Performing user calibration ................................................................................................................... 21 5.1 Calibration start .......................................................................................................................21 5.2 Calibration sequence ..............................................................................................................22 5.3 Calibration exit ........................................................................................................................22 5.4 Calibration completion ............................................................................................................23 5.5 Status and error codes............................................................................................................24 5.6 Time stamp, Date/time ............................................................................................................26 5.7 Re-parameterization of the input/output range .......................................................................26 5.8 Calibration counter ..................................................................................................................27 5.9 Behavior at CPU-STOP ..........................................................................................................27 5.10 Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during calibration ..........................27 Example ............................................................................................................................................... 28 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.1.3 6.1.1.4 6.1.1.5 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.2.3 6.1.2.4 User calibration (mode = 2) ....................................................................................................28 Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer) .............................................29 Step A: Start ............................................................................................................................29 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration ................................................................................................31 Step C: Intermediate step .......................................................................................................33 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive ....................................................................................35 Step E: Closure .......................................................................................................................37 Example: Analog output module +/-10 V ................................................................................38 Step A: Start ............................................................................................................................38 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration ................................................................................................40 Step C: Intermediate step .......................................................................................................42 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive ....................................................................................44 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 Abort (mode = 3) .....................................................................................................................46 User abort ...............................................................................................................................46 Module abort ...........................................................................................................................47 User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 3 Table of contents A 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 Read calibration values (mode = 4) ....................................................................................... 48 Step A: Start ........................................................................................................................... 48 Step B: Closure ...................................................................................................................... 50 6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) ................................................................................... 51 6.5 Reset (mode = 6) ................................................................................................................... 53 Appendix A ........................................................................................................................................... 55 A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels ................................................................................ 55 A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels ........................................................................... 58 User calibration of analog modules 4 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Security information 1 To ensure the secure operation of products and solutions from Siemens, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 5 Introduction 2 The characteristics of analog-digital/digital-analog converters in analog modules are usually offset and not uniform in their slope. This means you must calibrate the characteristics to the conditions of the analog module. A general distinction is made between factory calibration and user calibration. Factory calibration To ensure the accuracy of an analog module, it is calibrated during production in the factory. You cannot delete or change the factory calibration. You can only read the factory calibration values. User calibration You can start, delete and read back a user calibration for an analog module with error-free parameter assignment at any time. User calibration is used to increase the accuracy for specific use cases with deviations that can be compensated, for example, by sensors or wiring. Zero-Scale/Offset calibration Zero-Scale or Offset calibration is the calibration of the zero point. Usually "0" for bipolar ranges and the low limit of the nominal range for unipolar ranges. The characteristic of the converter is offset corrected and thus shifted into the zero point. Full-Scale/Gain/Gain calibration Full-Scale or Gain calibration is the calibration of the end point. It is usually the high limit of the nominal range. The slope of the converter characteristic is adjusted so that it also intersects the end point. User calibration of analog modules 6 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Introduction Converter characteristic The figure below shows the shift of the converter characteristic into the zero point on the left. The right part of the figure shows the change in the converter characteristic slope so that the converter characteristic intersects the end point. Figure 2-1 Correction of the converter characteristic User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 7 3 Requirement The accuracy/quality of a user calibration depends on the following points: Stable temperature condition (e.g., 25 C) The settling time of the used calibrator/measuring instrument and the analog module (e.g., for input or output modules with integrated measuring process sigma-delta converter) Cables (if possible, short, shielded and grounded at one side) Accuracy of the used calibrator and/or measuring instrument Note Measuring accuracy The measuring accuracy may deteriorate if the user calibration is not performed properly. It is not immediately clear if a channel works with factory calibration values or user calibration values. User calibration of analog modules 8 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Mode of operation 4 You must perform the user calibration for each channel. To do so, always calibrate the selected channel in the set input/output range. You can start the user calibration at any time for a channel with error-free parameter assignment. After successful user calibration the newly calibrated channel works in the current input/output range with the newly determined calibration values. 4.1 Procedure The user calibration is controlled by the data sets (DS). You must write a job data set for the analog module and receive instructions for further actions in the acknowledgment data set. This procedure is described in more detail in the section Performing user calibration (Page 21). The figure below shows the steps required for the user calibration of an instruction to the analog module. Figure 4-1 Steps in the user calibration for an instruction The analog module saves the user calibration values. The values always apply only to the input/output range for which they were created. If the input/output range is re-parameterized, the factory calibration values are used once again. But the user calibration values still exist (see section Re-parameterization of the input/output range (Page 26)). User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 9 Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Each user calibration receives a time stamp (for each channel) which includes the date and time of the last user calibration of the channel. You must transfer the date and time to the analog module during calibration, because these values are not generated by the analog module. The analog module controls the number of required calibration steps for a user calibration. The actions which you must start or confirm during user calibration are also initiated by the analog module. The set input/output range of a channel can only be calibrated completely during a user calibration (zero-scale and full-scale). Partial calibration is not possible (e.g., zero-scale only). 4.2 Data set structure You can start a calibration process with the Write data set (job data set) and Read data set (acknowledgment data set) mechanisms, DS 237 for each. The structure of the job data set and the acknowledgment data set is identical. This means the acknowledgment data set read last serves as the template for the next job data set. Job data set and acknowledgment data set also apply to mixed modules with input and output channels. Mixed modules have an input channel and an output channel with channel number 0. To determine if you are calibrating an output channel or an input channel, the channel number for output channels generally has the offset value 40H added to it. User calibration of analog modules 10 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure 4.2.1 Job data set The following table shows the structure of the job data set. Table 4- 1 Structure of the job data set (18 bytes long) Byte address Element Value range Format 0 Command/job ID 1: Factory calibration Byte 2: User calibration 3: Abort, normal channel processing 4: Read calibration values 5: Restore factory calibration 6: Reset 1 Identifier 0 Byte 1 2 Channel number 00H ... 3FH Byte 40H ... 7FH FFH 3 Calibration step FFH Byte 4 Not relevant - Byte 5 Not relevant - Byte 6 Not relevant - Byte 7 Input/output size 0: Not relevant Byte FEH ... 00H 1: mV 2: A 3: 4: Time/date 5: Ohm 6: Degrees 7: 8: 9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC 10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC 11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle) 8 Substitute value behavior of inputs 0: retain last value Byte 1: Overflow (7FFFH) 2: Substitute value 3: continue to supply values* 9 Reserved - 10 ... 17 Extended Record See section below Extended Record Byte * Only for analog modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF and AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 11 Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure The tables below show the value ranges of the elements and description of the job data set. Command/job ID Table 4- 2 Command/job ID Value range Description 1: Factory calibration Not relevant 2: User calibration See section User calibration (mode = 2) (Page 28) 3: Abort, normal channel processing See section Abort (mode = 3) (Page 46) 4: Read calibration values See section Read calibration values (mode = 4) (Page 48) 5: Restore factory calibration See section Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) (Page 51) 6: Reset See section Reset (mode = 6) (Page 53) Identifier Table 4- 3 Identifier Value range Description 0 Not relevant 1 Execute Channel number Table 4- 4 Channel number Value range Description 00H ... 3FH Input channels 40H ... 7FH Output channels FFH All channels, only permitted for command = 6 (Reset) Calibration step Table 4- 5 Calibration step Value range Description FFH Start FEH ... 00H Apply from last acknowledgment data set User calibration of analog modules 12 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Input/output size Table 4- 6 Input/output size Value range Description 0: Not relevant Specifies how to interpret the values as of byte 10. 1: mV 2: A 3: 4: Time/date 5: Ohm 6: Degrees 7: 8: 9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC 10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC 11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle) Substitute value behavior of inputs Table 4- 7 Substitute value behavior of inputs Value range Description 0: retain last value Only relevant for analog input modules. Evaluated at start only. 1: Overflow (7FFFH) 2: Substitute value 3: continue to supply values* * Only for analog modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF and AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 13 Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Extended Record Table 4- 8 Extended Record for input/output size = 1 (mV), 2 (A), 5 (Ohm), 6 (Degrees) Byte address Element Format Value range Description 10 Date1 Word 32768 ... 3276 7 Place before the decimal point 12 Date2 Word -999 ... 999 Places after decimal point * 1000 14 Date3 Word Not used 16 Substitute value Word Not used Extended Record for input/output size = 4 (Date/Time), BCD coded: See section Time stamp, date/time (Page 26) Table 4- 9 Extended Record for input/output size = 9 (U~), 10 (I~), 11 (Phi) Byte address Element Format Value range 10 Date1 Word Not used 12 Date2 Word Not used 14 Date3 Word 0 ... 65535 16 Substitute value Word Not used Table 4- 10 Description Setpoint for calibration operating point Extended Record for substitute value behavior of inputs = 2 (substitute value) Byte address Element Format Value range Description 10 Date1 Word 0 Not relevant 12 Date2 Word 0 Not relevant 14 Date3 Word 0 Not relevant 16 Substitute value Word 8000H ... 7FFF Must be within parameterized measuring range H User calibration of analog modules 14 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure 4.2.2 Acknowledgment data set The following table shows the structure of the acknowledgment data set. Table 4- 11 Structure of the job or acknowledgment data set (18 bytes long) Byte address Element Value range Format 0 Command/mode 1: Factory calibration Byte 2: User calibration 3: Abort, normal channel processing 4: Read calibration values 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working Byte 01H: OK, Ready 10H: Error 2 Channel number 00H ... 3FH Byte 40H ... 7FH FFH 3 Calibration step FFH ... 00H Byte 4 Input/output type 00H ... F9H Byte 5 Input/output range 00H ... F9H Byte 6 User action 0: None Byte 1: Short-circuit 2: Feed, connection 3: Measurement 4: Remove connections 7 Input/output size 0: Not relevant Byte 1: mV 2: A 3: Calibration values 4: Time/date 5: Ohm 6: Degrees 7: 8: 9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC 10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC 11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle) 8 Calibration counter 00H ... FFH Byte 9 Reserved - Byte 10 ... 17 Extended Record See section below Extended Record User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 15 Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure The tables below show the value ranges of the elements and description of the acknowledgment data set. Command/mode Is mirrored from the command with error-free processing of the job data set. Table 4- 12 Command/mode Value range Description 1: Factory calibration Not relevant 2: User calibration See section User calibration (mode = 2) (Page 28) 3: Abort, normal channel processing See section Abort (mode = 3) (Page 46) 4: Read calibration values See section Read calibration values (mode = 4) (Page 48) Status/error code Table 4- 13 Status/error code Value range Description 00H: OK, Working Job processing still ongoing 01H: OK, Ready Job processing successfully completed 10H: Error See section Status and error codes (Page 24) Channel number Table 4- 14 Channel number Value range Description 00H ... 3FH Input channels 40H ... 7FH Output channels FFH All channels Calibration step Table 4- 15 Calibration step Value range Description FFH ... 00H Number of calibration steps still required User calibration of analog modules 16 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Input/output type Table 4- 16 Input/output type Value range Description 00H ... F9H Currently parameterized input/output type of the channel, see Parameter tables in the sections Format input type/range: Input channels (Page 55) and Format output type/range: Output channels (Page 58) Input/output range Table 4- 17 Input/output range Value range Description 00H ... F9H Currently parameterized input/output range of the channel, see Parameter tables in the sections Format input type/range: Input channels (Page 55) and Format output type/range: Output channels (Page 58) User action Table 4- 18 User action Value range Description 0: None Indicates how to wire the terminals specified under Terminal1/Terminal2. 1: Short-circuit 2: Feed, connection 3: Measurement 4: Remove connections User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 17 Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Input/output size Table 4- 19 Input/output size Value range Description 0: Not relevant Specifies how to interpret the values as of byte 10. 1: mV 2: A 3: Calibration values For user actions = 2 and 3 the corresponding unit is specified here. 4: Time/date 5: Ohm 6: Degrees 7: 8: 9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC 10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC 11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle) Calibration counter Table 4- 20 Value range 00H ... FFH Calibration counter Description Number of successful user calibrations 00H = Factory calibration values User calibration of analog modules 18 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Extended Record Table 4- 21 Extended Record for input/output size = 1 (mV), 2 (A), 5 (), 6 (Degrees) Byte address Element Format Value range Description 10 Date1 Word -32768 ... 32767 Place before the decimal point 12 Date2 Word -999 ... 999 Place after decimal point * 1000 14 Date3 Word Not used 16 Terminal1 Byte 0...x (0 = invalid) Terminal at BaseUnit 17 Terminal2 Byte 0...x (0 = invalid) Terminal at BaseUnit Table 4- 22 Extended Record for input/output size = 9 (U~), 10 (I~), 11 (Phi) Byte address Element Format Value range Description 10 Date1 Double word 00H ... FFFFFFFFH Calibration register content (last calibration step executed) 14 Date2 Word 0 ... 65535 Setpoint for next step 16 Terminal1 Byte 0...x (0 = invalid) Terminal at BaseUnit 17 Terminal2 Byte 0...x (0 = invalid) Terminal at BaseUnit Extended Record for input/output size = 4 (Date/Time): See section Time stamp, date/time (Page 26) Table 4- 23 Extended Record for input/output size = 3 (calibration values) Byte address Element Format Value range Description 10 Date1 Word Format 1 Offset (converter units) 12 Date2 Word Format 2 Gain 14 Date3 Word Date4 Word Module-specific Format 1 or Format 2 Add1 16 Add2 The values can be output in two formats: Format 1 (identifier = 0): WORD, value range -32767 ... +32768 Format 2 (identifier = 1): Value range -31.999 to +31.999 User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 19 Mode of operation 4.2 Data set structure Table 4- 24 Extended Record: Places before and after the decimal point 215 214 213 212 211 210 VZ Places before the decimal point (0 ... 31) 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Places after decimal point * 1000 (0 ... 999) Format Terminal1/Terminal2: For user actions = 1, 2, 3, 4 the terminal number of the terminal at BaseUnit are displayed here (1 ... x). User calibration of analog modules 20 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Performing user calibration 5.1 5 Calibration start You must start the user calibration using the job data set with command = 2 (user calibration) and calibration step = FFH (Start). An active/running calibration is displayed with Mode = 2 (user calibration) in the acknowledgment data set. A diagnostic is also reported for analog modules with diagnostic capability: Analog modules with channel diagnostics signal error 31 (Channel temporarily unavailable) for the affected channel, channel fault LED lights up red, the module fault LED flashes. Analog modules which support the value status (QI) set QI to "BAD". The user calibration can be started at any time. The start requires that the channel was parameterized without errors and that it is not already in another calibration mode which can be recognized by command 3 and status > 00H in the acknowledgment data set: After starting the user calibration and until it is completed, only command = 2 is accepted and processed for this channel. All other commands result in the user calibration being aborted. The acknowledgment data set is generated immediately by mirroring it from the job data set and entering it in the status = 00H (OK, Working). After completing the calibration step, the acknowledgment data set is updated and the status > 00H is set: - The command was accepted with status = 01H (OK, Ready). The number of steps that still have to executed is specified in the calibration step. The action that you need to execute next is specified in the user action. - For user action = 1 (Short-circuit), 2 (Infeed), 3 (Measuring) and 4 (Remove connections), the relevant terminals are specified in the Extended Record under Terminal1 and Terminal2 whereby Terminal1 is always the positive terminal. - For user action = 2 (Infeed) or 3 (Measuring) the unit is specified for measured variable (e.g., A or mV). - For status > 10H, an error was detected and calibration was aborted. In Command/Mode, "Abort, normal channel processing" is signaled. The analog module resumes the same status as before calibration was started. User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 21 Performing user calibration 5.2 Calibration sequence 5.2 Calibration sequence Each calibration step is triggered by writing the job data set with calibration step = FFH (for start) or FEH ... 00H, applied from the previously signaled acknowledgment data set and identifier = 01H. Next the analog module has to read and evaluate the acknowledgment data set. For status = 00H (OK, Working), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job data set is still in progress. For status = 01H (OK, Ready), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job data set is complete and was processed without errors. For status 10H (Error), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job data set was not processed successfully and was acknowledged with an error. The ongoing calibration is aborted and any determined calibration values are discarded. Note Non-relevant elements Elements that are not relevant for a calibration step are not taken into consideration by the module. The user calibration is not aborted by these elements. 5.3 Calibration exit You can exit the calibration in any calibration step by means of a job data set with command = 3 (Abort, normal channel processing). Any calibration values determined until then are lost. The analog module resumes the same status as before calibration was started. If user calibration values existed before the calibration, these will become effective again after the abort. If no user calibration values existed, the factory calibration values are still in effect. Any calibration initiated previously can also be aborted with the following actions: POWER OFF/POWER ON of the supply voltage Pulling & plugging of the analog module Re-parameterization of the analog module Re-parameterization of the analog module Firmware update of the analog module User calibration of analog modules 22 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Performing user calibration 5.4 Calibration completion 5.4 Calibration completion The last calibration step is the confirmation of the calibration or of the determined calibration values. This calibration step is initialized by the analog module for a user calibration with calibration step = 1 in the acknowledgment data set. All calibration values of the current calibration process are determined and signaled back. Confirm the calibration values with the job data set and calibration step = 1. With input/output size = 4 (Date/Time) a time stamp in S7 BCD format is entered starting with byte 10 (see section Time stamp, Date/Time (Page 26)). As soon as the calibration values and the time stamp of the analog module have been checked and applied, mode = 3 (normal channel processing) and status = 01H (OK, Ready) are signaled in the acknowledgment data set. The channel number, the input/output type and the input/ output range remain the same; the remaining data equals zero. The newly determined calibration values are now valid and in effect. The previous user calibration values are overwritten and cannot be restored. In case of an error in the last calibration step (e.g., error in time stamp), the corresponding error code is signaled in the status. The new calibration values are discarded. User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 23 Performing user calibration 5.5 Status and error codes 5.5 Status and error codes Table 5- 1 Status codes Status code Description 00H OK, Working; job in progress 01H OK, Ready; job executed without error 02H ... 0FH Reserved Calibration is aborted with an error if an error occurs during calibration. Table 5- 2 Error codes Error codes Description Remedy/Cause General errors of the calibration process 10H Invalid command Correct job data set; table Command/job ID (Page 12) 11H Invalid channel number Correct job data set; table Identification (Page 12) 12H Invalid identification Correct job data set; table Channel number (Page 12) 13H Invalid calibration step Correct job data set; table Calibration step (Page 12) 14H Error in input/output type or input/ output range Input/output type or input/output range cannot be scaled; see Analog Module Manual 15H Invalid module action Irrelevant for user calibration 16H Invalid input/output size information Extended Record, invalid content; Correct job data set (Page 11) 17H Reserved - 18H Time stamp error (year) 19H Time stamp error (month) 1AH Time stamp error (day) Invalid time stamp; correct job data set; section Time stamp, Date/Time (Page 26) 1BH Time stamp error (hour) 1CH Time stamp error (minute) 1DH Time stamp error (day of the week) 1EH Invalid substitute value behavior of inputs 1F H Substitute value out of the measuring range Correct job data set; table Substitute value behavior of inputs (Page 13) User calibration of analog modules 24 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Performing user calibration 5.5 Status and error codes Error codes Description Remedy/Cause 20H Value measured by user deviates too much from setpoint Circuit, check measuring technique; correct job data set 21H Value supplied by user deviates too much from setpoint Circuit, check infeed technique 22H ... 23H Reserved - 24H User calibration not supported See Analog Module Manual 25H ... 2FH Reserved - Technology errors System errors/general module errors 30H Error writing to EEPROM/Flash Replace analog module 31H Error in procedure A job data set with a command other than the one active came in during the calibration process. Follow procedure; see section Example (Page 28) 32H Channel not parameterized Correct configuration/parameter assignment 33H Reserved - 34H Abort due to parameter assignment during ongoing calibration See section Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during calibration (Page 27) 35H ... 3FH Reserved - 40H Reserved - 41H No calibration values available No calibration values available to delete; Other faults/errors See section Prepare factory calibration (mode = 5) (Page 51) and Reset (mode = 6) (Page 53) 42H ... FFH Reserved - User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 25 Performing user calibration 5.6 Time stamp, Date/time 5.6 Time stamp, Date/time During user calibration, you transfer the date and time of the synchronization to the analog module in calibration step = 1 Date and time. When reading the calibration values (command = 4), the date and time of the read calibration values are output in calibration step = 1. Both take place with measured variable = 4 as time stamp in the acknowledgment data set as well as in the job data set as of byte 10 in S7 BCD format. Byte address Value Format Value range 10 Year Byte 00H = 2000, 99H = 2099 11 Month Byte 01H ... 12H 12 Tag Byte 01H ... 31H 13 Hour Byte 00H ... 23H 14 Minute Byte 00H ... 59H 15 Second Byte 00H ... 59H 16 ms Byte 00H ... 99H 17.4 ... 17.7 ms High nibble 0H ... 9H 17.0 ... 17.3 Day of the week Low nibble 0 = undefined 1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday 7 = Saturday 5.7 Re-parameterization of the input/output range If you have conducted a user calibration on a channel, the user calibration values are in effect for this channel. The user calibration values always apply only to the input/output range for which they were created. If the input/output range is re-parameterized to another input/output range, the factory calibration values are used once again for this range. The user calibration values still exist. When you start a user calibration in the new input/output range, the new calibration values are saved for this new input/output range. The user calibration values of the previous input/output range are overwritten because only one user calibration can be saved per channel. If you do not start user calibration and switch back to the previous input/output range, the previous user calibration values will be in effect once again. Other channel parameters (e.g., interference frequency suppression) have no effect on the validity of the calibration values. User calibration of analog modules 26 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Performing user calibration 5.8 Calibration counter 5.8 Calibration counter Each error-free and complete user calibration of a channel is counted. More than 255 calibration processes do not increase the calibration counter. The current counter status (including ongoing calibration) is displayed in calibration step = 1 together with the currently determined calibration values. When you acknowledge this calibration step with the job data set, the calibration counter is saved retentively with the determined user calibration values and will be in effect. Each command = 5 (Restore factory calibration) or 6 (Reset) deletes the calibration counter. A re-parameterization of the input/output ranges does not delete the calibration counter. When you start a user calibration in the new input/output range, the calibration counter is reset and starts counting from 1 again. If you do not start user calibration and switch back to the previous input/output range, the previous user calibration values will be in effect once again. 5.9 Behavior at CPU-STOP Reading and writing of data sets is not possible in CPU STOP. 5.10 Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during calibration Each parameter data set that comes in during an ongoing user calibration results in the calibration being aborted. The acknowledgment data set is updated with a corresponding error message. User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 27 6 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) All processes described below are based on the initial state of the acknowledgment data set. Byte Element Value 0 Mode 3: normal channel processing 1 Status/error code >0 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step FFH* 4 Input/output type 0 5 Input/output range 0 6 User action 0: None 7 Input/output size 0 8 Calibration counter 0 9 Reserved 0 10 Date1 0 12 Date2 0 14 Date3 0 16 Terminal1 0 17 Terminal2 0 * The calibration step can only take place immediately after run-up FFH. After completion/abort of a calibration step, "0 = no more steps" is signaled. Only the data necessary for the current calibration step are entered in the job/ acknowledgment data set. The command and the channel number must remain the same for each job data set of a calibration sequence; otherwise, the calibration is aborted. The calibration step must be transferred to the analog module again in each job data set according to the last acknowledgment data set. The start is an exception. The channel must be parameterized. A job data set may only be transferred to the analog module with status > 00H. The current calibration step is to be executed with identifier = 1 in the job data set. User calibration of analog modules 28 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.1 Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer) 6.1.1.1 Step A: Start Job data set: Start the user calibration with channel X. The specified substitute value behavior of the inputs and the substitute value apply to the triggered calibration and are evaluated and applied by the analog module during the initial call only. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step FFH: Start 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Datem3 16 Substitute value 0: retain last value User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 29 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: The analog module acknowledges the change to user calibration (mode = 2) with channel = X and status = 00H (OK, Working). As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The input/output range currently set on this channel as well as the number of required calibration steps is signaled. The analog module requests channel X in the next calibration step; short-circuit at terminals Y and Z. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step FFH 4 more steps 4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire 5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std. 6 User action 1: Short-circuit 7 Input/output size 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 Y 17 Terminal2 Z User calibration of analog modules 30 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.1.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 4. The requested action (short-circuit terminals Y, Z) is finished. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 4 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 31 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests channel X in the next calibration step; infeed; remove connections. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 4 3 more steps 4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire 5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std. 6 User action 4: Remove connections 7 Input/output size 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 Y 17 Terminal2 Z User calibration of analog modules 32 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.1.3 Step C: Intermediate step Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 3. The requested action (remove connections at terminals Y, Z) is finished. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 3 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 33 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests channel X in the next calibration step; infeed 390.5 at terminals Y and Z. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 3 2 more steps 4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire 5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std. 6 User action 2: Infeed 7 Input/output size 5: Ohm 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 390 12 Date2 500 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 Y 17 Terminal2 Z User calibration of analog modules 34 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.1.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 2. The requested action (infeed 390.5 at terminals Y, Z) is finished. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 2 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 35 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The calibration values determined by the analog module are signaled (identified by measured variable = 3). The offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if present). The number of successful calibration processes is signaled for this input/output range in the calibration counter. 1 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means the last calibration step. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 2 1 more step 4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire 5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std. 6 User action 0: None 7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values 8 Calibration counter X: 1 ... 255 9 Reserved 10 Date1 Offset 12 Date2 Gain 14 Date3 Add1 16 Date4 Add2 User calibration of analog modules 36 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.1.5 Step E: Closure Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 1. The synchronization values signaled by the analog module are accepted. You must enter the date and the time with measured variable = 4 in S7 BCD format as of byte 10. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 1 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date/time 4: Date/time Date and time in S7 BCD format Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal channel processing), the determined calibration values and date/time are applied and saved. 0 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means no more calibration steps. Calibration complete. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 3: normal channel processing 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 1 0 (ready now) 4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire 5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std. 6 User action 0 7 Input/output size 0 8 Calibration counter 0 9 Reserved 0 10 Date1 0 12 Date2 0 14 Date3 0 16 Terminal1 0 17 Terminal2 0 User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 37 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.2 Example: Analog output module +/-10 V 6.1.2.1 Step A: Start Job data set: Start the user calibration with channel X. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step FFH: Start 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules 38 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: The analog module acknowledges the change to user calibration (mode = 2) with channel = X and status = 00H (OK, Working). As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The input/output range currently set on this channel as well as the number of required calibration steps is signaled. The analog module requests channel X in the first calibration step; measuring at terminals Y and Z. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step FFH 3 more steps 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 3: Measurement 7 Input/output size 1: mV 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 Y 17 Terminal2 Z User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 39 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.2.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 3. The requested action (voltage measuring at terminals Y, Z) is finished. The measured voltage is transferred to the analog module in Date1 in the unit specified under measured variable. The place in front of the decimal point of the voltage in mV is entered in Date1, and the value after the decimal point of the voltage in mV multiplied by 1000 is entered in Date2. Example: 15.6 mV. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 3 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 15 12 Date2 600 14 Date3 16 Substitute value 1: mV User calibration of analog modules 40 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests channel X in the next calibration step; measuring at terminals Y and Z. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 3 2 more steps 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 3: Measurement 7 Input/output size 1: mV 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 Y 17 Terminal2 Z User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 41 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.2.3 Step C: Intermediate step Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 2. The requested action (voltage measuring at terminals Y, Z) is finished. The measured voltage is transferred to the analog module in Date1 in the unit specified under measured variable. The place in front of the decimal point of the voltage in mV is entered in Date1, and the value after the decimal point of the voltage in mV multiplied by 1000 is entered in Date2. Example: 9986.3 mV. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 2 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 9986 12 Date2 300 14 Date3 16 Substitute value 1: mV User calibration of analog modules 42 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The calibration values determined by the analog module are signaled (identified by measured variable = 3). The offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if present). The number of successful calibration processes is signaled for this input/output range in the calibration counter. 1 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means the last calibration step. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 2 1 more step 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 0: None 7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values 8 Calibration counter X: 1 ... 255 9 Reserved 10 Date1 Offset 12 Date2 Gain 14 Date3 Add1 16 Date4 Add2 User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 43 Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) 6.1.2.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 1. The synchronization values signaled by the analog module are accepted. You must enter the date and the time with measured variable = 4 in S7 BCD format as of Date1. Byte Element Value 0 Command 2: User calibration 1 Identifier 1: Execute 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 1 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 4: Date/time Date and time in S7 BCD format User calibration of analog modules 44 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal channel processing), the determined calibration values and date/time are applied and saved. 0 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means no more calibration steps. Calibration complete. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 2: User calibration 3: normal channel processing 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 1 0 (ready now) 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 0 7 Input/output size 0 8 Calibration counter 0 9 Reserved 0 10 Date1 0 12 Date2 0 14 Date3 0 16 Terminal1 0 17 Terminal2 0 User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 45 Example 6.2 Abort (mode = 3) 6.2 Abort (mode = 3) 6.2.1 User abort Job data set: An ongoing calibration can be aborted in any calibration step and in any state, even with status = 00H (OK, Working), with the command = 3 (Abort, channel processing). Byte Element Value 0 Command 3: Abort, channel processing 1 Identifier 2 Channel number 3 Calibration step 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value X User calibration of analog modules 46 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.2 Abort (mode = 3) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (abort, normal channel processing), the calibration of channel X is aborted. The channel has the same state as before the calibration. The input/output range currently set on the channel is signaled. 6.2.2 Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 3: Abort, channel processing 3: Abort, channel processing 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 0 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 0 7 Input/output size 0 8 Calibration counter 0 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 17 Terminal2 Module abort If the analog module detects an error during a calibration process, this error aborts the calibration. The error code is signaled in the status. See also Calibration exit (Page 22) User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 47 Example 6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4) 6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4) All current calibration values of an analog module channel are read with command = 4 (Read calibration values); these are either the values from the factory calibration or the user calibration. The command is only permitted in status > 00H. The channel number must be specified and the calibration step must be set to FFH (Start). 6.3.1 Step A: Start Job data set: Byte Element Value 0 Command 4: Read calibration values 1 Identifier 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step FFH: Start 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules 48 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. Measured variable = 3 identifies the data as of Date1 as calibration values. Only the current calibration values of the specified channel are read with command = 4; these are the calibration values associated with the parameterized input/output range. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 4: Read calibration values 4: Read calibration values 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step FFH 1 more step 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 0: None 7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values 8 Calibration counter X: 0 ... 255 9 Reserved 0 10 Date1 Offset 12 Date2 Gain 14 Date3 Add1 16 Date4 Add2 The input/output range currently set on the channel is signaled. The offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if present). The calibration counter specifies if the values are factory calibration values (calibration counter = 0) or user calibration values (calibration counter > 0). For user calibration values, the value of the calibration counter is equal to the number of successful calibration processes for this input/output range (since the last user calibration of a different input/output range). Calibration step = 1 indicates that one more step is necessary. User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 49 Example 6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4) 6.3.2 Step B: Closure Job data set: Acknowledge calibration step 1. Byte Element Value 0 Command 4: Read calibration values 1 Identifier 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step 1 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. Measured variable = 4 identifies the data as of Date1 Time stamp. A time stamp that matches the previously read calibration values is signaled. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 4: Read calibration values 3: normal channel processing 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step 1 0 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 0: None 7 Input/output size 4: Date/time 8 Calibration counter X: 0 ... 255 9 Reserved 10 Date/time Date and time in S7 BCD format User calibration of analog modules 50 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) 6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) Use command = 5 (Restore factory calibration) to undo the executed user calibration of the specified channel for the set input/output range. The analog module applies the calibration values determined at the factory which will be in effect again. Delete saved user calibration values. If user calibration values of the channel exist which do not belong to the set input/output range, these are not deleted. The command is only permitted in status > 00H. Specify the channel number and set the calibration step to FFH (Start). The calibration counter is set to 0 again with this command. Job data set: Byte Element Value 0 Command 5: Restore factory calibration 1 Identifier 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step FFH 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 51 Example 6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal channel processing), restoration is complete. The user calibration was deleted and the channel continues operating in the previous state with factory calibration values. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 5: Restore factory calibration 3: normal channel processing 1 Status/error code 00: OK, Working 01: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step FFH 0 (ready now) 4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage 5 Input/output range 02H: 0 ... 10 V 6 User action 7 Input/output size 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 17 Terminal2 User calibration of analog modules 52 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Example 6.5 Reset (mode = 6) 6.5 Reset (mode = 6) Use the command = 6 (Reset) to restore the factory calibration for a channel or the entire analog module regardless of the parameter assignment of the channels. The factory calibration of a channel is restored according to the channel number, and any saved user calibration values are deleted (even if the saved user calibration values do not belong to the currently set input/output range). With channel number FFH, restoration takes place for all channels of the analog module. The command is only permitted in status > 00H. Set the calibration step to FFH (Start). The channel or the analog module must not be parameterized. The involved calibration counters are set to 0 again with this command. Job data set: Byte Element Value 0 Command 6: Reset 1 Identifier 2 Channel number X 3 Calibration step FFH 4 Not relevant 5 Not relevant 6 Not relevant 7 Input/output size 8 Substitute value behavior 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Substitute value User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 53 Example 6.5 Reset (mode = 6) Acknowledgment data set: As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal channel processing), reset is complete. The user calibration values were deleted. All channels involved continue operating in their previous state with factory calibration values. Byte Element Value Value 0 Mode 6: Reset 3: normal channel processing 1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready 2 Channel number X X 3 Calibration step FFH 0 (ready now) 4 Input/output type 5 Input/output range 6 User action 7 Input/output size 8 Calibration counter 9 Reserved 10 Date1 12 Date2 14 Date3 16 Terminal1 17 Terminal2 User calibration of analog modules 54 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA A Appendix A A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels Input type format: Input channels ValueD Input type 00 Deactivated 01 Voltage 02 Current (4-wire transducer) 03 Current (2-wire transducer) 04 resistance (4-wire connection) 05 resistance (3-wire connection) 06 resistance (2-wire connection) 07 Thermal resistance (linear, 4-conductor connection) 08 Thermal resistance (linear, 3-conductor connection) 09 Thermal resistance (linear, 2-conductor connection) 10 Thermocouple Input range format: Input channels An input type that is not as listed in this table can also be used for specific modules. You must note, however, that the input type in the acknowledgment data set no longer matches the general definition. ValueD Input type For input type = 01 (voltage) 00 25 mV 01 50 mV 02 80 mV 03 250 mV 04 500 mV 05 1V 06 1.25 V 07 2.5 V 08 5V 09 10 V 10 1...5V 11 0 ... 10 V User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 55 Appendix A A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels ValueD Input type For input type = 02, 03 (current) 00 3.2 mA 01 10 mA 02 0 ... 20 mA 03 4 ... 20 mA 04 20 mA 05 5 mA For input type = 04, 05, 06 (resistor: 4-wire, 3-wire , 2-wire connection) 00 48 01 150 02 300 03 600 04 3000 05 6000 06 10000 15 PTC (DIN VDE 0660 Part 303 Type A) For input type = 07, 08, 09 (thermistor: 4-wire, 3-wire , 2-wire connection) 00 Pt100 climatic range 01 Ni100 climatic range 02 Pt100 Standard range 03 Ni100 standard range 04 Pt500 standard range 05 Pt1000 standard range 06 Ni1000 standard range 07 Pt200 climatic range 08 Pt500 climatic range 09 Pt1000 climatic range 10 Ni1000 climatic range 11 Pt200 standard range 12 Ni120 standard range 13 Ni120 climatic range 14 Cu10 climatic range 15 Cu10 standard range 16 Ni200 standard range 17 Ni200 climatic range 18 Ni500 standard range 19 Ni500 climatic range 20 Pt10 standard range 21 Pt10 climatic range 22 Pt50 standard range 23 Pt50 climatic range 24 Cu50 standard range User calibration of analog modules 56 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA Appendix A A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels ValueD Input type 25 Cu50 climatic range 26 Cu100 standard range 27 Cu100 climatic range 28 LG Ni1000 standard range 29 LG Ni1000 climatic range For input type = 10 (thermocouple) 00 Type B [PtRh-PtRh] 01 Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] 02 Type E [NiCr-CuNi] 03 Type R [PtRh-Pt] 04 Type S [PtRh-Pt] 05 Type J [Fe-CuNi] 06 Type L [Fe-CuNi] recalled since 1994 standard (DIN 43710) 07 Type T [Cu-CuNi] 08 Type K [NiCr-Ni] 09 Type U [Cu-CuNi] recalled since 1994 standard (DIN 43710) 10 Type C [W5Re-W26Re] 11 TXK/XK(L) [TXK/XK(L)] User calibration of analog modules Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 57 Appendix A A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels Output type format: Output channels An output type that is not as listed in this table can also be used for specific modules. You must note, however, that the output type in the acknowledgment data set no longer matches the general definition. ValueD Output type 00 Deactivated 01 Voltage 02 Current (4-wire transducer) 03 Current (2-wire transducer) Output range format: Output channels ValueD Output range For output type = 01 (voltage) 00 10 V 01 5V 02 0 ... 10 V 03 1...5V 04 2.5 V 05 1V For output type = 02, 03 (current) 00 20 mA 01 0 ... 20 mA 02 4 ... 20 mA User calibration of analog modules 58 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA SIMATIC ET 200SP Open Controller Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Product Information Validity This product information supplements the documentation for the ET 200SP Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF), edition 09/2018. The information provided in it should be considered more up-to-date if uncertainties arise. The described function restrictions apply exclusively to the Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) V2.5. Technical update Acronis backup is not supported The Acronis backup is not supported in the current version - please use Image Partition Creator. No activation of the Windows copy If you do not have an Internet connection, you do not need to activate the Windows copy. There are no functional restrictions. Display of processor temperature by SIMATIC IPC DiagBase The SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software shows only the temperature of the CPU. The temperature of the motherboard and work memory are currently not displayed. Changing the boot order The boot order changes automatically when a DVD drive with USB connection is connected to the Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC2 V2.5. Restrictions when using the power management function The power management function helps to maximize the performance of your PC or to save energy. Activating the "Power saver" function may restrict the functions of the software controller. Key combination during initial commissioning To ensure that the initial initialization is complete, do not use the key combination during the initialization phase. Restriction to one monitor Use only one monitor. If several monitors are used simultaneously, undefined states may occur in the system. Cables for connecting the DisplayPorts Use only the following cables to connect the DisplayPorts: DisplayPort cable, length: 5 m, E74020-C AWM Style 20276, 80C, 30 V, VW-1 (with integrated ferrite cores at both ends) DisplayPort cable, length: 3 m, 6AV7860-0DH30-0AA0 DisplayPort cable, length: 5 m, 6AV7860-0DH50-0AA0 4 (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018 Changes to section 12.4: Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions The tables below show the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. Table 1 Mechanical environmental conditions for BA 2xRJ45 Frequency range 5 Hz f 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude 8.4 Hz f 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration Table 2 Mechanical environmental conditions for BA 2xFC Frequency range 5 Hz f 8.2 Hz 7.5 mm amplitude 8.2 Hz f 500 Hz 2 g constant acceleration The following table provides information about the type and scope of the tests for environmental mechanical conditions. Table 3 Tests for mechanical environmental conditions Test for ... Test standard Comment Vibrations Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 (sine) Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. BA 2xRJ45 * 5 Hz f 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude * 8.4 Hz f 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration BA 2xFC * 5 Hz f 8.2 Hz, 7.5 mm constant amplitude * 8.2 Hz f 500 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three perpendicular axes Shock Shock, tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: Half-sine Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks in +/- direction in each of three perpendicular axes Changes to section 11.5: Windows language packages Provided language packages Chinese (Simplified) German English French Italian Spanish Storage location of the language packages The language packages on the restore USB stick are provided under \LanguagesPackages\. Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018 5 Installation of the language packs 1. To start a console session, open the "Run" dialog, for example, with . 2. Enter the following command: pksetup.exe 3. Click "OK" to confirm. 4. The "Install or uninstall display languages" window opens. 5. Click on "Install display languages". 6. Select the display language to be installed by clicking on "Browse". 7. Navigate to the folder containing the display languages and confirm with "OK". 8. The selected language package is displayed in the "Install or uninstall display languages" window. 9. Click on "Next" and follow the instructions of the installation wizard. Maximum current consumption The max. current consumption is: 2.9 A Ambient temperature during operation A temperature range of -20 C bis 60 C is approved for operation. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018 6 Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018 CPU 1510SP-1 PN ___________________ Preface (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4 ___________ 5 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimension drawing 09/2016 A5E33589074-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33589074-AC 08/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2016. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual as well as the function manuals. This manual contains a description of the module-specific information. The system-related functions are described in the system manual. All system-spanning functions are described in the function manuals. The information provided in this manual and the system manual allows you to commission the CPU 1510SP-1 PN. Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe the notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 3 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 ................................................................................. 11 2.2 Operating principle ................................................................................................................. 14 2.3 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 15 2.4 2.4.1 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................ 21 Front view of the module with BusAdapter ............................................................................ 21 2.5 Mode switch ........................................................................................................................... 22 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 23 3.1 4 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 23 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 27 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU ...................................................................................... 27 5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 30 A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 42 CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 2 Product overview 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 New functions of the CPU in firmware version V2.0 This section lists the new features of the CPU with firmware version V2.0. You can find additional information in the sections of this manual. Table 2- 1 New functions of the CPU with firmware version 2.0 compared with firmware version V1.8 New functions Applications OPC UA server You realize the data communication between OPC UA is a unified standard for data communidifferent systems, both within the process level cation and is independent of any particular operand on the control and enterprise levels: ating system platforms. * To embedded systems with controllers * To controllers with MES systems and systems of the enterprise level (ERP, asset systems) * To Siemens controllers with controllers from other manufacturers * To intelligent sensors with controllers Supported standard: OPC Data Access, DA. Customer benefits You have integrated security mechanisms on different automation systems, for example, for data exchange, on the application level, for authentication of the user. OPC UA servers provide a large amount of data: * Values of PLC tags that clients can access * Data types of these PLC tags Information about the OPC UA server itself and the CPU In this way, clients can gain an overview and can read and write values. * PROFINET IO MRPD: Media Redundancy for Planned Duplication for IRT PROFINET IO IRT enables you to realize applications that place particularly high demands on failure safety and accuracy (isochronous). By sending the cyclic IO data in both directions in the ring, the communication to the IO devices is maintained even when the ring is interrupted and does not result in device failure even with fast update times. You achieve higher failure safety than with MRP. PROFINET performance upgrade You can develop applications with high demands on speed and clock cycles. This is interesting for applications with high demands on performance. Better utilization of the bandwidth results in short reaction times. Limitation of the data infeed into the network You limit the network load for standard Ethernet communication to a maximum value. You smooth peaks in the data infeed. You share the remaining bandwidth based on requirements. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 11 Product overview 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 New functions Applications Customer benefits Backing up and restoring via the Web server You can, for example, backup and restore the configuration of the CPU to the PG/PC on which the Web server is running. You can make a backup copy of an operational project without STEP 7. Web server provides up to three project languages for comments and alarm texts When you export your plants worldwide, for You provide customers with better service. example, comments or alarm texts can be stored on the card in up to 3 languages. For example, German - author's language, English - internationally usable, Portuguese - end user's language. Trace via Web server When you enable trace functions via the Web server, you have better service support. You can send your trace recordings via Web service, for example, to your service partner. Web server Monitoring of configYou can monitor statuses, errors, technology ured technology obalarms and the current values of technology jects via a Web server objects (TOs) with the Web server. In an "emergency", you can simply use an existing configuration without STEP 7, for example, during commissioning or after a program download. You get plant/project information for diagnostics and maintenance requirements without STEP 7. You can provide trace recordings for each Web server. You save time in troubleshooting. Motion control Greater number of axes for Motion Control applications and new technology objects: Output cam, cam track and measuring input Speed specification, e.g. for: * Pumps, fans, mixers * Conveyor belts * Auxiliary drives Positioning tasks, e.g.: * Lifting and vertical conveyors * Feeding and gate control You can implement additional Motion Control applications with a CPU. The scalable configuration limits allow you to handle all types of application. High machine speeds result in greater productivity with better accuracy. * Palletizing equipment Output cams and cam tracks make other applications possible, e.g.: * Applying glue tracks * Triggering switching operations with precise positioning Very precise processing of products on a conveyor belt Measuring inputs are used, for example: * * For measuring products * For detecting the position of the product on a conveyor belt CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Product overview 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 New functions Applications Customer benefits You can set up a simple connection of IP 65/67 I/O to the CPU. You do not have to individually run sensors or actuators at the central control cabinet to the different sections of a machine or assembly line. ET 200SP Support for ET 200AL in a central configuration You can connect up to 16 ET 200AL I/O modules via a BA send module on the central bus of the ET 200SP CPU. The distance between two ET 200AL modules can be up to 15 m. You can realize the use of ET 200AL in assembly and handling engineering directly at moving parts, for example in linear axes or drag chains. Increasing the address space in the station For example, you can use up to 49 ET 200SP energy meter modules behind an ET 200SP CPU. You save time and costs: * Through lightweight construction * Reduction of wear and exposure to vibration * Increased productivity A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048 bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes for ET 200AL modules) is available in the station. The address space has been increased to 288 bytes per module. Support for communications processors CP 1542SP-1 Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet interface; network separation. CP 1542SP-1 IRC Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3 and IEC. CP 1543SP-1 ISEC With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection) and VPN protocol (IPSec), the communications processor protects ET200SP stations and subordinate networks against unauthorized access, and employs encryption to protect data transmission against manipulation and espionage. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 13 Product overview 2.2 Operating principle 2.2 Operating principle The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user program. The user program is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the work memory of the CPU. The PROFINET interfaces on the CPU allow simultaneous communication with PROFINET devices, PROFINET controllers, HMI devices, programming devices, other controllers and other systems. The CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports operation as an IO controller, I-device or standalone CPU. With its optional PROFIBUS interface, CM DP, CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports the configuration of PROFIBUS networks in addition to PROFINET IO. When you use the interface as a PROFIBUS DP interface, you can configure the CPU 1510SP-1 PN as a DP master or as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave). IO controller CPU 1510SP-1 PN sends and receives data from the connected IO devices within a PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with a maximum of 64 connected IO devices, a maximum of 64 of which use IRT (Isochronous Real Time). I-device The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality allows you to exchange data with an IOcontroller. CPU 1510SP-1 PN thus fulfills the role of an intelligent distributed preprocessing unit for sub-processes. The I-device is connected as an IO device to a higherlevel IO controller for this purpose. Advantages: Interference-resistant configuration due to short signal and encoder wiring Reduced wiring requirements for transmission of the data via PROFINET Standalone CPU You can also use the CPU 1510SP-1 PN in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a "central system" without a higher-level controller. DP master To use the ET 200SP as a DP master, you need the CPU and the optional communication module, CM DP. When used as a DP master, ET 200SP exchanges data with the connected DP slaves via PROFIBUS DP. Intelligent DP slave (I-slave) To use the ET 200SP as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave), you need the CPU and the optional communication module, CM DP. As an I-slave, the ET 200SP CPU is connected via PROFIBUS DP to a higher-level DP master and exchanges data with it. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Product overview 2.3 Properties 2.3 Properties Article number 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 View of the module The following figure shows the CPU 1510SP-1 PN. Figure 2-1 CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 15 Product overview 2.3 Properties Properties The CPU 1510SP-1 PN has the following technical properties: Communication: - Interfaces The CPU 1510SP-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1 P3) with an integrated 3-port switch. Port 1 and port 2 are located on the optionally pluggable BusAdapter. Port 3 is integrated in the housing of the CPU. The CPU supports the BusAdapters BA 2xRJ45 and BA 2xFC. You connect the PROFINET IO to the CPU via the BusAdapter. In addition to PROFINET basic functionality, the interface also supports PROFINET IO RT (real-time) and IRT (isochronous real-time). PROFINET IO communication or real-time settings can be configured. The basic functionality of PROFINET supports HMI communication, communication with the configuration system, communication with a higher-level network (backbone, router, Internet) and communication with another machine or automation cell. Port 1 and port 2 can also be used as ring ports for the configuration of redundant ring structures in Ethernet. Note The CPU is delivered without a BusAdapter. You can find the article numbers of the supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the ET 200SP distributed automation system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. The CM DP is optionally available with a PROFIBUS interface (X2). You can find additional information about this expansion module in the manual Communication module CM DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90156526). You can find information about connecting the PROFINET IO BusAdapter to the CPU as well as connecting the optional PROFIBUS interface to the interface module in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). - OPC UA With OPC UA, data is exchanged via an open and vendor-neutral communication protocol. The CPU, as OPC UA server, can communicate with OPC UA clients such as HMI panels, SCADA systems, etc. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Product overview 2.3 Properties Integrated Web server: A Web server is integrated in the CPU. You can read out the following information with the Web server: - Start page with general CPU information - Identification information - Contents of the diagnostics buffer - Query of module states - Firmware update - Alarms (without acknowledgment option) - Information about communication - PROFINET topology - Tag status, writing tags - Watch tables - Memory usage - User pages - Data logs (if used) - Online backup and restoration of the configuration. - Diagnostic information for the motion control technology objects - Display of trace recordings stored on the SIMATIC memory card - Readout service data - Basic Web pages - Display of the Web server in 3 project languages, for example, comments and message texts - Recipes - User-defined Web pages CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 17 Product overview 2.3 Properties Integrated technology: - Motion Control The Motion Control functionality uses technology objects to support speed-controlled axes, positioning axes, synchronous axes, external encoders, cams, cam tracks and measuring inputs, as well as PLCopen blocks for programming the motion control functionality. You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in the S7-1500 Motion Control (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109739589) function manual. You can also use the TIA Selection Tool (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool) or the SIZER (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/mc-solutions/en/engineering-software/drive-design-toolsizer/Pages/drive-design-tool-sizer.aspx) to create or configure axes. - Integrated closed-loop control functionality - PID Compact (continuous PID controller) - PID 3Step (step controller for integrating actuators) - PID Temp (temperature controller for heating and cooling with two separate actuators) Trace functionality: - Trace functionality supports you in troubleshooting and optimizing the user program, especially for motion control or closed-loop control applications. Trace only supports saves measurements on a SIMATIC memory card. You will find additional information on "Trace" in the Using the trace and logic analyzer function (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/64897128) function manual. Integrated system diagnostics: - The alarms for the system diagnostics are automatically created by the system and displayed on a PG/PC, HMI device or the Web server. System diagnostics information is also available when the CPU is in STOP mode. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Product overview 2.3 Properties Integrated security: - Know-how protection The assignment of passwords protects user blocks against unauthorized access and modifications. - Copy protection Copy protection links user blocks to the serial number of the SIMATIC memory card or to the serial number of the CPU. User programs cannot run without the corresponding SIMATIC memory card or CPU. - Access protection Extended access protection provides high-quality protection against unauthorized configuration changes. You can use authorization levels to assign separate rights to different user groups. - Integrity protection The system protects the data transferred to the CPU against manipulation. The CPU detects erroneous or manipulated engineering data. You can find additional information on the topic of "Protection" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Support for ET 200AL - Simple connection of IP 65/67 I/O modules to the CPU. Communication CPs - CP 1542SP-1: Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet interface; network separation. - CP 1542SP-1 IRC: Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3 and IEC. - CP 1543SP-1 ISEC: With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection) and VPN protocol (IPSec), the communications processor protects ET200SP stations and subordinate networks against unauthorized access, and employs encryption to protect data transmission against manipulation and espionage. Address space - A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048 bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes for ET 200AL modules) is available within the station. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 19 Product overview 2.3 Properties CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports the following additional functions: - PROFIenergy You can find information on the topic of "PROFIenergy" in the PROFINET function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) and in the PROFINET specification on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com). - Shared device You can find information on the topic of "Shared device" in the PROFINET function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). - Configuration control You can find information on the topic of "Configuration control" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). - Isochronous mode You can find information about the "Isochronous mode" topic in the PROFINET (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Product overview 2.4 Operating and display elements 2.4 Operating and display elements 2.4.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter The figure on the left shows the CPU 1510SP-1 PN including a plugged BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter. The figure on the right shows a separate view of the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter. Mounting rail release Port P3 of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket Labeling strips LEDs for status and error displays LED for display of the supply voltage Mode switch Slot for the SIMATIC memory card Connection for supply voltage (included in product package) Cable support and attachment for port P3 of the PROFINET interface LEDs for status displays of the PROFINET interface: LK1 and LK2 on BusAdapter, LK3 on CPU Separate view of the BusAdapter Port P1 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy Port P2 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy Figure 2-2 Front view of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN with BusAdapter CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 21 Product overview 2.5 Mode switch 2.5 Mode switch Use the mode switch to set the CPU operating mode. The following table shows the position of the switch and the corresponding meaning. Table 2- 2 Mode switch settings Position Meaning Explanation RUN RUN mode The CPU is executing the user program. STOP STOP mode The user program is not being executed. MRES Memory reset Position for CPU memory reset. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment This section provides information on the pin assignment of the individual interfaces and the block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN. 24 V DC supply voltage (X80) The connector for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU ships from the factory. The figure below shows the pin assignment for 24 V DC supply voltage. Ground of the supply voltage Ground of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted) +24 V DC of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted) Spring NC contacts + 24 V DC of the supply voltage Internally jumpered: and and Figure 3-1 Supply voltage connection PROFINET IO interface on the CPU (X1 P3) The assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 connector. When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X). If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 23 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The assignment at the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 connector. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 View Designation * When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X). * If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X). PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The following table shows the pin assignment for the PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC. Table 3- 2 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC View Signal name Designation 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - Reference You can find additional information on the topics of "Connecting the CPU" and "Accessories/spare parts" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment Assignment of the MAC addresses The MAC address is a globally unique device identifier that is assigned to each PROFINET device in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes for the device ID (serial number). The front of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN is lasered with the MAC address of the PROFINET interface. The PROFINET interface (X1) of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN has three ports. Port 3 is located on the CPU. Ports 1 and 2 are located on the optional BusAdapter. In addition to the PROFINET interface, each PROFINET port also has a separate MAC address. There is therefore a total of four MAC addresses for the CPU 1510SP-1 PN. The MAC addresses of the PROFINET ports are needed for the LLDP protocol, for example for the neighborhood discovery function. The table below shows how the MAC addresses are assigned. Table 3- 3 Assignment of the MAC addresses Assignment MAC address 1 PROFINET interface X1 * Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices * Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range) MAC address 2 Port X1 P1 R (required for LLDP, for example) MAC address 3 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example) MAC address 4 Port X1 P3 (required for LLDP, for example) CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 25 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN. PROFINET switch P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 Electronics P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 Backplane bus interface P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3 Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage RUN/STOP/MRES mode selector M Ground X5 BusAdapter LK1, 2, 3 LED Link TX/RX X50 SIMATIC memory card R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green) X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red) MT MAINT LED (yellow) PWR POWER LED (green) Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4 The status and error displays of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN are described below. You will find additional information on "Interrupts" in the STEP 7 online help. You can find additional information on the topics of "Diagnostics" and "System alarms" in the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual. 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN and the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter. RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED) ERROR LED (red LED) MAINT LED (yellow LED) LINK RX/TX LED for ports X1 P1 and X1 P2 (green LEDs on BusAdapter) POWER LED (green LED) LINK RX/TX LED for port X1 P3 (green LED on CPU) Figure 4-1 LED displays on the CPU and BusAdapter CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 27 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU Meaning of the POWER, RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs CPU 1510SP-1 PN features an LED for monitoring the supply voltage of the electronics (PWR) and three LEDs for displaying the current operating and diagnostics status. The following table shows the meaning of the various combinations of colors for the POWER, RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs. Table 4- 1 Meaning of the LEDs POWER LED RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED LED off LED off LED off LED off LED lit green LED off LED flashes red LED off Meaning Missing or insufficient power supply on the CPU. An error has occurred. CPU is in RUN mode. LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED off A diagnostics event is pending. LED lit green LED lit green LED flashes red LED off LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED lit yellow Maintenance demanded for the plant. The affected hardware must be checked/replaced within a short period of time. Active Force job PROFIenergy pause LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED flashes yellow Maintenance required for the plant. The affected hardware must be checked/replaced within a foreseeable period of time. Bad configuration Firmware update successfully completed. LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED flashes yellow CPU is in STOP mode. LED lit green LED lit green LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED off LED lit yellow LED flashes red LED flashes yellow LED flashes yellow LED off LED off The program on the SIMATIC memory card is causing an error. CPU defective CPU is performing internal activities during STOP, e.g. startup after STOP. Download of the user program from the SIMATIC memory card Startup (transition from RUN STOP) LED lit green LED flashes yellow/green LED off LED off Startup (CPU booting) LED lit green LED flashes yellow/green LED flashes red LED flashes yellow Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a module. LED flashing test CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU Meaning of the LINK LED Each port has a LINK LED (LK1, LK2, LK3). The table below shows the various "LED scenarios" of the ports of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN. Table 4- 2 Meaning of the LEDs LINK LED LED off Meaning There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the PROFINET device and the communication partner. No data is currently being sent/received via the PROFINET interface. There is no LINK connection. The "LED flashing test" is being performed. LED flashes green LED lit green There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner. CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 29 5 Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1510SP-1 PN Hardware function version FS03 Firmware version V2.0 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 Configuration control Via data record Yes Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure buffering Power/voltage failure buffer time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value It 0.14 As Power Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 5.6 W Memory Number of slots for SIMATIC memory card 1 SIMATIC memory card required Yes Work memory Integrated (for program) 100 KB Integrated (for data) 750 KB Load memory Plug-in (SIMATIC memory card), max. 32 GB Buffering Maintenance-free Yes CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 CPU processing times For bit operations, typ. 72 ns For word operations, typ. 86 ns For fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 115 ns For floating-point arithmetic, typ. 461 ns CPU blocks Number of elements (total) 2000; blocks (OB/FB/FC/DB) and UDTs DB Number range 1 ... 60 999; divided into: Number range that can be used by user: 1 ... 59 999 and number range for DBs generated by SFC 86: 60 000 ... 60 999 Size, max. 750 KB; for absolutely addressed DBs, the max. size is 64 KB FB Number range 0 ... 65 535 Size, max. 100 KB FC Number range 0 ... 65 535 Size, max. 100 KB OB Size, max. 100 KB Number of free-cycle OBs 100 Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 20 Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 20 Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20 Number of hardware interrupt OBs 50 Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3 Number of isochronous mode OBs 1 Number of technology synchronous interrupt OBs 2 Number of startup OBs 100 Number of asynchronous error OBs 4 Number of synchronous error OBs 2 Number of diagnostic interrupt OBs 1 Nesting depth Per priority class 24 Counters, timers and their retentivity S7 counters Quantity 2048 Retentivity * can be set Yes CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 31 Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 IEC counters Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory) Retentivity * can be set Yes S7 timers Quantity 2048 Retentivity * can be set Yes IEC timers Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory) Retentivity * can be set Yes Data areas and their retentivity Total retentive data area (including timers, counters, bit memories), max. 128 KB; for bit memories, timers, counters, DBs and technological data (axes), usable retentive memory: 88 KB Bit memory Number, max. 16 KB Number of clock memories 8; there are 8 clock memory bits, grouped in one clock memory byte Data blocks Retentivity can be set Yes Retentivity preset No Local data Per priority class, max. 64 KB; max. 16 KB per block Address area Number of IO modules 1024; max. number of modules/submodules I/O address area Inputs 32 KB; all inputs are in the process image Outputs 32 KB; all outputs are in the process image Of which per integrated IO subsystem * Inputs (volume) 8 KB * Outputs (volume) 8 KB Of which per CM/CP * Inputs (volume) 8 KB * Outputs (volume) 8 KB Process image partitions Number of process image partitions, max. 32 Address space per module Address space per module, max. 288 bytes; for both input and output data CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 Address space per station Address space per station, max. 2560 bytes; for central inputs and outputs; depending on configuration; 2048 bytes for ET 200SP modules + 512 bytes for ET 200AL modules Hardware configuration Number of distributed IO systems 32; a distributed IO system is understood to mean the integration of distributed I/O via PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication modules as well as the connection of I/O via AS-i master modules or links (e.g. IE/PB link) Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Number of IO controllers Integrated 1 Via CM 0 Rack Modules per rack, max. 80; CPU + 64 modules + server module (configuration width max. 1 m) + 16 ET 200AL modules Number of rows, max. 1 PtP CM Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs that can be connected is only limited by the available slots Time Clock Type Hardware clock Backup duration 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Operating hours counter Quantity 16 Time-of-day synchronization Supported Yes On DP, master Yes; via CM DP module On DP, slave Yes; via CM DP module In AS, master Yes In AS, slave Yes On Ethernet via NTP Yes Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module With optical interface No CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 33 Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 3; 1st integrated + 2nd via BusAdapter Integrated switch Yes RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; X1 P3; opt. X1 P1 and X1 P2 via BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC Protocols PROFINET IO controller Yes PROFINET IO device Yes SIMATIC communication Yes Open IE communication Yes Web server Yes Media redundancy Yes PROFINET IO controller Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Isochronous mode Yes * Open IE communication Yes * IRT Yes * MRP Yes; as MRP redundancy manager and/or MRP client; max. number of devices in the ring: 50 * MRPD Yes; requirement: IRT * PROFIenergy Yes * Prioritized startup Yes; max. 32 PROFINET devices * Number of connectable IO devices, max. 64; a total of up to 256 distributed I/O devices can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or PROFINET * of these, IO devices with IRT, max. 64 * Number of connectable IO devices for RT, max. 64 * of these, in a line topology, max. 64 * Number of IO devices that can be activated/deactivated simultaneously, max. 8; in total over all interfaces * Number of IO devices per tool, max. 8 * Update times The minimum value of the update time also depends on the communication allocation setting for PROFINET IO, the number of IO devices and the amount of configured user data CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 Update time with IRT * With send clock of 250 s 250 s to 4 ms; note: with IRT with isochronous mode, the minimum update time of 625 s of the isochronous OB is crucial * With send clock of 500 s 500 s to 8 ms; note: with IRT with isochronous mode, the minimum update time of 625 s of the isochronous OB is crucial * With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 16 ms * with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 32 ms * with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 64 ms * with IRT and "odd" send clock parameter assignment Update time = set "odd" send clock (any multiple of 125 s: 375 s, 625 s to 3 875 s) Update time with RT * With send clock of 250 s 250 s to 128 ms * With send clock of 500 s 500 s to 256 ms * With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms * with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 512 ms * with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 512 ms PROFINET IO device Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Isochronous mode No * Open IE communication Yes * IRT Yes * MRP Yes * MRPD Yes; requirement: IRT * PROFIenergy Yes * Shared device Yes * Number of IO controllers with shared device, max. 4 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module Protocols PROFIBUS DP master Yes PROFIBUS DP slave Yes SIMATIC communication Yes CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 35 Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 Interface hardware RJ45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Protocols Number of connections Number of connections, max. 96 Number of connections reserved for ES/HMI/Web 10 Number of connections via integrated interfaces 64 Number of connections per CP/CM 32 Number of S7 routing connections 16 SIMATIC communication S7 communication, as server Yes S7 communication, as client Yes User data per job, max. See online help (S7 communication, user data size) Open IE communication TCP/IP Yes * Data length, max. 64 KB * Multiple passive connections per port, supported Yes ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) * Data length, max. UDP * Data length, max. Yes 64 KB Yes 1472 bytes DHCP No SNMP Yes DCP Yes LLDP Yes Web server HTTP Yes; standard and user-defined pages HTTPS Yes; standard and user-defined pages CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 PROFIBUS DP master Number of connections, max. 48 Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Data record routing Yes * Isochronous mode No * Constant bus cycle time No * Number of DP slaves 125; a total of up to 256 distributed I/O devices can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or PROFINET * Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes OPC UA OPC UA server Yes; Data Access (Read, Write, Subscribe), Runtime license required * Application authentication Yes * Security Policies Available Security Policies: None, Basic128Rsa15, Basic256Rsa15, Basic256Sha256 * User authentication "Anonymous" or with user name and password Additional protocols MODBUS Yes; MODBUS TCP Media redundancy Switchover time in the case of cable break, typ. 200 ms; with MRP; bumpless with MRPD Number of devices in the ring, max. 50 Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes; only with PROFINET; with a minimum OB terminal) 6x cycle of 625 s S7 signaling functions Number of stations that can be logged in for signaling functions, max. 32 Block-related alarms Yes Number of configurable interrupts, max. 5000 Number of simultaneously active interrupts in interrupt pool * Number of reserved user interrupts 300 * Number of reserved interrupts for system diagnostics 100 * Number of reserved interrupts for motion control technology objects 80 CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 37 Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 Test/commissioning functions Shared commissioning (Team Engineering) Status block Single-step Status/modify Status/modify tag Tags Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3 engineering systems Yes; up to 8 simultaneously (in total over all ES clients) No Yes Inputs/outputs, bit memory, DB, peripheral inputs/outputs, timers, counters Number of tags, max. * Of which are status tags, max. 200; per job * Of which are modify tags, max. 200; per job Forcing Forcing Forcing, tags Number of tags, max. Diagnostics buffer Available Number of entries, max. * Of which are power failure-proof Traces Number of configurable traces Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics display LED RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Connection display LINK TX/RX Supported technology objects Motion control * Number of available motion control resources for technology objects (except cams) * Required Motion Control resources Yes Peripheral inputs/outputs 200 Yes 1000 500 4; up to 512 KB data possible per trace Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes; note: the number of axes affects the cycle time of the PLC program; selection guide via the TIA Selection Tool or SIZER 800 - per speed-controlled axis 40 - per positioning axis 80 - per synchronous axis 160 - per external encoder 80 - per output cam 20 - per cam track 160 - per measuring input 40 CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 Controller * PID_Compact Yes; universal PID controller with integrated optimization * PID_3Step Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization for valves * PID temp Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization for temperature Counting and measuring * High-speed counter Yes Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety functions No Highest safety class achievable in safety mode Performance level according to EN ISO 138491:2008 None SIL according to IEC 61508 No Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Horizontal mounting position, min. 0 C Horizontal mounting position, max. 60 Vertical mounting position, min. 0 C Vertical mounting position, max. 50 C Ambient temperature during storage/transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C Configuring Programming Programming language * LAD Yes * FBD Yes * STL Yes * SCL Yes * GRAPH Yes Know-how protection User program protection Yes Copy protection Yes Block protection Yes Access protection Protection level: Write protection Yes Protection level: Read/write protection Yes Protection level: Complete protection Yes CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 39 Technical specifications 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 Cycle time monitoring Low limit Configurable minimum cycle time High limit Configurable maximum cycle time Dimensions Width 100 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 310 g Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Table 5- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 RJ45 Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 46 g CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC Table 5- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 53 g General technical specifications You can find information on the general technical specifications, such as standards and approvals, electromagnetic compatibility, protection class, etc., in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 41 Dimension drawing A This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Dimension drawing of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN Figure A-1 Dimensional drawing CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) 42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC CPU 1512SP-1 PN ___________________ Preface (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4 ___________ 5 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimension drawing 09/2016 A5E33591411-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33591411-AC 08/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2016. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual as well as the function manuals. This manual contains a description of the module-specific information. The system-related functions are described in the system manual. All system-spanning functions are described in the function manuals. The information provided in this manual and the system manual allows you to commission the CPU 1512SP-1 PN. Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 ................................................................................. 11 2.2 Operating principle ................................................................................................................. 14 2.3 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 15 2.4 2.4.1 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................ 20 Front view of the module with BusAdapter ............................................................................ 20 2.5 Mode switch ........................................................................................................................... 21 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 22 4 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 30 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU ...................................................................................... 30 5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 33 A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 48 CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 2 Product overview 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 New functions of the CPU in firmware version V2.0 This section lists the new features of the CPU with firmware version V2.0. You can find additional information in the sections of this manual. Table 2- 1 New functions of the CPU with firmware version 2.0 compared with firmware version V1.8 New functions Applications OPC UA server You realize the data communication between OPC UA is a unified standard for data communidifferent systems, both within the process level cation and is independent of any particular operand on the control and enterprise levels: ating system platforms. * To embedded systems with controllers * To controllers with MES systems and systems of the enterprise level (ERP, asset systems) * To Siemens controllers with controllers from other manufacturers * To intelligent sensors with controllers Supported standard: OPC Data Access, DA. Customer benefits You have integrated security mechanisms on different automation systems, for example, for data exchange, on the application level, for authentication of the user. OPC UA servers provide a large amount of data: * Values of PLC tags that clients can access * Data types of these PLC tags Information about the OPC UA server itself and the CPU In this way, clients can gain an overview and can read and write values. * PROFINET IO MRPD: Media Redundancy for Planned Duplication for IRT PROFINET IO IRT enables you to realize applications that place particularly high demands on failure safety and accuracy (isochronous). By sending the cyclic IO data in both directions in the ring, the communication to the IO devices is maintained even when the ring is interrupted and does not result in device failure even with fast update times. You achieve higher failure safety than with MRP. PROFINET performance upgrade You can develop applications with high demands on speed and clock cycles. This is interesting for applications with high demands on performance. Better utilization of the bandwidth results in short reaction times. Limitation of the data infeed into the network You limit the network load for standard Ethernet communication to a maximum value. You smooth peaks in the data infeed. You share the remaining bandwidth based on requirements. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 11 Product overview 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 New functions Applications Customer benefits Backing up and restoring via the Web server You can, for example, backup and restore the configuration of the CPU to the PG/PC on which the Web server is running. You can make a backup copy of an operational project without STEP 7. Web server provides up to three project languages for comments and alarm texts When you export your plants worldwide, for You provide customers with better service. example, comments or alarm texts can be stored on the card in up to 3 languages. For example, German - author's language, English - internationally usable, Portuguese - end user's language. Trace via Web server When you enable trace functions via the Web server, you have better service support. You can send your trace recordings via Web service, for example, to your service partner. Web server Monitoring of configYou can monitor statuses, errors, technology ured technology obalarms and the current values of technology jects via a Web server objects (TOs) with the Web server. In an "emergency", you can simply use an existing configuration without STEP 7, for example, during commissioning or after a program download. You get plant/project information for diagnostics and maintenance requirements without STEP 7. You can provide trace recordings for each Web server. You save time in troubleshooting. Motion control Greater number of axes for Motion Control applications and new technology objects: Output cam, cam track and measuring input Speed specification, e.g. for: * Pumps, fans, mixers * Conveyor belts * Auxiliary drives Positioning tasks, e.g.: * Lifting and vertical conveyors * Feeding and gate control You can implement additional Motion Control applications with a CPU. The scalable configuration limits allow you to handle all types of application. High machine speeds result in greater productivity with better accuracy. * Palletizing equipment Output cams and cam tracks make other applications possible, e.g.: * Applying glue tracks * Triggering switching operations with precise positioning Very precise processing of products on a conveyor belt Measuring inputs are used, for example: * * For measuring products * For detecting the position of the product on a conveyor belt CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Product overview 2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 New functions Applications Customer benefits You can set up a simple connection of IP 65/67 I/O to the CPU. You do not have to individually run sensors or actuators at the central control cabinet to the different sections of a machine or assembly line. ET 200SP Support for ET 200AL in a central configuration You can connect up to 16 ET 200AL I/O modules via a BA send module on the central bus of the ET 200SP CPU. The distance between two ET 200AL modules can be up to 15 m. You can realize the use of ET 200AL in assembly and handling engineering directly at moving parts, for example in linear axes or drag chains. Increasing the address space in the station For example, you can use up to 49 ET 200SP energy meter modules behind an ET 200SP CPU. You save time and costs: * Through lightweight construction * Reduction of wear and exposure to vibration * Increased productivity A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048 bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes for ET 200AL modules) is available in the station. The address space has been increased to 288 bytes per module. BusAdapter with glass-fiber interface You can achieve long distances (up to 3 km) between the PROFINET devices. Support for communications processors CP 1542SP-1 Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet interface; network separation. CP 1542SP-1 IRC Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3 and IEC. CP 1543SP-1 ISEC With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection) and VPN protocol (IPSec), the communications processor protects ET200SP stations and subordinate networks against unauthorized access, and employs encryption to protect data transmission against manipulation and espionage. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 13 Product overview 2.2 Operating principle 2.2 Operating principle The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user program. The user program is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the work memory of the CPU. The PROFINET interfaces on the CPU allow simultaneous communication with PROFINET devices, PROFINET controllers, HMI devices, programming devices, other controllers and other systems. The CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports operation as an IO controller, I-device or standalone CPU. With its optional PROFIBUS interface, CM DP, CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports the configuration of PROFIBUS networks in addition to PROFINET IO. When you use the interface as a PROFIBUS DP interface, you can configure the CPU 1512SP-1 PN as a DP master or as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave). IO controller CPU 1512SP-1 PN sends and receives data from the connected IO devices within a PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with a maximum of 128 connected IO devices, a maximum of 64 of which use IRT (Isochronous Realtime). I-device The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality allows you to exchange data with an IO controller. CPU 1512SP-1 PN thus fulfills the role of an intelligent distributed preprocessing unit for sub-processes. The I-device is connected as an IO device to a higherlevel IO controller for this purpose. Advantages: Interference-resistant configuration due to short signal and encoder wiring Reduced wiring requirements for transmission of the data via PROFINET Standalone CPU You can also use the CPU 1512SP-1 PN in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a "central system" without a higher-level controller. DP master To use the ET 200SP as a DP master, you need the CPU and the optional communication module, CM DP. When used as a DP master, ET 200SP exchanges data with the connected DP slaves via PROFIBUS DP. Intelligent DP slave (I-slave) To use the ET 200SP as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave), you need the CPU and the optional communication module, CM DP. As an I-slave, the ET 200SP CPU is connected via PROFIBUS DP to a higher-level DP master and exchanges data with it. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Product overview 2.3 Properties 2.3 Properties Article number 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 View of the module The following figure shows the CPU 1512SP-1 PN. Figure 2-1 CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 15 Product overview 2.3 Properties Properties The CPU 1512SP-1 PN has the following technical properties: 1. Communication: - Interfaces The CPU 1512SP-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1 P3) with an integrated 3-port switch. Port 1 and port 2 are located on the optionally pluggable BusAdapter. Port 3 is integrated in the housing of the CPU. You connect the PROFINET IO to the CPU via the BusAdapter. You will find information on the BusAdapters supported by the CPU in section Wiring (Page 22). In addition to PROFINET basic functionality, the interface also supports PROFINET IO RT (real-time) and IRT (isochronous real-time). PROFINET IO communication or realtime settings can be configured. The basic functionality of PROFINET supports HMI communication, communication with the configuration system, communication with a higher-level network (backbone, router, Internet) and communication with another machine or automation cell. Port 1 and port 2 can also be used as ring ports for the configuration of redundant ring structures in Ethernet. Note The CPU is delivered without a BusAdapter. You can find the article numbers of the supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the ET 200SP distributed automation system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. The CM DP is optionally available with a PROFIBUS interface (X2). You can find additional information about this expansion module in the manual Communication module CM DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90156526). You can find information about connecting the PROFINET IO BusAdapter to the CPU as well as connecting the optional PROFIBUS interface to the interface module in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). - OPC UA With OPC UA, data is exchanged via an open and vendor-neutral communication protocol. The CPU, as OPC UA server, can communicate with OPC UA clients such as HMI panels, SCADA systems, etc. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Product overview 2.3 Properties Integrated Web server: A Web server is integrated in the CPU. You can read out the following information with the Web server: - Start page with general CPU information - Identification information - Contents of the diagnostics buffer - Query of module states - Firmware update - Alarms (without acknowledgment option) - Information about communication - PROFINET topology - Tag status, writing tags - Watch tables - Memory usage - User pages - Data logs (if used) - Online backup and restoration of the configuration. - Diagnostic information for the motion control technology objects - Display of trace recordings stored on the SIMATIC memory card - Readout service data - Basic Web pages - Display of the Web server in 3 project languages, for example, comments and message texts - Recipes - User-defined Web pages Integrated technology: - Motion Control The Motion Control functionality uses technology objects to support speed-controlled axes, positioning axes, synchronous axes, external encoders, cams, cam tracks and measuring inputs, as well as PLCopen blocks for programming the motion control functionality. You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in the S7-1500 Motion Control (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109739589) function manual. You can also use the TIA Selection Tool (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool) or the SIZER (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/mc-solutions/en/engineering-software/drive-design-toolsizer/Pages/drive-design-tool-sizer.aspx) to create or configure axes. - Integrated closed-loop control functionality - PID Compact (continuous PID controller) - PID 3Step (step controller for integrating actuators) - PID Temp (temperature controller for heating and cooling with two separate actuators) CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 17 Product overview 2.3 Properties Trace functionality: - Trace functionality supports you in troubleshooting and optimizing the user program, especially for motion control or closed-loop control applications. Trace only supports saves measurements on a SIMATIC memory card. You will find additional information on "Trace" in the Using the trace and logic analyzer function (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/64897128) function manual. Integrated system diagnostics: - The alarms for the system diagnostics are automatically created by the system and displayed on a PG/PC, HMI device or the Web server. System diagnostics information is also available when the CPU is in STOP mode. Integrated security: - Know-how protection The assignment of passwords protects user blocks against unauthorized access and modifications. - Copy protection Copy protection links user blocks to the serial number of the SIMATIC memory card or to the serial number of the CPU. User programs cannot run without the corresponding SIMATIC memory card or CPU. - Access protection Extended access protection provides high-quality protection against unauthorized configuration changes. You can use authorization levels to assign separate rights to different user groups. - Integrity protection The system protects the data transferred to the CPU against manipulation. The CPU detects erroneous or manipulated engineering data. You can find additional information on the topic of "Protection" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Support for ET 200AL - Simple connection of IP 65/67 I/O modules to the CPU. Communication CPs - CP 1542SP-1: Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet interface; network separation. - CP 1542SP-1 IRC: Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3 and IEC. - CP 1543SP-1 ISEC: With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection) and VPN protocol (IPSec), the communications processor protects ET200SP stations and subordinate networks against unauthorized access, and employs encryption to protect data transmission against manipulation and espionage. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Product overview 2.3 Properties Address space - A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048 bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes for ET 200AL modules) is available within the station. CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports the following additional functions: - PROFIenergy You can find information on the topic of "PROFIenergy" in the PROFINET function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) and in the PROFINET specification on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com). - Shared device You can find information on the topic of "Shared device" in the PROFINET function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). - Configuration control You can find information on the topic of "Configuration control" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). - Isochronous mode You can find information about the "Isochronous mode" topic in the PROFINET (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 19 Product overview 2.4 Operating and display elements 2.4 Operating and display elements 2.4.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter The figure on the left shows the CPU 1512SP-1 PN including a plugged BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter. The figure on the right shows a separate view of the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter. Mounting rail release Port P3 of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket Labeling strips LEDs for status and error displays LED for display of the supply voltage Mode switch Slot for the SIMATIC memory card Connection for supply voltage (included in product package) Cable support and attachment for port P3 of the PROFINET interface LEDs for status displays of the PROFINET interface: LK1 and LK2 on BusAdapter, LK3 on CPU Separate view of the BusAdapter Port P1 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy Port P2 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy Figure 2-2 Front view of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN with BusAdapter CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Product overview 2.5 Mode switch 2.5 Mode switch Use the mode switch to set the CPU operating mode. The following table shows the position of the switch and the corresponding meaning. Table 2- 2 Mode switch settings Position Meaning Explanation RUN RUN mode The CPU is executing the user program. STOP STOP mode The user program is not being executed. MRES Memory reset Position for CPU memory reset. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 21 3 Wiring This section provides information on the pin assignment of the individual interfaces and the block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN. 24 V DC supply voltage (X80) The connector for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU ships from the factory. The figure below shows the pin assignment for 24 V DC supply voltage. Ground of the supply voltage Ground of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted) +24 V DC of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted) Spring NC contacts + 24 V DC of the supply voltage Internally jumpered: and and Figure 3-1 Supply voltage connection PROFINET IO interface on the CPU (X1 P3) The assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 connector. When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X). If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Wiring PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The assignment at the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 connector. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 View Designation * When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X). * If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 23 Wiring PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The following table shows the pin assignment for the PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC. Table 3- 2 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC View Signal name Designation 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA 2xLC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) (as of V2.0) The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA 2xLC BusAdapter. Table 3- 3 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xLC View Signal name Designation Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Wiring PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) (as of V2.0) The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter. Table 3- 4 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 View Signal name Designation Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data RJ45, Port2 * When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X). * If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X). PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA LC/FC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) (as of V2.0) The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA LC/FC BusAdapter. The I/Os of the BA LC/FCBusAdapter are shown individually for a clearer overview. Table 3- 5 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/FC View Signal name Designation Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 25 Wiring PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter. Table 3- 6 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ View Signal name Designation Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter. Table 3- 7 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 View Signal name Designation Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data RJ45, Port2 * When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X). * If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Wiring PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter. The pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer overview. Table 3- 8 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC View Signal name Designation Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - Reference You can find additional information on the topics of "Connecting the CPU" and "Accessories/spare parts" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Assignment of the MAC addresses The MAC address is a globally unique device identifier that is assigned to each PROFINET device in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes for the device ID (serial number). The front of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN is lasered with the MAC address of the PROFINET interface. The PROFINET interface (X1) of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN has three ports. Port 3 is located on the CPU. Ports 1 and 2 are located on the optional BusAdapter. In addition to the PROFINET interface, each PROFINET port also has a separate MAC address. There is therefore a total of four MAC addresses for the CPU 1512SP-1 PN. The MAC addresses of the PROFINET ports are needed for the LLDP protocol, for example for the neighborhood discovery function. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 27 Wiring The table below shows how the MAC addresses are assigned. Table 3- 9 Assignment of the MAC addresses Assignment MAC address 1 PROFINET interface X1 * Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices * Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range) MAC address 2 Port X1 P1 R (required for LLDP, for example) MAC address 3 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example) MAC address 4 Port X1 P3 (required for LLDP, for example) CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Wiring Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN. PROFINET switch P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 Electronics P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 Backplane bus interface P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3 Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage RUN/STOP/MRES mode selector M Ground X5 BusAdapter LK1, 2, 3 LED Link TX/RX X50 SIMATIC memory card R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green) X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red) MT MAINT LED (yellow) PWR POWER LED (green) Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 29 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4 The status and error displays of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN are described below. You will find additional information on "Interrupts" in the STEP 7 online help. You can find additional information on the topics of "Diagnostics" and "System alarms" in the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual. 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN and the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter. RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED) ERROR LED (red LED) MAINT LED (yellow LED) LINK RX/TX LED for ports X1 P1 and X1 P2 (green LEDs on BusAdapter) POWER LED (green LED) LINK RX/TX LED for port X1 P3 (green LED on CPU) Figure 4-1 LED displays on the CPU and BusAdapter CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU Meaning of the POWER, RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs CPU 1512SP-1 PN features an LED for monitoring the supply voltage of the electronics (PWR) and three LEDs for displaying the current operating and diagnostics status. The following table shows the meaning of the various combinations of colors for the POWER, RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs. Table 4- 1 Meaning of the LEDs POWER LED RUN/STOP LED LED off LED off LED lit green LED off ERROR LED MAINT LED LED off LED off LED flashes red LED off Meaning Missing or insufficient supply voltage on the CPU. An error has occurred. CPU is in RUN mode. LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED off A diagnostics event is pending. LED lit green LED lit green LED flashes red LED off LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED lit yellow LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED flashes yellow Maintenance demanded for the plant. The affected hardware must be checked/replaced within a short period of time. Active Force job PROFIenergy pause Maintenance required for the plant. The affected hardware must be checked/replaced within a foreseeable period of time. Bad configuration Firmware update successfully completed. LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED flashes yellow CPU is in STOP mode. LED lit green LED lit green LED lit yellow LED lit yellow LED off LED flashes red LED off LED flashes yellow LED lit green LED flashes yellow LED off LED off LED lit green LED flashes yellow/green LED off LED off The program on the SIMATIC memory card is causing an error. CPU defective CPU is performing internal activities during STOP, e.g. startup after STOP. Download of the user program from the SIMATIC memory card Startup (transition from RUN STOP) Startup (CPU booting) LED lit green LED flashes yellow/green LED flashes red LED flashes yellow Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a module. LED flashing test CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 31 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU Meaning of the LINK LED Each port has a LINK LED (LK1, LK2, LK3). The table below shows the various "LED scenarios" of ports for the CPU 1512SP-1 PN. Table 4- 2 Meaning of the LEDs LINK LED LED off Meaning There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the PROFINET device and the communication partner. No data is currently being sent/received via the PROFINET interface. There is no LINK connection. The "LED flashing test" is being performed. LED flashes green LED lit green There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner. CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 5 Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1512SP-1 PN Hardware function version FS03 Firmware version V2.0 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 Configuration control Via data record Yes Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure buffering Power/voltage failure buffer time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value It 0.14 As Power Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 5.6 W Memory Number of slots for SIMATIC memory card 1 SIMATIC memory card required Yes Work memory Integrated (for program) 200 KB Integrated (for data) 1 MB Load memory Plug-in (SIMATIC memory card), max. 32 GB Buffering Maintenance-free Yes CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 33 Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 CPU processing times For bit operations, typ. 48 ns For word operations, typ. 58 ns For fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 77 ns For floating-point arithmetic, typ. 307 ns CPU blocks Number of elements (total) 2000; blocks (OB/FB/FC/DB) and UDTs DB Number range 1 ... 60 999; divided into: Number range that can be used by user: 1 ... 59 999 and number range for DBs generated by SFC 86: 60 000 ... 60 999 Size, max. 1 MB; for absolutely addressed DBs, the max. size is 64 KB FB Number range 0 ... 65 535 Size, max. 200 KB FC Number range 0 ... 65 535 Size, max. 200 KB OB Size, max. 200 KB Number of free-cycle OBs 100 Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 20 Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 20 Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20 Number of hardware interrupt OBs 50 Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3 Number of isochronous mode OBs 1 Number of technology synchronous interrupt OBs 2 Number of startup OBs 100 Number of asynchronous error OBs 4 Number of synchronous error OBs 2 Number of diagnostic interrupt OBs 1 Nesting depth Per priority class 24 Counters, timers and their retentivity S7 counters Quantity 2048 Retentivity * can be set Yes CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 IEC counters Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory) Retentivity * can be set Yes S7 timers Quantity 2048 Retentivity * can be set Yes IEC timers Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory) Retentivity * can be set Yes Data areas and their retentivity Total retentive data area (including timers, counters, bit memories), max. 128 KB; for bit memories, timers, counters, DBs and technological data (axes), usable retentive memory: 88 KB Bit memory Number, max. 16 KB Number of clock memories 8; there are 8 clock memory bits, grouped in one clock memory byte Data blocks Retentivity can be set Yes Retentivity preset No Local data Per priority class, max. 64 KB; max. 16 KB per block Address area Number of IO modules 2048; max. number of modules/submodules I/O address area Inputs 32 KB; all inputs are in the process image Outputs 32 KB; all outputs are in the process image Of which per integrated IO subsystem * Inputs (volume) 8 KB * Outputs (volume) 8 KB Of which per CM/CP * Inputs (volume) 8 KB * Outputs (volume) 8 KB Process image partitions Number of process image partitions, max. 32 Address space per module Address space per module, max. 288 bytes; for both input and output data CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 35 Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Address space per station Address space per station, max. 2560 bytes; for central inputs and outputs; depending on configuration; 2048 bytes for ET 200SP modules + 512 bytes for ET 200AL modules Hardware configuration Number of distributed IO systems 32; a distributed IO system is understood to mean the integration of distributed I/O via PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication modules as well as the connection of I/O via AS-i master modules or links (e.g. IE/PB link) Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Number of IO controllers Integrated 1 Via CM 0 Rack Modules per rack, max. 80; CPU + 64 modules + server module (configuration width max. 1 m) + 16 ET 200AL modules Number of rows, max. 1 PtP CM Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs that can be connected is only limited by the available slots Time Clock Type Hardware clock Backup duration 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Operating hours counter Quantity 16 Time-of-day synchronization Supported Yes On DP, master Yes; via CM DP module On DP, slave Yes; via CM DP module In AS, master Yes In AS, slave Yes On Ethernet via NTP Yes Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module With optical interface Yes; via BusAdapter 1st interface CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Interface hardware Number of ports 3; 1st integrated + 2nd via BusAdapter Integrated switch Yes RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; X1 P3; opt. X1 P1 and X1 P2 via BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ / FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC Protocols PROFINET IO controller Yes PROFINET IO device Yes SIMATIC communication Yes Open IE communication Yes Web server Yes Media redundancy Yes PROFINET IO controller Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Isochronous mode Yes * Open IE communication Yes * IRT Yes * MRP Yes; as MRP redundancy manager and/or MRP client; max. number of devices in the ring: 50 * MRPD Requirement: IRT * PROFIenergy Yes * Prioritized startup Yes; max. 32 PROFINET devices * Number of connectable IO devices, max. 128; a total of up to 512 distributed I/O devices can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or PROFINET * of these, IO devices with IRT, max. 64 * Number of connectable IO devices for RT, max. 128 * of these, in a line topology, max. 128 * Number of IO devices that can be activated/deactivated simultaneously, max. 8; in total over all interfaces * Number of IO devices per tool, max. 8 * Update times The minimum value of the update time also depends on the communication allocation setting for PROFINET IO, the number of IO devices and the amount of configured user data CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 37 Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Update time with IRT * With send clock of 250 s 250 s to 4 ms; note: with IRT with isochronous mode, the minimum update time of 500 s of the isochronous OB is decisive * With send clock of 500 s 500 s to 8 ms * With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 16 ms * with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 32 ms * with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 64 ms * with IRT and "odd" send clock parameter assignment Update time = set "odd" send clock (any multiple of 125 s: 375 s, 625 s to 3 875 s) Update time with RT * With send clock of 250 s 250 s to 128 ms * With send clock of 500 s 500 s to 256 ms * With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms * with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 512 ms * with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 512 ms PROFINET IO device Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Isochronous mode No * Open IE communication Yes * IRT Yes * MRP Yes * MRPD Yes; requirement: IRT * PROFIenergy Yes * Shared device Yes * Number of IO controllers with shared device, max. 4 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module Protocols PROFIBUS DP master Yes PROFIBUS DP slave Yes SIMATIC communication Yes CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Interface hardware RJ45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Protocols Number of connections Number of connections, max. 128 Number of connections reserved for ES/HMI/Web 10 Number of connections via integrated interfaces 88 Number of connections per CP/CM 32 Number of S7 routing connections 16 SIMATIC communication S7 communication, as server Yes S7 communication, as client Yes User data per job, max. See online help (S7 communication, user data size) Open IE communication TCP/IP Yes * Data length, max. 64 KB * Multiple passive connections per port, supported Yes ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) * Data length, max. UDP * Data length, max. Yes 64 KB Yes 1472 bytes DHCP No SNMP Yes DCP Yes LLDP Yes Web server HTTP Yes; standard and user-defined pages HTTPS Yes; standard and user-defined pages CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 39 Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 PROFIBUS DP master Number of connections, max. 48 Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Data record routing Yes * Isochronous mode No * Constant bus cycle time No * Number of DP slaves 125; a total of up to 512 distributed I/O devices can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or PROFINET * Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes OPC UA OPC UA server Yes; Data Access (Read, Write, Subscribe), Runtime license required * Application authentication Yes * Security Policies Available Security Policies: None, Basic128Rsa15, Basic256Rsa15, Basic256Sha256 * User authentication "Anonymous" or with user name and password Additional protocols MODBUS Yes; MODBUS TCP Media redundancy Switchover time in the case of cable break, typ. 200 ms; with MRP; bumpless with MRPD Number of devices in the ring, max. 50 Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes; only with PROFINET; with a minimum OB terminal) 6x cycle of 625 s S7 signaling functions Number of stations that can be logged in for signaling functions, max. 32 Block-related alarms Yes Number of configurable interrupts, max. 5000 Number of simultaneously active interrupts in interrupt pool * Number of reserved user interrupts 300 * Number of reserved interrupts for system diagnostics 100 * Number of reserved interrupts for motion control technology objects 80 CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Test/commissioning functions Shared commissioning (Team Engineering) Status block Single-step Status/modify Status/modify tag Tags Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3 engineering systems Yes; up to 8 simultaneously (in total over all ES clients) No Yes Inputs/outputs, bit memory, DB, peripheral inputs/outputs, timers, counters Number of tags, max. * Of which are status tags, max. 200; per job * Of which are modify tags, max. 200; per job Forcing Forcing Forcing, tags Number of tags, max. Diagnostics buffer Available Number of entries, max. * Of which are power failure-proof Traces Number of configurable traces Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics display LED RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Connection display LINK TX/RX Supported technology objects Motion control * Number of available motion control resources for technology objects (except cams) * Required Motion Control resources Yes Peripheral inputs/outputs 200 Yes 1000 500 4; up to 512 KB data possible per trace Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes; note: the number of axes affects the cycle time of the PLC program; selection guide via the TIA Selection Tool or SIZER 800 - per speed-controlled axis 40 - per positioning axis 80 - per synchronous axis 160 - per external encoder 80 - per output cam 20 - per cam track 160 - per measuring input 40 CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 41 Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Controller * PID_Compact Yes; universal PID controller with integrated optimization * PID_3Step Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization for valves * PID temp Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization for temperature Counting and measuring * High-speed counter Yes Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety functions No Highest safety class achievable in safety mode Performance level according to EN ISO 138491:2008 None SIL according to IEC 61508 No Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Horizontal mounting position, min. 0 C Horizontal mounting position, max. 60 Vertical mounting position, min. 0 C Vertical mounting position, max. 50 C Ambient temperature during storage/transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C Configuring Programming Programming language * LAD Yes * FBD Yes * STL Yes * SCL Yes * GRAPH Yes Know-how protection User program protection Yes Copy protection Yes Block protection Yes Access protection Protection level: Write protection Yes Protection level: Read/write protection Yes Protection level: Complete protection Yes CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 Cycle time monitoring Low limit Configurable minimum cycle time High limit Configurable maximum cycle time Dimensions Width 100 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 310 g Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Table 5- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 RJ45 Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 46 g Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC Table 5- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 53 g CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 43 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xLC Table 5- 3 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xLC 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC multimode glass-fiber PROFINET IO RJ45 No FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 0 LC 2 Cable length * Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km * Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Min. 0 C Max. 60 Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ Table 5- 4 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces SCRJ Cable length 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO 2 * PCF 100 m * Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m * PCF-GI 300 m Dimensions Width Height Depth 20 mm 69.5 mm 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 44 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 Table 5- 5 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC / RJ45 PROFINET IO RJ45 Yes; 1x FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 0 LC 1 Cable length * Copper cables 100 m * Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km * Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Min. 0 C Max. 60 Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 45 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC Table 5- 6 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces PROFINET IO RJ45 FC (FastConnect) SCRJ LC Cable length 1 No Yes; 1x 0 1 * Copper cables 100 m * Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km * Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Min. Max. Dimensions Width Height Depth Weights Weight, approx. 0 C 60 20 mm 69.5 mm 59 mm 50 g Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 Table 5- 7 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces RJ45 SCRJ Cable length 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45) Yes; 1 x 1 * PCF 100 m * Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m * PCF-GI 300 m * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width Height Depth Weights Weight, approx. 20 mm 69.5 mm 59 mm 50 g CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 46 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC Table 5- 8 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC) FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1 x SCRJ 1 Cable length * PCF 100 m * Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m * PCF-GI 300 m * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g General technical specifications You can find information on the general technical specifications, such as standards and approvals, electromagnetic compatibility, protection class, etc., in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 47 Dimension drawing A This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Dimension drawing of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN Figure A-1 Dimension drawing CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) 48 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual 2 ___________________ Safety notes 3 ___________________ Product overview 4 ___________________ Installing 5 ___________________ Connection Diagnostics, error and 6 ___________________ system alarm ___________________ 7 Commissioning ___________________ 8 Functions ___________________ 9 Maintenance ___________________ 10 Technical data ___________________ A Accessories/spare parts ___________________ B Abbreviations ___________________ C Troubleshooting 05/2017 A5E32701806-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32701806-AC 04/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information contained in this product manual and the system / function manuals enable you put the CPU 1515SP PC (F) into operation. Basic knowledge required The system must be operated and used by qualified staff only. The following knowledge is required: Installation guideline for SIMATIC ET 200SP Programming with STEP 7 PC based automation with an S7-1500 software controller and with WinCC Runtime Advanced Basic knowledge of PC technology Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system Scope of validity of the documentation This documentation is valid for the following devices: ET 200SP Open Controller Article number System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT -- 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0 CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT -- 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0 CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT -- 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0 CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC F 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 128PT -- 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0 CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 512PT -- 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0 CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 2048PT -- 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0 CPU 1515SP PC, spare part, without CFast card, without software 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 CPU 1515SP PC (F) 4 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Preface Conventions Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 5 Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Information about third-party software updates This product contains third-party software. Siemens accepts liability with respect to updates/patches for the third-party software only when these are distributed by Siemens in the context of a Software Update Service contract or officially approved by Siemens. Otherwise, updates/patches are installed at the user's own risk. You can find more information about our software update service offer under (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/licenses/software-updateservice/Pages/Default.aspx). Notes on protecting administrator accounts A user with administrator rights has extensive access and manipulation possibilities. Therefore, make sure that the administrator account is adequately protected to prevent unauthorized changes. To do this, set secure passwords and use a standard user account for regular operation. Other measures, such as the use of security policies, should be applied as required. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 6 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Preface CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 7 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 11 1.1 2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................................... 15 2.1 3 4 5 6 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F) ................................................................................ 14 Notes on use .......................................................................................................................... 17 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 18 3.1 Fail-safe option....................................................................................................................... 18 3.2 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 19 3.3 Sample configuration ............................................................................................................. 21 3.4 Components ........................................................................................................................... 23 3.5 Configuration of the devices .................................................................................................. 24 3.6 Operator controls and display elements ................................................................................ 25 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 Scope of delivery.................................................................................................................... 28 Unpacking the device ............................................................................................................. 28 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 30 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 32 Installing ............................................................................................................................................... 34 4.1 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 34 4.2 Hardware configuration .......................................................................................................... 37 4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) ............................................................................................... 38 Connection ........................................................................................................................................... 40 5.1 Notes on connection .............................................................................................................. 40 5.2 Terminal and block diagram................................................................................................... 41 5.3 Electrical configuration ........................................................................................................... 42 5.4 Connecting devices to networks ............................................................................................ 44 5.5 Securing cables...................................................................................................................... 44 Diagnostics, error and system alarm ..................................................................................................... 46 6.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 46 CPU 1515SP PC (F) 8 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Table of contents 7 8 9 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 49 7.1 Notes on commissioning .........................................................................................................49 7.2 Initial commissioning ...............................................................................................................50 7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller ..............................................................................53 7.4 Installing license keys .............................................................................................................55 7.5 Windows Security Center .......................................................................................................57 7.6 Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off ....................................................................................58 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 59 8.1 Monitoring functions ................................................................................................................59 8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM .....................................................................................................60 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.3.1 8.3.3.2 8.3.3.3 8.3.3.4 8.3.3.5 8.3.3.6 8.3.3.7 8.3.4 8.3.5 BIOS description .....................................................................................................................61 Introduction .............................................................................................................................61 Starting BIOS setup ................................................................................................................62 BIOS setup menus ..................................................................................................................63 Information menu ....................................................................................................................65 Main menu ..............................................................................................................................66 Advanced menu ......................................................................................................................67 Security menu .........................................................................................................................69 Power menu ............................................................................................................................70 Boot menu ...............................................................................................................................71 Exit menu ................................................................................................................................73 BIOS setup default settings ....................................................................................................74 BIOS update ...........................................................................................................................75 8.4 Power options .........................................................................................................................76 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 Protective functions for data carriers ......................................................................................77 Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) ..................................................................................................78 File-Based Write Filter (FBWF) ...............................................................................................82 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 84 9.1 Backing up and restoring data ................................................................................................84 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 Change partitioning .................................................................................................................85 Partitions in the delivery state .................................................................................................85 Change partitioning .................................................................................................................86 9.3 Restoring the delivery state ....................................................................................................92 9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick ................................................................................95 9.5 Updating software ...................................................................................................................97 9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7 ............................................................................................98 9.7 Sending the device to customer service .................................................................................99 9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card ...............................................................................100 CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 9 Table of contents 10 Technical data .....................................................................................................................................101 10.1 Standards and approvals ..................................................................................................... 101 10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................................. 105 10.3 Shipping and storage conditions .......................................................................................... 108 10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions ........................................................................ 108 10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ........... 110 10.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .................................... 111 10.7 10.7.1 10.7.2 10.7.3 10.7.4 10.7.5 10.7.6 10.7.7 10.7.8 Module data ......................................................................................................................... 112 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 112 CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM ........................................... 115 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part ........................... 118 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 121 CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM ........................................... 124 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part ........................... 127 CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI ................................................................................................. 130 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F) ................................................................... 130 10.8 10.8.1 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................. 131 CPU 1515SP PC (F) ............................................................................................................ 131 A Accessories/spare parts .......................................................................................................................133 B Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................................135 C Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................137 Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................138 CPU 1515SP PC (F) 10 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 11 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F) General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 12 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F) In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 13 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F) SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F) The following additional documentation is required for using the CPU 1515SP PC (F): Operating manual S7-1500 software controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109249299) System manual WinCC Advanced V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109742297) System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Manual Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) CPU 1515SP PC (F) 14 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 2 Safety notes WARNING Life-endangering voltage when control cabinet is open If the device is installed in a control cabinet, areas or components can be under lifeendangering voltage when the control cabinet is open. Contact with these areas or components may lead to death through electric shock. Switch off the power before opening the control cabinet. If the device is operated in a machine in accordance with the machinery directive, the provisions of the guideline 2006/42/EC apply. Safe operation of a plant WARNING Risk of fire The device is classified for use in the area of Industrial Control Equipment as "Open Type" according to UL508. If overheating occurs, burning material may leak and cause a fire. For this reason, observe the following information: * For approval and operation in accordance with UL508, the device must be installed in a housing complying with UL508. * Install the device in an enclosure that meets the requirements of sections 4.6 and 4.7.3 of the standards EN 60950-1:2006 and IEC/UL/EN/DIN-EN 60950-1. If you have questions about the validity of installation in the planned environment, please contact our service representatives. NOTICE Protective measures To ensure safe operation of a plant, you have to take suitable IT security measures, for example, network segmentation. Seal the cover with lead to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access. For more information on Industrial Security, refer to the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 15 Safety notes Repairs WARNING Damage caused by opening the device Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or endanger the user. Only authorized personnel are permitted to repair the device. For additional information on repairs, see section Sending the device to customer service (Page 99). ESD guidelines Modules containing electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) can be identified by the following label: Strictly follow the guidelines mentioned below when handling modules which are sensitive to ESD: Before working with modules with ESD, you need to ensure that you are free of electrostatic charge (e.g. by touching a grounded object). All devices and tools must be free of static charge. Always pull the mains connector and disconnect the battery before installing or removing modules which are sensitive to ESD. Handle modules fitted with ESDs only by their edges. Do not touch any connector pins or conductors on modules containing ESDs. See also Electromagnetic compatibility (Page 105) CPU 1515SP PC (F) 16 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Safety notes 2.1 Notes on use 2.1 Notes on use WARNING Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant According to the results of a risk analysis, hazards can occur at an unprotected machine. The hazards may lead to personal injury. According to the risk analysis, the risk of injury to persons can be countered with the following measures: * Additional protective equipment at the machine or plant. In this case, the programming, parameter assignment and wiring of the I/O used, in particular, must be performed in accordance with the safety criteria (SIL, PL or Cat.) ascertained by means of an appropriate risk analysis. * Use of the device for its intended purpose, which can be established by performing a functional test on the plant. This allows errors in programming, parameter assignment and wiring to be detected. * Documentation of the test results which can be entered, if required, into the relevant safety certificates. NOTICE Ambient conditions Ambient conditions for which the device is not suitable can lead to faults or damage the device. Note the following: * Only operate the device in enclosed areas. If you do not comply with this instruction, the warranty becomes void. * Only operate the device in accordance with the ambient conditions given in the technical specifications. * Protect the device from dust, moisture and heat. * Do not expose the device to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light. * The device must not be used in places with more difficult operating conditions through corrosive vapors or gases without taking additional protective measures, for example, supply of clean air. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 17 3 Product overview 3.1 Fail-safe option Areas of application F-CPUs are mainly designed for personal and machine protection. In addition to the safety program, you can also program standard applications. You can operate the F-CPUs in safety mode or in standard mode. Reference Information on the use of F-CPUs in safety mode is available in the programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). You can find information on using the CPU 1505SP (F) software controller in the corresponding product manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725) and in the F product information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 18 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.2 Properties 3.2 Properties Article number 6ES7677-2xAxx-0xx0 The complete article number depends on the system version and the ordering option. View of the module The figure below shows the CPU 1515SP PC. Figure 3-1 CPU 1515SP PC with supplied accessories CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 19 Product overview 3.2 Properties Properties CPU 1515SP PC (F) is a PC based automation device in the design of the ET 200SP. It is used for control and visualization purposes. The supplied IPC DiagBase software provides basic diagnostics functions and supports you in handling the BIOS. CPU 1515SP PC (F) has the following technical properties: A removable CFast card with the following pre-installations is used as storage medium: - Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system - S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F) - Optionally with HMI: WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V14 SP1 Interfaces - An interface for the exchangeable ET 200SP BusAdapters for connection of PROFINET IO (2 ports) - An interface for connecting devices using Industrial Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet) - 3 interfaces for USB devices - One DVI-I interface for a monitor - A sealable slot for the CFast card - A slot for an SD/MMC card as additional optional drive Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope of delivery. CPU 1515SP PC (F) is designed for use in industrial environment: - Compact design - Fan-less operation - High robustness The CPU 1515SP PC (F) is approved for the degree of protection IP20 and for the installation in a control cabinet. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 20 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.3 Sample configuration System versions and ordering options System version SIMATIC software CFast card Article number WES7 E 32Bit CPU 1505SP V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 WES7 P 64Bit (multitouch functionality) CPU 1505SP V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 CPU 1505SP V2.1 & WinCC Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 128PT 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0 CPU 1505SP V2.1 & WinCC Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 512PT 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0 CPU 1505SP V2.1 & WinCC Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 2048PT 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0 WES7 E 32Bit CPU 1505SP F V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 WES7 P 64Bit (multitouch functionality) CPU 1505SP F V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 CPU 1505SP F V2.1 & WinCC Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 128PT 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0 CPU 1505SP F V2.1 & WinCC Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 512PT 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0 CPU 1505SP F V2.1 & WinCC Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 2048PT 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0 CPU 1515SP PC, spare part, without CFast card, without software 3.3 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 Sample configuration Configuration CPU 1515SP PC (F) is mounted on the mounting rail according to EN 60715. A modular system is formed with ET 200SP modules in the central rack. You can use the CPU 1515SP PC (F) as PROFINET IO controller. The PROFINET IO devices are connected with the SIMATIC BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 via the ports of the interface X1 PN (LAN). Devices can be connected via Industrial Ethernet using the integrated interface X2 PN/IE (LAN). The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 21 Product overview 3.3 Sample configuration Sample configuration The figure below shows an example configuration with CPU 1515SP PC (F). Figure 3-2 Example configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC (F) CPU 1515SP PC (F), I/O module, server module Mounting rail Flat Panel - Wide Screen Display USB devices: Keyboard, mouse, printer ... PROFINET IO device Camera Industrial Thin Client ITC SCALANCE W786 Field programming device PC/Programming device CPU 1515SP PC (F) 22 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.4 Components 3.4 Components Components of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) The table below contains an overview of the components of the CPU 1515SP PC (F): Table 3- 1 Components of the CPU 1515SP PC Component Function Figure Mounting rail in accordance The mounting rail is the module carriwith EN 60715 er for the CPU 1515SP PC (F). CPU 1515SP PC (F) CPU with strain relief and white reference labels BusAdapter The BusAdapter allows free selection of the connection technology for PROFINET IO. The following versions are available for CPU 1515SP PC (F): Server module * For standard RJ45 plug (BA 2xRJ45) * For direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2xFC) The server module completes the configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with I/O modules. The server module is included in the CPU's scope of delivery. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 23 Product overview 3.5 Configuration of the devices 3.5 Configuration of the devices Front view Figure 3-3 Front view CPU 1515SP PC (F) Mounting rail release mechanism Labeling strips Server module Cooling fins Strain relief Reference labels CPU 1515SP PC (F) 24 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.6 Operator controls and display elements 3.6 Operator controls and display elements Front view of the module The figure below shows the operator control and connection elements of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Figure 3-4 View of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) LED displays for the current operating mode and diagnostic status of the CPU Power LED X50: Slot for the CFast card (flash memory), sealable Mode selector X51: Slot for an optional SD/MMC card X80: Connector for 24 V DC supply voltage X1 PROFINET Slot for BusAdapter for connection of PROFINET IO; (LAN): status display for PROFINET X2 PN/IE (LAN): GbE Ethernet connection with integrated display X60, X61, X62: 3 USB connections Connection for monitor X70 DVI-I: CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 25 Product overview 3.6 Operator controls and display elements Slot for CFast card The operating system, Runtime software and project are installed on the supplied SIMATIC CFast card. The CFast card is the only mass storage device of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Note Unauthorized access Seal the cover of the shaft with lead to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access and manipulation. Slot for SD/MMC card You can use a SIMATIC SD or MMC card as additional storage drive. This drive can be used to store data via Windows, for example a backup, but not the operating system, the Runtime software or the project. Permitted SD cards: SDHC up to 32 GB, SDXC up to 2 TB. USB connections Two USB high-current (500 mA) interfaces and one low-current (100 mA) interface can be used at the same time. MAC addresses The MAC address consists of a 3-byte manufacturer ID and a 3-byte device ID (consecutive number). Each device is already assigned four MAC addresses in the factory. The front of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is lasered with the MAC addresses 1 and 4. With the MAC addresses 2 and 3, the consecutive numbers are incremented. If, for example, the first MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C0, the second MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C1. Table 3- 2 Assignment of the MAC addresses Assignment MAC address 1 MAC address 2 X2 PN/IE (LAN) * Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices * Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range) X1 PROFINET (LAN) * Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices MAC address 3 Port X1 P1 (required for LLDP, for example) MAC address 4 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example) * Lasered on the front of the CPU (end of the number range) CPU 1515SP PC (F) 26 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.6 Operator controls and display elements Connector for supply voltage CPU 1515SP PC (F) has a 2-pole terminal for the power supply. The connection plug for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU is shipped from the factory. Mode selector Use the mode selector to set the CPU operating mode. Table 3- 3 Mode selector positions Position Meaning Description RUN1 RUN Operating mode STOP Operating mode STOP1 The CPU is not processing the user program. The outputs are set to a "safe" state. The CPU is processing the user program. MRES Memory reset For active S7-1500 software controller2 only: CPU memory reset 1 RUN and STOP indicate the selected operating state. The LED displays RUN and STOP display the actual operating state of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). 2 See the S7-1500 software controller manual CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 27 Product overview 3.7 Scope of delivery 3.7 Scope of delivery 3.7.1 Unpacking the device When unpacking When unpacking, make sure to check the following: Check packaging and contents for visible damage from transport. Check the delivery for completeness. Please inform your Siemens contact partner should you determine damages from transport or any irregularities. Keep the supplied documentation and licenses. They belong to the device and are the proof that you have purchased the software preinstalled on the CFast card. Documentation and licenses are required for initial commissioning and for any questions that arise. Keep the original packaging in case the device needs to be transported again. NOTICE Damage to the device during transport and storage If a device is transported or stored without packaging, it is unprotected from shocks, vibrations, pressure and moisture. Damaged packaging indicates that environmental conditions have already had a significant impact on the device. The device might be damaged. Do not dispose of the original packaging. Pack the device for transport and storage. NOTICE Damage to the device caused by condensation If the device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme variations in temperature during transport, this may cause moisture to build up on or in the device (condensation). Moisture can cause short-circuits in the electrical circuits and damage the device. Proceed as follows to avoid damage: * Store the device in dry conditions. * Make sure it adapts to room temperature before commissioning. * Do not expose the device to direct heat radiation from a heater. * If condensation has developed, wait for approximately 12 hours or until the device is completely dry before you switch it on. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 28 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.7 Scope of delivery WARNING Electric shock and fire hazard from damaged device A damaged device can carry dangerous voltage and trigger a fire in the machine or plant. A damaged device has unpredictable properties and states. Death or severe injury could occur. Make sure that the damaged device is not installed and commissioned accidentally. Label the damaged device correspondingly and keep it locked up. Have the device repaired without delay. Identification data The identification data can be used to clearly identify the device when a repair is necessary. Make a note of the following data for your devices: The article number of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is located on the order form. Depending on the scope of delivery, the "Certificate-of-License" is included in the license verification for the S7-1500 software controller and for WinCC Runtime Advanced V14 SP1. The "Microsoft Windows Product Key" can be found on the "Certificate of Authenticity" label. The first and the last MAC addresses are located on the device. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 29 Product overview 3.7 Scope of delivery 3.7.2 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM Note The designation CPU 1515SP PC with the article number 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 is always on the device regardless of the order option. The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC: Order option CPU 1515SP PC Article number 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 CPU 1515SP PC (spare part) 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 CPU X X Strain relief with fixing screws X X Server module X X 30 GB CFast card with the following pre-installations: * Windows Embedded Standard 7 E operating system X - * S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP X - * WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 SP1 - - Restore DVD for image restore X - "Documentation and Drivers" DVD X - Windows-Certificate of Authenticity (CoA) X - Certificate of License (COL) X - USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X - Product information X - CPU 1515SP PC (F) 30 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.7 Scope of delivery The following components are contained in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC F: Order option CPU 1515SP PC F Article number 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 CPU X Strain relief with fixing screws X Server module X 30 GB CFast card with the following pre-installations: * Windows Embedded Standard 7 E operating system X * S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F X * WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 SP1 - Restore DVD for image restore X "Documentation and Drivers" DVD X Windows-Certificate of Authenticity (CoA) X Certificate of License (COL) X USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X Product information X CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 31 Product overview 3.7 Scope of delivery 3.7.3 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM Note The designation CPU 1515SP PC with the article number 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 is always on the device regardless of the order option. The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC: Order option CPU 1515SP PC Article number 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 CPU 1515SP PC + HMI CPU 1515SP PC (spare part) 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0 HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0 HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0 HMI 2048PT CPU X X X Strain relief with fixing screws X X X Server module X X X * X Windows Embedded Standar d 7 P operating system X - * S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP X X - * WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 SP1 - X - X X - "Documentation and Drivers" X DVD X - Windows Certificate of Authenticity (CoA) X X - Certificate of License (CoL) X X - USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X X - Product information X X - 30 GB CFast card with the following pre-installations: Restore DVD for image restore CPU 1515SP PC (F) 32 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Product overview 3.7 Scope of delivery The following components are contained in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC F: Order option CPU 1515SP PC F Article number 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 6ES7677-2FA41* 0FK0 HMI 128PT * 0FL0 HMI 512PT * 0FM0 HMI 2048PT CPU X X Strain relief with fixing screws X X Server module X X 30 GB CFast card with the following pre-installations: * Windows Embedded Standard 7 P operating system X X * S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F X X * WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 SP1 - X Restore DVD for image restore X X "Documentation and Drivers" DVD X X Windows Certificate of Authenticity (CoA) X X Certificate of License (CoL) X X USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X X Product Information X X CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 33 4 Installing 4.1 Basics Introduction The CPU 1515SP PC (F) is an open operation resource. This means that you may only install it in enclosures, cabinets or electrical operating areas. These housings, cabinets or electrical operating areas must only be accessible with a key or tool. Access may only be possible for instructed or authorized personnel. Installation location CPU 1515SP PC (F) must be installed in a suitable enclosure or suitable control cabinet with at least IP54 degree of protection according to EN 60529 and the ambient conditions for the operation of the equipment must be taken into consideration. Installation position You can install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall. The restrictions regarding ambient temperature and maximum configuration apply to the CPU 1515SP PC (F) depending on the mounting position. NOTICE Damage to the modules Modules can be damaged if exposed to ambient temperatures higher than permitted. The following ambient temperatures must not be exceeded during operation: * Horizontal mounting - 60 C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules. - 55 C for an installation with up to 64 I/O modules. * Vertical mounting - 50 C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules. For more detailed information, refer to section Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions (Page 108) CPU 1515SP PC (F) 34 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Installing 4.1 Basics Mounting rail CPU 1515SP PC (F) is mounted on a mounting rail according to EN 60715 (35 x 7.5 mm and/or 35 x 15 mm). You must ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail separately. Note If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using 8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP from shifting to the side. Note If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to high vibration and shock load, we recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx. 200 mm. Suitable surface finishes are: Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or Tinned steel strip. We recommend the use of the mounting rails in section Accessories/spare parts (Page 133). Note Mounting rails of other manufacturers If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, ensure that they have the properties required for your climatic and mechanical ambient conditions. Check whether the mounting rails meet the requirements for a protective conductor. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 35 Installing 4.1 Basics Minimum clearances Maintain the following minimum clearances when installing or dismantling the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Figure 4-1 Minimum clearances Installation rules After the CPU 1515SP PC (F) there is a BaseUnit BU..D with incoming supply voltage L+ (light terminal box). This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B (with dark-colored terminal box). The respective corresponding I/O modules can be connected to the BaseUnits. Suitable combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). The server module completes the installation. Note Only install the CPU 1515SP PC (F) when the power supply is switched off. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 36 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Installing 4.2 Hardware configuration 4.2 Hardware configuration Maximum mechanical configuration As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration has been reached: Table 4- 1 Maximum mechanical configuration Properties Rule Number of modules * * Horizontal mounting - 0 to 60 C ambient temperature: a maximum of 32 I/O modules and USB load - 0 to 55 C ambient temperature: a maximum of 64 I/O modules and USB load Vertical mounting - Backplane bus length 0 to 50 C ambient temperature: a maximum of 32 I/O modules and USB load Maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU 1515SP PC (F), including server module) Electrical maximum configuration The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the Power consumption of the I/O modules Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules The maximum current-carrying capability of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/ground is 10 A. USB load In case of maximum configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC (F), the USB load must also be taken into consideration: Horizontal mounting - Ambient temperature of 0 to 60 C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA USB load - Ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C with maximum 64 I/O modules and 2 x 500 mA + 1 x 100 mA USB load Vertical mounting - Ambient temperature of 0 to 50 C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA USB load Address space The address space is predefined. However, you can adjust the address space in the user program. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 37 Installing 4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) 4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) Requirements The mounting rail is fitted. Required tools 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only to fix the strain relief and dismantle the BusAdapter) Fixing strain relief Fasten the strain relief at the upper and lower left side of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with the supplied screws. Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) 1. Install the CPU on the mounting rail. 2. Swivel the CPU back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place 3. To check that the CPU has correctly clicked into place, pull on the underside of the enclosure. Figure 4-2 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) CPU 1515SP PC (F) 38 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Installing 4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) Disassemble CPU 1515SP PC (F) The BaseUnits with the I/O modules are located to the left of the CPU 1515SP PC (F): 1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU. 2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move the CPU in parallel to the left until it comes off the remaining the module group. Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU. 3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU, swivel the CPU out of the mounting rail. Note It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU 1515SP PC (F). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 39 5 Connection 5.1 Notes on connection Note Rules and regulations for operation Observe the information contained in the Wiring section in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and in the function manual Designing interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566). NOTICE Fault caused by I/O devices The connection of I/O devices can lead to faults on the device. Injury to persons and damage to the machine or plant could result. Note the following when connecting I/O devices: * Read the documentation related to the I/O devices. Follow all instructions given in the documentation. * Only connect I/O devices which are suitable for use in industrial environments according to EN 61000-6-2/EC 61000-6-2. * You may only connect hot-plug capable I/O devices when the power supply is switched off. Note Feedback through USB devices If USB devices are connected which - contrary to the USB 2.0 specification - feed voltage back to the host interface, the startup of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is not ensured upon powerup. Regenerative feedback is generally not permitted. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 40 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Connection 5.2 Terminal and block diagram 5.2 Terminal and block diagram Block diagram The figure below shows the block diagram of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Switch X1 PN (LAN) PROFINET interface X1 Electronics P1 PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 Backplane bus interface P2 PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage Mode selector M Ground X50 CFast card LK1, LK2 LED Link TX/RX X51 SD/MMC card LK3 LED Link X60 USB interface 2.0, 0.5 A R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green) X61, X62 USB interface 2.0, 0.5 A ER ERROR LED (red) X70 DVI-I interface MT MAINT LED (yellow) X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage PWR POWER LED (yellow/green) X2 PN/IE (LAN) Ethernet interface X2 Figure 5-1 Block diagram for CPU 1515SP PC (F) CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 41 Connection 5.3 Electrical configuration 5.3 Electrical configuration Non-isolated configuration Note Unlike the distribution I/O system ET 200SP, only a non-isolated configuration is possible the CPU 1515SP PC (F). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 42 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Connection 5.3 Electrical configuration The figure below shows a CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the overall configuration with infeed from a TN-S system. The power supply supplies the CPU 1515SP PC (F) and the load circuits for the 24 V DC modules. With the CPU 1515SP PC (F) there is a fixed connection between the ground infeed terminal and the contact springs to the mounting rail. You must ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Master switch Short-circuit and overload protection Load current supply (galvanic isolation) In the CPU 1515SP PC (F), this connection is automatically established. The represented layout of the power connections does not correspond to the actual layout; it was chosen for demonstration purposes only. Figure 5-2 Connecting the load voltage reference potential CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 43 Connection 5.4 Connecting devices to networks 5.4 Connecting devices to networks The following options are available for integrating devices into existing or planned system environments and networks. Ethernet You can use the integrated Ethernet interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) (10/100/1000 Mbps) for communication and data exchange with automation devices, for example, SIMATIC S7. Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) in the TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2. You need suitable software to do this: STEP 7, WinCC, SIMATIC NET. Note Use a Category 5e Ethernet cable (Cat-5e cable) for operation with 1000 Mbps. PROFINET PROFINET operation is possible via the X1 PN (LAN) interface and the approved BusAdapter. PROFIBUS The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module. 5.5 Securing cables The strain relief for connection lines prevents the USB and the PROFINET connector coming loose from the CPU 1515SP PC (F). The strain relief is included in the scope of delivery. WARNING Flying sparks due to loose cables Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong oscillation and high vibrating loads. Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 44 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Connection 5.5 Securing cables Requirements The strain relief is fixed to the CPU. The CPU is installed. Procedure Secure the USB and PROFINET cables to the strain relief using cable ties. Figure 5-3 Secured cables CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 45 6 Diagnostics, error and system alarm 6.1 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED) ERROR LED (red LED) MAINT LED (yellow LED) POWER LED (yellow/green LED) Figure 6-1 LED displays of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 46 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Diagnostics, error and system alarm 6.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays with active software controller CPU 1515SP PC (F) has a display of the current operating state and of the diagnostics status (three LEDs). The following table shows the meaning of the color combinations of the LED displays in connection with the software controller. Table 6- 1 Meaning of the LED displays RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning POWER OFF LED off LED off LED off Starting of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the "Windows only" mode No power supply. The software controller of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) has not been downloaded or the software controller of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is in the operating state Power OFF. An error has occurred. LED off LED green LED flashes red LED off LED off LED off Software controller of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is in RUN mode. A diagnostics event is pending. LED green LED flashes red LED off LED green LED off LED lights up yellow LED green LED off Maintenance demanded for the plant. The affected hardware must be exchanged within a short period. Maintenance required for the plant. LED lights up yellow LED off LED flashes yellow You must exchange the affected hardware within a foreseeable period. LED off Software controller of the CPU is in the operating state STOP. Firmware update successfully completed The user program is causing an error. LED lights up yellow LED flashes red LED flashes yellow LED flashes yellow LED off LED off CPU defective CPU is performing internal activities during STOP, e.g. ramp-up after STOP. Loading the user program Startup (transition from RUN STOP) LED flashes yellow/green LED off LED off CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 47 Diagnostics, error and system alarm 6.1 Status and error display RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning Startup (CPU booting) LED flashes yellow/green LED flashes red LED flashes yellow Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a module. LED flashing test POWER LED Table 6- 2 POWER LED POWER LED Meaning No supply voltage or supply voltage too low LED off Supply voltage present; LED lights up yellow running through BIOS phase; operating system is shut down Supply voltage present; LED green Booting or operation of the operating system CPU 1515SP PC (F) 48 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Commissioning 7.1 7 Notes on commissioning WARNING Improper commissioning in hazardous areas Device failure or risk of explosion in hazardous areas. * Do not commission the device unless it is fully mounted and connected according to the specifications in the section Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) (Page 78). * Before commissioning, please consider the effects on other devices in the plant. CAUTION Hot surfaces Risk of burns due to hot surfaces. During operation, only touch the device with appropriate protective gloves. NOTICE Condensation in the device Damage to the device due to condensation if the temperature between transport or storage and the installation site differs by more than 20 C (36 F). Before commissioning the device, leave it to stand for several hours in the new environment. NOTICE Data loss Data loss may occur if write filters are used incorrectly. Therefore, note the information on write filters. Two write filters are available for configuration under Windows Embedded: * Enhanced Write Filter (Page 78) * File Based Write Filter (Page 82) CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 49 Commissioning 7.2 Initial commissioning 7.2 Initial commissioning Requirements The following conditions must be met before you commission the open controller for the first time. CPU 1515SP PC (F) is mounted. The CFast card is inserted. No data carriers are connected via USB. The following hardware is available: A monitor, a USB keyboard, a USB mouse Procedure 1. Connect a monitor via a DVI-I cable. 2. Connect a keyboard and a mouse to the CPU via USB. 3. Connect the power supply. The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green. The device carries out the hardware initialization. 4. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears from the screen. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the device NOTICE Faulty installation If you change the default values in the BIOS Setup or switch off the device during the installation, the installation will be disrupted and the operating system will not be installed correctly. The operational reliability of the device and the plant is endangered. Do not switch of the device during the entire installation process. Do not change the default values in the BIOS Setup. Result The WES7 operating system is installed. WES7 P: The Multitouch functions are available. The operating system's start screen is displayed after each startup. A login window appears if a password was entered during the initial commissioning. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 50 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Commissioning 7.2 Initial commissioning Initial commissioning an open controller The basic settings, user name, administrator password and IP address are prompted for during initial power-up of your CPU 1515SP PC (F). The device is then automatically set up for the operating system that is installed on the CFast card. Restart the device after the operating system has been set up. Note The initial commissioning is not possible with a Multitouch panel, as the Multitouch driver is only available after the installation of the operating system. User name, computer name, password When you enter a "User name", this is suffixed with "-PC" under "Computer name". The computer name must not exceed 15 characters. Note This user has administrator rights! For security reasons, enter a password for this user (administrator). IP address The IP address (192.168.1.1) and the subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for the X2 interface are pre-set in the logon dialog. You use the buttons to make your changes or to retain the pre-set values. Note The initial TIA Portal download must be performed using set IP address via the GB Ethernet interface X2 in order that the PROFINET interface X1 and the hardware configuration are correctly assigned. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 51 Commissioning 7.2 Initial commissioning User "Operator" A user "Operator" with standard user rights is already created on the Windows system. The user is in a user group "SIEMENS TIA Engineer". This grants the user the rights to use the installed SIMATIC software products. To be able to use the CPU 1515SP PC (F) directly, the Windows "Autologon" is activated for the user "Operator". No password is preset. Note When you assign a password, change the entry for the Windows "Autologon" function accordingly in order that the function remains activated. Administrator rights You need administrator rights for the following actions: Back up the data in the root directory of the C partition. Installing the language pack Screen resolution In Windows Embedded Standard 7, the values that are determined for the monitor via the DVI-I interface are set for the screen resolution. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 52 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Commissioning 7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller 7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller Creating the configuration You have created a new project in the TIA Portal. To create the configuration in the TIA Portal, follow these steps: 1. Double-click "Add new device" in the project tree. 2. In "PC-Systeme > SIMATIC S7 Open Controller > ET 200SP Open Controller >", select the "CPU 1515SP PC (F) (+HMI)". 3. Select the appropriate version. The configured Open Controller is displayed in the device view. 4. The following components can be seen in the Open Controller: - Onboard interface X2 (GB Ethernet Windows interface) that is assigned directly to the PC station (1 port) - Replaceable BusAdapter X1, which is directly assigned to the software controller (2 ports) - On the right side (behind the plugged modules in the rack): the configured software controller CPU 1505SP (F) and WinCC Runtime Advanced. 5. Insert the server module. The server module at the right end of the configuration forms the termination of the CPU with the I/O modules. Setting the IP addresses: In the Inspector window under "Properties": Onboard interface X2: the configured, specified IP address is identical with the Windows IP address that is set during the first commissioning on the open controller. BusAdapter X1: the configured, specified IP address is identical with the IP address that is set during the first commissioning in the panel of the software controller (display application). Important properties of the Software Controller Change the properties in the Inspector window under "Properties" if required: Selecting startup type System diagnostics Setting the storage location for retentive data Setting up copy protection Using the LEDs of the hardware Configuring the Web server Assigning interfaces for the communication CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 53 Commissioning 7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller Establish HMI connection 1. Right-click the WinCC RT Advanced in the device view. 2. Start the HMI device wizard. 3. Apply all default settings. The wizard creates system images for you with the corresponding navigation. 4. Switch to the connection view in the network view. 5. Click on WinCC RT Advanced. 6. Drag (with mouse button pressed) from the WinCC RT Advanced software to the S7-1500 software controller (for example, CPU 1505SP). A network connection is established between the two devices. Downloading the project to the target system The complete PC station is downloaded the first time you download the configuration. 1. Select the complete PC system in the device view. 2. Click the "Download to device" button. 3. Make the following settings: - Type of connection - Specify the interface of the programming device - Specify the X2 interface on the Open Controller Note The first TIA Portal download must be via the "X2" interface. Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) in the TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2. Download and compile the project. The hardware configuration and the first download are now completed. WinCC RT Advanced WinCC Runtime Advanced contains all the essential functions for operator control and monitoring of machinery or plants. Reference For more information on WinCC RT Advanced, refer to the WinCC Advanced V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109742297) system manual. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 54 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Commissioning 7.4 Installing license keys 7.4 Installing license keys Licensing the software A license key is not required to operate the S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F) V2.x. The software controller is permanently coupled to your CPU 1515SP PC (F). It is not necessary to input the key via the Automation License Manager! WinCC RT Advanced requires a product-specific license key. This is located on the supplied USB stick. Prior to commissioning, you must install the license key for the HMI powertags using the Automation License Manager (ALM). Perform the licensing directly via the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Requirements Initial commissioning was successfully completed. Windows Embedded Standard 7 has started. The enhanced write filter EWF must be disabled on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Installing License keys with local configuration The Automation License Manager is preinstalled on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Open the software using the icon on the desktop or a menu command. 1. In the Windows start bar, select Start > All Programms > Siemens Automation > Automation License Manager. 2. Follow the instructions of the Automation License Manager. Using a programming device/PC to install the license keys The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on a programming device / PC with STEP 7 and the CPU 1515SP PC (F). 1. Connect the CPU 1515SP PC (F) to a programming device / PC. 2. Connect the supplied USB stick to the programming device/PC. 3. Select the menu command Start >SIMATIC >License Management > Automation License Manager. 4. Select the menu command Bearbeiten > Rechner verbinden and enter the IP address of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) (default 192.168.1.1). 5. Drag the license keys from the USB stick to the system partition C: of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 55 Commissioning 7.4 Installing license keys Saving and securing license keys in the case of restore and repair Note Loss of license keys A SIMATIC license key cannot be copied or duplicated. If you drag the license keys from your USB-Stick to your CPU 1515SP PC (F), no copies are then left on the USB stick. Secure your purchased license keys before restoring the delivery state (Restore) or in the case of repair. To do this, move the license keys to a USB stick and keep this stick in a safe place. If a fault occurs with your license keys on the CPU 1515SP PC (F), contact your local Siemens representative. Make sure to have the "Certificate of License" (CoL) to hand. Note The EWF (Page 78) write filter serves to protect your license keys and your configuration. Reference For additional information on licenses, refer to the Automation License Manager manual. You can find the manual for the CPU 1515SP PC (F) under Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > Documentation and in the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56956174). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 56 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Commissioning 7.5 Windows Security Center 7.5 Windows Security Center Warning from the Windows Security Center A warning from the Windows Security Center appears when you first switch on your device. The Security Center check the status of the device with regard to the main security aspects listed below. If the Security Center finds a problem during this check, it gives recommendations on how to better protect the device. Firewall: The Windows firewall contributes to protecting the device by preventing the access of unauthorized users via a network or the Internet. Windows checks whether the device is protected by a software firewall. As delivered, the firewall is enabled. Antivirus software: Antivirus programs contribute to protecting the device against viruses and other security threats. Windows checks whether a comprehensive up-to-date program is used on the device. No antivirus software is installed as delivered. Automatic updates: With the help of automatic updates, Windows can routinely check for the latest major updates for the device and install these automatically. In the delivery state, this option is disabled. Note To keep Windows up-to-date, enable either the automatic update function of Windows or install updates manually. Before the installation, check the size of the package to be installed and decide if you need the update and if there is sufficient storage space available. Some updates may make it necessary to use a larger CFast card or to change the partitioning. You can find information on changing the partition size in the Change partitioning (Page 85) chapter. Configure the Security Center to suit your requirements. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 57 Commissioning 7.6 Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off 7.6 Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off Requirements Initial commissioning was successfully completed. Switching on the CPU 1515SP PC 1. Switch on the power supply of the CPU. The Boot Manager GRUB4DOS opens. 2. Select the mode in which the CPU 1515SP PC (F) should start: - Only with the Windows operating system. - With the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller (default). Figure 7-1 Boot Manager GRUB4DOS Switch off CPU 1515SP PC (F) 1. To switch off the Windows function, use StartShut down. The PWR LED changes from green to yellow. The Windows function shuts down the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller. If the device will not be used for a longer period after the shutdown, de-energize the device. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 58 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 8 Functions 8.1 Monitoring functions Introduction CPU 1515SP PC (F) has monitoring functions that you can use with the corresponding software. The following display, monitoring and control functions are available. Temperature monitoring Monitoring of drives with SMART functionality Operating hours counter (information on the total runtime) SIMATIC IPC DiagBase The SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software is contained in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). With the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software, you use the functions for local monitoring. Use the DiagBase Management Explorer application to obtain a clearer overview for monitoring. The DiagBase Alarm Manager notifies you of individual alarms. Note For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software. SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor The SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor software is provided on a CD. Potential system failures are detected and reported in good time with the diagnostics and alerting software. The software is also used for remote diagnostics. The software contains: The software for the stations to be monitored A library for creating your own applications CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 59 Functions 8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM Temperature monitoring Three thermistors monitor the temperature at multiple locations of the CPU 1515SP PC (F): Processor temperature Temperature in the vicinity of the RAM ICs/blocks Temperature of the basic module If one of the temperature values exceeds the set temperature threshold, the temperature monitoring triggers a temperature error. The temperature error activates the IPC DiagBase and/or IPC DiagMonitor software. The temperature error remains stored until the temperatures fall below the temperature threshold again and it is reset using one of the following measures: Acknowledgment of the error message by the monitoring software Restart of the device 8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM Retentive memory is non-volatile memory for saving a limited quantity of data in the event of power failure. The data defined as retentive is stored in retentive memory. This data is retained beyond a power-off or power failure. A corresponding function is implemented in the S7-1500 software controller to allow NVRAM to be used there. Up to 410 KB of data is backed up to non-volatile data memeory by this in the event of power failure. This function can be set on the engineering station in the TIA Portal. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 60 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.1 Introduction BIOS setup The BIOS setup is located in the BIOS ROM. The information is stored to the memory of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) via the system configuration. You can set the following using the Setup: The hardware configuration, for example, drive type The system properties time and date Note The American keyboard layout applies in the BIOS. Changing the device configuration The device configuration is preset for working with the supplied software. Only change the set values if you have made technical changes to your device. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 61 Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.2 Starting BIOS setup Start the setup program as follows: 1. Disconnect the device from the power supply and switch it on again (cold restart). The following screen appears in the default setting of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) after it is switched on: Figure 8-1 BIOS setup After completion of the startup test, you have the option of starting the SETUP program. The following BIOS message appears: Press F2 go to Setup Utility Press F12 go to Boot Manager 2. Press the button while the message is on the screen. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 62 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3 BIOS setup menus Overview of BIOS setup The menus and submenus are shown on the following pages. Menu bar Selectable submenu Help window Operating line Figure 8-2 Structure of the BIOS setup menus CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 63 Functions 8.3 BIOS description Menu structure In the menu bar , you can select between the following menu forms: [Information] [Main] [Advanced] [Security] [Power] [Boot] [Exit]. In the main window , various settings are displayed or submenus selected. In the Help window of the respective menu, you can find information on the selected setup entry. The operating line contains notes on operation. You can use the cursor keys [] left and [] right to switch between the menu forms. Menu Meaning Information Device-specific information, for example, product version Main Setting system functions Advanced Advanced system configuration Security Safety functions, for example, setting a password Power Determining the switch-on behavior of the device Boot Determining boot options, such as boot priority Exit Exiting and saving CPU 1515SP PC (F) 64 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.1 Information menu This menu shows the versions of the device-specific functions. Keep this information at hand for Customer Support when you have technical questions regarding your system. Example Figure 8-3 Information menu CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 65 Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.2 Main menu Settings in the Main menu Figure 8-4 Main menu In the Main menu, you can use the [] up and [] down arrow keys to select between the following system setting fields: Array Meaning System Time Displaying and setting the current time System Date Displaying and setting the current calendar date System Time and System Date System Time and System Date show the current values. After you have selected the corresponding field, you can change the following settings, one after the other, using the [+] and [-] keys: For the time of day: Hour: Minute: Second For the date: Month/day/year. You can use the key to switch between the entries within the Date and Time fields (e.g., from hour to minute). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 66 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.3 Advanced menu Settings in the Advanced menu Figure 8-5 Advanced menu Entry Meaning Boot Configuration Configuring the boot settings IDE Configuration Configuring the devices Video Configuration Configuring the graphics parameters CPU Related setting Configuring CPU parameters AMD PBS Option Configuring interfaces "IDE Configuration" submenu Entry Meaning SATA configure as Setting the SATA configuration type: IDE, LEGACY IDE, AHCI Serial ATA Port 0 Serial ATA Port 0 device configuration CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 67 Functions 8.3 BIOS description "Video Configuration" submenu Entry Meaning UMA Sharing Memory Size (256 MB) Setting the size of the work memory for the graphics processor. (Unified Memory Architecture; also Shared Memory) "CPU Related setting" submenu Entry Meaning SVM support Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled) Secure Virtual Machine functionality . "AMD PBS Option" submenu Entry Meaning Internal LAN Controller Integrated Ethernet interface (10/100/1000 Mbps) X2 PN/IE (LAN) PXE Boot to INT_LAN Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled) internal Southbridge Network Controller. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 68 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.4 Security menu Settings in the Security menu Figure 8-6 Security menu To protect the CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access, assign a password. Supervisor Password Set Supervisor Password Installed Specific setup fields, including the Supervisor password, can be modified by the user. Not installed Password is disabled. This field opens a dialog for assigning or changing the password. Note Overwriting of the Supervisor password during a BIOS update A BIOS update overwrites the password. After a BIOS update, set up the password again. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 69 Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.5 Power menu Settings in the Power menu Figure 8-7 Power menu In the Power menu, you specify the device reaction to a power failure and a Wake Event. Entry Meaning Wake on PME When activated (Enabled), the device switches itself on when a Power Management Event occurs. Otherwise, the device remains switched off. Auto Wake on S5 When activated (Enabled), the device switches itself on when a Wake Event occurs. Otherwise, the device remains switched off. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 70 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.6 Boot menu Entries in the Boot menu Figure 8-8 Boot menu In this menu, you define the boot behavior of the device. Entry Meaning Quick Boot Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled). The device starts up faster when this option is enabled, because various hardware function tests are skipped. Quiet Boot When this option is disabled, the device boots in text mode. When it is enabled, a start screen with logo appears. USB Boot Booting from connected USB devices permitted/not permitted. Boot menu > submenu "Boot Device Priority" In this menu, you define the sequence of the boot media. Entry Meaning Normal Boot Menu Normal = boot sequence by component type Advance = individual boot sequence of all components CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 71 Functions 8.3 BIOS description Boot Device Priority > submenu "Boot Type Order" Entry Meaning Hard Disk Drive Setting the boot sequence of the group of drives USB Setting the boot sequence of the group of USB drives Others Setting the boot sequence of the group Others,, e.g. Remote Boot Device All connected boot-capable components and their boot position are displayed in this menu. The boot position of the components can be moved freely. The component at the top (highest boot priority) is used for booting. If the component is not available, the system boots from the next component in the list. You change the boot sequence as follows: Select the boot components using the keys <>, <> Move to the required position using the keys <+>, <-> Note You can start the Boot Manager by pressing the key during the boot process. The Boot Manager shows all available boot components and boots from the device selected by the user. "Normal Boot Menu > Advance" setting Boot capable components which were disconnected and reconnected to the CPU 1515SP PC (F) during the boot processes, appear in first place in the BIOS in the "Advance" setting. Boot Device Priority > submenu "Hard Disk Drive" The size of the CFast card is displayed in this menu. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 72 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.3.7 Exit menu Settings in the Exit menu Figure 8-9 Exit menu The setup program is always terminated via the Exit menu. The menu is used to save or discard the changes made. Entry Meaning Exit Saving Changes Saves all changes and then starts the system with the new parameters. Save Change Without Exit Saves all changes Exit Discarding Changes Discards all changes and then restarts the system with the old parameters. Load Optimal Defaults Loads the optimum default values Load Custom Defaults Loads the default values Safe Custom Defaults Saves the default values Discard Changes Discards all changes CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 73 Functions 8.3 BIOS description 8.3.4 BIOS setup default settings Documenting the device configuration If you change the default setting of the BIOS Setup, then enter this in the following table. This will ensure that values you set will be readily available if hardware changes are made later. We recommend that you print out the table below and keep it in a safe place after you have made your entries. Note The default settings in the BIOS setup depend on the ordered device configuration. BIOS setup default settings Menu System parameters Default settings Main System Time hh:mm:ss System Date MM/TT/JJJJ Advanced > IDE Configuration SATA configure as LEGACY IDE Serial ATA Port 0 SIMATIC IPC CFast 30 Advanced > Video Configuration UMA Sharing Memory Size 256 MB Advanced > CPU Related setting SVM Support Enabled Advanced > AMD PBS Option Internal LAN Controller Auto PXE Boot to INT_LAN Disabled Security Supervisor Password Not installed Set Supervisor Password Inactive (no password assigned) Wake on PME Enabled Power Boot Auto Wake on S5 Disabled Quick Boot Enabled Quiet Boot Disabled USB Boot Disabled Boot > Boot Device Priority > Normal Normal Boot Menu Advance Normal Boot > Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drive Boot Type Order User settings USB Others Hard Disk Drive SIMATIC IPC CFast 8/16/30 GByte CPU 1515SP PC (F) 74 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.3 BIOS description Menu System parameters Default settings Exit Exit Saving Change Standard User settings Save Change Without Exit Exit Discarding Changes Load Optimal Defaults Load Custom Defaults Safe Custom Defaults Discard Changes 8.3.5 BIOS update With the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software (included in scope of delivery), you can perform the following actions: Perform a BIOS update. Saving and updating the current BIOS version. Saving the BIOS settings or loading them from another backup. For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software. Requirements The S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F) must be in STOP mode. CPU 1515SP PC (F) must be started in Windows mode. NOTICE Malfunctions in the software controllers due to critical actions If you perform a BIOS update during the operation of the S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F), software controller malfunctions can occur that lead to interruptions in communications and downtimes. Do not perform BIOS updates or other actions that strongly utilize the hardware resources during the operation of the CPU 1505SP (F). Prior to a BIOS update, switch the CPU 1505SP (F) to STOP. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 75 Functions 8.4 Power options Performing a BIOS update 1. Start the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the GRUB menu in Windows mode (see figure (Page 58)). The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green. The device carries out the hardware initialization. 2. Follow the BIOS update steps described in the help for SIMATIC IPC DiagBase. The update is performed. You are prompted to restart the device. 3. Us thee Windows function Start > Shut down to shut down the CPU 1515SP PC (F). The PWR LED lights up green first, then yellow. The Windows function closes the Windows operating system and the software controller. 4. Switch off the power supply at the CPU 1515SP PC (F). 5. Connect the power supply. 6. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears. The CPU 1515SP PC (F) restarts. NOTICE Overwriting of the Supervisor password during a BIOS update A BIOS update overwrites the password. After a BIOS update, set up the password again in the Security menu under "Set Supervisor Password". 8.4 Power options An energy diagram with the name SIMATIC on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). This ensures that the CPU does not deviate from its maximum clock rate in order not to endanger the real-time capability of the software controller. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 76 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers NOTICE Data loss The number of write cycles on CFast cards is limited due to technical reasons. To prevent data loss, the CFast card must therefore be provided with special protection. Use a write filter to lengthen of service life of the CFast card and avoid the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Write filters Two write filters are available for Windows Embedded: To protect an entire partition of the CFast card, use the Enhanced Write Filter EWF (Page 78). Unlike FBWF, you can also use EWF with compressed NTFS data systems. Use the File-Based Write Filter FBWF (Page 82), to update specific files dynamically. The FBWF can be configured more flexibly and enables direct write access without restart. NOTICE Data loss If both write filters are activated, the EWF blocks direct write access of the FBWF. Data get lost after a restart of CPU 1515SP PC (F). Activate only one of the two write filters per partition. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 77 Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers 8.5.1 Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) Purpose and function The Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) allows you to write-protect individual partitions. EWF is disabled by default on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). The EWF is activated by means of the pre-installed SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager or the Windows console application ewfmgr.exe. SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager Start the software via Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC > EWF Manager. In the status bar, you can use the SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager icon to check whether the EWF is active. Table 8- 1 Icons Meaning of the icons Meaning The partition is protected by the EWF. EWF is disabled for this partition. The EWF is currently switched off, but is activated after the restart. The EWF is currently active, but will be deactivated after the restart. The filter is active. A Commit command is executed before the next reboot. The filter is currently active, but is deactivated after the restart. A Commit command will also be executed before the next reboot. The operating instructions for the SIMATIC Industrial PC: IPC EWF Manager (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50867677) is available on the CPU 1515SP PC (F) under Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > Documents > Manuals. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 78 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers Console application ewfmgr.exe The application is called via the Windows command line (Command Prompt). The following functions are available, among others, for setting, switching on and switching off the EWF: Table 8- 2 Enhanced Write Filter functions Function Write-protect drive C: Switching on Command ewfmgr c: -enable Write-protect drive C: disable (modified data is accepted) ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable Modified files on drive C: Accept ewfmgr c: -commit Display information about the EWF drive ewfmgr c: Display help ewfmgr /h Note The EWF commands for write protection become effective only after a restart. Note The EWF command ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable must not be used with the option -Live. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 79 Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers Special features when using the EWF NOTICE Data loss upon power failure and upon shutdown/restart If the EWF is active, all changes made on the C drive are lost after power failure and on shutdown/restart. Use an UPS to prevent data losses after power failure. Back up the data in the EWF-RAM overlay to the CFast card before shutting down the CPU 1515SP PC (F). In the command line, enter the following commands: ewfmgr c: -commit Restart the device Or ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable Restart the device ewfmgr c: -enable Restart the device Note Data loss If EWF is active and you decline a restart after having set the -commitanddisable or -commit option, your data is lost after a power failure! CPU 1515SP PC (F) 80 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers Note Disabling automatic daylight saving changes In systems without central time management and with activated EWF, the time is advanced or set back by one hour in the daylight saving time or standard time period each time the system performs a cold or warm restart, due to the system-specific function for automatic daylight saving changes. Reason for this behavior: Windows Embedded Standard 7 sets a flag in a registry entry that indicates completion of the conversion to daylight saving time. Since this file is also protected against modification by the EWF, the marker is lost during the boot sequence and the adjustment is made again. We therefore recommend that you deactivate the automatic adjustment and change the clock manually. Proceed as follows: 1. Disable the EWF filter (ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable) and reboot the system. 2. Deactivate the automatic switchover in the Control Panel: Start > Control Panel > Date and Time > in the tab "Time Zone" clear the check mark for "Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes". 3. Save the change (ewfmgr c: -commit). 4. Switch on the EWF again (ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable) and reboot the system. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 81 Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers 8.5.2 File-Based Write Filter (FBWF) Purpose and function The FBWF allows you to write-protect specific files and folders of a partition. FBWF is enabled by default on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). The FBWF is activated by means of the Windows console application fbwfmgr.exe. NOTICE Data loss If both write filters are activated, the EWF blocks direct write access of the FBWF. Data get lost after a restart of CPU 1515SP PC (F). Activate only one of the two write filters. Console application fbwfmgr.exe The application is called via the Windows command line (Command Prompt). The following functions, among others, are available for setting, switching on and switching off the FBWF: Table 8- 3 File-Based Write Filter Function Command Show FBWF status fbwfmgr /displayconfig Activate FBWF after the next restart fbwfmgr /enable Write to protected files fbwfmgr /commit c: \\ Display help fbwfmgr /? Defining exclusions: fbwfmgr /addexclusion c: \\ * Add file * Add folder fbwfmgr /addexclusion c: \ * Remove file fbwfmgr /removeexclusion c: \\ * Remove folder fbwfmgr /removeexclusion c: \ Note Note: * The correct notation is as follows: Drive letter: space character "\" relative file path * The write protection commands become effective only after a restart. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 82 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Functions 8.5 Protective functions for data carriers Rule for exclusion list The following sequence applies if you define exclusions for files and folders that do not yet exist: Defining exclusions Restart CPU 1515SP PC (F) Create file/folder Display of the partition size with activated FBWF The partition size displayed in the Explorer does not correspond with the actual size when the FBWF is active. The size displayed is derived from the amount of memory occupied on the partition and from memory released by the FBWF. After the maximum size of the overlay was reached, a message is output warning of insufficient space on the partition. Reference Additional information on FBWF is available on the Internet (http://msdn.microsoft.com/enus/library/ff794219(v=winembedded.60).aspx). Additional information on the topic of partitions is available in the Change partitioning (Page 85) chapter. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 83 9 Maintenance 9.1 Backing up and restoring data Introduction The operating system and the Runtime software are located on the supplied Restore DVD. You can use this to restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). If you use functions from the Restore menu, you must acknowledge a security message. For the functions, 72 hours are available in each case. If the functions are no completed within this period, the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is automatically restarted. Save your project to partition D: of the CFast card. SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator You can also create your own image of your CFast card. This contains the operating system, the Runtime software and the complete project loaded from the TIA Portal. To back up data in Windows Embedded Standard 7, we recommend the software tool SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator (V3.3 or later). It provides for easy backup and fast restore of the contents of the CFAST card and of individual partitions (images). Note The SIMATIC Image & Partition Creator supports the X2 PN/IE (LAN) interface. You can procure the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator: via the Siemens online ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall). Pre-installed on the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives. For additional information, please refer to the corresponding product documentation. SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive You can use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives for data backup and restore. You obtain these through the Siemens online ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 84 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning 9.2 Change partitioning 9.2.1 Partitions in the delivery state Partitioning the CFast card The following partitions are set up on the CFast card by default: Partition Name 30 GB CFast card (WES7 E 32Bit/WES7 P 64Bit) File system C: SYSTEM 19.5 GB NTFS D: DATA 8 GB NTFS - - 0.4 GB RAW - WinCCMB 0.04 GB NTFS Note Partitions in Windows Embedded Standard 7 The partitions need to be set again if they are faulty or if the partitioning is to be changed. NOTICE CPU volume for software controller (0.4 GB RAW) Do not change the CPU volume for software controllers. This is the only way to ensure that the software controller continues to operate without error. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 85 Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning 9.2.2 Change partitioning If the capacities of the partitions are insufficient, you have the option with Windows 7 to change the size of the partitions (for example, drive C: extend and drive D: reduce). Free space must be available in order to extend the partition. You can recognize free space by the designation "Unallocated". You may have the reduce or delete other partitions to create space. Note Deleting partitions When partitions are deleted on the data on them are destroyed. Possible reasons for an expansion of the partition size to drive C: Loading security updates for Windows drive C: Option of installing large software packages on C, if their size exceeds the available storage space. Expand/shrink partition To expand, for example, Partition C: at the cost of Partition D: follow these steps: In the Windows start bar, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Management. The "Computer Management" window opens. Figure 9-1 Computer Management CPU 1515SP PC (F) 86 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning To expand Partition C: you must delete Partition D: first. Right-click on Partition D: and select "Delete Volume..." Figure 9-2 Partition D: Delete The space which was occupied by Partition D: is now available for Partition C: . Figure 9-3 Partition D: cleared CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 87 Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning Now right-click on Partition C: and select "Extend Volume...". Figure 9-4 Partition C: expand After selecting the option "Extend Volume...", the "Extend Volume Wizard" appears. Figure 9-5 Extend Volume Wizard CPU 1515SP PC (F) 88 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning In the following window you have the option to expand Partition C: by all or part of the available memory. In our example we expand Partition C: by 500 MB. Figure 9-6 Select memory size When you have completed the steps of the wizard, the Computer Management window shows you the new division of the partition sizes. Figure 9-7 Result of the repartitioning CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 89 Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning To reassign the unassigned memory to Partition D: right-click on the unassigned memory and select "New Simple Volume..." Figure 9-8 Recreate partition After selecting the option "New Simple Volume...", the "New Simple Volume Wizard" appears. Set the required memory size there. Figure 9-9 Select memory size CPU 1515SP PC (F) 90 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.2 Change partitioning In the following window, select Drive D: Figure 9-10 Assign drive letter Specify the formatting for storing data on the partition. Figure 9-11 Specify formatting CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 91 Maintenance 9.3 Restoring the delivery state Once you have defined the formatting, an overview of your selected settings appears. Then click "Finish" to complete the process. The "Computer Management" window now shows the new partition sizes. 9.3 Restoring the delivery state Introduction The entire image of your operating system and your Runtime software are located on the supplied Restore DVD. You can use the SIMATIC Restore menu to restore the original CPU 1515SP PC (F) software. Alternatively, you can use the Restore menu to create a boot-capable USB stick to restore the original software without a DVD-ROM drive (see chapter Restoring delivery state using USB stick (Page 95)). Note Restoring existing system partition If your projects are stored on partition D: you can then use the option "Restore existing system partition" to restore Partition C: with the operating system and the Runtime software, without your project data being affected. Note Using Multitouch panels The restoration of the original software is not possible with a Multitouch panel, because the Multitouch driver is not available until after the installation of the operating system. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 92 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.3 Restoring the delivery state Requirements To restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), the following is required: A CFast card. Minimum size of the CFast card for the CPU 1515SP PC (F): - WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM: 8 GB - WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM: 16 GB A DVD drive with external power supply The supplied Restore DVD. Alternatively, a bootable USB stick A data backup NOTICE Data loss During restoration of the system to delivery state, the CFast card is completely erased and re-formatted, and is then loaded with the original software. All subsequently modified or added data, programs, license keys and partitions on the CFast card will be lost. Back up the data of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), after you have assigned parameters to the module and if you have made changes to the configuration. NOTICE Loss of license keys Back up the license keys before the restore by dragging these to your USB stick via Automation License Manager. After the restart of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), re-install the license keys on the device via the Automation License Manager. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 93 Maintenance 9.3 Restoring the delivery state Restore delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with the Restore DVD Before the restore 1. Switch off the power supply of the CPU. 2. Remove all USB devices from the CPU. 3. Connect a DVD drive with restore DVD to a USB interface of the CPU. 4. Switch on the power supply of the CPU. The CPU is started. 5. Press to start the Boot Manager. 6. Select the list entry for the DVD drive in the Boot Manager. 7. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key. The loading process is displayed (Windows logo). The SIMATIC Restore menu opens. - Select a language. - Select "CPU1515SP PC (F)" or "CPU1515SP PC (F) + HMI". - Select the option "Completely restore system drive". The original software is restored on Partition C:, Partition D: is deleted. After the restore 1. Exit the Restore menu. 2. Remove all USB devices. 3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning (Page 50). Further procedure Reconnect the USB devices. Install the license keys. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 94 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick 9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick Introduction You can use the Restore menu to create a bootable USB stick in order to restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB FlashDrive (6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0) for the creation. Preparing bootable USB stick using PC NOTICE Data loss If you transfer the data from the Restore-DVD to the USB stick, all existing data on the USB stick is deleted. You should back up the data on the USB stick before you create the Restore USB stick. Transferring Restore DVD data to the USB stick 1. Place the Restore DVD into the DVD drive of a PC. 2. Double-click the CD_Menu.exe file in the root directory of the DVD. 3. Select the option " Create USB flash drive". 4. When all the data has been transferred, remove the Restore USB stick safely from the PC. Note If you disturb the User-Interface window during the process (for example, by a mouse click in the window), the process continues unchanged even if no reaction is recognizable within the tool interface. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 95 Maintenance 9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick Restoring delivery state using USB stick Before the restore 1. Switch off the power supply of the CPU. 2. Remove all USB devices from the CPU. 3. Connect the Restore USB stick directly to the CPU. 4. Switch on the power supply of the CPU. The CPU is started. The restore process starts. 5. Press to start the Boot Manager. 6. Select the list entry for the USB stick as boot medium in the Boot Manager. 7. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key. The loading process is displayed (Windows logo). The SIMATIC Restore menu opens. 8. Select a language. 9. Select "CPU 1515SP PC (F)" or "CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI". 10.Select the option "Restore delivery state". The original software is restored. After the restore 1. Exit the Restore menu. 2. Remove all USB devices. 3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 96 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.5 Updating software 9.5 Updating software Note If you update the software, then always start the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the GRUB menu in Windows mode (see Figure (Page 58)). Information on updating software can be found on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en). HMI devices During the installation, make sure that you always use the latest drivers for the HMI devices used (SIMATIC Flat Panels). Before you install a new driver version, you must uninstall the old driver version in order to ensure proper operation. You can download the current driver software from SIMATIC Product Support. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 97 Maintenance 9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7 9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7 The Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system is pre-installed on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). WES7 E 32Bit or WES7 P 64Bit are available depending on the order option. The WES7 P version supports multi-touch functionality (gesture control). Windows language packs English is available as the basic language for the installation of the Windows operating system. With the system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), other operating system languages can be installed after the first commissioning. Note that you need administrator rights to install language packages. The following language packages are contained on the Restore DVD in \Packages\x64\LanguagePack: Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese German English French Italian Japanese Korean Russian Spanish Installing languages Use the Windows function "Start > Control Panel > Region and Language" to install a language pack. The installation takes around 45 minutes. Updates You can install additional updates at a later time. You can find current information on the operating system at Widows (http://www.windows.com). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 98 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Maintenance 9.7 Sending the device to customer service 9.7 Sending the device to customer service Before sending Note Back up data and remove memory cards Before you send in the CPU 1515SP PC (F) for repair: * Create a backup of your data. * Back up your SIMATIC license keys on a USB stick. * Remove your SD/MMC cards. * Remove your CFast card. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 99 Maintenance 9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card 9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card Introduction CPU 1515SP PC (F) has one slot for a CFast card. On this card, you will find the operating system, your Runtime software and, after configuration, the project. Seal the cover for the CFast card to protect the system against unauthorized access. You must remove the CFast card before you send in the CPU, for example, for repair. Requirements CPU 1515SP PC (F) is de-energized. Procedure - Removing the CFast card 1. Remove the seal. 2. Open the cover, using a screwdriver if necessary. 3. Press onto the CFast card. The card is pressed out of the slot. 4. Pull the card out of the slot. To do this, grip the rib on the underside of the memory card. Procedure - Inserting the CFast card 1. Open the cover of the slot, using a screwdriver if necessary. 2. Insert the CFast card into the slot. 3. Press the CFast card into the slot. The CFast card is properly inserted if the cover can be closed without any resistance. 4. Close the cover. NOTICE Unauthorized access Seal the cover with lead to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 100 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.1 10 Standards and approvals Introduction The general technical specifications cover the following: The standards and test values which the CPU 1515SP PC (F) complies with and fulfils. The test criteria according to which the CPU 1515SP PC (F) was tested. Currently valid markings and approvals Note The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Safety information WARNING Risk of personal injury and damage to property. In potentially explosive atmospheres, injury to persons and material damage may occur if you disconnect plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP. Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP when disconnecting plug-in connections in potentially explosive atmospheres. WARNING Flying sparks due to loose cables Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong oscillation and high vibrating loads. Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 101 Technical data 10.1 Standards and approvals WARNING Explosion hazard If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV. 2 can become invalid. WARNING Area of application This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-hazardous areas. CE marking The CPU 1515SP PC (F) meets the requirements and protection targets of the following EC guidelines and complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European Community: 2006/95/EC "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (LowVoltage Directive) 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive) The EC declarations of conformity are available for the responsible authorities at: Siemens AG Digital Factory Factory Automation DF FA AS DH AMB Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg These are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, keyword "Declaration of Conformity". cULus approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) OR CPU 1515SP PC (F) 102 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.1 Standards and approvals cULus HAZ. LOC. approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location) APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations. WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS. FM approval Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 (ANSI/ISA 82.02.01) CSA C22.2 No. 213 CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx ATEX approval in accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 103 Technical data 10.1 Standards and approvals IECEx approval According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements) Marking for Australia and New Zealand The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the standard AS/NZS CISPR 16. Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas. (A) . IEC 61131 The CPU 1515SP PC (F) with the S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F) meets the requirements and criteria of the standard IEC 61131-2 (programmable logic controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests). PROFINET standard The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on the standard IEC 61158 Type 10. PROFIBUS standard The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on the standard IEC 61158 Type 3. IO-Link standard The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on the standard IEC 61131-9. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 104 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Use in industrial environments SIMATIC products are designed for use in industry. Table 10- 1 Use in industrial environments Area of applica- Interference emission requirements tion Interference immunity requirements Industry EN 61000-6-2: 2005 EN 61000-6-4: 2011 Use in residential areas Note The ET 200SP is intended for use in industrial areas; use in residential areas may have an impact on radio/TV reception. If you want to use the ET 200SP in residential areas, you must ensure that its radio frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with EN 55011. Suitable measures for achieving RF interference level Class B include, for example: Installation of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). in grounded control/switch cabinets Use of filters in the supply lines Reference The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). 10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Definition Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment. Among other things, CPU 1515SP PC (F) also meets the requirements of the EMC legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite for this is that the CPU 1515SP PC (F) complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical equipment. EMC according to NE 21 The CPU 1515SP PC does not meet the EMC specifications of the NAMUR guideline NE21. The CPU 1515SP PC meets the EMC specifications according to IEC 61131-2 and IEC 61000-6-2. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 105 Technical data 10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Pulse-shaped disturbance The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with regard to pulse-shaped interference. Table 10- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance Pulse-shaped disturbance Test voltage corresponds to degree of severity Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2. Air discharge: 8 kV 3 Contact discharge 4 kV 3 Burst pulses (high-speed transient disturbance) according to IEC 61000-4-4. 2 kV (power supply cable) 2 kV (signal cable > 30 m) 1 kV (signal cable < 30 m) 3 3 High-energy single pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5 External protective circuit required (see function manual Designing interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)) * asymmetric coupling 2 kV (power supply cable) DC with protective elements 3 2 kV (signal cable/data cable only > 30 m), possibly with protective elements * symmetric coupling 1 kV (power supply cables) DC with protective elements 1 kV (signal cable/data cable only > 30 m), possibly with protective elements CPU 1515SP PC (F) 106 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Sinusoidal disturbance The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with regard to sinusoidal interference. RF radiation Table 10- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated 80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 2.7 GHz 10 V/m 3 V/m corresponds to degree of severity 3 80% AM (1 kHz) RF coupling Table 10- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling RF coupling according to IEC 61000-4-6 corresponds to degree of severity (10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3 10 Vrms unmodulated 80% AM (1 kHz) 150 source impedance Emission of radio interference Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016: Limit class A, group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m). Table 10- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016 Frequency Emitted interference 30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m)Q 230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (V/m)Q Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016: Limit value class A, Group 1. Table 10- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016 Frequency Emitted interference 0.15 to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (V) Q <66 dB (V) M 0.5 to 30 MHz <73 dB (V) Q <60 dB (V) M CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 107 Technical data 10.3 Shipping and storage conditions 10.3 Shipping and storage conditions Introduction The CPU 1515SP PC (F) exceeds requirements in terms of shipping and storage conditions according to IEC 61131-2. The following information applies to modules that are shipped and/or stored in their original packaging. Table 10- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules Type of condition Permissible range Free fall (in shipping package) 1 m Temperature From -40 C to +70 C Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m to 3500 m) Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation Sinusoidal vibrations according to IEC 60068-2-6 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Shock according to IEC 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks 10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions Note Restrictions Deviating from the ambient conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the following restrictions apply to the CPU 1515SP PC (F): * Mechanical ambient conditions: - 2 g constant acceleration when using the BusAdapter BA 2xFC * Ambient temperature: - 0 to 60 C for horizontal installation with maximum 32 I/O modules - 0 to 55 C for horizontal installation with maximum 64 I/O modules - 0 to 50 C for vertical installation with maximum 32 I/O modules Operating conditions CPU 1515SP PC (F) is designed for stationary use in weather-proof locations. The operating conditions exceed the requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3: Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements) Class 3K3 (climatic requirements) CPU 1515SP PC (F) 108 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions Mechanical ambient conditions The table below shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. Table 10- 8 Mechanical ambient conditions Frequency band CPU 1515SP PC (F) 5 f 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude 8.4 f 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration 10 f 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude 60 f 1000 Hz * 1 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45) * 2 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2xFC) Test of mechanical ambient conditions The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the test of ambient mechanical conditions. Table 10- 9 Test of mechanical ambient conditions Condition tested Test Standard Comment Vibration Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 (sine) Type of oscillation: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. BA 2xRJ45 * 5 Hz f 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude * 8.4 Hz f 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration BA 2xFC * 10 Hz f 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude * 60 Hz f 1000 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of 3 vertically aligned axes Shock Shock, tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: Half-sine Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of 3 vertically aligned axes CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 109 Technical data 10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Climatic ambient conditions You may use the CPU 1515SP PC (F) under the following climatic, ambient conditions. Table 10- 10 Climatic ambient conditions Ambient conditions Permissible range Temperature: Horizontal mounting position: * from 0 to 60 C For configuration with 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA USB load * from 0 to 55 C For configuration with 64 I/O modules and 2 x 500 mA + 1 x 100 mA USB load * 0 to 50 C For configuration with 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA USB load Vertical installation: Comments Permitted temperature change 10 K/h - Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation, corresponds to relative humidity (RH) class 2 according to IEC 61131 part 2 Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m to 2000 m Concentration of pollutants SO2: <0.5 ppm; RH <60 %, no condensation H2S: <0.1 ppm; RH <60 %, no condensation - ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 - 10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Insulation The insulation is designed according to the requirements of EN 61131-2: 2007. Note For modules with 24 V DC supply voltage, the electrical isolation is designed for max. 60 V AC / 75 V DC and basic insulation is designed according to EN 61131-2: 2007. Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131 Pollution degree 2 Overvoltage category: II CPU 1515SP PC (F) 110 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007 CPU 1515SP PC (F) fulfils the protection class I and contains parts of protection class II and III. The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for functional earth FE. The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I. Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529, i.e.: Protection against contact with standard probe Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm No protection against water Rated voltage for operation CPU 1515SP PC (F) works with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances listed in the following table. Table 10- 11 Rated voltage for operation Rated voltage Tolerance range 24 V 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1 18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2 10.6 1 Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 2 Dynamic value: including ripple, for example, with three-phase bridge rectification Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres See product information Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19692172). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 111 Technical data 10.7 Module data 10.7 Module data 10.7.1 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC HW release number FS06 Firmware version V2.1 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1 PC configuration Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E Main memory 4 GB RAM Flash disk 30 GB Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 E 32 bit Installed SW Visualization No Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP V2.1 Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value Power Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use CPU 1515SP PC (F) 112 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 Memory Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Work memory Integrated (for program) 1 MB Integrated (for data) 5 MB Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB Load memory Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB Buffering with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Racks Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module Number of rows, max. 1 Time-of-day Clock Type Hardware clock Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each - of which 2 x 500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces Graphic interface 1x DVI-I 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 Integrated switch Yes RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 * Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 113 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated * Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3rd interface Interface hardware RS 485 Yes Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1 1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2 Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Interrupts/diagnostics/status information LED diagnostics display RUN/STOP LED Yes ERROR LED Yes MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage / transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C I/O / Options I/O * SD card Optional for additional mass storage CPU 1515SP PC (F) 114 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 10.7.2 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC F Firmware version V2.1 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1 PC configuration Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E Main memory 4 GB RAM Flash disk 30 GB Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 E 32 bit Installed SW Visualization No Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 115 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 Power Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use Memory Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Work memory Integrated (for program) 1.5 MB Integrated (for data) 5 MB Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB Load memory Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB Buffering with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Racks Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module Number of rows, max. 1 Time-of-day Clock Type Hardware clock Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each - of which 2 x 500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces Graphics interface 1x DVI-I CPU 1515SP PC (F) 116 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 integrated switch Yes RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 * Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated * Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3rd interface Interface hardware RS 485 Yes Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1 1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2 Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Interrupts/diagnostics/status information LED diagnostics display RUN/STOP LED Yes ERROR LED Yes MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 117 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 Ambient temperature during storage / transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C I/O / Options I/O * optional for additional mass storage SD card Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 10.7.3 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version as of STEP 7 V14 PC configuration Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E Main memory 4 GB RAM Installed SW Visualization No Controller No Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms CPU 1515SP PC (F) 118 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value Power Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use Memory Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM CFast memory card No Work memory Integrated 4 GB Hardware configuration integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Racks Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 Module + server module (mounting width max. 1 m) Number of rows, max. 1 Time-of-day Clock Type Hardware clock Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each - of which 2 x 500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces Graphics interface 1x DVI-I CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 119 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 integrated switch Yes RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 * Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated * Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3rd interface Interface hardware RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1 1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2 Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage / transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC (F) 120 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 I/O / Options I/O * optional for additional mass storage SD card Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 10.7.4 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC HW release number FS05 Firmware version V2.1 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1 PC configuration Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E Main memory 4 GB RAM Flash disk 30 GB Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 P 64 bit Installed SW Visualization No Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP V2.1 Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 121 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value Power Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use Memory Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Work memory Integrated (for program) 1 MB Integrated (for data) 5 MB Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB Load memory Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB Buffering with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Racks Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module Number of rows, max. 1 Time-of-day Clock Type Hardware clock Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each - of which 2 x 500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously Number of SD card slots 1 CPU 1515SP PC (F) 122 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 Video interfaces Graphics interface 1x DVI-I 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 integrated switch Yes RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 * Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated * Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3rd interface Interface hardware RS 485 Yes Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1 1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2 Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Interrupts/diagnostics/status information LED diagnostics display RUN/STOP LED Yes ERROR LED Yes MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 123 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 Ambient temperature during storage / transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C I/O / Options I/O * optional for additional mass storage SD card Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 10.7.5 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC HW release number FS02 Firmware version V2.1 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1 PC configuration Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E Main memory 4 GB RAM Flash disk 30 GB Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 P 64 bit Installed SW Visualization No Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes CPU 1515SP PC (F) 124 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value Power Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use Memory Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Work memory Integrated (for program) 1.5 MB Integrated (for data) 5 MB Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB Load memory Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB Buffering with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Racks Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module Number of rows, max. 1 Time-of-day Clock Type Hardware clock Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 125 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 Interfaces Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each - of which 2 x 500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces Graphics interface 1x DVI-I 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 integrated switch Yes RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 * Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated * Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3rd interface Interface hardware RS 485 Yes Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1 1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2 Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Interrupts/diagnostics/status information LED diagnostics display RUN/STOP LED Yes ERROR LED Yes MAINT LED Yes CPU 1515SP PC (F) 126 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage / transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C I/O / Options I/O * optional for additional mass storage SD card Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 10.7.6 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version as of STEP 7 V14 PC configuration Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E Main memory 4 GB RAM Installed SW Visualization No Controller No CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 127 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 Operator controls Mode selector 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value Power Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use Memory Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM CFast memory card No Work memory Integrated 4 GB Hardware configuration integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 Racks Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 Module + server module (mounting width max. 1 m) Number of rows, max. 1 Time-of-day Clock Type Hardware clock Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 C ambient temperature, typ. Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each - of which 2 x 500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously CPU 1515SP PC (F) 128 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces Graphics interface 1x DVI-I 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 integrated switch Yes RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 * Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2nd interface Interface hardware Number of ports 1 RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated * Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps * Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3rd interface Interface hardware RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1 1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2 Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Min. 0 C Max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage / transport Min. -40 C Max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 129 Technical data 10.7 Module data 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 I/O / Options I/O * optional for additional mass storage SD card Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 10.7.7 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI The technical specifications of the following devices modules can be found in the product information under (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/104117388). ET 200SP Open Controller Article number System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0 CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0 CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0 CPU 1515SP PC F CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0 CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0 CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0 10.7.8 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F) CPU 1505SP (F) is a PC-based controller of the SIMATIC S7-1500 Software Controller family. For more information about the CPU 1505SP (F), refer to the corresponding manual at (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725). For the CPU 1505SP F, also note the information in the F product information at (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599). Technical specifications You can find all technical specifications on CPU 1505SP with the article number 6ES7672-5DC01-0YA0 under (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES76725DC01-0YA0/td). You can find all technical specifications on CPU 1505SP F with the article number 6ES7672-5SC01-0YA0 under (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5SC01-0YA0/td). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 130 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Technical data 10.8 Dimension drawings 10.8 Dimension drawings 10.8.1 CPU 1515SP PC (F) This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets. Dimension drawings of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). Figure 10-1 Dimension drawing of CPU 1515SP PC, front view CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 131 Technical data 10.8 Dimension drawings Figure 10-2 Dimension drawing of CPU 1515SP PC, side view CPU 1515SP PC (F) 132 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC A Accessories/spare parts Ordering options and accessories for CPU 1515SP PC (F) Table A- 1 Order options for CPU 1515SP PC Description Article number System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM 1 CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 CPU 1515SP PC 4 GB, spare part (without CFast card, without software) 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM 1 CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP and WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V14 * CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0 * CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0 * CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0 CPU 1515SP PC F, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F and WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V14 1 * CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0 * CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0 * CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0 Windows Embedded Standard 7 CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 133 Accessories/spare parts Table A- 2 Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC (F) Description Article number BusAdapter, 1 unit * BA 2xRJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket) 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 * BA 2xFC (PROFINET BusAdapter with Fast Connect Ethernet connection) 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 Server module; 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0 Strain relief for CPU 1515SP PC (F) A5E32291462 SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 8 GB (SLC), pre-installed BIOSMANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.3 and installation CD 6AV7672-8JD01-0AA0 SIMATIC IPC Service USB Flashdrive 16 GB, USB3.0, pre-installed BIOSMANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.4 and installation CD 6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0 SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor Software V4.4 6ES7648-6CA04-4YX0 SIMATIC PC, adapter cable, DVI-I compliant with VGA, 250 mm long 6ES7648-3AB00-0XA0 Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels, 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0 Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip * Length: 483 mm 6ES5710-8MA11 * Length: 430 mm 6ES5710-8MA21 * Length: 830 mm 6ES5710-8MA31 * Length: 2000 mm 6ES5710-8MA41 SIMATIC IPC CFast cards * CFast 4 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XG10 * CFast 8 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XH10 * CFast 16 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XJ10 * CFast 30 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XK10 Online catalog Additional article numbers can be found on the Internet in the online catalog and online ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall). CPU 1515SP PC (F) 134 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC B Abbreviations Abbreviation Term Meaning AC Alternating current Alternating current ALM Automation License Manager Tool for managing license keys in STEP 7 BIOS Basic Input Output System Basic Input Output System. A set of important software routines used after the startup of the CPU to load the operating system and to provide the routines for data exchange between hardware components. CE Communaute Europeenne CE label CFast CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer Memory card CoA Certificate of Authenticity Certificate of Authenticity, label with Microsoft Windows "Product Key" CoL Certificate of License Certificate of License for the SIMATIC software loaded DC Direct Current DC current DVD Digital Versatile Disc Digital storage medium with high memory capacity. DVI-I Digital Visual Interface Interface for transfer of image and video data for DVI-I monitors. ESD Components sensitive to electrostatic charge EN European standard EWF Enhanced Write Filter Enhanced write filter FBWF File Based Write Filter File based write filter GbE Gigabit Ethernet GRUB / GRUB4DOS GRand Unified Bootloader Boot Manager HMI Human Machine Interface User interface IEC International Electronical Commission IM Interface module The interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with the IO controller and exchanges data with the I/O modules via the backplane bus. LAN Local Area Network Computer network that is limited to a local area. LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Protocol that enables the exchange of information between adjacent devices. MMC Multi Media Card Memory card NTFS New Technology File System File system that offers targeted access protection at the file level. NVRAM Non-Volatile Random-Access Memory Non-volatile data memory that is RAM-based, the data content of which is retained without external power supply. PC Personal Computer CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 135 Abbreviations Abbreviation Term Meaning PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV, previously called "extra low voltage with safe isolation", is a protective measure against electrical shock. See EN 50178. PN PROFINET PG Programming device Compact programming device which meets the special requirements of industry. The PG is fully equipped for programming SIMATIC PLCs. PS Power supply Power supply PT Power Tags Process tags; tags enable data exchange between the components of an automation process, for example, between the HMI device and the controller. RAM Random Access Memory Main or work memory of a computer with direct access, allowing read access to data and editing. RT Runtime SD Secure Digital card Memory card SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety extra-low voltage; protective measure in which circuits with a rated voltage of up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC are operated ungrounded and feeds from circuits with a higher voltage are separated from these by, for example, a safety transformer. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. USB Universal Serial Bus Serial bus system for connecting a computer to external devices. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 136 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC C Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Remedy CPU 1515SP PC (F) is not working. CPU 1515SP PC (F) is not supplied Check the power supply. with current. CPU 1515SP PC (F) does not start. Feedback through USB devices. Use USB devices that comply with the USB 2.0 specification. Windows no longer boots. Settings in the BIOS setup are not correct. Check the settings in the BIOS setup menu Boot. Windows clock is set incorrectly. Time and/or date of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) do not match. CPU 1515SP PC (F) was not connected for more than 6 weeks. Correct the settings in the BIOS setup menu Main or in Windows. USB device is not working. USB power supply is overloaded. Use an external power supply for the USB device (see section Application planning (Page 37). CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 137 Glossary Cold restart A startup procedure commencing when the CPU is switched on. Upon a cold restart, the system typically performs some basic hardware checks and then loads the operating system from the hard disk into the work memory. Controller Integrated hardware and software controlling the operation of a specific internal or I/O device (e.g. keyboard controller). Device configuration The device configuration of a PC/programming device includes information on the features and options of the PC/programming device such as memory configuration, drive types, monitor, network address etc. The data is stored in a configuration file and is used by the operating system to load the corresponding device drivers or assign device parameters. Drivers Program sections of the operating system. They convert data from the user programs to the specific formats required by the I/O devices (e.g. hard disks, monitors, printers). Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) Configurable write filter making it possible to boot Windows Embedded Standard from writeprotected media (e.g. from CD-ROM), to write-protect individual partitions and to adapt file system performance to the user's requirements (e.g. when using CFast cards). Ethernet Local network (bus structure for text and data communication with a data transmission rate of 10/100/1000 Mbps. File-Based Write Filter (FBWF) Configurable write filter making it possible to write-protect individual files. Image An image is a copy of hard-disk partitions, for example, which is stored as backup in a file so that it can be restored if necessary. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 138 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC Glossary Interface Connection between individual hardware elements such as PCs, programming device, printer or screen by means of physical plug-in connections (cables). Connection between different programs to allow them to be used together. LAN Local Area Network: LAN refers to a local network consisting of a group of computers and other devices which are distributed over a relatively restricted area and connected through communication lines. The devices connected to a LAN are referred to as nodes. The purpose of networks is the shared use of files, printers or other resources. License key The license key is the electronic license stamp of a license. Siemens AG provides a license key for software that is protected by licensing laws. Operating system Generic term which describes all functions for controlling and monitoring user program execution and distribution of system resources to the user programs as well as maintenance of the operating mode in cooperation with the hardware. Power options The power options can be used to reduce the power consumption of the computer while still keeping it ready for immediate use. In Windows via Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Power Options. Restart The restart of the company that is already in operation using, for example, the shortcut without switching off the power supply. Restore DVD You use the Restore DVD to reset your system partition or the entire hard disk to the delivery state in the event of an error. The DVD contains all the image files required and is bootable. ROM Read Only Memory. ROM refers to a read-only memory where each memory location can be addressed individually. The stored programs or data are hard-coded and are preserved even in the event of a power failure. CPU 1515SP PC (F) Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 139 Glossary S.M.A.R.T Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART or S.M.A.R.T.) is an industry standard for storage media. It provides for permanent monitoring of relevant parameters and thus early recognition of pending defects. SATA Serial ATA. An interface for hard disk drives and optical drives with serial data transfer. SETUP (BIOS setup) A program used to determine information on the device configuration. The device configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is pre-set. Changes must be made whenever a memory expansion, new modules or drives are to be activated. CPU 1515SP PC (F) 140 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 1 ___________________ Introduction 2 ___________________ Safety information SIMATIC ET 200SP Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions 3 ___________________ Areas of application 4 ___________________ Product overview 5 ___________________ Application planning 6 ___________________ Installation 7 ___________________ Wiring 8 ___________________ Commissioning Interrupt, error and system 9 ___________________ messages 10 ___________________ Functions 11 ___________________ Maintenance 12 ___________________ Technical specifications 13 ___________________ Dimension drawings 14 ___________________ Spare parts/accessories A ___________________ Appendix B ___________________ List of abbreviations 09/2018 A5E42603425-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42603425-AA 07/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 ...................................................................................... 8 1.2 Information about third-party software updates ......................................................................12 1.3 Notes on protecting administrator accounts ...........................................................................12 Safety information ................................................................................................................................. 13 2.1 Security information ................................................................................................................13 2.2 General safety instructions .....................................................................................................14 2.3 Notes on use ...........................................................................................................................16 Areas of application .............................................................................................................................. 17 3.1 Areas of application of fail-safe CPUs ....................................................................................17 3.2 Areas of application of technology CPUs ...............................................................................17 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 18 4.1 Field of application ..................................................................................................................18 4.2 Characteristics ........................................................................................................................19 4.3 Sample configuration ..............................................................................................................20 4.4 Components ............................................................................................................................22 4.5 Operator controls and connection elements ...........................................................................24 4.6 Scope of delivery ....................................................................................................................27 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 28 5.1 Basics......................................................................................................................................28 5.2 Unpacking the device..............................................................................................................29 5.3 Identification data ....................................................................................................................30 5.4 Installation location .................................................................................................................31 5.5 Hardware configuration ...........................................................................................................33 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 34 6.1 7 Installing the device ................................................................................................................34 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 36 7.1 Notes on connection ...............................................................................................................36 7.2 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................37 7.3 Electrical configuration ............................................................................................................38 7.4 Connecting devices to networks .............................................................................................40 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 3 Table of contents 7.5 8 9 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 42 8.1 Notes on commissioning ........................................................................................................ 42 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Basic commissioning procedure ............................................................................................ 43 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 43 Preparing commissioning ....................................................................................................... 43 Commissioning procedure ..................................................................................................... 43 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 Initial commissioning an open controller ................................................................................ 45 Creating the configuration of the Open Controller ................................................................. 45 Setting the IP address ............................................................................................................ 46 Changing the properties of the S7-1500 Software Controller ................................................ 46 Establishing the HMI connection............................................................................................ 47 Downloading a project to the target system ........................................................................... 47 Transferring license keys ....................................................................................................... 48 Switching the Open Controller on/off ..................................................................................... 50 Interrupt, error and system messages ................................................................................................... 51 9.1 10 11 12 Securing cables...................................................................................................................... 41 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 51 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 54 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 Monitoring functions ............................................................................................................... 54 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 54 Temperature monitoring ......................................................................................................... 55 Monitoring drives .................................................................................................................... 55 Operating hours counter ........................................................................................................ 55 10.2 Retentive memory NVRAM .................................................................................................... 55 10.3 BIOS setup ............................................................................................................................. 56 10.4 Power options ........................................................................................................................ 56 10.5 "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter ................................................................................... 57 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 58 11.1 Backing up and restoring data ............................................................................................... 58 11.2 Partitions in the delivery state ................................................................................................ 59 11.3 Restoring the delivery state ................................................................................................... 60 11.4 Updating software .................................................................................................................. 62 11.5 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit) ....................................................................................... 62 11.6 Sending the device to customer service ................................................................................ 63 11.7 Removing and inserting the CFast card ................................................................................ 64 11.8 Recycling and disposal .......................................................................................................... 65 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 66 12.1 Standards and approvals ....................................................................................................... 66 12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ................................................................................................ 71 12.3 Shipping and storage conditions ............................................................................................ 73 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 4 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Table of contents 13 12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions ..........................................................................74 12.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ..............76 12.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .......................................77 12.7 12.7.1 12.7.2 12.7.3 12.7.4 12.7.5 12.7.6 12.7.7 12.7.8 12.7.9 12.7.10 12.7.11 12.7.12 Module data ............................................................................................................................78 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 - basic device ................................................78 Technical specifications CPU 1515SP PC2 ...........................................................................81 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128PT .................................................85 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512PT .................................................89 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048PT ...............................................93 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F ....................................................................97 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128PT ............................................101 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512PT ............................................105 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2018PT ..........................................109 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 T ..................................................................113 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 TF ................................................................117 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) ............................................................120 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 121 13.1 14 Spare parts/accessories ...................................................................................................................... 123 14.1 A B CPU 1515SP PC2.................................................................................................................121 Accessories/spare parts........................................................................................................123 Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 124 A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support .........................................................................................124 A.2 Industry Mall ..........................................................................................................................124 A.3 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................125 List of abbreviations ............................................................................................................................ 126 B.1 Abbreviations ........................................................................................................................126 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 128 Index................................................................................................................................................... 131 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 5 1 Introduction Purpose of the documentation These operating instructions supplement the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in these operating instructions and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the CPU 1515SP PC2. Basic knowledge required The system must be operated and used by qualified staff only. The following knowledge is required: Installation guideline for SIMATIC ET 200SP Totally Integrated Automation Portal, in particular: - Hardware configuration with hardware and network editor - Communication between CPUs PC based automation with an S7-1500 software controller and with WinCC Runtime Advanced Basic knowledge of fail-safe automation systems Basic knowledge of PC technology Windows 10 IoT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 6 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Introduction 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". "CPU1515SP PC2 T" means that the respective section applies only to the "CPU 1515SP PC2 T". "CPU1515SP PC2 F" means that the respective section applies only to the "CPU 1515SP PC2 F". "CPU1515SP PC2 TF" means that the respective section applies only to the "CPU 1515SP PC2 TF". "CPU 1515SP PC2" also includes "CPU1 515SP PC2 F", "CPU 1515SP PC2 T" and "CPU 1515SP PC2 TF". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Scope of validity of the documentation This documentation is valid for the following products: ET 200SP Open Controller Article number Standard CPU * CPU 1515SP PC2 basic device 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0 Fail-safe CPUs * CPU 1515SP PC2 F 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0 * CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0 Technology CPUs * CPU 1515SP PC2 T 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0 Fail-safe technology CPUs * CPU 1515SP PC2 TF 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 7 Introduction 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 The following additional documentation is required to use the CPU 1515SP PC2: Operating instructions CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF), CPU 1507S (F) Version 2.5 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109740725) STEP 7 and WinCC Engineering V15 system manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755202) ET 200SP distributed I/O system manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) ET 200SP server module manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109478599) The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 8 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Introduction 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 9 Introduction 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 10 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Introduction 1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 11 Introduction 1.2 Information about third-party software updates SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet. 1.2 Information about third-party software updates This product contains third-party software. Siemens accepts liability with respect to updates/patches for the third-party software only when these are distributed by Siemens in the context of a Software Update Service contract or officially approved by Siemens. Otherwise, updates/patches are installed at the user's own risk. You can find more information about our software update service offer under (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/licenses/software-updateservice/Pages/Default.aspx). 1.3 Notes on protecting administrator accounts A user with administrator rights has extensive access and manipulation possibilities. Therefore, make sure that the administrator account is adequately protected to prevent unauthorized changes. To do this, set secure passwords and use a standard user account for regular operation. Other measures, such as the use of security policies, should be applied as required. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 12 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Safety information 2.1 2 Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 13 Safety information 2.2 General safety instructions 2.2 General safety instructions WARNING Life-endangering voltage when control cabinet is open If the device is installed in a control cabinet, areas or components can be under lifeendangering voltage when the control cabinet is open. Contact with these areas or components may lead to death through electric shock. Switch off the power before opening the control cabinet. If the device is operated in a machine in accordance with the machinery directive, the provisions of the guideline 2006/42/EC apply. Safe operation of a plant NOTICE Protective measures To ensure safe operation of a plant, you have to take suitable IT security measures, for example, network segmentation. Seal the cover to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC2 from unauthorized access. For more information on Industrial Security, refer to the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). If you have questions about whether it is permissible to install the device in the planned environment, please contact your service representative. Repairs WARNING Damage caused by opening the device Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial damage to equipment or endanger the user. Only authorized personnel are permitted to repair the device. You can find more information on the repair in the section Sending device in for repair (Page 63). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 14 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Safety information 2.2 General safety instructions ESD guidelines Modules containing electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) can be identified by the following label: Strictly follow the guidelines mentioned below when handling modules which are sensitive to ESD: Before working with modules with ESD, you need to ensure that you are free of electrostatic charge (e.g. by touching a grounded object). All devices and tools must be free of static charge. Always pull the mains connector and disconnect the battery before installing or removing modules which are sensitive to ESD. Handle modules fitted with ESDs only by their edges. Do not touch any connector pins or conductors on modules containing ESDs. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 15 Safety information 2.3 Notes on use 2.3 Notes on use WARNING Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant According to the results of a risk analysis, hazards can occur at an unprotected machine. The hazards may lead to personal injury. According to the risk analysis, the risk of injury to persons can be countered with the following measures: * Additional protective equipment at the machine or plant. In this case, the programming, parameter assignment and wiring of the I/O used, in particular, must be performed in accordance with the safety criteria (SIL, PL or Cat.) ascertained by means of an appropriate risk analysis. * Use of the device for its intended purpose, which can be established by performing a functional test on the plant. This allows errors in programming, parameter assignment and wiring to be detected. * Documentation of the test results which can be entered, if required, into the relevant safety certificates. NOTICE Ambient conditions Ambient conditions for which the device is not suitable can lead to faults or damage the device. Note the following: * Only operate the device in enclosed areas. If you do not comply with this instruction, the warranty becomes void. * Only operate the device in accordance with the ambient conditions given in the technical specifications. * Protect the device from dust, moisture and heat. * Do not expose the device to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light. * The device must not be used in places with more difficult operating conditions through corrosive vapors or gases without taking additional protective measures, for example, supply of clean air. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 16 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Areas of application 3.1 3 Areas of application of fail-safe CPUs Areas of application F-CPUs are mainly designed for personal and machine protection. In addition to the safety program, you can also program standard applications. You can operate the F-CPUs in safety mode or in standard mode. Reference Information on the use of F-CPUs in safety mode is available in the programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). You can find information on using the CPU 1505SP (F) Software Controller in the associated manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725) and in the F-product information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599). 3.2 Areas of application of technology CPUs Areas of application Areas of application of T-CPUs are motion control applications such as gearing and camming as well as control of kinematics. Due to the supported technology functions, the S7-1500T CPUs are suitable for controlling packaging machines, converting applications, assembly automation, etc. You can operate the TF-CPUs in safety mode or in standard mode. Reference You can find information on using the T-CPUs in the function manual SIMATIC S7-1500T Motion Control (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109749263). You can find information on using the T-CPUs in the function manual SIMATIC S7-1500T kinematics functions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109749264). You can find information on using the F-CPUs and TF-CPUs in safety mode in the product information for SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109478599). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 17 4 Product overview 4.1 Field of application Article number The article number depends on the pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller and HMI Runtime. You can find an overview of the article numbers in the section Scope of validity of the documentation (Page 6). View of the module The following figure shows the CPU 1515SP PC2: Figure 4-1 CPU 1515SP PC2 with supplied accessories CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 18 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Product overview 4.2 Characteristics 4.2 Characteristics The CPU 1515SP PC2 is a PC-based automation device in the design of the ET 200SP. It is used for control and visualization purposes. The supplied IPC DiagBase software provides basic diagnostics functions and supports you in handling the BIOS. General characteristics A removable CFast card with the following pre-installations is used as storage medium: - Windows 10 IoT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) - S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP, CPU 1505SP F, CPU 1505SP T, CPU 1505SP TF - Optionally with HMI: WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V15 Interfaces: - An interface for the exchangeable ET 200SP BusAdapters for connection of PROFINET IO (2 ports) Accessories/spare parts (Page 123) - An interface for connecting devices using Industrial Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet) - 4 interfaces for USB devices (2 x USB 3.0 and 2 x USB 2.0) - A DisplayPort interface (DPP) for a monitor - A sealable slot for the CFast card - A slot for an SD/MMC card as additional optional drive Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope of delivery. The CPU 1515SP PC2 is suitable for use in industrial environments: - Compact design - Fan-less operation - High robustness The CPU 1515SP PC2 complies with IP 20 degree of protection and is intended for installation in a control cabinet. Additional information You can find more information on the system versions and ordering options in the section Scope of validity of the documentation (Page 6). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 19 Product overview 4.3 Sample configuration 4.3 Sample configuration Configuration The CPU 1515SP PC2 is mounted on a mounting rail according to EN 60715. A modular system is formed with ET 200SP modules in the central rack. You can also expand the CPU 1515SP PC2 with fail-safe I/O modules. You can use the CPU 1515SP PC2 as PROFINET IO controller. The PROFINET IO devices are connected via the ports of the X1 PN(LAN) interface using a SIMATIC BusAdapter. Devices can be connected via Industrial Ethernet using the integrated interface X2 PN/IE(LAN). The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 20 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Product overview 4.3 Sample configuration Sample configuration The following figure shows a sample configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC2: CPU 1515SP PC2, I/O modules, server module, BusAdapter ET 200AL modules with ET-Connection Flat Panel - Wide Screen Display USB devices: Keyboard, mouse, printer ... Industrial Thin Client ITC SCALANCE W786 Field PG PROFINET IO device Camera PC/Programming device Figure 4-2 Configuration example with the CPU 1515SP PC2 Reference You can find more information about configuring the ET 200AL modules in the system manual ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 21 Product overview 4.4 Components 4.4 Components Components of the CPU 1515SP PC2 The following table provides an overview of the components of the CPU 1515SP PC2: Table 4- 1 Components of the CPU 1515SP PC2 Component Function Figure Mounting rail in accordance The mounting rail is the rack for the with EN 60715 CPU 1515SP PC2. CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU with strain relief and white reference labels CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 22 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Product overview 4.4 Components Component Function BusAdapter The BusAdapter allows free selection of the connection technology for PROFINET IO. Figure The following versions are available for CPU 1515SP PC2: * For standard RJ45 connector (BA 2xRJ45) * For direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2xFC) * For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable (BA 2xSCRJ) * As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector (BA SCRJ/RJ45) * As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable (BA SCRJ/FC) * For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC) * As media converter for glass fiberoptic cable standard RJ45 connector (BA LC/RJ45) * As media converter for glass fiberoptic cable direct connection of the bus cable (BA LC/FC) For mixed configuration with an ET 200AL , you require the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC (plugged into the BaseUnit BU-Send). Connect the bus cable for ETConnection to the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC. Server module The server module completes the configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with I/O modules. The server module is included in the CPU's scope of delivery. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 23 Product overview 4.5 Operator controls and connection elements 4.5 Operator controls and connection elements View of the module The following figure shows the operator controls and connection elements of the CPU 1515SP PC2: Reference identification labels Mounting rail release Labeling strips LEDs for the current operating state and diagnostic status of the CPU 1505SP Power LED Server module X50: Slot for the CFast card (flash memory), sealable Mode selector X51: Slot for an optional SD/MMC card X80: Connector for 24 V DC supply voltage Cooling fins X1 PROFINET (LAN): Slot for BusAdapter for connection of PROFINET IO; Status display for PROFINET X2 PN/IE(LAN): GbE Ethernet connection with integrated display Strain relief X62, X63: 2 x USB 2.0 ports X60, X61: 2 x USB 3.0 ports X70: DisplayPort interface (DPP) Figure 4-3 View of the CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 24 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Product overview 4.5 Operator controls and connection elements Slot for CFast card The operating system, Runtime software and project are installed on the supplied SIMATIC CFast card. The CFast card is the only mass storage device of the CPU 1515SP PC2. Note Unauthorized access Seal the cover of the slot to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC2 from unauthorized access and manipulation. Slot for SD/MMC card You can use a SIMATIC SD or MMC card as additional storage drive. This drive can be used to store data via Windows, for example a backup, but not the operating system, the Runtime software or the project. Permitted SD cards: SDHC up to 32 GB, SDXC up to 2 TB. USB connections 2 x USB 3.0 with Imax = 1 A per interface 2 x USB 2.0 with Imax = 0.5 A per interface MAC addresses The MAC address consists of a 3-byte manufacturer ID and a 3-byte device ID (consecutive number). Each device is already assigned four MAC addresses in the factory. The front of the CPU 1515SP PC2 is lasered with the MAC address 1 and 4. With the MAC addresses 2 and 3, the consecutive numbers are incremented. If, for example, the first MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C0, the second MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C1. Table 4- 2 Assignment of the MAC addresses Assignment MAC address 1 MAC address 2 X2 PN/IE(LAN) * Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices * Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range) X1 PROFINET (LAN) * Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices MAC address 3 Port X1 P1 (required for LLDP, for example) MAC address 4 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example) * Lasered on the front of the CPU (end of the number range) CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 25 Product overview 4.5 Operator controls and connection elements Connector for supply voltage The CPU 1515SP PC2 is equipped with a 2-pin connection terminal for the power supply. The connection plug for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU is shipped from the factory. Mode selector Use the mode selector to set the CPU operating mode. Table 4- 3 Position Mode selector positions Meaning Description RUN1 RUN Operating mode STOP Operating mode STOP1 The CPU is processing the user program. The CPU is not processing the user program. The outputs are set to a "safe" state. MRES Memory reset For active S7-1500 software controller2 only: CPU memory reset 1 RUN and STOP indicate the selected operating state. The RUN and STOP LEDs indicate the actual operating mode of the CPU 1515SP PC2. 2 See manual S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F), CPU 1507S (F) Version 2 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 26 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Product overview 4.6 Scope of delivery 4.6 Scope of delivery Note The device always comes with the CPU 1515SP PC2 label with article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0, regardless of the order options. The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPUs: CPU 1515SP PC2 basic device Strain relief with fixing screws Server module CFast card with the following pre-installations: - Windows 10 IOT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) - S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP - Optional only for CPU 1515SP PC2/CPU 1515SP PC2 F: WinCC RT Advanced as of V15 Restore USB stick for image restore Windows-Certificate of Authenticity (CoA) Certificate of License (CoL) Only for CPU 1515SP PC2 (F) with HMI and CPU 1515SP PC2 T/ TF: USB stick with SIMATIC license keys Product information CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 27 5 Application planning 5.1 Basics Introduction The CPU 1515SP PC2 is open equipment. This means you may only set up the CPU in enclosures, cabinets or electrical equipment rooms and in a dry environment (IP20 degree of protection). The housings, cabinets and electrical operating rooms must guarantee protection against electric shock and spread of fire. The requirements regarding mechanical strength must also be observed. The housings, cabinets, and electrical operating rooms must not be accessible without a key or tool. Access may only be possible for instructed or authorized personnel. Installation location Install the CPU 1515SP PC2 in a suitable enclosure/control cabinet with at least IP54 degree of protection according to EN 60529 and take into consideration the ambient conditions for operating the devices. Installation position You can install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall. Depending on the mounting position, restrictions on ambient temperature and maximum configuration apply to the CPU 1515SP PC2. NOTICE Damage to the modules Modules can be damaged if exposed to ambient temperatures higher than permitted. The following ambient temperatures must not be exceeded during operation: * Horizontal mounting 60 C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules. 55 C for an installation with up to 64 I/O modules. * Vertical mounting 50 C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules. Additional information can be found in the section Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions (Page 74). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 28 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Application planning 5.2 Unpacking the device 5.2 Unpacking the device When unpacking When unpacking, make sure to check the following: Check packaging and contents for visible damage from transport. Damaged or incomplete devices should never be commissioned. Check the delivery for correctness and completeness. Please inform your Siemens contact partner should you notice any irregularities. Keep the supplied documentation and licenses. They belong to the device and are the proof that you have purchased the software preinstalled on the CFast card. Documentation and licenses are required for initial commissioning and for any questions that arise. Keep the original packaging in case the device needs to be transported again. Note the identification data (Page 30) of the device. NOTICE Damage to the device during transport and storage If a device is transported or stored without packaging, it is unprotected from shocks, vibrations, pressure and moisture. Damaged packaging indicates that environmental conditions have already had a significant impact on the device. The device might be damaged. Do not dispose of the original packaging. Pack the device for transport and storage. NOTICE Damage to the device caused by condensation If the device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme variations in temperature during transport, this may cause moisture to build up on or in the device (condensation). Please note the specified mechanical and climatic ambient conditions (Page 74). Moisture can cause short-circuits in the electrical circuits and damage the device. Proceed as follows to avoid damage: * Store the device in dry conditions. * Make sure it adapts to room temperature before commissioning. * Do not expose the device to direct heat radiation from a heater. * If condensation has developed, wait until the device is completely dry before you switch it on. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 29 Application planning 5.3 Identification data WARNING Electric shock and fire hazard from damaged device A damaged device can carry dangerous voltage and trigger a fire in the machine or plant. A damaged device has unpredictable properties and states. Death or severe injury could occur. Make sure that the damaged device is not installed and commissioned accidentally. Label the damaged device correspondingly and keep it locked up. Have the device repaired without delay. 5.3 Identification data The identification data can be used to clearly identify the device when a repair is necessary. Note the following data: Printed on the nameplate of the device, please find the following information: - Article number - Serial number - The first and the last MAC address Depending on the scope of delivery, the "Certificate-of-License" is provided as proof of license. This document is valid for the following product: - S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP - S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F/T/TF - WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 The "Microsoft Windows Product Key" can be found on the "Certificate of Authenticity" label. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 30 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Application planning 5.4 Installation location 5.4 Installation location Introduction Install the CPU 1515SP PC2 in a suitable housing/control cabinet with sufficient mechanical strength, fire protection and at least IP54 degree of protection according to EN 60529, and take into consideration the ambient conditions for operating the devices. Mounting rail You must ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail separately. Note If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using 8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP from shifting to the side. Note If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to high vibration and shock load, we recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx. 200 mm. Suitable surface finishes are: Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or Tinned steel strip. We recommend the use of the mounting rails in section (Page 123). Note Mounting rails of other manufacturers If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, ensure that they have the properties required for your climatic and mechanical ambient conditions. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 31 Application planning 5.4 Installation location Minimum clearances Make sure to maintain the following minimum clearances when installing the CPU 1515SP PC2. Figure 5-1 Minimum clearances Installation rules After the CPU 1515SP PC2, there is a BaseUnit BU..D with incoming supply voltage L+ (light-colored terminal box). This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B (with dark-colored terminal box). The respective corresponding I/O modules can be connected to the BaseUnits. Suitable combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). The server module completes the installation. Note Install the CPU 1515SP PC2 only with disconnected supply voltage. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 32 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Application planning 5.5 Hardware configuration 5.5 Hardware configuration As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration has been reached. Maximum mechanical configuration Backplane bus length: Maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU 1515SP PC2, including server module) Electrical maximum configuration The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the Power consumption of the I/O modules Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules The maximum current-carrying capability of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/ground is 10 A. USB load When using the CPU 1515SP PC2 with the maximum configuration, the USB load must also be considered: Horizontal mounting - Ambient temperature of 0 to 60 C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 4 x low-current (500 mA) USB load - Ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C with maximum 64 I/O modules and 2 x high-current (900 mA) + 2 x low-current (500 mA) USB load Vertical mounting - Ambient temperature of 0 to 50 C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 4 x low-current (500 mA) USB load Address space The address space is predefined. However, you can adjust the address space in the user program. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 33 6 Installation 6.1 Installing the device Requirements The mounting rail is fitted. Required tools 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only to fix the strain relief and dismantle the BusAdapter) Fixing strain relief Fix the strain relief to the top and bottom of the left-hand side of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with the supplied screws. Installing the CPU 1515SP PC2 1. Install the CPU on the mounting rail. 2. Swivel the CPU back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place 3. To check that the CPU has correctly clicked into place, pull on the underside of the enclosure. Figure 6-1 Installing the CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 34 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Installation 6.1 Installing the device Uninstalling the CPU 1515SP PC2 The BaseUnits with the I/O modules are located to the right of the CPU 1515SP PC2: 1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU. 2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move the CPU parallel to the left until it comes off the rest of the module group. Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU. 3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU, swivel the CPU out of the mounting rail. Note It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU 1515SP PC2. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 35 7 Wiring 7.1 Notes on connection Note Rules and regulations for operation Observe the information contained in the Wiring section in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942) and in the function manual Designing interference-free controllers function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566). NOTICE Risk of hazardous system states If you remove and insert I/O devices with the supply voltage switched on, this can result in hazardous system states. Injury to persons and damage to the machine or plant could result. Therefore, I/O devices can only be inserted and removed when the supply voltage is switched off. Only connect I/O devices which are suitable for use in industrial environments according to EN 61000-6-2 / IEC 61000-6-2. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 36 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Wiring 7.2 Terminal and block diagram 7.2 Terminal and block diagram Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram for the CPU 1515SP PC2. Switch X1 PN(LAN) PROFINET interface X1 Electronics P1 PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 Backplane bus interface P2 PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage Mode selector M Ground X50 CFast card LK1, LK2 LED Link TX/RX X51 SD/MMC card LK3 LED Link X60, X61 USB 3.0 interfaces, max. 0.9 A R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green) X62, X63 USB 2.0 interfaces, max. 0.5 A ER ERROR LED (red) X70 DPP interface MT MAINT LED (yellow) X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage PWR POWER LED (yellow/green) X2 PN/IE(LAN) Ethernet interface X2 Figure 7-1 Block diagram for the CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 37 Wiring 7.3 Electrical configuration 7.3 Electrical configuration Non-isolated configuration Note Unlike the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the CPU 1515SP PC2 can only be operated with a non-isolated configuration. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 38 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Wiring 7.3 Electrical configuration The following figure shows the overall configuration of a CPU 1515SP PC2 with power supply from a TN-S system. The power supply supplies the CPU 1515SP PC2 and the load circuit for the 24 V DC modules. For the CPU 1515SP PC2, there is a fixed connection between the ground infeed terminal and the contact springs to the mounting rail. You must ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Master switch Short-circuit and overload protection Load current supply (galvanic isolation) This connection is established automatically with the CPU 1515SP PC2. The represented layout of the power connections does not correspond to the actual layout; it was chosen for demonstration purposes only. Figure 7-2 Connecting the load voltage reference potential CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 39 Wiring 7.4 Connecting devices to networks 7.4 Connecting devices to networks The following options are available for integrating devices into existing or planned system environments and networks. Ethernet You can use the integrated Ethernet interface X2 PN/IE(LAN) (10/100/1000 Mbps) for communication and data exchange with automation devices, for example, SIMATIC S7. Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the X2 PN/IE(LAN) interface in the TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2. You need suitable software to do this: STEP 7, WinCC, SIMATIC NET. Note Use a Category 5e Ethernet cable (Cat-5e cable) for operation with 1000 Mbps. PROFINET PROFINET operation is possible via the X1 PN(LAN) interface and the approved BusAdapter. PROFIBUS The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 40 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Wiring 7.5 Securing cables 7.5 Securing cables The strain relief for connecting cables prevents the USB cables and PROFINET connectors detaching from the CPU 1515SP PC2. The strain relief is included in the scope of delivery. WARNING Flying sparks due to loose cables Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong oscillation and high vibrating loads. Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties. Requirements The strain relief is fixed to the CPU. The CPU is installed. Procedure Secure the USB and PROFINET cables to the strain relief using cable ties. Figure 7-3 Secured cables CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 41 8 Commissioning 8.1 Notes on commissioning WARNING Improper commissioning in hazardous areas Device failure or risk of explosion in hazardous areas. * Do not commission the device unless it is fully mounted and connected according to the specifications in the section Wiring (Page 36). * Before commissioning, please consider the effects on other devices in the plant. NOTICE Condensation in the device Damage to the device due to condensation if the temperature between transport or storage and the installation point differs. Before commissioning the device, leave it to stand until it is dry. NOTICE Data loss Data loss may occur if write filters are used incorrectly. Therefore, note the information on write filters. The following configurable write filter is available under Windows 10: * Unified Write Filter (UWF) (Page 57) CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 42 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Commissioning 8.2 Basic commissioning procedure 8.2 8.2.1 Basic commissioning procedure Step Execution Section 1 Requirements 8.2.1 (Page 43) 2 Preparing commissioning 8.2.2 (Page 43) 3 Commissioning procedure 8.2.3 (Page 43) Requirements The following requirements must be met before you commission the Open Controller for the first time: The CPU 1515SP PC2 is mounted. The supplied CFast card is inserted. No data carriers are connected via USB. 8.2.2 Preparing commissioning Procedure When the requirements are met, proceed as follows with the commissioning: 1. Connect a monitor using a DisplayPort cable. 2. Connect a keyboard and a mouse to the CPU via USB. Result The Open Controller is prepared for commissioning. 8.2.3 Commissioning procedure When you start up your CPU 1515SP PC2 for the first time, basic settings and the administrator password are queried. The device is then automatically set up for the operating system that is installed on the CFast card. Restart the device after the operating system has been set up. Note The initial commissioning is not possible with a Multitouch panel, as the Multitouch driver is only available after the installation of the operating system. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 43 Commissioning 8.2 Basic commissioning procedure Procedure When the requirements (Page 43) are met and the preparations for commissioning (Page 43) are complete, proceed as follows with the commissioning: 1. Connect the power supply. The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green. The device carries out the hardware initialization. 2. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears from the screen. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the device: - Set , , , , - Accept license conditions - Setting the account 4. Finally, you will be prompted to restart the device. NOTICE Faulty installation If you change the device during the installation, the installation will be disrupted and the operating system will not be installed correctly. The operational reliability of the device and the plant is endangered. Do not switch off the device during the entire installation process. Information on users/user groups in Windows A user "Operator" with standard user rights is already created on the Windows system. The user is in a user group "SIEMENS TIA Engineer". This grants the user the rights to use the installed SIMATIC software products. To use the CPU 1515SP PC2 directly, the Windows "Autologon" function is enabled for the "Operator" user. No password is preset. Note When you assign a password, change the entry for the "Autologon" function accordingly using the Windows user administration. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 44 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Commissioning 8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller Result The Windows 10 IOT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) is installed. The "Operator" user is logged on automatically. The software controller and WinCC Runtime Advanced, if required, are ready for use. For administrative purposes, the "Operator" user can be logged off and the administrator created during commissioning can be logged on. The operating system's start screen is displayed after each startup. 8.3 8.3.1 Initial commissioning an open controller Step Execution 1 Creating the configuration of the Open Controller 8.3.1 (Page 45) Section 2 Setting the IP address 3 Changing the properties of the Software Control- 8.3.3 (Page 46) ler 4 Establishing the HMI connection 8.3.4 (Page 47) 5 Downloading a project to the target system 8.3.5 (Page 47) 6 Transferring the license key 8.3.6 (Page 48) 7 Switching the Open Controller on/off 8.3.7 (Page 50) 8.3.2 (Page 46) Creating the configuration of the Open Controller Requirements The following requirements must be met before you can create the configuration of the Open Controller: TIA Portal V15 + HSP 0269 or TIA Portal V15 SP1 must be installed. You have started the TIA Portal and created a new project. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 45 Commissioning 8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller Creating the configuration To create the configuration in the TIA Portal, follow these steps: 1. Double-click "Add new device" in the project tree. 2. Select "PC systems > SIMATIC S7 Open Controller > ET 200SP Open Controller >". 3. Select the required device. 4. Select the desired version and click "OK". The configured Open Controller is displayed in the device view. 5. The following interfaces can be seen in the Open Controller: - Onboard interface X2 (GB Ethernet Windows interface) that is assigned directly to the PC station (1 port) - Exchangeable BusAdapter that is assigned directly to the Software Controller (2 ports) 6. The following preconfigured components can be seen in the device view: - CPU 1515SP PC2 / CPU 1515SP PC2 F/T/TF: CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) Software Controller - CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI / CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI: CPU 1505SP (F) Software Controller and WinCC Runtime Advanced 7. Insert the server module from the hardware catalog. The server module forms the termination of the CPU with the I/O modules. If no server module is configured, the server module is added automatically during compiling. 8.3.2 Setting the IP address Set the IP address as follows: BusAdapter [X1]: The configured IP address becomes effective on the Open Controller after a download. To go online via the [X1] interface, the configured address must match the [X1] address entered in the panel of the software controller. Onboard interface [X2]: The configured IP address should be identical to the Windows IP address of the Open Controller. 8.3.3 Changing the properties of the S7-1500 Software Controller Information on the property of the CPU is available in the Inspector window under "Properties". You can change these properties if required. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 46 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Commissioning 8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller 8.3.4 Establishing the HMI connection Procedure The WinCC RT software is integrated in the SIMATIC HMI devices (e.g. Basic/Comfort/Mobile Panel) and permits data exchange over HMI connections. No HMI connection exists between the WinCC RT Advanced software and the S7-1500 Software Controller at the time of the configuration. To establish a HMI connection between the WinCC RT Advanced software on the S7-1500 Software Controller, proceed as follows: 1. In the network view, switch to "Connections". 2. Click on WinCC RT Advanced. 3. Draw a line from the WinCC RT Advanced software to the S7-1500 Software Controller (e.g. CPU 1505SP) while keeping the mouse button pressed. A network connection is established between the two devices. Reference You can find additional information on configuring an HMI connection in the TIA Portal online help or in the STEP 7 and WinCC Engineering V15 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755202) system manual. 8.3.5 Downloading a project to the target system Key statement To set up your automation system, you need to download the project data you generated offline to the connected devices. This project data is generated, for example when configuring hardware, networks, and connections or when programming the user program or when creating recipes. The first time you download, the entire project data is downloaded. During later download operations, only changes are downloaded. Proceed as follows to download the configuration: 1. Select the complete PC system in the device view. 2. Right-click on the PC system. 3. Select the option you require in the "Download to device" menu command. Note Note that the options available to you always depend on the selected device. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 47 Commissioning 8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller 4. Select the interfaces with which you want to establish the online connection to the device. You have the option of showing all compatible devices by selecting the corresponding option and clicking the "Start search" command. Note The first TIA Portal download must be via the "X2" interface. Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the X2 PN/IE(LAN) interface in the TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2. 5. Download and compile the project. The hardware configuration and the first download are now completed. Reference Additional information on the possible options for downloading is available in the online help of the TIA Portal. 8.3.6 Transferring license keys Licensing the software For the following products, you need to transfer the product-specific license key with the Automation License Manager (ALM) before commissioning: WinCC RT Advanced incl. PowerTag CPU 1505SP T/TF Note No license key is required to operate the S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F) V2.x. Requirements Initial commissioning was successfully completed. Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit) has been started. The extended write filter UWF must be deactivated on the CPU 1515SP PC2. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 48 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Commissioning 8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller Transferring license keys with local configuration The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on the CPU 1515SP PC2. Open the software using the icon on the desktop or a menu command. 1. In the Windows start bar, select Start > Siemens Automation > Automation License Manager. 2. Follow the instructions of the Automation License Manager. Transferring license keys via programming device/PC The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on a programming device/PC with STEP 7 and the CPU 1515SP PC2. 1. Connect the CPU 1515SP PC2 to a programming device/PC. 2. Connect the supplied USB stick to the programming device/PC. 3. Select the menu command Start > Siemens Automation > Automation License Manager. 4. Select the menu command Edit > Connect computer and enter the IP address of the CPU 1515SP PC2. 5. if the option "Forbid license keys transfer from local computer" is disabled on the source computer, drag the license keys from the USB stick to the system partition C: of the CPU 1515SP PC2. Backing up license keys for restore and repair Note Loss of license keys A SIMATIC license key cannot be copied or duplicated. No more license key copies exist on the USB stick once you have dragged the license keys from the USB stick to your CPU 1515SP PC2. Secure your purchased license keys before restoring the delivery state (Restore) or in the case of repair. To do this, move the license keys to a USB stick and keep this stick in a safe place. If an error occurs on your license keys on the CPU 1515SP PC2, please contact your Siemens representative. Make sure to have the "Certificate of License" (CoL) to hand. Reference For additional information on licenses, refer to the Automation License Manager manual. You can find the manual on the CPU 1515SP PC2 under Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > Documentation and on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56956174). You can find more information on the UWF write filter in the section: Protective function for data carriers (Page 57). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 49 Commissioning 8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller 8.3.7 Switching the Open Controller on/off Requirements Initial commissioning was successfully completed. Switching on the CPU 1515SP PC2 Proceed as follows to switch on the CPU 1515SP PC2: 1. Switch on the power supply of the CPU. The Boot Manager GRUB2DOS starts. 2. Select the mode in which the CPU 1515SP PC2 should start: - Default: with the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller - Only with the Windows operating system (e.g. with updates) Switching off the CPU 1515SP PC2 Proceed as follows to switch off the CPU 1515SP PC2: 1. Use the Windows function Start > Power > Shut down to switch off. The PWR LED changes from green to yellow. The Windows function shuts down the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller. If the device will not be used for a longer period after the shutdown, de-energize the device. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 50 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Interrupt, error and system messages 9.1 9 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows the LED displays of the CPU 1515SP PC2. RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED) ERROR LED (red LED) MAINT LED (yellow LED) POWER LED (yellow/green LED) Figure 9-1 LEDs of the CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 51 Interrupt, error and system messages 9.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays with active S7-1500 Software Controller The CPU 1515SP PC2 has three LEDs to indicate the current operating state and diagnostics status. The following table shows the meaning of the color combinations of the LED displays in connection with the S7-1500 Software Controller. Table 9- 1 Meaning of the LED displays RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning POWER OFF LED off LED off LED off Starting of the CPU 1515 SP PC2 in "Windows only" mode No power supply. Software Controller of the CPU 1515SP PC2: * is not downloaded * is in the operating state Power OFF Use of the hardware LEDs was disabled (configuration via TIA Portal). An error has occurred. LED off LED green LED flashes red LED off LED off LED off Software Controller of the CPU 1515SP PC2 is in RUN mode. A diagnostics event is pending. LED green LED flashes red LED off LED green LED off LED lights up yellow The affected hardware must be exchanged within a short period. LED green LED off LED flashes yellow You must exchange the affected hardware within a foreseeable period. Maintenance demanded for the plant. Maintenance required for the plant. Firmware update successfully completed CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 52 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Interrupt, error and system messages 9.1 Status and error display RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED LED lights up yellow LED off MAINT LED Meaning LED off Software controller of the CPU is in the operating state STOP. The user program is causing an error. LED lights up yellow LED flashes red LED flashes yellow LED flashes yellow LED off LED off LED flashes yellow/green LED off LED off CPU is performing internal activities during STOP, e.g. ramp-up after STOP. Loading the user program Startup (transition from STOP RUN) Startup (CPU booting) LED flashes yellow/green LED flashes red LED flashes yellow Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a module. LED flashing test CPU defective LED flashes green LED flashes red LED flashes red POWER LED Table 9- 2 POWER LED POWER LED Meaning No supply voltage or supply voltage too low LED off Supply voltage present; LED lights up yellow running through BIOS phase; operating system is shut down Supply voltage present; LED green Booting or operation of the operating system CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 53 10 Functions 10.1 Monitoring functions 10.1.1 Requirements Introduction The CPU 1515SP PC2 has monitoring functions that you can use with the corresponding monitoring software. The following display, monitoring and control functions are available: Temperature monitoring Monitoring of drives with S.M.A.R.T. functionality Operating hours counter (information on the total runtime) HW LED status display (RUN/STOP, ERROR, MAINT) Monitoring software SIMATIC IPC DiagBase The SIMATIC DiagBase software is included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC2. Use the DiagBase Management Explorer application to obtain a clearer overview for monitoring. The DiagBase Alarm Manager notifies you of individual alarms. Note For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software. SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor The SIMATIC DiagMonitor software is provided on a CD. You can find the order number of the license in the section Accessories/Spare parts (Page 123). Potential system failures are detected and reported in good time with the diagnostics and alerting software. The software is also used for remote diagnostics. The software contains: - The software for the stations to be monitored - A library for creating your own applications CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 54 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Functions 10.2 Retentive memory NVRAM 10.1.2 Temperature monitoring Three temperature sensors monitor the temperature at different locations of the CPU 1515SP PC2: Processor temperature Temperature in the vicinity of the RAM ICs/blocks Temperature of the basic module If one of the temperature values exceeds the set temperature threshold, the temperature monitoring triggers a temperature error. The temperature error activates the IPC DiagBase and/or IPC DiagMonitor software. The temperature error remains stored until the temperatures fall below the temperature threshold again and it is reset using one of the following measures: Acknowledgment of the error message by the monitoring software Restart of the device 10.1.3 Monitoring drives The S.M.A.R.T. function is a monitoring function of storage media. With this function, different parameters are queried in order to detect possible defects at an early stage. This information is shown to the user with corresponding software. 10.1.4 Operating hours counter You can use an operating hours counter for a variety of applications: For calculating the operating time of the CPU For calculating the operating time of controlled equipment You can find more information about the operating hours counter in the "Operating hours counter" group in the "Diagnostics" folder of the Online and Diagnostics view in the TIA Portal. 10.2 Retentive memory NVRAM Retentive memory is non-volatile memory for saving a limited quantity of data in the event of power failure. The data defined as retentive is stored in retentive memory. This data is retained beyond a power-off or power failure. A corresponding function is implemented in the S7-1500 software controller to allow NVRAM to be used there. This saves up to 410 KB of data in non-volatile data memory in the case of power failure. This function can be set on the engineering station in the TIA Portal. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 55 Functions 10.3 BIOS setup 10.3 BIOS setup BIOS setup The boot order can be set using the BIOS Setup. Changing the device configuration The device configuration is preset for working with the supplied software. Only change the set values if you have made technical changes to your device. 10.4 Power options A power plan with the name SIMATIC S7 is set as default on the CPU 1515SP PC2. This ensures that the CPU does not deviate from its maximum clock rate in order not to endanger the real-time capability of the software controller. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 56 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Functions 10.5 "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter 10.5 "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter General information on the UWF write filter The Unified Write Filter (UWF) is a configurable write filter which provides the CFast cards with a write protection. External removable media such as USB sticks and other flash drives that are recognized as removable media by the operating system are not supported. NOTICE Data loss on CFast cards The number of write cycles on CFast cards is limited due to technical reasons. To prevent data loss, the CFast card must therefore be provided with special protection. Use the UWF write filter to extend the service life of the CFast card and to avoid a possible failure of the CPU 1515SP PC2. Note Write protection is deactivated in the delivery state! Note that the work memory is reduced when UWF is activated. NOTICE Risk of data loss when UWF is activated If UWF is activated, all changes made to data carriers which are write protected by the UWF after the boot operation may be lost when the device is shut down. Proceed as follows to prevent this situation: * Make changes to data carriers only when write protection is disabled. Reference You can find additional information on the UWF write filter on the Internet in the online help for Microsoft(R) Windows(R) 10. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 57 11 Maintenance 11.1 Backing up and restoring data Introduction The operating system and the Runtime software are located on the supplied restore USB stick. You can use the USB stick to restore the delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC2. If you use functions from the Restore menu, you must acknowledge a security message. For the functions, 72 hours are available in each case. If the functions are not completed within this time period, CPU 1515SP PC2 is automatically restarted without a further prompt. If you want to back up your projects, save them to the D: partition of the CFast card. SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator You can also create your own image of your CFast card. This contains the operating system, the Runtime software and the complete project loaded from the TIA Portal. We recommend the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator ( V3.5) software tool to back up data under Windows. It provides for easy backup and fast restore of the contents of the CFAST card and of individual partitions (images). Note Data can only be backed up to a network drive with the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator software using the X2 PN/IE(LAN) interface. You can procure the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator: Via the Siemens online ordering system. Pre-installed on the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives. For additional information, please refer to the corresponding product documentation. SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive You can use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives for data backup and restore. You obtain these through the Siemens online ordering system. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 58 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Maintenance 11.2 Partitions in the delivery state 11.2 Partitions in the delivery state Partitioning the CFast card The following partitions are set up on the CFast card by default: Partition Name 30 GB CFast card File system C: SYSTEM 19.5 GB NTFS D: DATA 8 GB NTFS - - 0.4 GB RAW - WinCCMB 0.04 GB NTFS Note Partitions under Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit) The partitions need to be set again if they are faulty or if the partitioning is to be changed. NOTICE CPU volume for S7-1500 Software Controller (0.4 GB RAW) Do not change the CPU volume for software controllers. This is the only way to ensure that the software controller continues to operate without error. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 59 Maintenance 11.3 Restoring the delivery state 11.3 Restoring the delivery state Introduction The entire image of your operating system and your Runtime software are located on the supplied restore USB stick. You can use the SIMATIC restore menu to restore the delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC2. Note Restoring existing system partition If your projects are stored on partition D: you can use the "Restore existing system partition" option to restore partition C: with the operating system and the Runtime software, without your project data being affected. Note Using Multitouch panels The restoration of the original software is not possible with a Multitouch panel, because the Multitouch driver is not available until after the installation of the operating system. Requirements To restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC2, the following is required: the supplied CFast card the supplied restore USB stick NOTICE Data loss During restoration of the system to delivery state, the CFast card is completely erased and re-formatted, and is then loaded with the original software. All subsequently modified or added data, programs, license keys and partitions on the CFast card will be lost. Back up the data of the CPU 1515SP PC2 after you have assigned parameters to the module and if you have made changes to the configuration. NOTICE Loss of license keys Back up the license keys before the restore by dragging these to your USB stick via Automation License Manager. After the restart of the CPU 1515SP PC2, transfer the license keys back to the device via the Automation License Manager. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 60 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Maintenance 11.3 Restoring the delivery state Restoring the delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with restore USB stick Before the restore 1. Connect a monitor and a keyboard to the CPU. 2. Switch off the power supply of the CPU. 3. Remove all USB drives from the CPU. 4. Connect the restore USB stick to a USB port. 5. Switch on the power supply of the CPU. The CPU is started. 6. Press to start the Boot Manager. 7. Select the list entry for the USB stick in the Boot Manager. 8. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key. The loading process is displayed (Windows logo). The SIMATIC Restore menu opens. - Select a language. - Select "CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)" or "CPU 1515SP PC2 (F) + HMI". - Select the option "Completely restore system drive". The original software is restored on Partition C:, Partition D: is deleted. After the restore 1. Exit the Restore menu. 2. Remove the restore USB stick. 3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning. Further procedure Re-connect any other required USB devices. Transfer the license keys. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 61 Maintenance 11.4 Updating software 11.4 Updating software Note When you update software (such as Windows, drivers, BIOS, etc.), always start the CPU 1515SP PC2 in the GRUB menu in Windows mode. Information on updating software for the respective product can be found on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en). HMI devices During the installation, make sure that you always use the latest drivers for the HMI devices used (SIMATIC Flat Panels). Before you install a new driver version, you must uninstall the old driver version in order to ensure proper operation. You can download the current driver software from SIMATIC Product Support. 11.5 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit) The Windows 10 IoT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) is pre-installed on the CPU 1515SP PC2. Windows language packs English and German are available as the basic language for the installation of the Windows operating system. After initial commissioning of the CPU 1515SP PC2, additional operating system languages can be installed. Note that you need administrator rights to install language packages. The following language packs are contained on the restore USB stick under \Packages\x64\LanguagePack: Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese German English French Italian Spanish Installing languages Use the Windows function "Start > Settings > Speech Recognition, Region, Date > Languages" to install a language pack. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 62 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Maintenance 11.6 Sending the device to customer service Updates You can install additional updates at a later time. You can find current information on the operating system at Widows (http://www.windows.com). Note In the delivery state, partitions are set up on drive C: and D: on the CFast card with free memory. See section Partitions in the delivery state (Page 59). Make sure that sufficient free memory space is available on your CFast card for the installation of updates. 11.6 Sending the device to customer service Before sending Before you send in the CPU 1515SP PC2 for repair: Create a backup of your data. Back up your SIMATIC license keys on a USB stick. Remove your SD/MMC cards. Remove your CFast card. Sending in the device Pack the device in its original packaging. Enclose identification data (Page 30). Send to your Siemens contact partner. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 63 Maintenance 11.7 Removing and inserting the CFast card 11.7 Removing and inserting the CFast card Introduction The CPU 1515SP PC2 has a slot for a CFast card. On this card, you will find the operating system, your Runtime software and, after configuration, the project. Seal the cover for the CFast card to protect the system against unauthorized access. You must remove the CFast card before you send in the CPU, for example, for repair. Requirements The CPU 1515SP PC2 is disconnected from the power supply. Procedure - Removing the CFast card 1. Remove the seal. 2. Open the cover, using a screwdriver if necessary. 3. Press onto the CFast card. The card is pressed out of the slot. 4. Pull the card out of the slot. To do this, grip the rib on the underside of the memory card. Procedure - Inserting the CFast card 1. Open the cover of the slot, using a screwdriver if necessary. 2. Insert the CFast card into the slot. 3. Press the CFast card into the slot until it clicks into place. The CFast card is properly inserted if the cover can be closed without any resistance. 4. Close the cover. NOTICE Unauthorized access Seal the cover to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC2 from unauthorized access. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 64 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Maintenance 11.8 Recycling and disposal 11.8 Recycling and disposal For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certificated disposal service for electronic scrap or dispose of the device in accordance with the regulations in your country. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 65 12 Technical specifications 12.1 Standards and approvals Introduction The general technical specifications cover the following: The standards and test values that the CPU 1515SP PC2 complies with and fulfills. The test criteria according to which the CPU 1515SP PC2 was tested. Currently valid markings and approvals Note Information for CPU 1515SP PC2 The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the CPU 1515SP PC2. Safety information WARNING Risk of personal injury and damage to property. In hazardous areas, there is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect any connectors while the CPU 1515SP PC2 is in operation. Always de-energize the CPU 1515SP PC2 operated in such areas before you disconnect the connectors. WARNING Flying sparks due to loose cables Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong oscillation and high vibrating loads. Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 66 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.1 Standards and approvals WARNING Explosion hazard If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV. 2 can become invalid. WARNING Area of application This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-hazardous areas. CE marking The CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the requirements and safety objectives of the following guidelines and complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable logic controllers published in the official journals of the European Community: 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) 2014/34/EU "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive) 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive) 2006/42/EC "Machinery Directive" for fail-safe modules The conformity declaration certificates are available for the responsible authorities and are kept at the following address: Siemens AG Digital Factory Factory Automation DF FA AS SYS P.O. Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg, Germany They are also available for download on the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/) web pages, keyword "Declaration of Conformity". cULus approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) OR CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 67 Technical specifications 12.1 Standards and approvals cULus HAZ. LOC. approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location) APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations. WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAY. FM approval Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 (ANSI/ISA 82.02.01) CSA C22.2 No. 213 CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Installation Instructions for FM WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations. WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS. OR CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 68 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.1 Standards and approvals ATEX approval In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) OR IECEx approval According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements) RCM (C-Tick) Declaration of conformity for Australia/New Zealand CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the requirements of the standard EN 61000-6-4:2007 + A1:2011. Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas. (A) . IEC 61131 The CPU 1515SP PC2 with the S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) fulfills the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131-2 standard (programmable logic controllers, Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests). PROFINET standard CPU 1515SP PC2 is based on standard IEC 61158 Type 10. PROFIBUS standard CPU 1515SP PC2 is based on standard IEC 61158 Type 3. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 69 Technical specifications 12.1 Standards and approvals IO-Link standard CPU 1515SP PC2 is based on standard IEC 61131-9. Use in industrial environments CPU 1515SP PC2 is designed for use in industrial environments. It meets the following standards for this type of use: Requirements on interference emission EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011 Requirements on immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005 Use in mixed areas Under certain circumstances, you can use the CPU 1515SP PC2 in a mixed area. A mixed area is used for residential purposes and for commercial operations that do not significantly impact on residents. If you want to use the CPU 1515SP PC2 in mixed areas, you must ensure that its radio frequency interference emission complies with the limit classes of the EN 61000-6-3 generic standard. Suitable measures for observing these limits for use in a mixed area are, for example: Installation of the CPU 1515SP PC2 in grounded control cabinets Use of noise filters in the supply cables An individual acceptance test is also required. Use in residential areas Note CPU 1515SP PC2 not intended for use in residential areas CPU 1515SP PC2 is not intended for use in residential areas. Using the CPU 1515SP PC2 in residential areas can affect radio and television reception. Reference The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 70 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility 12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Definition Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment. The CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the requirements of the EMC legislation for the European single market, among other requirements. The prerequisite for this is that the CPU 1515SP PC2 complies with the specifications and guidelines relating to electrical configuration. EMC according to NE 21 The CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the EMC specifications of NAMUR guideline NE 21. Pulse-shaped disturbance The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with regard to pulse-shaped disturbances. Table 12- 1 Pulse-shaped disturbance Pulse-shaped disturbance Test voltage corresponds to degree of severity Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2. Air discharge: 8 kV 3 Contact discharge 4 kV 3 Burst pulses (high-speed transient disturbance) according to IEC 61000-4-4. 2 kV (power supply lines) 2 kV (signal lines > 30 m) 1 kV (signal lines < 30 m) 3 3 High-energy single pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5 External protective circuit required (see function manual Designing interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)) * asymmetric coupling 2 kV (power supply lines) DC with protective elements 3 2 kV (signal/data line only > 30 m), with protective elements * symmetric coupling 1 kV (power supply lines) DC with protective elements 1 kV (signal/data line only > 30 m), with protective elements CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 71 Technical specifications 12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Sinusoidal disturbance The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with regard to sinusoidal disturbances. RF radiation Table 12- 2 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 corresponds to degree of severity Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated 80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz 10 V/m 3 V/m 3 80% AM (1 kHz) RF coupling Table 12- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling RF coupling according to IEC 61000-4-6 corresponds to degree of severity (10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3 10 Vrms unmodulated 80% AM (1 kHz) 150 source impedance Emission of radio interference Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with IEC61000-6-4 (measured at a distance of 10 m). Table 12- 4 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields Frequency Emitted interference 30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m)Q 230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (V/m)Q Emission of interference via AC supply voltage in accordance with EN 55016. Table 12- 5 Interference emission via the AC power supply Frequency Emitted interference 0.15 to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (V) Q <66 dB (V) M 0.5 to 30 MHz <73 dB (V) Q <60 dB (V) M CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 72 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.3 Shipping and storage conditions 12.3 Shipping and storage conditions Introduction The CPU 1515SP PC2 exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 in terms of shipping and storage conditions. The following information applies to modules that are shipped and/or stored in their original packaging. Table 12- 6 Shipping and storage conditions for modules Type of condition Permissible range Free fall (in shipping package) 1 m Temperature From -40 C to +70 C Barometric pressure from 1140 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m to 3500 m) Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation Sinusoidal vibrations according to IEC 60068-2-6 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Shock according to IEC 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 73 Technical specifications 12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions 12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions Note Restrictions In contrast to the ambient conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the following restrictions apply to the CPU 1515SP PC2: * Mechanical ambient conditions: - 2 g constant acceleration when using the BusAdapter BA 2xFC * Ambient temperature: - 0 to 60 C for horizontal installation with maximum 32 I/O modules - 0 to 55 C for horizontal installation with maximum 64 I/O modules - 0 to 50 C for vertical installation with maximum 32 I/O modules Operating conditions The CPU 1515SP PC2 is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations. The operating conditions are based on the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3: Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements) Class 3K3 (climatic requirements) Mechanical ambient conditions The table below shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. Table 12- 7 Mechanical ambient conditions Frequency band CPU 1515SP PC2 5 f 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude 8.4 f 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration 10 f 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude 60 f 1000 Hz * 1 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45) * 2 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2xFC) CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 74 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions Test of mechanical ambient conditions The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the test of ambient mechanical conditions. Table 12- 8 Test of mechanical ambient conditions Condition tested Test Standard Comment Vibration Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 (sine) Type of oscillation: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. BA 2xRJ45 * 5 Hz f 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude * 8.4 Hz f 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration BA 2xFC * 10 Hz f 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude * 60 Hz f 1000 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of 3 vertically aligned axes Shock Shock, tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: Half-sine Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of 3 vertically aligned axes Climatic ambient conditions You can use the CPU 1515SP PC2 under the following climatic ambient conditions: Table 12- 9 Climatic ambient conditions Ambient conditions Permissible range Temperature: Horizontal mounting position: * from 0 to 60 C Comments For configuration with 32 I/O modules * from 0 to 55 C For configuration with 64 I/O modules Vertical installation: * 0 to 50 C For configuration with 32 I/O modules Permitted temperature change 10 K/h - Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation Barometric pressure From 1140 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m to 2000 m Concentration of pollutants ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 - CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 75 Technical specifications 12.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage 12.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Insulation The insulation is designed according to the requirements of EN 61131-2: 2007. Note In the case of modules with 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) supply voltage, galvanic isolations are tested with 707 V DC (type test). Note The ground/minus pole of the 24 V DC power supply is connected via the device with functional ground (FE). Pollution degree / overvoltage category according to IEC 61131 Pollution degree 2 Overvoltage category: II Protection class in accordance with IEC 61131-2:2007 The distributed I/O system ET 200SP fulfills protection class I and includes parts of protection class II and III. The CPU 1515SP PC2 is a part of protection class III. The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for functional earth FE. The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I. Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529, i.e.: Protection against contact with standard probe Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm No protection against water CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 76 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres Rated voltage for operation The CPU 1515SP PC2 works with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances listed in the following table. Table 12- 10 Rated voltage for operation Rated voltage Tolerance range 24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1 1 12.6 Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres See product information Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19692172). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 77 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7 Module data 12.7.1 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 - basic device Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 255 Installed software * Visualization No * Control No Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 78 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card No SIMATIC memory card required No Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters * Via CM 1 Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 modules + server module (mounting width max. 1 m) Rack * Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 79 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 80 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.2 Technical specifications CPU 1515SP PC2 Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization No * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 81 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 82 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 83 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0 Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 84 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.3 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128PT Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 85 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 86 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 87 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 88 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.4 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512PT Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 89 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 90 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 91 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 92 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.5 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048PT Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 93 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 94 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 95 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 96 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.6 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization No * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 97 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 98 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 99 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 100 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.7 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128PT Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 101 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 102 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 103 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 104 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.8 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512PT Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 105 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 106 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 107 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 108 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.9 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2018PT Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2048 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15 * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 109 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 110 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 111 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 112 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.10 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 T Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 T HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization No * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP T Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 113 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 114 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 115 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0 Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * SD card Optionally for additional mass storage Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 0.83 kg CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 116 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data 12.7.11 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 TF Technical specifications The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0/td). Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0 General information Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 TF HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V2.5 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 269 Installed software * Visualization No * Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP TF Control elements Mode selector switch 1 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.5 A It 0.426 A*s; with starting current inrush Power Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 16 W Processor Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 117 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0 Memory Type of memory DDR3L Main memory 8 GB RAM CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory SIMATIC memory card required No Flash Disk 30 GB Work memory * integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte * integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte * integrated (for CPU function library of CPU Runtime) 10 Mbyte Load memory * integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte Backup * with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive * with non-volatile memory Yes Hardware configuration Integrated power supply Yes Number of DP masters Via CM 1 * Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server module * Number of lines, max. 1 * Rack Time of day Clock * Type Hardware clock * Backup time 6 wk; At 40 C ambient temperature, typically * Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s Interfaces Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2 Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side Number of SD card slots 1 Video interfaces * Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 118 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45 - Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes 2. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 1 * RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated - Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s - Industrial Ethernet status LED No 3. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics indication LED * RUN/STOP LED Yes * ERROR LED Yes * MAINT LED Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. Up to 60 C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 C with max. 64 ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB load * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA USB load CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 119 Technical specifications 12.7 Module data Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0 Ambient temperature during storage/transportation * min. -40 C * max. 70 C Operating systems Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit) MUI Peripherals/Options Peripherals * Optionally for additional mass storage SD card Dimensions Width 160 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 12.7.12 0.83 kg S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) The CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) is a PC-based controller of the SIMATIC S7-1500 Software Controller family. You can find additional information about the CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) in the relevant manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725). For the CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF), please also note the information in the F product information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599). Technical specifications You can find technical specifications of CPU 1505SP with the article number 6ES7672-5DC11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5DC11-0YA0/td). You can find technical specifications of CPU 1505SP F with the article number 6ES7672-5SC11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5SC11-0YA0/td). You can find technical specifications of CPU 1505SP T with the article number 6ES7672-5VC11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5VC11-0YA0/td). You can find all technical specifications of CPU 1505SP TF with the article number 6ES7672-5W11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5WC11-0YA0/td). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 120 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Dimension drawings 13.1 13 CPU 1515SP PC2 This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets. Dimension drawings of the CPU 1515SP PC2 Figure 13-1 Dimension drawing CPU 1515SP PC2, front view CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 121 Dimension drawings 13.1 CPU 1515SP PC2 Figure 13-2 Dimension drawing CPU 1515SP PC2, side view CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 122 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 14 Spare parts/accessories 14.1 Accessories/spare parts Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC2 Table 14- 1 Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC2 Description BusAdapter/media converter; 1 unit Article number * BA 2xFC (PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect Ethernet connection) 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 * BA 2xLC (BusAdapter 2x LC glass fiber-optic connectors, for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0 * BA LC/RJ45 (media converter glass fiber-optic/CU 1x LC FO connector 1x RJ45 connector for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0 * BA LC/FC (media converter glass fiber-optic/CU 1x LC FO connector and 1x FastConnect (FC) connector for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0 * BA 2xSCRJ (BusAdapter 2 SCRJ FO connectors, for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 * BA SCRJ/RJ45 (media converter fiber-optic CU 1x SCRJ FO connector and 1x RJ45 connector for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 * BA SCRJ/FC (media converter fiber-optic CU 1x SCRJ FO connector and 1x FastConnect (FC) connector for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 * BA 2xRJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket) 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 * BA-Send 1xFC (1x FastConnect connector for ET-Connection) 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0 Server module; 1 unit Strain relief for CPU 1515SP PC2 SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 8 GB (SLC), pre-installed BIOS-MANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.3 and installation CD SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 16 GB, USB3.0, pre-installed BIOS-MANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.4 and installation CD 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0 A5E32291462 6AV7672-8JD01-0AA0 SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor software SIMATIC PC, DisplayPort according to DVI-I for onboard graphics 6ES7648-6CA05-0YX0 6ES7648-3AF00-0XA0 Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels, 10 units Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0 6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0 * Length: 483 mm 6ES5710-8MA11 * Length: 430 mm 6ES5710-8MA21 * Length: 830 mm 6ES5710-8MA31 * Length: 2000 mm 6ES5710-8MA41 Online catalog Additional article numbers can be found on the Internet in the online catalog and online ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 123 A Appendix A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). A.2 Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet. See also Industry Mall (https://mall.industry.siemens.com) CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 124 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Appendix A.3 Troubleshooting A.3 Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Remedy CPU 1515SP PC2 does not work. CPU 1515SP PC2 is not supplied with power. Check the power supply. Time and/or date of the CPU 1515SP PC2 not correct. CPU 1515SP PC2 was not connected for more than 6 weeks. Check the settings in Windows. USB device is not working. USB power supply is overloaded. Use an external power supply for the USB device (see section Application planning (Page 33)). CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 125 B List of abbreviations B.1 Abbreviation Abbreviations Term Meaning AC Alternating current Alternating current ALM Automation License Manager Tool for managing license keys in STEP 7 BIOS Basic Input Output System Basic Input Output System. A set of important software routines used after the startup of the CPU to load the operating system and to provide the routines for data exchange between hardware components. CE Communaute Europeenne CE label CFast CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer Memory card CoA Certificate of Authenticity Certificate of Authenticity, label with Microsoft Windows "Product Key" CoL Certificate of License Certificate of License for the SIMATIC software loaded DC Direct current DC current DPP Dual-mode DisplayPort Interface for transfer of image and video data for monitors ESD Components sensitive to electrostatic charge EN European standard GbE Gigabit Ethernet GRUB / GRUB2DOS GRand Unified Bootloader Boot Manager HMI Human Machine Interface User interface IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IM Interface module The interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with the IO controller and exchanges data with the I/O modules via the backplane bus. LAN Local Area Network Computer network that is limited to a local area. LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Protocol that enables the exchange of information between adjacent devices. MMC Multi Media Card Memory card NTFS New Technology File System File system that offers targeted access protection at the file level. NVRAM Non-Volatile Random-Access Memory Non-volatile data memory that is RAM-based, the data content of which is retained without external power supply. PC Personal computer PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PN PROFINET PELV, previously called "extra low voltage with safe isolation", is a protective measure against electrical shock. See EN 50178. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 126 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA List of abbreviations B.1 Abbreviations Abbreviation Term Meaning PG Programming device Compact programming device which meets the special requirements of industry. The PG is fully equipped for programming SIMATIC PLCs. PS Power supply Power supply PT Power Tags Process tags; tags enable data exchange between the components of an automation process, for example, between the HMI device and the controller. RAM Random Access Memory Main or work memory of a computer with direct access, allowing read access to data and editing. RT Runtime SD Secure Digital card Memory card SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety Extra Low Voltage; electrical circuit in which the voltage cannot exceed 30 V AC (RMS), 42.4 V AC peak or 60 V DC under NORMAL CONDITIONS and CONDITIONS OF A SINGLE FAULT, including ground faults in other circuits. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UWF Unified Write Filter Configurable write protection under Windows 10, for protection of data carriers (for example, CFast card, internal USB drives, etc.)"Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter (Page 57) USB Universal Serial Bus Serial bus system for connecting a computer to external devices. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 127 Glossary Cold restart A startup procedure commencing when the CPU is switched on. Upon a cold restart, the system typically performs some basic hardware checks and then loads the operating system from the hard disk into the work memory. Controller Integrated hardware and software controlling the operation of a specific internal or I/O device (e.g. keyboard controller). Device configuration The device configuration of a PC/programming device includes information on the features and options of the PC/programming device such as memory configuration, drive types, monitor, network address etc. The data is stored in a configuration file and is used by the operating system to load the corresponding device drivers or assign device parameters. Drivers Program sections of the operating system. They convert data from the user programs to the specific formats required by the I/O devices (e.g. hard disks, monitors, printers). Ethernet Local network (bus structure) for text and data communication with a data transmission rate of 10/100/1000 Mbps. Image An image is a copy of hard-disk partitions, for example, which is stored as backup in a file so that it can be restored if necessary. Interface Connection between individual hardware elements such as PCs, programming device, printer or screen by means of physical plug-in connections (cables). Connection between different programs to allow them to be used together. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 128 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Glossary LAN Local Area Network: LAN refers to a local network consisting of a group of computers and other devices which are distributed over a relatively restricted area and connected through communication lines. The devices connected to a LAN are referred to as nodes. The purpose of networks is the shared use of files, printers or other resources. License key The license key is the electronic license stamp of a license. Siemens AG provides a license key for software that is protected by licensing laws. Operating system Generic term which describes all functions for controlling and monitoring user program execution and distribution of system resources to the user programs as well as maintenance of the operating mode in cooperation with the hardware. Power options The power options can be used to reduce the power consumption of the computer while still keeping it ready for immediate use. In Windows via Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Power Options. Restart The restart of the company that is already in operation using, for example, the shortcut without switching off the power supply. Restore USB stick You use the Restore USB stick to reset your system partition or the entire hard disk to the delivery state in the event of an error. The USB stick contains all the necessary image files and is bootable. ROM Read Only Memory. ROM refers to a read-only memory where each memory location can be addressed individually. The stored programs or data are hard-coded and are preserved even in the event of a power failure. S.M.A.R.T Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART or S.M.A.R.T.) is an industry standard for storage media. It provides for permanent monitoring of relevant parameters and thus early recognition of pending defects. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 129 Glossary SATA Serial ATA. An interface for hard disk drives and optical drives with serial data transfer. SETUP (BIOS setup) A program used to determine information on the device configuration. The device configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC2 is preset. Changes must be made whenever a memory expansion, new modules or drives are to be activated. CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 130 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Index A AC Alternating current, 126 Accessories, 123 Address space, 33 ALM Automation License Manager, 126 Alternating current AC, 126 Ambient conditions Climatic, 75 Mechanical, 74 Approvals, 66 Areas of application, 17 Fail-safe CPUs, 17 Technology CPUs, 17 Automation License Manager, 48 ALM, 126 B Basic Input Output System BIOS, 126 Basic knowledge, 6 BIOS Basic Input Output System, 126 BIOS setup, 56 changing the device configuration, 56 Boot Manager, 50 C CE Communaute Europeenne, 126 Certificate of Authenticity CoA, 126 Certificate of License Col, 126 CFast CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer, 126 CFast card insert, 64 Partitioning, 59 remove, 64 Characteristics Control cabinet, 19 Degree of protection, 19 General, 19 Interfaces, 19 Power supply, 19 Pre-installations, 19 Climatic ambient conditions, 75 CoA Certificate of Authenticity, 126 Col Certificate of License, 126 Commissioning Commissioning procedure, 43 Creating the configuration, 46 Notes, 42 Operator user, 44 Procedure, 44 Requirements, 43 Setting the IP address, 46 Communaute Europeenne CE, 126 CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer CFast, 126 Components BusAdapter, 23 Mounting rail, 22 Overview of CPU 1515SP PC2, 22 Server module, 23 Components sensitive to electrostatic charge ESD, 126 Configuration Commissioning, 46 Non-isolated configuration, 38 Reference potential of the load voltage, 38 TN-S grid, 38 Conventions, 7 CPU Damage, 29 LED displays, 51 Switching on, 50 Unpacking, 29 CPU Switching off, 50 CPU 1515SP PC2 Components, 22 Dimension drawing, 121 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 131 Index D Data Backup, 58 Restoring, 58 Data backup, 58 SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator, 58, 58 DC Direct current, 126 Degree of protection, 76 Dimension drawing CPU 1515SP PC2, 121 Direct current DC, 126 Disposal Recycling, 65 Downloading a project Target system, 47 DPP Dual-mode DisplayPort, 126 Dual-mode DisplayPort DPP, 126 E Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 71 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility), 71 EN European standard, 126 ESD Components sensitive to electrostatic charge, 126 European standard EN, 126 F Functions, 55, 55 BIOS setup, 56 Monitoring drives, 55 Monitoring functions, 54 Operating hours counter, 55 Power options, 56 Retentive memory NVRAM, 55 SIMATIC IPC DiagBase, 54 SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor, 54 Temperature monitoring, 55 G GbE Gigabit Ethernet, 126 Gigabit Ethernet GbE, 126 GRand Unified Bootloader GRUB/GRUB2DOS, 126 GRUB/GRUB2DOS GRand Unified Bootloader, 126 H HMI Human Machine Interface, 126 HMI connection establish, 47 HMI devices Updating software, 62 Human Machine Interface HMI, 126 I Identification data Repairs, 30 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission, 126 IM Interface module, 126 Installation rules, 32 Insulation, 76 Interface module IM, 126 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC, 126 IP address Commissioning, 46 Setting, 46 L LAN Local Area Network, 126 Language packs for installing Windows, 62 Windows, 62 LED Light Emitting Diode, 126 LED displays CPU, 51 ERROR, 52 MAINT, 52 Meaning, 52 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 132 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Index Power, 52 RUN/STOP, 52 License Certificate of License, 49 Software, 48 License key Backup, 49 Restore, 49 transfer, 48 Light Emitting Diode LED, 126 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP, 126 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol, 126 Local Area Network LAN, 126 M MAC addresses Assignment, 25 Maximum configuration, 28 Address space, 33 Electrical, 33 Mechanical, 33 Rules, 33 USB load, 33 mechanical ambient conditions, 74 Minimum clearances Mounting, 32 MMC Multi Media Card, 126 Mode selector Positions, 26 Monitoring functions, 54 Mounting Ambient temperatures, 28, 33 Fixing strain relief, 34 Installation location, 28 Installation position, 28 Installing the CPU, 34 Maximum configuration, 28 Minimum clearances, 32 Mounting rail, 31 Required tool, 34 Rules, 32 Strain relief, 41 Uninstalling the CPU, 35 USB load, 33 Mounting rail Mounting, 31 Multi Media Card MMC, 126 N Network connection HMI, 47 Networks Ethernet, 40 PROFIBUS, 40 PROFINET, 40 New Technology File System NTFS, 126 Non-Volatile Random-Access Memory NVRAM, 126 Notes on use, 16 Ambient conditions, 16 Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant, 16 NTFS New Technology File System, 126 NVRAM Non-Volatile Random-Access Memory, 126 Retentive memory, 55 O Operator controls and display elements, 24 CFast card, 25 Interfaces, 24 MAC addresses, 25 Mode selector, 26 Power supply, 26 SD/MMC card, 25 USB connections, 25 Operator user Commissioning, 44 P Packaging CPU, 29 Damage, 29 Partitioning CFast card, 59 PC Personal computer, 126 PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage, 126 Personal computer PC, 126 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 133 Index PG Programming device, 127 PN PROFINET, 126 Power options Functions, 56 Power supply PS, 127 Power Tags PT, 127 Procedure Commissioning, 44 PROFINET PN, 126 Programming device PG, 127 Proof of license, 27 Certificate of Authenticity, 30 Certificate of License, 30 Protection class, 76, 76 Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV, 126 PS Power supply, 127 PT Power Tags, 127 R Radio interference, 70, 72 RAM Random Access Memory, 127 Random Access Memory RAM, 127 Rated voltage, 77 Recycling Disposal, 65 Repair, 63 Restoring the delivery state, 60 Requirements, 60 with restore USB stick, 61 Retentive memory NVRAM Functions, 55 RT Runtime, 127 Runtime RT, 127 S Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV, 127 Safety information, 14 ESD guidelines, 15 Repairs, 14 Safe operation of a plant, 14 Sample configuration, 20 Configuration, 20 Scope, 7 Documentation, 7 Scope of delivery, 27 CPU 1515SP PC2, 27 CPU 1515SP PC2 F, 27 CPU 1515SP PC2 T, 27 CPU 1515SP PC2 TF, 27 Proof of license, 27 SD Secure Digital card, 127 Secure Digital card SD, 127 SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage, 127 Sending in the device, 63 Shipping conditions, 73 SIMATIC IPC DiagBase, 54 SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor, 54 SIMATIC IPC Image&Partition Creator Data backup, 58 SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive Data backup, 58 Software update for HMI devices, 62 Spare parts, 123 Standards, 66 Storage conditions, 73 Strain relief mounting, 41 T Technical specifications Climatic ambient conditions, 75 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 71 mechanical ambient conditions, 74 Shipping and storage conditions, 73 Standards and approvals, 66 Temperature monitoring, 55 Test voltage, 76 Transfer License key, 48 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) 134 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA Index U UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 127 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL, 127 Unified Write Filter UWF, 127 Universal Serial Bus USB, 127 Updates for installing Windows, 63 USB Universal Serial Bus, 127 Use in industrial environments, 70 in mixed areas, 70 in residential areas, 70 UWF Unified Write Filter, 127 W Windows Installing updates, 63 Language packs, 62 Wiring, 37 Block diagram, 37 Pin assignment, 37 Rules and regulations, 36 Z zone 2 explosion-proof atmosphere, 77 CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 135 SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs Produktinformation Security-Hinweise Siemens bietet Produkte und Losungen mit Industrial Security-Funktionen an, die den sicheren Betrieb von Anlagen, Systemen, Maschinen und Netzwerken unterstutzen. Um Anlagen, Systeme, Maschinen und Netzwerke gegen Cyber-Bedrohungen zu sichern, ist es erforderlich, ein ganzheitliches Industrial Security-Konzept zu implementieren (und kontinuierlich aufrechtzuerhalten), das dem aktuellen Stand der Technik entspricht. Die Produkte und Losungen von Siemens formen einen Bestandteil eines solchen Konzepts. Die Kunden sind dafur verantwortlich, unbefugten Zugriff auf ihre Anlagen, Systeme, Maschinen und Netzwerke zu verhindern. Diese Systeme, Maschinen und Komponenten sollten nur mit dem Unternehmensnetzwerk oder dem Internet verbunden werden, wenn und soweit dies notwendig ist und nur wenn entsprechende Schutzmanahmen (z. B. Firewalls und/oder Netzwerksegmentierung) ergriffen wurden. Weiterfuhrende Informationen zu moglichen Schutzmanahmen im Bereich Industrial Security finden Sie unter (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Die Produkte und Losungen von Siemens werden standig weiterentwickelt, um sie noch sicherer zu machen. Siemens empfiehlt ausdrucklich, Produkt-Updates anzuwenden, sobald sie zur Verfugung stehen und immer nur die aktuellen Produktversionen zu verwenden. Die Verwendung veralteter oder nicht mehr unterstutzter Versionen kann das Risiko von Cyber-Bedrohungen erhohen. Um stets uber Produkt-Updates informiert zu sein, abonnieren Sie den Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed unter (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Inhalt Einleitung Diese Produktinformation enthalt wichtige Informationen zu den im Absatz "Geltungsbereich" genannten F-CPUs. Die Produktinformation ist Bestandteil des gelieferten Produkts. Die in dieser Produktinformation enthaltenen Aussagen sind in Zweifelsfallen als aktueller anzusehen. Geltungsbereich Die Aussagen in dieser Produktinformation sind fur die nachfolgend aufgezahlten F-CPUs gultig: F-CPUs S7-1200 * * * * * * CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly F-CPUs S7-1500 * * * * * * * CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Alle Rechte vorbehalten A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 * * * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1516proF-2 PN S7-1500 F Software Controller * CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1507S F * CPU 1508S F 1 Einsatzgebiete Haupteinsatzgebiete der F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 sind Personen- und Maschinenschutz und Brennersteuerungen. Neben dem Sicherheitsprogramm konnen Sie auch Standard-Anwendungen programmieren. Die F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 konnen Sie im Sicherheitsbetrieb oder im Standardbetrieb betreiben. Fur den Sicherheitsbetrieb ist das installierte Optionspaket STEP 7 Safety notwendig. Ohne installiertes Optionspaket STEP 7 Safety konnen Sie die F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 im Standard-Betrieb einsetzen. Im Standardbetrieb verhalten sich F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 wie Standard-CPUs S7-1200/1500. Informationen zum Einsatz der F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 im Sicherheitsbetrieb erhalten Sie im Programmier- und Bedienhandbuch "SIMATIC Safety - Projektieren und Programmieren (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/54110126)". Informationen zum Einsatz der F-CPUs S7-1200 im Standardbetrieb erhalten Sie im Systemhandbuch "S7-1200 Automatisierungssystem (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/109478121)". Informationen zum Einsatz der F-CPUs S7-1500 im Standardbetrieb erhalten Sie in den jeweiligen Geratehandbuchern der Standard-CPUs S7-1500 und den Standard-T-CPUs S7-1500 unter den folgenden Links: CPUs 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/67295862/133300) CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/22057/man) CPUs 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/90466439/133300) CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13906/man) S7-1500 Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/109740725) Die aktuelle Firmware fur die jeweilige F-CPU finden Sie mit einer Suche nach Downloads mit der jeweiligen Artikelnummer im Industy Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Hinweis Beachten Sie anwendungsspezifische Anforderungen z. B. zur Netzausfalluberbruckung bei Netzteilen/Netzgeraten. PFDavg-, PFH-Werte fur F-CPUs Nachfolgend finden Sie die Versagenswahrscheinlichkeitswerte (PFDavg-, PFH-Werte) fur die oben genannten F-CPUs bei einer Gebrauchsdauer von 20 Jahren und bei einer Reparaturzeit von 100 Stunden: Betrieb im geringen Anforderungsmodus low demand mode gema IEC 61508:2010: PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand Betrieb im haufigen Anforderungs- oder kontinuierlichen Modus high demand/continuous mode gema IEC 61508:2010: PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 Uberblick uber den Arbeitsspeicher der F-CPUs im Vergleich mit den Standard-CPUs CPU Arbeitsspeicher CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 kbyte CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC Arbeitsspeicher CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly 100 kbyte CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC F-CPU CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 kbyte CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly 125 kbyte CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 kbyte CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1511-1 PN 150 kbyte CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1513-1 PN 300 kbyte CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 kbyte CPU 1515-1 PN 500 kbyte CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mbyte CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte 2 F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 CPU Arbeitsspeicher F-CPU Arbeitsspeicher CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mbyte CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1518-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 4 Mbyte CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 6 Mbyte CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 kbyte CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 kbyte CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 kbyte CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 kbyte CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mbyte CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1507S 5 Mbyte CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mbyte CPU 1508S 10 Mbyte CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mbyte Unterstutzung von PROFIsafe V2 Schnittstellen, die PROFINET IO unterstutzen, unterstutzen auch PROFIsafe V2. Einschrankung bei den Anweisungen "CREAT_DB" und "DELETE_DB" F-DBs konnen weder erzeugt noch geloscht werden. Einschrankung bei den Anweisungen "READ_DBL" und "WRIT_DBL" Die Zieladresse darf nicht auf einen F-DB zeigen. Einschrankung bei der Projektierung des Remanenzverhaltens von Datenbausteinen Die Projektierung der Remanenz von Datenbausteinen wird fur F-DBs nicht unterstutzt. D. h., bei NETZ-AUS/EIN und Neustart (STOP-RUN) der F-CPU sind die Aktualwerte der F-DBs nicht remanent. Die F-DBs erhalten die Anfangswerte aus dem Ladespeicher. In F-DBs ist fur alle Variablen das Kontrollkastchen "Remanenz" gegraut dargestellt. Konfigurationssteuerung (Optionenhandling) auf einer F-CPU S7-1200 Die Konfigurationssteuerung (Optionenhandling) auf einer F-CPU S7-1200 ist mit zentralen Modulen unter folgender Einschrankung moglich: Die fehlersicheren Module S7-1200 durfen nicht getauscht werden und mussen auch immer an Ihrem projektierten Steckplatz physikalisch gesteckt werden. Platzieren Sie die fehlersicheren Module S7-1200 direkt neben der F-CPU. Platzieren Sie die Standard-Module rechts neben den fehlersicheren Modulen S7-1200. Vorgehen zum Laden einer Projektierung fur Firmware < V2.0 fur F-CPUs S7-1500 Wenn Sie eine F-CPU S7-1500 mit einer Projektierung fur Firmware ab V2.0 mit projektierter Schutzstufe "Vollzugriff inkl. Fail-safe (kein Schutz)" geladen haben und nun eine Projektierung fur Firmware <= V1.8 auf diese F-CPU laden wollen, mussen Sie Folgendes beachten: Beim Laden der Projektierung mit Firmware <= V1.8 auf die F-CPU wird das Passwort abgefragt und als ungultig erkannt. Als Abhilfe formatieren Sie die SIMATIC Memory Card wie in der Online-Hilfe zu STEP 7 unter "Eine S7-1500-Memory Card formatieren" beschrieben. Anschlieend konnen Sie die Projektierung fur Firmware <= V1.8 auf die F-CPU laden. Einsatz von Taktsynchronalarm-(F-)OBs Die Anzahl der verwendbaren Taktsynchronalarm-(F-)OBs ist von der eingesetzten F-CPU abhangig. Informationen dazu erhalten Sie in den technischen Daten der CPU. Uberschreitet die Summe der Taktsynchronalarm-OBs und des Taktsynchronalarm-F-OBs die in den technischen Daten der CPU angegebene Anzahl, ist das Laden des Standard-Anwenderprogramms im RUN nicht mehr moglich. F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 3 Display (bei F-CPUs S7-1500 mit Display bzw. Panel) F-CPUs S7-1500 mit Display zeigen Ihnen im Menu "Ubersicht" unter "Fehlersicher" Folgendes an: Sicherheitsbetrieb aktiviert/deaktiviert F-Gesamtsignatur Letzte fehlersichere Anderung Die Version von STEP 7 Safety, mit der das Sicherheitsprogramm ubersetzt wurde. Informationen zu den F-Ablaufgruppen - Name der F-Ablaufgruppe - F-Ablaufgruppen-Signatur - Aktuelle Zykluszeit - Max. Zykluszeit - Aktuelle Laufzeit - Max. Laufzeit Fur jede F-Peripherie wird Ihnen unter "Fehlersichere Parameter" Folgendes angezeigt: F-Parameter-Signatur (mit Adresse) Sicherheitsbetrieb F-Uberwachungszeit F-Quelladresse F-Zieladresse Im Menu "Einstellungen" unter "Schutz" wird der folgende zusatzliche Menupunkt angezeigt: F-Passwort freigeben/sperren Der schreibende Zugriff auf F-Bausteine ist nicht zulassig. Hinweis Das Steuern von fehlersicheren Ein-/Ausgangen kann zum STOP der F-CPU fuhren. Hinweis Bei der Display-Firmware V2.5 wird nach dem Laden von Programmanderungen das Display fur wenige Minuten nicht aktualisiert und ist nicht bedienbar, anschlieend startet das Display neu. 4 F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Webserver Die F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 zeigt Ihnen auf der Startseite des Webservers Folgendes an: Sicherheitsbetrieb aktiviert/deaktiviert F-Gesamtsignatur Letzte fehlersichere Anderung Die Version von STEP 7 Safety, mit der das Sicherheitsprogramm ubersetzt wurde. Informationen zu den F-Ablaufgruppen - Name der F-Ablaufgruppe - F-Ablaufgruppen-Signatur - Aktuelle Zykluszeit - Max. Zykluszeit - Aktuelle Laufzeit - Max. Laufzeit Fur jede F-Peripherie wird Ihnen auf der Webseite "Baugruppenzustand" im Reiter "Fehlersicherheit" Folgendes angezeigt: F-Parameter-Signatur (mit Adresse) Sicherheitsbetrieb F-Uberwachungszeit F-Quelladresse F-Zieladresse Der schreibende Zugriff auf F-Bausteine ist nicht zulassig. Hinweis Das Steuern von fehlersicheren Ein-/Ausgangen kann zum STOP der F-CPU fuhren. Die folgenden Punkte betreffen den S7-1500 F Software Controller Der S7-1500 F Software Controller ist eine fehlersichere Software-CPU, die auf den folgenden Geraten zum Einsatz kommt: S7-1500 F Software Controller Gerat CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1507S F * * * * * * IPC 2x7E* IPC 4x7D* IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** CPU 1508S F * * * * IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** * Nur einsetzbar, wenn NVRAM vorhanden (wird automatisch zugewiesen) ** Nur einsetzbar mit PROFIBUS- bzw. PROFINET-Schnittstelle und, wenn NVRAM vorhanden (wird automatisch zugewiesen) F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 5 Die in der obigen Tabelle genannten Gerate reagieren beim Einsatz des S7-1500 F Software Controllers und STEP 7 Safety auch bei erhohter elektromagnetischer Storbeeinflussung fehlersicher. Spezielle Typprufungen im Hinblick auf funktionale Sicherheit sind daher fur diese Gerate - im Gegensatz zur F-Peripherie - nicht erforderlich. Beachten Sie jedoch im Hinblick auf Verfugbarkeit anwendungsspezifische Anforderungen, insbesondere die Normen zur Brennersteuerung. Der im Lieferumfang enthaltene gelbe Aufkleber mit dem TUV SUD-Prufzeichen fur funktionale Sicherheit ist ausschlielich fur die Verwendung im Zusammenhang mit den S7-1500 F Software Controllern bestimmt (nicht im Lieferumfang der Download-Version). Den Aufkleber konnen Sie zur Kennzeichnung der Hardware verwenden, auf der der S7-1500 F Software Controller installiert wurde. Wenn Sie den S7-1500 F Software Controller deinstallieren, mussen Sie den Aufkleber entfernen. Sichern und Wiederherstellen Das Sichern und Wiederherstellen von Projektdaten wird nicht unterstutzt. Passworter fur Schutzstufen Die PC Station unterscheidet nicht zwischen den beiden Passwortern der Schutzstufen "Vollzugriff inkl. Fail-safe (kein Schutz)" und "Vollzugriff (kein Schutz)". Der S7-1500 F Software Controller unterscheidet zwischen den beiden Passwortern der Schutzstufen "Vollzugriff inkl. Fail-safe (kein Schutz)" und "Vollzugriff (kein Schutz)". Anweisung ENDIS_PW Beim Einsatz der Anweisung ENDIS_PW auf einem IPC konnen Sie sich von Ihrem System aussperren, weil ein IPC keinen Betriebsartenschalter besitzt. Als Abhilfe konnen Sie sinngema vorgehen wie in der Online-Hilfe zur Anweisung ENDIS_PW unter "Ungewolltes Aussperren bei einer S7-1200-CPU verhindern" beschrieben. Fur PC-Stationen bis einschlielich V2.0 gilt: Wenn es zu einer ungewollten Aussperrung gekommen ist, dann konnen Sie die Sperre nur durch deinstallieren und installieren des S7-1500 F Software Controllers aufheben. Fur PC-Station ab V2.1 gilt: Mitglieder der Windowsbenutzergruppe "Failsafe Operators" konnen mit der Funktion "Delete Configuration" die Aussperrung umgehen. Hinweis Der Windowsbenutzer "Jedermann" wird nicht berucksichtigt, wenn er in der Windowsbenutzergruppe "Failsafe Operators" ist. Funktionalitat TPM Die Funktionalitat TPM darf fur S7-1500 F Software Controller nicht genutzt werden, da dies zu einem STOP fuhren kann. Nutzung von EWF bzw. UWF und dem EWF- bzw. UWF-Manager Sie durfen EWF bzw. UWF und den EWF- bzw. UWF-Manager nicht fur das CPU-Volume anwahlen. Weitere Besonderheiten WARNUNG Sie mussen den Zugang fur den S7-1500 F Software Controller durch einen Zugangsschutz auf Personen begrenzen, die zum Installieren bzw. Deinstallieren der Software des S7-1500 F Software Controllers berechtigt sind. Hinweis Bei einem S7-1500 F Software Controller mit einer PC-Station Version bis einschlielich V2.1 wird die Funktion "Delete Configuration" am PC-Station Panel nur angeboten, wenn an der F-CPU kein Zugriffsschutz (kein Schutz) eingerichtet ist. Bei einer PC-Station ab V2.2 wird gepruft, ob der Windowsbenutzer Mitglied der Windowsbenutzergruppe "Failsafe Operators" ist. Wenn der eingeloggte Windowsbenutzer Mitglied der Gruppe ist, kann er die Funktion "Delete Configuration" auch beim gesetzten F-Passwort ausfuhren. Wenn der eingeloggte Windowsbenutzer nicht Mitglied der Gruppe ist, verhalt sich die PC-Station wie bis V2.1. Hinweis Wenn der S7-1500 F Software Controller mit einem Zugriffsschutz versehen ist, wird dieser mit "Delete Configuration" nicht geloscht und bleibt erhalten. Hinweis Benotigte BIOS-Version fur CPU 1505SP F kleiner V2.5 Fur den Einsatz der CPU 1505SP F benotigen Sie mindestens die BIOS-Version V2.00_02.01. 6 F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Hinweis Der CPU-Takt darf sich im RUN nicht andern, da dies zu einem STOP fuhren wurde. Dies konnen Sie durch das Deaktivieren der Energiesparfunktion verhindern. Hinweis Zuweisung der PROFIsafe-Adressen fur F-Module am PROFIBUS an IPCs mit S7-1500 F Software Controller kleiner V2.5 Wenn Sie PROFIsafe-Adressen F-Modulen zuweisen wollen, die uber PROFIBUS an einem IPC mit einem S7-1500 F Software Controller betrieben werden, dann weisen Sie die PROFIsafe-Adressen den F-Modulen zu und fuhren Sie anschlieend ein Netzaus/Netzein der PROFIBUS-Station durch. Hinweis Sicherheitsprogramm laden bzw. Sicherheitsbetrieb aktivieren fur S7-1500 F Software Controller kleiner V2.5 Schlieen Sie nach dem Laden des Sicherheitsprogramms bzw. nach dem Aktivieren des Sicherheitsbetriebs das Panel und offnen Sie es wieder, damit die Anzeige im Panel aktualisiert wird. Hinweis Wenn Sie bei einem S7-1500 F Software Controller mit Version 2.0 ein Update auf eine Version > 2.0 durchfuhren, wird, wenn sich bereits ein Sicherheitsprogramm auf dem S7-1500 F Software Controller befindet, der Wert "Letzte fehlersichere Anderung" auf den Installationszeitpunkt gesetzt. Hinweis Die Funktionalitat "Konfigurationsdatei Export" setzt das Optionspaket STEP 7 Safety ab V15 und einen S7-1500 F Software Controller ab V2.5 voraus. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG DEUTSCHLAND F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 11/2018 7 SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs Product Information Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Content Introduction This Product Information contains important information on the F-CPUs specified in the section "Scope of validity". The Product Information is part of the product supplied. The information in this Product Information should be considered more up-to-date than other documentation if uncertainties arise. Scope of validity The statements in this product information apply to the F-CPUs listed below: S7-1200 F-CPUs * * * * * * 8 CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly S7-1500 F-CPUs * * * * * * * CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) * * * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1516proF-2 PN S7-1500 F-Software Controller * CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1507S F * CPU 1508S F (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. All rights reserved A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Areas of application Main areas of application of the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs are personal and machine safety and burner controls. In addition to the safety program, you can also program standard applications. You can operate the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs in safety or standard mode. The installed STEP 7 Safety optional package is required for safety mode. If the STEP 7 Safety optional package is not installed, you can use the S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs in standard mode. In standard mode, S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs behave like standard S7-1200/1500 CPUs. Additional information on using the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs in safety mode is available in the programming and operating manual "SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)". Additional information on using the S7-1200 F-CPUs in standard mode is available in the "S7-1200 Programmable controller (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478121)" system manual. Additional information on using the S7-1500 F-CPUs in standard mode is available in the relevant manuals for the S7-1500 and the standard-T-CPUs S7-1500 at the following links: CPUs 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67295862/133300) CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22057/man) CPUs 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90466439/133300) CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13906/man) S7-1500 Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109740725) You can find the latest firmware for the relevant F-CPU by searching for downloads with the respective article number in the Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Note Observe any application-specific requirements, for example on mains buffering for power supplies/power packs. PFDavg and PFH values for F-CPUs Below are the probability of failure on demand values (PFDavg, PFH values) for the above-named F-CPUs with a service life of 20 years and an MTTR of 100 hours: Operation in low demand mode low demand mode According to IEC 61508:2010: PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand Operation in high demand or continuous mode high demand/continuous mode According to IEC 61508:2010: PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 Overview of the work memory of F-CPUs compared with standard CPUs CPU Work memory F-CPU Work memory CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 KB CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 KB 100 KB CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 KB CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1511-1 PN 150 KB CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1513-1 PN 300 KB CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 KB CPU 1515-1 PN 500 KB CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 MB CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 125 KB 150 KB CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly 9 CPU Work memory F-CPU Work memory CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 MB CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1518-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 4 MB CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 6 MB CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 KB CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 KB CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 KB CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 KB CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 MB CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1.5 MB CPU 1505SP (T) 1 MB CPU 1505SP (T)F 1.5 MB CPU 1507S 5 MB CPU 1507S F 7.5 MB CPU 1508S 10 MB CPU 1508S F 12.5 MB Support of PROFIsafe V2 Interfaces that support PROFINET IO also support PROFIsafe V2. Restriction with "CREAT_DB" and "DELETE_DB" instructions F-DBs can neither be created nor deleted. Restriction with "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL" instructions The destination address must not point to an F-DB. Restrictions when configuring the retentive behavior of data blocks The configuration of the retentive behavior of data blocks is not supported for F-DBs. This means that the actual values of the F-DBs will not be retentive in the event of Power OFF/ON and Restart (STOP-RUN) of the F-CPU. The F-DBs retain the initial values from the load memory. The "Retain" check box is grayed-out for all tags in F-DBs. Configuration control (option handling) on an S7-1200 F-CPU Configuration control (option handling) on an S7-1200 F-CPU is possible with central modules subject to the following limitation: The fail-safe S7-1200 modules cannot be swapped and must also always be physically inserted into their configured slot. Position the fail-safe S7-1200 modules directly next to the F-CPU. Position the standard modules on the right next to the fail-safe S7-1200 modules. Procedure for loading a configuration for firmware < V2.0 for S7-1500 F-CPUs If you have loaded an S7-1500 F-CPU with a configuration for firmware as of V2.0 with configured protection level "Full access with fail-safe (no protection)" and you now want to load a configuration for firmware <= V1.8 to this F-CPU, you must observe the following: When the configuration with firmware <= V1.8 is loaded to the F-CPU, you will be prompted to enter the password and the entered password will be identified as invalid. As a remedy, format the SIMATIC Memory Card as described in the online help for STEP 7 under "Formatting an S7-1500 memory card". You can then load the configuration for firmware <= V1.8 to the F-CPU. Use of isochronous mode interrupt (F-)OBs The number of isochronous mode interrupt (F-)OBs depends on the F-CPU used. You can obtain information in the technical specification of the CPU. If the sum of the isochronous mode interrupt OBs and the isochronous mode interrupt F-OBs exceeds the number specified in the technical specifications of the CPU, it is no longer possible to load the standard user program in RUN. 10 F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Display (for S7-1500 F-CPUs with display or panel) S7-1500 F-CPUs with display show you the following in the "Overview" menu under "Fail-safe": Safety mode activated/deactivated Collective F-signature Last fail-safe change Version of STEP 7 Safety with which the safety program was compiled. Information on the F-runtime groups - Name of F-runtime group - F-runtime groups signature - Current cycle time - Max. cycle time - Current runtime - Max. runtime The following is displayed for each F-I/O under "Fail-safe parameters": F-parameter signature (with addresses) Safety mode F-monitoring time F-source address F-destination address The following additional menu command is displayed in the "Settings" menu under "Protection": Enable/disable F-password Write access to F-blocks is not permitted. Note Controlling fail-safe inputs/outputs can result set the F-CPU to STOP. Note With the display firmware V2.5, the display is not refreshed and cannot be operated for a few minutes after loading program changes. Afterwards, the display restarts. F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 11 Web server S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs show you the following on the start page of the Web server: Safety mode activated/deactivated Collective F-signature Last fail-safe change Version of STEP 7 Safety with which the safety program was compiled. Information on the F-runtime groups - Name of F-runtime group - F-runtime groups signature - Current cycle time - Max. cycle time - Current runtime - Max. runtime The following is displayed for each F-I/O on the "Module information" web page in the "Fail-safe" tab: F-parameter signature (with addresses) Safety mode F-monitoring time F-source address F-destination address Write access to F-blocks is not permitted. Note Controlling fail-safe inputs/outputs can result set the F-CPU to STOP. The following points relate to the S7-1500 F-Software Controller The S7-1500 F-Software Controller is a fail-safe software CPU that is used on the following devices. S7-1500 F-Software Controller Device CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1507S F * * * * * * IPC 2x7E* IPC 4x7D* IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** CPU 1508S F * * * * IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** * Can only be used when NVRAM is present (to be automatically allocated) ** Can only be used with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface and when NVRAM is present (to be automatically allocated) 12 F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 The devices specified in the table above react in a fail-safe manner when the S7-1500 F-Software Controller and STEP 7 Safety are used, even in the case of elevated electromagnetic interference. Special type tests for functional safety are therefore not required for these devices - in contrast to F-I/O. With regard to availability, however, you must observe the application-specific requirements, especially the standards for burner control. The yellow adhesive label with the TUV SUD test mark for functional safety included in the scope of delivery is exclusively intended for use in connection with S7-1500 F-Software Controllers (not included in the download version of the product package). You can use the adhesive label to mark the hardware on which the S7-1500 F-Software Controller is installed. You must remove the adhesive label when you uninstall the S7-1500 F-Software Controller. Backup and restore Backup and restoration of project data is not supported. Passwords for protection levels The PC station does not distinguish between the two passwords of protection levels "Full access with fail-safe (no protection)" and "Full access (no protection)". The S7-1500 F-Software Controller distinguishes between the two passwords of protection levels "Full access with fail-safe (no protection)" and "Full access (no protection)". ENDIS_PW instruction When the ENDIS_PW instruction is used on an IPC, you can be locked out of your system because an IPC has no mode selector. As a remedy, you can follow a procedure similar to that described in the online help for the ENDIS_PW instruction under "Preventing unintentional lockout of an S7-1200 CPU". The following applies for PC stations up to and including V2.0: If an unintentional lockout occurs, you can remedy this only by uninstalling and installing the S7-1500 F-Software Controller. The following applies for PC stations as of V2.1: Members of the Windows "Failsafe Operators" user group can bypass the lockout using the "Delete Configuration" function. Note The Windows user "Everyone" is not taken into consideration if it is in the "Failsafe Operators" Windows user group. TPM functionality The TPM functionality cannot be used for S7-1500 F-Software Controllers because it could result in a STOP. Using EWF or UWF and the EWF or UWF Manager You cannot select EWF or UWF and the EWF or UWF Manager for the CPU volume. Other particularities WARNING You must limit access for the S7-1500 F-Software Controller through access protection to persons who are authorized to install or uninstall the software of the S7-1500 F-Software Controller. Note With an S7-1500 F-Software Controller with a PC station up to and including V2.1, the "Delete Configuration" function is only offered on the PC-station panel when no access protection (no protection) is set up on the F-CPU. With a PC station as of V2.2, it is checked whether the Windows user is a member of the "Failsafe Operators" Windows user group. If the logged-on Windows user is a member of the group, he can execute the "Delete Configuration" function even when the F-password is set. If the logged-on Windows user is not a member of the group, the PC station behaves as up to V2.1. Note If the S7-1500 F-Software Controller features an access protection, this is not deleted with "Delete Configuration" and is retained. Note Required BIOS version for CPU 1505SP F prior to V2.5 For use of the CPU 1505SP F, you require BIOS version V2.00_02.01 or higher. F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 13 Note The CPU clock must not be changed in RUN because this would result in a STOP. You can prevent this by disabling the energy-saving function. Note Assignment of PROFIsafe addresses for F-modules via PROFIBUS on IPCs with S7-1500 F Software Controller prior to V2.5 If you want to assign PROFIsafe addresses for F-modules that are being operated via PROFIBUS on an IPC with an S71500 F-Software Controller, assign the PROFIsafe addresses to the F-modules and then perform a power on/power off of the PROFIBUS station. Note Loading the safety program or activating safety mode for S7-1500 F Software Controller prior to V2.5 After loading the safety program or activating safety mode, close the panel and then open it again to update the display on the panel. Note If you execute an update for a S7-1500 F Software Controller with V2.0 to a version > 2.0, the value "Last fail-safe change" is set to the time of installation if a safety program is already installed on the S7-1500 F-Software Controller. Note The "Configuration file export" functionality requires the STEP 7 Safety add-on package as of V15 and an S7-1500 F Software Controller prior to V2.5. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 14 F-CPUs A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 CPU F Information produit Notes relatives a la securite Siemens commercialise des produits et solutions comprenant des fonctions de securite industrielle qui contribuent a une exploitation sure des installations, solutions, machines, equipements et reseaux. Pour garantir la securite des installations, systemes, machines et reseaux contre les cybermenaces, il est necessaire d'implementer (et de preserver) un concept de securite industrielle global et de pointe. Les produits et solutions de Siemens constituent une partie de ce concept. Il incombe aux clients d'empecher tout acces non autorise a leurs installations, systemes, machines et reseaux. Ces systemes, machines et composants doivent uniquement etre connectes au reseau d'entreprise ou a Internet si et dans la mesure ou cela est necessaire et seulement si des mesures de protection adequates (ex: pare-feux et/ou segmentation du reseau) ont ete prises. Pour plus d'informations sur les mesures de protection pouvant etre mises en oeuvre dans le domaine de la securite industrielle, rendez-vous sur (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Les produits et solutions Siemens font l'objet de developpements continus pour etre encore plus surs. Siemens recommande vivement d'effectuer des mises a jour des que celles-ci sont disponibles et d'utiliser la derniere version des produits. L'utilisation de versions qui ne sont plus prises en charge et la non-application des dernieres mises a jour peut augmenter le risque de cybermenaces pour nos clients. Pour etre informe des mises a jour produit, abonnez-vous au flux RSS Siemens Industrial Security a l'adresse suivante (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Contenu Introduction Cette Information produit contient des indications importantes concernant les CPU F citees au paragraphe "Domaine de validite". L'Information produit fait partie de la livraison du produit. Les informations contenues dans cette information produit prevalent en cas de doute sur celles d'autres documents. Domaine de validite Les informations contenues dans cette Information produit s'appliquent aux CPU F suivantes : CPU F S7-1200 * * * * * * CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU F S7-1500 * * * * * * * CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Tous droits reserves A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 * * * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1516proF-2 PN Controleur logiciel S7-1500 F * CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1507S F * CPU 1508S F 15 Champs d'application Les principaux champs d'application des CPU F S7-1200/1500 sont la securite des personnes et des machines ainsi que la commande de bruleurs. Outre le programme de securite, vous pouvez programmer des applications standard. Vous pouvez exploiter les CPU F S7-1200/1500 en mode de securite ou en mode standard. L'installation du logiciel optionnel STEP 7 Safety est requise pour le mode de securite. Si le logiciel optionnel STEP 7 Safety n'est pas installe, vous pouvez utiliser les CPU F S7-1200/1500 en mode standard. En mode standard, les CPU F S71200/1500 ont le meme comportement que les CPU S7-1200/1500 standard. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des CPU F S7-1200/1500 en mode de securite, referez-vous au manuel de programmation et d'utilisation "SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)". Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des CPU F S7-1200 en mode standard, referez-vous au manuel systeme "Systeme d'automatisation S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/fr/view/109478121)". Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des CPU F S7-1500 en mode standard, referez-vous aux manuels des CPU standard S7-1500 et des CPU T standard S7-1500 respectifs sous les liens internet suivants : CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/67295862/133300) CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/fr/22057/man) CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/90466439/133300) CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/fr/ps/13906/man) Controleur logiciel S7-1500 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/109740725) Vous trouverez le firmware actuel de la CPU F concernee en parcourant les telechargements avec le n d'article respectif sur le portail Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Remarque Tenez compte des exigences specifiques a une application, p. ex. l'immunite aux microcoupures pour les blocs d'alimentation. Valeurs PFDavg, PFH pour les CPU F Vous trouverez ci-dessous les valeurs de la probabilite de defaillance (valeurs PFDavg, PFH) pour les CPU F precitees avec un temps de mission de 20 ans et une duree de panne de 100 heures : Fonctionnement en mode demande faible low demand mode selon la norme CEI 61508:2010 : PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand Fonctionnement en mode demande eleve / mode continu high demand/continuous mode selon la norme CEI 61508:2010 : PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 Apercu de la memoire de travail des CPU F, comparaison avec les CPU standard CPU Memoire de travail CPU F Memoire de travail CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 Ko CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 Ko 100 Ko CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 Ko CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 Ko CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly 150 Ko CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1511-1 PN 150 Ko CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 Ko CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 Ko CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 Ko CPU 1513-1 PN 300 Ko CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 Ko CPU 1515-1 PN 500 Ko CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 Ko CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 Ko CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 Ko 16 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 CPU Memoire de travail CPU F Memoire de travail CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mo CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mo CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mo CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mo CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mo CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mo CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mo CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mo CPU 1518-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 4 Mo CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 6 Mo CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 Ko CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 Ko CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 Ko CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 Ko CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mo CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mo CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mo CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mo CPU 1507S 5 Mo CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mo CPU 1508S 10 Mo CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mo Prise en charge de PROFIsafe V2 Les interfaces qui prennent en charge PROFINET IO prennent egalement en charge PROFIsafe V2. Restriction pour les instructions "CREAT_DB" et "DELETE_DB" Les blocs de donnees F ne peuvent etre ni generes ni effaces. Restriction pour les instructions "READ_DBL" et "WRIT_DBL" L'adresse de destination ne peut pas etre celle d'un bloc de donnees F (DB F). Restriction lors de la configuration du comportement remanent des blocs de donnees La configuration de la remanence des blocs de donnees F n'est pas prise en charge. Ainsi, les valeurs effectives des DB F ne sont pas remanentes apres une mise hors tension puis sous tension et un redemarrage (STOP-RUN) de la CPU F. Les DB F prennent les valeurs initiales de la memoire de chargement. La case a cocher "Remanence" est grisee pour toutes les variables dans les DB F. Commande de configuration (gestion des options) sur une CPU F S7-1200 La commande de configuration (gestion des options) sur une CPU F S7-1200 est possible avec des modules centralises avec les restrictions suivantes : Les modules de securite S7-1200 ne doivent pas etre echanges et doivent toujours etre enfiches a l'emplacement qui a ete configure pour eux. Placez les modules de securite S7-1200 directement a cote de la CPU F. Placez les modules standard a droite a cote des modules de securite S7-1200. Marche a suivre pour charger une configuration pour un firmware de version anterieure a la V2.0 pour des CPU F S7-1500 Si vous avez charge une CPU F S7-1500 avec une configuration pour firmware a partir de la version V2.0 avec le niveau de protection "Acces complet, y compris failsafe (pas de protection)" configure et que vous souhaitez charger une configuration pour un firmware de version anterieure a la version V1.8 sur cette CPU F, vous devez tenir compte de ce qui suit : Lors du chargement de la configuration avec un firmware de version anterieure a la version V1.8 sur la CPU F, le mot de passe est demande et detecte comme incorrect. Pour remedier a ce probleme, formatez la carte memoire SIMATIC en suivant la description de l'aide en ligne de STEP 7 sous "Formater une carte memoire S7-1500". Vous pouvez ensuite charger la configuration pour le firmware de version anterieure a la version V1.8 sur la CPU F. CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 17 Utilisation des OB (F) d'alarme d'isochronisme Le nombre d'OB (F) d'alarme d'isochronisme qu'il est possible d'utiliser est fonction de la CPU F mise en oeuvre. Pour plus d'informations a ce sujet, referez-vous aux caracteristiques techniques de la CPU. Si la somme des OB d'alarme d'isochronisme et des OB F d'alarme d'isochronisme depasse le nombre specifie dans les caracteristiques techniques de la CPU, il n'est plus possible de charger le programme utilisateur standard en RUN. Ecran (pour les CPU F S7-1500 avec ecran ou panneau) Les CPU F S7-1500 avec ecran affichent les indications suivantes dans le menu "Vue d'ensemble", sous "De securite" : Mode de securite active/desactive Signature globale Derniere modification de securite La version de STEP 7 Safety avec laquelle le programme de securite a ete compile. Informations sur les groupes d'execution F - Nom du groupe d'execution F - Signature de groupe d'execution F - Temps de cycle actuel - Temps de cycle max. - Temps d'execution actuel - Temps d'execution max. Vous avez les indications suivantes sous "Parametres de securite" pour chaque peripherie de securite : Signature de parametres F (avec adresse) Mode de securite Temps de surveillance F Adresse source F Adresse cible F La commande de menu supplementaire suivante s'affiche dans le menu "Parametres", sous "Protection". Verrouiller/deverrouiller le mot de passe F L'acces en ecriture aux blocs F n'est pas autorise. Remarque La commande d'entrees /sorties de securite entraine l'arret de la CPU F. Remarque Apres un chargement des modifications du programme, le rafraichissement de l'ecran avec la version de firmware V2.5 est retarde de quelques minutes et l'ecran n'est pendant ce temps pas utilisable, puis l'ecran redemarre. 18 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Serveur Web Les CPU F S7-1200/1500 vous fournissent les indications suivantes sur la page d'accueil du serveur Web : Mode de securite active/desactive Signature globale F Derniere modification de securite La version de STEP 7 Safety avec laquelle le programme de securite a ete compile. Informations sur les groupes d'execution F - Nom du groupe d'execution F - Signature de groupe d'execution F - Temps de cycle actuel - Temps de cycle max. - Temps d'execution actuel - Temps d'execution max. L'onglet "Securite en cas de defaut" sur la page Web "Etat du module" vous fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque peripherie de securite : Signature de parametres F (avec adresse) Mode de securite Temps de surveillance F Adresse source F Adresse cible F L'acces en ecriture aux blocs F n'est pas autorise. Remarque La commande d'entrees /sorties de securite entraine l'arret de la CPU F. Les points suivants concernent le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F Le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F est une CPU logicielle de securite qui est utilisee sur les appareils suivants : Controleur logiciel S7-1500 F Appareil CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1507S F * * * * * * IPC 2x7E* IPC 4x7D* IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** CPU 1508S F * * * * IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** * Utilisable seulement lorsqu'une NVRAM est presente (affectation automatique) ** Utilisable seulement avec interface PROFIBUS ou PROFINET et si une NVRAM est presente (affectation automatique) CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 19 Les appareils presentes dans le tableau ci-dessus reagissent de maniere sure lors de l'utilisation du controleur logiciel S7-1500 F et de STEP 7 Safety, y compris en cas d'importantes interferences electromagnetiques. C'est pourquoi des essais de securite speciaux ne sont pas necessaires pour ces appareils. Seule la peripherie de securite doit etre soumise a un examen correspondant. Tenez compte cependant des exigences specifiques d'une application, notamment des normes relatives a la commande de bruleurs concernant la disponibilite. L'etiquette jaune fournie a la livraison et qui porte la marque d'homologation du TUV SUD pour la securite fonctionelle est prevue exclusivement pour l'utilisation de controleurs logiciels S7-1500 F (ne fait pas partie de la livraison en cas de telechargement). Vous pouvez utiliser l'etiquette pour identifier le materiel sur lequel a ete installe le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F. Si vous desinstallez le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F, vous devez retirer l'etiquette. Sauvegarde et restauration La sauvegarde et la restauration de donnees de projet ne sont pas prises en charge. Mots de passe pour les niveaux de protection La station PC ne fait pas la difference entre les deux mots de passe des niveaux de protection "Acces complet, y compris failsafe (pas de protection)" et "Acces complet (pas de protection)". Le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F ne fait pas la difference entre les deux mots de passe des niveaux de protection "Acces complet, y compris failsafe (pas de protection)" et "Acces complet (pas de protection)". Instruction ENDIS_PW Lors de l'utilisation de l'instruction ENDIS_PW sur un IPC, vous pouvez perdre tout acces a votre systeme puisqu'un IPC ne possede pas de selecteur de mode. Pour remedier a ce probleme, vous pouvez suivre ce qui est decrit dans l'aide en ligne a propos de l'instruction ENDIS_PW sous "Eviter le blocage involontaire pour une CPU S7-1200". Pour les stations PC jusqu'a la version V2.0 : Si un blocage involontaire se produit, vous ne pouvez proceder au deblocage qu'en desinstallant et installant le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F. Pour la station PC a partir de la V2.1 : Les membres du groupe d'utilisateurs Windows "Failsafe Operators" peuvent utiliser la fonction "Delete Configuration" pour eviter le blocage. Remarque L'utilisateur Windows "Tout le monde" n'est pas pris en compte s'il appartient au groupe d'utilisateurs Windows "Failsafe Operators". Fonction TPM La fonction TPM ne peut pas etre utilisee pour le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F, sous peine de provoquer un ARRET. Utilisation du EWF ou UWF et du gestionnaire EWF ou UWF Vous ne devez pas selectionner EWF ou UWF et le gestionnaire EWF ou UWF pour le volume de la CPU. Particularites supplementaires ATTENTION Une securite d'acces vous permet de restreindre le droit d'acces au controleur logiciel S7-1500 F a un cercle de personnes qui seront alors les seules a avoir le droit d'installer ou de desinstaller le logiciel du controleur logiciel S7-1500 F. Remarque Dans le cas d'un controleur logiciel S7-1500 F jusqu'a V2.1 comprise, la fonction "Delete Configuration" n'est proposee sur le panneau de commande de la station PC que si aucune protection d'acces n'est configuree sur la CPU F (pas de protection). Dans le cas d'une station PC a partir de V2.2, une verification est effectuee pour determiner si l'utilisateur est membre du groupe d'utilisateurs Windows "Failsafe Operators". Si l'utilisateur Windows est membre du groupe, il peut egalement executer la fonction "Delete Configuration" en ayant entre le mot de passe F. Si l'utilisateur Windows identifie n'est pas membre du groupe, la station PC se comporte comme les versions jusqu'a V2.1. Remarque Si le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F est pourvu d'une protection d'acces, cette derniere n'est pas supprimee avec "Delete Configuration", elle est conservee. 20 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Remarque Version BIOS requise pour la CPU 1505SP F inferieure a V2.5 Pour pouvoir utiliser la CPU 1505SP F, il vous faut au moins la version V2.00_02.01 du BIOS. Remarque L'horloge de la CPU ne doit pas etre modifiee en mode MARCHE, sous peine de provoquer un ARRET. Vous pouvez empecher cela en desactivant la fonction d'economie d'energie. Remarque Affectation d'adresses PROFIsafe a des modules F avec PROFIBUS sur des IPC avec controleur logiciel S7-1500 F de version inferieure a V2.5. Si vous voulez affecter des adresses PROFIsafe a des modules de securite qui fonctionnent avec PROFIBUS sur un IPC avec un controleur logiciel S7-1500 F, attribuez les adresses PROFIsafe aux modules F puis effectuez une mise hors tension puis une mise sous tension de la station PROFIBUS. Remarque Charger le programme de securite ou activer le mode de securite pour le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F de version inferieure a V2.5. Apres avoir charge le programme de securite ou active le mode de securite, fermez le panneau de commande et ouvrez-le de nouveau pour actualiser l'affichage. Remarque Lors de la mise a jour d'un controleur logiciel S7-1500 F version 2.0 a une version > 2.0, la valeur "Derniere modification de securite" est mise sur le dernier evenement d'installation si le programme de securite se trouve deja sur le controleur logiciel S7-1500 F. Remarque La fonctionnalite "Exportation du fichier de configuration" requiert le pack logiciel STEP 7 Safety a partir de la version V15 et la version S7-1500 F Software Controller a partir de V2.5. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG ALLEMAGNE CPU F A5E35635424-AG, A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 11/2018 21 SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 CPU F Informacion del producto Informacion de seguridad Siemens ofrece productos y soluciones con funciones de seguridad industrial con el objetivo de hacer mas seguro el funcionamiento de instalaciones, sistemas, maquinas y redes. Para proteger las instalaciones, los sistemas, las maquinas y las redes de amenazas ciberneticas, es necesario implementar (y mantener continuamente) un concepto de seguridad industrial integral que sea conforme a la tecnologia mas avanzada. Los productos y las soluciones de Siemens constituyen unicamente una parte de este concepto. Los clientes son responsables de impedir el acceso no autorizado a sus instalaciones, sistemas, maquinas y redes. Dichos sistemas, maquinas y componentes solo deben estar conectados a la red corporativa o a Internet cuando y en la medida que sea necesario y siempre que se hayan tomado las medidas de proteccion adecuadas (p. ej. uso de cortafuegos y segmentacion de la red). Para obtener informacion adicional sobre las medidas de seguridad industrial que podrian ser implementadas, por favor visite (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Los productos y las soluciones de Siemens estan sometidos a un desarrollo constante con el fin de mejorar todavia mas su seguridad. Siemens recomienda expresamente realizar actualizaciones en cuanto esten disponibles y utilizar unicamente las ultimas versiones de los productos. El uso de versiones anteriores o que ya no se soportan puede aumentar el riesgo de amenazas ciberneticas. Para mantenerse informado de las actualizaciones de productos, recomendamos que se suscriba al Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed en (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Contenido Introduccion Esta informacion de producto contiene datos importantes sobre las CPU F mencionadas en el apartado "Ambito de validez". La informacion de producto forma parte del producto suministrado. En caso de duda, el contenido de esta informacion del producto prevalece sobre lo indicado en otras fuentes. Ambito de validez El contenido de esta informacion del producto es valido para las CPU F que se indican a continuacion: CPU F S7-1200 * * * * * * 22 CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU F S7-1500 * * * * * * * CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) * * * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1516proF-2 PN Controladores por software S7-1500 F * CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1507S F * CPU 1508S F (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Reservados todos los derechos A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Campos de aplicacion Los principales campos de aplicacion de las CPU F S7-1200/1500 son la proteccion de personas y maquinas asi como el control de quemadores. Ademas del programa de seguridad, tambien se pueden programar aplicaciones estandar. Las CPU F S7-1200/1500 se pueden utilizar en modo de seguridad o en modo estandar. Para el modo de seguridad es necesario que este instalado el paquete opcional STEP 7 Safety. Si no esta instalado el paquete opcional STEP 7 Safety, puede utilizar las CPU F S7-1200/1500 en modo estandar. En el modo estandar, las CPU F S7-1200/1500 se comportan como CPU estandar S7-1200/1500. Encontrara informacion sobre el uso de las CPU F S7-1200/1500 en modo de seguridad en el manual de programacion y de manejo "SIMATIC Safety: Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)" (en ingles). Encontrara informacion sobre el uso de las CPU F S7-1200 en modo estandar en el manual de sistema "Sistema de automatizacion S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/es/view/109478121)". Encontrara informacion sobre el uso de las CPU F S7-1500 en modo estandar en los respectivos manuales de producto de las CPU estandar S7-1500 y CPU T estandar S7-1500, en los enlaces siguientes: CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/67295862/133300) CPU 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/es/ps/22057/man) CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/90466439/133300) CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/es/ps/13906/man) Controladores por software S7-1500 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/109740725) Encontrara el firmware actual para la CPU en cuestion si busca descargas con la referencia correspondiente en el Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Nota Tenga en cuenta los requisitos especificos de la aplicacion, p. ej., en lo que respecta al tiempo de regulacion por perdida de alimentacion en el caso de fuentes de alimentacion o generadores de alta tension. Valores PFDavg, PFH para CPU F A continuacion se ofrecen los valores de probabilidad de fallo (valores PFDavg, PFH) para las CPU antes mencionadas con una vida util de 20 anos y un tiempo de reparacion de 100 horas: Funcionamiento en modo de baja demanda low demand mode segun IEC 61508:2010: PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand Funcionamiento en modo de demanda alta o continua high demand/continuous mode segun IEC 61508:2010: PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 Comparativa de la memoria de trabajo de las CPU F frente a la de las CPU estandar CPU Memoria de trabajo CPU F Memoria de trabajo CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 kbytes CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 kbytes 100 kbytes CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 kbytes CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 kbytes CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly 150 kbytes CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1511-1 PN 150 kbytes CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 kbytes CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 kbytes CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 kbytes CPU 1513-1 PN 300 kbytes CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 kbytes CPU 1515-1 PN 500 kbytes CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 kbytes CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 kbytes CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 kbytes CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 23 CPU Memoria de trabajo CPU F Memoria de trabajo CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mbyte CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbytes CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbytes CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbytes CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mbytes CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mbytes CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mbytes CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mbytes CPU 1518-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 4 Mbytes CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 6 Mbytes CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 kbytes CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 kbytes CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 kbytes CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 kbytes CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mbyte CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mbytes CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mbytes CPU 1507S 5 Mbytes CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mbytes CPU 1508S 10 Mbytes CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mbytes Soporte de PROFIsafe V2 Las interfaces que soportan PROFINET IO tambien soportan PROFIsafe V2. Restriccion con las instrucciones "CREAT_DB" y "DELETE_DB" Los bloques de datos F no se pueden crear ni eliminar. Restriccion con las instrucciones "READ_DBL" y "WRIT_DBL" La direccion de destino no debe apuntar a un bloque de datos F. Restriccion en la configuracion del comportamiento remanente de bloques de datos No se puede configurar la remanencia de bloques de datos F. Esto significa que en caso de Power Off/On y rearranque (STOP-RUN) de la CPU F, los valores actuales de los bloques de datos F no son remanentes. Los bloques de datos F contienen los valores iniciales de la memoria de carga. La casilla de verificacion "Remanencia" de los bloques de datos F se visualiza en gris para todas las variables. Control de configuracion (configuracion futura) en una CPU F S7-1200 El control de configuracion (configuracion futura) en una CPU F S7-1200 se puede realizar con modulos centrales con la siguiente restriccion: Los modulos de seguridad S7-1200 no puede cambiarse y deben estar siempre fisicamente enchufados en el slot que tienen configurado. Coloque los modulos de seguridad S7-1200 directamente junto a la CPU F. Coloque los modulos estandar a la derecha de los modulos de seguridad S7-1200. Procedimiento para cargar una configuracion para firmware < V2.0 en CPU F S7-1500 Si ha cargado en una CPU F S7-1500 una configuracion para el firmware V2.0 o sup. con el nivel de proteccion configurado "Acceso completo incl. de seguridad (sin proteccion)" y ahora quiere cargar una configuracion para firmware <= V1.8 en esta CPU F, debera tener en cuenta lo siguiente: Cuando se carga la configuracion con firmware <= V1.8 en la CPU F la contrasena se consulta y se reconoce como no valida. Para solucionarlo, formatee la SIMATIC Memory Card como se describe en la ayuda en pantalla de STEP 7, en "Formatear una S7-1500 Memory Card". A continuacion puede cargar la configuracion para firmware <= V1.8 en la CPU F. Uso de OB (de seguridad) de alarma de sincronismo El numero de OB (de seguridad) de sincronismo depende de la CPU de seguridad utilizada. Encontrara informacion al respecto en los datos tecnicos de la CPU. Si la suma de los OB de sincronismo y del OB F de sincronismo excede el numero indicado en los datos tecnicos de la CPU, ya no sera posible cargar el programa de usuario estandar en RUN. 24 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Display (en CPU F S7-1500 con display o panel) Las CPU F S7-1500 con display muestran lo siguiente en el menu "Vista general", bajo "Seguridad": Modo de seguridad activado/desactivado Firma general F Ultima modificacion de seguridad La version de STEP 7 Safety con la que se ha compilado el programa de seguridad. Informacion sobre los grupos de ejecucion F - Nombre del grupo de ejecucion F - Firma del grupo de ejecucion F - Tiempo de ciclo actual - Tiempo de ciclo max. - Tiempo de ejecucion actual - Tiempo de ejecucion max. Para cada periferia F, en "Parametros de seguridad" se muestra lo siguiente: Firma de parametros F (con direccion) Modo de seguridad Tiempo de vigilancia F Direccion de origen F Direccion de destino F En el menu "Ajustes", dentro de "Proteccion", se muestra la siguiente opcion de menu adicional: Habilitar/bloquear contrasena F No esta permitido el acceso de escritura a los bloques F. Nota El control de entradas y salidas de seguridad puede producir un STOP de la CPU F. Nota Con el firmware V2.5 del display, tras cargar los cambios en el programa no se actualiza durante algunos pocos minutos el display y no puede manejarse, seguidamente se reinicia el display. CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 25 Servidor web Las CPU S7-1200/1500 muestran lo siguiente en la pagina de inicio del servidor web: Modo de seguridad activado/desactivado Firma general F Ultima modificacion de seguridad La version de STEP 7 Safety con la que se ha compilado el programa de seguridad. Informacion sobre los grupos de ejecucion F - Nombre del grupo de ejecucion F - Firma del grupo de ejecucion F - Tiempo de ciclo actual - Tiempo de ciclo max. - Tiempo de ejecucion actual - Tiempo de ejecucion max. Para cada periferia F, la pagina web "Informacion del modulo" muestra lo siguiente en la pestana "Fail-safe": Firma de parametros F (con direccion) Modo de seguridad Tiempo de vigilancia F Direccion de origen F Direccion de destino F No esta permitido el acceso de escritura a los bloques F. Nota El control de entradas y salidas de seguridad puede producir un STOP de la CPU F. Los puntos siguientes afectan al controlador por software S7-1500 F El controlador por software S7-1500 F Software Controller es una CPU por software de seguridad que se utiliza en los siguientes equipos: Controladores por software S7-1500 F Equipo CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1507S F * * * * * * IPC 2x7E* IPC 4x7D* IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** CPU 1508S F * * * * IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** * Posible solo si se dispone de NVRAM (se asigna de forma automatica) ** Solo puede utilizarse con interfaz PROFINET y PROFIBUS y, si hay NVRAM (se asigna de forma automatica) 26 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Los equipos indicados en la tabla anterior reaccionan de forma segura cuando se utiliza el controlador por software S7-1500 F Software Controller y STEP 7 Safety incluso bajo fuertes perturbaciones electromagneticas. Asi pues, para estos equipos no son necesarios ensayos de tipo especiales por lo que respecta a la seguridad funcional, a diferencia de lo que ocurre con la periferia F. Sin embargo, en lo que se refiere a la disponibilidad de los requisitos especificos de las aplicaciones deben tenerse en cuenta especialmente las normas sobre control de quemadores. La etiqueta adhesiva amarilla con el sello TUV SUD de seguridad funcional que se incluye en el paquete de suministro esta prevista exclusivamente para el uso con los controladores por software S7-1500 F (no se incluye en la version de descarga). Puede emplear la etiqueta para marcar el hardware en el que se ha instalado el controlador por software S7-1500 F. Si desinstala el controlador por software S7-1500 F Software Controller, debera retirar la etiqueta. Copia de seguridad y restauracion No se soporta la copia de seguridad y restauracion de datos de proyecto. Contrasenas para niveles de proteccion La estacion PC no hace distincion entre las dos contrasenas de los niveles de proteccion "Acceso completo incl. de seguridad (sin proteccion)" y "Acceso completo (sin proteccion)". El controlador por software S7-1500 F si hace distincion entre las dos contrasenas de los niveles de proteccion "Acceso completo incl. de seguridad (sin proteccion)" y "Acceso completo (sin proteccion)". Instruccion ENDIS_PW En caso de utilizar la instruccion ENDIS_PW en un IPC puede verse bloqueado por parte del sistema porque un IPC no dispone de selector de modo. Para solucionarlo puede proceder de forma analoga a como se indica en el apartado "Impedir el bloqueo no intencionado en una CPU S7-1200" de la ayuda en pantalla para la instruccion ENDIS_PW. Para las estaciones de PC hasta la version V2.0 vale lo siguiente: Si se ha producido un bloqueo no intencionado, solo puede anular el bloqueo desinstalando e instalando de nuevo el controlador por software S7-1500 F. Para la estacion de PC a partir de la version V2.1 vale lo siguiente: Los miembros del grupo de usuarios de Windows "Failsafe Operators" pueden omitir el bloqueo con la funcion "Delete Configuration". Nota El usuario de Windows "Cualquiera" no se tiene en cuanta si forma parte del grupo de usuarios de Windows "Failsafe Operators". Funcionalidad TPM La funcionalidad TPM no puede utilizarse para el controlador por software S7-1500 F porque podria dar lugar a un STOP. Uso de EWF o UWF y el EWF o UWF-Manager No esta permitido seleccionar el EWF o UWF y el EWF o UWF Manager para el volumen de la CPU. Otras particularidades ADVERTENCIA Debe utilizar una proteccion de acceso para limitar el acceso al controlador por software S7-1500 F a aquellas personas autorizadas para instalar o desinstalar el software del controlador por software S7-1500 F. Nota En un controlador por software S7-1500 F con una estacion PC hasta la version V2.1, la funcion "Delete Configuration" solo estara disponible en el panel de la estacion PC si en la CPU F no se ha configurado ninguna proteccion de acceso (sin proteccion). En una estacion PC a partir de la version V2.2 se comprueba si el usuario de Windows es miembro del grupo de usuarios de Windows "Failsafe Operators". Si el usuario de Windows registrado es miembro del grupo, puede ejecutar la funcion "Delete Configuration" incluso si se ha definido la contrasena F. Si el usuario de Windows que ha iniciado sesion no es miembro del grupo, la estacion PC se comportara como hasta la version V2.1. Nota Si el controlador por software S7-1500 F dispone de proteccion de acceso, esta no se borra con "Delete Configuration", sino que se mantiene. CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 27 Nota Version necesaria de la BIOS para CPU 1505SP F anterior a la version V2.5 Para el uso de la CPU 1505SP F se necesita la version BIOS V2.00_02.01 o superior. Nota El ciclo de la CPU no se puede modificar en RUN, ya que provocaria un STOP. Puede evitarlo desactivando la funcion de ahorro de energia. Nota Asignacion de las direcciones PROFIsafe para modulos F conectados a PROFIBUS en IPC con controladores por software S7-1500 F anteriores a la version V2.5 Si desea asignar direcciones PROFIsafe a modulos F conectados mediante PROFIBUS a un IPC con un controlador por software S7-1500 F, asigne las direcciones PROFIsafe a los modulos F y a continuacion realice un Power Off/On de la estacion PROFIBUS. Nota Cargar el programa de seguridad o activar el modo de seguridad para controladores por software S7-1500 F anteriores a la version V2.5 Despues de cargar el programa de seguridad o de activar el modo de seguridad, cierre el panel y abralo de nuevo para que se actualice la imagen en el panel. Nota Si en S7-1500 F Software Controller con version 2.0 se actualiza a una version > 2.0 y este controlador ya contiene un programa de seguridad, el valor "Ultima modificacion de seguridad" se ajustara a la hora de la instalacion. Nota La funcionalidad "Archivo de configuracion exportacion" requiere el paquete opcional STEP 7 Safety a partir de la version V15 y un controlador por software S7-1500 F a partir de la version V2.5. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG ALEMANIA CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 28 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 CPU F Informazioni sul prodotto Indicazioni di sicurezza Siemens commercializza prodotti e soluzioni dotati di funzioni Industrial Security che contribuiscono al funzionamento sicuro di impianti, soluzioni, macchine e reti. La protezione di impianti, sistemi, macchine e reti da minacce cibernetiche, richiede l'implementazione e la gestione continua di un concetto globale di Industrial Security che corrisponda allo stato attuale della tecnica. I prodotti e le soluzioni Siemens costituiscono parte integrante di questo concetto. E' responsabilita dei clienti prevenire accessi non autorizzati ai propri impianti, sistemi, macchine e reti. Tali sistemi, macchine e componenti dovrebbero essere connessi unicamente a una rete aziendale o a internet se e nella misura in cui detta connessione sia necessaria e solo quando siano attive appropriate misure di sicurezza (ad es. firewall e segmentazione della rete). Per ulteriori informazioni relative a misure di Industrial Security implementabili potete visitare il sito (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). I prodotti e le soluzioni Siemens vengono costantemente perfezionati per incrementarne la sicurezza. Siemens raccomanda espressamente che gli aggiornamenti dei prodotti siano effettuati non appena disponibili e che siano utilizzate le versioni piu aggiornate. L'utilizzo di versioni di prodotti non piu supportate ed il mancato aggiornamento degli stessi incrementa il rischio di attacchi cibernetici. Per essere informati sugli update dei prodotti, potete iscrivervi a Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed al sito (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Contenuto Introduzione Le presenti Informazioni sul prodotto contengono importanti avvertenze sulle CPU F trattate al paragrafo Ambito di validita. Le informazioni sul prodotto sono parte integrante del prodotto oggetto della fornitura e hanno, in caso di dubbio, priorita su qualsiasi altra affermazione. Ambito di validita Le affermazioni contenute nella presente informazioni sul prodotto hanno validita per le CPU F elencate nel seguito: CPU F S7-1200 * * * * * * CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU F S7-1500 * * * * * * * CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Tutti i diritti riservati A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 * * * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1516proF-2 PN S7-1500 F Software Controller * CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1507S F * CPU 1508S F 29 Campi di impiego I principali campi di impiego delle CPU F S7-1200/1500 consistono nella protezione del personale e delle macchine nonche nel comando di bruciatori. Oltre al programma di sicurezza si possono programmare anche applicazioni standard. Le CPU F S7-1200/1500 possono essere impiegate sia nel funzionamento di sicurezza, sia nel funzionamento standard. Per il funzionamento di sicurezza e richiesta l'installazione del pacchetto opzionale STEP 7 Safety . In assenza del pacchetto opzionale STEP 7 Safety installato, le CPU F S7-1200/1500 possono essere impiegate nel funzionamento standard. Nel funzionamento standard le CPU F S7-1200/1500 si comportano come le CPU S7-1200/1500. Informazioni sull'impiego delle CPU F S7-1200/1500 nel funzionamento di sicurezza sono reperibili nel Manuale di programmazione e d'uso SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) Informazioni sull'impiego delle CPU F S7-1200 nel funzionamento standard sono reperibili nel Manuale di sistema "Sistema di automazione S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/it/view/109478121)". Informazioni sull'impiego delle CPU F S7-1500 nel funzionamento standard sono reperibili nei rispettivi manuali del prodotto delle CPU standard S7-1500 e delle T-CPU standard S7-1500 accessibili dai seguenti link: CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/it/67295862/133300) CPU 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/it/ps/22057/man) CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/90466439/133300) CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/it/ps/13906/man) S7-1500 Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/it/109740725) La ricerca dei firmware aggiornati, disponibili per il download, delle rispettive CPU F, avviene alla sezione Industy Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com) indicando il numero dell'articolo interessato. Nota Osservare i requisiti specifici dell'applicazione per quanto concerne ad es. il superamento di cadute di rete negli alimentatori o nelle apparecchiature di rete. Valori PFDavg e PFH nelle CPU F Nel seguito sono riportati i valori inerenti le probabilita di guasto (valori PFDavg e PFH) per le CPU F sopra indicate, riferiti ad una durata di utilizzo ventennale e a interventi di riparazione pari a 100 ore: Funzionamento a bassa richiesta della funzione di sicurezza low demand mode ai sensi della Norma IEC 61508:2010: PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand Funzionamento ad alta richiesta o modalita continua high demand/continuous mode ai sensi della Norma IEC 61508:2010: PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 Confronto della memoria di lavoro delle CPU F rispetto alle CPU standard. CPU Memoria di lavoro CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 kbyte CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 Kbyte CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly 125 Kbyte CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1511-1 PN Memoria di lavoro CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC CPU F CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 kbyte CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly 150 kbyte CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1513-1 PN 300 kbyte CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 kbyte CPU 1515-1 PN 500 kbyte CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 kbyte 30 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 CPU Memoria di lavoro CPU F Memoria di lavoro CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mbyte CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mbyte CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1518-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 4 Mbyte CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 6 Mbyte CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 kbyte CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 kbyte CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 kbyte CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 kbyte CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mbyte CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1507S 5 Mbyte CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mbyte CPU 1508S 10 Mbyte CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mbyte Supporto di PROFIsafe V2 Le interfacce che supportano PROFINET IO supportano anche PROFIsafe V2. Limitazione per le istruzioni "CREAT_DB" e "DELETE_DB" I DB F non possono essere creati ne cancellati. Limitazione per le istruzioni "READ_DBL" e "WRIT_DBL" L'indirizzo di destinazione non puo puntare a un DB F. Limitazione per la progettazione del comportamento di ritenzione dei blocchi dati La progettazione della ritenzione dei blocchi dati non e supportata per i DB F. In altri termini, in caso di RETE OFF/ON e nuovo avvio (STOP-RUN) della CPU F, i valori attuali dei DB F non sono a ritenzione. I DB F ricevono i valori iniziali dalla memoria di caricamento. Nei DB F la casella di controllo "Ritenzione" e grigia per tutte le variabili. Controllo di configurazione (ampliamenti futuri) in una CPU F S7-1200 Il controllo di configurazione (ampliamenti futuri) nelle CPU F S7-1200 con moduli centrali puo essere effettuato con le seguenti limitazioni: I moduli fail safe S7-1200 non devono essere scambiati e devono essere sempre fisicamente inseriti nel posto connettore appositamente previsto. Collocare i moduli fail safe S7-1200 direttamente a fianco della CPU F. Collocare i moduli standard a destra accanto ai moduli fail safe S7-1200. Procedura di caricamento delle progettazione del firmare < V2.0 per le CPU F S7-1500 Se una CPU F S7-1500 e stata caricata con una progettazione per firmware a partire da V2.0, con livello di protezione "Accesso completo incl. fail safe (senza protezione)", e successivamente, nella stessa CPU, si intende caricare una nuova progettazione per firmware <= V1.8, osservare quanto segue: La password richiesta ed inserita al momento del caricamento della progettazione con firmware <= V1.8, nella CPU F, viene segnalata come non valida. Per ovviare a quest'inconveniente formattare la SIMATIC Memory Card come descritto nella Guida in linea a STEP 7, alla sezione "Formattazione di una S7-1500-Memory Card". In seguito e possibile caricare la progettazione per il firmware <= V1.8 nella CPU F. CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 31 Impiego di OB (F): Allarme di sincronismo di clock Il numero degli OB (F) utilizzabili dipende dalla CPU F impiegata. Per informazioni sull'argomento consultare i dati tecnici della CPU. Se la somma degli OB di allarme di sincronismo di clock e degli OB F di allarme di sincronismo di clock supera il numero indicato nei dati tecnici della CPU, non sara piu possibile caricare in RUN il programma utente standard. Display (nelle CPU F S7-1500 con display o pannello operatore) Nel menu "Sommario" delle CPU F S7-1500 con display, alla voce "Fail safe", viene visualizzato quanto segue: Funzionamento di sicurezza attivato/disattivato Codice generale F Ultima modifica fail-safe La versione con STEP 7 Safety, con la quale e stato compilato il programma di sicurezza. Informazioni sui gruppo di esecuzione F - Nome del gruppo di esecuzione F - Firma dei gruppi di esecuzione F - Tempo di ciclo attuale - Tempo di ciclo max. - Tempo di esecuzione attuale - Tempo di esecuzione max. Alla voce "Parametri fail-safe" viene visualizzato quanto segue per ogni periferia F: Codice parametri F (con indirizzo) Funzionamento di sicurezza Tempo di controllo F Indirizzo di origine F Indirizzo di destinazione F Inoltre, nel menu "Impostazioni", alla voce "Protezione", viene visualizzata la seguente voce di menu: Abilita/inibisci password F L'accesso in scrittura ai blocchi F non e consentito. Nota Il comando di ingressi e uscite fail-safe puo causare uno STOP della CPU F. Nota Con il firmare del display V2.5, dopo il caricamento delle modifiche del programma il display non viene aggiornato per alcuni minuti e non puo essere utilizzato. Successivamente viene riavviato. 32 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Server web Sulla pagina iniziale del server web delle CPU F S7-1200/1500 e visualizzato quanto segue: Funzionamento di sicurezza attivato/disattivato Codice generale F Ultima modifica fail-safe La versione con STEP 7 Safety, con la quale e stato compilato il programma di sicurezza. Informazioni sui gruppo di esecuzione F - Nome del gruppo di esecuzione F - Firma dei gruppi di esecuzione F - Tempo di ciclo attuale - Tempo di ciclo max. - Tempo di esecuzione attuale - Tempo di esecuzione max. Sulla pagina web "Stato dell'unita", nella scheda "Fail safe", per ogni periferia F viene visualizzato quanto segue: Codice parametri F (con indirizzo) Funzionamento di sicurezza Tempo di controllo F Indirizzo di origine F Indirizzo di destinazione F L'accesso in scrittura ai blocchi F non e consentito. Nota Il comando di ingressi e uscite fail-safe puo causare uno STOP della CPU F. I punti elencati nel seguito interessano l'S7-1500 F Software Controller L'S7-1500 F Software Controller e una CPU software fail safe che trova impiego nei seguenti dispositivi: S7-1500 F Software Controller Dispositivo CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1507S F * * * * * * IPC 2x7E* IPC 4x7D* IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** CPU 1508S F * * * * IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** * Impiegabile soltanto con disponibilita NVRAM (assegnazione automatica) * Impiegabile soltanto con interfaccia PROFIBUS o PROFINET e con disponibilita NVRAM (assegnazione automatica) CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 33 Con l'impiego dell'S7-1500 F Software Controller e di STEP 7 Safety, i dispositivi elencati nella tabella in alto mantengono il comportamento fail safe anche in presenza di elevati disturbi elettromagnetici. Controlli specifici del tipo relativi alla sicurezza funzionale, quali quelli eseguiti nella periferia F, si rendono superflui per questi dispositivi. Per quanto concerne la disponibilita, tenere presente i requisiti specifici dell'applicazione, in particolare le norme sul controllo dei bruciatori. L'adesivo giallo in dotazione con la fornitura, con il marchio di controllo TUV SUD della sicurezza funzionale, e destinato esclusivamente all'S7-1500 F Software Controller (non contenuto nella fornitura della versione di download). L'adesivo puo essere utilizzato per l'identificazione dell'hardware sul quale e stato installato l'S7-1500 F Software Controller. In caso di disinstallazione dell'S7-1500 F Software Controller, l'adesivo deve essere rimosso. Backup e ripristino Il backup e il ripristino dei dati del progetto non vengono supportati. Password per i livelli di protezione La stazione PC opera una distinzione tra le password dei due livelli di protezione "Accesso completo incl. fail safe (senza protezione)" e "Accesso completo (senza protezione)". L'S7-1500 F Software Controller opera una distinzione tra le password dei due livelli di protezione "Accesso completo incl. fail safe (senza protezione)" e "Accesso completo (senza protezione)". Istruzione ENDIS_PW Con l'impiego dell'istruzione ENDIS_PW sull'IPC, sussiste il rischio di bloccare il proprio accesso al sistema in quando l'IPC non e provvisto di selettore dei modi operativi. Per evitare quest'inconveniente, procedere come indicato nella Guida in linea all'istruzione ENDIS_PW, alla sezione "Prevenzione del blocco indesiderato nelle CPU S7-1200". Per stazioni PC fino alla versione V2.0 compresa, vale: La rimozione di un eventuale blocco accidentale che si sia verificato, e possibile soltanto disinstallando e reinstallando l'S7-1500 F Software Controller. Per la stazione PC a partire dalla V2.1 vale: I membri del gruppo utenti di Windows "Failsafe Operators" possono fare uso della funzione "Delete Configuration" ed evitare il blocco. Nota L'utente di Windows "Everyone" non viene considerato se fa parte del gruppo utenti di Windows "Failsafe Operators". Funzionalita TPM L'uso della a funzionalita TPM non e consentito per l'S7-1500 F Software Controller in quanto puo causare uno STOP. Utilizzo di EWF o UWF ed EWF o Manager UWF L'EWF o UWF e il Manager EWF o UWF non possono essere selezionati per il volume della CPU. Ulteriori particolarita AVVERTENZA L'accesso all'S7-1500 F Software Controller deve essere riservato, tramite protezione di accesso, esclusivamente al personale autorizzato all'installazione e alla disinstallazione del relativo software. Nota La funzione "Delete Configuration" viene visualizzata sul pannello della stazione PC dell'S7-1500 F Software Controller con una stazione PC con versione V2.1 compresa soltanto se nella CPU F non e stata configurata una protezione di accesso (senza protezione). Nella stazione PC con versione V2.2 o successiva viene controllato se l'utente Windows e membro del gruppo di utenti Windows "Failsafe Operators". Se l'utente Windows che ha effettuato il login e membro del gruppo, e autorizzato a eseguire la funzione "Delete Configuration" anche se e impostata la password F. Se l'utente Windows non e membro del gruppo la stazione PC si comporta come prima della versione V2.1. Nota Se l'S7-1500 F Software Controller e protetto in accesso, non e eliminabile con la funzione "Delete Configuration" e viene mantenuto. Nota Versioni del BIOS richieste per la CPU 1505SP F inferiori alla V2.5 L'impiego della CPU 1505SP F presuppone la disponibilita della versione V2.00_02.01 o superiore del BIOS. 34 CPU F A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 Nota Il clock della CPU non deve subire variazioni durante il funzionamento in RUN in quanto cio potrebbe causare uno STOP. Per prevenire questo comportamento, disattivare la funzione di risparmio energetico. Nota Assegnazione degli indirizzi PROFIsafe ai moduli F sul PROFIBUS negli IPC con software controller S7-1500 F inferiori alla V2.5 Dopo l'assegnazione di indirizzi PROFIsafe ai moduli F operanti, tramite PROFIBUS, su un IPC con un S7-1500 F Software Controller, eseguire un Rete off/Rete on della stazione PROFIBUS. Nota Caricamento del programma di sicurezza e/o attivazione del funzionamento di sicurezza per software controller S7-1500 F inferiori alla V2.5 Chiudere e riaprire il pannello operatore dopo il caricamento del programma di sicurezza risp. dopo l'attivazione del funzionamento di sicurezza per aggiornare la visualizzazione del pannello. Nota Se l'S7-1500 F Software Controller con versione 2.0 viene aggiornato alla versione > 2.0 e contiene gia un programma di sicurezza, il valore di "Ultima modifica fail safe" viene resettato e impostato sul valore valido al momento dell'installazione. Nota La funzionalita "Esporta file di configurazione" richiede il pacchetto opzionale STEP 7 Safety a partire dalla versione V15 e un software controller S7-1500 F dalla versione V2.5. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANIA CPU F A5E35635424-AG, A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 11/2018 35 SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPU Siemens Siemens / Internet (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Siemens RSS (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) "" F-CPU F-CPU S7-1200 F-CPU * * * * * * 36 CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly S7-1500 F-CPU * * * * * * * CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) * * * CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1516proF-2 PN S7-1500 F * CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1507S F * CPU 1508S F (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 S7-1200/1500 F-CPU S7-1200/1500 F-CPU STEP 7 Safety STEP 7 Safety S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPU S7-1200/1500 F-CPU S7-1200/1500 CPU S7-1200/1500 F-CPU SIMATIC - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) S7-1200 F-CPU S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/cn/view/109478121) S7-1500 F-CPU S7-1500 T-CPU S7-1500 CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/zh/67295862/133300) CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/zh/ps/22057/man) CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/zh/90466439/133300) CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/zh/ps/13906/man) S7-1500 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/zh/109740725) " (https://support.industry.siemens.com)" F-CPU / F-CPU PFDavg PFH 20 MTTR 100 F-CPU PFDavg PFH low demand mode IEC 61508:2010 PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand high demand/continuous mode IEC 61508:2010 PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 F-CPU CPU CPU F-CPU CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 KB CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 KB CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly 100 KB CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 KB CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 KB CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly 150 KB CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly CPU 1511-1 PN 150 KB CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1513-1 PN 300 KB CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 KB CPU 1515-1 PN 500 KB CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 MB CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 MB CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 MB F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 37 CPU F-CPU CPU 1518-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 4 MB CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP (MFP/ODK) 6 MB CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 KB CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 KB CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 KB CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 KB CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 MB CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1.5 MB CPU 1505SP (T) 1 MB CPU 1505SP (T)F 1.5 MB CPU 1507S 5 MB CPU 1507S F 7.5 MB CPU 1508S 10 MB CPU 1508S F 12.5 MB PROFIsafe V2 PROFINET IO PROFIsafe V2 "CREAT_DB""DELETE_DB" F-DB "READ_DBL""WRIT_DBL" F-DB F-DB F-CPU / (STOP-RUN) F-DB F-DB F-DB ""(Retain) S7-1200 F-CPU S7-1200 F-CPU S7-1200 S7-1200 F-CPU S7-1200 S7-1500 F-CPU V2.0 S7-1500 F-CPU V2.0 ""(Full access with fail-safe (no protection)) F-CPU V1.8 V1.8 F-CPU STEP 7 " S7-1500 " SIMATIC F-CPU V1.8 (F-)OB (F-)OB F-CPU CPU OB F-OB CPU RUN 38 F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 S7-1500 F-CPU ""(Overview) ""(Fail-safe) S7-1500 F-CPU / (Safety mode activated/deactivated) F (Collective F-signature) (Last fail-safe change) STEP 7 Safety F - F (Name of F-runtime group) - F - (Max. cycle time) - (Max. cycle time) - (Current runtime) - (Max. runtime) ""(Fail-safe parameters) F-I/O F (F-parameter signature (with addresses)) (Safety mode) F (F-monitoring time) F (F-source address) F (F-destination address) ""(Settings) ""(Protection) / F (Enable/disable F-password) F / F-CPU STOP V2.5 F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 39 Web Web S7-1200/1500 F-CPU / (Safety mode activated/deactivated) F (Collective F-signature) (Last fail-safe change) STEP 7 Safety F - F (Name of F-runtime group) - F - (Max. cycle time) - (Max. cycle time) - (Current runtime) - (Max. runtime) ""(Module information) Web ""(Fail-safe) F-I/O F (F-parameter signature (with addresses)) (Safety mode) F (F-monitoring time) F (F-source address) F (F-destination address) F / F-CPU STOP S7-1500 F S7-1500 F CPU S7-1500 F CPU 1505SP (T)F * CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1507S F * * * * * * IPC 2x7E* IPC 4x7D* IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** CPU 1508S F * * * * IPC 4x7E* IPC 627D** IPC 677D** IPC 827D** * NVRAM ** NVRAM PROFIBUS PROFINET 40 F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 S7-1500 F STEP 7 Safety - F I/O TUV SUD S7-1500 F S7-1500 F S7-1500 F PC """"S7-1500 F """" ENDIS_PW IPC ENDIS_PW IPC " S7-1200 CPU " ENDIS_PW V2.0 PC S7-1500 F V2.1 PC Windows""""(Delete Configuration) Windows "Everyone""Failsafe Operators"Windows TPM TPM S7-1500 F STOP EWF UWF EWF UWF EWF UWF EWF UWF CPU S7-1500 F S7-1500 F PC V2.1 S7-1500 F F-CPU PC ""(Delete Configuration) PC V2.2 Windows Windows ""(Failsafe Operators) Windows F ""(Delete Configuration) Windows PC V2.1 S7-1500 F "" CPU 1505SP F V2.5 BIOS CPU 1505SP F BIOS V2.00_02.01 RUN CPU STOP S7-1500 F V2.5 IPC PROFIBUS F PROFIsafe S7-1500 F IPC PROFIBUS F PROFIsafe PROFIsafe F PROFIBUS F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 41 S7-1500 F V2.5 S7-1500 F V2.0 V2.0 S7-1500 F ""(Last fail-safe change) ""(Configuration file export) STEP 7 Safety V15 S7-1500 F V2.5 Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 42 F-CPU A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting ___________________ 4 Parameters/address space 5 ___________ Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ___________________ 6 Compatibility 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Dimension drawing 10/2018 A5E03916550-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03916550-AD 10/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 4 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 3 4 5 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................14 Functions ................................................................................................................................14 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................16 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 17 3.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................17 3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................19 3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................20 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 21 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................21 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................22 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................22 Startup when expected/actual config differ .............................................................................23 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................23 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................23 Insert/remove module interrupt ...............................................................................................23 4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................24 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 25 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................25 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29 Introduction .............................................................................................................................29 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP ..........................................................................................38 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt .......................................................................................38 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................38 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt .........................................................................38 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................39 Slave diagnostics ....................................................................................................................40 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................41 Master PROFIBUS address ....................................................................................................42 Identifier-related diagnostics ...................................................................................................43 Module status ..........................................................................................................................44 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................45 H status ...................................................................................................................................46 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP ...........................................47 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D ..........................................................................48 Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 5 Table of contents 6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 49 6.1 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 52 7.1 A Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 49 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 52 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 55 Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 6 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 7 Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 8 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 9 Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 10 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 contains the following components: Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BU01-0CN0) Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0) View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the 155-6 DP HF interface module with supplied accessories Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 12 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP Power supply 1 L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) Bus connection via RS485 interface The module supports the following functions (Page 14): Maximum configuration 244 bytes I/O data 32 I/O modules and 16 ET 200AL modules Accessories You order the following accessories separately: Labeling strips Reference identification label You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Server module The server module is included in the product package of the interface module and available separately as an accessory. The server module has the following properties: Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm) Provides station functions, e.g., status bytes Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Note You need to configure the server module in the configuration software. To do so, place the server module with the required length of status bytes at the last slot of the configuration. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server module is inserted at slot 33. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 13 Product overview 2.2 Functions PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector The PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector is included in the product package of the interface module and also available separately as an accessory. You can find additional information on the PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector in the corresponding product information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58648998). Configuration with more than 244 bytes of parameter data With a configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP 3 with HSP 242, you have the option of operating the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module as of 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 in DPV1 mode with more than 244 bytes of parameter data. Configuration with the GSD file does not offer this option. Reference You can find additional information on identification data in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 Functions Introduction The interface module supports the following functions: Identification data I&M 0 to 3 PROFIBUS DP Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP Configuration control by means of the user program Operation as DPV1 slave Operation after Y-link (not with F-modules) Station extension via ET-Connection F-direct data exchange Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 14 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Product overview 2.2 Functions Requirements The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Operation after Y-link (not with F-modules) Product version Firmware version of the module of the module as as of of 1 V1.1.0 Configuration software Configuration with GSD file (http://support.a utomation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/ 19698639/1300 00) / software from a thirdparty manufacturer1 STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP3 with HSP0242 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 X - - Hot-swapping 1 V1.0.0 X X X Station extension via ETConnection 1 V3.0.0 X X (as of HSP0242 V2) - F-direct data exchange 1 V3.1.0 - X (as of HSP0242 V3) - Interface module; article number: 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 1 V4.2 - X2 X (as of V15.1) 1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system 2 Configure the module as version 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 FW V3.1 (as of HSP0242 V3) Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Configuration control Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions or options. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner by means of the user program. Reference You can find more information on configuration control in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual on the Internet under the following link: Application collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270) in the STEP 7 online help. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 16 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 3 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment 24 V DC supply voltage The table below shows the signal names and descriptions of the pin assignment of the 24 V DC supply voltage. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage View Connector Signal name1) Description IM connection 1L+ 24 V DC 2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2 1M Ground 2M Ground (for looping through)2 1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are internally bridged. 2 Maximum 10 A permitted. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 17 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface The following table shows the signal names and descriptions of the terminal assignment of the PROFIBUS DP interface. Table 3- 2 Terminal assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface View Signal name Description 1 - - 2 - - 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B 4 RTS Request To Send 5 M5V2 DP data reference potential (from station) 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station) 7 - - 8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A 9 - - Reference You can find additional information on connecting the interface module and on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 18 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Connecting 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram The following figure show the block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module. ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics L+ 24 V DC supply voltage Backplane bus M Ground Internal power supply RN RUN/STOP LED (green) X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red) PB PROFIBUS interface MT MAINT LED (yellow) PWR POWER LED (green) DP PROFIBUS DP LED (green) Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 19 Connecting 3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address Introduction On the interface module (PROFIBUS), set the PROFIBUS DP address for PROFIBUS DP using the DIP switch. By setting the PROFIBUS DP address, you specify where the ET 200SP is to be addressed on the PROFIBUS DP. Requirements Each PROFIBUS DP address may be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP. Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125. The set PROFIBUS DP address must match the PROFIBUS DP address specified for the ET 200SP in the configuration software. Required tools Screwdriver 3 - 3.5 mm Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 1. Slide the window of the interface module upwards. 2. Use a screwdriver to set the required PROFIBUS address via the DIP switch. 3. Close the window. Figure 3-2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address Changing the PROFIBUS DP address You can change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change in the PROFIBUS DP address only becomes valid for the ET 200SP after a POWER ON of the interface module. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 20 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module. Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (GSD file) Parameters Value range Configuration control Default3 Effective range Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP Startup when preset/actual configuration differ Yes/No No ET 200SP Diagnostics interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP Hardware interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP Yes/No No ET 200SP Pull/plug module 1 interrupt2 1 Note that the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter is always activated when you use configuration control. 2 The "Pull/plug" parameter is always activated in the GSD file. 3 The defaults apply to the default startup. If no other parameters are specified by the DP master, the IM 155-6 DP HF starts up with these parameters. Note Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file, does not affect configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: Not all parameters of an I/O module are provided by the GSD file with GSD configuration, because the PROFIBUS standard limits the number of parameters to 244 bytes per ET 200SP. These parameters can be configured later using data record 128, if necessary. The description is available in the respective manual of the employed I/O module. Note PROFIBUS GSD configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP3 The universal module must not be configured. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Description of parameters 4.2 Description of parameters 4.2.1 Configuration control You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Note Configuration control The "Configuration control" function can only be used if you set the parameter "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" to yes at the same time. Note Configuring the enable If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires control data record 196 from the user program so that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system can operate the I/O modules. Reference You can find additional information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the STEP 7 online help. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 22 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Parameters/address space 4.2 Description of parameters 4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ If the parameter is enabled and modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system continues to exchange data with the DP master. If the parameter is disabled and modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, data exchange does not take place between the DP master and the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. 4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt You can use this parameter to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts. 4.2.4 Hardware interrupt You can use this parameter to enable or disable hardware interrupts. 4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt You can use this parameter to enable or disable insert/remove module interrupts. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 23 Parameters/address space 4.3 Substitute value behavior 4.3 Substitute value behavior The substitute value behavior is implemented by the DP master per slot in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The respective output reacts according to its configured substitute value behavior: Current-free/voltage-free Keep last value Output substitute value The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases: STOP DP master DP master failure (connection interruption) Firmware update Station stop, for example, due to: - No server module - At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit Deactivate DP slave Note Reducing a configuration If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the new configuration to the CPU, the modules no longer configured but still present retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage on the BaseUnit BU...D or on the interface module is switched off. The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases: Firmware update Configuration control: receipt of a new control data record Incorrectly configured module Module with incorrect parameter assignment Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 24 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display on the interface module: RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) DP (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 25 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs LEDs Meaning RN (RUN) ER (ERROR) MT (MAINT) Off Off Off On Flashes On Off On Remedy No or too little supply voltage at interface module Check the supply voltage or switch it on at the interface module.1 Test of LEDs during startup: The three LEDs light up simultaneously for approximately 0.25 s. Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the configuration software or the user program. Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the configuration software. ET 200SP starts up. - Off ET 200SP is being assigned parameters. Not relevant On Not relevant Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging data with the DP master. - Not relevant Group error and group error channels Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the error. Flashes Not relevant Not relevant The preset configuration does not match the actual configuration of the ET 200SP. Check the configuration of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is missing or faulty, or whether a nonconfigured module is inserted. Invalid configuration states See the Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET DP (Page 47) section. Parameter assignment error in the I/O module Evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 and correct the error in the corresponding I/O module. Maintenance is demanded. Perform maintenance Hardware or firmware faulty.2 Run a firmware update. If the error persists, contact Siemens Industry Online Support. On Flashes Flashes Flashes Replace the interface module. 1 PWR LED On (on interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit. 2 DP LED Off Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 26 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays PWR LED on the interface module Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Remedy No or too little supply voltage Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage present - Off On LED DP on the RS485 interface Table 5- 3 Status display of the DP LED LED DP Meaning Off There is no connection between the PROFIBUS interface of your PROFIBUS device and a communication partner (for example, DP master). Check whether the bus cable to the DP master is broken. Remedy - On There is a connection between the PROFIBUS interface of your PROFIBUS device and a communication partner (for example, DP master). LED display of configuration errors Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interface module by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs. The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs: No server module Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 27 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Operating principle The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After a notification by means of a flashing signal, the error type and then the error location/error code are displayed in each case. The LED error display: Is activated during POWER ON and during operation Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR- and MAINTLED Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location Sequence Description 1 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 0.5 Hz Indication of the error type 2 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal) 3 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 2 Hz Indication of error location/error code 4 ERROR-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the tens position (decimal) of the error location/error code 5 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the units position (decimal) of the error location/error code 6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated. Error display The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur. Table 5- 5 Error display Error type (MAINT) Error location (ERROR/MAINT) Cause of error Solution 1 33* * No server module * Interruptions on the backplane bus * Short-circuit on the backplane bus Check the configuration of the ET 200SP. * Slot Note The following LEDs indicate a short-circuit in the backplane bus supply or in the bus connection supply: * PWR-LED: On * RN-, ER- and MT-LED: Off Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 28 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.1 Introduction Definition The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics indicates the interrupt type and the event that led to an interrupt being triggered. The interrupt section comprises 62 bytes including an interrupt header. Position in the diagnostics frame The interrupt section is located after the channel diagnostics. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 29 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Data record The diagnostic data of a module are located in the data records 0 and 1: Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that describe the current status of the distributed I/O system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB 82 (local data bytes 8 to 11). Data record 1 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that are also available in data record 0. The figure below shows the structure of data record 1: Figure 5-2 Structure of data record 1 Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 30 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Reading data records DS0 and DS1 can be read with SFC 59 (RD_REC) or SFB 52 (RDREC). The data length of DS 1 can be up to 240 bytes. In this case, DS1 includes up to 38 channel error entries. Note the figures below in this section. Content The contents of the interrupt information depend on the interrupt type: In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 58 bytes) is sent as interrupt status information (starting from byte x+4). The length of the interrupt status information for hardware interrupts is 4 bytes. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 31 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Structure of interrupts The figure below shows the structure of the interrupt section for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system: Figure 5-3 Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 32 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7 The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt: Figure 5-4 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 33 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt from the modules, starting at byte x+8 The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+8: Figure 5-5 Structure starting at byte x+8 Diagnostic interrupt from the modules, starting at byte x+14 The channel error entries start from byte x+14. A channel error entry is 6 bytes long and can follow 8 times starting from byte x+14. If you read the channel error entries using an SFB or SFC, 38 channel diagnostics are possible. The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+14: Figure 5-6 Structure starting from byte x+14 Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 34 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts The following table is used to explain the channel error entries: Description Channel number 0 to 63: Channel number for channel error Channel properties Bit 0 to 7 0x8000: Entire submodule 00H: Free data type 01H: bit 02H: 2 bit 03H: 4 bit 04H: byte 05H: word 06H: Double word 07H bis FFH: Reserve Bit 8 0: Channel 1: Channel group Bit 9, 10 00H: Diagnostics 01H: Maintenance demanded 02H: Maintenance required 03H: Reserve Bit 11, 12 00H: Channel error-free 01H: Incoming diagnostics 02H: Outgoing diagnostics 03H: Outgoing diagnostics, but other diagnostics are also pending on this channel Bit 13 to 15 00H: Reserve 01H: Input channel 02H: Output channel 03H: Input/output channel Channel error type Refer to respective manual for explanation. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 35 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Example of a diagnostic interrupt The figure below shows an example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 1): Figure 5-7 Example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 1) Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 36 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts The figure below shows an example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 2): Figure 5-8 Example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 2) Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 for the hardware interrupt: Figure 5-9 Structure starting at byte x+4 for hardware interrupt Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 37 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP Introduction With certain process statuses/errors, the DP slave in each case creates an interrupt block with the corresponding information in the diagnostics frame (DPV1 interrupt mechanism). Regardless of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is displayed in the identifier-related diagnostics, in the module status, and in the channel diagnostics. Interrupts in DPV1 mode The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts: Diagnostic interrupts Hardware interrupts Insert/remove module interrupts 5.2.3 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt When an event comes or goes (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if "Enable: diagnostic interrupt" is set. The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic interrupt OB (OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostic interrupt OB. 5.2.4 Triggering a hardware interrupt When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt OB, for example OB 40. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt OB. Note Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module) Do not use hardware interrupts for technological purposes (e.g., cyclical generation of hardware interrupts). If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I/O modules and the communication load. 5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt When an insert/remove module interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the insert/remove module interrupt OB (OB 83). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the insert/remove module interrupt OB. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 38 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3 Alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm in DPV1 mode The error is entered in the channel diagnostics in the diagnostics frame: In DPV1 mode, diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts. After a diagnostics alarm, this is - entered in the diagnostics frame as diagnostic interrupt block (always for one interrupt only). - Stored in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes. OB 82 is called. If OB 82 does not exist, the CPU changes to STOP mode. Acknowledgment of diagnostic interrupt (a new interrupt is then possible) Length of the diagnostics frame The maximum frame length for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with IM155-6 DP HF interface module (DPV1 mode) is 244 bytes. The minimum frame length is 6 bytes. Reading out the diagnostics data Table 5- 6 Reading out the diagnostics data with STEP 7 Automation system with DP master SIMATIC S7/M7 Application See... Slave diagnostics data as plain text in the "DP slave diagnostics" tab in the STEP 7 user interface "Diagnosing hardware" in the STEP 7 online help Instruction "DP NRM_DG" (SFC 13) SFC, see STEP 7 online help Reading out slave diagnostics (store in the data area of the user program) Instruction "RD_REC" (SFC 59) Reading out data records of the S7 diagnostics data (store in the data area of the user program) Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) Reading data records from the DP slave Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) Receiving interrupts from the interrupt OBs See System and Standard Functions reference manual SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system functions/function blocks) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system functions/function blocks) Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 39 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.1 Slave diagnostics The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics. Figure 5-10 Structure of the slave diagnostics Note The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 155-6 DP HF (depending on parameter assignment) between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode. You can identify the length of the last received diagnostics frame in STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 40 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3 Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave. Structure of station status 1 (byte 0) Table 5- 7 Bit 0 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0) Meaning Cause/Remedy 1: The DP slave is not responding to the DP * master. Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave? * Is the bus connector plugged in? * Is the DP slave connected to the voltage supply? * Is the RS485 repeater properly configured? 1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to exchange data. * Wait; the DP slave is currently starting up. 2 1: The configuration data transferred from the DP master to the DP slave does not match the DP slave configuration. * Has the correct station type or the correct DP slave configuration been entered in the configuration software? 3 1: External diagnostics is available. (Group diagnostics display) * Evaluate the ID-specific diagnostics, the module status, and/or the channel diagnostics. As soon as all errors have been eliminated, bit 3 is reset. The bit is set again when there is a new diagnostics alarm in the bytes of the aforementioned diagnostics. 4 1: The required function is not supported by the DP slave (for example, changing the PROFIBUS address by means of software). * Check the configuration. 5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the response of the DP slave. * Check the bus configuration. 6 1: The DP slave type does not match the software configuration. * Has the correct station type been entered in the configuration software? 7 1: Parameters have been assigned to the DP slave by a different DP master (not the one that currently has access to the DP slave). * The bit is always 1, for example, if you access the DP slave with the programming device or another DP master. * The PROFIBUS address of the DP master that assigned parameters to the DP slave is located in the "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostics byte. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 41 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Structure of station status 2 (byte 1) Table 5- 8 Structure of station status 2 (byte 1) Bit 1 Meaning 0 1: The DP slave parameters need to be reassigned. 1 1: A diagnostics alarm is present. The DP slave will not operate until the problem is eliminated (static diagnostics alarm). 2 1: The bit on the DP slave is always "1". 3 1: The watchdog is activated for this DP slave. 4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command.1 5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command.1 6 0: Bit is always "0". 7 1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in progress. The bit is updated only if another diagnostics alarm also changes. Structure of station status 3 (byte 2) Table 5- 9 Structure of station status 3 (byte 2) Bit 5.3.3 Meaning 0 to 6 0: Bits are always set to "0". 7 1: * There are more diagnostic alarms pending than the DP slave is able to store. * The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostics alarms sent by the DP slave in its (channel) diagnostics buffer. Master PROFIBUS address The master PROFIBUS address diagnostics byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the DP master: That assigned parameters to the DP slave That has read and write access to the DP slave The master PROFIBUS address is located in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 42 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics The identifier-related diagnostics indicates whether modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system have errors or not. Identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise 8 bytes. The figure below shows how the identifier-related diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module: Figure 5-11 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 43 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.5 Module status The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides more information on the identifier-related diagnostics with respect to the configuration. The module status begins after the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises 17 bytes. The following figure shows how the module status for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module: Figure 5-12 Module status structure Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 44 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.6 Channel diagnostics Channel diagnostics provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the identifier-related diagnostics. Channel diagnostics begins after the module status. Channel diagnostics does not affect the module status. The following figure shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module: Figure 5-13 Structure of channel diagnostics When a BaseUnit is incorrectly configured, mapping is made to channel diagnostics. The slot is then apparent from the first byte. In this case, the error type is coded with 0x10 parameter error. All other fields are set to "0". Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 45 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.7 H status Requirements The H status in the diagnostics frame supplies the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module only when operated behind a Y link (e.g. IM 157) in DPV1 mode. This block can be passed over during the evaluation of the diagnostics frame. The configuration is described in the following section. Structure of the H status The following figure shows the structure of the H status of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module. Figure 5-14 Structure of the H status Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 46 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP Incorrect configuration states The following incorrect configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to a failure of the DP slave or prevent the start of data exchange. Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration. Faulty backplane bus (e.g., defective BaseUnit). No interrupt is generated when the ET 200SP backplane bus is interrupted No server module Configuration exceeds maximum length of 1 m Configuration of an incorrect BaseUnit Note All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) at a station stop. However, the interface module will continue to exchange data. Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart. Diagnostics The table below shows the incorrect configurations and their diagnostics: Table 5- 10 Diagnostics Identifier-related diagnostics Slot 33 set, remaining slots not relevant All 33 bits set Module status Slot 33 with 11B: ""No module; invalid user data" set 01B: "Module error; invalid user data" for all modules Cause * No server module * More than 32 I/O modules * Defective backplane bus * Configuration > 1 m Response All I/O modules and interface modules fail All I/O modules and interface modules fail If the BaseUnit is configured incorrectly, the channel diagnostics "Parameter assignment error" is signaled for the respective slot. Check the parameter "Potential group" in the parameters of the I/O module. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 47 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D Load voltage failure If supply voltage fails on the BaseUnit BU...D, the I/O modules react as follows: A remove module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is removed during the failure of the supply voltage. An insert module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is inserted during the failure of the supply voltage. Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 48 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 6 Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Valid firmware versions The table below lists the valid firmware versions and their field of application for the I/O modules. I/O modules Firmware version Comment DI 8x24VDC ST V1.0.1 As of this version, you have the option to operate I/O modules after an IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0) interface module. DI 16x24VDC ST DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST AI 4xI 2-,4-wire ST AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST AI 4xRTD/TC 2-,3-,4-wire HF AQ 4xU/I ST Status of the supply voltage Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete configuration. For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply voltage. When a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential group. Modules Article number DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 49 Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Plugging and pulling (hot-swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules NOTICE Pulling and plugging (hot swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules during operation on S7-300 via PROFIBUS DP ET 200SP I/O modules can be pulled and plugged: * As of STEP7 V5.5 SP3 HSP 242 and * If "Operation if preset configuration <> actual configuration" parameter is enabled. Note the following when operating the ET 200SP with S7-300 via PROFIBUS DP: Plugging of ET 200SP I/O modules results in a brief station failure of the ET 200SP. Note ET 200SP I/O modules can be pulled and plugged without restrictions for all other DP master systems if you enable the "Pull/plug module (OB83)" parameter. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link Note Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link Operation of the CM 4xIO-Link IO-Link Master communication module with the IM 1556 DP HF interface module is supported as of S7-PCT V3.1 and an updated module firmware version/GSD file. Reaction times for fail-safe modules The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time = 2.3 ms Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 50 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration The interface modules support plugging a dark-colored BaseUnit in slot 1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules: AI EnergyMeter ST (6ES7134-6PA00-0BD0) DI 4x120 ... 230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) DQ 4x24 ... 230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Note First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O module manuals. The 24 V DC supply voltage is fed in via an external fuse. The 24 V DC supply voltage is provided by a light-colored BaseUnit. Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1: Configuration via GSD or GSDML Configuration as of STEP7 V5.5 SP4 as of - HSP0242 V2.0 for IM155-6 DP HF Configuration as of STEP7 V13 SP1 See also: Functions (Page 14) Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 51 7 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 DP HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0/td?dl=de). Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 General information Product type designation IM 155-6DP HF with PROFIBUS connector and server module Firmware version V4.2 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Module swapping during operation (hot swapping) Yes; Multi-hot swapping Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version As of V5.5 SP4, only up to FW V3.1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher Configuration control via dataset Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms Input current Current consumption, max. 335 mA Inrush current, max. 1.6 A It 0.038 A*s Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 52 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 32 byte; per input / output Address space per station * Address space per station, max. 244 byte; per input / output Hardware configuration Rack * Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules Interfaces Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1 1. Interface Interface types * RS 485 Yes * Output current of the interface, max. 90 mA Protocols * PROFIBUS DP slave Yes RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s PROFIBUS DP Services - SYNC capability Yes - FREEZE capability Yes - DPV0 Yes - DPV1 Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Status indicator Yes Alarms Yes Diagnostics function Yes Diagnostics indication LED * RUN LED Yes; Green LED * ERROR LED Yes; Red LED * MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Connection display DP Yes; Green DP LED Potential separation Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 53 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 between backplane bus and electronics No between PROFIBUS DP and all other circuit components Yes between supply and all other circuits No Permissible potential difference between different circuits Safety extra low voltage SELV Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Installation altitude above sea level, max. 2 000 m; On request: Installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Connection method ET-Connection * via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules Dimensions Width 50 mm Height 117 mm Depth 74 mm Weights Weight, approx. 150 g Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) 54 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD Dimension drawing A This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (front and side view) Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 55 IM 155-6 PN BA interface module ___________________ Preface (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5 ___________ ___________________ 6 Compatibility ___________________ 7 Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimension drawing 03/2015 A5E34934425-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34934425-AA 03/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8 3 4 5 2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8 2.2 2.2.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................10 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................12 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................13 3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................15 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16 4.2 4.2.1 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16 Enabling configuration control ................................................................................................16 4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................17 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................17 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 18 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................23 Triggering a diagnostics interrupt ...........................................................................................23 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................24 Triggering a pull/plug interrupt ................................................................................................24 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................25 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................26 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................27 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ....................................................................27 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device .......................................................28 6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 29 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 30 A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 33 IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systemssimatic/en/manual-overview/tech-doc-controllers/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Application examples Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 7 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 (IM 155-6 PN BA interface module and server module) View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN BA interface module and the server module Properties The module has the following properties: Technical properties - Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO - Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module. Supported functions (Page 10) Maximum configuration 12 I/O modules IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Maximum amount of I/O data The maximum amount of I/O data is 32 bytes input/output data. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Reference identification label A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Server module The server module (V1.1.1 and higher) is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and also available separately as an accessory. The server module has the following properties: Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm) Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Retentive storage of the device name for device replacement without topological configuration Note You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration software. To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+. If there are 12 I/O modules, the server module is plugged in slot 13. You can find more information in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 9 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions Introduction The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: Integrated switch with 2 ports Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP: MIB2, LLDP-MIP and MRP-MIB) Port diagnostics Deactivating of ports Minimum update time 1 ms Media redundancy MRP Device replacement without programming device Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO Firmware update via PROFINET IO The interface module supports additional functions: Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Device replacement with and without topological configuration Configuration control (option handling) Requirements Configuration takes place with GSDML or STEP 7 V13/HSPxyz. Cabling with fixed connection setting If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable "Autonegotiation/Autocrossover". You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions Device replacement without topological configuration In addition to the interface module, the device name is also saved on the server module (V1.1.1 and higher). A device name saved on the server module is the requirement for device replacement without topological configuration. Storing the name on the server module and the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced. Table 2- 1 Scenarios for using the device name Interface module empty Interface module with device name Server module empty No device name available. The device name from the interface module is used and copied to the server module. Server module with device name The device name from the server module is used and copied to the interface module. The device name from the server module is used and copied to the interface module if this has a different device name. Be aware of the following constraints: Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the server module. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the server module, you can remove the server module from the interface module before resetting to factory settings. When a server module is replaced, a device name stored in the server module is applied to the interface module after a POWER ON. Do not pull/plug the server module while under voltage. If you pull/plug the server module while under voltage, the interface module restarts. If you use a server module with an invalid firmware version (< V1.1.1), channel-specific diagnostics is generated with the error number 27 (general error). To correct this error, you need to replace the server module or update the server module firmware. IO devices that have already been used in another configuration should be reset to their factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN BA If a spare part is required, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their delivery state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 11 Product overview 2.2 Functions Media redundancy (MRP) Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.1 Configuration control (option handling) Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner by means of the user program. Reference You can find more information on configuration control in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual on the Internet under the following link Application collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270) in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Terminal assignment 24 V DC supply voltage The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the terminal assignment for a 24 V DC supply voltage. Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment 24 V DC supply voltage View Connector Signal name1 Description IM connection 1L+ 24 V DC 2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2 1M Ground 2M Ground (for looping through)2 1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally. 2 Maximum 10 A permitted. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 13 Wiring 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO The following table shows the signal name and description of the terminal assignment. Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO terminal assignment View Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RD_N Receive data - 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground Reference You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Wiring 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN BA. Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics M Ground Backplane bus LK 1,2 LED Link TX/RX Internal power supply RN LED RUN/STOP (green/yellow) X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red) P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINT LED (yellow) P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (red) Figure 3-1 Block diagram of IM 155-6 PN BA interface module IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for IM 155-6 PN BA interface module The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 BA interface module. Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN BA (GSD file) Parameters Configuration control Range of values Disable/enable 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2.1 Enabling configuration control Default Disable Efficiency range ET 200SP You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Note If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to operate the I/O modules. Reference You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Substitute value behavior 4.3 Substitute value behavior The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is executed by the IO controller for each slot. The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior: Current-free/voltage-free Output substitute value Keep last value The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases: STOP controller Controller failure (connection interrupted) Station stop, for example, due to: - Missing server module - Removing more than one I/O module at a time - At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit Deactivating the IO device Note Reducing a configuration If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is switched off at the interface module. The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases: Firmware update Reset to factory settings Configuration control: receipt of a new control data record Incorrectly configured module Module with incorrect parameter assignment 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules Configurations The "Status of supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" is configured in the IM 155-6 PN BA on the server module. The input data can then be read out on the server module. You will find the relevant description in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 17 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays Introduction Diagnostics by means of LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. In order to localize errors still further, you usually evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 or the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has occurred. For example, you will find the number of the relevant error OB in the plain text information. LED display The following diagram shows the LED display on the interface module and the BusAdapter. RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) PWR (green) LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 5-1 LED display on the interface module IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables describe the meanings of the status and error displays. RN/ER/MT LED on the interface module Table 5- 1 RN/ER/MT status and error displays LEDs RN (RUN) ER (ERROR) Meaning Solution MT (MAINT) Off Off Off On On On Flashes Off Off No or insufficient supply voltage on interface module. Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the interface module. * Test of LEDs during startup: The three LEDs light up simultaneously for approximately 0.25 s. - Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the configuration software or the user program. Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the configuration software. ET 200SP starts up. - ET 200SP is being assigned parameters. ET 200SP is being reset to factory settings. On Not relevant Flashes Not relevant Flashes Flashes Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging data with the IO controller. Not relevant Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the error. Flashes The preset configuration does not correspond to the actual configuration of the ET 200SP . Check the structure of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is missing or defective, or whether a non-configured module is plugged. Invalid configuration states. Refer to section Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 27) Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 and eliminate the error in the respective I/O module. The "Node flash test" is running (the LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface also flash). - Hardware or firmware defective (the LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface do not flash). Run a firmware update. If the error persists, contact Siemens Industry Online Support. Replace the interface module. * PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 19 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays PWR LED on the interface module Table 5- 2 PWR status display on the interface module PWR LED Meaning Solution No or insufficient supply voltage Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage present - Off On LK1/LK2 LED on the interface module Table 5- 3 LK1/LK2 status display on the interface module LEDs LK1/LK2 Meaning Solution Off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller). Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO controller is interrupted. - On There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller). The "Node flash test" is running (the RN/ER/MT LEDs also flash). - Flashes LED display of configuration errors Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interfacemodule by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs. The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs: More than one I/O module pulled Missing server module Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Operating principle You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code. The LED error display is active during POWER ON as well as during operation. has priority before all other states displayed by the ERROR and MAINT LED. remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected. Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location Sequence Description 1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 0.5 Hz Signaling of error type 2 MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal) 3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code 4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 21 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Error display The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur. Table 5- 5 Error display Error type (MAINT) Error location (ERROR/MAINT) Cause of error Remedy 1 02 to 12* The number of pulled I/O modules is displayed. The diagnostics data is generated starting with two pulled I/O modules. Check the configuration of the ET 200SP. 65* * Missing server module * Interruptions at the backplane bus * Short circuit of communication on the backplane bus * Slot Note A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the following LEDs: * PWR LED: On * RN, ER and MT LED: Off IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts Introduction The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are evaluated based on the I/O controller used. Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts: Diagnostics interrupts Hardware interrupts Pull/plug module interrupts Maintenance events In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO controller. Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB number and start information. Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). System diagnostics STEP 7 (TIA portal) offers innovative system diagnostics for the devices of the S7-1500 (IO controller CPU S7-1500) and the ET 200SP (IO device) automation system. Independent of the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device. For more information on system diagnostics, refer to the System Diagnostics function manual. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926). 5.2.1 Triggering a diagnostics interrupt Triggering a diagnostics interrupt For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly. The CPU interrupts the user program and processes the diagnostics block OB 82. The interrupt triggering event is logged in the start information of OB 82. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 23 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt Triggering a hardware interrupt If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the hardware interrupt block OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start information of the hardware interrupt block. Note Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module) Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically. If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I/O modules and the communication load. 5.2.3 Triggering a pull/plug interrupt Triggering a pull/plug interrupt If there is a pull/plug interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the hardware interrupt block OB 83. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start information of OB 83. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3 Alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Actions initiated by diagnostics alarms: The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes. Diagnostic data is reported as diagnostic interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and can be read via data records. Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller. OB 82 is called. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help. Reading out the diagnostics data Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with IO controller Application See... SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 in online and diagnostics view STEP 7 online help Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) Read data records from the IO device Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) Receive interrupts from the IO device * As of STEP 7 V13, function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens. com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en) * As of STEP 7 V5.5 system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens. com/WW/view/en/19292127) Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Application example (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). Causes of error and corrective measures The causes of error and corrective measures for the diagnostics alarms are described in the manuals for I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the chapter, "Interrupts/diagnostics alarms". IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 25 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms See also Channel diagnostics (Page 26) PROFINET with STEP 7 V11 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) 5.3.1 Channel diagnostics Function Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records. The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC". Structure of the diagnostics data records The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the PROFINET IO standard - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2 or higher. You can download the standard PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com) from the homepage of the PROFIBUS User Organization free of charge. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.2 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO Invalid configuration states The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules. Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do not trigger an interrupt. Missing server module At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the parameters. Note If you remove more than one I/O module or the server module, this results in a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module is still exchanging data. Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart. See also Status and error displays (Page 18) Channel diagnostics (Page 26) 5.3.3 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D Failure of the supply voltage L+ The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D: If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is generated. If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is generated. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 27 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.4 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Recovery of the SIMATIC IO device If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 86. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 6 Compatibility Status of the supply voltage Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete configuration. For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply voltage. If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from the table below, no group diagnostics "No supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential group. Module Order number DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 29 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN BA Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN BA 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 Product type designation IM 155-6 PN BA with 2xRJ45 ports and server module General information Hardware version FS01 Firmware version V3.2 Product function I&M data Yes Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 or higher PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / - Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 0.1 A Current consumption, max. 300 mA It 0.09 As Power Incoming power to the backplane bus 1.7 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.7 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 32 byte; per input/output Address space per station Address space per station, max. 32 byte; per input/output IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Technical specifications 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 Hardware configuration Rack Modules per rack, max. 12 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 1st interface Interface hardware * Number of ports 2 * Integrated switch Yes * RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; 2 integrated RJ45 ports * BusAdapter (PROFINET) No Protocols * PROFINET IO device Yes * Open IE communication Yes Interface hardware RJ45 (Ethernet) 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASE-TX) Transmission method PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASETX) Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes Protocols PROFINET IO PROFINET IO Yes PROFINET IO device Services * Isochronous mode No * Open IE communication Yes * IRT No * PROFIenergy No * Prioritized startup No * Shared Device No IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 31 Technical specifications 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Status display Yes Interrupts Interrupts Yes Diagnostics indicator LED RUN LED Yes; green LED ERROR LED Yes; red LED MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green LED Electrical isolation Between backplane bus and electronics No Between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes Between supply and all other circuits No Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 55 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 60 C Connection technology ET-Connection Via BU/BA-Send No Dimensions Width 35 mm Height 117 mm Depth 74 mm Weights Weight, approx. 125 g; IM 155-6 PN BA with 2xRJ45 ports and server module IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) 32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA Dimension drawing A This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (front and side view) IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 33 IM 155-6 PN HS interface module ___________________ Preface (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Interrupts, diagnostics, error, 5 ___________________ and system messages 6 ___________________ Compatibility ___________________ 7 Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimensional drawing 09/2016 A5E34928647-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34928647-AA 08/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2016. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes labeled as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 3 4 5 2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 11 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Functions ................................................................................................................................ 15 PROFIenergy ......................................................................................................................... 23 Configuration control (option handling) .................................................................................. 23 Use of fail-safe modules ........................................................................................................ 24 Multi Hot Swap ....................................................................................................................... 24 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 25 3.1 Terminal assignment .............................................................................................................. 25 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 31 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 32 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 32 4.2 4.2.1 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 32 Configuration control .............................................................................................................. 32 4.3 Substitute value behavior ....................................................................................................... 33 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ............................................................... 33 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages ............................................................................. 34 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 34 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 38 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt....................................................................................... 39 Triggering a hardware interrupt.............................................................................................. 39 Triggering a swapping interrupt ............................................................................................. 40 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 40 Maintenance events ............................................................................................................... 42 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 43 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................ 44 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ................................................................... 44 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device ...................................................... 45 6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 46 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 47 A Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................................. 57 IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0 (interface module IM 155-6 PN HS and server module) View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module and the server module IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following properties: Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO High-speed applications as of 125 s Isochronous mode according to PROFINET V2.3 Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plugs for the 24 V DC supply voltage and the server module are included in the scope of delivery of the interface module. PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters - For RJ45 bus connection plug (BA 2xRJ45) - For direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2xFC) - For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable (BA 2xSCRJ) - As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 plug (BA SCRJ/RJ45) - As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable (BA SCRJ/FC) - For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC) - As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 plug (BA LC/RJ45) - As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable (BA LC/FC) The module supports the following PROFINET IO functions (see (Page 15)) Maximum configuration 30 I/O modules 0.5 m backplane bus (without interface module but with server module) Maximum amount of I/O data The maximum amount of I/O data without user data qualifier is 968 bytes. Note * In the case of a shared device configuration, the 968 bytes apply to the total I/O data of all controllers that share the device. * If more than two (max. four) controllers share the device, the maximum amount of I/O data including user data qualifier is limited to 360 bytes per controller. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories You order the following accessories separately: BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter BA 2xFC BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter BA 2xLC BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter BA LC/FC BusAdapter Labeling strips Reference identification label A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Server module The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and is available separately as a spare part. The server module has the following properties: Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm) Provides station functions, for example, group load diagnostics, status bytes. Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Note You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration software. To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+. When there are 30 I/O modules, the server module is inserted in slot 31. You can find more information in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration The interface modules support dark-colored BaseUnits in slot 1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules: AI EnergyMeter DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1) RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Note First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark-colored one if an AC I/O module or AI Energy Meter is plugged. Please observe the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O module manuals. A light-colored BaseUnit must be plugged into the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module to supply the 24 V DC supply voltage. Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions PROFINET IO The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: Integrated switch with 2 ports Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP-MIB and MRP-MIB Port diagnostics Disabling ports Minimum update time 125 s Device replacement without programming device, also without topological configuration Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO Firmware update via PROFINET IO Isochronous real-time communication Prioritized startup Media redundancy (MRP) Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD) Shared device Module division of I/O modules (submodules) Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) Isochronous mode as of 125 s Performance upgrade PROFINET V2.3 Freely selectable connection method and connection technology over SIMATIC BusAdapter for PROFINET copper, POF, PCF or fiber-optic cables. The interface module supports additional functions: Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Oversampling PROFIenergy Configuration control (option handling) Value status of I/O modules Use of fail-safe modules Multi Hot Swap (removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation) Reset to factory settings via RESET button Note Docking unit The use of the IM155-6 PN HS interface module as a docking unit (function: IO device changing in operation) in a docking system is not supported. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions Requirements The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Product version Firmware version of the module of the module as as of of Configuration software Configuration with GSD file/software from a thirdparty manufacturer 1 STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP0238 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V14 Real-time communication 1 V4.0.0 X X X Isochronous real-time communication according to PROFINET 1 V4.0.0 X X X Prioritized startup 1 V4.0.0 X X X Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V4.0.0 X X X Shared device 1 V4.0.0 X X X Multi Hot Swap 1 V4.0.0 X X X Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD) 1 V4.0.0 X X X Isochronous mode 250 s 1 V4.0.0 --- X X Isochronous mode 125 s/187.5 s 1 V4.0.0 --- --- X Device replacement without programming device 1 V4.0.0 X X X Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) 1 V4.0.0 X X X Module division of I/O modules (submodules) 1 V4.0.0 X X X PROFIenergy 1 V4.0.0 X X X Value status 1 V4.0.0 X X X Use of fail-safe modules 1 V4.0.0 --- X X Oversampling 1 V4.0.0 --- X X BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA 2xFC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA 2xLC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X BA LC/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X 1 systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions Cabling with fixed connection setting If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you should also disable "Autonegotiation/Autocrossover". You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual Real-time communication A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a providerconsumer model. Isochronous real-time communication Synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth is available in the send cycle for IRT data. The reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can also be transferred with another high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time communication) at reserved, chronologically synchronized intervals. A topological configuration is required for IRT. Note IO controller as sync master with IRT communication We recommend also operating the IO controller as a sync master when configuring the IRT communication. Otherwise, IO devices with IRT and RT configuration could fail as a result of sync master failure. You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 17 Product overview 2.2 Functions Isochronous mode of I/O data I/O data, transmission cycle via PROFINET IO, and the user program are synchronized to achieve maximum deterministics. The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the system is simultaneously collected and simultaneously output. The constant PROFINET IO cycle forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous mode of I/O data for the modules starting at 125 s. The IO device can exchange isochronous process data with a maximum of one IO controller. Note If the IO controller cannot access a module (for example, module pulled, activated configuration control without written control data record), cycle time violations may occur with activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB (OB61). The time error OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation. This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI" (SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions and depends, among other things, on the set cycle time and the configuration limits. Note Isochronous mode restrictions with IM 155-6 PN HS Isochronous mode of I/O data in combination with the following functions is not possible with the interface module IM 155-6 PN HS: * PROFIenergy You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions Prioritized startup Prioritized startup describes the PROFINET IO functionality for accelerating the startup of IO devices in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication. The function reduces the time that the appropriately configured IO devices require in order to return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases: After the supply voltage has returned After a station has returned After IO devices have been activated Note Dependency on the startup time The startup time depends on the number and type of modules. The interface module permits startup times from 0.5 s. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 19 Product overview 2.2 Functions Device replacement Device replacement without topological configuration The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without topological configuration. Storing the name on the BusAdapter and the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced. Table 2- 2 Scenarios for using the device name Interface module empty Interface module with device name BusAdapter empty No device name available The device name from the interface module is used and copied to the BusAdapter. BusAdapter with device name The device name from the BusAdapter is used and copied to the interface module. The device name from the BusAdapter is used and copied to the interface module if this has a different device name. Be aware of the following constraints: Resetting to factory settings via the RESET button deletes the device name in both the interface module and the BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings. When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the interface module after a POWER ON. Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. If you pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage, the interface module restarts. Device replacement with topological configuration IO devices having this function can be replaced in a simple manner: The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device. The replaced IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology must match the actual topology. IO devices that were already operated in a different configuration should be reset to their factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions Replacement scenario of an IM 155-6 PN HS or of a BusAdapter In a replacement scenario, any IO device or BusAdapter in operation must be reset to its delivery state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Media redundancy (MRP) Function for safeguarding communication and system availability. A ring topology ensures that an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD) If bumpless media redundancy is to be reached with short update times (together with IRT), you must use the MRP extension "Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)". You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual Shared device IO device which makes its data available to multiple IO controllers. The interface module supports shared device at submodule level. Notes on configuring: Always load hardware changes to all affected IO controllers. Set the same send clocks in the projects. Limit the I/O data including user data qualifier to 360 bytes per IO controller. Use the same station name and the same IP address for each shared configuration. Assign each module or submodule to only one IO controller. In the case of an incorrect configuration, you may need to perform a power OFF/ON on the interface module. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 21 Product overview 2.2 Functions Submodules The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module supports the module division of I/O modules into up to 4 submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and assigned parameters. It is possible to assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers. The functions Firmware update Write I&M data Calibration PROFIenergy can only be executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration. Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) The module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data available to up to three additional IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels. The module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to make the status of its output data available to up to three additional IO controllers. These additional IO controllers can read the status of the channels as input data. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual Value status The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module supports I/O modules with value status. You can find more information on the value status in the manuals for the I/O modules. Oversampling The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module supports the oversampling mode of HS modules. With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in isochronous mode. You can find more information on oversampling in the manuals for the I/O modules. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 PROFIenergy Properties PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy commands during production-free periods. Reference You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product information. Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802. 2.2.2 Configuration control (option handling) Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner by means of the user program. Reference You can find more information on configuration control in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual on the Internet under the following link Application collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270) in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 23 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.3 Use of fail-safe modules Properties The interface module IM 155-6 PN HS supports the use of fail-safe modules. Reference You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. 2.2.4 Multi Hot Swap Properties You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation. Note The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module does not support the removal and insertion of the server module, the interface module and BusAdapter during operation. Reference You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 3 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment 24 V DC supply voltage The table below shows the signal names and descriptions of the pin assignment of the 24 V DC supply voltage. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage View Connector Signal name1 Description IM connection 1L+ 24 V DC 2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2 1M Ground 2M Ground (for looping through)2 1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally. 2 Maximum 10 A permitted. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 25 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45. Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 View Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RD_N Receive data - 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xFC The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC. Table 3- 3 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xFC View Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter. Table 3- 4 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ View Signal name Description Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xLC The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA 2xLC BusAdapter. Table 3- 5 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xLC View Signal name Description Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 27 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter. Table 3- 6 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 View Signal name Description Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RD_N Receive data - 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter. The pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer overview. Table 3- 7 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC View Signal name Description Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter. Table 3- 8 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 View Signal name Description Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RD_N Receive data - 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 29 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/FC The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA LC/FC BusAdapter. The pin assignment for the BA LC/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer overview. Table 3- 9 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/FC View Signal name Description Receiver/Receive data Sender/Transmit data 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 RD_N Receive data - Reference You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in the System Manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Connecting 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN HS. Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics M Ground Backplane bus LK 1,2 Link TX/RX LED (green) Internal power supply MT 1,2 MAINT FiberOptic LED (SCRJ port) (yellow) X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage RN RUN/STOP LED (green/yellow) X5 BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red) P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINT LED (yellow) P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (green) Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 31 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for IM 155-6 PN HS interface module The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module. Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (GSD file) Parameters Configuration control Value range Disable/enable 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 Configuration control Default Disable Efficiency range ET 200SP You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Note If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to operate the I/O modules. Reference You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Substitute value behavior 4.3 Substitute value behavior Substitute value behavior The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is defined through the configuration. The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior: Current-free/voltage-free Output substitute value Keep last value The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases: STOP controller Controller failure (connection interrupted) Parameter assignment phase during startup Deactivating the IO device Station stop: - Missing server module - At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit Note Reducing a configuration If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is switched off at the interface module. The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases: Firmware update Reset to factory settings Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet. Incorrectly configured module Module with incorrect parameter assignment 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules The status of the supply voltage L+ of the ET 200SP I/O modules is mapped to the server module with the interface module IM 155-6 PN HS. You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 33 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The following figure shows the LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter. RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) PWR (green) MT2 (yellow) (SCRJ port) LK2 (green) MT1 (yellow) (SCRJ port) LK1 (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs LEDs Meaning RN (RUN) ER (ERROR) MT (MAINT) Off Off Off On On On Not relevant Not relevant Flashes Remedy Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the interface module. interface module.* Test of LEDs during startup: The three LEDs light up simultaneously for approximately 0.25 s. --- Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the configuration software or the user program. Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the configuration software. ET 200SP starts up. --- ET 200SP is being assigned parameters. Not relevant On Not relevant Flashes Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging data with the IO controller. --- Not relevant Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics data and remedy the error. The configured structure does not correspond to the actual structure of the ET 200SP . Check the structure of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is missing or defective, or whether a non-configured module is plugged. Invalid configuration states. See section Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 44) Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 and eliminate the error in the respective I/O module. Maintenance See section Maintenance events (Page 42) Invalid BusAdapter Check the BusAdapter. The "Node flash test" is run (the LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface also flash). --- Hardware or firmware defective (the LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface do not flash). Run a firmware update. If the error persists, contact Siemens Industry Online Support. Configuration error on backplane bus Insert the server module as bus termination or check the number of inserted modules. Not relevant Not relevant Flashes Flashes Not relevant Flashes Flashes Flashes Not relevant On Flashes Flashes Replace the interface module. * PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 35 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays PWR LED on the interface module Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Remedy Supply voltage not present or too small Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage present --- Off On LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 5- 3 Status and error displays of LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs LED LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy Not relevant There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller). Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO controller is interrupted. Not relevant There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller). --- Not relevant The "Node flash test" is run (the RN/ER/MT LEDs also flash). --- No error --- MT1/MT2* Off On Flashes Not relevant Off Not relevant On Causes and measures for the transmission route: * Fiber-optic error * Maintenance demanded: Attenua* tion through the fiber-optic cable is so high that operation will soon no longer be possible. * Replacement of fiber-optic cable if damaged or aged Correct installation of the PROFINET connector/PROFINET connections * Adherence to maximum length of 50 m for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable. * Secure fit of the FOC connector * Available only on BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapters IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays LED display of configuration errors Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interface module by the ER (red) and MT (yellow) LEDs. The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs: Missing server module Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus Principle of operation You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code. The LED error display is active during POWER ON as well as during operation. Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ER and MT LEDs. remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected. Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location Sequence Description 1 ER and MT LEDs flash 3x with 0.5 Hz Signaling of error type 2 MT LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal) 3 ER and MT LEDs flash 3x with 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code 4 ER LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 5 MT LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 37 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.2 Interrupts Error display The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur. Table 5- 5 Error display Error type (MT) Error location (ER/MT) Cause of error Remedy 1 65* * Missing server module * Interruptions at the backplane bus * Short circuit of communication on the backplane bus Check the configuration of the ET 200SP. * Slot Note A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the following LEDs: * PWR LED: On * RN-, ER and MT LED: Off 5.2 Interrupts Introduction The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are evaluated based on the I/O controller used. Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts: Diagnostics interrupts Hardware interrupts Swapping interrupts Maintenance events In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO controller. Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB number and start information. Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.2 Interrupts System diagnostics STEP 7 (TIA Portal) offers innovative system diagnostics for the devices of the S7-1500 (IO controller CPU S7-1500) and the ET 200SP (IO device) automation system. Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device. For more information on system diagnostics, refer to the System Diagnostics function manual. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926). 5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly. The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82). The event which led to the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82). 5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt Triggering a hardware interrupt During a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block (e.g., OB 40). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt block. Note Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module) Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically. If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I/O modules and the communication load. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 39 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt Triggering a remove/insert interrupt In the event of a remove/insert interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the remove/insert interrupt (OB 83). The event which led to the interrupt is entered in the start information of the remove/insert interrupt (OB 83). Note Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating the remove/insert interrupt (OB83). After inserting a module, the remove/insert interrupt (OB83) is not called until the module has started up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures that data record operations can be executed without errors. 5.3 Alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Actions initiated by diagnostics alarms: The ER LED on the interface module flashes. Diagnostic data is reported as diagnostic interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and can be read via data records. Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller. The diagnostics interrupt (OB 82) is called. If the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82) is not available, the I/O controller goes into STOP mode. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms Reading out the diagnostics data Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with IO controller Application See... SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 in online and diagnostics view STEP 7 online help * As of STEP 7 V14, function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.si emens.com/WW/view/en/49 948856) * As of STEP 7 V5.5, system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.si emens.com/WW/view/en/19 292127) Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) Read data records from the IO device Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) Receive interrupts from the IO device Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the Programming Manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). Causes of error and troubleshooting The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostics alarms are described in the product manuals for I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section "Interrupts/diagnostics alarms". See also Channel diagnostics (Page 43) IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 41 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.1 Maintenance events Triggering of a maintenance event The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158-6-10 standard. The goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible. For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a network component must be checked or replaced. The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82). The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82). At the following events: The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system The I/O module signals a maintenance event. Table 5- 7 Triggering of a maintenance event Maintenance alarm Event Meaning Maintenance demanded (maintenance demanded) Synchronization loss * No synchronization telegram received No synchronization telegram was received by the sync master within the timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation. MT LED is lit * Successive synchronization telegrams are located outside permitted limits (jitter) Critical FOC attenuation The received light intensity at the FOC port is critical. The FOC should be replaced. Maintenance request from I/O module An I/O module signals a maintenance event that is sent and displayed by the interface module System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 with the following system alarms: Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon device view or in the hardware configuration. in the You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.2 Channel diagnostics Function Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records. The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC". Structure of the diagnostics data records The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.3. You can download the standard PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com) from the homepage of the PROFIBUS User Organization. Codes of the extended channel diagnostics With the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are reported: Slot number ChannelErrorType (CET) ExtendedChannelErrorType (ECET) Associated value Diagnostics AddValue Module slot 0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group" faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot (AddValue) Slot 0 0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module 0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too long 0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration 0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged BusAdapter Server module slot 0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit of the respective load module is located is coded in the "ChannelNumber" element. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 43 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.3 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO Invalid configuration states The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules. Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do not trigger an interrupt. At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the parameters. Missing server module Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter. Note Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module is still exchanging data. Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart. See also Status and error displays (Page 34) Channel diagnostics (Page 43) 5.3.4 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D Failure of the supply voltage L+ The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D: If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull alarm is generated. If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, an insert alarm is generated. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 44 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.5 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction in the rack interrupt (OB 86). This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 45 6 Compatibility Status of the supply voltage Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete configuration. For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply voltage. If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential group. Modules Order number DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 Reaction times for fail-safe modules The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 s (but at least 1.4 ms) IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 46 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN HS 6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, IM 155-6 PN HS with server module Firmware version V4.0 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version As of STEP 7 V14 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 or higher PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision - / V2.3 Configuration control Via data record Yes Supply voltage Type of supply voltage DC Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Power and voltage failure backup Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms Input current Current consumption, max. 700 mA Inrush current, max. 3.7 A It 0.09 As Power loss Power loss, typ. 2.4 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 32 bytes; for both input and output data Address space per station Address space per station, max. 968 bytes each for input data and output data IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 47 Technical specifications 6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0 Hardware configuration Racks Modules per rack, max. 30 Submodules Number of submodules per station, max. 125 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) 1st interface Interface hardware Number of ports 2 Integrated switch Yes BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ / FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC Protocols PROFINET IO device Yes Open IE communication Yes Media redundancy Yes; as MRP or MRPD client, max. 50 or 30 devices in the ring Interface hardware RJ 45 (Ethernet) Transmission method PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASETX) 10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASE-TX) Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes Protocols PROFINET IO device Services * S7 communication Yes * Isochronous mode Yes; bus cycle time min. 125 s * IRT Yes; 125 s, 250 s, 500 s, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms additionally with IRT with high performance: 250 s to 4 ms in 125 s intervals * MRP Yes * MRPD Yes * PROFINET system redundancy No * PROFIenergy Yes * Prioritized startup Yes * Shared device Yes * Number of IO controllers with shared device, max. 4 IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 48 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Technical specifications 6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0 Open IE communication TCP/IP Yes SNMP Yes LLDP Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes terminal) Constant bus cycle time Yes Shortest clock pulse 125 s Longest clock pulse 4 ms Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 s Jitter, max. 0.25 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Status display Yes Interrupts Yes Diagnostic functions Yes Diagnostic indicator LED RUN LED Yes; green LED ERROR LED Yes; red LED MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green Link LED on BusAdapter Electrical isolation Between backplane bus and electronics No between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes Standards, approvals, certificates Network loading class 3 Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 Dimensions Width 50 mm Height 117 mm Depth 74 mm Weights Weight, approx. 147 g; without BusAdapter IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 49 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 RJ45 Yes; 2 x FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 0 LC 0 Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 46 g Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC Table 7- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 53 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 50 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ Table 7- 3 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO RJ45 No FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 2 LC 0 Cable length * PCF 100 m * Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m * PCF-GI 300 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 51 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 Table 7- 4 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45) RJ45 Yes; 1x FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 1 LC 0 Cable length * PCF 100 m * Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m * PCF-GI 300 m * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 52 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC Table 7- 5 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC) RJ45 No FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x SCRJ 1 LC 0 Cable length * PCF 100 m * Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m * PCF-GI 300 m * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 53 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xLC Table 7- 6 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xLC 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC multimode glass-fiber PROFINET IO RJ45 No FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 0 LC 2 Cable length * Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km * Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Min. 0 C Max. 60 Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 54 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 Table 7- 7 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC / RJ45 PROFINET IO RJ45 Yes; 1x FC (FastConnect) No SCRJ 0 LC 1 Cable length * Copper cables 100 m * Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km * Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Min. 0 C Max. 60 Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 55 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC Table 7- 8 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 PROFINET IO RJ45 No FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x SCRJ 0 LC 1 Cable length * Copper cables 100 m * Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km * Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Min. 0 C Max. 60 Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) 56 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA Dimensional drawing A This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (front and side view) IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 57 Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Edition 04/2017 support.industry.siemens.com ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Interrupts, diagnostics, error, 5 ___________________ and system messages 6 ___________________ Compatibility ___________________ 7 Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimension drawing 04/2017 A5E03576904-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03576904-AE 04/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 4 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10 3 4 5 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................10 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Functions ................................................................................................................................13 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................19 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................20 Use of technology modules ....................................................................................................20 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................20 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 21 3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................21 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram .......................................................................................................24 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 25 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................25 4.2 4.2.1 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................25 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................25 4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................26 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................27 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages ............................................................................. 28 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................28 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................33 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt .......................................................................................33 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................34 Triggering a swapping interrupt ..............................................................................................34 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................35 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................35 Maintenance events ................................................................................................................36 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................37 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................41 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ....................................................................41 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device .......................................................42 6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 43 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 45 A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 50 IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 5 1 Guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 6 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 7 Guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 8 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 9 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 (IM 155-6 PN ST interface module and server module) 6ES7155-6AA01-0BN0 (IM 155-6 PN ST interface module with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 and server module) View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module and the server module Properties The module has the following technical properties: Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module. PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapter for RJ45 bus connector (BA 2xRJ45) or for direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2xFC) Use of fail-safe modules As of firmware version V 3.0, you can plug a light-colored or a dark-colored BaseUnit into slot 1. The module supports the following functions (Page 13) IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 10 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Maximum configuration 32 I/O modules 512 bytes I/O data 1 m backplane bus (without interface module) Accessories The following accessories can be ordered separately: BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter BA 2xFC BusAdapter 24 V DC connector Labeling strips Reference identification label Note The interface module is also available as a bundle with the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (and the server module). The article number is 6ES7155-6AA01-0BN0. A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Server module The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available separately as an accessory. The server module has the following properties: Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Features a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm) Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Note You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration software. To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server module is inserted in slot 33. You can find more information in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration (as of V3.0) Note First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark-colored one if an AC I/O module or AI Energy Meter ST is plugged. Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O module manuals. A light-colored BaseUnit must be plugged into the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module in order to route the 24 V DC supply voltage via a fuse. Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration. As of firmware V3.x, the interface modules support plugging dark-colored BaseUnits in slot 1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules: AI EnergyMeter DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1: Configuration via GSD or GSDML Configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 with - HSP0241 V2.0 for IM155-6 PN ST - HSP0242 V2.0 for IM155-6 DP HF - HSP0255 V3.0 for IM155-6 PN HF Configuration as of STEP 7 V13 SP1 IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 12 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions Introduction The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: Integrated switch with 2 ports Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP-MIB and MRP-MIB Port diagnostics Disabling ports Isochronous real-time communication Minimum update time 1 ms Prioritized startup Media redundancy (MRP) Shared device Support of submodules on suitable I/O modules Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) Device replacement without PG and without topological configuration Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO Firmware update via PROFINET IO Station extension via ET-Connection The BusAdapter provides the connection system for PROFINET IO. The following versions are available for the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module: - For standard RJ45 connector: BA 2xRJ45 - For direct connection of the bus cable: BA 2xFC The interface module supports additional functions: Identification data I&M 0 to 3 PROFIenergy Use of fail-safe modules Configuration control (option handling) Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 13 Product overview 2.2 Functions Requirements The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Product version Firmware version of the module of the module as as of of Configuration software Configuration with GSD file (http://support.a utomation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/ 19698639/1300 00)/software from a thirdparty manufacturer 1 STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP3 with HSP241 STEP 7 (TIA Portal), as of V11 SP2 Real-time communication 1 V1.0.0 X X X Isochronous real-time communication 1 V1.0.0 X X X Prioritized startup 1 V1.0.0 X X X Device replacement without programming device 1 V1.0.0 X X X Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V1.0.0 X X X Shared device 1 V1.0.0 X X X (as of V13 SP1) PROFIenergy 1 V1.0.0 --- X X Use of fail-safe modules 1 V1.0.1 X X X (as of V13 SP1) Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) 1 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13 SP1) Station extension via ETConnection 5 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13 SP1) User data 512 bytes 1 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13 SP1) Distribution of module channels to multiple submodules 1 V3.3.0 X X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0241 V3) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) Interface module; article number: 6ES71556AU01-0BN0 1 V4.1 X X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP241 V4) X (as of V14 HSP205) 1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 14 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Product overview 2.2 Functions Cabling with fixed connection setting If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you should also disable "Autonegotiation/Autocrossover". You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) Isochronous real-time communication Synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for IRT data. The reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can also be transferred without being affected by another high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time communication) at reserved, chronologically synchronized intervals. A topological configuration is required for IRT. Note IO controller as sync master with IRT communication We recommend also operating the IO controller as a sync master when configuring the IRT communication. Otherwise, IO devices with IRT and RT configuration could fail as a result of sync master failure. You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions Prioritized startup Prioritized startup describes the PROFINET IO functionality for accelerating the startup of IO devices in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication. The function reduces the time that the appropriately configured IO devices require in order to return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases: After the supply voltage has returned After a station has returned After IO devices have been activated Note Dependency of the startup time The interface module permits startup times from 0.9 s. The startup time depends on the number and type of modules. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) Device replacement Device replacement without topological configuration The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without topological configuration. Storing the name on the BusAdapter and the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced. Table 2- 2 Scenarios for using the device name Interface module empty Interface module with device name BusAdapter empty No device name available The device name from the interface module is used and copied to the BusAdapter. BusAdapter with device name The device name from the BusAdapter is used and copied to the interface module. The device name from the BusAdapter is used and copied to the interface module if this has a different device name. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 16 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Product overview 2.2 Functions Be aware of the following constraints: Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings. When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the interface module after a POWER ON. Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. If you pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage, the interface module restarts. Device replacement with topological configuration IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner: The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device. The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology must match the actual topology. IO devices that have already been used in another configuration should be reset to their factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN ST In a replacement scenario, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their as-delivered state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Media redundancy (MRP) Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 17 Product overview 2.2 Functions Shared device IO device which makes its data available to multiple IO controllers. The interface module supports shared device at submodule level. If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note the following: Make sure the configurations are consistent. In particular, modules or submodules may only be assigned to one controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error; the module or submodule will only be available in the first controller. If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned above, you must commission the ET 200SP once again. This means that you have to reload the projects of all involved IO controllers to the specific CPU after reconfiguration and, if necessary, switch the interface module POWER OFF/POWER ON. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual Note In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same send clock. If controllers do not have the same send clock, the differing send clock can result in communication relationships that are not set up. If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same send clock for engineering in separate projects. Submodules The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4 submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and parameterized. It is possible to assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers. The functions: Firmware update Write I&M data Calibration PROFIenergy can only be executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 18 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Product overview 2.2 Functions Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data available to up to two IO controllers (for ET 200SP PN ST). Each controller has read access to the same channels. The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to make its output data available to up to two IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. A second IO controller can have read access to the same channels. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) Value status The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module supports I/O modules with value status. Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules. 2.2.1 PROFIenergy Properties PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy commands during production-free periods. Reference You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the: Product manual I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual. System manual PROFINET system description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product information. Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 19 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Use of fail-safe modules Properties The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module as of firmware V1.0.1 supports the use of fail-safe modules. Reference You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. 2.2.3 Use of technology modules Technology modules As of firmware version V3.1, the interface module IM 155-6 PN ST supports the "Position input for Motion Control" mode of the technology modules TM Count 1x24V (6ES71386AA00-0BA0) and TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0). 2.2.4 Configuration control (option handling) Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner by means of the user program. Reference You can find more information on configuration control in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual on the Internet under the following link: Application collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270) in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 20 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a 24 V DC supply voltage. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage View Connector Signal name1 Description IM connection 1L+ 24 V DC 2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2 1M Ground 2M Ground (for looping through)2 1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally. 2 Maximum 10 A permitted. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 21 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45. Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 View Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit data + 2 TD_N Transmit data - 3 RD Receive data + 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RD_N Receive data - 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground Note PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 If autonegotiation is disabled, the RJ-45 socket (X1 Port 2) has the switch assignment (MDIX). IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 22 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2xFC The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC. Table 3- 3 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xFC View Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit data + 2 RD Receive data + 3 TD_N Transmit data - 4 RD_N Receive data - Reference You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 23 Wiring 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram The following figure shows a block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module. Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage M Mass ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics Backplane bus LK 1,2 TX/RX Link LED Internal power supply RN RUN LED (green) X80 24 V Supply voltage infeed DC ER ERROR LED (red) X5 BusAdapter MT MAINT LED (yellow) P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 PWR POWER LED (green) P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 24 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for IM 155-6 PN ST interface module The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module. Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN ST (GSD file) Parameters Configuration control Value range Disable/enable 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 Configuration control Default Disable Efficiency range ET 200SP You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Note If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to operate the I/O modules. Reference You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Substitute value behavior 4.3 Substitute value behavior The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is executed by the IO controller for each slot. The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior: Current-free/voltage-free Output substitute value Keep last value The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases: STOP controller Controller failure (connection interrupted) Firmware update Reset to factory settings Station stop, for example, due to: - Missing server module - Removing more than one I/O module at a time. - At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit Deactivating the IO device Note Reducing a configuration If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is switched off at the interface module. The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases: Firmware update Reset to factory settings Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet. Incorrectly configured module Module with incorrect parameter assignment IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 26 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Parameters/address space 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules Introduction The "Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" is configured on the server module as of IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1.x and GSD file 04/2013. The input data can then be read out on the server module. You will find the relevant description in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) device manual. Configurations You can select two configurations for the IM 155-6 PN ST or the server module of the IM 155-6 PN ST in the configuration software: Configuration without input data Configuration with input data Input data You can read out the status of the supply voltage L+ for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 3). Figure 4-1 Status of the supply voltage L+ Note An inserted or missing server module always signals "bit = 0" for the slot. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 27 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED display The following diagram shows the LED display on the interface module and the BusAdapter. RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) PWR (green) LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 5-1 LED display on the interface module and BusAdapter Meaning of the LEDs The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 28 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays RN/ER/MT LED on the interface module Table 5- 1 RN/ER/MT status and error displays LEDs Meaning RN (RUN) ER (ERROR) MT (MAINT) Off Off Off On Flashes On On Off Remedy Missing or insufficient supply voltage on interface module. Check the supply voltage or turn in on at the interface module. * Test of LEDs during startup: The three LEDs light up simultaneously for approximately 0.25 s. - Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the configuration software or the user program. Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the configuration software. ET 200SP starts up. - Off ET 200SP is configured. ET 200SP is reset to factory settings. On Not relevant Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging data with the IO controller. Not relevant Flashes Not relevant Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics data and remedy the error. Not relevant Flashes Not relevant Flashes The configured structure does not correspond to the actual structure of the ET 200SP . Check the structure of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is missing or defective, or whether a non-configured module is plugged. Invalid configuration states. See section Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 41) Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 and eliminate the error in the respective I/O module. Maintenance See section Maintenance events (Page 36) The "Node flash test" is run (the LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface also flash). - Hardware or firmware defective (the LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface do not flash). Run a firmware update. If the error persists, contact Siemens Industry Online Support. On Flashes Replace the interface module. * PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 29 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays PWR LED on the interface module Table 5- 2 PWR status display on the interface module PWR LED Meaning Remedy Supply voltage not present or too small Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage present - Off On LK1/LK2 LED on the BusAdapter Table 5- 3 LK1/LK2status display on the BusAdapter LEDs LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy Off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller). Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO controller is interrupted. - On There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller). The "Node flash test" is run (the RN/ER/MT LEDs also flash). - Flashes LED display of configuration errors Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interfacemodule by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs. The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs: More than one I/O module pulled Missing server module Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 30 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays Principle of operation You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code. The LED error display is active during POWER ON as well as during operation. has priority before all other states displayed by the ERROR and MAINT LED. remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected. Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location Sequence Description 1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 0.5 Hz Signaling of error type 2 MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal) 3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code 4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 31 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.1 Status and error displays Error display The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur. Table 5- 5 Error display Error type (MAINT) Error location (ERROR/MAINT) Cause of error Remedy 1 02 to 32* The number of pulled I/O modules is displayed. The diagnostics data is generated starting with two pulled I/O modules. Check the configuration of the ET 200SP. 65* * Missing server module * Interruptions at the backplane bus * Short circuit of communication on the backplane bus * Slot Note A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the following LEDs: * PWR LED: On * RN-, ER and MT LED: Off IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 32 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts Introduction The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are evaluated based on the I/O controller used. Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts: Diagnostics interrupts Hardware interrupts Swapping interrupts Maintenance events In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO controller. Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB number and start information. Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). System diagnostics In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the updated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device). Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device. You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual. 5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly. The CPU interrupts the user program and processes the diagnostics block OB 82. The interrupt triggering event is logged in the start information of OB 82. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 33 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt Triggering a hardware interrupt If there is a process interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the process interrupt block OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start information of the hardware interrupt block. Note Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module) Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically. If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I/O modules and the communication load. 5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt Triggering a swapping interrupt If there is a swapping interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the process interrupt block OB 83. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start information of OB 83. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 34 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Each diagnostics alarm initiates the following actions: The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes. Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and can be read via data records. Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller. OB 82 is called. If OB 82 is not available, the I/O controller goes into STOP mode. You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. Reading the diagnostics Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with IO Application controller SIMATIC S7 See... Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 STEP 7 online help using Online and Diagnostics view * as of STEP 7 V12 function Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) manual PROFINET with Read data records from the IO STEP 7 V13 device (http://support.automation.siem Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) ens.com/WW/view/en/4994885 Receive interrupts from the IO 6) device * as of STEP 7 V5.5 system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siem ens.com/WW/view/en/1929212 7) Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 35 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms Causes of error and troubleshooting The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostics alarms are described in the Product Manuals for I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section, "Interrupts/diagnostics alarms". See also Channel diagnostics (Page 37) 5.3.2 Maintenance events Triggering of a maintenance event The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158-6-10 standard. The goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible. For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a network component must be checked or replaced. The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic block OB 82. The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the OB 82. The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in the case of the following events: Table 5- 7 Triggering of a maintenance event Maintenance alarm Event Meaning Maintenance demanded (maintenance demanded) Synchronization loss * No synchronization frame received No synchronization frame was received by the sync master within the timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation. LED MAINT is lit. * Successive synchronization frames are located outside permitted limits (jitter) System events in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 with the following system events: Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon device view or in the hardware configuration. in the You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 36 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.3 Channel diagnostics Function Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records. The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC". Structure of the diagnostics data records The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.3. You can purchase the standard from the PROFIBUS User Organization on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com). Coding of the extended channel diagnostics (as of firmware version V3.3.0) With the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are reported: Slot number ChannelErrorType (CET) ExtendedChannelErrorType (ECET) Associated value Diagnostics AddValue Module slot 0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group" faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot (AddValue) Slot 0 0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module 0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too long 0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration 0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged BusAdapter Server module slot 0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit of the respective load module is located is coded in the "ChannelNumber" element. Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records (firmware version < V3.3.0) The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The following BlockVersion applies to the IM 155-6 PN ST interface modules: Table 5- 8 Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records IM 155-6 PN ST interface module BlockVersion 6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 W#16#0101 IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 37 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the User Structure Identifier (USI) The following manufacturer-specific diagnostics are signaled in the USI with the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module: Table 5- 9 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the USI USI no. W#16#... Diagnostics 0003 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups * 0004 Diagnostics with missing server module 0005 Diagnostics when more than one I/O module has been pulled 0006 Diagnostics with incorrect BaseUnit 0007 Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration * As of IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1.x and GSD file 04/2013, this diagnostics is only signaled if the "Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" parameter has been activated. USI structure = W#16#0003 Table 5- 10 USI structure = W#16#0003 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0003 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with failure of supply voltage L+ as of slot x 2 Followed by the slot as of which the supply voltage L+ has failed. Slot W#16#0001 to W#16#0020 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 Followed by 2 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 38 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms USI structure = W#16#0004 Table 5- 11 USI structure = W#16#0004 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0004 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with missing server module 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller. Followed by 4 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Reserved 1 USI structure = W#16#0005 Table 5- 12 USI structure = W#16#0005 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0005 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if more than one I/O module has been pulled. The number of pulled I/O modules is displayed. 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller. The number of pulled I/O modules follows Quantity W#16#0002 to W#16#0020 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 Followed by 2 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 39 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms USI structure = W#16#0006 Table 5- 13 USI structure = W#16#0006 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0006 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if an I/O module is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit. 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller. Followed by the slot for the I/O module: Slot W#16#0001 to W#16#0020 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 Followed by 2 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 USI structure = W#16#0007 Table 5- 14 USI structure = W#16#0007 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0007 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if operation is not possible with existing bus configuration 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller Followed by the slot for the I/O module: Slot W#16#0001 to W#16#0040 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 If slot 0 is specified, check the width of the station configuration (maximum 1 m). Followed by 2 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 40 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO Invalid configuration states The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules. Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do not trigger an interrupt. At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the parameters. Missing server module Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter Note If you drag more than one I/O module or the server module the node will stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module is still exchanging data. Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart. See also Status and error displays (Page 28) Channel diagnostics (Page 37) 5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D Failure of the supply voltage L+ The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D: If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull alarm is generated. If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, an insert alarm is generated. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 41 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5.3 Alarms 5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 86. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 42 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 6 Compatibility Compatibility between the versions of the IM 155-6 PN ST The table below describes which version you can use in the configuration for which actually plugged version of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module. The table also describes the functional differences of the versions of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module. IM 155-6 PN ST configured IM 155-6 PN ST plugged Changes compared to previous version V1.0.x V1.1.x V3.1.x V3.3.x V4.1.x V1.0 --- V1.1 --- * The "Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" parameter can be set on the server module * "Status of supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" can be configured on the server module * User data 512 bytes * Station extension via ET-Connection Support of submodules V3.1 --- --- V3.3 --- --- --- * V4.1 --- --- --- --- --- Note IM 155-6 PN ST (6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0) with firmware version V4.1 You can upgrade the previous version of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES71556AU00-0BN0) to the firmware version V4.1. In this case configure the module as IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) with firmware version V4.1. IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 43 Compatibility Status of the supply voltage Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete configuration. For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply voltage. If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential group. Modules Article number DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 Reaction times for fail-safe modules The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 s (but at least 1.4 ms) IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 44 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN ST Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 General information Product type designation IM 155-6 PN ST with server module HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V4.1 Vendor identification (VendorID) 002AH Device identifier (DeviceID) 0313H Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / - Configuration control via dataset Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Short-circuit protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 450 mA Current consumption, max. 550 mA Inrush current, max. 3.7 A It 0.09 A*s Power Infeed power to the backplane bus 4.5 W Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.9 W IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 45 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 256 byte; per input / output Address space per station * Address space per station, max. 512 byte; Dependent on configuration Hardware configuration Rack * Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules Submodules * Number of submodules per station, max. 256 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2 * integrated switch Yes * BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; Applicable BusAdapter: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC Functionality * PROFINET IO Device Yes * Open IE communication Yes * Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP Interface types RJ 45 (Ethernet) * Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) * 10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services * 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) * Autonegotiation Yes * Autocrossing Yes IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 46 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 PROFINET IO Device Services - Isochronous mode No - Open IE communication Yes - IRT Yes; with send cycles of between 250 s and 4 ms in increments of 125 s - MRP Yes - MRPD No - PROFINET system redundancy No - PROFIenergy Yes - Prioritized startup Yes - Shared device Yes - Number of IO Controllers with shared device, max. 2 Open IE communication * TCP/IP Yes * SNMP Yes * LLDP Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Status indicator Yes Alarms Yes Diagnostic functions Yes Diagnostics indication LED * RUN LED Yes; Green LED * ERROR LED Yes; Red LED * MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter Potential separation between backplane bus and electronics No between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes; 1500 V AC between supply and all other circuits No Permissible potential difference between different circuits Safety extra low voltage SELV Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 47 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 Standards, approvals, certificates Network loading class 2 Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Connection method ET-Connection * via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules Dimensions Width 50 mm Height 117 mm Depth 74 mm Weights Weight, approx. 147 g; without BusAdapter Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 RJ45 Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 46 g IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 48 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC Table 7- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xFC 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 Interfaces PROFINET IO Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x Cable length * Copper cables 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 53 g IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 49 Dimension drawing A This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (front and side view) IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) 50 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview ___________________ 3 Wiring ___________________ 4 Parameters/address space 5 ___________ Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ___________________ 6 Compatibility ___________________ 7 Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimension drawing 10/2018 A5E03915895-AH Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03915895-AH 10/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes labeled as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 4 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 3 4 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 2.2.15 2.2.16 2.2.17 2.2.18 2.2.19 Functions ................................................................................................................................16 Device replacement ................................................................................................................20 Real-time communication .......................................................................................................21 Isochronous real-time communication ....................................................................................21 Prioritized startup ....................................................................................................................22 Submodules ............................................................................................................................22 Media redundancy (MRP) .......................................................................................................23 Shared device .........................................................................................................................23 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................24 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) ......................................................24 System redundancy S2 ...........................................................................................................25 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") .................................................25 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................25 Value status ............................................................................................................................26 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................26 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................27 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................27 Multi Hot Swap ........................................................................................................................27 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) ..............................................................................28 Setting the time .......................................................................................................................29 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 30 3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................30 3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................31 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 32 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................32 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................32 Enable configuration control ...................................................................................................32 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage ...............................................................................33 4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................33 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................34 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 5 Table of contents 5 6 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 35 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 35 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 38 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt....................................................................................... 39 Triggering a hardware interrupt.............................................................................................. 39 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt ...................................................................... 40 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 41 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 41 Maintenance events ............................................................................................................... 42 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 43 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................ 46 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ................................................................... 47 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device ...................................................... 47 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 48 6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 48 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 52 A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 56 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 6 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 1 Guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 7 Guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 8 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 9 Guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 10 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the AS interface module 155-6 PN/2 HF with included accessory (24 V DC connector and server module) and optional accessories (labeling strips and reference identification label) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 12 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO. Power supply 1 L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and is available as replacement part. PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters - BA 2xRJ45 for RJ45 bus connector - BA 2xFC for direct connection of the bus cable - BA 2xLC for glass fiber-optic cable - BA 2xSCRJ for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable - BA SCRJ/RJ45 as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector - BA SCRJ/FC as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable - BA LC/RJ45 as media converter for glass fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector - BA LC/FC as media converter for glass fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable Maximum configuration 64 ET 200SP I/O modules + 16 ET 200AL modules 1 m backplane bus (without interface and server module) Maximum amount of I/O data Gross data length (for input data and output data): Without system redundancy S2: 1440 bytes 1440 bytes for shared device with 2 IOC (in total for both IOC) 360 bytes for shared device with more than 2 IOC (per IOC) With system redundancy S2: 1000 bytes 360 bytes for system redundancy S2 and shared device with min. 1 additional IOC (per IOC) The number of maximum net data length for input data and output data depends on the number and type of I/O modules used including ET 200AL modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties Net data length (for input data and output data): The following minimum lengths can be applied without shared device and without explicit calculation of the maximum net data length. 933 bytes without system redundancy S2 493 bytes with system redundancy S2 Calculation of the max. net data length: Max. net data length = Max. gross length - number of I/O submodules (no user data, input or output data) - number of I/O mixed modules (input and output data) - 5 bytes for interface module and server module without ET-Connection (6 bytes for interface module with ET-Connection) The result of the calculation of the maximum net data length applies equally to input and output data. Accessories You order the following accessories separately: BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter BA 2xFC BusAdapter BA 2xLC BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter BA LC/FC BusAdapter Strain relief for PROFINET cable 24 V DC connector (one included in the scope of delivery) Labeling strips Reference identification label Information on the BusAdapters is available in the BusAdapter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751716) manual. You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Server module The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available separately as an accessory. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 14 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.1 Properties The server module has the following properties: Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Includes a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm). Provides station functions, e.g., group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+, status bytes. Identification data I&M 0 to 4 Note You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration software. Place the server module in the last slot of the configuration. If there are 64 I/O modules, the server module is plugged in slot 65. You can find more information in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration The interface modules support plugging a dark-colored BaseUnit in slot 1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules: AI Energy Meter ST DI 4 x 120...230 V AC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) DQ 4 x 24...230 V AC/2 A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Note First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O module manuals. You route the infeed of the 24 V DC supply voltage over an external fuse. The 24 V DC supply voltage is provided by a light-colored BaseUnit. Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1: Configuration via GSD or GSDML Configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 with - HSP0255 V3.0 for IM155-6 PN HF Configuration as of STEP 7 V13 SP1 See also Functions (Page 16) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions Introduction The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: Integrated switch with 2 ports Supported Ethernet services: PING, ARP, SNMP, LLDP Port diagnostics Disabling ports Minimum update time 250 s Device replacement without programming device, also without topological configuration Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO or RESET button Firmware update via PROFINET IO Isochronous real-time communication Prioritized startup Media redundancy (MRP) Shared device Distribution of module channels to a maximum of 4 submodules Module-internal or submodule-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) Isochronous mode System redundancy S2 Station extension via ET-Connection Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") - Docking station - Docking unit Supports BusAdapter for different connection technologies to PROFINET IO. The interface module supports additional functions: Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 4 PROFIenergy Configuration control (option handling) Use of fail-safe modules Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap) Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 16 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions Requirements The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the module functions Function Functional status of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of Configuration software Real-time communication 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Isochronous real-time communication 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Prioritized startup 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Device replacement without programming device 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Shared device 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Value status 1 V2.0.0 X X X X PROFIenergy 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Multi Hot Swap 1 V2.0.0 X X X X Use of fail-safe modules 1 V2.0.0 --- X X X Oversampling 1 V2.1.0 X X X X Isochronous mode 1 V2.1.0 --- X X X Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) 1 V2.2.0 X --- X X BusAdapter for fiber-optic cable FOC: BA 2xSCRJ 3 V2.2.0 X --- X X (as of V13 SP1) System redundancy S2 to S7-400H 1 V3.0.0 X --- X --- System redundancy S2 IEC-compliant 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- --- System redundancy S2 to S7-1500R/H 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- X (as of V15.1) Station extension via ETConnection 1 V3.0.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4) X (as of V13 SP1) Maximum user data length per module: 288 bytes 1 V3.1.0 X X (as of V5.5 SP4) X (as of V5.5 SP4) X (as of V13 SP1) Configuration with STEP 7 as of STEP 7 as of GSD file V5.5 SP3 V5.5 SP4 with (http://support.auto with HSP 233 HSP 250/255 mation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/19 698639/130000)/s oftware from a third-party manufacturer 1 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V12.0.1 with HSP 0058 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 17 Product overview 2.2 Functions Function Functional status of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter 3 V3.1.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0250 V3) X (as of V13 SP1, HSP0129 V1.0) BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 3 V3.1.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0250 V3) X (as of V13 SP1, HSP0129 V1.0) BA 2xLC BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0250/255 V4) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0250/255 V4) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) BA LC/FC BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0250/255 V4) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) Distribution of module channels to multiple submodules 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0255 V4) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) Maintenance interrupts of I/O modules 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0255 V4) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) Extended Channel Diagnostics 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 SP4, HSP0255 V4) X (as of V13 SP1, Update 6) Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- X (as of V15.1) 1 Configuration software Configuration with STEP 7 as of STEP 7 as of GSD file V5.5 SP3 V5.5 SP4 with (http://support.auto with HSP 233 HSP 250/255 mation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/19 698639/130000)/s oftware from a third-party manufacturer 1 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V12.0.1 with HSP 0058 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system Cabling with fixed connection setting If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable "Autonegotiation/Autocrossover". Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 18 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Compatibility with the IM 155-6 PN interface module In an existing plant, the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF replaces the IM 155-6 PN ST without reconfiguration. When the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF replaces the IM 155-6 PN ST, it is possible to insert and remove several I/O modules during operation. For more information on compatibility, refer to section: Compatibility (Page 48) See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 19 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 Device replacement Device replacement Device replacement without topological configuration The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without topological configuration. Replacing the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name. Table 2- 2 Scenarios for using the device name Interface module empty Interface module with device name BusAdapter without device name No device name available The device name from the interface module is used and copied to the BusAdapter. BusAdapter with device name The device name from the BusAdapter is used and copied to the interface module. The device name from the BusAdapter is used and copied to the interface module if this has a different device name. Be aware of the following constraints: Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings. When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the interface module after a POWER ON. Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. Device replacement with topological configuration IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner: The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device. The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology must match the actual topology. If the IO devices were already used in another configuration, reset them to factory settings before reusing them. You can find information on this in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 20 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Real-time communication Real-time communication A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a providerconsumer model. 2.2.3 Isochronous real-time communication Isochronous real-time communication A synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IO data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for the transmission. The reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data is also transmitted in reserved, timesynchronized intervals, unaffected by other high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time communication). A topology configuration is required for IRT. Note IO controller as sync master with IRT communication We recommend operating the IO controller also as a sync master when configuring the IRT communication. Otherwise, IRT- and RT-configured IO devices may fail if the sync master fails. You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 21 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.4 Prioritized startup Prioritized startup Prioritized startup is a PROFINET IO function in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication. It reduces the time needed for correspondingly configured IO devices to return to cyclic user data exchange. The function accelerates the startup of IO devices in the following cases: After recovery of supply voltage After station recovery After activation of IO devices Note Dependency of the startup time The interface module permits startup times from 0.5 s. The startup time depends on the number and type of modules. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.5 Submodules Submodules The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4 submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and parameterized. A maximum of 256 submodules is supported, whereby 4 submodules are used for the interface module and one submodule for the server module. You can assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers. The following functions are only executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration: Firmware update Write I&M data Calibration PROFIenergy Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 22 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.6 Media redundancy (MRP) Media redundancy (MRP) Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.7 Shared device Shared device IO device that makes its data available to up to four IO controllers. The interface module supports shared device at submodule level. If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note the following: Make sure the configurations are consistent. Assign each module or submodule to only one IO controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error as the module or submodule will only be available in the first controller. If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned above, you must commission ET 200SP again. This means you must download the projects of all involved IO controllers to the respective CPU again after reconfiguration. If necessary, perform a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the interface module. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Note In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same send clock. If the controller does not have the same send clock, this results in communication relationships not being set up. If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same send clock for engineering in separate projects. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 23 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.8 Isochronous mode Isochronous mode The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the system is simultaneously acquired and simultaneously output. For this purpose, the I/O data, the transmission cycle via PROFINET IO, and the user program are synchronized. The constant PROFINET IO cycle forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous mode of I/O data for the modules starting at 250 s. The IO device can exchange isochronous process data with a maximum of one IO controller. Note When the module is pulled or no written control data record has been written with activated configuration control, the IO controller cannot access a module. In this case, cycle time violations may occur with activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB (OB61). The time error OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation. This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI" (SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions. It depends on the set cycle time and the configuration limits. You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual. As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.9 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data available to up to four IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels. The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to be operated by up to four IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. Up to three additional IO controllers can have read access to the same channels. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 24 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.10 System redundancy S2 System redundancy S2 An IO device with S2 system redundancy supports redundant ARs. In a redundant system, an IO device with system redundancy S2 has a redundant AR for each of the two CPUs (IO controllers). If one CPU fails, the IO device with S2 system redundancy remains accessible to the remaining IO controller via the AR. The interface module supports system redundancy S2 on CPUs S7-400H (from firmware version V3.0) and on CPUs S7-1500R/H (from firmware version V4.2). You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) 2.2.11 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") Docking station Docking unit You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual 2.2.12 Oversampling Oversampling The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports the oversampling mode of HS modules. With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in isochronous mode. Additional information on oversampling can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 25 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.13 Value status Value status The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports I/O modules with value status. Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules. 2.2.14 PROFIenergy Properties PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy commands during production-free periods. Reference You will find additional information on PROFIenergy in the following manuals: Manual I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) Function manual PROFINET as of STEP 7 V12 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) System manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product information Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 26 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.15 Configuration control (option handling) Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your automation system for future expansions or changes. Configuration control means you can configure the planned maximum expansion of your automation system in advance and flexibly vary it later by means of the user program. Reference You can find more information on configuration control: In the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) On the Internet under the following link: Application collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270). In the STEP 7 online help. 2.2.16 Use of fail-safe modules Properties The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports the use of fail-safe modules. Reference 2.2.17 Properties You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Multi Hot Swap You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation. Note The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module does not support removal and insertion of the server module, interface module and BusAdapter during operation. Reference You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 27 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.18 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Introduction Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) offers the following advantages: Improved performance during transmission of data by bypassing the IO controller. Deterministic cycle times Cost-effective, high-performance solutions for applications where the performance of a specific technology module is not required. Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) enables direct exchange of data between specific IO modules within a station via the interface module. This enables you to move small and/or time-critical tasks to the IO module. You achieve better performance while reducing the load on the CPU. With Module-to-Module Communication (MtM), the interface module copies the input data of an IO module directly to a different IO module via the ET 200SP backplane bus. The IO module (data sink) carries out application-specific processing of the data. You configure the data source and data sink for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) in the hardware configuration of the respective output module. Programming of the user program is not required in the variant for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM). Note The preparation of the input data in the output module (mapping) and the output of the data to the outputs are application- and technology-specific. Example: The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports * the application cam control with Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) under the designation DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM Additional information can be found in the manuals of the corresponding IO modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 28 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.19 Setting the time The interface module supports time setting, for example with AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0). We show you how to set the time in an application example (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 29 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a 24 V DC supply voltage. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage View Connector Signal name1 Description IM connection 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) 2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2 1M Ground 2M Ground (for looping through)2 1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally. 2 Maximum 10 A permitted. Reference You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 30 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Wiring 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module. Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics M Ground Backplane bus LK 1,2 Link TX/RX LED (green) Internal power supply MT 1,2 MAINTENANCE FiberOptic LED (SCRJ port, yellow) X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage RN RUN LED (green) X5 BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red) P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINTENANCE LED (yellow) P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (green) Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 31 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module The following table shows the parameters for the interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF. Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Effective range Enable configuration control Yes/No No ET 200SP Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage Yes/No No ET 200SP 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 Enable configuration control Enable configuration control You use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Note If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to operate the I/O modules. Reference You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the STEP 7 online help. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 32 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Parameters/address space 4.3 Substitute value behavior 4.2.2 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage is triggered if the supply voltage falls below the value 19.2 V DC. When the supply voltage then exceeds 20.4 V DC, the diagnostics alarm is reported as outgoing. See also Channel diagnostics (Page 43) 4.3 Substitute value behavior Substitute value behavior The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior: Zero current or zero voltage Output substitute value Keep last value The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases: STOP controller Controller failure (connection interrupted) Parameter assignment phase during startup Deactivating the IO device Station stop - Missing server module - Insertion of invalid I/O modules - At least one I/O module is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit Note Reducing a configuration If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is switched off at the interface module. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 33 Parameters/address space 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases: Firmware update Reset to factory settings Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet Incorrectly configured module Module with incorrect parameter assignment Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input (MSI) Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input (MSI) corresponds to the behavior described above. 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules The status of the supply voltage L+ of the ET 200SP I/O modules can be mapped to the server module with the interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF. You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 34 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The following figure shows the LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter. RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) PWR (green) MT2 (yellow), SCRJ port LK2 (green) MT1 (yellow), SCRJ port LK1 (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 35 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs LEDs Meaning RN (RUN) ER (ERROR) MT (MAINT) Off Off Off On On On Not relevant Not relevant Flashes Solution Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the interface module. interface module.* Test of LEDs during startup: The three LEDs light up simultaneously for approximately 0.25 s. - Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the configuration software or via the user program. Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the configuration software. ET 200SP starts up. - ET 200SP is being assigned parameters. ET 200SP is being reset to factory settings. Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging data with the IO controller. - On Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the error. The preset configuration does not match the actual configuration of the ET 200SP. Check the configuration of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is missing, faulty or not configured. Invalid configuration states. For additional information, see section Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 46) Parameter assignment error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7. Eliminate the error in the corresponding I/O module. Maintenance For additional information, see section Maintenance events (Page 42) The "Node flash test" is run (LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface also flash). - Hardware or firmware defective (LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface do not flash). Run a firmware update. If the error persists, contact Siemens Industry Online Support. Not relevant Flashes Flashes Not relevant On Flashes Flashes Replace the interface module. * PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 36 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays PWR LED on the interface module Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Solution Supply voltage not present or too small. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage present. - Off On Observe the maintenance messages if the MAIN LED is lit LED display of configuration errors Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed IO system are indicated on the interface module via the red ERROR LED and the yellow MAINT LED. The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs: No server module Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus Operating principle The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code. The LED error display: Is activated during POWER ON and during operation. Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR and MAINT LED. Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated. Table 5- 3 Display of error type and error location Sequence Description 1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 0.5 Hz Indication of the error type 2 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal) 3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code 4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 37 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Error display Table 5- 4 Error display Error type (MAINT) Error location (ERROR/ MAINT) Cause of error Solution 1 65 * No server module * Interruptions on the backplane bus * Short circuit of communication on the backplane bus Check the configuration of the ET 200SP. Note A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the following LEDs: * PWR LED: On * RN, ER and MT LED: Off 5.2 Interrupts Introduction The I/O device triggers interrupts as a reaction to specific errors. Interrupts are evaluated based on the I/O controller used. Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts: Diagnostic error interrupts Hardware interrupts Pull/plug interrupts Maintenance events In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO controller. Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB number and start information. Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 38 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts System diagnostics In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the innovated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device). Independent of the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the S71500 CPU, the CPU web server and the HMI device. You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926) function manual. 5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module triggers a diagnostic error interrupt if this is configured accordingly. The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the diagnostic error interrupt OB (OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostic error interrupt OB. 5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt Triggering a hardware interrupt If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the hardware interrupt block OB, e.g., OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start information of the hardware interrupt OB. Note Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module) Do not use hardware interrupts for functional purposes (e.g. the cyclic generation of hardware interrupts). If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I/O modules and the communication load. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 39 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt In the event of a remove/insert module interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the remove/insert module OB, e.g. OB 83. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the remove/insert module OB. Note Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating OB83. After inserting a module, OB83 is not called until the module has started up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures that data record operations can be executed without errors. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 40 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm There can be more than one diagnostics alarm at the same time. Each diagnostics alarm initiates the following actions: The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes. Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and can be read via data records. Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller. (S7-300/400) The diagnostic interrupt OB is called. If the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB 82) is not available, the IO controller goes into STOP mode. You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. Reading the diagnostics Table 5- 5 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with IO controller Application See... SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 using Online and Diagnostics view STEP 7 online help * as of STEP 7 V12, function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 as of V12 (http://support.automation.si emens.com/WW/view/en/49 948856) * as of STEP 7 V5.5, system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.si emens.com/WW/view/en/19 292127) Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) Read data records from the IO device Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) Receive interrupts from the IO device Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 41 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Causes of error and troubleshooting The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostic alarms are described in the manuals for I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section, "Interrupts, error messages, and system events". See also Channel diagnostics (Page 43) 5.3.2 Maintenance events Triggering of a maintenance event The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158 Type 10 standard. The goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible. For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a plant component must be checked or replaced. The CPU interrupts user program execution and executes the diagnostic error interrupt OB. The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the diagnostic error interrupt OB. The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in the case of the following event: Table 5- 6 Triggering of a maintenance event Maintenance alarm Event Alarm/Meaning Maintenance demanded Synchronization loss * LED MAINT is lit. Undervoltage No synchronization frame received. No synchronization frame was received by the sync master within the timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation. * Successive synchronization frames are located outside permitted limits (jitter). * Diagnostics Undervoltage If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the value 19.2 V DC, this diagnostics is reported as incoming Maintenance demanded. System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with the following system alarms: Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon device view or in the hardware configuration. in the You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 42 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.3 Channel diagnostics Function Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records. The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC". Structure of the diagnostics data records The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2. If required, you can find the standard on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) on the PROFIBUS user organization home page. Codes of the extended channel diagnostics With the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are reported: ChannelErrorType (CET) ExtendedChannelErrorType (ECET) Associated value AddValue Diagnostics 0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group" faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot (AddValue) 0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module 0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too large 0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration 0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged BusAdapter 0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit of the respective load module is located is coded in the "ChannelNumber" element. 0x0610 0x06B4 0x00 Diagnostics "Undervoltage power supply" Note: This diagnostics is not supported by the hardware IM 155-6 PN HF (6ES7155-6AU000CN0). If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the value 19.2 V DC, this diagnostics is reported as incoming Maintenance demanded. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 43 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records (IM 155-6 PN HF Version < V3.3) The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The following BlockVersion applies to the IM 155-6 PN HF interface modules: Table 5- 7 Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records IM 155-6 PN HF interface module BlockVersion 6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0 W#16#0101 Note Manufacturer-specific diagnostics are not reported as of version V3.3 for the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF. Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the User Structure Identifier (USI) The following manufacturer-specific diagnostics are signaled in the USI with the IM 155-6 PN HF interface module: Table 5- 8 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the USI USI no. W#16#... Diagnostics 0003 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups 0004 Diagnostics with missing server module 0006 Diagnostics with incorrect BaseUnit 0007 Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration USI structure = W#16#0003 Table 5- 9 USI structure = W#16#0003 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0003 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with failure of supply voltage L+ as of slot x of the ET 200SP module 2 Followed by the slot as of which the supply voltage L+ has failed. Slot W#16#0001 to W#16#0040 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 Followed by 2 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 44 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms USI structure = W#16#0004 Table 5- 10 USI structure = W#16#0004 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0004 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with missing server module 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller Followed by 4 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Reserved 1 USI structure = W#16#0006 Table 5- 11 USI structure = W#16#0006 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0006 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if an ET 200SP I/O module is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit. 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller Followed by the slot for the I/O module: Slot W#16#0001 to W#16#0040 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 Followed by 2 reserved bytes: Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 45 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms USI structure = W#16#0007 Table 5- 12 USI structure = W#16#0007 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0007 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if operation is not possible with existing bus configuration 2 Result: Station stop * The I/O modules fail substitute value behavior * The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller Followed by the slot for the I/O module: Slot W#16#0001 to W#16#0040 Bit 8 to 15 1 Bit 0 to 7 1 If slot 0 is specified, check the width of the station configuration (maximum 1 m). Followed by 2 reserved bytes: 5.3.4 Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO Invalid configuration states The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the failure of the IO device or prevent data exchange: Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration. Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do not trigger an interrupt. At least one I/O module is plugged into a different BaseUnit as the one configured in the parameters. No server module. Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter. Note Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module continues to exchange data. Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 46 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms See also Status and error displays (Page 35) Channel diagnostics (Page 43) 5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D Failure of the supply voltage L+ The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D: If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is generated. If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is generated. 5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller Diagnostics received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. Read the E00CH data record in startup OB using the instruction "RDREC". This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices If you want to read the occurring diagnostics in the STOP state of the IO controller, you have to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 47 6 Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Compatibility with the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module If you exchange or replace an interface module, the following table shows the compatibilities: Between the interface modules IM 155-6 PN/2 HF and IM 155-6 PN ST Between the various firmware versions Interface module configured Interface module plugged IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1 IM 155-6 PN ST V3.1 IM 155-6 PN ST V3.3 IM 155-6 PN ST V4.1 IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 IM 155-6 PN HF V2.1 IM 155-6 PN HF V2.2 IM 155-6 PN HF V3.0 IM 155-6 PN HF V3.1 IM 155-6 PN HF V3.3 IM 155-6 PN HF V4.2 IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 Yes* --- --- --- --- Yes --- --- --- --- --- --- IM 155-6 PN HF V2.1 Yes* Yes* --- --- --- Yes Yes --- --- --- --- --- IM 155-6 PN HF V2.2 Yes* Yes* --- --- --- Yes Yes Yes --- --- --- --- IM 155-6 PN HF V3.0 Yes* Yes* --- --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- --- IM 155-6 PN HF V3.1 Yes* Yes* Yes* --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- IM 155-6 PN HF V3.3 Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* --- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --- IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.2 Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes * The interface module IM 155-6 PN HF only supports the transmission rate 100 Mbps for Ethernet services. Station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules Certain I/O modules with functional status 001 and 002 do not support a station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 48 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules The table below shows all modules that do not support a station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules: Table 6- 1 Incompatible modules with functional status Modules Article number Up to functional status Analog modules AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1 002 AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1 002 AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 002 AI 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 002 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 002 DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 002 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 002 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 002 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 002 Digital modules Status of the supply voltage Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete configuration. For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply voltage. If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential group. Modules Article number DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 Resetting an interface module to factory settings via the RESET button There is a special operation for interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF to reset it to the factory settings using the Reset button. Requirements The supply voltage to the interface module must be switched on. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 49 Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Required tools 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (for resetting via the RESET button) Procedure 1. Remove the interface module from the mounting rail and swivel it downwards. 2. The RESET button is located on the back of the interface module behind a small opening: Push a screwdriver into the small opening, thus pressing the RESET button. 3. Release the RESET button. 4. Press the RESET button for another 3 seconds. 5. Look at the LED display of the interface module to see whether the reset was successful: RUN LED flashes for 3 seconds, ERROR and MAINT LED are off. 6. Install the interface module back on the mounting rail. 7. Assign parameters to the interface module again. AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module Note For operation of the AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module, firmware version V1.0 (6ES71356HD00-0BA1) with the interface module, you need to set the "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter to "Turn off" with a PROFINET send clock < 1 ms. Reaction times for fail-safe modules The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 s (but at least 1.4 ms) Operation with activated system redundancy S2 Note Restrictions in operation with activated system redundancy S2 You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM155-6 PN/2 HF, firmware version V4.2 with activated system redundancy S2: * Configuration control (option handling) * Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 50 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Interface module IM 155-6 PPN HF (6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) with version V4.2 Note You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM 155-6 PN HF (6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) with firmware version V4.2: * Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) * Setting the time * Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 51 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0 General information Product type designation IM 155-6 PN/2 HF with server module Firmware version V4.2 * FW update possible Number of MtM communication relationships/connections, max. Yes 16 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Module swapping during operation (hot swapping) Yes; Multi-hot swapping * Tool changer Yes; Docking station and docking unit * Local coupling, IO data No * Local coupling, data records No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V15.1 or higher * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Configurable via GSD file * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Configuration control via dataset Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 52 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0 Input current Current consumption, max. 700 mA Inrush current, max. 4.5 A It 0.25 A*s Power loss Power loss, typ. 2.4 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 288 byte; For input and output data respectively Address space per station * Address space per station, max. 1 440 byte; Dependent on configuration Hardware configuration Rack * Modules per rack, max. 64; + 16 ET 200AL modules Submodules * Number of submodules per station, max. 256 Time stamping Accuracy 10 ms Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 2; via BusAdapter * integrated switch Yes * BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; Compatible BusAdapter: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ / FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC Protocols * PROFINET IO Device Yes * Open IE communication Yes * Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP Interface types RJ 45 (Ethernet) * Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) * 10 Mbps No * 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) * Autonegotiation Yes * Autocrossing Yes Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 53 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0 Protocols PROFINET IO Device Services - Isochronous mode Yes; Bus cycle time: min. 250 s - Open IE communication Yes - IRT Yes; 250 s, 500 s, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms additionally with IRT with high performance: 250 s to 4 ms in 125 s frame - PROFIenergy Yes - Prioritized startup Yes - Shared device Yes - Number of IO Controllers with shared device, max. 4 Redundancy mode - MRP Yes - MRPD No - PROFINET system redundancy (S2) Yes; NAP S2 - Redundant PROFINET configuration (R1) No - H-Sync forwarding Yes Open IE communication * TCP/IP Yes * SNMP Yes * LLDP Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Equidistance Yes shortest clock pulse 250 s max. cycle 4 ms Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 250 s Jitter, max. 1 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Status indicator Yes Alarms Yes Diagnostic functions Yes Diagnostics indication LED * RUN LED Yes; Green LED * ERROR LED Yes; Red LED * MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 54 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0 * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Connection to network LINK (green) Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter Potential separation between backplane bus and electronics No between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes between supply and all other circuits No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Network loading class 3 Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Installation altitude above sea level, max. 2 000 m; On request: Installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Connection method ET-Connection * via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules Mechanics/material Strain relief Yes; Optional Dimensions Width 50 mm Height 117 mm Depth 74 mm Weights Weight, approx. 120 g; without BusAdapter Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 55 Dimension drawing A This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module, front and side views Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0) 56 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring ___________________ 4 Parameters/address space 5 ___________ Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ___________________ 6 Compatibility 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Dimension drawing 10/2018 A5E44899355-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E44899355-AA 10/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes labeled as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 4 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 3 4 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 2.2.15 2.2.16 2.2.17 2.2.18 2.2.19 2.2.20 Functions ................................................................................................................................16 Device replacement ................................................................................................................19 Real-time communication .......................................................................................................20 Isochronous real-time communication ....................................................................................20 Prioritized startup ....................................................................................................................21 Submodules ............................................................................................................................21 Media redundancy (MRP) .......................................................................................................22 Shared device .........................................................................................................................22 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................23 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) ......................................................23 System redundancy S2 ...........................................................................................................24 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") .................................................24 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................24 Value status ............................................................................................................................25 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................25 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................25 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................26 Multi Hot Swap ........................................................................................................................26 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) ..............................................................................27 Setting the time .......................................................................................................................28 Interface local coupling of IO data ..........................................................................................28 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 30 3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................30 3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................31 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 33 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................33 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................33 Enable configuration control ...................................................................................................33 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage ...............................................................................34 4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................34 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................35 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 5 Table of contents 5 6 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 36 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 36 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 39 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt....................................................................................... 40 Triggering a hardware interrupt.............................................................................................. 40 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt ...................................................................... 41 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 42 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 42 Maintenance events ............................................................................................................... 43 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 44 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................ 45 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ................................................................... 45 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device ...................................................... 46 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 47 6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 47 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 49 A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 53 Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 6 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 1 Guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 7 Guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 8 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 9 Guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 10 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 (interface module 155-6 PN/3 HF and server module) View of the module Figure 2-1 View AS interface module 155-6 PN/3 HF with included accessory (24 V DC connector and server module) and optional accessories (strain-relief for PROFINET cable, labeling strips and reference identification label) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 12 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Integrated switch with 3 ports Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO. Supply voltage 1 L+ DC 24 V (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available as replacement part. PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters - BA 2xRJ45 for RJ45 bus connector - BA 2xFC for direct connection of the bus cable - BA 2xSCRJ for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable - BA SCRJ/RJ45 as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector - BA SCRJ/FC as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable - BA 2xLC for glass fiber-optic cable - BA LC/RJ45 as media converter for glass fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector - BA LC/FC as media converter for fiber-optic cable direct connection of the bus cable Maximum configuration 64 ET 200SP I/O modules + 16 ET 200AL modules 1 m backplane bus (without interface module and server module) Maximum amount of I/O data Gross data length (for input and output data): Without system redundancy S2: 1440 bytes 1440 bytes for shared device with 2 IOCs (in total for both IOCs) 360 bytes for shared device with more than 2 IOCs (per IOC) With system redundancy S2: 1000 bytes 360 bytes with system redundancy S2 and shared device with at least 1 additional IOC (per IOC) The number of the max. net data length for input and output data depends on the number and type of I/O modules used, including ET 200AL modules and virtual modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties Net data length (for input and output data): Without explicit calculation of the maximum net data length, the following minimum lengths can be used without shared device. 933 bytes (without system redundancy S2) 493 bytes (with system redundancy S2) Calculation of the max. net data length: Max. length net data = max. gross length - number of I/O submodules (input or output data, without user data) - number of mixed I/O modules (input and output data) - 5 bytes for interface module and server module without ET connection (6 bytes for interface module with ET connection) The result of the calculation of the maximum net data length applies equally to input and output data. Accessories You order the following accessories separately: BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter BA 2xFC BusAdapter BA 2xLC BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter BA LC/FC BusAdapter Strain relief for PROFINET cables Labeling strips Reference identification label Information on the BusAdapters is available in the BusAdapter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751716) manual. You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 14 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Server module The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available separately as an accessory. The server module has the following properties: Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system Includes a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm). Provides station functions, e.g., group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+, status bytes. Identification data I&M 0 to 3 Note You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration software. Place the server module in the last slot of the configuration. If there are 64 I/O modules, the server module is plugged in slot 65. You can find more information in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration The interface modules support plugging dark-colored BaseUnits in slot 1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules: AI Energy Meter ST DI 4 x 120..230V AC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) DQ 4 x 24..230V AC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Note First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O module manuals. The 24 V DC supply voltage is fed in via an external fuse. The DC 24 V supply voltage is supplied via a light-colored BaseUnit. See also Functions (Page 16) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions Introduction The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: Integrated switch with 3 ports Supported Ethernet services: PING, ARP, SNMP, LLDP Port diagnostics Disabling ports Minimum update time 250 s Device replacement without programming device, also without topological configuration Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO Firmware update via PROFINET IO Isochronous real-time communication Prioritized startup Media redundancy (MRP) Shared device Distribution of module channels to a maximum of 4 submodules Module-internal or submodule-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) Isochronous mode System redundancy S2 Station extension via ET-Connection Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") - Docking station - Docking unit Supports BusAdapter for different connection technologies to PROFINET IO. The interface module supports additional functions: Interface local coupling of IO data (configuration only via GSDML) Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 3 PROFIenergy Configuration control (option handling) Use of fail-safe modules Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 16 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal), in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). Requirements The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the module functions Function Functional status of the module as of Firmware Configuring with GSD version of the file module as of (http://support.automa tion.siemens.com/W W/view/en/19698639/ 130000)1 Configuration software STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP4 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15.1 Real-time communication 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Isochronous real-time communication 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Prioritized startup 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Device replacement without programming device 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Shared device 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Value status 1 V4.2.0 X --- X PROFIenergy 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Multi Hot Swap 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Use of fail-safe modules 1 V4.2.0 --- --- X Oversampling 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Isochronous mode 1 V4.2.0 --- --- X Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) 1 V4.2.0 X --- X BusAdapter for fiber-optic cable FOC: BA 2xSCRJ 1 V4.2.0 X --- X System redundancy S2 to S7-400H 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- System redundancy S2 IEC compliant 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- System redundancy S2 on S7-1500R/H 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Station extension via ET-Connection 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Maximum user data length per module: 288 bytes 1 V4.2.0 X --- X BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 17 Product overview 2.2 Functions Function Functional status of the module as of Firmware Configuring with GSD version of the file module as of (http://support.automa tion.siemens.com/W W/view/en/19698639/ 130000)1 Configuration software STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP4 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15.1 BA 2xLC BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 1 V4.2.0 X --- X BA LC/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Distribution of module channels to multiple submodules 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Maintenance interrupts of I/O modules 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Extended Channel Diagnostics 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) 1 V4.2.0 X --- X Interface local coupling of IO data 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- 1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system Cabling with fixed connection setting If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable "Autonegotiation/Autocrossover". You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). See also Compatibility of modules (Page 47) ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 18 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 Device replacement Device replacement Device replacement without topological configuration The device name is also stored on both BusAdapters in addition to the interface module. A device name stored in both BusAdapters is required for device replacement without topology configuration. Replacing the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name. The interface module generally starts with the device name of the left BusAdapter. In the case of different device names, the device name is distributed (stored) from the left BusAdapter to the right Bus Adapter and to the interface module. If the left BusAdapter is missing or does not yet have a device name, the device name is taken from the right BusAdapter and, if there are differences, distributed (stored) accordingly. If only BusAdapters without device names are connected, the device name is taken from the interface module and stored on both BusAdapters. Be aware of the following constraints: Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings. When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the interface module after a POWER ON. Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. Device replacement with topological configuration IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner: The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device. The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology must match the actual topology. If the IO devices were already used in another configuration, reset them to factory settings before reusing them. You can find information on this in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 19 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Real-time communication Real-time communication A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a providerconsumer model. 2.2.3 Isochronous real-time communication Isochronous real-time communication Is a synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for the transfer. The reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data is also transmitted in time-synchronized intervals, unaffected by other high network loading (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time communication). A topology configuration is required for IRT. Note For IRT, both BusAdapters must be plugged in. Note IO controller as sync master with IRT communication We recommend operating the IO controller also as a sync master when configuring the IRT communication. Otherwise, IRT and RT configured IO devices may fail if the sync master fails. You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 20 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.4 Prioritized startup Prioritized startup Prioritized startup is a PROFINET IO function in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication. It reduces the time needed for correspondingly configured IO devices to return to cyclic user data exchange. The function accelerates the start-up of IO devices in the following cases: After recovery of supply voltage After station recovery After activation of IO devices Note Dependency of the startup time The interface module permits startup times from 1.2 s. The startup time depends on the number and type of modules. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.5 Submodules Submodules The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4 submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and parameterized. A maximum of 256 submodules is supported, whereby 4 submodules are used for the interface module and one submodule for the server module. You can assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers. The following functions are only executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration: Firmware update Write I&M data Calibration PROFIenergy Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 21 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.6 Media redundancy (MRP) Media redundancy (MRP) Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.7 Shared device Shared device IO device that makes its data available to up to four IO controllers. The interface module supports shared device at submodule level. If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note the following: Make sure the configurations are consistent. Assign each module or submodule to only one IO controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error as the module or submodule will only be available in the first controller. If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned above, you must commission ET 200SP again. This means you must download the projects of all involved IO controllers to the respective CPU again after reconfiguration. If necessary, perform a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the interface module. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Note In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same send clock. If the controller does not have the same send clock, this results in communication relationships not being set up. If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same send clock for engineering in separate projects. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 22 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.8 Isochronous mode Isochronous mode The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the system is simultaneously acquired and simultaneously output. The I/O data, the transmission cycle via PROFINET IO, and the user program are synchronized for this purpose. The constant PROFINET IO cycle forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous mode of I/O data for the modules starting at 250 s. The IO device can exchange isochronous process data with a maximum of one IO controller. Note If the module is pulled or if no control data record was written with activated configuration control, then the IO controller cannot access a module. In this case, cycle time violations may occur with activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB (OB61). The time error OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation. This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI" (SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions. It depends on the set cycle time and the configuration limits. You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual. As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). 2.2.9 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data available to up to four IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels. The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to be operated by up to four IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. Up to three additional IO controllers can have read access to the same channels. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and: As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 23 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.10 System redundancy S2 System redundancy S2 An IO device with S2 system redundancy supports redundant ARs. In a redundant system, an IO device with system redundancy S2 has a redundant AR for each of the two CPUs (IO controllers). If one CPU fails, the IO device with S2 system redundancy remains accessible to the remaining IO controller via the AR. The interface module supports system redundancy S2 on S7-400H CPUs and on S71500R/H CPUs. You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) 2.2.11 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") Docking station Docking unit You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual 2.2.12 Oversampling Oversampling The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports the oversampling mode of HS modules. With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in isochronous mode. Additional information on oversampling can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 24 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.13 Value status Value status The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports I/O modules with value status. Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules. 2.2.14 PROFIenergy Properties PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy commands during production-free periods. Reference You will find additional information on PROFIenergy in the following manuals: Manual I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V12 and higher (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) System manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product information Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802 2.2.15 Configuration control (option handling) Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your automation system for future expansions or changes. Configuration control means you can configure the planned maximum expansion of your automation system in advance and flexibly vary it later by means of the user program. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 25 Product overview 2.2 Functions Reference You can find more information on configuration control: In the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) On the Internet under the following link: Application collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270). In the STEP 7 online help. 2.2.16 Use of fail-safe modules Properties The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports the use of fail-safe modules. Reference You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. 2.2.17 Multi Hot Swap Properties You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation. Note The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module does not support the removal and insertion of the server module, the interface module and BusAdapter during operation. Reference You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 26 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.18 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Introduction Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) offers the following advantages: Improved performance during transmission of data by bypassing the IO controller. Deterministic cycle times Cost-effective, high-performance solutions for applications where the performance of a specific technology module is not required. Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) enables direct exchange of data between specific IO modules within a station via the interface module. This enables you to move small and/or time-critical tasks to the IO module. You achieve better performance while reducing the load on the CPU. With Module-to-Module Communication (MtM), the interface module copies the input data of an IO module directly to a different IO module via the ET 200SP backplane bus. The IO module (data sink) carries out application-specific processing of the data. For Module-to-Module Communication (MtM), configure the data source and the data sink in the hardware configuration of the respective output module. Programming of the user program is not required in the variant for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM). Note The preparation of the input data in the output module (mapping) and the output of the data to the outputs are application- and technology-specific. Example: The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports * the application cam control with Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) under the designation DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM Additional information can be found in the manuals of the corresponding IO modules. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 27 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.19 Setting the time The interface module supports time-setting, for example with AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0). In an Application example (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890) we show you how to set the time of day. 2.2.20 Interface local coupling of IO data Module-internal Shared Output is transferred to other controllers In this example, IO data are transferred from one controller to other controllers over the PROFINET interface X1 by means of the Module-internal Shared Output. Figure 2-2 I/O data are transferred to other controllers in the same PROFINET network Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 28 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions Configuration Table 2- 2 Example of the configuration Virtual slot Type I-length Q-length Access 1 MSO Local - - - 1.1 MSO Local OUT - 4 bytes CPU 1 1.2 MSO Local IN 5 bytes incl. 1 byte DS - CPU 2 1.3 MSO Local IN 5 bytes incl. 1 byte DS - CPU 3 1.4 MSO Local IN 5 bytes incl. 1 byte DS - CPU 4 Editing in the user program The controller CPU 1 writes I/O data to the MSO Local OUT module with the virtual slot 1.1 of the interface module. The data is available to CPUs 2 to 4 for reading with the remaining MSO Local IN modules. The validity of the provided user data is displayed by the data status byte (DS) of the MSO Local IN modules. You can also use this example: with fewer controllers and configure it with other virtual modules. Note Virtual IO modules The use of virtual IO modules increases the communication load. This increases the data update time of all IO data accordingly. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 29 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a 24 V DC supply voltage. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage View Connector Signal name1 Description IM connection 1L+ 24 V DC 2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2 1M Ground 2M Ground (for looping through)2 1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally. 2 Maximum 10 A permitted. Reference You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 30 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Wiring 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram The following figure shows a block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module. Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics M Ground Backplane bus Link TX/RX LED (green) LK 1, 2, 3 Internal power supply MT 1,2,3 MAINTENANCE FiberOptic LED (SCRJ port, yellow) X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage RN RUN LED (green) X300, X301 BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red) P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT LED MAINTENANCE (yellow) P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (green) P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3 Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 31 Wiring 3.2 Block diagram Note To set up a ring topology, use only the P1 R and P2 R ports. Note Operation with only one BusAdapter If you operate the interface module with only one BusAdapter, then provide the free bus adapter interface with a cover for the BusAdapter interface. Note For IRT operation, both bus adapters must be plugged in. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 32 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module The following table shows the parameters for the interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF. Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Effective range Enable configuration control Yes/No No ET 200SP Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage Yes/No No ET 200SP 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 Enable configuration control Enable configuration control You use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Note If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to operate the I/O modules. Reference You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the STEP 7 online help. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 33 Parameters/address space 4.3 Substitute value behavior 4.2.2 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage The diagnostics alarm (maintenance) for undervoltage is triggered (incoming) if the supply voltage falls below the value 19.2 V DC. When the supply voltage then exceeds 20.4 V DC, the diagnostics alarm is reported as outgoing. 4.3 Substitute value behavior Substitute value behavior The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior: Zero current or zero voltage Output substitute value Keep last value The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases: STOP controller Controller failure (connection interrupted) Parameter assignment phase during startup Deactivating the IO device Station stop - Missing server module - Insertion of invalid I/O modules - At least one I/O module is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit Note Reducing a configuration If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is switched off at the interface module. The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases: Firmware update Reset to factory settings Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet Incorrectly configured module Module with incorrect parameter assignment Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 34 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input (MSI) Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input (MSI) corresponds to the behavior described above. 4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 35 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays on the interface module and on the BusAdapters: RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) PWR (green) LK2 (green) MT2 (yellow), SCRJ port LK3 (green) MT3 (yellow), SCRJ port LK1 (green) MT1 (yellow), SCRJ port Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter 2xSCRJ Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 36 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs LEDs Meaning RN (RUN) ER (ERROR) MT (MAINT) Off Off Off On On On Not relevant Not relevant Flashes Solution Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the interface module. interface module.* Test of LEDs during startup: The three LEDs light up simultaneously for approximately 0.25 s. - Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the configuration software or the user program. Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the configuration software. ET 200SP starts up. - ET 200SP is being assigned parameters. ET 200SP is being reset to factory settings. Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging data with the IO controller. - On Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the error. The preset configuration does not match the actual configuration of the ET 200SP. Check the configuration of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is missing, faulty or not configured. Invalid configuration states. For additional information, see section Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 45) Parameter assignment error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7. Eliminate the error in the corresponding I/O module. Maintenance For additional information, see section Maintenance events (Page 43) The "Node flash test" is run (LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface also flash). - Hardware or firmware defective (LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET interface do not flash). Run a firmware update. If the error persists, contact Siemens Industry Online Support. Not relevant Flashes Flashes Not relevant On Flashes Flashes Replace the interface module. * PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 37 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays PWR LED on the interface module Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Solution Supply voltage not present or too small. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage present. - Off On Observe the maintenance messages if the MAIN LED is lit LED display of configuration errors Configuration errors of the distributed IO system ET 200SP are indicated on the interface module via the red LED ERROR and the yellow LED MAINT. The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs: No server module Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus Operating principle The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code. The LED error display: Is activated during POWER ON and during operation. Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR and MAINT LED. Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated. Table 5- 3 Display of error type and error location Sequence Description 1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 0.5 Hz Indication of the error type 2 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal) 3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code 4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error location/error code 6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 38 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Error display Table 5- 4 Error display Error type (MAINT) Error location (ERROR/ MAINT) Cause of error 1 65 * No server module * Interruptions on the backplane bus * Short circuit of communication on the backplane bus Solution Check the configuration of the ET 200SP. Note A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the following LEDs: * PWR LED: On * RN, ER and MT LED: Off 5.2 Interrupts Introduction The I/O device triggers interrupts as a reaction to specific errors. Interrupts are evaluated based on the I/O controller used. Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts: Diagnostic error interrupts Hardware interrupts Pull/plug interrupts Maintenance events In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO controller. Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB number and start information. Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 39 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts System diagnostics In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the innovated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device). Independent of the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the S71500 CPU, the CPU web server and the HMI device. You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926) function manual. 5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module triggers a diagnostic error interrupt if this is configured accordingly. The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the diagnostic error interrupt OB (OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostic error interrupt OB. 5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt Triggering a hardware interrupt If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the hardware interrupt block OB, e.g., OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start information of the hardware interrupt OB. Note Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module) Do not use hardware interrupts for functional purposes (e.g. the cyclic generation of hardware interrupts). If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I/O modules and the communication load. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 40 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt In the event of a remove/insert module interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the remove/insert module OB, e.g. OB 83. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the remove/insert module OB. Note Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating OB83. After inserting a module, OB83 is not called until the module has started up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures that data record operations can be executed without errors. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 41 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm There can be more than one diagnostics alarm at the same time. Each diagnostics alarm initiates the following actions: The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes. Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and can be read via data records. Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller. (S7-300/400) The diagnostic interrupt OB is called. If the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB 82) is not available, the IO controller goes into STOP mode. You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. Reading the diagnostics Table 5- 5 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with IO controller Application See... SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 using Online and Diagnostics view STEP 7 online help * as of STEP 7 V12 function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 as of V12 (http://support.automation.si emens.com/WW/view/en/49 948856) * as of STEP 7 V5.5, system manual PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.si emens.com/WW/view/en/19 292127) Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) Read data records from the IO device Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) Receive interrupts from the IO device Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 42 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Causes of error and troubleshooting The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostic alarms are described in the manuals for I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section, "Interrupts, error messages, and system events". See also Channel diagnostics (Page 44) 5.3.2 Maintenance events Triggering of a maintenance event The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158 Type 10 standard. The goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible. For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a plant component must be checked or replaced. The CPU interrupts user program execution and executes the diagnostic error interrupt OB. The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the diagnostic error interrupt OB. The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in the case of the following event: Table 5- 6 Triggering of a maintenance event Maintenance alarm Event Alarm/Meaning Maintenance demanded Synchronization loss * LED MAINT is lit. Undervoltage No synchronization frame received. No synchronization frame was received by the sync master within the timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation. * Successive synchronization frames are located outside permitted limits (jitter). * Diagnostics Undervoltage If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the value 19.2 V DC, these diagnostics are reported as incoming Maintenance demanded. System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with the following system alarms: Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon device view or in the hardware configuration. in the You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 43 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.3 Channel diagnostics Function Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records. The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC". Structure of the diagnostics data records The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2. If required, you can find the standard on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) at the home page of the PROFIBUS user organization. Codes of the extended channel diagnostics With the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are reported: ChannelErrorType (CET) ExtendedChannelErrorType (ECET) Associated value AddValue Diagnostics 0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group" faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot (AddValue) 0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module 0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too large 0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration 0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit of the respective load module is located is coded in the "ChannelNumber" element. 0x0610 0x06B4 0x00 Diagnostics "Undervoltage power supply" If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the value 19.2 V DC, these diagnostics are reported as incoming Maintenance demanded. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 44 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO Invalid configuration states The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the failure of the IO device or prevent data exchange: Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration. Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do not trigger an interrupt. At least one I/O module is plugged into a different BaseUnit as the one configured in the parameters. No server module. Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter. Note Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module continues to exchange data. Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart. See also Status and error displays (Page 36) Channel diagnostics (Page 44) 5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D Failure of the supply voltage L+ The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D: If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is generated. If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is generated. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 45 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller Diagnostics received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. Read the E00CH data record in startup OB using the instruction "RDREC". This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices If you want to read the occurring diagnostics in the STOP state of the IO controller, you have to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction. This record contains all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device. Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 46 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 6 Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules Certain I/O modules with functional status 001 and 002 do not support a station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules. The table below shows all modules that do not support a station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules: Table 6- 1 Incompatible modules with functional versions Modules Article number up to functional status AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1 002 AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1 002 AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 002 AI 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 002 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 002 DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 002 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 002 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 002 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 002 Analog modules Digital modules Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 47 Compatibility 6.1 Compatibility of modules Status of the supply voltage Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete configuration. For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply voltage. If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential group. Modules Article number DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module Note For operation of the AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module, firmware version V1.0 (6ES71356HD00-0BA1) with the interface module, you need to set the "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter to "Turn off" with a PROFINET send clock < 1 ms. Reaction times for fail-safe modules The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 s (but at least 1.4 ms) Operation with activated system redundancy S2 Note Restrictions in operation with activated system redundancy S2 You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM155-6 PN/3 HF, firmware version V4.2 with activated system redundancy S2: * Configuration control (option handling) * Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) * Interface local coupling of IO data Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 48 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of IM 155-6 PN/3 HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 General information Product type designation IM 155-6 PN/3 HF with server module Firmware version V4.2 * FW update possible Number of MtM communication relationships/connections, max. Yes 16 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Module swapping during operation (hot swapping) Yes; Multi-hot swapping * Tool changer Yes; Docking station and docking unit * Local coupling, IO data Yes - Number of coupling modules 16 - Number of coupling submodules per module 4 * Local coupling, data records No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15.1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Configurable via GSD file * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Configuration control via dataset Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 49 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 Mains buffering * Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms Input current Current consumption (rated value) 175 mA; At 24 V, 2 slots 2x RJ45 BusAdapter, no I/O modules Current consumption, max. 950 mA Inrush current, max. 9A It 0.34 A*s Power loss Power loss, typ. 4.9 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 288 byte; For input and output data respectively Address space per station * Address space per station, max. 1 440 byte; Dependent on configuration Hardware configuration Rack * Modules per rack, max. 64; + 16 ET 200AL modules Submodules * Number of submodules per station, max. 256 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 3 ports (switch) 1. Interface Interface types * Number of ports 3; Via 2 BusAdapter slots * integrated switch Yes * BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; Compatible BusAdapter: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ / FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC Protocols * PROFINET IO Device Yes * Open IE communication Yes * Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP Interface types RJ 45 (Ethernet) * Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) * 10 Mbps No * 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) * Autonegotiation Yes Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 50 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Technical specifications Article number * Autocrossing 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 Yes Protocols PROFINET IO Device Services - Isochronous mode Yes; Bus cycle time: min. 250 s - Open IE communication Yes - IRT Yes; 250 s, 500 s, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms additionally with IRT with high performance: 250 s to 4 ms in 125 s frame - PROFIenergy Yes - Prioritized startup Yes - Shared device Yes - Number of IO Controllers with shared device, max. 4 Redundancy mode - MRP Yes - MRPD No - PROFINET system redundancy (S2) Yes; NAP S2 - Redundant PROFINET configuration (R1) No - H-Sync forwarding Yes Open IE communication * TCP/IP Yes * SNMP Yes * LLDP Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Equidistance Yes shortest clock pulse 250 s max. cycle 4 ms Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 250 s Jitter, max. 1 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Status indicator Yes Alarms Yes Diagnostics function Yes Diagnostics indication LED * RUN LED Yes; Green LED * ERROR LED Yes; Red LED Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 51 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 * MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Connection to network LINK (green) Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter Potential separation between backplane bus and electronics No between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes between supply and all other circuits No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Network loading class 3 Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Installation altitude above sea level, max. 2 000 m; On request: Installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Connection method ET-Connection * via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules Mechanics/material Strain relief Yes; Optional Dimensions Width 100 mm Height 117 mm Depth 74 mm Weights Weight, approx. 220 g; without BusAdapter Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) 52 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA Dimension drawing A This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module, front and side views Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0) Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 53 Server module ___________________ Preface (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual 3 ___________________ Parameters/address space 4 ___________________ Diagnostics alarms 5 ___________________ Technical specifications 6 ___________________ Parameter data record A ___________________ Dimensional drawing 03/2015 A5E03575337-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03575337-AB 03/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes labeled as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8 2.1 3 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8 Parameters/address space ..................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 9 3.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................10 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................10 Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules ...........................................12 Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules ...........................................13 Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules ...................................14 Evaluating feedback voltage ...................................................................................................15 4 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................................ 17 5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 18 5.1 6 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 19 6.1 A Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................18 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................19 Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................................. 21 A.1 Server module .........................................................................................................................21 Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Application examples Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 7 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the server module Properties The module has the following technical properties: Closes off the backplane bus of the ET 200SP Contains a support for 3 spare fuses (5 x 20 mm) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN Representation of the statuses of supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage (Page 15) per slot. Retentive storage of device name for device replacement without topological configuration of the IM 155-6 PN BA. You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Function and properties Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of Support of the IM 155-6 PN BA 1 V1.1.1 Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 3 Parameters/address space 3.1 Parameters Parameters for the server module The effective range of the configurable parameter depends on the type of configuration. Possible configuration: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system. When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameter to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 19). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 3- 1 Configurable parameter and its default (GSD file) Parameters Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Range of values * Disable * Enable Default No Reconfiguration in RUN Yes Effective range with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP ET 200SP --- Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 9 Parameters/address space 3.2 Explanation of the parameters 3.2 Explanation of the parameters Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ When you enable this parameter, the ET 200SP generates one diagnostic per potential group (as group information) when the supply voltage L+ fails. This function does not depend on enabling the parameter "Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+" of the I/O modules. The diagnostics is formed from the states of the supply voltage of the installed I/O modules within the potential group. Requirements All I/O modules must be inserted, i.e. the current configuration must not have any empty slots. If no I/O modules are inserted on light-colored BaseUnits BU..D, the beginning of this potential group is not recognized. The I/O modules of this potential group are therefore part of the previous potential group. If the I/O module is installed on the light-colored BaseUnit, the potential group is detected, the diagnostics is reevaluated according to the potential group arrangement and new diagnostics may be reported. The position of the light-colored BaseUnit remains stored in the structure until the supply voltage 1L+ of the CPU/interface module is turned off. 3.3 Address space Introduction You can read out the status of the supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage of I/O modules via the address space of the server module: All I/O modules: No supply voltage L+ or no I/O module available Additional digital output module HF: feedback voltage present Requirements The I/O module used must support monitoring of the supply voltage. The I/O module used must support monitoring of a feedback voltage. Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Parameters/address space 3.3 Address space Length of input data The length of the input data depends on the CPU/interface module: Interface module with 12 I/O modules maximum configuration: 2/4 bytes Interface module with 32 I/O modules maximum configuration: 4/8 bytes CPU/interface module with 64 I/O modules maximum configuration: 8/16 bytes Configurations In the configuration software, you can select 3 configurations for the server module for operation on the CPU/interface module: Configuration with disabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and disabled "Status of the feedback voltage": - The server module only has one diagnostics address. Configuration with enabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and disabled "Status of the feedback voltage": - The server module has 2/4/8 bytes of input data for the display of the status of the supply voltage L+ of the inserted I/O modules. - Display in the input data of the server module: Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available Configuration with enabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and enabled "Status of the feedback voltage": - The server module has 4/8/16 bytes of input data for the display of the status of the supply voltage L+ and the status of the feedback voltage of the inserted I/O modules. - Display in the input data of the server module: Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available Feedback voltage present/missing Table 3- 2 Data length depending on configuration and maximum configuration Maximum configuration 12 slots "Status supply voltage" deactivated Activated Activated "Status feedback voltage" deactivated Deactivated Activated 0 2 4 32 slots 0 4 8 64 slots 0 8 16 Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 11 Parameters/address space 3.3 Address space 3.3.1 Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (2 bytes of input data) You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 1): Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (2 bytes) Figure 3-1 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (2 bytes) Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of the feedback voltage (4 bytes of input data) You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 3). Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (2 bytes) Feedback voltage present/missing (2 bytes) Figure 3-2 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of the feedback voltage (4 bytes of input data) Note * An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot. * If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid. * For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+. Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Parameters/address space 3.3 Address space 3.3.2 Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (4 bytes of input data) You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 3): Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (4 bytes) Figure 3-3 Supply voltage L+ missing or I/O module not available (4 bytes); feedback voltage not available Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of the feedback voltage (8 bytes of input data) You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 7). Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (4 bytes) Feedback voltage present/missing (4 bytes) Figure 3-4 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of the feedback voltage (8 bytes of input data) Note * An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot. * If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid. * For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+. Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 13 Parameters/address space 3.3 Address space 3.3.3 Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (8 bytes of input data) You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 7): Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (8 bytes) Figure 3-5 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (8 bytes) Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of the feedback voltage (16 bytes of input data) You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data (byte 0 to 15): Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (8 bytes) Feedback voltage present/missing (8 bytes) Figure 3-6 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of the feedback voltage (16 bytes of input data) Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Parameters/address space 3.3 Address space Note * An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot. * If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid. * For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+. 3.3.4 Evaluating feedback voltage Ranges of error Figure 3-7 Ranges of error of the supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 15 Parameters/address space 3.3 Address space Feedback voltage A feedback may occur, for example, due to a crossover in a cable of a digital output module and depends on the target status of the supply voltage L+: If the supply voltage L+ of the I/O module is greater than 6 V, this is entered in the input data in the respective bit. Byte 2 and 3 (for 12 I/O modules and 4 bytes of input data) Byte 4 to 7 (for 32 I/O modules and 8 bytes of input data) Byte 8 to 15 (for 64 I/O modules and 16 bytes of input data) The feedback voltage can be evaluated via the user program in the following cases: Table 3- 3 Under what circumstances can the feedback voltage be evaluated via the user program? Supply voltage L+ safely disconnected1 Status detection of supply voltage L+ (input data) Status detection of feedback voltage (input data) Explanation Yes Not available: Bit = 0 Available: Bit = 1 The feedback voltage detected is in the range 6 to 12 V (e.g. in the event of a fault in the system) Yes Available: Bit = 1 Available: Bit = 1 The feedback voltage detected is > 12 V (e.g. in the event of a fault in the system) 1 This does not refer to the supply voltage applied to the BaseUnit, but, for example, to the status information of a safety relay. Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 4 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read out in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 4- 1 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Server module with invalid firmware version (< V1.1.1) 1BH General error Solution * Replace the server module. * Firmware update of the server module. Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 17 5 Technical specifications 5.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the server module 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0 Dimensions Width 7 mm Height 117 mm Depth 36 mm Weights Weight, approx. 19 g Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Parameter data record 6.1 6 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occurred during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Figure 6-1 Structure of data record 128 Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 19 Parameter data record 6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Header information The following diagram shows the structure of the header information. Figure 6-2 Header information Parameters The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter in byte 2. Enable the parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure 6-3 Structure of byte 2 Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) 20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB Dimensional drawing A.1 A Server module Dimensional drawing of the server module Contact plating of mounting rail Figure A-1 Dimensional drawing of the server module Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 21 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E34941724-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34941724-AC 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0 to 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 19 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 28 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815). Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384). SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for which controller families. You can find the comparison list on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of the TIA Portal. General function overview: Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network. Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices Downloading service data from a CPU Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU Performing a CPU memory reset Resetting devices to factory settings Downloading a firmware update to a device You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 (Number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7131-6BF01-2AA0 (Number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the DI 8x24VDC BA module Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital input module with 8 inputs Supply voltage L+ Sink input (PNP, sinking input) Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel) Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1, 2 and 3 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version FW version STEP 7 Function TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC BA module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note The input channels provide values even without connected supply voltage L+. The characteristic type 2 is only maintained with connected supply voltage L+. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1wire and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Input electronics M Ground Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 3-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) M Ground 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Color identification labels CCxx (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters DI 8x24VDC BA parameters Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the parameters that can be set depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Channel activated * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Input delay Potential group 1 * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 1 Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Input delay This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC BA You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC BA V0.0 Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VDC BA. Figure 4-1 Address space of DI 8x24VDC BA Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DI 8x24VDC BA digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Parameter assignment error 10H No supply voltage 11H Meaning * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+. Solution Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC BA Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 General information Product type designation DI 8x24 VDC BA Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC01 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / - * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 70 mA; All channels are supplied from the encoder supply Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 Encoder supply Number of outputs 8 Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V Short-circuit protection Yes; per module 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.6 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply Address area Address space per module * Inputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 8 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Source/sink input P-reading Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 2 Yes Input voltage * Type of input voltage DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -30 to +5V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 6.8 mA Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each case + delay of 30 to 500 s, depending on line length) - at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms - at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms - at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 2 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes - Yes parameterizable * Monitoring of encoder power supply No * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 28 g Dimension drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 27 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 31 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 12/2017 A5E03576305-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03576305-AE 12/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Number in pack: 10 units (6ES7131-BF00-2CA0) Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 4 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17 4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................19 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................22 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 28 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................28 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................30 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................32 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 33 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................33 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 37 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................37 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 5 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 6 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 7 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 8 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 10 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 (number in pack: 1 unit) 6ES7131-6BF00-2CA0 (number in pack: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the DI 8x24VDC HF module Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital input module with 8 inputs Sink input (PNP, active high) Supply voltage L+ Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per channel) Configurable hardware interrupts (per channel) Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1 and 3 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function HW version FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Pulse stretching FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V1.0 or higher V5.x X X Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V1.0 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V1.0 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V1.0 or higher X X Value status FS01 V1.1.0 or higher V12, SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or with HSP 0057 higher with HSP 0229 V2.0 or higher X X Isochronous mode FS01 V1.1.0 or higher V12, SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or with HSP 0057 higher with HSP 0229 V2.0 or higher X X Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 12 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Function HW version FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Module-internal shared input (MSI) FS01 V1.2..0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V3.1 or higher X X Configurable submodule/submodules for shared device FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 Update 4 or higher with HSP 0163 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V6.0 or higher X X Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately as spare parts: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagrams This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC HF module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection in the DI operating mode. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622). Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 14 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagrams Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Backplane bus interface DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Input electronics .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Color-coded label with color code CC01 (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) F0 to F7 Channel fault LED (red) M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) DIn Input signal, channel n Figure 3-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagrams Wiring: 3-wire connection The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n L+n Encoder supply, channel n DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit) M Ground 1A ... 10A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Color-coded labels with color code CC01 and CC73 (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 16 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters of the DI 8x24VDC HF Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 37)). Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics wire break1 Channel activated * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Input delay Pulse stretching Hardware interrupt rising edge Hardware interrupt falling edge Potential group * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * None * 0.05 s * 0.1 s * 0.2 s * 0.5 s * 1s * 2s * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 2 None Yes Channel 2 Disable Yes Channel 2 Disable Yes Channel 2 Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 1 If you use a floating switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 k to 45 k). 2 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 6 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter, however, with data records 0 to 7 or data record 128, see Appendix "Parameter data record". Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 18 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling diagnostics if the line to the encoder is interrupted. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Input delay This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input data). The read-in time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time was configured. For input channels with longer input delays, the read-in time is moved accordingly. This means individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative impact on the possible cycle time. Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least one channel. Pulse stretching Pulse stretching is a function used to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input is stretched to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the configured length, the pulse is not changed. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at time Ti (time for reading in the input data), i.e. smaller pulses than T_DC (data cycle) are not recognized in certain cases. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Principle of pulse stretching The figure below uses examples to show whether and how input pulses are changed. T1 Pulse stretching parameter Figure 4-1 Principle of pulse stretching Hardware interrupt, rising edge Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated by a rising edge. Hardware interrupt, falling edge Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated by a falling edge. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 20 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 21 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input. Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC HF You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V13, SP1 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.0 X X X 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.1 X X X 1 x 8-channel with value status X X --- 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2 DI 8x24VDC HF V1.1, QI X X X 1 x 8-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Input with up to 4 submodules DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2, MSI X X --- 1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2, QI X X --- 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0 --- X X 1 x 8-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Input with up to 4 submodules DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, MSI --- X --- 1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, QI --- X --- 2 x 4-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 --- X --- 2 x 4-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI --- X --- 4 x 2-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 --- X --- 4 x 2-channel with value status --- X --- DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI Note The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO device. * Firmware update * I&M identification data * PROFIenergy Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 22 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 2 x 4- / 4 x 2-channel configuration For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into submodules. The submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the information in the manual for the particular interface module. Value status (Quality Information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names: DI 8x24VDC HF QI, DI 8x24VDC HF MSI An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The value status bit indicates if the read in digital value is valid. (0 = value is incorrect). Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 8-channel module without value status. Figure 4-2 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF without value status Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF, QI The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a 8-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module. The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address. Figure 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF QI with value status Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 23 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF MSI The channels 0 to 7 of the module are copied in up to four submodules with configuration 1 x 8-channel module (Module-internal shared input, MSI). Channels 0 to 7 are then available with identical input values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each IO controller has read access to the same channels. The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Please observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module. Value status (Quality Information,QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs. For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect. For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 24 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with submodule 1, 2, 3 and 4 and the value status. Figure 4-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF MSI with value status Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel module without value status. Figure 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 without value status Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address. Figure 4-6 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI with value status Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 26 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4 x 2-channel module without value status. Figure 4-7 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 without value status Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address. Figure 4-8 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI with value status Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 27 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 28 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 32). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics Flashes LED channel status/channel error Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error LED channel status LED channel error Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Off * On Off No supply voltage present or * Process voltage > 11 V is present regardless of whether or not the channel is activated and regardless of whether diagnostics was detected Off On Supply voltage is available and process voltage < 11V is present regardless of whether or not the channel is activated and regardless of whether diagnostics was detected On On Channel activated and diagnostics enable was recognized PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 29 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF supports hardware and diagnostics alarms. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Hardware interrupt lost Channel temporarily unavailable Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: At positive edge (signal change from 0 to 1) At negative edge (signal change from 1 to 0) In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the IO controller. You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 30 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 5-2 Start information of the organization block Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt information for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1 B#16#01 Positive edge 1 B#16#02 Negative edge The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 It follows the error event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Error event Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 31 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at sensor supply Correct the process wiring Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect in parallel a resistor of 25 kOhm to 45 kOhm to the encoder contacts Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Hardware interrupt lost Channel/component temporarily unavailable 10H 11H 16H 1FH Meaning Solution * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ The module cannot trigger an interrupt because the previous interrupt was not acknowledged; possible configuration error Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not read in process values in this state. Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Change interrupt processing in the CPU and, if necessary, edit the module parameters. * The error persists until the module is assigned new parameters * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 32 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC HF Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 General information Product type designation DI 8x24 V DC HF Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC01 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 / - * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 / - * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 33 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 Encoder supply Number of outputs 8 Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V Short-circuit protection Yes 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply Address area Address space per module * Inputs 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Submodules * Number of configurable submodules, max. 4 Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 8 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Source/sink input P-reading Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Pulse extension Yes; Pulse duration from 4 s * Length Edge evaluation 2 s; 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s Yes; rising edge, falling edge, edge change Input voltage * Type of input voltage DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -30 to +5V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 34 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each case + delay of 30 to 500 s, depending on line length) - at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms - at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms - at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 1.5 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 420 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 500 s Jitter, max. 8 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes; channel by channel * Hardware interrupt Yes; Parameterizable, channels 0 to 7 Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes - Yes parameterizable * Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes; channel by channel * Wire-break Yes; Channel by channel, optional protective circuit for preventing wire-break diagnostics in the case of simple encoder contacts: 25 kOhm to 45 kOhm * Short-circuit Yes; channel by channel Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 35 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Negative ambient temperature down to -30 C (without condensation), installation altitudes between 2 000 m and 5 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 28 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 36 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. With data records 0 to 7, you can reconfigure individual channels. Operation of the module behind a PROFIBUS DP interface module If the module is operated behind a PROFIBUS DP interface module, the parameter data records 0 and 1 cannot be read back. You obtain the diagnostics data records 0 and 1 with the read back parameter data records 0 and 1. You can find additional information in the Interrupts section of the PROFIBUS DP interface module manual on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/78324181). Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128 or data records 0 to 7. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 37 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Data record structure Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 38 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameter The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 7 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 39 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0) 40 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Operating mode DI Counting operating mode 4 ___________________ (CNT) Oversampling (OVS) 5 ___________________ operating mode 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data records 09/2018 A5E35243810-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E35243810-AC 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that relate generally to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you when commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Changes compared to the previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Parameters and value range are harmonized in "Counting" mode (GSD file and TIA Portal). Conventions Please pay particular attention to notes highlighted as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 4 5 Properties ................................................................................................................................12 Operating mode DI ................................................................................................................................ 15 3.1 3.1.1 Wiring up .................................................................................................................................15 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................15 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................18 High-speed inputs ...................................................................................................................18 Parameters .............................................................................................................................18 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................20 Address space ........................................................................................................................24 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................25 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................25 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................27 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................29 Counting operating mode (CNT)............................................................................................................ 30 4.1 4.1.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................30 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................30 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................33 Counting ..................................................................................................................................33 Parameters .............................................................................................................................34 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................36 Address space ........................................................................................................................40 Assignment of the control interface ........................................................................................40 Assignment of the feedback interface.....................................................................................41 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................45 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................45 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................47 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................48 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode .................................................................................................... 49 5.1 5.1.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................49 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................49 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................52 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................52 Parameters .............................................................................................................................53 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................55 Address space ........................................................................................................................56 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 5 Table of contents 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 61 6.1 A Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................. 57 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 57 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 59 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 60 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 61 Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................ 65 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode ........ 65 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode ...................................................................................................................................... 69 A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode ...................................................................................................................... 74 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LEDs for operating mode Figure 2-1 LED for supply voltage Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number View of the DI 8x24VDC HS module Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital input module with 8 high-speed inputs Supply voltage L+ Sink input (PNP) Module-specific configurable diagnostics for supply voltage and short-circuit to M Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131, type 1 and 3 Three operating modes: Table 2- 1 Operating modes of the DI 8x24VDC HS Property Operating mode DI (Page 15) * Oversampling (OVS) (Page 49) Without value status (QI) With value status (QI) 8 8 4 8 Yes, optional Yes, optional Yes, optional Yes, required 125 s 125 s 125 s 250 s No No No Yes Number of channels Isochronous mode Counting (CNT) (Page 30) Shortest send clock Oversampling * Number of oversampling levels (sampling rate) -- -- -- 2 ... 32 * Shortest sub-cycle (= shortest sampling time) -- -- -- 7.8125 s Counter length, max. counting frequency -- -- 32-bit, 10 kHz * -- 0 ms ... 20 ms 0 ms ... 20 ms 0.05 ms - 20 ms 0 ms ... 20 ms x x -- -- Inputs 1 byte 2 bytes 25 bytes 32 bytes Outputs 0 bytes 0 bytes 20 bytes 0 bytes Configurable input delay Configurable hardware interrupts; rising edge and/or falling edge (per channel) Data length * If a diagnostic event occurs, the maximum counting frequency is reduced to 9 kHz. The module supports the following functions: Isochronous mode Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN PROFIenergy Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties The module can be configured with HSP or a GSD file. The configurations for the operating modes can be found under various codes / module names: Table 2- 2 Codes / module names for the configuration options Operating mode DI Without QI Configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) HSP0229 for STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP DI 8x24VDC HS DI 8x24VDC HS DI/OVS DI 8x24VDC HS DI 8x24VDC HS DI 8x24VDC HS QI -- DI 8x24VDC HS CNT DI 8x24VDC HS CNT DI 8x24VDC HS CNT DI 8x24VDC HS DI/OVS -- -- With QI Counting (CNT) Oversampling (OVS) * * The interface module or CPU with which the module is used must support isochronous mode. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.1 Wiring up 3.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams 3 This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8x24VDC HS with the pin assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in DI operating mode. You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 15 Operating mode DI 3.1 Wiring up Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the DI 8x24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1 and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Backplane bus interface DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red) Input electronics .0 to .7 LED channel status (green) Color-coded label CCxx (optional) PWR LED power (green) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) CNT LED operating mode Count (green) M Ground OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green) DIn Input signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 3-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.1 Wiring up Wiring: 3-wire connection The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8x24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n L+n Encoder supply, channel n DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit) M Ground 1A ... 10A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 17 Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.1 High-speed inputs Function In operating mode DI, use all eight channels as digital high-speed inputs. High-speed inputs make sense when rapid reactions to input signals are needed (reaction time < 2 ms). Requirement Low reaction times require a cycle time of less than 750 s. 3.2.2 Parameters The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode (Page 65). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space The following parameter settings are possible for each operating mode: Table 3- 1 Configurable parameters in DI operating mode Parameters Operating mode1 Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Channel activated Input delay Pulse stretching Hardware interrupt: rising edge Value range * DI / Oversampling * Counting * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * None * 0.05 s * 0.1 s * 0.2 s * 0.5 s * 1s * 2s * Disable * Enable Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0229 for STEP 7; PROFINET IO GSD file GSD file PROFIBUS DP -- no Module Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Enable yes Channel Channel 3.2 ms yes Channel Module 2 None yes Channel --3 Disable yes Channel --3 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 19 Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space Parameters Hardware interrupt: falling edge Potential group Value range * Disable * Enable * Use potential group of the left module * Enable new potential group Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0229 for STEP 7; PROFINET IO GSD file GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable yes Channel --3 Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name. 2 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter via data record 128. 3 If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter for each channel via data record 128. 3.2.3 Explanation of parameters Operating mode At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are operated: DI / Oversampling (Page 49) Counting (Page 30) When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name. Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the module ignores its signals. Pulse stretching Pulse stretching is a function used to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input is stretched to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the configured length, the pulse is not changed. With Pulse stretching, you can reliably detect very short input signals without having to use a correspondingly short cycle time. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input data). In some cases, pulses that are shorter than the cycle time (send clock) are not detected. If you want to detect short signals isochronously, the Oversampling operating mode is recommended. Oversampling also provides more precise information about the time at which a signal occurs. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 21 Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space Principle of pulse stretching The figure below uses examples to show whether and how input pulses are changed. Figure 3-3 Principle of pulse stretching Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space Input delay This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least one channel. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input data). The read time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time was configured. For input channels with longer input delays, the read time is moved accordingly. This means individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative impact on the possible cycle time. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Hardware interrupt: rising edge Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated for a rising edge. Hardware interrupt: falling edge Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated for a falling edge. Potential group Specifies whether a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this slot (see ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 23 Operating mode DI 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.4 Address space Address space with value status (Quality Information, QI) The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality Information (QI)). "IB x" represents the start address of input byte x. The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 3-4 Address space with value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are each assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 3.3.1 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8x24VDC HS. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) CNT (green) PWR (green) OVS (green) Figure 3-5 LED display Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 25 Operating mode DI 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 29). DIAG LED Table 3- 2 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 3- 3 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On CNT LED Table 3- 4 CNT LED Status display of the CNT LED Meaning Counting operating mode disabled Off Counting operating mode enabled On Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms OVS LED Table 3- 5 Status display of the OVS LED OVS LED Meaning Oversampling operating mode disabled Off Oversampling operating mode enabled On PWR LED Table 3- 6 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 3.3.2 Interrupts The digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS supports hardware and diagnostics alarms in the DI mode. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit Parameter assignment error No load voltage Hardware interrupt lost Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: At rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1) At falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0) If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 27 Operating mode DI 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms S7-1500 Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. The block interface is shown here with optimized block access, which is set in the TIA Portal by default. Name Data type Comment LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt USI WORD USI (High/Low) IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt EventType Byte Error event S7-300/400 or a different CPU The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: At rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1) At falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0) If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller. You will find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The channel of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of OB40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR tag. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 3-6 OB40_POINT_ADDR tag Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Operating mode DI 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 3- 7 Structure of USI = W#16#0001 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt info for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1 B#16#01 Rising edge 1 B#16#02 Falling edge The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 It follows the error event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Error event 3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 3- 8 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel/module. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage Hardware interrupt lost Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 16H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Module cannot send an interrupt because a previous interrupt has not been processed * Possible cause: Too many hardware interrupts in too short a time Firmware update in progress or update has been canceled. The module reads no process values in this state. Correct parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Change interrupt processing in the CPU and re-assign module parameters correspondingly * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 29 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.1 Connecting 4.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams 4 This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8x24VDC HS module with the pin assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in counting operating mode. You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.1 Connecting Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the DI 8x24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1 and 2-wire connection). M L+n L+ P1, P2, AUX 1-wire connection 2-wire connection Backplane bus interface Input electronics Color-coded label CCxx (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) Ground Encoder supply, channel n 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 4-1 DIAG .0 to .7 PWR CNT OVS DI0 - DI3 LED error or diagnostics (green, red) LED channel status (green) LED power (green) LED operating mode Count (green) LED operating mode Oversampling (green) Counter input, channels 0-3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 Direction input or gate input for DI0, channel 4 Direction input or gate input for DI1, channel 5 Direction input or gate input for DI2, channel 6 Direction input or gate input for DI3, channel 7 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 31 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.1 Connecting Wiring: 3-wire connection The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8x24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n L+n Encoder supply, channel n DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit) M Ground 1A ... 10A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 4-2 Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.1 Counting Function Counting refers to the detection and summation of events. The respective counters of the module detect encoder signals and pulses and evaluate them accordingly, for example: For counting general piece goods up to a maximum limit For applications with recurring counting processes You can count with DI0 through DI3. You can specify each counter's characteristics using the functions described below. Counter limits The counting limits define the counter value range used. The counter limits are configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program. The maximum possible counting limit is 2147483647 (231-1). The minimum possible counting limit is -2147483648 (-231). You can continue or stop counting upon violation of a counting limit (automatic gate stop) Upon high and low limit violations of the counter value, an event bit is set in the feedback interface (Page 41) in each case. Start value You can configure a start value within the counter limits. The start value can be modified during runtime with the user program. Gate control Opening and closing the hardware gate and software gate defines the period of time during which the counting signals are recordd. The control of the hardware gate takes place externally via the digital inputs DI4 through DI7. The software gate is controlled via the user program. Use of the hardware gate can be enabled through parameter assignment. Count direction The counting direction is specified either via suitable external pulse signals at the each counter's control input or via the configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 33 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Comparison values You define two comparison values that can control the STS_DQ feedback bit, independent of the user program. If the current counter value meets the configured comparison condition, the STS_DQ reset bit is set. You can use the STS_DQ reset bit in order to control a digital output module's digital output. The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user program. When a comparison event occurs, in each case an event bit is set in the feedback interface (Page 41). 4.2.2 Parameters The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode (Page 69). The following parameter settings are possible for each operating mode: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters in Counting operating mode Parameters Operating mode1 Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Channel activated Value range * DI / Oversampling * Counting * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0229 for STEP 7; PROFINET IO GSD file GSD file PROFIBUS DP -- No Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Parameters Input delay Value range * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms Reaction to violation of a counting limit * Stop counting * Continue counting Edge selection * At rising edge * At falling edge * Up * Down * Off (DQ = 0) * Off (DQ = 1) * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 * Digital input * Gate start/stop * Count direction Count direction Set output Set function of DI Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0229 for STEP 7; PROFINET IO GSD file GSD file PROFIBUS DP 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 2 Stop counting Yes Channel Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Channel Up Yes Channel Channel Off (DQ = 0) Yes Channel Channel Digital input Yes Channel Channel High counting limit -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 Yes Channel Channel Low counting limit -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel --3 Start value -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel --3 Comparison value 1 -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Channel Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 35 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Parameters Value range Comparison value 0 -2147483648...2147483647 Potential group * Use potential group of the left module * Enable new potential group Default 0 Reconfiguration in RUN Yes Use potential No group of the left module Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0229 for STEP 7; PROFINET IO GSD file GSD file PROFIBUS DP Channel --3 Module Module 1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name. 2 If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter for each channel via data record 128. 3 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter via data record 128. 4.2.3 Explanation of parameters Operating mode Selection of the operating mode in which all of the module's channels are operated. DI (Page 15) / Oversampling (Page 49) Counting When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name. Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the module ignores its signals. Input delay You use this parameter to suppress signal interferences. The module only detects changes to the signal if the changed signal is constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Note If you select the "0.05 ms" value range for the input delay, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Reaction to violation of a counting limit Selection of the reaction to violation of the counter high limit in the upward direction or the counter low limit in the downward direction: Stop counting: After a counting limit is violated, the internal gate is closed. This stops the counting process. The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. To restart counting, you must close and reopen the software/hardware gate. Continue counting: After a counting limit is violated, the counter value is set to the opposite counting limit and counting continues. Edge selection Selects the edge that is counted: At rising edge: The respective counter counts all rising edges at the digital input. At falling edge: The respective counter counts all falling edges at the digital input. Note If the "Reverse direction" option is selected in "Set function of DI" and the counting direction in the process changes, the counting edge is automatically adjusted (opposite edges). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 37 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Count direction Count direction selection: Up: The respective counter counts up. Down: The respective counter counts down. Note This parameter has no effect if the "Reverse direction" option is selected in "Set function of DI". Set output Selects the function that controls the response of the STS_DQ feedback bit (Page 41): You use the feedback bit STS_DQ to control a digital output of a digital output module. Off (DQ = 0): STS_DQ is independent of the counter value and permanently not set. Off (DQ = 1): STS_DQ is independent of the counter value and permanently set. Between comparison value 0 and 1: STS_DQ is set if counter value comparison value 0 and counter value comparison value 1. Not between comparison value 0 and 1: STS_DQ is set if counter value < comparison value 0 or counter value > comparison value 1. Set function of DI Selects the function of DIn+4, which controls the assigned counter input DIn: Digital input: No function is assigned to DIn+4. The signal status of DIn+4 is read by the CPU using the feedback interface (Page 41). Gate start/stop: Setting DIn+4 opens the hardware gate for DIn. Resetting DIn+4 closes the hardware gate for DIn. Count direction: DIn+4 reverses the counting direction at DIn, in order to adjust it to the process. If DIn+4 is not set, DIn counts up. If DIn+4 is set, DIn counts down. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Counter high limit Sets counter high limit. The following applies: Counter high limit > counter low limit Counter high limit 2147483647 (231 - 1) Counter low limit Sets the counter low limit. The following applies: Counter low limit < counter high limit Counter low limit -2147483648 (-231) Start value Sets the start value. The following applies: Start value counter low limit Start value counter high limit Comparison value 1 Sets the second comparison value. The following applies: Comparison value 1 > comparison value 0 Comparison value 1 counter high limit Comparison value 0 Sets the first comparison value. The following applies: Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 Comparison value 0 counter low limit Potential group Specifies whether a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this slot (see ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 39 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.4 Address space 4.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface Control interface The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the module's counter. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the control interface in the process image of the outputs. "QB x" represents the start address of output byte x. Figure 4-3 Assignment of the control interface Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Notes on the control bits Control bit Notes SLOT This value is used to specify the loaded value for each channel. Use the LD_SLOT load request to evaluate the loaded value. LD_SLOT This load request is used to specify the meaning of the SLOT (loaded value) value for each channel. The user program performs the respective action, as soon as LD_SLOT changes. When the loading request LD_SLOT = 011B is entered and the software gate is opened, each counting operation begins with the start value. If another load request is entered and the software gate is opened, counting continues with the current count at each start of the counting operation. These two situations are also in effect when the hardware gate is configured and the software gate is closed. SW_GATE With this bit, you open and close the software gate of the respective channel. Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. The module only counts if the internal gate is open. 0 means: Software gate closed 1 means: Software gate open RES_EVENT_UFLW Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_UFLW feedback bit for the respective channel. RES_EVENT_OFLW Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_OFLW feedback bit for the respective channel. RES_EVENT_CMP0 Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_CMP0 feedback bit for the respective channel. RES_EVENT_CMP1 Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_CMP1 feedback bit for the respective channel. 4.2.4.2 Assignment of the feedback interface Feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the module via the feedback interface. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the feedback interface in the process image of the inputs. Note In isochronous mode, current values and the status information in the feedback interface is updated at the time Ti (time for reading the input data). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 41 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space "IB x" represents the start address of input byte x. Figure 4-4 Assignment of the feedback interface Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Notes on the feedback bits Feedback bit Notes STS_DIn This bit indicates the status of the respective digital input DIn. COUNT_VALUE This value returns the current counter value for the respective channel. STS_DQ This bit depends on the "Set output" parameter of the respective channel. You can use STS_DQ in each case, in order to control a digital output module's digital output. STS_GATE Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. This bit indicates the status of the internal gate for the respective channel. The module only counts if the internal gate is open. 0 means: Gate closed 1 means: Gate open Note: If you change a channel parameter in RUN mode via data record 128, all of the changed channel's values are retransferred to the module. In doing so, the internal gate of the respective channel is closed and the counter value is set to the start value. To restart counting, you need to close and reopen the software gate in each case. LD_STS_SLOT This bit indicates for the respective channel, by mean of a status change (toggling), that the load request for SLOT (LD_SLOT) has been detected and executed. LD_ERROR This bit indicates for the respective channel that an error occurred (latching) during loading via the control interface. The loaded value was not applied. One of the following conditions has not been met: * Counter low limit counter value (If this condition is not met, the start value is loaded as the current counter value.) * Counter low limit start value * Counter low limit comparison value 0/1 * Counter high limit counter value (If this condition is not met, the start value is loaded as the current counter value.) * Counter high limit start value * Counter high limit comparison value 0/1 * Counter low limit < counter high limit * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 * Do not write a reserved load request in LD_SLOT EVENT_UFLW For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a counter value underflow (a violation of the counter low limit). You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT_UFLW. EVENT_OFLW For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a counter value overflow (a violation of the counter high limit). You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT_OFLW. EVENT_CMP0 For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved status which shows that a comparison event with comparison value 0 has occurred. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT_CMP0. The EVENT_CMP0 bit is not set when you set the counter value to the start value. EVENT_CMP1 For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved status which shows that a comparison event with comparison value 1 has occurred. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT_CMP1. The EVENT_CMP1 bit is not set when you set the counter value to the start value. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 43 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.2 Parameters/address space Feedback bit Notes RES_EVENT_UFLW_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_UFLW is active. RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_OFLW is active. RES_EVENT_CMP0_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_CMP0 is active. RES_EVENT_CMP1_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_CMP1 is active. Complete acknowledgment principle Saving bits are acknowledged according to the complete acknowledgment principle. The figure below shows an example of the sequence of the complete acknowledgment principle in the event of an overflow: The EVENT_OFLW feedback bit is set as a saving event upon overflow. You set the RES_EVENT_OFLW control bit to trigger EVENT_OFLW reset. The RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK feedback bit is set when reset of EVENT_OFLW is detected. You then rest the control bit RES_EVENT_OFLW . The RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK feedback bit is reset. Figure 4-5 Acknowledgment principle Note If you have initiated the reset of an event bit, you must wait for the respective feedback bit. Then you can initiate another reset. Note Opening the software gate or hardware gate (0-1 transition) resets all event bits. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 4.3.1 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8x24VDC HS. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) CNT (green) PWR (green) OVS (green) Figure 4-6 LED display Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 45 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 48). DIAG LED Table 4- 2 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 4- 3 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On CNT LED Table 4- 4 CNT LED Status display of the CNT LED Meaning Counting operating mode disabled Off Counting operating mode enabled On Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages OVS LED Table 4- 5 Status display of the OVS LED OVS LED Meaning Oversampling operating mode disabled Off Oversampling operating mode enabled On PWR LED Table 4- 6 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 4.3.2 Interrupts The digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS supports diagnostics alarms in the Counting mode. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit Parameter assignment error No load voltage Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 47 Counting operating mode (CNT) 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 4- 7 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update in progress or update has been canceled. The module reads no process values in this state. Correct parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.1 Connecting 5.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams 5 This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8x24VDC HS module with the pin assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in Oversampling operating mode. You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 49 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.1 Connecting Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the DI 8x24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1 and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Backplane bus interface DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red) Input electronics .0 to .7 LED channel status (green) Color-coded label CCxx (optional) PWR LED power (green) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) CNT LED operating mode Count (green) M Ground OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green) DIn Input signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 5-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 50 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.1 Connecting Wiring: 3-wire connection The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8x24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n L+n Encoder supply, channel n DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit) M Ground 1A ... 10A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 5-2 Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit) Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 51 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2.1 Oversampling Function Oversampling is the acquisition of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles), whereby n sub-cycles correspond to one PROFINET bus cycle. Oversampling is useful whenever you require acquisition of data with high time resolution but without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles. With the oversampling function, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus subcycles: Each subcycle detects an 8-bit value. A subcycle is at least 7.8125 s in length. Subcycles are possible in steps from 2 to 32 (sampling rate). Requirement Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set. Configuration You configure oversampling with the following parameter: Sampling rate Note Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the runtime groups of your user program. This will ensure that the data processing in the user program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module. Sampling interval The duration of a subcycle is the sampling interval. The cycle time T (send clock) for isochronous mode is specified in the configuration software. This time, divided by the configured sampling rate nSample, yields the sampling interval tSample of the module. Example calculation: Figure 5-3 Example of calculating the sampling interval Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 52 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space Chronological sequence The figure below shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The detected input data of a data cycle (send clock) is copied to the interface module in the next cycle data and are available to the CPU in the data cycle after the next one. n Detected value from cycle n Subcycle 8 bits apiece x 32 (max.) = max. 32 bytes of input data per data cycle Figure 5-4 Oversampling Note Do not use a reduction ratio for the send clock in this operating mode for blocks in your user program (for example, OB61). This will ensure that the data processing in the user program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module. 5.2.2 Parameters In distributed mode, you can use the Oversampling operating mode on the PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system. In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode (Page 74). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 53 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space The following parameter settings are possible: Table 5- 1 Configurable parameters in the Oversampling operating mode Parameters Operating mode1 Sampling rate Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Channel activated Input delay Potential group 1 Value range * DI / Oversampling * Counting * 2 values / cycle * 3 values / cycle * ... * 32 values / cycle * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Use potential group of the left module * Enable new potential group Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0229 for STEP 7 -- no Module -- yes Module Disable yes Module Disable yes Module Enable yes Channel None yes Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 54 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2.3 Explanation of parameters Operating mode At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are operated. DI (Page 15) / Oversampling Counting (Page 30) When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name. Sampling rate Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle. Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the module ignores its signals. Input delay This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least one channel. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input data). The read time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time was configured. For input channels with longer input delays, the read time is moved accordingly. This means individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative impact on the possible cycle time. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 55 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space Potential group Specifies whether a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this slot (see ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual). 5.2.4 Address space Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space. "IB x" represents the start address of input byte x. In the respective bit, the subcycles are counted from left to right. Up to 32 subcycles are possible. If fewer than 32 subcycles are configured, the bits that are consequently unused are set to 0. Figure 5-5 Address space for oversampling Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 56 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages Note While you are changing parameters in RUN mode, corruption of input data can occur. 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3.1 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8x24VDC HS. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) CNT (green) PWR (green) OVS (green) Figure 5-6 LED display Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 57 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 60). DIAG LED Table 5- 2 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On CNT LED Table 5- 4 CNT LED Status display of the CNT LED Meaning Counting operating mode disabled Off Counting operating mode enabled On Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 58 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages OVS LED Table 5- 5 Status display of the OVS LED OVS LED Meaning Oversampling operating mode disabled Off Oversampling operating mode enabled On PWR LED Table 5- 6 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 5.3.2 Interrupts The digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS supports diagnostics alarms in the Oversampling mode. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Parameter assignment error No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 59 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 7 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update in progress or update has been canceled. The module reads no process values in this state. Correct parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 60 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC HS The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0/td?dl=en) Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0 General information Product type designation DI 8x24 V DC HS Firmware version V1.0.2 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC01 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / - * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter Yes * Oversampling Yes * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 61 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0 Input current Current consumption, max. 70 mA; without sensor supply 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic * Output current, max. 700 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 45 byte * Inputs 32 byte; 1 byte + 1 byte for QI information in DI mode; 32 bytes in Oversampling mode; 25 bytes in Counter mode * Outputs 20 byte; In count mode Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + external terminals Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 8 Source/sink input P-reading Pulse extension Yes * Length 2 s; 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s Digital input functions, parameterizable * Gate start/stop Yes * Freely usable digital input Yes * Counter Yes - Number, max. 4 - Counting frequency, max. 10 kHz - Counting width 32 bit - Counting direction up/down Yes Digital input with oversampling Yes - Number, max. 8 - Values per cycle, max. 32 - Resolution, min. 7.8125 s * Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 62 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0 Input voltage * Type of input voltage DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -30 to +5V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 6 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms for interrupt inputs - parameterizable Yes for technological functions - parameterizable Yes Cable length * shielded, max. 50 m * unshielded, max. 50 m Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 1.5 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Bus cycle time (TDP), min. Jitter, max. Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes 125 s 5 s Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Hardware interrupt Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes - Yes parameterizable * Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes; Module-wise * Wire-break No * Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 63 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0 Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 28 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 64 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 65 Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode Structure of data record 128 for the complete module Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 66 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Structure of the header information Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-3 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-4 Module parameter block Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 67 Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-5 Channel header information Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-6 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 68 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 69 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode Structure of data record 128 for the complete module Figure A-7 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-8 Structure of the header information Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 70 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-9 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-10 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-11 Channel header information Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 71 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 72 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode Figure A-12 Structure byte x to x+25 for the channels 0 to 3 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 73 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN If you change parameters in RUN mode, falsifications can occur in the input data. A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 74 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode Structure of data record 128 for the complete module Figure A-13 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 75 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-14 Structure of the header information Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-15 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-16 Module parameter block Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) 76 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-17 Channel header information Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-18 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0) Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 77 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E32855511-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32855511-AC 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0 to 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 19 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 28 Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Part number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the DI 8x24VDC SRC BA module Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: 8 digital inputs Source input (NPN, M reading) Supply voltage L+ Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1 and 3 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately as spare parts: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC SRC BA module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note The input channels provide values even without connected supply voltage L+. The characteristic type 2 is only maintained with connected supply voltage L+. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-wire and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Input electronics M Ground Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 3-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input DI 8x24VDC SRC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) M Ground 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Color identification labels CCxx (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters DI 8x24VDC SRC BA parameters Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28)). Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Channel activated Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Input delay Potential group 1 Value range Default 3.2 ms * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Use potential group of Use potential group of the left the left module (modmodule ule plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Yes Channel Module No Module Module Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Input delay This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC SRC BA You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC SRC BA V0.0 Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VDC SRC BA. Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC SRC BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LED displays The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23). LED DIAG Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashes LED channel status Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status LED channel status Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On LED PWR Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR LED PWR Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DI 8x24VDC SRC BA digital input module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event: Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Parameter assignment error 10H No supply voltage 11H Meaning * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Remedy Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC SRC BA Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0 General information Product type designation DI 8x24 VDC SRC BA Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC02 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / - * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Encoder supply Short-circuit protection No Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0 Address area Address space per module * Inputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 8 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Source/sink input m-reading Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 1 Yes Input voltage * Type of input voltage DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" 30 V to -5 V (reference potential is L+) * for signal "1" -11 V to -30 V (reference potential is L+) Input current * for signal "1", typ. 6 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each case + delay of 30 to 500 s, depending on line length) - at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms - at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms - at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 200 m Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0 Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 1.5 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes - Yes parameterizable * Monitoring of encoder power supply No * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 28 g Dimensional drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 27 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-GSD. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 31 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E03574157-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03574157-AE 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 to 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 28 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815). Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384). SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for which controller families. You can find the comparison list on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of the TIA Portal. General function overview: Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network. Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices Downloading service data from a CPU Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU Performing a CPU memory reset Resetting devices to factory settings Downloading a firmware update to a device You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7131-6BF01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DI 8x24VDC ST Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital input module with 8 inputs Supply voltage L+ Sink input (PNP) Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131, type 1 and 3 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or highwith HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or highwith HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or highwith HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Value status FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or highwith HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 13 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC ST module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-wire and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection DIn 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Input electronics M Ground Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Input signal, channel n Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 15 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 3-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input DI 8x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) M Ground 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Color identification labels CCxx (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for DI 8x24VDC ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics wire break1 Channel enabled * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable GSD file PROFIBUS DP 2 Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Enable yes Channel Channel Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Input delay Potential group * none * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) 3.2 ms yes Use potential no group of the left module GSD file PROFIBUS DP 2 Channel Module Module Module 1 If you use a simple switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 k to 45 k). 2 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be measured at the relevant input. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Input delay This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 8-channel with value status V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- DI 8x24VDC ST V0.0, QI Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 8x24VDC ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 8x24VDC ST with value status Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned on Module diagnostics is available Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Process signal = 0 off Process signal = 1 on PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ off Supply voltage L+ present on Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct the process wiring Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor of 25 kilohms to 45 kilohms to the encoder contacts Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 10H 11H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC ST Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 General information Product type designation DI 8x24 VDC ST Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC01 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 or higher * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 Input current Current consumption, max. 50 mA; All channels are supplied from the encoder supply Encoder supply Number of outputs 8 Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V Short-circuit protection Yes; per module 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes Power loss Power loss, typ. 1 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply Address area Address space per module * Inputs 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Submodules * Number of configurable submodules, max. 4 Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 8 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Source/sink input P-reading Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Input voltage * Type of input voltage DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -30 to +5V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each case + delay of 30 to 500 s, depending on line length) - at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms - at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms - at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 1.5 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes - Yes parameterizable * Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes; Module-by-module, optional protective circuit for preventing wire-break diagnostics in the case of simple encoder contacts: 25 kOhm to 45 kOhm * Wire-break Yes; Module-wise * Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 28 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 27 Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-GSD. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module. Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 31 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E03573442-AF Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03573442-AF 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 to 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16 4.2 Declaration of parameters ...................................................................................................... 18 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 28 Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7131-6BH01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DI 16x24VDC ST Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital input module with 16 inputs Sink input, (PNP, P-reading) Supply voltage L+ Configurable input delay 0.05 to 20 ms (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 HW version FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with and higher HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with and higher HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Value status V0.0.0 V14 or higher with and higher HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X FS01 Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 13 Connecting 3.1 3 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DI 16x24VDC ST module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire connection. Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note Make sure that you only use digital modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-wire connection). 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Input electronics M Ground Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-1 Power LED (green) Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for DI 16x24VDC ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 28). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics wire break1 Channel activated Range of values * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 2 Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Input delay Potential group Range of values Default 3.2 ms Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Yes Channel Module Module Module * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * No Use potential group of Use potential the left module (mod- group of the left module ule plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 2 1 If you use a floating switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 k to 45 k). 2 Due to the limited number of parameters with a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station for a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 32 bytes. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Declaration of parameters 4.2 Declaration of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling diagnostics if the line to the encoder is interrupted. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Input delay This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also ET 200SP manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622) Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input. Configuration options of DI 16x24VDC ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 16-channel without value status DI 16x24VDC ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 16-channel with value status DI 16x24VDC ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 15 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 16x24VDC ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 16x24VDC ST with value status Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 16x24VDC ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 21 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 23). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DI 16x24VDC ST digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing 5.3 Diagnostic messages A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor of between 25 and 45 kOhms to the encoder contacts Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing 10H 11H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 16x24VDC ST Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 General information Product type designation DI 16x24 VDC ST Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 Input current Current consumption, max. 90 mA 24 V encoder supply * 24 V No Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.7 W Address area Address space per module * Inputs 2 byte; + 2 bytes for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Submodules * Number of configurable submodules, max. 4 Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module * 3-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 16 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Source/sink input P-reading Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Input voltage * Type of input voltage DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -30 to +5V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each case + delay of 30 to 500 s, depending on line length) - at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms - at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms - at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 1.5 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes - Yes parameterizable * Monitoring of encoder power supply No * Wire-break Yes; Module-by-module, optional protective circuit for preventing wire-break diagnostics in the case of simple encoder contacts: 25 kOhm to 45 kOhm * Short-circuit No * Group error Yes Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 28 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 27 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 15. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15 Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module. Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 31 SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual Edition 02/2014 Answers for industry. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module ___________________ Preface (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record 02/2014 A5E03894478-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03894478-01 02/2014 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 3 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 5 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 7 2.1 3 4 5 6 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 9 3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 10 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 11 4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 11 4.2 Explanation of parameters .......................................................................................................... 13 4.3 Pulse stretching ........................................................................................................................... 16 4.4 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 18 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 19 5.1 Status and fault displays ............................................................................................................. 19 5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 22 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ...................................................................................................................... 24 5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type ........................................................................ 25 5.5 Chatter monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 26 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 29 6.1 A Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 29 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 32 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD files ......................................................................... 32 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ................................................. 33 DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 1 Guide to documentation Introduction This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system consists of a system manual, function manuals and product manuals. The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you during the configuration and programming of your automation system. Overview of documentation for digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF The following table shows additional documentation that you need for using the DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module Topic Documentation Key contents System description System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58649293) * Application planning * Installation * Wiring * Commissioning Function manual Designing interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/59193566) * Basics * Electromagnetic compatibility * Lightning protection Function manual Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/59192926) * Overview * Diagnostics evaluation of hardware/software Designing interferencefree controllers System diagnostics BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Amendments and special ET 200SP Product information features of the (http://support.automation.siemens.co ET 200SP I/O system m/WW/view/en/73021864) Technical specifications Current information not yet documented in the system manuals, function manuals, or product manuals. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 5 Guide to documentation SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available to download free of charge on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Order number 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8xNAMUR HF module DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 7 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: 8 digital inputs each with a value status (quality information) 8.2 VDC sensor supply for individual connection and disconnection (PROFIenergy) Selectable diagnostics (per channel) Suitable for connecting NAMUR sensors and connected and unconnected mechanical contacts The module supports the following technology functions: Pulse stretching Chatter monitoring Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type The module supports the following functions: Firmware update Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 Reconfiguration in RUN You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories can be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connection You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. See also ET 200SP Product information (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864) DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment General pin assignment Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DI 8xNAMUR HF Pin assignment for DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Description 1 DI0 2 DI1 * DIn: Input signal, channel n 3 DI2 4 DI3 * 5 DI4 6 DI5 USn: Sensor supply, channel n 7 DI6 8 DI7 9 US0 10 US1 11 US2 12 US3 13 US4 14 US5 15 US6 16 US7 L+ 24 VDC M M BaseUnit1 Color identification label (terminals 1 to 16) A0 CC01 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0 The figures below show the connections for input signal DI0 for all sensor types. 1 NAMUR sensors / IEC 60947-5-6 sensors NAMUR changeover contacts / IEC 60947-5-6 changeover contacts Single contact connected with 10 k (mechanical normally open contact) Changeover contact connected with 10 k (mechanical changeover contact) Single contact, unconnected (mechanical normally open contact with single contact) Changeover contact, unconnected (mechanical changeover contact) BaseUnit types that can be used are identified by the last two digits of the order number. See also "ET 200SP distributed I/O system" system manual. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 9 Wiring 3.2 Block diagram Note The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Firmware update When updating the firmware, the L+ supply voltage must be applied to the module at the start and during the firmware update. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram Figure 3-1 Block diagram DI 8xNAMUR HF DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters DI 8xNAMUR HF parameters The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 33)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Wire break Diagnostics: Changeover error Diagnostics: Chatter error Chatter monitoring: Monitoring window Chatter monitoring: Number of signal changes Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * 0.5 s * 1 s to 100 s (can be set in 1 s-increments) * Deactivated * 2 to 32 Default Changing parameter settings in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA-Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel - 0.5 s Yes Channel - Deactivated Yes Channel - DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 11 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Hardware interrupts * Deactivated * Rising edge * Falling edge * Falling and rising edge * Channel deactivated * NAMUR sensor * Single contact, unconnected * Single contact, connected with 10 k * NAMUR changeover contact * Changeover contact, unconnected * Changeover contact, connected with 10 k * None Sensor type Pulse stretching Inverted Potential group Default Changing parameter settings in RUN GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Deactivated Yes Channel - NAMUR sensor Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel - Disable Yes Channel Channel Module Module * 0.5 s * 1s * 2s * Disable * Enable * Use potential group of Use potential No group of the the left module left module Enable new potential group * Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA-Portal) Changing parameter settings and effects on the technology functions Reconfiguring a technology function resets its responses. Reconfiguring one technology function has no effect on other technology functions. Exception: Signal inversion and chatter monitoring, because an additional edge change is generated when signal inversion is disabled/enabled. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Technology functions All technology functions, such as Pulse stretching Chatter monitoring Changeover errors Hardware interrupts are executed only when there is an error-free signal (QI = 1). In other words, there is no diagnostics information on the channel (see also section Address space (Page 18)). 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ The diagnostics alarm is enabled for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Tip: To avoid a diagnostics overload, you should only enable "Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage" for an active channel. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground The diagnostics alarm is enabled if there is a short-circuit of the sensor supply to ground. "Short-circuit to ground" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting: NAMUR sensor NAMUR changeover contact Diagnostics: Wire break The diagnostics alarm is enabled if the line to the sensor is interrupted. "Wire break" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting: NAMUR sensor Single contact with 10 k NAMUR changeover contact Changeover contact with 10 k DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 13 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Changeover error The diagnostics alarm is enabled when a changeover error occurs. "Changeover error" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting: NAMUR changeover contact Changeover contact, unconnected Changeover contact with 10 k Diagnostics: Chatter error The diagnostics alarm is enabled when a chatter error occurs. Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports signal changes that are unexpected in process engineering, for example when an input signal fluctuates too often between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process engineering viewpoint. Chatter monitoring: Monitoring window Chatter monitoring: Setting of the monitoring window Each input channel has a configurable monitoring window. The monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal changes within the monitoring window more often than the configured number of signal changes, this is recognized as a chatter error. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the window is restarted at the next signal change. Chatter monitoring: Number of signal changes Chatter monitoring: Setting of the signal change Settings for the tolerated number of signal changes during chatter monitoring within the monitoring window. Number of signal changes = 0 deactivates the chatter monitoring function. Hardware interrupts Specifies whether the rising or falling edge or both edges trigger a hardware interrupt. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Sensor type Specifies which sensor type is connected (see Table 3-1 Pin assignment for DI 8xNAMUR HF (Page 9)). For the following sensor types NAMUR changeover contact Changeover contact, unconnected Changeover contact with 10 k the following applies: The normally open contact channel must be set according to the sensor type. The normally closed contact channel must be deactivated. If "Channel deactivated" is shown, this means that the channel is not activated. Pulse stretching Sets whether and for how long pulse stretching is to take place. Pulse stretching is a function for changing a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is extended to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the configured length, then the pulse will not be changed. Inverted Specifies whether or not the input signal is to be inverted. Inversion is only possible with the following sensor types: NAMUR sensor Single contact, unconnected Single contact with 10 k Potential group Specifies that a BaseUnit with an incoming supply voltage is located in this slot (see ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual). See also Pin assignment (Page 9) Pulse stretching (Page 16) Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type (Page 25) DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 15 Parameters/address space 4.3 Pulse stretching 4.3 Pulse stretching Description Pulse stretching is a function for changing a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is extended to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the configured length, then the pulse will not be changed. The pulse-stretched signal is the input signal for the hardware interrupt. Principle of pulse stretching The following figure uses examples to show if and how input pulses are changed. Figure 4-1 Principle of pulse stretching DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Parameters/address space 4.3 Pulse stretching Note If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this will also affect the chatter monitoring that is enabled for this channel. The "pulse-stretched" signal is the input signal for the chatter monitoring. You should therefore match the parameter settings for pulse stretching and chatter monitoring to one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the parameters you can adjust the functions optimally to your process. Note Pulse stretching in progress is reset in the event of an error in the value status (QI = 0, e.g. wire break). DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 17 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options of the DI 8xNAMUR HF Configuration with value status: DI 8xNAMUR HF QI Evaluating the value status As a result of configuration with value status (QI), an additional byte is allocated in the input address space. Each bit in this byte is assigned to a channel and returns information about the validity of the digital value. Deactivated channels or channels that are not operating correctly return a value status of QI = 0. With changeover contacts, the value status of a normally closed contact channel is always QI = 0. The validity of the signal must be checked on the normally open contact channel. Address space of the digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF The following figure shows the assignment of address space for the DI 8xNAMUR HF with value status (Quality Information (QI)). Figure 4-2 Address space of the DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module with value status Technology functions All technology functions, such as Pulse stretching Chatter monitoring Changeover error Hardware interrupt require a valid input signal that returns QI = 1 (no diagnostics detected). Otherwise, they will not run. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and fault displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the DI 8xNAMUR HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the meaning of the status and fault displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostics alarms (Page 24). LED DIAG Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display LED DIAG Meaning Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters or invalid parameters assigned) Flashing Module configured and no module diagnostics On Module configured and module diagnostics Flashing LED channel status/channel fault The channel status LED shows the signal state of the user data of an input. If inversion is enabled, the channel status LED shows the inverted status of the signal applied to the terminal. If there is a diagnostics event on the channel, the channel status LED is always off if diagnostics is enabled and therefore does not indicate the signal state of the user data of the input. Table 5- 2 Channel status/channel fault LED status and fault display LED Meaning Channel status Channel fault Off Off Input returns "0" signal and no channel diagnostics or channel deactivated Input returns "1" signal and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On Not permitted (fault) On On DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays LED PWR Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ is missing, is too low or polarity reversed Off Supply voltage L+ present On DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF supports the following diagnostics and hardware interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit to ground Wire break Supply voltage missing Changeover error Chatter error Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Upon a rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1) Upon a falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0) In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU of the IO controller. You will find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALRM" instruction (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 5-2 Organization block start information DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001 Data block name Contents Comment Bytes USI W#16#0001 Additional interrupt information for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1 B#16#01 Rising edge 1 B#16#02 Falling edge (User Structure Identifier) The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 The event that triggered the hardware interrupt follows. Event DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 23 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the LED DIAG flashes on the module. Diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the fault codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Fault code Meaning Remedy Short-circuit (NAMUR changeover contact and NAMUR sensor only) 1H Short-circuit in the signal line to the sensor Correct the process wiring Sensor defective Replace the sensor Tip: Check the normally open and normally closed contact channels of the NAMUR changeover contact. Wire break (only NAMUR 6H changeover contact, NAMUR sensor, sensor connected with 10 k and single contact connected with 10 k) Tip: Check the normally open and normally closed contact channels of the NAMUR changeover contact Fault 9H Wrong sensor type configured Correct the parameter assignment Load impedance too low Use a sensor with a higher impedance Signal line to a sensor interrupted Correct the process wiring Sensor defective Replace the sensor Wrong sensor type configured Correct the parameter assignment Load impedance too high Use a different sensor type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with a larger cross-section Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics, connect sensor contacts Sensor supply defective Replace the module Hardware failure No load voltage 11H Supply voltage L+ missing or too low Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit Check BaseUnit type External fault (changeover sensors only) 1AH Fault 1 in actuator/sensor = signal chatters 1DH Changeover error: Validity check between normally closed and normally open contact channel negative Chatter error: Signal chatters: too many signal changes within the monitoring window If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, an outgoing diagnostics alarm is triggered. The status of the value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid". Channel/component temporarily unavailable 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or was canceled while running Check process wiring, change sensor Verify the chatter monitoring parameters Check process wiring, if necessary change sensor Connect the supply voltage Restart the firmware update DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 24 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type 5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type With the changeover error diagnostics, the switchover between two input channels is checked. If there is a signal change in a changeover contact channel and there is no signal change at the other contact changeover channel after the tolerated switchover time, the diagnostics module returns a changeover error. The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is set to the fixed value of 300 ms. Changeover sensors are always assigned to two adjacent channels: The normally open contact channel should be set in accordance with the sensor type to channel 0, 2, 4, 6, and the respective corresponding normally closed contact channel 1, 3, 5, 7 deactivated. Principle of changeover contact diagnostics If the digital inputs of a channel group are configured as "changeover contacts", the module for this channel group carries out diagnostics for the changeover contact sensor type. If the validity check is negative, the following applies: The module identifies the value status of the normally open contact channel as "invalid" (QI = "0"), The module creates a diagnostics entry for the normally open contact channel and A diagnostics interrupt is triggered if changeover error diagnostics is enabled. The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the normally open contact channel (channels 0, 2, 4, 6). The digital input signal is 0 and the value status is "invalid (QI = "0") for the normally closed contact channel (channels 1, 3, 5, 7). This channel is only used for a validity check of the sensor. Please note the following special features for changeover contact diagnostics: If the normally open and normally closed contact signals are not plausible after 300 ms, a changeover error is output as diagnostics information. If there is already a fault (QI = 0, e.g. a wire break), the module will no longer perform diagnostics for changeover errors. There are different diagnostics options depending on the type of changeover contact (Dependencies when configuring with GSD files (Page 32)). Depending on the sensor type, a changeover error can have different causes. - In the case of connected changeover contacts, a changeover error may also be the result of a short-circuit (sensor is not defective; there is a short-circuit). - In the case of unconnected changeover contacts, a changeover error may also be the result of a wire break. - If a wire break or short-circuit can be detected with the particular sensor type but its diagnostics is not enabled, instead of the wire break or short-circuit diagnostics information, the changeover error diagnostics information is displayed if this is enabled. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 25 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.5 Chatter monitoring Tip: Data records 0 to 7 and changeover sensor Using the data records 1, 3, 5 and 7, you can configure a changeover sensor on an even channel (normally closed contact channel). The corresponding normally open contact channel can be configured with the data records 0, 2, 4 and 6. An even changeover contact channel must be followed by an odd, deactivated channel. Otherwise: you receive a parameter assignment error or the parameter assignment is rejected and the current parameter assignment retained. Remedy: First, send data records 1, 3, 5 and 7 with deactivated, and then send data records 0, 2, 4 and 6 with changeover contact. 5.5 Chatter monitoring Description Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports signal changes that are unexpected in process engineering, for example when an input signal fluctuates too often between "0" and "1". This period is known as the "monitoring window". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process engineering viewpoint. Activating chatter monitoring You activate chatter monitoring by specifying a permitted number of input signal changes between "0" and "1" within the monitoring window. The number 0 deactivates the chatter monitoring function. A chatter error detected by the chatter monitoring has a direct effect on the value status (QI). Detecting a chatter error Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal changes within the monitoring window more often than the configured number of signal changes, this is recognized as a chatter error. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the window is restarted at the next signal change. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 26 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.5 Chatter monitoring Reporting a chatter error If a chatter error occurs, the current signal status is entered in the process image and the value status of the signal is set to "invalid" (QI = 0). If "Chatter error" diagnostics is enabled, "Chatter error" is also entered as diagnostic information, triggering an incoming diagnostics interrupt. You can evaluate and process the value status (QI) and the diagnostics information in the user program. Resetting a chatter error If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, an outgoing diagnostics interrupt is triggered. The status of the value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid". Note Active chatter monitoring is reset if there is an error in the input signal (value status QI =0 ). Principle The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter monitoring. Figure 5-3 The principle of chatter monitoring DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 27 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.5 Chatter monitoring Chatter monitoring and "settling time" if a chatter error occurs Does the monitoring time in the event of a fault restart as three monitoring windows if the signal continues to change? The signal changes... Result once more often than set in the "Number of signal changes". Monitoring time is restarted. less often than set in the "Number of signal changes". The monitoring time is not started again, in other words, the monitoring time runs once after a chatter error is detected. Even a change just before the time is up is tolerated. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 28 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications DI 8xNAMUR HF technical specifications 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0 Product type designation DI 8xNAMUR HF General information Usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 / V13 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / V5.5 SP4 PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 20.4 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Sensor supply Number of outputs 8 Output current Short-circuit protection Yes Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Digital inputs Number of inputs 8 Digital inputs, configurable Yes Type NAMUR Pulse stretching Yes; 0.5 s, 1 s, 2 s Edge evaluation Yes, rising edge, falling edge, edge change Signal change chatter Yes, 2 to 32 signal changes Chatter monitoring window Yes, 0.5 s, 1 s to 100 s in 1 s increments DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 29 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0 Input voltage Type of input voltage DC Rated value, DC 8.2 V Input current For 10 k connected contact * For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA * For signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA For unconnected contact * For signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent current) 0.5 mA * For signal "1" typ. 8 mA For NAMUR sensors * For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA * For signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) Tolerated switchover time for changeover contacts 300 ms For NAMUR inputs * with "0" to "1", max. 12 ms * with "1" to "0", max. 12 ms Cable length Cable length shielded, max. 200 m Sensors Connectable sensors NAMUR sensor / changeover contact according to Yes EN 60947 Single contact / changeover contact unconnected Yes Single contact / changeover contact connected with 10 k Yes Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes; channel-based Hardware interrupt Yes, selectable, channels 0 to 7 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics information can be read Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes Short-circuit Yes Group error Yes DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 30 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0 Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC Insulation Insulation tested with 707 VDC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g NAMUR sensors and connected contacts Monitoring for short-circuit and wire break only for NAMUR sensors and connected contacts. The response ranges of the diagnostics correspond to IEC 60947-5-6. Dimension drawing See manual BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 31 A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD files When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other, see the tables below. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the diagnostics information and its dependencies on the sensor types for PROFINET. Sensor type Diagnostics information Missing supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Wire break Chatter error Changeover error Inversion NAMUR sensor x x x x - x Single contact, unconnected x - - x - x Single contact, connected with 10 k x - x x - x NAMUR changeover contact x x x x x - Changeover contact, unconnected x - - x x - Changeover contact, connected with 10 k x - x x x - Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the diagnostics information and its dependencies on the sensor types for PROFIBUS. Sensor type Diagnostics information Missing supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Wire break Changeover error Inversion NAMUR sensor x x x - x Single contact, unconnected x - - - x Single contact, connected with 10 k x - x - x NAMUR changeover contact x x x x - Changeover contact, unconnected x - - x - Changeover contact, connected with 10 k x - x x - DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 32 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record 128 of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can change the parameter assignment of the module in your user program regardless of its configuration. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it using PROFIBUS GSD. With data records 0 to 7, you can configure the individual channels. Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN (e.g. switch diagnostics on can be changed in RUN). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128 or data records 0 to 7. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 33 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 DR 128 or DR 0 to 7: Bytes 0 and 1; header information DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 34 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for a channel. This structure also applies to channels 0 to 7. DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 35 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Figure A-3 DR 128 or DR 0 to 7: Byte x to x+5: Structure for channels 0 to 7 See also Parameters (Page 11) DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) 36 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E32043398-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32043398-AC 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1 to 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 17 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 18 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 19 5.1 Status and fault displays ........................................................................................................ 19 5.2 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 21 5.3 Load voltage status ................................................................................................................ 21 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 22 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 26 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 26 Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 7 Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815). Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384). SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for which controller families. You can find the comparison list on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 9 Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of the TIA Portal. General function overview: Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network. Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices Downloading service data from a CPU Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU Performing a CPU memory reset Resetting devices to factory settings Downloading a firmware update to a device You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Order number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DI 4x120..230VAC ST Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: 4 digital inputs Supply voltage L+ Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 GSD file TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Value status V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0229 V7.0 X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST module with the terminal assignments for a 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire connection. Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. NOTICE Hazardous voltage, risk of fatal or serious injury Always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing work. Note Limiting overvoltage You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply. Note Power limitation To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 2-wire and 3-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1 without AUX terminals (2-wire and 3-wire connection). 2-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n 3-wire connection L1 Encoder supply, channel n Backplane bus interface 1L / 2L Infeed 120 ... 230 V AC Input electronics 1N / 2N N-conductor connection Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) PWR Power LED (green) .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 4-wire connection: The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input DI 4x120..230VAC ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1 with AUX terminals (4-wire connection). 4-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n Backplane bus interface L1 Encoder supply, channel n Input electronics 1L / 2L Infeed 120 ... 230 V AC Color identification label CCxx (optional) 1N / 2N N-conductor connection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 4-wire connection of encoders. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 26)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file Channel activated 4.2 * Disable * Enable Enable Yes GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Channel Channel Explanation of parameters Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DI 4x120..230VAC ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status DI 4x120..230VAC ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 4-channel with value status DI 4x120..230VAC ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space of the digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 4x120..230VAC ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST digital input module with value status Note Value status The value status is independent of the connected supply voltage 120 ... 230 V AC. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 19 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and fault displays. LED DIAG Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashing Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashing LED channel status Table 5- 2 Channel status LED status and fault display LED channel status Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On LED PWR Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Diagnostics alarms 5.2 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostic alarm, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can analyze the error code with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostic alarm, meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Parameter assignment error 10H 5.3 Meaning * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Solution Correct the parameter assignment Load voltage status Load voltage status The firmware of the module cannot detect the status of the load voltage. If the "Load voltage status" function tied to the server module is used, a "1" is always displayed in the status bit for a slot with the DI 4x120..230VAC ST. Even when the load voltage is not applied. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 21 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications DI 4x120..230VAC ST technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1 General information Product type designation DI 4x120 ... 230 V AC ST Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type B1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC41 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (AC) 230 V Reverse polarity protection No Input current Current consumption (rated value) 10 mA Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 22 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1 Encoder supply Number of outputs 4 Short-circuit protection No; when using BU type B1, a fuse with 10 A tripping current must be provided Output current * up to 60 C, max. 10 A Power loss Power loss, typ. 1 W; Active power, load voltage 230 V, all inputs connected with 230 V, 50 Hz Address area Address space per module * Inputs 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type B1 * 2-wire connection BU type B1 * 3-wire connection BU type B1 * 4-wire connection BU type B1 + potential distributor module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 4 Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Input voltage * Type of input voltage 120/230V AC (47 Hz to 63 Hz) * Rated value (AC) 230 V * for signal "0" 0V AC to 40V AC * for signal "1" 74 V AC to 264 V AC Input current * for signal "1", typ. 10.8 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable No - at "0" to "1", min. 1.5 ms - at "0" to "1", max. 4 ms - at "1" to "0", min. 10 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 10 ms Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1 Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm No * Hardware interrupt No Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage No * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 2 545 V DC/2 s (routine test) Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1 Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 36 g Dimensional drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 25 Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be reassigned in RUN without affecting the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 26 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 27 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3 Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module. Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring Parameter 4 ___________________ assignment/addressing 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 07/2018 A5E42285997-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42285997-AA 06/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 4 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.1 4 5 Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................13 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 15 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15 4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................16 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18 5.1 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................18 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 21 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 24 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................24 Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 5 Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 6 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 7 Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 8 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 9 Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 10 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Replaceable fuse Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number Function class Figure 2-1 View of the module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Note Replace the fuse 1. Remove the module from the station. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the slotted top face of the fuse holder. 3. Lift out the fuse holder. 4. Replace the fuse. 5. Slide the fuse holder back into the module. Properties The module has the following technical properties: 8 digital inputs Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131, type 1 The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version FW version Function STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher as of V15 with HSP 0254 as of V5.5 SP3 with HSP 0229 V8.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher as of V15 with HSP 0254 as of V5.5 SP3 with HSP 0229 V8.0 X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 12 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection. Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note Hazardous voltage, risk of fatal or serious injury Always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing work. Note Limiting overvoltage You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply. Note Power limitation To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 13 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA on the BaseUnit BU type U0 (1-wire and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n 2-wire connection L1 Encoder supply, channel n Backplane bus interface L Supply 24 V AC / 48 V UC Input electronics N N-conductor connection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 14 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 4 Parameter assignment/addressing 4.1 Parameters Parameters of DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA During configuration of the module with STEP 7, define the properties of the module via various parameters. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 24)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostics, No supply voltage L Channel activated Potential group 1 Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel No Module Module * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Use potential Use potential group group of the of the left module (module plugged into left module a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) The parameter length of the I/O module is 3 bytes. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 15 Parameter assignment/addressing 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics No supply voltage L Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which is followed by a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 16 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Parameter assignment/addressing 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input. Configuration options of DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP as of V15 with HSP 0254 X X Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA. Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 17 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 18 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and fault displays. LED DIAG Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashing Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashing LED channel status Table 5- 2 Channel status LED status and fault display LED channel status Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On LED PWR Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display LED PWR Meaning No supply voltage L Off Supply voltage L present On Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA digital input module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No supply voltage 11H Remedy No or insufficient supply voltage L Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L at the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 20 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VAC ... 48VUC BA Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0 General information Product type designation Firmware version DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA * FW update possible usable BaseUnits No BU type U0 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Configurable via GSD file * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DI Yes * Counter No * Oversampling No * MSI No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) permissible range, lower limit (DC) permissible range, upper limit (DC) Rated value (AC) Reverse polarity protection 48 V 40.8 V 57.6 V 48 V; 24 V/48 V; 50 Hz/60 Hz Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 70 mA; without sensor supply Encoder supply Number of outputs Short-circuit protection 8 Yes; Per module, 5x 20 mm fuse, 2 A/250 V, quick-response, replaceable Output current * up to 60 C, max. 1A Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 21 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0 24 V encoder supply * 24 V No Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type U0 * 2-wire connection BU type U0 * 3-wire connection BU type U0 + Potential isolation module * 4-wire connection BU type U0 + Potential isolation module Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 8 Source/sink input Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 1 P-reading Yes Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 2 No Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Pulse extension No No Input voltage * Type of input voltage AC/DC * for signal "0" AC/DC < 10 V * for signal "1" AC > 14 V, DC > 34 V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 3.5 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable No - at "0" to "1", max. 15 ms - at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 22 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0 Encoder Connectable encoders * Yes 2-wire sensor Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function No Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with Dimensions Width 1 200 V DC between supply voltage and backplane bus 20 mm Height Depth 73 mm 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g Dimensional drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 23 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameters can be reassigned in RUN without affecting the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 24 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 25 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module. Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0) 26 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E36107249-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36107249-AC 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0 to 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 29 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7132-6BF01-2AA0 (number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 8 outputs Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A (per channel) Source output (PNP, P-switching) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights Safety-related shutdown The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) 2-wire connection M Ground Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and CC71 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) DQn Output signal, channel n Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 29). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Channel activated Range of values * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 Range of values * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Default Turn off Parameter reassignment in RUN Yes Use potential No group of the left module Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Channel Module Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA V0.0 Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Figure 4-1 Address space of DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module diagnostics is available Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Solution Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 General information Product type designation DQ 8x24 VDC/0.5 A BA Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC02 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 Input current Current consumption, max. 45 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module * Outputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 8 Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic * Response threshold, typ. 1A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 100 k Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A * for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.5 A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 10 A Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 100 s; at rated load * "1" to "0", max. 150 s; at rated load Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 100 Hz * with inductive load, max. 2 Hz * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 0.5 A * Current per module, max. 4A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 30 C, max. 4A - up to 40 C, max. 4A - up to 50 C, max. 4A - up to 60 C, max. 4A vertical installation - up to 30 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions - up to 40 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety-oriented group deactivation Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; in all other mounting positions * vertical installation, max. 50 C; in all other mounting positions Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Safety-related shutdown Note The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA supports safety-related shutdown in connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST: * SIL according to IEC 61508: 2 * Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1: d Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 31 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0) 32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC Digital output module ___________________ Preface DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 1 ___________________ Documentation guide (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 12/2015 A5E03574516-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03574516-AD 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 11 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 14 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14 4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................18 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................22 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................27 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 7 Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 (packaging unit: 1 unit) 6ES7132-6BD20-2BA0 (packaging unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 4 outputs Source output (PNP, P-switching) Supply voltage L+ Output current 2 A (per channel) Total current 8 A (per module) (see derating: Technical specifications (Page 22)) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights Safety-related shutdown The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Value status Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of 1 V1.1.0 You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnits in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module, rendering the terminals unusable. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 11 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Backplane bus interface M Ground Output electronics P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) PWR Power LED (green) Image 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and CC71 (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) DQn Output signal, channel n Image 3-2 M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 13 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 27). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Range of values Diagnostics: * No supply voltage L+ * Enable Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground * Enable * Disable Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ * Enable * Disable Diagnostics: Wire break * Enable * Disable Channel activated * Enable * Disable Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Disable Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Range of values Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 Default Turn off Parameter reassignment in RUN Yes * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the Use potential No group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored left module BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Channel Module Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 4 bytes. Note If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when diagnostics are enabled. 1 1 as of module revision 06 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 15 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP / substitute value Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V13, SP1 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.0 X X X 1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.1 X X X 1 x 4-channel with value status X X --- DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.1, QI Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-1 Address space of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST with value status Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 17 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 20). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics on Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 off Channel activated and process signal = 1 on PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ off Supply voltage L+ present on Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means: * a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected * a single short-circuit affects both actuators Note Parallel connection of two outputs For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Short-circuit 1H * Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground * Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing 6H 10H 11H Channel temporarily 1FH unavailable Solution Correct the process wiring Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger crosssection Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor to the actuator contacts in the load resistance range * The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment ters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 21 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST, PU 1 Firmware version V1.1 * Yes FW update possible Usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC02 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V11 SP2 / V13 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PCS 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode DQ Yes DQ with energy-saving function No PWM No Oversampling No MSO No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 60 mA; no load Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Digital outputs Number of outputs 4 Sinking output No Sourcing output Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 2.8 ... 5.2 A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V) Control of a digital input Yes Switching capacity of outputs With resistive load, max. 2A With lamp load, max. 10 W Load resistance range Low limit 12 High limit 3400 Output current For signal "1" rated value 2A For signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA Output delay with resistive load "0" to "1", typ. 50 s "0" to "1", max. 50 s "1" to "0", typ. 100 s "1" to "0", max. 100 s Parallel connection of two outputs For increased performance No For redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 100 Hz With inductive load, max. 2 Hz With lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs Current per channel, max. 2A Current per module, max. 8A Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 Total current of the outputs (per module) Horizontal installation * Up to 30 C, max. 8A * Up to 40 , max. 8A * Up to 50 , max. 6A * Up to 60 , max. 4A Vertical installation * Up to 30 C, max. 8A * Up to 40 , max. 6A * Up to 50 , max. 4A * Up to 60 , max. 4A Cable length Shielded, max. Unshielded, max. Isochronous mode 1000 m 600 m Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Monitoring of the supply voltage Wire break Short-circuit Group error Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Channel status display For channel diagnostics For module diagnostics Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels Between the channels and backplane bus Permitted potential difference Between different circuits Insulation Insulation tested with Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes; module by module Yes; module by module Yes Yes; green PWR LED Yes; green LED No Yes; green/red DIAG LED No Yes 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic insulation) 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width Weights 15 mm Weight, approx. 30 g Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Safety-related shutdown Note The digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST supports safety-related shutdown in connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST: * SIL according to IEC 61508: 2 * Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1: d Residual current for signal state "0" Note Residual current for signal state "0" Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0" signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker. This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break parameter. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Derating trend The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting positions. Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 27 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Image A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E03574575-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03574575-AE 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 to 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 29 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7132-6BF01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 8 outputs Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A per channel Source output (PNP) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights Safety-related shutdown The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 13 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-wire and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection 24 V DC 2-wire connection M Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Output electronics DQn Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Output signal, channel n Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Ground Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 15 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and CC71 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) DQn Output signal, channel n Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Parameters/address space 4.1 4 Parameters Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 29). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Value range Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics Short-circuit to L+ Diagnostics Wire break Channel activated Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Disable yes GSD file PROFINET IO Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Enable yes Channel Channel Turn off yes Channel Module Module Module Use potential no group of the left module GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes. Note If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid triggering an undefined load and the corresponding diagnostic alarm. If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid triggering an undefined load and the corresponding diagnostic alarm. If the parameter "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" is enabled and "Diagnostics: wire break" is disabled, the signal status is retained at the affected channel when "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" occurs. A diagnostic alarm is triggered only for 0 signal. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics short-circuit to L+ Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs. Diagnostics wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Reaction to CPU STOP Specifies the behavior of the module if the CPU changes to STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 8-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST with value status Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned on Module diagnostics is available Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 off Channel activated and process signal = 1 on PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ off Supply voltage L+ present on Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The digital output module DQ 8x24...24VDC/0.5A ST supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Short-circuit 1H * Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground * Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ Wire break Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 6H 10H 11H Remedy Correct the process wiring Actuator circuit impedance too high. Use a different actuator type or wire differently, e.g. use cables with a larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor to the actuator contacts in the load resistance range * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 General information Product type designation DQ 8x24 VDC/0.5 A ST Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC02 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 or higher * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 35 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module * Inputs + 1 byte for QI information * Outputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Submodules * Number of configurable submodules, max. 4 Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 8 Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 1A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 12 k Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 Output voltage * for signal "1", min. L+ (-0.8 V) Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A * for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.5 A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 50 s; at rated load * "1" to "0", max. 100 s; at rated load Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 100 Hz * with inductive load, max. 2 Hz * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 0.5 A * Current per module, max. 4A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 30 C, max. 4A - up to 40 C, max. 4A - up to 50 C, max. 4A - up to 60 C, max. 4A vertical installation - up to 30 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions - up to 40 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; Module-wise * Short-circuit to M Yes; Module-wise * Short-circuit to L+ Yes; Module-wise Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety-oriented group deactivation Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; in all other mounting positions * vertical installation, max. 50 C; in all other mounting positions Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Safety-related shutdown Note The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST supports safety-related shutdown in connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST: * SIL according to IEC 61508: 2 * Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1: d Residual current for signal state "0" Note Residual current for signal state "0" Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0" signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker. This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break parameter. Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 31 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0) 32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 12/2017 A5E03576680-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03576680-AE 12/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Number in pack: 10 units (6ES7132-6BF00-2CA0) Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 4 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17 4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................19 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 27 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................27 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................30 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 31 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................31 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 35 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................35 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 5 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 6 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 7 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 8 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 10 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 (Number in pack: 1 unit) 6ES7132-6BF00-2CA0 (Number in pack: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 8 outputs Source output (PNP, P-switching) Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per channel) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights Safety-related shutdown The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version TIA Portal STEP 7 GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V1.0 or higher X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X PROFIenergy FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X Value status FS01 V1.1.0 or higher V14 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V2.0 or higher X X Isochronous mode FS01 V1.1.0 or higher V14 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X Module-internal shared input (MSI) FS01 V1.2.0 or higher V14 SP1 V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X Configurable submodFS01 ule/submodules for shared device V2.0.0 or higher V14 SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 12 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately as spare parts: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 14 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) 2-wire connection M Ground Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) F0 to F7 Channel fault LED (red) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram PWR Figure 3-1 Power LED (green) Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and CC71 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) DQn Output signal, channel n Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 16 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 35)). Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L Diagnostics Wire break Channel activated Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Channel Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Enable Yes Channel Channel Channel 1 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Reaction to CPU STOP * Potential group 1 Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Turn off Yes Channel Module 1 Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter, however, with data records 64 to 71 or data record 128, see Appendix "Parameter data record". Note If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when diagnostics are enabled. * * as of module revision 05 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 18 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also See system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V13, SP1 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1.0 X X X 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1.1 X X X 1 x 8-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1. 1, QI X X --- 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1.2 X X X 1 x 8-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1. 2, QI X X --- 1 x 8-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Output with up to 4 submodules DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1. 2, MSO X X --- 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0 --- X X 1 x 8-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2. 0, QI --- X --- 1 x 8-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Output with up to 4 submodules DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2. 0, MSO --- X --- 2 x 4-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 --- X --- 2 x 4-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI --- X --- 4 x 2-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 --- X --- 4 x 2-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI --- X --- Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 20 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Note The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO device. * Firmware update * I&M identification data * PROFIenergy 2 x 4- / 4 x 2-channel configuration For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into multiple submodules. The submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a Shared Device. The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the information in the manual for the particular interface module. Value status (Quality Information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names: DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF QI DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF MSO An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module terminal (0 = value is incorrect). Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 1 x 8-channel module without value status Figure 4-1 Address space for configuration as 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI without value status Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 21 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as 1 x 8-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module. The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address. Figure 4-2 Address space for configuration as 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI with value status Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, MSO For the configuration as a 1 x 8-channel module (module-internal Shared Output, MSO), channels 0 to 7 of the module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 to 7 are then available with identical values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device: The IO controller to which submodule 1 is assigned has write access to outputs 0 to 7. The IO controllers to which submodule 2, 3, or 4 is assigned have read access to outputs 0 to 7. Value status (Quality Information,QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs. For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or that the IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP state. For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSO submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred: The basic submodule is not yet configured (not ready). The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted. The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 22 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for submodules 1, 2, 3, and 4 and the value status. Figure 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF MSO with value status Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 23 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel module without value status. Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address. Figure 4-4 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 without value status Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel module with value status. Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address. Figure 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI with value status Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 24 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4 x 2-channel module without value status. Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address. Figure 4-6 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 without value status Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4 x 2-channel module with value status. Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address. Figure 4-7 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI with value status Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 26 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF: DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 27 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 30). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics Flashes LED channel status/channel error Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error LED channel status LED channel error Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Off and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and process signal = 1 On Off and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 28 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 29 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note Parallel connection of two outputs For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Short-circuit Wire break Error code 1H 6H Meaning * Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground * Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ 2 1 Actuator circuit impedance too high Wire break between the module and actuator Channel not connected (open) Parameter assignment error 10H Supply voltage missing 11H Channel/component temporarily unavailable 1FH * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. 1 only in switched state (output value 1) 2 only in non-switched state (output value 0) Solution Correct the process wiring Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, for example, use cables with larger crosssection Connect the cable * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor to the actuator contacts in the load resistance range Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Note In case of a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ at the activated channel, load distributions can occur which result in wire break diagnostics. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 30 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 General information Product type designation DQ 8x24 V DC/0.5 A HF Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC02 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 / - * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 / - * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO Yes Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 31 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 8 byte; 2 channels per submodule + QI information Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 8 Current-sinking No Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 0.7 to 1.3 A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 12 k Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", typ. 50 s * "1" to "0", typ. 100 s Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 32 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 100 Hz * with inductive load, max. 2 Hz * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 0.5 A * Current per module, max. 4A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 60 C, max. 4A vertical installation - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 48 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 500 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; channel by channel * Short-circuit Yes; channel by channel * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 33 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Safety-related shutdown Note The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF supports safety-related shutdown in connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST: * SIL according to IEC 61508: 2 * Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1: d Residual current for signal state "0" Note Residual current for signal state "0" Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0" signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker. This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break parameter. Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 34 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. With data records 64 to 71, you can configure individual channels. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128 or data records 64 to 71. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 35 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Data record structure Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 or data records 64 to 71 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 36 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameter The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 7 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 37 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0) 38 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E32855878-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32855878-AC 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0 to 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16 4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 18 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 20 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 20 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 22 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 23 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 27 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Part number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA module Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 8 outputs Sink output (NPN, M switching) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function HW version FW version STEP 7 V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 TIA Portal GSD file Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately as spare parts: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection. Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-wire and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Output electronics M Ground Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA parameters Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 27)). Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Channel activated Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Reaction to CPU STOP * Potential group 1 Turn off Default Turn off Reconfiguration in RUN Yes * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential No Use potential group of the left module (module group of the left module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Channel Module Module Module Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A SNK BA You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA V0.0 Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 19 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LED displays The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22). LED DIAG Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashes LED channel status Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status LED channel status Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On LED PWR Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR LED PWR Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA digital output module supports diagnostics alarms. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event: Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No supply voltage 11H Remedy No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0 General information Product type designation DQ 8x 24 V DC/0.5 A SNK BA, PU 1 Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC01 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0 Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module * Outputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 8 Current-sinking Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 1.5 A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. 47 V Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 3 400 Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A * for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.5 A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 5 A Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 300 s * "1" to "0", max. 600 s Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0 Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 100 Hz * with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 0.5 A * Current per module, max. 4A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 60 C, max. 4A vertical installation - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0 Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; in all other mounting positions * vertical installation, max. 50 C; in all other mounting positions Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Dimensional drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 27 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ DQ mode 4 ___________________ PC mode 5 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record 02/2018 A5E42404845-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42404845-AA 02/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 4 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10 3 4 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................10 2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................13 DQ mode .............................................................................................................................................. 16 3.1 3.1.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................16 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................16 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................18 Parameters .............................................................................................................................18 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................21 Address space ........................................................................................................................24 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................26 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................26 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................27 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................28 PC mode............................................................................................................................................... 29 4.1 4.1.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................29 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................29 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................31 Parameters .............................................................................................................................31 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................34 Address space ........................................................................................................................38 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................41 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................41 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................42 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................43 5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 44 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 51 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................51 A.2 Error transferring the data record DQ .....................................................................................55 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 5 Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 6 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 7 Guide to documentation In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 8 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Guide to documentation Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 9 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 10 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 4 outputs (TRIAC) Output current 2 A per channel (max. 4 A), total current max. 8 A (see derating: Technical specifications (Page 44)) Power rating max. 900 W Configurable diagnostics (per channel) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for power control of heating systems or infrared sources in drying processes Wave packet control to prevent harmonic components Startup delay per channel to reduce system loads Output filter per channel for soft start or soft stop Two operating modes: - DQ - PC (PowerControl) with one of four control types each: - Phase control - phase-angle proportional (default) - Phase control - power-proportional - Wave packet control - half waves - Wave packet control - full waves Table 2- 1 Operating modes of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF Property Operating mode DQ Without value status (QI) PC (PowerControl) With value status (QI) Number of channels Without value status (QI) 4 Control type selection Yes Configurable temperature shutdown Yes Configurable startup delay 0 ms ... 10 s Configurable output filter down/up 0 ms ... 60 s Data length With value status (QI) Inputs 0 bytes 1 byte 0 bytes 1 byte Outputs 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 8 bytes DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 2 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X PROFIenergy FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X Value status FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 12 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions Introduction Two operating mode are available for the module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF: DQ mode PC mode (PowerControl) In PC mode, control of the module outputs is analog. The value range is 0..1000D (= 0.1% increments). The resolution of the process value is 16 bits per channel. In DQ mode, output control is binary. You configure the channels with the functions described below. Control types In PC mode, you can assign one of four control types to all channels of the module; you use these control types to control different processes in your plant. The control the power in the control types: Phase control - power-proportional Wave packet control (half waves) Wave packet control (full waves) You can use these control types, for example, for power control of heating systems or infrared sources in drying processes. You control the average switch-on duration in the control type: Phase control - phase-angle proportional You can use this control type, for example, to dim lamps that offer this feature. You also assign the control types in DQ mode. The resolution of the process value here is only 1 bit per channel. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 13 Product overview 2.2 Functions PC mode (PowerControl) operating principles Phase control The load voltage is reduced through phase control and raised from the starting voltage up to mains voltage in the zero crossing. Depending on the application, phase control offers advantages compared to wave packet control, such as even heating or prevention of radiation source flickering in case of low setpoints. You can configure the following during each half wave: For phase control - phase-angle proportional: The switch-on duration in proportion to the process value. For phase control - power-proportional: The output power. The following graphic schematically shows the principle of phase control: Average power 80%, corresponds to a process value of 800 (power proportional) Average switch-on duration 67%, corresponds to a process value of 670 (phase angle proportional) Figure 2-2 Principle of phase control Note Use of filters To observe the EMC guidelines, you must filter the faults caused by phase control in the plant. A suitable filter, for example, is EPCOS SIFI-C B84113C. For additional information about electromagnetic compatibility of the module, see the section Technical specifications (Page 44). Phase control - power-proportional This control type enables you to control the output power in the phase control in proportion to the maximum power. This means, for example, that a 500 W heating element ideally consumes about 50 W of its maximum power at a process value of 10.0%. Note that infrared sources may consume more power. The deviation from the setpoint is at its lowest in case of a linear and purely ohmic load. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 14 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions Wave packet control In case of wave packet control, the module connects the load voltage through to the load for entire half or full waves starting at the zero crossing. The wave packets to be output are calculated dynamically. Unlike with fixed wave packet patterns, the changes of the output value are taken into consideration faster while ensuring the absence of direct voltage in the output voltage at the same time. This allows for the implementation of controllers with shorter dead times. The process value hereby refers to the average switch-on duration over multiple alternating voltage periods of the load voltage. The graphics below show you how basic wave packet control for half waves or full waves works. Figure 2-3 Principle of wave packet control - half waves Figure 2-4 Principle of wave packet control - full waves DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 15 3 DQ mode 3.1 Wiring 3.1.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection. You can use the different connection options for all channels and combine them at random. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. DANGER Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury. You must always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing work. Note Limiting overvoltage You must ensure overvoltage of the encoder supply is limited to 1 kV. Note Power limitation To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse. Note Three-phase loads Do not connect any three-phase loads to the module. The digital output is not suitable for three-phase loads. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 16 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA DQ mode 3.1 Wiring Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type U0. 1-wire connection 24..230 V AC Supply voltage L (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) 2-wire connection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Backplane bus interface N Neutral Output electronics DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Polarity reversal protection .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) Color-coded label CC20 (optional) F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red) DQn Output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 17 DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.1 Parameters Parameters of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF The following table lists the configurable parameters in DQ mode. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 51)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 3- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 Module Module Module parameters Control type * Phase control - Yes Phase control phase-angle propor- phase-angle proportional tional * Phase control power-proportional * Wave packet control - half waves * Wave packet control - full waves DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 18 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 Channel parameters Diagnostics * No supply voltage L * Diagnostics Overtemperature Diagnostics Wire break2 Channel activated Temperature shutdown Reaction to CPU STOP Channel startup delay Channel output filter down Disable Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Output active even under overtemperature conditions Yes Channel Module Turn off Yes Channel Module No delay Yes Channel - No filter Yes Channel - Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Output active even under overtemperature conditions * Output disabled under overtemperature conditions * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * No delay * 100 ms * 1s * 2s * 3s * 4s * 5s * 10 s * No filter * 500 ms * 1s * 5s * 10 s * 30 s * 60 s DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 19 DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Channel output filter up Range of values * No filter * 500 ms * 1s * 5s * 10 s * 30 s * 60 s * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 No filter Yes Channel - Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Potential group Potential group 1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix "Parameter data set". 2 For physical reasons, a wire break cannot be detected for actuators with two inputs and shared reference point. In this case, deactivate the diagnostics. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 20 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.2 Explanation of parameters Control type At the module level, specifies the control type in which the module's channels are operated. Phase control - phase-angle proportional (default) Phase control - power-proportional Wave packet control - half waves Wave packet control - full waves Diagnostics No supply voltage L Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L. Diagnostics Overtemperature Diagnostics enabled when overtemperature occurs in the module. When you enable the Overtemperature diagnostics and the module detects that the maximum permissible module temperature is exceeded, the Overtemperature diagnostics is output. Diagnostics Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Temperature shutdown Determines whether a channel remains activate or is deactivated in case of overtemperature. When the module has detected that the maximum permissible module temperature has been exceeded, the channel is either deactivated or remains active depending on the configuration. To prevent damage to the module, the channel is automatically deactivated when temperature shutdown is configured. You cannot control the channel until the temperature is once again in the valid range. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 21 DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space Channel startup delay Specifies the duration of the startup delay of a channel. You can set startup delays with values ranging from 100 ms to 10 s. This means the channels cannot be controlled before the set startup delay has expired. Configure different startup delays for each channel to decouple the starting currents and thus reduce the network load. Startup delays are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values. The startup delay starts after the module was started and when the load voltage returns. This means that depending on your process, the initial switch on of lamps is always delayed by the configured time. Channel output filter down/up Specifies the down or up output filter of a channel. For smooth operation or to increase the interference immunity of your application, use down or up output filters with values from 500 ms to 60 s. Quick changes of the filter input values are converted into smoother signal changes at the filter output. This means, for example, that extreme currents in the heating phase of infrared sources are limited. In addition, you can also use output filters to reduce shifts in the zero crossings of the power supply that can occur in isolating transformers. This increases the accuracy of the module. When you have configured a startup delay, the output filter is held at the reset state during this delay. Once the startup delay has expired, the output filter starts its linear ramp directly at the value that was held during the startup delay. Note that the configured filter times always refer to the process value jumps from 0% to 100% or from 100% to 0%. This means the settling time of the filter is shorter for smaller jumps. Power without output filter Power with output filter (max. slope according to Output filters parameter) Startup delay Figure 3-2 Power trend or average switch-on duration in case of phase control phase-angle proportional with and without output filter DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 22 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space Each channel has its own output filters. These output filters always work with maximum resolution. Output filters are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values, for example, after CPU STOP or in case of a communication failure. This means all transitions are still smooth and infrared sources for hot gluing spots do not fail immediately, for example, but are shut down slowly to ensure that the surface of the gluing spots does not tear due to sudden cooling. If you do not want to use output filters, use the parameter setting "No filter". Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 23 DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF in DQ mode You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different short designations/module names. The following configurations are possible: Table 3- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, V14 or higher GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0 X X X 1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI X X --- Note The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO device. * Firmware update * I&M identification data * PROFIenergy Value status (quality information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names: DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module terminal (0 = value is incorrect). DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 24 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA DQ mode 3.2 Parameters/address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0 The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration without value status in DQ mode (DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0). Figure 3-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0 without value status Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with value status in DQ mode (DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI). Figure 3-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0 with value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 25 DQ mode 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 3.3.1 Status and fault displays LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 3-5 LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. DIAG LED Table 3- 3 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics Flashes DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 26 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA DQ mode 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms LED channel status/channel error Table 3- 4 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error Channel status LED LED channel error Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Off and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and process signal = 1 On Off and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On PWR LED Table 3- 5 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L Off Supply voltage L present On 3.3.2 Interrupts The digital output module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts In DQ mode, the module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Overtemperature Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel/component temporarily unavailable Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 27 DQ mode 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. In DQ mode, the module outputs the following diagnostic alarms: Table 3- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Overtemperature 5H Possible causes: Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel/component temporarily unavailable 6H 10H 11H 1FH Solution * Short-circuit or overload at the digital outputs * Ambient temperature outside the specification * Correct the process wiring * Improve cooling * Check controlled loads Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, for example, use cables with larger cross-section Wirebreak between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L at the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 28 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 4 PC mode 4.1 Wiring 4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection. You can use the different connection options for all channels and combine them at random. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. DANGER Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury. You must always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing work. Note Limiting overvoltage You must ensure overvoltage of the encoder supply is limited to 1 kV. Note Power limitation To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse. Note Three-phase loads Do not connect any three-phase loads to the module. The digital output is not suitable for three-phase loads. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 29 PC mode 4.1 Wiring Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type U0. 1-wire connection Supply voltage L (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) 24..230 V AC 2-wire connection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Backplane bus interface N Neutral Output electronics DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Polarity reversal protection .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) Color-coded label CC20 (optional) F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red) DQn Output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green) Figure 4-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 30 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.1 Parameters Parameters of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF The following table lists the configurable parameters in PC mode. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 51)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 Module Module Module parameters Control type * Phase control - Yes Phase control phase-angle propor- phase-angle proportional tional * Phase control power-proportional * Wave packet control - half waves * Wave packet control - full waves DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 31 PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 Channel parameters Diagnostics * No supply voltage L * Diagnostics Overtemperature Diagnostics Wire break2 Diagnostics Overflow 3 Channel activated Temperature shutdown Reaction to CPU STOP Channel startup delay Channel output filter down Disable Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Output active even under overtemperature conditions Yes Channel Module Turn off Yes Channel Module No delay Yes Channel - No filter Yes Channel - Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Output active even under overtemperature conditions * Output disabled under overtemperature conditions * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value * No delay * 100 ms * 1s * 2s * 3s * 4s * 5s * 10 s * No filter * 500 ms * 1s * 5s * 10 s * 30 s * 60 s DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 32 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Channel output filter up Channel substitute value [0.1%] 2 Range of values * No filter * 500 ms * 1s * 5s * 10 s * 30 s * 60 s 0...1000 Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 No filter Yes Channel - 0 Yes Channel Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Potential group Potential group * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) 1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix "Parameter data set". 2 For physical reasons, a wire break cannot be detected for actuators with two inputs and shared reference point. In this case, deactivate the diagnostics. 3 The Overflow and Channel substitute value [0.1%] diagnostics are only available if you configured the module in PC mode. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 33 PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.2 Explanation of parameters Control type At the module level, specifies the control type in which the module's channels are operated. Phase control - phase-angle proportional (default) Phase control - power-proportional Wave packet control - half waves Wave packet control - full waves Diagnostics No supply voltage L Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L. Diagnostics Overtemperature Diagnostics enabled when overtemperature occurs in the module. When you enable the Overtemperature diagnostics and the module detects that the maximum permissible module temperature is exceeded, the Overtemperature diagnostics is output. Diagnostics Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Diagnostics overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the permitted value range of the process value is exceeded. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Temperature shutdown Determines whether a channel remains activate or is deactivated in case of overtemperature. When the module has detected that the maximum permissible module temperature has been exceeded, the channel is either deactivated or remains active depending on the configuration. To prevent damage to the module, the channel is automatically deactivated when temperature shutdown is configured. You cannot control the channel until the temperature is once again in the valid range. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 34 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Channel startup delay Specifies the duration of the startup delay of a channel. You can set startup delays with values ranging from 100 ms to 10 s. This means the channels cannot be controlled before the set startup delay has expired. Configure different startup delays for each channel to decouple the starting currents and thus reduce the network load. Startup delays are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values. The startup delay starts after the module was started and when the load voltage returns. This means that depending on your process, the initial switch on of lamps is always delayed by the configured time. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 35 PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Channel output filter down/up Specifies the down or up output filter of a channel. To increase the interference immunity of your application, use down or up output filters with values from 500 ms to 60 s. Quick changes of the filter input values are converted into smoother signal changes at the filter output. This means, for example, that extreme currents in the heating phase of infrared sources are limited. In addition, you can also use output filters to reduce shifts in the zero crossings of the power supply that can occur in isolating transformers. This increases the accuracy of the module. When you have configured a startup delay, the output filter is held at the reset state during this delay. Once the startup delay has expired, the output filter starts its linear ramp directly at the value that was held during the startup delay. Note that the configured filter times always refer to the process value jumps from 0% to 100% or from 100% to 0%. This means the settling time of the filter is shorter for smaller jumps. Power without output filter Power with output filter (max. slope according to Output filters parameter) Startup delay Figure 4-2 Power trend or average switch-on duration in case of phase control phase-angle proportional with and without output filter Each channel has its own output filters. These output filters always work with maximum resolution. Output filters are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values, for example, after CPU STOP or in case of a communication failure. This means all transitions are still smooth and infrared sources for hot gluing spots do not fail immediately, for example, but are shut down slowly to ensure that the surface of the gluing spots does not tear due to sudden cooling. If you do not want to use output filters, use the parameter setting "No filter". DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 36 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Channel substitute value [0.1%] Defines the substitute value that is output when a CPU STOP occurs and the setting "Output substitute value" is selected in the "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 37 PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF in PC mode You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different short designations/module names. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, V14 or higher GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0 X X X 1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI X X --- Note The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO device. * Firmware update * I&M identification data * PROFIenergy Value status (quality information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names: DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module terminal (0 = value is incorrect). DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 38 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0 The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration without value status in PC mode (DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0). Figure 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0 without value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 39 PC mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with value status in PC mode (DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI). Figure 4-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0 with value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 40 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 4.3.1 Status and fault displays LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 4-5 LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. DIAG LED Table 4- 3 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics Flashes DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 41 PC mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms LED channel status/channel error Table 4- 4 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error Channel status LED LED channel error Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Off and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and process signal = 1 On Off and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On PWR LED Table 4- 5 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L Off Supply voltage L present On 4.3.2 Interrupts The digital output module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts In PC mode, the module generates a diagnostic interrupt for the following events: Overtemperature Wire break High limit violated Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel/component temporarily unavailable Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 42 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA PC mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. In PC mode, the module outputs the following diagnostic alarms: Table 4- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Overtemperature 5H * * Wire break 6H Short-circuit or overload at the digital outputs Wirebreak between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics Correct the output value (0 to 1000) Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. 1FH Check controlled loads Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, for example, use cables with larger cross-section The permitted value range of the process value is exceeded. Channel/component temporarily unavailable Correct the process wiring Improve cooling Actuator circuit impedance too high 7H 11H * * Ambient temperature outside the spec- * ification High limit violated Supply voltage missing Solution No or insufficient supply voltage L Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L at the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 43 5 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0 General information Product type designation DQ 4x24 ... 230 V AC/2 A HF, PU 1 Firmware version V1.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type U0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC20 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V5.5 or higher * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function Yes * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No * Phase control Yes; Control area: 8.5 ... 100% of the phase angle * Trailing-edge phase No * Half-wave Yes * Full-wave Yes Supply voltage Rated value (AC) 230 V; 47 ... 63 Hz, max. rate of change of frequency 1 mHz/s DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 44 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0 Input current Current consumption (rated value) 8 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (AC) 230 V; 24V AC to 230V AC Power loss Power loss, typ. 9 W; Active power, load voltage 230 V, all outputs loaded with 2 A, 50 Hz Address area Address space per module * Inputs + 1 byte for QI information * Outputs 8 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type U0 * 2-wire connection BU type U0 * 3-wire connection BU type U0 + Potential isolation module Digital outputs Number of digital outputs 4 Current-sinking No Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection No; external fusing necessary Open-circuit detection Yes; channel by channel * Response threshold, typ. 1 mA; 40 V AC or more Overload protection No; A miniature fuse with 10 tripping current and tripping characteristic "quick response" must be provided in the module supply Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 2 A; Max. 4 A, see additional description in manual * with inductive load, max. 2A * on lamp load, max. 100 W; Tungsten rating in accordance with UL; for thermistors with higher power ratings, see the notes in the manual Output voltage * for signal "1", min. 20.4 V Output current * for signal "1" rated value 2A * for signal "1" permissible range, min. 10 mA DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 45 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0 * for signal "1" permissible range, max. 4 A; Note derating data in the manual * for signal "0" residual current, max. 3 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 40 ms; 2 AC cycles * "1" to "0", max. 20 ms; 1 AC cycle Parallel switching of two outputs * for logic links No * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 10 Hz; Applies to DQ mode; limited by line frequency in PC mode * with inductive load (acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, AC15), max. 10 Hz; Applies to DQ mode; limited by line frequency in PC mode * on lamp load, max. 1 Hz; Applies to DQ mode; limited by line frequency in PC mode Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 2 A; Max. 4 A, see additional description in manual * Current per module, max. 8A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 40 C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A. For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note derating data in the manual - up to 50 C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A. For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note derating data in the manual - up to 60 C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A. For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note derating data in the manual vertical installation - up to 30 C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A. For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note derating data in the manual - up to 40 C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A. For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note derating data in the manual - up to 50 C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A. For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note derating data in the manual Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 46 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0 Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; channel by channel * Short-circuit No * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 2 545 V DC/2 s (routine test) Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 47 Technical specifications Derating The figures below show the maximum permissible total current for the derating, depending on the ambient temperature for horizontal and vertical mounting position, with channel currents of 2 A or 4 A. The following values apply to channel currents up to 2 A for the utilization category AC-15 (IEC 60947-5-1). Figure 5-1 Derating depending on ambient temperature - channel current 2 A DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 48 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Technical specifications The following values apply to channel currents of 2 A to 4 A for the utilization category AC-12 (IEC 60947-5-1): Figure 5-2 Derating depending on ambient temperature - channel current 4 A Note that the rms values are in effect for the channel and total currents. Note Loads with PTC thermistor properties For PTC thermistors up to 4 A continuous current and power ratings above 100 W (e.g. infrared sources), you must observe the significantly higher inrush current. Ensure that the switch-on peak current does not exceed 15 A. To reduce the inrush current, preheat the load or use the function "Output filter with phase control". This slowly increases the switch-on duration of the load and the inrush current of the load being heated is limited. Use an output filter time of 5 s or a preheating with 25 phase control, for example, for a PTC thermistor with a power rating of 900 W and an estimated factor 10 of the inrush current overshoot. If you want to connect multiple PTC thermistors per module at the same time, use the "Startup delay" function. By doing so, you connect the channels at different times so that the inrush current overshoots do not overlap and the fuse is not overloaded. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 49 Technical specifications Electromagnetic compatibility The control of loads in the control types phase control power-proportional or phase-angle proportional results in strong electromagnetic effects on the power supply network. To observe the limits in accordance with EMC Directives, you must filter the load supply of the module with phase control in PC mode or when using the function "Output filter with phase control" in DQ mode. Conformity was measured with filters of the type "EPCOS SIFI-C B84113C". Use this type of filter or a filter with the same characteristic curve or with a characteristic curve with greater damping. You must ensure conformity with the values in the tables below. Interference emission in accordance with EN 61000-6-4:2007 + A1:2011 and IEC 61131-2: Table 5- 1 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields Frequency Interference emission Test environment OATS or SAC (measured at a distance of 10 m) * 30 MHz to 230 MHz * * 230 MHz to 1000 MHz <40 dB (V/m) Q * <47 dB (V/m) Q Test environment FAR (measured at a distance of 3 m) * 30 MHz to 230 MHz * * 230 MHz to 1000 MHz 45 to 52 dB (V/m) Q * <52 dB (V/m) Q Test environment OATS, SAC or FAR (measured at a distance of 3 m) * 1 GHz to 3 GHz * <76 dB (V/m) P / <56 dB (V/m) M * 3 GHz to 6 GHz * <80 dB (V/m) P / <60 dB (V/m) M Table 5- 2 Interference emission via the AC power supply Frequency Interference emission 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (V/m) Q <66 dB (V/m) M 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz <73 dB (V/m) Q <60 dB (V/m) M Dimension drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 50 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 51 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 52 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-3 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 7. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-4 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-5 Channel header information DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 53 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-6 Structure byte x up to x+5 for the channel 0 to 3 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) 54 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA Parameter data record A.2 Error transferring the data record DQ A.2 Error transferring the data record DQ Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 At least one reserved bit is set to "1". Set all reserved bits to "0". DF 80 E1 02 Overflow diagnostics is enabled even though DQ mode is active. Block all Overflow diagnostics or switch to PC mode. DF 80 E1 05 Invalid coding for operating mode. Check module parameters. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check all channel parameters. DF 80 E1 20 Invalid coding for startup delay. Check all channel parameters. DF 80 E1 21 Invalid coding for output filter up or down. Check all channel parameters. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 55 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring Parameter 4 ___________________ assignment/addressing 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 03/2015 A5E32043575-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32043575-AB 12/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 12 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................12 4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................13 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................14 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 15 5.1 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................15 5.2 Load voltage status .................................................................................................................17 5.3 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................17 5.4 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................17 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 18 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................18 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 21 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................21 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 5 1 Guide to documentation The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Guide to documentation Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Application examples Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find application examples on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 7 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: 4 digital outputs each with a value status (quality information) Supply voltage L+ Switches in zero point Output current 2 A per channel Total current 8 A (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights The module supports the following functions: Firmware update Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 Reconfiguration in RUN PROFIenergy You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 9 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST module with the terminal assignments for 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system system manual. NOTICE Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury. Always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing work. Note Limiting overvoltage You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply. Note Power limitation To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 2-wire and 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the digital input module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1. 2-wire connection N Neutral 3-wire connection 1L, 2L Supply voltage 120 V AC to 230 V AC Backplane bus interface 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage Output electronics PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Diagnostics LED (red/green) DQn Output signal, channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) L1 Encoder supply PWR Power LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire and 3-wire connection of actuators No connection for three-phase loads The digital output is not suitable for three-phase loads. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 11 4 Parameter assignment/addressing 4.1 Parameters DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST parameters The table below lists the parameters that can be set. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 21)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Operating mode * Reaction to CPU STOP 1 Channel activated * Channel deactivated * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 Default ReconEffective range with configuration software, e.g. figuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in RUN GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1 Channel Yes activated Channel Channel Turn off Channel Module Yes Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file; does not affect configuration with STEP 7 using HSP: As the number of parameters with PROFIBUS GSD configuration is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station, the configuration options are limited. If required, however, you can still set this parameter using data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see the table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 3 bytes. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 12 Parameter assignment/addressing 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Operating mode Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 13 Parameter assignment/addressing 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space Configuration options of DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit =0: Channel is deactivated or there is an error on the module. If an error on a channel occurs with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space of the digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module with value status DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays LED display The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 15 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and fault displays DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Load voltage status 5.2 Load voltage status Load voltage status The firmware of the module cannot detect the status of the load voltage. If the "Load voltage status" function tied to the server module is used, a "1" is always displayed in the status bit for a slot with the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST. Even when the load voltage is not applied. The state of the load voltage at the terminal does not impact the PROFIenegy behavior. 5.3 Interrupts The DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A ST digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Parameter assignment error 5.4 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Parameter assignment error 10H Channel/component temporarily unavailable 1FH Meaning * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not read in process values in this state. Solution Correct the parameter assignment * Wait for firmware update * Restart the firmware update DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 17 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A ST 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1 Product type designation DQ 4x24 ... 230VAC/2A General information Firmware version * FW update possible V1.0 Yes Usable BaseUnits BU type B1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC41 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 / V13 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode DQ Yes DQ with energy-saving function No PWM No Oversampling No MSO No Supply voltage Rated value (AC) 230 V Input current Current consumption (rated value) 11.5 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 9 W; active power, load voltage 230 V, all outputs loaded with 2 A, 50 Hz Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Input 1 byte; with QI Output 1 bytes DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 18 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1 Digital outputs Number of outputs Sinking output Sourcing output Short-circuit protection Switching capacity of outputs With resistive load, max. With lamp load, max. Output voltage For signal "1", min. Output current For signal "1" rated value For signal "1" permitted range, min. For signal "1" permitted range, max. For signal "0" residual current, max. Output delay with resistive load "0" to "1", max. "1" to "0", max. Parallel switching of 2 outputs For logic operations For increased performance For redundant control of a load Switching frequency With resistive load, max. With inductive load, max. With lamp load, max. Total current of outputs Current per channel, max. Current per module, max. Total current of outputs (per module) Horizontal installation 4 No Yes No; install a fuse with 10A trigger current when using a type B1 BU 2A 100 W 20.4 V 2A 10 mA 2A 460 A 10 ms 10 ms No No Yes 10 Hz 0.5 Hz 1 Hz 2A 8A * up to 40 C, max. 8A * up to 50 C, max. 6A * up to 60 C, max. 4A Vertical installation * up to 30 C, max. 8A * up to 40 C, max. 6A * up to 50 C, max. 4A Output current per channel Horizontal installation * up to 60 C, max. 2A Vertical installation * up to 50 C, max. 2A DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 19 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1 Triac outputs Size of motor starter according to NEMA, max. 5 Cable length Shielded, max. 1000 m Unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt No Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics No Monitoring of supply voltage No Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Insulation Insulation tested with DC 2545 V 2 s (routine test) Dimensions Width 20 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g Dimension drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 21 Index Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) 22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB Index Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3 DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 23 Digital output module ___________________ Preface DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 1 ___________________ Documentation guide (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 12/2015 A5E32855695-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32855695-AC 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 14 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14 4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................16 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................22 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................24 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................24 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 26 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................26 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................31 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 7 Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status/channel fault Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 4 outputs Source output (PNP, P-switching) Supply voltage L+ Output current 2 A (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per channel) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights Safety-related shutdown The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Value status Isochronous mode Module-internal Shared Output (MSO) Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Configurable submodules/ submodules for shared device Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of 1 V2.0.0 You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately as spare parts: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnits in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 11 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and 2-wire connection). 1-wire connection 24 V DC 2-wire connection Backplane bus interface M P1, P2, AUX Output electronics Polarity reversal protection Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Output signal, channel n DIAG .0 to .3 F0 to F3 Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) DQn Image 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and CC71 (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) DQn Output signal, channel n Image 3-2 M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 13 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 31)). Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Range of values * Disable * Enable Diagnostics: * Short-circuit to ground * Disable Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ Diagnostics: Wire break Channel activated Default Parameter Scope with configuration softreassignment ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in RUN GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Enable Yes Channel Channel Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 14 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Range of values Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Default Turn off Parameter Scope with configuration softreassignment ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in RUN GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1 Yes Use potential No group of the left module Channel Module Module Module Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign the parameters using data records 64 to 67 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes. Note If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when diagnostics are enabled. 1 1 as of module revision 04 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 15 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different abbreviations/module names. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Abbreviation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V13, SP1 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V1.0 X X X 1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V1.0, QI X X --- 1 x 4-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Output with up to 4 submodules DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V1.0, MSO X X --- 1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2.0 --- X --- 1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2.0, QI --- X X 1 x 4-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Output with up to 4 submodules DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2. 0, MSO --- X --- 2 x 2-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2.0, S.2 --- X --- 2 x 2-channel with value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2.0, S.2 QI --- X --- Note The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO device. * Firmware update * I&M identification data * PROFIenergy Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 2 x 2-channel configuration For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into multiple submodules. The submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a Shared Device. The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the information in the manual for the particular interface module. Value status (quality information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names: DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF QI DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF MSO An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module terminal (0 = value is incorrect). Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V1.0 The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4-channel module without value status. Image 4-1 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, QI without value status Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V1.0, QI The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a 4-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module. The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address. Image 4-2 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, QI with value status Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V1.0, MSO For the configuration as a 1 x 4-channel module (module-internal shared output, MSO), channels 0 to 3 of the module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 to 3 are then available with identical values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device: The IO controller to which submodule 1 is assigned has write access to outputs 0 to 3. The IO controller to which submodule 2, 3, or 4 is assigned has read access to outputs 0 to 3. Value status (Quality Information,QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs. For the 1st submodule (= basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or that the IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP state. For the 2nd to 4th submodule (= MSO submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred: The basic submodule is not yet configured (not ready). The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted. The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for submodules 1, 2, 3, and 4 and the value status. Image 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, MSO with value status Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, S.2 The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 2-channel module without value status. Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address. Image 4-4 Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, S.2 without value status Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, S.2 QI The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 2-channel module with value status. Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address. Image 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2.0, S.2 QI with value status Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 22 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 24). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics Flashes LED channel status/channel error Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error Channel status LED LED channel error Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Off Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 23 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means: * a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected * a single short-circuit affects both actuators Note Parallel connection of two outputs For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Short-circuit 1H * Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground 1 * Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ 2 Wire break 6H Parameter assignment error 10H Supply voltage missing Channel/component temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH Solution Correct the process wiring Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, for example, use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor to the actuator contacts in the load resistance range * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. 1 only in switched state (output value 1) 2 only in non-switched state (output value 0) Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Note In case of a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ at the activated channel, load distributions can occur which result in wire break diagnostics. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 25 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, PU 1 Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes Usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC02 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 / - STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode DQ Yes DQ with energy-saving function No PWM No Oversampling No MSO Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 26 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0 Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; 2 channels per submodule + QI information Digital outputs Number of outputs 4 Sinking output No Sourcing output Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 2.8 ... 5.2 A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ -(37 to 41V) Control of a digital input Yes; minimum current consumption 7 mA Switching capacity of outputs With resistive load, max. 2A With lamp load, max. 10 W Load resistance range Low limit 12 High limit 3400 Output current For signal "1" rated value 2A For signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA Output delay with resistive load "0" to "1", typ. 50 s "1" to "0", typ. 100 s Parallel connection of two outputs For increased performance No Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 100 Hz With inductive load, max. 2 Hz With lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs Current per channel, max. 2A Current per module, max. 8A Total current of the outputs (per module) Horizontal installation * Up to 40 , max. 8A * Up to 50 , max. 6A * Up to 60 , max. 4A Vertical installation * Up to 30 C, max. 8A * Up to 40 , max. 6A * Up to 50 , max. 4A Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0 Cable length Shielded, max. 1000 m Unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes terminal) Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 500 s Jitter, max. 8 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes; channel-based Short-circuit Yes; channel-based Group error Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic insulation) Insulation Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Safety-related shutdown Note The digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF supports safety-related shutdown in connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST: * SIL according to IEC 61508: 2 * Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1: d Residual current for signal state "0" Note Residual current for signal state "0" Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0" signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker. This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break parameter. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 29 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Derating trend The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting positions. Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-GSD. You can configure the individual channels with data records 64 to 67. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN (e.g. "Switch on diagnostics" can be changed in RUN). Changing parameters in RUN The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128 or data records 64 to 67. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 31 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Data record structure Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 or data records 64 to 67 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Image A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 3 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 33 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0) 34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview DQ operating mode DQ 3 ___________________ (valve control) Oversampling operating 4 ___________________ mode Pulse width modulation 5 ___________________ operating mode 6 ___________________ Cam control operating mode ___________________ 7 Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data records 06/2018 A5E32855695-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32855695-AC 08/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in the system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the central processing units of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: To designate the configuring and programming software, we use "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for all versions of "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the regulations in your country. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 4 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 4 5 Properties ................................................................................................................................12 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) .................................................................................................. 18 3.1 3.1.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................18 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................18 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................21 Normal operation/Valve control ..............................................................................................21 Parameters .............................................................................................................................23 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................25 Address space ........................................................................................................................26 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................27 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................27 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................29 Oversampling operating mode .............................................................................................................. 31 4.1 4.1.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................31 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................31 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................34 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................34 Parameters .............................................................................................................................35 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................37 Address space ........................................................................................................................38 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................39 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................39 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................41 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................41 Pulse width modulation operating mode ................................................................................................ 43 5.1 5.1.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................43 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................43 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................46 Pulse width modulation ...........................................................................................................46 Parameters .............................................................................................................................49 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................52 Address space ........................................................................................................................54 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 5 Table of contents 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 6 7 A Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................. 55 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 55 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 57 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 57 Cam control operating mode ................................................................................................................. 59 6.1 6.1.1 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 59 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 59 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.4.4 Parameters/address space .................................................................................................... 62 Cam control ............................................................................................................................ 62 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 70 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 74 Parameters in cam control operating mode ........................................................................... 74 Parameters for module to module communication (MtM) ...................................................... 78 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 79 Assignment of the control interface........................................................................................ 79 Notes on the control interface ................................................................................................ 80 Assignment of the feedback interface .................................................................................... 82 Notes on the feedback interface ............................................................................................ 84 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................. 86 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 86 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 88 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 89 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 90 7.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 90 7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS ..................................................................................... 95 Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................ 98 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode ...................................................................................................................................... 98 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode .................................................................................................................... 104 A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode ................................................................................................. 110 A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode .................................................................................................................... 116 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 6 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 8 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 10 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Terminal diagram LEDs for channel status LEDs for operating mode Function class Color coding of module type Function and firmware version Color code for selection of the color coding labels BU type Article number LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 12 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 4 outputs (push-pull) Source output (PNP, sourcing output) Supply voltage L+ Output current 2 A (per channel) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version FW version V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X X Identification data I&M FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X X PROFIenergy FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X - Value status FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X - Isochronous mode FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 - - Oversampling FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 - - Valve control FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X X Pulse width modulation (PWM) FS01 or higher V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher with HSP 0127 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V5.0 X X Function STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties HW version FW version Cam control (MCC Modular CAM Controller) FS01 or higher Module to module communication (MtM) FS01 or higher Function STEP 7 GSD file TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP V2.0.0 or higher - - V5.6 HF4 or higher - V2.0.0 or higher - - V5.6 HF4 or higher - Overview of operating modes, functions and parameters The table below provides an overview of: The dependencies between the operating modes of the module and associated technical functions The required parameter assignment for the respective operating mode Table 2- 2 Operating modes, functions and parameters of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Function/Parameter assignment Operating mode Normal operation Valve control in normal operation Pulse width modulation Oversampling Cam control Function Isochronous mode 1 * Shortest send clock Oversampling Yes, optional Yes, optional No Yes, required Yes 125 s 125 s - 250 s - No No No Yes No * Number of oversampling levels (output rate) - - - 2 to 32 - * Shortest sub-cycle (= shortest sample time) - - - 100 s - - - - - Yes Cam control * Maximum number of cam tracks - - - - 4 * Maximum number of cams per track - - - - 16 x x - - x 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 16 bytes Value status (QI) Data length 14 bytes input data 7 bytes output data Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 14 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Function/Parameter assignment Operating mode Normal operation Valve control in normal operation Pulse width modulation Oversampling Cam control Parameter assignment 1 Holding time valve control - x - - - Pulse width modulation duty cycle - x - - - Pulse width modulation time period - x x - - Substitute value duty cycle - - x - - Pulsed cam output duty cycle - - - - x Pulsed cam output period - - - - x Modulo activated - - - - x Hysteresis - - - - x Axis reference position - - - - x Encoder value minimum/maximum - - - - x Cam start position/end position - - - - x Cam effective direction - - - - x Cam channel assignment - - - - x Isochronous mode is not configurable using a GSD file. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 15 Product overview 2.1 Properties Configuration options You can configure the module with STEP 7 or with a GSD file. When you configure the module using a GSD file, you can find the configuration under various short designations/module names. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. The following configurations are possible: Table 2- 3 Configuration options with GSD file of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 Can be integrated in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel normal operation without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS x x x 1 x 4-channel normal operation with value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS QI x x - 1 x 4-channel with pulse width modulation DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS PWM x x x x - - DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM - x - DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC (16 Byte) MtM - x - DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC (6 Byte) MtM - x - 1 x 4-channel with oversampling 1 x 4-channel with cam control and MtM - Value status (quality information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names in the GSD file: DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS QI (...) DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM (...) Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status function for the digital module, a byte in the input address space is additionally assigned. Bits 0 to 3 of this byte are each assigned to one channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No error is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is an error in the module. If an error occurs on a channel of this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 16 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. See also Technical specifications (Page 90) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 17 3 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.1 Wiring 3.1.1 Wiring and block diagram In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. * The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 18 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.1 Wiring Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire connection). 2-wire connection 24 V DC Backplane bus interface Control unit M P1, P2, AUX Polarity reversal protection Color-coded label CCxx (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) Output signal, channel n Reference output signal, channel n DIAG .0, .1, .2, .3 PWM Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) Ground Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) Pulse width modulation LED (green) OVS PWR Oversampling LED (green) Power LED (green) DQn+ DQn- Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 19 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.1 Wiring Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) DQn+ Output signal, channel n M Ground DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 20 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.1 Normal operation/Valve control Normal operation "Normal operation" refers to the function of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS as digital output module. Valve control is a special function of normal operation. Valve control function You can use the valve control function to switch to a lower "holding current" after operating the valve (inrush current). You do this by activating a pulse width modulation (see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46)). At a 0 1 change of the digital channel, the configured hold time is started. After the hold time elapses, the pulse duty cycle becomes "modulated upon" in the form of a pulse width modulation. The actuating signal is output digitally as a pulse train of on and off pulses. Configuration You configure valve control with the following parameters: "Normal operation" operating mode Holding time valve control Pulse width modulation duty cycle Pulse width modulation time period Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 21 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.2 Parameters/address space Chronological sequence The figure below shows the chronological sequence for valve control. The pulse width modulation is activated in the next possible data cycle. Data cycle Holding time valve control Figure 3-3 Valve control "Pulse width modulation time period" parameter You use the "Pulse width modulation time period" parameter to specify the frequency of the pulse width modulation "modulated upon" for the valve control (see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46)). Note: When this is parameter is set to "Off", the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS is in normal operation without valve control. "Pulse width modulation duty cycle" parameter You use the "Pulse width modulation duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty cycle of the "modulated upon" pulse width modulation within the configured period. Note: Unlike in the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode, the duty factor cannot be updated cyclically as a function of an output value from the user program in normal operation with valve control. Derating Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (Page 95). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 22 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.2 Parameters DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS parameters The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode (Page 98). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 3- 1 Assignable parameters in DQ operating mode (valve control) (GSD file) 3 Parameter Operating mode 4 Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0230 for STEP 7; GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 No Module Module 1 * Normal operation DQ (valve control) 2 * Oversampling * Pulse width modulation * Cam control Output rate * 1 value/cycle 1 value/cycle No Module Module1 Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ * Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1 * Enable * Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1 * Enable * Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel 1 * Enable * Shutdown Shutdown Yes Channel Module 1 * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Channel activated Reaction to CPU STOP Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 23 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Holding time valve control Pulse width modulation duty cycle Pulse width modulation time period Potential group Value range * 10 ms * 20 ms * ... * 10 s * 0% * 0.1% * 0.2% * ... * 100% * Off * 0.20 ms * 0.40 ms * 0.93 ms * 1.33 ms * 4.27 ms * 10.67 ms * 21.33 ms * 34.13 ms * 59.73 ms * Use potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0230 for STEP 7; GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 500 ms Yes Channel Channel 1 50% Yes Channel Channel 1 Off Yes Channel Channel 1 Module Module 1 No Use potential group of the left module 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station when configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD, the possible parameter assignments are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 15 bytes. 2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation. 3 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files. 4 When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 24 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.2 Parameters/address space 3.2.3 Explanation of parameters Operating mode At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are operated. When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. Normal operation as digital output module - Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21). Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46) Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34) Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62) Output rate Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle. See section Oversampling (Page 34). Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Channel activated Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Holding time valve control Specifies the time which must expire before the pulse width modulated output signal is output in the next possible data cycle. See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 25 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.2 Parameters/address space Pulse width modulation duty cycle Specifies the pulse duty cycle for the "modulated upon" pulse width modulation for the valve control. See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21). Pulse width modulation time period Specifies the frequency of the pulse width modulation. See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21) and section Pulse width modulation (Page 46). Potential group With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light or dark BaseUnit. A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits. The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) 3.2.4 Address space Address space for configuration as a 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a 4-channel module with value status (normal operation without/with valve control). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status was enabled. Figure 3-4 Address space for configuration as a 4-channel DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS with value status Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 26 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the digital module, a byte in the input address space is additionally assigned. Bits 0 to 3 of this byte are each assigned to one channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No error is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is an error in the module. If an error occurs on a channel of this module, the value status for all channels is 0. 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 3.3.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS. Figure 3-5 DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) OVS (green) PWM (green) PWR (green) LED displays Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 27 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms. DIAG LED Table 3- 2 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 3- 3 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On OVS LED and PWM LED Table 3- 4 Status display of the oversampling LED OVS LED PWM LED Meaning DQ operating mode (valve control) active Off Off On Off Off On On On Oversampling operating mode active Pulse width modulation operating mode active Cam control (MCC) operating mode active Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 28 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms PWR LED Table 3- 5 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 3.3.2 Interrupts The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short circuit Excess temperature Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Communication error Channel temporarily not available Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 29 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Table 3- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Short circuit Error code Meaning Solution 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maximum permitted module temperature has been exceeded. All channels of the module are switched to high resistance. The module is then restarted. Correct the process wiring Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. 1 2 No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Communication error 13H Module is defective. Replace the module. Channel temporarily not available 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or was canceled. The module does not output any process values or substitute values in this state. * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. 1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit. 2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature diagnostic interrupt. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 30 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Oversampling operating mode 4.1 Connecting 4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram 4 In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in oversampling operating mode. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. * The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 31 Oversampling operating mode 4.1 Connecting Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire connection). 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) Backplane bus interface M Ground Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green) DQn+ Output signal oversampling, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green) DQn- Reference output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green) Figure 4-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 32 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Oversampling operating mode 4.1 Connecting Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) DQn+ Output signal oversampling, channel n M Ground DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 4-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 33 Oversampling operating mode 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.1 Oversampling Function Oversampling is the output of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles), whereby n sub-cycles correspond to one PROFINET bus cycle. A data packet is transmitted from the controller to the module, which outputs the packet in n constant bus sub-cycles. Oversampling is useful whenever you require output of data with high time resolution but without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles. With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles: Each sub-cycle returns a 4-bit output value. A sub-cycle is at least 100 s long. Sub-cycles are possible in increments of 2 to 32 (only even numbers). The following applies here: Isochronous data cycle / number of sub-cycles permitted sub-cycle duration (100 s). Requirement Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set. Configuration You configure oversampling with the following parameters: "Oversampling" operating mode Output rate Note When oversampling is configured, do not use any reduction ratio of blocks in the runtime groups of your user program. Make sure that the output of data in the module is synchronized with the user program of the CPU. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 34 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Oversampling operating mode 4.2 Parameters/address space Chronological sequence The figure below shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The output data present in the CPU is output in the data cycle after the next one, distributed across the subcycles which are generated on the actual module. n Output values from bus cycle n Subcycle 4 bit x 32 (max) each = max. 16 bytes output data per data cycle Figure 4-3 Oversampling Derating Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (Page 95). 4.2.2 Parameters DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS parameters The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode (Page 104). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 35 Oversampling operating mode 4.2 Parameters/address space The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Assignable parameters in oversampling operating mode Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0230 for STEP 7 Operating mode 1 Output rate Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Channel activated Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group * Normal operation DQ (valve control) 2 * Oversampling * Pulse width modulation * Cam control * 2 values/cycle * 4 values/cycle * ... * 32 values/cycle * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Shutdown * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) No Module No Module Disable Yes Module Disable Yes Module Enable Yes Channel Shutdown Yes Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module 1 When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. 2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 36 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Oversampling operating mode 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.3 Explanation of parameters Operating mode At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are operated. When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. Normal operation as digital output module - Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21). Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46) Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34) Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62) Output rate Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle. See section Oversampling (Page 34). Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Channel activated Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light or dark BaseUnit. A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits. The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station. See also Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 37 Oversampling operating mode 4.2 Parameters/address space 4.2.4 Address space Address space for configuration with oversampling The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with oversampling. Figure 4-4 Address space of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS with oversampling Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 38 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Oversampling operating mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 4.3.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS. Figure 4-5 DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) OVS (green) PWM (green) PWR (green) LED displays Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 39 Oversampling operating mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms. DIAG LED Table 4- 2 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 4- 3 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On OVS LED and PWM LED Table 4- 4 Status display of the oversampling LED OVS LED PWM LED Meaning DQ operating mode (valve control) active Off Off On Off Off On On On Oversampling operating mode active Pulse width modulation operating mode active Cam control (MCC) operating mode active Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 40 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Oversampling operating mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms PWR LED Table 4- 5 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 4.3.2 Interrupts The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short circuit Excess temperature Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Communication error Channel temporarily not available Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 41 Oversampling operating mode 4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Table 4- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Short circuit Error code Meaning Solution 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maximum permitted module temperature has been exceeded. All channels of the module are switched to high resistance. The module is then restarted. Correct the process wiring Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. 1 2 No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Communication error 13H Module is defective. Replace the module. Channel temporarily not available 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or was canceled. The module does not output any process values or substitute values in this state. * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. 1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit. 2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature diagnostic interrupt. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 42 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.1 Connecting 5.1.1 Wiring and block diagram 5 In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in pulse width modulation operating mode. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. * The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 43 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.1 Connecting Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire connection). 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) Backplane bus interface M Ground Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green) DQn+ Output signal pulse width modulation, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green) DQn- Reference output signal, channel n Power LED (green) Figure 5-1 PWR Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 44 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.1 Connecting Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) DQn+ Output signal pulse width modulation, channel n M Ground DQn- Reference output signal, channel n Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 5-2 P1, P2, AUX Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 45 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2.1 Pulse width modulation Function In the "pulse width modulation" operating mode, the four outputs only provide a pulse width modulated output signal. The digital channel is activated with a pulse duty cycle that is updated cyclically as a function of the output value from the user program. The actuating signal is output digitally as a pulse train of on and off pulses. Time period T; frequency of the pulse width modulation: f = 1/T Pulse duration (duty factor) Figure 5-3 Pulse width modulation Configuration You configure the pulse width modulation with the following parameters: "Pulse width modulation" operating mode Pulse width modulation time period Substitute value duty cycle Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 46 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space Chronological sequence The output value (0 ... 1000) is written from the user program to the output word of the channel. The module maps this value by means of the output characteristic and the values for minimum pulse duration and minimum pulse pause to the configured time period and thus determines the pulse duty cycle (the pulse duration) of the pulse width modulation. Time period T Minimum pulse duration Minimum pulse pause Figure 5-4 Minimum pulse duration and minimum pulse pause Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 47 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space The minimum pulse duration and the minimum pulse pause are at least 2 s each, which means: Any pulse duration that is shorter than the minimum pulse duration will be suppressed Any pulse duration that is longer than the time period minus minimum pulse duration is reduced to 100% ( output value 1000) Minimum pulse pause Output characteristic Minimum pulse duration Figure 5-5 Output characteristic of the pulse duration The following values apply when determining the pulse duty cycle of the pulse width modulation: Table 5- 1 Determining the pulse duty cycle of the pulse width modulation Time period parameter Frequency Output value in the user program () Pulse duty cycle at output terminal DQn () 0.20 ms 5000 Hz 0...9 0 10...990 10...990 991...1000 1000 0...4 0 5...995 5...995 996...1000 1000 0...2 0 3...997 3...997 998...1000 1000 0, 1 0 0.40 ms 0.93 ms 1.33 ms 4.27 ms 2500 Hz 1071 Hz 750 Hz 234 Hz 2...998 2...998 999, 1000 1000 0...1000 0...1000 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 48 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space Time period parameter Frequency Output value in the user program () Pulse duty cycle at output terminal DQn () 10.67 ms 94 Hz 0...1000 0...1000 21.33 ms 47 Hz 0...1000 0...1000 34.13 ms 29 Hz 0...1000 0...1000 59.73 ms 17 Hz 0...1000 0...1000 Example When you configure a channel with 5000 Hz ( 200 s) and the user program writes the value 3 to the output word of the channel, this value is converted to 0 by the module: The channel is permanently 0. "Diagnostics Overflow" parameter You use the "Diagnostics Overflow" parameter to enable the diagnostics for the case that the permitted value range of the duty factor is exceeded, i.e. an output value > 1000 from the user program is written to the output word of the channel. "Substitute value duty cycle" parameter You use the "Substitute value duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty cycle of the pulse width modulation in the case of a CPU STOP. Derating Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (Page 95). 5.2.2 Parameters Parameters The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode (Page 110). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 49 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space The following parameter settings are possible for the respective operating mode: Table 5- 2 Assignable parameters in pulse width modulation operating mode (GSD file) 3 Parameter Operating mode 4 Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0230 for STEP 7; GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 No Module Module 1 * Normal operation DQ (valve control) 2 * Oversampling * Pulse width modulation * Cam control Output rate * 1 value/cycle 1 value/cycle No Module Module1 Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ * Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1 * Enable * Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1 * Enable * Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1 * Enable * Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel 1 * Enable * Shutdown Shutdown Yes Channel Module 1 * Keep last value * Output substitute value * 0% 0% Yes Channel Channel 1 * 0.1% * 0.2% * ... * 100% Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Diagnostics Overflow Channel activated Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute value duty cycle Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 50 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Pulse width modulation time period Potential group Value range * Off * 0.20 ms * 0.40 ms * 0.93 ms * 1.33 ms * 4.27 ms * 10.67 ms * 21.33 ms * 34.13 ms * 59.73 ms * Use potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) Default 0.93 ms Configuration in RUN Yes Use potential No group of the left module Effective range with configuration software HSP0127 for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP0230 for STEP 7; GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Channel Channel 1 Module Module 1 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station when configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD, the possible parameter assignments are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 15 bytes. 2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation. 3 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files. 4 When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 51 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2.3 Explanation of parameters Operating mode At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are operated. When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. Normal operation as digital output module - Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21). Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46) Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34) Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62) Output rate Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle. See section Oversampling (Page 34). Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Diagnostics Overflow You use the "Diagnostics Overflow" parameter to enable the diagnostics for the case that the permitted value range of the duty factor is exceeded, i.e. an output value > 1000 from the user program is written to the output word of the channel. See section Pulse width modulation (Page 46). Channel activated Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 52 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space Substitute value duty cycle You use the "Substitute value duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty cycle of the pulse width modulation in the case of a CPU STOP. See section Pulse width modulation (Page 46). Pulse width modulation time period Specifies the frequency of the pulse width modulation. See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21) and section Pulse width modulation (Page 46). Potential group With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light or dark BaseUnit. A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits. The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station. Derating Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (Page 95). See also Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 53 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.2 Parameters/address space 5.2.4 Address space Address space for configuration with pulse width modulation The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with pulse width modulation. Figure 5-6 Address space of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS with pulse width modulation Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 54 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS. Figure 5-7 DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) OVS (green) PWM (green) PWR (green) LED displays Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 55 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms. DIAG LED Table 5- 3 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 4 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On OVS LED and PWM LED Table 5- 5 Status display of the oversampling LED OVS LED PWM LED Meaning DQ operating mode (valve control) active Off Off On Off Off On On On Oversampling operating mode active Pulse width modulation operating mode active Cam control (MCC) operating mode active Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 56 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms PWR LED Table 5- 6 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 5.3.2 Interrupts The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short circuit Excess temperature High limit violated Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Communication error Channel temporarily not available Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 57 Pulse width modulation operating mode 5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Table 5- 7 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Short circuit Error code Meaning Solution 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maximum permitted module temperature has been exceeded. All channels of the module are switched to high resistance. The module is then restarted. Correct the process wiring High limit violated 7H The permitted value range of the duty factor has been exceeded. Correct the output value (0 to 1000) Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. 1 2 No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Communication error 13H Module is defective. Replace the module. Channel temporarily not available 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or was canceled. The module does not output any process values or substitute values in this state. * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. 1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit. 2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature diagnostic interrupt. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 58 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.1 Connecting 6.1.1 Wiring and block diagram 6 In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in cam control operating mode. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. Note Cross circuit at output Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules. Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. * The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 59 Cam control operating mode 6.1 Connecting Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire connection). 2-wire connection 24 V DC Backplane bus interface Control unit M P1, P2, AUX Polarity reversal protection Color-coded label CCxx (optional) Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) Output signal cam control, channel n Reference output signal, channel n DIAG .0, .1, .2, .3 PWM DQn+ DQn- Figure 6-1 Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) Ground Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) Pulse width modulation LED (green) OVS PWR MCC Oversampling LED (green) Power LED (green) Oversampling LED (green) and Power LED (green) Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 60 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.1 Connecting Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection). 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit only) DQn+ Output signal cam control, channel n M Ground DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Figure 6-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 61 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.1 Cam control Function In "Cam control" operating mode, switching signals are generated dependent on an encoder value. The axis can be executed as: Linear axis Rotary axis with modulo function The ET 200SP distributed I/O system determines the current actual position value of the axis using an encoder that is connected to an encoder module, e.g. I/O module or TM Count 1x24V/TM PosInput 1 technology module. In doing so, the encoder signals are evaluated, e.g. the pulses, which are proportional to the distance covered, are counted. The digital outputs (cams) switch on or off depending on the actual position value. However, the output value can be overruled by the control interface, PROFIenergy or CPU STOP. A maximum of 16 cams can be configured for each DQ4HS module. These 16 cams can be distributed among the 4 outputs of the module as desired. You realize a cam control with more than 4 cam tracks with the help of several DQ4HS modules, whereby each DQ4HS module can represent up to 4 cam tracks. All the DQ4HS modules of this cam control unit are supplied from a single encoder source but have their own input/output area. Each DQ4HS module has its own control/feedback interface and can operate independent of the other DQ4HS module in the multi-track cam control unit. The DQ4HS module can also be used in mixed operation. In mixed operation, a portion of the outputs can be used as cam track and the rest of the outputs can be controlled directly by the CPU. Requirement The cam control function can only be used in combination with an interface module that supports module to module communication (MtM). For example, interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.1 or higher. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 62 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Configuration You configure the cam control with the following parameters: "Cam control" operating mode Modulo activated Encoder module Hysteresis Axis reference position Minimum encoder value/Maximum encoder value Cam start position and end position Cam effective direction Cam channel assignment Pulsed cam output duty cycle Pulsed cam output period Note Pulsed cam output You can activate/deactivate the pulsed cam output via the control interface. Encoder data "Cam control" operating mode requires an external encoder that is connected to a separate encoder module. The encoder module must be in the same station. The interface module uses module to module communication (MtM) to transfer the encoder data from the encoder module to the DQ4HS module where the encoder data is processed. The module to module communication (MtM) must be appropriately configured in the configuration. The encoder value contains the axis position within the encoder data. Multiple electronic cams (switching points as a function of the encoder value) can be configured in the DQ4HS module. Through these cams, the digital outputs exhibit a defined switching behavior in relation to the encoder value. In "Cam control" operating mode, the digital output is the cam track. Mechanical vibrations of the encoder can be compensated using a configurable hysteresis. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 63 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space The configured range of the cam (cam start and end positions and effective direction) is compared with the encoder value, and the switching state (0/1) of the digital output (cam track) is generated based on the result of the comparison. Note Incorrect switching operation due to increment jumps Increment jumps can occur if, due to the system, an encoder value is not transferred to the digital output module at each increment of the sensor, e.g. a value is transferred at only every fourth increment. As a result, the output can be switched on and off incorrectly. If increment jumps are possible in your system, ensure that the maximum increment jump is less than 1/2 x (maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value). Note Direction detection If no direction information is included with the supplied encoder data, two valid different encoder values are needed for the direction detection (SYNC = 1). The two values allow a subtraction to be performed and the direction to be derived from the result. Cam start position and end position The switch-on range of cams is basically defined by a start position and end position. Figure 6-3 Cam start position and end position Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 64 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Effective direction A cam can be switched as a function of the motion direction. The following effective directions are possible for the cams: None: The cam is not evaluated. Positive: Switching behavior for effective direction "Positive" The cam switches on when the start position is reached in the positive motion direction . The cam switches off when the end position is crossed in the positive motion direction . At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the positive to negative effective direction, the cam is switched off . At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the negative to positive effective direction, the cam is switched on . Figure 6-4 Cam with effective direction "Positive" Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 65 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Negative: Switching behavior for effective direction "Negative": The cam switches on when the end position is reached in the negative motion direction . The cam switches off when the start position is crossed in the negative motion direction . At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the negative to positive effective direction, the cam is switched off . At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the positive to negative effective direction, the cam is switched on . Figure 6-5 Cam with effective direction "Negative" Both: Switching behavior for effective direction "Both": The cam switches on when the encoder value is within the switch-on range . Figure 6-6 Cam with effective direction "Both" Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 66 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Hysteresis Fluctuations of the position value of an axis can cause unwanted switching on and off in the cam control. Such unwanted switching states can be suppressed by configuring a hysteresis (> 0). The hysteresis is a position tolerance within which the position values may vary without changing the switching state of the cam. Changes of direction detected within the hysteresis are ignored. Behavior when hysteresis is activated: The status of the hysteresis is indicated in the feedback interface (HYS). The configured hysteresis width is in effect for all cams. The hysteresis boundary points can be read out on the HYS-START and HYS-END registers. They represent the hysteresis range spanned by the firmware. The hysteresis is always reevaluated by the firmware if no hysteresis range is currently activated on the cam (HYS=0) at the time of a direction reversal. The hysteresis range extends in the positive and negative directions around the detected direction reversal point. The hysteresis range thus extends over double the configured hysteresis. The following applies within the hysteresis: - The switching state of the cam is not changed. After the hysteresis range is exited, the output is set according to the cam settings. Actual position Effective position Effective hysteresis Figure 6-7 Hysteresis range - Detail Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 67 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space The following example shows the effects of the hysteresis on the switching behavior of the cam with positive effective direction. The hysteresis keeps the output stable when the encoder value signals a small direction reversal. For better orientation, lines are shown for the signal changes. Hysteresis range Encoder value Figure 6-8 Cam with hysteresis Channel assignment You use the channel assignment to specify the assignment of output channel to cam. You can assign an output channel to each cam. All cams that are assigned to the same output channel must not overlap. Note Effective direction Cams with configured effective direction "None" are disabled. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 68 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Pulsed cam output It is possible to pulse the cams. This function can be activated via a control interface and is active while a cam has state 1. You configure the pulsed cam output with the "Pulsed cam output duty cycle" and "Pulsed cam output period" parameters. You use the "Pulsed cam output duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty cycle of the "modulated upon" pulse within the configured period. Note In contrast to the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode, the duty cycle cannot be updated cyclically as a function of an output value from the user program. You use the "Pulsed cam output period" parameter to specify the frequency of the pulse "modulated upon" for the cam control. Note The edges of the pulsed output cam are not synchronized with the cam start or end. If the interpulse period is currently active, the first rising edge can come later at the cam start and the last falling edge can come earlier at the cam end. TON Period Duty cycle = TON / Period * 100% Figure 6-9 Pulsed cam output Example of the application of the pulsed cam output: A glue trace is to be applied to a box for adhesion. To save glue, glue dots will be placed instead of a continuous trace in the switch-on range (cam). See also Pulse width modulation (Page 46) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 69 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.2 Parameters Parameters The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode (Page 116). The module to module communication (MtM) must also be configured for the cam control operating mode. You can find additional information regarding module to module communication (MtM), e.g. in manual Interface Module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF. The following parameter settings are possible: Table 6- 1 Assignable parameters in cam control operating mode (GSD file) 2 Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software GSD file PROFINET IO Operating mode 3 * Normal operation DQ (valve control) 1 * Oversampling * Pulse width modulation * Cam control * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Encoder source diagnostics * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Modulo activated No Module Disable Yes Module Disable Yes Module Disable Yes Module Disable Yes Module Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 70 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software GSD file PROFINET IO DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.0 No Module 0 = Not activated Yes Module -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 0 Yes Module * -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 0 Yes Module Maximum encoder value * -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 2,147,483,646 Yes Module Cam 0 start position to Cam 15 start position * -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 0 Yes Module Cam 0 end position to Cam * 15 end position -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 0 Yes Module Cam 0 effective direction to * Cam 15 effective direction * None None Yes Module Channel 0 Yes Module Encoder module * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.0 * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.1 * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.2 * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.3 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.0 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.1 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.0 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.1 * TM Count 1x24VDC, Ch.0 4 * TM Count 1x24VDC Fastmode, Ch.0 * TM PosInput 1, Ch.0 4 * TM PosInput 1 Fastmode, Ch.0 * AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.0 4 * AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.1 4 * 0 = Not activated * 1 to 65535 Axis reference position * Minimum encoder value Hysteresis Positive * Negative * Both Cam 0 channel assignment * to Cam 15 channel * assignment * Channel 0 * Channel 3 Channel 1 Channel 2 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 71 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software GSD file PROFINET IO Channel activated Reaction to CPU STOP Pulsed cam output duty cycle Pulsed cam output period Potential group * Disable * Enable * Shutdown * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * 0% * 0.1% * 0.2% * ... * 100% * Off * 0.20 ms * 0.40 ms * 0.93 ms * 1.33 ms * 4.27 ms * 10.67 ms * 21.33 ms * 34.13 ms * 59.73 ms * Use potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) Enable Yes Channel Shutdown Yes Channel 50% Yes Channel 0.93 ms Yes Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module 1 Valve control is a special function of normal operation. 2 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files. 3 When configuring with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. 4 Only available in the configuration variant "DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS V2.0, MCC (16 Byte) MtM". Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 72 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space The following parameters are possible for the module to module communication (MtM) Table 6- 2 Assignable parameters for module to module communication (MtM) Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software GSD file PROFINET IO Slot of encoder module 1 to 64 Subslot of encoder module 1 1 No Module * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.0 No Module * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.1 DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.0 * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.2 * DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.3 Encoder module 1 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.0 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.1 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.0 * AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.1 * TM Count 1x24VDC, Ch.0 2 * TM Count 1x24VDC Fastmode, Ch.0 * TM PosInput 1, Ch.0 2 * TM PosInput 1 Fastmode, Ch.0 * AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.0 2 * AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.1 2 1 No Module 1 The parameter must be assigned identical with the "Encoder module" parameter under "Parameters in cam control operating mode". 2 Only available in the configuration variant "DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS V2.0, MCC (16 Byte) MtM". Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 73 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.3 Explanation of parameters 6.2.3.1 Parameters in cam control operating mode Operating mode At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are operated. When configuring using a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. Normal operation as digital output module - Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21). Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46) Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34) Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62) Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Encoder source diagnostics Enabling of the diagnostics for the following events: Invalid encoder value when modulo is deactivated (outside minimum encoder value/maximum encoder value) Value status of the encoder module = 0 Encoder module removed Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 74 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Modulo activated When "Modulo" is activated (value = 1), the encoder value is mapped onto a recurring modulo range. The modulo range is defined by the start value and the length. The start value corresponds to the "Minimum encoder value" parameter. The length is calculated using the following formula: Length = ABS (maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value) +1 Figure 6-10 Modulo calculation Encoder module With the help of the "Encoder module" parameter, you specify how the encoder data that is transferred to the DQ4HS module via module to module communication (MtM) is interpreted. The selected encoder module/encoder channel must be identical with the configured encoder module that supplies the encoder data. Depending on which encoder module is being used, not only the encoder value but also the value status of the encoder module and/or the direction of the encoder is included in the supplied encoder data and processed in the cam control. The following table shows the availability of value status and direction of the encoder module: Table 6- 3 Availability of value status and direction of the encoder module: Encoder module DI 8x24VDC HS AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS Value status Direction - - x 1 - TM Count 1x24VDC x x TM PosInput 1 x x AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS x - 1 In the configuration variant with QI. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 75 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space The value status of the encoder module affects the value status of the DQ4HS module. If the value status of the encoder module is invalid, the value status of the DQ4HS module is set to 0. For encoder modules that do not provide a direction in the encoder data, it must be kept in mind that only 2 valid different encoder values have to be available in the cam control before the internal direction detection can evaluate the encoder value and the associated configured cam. With the first valid encoder value, INP_OK = 1 is set, and with the second valid value, SYNC = 1 is additionally set. Hysteresis With the help of a hysteresis, fluctuations (minimal direction reversal in the encoder value) that affect the encoder value can be compensated. The hysteresis setting must satisfy the following conditions: Hysteresis < ABS ((maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value) / 4) Hysteresis < Cami end position - Cami start position [i = 0 to 15] Axis reference position With the help of the axis reference position, the encoder value can be adapted or corrected, e.g. for taking the zero position of the sensor into account. The axis reference position is subtracted from the encoder value before further processing of the encoder value. Encoder value minimum/maximum "Minimum encoder value" is the low value of the valid encoder range. When "Modulo" is activated, this value is the start value for the modulo operation. "Maximum encoder value" is the high value of the valid encoder range. When "Modulo" is activated, this value is used for calculating the length for the modulo operation. The difference of "Maximum encoder value" and "Minimum encoder value" must be at least 2. When "Modulo" is deactivated, a check is made to determine whether the encoder value is less than "Minimum encoder value" and greater than "Maximum encoder value". When "Modulo" is activated, the result of "Maximum encoder value" - "Maximum encoder value" must not exceed the value 2,147,483,646. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 76 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Cam 0 start position/end position to Cam 15 start position/end position The position values are used to specify the switching range of the cam that, in combination with the effective direction and channel assignment, leads to the switching action at the output. When modulo is deactivated, the following applies: Minimum encoder value <= Cam start position < Cam end position <= Maximum encoder value When modulo is activated, the following applies: Minimum encoder value < Maximum encoder value Minimum encoder value <= Cam start position <= Maximum encoder value Minimum encoder value <= Cam end position <= Maximum encoder value Cam start position <> Cam end position See section Cam control (Page 62). Cam 0 effective direction to Cam 15 effective direction With this parameter, you specify the effective direction of the cam. See section Cam control (Page 62). Cam 0 channel assignment to Cam 15 channel assignment With this parameter, you specify the assignment of the output channel for a cam. You can assign an output channel to each cam. Channel activated Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Specifies the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP and for all channels in the cam control in the event of invalid encoder values. Note With "Output substitute value 1" or "Keep last value", a pulsed cam output continues to act. Pulsed cam output duty cycle This parameter indicates the percentage of switching state "1" for the time specified in the "Pulsed cam output period" parameter. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 77 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Pulsed cam output period This parameter specifies the period of the pulsed cam output. Potential group With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light or dark BaseUnit. A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits. The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station. See also Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) 6.2.3.2 Parameters for module to module communication (MtM) Slot of encoder module Specifies the slot of the encoder module for the module to module communication (MtM) Subslot of encoder module This value is permanently preset to 1. Encoder module Specifies the module that is used as an encoder module for the module to module communication (MtM) Note Parameter assignment of the encoder module The parameter must be assigned identical with the "Encoder module" parameter under Parameters in cam control operating mode (Page 74). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 78 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.4 Address space 6.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface Control interface The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the cam control. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the control interface in the process image output. "QB x" represents the start address of output byte x. Figure 6-11 Assignment of the control interface Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 79 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.4.2 Notes on the control interface Notes on the control bits Table 6- 4 Details for the control interface Control bit Notes SLOT You use this value to specify the write accesses for the registers addressable with LD_SLOT. ACCESS_SLOT * RD/WR = 0: Read access to the addressed register. * RD/WR = 0 --> 1: Writing is enabled at a transition from "0" to "1". Note: After a successful write operation, the addressed register is read. * CTRL_DQ.CHx SET_DQ.CHx LD_SLOT You use this value to select the register, see Notes on the control interface (Page 80). You use this bit to specify how channel X is controlled. * 0 = Direct channel writing by the CPU. * 1 = Take channel value from the cam track. Values for the direct channel writing by the CPU. The bit is processed in combination with bit CTRL_DQ.x = 0. Table 6- 5 * 0 = Channel X outputs the value 0. * 1 = Channel X outputs the value 1. Addressable register in LD_SLOT Value of LD_SLOT Register Notes 0x00 CAM_CtrlVersion Version of the software module and the user ID 0x01 CAM_CtrlConfig * Bits 0 to 7: Version-Low of SW module CAM_Ctrl * Bits 8 to 15: Version-High of SW module CAM_Ctrl * Bits 16 to 31: User ID Static module configuration * Bits 0 to 7: Number of channels * Bits 8 to 15: Number of cams * Bits 16 to 23: Number of internal registers * Bits 24 to 31: Reserved 0x02 ENC_RAW Raw copied encoder value 0x03 HYS_START 0x04 HYS_END When hysteresis is active (STS_REG.HYS = 1), the HYS_START and HYS_END registers contain the boundary points of the hysteresis. 0x05 ENC_ERRORS Read: Number of detected errors in the encoder data (change from 1 to 0 of bit INP_OK in byte STS_REG of the feedback interface). Write: Resetting the counter Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 80 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Value of LD_SLOT Register Notes 0x06 DIFF_MEDIAN 1 Read: Averaged difference value of the incoming encoder values (indicator for update rate) The evaluation is directly coupled to the raw value (encoder data). Only the differences between the encoder values as a moving average are evaluated. Write: Resetting the counter * 0x07 PWM_WRITE Read: Status of the currently activated pulsed cam output Write: Activation/deactivation of the pulsed cam output 0x08 CAM_ON-INFO * Deactivate pulsed cam output for channel X: SLOT.Bitx = 0 * Activate pulsed cam output for channel X: SLOT.Bitx = 1 Bit string with the switching state of the 16 cams of the cam pool 1 You can use the DIFF_MEDIAN value, for example, to evaluate the increment jumps occurring in the application during the commissioning phase. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 81 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.4.3 Assignment of the feedback interface Feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the module via the feedback interface. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the feedback interface in the process image input. "IB x" represents the start address of input byte x. Figure 6-12 Assignment of the feedback interface, part 1 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 82 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space Figure 6-13 Assignment of the feedback interface, part 2 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 83 Cam control operating mode 6.2 Parameters/address space 6.2.4.4 Notes on the feedback interface Notes on the feedback bits Table 6- 6 Details for the feedback interface Feedback bit Notes ACT_INP Internal encoder value This value is used by the cam control unit of the digital output module for evaluating the configured cams. RD_REG_VALUE Register value that was requested via the control interface, see table "Addressable registers in LD_SLOT". ACCESS_SLOT Feedback in response to the SLOT request via the control interface. LAST_DIR * 0 = Backward motion of last motion * 1 = Forward motion of last motion * 0 = No forward motion * 1 = Forward motion (current encoder value) * 0 = No backward motion * 1 = Backward motion (current encoder value) * 0 = Hysteresis is not active * 1 = Hysteresis is active INP_P INP_M HYS SYNC * 0 = No encoder direction available Note: If no encoder direction is available, the configured substitute values are output for all channels that operate as a cam track (CTRL_DQ.CHx = 1). * INP_OK 1 = Encoder data can be used for cam output * 0 = Encoder data is invalid Note: When the encoder data is invalid, the value status is set to 0. * 1 = Encoder data detected as invalid LD_STS_SLOT This bit changes its value following a successful write operation. STS_PWM Status for pulsed cam output of channels 0 to 3 * Bit 0 for channel 0: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated * Bit 1 for channel 1: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated * Bit 2 for channel 2: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated * Bit 3 for channel 3: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated * Bits 4 to 7: Reserved Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 84 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Feedback bit Notes STS_CAM Signal status of the cam tracks * STS_DQ Bit 0 for channel 0: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on * Bit 1 for channel 1: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on * Bit 2 for channel 2: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on * Bit 3 for channel 3: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on * Bits 4 to 7: Reserved Signal status of the digital outputs * Bit 0 for channel 0: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible) * Bit 1 for channel 1: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible) * Bit 2 for channel 2: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible) * Bit 3 for channel 3: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible) * Bits 4 to 7: Reserved Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 85 Cam control operating mode 6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6.3.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS. Figure 6-14 DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) OVS (green) PWM (green) PWR (green) LED displays Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 86 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms. DIAG LED Table 6- 7 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 6- 8 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On OVS LED and PWM LED Table 6- 9 Status display of the oversampling LED OVS LED PWM LED Meaning DQ operating mode (valve control) active Off Off On Off Off On On On Oversampling operating mode active Pulse width modulation operating mode active Cam control (MCC) operating mode active Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 87 Cam control operating mode 6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms PWR LED Table 6- 10 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 6.3.2 Interrupts The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short circuit Excess temperature Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Communication error Invalid encoder data Encoder module removed or not ready to operate Channel temporarily not available Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 88 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Cam control operating mode 6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6.3.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note You can connect 2 actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators. Table 6- 11 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution Short circuit 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maximum permitted module temperature has been exceeded. All channels of the module are switched to high resistance. The module is then restarted. Correct the process wiring Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. 1 2 No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Communication error 13H Module is defective. Replace the module. Error 1 in actuator/sensor 1DH The encoder data is invalid. * Check encoder module and connected sensor. * Check messages about encoder modules and eliminate any errors. * Insert encoder module * Insert server module * Check connection to the controller * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Error 2 in actuator/sensor Channel temporarily not available 1EH 1FH The encoder module is removed or not ready to operate Firmware update is currently in progress or was canceled. The module does not output any process values or substitute values in this state. 1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit. 2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature diagnostic interrupt. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 89 7 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 General information Product type designation DQ 4x24 V DC/2 A HS Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V15.1 or higher * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Via GSD as of V5.6 HF4 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.33 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function Yes; Valve control * PWM Yes * Cam control (switching at comparison values) Yes; Via MtM (module-to-module communication) * Oversampling Yes * MSO No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 90 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 Input current Current consumption, max. 50 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 2.5 W; at 24 V, 25 C, DQ mode, 2 A per channel Address area Address space per module * Inputs 1 byte; Max. 14 bytes in the cam control operating mode * Outputs 1 byte; Max. 16 bytes in the oversampling operating mode Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 * 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals or potential distributor module * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 4 Current-sinking No Current-sourcing Yes; Push-pull output Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 6A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to M (-1 V) Controlling a digital input No Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 91 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 Digital output functions, parameterizable * Switching tripped by comparison values Yes - Number of cam tracks, max. 4 - Number of cams per module, max. 16 - Number of cams per track, max. 16 - Supported axis types Linear axes and rotary axes with modulo function - Hysteresis Yes - Pulsed cam output Yes - Range of values for comparison values, -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (user-specific within this range) max. * Freely usable digital output Yes * PWM output Yes - Number, max. 4 - Cycle duration, parameterizable Yes; 0 ms, 0.2 ms, 0.4 ms, 0.93 ms, 1.33 ms, 4.27 ms, 10.67 ms, 21.33 ms, 34.13 ms, 59.73 ms - Resolution of the duty cycle 0.1 % * Digital output with oversampling Yes - Number, max. 4 - Values per cycle, max. 32 - Resolution, min. 100 s Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 2A * on lamp load, max. 10 W Load resistance range * lower limit 12 * upper limit 3 400 Output current * for signal "1" rated value 2A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 1 s * "1" to "0", max. 1 s Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 92 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 5 kHz * with inductive load, max. 5 kHz * on lamp load, max. 5 kHz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 2A * Current per module, max. 8A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 30 C, max. 8 A; DQ mode - up to 40 C, max. 6.9 A; DQ mode - up to 50 C, max. 4.7 A; DQ mode - up to 60 C, max. 2.5 A; DQ mode vertical installation - up to 30 C, max. 7.2 A; DQ mode - up to 40 C, max. 5.6 A; DQ mode - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; DQ mode Cable length * shielded, max. 50 m * unshielded, max. 50 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes; Operating modes DQ and OVS only Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 40 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 s Jitter, max. 1 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostic functions Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Diagnostic information readable Yes * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break No * Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise * Group error Yes Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 93 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0 Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard modules No Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) * vertical installation, max. 50 C Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 94 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Technical specifications 7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS 7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Maximum permitted output current depending on the frequency The figure below shows the maximum permitted output current per channel depending on the frequency. You must take this characteristic into consideration for all operating modes of the module. Figure 7-1 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS depending on the frequency Maximum permitted output current depending on the ambient temperature In addition to the dependency of the maximum permitted output current on the frequency, you also have to take into consideration the dependency on the ambient temperature. Depending on the configured operating mode, there is an additional "DQ" or "PWM" derating. The table below shows the dependencies of derating version and module operating mode: Table 7- 1 Additional derating versions of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Derating version Operating mode Normal operation Valve control in normal operation Pulse width modulation Oversampling Cam control DQ derating x - - x - PWM derating - x x - x Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 95 Technical specifications 7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS DQ derating The figure below shows the maximum permitted total current depending on the ambient temperature for the DQ derating. Horizontal installation position Vertical installation position Figure 7-2 Additional DQ derating depending on the ambient temperature Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 96 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Technical specifications 7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS PWM derating The figure below shows the maximum permitted total current depending on the ambient temperature for the PWM derating. Horizontal installation position Vertical installation position Figure 7-3 Additional PWM derating depending on the ambient temperature Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 97 Parameter data records A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the reaction to CPU STOP of individual channels can be changed in RUN without this having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. Note Changing parameters in RUN When parameters are reassigned in RUN, a brief signal failure can occur at the output. For this reason, reassignment of parameters in RUN should be done when a 0 is being output at the output. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 98 Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode Structure of data record 128 for entire module Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 99 Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-3 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-4 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-5 Channel header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 100 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 101 Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode Codes for time period of the pulse width modulation The following table contains the codes for the time period of the pulse width modulation of the digital output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for the period Value Time period Code 0 Off 0000 0000 4 0.20 ms 0000 0100 7 0.40 ms 0000 0111 12 0.93 ms 0000 1100 14 1.33 ms 0000 1110 21 4.27 ms 0001 0101 26 10.67 ms 0001 1010 30 21.33 ms 0001 1110 33 34.13 ms 0010 0001 36 59.73 ms 0010 0100 Errors when transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record. In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record 128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0. Table A- 2 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible * Check station. * Plug the module in correctly. * Check parameters of the WRREC block. DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parameter block, see Figure A-2 Header information (Page 99). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 102 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Error in the header, length or number of parameter blocks Correct the length and number of parameter blocks, see Figure A-2 Header information (Page 99) and Figure A-3 Module header information (Page 100). Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H E0H 02H DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits. DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for operating mode Correct the diagnostics enables according to the operating mode, see Figure A-4 Module parameter block (Page 100). DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value invalid Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 101). DFH 80H E1H 0DH Code for output rate invalid Use valid code for output rate, see Figure A-4 Module parameter block (Page 100). DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the configuration, see Figure A-4 Module parameter block (Page 100). DFH 80H E1H 22H Value for holding time valve control invalid Adapt holding time valve control to valid value, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 101). DFH 80H E1H 23H Value for pulse width modulation duty cycle invalid Adapt pulse width modulation duty cycle to valid value, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 101). DFH 80H E1H 24H Code for pulse width modulation time period invalid Use valid code for pulse width modulation time period, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 101). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 103 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the reaction to CPU STOP of individual channels can be changed in RUN without this having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 104 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode Structure of data record 128 for entire module Figure A-7 Structure of data record 128 for entire module Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-8 Header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 105 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-9 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-10 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-11 Channel header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 106 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-12 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 107 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode Codes for the output rate The table below contains the codes for the output rate of the digital output module. You must enter these codes in byte 4 of the module parameter block of data record 128 (see figure). Table A- 3 Codes for the output rate Value Output rate Code 1 2 values/cycle 000001 3 4 values/cycle 000011 5 6 values/cycle 000101 7 8 values/cycle 000111 9 10 values/cycle 001001 11 12 values/cycle 001011 13 14 values/cycle 001101 15 16 values/cycle 001111 17 18 values/cycle 010001 19 20 values/cycle 010011 21 22 values/cycle 010101 23 24 values/cycle 010111 25 26 values/cycle 011001 27 28 values/cycle 011011 29 30 values/cycle 011101 31 32 values/cycle 011111 Errors when transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record. In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 108 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record 128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0. Table A- 4 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible * Check station. * Plug the module in correctly. * Check parameters of the WRREC block. DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parameter block, see Figure A-8 Header information (Page 105). DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of parameter blocks Correct the length and number of parameter blocks, see Figure A-8 Header information (Page 105), figure Figure A-9 Module header information (Page 106) and Figure A-11 Channel header information (Page 106). DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits. DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for operating mode Correct the diagnostics enables according to the operating mode, see Figure A-10 Module parameter block (Page 106). DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value invalid Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP, see Figure A-12 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 107). DFH 80H E1H 0DH Code for output rate invalid Use valid code for output rate, see Figure A-10 Module parameter block (Page 106). DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the configuration, see Figure A-10 Module parameter block (Page 106). See also Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode (Page 104) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 109 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, you can change the period of individual channels in "Pulse width modulation" operating mode in RUN without this having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 110 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode Structure of data record 128 for entire module Figure A-13 Structure of data record 128 for entire module Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-14 Header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 111 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-15 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-16 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-17 Channel header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 112 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 113 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode Codes for time period of the pulse width modulation The following table contains the codes for the time period of the pulse width modulation of the digital output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 5 Codes for the period Value Time period Code 0 Off 0000 0000 4 0.20 ms 0000 0100 7 0.40 ms 0000 0111 12 0.93 ms 0000 1100 14 1.33 ms 0000 1110 21 4.27 ms 0001 0101 26 10.67 ms 0001 1010 30 21.33 ms 0001 1110 33 34.13 ms 0010 0001 36 59.73 ms 0010 0100 Errors when transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record. In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record 128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0. Table A- 6 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible * Check station. * Plug the module in correctly. * Check parameters of the WRREC block. DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parameter block, see Figure A-14 Header information (Page 111). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 114 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Error in the header, length or number of parameter blocks Correct the length and number of parameter blocks, see Figure A-14 Header information (Page 111) and Figure A-17 Channel header information (Page 112). Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H E0H 02H DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits. DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for operating mode Correct the diagnostics enables according to the operating mode, see Figure A-16 Module parameter block (Page 112). DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value invalid Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP, see Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 113). DFH 80H E1H 0AH Value for substitute value invalid Adapt substitute value to valid value, see Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 113). DFH 80H E1H 0DH Code for output rate invalid Use valid code for output rate, see Figure A-16 Module parameter block (Page 112). DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the configuration, see Figure A-16 Module parameter block (Page 112). DFH 80H E1H 24H Code for pulse width modulation time period invalid Use valid code for pulse width modulation time period, see Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 113). See also Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode (Page 110) Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 115 Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, you can change the period of individual channels in RUN without this having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. If a parameter is changed in the module parameter block or in the internal cam control block, the direction information is nullified (SYNC = 0) until it can be detected again. As long as no direction information is available, the configured substitute values are output for the cam control channels. Note Direction detection If no direction information is included with the supplied encoder data, two valid different encoder values are needed for the direction detection (SYNC = 1). The two values allow a subtraction to be performed and the direction to be derived from the result. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 116 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Structure of data record 128 for entire module Figure A-19 Structure of data record 128 for entire module with cam control operating mode Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-20 Header information Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 117 Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-21 Module header information in cam control operating mode Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-22 Module parameter block in cam control operating mode Internal layout block The figure below shows the structure of the internal layout block. Figure A-23 Internal layout block in cam control operating mode Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 118 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller) The figure below shows the structure of the internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller). Figure A-24 Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller), part 1 Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 119 Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Figure A-25 Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller), part 2 Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-26 Channel header information in cam control operating mode Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 120 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam control operating mode Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 121 Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Codes for pulsed cam output period The table below contains the codes for the pulsed cam output period of the digital output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 7 Codes for the period Value Time period Code 0 Off 0000 0000 4 0.20 ms 0000 0100 7 0.40 ms 0000 0111 12 0.93 ms 0000 1100 14 1.33 ms 0000 1110 21 4.27 ms 0001 0101 26 10.67 ms 0001 1010 30 21.33 ms 0001 1110 33 34.13 ms 0010 0001 36 59.73 ms 0010 0100 Errors when transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record. In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record 128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0. Table A- 8 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible * Check station. * Plug the module in correctly. * Check parameters of the WRREC block. DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parameter block, see Figure A-20 Header information (Page 117). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 122 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Error in the header, length or number of parameter blocks Correct the length and number of parameter blocks, see Figure A-20 Header information (Page 117) and Figure A-21 Module header information in cam control operating mode (Page 118). Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H E0H 02H DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits. DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for operating mode Correct the diagnostics enables according to the operating mode, see Figure A-22 Module parameter block in cam control operating mode (Page 118). DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value invalid Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP, see Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam control operating mode (Page 121). DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the configuration, see Figure A-22 Module parameter block in cam control operating mode (Page 118). DFH 80H E1H 23H Value for pulsed cam output duty cycle invalid Adapt pulsed cam output duty cycle to valid value, see Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam control operating mode (Page 121). DFH 80H E1H 24H Code for pulsed cam output period invalid Use valid code for pulsed cam output period, see Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam control operating mode (Page 121). DFH 80H E1H 42H Difference of maximum encoder value and minimum encoder value invalid Difference of maximum encoder value and minimum encoder value invalid must not exceed 2,147,483,646. DFH 80H E1H 43H Format of encoder value invalid Read back data record 128 and apply the values/codes of the internal layout block unchanged. DFH 80H E1H 44H Difference of maximum encoder value and minimum encoder value invalid The difference of maximum encoder value and minimum encoder value must be at least 2. DFH 80H E1H 45H Specifications in the layout of encoder data invalid Read back data record 128 and apply the values/codes of the internal layout block unchanged. DFH 80H E1H 46H Value of hysteresis invalid The hysteresis setting must satisfy the following conditions: * DFH 80H E1H 47H Value for channel assignment of a cam invalid Hysteresis < ABS ((maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value) / 4) For the channel assignment of a cam, only values 0 to 3 may be used, see Figure A24 Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller), part 1 (Page 119). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 123 Parameter data records A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H E1H 48H Meaning Solution Difference of cam end position and cam start position invalid The hysteresis setting must satisfy the following conditions: * Hysteresis < Cami end position - Cami start position [i = 0 to 15] or Cam end position and cam start position must satisfy the following conditions: When modulo is deactivated: * Cam end position > Cam start position When modulo is activated: * Cam end position <> Cam start position DFH 80H E1H 49H Overlapping of cams The switch-on range of all cams that are assigned to a cam track must not overlap. DFH 80H E1H 4AH Cam start position or cam end position invalid or outside of encoder range Cam end position and cam start position must satisfy the following conditions: When modulo is deactivated: Minimum encoder value <= Cam start position < Cam end position <= Maximum encoder value When modulo is activated: * DFH 80H E1H 4BH Structure version invalid * Minimum encoder value <= Cam start position <= Maximum encoder value * Minimum encoder value <= Cam end position <= Maximum encoder value Write 0 to structure version, see Figure A24 Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller), part 1 (Page 119). Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0) 124 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record 02/2018 A5E42404662-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42404662-AA 02/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the regulations in your country. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 4 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 12 3.1 4 5 Properties ................................................................................................................................10 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................12 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15 4.2 Declaration of parameters ......................................................................................................17 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................18 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 19 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................19 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21 5.3 Diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................................21 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 26 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................26 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 6 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Documentation guide You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 7 Documentation guide Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 8 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Documentation guide PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 9 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 10 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 16 outputs Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A (per channel), total current max. 8 A Source output (PNP, P-switching) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET I O PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0240 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V8.0 or higher X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 11 3 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit as well as information on wiring your system with potential distribution modules in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module, rendering the terminals unusable. Make sure that you only use digital output modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 12 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (1-wire connection). 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n Backplane bus interface 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Output electronics M Ground Polarity reversal protection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit ) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of actuators DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 13 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Example: 2-wire connection of actuators with potential distribution module The following figure shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (2-wire connection) in combination with a potential distribution module. Figure 3-2 Example: 2-wire connection of actuators with potential distribution module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 14 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Parameters/address space 4.1 4 Parameters Parameters for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 26). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Channel activated Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 Range of values * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Turn off Yes Channel Module Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 6 bytes. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 16 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Declaration of parameters 4.2 Declaration of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 16-channel without value status DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA V0.0 Configuration software, e.g., with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP V14 or higher with HSP 0230 X X Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA. Figure 4-1 Address space DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 18 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostic messages (Page 21). DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 19 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error display DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not configured Flashing Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashing LED channel status Table 5- 2 LED channel status display LED channel status Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 20 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing 5.3 Diagnostic messages A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Solution * Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 21 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0 General information Product type designation DQ 16x 24 V DC/0.5 A BA, PU 1 Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V5.5 or higher * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 55 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 22 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0 Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module * Outputs 2 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module * 3-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 16 Current-sinking No Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 1.4 A; 0.7 to 1.9 A Open-circuit detection No Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-53 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 100 k Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 30 A Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", typ. 80 s; at rated load * "0" to "1", max. 150 s; at rated load * "1" to "0", typ. 100 s; at rated load * "1" to "0", max. 200 s; at rated load DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 23 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0 Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 100 Hz * with inductive load, max. 2 Hz * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 0.5 A * Current per module, max. 8A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 60 C, max. 8A vertical installation - up to 50 C, max. 8A Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 24 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0 Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 25 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 26 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 27 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 15. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15 DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) 28 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E0 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0) Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 29 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E03574420-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03574420-AE 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 to 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16 4.2 Declaration of parameters ...................................................................................................... 18 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 24 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 25 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 25 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 31 Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7132-6BH01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 16 outputs Source output (PNP, P-switching) Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A (per channel), total current max. 8 A (see derating: Technical specifications (Page 25)) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights Safety-related shutdown The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 GSD file TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Value status FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0230 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP distributed I/O system. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 13 3 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST module with the terminal assignments for a 1-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Note The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module, rendering the terminals unusable. Make sure that you only use digital output modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 1-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (1-wire connection). 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n Backplane bus interface 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Output electronics M Ground Polarity reversal protection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit ) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of actuators Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 31). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ Diagnostics: Wire break Channel activated Range of values * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Range of values Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 Default Turn off Parameter reassignment in RUN Yes * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * No Use potential group of Use potential the left module (mod- group of the left module ule plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Channel Module Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 32 bytes. Note * If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off. This prevents undefined load switching and the corresponding diagnostic alarm is triggered. * If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off. This prevents undefined load switching and the corresponding diagnostic alarm is triggered. * If the parameter "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" is enabled and "Diagnostics: wire break" is disabled, the signal status is retained at the affected channel when "Diagnostics: shortcircuit to L+" occurs. A diagnostic alarm is triggered only for 0 signal. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Declaration of parameters 4.2 Declaration of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+ Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 16-channel without value status DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 16-channel with value status DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 15 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST with value status Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 21 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostic messages (Page 24). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not configured Flashing Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashing LED channel status Table 5- 2 LED channel status display LED channel status Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 23 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostic messages 5.3 Diagnostic messages A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Note Parallel connection of two outputs For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Short-circuit 1H Wire break Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing 6H 10H 11H Meaning Solution * Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground * Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ Correct the process wiring Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect a resistor to the actuator contacts in the load resistance range * Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 General information Product type designation DQ 16x24 VDC/0.5 A ST Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 60 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module * Inputs + 2 bytes for QI information * Outputs 2 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 1-wire connection BU type A0 * 2-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module * 3-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module * 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module Digital outputs Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing) Number of digital outputs 16 Current-sinking No Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. 1A Open-circuit detection Yes Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 12 k Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A * for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", typ. 50 s * "1" to "0", typ. 100 s Parallel switching of two outputs * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 100 Hz * with inductive load, max. 2 Hz * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 0.5 A * Current per module, max. 8A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 30 C, max. 8A - up to 40 C, max. 8A - up to 50 C, max. 6A - up to 60 C, max. 4A vertical installation - up to 30 C, max. 8 A; in all other mounting positions - up to 40 C, max. 6 A; in all other mounting positions - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; Module-wise * Short-circuit to M Yes; Module-wise * Short-circuit to L+ Yes; Module-wise Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety-oriented group deactivation Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; in all other mounting positions * vertical installation, max. 50 C; in all other mounting positions Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Safety-related shutdown Note The digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST supports safety-related shutdown in connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST: * SIL according to IEC 61508: 2 * Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1: d Residual current for signal state "0" Note Residual current for signal state "0" Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0" signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker. This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break parameter. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 29 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Derating trend The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting positions. Figure 6-1 Load current for mounting position Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 31 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 15. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15 Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 33 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0) 34 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E32855952-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32855952-AC 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0 to 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16 4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 18 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 20 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 20 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 22 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 23 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 27 Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Part number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST module Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: 4 digital outputs with floating relay changeover contacts Supply voltage L+ Output current per output 2 A Normally open contact (NO: normally open) and normally closed contact (NC: normally closed) Assignable substitute values (per channel) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Suitable for resistive load The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X Value status FS01 V0.0.0 and higher V14 or higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately as spare parts: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST module with the terminal assignments for a 3-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0. 2-wire connection 11.n Common contact Backplane bus interface 12.n Normally closed contact Polarity reversal protection 14.n Normally open contact Color identification label CCxx (optional) n Channel Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) M Ground Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST parameters Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 27)). Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Channel activated Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 Value range * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Turn off Yes Channel Module Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8 bytes. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 4-channel with value status RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST V0. 0, QI V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 19 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LED displays The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22). LED DIAG Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned On Module diagnostics is available Flashes LED channel status Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status LED channel status Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated On LED PWR Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR LED PWR Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module supports diagnostics alarms. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event: Parameter assignment error No supply voltage Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Parameter assignment error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel * Incorrect parameter assignment * Correct the parameter assignment No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check supply voltage L+ on the potential group * Check BaseUnit Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0 General information Product type designation RQ CO 4x 24 V DC/2 A ST, PU 1 Firmware version V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0 Input current Current consumption (rated value) 50 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.2 W Address area Address space per module * Inputs + 1 byte for QI information * Outputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Digital outputs Type of digital output Relays Number of digital outputs 4 Current-sinking Yes Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection No Parallel switching of two outputs * for logic links Yes * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 2 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 2A * Current per module, max. 8A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 40 C, max. 8A - up to 50 C, max. 6A - up to 60 C, max. 4A vertical installation - up to 30 C, max. 8A - up to 40 C, max. 6A - up to 50 C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0 Relay outputs * Number of relay outputs 4 * Rated supply voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V * Current consumption of relays (coil current of all relays), max. 40 mA Switching capacity of contacts - with resistive load, max. 2A - Thermal continuous current, max. 2A - Switching current, min. 1 mA; 5 V DC - Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V - Rated switching voltage (AC) 24 V Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 200 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels Yes * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0 Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Derating trend The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting positions. Figure 6-1 Load current for mounting position Dimensional drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 27 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3 Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 09/2017 A5E03576775-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03576775-AE 10/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from 6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1 to 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1. Both modules are compatible, except for the firmware-update function. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 4 5 6 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 18 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 20 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 20 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 22 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23 6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 23 6.2 Switching cycles ..................................................................................................................... 28 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 29 Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 (number in package unit: 1 unit) 6ES7132-6HD01-2BB1 (number in package unit: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST module Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 4 floating relay outputs Supply voltage L+ Output current per output 5 A Normally open contact (NO: normally open) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher and higher with HSP 0222 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0232 V7.0 X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 13 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST module with the terminal assignments for 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST on the BaseUnit BU type B0. 3-wire connection RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions Backplane bus interface 1A to 4A AUX terminals (freely usable up to 230 V AC) Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Color identification label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) RQn+, RQn- Channel n PWR Power LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 15 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1. 2-wire connection 1L, 2L Supply voltage 24 V DC Backplane bus interface 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) RQn+, RQn- Channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions PWR Power LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 29). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Channel enabled * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Reaction to CPU STOP * 1 Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable yes Module Module Enable yes Channel Channel Turn off yes Channel Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8 bytes. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. Reaction to CPU STOP Specifies the behavior of the module if the CPU changes to STOP. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in hardware catalog STEP 7 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X X 1 x 4-channel with value status RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or higher with HSP 0222 X --- Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST with value status Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the RQ 4x120VDC230VAC/5A NO ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned on Module diagnostics is available Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 off Channel activated and process signal = 1 on PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ off Supply voltage L+ present on Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Parameter assignment error No supply voltage 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No supply voltage 11H Solution No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 General information Product type designation Firmware version RQ 4x120 VDC ... 230 VAC/5 A NO ST V0.0 * FW update possible No usable BaseUnits BU type B0, B1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC40 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * DQ Yes * DQ with energy-saving function No * PWM No * Oversampling No * MSO No Redundancy * Redundancy capability Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) permissible range, lower limit (DC) permissible range, upper limit (DC) 24 V 19.2 V 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 Input current Current consumption (rated value) 55 mA; without load Output voltage Rated value (AC) 230 V Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module * Inputs + 1 byte for QI information * Outputs 1 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Digital outputs Type of digital output Relays Number of digital outputs 4 Current-sinking Yes Current-sourcing Yes Short-circuit protection No Parallel switching of two outputs * for logic links Yes * for uprating No * for redundant control of a load Yes Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 2 Hz * with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz * on lamp load, max. 2 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per channel, max. 5A * Current per module, max. 20 A Total current of the outputs (per module) horizontal installation - up to 50 C, max. 20 A - up to 60 C, max. 16 A vertical installation - up to 40 C, max. 20 A - up to 50 C, max. 16 A; in all other mounting positions Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 Relay outputs * Number of relay outputs 4 * Rated supply voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V * Current consumption of relays (coil current of all relays), max. 40 mA * external protection for relay outputs Yes, with 6A * Number of operating cycles, max. 7 000 000; see additional description in the manual Switching capacity of contacts - with inductive load, max. 2 A; see additional description in the manual - with resistive load, max. 5 A; see additional description in the manual - Thermal continuous current, max. 5 A; Max. 1 385 VA, 150 W - Switching current, min. 100 mA; 5 V DC - Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V DC to 120 V DC - Rated switching voltage (AC) 24V AC to 230V AC Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 200 m Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Substitute values connectable Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break No * Short-circuit No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels Yes * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference between channels and backplane bus/supply voltage 240 V AC Isolation Isolation tested with 2 500 V DC (type test) tested with 2500 V DC * between channels and backplane bus/supply voltage * between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; in all other mounting positions * vertical installation, max. 50 C; in all other mounting positions Altitude during operation based on sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Technical specifications 6.2 Switching cycles Derating trend The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting positions. Figure 6-1 Load current and mounting position Dimension drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 27 Technical specifications 6.2 Switching cycles 6.2 Switching cycles Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts: Table 6- 1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts Resistive load For resistive load Voltage 24 VDC For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15 Switching cycles (typical) 0.1 million 4.0 A 0.2 million 2.0 A 0.5 million 1.0 A 1.6 million 0.5 A 4 million 0.1 A 7 million 60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million 120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million 48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million 60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million 120 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million 3.0 A 0.2 million 2.0 A 0.4 million 1.0 A 0.8 million 0.5 A 1.5 million 5.0 A 0.1 million 3.0 A 0.2 million 2.0 A 0.4 million 1.0 A 0.8 million 0.5 A 1.5 million 2.0 A 0.1 million 1.0 A 0.2 million 230 VAC For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15 Current 5.0 A 24 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 million 48 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million 60 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million 120 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million 1.0 A 0.3 million 0.5 A 1 million 0.1 A 2 million 2.0 A 0.1 million 1.0 A 0.3 million 0.5 A 1 million 230 VAC Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-GSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 29 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3 Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 31 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value behavior. Check the parameters of the module. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1) 32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE Digital output module ___________________ Preface RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST ___________________ 1 Documentation guide (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring ET 200SP Digital output module 4 ___________________ RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Parameters/address space (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 12/2015 A5E36107692-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36107692-AA 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 4 5 6 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15 4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 19 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................19 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................21 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22 6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................22 6.2 Switching cycles ......................................................................................................................26 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................28 Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 7 Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1 View of the module Module type and name Function class LED for diagnostics JOG (switch position up: jog) Color coding module type Toggle/jog switch for manually controlling the relay AUT (switch position "middle": Automatic mode ON (switch position down: Manual mode (MANUAL ON)) Function and firmware version LEDs for channel status and manual mode LED for supply voltage Article number Wiring diagram Image 2-1 Color code for selecting the color identification labels View of the module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Digital output module with 4 floating relay outputs Supply voltage L+ Output current 5 A (per output) Normally open contact (NO: normally open) Configurable diagnostics (per module) Configurable substitute values (per channel) 4 toggle/jog switches (jog, automatic or manual mode (MANUAL ON)) for controlling the relay Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Value status You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Note When load voltage is present, the relays of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST can also be activated via a manual switch even when they are in a non-configured state. When an output is set to manual control, the relay remains active during a firmware update. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST module with the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE. Note The switch position of the toggle/jog switch is stored in the process image input (PII) and can be read there. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 11 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST on the BaseUnit BU type B0. 3-wire connection RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions Backplane bus interface 1A to 4A AUX terminals (freely usable up to 230 V AC) Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Color-coded label with color codes CC40 and CC83 (optional) MA .0 .. .3 LED MANUAL ON and automatic RQn+, RQn- Channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) PWR Power LED (green) Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of actuators Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 2-wire connection of actuators The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1. 2-wire connection 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage Backplane bus interface DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Polarity reversal protection MA .0 .. .3 LED MANUAL ON and automatic Color-coded label with color code CC40 (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) RQn+, RQn- Channel n PWR Power LED (green) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) 1L, 2L Supply voltage 24 V DC Image 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 13 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Toggle/jog switch for controlling the relay You can switch the relay using the toggle/jog switch to jog, MANUAL ON (manual mode) or automatic mode for each channel. In manual mode, the state set by the output data is ignored. The 4 toggle/jog switches are located on the front of the electronic module. JOG (switch position "up": job mode): Short-term manual operation (MANUAL ON), while jogged. AUT (switch position "middle" or "not activated": Automatic mode): Each channel is activated via the user program (normal operation). ON (switch position "down": Manual mode (MANUAL ON) permanently): Each channel is switched on ("1" signal) independent of the activation of the user program (and substitute values). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ * Enable * Disable Channel activated * Enable * Disable * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value 1 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) Reaction to CPU STOP Potential group 1 Range of values Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 Disable Yes Module Module Enable Yes Channel Channel Turn off Yes Channel Module Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 4 bytes. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Channel activated Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated. Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group The load or supply voltage is fed module by module. The voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX are looped through the module from the left to the right neighboring module without tap. See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input. Configuration options of RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V13, SP1 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 4-channel without value status RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST X X X 1 x 4-channel with value status RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST, QI X X - Evaluating the value status An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the digital value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-1 Address space of RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST with value status Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST. DIAG (green/red) MA .0 .. .3 (yellow) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 21). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes LED MA 1..4 Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED MA .0 .. .3 (manual mode) Channel status LED Meaning Automatic Off Manual ON (toggle/jog switch) = Manual mode On Output enabled at specific channel Table 5- 3 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0 Off Channel activated and process signal = 1 On Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts PWR LED Table 5- 4 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 5.2 Interrupts The digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Parameter assignment error 10H Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH Meaning * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. Solution Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update * Restart the firmware update Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 21 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Firmware version V1.0 * Yes FW update possible Usable BaseUnits BU type B0, B1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC00 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode DQ Yes DQ with energy-saving function No PWM No Oversampling No MSO No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 100 mA; no load Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1 Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Inputs 1 byte; with QI Outputs 1 byte Digital outputs Number of outputs 4 Short-circuit protection No Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 2 Hz With inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz With lamp load, max. 2 Hz Total current of the outputs Current per channel, max. 5A Current per module, max. 20 A Total current of the outputs (per module) Horizontal installation * Up to 50 , max. 20 A * Up to 60 , max. 16 A Vertical installation * Up to 40 , max. 20 A * Up to 50 , max. 16 A Relay outputs Number of relay outputs 4 Rated input voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V Current consumption of relays (coil current of all relays), max. 40 mA External fuse for relay outputs Yes, with 6 A Number of switching cycles, max. 7000000; see additional description in the manual Switching capacity of the contacts * With inductive load, max. 2 A; see additional description in the manual * With resistive load, max. 5 A; see additional description in the manual * Thermal continuous current, max. 5A * Switched current, min. 100 mA; 5 V DC * Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V DC to 120 V DC * Rated switching voltage (AC) 24 V AC to 230 V AC Cable length Shielded, max. 1000 m Unshielded, max. 200 m Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1 Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes Wire break No Short-circuit No Group error Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics No For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels Yes Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels and voltage supply of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between channels and backplane bus/supply voltage 240 V AC Insulation Insulation tested with 2 500 V DC (type test) Tested with Between channels and backplane bus/supply voltage 2500 V DC Between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 20 mm Weights Weight, approx. 45 g Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Note External fuse for relay outputs The outputs have to be protected by an external fuse. When installed in a danger area according to the National Electric Code (NEC), the fuse must only be removed with the correct tool when the module is not in an explosion-proof zone. Derating trend The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting positions. Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 25 Technical specifications 6.2 Switching cycles 6.2 Switching cycles Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts: Table 6- 1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts Resistive load For resistive load Voltage 24 V DC Switching cycles (typical) 5.0 A 0.1 million 4.0 A 0.2 million 2.0 A 0.5 million 1.0 A 1.6 million 0.5 A 4 million 0.1 A 7 million 60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million 120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million 48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million 60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million 120 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million 3.0 A 0.2 million 2.0 A 0.4 million 1.0 A 0.8 million 0.5 A 1.5 million 5.0 A 0.1 million 3.0 A 0.2 million 2.0 A 0.4 million 1.0 A 0.8 million 230 VAC For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15 Current 24 V DC 0.5 A 1.5 million 2.0 A 0.1 million 1.0 A 0.2 million 0.5 A 0.5 million 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 million 48 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million 60 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million 120 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million 1.0 A 0.3 million 0.5 A 1 million 0.1 A 2 million Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Technical specifications 6.2 Switching cycles Resistive load For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15 Voltage 230 VAC Current Switching cycles (typical) 2.0 A 0.1 million 1.0 A 0.3 million 0.5 A 1 million Note Tests of mechanical environmental conditions Shock tested according to IEC 60068-2-27. Shock intensity: 100 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 27 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 29 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Image A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3 Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 DF DF Byte 1 80 80 Byte 2 B0 B1 Byte 3 xx xx Number of the data record unknown Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid number for data record. Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA Analog input module AI 8xU BA ___________________ Preface (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record Representation of analog B ___________________ values 03/2015 A5E34941660-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34941660-AA 03/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 12 4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................12 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................15 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 21 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................21 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 24 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................24 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................25 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 29 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................30 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................31 Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Application examples Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find application examples on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 7 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 View of the AI 8xU BA module Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 8 inputs (single-ended) Input ranges for voltage measurement: - 10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits Cycle time of the module (all channels) 10 ms Configurable diagnostics (per module) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 9 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xU BA module with the terminal assignments for a 2-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 8xU BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n Backplane bus interface MANA Ground of the analog inputs Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Current limitation M Ground Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) AI0 to AI7 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 11 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measuring types and ranges The analog input module AI 8xU BA has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Resolution Voltage 0 to 10 V 15 bits 10 V 16 bits including sign You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the section Representation of analog values (Page 29). Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters AI 8xU BA parameters The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records, see section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 25)). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Type/range of measurement Smoothing * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage 0 to 10 V * None * Weak * Medium * Strong GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module 1 Disable Yes Module Voltage (+/- 10 V) Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 13 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Interference frequency suppression Potential group 1 2 3 * 60 Hz (50 ms) * 50 Hz (60 * 16.6 Hz (180 ms) GSD file PROFIBUS DP 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module Use potential group of the left module No Module Module ms) 2 * 4800 Hz (0.625 ms) * 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 3 * 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 2 3 * 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 3 * Use potential group of the left module (dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light-colored BaseUnit) Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign this parameter using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8 bytes. Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. By selecting this interference frequency suppression with shorter integration time, the attenuation of the interference frequency that can be achieved is reduced (see Technical specifications). Note Unused channels Disable unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Type/range of measurement See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 12). Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-1 Smoothing for AI 8xU BA Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Potential group You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit. A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored BaseUnits. The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station. See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for AI 8xU BA. Figure 4-2 Address space of AI 8xU BA Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 17 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xU BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 20). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI 8xU BA supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Low limit violated High limit violated Error Parameter assignment error No load voltage 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Firmware update in progress or update has * been canceled. * The module does not read any process values in this state. Wait for firmware update Restart the firmware update Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 8xU BA 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1 Product type designation ET 200SP, 8xU Basic General information Firmware version * FW update possible V1.0 Yes Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC02 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Scalable measuring range No Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / - Operating mode Oversampling No MSI No CiR Configuration in RUN Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 25 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.7 W Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 21 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1 Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 16 bytes Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 8; single-ended Maximum permitted input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) 30 V Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms; per channel Input ranges (rated values), voltages 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 100 k -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits including sign Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 100 k Cable length Shielded, max. 200 m Formation of analog values for the inputs Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bits Integration time configurable Yes Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.67 / 50 / 60 / 4 800 (16.67 / 50 / 60) Conversion time (per channel) ms; 180 / 60 / 50 / 0.625 (67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75) Measured value smoothing Number of steps 4; none; 4/8/16 times Configurable Yes Encoders Connection of the signal transmitters For voltage measurement Yes For current measurement as 4-wire transducer No Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01% Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005% Crosstalk between inputs, min. 50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.05% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.3% Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1%), f1 = interference frequency Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB; with conversion time 67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75 < rated value of the input range), min. ms: 40 dB Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1 Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes Limit interrupt No Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break No Short-circuit No Group error Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes, green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics No For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC/60 V AC (basic insulation) Insulation Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 23 A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measurement type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Overflow Underflow * * * 10 V x x x 0 to 10 V x x x Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Overflow/underflow * * 10 V x x 0 to 10 V x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. STATUS output parameter If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 25 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 27 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 7 Codes for measurement types The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Codes for measuring ranges The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges Measuring range Code 10 V 0000 1001 0 to 10 V 0000 1011 Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA B Representation of analog values Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign 16 Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 29 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) 30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 10 V Values Dec. Voltage measuring range Hex. Range 10 V 32767 7FFF >11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 11.759 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range 20736 5100 7.5 V 1 1 361.7 V 0 0 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -27648 9400 -10 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.759 V -32768 8000 <-11.759 V Table B- 5 Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring range 0 to 10 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF >11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 11.759 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range 20736 5100 7.5 V 1 1 0 V + 361.7 V 0 0 0V -1 FFFF Underrange -4864 ED00 -1.759 V -32768 8000 < -1.759 V Underflow Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 31 Analog input module ___________________ Preface AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 1 ___________________ Documentation guide (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record Representation of analog B ___________________ values 03/2015 A5E34941201-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34941201-AA 03/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 13 4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................13 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................18 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 19 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................19 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................22 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................23 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................27 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................28 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 32 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................33 B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................34 Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Application examples Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 7 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 View of the AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA module Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 8 inputs (single-ended) For 2-wire and 4-wire transducers Input ranges for current measurement: - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign Cycle time of the module (all channels) 10 ms Configurable diagnostics (per module) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 9 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA module with the terminal assignments for 2-wire and 4-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: Current measurement 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current measurement In + Input signal, channel n Backplane bus interface UV Infeed voltage Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Current limitation M Ground Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) AI0 to AI7 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 11 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: Current measurement 4-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals. 4-wire connection for current measurement In + Input signal, channel n UV Infeed voltage L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) M Ground Connection AUX terminals to ground Color identification labels CCxx (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 4-wire connection Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measuring types and ranges The analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Resolution Current (2-wire or 4-wire connection) 0 to 20 mA 15 bits 4 to 20 mA 15 bits Current (4-wire connection) 20 mA 16 bits including sign You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the section Representation of analog values (Page 32). 4.2 Parameters AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA parameters The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28). Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 13 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Diagnostics: Wire break Type/range of measurement Smoothing * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated * Current (4-wire connection) 0 to 20 mA * Current (4-wire connection) 4 to 20 mA * Current (4-wire connection) +/-20 mA * Current (2-wire connection) 0 to 20 mA * Current (2-wire connection) 4 to 20 mA * None * Weak * Medium * Strong GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module 1 Disable Yes Module Disable Yes Module Module Current (4-wire Yes connection) 4 to 20 mA Channel Channel None Channel Channel Yes Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Interference frequency suppression Potential group * 60 Hz (50 ms) * 50 Hz (60 ms) * 16.6 Hz (180 ms) GSD file PROFIBUS DP 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 2 * 4800 Hz (0.625 ms) * 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 3 * 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 2 3 * 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 3 * Use potential group of the left module (dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light-colored BaseUnit) 1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign this parameter using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8 bytes. 2 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 3 By selecting this interference frequency suppression with shorter integration time, the attenuation of the interference frequency that can be achieved is reduced (see Technical specifications). Note Unused channels "Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be measured at the relevant input. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the Diagnostics: Wire break is output. Measurement type/measuring ranges See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 13). Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Potential group You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit. A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored BaseUnits. The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 17 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) 4.4 Address space Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA. Figure 4-2 Address space of AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xU/I 2-/4-wire BA. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel deactivated Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit (2-wire and 4-wire connection, current) Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA) Low limit violated High limit violated Error Parameter assignment error No load voltage Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit * 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and encoder Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with a larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate channel * Connect the encoder contacts High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable * 11H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment (diagnostics wire break set only with the permitted measuring ranges). * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Firmware update in progress or update has * been canceled. * The module does not read any process values in this state. Wait for firmware update Restart the firmware update Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground has an effect on all channels. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1 Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 8xI 2-/4-wire Basic General information Firmware version * FW update possible V1.0 Yes Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC01 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Scalable measuring range No Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / - Operating mode Oversampling No MSI No CiR Configuration in RUN Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 25 mA; without encoder supply Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1 Encoder supply 24 V encoder supply 24 V Yes Short-circuit protection Yes Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders/channels Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.7 W; without encoder supply voltage Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 16 bytes Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 8; single-ended Maximum permitted input current for current input (destruction limit) 50 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms; per channel Input ranges (rated values), currents 0 to 20 mA Yes Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 ; 15 bits -20 mA to +20 mA Yes Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 100 ; 16 bits including sign 4 mA to 20 mA Yes Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 ; 15 bits Cable length Shielded, max. 200 m Formation of analog values for the inputs Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bits Integration time configurable Yes Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.67 / 50 / 60 / 4 800 (16.67 / 50 / 60) Conversion time (per channel) ms; 180 / 60 / 50 / 0.625 (67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75) Measured value smoothing Number of steps 4; none; 4/8/16 times Configurable Yes Encoders Connection of the signal transmitters For voltage measurement No For current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes * 650 Load of 2-wire transducer, max. For current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1 Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01% Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005%/K Crosstalk between inputs, min. 50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.05% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.3% Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1%), f1 = interference frequency Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB; with conversion time 67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75 < rated value of the input range), min. ms: 40 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes Limit interrupt No Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes; for 4 to 20 mA Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground; module-based Group error Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics No For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1 Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC/60 V AC (basic insulation) Insulation Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range with PROFINET. Measurement type Measuring range Deactivated Current (4-wire connection) Current (2-wire connection) Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow Underflow Wire break * * * * * 0 to 20 mA x x x x - 4 to 20 mA x x x x x 20 mA x x x x - 0 to 20 mA x x x - - 4 to 20 mA x x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range with PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow/underflow Wire break * * * * 0 to 20 mA x x x - 4 to 20 mA x x x x 20 mA x x x - 0 to 20 mA x x x - 4 to 20 mA x x x x Deactivated Current (4-wire connection) Current (2-wire connection) Diagnostics x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 27 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. STATUS output parameter If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 29 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 7 Codes for measurement types The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Current, 4-wire connection 0000 0010 Current, 2-wire connection 0000 0011 Codes for measuring ranges The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges Measuring range Code 0 to 20 mA 0000 0010 4 to 20 mA 0000 0011 20 mA 0000 0100 Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 31 B Representation of analog values Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign 16 Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word 215 Range 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 33 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Current measuring range 20 mA Values Dec. Current measuring range Hex. Range 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -15 mA -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -23.52 mA -32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Table B- 5 Underrange Underflow Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underrange Underflow * For measurement type "2-wire connection", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1) 34 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 09/2018 A5E03572832-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03572832-AE 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Wiring and block diagram has been modified. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................16 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................19 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................22 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................24 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................25 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 26 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................26 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................31 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................32 A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input ...................................................................36 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 37 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................38 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................39 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................40 Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 5 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 7 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 (number in pack: 1 unit) 6ES7134-6HD01-2BA1 (number in pack: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LEDs for channel status LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class BU type Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number View of the module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 4 inputs Measuring type voltage and current for 2-wire transducer (can be set for each channel) Input ranges for voltage measurement: - 10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 5 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits Input ranges for current measurement: - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits Electrically isolated from the supply voltage L+ (only for voltage measuring type) Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vss Configurable diagnostics per module The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function HW version FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X PROFIenergy FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Value status FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 13 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST module with the terminal assignments. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Voltage and current measurement 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current measurement (2-wire transducer) Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un- Voltage input negative, channel n Backplane bus interface Uvn Supply voltage, channel n Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) In + Current input positive, channel n Short-circuit protection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Current limitation M Ground Color-coded label with color code CC03 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage and current measurement Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measuring types and ranges The analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measuring type Measuring range Resolution Voltage 5V 16 bits including sign 10 V 16 bits including sign 1 to 5 V 15 bits 0 to 10 V 15 bits 0 mA to 20 mA 15 bits 4 to 20 mA 15 bits Current (2-wire transducer) You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the section Representation of analog values (Page 37). 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 32). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics Overflow Diagnostics Underflow Diagnostics Wire break Measuring type/range Smoothing Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * deactivated * Voltage +/- 5 V * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage 1..5 V * Voltage 0..10 V * Current (2-wire transducer) 0..20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 4..20 mA * None * weak * medium * strong Default Configura- Effective range with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Current (2-wire Yes transducer) 4..20 mA Channel Channel None Channel Channel Yes Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Interference frequency suppression 2 Potential group * 60 Hz * 50 Hz1 * 16.6 Hz * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light BaseUnit) Default Configura- Effective range with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 3 Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 1 ...Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 2 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter. 2 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 5 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix "Parameter data set". Note Unused channels Disable unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply. Short-circuit is also detected in the range 1 to 5 V, when both input signals are short-circuited. The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, however, the short-circuit diagnostics suppresses the underflow diagnostics. Short-circuit is output as the diagnostics event. Diagnostics overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be measured at the relevant input. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics info is output. Type/range of measurement Refer to the section Measuring types and ranges (Page 16). Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal change at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the supply frequency that is predominant in the plant. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST with value status Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 21 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 25). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 23 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit (current, voltage 1..5 V) Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA) Low limit violated High limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (current)* 1H Sensor supply to ground Correct the module/encoder tuning Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) ** 1H Wire break (current) ** 6H Input to sensor supply Correct the module/encoder tuning Open input Connect input Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with a larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect the sensor contacts High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Parameter assignment error 10H Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable * Short-circuit of input signal 11H 1FH * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Replace module Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Firmware update in progress or update has * been canceled. * The module does not read any process values in this state. Wait for firmware update. Restart the firmware update. Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostics can also be reported for unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily. ** In case of activated smoothing the module calculates the measured values across several module cycles. The module only generates the short circuit or wire break diagnosis if the smoothed measured value is stable. After the short-circuit or wire break has been eliminated, the module supplies stable measured values again depending on the set smoothing level. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 25 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 4x U/I 2-wire, P. unit 1 Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC03 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Measuring range scalable No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 / - * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.6 and higher * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * Oversampling No * MSI No CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN No Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 37 mA; without sensor supply 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes * Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.85 W; Without encoder supply voltage Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1 Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 4; Differential inputs permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit), max. 30 V permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. 50 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional processing times (depending on the parameterization of the active channels) Input ranges (rated values), voltages * 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 120 k * 1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 120 k * -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 120 k * -5 V to +5 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 120 k Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 Input ranges (rated values), currents * 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 ; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage * 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 ; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta) Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz * Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times * parameterizable Yes Encoder Connection of signal encoders * for voltage measurement Yes * for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes - 650 * Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. for current measurement as 4-wire transducer No Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 % Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 50 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.05 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 % * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 % Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 70 dB * Common mode voltage, max. 10 V * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm No Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA * Short-circuit Yes; with 1 to 5 V or 2-wire mode: Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; Green LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels Yes; channel group-specific between 2-wire current input group and voltage input group * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes; only for voltage inputs Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 29 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * Vertical installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * Vertical installation, max. 50 C * Horizontal installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * Horizontal installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude Up to max. 5 000 m, at installation height > 2 000 m additional restrictions, see manual for details Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measuring type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Overflow Underflow Wire break * * * * * 5 V x - x x - 10 V x - x x - 1..5 V x x x x - 0..10 V x - x x - 0..20 mA x x x x - 4..20 mA x x x x x deactivated Voltage Current (2-wire transducer) Diagnostics x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measuring type Measuring range deactivated Voltage Current (2-wire transducer) Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Overflow/ Wire break Underflow * * * * 5 V x - x - 10 V x - x - 1..5 V x x x - 0..10 V x - x - 0..20 mA x x x - 4..20 mA x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 31 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 33 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 3 Codes for the measuring type The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for the measuring type Measuring type Coding Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011 Codes for the measuring range The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for the measuring range Measuring type Coding Voltage 5 V 0000 1000 10 V 0000 1001 1 to 5 V 0000 1010 0 to 10 V 0000 1011 Current 0 to 20 mA 0000 0010 4 to 20 mA 0000 0011 Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 35 Parameter data record A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input Error transferring the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * DF Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged or pulled. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bit set Check the parameters of the module. DF 80 E1 02 Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for operating mode. Check the parameters of the module. DF 80 E1 05 Invalid coding set for measuring range / measurement type. Check the parameters of the module. DF 80 E1 08 Invalid coding set for interference Check the parameters of the module. frequency suppression / integration time. DF 80 E1 09 Invalid coding for smoothing. Check the parameters of the module. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE B Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the analog module. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned parameters. The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 37 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 10 V and 5 V Values Dec. Voltage measuring range Hex. 10 V Range 5 V 32767 7FFF >11.759 V >5.879 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V -32768 8000 <-11.759 V <-5.879 V Table B- 5 Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring range 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range 20736 5100 4V 7.5 V 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0 V + 361.7 V 0 0 1V 0V -1 FFFF Underrange ** -4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V * -32768 8000 <0.296 V <-1.759 V * Underflow ** * negative values are only possible if the module (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) with FW version V2.0.0 and higher is configured. ** no underrange/underflow if the predecessor module (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1) is configured. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 39 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 6 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Dec. Current measuring range Hex. 0 to 20 mA * Range 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underrange Underflow * For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1) 40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE Analog input module AI 2xU ST ___________________ Preface (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 12/2015 A5E36104728-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36104728-AA 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 13 4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................13 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 20 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................20 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................22 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................22 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................23 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................27 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................28 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 32 B.1 Representation of analog values ............................................................................................32 B.2 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................33 B.3 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................34 Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 7 Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2xU ST Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 2 inputs Voltage measurement type (can be set per channel) Input ranges for voltage measurement: - 5 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vss Configurable diagnostics (per module) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Value status You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xU ST module with the terminal assignments. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 11 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 2xU ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n Backplane bus interface Un- Voltage input negative, channel n Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measuring types and ranges The analog input module AI 2xU ST has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Resolution Voltage 5V 16 bits incl. sign 10 V 16 bits incl. sign 1 to 5 V 15 bits 0 to 10 V 15 bits You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the section Representation of analog values (Page 32). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 13 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 2xU ST The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Overflow 1 Diagnostics: Underflow 1 Measurement type/measuring range Smoothing Range of values * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated * Voltage +/- 5 V * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage 0..10 V * Voltage 1..5 V * None * Weak * Medium * Strong Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module 1 Disable Yes Module Voltage +/- 10 V Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Range of values Interference frequency suppression Potential group * 60 Hz (50 ms) * 50 Hz (60 ms) * 16.6 Hz (180 ms) * None * Use potential group of the Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 2 left module (module plugged into a dark BaseUnit) * Default Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) 1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 4 bytes. 2 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. Note Unused channels Disable the unused channels in the parameter assignment. A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics are enabled when both input signals are short-circuited in the range 1 to 5 V. The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, however, the short-circuit diagnostics suppresses the underflow diagnostics. Short-circuit is output as the diagnostics event. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Measurement type/measuring range Refer to the section Measuring types and ranges (Page 13). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal change at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Image 4-1 Smoothing for AI 2xU ST Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 and 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xU ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-2 Address space of the AI 2xU ST with value status Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 19 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xU ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The AI 2xU ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit (voltage 1 V to 5 V) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and encoder Open input Connect input High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment 10H error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not read process values in this state. Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 2xU ST 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xU Standard Firmware version V1.0 * FW update possible Yes Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC00 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Scalable measuring range No Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode Oversampling No MSI No CiR Configuration in RUN Configuration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 37 mA Encoder supply 24 V encoder supply 24 V No Additional 24 V encoder supply 24 V No Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1 Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.9 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 2 Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) 30 V Cycle time (all channels), min. 500 s Input ranges (rated values), voltages 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 180 k 1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 180 k -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 180 k -5 V to +5 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 180 k Cable length Shielded, max. 200 m Formation of analog values for the inputs Measuring principle Sigma Delta Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bits Integration time configurable Yes Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off Conversion time (per channel) 50 ms @ 60 Hz, 60 ms @ 50 Hz, 180 ms @ 16.6 Hz, 250 s without filter Measured value smoothing Number of levels 4 Configurable Yes Setting: None Yes; 1 x cycle time Setting: Weak Yes; 4 x cycle time Setting: Medium Yes; 8 x cycle time Setting: Strong Yes; 16 x cycle time Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1 Encoders Connection of the signal transmitters For voltage measurement Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01% Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005%/K Crosstalk between inputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.05% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.3% Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-1%), f1 = interference frequency Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB < rated value of the input range), min. Common mode voltage, max. 10 V Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Limit interrupt No Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes Wire break No Short-circuit Yes; with 1 to 5 V Group error Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics No For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1 Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels and voltage supply of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation) Between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vss Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measurement type Measuring range Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow Underflow * * * * 5 V x - x x 10 V x - x x 1 V to 5 V x x x x 0 V to 10 V x - x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range Short-circuit to ground Overflow Underflow * * * * 5 V x - x x 10 V x - x x 1 V to 5 V x x x x 0 V to 10 V x - x x Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 27 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Parameters The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 29 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Image A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+17 for channels 0 and 1 Codes for measurement types The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Codes for measuring ranges The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges Measurement type Code Voltage 5 V 0000 1000 10 V 0000 1001 1 to 5 V 0000 1010 0 to 10 V 0000 1011 Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine if the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 31 B Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the analog input module. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned parameters. The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of input ranges B.2 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word 215 Range 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 33 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges Voltage measuring range 10 V to 5 V Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 10 V to 5 V System Voltage measuring range Range dec hex 10 V 5 V 32767 7FFF >11.759 V >5.879 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V -32768 8000 <-11.759 V <-5.879 V Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring ranges 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V Table B- 5 Voltage measuring ranges 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V System Voltage measuring range Range dec hex 1 V to 5 V 0 V to 10 V 32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range 20736 5100 4V 7.5 V 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0 V + 361.7 V 0 0 1V 0V -1 FFFF Underrange -4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V -32768 8000 <0.296 V <-1.759 V Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) 34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 04/2018 A5E36104399-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36104399-AB 05/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to the previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following changes: Connection diagram has been updated Technical specifications have been updated: Comments on the previous version of this manual were included in the current edition. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 4 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................16 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17 4.3 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................19 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................22 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................23 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................25 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................26 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 27 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................27 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................31 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................32 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 36 B.1 Representation of analog values for analog inputs ................................................................36 B.2 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................37 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................38 Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 5 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 6 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 7 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 8 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 10 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1 View of the module Module type and name LEDs for channel status LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class BU type Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number View of the module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 2 inputs Measuring type current for 2- and 4-wire transducers Input ranges for current measurement: - 0 mA to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 20 mA, resolution 16 bit incl. sign Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vpp/3.5 Vrms Configurable diagnostics (per module) Constant cycle time for processing measured values - 500 s, regardless of the number of channels used and the configuration The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version FW version Function STEP 7 GSD file TIA Portal V5.x Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227 V6.0 or higher PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227 V6.0 or higher X X Configuration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227 V6.0 or higher X X Value status FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227 V6.0 or higher X PROFIenergy FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 or higher as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227 V6.0 or higher X X You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with GSD file. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 12 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST module with the various terminal assignments for a 2- und 4-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 14 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current measurement (2-wire transducer) 4-wire connection for current measurement (4-wire transducer) Backplane bus interface Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Current limitation Switchover 2-wire / 4-wire In + Current input positive, channel n In - Current input negative, channel n 1UVn 2UVn 2Mn RES Color-coded label with color code CC05 (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) L+ P1, P2, AUX Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) DIAG Supply voltage (2-wire transducer), channel n Supply voltage (4-wire transducer), channel n Reference potential (4-wire transducer) Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0, AI1 PWR Channel status LED (green) Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Resolution Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA 15 bits 4 mA to 20 mA 15 bits 0 mA to 20 mA 15 bit 4 mA to 20 mA 15 bits 20 mA 16 bits incl. sign Current (4-wire transducer) You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges (Page 38) and the "Analog value processing" function manual. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 16 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST During configuration of the module with STEP 7, define the properties of the module via various parameters. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 32). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: * No supply voltage L+ * Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Overflow 1 Diagnostics: Underflow 1 Diagnostics: Wire break Disable GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel 1 Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Channel Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Measurement type/measuring range Smoothing Interference frequency suppression 2 Potential group GSD file PROFIBUS DP Current (4wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel Yes Channel Module No Module Module * Deactivated * Current (4-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA * Current (4-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA * Current (4-wire transducer) +/- 20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA * None * Weak * Medium * Strong * 60 Hz (50 ms) * 50 Hz (60 ms) 3 * 16.6 Hz (180 ms) * None * Use potential group of Use potential group of the the left module (modleft module ule plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) * 50 Hz (60 ms) Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 4 bytes for PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix "Parameter data record". 1 2 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter. 3 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 18 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Description of parameters Note Unused channels "Deactivate" the unused channels in the parameter assignment. A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH. 4.3 Description of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply. The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the measurement in the range of 4 mA to 20 mA. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output. Measurement type/measuring range See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 16). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Description of parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = Number of conversion cycles (k) x conversion time ( of the integration time set in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter) of the channel. The following figure shows how many conversion cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal change at the analog input. No smoothing Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-1 Smoothing for AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Note: The interference frequency suppression works parallel to the sampling of channels 0 and 1. The cycle time of the module is 500 s regardless of the number of channels used and the configured interference frequency suppression. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 20 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Description of parameters Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 21 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 to 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: There are no errors on the module. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST with value status Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 22 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 23 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 26). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 PWR Status display of the PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 24 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit (encoder supply) Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 25 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (encoder supply) 1 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and encoder Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA) 6H Input after encoder supply Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate channel * Connect the encoder contacts High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the entire module). Replace the module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing 11H Channel temporarily unavailable 1 1FH Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment (wire break diagnostics set only with the permitted measuring ranges). * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Firmware update in progress or update has * been canceled. * The module does not read any process values in this state. Wait for firmware update. Restart the firmware update. Since the module has no encoder supply for separate channels, a short-circuit in a channel has a permanent effect on the other channel. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 26 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1 General information Product type designation AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Firmware version V1.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC05 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Measuring range scalable No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / - Operating mode * Oversampling No * MSI No CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 45 mA; without sensor supply Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 27 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes * Output current, max. 50 mA; Total current for both channels (two-wire) Additional 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes; Module-wise * Output current, max. 200 mA; Total current for both channels (fourwire) Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.1 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 4 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Analog inputs Number of analog inputs * For current measurement 2 2 permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. 50 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 500 s Input ranges (rated values), currents * 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 ; 90 ohms with two wires * -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 * 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 ; 90 ohms with two wires Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle Sigma Delta Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 28 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1 Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 4 * parameterizable Yes * Step: None Yes; 1x conversion time * Step: low Yes; 4x conversion time * Step: Medium Yes; 8x conversion time * Step: High Yes; 16x conversion time Encoder Connection of signal encoders * * for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes - 650 Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 % Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.05 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 % Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 70 dB * Common mode voltage, max. 10 V * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 29 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1 Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm No Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA * Short-circuit Yes; Short-circuit of the encoder supply * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vpp Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 30 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measurement type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow Underflow Wire break * * * * * 0 mA to 20 mA x x x x - 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x 20 mA x x x x - 0 mA to 20 mA x x x - - 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x Deactivated Current (4-wire transducer) Current (2-wire transducer) Diagnostics x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow/underflow Wire break * * * * 0 mA to 20 mA x x x - 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x +/- 20 mA x x x - 0 mA to 20 mA x x x - 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x Deactivated Current (4-wire transducer) Current (2-wire transducer) Diagnostics x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 31 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 for entire module Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 32 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Parameters The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 33 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Figure A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+17 for channels 0 and 1 Codes for measurement types The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes in byte x (see channel parameter block figure). Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010 Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011 Codes for measuring ranges The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see channel parameter block figure). Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges Measuring range Coding Current 0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010 4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0011 20 mA 0000 0100 Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 34 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine if the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 35 B Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values for analog inputs This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the analog module. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 36 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of input ranges B.2 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word 215 Range 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 37 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Current measuring range 20 mA Values Dec. Current measuring range Hex. Range 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -15 mA -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -23.52 mA -32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Table B- 5 Underrange Underflow Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA > 22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underrange Underflow * For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) 38 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB Preface SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual ___________________ 1 Documentation Guide ___________________ 2 Product overview ___________________ 3 Connecting ___________________ 4 Parameters/address space ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics 5 interrupts 6 ___________________ A Parameter data record ___________________ Representation of analog B values Technical specifications 09/2018 A5E03576060-AF Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03576060-AF 10/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection has been changed. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation Guide ............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 13 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................13 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................16 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16 4.3 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................19 4.4 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................21 4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................24 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts............................................................................................................. 26 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................26 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................28 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................30 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 32 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................10 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................32 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 37 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................37 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................39 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 45 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................46 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................47 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................48 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 5 Documentation Guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 6 Documentation Guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 7 Documentation Guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 9 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number View of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS module Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 2 inputs Measurement types voltage and current for 2-/4-wire transducers Input ranges for voltage measurement: - 10 V, resolution 16 bit including sign - 5 V, resolution 15 bit incl. sign - 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bit - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bit Input ranges for current measurement: - 20 mA, resolution 16 bit incl. sign - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 14 bit - 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bit Electrically isolated between the channels Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Permitted common mode voltage: 100 Vpp/35 Vrms Configurable diagnostics (per channel) Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits per channel) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN PROFIenergy Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Basic version Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of 1 V1.0.0 Isochronous mode with send clock up to 250 s 2 V1.1.0 Value status 2 V1.1.0 Oversampling channel 0 2 V1.1.0 Oversampling channel 0 and 1 2 V2.0.0 Isochronous mode with send clock up to 125 s 2 V2.0.1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Connecting 3.1 3 Wiring and block diagram This section contains the block diagram of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS module with the various terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 4-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 13 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Backplane bus interface UVn RES Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Current limitation Color identification label CCxx (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Mn L+ M P1, P2, AUX Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) Voltage input positive, channel n Voltage input negative, channel n Current input positive, channel n Current input negative, channel n DIAG Supply voltage, channel n Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions Reference ground to UVn, channel n 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0, AI1 F0, F1 PWR Channel status LED (green) Channel fault LED (red) Power LED (green) Un+ UnIn + In - Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current measurement 4-wire connection for current measurement Backplane bus interface Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Un+ UnUVn RES Current limitation Color identification label CCxx (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Mn L+ P1, P2, AUX Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light BaseUnit is present) Encoder supply external Current input positive, channel n Current input negative, channel n DIAG Voltage input positive, channel n Voltage input negative, channel n Supply voltage, channel n Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions Reference ground to UVn, channel n 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0, AI1 F0, F1 PWR Channel status LED (green) Channel fault LED (red) Power LED (green) Uext In + In - Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The analog input module AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire HSF has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Resolution Voltage 10 V 16 bit incl. sign 5 V 15 bit incl. sign 0 to 10 V 15 bit 1 to 5 V 13 bit Current (2-/4-wire transducers) 20 mA 1 16 bit incl. sign 0 to 20 mA 15 bit 4 to 20 mA 14 bit You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section Representation of analog values (Page 45) and the "Analog Value Processing" function manual. Measuring range "+/-20 mA" is only possible with the measurement type "Current (4-wire transducer)". 1 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire HS The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 39). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 16 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Sampling rate 1 value/cycle Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Diagnostics: Wire break Type/range of measurement Smoothing * Voltage 1 to 5 V * Voltage +/- 5 V * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage 0 to 10 V * Current (4-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA * Current (4-wire transducer) +/- 20 mA * Current (4-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA * None * 2 times * 4 times * 8 times * 16 times * 32 times * 64 times Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 value/cycle No Module Module Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel 1 Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Current (4wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Hardware interrupt high limit 1 Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP -1 Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Value 27648 Yes Channel * Value 0 Yes Channel High limit 2 * Value 27648 Yes Channel Low limit 2 * Value 0 Yes Channel Potential group * Use potential group of the left module (dark-colored BaseUnit) Use potential group of the left module No Module * Enable new potential group (light-colored BaseUnit) * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable High limit 1 * Low limit 1 Hardware interrupt low limit 1 Hardware interrupt high limit 2 Hardware interrupt low limit 2 1 Channel 1 Module Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 4 bytes. Note Unused channels "Deactivate" the unused channels in the parameter assignment. A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameters/address space 4.3 Description of parameters 4.3 Description of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply. A short-circuit is also detected in the range of 1 to 5 V if the input signal is short-circuited or the input is not connected. The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the measurement in the range of 4 mA to 20 mA. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output. Measurement type/measuring range See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 16). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Description of parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 7 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing 2x smoothing 4x smoothing 8x smoothing 16x smoothing 32x smoothing 64x smoothing Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS Potential group You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit. A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored BaseUnits. The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station. See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameters/address space 4.4 Oversampling 4.4 Oversampling Function Oversampling is the acquisition of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles). The configured number n of sub-cycles corresponds to one PROFINET bus cycle. Oversampling is useful whenever you require acquisition of data with high time resolution but without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles. With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles: One measured value is acquired in each sub-cycle. The minimum PROFINET bus cycle is 250 s. Only a subset of functions is available for shorter sub-cycles. The shortest possible sub-cycle is 50 s. You can configure oversampling: - For channel 0 (1-channel operation) - For channel 0/1 (2-channel operation) The number of sub-cycles can be set as follows: - From 2 to 16 for one channel - From 2 to 8 for two channels Requirement Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set. Configuration You configure oversampling with the following parameter: Sampling rate Note Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the runtime groups of your user program. This will ensure that the data processing in the user program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 21 Parameters/address space 4.4 Oversampling Overview of the operating modes Function Normal operation Oversampling in normal operation 1-channel operation Isochronous mode * Shortest send clock Oversampling 2-channel operation Oversampling in high-speed 1-channel operation 2-channel operation Yes, optional Yes, required Yes, required 125 s 500 s 250 s No Yes Yes * Number of oversampling levels (sampling rate) - * Shortest sub-cycle (= shortest sampling time) - 250 s 50 s Hardware interrupt x - - Smoothing x x - 10 V x x x 0 to 10 V x x - 5 V x x - 1 to 5 V x x - 20 mA x x x 0 to 20 mA x x - 4 to 20 mA x x - Overflow/underflow x x x1) Wire break 4 to 20 mA x x - Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) x x - Short-circuit encoder supply with current measuring ranges x x x Load voltage diagnostics x x x Value status (QI) x - - 4 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes Address space 1 2 to 16 2 to 8 2 to 16 2 to 8 For product version 1, the result must be present for at least one fieldbus cycle + 250 s for a reliable detection of the diagnostics (overflow/underflow) as of firmware version 1.x. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameters/address space 4.4 Oversampling Sampling interval The duration of a subcycle is the sampling interval. The cycle time T (send clock) for isochronous mode is specified in the configuration software. This time, divided by the configured sampling rate nSample, yields the sampling interval tSample of the module. Example calculation: Figure 4-2 Example of calculating the sampling interval Chronological sequence The figure shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The acquired measured vales of a data cycle with oversampling are only copied to the interface module in the subsequent bus cycle and are then available to the processing CPU one bus cycle later. n = measured values from bus cycle n Figure 4-3 Oversampling Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 23 Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space 4.5 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog module. Bits 0 to 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit =0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, or similar is incorrect. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-4 Address space of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS with value status Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space Address space of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with one channel The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with one channel. Writing always starts from IB x. If fewer than 16 sub-cycles are set, the addresses that are then unused are filled with 7FFFH. Figure 4-5 Address space of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with one channel Address space of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with two channels The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with two channels. Writing always starts from IB x. Only a maximum of 8 sub-cycles are possible. If fewer than 8 sub-cycles are set, the addresses that are then unused are filled with 7FFFH. Figure 4-6 Address space of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with two channels Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 25 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 26 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 30). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status/channel fault LED Table 5- 2 Status/error display of the channel status/channel fault LED Channel status Channel fault Meaning Channel deactivated or no load voltage L+ Off Off Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Off On On On Channel activated and channel diagnostics Not permitted (error) PWR LED Table 5- 3 PWR Status display of the PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 27 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts. Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Low limit 1 violated High limit 1 violated Low limit 2 violated High limit 2 violated If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller. S7-1500 Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. The block interface is shown here with optimized block access, which is set in the TIA Portal by default. Name Data type Comment LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt USI WORD USI (High/Low) IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt EventType Byte Error event Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5.2 Interrupts S7-300/400 or a different CPU You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the instruction "RALARM" (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help. The channel of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of OB4x in the OB4x_POINT_ADDR tag. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 5-2 OB4x_POINT_ADDR tag Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001 Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt info for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 and 1 of the I/O module 1 B#16#03 Low limit 1 violated 1 B#16#04 High limit 1 violated B#16#05 Low limit 2 violated B#16#06 High limit 2 violated The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#01 The error event that triggered the hardware interrupt follows. Error event Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 29 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit (current and voltage 1 to 5 V) Wire break (current) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (current) 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and encoder Input after encoder supply Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) Wire break (current) 1H 6H Short circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and encoder Open input Connect input Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate diagnostics * Connect the encoder contacts High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct the output value Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct the output value Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the entire module). Replace the module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Correct the parameter assignment (wire break diagnostics set only with the permitted measuring ranges). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Channel temporarily unavailable 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has * been canceled. * The module does not read any process values in this state. Wait for firmware update Restart the firmware update Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 31 Technical specifications 6.1 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 General information Product type designation AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS Firmware version V2.0.1 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Measuring range scalable No * Scalable measured values No * Adjustment of measuring range No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / - * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * Oversampling Yes; 2 channels per module * MSI No CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN No Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 32 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 39 mA; without sensor supply 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes; For current measurement * Short-circuit protection Yes * Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.95 W; without sensor supply Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 4 byte; + 1 byte for QI information (32 bytes in the oversampling operating mode) Hardware configuration Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1 * 4-wire connection BU type A0, A1 Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 2; Differential inputs * For current measurement 2 * For voltage measurement 2 permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit), max. 30 V permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. 50 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 125 s Analog input with oversampling Yes * Values per cycle, max. 16 * Resolution, min. 50 s Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 33 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 Input ranges (rated values), voltages * 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 75 k * 1 V to 5 V Yes; 13 bit * Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 75 k * -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 75 k * -5 V to +5 V Yes; 15 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 75 k Input ranges (rated values), currents * 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 * -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 * 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bit * Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle Actual value encryption (successive approximation) Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz No * Conversion time (per channel) 10 s Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 7; none; 2-/4-/8-/16-/32-/64-fold * parameterizable Yes Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 Encoder Connection of signal encoders * for voltage measurement Yes * for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes - 650 * Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.03 % Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.01 %/K ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.1 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.2 % * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.2 % Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Common mode voltage, max. 35 V * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 80 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 s; Starting from firmware Version V2.0.1 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes; two upper and two lower limit values in each case Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 35 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1 Diagnostic messages * Wire-break Yes; channel-by-channel, at 4 to 20 mA only * Short-circuit Yes; channel-by-channel, at 1 to 5 V or for current measuring ranges short-circuit in encoder supply * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels Yes * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supp- Yes ly of the electronics Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 75 V DC/60 V AC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measurement type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow Underflow Wire break Hardware interrupts * * * * * * 1 to 5 V x x x x - x 5 V x - x x - x 10 V x - x x - x Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics 0 to 10 V x - x x - x Current (4-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA x x x x - x 20 mA x x x x - x 4 to 20 mA x x x x x x Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA x x x - - x 4 to 20 mA x x x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 37 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow/underflow Wire break Hardware interrupts * * * * * 1 to 5 V x x x - - +/- 5 V x - x - - +/- 10 V x - x - - 0 to 10 V x - x - - Current (4-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA x x x - - +/- 20 mA x x x - - 4 to 20 mA x x x x - Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA x x x - - 4 to 20 mA x x x x - Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Note Following a firmware update, you need to re-configure the I/O module before you can use the new functions. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 39 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 for entire module Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-3 Module header information Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-4 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-5 Channel header information Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 41 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+19 for channels 0 and 1 Codes for measurement types The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes in byte x (see channel parameter block figure). Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010 Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 43 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Codes for measuring ranges The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see channel parameter block figure). Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges Measuring range Code Voltage 5 V 0000 1000 10 V 0000 1001 1 to 5 V 0000 1010 0 to 10 V 0000 1011 Current 20 mA 0000 0100 0 to 20 mA 0000 0010 4 to 20 mA 0000 0011 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF B Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the analog module. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 45 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 10 V and 5 V Values Voltage measuring range Dec. Hex. 32767 32511 27649 6C01 27648 20736 Range 10 V 5 V 7FFF > 11.759 V > 5.879 V Overflow 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V -32768 8000 < -11.759 V < -5.879 V Table B- 5 Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF > 5.704 V > 11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range 20736 5100 4V 7.5 V 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 361.7 V 0 0 1V 0V -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V -32768 8000 < 0.296 V < -1.759 V Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 47 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 6 Current measuring range 20 mA Values Dec. Current measuring range Hex. Range 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -15 mA -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -23.52 mA -32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Table B- 7 Underrange Underflow Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA** > 22.81 mA** Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underrange Underflow * For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. ** For measurement type "2-wire transducer", the behavior described here is supported for overflow up to max. 35 mA. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) 48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF Analog input module ___________________ Preface AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 12/2015 A5E33062495-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33062495-AB 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 4 5 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 14 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................14 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15 4.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................18 4.4 Measuring range adjustment ..................................................................................................21 4.5 Scaling of measured values ....................................................................................................24 4.6 Address space ........................................................................................................................27 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 31 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................31 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................33 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................35 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 36 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 40 B A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................40 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................42 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 52 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................52 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................53 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................54 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 5 1 Guide to documentation The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Guide to documentation Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 7 Guide to documentation TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 2 inputs Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign Single channel electrical isolation Voltage measurement type can be set per channel Current measuring type can be set per channel (for 2-wire or 4-wire transducer) Configurable diagnostics (per channel) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Calibration in runtime Isochronous mode (PROFINET IO only) Value status (PROFINET IO only) Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of Measuring range adjustment 1 V2.0.0 Scaling of measured values 1 V2.0.0 Module-internal shared input (MSI) 1 V2.0.0 You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file 1. 1 Version required for STEP 7: V5.5 SP4 HF7 Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system system manual. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF module with the various terminal assignments for a 2- und 4-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 11 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage measurement 4-wire connection for voltage measurement Backplane bus interface Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Current limitation (4-wire) In + In UVn Mn L+ Current limitation (2-wire) P1, P2, AUX Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Color-coded label with color code CC05 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) Voltage input positive, channel n Voltage input negative, channel n DIAG Current input positive, channel n Current input negative, channel n Supply voltage, channel n Reference ground to UVn, channel n 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0, AI1 F0, F1 Channel status LED (green) Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) Un+ Un- Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. In + In - 2-wire connection for current measurement (2-wire transducer) 4-wire connection for current measurement (4-wire transducer) Backplane bus interface Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Current limitation (4-wire) Current limitation (2-wire) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Color-coded label with color code CC05 (optional) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Current input positive, channel n Current input negative, channel n Image 3-2 Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n Un- Voltage input negative, channel n UVn Mn L+ P1, P2, AUX DIAG Supply voltage, channel n Reference ground to UVn, channel n 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green) F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 13 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The following table shows the measurement types and the respective measuring range. Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Measurement type Voltage Current Measuring range Resolution 5V 16 bits incl. sign 10 V 16 bits incl. sign 1 to 5 V 15 bits 0 to 10 V 15 bits 0 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 15 bits 4 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 15 bits 20 mA (only with 4-wire transducer) 16 bit including sign You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the appendix Representation of analog values (Page 52) and the "Analog value processing" function manual. Measuring range adjustment See Measuring range adjustment (Page 21). Scaling of measured values See Scaling of measured values (Page 24). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 14 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 42). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Diagnostics: Wire break * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 15 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Measurement type/measuring range * Deactivated * Voltage * * Smoothing Interference frequency suppression 2 Measuring range adjustment 1 - 5 V - 10 V - 1 V to 5 V - 0 V to 10 V Current (4-wire transducer) 4..20 mA Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel 50 Hz (22.5 ms) Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel - Current (4-wire transducer) - 0 to 20 mA - 4 to 20 mA - 20 mA Current (2-wire transducer) - 0 to 20 mA - 4 to 20 mA * None * 2 times * 4 times * 8 times * 16 times * 32 times * 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) * 50 Hz (22.5 ms) * 60 Hz (18.75 ms) * 300 Hz (10 ms) * 600 Hz (5 ms) * 1.2 kHz (2.5 ms) * 2.4 kHz (1.25 ms) * 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms) * Disable * Enable Measuring range adjustment high limit 1 Value within the nominal range of the measuring range in mV or A 0 Yes Channel - Measuring range adjustment low limit 1 Value within the nominal range of the measuring range in mV or A 0 Yes Channel - Scaled high nominal range limit 3 REAL 20.0 Yes Channel - Scaled low nominal range limit 3 REAL 4.0 Yes Channel - Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Hardware interrupt high limit 1 1 Disable Yes Channel - Disable Yes Channel - Disable Yes Channel - Disable Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - No Module Module * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Hardware interrupt high limit 1 1 * Value (INT) * 27648 * Value (REAL) 3 * 0.0 3 Hardware interrupt low limit 1 1 * Value (INT) * 0 * Value (REAL) * 0.0 Hardware interrupt high limit 2 1 * Value (INT) * 27648 * Value (REAL) 3 * 0.0 3 Hardware interrupt low limit 2 1 * Value (INT) * 0 * Value (REAL) * 0.0 * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) Hardware interrupt low limit 1 1 Hardware interrupt high limit 2 1 Hardware interrupt low limit 2 1 Potential group 3 3 3 3 Use potential group of the left module 1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes. 2 In normal operation, different interference frequency suppression settings can be configured for both channels. These cause different integration times for the analog-to-digital conversion. The module-internal time for updating the user data is now based on the longer integration time for both channels. In isochronous mode, both channels must be configured with the same interference frequency suppression of 4.8 kHz. 3 Only for configuration SCALE. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Note Unused channels Deactivate the unused inputs in the parameter assignment. A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH or 7F800000H with measured value scaling. Property of the module in isochronous mode The permitted interference frequency suppression of both channels for isochronous mode of the modules is 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms). Note that no instantaneous value for the time Ti is returned in isochronous mode. The analog module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF returns a mean value for the range of 0.625 ms starting at Ti. 4.3 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. A shortcircuit is also detected in the range of 1 to 5 V if the input signal is short-circuited or the input is not connected. The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics: Wire break Enable the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the measurement in the range of 4 to 20 mA. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 5 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal change at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Very strong (k = 32) Image 4-1 Smoothing AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Measuring range adjustment The measuring range adjustment is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the analog input module. It is available for current and voltage measurements. A limited measuring range in S7 format is shown, which is defined by the high and low limits of the measuring range adjustment. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Scaling of measured values With measured value scaling, the user data of an analog input module is displayed as REAL (32-bit floating point) instead of S7 format. The representation of the measuring range is defined by the scaled high and low limits of nominal range limit (as REAL). The measured value scaling can be combined with the measuring range adjustment. In this case, the measuring range is adjusted first and then the representation of the measuring range is scaled. BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage Specifies that a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this slot (see ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual). Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.4 Measuring range adjustment 4.4 Measuring range adjustment Introduction The measuring range adjustment is available for current and voltage measuring ranges. The measuring range adjustment (base measuring range) is valid for the following ranges: Nominal range Underrange (of the measuring range adjustment) Overrange (of the measuring range adjustment) Note Live zero measuring ranges are not supported. Function The measuring range adjustment is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the module. It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable part of the measuring range in S7 format. The function is enabled with the "Measuring range adjustment" parameter The "Measuring range adjustment high limit" parameter sets the high limit of the measuring range in mV or A. The "Measuring range adjustment low limit" parameter sets the low limit of the measuring range in mV or A. Note The "Measuring range adjustment" function can be used in combination with the "Measured value scaling" function. See also Scaling of measured values (Page 24). Note When the "Measuring range adjustment high limit" and "Measuring range adjustment low limit" parameters are too close together, resolution may be lost, which means it may no longer be possible to show every value. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 21 Parameters/address space 4.4 Measuring range adjustment Rules The limits of the measuring range adjustment must be selected within the nominal range of the base measuring range. They are specified in integers. The measuring range adjustment is resolved depending on the base measuring range from 0H to 6C00H or 9400H to 6C00H. Underranges/overranges apply in accordance with the S7 format and the base measuring range. Special consideration: Negative values are not possible for "Current (2-wire transducer) 0..20 mA". With a measuring range adjustment, an underrange is offered when possible and cut off at 0 mA. If the underrange limit (ED00H) is > 0 mA, QI = 0 and the analog value 8000H are output when it is violated. Example The following values result, for example: Table 4- 3 Example of measuring range adjustment Measuring range adjustment Base measuring range Measuring range resolution Bipolar Unipolar 10 V 0 V to 10 V Adjusted measuring range +2 V to +5 V +2 V to +5 V Measuring range adjustment high limit 5000 mV (S7: +27648) 5000 mV (S7: +27648) Measuring range adjustment low limit 2000 mV (S7: -27648) 2000 mV (S7: 0) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.4 Measuring range adjustment The following example illustrates the effect of a measuring range adjustment: Image 4-2 Example of a measuring range adjustment Configuration The following figure shows an example of a configuration: Image 4-3 Example of a configuration In the configuration example, a measuring range adjustment of 2000 mV to 5000 mV is displayed. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 23 Parameters/address space 4.5 Scaling of measured values 4.5 Scaling of measured values Introduction The measured value scaling can be combined with the measuring range adjustment. In this case, the measuring range is adjusted first and then the representation of the measuring range is scaled. Function With measured value scaling, the user data of an AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF module is displayed as REAL (32-bit floating point) instead of S7 format. The representation of the measuring range is defined by the following parameters: The "Scaled high nominal range limit" parameter sets the desired display value (in REAL) for the high nominal range limit of the measuring range. The "Scaled low nominal range limit" parameter sets the desired display value (in REAL) for the low nominal range limit of the measuring range. Note With measured value scaling, the substitute value is minus infinity for underflow (FF800000H) and plus infinity for overflow (7F800000H). Note Effects of inversion It is possible to set the "Scaled high nominal range limit" parameter lower than the "Scaled low nominal range limit" parameter, whereby the representation of the measuring range will be inverted compared to the terminal value (V, mA). Overflow/underflow and hardware interrupts are always based on representation in REAL. A terminal value of > 11.76 V triggered an underflow for an inverted measured value scaling. Hardware interrupts react similarly. Note When the Parameter "Scaled high nominal range limit" and "Scaled low nominal range limit" parameters are too close together, resolution may be lost, which means it may no longer be possible to show every value. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.5 Scaling of measured values Example The following values result, for example: Table 4- 4 Example of measured value scaling Low nominal range limit High nominal range limit Base measuring range -10 V +10 V S7 format -27648 +27648 Scaling of measured values 1.00 7.00 As shown in the table, -10 V corresponds to 1.00 and +10 V corresponds to 7.00. Combination with measuring range adjustment If the measuring range adjustment is enabled in addition to measured value scaling, first the measuring range is scaled and then the representation of the measuring range. The table below shows an example of the combination of measured value scaling and measuring range adjustment. Table 4- 5 Example for a combination of measured value scaling and measuring range adjustment Low nominal range limit High nominal range limit Measuring range adjustment -4000 mV 8000 mV S7 format -27648 +27648 Scaling of measured values 1.00 7.00 As shown in the table, -4 V corresponds to 1.00 and +8 V corresponds to 7.00. Configuration The following figures show examples of a configuration in STEP 7: Configuration of measured value scaling Image 4-4 Configuration of measured value scaling Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 25 Parameters/address space 4.5 Scaling of measured values Configuration with measuring range adjustment and measured value scaling In the configuration example, a measuring range adjustment of -4000 mV to 8000 mV is displayed and additionally converted to a scaled high and low nominal range limit of 1.00 to 7.00. Image 4-5 Configuration with measuring range adjustment and measured value scaling Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space 4.6 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs. Configuration options of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 6 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V13, SP1 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 x 2-channel without value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF V1.0 X X X 1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF V1.0, QI X X --- 1 x 2-channel without value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF V2.0 --- X X 1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF V2.0, QI --- X --- 1 x 2-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Input with up to 4 submodules AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF V2.0, MSI --- X --- 1 x 2-channel with value status and measured value scaling AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF V2.0, SCALE --- X --- Value status (Quality Information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module names: AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, QI, AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, MSI AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, SCALE An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The value status bit indicates whether the read in analog value is valid. (0 = value is incorrect). Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 1 and 0 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, etc. is incorrect. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 27 Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-6 Address space of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI with value status Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI For the configuration as a 1 x 2-channel module (module-internal shared input, MSI), channels 0 and 1 of module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 and 1 are then available with identical input values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each IO controller has read access to the same channels. The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Please observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module. Value status (Quality Information, QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs. For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect. For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready). Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 1 and 2. Image 4-7 Address space for configuration as 1x 2-channel AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI with value status The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 3 and 4. Image 4-8 Address space for configuration as 1x 2-channel AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI with value status Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 29 Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF SCALE The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, SCALE with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The value status cannot be deselected for this configuration. Image 4-9 Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, SCALE with value status Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 31 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 35). Table 5- 1 Error display DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Table 5- 2 Status and error display LED channel status / channel error LEDs Meaning Channel status Channel error Channel deactivated or load voltage missing Off Off Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On Not permitted (error) On Table 5- 3 On PWR LED status display PWR LED Meaning Load voltage missing Off Load voltage present On Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit (current: sensor supply; voltage: 1 to 5 V, encoder supply) Wire break (current: 4 to 20 mA) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Hardware interrupt lost Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupts The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 Violation of high limit 1 Violation of low limit 2 Violation of high limit 2 S7-1500 Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help. The block interface is represented here with optimized block access, which is set in the TIA Portal by default. Name Data type Comment LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt USI WORD USI (High/Low) IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt EventType Byte Error event Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 33 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts S7-300/400 or a different CPU You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Image 5-2 OB start information Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI (User Structure Identifier) W#16#0001 Additional interrupt information for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 and 1 of the I/O module 1 B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1 B#16#04 Violation of high limit 1 B#16#05 Violation of low limit 2 B#16#06 Violation of high limit 2 Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#01 Event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Error event Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (encoder supply) 1H Short-circuit encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and encoder Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and encoder Open input Connect input Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect the encoder contacts Wire break (current 4 to 6H 20 mA) High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and encoder Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diReplace module agnostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the entire module). Parameter assignment error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters * for the channel: Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing Hardware interrupt lost Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 16H 1FH Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Error is reported when a hardware interrupt (high/low limit) could not be reported. Correct the parameter assignment (wire break diagnostics set only with the permitted measuring ranges). * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Limits might be assigned twice. * If necessary, reduce the bus cycle. * If necessary, use higher SFU. Firmware update is currently in progress * or has been canceled. The module does * not read process values in this state. Wait for firmware update Restart the firmware update Switch to user calibration Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 35 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire High Feature, PU 1 Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC03 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Scalable measuring range No Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 / PCS 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode Oversampling No MSI Yes CiR Configuration in RUN Configuration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 39 mA; without sensor supply Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 36 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1 Encoder supply 24 V encoder supply 24 V Yes Short-circuit protection Yes Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s (two-wire) Additional 24 V encoder supply Short-circuit protection Yes; channel-based Output current, max. 100 mA; max. 150 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s (four-wire) Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.95 W; without sensor supply Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 2; Differential inputs Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) 30 V Permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. 50 mA Input ranges (rated values), voltages 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 75 k 1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 75 k -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 75 k -5 V to +5 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 75 k Input ranges (rated values), currents 0 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Cable length Shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 37 Technical specifications 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1 Formation of analog values for the inputs Measuring principle Sigma Delta Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bits Integration time configurable Yes Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 / 300 / 600 / 1 200 / 2 400 / 4 800 Basic execution time of the module (all channels enabled) 1 ms Measured value smoothing Number of levels 6; none; 2/4/8/16/32 times Configurable Yes Encoders Connection of the signal transmitters For voltage measurement Yes For current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes * 650 Load of 2-wire transducer, max. For current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01% Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.003%/K Crosstalk between inputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.1% Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.1% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.05%; 0.1% with SFU 4.8 kHz Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.05%; 0.1% with SFU 4.8 kHz Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1%), f1 = interference frequency Common mode voltage, max. 35 V Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes terminal) Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 800 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 1 ms Jitter, max. 5 s Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Technical specifications 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Limit interrupt Yes; two high limits and two low limits each Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes, measuring range 4 to 20 mA only Short-circuit Yes; for 1 to 5 V, and for current measuring ranges for short-circuit in sensor supply Group error Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels Yes Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels and voltage supply of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation) Between the inputs (UCM) 75 V DC/60 V AC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 39 A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measurement Measuring type range Diagnostics Underflow Overflow Wire break Short-circuit to ground Missing supply voltage L+ Deactivated * * * * * Voltage 5 V x x 10 V x x 1 V to 5 V x Hardware interrupts * * - x 1 x x - x1 x x x - x x x 0 V to 10 V x x - x x x Current (4-wire transducer) 0 mA to 20 mA x x - x x x 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x 20 mA x x - x x x Current (2-wire transducer) 0 mA to 20 mA x 12 x - x x x 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x 1 x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 only possible as of firmware V2.0 2 The diagnostics Underflow can always be enabled for "Current (2-wire transducer) 0..20 mA", but it is only reported when a complete underflow range is created by the measuring range adjustment. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 40 Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type and measuring range PB Measurement type Measuring range Underflow Overflow Wire break Load Short-circuit voltage L+ to ground Deactivated * * * * * * Voltage 5 V x x - x x 1 10 V x x - x x 1 x - 1 V to 5 V x x - x x x - 0 V to 10 V x x - x x1 x - 0 mA to 20 mA x x - x x x - 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x - 20 mA x x - x x x - 0 mA to 20 mA - x - x x x - 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x - Current (4-wire transducer) Current (2-wire transducer) Diagnostics Hardware Smoothing interrupts / interference frequency suppression * * x - x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 only possible as of firmware V2.0 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 41 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the measuring range of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle. Note Changing parameter settings in runtime can cause the process values to freeze for the duration of the parameter assignment for the module. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information (V1.0) The figure below shows the structure of the header information (V1.0). Image A-2 Header information (V1.0) Header information (V2.0) The figure below shows the structure of the header information (V2.0). Image A-3 Header information (V2.0) Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 43 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Header information (V2.0 SCALE) The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-4 Header information (V2.0 SCALE) Parameter (V1.0) The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number x 18); channel number is 0 or 1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Image A-5 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channel 0 and 1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 45 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameter (V2.0) The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number x 22); channel number is 0 or 1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Image A-6 Structure of bytes x to x+21 for channels 0 and 1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 47 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameter (V2.0 SCALE) The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number x 38); channel number is 0 or 1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 48 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Image A-7 Structure of bytes x to x+37 for channels 0 and 1 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 49 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Codes for measurement types The following table contains all the measurement types of the analog input module with its codes. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for measurement types Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010 Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011 Codes for measuring ranges The following table contains all codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 3 Codes for measuring ranges Measuring range Code Voltage 5 V 0000 1000 10 V 0000 1001 1 to 5 V 0000 1010 0 to 10 V 0000 1011 Current 0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010 4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0011 20 mA 0000 0100 Codes for smoothing and interference frequency suppression The following table contains all coding for smoothing and interference frequency suppression. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 4 Codes for smoothing Smoothing Code None 0000 2 times 0100 4 times 0001 8 times 0101 16 times 0010 32 times 0011 Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 50 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Table A- 5 Codes for interference frequency suppression Interference frequency suppression Code 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 0100 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 0010 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 0001 300 Hz (10 ms) 0101 600 Hz (5 ms) 0110 1.2 kHz (2.5 ms) 0111 2.4 kHz (1.25 ms) 1000 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms) 1001 Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine if the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 51 B Representation of analog values This section shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4wire HF. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values at the same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed point number in the two's complement. The resolutions 15 and 16 bits including sign are displayed. Each analog value is entered in the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 B.1 Representation of input ranges The tables below set out the digitized representation of the input ranges by bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 > 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 < -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 52 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges Table B- 3 Dec. value Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 > 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 < -17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B.2 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 10 V and 5 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 10 V 5 V 32767 7FFF > 11.759 V > 5.879 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V Underrange -32768 8000 < -11.759 V < -5.879 V Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 53 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V Values B.3 Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF > 5.704 V > 11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range 20736 5100 4V 7.5 V 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 361.7 V 0 0 1V 0V -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V -32768 8000 < 0.296 V < -1.759 V Underrange Underflow Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 6 Current measuring range 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -15 mA -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -23.52 mA -32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) 54 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges Table B- 7 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA > 22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underrange Underflow * For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 55 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 09/2018 A5E03551866-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03551866-AE 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: Wiring and block diagram has been modified. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 13 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................13 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15 4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................15 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................18 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................21 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................22 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................24 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................29 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................30 A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input ...................................................................34 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 35 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................36 B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................37 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 5 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 7 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 (number in pack: 1 unit) 6ES7134-6GD01-2BA1 (number in pack: 10 units) View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 4 inputs Current measuring type for 2- and 4-wire transducers adjustable per channel Input ranges - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign Electrically isolated from the supply voltage L+ (only for input type 4-wire transducer) Permitted common mode voltage: 10 VSS Configurable diagnostics per module The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X PROFIenergy FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Value status FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher with HSP 0239 V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V7.0 or higher X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 3 Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST module with the various terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 4-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 13 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Wiring up 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current measurement (2-wire transducer) 1In+ Current input positive, channel n 4-wire connection for current measurement (4-wire transducer) 1In- Current input negative, channel n Backplane bus interface UVn Supply voltage, channel n Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 2In+ Current input positive, channel n Short-circuit protection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) Current limitation M Ground Color-coded label with color code CC03 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Uext Encoder supply external AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Figure 3-1 Power LED (green) Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2- and 4-wire transducer) Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measuring types and ranges The analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges Measuring type Current (2-wire transducer) Current (4-wire transducer) Measuring range Resolution 0 to 20 mA 15 bits 4 to 20 mA 15 bits 0 to 20 mA 15 bits 4 to 20 mA 15 bits 20 mA 16 bits including sign You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the section Representation of analog values (Page 35). 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 30). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 15 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics Overflow Diagnostics Underflow Diagnostics Wire break Measuring type/range Smoothing * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * deactivated * Current (4-wire transducer) 0..20 mA * Current (4-wire transducer) 4..20 mA * Current (4-wire transducer) +/-20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 0..20 mA * Current (2-wire transducer) 4..20 mA * None * weak * medium * strong GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Current (4wire transducer) 4..20 mA Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Configuration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Interference frequency suppression 2 Potential group * 60 Hz * 50 Hz1 * 16.6 Hz * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light BaseUnit) GSD file PROFIBUS DP 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 3 Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 1 Interference frequency suppression: Interfering signals at 400 Hz are automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 2 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter. 3 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 5 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix "Parameter data set". Note Unused channels "Disable" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply. Diagnostics overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be measured at the relevant input. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics info is output. Type/range of measurement See the section Measuring types and measuring ranges (Page 15). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal change at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the supply frequency that is predominant in the plant. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: There are no faults/errors on the module. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST with value status Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 5.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit (current, 2-wire transducer) Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA) Low limit violated High limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (2-wire transducer, current)* 1H Sensor supply to ground Correct the module/encoder tuning Wire break (current) ** 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with a larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable diagnostics * Connect the sensor contacts High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable * Input to sensor supply 11H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Firmware update in progress or update has * been canceled. * The module does not read any process values in this state. Wait for firmware update. Restart the firmware update. Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostics can also be reported for unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily. ** In case of activated smoothing the module calculates the measured values across several module cycles. The module only generates the wire break diagnosis if the smoothed measured value is stable. After the wire break has been eliminated, the module supplies stable measured values again depending on the set smoothing level. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 23 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST, PU 1 Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC03 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Measuring range scalable No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V14 / - * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.6 and higher * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * Oversampling No * MSI No CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN No Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 37 mA; without sensor supply 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes * Short-circuit protection Yes * Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.85 W; Without encoder supply voltage Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1 * 4-wire connection BU type A0, A1 Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 4; Differential inputs permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. 50 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional processing times (depending on the parameterization of the active channels) Input ranges (rated values), currents * 0 to 20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 ; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage in 2-wire operation * -20 mA to +20 mA Yes * Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 100 * 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 ; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage in 2-wire operation Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta) Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz * Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times * parameterizable Yes Encoder Connection of signal encoders * for voltage measurement No * for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes - 650 * Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 % Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 50 dB; Applies to up to 5 V overvoltage in other channels Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.05 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 % Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 70 dB * Common mode voltage, max. 10 V * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm No Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA * Short-circuit Yes; 2-wire mode: Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; Green LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics No * for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels Yes; channel group-specific between 2-wire current input group and 4-wire voltage input group * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes; only for 4-wire transducer Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * Vertical installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * Vertical installation, max. 50 C * Horizontal installation, min. -30 C; No condensation * Horizontal installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude Up to max. 5 000 m, at installation height > 2 000 m additional restrictions, see manual for details Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measuring type Measuring range deactivated Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Overflow Underflow Wire break * * * * * Current (4-wire connection) 0..20 mA x - x x - 4..20 mA x - x x x 20 mA x - x x - Current (2-wire connection) 0..20 mA x x x x - 4..20 mA x x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measuring type Measuring range deactivated Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Overflow/ Wire break * * * * Underflow Current (4-wire connection) 0..20 mA x - x - 4..20 mA x - x x 20 mA x - x - Current (2-wire connection) 0..20 mA x x x - 4..20 mA x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 29 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 31 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 3 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Codes for the measuring type The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for the measuring type Measuring type Coding Deactivated 0000 0000 Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010 Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011 Codes for the measuring range The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for the measuring range Measuring range Coding 0 to 20 mA 0000 0010 4 to 20 mA 0000 0011 20 mA 0000 0100 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 33 Parameter data record A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input Error transferring the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * DF Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged or pulled. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bit set Check the parameters of the module. DF 80 E1 02 Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for operating mode. Check the parameters of the module. DF 80 E1 05 Invalid coding set for measuring range / measurement type. Check the parameters of the module. DF 80 E1 08 Invalid coding set for interference Check the parameters of the module. frequency suppression / integration time. DF 80 E1 09 Invalid coding for smoothing. Check the parameters of the module. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE B Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the analog module. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned parameters. The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 35 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Current measuring range 20 mA Values Dec. Current measuring range Hex. Range 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -15 mA -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -23.52 mA -32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Table B- 5 Underrange Underflow Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underrange Underflow * For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 37 Preface Documentation guide 1 SIMATIC Product overview 2 ET 200SP Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Wiring up 3 HART function 4 Parameters 5 Configuring/address space 6 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7 Technical specifications 8 Parameter data records 9 Manual 02/2018 A5E35098013-AC HART operating data records 10 Analog value representation 11 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E35098013-AC 02/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Validity of the documentation This manual describes the analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART, article number 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1. It supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http:// support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit: https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 3 Preface To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity. 4 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Table of contents Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3 1 Documentation guide....................................................................................................................................7 2 Product overview..........................................................................................................................................9 2.1 3 Wiring up....................................................................................................................................................11 3.1 4 5 7 8 4.1 How HART works...................................................................................................................14 4.2 Use of HART..........................................................................................................................18 4.3 HART communication interface.............................................................................................20 4.4 HART variables......................................................................................................................22 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................25 10 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART...................................................................25 Channel/technology parameters............................................................................................25 Explanation of the channel/technology parameters...............................................................27 HART mapping parameters...................................................................................................30 Configuring/address space.........................................................................................................................33 6.1 Configuring.............................................................................................................................33 6.2 Address space.......................................................................................................................34 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms......................................................................................................................37 7.1 Status and error displays.......................................................................................................37 7.2 Interrupts................................................................................................................................39 7.3 Diagnostics alarms.................................................................................................................40 Technical specifications..............................................................................................................................43 8.1 9 Connection and block diagram...............................................................................................11 HART function............................................................................................................................................13 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 6 Properties ................................................................................................................................9 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART...............................................43 Parameter data records..............................................................................................................................47 9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters........................48 9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters..............................51 HART operating data records.....................................................................................................................53 10.1 HART directory.......................................................................................................................54 10.2 HART feature data.................................................................................................................55 10.3 HART variable data record.....................................................................................................56 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 5 Table of contents 11 10.4 HART-specific settings...........................................................................................................57 10.5 HART request and response data records.............................................................................59 Analog value representation.......................................................................................................................65 11.1 Representation of input ranges..............................................................................................66 11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges........................................67 Index...........................................................................................................................................................69 6 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 1 Documentation guide Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers diverse topics relating to your automation system. The complete documentation for the ET 200SP system consists of the system manual, function manuals, and manuals for the individual devices. The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you in configuring and programming your automation system. Overview of documentation for analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART The following table lists further documentation that you will need when using analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART. Table 1-1 Documentation Topic Documentation Most important contents System description System Manual ET 200SP distrib uted I/O system (http:// support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/en/58649293) Application planning Installation Connecting Commissioning Analog value processing Function Manual Analog value pro cessing (http:// support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/en/67989094) Basics of analog technology (wiring, processing, assembly system) Description/explanation of meaning, e.g., conversion and cycle times, basic error limits, operational limits System diagnostics Function manual Diagnostics (http:// Overview support.automation.siemens.com/ Hardware/software diagnostic WW/view/en/59192926) evaluation BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http:// Technical specifications support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/en/59753521) SIMATIC manuals The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 7 Documentation guide 8 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART module Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 4 inputs Measurement type current for 2-wire HART transducer Input range 4 mA to 20 mA Resolution 16 bits including sign Configurable diagnostics per channel The module supports the following functions: HART communication (Rev. 5 to Rev. 7) Firmware update I&M identification data Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Configuration in RUN Value status (PROFINET IO only) Up to four HART variables directly in the input address space You can configure the module with STEP 7 in the TIA Portal as well as with HW Config and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. 10 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 3 Wiring up 3.1 Connection and block diagram The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module can be used with all A0 or A1-type BaseUnits. You connect the transducers to the BaseUnit of the analog module. The infeed of the supply voltage at the light BaseUnit of the associated potential group supplies the module and the transducers connected to the encoder supply voltages. A new potential group always begins with a light BaseUnit. BaseUnit The BaseUnit is not included in the product package of the module and must be ordered separately. An overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the analog module can be found in Product information for documentation of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http:// support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864) Information regarding selection of the suitable BaseUnit can be found in system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 58649293) and in the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/en/59753521). Information regarding wiring of the BaseUnit, creating the cable shield, etc., can be found in system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/58649293) in the section "Connecting". Note The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light BaseUnit. Also keep this in mind during the configuration. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 11 Wiring up 3.1 Connection and block diagram General terminal assignment ',$* $,$,$,$, )))) 3 4 +$57 230 +$57 50 50 230 +$57 230 + + + 89 1 08 89 50 50 5 + 2 +$57 3:5 7 , , 3 3 $8; / + + 89 08 89 89 6 + + 89 Block diagram AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Analog-digital converter (ADC) Current limitation Non-isolated 4-wire connection to the HART test connection terminal (at channel 1 in this case) Hn+ HART signal "+", channel n Filter circuit supply voltage (only available on light-colored BaseUnit) Hn- HART signal "-", channel n UVn Supply voltage channel n In+ Input signal "+" channel n L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-col ored BaseUnit) M Ground P1,P2, Internal self-assembling voltage AUX buses Connection to the left (dark-colored BaseUnit) , , Connection to the right interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) 8 0 Backplane bus connection Color-coded label CC03 (optional) 8 Optional connection of an external hand-held (secondary master) to the HART test connection terminal (at channel 0 in this case) 230 1A Connection of a 2-wire transducer, at channel 0 in this case DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0 to AI3 Channel status LED (green) F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) Supply voltage L+/M Connect supply voltage (24V DC) to terminals L+ and M. An internal protective circuit protects the analog module from reverse polarity. The analog module monitors the connection of the supply voltage. 12 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART function 4 Definition "HART" stands for "Highway Addressable Remote Transducer". The HART functionality also enables you to use the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module to exchange data with the connected field devices. The HART protocol is generally accepted as a standard protocol for communication with intelligent field devices: HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation (HCF), which owns all the rights to the HART protocol. You can find detailed information about HART in the HART specification. Advantages of HART Using the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module offers the following advantages: Connection compatibility with standard analog modules: Current loop 4 - 20 mA Additional digital communication using the HART protocol Numerous field devices with HART functions are in use The option to use HART is integrated in the S7 system by means of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4... 20mA HART analog module. Use in the system The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module is used in the distributed I/O connected to PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. You can connect a field device to any channel: The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module operates as a HART master, monodrop; the field devices operate as HART devices. Typical applications The following applications are typical: Commissioning of field devices (centralized parameter assignment) Online modification of field device parameters Information, maintenance and diagnostic displays for the field devices Integration of configuration tools for field devices via the HART interface Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 13 HART function 4.1 How HART works 4.1 How HART works Introduction The HART protocol describes the physical form of the transfer: transfer procedures, message structure, data formats and commands. HART signal The figure below shows the analog signal with the modulated HART signal (FSK method), which consists of sine waves of 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz and has a mean value of 0. It can be filtered out using an input filter so that the original analog signal is available again. +0,5 mA 0 -0,5 mA 1200 Hz 2200 Hz "1" "0" 20 mA 1 K A K A K A A K 4 mA 0 2 Figure 4-1 The HART signal Time (seconds) K Command A Response Analog signal HART communication The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module processes the HART communication in multiplex mode, i.e., consecutively channel-by-channel. As a result, HART commands of the individual channels influence the speed of the HART processing of the other channels. When HART mode is enabled, the analog module autonomously sends HART commands to the connected field devices. This takes place alternatingly on a channel-specific basis with any 14 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART function 4.1 How HART works pending external HART commands that arrive via the command interface of the module, see section 4.3 "HART command interface". Commissioning a HART field device Only HART field devices that are set to the short frame address 0 can be operated. If a HART field device with a different short frame address is connected or a connected field device is reconfigured to a short frame address other than 0 during operation, the module starts a scan of all possible short frame addresses at the next re-establishment of HART communication (command 0 with short frame addresses 1...63). As soon as the connected field device responds, it is converted to the short frame address 0 (HART command 6) by the module. During the scan, the module reports a HART communication error. HART commands The assignable properties of the HART field devices (HART parameters) can be set with HART commands and read by means of HART replies. The HART commands and their parameters are divided into three groups with the following properties: Universal Common practice Device-specific Universal commands must be supported by all manufacturers of HART field devices and common practice commands should be supported. There are also device-specific commands that apply only to the particular field device. Examples of HART commands The following two tables show examples of HART commands: Table 4-1 Examples of universal commands Command Function 0 Read manufacturer and device type - only with this command 0 can field devices be addressed by means of a short frame address 11 Read manufacturer and device type 1 Read primary variable and unit 2 Read current output and percent of range, digitally as floating-point number (IEEE 754) 3 Read up to four pre-defined dynamic variables (primary variables, secondary variables, etc.) 13, 18 Read or write tag, descriptor and date (data included in transmission) Table 4-2 Examples of common practice commands Command Function 36 Set upper range value Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 15 HART function 4.1 How HART works 37 Set lower range value 41 Perform self-test 43 Set the primary variable to zero 109 Switch burst mode on or off Structure of the HART protocol Each HART frame sent from the analog module to the connected field device (request frame) and each HART frame from the field device (response frame) has the following basic structure. PREAMBLE STRT PREAMBLE: STRT: ADDR: COM: BCNT: STATUS: DATA: CHK: ADDR COM BCNT STATUS DATA CHK Bytes (0xFF) for synchronizing. 5 to 20 bytes depending on parameter assignment Start character (start delimiter) Address of the field device (1 byte; short address or 5 bytes; long address) HART command number Byte count, number of bytes to follow without checksum HART device status (1st and 2nd status byte). Only present for a response frame. For structure of HART device status, see below. Transferred user data / parameters, quantity depending on command (0...230 bytes) Checksum With the exception of the preamble bytes, this structure is contained in the communication data of the HART command interface. See section HART request and response data records (Page 59). HART replies always contain data. Status information (HART device status; 1st and 2nd status bytes) is always sent together with a HART response. You should evaluate these to make sure the response is correct. Structure of HART device status (1st and 2nd status bytes). Table 4-3 1st status byte When Bit 7 = 1: "Communication error" Bit 6 = 1 Bit 5 = 1 Bit 4 = 1 Bit 3 = 1 Bit 2 = 0 Bit 1 = 1 Bit 0 = 0 Parity error Overflow Framing error Checksum error Reserved Overflow in the receive buffer Reserved When bit 7 = 0: "Specific in line with response frame" 16 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART function 4.1 How HART works Table 4-4 2nd status byte Bit 7 = 1 Bit 6 = 1 Bit 5 = 1 Bit 4 = 1 Bit 3 = 1 Bit 2 = 1 Bit 1 = 1 Bit 0 = 1 Device fault Configuration changed Startup (cold start) Additional status information available Fixed analog output current setting Analog output current saturated Secondary variable outside the limits Primary variable outside the range HART-Fast-Mode The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module supports the processing of HART commands as a SHC sequence ("Successive HART Command"). That is, if the analog module detects a HART command with SHC bit set for a channel, the complete HART command processing on the HART analog module is reserved for this channel for approximately 2 s. For all other channels of the analog module, no HART frame processing occurs during this time, see section HART communication interface (Page 20) Note During the time a HART channel of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module is processing an SHC sequence, and thus the complete HART processing of the module is reserved for this channel, the HART variables of all HART channels are no longer updated. They remain unchanged in terms of value and quality code. HART commands for other channels are not processed and are acknowledged correspondingly. Burst mode The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module does not support burst mode. HART commands with set burst bit are ignored and are not forwarded to the connected field device. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 17 HART function 4.2 Use of HART 4.2 Use of HART System environment for the use of HART To use an intelligent field device with HART functionality, you require the following system environment: Current loop 4 - 20 mA Connection of the transducers to the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module HART configuration tool "Client": You can assign the HART parameters using an external hand-held operating device (HART Handheld) or a HART configuration tool (PDM). Both assume the function of a "client": The configuration tool goes through the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module whereas the HART Handheld is connected directly in parallel with the field device. See terminal assignment "HART test connections (terminals 1 to 8)" in the section 3.1 "Terminal assignment". PDM (Process Device Manager) is available as a stand-alone unit or integrated in STEP 7 HW Config. HART system connection: The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module assumes the function of a "master" by forwarding the commands received from the HART configuration tool or as programmed commands from an S7 user program, for example, to the intelligent field device and sending back the replies. Data records that are transferred via the ET 200SP I/O bus serve as the interface of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module. The data records must be created and interpreted by the client. . )LHOGGHYLFHZLWK+$57IXQFWLRQDOLW\ +$57DQDORJPRGXOH ,QWHUIDFHWR 352),%86 P$ /9 0RGHP +$57KDQGKHOG $'8 6HQGUHFHLYH WKH+$57VLJQDO $QDORJGLJLWDOFRQYHUVLRQ RIWKHF\FOLFPHDVXUHG YDOXH 6,0$7,& 3'0 +$57SDUDPHWHU DVVLJQPHQWWRRO 0&KDVVLVJURXQG Figure 4-2 18 System environment for the use of HART Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART function 4.2 Use of HART Error management The two HART status bytes (HART device status) that are transferred with each response of the field device contain error information about the HART communication, HART command, and device status. This is evaluated by the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module and made available in the system via S7 diagnostic messages. Configuration/commissioning You configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module in the SIMATIC system with STEP 7 or the TIA Portal. You assign parameters for the individual channels with respect to the actual analog value acquisition and the use of HART variables in the input address space of the module. You can configure one field device per channel. By means of this configured field device, the configuration / parameter assignment of the connected field device is then carried out using PDM or the EDD for the ET 200SP. It is also possible to configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module using a GSD file for PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. However, in this case, direct configuration / parameter assignment of the connected field devices is not possible. Parameter reassignment of the field devices The HART analog module generally accepts parameter reassignments for field devices. Access rights can only be allocated in the configuration tool. For parameter reassignment of the field devices connected to the HART analog module, proceed as follows: 1. You start the parameter reassignment of a field device using a HART command that you enter using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool or as a programmed command in the STEP 7 user program. 2. After you have reassigned the parameters of a HART field device, the corresponding bit is set in the device status of the connected field device (in the 2nd status byte). 3. Because of the parameter reassignment of the field device, the HART analog module triggers a diagnostic interrupt "Configuration changed", provided this diagnostic interrupts is enabled. See section 7.3 "Diagnostic alarms". This diagnostic interrupt is to be regarded as information and not as an error and is automatically deleted again by the analog module after approximately 1 minute. A diagnostic interrupt can also be triggered, if enabled, when parameter reassignment is carried out with the hand-held device. See also Connection and block diagram (Page 11) Diagnostics alarms (Page 40) Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 19 HART function 4.3 HART communication interface 4.3 HART communication interface Data records The HART commands are sent as so-called external HART requests from the client (e.g., PDM or the STEP 7 user program) to the connected field device via data records. The response of the field device is made available again in the system via data records. HART communication may only be handled by one client (e.g., PDM) per channel. If a channel is handled by several clients, the response made available by the module cannot be allocated to one client with certainty. The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module does not support client management. Each client/channel is allocated fixed data records: Table 4-5 Structure of the data records Channel Data record number Request to the field device Response from the field device 0 80 81 1 82 83 2 84 85 3 86 87 The corresponding data records are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and read by the module with the "RDREC" instruction. Errors during the transfer are indicated at output parameter STATUS. Errors during interpretation of the request data record are signaled in the corresponding response data record. The faulty request can be read back again using the request data record. Rules After having written a request data record, a client must read the response data record before it may write another request data record. The client can evaluate the "processing status" in the response data record: If the "processing status" indicates "successful" or "error," the response data record contains current response data or error displays. The response data record must always be read completely because the analog module may modify the data record after the initial reading with "successful" or "error" status. If the processing status in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error", the data record contains current response data or error displays. The client may only write a request data record to the module again when it has read the response to the previously written request data record via the corresponding response data record. Otherwise, the response from the module is overwritten. The STATUS component in the response frame (HART device status in the response data) provides information on whether errors have occurred and, if so, which errors. Each request is stored on a channel-specific basis, and the corresponding request data record is disabled. Another writing of the same request data record is thus not possible and is 20 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART function 4.3 HART communication interface acknowledged with BUSY. The disable of the request data record is reset after the termination or completion of the requested HART command. SHC sequence If a HART command is sent to the module with a set SHC bit, then this channel is reserved for HART commands for 2 seconds. This means that no more internal HART commands are sent to the field device with this channel. Each time a HART command with a set SHC bit is sent, the module reserves this channel again for another 2 seconds for HART commands. If a HART command without a set SHC bit is detected for this channel, or if no further command occurs for this channel within 2 seconds after the previous HART command, then command 3 or 9 for reading the HART variables is cyclically sent to the field device for this channel. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 21 HART function 4.4 HART variables 4.4 HART variables Introduction Numerous HART field devices make available additional measured quantities (e.g. sensor temperature). A maximum of four HART variables supported by the connected field device can be cyclically read per channel with activated HART functionality. The HART variables are read automatically with HART command 3 (for field devices with HART rev. 5 and 6) or with command 9 (for field devices with HART rev. 7 or later). These four HART variables per channel are always stored in HART variable data record 121 and can be read at any time. See section HART variable data record (Page 56). In addition, a maximum of 4 HART variables can be configured directly in the input address space of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module. The HART variables are assigned to a channel in the properties dialog of the module. The parameter assignment uses parameter data record 140, see section AUTOHOTSPOT. This makes it easy for you to process measured values directly from the field device as input data in the automation device. Address assignment Provided you map HART variables in the input address space of the module by means of the configuration tool or selection of the appropriate configuration, 20 bytes are always additionally allocated for the HART variables. Configuration of HART variables You can configure up to 4 HART variables for each channel PV (Primary Variable) SV (Secondary Variable) TV (Tertiary Variable) QV (Quaternary) When HART mode is enabled, the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module autonomously and cyclically reads the variables supplied by the connected field devices and makes them available in the input address space according to the configuration. Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte value and a quality code byte. Quality code The quality code describes the process status of the corresponding HART variable. 22 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART function 4.4 HART variables Basic structure of the quality code Bit 7....6 5....2 1...0 Quality Sub-status Limits 0 0 1 1 Coded according to "PROFIBUS PA Profile for Process Control Devices" 0 0 1 1 0: Bad 1: Uncertain 0: Good 1: Good 0: OK 1: Low limit 0: High limit 1: Constant The quality codes generated by the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module are based on the HART Revision of the utilized field device. Field devices with HART Revision 5 and 6 The quality code is formed exclusively from the 1st and 2nd Status byte (HART device status) of the response frames (HART command 3). Quality code Meaning (process status) 80H Value is okay Applies even when the following bits are set in the 2nd status byte of the HART response frame: Configuration changed Startup (cold start) Fixed analog output current setting 78H Value is uncertain Applies even when the following bits are set in the 2nd status byte of the HART response frame: Additional status information available Analog output current saturated Secondary variable outside the limits Primary variable outside the range 84H Response code RC8: Update error 24H Response code RC16: Access restricted 23H Communication error or HART variable not present in the field device 37H Initialization value from analog module 00H Initialization value from S7 system Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Request from field device refused After module startup 23 HART function 4.4 HART variables Field devices with HART Revision 7 or higher The quality code is formed from the 1st status byte (HART device status) and the "Device variable status" (DVS) of the response frames (HART command 9). 24 Quality code Meaning (process status) 80H Value is okay 89H "Good" with "Low limit" 8AH "Good" with "High limit" 28H...2BH "Bad" 68H...6BH "Poor accuracy" 78H...7BH "Manual" or "Fixed" (manually controlled or fixed value) 88H...8BH "More device variable state available" (additional status information available) 84H Response code RC8: Update error Process status, formed from the "De vice variable status" (DVS) of the re sponse frames with corresponding lim its (see above). 24H Response code RC16: Access restricted 23H Communication error or HART variable not present in the field device 37H Initialization value from analog module 40H Read alternatively via command 3 00H Initialization value from S7 system Request from field device refused After module startup Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 5 Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART You specify how the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module operates using parameters. The parameters are subdivided into: Channel or technology parameters (data record 128) With PROFIBUS DP GSD configuration, there is a reduced configuration via the startup configuration (Prm frame). Parameters that define the display of HART variables in the address space of the module; HART mapping parameters (data record 140) With configuration in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the modules via data records with the "WRREC" instruction; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters (Page 48). 5.1.1 Channel/technology parameters Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system Table 5-1 Configurable channel/technology parameters and their default settings Parameter Value range Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Disable Diagnostics encoder supply Disable Diagnostics overflow Disable Diagnostics underflow Disable Default Configura tion in RUN Effective range with configura tion software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PRO FINET IO GSD file PRO FIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Module 2 Disable Yes Channel Module 2 Disable Yes Channel Module 2 Disable Yes Channel Module 2 Enable Enable Enable Enable Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 25 Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Parameter Value range Default Configura tion in RUN Effective range with configura tion software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PRO FINET IO GSD file PRO FIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Module 2 Disable Yes Channel Module 2 Current (2wire transduc er) 4..20 mA HART Yes Channel Channel none Yes Channel Channel 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 2 1.185 mA Yes Channel Cannot be changed2 5 Yes Channel Cannot be changed2 Number of HART repeti 0...255 tions 5 Yes Channel Cannot be changed2 Potential group Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Diagnostics wire break Disable Diagnostics HART Disable Enable Enable Measuring type/range Disabled Current (2-wire transducer) 4..20 mA Current (2-wire transducer) 4..20 mA HART Smoothing none 4-fold (weak) 16-fold (medium) 32-fold (strong) Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz (integration time 16.6 ms) 50 Hz 1 (integration time 20 ms) 10 Hz (integration time 100 ms) Current limit for wire break diagnostics 1.185 mA Number of HART preamble bytes 5...20 3.6 mA Use potential group of the left module Allow new potential group 1 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 2 Because the PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station, the options for parameter assignment are limited. In this case, the parameter assignment uses data record 245. If required, you can assign this parameter using data record 128 as described in the "GSD File PROFINET IO" column (see table above). 26 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Note Unused channels "Disable" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A disabled channel always supplies the analog value 7FFFH. See also Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters (Page 48) 5.1.2 Explanation of the channel/technology parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics encoder supply Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the encoder supply. The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be enabled simultaneously. If both diagnostic events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics information is output. Diagnostics overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics wire break Enabling of the diagnostics when the module has no current flow at the input or the current flow at the input is below the configured wire break limit. The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics information is output. Diagnostics HART Enabling of the diagnostics of the HART frame-specific monitoring and the status information supplied by the connected field device in the HART frame (HART device status). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 27 Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Current limit for wire break diagnostics You use this to specify the current limit for detecting wire breaks. If the current falls below the configured wire break limit, the measured value is declared invalid and, if wire break diagnostics is enabled, corresponding diagnostics information is generated. When value status is configured, the analog value is marked as invalid. With a wire break limit of 3.6 mA, the measured value becomes invalid when the current falls below 3.6 mA and is marked as valid again when it rises above 3.8 mA. There is no hysteresis for a wire break limit of 1.185 mA. Measuring type/range The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog input module has the following measuring ranges: Table 5-2 Measuring ranges Measuring type Measuring range Resolution Disabled - - Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA 15 bits + sign Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA HART 15 bits + sign An overview of the measuring range as well as overflow, overrange, etc., can be found in the section Analog value representation (Page 65) and in Analog Value Processing function manual. Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. Smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal change at the analog input. 28 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART [ [ [ [ 0RGXOHF\FOHV N No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 5-1 Smoothing of the analog value Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC supply system may interfere with the measured value, in particular in low voltage ranges. . Number of HART preamble bytes Specifies the number of preamble bytes that the module prefixes to each HART frame to be sent (FFH). These bytes are used for synchronizing the frames. Number of HART repetitions Specifies the number of HART frame repetitions. If the analog module receives no response or receives a response with error to a HART frame sent to the field device, the frame is accordingly repeated, i.e., resent to the field device. Because HART communication of the individual channels uses multiplex operation, faulty HART frames affect the other channels when the number of HART repetitions is high. In other words, the other channels are processed less frequently. Potential group Specifies that a BaseUnit with supply voltage infeed is located in this slot (see system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 58649293)). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 29 Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART See also Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART (Page 25) 5.1.3 HART mapping parameters The HART mapping parameters allow a maximum of 4 HART variables to be configured (mapped) in the address space of the module. Each HART variable occupies 5 bytes of input data. As soon as you configure (map) at least one HART variable in the input address space, the addresses for all four variables are occupied (20 bytes). With PROFIBUS DP GSD configuration with HART variables, the HART variables cannot be directly configured. The four secondary variables are supplied in ascending channel order in the address space of the module. When required, this can be changed using data record 140; see section AUTOHOTSPOT. Parameters Table 5-3 Configurable HART mapping parameters Parameter Variable 0 Value range Default Configuration in RUN With GSD file PRO FIBUS DP Chan 0...3 nel 0 Yes 0 Type Non / Cir Yes Secondary Chan 0...3 nel 0 Yes 1 Type Non / Cir Yes Secondary Chan 0...3 nel 0 Yes 2 Type Non / Cir Yes Secondary Non / Cir Primary Secondary Tertiary Quartenary Variable 1 Non / Cir Primary Secondary Tertiary Quartenary Variable 2 Non / Cir Primary Secondary Tertiary Quartenary 30 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Parameter Variable 3 Value range Default Configuration in RUN With GSD file PRO FIBUS DP Chan 0...3 nel 0 Yes 3 Type Non / Cir Yes Secondary Non / Cir Primary Secondary Tertiary Quartenary Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 31 Parameters 5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART 32 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Configuring/address space 6.1 6 Configuring You configure the analog module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART In the TIA Portal V13.0.1 or higher With STEP 7 V5.5 + SP4 or higher (HSP0263) Using GSD/GSDML The GSD files for the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System can be downloaded from the Internet: GSDML (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621) GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 73016883) Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Without value status and without HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20 mA HART") Without value status, with HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20 mA HART, 4 variables") With value status and without HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20 mA HART, QI") With value status, with HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20 mA HART, 4 variables, QI") With GSD/GSDML configuration, you must select one of the possible configurations directly. The configuration for STEP 7 (TIA Portal or HW Config) is made indirectly via the parameters. Restrictions Value status is not available for a PROFIBUS DP station. Downstream of a Standard IM (V1.1), the module can be operated only in the "Without value status and without HART variables" configuration. TIA Portal: - The module behind a standard IM (V1.1) is not available. - TIA Portal as of V14.0.1 The module can be centrally configured on the following CPU: - CPU 1510SP-1 (as of V2.1) - CPU 1512SP-1 PN (as of V2.1) - TIA Portal as of V15.0.0 The module can be configured as an open controller. - The module cannot be used behind fail-safe controllers. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 33 Configuring/address space 6.2 Address space 6.2 Address space The following figure shows the allocation of the address space of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART module for a configuration with value status (Quality Information, QI) and with HART variables. The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status has been enabled or the corresponding configuration has been configured from the GSDML. The addresses for the HART variables are only available if configuration/parameter assignment of the HART variables has been carried out or the corresponding configuration has been configured from the GSD/GSDML. If the HART variables are configured and there is no value status configuration or parameter assignment, the HART variables begin directly after the analog values, thus starting from IB x + 8. Table 6-1 Address space of analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART $VVLJQPHQWLQWKHSURFHVVLPDJHLQSXW 3,, ,%[ ,%[ ,%[ ,%[ ,%[ ,%[ ,%[ ,%[ &KDQQHO &KDQQHO &KDQQHO &KDQQHO ,%[ IB x+9 ,QSXWYDOXH Value 9DOXHVWDWXV 4, &KDQQHOWR YDOXHVWDWXV4,WR4, Configured HART variable 0 .... IB x+12 IB x+13 Quality code IB x+14 Value Configured HART variable 1 .... IB x+17 IB x+18 Quality code IB x+19 Value Configured HART variable 2 .... IB x+22 IB x+23 Quality code IB x+24 .... IB x+27 Value IB x+28 Quality code 34 Configured HART variable 3 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Configuring/address space 6.2 Address space Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to the corresponding channel. The provide information about the validity of the analog value, namely irrespective of the diagnostics enables. Bit = 1: There is no error in the analog value or the analog value acquisition of the channel. Bit = 0: The analog value of the channel cannot be correctly acquired. The channel is disabled; there is a fault in the wiring or module. Evaluating HART variables If you have configured (mapped) HART variables for the analog module, four HART variables with 5 bytes each are stored in the input address space. Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte real value and a quality code byte. The quality code describes the validity of the value; see section HART variables (Page 22) . Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 35 Configuring/address space 6.2 Address space 36 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7.1 7 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the status and error displays of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog input module. $, $, ) ) $, $ DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 7-1 LED displays Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 40). Table 7-1 Status display of the channel status/channel fault LEDs LEDs Channel status Meaning Channel fault Channel disabled or module switched off Off Off Channel enabled and no channel diagnostics present On Off Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 37 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7.1 Status and error displays LEDs Channel status Meaning Channel fault Channel enabled and channel diagnostics present Off On Channel enabled and only HART channel diagnostics present On Table 7-2 On DIAG LED error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP is not OK or switched off Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics, at least one error is currently present Flashes Table 7-3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On 38 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7.2 Interrupts 7.2 Interrupts The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog input module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic interrupt for the following events: Channel/component temporarily unavailable Short-circuit / Overload of encoder voltage Wire break Low limit violated High limit violated Error No supply voltage L+ HART communication error or HART field device error Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 39 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7.3 Diagnostics alarms 7.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostic alarm is generated for each detected diagnostic event. The DIAG LED flashes on the module. There is additionally a channel-specific display of the diagnostics through the corresponding channel fault/channel status LEDs. The diagnostic alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostic buffer of the CPU or be displayed in STEP 7 using the Online and Diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 7-4 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Channel/component 1FH temporarily unavailable Update of the firmware is being performed or has been canceled. The module does not perform any measurements during this time. Short-circuit/overload at external encoder supply * 10EH Short-circuit of the encoder supply to M Correct the module/encoder tuning Wire break 6H Short-circuit of the input to the encoder supply Overload of the encoder supply Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Wire break between the module and sensor Channel not connected (open) Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with a larger crosssection Connect the cable Disable diagnostics Connect the sensor contacts High limit violated 7H The analog value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning Low limit violated 8H The analog value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Check wiring of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit Check BaseUnit type HART communication error 40 141H HART field device is not responding Check the process wiring Timing error Correct the parameter assignment HART field device has not understood the sent command (1st status byte) Set output current of 4 mA Increase the number of assigned repetitions Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Remedy HART primary variable outside range 142H Incorrect parameters in the HART field device Check the parameter assignment of the HART device HART field device is at "Primary variable outside the limits" in simulation mode Correct the simulation Incorrect measuring point Check whether the correct transducer is connected Primary variable assigned outside the limits HART output current of 143H the field device satura ted The output current of the HART field device is saturated: Incorrect parameters in the HART field device HART field device is set to a measured value that is too high in simulation mode Incorrect measuring point HART output current of the field device speci fied 144H The output current of the HART field device is set to a fixed value: Incorrect parameters in the HART field device HART field device is set to a measured value that is too high in simulation mode Incorrect measuring point HART secondary vari able outside the limits 149H Incorrect parameters in the HART field device HART field device is at "Non-primary variable outside the limits" in simulation mode Incorrect measuring point Non-primary variable assigned outside the limits HART - more status available 145H The identifier for "Additional status information available" of the HART field device was set in the HART device status (in the 2nd status byte). Read status using HART command 48 and eliminate error/cause, if necessary HART configuration changed 146H The identifier for "Parameter reassignment" of the HART field device was set in the HART device status (in the 2nd status byte). If you do not want a diagnostic interrupt to be triggered for parameter reassignment, the diagnostic interrupt must not be enabled. 147H The field device signals a malfunction in the HART device status (in the 2nd status byte) Read status using HART command 48 and eliminate error/cause, if necessary (reset again automati cally by the module af ter approximately 1 mi nute) HART malfunction in field device Replace the field device Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 41 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7.3 Diagnostics alarms * Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostic information can also be signaled on unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily. 42 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 8 Technical specifications 8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1 Product type designation AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART General information Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 HART support Rev. 5 to Rev. 7 Product functions I&M data Yes, I&M0 to I&M3 Firmware update capability Yes Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 + SP1 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 + SP4 + HSP0263 PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD V3.0 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.31 CiR Configuration in RUN Configuration in RUN possible Yes Installation type/mounting Rack mounting possible Yes Front installation possible Yes Rail mounting possible Yes Wall/direct mounting possible No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V / 110 mA Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V Input current Current consumption, max. 25 mA; without encoder supply Encoder supply 24 V encoder supply Yes Short-circuit protection Yes Output current per channel (4 channels), max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s Load resistance of the encoder > 750 for L+ = 24 V Power loss Power loss, typ. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 0.65 W; without encoder 43 Technical specifications 8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1 Address space per module Without value status and without HART variables 8 bytes With value status and without HART variables 9 bytes Without value status, with HART variables 28 bytes With value status, with HART variables 29 bytes Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 4 Maximum permitted input current for current input (de 50 mA struction limit) Input ranges (rated values), currents Current 4 mA to 20 mA Yes, 15 bits + sign Input resistance (4 to 20 mA) 280 ; + approx. 0.35 V diode forward voltage Cable length Cable length shielded, max. 800 m Analog value formation Measuring principle Integrating (sigma-delta) Integration and conversion time / resolution per channel Resolution with overrange (bits including sign), max. 16 bits Interference suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 10 / 50 / 60, channel-by-channel Basic conversion time depending on the interference voltage sup pression: at 60Hz: 18.75 ms at 50Hz: 22.5 ms at 10Hz: 112.5 ms Measured value smoothing Configurable Yes (none, weak, medium, strong), channelby-channel Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01 % Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005 % Crosstalk between inputs, min. 60 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.05 % Operational limit in the entire temperature range Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5 % Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.3 % Influence of a HART signal modulated on the input signal in relation to input range Error with integration time 16.6 ms 0.05% Error with integration time 20 ms 0.04% Error with integration time 100 ms 0.02% Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %), f1 = interference frequency 44 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Technical specifications 8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1 Series-mode interference (peak of the interference < nominal value of the input range), min. 60 dB Interrupts/diagnostic/status information Diagnostic interrupt Yes Diagnostic alarms Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes; channel-by-channel Short-circuit Yes; channel-by-channel, short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or short-circuit of an input to the encoder supply Underflow/overflow Yes; channel-by-channel HART Yes; channel-by-channel Diagnostic display LED Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes, red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Isolation, designed for basic isolation between chan nels and backplane bus 60 V AC / 75 V DC Isolation Isolation tested with 500 V AC or 707 V DC (type test) Operating temperature Horizontal mounting position, min. 0 Horizontal mounting position, max. 60 Vertical mounting position, min. 0 Vertical mounting position, max. 50 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 59753521) Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 45 Technical specifications 8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART 46 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Parameter data records 9 Parameter assignment in the user program You have the option of reassigning parameters for individual channels of the module and for the mapping of HART variables in RUN without affecting the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module. Channel/technology parameters using data record 128 The HART mapping using data record 140. The parameters assigned with STEP 7 are not changed permanently in the CPU, which means the parameters assigned with STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Parameters Only the values specified in each case in the following are permitted. Values that are not listed are rejected by the analog module. Each parameter data record is checked by the analog module. If an incorrect parameter is detected, the complete data record is discarded and the parameters of the analog module remain unchanged. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 47 Parameter data records 9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters 9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters Structure of data record 128 Data record 128 has a length of 42 bytes and contains the channel/technology parameters of all four channels (10 bytes per channel). The parameters are divided into parameters that influence the actual analog value acquisition, diagnostic enables, and basic parameters of HART communication. You can use data records 131 to 134 to assign and change additional parameters and HARTspecific settings. See section HART-specific settings (Page 57). +HDGHULQIRUPDWLRQ %\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH +$57 &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV %\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH +$57 &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV %\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH +$57 &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV %\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH +$57 &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV %\WH Figure 9-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. %\WH 0LQRUYHUVLRQ 0DMRUYHUVLRQ %\WH Figure 9-2 /HQJWKRISDUDPHWHUGDWDSHUFKDQQHO E\WHV Header information Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. 48 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Parameter data records 9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters All unused bits and the bits or bytes marked with "reserved" must be set to zero. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1" or the appropriate value. %\WH[ %\WH[ %\WH[ %\WH[ 0HDVXULQJW\SH &KDQQHOGLVDEOHG &XUUHQW ZLUH 0HDVXULQJUDQJH P$ P$ZLWK+$57FRPPXQLFDWLRQ 5HVHUYHG 6PRRWKLQJ QRQH ZHDN PHGLXP VWURQJ ,QWHUIHUHQFHIUHTXHQF\VXSSUHVVLRQ +] +] +] %\WH[ :LUHEUHDNWKUHVKROG P$ P$ %\WH[ %\WH[ 5HVHUYHG (QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFV 1RVXSSO\YROWDJH/ (QFRGHUVXSSO\ :LUHEUHDN 8QGHUIORZ 2YHUIORZ %\WH[ (QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFV +$57GLDJQRVWLFV Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 49 Parameter data records 9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters %\WH[ %\WH[ 1XPEHURI+$57SUHDPEOHE\WHV GHIDXOW 1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHV LQWHUQDOO\OLPLWHGWRPD[LPXP GHIDXOW * x = 2 + (channel number * 10); with channel number 0 ....3 Figure 9-3 Structure of bytes x to x+39 for channels 0 to 3 50 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Parameter data records 9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters 9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters Structure of data record 140 Data block 140 has a total length of 12 bytes. Using the parameters of data record 140, you can configure/map up to four HART variables of the individual channels in the input address space of the module if the corresponding configuration is selected, see "Configuring (Page 33)". Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH Figure 9-4 9HUVLRQ %ORFNOHQJWK E\WHV %ORFNW\SH 5HVHUYHG Header information Parameters The following figure shows the parameter assignment of the four HART variables 0...3. %\WH[ %\WH[ &KDQQHOQXPEHU 9DULDEOHPDUNLQJ QRQ 3ULPDU\ 6HFRQGDU\ 7HUWLDU\ 4XDUWHQDU\ &L5 * x = 4 + (HART variable * 2); with HART variable 0....3 Figure 9-5 Parameters Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 51 Parameter data records 9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters Note Memory area Allocation of the memory area based on the configuration of the HART variables: All four HART variables are set to 0 = "none": No memory area is reserved/allocated for HART variables in the input address range. As least one HART variable is set to not equal to 0 = "none": The entire memory area always allocated to the four HART variables in the input address space. All remaining HART variables are preset to 15 = "CiR" and 0 = "none" is no longer allowed. 52 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 10 HART operating data records Reading/writing data in RUN HART operating data records are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and read from the module with the "RDREC" instruction. Errors during the transfer are indicated at output parameter STATUS of the "WRREC" or "RDREC". The following HART operating data records are available: Data record number Description Length (bytes) Writable Readable 80 HART request Channel 0 240 Yes Yes 81 HART response Channel 0 240 No Yes 80 HART request Channel 1 240 Yes Yes 81 HART response Channel 1 240 No Yes 80 HART request Channel 2 240 Yes Yes 81 HART response Channel 2 240 No Yes 80 HART request Channel 3 240 Yes Yes 81 HART response Channel 3 240 No Yes 121 HART variables 80 No Yes 131 HART parameters Channel 0 8 Yes Yes 132 HART parameters Channel 1 8 Yes Yes 133 HART parameters Channel 2 8 Yes Yes 134 HART parameters Channel 3 8 Yes Yes 148 HART directory 17 No Yes 149 HART feature data 3 No Yes Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 53 HART operating data records 10.1 HART directory 10.1 HART directory Structure of the HART directory Byte Meaning Comment 0 Profile Revision Number = 2, 0 (Revision 2.0) 2 Index of Client Management = 255 (not relevant) 3 Number of Clients =1 4 Number of Channels =4 5 Write Read Index Offset = 1 (The response to a request data record is made with the data record number of the request data record + 1) 6 Index of HMD Feature Parameter = 149 7 Index of HMD Module Parameter = 255 (not relevant) 1 54 8 Start Index of Burst Buffer Area = 255 (not relevant) 9+n Index of HMD Channel Parameter (Channel n) = 131+n 9+n+4 Index of HART Client Channel Message Data = 80+(2*n) The HART request data records cannot be configured. Data records starting from data record number 80 (80, 82, 84, 86) are used. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART operating data records 10.2 HART feature data 10.2 HART feature data Structure of the HART feature data Byte Meaning Comment 0 Byte 0 = 0x62 Bit1 = 1: "Parameter check result is given with a read response" Bit5 = 1: "Compact format is supported" 1 Byte 1 2 Max Length Da = 240 (maximum length of the HART request data records) ta Unit Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC =0 55 HART operating data records 10.3 HART variable data record 10.3 HART variable data record The AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module supports a maximum of 4 HART variables per channel that are read cyclically, provided this is supported by the connected field device. These 16 HART variables are are made available in a readable manner in HART variable data record 121. Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte real value and a quality code byte. See section 4.4.1 "Quality code". Structure of the HART variable data record Byte Meaning Channel 0 0...3 Value 4 Quality code 5...8 Value 9 Quality code 10...13 Value 14 Quality code 15...18 Value 19 Quality code Primary Variable (PV) Secondary Variable (SV) Tertiary (TV) Quartenary (QV) Channel 1 20...39 HART variables same as for Channel 0 Channel 2 40...59 HART variables same as for Channel 0 Channel 3 60...79 HART variables same as for Channel 0 If HART is not enabled or the respective HART variable is not supplied from the connected field device, the corresponding variable = 0 and the QC = 0x37 (initialization value from the analog module). 56 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART operating data records 10.4 HART-specific settings 10.4 HART-specific settings The HART communication is available using standard parameter assignment (see section 9.1 "Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters"). Additional HART-specific settings can be specified on a channel-specific basis using data records 131 to 134. The parameters assigned with STEP 7 are not changed permanently in the CPU, which means the parameters assigned with STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Each parameter reassignment of the analog module resets the HART-specific settings back to the initial values from parameter data record 128. Where there is no supply voltage L+, the module does not assume the HART-specific settings. Channel Data record number 0 131 1 132 2 133 3 134 Structure of the HART-specific settings %\WH 0XVWEH %LWLVUHVHWDIWHUHYDOXDWLRQRIGDWDUHFRUGE\ PRGXOH %\WH 0XVWEH 2IIVHWIRUPDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFSDUDPHWHUVDFFRUGLQJ WR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ 1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHV LQWHUQDOO\OLPLWHGWR ,QLWLDOYDOXHIURPSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG 1XPEHURI+$57SUHDPEOHE\WHV ,QLWLDOYDOXHIURPSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG 0XVWEH )LHOGGHYLFHPRGHDFFRUGLQJWR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ &OLHQWWLPHRXWLQV V ,QLWLDOYDOXH V %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH (QDEOH+$57 'LVDEOH+$57 3ULPDU\PDVWHU 6HFRQGDU\PDVWHU %\WH 0XVWEH Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC ,QLWLDOYDOXHDFFRUGLQJWR+$57 DFWLYDWLRQIURP SDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG $OZD\VDVSULPDU\PDVWHU 5HVHUYHG 57 HART operating data records 10.4 HART-specific settings Figure 10-1 Settings * When the number of HART preamble bytes = 0, the number of preamble bytes required by the connected field device are used, but no fewer than 5. When the number of HART preamble bytes = 255, then 20 preamble bytes are used. 58 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART operating data records 10.5 HART request and response data records 10.5 HART request and response data records HART commands are processed on a channel-specific basis via a separate command interface with one request data record and one response data record in each case. Channel Data record number Request to the field device Response from the field device 0 80 81 1 82 83 2 84 85 3 86 87 Structure of request data records 80, 82, 84, 86 Byte Meaning 0 Request control 1 Number of preamble bytes 2...239 Communication data according to HART specifi cation Comment 5....20, 255 Coding "Request control": Bit 0...1: Bit 2: Bit 3...4: Bit 5: Bit 6: Bit 7: Reserved = 0 0 = Parameters are not checked Reserved = 0 0 = Transparent format * 1 = Compact format 1 = Enable SHC mode ** 0 = HART Request * HART commands are processed by the analog module in transparent message format and in compact message format. However, the response data from the module is always made available in transparent message format. ** Processing of a sequence of HART commands as an SHC sequence affects all other channels with HART enabled. See section 4.3 "HART command interface", SHC sequence. Note When "Number of Preamble Bytes" = 255, the number of preambles set with the parameters is used. The default setting is five. You can re-configure the number of preamble bytes using the parameters and HART-specific settings (see section HART-specific settings (Page 57)). Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 59 HART operating data records 10.5 HART request and response data records Structure of response data records 81, 83, 85, 87 In case of response error Byte Meaning 0 Response control 1 HART group error display Comment 2 Protocol error 3...239 Response data according to HART specifica Only present when "Response result" = 6 tion = "Error, with data" In case of response error Byte Meaning Comment 0 Response control 1 HART group error display 2...239 Response data according to HART specifica Only present when "Response result" = 4 tion = "Successful, with data" Coding "Response control": Bits 0-2: Response result (processing status) 0 = Inactive 1 = Inactive (reserved) 2 = Waiting 3 = Waiting, executing 4 = Successful, with data 5 = Successful, without data 6 = Error, with data 7 = Error, without data 0 = Burst mode not active; 0 = Response data come directly from the HART device 0 = Response data in transparent message for mat 0 = SHC mode not active 1 = SHC mode active 0 = HART response Bit 3: Bit 4: Bit 5: Bit 6: Bit 7: Coding "HART group error display" 60 Bit number Meaning Explanation 0 Additional status information available (2nd HART status byte) You obtain additional status in formation, if required, with HART command 48. 1 HART communication error The field device has detected a communication error when receiving the command. The error information can be found in the 1st HART status byte. 2 Parameter check 0: HMD parameters unchanged 1: Check HMD parameters Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART operating data records 10.5 HART request and response data records Bit number Meaning Explanation 3 Reserved Always 0 4...7 HART protocol error during response 0: Unspecified error 1: HMD error 2: Channel fault 3: Command error 4: Query error 5: Response error 6: Query rejected 7: Profile query rejected 8: Manufacturer-specific query rejected 9 - 15: Not used Coding "HART protocol error during response" HART proto Meaning col error dur ing response Explanation 0 Unspecified error Always 0 1 HMD error 0: Not specified 1: Internal communication error 2: Parameter assignment error 3: HW fault 4: Wait time expired 5: HART timer expired 6...127: Reserved 128...255: Manufacturer-specific 2 Channel fault 0: Not specified 1: Line fault 2: Short-circuit 3: Open line 4: Low current output 5: Parameter assignment error 6...127: Reserved 128...255: Manufacturer-specific 3 Command error 0-127: HART protocol, Bit 7 = Always 0 4 Query error Bit 0 = 0: Reserved Bit 1 = 1: Receive buffer overflow Bit 2 = 0: Reserved Bit 3 = 1: Checksum error Bit 4 = 1: Framing error Bit 5 = 1: Overflow error Bit 6 = 1: Parity error Bit 7 = 1: Reserved Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 61 HART operating data records 10.5 HART request and response data records HART proto Meaning col error dur ing response Explanation 5 Bit 0 = 1: GAP timeout Response error Bit 1 = 1: Receive buffer overflow Bit 2 = 1: Timeout Bit 3 = 1: Checksum error Bit 4 = 1: Framing error Bit 5 = 1: Overflow error Bit 6 = 1: Parity error Bit 7 = 1: Reserved 6 Query rejected 0: Unspecified 1: Compact format not supported 2: SHC not supported 3: Impermissible command 4: No resources 5...127: Reserved 128...255: Manufacturer-specific 7 Profile query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported) 8 Manufacturer-specific query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported) Example of HART programming (HART command interface) For HART channel 0, the command 01 is to be sent in transparent message format to the HART field device with address "98 CF 38 84 F0". A positive edge at input 4.0 of a digital input module leads to the writing of the HART command. The following assumptions are made: The module address of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART analog module is 512 (200H). The data record is stored in DB80: starting from address 0.0, length of 11 bytes. In this example, DB80 (request data record for channel 0) consists of 11 bytes. STL Explanation A I 4.0 FP M 101.0 = M 104.0 m2: CALL SFC 58 11 62 REQ :=M104.0 Write request IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address RECNUM :=B#16#50 Data record number 80 RECORD :=P#DB80.DBX0.0 BYTE Data record with length of 11 bytes (must correspond to the exact length that is to be transferred) Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART operating data records 10.5 HART request and response data records RET_VAL :=MW93 RET_VAL of SFC 58 (OK/error/...) BUSY :=M51.0 Write operation not yet completed A M 51.0 SPB m2 BE Table 10-1 DB80: Transparent message format Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex) 0 00 Req_Control (00 = Transparent message format. 40 = Transparent message format with SHC sequence) 1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14) 2 82 Start character (02 = Short Frame with command 0) (82 = Long Frame with other commands) 3 98 4 CF 5 38 Address (with command 0, the address is exactly 1 byte long and has the value 0.) 6 84 7 F0 8 01 Command (CMD) 9 00 Length in bytes 10 98 Checksum (CHK) (calculated starting from byte 2 "Start character" up to the next to last byte) A HART command can also be sent in compact message format. In this case, the data that is transferred via DB 80 is reduced to 4 bytes. Table 10-2 DB80: Compact message format Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex) 0 20 Req_Control (20 = Compact message format. 60 = Compact message format with SHC sequence) 1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14) 2 01 Command (CMD) 3 00 Length in bytes You can learn when the response from the field device was received by cyclically reading data record DS81 for HART channel 0. The response is always supplied in transparent message format. Table 10-3 FC81: Reading of the response to DB81 with SFC 59 STL Explanation m3: CALL SFC 59 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 63 HART operating data records 10.5 HART request and response data records REQ :=1 Read request IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address of the HART-AI RECNUM :=B#16#51 Data record number 81 RECORD :=P#DB81.DBX0.0 BYTE Data record RET_VAL :=MW100 RET_VAL of SFC 59 (OK/error/...) BUSY :=M49.1 Read operation not yet completed 75 A M 49.1 SPB m3 BE The program part A M 49.1 to SPB m3 is only required if reading is to occur synchronously. As long as "0x03" is in byte 0 of DB81, the response has not been received from the field device. Positive response data that you can evaluate is available from the field device as soon as bit 2 = 1 in byte 0. If there are errors in the response data, see the "HART group fault display" tables in byte 1 or "HART protocol error during response" in byte 2 of the field device response. 64 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 11 Analog value representation Table 11-1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign 16 Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Representation / Value range The table below contains the decimal and hexadecimal values (codings) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table 11-2 Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA / 4...20 mA HART Values Dec. Current measuring range Hex. Range 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF > 22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 16 mA 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 4 mA -1 FFFF -4864 ED00 1.185 mA -32768 8000 < 1.185 mA Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Underrange Underflow 65 Analog value representation 11.1 Representation of input ranges 11.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table 11-3 Bipolar input ranges Dec. value Measured val Data word ue in % Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 11-4 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Dec. value Measured val ue in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 66 Underflow Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Analog value representation 11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges 11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table 11-5 Current measuring range 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -15 mA -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -23.52 mA -32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Table 11-6 Underrange Underflow Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range 20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF Underrange -4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA -32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow * For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here. Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 67 Analog value representation 11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges 68 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC Index A Address assignment, 22 Address space, 34 AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Accessories, 10 Address space, 34 Channel parameters, 25 Commissioning, 19 Configuration, 19 Diagnostic alarm, 40 Diagnostic interrupt, 39 Functions, 9 Measuring ranges, 28 Parameters, 25 Properties, 9 Technical specifications, 43 Technology parameters, 25 Terminal assignment, 11 Device status, 16 DIAG LED, 38 Diagnostic alarm, 40 Diagnostic interrupt, 39 Documentation Validity, 3 E Error displays, 37 Error management, 19 F Fast mode, 17 Feature data, 55 Field devices Parameter reassignment, 19 H B BaseUnit, 11 Burst mode, 17 C Channel fault LED, 37 Channel parameters, 25, 48 Channel status LED, 37 Command interface, 20, 59 Commissioning, 19 Communication, 57 Configuration, 19 HART variable, 22 Conventions, 3 D Data record 128, 48 Header information, 48 Parameters, 48 Data record 140, 51 Header information, 51 Parameters, 51 Data records, 20 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC HART Applications, 13 Command, 59 Command interface, 20, 62 Commands, 15 Communication, 14, 57 Definition, 13 Device status, 16 Directory, 54 Error management, 19 Evaluating variables, 35 Fast mode, 17 Feature data, 55 Mapping parameters, 30 Operating data records, 53 Parameter assignment tool, 18 Principle of operation, 14 Programming, 62 Protocol, 13, 16 Settings, 57 Signal, 14 System environment, 18 Variable data record, 56 Variables, 22 HART variables Configuring, 22 HCF, 13 69 Index Terminal assignment, 11 I Interference frequency suppression, 26, 29 L V Value status Evaluating, 35 Variable data record, 56 LED displays, 37 M Mapping parameters, 30, 51 Measuring range, 28 O Operating data records, 53 P Parameter reassignment, 19 Parameters, 25 PWR LED, 38 Q Quality code, 22 Revision 5, 23 Revision 7, 24 R Request data record, 59 Response data record, 60 Reverse polarity, 12 S SHC sequence, 21 SIMATIC PDM configuration tool, 18 Smoothing, 26, 28 Status indications, 37 Supply voltage, 12 System environment, 18 T Technology parameters, 25, 48 70 Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 09/2018 A5E03573289-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03573289-AE 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: In the "Technical specifications" section, the operational and basic error limits for thermocouple type C have changed. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................17 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................21 4.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................27 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 Scalable measuring range ......................................................................................................32 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................34 Evaluating data record 235 .....................................................................................................35 4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................38 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 39 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................39 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................41 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................43 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 45 6.1 A Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................45 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 53 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................53 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................59 A.3 Errors when transferring the data record ................................................................................67 A.4 Switchable wire break check ..................................................................................................68 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 69 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................70 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................71 B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors ................................................72 B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors ...........................................................73 B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples ..............................................................76 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 5 Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 7 Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 9 Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 4 inputs Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign Voltage measurement type can be set per channel Resistor measurement type can be set per channel Thermal resistor (RTD) measurement type can be set per channel Thermocouple (TC) measurement type can be set per channel Configurable diagnostics for each channel Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits per channel) Automatic compensation of the line resistance with 3-wire connection The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V11, SP2 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0024 with HSP 0227 V1.0 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V11, SP2 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0024 with HSP 0227 V1.0 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or higher V11, SP2 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0024 with HSP 0227 V1.0 or higher X X Value status (PROFINET IO only) FS01 V1.1.0 or higher V12, SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0057 with HSP 0227 V2.0 or higher X X Calibration in runtime FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Scalable measuring range FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V2.0 or higher X X Selectable conductor resistance for 2-wire connection FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Switchable wire break check FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with a GSD file. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connection See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF module with the terminal assignments. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. * When using floating sensors, bridge the m- connections and connect to ground / FE. This increases the immunity of the module. Bridging and connecting are not necessary for disabled and disconnected inputs. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 2-wire connection for thermocouples and 4-, 3-, 2-wire connection of resistance-type sensors or thermal resistors (RTD) The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram 2-wire connection of thermocouple / voltage connection Mn- Measuring line negative, channel n 4-, 3-, 2-wire connection of resistance-type sensors or thermal resistors (RTD) ICn+ Constant current line positive, channel n ICn- Constant current line negative, channel n Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Constant current power supply DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) Multiplexer .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only Filter connection supply voltage (available with light-colored BaseUnit only) F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red) Mn+ Measuring line positive, channel n Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) Figure 3-1 Connection and block diagram for connection of thermocouples and resistance-type sensors or thermal resistors (RTD) Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The following table describes the measuring range and the temperature coefficients you can configure for each measurement type: Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Deactivated - Voltage 50 mV / 80 mV / 250 mV / 1 V - Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC - Resistor (2-, 3-, 4-wire connection) 150 / 300 / 600 / 3 k / 6 k - Thermal resistor RTD (3-wire connection) Climatic / Standard Cu 0.004271 Thermal resistor RTD (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Climatic / Standard Cu 10 Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Climatic / Standard Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 200 Ni 500 Ni 1000 Climatic2 / Standard2 Pt 0.00385 / Pt 0.003916 / Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.00392 / Pt 0.00385055 Ni 0.00618 / Ni 0.00672 Ni 0.005 Ni 1000 Thermocouple (TC) Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, U, TXK (acc. to GOST) 1 The preset temperature coefficients are valid for Europe. 2 For sensors LG-Ni 1000 from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stafa). - Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Special features when using Cu10 sensors Choose "Thermal resistor (3-wire connection)" and "Cu10" in the parameter assignment. Wire the Cu10 sensor into the 3-wire connection technology. During operation, automatic, internal compensation of the line resistance of the missing measuring line takes place. Note To ensure optimum line compensation with Cu10, please observe the following: * An accurate measured value is only attained if the cable resistance of the positive constant current line to the Cu10 sensor and the cable resistance of the negative measuring line are identical in value. * Recommendation: Keep the measuring line as short as possible. * Different resistance values may also occur due to the connection method used. Special features when using PTC resistors PTCs are suitable for monitoring temperature and/or as thermal protection devices of complex drives or transformer windings. Choose "Thermal resistor (2-wire)" and "PTC" in the parameter assignment. Connect the PTC to the 2-wire connection technology. Use the PTC resistors, type A (PTC thermistor) in accordance with DIN/VDE 0660, part 302. If "Underflow" diagnostic is enabled, a "Low limit violated" diagnostic is generated for resistance values < 18 , indicating a short-circuit. Sensor data for the PTC resistor: Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Table 4- 2 Using PTC resistors Property Switching points Technical specifications Comment Behavior with rising temperature < 550 Normal range: * 550 to 1650 Prewarning range: * > 1650 SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) Response range: * SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) Behavior with falling temperature > 750 Response range: * 750 to 540 Prewarning range: * < 540 SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) Normal range: * SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) Reaction to short-circuit 1 < 18 * (RRT-5) C Max. 550 (RRT+5) C min. 1330 TNF = Rated response temperature of the sensor (according to DIN/VDE 0660) (RRT+15) C min. 4000 Measuring voltage/ voltage at the PTC Max. 7.5 V1 SIMATIC S7: Bit 7 (IB x+1) = "1", Bit 0 = "0" and Bit 2 = "0" Below 23 k Assignment in the process image input (PII) with SIMATIC S7 Figure 4-1 Assignment in the process image input (PII) Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 19 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Notes on programming Bits 0+2 are relevant for evaluation in the process image input. You can monitor, for example, the temperature of a motor using bits 0+2. Bits 0+2 in the process image input cannot be saved. During parameter assignment, take into consideration that a motor, for example, starts up in a controlled manner (via an acknowledgment). Bits 0+2 can never be set at the same time; they are set one after the other. NOTICE No measurement is possible in the following cases: * When I/O modules are pulled out * When supply voltage to the I/O module fails * When there is a wire break or short-circuit in the measuring lines Therefore, always evaluate the diagnostics entries of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF for safety reasons. Example The diagram shows the temperature curve and the associated switching points. Figure 4-2 Temperature curve with prewarning range See also Technical specifications (Page 45) Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 59). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 3 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: * Missing supply voltage * L+ Diagnostics: Reference junction Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Diagnostics: Wire break Disable GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Channel 1 Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Channel Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Type/range of measurement * Deactivated * Voltage 50 mV * Voltage 80 mV * Voltage 250 mV * Voltage 1 V GSD file PROFIBUS DP Thermal resistor (4- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Resistor (2-, 3-, 4-wire connection) * 150 * 300 * 600 * 3 k * 6 k Type/range of measurement Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC Thermal resistor (4- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Type/range of measurement Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Thermal resistor (4- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel * Pt 100 climatic range * Pt 200 climatic range * Pt 500 climatic range * Pt 1000 climatic range Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) * Pt 100 standard range * Pt 200 standard range * Pt 500 standard range * Pt 1000 standard range Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Type/range of measurement Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) * Ni 100 climatic range * Ni 120 climatic range * Ni 200 climatic range * Ni 500 climatic range * Ni 1000 climatic range GSD file PROFIBUS DP Thermal resistor (4- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Thermal resistor (4- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Type/range of measurement * Ni 100 standard range * Ni 120 standard range * Ni 200 standard range * Ni 500 standard range * Ni 1000 standard range Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) * LG Ni 1000 climatic range Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) * LG Ni 1000 standard range Thermal resistor (3-wire connection) * Cu 10 climatic range * Cu 10 standard range Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 23 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Type/range of measurement Temperature coefficient Temperature unit Reference junction 5 Thermocouple * Type B (PtRh-PtRh) * Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) * Type E (NiCr-CuNi) * Type R (PtRh-Pt) * Type S (PtRh-Pt) * Type J (Fe-CuNi) * Type L (Fe-CuNi) * Type T (Cu-CuNi) * Type K (NiCr-NiAl) * Type U (Cu-CuNi) * Type C (WRe-WRe) * Type TXK * Pt 0.00385055 * Pt 0.003916 * Pt 0.003902 * Pt 0.00392 * Pt 0.00385 * Ni 0.00618 * Ni 0.00672 * LG-Ni 0.005 * Cu 0.00427 * Degrees Celsius * Degrees Fahrenheit * Kelvin * No reference channel mode * Reference channel of the module * Internal reference junction * Reference channel of group 0 to 3 * Fixed reference temperature GSD file PROFIBUS DP Thermal resistor (4- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Pt 0.00385055 Yes Channel Channel Degrees Celsius Yes Channel Module No reference channel mode Yes Channel Channel Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Smoothing Interference frequency suppression 3) 4) Scalable measuring range * None * Weak * Medium * Strong * 60 Hz * 50 * 16.6 Hz * Disable * Enable Measuring range reso- * lution * GSD file PROFIBUS DP None Yes Channel Channel 50 Hz Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel - 2 decimal places Yes Channel - 0 Yes Channel - 0 Yes Channel - Disable Yes Channel - Hz2 2 decimal places 3 decimal places Measuring range center * Conductor resistance 6 0 to 50000 m Hardware interrupt high limit 1 4 * Disable * Enable * Value 8500 Yes Channel - Disable Disable Yes Channel - High limit 4 Value within the nominal range of the measuring range Hardware interrupt low * limit 1 4 * Enable Low limit 1 4 * Value -2000 Yes Channel - Hardware interrupt high limit 2 4 * Disable Disable Yes Channel - * Enable * Value 8500 Yes Channel - Disable Disable Yes Channel - High limit 2 4 Hardware interrupt low * limit 2 4 * Enable Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 25 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Low limit 2 4 * Value -2000 Yes Potential group * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) Use potential group No of the left module * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) GSD file PROFIBUS DP Channel - Module Module 1 Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+: Detection per module or alarm per channel 2 Interference frequency suppression: Interfering signals at 400 Hz are automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 3 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter. 4 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 13 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter with data record 128, see Appendix "Parameter data record". 5 Only for configuration with PROFIBUS GSD file: The set reference junction is used with the additional parameter "Kx Reference junction activated" in the case of "Enable". In the case of "Disable", "No reference channel mode" is used for RTD and "Fixed reference temperature" is used for TC. 6 For 2-wire connection only Note Unused channels "Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Reference junction Enabling of the reference junction diagnostics if the reference temperature of the reference junction needs to be determined for the TC channel being operated. Reference junction using the PROFINET GSD file A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the TC measurement, if this has the parameter setting "Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic range Degrees Celsius". A possible parameter assignment is represented below: Table 4- 4 RTD channel Setting Description No reference channel mode The temperature value at channel 0 can be used as a reference value for the entire module. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a transmitter for the reference junction temperature of a group. The distribution is performed via the interface module. Table 4- 5 TC channel Setting Description Reference channel of the module The corresponding TC channel uses channel 0 of the same module as the reference junction temperature. This must be configured as "Thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic range Degrees Celsius" and "No reference channel mode"; otherwise, Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered. Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group. Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 C. As a result, no temperature compensation is performed. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 27 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Note Shared Device and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" If the transmitter and receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, then both IO controllers must be performing data exchange with the IO device to ensure error-free operation of the temperature compensation. Reference junction using the PROFIBUS GSD file A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the TC measurement, if this has the parameter setting "Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic range Degrees Celsius". The set temperature unit (e.g. Degrees Celsius) is valid for the entire module with temperature compensation "Reference channel of the module" and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3". Table 4- 6 RTD channel Setting Description No reference channel mode The temperature value at channel 0 can be used as a reference value for the entire module. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a transmitter for the reference junction temperature of a group. The distribution is performed via the interface module. Setting Description Channel x Reference junction activated * Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting "No reference channel mode". * Enable: Channel x is configured with the setting selected above. Table 4- 7 TC channel Setting Description Reference channel of the module The corresponding TC channel uses channel 0 of the same module as the reference junction temperature. This must be configured as "Thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic range Degrees Celsius" and "No reference channel mode"; otherwise, Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered. Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group. Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 C. As a result, no temperature compensation is performed. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Setting Description Channel x Reference junction activated * Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting "Fixed reference temperature". * Enable: Channel x is configured with the setting selected above. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics if the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is insufficient for measurement at the correspondingly assigned input. Type/range of measurement See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 17). Temperature coefficient The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. In Europe, only one value is used per sensor type (default value). The temperature coefficient ( value) indicates by how much the resistance of a specific material changes relatively if the temperature increases by 1 C. The other values facilitate a sensor-specific setting of the temperature coefficient and enhance accuracy. Temperature unit Selection between Degrees Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin as the temperature unit for the selected measuring range. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 29 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed using filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This specification is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-3 Smoothing for AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interferences affecting analog input modules that are caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network is likely to have a negative effect on measured values particularly with measurement in the low voltage range and on thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Measuring range resolution Parameters for the measurement type thermal resistor standard and thermocouple. Allows you to increase the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places for a configurable section of the measuring range. See the Scalable measuring range (Page 32) section. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Measuring range center Determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned. The value must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It is specified in integers. Maximum / Minimum Corresponds to overflow / underflow for the scalable measuring range. Conductor resistance Parameters for the measurement types resistor and thermal resistor (2-wire connection). Used to compensate for the conductor resistance without having to interfere with the sensor wiring. If the "Conductor resistor" parameter is configured higher than a value 0 m, the module then automatically uses the factory calibration data. Hardware interrupt enable Enabling of a hardware interrupt if the high limit 1/2 or the low limit 1/2 is violated. Low limit 1/2 Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated. High limit 1/2 Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 31 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4 Scalable measuring range Introduction The scalable measuring range is available for the temperature measuring ranges of thermal resistors (RTD) standard and thermocouples. The measuring ranges for voltage, resistor and thermal resistor climatic are not supported. The scalable measuring range is valid for the following ranges: Nominal range Underrange Overrange Function The scalable measuring range is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the module. It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable section. The "Measuring range resolution" parameter determines the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places. The "Measuring range center" parameter determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned. Value ranges Table 4- 8 Value ranges Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Values hex. 2 decimal places 3 decimal places Overflow >325.11 >32.511 7FFFH High limit 325.11 32.511 7EFFH Measuring range center 0 0 0H Low limit -325.12 -32.512 8100H Underflow <-325.12 <-32.512 8000H To obtain an absolute temperature, the measuring range center in the application program (as offset) must be calculated with the value of the user data of the scalable measuring range. The measuring range center is always output in the user data as the value "0". The user data are correspondingly mapped to the bipolar input ranges in S7 format. Underflow / overflow is also formed in accordance with the limits of S7. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Rules The measuring range center must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It is specified in integers. The scalable measuring range is spanned symmetrically over the measuring range center. Depending on the resolution, various value ranges result (, ). The scalable measuring range is limited by underflow and overflow of the underlying measuring range: - It is clipped at the underflow when it falls below the limit. - It is clipped at the overflow when it exceeds the limit (). Example The following example illustrates the effect of scalable measuring ranges: Scalable measuring range with 2 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format Scalable measuring range with 3 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format Scalable measuring range which is cut off at the overflow of the underlying measuring range (clipping) Figure 4-4 Examples of scalable measuring ranges Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 33 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4.1 Configuration Requirement You must select a valid temperature measuring range for configuration. Configuration The function is activated using the "Scalable measuring range" parameter. The following figure shows an example of a configuration in STEP 7: Figure 4-5 Configuration for the scalable measuring range Reference You will find more information on the configuration in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235 Evaluation in the user program In the user program, you can evaluate the status and the limits of the scalable measuring range with data record 235, which may result by reaching underflow/overflow. Structure of data record 235 Figure 4-6 Structure of data record 235 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure 4-7 Header information of data record 235 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 35 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameter. If the corresponding bit is set to "1", the parameter is activated. * x = 2 + (channel number x 8) Figure 4-8 Structure of data record 235 - channel parameter byte x to x+7 Description of the parameters Table 4- 9 Description of the parameters from data record 235 Parameter Description Scalable measuring range enabled 1 = Function is active for this channel. Clipping 1 = Scalable measuring range cut off at the overflow / underflow of the underlying measuring range (see Figure (Page 33)). Resolution 2 or 3 decimal places Measuring range center Temperature in whole C / F / K ("working point" for the scaling) Overflow/underflow Limits of the scalable measuring range Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Example The following example shows the values for a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard, C: Table 4- 10 Example of a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard Hex. value Dec. value Evaluation of data record 235 00H 0 V0.0 08H 8 8 bytes 03H 3 Scalable measuring range active and clipped (clipping) 02H 2 Resolution: 2 decimal places 02EEH 750 Measuring range center: 750 C 61A8H 25000 Overflow (Maximum): 250.00 + 750 = 1000.00 C Scalable measuring range is clipped at the overflow. 8100H -32512 Underflow (Minimum): -325.12 + 750 = 424.88 C Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 37 Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space 4.5 Address space Address space of the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-9 Address space AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF with value status Configuration options of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status (as of firmware version V1.01) An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog module. Bit 0 to 3 in this byte is assigned to one channel and provides information on the validity of the analog value (0 = value is incorrect). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF: DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 43). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 39 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Channel status/channel error LED Table 5- 2 Status and error display of the LED channel status / channel error LEDs Meaning Channel status Channel error Off Off Channel deactivated Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On Not permitted (error) On On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 Violation of high limit 1 Violation of low limit 2 Violation of high limit 2 You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 5-2 OB start information Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 41 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI (User Structure Identifier) W#16#0001 additional interrupt information for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 to 3 of the I/O module 1 B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1 B#16#04 Violation of high limit 1 B#16#05 Violation of low limit 2 B#16#06 Violation of high limit 2 Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#03 Event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Event Diagnostic error interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupt lost Reference channel error Error Violation of low limit Violation of high limit Wire break Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Remedy Wire break 6H Resistance of sensor circuit too high Use a different sensor type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate diagnostics * Connect or deactivate the channel Violation of high limit1 7H Value lies above the overrange. Wire break2 Correct module/sensor interplay See Wire break Violation of low limit1 8H Value lies below the underrange. Correct module/sensor interplay Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Correct the configuration (comparison of preset and actual setup). * Correct the parameter assignment (diagnostics wire break set only with the permitted measuring ranges). Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Check BaseUnit type * Select correct reference junction through parameter assignment3 * Check whether the reference junction (reference channel of the group 0, 1, 2, 3) is only assigned once as the sender in the entire setup. Supply voltage missing Reference channel error (reference junction) 11H 15H Reference temperature of the reference junction for the TC channel being operated with compensation is invalid. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 43 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Hardware interrupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not Correct the program or the process be reported because there were too many pending hardware interrupts. Channel temporarily unavailable 1FH * * Remedy Firmware update in progress or update has been canceled. The module does not read any process values in this state. * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. * Complete calibration. The channel is currently being calibrated. 1 The alarm refers to the diagnostics and depends on the configured measuring range. 2 For resistor and thermal resistor measuring ranges with deactivated diagnostics for "wire break", this is reported by the "Violation of high limit" diagnostic. 3 Shared Device and diagnostics "Reference temperature": If the sender and receiver of the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, you may need to download both configurations again in the case of diagnostics. First download the configuration containing the receiver. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 General information Product type designation AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V12 SP1 / V13 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / V5.5 SP4 * PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * Oversampling No * MSI No CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN Yes Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 45 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 35 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.75 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 4 * For voltage measurement 4 * For resistance/resistance thermometer measurement 4 * For thermocouple measurement 4 permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit), max. 30 V Constant measurement current for resistancetype transmitter, typ. 0.7 mA; 1.7 mA for Cu10 sensors Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional processing times (depending on the parameterization of the active channels); for line compensation in case of a three-wire connection, an additional cycle is necessary Technical unit for temperature measurement adjustable Yes; C/F/K Input ranges (rated values), voltages * -1 V to +1 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 1 M * -250 mV to +250 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-250 mV to +250 mV) 1 M * -50 mV to +50 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-50 mV to +50 mV) 1 M * -80 mV to +80 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-80 mV to +80 mV) 1 M Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Input ranges (rated values), thermocouples * Type B Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type B) 1 M * Type C Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type C) 1 M * Type E Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type E) 1 M * Type J Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (type J) 1 M * Type K Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type K) 1 M * Type L Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type L) 1 M * Type N Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type N) 1 M * Type R Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type R) 1 M * Type S Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type S) 1 M * Type T Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type T) 1 M * Type U Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type U) 1 M * Type TXK/TXK(L) to GOST Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type TXK/TXK(L) to GOST) 1 M Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 47 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometer * Cu 10 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Cu 10) 1 M * Ni 100 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 100) 1 M * Ni 1000 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 1000) 1 M * LG-Ni 1000 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (LG-Ni 1000) 1 M * Ni 120 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 120) 1 M * Ni 200 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 200) 1 M * Ni 500 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 500) 1 M * Pt 100 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 100) 1 M * Pt 1000 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 1000) 1 M * Pt 200 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 200) 1 M * Pt 500 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 500) 1 M Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Input ranges (rated values), resistors * 0 to 150 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 150 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 300 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 300 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 600 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 600 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 3000 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 3000 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 6000 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 6000 ohms) 1 M * PTC Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (PTC) 1 M Thermocouple (TC) Temperature compensation - parameterizable Yes - Reference channel of the module Yes - internal comparison point Yes; with BaseUnit type A1 - Reference channel of the group Yes - Number of reference channel groups 4; Group 0 to 3 - fixed reference temperature Yes Cable length * shielded, max. Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle 200 m; 50 m with thermocouples integrating (Sigma-Delta) Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Basic conversion time, including integration time (ms) - additional processing time for wirebreak check 2 ms; In the ranges resistance thermometers, resistors and thermocouples - additional power line wire-break check 2 ms; for 3/4 wire transducer (resistance thermometer and resistor) 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz * Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 49 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times * parameterizable Yes Encoder Connection of signal encoders * for voltage measurement Yes * for resistance measurement with two-wire connection Yes * for resistance measurement with three-wire Yes connection * for resistance measurement with four-wire connection Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 %; 0.1 % for resistance thermometers and resistance Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.0009 %/K; 0.005 % / K at thermocouple ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.05 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.1 % * Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.1 % Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.05 % * Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.05 % Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 70 dB * Common mode voltage, max. 10 V * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 50 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes; two upper and two lower limit values in each case Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; channel by channel * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes; channel by channel Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 51 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Operational and basic error limits for resistance thermometers Error limits for resistance thermometers Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, in relation to input range) * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard 1.0 K * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 climatic 0.25 K * Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000 standard and climatic 0.4 K * Cu 10 1.5 K Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, in relation to input range) * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard 0.6 K * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 climatic 0.13 K * Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000 standard and climatic 0.2 K * Cu 10 1.0 K Operational and basic error limits for thermocouples 1 Error limits for thermocouples Operational limit for thermocouples (in the entire temperature range) 1.5 K Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25 C) 1 K Overall error limits when using internal compensation * Operational limit (in the entire temperature range at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) 2.5 K * Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) 1.5 K 1 The indicated error limits apply as of the following temperatures: Thermocouple type T: -200 C Thermocouple type K: -100 C Thermocouple type B: +700 C Thermocouple type N: -150 C Thermocouple type E: -150 C Thermocouple type R: +200 C Thermocouple type S: +100 C Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 52 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type / measuring range Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor resistance Deactivated * * * * * Voltage 50 mV, 80 mV, 250 mV, 1 V * * * * Resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) 150 , 300 , * 600 , 3 k, 6 k * * x (with 2-wire connection) Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC * * * * Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Pt100 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 Reference channel Degrees Celsius of group 0, 1, 2, 3 Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 climatic No reference channel mode No reference channel mode Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 climatic Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 LG-Ni 1000 climatic LG-Ni 0.005 x (with 2-wire connection) Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 53 Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient (3-wire connection) Cu 10 climatic Cu 0.00427 Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Pt100 Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 standard Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 standard Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 LG-Ni 1000 standard LG-Ni 0.005 Thermal resistor (3-wire connection) Cu 10 standard Cu 0.00427 Thermocouple Type B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK * Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor resistance * No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit x (with 2-wire connection) Kelvin * Reference channel Degrees Celsius of the module1 Degrees FahrenInternal reference heit junction Kelvin * Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 32 Fixed reference temperature x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 Use of "Reference channel of the module": - Channel 0 must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius". -For each TC channel of this module that is intended to use channel 0 as reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Reference channel of the module". 2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3": - An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius". - "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" must be set as the "Reference junction" of this channel. - There must only be one RTD channel with "Reference junction" = "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" per group 0, 1, 2, 3 and IO device! - For each TC channel in the IO device that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3". - If the reference channel is on channel 0, it can also be used as "Reference channel of the module" at the same time. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 54 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type for PROFINET. Table A- 2 Dependencies on the measurement type Measurement type Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Underflow Diagnostics Overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction Deactivated * * * * * * * Voltage - * x x - x - Resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) - * x x x x - Resistor PTC (2-wire connection) - * x - - x - Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) x 2 and 3 decimal places x x x x - Thermocouple x 2 and 3 decimal places x x x x x1) x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 Property is not relevant if "Fixed reference temperature" is used Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 55 Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement Measuring type range Temperature coefficient Slot reference junction Temperature unit Deactivated * * * Voltage 50 mV, 80 mV, 250 mV, 1 V * Resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction * * * * * * * x - x - 150 , 300 , * 600 , 3 k, 6 k * * x x x - Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC3 * * x - x - Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) Pt100 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 Degrees Celsius x x x - No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) * Degrees Fahrenheit Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Pt100 Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 standard Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Ni100 Ni 0.00618 Ni120 Ni 0.00672 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 climatic No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 standard No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 56 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Measurement Measuring type range Temperature coefficient Slot reference junction Temperature unit Thermal resistor (2, 3, 4-wire connection) LG-Ni 0.005 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius LG-Ni 1000 climatic LG-Ni 1000 standard LG-Ni 0.005 Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Thermal resistor (3-wire connection) Cu 10 climatic Cu 10 standard Cu 0.00427 Cu 0.00427 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 57 Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Measurement Measuring type range Temperature coefficient Slot reference junction Temperature unit Thermocouple * Reference channel of the module1 Degrees Celsius Type B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK Internal reference junction Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction x x x x x x x * Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 32 Fixed reference temperature Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 Use of the "Reference channel of the module": - Channel 0 must be set to "Pt100 climatic" with the temperature unit "Degrees Celsius". - For each TC channel of this module that is intended to use channel 0 as reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Enable". 2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0": - An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit "Degrees Celsius". - "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" must be set as the "Reference junction" of this channel. - There may be only one RTD channel with "Reference junction active" = "Enable" per group and row. - For each TC channel of this row that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction active" must be set to "Enable". 3 Underflow = 8000H; wire break and overflow lead to 01H (triggered) (no diagnostics), wire break and overflow are therefore not relevant. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 58 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 59 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number * 22); channel number = 0 to 3 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 60 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 61 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 3 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 62 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Codes for measurement type The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 3 Codes for measurement type Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Resistor, 4-wire connection 0000 0100 Resistor, 3-wire connection 0000 0101 Resistor, 2-wire connection 0000 0110 Thermal resistor, 4-wire connection 0000 0111 Thermal resistor, 3-wire connection 0000 1000 Thermal resistor, 2-wire connection 0000 1001 Thermocouple 0000 1010 Codes for measuring range The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 4 Codes for measuring range Measuring range Code Voltage 50 mV 0000 0001 80 mV 0000 0010 250 mV 0000 0011 1V 0000 0101 Resistor 150 0000 0001 300 0000 0010 600 0000 0011 3 k 0000 0100 6 k 0000 0101 PTC 0000 1111 Thermal resistor climatic Pt 100 0000 0000 Pt 200 0000 0111 Pt 500 0000 1000 Pt 1000 0000 1001 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 63 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Measuring range Code Thermal resistor standard Pt 100 0000 0010 Pt 200 0000 1011 Pt 500 0000 0100 Pt 1000 0000 0101 Thermal resistor climatic Ni 100 0000 0001 Ni 120 0000 1101 Ni 200 0001 0001 Ni 500 0001 0011 Ni 1000 0000 1010 LG-Ni 1000 0001 1101 Thermal resistor standard Ni 100 0000 0011 Ni 120 0000 1100 Ni 200 0001 0000 Ni 500 0001 0010 Ni 1000 0000 0110 LG-Ni 1000 0001 1100 Thermal resistor Cu 10 climatic 0000 1110 Cu 10 standard 0000 1111 Thermocouple Type B 0000 0000 Type N 0000 0001 Type E 0000 0010 Type R 0000 0011 Type S 0000 0100 Type J 0000 0101 Type L 0000 0110 Type T 0000 0111 Type K 0000 1000 Type U 0000 1001 Type C 0000 1010 Type TXK 0000 1011 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 64 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Codes for temperature coefficient for temperature measurement The following table contains the codes for the temperature coefficients of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x+2 (see previous figure). Table A- 5 Codes for temperature coefficient for temperature measurement Temperature coefficient Code Pt 0.00385055 0000 0000 Pt 0.003916 0000 0001 Pt 0.003902 0000 0010 Pt 0.00392 0000 0011 Pt 0.00385 0000 0100 Ni 0.00618 0000 1000 Ni 0.00672 0000 1001 LG-Ni 0.005 0000 1010 Cu 0.00427 0000 1100 Limits for hardware interrupts The following tables contain the permitted limits for hardware interrupts (in each case, the usable value is given). The limits depend on the selected measurement type and the selected measuring range. The value for the overflow must be larger than the value for the underflow. The limits are specified as decimal values. The conversion to the respective temperature unit is (1 digit = 0.1) for the standard range and (1 digit = 0.01) for the climate range, see section Representation of analog values (Page 69). Table A- 6 Limits for resistor and voltage Resistor (all possible measuring range settings) Voltage 32510 32510 Overflow 1 -32511 Underflow Table A- 7 Limits for thermocouple types B, C, and E Thermocouple Type B C F Type C K C F Type E K C F K 20699 32765 23431 24999 32765 27731 11999 21919 14731 Overflow -1199 -1839 1533 -1199 -1839 1533 -2699 -4539 33 Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 65 Parameter data record A.3 Errors when transferring the data record Table A- 8 Limits for thermocouple types R, S, J, and L Thermocouple Types R, S C Type J F K C Type L F K C F K 20189 32765 22921 14499 26419 17231 11499 21019 14231 Overflow -1699 -2739 1033 -2099 -3459 633 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow Table A- 9 Limits for thermocouple types T, K, and U Thermocouple Type T C Type K F K C Type U F K C F K 5399 10039 8131 16219 29515 18951 8499 15619 11231 Overflow -2699 -4539 33 -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow Table A- 10 Limits for thermocouple types N and TXK Thermocouple Type N C Type TXK F K C F K 15499 28219 18231 10499 19219 13231 Overflow -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow Table A- 11 Limits for thermal resistor Thermal resistor Standard C Cu Pt Ni, Ni-LG Climatic F K C F 3119 5935 5851 17999 32765 Overflow -2399 -3999 333 -5999 -7599 Underflow 9999 18319 12731 15499 31099 Overflow -2429 -4053 303 -14499 -22899 Underflow 2949 5629 5681 29499 32765 Overflow -1049 -1569 1683 -10499 -15699 Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 66 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Parameter data record A.3 Errors when transferring the data record A.3 Errors when transferring the data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Enter a valid number for the data record. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged or pulled. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 67 Parameter data record A.4 Switchable wire break check A.4 Switchable wire break check Function The "Switchable wire break check" is available for thermocouples. It switches off the wire break check for the module. This is required, for example, to calibrate thermocouples, since the test current necessary for a wire break check leads to measurement errors during calibration. The function has no effect on channels that are not assigned in the thermocouple mode. Note Startup and parameter reassignment The wire break check is switched on again at each startup and during any parameter reassignment of the module. Switch-off via the user program You can deactivate the wire break check using data record 237. Table A- 12 Structure of data record 237, switchable wire break check Byte Function Format Value Description 0 Command UBYTE 80H Wire break check 1 Identifier UBYTE 00H Not relevant 2 Channel number UBYTE FFH All channels 3 Calibration step UBYTE FFH First triggering 4 Measurement type UBYTE 00H Not relevant 5 Measuring range UBYTE 00H Not relevant 6 Action UBYTE 01H Deactivate wire break check 02H Activate wire break check 00H Not relevant 7...17 Reserved UBYTE Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 68 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE B Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Note Temperature values The digitized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module. The following resolution therefore does not apply to temperature values. Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 69 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 70 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 1 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF > 1.176 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 1.176 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 1V Nominal range 20736 5100 0.75 V 1 1 36.17 V 0 0 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -0.75 V -27648 9400 -1 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -1.176 V -32768 8000 <-1.176 V Table B- 5 1 V Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring range 500 mV to 50 mV Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 32767 7FFF > 294.0 mV > 94.1 mV > 58.8 mV Overflow 32511 7EFF 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV Nominal range 20736 5100 187.5 mV 60 mV 37.5 mA 1 1 9.04 V 2.89 V 1.81 V 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -187.5 mV -60 mV -37.5 mV -27648 9400 -250 mV -80 mV -50 mV -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -294.0 mV -94.1 mV -58.8 mV -32768 8000 <-294.0 mV <-94.1 mV <-58.8 mV Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 71 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible resistance-type sensor ranges. Table B- 6 Resistance-type sensors from 150 to 6000 Values Dec. Resistance-type sensor range Hex. 150 Range 300 600 3000 6000 32767 7FFF > 176.38 > 352.77 > 705.53 > 3527.7 > 7055.3 Overflow 32511 7EFF 176.38 352.77 705.53 3527.7 7055.3 Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 150 300 600 3000 6000 Nominal range 20736 5100 112.5 225 450 2250 4500 1 1 5.43 m 10.85 m 21.70 m 108.5 m 217 m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 8000 (negative values are physically impossible) 1 Underflow1 If the resistors are not connected correctly or the conductor resistance is too high Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 72 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Representation of analog values B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Note A higher resolution can be configured for the measuring range for the standard resistance thermometers, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 32). The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermal resistors. Table B- 7 Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 standard Pt x00 Standard in C (1 digit = 0.1C) Values Pt x00 Standard in F (1 digit = 0.1 F) Values Pt x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) Values Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. > 1000.0 32767 7FFF > 1832.0 32767 1000.0 : 10000 2710 1832.0 : : : 850.1 8501 2135 850.0 8500 : : -200.0 -200.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1273.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC Overrange : : : : : 1562.1 15621 3D05 1123.3 11233 2BE1 2134 1562.0 15620 3D04 1123.2 11232 2BE0 : : : : : : : -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 2DC -2001 F82F -328.1 -3281 F32F 73.1 731 2DB : : : : : : : : : -243.0 -2430 F682 -405.4 -4054 F02A 30.2 302 12E < -243.0 -32768 8000 < -405.4 -32768 8000 < 30.2 32768 8000 Table B- 8 Range Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 climatic Pt x00 climatic in C (1 digit = 0.01 C) Values Values Hex. Pt x00 climatic in F (1 digit = 0.01 F) Dec. > 155.00 Range Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF > 311.00 32767 7FFF Overflow 155.00 15500 3C8C 311.00 31100 797C Overrange : : : : : : 130.01 13001 32C9 266.01 26601 67E9 130.00 13000 32C8 266.00 26600 67E8 : : : : : : -120.00 -12000 D120 -184.00 -18400 B820 -120.01 -12001 D11F -184.01 -18401 B81F : : : : : : -145.00 -14500 C75C -229.00 -22900 A68C < -145.00 -32768 8000 < -229.00 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 73 Representation of analog values B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Table B- 9 Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 standard Ni x00 standard in C (1 digit = 0.1 C) Values Ni x00 standard in F (1 digit = 0.1 F) Values Dec. Hex. > 295.0 32767 295.0 2950 : 250.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 563.0 32767 B86 563.0 5630 : : : 2501 9C5 482.1 250.0 2500 9C4 : : : -60.0 -600 FDA8 -60.1 -601 FDA7 : : : -105.0 -1050 FBE6 < -105.0 -32768 8000 Table B- 10 Ni x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) Values Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 568.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 15FE 568.2 5682 1632 Overrange : : : : : 4821 12D5 523.3 5233 1471 482.0 4820 12D4 523.2 5232 1470 : : : : : : -76.0 -760 FD08 213.2 2132 854 -76.1 -761 FD07 213.1 2131 853 : : : : : : -157.0 -1570 F9DE 168.2 1682 692 < -157.0 -32768 8000 < 168.2 32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 climatic Ni x00 climatic in C (1 digit = 0.01 C) Values Values Hex. Ni x00 climatic in F (1 digit = 0.01 F) Dec. > 295.00 32767 295.00 Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 327.66 32767 7FFF Overflow 29500 733C 327.66 32766 7FFE Overrange : : : : : : 250.01 25001 61A9 280.01 28001 6D61 250.00 25000 61A8 280.00 28000 6D60 : : : : : : -60.00 -6000 E890 -76.00 -7600 E250 -60.01 -6001 E88F -76.01 -7601 E24F : : : : : : -105.00 -10500 D6FC -157.00 -15700 C2AC < - 105.00 -32768 8000 < - 157.00 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 74 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Representation of analog values B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Table B- 11 Thermal resistor Cu 10 standard Cu 10 standard in C (1 digit = 0.01 C) Values Cu 10 standard in F (1 digit = 0.01 F) Values Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. > 312.0 32767 312.0 3120 7FFF > 593.6 32767 C30 593.6 5936 : 260.1 : : : 2601 A29 500.1 260.0 2600 A28 : : : -200.0 -2000 -200.1 -2001 : -240.0 < -240.0 Table B- 12 Cu 10 standard in K (1 digit = 0.01 K) Values Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 585.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1730 585.2 5852 16DC Overrange : : : : : 5001 12D5 533.3 5333 14D5 500.0 5000 1389 533.2 5332 14D4 : : : : : : F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 2DCH F82F -328.1 -3281 F32F 73.1 731 2DB : : : : : : : : -2400 F6A0 -400.0 -4000 F060 33.2 332 14CH -32768 8000 < -400.0 -32768 8000 < 33.2 32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermal resistor Cu 10 climatic Cu 10 climatic in Values C Dec. (1 digit = 0.01 C) Values Hex. Cu 10 climatic in F (1 digit = 0.01 F) > 180.00 180.00 Range Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF > 325.11 32767 7FFF Overflow 18000 4650 327.66 32766 7FFE Overrange : : : : : : 150.01 15001 3A99 280.01 28001 6D61A 150.00 15000 3A98 280.00 28000 6D60 : : : : : : -50.00 -5000 EC78 - 58.00 -5800 E958H -50.01 -5001 EC77 -58.01 -5801 E957 : : : : : : -60.00 -6000 E890 -76.00 -7600 E250 < - 60.00 -32768 8000 < - 76.00 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 75 Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Note A higher resolution can be configured for thermocouples, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 32). The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermocouples. Table B- 13 Thermocouple type B Type B in Values C Dec. Values Hex. Type B in F Values Hex. Type B in K > 2070.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 2070.0 : 20700 50DC 3276.6 : : : 1820.1 18201 4719 1820.0 18200 4718 : : 0.0 0 -0.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 2343.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 32766 7FFE 2343.2 23432 5B88 Overrange : : : : : 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2093.3 20933 51C5 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2093.2 20932 51C4 : : : : : : : 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB : : : : : : : : : -120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC < -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Values Table B- 14 Range Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermocouple type C Type C in C Values Values Hex. Type C in F Dec. Hex. Type C in K Dec. > 2500.0 32767 2500.0 : Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 7FFF > 2773.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 25000 61A8 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2773.2 27732 6C54 Overrange : : : : : : : : 2315.1 23151 5A6F 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2588.3 25883 651B 2315.0 23150 5A6E 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2588.2 25882 651A : : : : : : : : : 0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC -0.1 -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB : : : : : : : : : -120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC < -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 76 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 15 Thermocouple type E Type E in C Values Values Hex. Type E in F Values Hex. Type E in K Dec. > 1200.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 2192.0 32767 1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 : : : 1000.1 10001 2711 1000.0 10000 : : -270.0 < -270.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1473.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Overrange : : : : : : 1832.1 18321 4791 1273.3 12733 31BD 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC : : : : : : : -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Values Dec. Hex. Type J in K Dec. Hex. Table B- 16 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type J Type J in C Values Dec. Hex. Type J in F > 1450.0 32767 7FFF > 2642.0 32767 7FFF > 1723.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1450.0 14500 38A4 2642.0 26420 6734 1723.2 17232 4350 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1200.1 12001 2EE1 2192.1 21921 55A1 1473.3 14733 398D 1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C : : : : : : : : : -210.0 -2100 F7CC -346.0 -3460 F27C 63.2 632 0278 < -210.0 -32768 8000 < -346.0 -32768 8000 < 63.2 -32768 8000 Values Values Table B- 17 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type K Type K in C Values Dec. Hex. Type K in F Dec. Hex. Type K in K Range Dec. Hex. > 1622.0 32767 7FFF > 2951.6 32767 7FFF > 1895.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1622.0 16220 3F5C 2951.6 29516 734C 1895.2 18952 4A08 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1372.1 13721 3599 2501.7 25017 61B9 1645.3 16453 4045 1372.0 13720 3598 2501.6 25016 61B8 1645.2 16452 4044 : : : : : : : : : -270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 < -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 77 Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 18 Thermocouple type L Type L in C Values Values Hex. Type L in F Values Hex. Type L in K Dec. > 1150.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 2102.0 32767 1150.0 11500 2CEC 2102.0 : : : 900.1 9001 2329 900.0 9000 : : -200.0 < -200.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1423.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 21020 521C 1423.2 14232 3798 Overrange : : : : : : 1652.1 16521 4089 1173.3 11733 2DD5 2328 1652.0 16520 4088 1173.2 11732 2DD4 : : : : : : : -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Values Dec. Hex. Table B- 19 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type N Type N in C Values Values Hex. Type N in F Dec. Hex. Type N in K Dec. > 1550.0 1550.0 32767 7FFF > 2822.0 32767 7FFF > 1823.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 15500 3C8C 2822.0 28220 6E3C 1823.2 18232 4738 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1300.1 13001 32C9 2372.1 23721 5CA9 1573.3 15733 3D75 1300.0 13000 32C8 2372.0 23720 5CA8 1573.2 15732 3D74 : : : : : : : : : -270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 < -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Table B- 20 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouples R and S Types R, S in C Values Values Hex. Types R, S in F Dec. Hex. Types R, S in K Dec. > 2019.0 32767 2019.0 : Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 7FFF > 2292.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 20190 4EDE 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2292.2 22922 598A Overrange : : : : : : : : 1769.1 17691 451B 3216.3 32163 7DA3 2042.3 20423 4FC7 1769.0 17690 451A 3216.2 32162 7DA2 2042.2 20422 4FC6 : : : : : : : : : -50.0 -500 FE0C -58.0 -580 FDBC 223.2 2232 08B8 -50.1 -501 FE0B -58.1 -581 FDBB 223.1 2231 08B7 : : : : : : : : : -170.0 -1700 F95C -274.0 -2740 F54C 103.2 1032 0408 < -170.0 -32768 8000 < -274.0 -32768 8000 < 103.2 < 1032 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 78 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 21 Thermocouple type T Type T in C Values Values Hex. Type T in F Values Hex. Type T in K Dec. > 540.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 1004.0 32767 540.0 5400 1518 1004.0 : : : 400.1 4001 0FA1 400.0 4000 : : -270.0 < -270.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 813.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 10040 2738 813.2 8132 1FC4 Overrange : : : : : : 752.1 7521 1D61 673.3 6733 1AAD 0FA0 752.0 7520 1D60 673.2 6732 1AAC : : : : : : : -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Dec. Hex. Table B- 22 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type U Type U in C Values Values Hex. Type U in F Dec. Hex. Type U in K Dec. > 850.0 850.0 32767 7FFF > 1562.0 32767 7FFF > 1123.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 2738.0 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 600.1 6001 1771 1112.1 11121 2B71 873.3 8733 221D 600.0 6000 1770 1112.0 11120 2B70 873.2 8732 221C : : : : : : : : : -200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC < -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Values Hex. Type TXK Table B- 23 Type TXK Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type TXK (GOST) Dec. Hex. Type Values TXK in F Dec. > 1050.0 32767 7FFF > 1922.0 32767 7FFF 1050.0 10500 2904 1922.0 19220 : : : : : 800.1 8001 1F41 1472.1 800.0 8000 1F40 1472.0 : : : 0.0 0 0000 : : -200.0 -2000 < -200.0 -32768 in C Range Values Range Dec. Hex. >1323.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 4B14 1323.2 13232 33B0 Overrange : : : : 14721 3981 1073.3 10733 29ED 14720 3980 1073.2 10732 29EC : : : : : : 32.0 320 0140 273 2730 0AAA : : : : : : : F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 <73.2 -32768 8000 in K Nominal range Underflow Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 79 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 09/2018 A5E32942580-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32942580-AB 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change: In the "Technical specifications" section, the operational and basic error limits for thermocouple type C have changed. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................17 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................21 4.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................26 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 Scalable measuring range ......................................................................................................31 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................33 Evaluating data record 235 .....................................................................................................34 4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................37 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 38 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................38 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................40 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................42 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 44 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 52 B A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................52 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................57 A.3 Errors when transferring the data record ................................................................................65 A.4 Switchable wire break check ..................................................................................................66 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 67 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................68 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................69 B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors ................................................70 B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors ...........................................................71 B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples ..............................................................73 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 5 Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 7 Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 9 Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 8 inputs Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign Voltage measurement type can be set per channel Resistor measurement type can be set per channel Thermal resistor (RTD) measurement type can be set per channel Thermocouple (TC) measurement type can be set per channel Configurable diagnostics for each channel Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits per channel) The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function Firmware update HW version FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Calibration in runtime FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Value status (PROFINET IO only) FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Configurable conductor resistance for 2-wire connection FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Switchable wire-break check FS01 V2.0.0 or higher V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher with HSP 0227 V3.0 or higher X X Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connection See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF module with the terminal assignments. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note * The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. * When using floating sensors, bridge the m- connections and connect to ground / FE. This increases the immunity of the module. Bridging and connecting are not necessary for disabled and disconnected inputs. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 2-wire connection for thermocouples, resistance-type sensors or thermal resistors (RTD) The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection of thermocouples 2-wire connection of resistance-type sensors or thermal resistors (RTD) Backplane bus interface Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Constant current power supply Multiplexer Temperature recording for BU type A1 only Filter connection supply voltage (available with light-colored BaseUnit only) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) Figure 3-1 Mn+ MnL+ P1, P2, AUX DIAG .0 to .7 PWR F0 to F7 Measuring line positive, channel n Measuring line negative, channel n 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) Power LED (green) Channel fault LED (red) Connection- and block diagram for connection of thermocouples, resistance-type sensors or thermal resistors (RTD) Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 15 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The following table describes the measuring range and the temperature coefficients you can configure for each measurement type: Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Deactivated - - Voltage 50 mV / 80 mV / 250 mV / 1 V Resistor (2-wire connection) 150 / 300 / 600 / 3 k / 6 k - PTC - Climatic / Standard Pt 0.00385 / Pt 0.003916 / Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.00392 / Pt 0.00385055 Thermal resistor RTD (2-wire connection) Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Climatic / Standard Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 200 Ni 500 Ni 1000 Climatic1 / Standard1 Ni 0.00618 / Ni 0.00672 Ni 0.005 Ni 1000 Thermocouple (TC) 1 Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, U, TXK (acc. to GOST) - For sensors LG-Ni 1000 from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stafa). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Special features when using PTC resistors PTCs are suitable for monitoring temperature and as thermal protection devices for complex drives or transformer windings. Choose "Resistor (2-wire)" and "PTC" in the parameter assignment. Connect the PTC to the 2-wire connection technology. Use the PTC resistors, type A (PTC thermistor) in accordance with DIN/VDE 0660, part 302. If "Underflow" diagnostics is enabled, a "Violation of low limit" diagnostics is generated for resistance values < 18 , indicating a short-circuit. Sensor data for the PTC resistor: Table 4- 2 Using PTC resistors Property Switching points Technical specifications Comment Behavior with rising temperature < 550 Normal range: * 550 to 1650 Prewarning range: * > 1650 SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) Response range: * SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) Behavior with falling temperature > 750 Response range: * 750 to 540 Prewarning range: * < 540 SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) Normal range: * SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) Reaction to short-circuit 1 < 18 * (RRT-5) C Max. 550 (RRT+5) C min. 1330 TNF = Rated response temperature of the sensor (according to DIN/VDE 0660) (RRT+15) C min. 4000 Measuring voltage/ voltage at the PTC Max. 7.5 V1 SIMATIC S7: Bit 7 (IB x+1) = "1", Bit 0 = "0" and Bit 2 = "0" Below 23 k Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Assignment in the process image input (PII) with SIMATIC S7 Figure 4-1 Assignment in the process image input (PII) Notes on programming Bits 0+2 are relevant for evaluation in the process image input. You can monitor, for example, the temperature of a motor using bits 0+2. Bits 0+2 in the process image input cannot be saved. During parameter assignment, take into consideration that a motor, for example, starts up in a controlled manner (via an acknowledgment). Bits 0+2 can never be set at the same time; they are set one after the other. NOTICE No measurement is possible in the following cases: * When I/O modules are pulled out * When supply voltage to the I/O module fails * When there is a wire break or short-circuit in the measuring lines You should therefore always evaluate the diagnostic entries of AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF for safety reasons. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 19 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Example The diagram shows the temperature curve and the associated switching points. Figure 4-2 Temperature curve with prewarning range See also Technical specifications (Page 44) Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 57). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 3 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default ReconfiguraScope with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ * Disable * Enable Diagnostics: * Reference junction * Disable Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Diagnostics: Wire break GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Channel 1 Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Channel Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Value range Default ReconfiguraScope with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Type/range of measurement * Deactivated * Voltage 50 mV * Voltage 80 mV * Voltage 250 mV * Voltage 1 V GSD file PROFIBUS DP Thermal resistor (2- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Resistor (2-wire connection) * 150 * 300 * 600 * 3 k * 6 k Type/range of measurement Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC Thermal resistor (2- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Type/range of measurement Thermal resistor (2-wire connection) Thermal resistor (2- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel * Pt 100 climatic range * Pt 200 climatic range * Pt 500 climatic range * Pt 1000 climatic range Thermal resistor (2-wire connection) * Pt 100 standard range * Pt 200 standard range * Pt 500 standard range * Pt 1000 standard range Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Value range Default ReconfiguraScope with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Type/range of measurement Thermal resistor (2-wire connection) * Ni 100 climatic range * Ni 120 climatic range * Ni 200 climatic range * Ni 500 climatic range * Ni 1000 climatic range GSD file PROFIBUS DP Thermal resistor (2- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Thermal resistor (2- Yes wire connection) Pt 100 standard range Channel Channel Thermal resistor (2-wire connection) Type/range of measurement * Ni 100 standard range * Ni 120 standard range * Ni 200 standard range * Ni 500 standard range * Ni 1000 standard range Thermocouple * Type B (PtRh-PtRh) * Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) * Type E (NiCr-CuNi) * Type R (PtRh-Pt) * Type S (PtRh-Pt) * Type J (Fe-CuNi) * Type L (Fe-CuNi) * Type T (Cu-CuNi) * Type K (NiCr-NiAl) * Type U (Cu-CuNi) * Type C (WRe-WRe) * Type TXK Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 23 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Value range Default ReconfiguraScope with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Temperature coef- * ficient * Temperature unit Pt 0.003902 * Pt 0.00392 * Pt 0.00385 * Ni 0.00618 * Ni 0.00672 * LG-Ni 0.005 * Degrees Celsius * Degrees Fahrenheit * Kelvin No reference channel mode * Reference channel of the module * Internal reference junction * Reference channel of group 0 to 3 * Fixed reference temperature * None * Weak * Medium * Strong * 60 Hz * 50 Hz2 * 16.6 Hz * Disable * Enable * 2 decimal places * 3 decimal places Measuring range center * Value within the nominal range of the measuring range Conductor resistance 0 to 50000 m Smoothing Interference frequency suppression 3 Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Hardware interrupt * high limit 1 4 * Pt 0.00385055 Yes Channel Channel Degrees Celsius Yes Channel Module No reference channel mode Yes Channel Channel None Yes Channel Channel 50 Hz Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel - 2 decimal places Yes Channel - 0 Yes Channel - 0 Yes Channel - Disable Yes Channel - Pt 0.003916 * Reference junction * 5 Pt 0.00385055 GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Enable Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Value range Default ReconfiguraScope with configuration tion in RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO High limit 1 4 * GSD file PROFIBUS DP Value 8500 Yes Channel - Disable Disable Yes Channel - Hardware interrupt * low limit 1 4 * Enable 14 Value -2000 Yes Channel - Disable Disable Yes Channel - Low limit * Hardware interrupt * high limit 2 4 * Enable 24 Value 8500 Yes Channel - Disable Disable Yes Channel - High limit * Hardware interrupt * low limit 2 4 * Enable 24 * Value -2000 Yes Channel - * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) Use potential group of the left module No Module Module * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) Low limit Potential group 1 Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+: Detection per module or alarm per channel 2 Interference frequency suppression: Interfering signals at 400 Hz are automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 3 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter. 4 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 24 bytes with PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter with data record 128, see Appendix "Parameter data record". 5 Only for configuration with PROFIBUS GSD file: The set reference junction is used with the additional parameter "Kx Reference junction activated" in the case of "Enable". In the case of "Disable", "No reference channel mode" is used for RTD and "Fixed reference temperature" is used for TC. Note Unused channels "Deactivate" unused inputs in the parameter assignment to shorten the cycle time of the module. A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Reference junction Enabling of the reference junction diagnostics if the reference temperature of the reference junction needs to be determined for the TC channel being operated. Reference junction using the PROFINET GSD file A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the TC measurement, if this has the parameter setting "Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic range Degrees Celsius". A possible parameter assignment is represented below: Table 4- 4 RTD channel Setting Description No reference channel mode The temperature value at channel 0 can be used as a reference value for the entire module. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a transmitter for the reference junction temperature of the group. The distribution is performed via the interface module. Table 4- 5 TC channel Setting Description Reference channel of the module The corresponding TC channel uses channel 0 of the same module as the reference junction temperature. This must be configured as "Thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic range Degrees Celsius" and "No reference channel mode"; otherwise, Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered. Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group. Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 C. As a result, no temperature compensation is performed. Note Shared Device and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" If the transmitter and receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, then both IO controllers must be performing data exchange with the IO device to ensure error-free operation of the temperature compensation. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Reference junction using the PROFIBUS GSD file A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the TC measurement, if this has the parameter setting "Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic range Degrees Celsius". The set temperature unit (e.g. Degrees Celsius) is valid for the entire module with temperature compensation "Reference channel of the module" and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3". Table 4- 6 RTD channel Setting Description No reference channel mode The temperature value at channel 0 can be used as a reference value for the entire module. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a transmitter for the reference junction temperature of a group. The distribution is performed via the interface module. Setting Description Channel x Reference junction activated * Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting "No reference channel mode". * Enable: Channel x is configured with the setting selected above. Table 4- 7 TC channel Setting Description Reference channel of the module The corresponding TC channel uses channel 0 of the same module as the reference junction temperature. This must be configured as "Thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic range Degrees Celsius" and "No reference channel mode"; otherwise, Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered. Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction temperature of the group. Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 C. As a result, no temperature compensation is performed. Setting Description Channel x Reference junction activated * Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting "Fixed reference temperature". * Enable: Channel x is configured with the setting selected above. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 27 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics if the measured value falls below the underrange. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is insufficient for measurement at the correspondingly assigned input. Type/range of measurement See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 17). Temperature coefficient The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. In Europe, only one value is used per sensor type (default value). The temperature coefficient ( value) indicates by how much the resistance of a specific material changes relatively if the temperature increases by 1 C. The other values facilitate a sensor-specific setting of the temperature coefficient and enhance accuracy. Temperature unit Selection between Degrees Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin as the temperature unit for the selected measuring range. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed using filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This specification is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-3 Smoothing for AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interferences affecting analog input modules that are caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network is likely to have a negative effect on measured values particularly with measurement in the low voltage range and on thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Measuring range resolution Parameters for the measurement type thermal resistor standard and thermocouple. Allows you to increase the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places for a configurable section of the measuring range. See the Scalable measuring range (Page 31) section. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 29 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Measuring range center Determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned. The value must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It is specified in integers. Maximum / Minimum Corresponds to overflow / underflow for the scalable measuring range. Conductor resistance Parameters for the measurement types resistor and thermal resistor. Used to compensate for the conductor resistance without having to interfere with the sensor wiring. If the "Conductor resistor" parameter is configured higher than a value 0 m, the module then automatically uses the factory calibration data. Hardware interrupt enable Enabling of a hardware interrupt if the high limit 1/2 or the low limit 1/2 is violated. Low limit 1/2 Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated. High limit 1/2 Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4 Scalable measuring range Introduction The scalable measuring range is available for the temperature measuring ranges of thermal resistors (RTD) standard and thermocouples. The measuring ranges for voltage, resistor and thermal resistor climatic are not supported. The scalable measuring range is valid for the following ranges: Nominal range Underrange Overrange Function The scalable measuring range is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the module. It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable section. The "Measuring range resolution" parameter determines the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places. The "Measuring range center" parameter determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned. Value ranges Table 4- 8 Value ranges Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Values hex. 2 decimal places 3 decimal places Overflow >325.11 >32.511 7FFFH High limit 325.11 32.511 7EFFH Measuring range center 0 0 0H Low limit -325.12 -32.512 8100H Underflow <-325.12 <-32.512 8000H To obtain an absolute temperature, the measuring range center in the application program (as offset) must be calculated with the value of the user data of the scalable measuring range. The measuring range center is always output in the user data as the value "0". The user data are correspondingly mapped to the bipolar input ranges in S7 format. Underflow / overflow is also formed in accordance with the limits of S7. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 31 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Rules The measuring range center must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It is specified in integers. The scalable measuring range is spanned symmetrically over the measuring range center. Depending on the resolution, various value ranges result (, ). The scalable measuring range is limited by underflow and overflow of the underlying measuring range: - It is clipped at the underflow when it falls below the limit. - It is clipped at the overflow when it exceeds the limit (). Example The following example illustrates the effect of scalable measuring ranges: Scalable measuring range with 2 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format Scalable measuring range with 3 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format Scalable measuring range which is cut off at the overflow of the underlying measuring range (clipping) Figure 4-4 Examples of scalable measuring ranges Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4.1 Configuration Requirement You must select a valid temperature measuring range for configuration. Configuration The function is activated using the "Scalable measuring range" parameter. The following figure shows an example of a configuration in STEP 7: Figure 4-5 Configuration for the scalable measuring range Reference You will find more information on the configuration in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 33 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235 Evaluation in the user program In the user program, you can evaluate the status and the limits of the scalable measuring range with data record 235, which may result by reaching underflow/overflow. Structure of data record 235 Figure 4-6 Structure of data record 235 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure 4-7 Header information of data record 235 Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameter. If the corresponding bit is set to "1", the parameter is activated. * x = 2 + (channel number x 8) Figure 4-8 Structure of data record 235 - channel parameter byte x to x+7 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 35 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Description of the parameters Table 4- 9 Description of the parameters from data record 235 Parameter Description Scalable measuring range enabled 1 = Function is active for this channel. Clipping 1 = Scalable measuring range cut off at the overflow / underflow of the underlying measuring range (see Figure (Page 32)). Resolution 2 or 3 decimal places Measuring range center Temperature in whole C / F / K ("working point" for the scaling) Overflow/underflow Limits of the scalable measuring range Example The following example shows the values for a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard, C: Table 4- 10 Example of a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard Hex. value Dec. value Evaluation of data record 235 00H 0 V0.0 08H 8 8 bytes 03H 3 Scalable measuring range active and clipped (clipping) 02H 2 Resolution: 2 decimal places 02EEH 750 Measuring range center: 750 C 61A8H 25000 Overflow (Maximum): 250.00 + 750 = 1000.00 C Scalable measuring range is clipped at the overflow. 8100H -32512 Underflow (Minimum): -325.12 + 750 = 424.88 C See also Scalable measuring range (Page 31) Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space 4.5 Address space Address space of the analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-9 Address space of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF with value status Configuration options of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog module. Each bit 0 to 7 in this byte is assigned to one channel and provides information on the validity of the analog value (0 = value is incorrect). Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 37 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF: DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 42). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Channel status/channel error LED Table 5- 2 Status and error display of the LED channel status / channel error LEDs Meaning Channel status Channel error Off Off Channel deactivated Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On Not permitted (error) On On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 39 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 Violation of high limit 1 Violation of low limit 2 Violation of high limit 2 You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 5-2 OB start information Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI (User Structure Identifier) W#16#0001 additional interrupt information for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1 B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1 B#16#04 Violation of high limit 1 B#16#05 Violation of low limit 2 B#16#06 Violation of high limit 2 Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 Event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Event Diagnostic error interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupt lost Reference channel error Error Violation of low limit Violation of high limit Wire break Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 41 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Remedy Wire break 6H Resistance of sensor circuit too high Use a different sensor type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate diagnostics * Connect or deactivate the channel Violation of high limit1 7H Value lies above the overrange. Wire break2 Correct module/sensor interplay See Wire break Violation of low limit1 8H Value lies below the underrange. Correct module/sensor interplay Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Correct the parameter assignment (diagnostics wire break set only with the permitted measuring ranges). * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Check BaseUnit type * Select correct reference junction through parameter assignment3 * Check whether the reference junction (reference channel of the group 0, 1, 2, 3) is only assigned once as the sender in the entire setup. Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing Reference channel error (reference junction) 11H 15H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Reference temperature of the reference junction for the TC channel being operated with compensation is invalid. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Hardware interrupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not Correct the program or the process be reported because there were too many pending hardware interrupts. Channel temporarily unavailable 1FH * * Firmware update in progress or update has been canceled. The module does not read any process values in this state. Remedy * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. * Complete calibration. The channel is currently being calibrated. 1 The alarm refers to the diagnostics and depends on the configured measuring range. 2 For resistor and thermal resistor measuring ranges with deactivated diagnostics for "wire break", this is reported by the "Violation of high limit" diagnostic. 3 Shared Device and diagnostics "Reference temperature": If the sender and receiver of the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, you may need to download both configurations again in the case of diagnostics. First download the configuration containing the receiver. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 43 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 General information Product type designation AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF Firmware version V2.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 / - * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * Oversampling No * MSI No CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 35 mA Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.75 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 16 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 8 * For voltage measurement 8 * For resistance/resistance thermometer measurement 8 * For thermocouple measurement 8 permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit), max. 30 V Constant measurement current for resistancetype transmitter, typ. 2 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional processing times (depending on the parameterization of the active channels) Technical unit for temperature measurement adjustable Yes; C/F/K Input ranges (rated values), voltages * -1 V to +1 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 1 M * -250 mV to +250 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-250 mV to +250 mV) 1 M * -50 mV to +50 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-50 mV to +50 mV) 1 M * -80 mV to +80 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-80 mV to +80 mV) 1 M Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 45 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Input ranges (rated values), thermocouples * Type B Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type B) 1 M * Type C Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type C) 1 M * Type E Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type E) 1 M * Type J Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (type J) 1 M * Type K Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type K) 1 M * Type L Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type L) 1 M * Type N Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type N) 1 M * Type R Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type R) 1 M * Type S Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type S) 1 M * Type T Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type T) 1 M * Type U Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type U) 1 M * Type TXK/TXK(L) to GOST Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type TXK/TXK(L) to GOST) 1 M Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometer * Ni 100 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 100) 1 M * Ni 1000 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 1000) 1 M * LG-Ni 1000 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (LG-Ni 1000) 1 M * Ni 120 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 120) 1 M * Ni 200 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 200) 1 M * Ni 500 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Ni 500) 1 M * Pt 100 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 100) 1 M * Pt 1000 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 1000) 1 M * Pt 200 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 200) 1 M * Pt 500 Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Pt 500) 1 M Input ranges (rated values), resistors * 0 to 150 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 150 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 300 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 300 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 600 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 600 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 3000 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 3000 ohms) 1 M * 0 to 6000 ohms Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (0 to 6000 ohms) 1 M * PTC Yes; 15 bit * Input resistance (PTC) 1 M Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 47 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Thermocouple (TC) Temperature compensation - parameterizable Yes - Reference channel of the module Yes - internal comparison point Yes; with BaseUnit type A1 - Reference channel of the group Yes - Number of reference channel groups 4; Group 0 to 3 - fixed reference temperature Yes Cable length * shielded, max. 200 m; 50 m with thermocouples Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta) Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Basic conversion time, including integration time (ms) - additional processing time for wirebreak check 2 ms; In the ranges resistance thermometers, resistors and thermocouples * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz * Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times * parameterizable Yes Encoder Connection of signal encoders * for voltage measurement Yes * for resistance measurement with two-wire connection Yes * for resistance measurement with three-wire No connection * for resistance measurement with four-wire connection No Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 %; 0.1 % for resistance thermometers and resistance Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.0009 %/K; 0.005 % / K at thermocouple ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.05 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.1 % * Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.1 % Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.05 % * Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.05 % Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 70 dB * Common mode voltage, max. 10 V * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes; two upper and two lower limit values in each case Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; channel by channel * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes; channel by channel Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 49 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1 Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 50 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Technical specifications Operational and basic error limits for thermal resistors Error limits for thermal resistors Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, in relation to input range) * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard 1.0 K * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 climatic 0.25 K * Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000 standard and climatic 0.4 K Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, in relation to input range) * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard 0.6 K * Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 climatic 0.13 K * Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 1000 standard and climatic 0.2 K Operational and basic error limits for thermocouples 1 Error limits for thermocouples Operational limit for thermocouples (in the entire temperature range) 1.5 K Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25 C) 1 K Overall error limits when using internal compensation * Operational limit (in the entire temperature range at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) 2.5 K * Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) 1.5 K 1 The indicated error limits apply as of the following temperatures: Thermocouple type T: -200 C Thermocouple type K: -100 C Thermocouple type B: +700 C Thermocouple type N: -150 C Thermocouple type E: -150 C Thermocouple type R: +200 C Thermocouple type S: +100 C Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 51 A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type / measuring range Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor resistance Deactivated * * * * * Voltage 50 mV, 80 mV, 250 mV, 1 V * * * * Resistor 150 , 300 , 600 , 3 k, 6 k * * * x Resistor PTC * * * * Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 Degrees Celsius x Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 climatic Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 climatic Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 LG-Ni 1000 climatic LG-Ni 0.005 No reference channel mode No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 52 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor resistance Thermal resistor Pt100 Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 standard Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius x Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 standard Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 LG-Ni 1000 standard LG-Ni 0.005 Thermocouple Type B, N, E, R, S, * J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Reference channel of the module1 Degrees Celsius Internal reference junction Kelvin * Degrees Fahrenheit Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 32 Fixed reference temperature x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 Use of "Reference channel of the module": - Channel 0 must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius". - For each TC channel of this module that is intended to use channel 0 as reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Reference channel of the module". 2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3": - An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degree Celsius". - The "Reference junction" of this channel must be configured with "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3". - There must only be one RTD channel with "Reference junction" = "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" per group 0, 1, 2, 3 and I/O device! - Each TC channel in the I/O device which is to use this reference must be configured with "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" at "Reference junction". - If the reference channel is on channel 0, it can be used simultaneously as "Reference channel of the module". Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 53 Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type for PROFINET. Table A- 2 Dependencies on the measurement type Measurement type Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolu- Underflow tion Diagnostics Overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction Deactivated * * * * * * * Voltage - * x x - x - Resistor - * x x x x - Resistor - * x - - x - Thermal resistor x 2 and 3 decimal places x x x x - Thermocouple x 2 and 3 decimal places x x x x x1) x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant Property is not relevant if "Fixed reference temperature" is used 1 Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Slot reference junction Temperature unit Deactivated * * * Voltage 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 1 V * Resistor 150 300 600 3 k 6 k Resistor Thermal resistor Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction * * * * * * * x - x - * * * x x x - PTC3 * * * x - x - Pt100 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.003916 Pt 0.003902 Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 Degrees Celsius x x x - Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 54 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Measurement type Thermal resistor Thermal resistor Measuring range Temperature coefficient Slot reference junction Temperature unit Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 climatic Pt No refer0.00385055 ence chanPt 0.003916 nel mode Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 Degrees Celsius Pt100 Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 standard Pt No refer0.00385055 ence chanPt 0.003916 nel mode Pt 0.003902 Pt 0.00392 Pt 0.00385 Degrees Celsius Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 climatic Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius Ni100 Ni120 Ni200 Ni500 Ni1000 standard Ni 0.00618 Ni 0.00672 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius LG-Ni 1000 climatic LG-Ni 0.005 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius LG-Ni 0.005 No reference channel mode Degrees Celsius LG-Ni 1000 standard Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - x x x - Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 55 Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient Slot reference junction Temperature unit Thermocouple Type B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK * Degrees Reference Celsius channel of the module1 Degrees Fahrenheit Internal reference Kelvin junction Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction x x x x x x x * Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 32 Fixed reference temperature Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant 1 Use of the "Reference channel of the module": - Channel 0 must be set to "Pt100 climatic" with the temperature unit "Degrees Celsius". - For each TC channel of this module that is intended to use channel 0 as reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Enable". 2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0": - An RTD channel must be configured as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit "Degree Celsius". - "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" must be configured as the "Reference junction" of this channel. - There must only be one RTD channel with "Reference junction activated" = "Enabled" per group and line! - Each TC channel of this line which is to use this reference must be configured with "Enabled" for "Reference junction activated". 3 Underflow = 8000H; wire break and overflow lead to 01H (triggered) (no diagnostics), wire break and overflow are therefore not relevant. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 56 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the measuring range of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 57 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 58 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number x 22); channel number = 0 to 7 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 59 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 60 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 7 Codes for measurement type The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 3 Codes for measurement type Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Resistor, 2-wire connection 0000 0110 Thermal resistor, 2-wire connection 0000 1001 Thermocouple 0000 1010 Codes for measuring range The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 4 Codes for measuring range Measuring range Code Voltage 50 mV 0000 0001 80 mV 0000 0010 250 mV 0000 0011 1V 0000 0101 Resistor 150 0000 0001 300 0000 0010 600 0000 0011 3 k 0000 0100 6 k 0000 0101 PTC 0000 1111 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 61 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Measuring range Code Thermal resistor climatic Pt 100 0000 0000 Pt 200 0000 0111 Pt 500 0000 1000 Pt 1000 0000 1001 Thermal resistor standard Pt 100 0000 0010 Pt 200 0000 1011 Pt 500 0000 0100 Pt 1000 0000 0101 Thermal resistor climatic Ni 100 0000 0001 Ni 120 0000 1101 Ni 200 0001 0001 Ni 500 0001 0011 Ni 1000 0000 1010 Thermal resistor standard Ni 100 0000 0011 Ni 120 0000 1100 Ni 200 0001 0000 Ni 500 0001 0010 Ni 1000 0000 0110 Thermal resistor LG Ni 1000 climatic 0001 1101 LG Ni 1000 standard 0001 1100 Thermocouple Type B 0000 0000 Type N 0000 0001 Type E 0000 0010 Type R 0000 0011 Type S 0000 0100 Type J 0000 0101 Type L 0000 0110 Type T 0000 0111 Type K 0000 1000 Type U 0000 1001 Type C 0000 1010 Type TXK 0000 1011 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 62 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Codes for temperature coefficient The following table contains the codes for the temperature coefficients of the analog input module. You must enter these codes at byte x+2 (see previous figure). Table A- 5 Codes for temperature coefficient for temperature measurement Temperature coefficient Code Pt 0.00385055 0000 0000 Pt 0.003916 0000 0001 Pt 0.003902 0000 0010 Pt 0.00392 0000 0011 Pt 0.00385 0000 0100 Ni 0.00618 0000 1000 Ni 0.00672 0000 1001 LG-Ni 0.005 0000 1010 Limits for hardware interrupts The following tables contain the permitted limits for hardware interrupts (in each case, the usable value is given). The limits depend on the selected measurement type and the selected measuring range. The value for the overflow must be larger than the value for the underflow. The limits are specified as decimal values. The conversion to the respective temperature unit is (1 digit = 0.1) for the standard range and (1 digit = 0.01) for the climate range, see section Representation of analog values (Page 67). Table A- 6 Limits for resistor and voltage Resistor (all possible measuring range settings) Voltage 32510 32510 Overflow 1 -32511 Underflow Table A- 7 Limits for thermocouple types B, C, and E Thermocouple Type B C F Type C K C F Type E K C F K 20699 32765 23431 24999 32765 27731 11999 21919 14731 Overflow -1199 -1839 1533 -1199 -1839 1533 -2699 -4539 33 Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 63 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Table A- 8 Limits for thermocouple types R, S, J, and L Thermocouple Types R, S C Type J F K C Type L F K C F K 20189 32765 22921 14499 26419 17231 11499 21019 14231 Overflow -1699 -2739 1033 -2099 -3459 633 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow Table A- 9 Limits for thermocouple types T, K, and U Thermocouple Type T C Type K F K C Type U F K C F K 5399 10039 8131 16219 29515 18951 8499 15619 11231 Overflow -2699 -4539 33 -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow Table A- 10 Limits for thermocouple types N and TXK Thermocouple Type N C Type TXK F K C F K 15499 28219 18231 10499 19219 13231 Overflow -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow Table A- 11 Limits for thermal resistor Thermal resistor Standard C Pt Ni, Ni-LG Climatic F K C F 9999 18319 12731 15499 31099 Overflow -2429 -4053 303 -14499 -22899 Underflow 2949 5629 5681 29499 32765 Overflow -1049 -1569 1683 -10499 -15699 Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 64 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Parameter data record A.3 Errors when transferring the data record A.3 Errors when transferring the data record Error transferring the data record The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the STEP 7 online help). The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown. Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. * Check the station to determine whether the module is plugged or pulled. * Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header information. Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 65 Parameter data record A.4 Switchable wire break check A.4 Switchable wire break check Function The "Switchable wire break check" is available for thermocouples. It switches off the wire break check for the module. This is required, for example, to calibrate thermocouples, since the test current necessary for a wire break check leads to measurement errors during calibration. The function has no effect on channels that are not assigned in the thermocouple mode. Note Startup and parameter reassignment The wire break check is switched on again at each startup and during any parameter reassignment of the module. Switch-off via the user program You can deactivate the wire break check using data record 237. Table A- 12 Structure of data record 237, switchable wire break check Byte Function Format Value Description 0 Command UBYTE 80H Wire break check 1 Identifier UBYTE 00H Not relevant 2 Channel number UBYTE FFH All channels 3 Calibration step UBYTE FFH First triggering 4 Measurement type UBYTE 00H Not relevant 5 Measuring range UBYTE 00H Not relevant 6 Action UBYTE 01H Deactivate wire break check 02H Activate wire break check 00H Not relevant 7...17 Reserved UBYTE Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 66 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB B Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Note Temperature values The digitized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module. The following resolution therefore does not apply to temperature values. Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 67 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 68 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range 1 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF > 1.176 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 1.176 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 1V Nominal range 20736 5100 0.75 V 1 1 36.17 V 0 0 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -0.75 V -27648 9400 -1 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -1.176 V -32768 8000 <-1.176 V Table B- 5 1 V Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring range 500 mV to 50 mV Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 32767 7FFF > 294.0 mV > 94.1 mV > 58.8 mV Overflow 32511 7EFF 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV Nominal range 20736 5100 187.5 mV 60 mV 37.5 mA 1 1 9.04 V 2.89 V 1.81 V 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -187.5 mV -60 mV -37.5 mV -27648 9400 -250 mV -80 mV -50 mV -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -294.0 mV -94.1 mV -58.8 mV -32768 8000 <-294.0 mV <-94.1 mV <-58.8 mV Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 69 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible resistance-type sensors. Table B- 6 Resistance-type sensors from 150 to 6000 Values Dec. Resistance-type sensor range Hex. 150 Range 300 600 3000 6000 32767 7FFF > 176.38 > 352.77 > 705.53 > 3527.7 > 7055.3 Overflow 32511 7EFF 176.38 352.77 705.53 3527.7 7055.3 Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 150 300 600 3000 6000 Nominal range 20736 5100 112.5 225 450 2250 4500 1 1 5.43 m 10.85 m 21.70 m 108.5 m 217 m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 8000 (negative values are physically impossible) 1 Underflow1 If the resistors are not connected correctly or the conductor resistance is too high Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 70 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Representation of analog values B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Note A higher resolution can be configured for the measuring range for the standard thermal resistors, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 31). The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermal resistors. Table B- 7 Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 standard Pt x00 standard in C (1 digit = 0.1 C) Values Pt x00 standard in F (1 digit = 0.1 F) Values Pt x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) Values Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. > 1000.0 32767 7FFF > 1832.0 32767 1000.0 : 10000 2710 1832.0 : : : 850.1 8501 2135 850.0 8500 : : -200.0 -200.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1273.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC Overrange : : : : : 1562.1 15621 3D05 1123.3 11233 2BE1 2134 1562.0 15620 3D04 1123.2 11232 2BE0 : : : : : : : -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 2DC -2001 F82F -328.1 -3281 F32F 73.1 731 2DB : : : : : : : : : -243.0 -2430 F682 -405.4 -4054 F02A 30.2 302 12E < -243.0 -32768 8000 < -405.4 -32768 8000 < 30.2 32768 8000 Table B- 8 Range Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 climatic Pt x00 climatic in C (1 digit = 0.01 C) Values Values Hex. Pt x00 climatic in F (1 digit = 0.01 F) Dec. > 155.00 Range Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF > 311.00 32767 7FFF Overflow 155.00 15500 3C8C 311.00 31100 797C Overrange : : : : : : 130.01 13001 32C9 266.01 26601 67E9 130.00 13000 32C8 266.00 26600 67E8 : : : : : : -120.00 -12000 D120 -184.00 -18400 B820 -120.01 -12001 D11F -184.01 -18401 B81F : : : : : : -145.00 -14500 C75C -229.00 -22900 A68C < -145.00 -32768 8000 < -229.00 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 71 Representation of analog values B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Table B- 9 Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 standard Ni x00 standard in C (1 digit = 0.1 C) Values Ni x00 standard in F (1 digit = 0.1 F) Values Dec. Hex. > 295.0 32767 295.0 2950 : 250.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 563.0 32767 B86 563.0 5630 : : : 2501 9C5 482.1 250.0 2500 9C4 : : : -60.0 -600 FDA8 -60.1 -601 FDA7 : : : -105.0 -1050 FBE6 < -105.0 -32768 8000 Table B- 10 Ni x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) Values Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 568.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 15FE 568.2 5682 1632 Overrange : : : : : 4821 12D5 523.3 5233 1471 482.0 4820 12D4 523.2 5232 1470 : : : : : : -76.0 -760 FD08 213.2 2132 854 -76.1 -761 FD07 213.1 2131 853 : : : : : : -157.0 -1570 F9DE 168.2 1682 692 < -157.0 -32768 8000 < 168.2 32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 climatic Ni x00 climatic in C (1 digit = 0.01 C) Values Values Hex. Ni x00 climatic in F (1 digit = 0.01 F) Dec. > 295.00 32767 295.00 Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 327.66 32767 7FFF Overflow 29500 733C 327.66 32766 7FFE Overrange : : : : : : 250.01 25001 61A9 280.01 28001 6D61 250.00 25000 61A8 280.00 28000 6D60 : : : : : : -60.00 -6000 E890 -76.00 -7600 E250 -60.01 -6001 E88F -76.01 -7601 E24F : : : : : : -105.00 -10500 D6FC -157.00 -15700 C2AC < - 105.00 -32768 8000 < - 157.00 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 72 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Note A higher resolution can be configured for thermocouples, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 31). The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermocouples. Table B- 11 Thermocouple type B Type B in C Values Values Hex. Type B in F Values Hex. Type B in K Dec. > 2070.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 2070.0 : 20700 50DC 3276.6 : : : 1820.1 18201 4719 1820.0 18200 4718 : : 0.0 0 -0.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 2343.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 32766 7FFE 2343.2 23432 5B88 Overrange : : : : : 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2093.3 20933 51C5 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2093.2 20932 51C4 : : : : : : : 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB : : : : : : : : : -120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC < -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Values Table B- 12 Range Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermocouple type C Type C in C Values Values Hex. Type C in F Dec. Hex. Type C in K Dec. > 2500.0 32767 2500.0 : Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 7FFF > 2773.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 25000 61A8 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2773.2 27732 6C54 Overrange : : : : : : : : 2315.1 23151 5A6F 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2588.3 25883 651B 2315.0 23150 5A6E 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2588.2 25882 651A : : : : : : : : : 0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC -0.1 -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB : : : : : : : : : -120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC < -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 73 Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 13 Thermocouple type E Type E in C Values Values Hex. Type E in F Values Hex. Type E in K Dec. > 1200.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 2192.0 32767 1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 : : : 1000.1 10001 2711 1000.0 10000 : : -270.0 < -270.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1473.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Overrange : : : : : : 1832.1 18321 4791 1273.3 12733 31BD 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC : : : : : : : -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Values Dec. Hex. Type J in K Dec. Hex. Table B- 14 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type J Type J in C Values Dec. Hex. Type J in F > 1450.0 32767 7FFF > 2642.0 32767 7FFF > 1723.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1450.0 14500 38A4 2642.0 26420 6734 1723.2 17232 4350 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1200.1 12001 2EE1 2192.1 21921 55A1 1473.3 14733 398D 1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C : : : : : : : : : -210.0 -2100 F7CC -346.0 -3460 F27C 63.2 632 0278 < -210.0 -32768 8000 < -346.0 -32768 8000 < 63.2 -32768 8000 Values Values Table B- 15 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type K Type K in C Values Dec. Hex. Type K in F Dec. Hex. Type K in K Range Dec. Hex. > 1622.0 32767 7FFF > 2951.6 32767 7FFF > 1895.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1622.0 16220 3F5C 2951.6 29516 734C 1895.2 18952 4A08 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1372.1 13721 3599 2501.7 25017 61B9 1645.3 16453 4045 1372.0 13720 3598 2501.6 25016 61B8 1645.2 16452 4044 : : : : : : : : : -270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 < -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 74 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 16 Thermocouple type L Type L in C Values Values Hex. Type L in F Values Hex. Type L in K Dec. > 1150.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 2102.0 32767 1150.0 11500 2CEC 2102.0 : : : 900.1 9001 2329 900.0 9000 : : -200.0 < -200.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1423.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 21020 521C 1423.2 14232 3798 Overrange : : : : : : 1652.1 16521 4089 1173.3 11733 2DD5 2328 1652.0 16520 4088 1173.2 11732 2DD4 : : : : : : : -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Values Dec. Hex. Table B- 17 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type N Type N in C Values Values Hex. Type N in F Dec. Hex. Type N in K Dec. > 1550.0 1550.0 32767 7FFF > 2822.0 32767 7FFF > 1823.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 15500 3C8C 2822.0 28220 6E3C 1823.2 18232 4738 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1300.1 13001 32C9 2372.1 23721 5CA9 1573.3 15733 3D75 1300.0 13000 32C8 2372.0 23720 5CA8 1573.2 15732 3D74 : : : : : : : : : -270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 < -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Table B- 18 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouples R and S Types R, S in C Values Values Hex. Types R, S in F Dec. Hex. Types R, S in K Dec. > 2019.0 32767 2019.0 : Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 7FFF > 2292.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 20190 4EDE 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2292.2 22922 598A Overrange : : : : : : : : 1769.1 17691 451B 3216.3 32163 7DA3 2042.3 20423 4FC7 1769.0 17690 451A 3216.2 32162 7DA2 2042.2 20422 4FC6 : : : : : : : : : -50.0 -500 FE0C -58.0 -580 FDBC 223.2 2232 08B8 -50.1 -501 FE0B -58.1 -581 FDBB 223.1 2231 08B7 : : : : : : : : : -170.0 -1700 F95C -274.0 -2740 F54C 103.2 1032 0408 < -170.0 -32768 8000 < -274.0 -32768 8000 < 103.2 < 1032 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB 75 Representation of analog values B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 19 Thermocouple type T Type T in C Values Values Hex. Type T in F Values Hex. Type T in K Dec. > 540.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 1004.0 32767 540.0 5400 1518 1004.0 : : : 400.1 4001 0FA1 400.0 4000 : : -270.0 < -270.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 813.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 10040 2738 813.2 8132 1FC4 Overrange : : : : : : 752.1 7521 1D61 673.3 6733 1AAD 0FA0 752.0 7520 1D60 673.2 6732 1AAC : : : : : : : -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Dec. Hex. Table B- 20 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type U Type U in C Values Values Hex. Type U in F Dec. Hex. Type U in K Dec. > 850.0 850.0 32767 7FFF > 1562.0 32767 7FFF > 1123.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 2738.0 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 600.1 6001 1771 1112.1 11121 2B71 873.3 8733 221D 600.0 6000 1770 1112.0 11120 2B70 873.2 8732 221C : : : : : : : : : -200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC < -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Values Hex. Type TXK in K Dec. Hex. Table B- 21 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type TXK (GOST) Type TXK in C Values Dec. Hex. Type Values TXK in F Dec. Range > 1050.0 32767 7FFF > 1922.0 32767 7FFF >1323.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1050.0 10500 2904 1922.0 19220 4B14 1323.2 13232 33B0 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 800.1 8001 1F41 1472.1 14721 3981 1073.3 10733 29ED 800.0 8000 1F40 1472.0 14720 3980 1073.2 10732 29EC : : : : : : : : : 0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273 2730 0AAA : : : : : : : : : -200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC < -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 <73.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underflow Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) 76 Manual, 09/2018, A5E32942580-AB ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data records Representation of analog B ___________________ values 08/2018 A5E42405270-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42405270-AA 06/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 4 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 3 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11 2.2 Spare part compatibility ..........................................................................................................13 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................16 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17 4.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................21 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 Scalable measuring range ......................................................................................................25 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................27 Evaluate status and limits of scalable measuring range.........................................................28 4.5 REAL representation...............................................................................................................31 4.6 Address space ........................................................................................................................32 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 39 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................39 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................41 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................43 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 44 A Parameter data records......................................................................................................................... 51 B A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................51 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) .......53 A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) .............62 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 70 B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................71 B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................72 B.3 Representation of analog values for thermocouples ..............................................................73 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 5 Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 6 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 7 Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 8 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 9 Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 10 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 View of the module Module type and name LEDs for channel status LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class BU type Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number View of the module AI 4xTC HS Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog input module with 4 inputs Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign Limited exchange compatibility with analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1), see section Spare part compatibility (Page 13) Voltage measurement type can be set per channel Thermocouple (TC) measurement type can be set per channel Configurable diagnostics for each channel Configurable wire break check per channel Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits per channel) The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions STEP 7 Function GSD file TIA Portal PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Outlier suppression as of V15 with HSP 0265 X X1 Firmware update as of V15 with HSP 0265 X X Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 as of V15 with HSP 0265 X X Calibration in runtime as of V15 with HSP 0265 X X Module-internal shared input (MSI) as of V15 with HSP 0265 X - REAL representation as of V15 with HSP 0265 X - Scalable measuring range as of V15 with HSP 0265 X - Configuration in RUN as of V15 with HSP 0265 X X Value status (PROFINET IO only) as of V15 with HSP 0265 X - 1 Outlier suppression is always enabled for configuration with the PROFIBUS GSD file. You can set this parameter via data record 128. You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connection See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 12 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Product overview 2.2 Spare part compatibility 2.2 Spare part compatibility Replacement of an AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) With an AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1), you can replace an AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1), that is configured for the "Thermocouple" or "Voltage" measuring ranges. You do not have to perform new configuration or new wiring. The "Outlier suppression" function is enabled. You can find additional information on outlier suppression in the section Explanation of parameters (Page 21), "Outlier suppression" section. Note Restricted measuring range functionality The AI 4xTC HS module (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) does not support RTD and resistance measuring ranges. If you have configured these measuring ranges, the parameter assignment is rejected with the diagnostic message "Parameter assignment error". Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 13 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4xTC HS module with the terminal assignments. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 14 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 2-wire connection for thermocouples The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog input module AI 4xTC HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection of thermocouples Backplane bus interface Mn+ Measuring line positive, channel n Mn- Measuring line negative, channel n L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Multiplexer P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) AI0 to AI3 Channel status LED (green) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for connection of thermocouples Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The following table lists the measuring range you can set for each measuring type: Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Deactivated - Thermocouple (TC) Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, U, TXK (acc. to GOST) Voltage 50 mV / 80 mV / 250 mV / 1 V See also Technical specifications (Page 44) Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 16 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AI 4xTC HS Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7 configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 53). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Value range * Disable * Enable Diagnostics: * Reference junction * Disable Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Wire break check Diagnostics: Wire break Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Enable Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel Channel Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Type/range of measurement Value range * Deactivated * Voltage * - 50 mV - 80 mV - 250 mV - 1V Temperature unit Scope with configuration software e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Type K (NiCr-NiAl) Yes Channel Channel Enable Yes Channel Cannot be changed Degrees Celsius Yes Channel Module Fixed reference temperature Yes Channel Channel Type B (PtRh-PtRh) - Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) - Type E (NiCr-CuNi) - Type R (PtRh-Pt) - Type S (PtRh-Pt) - Type J (Fe-CuNi) - Type L (Fe-CuNi) - Type T (Cu-CuNi) - Type K (NiCr-NiAl) - Type U (Cu-CuNi) - Type C (WRe-WRe) - Type TXK * Disable * Enable * Degrees Celsius * Degrees Fahrenheit * Kelvin Reference junction * 2 Reconfiguration in RUN Thermocouple - Outlier suppression 1 Default Internal reference junction * Reference channel of group 0 * Reference channel of group 1 * Reference channel of group 2 * Reference channel of group 3 * Fixed reference temperature Fixed reference temperature Temperature 0 C Yes Channel - Smoothing * None None Yes Channel Channel * Weak * Medium * Strong Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 18 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Interference frequency suppression 1 Scalable measuring range 1 Measuring range resolution 1 Measuring range center 1 Value range * Default 60 Hz Reconfiguration in RUN Yes Channel Module Disable Yes Channel - 2 decimal places Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - Yes Channel - 50 * 16.6 Hz * None * Disable * Enable * 2 decimal places * 3 decimal places * Value within the nominal range 0 of the measuring range Enable High limit 1 1 * Value (INT) * Value (REAL) Disable Disable 4 * 13720 * 1372.0 4 Hardware interrupt * low limit 1 1 * Enable Low limit 1 1 * Value (INT) * -2699 * Value (REAL) 4 * -269.9 4 Disable Disable High limit Disable Disable Enable * Value (INT) * 13720 * Value (REAL) 4 * 1372.0 4 Disable Disable Hardware interrupt * low limit 2 1 * GSD file PROFIBUS DP Hz 3 Hardware interrupt * high limit 1 1 * 21 GSD file PROFINET IO 50 Hz * Hardware interrupt * high limit 2 1 * Scope with configuration software e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Enable Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Low limit 2 1 Potential group Value range Default * Value (INT) * Value (REAL) * Use potential group of the left module * Enable new potential group 4 * -2699 * -269.9 Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Yes Channel - No Module Module 4 Use potential group of the left module 1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 13 bytes. 2 Only for configuration with PROFIBUS GSD file: The set reference junction is used with the additional parameter "Kx Reference junction activated" in the case of "Enable". In the case of "Disable", no "fixed reference temperature" is used for TC. 3 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz. 4 Only for REAL representation. Note Unused channels "Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module. A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH (REAL representation: 7F800000H). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 20 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Reference junction Enabling of the reference junction diagnostics if the reference temperature of the reference junction needs to be determined for the TC channel being operated. Reference junction using the PROFINET GSD file As reference junction for the TC measurement, a BaseUnit with internal temperature sensor (BU..T) or the reference channel of the group 0, 1, 2, 3 can be used. A possible parameter assignment is represented below: Table 4- 3 TC channel Setting Description Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group. Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 C. As a result, no temperature compensation is performed. Note Shared Device and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" If the transmitter and receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, then both IO controllers must be performing data exchange with the IO device to ensure error-free operation of the temperature compensation. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 21 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Reference junction using the PROFIBUS GSD file As reference junction for the TC measurement, a BaseUnit with internal temperature sensor (BU..T) or the reference channel of the group 0, 1, 2, 3 can be used. Table 4- 4 TC channel Setting Description Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type. Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3 The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group. Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 C. As a result, no temperature compensation is performed. Setting Description Channel x Reference junction activated * Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting "Fixed reference temperature". * Enable: Channel x is configured with the setting selected above. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics if the measured value falls below the underrange. Wire break check Enable for wire break check. The module only detects an interruption at the input when the wire break check is activated. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics, if the module detects interruption at the corresponding configured input. Type/range of measurement See section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 16). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 22 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Outlier suppression Suppresses interference pulses in analog input modules that can be caused, for example, by switching processes in the system. The last measured values are statistically analyzed (box plot). Limits within which a new measured value is expected are derived from the distribution (scatter) of the measured values. These limits are dynamically adjusted when the distribution of the measured values changes. New measured values that lie outside the determined limits are suppressed, i.e. the last value is kept. Faults are suppressed up to a length of three module cycles. On the other hand, actual jumps in the input signal are delayed by the same time. Temperature unit Selection between Degrees Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin as the temperature unit for the selected measuring range. Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed using filtering. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels. Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module. The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This specification is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak (k = 4) Medium (k = 8) Strong (k = 16) Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xTC HS Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 23 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Interference frequency suppression Suppresses the interferences affecting analog input modules that are caused by the frequency of the AC voltage network used. The frequency of the AC voltage network is likely to have a negative effect on measured values particularly with measurement in the low voltage range and on thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant. Measuring range resolution Parameters for the thermocouple measurement type. Allows you to increase the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places for a configurable section of the measuring range. See section Scalable measuring range (Page 25). Measuring range center Determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned. The value must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It is specified in integers. Maximum / Minimum Corresponds to overflow / underflow for the scalable measuring range. Hardware interrupt enable Enabling of a hardware interrupt if the high limit 1/2 or the low limit 1/2 is violated. Low limit 1/2 Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated. High limit 1/2 Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated. Potential group Specifies that a BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located on this slot (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 24 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4 Scalable measuring range Introduction The scalable measuring range is available for the temperature measuring ranges of thermocouples. The measuring ranges for voltage are not supported. The scalable measuring range is valid for the following ranges: Nominal range Underrange Overrange Function The scalable measuring range is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the module. It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable section. The "Measuring range resolution" parameter determines the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places. The "Measuring range center" parameter determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned. Value ranges Table 4- 5 Value ranges Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Values hex. 2 decimal places 3 decimal places Overflow > 325.11 > 32.511 7FFFH High limit 325.11 32.511 7EFFH Measuring range center 0 0 0H Low limit -325.12 -32.512 8100H Underflow <-325.12 <-32.512 8000H To obtain an absolute temperature, the measuring range center in the application program (as offset) must be calculated with the value of the user data of the scalable measuring range. The measuring range center is always output in the user data as the value "0". The user data are correspondingly mapped to the bipolar input ranges in S7 format. Underflow / overflow is also formed in accordance with the limits of S7. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 25 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Rules The measuring range center must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It is specified in integers. The scalable measuring range is spanned symmetrically over the measuring range center. Depending on the resolution, various value ranges result (, ). The scalable measuring range is limited by underflow and overflow of the underlying measuring range: - It is clipped at the underflow when it falls below the limit. - It is clipped at the overflow when it exceeds the limit (). Example The following example illustrates the effect of scalable measuring ranges: Scalable measuring range with 2 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format Scalable measuring range with 3 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format Scalable measuring range which is cut off at the overflow of the underlying measuring range (clipping) Figure 4-2 Examples of scalable measuring ranges Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 26 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4.1 Configuration Requirement You must select a valid temperature measuring range for configuration. Configuration The function is activated using the "Scalable measuring range" parameter. The following figure shows an example of a configuration in STEP 7: Figure 4-3 Configuration for the scalable measuring range Reference You will find more information on the configuration in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 27 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range 4.4.2 Evaluate status and limits of scalable measuring range Evaluation in the user program In the user program, you can evaluate the status and the limits of the scalable measuring range with data record 235, which may result by reaching underflow/overflow. Structure of data record 235 Figure 4-4 Structure of data record 235 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure 4-5 Header information of data record 235 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 28 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameter. If the corresponding bit is set to "1", the parameter is activated. * x = 2 + (channel number x 8) Figure 4-6 Structure of data record 235 - channel parameter byte x to x+7 Description of the parameters Table 4- 6 Description of the parameters from data record 235 Parameter Description Scalable measuring range enabled 1 = Function is active for this channel. Clipping 1 = Scalable measuring range cut off at the overflow / underflow of the underlying measuring range (see Figure (Page 26)). Resolution 2 or 3 decimal places Measuring range center Temperature in whole C / F / K ("working point" for the scaling) Overflow/underflow Limits of the scalable measuring range Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 29 Parameters/address space 4.4 Scalable measuring range Example The following example shows the values for a thermocouple type T: Table 4- 7 Hex. value Example of thermocouple type T Dec. value Evaluation of data record 235 00H 0 V0.0 08H 8 8 bytes 03H 3 Scalable measuring range active and clipped (clipping) 02H 2 Resolution: 2 decimal places 012CH 300 Measuring range center: 300 C 5DC0H 24000 Overflow (Maximum): 240.00 + 300 = 540.00 C Scalable measuring range is clipped at the overflow. 8100H -32512 Underflow (Minimum): -325.12 + 300 = -25.12 C Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 30 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.5 REAL representation 4.5 REAL representation Special features of REAL representation If you have configured the module with REAL representation, the user data and hardware interrupt limits are displayed in REAL data format (32-bit floating point number) instead of S7 format. The representation of the measured values in the REAL representation is always related to a physical unit, unlike in S7 representation. This physical unit results from the measuring range you have set. For temperature ranges, the physical unit is determined by the "Temperature unit" parameter. REAL representation has no influence on the overranges or underranges, the overflow or underflow diagnostics, or the QI characteristics. Note Substitute value for REAL representation With REAL representation, the overflow of the substitute value 7F800000H is output, for underflow it is substitute value FF800000H. Examples The following examples show value ranges of different measuring ranges in REAL representation: Table 4- 8 Value range in REAL representation Measuring range Value range Unit Voltage 1 V - 1.0 V to + 1.0 V V Voltage 50 mV - 50.0 mV to + 50.0 mV mV Thermocouple type K - 270.00 C to +1372.00 C Configured temperature unit (C, F, K) Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 31 Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space 4.6 Address space The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input. Configuration options of AI 4xTC HS You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible: Table 4- 9 Configuration options with GSD file Configuration Short designation/module name in the GSD file 1 x 4-channel without value status AI 4xTC HS V1.0 1 x 4-channel with value status AI 4xTC HS V1.0, QI Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Integrated in the hardware catalog STEP 7, as of V15 with HSP0265 GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP X X X X X --- 1 x 4-channel with value status for module-internal Shared Input with up to 4 submodules AI 4xTC HS V1.0, MSI 1 X X --- 1 x 4-channel with REAL representation AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL X X --- 1 x 4-channel with REAL representation and value status AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, QI X X --- 1 x 4-channel with REAL representation, value status for module-internal Shared Input up to 4 submodules AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, MSI 1 X X --- 1 When using the module in a shared device, ensure that you only configure associated MSI submodules for a basic submodule. Value status (Quality Information, QI) The value status is always activated for the following module versions: AI 4xTC HS V1.0, QI AI 4xTC HS V1.0, MSI AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, QI AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, MSI Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 32 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: The channel is disabled or the wiring, the value created on the channel, etc. is incorrect. Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, QI The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-7 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, QI with value status Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, MSI The channels 0 to 3 of the module are copied in up to 4 submodules with configuration 1 x 4-channel module (Module-internal shared input, MSI). Channels 0 to 3 are then available with identical input values in different submodules. These submodules can be assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each IO controller has read access to the same channels. The number of available submodules depends on the used interface module. Please observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 33 Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space Value status (Quality Information, QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs. For the first submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect. For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready). The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 1 and 2. Figure 4-8 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, MSI with value status, submodule 1 and 2 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 34 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 3 and 4. Figure 4-9 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, MSI with value status, submodule 3 and 4 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 35 Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, QI The following figure shows the assignment of the address space in REAL representation with value status (Quality Information (QI)). In REAL representation, each channel occupies 4 bytes in the process image of the inputs. The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-10 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, QI with value status Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 36 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, MSI For the configuration as a 1 x 4-channel module REAL MSI, the channels react as in the 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, MSI configuration. In REAL representation, each channel occupies 4 bytes in the process image of the inputs. Figure 4-11 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, MSI with value status, submodule 1 and 2 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 37 Parameters/address space 4.6 Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 3 and 4. Figure 4-12 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel AI 4xTC HS V1.0, REAL, MSI with value status, submodule 3 and 4 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 38 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 4xTC HS: DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 39 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 43). LED DIAG Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status/channel error LED Table 5- 2 Status and error display of the LED channel status / channel error LEDs Channel status Meaning Channel error Channel deactivated Off Off Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On Not permitted (error) On On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 40 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 Violation of high limit 1 Violation of low limit 2 Violation of high limit 2 You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data. Figure 5-2 OB start information Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 5- 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information Data block name Content Comment Bytes USI (User Structure Identifier) W#16#0001 additional interrupt information for hardware interrupts of the I/O module 2 Channel 0 to 3 of the I/O module 1 B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1 B#16#04 Violation of high limit 1 B#16#05 Violation of low limit 2 B#16#06 Violation of high limit 2 Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt. Channel B#16#00 to B#16#03 Event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Event Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 41 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Diagnostic error interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupt lost Reference channel error Error Violation of low limit Violation of high limit Wire break Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 42 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution Wire break 6H Resistance of sensor circuit too high Use a different sensor type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate diagnostics * Connect or deactivate the channel Violation of high limit1 Violation of low limit1 7H Value lies above the overrange. Correct module/sensor interplay 8H Value lies below the underrange. Correct module/sensor interplay Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. Incorrect parameter assignment. Correct the parameter assignment (wire break diagnostics only allowed with the permitted measuring ranges). Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Check BaseUnit type * Select correct reference junction through parameter assignment2 * Check whether the reference junction (reference channel of the group 0, 1, 2, 3) is only assigned once as the sender in the entire setup. Reference channel error (reference junction) 15H Reference temperature of the reference junction for the TC channel being operated with compensation is invalid. Hardware interrupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not be signaled because too many hardware interrupts are pending. Channel temporarily unavailable 1FH * * Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not read in process values in this state. The channel is currently being calibrated. Correct the program or the process * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. * Complete calibration. 1 The alarm refers to the diagnostics and depends on the configured measuring range. 2 Shared device and "Reference temperature" diagnostics: If the sender and receiver of the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, you may need to download both configurations again in the case of diagnostics. First download the configuration containing the receiver. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 43 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI 4xTC HS Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 General information Product type designation AI 4xTC HS Firmware version V1.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Measuring range scalable Yes Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 265/integrated as of V15.1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Configurable via GSD file * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode * Oversampling No * MSI Yes CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 37 mA Current consumption, max. 50 mA Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 44 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.9 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 16 byte; + 1 byte for QI information Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1 Analog inputs Number of analog inputs 4 permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit), max. 30 V Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional processing times (depending on the parameterization of the active channels) Technical unit for temperature measurement adjustable Yes; C/F/K Input ranges (rated values), voltages * -1 V to +1 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 1 M * -250 mV to +250 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-250 mV to +250 mV) 1 M * -50 mV to +50 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-50 mV to +50 mV) 1 M * -80 mV to +80 mV Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (-80 mV to +80 mV) 1 M Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 45 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 Input ranges (rated values), thermocouples * Type B Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type B) 1 M * Type C Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type C) 1 M * Type E Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type E) 1 M * Type J Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (type J) 1 M * Type K Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type K) 1 M * Type L Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type L) 1 M * Type N Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type N) 1 M * Type R Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type R) 1 M * Type S Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type S) 1 M * Type T Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type T) 1 M * Type U Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type U) 1 M * Type TXK/TXK(L) to GOST Yes; 16 bit incl. sign * Input resistance (Type TXK/TXK(L) to GOST) 1 M Thermocouple (TC) Temperature compensation - parameterizable Yes - Reference channel of the module No - internal comparison point Yes; with BaseUnit type A1 - Reference channel of the group Yes - Number of reference channel groups 4; Group 0 to 3 - fixed reference temperature Yes Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 46 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 Cable length * shielded, max. 200 m; 100 m for thermocouples Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta) Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Basic conversion time, including integration time (ms) - additional processing time for wirebreak check 1 ms * Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off * Conversion time (per channel) 180/60/50/1.25 ms Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 4 * parameterizable Yes * Step: None Yes * Step: low Yes * Step: Medium Yes * Step: High Yes Encoder Connection of signal encoders * for voltage measurement Yes Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 % Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K ) Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -70 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (rela- 0.03 % tive to input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.1 %; 0.3 % when SFU OFF Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.05 %; 0.2 % when SFU OFF Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 47 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 70 dB * Common mode voltage, max. 60 V; DC * Common mode interference, min. 90 dB Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes; two upper and two lower limit values in each case Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; channel by channel * Group error Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes; channel by channel Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 48 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1 Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for applications according to AMS 2750 Yes; Declaration of Conformity, see online support entry 109757262 Suitable for applications according to CQI-9 Yes; Based on AMS 2750 E Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 33 g Operational and basic error limits for thermocouples Error limits for thermocouples1 (Interference frequency suppression: 16.6 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz) Operational limit for thermocouples (in the entire temperature range) 1.5 K Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25 C) 1 K Overall error limits when using internal compensation 1 * Operational limit (in the entire temperature range at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) 2.5 K * Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) 1.5 K The indicated error limits apply as of the following temperatures: Thermocouple type T: -200 C Thermocouple type K: -100 C Thermocouple type B: +700 C Thermocouple type N: -150 C Thermocouple type E: -150 C Thermocouple type R: +200 C Thermocouple type S: +100 C Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 49 Technical specifications Error limits for thermocouples1 (Interference frequency suppression: None) Operational limit for thermocouples (in the entire temperature range) 3.75 K Operational limit for thermocouples type B, C, E, R, S (in the entire temperature range)1 7.5 K Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25 C) 2.5 K Basic error limit for thermocouples type B, C, E, R, S (operational limit at 5 K 25 C) Overall error limits when using internal compensation * Operational limit (in the entire temperature range at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min)2 5.25 K * Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C at static thermal state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min)3 3 K 1 The indicated error limits apply as of the following temperatures: Thermocouple type T: -200 C Thermocouple type K: -100 C Thermocouple type B: +700 C Thermocouple type N: -150 C Thermocouple type E: -150 C Thermocouple type R: +200 C Thermocouple type S: +100 C 2 For thermocouple type B, C, E, R, S: 9 K 3 For thermocouple type B, C, E, R, S: 5.5 K Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 50 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA A Parameter data records A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type / measuring range Measurement type Measuring range Reference junction Temperature unit Deactivated * * * Voltage 50 mV, 80 mV, 250 mV, 1 V * * Thermocouple Type B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK Internal reference junction Degrees Celsius Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 31 Degrees Fahrenheit Fixed reference temperature Kelvin x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant. 1 Use of "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3": For each TC channel in the IO device that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3". Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type for PROFINET. Table A- 2 Dependencies on the measurement type Measurement type Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Wire break check Underflow Overflow Wire break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction Deactivated * * * * * * * * Voltage - * - x x - x - x x1 x x2 Thermocouple x 2 and 3 decimal places x Diagnostics x x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant. 1 Property is only permitted if the "Wire break check" parameter is enabled. 2 Property is not relevant when "Fixed reference temperature" is used. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 51 Parameter data records A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Table A- 3 Dependencies of the measurement type / measuring range Measurement type Measuring range Slot referTemperature Wire ence junction unit break check Underflow Wire / overflow break Missing supply voltage L+ Reference junction Deactivated * * * * * * * * Voltage 50 mV, 80 * mV, 250 mV, 1 V * - x - x - Internal reference junction Degrees Celsius x x x2 x x Fixed reference temperature Degrees Celsius x x x2 x * Thermocouple Type B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK Diagnostics Degrees Reference Fahrenheit channel of Kelvin group 0, 1, 2, 31 Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant. 1 Use of "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3": For each TC channel in the IO device that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction" must be set to "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3". 2 Property is only allowed if the "Wire break check" is enabled. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 52 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the measuring range of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 53 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information in S7 representation. Figure A-2 Header information - S7 representation Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number * 22); channel number = 0 to 3 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 54 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 55 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 56 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 3 - S7 representation Codes for measurement type The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You need to enter these codes in the relevant byte x. Table A- 4 Codes for measurement type Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Thermocouple 0000 1010 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 57 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Codes for measuring range The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You need to enter these codes in the relevant x+1. Table A- 5 Codes for measuring range Measuring range Code Voltage 50 mV 0000 0001 80 mV 0000 0010 250 mV 0000 0011 1V 0000 0101 Thermocouple Type B 0000 0000 Type N 0000 0001 Type E 0000 0010 Type R 0000 0011 Type S 0000 0100 Type J 0000 0101 Type L 0000 0110 Type T 0000 0111 Type K 0000 1000 Type U 0000 1001 Type C 0000 1010 Type TXK 0000 1011 Limits for hardware interrupts The following tables contain the permitted limits for hardware interrupts (in each case, the usable value is given). The limits depend on the selected measurement type and the selected measuring range. The value for the high limit must be greater than the value for the low limit. Table A- 6 Voltage limits Voltage 32510 High limit -32511 Low limit Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 58 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Table A- 7 Limits for thermocouple types B, C, and E Thermocouple Type B C Type C F K C Type E F K C F K 20699 32765 23431 24999 32765 27731 11999 21919 14731 High limit -1199 -1839 1533 -1199 -1839 1533 -2699 -4539 33 Low limit Table A- 8 Limits for thermocouple types R, S, J, and L Thermocouple Types R, S C Type J F K C Type L F K C F K 20189 32765 22921 14499 26419 17231 11499 21019 14231 High limit -1699 -2739 1033 -2099 -3459 633 -1999 -3279 733 Low limit Table A- 9 Limits for thermocouple types T, K, and U Thermocouple Type T C Type K F K C Type U F K C F K 5399 10039 8131 16219 29515 18951 8499 15619 11231 High limit -2699 -4539 33 -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Low limit Table A- 10 Limits for thermocouple types N and TXK Thermocouple Type N C Type TXK F K C F K 15499 28219 18231 10499 19219 13231 High limit -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Low limit Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 59 Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Table A- 11 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible * Check station. * Module not correctly plugged in. * Check parameters of the WRREC block. DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct version number of the parameter block, see Figure A-2 Header information S7 representation (Page 54). DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of parameter blocks Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks, see Figure A-2 Header information - S7 representation (Page 54). DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits. DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set Correct diagnostics enables. (Dependence on measurement type, measuring range, wire break check) DFH 80H E1H 04H Value for hardware interrupt limit invalid Use valid hardware interrupt limits, see Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) (Page 53), "Limits for hardware interrupts" section. DFH 80H E1H 08H Code for interference frequency suppression invalid Use valid code for interference frequency suppression, see Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 3 - S7 representation (Page 57), byte x+3. DFH 80H E1H 09H Code for smoothing invalid Use valid code for smoothing. DFH 80H E1H 0FH Code for reference junction invalid or not permissible Use valid code for reference junction. DFH 80H E1H 10H Code for the measurement type invalid Use valid code for measurement type, see Table A-4 Codes for measurement type (Page 57). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 60 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation) Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H E1H 11H Code for the measuring range invalid Use valid code for measuring range, see Table A-5 Codes for measuring range (Page 58). DFH 80H E1H 12H Value for fixed reference temperature invalid Use valid reference temperature, see Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 3 - S7 representation (Page 57), byte x+8. DFH 80H E1H 21H Code for temperature unit invalid Use valid code for temperature unit Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 3 - S7 representation (Page 57), byte x+4. DFH 80H E1H 22H Code for measuring range resolution invalid or scalable measuring range not permissible * Use valid code for measuring range resolution. * Disable scalable measuring range. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 61 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUSGSD. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the measuring range of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 62 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Structure of data record 128 Figure A-4 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information in REAL representation. Figure A-5 Header information - REAL representation Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 63 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number * 26); channel number = 0 to 3 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 64 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+25 for channel 0 to 3 - REAL representation Codes for measurement type The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input module. You need to enter these codes in the relevant byte x. Table A- 12 Codes for measurement type Measurement type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Thermocouple 0000 1010 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 65 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Codes for measuring range The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module. You need to enter these codes in the relevant x+1. Table A- 13 Codes for measuring range Measuring range Code Voltage 50 mV 0000 0001 80 mV 0000 0010 250 mV 0000 0011 1V 0000 0101 Thermocouple Type B 0000 0000 Type N 0000 0001 Type E 0000 0010 Type R 0000 0011 Type S 0000 0100 Type J 0000 0101 Type L 0000 0110 Type T 0000 0111 Type K 0000 1000 Type U 0000 1001 Type C 0000 1010 Type TXK 0000 1011 Limits for hardware interrupts The following tables contain the permitted limits for hardware interrupts (in each case, the usable value is given). The limits depend on the selected measurement type and the selected measuring range. The value for the high limit must be greater than the value for the low limit. Table A- 14 Voltage limits Voltage 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 1V 58.7927 mV 94.0683 mV 293.963 mV 1.17585 V High limit -58.7945 mV -94.0712 mV -293.972 mV -1.17589 V Low limit Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 66 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Table A- 15 Limits for thermocouple types B, C, and E Thermocouple Type B C Type C F Type E K C F K C F K 2069.9 3276.5 2343.1 2499.9 3276.5 2773.1 1199.9 2191.9 1473.1 High limit -119.9 -183.9 153.3 -119.9 -183.9 153.3 -269.9 -453.9 3.3 Low limit Table A- 16 Limits for thermocouple types R, S, J, and L Thermocouple Types R, S Type J Type L C F K C F K C F K 2018.9 3276.5 2292.1 1449.9 2641.9 1723.1 1149.9 2101.9 1423.1 High limit -169.9 -273.9 103.3 -209.9 -345.9 63.3 -199.9 -327.9 73.3 Low limit Table A- 17 Limits for thermocouple types T, K, and U Thermocouple Type T C Type K F K Type U C F K C F K 539.9 1003.9 813.1 1621.9 2951.5 1895.1 849.9 1561.9 1123.1 High limit -269.9 -453.9 3.3 -269.9 -453.9 3.3 -199.9 -327.9 73.3 Low limit Table A- 18 Limits for thermocouple types N and TXK Thermocouple Type N C Type TXK F K 1549.9 2821.9 1823.1 1049.9 C 1921.9 F 1323.1 K High limit -269.9 -453.9 3.3 -199.9 -327.9 73.3 Low limit Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 67 Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Table A- 19 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible * Check station. * Module not correctly plugged in. * Check parameters of the WRREC block. DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct version number of the parameter block, see Figure A-5 Header information REAL representation (Page 63). DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of parameter blocks Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks, see Figure A-5 Header information - REAL representation (Page 63). DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits. DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set Correct diagnostics enables. (Dependence on measurement type, measuring range, wire break check) DFH 80H E1H 04H Value for hardware interrupt limit invalid Use valid hardware interrupt limits, see Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) (Page 62), "Limits for hardware interrupts" section. DFH 80H E1H 08H Code for interference frequency suppression invalid Use valid code for interference frequency suppression, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+25 for channel 0 to 3 - REAL representation (Page 65), byte x+3. DFH 80H E1H 09H Code for smoothing invalid Use valid code for smoothingFigure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+25 for channel 0 to 3 - REAL representation (Page 65). DFH 80H E1H 0FH Code for reference junction invalid or not permissible Use valid code for reference junctionFigure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+25 for channel 0 to 3 - REAL representation (Page 65). Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 68 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Parameter data records A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation) Error code in the STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DFH 80H E1H 10H Code for the measurement type invalid Use valid code for measurement type, see Table A-12 Codes for measurement type (Page 65). DFH 80H E1H 11H Code for the measuring range invalid Use valid code for measuring range, see Table A-13 Codes for measuring range (Page 66). DFH 80H E1H 12H Value for fixed reference temperature invalid Use valid reference temperature, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+25 for channel 0 to 3 - REAL representation (Page 65), byte x+8. DFH 80H E1H 21H Code for temperature unit invalid Use valid code for temperature unit Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+25 for channel 0 to 3 - REAL representation (Page 65), byte x+4. Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 69 B Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the analog module AI 4xTC HS. Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Note Temperature values The digitized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module. The following resolution therefore does not apply to temperature values. Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 70 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of input ranges B.1 Representation of input ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word 215 Range 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 71 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage measuring ranges. Table B- 3 Voltage measuring range 1 V Values Voltage measuring range Dec. Hex. Range 1 V 32767 7FFF > 1.176 V Overflow 32511 7EFF 1.176 V Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 1V Nominal range 20736 5100 0.75 V 1 1 36.17 V 0 0 0V -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -0.75 V -27648 9400 -1 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -1.176 V -32768 8000 <-1.176 V Table B- 4 Underrange Underflow Voltage measuring range 500 mV to 50 mV Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 32767 7FFF > 294.0 mV > 94.1 mV > 58.8 mV Overflow 32511 7EFF 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV Nominal range 20736 5100 187.5 mV 60 mV 37.5 mA 1 1 9.04 V 2.89 V 1.81 V 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV -1 FFFF -20736 AF00 -187.5 mV -60 mV -37.5 mV -27648 9400 -250 mV -80 mV -50 mV -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -294.0 mV -94.1 mV -58.8 mV -32768 8000 <-294.0 mV <-94.1 mV <-58.8 mV Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 72 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values for thermocouples B.3 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Note A higher resolution can be configured for thermocouples, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 25). The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermocouples. Table B- 5 Thermocouple type B Type B in Values C Dec. Values Hex. Type B in F Values Hex. Type B in K > 2070.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 2070.0 : 20700 50DC 3276.6 : : : 1820.1 18201 4719 1820.0 18200 4718 : : 0.0 0 -0.1 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 2343.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 32766 7FFE 2343.2 23432 5B88 Overrange : : : : : 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2093.3 20933 51C5 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2093.2 20932 51C4 : : : : : : : 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB : : : : : : : : : -120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC < -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Values Table B- 6 Range Nominal range Underrange Underflow Thermocouple type C Type C in C Values Values Hex. Type C in F Dec. Hex. Type C in K Dec. > 2500.0 32767 2500.0 : Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 7FFF > 2773.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 25000 61A8 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2773.2 27732 6C54 Overrange : : : : : : : : 2315.1 23151 5A6F 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2588.3 25883 651B 2315.0 23150 5A6E 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2588.2 25882 651A : : : : : : : : : 0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC -0.1 -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB : : : : : : : : : -120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC < -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 73 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 7 Thermocouple type E Type E in C Values Values Hex. Type E in F Values Hex. Type E in K Dec. > 1200.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 2192.0 32767 1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 : : : 1000.1 10001 2711 1000.0 10000 : : -270.0 < -270.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1473.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Overrange : : : : : : 1832.1 18321 4791 1273.3 12733 31BD 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC : : : : : : : -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Values Dec. Hex. Type J in K Dec. Hex. Table B- 8 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type J Type J in C Values Dec. Hex. Type J in F > 1450.0 32767 7FFF > 2642.0 32767 7FFF > 1723.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1450.0 14500 38A4 2642.0 26420 6734 1723.2 17232 4350 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1200.1 12001 2EE1 2192.1 21921 55A1 1473.3 14733 398D 1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C : : : : : : : : : -210.0 -2100 F7CC -346.0 -3460 F27C 63.2 632 0278 < -210.0 -32768 8000 < -346.0 -32768 8000 < 63.2 -32768 8000 Values Values Table B- 9 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type K Type K in C Values Dec. Hex. Type K in F Dec. Hex. Type K in K Range Dec. Hex. > 1622.0 32767 7FFF > 2951.6 32767 7FFF > 1895.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1622.0 16220 3F5C 2951.6 29516 734C 1895.2 18952 4A08 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1372.1 13721 3599 2501.7 25017 61B9 1645.3 16453 4045 1372.0 13720 3598 2501.6 25016 61B8 1645.2 16452 4044 : : : : : : : : : -270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 < -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Nominal range Underflow Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 74 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 10 Thermocouple type L Type L in C Values Values Hex. Type L in F Values Hex. Type L in K Dec. > 1150.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 2102.0 32767 1150.0 11500 2CEC 2102.0 : : : 900.1 9001 2329 900.0 9000 : : -200.0 < -200.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 1423.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 21020 521C 1423.2 14232 3798 Overrange : : : : : : 1652.1 16521 4089 1173.3 11733 2DD5 2328 1652.0 16520 4088 1173.2 11732 2DD4 : : : : : : : -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Values Dec. Hex. Table B- 11 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type N Type N in C Values Values Hex. Type N in F Dec. Hex. Type N in K Dec. > 1550.0 1550.0 32767 7FFF > 2822.0 32767 7FFF > 1823.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 15500 3C8C 2822.0 28220 6E3C 1823.2 18232 4738 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 1300.1 13001 32C9 2372.1 23721 5CA9 1573.3 15733 3D75 1300.0 13000 32C8 2372.0 23720 5CA8 1573.2 15732 3D74 : : : : : : : : : -270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 < -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Table B- 12 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouples R and S Types R, S in C Values Values Hex. Types R, S in F Dec. Hex. Types R, S in K Dec. > 2019.0 32767 2019.0 : Range Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 3276.6 32767 7FFF > 2292.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 20190 4EDE 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2292.2 22922 598A Overrange : : : : : : : : 1769.1 17691 451B 3216.3 32163 7DA3 2042.3 20423 4FC7 1769.0 17690 451A 3216.2 32162 7DA2 2042.2 20422 4FC6 : : : : : : : : : -50.0 -500 FE0C -58.0 -580 FDBC 223.2 2232 08B8 -50.1 -501 FE0B -58.1 -581 FDBB 223.1 2231 08B7 : : : : : : : : : -170.0 -1700 F95C -274.0 -2740 F54C 103.2 1032 0408 < -170.0 -32768 8000 < -274.0 -32768 8000 < 103.2 < 1032 8000 Nominal range Underrange Underflow Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA 75 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table B- 13 Thermocouple type T Type T in C Values Values Hex. Type T in F Values Hex. Type T in K Dec. > 540.0 32767 Dec. 7FFF > 1004.0 32767 540.0 5400 1518 1004.0 : : : 400.1 4001 0FA1 400.0 4000 : : -270.0 < -270.0 Dec. Hex. 7FFF > 813.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 10040 2738 813.2 8132 1FC4 Overrange : : : : : : 752.1 7521 1D61 673.3 6733 1AAD 0FA0 752.0 7520 1D60 673.2 6732 1AAC : : : : : : : -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Values Dec. Hex. Table B- 14 Range Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type U Type U in C Values Values Hex. Type U in F Dec. Hex. Type U in K Dec. > 850.0 850.0 32767 7FFF > 1562.0 32767 7FFF > 1123.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 2738.0 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Overrange : : : : : : : : : 600.1 6001 1771 1112.1 11121 2B71 873.3 8733 221D 600.0 6000 1770 1112.0 11120 2B70 873.2 8732 221C : : : : : : : : : -200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC < -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Values Hex. Type TXK Table B- 15 Type TXK Nominal range Underflow Thermocouple type TXK (GOST) Dec. Hex. Type Values TXK in F Dec. > 1050.0 32767 7FFF > 1922.0 32767 7FFF 1050.0 10500 2904 1922.0 19220 : : : : : 800.1 8001 1F41 1472.1 800.0 8000 1F40 1472.0 : : : 0.0 0 0000 : : -200.0 -2000 < -200.0 -32768 in C Range Values Range Dec. Hex. >1323.2 32767 7FFF Overflow 4B14 1323.2 13232 33B0 Overrange : : : : 14721 3981 1073.3 10733 29ED 14720 3980 1073.2 10732 29EC : : : : : : 32.0 320 0140 273 2730 0AAA : : : : : : : F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 <73.2 -32768 8000 in K Nominal range Underflow Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1) 76 Manual, 08/2018, A5E42405270-AA Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Edition 10/2017 support.industry.siemens.com ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring Configuration / address 4 ___________________ space 5 ___________________ Quick start Reading and processing 6 ___________________ measured values ___________________ 7 Energy counters ___________________ 8 Parameters ___________________ 9 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms ___________________ 10 Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data records ___________________ B Measured variables ___________________ C Module versions ___________________ D User data variants ___________________ E Measured value data records 10/2017 A5E36061895-AB ___________________ F Tips and tricks Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36061895-AB 08/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Changes/enhancements described in this manual, compared to the previous version: User data variant: Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 159 or 9FH) added Notes on the previous version of this manual have been taken into account in the current edition. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies both to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system and to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 4 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 8 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12 3 4 2.1 Area of application ................................................................................................................. 12 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST ..................................................................... 14 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 16 3.1 Terminal and block diagram................................................................................................... 16 3.2 Connection examples ............................................................................................................ 19 3.3 Current transformer selection data ........................................................................................ 20 Configuration / address space ............................................................................................................... 23 4.1 Configuring ............................................................................................................................. 23 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Selecting the module versions ............................................................................................... 24 Changing over the user data variant during operation........................................................... 25 Recommendations for selecting the module version ............................................................. 26 4.3 Applicable modules ................................................................................................................ 27 5 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 28 6 Reading and processing measured values ............................................................................................ 30 7 6.1 Basics for reading measured values ...................................................................................... 30 6.2 Quality information ................................................................................................................. 32 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically.............................................................. 34 6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record .................................................. 36 Energy counters .................................................................................................................................... 37 7.1 How the energy meter works ................................................................................................. 37 7.2 Configuring counters .............................................................................................................. 39 7.3 Evaluating energy counters ................................................................................................... 41 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 Reset energy counter ............................................................................................................. 42 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 42 Reset energy counters via user data ..................................................................................... 42 Resetting energy counters via data record DS 143 ............................................................... 44 Example for resetting energy counters via data record DS 143 ............................................ 46 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) .............................................................................. 49 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ................................................................................. 49 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143 ................................................... 52 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 6 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Table of contents 8 9 10 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 54 8.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................54 8.2 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................57 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 61 9.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................61 9.2 9.2.1 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................63 Diagnostics interrupt ...............................................................................................................63 9.3 Diagnostic alarms ...................................................................................................................64 9.4 Diagnostics response..............................................................................................................65 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 66 10.1 A Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................66 Parameter data records......................................................................................................................... 72 A.1 Configuration via parameter data records ..............................................................................72 A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module .........................................73 B Measured variables ............................................................................................................................... 80 C Module versions .................................................................................................................................... 85 D C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" .......................................................................................................85 C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" ...................................................................................................88 User data variants ................................................................................................................................. 92 D.1 E F User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data ........................................92 Measured value data records .............................................................................................................. 103 E.1 Overview of all measured value data records ......................................................................103 E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) ..........................................104 E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ................................................................................106 Tips and tricks..................................................................................................................................... 109 F.1 Tips and tricks .......................................................................................................................109 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 7 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 8 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 9 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 10 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 11 2 Product overview 2.1 Area of application Introduction Energy efficiency is playing an increasingly important role in industry. Rising energy prices, increasing pressure to improve profitability and the growing awareness of climate protection are important factors for reducing energy costs and for introducing an energy data management system. Where can you use the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST? AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is designed for machine-level deployment in an ET 200SP distributed I/O system. AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST records over 200 different electrical measurement and energy values. It lets you create transparency about the energy requirements of individual components of a production plant even down to the machine level. Using the measured values provided by the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, you can determine energy consumption and power consumption. You can determine consumption forecasts and efficiency from the measured values. Power consumption measurements are relevant for load management and maintenance. In addition, you can use the measurements for energy reporting and for determining the CO2 footprint. Note Measuring dangerous electrical quantities The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is not tested according to DIN EN 61010-2-030 and may therefore not be used to verify, measure or monitor protective measures according to DIN EN 61557. Qualified personnel must ensure through additional measures that no danger ensues for humans and the environment in case of an incorrect display. TN and TT system The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST can be used in TN and TT systems. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 12 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Product overview 2.1 Area of application Measuring with AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST A typical supply network of a production plant is usually divided into three voltage ranges: The infeed of the entire plant The subdistribution, for example, to individual lines within the plant The end consumers such as the machines in the lines. The following figure shows the measurement in an electricity supply network: Figure 2-1 Use of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Advantages of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST has the following advantages: Space-saving especially for use in control cabinet PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP (depending on the interface module in use) Multiple modules can be used with one interface module Extension of existing stations by components for energy recording Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 13 Product overview 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Article number 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Figure 2-2 LED for supply voltage Function class Color identification label module type Function and firmware version Article number View of the module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 14 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Product overview 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Properties The module has the following technical properties: Measurement of electrical variables from single-phase and three-phase supply networks Max. nominal voltage between two outer conductors 400 VAC Recording of: - Voltages - Currents - Phase angles - Power - Energy / electrical work - Frequencies - Power factors The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V3.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with V5.5 SP4 and update 4 and HSP hotfix 7 or or higher higher X --- Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V3.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with V5.5 SP4 and update 4 and HSP hotfix 7 or or higher higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V3.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with V5.5 SP4 and update 4 and HSP hotfix 7 or or higher higher X X Diagnostic error interrupts FS01 V3.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with V5.5 SP4 and update 4 and HSP hotfix 7 or or higher higher X X Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: BaseUnit Type D0 Labeling strips Reference identification label You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 15 3 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram In an ET 200SP station, the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST forms its own potential group together with its dark BaseUnit. General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life due to electric shock Touching live parts can lead to death or severe injuries. Before beginning any work deenergize the system and the Energy Meter and short-circuit installed transformers. WARNING Danger to life, dangerous system conditions and material damage possible Removing and inserting the Energy Meter under live voltage is prohibited! For this reason the symbol "Do not Hot Swap" is located on the Energy Meter. If you remove and insert the Energy Meter under live voltage during operation, the transformers used can produce dangerous induction voltages and electric arcs and dangerous system conditions can arise. The Energy Meter may only be removed and inserted during operation if the measuring voltages supplied to the BaseUnit at terminals UL1 , UL2, UL3 are disconnected at all poles and special current transformer terminals are used that short-circuit the transformer on the secondary side on removal. CAUTION Use only in three-phase and AC networks Operation with direct voltage/direct current will destroy the Energy Meter. Use the Energy Meter solely to measure electrical variables in three-phase and AC networks. Supplying the module The Energy Meter is supplied through the terminals UL1 and N. The required minimum voltage amounts to 85 VAC. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 16 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Protecting the connection cables To protect the connection cables at UL1, UL2 and UL3, make sure there is adequate cable protection, especially after cross-section transitions. If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. Terminal and block diagram Microcontroller Backplane bus interface Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Power measurement ULn ILn N Voltage connection Current connection Neutral Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 17 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Usable BaseUnit The ET 200SP Distributed I/O System manual explains that a potential group always starts with a light BaseUnit. The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST makes an exception in this case and only uses the dark BaseUnits type D0, 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0. The BaseUnit is not in contact with the power bus and passes the potential through from the left to the right slot. When using some older CPUs / interface modules, note that the first permissible place for AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is slot 2. Connection types The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST supports the following connection types: 3P4W, 3 phases, 4 conductors 1P2W, 1 phase, 2 conductors The input circuit of the module must correspond to one of the listed connection types. Select the appropriate connection type for the intended use. You will find examples of connections in the section Connection examples (Page 19). Information on the selection of a current transformer is available in the section Current transformer selection data (Page 20). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 18 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.2 Connection examples 3.2 Connection examples The following figures show the connection of the Energy Meter for three-phase and singlephase measurements. Note that the Energy Meter must always be connected via a current transformer. Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current transformers 1P2W Measurement in an AC network with a current transformer Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phases 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. If short-circuit resistance is ensured by conformity to IEC 61439-1:2009, there is no need for separate line protection for the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. Current transformer connection requirements DIN VDE 0100-557 and IEC 60364-5-55 require the following for the connection of current transformers: The secondary circuits of current transformers must not be grounded. Guards must not be used in the secondary circuits of current transformers. Transformer secondary cable insulation must be designed for the highest voltage of all active components, or the secondary cables must be laid in such a way that their insulation cannot touch any active components, such as busbars. Connection points must be provided for temporary measurements. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 19 Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data 3.3 Current transformer selection data Introduction Connection via a current transformer is always required for the current measurement. Use toroids with an accuracy class of 0.5, 1 or 3. Dimensioning of the current transformer The correct dimensioning of the current transformer is important for the following reasons: You achieve correct results from the measurements and You do not overload or damage the current transformers. Selecting a current transformer Use current transformers with a burden capacity 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power dissipation in the terminal circuit (consisting of resistance of the connection cables and burden of the Energy Meter). 1.5 times the power loss is required in order to prevent the transformer from overloading. 2 times the power dissipation is important to ensure the current limiting in case of a short-circuit. Maximum length of the connection cable To avoid overloading or damaging the current transformer, the burden Zn specified on the data sheet of the current transformer (in VA) must not be exceeded. To prevent this being exceeded, the entire burden resistance (consisting of the resistance of the connection cable and the internal resistance of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (see figure below) must be below a certain resistance value (depending on Zn and Imax). Figure 3-2 Maximum length of the connection cable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 20 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable is obtained with the following formula: RL Cable resistance in ohms Imax Zn Rated burden current transformer in VA Rburden Figure 3-3 Secondary current of the current transformer Resistance of the Energy Meter (25 m) Maximum value for the resistance of the connection cable Based on the maximum cable resistance in ohms, you then calculate the maximum length of the connection cable. To do this, check the data sheet of the connection cable you are using. Note The length of the connection cable (outwards and return) must not exceed the value of 200 meters. Example Current transformer 500/5 A You use a current transformer with a transmission ration of 500/5 A that has a rated burden Zn of 5 VA according to the data sheet. The maximum primary current in the application is 400 A. This means that the maximum secondary current Imax. is 4 A. The burden of the AI Energy Meter including connection resistance amounts to RBurden = 25 m. The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) is obtained using the following formula: The maximum cable resistance between the transformer and the terminals of the Energy Meter may not exceed 287.5 m in this case. The corresponding cable length (outgoing and incoming line) depends on the cross-section used of the copper line and can be determined by using the following table. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 21 Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data The following table shows the resistance values of copper cables for typical cross-sections with = 0.017857 x mm2/m Estimating the length for a connection cable The value in the table must be less than the calculated terminal resistance RL max of the cable. For the resistance RLmax of 287.5 m used in the above example it is possible to use a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m from a cross-section of 0.75 mm2 upward. Crosssection AWG Cable overview for copper 0.5 m 1m 5m 71.4 m 357.1 m 0.25 mm2 24 35.7 m 0.34 mm2 10 m 714.3 m 50 m 3571.4 m 22 26.3 m 52.5 m 262.6 m 525.2 m 2626.0 m 0.5 mm2 21 17.9 m 35.7 m 178.6 m 357.1 m 1785.7 m 0.75 mm2 19/20 11.9 m 23.8 m 119.0 m 238.1 m 1190.5 m 1.0 mm2 18 8.9 m 17.9 m 89.3 m 178.6 m 892.9 m 1.5 mm2 16 6.0 m 11.9 m 59.5 m 119.0 m 595.2 m mm2 14 3.6 m 7.1 m 35.7 m 71.4 m 357.1 m 2.5 Checking the ratio of burden load and power loss The rated burden of the transformer must be 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power loss in the connection circuit to ensure that the transformer is not overloaded and that the current limitation is ensured during a short-circuit. At a maximum secondary current of 4 A the power loss in the connection circuit is calculated in accordance with the following formula for a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m and a cross-section of 1.0 mm2 and a burden resistance of the Energy Meter of 25 m: The ratio of the rated burden and the power loss in the connection circuit thus amounts to: The required ratio of rated burden and power loss in the connection circuit lies within the required range. The transformer is dimensioned sufficiently large. See also Technical specifications (Page 66) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 22 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.1 4 Configuring Introduction To configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST after connecting it, use configuration software such as STEP 7. In addition, you can also change numerous parameters of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST in RUN via the user program. Configuring You configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST with: STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 or higher and Hotfix 7 GSD file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET Note Consistency check of the parameter assignment only with STEP 7 If you configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST using STEP 7, STEP 7 already checks the various parameters for consistency while they are being entered. If you configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST using a GSD file, a consistency check is not carried out. The module does not recognize incorrect entries until after the parameter data record has been transferred. If the module recognizes an invalid parameter, the module rejects the complete data record. Preferably use STEP 7 to configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. The following instructions show the theoretical procedure for configuring the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP. 1. Select the ET 200SP distributed I/O system you are using in the hardware catalog. 2. Insert the module into your station. 3. Open the device view of the ET 200SP and insert the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. 4. Configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST to suit your requirements. Once the configuration has been compiled without errors, you can download the configuration to the CPU and commission the ET 200SP station while the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is running. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 23 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2 Selecting the module versions Introduction The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST has different module versions. During the configuration you use the selection of the module version to specify which measured values can be read. Each module version supplies quality information via the input user data. At the module version "32 I / 12 Q" you can read the measured values as user data cyclically from the process image. At each module version you have the option to read measured value records from the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST by using the RDREC instruction asynchronously. Influence of the module version on the address space Note Influence of the AI Energy Meter 400 VAC ST on the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP The available address space of the ET 200SP is influenced by the following factors: * CPU or interface module * Plugged I/O modules The address space made additionally available by the AI Energy Meter 400 VAC ST is essentially influenced by the length of the user data supplied. The module version determines the length of the user data, which can be supplied by the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST at maximum. Module versions of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC Configuring with STEP 7 Module version 2I/2Q User data Address space Comment No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs 2-byte outputs Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 85). Access to measured values through "Read data record". 32 I / 12 Q User data selectable 32 byte inputs / through defined user data 12 byte outputs variants You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the 32 I / 12 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 88). Information about the user data variants at 32 I / 12 Q is available in the appendix User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data (Page 92). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 24 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2.1 Changing over the user data variant during operation Introduction At the module version 32 I / 12 Q you switch over the user data variant in the output data in Byte 0. Requirement User program has been created. AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is configured as the module version 32 I / 12 Q. The start address of the module is known in the process image output. Procedure 1. Create one constant with the data type BYTE per user data variant. 2. Enter the user data ID as a value in each case. 3. Write the constant to the start address of the module in the process image output. Result The user data variant is switched with the next cycle. Note Information about user data changeover The parameterized user data variant is set in the following cases: * A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. * Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 25 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2.2 Recommendations for selecting the module version The following table shows which module version is suitable for a given purpose. Module version Remarks on the field of application 2I/2Q * Solely acyclic reading of the measured values via the RDREC instruction from a measured value data record. * Use of many modules possible because little address space is used. * Cyclic reading of the measured values from the user data. 32 I / 12 Q - Various measured variables can be read by switching over the user data variant. - One cycle elapses for each user data changeover. Measured values from the next user data variant are supplied with a slight time offset. - Depending on the user data variant, you must convert the measured values in the CPU to physical values using the supplied scaling factor. * Acyclic reading of the measured values via the RDREC instruction from a measured value data record. * Use of less modules possible because each module uses 32 bytes input and 12 bytes output. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 26 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules 4.3 Applicable modules The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured. Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 12 Q IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0 or higher IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 27 5 Quick start Introduction This section shows you how to read and view your first measured values on the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST in a particularly quick and easy way. Requirement You have already connected the Energy Meter to your network with one of the connection types shown in the section Wiring (Page 16). The Energy Meter 400 VAC ST has already been integrated in your configuration tool (such as STEP 7), or the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST has been integrated in your hardware catalog with the GSD/GSDML file. Procedure 1. Configure an ET 200SP station Configure an ET 200SP station with a CPU 151xSP or an IM 155-6. 2. Plug module in ET 200S station Plug the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST into the ET 200SP station and use the module version with 32 bytes inputs and 12 bytes outputs. 3. Set the module parameters Set the following parameters for the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST: - Connection type that you have used for the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST (e.g. 3P4W) - Measuring range, i.e. the phase voltage (UL1-N) of your network (for example 230 V AC) - Frequency of your network (for example 50 Hz) - Primary and secondary current of the used current transformer (e.g. 100 A and 1 A) Leave all other parameters at their default settings and do not change them. 4. Load configuration Switch on the ET 200SP station and download the configuration to the CPU. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 28 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Quick start Result After being switched on, the Energy Meter supplies the measured values for the "Total power L1L2L3" user data variant "Basic measurements" with the ID 254 or FEH. Read and check the measured values provided by the Energy Meter in the output data. The table below shows the structure of the user data variant, the measured variables and the data type of the measured values in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) that are stored in the 32 bytes of output data of the module. Each measured variable is referenced via the measured value ID. An overview of all the measured variables with their measured value IDs is provided in the section Measured variables (Page 80). Table 5- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66035 10 ... 11 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66036 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66034 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Additional information If you require further information about the evaluation and interpretation of the measured values, please refer to the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 30). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 29 Reading and processing measured values 6.1 6 Basics for reading measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST provides the measured values and variables through the following methods: Cyclic: User data Acyclic: Measured value data records User data User data provide pre-defined measured values depending on the configured user data variant. The supplied measured values are cyclically written to the process image of the CPU. With some user data variants, the measured values are supplied as raw data, which you have to convert to the corresponding physical values using a supplied scaling factor. Measured value data records Each measured value data record supplies physical values that you can further process immediately. You read the values of a measured value data record acyclically with the RDREC instruction in a PLC tag of the STRUCT data type. You need a corresponding PLC tag for each measured value data record to be read. You can display the read measured values in a watch table in STEP 7. Address the tag with the STRUCT data type directly. Note If you are using CPUs other than S7-1200 or S7-1500, convert 64-bit measured values to 32-bit measured values. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For more information, read FAQ: Processing 64-bit-floating-point numbers in S7-300/400 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/56600676) Validity of the measured values After turning on the supply voltage UL1, the first measured values are available after approximately 2 seconds. In the input user data, the content of byte 0 is set to the selected user data variant. You can use this change in byte 0 as a trigger event. As soon as the module has valid measured values, the value of this byte changes to a value within the value range. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 30 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values Initial startup of the module After the first startup or restart of the module, the parameters are transferred to the module. You can preset a user data variant in the parameters of the hardware configuration. This remains in effect until a different user data variant is selected in the output data (byte 0). This allows input user data to be modified dynamically according to the requirements of the process. The user data variant defined in parameter data record 128 is used under the following conditions: A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: Coding of the user data variant not available Current measured values become "0" The current and all other measured values based on it are suppressed (or set "0") in the data records and in the user data in the following cases: The incoming current of the current transformer is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current" parameter Incoming secondary current at the channel is higher than 12 A The following measured values and derived measured variables of the phase involved become "0": Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A floating mean value is formed from the power values. These only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meter for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase does not count any longer. Substitute value behavior The substitute values for input values of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST amount to "0". See also Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 34) Read measured value from a measured value data record (Page 36) Selecting the module versions (Page 24) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 31 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2 Quality information Introduction The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST supplies quality information about the measurement in a status word. This information can be used to evaluate the status: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) and voltages (U1, U2, U3) lie within the valid measuring range Operating quadrants for Phase 1. You can evaluate the quality information at every module version in Byte 1 of the output user data. Structure of the quality information Figure 6-1 Quality information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 32 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Operating quadrant Figure 6-2 Quadrant in the quality bits See also Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 88) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 33 Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically Requirement STEP 7 is open. AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is configured. Scaling of measured values in the user data Since the value range of 16-bit values is often smaller than the value range of the physical value, a scaling factor is supplied together with the basic value in the user data for the respective measured or calculated values. You determine the actual value of the measured variable with the following formula: Actual value of measured quantity = measured value in the user data x 10scaling factor Procedure To read measured values from the user data cyclically, proceed as follows: 1. Read the relevant measured value from the input data. 2. Observe the scaling factor at scaled measured values and convert the read measured value using the scaling factor. Example The user data variant 254 (FEH) "Total power L1L2L3" is configured on the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. The measured value for "Current L1" should be read. Table 6- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 : : : : : : 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - : : : : : : 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 34 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically In the user data variant FEH (254) the measured value for the current L1 is stored in Byte 2 + 3. The current is supplied by the module as a 16-bit-fixed-point number in the value range from 0 to 65535 in the unit 1 mA. In addition the scaling factor for the current L1 has to be considered additionally. The module supplies the related scaling factor in Byte 24. The actual value for current L1 is calculated as follows: Actual value for current L1 = Current L1 x 10Scaling current L1 See also Basics for reading measured values (Page 30) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 35 Reading and processing measured values 6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record 6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record Introduction To read measured values of a measured value data record, use the RDREC instruction. The read values are stored in a PLC variable with user-defined data type (UDT). You can find more information on this in the STEP 7 documentation, under the keyword "RDREC". Requirement STEP 7 is open. AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is configured. Procedure 1. Create a PLC tag of the STRUCT data type in STEP 7. 2. Insert the number of structural elements, which corresponds to the number of entries contained in the measured value data record. 3. Insert the RDREC instruction in the user program. 4. Configure the RDREC instruction as follows: - ID: Hardware identifier or start address of the Energy Meter (depending on the CPU used). - INDEX: Number of measured value data record whose entries are read. - MLEN: Length of the measured value data record in bytes. "0" if all the entries are to be read. - RECORD: Target range for the read data record Length depends on MLEN. 5. Call the RDREC instruction with REQ = 1. Result The values from the measured value data record were transferred into the target data area. See also Basics for reading measured values (Page 30) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 36 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.1 7 How the energy meter works Introduction The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST provides 42 energy counters that detect both line-based and phase-based energy values. Active energy (total, outflow, inflow) Reactive energy (total, outflow, inflow) Apparent energy (total) How energy recording works Based on the measured currents and voltages and the calculation cycle the Energy Meter calculates the active, reactive and apparent energy. The active, reactive and apparent energies are updated in each calculation cycle. Configuring You configure the following settings for the energy counters: Activation of the gate for the energy counter The gate allows you to start and stop the counters via output data (DQ bit). If you deactivate the gate, the count starts immediately when the Energy Meter is switched on. Modes of the energy counters The energy counter count endlessly. The settings apply to the energy counter of all phases. Changing properties in RUN You can change the following properties of energy counters in runtime: Enable / disable energy counter Reset energy counter Set initial values for the energy counter Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 37 Energy counters 7.1 How the energy meter works Automatic reset of the energy counter The energy counters are automatically reset to "0" when parameter settings relevant to the energy counter are changed. In the case of phase-specific changing of parameter settings relevant to the energy counter only the energy counters of the respective phases are reset. Changing of the following parameters results in resetting of the energy counters: Measurement type or range Current transformer (primary current/secondary current) Direction of current Example The following figure shows the effect of initial value, reset and start/stop parameters with activated gating using the energy counter as an example: The counter is reset to the value specified in the configuration. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. The gate is opened via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts. The configured current low limit has been violated. The counter does not count. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. A new start value is written to the measured value data record 143 with the WRREC instruction. The gate is opened again via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts with the new start value. The counter is reset via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts from the new start value that was transferred via the measured value data record 143. See also Evaluating energy counters (Page 41) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 38 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.2 Configuring counters 7.2 Configuring counters Overview You can configure the energy counters of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST as follows: Activate / Deactivate Start / stop counters using gate Set and reset start value Energy counter gate You have the option of starting and stopping the energy counter using the gate. To this purpose you have to: Select the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the configuration of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. Set the DQ bit for the "counter gate" in the user data in Control byte 1 of the output data (Bit 6 in Control byte 1). The "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts. Figure 7-1 Gate enabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 39 Energy counters 7.3 Evaluating energy counters If you deselect the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the configuration of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, the energy counters operate independently of the DQ bit as long as the current value lies above the configured "Low limit for measuring current". Figure 7-2 Gate disabled Set and reset start value The counters can be set to their start value via the output data of each user data variant. With energy counters, you have to reset the bit of the energy counter in control byte 2 of the data record 143. You can reset each energy counter to the start value or also specify a new start value via the data record 143. You define the moment for updating of the start values in the data record 143 and in Control byte 1 in the user data. Start values are either applied immediately or after a reset bit has been set from 0 to 1. You can find a detailed description for this in section Data record for energy counter (DS 143) (Page 49). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 40 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.3 Evaluating energy counters 7.3 Evaluating energy counters Evaluating energy counters The energy counters are evaluated by Using the input data of the user data variants for energy - User data variant "Total energy L1 L2 L3" (ID 249 or F9H) - User data variant "Energy L1" (ID 248 or F8H) - User data variant "Energy L2" (ID 247 or F7H) - User data variant "Energy L3" (ID 246 or F6H) By reading data records - "Data record for basic measured values (DS 142)" for evaluation of the total energies L1 L2 L3 - "Data record for energy counter (DS 143)" for evaluation of the phase-specific energies Evaluate measured values The evaluation of measured values via the input data of user data variants and reading of data records with the RDREC instruction is described in the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 30). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 41 Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter 7.4 Reset energy counter 7.4.1 Introduction Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the energy counter of the Energy Meter Reset here means that the energy counters are reset to their start value. The following sections describe how you Reset energy counters via the outputs of the user data. Reset energy counters via data record 143. 7.4.2 Reset energy counters via user data Introduction Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the energy counters depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 12 bytes of output data, you can Reset energy counters for all phases separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Reset energy counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. If you use the module version with 2 bytes output data, you always reset all the energy counters simultaneously. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 42 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter Procedure at module version with 12 bytes of output data Resetting energy counters for all 3 phases 1. Select the categories of energy counter that you want to reset in byte 2. - Set bit 5 for active energy counters. - Set bit 6 for reactive energy counters. - Set bit 7 for apparent energy counters. Figure 7-3 Selection of energy counters 2. Set the reset bit (bit 7) in byte 1. If there is an edge change of the reset bit for energy counters from 0 to 1, the module resets all energy counters that you previously selected in byte 2. Figure 7-4 Reset bit for energy counters Procedure at module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the energy counters simultaneously. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Figure 7-5 Resetting the energy counters at module version with 2 bytes of output data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 43 Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter Start values After the reset the energy counters count with the specified start values (default = 0). You can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143, see section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 49). You can also reset the counters on a phase-specific basis by active, reactive and apparent energy using data record 143. 7.4.3 Resetting energy counters via data record DS 143 Introduction At all the module versions you can reset the energy counters via the data record DS 143. Resetting is possible for: Energy counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Procedure at all module versions via data record DS 143 1. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set the reset bit (Bit 2) to 1 and Bit 0 to 1 for the overflow counter. 2. In Control byte 2 of the DS 143 set the category of the energy counters (active, reactive, apparent energy) to 1 via Bits 5 to 7. 3. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set Bit 7 for the moment of application of the start values: - Bit 7 to 0, if the start value are to be applied immediately after the transfer of the data record - Bit 7 to 1, if the start value are only to be applied after the reset bit has been set in the output data of the user data. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 44 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter 4. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction. Figure 7-6 Energy counter control information DS 143 Start values You specify the moment for the application of the start values in Control byte 1 via Bit 7. After the reset the energy counters count with the specified start values (default = 0). You can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 45 Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter 7.4.4 Example for resetting energy counters via data record DS 143 Introduction Before you can transfer the data record DS 143 to the CPU you have to create a PLC data type in your user program that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Procedure 1. Create a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Detailed information on the structure of data record 143 is available in section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 49). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh : : : : 61180 See Section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 49) : 61181 : Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 46 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter 2. Create a DB or instance DB and allocate the values of the data record Byte 0 and byte 1: Enter the value 01H in Byte 0 and the value 00H to Byte 1. Byte 2 ... byte 7: Control bytes for energy counters In the control bytes for the relevant phases, specify which energy counters you want to reset. The control bytes specify for each phase (L1, L2, L3) separately if and which energy meter values are to be reset. Figure 7-7 Control information DS 143 for energy counter Byte 8 ... byte 127: Start values for the individual energy meters The start values for energy counters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers. This corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 47 Energy counters 7.4 Reset energy counter 3. Write the data record to the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST module using the "WRREC" instruction. The input parameters must be allocated as follows: - REQ: A new write job is triggered if REQ = TRUE. - ID: Hardware identifier or start address of the Energy Meter (depending on the CPU used). - INDEX: The data record number: 143 - LEN: The maximum length of the data record: 128 - RECORD: A pointer to the data area in the CPU which includes data record 143. Note If you want to write or read several AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST at the same time, keep in mind the maximum number of active jobs in communication with SFB52/SFB53. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 48 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) 7.5.1 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Energy meter data record 143 for different actions The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions: Reset the energy counter to user-specific value (e.g. "0") Reading the current values of the energy counters Energy meter data record 143 Table 7- 1 Energy meter data record 143 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 49 Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182 32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61183 40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 61184 48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 61200 56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 61201 64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 61202 72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 61203 80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh 61204 88...95 Active energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61220 96...103 Active energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61221 104...111 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61222 112...119 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61223 120...127 Apparent energy (initial value) L3 LREAL VAh 61224 61181 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 50 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the measured value data record 143: Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version. DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC instruction. Enter a valid length. DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. The start values may not be negative. DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. Observe the ranges of values for start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 51 Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) 7.5.2 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143 Introduction Bytes 2 to 7 of data record 143 form the phase-based control and feedback interface for the measured value data record of the energy counter. Bytes 2 and 3: Control and feedback interface for phase 1 Bytes 4 and 5: Control and feedback interface for phase 2 Bytes 6 and 7: Control and feedback interface for phase 3 Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure 7-8 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 52 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In Control byte 1 you determine how you reset the counter and the time at which the counter is reset. In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counter you want to reset. Figure 7-9 Control information DS 143 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 53 8 Parameters 8.1 Parameters Parameters of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (DS 128) As a rule the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is already integrated in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7 V5.5 or higher. In this case STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7 V5.5 or higher checks the parameterized properties for plausibility during designing. However, you can also assign parameters to the module by means of the GSD file and the configuration software of any provider. The module checks the validity of the configured properties only after the configuration has been downloaded. Note that some parameters depend on the selected connection type of the Energy Meter. For example in the connection type 1P2W for measurements in single-phase AC network it does not make sense to enter parameters for Phases 2 and 3 and they are also not checked by the system in this case. The effective range of the parameters that can be set using a GSD file depends on the type of bus system used: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 54 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 8.1 Parameters In addition you can change the parameterized properties via the user program in RUN mode. When you assign parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records (see appendix Configuration via parameter data records (Page 72)). The following table summarizes all the configurable parameters. Table 8- 1 AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST parameters Parameters Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics line voltage * Disable * Enable * Disabled * 1P2W - 1-phase alternating current * 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors * 100 V Connection type Voltage measuring range * 110 V * 115 V * 120 V * 127 V GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors Yes Module Module (only 1P2W, 3P4W and deactivated) 230 V Yes Module Module * 190 V * 200 V * 208 V * 220 V * 230 V Line voltage tolerance [%] * 1 ... 50 % 10 % Yes Module Module Line frequency * 50 Hz 50 Hz Yes Module Module * 60 Hz Enable gate energy counter * No No Yes Module - * Yes User data variant See the table Overview of the user data variants (Page 92) Total energy L1 Yes L2 L3 (ID 254 or FEH) Module Module Disable Yes Channel/phase Module Disable Yes Channel/phase Module Diagnostics overflow current Diagnostics overflow voltage * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable (only user data variant) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 55 Parameters 8.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics underflow voltage * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Overcurrent tolerance value [0.1 A] * Overcurrent tolerance time [ms] Diagnostics low limit voltage Diagnostics overflow cumulative values GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Channel/phase Module Disable Yes Channel/phase (blocking is preset) Disable Yes Channel/phase Module 10 ... 100 [0.1 A] 100 [0.1 A] Yes Channel/phase Module * 1 ... 60000 ms 40000 ms Yes Channel/phase Module Low limit for current measurement [mA] * 20 ... 250 mA 50 mA Yes Module - Current transformer primary current [A] * 1 ... 10000 A 1A Current transformer secondary current * 1A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module * 5A * Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase Module * Enable Reverse current direction (Default setting: 20 mA) Yes Channel/phase Module (Value range: 1...65535) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 56 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 8.2 Description of parameters 8.2 Description of parameters Diagnostics line voltage Activate the diagnostics line voltage here. If there is no voltage or too little voltage at L1, the message "No supply voltage at L1" is output and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered. Connection type Specify the connection type you used for the Energy Meter here. For more detailed information, refer to "Connection examples (Page 19)". Voltage measuring range Here you can set the voltage measuring range of the power supply system. Line voltage tolerance Monitoring the supply voltage based on this tolerance band is a positive or negative value. Line frequency Here you can set the line frequency of the power supply system. Enable gate energy counter Enable the gate for the energy counter here. When the gate is enabled, the energy counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 57 Parameters 8.2 Description of parameters Diagnostics overflow current The measured current is monitored after expiry of the "Tolerance time" for "Overcurrent [0.1 A] tolerance value". Exceeding this results in overflow current. The tolerance time starts as soon as the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is exceeded. DIAG_UEBERLAST diagnoses the affected phase if the tolerance value of the secondary current has been exceeded within the assigned tolerance time (or the maximum value of the secondary current (12 A) is exceeded). After the set tolerance time has elapsed, the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is monitored. A violation of the secondary current value also returns DIAG_UEBERLAST. Figure 8-1 Diagnostics response in the event of a current overload Diagnostics overflow voltage Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the overflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics underflow voltage Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the underflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics low limit voltage Low limit for voltage is monitored. A violation of the low limit triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 58 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 8.2 Description of parameters Diagnostics overflow cumulative values A cumulative overflow in the calculated variables is displayed. The values stop at the high or low limit. A violation triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Overcurrent tolerance value [0.1 A] The tolerance factor secondary overcurrent parameter (10 to 100) indicates the tolerable value of the secondary current in 0.1 A increments (10 = 1 A to 100 = 10 A). Always take note of the current class of the current transformer being used (1 A, 5 A). Overcurrent tolerance time Monitoring time in ms in which the overcurrent is tolerated. 0 means that the monitoring time has been disabled. Low limit for measuring current The configurable low limit for measuring current refers to the secondary currents and is used to avoid incorrect calculations in the case of very low currents. Incorrect measurements of very low currents in particular are a cause of inaccuracies in the current transformer used. Set the low limit for the current measurement to the required value depending on your process. Tip: If you want to find the low limit for the current measurement experimentally, set it to a lower value. Then, feed in a very precise low current and determine the measurement error that can no longer be tolerated. Afterwards, set the low limit for the current measurement to the limit value you have determined. If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase do not measure any longer. Current transformer primary current Enter here the nominal value for the primary current of the current transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 59 Parameters 8.2 Description of parameters Current transformer secondary current Enter here the nominal value for the secondary current (1 A or 5 A) of the current transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Reverse current direction Setting to determine whether or not to reverse the direction of current. In the event of inadvertent incorrect connection, this parameter can be used to correct the measured values, thus saving the hassle of rewiring. The direction of the current is only evident from the power measurement values. The current measurement value is an rms value. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 60 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 9.1 9 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Error (red) PWR (green) Status (green) Figure 9-1 LED display Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 61 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 9.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following table explains the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 64). DIAG LED Table 9- 1 DIAG Meaning of the DIAG LED Meaning Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Status LED Table 9- 2 Status Meaning of the Status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or error Off Channel activated and no error On Error LED Table 9- 3 Status Meaning of the Error LED Meaning Channel is OK Off Channel is faulty On PWR LED Table 9- 4 PWR Meaning of the PWR LED Meaning Line voltage missing Off Line voltage available On Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 62 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 9.2 Interrupts 9.2 Interrupts The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST analog input module supports diagnostic alarms. 9.2.1 Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Channel is temporarily unavailable Error Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Low limit voltage violated (measuring voltage < 80 V) High limit value voltage exceeded Underflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) violated Overflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) exceeded Overload (current measurement > 12 A or tolerance overcurrent exceeded after expiry of the tolerance time) Overflow of the calculated values (measured or calculated values screen exceed the representable range of values) See also Diagnostic alarms (Page 64) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 63 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 9.3 Diagnostic alarms 9.3 Diagnostic alarms Diagnostic alarms Note Assignment channel in diagnostics alarm Phase Channels are counted in the diagnostic messages starting from channel "0" and in the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST starting from phase "1". Note the following assignment: * Channel "0" Phase "1" * Channel "1" Phase "2" * Channel "2" Phase "3" Table 9- 5 Error types Diagnostic message Undervoltage1 Overvoltage Error code 2H 3H Overload 4H High limit 7H Low limit1 8H Error 9H Internal module error (diagnostic alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Load voltage missing 11H Channel is temporarily unavailable 1FH Meaning Solution Line voltage (measuring range) is monito- Observe the line voltage range red for tolerance. Violation leads to voltage overflow/underflow The measured current is monitored after Observe the current range expiry of the "Tolerance time" for "Tolerance value overcurrent [0.1 A]". Exceeding this results in overflow current. The maximum value of the secondary current (12 A) has been exceeded. Cumulative overflow in the calculated values Violation of the low limit for voltage measu- Observe the voltage range rement. The message occurs when the configured minimum current or voltage is below 80 V. Correct the parameter assignment Missing or insufficient line voltage on phaCheck supply se L1 Firmware upgrade is being performed. -Channel 0 applies to the entire module. The module is currently not performing any measurements. A user calibration is being executed at the channel. 1 Replace the module Complete the user calibration If the "Undervoltage" and "Low limit" diagnostics are active at the same time, the "Low limit" diagnostics has higher priority and deletes the "Undervoltage" diagnostics. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 64 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 9.4 Diagnostics response 9.4 Diagnostics response Diagnostics response This section describes the response of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST when diagnostics information is reported. Measured values in the case of diagnostics Even in the case of diagnostics, measured values continue to be displayed as long as they can still be acquired. If measured values cannot be measured or calculated, "0" is displayed. Zero suppression If the supplied current is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current" parameter, the current measurement and all dependent variables are suppressed or set to "0". Overload limitation If the secondary current fed in at the channel is higher than 12 A, the module changes to limitation and the measured value of the current and all dependent variables are set to "0". Value falls below "Low limit current measurement" If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase do not measure any longer. Loss of the supply voltage At a loss of supply voltage at UL1 (phase 1), all measurements are interrupted. After the supply voltage is restored, the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST operates again with the configuration / parameter assignment stored in the CPU. The energy counter is used for retentively stored values. Input data to "0" Note If the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is no longer recognized by the interface module (for example, because it is defective or not plugged in), all input data are set to "0". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 65 10 Technical specifications 10.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Article number 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AI Energy Meter 400 V AC ST, PU 1 Firmware version V3.0 usable BaseUnits BU type D0, BU20-P12+A0+0B Product function * Voltage measurement Yes * Voltage measurement with voltage transformers No * Current measurement Yes * Phase current measurement without current transformers No * Phase current measurement with current transformers Yes * Energy measurement Yes * Frequency measurement Yes * Power measurement Yes * Active power measurement Yes * Reactive power measurement Yes * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Isochronous mode No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 and higher * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 66 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Technical specifications 10.1 Technical specifications Article number Operating mode 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 * cyclic measurement Yes * acyclic measurement Yes * Acyclic measured value access Yes * Fixed measured value sets Yes * Freely definable measured value sets No Configuration control via dataset CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Calibration possible in RUN Installation type/mounting Mounting position Supply voltage Design of the power supply Type of supply voltage permissible range, lower limit (AC) permissible range, upper limit (AC) Line frequency Yes Yes No Any Supply via voltage measurement channel L1 100 - 240 V AC 90 V 264 V * permissible range, lower limit 47 Hz * permissible range, upper limit 63 Hz Power loss Power loss, typ. Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 0.6 W 44 byte; 32 byte input / 12 byte output Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Time of day Operating hours counter * present Analog inputs Cycle time (all channels), typ. No 50 ms; Time for consistent update of all measured and calculated values (cyclic und acyclic data) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 67 Technical specifications 10.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm No * Hardware interrupt No Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Integrated Functions Measuring functions * Measuring procedure for voltage measurement TRMS * Measuring procedure for current measurement TRMS * Type of measured value acquisition seamless * Curve shape of voltage Sinusoidal or distorted * Buffering of measured variables No * Parameter length 38 byte * Bandwidth of measured value acquisition 2 kHz; Harmonics: 39 / 50 Hz, 32 / 60 Hz Operating mode for measured value acquisition - automatic detection of line frequency No; Parameterizable Measuring range - Frequency measurement, min. 45 Hz - Frequency measurement, max. 65 Hz Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 68 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Technical specifications 10.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 Measuring inputs for voltage - Measurable line voltage between phase 230 V and neutral conductor - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors - Measurable line voltage between phase 90 V and neutral conductor, min. - Measurable line voltage between phase 264 V and neutral conductor, max. - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, min. 155 V - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, max. 460 V - Measurement category for voltage measurement in accordance with IEC 61010-2-030 CAT II; CAT III in case of guaranteed protection level of 1.5 kV - Internal resistance line conductor and neutral conductor 3.4 M - Power consumption per phase 20 mW - Impulse voltage resistance 1,2/50s 1 kV 400 V Measuring inputs for current - measurable relative current (AC), min. 5 %; Relative to the secondary rated current; 1 A, 5A - measurable relative current (AC), max. 100 %; Relative to the secondary rated current; 1 A, 5 A - Continuous current with AC, maximum permissible 5A - Apparent power consumption per phase for measuring range 5 A 0.6 V*A - Rated value short-time withstand current restricted to 1 s 100 A - Input resistance measuring range 0 to 5 25 m; At the terminal A - Zero point suppression Parameterizable: 20 ... 250 mA, default 50 mA - Surge strength 10 A; for 1 minute Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 69 Technical specifications 10.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0 Accuracy class according to IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable voltage 0.5 - Measured variable current 0.5 - Measured variable apparent power 1 - Measured variable active power 1 - Measured variable reactive power 1 - Measured variable power factor 0.5 - Measured variable active energy 1 - Measured variable reactive energy 2 - Measured variable phase angle 1 ; not covered by IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable frequency 0.05 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels and backplane bus Yes; 3 700V AC (type test) CAT III Isolation Isolation tested with 2 300V AC for 1 min. (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight (without packaging) 45 g Data for selecting a current transformer * Burden power current transformer x/1A, min. As a function of cable length and cross section, see device manual * Burden power current transformer x/5A, min. As a function of cable length and cross section, see device manual Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 70 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Technical specifications 10.1 Technical specifications ATEX approval In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 71 A Parameter data records A.1 Configuration via parameter data records The parameter data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN mode, for example change the diagnostics behavior. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module via the respective data record. The parameters set in STEP 7 do not change in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are still valid after a restart. If you reconfigure a module (so that the user data size changes) and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". STATUS output parameter If errors occur during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 72 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Parameter data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 73 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information for a module. Figure A-3 Module header information Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 74 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 75 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-4 Module parameter block You can find the user data variant in the section Overview of the user data variants (Page 92). Channel header information The following figure shows the structure of the header information for a channel. Figure A-5 Channel header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 76 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 77 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-6 Channel parameter block Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 78 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Bytes 6, 10, 14, 20...22, 28...30, 36 and 37, and set reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 02 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 8 and set reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 05 Measuring range for voltage invalid. Check Byte 5. Permitted values: 01H to 0CH DF 80 E1 20 Connection type invalid. Check Byte 4. Permitted values: 00H, 0BH ... 01H DF 80 E1 21 Parameter for user data variant in DS 128 not possible or input data configuration not large enough. Check Byte 11. Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 22 Parameter for user data variant is invalid. Check Byte 11. Select a valid code for the user data variant. DF 80 E1 23 Parameter for frequency is invalid. Check Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 24 Parameter for tolerance line voltage is invalid. Check Byte 7. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 25 Parameter for current transformer secondary current is invalid. Check Bit 4...5 in Byte 20, 28, 36. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 26 Reserved parameter bits for current transformer on secondary side are not zero. Enter 0 in Bytes 20, 28 and 36 and in Bits 0...3 and Bit 6. DF 80 E1 29 Parameter for tolerance value overcurrent invalid. Check Byte 15, 23, 31. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 30 Parameter for tolerance time overcurrent invalid. Check Bytes 16...17, 24...25, 32...33. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2B Parameter for low limit measuring current invalid Check Byte 9. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2C Parameter for current transformer primary current is invalid. Check Bytes 18...19, 26...27, 34...35. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 79 B Measured variables Measured variables for data records and user data The following table provides an overview of all measured variables that are used in the data records and user data. Note that the format and unit differ in the evaluation of records and user data. Table B- 1 Measured variables for data records and user data Measured value ID Measured variables 1 Voltage UL1-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 2 Voltage UL2-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 3 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 4 Voltage UL1-L2 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 5 Voltage UL2-L3 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 6 Voltage UL3-L1 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 7 Current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 10000.0 8 Current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 10000.0 9 Current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 10000.0 10 Apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 11 Apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 12 Apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 Active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 Active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 Active power L3 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 16 Reactive power L1 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 Reactive power L2 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 18 Reactive power L3 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 19 Power factor L1 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 1 3 Data type Unit Value range Connection type 1P2W 3P4W Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 80 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit Value range Connection type 21 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 30 Frequency REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 34 Total active power L1L2L3 5 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 37 Total power factor L1L2L3 6 7 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 38 Amplitude balance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 39 Amplitude symmetry for current REAL % 0 ... 200 200 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 1038 1P2W 4 2 2 3P4W 201 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 202 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 205 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 1038 1038 to +3.4 x 206 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 REAL varh -3.4 x 1038 to +3.4 x 1038 210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 6 6 6 LREAL 212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 215 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 to 2147483647 222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 to 2147483647 223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 225 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 DINT varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 81 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type 61178 Phase angle L1 3 61180 Active energy inflow L1 LREAL 61181 Active energy outflow L1 6 LREAL 61182 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 LREAL 61183 Reactive energy outflow L1 61184 Apparent energy L1 6 61185 Active energy L1 61186 REAL Unit Value range Connection type 0.0 ... 360.0 1P2W 3P4W Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 10308 Reactive energy L1 6 LREAL varh 1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61198 Phase angle L2 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61200 Active energy inflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61201 Active energy outflow L2 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61202 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61203 Reactive energy outflow L2 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61204 Apparent energy L2 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61205 Active energy L2 6 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61206 Reactive energy L2 6 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61218 Phase angle L3 3 0.0 ... 360.0 61220 Active energy inflow L3 61221 Active energy outflow L3 6 61222 Reactive energy inflow L3 61223 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 61224 Apparent energy L3 61225 Active energy L3 61226 Reactive energy L3 6 62110 Active energy inflow L1 6 62111 Active energy outflow L1 62112 Reactive energy inflow L1 62113 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 62114 Apparent energy L1 62210 Active energy inflow L2 6 62211 Active energy outflow L2 62212 Reactive energy inflow L2 62213 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 62214 Apparent energy L2 62310 Active energy inflow L3 6 6 6 6 6 6 LREAL REAL 6 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 10308 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 VAh 10308 LREAL 6 to +1.8 x 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Varh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Varh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Varh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Varh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT VAh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 82 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type 62311 Active energy outflow L3 6 62312 Reactive energy inflow L3 62313 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 62314 Apparent energy L3 Unit Value range Connection type 1P2W 6 3P4W UDINT Wh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Varh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT Varh 0 to 2147483647 UDINT VAh 0 to 2147483647 66001 Voltage UL1-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66002 Voltage UL2-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66003 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66004 Voltage UL1-L2 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66005 Voltage UL2-L3 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66006 Voltage UL3-L1 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66007 Current L1 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 Current L2 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 Current L3 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66010 Apparent power L1 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 Apparent power L2 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 Apparent power L3 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66013 Active power L1 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 Active power L2 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 Active power L3 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66016 Reactive power L1 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 Reactive power L2 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 Reactive power L3 6 1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66019 Power factor L1 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Power factor L2 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66030 Frequency USINT 1 Hz 45 ... 65 66034 Total active power L1L2L3 5 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66035 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66036 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66037 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66038 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 3 3 4 4 6 1 Effective value 2 IEC 61557-12 3 Arithmetical mean value over 200 ms as floating mean 4 Arithmetical mean value over 10 s as floating mean 5 Simple summation 6 Calculation from the start/restart (inflow and outflow values are positive numbers) 7 Determined from ratio of active and apparent power Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 83 Measured variables Format Table B- 2 Format and its length in bytes Format in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Format to IEEE Length in bytes Comment BYTE BYTE 1 byte Bit field with 8 bit WORD WORD 2 bytes Bit field with 16 bit USINT INT8 (unsigned) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits without sign INT INT16 (signed) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits with sign UINT INT16 (unsigned) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits without sign UDINT INT32 (unsigned) 4 bytes Fixed-point number 32 bits without sign DINT INT32 (signed) 4 bytes Fixed-point number, 32 bits with sign REAL Float32 4 bytes Floating-point number 32 bits with sign LREAL Float64 8 bytes Floating-point number 64 bits with sign Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 84 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB C Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" User data of the module The module has 2 bytes of input user data and 2 bytes of output user data for status and control information. At this module version measured variables can be read solely via measured value data records (no measured variables can be evaluated via user data). Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data is fixed. Table C- 1 Structure of input user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Constant = 0x80 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 85 Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Allocation of the input user data Figure C-1 Allocation of the status bytes in the input user data (2 bytes) Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed. Table C- 2 Structure of output user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module Reserved Reserved 1 Module Control outputs Reset of values and counters, gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 86 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Assignment of the output user data You control the counter gate for the energy counter via the output user data. Figure C-2 Allocation of the control byte in the output user data (1 byte) Note For module version 2 I / 2 Q, a reset always acts on all energy counters of the three phases. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 87 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" User data of the module The module occupies 32 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 12 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (Bytes 2 to 31) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You can set the contents of the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 3 Structure of input user data (32 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Display of the utilized user data variant 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 31 Module or phase Data 2 or 4 bytes of measured values or calculated values according to user data variant Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 88 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. Figure C-3 Assignment of the input user data (32 bytes) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 89 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed and is the same at all the selectable user data variants. Via the output user data you globally control Resetting for energy counter (reset via Byte 1 and selection via Byte 2) The counter gate for the energy counter. Table C- 4 Structure of output user data (12 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Switching the user data variant 1 Module Control byte 1 Reset of values and counters, gate 2 Module Control byte 2 Selection for resetting the energy counters 3 ... 11 Reserved Control byte for user data variant Figure C-4 Allocation of the control bytes for user data variant (Byte 0) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 90 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Control bytes for all three phases Figure C-5 Allocation of the control bytes for all three phases (bytes 1 and 2) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 91 D User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data User data 30 bytes are available for transferring the measured values in a cycle at the module version 32 I / 12 Q. This module variant therefore supports dynamic switching between 11 preconfigured user data variants that contain a specific selection of measured values. For more detailed information, refer to "Selecting the module versions (Page 24)". Table D- 1 Overview of the user data variants User data User data variant Total power L1L2L3 254 (FEH) - default setting Active power L1L2L3 253 (FDH) Reactive power L1L2L3 252 (FCH) Apparent power L1L2L3 251 (FBH) Basic measured values L1L2L3 250 (FAH) Total energy L1L2L3 249 (F9H) Energy L1 248 (F8H) Energy L2 247 (F7H) Energy L3 246 (F6H) Basic variables three-phase measurement L1L2L3 245 (F5H) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 159 (9FH) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 92 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Total power L1L2L3 (ID 254 or FEH) Table D- 2 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66035 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 93 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Active power L1L2L3 (ID 253 or FDH) Table D- 3 Active power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 253 (FDH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 10 ... 11 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 12 ... 13 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 14 ... 15 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 16 ... 19 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 94 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Reactive power L1L2L3 (ID 252 or FCH) Table D- 4 Reactive power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 252 (FCH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Reactive power L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66016 10 ... 11 Reactive power L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 12 ... 13 Reactive power L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 14 ... 15 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66035 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 95 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Apparent power L1L2L3 (ID 251 or FBH) Table D- 5 Apparent power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 251 (FBH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 13 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 14 ... 15 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 16 ... 19 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total apparent energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 96 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic measured values L1L2L3 (ID 250 or FAH) Table D- 6 Basic measured values L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 250 (FAH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66001 10 ... 11 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66002 12 ... 13 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 66003 14 ... 15 Voltage UL1-UL2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 60000 66004 16 ... 17 Voltage UL2-UL3 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 60000 66005 18 ... 19 Voltage UL3-UL1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 60000 66006 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Reserved BYTE - - - 28 Reserved BYTE - - - 29 Reserved BYTE - - - 30 ... 31 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 0 ... 65535 66038 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 97 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Total energy L1L2L3 (ID 249 or F9H) Table D- 7 Total energy L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Reserved BYTE - - - 3 Reserved BYTE - - - 4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 220 8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 221 11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 222 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 223 20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 24 Reserved BYTE - - - 25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 98 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Energy L1 (ID 248 or F8H) Table D- 8 Energy L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 248 (F8H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62110 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62111 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62112 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62113 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 99 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Energy L2 (ID 247 or F7H) Table D- 9 Energy L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 247 (F7H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62210 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62211 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62212 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62213 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 100 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Energy L3 (ID 246 or F6H) Table D- 10 Energy L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 246 (F6H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62310 8 ... 11 Active energy L3, outflow UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62311 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62312 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62313 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Basic variables three-phase measurements (ID 245 or F5H) Table D- 11 Basic variables three-phase measurements Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range 0 User data variant BYTE - 245 (F5H) Measured value ID - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL Bit string 1W 66034 6 ... 9 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 10 ... 13 14 ... 17 18 ... 21 22 ... 25 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 REAL REAL REAL REAL 1 Wh 1A 1A 1A 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 0.0 ... 10000.0 0.0 ... 10000.0 0.0 ... 10000.0 200 7 8 9 26 ... 27 28 ... 29 30 ... 31 Voltage UL1-N Voltage UL2-N Voltage UL3-N UINT UINT UINT 0.01 V 0.01 V 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 0 ... 30000 0 ... 30000 66001 66002 66003 201 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 101 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 (ID 159 or 9FH) Table D- 12 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 159 (9FH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 to 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 to 65535 66007 4 to 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 to 65535 66001 6 to 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 to 27648 66013 8 to 9 Reactive power L1 INT 1 var -27648 to 27648 66016 10 to 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 to 27648 66010 12 to 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62115 16 to 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62116 20 to 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 to 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 to 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 to 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 to 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 to 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 to 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 to 255 - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 to 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 102 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.1 E Overview of all measured value data records Energy Meter 400VAC ST writes the measured values in several data records that you can read acyclically using the RDREC instruction in the user program. The following tables show the structure of the individual data records: Data record DS 142 for basic measured values (read only). Data record DS 143 for energy counters (read and write). Note * The cumulative value of the energy counters in 3-phase operation is obtained from the sums of the respective individual values of the phases. * Inflow and outflow energy meters are always positive values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 103 Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Measured variables of the module The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142 supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that are not relevant. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 80)). Table E- 1 Byte Data record 142 Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 1 6...9 Voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 2 10...13 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 3 14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 4 18...21 Voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 5 22...25 Voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 10000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 10000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 10000.0 9 38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 42...45 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 46...49 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30 58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 38 62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current REAL % 0 to 100 39 66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 70...73 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 74...77 Apparent power L3 REAL VA 109 -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 10 11 ... +3.0 x 109 12 ... +3.0 x 109 36 16 78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 82...85 Reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 86...89 Reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 90...93 Reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 94...97 98...101 Total reactive power L1L2L3 Active power L1 REAL REAL var W 109 -3.0 x 109 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 18 ... +3.0 x 109 35 ... +3.0 x 109 13 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 104 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 102...105 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x Measured value ID 14 109 106...109 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 34 15 114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 118...121 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 122...125 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 130...133 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh -3.4 x 1038 to +3.4 x 1038 134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 1038 1038 to +3.4 x 204 1038 206 205 1038 138...141 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202 203 1038 200 201 146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh to +1.8 x 214 10308 216 215 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 10308 213 186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 Wh 10308 211 202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL 0.0 ... 1.8 x Procedure Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. Use SFB "RDREC" to read out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7 library. Measured values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 Measured values are represented as negative values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 if the value range of the integer format (32767 dec) is exceeded. This is not an error in the measured value. Solution: Select hexadecimal representation. Conversion of 64-bit floating-point numbers If you cannot process 64-bit floating-point numbers in your automation system, we recommend conversion to 32-bit floating-point numbers. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For a description of the conversion of the 64-bit floating-point numbers (data type LREAL) into 32-bit floating-point numbers (data type REAL) please refer to the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56600676). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 105 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Energy meter data record 143 for different actions The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions: Reset the energy counter to user-specific value (e.g. "0") Reading the current values of the energy counters Energy meter data record 143 Table E- 2 Energy meter data record 143 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 106 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61181 24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182 32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61183 40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 61184 48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 61200 56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 61201 64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 61202 72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 61203 80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh 61204 88...95 Active energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61220 96...103 Active energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61221 104...111 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61222 112...119 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61223 120...127 Apparent energy (initial value) L3 LREAL VAh 61224 Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the measured value data record 143: Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version. DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC instruction. Enter a valid length. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 107 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. The start values may not be negative. DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. Observe the ranges of values for start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) 108 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Tips and tricks F.1 F Tips and tricks FAQ and application examples Several FAQs and application examples are available to help you at work with the AI Energy Meter . Measuring and visualizing energy data You can find these application example at Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/86299299) IT network You must create an artificial N-conductor (for example, by means of a 1:1 voltage transformer) in IT networks due to the missing neutral conductor. You can then use the module. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 109 Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Edition 10/2017 support.industry.siemens.com SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual 10/2017 A5E36061895-AB ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring Configuration / address ___________________ 4 space ___________________ 5 Quick start Reading and processing ___________________ 6 measured values ___________________ 7 Energy counters ___________________ 8 Operating hours counter ___________________ 9 Limit monitoring Minimum and maximum ___________________ 10 values Phase-based measured ___________________ 11 values ___________________ 12 Parameters ___________________ 13 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms ___________________ 14 Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data records ___________________ B Measured variables ___________________ C Module versions ___________________ D User data variants ___________________ E Measured value data records ___________________ F Tips and tricks Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36061895-AB 08/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Changes/enhancements described in this manual, compared to the previous version: "Quality information" section rearranged. "Measured variables for limit monitoring" section supplemented. Notes on the previous version of this manual have been taken into account in the current edition. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies both to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system and to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 4 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 13 3 4 2.1 Area of application ................................................................................................................. 13 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST ..................................................................... 15 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 18 3.1 Terminal and block diagram................................................................................................... 18 3.2 Connection examples ............................................................................................................ 21 3.3 Current transformer selection data ........................................................................................ 24 Configuration / address space ............................................................................................................... 27 4.1 Configuring ............................................................................................................................. 27 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Selecting the module versions ............................................................................................... 28 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 ...................................................................... 29 Module versions at configuration with GSD file ..................................................................... 30 Changing over the user data variant during operation........................................................... 31 Recommendations for selecting the module version ............................................................. 32 4.3 Applicable modules ................................................................................................................ 33 5 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 35 6 Reading and processing measured values ............................................................................................ 37 7 6.1 Basics for reading measured values ...................................................................................... 37 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Quality information ................................................................................................................. 39 Quality information in byte 1 of the user data ........................................................................ 39 Quality information with measured value IDs ........................................................................ 41 Operating quadrant ................................................................................................................ 44 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically.............................................................. 45 6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record .................................................. 47 Energy counters .................................................................................................................................... 48 7.1 How the energy meter works ................................................................................................. 48 7.2 Configuring counters .............................................................................................................. 51 7.3 Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter ..................................................................... 53 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters................................................................. 54 Reset energy counters via user data ..................................................................................... 54 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 .......................... 56 Example for energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 ...................... 58 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 6 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Table of contents 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 8 9 10 11 Operating hours counter........................................................................................................................ 68 8.1 How the operating hours counter works .................................................................................68 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 Reset operating hours counters ..............................................................................................69 Reset operating hours counters via user data ........................................................................69 Resetting operating hours counters via data record DS 143 ..................................................70 Limit monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 72 9.1 How limit monitoring works .....................................................................................................72 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring .....................................................74 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation ......................................................76 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring ..................................................................................78 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................................. 82 10.1 Minimum and maximum values ..............................................................................................82 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values ..............................................................................84 Phase-based measured values ............................................................................................................. 87 11.1 12 13 14 B Phase-based measured values ..............................................................................................87 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 89 12.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................89 12.2 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................94 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 99 13.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................99 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 Interrupts ...............................................................................................................................101 Hardware interrupts ..............................................................................................................101 Diagnostics interrupt .............................................................................................................102 13.3 Diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................103 13.4 Diagnostics response............................................................................................................104 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 106 14.1 A Data record for energy counter (DS 143) ...............................................................................61 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ..................................................................................61 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143....................................................65 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................106 Parameter data records....................................................................................................................... 112 A.1 Configuration via parameter data records ............................................................................112 A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module .......................................113 A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring ...........................................121 A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping .....................................125 Measured variables ............................................................................................................................. 131 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 7 Table of contents C D Module versions ...................................................................................................................................142 C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" .................................................................................................... 142 C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" ................................................................................................ 145 C.3 "User-specific" module version ............................................................................................ 151 C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" ...................... 153 User data variants ................................................................................................................................155 D.1 E F User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data ..................................... 155 Measured value data records ...............................................................................................................175 E.1 Overview of all measured value data records ...................................................................... 175 E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) .......................................... 176 E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ............................................................................... 179 E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) ............................................... 184 E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) ................................................ 186 E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) .................... 188 E.7 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) .................... 190 E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) .................... 192 E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) ...... 194 Tips and tricks......................................................................................................................................196 F.1 Tips and tricks ...................................................................................................................... 196 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 8 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 9 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 10 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 11 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 12 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Product overview 2.1 2 Area of application Introduction Energy efficiency is playing an increasingly important role in industry. Rising energy prices, increasing pressure to improve profitability and the growing awareness of climate protection are important factors for reducing energy costs and for introducing an energy data management system. Where can you use the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST? AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is designed for machine-level deployment in an ET 200SP distributed I/O system. AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST records over 200 different electrical measurement and energy values. It lets you create transparency about the energy requirements of individual components of a production plant even down to the machine level. Using the measured values provided by the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, you can determine energy consumption and power consumption. You can determine consumption forecasts and efficiency from the measured values. Power consumption measurements are relevant for load management and maintenance. In addition, you can use the measurements for energy reporting and for determining the CO2 footprint. Note Measuring dangerous electrical quantities The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is not tested according to DIN EN 61010-2-030 and may therefore not be used to verify, measure or monitor protective measures according to DIN EN 61557. Qualified personnel must ensure through additional measures that no danger ensues for humans and the environment in case of an incorrect display. TN and TT system The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST can be used in TN and TT systems. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 13 Product overview 2.1 Area of application Measuring with AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST A typical supply network of a production plant is usually divided into three voltage ranges: The infeed of the entire plant The subdistribution, for example, to individual lines within the plant The end consumers such as the machines in the lines. The following figure shows the measurement in an electricity supply network: Figure 2-1 Use of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Advantages of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST has the following advantages: Space-saving especially for use in control cabinet PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP (depending on the interface module in use) Multiple modules can be used with one interface module Extension of existing stations by components for energy recording Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 14 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Product overview 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Figure 2-2 LED for supply voltage Function class Color identification label module type Function and firmware version Article number View of the module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 15 Product overview 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Properties The module has the following technical properties: Measurement of electrical variables from single-phase, two-phase and three-phase supply networks Max. nominal voltage between two outer conductors 480 VAC Retentive storage of the counter values Recording of: - Voltages - Currents - Phase angles - Power - Energy / electrical work - Frequencies - Minimum and maximum values - Power factors - Operating hours - Limits The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function HW version FW version STEP 7 GSD file TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V4.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with update 4 and HSP or higher V5.5 SP4 and hotfix 7 or higher X --- Calibration in runtime FS01 V4.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with update 4 and HSP or higher --- --- --- Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V4.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with update 4 and HSP or higher V5.5 SP4 and hotfix 7 or higher X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V4.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with update 4 and HSP or higher V5.5 SP4 and hotfix 7 or higher X X Diagnostic interrupts FS01 V4.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with update 4 and HSP or higher V5.5 SP4 and hotfix 7 or higher X X Hardware interrupts FS01 V4.0.0 or higher V13 SP1 with update 4 and HSP or higher V5.5 SP4 and hotfix 7 or higher X --- Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 16 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Product overview 2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: BaseUnit Type D0 Labeling strips Reference identification label You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/58649293) system manual. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 17 3 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram In an ET 200SP station, the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST forms its own potential group together with its dark BaseUnit. General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life due to electric shock Touching live parts can lead to death or severe injuries. Before beginning any work deenergize the system and the Energy Meter and short-circuit installed transformers. WARNING Danger to life, dangerous system conditions and material damage possible Removing and inserting the Energy Meter under live voltage is prohibited! For this reason the symbol "Do not Hot Swap" is located on the Energy Meter. If you remove and insert the Energy Meter under live voltage during operation, the transformers used can produce dangerous induction voltages and electric arcs and dangerous system conditions can arise. The Energy Meter may only be removed and inserted during operation if the measuring voltages supplied to the BaseUnit at terminals UL1 , UL2, UL3 are disconnected at all poles and special current transformer terminals are used that short-circuit the transformer on the secondary side on removal. CAUTION Use only in three-phase and AC networks Operation with direct voltage/direct current will destroy the Energy Meter. Use the Energy Meter solely to measure electrical variables in three-phase and AC networks. Supplying the module The Energy Meter is supplied through the terminals UL1 and N. The required minimum voltage amounts to 85 VAC. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 18 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Protecting the connection cables To protect the connection cables at UL1, UL2 and UL3, make sure there is adequate cable protection, especially after cross-section transitions. If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. Terminal and block diagram Figure 3-1 Microcontroller ULn Voltage connection Backplane bus interface ILn Current connection Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) N Neutral Power measurement Block diagram of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 19 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Usable BaseUnit The ET 200SP Distributed I/O System manual explains that a potential group always starts with a light BaseUnit. The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST makes an exception in this case and only uses the dark BaseUnits type D0, 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0. The BaseUnit is not in contact with the power bus and passes the potential through from the left to the right slot. When using some older CPUs / interface modules, note that the first permissible place for AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is slot 2. Connection types The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST supports the following connection types: 3P4W1, 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load 3P4W, 3 phases, 4 conductors 2P3W, 2 phases, 3 conductors 1P2W, 1 phase, 2 conductors 3 x 1P2W, 3 x 1 phase, 2 conductors The input circuit of the module must correspond to one of the listed connection types. Select the appropriate connection type for the intended use. You will find examples of connections in the section Connection examples (Page 21). Information on the selection of a current transformer is available in the section Current transformer selection data (Page 24). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 20 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.2 Connection examples 3.2 Connection examples The following figures show the connection of the Energy Meter for three-phase, two-phase and single-phase measurements. Note that the Energy Meter must always be connected via a current transformer. The use of voltage transformers is optional. Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current transformers 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current and three voltage transformers 3P4W1 Balanced load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with one current transformer Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 21 Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W1 Balanced load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with one current and one voltage transformer 2P3W Any load Two-phase measurement, 3 conductors Connection with two current transformers 2P3W Any load Two-phase measurement, 3 conductors Connection with two current and two voltage transformers Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. 1P2W Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors Measurement in an AC network with a current transformer Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phases 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 22 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type Wiring diagram 1P2W Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors 3 x 1P2W 3 x single-phase measurement 3 x 1P2W 3 x single-phase measurement Comment Measuring the load in an AC network with a current and a voltage converter Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phases 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Measurement with three current transformers for any three loads that are each connected to one of the three phases Max. permissible secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A Measurement with three current transformers and three voltage transformers for any three loads that are each connected to one of the three phases Max. permissible secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A * If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. Current transformer connection requirements DIN VDE 0100-557 and IEC 60364-5-55 require the following for the connection of current transformers: The secondary circuits of current transformers must not be grounded. Guards must not be used in the secondary circuits of current transformers. The insulation of the secondary cables of transformers must be designed for the highest voltage of all active components, or the secondary cables must be installed in such a way that their insulation cannot touch any active components, such as busbars. Connection points must be provided for temporary measurements. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 23 Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data 3.3 Current transformer selection data Introduction Connection via a current transformer is always required for the current measurement. Use toroids with an accuracy class of 0.5, 1 or 3. Dimensioning of the current transformer The correct dimensioning of the current transformer is important for the following reasons: You achieve correct results from the measurements and You do not overload or damage the current transformers. Selecting a current transformer Use current transformers with a burden capacity 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power dissipation in the terminal circuit (consisting of resistance of the connection cables and burden of energy meter). 1.5 times the power loss is required in order to prevent the transformer from overloading. 2 times the power dissipation is important to ensure the current limiting in case of a short-circuit. Maximum length of the connection cable To avoid overloading or damaging the current transformer, the burden Zn specified on the data sheet of the current transformer (in VA) must not be exceeded. To prevent this being exceeded, the entire burden resistance (consisting of the resistance of the connection cable and the internal resistance of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (see figure below) must be below a certain resistance value (depending on Zn and Imax). Figure 3-2 Maximum length of the connection cable The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable is obtained with the following formula: RL Cable resistance in ohms Imax Zn Rated burden current transformer in VA Rburden Resistance of the Energy Meter (25 m) Figure 3-3 Secondary current of the current transformer Maximum value for the resistance of the connection cable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 24 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data Based on the maximum cable resistance in ohms, you then calculate the maximum length of the connection cable. To do this, check the data sheet of the connection cable you are using. Note The length of the connection cable (outwards and return) must not exceed the value of 200 meters. Example: Usage of a current transformer 500/5 A You use a current transformer with a transmission ration of 500/5 A that has a rated burden Zn of 5 VA according to the data sheet. The maximum primary current in the application amounts to 400 A. This means that the maximum secondary current Imax. amounts to 4 A. The burden of the AI Energy Meter including connection resistance amounts to RBurden = 25 m. The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) is obtained using the following formula: The maximum cable resistance between the transformer and the terminals of the Energy Meter may not exceed 287.5 m in this case. The corresponding cable length (outgoing and incoming line) depends on the cross-section used of the copper line and can be determined by using the following table. The following table shows the resistance values of copper cables for typical cross-sections with = 0.017857 x mm2/m Estimating the length for a connection cable The value in the table must be less than the calculated terminal resistance RL max of the cable. For the resistance RLmax of 287.5 m used in the above example it is possible to use a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m from a cross-section of 0.75 mm2 upward. Crosssection AWG Cable overview for copper 0.5 m 1m 5m 10 m 50 m 0.25 mm2 24 35.7 m 71.4 m 357.1 m 714.3 m 3571.4 m 0.34 mm2 22 26.3 m 52.5 m 262.6 m 525.2 m 2626.0 m 21 17.9 m 35.7 m 178.6 m 357.1 m 1785.7 m 0.5 mm2 0.75 mm2 19/20 11.9 m 23.8 m 119.0 m 238.1 m 1190.5 m 1.0 mm2 18 8.9 m 17.9 m 89.3 m 178.6 m 892.9 m 1.5 mm2 16 6.0 m 11.9 m 59.5 m 119.0 m 595.2 m 2.5 mm2 14 3.6 m 7.1 m 35.7 m 71.4 m 357.1 m Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 25 Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data Checking the ratio of burden load and power loss The rated burden of the transformer must be 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power loss in the connection circuit to ensure that the transformer is not overloaded and that the current limitation is ensured during a short-circuit. At a maximum secondary current of 4 A the power loss in the connection circuit is calculated in accordance with the following formula for a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m and a cross-section of 1.0 mm2 and a burden resistance of the Energy Meter of 25 m: The ratio of the rated burden and the power loss in the connection circuit thus amounts to: The required ratio of rated burden and power loss in the connection circuit lies within the required range. The transformer is dimensioned sufficiently large. See also Technical specifications (Page 106) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 26 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.1 4 Configuring Introduction To configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST after connecting it, use configuration software such as STEP 7. In addition, you can also change numerous parameters of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST in RUN via the user program. Configuring You configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST with: STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 or higher and Hotfix 7 GSD file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET Note Consistency check of the parameter assignment only with STEP 7 If you configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST using STEP 7, STEP 7 already checks the various parameters for consistency while they are being entered. If you configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST using a GSD file, a consistency check is not carried out. The module does not recognize incorrect entries until after the parameter data record has been transferred. If the module recognizes an invalid parameter, the module rejects the complete data record. Preferably use STEP 7 to configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. The following instructions show the theoretical procedure for configuring the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP. 1. Select the ET 200SP distributed I/O system you are using in the hardware catalog. 2. Insert the module into your station. 3. Open the device view of the ET 200SP and insert the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. 4. Configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST to suit your requirements. Once the configuration has been compiled without errors, you can download the configuration to the CPU and commission the ET 200SP station while the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is running. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 27 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2 Selecting the module versions Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST has different module versions. During the configuration you use the selection of the module version to specify which measured values can be read. Each module version supplies quality information via the input user data. With the exception of the module version "2 I / 2 Q" you can read the measured values as user data cyclically from the process image. At each module version you have the option to read measured value records from the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST by using the RDREC instruction asynchronously. Influence of the module version on the address space Note Influence of the AI Energy Meter 480 VAC ST on the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP The available address space of the ET 200SP is influenced by the following factors: * CPU or interface module * Plugged I/O modules The address space made additionally available by the AI Energy Meter 480 VAC ST is essentially influenced by the length of the user data supplied. The module version determines the length of the user data, which can be supplied by the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST at maximum. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 28 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2.1 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 Module versions with fixed user data assignment Module version 2I/2Q User data Address space Comment No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs 2-byte outputs Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 142). 12 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs Information about the structure of the EE@Industry measured data profiles is available in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 153). Access to measured values through "Read data record". EE@Industry E0 EE@Industry E1 User data in accordance with EE@Industry measurement data profiles 4 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs EE@Industry E2 12 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs EE@Industry E3 104 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs Module versions with selectable user data variants Module version User data Address space Comment 32 I / 12 Q User data selectable through defined user data variants 32 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the 32 I / 12 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 145). Information about the user data variants at 32 I / 12 Q is available in the appendix User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data (Page 155). User-specific User data selectable through user data mapping or through defined user data variant Variable* / 12 byte outputs You have to activate the check box "User data-mapping" in STEP 7 to use the module version user-specifically. You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the user-specific module version is available in the appendix "Userspecific" module version (Page 151). * 16 ... 256 bytes in steps of 16 bytes, depending on the mapped measured values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 29 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2.2 Module versions at configuration with GSD file Module versions with fixed user data assignment Module version User data Address space Comment 2I/2Q No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs 2-byte outputs Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 142). 12 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs Information about the structure of the EE@Industry measured data profiles is available in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 153). Access to measured values through "Read data record". E0 E1 User data in accordance with EE@Industry measurement data profiles 4 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs E2 12 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs E3 104 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs Module versions with selectable user data variants Module version User data Address space Comment 32 I / 12 Q User data selectable through user data variants or through userspecific user data* 32 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs You can change over the user data variant during operation. 64 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs If you use user-specific user data, you write your measured value profile into the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST with the data record 130. To do this use the WRREC instruction. Information about the structure of data record 130 is available in appendix Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping (Page 125). 64 I / 12 Q 128 I / 12 Q 128 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs 256 I / 12 Q 256 byte inputs / 12 byte outputs *Ensure that the user data do not exceed the size of the address space of the module version. If necessary, use a module version with a larger address space Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 30 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2.3 Changing over the user data variant during operation Introduction You change the user data variant in the output data of each user data variant in Byte 0. The following figure shows to which user data you can change over at various module versions during operation. Requirement User program has been created. AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is configured as one of the module versions mentioned in the illustration above. The start address of the module is known in the process image output. Procedure 1. Create one constant with the data type BYTE per user data variant. 2. Enter the user data ID as a value in each case. 3. Write the constant to the start address of the module in the process image output. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 31 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Result The user data variant is switched with the next cycle. Note Information about user data changeover The parameterized user data variant is set in the following cases: * A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. * Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available or - Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant. 4.2.4 Recommendations for selecting the module version The following table shows which module version is suitable for a given purpose. Module version Application 2I/2Q * Note Use of many AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST in an ET 200SP or little address space is available * Read the measured values solely via the RDREC instruction from a measured value data record. * Quality information about the measured values is always available. EE@Industry measurement data profile * * E0 / E1 / E2 / E3 Cyclic measurement per phase Available measured values depend on the configured measurement data profile. * Supplied measured values in accordance with the EE@Industry measured data profile * The user data are fixed and cannot be changed dynamically. Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from a measured value data record via the RDREC instruction. * No quality information 32 I / 12 Q User-specific * Cyclic measurement per phase * Quality information about the measured values is always available. * Flexibility by switching predefined user data variants * * Cyclic measurement of up to 64 measured values configurable Depending on the user data variant, you must convert the measured values in the CPU to physical values using the supplied scaling factor. * * Flexibility by switching predefined user data variants One cycle elapses for each user data changeover. Measured values from the next user data variant are thus supplied with a slight time offset. With GSD configuration * 32 I / 12 Q * 64 I / 12 Q * 128 I / 12 Q * 256 I / 12 Q Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from a measured value data record via the RDREC instruction. Consistent measured values of a measuring cycle are supplied. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 32 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules 4.3 Applicable modules Configuring with STEP 7 The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured with STEP 7. Table 4- 1 Module versions configured with STEP 7 Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 12 Q User-specific EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V1.0 or higher* E1 E2 V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.2 or higher --- V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher* V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher --- IM 155-6 PN HS E3 V4.0 or higher IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher --- V1.0 or higher --- CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher * Only up to 32 bytes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 33 Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules Configuring with GSD file The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured using a GSD file. Table 4- 2 Module versions configuring with GSD file Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 12 Q 64 I / 12 Q 128 I / 12 Q 256 I / 12 Q EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 E1 E2 E3 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher --- V3.2 or higher IM 155-6 PN HS IM 155-6 DP HF V4.0 or higher V1.0 or higher --- ----- --- --- Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 34 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 5 Quick start Introduction This section shows you how to read and view your first measured values on the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST in a particularly quick and easy way. Requirement You have already connected the Energy Meter to your network with one of the connection types shown in the section Wiring (Page 18). The Energy Meter 480 VAC ST has already been integrated in your configuration tool (such as STEP 7), or the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST has been integrated in your hardware catalog with the GSD/GSDML file. Procedure 1. Configure an ET 200SP station Configure an ET 200SP station with a CPU 151xSP or an IM 155-6. 2. Plug module in ET 200S station Plug the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST into the ET 200SP station and use the module version with 32 bytes inputs and 12 bytes outputs. 3. Set the module parameters Set the following parameters for the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST: - Connection type that you have used for the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST (e.g. 3P4W) - Measuring range, i.e. the phase voltage (UL1-N) of your network (for example 230 V AC) - Frequency of your network (for example 50 Hz) - Primary and secondary current of the used current transformer (e.g. 100 A and 1 A) - Primary and secondary voltages of the used voltage transformer (e.g. 230 V and 230 V) Leave all other parameters at their default settings and do not change them. 4. Load configuration Switch on the ET 200SP station and download the configuration to the CPU. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 35 Quick start Result After being switched on, the Energy Meter supplies the measured values for the "Total power L1L2L3" user data variant "Basic measurements" with the ID 254 or FEH. Read and check the measured values provided by the Energy Meter in the output data. The table below shows the structure of the user data variant, the measured variables and the data type of the measured values in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) that are stored in the 32 bytes of output data of the module. Each measured variable is referenced via the measured value ID. An overview of all the measured variables with their measured value IDs is provided in the section Measured variables (Page 131). Table 5- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66035 10 ... 11 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66036 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66034 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Additional information If you require further information about the evaluation and interpretation of the measured values, please refer to the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 37). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 36 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.1 6 Basics for reading measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides the measured values and variables through the following methods: Cyclic: User data Acyclic: Measured value data records User data User data provide pre-defined measured values depending on the configured user data variant. The supplied measured values are cyclically written to the process image of the CPU. With some user data variants, the measured values are supplied as raw data, which you have to convert to the corresponding physical values using a supplied scaling factor. Measured value data records Each measured value data record supplies physical values that you can further process immediately. You read the values of a measured value data record acyclically with the RDREC instruction in a PLC tag. You need a corresponding PLC tag for each measured value data record to be read. You can display the read measured values in a watch table in STEP 7. Note If you are using CPUs other than S7-1200 or S7-1500, convert 64-bit measured values to 32-bit measured values. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For more information, read FAQ: Processing 64-bit-floating-point numbers in S7-300/400 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/56600676) Validity of the measured values After turning on the supply voltage UL1, the first measured values are available after approximately 2 seconds. In the input user data, the content of byte 0 is set to the selected user data variant. You can use this change in byte 0 as a trigger event. As soon as the module has valid measured values, the value of this byte changes to a value within the value range. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 37 Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values Initial module startup After the first startup or restart of the module, the parameters are transferred to the module. You can preset a user data variant in the parameters of the hardware configuration. This remains in effect until a different user data variant is selected in the output data (byte 0). This allows input user data to be modified dynamically according to the requirements of the process. The user data variant defined in parameter data record 128 is used under the following conditions: A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available, or - Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant. See "Selecting the module versions (Page 28)". Current measured values become "0" The current and all other measured values based on it are suppressed (or set to "0") in the data records and in the user data in the following cases: The incoming current of the current transformer is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current" parameter Incoming secondary current at the channel is higher than 12 A The following measured values and derived measured variables of the phase involved become "0": Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Neutral current Phase angle Power factor A floating mean value is formed from the power values. These only become "0" after a corresponding time. The operating hours counter and the energy counter for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase stops counting. Substitute value behavior The substitute values for input values of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST amount to "0". See also Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 45) Read measured value from a measured value data record (Page 47) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 38 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2 Quality information Use the quality information to evaluate the status for currents, voltage, operating quadrants and the rotating field. The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides quality information: In byte 1 of the user data In measured value IDs 65500 to 65503 See also Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 145) 6.2.1 Quality information in byte 1 of the user data For all user data variants, the module provides brief quality information in an 8-bit field in byte 1 for: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) Voltages (U1, U2, U3) Operating quadrant for a phase Please note that quality information assignment with user data variants for phase-specific measurement (ID 154 to ID 159) is different from user data variant assignment for 3-phase measurement (ID 244 to ID 254). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 39 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Quality information in byte 1 of the user data for 3-phase measurement The quality information for 3-phase measurement is provided by the module in user data variants ID 244 to ID 254. Figure 6-1 Assignment of byte 1 for user data variants ID 224 to ID 254 Quality information in byte 1 for phase-specific measurement The quality information for phase-specific measurement is provided by the module in user data variants ID 154 to ID 159. Figure 6-2 Byte 1 assignment for user data variants ID 154 to ID 159 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 40 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2.2 Quality information with measured value IDs Complete quality information is provided by the module in a 16-bit field with measured value IDs 65500 to 65503. Measured value ID 65503 for 3-phase measurement Measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502 for phase-specific measurement in phase 1, phase 2 or phase 3 Quality information with measured value ID 65503 for 3-phase measurement The quality information for 3-phase measurement is provided by the module with: User data variant "Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H) User data (measured value ID 66503) Measured value data record 150 The measured value IDs 65503 provide information on: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) Voltages (U1, U2, U3) Operating quadrants for all 3 phases Rotating field for the 3-phase system Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 41 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Figure 6-3 Quality information for low and high byte of the measured value ID 65503 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 42 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Quality information with measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502 for phase-specific measurement The module provides quality information for phase-specific measurement in phase 1, phase 2 or phase 3 with: User data (with measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502) Measured value data record DS 147, 148 or 149 Measured value IDs 65500, 65501 and 65502 provide information on: Current of the phase in question Voltage of the phase in question Operating quadrant of the phase in question In contrast to the assignment for measured value ID 65503 (figure above), measured value IDs 65500, 65501 and 65502 only contain the phase-specific information for current, voltage and operating quadrant. The information about the other phases and the rotating field have the value 0. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 43 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2.3 Operating quadrant The figure below shows the quality information of the operating quadrants. Figure 6-4 Quadrant in the quality bits Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 44 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically Requirement STEP 7 is open. AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is configured. Scaling of measured values in the user data Since the value range of 16-bit values is often smaller than the value range of the physical value, a scaling factor is supplied together with the basic value in the user data for the respective measured or calculated values. You determine the actual value of the measured variable with the following formula: Actual value of measured quantity = measured value in the user data x 10scaling factor Procedure To read measured values from the user data cyclically, proceed as follows: 1. Read the relevant measured value from the input data. 2. Observe the scaling factor at scaled measured values and convert the read measured value using the scaling factor. Example The user data variant 254 (FEH) "Total power L1L2L3" is configured on the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. The measured value for "Current L1" should be read. Table 6- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 : : : : : : 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - : : : : : : 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 45 Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically In the user data variant FEH (254) the measured value for the current L1 is stored in Byte 2 + 3. The current is supplied by the module as a 16-bit-fixed-point number in the value range from 0 to 65535 in the unit 1 mA. In addition the scaling factor for the current L1 has to be considered additionally. The module supplies the related scaling factor in Byte 24. The actual value for current L1 is calculated as follows: Actual value for current L1 = Current L1 x 10Scaling current L1 See also Basics for reading measured values (Page 37) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 46 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Reading and processing measured values 6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record 6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record Introduction To read measured values of a measured value data record, use the RDREC instruction. The read values are stored in a PLC variable with user-defined data type (UDT). You can find more information on this in the STEP 7 documentation, under the keyword "RDREC". Requirement STEP 7 is open. AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is configured. Procedure 1. In STEP 7 create a user-defined data type with the structure of the data record to be read. 2. Insert the number of structural elements, which corresponds to the number of entries contained in the measured value data record. 3. Insert the RDREC instruction in the user program. 4. Configure the RDREC instruction as follows: - ID: Hardware identifier or start address of the Energy Meter (depending on the CPU used). - INDEX: Number of measured value data record whose entries are read. - MLEN: Length of the measured value data record in bytes. "0" if all the entries are to be read. - RECORD: Target range for the read data record Length depends on MLEN. 5. Call the RDREC instruction with REQ = 1. Result The values from the measured value data record were transferred into the target data area. See also Basics for reading measured values (Page 37) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 47 7 Energy counters 7.1 How the energy meter works Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides 42 energy counters that detect both line-based and phase-based energy values. Active energy (total, outflow, inflow) Reactive energy (total, outflow, inflow) Apparent energy (total) How energy recording works Based on the measured currents and voltages and the calculation cycle the Energy Meter calculates the active, reactive and apparent energy. The active, reactive and apparent energies are updated in each calculation cycle. Retentivity All the counter states of the module are stored retentively in the Energy Meter. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off Power System On), the energy counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Configuring You configure the following settings for the energy counters: Activation of the gate for the energy counter The gate allows you to start and stop the counters via output data (DQ bit). If you deactivate the gate, the count starts immediately when the Energy Meter is switched on. Modes of the energy counters The energy counters count either infinitely or periodically. For periodic counting, the adjustable full-scale values are 103, 106, 1012 and 1015. When the full-scale value is exceeded, the energy counter begins again at 0. At the same time the overflow counter is increased by 1 (see Resetting energy counters and overflow counters (Page 54)). The settings apply to the energy counter of all phases. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 48 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.1 How the energy meter works Changing properties in RUN You can change the following properties of energy counters in runtime: Enable / disable energy counter Reset energy counter Set initial values for the energy counter Change the mode of the energy counter Automatic reset of the energy counter The energy counters are automatically reset to "0" when parameter settings relevant to the energy counter are changed. In the case of phase-specific changing of parameter settings relevant to the energy counter only the energy counters of the respective phases are reset. Changing of the following parameters results in resetting of the energy counters: Measurement type or range Current transformer (primary current/secondary current) Voltage transformer (primary voltage/secondary voltage) Direction of current Full-scale value for energy counter Mode of the energy counter (infinite / periodic) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 49 Energy counters 7.1 How the energy meter works Example The following figure shows the effect of initial value, reset and start/stop parameters with activated gating using the energy counter as an example: The counter is reset to the value specified in the configuration. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. The gate is opened again via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts with the new start value. The gate is opened via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts. The configured current low limit has been violated. The counter does not count. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. A new start value is written to the measured value data record 143 with the WRREC instruction. The counter is reset via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts from the new start value that was transferred via the measured value data record 143. See also Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter (Page 53) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 50 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.2 Configuring counters 7.2 Configuring counters Overview You can configure the energy counters of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST as follows: Activate / Deactivate Start / stop counters using gate Set and reset start value Energy counter gate You have the option of starting and stopping the energy counter using the gate. To this purpose you have to: Select the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the configuration of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. Set the DQ bit for the "counter gate" in the user data in Control byte 1 of the output data (Bit 6 in Control byte 1). The "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts. Figure 7-1 Gate enabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 51 Energy counters 7.2 Configuring counters If you deselect the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the configuration of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, the energy counters operate independently of the DQ bit as long as the current value lies above the configured "Low limit for measuring current". Figure 7-2 Gate disabled Set and reset start value The counters can be set to their start value via the output data of each user data variant. With energy counters, you have to reset the bit of the energy counter in control byte 2 of the data record 143. You can reset each energy counter to the start value or also specify a new start value via the data record 143. You define the moment for updating of the start values in the data record 143 and in Control byte 1 in the user data. Start values are either applied immediately or after a reset bit has been set from 0 to 1. You can find a detailed description for this in section Resetting energy counters and overflow counters (Page 54). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 52 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.3 Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter 7.3 Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter The energy counters are evaluated by Using the input data of the user data variants for energy - User data variant "Total energy L1 L2 L3" (ID 249 or F9H) - User data variant "Energy L1" (ID 248 or F8H) - User data variant "Energy L2" (ID 247 or F7H) - User data variant "Energy L3" (ID 246 or F6H) Using the input data of the user-defined user data variant with the use of the respective measuring value IDs for energy counters By reading data records - "Data record for basic measured values (DS 142)" for evaluation of the total energies L1 L2 L3. - "Data record for energy counter (DS 143)" for evaluation of the phase-specific energy. - "Data record for phase-specific measured values L1 - L3 (DS 147 - 149) for evaluation of the phase-specific energies. The overflow counters are evaluated by: Using the input data of the user-defined user data variant with the use of the respective measuring value IDs for overflow counters Reading the "Data record for energy counter (DS 143)". Evaluate measured values The evaluation of measured values via the input data of user data variants and reading of data records with the RDREC instruction is described in the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 37). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 53 Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the energy and overflow counter of the Energy Meters Resetting here means setting the energy counters to their start values and resetting the overflow counters to 0. The following sections describe how you Reset energy counters via the outputs of the user data. Reset energy counters and overflow counters via data record 143. See also Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 61) 7.4.1 Reset energy counters via user data Introduction Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the energy counters depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 12 bytes of output data, you can Reset energy counters for all phases separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Reset energy counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. If you use the module version with 2 bytes output data, you always reset all the energy counters simultaneously. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 54 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters Procedure at module version with 12 bytes of output data Resetting energy counters for all 3 phases 1. Select the categories of energy counter that you want to reset in byte 2. - Set bit 5 for active energy counters. - Set bit 6 for reactive energy counters. - Set bit 7 for apparent energy counters. Figure 7-3 Selection of energy counters 2. Set the reset bit (bit 7) in byte 1. If there is an edge change of the reset bit for energy counters from 0 to 1, the module resets all energy counters that you previously selected in byte 2. Figure 7-4 Reset bit for energy counters Resetting energy counters for phase-specific measurement You can also reset the energy counters on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure for "Resetting energy counters for all 3 phases" as applicable. 1. Select the categories of energy counter that you want to reset on a phase-specific basis. - Set the bits for the phase 1 energy counters in byte 7. - Set the bits for the phase 2 energy counters in byte 9. - Set the bits for the phase 3 energy counters in byte 11. 2. Set the reset bit (bit 7) - in byte 6 for phase 1 - in byte 8 for phase 2 - in byte 10 for phase 3 If there is an edge change of the phase-specific reset bit for energy counters from 0 to 1, the module resets the energy counters for the given phase: Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 55 Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters Procedure at module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the energy counters simultaneously. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Figure 7-5 Resetting the energy counters at module version with 2 bytes of output data Start values After the reset the energy counters count with the specified start values (default = 0). You can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143, see section Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 (Page 56). You can also reset the counters on a phase-specific basis by active, reactive and apparent energy using data record 143. 7.4.2 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 Introduction At all the module versions you can reset the energy counters and their overflow counters via the data record DS 143. Resetting is possible for: Energy counters and overflow counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Procedure for all module versions using data record DS 143 1. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set the reset bit (Bit 2) to 1 and Bit 0 to 1 for the overflow counter. 2. In Control byte 2 of the DS 143 set the category of the energy counters (active, reactive, apparent energy) to 1 via Bits 5 to 7. 3. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set Bit 7 for the moment of application of the start values of the desired energy counters: - Bit 7 to 0, if the start value are to be applied immediately after the transfer of the data record - Bit 7 to 1, if the start value are only to be applied after the reset bit has been set in the output data of the user data. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 56 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set the reset bit (Bit 2) to 1 and Bit 0 to 1 for the overflow counter. Figure 7-6 Energy counter control information DS 143 4. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction. Start values You specify the moment for the application of the start values in Control byte 1 via Bit 7. After the reset the energy counters count with the specified start values (default = 0) and the overflow counters begin again with 0. You can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 57 Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters 7.4.3 Example for energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 Introduction Before you can transfer the data record DS 143 to the CPU you have to create a userdefined PLC data type in your user program that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Procedure 1. Create a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Detailed information on the structure of data record 143 is available in section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 179). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh See Section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 179) : : : : : : 162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 65506 166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h See Section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 179) 61181 65507 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 58 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters 2. Create a user-defined PLC data type and allocate the values of the data record in a DB or instance DB. Byte 0 and byte 1: Enter the value 01H in Byte 0 and the value 00H to Byte 1. Byte 2 ... byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter In the control byte for the respective phases, specify which energy and overflow counters you want to reset. The control bytes specify for each phase (L1, L2, L3) separately if and which energy meter values are to be reset. Figure 7-7 Control information DS 143 for energy and overflow counter Byte 8 ... byte 127: Start values for the individual energy meters The start values for energy counters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers. This corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Byte 128 ... byte 157: Initial values for overflow counters The initial values for overflow counters in data record 143 are 16-bit integers. This corresponds to the data type UINT in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 59 Energy counters 7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters 3. Write the data record to the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST module using the "WRREC" instruction. The input parameters must be allocated as follows: - REQ: A new write job is triggered if REQ = TRUE. - ID: Hardware identifier or start address of the Energy Meter (depending on the CPU used). - INDEX: The data record number: 143 - LEN: The maximum length of the data record: 170 - RECORD: A pointer to the data area in the CPU which includes data record 143. Note If you want to write or read several AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST at the same time, keep in mind the maximum number of active jobs in communication with SFB52/SFB53. See also Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 61) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 60 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) 7.5.1 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Energy meter data record 143 for different actions The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions: Reset the energy counter to user-specific value (e.g. "0") Reading the current values of the energy counters Reading the overflow counters Reading the operating hours Energy meter data record 143 Table 7- 1 Energy meter data record 143 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Status / control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Status / control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Status / control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Status / control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Status / control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Status / control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61181 24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182 32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh During reading: 0.0...1.8 x 10308 During writing For continuous counting: Measured value ID 61183 61184 61200 61201 61202 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 61 Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 0.0...3.4 x 1012 61203 80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh During writing 61204 88...95 Active energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh For periodic counting: 61220 96...103 Active energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61221 104...111 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 0...configured full-scale value (103 ...1015) 112...119 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61223 120...127 Apparent energy (initial value) L3 LREAL VAh 61224 128...129 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 UINT - 61190 130..131 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 61191 132...133 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 61192 134...135 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 61193 136...137 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 UINT - 138...139 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 UINT - 140...141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 142...143 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 144...145 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 146...147 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 UINT - 148...149 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 UINT - 150...151 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 UINT - 152...153 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 154...155 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 61233 156...157 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 UINT - 61234 158...161 Operating hours counter L1 (initial value) REAL h During reading: 65505 162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 0...3.4x1038 65506 166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h During writing: 65507 During reading: 0...65535 During writing for continuous counting: 0 During writing for periodic counting: 0...65500 61222 61194 61210 61211 61212 61213 61214 61230 61231 61232 0...109 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 62 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure 7-8 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 63 Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counter. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to reset and the time at which counters are reset. In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counters and which overflow counters you want to reset. Figure 7-9 Control information DS 143 (write access) Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 64 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the measured value data record 143: Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version. DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC instruction. Enter a valid length. DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. The start values may not be negative. DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. Observe the ranges of values for start values. 7.5.2 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143 Introduction Bytes 2 to 7 of data record 143 form the phase-based control and feedback interface for the measured value data record of the energy counter. Bytes 2 and 3: Control and feedback interface for phase 1 Bytes 4 and 5: Control and feedback interface for phase 2 Bytes 6 and 7: Control and feedback interface for phase 3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 65 Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure 7-10 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 66 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Energy counters 7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counter. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to reset and the time at which counters are reset. In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counters and which overflow counters you want to reset. Figure 7-11 Control information DS 143 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 67 8 Operating hours counter 8.1 How the operating hours counter works Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides one operating hours counter for each phase, which counts the operating hours of the load connected to a phase when there is current greater than the configurable "Low limit for measuring current". The operating hours counter for the entire module is calculated from the sum of the operating hours of the individual phases. The operating hours counter has a value range from 0 to 3.4 x 1038. The values are stored retentively in the module and can be read via the data record 143 (energy counter data record) and data record 150 (measured value for extended measuring and status values). Configuring You configure the following operating hours counter settings in STEP 7: Activation of the gate for the operating hours counter Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: Control information Default value Available in Open / close operating hours counter 1 Closed Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Set initial value 0 Data record 143 Reset operating hours counter 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data 2 1 Effective only with enabled gate 2 Only module-wide resetting is supported in module version "2 I / 2 Q". See also Resetting energy counters and overflow counters (Page 54) Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 142) Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 179) Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) (Page 194) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 68 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Operating hours counter 8.2 Reset operating hours counters 8.2 Reset operating hours counters Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the operating hours counters of the Energy Meter. Resetting here means that the operating hours counters are reset to their start value. The following section describes how you Reset operating hours counters via the outputs of the user data. Reset operating hours counters via data record 143. 8.2.1 Reset operating hours counters via user data Introduction Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the operating hours counters depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 12 bytes output data, you can Reset operating hours counters for all phases. Reset operating hours counters for each individual phase. If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the operating hours counters simultaneously. Differentiated resetting of the counters by phases is only possible via data set DS 143 for this module version, see section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 179). Procedure for module version with 12 bytes and 2 bytes of output data Set the reset bit (Bit 5) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Figure 8-1 Resetting the operating hours counters for module version with 12 bytes and 2 bytes of output data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 69 Operating hours counter 8.2 Reset operating hours counters Resetting operating hours counters on a phase-specific basis You can also reset the operating hours counters on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure for "Resetting operating hours counters for all 3 phases" as applicable. Set the reset bit (bit 5): in byte 6 for phase 1 in byte 8 for phase 2 in byte 10 for phase 3 Start values After the reset the operating hours counters count with the specified start values (default = 0). You can change the start values for the operating hours counters via data record DS 143, see section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 179). 8.2.2 Resetting operating hours counters via data record DS 143 Introduction At all the module versions you can reset the operating hours counters via the data record DS 143. Resetting is possible for: Operating hours counters for each individual phase. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 70 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Operating hours counter 8.2 Reset operating hours counters Procedure at all module versions via data record DS 143 1. Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 to 1. Figure 8-2 Resetting operating hours counters with data record 143 2. In Control byte 1 set Bit 7 for the moment of application of the start values: - Bit 7 to 0, if the start value are to be applied immediately after the transfer of the data record - Bit 7 to 1, if the start value are only to be applied after the reset bit has been set in the output data of the user data. Figure 8-3 Operating hours counter control information DS 143 Start values You specify the moment for the application of the start values in Control byte 1 via Bit 7. After the reset the operating hours counters count with the specified start values (default = 0). You can change the start values for the operating hours counters via data record DS 143. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 71 9 Limit monitoring 9.1 How limit monitoring works Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST supports monitoring of parameterizable low or high limits for up to 16 analog measured or calculated variables. You can also define multiple limits for each measured or calculated variable, in order to define a high or low value range. The measured value data record 150 returns the current status limit violations and per limit one counter that displays the number of limit violations. In addition, a hardware interrupt may be generated for each limit violation. The status of the limit violations can also be evaluated in the user data variant 240 (F0H) or via the user-defined user data variant via the measured value ID 65509. Benefits With activated limit monitoring you can already detect any irregularities in the measured value acquisition already in field level. Retentivity All the counter states of the module are stored retentively in the Energy Meter. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off Power System On), the counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Configuring You configure the following limit monitoring settings in STEP 7: Measured variable that is to be monitored. Activate / Deactivate limit monitoring. High or low limit values. Delay time and hysteresis for each limit. Activate / Deactivate hardware interrupts at limit violation. Measured value that is subject to limit monitoring. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 72 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Limit monitoring 9.1 How limit monitoring works Hardware interrupt at a limit violation The hardware interrupt provides the following information: Measured value ID of the monitored measured or calculated variable Number of the limit (0 = Limit 1. 15 = Limit 16) Information on whether limit was exceeded or fallen below For more detailed information, refer to section Hardware interrupts (Page 101). Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: 1 Control information Default value Available in Enable/disable monitoring per limit1 Disabled Module version with 12 bytes of output data Reset number of total limit violations 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Effective only with enabled gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 73 Limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring Delay time and hysteresis In order to prevent the triggering of limit violations with small fluctuations, you have the following configuration options in STEP 7: Delay time in seconds (0 to 10 s) With the delay time, you filter faults and thereby prevent limit value monitoring from triggering too frequently. The limit violation is counted only when the limit violation is present for longer than the configured delay time. The deceleration time is also taken into consideration during outgoing of the limit violation. Hysteresis as a percentage (0 to 20%) With the hysteresis, you suppress fluctuations around the limit. The hysteresis is a tolerance range that you define as a percentage deviation of the configured limit. The limit violation is considered to be corrected only when the monitored value leaves the tolerance range. Note You can get information about transient underflow and overflow from the calculation of minimum (Page 186) and maximum values (Page 184) of selected measured variables. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 74 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring The following figure shows the value-over-time for two measured values using the example of a high and low limit as well as the influence of hysteresis and delay time on the counting of the limit violations. Configured limit. Configured delay time. Is taken into consideration during coming and going. Hysteresis range. Only considered for outgoing. Value-over-time for which the limit is monitored. Edge change. Counter for limit violations is incremented by 1. If parameterized, a hardware interrupt is triggered. Figure 9-1 Signal wave Limit monitoring with hysteresis and delay time Limit monitoring with hysteresis, but without delay time Limit monitoring without hysteresis, but with delay time Limit monitoring without hysteresis and delay time Influence of hysteresis and delay time on the limit See also How limit monitoring works (Page 72) Minimum and maximum values (Page 82) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 75 Limit monitoring 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it can be useful to reset or indeed also enable/disable the counters for limit violations of the Energy Meter. Resetting here means that the counters for limit violations are reset to 0. Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the counters for limit violations depends on the configured module version. Resetting at module version with 12 bytes of output data 1. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to reset in control bytes 3 and 4; see "Enabling/disabling the counters for limit violations". 2. In control byte 1, set the rest bit (bit 3) with an edge change from 0 to 1; see "Resetting the counters for limit violations". Resetting at module version with 2 bytes of output data Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Resetting acts globally on all the configured counters for limit violation. Figure 9-2 Resetting of the counters for limit violations Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 76 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Limit monitoring 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation Activating / Deactivating counters for limit violations Activating / Deactivating of the counters for limit violations is only possible for module versions with 12 bytes of output data. Requirements: "Gate for limit value monitoring" was parameterized during configuration of the module using STEP 7 or by writing the data record DS 128. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to activate / deactivate in Control bytes 3 and 4. Figure 9-3 Activating / deactivating of the counters for limit violations Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 77 Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring The table below shows which measured variables are available for limit monitoring. Measured value ID Measured variables Use for limit monitoring 1 Voltage UL1-N Yes 2 Voltage UL2-N Yes 3 Voltage UL3-N Yes 4 Voltage UL1- L2 Yes 5 Voltage UL2- L3 Yes 6 Voltage UL3- L1 Yes 7 Current L1 Yes 8 Current L2 Yes 9 Current L3 Yes 10 Apparent power L1 Yes 11 Apparent power L2 Yes 12 Apparent power L3 Yes 13 Active power L1 Yes 14 Active power L2 Yes 15 Active power L3 Yes 16 Reactive power L1 Yes 17 Reactive power L2 Yes 18 Reactive power L3 Yes 19 Power factor L1 Yes 20 Power factor L2 Yes 21 Power factor L3 Yes 30 Frequency Yes 34 Total active power L1L2L3 Yes 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 Yes 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 Yes 37 Total power factor L1L2L3 Yes 38 Amplitude unbalance for voltage Yes 39 Amplitude unbalance for current Yes 40 Max. voltage UL1-N Yes 41 Max. voltage UL2-N Yes 42 Max. voltage UL3-N Yes 43 Max. voltage UL1- L2 Yes 44 Max. voltage UL2- L3 Yes 45 Max. voltage UL3- L1 Yes 46 Max. current L1 Yes 47 Max. current L2 Yes 48 Max. current L3 Yes 49 Max. apparent power L1 Yes 50 Max. apparent power L2 Yes 51 Max. apparent power L3 Yes 52 Max. active power L1 Yes 53 Max. active power L2 Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 78 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Measured value ID Measured variables Use for limit monitoring 54 Max. active power L3 Yes 55 Max. reactive power L1 Yes 56 Max. reactive power L2 Yes 57 Max. reactive power L3 Yes 58 Max. power factor L1 Yes 59 Max. power factor L2 Yes 60 Max. power factor L3 Yes 61 Max. frequency Yes 65 Max. total active power Yes 66 Max. total reactive power Yes 67 Max. total apparent power Yes 68 Max. total power factor Yes 70 Min. voltage UL1-N Yes 71 Min. voltage UL2-N Yes 72 Min. voltage UL3-N Yes 73 Min. voltage UL1- L2 Yes 74 Min. voltage UL2- L3 Yes 75 Min. voltage UL3- L1 Yes 76 Min. current L1 Yes 77 Min. current L2 Yes 78 Min. current L3 Yes 79 Min. apparent power L1 Yes 80 Min. apparent power L2 Yes 81 Min. apparent power L3 Yes 82 Min. active power L1 Yes 83 Min. active power L2 Yes 84 Min. active power L3 Yes 85 Min. reactive power L1 Yes 86 Min. reactive power L2 Yes 87 Min. reactive power L3 Yes 88 Min. power factor L1 Yes 89 Min. power factor L2 Yes 90 Min. power factor L3 Yes 91 Min. frequency Yes 95 Min. total active power Yes 96 Min. total reactive power Yes 97 Min. total apparent power Yes 98 Min. total power factor Yes 200 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 Yes 201 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 Yes 202 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 Yes 203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 Yes 204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 Yes 205 Total active energy L1L2L3 Yes 206 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 Yes 210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 79 Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Measured value ID Measured variables Use for limit monitoring 211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 - 212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 - 213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 - 214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 - 215 Total active energy L1L2L3 - 216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 - 61140 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1L2L3 - 61141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1L2L3 - 61142 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 - 61143 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 - 61144 Overflow counter apparent energy L1L2L3 - 61149 Neutral current Yes 61178 Phase angle L1 Yes 61180 Active energy inflow L1 Yes * 61181 Active energy outflow L1 Yes * 61182 Reactive energy inflow L1 Yes * 61183 Reactive energy outflow L1 Yes * 61184 Apparent energy L1 Yes * 61185 Active energy L1 Yes * 61186 Reactive energy L1 Yes * 61190 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 - 61191 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 - 61192 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 - 61193 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 - 61194 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 - 61198 Phase angle L2 Yes 61200 Active energy inflow L2 Yes * 61201 Active energy outflow L2 Yes * 61202 Reactive energy inflow L2 Yes * 61203 Reactive energy outflow L2 Yes * 61204 Apparent energy L2 Yes * 61205 Active energy L2 Yes * 61206 Reactive energy L2 Yes * 61210 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 - 61211 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 - 61212 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 - 61213 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 - 61214 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 - 61218 Phase angle L3 Yes 61220 Active energy inflow L3 Yes * 61221 Active energy outflow L3 Yes * 61222 Reactive energy inflow L3 Yes * 61223 Reactive energy outflow L3 Yes * 61224 Apparent energy L3 Yes * 61225 Active energy L3 Yes * 61226 Reactive energy L3 Yes * Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 80 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Measured value ID Measured variables Use for limit monitoring 61230 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 - 61231 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 - 61232 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 - 61233 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 - 61234 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 - 65500 Qualifier L1 - 65501 Qualifier L2 - 65502 Qualifier L3 - 65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 - 65504 Total operating hours counter L1L2L3 Yes 65505 Operating hours counter L1 Yes 65506 Operating hours counter L2 Yes 65507 Operating hours counter L3 Yes 65510 Counter limit violation GW1 Yes 65511 Counter limit violation GW2 Yes 65512 Counter limit violation GW3 Yes 65513 Counter limit violation GW4 Yes 65514 Counter limit violation GW5 Yes 65515 Counter limit violation GW6 Yes 65516 Counter limit violation GW7 Yes 65517 Counter limit violation GW8 Yes 65518 Counter limit violation GW9 Yes 65519 Counter limit violation GW10 Yes 65520 Counter limit violation GW11 Yes 65521 Counter limit violation GW12 Yes 65522 Counter limit violation GW13 Yes 65523 Counter limit violation GW14 Yes 65524 Counter limit violation GW15 Yes 65525 Counter limit violation GW16 Yes * Can only be configured in REAL format Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 81 10 Minimum and maximum values 10.1 Minimum and maximum values Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST determines the respective highest and lowest measured or calculated value for a series of measured and calculated values. The values are stored retentively in the module and can be read using measured value data records 144 and 145. Benefits Using the stored minimum and maximum values, for example, you can detect further irregularities in addition to limit monitoring. Calculation of minimum and maximum values Minimum and maximum values are only calculated for the phases in accordance with the configured connection type. Existing minimum and maximum values that have not been calculated are initialized with 0. If faults such as under or overcurrent occur during operation, new minimum and maximum values are calculated. The measured and calculated values are initialized as follows during commissioning of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST so that the first calculation of minimum and maximum values supplies a plausible result: Maximum values for measured and calculated values: Minimum values Minimum values for measured and calculated values: Maximum values Configuring You configure the following settings in STEP 7: Enable calculation of minimum and maximum values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 82 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Minimum and maximum values 10.1 Minimum and maximum values Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: Control information Default value Available in Reset saved maximum values 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Reset saved minimum values 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Note Automatic reset If you change the parameters for current or voltage transformers, the minimum and maximum values are reset automatically to their initial values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 83 Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Description At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the minimum and maximum values of the Energy Meter. Resetting means that the minimum and maximum values are reset to their initial values. Initial values are described, see section Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) (Page 184) and section Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) (Page 186). As the output data differs in length, resetting the minimum and maximum values depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 12 bytes output data, you can Reset the minimum and maximum values for all phases. Reset minimum and maximum values for each individual phase. If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the minimum and maximum values simultaneously. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 84 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Procedure at module version with 12 bytes of output data Resetting the minimum and maximum values for all 3 phases. 1. Select the categories of minimum and maximum value that you want to reset in byte 2. - Set bit 0 for voltage and frequency. - Set bit 1 for current and power factor. - Set bit 2 for active power. - Set bit 3 for reactive power. - Set bit 4 for apparent power. Figure 10-1 Selection of minimum and maximum value category 2. In byte 1, set reset bit 0 for minimum values or reset bit 1 for maximum values. If there is an edge change of the reset bits from 0 to 1, the module resets the selected minimum or maximum values for all 3 phases that you previously selected in byte 2. Figure 10-2 Reset bit for minimum and maximum values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 85 Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Resetting minimum and maximum values for phase-specific measurement You can also reset the minimum and maximum values on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure for "Resetting minimum and maximum values for all 3 phases" as applicable. 1. Select the categories of minimum and maximum value that you want to reset on a phasespecific basis. - In byte 7, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 1. - In byte 9, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 2. - In byte 11, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 3. 2. Set the reset bit (bit 0 and bit 1) for minimum or maximum values. - in byte 6 for phase 1 - in byte 8 for phase 2 - in byte 10 for phase 3 If there is an edge change of the phase-specific reset bits from 0 to 1, the module resets the minimum or maximum values for the given phase. Procedure at module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the minimum and maximum values simultaneously. Set the reset bit (Bit 0 or Bit 1) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Figure 10-3 Resetting the minimum and maximum values at module version with 2 bytes of output data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 86 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Phase-based measured values 11.1 11 Phase-based measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST makes the measured values of individual phases available. Through the user data variants - Phase-specific measurement Phase L1 with user data variants 154 (9AH) and 155 (9BH) - Phase-specific measurement Phase L2 with user data variants 156 (9CH) and 157 (9DH) - Phase-specific measurement Phase L3 with user data variants 158 (9EH) and 159 (9FH) Via measured value data records - Phase-specific measurement for the phases L1, L2 and L3 with data record 142 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L1 with data record 147 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L2 with data record 148 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L3 with data record 149 User data variants Through the user data variants 154 (9AH) to 159 (9FH) you can evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network: Quality information Current and voltage Active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent energy Power factor You can find the structure of the user data variants in section Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) (Page 188). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 87 Phase-based measured values 11.1 Phase-based measured values Measured value data records Through the measured value data records DS 142, DS 147, DS 148 and DS 149 you can evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network: Quality information Current and voltage Minimum current and minimum voltage Maximum current and maximum voltage Active, reactive and apparent power Minimum active, reactive and apparent power Maximum active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent energy Minimum active, reactive and apparent energy Maximum active, reactive and apparent energy Power factor Minimum power factor Maximum power factor You can find the structure of the measured value data records in section Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) (Page 188). See also Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) (Page 190) Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) (Page 192) Minimum and maximum values (Page 82) User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data (Page 155) Overview of all measured value data records (Page 175) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 88 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 12.1 12 Parameters Parameters of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (DS 128, DS 129, DS 130) As a rule, the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is already integrated in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7 V5.5 or higher. In this case STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7 V5.5 or higher checks the parameterized properties for plausibility during designing. However, you can also assign parameters to the module using a GSD file and the configuration software of any provider. The module checks the validity of the configured properties only after the configuration has been downloaded. Note that some parameters depend on the selected connection type of the Energy Meter. For example in the connection type 1P2W for measurements in single-phase AC network it does not make sense to enter parameters for Phases 2 and 3 and they are also not checked by the system in this case. The effective range of the parameters that can be set using a GSD file depends on the type of bus system used: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 89 Parameters 12.1 Parameters In addition you can change the parameterized properties via the user program in RUN mode. When you assign parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records (see appendix Configuration via parameter data records (Page 112)). The following table summarizes all the configurable parameters. Table 12- 1 AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST parameters Parameters Hardware interrupt Value range * Disable * Enable Diagnostics line voltage * Disable * Enable * Disabled * 1P2W - 1-phase alternating current * 3x1P2W - 3x1 phase, 2 conductors each * 2P3W - 2 phases, 3 conductors * 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors * 3P4W1 - 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load * 100 V * 110 V * 115 V Connection type Voltage measuring range * 120 V * 127 V * 190 V * 200 V Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors Yes Module Module (only 1P2W, 3P4W, 3P4W1 and deactivated) 230 V Yes Module Module * 208 V * 220 V * 230 V * 240 V * 277 V Line voltage tolerance [%] * 1 ... 50 % 10 % Yes Module Module Line frequency * 50 Hz 50 Hz Yes Module Module * 60 Hz Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 90 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 12.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Enable gate energy counter * No * Yes Full-scale value for energy counter * No full-scale value infinite counting * 103 - count periodically * 106 - count periodically * 109 - count periodically * 1012 - count periodically * 1015 - count periodically User data variant Minimum and maximum value calculation See the table Overview of the user data variants (Page 155) * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Overcurrent tolerance value [0.1 A] * Overcurrent tolerance time [ms] * Diagnostics overflow current Diagnostics overflow voltage Diagnostics underflow voltage Diagnostics low limit voltage Diagnostics overflow cumulative values Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP No Yes Module - No full-scale value - infinite counting Yes Module (Default setting. No full-scale value - infinite counting) Total energy L1 Yes L2 L3 (ID 254 or FEH) Module Disable Module Yes Module (only user data variant FEH, FAH, F9H, F8H, 9FH, F5H, 80H) (Default setting: Disable) Disable Yes Channel/phase Module Disable Yes Channel/phase Module Disable Yes Channel/phase Module Disable Yes Channel/phase (blocking is preset) Disable Yes Channel/phase Module 10 ... 100 [0.1 A] 100 [0.1 A] Yes Channel/phase Module 1 ... 60000 ms 40000 ms Yes Channel/phase Module Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 91 Parameters 12.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default setting 2 ... 250 mA 50 mA * Disable Disable * Enable Enable gate of operating hours counter * No * Yes Current transformer primary current [A] * Current transformer secondary current Low limit for current measurement [mA] * Operating hours counter Reconfiguration in RUN Yes Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Channel/phase GSD file PROFIBUS DP (Default setting: 2 mA) Yes Channel/phase (Default setting: Disable) No Yes Channel/phase - 1 ... 99999 A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module * 1A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module * 5A Voltage transformer primary voltage [V] * 1 ... 999999 V 230 V Yes Channel/phase Module Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V] * 1 ... 500 V 230 V Yes Channel/phase - Reverse current direction * Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase Module * Enable * 0 ... 16 0 Yes Module - Limit monitoring for limit * Disable Disable Yes Module - * Enable Measured variable for limit * Measured value ID, see Table B-1 None Yes Limit - Gate for limit via DQ * Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase - * Enable * Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase - * Enable Limit * depending on the selected measured variable 0 Yes Limit - Type of limit * High limit High limit Yes Channel/phase - * Low limit Number of limits Hardware interrupt for limit (Value range: 1...65535) (same value as Voltage measuring range parameter) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 92 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 12.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Hysteresis for limit monitoring [%] * 0 ... 200 [0.1%] 0% Yes Channel/phase - Delay time for limit monitoring [s] * 0 ... 10 s 0s Yes Channel/phase - Number of measured values for user data mapping * 0 ... 64 0 Yes Module - Measured variable * Measured value ID, see Table B-1 None (no user data mapping) Yes Measured variable (no user data mapping) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 93 Parameters 12.2 Description of parameters 12.2 Description of parameters Hardware interrupt Enable the hardware interrupt for the entire module here. Diagnostics line voltage Activate the diagnostics line voltage here. If there is no voltage or too little voltage at L1, the message "No supply voltage at L1" is output and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered. Connection type Specify the connection type you used for the Energy Meter here. For more detailed information, refer to "Connection examples (Page 21)". Voltage measuring range Here you can set the voltage measuring range of the power supply system. Line voltage tolerance Monitoring the supply voltage based on this tolerance band is a positive or negative value. Line frequency Here you can set the line frequency of the power supply system. Enable gate energy counter Enable the gate for the energy counter here. When the gate is enabled, the energy counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Full-scale value for energy counter Select here the full-scale value for the periodic counting of the energy counter. You can also specify that the energy counter is to count without a full-scale value (infinite counting). The calculated energy counter values are stored retentively in the module. User data variant Select here the user data variant with which the module is to operate once it is switched on. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 94 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 12.2 Description of parameters Minimum and maximum value calculation Enable calculation of the minimum and maximum values here. The minimum and maximum value are calculated from the start of the measurement. The calculated values are stored retentively in the Energy Meter. Diagnostics overflow current The measured current is monitored after expiry of the "Tolerance time" for "Overcurrent [0.1 A] tolerance value". Exceeding this results in overflow current. The tolerance time starts as soon as the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is exceeded. After the set tolerance time has elapsed, the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is monitored. A violation of the secondary current value also returns DIAG_UEBERLAST. DIAG_UEBERLAST diagnoses the affected phase if the tolerance value of the secondary current has been exceeded within the assigned tolerance time (or the maximum value of the secondary current (12 A) is exceeded). Figure 12-1 Diagnostics response in the event of a current overload Diagnostics overflow voltage Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the overflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 95 Parameters 12.2 Description of parameters Diagnostics underflow voltage Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the underflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics low limit voltage Low limit for voltage is monitored. A violation of the low limit triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics overflow cumulative values A cumulative overflow in the calculated variables is displayed. The values stop at the high or low limit. A violation triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Overcurrent tolerance value [0.1 A] The tolerance factor secondary overcurrent parameter (10 to 100) indicates the tolerable value of the secondary current in 0.1 A increments (10 = 1 A to 100 = 10 A). Always take note of the current class of the current transformer being used (1 A, 5 A). Overcurrent tolerance time Monitoring time in ms in which the overcurrent is tolerated. 0 means that the monitoring time has been disabled. Low limit for measuring current The configurable low limit for measuring current refers to the secondary currents and is used to avoid incorrect calculations in the case of very low currents. Incorrect measurements of very low currents in particular are a cause of inaccuracies in the current transformer used. Set the low limit for the current measurement to the required value depending on your process. Tip: If you want to find the low limit for the current measurement experimentally, set it to a lower value. Then, feed in a very precise low current and determine the measurement error that can no longer be tolerated. Afterwards, set the low limit for the current measurement to the limit value you have determined. If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Neutral current Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase do not measure any longer. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 96 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameters 12.2 Description of parameters Operating hours counter Enable the operating hours counter here. The counting starts from a programmable minimum current value. The counter can be reset or pre-defined using data record or output bit. Enable gate of operating hours counter Enable the gate for the operating hours counter here. When the gate is activated, the operating hours counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Current transformer primary current Enter here the nominal value for the primary current of the current transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Current transformer secondary current Enter here the nominal value for the secondary current (1 A or 5 A) of the current transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Voltage transformer primary voltage To determine the voltage transformer ratio, enter the primary voltage here. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage. Voltage transformer secondary voltage Enter the secondary voltage to determine the voltage transformer ratio here. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage. Reverse current direction Setting to determine whether or not to reverse the direction of current. In the event of inadvertent incorrect connection, this parameter can be used to correct the measured values, thus saving the hassle of rewiring. The direction of the current is only evident from the power measurement values. The current measurement value is an rms value. Number of limits Enter the number of measured values that you want to monitor for limits. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 97 Parameters 12.2 Description of parameters Limit monitoring Enable the monitoring of the limit for a freely definable measured value here. Limit violations are counted and the count values stored retentively. Measured value ID for limit Enter the ID of a measured value that you want to use for limit monitoring. Gate enabled with limit monitoring Enable the gate via limit monitoring here. When the gate is enabled, the limit monitoring is only started when the corresponding bit of the associated output user data is set to "1". Hardware interrupt for limit Enable the hardware interrupt here. The hardware interrupt is triggered if a high or low limit is violated. Without activation of a hardware interrupt, a limit violation is only displayed in the user data and in DS 150. Limit Enter the limit here that is to trigger a limit violation when exceeded or fallen below. Limit violations are displayed in the user data and in DS 150. Type of limit Select here, whether it is an high or low limit. Depending on this selection, the limit violation or hardware interrupt is triggered when a value exceeds (high limit) or falls below (low limit) the limit. Hysteresis for limit monitoring Enter the hysteresis for limit in percent here. The percentage refers to the numerical value of the limit when the limit violation occurs. A message is only canceled if the measured value is outside the limit and its hysteresis range. As long as the measured value is in the hysteresis range, no new message is output. Delay time for limit monitoring Here you can select the delay time for limit violation. The delay refers to the time that must elapse before an occurrence of a limit violation is reported. Faults can be filtered out by selection of the delay time. The deceleration time is also taken into consideration during outgoing of the limit violation. Number of measured values for user data mapping Specify the number of measured values/variables that you want to use for the user-specific user data mapping. Measured variable Select the measured variable (with the measured value ID) that you want to use for the userspecific user data mapping. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 98 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.1 13 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Error (red) PWR (green) Status (green) Figure 13-1 LED display Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 99 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following table explains the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 103). DIAG LED Table 13- 1 DIAG Meaning of the DIAG LED Meaning Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Status LED Table 13- 2 Status Meaning of the Status LED Meaning Channel deactivated or error Off Channel activated and no error On Error LED Table 13- 3 Status Meaning of the Error LED Meaning Channel is OK Off Channel is faulty On PWR LED Table 13- 4 PWR Meaning of the PWR LED Meaning Line voltage missing Off Line voltage available On Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 100 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.2 Interrupts 13.2 Interrupts The analog input module Energy Meter 480VAC ST supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts. 13.2.1 Hardware interrupts Hardware interrupts The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 to 16 Violation of high limit 1 to 16 You can find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment of the local data double word 8 by the start information of the hardware interrupt organization block. Figure 13-2 Start information of the organization block Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 13- 5 Structure of the additional interrupt information Data block name Contents Comment Bytes Identifier W#16#0001 to W#16#FFFF ID of the measured value for limit monitoring 2 Number of the limit (1 to 16), which has triggered the hardware interrupt Channel B#16#00 to B#16#0F Number of the limit 1 B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 B#16#04 Violation of high limit Event that triggered the hardware interrupt. Event Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 101 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.2 Interrupts 13.2.2 Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Channel is temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupt lost Error Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Low limit voltage violated (measuring voltage < 80 V) High limit value voltage exceeded Underflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) violated Overflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) exceeded Overload (current measurement > 12 A or tolerance overcurrent exceeded after expiry of the tolerance time) Overflow of the calculated values (measured or calculated values screen exceed the representable range of values) See also Diagnostic alarms (Page 103) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 102 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.3 Diagnostic alarms 13.3 Diagnostic alarms Diagnostic alarms Note Assignment channel in diagnostic message Phase In the diagnostic messages the channels are counted from "Channel "0" on, in the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST from Phase "1" on. Note the following assignment: * Channel "0" Phase "1" * Channel "1" Phase "2" * Channel "2" Phase "3" Table 13- 6 Error types Diagnostic message Error code Meaning Solution Undervoltage1 2H Observe the line voltage range Overvoltage 3H Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. Violation leads to voltage overflow/underflow Overload 4H The measured current is monitored after Observe the current range expiry of the "Tolerance time" for "Tolerance value overcurrent [0.1 A]". Exceeding this results in overflow current. The maximum value of the secondary current (12 A) has been exceeded. High limit 7H Cumulative overflow in the calculated values - Low limit1 8H Violation of the low limit for voltage measurement. The message occurs when the configured minimum current or voltage is below 80 V. Observe the voltage range Error 9H Internal module error (diagnostic alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Replace the module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient line voltage on phase L1 Channel is temporarily unavailable 1FH Firmware upgrade is being performed. -Channel 0 applies to the entire module. The module is currently not performing any measurements. A user calibration is being executed at the channel. 1 Correct the parameter assignment Check supply Complete the user calibration If the "Undervoltage" and "Low limit" diagnostics are active at the same time, the "Low limit" diagnostics has higher priority and deletes the "Undervoltage" diagnostics. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 103 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.4 Diagnostics response 13.4 Diagnostics response Diagnostics response This section describes the response of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST when diagnostics information is reported. Measured values in the case of diagnostics Even in the case of diagnostics, measured values continue to be displayed as long as they can still be acquired. If measured values cannot be measured or calculated, "0" is displayed. Zero suppression If the supplied current is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current" parameter, the current measurement and all dependent variables are suppressed or set to "0". Overload limitation If the secondary current fed in at the channel is higher than 12 A, the module changes to limitation and the measured value of the current and all dependent variables are set to "0". Value falls below "Low limit current measurement" If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Neutral current Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase do not measure any longer. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 104 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 13.4 Diagnostics response Loss of the supply voltage At a loss of supply voltage at UL1 (phase 1), all measurements are interrupted. After the supply voltage is restored, the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST operates again with the configuration / parameter assignment stored in the CPU. The retentively stored values are used at the following counters and calculations: Energy and overflow counters Operating hours counters Counters for limit violation Minimum values Maximum values Input data to "0" Note If the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is no longer recognized by the interface module (for example, because it is defective or not plugged in), all input data are set to "0". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 105 14 Technical specifications 14.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AI Energy Meter 480 V AC ST, PU 1 Firmware version V4.0 usable BaseUnits BU type D0, BU20-P12+A0+0B Product function * Voltage measurement Yes * Voltage measurement with voltage transformers Yes * Current measurement Yes * Phase current measurement without current transformers No * Phase current measurement with current transformers Yes * Energy measurement Yes * Frequency measurement Yes * Power measurement Yes * Active power measurement Yes * Reactive power measurement Yes * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Isochronous mode No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 SP1 * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 and higher * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 106 Technical specifications 14.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 Operating mode * cyclic measurement Yes * acyclic measurement Yes * Acyclic measured value access Yes * Fixed measured value sets Yes * Freely definable measured value sets Yes Configuration control via dataset Yes CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN Yes Installation type/mounting Mounting position Any Supply voltage Design of the power supply Supply via voltage measurement channel L1 Type of supply voltage AC 100 - 277 V permissible range, lower limit (AC) 90 V permissible range, upper limit (AC) 293 V Line frequency * permissible range, lower limit 47 Hz * permissible range, upper limit 63 Hz Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.6 W Address area Address space per module * Address space per module, max. 268 byte; 256 byte input / 12 byte output Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Time of day Operating hours counter * present Yes Analog inputs Cycle time (all channels), typ. 50 ms; Time for consistent update of all measured and calculated values (cyclic und acyclic data) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 107 Technical specifications 14.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes * Hardware interrupt Yes; Monitoring of up to 16 freely selectable process values (exceeding or undershooting of value) Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Integrated Functions Measuring functions * Measuring procedure for voltage measurement TRMS * Measuring procedure for current measurement TRMS * Type of measured value acquisition seamless * Curve shape of voltage Sinusoidal or distorted * Buffering of measured variables Yes * Parameter length 74 byte * Bandwidth of measured value acquisition 2 kHz; Harmonics: 39 / 50 Hz, 32 / 60 Hz Operating mode for measured value acquisition - automatic detection of line frequency No; Parameterizable Measuring range - Frequency measurement, min. 45 Hz - Frequency measurement, max. 65 Hz Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 108 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Technical specifications 14.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 Measuring inputs for voltage - Measurable line voltage between phase 277 V and neutral conductor - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors - Measurable line voltage between phase 90 V and neutral conductor, min. - Measurable line voltage between phase 293 V and neutral conductor, max. - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, min. 155 V - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, max. 508 V - Measurement category for voltage measurement in accordance with IEC 61010-2-030 CAT II; CAT III in case of guaranteed protection level of 1.5 kV - Internal resistance line conductor and neutral conductor 3.4 M - Power consumption per phase 20 mW - Impulse voltage resistance 1,2/50s 1 kV 480 V Measuring inputs for current - measurable relative current (AC), min. 1 %; Relative to the secondary rated current 5 A - measurable relative current (AC), max. 100 %; Relative to the secondary rated current 5 A - Continuous current with AC, maximum permissible 5A - Apparent power consumption per phase for measuring range 5 A 0.6 V*A - Rated value short-time withstand current restricted to 1 s 100 A - Input resistance measuring range 0 to 5 25 m; At the terminal A - Zero point suppression Parameterizable: 2 ... 250 mA, default 50 mA - Surge strength 10 A; for 1 minute Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 109 Technical specifications 14.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0 Accuracy class according to IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable voltage 0,2 - Measured variable current 0,2 - Measured variable apparent power 0.5 - Measured variable active power 0.5 - Measured variable reactive power 1 - Measured variable power factor 0.5 - Measured variable active energy 0.5 - Measured variable reactive energy 1 - Measured variable neutral current 0.5; calculated - Measured variable phase angle 1 ; not covered by IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable frequency 0.05 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels and backplane bus Yes; 3 700V AC (type test) CAT III Isolation Isolation tested with 2 300V AC for 1 min. (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight (without packaging) 45 g Data for selecting a current transformer * Burden power current transformer x/1A, min. As a function of cable length and cross section, see device manual * Burden power current transformer x/5A, min. As a function of cable length and cross section, see device manual Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 110 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Technical specifications 14.1 Technical specifications ATEX approval In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 111 Parameter data records A.1 A Configuration via parameter data records The parameter data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN mode, for example change the diagnostics behavior, define new limits or configure a modified user data mapping. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module via the respective data record. The parameters set in STEP 7 do not change in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are still valid after a restart. If you reconfigure a module (so that the user data size changes) and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". STATUS output parameter If errors occur during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 112 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Parameter data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 113 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information for a module. Figure A-3 Module header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 114 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 115 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-4 Module parameter block You can find the user data variant in the section Overview of the user data variants (Page 155). Channel header information The following figure shows the structure of the header information for a channel. Figure A-5 Channel header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 116 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 117 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 118 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-6 Channel parameter block Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 10, 11, 14, 22, 30...34, 42, 50...54, 70...74 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 02 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 8 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 05 Measuring range for voltage invalid. Check Byte 5. Permitted values: 01H to 0CH DF 80 E1 20 Connection type invalid. Check Byte 4. Permitted values: 00H, 0BH ... 01H Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 119 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 21 Parameter for user data variant in DS 128 Check Byte 9. Select a different user data not possible or input data configuration not variant in DS 128 or change the configuralarge enough. tion. DF 80 E1 22 Parameter for user data variant is invalid. Check Byte 9. Select a valid code for the user data variant. DF 80 E1 23 Parameter for frequency is invalid. Check Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 24 Parameter for tolerance line voltage is invalid. Check Byte 7. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 25 Parameter for current transformer secondary is invalid. Check Bit 4...5 in Byte 22, 42...62. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 29 Parameter for tolerance value overcurrent invalid. Check Byte 15, 35...55. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2A Parameter for tolerance time overcurrent invalid. Check Byte 16...17, 36...37, 56...57. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2B Parameter for low limit measuring current invalid Check Byte 23, 43...63. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2C Parameter for current transformer primary current is invalid. Check Byte 18...21, 38...41, 48...61. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2D Parameter for voltage converter primary voltage invalid. Check Byte 26...29, 46...49, 66...69. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2E Parameter for voltage converter secondary Check Byte 24...25, 44...45, 64...65. Enter voltage invalid. valid values. DF 80 E1 2F Parameter for full-scale value for energy counters invalid. Check Bit 4...6 in Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 3E Only for connection type 3P4W1. Check Bytes 14...33, 34...53, 54...73. EnParameters for the different phases are not ter identical values at all three phases. identical. DF 80 E1 3F Full-scale value for energy counter too small or transmission ratio of current and voltage too high. Increase the full-scale value or reduce the transmission ratio of the current and voltage transformer. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 120 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Structure of data record 129 Figure A-7 Structure of data record 129 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-8 Header information DS 129 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 121 Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Limit parameter block The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for limit monitoring. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 122 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Figure A-9 Limit parameter data block Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 123 Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 129. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 10, 11, 14, 22, 30...34, 42, 50...54, 70...74 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 31 Parameter for length of the parameter block invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 Parameters for number of parameter blocks invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 Parameter for measured value ID invalid. Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 34 Parameters for monitoring the limits Check Bit 0...3 in Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 35 Number for limits in monitoring parameter assigned several times Check Bit 0...3 in Byte 6. Do not use limit number several times. DF 80 E1 36 Parameters for hysteresis invalid Check Byte 7. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 37 Parameter for limit to be monitored invalid. Check Byte 8...11. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 38 Delay time in Hysteresis parameter invalid. Check Byte 12. Enter valid values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 124 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping Structure of data record 130 Figure A-10 Structure of data record 130 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-11 Header information DS 130 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 125 Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping Parameter block for user data mapping The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for user data mapping. Figure A-12 Parameter block for user data mapping Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 130. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 126 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 10, 11, 14, 22, 30...34, 42, 50...54, 70...74 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 21 Parameter for user data variant in DS 128 not possible or input data configuration not large enough. Check Byte 9. Select a different user data variant in DS 128 or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 31 Parameter for length of the parameter block invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 Parameters for number of parameter blocks invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 Parameter for measured value ID invalid. Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 3B Parameter for user data variant impermissible. Check Byte 1. Number for userspecific user data variant has to be 01H. Measured variables for user data mapping The table below shows which measured variables are available for user data mapping. Measured value ID Measured variables Use for user data mapping 1 Voltage UL1-N Yes 2 Voltage UL2-N Yes 3 Voltage UL3-N Yes 4 Voltage UL1- L2 Yes 5 Voltage UL2- L3 Yes 6 Voltage UL3- L1 Yes 7 Current L1 Yes 8 Current L2 Yes 9 Current L3 Yes 10 Apparent power L1 Yes 11 Apparent power L2 Yes 12 Apparent power L3 Yes 13 Active power L1 Yes 14 Active power L2 Yes 15 Active power L3 Yes 16 Reactive power L1 Yes 17 Reactive power L2 Yes 18 Reactive power L3 Yes 19 Power factor L1 Yes 20 Power factor L2 Yes 21 Power factor L3 Yes 30 Frequency Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 127 Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping Measured value ID Measured variables Use for user data mapping 34 Total active power L1L2L3 Yes 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 Yes 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 Yes 37 Total power factor L1L2L3 Yes 38 Amplitude unbalance for voltage Yes 39 Amplitude unbalance for current Yes 40 Max. voltage UL1-N Yes 41 Max. voltage UL2-N Yes 42 Max. voltage UL3-N Yes 43 Max. voltage UL1- L2 Yes 44 Max. voltage UL2- L3 Yes 45 Max. voltage UL3- L1 Yes 46 Max. current L1 Yes 47 Max. current L2 Yes 48 Max. current L3 Yes 49 Max. apparent power L1 Yes 50 Max. apparent power L2 Yes 51 Max. apparent power L3 Yes 52 Max. active power L1 Yes 53 Max. active power L2 Yes 54 Max. active power L3 Yes 55 Max. reactive power L1 Yes 56 Max. reactive power L2 Yes 57 Max. reactive power L3 Yes 58 Max. power factor L1 Yes 59 Max. power factor L2 Yes 60 Max. power factor L3 Yes 61 Max. frequency Yes 65 Max. total active power Yes 66 Max. total reactive power Yes 67 Max. total apparent power Yes 68 Max. total power factor Yes 70 Min. voltage UL1-N Yes 71 Min. voltage UL2-N Yes 72 Min. voltage UL3-N Yes 73 Min. voltage UL1- L2 Yes 74 Min. voltage UL2- L3 Yes 75 Min. voltage UL3- L1 Yes 76 Min. current L1 Yes 77 Min. current L2 Yes 78 Min. current L3 Yes 79 Min. apparent power L1 Yes 80 Min. apparent power L2 Yes 81 Min. apparent power L3 Yes 82 Min. active power L1 Yes 83 Min. active power L2 Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 128 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping Measured value ID 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 95 96 97 98 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 61140 61141 61142 61143 61144 61149 61178 61180 61181 61182 61183 61184 61185 61186 61190 61191 61192 61193 61194 61198 Measured variables Min. active power L3 Min. reactive power L1 Min. reactive power L2 Min. reactive power L3 Min. power factor L1 Min. power factor L2 Min. power factor L3 Min. frequency Min. total active power Min. total reactive power Min. total apparent power Min. total power factor Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 Total active energy L1L2L3 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 Total active energy L1L2L3 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1L2L3 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1L2L3 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 Overflow counter apparent energy L1L2L3 Neutral current Phase angle L1 Active energy inflow L1 Active energy outflow L1 Reactive energy inflow L1 Reactive energy outflow L1 Apparent energy L1 Active energy L1 Reactive energy L1 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 Phase angle L2 Use for user data mapping Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 61200 Active energy inflow L2 Yes 61201 Active energy outflow L2 Yes 61202 Reactive energy inflow L2 Yes 61203 Reactive energy outflow L2 Yes 61204 Apparent energy L2 Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 129 Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping Measured value ID Measured variables Use for user data mapping 61205 Active energy L2 Yes 61206 Reactive energy L2 Yes 61210 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 Yes 61211 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 Yes 61212 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 Yes 61213 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 Yes 61214 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 Yes 61218 Phase angle L3 Yes 61220 Active energy inflow L3 Yes 61221 Active energy outflow L3 Yes 61222 Reactive energy inflow L3 Yes 61223 Reactive energy outflow L3 Yes 61224 Apparent energy L3 Yes 61225 Active energy L3 Yes 61226 Reactive energy L3 Yes 61230 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 Yes 61231 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 Yes 61232 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 Yes 61233 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 Yes 61234 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 Yes 65500 Qualifier L1 Yes 65501 Qualifier L2 Yes 65502 Qualifier L3 Yes 65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 Yes 65504 Total operating hours counter L1L2L3 Yes 65505 Operating hours counter L1 Yes 65506 Operating hours counter L2 Yes 65507 Operating hours counter L3 Yes 65510 Counter limit violation GW1 Yes 65511 Counter limit violation GW2 Yes 65512 Counter limit violation GW3 Yes 65513 Counter limit violation GW4 Yes 65514 Counter limit violation GW5 Yes 65515 Counter limit violation GW6 Yes 65516 Counter limit violation GW7 Yes 65517 Counter limit violation GW8 Yes 65518 Counter limit violation GW9 Yes 65519 Counter limit violation GW10 Yes 65520 Counter limit violation GW11 Yes 65521 Counter limit violation GW12 Yes 65522 Counter limit violation GW13 Yes 65523 Counter limit violation GW14 Yes 65524 Counter limit violation GW15 Yes 65525 Counter limit violation GW16 Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 130 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB B Measured variables Measured variables for data records and user data The following table provides an overview of all measured variables that are used in the data records and user data. Note that the format and unit differ in the evaluation of records and user data. Table B- 1 Measured variables for data records and user data Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 1 Voltage UL1-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 Voltage UL2-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 Voltage UL1-L2 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 Voltage UL2-L3 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 Voltage UL3-L1 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 7 Current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 Current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 10 Apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 11 Apparent power L2 3 REAL VA 12 Apparent power L3 3 REAL 13 Active power L1 3 14 1 Value range Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 Active power L3 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 16 Reactive power L1 3 10 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 Reactive power L2 3 10 REAL var 18 Reactive power L3 REAL 19 Power factor L1 3 20 Power factor L2 3 3 10 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 131 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit Value range Connection type 21 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 30 Frequency REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 34 Total active power L1L2L3 5 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 11 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 37 Total power factor L1L2L3 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 38 Amplitude balance for voltage 2 REAL % 39 Amplitude symmetry for current 2 REAL 40 Max. voltage UL1-N 6 41 Max. voltage UL2-N 6 42 Max. voltage UL3-N 6 43 Max. voltage UL1-UL2 6 44 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 0 ... 100 % 0 ... 200 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 REAL V REAL REAL Max. voltage UL2-UL3 6 REAL 45 Max. voltage UL3-UL1 6 46 Max. current L1 6 47 4 7 0.0 ... 1000000.0 V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Max. current L2 6 REAL A 48 Max. current L3 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 0.0 ... 100000.0 49 Max. apparent power L1 6 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 50 Max. apparent power L2 6 REAL VA 51 Max. apparent power L3 6 REAL 52 Max. active power L1 6 53 109 ... +3.0 x -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Max. active power L2 6 REAL W 54 Max. active power L3 6 REAL 55 Max. reactive power L1 6 56 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Max. reactive power L2 6 REAL var 57 Max. reactive power L3 6 REAL 58 Max. power factor L1 6 59 Max. power factor L2 6 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 132 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 60 Max. power factor L3 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 61 Max. frequency REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 65 Max. sum of active power 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 66 Max. sum of reactive power REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 67 Max. sum of apparent power 6 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68 Max. total power factor 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 70 Min. voltage UL1-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 Min. voltage UL2-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 Min. voltage UL3-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 73 Min. voltage UL1-UL2 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 74 Min. voltage UL2-UL3 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 75 Min. voltage UL3-UL1 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 76 Min. current L1 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 77 Min. current L2 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 78 Min. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 6 6 79 Min. apparent power L1 6 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 80 Min. apparent power L2 6 REAL VA 81 Min. apparent power L3 6 REAL 82 Min. active power L1 6 83 109 ... +3.0 x -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Min. active power L2 6 REAL W 84 Min. active power L3 6 REAL 85 Min. reactive power L1 6 86 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Min. reactive power L2 6 REAL var 87 Min. reactive power L3 6 REAL 88 Min. power factor L1 6 89 Min. power factor L2 6 90 Min. power factor L3 91 Min. frequency 95 Min. sum of active power 6 6 6 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 133 Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 96 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Min. sum of apparent power REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 97 Min. sum of reactive power 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 98 Min. total power factor 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 200 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 201 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 205 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 1038 ... +3.4 x 1038 206 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 REAL varh -3.4 x 1038 ... +3.4 x 1038 210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 215 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 2147483647 224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 225 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... +2147483647 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 134 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 DINT varh -2147483647 ... +2147483647 6114 0 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1L2L3 uint16 - 0 ... 65535 6114 1 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1L2L3 uint16 - 0 ... 65535 6114 2 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 uint16 - 0 ... 65535 6114 3 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 uint16 - 0 ... 65535 6114 4 Overflow counter apparent energy L1L2L3 uint16 - 0 ... 65535 6114 9 Neutral current 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 6117 8 Phase angle L1 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 6118 0 Active energy inflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6118 1 Active energy outflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6118 2 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6118 3 Reactive energy outflow L1 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6118 4 Apparent energy L1 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6118 5 Active energy L1 6 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 6118 6 Reactive energy L1 6 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 6119 0 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6119 1 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6119 2 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6119 3 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6119 4 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6119 8 Phase angle L2 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 6120 0 Active energy inflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6 Value range Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 135 Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 6120 1 Active energy outflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6120 2 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6120 3 Reactive energy outflow L2 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6120 4 Apparent energy L2 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6120 5 Active energy L2 6 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 6120 6 Reactive energy L2 6 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 6121 0 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6121 1 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6121 2 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6121 3 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6121 4 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6121 8 Phase angle L3 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 6122 0 Active energy inflow L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6122 1 Active energy outflow L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6122 2 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6122 3 Reactive energy outflow L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6122 4 Apparent energy L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 6122 5 Active energy L3 6 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 6122 6 Reactive energy L3 6 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 6123 0 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6123 1 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6123 2 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 136 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 6123 3 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6123 4 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 6211 0 Active energy inflow L1 6 DINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6211 1 Active energy outflow L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6211 2 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 UDINT Varh 0 ... 2147483647 6211 3 Reactive energy outflow L1 UDINT Varh 0 ... 2147483647 6211 4 Apparent energy L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6211 5 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) 6 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6211 6 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) 6 DINT Varh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6221 0 Active energy inflow L2 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6221 1 Active energy outflow L2 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6221 2 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 UDINT Varh 0 ... 2147483647 6221 3 Reactive energy outflow L2 UDINT Varh 0 ... 2147483647 6221 4 Apparent energy L2 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 2147483647 6221 5 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) 6 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6221 6 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) 6 DINT Varh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6231 0 Active energy inflow L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6231 1 Active energy outflow L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 6231 2 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 UDINT Varh 0 ... 2147483647 6231 3 Reactive energy outflow L3 UDINT Varh 0 ... 2147483647 6231 4 Apparent energy L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 2147483647 6231 5 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) 6 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 137 Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit 6231 6 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) 6 DINT Varh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6550 0 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 6550 1 Qualifier L2 6550 2 Qualifier L3 6550 3 Qualifier L1L2L3 6550 4 WORD WORD Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 0b qq 00 00 xx Bit field 0b qq 00 xx 00 0b 00 00 00 00 Bit field 0b qq xx 00 00 0b 00 00 00 00 Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 Total operating hours coun- REAL ter L1L2L3 5 8 9 h 6550 5 Operating hours counter L1 REAL 6550 6 Operating hours counter L2 6550 7 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 Operating hours counter L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 6550 8 Status of energy counter overflows WORD Bit field 0x xxxx xxxx 6550 9 Status of limits WORD Bit field 0x xxxx xxxx 6551 0 Counter limit violation GW1 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 1 Counter limit violation GW2 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 2 Counter limit violation GW3 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 3 Counter limit violation GW4 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 4 Counter limit violation GW5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 5 Counter limit violation GW6 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 6 Counter limit violation GW7 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 7 Counter limit violation GW8 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 8 Counter limit violation GW9 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6551 9 Counter limit violation GW10 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6552 0 Counter limit violation GW11 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 WORD Value range 0b qq xx xx xx Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 138 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit Value range Connection type 6552 1 Counter limit violation GW12 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6552 2 Counter limit violation GW13 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6552 3 Counter limit violation GW14 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6552 4 Counter limit violation GW15 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6552 5 Counter limit violation GW16 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 6600 1 Voltage UL1-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 6600 2 Voltage UL2-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 6600 3 Voltage UL3-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 6600 4 Voltage UL1-L2 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 6600 5 Voltage UL2-L3 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 6600 6 Voltage UL3-L1 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 6600 7 Current L1 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 6600 8 Current L2 1 UINT 1 mA 6600 9 Current L3 1 UINT 6601 0 Apparent power L1 3 6601 1 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 0 ... 65535 1 mA 0 ... 65535 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 Apparent power L2 3 INT 1 VA 6601 2 Apparent power L3 3 INT 6601 3 Active power L1 3 6601 4 -27648 ... 27648 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 Active power L2 3 INT 1W 6601 5 Active power L3 3 INT 6601 6 Reactive power L1 3 10 6601 7 Reactive power L2 3 10 -27648 ... 27648 1W -27648 ... 27648 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 139 Measured variables Meas Measured variables ured value ID Data type Unit Value range 6601 8 Reactive power L3 3 10 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 6601 9 Power factor L1 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 6602 0 Power factor L2 3 USINT 0.01 6602 1 Power factor L3 3 USINT 6603 0 Frequency 4 USINT 6603 4 Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 0 ... 100 0.01 0 ... 100 1 Hz 45 ... 65 Total active power L1L2L3 5 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 6603 5 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 11 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 6603 6 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 6603 7 Total power factor L1L2L3 6 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 6603 8 Frequency 4 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 UINT 1 Effective value 2 IEC 61557-12 3 Arithmetical mean value over 200 ms as floating mean 4 Arithmetical mean value over 10 s as floating mean 5 Simple summation 6 Calculation from the start/restart (inflow and outflow values are positive numbers) 7 Determined from ratio of active and apparent power 8 For mapping both states as UINT (high: Energy counter overflow, low limit) 9 Corresponds to the maximum of the phase-specific operating hours counters 10 Measured value includes fundamental and harmonics, arithmetic mean over 200 ms as floating mean 11 Measured value includes fundamental and harmonics, simple summation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 140 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured variables Format Table B- 2 Format and its length in bytes Format in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Format to IEEE Length in bytes Comment BYTE 1 byte Bit field with 8 bit BYTE WORD WORD 2 bytes Bit field with 16 bit USINT INT8 (unsigned) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits without sign INT INT16 (signed) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits with sign UINT INT16 (unsigned) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits without sign UDINT INT32 (unsigned) 4 bytes Fixed-point number 32 bits without sign DINT INT32 (signed) 4 bytes Fixed-point number, 32 bits with sign REAL Float32 4 bytes Floating-point number 32 bits with sign LREAL Float64 8 bytes Floating-point number 64 bits with sign Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 141 C Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" User data of the module The module has 2 bytes of input user data and 2 bytes of output user data for status and control information. At this module version measured variables can be read solely via measured value data records (no measured variables can be evaluated via user data). Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data is fixed. Table C- 1 Structure of input user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Constant = 0x80 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 142 Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Allocation of the input user data Figure C-1 Allocation of the status bytes in the input user data (2 bytes) Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed. Table C- 2 Structure of output user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module Reserved Reserved 1 Module Control outputs Reset of values and counters, gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 143 Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Assignment of the output user data Via the output user data you control for all phases Resetting for all minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and energy counters. The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters. Figure C-2 Allocation of the control byte in the output user data (1 byte) Note For module version 2 I / 2 Q, a reset of the selected variables always acts on all measured values/counter levels of the three phases. * Reset energy counter: Acts on all active, reactive and apparent energies of all phases * Reset operating hours counter: Acts on the counters of Phases 1 to 3 * Reset minimum / maximum values: Acts on the minimum and maximum value calculations of Phases 1-3 * Reset all counters for limit violations: Acts on all 16 limit values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 144 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" User data of the module The module occupies 32 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 12 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (Bytes 2 to 31) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You can set the contents of the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 3 Structure of input user data (12 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant - 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 31 Module or phase Data 2 or 4 bytes of measured values or calculated values according to user data variant Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 145 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. Figure C-3 Assignment of the input user data (32 bytes) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 146 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed and is the same at all the selectable user data variants. Via the output user data you control globally or phase-specifically Resetting for minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and energy counters. The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters. Table C- 4 Structure of output user data (12 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Control byte for switching the user data variant 1 Module Control byte 1 Global resetting of values and counters, gate 2 Module Control byte 2 Selection of the energy counter to be reset 3 Module Control byte 3 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 9 to 16 4 Module Control byte 4 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 1 to 8 5 Module Reserved - 6 Phase L1 Control byte 6 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase 1 7 Phase L1 Control byte 7 8 Phase L2 Control byte 8 9 Phase L2 Control byte 9 10 Phase L3 Control byte 10 11 Phase L3 Control byte 11 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase 2 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase 3 Control bytes for user data variant Figure C-4 Allocation of the control bytes for user data variant (Byte 0) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 147 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Control bytes for all three phases Figure C-5 Allocation of the control bytes for all three phases (bytes 1 and 2) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 148 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Control bytes for limit monitoring Figure C-6 Allocation of the control bytes for limit monitoring (bytes 3 to 5) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 149 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" Control bytes for each individual phase Figure C-7 Allocation of the control bytes for each individual phase (bytes 6 to 11) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 150 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.3 "User-specific" module version C.3 "User-specific" module version User data of the module The module occupies between 16 and 256 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 12 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (as of Byte 2) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You configure the structure of the input user data starting at Byte 2 at this module version itself. An input user data length of 32 bytes also allows you to set the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 5 Structure of input user data (16 to 256 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant - 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 255 Module or phase Data Measured values or calculated values in accordance with their configuration: * At configuration in STEP 7 the size of the input user data is calculated automatically. * At configuration via the GSD file the size of the input user data amounts to 32, 64, 128 or 256 bytes. The memory area has to be sufficiently large for the measured variables defined in parameter data record 130. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 151 Module versions C.3 "User-specific" module version Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. The allocation of the status information in Byte 0 and 1 corresponds to the module version 32 I / 12 Q, see appendix Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 145). Figure C-8 Allocation of the input user data ("User-specific" module version" Note Behavior at switchover in case of the input user data being too small If the configured size of the variable input user data is smaller than the sized of the fixed user data variant, the response depends on the type of switchover: * Re-configuration via parameter data record 128 / 130: Output of a parameter assignment error (33). No switchover. * Switchover using output byte 0 of a user data variant: No switchover and no error message. Structure of output user data The structure of the 12 output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data (control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 145). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 152 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Module versions C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" User data of the module The four versions according to EE@Industry use between 4 and 104 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output user data. A dynamic switchover of the input user data is not possible. Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data for the module versions according to the EE@Industry standard is fixed and depends on the selected measurement data profile. Table C- 6 Measurement data profile E0 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 4...7 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 8...11 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Table C- 7 Measurement data profile E1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 34 Table C- 8 Measurement data profile E2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 35 4...7 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow REAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 1038 200 8...11 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow REAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 1038 201 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 153 Module versions C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" Table C- 9 Measurement data profile E3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 4...7 Active power L2 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 8...11 Active power L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 12...15 Reactive power L1 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 16 16...19 Reactive power L2 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 20...23 Reactive power L3 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 18 24...31 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 32...39 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 LREAL 1 varh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 10308 213 40...47 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow 48...55 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0 ... 1.8 x 56...59 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 60...63 Voltage UL2-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 64...67 Voltage UL3-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 68...71 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 72...75 Voltage UL2-UL3 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 76...79 Voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 80...83 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 84...87 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 88...91 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 92...95 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 96...99 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 100...10 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Structure of output user data The structure of the 12 byte output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data (control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 145). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 154 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB D User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data User data 30 bytes are available for transferring the measured values in a cycle at the module version 32 I / 12 Q. Therefore this module version supports dynamic switching between 22 preconfigured user data variants that contain a specific selection of measured values. For more detailed information, refer to "Selecting the module versions (Page 28)". Table D- 1 Overview of the user data variants User data User data variant Total power L1L2L3 254 (FEH) - default setting Active power L1L2L3 253 (FDH) Reactive power L1L2L3 252 (FCH) Apparent power L1L2L3 251 (FBH) Basic measured values L1L2L3 250 (FAH) Total energy L1L2L3 249 (F9H) Energy L1 248 (F8H) Energy L2 247 (F7H) Energy L3 246 (F6H) Basic variables three-phase measurement L1L2L3 245 (F5H) Quality values three-phase measurement 240 (F0H) Energy measurement (periodic) overflow counter 239 (EFH) EE@Industry measurement data profile E3 227 (E3H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E2 226 (E2H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E1 225 (E1H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 224 (E0H) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 159 (9FH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1a 158 (9EH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 157 (9DH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2a 156 (9CH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 155 (9BH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3a 154 (9AH) User-defined user data structure 1 (01H) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 155 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Total power L1L2L3 (ID 254 or FEH) Table D- 2 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66035 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 156 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Active power L1L2L3 (ID 253 or FDH) Table D- 3 Active power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 253 (FDH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 10 ... 11 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 12 ... 13 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 14 ... 15 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 16 ... 19 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 157 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Reactive power L1L2L3 (ID 252 or FCH) Table D- 4 Reactive power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 252 (FCH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Reactive power L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66016 10 ... 11 Reactive power L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 12 ... 13 Reactive power L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 14 ... 15 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66035 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 158 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Apparent power L1L2L3 (ID 251 or FBH) Table D- 5 Apparent power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 251 (FBH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 13 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 14 ... 15 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 16 ... 19 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total apparent energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 159 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic measured values L1L2L3 (ID 250 or FAH) Table D- 6 Basic measured values L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 250 (FAH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 10 ... 11 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 12 ... 13 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 14 ... 15 Voltage UL1-UL2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66004 16 ... 17 Voltage UL2-UL3 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66005 18 ... 19 Voltage UL3-UL1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66006 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling voltage UL1-N (UL1-UL2) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling voltage UL2-N (UL2-UL3) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling voltage UL3-N (UL3-UL1) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 ... 31 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 66038 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 160 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Total energy L1L2L3 (ID 249 or F9H) Table D- 7 Total energy L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Reserved BYTE - - - 3 Reserved BYTE - - - 4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 220 8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 221 11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 222 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 223 20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 24 Reserved BYTE - - - 25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 161 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Energy L1 (ID 248 or F8H) Table D- 8 Energy L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 248 (F8H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62110 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62111 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 2147483647 62112 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 2147483647 62113 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 162 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Energy L2 (ID 247 or F7H) Table D- 9 Energy L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 247 (F7H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62210 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62211 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62212 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62213 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 163 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Energy L3 (ID 246 or F6H) Table D- 10 Energy L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 246 (F6H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62310 8 ... 11 Active energy L3, outflow UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62311 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62312 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62313 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Basic variables three-phase measurements (ID 245 or F5H) Table D- 11 Basic variables three-phase measurements Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 245 (F5H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 35 6 ... 9 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 201 1038 200 10 ... 13 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 14 ... 17 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 18 ... 21 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 22 ... 25 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 26 ... 27 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 28 ... 29 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 30 ... 31 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 164 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H) Table D- 12 Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 240 (F0H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Status of the limit monitoring GW 1 ... 16 (*) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509 4 ... 5 Status of the energy counter overflows (**) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508 6 ... 7 Quality information = 00 DD QQ3 QQ2 QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503 8 ... 9 Reserved WORD - - - 10 ... 11 Reserved WORD - - - 12 ... 13 Reserved WORD - - - 14 ... 15 Reserved WORD - - - 16 ... 17 Reserved WORD - - - 18 ... 19 Reserved WORD - - - 20 ... 21 Reserved WORD - - - 22 ... 23 Reserved WORD - - - 24 ... 25 Reserved WORD - - - 26 ... 27 Reserved WORD - - - 28 ... 29 Reserved WORD - - - 30 ... 31 Reserved WORD - - - (*) Limit violation in: Bit 0 = limit 1 to bit 15 = limit 16 (**) Energy counter count periodically - counter overflow at: Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1 Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1 Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1 Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1 Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1 Bit 5 = 1: Active energy inflow L2 Bit 6 = 1: Active energy outflow L2 Bit 7 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L2 Bit 8 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L2 Bit 9 = 1: Apparent energy L2 Bit 10 = 1: Active energy inflow L3 Bit 11 = 1: Active energy outflow L3 Bit 12 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L3 Bit 13 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L3 Bit 14 = 1: Apparent energy L3 Bit 15: Reserved Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 165 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter (ID 239 or EFH) Table D- 13 Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 239 (EFH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 65120 4 ... 5 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 65121 6 ... 7 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 65122 8 ... 9 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 65123 10 ... 11 Overflow counter for apparent energy L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 65124 12 ... 13 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62220 14 ... 15 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62221 16 ... 17 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62222 18 ... 19 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62223 20 ... 21 Overflow counter for apparent energy L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62224 22 ... 23 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62320 24 ... 25 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62321 26 ... 27 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62322 28 ... 29 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62323 30 ... 31 Overflow counter for apparent energy L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62324 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 227 or E3H) Table D- 14 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 227 (E3H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 13 6 ... 9 Active power L2 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 14 10 ... 13 Active power L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 15 14 ... 17 Reactive power L1 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 16 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 166 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 18 ... 21 Reactive power L2 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 17 22 ... 25 Reactive power L3 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 18 26 ... 33 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 34 ... 41 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 10308 213 42 ... 49 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 varh 50 ... 57 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 58 ... 61 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 62 ... 65 Voltage UL2-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 66 ... 69 Voltage UL3-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 70 ... 73 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 74 ... 77 Voltage UL2-UL3 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 78 ... 81 Voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 82 ... 85 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 86 ... 89 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 90 ... 93 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 94 ... 97 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 98 ... 101 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 102 ... 105 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Power factor L3 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 226 or E2H) Table D- 15 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 226 (E2H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 34 6 ... 9 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 200 10 ...13 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 201 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 167 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 225 or E1H) Table D- 16 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 225 (E1H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 34 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 224 or E0H) Table D- 17 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E0 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 224 (E0H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 6 ... 9 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 10 ...13 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 168 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 159 or 9FH) Table D- 18 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 159 (9FH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 6 ... 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 8 ... 9 Reactive power L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66016 10 ... 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62115 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62116 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 169 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 158 or 9EH) Table D- 19 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1a Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 158 (9EH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 6 ... 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 8 ... 9 Reactive power L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66016 10 ... 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 4294967295 62115 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 4294967295 62116 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 4294967295 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL1-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 170 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 157 or 9DH) Table D- 20 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 157 (9DH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 5 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 6 ... 7 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 8 ... 9 Reactive power L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 15 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62215 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62216 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 171 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 156 or 9CH) Table D- 21 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2a Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 156 (9CH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 5 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 6 ... 7 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 8 ... 9 Reactive power L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 15 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62215 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62216 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL2-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 172 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 155 or 9BH) Table D- 22 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 155 (9BH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 5 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 6 ... 7 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 8 ... 9 Reactive power L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 10 ... 11 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 12 ... 15 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62315 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62316 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 173 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 154 or 9AH) Table D- 23 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3a Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 154 (9AH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 5 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 6 ... 7 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 8 ... 9 Reactive power L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 10 ... 11 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 12 ... 15 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62315 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 62316 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL3-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 174 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB E Measured value data records E.1 Overview of all measured value data records Energy Meter 480VAC ST writes the measured values in several data records that you can read acyclically using the RDREC instruction in the user program. The following tables show the structure of the individual data records: Data record DS 142 for basic measured values (read only). Data record DS 143 for energy counters (read and write). Data record DS 144 for maximum values (read only). Data record DS 145 for minimum values (read only). Data record DS 147 for phase-specific measured values L1 (read only). Data record DS 148 for phase-specific measured values L2 (read only). Data record DS 149 for phase-specific measured values L3 (read only). Data record DS 150 for advanced measurement and status values (read only). Note * The cumulative value of the energy counters in 3-phase operation is obtained from the sums of the respective individual values of the phases. * Inflow and outflow energy meters are always positive values. * The operating hours counter for the entire module is calculated from the maximum of the operating hours of the individual phases. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 175 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Measured variables of the module The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142 supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that are not relevant. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 131)). Table E- 1 Byte Data record 142 Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 42...45 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 46...49 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30 58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 38 62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current REAL % 0 to 100 39 66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 70...73 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 74...77 Apparent power L3 REAL VA 109 -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 10 11 ... +3.0 x 109 12 ... +3.0 x 109 36 16 78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 82...85 Reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 86...89 Reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 90...93 Reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 94...97 98...101 Total reactive power L1L2L3 Active power L1 REAL REAL var W 109 -3.0 x 109 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 18 ... +3.0 x 109 35 ... +3.0 x 109 13 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 176 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 102...105 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x Measured value ID 14 109 106...109 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 34 15 114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 118...121 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 122...125 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 130...133 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh -3.4 x 1038 to +3.4 x 1038 134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 1038 1038 to +3.4 x 204 1038 206 205 1038 138...141 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202 203 1038 200 201 146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh to +1.8 x 214 10308 216 215 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 10308 213 210 186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 210...213 Neutral current REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 211 61149 Neutral current If you operate the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST with connection type 3P4W, the neutral current is also measured under the following conditions: Transmission factors of all phase currents (primary and secondary currents) are identical. Measured phase currents are greater than the value of the "Low limit for measuring current parameter. The neutral current is subject to a "Low limit for measuring current" like all other measured current values. The lowest value of all three configured low limits is used as the minimum value. If one of the conditions is not met, 0 is entered as the value for the neutral current. You can read the neutral current calculated using measured value data record 142. Procedure Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. Use SFB "RDREC" to read out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7 library. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 177 Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Measured values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 Measured values are represented as negative values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 if the value range of the integer format (32767 dec) is exceeded. This is not an error in the measured value. Solution: Select hexadecimal representation. Conversion of 64-bit floating-point numbers If you cannot process 64-bit floating-point numbers in your automation system, we recommend conversion to 32-bit floating-point numbers. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For a description of the conversion of the 64-bit floating-point numbers (data type LREAL) into 32-bit floating-point numbers (data type REAL) please refer to the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56600676). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 178 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Energy meter data record 143 for different actions The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions: Reset the energy counter to user-specific value (e.g. "0") Reading the current values of the energy counters Reading the overflow counters Reading the operating hours Energy meter data record 143 Table E- 2 Energy meter data record 143 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Status / control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Status / control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Status / control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Status / control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Status / control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Status / control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61181 24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182 32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh 88...95 Active energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh During reading: 0.0...1.8 x 10308 During writing For continuous counting: 0.0...3.4 x 1012 During writing For periodic counting: 61183 61184 61200 61201 61202 61203 61204 61220 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 179 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 96...103 Active energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61221 104...111 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 0...configured full-scale value (103 ...1015) 112...119 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61223 120...127 Apparent energy (initial value) L3 LREAL VAh 61224 128...129 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 UINT - 61190 130..131 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 61191 132...133 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 61192 134...135 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 61193 136...137 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 UINT - 138...139 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 UINT - 140...141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 142...143 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 144...145 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 146...147 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 UINT - 148...149 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 UINT - 150...151 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 UINT - 152...153 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 154...155 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 61233 156...157 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 UINT - 61234 158...161 Operating hours counter L1 (initial value) REAL h During reading: 65505 162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 0...3.4x1038 65506 166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h During writing: 65507 During reading: 0...65535 During writing for continuous counting: 0 During writing for periodic counting: 0...65500 61222 61194 61210 61211 61212 61213 61214 61230 61231 61232 0...109 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 180 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure E-1 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 181 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counter. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to reset and the time at which counters are reset. In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counters and which overflow counters you want to reset. Figure E-2 Control information DS 143 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 182 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the measured value data record 143: Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version. DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC instruction. Enter a valid length. DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. The start values may not be negative. DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. Observe the ranges of values for start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 183 Measured value data records E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) Measured variables of the module The largest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST was started are stored in this data record. Byte 0 Measured variable Version Format BYTE Unit - Default 0 Measured value ID - Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0 40 6...9 Max. voltage UL2-N REAL V 0 41 10...1 3 Max. voltage UL3-N REAL V 0 42 14...1 7 Max. voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0 43 18...2 1 Max. voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0 44 22...2 5 Max. voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0 45 26...2 9 Max. current L1 1 REAL A 0 46 30...3 3 Max. current L2 1 REAL A 0 34...3 7 Max. current L3 1 REAL A 38...4 1 Max. apparent power L1 REAL 42...4 5 Max. apparent power L2 46...4 9 47 0 48 VA 0 49 REAL VA 0 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA 50...5 3 Max. active power L1 REAL 54...5 7 Max. active power L2 58...6 1 50 0 51 W -3.0 x 109 52 REAL W -3.0 x 109 Max. active power L3 REAL W 62...6 5 Max. reactive power L1 REAL 66...6 9 Max. reactive power L2 70...7 3 Max. reactive power L3 53 -3.0 x 109 54 var -3.0 x 109 55 REAL var -3.0 x 109 REAL var -3.0 x 109 56 57 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 184 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) Byte 1 Measured variable Format Unit Default Measured value ID 74...7 7 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0 58 78...8 1 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0 82...8 5 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 86...8 9 Max. frequency REAL 90...9 3 Max. total apparent power REAL 94...9 7 Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 59 0 60 Hz 45 61 VA 0 65 Max. total active power REAL W -3.0 x 109 66 98...1 01 Max. total reactive power var -3.0 x 109 67 102 Max. total power factor REAL - 0 68 REAL The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 185 Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) Measured variables of the module The smallest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST was started are stored in this data record. Byte Measured variable Format Unit Default Measured value ID Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 0 Version BYTE - 0 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 1000000 70 6...9 Min. voltage UL2-N REAL V 1000000 71 10...13 Min. voltage UL3-N REAL V 1000000 72 14...17 Min. voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 1800000 73 18...21 Min. voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 1800000 74 22...25 Min. voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 1800000 75 26...29 Min. current L1 1 REAL A 100000 76 30...33 Min. current L2 1 REAL A 100000 34...37 Min. current L3 1 REAL A 100000 38...41 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA +3.0 x 42...45 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 46...49 Min. apparent power L3 REAL VA 50...53 Min. active power L1 REAL 54...57 Min. active power L2 58...61 77 78 109 79 80 +3.0 x 109 81 W +3.0 x 109 82 REAL W +3.0 x 109 Min. active power L3 REAL W 62...65 Min. reactive power L1 REAL 66...69 Min. reactive power L2 70...73 Min. reactive power L3 74...77 83 +3.0 x 109 84 var +3.0 x 109 85 REAL var +3.0 x 109 REAL var Min. power factor L1 REAL 78...81 82...85 86...89 86 +3.0 x 109 87 - 1 88 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 1 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 1 Min. frequency Hz 65 91 REAL 89 90 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 186 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Default Measured value ID Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 1 109 90...93 Min. total apparent power REAL VA +3.0 x 95 94...97 Min. total active power REAL W +3.0 x 109 96 98...101 Min. total reactive power REAL var +3.0 x 109 97 102 Min. total power factor REAL - 1 98 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 187 Measured value data records E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) Measured variables of the module (DS 147) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID Connection type 0 Version BYT E - 1 - 1 Reserved BYT E - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L1 WO RD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65500 0b qq 00 00 xx 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REA L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 8...11 Current L1 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 12...15 Apparent power L1 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 10 16...19 Active power L1 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 20...23 Reactive power L1 REA L var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 16 24...27 Power factor L1 REA L - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 28...31 Phase angle L1 REA L 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 32...39 Apparent energy L1 LRE AL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61184 40...47 Active energy (total) L1 LRE AL Wh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61185 48...55 Reactive energy (total) L1 LRE AL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61186 56...59 Max. voltage UL1- REA N L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 40 60...63 Max. current L1 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 46 64...67 Max. apparent power L1 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 49 68...71 Max. active power L1 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 52 72...75 Max. reactive power L1 REA L var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 55 76...79 Max. power factor L1 REA L - 0.0 ... 1.0 58 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 188 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID Connection type 80...83 Min. voltage UL1N REA L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 70 84...87 Min. current L1 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 76 88...91 Min. apparent power L1 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 79 92...95 Min. active power L1 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 96...99 Min. reactive power L1 REA L var 100...103 Min. power factor L1 REA L - 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 83 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 85 0.0 ... 1.0 88 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 189 Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.7 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) Measured variables of the module (DS 148) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID Connection type 0 Version BYT E - 1 - 1 Reserved BYT E - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L2 WO RD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65501 0b qq 00 00 xx 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REA L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 8...11 Current L2 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 12...15 Apparent power L2 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 11 16...19 Active power L2 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 20...23 Reactive power L2 REA L var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 24...27 Power factor L2 REA L - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 28...31 Phase angle L2 REA L 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 32...39 Apparent energy L2 LRE AL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61204 40...47 Active energy (total) L2 LRE AL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61205 48...55 Reactive energy (total) L2 LRE AL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61206 56...59 Max. voltage UL1- REA N L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 41 60...63 Max. current L2 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 64...67 Max. apparent power L2 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 50 68...71 Max. active power L2 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 53 72...75 Max. reactive power L2 REA L var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 56 76...79 Max. power factor L2 REA L - 0.0 ... 1.0 59 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 190 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID 80...83 Min. voltage UL1N REA L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 84...87 Min. current L2 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 77 88...91 Min. apparent power L2 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 92...95 Min. active power L2 REA L W 96...99 Min. reactive power L2 REA L 100...103 Min. power factor L2 REA L Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 80 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 84 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 86 - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 191 Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) Measured variables of the module (DS 149) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID Connection type 0 Version BYT E - 1 - 1 Reserved BYT E - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L3 WO RD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65502 0b qq 00 00 xx 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REA L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 8...11 Current L3 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 12...15 Apparent power L3 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 12 16...19 Active power L3 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 20...23 Reactive power L3 REA L var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 18 24...27 Power factor L3 REA L - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 28...31 Phase angle L3 REA L 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 32...39 Apparent energy L3 LRE AL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61224 40...47 Active energy (total) L3 LRE AL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61225 48...55 Reactive energy (total) L3 LRE AL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61226 56...59 Max. voltage UL1- REA N L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 42 60...63 Max. current L3 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 64...67 Max. apparent power L3 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 51 68...71 Max. active power L3 REA L W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 53 72...75 Max. reactive power L3 REA L var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 57 76...79 Max. power factor L3 REA L - 0.0 ... 1.0 60 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 192 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID 80...83 Min. voltage UL1N REA L V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 84...87 Min. current L3 REA L A 0.0 ... 100000.0 78 88...91 Min. apparent power L3 REA L VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 92...95 Min. active power L3 REA L W 96...99 Min. reactive power L3 REA L 100...103 Min. power factor L3 REA L Connection type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1 81 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 85 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 87 - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 193 Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) Measured variables of the module Data record 150 Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Operating hours counter L1L2L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65504 6...9 Operating hours counter L1 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65505 h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65506 1038 65507 10...13 Operating hours counter L2 REAL 14...17 Operating hours counter L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 18...19 Status limit violation GW 1...16 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509 20...21 Status of energy counter overflows 1 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508 22...25 Counter limit violation GW 1 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65510 26...29 Counter limit violation GW 2 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65511 30...33 Counter limit violation GW 3 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65512 34...37 Counter limit violation GW 4 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65513 38...41 Counter limit violation GW 5 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65514 42...45 Counter limit violation GW 6 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65515 46...49 Counter limit violation GW 7 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65516 50...53 Counter limit violation GW 8 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65517 54...57 Counter limit violation GW 9 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65518 58...61 Counter limit violation GW 10 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65519 62...65 Counter limit violation GW 11 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65520 66...69 Counter limit violation GW 12 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65521 70...73 Counter limit violation GW 13 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65522 74...77 Counter limit violation GW 14 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65523 78...81 Counter limit violation GW 15 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65524 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) 194 Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) 1 Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured value ID 82..85 Counter limit violation GW 16 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65525 86..87 Qualifier L1L2L3 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503 Energy counters count periodically - counter overflow at: Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1 Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1 Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1 Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1 Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1 Bit 5 = 1: Active energy inflow L2 Bit 6 = 1: Active energy outflow L2 Bit 7 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L2 Bit 8 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L2 Bit 9 = 1: Apparent energy L2 Bit 10 = 1: Active energy inflow L3 Bit 11 = 1: Active energy outflow L3 Bit 12 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L3 Bit 13 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L3 Bit 14 = 1: Apparent energy L3 Bit 15: Reserved Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 195 Tips and tricks F.1 F Tips and tricks Processing and visualizing energy data On the basis of an application example we show you how the measured values of the AI Energy Meter can be processed further and visualized. You can find this application example on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/86299299) IT network You must create an artificial N-conductor (for example, by means of a 1:1 voltage transformer) in IT networks due to the missing neutral conductor. You can then use the module. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E36061895-AB 196 SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual 07/2018 A5E42674880-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring Configuration / address ___________________ 4 space ___________________ 5 Quick start Reading and processing ___________________ 6 measured values ___________________ 7 Energy counters ___________________ 8 Operating hours counter ___________________ 9 Limit monitoring Minimum and maximum ___________________ 10 values Power quality analysis ___________________ 11 functions Phase-based measured ___________________ 12 values ___________________ 13 Parameters ___________________ 14 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms ___________________ 15 Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data records ___________________ B Measured variables ___________________ C Module versions ___________________ D User data variants ___________________ E Measured value data records ___________________ F Tips and tricks Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42674880-AA 08/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 4 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 14 3 4 2.1 Properties of the AI Energy Meter HF.....................................................................................14 2.2 Area of application ..................................................................................................................16 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO ............................18 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 20 3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................20 3.2 Connection examples .............................................................................................................23 3.3 Current transformer selection data .........................................................................................27 Configuration / address space ............................................................................................................... 31 4.1 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................31 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Selecting the module versions ................................................................................................32 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 .......................................................................32 Module versions at configuration with GSD file ......................................................................33 Changing over the user data variant during operation ...........................................................34 Recommendations for selecting the module version ..............................................................36 4.3 Applicable modules .................................................................................................................37 5 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 39 6 Reading and processing measured values ............................................................................................ 41 7 6.1 Basics for reading measured values .......................................................................................41 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Quality information ..................................................................................................................44 Quality information in byte 1 of the user data .........................................................................44 Quality information with measured value IDs .........................................................................46 Operating quadrant .................................................................................................................49 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically ..............................................................50 6.4 Read out measured values acyclically using data records .....................................................52 6.5 Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp .........................................................................53 Energy counters .................................................................................................................................... 54 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy ....................................................................................55 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters ............................................56 Preset start values for the energy meters ...............................................................................57 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately.......................................................58 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit ........................................................60 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 5 Table of contents 8 9 10 11 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters .............................................................................. 63 7.4 Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter .......................................................... 66 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? .............................. 67 Operating hours counter ....................................................................................................................... 69 8.1 Evaluating operating hours counters ..................................................................................... 70 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters .................................................. 71 Preset start values for operating hours counters ................................................................... 71 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately ...................................................... 73 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit ....................................................... 73 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters .................................................................... 75 Limit monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 77 9.1 How limit monitoring works .................................................................................................... 77 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring .................................................... 78 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation ..................................................... 80 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring ................................................................................. 82 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................................. 84 10.1 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................. 84 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values ............................................................................. 85 Power quality analysis functions ............................................................................................................ 88 11.1 Power quality analysis status ................................................................................................. 89 11.2 Harmonics analysis ................................................................................................................ 90 11.3 Reactive power compensation ............................................................................................... 91 11.4 Detection of residual current .................................................................................................. 91 11.5 Active factor and power factor ............................................................................................... 92 11.6 Neutral current In ................................................................................................................... 92 11.7 Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values ................................................................. 93 12 Phase-based measured values ............................................................................................................. 94 13 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 96 14 13.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 96 13.2 Description of parameters .................................................................................................... 101 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................108 14.1 Status and error display ....................................................................................................... 108 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.2 Interrupts .............................................................................................................................. 110 Hardware interrupts ............................................................................................................. 110 Diagnostics interrupt ............................................................................................................ 111 14.3 Diagnostic alarms................................................................................................................. 111 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 6 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Table of contents 14.4 14.4.1 14.4.1.1 14.4.1.2 14.4.1.3 14.4.1.4 14.4.2 14.4.2.1 14.4.2.2 14.4.2.3 14.4.2.4 15 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 132 15.1 A Diagnostics response............................................................................................................113 Voltage diagnostics ...............................................................................................................114 Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow ..........................................................................................114 Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value ........................................................................116 Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value ...........................................................................118 Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage ...........................................................121 Current diagnostics ...............................................................................................................123 Diagnostics: Overload ...........................................................................................................123 Low limit for measuring current undershot............................................................................125 Peak values of the instantaneous values for current ............................................................127 Overcurrent of the current half value ....................................................................................129 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................132 Parameter data records....................................................................................................................... 139 A.1 Configuration via parameter data records ............................................................................139 A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module .......................................140 A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring ...........................................153 A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping ............................157 A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping ..................................160 B Measured variables ............................................................................................................................. 163 C Module versions .................................................................................................................................. 192 C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" .....................................................................................................192 C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" .................................................................................................195 C.3 "User-specific" module version .............................................................................................201 C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" .......................203 D User data variants ............................................................................................................................... 205 E Measured value data records .............................................................................................................. 226 E.1 Overview of all measured value data records ......................................................................226 E.2 E.2.1 E.2.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) ..........................................227 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2.......................227 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3.......................229 E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ................................................................................232 E.4 E.4.1 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) ................................................237 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) version 1 ................................237 E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) ......................239 E.6 E.6.1 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) .................................................243 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) version 1 .................................243 E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) .......................245 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 7 Table of contents F E.8 E.8.1 E.8.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) .................... 248 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0 .... 248 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1 .... 249 E.9 E.9.1 E.9.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) .................... 251 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0 .... 251 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1 .... 252 E.10 E.10.1 E.10.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) .................... 254 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0 .... 254 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1 .... 255 E.11 E.11.1 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) ...... 257 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) version 1 ............................................................................................................................... 257 E.12 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151) .................................... 258 E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) ....................................... 259 E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) ............................................. 261 E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) ............................................. 265 E.16 Information data record on available measured values (DS 170) ....................................... 268 Tips and tricks......................................................................................................................................269 F.1 Tips and tricks ...................................................................................................................... 269 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 8 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 9 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 10 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 11 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 12 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 13 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the AI Energy Meter HF Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module AI Energy Meter HF Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 14 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties of the AI Energy Meter HF Properties The module has the following technical properties: Measurement of electrical variables from single-phase, two-phase and three-phase supply networks Max. nominal voltage between two line conductors 480 V AC Retentive storage of the counter values Use on frequency converters Recording of: - Voltages - Currents - Phase angles - Power - Energy / electrical work - Frequencies - Minimum and maximum values with time stamp - Power factors - Operating hours - Limits - Power quality data for voltages and currents The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X --- Calibration in runtime FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 --- --- Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X X Diagnostic interrupts FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X X Hardware interrupts FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X --- Note The AI Energy Meter HF is released as of TIA Portal V15.0.0.2. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 15 Product overview 2.2 Area of application Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: BaseUnit type U0 Labeling strips Reference identification label You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/58649293) system manual. 2.2 Area of application Introduction Energy efficiency is playing an increasingly important role in industry. Rising energy prices, increasing pressure to improve profitability and the growing awareness of climate protection are important factors for reducing energy costs and for introducing an energy data management system. Where can you use the AI Energy Meter HF? AI Energy Meter HF is designed for machine-level deployment in an ET 200SP distributed I/O system. AI Energy Meter HF records over 500 different electrical measurement and energy values. It lets you create transparency about the energy requirements of individual components of a production plant even down to the machine level. You can use the following measurement values supplied by the AI Energy Meter HF for the following applications: Energy consumption Power consumption Power quality Forecasts of consumption Efficiency Power consumption measurements are relevant for load management and maintenance. In addition, you can use the measurements for emission reporting and for determining the CO2 footprint. Note Measuring dangerous electrical quantities The AI Energy Meter HF is not tested according to DIN EN 61010-2-030 and may therefore not be used to verify, measure or monitor protective measures according to DIN EN 61557. Qualified personnel must ensure through additional measures that no danger ensues for humans and the environment in case of an incorrect display. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 16 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Product overview 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO TB, TT and IT system The AI Energy Meter HF can be used in TN, TT and IT systems. Measuring with AI Energy Meter HF A typical supply network of a production plant is usually divided into three voltage ranges: The infeed of the entire plant The subdistribution, for example, to individual lines within the plant The end consumers such as the machines in the lines. The following figure shows the measurement in an electricity supply network: Figure 2-2 Use of the AI Energy Meter HF Advantages of the AI Energy Meter HF The AI Energy Meter HF has the following advantages: Space-saving especially for use in control cabinet PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP (depending on the interface module in use) Multiple modules can be used with one interface module Extension of existing stations by components for energy recording Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 17 Product overview 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO You can read data records from the module or write them to the module with both PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. Operation of the module on PROFIBUS DP Please note that with PROFIBUS DP you can write data records up to a maximum length of 240 bytes to the module or read them from the module. PROFIBUS DPV 1 If the DP Master supports the DPV1, you can reconfigure in your user program with the parameter data records DS 128, DS 129, DS 130, DS 131 or DS 135. Note that the maximum data record length is 240 bytes for DS 135. The following applies for the measured value data records: DS 142: When you read the data record, the module returns the measured value data record DS 142 in version 2. DS 147, DS 148, DS 149: When you read the data record, the module returns the measured value data record in version 0. DS 154, DS 155, DS 161, DS 163, DS 164: When you read the data record, the module returns the first 240 bytes of the structure of the measured value data record. DS 151: You define the user-defined measured value data record DS 151 in the parameter data record DS 135. If the structure in the measured value data record DS 151 is greater than 240 bytes, the module returns the first 240 bytes of the structure. Information on the data record length of data records DS 135 and DS151 can be found in the appendix Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping (Page 160). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 18 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Product overview 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DPV 0 If the DP Master does not support DPV1, you cannot reassign parameters which results in the following restrictions: There are no phase-specific parameters. All parameters apply for all three phases and the neutral conductor. The connection types und user data variants are limited. The voltage transformers are not configurable (default: 1:1). The current transformer value range primary current is restricted. The low limit for measuring current cannot be adjusted (default: 50 mA). Energy metering is performed continuously (the gate is not enabled). Min/Max calculation of values is enabled (the gate is not enabled). 3P4W can be set in the parameters for the connection type 3P3W. 3P4W can be set in the parameters for the connection type 3P3W1. Counting of operating hours is enabled (the gate is not enabled). The residual current measurement is enabled. Limit value monitoring cannot be used. Energy meter default cannot be used. The user-defined user data interface cannot be used. The user-defined data record cannot be used. The power quality analysis cannot be used. The separate settings for measuring the neutral current cannot be used. The measured value data records cannot be used. Operation of the module on PROFINET IO When reading data records partially from the module, please note the following: Measured value data record DS 142: - When you read the data record with a length of 240 bytes or less, the module returns the measured value data record DS 142 in version 2. - When you read the data record with a length of more than 240 bytes, the module returns the measured value data record DS 142 in version 3. Measured value data records DS 147, DS 148, DS 149: - When you read the data record with a length of 240 bytes or less, the module returns the measured value data record in version 0. - When you read the data record with a length of more than 240 bytes, the module returns the measured value data record in version 1. See also Measured value data records (Page 226) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 19 3 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life due to electric shock Touching live parts can lead to death or severe injuries. Before beginning any work deenergize the system and the AI Energy Meter HF and shortcircuit installed transformers. WARNING Danger to life, dangerous system conditions and material damage possible Removing and inserting the Al Energy Meter HF under live voltage is prohibited. If you remove and insert the AI Energy Meter HF under live voltage during operation, the transformers used can produce dangerous induction voltages and electric arcs and dangerous system conditions can arise. The AI Energy Meter HF may only be removed and inserted during operation if the measuring voltages supplied to the BaseUnit at terminals UL1 , UL2, UL3 are disconnected at all poles and special current transformer terminals are used that short-circuit the transformer on the secondary side on removal. Supplying the module The AI Energy Meter HF receives its supply voltage via terminals 17 (24 V DC) and 18 (M). Protecting the connection cables To protect the connection cables at UL1, UL2 and UL3, make sure there is adequate cable protection, especially after cross-section transitions. If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter HF. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 20 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Terminal and block diagram Microcontroller ULn Connection of voltage transformers Backplane bus interface ILn Connection of current transformers Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) N Neutral P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the AI Energy Meter HF Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 21 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Useable BaseUnits You can use the following BaseUnits: Type BU type U0 dark-colored Type BU type U0 light-colored A potential group opened with a light-colored BU type U0 must contain no dark-colored BaseUnit of BU type A0 or A1. Connection types The AI Energy Meter HF supports the following connection types: 3P4W1, 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load 3P4W, 3 phases, 4 conductors 2P3W, 2 phases, 3 conductors 1P2W, 1 phase, 2 conductors 3 x 1P2W, 3 x 1 phase, 2 conductors 3P3W, 3 phases, 3 conductors 3P3W1, 3 phases, 3 conductors, balanced load 3P4WI, 3 phases, 4 conductors (only for current measurement) The input circuit of the module must correspond to one of the listed connection types. Select the appropriate connection type for the intended use. You will find examples of connections in the section Connection examples (Page 23). Information on the selection of a current transformer is available in the section Current transformer selection data (Page 27). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 22 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.2 Connection examples 3.2 Connection examples The following figures show the connection of the AI Energy Meter HF for three-phase, twophase and single-phase measurements. Note that the AI Energy Meter HF must always be connected via a current transformer. The use of voltage transformers is optional. Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current transformers 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current transformers and three voltage transformers. 3P4W1 Balanced load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with one current transformer Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 23 Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W1 Balanced load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with one current transformer and one voltage transformer. 2P3W Any load Two-phase measurement, 3 conductors Connection with two current transformers 2P3W Any load Two-phase measurement, 3 conductors Connection with two current transformers and two voltage transformers. AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. 1P2W Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors Measurement in an AC network with a current transformer. AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 24 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type Wiring diagram 1P2W Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors 3 x 1P2W 3 x single-phase measurement 3 x 1P2W Comment Measuring the load in an AC network with one current transformer and one voltage transformer. AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Measurement with three current transformers for any three loads that are each connected to one of the three phases. 3 x single-phase measurement Measurement with three current transformers and three voltage transformers for any three loads that are each connected to one of the three phases. 3P3W Any load Three-phase measurement Connection with three current transformers Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 25 Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type 3P3W Three-phase measurement Wiring diagram Comment Any load Connection with three current transformers and three voltage transformers. 3P3W1 Three-phase measurement Balanced load Connection with one current transformer 3P3W1 Three-phase measurement Balanced load Connection with one current transformer and one voltage transformer. 3P4WI Three-phase measurement (only for current measurement) Connection with three current transformers * If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter HF. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 26 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data Current transformer connection requirements DIN VDE 0100-557 and IEC 60364-5-55 require the following for the connection of current transformers: The secondary circuits of current transformers must not be grounded. Guards must not be used in the secondary circuits of current transformers. The insulation of the secondary cables of transformers must be designed for the highest voltage of all active components, or the secondary cables must be installed in such a way that their insulation cannot touch any active components, such as busbars. Connection points must be provided for temporary measurements. 3.3 Current transformer selection data Introduction Connection via a current transformer is always required for the current measurement. Use toroids with an accuracy class of 0.5, 1 or 3. Dimensioning of the current transformer The correct dimensioning of the current transformer is important for the following reasons: You achieve correct results from the measurements and You do not overload or damage the current transformers. Selecting a current transformer Use current transformers with a burden capacity 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power dissipation in the terminal circuit (consisting of resistance of the connection cables and burden of the AI Energy Meter HF). 1.5 times the power loss is required in order to prevent the transformer from overloading. 2 times the power dissipation is important to ensure the current limiting in case of a short-circuit. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 27 Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data Maximum length of the connection cable To avoid overloading or damaging the current transformer, the burden Zn specified on the data sheet of the current transformer (in VA) must not be exceeded. To prevent this being exceeded, the entire burden resistance (consisting of the resistance of the connection cable and the internal resistance of the AI Energy Meter HF (see figure below) must be below a certain resistance value (depending on Zn and Imax). Figure 3-2 Maximum length of the connection cable The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable is obtained with the following formula: RL Cable resistance in ohms Imax Zn Rated burden current transformer in VA Rburden Resistance of the AI Energy Meter HF (25 m) Figure 3-3 Secondary current of the current transformer Maximum value for the resistance of the connection cable Based on the maximum cable resistance in ohms, you then calculate the maximum length of the connection cable. To do this, check the data sheet of the connection cable you are using. Note The length of the connection cable (outwards and return) must not exceed the value of 200 meters. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 28 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data Example: Usage of a current transformer 500/5 A You use a current transformer with a transmission ration of 500/5 A that has a rated burden Zn of 5 VA according to the data sheet. The maximum primary current in the application amounts to 400 A. This means that the maximum secondary current Imax. amounts to 4 A. The burden of the AI Energy Meter HF including connection resistance amounts to RBurden = 25 m. The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) is obtained using the following formula: The maximum cable resistance between the transformer and the terminals of the AI Energy Meter HF may not exceed 287.5 m in this case. The corresponding cable length (outgoing and incoming line) depends on the cross-section used of the copper line and can be determined by using the following table. The following table shows the resistance values of copper cables for typical cross-sections with = 0.017857 x mm2/m Estimating the length for a connection cable The value in the table must be less than the calculated terminal resistance RL max of the cable. For the resistance RLmax of 287.5 m used in the above example it is possible to use a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m from a cross-section of 0.75 mm2 upward. Crosssection AWG Cable overview for copper 0.5 m 1m 5m 0.25 mm2 24 35.7 m 71.4 m 357.1 m 714.3 m 3571.4 m 0.34 mm2 22 26.3 m 52.5 m 262.6 m 525.2 m 2626.0 m 0.5 mm2 21 17.9 m 35.7 m 178.6 m 357.1 m 1785.7 m 0.75 50 m 19/20 11.9 m 23.8 m 119.0 m 238.1 m 1190.5 m mm2 18 8.9 m 17.9 m 89.3 m 178.6 m 892.9 m 1.5 mm2 16 6.0 m 11.9 m 59.5 m 119.0 m 595.2 m mm2 14 3.6 m 7.1 m 35.7 m 71.4 m 357.1 m 1.0 2.5 mm2 10 m Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 29 Wiring 3.3 Current transformer selection data Checking the ratio of burden load and power loss The rated burden of the transformer must be 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power loss in the connection circuit to ensure that the transformer is not overloaded and that the current limitation is ensured during a short-circuit. At a maximum secondary current of 4 A the power loss in the connection circuit is calculated in accordance with the following formula for a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m and a cross-section of 1.0 mm2 and a burden resistance of the AI Energy Meter HF of 25 m: The ratio of the rated burden and the power loss in the connection circuit thus amounts to: The required ratio of rated burden and power loss in the connection circuit lies within the required range. The transformer is dimensioned sufficiently large. See also Technical specifications (Page 132) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 30 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.1 4 Configuring Introduction To configure the AI Energy Meter HF after connecting it, use configuration software such as STEP 7 (TIA Portal). In addition, you can also change numerous parameters of the AI Energy Meter HF in RUN via the user program. Configuring You configure the AI Energy Meter HF with: STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15 and HSP0253 GSD file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET Note Consistency check of the parameter assignment only with STEP 7 If you configure the AI Energy Meter HF using STEP 7 (TIA Portal), STEP 7 (TIA Portal) already checks the various parameters for consistency while they are being entered. If you configure the AI Energy Meter HF using a GSD file, a consistency check is not carried out. The module does not recognize incorrect entries until after the parameter data record has been transferred. If the module recognizes an invalid parameter, the module rejects the complete data record. Preferably use STEP 7 (TIA Portal) to configure the AI Energy Meter HF. The following instructions show the theoretical procedure for configuring the AI Energy Meter HF with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15 or higher with HSP0253. 1. Select the ET 200SP distributed I/O system you are using in the hardware catalog. 2. Insert the module into your station. 3. Open the device view of the ET 200SP and insert the AI Energy Meter HF. 4. Configure the AI Energy Meter HF to suit your requirements. Once the configuration has been compiled without errors, you can download the configuration to the CPU and commission the ET 200SP station while the AI Energy Meter HF is running. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 31 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2 Selecting the module versions Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF has different module versions. During the configuration you use the selection of the module version to specify which measured values can be read. Each module version supplies quality information via the input user data. With the exception of the module version "2 I / 2 Q" you can read the measured values as user data cyclically from the process image. At each module version you have the option to read measured value records from the AI Energy Meter HF by using the RDREC instruction asynchronously. Influence of the module version on the address space Note Influence of the AI Energy Meter HF on the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP The available address space of the ET 200SP is influenced by the following factors: * CPU or interface module * Plugged I/O modules The address space made additionally available by the AI Energy Meter HF is essentially influenced by the length of the user data supplied. The module version determines the length of the user data, which can be supplied by the AI Energy Meter HF at maximum. 4.2.1 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 Module versions with fixed user data assignment Module version User data 2I/2Q No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs Access to measured values 2-byte outputs through "Read data record". Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 192). EE@Industry E0 User data in accordance with EE@Industry measurement data profiles Information about the structure of the EE@Industry measured data profiles is available in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 203). EE@Industry E1 Address space 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs 4-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs EE@Industry E2 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs EE@Industry E3 104-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs Comment Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 32 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Module versions with selectable user data variants Module version User data Address space Comment 32 I / 20 Q User data selectable through defined user data variants 32-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the 32 I / 20 Q module version is available in appendix Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 195). Information about the user data variants at 32 I / 20 Q is available in appendix User data variants (Page 205). User-specific User data selectable through user data mapping or through defined user data variant variable* / 20-byte outputs You have to activate the check box "User data-mapping" in STEP 7 to use the module version user-specifically. You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the user-specific module version is available in the appendix "User-specific" module version (Page 201). * 16 ... 256 bytes in steps of 16 bytes, depending on the mapped measured values 4.2.2 Module versions at configuration with GSD file Module versions with fixed user data assignment Module version User data Address space Comment 2I/2Q No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs 2-byte outputs Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 192). 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs Information about the structure of the EE@Industry measured data profiles is available in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 203). Access to measured values through "Read data record". E0 E1 User data in accordance with EE@Industry measurement data profiles 4-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs E2 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs E3 104-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 33 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Module versions with selectable user data variants Module version User data Address space Comment 32 I / 20 Q User data selectable through user data variants or through userspecific user data* 32-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs You can change over the user data variant during operation. 64-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs If you use user-specific user data, you write your measured value profile into the AI Energy Meter HF with the data record 130. To do this use the WRREC instruction. Information about the structure of data record 130 is available in appendix Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping (Page 157). 64 I / 20 Q 128 I / 20 Q 128-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs 256 I / 20 Q 256-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs *Ensure that the user data do not exceed the size of the address space of the module version. If necessary, use a module version with a larger address space 4.2.3 Changing over the user data variant during operation Introduction You change the user data variant in the output data of each user data variant in Byte 0. The following figure shows to which user data you can change over at various module versions during operation. Figure 4-1 Possible user data variants Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 34 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Requirement User program has been created. AI Energy Meter HF is configured as one of the module versions mentioned in the figure above. The start address of the module is known in the process image output. Procedure 1. Create one constant with the data type BYTE per user data variant. 2. Enter the user data ID as a value in each case. 3. Write the constant to the start address of the module in the process image output. Result The user data variant is switched with the next cycle. Note Information about user data changeover The parameterized user data variant is set in the following cases: * A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. * Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available or - Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 35 Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules 4.2.4 Recommendations for selecting the module version The following table shows which module version is suitable for a given purpose. Module version Application 2I/2Q * Note Use of many AI Energy Meter HF in an ET 200SP or little address space is available * Read the measured values solely via the RDREC instruction from a measured value data record. * Quality information about the measured values is always available. EE@Industry measurement data profile * * E0 / E1 / E2 / E3 Cyclic measurement per phase Available measured values depend on the configured measurement data profile. * Supplied measured values in accordance with the EE@Industry measured data profile * The user data are fixed and cannot be changed dynamically. Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from a measured value data record via the RDREC instruction. * No quality information 32 I / 20 Q User-specific * Cyclic measurement per phase * Quality information about the measured values is always available. * Flexibility by switching predefined user data variants * * Cyclic measurement of up to 64 measured values configurable Depending on the user data variant, you must convert the measured values in the CPU to physical values using the supplied scaling factor. * * Flexibility by switching predefined user data variants One cycle elapses for each user data changeover. Measured values from the next user data variant are thus supplied with a slight time offset. With GSD configuration * 32 I / 20 Q * 64 I / 20 Q * 128 I / 20 Q * 256 I / 20 Q Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from a measured value data record via the RDREC instruction. Consistent measured values of a measuring cycle are supplied. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 36 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules 4.3 Applicable modules Configuring with STEP 7 The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured with STEP 7. Table 4- 1 Module versions configured with STEP 7 Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 20 Q User-specific EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V1.0 or higher* E1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher* V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.2 or higher --- V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher IM 155-6 PN HS --- E3 V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF ** E2 V4.0 or higher IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher --- V1.0 or higher --- CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher * Only up to 32 bytes ** Function setting the time as of V4.2 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 37 Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules Configuring with GSD file The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured using a GSD file. Table 4- 2 Module versions configuring with GSD file Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 20 Q 64 I / 20 Q 128 I / 20 Q 256 I / 20 Q EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 E1 E2 E3 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher --- V3.2 or higher IM 155-6 PN HS IM 155-6 DP HF V4.0 or higher V1.0 or higher --- ----- --- --- Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 38 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 5 Quick start Introduction This section shows you how to read and view your first measured values on the AI Energy Meter HF in a particularly quick and easy way. Requirement You have already connected the AI Energy Meter HF to your network with one of the connection types shown in the section Wiring (Page 20). The AI Energy Meter HF has already been integrated in your configuration tool (such as STEP 7), or the AI Energy Meter HF has been integrated in your hardware catalog of your configuration tool with the GSD file. Procedure 1. Configure an ET 200SP station Configure an ET 200SP station with a CPU 151xSP or an IM 155-6. 2. Plug module in ET 200S station Plug the AI Energy Meter HF into the ET 200SP station and use the module version with 32-byte inputs and 20-byte outputs. 3. Set the module parameters Set the following parameters for the AI Energy Meter HF: - Connection type that you have used for the AI Energy Meter HF (e.g. 3P4W) - Voltage measuring range - Frequency of your network (for example 50 Hz) - Nominal value current and nominal value voltage for the phases - Primary and secondary current of the used current transformer (e.g. 100 A and 1 A) - Primary and secondary voltages of the used voltage transformer (e.g. 230 V and 230 V) Leave all other parameters at their default settings and do not change them. 4. Load configuration Switch on the ET 200SP station and download the configuration to the CPU. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 39 Quick start Result After being switched on, the AI Energy Meter HF supplies the measured values for the "Total power L1L2L3" user data variant with the ID 254 or FEH. Read and check the measured values provided by the AI Energy Meter HF in the input data. The table below shows the structure of the user data variant, the measured variables and the data type of the measured values in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) that are stored in the 32 bytes of output data of the module. Each measured variable is referenced via the measured value ID. An overview of all the measured variables with their measured value IDs is provided in the section Measured variables (Page 163). Table 5- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type 0 User data variant BYTE 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 6 ... 7 Current L3 8 ... 9 10 ... 11 Unit Value range Measured value ID - 254 (FEH) - Bit string qq xx xx xx - 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Additional information If you require further information about the evaluation and interpretation of the measured values, please refer to the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 41). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 40 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.1 6 Basics for reading measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF provides the measured values and variables through the following methods: Cyclic: User data Acyclic: Measured value data records User data User data provide pre-defined or user-defined measured values depending on the configured user data variant. The supplied measured values are cyclically written to the process image of the CPU. With some user data variants, the measured values are supplied as raw data, which you have to convert to the corresponding physical values using a supplied scaling factor. Measured value data records Each measured value data record supplies physical values that you can further process immediately. You read the values of a measured value data record acyclically with the RDREC instruction in a PLC tag. You need a corresponding PLC tag for each measured value data record to be read. It is also possible to create the corresponding structure in the static variables of an FB or store this structure in a DB. You can display the read measured values in a watch table in STEP 7. Note If you are using CPUs other than S7-1200 or S7-1500, convert 64-bit measured values to 32-bit measured values. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For more information, read FAQ: Processing 64-bit-floating-point numbers in S7-300/400 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/56600676) Validity of the measured values After turning on the 24 V DC supply voltage, the first measured values are available at terminal 17 after approximately 2 seconds. In the input user data, the content of byte 0 is set to the selected user data variant. You can use this change in byte 0 as a trigger event. As soon as the module has valid measured values, the value of this byte changes to a value within the value range. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 41 Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values Initial module startup After the first startup or restart of the module, the parameters are transferred to the module. You can preset a user data variant in the parameters of the hardware configuration. This remains in effect until a different user data variant is selected in the output data (byte 0). This allows input user data to be modified dynamically according to the requirements of the process. The user data variant defined in parameter data record 128 or configuration tool is used under the following conditions: A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available, or - Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant. See "Selecting the module versions (Page 32)". Current measured values become "0" The current and all other measured values based on it are suppressed (or set to "0") in the data records and in the user data in the following cases: The fed-in current of the current transformer is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" parameter. Fed-in secondary current at the channel is higher than 12 A. Among others, the following measured values and derived measured variables of the phase involved become "0": Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A floating mean value is formed from the power values. These only become "0" after a corresponding time. The operating hours counter and the energy counter for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase stops counting. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 42 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values General reset With module versions with 20 bytes of output data you can reset some measured values and counter levels. An edge change of 0 -> 1 at the bit for the general reset has the following effect: Counters for energy, operating hours and limits start at "0" again. Results of the power quality analysis are deleted. Minimum and maximum value calculation starts again with initial values. For the general reset, set bit 7 in byte 16 of the output user data. (Page 195) Figure 6-1 Control byte 16 in the output user data for general reset Substitute value behavior The substitute values for input values of the AI Energy Meter HF amount to "0". See also Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 50) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 43 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2 Quality information Use the quality information to evaluate the status for currents, voltage, operating quadrants and the rotating field. The AI Energy Meter HF provides quality information: In byte 1 of the user data In measured value IDs 65500 to 65503 In the power quality analysis Qualifier ID 65496 (Page 89) See also Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 195) 6.2.1 Quality information in byte 1 of the user data For all user data variants, the module provides brief quality information in an 8-bit field in byte 1 for: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) Voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) Operating quadrant for a phase Please note that quality information assignment with user data variants for phase-specific measurement (ID 154 to ID 159) is different from user data variant assignment for 3-phase measurement (ID 244 to ID 254). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 44 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Quality information in byte 1 of the user data for 3-phase measurement The quality information for 3-phase measurement is provided by the module in user data variants ID 244 to ID 254. Figure 6-2 Assignment of byte 1 for user data variants ID 224 to ID 254 Quality information in byte 1 for phase-specific measurement The quality information for phase-specific measurement is provided by the module in user data variants ID 154 to ID 159. Figure 6-3 Byte 1 assignment for user data variants ID 154 to ID 159 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 45 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2.2 Quality information with measured value IDs Complete quality information is provided by the module in a 16-bit field with measured value IDs 65500 to 65503. Measured value ID 65503 for 3-phase measurement Measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502 for phase-specific measurement in phase 1, phase 2 or phase 3 Quality information with measured value ID 65503 for 3-phase measurement The quality information for 3-phase measurement is provided by the module with: User data variant "Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H) User data (measured value ID 66503) Measured value data record 150 The measured value ID 65503 provides information on: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) Voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) Operating quadrants for all 3 phases Rotating field for the 3-phase system Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 46 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Figure 6-4 Quality information for low and high byte of the measured value ID 65503 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 47 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Quality information with measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502 for phase-specific measurement The module provides quality information for phase-specific measurement in phase 1, phase 2 or phase 3 with: User data (with measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502) Measured value data record DS 147, 148 or 149 Measured value IDs 65500, 65501 and 65502 provide information on: Current of the phase in question Voltage of the phase in question Operating quadrant of the phase in question In contrast to the assignment for measured value ID 65503 (figure above), measured value IDs 65500, 65501 and 65502 only contain the phase-specific information for current, voltage and operating quadrant. The information about the other phases and the rotating field have the value 0. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 48 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2.3 Operating quadrant The figure below shows the quality information of the operating quadrants. Figure 6-5 Quadrant in the quality bits Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 49 Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically Requirement STEP 7 is open. The AI Energy Meter HF Is configured. Scaling of measured values in the user data Since the value range of 16-bit values is often smaller than the value range of the physical value, a scaling factor is supplied together with the basic value in the user data for the respective measured or calculated values. You determine the actual value of the measured variable with the following formula: Actual value of measured quantity = measured value in the user data x 10scaling factor Procedure To read measured values from the user data cyclically, proceed as follows: 1. Read the relevant measured value from the input data. 2. Observe the scaling factor at scaled measured values and convert the read measured value using the scaling factor. Example The user data variant 254 (FEH) "Total power L1L2L3" is configured on the AI Energy Meter HF. The measured value for "Current L1" should be read. Table 6- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 50 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - In the user data variant FEH (254) the measured value for the current L1 is stored in Byte 2 + 3. The current is supplied by the module as a 16-bit-fixed-point number in the value range from 0 to 65535 in the unit 1 mA. In addition the scaling factor for the current L1 has to be considered additionally. The module supplies the related scaling factor in Byte 24. The actual value for current L1 is calculated as follows: Actual value for current L1 = Current L1 x 10Scaling current L1 See also Basics for reading measured values (Page 41) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 51 Reading and processing measured values 6.4 Read out measured values acyclically using data records 6.4 Read out measured values acyclically using data records With all module versions you can read out the measured values using data records. An overview of all measured value data records and exact information about the structure is available in the appendix Overview of all measured value data records (Page 226). Requirement In the STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to the data record you want to evaluate. Example of the structure of a data record The following overview shows the structure of the data record DS 142. Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version = 2 UINT8 - - - 1 Reserved UINT8 - - - 2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Neutral current REAL : 210...213 : : A : 0.0 ... 100000.0 : 61149 Procedure 1. Read the desired data record with the RDREC instruction. The measured values are in the target range of the data block which you specified with the RDREC instruction. 2. Evaluate the measured values for the desired measured variables. Note If you want to read or write several data records at the same time in the user program, note that the number of active jobs that you started with the RDREC or WRREC instruction is limited by the resources of the CPU used. See also Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) (Page 227) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 52 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.5 Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp 6.5 Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp The AI Energy Meter HF supports time-of-day synchronization and time stamp. Time stamps are used to date the exact occurrence of information. You can find time information in the measured value data records "Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154)" and "Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155)", for example, or the power quality analysis data records DS160, DS161 and DS163. For the time on the AI Energy Meter HF to correspond to the current system time, the clock must be synchronized externally. Information on this and additional requirements can be found in the application example (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890). In the absence of time-ofday synchronization, the internal time stamp of the AI Energy Meters HF starts at 01.01.1970, 0:00. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 53 7 Energy counters Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF provides several energy and overflow counters that detect both line-based and phase-based energy values, e.g.: Active energy (total, outflow, inflow) Reactive energy (total, outflow, inflow) Apparent energy (total) Retentivity The AI Energy Meter HF stores all counter values retentively. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off), the energy counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Functions The energy meters provide the following basic functions: Measured values for infinite and periodical counting can be read out End values for periodic counting: 103, 106, 109, 1012 and 1015 can be selected with overflow counters Measuring ranges can be changed in RUN Starting and stopping counters via gate is possible Preset and apply start values in RUN Measured variables can be evaluated via data records and user data. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 54 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy There are two ways of evaluating the measured values: Reading measured values using the instruction "RDREC". Reading measured values from the user data variants (not for module versions with 2 bytes of input data). Data records for energy meters You can read out measured values for energy and overflow counters in the following data records. The evaluation of measured data using data records is described in section Read out measured values acyclically using data records (Page 52). Name of the data record Number of the data record Data record 142 Comment DS 143 Measured values of energy and overflow counters for phases L1, L2 and L3 Data record for phase-specific measured values L1 (Page 248) DS 147 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L1 Data record for phase-specific measured values L2 (Page 251) DS 148 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L2 Measured value data record for phasespecific measured values L3 (Page 254) DS 149 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L3 Data record for basic measured values (Page 227) Data record for energy meter (Page 232) Measured values of the total energy L1L2L3 User data variants for energy meters You can read out measured values for energy and overflow meters in the following user data variants. The evaluation of measured data using user data variants is described in section Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 50). Name of the user data variant Comment Total energy L1 L2 L3 (Page 211) Number of the user data variant ID 249 or F9H Energy L1 (Page 212) ID 248 or F8H Energy L2 (Page 213) ID 247 or F7H Energy L3 (Page 214) ID 246 or F6H Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L1 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L2 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L3 Basic variable quality measurement threephase measurement (Page 214) ID 240 or F0H Status on the overflow of the energy meters for phases L1, L2 and L3 Basic variables energy meter measurement ID 239 or EFH (periodic) L1L2L3 (Page 217) EE@Industry measurement data profile E3 ID 227 or E3H (Page 219) Number of counter overflows for energy of phases L1, L2 and L3 Measured values for total active energy and total reactive energy L1L2L3 Measured values of the total energy L1L2L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 55 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Name of the user data variant Number of the user data variant ID 226 or E2H Comment ID 159 or 9FH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for phase L1 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L1a (Page 221) ID 158 or 9EH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for phase L1 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L2 (Page 222) ID 157 or 9DH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L2 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L2a (Page 223) Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L3 (Page 224) ID 156 or 9CH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L2 Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L3 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L3a (Page 225) ID 154 or 9AH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L3 User-defined user data variant ID 1 or 01H and ID 2 or 02H Measured variables for energy can be selected in a user-defined manner EE@Industry measurement data profile E2 (Page 219) Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L1 (Page 220) 7.2 ID 155 or 9BH Measured values for total active energy L1L2L3 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to start the energy and overflow counter with new start values. Define the new start values for the energy and overflow counter in data record DS 143. Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. With all the module versions there are two ways of applying the start values: Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and apply them immediately Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and only apply them after setting a special bit (DQ bit for counter reset) Both options are described in the following sections. General reset With module versions with 20 bytes of output data you can reset the energy and overflow counters. With a general reset, you cannot preset any start values; the start values for energy and overflow counters are always zero with a general reset. You can find additional information on the general reset in the section Basics for reading measured values (Page 41). See also Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 232) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 56 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters 7.2.1 Preset start values for the energy meters Define the start values for the energy and overflow meters in data record DS 143. Introduction You have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Structure of data record DS 143 The following overview shows the structure of the data record DS 143 in simplified form. More detailed information about the structure of data record DS 143 is available in section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 232). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Start value for active energy inflow L1 LREAL Wh 16...23 Initial value active energy outflow L1 LREAL Wh : : : : 128...129 Start value for overflow counters active energy inflow L1 UNIT - 130...131 Start value for overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UNIT - : : : : 61180 You will find the exact assignment in the section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 232). 61181 : 61190 61191 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 57 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Assignment of data record DS 143 Byte 0 and Byte 1: Version of the data record Header information for the version of the data record. Byte 2 ... Byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy meters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase. Byte 8 ... Byte 127: Start values for the individual energy meters The start values for energy meters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers. The format corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Byte 128 ... Byte 157: Initial values for overflow counters The initial values for overflow counters in data record 143 are 16-bit integers. The format corresponds to the data type UINT in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. 7.2.2 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately It is possible to apply the start values for energy counters and overflow counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and you have entered the start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 58 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Procedure for all module versions 1. In control byte 2 of the DS 143 (bytes 3, 5 and 7), for each phase set the category of the energy meters (active, reactive, apparent energy) for which you want to set the start values. Figure 7-1 Assignment of control byte 2 in DS 143 2. In control byte 1 of DS 143 (bytes 2, 4 and 6), for each phase define whether you want to apply the start values for energy or overflow counters. Applying depends on the category selection from control byte 2. - Set Bit 0 if you want to apply the start values for the overflow counters. - Set Bit 2 if you want to apply the start values for the energy meters. Figure 7-2 Assignment of control byte 1 in DS 143 3. In control byte 1 of DS 143 define that you want to immediately apply the start values. - Set Bit 7 to 0 so that the start values are immediately applied after writing the data record. 4. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction to the CPU. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 59 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters 7.2.3 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit Due to the differing lengths of the output data, setting of the start values for the energy counters and overflow counters depends on the configured module version. Module versions with 20 bytes of output data If you use module versions with 20 bytes of output data, you can: Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for all phases separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, then you always apply the start values for all the energy counters and overflow counters simultaneously. Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and have entered the start values. Applying depends on the category selection from control byte 2. - Set Bit 0 if you want to apply the start values for the overflow counters. - Set Bit 2 if you want to apply the start values for the energy meters. In control byte 1 of the DS 143 you have set Bit 7 to "1" (apply start values via DQ bit) You have transferred the data record DS 143 with new start values to the CPU. The assignment of the data record can be found in Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 232) Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 60 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Procedure for module version with 20 bytes of output data Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for all three phases 1. In Byte 2 of the output data, select the categories for which you want to apply start values. - Set bit 5 for active energy counters. - Set bit 6 for reactive energy counters. - Set bit 7 for apparent energy counters. Figure 7-3 Selection of categories for reset 2. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in byte 1 of the output data. Figure 7-4 Reset bit for energy and overflow counter If there is an edge change of the reset bit from 0 -> 1, the module resets the energy and overflow counters that you previously selected in byte 2 to their start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 61 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for phase-specific counting You can also reset the energy and overflow counters on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure as described in "Applying start values for energy counters and overflow counters for all three phases", as applicable. 1. In bytes 7, 9 and 11 of the output data, select the categories for which you want to apply the phase-specific start values. - Set Bit 5 for active energy counters. - Set Bit 6 for reactive energy counters. - Set Bit 7 for apparent energy counters. Figure 7-5 Selection of category 2. In bytes 6, 8 and 10 of the output data, set the reset bits (Bit 7) for the phase-specific start values. Figure 7-6 Reset bit for phase-specific energy and overflow counters If there is an edge change of the phase-specific reset bit from 0 -> 1, the module resets the energy and overflow counters that you previously selected in bytes 7, 9 and 11 to their start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 62 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters Procedure for module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, always apply the start values for all the energy counters and overflow counters. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in byte 1 of the output data. Figure 7-7 Reset bit for all energy and overflow counters If there is an edge change of the reset bit from 0 -> 1, the module resets all energy and overflow counters to their start values. 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters There are two ways of starting or stopping measurement with the energy meter AI Energy Meter HF: Counting with gate The module starts counting when you set the DQ bit for the counter gate in the output data using an edge change from 0 -> 1. If you reset the DQ bit using an edge change from 1 -> 0, the counter stops. Counting without gate The module starts counting immediately as soon as the module is switched on. Counting cannot be stopped. Both options are described in the following sections. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 63 Energy counters 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters Counting with gate Requirements: The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure If you wish to start counting using the gate, proceed as follows: 1. Activate the parameter "Enable energy meter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. 2. Set the DQ bit for the counter gate (Bit 6) in control byte 1 in the output data. The module starts counting as soon as there is an edge change from 0 -> 1 at the DQ bit for the counter gate. If you wish to stop the counting again, then reset Bit 6 in control byte 1 in the output data. Counting stops at an edge change from 1 -> 0. The "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts. Figure 7-8 Gate enabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 64 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters Counting without gate Requirement The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure Deactivate the parameter "Enable energy meter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. The module starts counting as soon as the module is started. The counter continues to count. Figure 7-9 Gate disabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 65 Energy counters 7.4 Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter 7.4 Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter The following figure shows resetting and starting/stopping with activated gating using the energy meter as an example: The counter is reset to the value specified in the configuration. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. The gate is opened again via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts with the new start value. The gate is opened via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts. The configured current low limit has been violated. The counter does not count. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. A new start value is written to the measured value data record 143 (Page 232) with the WRREC instruction. The counter is reset via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts from the new start value that was transferred via the measured value data record 143. Figure 7-10 Example of an energy meter Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 66 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? Introduction Bytes 2 to 7 of data record 143 (Page 232) form the phase-based control and feedback interface for the data record DS 143. Bytes 2 and 3: Control and feedback interface for phase 1 Bytes 4 and 5: Control and feedback interface for phase 2 Bytes 6 and 7: Control and feedback interface for phase 3 Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure 7-11 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 67 Energy counters 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy meters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to preset and the time at which counters are to be preset. Figure 7-12 Control information DS 143, control byte 1 (write access) In control byte 2 you determine which energy meter categories you want to preset. Figure 7-13 Control information DS 143, control byte 2 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 68 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8 Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF provides four operating hours counters which count the operating hours of the connected consumers: Three phase-specific operating hours counters 1 operating hours counter which displays the value of the largest phase-specific operating hours counter. Retentivity The AI Energy Meter HF stores all counter values retentively. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off), counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Functions The operating hours counters provide the following basic functions: Measuring ranges from 0 to 3.4 x 1038 hours. Starting and stopping operating hours counters via gate Preset and apply start values in RUN Evaluating counter states using data records and user data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 69 Operating hours counter 8.1 Evaluating operating hours counters 8.1 Evaluating operating hours counters There are two ways of evaluating the operating hours counters: Reading counter states using data records with the instruction RDREC. Reading counter states from the user-defined user data variants. Data records for operating hours counter You can read out measured values for operating hours in the following data records. The evaluation of measured data using data records is described in section Reading and processing measured values (Page 41). Name of the data record Number of the data record Comment Data record for energy meter (Page 232) DS 143 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (Page 257) DS 150 Phase-specific operating hours counter for phase L1, phase L2, phase L3 and largest phase-specific operating hours counter L1L2L3 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (Page 258) DS 151 Operating hours counters can be selected in a userdefined manner User data variants for operating hours counters You can read out measured values for operating hours in the following user data variants. The evaluation of measured data using user data variants is described in section User data variants (Page 205). Name of the user data variant Number of the user data variant Comment User-defined user data variant ID 1 or 01H and Operating hours counters can be selected in a userdefined manner ID 2 or 02H Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 70 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to start counting of the operating hours counters with new start values. Define the new start values for the operating hours counters in data record DS 143. Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. With all the module versions there are two ways of applying the start values: Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and apply them immediately Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and only apply them after setting a special bit (DQ bit for operating hours counter reset) Both options are described in the following sections. General reset With module versions with 20 bytes of user data you can reset the operating hours counters. With a general reset, you cannot preset any start values; the start values for operating hours counters are always zero with a general reset. You can find additional information on the general reset in the section Basics for reading measured values (Page 41). 8.2.1 Preset start values for operating hours counters Define the start values for operating hours counters using data record DS 143. Introduction You have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 71 Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Structure of data record DS 143 The following overview shows the structure of the data record DS 143 in simplified form. More detailed information about the structure of data record 143 is available in section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 232). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Start value for active energy inflow L1 LREAL Wh 61180 16...23 Initial value active energy outflow L1 LREAL Wh : : : : 158...161 Start value operating hours L1 REAL h 61181 You will find the exact assignment in the section Structure for energy coun- : ters (DS 143) (Page 232). 65505 162...165 Start value operating hours L2 REAL h 65506 166...169 Start value operating hours L3 REAL h 65507 Assignment of data record DS 143 Byte 0 and Byte 1: Version of the data record Header information for the version of the data record. Byte 2 ... Byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy meters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase. Byte 8 ... byte 157: Start values for the individual energy meters and overflow counters The start values for energy counters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers. The format corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. The initial values for overflow counters in data record 143 are 16-bit integers. The format corresponds to the data type UINT in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Byte 158 ... byte 169: Start values for operating hours counter The start values for operating hours counters in data record 143 are 32-bit integers. The format corresponds to the data type REAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 72 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters 8.2.2 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately Applying the start values for each separate operating hours counter is possible. Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and you have entered the start values. Procedure for all module versions 1. In Control byte 1 of DS 143 (bytes 2, 4 and 6), for each phase, define that you want to immediately apply the start values for operating hours counters. - Set the Bit 3 to 1 so that the start values for the operating hours counters are preset. - Set the Bit 7 to 0 so that the module immediately applies the start values after writing the data record. Figure 8-1 Allocation of the control bytes in DS 143 for operating hours 2. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction to the CPU. 8.2.3 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit Due to the differing lengths of the output data, setting of the start values for the operating hours counters depends on the configured module version. Module versions with 20 bytes of output data If you use module versions with 20 bytes of output data, you can: Apply start values for all operating hours counters. Apply start values for individual operating hours counters separately. Module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, apply the start values for all operating hours counters simultaneously. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 73 Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and have entered the start values. Set the Bit 3 to 1 so that the start values for the operating hours counters are preset. In control byte 1 of DS 143 you have set Bit 7 to "1" (apply start values via DQ bit). (see previous figure) You have transferred the data record DS 143 with new start values to the CPU. The assignment of the data record can be found in Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 232) Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. Procedure for applying the start values of all operating hours counters Applying the start values for all operating hours counters with the module versions with 2 bytes and 20 bytes of output data is identical. 1. Set the reset bit for operating hours counters (Bit 5) in Byte 1 in the output data. Figure 8-2 Control byte 1 Reset for all operating hours counters If there is an edge change of the reset bit from 0 to 1, the module applies the start values for all operating hours counters. Procedure for applying the start values of individual operating hours counters Note Applying the start values for phase-specific operating hours counters Applying the start values for phase-specific operating hours counters does not differ from the procedure described above. In the output data, select the reset bits for the phase-specific operating hours counters in bytes 6, 8 and 10. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 74 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters There are two ways of starting or stopping counting with the operating hours counter AI Energy Meter HF: Counting with gate The module starts counting when you set the DQ bit for the counter gate in the output data using an edge change from 0 -> 1. If you reset the DQ bit for the counter gate using an edge change from 1 -> 0, the counter stops. Counting without gate The module starts counting immediately as soon as the module is switched on. Counting cannot be stopped. Both options are described in the following sections. Counting with gate Requirements: The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure If you wish to start counting using the gate, proceed as follows: 1. Activate the parameter "Enable operating hours counter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. 2. Set the DQ bit for the counter gate (Bit 4) in control byte 1 in the output data. The module starts counting as soon as there is an edge change from 0 -> 1 at the DQ bit for the counter gate. If you wish to stop the counting again, then reset Bit 4 in control byte 1 in the output data. Counting stops at an edge change from 1 -> 0. The "Enable operating hours counter gate" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts. Figure 8-3 Gate enabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 75 Operating hours counter 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters Counting without gate Requirement The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure Deactivate the parameter "Enable operating hours counter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. The module starts counting as soon as the data record has been applied by the CPU. The counter continues to count. Figure 8-4 Gate disabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 76 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.1 9 How limit monitoring works Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF supports monitoring of parameterizable low or high limits for up to 16 analog measured or calculated variables. You can also specify multiple limits for each measured or calculated variable, in order to define a high or low value range. The measured value data record 150 returns the current status of limit violations and one counter per limit that displays the number of limit violations. In addition, a hardware interrupt may be generated for each limit violation. The status of the limit violations can also be evaluated in the user data variant 240 (F0H) or via the user-defined user data variant or the user-defined data record via the measured value ID 65509. Benefits With activated limit monitoring you can already detect any irregularities in the measured value acquisition already in field level. Retentivity All the counter states are stored retentively in the AI Energy Meter HF. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off), the counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Configuring You configure the following limit monitoring settings in STEP 7: Measured variable that is to be monitored. Activate / Deactivate limit monitoring. High or low limit values. Delay time and hysteresis for each limit. Activate / Deactivate hardware interrupts at limit violation. Measured value that is subject to limit monitoring. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 77 Limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring Hardware interrupt at a limit violation The hardware interrupt provides the following information: Measured value ID of the monitored measured or calculated variable Number of the limit (0 = Limit 1. 15 = Limit 16) Information on whether limit was exceeded or fallen below For more detailed information, refer to section Hardware interrupts (Page 110). Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: 1 9.2 Control information Default value Available in Enable/disable monitoring per limit1 Disabled Module version with 20 bytes of output data Reset number of total limit violations 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Effective only with enabled gate Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring Delay time and hysteresis In order to prevent the triggering of limit violations with small fluctuations, you have the following configuration options in STEP 7: Delay time in seconds (0 to 10 s) With the delay time, you filter faults and thereby prevent limit value monitoring from triggering too frequently. The limit violation is counted only when the limit violation is present for longer than the configured delay time. The delay time is also taken into consideration with an outgoing limit violation, directly after a high or low limit has been violated in the permitted range. If the measured variable lies between limit violation and hysteresis after the limit violation has been corrected again, the delay time expires also without leaving the hysteresis. Hysteresis as a percentage (0 to 20%) With the hysteresis, you suppress fluctuations around the limit. The hysteresis is a tolerance range that you define as a percentage deviation of the configured limit. The limit violation is considered to be corrected only when the monitored value leaves the tolerance range. Note You can get information about underflow and overflow from the calculation of minimum (Page 243) and maximum values (Page 237) of selected measured variables. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 78 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring The following figure shows the value-over-time for two measured values using the example of a high and low limit as well as the influence of hysteresis and delay time on the counting of the limit violations. Configured limit. Configured delay time. Is taken into consideration during coming and going. Hysteresis range. Only considered for outgoing. Value-over-time for which the limit is monitored. Edge change. Counter for limit violations is incremented by 1. If parameterized, a hardware interrupt is triggered. Figure 9-1 Signal wave Limit monitoring with hysteresis and delay time Limit monitoring with hysteresis, but without delay time Limit monitoring without hysteresis, but with delay time Limit monitoring without hysteresis and delay time Influence of hysteresis and delay time on the limit See also How limit monitoring works (Page 77) Minimum and maximum values (Page 84) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 79 Limit monitoring 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it can be useful to reset or also enable/disable the counters for limit violations of the AI Energy Meter HF. Resetting here means that the counters for limit violations are reset to 0. Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the counters for limit violations depends on the configured module version. Resetting at module version with 20 bytes of output data 1. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to reset in control bytes 3 and 4; see "Enabling/disabling the counters for limit violations". 2. In control byte 1, set the rest bit (bit 3) with an edge change from 0 to 1; see "Resetting the counters for limit violations". Resetting for module version with 2 bytes of output data Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Resetting acts globally on all the configured counters for limit violation. Figure 9-2 Resetting of the counters for limit violations Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 80 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Activating / Deactivating counters for limit violations Activating/deactivating of the counters for limit violations is only possible for module versions with 20 bytes of output data. Requirements: "Gate for limit value monitoring" was parameterized during configuration of the module using STEP 7 or by writing the data record DS 128. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to activate / deactivate in Control bytes 3 and 4. Figure 9-3 Activating / deactivating of the counters for limit violations Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 81 Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring You can use measured variables from the section Measured variables (Page 163) for limit value monitoring. The value range of the parameter "Limit x" is -3.0E+09 ... +3.0E+09. The table below shows you which measured variables are not available for limit monitoring. Measured value ID Measured variables 220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 225 Total active energy L1L2L3 226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 62110 Active energy inflow L1 62111 Active energy outflow L1 62112 Reactive energy inflow L1 62113 Reactive energy outflow L1 62114 Apparent energy L1 62115 Total active energy L1 62116 Total reactive energy L1 62136 Fundamental cos active factor L1 62210 Active energy inflow L2 62211 Active energy outflow L2 62212 Reactive energy inflow L2 62213 Reactive energy outflow L2 62214 Apparent energy L2 62215 Total active energy L2 62216 Total reactive energy L2 62236 Fundamental cos active factor L2 62310 Active energy inflow L3 62311 Active energy outflow L3 62312 Reactive energy inflow L3 62313 Reactive energy outflow L3 62314 Apparent energy L3 62315 Total active energy L3 62316 Total reactive energy L3 62336 Fundamental cos active factor L3 65496 Power quality analysis qualifier 65497 Current module time 65500 Qualifier L1 65501 Qualifier L2 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 82 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Measured value ID Measured variables 65502 Qualifier L3 65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 65508 Status of energy counter overflows 65509 Status of limit violations 1...16 66001 Voltage L1-N 66002 Voltage L2-N 66003 Voltage L3-N 66004 Voltage L1-L2 66005 Voltage L2-L3 66006 Voltage L3-L1 66007 Current L1 66008 Current L2 66009 Current L3 66010 Apparent power L1 66011 Apparent power L2 66012 Apparent power L3 66013 Active power L1 66014 Active power L2 66015 Active power L3 66016 Reactive power Qn L1 66017 Reactive power Qn L2 66018 Reactive power Qn L3 66019 Power factor L1 66020 Power factor L2 66021 Power factor L3 66030 Frequency 66034 Active power L1L2L3 66035 Reactive power Qn L1L2L3 66036 Apparent power L1L2L3 66037 Power factor L1L2L3 66038 Frequency Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 83 10 Minimum and maximum values 10.1 Minimum and maximum values Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF determines the respective highest and lowest measured or calculated value for a series of measured and calculated values. The values are stored retentively in the module and can be read using measured value data records DS 144 (Page 237), DS 145 (Page 243), DS 154 (Page 239) and DS 155 (Page 245). Benefits Using the stored minimum and maximum values, for example, you can detect further irregularities in addition to limit monitoring. Calculation of minimum and maximum values Minimum and maximum values are only calculated for the phases in accordance with the configured connection type. Existing minimum and maximum values that have not been calculated are assigned initial values. If faults such as under or overcurrent occur during operation, new minimum and maximum values are calculated. The measured and calculated values are initialized as follows during commissioning of the AI Energy Meter HF so that the first calculation of minimum and maximum values supplies a plausible result: Maximum values for measured and calculated values: Minimum values Minimum values for measured and calculated values: Maximum values Minimum and maximum values are determined as "slave pointer procedures" from the start of calculation. Start is effective as of activation of the function or after a reset. The module uses the current actual value as the start value. When you activate the parameter "Enable minimum and maximum value calculation gate", the calculation only starts if the corresponding DQ bit ("gate open") was set (output data Byte 1, Bit 2 = "1"). You can stop the calculation at any time by deactivating the parameter or closing the gate. Calculation starts again after reactivation. The gate for calculation of the minimum and maximum values functions in the same way as the gate for energy meters. Configuring You configure the following settings in STEP 7: Enable calculation of minimum and maximum values Enable minimum and maximum value calculation gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 84 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: Control information Default value Available in Reset saved maximum values 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Reset saved minimum values 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Note Automatic reset If you change the parameters for current or voltage transformers, the minimum and maximum values are reset automatically to their initial values. 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Description At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the minimum and maximum values of the AI Energy Meter HF. Resetting means that the minimum and maximum values are reset to their initial values. Initial values are described, see section Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) version 1 (Page 237), Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) version 1 (Page 243), Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) (Page 239) and Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) (Page 245). Minimum and maximum values are only reset using a Reset via output data (DQ bit). Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the minimum and maximum values depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 20 bytes of output data, you can: Reset the minimum and maximum values for all phases. Reset minimum and maximum values for each individual phase. If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the minimum and maximum values simultaneously. Time stamps are set to initial values (01.01.1970, 0:00) on reset. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 85 Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Procedure for module version with 20 bytes of output data Resetting the minimum and maximum values for all 3 phases. 1. Select the categories of minimum and maximum value that you want to reset in byte 2. - Set bit 0 for voltage and frequency. - Set bit 1 for current and power factor. - Set bit 2 for active power. - Set bit 3 for reactive power. - Set bit 4 for apparent power. Figure 10-1 Selection of minimum and maximum value category 2. In Byte 1, set reset bit 0 for minimum values or reset bit 1 for maximum values. If there is an edge change of the reset bits from 0 to 1, the module resets the selected minimum or maximum values for all 3 phases that you previously selected in Byte 2. Figure 10-2 Reset bit for minimum and maximum values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 86 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Resetting minimum and maximum values for phase-specific measurement You can also reset the minimum and maximum values on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure for "Resetting minimum and maximum values for all 3 phases" as applicable. 1. Select the categories of minimum and maximum value that you want to reset on a phasespecific basis. - In byte 7, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 1. - In byte 9, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 2. - In byte 11, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 3. 2. Set the reset bit (bit 0 and bit 1) for minimum or maximum values. - in byte 6 for phase 1 - in byte 8 for phase 2 - in byte 10 for phase 3 If there is an edge change of the phase-specific reset bits from 0 to 1, the module resets the minimum or maximum values for the given phase. Procedure for module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the minimum and maximum values simultaneously. Set the reset bit (Bit 0 or Bit 1) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Figure 10-3 Resetting the minimum and maximum values at module version with 2 bytes of output data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 87 11 Power quality analysis functions Introduction Power quality analysis functions are used as an aid to evaluate the quality of the supply network. In a three-phase system, many of these functions only make sense or can be executed if a functioning symmetrical three-phase supply system is available, the detection sensors of the three phases are identical in design and the nominal values current or voltage of the phases have the same values. The AI Energy Meter HF provides you with the following power quality analysis functions in accordance with IEC 6100-4-30 for monitoring the power quality in your power network: Measure the neutral current Perform residual current analysis Determine active and power factor Carry out reactive power compensation Analyze fundamental values three-phase (voltage, current, power) Analyze the harmonics up to the 40th harmonic Determine the total harmonic distortion THD+N current/voltage for all three phases Detect voltage dip and voltage swell Detect overcurrent Detect peak value for current and voltage The power quality analysis only returns useful results if some basic requirements are met. These include: Accuracy of the line frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz) is maintained according to IEC 61557-12. Wiring has been carried out correctly. Delete the results of the power quality analysis Delete the results of the power quality analysis by setting the corresponding bits in Byte 12 of the output range (Page 200) for at least 100 ms to "1". Deletion has the following effects: Deletion of the result values and status bits for - Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage and current - Overcurrent of the current half value - Voltage dip and voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value Any pending diagnostics "External fault" is deleted. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 88 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Power quality analysis functions 11.1 Power quality analysis status Harmonic Harmonics are superimposed vibrations deviating from the fundamental frequency of the supply network (50 Hz or 60 Hz) with an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency. Harmonics are generated by equipment with a non-linear current-voltage characteristic such as transformers, gas discharge lamps and power electronics devices. Harmonic component THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) The THD defines the ratio of the power of the harmonics to the power of the fundamental and provides information about the power quality. The value is dimensionless and is stated as a percentage [%]. The AI Energy Meter HF returns THD+N (Noise) and considers the entire current signal (DS 163) or voltage signal (DS 161). Interference in the network is not filtered out. 11.1 Power quality analysis status Information about the power quality status can be found in the measured value "Power quality analysis qualifier" with the measured value ID 65496. The bits 0 to 4 in byte 1 to 3 show in status "1" that information has been available since the last reset, which can be retrieved. The bits 5 to 7 in byte 1 to 3 in status "1" show that the event is currently active. If the event is not active, "0" is displayed. The measured value "Network analysis qualifier" has the following structure: Address Content Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Power quali- Reserved ty analysis qualifier module Reserved Power quality analysis qualifier phase L1 Voltage swell Voltage dip Overcurrent Event currently active Event currently active Event occurred, data available Overcurrent Event currently Power quali- active ty analysis qualifier phase L2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Voltage peak Voltage swell Voltage dip Event occurred, data available Event occurred, data available Event occurred, data available Status of harmonics analysis: 0D: No data, no start 1D ... 62D: running 63D: Completed, data is available Peak value current Event occurred, data available Power quality analysis qualifier phase L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 89 Power quality analysis functions 11.2 Harmonics analysis 11.2 Harmonics analysis The AI Energy Meter HF can determine the effective values for current and voltage up to the 40th harmonic of the fundamental. The harmonics of the voltage are stored in the data record DS 161 (Page 261). The harmonics of the current are stored in the data record DS 163 (Page 265). In addition, you can incorporate the results on IDs with the parameter data records DS 130/DS 131 (Page 157) in the user-defined user data and DS 135 (Page 160) in the user-defined data record DS 151 (Page 258). The calculation of the harmonics takes several cycles. To determine whether calculation is completed, evaluate the Bits 0 to 5 in the power quality analysis data record DS 160 (Page 259) in Byte 218. If the value 63 is in the Bits 0 to 5, the calculation is completed and the measured values are available. Note While the calculation is in progress, you cannot read the data records DS 161 and DS 163. Note While the calculation is in progress, quick measured value acquisition (e.g. for controlling reactive-power compensation) is not possible. Requirement The parameter "Power quality analysis function" is activated. The parameter "Analyse harmonics" for the corresponding phase must be released. Voltage and current are always analyzed simultaneously for the enabled phases. Control via data outputs The harmonics analysis starts by setting the DQ bit 6 "Power quality analysis Start/Stop L1L2L3" in Byte 12 of the output data. The results of a previous analysis of harmonics are deleted in the process. Results of non-selected channels are "0". If channels which have not yet been analyzed are added, the data are not plausible at the start of the analysis. If the DQ bit is reset during an ongoing analysis, the analysis stops. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 90 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Power quality analysis functions 11.3 Reactive power compensation 11.3 Reactive power compensation Use the power factor of the fundamental for the reactive power compensation. When you activate the power quality analysis function, the power factor of the fundamental is available in the measured value data record DS 160 (Page 259) or in the user data. See also User data variants (Page 205) 11.4 Detection of residual current For the residual current analysis (function "Tamper Detect" = Detection of unauthorized interventions), the total current must be determined: Isum L1L2L3 (t) = IL1 (t) + IL2 (t) + IL3 (t) The instantaneous residual current If is obtained by subtracting the results of the current neutral current In from the total current: If = Isum L1L2L3 - In Analysis starts immediately after parameter assignment. The measured value "Total current IL1+IL2+IL3-IN" (ID = 61153) returns the residual current. It is contained in DS 160, for example. You can monitor a threshold relevant for your application for a limit value (see function Limit monitoring (Page 77)). Requirements "3P4W" or "3P4WI" is parameterized as the connection type. The same current transformers are connected to all three phases. The parameter "Reverse current direction" is parameterized identically for all three phases. The neutral current is parameterized with "Measuring". The residual current analysis is activated in the parameter assignment. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 91 Power quality analysis functions 11.5 Active factor and power factor 11.5 Active factor and power factor The AI Energy Meter HF returns the active and power factor individually for each phase and as an aggregate. Active factor The active factor is defined as follows: cos (active factor, signed, fundamental oscillation): cos = P1 / S1 = phase shift angle of fundamental oscillation P1 = active power of fundamental oscillation S1 = apparent power of fundamental oscillation Power factor The power factor = cos is the ratio of active power (P) to the total apparent power (S) over the fundamental oscillation and all harmonics (total): (power factor, unsigned, total): = cos = |P| / S 11.6 Neutral current In The module can measure or calculate the neutral current. For measuring, you have to connect a current transformer to neutral. The behavior "measuring or calculating" can be set for each parameter. The main application of the measured value "Neutral current IN" (ID: 61149) are three-phase networks with existing 4th conductor, neutral: The neutral current usually shows incorrectly flowing currents. In an ideal three-phase network, the neutral current = 0. An additional possible application is measuring any 4th current on this channel. Please note that in this case the measured value "Neutral current" displays this 4th current and not the actual neutral current. Additional values in conjunction with the neutral current is set to 0. The calculation of the neutral current and the comparison of calculated and measured neutral current (used for residual current analysis) is only possible in the operating modes "3P4W" and "3P4WI". The determination of the neutral current is not subject to current suppression. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 92 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Power quality analysis functions 11.7 Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values Parameter assignment options If there a neutral in a connection type, the following parameters are available: Neutral current measurement deactivated Calculate the neutral current measurement Measure the neutral current measurement If there is no neutral in a connection type, the following parameters are available: Do not use current channel Measure current channel Display via channel LED Neutral exists for connection type calculate measuring Error Channel LED Yes Yes Yes No Green Channel disabled --- --- --- Off No No Yes No Green 11.7 Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values You can enable the following functions: Voltage swell (Page 116) Voltage dip (Page 118) Voltage peaks (Page 121) Current peak value (Page 127) Overcurrent value (Page 129) The results are mapped in the phase-specific data records DS 147 (Page 248), DS 148 (Page 251) and DS 149 (Page 254) and in the power quality analysis data record DS 160 (Page 259). In addition, you can incorporate the results using IDs in the measured value data record of the user-defined data record DS 151 (Page 258) and in the user data variants 1/2. You can monitor the results for limits (Page 77) and generate hardware interrupts. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 93 12 Phase-based measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF makes the measured values of individual phases available. Through the user data variants - Phase-specific measurement Phase L1 with user data variants 154 (9AH) and 155 (9BH) - Phase-specific measurement Phase L2 with user data variants 156 (9CH) and 157 (9DH) - Phase-specific measurement Phase L3 with user data variants 158 (9EH) and 159 (9FH) Via measured value data records - Phase-specific measurement for the phases L1, L2 and L3 with data record 142 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L1 with data record 147 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L2 with data record 148 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L3 with data record 149 User data variants Through the user data variants 154 (9AH) to 159 (9FH) you can evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network: Quality information Current and voltage Active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent energy Power factor You can find the structure of the user data variants in appendix User data variants (Page 205). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 94 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Phase-based measured values Measured value data records Through the measured value data records DS 142, DS 147, DS 148 and DS 149 you can evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network: Quality information Current and voltage Minimum current and minimum voltage Maximum current and maximum voltage Active, reactive and apparent power Minimum active, reactive and apparent power Maximum active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent energy Power factor Minimum power factor Maximum power factor Harmonic distortion for voltage and current including minimum/maximum values Voltage dip Voltage swell Peak value for voltage and current Overcurrent value You can find the structure of the measured value data records in appendix Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1 (Page 249). See also Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1 (Page 252) Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1 (Page 255) Minimum and maximum values (Page 84) Overview of all measured value data records (Page 226) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 95 13 Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters of the AI Energy Meter HF You will usually configure the AI Energy Meter HF with STEP 7 (TIA Portal, if necessary with HSP). In this case, STEP 7 (TIA Portal) checks the configured properties for plausibility during configuration. You can also assign parameters to the module using a GSD file and STEP 7 or the configuration software of any provider. In this case, the module checks the validity of the configured properties only after the configuration has been downloaded. Note that some parameters depend on the selected connection type of the AI Energy Meter HF. For example in the connection type 1P2W for measurements in single-phase AC network it does not make sense to enter parameters for Phases 2 and 3. This is not checked by the system if the GSD file is used. The effective range of the parameters that can be set using a GSD file depends on the type of bus system used: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition you can change the parameterized properties via the user program in RUN mode. When you assign parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records (see appendix Configuration via parameter data records (Page 139)). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 96 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.1 Parameters The following table summarizes all the configurable parameters with STEP 7 (GSD file). Table 13- 1 Parameters AI Energy Meter HF (GSD file) Parameters Hardware interrupt Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disabled Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Disable No Disable Yes 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors Yes 230 V Yes 50 Hz Yes Disable Yes Inputs Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Connection type Voltage measuring range Line frequency Energy meter gate enabled * 1P2W - 1 phase, 2 conductors * 3P4W - 3 phase current measurement, 4 conductors * 3P4W1, 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load * 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors * 3x1P2W - 3 x 1 phase, 2 conductors each * 2P3W - 2 phases, 3 conductors * 3P3W, 3 phases, 3 conductors * 3P3W1, 3 phases, 3 conductors, balanced load * 100 V * 110 V * 115 V * 120 V * 127 V * 190 V * 200 V * 208 V * 220 V * 230 V * 240 V * 277 V * 50 Hz * 60 Hz * Disable * Enable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 97 Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters End value energy meter Value range * No end value (infinite counting) * Count periodically to 103 * Count periodically to 106 * Count periodically to 109 * Count periodically to 1012 * Count periodically to 1015 User data variant See the table Overview of the user data variants (Page 205) Minimum and maximum value calculation * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * 0 = Disabled * 1 ... 99999 = measuring * 4294967295 = Calculating * 1 * 5 Minimum and maximum value calculation gate Power quality analysis functions Residual current analysis Neutral: Current transformer primary current [A] Neutral: Current transformer secondary current [A] Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN No end value (infinite counting) Yes Total power L1L2L3 (W#16#FE) Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes 0 Yes 1 Yes Voltage dip limit value in relation * to nominal value voltage [0.1%] 10 ... 1000 100 Yes Voltage swell limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%] * 10 ... 10000 100 Yes Threshold overcurrent in relation * to nominal value current [0.1%] 10 ... 60000 100 Yes Number of cycles for voltage swell and dip analysis * 4 ... 32767 10 Yes Diagnostics power quality * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Diagnostics overflow current Diagnostics overflow voltage Diagnostics underflow voltage Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 98 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters Diagnostics overflow cumulative values Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes 0 ... 99999 1 Yes * 10 ... 60000 100 Yes Tolerance time overcurrent [ms] * 0 ... 60000 40000 Yes Low limit current measurement in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] * 0 ... 200 10 Yes Enable operating hours counter * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Current transformer primary current [A] * 1 ... 99999 A 1A Yes Current transformer secondary current * 1A 1A Yes * 5A Reverse current direction * Disabled Disabled Yes * Reverse current direction Nominal value voltage [V] * 1 ... 999999 230 V Yes Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage [0.1%] * 10 ... 500 100 Yes Voltage transformer primary voltage [V] * 1 ... 999999 V 230 V Yes Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V] * 1 ... 500 V 230 V Yes * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Nominal value current [A] * Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] Detect voltage swell and dip Detect peak value current Detect peak value voltage Detect overcurrent Analyse harmonics Enable gate of operating hours counter Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 99 Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Limits Number of limits * 0 ... 16 0 Yes Limit monitoring * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Measured variable * Measured value ID see Measured value data records (Page 226) None Yes Enable limit monitoring gate * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Limit * depending on the selected measured variable 0.0000 Yes Type * High limit High limit Yes * Low limit * 0 ... 200 [0.1%] 1% Yes None None Yes Hardware interrupt Hysteresis for limit monitoring [0.1%] Delay time for limit monitoring [s] * * 1 ... 10 s Number of measured values * 0 ... 64 0 Yes Measured variable * Measured value ID see Measured variables (Page 163) None Yes * 0 ... 150 0 Yes * 0 ... 125 with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15 with HSP0253 * Measured value ID see Measured variables (Page 163) None Yes User data mapping I/II Data record mapping Number of measured values Measured variable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 100 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Hardware interrupt Enable the hardware interrupt for the entire module here. Inputs Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Activate the diagnostics No supply voltage L+. If there is no voltage or too little voltage at terminal 17, the message "No supply voltage" is output and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered. Connection type Specify the connection type you used for the AI Energy Meter HF. For more detailed information, refer to "Connection examples (Page 23)". Voltage measuring range Here you set the voltage measuring range in which the system connected to the AI Energy Meter HF works. Line frequency Here you set the line frequency in which the system connected to the AI Energy Meter HF works. Enable gate energy meter Enable the gate for the energy meter When the gate is enabled, the energy meter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". End value energy meter Select the end value for the periodic counting of the energy meter. You can also specify that the energy meter is to count without a full-scale value (infinite counting). The calculated energy counter values are stored retentively in the module. User data variant Select user data variant with which the module is to operate once it is started up. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 101 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Minimum and maximum value calculation Enable calculation of the minimum and maximum values. The minimum and maximum value are calculated from the start of the measurement. The values determined are stored retentively in the AI Energy Meter HF together with the time stamp. Minimum and maximum value calculation gate Enable the gate for minimum and maximum value calculation. When the gate is enabled, the energy meter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Power quality analysis function Enable the power quality analysis function for the entire module. Residual current analysis Enable the residual current analysis for the entire module. The residual current analysis is only available in the connection types 3P4W or 3P4WI and the concurrently activated parameter "Neutral current measurement". Neutral current measurement Defines whether the neutral current is measured or calculated. This parameter does not apply to parameter assignment with GSD file. Neutral: Current transformer primary current [A] To determine the current transformer ratio, enter the primary current. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. The following applies to parameter assignment with GSD file: 0 = Neutral function deactivated 1 ... 99999 = measure neutral current 4294967295 = calculate neutral current Neutral: Current transformer secondary current [A] To determine the current transformer ratio, enter the secondary current. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Voltage dip limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%] Further information can be found under Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value (Page 118). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 102 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Voltage swell limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%] Further information can be found under Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value (Page 116). Threshold overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] Further information can be found under Overcurrent of the current half value (Page 129). Number of cycles for voltage swell and dip analysis Further information can be found under Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value (Page 116) and Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value (Page 118). Diagnostics power quality Depending on the enable of the individual functions the diagnostics are triggered when a voltage swell, voltage dip or overcurrent event has occurred. Diagnostics overflow current The measured current is monitored after expiry of the "Tolerance time" for "Overcurrent [0.1 A] tolerance value". Exceeding the value generates the diagnostics "overflow current". Diagnostics overflow voltage The nominal values voltage are monitored for tolerance. An overflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics underflow voltage The nominal values voltage are monitored for tolerance. An underflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics overflow cumulative values A cumulative overflow in the calculated variables is displayed. The values stop at the high or low limit. A violation triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Detect voltage swell and dip Activates the detection of voltage swell and dip. Further information can be found under Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow (Page 114). Detect peak value current Activates the detection of current peak values. Further information can be found under Peak values of the instantaneous values for current (Page 127). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 103 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Detect peak value voltage Activates the detection of voltage peak values. Further information can be found under Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage (Page 121). Detect overcurrent Activates the detection of overcurrent. Further information can be found under Overcurrent of the current half value (Page 129). Analyse harmonics Activates harmonics analysis Nominal value current [A] Enter the nominal value for the current. This is the "operating point" in your application. Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] Further information can be found under Diagnostics: Overload (Page 123). Tolerance time overcurrent [ms] Further information can be found under Diagnostics: Overload (Page 123). Low limit current measurement in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] The configurable low limit for measuring current refers to the nominal value and is used to avoid incorrect calculations in the case of very low currents. Incorrect measurements of very low currents in particular are a cause of inaccuracies in the current transformer used. Set the low limit for the current measurement to the required value depending on your process. Note Tip: If you want to find the low limit for the current measurement experimentally, set it to a lower value. Then, feed in a very precise low current and determine the measurement error that can no longer be tolerated. Afterwards, set the low limit for the current measurement to the limit value you have determined. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 104 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Neutral current Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy as well as the operating hours counters do not count any longer. Further information can be found under Low limit for measuring current undershot (Page 125). Enable operating hours counter Enable the operating hours counter. The counting starts from the configurable low limit of the current measurement. The counter can be reset or pre-assigned using data record or output bit. Enable gate of operating hours counter Enable the gate for the operating hours counter. When the gate is activated, the operating hours counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Current transformer primary current Enter the nominal value for the primary current of the current transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Current transformer secondary current Enter the nominal value for the secondary current (1 A or 5 A) of the current transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current. Reverse current direction Setting to determine whether or not to reverse the direction of current. In the event of inadvertent incorrect connection, this parameter can be used to correct the measured values, thus saving the hassle of rewiring. The direction of the current is only evident from the power measurement values. The current measurement value is an rms value. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 105 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Nominal value voltage [V] Enter the nominal value for the voltage. This is the "operating point" in your application. Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage [0.1%] Enter the tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage here in increments of 0.1%. You can find additional information under Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow (Page 114). Voltage transformer primary voltage [V] Enter the nominal value for the primary voltage of the voltage transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage. Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V] Enter the nominal value for the secondary voltage of the voltage transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage. Limits Number of limits Enter the number of measured values that you want to monitor for limits. Limit monitoring Enable the monitoring of the limit for a freely definable measured value here. Limit violations are counted and the count values stored retentively. Measured variable Enter the measured value ID (Page 163) that you want to use for limit monitoring. Enable limit monitoring gate Enable the limit monitoring gate. When the gate is enabled, the limit monitoring is only started when the corresponding bit of the associated output user data is set to "1". Hardware interrupt Enable the hardware interrupt. The hardware interrupt is triggered if a high or low limit is violated. Without activation of a hardware interrupt, a limit violation is only displayed in the user data and in DS 150. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 106 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Limit Enter the limit that is to trigger a limit violation when exceeded or fallen below. Limit violations are displayed in the user data and in DS 150. Type Select whether it is a high or low limit. Depending on this selection, the limit violation or hardware interrupt is triggered when a value exceeds (high limit) or falls below (low limit) the limit. Hysteresis for limit monitoring [0.1%] Enter the hysteresis for limit in percent. The hysteresis band is below the high limit or above the low limit. The parameter in % refers to the configured limit. If a measured value fluctuates around the limit but does not leave the hysteresis band, a new limit violation is not triggered. Delay time for limit monitoring [s] Select the delay time for limit violation. The delay refers to the time that must elapse before an occurrence of a limit violation is reported. Faults can be filtered out by selection of the delay time. The deceleration time is also taken into consideration during outgoing of the limit violation. User data mapping I/II Number of measured values Specify the number of measured values/variables that you want to use for the user-specific user data mapping. Measured variable Select the measured variable (with the measured value ID (Page 163)) that you want to use for the user-specific user data mapping. Data record mapping Number of measured values Specify the number of measured values/variables that you want to use for the user-specific data record mapping. Measured variable Select the measured variable (with the measured value ID (Page 163)) that you want to use for the user-specific data record mapping. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 107 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.1 14 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Error (red) PWR (green) Status (green) Figure 14-1 LED display Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 108 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following table explains the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 111). DIAG LED Table 14- 1 DIAG Meaning of the DIAG LED Meaning Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Status LED Table 14- 2 Status Meaning of the Status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated and no error On Channel enabled and error On see also Neutral current In (Page 92) Error LED Table 14- 3 Status Meaning of the Error LED Meaning Channel is OK Off Channel is faulty On Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 109 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.2 Interrupts PWR LED Table 14- 4 PWR Meaning of the PWR LED Meaning Line voltage missing Off Line voltage available On 14.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI Energy Meter HF supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts. 14.2.1 Hardware interrupts Hardware interrupts The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 to 16 Violation of high limit 1 to 16 You can find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment of the local data double word 8 by the start information of the hardware interrupt organization block. Figure 14-2 Start information of the organization block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 110 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.3 Diagnostic alarms 14.2.2 Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Power quality Channel is temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupt lost Error Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Underflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) violated Overflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) exceeded Overload (current measurement > 12 A or tolerance overcurrent exceeded after expiry of the tolerance time) Overflow of the calculated values (measured or calculated values screen exceed the representable range of values) 14.3 Diagnostic alarms Note Assignment channel in diagnostic message Phase In the diagnostic messages the channels are counted from Channel "0" on, in the AI Energy Meter HF from phase "1" on. Note the following assignment: * Channel "0" Phase "1" * Channel "1" Phase "2" * Channel "2" Phase "3" Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 111 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.3 Diagnostic alarms Table 14- 5 Error types Diagnostic message Error code Meaning Solution Undervoltage 2H 3H Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. Violation leads to voltage overflow/underflow Observe the line voltage range Overvoltage Overload 4H * The measured current is monitored after the "Tolerance time" for "Tolerance value overcurrent [0.1A]" has expired. Exceeding this results in overflow current. * The maximum value of the secondary current (12 A) has been exceeded. Error 9H Internal module error (diagnostic alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Observe the current range Replace the module Correct the parameter assignment Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient line voltage at terminal 17 Check supply External fault 1AH Voltage swell/dip and overcurrent see: Channel is temporarily unavailable 1FH * Voltage swell of the voltage halfwave value (Page 116) * Voltage dip of the voltage halfwave value (Page 118) * Overcurrent of the current half value (Page 129) Firmware upgrade is being performed. -Channel 0 applies to the entire module. The module is currently not performing any measurements. A user calibration is being executed at the channel. Complete the user calibration Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 112 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4 Diagnostics response Diagnostics response This section describes the response of the AI Energy Meters HF when diagnostics information is reported. Measured values in the case of diagnostics Even in the case of diagnostics, measured values continue to be displayed as long as they can still be acquired. If measured values cannot be measured or calculated, "0" is displayed. Low limit for current measurement undershot (zero suppression) If the supplied current is less than the configured "Low limit for current measurement" parameter, the current measurement and all dependent variables are suppressed and set to "0". If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy as well as the operating hours counters do not count any longer. If the secondary current fed in at the channel is higher than 12 A, the module changes to limitation and the current measurement value of the current and all dependent variables are set to "0". Input data to "0" If the AI Energy Meter HF is no longer recognized by the interface module (for example, because it is defective or not plugged in), all input data are set to "0". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 113 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4.1 Voltage diagnostics 14.4.1.1 Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow Introduction You use the parameter "Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage" to define a tolerance range around the set nominal value voltage at the operating point. If the effective value of the primary voltage exceeds this tolerance range, the module reports the diagnostics "overflow" or "underflow". Calculation of tolerance value measuring voltage The tolerance value measuring voltage is calculated with the following formula: Tolerance value measuring voltage = "Nominal value voltage" ("Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage [%]" x "Nominal value voltage") The "Nominal value voltage" is the primary voltage at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 6 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics overflow Enable Diagnostics underflow Enable Nominal value voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage transformer primary voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage transformer secondary voltage 1 ... 500 V Tolerance factor overflow/underflow 10 ... 50% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 114 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Upper tolerance value measuring voltage Nominal voltage Lower tolerance value measuring voltage Diagnostics "overflow" Diagnostics "underflow" Figure 14-3 "Overflow/Underflow" diagnostics of the effective voltage value The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 7 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics overflow Enable Diagnostics underflow Enable Nominal value voltage 230 V Voltage transformer primary voltage 1000 V Voltage transformer secondary voltage 500 V Tolerance factor overflow/underflow 20% In this example you define a tolerance range of 20%. The tolerance range corresponds to an effective value of primary voltage of 46 V. In the figure the effective value of the primary voltage first exceeds the tolerance range. As long as the effective value of the primary voltage exceeds the tolerance range the module reports the diagnostics "overflow". The effective value of the primary voltage then exceeds the tolerance range. As long as the effective value of the primary voltage exceeds the tolerance range the module reports the diagnostics "underflow". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 115 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4.1.2 Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value Introduction Voltage swells are short-term increases in the line voltage which can occur, for example, when switching off large consumers. With the parameter "Number of cycles for analysis" you define how many measuring cycles the voltage swell must apply at until the module reports the voltage swell. The module reports the diagnostics "Power quality". The module also sets the qualifier bit 6 for the respective phase in data record DS 160 (Page 259). If the voltage lies below the limit for voltage swell again, the module sets the diagnostics "Power quality" again and resets the qualifier bit 6 again. The AI Energy Meter HF returns the maximum value and the duration of the voltage swell, e.g. in data record 160. The duration is determined exactly to 2 cycles. In the event of voltage swell again, only the diagnostics "Power quality" is reported again and the duration, and if applicable, the maximum voltage swell value is updated. Calculation of voltage swell limit value The Voltage swell limit value is the value from which level of voltage the AI Energy Meter HF recognizes a voltage swell. The "Voltage swell limit value" is calculated by the following formula: Voltage swell limit = "Nominal value voltage" + ("Voltage swell limit [%]" x "Nominal value voltage") The "Nominal value voltage" is the primary voltage at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 8 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 ... 32767 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal value voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage swell limit 1 ... 1000% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 116 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Voltage swell limit Nominal voltage Diagnostics "power quality" Qualifier Bit 6 Status "Power quality voltage swell" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Min. voltage swell (half-wave) and duration can be read Figure 14-4 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 117 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 9 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal value voltage 230 V Voltage swell limit 40% If the module detects that the "Voltage swell limit value" has been exceeded: The module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage swell. The module sets the qualifier bit 6 from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage swell. After the module has reset the diagnostics "Power quality" and reset the qualifier bit again, Bit 1 is set. As long as Bit 1 is set, the module returns the maximum value and the duration of the voltage swell, e.g. in data record 160. You reset Bit 1 with the bit "reset status "power quality"". 14.4.1.3 Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value Introduction Voltage dips are short-term decreases in the line voltage which can occur, for example, when switching on large consumers. With the parameter "Number of cycles for analysis" you define how many measuring cycles the voltage dip must be present until the module reports the voltage dip. If the voltage lies above the "Voltage dip limit" again, the module sets the diagnostics "Power quality" and resets the qualifier bit 5 again. The AI Energy Meter HF returns the maximum value and the duration of the voltage dip, e.g. in data record DS 160 (Page 259). The duration is determined exactly to 2 cycles. In the event of voltage dip, the module reports a "Power quality" diagnostic. The module also sets the qualifier bit 5 for the respective phase in data record DS 160. In the event of voltage dip again, only the "Power quality" diagnostics is reported again and the duration, and if applicable, the minimum voltage dip value is updated. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 118 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Calculation of voltage dip limit The voltage dip limit is the value from which level of voltage the AI Energy Meter HF detects a voltage dip. The voltage dip limit is calculated by the following formula: Voltage dip limit = "Nominal value voltage" - ("Voltage dip limit [%]" x "Nominal value voltage") The "Nominal value voltage" is the primary voltage at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 10 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 ... 32767 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal value voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage dip limit 1 ... 100% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 119 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Nominal voltage Voltage dip limit Diagnostics "power quality" Qualifier Bit 0 Status "Power quality voltage dip" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Min. voltage dip (half-wave) and duration can be read Figure 14-5 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 120 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 11 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal voltage 230 V Voltage dip limit 50% If the module detects that the "Voltage dip limit" has been undershot: The module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage dip. The module sets the qualifier bit 5 from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage dip. After the module has reset the diagnostics "Power quality" and reset the qualifier bit again, bit 0 is set. As long as bit 0 is set, the module returns the minimum value and the duration of the voltage dip, e.g. in data record 160. You reset Bit 0 with the bit "Reset status "power quality"". 14.4.1.4 Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF determines the maximum instantaneous value for the voltage for up to three phases. The function "Detect peak value voltage" returns the largest voltage value and the associated phase. The module sets the qualifier bit 2 ("Power quality voltage peak") for the phase in question. You can read the maximum voltage value, for example, in the data record DS 160 (Page 259). Voltage peak detection is based on the function for recording swells of the supply voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30. This function is used to record the maximum voltage value in the supply network. In three-phase systems this function is only useful if the system is symmetrical and when all phases show the same voltage transformers. Accordingly, measurement always records only the peak value over all phases. In addition to the requirements of IEC 61000-4-30, the phase on which the peak value voltage occurred is detected. For metrological reasons, only the phase concerned that shows this maximum value can be returned. This may mean that the maximum voltage values of the other phases remain "0". With a "reset power quality analysis" the analysis starts afresh and the current results are discarded. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 121 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 12 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis function (module) Enable Determine peak value voltage (channel) Enable Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Voltage peak in L1 Status "Power quality voltage peak" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Max. voltage peaks instantaneous value can be read out Figure 14-6 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 122 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 13 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Determination of voltage peak value L1 Enable Determination of voltage peak value L2 Enable Determination of voltage peak value L3 Enable The module detects the voltage peak in phase 1 and sets the qualifier bit 2 for phase 1. You can find the maximum voltage value, for example, in the data record DS 160 in bytes 174 to 177 ("Voltage peak value L1"). 14.4.2 Current diagnostics 14.4.2.1 Diagnostics: Overload Introduction As long as one of the following conditions is met, the module reports the diagnostics "Overload" for each phase: If the tolerance value measured current parameterized for each phase is exceeded for the tolerance time overcurrent parameterized for each phase. If the maximum measured current of the AI Energy Meters HF is exceeded: - Secondary measured current: 12 A Calculation of tolerance value measured current The tolerance value measured current is calculated with the following formula: Tolerance value measured current = "Nominal value current" + ("Tolerance factor overcurrent [%]" x "Nominal value current") The "Nominal value current" is the primary current at the operating point. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 123 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 14 Parameter assignment Parameter Diagnostics overload Enable Nominal value current 0 ... 99999 A Current transformer primary current 1 ... 99999 A Current transformer secondary current 5A Tolerance factor overcurrent 1 ... 6000% Tolerance time overcurrent 0 ... 60000 ms Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Maximum measured current 12 A secondary current (CT) or 424 mV secondary voltage (RC) Tolerance value measured current Nominal value current Tolerance time Diagnostics "overload" Figure 14-7 Diagnostics "overload" of the effective current value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 124 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 15 Parameter assignment Parameter Diagnostics overload Enable Nominal value current 2000 A Current transformer primary current 5000 A Current transformer secondary current 5A Tolerance factor overcurrent 20% Tolerance time overcurrent 40000 ms If the maximum measured current for the module (12000 A primary current) is exceeded, the module reports the diagnostics "Overload" as long as the maximum measured current is exceeded. After the "Tolerance time overcurrent" of 40000 ms has expired, the module reports the diagnostics "Overload" as long as the configured "Tolerance value measured current" is exceeded. 14.4.2.2 Low limit for measuring current undershot Introduction With the function "Low limit for measuring current undershot" the AI Energy Meter HF monitors the low limit of the effective value of the current per phase. If the low limit for measuring current is undershot, the module sets the current value to 0. Information as to which current measured values are set to 0 can be found under Basics for reading measured values (Page 41). You activate the function by setting the parameter "Low limit for measuring current" > 0%. Calculation of low limit for measuring current The low limit for measuring current is calculated with the following formula: Low limit measured current = "Nominal value current" x "Low limit for measuring current [%]" The "Nominal value current" is the primary current at the operating point. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 125 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 16 Parameter assignment Parameter Nominal value current 0 ... 99999 A Current transformer primary current 1 ... 99999 A Current transformer secondary current 1 ... 16000 A Low limit for current measurement 0 ... 20% * * 0% means deactivation of the function Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Nominal current Low limit measured current Measured value Returned value Figure 14-8 Behavior in the event of value falling below "Low limit for measuring current undershot" Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 126 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 17 Parameter assignment Parameter Nominal value current 2000 A Current transformer primary current 5000 A Current transformer secondary current 5A Low limit for current measurement 10% In this example you define the "Low limit for measuring current" with 10%. This corresponds to an effective value of the primary voltage of 200 A. If the value falls below the calculated low limit for current measurement, the module sets all current-dependent measured values (effective value current, active power, reactive power, apparent power, phase angle and power factor) to 0 A until the low limit for measuring current is exceeded again. The energy meters and operating hours counters are stopped during this time. 14.4.2.3 Peak values of the instantaneous values for current Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF determines the maximum instantaneous value for the current for up to three phases. The function "Detect peak value current" returns the largest current value and the associated phase. The module sets the qualifier bit 3 ("Power quality current peak") for the phase in question. You can read the maximum current value, for example, in the data record DS 160 (Page 259). Current peak detection is based on the function for recording swells of the supply voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30. This function is used to record the maximum current value in the supply network. In three-phase systems this function is only useful if current recording is symmetrical and if all phases show the same current transformers. Accordingly, measurement always records only the peak value over all phases. In addition to the requirements of IEC 61000-4-30, the phase on which the peak value current occurred is detected. For metrological reasons, only the phase concerned that shows this maximum value can be returned. This may mean that the maximum current values of the other phases remain "0". With a "reset power quality analysis" the analysis starts afresh and the current results are discarded. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 127 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 18 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis function (module) Enable Determine peak value current (Channel) Enable Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Current peak in L1 Status "Power quality current peak" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Max. current peaks instantaneous value can be read out Figure 14-9 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 128 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 19 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis function Enable Determine peak value current (L1) Enable Determine peak value current (L2) Enable Determine peak value current (L3) Enable The module detects the peak value current in phase 1 and sets the qualifier bit 3 for phase 1. You can find the maximum current value, for example, in the data record DS 160 in bytes 186 to 189 ("Current peak value L1"). 14.4.2.4 Overcurrent of the current half value Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF returns the maximum overcurrent value of the current half-wave value. If the value to be monitored is exceeded, the module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" and the qualifier bit 7 is set. The module also sets Bit 4 for the respective phase in data record DS 160 (Page 259). In the event that the current half-value is exceeded again, only the diagnostics "Power quality" is reported again and, if applicable, the maximum current swell value is updated. Calculation of overcurrent limit The overcurrent limit is calculated based on the following formula: Overcurrent limit = "Nominal value current" + ("Threshold overcurrent [%]" x "Nominal value current") The "Nominal value current" is the primary current at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 20 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics power quality Enable Determining the overcurrent Enable Nominal value current 0 ... 99999 A Threshold overcurrent 1 ... 6000% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 129 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Threshold overcurrent Nominal current Qualifier Bit 7 Diagnostics power quality Status "power quality overcurrent" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Max. overcurrent (half-wave) value can be read Figure 14-10 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 130 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 21 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics power quality Enable Determining the overcurrent Enable Nominal value current 2000 A Threshold overcurrent 100% In this example you define the Threshold overcurrent of 100%. This corresponds to a primary current of 4000 A. If the "Threshold overcurrent" is exceeded, the module sets Bit 4 "Overcurrent" for the phase in the data record DS 160. As long as the "Threshold overcurrent" is exceeded, the module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" and the qualifier bit 7 is set. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 131 15 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI Energy Meter HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 07/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 General information Product type designation AI Energy Meter 480 VAC/CT HF, PU 1 Firmware version V6.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type U0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC20 Supported power supply systems TT, TN, IT Product function * * Voltage measurement Yes - without voltage transformer Yes - with voltage transformer Yes Current measurement Yes - without current transformer No - with current transformer Yes; 1 A or 5 A current transformer - with Rogowski coil No - with current/voltage transformer No * Energy measurement Yes * Frequency measurement Yes * Power measurement Yes * Active power measurement Yes * Reactive power measurement Yes * Power factor measurement Yes * Active factor measurement Yes * Reactive power compensation Yes * Line analysis Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 132 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 - Monitoring of instantaneous and halfwave values Yes - THD measurement for current and voltage Yes - Harmonics for current and voltage Yes - Voltage dip (DIP) Yes - Voltage swell Yes * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Isochronous mode No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V15 or higher * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Configurable via GSD file * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 Operating mode * Switching between operating modes in RUN Yes; For module version 32 I/20 Q, it is possible to dynamically switch between 25 user data variants, 23 of which are pre-defined and 2 of which can be defined by the specific user * Cyclic measured value access Yes * Acyclic measured value access Yes * Fixed measured value sets Yes * Freely definable measured value sets Yes CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN Yes Installation type/mounting Mounting position Any Supply voltage Design of the power supply DC Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Input current Current consumption (rated value) 12.5 mA Current consumption, max. 17 mA Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 133 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.4 W; 4x 5 A input current, 3x 230 V AC Address area Address space per module * Inputs 256 byte * Outputs 20 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 2-wire connection BU type U0 Time of day Operating hours counter * present Yes Analog inputs Cycle time (all channels), typ. 50 ms; Time for consistent update of all measured and calculated values (cyclic und acyclic data) Cable length * shielded, max. 200 m * unshielded, max. 200 m Analog value generation for the inputs Sampling frequency, max. 2 048 kHz Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes * Hardware interrupt Yes; Monitoring of up to 16 freely selectable process values (exceeding or undershooting of value) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 134 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 Diagnostic messages * Line quality Yes * Supply voltage Yes * Hardware interrupt lost Yes * Parameter assignment error Yes * Module fault Yes * Channel not available Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes * Overload current Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Integrated Functions Measuring functions * Measuring procedure for voltage measurement TRMS * Measuring procedure for current measurement TRMS * Type of measured value acquisition seamless * Curve shape of voltage Sinusoidal or distorted * Buffering of measured variables Yes * Parameter length 128 byte * Bandwidth of measured value acquisition 3.2 kHz; Harmonics: 63 / 50 Hz, 52 / 60 Hz Measuring range - Frequency measurement, min. 45 Hz - Frequency measurement, max. 65 Hz Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 135 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 Measuring inputs for voltage - Measurable line voltage between phase 300 V and neutral conductor - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors - Measurable line voltage between phase 3 V and neutral conductor, min. - Measurable line voltage between phase 300 V and neutral conductor, max. - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, min. 6V - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, max. 519 V - Measurement category for voltage measurement in accordance with IEC 61010-2-030 CAT II - Internal resistance line conductor and neutral conductor 1.5 M - Power consumption per phase 60 mW; 300 V AC - Impulse voltage resistance 1,2/50s 2.5 kV 519 V Measuring inputs for current - measurable relative current (AC), min. 1 %; Relative to the secondary rated current 5 A - measurable relative current (AC), max. 100 %; Relative to the secondary rated current 5 A - Continuous current with AC, maximum permissible 5 A; 6 A permanent thermal overload - Apparent power consumption per phase for measuring range 5 A 0.6 V*A - Rated value short-time withstand current restricted to 1 s 100 A - Input resistance measuring range 0 to 5 25 m; At the terminal A - Zero point suppression 0 ... 20%, referred to the nominal current - Surge strength 10 A; for 1 minute Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 136 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 Accuracy class according to IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable voltage 0,2 - Measured variable current 0,2 - Measured variable apparent power 0.5 - Measured variable active power 0.5 - Measured variable reactive power 1 - Measured variable power factor 0.5 - Measured variable active energy 0.5 - Measured variable reactive energy 1 - Measured variable neutral current 0,2 - Measured variable phase angle 0.5 ; not covered by IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable frequency 0.05 - Measured variable harmonic 1 - Measured variable THDU 1 - Measured variable THDI 1 Accuracy class line analysis acc. to IEC 61000-430 - Measured variable voltage Class S - Measured variable current Class S - Measured variable frequency Class S - Measured variable voltage interruption Class S - Measured variable voltage dip and swell Class S - Measured variable harmonic voltage Class S - Measured variable harmonic current Class S Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes; Including FE Isolation Isolation tested with Between channels and backplane bus, 24 V supply: Routine test, 1 920 V AC, 2 s; between backplane bus and 24 V supply: Type test, 707 V DC Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 137 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Installation altitude above sea level, max. 3 000 m; Restrictions for installation altitudes > 2 000 m, see manual Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight (without packaging) 45 g Other Data for selecting a voltage transformer * Secondary side, max. 300 V Data for selecting a current transformer * Burden power current transformer x/1A, min. As a function of cable length and cross section, see device manual * Burden power current transformer x/5A, min. As a function of cable length and cross section, see device manual ATEX approval In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 138 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.1 A Configuration via parameter data records The parameter data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Overview of the parameter data records Parameter data record DS 128 for the complete module Parameter data record DS 129 for limit monitoring Parameter data records DS 130/131 for user data mapping Parameter data record DS 135 for data record mapping Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN mode, for example change the diagnostics behavior, define new limits or configure a modified user data mapping. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module via the respective data record. The parameters set in STEP 7 do not change in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are still valid after a restart. If you reconfigure a module (so that the user data size changes) and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". The diagnostics "Supply voltage missing" is signaled as outgoing. STATUS output parameter If errors occur during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 139 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Parameter data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 140 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information for a module. Figure A-3 Module header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 141 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 142 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-4 Module parameter block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 143 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-5 Module parameter block You can find the user data variant in the section Overview of the user data variants (Page 205). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 144 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Channel header information The following figure shows the structure of the header information for a channel. Figure A-6 Channel header information Channel parameter block for channel 0 (Phase 1) The following figure shows an example of the structure of the channel parameter block for channel 0 (phase 1, bytes 32 to 63). For channel 1 (phase 2; bytes 64 to 95) and channel 2 (phase: 3; bytes 96 to 127), the structure is identical. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 145 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 146 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-7 Channel parameter block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 147 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 148 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-8 Channel parameter block Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check bytes 1 to 3, 32, 33, 52, 53, 72 and 73. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 149 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check bytes 8, 14, 15, 30, 31, 34, 42, 50...53, 54, 62, 70...73, 74, 82, 90...93 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 05 "Voltage measuring range" invalid Check Byte 5. Permitted values: 01H to 0CH DF 80 E1 20 "Connection type" invalid Check Byte 4. Permitted values: 00H, 0BH ... 01H DF 80 E1 21 "User data variant" not possible or input data configuration not large enough Check Byte 9. Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 22 "User data variant" invalid Check Byte 9. Select a valid code for the user data variant. DF 80 E1 23 "Line frequency" invalid Check Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 29 "Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 35, 55 and 75. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2A "Tolerance time overcurrent" invalid Check bytes 36...37, 56...57, 67...77. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2B "Low limit current measurement" in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] invalid Check bytes 43, 63 and 83. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2C "Current transformer primary current [A]" invalid. Check bytes 38...41, 58...61, 78...81. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2D "Voltage transformer primary voltage [V]" invalid Check bytes 46...49, 66...69, 66...69, 88...89. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2E "Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V]" Check bytes 38...42 with bytes 58...62 invalid and bytes 78...82 and bytes 44...49 with bytes 64...69 and bytes 84...89 for identical values. DF 80 E1 2F "End value energy meter" invalid Check Bit 4...6 in Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 3E Only for connection type 3P4W1 and 3P3W1. Check bytes 38...42 with bytes 58...62 and bytes 78...82 as well as bytes 44...49 with bytes 64...69 and bytes 84...80 for identical values. Current or voltage transformer parameters for the different phases are not identical. Enter identical values for current transformer (secondary current, primary current, direction of current) and voltage transformer (secondary voltage, primary voltage) at all three phases. DF 80 E1 3F "End value for energy meter" or transmission ratio (primary value, secondary value) of current and voltage too low. Increase the end value of the energy meter or the ratio of primary to secondary current for current transformer and/or primary to secondary voltage for voltage transformer. DF 80 E1 43 "Current transformer secondary current" for neutral or all three phases invalid Check bits 4...5 in bytes 14, 42, 62, 82. Enter valid values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 150 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 44 "Voltage dip limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 16...17. Enter valid values (voltage dip limit value must be smaller than the respective nominal voltage) DF 80 E1 45 "Voltage swell limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 20...23. Enter valid values (voltage swell limit value must be greater than the respective nominal voltage) DF 80 E1 46 "Threshold overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 24...27. Enter valid values (threshold overcurrent must be greater than primary current) DF 80 E1 47 "Number of cycles for analysis of voltage swell/dip" invalid Check bytes 28...29. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 49 Current transformer parameter for "residual current analysis" invalid Only with connection type 3P4W and 3P4WI and if neutral current is measured. Current transformer primary current and secondary current and direction of current of the three phases must have identical parameters. DF 80 E1 4A Voltage transformer parameters for voltage swell/dip invalid Check the parameters secondary voltage, primary voltage, nominal value voltage. Enabled channels must have identical parameters. DF 80 E1 4B Current transformer parameter for "Detect overcurrent" invalid Check the parameters secondary current, primary current, nominal value current and direction of current. Enabled channels must have identical parameters. DF 80 E1 4C Parameters for determining the neutral current invalid Neutral current can only be determined with connection type 3P4W and 3P4WI Current transmission parameters primary current, secondary current, nominal value current and direction of current of the three phases must be identical. DF 80 E1 4D "Nominal value current [A]" invalid Check bytes 34...37, 66...69, 98...101. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 4E "Nominal value voltage [V]" invalid Check bytes 50...53, 82...85, 114...117. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 4F "Low limit current measurement in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 42...43, 74...75, 106...107. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 50 The combination of "Nominal value voltage [V]" and "Voltage dip limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid. Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring voltage of 0 V is not undershot. DF 80 E1 51 The combination of "Nominal value voltage Select the permissible value in % so that [V]" and "Voltage swell limit value in relation the secondary measuring voltage of 300 to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid. V is not exceeded. DF 80 E1 52 The combination of "Nominal value current [A]" and "Threshold overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring current of 6 A is not exceeded. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 151 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 53 The combination of "Nominal value current [A]" and "Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring current of 6 A is not exceeded. DF 80 E1 54 The combination of "Nominal value voltage [V]" and "Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" lies outside the permissible range. Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring voltage of 300 V is not exceeded. DF 80 E1 55 "Nominal value current [A]" is too high. "Nominal value current" x transmission factor current generates a secondary current measured variable which exceeds its value range. Select the permissible value in A so that the secondary measuring current of 6 A is not exceeded. The transmission factor current is calculated from "Current transformer primary current [A]" / "Current transformer secondary current [A]" DF 80 E1 56 "Nominal value voltage [V]" is too high. "Nominal value voltage" x transmission factor voltage generates a secondary voltage measured variable which exceeds its value range. Select the permissible value in V so that the secondary measuring voltage of 300 V is not exceeded. The transmission factor voltage is calculated from "Voltage transformer primary voltage [V]" / "Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V]" Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 152 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Structure of data record 129 Figure A-9 Structure of data record 129 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-10 Header information DS 129 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 153 Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Limit parameter block The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for limit monitoring. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 154 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Figure A-11 Limit parameter data block Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 155 Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 129. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check bytes 3, 13, 23, 33...163 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 31 "Length of the parameter block" invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 "Number of parameter blocks" invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 "ID of the measured value for limit moni- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid values. toring" invalid. DF 80 E1 34 Parameters for monitoring the limits invalid DF 80 E1 35 "Number of limit" in 'Monitoring assigned Check bits 0...3 in Byte 6. Do not use multiple times' parameter limit number several times. DF 80 E1 36 "Hysteresis for limit monitoring" invalid Check Byte 7. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 37 "Limit" invalid. Check Byte 8...11. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 38 "Delay time for limit monitoring" invalid. Check Byte 12. Enter valid values. Check bits 0...3 in Byte 6. Enter valid values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 156 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping Structure of data record 130/131 Figure A-12 Structure of data record 130/131 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-13 Header information DS 130/131 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 157 Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping Parameter block for user data mapping The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for user data mapping. Figure A-14 Parameter block for user data mapping Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 158 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 130/131. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 3 and set reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 21 "User data variant" not possible or input data configuration not large enough Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 30 Data record number invalid Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 31 "Length of the parameter block" invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 "Number of parameter blocks" invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 "ID of the measured value for limit monitor- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid ing" invalid. values. DF 80 E1 3B "ID of the type of user data mapping" not permitted. Check Byte 1. Number for userspecific user data variant has to be 01H or 02H. Measured variables for user data mapping You can find the measured variables under Measured variables (Page 163). The following measured variables are not available to you for user data mapping: 220 to 226 62110 to 62116 62210 to 62216 62310 to 62316 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 159 Parameter data records A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping Structure of data record 135 Figure A-15 Structure of data record 135 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-16 Header information DS 135 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 160 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping Parameter block for data record mapping The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for data record mapping. Figure A-17 Parameter block for data record mapping Data record length DS 135 and DS151 The table below shows the data record lengths of the parameter data record DS 135 and the user-defined data record DS 151 (Page 258). The length of the data records depends on the number and the format of the measured values. Data record length in bytes Number REAL measured values Measured values DS 135 LREAL measured values DS 151 DS 151 29 62 118 234 30 64 122 242 * 40 84 162 322 * 50 104 202 402 * 59 122 238 474 * 100 204 402 * 802 * 118 240 474 * 946 * 150 304* 602 * 1202 * * not with PROFIBUS DP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 161 Parameter data records A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 130/131/135. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 3 and set reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 21 "User data variant" not possible or input data configuration not large enough Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 30 Data record number invalid Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 31 "Length of the parameter block" invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 "Number of parameter blocks" invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 "ID of the measured value for limit monitor- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid ing" invalid. values. Measured variables for data record mapping You can find the measured variables under Measured variables (Page 163). The following measured variables are not available to you for data record mapping: 220 to 226 62110 to 62116 62210 to 62216 62310 to 62316 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 162 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA B Measured variables Measured variables for data records and user data The following table provides an overview of all measured variables that are used in the data records and user data. Note that the format and unit differ in the evaluation of records and user data. On the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755917) you can find an overview of the assignment of the measured values to the user data variants and data records. Table B- 1 Measured variables for data records and user data Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 1 Value range Voltage L1-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 2 Voltage L2-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 3 Voltage L3-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 4 Voltage L1-L2 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 5 Voltage L2-L3 2 REAL V 6 Voltage L3-L1 2 REAL V 7 Current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 Current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Current L3 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 0.0 ... 600.0 0.0 ... 600.0 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 10 Apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 11 Apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 12 Apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 13 Active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 14 Active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 15 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 16 Reactive power Qn L13 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 17 1 3 Connection type Reactive power Qn L23 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 18 Reactive power Qn L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 19 Power factor L1 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 Power factor L2 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 22 Reactive power Qtot L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 163 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 23 Reactive power Qtot L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 24 Reactive power Qtot L3 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 30 Frequency 4 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 31 Average voltage L-N (Usum) 12 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 32 Average voltage L-L 12 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 33 Average current L1L2L3 (Isum) 12 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 34 Total active power L1L2L3 5 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 37 Total power factor L1L2L3 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 38 Reactive power Qtot L1L2L33 5 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 40 Max. voltage UL1-N 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 41 Max. voltage UL2-N 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 42 Max. voltage UL3-N 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 43 Max. voltage UL1-UL2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 44 Max. voltage UL2-UL3 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 45 Max. voltage UL3-UL1 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 46 Max. current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 Max. current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 Max. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 49 Max. apparent power L1 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 50 Max. apparent power L2 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 51 Max. apparent power L3 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 52 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 53 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 54 Max. active power L3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 164 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit Value range Connection type 55 Max. reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Max. reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 57 Max. reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 58 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 59 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 60 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 61 Max. frequency 14 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 62 Max. mean voltage L-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 63 Max. mean voltage L-L REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 64 Max. mean current L1L2L3 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 65 Max. active power L1L2L3 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 66 Max. reactive power Qn L1L2L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 67 Max. apparent power L1L2L3 14 REAL VA 68 Max. total power factor REAL 70 Min. voltage UL1-N 14 71 Min. voltage UL2-N 14 72 Min. voltage UL3-N 14 73 Min. voltage UL1-UL2 74 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 Min. voltage UL2-UL3 REAL V 75 Min. voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 76 Min. current L1 14 77 Min. current L2 14 78 Min. current L3 14 79 Min. apparent power L1 14 80 Min. apparent power L2 14 56 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 0.0 ... 600.0 V 0.0 ... 600.0 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 165 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 81 Min. apparent power L3 14 82 Value range Connection type REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Min. active power L1 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 83 Min. active power L2 14 W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 84 Min. active power L3 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 85 Min. reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 86 Min. reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 87 Min. reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 88 Min. power factor L1 14 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 Min. power factor L2 14 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 Min. power factor L3 14 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 91 Min. frequency 14 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 Min. mean voltage L-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 93 Min. mean voltage L-L REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 94 Min. mean current L1L2L314 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 95 Min. sum of active power 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 96 Min. sum of reactive power 14 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 97 Min. sum of apparent power 14 REAL VA 98 Min. total power factor REAL 166 Mean power factor L1L2L312 200 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 201 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 202 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 205 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh -3.4028e+38 ... +3.4028e+38 92 14 14 14 14 14 14 REAL Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 166 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 206 Value range Connection type Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 REAL varh -3.4028e+38 ... +3.4028e+38 210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 215 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 2147483647 224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 225 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... +2147483647 226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 DINT varh -2147483647 ... +2147483647 61138 Max. reactive power Qtot L1L2L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61139 Min. reactive power Qtot L1L2L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61140 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61142 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 - 0 ... 65535 61143 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 - 0 ... 65535 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 167 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 61144 Value range Connection type Overflow counter apparent energy L1L2L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61146 Fundamental cos active factor L1L2L317 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 61147 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1L2L317 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 61148 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1L2L317 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 61149 Neutral current 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Z Z Z Z Z 61150 Neutral current 10/12 cycle 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Z Z Z Z Z 61151 Neutral current half cycle 1, 16, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Z Z Z Z Z 61153 Total current IL1+IL2+IL3-IN 1 REAL A -100000.0 ... 100000.0 61154 Reactive power (fundamental) L1L2L35 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61155 Max. reactive power (fundamental) L1L2L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61156 Min. reactive power (fundamental) L1L2L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61157 Amplitude unbalance voltage U2 2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61158 Amplitude unbalance current Iunsym 2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61178 Phase angle L1 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61180 Active energy inflow L1 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61181 Active energy outflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61182 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61183 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61184 Apparent energy L1 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61185 Total active energy L1 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61186 Total reactive energy L1 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 168 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 61190 61191 Value range Connection type Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61192 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L1 6 - 0 ... 65535 61193 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L1 - 0 ... 65535 61194 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61195 Overflow counter total active energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61196 Overflow counter total reactive energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61198 Phase angle L2 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61200 Active energy inflow L2 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61201 Active energy outflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61202 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61203 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61204 Apparent energy L2 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61205 Total active energy L2 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61206 Total reactive energy L2 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61210 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61211 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61212 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L2 6 - 0 ... 65535 61213 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L2 - 0 ... 65535 61214 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61215 Overflow counter total active energy L2 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 6 6 6 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 169 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 61216 Overflow counter total reactive energy L2 6 UINT - 61218 Phase angle L3 3 REAL 61220 Active energy inflow L3 LREAL 61221 Active energy outflow L3 6 61222 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 0.0 ... 360.0 Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61223 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61224 Apparent energy L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61225 Total active energy L3 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61226 Total reactive energy L3 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61230 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61231 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61232 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L3 6 - 0 ... 65535 61233 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L3 - 0 ... 65535 61234 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61235 Overflow counter total active energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 61236 Overflow counter total reactive energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 62110 Active energy inflow L1 DINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62111 Active energy outflow L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62112 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 62113 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 62114 Apparent energy L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62115 Total active energy L1 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 62116 Total reactive energy L1 6 DINT varh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6 6 0 ...65535 6 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 170 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables 62120 THD+N voltage L1 13 62121 THD+N current L1 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62122 Fundamental voltage L1 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62123 Fundamental current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62124 Fundamental reactive power L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62125 Fundamental apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62126 Fundamental active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62127 Fundamental cos active factor L1 17 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62130 Voltage L1 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62131 Voltage L1 half cycle 1, REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62133 Current L1 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62134 Current L1 half cycle 1, REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62136 Fundamental cos active factor L1 17 SINT 0.01 -100...100 62150 Max. THD+N voltage L1 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62151 Max. THD+N current L1 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62152 Max. fundamental voltage L1 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62153 Max. fundamental current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62154 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 14 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62155 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62156 Max. fundamental active power L1 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62157 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 14 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62160 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62170 Min. THD+N voltage L1 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 16, 19 16, 19 Data type Unit REAL 1% Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 0 % bis 100 % Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 171 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables 62171 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62172 Min. fundamental voltage L1 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62173 Min. fundamental current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62174 Min. fundamental reac- REAL tive power L1 14 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62175 Min. fundamental apparent power L114 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62176 Min. fundamental active power L1 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62177 Min. fundamental cos active factor L114 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62180 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Voltage dip - value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 Voltage swell - value L1 16 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 Voltage peak value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62197 Current peak value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62198 Overcurrent - value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62199 Voltage dip - duration L1 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62200 Voltage swell - duration L1 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62210 Active energy inflow L2 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62211 Active energy outflow L2 6 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62212 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62213 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62214 Apparent energy L2 6 DINT VAh 0... 2147483647 Total active energy L2 DINT Wh 2147483647...+21474 83647 Total reactive energy L2 6 DINT varh 2147483647...+21474 83647 62194 62195 62196 62215 62216 Data type 14 16 17 17 16 6 6 Unit Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 172 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables 62220 THD+N voltage L2 13 62221 THD+N current L2 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62222 Fundamental voltage L22 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62223 Fundamental current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62224 Fundamental reactive power L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62225 Fundamental apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62226 Fundamental active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62227 Fundamental cos active factor L2 17 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62230 Voltage L2 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62231 Voltage L2 half cycle 1, REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62233 Current L2 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62234 Current L2 half cycle 1, REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62236 Fundamental cos active factor L2 17 SINT 0.01 -100...100 62250 Max. THD+N voltage L2 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62251 Max. THD+N current L2 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62252 Max. fundamental voltage L2 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62253 Max. fundamental current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62254 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 14 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62255 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62256 Max. fundamental active power L2 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62257 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 14 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62260 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62270 Min. THD+N voltage L2 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 16, 19 16, 19 Data type Unit REAL 1% Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 0 % bis 100 % Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 173 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables 62271 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62272 Min. fundamental voltage L2 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62273 Min. fundamental current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62274 Min. fundamental reac- REAL tive power L2 14 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62275 Min. fundamental apparent power L214 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62276 Min. fundamental active power L2 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62277 Min. fundamental cos active factor L214 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62280 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Voltage dip - value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 Voltage swell - value L2 16 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 Voltage peak value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62297 Current peak value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62298 Overcurrent - value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62299 Voltage dip - duration L2 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62300 Voltage swell - duration L2 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62310 Active energy inflow L3 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62311 Active energy outflow L3 6 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62312 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62313 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62314 Apparent energy L3 6 DINT VAh 0... 2147483647 Total active energy L3 DINT Wh 2147483647...+21474 83647 Total reactive energy L3 6 DINT varh 2147483647...+21474 83647 62294 62295 62296 62315 62316 Data type 14 16 17 17 16 6 6 Unit Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 174 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62320 THD+N voltage L3 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62321 THD+N current L3 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62322 Fundamental voltage L3 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62323 Fundamental current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62324 Fundamental reactive power L3 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62325 Fundamental apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62326 Fundamental active power L33 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62327 Fundamental cos active factor L3 17 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62330 Voltage L3 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62331 Voltage L3 half cycle 1, REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62333 Current L3 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62334 Current L3 half cycle 1, REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62336 Fundamental cos active factor L3 17 SINT ,01 -100...100 62350 Max. THD+N voltage L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62351 Max. THD+N current L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62352 Max. fundamental voltage L314 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62353 Max. fundamental current L314 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62354 Max. fundamental reactive power L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62355 Max. fundamental apparent power L314 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62356 Max. fundamental active power L314 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62357 Max. fundamental cos active factor L314 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62360 Max. reactive power Qtot L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62370 Min. THD+N voltage L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 16, 19 16, 19 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 175 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62371 Value range Connection type Min. THD+N current L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62372 Min. fundamental voltage L314 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62373 Min. fundamental current L3 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62374 Min. fundamental reac- REAL tive power L3 14 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62375 Min. fundamental apparent power L314 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62376 Min. fundamental active power L314 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62377 Min. fundamental cos active factor L314 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62380 Min. reactive power Qtot L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62394 Voltage dip - value L316 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62395 Voltage swell - value L316 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62396 Voltage peak value L317 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62397 Current peak value L317 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62398 Overcurrent - value L316 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62399 Voltage dip - duration L316 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62400 Voltage swell - duration L316 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Harmonics 63000 Harmonics 1: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63001 Harmonics 1: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63002 Harmonics 2: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63003 Harmonics 2: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63004 Harmonics 3: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63005 Harmonics 3: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63006 Harmonics 4: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 176 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63007 Value range Connection type Harmonics 4: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63008 Harmonics 5: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63009 Harmonics 5: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63010 Harmonics 6: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63011 Harmonics 6: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63012 Harmonics 7: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63013 Harmonics 7: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63014 Harmonics 8: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63015 Harmonics 8: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63016 Harmonics 9: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63017 Harmonics 9: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63018 Harmonics 10: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63019 Harmonics 10: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63020 Harmonics 11: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63021 Harmonics 11: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63022 Harmonics 12: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63023 Harmonics 12: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63024 Harmonics 13: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63025 Harmonics 13: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63026 Harmonics 14: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63027 Harmonics 14: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63028 Harmonics 15: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 177 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63029 Value range Connection type Harmonics 15: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63030 Harmonics 16: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63031 Harmonics 16: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63032 Harmonics 17: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63033 Harmonics 17: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63034 Harmonics 18: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63035 Harmonics 18: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63036 Harmonics 19: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63037 Harmonics 19: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63038 Harmonics 20: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63039 Harmonics 20: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63040 Harmonics 21: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63041 Harmonics 21: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63042 Harmonics 22: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63043 Harmonics 22: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63044 Harmonics 23: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63045 Harmonics 23: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63046 Harmonics 24: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63047 Harmonics 24: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63048 Harmonics 25: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63049 Harmonics 25: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63050 Harmonics 26: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 178 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63051 Value range Connection type Harmonics 26: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63052 Harmonics 27: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63053 Harmonics 27: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63054 Harmonics 28: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63055 Harmonics 28: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63056 Harmonics 29: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63057 Harmonics 29: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63058 Harmonics 30: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63059 Harmonics 30: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63060 Harmonics 31: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63061 Harmonics 31: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63062 Harmonics 32: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63063 Harmonics 32: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63064 Harmonics 33: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63065 Harmonics 33: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63066 Harmonics 34: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63067 Harmonics 34: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63068 Harmonics 35: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63069 Harmonics 35: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63070 Harmonics 36: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63071 Harmonics 36: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63072 Harmonics 37: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 179 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63073 Value range Connection type Harmonics 37: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63074 Harmonics 38: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63075 Harmonics 38: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63076 Harmonics 39: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63077 Harmonics 39: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63078 Harmonics 40: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63079 Harmonics 40: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63400 Harmonics 1: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63401 Harmonics 1: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63402 Harmonics 2: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63403 Harmonics 2: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63404 Harmonics 3: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63405 Harmonics 3: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63406 Harmonics 4: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63407 Harmonics 4: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63408 Harmonics 5: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63409 Harmonics 5: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63410 Harmonics 6: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63411 Harmonics 6: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63412 Harmonics 7: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63413 Harmonics 7: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63414 Harmonics 8: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 180 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63415 Value range Connection type Harmonics 8: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63416 Harmonics 9: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63417 Harmonics 9: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63418 Harmonics 10: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63419 Harmonics 10: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63420 Harmonics 11: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63421 Harmonics 11: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63422 Harmonics 12: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63423 Harmonics 12: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63424 Harmonics 13: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63425 Harmonics 13: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63426 Harmonics 14: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63427 Harmonics 14: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63428 Harmonics 15: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63429 Harmonics 15: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63430 Harmonics 16: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63431 Harmonics 16: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63432 Harmonics 17: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63433 Harmonics 17: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63434 Harmonics 18: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63435 Harmonics 18: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63436 Harmonics 19: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 181 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63437 Value range Connection type Harmonics 19: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63438 Harmonics 20: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63439 Harmonics 20: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63440 Harmonics 21: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63441 Harmonics 21: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63442 Harmonics 22: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63443 Harmonics 22: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63444 Harmonics 23: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63445 Harmonics 23: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63446 Harmonics 24: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63447 Harmonics 24: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63448 Harmonics 25: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63449 Harmonics 25: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63450 Harmonics 26: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63451 Harmonics 26: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63452 Harmonics 27: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63453 Harmonics 27: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63454 Harmonics 28: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63455 Harmonics 28: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63456 Harmonics 29: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63457 Harmonics 29: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63458 Harmonics 30: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 182 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63459 Value range Connection type Harmonics 30: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63460 Harmonics 31: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63461 Harmonics 31: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63462 Harmonics 32: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63463 Harmonics 32: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63464 Harmonics 33: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63465 Harmonics 33: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63466 Harmonics 34: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63467 Harmonics 34: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63468 Harmonics 35: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63469 Harmonics 35: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63470 Harmonics 36: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63471 Harmonics 36: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63472 Harmonics 37: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63473 Harmonics 37: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63474 Harmonics 38: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63475 Harmonics 38: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63476 Harmonics 39: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63477 Harmonics 39: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63478 Harmonics 40: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63479 Harmonics 40: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63800 Harmonics 1: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 183 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63801 Value range Connection type Harmonics 1: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63802 Harmonics 2: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63803 Harmonics 2: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63804 Harmonics 3: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63805 Harmonics 3: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63806 Harmonics 4: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63807 Harmonics 4: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63808 Harmonics 5: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63809 Harmonics 5: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63810 Harmonics 6: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63811 Harmonics 6: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63812 Harmonics 7: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63813 Harmonics 7: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63814 Harmonics 8: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63815 Harmonics 8: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63816 Harmonics 9: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63817 Harmonics 9: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63818 Harmonics 10: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63819 Harmonics 10: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63820 Harmonics 11: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63821 Harmonics 11: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63822 Harmonics 12: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 184 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63823 Value range Connection type Harmonics 12: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63824 Harmonics 13: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63825 Harmonics 13: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63826 Harmonics 14: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63827 Harmonics 14: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63828 Harmonics 15: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63829 Harmonics 15: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63830 Harmonics 16: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63831 Harmonics 16: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63832 Harmonics 17: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63833 Harmonics 17: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63834 Harmonics 18: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63835 Harmonics 18: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63836 Harmonics 19: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63837 Harmonics 19: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63838 Harmonics 20: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63839 Harmonics 20: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63840 Harmonics 21: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63841 Harmonics 21: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63842 Harmonics 22: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63843 Harmonics 22: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63844 Harmonics 23: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 185 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63845 Value range Connection type Harmonics 23: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63846 Harmonics 24: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63847 Harmonics 24: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63848 Harmonics 25: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63849 Harmonics 25: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63850 Harmonics 26: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63851 Harmonics 26: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63852 Harmonics 27: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63853 Harmonics 27: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63854 Harmonics 28: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63855 Harmonics 28: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63856 Harmonics 29: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63857 Harmonics 29: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63858 Harmonics 30: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63859 Harmonics 30: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63860 Harmonics 31: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63861 Harmonics 31: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63862 Harmonics 32: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63863 Harmonics 32: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63864 Harmonics 33: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63865 Harmonics 33: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63866 Harmonics 34: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 186 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63867 Value range Connection type Harmonics 34: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63868 Harmonics 35: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63869 Harmonics 35: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63870 Harmonics 36: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63871 Harmonics 36: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63872 Harmonics 37: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63873 Harmonics 37: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63874 Harmonics 38: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63875 Harmonics 38: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63876 Harmonics 39: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63877 Harmonics 39: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63878 Harmonics 40: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63879 Harmonics 40: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 65496 Power quality analysis - Qualifier UDINT Bit track 0 ... 4294967295 65497 Current module time PNIO sec 65500 Qualifier L1 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65501 Qualifier L2 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65502 Qualifier L3 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65504 Operating hours counter L1L2L3 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 65505 Operating hours counter L1 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 65506 Operating hours counter L2 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 65507 Operating hours counter L3 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 187 Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 65508 Value range Connection type Status of energy counter overflows UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65509 Status of limit violations 1...16 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65510 Counter for limit violations GW1 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65511 Counter for limit violations GW2 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65512 Counter for limit violations GW3 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65513 Counter for limit violations GW4 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65514 Counter for limit violations GW5 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65515 Counter for limit violations GW6 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65516 Counter for limit violations GW7 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65517 Counter for limit violations GW8 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65518 Counter for limit violations GW9 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65519 Counter for limit violations GW10 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65520 Counter for limit violations GW11 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65521 Counter for limit violations GW12 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65522 Counter for limit violations GW13 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65523 Counter for limit violations GW14 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 188 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit Value range Connection type 65524 Counter for limit violations GW15 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65525 Counter for limit violations GW16 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Z = additionally possible measured values in the current path (e.g. instead of neutral current) 1 Effective value 2 IEC 61557-12 3 floating arithmetic average value above 200 ms 4 floating arithmetic average value above 10 s 5 Simple summation 6 Calculation from the start/restart (inflow and outflow values are positive numbers) 7 floating arithmetic average value above 3 s 8 floating arithmetic average value above 600 s 9 floating arithmetic average value above 900 s 10 Block measurement over 900 s 11 direct measurement of the signal wave at 8 ksps 12 Total of the parts / number of parts 13 THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) is calculated once per second by the RMS of the fundamental oscillation and the total effective value (IEEE standard 1459-2010) 14 Min./Max: Slave pointer function of the respective basic value from start/reset 15 Calculation according to DIN EN 61000-3-316 half-wave value 16 Half-wave value 17 Instantaneous value 18 FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) 19 While pure RMS measured values only contain AC voltage components of the signal, 10/12 and half-wave measured values also show DC voltage components of the signal Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 189 Measured variables The table below is relevant for the description of the user data variants: Measured value ID Measured variables 66001 Voltage L1-N 1 Data type Unit UINT 0.01 V Value range 0 ... 65535 66002 Voltage L2-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 Voltage L3-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66004 Voltage L1-L2 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66005 Voltage L2-L3 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66006 Voltage L3-L1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66007 Current L1 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 Current L2 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 Current L3 2 Connection type 1 P 2 W 2 P 3 W 3x 1 P 2 W 3 P 4 W 3 P 4 W 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66010 Apparent power L1 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 Apparent power L2 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66013 Active power L1 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 Active power L2 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 Active power L3 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66016 Reactive power Qn L13 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 Reactive power Qn L23 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 Reactive power Qn L33 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66019 Power factor L1 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Power factor L2 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Power factor L3 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66030 Frequency USINT 1 Hz 45 ... 65 66034 Active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66035 Reactive power Qn L1L2L35 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66036 Apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA 66037 Power factor L1L2L3 6 USINT 0.01 66038 Frequency UINT 1 3 4 4 5 5 0.01 Hz 3 P 3 W 1 3 P 3 W -27648 ... 27648 0 ... 100 4500 ... 6500 3 P 4 W I Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 190 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables Format Table B- 2 Format and its length in bytes Format in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Format to IEEE Length in bytes Comment BYTE 1 byte Bit field with 8 bit BYTE WORD WORD 2 bytes Bit field with 16 bit SINT INT8 (signed) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits with sign USINT INT8 (unsigned) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits without sign INT INT (signed) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits with sign UINT INT (unsigned) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits without sign UDINT INT32 (unsigned) 4 bytes Fixed-point number 32 bits without sign DINT INT32 (signed) 4 bytes Fixed-point number, 32 bits with sign REAL Float32 4 bytes Floating-point number 32 bits with sign LREAL Float64 8 bytes Floating-point number 64 bits with sign Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 191 C Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" User data of the module The module has 2 bytes of input user data and 2 bytes of output user data for status and control information. At this module version measured variables can be read solely via measured value data records (no measured variables can be evaluated via user data). Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data is fixed. Table C- 1 Structure of input user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Constant = 0x80 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 192 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Allocation of the input user data Figure C-1 Allocation of the status bytes in the input user data (2 bytes) Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed. Table C- 2 Structure of output user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module Reserved Reserved 1 Module Control outputs Reset of values and counters, gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 193 Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Assignment of the output user data Via the output user data you control for all phases Resetting for all minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and energy meters. The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters. Figure C-2 Allocation of the control byte in the output user data (1 byte) Note For module version 2 I / 2 Q, a reset of the selected variables always acts on all measured values/counter levels of the three phases. * Reset energy counter: Acts on all active, reactive and apparent energies of all phases * Reset operating hours counter: Acts on the counters of Phases 1 to 3 * Reset minimum / maximum values: Acts on the minimum and maximum value calculations of Phases 1-3 * Reset all counters for limit violations: Acts on all 16 limit values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 194 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" User data of the module The module occupies 32 bytes of input user data and 20 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 20 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (Bytes 2 to 31) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You can set the contents of the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 3 Structure of input user data (32 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant - 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 31 Module or phase Data 2 or 4 byte measured values or cumulative values according to user data variant Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 195 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. Figure C-3 Assignment of the input user data (32 bytes) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 196 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed and is the same at all the selectable user data variants. Via the output user data you control globally or phase-specifically Resetting for minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and energy meters. The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters. Gate for limits, minimum values and maximum values. Table C- 4 Structure of output user data (20 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Control byte for switching the user data variant 1 Module Control byte 1 Global resetting of values and counters, gate 2 Module Control byte 2 Selection of the energy counter to be reset 3 Module Control byte 3 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 9 to 16 4 Module Control byte 4 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 1 to 8 5 Module Reserved - 6 Phase L1 Control byte 6 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase L1 7 Phase L1 Control byte 7 8 Phase L2 Control byte 8 9 Phase L2 Control byte 9 10 Phase L3 Control byte 10 11 Phase L3 Control byte 11 12 Module and phases L1, L2, L3 Control byte 12 Deletion of power quality analysis results or starting/stopping the analysis of harmonics 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Module and phases L1, L2, L3 Control byte 16 General reset (Page 41) 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase L2 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 197 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Control bytes for user data variant Figure C-4 Allocation of the control bytes for user data variant (Byte 0) Control bytes for all three phases Figure C-5 Allocation of the control bytes for all three phases (bytes 1 and 2) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 198 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Control bytes for limit monitoring Figure C-6 Allocation of the control bytes for limit monitoring (bytes 3 to 5) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 199 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Control bytes for each individual phase Figure C-7 Allocation of the control bytes for each individual phase (bytes 6 to 15) Figure C-8 Allocation of the control bytes for each individual phase (bytes 16 to 19) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 200 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.3 "User-specific" module version C.3 "User-specific" module version User data of the module The module occupies between 16 and 256 bytes of input user data and 20 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 20 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (as of Byte 2) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You configure the structure of the input user data starting at Byte 2 at this module version itself. An input user data length of 32 bytes also allows you to set the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 5 Structure of input user data (16 to 256 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant - 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 255 Module or phase Data Measured values or calculated values in accordance with their configuration: * At configuration in STEP 7 the size of the input user data is calculated automatically. * With configuration via the GSD file the size of the input user data amounts to 32, 64, 128 or 256 bytes. The memory area has to be sufficiently large for the measured variables defined in parameter data record 130 or 131. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 201 Module versions C.3 "User-specific" module version Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. The allocation of the status information in bytes 0 and 1 corresponds to the module version 32 I / 20 Q, see appendix Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 195). Figure C-9 Allocation of the input user data ("User-specific" module version" Note Behavior at switchover in case of the input user data being too small If the configured size of the variable input user data is smaller than the sized of the fixed user data variant, the response depends on the type of switchover: * Re-assigning parameters via parameter data records DS 128 / DS 130 / DS 131: Output of a parameter assignment error (33). No switchover. * Switchover using output byte 0 of a user data variant: No switchover and no error message. Structure of output user data The structure of the 20-byte output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data (control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 195). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 202 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" User data of the module The four versions according to EE@Industry use between 4 and 104 bytes of input user data and 20 bytes of output user data. A dynamic switchover of the input user data is not possible. Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data for the module versions according to the EE@Industry standard is fixed and depends on the selected measurement data profile. Table C- 6 Measurement data profile E0 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 4...7 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 8...11 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Table C- 7 Measurement data profile E1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 34 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 203 Module versions C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" Table C- 8 Measurement data profile E2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 34 4...7 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 200 8...11 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 201 Table C- 9 Measurement data profile E3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 13 4...7 Active power L2 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 14 8...11 Active power L3 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 15 12...15 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL 1 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 22 16...19 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL 1 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 23 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL 1 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 24 24...31 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 210 32...39 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 211 40...47 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 212 48...55 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 213 56...59 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 60...63 Voltage UL2-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 64...67 Voltage UL3-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 68...71 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 72...75 Voltage UL2-UL3 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 76...79 Voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 80...83 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 84...87 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 88...91 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 92...95 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 96...99 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 100...10 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Structure of output user data The structure of the 20-byte output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data (control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 195). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 204 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA D User data variants User data The following table shows the existing user data variants. Table D- 1 Overview of the user data variants User data User data variant Total power L1L2L3 254 (FEH) - default setting Active power L1L2L3 253 (FDH) Reactive power L1L2L3 252 (FCH) Apparent power L1L2L3 251 (FBH) Basic measured values L1L2L3 250 (FAH) Total energy L1L2L3 249 (F9H) Energy L1 248 (F8H) Energy L2 247 (F7H) Energy L3 246 (F6H) Basic variables three-phase measurement L1L2L3 245 (F5H) Reactive power compensation 244 (F4H) Quality values three-phase measurement 240 (F0H) Energy measurement (periodic) overflow counter 239 (EFH) EE@Industry measurement data profile E3 227 (E3H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E2 226 (E2H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E1 225 (E1H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 224 (E0H) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 159 (9FH) Single-phase measurement L1 with voltage scaling value 158 (9EH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 157 (9DH) Single-phase measurement L2 with voltage scaling value 156 (9CH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 155 (9BH) Single-phase measurement L3 with voltage scaling value 154 (9AH) User-defined user data structure I 1 (01H) User-defined user data structure II 2 (02H) Information on using and dynamic switching of the user data variants can be found under "Selecting the module versions (Page 32)". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 205 User data variants Total power L1L2L3 (ID 254 or FEH) Table D- 2 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 206 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Active power L1L2L3 (ID 253 or FDH) Table D- 3 Active power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 253 (FDH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 10 ... 11 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 12 ... 13 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 14 ... 15 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 16 ... 19 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 225 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 207 User data variants Reactive power L1L2L3 (ID 252 or FCH) Table D- 4 Reactive power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 252 (FCH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66022 10 ... 11 Reactive power Qtot L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66023 12 ... 13 Reactive power Qtot L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66024 14 ... 15 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 222 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 208 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Apparent power L1L2L3 (ID 251 or FBH) Table D- 5 Apparent power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 251 (FBH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 13 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 14 ... 15 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 16 ... 19 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total apparent energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 209 User data variants Basic measured values L1L2L3 (ID 250 or FAH) Table D- 6 Basic measured values L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 250 (FAH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 10 ... 11 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 12 ... 13 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 14 ... 15 Voltage UL1-UL2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66004 16 ... 17 Voltage UL2-UL3 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66005 18 ... 19 Voltage UL3-UL1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66006 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling voltage UL1-N (UL1-UL2) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling voltage UL2-N (UL2-UL3) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling voltage UL3-N (UL3-UL1) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 ... 31 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 66038 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 210 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Total energy L1L2L3 (ID 249 or F9H) Table D- 7 Total energy L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Reserved BYTE - - - 3 Reserved BYTE - - - 4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 210 8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 211 11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 212 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 213 20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 214 24 Reserved BYTE - - - 25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 211 User data variants Energy L1 (ID 248 or F8H) Table D- 8 Energy L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 248 (F8H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62110 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62111 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 2147483647 62112 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 2147483647 62113 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 212 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Energy L2 (ID 247 or F7H) Table D- 9 Energy L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 247 (F7H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62210 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62211 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62212 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62213 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 213 User data variants Energy L3 (ID 246 or F6H) Table D- 10 Energy L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 246 (F6H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62310 8 ... 11 Active energy L3, outflow UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62311 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62312 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62313 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Basic variables three-phase measurements (ID 245 or F5H) Table D- 11 Basic variables three-phase measurements Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 245 (F5H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 34 6 ... 9 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 62418 1038 62417 10 ... 13 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 14 ... 17 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 18 ... 21 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 22 ... 25 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 26 ... 27 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 28 ... 29 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 30 ... 31 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 214 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Reactive power compensation (ID 244 or F4H) Table D- 12 Reactive power compensation Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 244 (F4H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Fundamental cos active factor L1 BYTE 0.01 -100 ... 100 62136 3 Fundamental cos active factor L2 BYTE 0.01 -100 ... 100 62236 4 Fundamental cos active factor L3 BYTE 0.01 -100 ... 100 62336 5 Reserved BYTE - - 109 ... +3 x 109 6 ... 9 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3 x 10 ... 13 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 62224 62124 14 ... 17 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 62324 Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H) Table D- 13 Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 240 (F0H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Status of the limit monitoring GW 1 ... 16 (*) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509 4 ... 5 Status of the energy counter overflows (**) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508 6 ... 7 Quality information WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503 8 ... 9 Quality information power quality analysis WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65496 10 ... 11 Reserved WORD - - - 12 ... 13 Reserved WORD - - - 14 ... 15 Reserved WORD - - - 16 ... 17 Reserved WORD - - - 18 ... 19 Reserved WORD - - - 20 ... 21 Reserved WORD - - - 22 ... 23 Reserved WORD - - - 24 ... 25 Reserved WORD - - - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 215 User data variants Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 26 ... 27 Reserved WORD - - - 28 ... 29 Reserved WORD - - - 30 ... 31 Reserved WORD - - - (*) Limit violation in: Bit 0 = limit 1 to bit 15 = limit 16 (**) Energy counter count periodically - counter overflow at: Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1 Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1 Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1 Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1 Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1 Bit 5 = 1: Active energy inflow L2 Bit 6 = 1: Active energy outflow L2 Bit 7 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L2 Bit 8 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L2 Bit 9 = 1: Apparent energy L2 Bit 10 = 1: Active energy inflow L3 Bit 11 = 1: Active energy outflow L3 Bit 12 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L3 Bit 13 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L3 Bit 14 = 1: Apparent energy L3 Bit 15: Reserved Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 216 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter (ID 239 or EFH) Table D- 14 Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 239 (EFH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62120 4 ... 5 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62121 6 ... 7 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62122 8 ... 9 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62123 10 ... 11 Overflow counter for apparent energy L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62124 12 ... 13 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62220 14 ... 15 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62221 16 ... 17 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62222 18 ... 19 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62223 20 ... 21 Overflow counter for apparent energy L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62224 22 ... 23 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62320 24 ... 25 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62321 26 ... 27 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62322 28 ... 29 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62323 30 ... 31 Overflow counter for apparent energy L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62324 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 217 User data variants Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 227 or E3H) Table D- 15 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 227 (E3H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 13 6 ... 9 Active power L2 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 14 10 ... 13 Active power L3 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 15 14 ... 17 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL 1 var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 22 18 ... 21 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL 1 var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 23 22 ... 25 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL 1 var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 24 26 ... 33 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 34 ... 41 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 10308 213 42 ... 49 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 varh 50 ... 57 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 58 ... 61 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 62 ... 65 Voltage UL2-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 66 ... 69 Voltage UL3-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 70 ... 73 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 74 ... 77 Voltage UL2-UL3 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 78 ... 81 Voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 82 ... 85 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 86 ... 89 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 90 ... 93 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 94 ... 97 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 98 ... 101 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 102 ... 105 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Power factor L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 218 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 226 or E2H) Table D- 16 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 226 (E2H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 34 6 ... 9 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 200 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 201 10 ...13 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 225 or E1H) Table D- 17 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 225 (E1H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 34 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 224 or E0H) Table D- 18 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E0 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 224 (E0H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 6 ... 9 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 10 ...13 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 219 User data variants Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 159 or 9FH) Table D- 19 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 159 (9FH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 6 ... 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66022 10 ... 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62115 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62116 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 220 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 158 or 9EH) Table D- 20 Single-phase measurement L1 with voltage scaling value Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 158 (9EH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 6 ... 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66022 10 ... 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 4294967295 62115 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 4294967295 62116 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 4294967295 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL1-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 221 User data variants Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 157 or 9DH) Table D- 21 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 157 (9DH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 5 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 6 ... 7 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66023 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 15 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62215 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62216 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 222 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 156 or 9CH) Table D- 22 Single-phase measurement L2 with voltage scaling value Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 156 (9CH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 5 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 6 ... 7 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66023 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 15 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62215 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62216 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL2-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 223 User data variants Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 155 or 9BH) Table D- 23 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 155 (9BH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 5 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 6 ... 7 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66024 10 ... 11 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 12 ... 15 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62315 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62316 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 224 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 154 or 9AH) Table D- 24 Single-phase measurement L3 with voltage scaling value Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 154 (9AH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 5 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 6 ... 7 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66024 10 ... 11 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 12 ... 15 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62315 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62316 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL3-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 225 E Measured value data records E.1 Overview of all measured value data records The AI Energy Meter HF writes the measured values in several data records that you can read acyclically using the RDREC instruction in the user program. The following tables show the structure of the individual data records: Data record DS 142 for basic measured values version 2 (read only). Data record DS 142 for basic measured values version 3 (read only). Data record DS 143 for energy counters (read and write). Data record DS 144 for basic measured values version 1 (read only). Data record DS 154 for maximum values with time stamp (read only). Data record DS 145 for minimum values version 1 (read only). Data record DS 155 for minimum values with time stamp (read only). Data record DS 147 for phase-specific measured values L1 version 0 (read only). Data record DS 147 for phase-specific measured values L1 version 1 (read only). Data record DS 148 for phase-specific measured values L2 DS version 0 (read only). Data record DS 148 for phase-specific measured values L2 DS version 1 (read only). Data record DS 149 for phase-specific measured values L3 DS version 0 (read only). Data record DS 149 for phase-specific measured values L3 DS version 1 (read only). Data record DS 150 for advanced measurement and status values version 1 (read only). Data record DS 151 for user-defined data record (read only). Data record DS 160 for power quality analysis (read only). Data record DS 161 for harmonics voltage (DS 161) (read only). Data record DS 163 for harmonics current (DS 163) (read only). Data record DS 170 information data record on available measured values. Note * The cumulative value of the energy counters in 3-phase operation is obtained from the sums of the respective individual values of the phases. * Inflow and outflow energy meters are always positive values. * The operating hours counter for the entire module is calculated from the maximum of the operating hours of the individual phases. See also Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping (Page 160) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 226 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) E.2.1 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2 Measured variables of the module The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142 supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that are not relevant. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix (Measured variables (Page 163)). Table E- 1 Data record 142 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version = 2 UINT8 - - - 1 Reserved UINT8 - - - 2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 42...45 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 46...49 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30 58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 61157 62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current REAL % 0 to 100 61158 66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 70...73 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 74...77 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA 109 -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 11 12 ... +3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 22 23 82...85 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 86...89 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 36 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 227 Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 90...93 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 Measured value ID 94...97 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 98...101 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 102...105 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 109 ... +3.0 x 24 ... +3.0 x 109 38 109 106...109 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 34 114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 118...121 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 122...125 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 130...133 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh -3.4 x 1038 to +3.4 x 1038 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202 varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203 1038 200 201 REAL 146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 1038 206 138...141 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 to +3.4 x 204 134...137 142...145 1038 1038 10308 to +1.8 x 205 214 10308 162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 216 215 178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 10308 211 194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 10308 212 202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 210...213 Neutral current REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149 Neutral current If you operate the AI Energy Meter HF with connection type 3P4W, 3P4W1 or 3P3W, the neutral current is also calculated under the following conditions: Transmission factors of all phase currents (primary and secondary currents) are identical. Measured phase currents are greater than the value of the "Low limit for measuring current parameter. The parameter "Reverse current direction" must be the same on all phases. If one of the conditions is not met, 0 is entered as the value for the neutral current. You can read the neutral current calculated using measured value data record 142. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 228 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Procedure Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter HF. Use the RDREC instruction to read out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7 library. E.2.2 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3 Measured variables of the module The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142 supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that are not relevant. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix (Measured variables (Page 163)). Table E- 2 Data record 142 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version = 3 BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 Voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage L2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage L3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage L1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage L2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage L3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 42...45 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 46...49 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30 58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage U2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61157 62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current Iunsym REAL % 0 to 100 61158 66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 70...73 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 74...77 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x ... +3.0 x 10 109 11 12 109 36 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 229 Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 82...85 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 Measured value ID 86...89 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 90...93 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 24 94...97 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 38 109 ... +3.0 x 22 23 98...101 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 102...105 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 14 109 106...109 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 35 114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 118...121 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 122...125 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 130...133 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh -3.4 x 1038 to +3.4 x 1038 134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 1038 1038 204 to +3.4 x 1038 206 205 138...141 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 200 1038 201 146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 1038 202 150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 214 162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh to +1.8 x 10308 216 215 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 10308 213 186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 10308 211 202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 210...213 Neutral current REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149 214...217 Neutral current 10/12 cycle REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61150 218...221 Reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 16 222...225 Reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 17 226...229 Reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 18 ... +3.0 x 109 35 230...233 Total reactive power Qn L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 234...237 Average voltage L-N (Usum) REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 31 238...241 Average voltage L-L REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 32 242...245 Average current L1L2L3 (Isum) REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 33 246...249 Mean power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 166 250...253 Fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62122 254...257 Fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62222 258...261 Fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62322 262...265 Fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62123 266...269 Fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62223 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 230 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 270...273 Fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 278...281 Fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62323 274...277 282...285 109 Measured value ID 109 62125 62225 ... +3.0 x 109 62325 ... +3.0 x 109 62124 62224 286...289 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 290...293 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 294...297 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 298...301 Fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 302...305 Fundamental active power L2 REAL W 109 -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62324 62126 ... +3.0 x 109 62226 ... +3.0 x 109 62326 306...309 Fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 310...313 Fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62127 314...317 Fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62227 318...321 Fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62327 322...325 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 326...329 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 330...333 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 334...337 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 338...341 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 342...345 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 346...358 Current module time PNIOTime sec 65497 Neutral current If you operate the AI Energy Meter HF with connection type 3P4W, 3P4W1 or 3P3W, the neutral current is also calculated under the following conditions: Transmission factors of all phase currents (primary and secondary currents) are identical. Measured phase currents are greater than the value of the "Low limit for measuring current parameter. The parameter "Reverse current direction" must be the same on all phases. If one of the conditions is not met, 0 is entered as the value for the neutral current. You can read the neutral current calculated using measured value data record 142. Procedure Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter HF. Use the RDREC instruction to read out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7 library. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 231 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Energy meter data record 143 for different actions The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions: Reset the energy meters to user-specific value (e.g. "0") Reading the current values of the energy counters Reading the overflow counters Reading the operating hours Energy meter data record 143 Table E- 3 Energy meter data record 143 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Status / control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Status / control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Status / control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Status / control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Status / control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Status / control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61181 24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182 32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh 88...95 Active energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh During reading: 0.0...1.8 x 10308 During writing For continuous counting: 0.0...3.4 x 1012 During writing For periodic counting: 61183 61184 61200 61201 61202 61203 61204 61220 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 232 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 96...103 Active energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61221 104...111 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 0...configured full-scale value (103 ...1015) 112...119 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61223 120...127 Apparent energy (initial value) L3 LREAL VAh 61224 128...129 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 UINT - 61190 130..131 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 61191 132...133 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 61192 134...135 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 61193 136...137 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 UINT - 138...139 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 UINT - 140...141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 142...143 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 144...145 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 146...147 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 UINT - 148...149 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 UINT - 150...151 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 UINT - 152...153 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 154...155 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 61233 156...157 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 UINT - 61234 158...161 Operating hours counter L1 (initial value) REAL h During reading: 65505 162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 0...3.4x1038 65506 166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h During writing: 65507 During reading: 0...65535 During writing for continuous counting: 0 During writing for periodic counting: 0...65500 61222 61194 61210 61211 61212 61213 61214 61230 61231 61232 0...109 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 233 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure E-1 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 234 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counter. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to reset and the time at which counters are reset. In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counters and which overflow counters you want to reset. Figure E-2 Control information DS 143 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 235 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the measured value data record 143: Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version. DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC instruction. Enter a valid length. DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. The start values may not be negative. DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. Observe the ranges of values for start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 236 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) E.4.1 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) version 1 Measured variables of the module The largest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 0 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...5 Max. voltage L1-N REAL V 0 40 6...9 Max. voltage L2-N REAL V 0 41 10...13 Max. voltage L3-N REAL V 0 42 14...17 Max. voltage L1-L2 REAL V 0 43 18...21 Max. voltage L2-L3 REAL V 0 44 22...25 Max. voltage L3-L1 REAL V 0 45 26...29 Max. current L1 1 REAL A 0 46 30...33 Max. current L2 1 REAL A 0 47 34...37 Max. current L3 1 REAL A 0 48 38...41 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA 0 49 42...45 Max. apparent power L2 REAL VA 0 50 46...49 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA 0 51 50...53 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 54...57 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 53 W -3.0 x 109 54 109 62160 58...61 Max. active power L3 REAL 109 52 62...65 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 66...69 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 62260 109 62360 70...73 Max. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 74...77 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0 58 78...81 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0 59 82...85 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0 60 86...89 Max. frequency REAL Hz 45 61 90...93 Max. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA 0 67 109 94...97 Max. active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 98...101 Max. reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 65 61138 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 237 Measured value data records E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 102...105 Max. power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0 68 106...109 Max. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 110...113 Max. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 56 109 55 57 114...117 Max. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 118...121 Max. mean voltage L-N REAL V 0 62 122...125 Max. mean voltage L-L REAL V 0 63 126...129 Max. sum mean value current REAL A 0 64 130...133 Max. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0 62152 134...137 Max. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0 62252 138...141 Max. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0 62352 142...145 Max. fundamental current L1 REAL A 0 62153 146...149 Max. fundamental current L2 REAL A 0 62253 150...153 Max. fundamental current L3 REAL A 0 154...157 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA 62353 -3.0 x 109 62155 109 62255 158...161 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 162...165 Max. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 62355 var -3.0 x 109 62154 109 62254 62354 166...169 1 109 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL 170...173 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 174...177 Max. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 178...181 Max. fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 182...185 Max. fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 62256 62156 186...189 Max. fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 62356 190...193 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1 62157 194...197 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1 62257 198...201 Max. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1 62357 202...205 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0 62150 206...209 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0 62250 210...213 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0 62350 214...217 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0 62151 218...221 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0 62251 222...225 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0 62351 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 238 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) Measured variables of the module The largest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured values (REAL 4 bytes) are each followed by a time stamp (PN Time 12 bytes). The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...17 Max. voltage L1-N REAL + PN Time V 0 40 18...33 Max. voltage L2-N REAL + PN Time V 0 41 34...49 Max. voltage L3-N REAL + PN Time V 0 42 50...65 Max. voltage L1-L2 REAL + PN Time V 0 43 66...81 Max. voltage L2-L3 REAL + PN Time V 0 44 82...97 Max. voltage L3-L1 REAL + PN Time V 0 45 98...113 Max. current L1 1 REAL + PN Time A 0 46 114...129 Max. current L2 1 REAL + PN Time A 0 47 130...145 Max. current L3 1 REAL + PN Time A 0 48 146...161 Max. apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA 0 49 162...177 Max. apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA 0 50 178...193 Max. apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA 0 51 194...209 Max. active power L1 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 52 210...225 Max. active power L2 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 53 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 239 Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 226...241 Max. active power L3 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 54 242...257 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62160 258...273 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62260 274...289 Max. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62360 290...305 Max. power factor L1 REAL + PN Time - 0 58 306...321 Max. power factor L2 REAL + PN Time - 0 59 322...337 Max. power factor L3 REAL + PN Time - 0 60 338...353 Max. frequency REAL + PN Time Hz 45 61 354...369 Max. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time VA 0 67 370...385 Max. active power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 65 386...401 Max. reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 61138 402...417 Max. power factor L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time - 0 68 418...433 Max. reactive power Qn L1 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 55 434...449 Max. reactive power Qn L2 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 56 450...465 Max. reactive power Qn L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 57 466...481 Max. mean voltage L-N REAL + PN Time V 0 62 482...497 Max. mean voltage L-L REAL + PN Time V 0 63 498...513 Max. sum mean value current L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time A 0 64 514...529 Max. fundamental voltage L1 REAL + PN Time V 0 62152 530...545 Max. fundamental voltage L2 REAL + PN Time V 0 62252 546...561 Max. fundamental voltage L3 REAL + PN Time V 0 62352 562...577 Max. fundamental current L1 REAL + PN Time A 0 62153 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 240 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) 1 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 578...593 Max. fundamental current L2 REAL + PN Time A 0 62253 594...609 Max. fundamental current L3 REAL + PN Time A 0 62353 610...625 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA -3.0 x 109 62155 626...641 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA -3.0 x 109 62255 642...657 Max. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA -3.0 x 109 62355 658...673 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62154 674...689 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62254 690...705 Max. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62354 706...721 Max. fundamental active power L1 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 62156 722...737 Max. fundamental active power L2 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 62256 738...753 Max. fundamental active power L3 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 62356 754...769 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL + PN Time - -1 62157 770...785 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL + PN Time - -1 62257 786...801 Max. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL + PN Time - -1 62357 802...817 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62150 818...833 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62250 834...849 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62350 850...865 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62151 866...881 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62251 882...897 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62351 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 241 Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) Structure of time stamp The table below shows the structure of the time stamp: Byte PN Time Format Length 0 Status UINT16 2 bytes 0: Synchronization from system time master available 1: local synchronization available 2: no synchronization 2 Seconds high UINT16 2 bytes 4 Seconds low UINT32 4 bytes 8 Nanoseconds UINT32 4 bytes The start value (initial value) is 01.01.1970, 0:00 Note If you use the FAQ from the section Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp (Page 53), the status is always 2. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 242 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.6 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) E.6 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) E.6.1 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) version 1 Measured variables of the module The smallest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...5 Min. voltage L1-N REAL V 1000000 70 6...9 Min. voltage L2-N REAL V 1000000 71 10...13 Min. voltage L3-N REAL V 1000000 72 14...17 Min. voltage L1-L2 REAL V 1800000 73 18...21 Min. voltage L2-L3 REAL V 1800000 74 22...25 Min. voltage L3-L1 REAL V 1800000 75 26...29 Min. current L1 1 REAL A 100000 76 30...33 Min. current L2 1 REAL A 100000 77 34...37 Min. current L3 1 REAL A 100000 78 38...41 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA +3.0 x 42...45 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 80 VA +3.0 x 109 81 109 82 46...49 Min. apparent power L3 REAL 109 79 50...53 Min. active power L1 REAL W +3.0 x 54...57 Min. active power L2 REAL W +3.0 x 109 83 W +3.0 x 109 84 109 62180 58...61 Min. active power L3 REAL 62...65 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var +3.0 x 66...69 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var +3.0 x 109 62280 109 62380 70...73 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var +3.0 x 74...77 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 1 88 78...81 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 1 89 82...85 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 1 90 86...89 Min. frequency REAL Hz 65 90...93 Min. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA 91 +3.0 x 109 97 109 95 94...97 Min. active power L1L2L3 REAL W +3.0 x 98...101 Min. reactive power Qn L1L2L3 REAL var +3.0 x 109 61139 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 243 Measured value data records E.6 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default 102...105 Min. power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 1 98 106...109 Min. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var +3.0 x 110...113 Min. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var +3.0 x 109 86 109 109 85 87 114...117 Min. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var +3.0 x 118...121 Min. mean voltage L-N REAL V 1000000 92 122...125 Min. mean voltage L-L REAL V 1800000 93 126...129 Min. mean current L1L2L3 REAL A 100000 94 130...133 Min. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0 62172 134...137 Min. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0 62272 138...141 Min. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0 62372 142...145 Min. fundamental current L1 REAL A 1000000 62173 146...149 Min. fundamental current L2 REAL A 1000000 62273 150...153 Min. fundamental current L3 REAL A 1000000 62373 154...157 Min. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 62175 109 62275 158...161 Min. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA +3.0 x 162...165 Min. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 62375 var +3.0 x 109 62174 109 62274 166...169 1 Measured value ID Min. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL 170...173 Min. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var +3.0 x 174...177 Min. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var +3.0 x 109 62374 109 62176 178...181 Min. fundamental active power L1 REAL W +3.0 x 182...185 Min. fundamental active power L2 REAL W +3.0 x 109 62276 109 62376 186...189 Min. fundamental active power L3 REAL W +3.0 x 190...193 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - 1 62177 194...197 Min. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - 1 62277 198...201 Min. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - 1 62377 202...205 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 100 62170 206...209 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 100 62270 210...213 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 100 62370 214...217 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 100 62171 218...221 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 100 62271 222...225 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 100 62371 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 244 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) Measured variables of the module The smallest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured values (REAL 4 bytes) are each followed by a time stamp (PN Time 12 bytes). The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...17 Min. voltage L1-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 70 18...33 Min. voltage L2-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 71 34...49 Min. voltage L3-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 72 50...65 Min. voltage L1-L2 REAL + PN Time V 1800000 73 66...81 Min. voltage L2-L3 REAL + PN Time V 1800000 74 82...97 Min. voltage L3-L1 REAL + PN Time V 1800000 75 98...113 Min. current L1 1 REAL + PN Time A 100000 76 114...129 Min. current L2 1 REAL + PN Time A 100000 77 130...145 Min. current L3 1 REAL + PN Time A 100000 78 146...161 Min. apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 79 162...177 Min. apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 80 178...193 Min. apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 81 194...209 Min. active power L1 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 82 210...225 Min. active power L2 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 83 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 245 Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 226...241 Min. active power L3 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 84 242...257 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62180 258...273 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62280 274...289 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62380 290...305 Min. power factor L1 REAL + PN Time - 1 88 306...321 Min. power factor L2 REAL + PN Time - 1 89 322...337 Min. power factor L3 REAL + PN Time - 1 90 338...353 Min. frequency REAL + PN Time Hz 65 91 354...369 Min. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 97 370...385 Min. active power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 95 386...401 Min. reactive power Qn L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 61139 402...417 Min. power factor L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time - 1 98 418...433 Min. reactive power Qn L1 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 85 434...449 Min. reactive power Qn L2 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 86 450...465 Min. reactive power Qn L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 87 466...481 Min. mean voltage L-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 92 482...497 Min. mean voltage L-L REAL + PN Time V 1800000 93 498...513 Min. mean current L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time A 100000 94 514...529 Min. fundamental voltage L1 REAL + PN Time V 0 62172 530...545 Min. fundamental voltage L2 REAL + PN Time V 0 62272 546...561 Min. fundamental voltage L3 REAL + PN Time V 0 62372 562...577 Min. fundamental current L1 REAL + PN Time A 1000000 62173 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 246 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) 1 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 578...593 Min. fundamental current L2 REAL + PN Time A 1000000 62273 594...609 Min. fundamental current L3 REAL + PN Time A 1000000 62373 610...625 Min. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 62175 626...641 Min. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 62275 642...657 Min. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 62375 658...673 Min. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62174 674...689 Min. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62274 690...705 Min. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62374 706...721 Min. fundamental active power L1 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 62176 722...737 Min. fundamental active power L2 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 62276 738...753 Min. fundamental active power L3 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 62376 754...769 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL + PN Time - 1 62177 770...785 Min. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL + PN Time - 1 62277 786...801 Min. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL + PN Time - 1 62377 802...817 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62170 818...833 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62270 834...849 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62370 850...865 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62171 866...881 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62271 882...897 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62371 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 247 Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.8.1 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 0 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65500 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 8...11 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 12...15 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 16...19 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 22 24...27 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 28...31 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 32...39 Apparent energy L1 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61184 40...47 Total active energy L1 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L1 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61186 56...59 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 40 60...63 Max. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 46 64...67 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61185 49 ... +3.0 x 109 52 ... +3.0 x 109 62160 72...75 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 58 80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 70 84...87 Min. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 88...91 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 76 ... +3.0 x 109 79 ... +3.0 x 109 82 92...95 Min. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62180 100...103 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 88 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 248 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.8.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65500 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 8...11 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 12...15 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 16...19 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 22 24...27 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 28...31 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 32...39 Apparent energy L1 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61184 40...47 Total active energy L1 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L1 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61186 56...59 Max. voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 40 60...63 Max. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 46 64...67 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61185 49 ... +3.0 x 109 52 ... +3.0 x 109 62160 72...75 Max. reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 80...83 Min. voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 70 84...87 Min. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 76 88...91 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 58 79 92...95 Min. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62180 100...103 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 88 109 ... +3.0 x Reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 108...111 Current L1 10-12 cycles REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62130 112...115 Current L1 10-12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62133 116...119 Max. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 120...123 Min. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x ... +3.0 x 124...127 Fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 109 82 104...107 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 16 55 85 62122 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 249 Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 128...131 Fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 136...139 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62124 140...143 Fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62126 144...147 Fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62127 148...151 Max. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62152 152...155 Max. fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62153 156...159 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62123 132...135 160...163 109 Measured value ID 109 62125 62155 ... +3.0 x 109 62154 ... +3.0 x 109 62156 164...167 Max. fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 168...171 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62157 172...175 Min. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62172 176...179 Min. fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 180...183 Min. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 62173 ... +3.0 x 109 62175 ... +3.0 x 109 62174 184...187 Min. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 188...191 Min. fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62176 192...195 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62177 196...199 THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 200...203 THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 204...207 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62150 208...211 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62151 212...215 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62170 216...219 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62171 220...223 Voltage dip - value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62194 224...227 Voltage dip - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62199 228...231 Voltage swell - value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62195 232...235 Voltage swell - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62200 236...239 Voltage peak value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62196 240...243 Current peak value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62197 244...247 Overcurrent value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62198 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 250 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.9.1 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 0 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L2 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65501 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 8...11 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 12...15 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 11 109 16...19 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 23 24...27 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 28...31 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 32...39 Apparent energy L2 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61204 40...47 Total active energy L2 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L2 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61206 56...59 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 41 60...63 Max. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 64...67 Max. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 to +1.8 x 10308 61205 50 ... +3.0 x 109 53 ... +3.0 x 109 62260 72...75 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 84...87 Min. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 77 88...91 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 59 ... +3.0 x 109 80 92...95 Min. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 83 62280 100...103 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 251 Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.9.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L2 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65501 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage L2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 8...11 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 12...15 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 11 109 16...19 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 23 24...27 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 28...31 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 32...39 Apparent energy L2 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61204 40...47 Total active energy L2 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L2 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61206 56...59 Max. voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 41 60...63 Max. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 64...67 Max. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61205 50 ... +3.0 x 109 53 ... +3.0 x 109 62260 72...75 Max. reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 59 80...83 Min. voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 84...87 Min. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 88...91 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 77 ... +3.0 x 109 80 ... +3.0 x 109 83 92...95 Min. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62280 100...103 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 109 104...107 Reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 108...111 Current L2 10-12 cycles REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62230 112...115 Current L2 10-12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62233 116...119 Max. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 120...123 Min. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x ... +3.0 x 124...127 Fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 109 109 17 56 86 62222 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 252 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 128...131 Fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 136...139 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62224 140...143 Fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62226 144...147 Fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62227 148...151 Max. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62252 152...155 Max. fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62253 156...159 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62223 132...135 160...163 109 Measured value ID 109 62225 62255 ... +3.0 x 109 62254 ... +3.0 x 109 62256 164...167 Max. fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 168...171 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62257 172...175 Min. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62272 176...179 Min. fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 180...183 Min. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 62273 ... +3.0 x 109 62275 ... +3.0 x 109 62274 184...187 Min. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 188...191 Min. fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62276 192...195 Min. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62277 196...199 THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 200...203 THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 204...207 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62250 208...211 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62251 212...215 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62270 216...219 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62271 220...223 Voltage dip - value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62294 224...227 Voltage dip - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62299 228...231 Voltage swell - value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62295 232...235 Voltage swell - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62300 236...239 Voltage peak value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62296 240...243 Current peak value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62297 244...247 Overcurrent value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62298 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 253 Measured value data records E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.10.1 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...3 Qualifier L3 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65502 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 8...11 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 12...15 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 12 109 16...19 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 24 24...27 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 28...31 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 32...39 Apparent energy L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61224 40...47 Total active energy L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61226 56...59 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 42 60...63 Max. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 64...67 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 to +1.8 x 10308 61225 51 ... +3.0 x 109 54 ... +3.0 x 109 62360 72...75 Max. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 60 80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 84...87 Min. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 88...91 Min. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 78 ... +3.0 x 109 81 ... +3.0 x 109 62380 92...95 Min. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 97 100...103 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 254 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.10.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L3 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65502 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage L3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 8...11 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 12...15 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 12 109 16...19 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 24 24...27 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 28...31 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 32...39 Apparent energy L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61224 40...47 Total active energy L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61226 56...59 Max. voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 42 60...63 Max. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 64...67 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61225 51 ... +3.0 x 109 54 ... +3.0 x 109 62360 72...75 Max. reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 80...83 Min. voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 84...87 Min. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 78 88...91 Min. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 60 81 92...95 Min. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62380 100...103 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 109 ... +3.0 x Reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 108...111 Current L3 10-12 cycles REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62330 112...115 Current L3 10-12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62333 116...119 Max. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 120...123 Min. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x ... +3.0 x 124...127 Fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 109 84 104...107 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 18 57 87 62322 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 255 Measured value data records E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 128...131 Fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 136...139 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62324 140...143 Fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62326 144...147 Fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62327 148...151 Max. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62352 152...155 Max. fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62353 156...159 Max. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Max. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62323 132...135 160...163 109 Measured value ID 109 62325 62355 ... +3.0 x 109 62354 ... +3.0 x 109 62356 164...167 Max. fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 168...171 Max. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62357 172...175 Min. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62372 176...179 Min. fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 180...183 Min. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 62373 ... +3.0 x 109 62375 ... +3.0 x 109 62374 184...187 Min. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 188...191 Min. fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62376 192...195 Min. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62377 196...199 THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 200...203 THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 204...207 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62350 208...211 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62351 212...215 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62370 216...219 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62371 220...223 Voltage dip - value L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62394 224...227 Voltage dip - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62399 228...231 Voltage swell - value L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62395 232...235 Voltage swell - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62400 236...239 Voltage peak value L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62396 240...243 Current peak value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62397 244...247 Overcurrent value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62398 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 256 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.11 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) E.11 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) E.11.1 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Operating hours counter L1L2L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 6...9 Operating hours counter L1 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65505 h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65506 1038 65507 10...13 Operating hours counter L2 REAL 1038 65504 14...17 Operating hours counter L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 18...19 Status limit violation GW 1...16 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509 20...21 Status of energy counter overflows 1 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508 22...25 Counter limit violation GW 1 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65510 26...29 Counter limit violation GW 2 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65511 30...33 Counter limit violation GW 3 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65512 34...37 Counter limit violation GW 4 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65513 38...41 Counter limit violation GW 5 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65514 42...45 Counter limit violation GW 6 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65515 46...49 Counter limit violation GW 7 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65516 50...53 Counter limit violation GW 8 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65517 54...57 Counter limit violation GW 9 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65518 58...61 Counter limit violation GW 10 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65519 62...65 Counter limit violation GW 11 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65520 66...69 Counter limit violation GW 12 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65521 70...73 Counter limit violation GW 13 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65522 74...77 Counter limit violation GW 14 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65523 78...81 Counter limit violation GW 15 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65524 82...85 Counter limit violation GW 16 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65525 86...87 Qualifier L1L2L3 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 257 Measured value data records E.12 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 88...91 Power quality analysis - Qualifier UDINT Bit string - 65496 92...103 Current module time PNIOTime sec - 65497 Energy counters count periodically - counter overflow at: Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1 Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1 Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1 Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1 Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1 Bit 5 = 1: Active energy inflow L2 Bit 6 = 1: Active energy outflow L2 Bit 7 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L2 Bit 8 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L2 Bit 9 = 1: Apparent energy L2 Bit 10 = 1: Active energy inflow L3 Bit 11 = 1: Active energy outflow L3 Bit 12 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L3 Bit 13 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L3 Bit 14 = 1: Apparent energy L3 Bit 15: Reserved 1 E.12 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151) The length and structure of the data record DS 151 depends on the parameter assignment of the data record DS 135 (Page 160). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 0 - 1 Number of measured values UINT8 - 0 - 2 Measured value 1 corresponding to measured value ID 1 in DS135 Depending on the corresponding measured value ID 3 Measured value 2 corresponding to measured value ID 2 in DS135 Depending on the corresponding measured value ID ... ... Depending on the corresponding measured value ID ... m Measured value n corresponding to measured value ID n in DS135 Depending on the corresponding measured value ID Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 258 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 Neutral current IN REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149 6...9 Neutral current 10/12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61150 10...13 Total current IL1+IL2+IL3-IN REAL A -100000.0 ... 100000.0 61153 14...17 Fundamental reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 61154 109 18...21 Max. fundamental reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 22...25 Min. fundamental reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 61156 26...29 Power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 109 ... +3.0 x 61155 30...33 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 34...37 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62124 62224 109 38...41 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 42...45 Fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62324 62127 46...49 Fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62227 50...53 Fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62327 54...57 THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 58...61 THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 62...65 THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 66...69 THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 70...73 THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 74...77 THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 78...81 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62150 82...85 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62250 86...89 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62350 90...93 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62151 94...97 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62251 98...101 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62351 102...105 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62170 106...109 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62270 110...113 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62370 114...117 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62171 118...121 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62271 122...125 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62371 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 259 Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 126...129 Voltage dip - value L1 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62194 130...133 Voltage dip - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62199 134...137 Voltage dip - value L2 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62294 138...141 Voltage dip - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62299 142...145 Voltage dip - value L3 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62394 146...149 Voltage dip - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62399 150...153 Voltage increase - value L1 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62195 154...157 Voltage increase - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62200 158...161 Voltage increase - value L2 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62295 162...165 Voltage increase - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62300 166...169 Voltage increase - value L3 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62395 170...173 Voltage increase - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62400 174...177 Voltage peak value L1 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62196 178...181 Voltage peak value L2 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62296 182...185 Voltage peak value L3 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62396 186...189 Current peak value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62197 190...193 Current peak value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62297 194...197 Current peak value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62397 198...201 Overcurrent value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62198 202...205 Overcurrent value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62298 206...209 Overcurrent value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62398 210...213 Amplitude symmetry Voltage U2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61157 214...217 Amplitude symmetry Current Iunsym REAL % 0 ... 100 61158 218...221 Power quality analysis - Qualifier UDINT Bit string - 65496 222...233 Current module time PNIO Time sec - 65497 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 260 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 6...9 Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 1 10...13 Harmonics 1: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63000 14...17 Harmonics 2: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63002 18...21 Harmonics 3: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63004 22...25 Harmonics 4: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63006 26...29 Harmonics 5: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63008 30...33 Harmonics 6: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63010 34...37 Harmonics 7: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63012 38...41 Harmonics 8: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63014 42...45 Harmonics 9: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63016 46...49 Harmonics 10: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63018 50...53 Harmonics 11: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63020 54...57 Harmonics 12: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63022 58...61 Harmonics 13: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63024 62...65 Harmonics 14: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63026 66...69 Harmonics 15: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63028 70...73 Harmonics 16: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63030 74...77 Harmonics 17: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63032 78...81 Harmonics 18: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63034 82...85 Harmonics 19: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63036 86...89 Harmonics 20: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63038 90...93 Harmonics 21: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63040 94...97 Harmonics 22: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63042 98...101 Harmonics 23: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63044 102...105 Harmonics 24: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63046 106...109 Harmonics 25: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63048 110...113 Harmonics 26: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63050 114...117 Harmonics 27: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63052 118...121 Harmonics 28: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63054 122...125 Harmonics 29: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63056 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 261 Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 126...129 Harmonics 30: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63058 130...133 Harmonics 31: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63060 134...137 Harmonics 32: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63062 138...141 Harmonics 33: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63064 142...145 Harmonics 34: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63066 146...149 Harmonics 35: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63068 150...153 Harmonics 36: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63070 154...157 Harmonics 37: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63072 158...161 Harmonics 38: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63074 162...165 Harmonics 39: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63076 166...169 Harmonics 40: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63078 170...173 THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 174...177 Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 2 178...181 Harmonics 1: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63400 182...185 Harmonics 2: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63402 186...189 Harmonics 3: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63404 190...193 Harmonics 4: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63406 194...197 Harmonics 5: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63408 198...201 Harmonics 6: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63410 202...205 Harmonics 7: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63412 206...209 Harmonics 8: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63414 210...213 Harmonics 9: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63416 214...217 Harmonics 10: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63418 218...221 Harmonics 11: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63420 222...225 Harmonics 12: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63422 226...229 Harmonics 13: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63424 230...233 Harmonics 14: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63426 234...237 Harmonics 15: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63428 238...241 Harmonics 16: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63430 242...245 Harmonics 17: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63432 246...249 Harmonics 18: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63434 250...253 Harmonics 19: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63436 254...257 Harmonics 20: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63438 258...261 Harmonics 21: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63440 262...265 Harmonics 22: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63442 266...269 Harmonics 23: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63444 270...273 Harmonics 24: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63446 274...277 Harmonics 25: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63448 278...281 Harmonics 26: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63450 281...285 Harmonics 27: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63452 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 262 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 286...289 Harmonics 28: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63454 290...293 Harmonics 29: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63456 294...297 Harmonics 30: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63458 298...301 Harmonics 31: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63460 302...305 Harmonics 32: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63462 306...309 Harmonics 33: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63464 310...313 Harmonics 34: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63466 314...317 Harmonics 35: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63468 318...321 Harmonics 36: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63470 322...325 Harmonics 37: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63472 326...329 Harmonics 38: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63474 330...333 Harmonics 39: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63476 334...337 Harmonics 40: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63478 338...341 THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 342...345 Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 3 346...349 Harmonics 1: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63800 350...353 Harmonics 2: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63802 354...357 Harmonics 3: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63804 358...361 Harmonics 4: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63806 362...365 Harmonics 5: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63808 366...369 Harmonics 6: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63810 370...373 Harmonics 7: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63812 374...377 Harmonics 8: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63814 378...381 Harmonics 9: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63816 382...385 Harmonics 10: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63818 386...389 Harmonics 11: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63820 390...393 Harmonics 12: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63822 394...397 Harmonics 13: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63824 398...401 Harmonics 14: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63826 402...405 Harmonics 15: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63828 406...409 Harmonics 16: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63830 410...413 Harmonics 17: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63832 414...417 Harmonics 18: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63834 418...421 Harmonics 19: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63836 422...425 Harmonics 20: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63838 426...429 Harmonics 21: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63840 430...433 Harmonics 22: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63842 434...437 Harmonics 23: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63844 438...441 Harmonics 24: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63846 442...445 Harmonics 25: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63848 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 263 Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 446...449 Harmonics 26: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63850 450...453 Harmonics 27: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63852 454...457 Harmonics 28: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63854 458...461 Harmonics 29: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63856 462...465 Harmonics 30: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63858 466...469 Harmonics 31: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63860 470...473 Harmonics 32: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63862 474...477 Harmonics 33: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63864 478...481 Harmonics 34: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63866 482...485 Harmonics 35: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63868 486...489 Harmonics 36: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63870 490...493 Harmonics 37: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63872 494...497 Harmonics 38: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63874 498...501 Harmonics 39: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63876 502...505 Harmonics 40: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63878 506...517 current module time PNIOTime sec - 65497 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 264 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 163)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 6...9 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 10...13 Harmonics 1: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63001 14...17 Harmonics 2: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63003 18...21 Harmonics 3: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63005 22...25 Harmonics 4: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63007 26...29 Harmonics 5: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63009 30...33 Harmonics 6: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63011 34...37 Harmonics 7: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63013 38...41 Harmonics 8: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63015 42...45 Harmonics 9: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63017 46...49 Harmonics 10: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63019 50...53 Harmonics 11: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63021 54...57 Harmonics 12: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63023 58...61 Harmonics 13: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63025 62...65 Harmonics 14: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63027 66...69 Harmonics 15: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63029 70...73 Harmonics 16: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63031 74...77 Harmonics 17: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63033 78...81 Harmonics 18: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63035 82...85 Harmonics 19: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63037 86...89 Harmonics 20: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63039 90...93 Harmonics 21: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63041 94...97 Harmonics 22: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63043 98...101 Harmonics 23: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63045 102...105 Harmonics 24: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63047 106...109 Harmonics 25: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63049 110...113 Harmonics 26: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63051 114...117 Harmonics 27: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63053 118...121 Harmonics 28: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63055 122...125 Harmonics 29: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63057 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 265 Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 126...129 Harmonics 30: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63059 130...133 Harmonics 31: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63061 134...137 Harmonics 32: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63063 138...141 Harmonics 33: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63065 142...145 Harmonics 34: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63067 146...149 Harmonics 35: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63069 150...153 Harmonics 36: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63071 154...157 Harmonics 37: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63073 158...161 Harmonics 38: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63075 162...165 Harmonics 39: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63077 166...169 Harmonics 40: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63079 170...173 THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 174...177 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 178...181 Harmonics 1: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63401 182...185 Harmonics 2: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63403 186...189 Harmonics 3: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63405 190...193 Harmonics 4: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63407 194...197 Harmonics 5: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63409 198...201 Harmonics 6: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63411 202...205 Harmonics 7: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63413 206...209 Harmonics 8: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63415 210...213 Harmonics 9: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63417 214...217 Harmonics 10: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63419 218...221 Harmonics 11: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63421 222...225 Harmonics 12: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63423 226...229 Harmonics 13: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63425 230...233 Harmonics 14: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63427 234...237 Harmonics 15: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63429 238...241 Harmonics 16: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63431 242...245 Harmonics 17: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63433 246...249 Harmonics 18: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63435 250...253 Harmonics 19: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63437 254...257 Harmonics 20: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63439 258...261 Harmonics 21: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63441 262...265 Harmonics 22: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63443 266...269 Harmonics 23: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63445 270...273 Harmonics 24: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63447 274...277 Harmonics 25: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63449 278...281 Harmonics 26: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63451 281...285 Harmonics 27: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63453 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 266 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 286...289 Harmonics 28: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63455 290...293 Harmonics 29: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63457 294...297 Harmonics 30: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63459 298...301 Harmonics 31: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63461 302...305 Harmonics 32: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63463 306...309 Harmonics 33: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63465 310...313 Harmonics 34: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63467 314...317 Harmonics 35: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63469 318...321 Harmonics 36: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63471 322...325 Harmonics 37: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63473 326...329 Harmonics 38: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63475 330...333 Harmonics 39: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63477 334...337 Harmonics 40: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63479 338...341 THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 342...345 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 346...349 Harmonics 1: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63801 350...353 Harmonics 2: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63803 354...357 Harmonics 3: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63805 358...361 Harmonics 4: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63807 362...365 Harmonics 5: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63809 366...369 Harmonics 6: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63811 370...373 Harmonics 7: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63813 374...377 Harmonics 8: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 6381 378...381 Harmonics 9: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63817 382...385 Harmonics 10: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63819 386...389 Harmonics 11: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63821 390...393 Harmonics 12: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63823 394...397 Harmonics 13: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63825 398...401 Harmonics 14: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63827 402...405 Harmonics 15: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63829 406...409 Harmonics 16: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63831 410...413 Harmonics 17: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63833 414...417 Harmonics 18: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63835 418...421 Harmonics 19: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63837 422...425 Harmonics 20: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63839 426...429 Harmonics 21: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63841 430...433 Harmonics 22: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63843 434...437 Harmonics 23: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63845 438...441 Harmonics 24: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63847 442...445 Harmonics 25: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63849 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 267 Measured value data records E.16 Information data record on available measured values (DS 170) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 446...449 Harmonics 26: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63851 450...453 Harmonics 27: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63853 454...457 Harmonics 28: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63855 458...461 Harmonics 29: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63857 462...465 Harmonics 30: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63859 466...469 Harmonics 31: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63861 470...473 Harmonics 32: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63863 474...477 Harmonics 33: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63865 478...481 Harmonics 34: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63867 482...485 Harmonics 35: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63869 486...489 Harmonics 36: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63871 490...493 Harmonics 37: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63873 494...497 Harmonics 38: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63875 498...501 Harmonics 39: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63877 502...505 Harmonics 40: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63879 506...517 Current module time PNIOTime sec - 65497 E.16 Information data record on available measured values (DS 170) Measured variables of the module Byte Name Data type 0 Version BYTE 1 Reserved BYTE 2...3 Number of IDs UINT16 4...5 ID measured value 1 UINT16 5...6 ID measured value 2 UINT16 ... ... ... 1149...1150 ID measured value 580 UINT16 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) 268 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Tips and tricks F.1 F Tips and tricks Processing and visualizing energy data On the basis of an application example we show you how the measured values of the AI Energy Meter can be processed further and visualized. You can find this application example on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/86299299). Overview of the measuring data We provide you with an overview of the assignment of the measured values to the user data variants and data records in an Excel file. You will find the Excel file on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755917). Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp In an application example we show you how to synchronize the time with the AI Energy Meter HF and work with measured values with time stamps. You can find this application example on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890). Measured values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 Measured values are represented as negative values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 if the value range of the integer format (32767 dec) is exceeded. This is not an error in the measured value. Solution: Select hexadecimal representation. Conversion of 64-bit floating-point numbers If you cannot process 64-bit floating-point numbers in your automation system, we recommend conversion to 32-bit floating-point numbers. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For a description of the conversion of the 64-bit floating-point numbers (data type LREAL) into 32-bit floating-point numbers (data type REAL) please refer to the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56600676). See also FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109755917) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 269 SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual 07/2018 A5E42674880-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring Configuration / address 4 ___________________ space 5 ___________________ Quick start Reading and processing 6 ___________________ measured values 7 ___________________ Energy counters 8 ___________________ Operating hours counter 9 ___________________ Limit monitoring Minimum and maximum 10 ___________________ values Power quality analysis 11 ___________________ functions Phase-based measured 12 ___________________ values 13 ___________________ Parameters 14 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 15 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data records B ___________________ Measured variables C ___________________ Module versions D ___________________ User data variants E ___________________ Measured value data records F ___________________ Tips and tricks Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E42674880-AA 08/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Current measuring transformer: When the term "current measuring transformer" is used in this manual, it applies both to current/voltage transformers and Rogowski coils. Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 4 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 14 3 4 2.1 Properties of the AI Energy Meter HF.....................................................................................14 2.2 Area of application ..................................................................................................................16 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO ............................18 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 20 3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................20 3.2 Connection examples .............................................................................................................23 3.3 Selection of a current measuring transformer ........................................................................27 Configuration / address space ............................................................................................................... 28 4.1 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................28 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Selecting the module versions ................................................................................................29 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 .......................................................................29 Module versions at configuration with GSD file ......................................................................30 Changing over the user data variant during operation ...........................................................31 Recommendations for selecting the module version ..............................................................33 4.3 Applicable modules .................................................................................................................34 5 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 36 6 Reading and processing measured values ............................................................................................ 38 7 6.1 Basics for reading measured values .......................................................................................38 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Quality information ..................................................................................................................41 Quality information in byte 1 of the user data .........................................................................41 Quality information with measured value IDs .........................................................................43 Operating quadrant .................................................................................................................46 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically ..............................................................47 6.4 Read out measured values acyclically using data records .....................................................49 6.5 Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp .........................................................................50 Energy counters .................................................................................................................................... 51 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy ....................................................................................52 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters ............................................54 Preset start values for the energy meters ...............................................................................55 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately.......................................................56 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit ........................................................58 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 5 Table of contents 8 9 10 11 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters .............................................................................. 61 7.4 Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter .......................................................... 63 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? .............................. 64 Operating hours counter ....................................................................................................................... 66 8.1 Evaluating operating hours counters ..................................................................................... 67 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters .................................................. 68 Preset start values for operating hours counters ................................................................... 69 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately ...................................................... 70 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit ....................................................... 71 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters .................................................................... 73 Limit monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 75 9.1 How limit monitoring works .................................................................................................... 75 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring .................................................... 76 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation ..................................................... 78 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring ................................................................................. 80 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................................. 82 10.1 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................. 82 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values ............................................................................. 83 Power quality analysis functions ............................................................................................................ 86 11.1 Power quality analysis status ................................................................................................. 87 11.2 Harmonics analysis ................................................................................................................ 88 11.3 Reactive power compensation ............................................................................................... 88 11.4 Detection of residual current .................................................................................................. 89 11.5 Active factor and power factor ............................................................................................... 89 11.6 Neutral current In ................................................................................................................... 90 11.7 Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values ................................................................. 91 12 Phase-based measured values ............................................................................................................. 92 13 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 94 14 13.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 94 13.2 Description of parameters ...................................................................................................... 99 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................107 14.1 Status and error display ....................................................................................................... 107 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.2 Interrupts .............................................................................................................................. 109 Hardware interrupts ............................................................................................................. 109 Diagnostics interrupt ............................................................................................................ 110 14.3 Diagnostic alarms................................................................................................................. 110 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 6 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Table of contents 14.4 14.4.1 14.4.1.1 14.4.1.2 14.4.1.3 14.4.1.4 14.4.2 14.4.2.1 14.4.2.2 14.4.2.3 14.4.2.4 15 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 131 15.1 A B D A.1 Configuration via parameter data records ............................................................................138 A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module .......................................139 A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring ...........................................152 A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping ............................156 A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping ..................................159 Measured variables ............................................................................................................................. 162 Measured variables for connection type ...............................................................................162 Module versions .................................................................................................................................. 191 C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" .....................................................................................................191 C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" .................................................................................................194 C.3 "User-specific" module version .............................................................................................200 C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" .......................202 User data variants ............................................................................................................................... 204 D.1 E Technical specifications ........................................................................................................131 Parameter data records....................................................................................................................... 138 B.1 C Diagnostics response............................................................................................................112 Voltage diagnostics ...............................................................................................................113 Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow ..........................................................................................113 Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value ........................................................................115 Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value ...........................................................................117 Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage ...........................................................120 Current diagnostics ...............................................................................................................122 Diagnostics: Overload ...........................................................................................................122 Low limit for measuring current undershot............................................................................124 Peak values of the instantaneous values for current ............................................................126 Overcurrent of the current half value ....................................................................................128 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data ......................................204 Measured value data records .............................................................................................................. 224 E.1 Overview of all measured value data records ......................................................................224 E.2 E.2.1 E.2.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) ..........................................225 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2.......................225 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3.......................227 E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ................................................................................230 E.4 E.4.1 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) ................................................235 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) version 1 ................................235 E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) ......................237 E.6 E.6.1 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) .................................................241 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) version 1 .................................241 E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) .......................243 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 7 Table of contents F E.8 E.8.1 E.8.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) .................... 246 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0 .... 246 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1 .... 247 E.9 E.9.1 E.9.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) .................... 249 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0 .... 249 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1 .... 250 E.10 E.10.1 E.10.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) .................... 252 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0 .... 252 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1 .... 253 E.11 E.11.1 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) ...... 255 Measured value data record for advanced measured values and status values (DS 150) version 1 ...................................................................................................................... 255 E.12 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151) .................................... 257 E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) ....................................... 258 E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) ............................................. 260 E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) ............................................. 264 E.16 Information data record on available measured values (DS 170) ....................................... 268 Tips and tricks......................................................................................................................................269 F.1 Tips and tricks ...................................................................................................................... 269 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 8 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 9 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 10 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 11 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 12 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 13 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the AI Energy Meter HF Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the module AI Energy Meter HF Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 14 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties of the AI Energy Meter HF Properties The module has the following technical properties: Measurement of electrical variables from single-phase, two-phase and three-phase supply networks Max. nominal voltage between two line conductors 480 V AC Retentive storage of the counter values Use on frequency converters Recording of: - Voltages - Currents - Phase angles - Power - Energy / electrical work - Frequencies - Minimum and maximum values with time stamp - Power factors - Operating hours - Limits - Power quality data for voltages and currents The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions HW version Function FW version STEP 7 TIA Portal GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X --- Calibration in runtime FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 --- --- Identification data I&M0 to I&M3 FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X X Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X X Diagnostic interrupts FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X X Hardware interrupts FS01 V6.0.0 or higher V15 or higher with HSP0253 X --- Note The AI Energy Meter HF is released as of TIA Portal V15.0.0.2. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 15 Product overview 2.2 Area of application Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: BaseUnit type U0 Labeling strips Reference identification label You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/58649293) system manual. 2.2 Area of application Introduction Energy efficiency is playing an increasingly important role in industry. Rising energy prices, increasing pressure to improve profitability and the growing awareness of climate protection are important factors for reducing energy costs and for introducing an energy data management system. Where can you use the AI Energy Meter HF? AI Energy Meter HF is designed for machine-level deployment in an ET 200SP distributed I/O system. AI Energy Meter HF records over 500 different electrical measurement and energy values. It lets you create transparency about the energy requirements of individual components of a production plant even down to the machine level. You can use the following measurement values supplied by the AI Energy Meter HF for the following applications: Energy consumption Power consumption Power quality Forecasts of consumption Efficiency Power consumption measurements are relevant for load management and maintenance. In addition, you can use the measurements for emission reporting and for determining the CO2 footprint. Note Measuring dangerous electrical quantities The AI Energy Meter HF is not tested according to DIN EN 61010-2-030 and may therefore not be used to verify, measure or monitor protective measures according to DIN EN 61557. Qualified personnel must ensure through additional measures that no danger ensues for humans and the environment in case of an incorrect display. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 16 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Product overview 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO TB, TT and IT system The AI Energy Meter HF can be used in TN, TT and IT systems. Measuring with AI Energy Meter HF A typical supply network of a production plant is usually divided into three voltage ranges: The infeed of the entire plant The subdistribution, for example, to individual lines within the plant The end consumers such as the machines in the lines. The following figure shows the measurement in an electricity supply network: Figure 2-2 Use of the AI Energy Meter HF Advantages of the AI Energy Meter HF The AI Energy Meter HF has the following advantages: Space-saving especially for use in control cabinet PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP (depending on the interface module in use) Multiple modules can be used with one interface module Extension of existing stations by components for energy recording Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 17 Product overview 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO You can read data records from the module or write them to the module with both PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. Operation of the module on PROFIBUS DP Please note that with PROFIBUS DP you can write data records up to a maximum length of 240 bytes to the module or read them from the module. PROFIBUS DPV 1 If the DP Master supports the DPV1, you can reconfigure in your user program with the parameter data records DS 128, DS 129, DS 130, DS 131 or DS 135. Note that the maximum data record length is 240 bytes for DS 135. The following applies for the measured value data records: DS 142: When you read the data record, the module returns the measured value data record DS 142 in version 2. DS 147, DS 148, DS 149: When you read the data record, the module returns the measured value data record in version 0. DS 154, DS 155, DS 161, DS 163, DS 164: When you read the data record, the module returns the first 240 bytes of the structure of the measured value data record. DS 151: You define the user-defined measured value data record DS 151 in the parameter data record DS 135. If the structure in the measured value data record DS 151 is greater than 240 bytes, the module returns the first 240 bytes of the structure. Information on the data record length of data records DS 135 and DS151 can be found in the appendix Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping (Page 159). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 18 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Product overview 2.3 Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DPV 0 If the DP Master does not support DPV1, you cannot reassign parameters which results in the following restrictions: There are no phase-specific parameters. All parameters apply for all three phases and the neutral conductor. The connection types und user data variants are limited. The voltage transformers are not configurable (default: 1:1). The current transformer value range primary current is restricted. The low limit for measuring current cannot be adjusted (default: 50 mA). Energy metering is performed continuously (the gate is not enabled). Min/Max calculation of values is enabled (the gate is not enabled). 3P4W can be set in the parameters for the connection type 3P3W. 3P4W can be set in the parameters for the connection type 3P3W1. Counting of operating hours is enabled (the gate is not enabled). The residual current measurement is enabled. Limit value monitoring cannot be used. Energy meter default cannot be used. The user-defined user data interface cannot be used. The user-defined data record cannot be used. The power quality analysis cannot be used. The separate settings for measuring the neutral current cannot be used. The measured value data records cannot be used. Operation of the module on PROFINET IO When reading data records partially from the module, please note the following: Measured value data record DS 142: - When you read the data record with a length of 240 bytes or less, the module returns the measured value data record DS 142 in version 2. - When you read the data record with a length of more than 240 bytes, the module returns the measured value data record DS 142 in version 3. Measured value data records DS 147, DS 148, DS 149: - When you read the data record with a length of 240 bytes or less, the module returns the measured value data record in version 0. - When you read the data record with a length of more than 240 bytes, the module returns the measured value data record in version 1. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 19 3 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life due to electric shock Touching live parts can lead to death or severe injuries. Before beginning any work deenergize the system and the AI Energy Meter HF and shortcircuit installed transformers. WARNING Danger to life, dangerous system conditions and material damage possible Removing and inserting the Al Energy Meter HF under live voltage is prohibited. If you remove and insert the AI Energy Meter HF under live voltage during operation, the transformers used can produce dangerous induction voltages and electric arcs and dangerous system conditions can arise. The AI Energy Meter HF may only be removed and inserted during operation if the measuring voltages supplied to the BaseUnit at terminals UL1 , UL2, UL3 are disconnected at all poles and special current/voltage transformer terminals are used that short-circuit the transformer on the secondary side on removal. Supplying the module The AI Energy Meter HF receives its supply voltage via the terminals 17 (24 V DC) and 18 (M). Protecting the connection cables To protect the connection cables at UL1, UL2 and UL3, make sure there is adequate cable protection, especially after cross-section transitions. If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter HF. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 20 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows the pin assignments for connecting voltage transformers, currentvoltage transformers and Rogowski coils. Microcontroller ULn Connection of voltage transformers Backplane bus interface ILn Connection of current/voltage transformers and Rogowski coils Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) N Neutral P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the AI Energy Meter HF Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 21 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Useable BaseUnits You can use the following BaseUnits: Type BU type U0 dark-colored Type BU type U0 light-colored A potential group opened with a light-colored BU type U0 must contain no dark-colored BaseUnit of BU type A0 or A1. Connection types The AI Energy Meter HF supports the following connection types: 3P4W1, 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load 3P4W, 3 phases, 4 conductors 2P3W, 2 phases, 3 conductors 1P2W, 1 phase, 2 conductors 3 x 1P2W, 3 x 1 phase, 2 conductors 3P3W, 3 phases, 3 conductors 3P3W1, 3 phases, 3 conductors, balanced load 3P4WI, 3 phases, 4 conductors (only for current measurement) The input circuit of the module must correspond to one of the listed connection types. Select the appropriate connection type for the intended use. You will find examples of connections in the section Connection examples (Page 23). Selection of a current/voltage transformer can be found in the section Selection of a current measuring transformer (Page 27). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 22 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.2 Connection examples 3.2 Connection examples The following figures show the connection of the AI Energy Meter HF for three-phase, twophase and single-phase measurements. Note that the AI Energy Meter HF must always be connected via a current measuring transformer. The use of voltage transformers is optional. Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current transformers 3P4W Any load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with three current measuring transformers and three voltage transformers. 3P4W1 Balanced load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with one current measuring transformer Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 23 Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type Wiring diagram Comment 3P4W1 Balanced load Three-phase measurement, 4 wires Connection with one current measuring transformer and one voltage transformer. 2P3W Any load Two-phase measurement, 3 conductors Connection with two current measuring transformers AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. 2P3W Any load Two-phase measurement, 3 conductors Connection with two current measuring transformers and two voltage transformers. AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. 1P2W Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors Measurement in an AC network with a current measuring transformer AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 24 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type Wiring diagram 1P2W Single-phase measurement, 2 conductors 3 x 1P2W 3 x single-phase measurement 3 x 1P2W Comment Measuring the load in an AC network with a current measuring transformer and a voltage transformer. AI Energy Meter HF supplies the value "0" for all measured values of Phase 2 and 3 as well as for some cross-phase measured values. Measurement with three current measuring transformers for any three loads that are each connected to one of the three phases. 3 x single-phase measurement Measurement with three current measuring transformers and three voltage transformers for any three loads that are each connected to one of the three phases. 3P3W Any load Three-phase measurement Connection with three current transformers Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 25 Wiring 3.2 Connection examples Connection type 3P3W Three-phase measurement Wiring diagram Comment Any load Connection with three current measuring transformers and three voltage transformers. 3P3W1 Three-phase measurement Balanced load Connection with one current measuring transformer. 3P3W1 Three-phase measurement Balanced load Connection with one current measuring transformer and one voltage transformer. 3P4WI Three-phase measurement (only for current measurement) Connection with three current transformers * If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter HF. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 26 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Wiring 3.3 Selection of a current measuring transformer 3.3 Selection of a current measuring transformer Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF is designed for the connection of current/voltage transformers with 333 mV interface and Rogowski coils. Note Overall accuracy For the total accuracy of the system consisting of the AI Energy Meter HF and current/voltage transformer or Rogowski coil, ensure that the secondary voltage of the current/voltage transformer or Rogowski coil lies in the specified accuracy range of the AI Energy Meters HF. Current/voltage transformer The accuracy specified by the transformer manufacturer, in contrast to pure current transformers, depends on the cable length and the resulting load resistance. Observe the specified minimum resistance of the evaluation electronics. The AI Energy Meter HF has a minimum differential input resistance at the channel terminals of 165 k and a typical input resistance of 185 k. Rogowski coils Rogowski coils are current/voltage transformers based on air coils. They do not work on a transformer principle like current transformers, but instead convert the rate of change of the current to a proportional voltage. This principle generates a phase shift of the secondary voltage vis-a-vis the primary current of 90. An integrator in the AI Energy Meter HF, connected by the selection of the current transformer type in the configuration, compensates the phase shift again. Interposing current transformers or integrators for connecting Rogowski coils are not required. The accuracy of Rogowski coils is independent of the cable length. Ensure that the required minimum input resistance of the evaluation electronics is observed. The AI Energy Meter HF has a minimum differential input resistance at the channel terminals of 165 k and a typical input resistance of 185 k. See also Technical specifications (Page 131) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 27 4 Configuration / address space 4.1 Configuring Introduction To configure the AI Energy Meter HF after connecting it, use configuration software such as STEP 7 (TIA Portal). In addition, you can also change numerous parameters of the AI Energy Meter HF in RUN via the user program. Configuring You configure the AI Energy Meter HF with: STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15 and HSP0253 GSD file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET Note Consistency check of the parameter assignment only with STEP 7 If you configure the AI Energy Meter HF using STEP 7 (TIA Portal), STEP 7 (TIA Portal) already checks the various parameters for consistency while they are being entered. If you configure the AI Energy Meter HF using a GSD file, a consistency check is not carried out. The module does not recognize incorrect entries until after the parameter data record has been transferred. If the module recognizes an invalid parameter, the module rejects the complete data record. Preferably use STEP 7 (TIA Portal) to configure the AI Energy Meter HF. The following instructions show the theoretical procedure for configuring the AI Energy Meter HF with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15 or higher with HSP0253. 1. Select the ET 200SP distributed I/O system you are using in the hardware catalog. 2. Insert the module into your station. 3. Open the device view of the ET 200SP and insert the AI Energy Meter HF. 4. Configure the AI Energy Meter HF to suit your requirements. Once the configuration has been compiled without errors, you can download the configuration to the CPU and commission the ET 200SP station while the AI Energy Meter HF is running. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 28 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2 Selecting the module versions Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF has different module versions. During the configuration you use the selection of the module version to specify which measured values can be read. Each module version supplies quality information via the input user data. With the exception of the module version "2 I / 2 Q" you can read the measured values as user data cyclically from the process image. At each module version you have the option to read measured value records from the AI Energy Meter HF by using the RDREC instruction asynchronously. Influence of the module version on the address space Note Influence of the AI Energy Meter HF on the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP The available address space of the ET 200SP is influenced by the following factors: * CPU or interface module * Plugged I/O modules The address space made additionally available by the AI Energy Meter HF is essentially influenced by the length of the user data supplied. The module version determines the length of the user data, which can be supplied by the AI Energy Meter HF at maximum. 4.2.1 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 Module versions with fixed user data assignment Module version User data 2I/2Q No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs Access to measured values 2-byte outputs through "Read data record". Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 191). EE@Industry E0 User data in accordance with EE@Industry measurement data profiles Information about the structure of the EE@Industry measured data profiles is available in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 202). EE@Industry E1 Address space 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs 4-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs EE@Industry E2 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs EE@Industry E3 104-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs Comment Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 29 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Module versions with selectable user data variants Module version User data Address space Comment 32 I / 20 Q User data selectable through defined user data variants 32-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the 32 I / 20 Q module version is available in appendix Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 194). Information about the user data variants at 32 I / 20 Q is available in appendix User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data (Page 204). User-specific User data selectable through user data mapping or through defined user data variant variable* / 20-byte outputs You have to activate the check box "User data-mapping" in STEP 7 to use the module version user-specifically. You can change over the user data variant during operation. Information about the structure of the user-specific module version is available in the appendix "User-specific" module version (Page 200). * 16 ... 256 bytes in steps of 16 bytes, depending on the mapped measured values 4.2.2 Module versions at configuration with GSD file Module versions with fixed user data assignment Module version User data Address space Comment 2I/2Q No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs 2-byte outputs Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q module version is available in the appendix Module version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 191). 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs Information about the structure of the EE@Industry measured data profiles is available in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 202). Access to measured values through "Read data record". E0 E1 User data in accordance with EE@Industry measurement data profiles 4-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs E2 12-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs E3 104-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 30 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Module versions with selectable user data variants Module version User data Address space Comment 32 I / 20 Q User data selectable through user data variants or through userspecific user data* 32-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs You can change over the user data variant during operation. 64-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs If you use user-specific user data, you write your measured value profile into the AI Energy Meter HF with the data record 130. To do this use the WRREC instruction. Information about the structure of data record 130 is available in appendix Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping (Page 156). 64 I / 20 Q 128 I / 20 Q 128-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs 256 I / 20 Q 256-byte inputs / 20-byte outputs *Ensure that the user data do not exceed the size of the address space of the module version. If necessary, use a module version with a larger address space 4.2.3 Changing over the user data variant during operation Introduction You change the user data variant in the output data of each user data variant in Byte 0. The following figure shows to which user data you can change over at various module versions during operation. Figure 4-1 Possible user data variants Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 31 Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions Requirement User program has been created. AI Energy Meter HF is configured as one of the module versions mentioned in the figure above. The start address of the module is known in the process image output. Procedure 1. Create one constant with the data type BYTE per user data variant. 2. Enter the user data ID as a value in each case. 3. Write the constant to the start address of the module in the process image output. Result The user data variant is switched with the next cycle. Note Information about user data changeover The parameterized user data variant is set in the following cases: * A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. * Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available or - Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 32 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.2 Selecting the module versions 4.2.4 Recommendations for selecting the module version The following table shows which module version is suitable for a given purpose. Module version Application 2I/2Q * Use of many AI Energy Meter HF in an ET 200SP or little address space is available Note * Read the measured values solely via the RDREC instruction from a measured value data record. * Quality information about the measured values is always available. EE@Industry measurement data profile * * E0 / E1 / E2 / E3 Cyclic measurement per phase Available measured values depend on the configured measurement data profile. * Supplied measured values in accordance with the EE@Industry measured data profile * The user data are fixed and cannot be changed dynamically. Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from a measured value data record via the RDREC instruction. * No quality information 32 I / 20 Q User-specific * Cyclic measurement per phase * Quality information about the measured values is always available. * Flexibility by switching predefined user data variants * * Cyclic measurement of up to 64 measured values configurable Depending on the user data variant, you must convert the measured values in the CPU to physical values using the supplied scaling factor. * * Flexibility by switching predefined user data variants One cycle elapses for each user data changeover. Measured values from the next user data variant are thus supplied with a slight time offset. With GSD configuration * 32 I / 20 Q * 64 I / 20 Q * 128 I / 20 Q * 256 I / 20 Q Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from a measured value data record via the RDREC instruction. Consistent measured values of a measuring cycle are supplied. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 33 Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules 4.3 Applicable modules Configuring with STEP 7 The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured with STEP 7. Table 4- 1 Module versions configured with STEP 7 Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 20 Q User-specific EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V1.0 or higher* E1 E2 V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.2 or higher --- V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF ** V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher* V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher IM 155-6 PN HS --- E3 V4.0 or higher IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher --- V1.0 or higher --- CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher * Only up to 32 bytes ** Function setting the time as of V4.2 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 34 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Configuration / address space 4.3 Applicable modules Configuring with GSD file The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be configured using a GSD file. Table 4- 2 Module versions configuring with GSD file Module version Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 20 Q 64 I / 20 Q 128 I / 20 Q 256 I / 20 Q EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 E1 E2 E3 IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher --- V3.2 or higher IM 155-6 PN HS IM 155-6 DP HF V4.0 or higher V1.0 or higher --- ----- --- --- Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 35 5 Quick start Introduction This section shows you how to read and view your first measured values on the AI Energy Meter HF in a particularly quick and easy way. Note Current measuring transformer: When the term "current measuring transformer" is used in this manual, it applies both to current/voltage transformers and Rogowski coils. Requirement You have already connected the AI Energy Meter HF to your network with one of the connection types shown in the section Wiring (Page 20). The AI Energy Meter HF has already been integrated in your configuration tool (such as STEP 7), or the AI Energy Meter HF has been integrated in your hardware catalog of your configuration tool with the GSD file. Procedure 1. Configure an ET 200SP station Configure an ET 200SP station with a CPU 151xSP or an IM 155-6. 2. Plug module in ET 200S station Plug the AI Energy Meter HF into the ET 200SP station and use the module version with 32-byte inputs and 20-byte outputs. 3. Set the module parameters Set the following parameters for the AI Energy Meter HF: - Connection type that you have used for the AI Energy Meter HF (e.g. 3P4W) - Voltage measuring range (e.g. 230 V) - Frequency of your network (for example 50 Hz) - Current transformer type for line conductors L1, L2, L3 and neutral conductor (e.g. Rogowski coil) - Current transformer primary rated current and secondary voltage (e.g. 1000 A and 333 mV) - Voltage transformer primary and secondary voltages (e.g. 230 V and 230 V) Leave all other parameters at their default settings and do not change them. 4. Load configuration Switch on the ET 200SP station and download the configuration to the CPU. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 36 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Quick start Result After being switched on, the AI Energy Meter HF supplies the measured values for the "Total power L1L2L3" user data variant with the ID 254 or FEH. Read and check the measured values provided by the AI Energy Meter HF in the input data. The table below shows the structure of the user data variant, the measured variables and the data type of the measured values in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) that are stored in the 32 bytes of output data of the module. Each measured variable is referenced via the measured value ID. An overview of all the measured variables with their measured value IDs is provided in the section Measured variables for connection type (Page 162). Table 5- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Additional information If you require further information about the evaluation and interpretation of the measured values, please refer to the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 38). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 37 6 Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF provides the measured values and variables through the following methods: Cyclic: User data Acyclic: Measured value data records User data User data provide pre-defined or user-defined measured values depending on the configured user data variant. The supplied measured values are cyclically written to the process image of the CPU. With some user data variants, the measured values are supplied as raw data, which you have to convert to the corresponding physical values using a supplied scaling factor. Measured value data records Each measured value data record supplies physical values that you can further process immediately. You read the values of a measured value data record acyclically with the RDREC instruction in a PLC tag. You need a corresponding PLC tag for each measured value data record to be read. It is also possible to create the corresponding structure in the static variables of an FB or store this structure in a DB. You can display the read measured values in a watch table in STEP 7. Note If you are using CPUs other than S7-1200 or S7-1500, convert 64-bit measured values to 32-bit measured values. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For more information, read FAQ: Processing 64-bit-floating-point numbers in S7-300/400 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/56600676) Validity of the measured values After turning on the 24 V DC supply voltage, the first measured values are available at terminal 17 after approximately 2 seconds. In the input user data, the content of byte 0 is set to the selected user data variant. You can use this change in byte 0 as a trigger event. As soon as the module has valid measured values, the value of this byte changes to a value within the value range. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 38 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values Initial module startup After the first startup or restart of the module, the parameters are transferred to the module. You can preset a user data variant in the parameters of the hardware configuration. This remains in effect until a different user data variant is selected in the output data (byte 0). This allows input user data to be modified dynamically according to the requirements of the process. The user data variant defined in parameter data record 128 or configuration tool is used under the following conditions: A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant. Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: - Coding of the user data variant not available, or - Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant. See "Selecting the module versions (Page 29)". Current measured values become "0" The current and all other measured values based on it are suppressed (or set to "0") in the data records and in the user data in the following cases: The incoming current of the current measuring transformer is lower than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" parameter Fed-in secondary voltage at the current measuring channel is higher than 424 mV. Among others, the following measured values and derived measured variables of the phase involved become "0": Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A floating mean value is formed from the power values. These only become "0" after a corresponding time. The operating hours counter and the energy counter for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset phase stops counting. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 39 Reading and processing measured values 6.1 Basics for reading measured values General reset With module versions with 20 bytes of output data you can reset some measured values and counter levels. An edge change of 0 -> 1 at the bit for the general reset has the following effect: Counters for energy, operating hours and limits start at "0" again. Results of the power quality analysis are deleted. Minimum and maximum value calculation starts again with initial values. For the general reset, set bit 7 in byte 16 of the output user data. (Page 194) Figure 6-1 Control byte 16 in the output user data for general reset Substitute value behavior The substitute values for input values of the AI Energy Meter HF amount to "0". See also Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 47) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 40 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2 Quality information Use the quality information to evaluate the status for currents, voltage, operating quadrants and the rotating field. The AI Energy Meter HF provides quality information: In byte 1 of the user data In measured value IDs 65500 to 65503 In the power quality analysis Qualifier ID 65496 (Page 87) See also Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 194) 6.2.1 Quality information in byte 1 of the user data For all user data variants, the module provides brief quality information in an 8-bit field in byte 1 for: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) Voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) Operating quadrant for a phase Please note that quality information assignment with user data variants for phase-specific measurement (ID 154 to ID 159) is different from user data variant assignment for 3-phase measurement (ID 244 to ID 254). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 41 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Quality information in byte 1 of the user data for 3-phase measurement The quality information for 3-phase measurement is provided by the module in user data variants ID 244 to ID 254. Figure 6-2 Assignment of byte 1 for user data variants ID 224 to ID 254 Quality information in byte 1 for phase-specific measurement The quality information for phase-specific measurement is provided by the module in user data variants ID 154 to ID 159. Figure 6-3 Byte 1 assignment for user data variants ID 154 to ID 159 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 42 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2.2 Quality information with measured value IDs Complete quality information is provided by the module in a 16-bit field with measured value IDs 65500 to 65503. Measured value ID 65503 for 3-phase measurement Measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502 for phase-specific measurement in phase 1, phase 2 or phase 3 Quality information with measured value ID 65503 for 3-phase measurement The quality information for 3-phase measurement is provided by the module with: User data variant "Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H) User data (measured value ID 66503) Measured value data record 150 The measured value ID 65503 provides information on: Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) Voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) Operating quadrants for all 3 phases Rotating field for the 3-phase system Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 43 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Figure 6-4 Quality information for low and high byte of the measured value ID 65503 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 44 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information Quality information with measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502 for phase-specific measurement The module provides quality information for phase-specific measurement in phase 1, phase 2 or phase 3 with: User data (with measured value ID 65500, 65501 or 65502) Measured value data record DS 147, 148 or 149 Measured value IDs 65500, 65501 and 65502 provide information on: Current of the phase in question Voltage of the phase in question Operating quadrant of the phase in question In contrast to the assignment for measured value ID 65503 (figure above), measured value IDs 65500, 65501 and 65502 only contain the phase-specific information for current, voltage and operating quadrant. The information about the other phases and the rotating field have the value 0. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 45 Reading and processing measured values 6.2 Quality information 6.2.3 Operating quadrant The figure below shows the quality information of the operating quadrants. Figure 6-5 Quadrant in the quality bits Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 46 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically Requirement STEP 7 is open. The AI Energy Meter HF Is configured. Scaling of measured values in the user data Since the value range of 16-bit values is often smaller than the value range of the physical value, a scaling factor is supplied together with the basic value in the user data for the respective measured or calculated values. You determine the actual value of the measured variable with the following formula: Actual value of measured quantity = measured value in the user data x 10scaling factor Procedure To read measured values from the user data cyclically, proceed as follows: 1. Read the relevant measured value from the input data. 2. Observe the scaling factor at scaled measured values and convert the read measured value using the scaling factor. Example The user data variant 254 (FEH) "Total power L1L2L3" is configured on the AI Energy Meter HF. The measured value for "Current L1" should be read. Table 6- 1 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE - 254 (FEH) - Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647 to +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647 to +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 47 Reading and processing measured values 6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - In the user data variant FEH (254) the measured value for the current L1 is stored in Byte 2 + 3. The current is supplied by the module as a 16-bit-fixed-point number in the value range from 0 to 65535 in the unit 1 mA. In addition the scaling factor for the current L1 has to be considered additionally. The module supplies the related scaling factor in Byte 24. The actual value for current L1 is calculated as follows: Actual value for current L1 = Current L1 x 10Scaling current L1 See also Basics for reading measured values (Page 38) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 48 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Reading and processing measured values 6.4 Read out measured values acyclically using data records 6.4 Read out measured values acyclically using data records With all module versions you can read out the measured values using data records. An overview of all measured value data records and exact information about the structure is available in the appendix Overview of all measured value data records (Page 224). Requirement In the STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to the data record you want to evaluate. Example of the structure of a data record The following overview shows the structure of the data record DS 142. Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version = 2 UINT8 - - - 1 Reserved UINT8 - - - 2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 : 210...213 : Neutral current REAL : A : 0.0 ... 100000.0 : 61149 Procedure 1. Read the desired data record with the RDREC instruction. The measured values are in the target range of the data block which you specified with the RDREC instruction. 2. Evaluate the measured values for the desired measured variables. Note If you want to read or write several data records at the same time in the user program, note that the number of active jobs that you started with the RDREC or WRREC instruction is limited by the resources of the CPU used. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 49 Reading and processing measured values 6.5 Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp 6.5 Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp The AI Energy Meter HF supports time-of-day synchronization and time stamp. Time stamps are used to date the exact occurrence of information. You can find time information in the measured value data records "Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154)" and "Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155)", for example, or the power quality analysis data records DS160, DS161 and DS163. For the time on the AI Energy Meter HF to correspond to the current system time, the clock must be synchronized externally. Information on this and additional requirements can be found in the application example (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890). In the absence of time-ofday synchronization, the internal time stamp of the AI Energy Meters HF starts at 01.01.1970, 0:00. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 50 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7 Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF provides several energy and overflow counters that detect both line-based and phase-based energy values, e.g.: Active energy (total, outflow, inflow) Reactive energy (total, outflow, inflow) Apparent energy (total) Retentivity The AI Energy Meter HF stores all counter values retentively. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off), the energy counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Functions The energy meters provide the following basic functions: Measured values for infinite and periodical counting can be read out End values for periodic counting: 103, 106, 109, 1012 and 1015 can be selected with overflow counters Measuring ranges can be changed in RUN Starting and stopping counters via gate is possible Preset and apply start values in RUN Measured variables can be evaluated via data records and user data. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 51 Energy counters 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy There are two ways of evaluating the measured values: Reading measured values using the instruction "RDREC". Reading measured values from the user data variants (not for module versions with 2 bytes of input data). Data records for energy meters You can read out measured values for energy and overflow counters in the following data records. The evaluation of measured data using data records is described in section Read out measured values acyclically using data records (Page 49). Name of the data record Number of the data record Comment Data record for basic measured values (Page 225) Data record 142 Measured values of the total energy L1L2L3 Data record for energy meter (Page 230) DS 143 Measured values of energy and overflow counters for phases L1, L2 and L3 Data record for phase-specific measured values L1 (Page 246) DS 147 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L1 Data record for phase-specific measured values L2 (Page 249) DS 148 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L2 Measured value data record for phasespecific measured values L3 (Page 252) DS 149 Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 52 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.1 Evaluate measured values for energy User data variants for energy meters You can read out measured values for energy and overflow meters in the following user data variants. The evaluation of measured data using user data variants is described in section Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 47). Name of the user data variant Number of the user data variant Comment Total energy L1 L2 L3 (Page 210) ID 249 or F9H Measured values of the total energy L1L2L3 Energy L1 (Page 211) ID 248 or F8H Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L1 Energy L2 (Page 212) ID 247 or F7H Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L2 Energy L3 (Page 213) ID 246 or F6H Measured values of the phase-specific energy meters L3 Basic variable quality measurement threephase measurement (Page 214) ID 240 or F0H Status on the overflow of the energy meters for phases L1, L2 and L3 Basic variables energy meter measurement ID 239 or EFH (periodic) L1L2L3 (Page 216) Number of counter overflows for energy of phases L1, L2 and L3 EE@Industry measurement data profile E3 (Page 217) ID 227 or E3H Measured values for total active energy and total reactive energy L1L2L3 EE@Industry measurement data profile E2 (Page 217) ID 226 or E2H Measured values for total active energy L1L2L3 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L1 (Page 218) ID 159 or 9FH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for phase L1 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L1a (Page 219) ID 158 or 9EH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for phase L1 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L2 (Page 220) ID 157 or 9DH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L2 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L2a (Page 221) ID 156 or 9CH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L2 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L3 (Page 222) ID 155 or 9BH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L3 Basic variables for phase-specific measurement L3a (Page 223) ID 154 or 9AH Measured values for phase-specific active, reactive and apparent energy for Phase L3 User-defined user data variant ID 1 or 01H and ID 2 or 02H Measured variables for energy can be selected in a user-defined manner Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 53 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to start the energy and overflow counter with new start values. Define the new start values for the energy and overflow counter in data record DS 143. Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. With all the module versions there are two ways of applying the start values: Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and apply them immediately Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and only apply them after setting a special bit (DQ bit for counter reset) Both options are described in the following sections. General reset With module versions with 20 bytes of output data you can reset the energy and overflow counters. With a general reset, you cannot preset any start values; the start values for energy and overflow counters are always zero with a general reset. You can find additional information on the general reset in the section Basics for reading measured values (Page 38). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 54 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters 7.2.1 Preset start values for the energy meters Define the start values for the energy and overflow meters in data record DS 143. Introduction You have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Structure of data record DS 143 The following overview shows the structure of the data record DS 143 in simplified form. More detailed information about the structure of data record DS 143 is available in section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 230). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Start value for active energy inflow L1 LREAL Wh 16...23 Initial value active energy outflow L1 LREAL Wh : : : : 128...129 Start value for overflow counters active energy inflow L1 UNIT - 130...131 Start value for overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UNIT - : : : : 61180 You will find the exact assignment in the section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 230). 61181 : 61190 61191 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 55 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Assignment of data record DS 143 Byte 0 and Byte 1: Version of the data record Header information for the version of the data record. Byte 2 ... Byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy meters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase. Byte 8 ... Byte 127: Start values for the individual energy meters The start values for energy meters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers. The format corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Byte 128 ... Byte 157: Initial values for overflow counters The initial values for overflow counters in data record 143 are 16-bit integers. The format corresponds to the data type UINT in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. 7.2.2 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately It is possible to apply the start values for energy counters and overflow counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and you have entered the start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 56 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Procedure for all module versions 1. In control byte 2 of the DS 143 (bytes 3, 5 and 7), for each phase set the category of the energy meters (active, reactive, apparent energy) for which you want to set the start values. Figure 7-1 Assignment of control byte 2 in DS 143 2. In control byte 1 of DS 143 (bytes 2, 4 and 6), for each phase define whether you want to apply the start values for energy or overflow counters. Applying depends on the category selection from control byte 2. - Set Bit 0 if you want to apply the start values for the overflow counters. - Set Bit 2 if you want to apply the start values for the energy meters. Figure 7-2 Assignment of control byte 1 in DS 143 3. In control byte 1 of DS 143 define that you want to immediately apply the start values. - Set Bit 7 to 0 so that the start values are immediately applied after writing the data record. 4. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction to the CPU. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 57 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters 7.2.3 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit Due to the differing lengths of the output data, setting of the start values for the energy counters and overflow counters depends on the configured module version. Module versions with 20 bytes of output data If you use module versions with 20 bytes of output data, you can: Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for all phases separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent energy. Module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, then you always apply the start values for all the energy counters and overflow counters simultaneously. Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and have entered the start values. Applying depends on the category selection from control byte 2. - Set Bit 0 if you want to apply the start values for the overflow counters. - Set Bit 2 if you want to apply the start values for the energy meters. In control byte 1 of the DS 143 you have set Bit 7 to "1" (apply start values via DQ bit) You have transferred the data record DS 143 with new start values to the CPU. The assignment of the data record can be found in Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 230) Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 58 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Procedure for module version with 20 bytes of output data Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for all three phases 1. In Byte 2 of the output data, select the categories for which you want to apply start values. - Set bit 5 for active energy counters. - Set bit 6 for reactive energy counters. - Set bit 7 for apparent energy counters. Figure 7-3 Selection of categories for reset 2. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in byte 1 of the output data. Figure 7-4 Reset bit for energy and overflow counter If there is an edge change of the reset bit from 0 -> 1, the module resets the energy and overflow counters that you previously selected in byte 2 to their start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 59 Energy counters 7.2 Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters Apply start values for energy counters and overflow counters for phase-specific counting You can also reset the energy and overflow counters on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure as described in "Applying start values for energy counters and overflow counters for all three phases", as applicable. 1. In bytes 7, 9 and 11 of the output data, select the categories for which you want to apply the phase-specific start values. - Set Bit 5 for active energy counters. - Set Bit 6 for reactive energy counters. - Set Bit 7 for apparent energy counters. Figure 7-5 Selection of category 2. In bytes 6, 8 and 10 of the output data, set the reset bits (Bit 7) for the phase-specific start values. Figure 7-6 Reset bit for phase-specific energy and overflow counters If there is an edge change of the phase-specific reset bit from 0 -> 1, the module resets the energy and overflow counters that you previously selected in bytes 7, 9 and 11 to their start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 60 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters Procedure for module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, always apply the start values for all the energy counters and overflow counters. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in byte 1 of the output data. Figure 7-7 Reset bit for all energy and overflow counters If there is an edge change of the reset bit from 0 -> 1, the module resets all energy and overflow counters to their start values. 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters There are two ways of starting or stopping measurement with the energy meter AI Energy Meter HF: Counting with gate The module starts counting when you set the DQ bit for the counter gate in the output data using an edge change from 0 -> 1. If you reset the DQ bit using an edge change from 1 -> 0, the counter stops. Counting without gate The module starts counting immediately as soon as the module is switched on. Counting cannot be stopped. Both options are described in the following sections. Counting with gate Requirements: The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure If you wish to start counting using the gate, proceed as follows: 1. Activate the parameter "Enable energy meter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. 2. Set the DQ bit for the counter gate (Bit 6) in control byte 1 in the output data. The module starts counting as soon as there is an edge change from 0 -> 1 at the DQ bit for the counter gate. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 61 Energy counters 7.3 Starting and and stopping energy meters If you wish to stop the counting again, then reset Bit 6 in control byte 1 in the output data. Counting stops at an edge change from 1 -> 0. The "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts. Figure 7-8 Gate enabled Counting without gate Requirement The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure Deactivate the parameter "Enable energy meter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. The module starts counting as soon as the module is started. The counter continues to count. Figure 7-9 Gate disabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 62 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.4 Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter 7.4 Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter The following figure shows resetting and starting/stopping with activated gating using the energy meter as an example: The counter is reset to the value specified in the configuration. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. The gate is opened again via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts with the new start value. The gate is opened via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts. The configured current low limit has been violated. The counter does not count. The gate is closed. The counter does not count. A new start value is written to the measured value data record 143 (Page 230) with the WRREC instruction. The counter is reset via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts from the new start value that was transferred via the measured value data record 143. Figure 7-10 Example of an energy meter Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 63 Energy counters 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? Introduction Bytes 2 to 7 of data record 143 (Page 230) form the phase-based control and feedback interface for the data record DS 143. Bytes 2 and 3: Control and feedback interface for phase 1 Bytes 4 and 5: Control and feedback interface for phase 2 Bytes 6 and 7: Control and feedback interface for phase 3 Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure 7-11 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 64 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Energy counters 7.5 What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143? Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy meters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to preset and the time at which counters are to be preset. Figure 7-12 Control information DS 143, control byte 1 (write access) In control byte 2 you determine which energy meter categories you want to preset. Figure 7-13 Control information DS 143, control byte 2 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 65 8 Operating hours counter Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF provides four operating hours counters which count the operating hours of the connected consumers: Three phase-specific operating hours counters 1 operating hours counter which displays the value of the largest phase-specific operating hours counter. Retentivity The AI Energy Meter HF stores all counter values retentively. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off), counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Functions The operating hours counters provide the following basic functions: Measuring ranges from 0 to 3.4 x 1038 hours. Starting and stopping operating hours counters via gate Preset and apply start values in RUN Evaluating counter states using data records and user data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 66 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.1 Evaluating operating hours counters 8.1 Evaluating operating hours counters There are two ways of evaluating the operating hours counters: Reading counter states using data records with the instruction RDREC. Reading counter states from the user-defined user data variants. Data records for operating hours counter You can read out measured values for operating hours in the following data records. The evaluation of measured data using data records is described in section Reading and processing measured values (Page 38). Name of the data record Number of the data record Comment Data record for energy meter (Page 230) DS 143 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (Page 255) DS 150 Phase-specific operating hours counter for phase L1, phase L2, phase L3 and largest phase-specific operating hours counter L1L2L3 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (Page 257) DS 151 Operating hours counters can be selected in a user-defined manner User data variants for operating hours counters You can read out measured values for operating hours in the following user data variants. The evaluation of measured data using user data variants is described in section User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data (Page 204). Name of the user data variant Number of the user data variant Comment User-defined user data variant ID 1 or 01H and Operating hours counters can be selected in a userdefined manner ID 2 or 02H Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 67 Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to start counting of the operating hours counters with new start values. Define the new start values for the operating hours counters in data record DS 143. Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. With all the module versions there are two ways of applying the start values: Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and apply them immediately Transfer start values from data record DS 143 and only apply them after setting a special bit (DQ bit for operating hours counter reset) Both options are described in the following sections. General reset With module versions with 20 bytes of user data you can reset the operating hours counters. With a general reset, you cannot preset any start values; the start values for operating hours counters are always zero with a general reset. You can find additional information on the general reset in the section Basics for reading measured values (Page 38). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 68 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters 8.2.1 Preset start values for operating hours counters Define the start values for operating hours counters using data record DS 143. Introduction You have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143. Structure of data record DS 143 The following overview shows the structure of the data record DS 143 in simplified form. More detailed information about the structure of data record 143 is available in section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 230). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Start value for active energy inflow L1 LREAL Wh 16...23 Initial value active energy outflow L1 LREAL Wh : : : : 158...161 Start value operating hours L1 REAL h 162...165 Start value operating hours L2 REAL h 166...169 Start value operating hours L3 REAL h 61180 You will find the exact assignment in the section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 230). 61181 : 65505 65506 65507 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 69 Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Assignment of data record DS 143 Byte 0 and Byte 1: Version of the data record Header information for the version of the data record. Byte 2 ... Byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy meters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase. Byte 8 ... byte 157: Start values for the individual energy meters and overflow counters The start values for energy counters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers. The format corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. The initial values for overflow counters in data record 143 are 16-bit integers. The format corresponds to the data type UINT in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. Byte 158 ... byte 169: Start values for operating hours counter The start values for operating hours counters in data record 143 are 32-bit integers. The format corresponds to the data type REAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500. 8.2.2 Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately Applying the start values for each separate operating hours counter is possible. Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and you have entered the start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 70 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Procedure for all module versions 1. In Control byte 1 of DS 143 (bytes 2, 4 and 6), for each phase, define that you want to immediately apply the start values for operating hours counters. - Set the Bit 3 to 1 so that the start values for the operating hours counters are preset. - Set the Bit 7 to 0 so that the module immediately applies the start values after writing the data record. Figure 8-1 Allocation of the control bytes in DS 143 for operating hours 2. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction to the CPU. 8.2.3 Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit Due to the differing lengths of the output data, setting of the start values for the operating hours counters depends on the configured module version. Module versions with 20 bytes of output data If you use module versions with 20 bytes of output data, you can: Apply start values for all operating hours counters. Apply start values for individual operating hours counters separately. Module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, apply the start values for all operating hours counters simultaneously. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 71 Operating hours counter 8.2 Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters Requirement In your STEP 7 project you have created a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143 and have entered the start values. Set the Bit 3 to 1 so that the start values for the operating hours counters are preset. In control byte 1 of DS 143 you have set Bit 7 to "1" (apply start values via DQ bit). (see previous figure) You have transferred the data record DS 143 with new start values to the CPU. The assignment of the data record can be found in Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 230) Note Pre-set start values for counters If you have not yet transferred any start values to the CPU using the data record DS 143, then start the counters with the value 0. Procedure for applying the start values of all operating hours counters Applying the start values for all operating hours counters with the module versions with 2 bytes and 20 bytes of output data is identical. 1. Set the reset bit for operating hours counters (Bit 5) in Byte 1 in the output data. Figure 8-2 Control byte 1 Reset for all operating hours counters If there is an edge change of the reset bit from 0 to 1, the module applies the start values for all operating hours counters. Procedure for applying the start values of individual operating hours counters Note Applying the start values for phase-specific operating hours counters Applying the start values for phase-specific operating hours counters does not differ from the procedure described above. In the output data, select the reset bits for the phase-specific operating hours counters in bytes 6, 8 and 10. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 72 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Operating hours counter 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters There are two ways of starting or stopping counting with the operating hours counter AI Energy Meter HF: Counting with gate The module starts counting when you set the DQ bit for the counter gate in the output data using an edge change from 0 -> 1. If you reset the DQ bit for the counter gate using an edge change from 1 -> 0, the counter stops. Counting without gate The module starts counting immediately as soon as the module is switched on. Counting cannot be stopped. Both options are described in the following sections. Counting with gate Requirements: The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure If you wish to start counting using the gate, proceed as follows: 1. Activate the parameter "Enable operating hours counter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. 2. Set the DQ bit for the counter gate (Bit 4) in control byte 1 in the output data. The module starts counting as soon as there is an edge change from 0 -> 1 at the DQ bit for the counter gate. If you wish to stop the counting again, then reset Bit 4 in control byte 1 in the output data. Counting stops at an edge change from 1 -> 0. The "Enable operating hours counter gate" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts. Figure 8-3 Gate enabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 73 Operating hours counter 8.3 Starting and stopping operating hours counters Counting without gate Requirement The current value is higher than the configured "Low limit for measuring current in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]". Procedure Deactivate the parameter "Enable operating hours counter gate" in the parameter assignment of the module. The module starts counting as soon as the data record has been applied by the CPU. The counter continues to count. Figure 8-4 Gate disabled Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 74 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.1 9 How limit monitoring works Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF supports monitoring of parameterizable low or high limits for up to 16 analog measured or calculated variables. You can also specify multiple limits for each measured or calculated variable, in order to define a high or low value range. The measured value data record 150 returns the current status of limit violations and one counter per limit that displays the number of limit violations. In addition, a hardware interrupt may be generated for each limit violation. The status of the limit violations can also be evaluated in the user data variant 240 (F0H) or via the user-defined user data variant or the user-defined data record via the measured value ID 65509. Benefits With activated limit monitoring you can already detect any irregularities in the measured value acquisition already in field level. Retentivity All the counter states are stored retentively in the AI Energy Meter HF. After an interruption (e.g. Power System Off), the counting resumes with the retentively stored values. Configuring You configure the following limit monitoring settings in STEP 7: Measured variable that is to be monitored. Activate / Deactivate limit monitoring. High or low limit values. Delay time and hysteresis for each limit. Activate / Deactivate hardware interrupts at limit violation. Measured value that is subject to limit monitoring. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 75 Limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring Hardware interrupt at a limit violation The hardware interrupt provides the following information: Measured value ID of the monitored measured or calculated variable Number of the limit (0 = Limit 1. 15 = Limit 16) Information on whether limit was exceeded or fallen below For more detailed information, refer to section Hardware interrupts (Page 109). Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: 1 9.2 Control information Default value Available in Enable/disable monitoring per limit1 Disabled Module version with 20 bytes of output data Reset number of total limit violations 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Effective only with enabled gate Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring Delay time and hysteresis In order to prevent the triggering of limit violations with small fluctuations, you have the following configuration options in STEP 7: Delay time in seconds (0 to 10 s) With the delay time, you filter faults and thereby prevent limit value monitoring from triggering too frequently. The limit violation is counted only when the limit violation is present for longer than the configured delay time. The delay time is also taken into consideration with an outgoing limit violation, directly after a high or low limit has been violated in the permitted range. If the measured variable lies between limit violation and hysteresis after the limit violation has been corrected again, the delay time expires also without leaving the hysteresis. Hysteresis as a percentage (0 to 20%) With the hysteresis, you suppress fluctuations around the limit. The hysteresis is a tolerance range that you define as a percentage deviation of the configured limit. The limit violation is considered to be corrected only when the monitored value leaves the tolerance range. Note You can get information about underflow and overflow from the calculation of minimum (Page 241) and maximum values (Page 235) of selected measured variables. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 76 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring The following figure shows the value-over-time for two measured values using the example of a high and low limit as well as the influence of hysteresis and delay time on the counting of the limit violations. Configured limit. Configured delay time. Is taken into consideration during coming and going. Hysteresis range. Only considered for outgoing. Value-over-time for which the limit is monitored. Edge change. Counter for limit violations is incremented by 1. If parameterized, a hardware interrupt is triggered. Figure 9-1 Signal wave Limit monitoring with hysteresis and delay time Limit monitoring with hysteresis, but without delay time Limit monitoring without hysteresis, but with delay time Limit monitoring without hysteresis and delay time Influence of hysteresis and delay time on the limit See also How limit monitoring works (Page 75) Minimum and maximum values (Page 82) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 77 Limit monitoring 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation 9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation Introduction At the beginning of a new work order, it can be useful to reset or also enable/disable the counters for limit violations of the AI Energy Meter HF. Resetting here means that the counters for limit violations are reset to 0. Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the counters for limit violations depends on the configured module version. Resetting at module version with 20 bytes of output data 1. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to reset in control bytes 3 and 4; see "Enabling/disabling the counters for limit violations". 2. In control byte 1, set the rest bit (bit 3) with an edge change from 0 to 1; see "Resetting the counters for limit violations". Resetting for module version with 2 bytes of output data Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Resetting acts globally on all the configured counters for limit violation. Figure 9-2 Resetting of the counters for limit violations Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 78 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Activating / Deactivating counters for limit violations Activating/deactivating of the counters for limit violations is only possible for module versions with 20 bytes of output data. Requirements: "Gate for limit value monitoring" was parameterized during configuration of the module using STEP 7 or by writing the data record DS 128. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to activate / deactivate in Control bytes 3 and 4. Figure 9-3 Activating / deactivating of the counters for limit violations Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 79 Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring You can use measured variables from the section Measured variables (Page 162) for limit value monitoring. The value range of the parameter "Limit x" is -3.0E+09 ... +3.0E+09. The table below shows you which measured variables are not available for limit monitoring. Measured value ID Measured variables 220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 225 Total active energy L1L2L3 226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 62110 Active energy inflow L1 62111 Active energy outflow L1 62112 Reactive energy inflow L1 62113 Reactive energy outflow L1 62114 Apparent energy L1 62115 Total active energy L1 62116 Total reactive energy L1 62136 Fundamental cos active factor L1 62210 Active energy inflow L2 62211 Active energy outflow L2 62212 Reactive energy inflow L2 62213 Reactive energy outflow L2 62214 Apparent energy L2 62215 Total active energy L2 62216 Total reactive energy L2 62236 Fundamental cos active factor L2 62310 Active energy inflow L3 62311 Active energy outflow L3 62312 Reactive energy inflow L3 62313 Reactive energy outflow L3 62314 Apparent energy L3 62315 Total active energy L3 62316 Total reactive energy L3 62336 Fundamental cos active factor L3 65496 Power quality analysis qualifier 65497 Current module time 65500 Qualifier L1 65501 Qualifier L2 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 80 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Limit monitoring 9.4 Measured variables for limit monitoring Measured value ID Measured variables 65502 Qualifier L3 65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 65508 Status of energy counter overflows 65509 Status of limit violations 1...16 66001 Voltage L1-N 66002 Voltage L2-N 66003 Voltage L3-N 66004 Voltage L1-L2 66005 Voltage L2-L3 66006 Voltage L3-L1 66007 Current L1 66008 Current L2 66009 Current L3 66010 Apparent power L1 66011 Apparent power L2 66012 Apparent power L3 66013 Active power L1 66014 Active power L2 66015 Active power L3 66016 Reactive power Qn L1 66017 Reactive power Qn L2 66018 Reactive power Qn L3 66019 Power factor L1 66020 Power factor L2 66021 Power factor L3 66030 Frequency 66034 Active power L1L2L3 66035 Reactive power Qn L1L2L3 66036 Apparent power L1L2L3 66037 Power factor L1L2L3 66038 Frequency Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 81 10 Minimum and maximum values 10.1 Minimum and maximum values Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF determines the respective highest and lowest measured or calculated value for a series of measured and calculated values. The values are stored retentively in the module and can be read using measured value data records DS 144 (Page 235), DS 145 (Page 241), DS 154 (Page 237) and DS 155 (Page 243). Benefits Using the stored minimum and maximum values, for example, you can detect further irregularities in addition to limit monitoring. Calculation of minimum and maximum values Minimum and maximum values are only calculated for the phases in accordance with the configured connection type. Existing minimum and maximum values that have not been calculated are assigned initial values. If faults such as under or overcurrent occur during operation, new minimum and maximum values are calculated. The measured and calculated values are initialized as follows during commissioning of the AI Energy Meter HF so that the first calculation of minimum and maximum values supplies a plausible result: Maximum values for measured and calculated values: Minimum values Minimum values for measured and calculated values: Maximum values Minimum and maximum values are determined as "slave pointer procedures" from the start of calculation. Start is effective as of activation of the function or after a reset. The module uses the current actual value as the start value. If you activate the parameter "Enable minimum and maximum value calculation gate", the calculation only starts if the corresponding DQ bit ("gate open") was set (output data byte 1, bit 2 = "1"). You can stop the calculation at any time by deactivating the parameter or closing the gate. Calculation starts again after reactivation. The gate for calculation of the minimum and maximum values functions in the same way as the gate for energy meters. Configuring You configure the following settings in STEP 7: Enable calculation of minimum and maximum values Enable minimum and maximum value calculation gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 82 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Changing properties in RUN The following table shows the supported control information: Control information Default value Available in Reset saved maximum values 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Reset saved minimum values 0 Module version starting at 2 bytes of output data Note Automatic reset If you change the parameters for current or voltage transformers, the minimum and maximum values are reset automatically to their initial values. 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Description At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the minimum and maximum values of the AI Energy Meter HF. Resetting means that the minimum and maximum values are reset to their initial values. Initial values are described, see section Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) version 1 (Page 235), Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) version 1 (Page 241), Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) (Page 237) and Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) (Page 243). Minimum and maximum values are only reset using a Reset via output data (DQ bit). Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the minimum and maximum values depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 20 bytes of output data, you can: Reset the minimum and maximum values for all phases. Reset minimum and maximum values for each individual phase. If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the minimum and maximum values simultaneously. Time stamps are set to initial values (01.01.1970, 0:00) on reset. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 83 Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Procedure for module version with 20 bytes of output data Resetting the minimum and maximum values for all 3 phases. 1. Select the categories of minimum and maximum value that you want to reset in byte 2. - Set bit 0 for voltage and frequency. - Set bit 1 for current and power factor. - Set bit 2 for active power. - Set bit 3 for reactive power. - Set bit 4 for apparent power. Figure 10-1 Selection of minimum and maximum value category 2. In Byte 1, set reset bit 0 for minimum values or reset bit 1 for maximum values. If there is an edge change of the reset bits from 0 to 1, the module resets the selected minimum or maximum values for all 3 phases that you previously selected in Byte 2. Figure 10-2 Reset bit for minimum and maximum values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 84 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Minimum and maximum values 10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values Resetting minimum and maximum values for phase-specific measurement You can also reset the minimum and maximum values on a phase-specific basis using the output data. Follow the procedure for "Resetting minimum and maximum values for all 3 phases" as applicable. 1. Select the categories of minimum and maximum value that you want to reset on a phasespecific basis. - In byte 7, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 1. - In byte 9, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 2. - In byte 11, set the bits for the category of minimum and maximum values in phase 3. 2. Set the reset bit (bit 0 and bit 1) for minimum or maximum values. - in byte 6 for phase 1 - in byte 8 for phase 2 - in byte 10 for phase 3 If there is an edge change of the phase-specific reset bits from 0 to 1, the module resets the minimum or maximum values for the given phase. Procedure for module version with 2 bytes of output data If you use the module version with 2 bytes of output data, you always reset all the minimum and maximum values simultaneously. Set the reset bit (Bit 0 or Bit 1) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Figure 10-3 Resetting the minimum and maximum values at module version with 2 bytes of output data Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 85 11 Power quality analysis functions Introduction Power quality analysis functions are used as an aid to evaluate the quality of the supply network. In a three-phase system, many of these functions only make sense or can be executed if a functioning symmetrical three-phase supply system is available, the detection sensors of the three phases are identical in design and the nominal values current or voltage of the phases have the same values. The AI Energy Meter HF provides you with the following power quality analysis functions in accordance with IEC 6100-4-30 for monitoring the power quality in your power network: Measure the neutral current Perform residual current analysis Determine active and power factor Carry out reactive power compensation Analyze fundamental values three-phase (voltage, current, power) Analyze the harmonics up to the 40th harmonic Determine the total harmonic distortion THD+N current/voltage for all three phases Detect voltage dip and voltage swell Detect overcurrent Detect peak value for current and voltage The power quality analysis only returns useful results if some basic requirements are met. These include: Accuracy of the line frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz) is maintained according to IEC 61557-12. Wiring has been carried out correctly. Delete the results of the power quality analysis Delete the results of the power quality analysis by setting the corresponding bits in Byte 12 of the output range (Page 199) for at least 100 ms to "1". Deletion has the following effects: Deletion of the result values and status bits for - Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage and current - Overcurrent of the current half value - Voltage dip and voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value Any pending diagnostics "External fault" is deleted. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 86 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Power quality analysis functions 11.1 Power quality analysis status Harmonic Harmonics are superimposed vibrations deviating from the fundamental frequency of the supply network (50 Hz or 60 Hz) with an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency. Harmonics are generated by equipment with a non-linear current-voltage characteristic such as transformers, gas discharge lamps and power electronics devices. Harmonic component THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) The THD defines the ratio of the power of the harmonics to the power of the fundamental and provides information about the power quality. The value is dimensionless and is stated as a percentage [%]. The AI Energy Meter HF returns THD+N (Noise) and considers the entire current signal (DS 163) or voltage signal (DS 161). Interference in the network is not filtered out. 11.1 Power quality analysis status Information about the power quality status can be found in the measured value "Power quality analysis qualifier" with the measured value ID 65496. The bits 0 to 4 in byte 1 to 3 show in status "1" that information has been available since the last reset, which can be retrieved. The bits 5 to 7 in byte 1 to 3 in status "1" show that the event is currently active. If the event is not active, "0" is displayed. The measured value "Network analysis qualifier" has the following structure: Address Content Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Power quali- Reserved ty analysis qualifier module Reserved Power quality analysis qualifier phase L1 Voltage swell Voltage dip Overcurrent Event currently active Event currently active Event occurred, data available Overcurrent Event currently Power quali- active ty analysis qualifier phase L2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Voltage peak Voltage swell Voltage dip Event occurred, data available Event occurred, data available Event occurred, data available Status of harmonics analysis: 0D: No data, no start 1D ... 62D: running 63D: Completed, data is available Peak value current Event occurred, data available Power quality analysis qualifier phase L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 87 Power quality analysis functions 11.2 Harmonics analysis 11.2 Harmonics analysis The AI Energy Meter HF can determine the effective values for current and voltage up to the 40th harmonic of the fundamental. The harmonics of the voltage are stored in the data record DS 161 (Page 260). The harmonics of the current are stored in the data record DS 163 (Page 264). In addition, you can incorporate the results on IDs with the parameter data records DS 130/DS 131 (Page 156) in the user-defined user data and DS 135 (Page 159) in the user-defined data record DS 151 (Page 257). The calculation of the harmonics takes several cycles. To determine whether calculation is completed, evaluate the Bits 0 to 5 in the power quality analysis data record DS 160 (Page 258) in Byte 218. If the value 63 is in the Bits 0 to 5, the calculation is completed and the measured values are available. Note While the calculation is in progress, you cannot read the data records DS 161 and DS 163. Note While the calculation is in progress, quick measured value acquisition (e.g. for controlling reactive-power compensation) is not possible. Requirement The parameter "Power quality analysis function" is activated. The parameter "Analyse harmonics" for the corresponding phase must be released. Voltage and current are always analyzed simultaneously for the enabled phases. Control via data outputs The harmonics analysis starts by setting the DQ bit 6 "Power quality analysis Start/Stop L1L2L3" in Byte 12 of the output data. The results of a previous analysis of harmonics are deleted in the process. Results of non-selected channels are "0". If channels which have not yet been analyzed are added, the data are not plausible at the start of the analysis. If the DQ bit is reset during an ongoing analysis, the analysis stops. 11.3 Reactive power compensation Use the power factor of the fundamental for the reactive power compensation. When you activate the power quality analysis function, the power factor of the fundamental is available in the measured value data record DS 160 (Page 258) or in the user data. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 88 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Power quality analysis functions 11.4 Detection of residual current 11.4 Detection of residual current For the residual current analysis (function "Tamper Detect" = Detection of unauthorized interventions), the total current must be determined: Isum L1L2L3 (t) = IL1 (t) + IL2 (t) + IL3 (t) The instantaneous residual current If is obtained by subtracting the results of the current neutral current In from the total current: If = Isum L1L2L3 - In Analysis starts immediately after parameter assignment. The measured value "Total current IL1+IL2+IL3-IN" (ID = 61153) returns the residual current. It is contained in DS 160, for example. You can monitor a threshold relevant for your application for a limit value (see function Limit monitoring (Page 75)). Requirements "3P4W" or "3P4WI" is parameterized as the connection type. The same current/voltage transformers or Rogowski coils are connected to all three phases. The parameter "Reverse current direction" is parameterized identically for all three phases. The neutral current is parameterized with "Measuring". The residual current analysis is activated in the parameter assignment. 11.5 Active factor and power factor The AI Energy Meter HF returns the active and power factor individually for each phase and as an aggregate. Active factor The active factor is defined as follows: cos (active factor, signed, fundamental oscillation): cos = P1 / S1 = phase shift angle of fundamental oscillation P1 = active power of fundamental oscillation S1 = apparent power of fundamental oscillation Power factor The power factor = cos is the ratio of active power (P) to the total apparent power (S) over the fundamental oscillation and all harmonics (total): (power factor, unsigned, total): = cos = |P| / S Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 89 Power quality analysis functions 11.6 Neutral current In 11.6 Neutral current In The module can measure or calculate the neutral current. For measuring, you have to connect a current/voltage transformer or Rogowski coil to neutral. The behavior "measuring or calculating" can be set for each parameter. The main application of the measured value "Neutral current IN" (ID: 61149) are three-phase networks with existing 4th conductor, neutral: The neutral current usually shows incorrectly flowing currents. In an ideal three-phase network, the neutral current = 0. An additional possible application is measuring any 4th current on this channel. Please note that in this case the measured value "Neutral current" displays this 4th current and not the actual neutral current. Additional values in conjunction with the neutral current is set to 0. The calculation of the neutral current and the comparison of calculated and measured neutral current (used for residual current analysis) is only possible in the operating modes "3P4W" and "3P4WI". The determination of the neutral current is not subject to current suppression. Parameter assignment options If there a neutral in a connection type, the following parameters are available: Neutral current measurement deactivated Calculate the neutral current measurement Measure the neutral current measurement If there is no neutral in a connection type, the following parameters are available: Do not use current channel Measure current channel Display via channel LED Neutral exists for connection type calculate measuring Error Channel LED Yes Yes Yes No Green Channel disabled --- --- --- Off No No Yes No Green Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 90 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Power quality analysis functions 11.7 Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values 11.7 Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values You can enable the following functions: Voltage swell (Page 115) Voltage dip (Page 117) Voltage peaks (Page 120) Current peak value (Page 126) Overcurrent value (Page 128) The results are mapped in the phase-specific data records DS 147 (Page 246), DS 148 (Page 249) and DS 149 (Page 252) and in the power quality analysis data record DS 160 (Page 258). In addition, you can incorporate the results using IDs in the measured value data record of the user-defined data record DS 151 (Page 257) and in the user data variants 1/2. You can monitor the results for limits (Page 75) and generate hardware interrupts. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 91 12 Phase-based measured values Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF makes the measured values of individual phases available. Through the user data variants - Phase-specific measurement Phase L1 with user data variants 154 (9AH) and 155 (9BH) - Phase-specific measurement Phase L2 with user data variants 156 (9CH) and 157 (9DH) - Phase-specific measurement Phase L3 with user data variants 158 (9EH) and 159 (9FH) Via measured value data records - Phase-specific measurement for the phases L1, L2 and L3 with data record 142 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L1 with data record 147 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L2 with data record 148 - Phase-specific measurement for phase L3 with data record 149 User data variants Through the user data variants 154 (9AH) to 159 (9FH) you can evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network: Quality information Current and voltage Active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent energy Power factor You can find the structure of the user data variants in appendix User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data (Page 204). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 92 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Phase-based measured values Measured value data records Through the measured value data records DS 142, DS 147, DS 148 and DS 149 you can evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network: Quality information Current and voltage Minimum current and minimum voltage Maximum current and maximum voltage Active, reactive and apparent power Minimum active, reactive and apparent power Maximum active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent energy Power factor Minimum power factor Maximum power factor Harmonic distortion for voltage and current including minimum/maximum values Voltage dip Voltage swell Peak value for voltage and current Overcurrent value You can find the structure of the measured value data records in appendix Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1 (Page 247). See also Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1 (Page 250) Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1 (Page 253) Minimum and maximum values (Page 82) Overview of all measured value data records (Page 224) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 93 13 Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters of the AI Energy Meter HF You will usually configure the AI Energy Meter HF with STEP 7 (TIA Portal, if necessary with HSP). In this case, STEP 7 (TIA Portal) checks the configured properties for plausibility during configuration. You can also assign parameters to the module using a GSD file and STEP 7 or the configuration software of any provider. In this case, the module checks the validity of the configured properties only after the configuration has been downloaded. Note that some parameters depend on the selected connection type of the AI Energy Meter HF. For example in the connection type 1P2W for measurements in single-phase AC network it does not make sense to enter parameters for Phases 2 and 3. This is not checked by the system if the GSD file is used. The effective range of the parameters that can be set using a GSD file depends on the type of bus system used: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition you can change the parameterized properties via the user program in RUN mode. When you assign parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the module using data records (see appendix Configuration via parameter data records (Page 138)). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 94 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.1 Parameters The following table summarizes all the configurable parameters with STEP 7 (GSD file). Table 13- 1 Parameters AI Energy Meter HF (GSD file) Parameters Hardware interrupt Value range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disabled Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Disable No Disable Yes 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors Yes 230 V Yes 50 Hz Yes Disable Yes Inputs Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Connection type Voltage measuring range Line frequency Energy meter gate enabled * 1P2W - 1 phase, 2 conductors * 3P4W - 3 phase current measurement, 4 conductors * 3P4W1, 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load * 3P4W - 3 phases, 4 conductors * 3x1P2W - 3 x 1 phase, 2 conductors each * 2P3W - 2 phases, 3 conductors * 3P3W, 3 phases, 3 conductors * 3P3W1, 3 phases, 3 conductors, balanced load * 100 V * 110 V * 115 V * 120 V * 127 V * 190 V * 200 V * 208 V * 220 V * 230 V * 240 V * 277 V * 50 Hz * 60 Hz * Disable * Enable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 95 Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters End value energy meter Value range * No end value (infinite counting) * Count periodically to 103 * Count periodically to 106 * Count periodically to 109 * Count periodically to 1012 * Count periodically to 1015 Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN No end value (infinite counting) Yes Total power L1L2L3 (W#16#FE) Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes 250 Yes User data variant See the table Overview of the user data variants Minimum and maximum value calculation * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * 0 = Disabled * 100 ... 6000 = measuring * 65535 = calculation Neutral: Current transformer primary rated current [A] * 1 ... 16000 1000 Yes Current transformer type for line conductors L1, L2, L3 and neutral conductor * Rogowski coil Rogowski coil Yes * Current-voltage transformer Minimum and maximum value calculation gate Power quality analysis functions Residual current analysis Neutral: Current transformer secondary voltage [0.1 mV] Voltage dip limit value in relation * to nominal value voltage [0.1%] 10 ... 1000 100 Yes Voltage swell limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%] * 10 ... 10000 100 Yes Threshold overcurrent in relation * to nominal value current [0.1%] 10 ... 60000 100 Yes Number of cycles for voltage swell and dip analysis * 4 ... 32767 10 Yes Diagnostics power quality * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Diagnostics overflow current Diagnostics overflow voltage Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 96 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters Diagnostics underflow voltage Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes Disable Yes 0 ... 99999 1 Yes * 10 ... 60000 100 Yes Tolerance time overcurrent [ms] * 0 ... 60000 40000 Yes Low limit current measurement in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] * 0 ... 200 10 Yes Enable operating hours counter * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Current transformer secondary voltage [0.1 mV] * 100 ... 6000 250 Yes Current transformer primary rated current [A] * 1 ... 16000 1000 Yes Reverse current direction * Disabled Disabled Yes * Reverse current direction Nominal value voltage [V] * 1 ... 999999 230 V Yes Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage [0.1%] * 10 ... 500 100 Yes Voltage transformer primary voltage [V] * 1 ... 999999 V 230 V Yes Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V] * 1 ... 500 V 230 V Yes * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Nominal value current [A] * Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] Diagnostics overflow cumulative values Detect voltage swell and dip Detect peak value current Detect peak value voltage Detect overcurrent Analyse harmonics Enable gate of operating hours counter Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 97 Parameters 13.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default setting Reconfiguration in RUN Limits Number of limits * 0 ... 16 0 Yes Limit monitoring * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Measured variable * Measured value ID see Measured value data records (Page 224) None Yes Enable limit monitoring gate * Disable Disable Yes * Enable * Disable Disable Yes * Enable Limit * depending on the selected measured variable 0.0000 Yes Type * High limit High limit Yes * Low limit * 0 ... 200 [0.1%] 1% Yes None None Yes Hardware interrupt Hysteresis for limit monitoring [0.1%] Delay time for limit monitoring [s] * * 1 ... 10 s Number of measured values * 0 ... 64 0 Yes Measured variable * Measured value ID see Measured variables for connection type (Page 162) None Yes * 0 ... 150 0 Yes * 0 ... 125 with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15 with HSP0253 * Measured value ID see Measured variables for connection type (Page 162) None Yes User data mapping I/II Data record mapping Number of measured values Measured variable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 98 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Hardware interrupt Enable the hardware interrupt for the entire module here. Inputs Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Activate the diagnostics No supply voltage L+. If there is no voltage or too little voltage at terminal 17, the message "No supply voltage" is output and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered. Connection type Specify the connection type you used for the AI Energy Meter HF. For more detailed information, refer to "Connection examples (Page 23)". Voltage measuring range Here you set the voltage measuring range in which the system connected to the AI Energy Meter HF works. Line frequency Here you set the line frequency in which the system connected to the AI Energy Meter HF works. Enable gate energy counter Enable the gate for the energy meter When the gate is enabled, the energy counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". End value energy meter Select the end value for the periodic counting of the energy meter. You can also specify that the energy counter is to count without a full-scale value (infinite counting). The calculated energy counter values are stored retentively in the module. User data variant Select user data variant with which the module is to operate once it is started up. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 99 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Minimum and maximum value calculation Enable calculation of the minimum and maximum values. The minimum and maximum value are calculated from the start of the measurement. The values determined are stored retentively in the AI Energy Meter HF together with the time stamp. Minimum and maximum value calculation gate Enable the gate for minimum and maximum value calculation. When the gate is enabled, the energy meter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Power quality analysis function Enable the power quality analysis function for the entire module. Residual current analysis Enable the residual current analysis for the entire module. The residual current analysis is only available in the connection types 3P4W or 3P4WI and the concurrently activated parameter "Neutral current measurement". Neutral current measurement Defines whether the neutral current is measured or calculated. This parameter does not apply to parameter assignment with GSD file. Neutral: Current transformer secondary voltage [0.1 mV] Enter the secondary voltage to determine the current/voltage transformer ratio. The conversion ratio is determined from the primary rated current and the secondary voltage. The following applies to parameter assignment with GSD file: 0 = Neutral conductor function deactivated 100 ... 6000 = measure neutral current 65535 = calculate neutral current Neutral: Current transformer primary rated current [A] To determine the current/voltage transformer ratio, enter the primary rated current. The conversion ratio is determined from the primary rated current and the secondary voltage. Current transformer type for line conductors L1, L2, L3 and neutral conductor Select the connected current measuring transformer type. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 100 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Voltage dip limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%] Further information can be found under Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value (Page 117). Voltage swell limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%] Further information can be found under Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value (Page 115). Threshold overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] Further information can be found under Overcurrent of the current half value (Page 128). Number of cycles for voltage swell and dip analysis Further information can be found under Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value (Page 115) and Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value (Page 117). Diagnostics power quality Depending on the enable of the individual functions the diagnostics are triggered when a voltage swell, voltage dip or overcurrent event has occurred. Diagnostics overflow current The measured current is monitored after expiry of the "Tolerance time" for "Overcurrent [0.1 A] tolerance value". Exceeding the value generates the diagnostics "overflow current". Diagnostics overflow voltage The nominal values voltage are monitored for tolerance. An overflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics underflow voltage The nominal values voltage are monitored for tolerance. An underflow triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics overflow cumulative values A cumulative overflow in the calculated variables is displayed. The values stop at the high or low limit. A violation triggers a diagnostic interrupt. Detect voltage swell and dip Activates the detection of voltage swell and dip. Further information can be found under Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow (Page 113). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 101 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Detect peak value current Activates the detection of current peak values. Further information can be found under Peak values of the instantaneous values for current (Page 126). Detect peak value voltage Activates the detection of voltage peak values. Further information can be found under Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage (Page 120). Detect overcurrent Activates the detection of overcurrent. Further information can be found under Overcurrent of the current half value (Page 128). Analyse harmonics Activates harmonics analysis Nominal value current [A] Enter the nominal value for the current. This is the "operating point" in your application. Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] Further information can be found under Diagnostics: Overload (Page 122). Tolerance time overcurrent [ms] Further information can be found under Diagnostics: Overload (Page 122). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 102 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Low limit current measurement in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] The configurable low limit for measuring current refers to the nominal value and is used to avoid incorrect calculations in the case of very low currents. Incorrect measurements of very low currents in particular are a cause of inaccuracies in the current transformer used. Set the low limit for the current measurement to the required value depending on your process. Note Tip: If you want to find the low limit for the current measurement experimentally, set it to a lower value. Then, feed in a very precise low current and determine the measurement error that can no longer be tolerated. Afterwards, set the low limit for the current measurement to the limit value you have determined. If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Neutral current Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy as well as the operating hours counters do not count any longer. Further information can be found under Low limit for measuring current undershot (Page 124). Enable operating hours counter Enable the operating hours counter. The counting starts from the configurable low limit of the current measurement. The counter can be reset or pre-assigned using data record or output bit. Enable gate of operating hours counter Enable the gate for the operating hours counter. When the gate is activated, the operating hours counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1". Current transformer type for line conductors L1, L2, L3 and neutral conductor Activate the transformer type here: Current/transformer type or Rogowski coil Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 103 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Current transformer secondary voltage [0.1 mV] Enter the nominal value for the secondary voltage (100 mV bis 6000 mV) of the current/voltage transformer used or Rogowski coil. The conversion ratio is determined from the primary rated current and the secondary voltage. Current transformer primary rated current [A] Enter the nominal value for the primary rated current (1 A or 16000 A) of the current/voltage transformer used or Rogowski coil. The conversion ratio is determined from the primary rated current and the secondary voltage. Reverse current direction Setting to determine whether or not to reverse the direction of current. In the event of inadvertent incorrect connection, this parameter can be used to correct the measured values, thus saving the hassle of rewiring. The direction of the current is only evident from the power measurement values. The current measurement value is an rms value. Nominal value voltage [V] Enter the nominal value for the voltage. This is the "operating point" in your application. Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage [0.1%] Enter the tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage here in increments of 0.1%. You can find additional information under Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow (Page 113). Voltage transformer primary voltage [V] Enter the nominal value for the primary voltage of the voltage transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage. Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V] Enter the nominal value for the secondary voltage of the voltage transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage. Limits Number of limits Enter the number of measured values that you want to monitor for limits. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 104 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Limit monitoring Enable the monitoring of the limit for a freely definable measured value here. Limit violations are counted and the count values stored retentively. Measured variable Enter the measured value ID that you want to use for limit monitoring. Enable limit monitoring gate Enable the limit monitoring gate. When the gate is enabled, the limit monitoring is only started when the corresponding bit of the associated output user data is set to "1". Hardware interrupt Enable the hardware interrupt. The hardware interrupt is triggered if a high or low limit is violated. Without activation of a hardware interrupt, a limit violation is only displayed in the user data and in DS 150. Limit Enter the limit that is to trigger a limit violation when exceeded or fallen below. Limit violations are displayed in the user data and in DS 150. Type Select whether it is a high or low limit. Depending on this selection, the limit violation or hardware interrupt is triggered when a value exceeds (high limit) or falls below (low limit) the limit. Hysteresis for limit monitoring [0.1%] Enter the hysteresis for limit in percent. The hysteresis band is below the high limit or above the low limit. The parameter in % refers to the configured limit. If a measured value fluctuates around the limit but does not leave the hysteresis band, a new limit violation is not triggered. Delay time for limit monitoring [s] Select the delay time for limit violation. The delay refers to the time that must elapse before an occurrence of a limit violation is reported. Faults can be filtered out by selection of the delay time. The deceleration time is also taken into consideration during outgoing of the limit violation. User data mapping I/II Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 105 Parameters 13.2 Description of parameters Number of measured values Specify the number of measured values/variables that you want to use for the user-specific user data mapping. Measured variable Select the measured variable (with the measured value ID) that you want to use for the userspecific user data mapping. Data record mapping Number of measured values Specify the number of measured values/variables that you want to use for the user-specific data record mapping. Measured variable Select the measured variable (with the measured value ID) that you want to use for the userspecific data record mapping. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 106 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.1 14 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Error (red) PWR (green) Status (green) Figure 14-1 LED display Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 107 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following table explains the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 110). DIAG LED Table 14- 1 DIAG Meaning of the DIAG LED Meaning Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned) Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Status LED Table 14- 2 Status Meaning of the Status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated and no error On Channel enabled and error On see also Neutral current In (Page 90) Error LED Table 14- 3 Status Meaning of the Error LED Meaning Channel is OK Off Channel is faulty On Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 108 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.2 Interrupts PWR LED Table 14- 4 PWR Meaning of the PWR LED Meaning Line voltage missing Off Line voltage available On 14.2 Interrupts The analog input module AI Energy Meter HF supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts. 14.2.1 Hardware interrupts Hardware interrupts The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events: Violation of low limit 1 to 16 Violation of high limit 1 to 16 You can find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment of the local data double word 8 by the start information of the hardware interrupt organization block. Figure 14-2 Start information of the organization block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 109 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.3 Diagnostic alarms 14.2.2 Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostic interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Power quality Channel is temporarily unavailable Hardware interrupt lost Error Supply voltage missing Parameter assignment error Underflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) violated Overflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) exceeded Overload (voltage measured value > 424 mV or tolerance value overcurrent exceeded after the tolerance time has expired) Overflow of the calculated values (measured or calculated values screen exceed the representable range of values) 14.3 Diagnostic alarms Note Assignment channel in diagnostic message Phase In the diagnostic messages the channels are counted from Channel "0" on, in the AI Energy Meter HF from phase "1" on. Note the following assignment: * Channel "0" Phase "1" * Channel "1" Phase "2" * Channel "2" Phase "3" Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 110 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.3 Diagnostic alarms Table 14- 5 Error types Diagnostic message Error code Meaning Solution Undervoltage 2H 3H Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. Violation leads to voltage overflow/underflow Observe the line voltage range Overvoltage Overload 4H * The measured current is monitored after the "Tolerance time" for "Tolerance value overcurrent [0.1A]" has expired. Exceeding this results in overflow current. * The maximum value of the secondary voltage (424 mV) is exceeded. Error 9H Internal module error (diagnostic alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Observe the current range Replace the module Correct the parameter assignment Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient line voltage at terminal 17 Check supply External fault 1AH Voltage swell/dip and overcurrent see: Channel is temporarily unavailable 1FH * Voltage swell of the voltage halfwave value (Page 115) * Voltage dip of the voltage halfwave value (Page 117) * Overcurrent of the current half value (Page 128) Firmware upgrade is being performed. -Channel 0 applies to the entire module. The module is currently not performing any measurements. A user calibration is being executed at the channel. Complete the user calibration Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 111 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4 Diagnostics response Diagnostics response This section describes the response of the AI Energy Meters HF when diagnostics information is reported. Measured values in the case of diagnostics Even in the case of diagnostics, measured values continue to be displayed as long as they can still be acquired. If measured values cannot be measured or calculated, "0" is displayed. Low limit for current measurement undershot (zero suppression) If the supplied current is less than the configured "Low limit for current measurement" parameter, the current measurement and all dependent variables are suppressed and set to "0". If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset. Effective current value Active power Reactive power Apparent power Phase angle Power factor A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy as well as the operating hours counters do not count any longer. If the secondary current fed in at the current measuring channel is higher than 424 mV, the module changes to limitation and the current measurement value and all dependent variables are set to "0". Input data to "0" If the AI Energy Meter HF is no longer recognized by the interface module (for example, because it is defective or not plugged in), all input data are set to "0". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 112 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4.1 Voltage diagnostics 14.4.1.1 Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow Introduction You use the parameter "Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage" to define a tolerance range around the set nominal value voltage at the operating point. If the effective value of the primary voltage exceeds this tolerance range, the module reports the diagnostics "overflow" or "underflow". Calculation of tolerance value measuring voltage The tolerance value measuring voltage is calculated with the following formula: Tolerance value measuring voltage = "Nominal value voltage" ("Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage [%]" x "Nominal value voltage") The "Nominal value voltage" is the primary voltage at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 6 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics overflow Enable Diagnostics underflow Enable Nominal value voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage transformer primary voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage transformer secondary voltage 1 ... 500 V Tolerance factor overflow/underflow 10 ... 50% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 113 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Upper tolerance value measuring voltage Nominal voltage Lower tolerance value measuring voltage Diagnostics "overflow" Diagnostics "underflow" Figure 14-3 "Overflow/Underflow" diagnostics of the effective voltage value The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 7 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics overflow Enable Diagnostics underflow Enable Nominal value voltage 230 V Voltage transformer primary voltage 1000 V Voltage transformer secondary voltage 500 V Tolerance factor overflow/underflow 20% In this example you define a tolerance range of 20%. The tolerance range corresponds to an effective value of primary voltage of 46 V. In the figure the effective value of the primary voltage first exceeds the tolerance range. As long as the effective value of the primary voltage exceeds the tolerance range the module reports the diagnostics "overflow". The effective value of the primary voltage then exceeds the tolerance range. As long as the effective value of the primary voltage exceeds the tolerance range the module reports the diagnostics "underflow". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 114 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4.1.2 Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value Introduction Voltage swells are short-term increases in the line voltage which can occur, for example, when switching off large consumers. With the parameter "Number of cycles for analysis" you define how many measuring cycles the voltage swell must apply at until the module reports the voltage swell. The module reports the diagnostics "Power quality". The module also sets the qualifier bit 6 for the respective phase in data record DS 160 (Page 258). If the voltage lies below the limit for voltage swell again, the module sets the diagnostics "Power quality" again and resets the qualifier bit 6 again. The AI Energy Meter HF returns the maximum value and the duration of the voltage swell, e.g. in data record 160. The duration is determined exactly to 2 cycles. In the event of voltage swell again, only the diagnostics "Power quality" is reported again and the duration, and if applicable, the maximum voltage swell value is updated. Calculation of voltage swell limit value The Voltage swell limit value is the value from which level of voltage the AI Energy Meter HF recognizes a voltage swell. The "Voltage swell limit value" is calculated by the following formula: Voltage swell limit = "Nominal value voltage" + ("Voltage swell limit [%]" x "Nominal value voltage") The "Nominal value voltage" is the primary voltage at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 8 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 ... 32767 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal value voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage swell limit 1 ... 1000% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 115 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Voltage swell limit Nominal voltage Diagnostics "power quality" Qualifier Bit 6 Status "Power quality voltage swell" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Min. voltage swell (half-wave) and duration can be read Figure 14-4 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 116 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 9 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal value voltage 230 V Voltage swell limit 40% If the module detects that the "Voltage swell limit value" has been exceeded: The module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage swell. The module sets the qualifier bit 6 from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage swell. After the module has reset the diagnostics "Power quality" and reset the qualifier bit again, Bit 1 is set. As long as Bit 1 is set, the module returns the maximum value and the duration of the voltage swell, e.g. in data record 160. You reset Bit 1 with the bit "reset status "power quality"". 14.4.1.3 Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value Introduction Voltage dips are short-term decreases in the line voltage which can occur, for example, when switching on large consumers. With the parameter "Number of cycles for analysis" you define how many measuring cycles the voltage dip must be present until the module reports the voltage dip. If the voltage lies above the "Voltage dip limit" again, the module sets the diagnostics "Power quality" and resets the qualifier bit 5 again. The AI Energy Meter HF returns the maximum value and the duration of the voltage dip, e.g. in data record DS 160 (Page 258). The duration is determined exactly to 2 cycles. In the event of voltage dip, the module reports a "Power quality" diagnostic. The module also sets the qualifier bit 5 for the respective phase in data record DS 160. In the event of voltage dip again, only the "Power quality" diagnostics is reported again and the duration, and if applicable, the minimum voltage dip value is updated. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 117 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Calculation of voltage dip limit The voltage dip limit is the value from which level of voltage the AI Energy Meter HF detects a voltage dip. The voltage dip limit is calculated by the following formula: Voltage dip limit = "Nominal value voltage" - ("Voltage dip limit [%]" x "Nominal value voltage") The "Nominal value voltage" is the primary voltage at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 10 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 ... 32767 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal value voltage 1 ... 999999 V Voltage dip limit 1 ... 100% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 118 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Nominal voltage Voltage dip limit Diagnostics "power quality" Qualifier Bit 0 Status "Power quality voltage dip" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Min. voltage dip (half-wave) and duration can be read Figure 14-5 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 119 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 11 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Number of cycles for analysis 4 Diagnostics power quality Enable Determination of voltage swell and dip Enable Nominal voltage 230 V Voltage dip limit 50% If the module detects that the "Voltage dip limit" has been undershot: The module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage dip. The module sets the qualifier bit 5 from "Number of cycles for analysis" as long as there is a voltage dip. After the module has reset the diagnostics "Power quality" and reset the qualifier bit again, bit 0 is set. As long as bit 0 is set, the module returns the minimum value and the duration of the voltage dip, e.g. in data record 160. You reset Bit 0 with the bit "Reset status "power quality"". 14.4.1.4 Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF determines the maximum instantaneous value for the voltage for up to three phases. The function "Detect peak value voltage" returns the largest voltage value and the associated phase. The module sets the qualifier bit 2 ("Power quality voltage peak") for the phase in question. You can read the maximum voltage value, for example, in the data record DS 160 (Page 258). Voltage peak detection is based on the function for recording swells of the supply voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30. This function is used to record the maximum voltage value in the supply network. In three-phase systems this function is only useful if the system is symmetrical and when all phases show the same voltage transformers. Accordingly, measurement always records only the peak value over all phases. In addition to the requirements of IEC 61000-4-30, the phase on which the peak value voltage occurred is detected. For metrological reasons, only the phase concerned that shows this maximum value can be returned. This may mean that the maximum voltage values of the other phases remain "0". With a "reset power quality analysis" the analysis starts afresh and the current results are discarded. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 120 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 12 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis function (module) Enable Determine peak value voltage (channel) Enable Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Voltage peak in L1 Status "Power quality voltage peak" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Max. voltage peaks instantaneous value can be read out Figure 14-6 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 121 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 13 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Determination of voltage peak value L1 Enable Determination of voltage peak value L2 Enable Determination of voltage peak value L3 Enable The module detects the voltage peak in phase 1 and sets the qualifier bit 2 for phase 1. You can find the maximum voltage value, for example, in the data record DS 160 in bytes 174 to 177 ("Voltage peak value L1"). 14.4.2 Current diagnostics 14.4.2.1 Diagnostics: Overload Introduction As long as one of the following conditions is met, the module reports the diagnostics "Overload" for each phase: Parameterized maximum relative measured current longer than the parameterized "Tolerance time overcurrent" is exceeded. Maximum permissible secondary voltage of 424 mV at a current measuring channel of the AI Energy Meters HF is exceeded. Calculation of the parameterizable maximum measured current The tolerance value for the maximum relative measured current is calculated with the following formula: Tolerance factor for maximum relative measured current = "Nominal value current" + ("Tolerance factor overcurrent [%]" x "Nominal value current") The "Nominal value current" is the primary current at the operating point. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 122 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 14 Parameter assignment Parameter Diagnostics overload Enable Nominal value current 0 ... 99999 A Current transformer primary rated current 1 ... 16000 A Current transformer secondary voltage 10 ... 600 mV Tolerance factor overcurrent 1 ... 6000% Tolerance time overcurrent 0 ... 60000 ms Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the signal wave for the diagnostics "Overload": Maximum relative measured current at permissible secondary voltage of 424 mV The module reports the diagnostics Overload when the maximum permissible secondary voltage amounting to 424 mV is exceeded (primary current = 424 mV x 10000 A / 333 mV = 12732 A). Tolerance value measured current After the "Tolerance time overcurrent" of 40000 ms has expired, the module reports the diagnostics "Overload" as long as the configured tolerance value for the maximum measured current of 2400 A (= 2000 A + 20% x 2000 A) is exceeded. Nominal value current Tolerance time Diagnostics "overload" Figure 14-7 Diagnostics "overload" of the effective current value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 123 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 15 Parameter assignment Parameter 14.4.2.2 Diagnostics overload Enable Nominal value current 2000 A Current transformer primary rated current 10000 A Current transformer secondary voltage 333 mV Tolerance factor overcurrent 20% Tolerance time overcurrent 40000 ms Low limit for measuring current undershot Introduction With the function "Low limit for measuring current undershot" the AI Energy Meter HF monitors the low limit of the effective value of the current per phase. If the low limit for measuring current is undershot, the module sets the current value to 0. Information as to which current measured values are set to 0 can be found under Basics for reading measured values (Page 38). You activate the function by setting the parameter "Low limit for measuring current" > 0%. Calculation of low limit for measuring current The low limit for measuring current is calculated using the following formula: Low limit measured current = "Nominal value current" x "Low limit for measuring current [%]" The "Nominal value current" is the primary current at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 16 Parameter assignment Parameter Nominal value current 0 ... 99999 A Current transformer primary rated current 1 ... 16000 A Current transformer secondary voltage 10 ... 600 mV Low limit for current measurement 0 ... 20% * * 0% means deactivation of the function Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 124 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Nominal current Low limit measured current Measured value Returned value Figure 14-8 Behavior in the event of value falling below "Low limit for measuring current undershot" The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 17 Parameter assignment Parameter Nominal value current 2000 A Current transformer primary rated current 5000 A Current transformer secondary voltage 333 mV Low limit for current measurement 10% In this example you define the "Low limit for measuring current" with 10%. This corresponds to an effective value of the primary voltage of 200 A. If the value falls below the calculated low limit current measurement , the module sets all the current-dependent measured values (effective value current, active power, reactive power, apparent power, phase angle and power factor) to 0 A until the low limit measuring current is exceeded again. The energy meters and operating hours counters are stopped during this time. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 125 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4.2.3 Peak values of the instantaneous values for current Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF determines the maximum instantaneous value for the current for up to three phases. The function "Detect peak value current" returns the largest current value and the associated phase. The module sets the qualifier bit 3 ("Power quality current peak") for the phase in question. You can read the maximum current value, for example, in the data record DS 160 (Page 258). Current peak detection is based on the function for recording swells of the supply voltage in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30. This function is used to record the maximum current value in the supply network. In three-phase systems this function is only useful if current recording is symmetrical and if all phases show the same current measuring transformers. Accordingly, measurement always records only the peak value over all phases. In addition to the requirements of IEC 61000-4-30, the phase on which the peak value current occurred is detected. For metrological reasons, only the phase concerned that shows this maximum value can be returned. This may mean that the maximum current values of the other phases remain "0". With a "reset power quality analysis" the analysis starts afresh and the current results are discarded. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 18 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis function (module) Enable Determine peak value current (Channel) Enable Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 126 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Current peak in L1 Status "Power quality current peak" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Max. current peaks instantaneous value can be read out Figure 14-9 Example of principle of operation The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 19 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis function Enable Determine peak value current (L1) Enable Determine peak value current (L2) Enable Determine peak value current (L3) Enable The module detects the peak value current in phase 1 and sets the qualifier bit 3 for phase 1. You can find the maximum current value, for example, in the data record DS 160 in bytes 186 to 189 ("Current peak value L1"). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 127 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response 14.4.2.4 Overcurrent of the current half value Introduction The AI Energy Meter HF returns the maximum overcurrent value of the current half-wave value. If the value to be monitored is exceeded, the module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" and the qualifier bit 7 is set. The module also sets Bit 4 for the respective phase in data record DS 160 (Page 258). In the event that the current half-value is exceeded again, only the diagnostics "Power quality" is reported again and, if applicable, the maximum current swell value is updated. Calculation of overcurrent limit The overcurrent limit is calculated based on the following formula: Overcurrent limit = "Nominal value current" + ("Threshold overcurrent [%]" x "Nominal value current") The "Nominal value current" is the primary current at the operating point. Parameter assignment The following table shows the necessary parameters: Table 14- 20 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics power quality Enable Determining the overcurrent Enable Nominal value current 0 ... 99999 A Threshold overcurrent 1 ... 6000% Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 128 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response Example The following figure is a schematic diagram of the principle of operation: Threshold overcurrent Nominal current Qualifier Bit 7 Diagnostics power quality Status "power quality overcurrent" Bit "Reset status "power quality"" Max. overcurrent (half-wave) value can be read Figure 14-10 Example of principle of operation Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 129 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 14.4 Diagnostics response The following table shows the parameter assignment for the example: Table 14- 21 Parameter assignment Parameter Power quality analysis functions Enable Diagnostics power quality Enable Determining the overcurrent Enable Nominal value current 2000 A Threshold overcurrent 100% In this example you define the Threshold overcurrent of 100%. This corresponds to a primary current of 4000 A. If the "Threshold overcurrent" is exceeded, the module sets Bit 4 "Overcurrent" for the phase in the data record DS 160. As long as the "Threshold overcurrent" is exceeded, the module reports the diagnostics "Power quality" and the qualifier bit 7 is set. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 130 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 15 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AI Energy Meter HF The following table shows the technical specifications as of 07/2018. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 General information Product type designation AI Energy Meter 480 VAC/RC HF, PU 1 Firmware version V6.0 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type U0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC20 Supported power supply systems TT, TN, IT Product function * * Voltage measurement Yes - without voltage transformer Yes - with voltage transformer Yes Current measurement Yes - without current transformer No - with current transformer No - with Rogowski coil Yes - with current/voltage transformer Yes; 333 mV interface * Energy measurement Yes * Frequency measurement Yes * Power measurement Yes * Active power measurement Yes * Reactive power measurement Yes * Power factor measurement Yes * Active factor measurement Yes * Reactive power compensation Yes * Line analysis Yes Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 131 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 - Monitoring of instantaneous and halfwave values Yes - THD measurement for current and voltage Yes - Harmonics for current and voltage Yes - Voltage dip (DIP) Yes - Voltage swell Yes * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 * Isochronous mode No Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V15 or higher * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version Configurable via GSD file * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 Operating mode * Switching between operating modes in RUN Yes; For module version 32 I/20 Q, it is possible to dynamically switch between 25 user data variants, 23 of which are pre-defined and 2 of which can be defined by the specific user * Cyclic measured value access Yes * Acyclic measured value access Yes * Fixed measured value sets Yes * Freely definable measured value sets Yes CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes Calibration possible in RUN Yes Installation type/mounting Mounting position Any Supply voltage Design of the power supply DC Type of supply voltage 24 V DC permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Input current Current consumption (rated value) 12.5 mA Current consumption, max. 17 mA Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 132 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 Power loss Power loss, typ. 400 mW; 3x 230 V AC Address area Address space per module * Inputs 256 byte * Outputs 20 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Mechanical coding element Yes Yes Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants * 2-wire connection BU type U0 Time of day Operating hours counter * present Yes Analog inputs Cycle time (all channels), typ. 50 ms; Time for consistent update of all measured and calculated values (cyclic und acyclic data) Cable length * shielded, max. 200 m * unshielded, max. 30 m Analog value generation for the inputs Sampling frequency, max. 2 048 kHz Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes * Hardware interrupt Yes; Monitoring of up to 16 freely selectable process values (exceeding or undershooting of value) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 133 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 Diagnostic messages * Line quality Yes * Supply voltage Yes * Hardware interrupt lost Yes * Parameter assignment error Yes * Module fault Yes * Channel not available Yes * Overflow/underflow Yes * Overload current Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWRLED) Yes * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Integrated Functions Measuring functions * Measuring procedure for voltage measurement TRMS * Measuring procedure for current measurement TRMS * Type of measured value acquisition seamless * Curve shape of voltage Sinusoidal or distorted * Buffering of measured variables Yes * Parameter length 128 byte * Bandwidth of measured value acquisition 3.2 kHz; Harmonics: 63 / 50 Hz, 52 / 60 Hz Measuring range - Frequency measurement, min. 45 Hz - Frequency measurement, max. 65 Hz Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 134 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 Measuring inputs for voltage - Measurable line voltage between phase 300 V and neutral conductor - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors - Measurable line voltage between phase 3 V and neutral conductor, min. - Measurable line voltage between phase 300 V and neutral conductor, max. - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, min. 6V - Measurable line voltage between the line conductors, max. 519 V - Measurement category for voltage measurement in accordance with IEC 61010-2-030 CAT II - Internal resistance line conductor and neutral conductor 1.5 M - Power consumption per phase 60 mW; 300 V AC - Impulse voltage resistance 1,2/50s 2.5 kV 519 V Measuring inputs for current (Rog. or I/U converter) - Measurable current at AC, max. 424 mV - Continuous voltage, maximum permissible 2V - Rated value, short-time withstand voltage restricted to 1 s 30 V - Input resistance 120 k - Zero point suppression Yes; 0 ... 20%, referred to the nominal current Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 135 Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 Accuracy class according to IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable voltage 0,2 - Measured variable current 0,2 - Measured variable apparent power 0.5 - Measured variable active power 0.5 - Measured variable reactive power 1 - Measured variable power factor 0.5 - Measured variable active energy 0.5 - Measured variable reactive energy 1 - Measured variable neutral current 0,2 - Measured variable phase angle 0.5 ; not covered by IEC 61557-12 - Measured variable frequency 0.05 - Measured variable harmonic 1 - Measured variable THDU 1 - Measured variable THDI 1 Accuracy class line analysis acc. to IEC 61000-430 - Measured variable voltage Class S - Measured variable current Class S - Measured variable frequency Class S - Measured variable voltage interruption Class S - Measured variable voltage dip and swell Class S - Measured variable harmonic voltage Class S - Measured variable harmonic current Class S Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes; Including FE Isolation Isolation tested with Between channels and backplane bus, 24 V supply: Routine test, 1 920 V AC, 2 s; between backplane bus and 24 V supply: Type test, 707 V DC Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 136 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Technical specifications 15.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) * vertical installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Installation altitude above sea level, max. 3 000 m; Restrictions for installation altitudes > 2 000 m, see manual Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight (without packaging) 45 g Other Data for selecting a voltage transformer * Secondary side, max. 300 V ATEX approval In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 137 A Parameter data records A.1 Configuration via parameter data records The parameter data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Overview of the parameter data records Parameter data record DS 128 for the complete module Parameter data record DS 129 for limit monitoring Parameter data records DS 130/131 for user data mapping Parameter data record DS 135 for data record mapping Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN mode, for example change the diagnostics behavior, define new limits or configure a modified user data mapping. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module via the respective data record. The parameters set in STEP 7 do not change in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are still valid after a restart. If you reconfigure a module (so that the user data size changes) and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing". The diagnostics "Supply voltage missing" is signaled as outgoing. STATUS output parameter If errors occur during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter. The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 138 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Parameter data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 139 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information for a module. Figure A-3 Module header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 140 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 141 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-4 Module parameter block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 142 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-5 Module parameter block You can find the user data variant in the section Overview of the user data variants (Page 204). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 143 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Channel header information The following figure shows the structure of the header information for a channel. Figure A-6 Channel header information Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 144 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Channel parameter block for channel 0 (Phase 1) The following figure shows an example of the structure of the channel parameter block for channel 0 (phase 1, bytes 32 to 63). For channel 1 (phase 2; bytes 64 to 95) and channel 2 (phase: 3; bytes 96 to 127), the structure is identical. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 145 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-7 Channel parameter block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 146 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 147 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Figure A-8 Channel parameter block Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check bytes 1 to 3, 32, 33, 52, 53, 72 and 73. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check bytes 8, 14, 15, 30, 31, 34, 42, 50...53, 54, 62, 70...73, 74, 82, 90...93 and set the reserved bits back to 0. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 148 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 05 "Voltage measuring range" invalid Check Byte 5. Permitted values: 01H to 0CH DF 80 E1 20 "Connection type" invalid Check Byte 4. Permitted values: 00H, 0BH ... 01H DF 80 E1 21 "User data variant" not possible or input data configuration not large enough Check Byte 9. Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 22 "User data variant" invalid Check Byte 9. Select a valid code for the user data variant. DF 80 E1 23 "Line frequency" invalid Check Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 29 "Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 35, 55 and 75. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2A "Tolerance time overcurrent" invalid Check bytes 36...37, 56...57, 67...77. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2B "Low limit current measurement" in relation to nominal value current [0.1%] invalid Check bytes 43, 63 and 83. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2C "Current transformer primary rated current [A]" invalid. Check bytes 40...41, 60...61, 80...81 Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2D "Voltage transformer primary voltage [V]" invalid Check bytes 46...49, 66...69, 66...69, 88...89. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2E "Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V]" Check bytes 44...45, bytes 64...65 and invalid bytes 84...85. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 2F "End value energy meter" invalid Check Bit 4...6 in Byte 6. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 3E Only for connection type 3P4W1 and 3P3W1. Check bytes 38...42 with bytes 58...62 and bytes 78...82 as well as bytes 44...49 with bytes 64...69 and bytes 84...80 for identical values. Current or voltage transformer parameters for the different phases are not identical. Enter identical values for current measuring transformer (secondary current, primary current, direction of current) and voltage transformer (secondary voltage, primary voltage) at all three phases. DF 80 E1 3F "End value for energy meter" or transmission ratio (primary value, secondary value) of current and voltage too low. Increase the end value of the energy meter or the ratio of primary to secondary current for current measuring transformer and/or primary rated current to secondary voltage for voltage transformer. DF 80 E1 42 "Current transformer type for line conductors L1, L2, L3 and neutral conductor" invalid Check Bit 0... in Byte 14. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 44 "Voltage dip limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 16...17. Enter valid values (voltage dip limit value must be smaller than the respective nominal voltage) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 149 Parameter data records A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 45 "Voltage swell limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 20...23. Enter valid values (voltage swell limit value must be greater than the respective nominal voltage) DF 80 E1 46 "Threshold overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 24...27. Enter valid values (threshold overcurrent must be greater than primary current) DF 80 E1 47 "Number of cycles for analysis of voltage swell/dip" invalid Check bytes 28...29. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 48 "Current transformer secondary voltage " invalid Check bytes 10...11, 38...39, 58...59 and 78...79. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 49 Current transformer parameter for "residual current analysis" invalid Only with connection type 3P4W and 3P4WI and if neutral current is measured. Current measuring transformer primary rated current and secondary voltage and direction of current of the three phases must have identical parameters. DF 80 E1 4A Voltage transformer parameters for voltage swell/dip invalid Check the parameters secondary voltage, primary voltage, nominal value voltage. Enabled channels must have identical parameters. DF 80 E1 4B Current transformer parameter for "Detect overcurrent" invalid Check the parameters secondary voltage, primary rated current, nominal value current and direction of current. Enabled channels must have identical parameters. DF 80 E1 4C Parameters for determining the neutral current invalid Neutral current can only be determined with connection type 3P4W and 3P4WI Current transmission parameters primary current, secondary voltage, nominal value current and direction of current of the three phases must be identical. DF 80 E1 4D "Nominal value current [A]" invalid Check bytes 34...37, 66...69, 98...101. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 4E "Nominal value voltage [V]" invalid Check bytes 50...53, 82...85, 114...117. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 4F "Low limit current measurement in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Check bytes 42...43, 74...75, 106...107. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 50 The combination of "Nominal value voltage [V]" and "Voltage dip limit value in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid. Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring voltage of 0 V is not undershot. DF 80 E1 51 The combination of "Nominal value voltage Select the permissible value in % so that [V]" and "Voltage swell limit value in relation the secondary measuring voltage of 300 to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" invalid. V is not exceeded. DF 80 E1 52 The combination of "Nominal value current [A]" and "Threshold overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring voltage of 424 mA is not exceeded. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 150 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 53 The combination of "Nominal value current [A]" and "Tolerance factor overcurrent in relation to nominal value current [0.1%]" invalid Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring voltage of 424 mA is not exceeded. DF 80 E1 54 The combination of "Nominal value voltage [V]" and "Tolerance factor overvoltage/undervoltage in relation to nominal value voltage [0.1%]" lies outside the permissible range. Select the permissible value in % so that the secondary measuring voltage of 300 V is not exceeded. DF 80 E1 55 "Nominal value current [A]" is too high. "Nominal value current" x transmission factor current generates a secondary current measured variable which exceeds its value range. Select the permissible value in A so that the secondary measuring voltage of 424 mA is not exceeded. The transmission factor current is calculated from "Current transformer primary rated current [A]" / "Current transformer secondary voltage [0.1 mV]" DF 80 E1 56 "Nominal value voltage [V]" is too high. "Nominal value voltage" x transmission factor voltage generates a secondary voltage measured variable which exceeds its value range. Select the permissible value in V so that the secondary measuring voltage of 300 V is not exceeded. The transmission factor voltage is calculated from "Voltage transformer primary voltage [V]" / "Voltage transformer secondary voltage [V]" Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 151 Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Structure of data record 129 Figure A-9 Structure of data record 129 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-10 Header information DS 129 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 152 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Limit parameter block The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for limit monitoring. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 153 Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Figure A-11 Limit parameter data block Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 154 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 129. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check bytes 3, 13, 23, 33...163 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 31 "Length of the parameter block" invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 "Number of parameter blocks" invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 "ID of the measured value for limit moni- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid values. toring" invalid. DF 80 E1 34 Parameters for monitoring the limits invalid DF 80 E1 35 "Number of limit" in 'Monitoring assigned Check bits 0...3 in Byte 6. Do not use multiple times' parameter limit number several times. DF 80 E1 36 "Hysteresis for limit monitoring" invalid Check Byte 7. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 37 "Limit" invalid. Check Byte 8...11. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 38 "Delay time for limit monitoring" invalid. Check Byte 12. Enter valid values. Check bits 0...3 in Byte 6. Enter valid values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 155 Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping Structure of data record 130/131 Figure A-12 Structure of data record 130/131 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-13 Header information DS 130/131 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 156 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping Parameter block for user data mapping The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for user data mapping. Figure A-14 Parameter block for user data mapping Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 130/131. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 157 Parameter data records A.4 Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 3 and set reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 21 "User data variant" not possible or input data configuration not large enough Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 30 Data record number invalid Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 31 "Length of the parameter block" invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 "Number of parameter blocks" invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 "ID of the measured value for limit monitor- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid ing" invalid. values. DF 80 E1 3B "ID of the type of user data mapping" not permitted. Check Byte 1. Number for userspecific user data variant has to be 01H or 02H. Measured variables for user data mapping You can find the measured variables under Measured variables for connection type (Page 162). The following measured variables are not available to you for user data mapping: 220 to 226 62110 to 62116 62210 to 62216 62310 to 62316 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 158 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping Structure of data record 135 Figure A-15 Structure of data record 135 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-16 Header information DS 135 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 159 Parameter data records A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping Parameter block for data record mapping The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for data record mapping. Figure A-17 Parameter block for data record mapping Data record length DS 135 and DS151 The table below shows the data record lengths of the parameter data record DS 135 and the user-defined data record DS 151 (Page 257). The length of the data records depends on the number and the format of the measured values. Data record length in bytes Number REAL measured values Measured values DS 135 LREAL measured values DS 151 DS 151 29 62 118 234 30 64 122 242 * 40 84 162 322 * 50 104 202 402 * 59 122 238 474 * 100 204 402 * 802 * 118 240 474 * 946 * 150 304* 602 * 1202 * * not with PROFIBUS DP Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 160 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Parameter data records A.5 Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 130/131/135. Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values. DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length and number of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 3 and set reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 21 "User data variant" not possible or input data configuration not large enough Select a different user data variant or change the configuration. DF 80 E1 30 Data record number invalid Check the data record number. Enter a valid data record number. DF 80 E1 31 "Length of the parameter block" invalid. Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes DF 80 E1 32 "Number of parameter blocks" invalid. Check Byte 2. Enter valid values. DF 80 E1 33 "ID of the measured value for limit monitor- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid ing" invalid. values. Measured variables for data record mapping You can find the measured variables under Measured variables for connection type (Page 162). The following measured variables are not available to you for data record mapping: 220 to 226 62110 to 62116 62210 to 62216 62310 to 62316 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 161 B Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured variables for data records and user data The following table provides an overview of all measured variables that are used in the data records and user data. Note that the format and unit differ in the evaluation of records and user data. On the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755917) you can find an overview of the assignment of the measured values to the user data variants and data records. Table B- 1 Measured variables for data records and user data Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 1 Value range Voltage L1-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 2 Voltage L2-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 3 Voltage L3-N 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 4 Voltage L1-L2 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 5 Voltage L2-L3 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 6 Voltage L3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 7 Current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 Current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 10 Apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 11 Apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 12 Apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 13 Active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 14 Active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 15 Active power L3 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Reactive power Qn L13 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 17 Reactive power Qn L23 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 18 Reactive power Qn L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 16 1 2 19 Power factor L1 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 Power factor L2 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 3 Connection type Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 162 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 22 Value range Connection type Reactive power Qtot L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 23 Reactive power Qtot L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 24 Reactive power Qtot L3 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 30 Frequency 4 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 31 Average Voltage L-N (Usum) 12 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 32 Average Voltage L-L 12 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 33 Average Current L1L2L3 (Isum) 12 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 34 Total active power L1L2L3 5 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 REAL VA 37 Total power factor L1L2L3 6 REAL 38 Reactive power Qtot L1L2L33 5 40 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 - 0.0 ... 1.0 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Max. voltage UL1-N 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 41 Max. voltage UL2-N 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 42 Max. voltage UL3-N 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 43 Max. voltage UL1-UL2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 44 Max. voltage UL2-UL3 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 45 Max. voltage UL3-UL1 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 46 Max. current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 Max. current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 Max. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 49 Max. apparent power L1 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 50 Max. apparent power L2 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 51 Max. apparent power L3 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 52 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 53 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 14 14 14 14 14 14 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 163 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 54 Max. active power L3 Value range Connection type REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Max. reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 56 Max. reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 57 Max. reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 58 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 59 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 60 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 61 Max. frequency 14 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 62 Max. mean voltage L-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 63 Max. mean voltage L-L REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 64 Max. mean current L1L2L3 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 65 Max. active power L1L2L3 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 66 Max. reactive power Qn L1L2L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 67 Max. apparent power L1L2L3 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 68 Max. total power factor REAL - 70 Min. voltage UL1-N 14 REAL 71 Min. voltage UL2-N 14 REAL 72 Min. voltage UL3-N 14 73 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 0.0 ... 1.0 V 0.0 ... 300.0 V 0.0 ... 300.0 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 Min. voltage UL1-UL2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 74 Min. voltage UL2-UL3 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 75 Min. voltage UL3-UL1 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 76 Min. current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 77 Min. current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 78 Min. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 79 Min. apparent power L1 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 55 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 164 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 80 Value range Min. apparent power L2 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 81 Min. apparent power L3 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 82 Min. active power L1 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 83 Min. active power L2 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 84 Min. active power L3 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 85 Min. reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 86 Min. reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 87 Min. reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 88 Min. power factor L1 14 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 Min. power factor L2 14 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 91 Min. frequency REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 92 Min. mean voltage L-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 93 Min. mean voltage L-L REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 94 Min. mean current L1L2L314 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 95 Min. sum of active power 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 96 Min. sum of reactive power 14 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 97 Min. sum of apparent power 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 98 Min. total power factor REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 166 Mean power factor L1L2L312 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 200 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 201 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 202 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 165 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 205 Value range Connection type Total active energy L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh -3.4028e+38 ... +3.4028e+38 206 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 REAL varh -3.4028e+38 ... +3.4028e+38 210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 215 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 2147483647 224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 225 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... +2147483647 226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 DINT varh -2147483647 ... +2147483647 61138 Max. reactive power Qtot L1L2L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61139 Min. reactive power Qtot L1L2L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61140 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61142 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 - 0 ... 65535 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 166 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit Value range Connection type 61143 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 - 0 ... 65535 61144 Overflow counter apparent energy L1L2L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61146 Fundamental cos active factor L1L2L317 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 61147 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1L2L317 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 61148 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1L2L317 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 61149 Neutral current 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Z Z Z Z Z 61150 Neutral current 10/12 cycle 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Z Z Z Z Z 61151 Neutral current half cycle 1, 16, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Z Z Z Z Z 61153 Total current IL1+IL2+IL3-IN 1 REAL A -100000.0 ... 100000.0 61154 Reactive power (fundamental) L1L2L35 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61155 Max. reactive power (fundamental) L1L2L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61156 Min. reactive power (fundamental) L1L2L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 61157 Amplitude unbalance voltage U2 2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61158 Amplitude unbalance current Iunsym 2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61178 Phase angle L1 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61180 Active energy inflow L1 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61181 Active energy outflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61182 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61183 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61184 Apparent energy L1 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61185 Total active energy L1 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 167 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 61186 Value range Connection type Total reactive energy L1 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61190 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61191 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61192 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L1 6 - 0 ... 65535 61193 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L1 - 0 ... 65535 61194 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61195 Overflow counter total active energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61196 Overflow counter total reactive energy L1 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61198 Phase angle L2 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61200 Active energy inflow L2 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61201 Active energy outflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61202 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61203 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61204 Apparent energy L2 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61205 Total active energy L2 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61206 Total reactive energy L2 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61210 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61211 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61212 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L2 6 - 0 ... 65535 61213 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L2 - 0 ... 65535 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 6 - 0 ... 65535 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 6 6 6 6 6 6 61214 UINT Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 168 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 61215 Overflow counter total active energy L2 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 61216 Overflow counter total reactive energy L2 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 61218 Phase angle L3 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61220 Active energy inflow L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61221 Active energy outflow L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61222 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61223 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61224 Apparent energy L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 61225 Total active energy L3 LREAL Wh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61226 Total reactive energy L3 6 LREAL varh -1.7976e+308 ... +1.7976e+308 61230 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61231 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61232 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy inflow L3 6 - 0 ... 65535 61233 Overflow counter reac- UINT tive energy outflow L3 - 0 ... 65535 61234 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ... 65535 61235 Overflow counter total active energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 61236 Overflow counter total reactive energy L3 6 UINT - 0 ...65535 62110 Active energy inflow L1 DINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62111 Active energy outflow L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62112 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 62113 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 2147483647 62114 Apparent energy L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62115 Total active energy L1 DINT Wh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 6 6 6 6 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 169 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62116 Total reactive energy L1 6 DINT varh -2147483647 ... + 2147483647 62120 THD+N voltage L1 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62121 THD+N current L1 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62122 Fundamental voltage L1 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62123 Fundamental current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62124 Fundamental reactive power L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62125 Fundamental apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62126 Fundamental active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62127 Fundamental cos active factor L1 17 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62130 Voltage L1 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62131 Voltage L1 half cycle 1, REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62133 Current L1 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62134 Current L1 half cycle 1, REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62136 Fundamental cos active factor L1 17 SINT 0.01 -100...100 62150 Max. THD+N voltage L1 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62151 Max. THD+N current L1 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62152 Max. fundamental voltage L1 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62153 Max. fundamental current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62154 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 14 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62155 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62156 Max. fundamental active power L1 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62157 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 14 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62160 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 16, 19 16, 19 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 170 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62170 Min. THD+N voltage L1 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62172 Min. fundamental voltage L1 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62173 Min. fundamental current L1 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62174 Min. fundamental reac- REAL tive power L1 14 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62175 Min. fundamental apparent power L114 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62176 Min. fundamental active power L1 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62177 Min. fundamental cos active factor L114 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62180 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Voltage dip - value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62195 Voltage swell - value L1 16 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62196 Voltage peak value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62197 Current peak value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Overcurrent- value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62199 Voltage dip - duration L1 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62200 Voltage swell - duration L1 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62210 Active energy inflow L2 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62211 Active energy outflow L2 6 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62212 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62213 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62214 Apparent energy L2 6 DINT VAh 0... 2147483647 Total active energy L2 DINT Wh 2147483647...+21474 83647 62171 62194 62198 62215 14 16 17 17 16 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 171 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62216 Total reactive energy L2 6 DINT varh 2147483647...+21474 83647 62220 THD+N voltage L2 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62221 THD+N current L2 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62222 Fundamental voltage L22 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62223 Fundamental current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62224 Fundamental reactive power L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62225 Fundamental apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62226 Fundamental active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62227 Fundamental cos active factor L2 17 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62230 Voltage L2 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62231 Voltage L2 half cycle 1, REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62233 Current L2 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62234 Current L2 half cycle 1, REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62236 Fundamental cos active factor L2 17 SINT 0.01 -100...100 62250 Max. THD+N voltage L2 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62251 Max. THD+N current L2 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62252 Max. fundamental voltage L2 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62253 Max. fundamental current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62254 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 14 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62255 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 14 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62256 Max. fundamental active power L2 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62257 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 14 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62260 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 16, 19 16, 19 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 172 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62270 Min. THD+N voltage L2 14 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62272 Min. fundamental voltage L2 14 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62273 Min. fundamental current L2 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62274 Min. fundamental reac- REAL tive power L2 14 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62275 Min. fundamental apparent power L214 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62276 Min. fundamental active power L2 14 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62277 Min. fundamental cos active factor L214 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62280 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 Voltage dip - value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62295 Voltage swell - value L2 16 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62296 Voltage peak value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62297 Current peak value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Overcurrent- value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62299 Voltage dip - duration L2 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62300 Voltage swell - duration L2 16 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62310 Active energy inflow L3 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62311 Active energy outflow L3 6 DINT Wh 0... 2147483647 62312 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62313 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 DINT varh 0... 2147483647 62314 Apparent energy L3 6 DINT VAh 0... 2147483647 Total active energy L3 DINT Wh 2147483647...+21474 83647 62271 62294 62298 62315 14 16 17 17 16 6 6 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 173 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62316 Total reactive energy L3 6 DINT varh 2147483647...+21474 83647 62320 THD+N voltage L3 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62321 THD+N current L3 13 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62322 Fundamental voltage L3 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62323 Fundamental current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62324 Fundamental reactive power L3 3 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62325 Fundamental apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62326 Fundamental active power L33 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62327 Fundamental cos active factor L3 17 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62330 Voltage L3 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62331 Voltage L3 half cycle 1, REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62333 Current L3 10-12 cycles 1, 19 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62334 Current L3 half cycle 1, REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62336 Fundamental cos active factor L3 17 SINT 0.01 -100...100 62350 Max. THD+N voltage L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62351 Max. THD+N current L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62352 Max. fundamental voltage L314 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62353 Max. fundamental current L314 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62354 Max. fundamental reactive power L314 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62355 Max. fundamental apparent power L314 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62356 Max. fundamental active power L314 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62357 Max. fundamental cos active factor L314 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62360 Max. reactive power Qtot L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 16, 19 16, 19 Value range Connection type 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 174 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 62370 Value range Connection type Min. THD+N voltage L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62371 Min. THD+N current L314 REAL 1% 0 % bis 100 % 62372 Min. fundamental voltage L314 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62373 Min. fundamental current L3 14 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62374 Min. fundamental reac- REAL tive power L3 14 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62375 Min. fundamental apparent power L314 REAL VA -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62376 Min. fundamental active power L314 REAL W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62377 Min. fundamental cos active factor L314 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62380 Min. reactive power Qtot L33 REAL var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 62394 Voltage dip - value L316 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62395 Voltage swell - value L316 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62396 Voltage peak value L317 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62397 Current peak value L317 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62398 Overcurrent- value L316 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62399 Voltage dip - duration L316 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62400 Voltage swell - duration L316 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Harmonics 63000 Harmonics 1: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63001 Harmonics 1: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63002 Harmonics 2: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63003 Harmonics 2: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63004 Harmonics 3: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63005 Harmonics 3: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 175 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63006 Value range Connection type Harmonics 4: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63007 Harmonics 4: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63008 Harmonics 5: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63009 Harmonics 5: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63010 Harmonics 6: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63011 Harmonics 6: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63012 Harmonics 7: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63013 Harmonics 7: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63014 Harmonics 8: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63015 Harmonics 8: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63016 Harmonics 9: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63017 Harmonics 9: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63018 Harmonics 10: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63019 Harmonics 10: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63020 Harmonics 11: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63021 Harmonics 11: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63022 Harmonics 12: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63023 Harmonics 12: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63024 Harmonics 13: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63025 Harmonics 13: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63026 Harmonics 14: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63027 Harmonics 14: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 176 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63028 Value range Connection type Harmonics 15: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63029 Harmonics 15: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63030 Harmonics 16: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63031 Harmonics 16: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63032 Harmonics 17: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63033 Harmonics 17: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63034 Harmonics 18: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63035 Harmonics 18: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63036 Harmonics 19: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63037 Harmonics 19: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63038 Harmonics 20: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63039 Harmonics 20: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63040 Harmonics 21: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63041 Harmonics 21: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63042 Harmonics 22: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63043 Harmonics 22: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63044 Harmonics 23: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63045 Harmonics 23: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63046 Harmonics 24: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63047 Harmonics 24: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63048 Harmonics 25: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63049 Harmonics 25: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 177 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63050 Value range Connection type Harmonics 26: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63051 Harmonics 26: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63052 Harmonics 27: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63053 Harmonics 27: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63054 Harmonics 28: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63055 Harmonics 28: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63056 Harmonics 29: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63057 Harmonics 29: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63058 Harmonics 30: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63059 Harmonics 30: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63060 Harmonics 31: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63061 Harmonics 31: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63062 Harmonics 32: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63063 Harmonics 32: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63064 Harmonics 33: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63065 Harmonics 33: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63066 Harmonics 34: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63067 Harmonics 34: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63068 Harmonics 35: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63069 Harmonics 35: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63070 Harmonics 36: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63071 Harmonics 36: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 178 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63072 Value range Connection type Harmonics 37: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63073 Harmonics 37: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63074 Harmonics 38: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63075 Harmonics 38: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63076 Harmonics 39: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63077 Harmonics 39: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63078 Harmonics 40: Voltage L1 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63079 Harmonics 40: Current L1 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63400 Harmonics 1: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63401 Harmonics 1: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63402 Harmonics 2: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63403 Harmonics 2: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63404 Harmonics 3: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63405 Harmonics 3: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63406 Harmonics 4: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63407 Harmonics 4: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63408 Harmonics 5: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63409 Harmonics 5: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63410 Harmonics 6: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63411 Harmonics 6: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63412 Harmonics 7: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63413 Harmonics 7: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 179 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63414 Value range Connection type Harmonics 8: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63415 Harmonics 8: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63416 Harmonics 9: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63417 Harmonics 9: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63418 Harmonics 10: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63419 Harmonics 10: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63420 Harmonics 11: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63421 Harmonics 11: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63422 Harmonics 12: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63423 Harmonics 12: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63424 Harmonics 13: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63425 Harmonics 13: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63426 Harmonics 14: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63427 Harmonics 14: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63428 Harmonics 15: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63429 Harmonics 15: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63430 Harmonics 16: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63431 Harmonics 16: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63432 Harmonics 17: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63433 Harmonics 17: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63434 Harmonics 18: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63435 Harmonics 18: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 180 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63436 Value range Connection type Harmonics 19: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63437 Harmonics 19: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63438 Harmonics 20: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63439 Harmonics 20: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63440 Harmonics 21: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63441 Harmonics 21: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63442 Harmonics 22: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63443 Harmonics 22: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63444 Harmonics 23: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63445 Harmonics 23: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63446 Harmonics 24: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63447 Harmonics 24: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63448 Harmonics 25: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63449 Harmonics 25: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63450 Harmonics 26: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63451 Harmonics 26: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63452 Harmonics 27: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63453 Harmonics 27: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63454 Harmonics 28: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63455 Harmonics 28: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63456 Harmonics 29: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63457 Harmonics 29: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 181 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63458 Value range Connection type Harmonics 30: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63459 Harmonics 30: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63460 Harmonics 31: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63461 Harmonics 31: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63462 Harmonics 32: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63463 Harmonics 32: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63464 Harmonics 33: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63465 Harmonics 33: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63466 Harmonics 34: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63467 Harmonics 34: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63468 Harmonics 35: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63469 Harmonics 35: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63470 Harmonics 36: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63471 Harmonics 36: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63472 Harmonics 37: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63473 Harmonics 37: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63474 Harmonics 38: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63475 Harmonics 38: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63476 Harmonics 39: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63477 Harmonics 39: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63478 Harmonics 40: Voltage L2 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63479 Harmonics 40: Current L2 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 182 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63800 Value range Connection type Harmonics 1: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63801 Harmonics 1: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63802 Harmonics 2: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63803 Harmonics 2: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63804 Harmonics 3: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63805 Harmonics 3: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63806 Harmonics 4: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63807 Harmonics 4: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63808 Harmonics 5: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63809 Harmonics 5: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63810 Harmonics 6: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63811 Harmonics 6: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63812 Harmonics 7: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63813 Harmonics 7: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63814 Harmonics 8: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63815 Harmonics 8: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63816 Harmonics 9: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63817 Harmonics 9: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63818 Harmonics 10: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63819 Harmonics 10: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63820 Harmonics 11: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63821 Harmonics 11: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 183 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63822 Value range Connection type Harmonics 12: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63823 Harmonics 12: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63824 Harmonics 13: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63825 Harmonics 13: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63826 Harmonics 14: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63827 Harmonics 14: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63828 Harmonics 15: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63829 Harmonics 15: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63830 Harmonics 16: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63831 Harmonics 16: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63832 Harmonics 17: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63833 Harmonics 17: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63834 Harmonics 18: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63835 Harmonics 18: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63836 Harmonics 19: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63837 Harmonics 19: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63838 Harmonics 20: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63839 Harmonics 20: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63840 Harmonics 21: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63841 Harmonics 21: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63842 Harmonics 22: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63843 Harmonics 22: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 184 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63844 Value range Connection type Harmonics 23: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63845 Harmonics 23: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63846 Harmonics 24: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63847 Harmonics 24: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63848 Harmonics 25: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63849 Harmonics 25: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63850 Harmonics 26: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63851 Harmonics 26: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63852 Harmonics 27: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63853 Harmonics 27: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63854 Harmonics 28: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63855 Harmonics 28: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63856 Harmonics 29: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63857 Harmonics 29: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63858 Harmonics 30: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63859 Harmonics 30: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63860 Harmonics 31: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63861 Harmonics 31: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63862 Harmonics 32: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63863 Harmonics 32: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63864 Harmonics 33: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63865 Harmonics 33: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 185 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 63866 Value range Connection type Harmonics 34: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63867 Harmonics 34: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63868 Harmonics 35: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63869 Harmonics 35: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63870 Harmonics 36: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63871 Harmonics 36: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63872 Harmonics 37: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63873 Harmonics 37: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63874 Harmonics 38: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63875 Harmonics 38: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63876 Harmonics 39: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63877 Harmonics 39: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63878 Harmonics 40: Voltage L3 18 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63879 Harmonics 40: Current L3 18 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 65496 Power quality analysis - Qualifier UDINT Bit track 0 ... 4294967295 65497 Current module time PNIO sec 65500 Qualifier L1 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65501 Qualifier L2 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65502 Qualifier L3 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65504 Operating hours counter L1L2L3 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 65505 Operating hours counter L1 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 65506 Operating hours counter L2 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 186 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit 65507 Value range Connection type Operating hours counter L3 5 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4e+38 65508 Status of energy counter overflows UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65509 Status of limit violations 1...16 UINT Bit track 0 ... 65535 65510 Counter for limit violations GW1 5 UDINT 65511 Counter for limit violations GW2 5 65512 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI 0 ... 4294967295 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 Counter for limit violations GW3 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65513 Counter for limit violations GW4 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65514 Counter for limit violations GW5 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65515 Counter for limit violations GW6 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65516 Counter for limit violations GW7 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65517 Counter for limit violations GW8 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65518 Counter for limit violations GW9 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65519 Counter for limit violations GW10 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65520 Counter for limit violations GW11 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65521 Counter for limit violations GW12 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65522 Counter for limit violations GW13 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65523 Counter for limit violations GW14 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 187 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Measured value ID Measured variables Data type Unit Value range Connection type 65524 Counter for limit violations GW15 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 65525 Counter for limit violations GW16 5 UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 1P 2P 3x 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P 2W 3W 1P2W 4W 4W1 3W 3W1 4WI Z = additionally possible measured values in the current path (e.g. instead of neutral current) 1 Effective value 2 IEC 61557-12 3 floating arithmetic average value above 200 ms 4 floating arithmetic average value above 10 s 5 Simple summation 6 Calculation from the start/restart (inflow and outflow values are positive numbers) 7 floating arithmetic average value above 3 s 8 floating arithmetic average value above 600 s 9 floating arithmetic average value above 900 s 10 Block measurement over 900 s 11 direct measurement of the signal wave at 8 ksps 12 Total of the parts / number of parts 13 THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) is calculated once per second by the RMS of the fundamental oscillation and the total effective value (IEEE standard 1459-2010) 14 Min./Max: Slave pointer function of the respective basic value from start/reset 15 Calculation according to DIN EN 61000-3-316 half-wave value 16 Half-wave value 17 Instantaneous value 18 FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) 19 While pure RMS measured values only contain AC voltage components of the signal, 10/12 and half-wave measured values also show DC voltage components of the signal Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 188 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type The table below is relevant for the description of the user data variants: Measured value ID Measured variables 66001 Voltage L1-N 1 Data type Unit UINT 0.01 V Value range 0 ... 65535 66002 Voltage L2-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 Voltage L3-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66004 Voltage L1-L2 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66005 Voltage L2-L3 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66006 Voltage L3-L1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66007 Current L1 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 Current L2 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 Current L3 2 Connection type 1 P 2 W 2 P 3 W 3x 1 P 2 W 3 P 4 W 3 P 4 W 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66010 Apparent power L1 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 Apparent power L2 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66013 Active power L1 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 Active power L2 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 Active power L3 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66016 Reactive power Qn L13 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66017 Reactive power Qn L23 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66018 Reactive power Qn L33 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66019 Power factor L1 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Power factor L2 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Power factor L3 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66030 Frequency USINT 1 Hz 45 ... 65 66034 Active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66035 Reactive power Qn L1L2L35 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66036 Apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA 66037 Power factor L1L2L3 6 USINT 0.01 66038 Frequency UINT 1 3 4 4 5 5 0.01 Hz 3 P 3 W 1 3 P 3 W -27648 ... 27648 0 ... 100 4500 ... 6500 3 P 4 W I Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 189 Measured variables B.1 Measured variables for connection type Format Table B- 2 Format and its length in bytes Format in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Format to IEEE Length in bytes Comment BYTE BYTE 1 byte Bit field with 8 bit WORD WORD 2 bytes Bit field with 16 bit SINT INT8 (signed) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits with sign USINT INT8 (unsigned) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits without sign INT INT (signed) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits with sign UINT INT (unsigned) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits without sign UDINT INT32 (unsigned) 4 bytes Fixed-point number 32 bits without sign DINT INT32 (signed) 4 bytes Fixed-point number, 32 bits with sign REAL Float32 4 bytes Floating-point number 32 bits with sign LREAL Float64 8 bytes Floating-point number 64 bits with sign Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 190 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA C Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" User data of the module The module has 2 bytes of input user data and 2 bytes of output user data for status and control information. At this module version measured variables can be read solely via measured value data records (no measured variables can be evaluated via user data). Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data is fixed. Table C- 1 Structure of input user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Constant = 0x80 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 191 Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Allocation of the input user data Figure C-1 Allocation of the status bytes in the input user data (2 bytes) Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed. Table C- 2 Structure of output user data (2 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module Reserved Reserved 1 Module Control outputs Reset of values and counters, gate Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 192 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" Assignment of the output user data Via the output user data you control for all phases Resetting for all minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and energy meters. The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters. Figure C-2 Allocation of the control byte in the output user data (1 byte) Note For module version 2 I / 2 Q, a reset of the selected variables always acts on all measured values/counter levels of the three phases. * Reset energy counter: Acts on all active, reactive and apparent energies of all phases * Reset operating hours counter: Acts on the counters of Phases 1 to 3 * Reset minimum / maximum values: Acts on the minimum and maximum value calculations of Phases 1-3 * Reset all counters for limit violations: Acts on all 16 limit values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 193 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" User data of the module The module occupies 32 bytes of input user data and 20 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 20 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (Bytes 2 to 31) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You can set the contents of the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 3 Structure of input user data (32 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant - 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 31 Module or phase Data 2 or 4 byte measured values or cumulative values according to user data variant Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 194 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. Figure C-3 Assignment of the input user data (32 bytes) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 195 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Structure of output user data The structure of the output user data is fixed and is the same at all the selectable user data variants. Via the output user data you control globally or phase-specifically Resetting for minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and energy meters. The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters. Gate for limits, minimum values and maximum values. Table C- 4 Structure of output user data (20 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant Control byte for switching the user data variant 1 Module Control byte 1 Global resetting of values and counters, gate 2 Module Control byte 2 Selection of the energy counter to be reset 3 Module Control byte 3 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 9 to 16 4 Module Control byte 4 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 1 to 8 5 Module Reserved - 6 Phase L1 Control byte 6 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase L1 7 Phase L1 Control byte 7 8 Phase L2 Control byte 8 9 Phase L2 Control byte 9 10 Phase L3 Control byte 10 11 Phase L3 Control byte 11 12 Module and phases L1, L2, L3 Control byte 12 Phase-specific deletion of power quality analysis results 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Module and phases L1, L2, L3 Control byte 16 General reset (Page 38) 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase L2 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase L3 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 196 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Control bytes for user data variant Figure C-4 Allocation of the control bytes for user data variant (Byte 0) Control bytes for all three phases Figure C-5 Allocation of the control bytes for all three phases (bytes 1 and 2) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 197 Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Control bytes for limit monitoring Figure C-6 Allocation of the control bytes for limit monitoring (bytes 3 to 5) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 198 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.2 Module version "32 I / 20 Q" Control bytes for each individual phase Figure C-7 Allocation of the control bytes for each individual phase (bytes 6 to 15) Figure C-8 Allocation of the control bytes for each individual phase (bytes 16 to 19) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 199 Module versions C.3 "User-specific" module version C.3 "User-specific" module version User data of the module The module occupies between 16 and 256 bytes of input user data and 20 bytes of output user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 20 bytes output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (as of Byte 2) or acyclically via measured value data records Structure of input user data You configure the structure of the input user data starting at Byte 2 at this module version itself. An input user data length of 32 bytes also allows you to set the input user data dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants. Table C- 5 Structure of input user data (16 to 256 bytes) Byte Validity Designation Comment 0 Module User data variant - 1 Module Quality information Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values 2 ... 255 Module or phase Data Measured values or calculated values in accordance with their configuration: * At configuration in STEP 7 the size of the input user data is calculated automatically. * With configuration via the GSD file the size of the input user data amounts to 32, 64, 128 or 256 bytes. The memory area has to be sufficiently large for the measured variables defined in parameter data record 130 or 131. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 200 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.3 "User-specific" module version Allocation of the input user data You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different user data variants. The allocation of the status information in bytes 0 and 1 corresponds to the module version 32 I / 20 Q, see appendix Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 194). Figure C-9 Allocation of the input user data ("User-specific" module version" Note Behavior at switchover in case of the input user data being too small If the configured size of the variable input user data is smaller than the sized of the fixed user data variant, the response depends on the type of switchover: * Re-assigning parameters via parameter data records DS 128 / DS 130 / DS 131: Output of a parameter assignment error (33). No switchover. * Switchover using output byte 0 of a user data variant: No switchover and no error message. Structure of output user data The structure of the 20-byte output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data (control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 194). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 201 Module versions C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" User data of the module The four versions according to EE@Industry use between 4 and 104 bytes of input user data and 20 bytes of output user data. A dynamic switchover of the input user data is not possible. Structure of input user data The structure of the input user data for the module versions according to the EE@Industry standard is fixed and depends on the selected measurement data profile. Table C- 6 Measurement data profile E0 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 4...7 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 8...11 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Table C- 7 Measurement data profile E1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 34 Table C- 8 Measurement data profile E2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 34 4...7 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 200 8...11 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4028e+38 201 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 202 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Module versions C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" Table C- 9 Measurement data profile E3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Mea sure d value ID 0...3 Active power L1 REAL 4...7 Active power L2 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 13 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 14 8...11 Active power L3 12...15 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL 1W -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 15 REAL 1 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 22 16...19 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL 1 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 23 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL 1 var -3.0e+9 ... +3.0e+9 24 24...31 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 210 32...39 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 211 40...47 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 212 48...55 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.7976e+308 213 56...59 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 60...63 Voltage UL2-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 64...67 Voltage UL3-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 68...71 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 72...75 Voltage UL2-UL3 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 76...79 Voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 80...83 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 84...87 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 88...91 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 92...95 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 96...99 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 100...10 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Structure of output user data The structure of the 20-byte output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data (control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 20 Q" (Page 194). Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 203 D User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data User data The following table shows the existing user data variants. Table D- 1 Overview of the user data variants User data User data variant Total power L1L2L3 254 (FEH) - default setting Active power L1L2L3 253 (FDH) Reactive power L1L2L3 252 (FCH) Apparent power L1L2L3 251 (FBH) Basic measured values L1L2L3 250 (FAH) Total energy L1L2L3 249 (F9H) Energy L1 248 (F8H) Energy L2 247 (F7H) Energy L3 246 (F6H) Basic variables three-phase measurement L1L2L3 245 (F5H) Reactive power compensation 244 (F4H) Quality values three-phase measurement 240 (F0H) Energy measurement (periodic) overflow counter 239 (EFH) EE@Industry measurement data profile E3 227 (E3H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E2 226 (E2H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E1 225 (E1H) EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 224 (E0H) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 159 (9FH) Single-phase measurement L1 with voltage scaling value 158 (9EH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 157 (9DH) Single-phase measurement L2 with voltage scaling value 156 (9CH) Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 155 (9BH) Single-phase measurement L3 with voltage scaling value 154 (9AH) User-defined user data structure I 1 (01H) User-defined user data structure II 2 (02H) Information on using and dynamic switching of the user data variants can be found under "Selecting the module versions (Page 29)". Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 204 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Total power L1L2L3 (ID 254 or FEH) Table D- 2 Total power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 10 ... 11 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 225 18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 226 22 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 205 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Active power L1L2L3 (ID 253 or FDH) Table D- 3 Active power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 253 (FDH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 10 ... 11 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 12 ... 13 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 14 ... 15 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66034 16 ... 19 Total active energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 225 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 206 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Reactive power L1L2L3 (ID 252 or FCH) Table D- 4 Reactive power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 252 (FCH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66022 10 ... 11 Reactive power Qtot L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66023 12 ... 13 Reactive power Qtot L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66024 14 ... 15 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66038 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 222 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 207 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Apparent power L1L2L3 (ID 251 or FBH) Table D- 5 Apparent power L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 251 (FBH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 13 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 14 ... 15 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66036 16 ... 19 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 DINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling total apparent energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 208 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic measured values L1L2L3 (ID 250 or FAH) Table D- 6 Basic measured values L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 250 (FAH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 8 ... 9 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 10 ... 11 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 12 ... 13 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 14 ... 15 Voltage UL1-UL2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66004 16 ... 17 Voltage UL2-UL3 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66005 18 ... 19 Voltage UL3-UL1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66006 20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 21 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 22 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling voltage UL1-N (UL1-UL2) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling voltage UL2-N (UL2-UL3) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling voltage UL3-N (UL3-UL1) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 ... 31 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 66038 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 209 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Total energy L1L2L3 (ID 249 or F9H) Table D- 7 Total energy L1L2L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Reserved BYTE - - - 3 Reserved BYTE - - - 4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 210 8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 211 11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 212 16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 213 20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 214 24 Reserved BYTE - - - 25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66037 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 210 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Energy L1 (ID 248 or F8H) Table D- 8 Energy L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 248 (F8H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62110 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 2147483647 62111 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 2147483647 62112 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 2147483647 62113 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 211 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Energy L2 (ID 247 or F7H) Table D- 9 Energy L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 247 (F7H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62210 8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62211 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62212 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L2 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62213 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 212 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Energy L3 (ID 246 or F6H) Table D- 10 Energy L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 246 (F6H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62310 8 ... 11 Active energy L3, outflow UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 62311 11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62312 16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 62313 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling active energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Reserved BYTE - - - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Basic variables three-phase measurements (ID 245 or F5H) Table D- 11 Basic variables three-phase measurements Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 245 (F5H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 34 6 ... 9 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 62418 1038 62417 10 ... 13 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 14 ... 17 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 18 ... 21 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 22 ... 25 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 26 ... 27 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 28 ... 29 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 30 ... 31 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 213 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Reactive power compensation (ID 244 or F4H) Table D- 12 Reactive power compensation Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 244 (F4H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 Fundamental cos active factor L1 BYTE 0.01 -100 ... 100 62136 3 Fundamental cos active factor L2 BYTE 0.01 -100 ... 100 62236 4 Fundamental cos active factor L3 BYTE 0.01 -100 ... 100 62336 5 Reserved BYTE - - 109 ... +3 x 109 6 ... 9 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3 x 10 ... 13 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 62224 62124 14 ... 17 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 62324 Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H) Table D- 13 Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 240 (F0H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Status of the limit monitoring GW 1 ... 16 (*) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509 4 ... 5 Status of the energy counter overflows (**) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508 6 ... 7 Quality information WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503 8 ... 9 Quality information power quality analysis WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65496 10 ... 11 Reserved WORD - - - 12 ... 13 Reserved WORD - - - 14 ... 15 Reserved WORD - - - 16 ... 17 Reserved WORD - - - 18 ... 19 Reserved WORD - - - 20 ... 21 Reserved WORD - - - 22 ... 23 Reserved WORD - - - 24 ... 25 Reserved WORD - - - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 214 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 26 ... 27 Reserved WORD - - - 28 ... 29 Reserved WORD - - - 30 ... 31 Reserved WORD - - - (*) Limit violation in: Bit 0 = limit 1 to bit 15 = limit 16 (**) Energy counter count periodically - counter overflow at: Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1 Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1 Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1 Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1 Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1 Bit 5 = 1: Active energy inflow L2 Bit 6 = 1: Active energy outflow L2 Bit 7 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L2 Bit 8 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L2 Bit 9 = 1: Apparent energy L2 Bit 10 = 1: Active energy inflow L3 Bit 11 = 1: Active energy outflow L3 Bit 12 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L3 Bit 13 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L3 Bit 14 = 1: Apparent energy L3 Bit 15: Reserved Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 215 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter (ID 239 or EFH) Table D- 14 Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 239 (EFH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62120 4 ... 5 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62121 6 ... 7 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62122 8 ... 9 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62123 10 ... 11 Overflow counter for apparent energy L1 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62124 12 ... 13 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62220 14 ... 15 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62221 16 ... 17 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62222 18 ... 19 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62223 20 ... 21 Overflow counter for apparent energy L2 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62224 22 ... 23 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62320 24 ... 25 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62321 26 ... 27 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62322 28 ... 29 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62323 30 ... 31 Overflow counter for apparent energy L3 UINT - 0 ... 65535 62324 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 227 or E3H) Table D- 15 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 227 (E3H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 13 6 ... 9 Active power L2 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 14 10 ... 13 Active power L3 REAL 1W -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 15 14 ... 17 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL 1 var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 22 18 ... 21 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL 1 var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 23 22 ... 25 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL 1 var -3 x 109 ... +3 x 109 24 26 ... 33 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 216 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 34 ... 41 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 10308 212 42 ... 49 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 50 ... 57 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213 58 ... 61 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 62 ... 65 Voltage UL2-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 66 ... 69 Voltage UL3-N REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 70 ... 73 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 74 ... 77 Voltage UL2-UL3 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 78 ... 81 Voltage UL3-UL1 REAL 1V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 82 ... 85 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 86 ... 89 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 90 ... 93 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 94 ... 97 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 98 ... 101 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 102 ... 105 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 Power factor L3 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 226 or E2H) Table D- 16 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 226 (E2H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 34 6 ... 9 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 200 1W 109 201 10 ...13 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 3.0 x Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 217 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 225 or E1H) Table D- 17 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 225 (E1H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 34 Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 224 or E0H) Table D- 18 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E0 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 224 (E0H) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 5 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 6 ... 9 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 10 ...13 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 159 or 9FH) Table D- 19 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 159 (9FH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 6 ... 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66022 10 ... 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 218 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62115 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62116 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66019 Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 158 or 9EH) Table D- 20 Single-phase measurement L1 with voltage scaling value Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 158 (9EH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66007 4 ... 5 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66001 6 ... 7 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66013 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L1 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66022 10 ... 11 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66010 12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 Wh 0 ... 4294967295 62115 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 4294967295 62116 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 4294967295 62114 24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL1-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 219 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 157 or 9DH) Table D- 21 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 157 (9DH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 5 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 6 ... 7 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66023 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 15 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62215 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62216 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L2 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66020 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 220 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 156 or 9CH) Table D- 22 Single-phase measurement L2 with voltage scaling value Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 156 (9CH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66008 4 ... 5 Voltage UL2-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66002 6 ... 7 Active power L2 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66014 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L2 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66023 10 ... 11 Apparent power L2 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66011 12 ... 15 Active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62215 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62216 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L2 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62214 24 Scaling current L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L2 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L2 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL2-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 221 User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 155 or 9BH) Table D- 23 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 155 (9BH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 5 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 6 ... 7 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66024 10 ... 11 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 12 ... 15 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62315 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62316 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Power factor L3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 66021 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 222 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA User data variants D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 154 or 9AH) Table D- 24 Single-phase measurement L3 with voltage scaling value Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 User data variant BYTE - 154 (9AH) - 1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx - 2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 66009 4 ... 5 Voltage UL3-N UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 66003 6 ... 7 Active power L3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 66015 8 ... 9 Reactive power Qtot L3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 66024 10 ... 11 Apparent power L3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 66012 12 ... 15 Active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 Wh -2147483647... +2147483647 62315 16 ... 19 Reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) DINT 1 varh -2147483647... +2147483647 62316 20 ... 23 Apparent energy L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 62314 24 Scaling current L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 25 Scaling active power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 26 Scaling reactive power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 27 Scaling apparent power L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 28 Scaling active energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 29 Scaling reactive energy L3 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 - 30 Scaling apparent energy L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 - 31 Scaling voltage UL3-N USINT - 0 ... 255 - See also Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 (Page 29) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 223 E Measured value data records E.1 Overview of all measured value data records The AI Energy Meter HF writes the measured values in several data records that you can read acyclically using the RDREC instruction in the user program. The following tables show the structure of the individual data records: Data record DS 142 for basic measured values version 2 (read only). Data record DS 142 for basic measured values version 3 (read only). Data record DS 143 for energy counters (read and write). Data record DS 144 for basic measured values version 1 (read only). Data record DS 154 for maximum values with time stamp (read only). Data record DS 145 for minimum values version 1 (read only). Data record DS 155 for minimum values with time stamp (read only). Data record DS 147 for phase-specific measured values L1 version 0 (read only). Data record DS 147 for phase-specific measured values L1 version 1 (read only). Data record DS 148 for phase-specific measured values L2 DS version 0 (read only). Data record DS 148 for phase-specific measured values L2 DS version 1 (read only). Data record DS 149 for phase-specific measured values L3 DS version 0 (read only). Data record DS 149 for phase-specific measured values L3 DS version 1 (read only). Data record DS 150 for advanced measurement and status values version 1 (read only). Data record DS 151 for user-defined data record (read only). Data record DS 160 for power quality analysis (read only). Data record DS 161 for harmonics voltage (DS 161) (read only). Data record DS 163 for harmonics current (DS 163) (read only). Data record DS 170 information data record on available measured values. Note * The cumulative value of the energy counters in 3-phase operation is obtained from the sums of the respective individual values of the phases. * Inflow and outflow energy meters are always positive values. * The operating hours counter for the entire module is calculated from the maximum of the operating hours of the individual phases. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 224 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) E.2.1 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2 Measured variables of the module The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142 supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that are not relevant. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Table E- 1 Data record 142 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version = 2 UINT8 - - - 1 Reserved UINT8 - - - 2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage UL2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage UL3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 42...45 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 46...49 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30 58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 61157 62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current REAL % 0 to 100 61158 66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 70...73 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 74...77 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 78...81 82...85 Total apparent power L1L2L3 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL REAL VA var 109 -3.0 x 109 -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 11 12 ... +3.0 x 109 36 ... +3.0 x 109 22 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 225 Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 86...89 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 Measured value ID 90...93 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 94...97 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 38 98...101 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 109 ... +3.0 x 23 24 102...105 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 106...109 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 15 110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 118...121 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 122...125 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 1038 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh -3.4 x 134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 1038 to +3.4 x 1038 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 34 204 130...133 138...141 to +3.4 x 109 1038 206 205 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202 1038 203 142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 200 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 201 10308 214 150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213 10308 210 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL to +1.8 x 10308 216 170...177 186...193 10308 215 194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211 210...213 Neutral current REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149 Neutral current If you operate the AI Energy Meter HF with connection type 3P4W, 3P4W1 or 3P3W, the neutral current is also calculated under the following conditions: Transmission factors of all phase currents (primary rated current and secondary voltage) are identical. Measured phase currents are greater than the value of the "Low limit for measuring current parameter. The parameter "Reverse current direction" must be the same on all phases. If one of the conditions is not met, 0 is entered as the value for the neutral current. You can read the neutral current calculated using measured value data record 142. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 226 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Procedure Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter HF. Use the RDREC instruction to read out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7 library. E.2.2 Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3 Measured variables of the module The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142 supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that are not relevant. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Table E- 2 Data record 142 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version = 3 BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 Voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 6...9 Voltage L2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 10...13 Voltage L3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 14...17 Voltage L1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 4 18...21 Voltage L2-L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 5 22...25 Voltage L3-L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 6 26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 42...45 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 46...49 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30 58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage U2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61157 62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current Iunsym REAL % 0 to 100 61158 66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 70...73 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 74...77 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 11 12 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 227 Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range 78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 Measured value ID 82...85 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 86...89 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 23 90...93 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 24 109 ... +3.0 x 36 22 94...97 Total reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 98...101 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 38 13 102...105 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 106...109 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 15 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 118...121 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 122...125 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 varh -3.4 x 1038 1038 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL ... +3.0 x 109 110...113 130...133 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 35 204 to +3.4 x 1038 206 to +3.4 x 1038 205 134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh -3.4 x 138...141 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202 varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203 1038 200 201 142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 10308 10308 214 to +1.8 x 10308 216 215 178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210 10308 194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 10308 212 202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 210...213 Neutral current REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149 214...217 Neutral current 10/12 cycle REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61150 218...221 Reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 222...225 Reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 211 16 ... +3.0 x 109 17 ... +3.0 x 109 18 226...229 Reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 230...233 Total reactive power Qn L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 35 234...237 Average voltage L-N (Usum) REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 31 238...241 Average voltage L-L REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 32 242...245 Average current L1L2L3 (Isum) REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 33 246...249 Mean power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 166 250...253 Fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62122 254...257 Fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62222 258...261 Fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62322 262...265 Fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62123 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 228 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 266...269 Fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62223 270...273 Fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62323 274...277 Fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 278...281 Fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62225 ... +3.0 x 109 62325 62124 282...285 Fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 286...289 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 290...293 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 294...297 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 298...301 Fundamental active power L1 REAL W 109 -3.0 x 109 109 62125 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62224 62324 ... +3.0 x 109 62126 ... +3.0 x 109 62226 302...305 Fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 306...309 Fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62326 310...313 Fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62127 314...317 Fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62227 318...321 Fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62327 322...325 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 326...329 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 330...333 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 334...337 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 338...341 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 342...345 Harmonic distortion (THD+N) current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 346...358 Current module time PNIOTime sec 65497 Neutral current If you operate the AI Energy Meter HF with connection type 3P4W, 3P4W1 or 3P3W, the neutral current is also calculated under the following conditions: Transmission factors of all phase currents (primary rated current and secondary voltage) are identical. Measured phase currents are greater than the value of the "Low limit for measuring current parameter. The parameter "Reverse current direction" must be the same on all phases. If one of the conditions is not met, 0 is entered as the value for the neutral current. You can read the neutral current calculated using measured value data record 142. Procedure Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter HF. Use the RDREC instruction to read out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7 library. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 229 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Energy meter data record 143 for different actions The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions: Reset the energy meters to user-specific value (e.g. "0") Reading the current values of the energy counters Reading the overflow counters Reading the operating hours Energy meter data record 143 Table E- 3 Energy meter data record 143 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2 Status / control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - - 3 Status / control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string 4 Status / control byte 1 - L2 BYTE Bit string 5 Status / control byte 2 - L2 BYTE Bit string 6 Status / control byte 1 - L3 BYTE Bit string 7 Status / control byte 2 - L3 BYTE Bit string 8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180 16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61181 24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182 32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh 88...95 Active energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh During reading: 0.0...1.8 x 10308 During writing For continuous counting: 0.0...3.4 x 1012 During writing For periodic counting: 61183 61184 61200 61201 61202 61203 61204 61220 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 230 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 96...103 Active energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL Wh 61221 104...111 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 0...configured full-scale value (103 ...1015) 112...119 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L3 LREAL varh 61223 120...127 Apparent energy (initial value) L3 LREAL VAh 61224 128...129 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 UINT - 61190 130..131 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 61191 132...133 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 61192 134...135 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 61193 136...137 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 UINT - 138...139 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 UINT - 140...141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 142...143 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - 144...145 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L2 UINT - 146...147 Overflow counter apparent energy L2 UINT - 148...149 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 UINT - 150...151 Overflow counter active energy outflow L3 UINT - 152...153 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L3 UINT - 154...155 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L3 UINT - 61233 156...157 Overflow counter apparent energy L3 UINT - 61234 158...161 Operating hours counter L1 (initial value) REAL h During reading: 65505 162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 0...3.4x1038 65506 166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h During writing: 65507 During reading: 0...65535 During writing for continuous counting: 0 During writing for periodic counting: 0...65500 61222 61194 61210 61211 61212 61213 61214 61230 61231 61232 0...109 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 231 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Status information When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phasespecific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counters. The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2. Figure E-1 Status information DS 143 (read access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 232 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Control information When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as phase-specific control information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours counter. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase: In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to reset and the time at which counters are reset. In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counters and which overflow counters you want to reset. Figure E-2 Control information DS 143 (write access) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 233 Measured value data records E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) Error while transferring the data record The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the measured value data record 143: Error code in STATUS parameter (hexadecimal) Meaning Solution Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record. DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is plugged or drawn. Check the assigned values for the parameters of the WRREC instruction DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved bits back to 0. DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version. DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC instruction. Enter a valid length. DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. The start values may not be negative. DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes 158...169. Observe the ranges of values for start values. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 234 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) E.4.1 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) version 1 Measured variables of the module The largest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 0 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...5 Max. voltage L1-N REAL V 0 40 6...9 Max. voltage L2-N REAL V 0 41 10...13 Max. voltage L3-N REAL V 0 42 14...17 Max. voltage L1-L2 REAL V 0 43 18...21 Max. voltage L2-L3 REAL V 0 44 22...25 Max. voltage L3-L1 REAL V 0 45 26...29 Max. current L1 1 REAL A 0 46 30...33 Max. current L2 1 REAL A 0 47 34...37 Max. current L3 1 REAL A 0 48 38...41 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA 0 49 42...45 Max. apparent power L2 REAL VA 0 50 46...49 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA 0 51 50...53 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 54...57 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 53 W -3.0 x 109 54 109 62160 58...61 Max. active power L3 REAL 109 52 62...65 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 66...69 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 62260 109 62360 70...73 Max. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 74...77 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0 58 78...81 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0 59 82...85 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0 60 86...89 Max. frequency REAL Hz 45 61 90...93 Max. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA 0 67 109 94...97 Max. active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 98...101 Max. reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 65 61138 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 235 Measured value data records E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 102...105 Max. power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0 68 106...109 Max. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 110...113 Max. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 56 109 55 57 114...117 Max. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 118...121 Max. mean voltage L-N REAL V 0 62 122...125 Max. mean voltage L-L REAL V 0 63 126...129 Max. sum mean value current REAL A 0 64 130...133 Max. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0 62152 134...137 Max. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0 62252 138...141 Max. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0 62352 142...145 Max. fundamental current L1 REAL A 0 62153 146...149 Max. fundamental current L2 REAL A 0 62253 150...153 Max. fundamental current L3 REAL A 0 154...157 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA 62353 -3.0 x 109 62155 109 62255 158...161 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 162...165 Max. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 62355 var -3.0 x 109 62154 109 62254 62354 166...169 1 109 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL 170...173 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 174...177 Max. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 178...181 Max. fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 182...185 Max. fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 62256 62156 186...189 Max. fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 62356 190...193 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1 62157 194...197 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1 62257 198...201 Max. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1 62357 202...205 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0 62150 206...209 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0 62250 210...213 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0 62350 214...217 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0 62151 218...221 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0 62251 222...225 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0 62351 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 236 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) Measured variables of the module The largest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured values (REAL 4-byte) are each followed by a time stamp (PN Time 12 bytes). The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...17 Max. voltage L1-N REAL + PN Time V 0 40 18...33 Max. voltage L2-N REAL + PN Time V 0 41 34...49 Max. voltage L3-N REAL + PN Time V 0 42 50...65 Max. voltage L1-L2 REAL + PN Time V 0 43 66...81 Max. voltage L2-L3 REAL + PN Time V 0 44 82...97 Max. voltage L3-L1 REAL + PN Time V 0 45 98...113 Max. current L1 1 REAL + PN Time A 0 46 114...129 Max. current L2 1 REAL + PN Time A 0 47 130...145 Max. current L3 1 REAL + PN Time A 0 48 146...161 Max. apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA 0 49 162...177 Max. apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA 0 50 178...193 Max. apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA 0 51 194...209 Max. active power L1 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 52 210...225 Max. active power L2 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 53 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 237 Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 226...241 Max. active power L3 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 54 242...257 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62160 258...273 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62260 274...289 Max. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62360 290...305 Max. power factor L1 REAL + PN Time - 0 58 306...321 Max. power factor L2 REAL + PN Time - 0 59 322...337 Max. power factor L3 REAL + PN Time - 0 60 338...353 Max. frequency REAL + PN Time Hz 45 61 354...369 Max. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time VA 0 67 370...385 Max. active power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 65 386...401 Max. reactive power Qtot L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 61138 402...417 Max. power factor L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time - 0 68 418...433 Max. reactive power Qn L1 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 55 434...449 Max. reactive power Qn L2 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 56 450...465 Max. reactive power Qn L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 57 466...481 Max. mean voltage L-N REAL + PN Time V 0 62 482...497 Max. mean voltage L-L REAL + PN Time V 0 63 498...513 Max. sum mean value current L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time A 0 64 514...529 Max. fundamental voltage L1 REAL + PN Time V 0 62152 530...545 Max. fundamental voltage L2 REAL + PN Time V 0 62252 546...561 Max. fundamental voltage L3 REAL + PN Time V 0 62352 562...577 Max. fundamental current L1 REAL + PN Time A 0 62153 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 238 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) 1 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 578...593 Max. fundamental current L2 REAL + PN Time A 0 62253 594...609 Max. fundamental current L3 REAL + PN Time A 0 62353 610...625 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA -3.0 x 109 62155 626...641 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA -3.0 x 109 62255 642...657 Max. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA -3.0 x 109 62355 658...673 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62154 674...689 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62254 690...705 Max. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL + PN Time var -3.0 x 109 62354 706...721 Max. fundamental active power L1 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 62156 722...737 Max. fundamental active power L2 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 62256 738...753 Max. fundamental active power L3 REAL + PN Time W -3.0 x 109 62356 754...769 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL + PN Time - -1 62157 770...785 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL + PN Time - -1 62257 786...801 Max. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL + PN Time - -1 62357 802...817 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62150 818...833 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62250 834...849 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62350 850...865 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62151 866...881 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62251 882...897 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 0 62351 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 239 Measured value data records E.5 Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154) Structure of time stamp The table below shows the structure of the time stamp: Byte PN Time Format Length 0 Status UINT16 2 bytes 0: Synchronization from system time master available 1: local synchronization available 2: no synchronization 2 Seconds high UINT16 2 bytes 4 Seconds low UINT32 4 bytes 8 Nanoseconds UINT32 4 bytes The start value (initial value) is 01.01.1970, 0:00 Note If you use the FAQ from the section Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp (Page 50), the status is always 2. Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 240 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.6 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) E.6 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) E.6.1 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) version 1 Measured variables of the module The smallest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...5 Min. voltage L1-N REAL V 1000000 70 6...9 Min. voltage L2-N REAL V 1000000 71 10...13 Min. voltage L3-N REAL V 1000000 72 14...17 Min. voltage L1-L2 REAL V 1800000 73 18...21 Min. voltage L2-L3 REAL V 1800000 74 22...25 Min. voltage L3-L1 REAL V 1800000 75 26...29 Min. current L1 1 REAL A 100000 76 30...33 Min. current L2 1 REAL A 100000 77 34...37 Min. current L3 1 REAL A 100000 78 38...41 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA +3.0 x 42...45 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 80 VA +3.0 x 109 81 109 82 46...49 Min. apparent power L3 REAL 109 79 50...53 Min. active power L1 REAL W +3.0 x 54...57 Min. active power L2 REAL W +3.0 x 109 83 W +3.0 x 109 84 109 62180 58...61 Min. active power L3 REAL 62...65 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var +3.0 x 66...69 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var +3.0 x 109 62280 109 62380 70...73 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var +3.0 x 74...77 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 1 88 78...81 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 1 89 82...85 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 1 90 86...89 Min. frequency REAL Hz 65 90...93 Min. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA 91 +3.0 x 109 97 109 95 94...97 Min. active power L1L2L3 REAL W +3.0 x 98...101 Min. reactive power Qn L1L2L3 REAL var +3.0 x 109 61139 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 241 Measured value data records E.6 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default 102...105 Min. power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 1 98 106...109 Min. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var +3.0 x 110...113 Min. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var +3.0 x 109 86 109 109 85 87 114...117 Min. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var +3.0 x 118...121 Min. mean voltage L-N REAL V 1000000 92 122...125 Min. mean voltage L-L REAL V 1800000 93 126...129 Min. mean current L1L2L3 REAL A 100000 94 130...133 Min. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0 62172 134...137 Min. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0 62272 138...141 Min. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0 62372 142...145 Min. fundamental current L1 REAL A 1000000 62173 146...149 Min. fundamental current L2 REAL A 1000000 62273 150...153 Min. fundamental current L3 REAL A 1000000 62373 154...157 Min. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 62175 109 62275 158...161 Min. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA +3.0 x 162...165 Min. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA +3.0 x 109 62375 var +3.0 x 109 62174 109 62274 166...169 1 Measured value ID Min. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL 170...173 Min. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var +3.0 x 174...177 Min. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var +3.0 x 109 62374 109 62176 178...181 Min. fundamental active power L1 REAL W +3.0 x 182...185 Min. fundamental active power L2 REAL W +3.0 x 109 62276 109 62376 186...189 Min. fundamental active power L3 REAL W +3.0 x 190...193 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - 1 62177 194...197 Min. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - 1 62277 198...201 Min. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - 1 62377 202...205 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 100 62170 206...209 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 100 62270 210...213 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 100 62370 214...217 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 100 62171 218...221 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 100 62271 222...225 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 100 62371 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 242 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) Measured variables of the module The smallest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter HF was started are stored in this data record. The measured values (REAL 4 bytes) are each followed by a time stamp (PN Time 12 bytes) The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...17 Min. voltage L1-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 70 18...33 Min. voltage L2-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 71 34...49 Min. voltage L3-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 72 50...65 Min. voltage L1-L2 REAL + PN Time V 1800000 73 66...81 Min. voltage L2-L3 REAL + PN Time V 1800000 74 82...97 Min. voltage L3-L1 REAL + PN Time V 1800000 75 98...113 Min. current L1 1 REAL + PN Time A 100000 76 114...129 Min. current L2 1 REAL + PN Time A 100000 77 130...145 Min. current L3 1 REAL + PN Time A 100000 78 146...161 Min. apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 79 162...177 Min. apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 80 178...193 Min. apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 81 194...209 Min. active power L1 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 82 210...225 Min. active power L2 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 83 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 243 Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 226...241 Min. active power L3 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 84 242...257 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62180 258...273 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62280 274...289 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62380 290...305 Min. power factor L1 REAL + PN Time - 1 88 306...321 Min. power factor L2 REAL + PN Time - 1 89 322...337 Min. power factor L3 REAL + PN Time - 1 90 338...353 Min. frequency REAL + PN Time Hz 65 91 354...369 Min. apparent power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 97 370...385 Min. active power L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 95 386...401 Min. reactive power Qn L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 61139 402...417 Min. power factor L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time - 1 98 418...433 Min. reactive power Qn L1 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 85 434...449 Min. reactive power Qn L2 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 86 450...465 Min. reactive power Qn L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 87 466...481 Min. mean voltage L-N REAL + PN Time V 1000000 92 482...497 Min. mean voltage L-L REAL + PN Time V 1800000 93 498...513 Min. mean current L1L2L3 REAL + PN Time A 100000 94 514...529 Min. fundamental voltage L1 REAL + PN Time V 0 62172 530...545 Min. fundamental voltage L2 REAL + PN Time V 0 62272 546...561 Min. fundamental voltage L3 REAL + PN Time V 0 62372 562...577 Min. fundamental current L1 REAL + PN Time A 1000000 62173 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 244 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.7 Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155) 1 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 578...593 Min. fundamental current L2 REAL + PN Time A 1000000 62273 594...609 Min. fundamental current L3 REAL + PN Time A 1000000 62373 610...625 Min. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 62175 626...641 Min. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 62275 642...657 Min. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL + PN Time VA +3.0 x 109 62375 658...673 Min. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62174 674...689 Min. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62274 690...705 Min. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL + PN Time var +3.0 x 109 62374 706...721 Min. fundamental active power L1 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 62176 722...737 Min. fundamental active power L2 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 62276 738...753 Min. fundamental active power L3 REAL + PN Time W +3.0 x 109 62376 754...769 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL + PN Time - 1 62177 770...785 Min. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL + PN Time - 1 62277 786...801 Min. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL + PN Time - 1 62377 802...817 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62170 818...833 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62270 834...849 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62370 850...865 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62171 866...881 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62271 882...897 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL + PN Time 1% 100 62371 The values reference the amount of the current measured value Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 245 Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.8.1 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 0 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65500 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 8...11 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 12...15 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 16...19 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 22 24...27 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 28...31 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 32...39 Apparent energy L1 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61184 40...47 Total active energy L1 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L1 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61186 56...59 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 40 60...63 Max. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 46 64...67 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61185 49 ... +3.0 x 109 52 ... +3.0 x 109 62160 72...75 Max. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 58 80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 70 84...87 Min. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 88...91 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 76 ... +3.0 x 109 79 ... +3.0 x 109 82 92...95 Min. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62180 100...103 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 88 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 246 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) E.8.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65500 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 8...11 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 12...15 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 10 109 16...19 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13 22 24...27 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 28...31 Phase angle L1 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 32...39 Apparent energy L1 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61184 40...47 Total active energy L1 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L1 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61186 56...59 Max. voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 40 60...63 Max. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 46 64...67 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61185 49 ... +3.0 x 109 52 ... +3.0 x 109 62160 72...75 Max. reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 80...83 Min. voltage L1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 70 84...87 Min. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 76 88...91 Min. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 58 79 92...95 Min. active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62180 100...103 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 88 Reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 108...111 Current L1 10-12 cycles REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62130 112...115 Current L1 10-12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62133 116...119 Max. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Min. reactive power Qn L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x ... +3.0 x 109 82 104...107 120...123 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 16 55 85 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 247 Measured value data records E.8 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 124...127 Fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62122 128...131 Fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62123 132...135 Fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 136...139 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 62125 ... +3.0 x 109 62124 ... +3.0 x 109 62126 140...143 Fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 144...147 Fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62127 148...151 Max. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62152 152...155 Max. fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 156...159 Max. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 62153 ... +3.0 x 109 62155 ... +3.0 x 109 62154 160...163 Max. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 164...167 Max. fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62156 168...171 Max. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62157 172...175 Min. fundamental voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62172 176...179 Min. fundamental current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 109 180...183 Min. fundamental apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 184...187 Min. fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62173 ... +3.0 x 109 62175 62174 109 188...191 Min. fundamental active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 62176 192...195 Min. fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62177 196...199 THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 200...203 THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 204...207 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62150 208...211 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62151 212...215 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62170 216...219 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62171 220...223 Voltage dip - value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62194 224...227 Voltage dip - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62199 228...231 Voltage swell - value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62195 232...235 Voltage swell - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62200 236...239 Voltage peak value L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62196 240...243 Current peak value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62197 244...247 Overcurrent value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62198 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 248 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.9.1 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 0 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L2 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65501 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 8...11 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 12...15 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 11 109 16...19 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 14 23 24...27 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 28...31 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 32...39 Apparent energy L2 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61204 40...47 Total active energy L2 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L2 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61206 56...59 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 41 60...63 Max. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 64...67 Max. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 to +1.8 x 10308 61205 50 ... +3.0 x 109 53 ... +3.0 x 109 62260 72...75 Max. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 84...87 Min. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 77 88...91 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 59 ... +3.0 x 109 80 92...95 Min. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 83 62280 100...103 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 249 Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) E.9.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L2 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65501 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage L2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 8...11 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 12...15 Apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 11 16...19 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 23 24...27 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 28...31 Phase angle L2 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 32...39 Apparent energy L2 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 14 61204 40...47 Total active energy L2 LREAL Wh -1.8 48...55 Total reactive energy L2 LREAL varh -1.8 x10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61206 56...59 Max. voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 41 60...63 Max. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 64...67 Max. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L2 REAL W x10308 109 -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61205 50 ... +3.0 x 109 53 ... +3.0 x 109 62260 72...75 Max. reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 59 80...83 Min. voltage UL2-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 84...87 Min. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 88...91 Min. apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 77 ... +3.0 x 109 80 ... +3.0 x 109 83 92...95 Min. active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62280 100...103 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 104...107 Reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 108...111 Current L2 10-12 cycles REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62230 112...115 Current L2 10-12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62233 116...119 Max. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 120...123 Min. reactive power Qn L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x ... +3.0 x 109 109 17 56 86 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 250 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.9 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 124...127 Fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62222 128...131 Fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62223 132...135 Fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 136...139 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 62225 ... +3.0 x 109 62224 ... +3.0 x 109 62226 140...143 Fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 144...147 Fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62227 148...151 Max. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62252 152...155 Max. fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 156...159 Max. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 62253 ... +3.0 x 109 62255 ... +3.0 x 109 62254 160...163 Max. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 164...167 Max. fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62256 168...171 Max. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62257 172...175 Min. fundamental voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62272 176...179 Min. fundamental current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 109 180...183 Min. fundamental apparent power L2 REAL VA -3.0 x 184...187 Min. fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62273 ... +3.0 x 109 62275 62274 109 188...191 Min. fundamental active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 62276 192...195 Min. fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62277 196...199 THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 200...203 THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 204...207 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62250 208...211 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62251 212...215 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62270 216...219 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62271 220...223 Voltage dip - value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62294 224...227 Voltage dip - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62299 228...231 Voltage swell - value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62295 232...235 Voltage swell - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62300 236...239 Voltage peak value L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62296 240...243 Current peak value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62297 244...247 Overcurrent value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62298 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 251 Measured value data records E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.10.1 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...3 Qualifier L3 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65502 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 8...11 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 12...15 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 12 109 16...19 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 15 24 24...27 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 28...31 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 32...39 Apparent energy L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 10308 61224 40...47 Total active energy L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 x 48...55 Total reactive energy L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x 10308 to +1.8 x 10308 61226 56...59 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 42 60...63 Max. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 64...67 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 109 to +1.8 x 10308 61225 51 ... +3.0 x 109 54 ... +3.0 x 109 62360 72...75 Max. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 60 80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 84...87 Min. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 88...91 Min. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 78 ... +3.0 x 109 81 ... +3.0 x 109 62380 92...95 Min. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 97 100...103 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 252 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) E.10.2 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 1 - 1 Reserved UINT8 - 0 - 2...3 Qualifier L3 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65502 0b qq 00 00 xx 4...7 Voltage L3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 8...11 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 12...15 Apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 12 16...19 Active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 20...23 Reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 24 24...27 Power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 28...31 Phase angle L3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 32...39 Apparent energy L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 15 61224 40...47 Total active energy L3 LREAL Wh -1.8 48...55 Total reactive energy L3 LREAL varh -1.8 x10308 ... +1.8 x 10308 61226 56...59 Max. voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 42 60...63 Max. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 64...67 Max. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 68...71 Max. active power L3 REAL W x10308 109 -3.0 x 109 109 ... +1.8 x 10308 61225 51 ... +3.0 x 109 54 ... +3.0 x 109 62360 72...75 Max. reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 76...79 Max. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 80...83 Min. voltage UL3-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 84...87 Min. current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 78 88...91 Min. apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 60 81 92...95 Min. active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 96...99 Min. reactive power Qtot L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62380 100...103 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 Reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 108...111 Current L3 10-12 cycles REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62330 112...115 Current L3 10-12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62333 116...119 Max. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 Min. reactive power Qn L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x ... +3.0 x 109 84 104...107 120...123 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 18 57 87 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 253 Measured value data records E.10 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 124...127 Fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62322 128...131 Fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62323 132...135 Fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 136...139 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 109 62325 ... +3.0 x 109 62324 ... +3.0 x 109 62326 140...143 Fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 144...147 Fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62327 148...151 Max. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 62352 152...155 Max. fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 156...159 Max. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 109 62353 ... +3.0 x 109 62355 ... +3.0 x 109 62354 160...163 Max. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 164...167 Max. fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62356 168...171 Max. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62357 172...175 Min. fundamental voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62372 176...179 Min. fundamental current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 109 180...183 Min. fundamental apparent power L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 184...187 Min. fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 62373 ... +3.0 x 109 62375 62374 109 188...191 Min. fundamental active power L3 REAL W -3.0 x 62376 192...195 Min. fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62377 196...199 THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 200...203 THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 204...207 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62350 208...211 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62351 212...215 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62370 216...219 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62371 220...223 Voltage dip - value L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62394 224...227 Voltage dip - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62399 228...231 Voltage swell - value L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62395 232...235 Voltage swell - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62400 236...239 Voltage peak value L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 62396 240...243 Current peak value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62397 244...247 Overcurrent value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62398 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 254 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.11 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) E.11 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) E.11.1 Measured value data record for advanced measured values and status values (DS 150) version 1 Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - 1 - 1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - 2...5 Operating hours counter L1L2L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 6...9 Operating hours counter L1 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65505 h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65506 1038 65507 10...13 Operating hours counter L2 REAL 1038 65504 14...17 Operating hours counter L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 18...19 Status limit violation GW 1...16 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509 20...21 Status of energy counter overflows 1 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508 22...25 Counter limit violation GW 1 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65510 26...29 Counter limit violation GW 2 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65511 30...33 Counter limit violation GW 3 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65512 34...37 Counter limit violation GW 4 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65513 38...41 Counter limit violation GW 5 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65514 42...45 Counter limit violation GW 6 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65515 46...49 Counter limit violation GW 7 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65516 50...53 Counter limit violation GW 8 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65517 54...57 Counter limit violation GW 9 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65518 58...61 Counter limit violation GW 10 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65519 62...65 Counter limit violation GW 11 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65520 66...69 Counter limit violation GW 12 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65521 70...73 Counter limit violation GW 13 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65522 74...77 Counter limit violation GW 14 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65523 78...81 Counter limit violation GW 15 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65524 82...85 Counter limit violation GW 16 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65525 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 255 Measured value data records E.11 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) 1 Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 86...87 Qualifier L1L2L3 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503 88...91 Power quality analysis - Qualifier UDINT Bit string - 65496 92...103 Current module time PNIOTime sec - 65497 Energy counters count periodically - counter overflow at: Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1 Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1 Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1 Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1 Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1 Bit 5 = 1: Active energy inflow L2 Bit 6 = 1: Active energy outflow L2 Bit 7 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L2 Bit 8 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L2 Bit 9 = 1: Apparent energy L2 Bit 10 = 1: Active energy inflow L3 Bit 11 = 1: Active energy outflow L3 Bit 12 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L3 Bit 13 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L3 Bit 14 = 1: Apparent energy L3 Bit 15: Reserved Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 256 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.12 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151) E.12 Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151) The length and structure of the data record DS 151 depends on the parameter assignment of the data record DS 135 (Page 159). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Default Measured value ID 0 Version UINT8 - 0 - 1 Number of measured values UINT8 - 0 - 2 Measured value 1 corresponding to measured value ID 1 in DS135 Depending on the corresponding measured value ID 3 Measured value 2 corresponding to measured value ID 2 in DS135 Depending on the corresponding measured value ID ... ... Depending on the corresponding measured value ID ... m Measured value n corresponding to measured value ID n in DS135 Depending on the corresponding measured value ID Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 257 Measured value data records E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 Neutral current IN REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149 6...9 Neutral current 10/12 cycles REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61150 10...13 Total current IL1+IL2+IL3-IN REAL A -100000.0 ... 100000.0 61153 14...17 Fundamental reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 61154 109 18...21 Max. fundamental reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 22...25 Min. fundamental reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 61156 26...29 Power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37 109 ... +3.0 x 61155 30...33 Fundamental reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 34...37 Fundamental reactive power L2 REAL var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 109 ... +3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 62124 62224 109 38...41 Fundamental reactive power L3 REAL var -3.0 x 42...45 Fundamental cos active factor L1 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62324 62127 46...49 Fundamental cos active factor L2 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62227 50...53 Fundamental cos active factor L3 REAL - -1.0 ... 1.0 62327 54...57 THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 58...61 THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 62...65 THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 66...69 THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 70...73 THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 74...77 THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 78...81 Max. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62150 82...85 Max. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62250 86...89 Max. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62350 90...93 Max. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62151 94...97 Max. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62251 98...101 Max. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62351 102...105 Min. THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62170 106...109 Min. THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62270 110...113 Min. THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62370 114...117 Min. THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62171 118...121 Min. THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62271 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 258 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.13 Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 122...125 Min. THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62371 126...129 Voltage dip - value L1 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62194 130...133 Voltage dip - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62199 134...137 Voltage dip - value L2 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62294 138...141 Voltage dip - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62299 142...145 Voltage dip - value L3 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62394 146...149 Voltage dip - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62399 150...153 Voltage increase - value L1 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62195 154...157 Voltage increase - duration L1 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62200 158...161 Voltage increase - value L2 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62295 162...165 Voltage increase - duration L2 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62300 166...169 Voltage increase - value L3 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62395 170...173 Voltage increase - duration L3 REAL ms 0.0 ... 100000.0 62400 174...177 Voltage peak value L1 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62196 178...181 Voltage peak value L2 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62296 182...185 Voltage peak value L3 REAL V 0 ... 440.0 62396 186...189 Current peak value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62197 190...193 Current peak value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62297 194...197 Current peak value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62397 198...201 Overcurrent value L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62198 202...205 Overcurrent value L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62298 206...209 Overcurrent value L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 62398 210...213 Amplitude symmetry Voltage U2 REAL % 0 ... 100 61157 214...217 Amplitude symmetry Current Iunsym REAL % 0 ... 100 61158 218...221 Power quality analysis - Qualifier UDINT Bit string - 65496 222...233 Current module time PNIO Time sec - 65497 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 259 Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 THD+N voltage L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62120 6...9 Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 1 10...13 Harmonics 1: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63000 14...17 Harmonics 2: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63002 18...21 Harmonics 3: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63004 22...25 Harmonics 4: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63006 26...29 Harmonics 5: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63008 30...33 Harmonics 6: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63010 34...37 Harmonics 7: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63012 38...41 Harmonics 8: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63014 42...45 Harmonics 9: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63016 46...49 Harmonics 10: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63018 50...53 Harmonics 11: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63020 54...57 Harmonics 12: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63022 58...61 Harmonics 13: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63024 62...65 Harmonics 14: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63026 66...69 Harmonics 15: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63028 70...73 Harmonics 16: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63030 74...77 Harmonics 17: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63032 78...81 Harmonics 18: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63034 82...85 Harmonics 19: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63036 86...89 Harmonics 20: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63038 90...93 Harmonics 21: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63040 94...97 Harmonics 22: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63042 98...101 Harmonics 23: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63044 102...105 Harmonics 24: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63046 106...109 Harmonics 25: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63048 110...113 Harmonics 26: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63050 114...117 Harmonics 27: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63052 118...121 Harmonics 28: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63054 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 260 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 122...125 Harmonics 29: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63056 126...129 Harmonics 30: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63058 130...133 Harmonics 31: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63060 134...137 Harmonics 32: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63062 138...141 Harmonics 33: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63064 142...145 Harmonics 34: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63066 146...149 Harmonics 35: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63068 150...153 Harmonics 36: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63070 154...157 Harmonics 37: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63072 158...161 Harmonics 38: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63074 162...165 Harmonics 39: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63076 166...169 Harmonics 40: Voltage L1 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63078 170...173 THD+N voltage L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62220 174...177 Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 2 178...181 Harmonics 1: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63400 182...185 Harmonics 2: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63402 186...189 Harmonics 3: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63404 190...193 Harmonics 4: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63406 194...197 Harmonics 5: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63408 198...201 Harmonics 6: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63410 202...205 Harmonics 7: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63412 206...209 Harmonics 8: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63414 210...213 Harmonics 9: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63416 214...217 Harmonics 10: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63418 218...221 Harmonics 11: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63420 222...225 Harmonics 12: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63422 226...229 Harmonics 13: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63424 230...233 Harmonics 14: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63426 234...237 Harmonics 15: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63428 238...241 Harmonics 16: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63430 242...245 Harmonics 17: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63432 246...249 Harmonics 18: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63434 250...253 Harmonics 19: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63436 254...257 Harmonics 20: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63438 258...261 Harmonics 21: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63440 262...265 Harmonics 22: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63442 266...269 Harmonics 23: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63444 270...273 Harmonics 24: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63446 274...277 Harmonics 25: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63448 278...281 Harmonics 26: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63450 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 261 Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 281...285 Harmonics 27: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63452 286...289 Harmonics 28: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63454 290...293 Harmonics 29: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63456 294...297 Harmonics 30: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63458 298...301 Harmonics 31: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63460 302...305 Harmonics 32: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63462 306...309 Harmonics 33: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63464 310...313 Harmonics 34: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63466 314...317 Harmonics 35: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63468 318...321 Harmonics 36: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63470 322...325 Harmonics 37: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63472 326...329 Harmonics 38: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63474 330...333 Harmonics 39: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63476 334...337 Harmonics 40: Voltage L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63478 338...341 THD+N voltage L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62320 342...345 Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 440.0 3 346...349 Harmonics 1: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63800 350...353 Harmonics 2: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63802 354...357 Harmonics 3: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63804 358...361 Harmonics 4: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63806 362...365 Harmonics 5: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63808 366...369 Harmonics 6: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63810 370...373 Harmonics 7: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63812 374...377 Harmonics 8: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63814 378...381 Harmonics 9: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63816 382...385 Harmonics 10: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63818 386...389 Harmonics 11: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63820 390...393 Harmonics 12: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63822 394...397 Harmonics 13: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63824 398...401 Harmonics 14: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63826 402...405 Harmonics 15: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63828 406...409 Harmonics 16: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63830 410...413 Harmonics 17: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63832 414...417 Harmonics 18: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63834 418...421 Harmonics 19: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63836 422...425 Harmonics 20: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63838 426...429 Harmonics 21: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63840 430...433 Harmonics 22: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63842 434...437 Harmonics 23: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63844 438...441 Harmonics 24: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63846 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 262 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.14 Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 442...445 Harmonics 25: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63848 446...449 Harmonics 26: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63850 450...453 Harmonics 27: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63852 454...457 Harmonics 28: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63854 458...461 Harmonics 29: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63856 462...465 Harmonics 30: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63858 466...469 Harmonics 31: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63860 470...473 Harmonics 32: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63862 474...477 Harmonics 33: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63864 478...481 Harmonics 34: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63866 482...485 Harmonics 35: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63868 486...489 Harmonics 36: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63870 490...493 Harmonics 37: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63872 494...497 Harmonics 38: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63874 498...501 Harmonics 39: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63876 502...505 Harmonics 40: Voltage L3 REAL V 0.0 ... 760.0 63878 506...517 Current module time PNIOTime sec - 65497 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 263 Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Measured variables of the module The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables for connection type (Page 162)). Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 0 Version BYTE - - - 1 Reserved BYTE - - - 2...5 THD+N current L1 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62121 6...9 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 7 10...13 Harmonics 1: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63001 14...17 Harmonics 2: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63003 18...21 Harmonics 3: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63005 22...25 Harmonics 4: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63007 26...29 Harmonics 5: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63009 30...33 Harmonics 6: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63011 34...37 Harmonics 7: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63013 38...41 Harmonics 8: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63015 42...45 Harmonics 9: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63017 46...49 Harmonics 10: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63019 50...53 Harmonics 11: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63021 54...57 Harmonics 12: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63023 58...61 Harmonics 13: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63025 62...65 Harmonics 14: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63027 66...69 Harmonics 15: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63029 70...73 Harmonics 16: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63031 74...77 Harmonics 17: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63033 78...81 Harmonics 18: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63035 82...85 Harmonics 19: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63037 86...89 Harmonics 20: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63039 90...93 Harmonics 21: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63041 94...97 Harmonics 22: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63043 98...101 Harmonics 23: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63045 102...105 Harmonics 24: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63047 106...109 Harmonics 25: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63049 110...113 Harmonics 26: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63051 114...117 Harmonics 27: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63053 118...121 Harmonics 28: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63055 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 264 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 122...125 Harmonics 29: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63057 126...129 Harmonics 30: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63059 130...133 Harmonics 31: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63061 134...137 Harmonics 32: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63063 138...141 Harmonics 33: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63065 142...145 Harmonics 34: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63067 146...149 Harmonics 35: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63069 150...153 Harmonics 36: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63071 154...157 Harmonics 37: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63073 158...161 Harmonics 38: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63075 162...165 Harmonics 39: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63077 166...169 Harmonics 40: Current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63079 170...173 THD+N current L2 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62221 174...177 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 8 178...181 Harmonics 1: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63401 182...185 Harmonics 2: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63403 186...189 Harmonics 3: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63405 190...193 Harmonics 4: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63407 194...197 Harmonics 5: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63409 198...201 Harmonics 6: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63411 202...205 Harmonics 7: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63413 206...209 Harmonics 8: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63415 210...213 Harmonics 9: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63417 214...217 Harmonics 10: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63419 218...221 Harmonics 11: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63421 222...225 Harmonics 12: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63423 226...229 Harmonics 13: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63425 230...233 Harmonics 14: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63427 234...237 Harmonics 15: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63429 238...241 Harmonics 16: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63431 242...245 Harmonics 17: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63433 246...249 Harmonics 18: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63435 250...253 Harmonics 19: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63437 254...257 Harmonics 20: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63439 258...261 Harmonics 21: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63441 262...265 Harmonics 22: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63443 266...269 Harmonics 23: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63445 270...273 Harmonics 24: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63447 274...277 Harmonics 25: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63449 278...281 Harmonics 26: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63451 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 265 Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 281...285 Harmonics 27: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63453 286...289 Harmonics 28: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63455 290...293 Harmonics 29: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63457 294...297 Harmonics 30: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63459 298...301 Harmonics 31: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63461 302...305 Harmonics 32: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63463 306...309 Harmonics 33: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63465 310...313 Harmonics 34: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63467 314...317 Harmonics 35: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63469 318...321 Harmonics 36: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63471 322...325 Harmonics 37: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63473 326...329 Harmonics 38: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63475 330...333 Harmonics 39: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63477 334...337 Harmonics 40: Current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63479 338...341 THD+N current L3 REAL 1% 0% to 100% 62321 342...345 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 9 346...349 Harmonics 1: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63801 350...353 Harmonics 2: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63803 354...357 Harmonics 3: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63805 358...361 Harmonics 4: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63807 362...365 Harmonics 5: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63809 366...369 Harmonics 6: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63811 370...373 Harmonics 7: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63813 374...377 Harmonics 8: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 6381 378...381 Harmonics 9: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63817 382...385 Harmonics 10: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63819 386...389 Harmonics 11: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63821 390...393 Harmonics 12: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63823 394...397 Harmonics 13: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63825 398...401 Harmonics 14: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63827 402...405 Harmonics 15: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63829 406...409 Harmonics 16: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63831 410...413 Harmonics 17: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63833 414...417 Harmonics 18: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63835 418...421 Harmonics 19: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63837 422...425 Harmonics 20: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63839 426...429 Harmonics 21: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63841 430...433 Harmonics 22: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63843 434...437 Harmonics 23: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63845 438...441 Harmonics 24: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63847 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 266 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Measured value data records E.15 Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163) Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured value ID 442...445 Harmonics 25: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63849 446...449 Harmonics 26: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63851 450...453 Harmonics 27: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63853 454...457 Harmonics 28: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63855 458...461 Harmonics 29: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63857 462...465 Harmonics 30: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63859 466...469 Harmonics 31: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63861 470...473 Harmonics 32: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63863 474...477 Harmonics 33: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63865 478...481 Harmonics 34: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63867 482...485 Harmonics 35: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63869 486...489 Harmonics 36: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63871 490...493 Harmonics 37: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63873 494...497 Harmonics 38: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63875 498...501 Harmonics 39: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63877 502...505 Harmonics 40: Current L3 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 63879 506...517 Current module time PNIOTime sec - 65497 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 267 Measured value data records E.16 Information data record on available measured values (DS 170) E.16 Information data record on available measured values (DS 170) Measured variables of the module Byte Name Data type 0 Version BYTE 1 Reserved BYTE 2...3 Number of IDs UINT16 4...5 ID measured value 1 UINT16 5...6 ID measured value 2 UINT16 ... ... ... 1149...1150 ID measured value 580 UINT16 Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) 268 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA Tips and tricks F.1 F Tips and tricks Processing and visualizing energy data On the basis of an application example we show you how the measured values of the AI Energy Meter can be processed further and visualized. You can find this application example on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/86299299). Overview of the measuring data We provide you with an overview of the assignment of the measured values to the user data variants and data records in an Excel file. You will find the Excel file on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755917). Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp In an application example we show you how to synchronize the time with the AI Energy Meter HF and work with measured values with time stamps. You can find this application example on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890). Measured values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 Measured values are represented as negative values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 if the value range of the integer format (32767 dec) is exceeded. This is not an error in the measured value. Solution: Select hexadecimal representation. Conversion of 64-bit floating-point numbers If you cannot process 64-bit floating-point numbers in your automation system, we recommend conversion to 32-bit floating-point numbers. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy. For a description of the conversion of the 64-bit floating-point numbers (data type LREAL) into 32-bit floating-point numbers (data type REAL) please refer to the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56600676). See also FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109755917) Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) Manual, 07/2018, A5E42674880-AA 269 SIMATIC ET 200SP Product information on the "AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF" and "AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF" device manuals Product Information Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). General amendments to the documentation This product information contains supplements and corrections to the "Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF" (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0) and "Analog input module AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF" (6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0) device manuals. The product information is part of the product supplied. The statements provided in it should be considered more up-to-date than other documentation if uncertainties arise. Voltage swell or voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value For technical reasons, the voltage swell and voltage dip functions display a voltage increase duration or voltage dip duration that is slightly too long when the process value of the voltage goes to "0". Information on startup characteristics For technical reasons, the frequency, all measured values of harmonic distortion THD+N current and voltage as well as the minimum and maximum values are delivered with a delay of approx. 2 seconds after connecting the module or switching on the load voltage. (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved A5E44378658-AA, 04/2018 3 Peak values of the instantaneous values for current and voltage For technical reasons, both the "Detect current peaks" and "Detect voltage peaks" functions are activated at the same time internally to ensure the correct evaluation of the peak value detection of current and/or voltage of a phase. AI Energy Meter HF always shows the phase that exhibits the highest instantaneous value for current or voltage respectively. If peak values are displayed for several phases, you can correlate the available phase values to determine the maximum value of the module. Peak value detection of the instantaneous values of current and voltage only works when the module is correctly connected to the corresponding phases selected for the connection type. That is to say, if you use connection type 1P2W, only phase 1 should be connected; for 2P3W, only phases 1 and 2 should be connected accordingly. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Product information on Product the "AI Energy Meteron480VAC/CT HF"Meter and "AI Energy Meter HF"Meter device480VAC/RC manuals HF" device manuals information the "AI Energy 480VAC/CT HF"480VAC/RC and "AI Energy A5E44378658-AA, 04/2018 4 A5E44378658-AA, 04/2018 Analog output module AQ 2xI ST ___________________ Preface (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 12/2015 A5E36104864-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36104864-AA 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 13 4.1 Output ranges .........................................................................................................................13 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................18 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................21 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................22 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 25 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................25 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................26 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 30 B.1 Representation of analog values ............................................................................................30 B.2 Representation of output ranges ............................................................................................31 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges ...............................................32 Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 7 Documentation guide Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7135-GB00-0BA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Image 2-1 View of the module AQ 2xI ST Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog output module with 2 outputs - for current output Output range for current output: - 20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign - 0 mA to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 14 bits Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Configurable diagnostics (per module) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Value status You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AQ 2xI ST with the terminal assignments. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 11 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Current output 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog output module AQ 2xI ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current output Backplane bus interface Microcontroller Qn+ QnRES Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) L+ Output conditioner Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) M P1, P2, AUX Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) DIAG Analog output current positive, channel n Analog output current negative, channel n Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AQ0, AQ1 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green) Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current output 2-wire connection Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Output ranges The analog output module AQ 2xI ST has the following output ranges: Table 4- 1 Output ranges Output type Current Output ranges Resolution 20 mA 16 bits incl. sign 0 mA to 20 mA 15 bits 4 mA to 20 mA 14 bits The tables of the output ranges, overflow, overrange, etc. can be found in section Representation of analog values (Page 30). Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 13 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AQ 2xI ST The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 26). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Range of values Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Overflow 1 Diagnostics: Underflow 1 Diagnostics: Wire break 2 Output type/range Reaction to CPU STOP * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated * Current +/- 20 mA * Current 0 - 20 mA * Current 4 - 20 mA * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module 1 Disable Yes Module Disable Yes Module Module Current 4 20 mA Yes Channel Channel Turn off Yes Channel Module Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Range of values Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO 1 2 Substitute value For permissible substitute values for the various output ranges, see appendix Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 26), Substitute values Codes for substitute values table Potential group * Use potential group of the left module (module plugged into a darkcolored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into light-colored BaseUnit) GSD file PROFIBUS DP 0 Yes Channel Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module Module Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes. No diagnostics detection between -3 and +3 mA (no wire break detection) Note Unused channels A disabled channel always returns the value "no current or voltage". Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange, falls below the minimum output value or reaches underflow. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Output type / output range See section Output ranges (Page 13). Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module at CPU STOP. Substitute value The substitute value is the value that the module outputs in case of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 and 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: There are no errors on the module. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 2xI ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-1 Address space of the AQ 2xI ST with value status Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 17 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the AQ 2xI ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 21). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 19 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The AQ 2xI ST analog output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Line break (current) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable the channel ("output type" parameter) * Connect the channel High limit violated 7H The output value specified by the user program exceeds the overrange. Correct the output value Low limit violated 8H The output value specified by the user program is below the underrange. Correct the output value Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update. * Restart the firmware update. Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 21 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AQ 2xI ST 6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AQ 2xI Standard Firmware version V1.0 Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC00 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Scalable output range No Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 / - STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode Oversampling No MSO No CiR Configuration in RUN Configuration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 110 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1 Analog outputs Number of analog outputs 2 Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms Analog output with oversampling No Output ranges, current 0 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits incl. sign 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bits Connection of actuators for current output two-wire connection Yes Load resistance (in nominal range of the output) For current outputs, max. 500 For current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH Destruction limit for externally applied voltages and currents Voltages at the outputs 30 V Cable length Shielded, max. 1000 m Analog value generation for the outputs Oscillation time For resistive load 0.1 ms; typ. value For inductive load 0.5 ms Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03% Temperature error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.005%/K Crosstalk between outputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.05% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.3% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.3% Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 23 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes Group error Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics No For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels and voltage supply of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation) Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Environmental conditions Ambient temperature in operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 Horizontal installation, max. 60 Vertical installation, min. 0 Vertical installation, max. 50 Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for PROFINET. Output type Output range No supply voltage L+ Overflow Underflow Wire break Reaction to CPU STOP * * * * * * 20 mA x x x x x x 0 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x Deactivated Current Diagnostics Substitute value x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for PROFIBUS. Output type Output range Deactivated Current Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Overflow Underflow Wire break Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute value * * * * * * 20 mA x x x x x x 0 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 25 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Parameters The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Image A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+5 for channels 0 and 1 Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 27 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Codes for output types The following table contains the codes for the output types of the analog output module. You enter this coding in byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for output types Output type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Current 0000 0011 Codes for output ranges The following table contains the codes for the output ranges of the analog output module. You enter these codes in byte x+1 of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for output ranges Output range Code Current 20 mA 0000 0000 0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0001 4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010 Value range for substitute value The following table contains the value ranges for the substitute values. You must enter the corresponding codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure). Output range Permissible value range Current 20 mA -29031 to 29030 0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 29030 4 to 20 mA -692 to 29376 Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine if the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 29 B Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 2xI ST analog module. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for all output values at the same nominal range. Analog values are output as fixed point numbers in two's complement. In the following table, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal or hexadecimal units of the analog values. The resolutions 15 and 16 bits including sign are shown. Each analog value is entered left aligned into the ACCU. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Possible resolutions of the analog values Resolution in bits Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of output ranges B.2 Representation of output ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar range output ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Minimum output value Unipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Minimum output value Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 31 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current output ranges. Table B- 4 Current output range 20 mA Values Current output range Dec. 118.5149% 105% 20 mA 21 mA Overflow* Overrange 32767 7FFF 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA Nominal range -1 FFFF -723.4 nA -75% -20736 AF00 -15 mA -100% -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -20 mA + 723.4 nA -29031 8E99 -21 mA -29032 8E98 -21 mA -32768 8000 -105% -118.519% Range Hex. Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 5 Current output range 0 to 20 mA Values 118.5149% 105% Current output range Hex. 0 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 20736 5100 15 mA Nominal range 0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF 0 mA -32768 8000 -118.519% Range Dec. Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) 32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Table B- 6 Current output ranges 4 to 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29377 72C1 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 19008 4A40 16 mA 0.003617% 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0% 0 0 4 mA -1 FFFF 3.9995 mA -692 FD4C 3.6 mA -693 FD4B 3.6 mA -32768 8000 118.5149% 106.25% -2.5% -118.519% Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 33 Analog output module AQ 2xU ST ___________________ Preface (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 12/2015 A5E36105248-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E36105248-AA 12/2015 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 13 4.1 Output ranges .........................................................................................................................13 4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................15 4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................16 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 17 5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................17 5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................19 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................19 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 20 6.1 A Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................20 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 23 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................23 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................24 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 28 B.1 Representation of analog values ............................................................................................28 B.2 Representation of output ranges ............................................................................................29 B.3 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges ..............................................30 Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 7 Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Image 2-1 View of the module AQ 2xU ST Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog output module with 2 outputs - for voltage output Output range for voltage output: - 10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 5 V, resolution 15 bits including sign - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits - 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Configurable diagnostics (per module) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Value status You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the AQ 2xU ST module with the terminal assignments for a 2-wire connection. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 11 Wiring 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: Voltage output 2-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog output module AQ 2xU ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage output Backplane bus interface Microcontroller Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) Qn+ QnNC RES Output conditioner Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) L+ M P1, P2, AUX Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- DIAG colored BaseUnit is present) AQ0, AQ1 PWR Image 3-1 Analog output voltage positive, channel n Analog output voltage negative, channel n Not connected Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) Power LED (green) Wiring and block diagram for voltage output 2-wire connection Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Output ranges The analog output module AQ 2xU ST has the following output ranges: Table 4- 1 Output ranges Output type Output ranges Resolution Voltage 10 V 16 bits incl. sign 5V 15 bits including sign 0 to 10 V 15 bits 1 to 5 V 13 bits The tables of the output ranges, overflow, overrange, etc. can be found in section Representation of analog values (Page 28). 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AQ 2xU ST The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 24). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Range of values Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground1 Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module Disable Yes Module Module 2 Disable Yes Module Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 13 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Range of values Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Output type/range Reaction to CPU STOP * Deactivated * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage +/- 5 V * Voltage 0..10 V * Voltage 1..5 V * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value GSD file PROFIBUS DP Voltage +/- 10 V Yes Channel Channel Turn off Yes Channel Module Yes Channel Channel No Module Module Substitute value For permissible substitute 0 values for the various output ranges, see appendix Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 24), Substitute values Codes for substitute values table Potential group * Use potential group of Use potential group of the left the left module (modmodule ule plugged into a dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (module plugged into lightcolored BaseUnit) 1 No diagnostics detection between -0.5 V and +0.5 V (no short-circuit detection) 2 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes. Note Unused channels A deactivated channel always returns the value "no voltage". Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange, falls below the minimum output value or reaches underflow. Output type / output range See section Output ranges (Page 13) Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module at CPU STOP. Substitute value The substitute value is the value that the module outputs in case of a CPU STOP. Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor. All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits. You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left neighbor. A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. See also You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 15 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 and 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: There are no errors on the module. Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module. If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 2xU ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-1 Address space of the AQ 2xU ST with value status Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows you the LED display of the AQ 2xU ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 17 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 19). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel disabled Off Channel activated On PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Missing supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The AQ 2xU ST analog output module supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupts The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit (voltage) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring High limit violated 7H The output value specified by the user program exceeds the overrange. Correct the output value Low limit violated 8H The output value specified by the user program is below the underrange. Correct the output value Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Firmware update is currently in progress or has been canceled. The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type * Wait for firmware update * Restart the firmware update Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 19 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AQ 2xU ST 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1 General information Product type designation ET 200SP, AQ 2xU Standard Firmware version V1.0 Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC00 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Scalable output range No Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 / - STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode Oversampling No MSO No CiR Configuration in RUN Configuration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Polarity reversal protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 80 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 20 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1 Analog outputs Number of analog outputs 2 Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 45 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms Analog output with oversampling No Output ranges, voltage 0 to 10 V Yes; 15 bits 1 V to 5 V Yes; 13 bits -5 V to +5 V Yes; 15 bits including sign -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Connection of actuators for voltage output two-wire connection Yes for voltage output four-wire connection No Load resistance (in nominal range of the output) For voltage outputs, min. 2 k For voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 F Destruction limit for externally applied voltages and currents Voltages at the outputs 30 V Cable length Shielded, max. 200 m Analog value generation for the outputs Oscillation time For resistive load 0.1 ms For capacitive load 1 ms Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03% Temperature error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.005%/K Crosstalk between outputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.05% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.3% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.3% Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No terminal) Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 21 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1 Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes Short-circuit Yes Group error Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics No For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels and voltage supply of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation) Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Environmental conditions Ambient temperature in operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 Horizontal installation, max. 60 Vertical installation, min. 0 Vertical installation, max. 50 Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for PROFINET. Output type Output range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow Underflow Reaction to Substitute CPU STOP value * * * * * 10 V x x x x x x 5 V x x x x x x 0 V to 10 V x x x x x x 1 V to 5 V x x x x x x Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics * x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for PROFIBUS. Output type Output range Deactivated Voltage No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Diagnostics Overflow Underflow Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute value * * * * * * 10 V x x x x x x 5 V x x x x x x 0 V to 10 V x x x x x x 1 V to 5 V x x x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 23 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module. Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Parameters The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Image A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+5 for channels 0 and 1 Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 25 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Codes for output types The following table contains the codes for the output types of the analog output module. You enter this coding in byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for output types Output type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Codes for output ranges The following table contains the codes for the output ranges of the analog output module. You enter these codes in byte x+1 of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for output ranges Output range Code Voltage 10 V 0000 0000 5 V 0000 0001 0 to 10 V 0000 0010 1 to 5 V 0000 0011 Value range for substitute value The following table contains the value ranges for the substitute values. You must enter the corresponding codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure). Output range Permissible value range Voltage 10 V -32512 to 32511 5 V -32512 to 32511 0 to 10 V 0 to 32511 1 to 5 V -6912 to 32511 Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Error transmitting the data record The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors. The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there are errors in the STATUS parameter. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Error code in the STATUS parameter Meaning Solution (hexadecimal) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable * Check the station to determine if the module is plugged in or pulled. * Check assigned values for the parameters of the WREC instruction. DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header information Correct the version, length and number of parameter blocks. DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module. Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 27 B Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 2xU ST analog module. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for all output values at the same nominal range. Analog values are output as fixed point numbers in two's complement. In the following table, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal or hexadecimal units of the analog values. The resolutions 13, 14, 15 and 16 bits including sign are shown. Each analog value is entered left aligned into the ACCU. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Possible resolutions of the analog values Resolution in bits Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 28 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of output ranges B.2 Representation of output ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar range output ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Minimum output value Unipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Minimum output value Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 29 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage output ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage output ranges 10 V and 5 V Values Voltage output range Dec. 118.5149% 117.589% 10 V 5 V 11.76 V 5.88 V Overflow* 11.76 V 5.88 V Overrange Nominal range 32767 7FFF 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 0.003617% 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0% 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -361.7 V -180.8 V -75% -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -100% -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.76 V -5.88 V -32513 80FF -11.76 -5.88 V -32768 8000 -117.593% -118.519% Range Hex. Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 5 Voltage output range 0 V to 10 V Values 118.519% 117.589% Voltage output range Hex. 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange Nominal range 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 10 V 75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 0.003617% 1 1 361.7 V 0% 0 0 0V -1 FFFF 0V -32768 8000 -118.519% Range Dec. Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) 30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges Table B- 6 Voltage output range 1 V to 5 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 118.519% 32767 7FFF 5.70 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 117.589% 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 5V Nominal range 75% 20736 5100 4V 0.003617% 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0% 0 0 1V -1 FFFF 1 V - 144.7 V -6912 E500 0V -6913 E4FF 0V -32768 8000 -25% -118.519% Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 31 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation Guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 09/2016 A5E03576140-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03576140-AD 09/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2016. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation Guide ............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 B Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 18 4.1 Output types and output ranges............................................................................................. 18 4.2 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 19 4.3 Description of parameters ...................................................................................................... 21 4.4 Oversampling ......................................................................................................................... 22 4.5 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 24 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 27 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 27 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 29 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 30 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 31 6.1 A Properties ............................................................................................................................... 11 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 31 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 37 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ...................................................................... 37 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 38 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 43 B.1 Representation of output ranges............................................................................................ 44 B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges .............................................. 45 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges .............................................. 47 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Documentation Guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 7 Documentation Guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Documentation Guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 9 Documentation Guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 View of the AQ 2xU/I HS module Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog output module with 2 outputs - For current output and - Voltage output Output ranges for current output: - 20 mA, resolution 16 bit including sign - 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bit - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 14 bit Output ranges for voltage output: - 10 V, resolution 16 bit including sign - 5 V, resolution 15 bit incl. sign - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bit - 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bit Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Configurable diagnostics (per channel) The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN PROFIenergy Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Basic version Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of 1 V1.0.0 Isochronous mode with send clock up to 250 s 2 V1.1.0 Value status 2 V1.1.0 Oversampling channel 0 2 V1.1.0 Oversampling channel 0 and 1 2 V2.0.0 Isochronous mode with send clock up to 125 s 2 V2.0.1 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Reference identification label Shield connector See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 13 3 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the module with the AQ 2xU/I HS pin assignments for a 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire connection for voltage output. The 3-wire and 4-wire connection are used for the compensation of the voltage drop on the connection cables. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Note You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. Note The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: Current output 2-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for current output Backplane bus interface Microcontroller Sn+ SnRES Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) L+ Output conditioner Color identification label CCxx (optional) M P1, P2, AUX Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) Analog output voltage/current positive, channel n Analog output voltage/current negative, channel n DIAG Sensor cable positive, channel n Sensor cable negative, channel n Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) AQ0, AQ1 Channel status LED (green) F0, F1 PWR Channel fault LED (red) Power LED (green) Qn+ Qn- Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current output 2-wire connection Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 15 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: Voltage output 2-wire and 3-wire connection The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog output module AQ 2xU/I HSon the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage output 3-wire connection for voltage output Output conditioner Sn+ SnRES Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) Microcontroller Backplane bus interface L+ M P1, P2, AUX Color identification label CCxx (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) Analog output voltage/current positive, channel n Analog output voltage/current negative, channel n DIAG AQ0, AQ1 Sensor cable positive, channel n Sensor cable negative, channel n Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) Qn+ Qn- Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for voltage output 2-wire and 3-wire connection Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Connection: Voltage output 2-wire and 4-wire connection The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. 2-wire connection for voltage output 4-wire connection for voltage output Output conditioner Sn+ SnRES Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) Microcontroller Backplane bus interface L+ M P1, P2, AUX Color identification label CCxx (optional) Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function cannot be used for this module) Filter connection supply voltage (only when lightcolored BaseUnit is present) Analog output voltage/current positive, channel n Analog output voltage/current negative, channel n DIAG AQ0, AQ1 Sensor cable positive, channel n Sensor cable negative, channel n Reserve, must remain unused for future function extensions 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Ground Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Diagnostics LED (green, red) Channel status LED (green) F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) Qn+ Qn- Figure 3-3 Wiring and block diagram for voltage output 2-wire and 4-wire connection Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 17 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Output types and output ranges The analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS has the following output ranges: Table 4- 1 Output type Current Voltage Output ranges Output range Resolution 20 mA 16 bit incl. sign 0 to 20 mA 15 bit 4 to 20 mA 14 bit 10 V 16 bit incl. sign 5V 15 bit incl. sign 0 to 10 V 15 bit 1 to 5 V 13 bit You will find the tables of output ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section Representation of analog values (Page 43) and the "Analog value processing" function manual. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AQ 2xU/I HS The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation on an ET 200SP oder an einem ET 200SP Open Controller CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 38). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Sampling rate 1 value/cycle Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ * Disable * Enable Diagnostics: * Short-circuit to ground 1 * Disable Diagnostics: Overflow Diagnostics: Underflow Diagnostics: Wire break2 Output type/range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP 1 value/cycle No Module Module Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel 3 Disable Yes Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Current 4 to 20 mA Yes Channel Channel Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage +/- 5 V * Voltage 0 to 10 V * Voltage 1 to 5 V * Current +/- 20 mA * Current 0 to 20 mA * Current 4 to 20 mA Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Reaction to CPU STOP * Shut down * Keep last value * Output substitute value Substitute value For permissible substitute values for the various output ranges, see Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 38) appendix, Substitute values Codes for substitute values table Potential group * Use potential group of the left module (dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light-colored BaseUnit) Default Reconfiguration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Shut down Yes Channel Module 3 0 Yes Channel Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 1 No diagnostics detection between -0.5 V and +0.5 V (no short-circuit detection) 2 No diagnostics detection between -3 mA and +3 mA (no wire break detection) 3 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes. Note Unused channels A deactivated channel always returns the value "no current or voltage". Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Parameters/address space 4.3 Description of parameters 4.3 Description of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value falls below the underrange or reaches the minimum output value or underflow. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Output type/output range See the section Output types and output ranges (Page 18). Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module at CPU STOP. Substitute value The substitute values are values issued by the outputs (the output) in the event of a CPU STOP. Potential group You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit. A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored BaseUnits. The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 21 Parameters/address space 4.4 Oversampling See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) 4.4 Oversampling Function Oversampling is the output of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles), whereby n sub-cycles correspond to one PROFINET bus cycle. A data packet is transmitted from the controller to the module, which outputs the packet in n constant bus sub-cycles. Oversampling is useful whenever you require output of data with high time resolution but without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles. With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles: Each sub-cycle returns an output value. The minimum PROFINET bus cycle for oversampling is 250 s. You can configure oversampling for: - Channel 0 (1-channel operation) - Channel 0/1 (2-channel operation) The number of sub-cycles can be set as follows: - From 2 to 16 for one channel - From 2 to 8 for two channels Requirement Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set. Configuration You configure oversampling with the following parameter: Sampling rate Note Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the runtime groups of your user program. This will ensure that the data processing in the user program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Parameters/address space 4.4 Oversampling Overview of the operating modes Function Normal operation Oversampling in normal operation 1-channel operation Isochronous mode * Shortest send clock Oversampling 2-channel operation Yes, optional Yes, required 125 s 250 s No Yes Yes * Number of oversampling levels (output rate) - 2 to 16 2 to 8 * Shortest sub-cycle (= shortest sampling time) - 35 s 45 s 10 V x x 0 to 10 V x x 5 V x x 1 to 5 V x x 20 mA x x 0 to 20 mA x x 4 to 20 mA x x Overflow x x Underflow x x Wire break for current x x Short-circuit for voltage x x Load voltage diagnostics x x Value status (QI) x - Reaction to CPU STOP x x 4 bytes 32 bytes Data length Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 23 Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space Chronological sequence The figure shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The output data present in the CPU is output in the data cycle after the next one, distributed across the sub-cycles which are generated on the actual module. n = output values from bus cycle n Figure 4-1 4.5 Oversampling Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog module. Bit 0 and 1 in this byte are assigned to the module. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit =0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, or similar is incorrect. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 2xU/I HS with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-2 Address space of the AQ 2xU/I HS with value status Address space of the AQ 2xU/I HS for oversampling with one channel The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with one channel. Writing always starts from QB x. Only a maximum of 16 sub-cycles are possible. Figure 4-3 Address space of the AQ 2xU/I HS for oversampling with one channel Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 25 Parameters/address space 4.5 Address space Address space of the AQ 2xU/I HS for oversampling with two channels The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with two channels. Writing always starts from QB x. Only a maximum of 8 sub-cycles are possible. Figure 4-4 Address space of the AQ 2xU/I HS for oversampling with two channels Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error displays LED display The figure below shows the LED displays of the AQ 2xU/I HS. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 27 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following table contains the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 30). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status/channel fault LED Table 5- 2 Status/error display of the channel status/channel fault LED Channel status Channel fault Meaning Channel deactivated or no load voltage L+ Off Off Channel activated and no channel diagnostics On Off Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On On On Not permitted (error) PWR LED Table 5- 3 PWR Status display of the PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS supports diagnostics interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events: Short-circuit Overtemperature Wire break High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 29 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5- 4 Error types Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short-circuit (current) 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Overtemperature 4H Thermal overload of the I/O module Reduce the ambient temperature, pay attention to derating Wire break (current) 6H Impedance of actuator circuit too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actua- Connect the cable tor Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate the channel ("Output type" parameter) * Deactivate diagnostics * Connect the channel High limit violated 7H The output value defined by the user program is above the overrange. Correct the output value Low limit violated 8H The output value defined by the user program is below the underrange. Correct the output value Error 9H Internal module error occurred Replace the module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage Channel temporarily unavailable 11H 1FH No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Firmware update is currently in progress or * has been canceled. * The module does not output any process or substitute values in this state. Wait for firmware update Restart the firmware update Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the AQ 2xU/I HS 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1 Product type designation ET 200SP, AQ 2xU/I High Speed General information Firmware version V2.0.1 Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC00 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 SP1 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Operating mode Oversampling Yes; 2 channels per module CiR Configuration in RUN Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible Yes Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V Input current Current consumption (rated value) 45 mA; no load Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.9 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 byte; + 1 byte for QI information (32 bytes in oversampling mode) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 31 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1 Analog outputs Number of analog outputs 2 Voltage output, short-circuit protection Yes Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 45 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 125 s Analog output with oversampling Yes * Values per cycle, max. 16 * Resolution, min. 45 s; (2 channels), 35 s (1 channel) Output ranges, voltage 0 to 10 V Yes; 15 bit 1 V to 5 V Yes; 13 bit -5 V to +5 V Yes; 15 bit incl. sign -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign Output ranges, current 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bit Wiring the actuators for voltage output two-wire connection Yes for voltage output four-wire connection Yes for current output two-wire connection Yes Load resistance (in rated range of the output) For voltage outputs, min. 2 k For voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 F For current outputs, max. 500 For current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH Destruction limit for externally applied voltages and currents Voltages at the outputs 30 V Cable length Shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage output Formation of analog values for the outputs Settling time For resistive load 0.05 ms For capacitive load 0.05 ms; max. 47 nF and 20 m cable length For inductive load 0.05 ms Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1 Errors/accuracies Output ripple (in relation to output range, bandwidth 0 kHz to 50 kHz), (+/-) 0.02% Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03% Temperature error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.003%/K Crosstalk between outputs, max. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03% Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.2% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.2% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.1% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.1% Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes terminal) Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 70 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes; channel-based, only for output type current Short-circuit Yes; channel-based, only for output type voltage Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics display LED Monitoring of supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics Yes Insulation Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 33 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Derating trends with horizontal installation: Figure 6-1 Derating trend current output (horizontal) Figure 6-2 Derating trend voltage output (horizontal) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 35 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Derating trends with vertical installation: Figure 6-3 Derating trend current output (vertical) Figure 6-4 Derating trend voltage trend (vertical) Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Output type Output range No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit Overflow to ground Underflow Wire break Reaction to CPU STOP * * * * * 5 V x x x x - x x 10 V x x x x - x x 1 to 5 V x x x x - x x 0 to 10 V x x x x - x x 20 mA x - x x x x x 0 to 20 mA x - x x x x x 4 to 20 mA x - x x x x x Deactivated Voltage Current Diagnostics * Substitute value * x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Output type Output range Current Wire break Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute value No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground Overflow/ * * * * * * 5 V x x x - x x 10 V x x x - x x 1 to 5 V x x x - x x 0 to 10 V x x x - x x 20 mA x - x x x x 0 to 20 mA x - x x x x 4 to 20 mA x - x x x x Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics Underflow x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 37 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current ranges of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Note Following a firmware update, you need to re-configure the I/O module before you can use the new functions. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart. Note Changing parameters in RUN A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle. STATUS output parameter The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC" instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Structure of data record 128 for entire module Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Module header information The figure below shows the structure of the module header information. Figure A-3 Module header information Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 39 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Module parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 and 1. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-4 Module parameter block Channel header information The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information. Figure A-5 Channel header information Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Channel parameter block The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+5 for channels 0 and 1 Codes for output types The table below contains the codes for the output types of the analog output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x of the channel parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for output types Output type Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Current 0000 0011 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 41 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Codes for output ranges The table below contains the codes for the output ranges of the analog output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+1 of the channel parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for output ranges Output range Code Voltage 10 V 0000 0000 5 V 0000 0001 0 to 10 V 0000 0010 1 to 5 V 0000 0011 Current 20 mA 0000 0000 0 to 20 mA 0000 0001 4 to 20 mA 0000 0010 Codes for substitute values The table below contains the codes for the substitute values. You must enter these codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure). Table A- 3 Codes for substitute values Output range for Permitted substitute value Voltage 10 V -32512 ... +32511 5 V -32512 ... +32511 0 to 10 V 0 ... +32511 1 to 5 V -6912 ... +32511 Current 20 mA -29031 ... +29030 0 to 20 mA 0 ... +29030 4 to 20 mA -692 ... +29030 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD B Representation of analog values This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 2xU/I HS analog output module. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values at the same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed point number in the two's complement. The following table shows the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values. The resolutions 13, 14, 15, and 16 bit including sign are displayed. Each analog value is entered in the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Possible resolutions of the analog values Resolution in bit Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 43 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of output ranges B.1 Representation of output ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar range output ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Minimum output value Unipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Minimum output value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 44 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage output ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage output ranges 10 V and 5 V Values Voltage output range Dec. 118.515% 117.589% 10 V 5 V 11.76 V 5.88 V Overflow* 11.76 V 5.88 V Overrange Nominal range 32767 7FFF 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 0.003617% 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0% 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -361.7 V -180.8 V -75% -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -100% -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.76 V -5.88 V -32513 80FF -11.76 -5.88 V -32768 8000 -117.593% -118.519% Range Hex. Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 5 Voltage output range 0 V to 10 V Values 118.515% 117.589% Voltage output range Hex. 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange Nominal range 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 10 V 75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 0.003617% 1 1 361.7 V 0% 0 0 0V -1 FFFF 0V -32768 8000 -118.519% Range Dec. Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 45 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges Table B- 6 Voltage output range 1 V to 5 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 118.515% 32767 7FFF 5.70 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 117.589% 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 5V Nominal range 75% 20736 5100 4V 0.003617% 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0% 0 0 1V -1 FFFF 1 V - 144.7 V -6912 E500 0V -6913 E4FF 0V -32768 8000 -25% -118.519% Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 46 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current output ranges. Table B- 7 Current output range 20 mA Values Current output range Dec. 118.515% 105% 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -723.4 nA -75% -20736 AF00 -15 mA -100% -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -20 mA - 723.4nA -29031 8E99 -21 mA -29032 8E98 -21 mA -32768 8000 -105% -118.519% Range Hex. Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 8 Current output range 0 to 20 mA Values 118.515% 105% Current output range Hex. 0 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF 0 mA -32768 8000 -118.519% Range Dec. Nominal range Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD 47 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Table B- 9 Current output ranges 4 to 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29377 72C1 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 19008 4A40 16 mA 0.003617% 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0% 0 0 4 mA -1 FFFF 3.9995 mA -692 FD4C 3.6 mA -693 FD4B 3.6 mA -32768 8000 118.515% 106.25% -2.5% -118.519% Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) 48 Manual, 09/2016, A5E03576140-AD SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual Edition 02/2014 Answers for industry. Analog output module ___________________ Preface AQ 2xU/I HF 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record Representation of analog B ___________________ values 02/2014 A5E33062529-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33062529-AA 02/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 3 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 5 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 7 2.1 3 4 5 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 9 3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 10 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 11 4.1 Output type and output ranges ................................................................................................... 11 4.2 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 12 4.3 Explanation of parameters .......................................................................................................... 14 4.4 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 15 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 16 5.1 Status and error displays ............................................................................................................ 16 5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 18 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ...................................................................................................................... 19 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 20 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 24 B A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ........................................................................... 24 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ................................................. 25 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 29 B.1 Representation of output ranges ................................................................................................. 30 B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges ................................................... 31 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges ................................................... 32 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 1 Guide to documentation Introduction This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system consists of a system manual, function manuals and product manuals. The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you during the configuration and programming of your automation system. Overview of documentation for analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF The following table shows additional documentation that you need when using the AQ 2xU/I HF analog output module. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF Topic Documentation System description System manual ET 200SP * distributed I/O system * (http://support.automation.siemens. * com/WW/view/en/58649293) Key contents * Designing interferencefree controllers Analog value processing System diagnostics Application planning Installation Wiring Commissioning Function manual Designing * interference-free controllers * (http://support.automation.siemens. * com/WW/view/en/59193566) Basics Function manual Analog value * processing (http://support.automation.siemens. com/WW/view/en/67989094) * Basics of analog technology (wiring, processing, installation technology) Function manual System * diagnostics * (http://support.automation.siemens. com/WW/view/en/59192926) Electromagnetic compatibility Lightning protection Description/explanation of meaning, e.g., conversion and cycle times, basic error limits, operational limits Overview Diagnostics evaluation of hardware/software Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 5 Guide to documentation Topic Documentation BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits Technical specifications (http://support.automation.siemens. com/WW/view/en/59753521) Key contents Amendments and special Product information on features of the ET 200SP documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens. com/WW/view/en/73021864) Current information not yet documented in the system manuals, function manuals, or product manuals. SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available to download free of charge on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the module AQ 2xU/I HF Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 7 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog output module with 2 outputs Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign Voltage output can be set for each channel Current output can be set for each channel Configurable diagnostics for each channel The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Reconfiguration in RUN PROFIenergy Calibration in runtime Isochronous mode (PROFINET IO only) Value status (PROFINET IO only) You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connection See also For more information on accessories, refer to the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment General pin assignment Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for AQ 2xU/I HF Pin assignment for AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Notes 1 Q0+ 2 Q1+ * 3 RES 4 RES Qn+: Analog output voltage/current (positive), channel n 5 Q0- 6 Q1- * 7 RES 8 RES Qn-: Analog output voltage/current negative, channel n 9 S0+ 10 S1+ * Sn+: Sensor line positive, channel n 11 RES 12 RES * Sn-: Sensor line negative, channel n * RES: Reserved; not connected 13 S0- 14 S1- 15 RES 16 RES L+ 24 VDC M M Voltage 2-wire connection 1 BaseUnits1 Color identification label A0, A1 - Voltage 4-wire Current Usable BaseUnit types, can be identified by the last two digits of the article number. See also "ET 200SP distributed I/O system" system manual. Note The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the configuration. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 9 Wiring 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram Figure 3-1 Block diagram of AQ 2xU/I HF Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Output type and output ranges The following table shows the output type and the respective output ranges. Table 4- 1 Output ranges Output type Output ranges Resolution Current 20 mA 16 bit including sign 0 to 20 mA 15 bit 4 to 20 mA 14 bit 10 V 16 bit including sign 5V 15 bit including sign 0 to 10 V 15 bit 1 to 5 V 13 bit Voltage You can find the tables of output ranges and overflow, overload, etc. in the section Representation of analog values (Page 30) and in the function manual Analog value processing (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67989094). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 11 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AQ 2xU/I HF The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the parameters to the module by means of data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 25). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground 1 Diagnostics: Overflow 3 Diagnostics: Underflow 3 Diagnostics: Wire break 2 Output type/range * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Deactivated * Voltage 10 V * Voltage 5 V * Voltage 0..10 V * Voltage 1..5 V * Current 20 mA * Current 0 - 20 mA * Current 4 - 20 mA GSD file PROFIBUS DP 3 Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Disable Yes Channel Channel Current 4 - 20 mA Yes Channel Channel Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration in RUN Scope with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Reaction to CPU STOP 3 * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value Substitute value For permissible substitute values for the various measuring ranges, see device manual AQ 2xU/I HF, Substitute values Codes for substitute value table Potential group * Use potential group of the left module * Enable new potential group GSD file PROFIBUS DP 3 Turn off Yes Channel Module 0 Yes Channel Channel Use potential group of the left module No Module Module 1 No diagnostics detection between -0.5 and +0.5 V (no short-circuit detection) 2 No diagnostics detection between -3 and +3 mA (no wire break detection) 3 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8 bytes. Note Unused channels "Deactivate" the unused outputs in the parameter assignment. A deactivated output always returns the value "no current or voltage". Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 13 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3 Explanation of parameters Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value falls below the underrange or reaches the minimum output value or underflow. Diagnostics: Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Substitute value The substitute value is the value that the module outputs in case of a CPU STOP. Potential group Specifies that a BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located on this slot (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Address space of the analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 2xU/I HF with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Figure 4-1 Address space of the analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF Configuration options of the AQ 2xU/I HF The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog module. Bits 0 to 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel. Bit = 0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, or similar is incorrect. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 15 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays of the AQ 2xU/I HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel error (red) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 LED display Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Meaning of the LED displays The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 19). Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics On Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Table 5- 2 Status display of Channel status/channel error LED Channel status Channel error Off Off On Off Off On Meaning Channel deactivated or load voltage L+ missing Channel activated and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and channel diagnostics Not permitted (error) On Table 5- 3 On Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 17 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF supports diagnostic error interrupts. Diagnostic error interrupt The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit Overtemperature Wire break Violation of high limit Violation of low limit Error Parameter assignment error Load voltage missing You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module flashes. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Channel temporarily unavailable 1FH Firmware update is being performed. Channel 0 applies to the entire module. The module is currently not performing any measurements. - The channel is currently being calibrated. Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Overtemperature 4H Thermal overload of the I/O module Correct the process wiring Wire break 6H Actuator circuit resistance too high Use a different actuator type or change the wiring, for example, use cables with larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Deactivate the channel ("Measurement type" parameter) * Connect the channel Violation of high limit 7H The output value specified by the user program exceeds the overrange. Correct the output value Violation of low limit 8H The output value specified by the user program falls below the underrange. Correct the output value Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies to the entire module). Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel: Module plugged in does not match the configuration. * Incorrect parameter assignment. Correct the configuration (comparison of preset and actual setup). * Correct the parameter assignment (diagnostics wire break set only with the permitted measuring ranges). Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Load voltage missing 11H Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 19 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of AQ 2xU/I HF 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1 Product type designation AQ 2xU/I HF General information Firmware version V1.0 Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 / V13 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / V5.5 SP4 PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 CiR Configuration in RUN Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes Calibration in RUN possible Yes Installation type/mounting Rack mounting possible Yes Front installation possible Yes Rail mounting possible Yes Supply voltage Type of supply voltage DC Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V Input current Current consumption (rated value) 45 mA; no load Current consumption, max. 90 mA; 2 channels current output 20 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 0.9 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1 Analog outputs Number of analog outputs 2 Voltage output, short-circuit protection Yes Voltage output, short circuit current, max. 45 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 750 s Output ranges, voltage 0 to 10 V Yes; 15 bits 1 to 5 V Yes; 13 bits -5 to +5 V Yes; 15 bits incl. sign -10 to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign Output ranges, current 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits -20 to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits incl. sign 4 to 20 mA Yes; 14 bits Connecting the actuators For voltage output 2-wire connection Yes For voltage output 4-wire connection Yes For current output 2-wire connection Yes Load resistance (in nominal range of the output) For voltage outputs, min. 2 k For voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 F For current outputs, max. 500 For current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH Destruction limit for externally applied voltages and currents Voltages at the outputs 30 V Cable length Cable length shielded, max. 200 m; 1000 m for current output Analog value generation Settling time For resistive load 0.05 ms For capacitive load 0.05 ms; max. 47 nF and 20 m cable length For inductive load 0.05 ms Errors/accuracies Output ripple (in relation to output range, bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz), (+/-) 0.02% Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03% Temperature error (in relation to output range) 0.003% Crosstalk between outputs, max. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03% Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 21 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1 Operational limit in entire temperature range Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.2% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.2% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.1% Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.1% Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 500 s Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 750 s Jitter, max. 5 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostic error interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes; channel-based, only for output type current Short-circuit Yes; channel-based, only for output type voltage Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics indicator LED Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation channels Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC (basic insulation) Insulation Insulation tested with 707 VDC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Technical specifications Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 23 A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFINET. Measurement type Measuring range Underflow Overflow Wire break Short-circuit to ground Missing supply voltage L+ Deactivated * * * * * * Voltage 10 V x x - x x 5 V x x - x x 0 to 10 V x x - x x 1 to 5 V x x - x x 20 mA x x x - x 0 to 20 mA x x x - x 4 to 20 mA x x x - x Current Diagnostics x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 24 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and measuring range for PROFIBUS. Measurement type Measuring range Deactivated Voltage Diagnostics Underflow / overflow Wire break Load voltage L+ Short-circuit to ground * * * * * 10 V x - x x 5 V x - x x 0 to 10 V x - x x 1 to 5 V x - x x Current 20 mA x x x - Current (2-wire connection) 0 to 20 mA x x x - 4 to 20 mA x x x - x = property is allowed, - = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. Parameter assignment in the user program The module parameter settings can be changed in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 25 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 26 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 1. You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". * x = 2 + (channel number x 6); channel number = 0 to 1 Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+5 for channel 0 and 1 Codes for output type The following table contains the codes for the output types of the analog output module. You must enter these codes in byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for output type Output range for voltage Code Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Current 0000 0011 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 27 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Codes for output range The following table contains the codes for the output ranges of the analog output module. You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for output range Output range for voltage Code 10 V 0000 0000 5 V 0000 0001 0 to 10 V 0000 0010 1 to 5 V 0000 0011 Output range for current Code 20 mA 0000 0000 0 to 20 mA 0000 0001 4 to 20 mA 0000 0010 Codes for substitute value The following table contains the codes for the substitute values. You must enter these codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure). Table A- 3 Codes for substitute value Output range for voltage and current Valid substitute value 10 V -32512 to 32511 5 V -32512 to 32511 0 to 10 V 0 to 32511 1 to 5 V -6912 to 32511 20 mA -29031 to 29030 0 to 20 mA 0 to 29030 4 to 20 mA -692 to 29376 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 28 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA B Representation of analog values This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 2xU/I HF analog module. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for all output values at the same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed point number in the two's complement. The resolutions 13, 14, 15, and 16 bit including sign are displayed. Each analog value is entered in the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Possible resolutions of the analog values Resolution in bits Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 29 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges B.1 Representation of output ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar range output ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Minimum output value Unipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Minimum output value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 30 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage output ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage output ranges 10 V and 5 V Values 118.515% 117.589% Voltage output range Hex. 10 V 5 V 32767 7FFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overrange Nominal range 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 0.003617% 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0% 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -361.7 V -180.8 V -75% -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -100% -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.76 V -5.88 V -32513 80FF -11.76 -5.88 V -32768 8000 -117.593% -118.519% Range Dec. Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 5 Voltage output range 0 V to 10 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range 75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 0.003617% 1 1 361.7 V 0% 0 0 0V -1 FFFF 0V -32768 8000 118.519% 117.589% -118.519% Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 31 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Table B- 6 Voltage output range 1 V to 5 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 32767 7FFF 5.70 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100% 27648 6C00 5V Nominal range 75% 20736 5100 4V 0.003617% 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0% 0 0 1V -1 FFFF 1 V - 144.7 V -6912 E500 0V -6913 E4FF 0V -32768 8000 118.519% 117.589% -25% -118.519% Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current output ranges. Table B- 7 Current output range 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -723.4 nA -75% -20736 AF00 -15 mA -100% -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -20 mA + 723.4 nA -29031 8E99 -21 mA -29032 8E98 -21 mA -32768 8000 118.5149% 105% -105% -118.519% Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) 32 Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Table B- 8 Current output range 0 to 20 mA Values 118.5149% 105% Current output range Hex. 0 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF 0 mA -32768 8000 -118.519% Range Dec. Nominal range Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 9 Current output ranges 4 to 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29377 72C1 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA 75% 19008 4A40 16 mA 0.003617% 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0% 0 0 4 mA -1 FFFF 3.9995 mA -692 FD4C 3.6 mA -693 FD4B 3.6 mA -32768 8000 118.5149% 106.25% -2.5% -118.519% Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1) Manual, 02/2014, A5E33062529-AA 33 Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST ___________________ Preface (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ Product overview ET 200SP Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual 3 ___________________ Wiring up 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space ___________________ 5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ___________________ 6 Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record Representation of analog ___________________ B values 03/2016 A5E03573365-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03573365-AD 04/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2016. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Changes compared to previous version Changes described in this manual, compared to the edition 07/2014: 3-wire connection for voltage output Derating trend for current output for modules as of hardware version FS 06. Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 4 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 4 5 6 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14 3.1 Terminal assignment .............................................................................................................. 14 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 15 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Output ranges ........................................................................................................................ 16 4.2 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17 4.3 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19 4.4 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23 5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 24 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 25 6.1 A B Properties ............................................................................................................................... 11 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 25 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 30 A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ...................................................................... 30 A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 31 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 34 B.1 Representation of output ranges............................................................................................ 35 B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges .............................................. 36 B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges .............................................. 37 Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 6 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 7 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 8 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 10 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 View of the module Image 2-1 View of the module AQ 4xU/I ST Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: Analog output module with 4 outputs - For current output and - voltage output Output range for current output: - 20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign - 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits - 4 to 20 mA, resolution 14 bits Output range for voltage output: - 10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign - 5 V, resolution 15 bits including sign - 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits - 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+ Configurable diagnostics per module The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Configuration in RUN PROFIenergy Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions Function Value status Product version of the module as of Firmware version of the module as of 1 V1.1.0 You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file. Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 12 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector See also You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 13 3 Wiring up 3.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment Terminal assignment for AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Explanation 1 Q0+ 3 Q2+ 5 7 2 Q1+ * 4 Q3+ Q0- 6 Q1- Q2- 8 Q3- A0 Qn+: Analog output voltage/current A1 (positive), channel n 9 S0+ 10 S1+ * 11 S2+ 12 S3+ 13 S0- 14 S1- Qn-: Analog output voltage/current (negative), channel n 15 S2- 16 S3- * L+ 24 VDC M M Sn+: Sensor line positive, channel n * Sn-: Sensor line negative, channel n Voltage 2-wire connection 1 Voltage 3-wire connection Voltage 4-wire connection BaseUnit1 Color identification label --- Current Usable BaseUnit types, can be identified by the last two digits of the article number. Note The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Also keep this in mind during the configuration. You will find additional information on the BaseUnit types in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 14 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Wiring up 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram 3.2 Schematic circuit diagram Schematic circuit diagram Image 3-1 Schematic circuit diagram for AQ 4xU/I ST Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Output ranges The analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST has the following measuring ranges: Table 4- 1 Output type Current Voltage Output ranges Output ranges Resolution 20 mA 16 bits including sign 0 to 20 mA 15 bits 4 to 20 mA 14 bits 10 V 16 bits including sign 5 V 15 bits including sign 0 to 10 V 15 bits 1 to 5 V 13 bits The tables of the output ranges, overflow, overrange, etc. can be found in section Representation of analog values (Page 34). Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 16 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters 4.2 Parameters Parameters of the AQ 4xU/I ST The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: Central operation with an S7-1500 CPU Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 31). The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 2 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Diagnostics: Short-circuit1 Diagnostics Overflow Diagnostics Underflow Diagnostics wire break2 Output type/range Reaction to CPU STOP * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * deactivated * Voltage +/- 10 V * Voltage +/- 5 V * Voltage 0..10 V * Voltage 1..5 V * Current +/- 20 mA * Current 0 - 20 mA * Current 4 - 20 mA * Turn off * Keep last value * Output substitute value GSD file PROFIBUS DP Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Disable yes Module Module Current 4 20 mA yes Channel Channel Turn off yes Channel Module Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Effective range with configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file PROFINET IO Substitute value For permissible substitute values for the various output ranges, see appendix Parameter data record (Page 30), Substitute values Codes for substitute value table Potential group * Use potential group of the left module * Allow new potential group GSD file PROFIBUS DP 0 yes Channel Channel Use potential group of the left module no Module Module 1 no diagnostics detection between -0.5 V and +0.5 V (no short-circuit detection) 2 no diagnostics detection between -3 mA and +3 mA (no wire break detection) Note Unused channels "Disable" the unused channels in the parameter assignment. This improves the temperature characteristics of the module, see Derating, section Technical specifications (Page 25). A disabled channel always returns the value "no current or voltage". Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 18 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics no supply voltage L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics: Short-circuit Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs. Diagnostics overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange, falls below the minimum output value or reaches underflow. Diagnostics wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken. Output type / output range See section Output ranges (Page 16) Reaction to CPU STOP Determines the behavior of the module at CPU STOP. Substitute value The substitute value is the value that the module outputs in case of a CPU STOP. Potential group Specifies that a BaseUnit with voltage supply feed-in is located in this slot (see system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 19 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options The following configurations are possible: Configuration 1: Without value status Configuration 2: With value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide information about the validity of the analog value. Bit = 1: There are no faults/errors on the module. Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module. If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0. Address space The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 4xU/I ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled. Image 4-1 Address space of the AQ 4xU/I ST with value status Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 20 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 5 Status and error display LED display The figure below shows the LED displays of the AQ 4xU/I ST. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) PWR (green) Image 5-1 LED display Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 21 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 24). DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display DIAG LED Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK off Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics on Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics Flashes Channel status LED Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED Channel status LED Meaning Channel disabled off Channel enabled on PWR LED Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED PWR LED Meaning No supply voltage L+ off Supply voltage L+ present on Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 22 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2 Interrupts The analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostics interrupt The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events: Channel temporarily unavailable Short-circuit (voltage) Overtemperature Line break (current) High limit violated Low limit violated Error Parameter assignment error No load voltage Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 23 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module flashes. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Channel temporarily unavailable 1FH Firmware being updated. The module is currently not performing any outputs. - The channel is currently being calibrated. Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring Overtemperature 4H Thermal overload of the I/O module Correct the process wiring Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high. Use a different actuator type or wire differently, e.g. use cables with a larger cross-section Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable Channel not connected (open) * Disable the channel ("output type" parameter) * Connect the channel High limit violated 7H The output value specified by the user program exceeds the overrange. Correct the output value Low limit violated 8H The output value specified by the user program is below the underrange. Correct the output value Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module Parameter assignment error 10H * The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel. * Incorrect parameter assignment. No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 24 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of AQ 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 Product type designation AQ 4xU/I ST General information Firmware version V1.1 Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification label CC00 Product function I&M data Yes Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V11 SP2 / V13 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / - PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / - CiR Configuration in RUN Configuration in RUN possible Yes Installation type/mounting Rack mounting possible Yes Front installation possible Yes Rail mounting possible Yes Wall/direct mounting possible No Supply voltage Type of supply voltage DC Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 150 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Address space per module Address space per module, max. 8 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 Analog outputs Number of analog outputs 4 Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 45 mA Cycle time (all channels), min. 5 ms Output ranges, voltage 0 to 10 V Yes; 15 bits 1 to 5 V Yes; 13 bits -5 to +5 V Yes; 15 bits including sign -10 to +10 V Yes; 16 bits including sign Output ranges, current 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits -20 to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits including sign 4 to 20 mA Yes; 14 bits Connection of actuators for voltage output two-wire connection Yes for voltage output three-wire connection Yes for voltage output four-wire connection Yes for current output two-wire connection Yes Load resistance (in nominal range of the output) For voltage outputs, min. 2 k For voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 F For current outputs, max. 500 For current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH Destruction limit for externally applied voltages and currents Voltages at the outputs 30 V Cable length Cable length shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage output Analog value formation Oscillation time For resistive load 0.1 ms For capacitive load 1 ms For inductive load 0.5 ms Errors/accuracies Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03 % Temperature error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.005 %/K Crosstalk between outputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 C (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.05 % Operational limit in the entire temperature range Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5 % Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5 % Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 26 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.3 % Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.3 % Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values can be applied Yes Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt Yes Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Wire break Yes Short-circuit Yes Overflow/underflow Yes Diagnostics display LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation of channels Between the channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electron- Yes ics Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC (basic isolation) Insulation Insulation tested with 707 VDC (type test) Environmental conditions Operating temperature Horizontal installation, min. 0 Horizontal installation, max. 60 Vertical installation, min. 0 Vertical installation, max. 50 Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 31 g Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 27 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Derating trend for permitted load during power output and horizontal mounting position: Image 6-1 Derating trend current output (horizontal) Derating trend for permitted load during power output and vertical mounting position: Image 6-2 Derating trend current output (vertical) Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 28 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Dimension drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 29 A Parameter data record A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some parameters are dependent on each other. Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for PROFINET. Output type Output range deactivated Voltage Current Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Overflow Underflow Wire break Reaction to CPU STOP * * * * * * Substitute value * 5 V x x x x - x x 10 V x x x x - x x 1..5 V x x x x - x x 0..10 V x x x x - x x 20 mA x - x x x x x 0..20 mA x - x x x x x 4..20 mA x - x x x x x x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for PROFIBUS. Output type Output range Current Wire break Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute value No supply voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Overflow/ * * * * * * 5 V x x x - x x 10 V x x x - x x 1..5 V x x x - x x 0..10 V x x x - x x 20 mA x - x x x x 0..20 mA x - x x x x 4..20 mA x - x x x x deactivated Voltage Diagnostics Underflow x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 30 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Parameter assignment in the user program The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels). Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Structure of data record 128 Note Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module. Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 31 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Image A-2 Header information Parameters The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Image A-3 Structure byte x up to x+5 for the channel 0 to 3 Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 32 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record Codes for output type The following table contains the codes for the output types of the analog output module. You enter this coding in byte x (see previous figure). Table A- 1 Codes for output type Output type Coding Deactivated 0000 0000 Voltage 0000 0001 Current 0000 0011 Codes for output range The following table contains the codes for the output ranges of the analog output module. You enter these codes in byte x+1 of data record 128 (see previous figure). Table A- 2 Codes for output range Output range Coding Voltage 10 V 0000 0000 5 V 0000 0001 0 to 10 V 0000 0010 1 to 5 V 0000 0011 Current 20 mA 0000 0000 0 to 20 mA 0000 0001 4 to 20 mA 0000 0010 Codes for substitute value The following table contains the codes for the substitute values. You enter these codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure). Output range Permissible substitute value Voltage 10 V -32512 to 32511 5 V -32512 to 32511 0 to 10 V 0 to 32511 1 to 5 V -6912 to 32511 Current 20 mA -29031 to 29030 0 to 20 mA 0 to 29030 4 to 20 mA -692 to 29376 Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 33 B Representation of analog values This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges that you can use with the analog module AQ 4xU/I ST. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for all output values at the same nominal range. Analog values are output as fixed point numbers in two's complement. In the following table, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal or hexadecimal units of the analog values. The resolutions 14, 15 and 16 bits including sign are shown. Each analog value is entered in the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0". Table B- 1 Possible resolutions of the analog values Resolution in bits Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 34 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of output ranges B.1 Representation of output ranges In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar range output ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Table B- 2 Dec. value Bipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table B- 3 Dec. value Nominal range Underrange Minimum output value Unipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output value 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range Minimum output value Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 35 Representation of analog values B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage output ranges. Table B- 4 Voltage output ranges 10 V and 5 V Values 118.5149 % 117.589 % Voltage output range Hex. 10 V 5 V 32767 7FFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overrange Nominal range 27649 6C01 100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 0% 0 0 0V 0V -1 FFFF -361.7 V -180.8 V -75 % -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V -100 % -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V -27649 93FF -32512 8100 -11.76 V -5.88 V -32513 80FF -11.76 -5.88 V -32768 8000 -117.593 % -118.519 % Range Dec. Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 5 Voltage output range 0 V to 10 V Values 118.519 % 117.589 % Voltage output range Hex. 0 to 10 V 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange Nominal range 27649 6C01 100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 V 0% 0 0 0V -1 FFFF 0V -32768 8000 -118.519 % Range Dec. Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 36 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Table B- 6 Voltage output range 1 V to 5 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 118.519 % 32767 7FFF 5.70 V Overflow* 32512 7F00 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100 % 27648 6C00 5V Nominal range 75 % 20736 5100 4V 0.003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0% 0 0 1V -1 FFFF 1 V - 144.7 V -6912 E500 0V -6913 E4FF 0V -32768 8000 -25 % -118.519 % Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current output ranges. Table B- 7 Current output range 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF -723.4 nA -75 % -20736 AF00 -15 mA -100 % -27648 9400 -20 mA -27649 93FF -20 mA + 723.4 nA -29031 8E99 -21 mA -29032 8E98 -21 mA -32768 8000 118.5149 % 105 % -105 % -118.519 % Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 37 Representation of analog values B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Table B- 8 Current output range 0 to 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29031 7167 105 % 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA 100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA -1 FFFF 0 mA -32768 8000 -118.519 % Nominal range Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Table B- 9 Current output ranges 4 to 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow* 29377 72C1 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA 100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 75 % 19008 4A40 16 mA 0.003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0% 0 0 4 mA -1 FFFF 3.9995 mA -2.5 % -692 FD4C 3.6 mA -693 FD4B 3.6 mA -118.519 % -32768 8000 118.5149 % 106.25 % Nominal range Underrange Underflow* * outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) 38 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Configuring/address space Interrupts/diagnostic 5 ___________________ messages 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 06/2018 A5E33002339-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33002339-AC 05/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual includes module-specific information on wiring, diagnostics and the technical specifications of the technology module. General information regarding design and commissioning of the ET 200SP is available in the ET 200SP system manual. The counting and measuring functions of the TM Count 1x24V technology module are described in more detail in the Counting, Measurement and Position Detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) function manual. Conventions Please observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 3 Preface Open Source Software Open-source software is used in the firmware of the product described. Open Source Software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the product described, including the open-source software contained in it, pursuant to the conditions applicable to the product. Siemens accepts no liability for the use of the open source software over and above the intended program sequence, or for any faults caused by modifications to the software. For legal reasons, we are obliged to publish the original text of the license conditions and copyright notices. Please read the information on this on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740777). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 4 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 3 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 Functions ................................................................................................................................15 Detection of counting signals ..................................................................................................15 Measured value determination ...............................................................................................16 Switching the outputs at comparison values ..........................................................................16 Position input for Motion Control .............................................................................................17 Fast Mode ...............................................................................................................................17 Additional functions .................................................................................................................18 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 19 3.1 4 Pin assignment and block diagram .........................................................................................19 Configuring/address space .................................................................................................................... 23 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object ...........................................23 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................23 Reaction to CPU STOP ..........................................................................................................24 Parameter setting....................................................................................................................24 Address space ........................................................................................................................30 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................31 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object ..........................................................32 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................32 Parameter setting....................................................................................................................34 Address space ........................................................................................................................36 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................36 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 4.3.6 Manual operation (without technology object) ........................................................................38 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................38 Reaction to CPU STOP ..........................................................................................................40 Parameter setting....................................................................................................................41 Address space ........................................................................................................................47 Control and feedback interface ...............................................................................................47 Assignment of the control interface ........................................................................................47 Assignment of the feedback interface.....................................................................................50 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................53 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 5 Table of contents 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 5 Fast Mode .............................................................................................................................. 54 Configuring ............................................................................................................................. 55 Reaction to CPU STOP ......................................................................................................... 57 Parameter setting ................................................................................................................... 57 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 62 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 71 Assignment of the feedback interface .................................................................................... 71 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 73 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 74 5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 74 5.2 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 77 5.3 Hardware interrupts ............................................................................................................... 81 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 83 A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 91 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 91 A.2 Parameter validation error ................................................................................................... 101 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 6 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 7 Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 8 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 10 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 Firmware version This manual describes the properties of the module with firmware version V1.3. View of the module Module type and designation LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for encoder supply Figure 2-1 LED for supply voltage Function class Module type color coding Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color-coded labels Article number View of the TM Count 1x24V module Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The TM Count 1x24V technology module has the following properties: Technical properties - One channel - Interfaces: 24 V encoder signals A, B and N from sourcing, sinking or push-pull encoders and sensors 24 V encoder supply, short-circuit-proof DI0, DI1 and DI2 digital input signals DQ0 and DQ1 digital output signals Supply voltage L+ - Count range: 32 bits - Monitoring of encoder signals for wire break - Hardware interrupts configurable - Input filters for suppression of interferences at encoder inputs and digital inputs can be configured Supported encoder/signal types - 24 V incremental encoder with N signal - 24 V incremental encoder without N signal - 24 V pulse encoder with direction signal - 24 V pulse encoder without direction signal - 24 V pulse encoder with up/down counting signal Supported system functions - Isochronous mode - Firmware update - Identification data I&M Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 12 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Product overview 2.1 Properties The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function Firmware version of module Configurable as of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 GSD PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X -- I&M identification data V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X X Parameter reassignment in RUN V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X X Isochronous mode V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 -- -- Counting/measuring V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X X Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object V1.0 or higher V13 -- -- -- Position input for "Motion Control" technology object V1.0 or higher V13 -- -- -- Central operation on CPU 151xSP V1.1 or higher V13 SP1 -- -- -- Fast Mode V1.2 or higher V14 SP1 V5.6 X X or V14 with HSP0199 or V5.5 SP4 with HSP0240 V5.0 or V5.5 SP3 with HSP0240 V1.0 Operating with "Measuring input" technology object V1.3 or higher V15 with HSP0256 -- -- -- Position value range of 32 bits V1.3 or higher V15 with HSP0256 -- X X Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories can be used with the module and are not included in the scope of delivery: Labeling strip Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connector A BaseUnit of the A0 type is required to operate the technology module. You can find an overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the technology module in the product information for the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864). For detailed information on the installation procedure, refer to the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 14 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 Detection of counting signals Counting is the detecting and adding up of events. The counters of the technology module detect encoder signals and pulses and evaluate them accordingly. The count direction can be specified using encoder or pulse signals or through the user program. You can control the counting processes with the digital inputs. In addition, you can read the signal state of the respective digital input via the feedback interface. You can specify the counter characteristics using the functions described below. Counting limits The counting limits define the counter value range used. The counting limits are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user program. You can configure the behavior of the counter at the counting limits. Start value You can configure a start value within the counting limits. The start value can be modified during runtime with the user program. Gate control You can define the time window in which the count signals are acquired with the hardware gate (HW gate) and software gate (SW gate). Capture (Latch) You can configure an external reference signal edge that triggers the saving of the current counter value as Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Both edges of a digital input Rising edge of the N signal at the encoder input The "Frequency of Capture function" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. Measuring input If you use Position input for Motion Control (Page 17), you can use the "Measuring input" technology object to execute a measuring input function with a hardware digital input. Hardware interrupts The technology module can trigger a hardware interrupt in the CPU, for example, if a comparison event occurs, in the event of overflow or underflow, in the event of a zero crossing of the counter and/or of a change of count direction (direction reversal). You can specify which events during operation are to trigger a hardware interrupt. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Measured value determination The following high-accuracy measurement functions are available (accuracy up to 100 ppm): Frequency measurement with the unit of hertz Period measurement with the unit of seconds Velocity measurement with a flexibly adaptable unit Update time You can configure the interval at which the technology module updates the measured values cyclically as the update time. Gate control You can define the time window in which the count signals are acquired with the hardware gate (HW gate) and software gate (SW gate). 2.2.3 Switching the outputs at comparison values The available digital outputs DQ0 and DQ1 can be directly activated/switched by the specified comparison values or via the user program. The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user program. This enables very fast reaction times to be achieved. Comparison values in the Counting mode You define two comparison values in the Counting mode. If the current counter value meets the configured comparison condition, the corresponding digital output can be set to directly initiate control processes in the process. Comparison values in the Measuring mode You define two comparison values in the Measuring mode. If the current measured value meets the configured comparison condition, the corresponding digital output can be set to directly initiate control processes in the process. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 16 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.4 Position input for Motion Control You can use the technology module for position detection for the following axis technology objects of S7-1500 Motion Control : TO_PositioningAxis TO_SynchronousAxis TO_ExternalEncoder In this operating mode, you can use the measuring input technology object (TO_MeasuringInput) to execute a measuring input function with hardware digital input DI1. Additional information You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in the following: Function manual S7-1500 Motion Control available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59381279) Function manual S7-1500T Motion Control available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) 2.2.5 Fast Mode You can use the technology module in Fast Mode for very fast acquisition of counter or position value with compressed functionality. A reduced feedback interface but no control interface is available in Fast Mode. This allows you to use a shorter send clock for the CPU. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 17 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.6 Additional functions Synchronization You can configure the edge of an external reference signal that loads the counter with the specified start value. The following external signals can trigger a synchronization: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input depending on the level of the assigned digital input The "Frequency of synchronization" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. Hysteresis You can specify a hysteresis for the comparison values within which a digital output will be prevented from switching again. Diagnostic interrupt The technology module can trigger diagnostic interrupts. You enable the diagnostic interrupts in the device configuration. Input filter To suppress interference, you can configure an input filter for the 24 V encoder inputs and for the digital inputs. Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. This system function enables counter values and measured values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 18 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment and block diagram Das TM Count 1x24V is used with a BaseUnit of type A0 (article number 6ES7193-6BPx00xA0). You connect the encoder signals, the digital input and output signals and the encoder supplies to the BaseUnit of the technology module. The supply voltage feed on the light BaseUnit BU...D of the associated potential group supplies the module and the digital outputs, and generates the encoder supply voltage. BaseUnit The BaseUnit is not included in the scope of delivery of the module and must be ordered separately. You can find an overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the technology module in the product information for the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864). You can find information about selecting a suitable BaseUnit in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) device manual. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit, connecting cable shields, etc. in the Connecting section of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Supply voltage L+/M You connect the supply voltage to terminals L+ and M on a light BaseUnit. For a dark BaseUnit, the supply voltage of the module to the left is used. An internal protection circuit protects the technology module from reverse polarity of the supply voltage. The technology module monitors whether the supply voltage is connected. Encoder supply For supplying the encoders and sensors connected to the digital inputs, the technology module provides a 24 V DC supply voltage at output 24VDC (terminal 15) with reference to M (terminals 12, 14 and 16). The voltage is monitored for short-circuit and overload. Digital inputs DI0, DI1 and DI2 The digital inputs are used for gate control, synchronization and the Capture function. The digital inputs are not isolated from each other. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 19 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment and block diagram Input delay for digital inputs In order to suppress noise you can configure an input delay for the digital inputs. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you must use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Digital outputs DQ0 and DQ1 The digital outputs are not isolated from each other. The digital outputs are 24 V sourcing outputs in reference to M and can carry a rated load current of 0.5 A. They are protected against overload and short-circuit. Relays and contactors can be directly connected without an external protective circuit. You can find information on the maximum possible operating frequencies and the inductive loads connected to the digital outputs in section Technical specifications (Page 83). 24 V encoder signals/count signals The 24 V encoder signals are designated with the letters A, B and N. You can connect the following encoder types: Incremental encoder with N signal: The A, B and N signals are connected using the correspondingly marked terminals. The A and B signals are the two 90 phase-shifted incremental signals. N is the zero mark signal that supplies one pulse per revolution. Incremental encoder without N signal: The A and B signals are connected using the correspondingly marked terminals. The A and B signals are the two 90 phase-shifted incremental signals. The N terminal remains unconnected. Pulse encoder without direction signal: The counting signal is connected to the A terminal. The count direction can be specified via the control interface. The B and N terminals remain unconnected. Pulse encoder with direction signal: The counting signal is connected to the A terminal. The direction signal is connected to the B terminal. Counting down takes place at a high level of the direction signal. The N terminal remains unconnected. Pulse encoder with up/down counting signal: The up counting signal is connected to the A terminal. The down counting signal is connected to the B terminal. The N terminal remains unconnected. The inputs are not isolated from each other. The inputs are isolated from the backplane bus. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 20 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment and block diagram You can connect the following encoders or sensors to the A, B and N inputs: Sourcing output: The A, B and N inputs are switched by the encoder or sensor to 24VDC . Sinking output: The A, B and N inputs are switched by the encoder or sensor to ground M . Push-pull: The A, B and N inputs are switched by the encoder or sensor alternately to 24VDC and ground M . Monitoring for wire break is possible with this type of encoder/sensor. The procedure of the wire break detection (alternate switching) requires that, in the event of a fault (wire break), the count can also change without a counting pulse until the wire break is detected. Pin assignment of the BaseUnit The table below shows the pin assignment, using the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B as an example. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment of the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B Designation 24 V incremental encoder with signal N without signal N Signal name 24 V pulse encoder with direction signal View Signal name Designation without direction signal up/down Encoder signal A Counting signal A Up counting signal A A 1 2 DI0 Digital input DI0 Encoder signal B Direction signal B Down counting signal B B 3 4 DI1 Digital input DI1 N 5 6 DI2 Digital input DI2 -- -- 7 8 DQ0 Digital output DQ0 -- -- 9 10 DQ1 Digital output DQ1 -- -- 11 12 M -- -- 13 14 M Encoder supply 24 V DC 24VDC 15 16 M Supply voltage DC 24 V L+ Encoder signal N -- -- M Ground for encoder supply, digital inputs and digital outputs Ground for supply voltage Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 21 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment and block diagram Block diagram The figure below shows the block diagram of the technology module. You must ground the shields of the cables between encoder and technology module both through the shield terminal on the BaseUnit (shield bracket and terminal) and also on the encoder. Electrical isolation Shield terminal on the BaseUnit Technology Backplane bus interface module of the technology module Backplane bus Input filter Incremental encoder with signal N Figure 3-1 Block diagram with incremental encoder Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 22 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 4 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The technology object is used to control and monitor the functions of the technology module. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Central operation with a CPU 151xSP Components required Configuration software In the user program High_Speed_Counter instruction * S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): * TM Count 1x24V * Device configuration with hardware configuration * Parameter setting with High_Speed_Counter technology object Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * * S7-1500 automation system ET 200SP distributed I/O system TM Count 1x24V Additional information You can find a detailed description of the counting and measurement functions and their configuration in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 23 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.2 Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP for each channel in the basic parameters of the device configuration. Table 4- 1 Response of technology module to CPU STOP Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the start value and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration" is set at CPU stop, the digital output is reset after the pulse duration elapses. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the start value and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. 4.1.3 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. When parameters are assigned in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and data record 128 (Page 91). You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration in the hardware configuration. "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Insert the High_Speed_Counter technology object from the project tree in folder "Technology objects > Add new object > Counting and measurement". You can find information on configuring with a technology object in function manual Counting, measurement and position detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). 4. Open the configuration of the High_Speed_Counter technology object, e.g. using the Configuration button in the instruction for the technology object. 5. Set the parameters of the technology object. 6. Download the project to the CPU. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 24 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameters of the TM Count 1x24V The following parameter settings are possible in the hardware configuration: Table 4- 2 Settable parameters and their default setting Parameter Potential group Value range * Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) * Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: New Capture value available * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Synchronization of the counter by an external signal * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Gate start * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Gate stop * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Overflow (high counting limit violated) * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt:Underflow (low counting limit violated) * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Direction reversal * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Zero crossing * Deactivated * Activated Reaction to CPU STOP Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) No Module Output substitute value Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 25 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Value range Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ0 occurred * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ1 occurred * Deactivated * Activated Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 26 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object The following parameter settings are possible in the technology object: Table 4- 3 Settable parameters and their default setting Parameter Signal type Value range * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) * Single * Double * Quadruple Invert direction (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Filter frequency for counter inputs * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * Sourcing output * Sinking output * Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) * No reaction to signal N * Synchronization at signal N * Capture at signal N * Once * Periodic Signal evaluation for counter inputs Sensor type Reaction to signal N Frequency of synchronization Frequency of Capture func- * tion * Once Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Pulse (A) and direction (B) Yes Channel Single Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel 200 kHz Yes Channel Sourcing output Yes Channel No reaction to signal N Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Periodic Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 27 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Counting high limit Value range Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 Yes Channel Start value -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Counting low limit -2147483648...2147483647 -2147483648 Yes Channel Reaction to violation of a counting limit * Stop counting Continue counting Yes Channel * Continue counting Reset when counting limit is violated * To opposite counting limit Yes Channel * To start value To opposite counting limit * Set to start value Yes Channel * Continue with current value Continue with current value * Gate start/stop (level-triggered) Yes Channel * Gate start (edge-triggered) * Gate stop (edge-triggered) * Synchronization * Enable synchronization at signal N * Capture * Digital input without function 0.1 ms Yes Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Active with high level Yes Channel Continue counting Yes Channel Reaction to gate start Set function of DI Input delay for digital inputs * Edge selection for DI Select level for DI Behavior of counter value after Capture with DI None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * At rising edge * At falling edge * At rising and falling edge * Active with high level * Active with low level * Continue counting * Set to start value and continue counting * DI0: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) * DI1: Digital input without function * DI2: Digital input without function Comparison value 0 -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Comparison value 1 -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 28 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Operating mode Set output Count direction of DQ function Value range * Use count value as reference * Use measured value as reference * Use by user program * Between comparison value and high limit / measured value >= comparison value * Between comparison value and low limit / measured value <= comparison value * At comparison value for a pulse duration * After set command from CPU until comparison value * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 * Up * Down * In both directions Pulse duration [ms/10] 0...65535 Substitute value for DQ0 * 0 * 1 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ1 Hysteresis (in increments) Measured variable 0...255 * Frequency * Period * Velocity Update time [ms] of measuring function 0...25000 Time base for velocity measurement * 1 ms * 10 ms * 100 ms Increments per unit * 1s * 60 s 1...65535 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Use count value as reference No Channel DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel In both directions Yes Channel 5000 (corresponds to 0.5 s) Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Between comparison value and high limit 0 Yes Channel Frequency Yes Channel 10 Yes Channel 60 s Yes Channel 1 Yes Channel Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 29 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection in sections Basic parameters and Configuring the High_Speed_Counter available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). 4.1.4 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 4 Range Size of input and output addresses of the TM Count 1x24V when operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Inputs Outputs 16 bytes 12 bytes Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 30 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.5 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. This system function enables counter values and measured values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. Use an OB of type "Synchronous Cycle" (e.g. OB61) in this operating mode. The High_Speed_Counter instruction is called in the assigned OB. The update time for the measured value is synchronized with the system cycle in a suitable ratio and, if necessary, adapted in length. If you set "0", the measured value is updated once per system cycle. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the counter value and the measured value as well as status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the "Filter frequency" parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 31 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object 4.2.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The technology object is used to control and monitor the functions of the technology module. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Components required Central operation with a CPU 151xSP * * Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * * Configuration software In the user program S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Motion Control instructions TM Count 1x24V * Device configuration with hardware configuration * Parameter setting with axis and measuring input technology objects S7-1500 automation system ET 200SP distributed I/O system TM Count 1x24V Additional information You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in the following: Function manual S7-1500 Motion Control available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59381279) Function manual S7-1500T Motion Control available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Motion Control > Motion Control (S7-1200, S7-1500)" You can find a description of configuring the technology module for position detection in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 32 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object Hardware Support Packages (HSP) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 33 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object 4.2.2 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters of the module in the hardware configuration. "Position input for "Motion Control" technology object" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Insert the axis technology object and, if necessary, the measuring input technology object from the project tree in folder "Technology objects > Add new object > Motion Control". You can find information on configuring with axis technology objects in function manual S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326). 4. Open the configuration of the axis technology object, e.g. using the Configuration button in the respective instruction for the technology object. 5. Set the parameters of the technology objects. 6. Download the project to the CPU. Parameters of the TM Count 1x24V The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 5 Settable parameters and their default setting Parameter Value range Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Potential group Signal type * Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Invert direction (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Signal evaluation for counter inputs * Single * Double * Quadruple Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Module Pulse (A) and direction (B) Channel Deactivated Channel Single Channel Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 34 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object Parameter Value range Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Filter frequency for counter inputs 200 kHz Channel Sourcing output Channel DI0 Channel DI1 DI1 Channel 1...65535 1 Channel * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * Sourcing output * Sinking output * Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) Signal selection for reference mark 0 * DI0 * Signal N of incremental encoder Measuring input Increments per revolution / steps per revolution Reference speed 6.00...210000.00 U/min Sensor type Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated 3000.00 U/min Channel Deactivated Channel Deactivated Channel Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection, section Module parameters (position input for Motion Control) available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 35 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object 4.2.3 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 6 Size of input and output addresses of the TM Count 1x24V with position input for "Motion Control" technology object Range 4.2.4 Inputs Outputs 16 bytes 4 bytes Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. Counter values can be acquired in a fixed system cycle with this system function. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. Use an OB of type "MC-Servo" in this operating mode. Isochronous mode is needed when using the output cam and cam track technology objects. When the measuring input technology is used in combination with hardware digital input DI1, isochronous mode is not needed. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the counter value and the status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the "Filter frequency" parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 36 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 37 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with the configuration software. The functions of the technology module are controlled and checked by the user program via the control and feedback interface. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Components required Central operation with a CPU 151xSP * * Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * Distributed operation with an S7-300/400 CPU In the user program S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): TM Count 1x24V * Direct access to control and feedback interface in the I/O data S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): ET 200SP distributed I/O system * * TM Count 1x24V * S7-300/400 or S7-1200 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Count 1x24V Distributed operation * with an S7-1200 CPU Distributed operation in a third-party system Configuration software S7-300/400 or S7-1200 automation system Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with HSP (up to firmware version V1.2) or GSD file STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Count 1x24V * Third-party automation system Third-party configuration software: ET 200SP distributed I/O Device configuration and paramesystem ter setting with GSD file TM Count 1x24V * * Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 38 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Additional information You can find a detailed description of the counting and measurement functions and their configuration in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) STEP 7 (TIA Portal) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". STEP 7 You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/23183356). GSD file You can find the respective GSD file for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for download on the Internet: GSD file for PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621) GSD file for PROFIBUS DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73016883) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 39 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.2 Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP for each channel in the basic parameters of the device configuration. Table 4- 7 Response of technology module to CPU STOP Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the start value and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration" is set at CPU stop, the digital output is reset after the pulse duration elapses. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the start value and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 40 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.3 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. When parameters are assigned in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and data record 128 (Page 91). You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: Parameter setting using... Basic procedure Hardware configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters of the module in the hardware configuration. "Manual operation (without technology object)" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration in STEP 7 with HSP 1. Install the appropriate HSP file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "ET 200SP". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters in the hardware configuration. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFINET IO 1. Install the current PROFINET GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFINET IO > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. You can find information on the respective dependencies of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP 1. Install the current PROFIBUS GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFIBUS DP > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. You can find information on the respective dependencies of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are not configurable in the PROFIBUS GSD file. 3. Download the project to the CPU. The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are downloaded with their default setting. 4. If necessary, set the parameters marked with 1 in the user program using data record 128. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 41 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameters of the TM Count 1x24V The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 8 Settable parameters and their default setting Parameter Potential group Value range * * Operating mode3 Parameter reassignment in RUN Use the poten- No tial group of the left module Enable new potential group (light (dark BaseUnit) BaseUnit) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Counting * Measuring Reaction to CPU STOP1 * Default setting Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Substitute value for DQ01 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ11 * 0 * 1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break2 * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: New * Capture value available1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Synchronization of the counter by an external signal1 * Deactivated * Activated Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Module Counting No Channel Output substitute value Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Activated Hardware interrupt: Gate * start1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Gate * stop1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Overflow (high counting limit violated)1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt:Underflow (low counting limit violated)1 * Deactivated * Activated Activated Activated Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 42 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Hardware interrupt: Direction reversal1 Value range * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Zero * crossing1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ0 occurred1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ1 occurred1 * Deactivated * Activated Signal type * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Invert direction1 (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Signal evaluation for counter inputs * Single * Double * Quadruple * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * Sourcing output * Sinking output * Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) Filter frequency for counter inputs1 Sensor type Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Pulse (A) and direction (B) Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Single Yes Channel 200 kHz Yes Channel Sourcing output Yes Channel Activated Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 43 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Reaction to signal N1 Value range * No reaction to signal N * Synchronization at signal N * Capture at signal N Frequency of synchronization1 * Once * Periodic Frequency of Capture function1,4 * Once * Periodic High counting limit1 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file No reaction to signal N Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Once Yes Channel -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 Yes Channel Start value1 -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Counting low limit1 -2147483648...2147483647 -2147483648 Yes Channel Continue count- Yes ing Channel To opposite counting limit Yes Channel Continue with current value Yes Channel * DI0: Gate start/stop (leveltriggered) Yes Channel * DI1: Digital input without function * DI2: Digital input without function Active with high Yes level Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Continue count- Yes ing Channel Reaction to violation of a * counting limit * Stop counting Reset when counting limit is violated * To opposite counting limit * To start value Reaction to gate start * Set to start value * Continue with current value * Gate start/stop (level-triggered) * Gate start (edge-triggered) Set function of DI Select level for DI1 Edge selection for DI1 Behavior of counter value after Capture with DI 1 Continue counting * Gate stop (edge-triggered) * Synchronization * Enable synchronization at signal N * Capture * Digital input without function * Active with high level * Active with low level * At rising edge * At falling edge * At rising and falling edge * Continue counting * Set to start value and continue counting Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 44 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Input delay for digital inputs1 Set output Value range * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Use by user program * Between comparison value and high limit / measured value >= comparison value * Between comparison value and low limit / measured value <= comparison value * At comparison value for a pulse duration * After set command from CPU until comparison value * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 0.1 ms Yes Channel DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel Between comparison value and high limit Comparison value 01 -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Comparison value 11 -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Count direction of DQ function1 * Up Yes Channel * Down In both directions * In both directions 0...65535 5000 (correYes sponds to 0.5 s) Channel Hysteresis (in increments)1 0...255 0 Yes Channel Measured variable * Frequency Frequency Yes Channel * Period * Velocity 10 Yes Channel Pulse duration [ms/10]1 Update time [ms] of the measuring function1 0...25000 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 45 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Value range Time base for velocity measurement1 Increments per unit1 * 1 ms * 10 ms * 100 ms * 1s * 60 s 1...65535 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 60 s Yes Channel 1 Yes Channel 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per station in the PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the possible parameter assignments are limited. The parameters are preassigned default settings in the module. If your PROFIBUS master supports the "Write/read data record" function, you can set these parameters using data record 128. 2 When a GSD file is used, this diagnostic interrupt is enabled with the "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" parameter and is then not separately configurable. 3 When configuring with HSP for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. 4 Not available with HSP for STEP 7 Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection, sections Basic parameters and Manual operation available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 46 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.4 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 9 Size of input and output addresses of the TM Count 1x24V with manual operation Range 4.3.5 Inputs Outputs 16 bytes 12 bytes Control and feedback interface Note The control and feedback interface is compatible with the control and feedback interface of the TM Count 2x24V, TM PosInput 2 and TM PosInput 1 technology modules of the S7-1500 automation system. 4.3.5.1 Assignment of the control interface The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the technology module. Control interface The following table shows the assignment of the control interface: Byte offset from start address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 SLOT_0: DINT or REAL: Load value (meaning of the value is specified in LD_SLOT_0) Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 4...7 SLOT_1: DINT or REAL: Load value (meaning of the value is specified in LD_SLOT_1) Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 8 9 LD_SLOT_1 EN_ CAPTURE EN_ SYNC_DN EN_ SYNC_UP LD_SLOT_0 SET_DQ1 SET_DQ0 TM_ CTRL_DQ1 TM_ CTRL_DQ0 SW_GATE Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 47 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Byte offset from start address 10 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 SET_DIR Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Reserved 11 Bit 1 Bit 0 RES_ EVENT RES_ ERROR Reserved Explanations Control bit/value Explanations EN_CAPTURE Use this bit to enable the Capture function. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_CAP in the feedback interface. EN_SYNC_DN Use this bit to enable the synchronization of the counter when counting in downward direction with an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_SYNC in the feedback interface. EN_SYNC_UP Use this bit to enable the synchronization of the counter when counting in upward direction with an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_SYNC in the feedback interface. LD_SLOT_m Use this load request to specify the meaning of the value in SLOT_m: * 0000 means: No action, idle * 0001 means: Load counter value * 0010 not permitted * 0011 means: Load start value * 0100 means: Load comparison value 0 * 0101 means: Load comparison value 1 * 0110 means: Load counting low limit * 0111 means: Load counting high limit * 1000 to 1111 not permitted The technology module executes the respective action as soon as LD_SLOT_m changes. If values are loaded simultaneously using LD_SLOT_0 and LD_SLOT_1, the value from SLOT_0 is internally applied first and then the value from SLOT_1 . This can produce unexpected intermediate states. RES_EVENT Use this bit to trigger the reset of the saved events in the EVENT_ZERO, EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1 feedback bits. RES_ERROR Use this bit to trigger the reset of the saved error states LD_ERROR and ENC_ERROR . Reserved Reserve bits must be set to 0. SET_DIR Use this bit to specify the count direction for signal type "Pulse (A)". SET_DQ0 * 0 means: Up * 1 means: Down Use this bit to set digital output DQ0 when TM_CTRL_DQ0 is set to 0. In the case of the function "After set command from CPU until comparison value", SET_DQ0 is effective regardless of TM_CTRL_DQ0 as long as the counter value is not equal to the comparison value. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 48 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Control bit/value Explanations SET_DQ1 Use this bit to set digital output DQ1 when TM_CTRL_DQ1 is set to 0. In the case of the function "After set command from CPU until comparison value", SET_DQ1 is effective regardless of TM_CTRL_DQ1 as long as the counter value is not equal to the comparison value. SW_GATE Use this bit to open and close the software gate when using an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. The technology module only counts when the internal gate is open. * 0 means: Software gate closed * 1 means: Software gate open The digital inputs of the technology module externally control the hardware gate. The hardware gate can be activated by parameter assignment. The software gate cannot be deactivated. TM_CTRL_DQ0 TM_CTRL_DQ1 Use this bit to enable the technological function of digital output DQ0. * 0 means: SET_DQ0 defines the state of DQ0 * 1 means: assigned function defines the state of DQ0 Use this bit to enable the technological function of digital output DQ1. * 0 means: SET_DQ1 defines the state of DQ1 * 1 means: assigned function defines the state of DQ1 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 49 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.5.2 Assignment of the feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the technology module by means of the feedback interface. Feedback interface The following table shows the assignment of the feedback interface: Byte offset from start address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ENC_ ERROR POWER_ ERROR COUNT_VALUE: DINT: Current counter value 4...7 CAPTURED_VALUE: DINT: The last acquired Capture value 8...11 MEASURED_VALUE: REAL: Current measured value 12 13 Reserved Reserved LD_ERROR STS_ SW_GATE STS_ READY LD_STS_ SLOT_1 LD_STS_SL RES_EVEN OT_0 T_ACK Reserved 14 STS_DI2 STS_DI1 STS_DI0 STS_DQ1 STS_DQ0 STS_GATE STS_CNT STS_DIR 15 STS_M_ INTERVAL EVENT_ CAP EVENT_ SYNC EVENT_ CMP1 EVENT_ CMP0 EVENT_ OFLW EVENT_ UFLW EVENT_ ZERO Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 50 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Explanations Feedback bit/value Explanations CAPTURED_VALUE This DINT value indicates the last acquired Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: * Rising or falling edge of a digital input * Both edges of a digital input The "Frequency of Capture function" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. COUNT_VALUE This DINT value indicates the current counter value. ENC_ERROR This bit indicates that one of the following errors has occurred at the encoder signals (retentive) for the respective technology module: * Wire break of digital input A, B or N (with push-pull encoder) * Invalid transition of A/B signals (with incremental encoder) If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts, the respective diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the event of encoder signal errors. For information on the meaning of the diagnostic interrupts, refer to the manual for the respective technology module. The bit is reset once you have acknowledged the error with RES_ERROR . EVENT_CAP This bit indicates that a Capture event has occurred and a counter value has been saved in CAPTURED_VALUE . You reset the status by resetting EN_CAPTURE . EVENT_CMP0 This bit indicates the saved status that a comparison event (status change) has occurred for the digital output DQ0 based on the selected comparison condition. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. If the counter value is set to the start value in counting mode, EVENT_CMP0 is not set. EVENT_CMP1 This bit indicates the saved status that a comparison event (status change) has occurred for the digital output DQ1 based on the selected comparison condition. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_OFLW This bit indicates the saved status that the counter value had an overflow. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_SYNC When an incremental or pulse encoder is used, this bit indicates the saved status that the counter was loaded with the start value by an external reference signal (synchronization). You reset the status by resetting EN_SYNC_UP or EN_SYNC_DN . EVENT_UFLW This bit indicates the saved status that the counter value had an underflow. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_ZERO This bit indicates the saved status that the counter value or position value had a zero crossing. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. If the counter value is set to the start value in counting mode, EVENT_CMP1 is not set. When the "Zero crossing" hardware interrupt is enabled, for system-related reasons it can also be triggered if "0" is outside the configured value range. LD_ERROR This bit indicates that an error occurred (latching) during loading via the control interface. The loaded values were not applied. When using an incremental or pulse encoder, one of the following conditions is not fulfilled: * Low counting limit <= counter value <= high counting limit * Low counting limit <= start value <= high counting limit * Low counting limit <= comparison value 0/1 <= high counting limit The bit is reset once you have acknowledged the error with RES_ERROR . LD_STS_SLOT_0 This bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that the load request for SLOT_0 (LD_SLOT_0) was detected and performed. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 51 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Feedback bit/value Explanations LD_STS_SLOT_1 This bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that the load request for SLOT_1 (LD_SLOT_1) was detected and performed. MEASURED_VALUE This value indicates the current measured value with data type REAL: * Frequency: The mean frequency is calculated from the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes in one measurement interval and returned as a floating-point number in the unit of hertz. * Period: The mean period is calculated from the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes in one measurement interval and returned as a floating-point number in the unit of seconds. Velocity: The mean velocity is calculated from the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes in one measurement interval and returned as a floating-point number in the configured unit. The measured values are returned as a signed value. The sign indicates whether the counter value went up or down in the relevant time interval. * The update time is asynchronous to the opening of the internal gate, i.e. the update time is not started when the gate opens. After the internal gate closes, the last calculated measured value continues to be returned. POWER_ERROR This bit indicates that supply voltage L+ is too low. If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts (Page 77), the diagnostics interrupt "Supply voltage missing" is triggered at a supply voltage error. When supply voltage L+ is available at a sufficient level once again, POWER_ERROR is automatically set to 0. RES_EVENT_ACK This bit indicates that the reset of event bit EVENT_SYNC, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1, EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_ZERO is active. Reserved Reserved bits are set to 0. STS_CNT This bit indicates that at least one count pulse or a position value change has occurred in the last ca. 0.5 s. STS_DI0 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI0. STS_DI1 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI1. STS_DI2 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI2. STS_DIR This bit indicates the count direction of the last count pulse or the direction of the last position value change. * 0 means: Down * 1 means: Up STS_DQ0 This bit indicates the status of digital output DQ0. STS_DQ1 This bit indicates the status of digital output DQ1. STS_GATE This bit indicates the status of the internal gate when using an incremental or pulse encoder. * 0 means: Gate closed * 1 means: Gate open STS_M_INTERVAL This bit indicates that at least one count pulse or a position value change was detected in the previous measurement interval. STS_READY This bit indicates that the technology module supplies valid user data. The technology module has been started up and configured. STS_SW_GATE This bit indicates the status of the software gate. * 0 means: Gate closed * 1 means: Gate open Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 52 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.6 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. This system function enables counter values and measured values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. Use an OB of type "Synchronous Cycle" (e.g. OB61) in this operating mode. The input and output data are processed in the assigned OB. The update time for the measured value is synchronized with the system cycle in a suitable ratio and, if necessary, adapted in length. If you set "0", the measured value is updated once per system cycle. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the counter value and the measured value as well as status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the "Filter frequency" parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 53 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4 Fast Mode You can use the technology module in Fast Mode for very fast acquisition of the counter value with compressed functionality. A reduced feedback interface but no control interface is available in Fast Mode. This allows you to use a shorter send clock for the CPU. The scope of functions of the technology module has the following additional restrictions in Fast Mode: Parameter change in RUN only possible with data record 128 Count/position value range: 25 bits No measured value available No software gate available No Capture function available No hardware interrupts available Combined error message (feedback bit) that is acknowledged automatically Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 54 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with the configuration software. The functions of the technology module are controlled and checked by the user program via the feedback interface. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Central operation with a CPU 151xSP Components required S7-1500 automation system * TM Count 1x24V * S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): ET 200SP distributed I/O system * * TM Count 1x24V * S7-300/400 or S7-1200 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Count 1x24V Distributed operation * with an S7-1200 CPU Distributed operation in a third-party system In the user program Direct access to feedback interface in the I/O data * Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * Distributed operation with an S7-300/400 CPU Configuration software STEP 7 (TIA Portal): S7-300/400 or S7-1200 automation system Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with HSP (up to firmware version V1.2) or GSD file STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Count 1x24V * Third-party automation system Third-party configuration software: ET 200SP distributed I/O Device configuration and paramesystem ter setting with GSD file TM Count 1x24V * * Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 55 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Additional information You can find a detailed description of the counting and measurement functions and their configuration in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) STEP 7 (TIA Portal) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". STEP 7 You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/23183356). GSD file You can find the respective GSD file for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for download on the Internet: GSD file for PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621) GSD file for PROFIBUS DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73016883) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 56 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP for each channel in the basic parameters of the device configuration. Table 4- 10 Response of technology module to CPU STOP Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the start value and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration" is set at CPU stop, the digital output is reset after the pulse duration elapses. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the start value and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. 4.4.3 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. When parameters are assigned in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and data record 128 (Page 91). You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: Parameter setting using... Basic procedure Hardware configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters of the module in the hardware configuration. "Fast Mode" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration in STEP 7 with HSP 1. Install the appropriate HSP file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "ET 200SP". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters in the hardware configuration. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 57 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter setting using... Basic procedure Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFINET IO 1. Install the current PROFINET GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFINET IO > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP 1. Install the current PROFIBUS GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFIBUS DP > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are not configurable in the PROFIBUS GSD file. 3. Download the project to the CPU. The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are downloaded with their default setting. 4. If necessary, set the parameters marked with 1 in the user program using data record 128. Parameters of the TM Count 1x24V The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 11 Settable parameters and their default setting Parameter Potential group Value range * * Reaction to CPU STOP1 * Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Use the poten- No tial group of the left module Enable new potential group (light (dark BaseUnit) BaseUnit) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Substitute value for DQ01 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ11 * 0 * 1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break2 * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Module Output substitute value Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 58 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Signal type Value range * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Invert direction1 (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Signal evaluation for counter inputs * Single * Double * Quadruple * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * Sourcing output * Sinking output * Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) * No reaction to signal N * Synchronization at signal N Filter frequency for counter inputs1 Sensor type Reaction to signal N1 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Pulse (A) and direction (B) Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Single Yes Channel 200 kHz Yes Channel Sourcing output Yes Channel No reaction to signal N Yes Channel Counting high limit1 1...33554431 33554431 Yes Channel Start value1 0...33554431 0 Yes Channel 0...33554430 0 Yes Channel Continue count- Yes ing Channel To opposite counting limit Channel Counting low limit1 Reaction to violation of a * counting limit * Reset when counting limit is violated Stop counting Continue counting * To opposite counting limit * To start value Yes Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 59 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Reaction to gate start Value range * Set to start value * Continue with current value * Gate start/stop (level-triggered) * Gate start (edge-triggered) * Gate stop (edge-triggered) * Synchronization * Enable synchronization at signal N * Digital input without function * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Active with high level * Active with low level * At rising edge * At falling edge Frequency of synchronization1 * Once * Periodic Count direction for synchronization * Up * Down * In both directions * Between comparison value and high limit Set function of DI Input delay for digital inputs1 Select level for DI1 Edge selection for DI1 Set output Comparison value 01 * Between comparison value and low limit * At comparison value for a pulse duration * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Digital output without function 0...33554431 Default setting Continue with current value Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Yes Channel Digital input Yes without function Channel 0.1 ms Yes Channel Active with high Yes level Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Up Yes Channel DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel Yes Channel Digital output without function 0 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 60 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Value range Comparison value 11 0...33554431 Count direction of DQ function1 * Up * Down * In both directions Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 10 Yes Channel In both directions Yes Channel Pulse duration [ms/10]1 0...65535 5000 (correYes sponds to 0.5 s) Channel Hysteresis (in increments)1 0...255 0 Channel Yes 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per station in the PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the possible parameter assignments are limited. The parameters are preassigned default settings in the module. If your PROFIBUS master supports the "Write/read data record" function, you can set these parameters using data record 128. 2 When a GSD file is used, this diagnostic interrupt is enabled with the "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" parameter and is then not separately configurable. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 61 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.4 Explanation of parameters Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station that are supplied from a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light BaseUnit, which feeds the required supply voltage for all modules of the potential group. The light BaseUnit interrupts the three self-configuring voltage bars P1, P2 and AUX to the neighboring modules on the left. All other I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark BaseUnits. They take on the potentials of the self-configuring busbars P1, P2 and AUX from the neighboring modules on the left. A potential group ends with the dark BaseUnit, which is followed by a light BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Signal type You can select from the following signal types: Signal type Meaning Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) An incremental encoder with phase-shifted A and B signals is connected. Incremental encoder (A, B, N) An incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals A and B and a zero signal N is connected. Pulse (A) and direction (B) A pulse encoder (signal A) with direction signal (signal B) is connected. Pulse (A) A pulse encoder (signal A) without direction signal is connected. Count up (A), count down (B) Signals for counting up (signal A) and down (signal B) are connected. Invert direction You can invert the counting direction to adapt it to the process. The inverting of the direction is configurable and active for the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 62 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Signal evaluation With the parameter assignment of the signal evaluation, you specify which edges of the signals are counted. You can select from the following options: Signal evaluation Meaning Single The edges of signal A are evaluated during a low level of signal B. Double Each edge of signal A is evaluated. Quadruple Each edge of signals A and B is evaluated. The parameter can be assigned with the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Filter frequency By configuring the filter frequency, you suppress interferences at the counting inputs A, B and N. The selected filter frequency is based on a pulse/break ratio of between around 40:60 and around 60:40. This results in a specific minimum pulse/break time. Signal changes with a duration shorter than the minimum pulse/break time are suppressed. You can select from the following filter frequencies: Filter frequency Minimum pulse/break time 100 Hz 4.0ms 200 Hz 2.0 ms 500 Hz 800 s 1 kHz 400 s 2 kHz 200 s 5 kHz 80 s 10 kHz 40 s 20 kHz 20 s 50 kHz 8.0 s 100 kHz 4.0 s 200 kHz 2.0 s Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 63 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Reaction to signal N You use this parameter to specify which reaction to signal N is triggered. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning No reaction to signal N The counter is not affected by signal N. Synchronization at signal N The counter is set to the start value at signal N. If you select the function "Enable synchronization at signal N" for a digital input, the synchronization depends on the level at the digital input. Note You can only select the reaction to signal N if you have selected the "Incremental encoder (A, B, N)" signal type. Note If you select "Synchronization at signal N", you can choose the "Enable synchronization at signal N" function for a digital input. Frequency of synchronization This parameter is used to define the frequency of the following events: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The counter is only set at the first signal N or the first configured edge of the digital input. Periodic The counter is set at each signal N or each configured edge of the digital input. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 64 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Count direction of the synchronization You use this parameter to specify the count direction for which the following functions are enabled: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning In both directions Synchronization takes place regardless of the count direction. Up Synchronization only takes place when the counter is counting up. Down Synchronization only takes place when the counter is counting down. Sensor type With the parameter assignment of the sensor type, you specify how the counter inputs are switched. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Sourcing output The encoder or sensor switches the A, B and N inputs to 24 V DC. Sinking output The encoder or sensor switches the A, B and N inputs to M. Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) The encoder or sensor switches the A, B and N inputs to alternately to M and 24 V DC. "Push-pull" is usually selected when incremental encoders are used. If using 2-wire sensors, such as light barriers or proximity switches, you need to select the corresponding wiring "sourcing output" or "sinking output". The data sheet of the encoder includes information on whether your incremental encoder is a push-pull encoder. Note If you use a push-pull encoder and the sensor type "Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output)" is configured, you can monitor the encoder signals for wire break. Counting high limit With the parameter assignment of the counting high limit, you limit the counting range. You can enter a value up to 33554431 (225-1). You must enter a value above the counting low limit. Counting low limit With the parameter assignment of the counting low limit, you limit the counting range. You can enter a value starting with 0. You must enter a value below the counting high limit. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 65 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Start value With the parameter assignment of the start value, you specify the value at which counting is begun and is to continue in the case of defined events. You must enter a value at or within the counting limits. Reaction to violation of a counting limit You can configure the following reaction to violation of a counting limit: Reaction Meaning Stop counting After violation of a counting limit, counting is stopped and the internal gate is closed. To restart counting, you must close and reopen the SW gate or HW gate, if necessary. Continue counting Counting is continued with the start value or at the opposite counting limit depending on the additional parameter assignment. Reset when counting limit is violated You can reset the counter when a counting limit is violated: Reset the value Meaning To start value The counter value is set to the start value. To opposite counting limit The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit in each case. Reaction to gate start You can configure the following reaction to gate start: Reaction Meaning Set to start value When the gate is opened, the counter value is set to the start value. Continue with current value When the gate is opened, counting is continued with the last counter value. Note The parameter is only effective when you have configured a HW gate. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 66 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Set function of DI With the parameter assignment of a digital input, you specify which function the digital input triggers when switched. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital input Meaning Gate start/stop (level-triggered) The level at the respective digital input opens and closes the HW gate. Gate start (edge-triggered) The configured edge at the respective digital input opens the HW gate. Gate stop (edge-triggered) The configured edge at the respective digital input closes the HW gate. Synchronization The configured edge at the respective digital input sets the counter to the start value. Enable synchronization at signal N The active level at the respective digital input enables synchronization of the counter at signal N. Digital input without function No technological function is assigned to the respective digital input. You can read the signal status of the digital input via the feedback interface. Note Each function, except "Digital input without function", can be used only once per counter and can no longer be selected for the other digital inputs in each case. Input delay You use this parameter to suppress signal noise at the digital inputs. Changes to the signal are only detected if they remain stable for longer than the configured input delay time. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you must use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Note You configure the input delay under "Behavior of DI0" for all digital inputs together. The input delay is also displayed under "Behavior of DI1". Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 67 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Select level You use this parameter to specify the level at which the digital input is active. You can select from the following options: Level Meaning Active with high level The respective digital input is active when it is set. Active with low level The respective digital input is active when it is not set. The parameter can be configured for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) Enable synchronization at signal N Edge selection You use this parameter to specify the edge of the digital input at which the configured function is triggered. You can select from the following options depending on the function selected: At rising edge At falling edge The parameter can be configured for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start (edge-triggered) Gate stop (edge-triggered) Synchronization Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 68 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Set output With the parameter assignment of a digital output, you specify the condition upon which the digital output switches. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital output Meaning Between comparison value and high limit The respective digital output is active if: Comparison value <= counter value <= counting high limit Between comparison value and low limit The respective digital output is active if: Low limit <= counter value <= comparison value Between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration The respective digital output is active once for the configured time and count direction when the counter value corresponds to the comparison value. Digital output without function The respective digital output is set to 0 irrespective of the reaction to CPU STOP. Note You can only set the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" function for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Digital output without function" function for digital output DQ0. Comparison value 0 With the parameter assignment of the comparison value, you specify the counter value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is greater than or equal to the counting low limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", comparison value 0 must be less than comparison value 1. Comparison value 1 With the parameter assignment of the comparison value, you specify the counter value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is less than or equal to the counting high limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", comparison value 0 must be less than comparison value 1. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 69 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Count direction You use this parameter to specify the count direction for which the selected functions is valid: You can select from the following options: Count direction Meaning In both directions The comparison and switching of the respective digital output takes places regardless of the count direction. Up The comparison the switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts up. Down The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts down. The parameter can be configured for the following functions: Between comparison value 0 and 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration Pulse duration With the parameter assignment of the pulse duration for the "At comparison value for a pulse duration" function, you specify how many milliseconds the respective digital output is active. If you enter "0" and the counter value corresponds to the respective comparison value, the digital output is active until the next count pulse. Hysteresis (in increments) With the parameter assignment of the hysteresis, you specify a range around the comparison values. Within the hysteresis range, the digital outputs cannot switch again before the counter value has left this range. An encoder can stop at a certain position, and slight movements can cause the counter value to fluctuate around this position. If a comparison value or counting limit is within the fluctuation range and a hysteresis is not used, the associated digital output will switch on and off with corresponding frequency. The hysteresis prevents these unwanted switching actions. Regardless of the hysteresis value, the hysteresis range ends at the low or counting high limit. If you enter "0", the hysteresis is turned off. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 70 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.5 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 12 Size of input and output addresses of the TM Count 1x24V with Fast Mode Range 4.4.6 Inputs Outputs 4 bytes 0 bytes Assignment of the feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the technology module by means of the feedback interface. Feedback interface The following table shows the assignment of the feedback interface: Byte offset from start address 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LS STS_ READY Reserved EXT_F STS_DI0 STS_DIR STS_DI1 COUNT_ VALUE 1 COUNT_VALUE: 2 DINT: Current counter value or position value 3 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 71 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Explanation of feedback bits Feedback bit Explanations COUNT_VALUE This value returns the current counter value in the first 25 bits of a DINT value. EXT_F This bit indicates that one of the following errors has occurred at the encoder signals for the technology module: * Load voltage missing * Wire break of digital input A, B or N (with push-pull encoder) * Invalid transition of A/B signals (with incremental encoder) If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts, the respective diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the event of encoder signal errors. For information on the meaning of the diagnostic interrupts, refer to section Diagnostic alarms (Page 78). The bit is reset automatically as soon as an error no longer exists. LS As a life sign, this bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that isochronous mode is functioning and the module has updated the feedback interface in the respective bus cycle. In non-isochronous mode, this bit is set to 0. STS_DI0 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI0. STS_DI1 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI1. STS_DI2 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI2. STS_DIR This bit indicates the count direction of the last count pulse. 0 means: Down 1 means: Up STS_READY This bit indicates that the technology module supplies valid user data. The technology module has been started up and configured. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 72 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.7 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. Counter values can be acquired in a fixed system cycle with this system function. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. This operating mode is especially well-suited for short send clocks of the CPU starting from 125 s, because only input data is used. Use an OB of type "Synchronous Cycle" (e.g. OB61) in this operating mode. Data processing At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the counter value and the status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the "Filter frequency" parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 73 5 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error display LEDs The following figure shows you the LED displays (status and error displays) of TM Count 1x24V. DIAG (green/red) Status A (green) Status B (green) Status N (green) 24VDC (green) PWR (green) Status DI1 (green) Status of DI2 (green) Status DQ0 (green) Status DQ1 (green) Status UP (green) Status DN (green) Status DI0 (green) Figure 5-1 LED displays of the TM Count 1x24V Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 74 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 77). Table 5- 1 Status and error displays DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Remedy Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Check or switch on the supply voltage on the CPU or on the interface module. Technology module parameters not set --- Off Flashes Technology module parameters set and no module diagnostics On Technology module parameters set and module diagnostics (at least one error is present) Flashes Table 5- 2 PWR/24VDC status displays LEDs Meaning PWR 24VDC Off Off Supply voltage missing On On Evaluate the diagnostic alarms and eliminate the error. Remedy * Check the supply voltage. * Check the BaseUnit type and the wiring of the BaseUnit. Supply voltage is present and OK --- Short-circuit or overload at the encoder supply or supply voltage too low * Check the encoder wiring. * Check the loads connected to the encoder supply. * Check the supply voltage. On Off Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 75 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error display Channel LEDs The A, B, N and DIm LEDs indicate the current level of the associated signals. The LEDs of the DQm digital outputs indicate the desired state. The UP and DN LEDs indicate the logical counting direction. The flashing frequency of the channel LEDs is limited to approximately 12 Hz. If higher frequencies are present, the channel LEDs will flash at 12 Hz instead of indicating the current status. Table 5- 3 Status displays A/B/N/DIm/DQm LEDs A/B/N/DIm/DQm Meaning Counter input/digital input/digital output at 0 level Off Counter input/digital input/digital output at 1 level On Table 5- 4 Status displays UP/DN LEDs Meaning UP DN Off Off On Off The last count pulse has incremented the counter and took place no more than 0.5 s ago. Off On The last count pulse has decremented the counter and took place no more than 0.5 s ago. No count pulse has been detected for the last 0.5 s. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 76 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic messages Enabling of diagnostic interrupts You enable the diagnostic interrupts in the device configuration with the basic parameters. The technology module can trigger the following diagnostic interrupts: Table 5- 5 Possible diagnostic interrupts Diagnostic interrupt * Monitoring Parameter error lost1 Monitoring is always active. A diagnostic interrupt is triggered each time an error is detected. * Hardware interrupt * Channel/component temporarily unavailable * Internal error * Watchdog tripped. Module is defective. * Wire break at digital input A, B or N Monitoring is active if a push-pull switching encoder has been configured. When an error is detected, a diagnostic interrupt is only triggered if "Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break" is activated in the device configuration. * Error * Load voltage missing Monitoring is always active. When an error is detected, a diagnostic interrupt is only triggered if "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" is activated in the device configuration. * Short-circuit / overload at external encoder supply * Error at digital outputs * Supply voltage error2 * Invalid transition of A/B signals * Overtemperature 1 Not available in "Position input for "Motion Control"" technology object" and "Fast Mode" operating modes 2 No longer available as of module version V1.2 This case is then taken into account by diagnostic interrupt "Load voltage missing". Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 77 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic messages Reactions to a diagnostic interrupt The following happens when an event occurs that triggers a diagnostic interrupt: The DIAG LED flashes red. When you have eliminated all errors, the DIAG LED stops flashing red and turns green. The S7-1500 CPU interrupts the processing of the user program. The diagnostic interrupt OB (e.g. OB 82) is called. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostic interrupt OB. The S7-1500 CPU remains in RUN, even if no diagnostic interrupt OB is present in the CPU. The technology module continues working unchanged if this is possible despite the error. You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error organization block with instruction "RALRM" (Read additional alarm information), in the information system of STEP 7 and in function manual Diagnostics (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926), section "System diagnostics in user program". If the module is being operated as a distributed module in an ET 200SP system with PROFIBUS DP, you have the option of reading out diagnostic data with the RDREC or RD_REC instruction using data record 0 and 1. You can find the structure of the data records in the manual for the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/73098660). Diagnostic alarms The display of diagnostics is in plain text in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in the online and diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. The following diagnostics can be signaled: Table 5- 6 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Error 9H * Internal module error occurred * Possible cause: Technology module defective * The received parameter data record is invalid * The configured BaseUnit is not the used BaseUnit Parameter error 10H Load voltage miss- 11H ing Remedy Replace technology module * Check parameter data record * Check BaseUnit * Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check BaseUnit type * Wiring of supply voltage L+ faulty * * Possible cause: BaseUnit type incorrect Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check wiring of supply voltage L+ * Check total consumption of the load group Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 78 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic alarm Error code Hardware interrupt 16H lost Channel/component temporarily unavailable 1FH Internal error 100H Watchdog tripped. Module is defective. 103H Short-circuit / 10EH overload at external encoder supply Error at digital outputs 10FH Meaning * Module cannot issue interrupt because a preceding interrupt has not yet been processed * Change interrupt processing in the CPU and re-assign technology module parameters correspondingly * Possible cause: Too many hardware interrupts in too short a time * Check frequency of interrupts from the process Firmware update in progress or update was aborted. The module reads no process values in this state. * Wait for firmware update * If firmware update aborts: Technology module defective 110H Check supply voltage - Repeat firmware update Replace technology module Run firmware update * Error at encoder supply * Check encoder wiring * Possible causes: * Check consumers connected to encoder supply * Check wiring at the digital outputs * Check consumers connected to the digital outputs * Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit Low voltage * Check wiring of supply voltage L+ Wiring of supply voltage L+ faulty * Check total consumption of the load group Time profile of signals A and B of the incremental encoder does not meet certain requirements (relative phase shift of the two signals is too small) * Check process wiring * Check encoder/sensor * Check parameter assignment * - Short circuit - Overload Error at digital outputs (LED display DQm lit red) Possible causes: - Short circuit - Overload * Error at supply voltage L+ * Possible causes: * * 505H - Replace technology module - Wire break at digital input A, B or N Check minimum firmware version required Firmware error - Invalid transition of 500H A/B signals - Technology module defective * Supply voltage error1 Remedy Possible causes: - Signal frequency too high - Encoder faulty - Process wiring faulty Channel not connected Connect the channel Resistance of encoder circuit too high * Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring, for example, use shorter cables with larger cross-sections * Check encoders Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 79 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic alarm Overtemperature 1 Error code 506H Meaning Remedy Interruption of the line between technology module and encoder Check process wiring Sensor used is sourcing output or sinking output only Correct parameter assignment Possible causes: * Check process wiring * Improve cooling * Check connected loads * Short-circuit or overload at the digital outputs or output of the encoder supply * Ambient temperature outside specifications * Contamination in the module prevents cooling No longer available as of module version V1.2. This case is then taken into account by diagnostic interrupt "Load voltage missing". Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 80 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3 Hardware interrupts 5.3 Hardware interrupts Introduction For the technology module, you can configure which events are to trigger a hardware interrupt during operation. What is a hardware interrupt? The technology module will trigger a hardware interrupt as configured in response to specific events/states. When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the assigned hardware interrupt OB. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the assigned hardware interrupt OB by the CPU. Lost hardware interrupt If an event occurs that is to trigger a hardware interrupt and the preceding event has not yet been processed, another hardware interrupt cannot be triggered. The hardware interrupt is lost and the diagnostic interrupt "Lost hardware interrupt" is triggered. Enabling of hardware interrupts A hardware interrupt is triggered when the condition for the change of the respective status or event bit in the feedback interface is met. You enable the hardware interrupts in the device configuration with the basic parameters. You can configure hardware interrupts to be triggered for the following event types: Opening of internal gate (gate start) Closing of internal gate (gate stop) Overflow (high counting limit violated) Underflow (low counting limit violated) Comparison event for DQ0 has occurred Comparison event for DQ1 has occurred Zero crossing3 New Capture value available1 Synchronization of the counter by an external signal Direction reversal2 1 Only configurable in Counting mode Feedback bit STS_DIR is preassigned with "0". If the first counter value change occurs in the downwards direction directly after switching on the technology module, no hardware interrupt is triggered. 2 When the "Zero crossing" hardware interrupt is enabled, for system-related reasons it can also be triggered if "0" is outside the configured value range. 3 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 81 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3 Hardware interrupts You can activate any combination of events to trigger hardware interrupts. You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with instruction "RALRM" (Read additional alarm information) and in the information system of STEP 7. Which event has triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of the local data double word 8. Figure 5-2 Start information of the organization block Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 82 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 6 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 General information Product type designation TM Count 1x24V Firmware version V1.3 * FW update possible usable BaseUnits Yes BU type A0 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 (FW V1.0), V14 (V1.2), V15 (FW V1.3) / V13 (FW V1.0), V14 SP1 (V1.2) * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version As of V5.5 SP3, only up to FW V1.2 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Supply voltage Load voltage L+ * Rated value (DC) 24 V * permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V * permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V * Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 60 mA; without load Encoder supply Number of outputs 1 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes; L+ (-0.8 V) * Short-circuit protection Yes; electronic/thermal * Output current, max. 300 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 83 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 Address area Occupied address area * Inputs 16 byte; 4 bytes in Fast mode * Outputs 12 byte; 4 bytes for Motion Control, 0 bytes for Fast mode Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 3 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Digital input functions, parameterizable * Gate start/stop Yes * Capture Yes * Synchronization Yes * Freely usable digital input Yes Input voltage * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -5 ... +5 V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V * permissible voltage at input, min. -30 V; -5 V continuous, -30 V brief reverse polarity protection * permissible voltage at input, max. 30 V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms - at "0" to "1", min. 6 s; for parameterization "none" - at "1" to "0", min. 6 s; for parameterization "none" for counter/technological functions - parameterizable Yes Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 84 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 Digital outputs Type of digital output Transistor Number of digital outputs 2 Short-circuit protection Yes; electronic/thermal * Response threshold, typ. 1A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ (-33 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Digital output functions, parameterizable * Switching tripped by comparison values Yes * Freely usable digital output Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A; Per digital output * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 12 k Output voltage * for signal "1", min. 23.2 V; L+ (-0.8 V) Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A; Per digital output * for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.6 A; Per digital output * for signal "1" minimum load current 2 mA * for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 50 s * "1" to "0", max. 50 s Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 10 kHz * with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz; Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, DC-13; observe derating curve * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per module, max. 1A Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 85 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 Encoder Connectable encoders * 2-wire sensor Yes - 1.5 mA permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. Encoder signals, incremental encoder (asymmetrical) * Input voltage 24 V * Input frequency, max. 200 kHz * Counting frequency, max. 800 kHz; with quadruple evaluation * Cable length, shielded, max. 600 m; depending on input frequency, encoder and cable quality; max. 50 m at 200 kHz * Signal filter, parameterizable Yes * Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, 90 phase offset Yes * Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, 90 phase offset Yes and zero track * Pulse encoder Yes * Pulse encoder with direction Yes * Pulse encoder with one impulse signal per count direction Yes Encoder signal 24 V - permissible voltage at input, min. -30 V - permissible voltage at input, max. 30 V Interface types * Source/sink input Yes * Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 86 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values connectable Yes; Parameterizable Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Hardware interrupt Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes * Short-circuit Yes * A/B transition error at incremental encoder Yes * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED * Status indicator backward counting (green) Yes * Status indicator forward counting (green) Yes Integrated Functions Number of counters 1 Counting frequency (counter) max. 800 kHz; with quadruple evaluation Counting functions * Can be used with TO High_Speed_Counter Yes * Continuous counting Yes * Counter response parameterizable Yes * Hardware gate via digital input Yes * Software gate Yes * Event-controlled stop Yes * Synchronization via digital input Yes * Counting range, parameterizable Yes Comparator - Number of comparators 2 - Direction dependency Yes - Can be changed from user program Yes Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 87 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0 Position detection * Incremental acquisition Yes * Suitable for S7-1500 Motion Control Yes Measuring functions * Measuring time, parameterizable Yes * Dynamic measurement period adjustment Yes * Number of thresholds, parameterizable 2 Measuring range - Frequency measurement, min. 0.04 Hz - Frequency measurement, max. 800 kHz - Cycle duration measurement, min. 1.25 s - Cycle duration measurement, max. 25 s - Frequency measurement 100 ppm; depending on measuring interval and signal evaluation - Cycle duration measurement 100 ppm; depending on measuring interval and signal evaluation - Velocity measurement 100 ppm; depending on measuring interval and signal evaluation Accuracy Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Decentralized operation to SIMATIC S7-300 Yes to SIMATIC S7-400 Yes to SIMATIC S7-1200 Yes to SIMATIC S7-1500 Yes to standard PROFIBUS master Yes to standard PROFINET controller Yes Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 45 g Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 88 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Technical specifications Derating information for total current of outputs If the digital outputs of the TM Count 1x24V are operated with resistive or inductive loads, you should derate the total current of the loads at the digital outputs of the technology module. The total current is the sum of the load currents at all digital outputs of the module (without encoder supply). The following derating curve shows the load capacity of the digital outputs depending on the ambient temperature and mounting position under the following conditions: Load resistance: 48 (IEC 947-5-1) Vertical installation of the system Horizontal installation of the system Figure 6-1 Total current depending on ambient temperature and mounting position for resistive loads Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 89 Technical specifications The following derating curve shows the load capacity of the digital outputs depending on the ambient temperature and mounting position under the following conditions: Maximum switching frequency at digital outputs of 0.5 Hz Load resistance: 48 (IEC 947-5-1) Load inductance: 1150 mH (IEC 947-5-1) Vertical installation of the system Horizontal installation of the system Figure 6-2 Total current depending on ambient temperature and mounting position for inductive loads Note If the switching frequency is greater than 0.5 Hz or there is greater inductance at the digital outputs, the total current must be reduced further. Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 90 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.1 A Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record You have the option of reassigning module parameters with the user program while the CPU is in RUN. The parameters are transferred to the module using data record 128, e.g. with the WRREC instruction. If an error occurs while transferring or validating parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operating with the existing parameter assignment. A corresponding error code is then written to the STATUS output parameter. If no errors occur, the STATUS output parameter contains the length of the actually transferred data. You can find a description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes in section Parameter validation error (Page 101) or in the online help of STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Structure of data record 128 for operation with technology object and manual operation The following table shows you the structure of data record 128 for TM Count 1x24V for operation with technology object and manual operation without technology object. The values in byte 0 to byte 3 are fixed and must not be changed. The value in byte 4 can only be changed by means of new parameter assignment and not in RUN mode of the CPU. Note After each writing of data record 128, the module is set to its startup state and the counter value is set to the start value. If "Continue operation" is set for Reaction to CPU STOP, the module is then only set to its startup state when data record 128 has been changed. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 91 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Table A- 1 Data record 128: Operating modes "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object", "Manual operation (without technology object)" Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 0 Major Version = 0 Bit 0 Minor Version = 2 1 Length of the parameter data = 48 2 Reserved2 3 Reserved2 4...51 Counting channel 4 4 Bit 1 Header Operating mode Reserved2 Operating mode: 0000B: Not permitted 0001B: Counting 0010B: Measuring 0011 to 1111B: Not permitted 5 5 Basic parameters Reserved2 Enable additional diagnostic interrupts1 Reaction to CPU STOP: 00B: Output substitute value 01B: Keep last value 10B: Continue operation 11B: Not permitted Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 92 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6...7 6 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter inputs Sensor type: Signal evaluation: Signal type: 00B: Sourcing output 00B: Single 0000B: Pulse (A) 01B: Sinking output 01B: Double 0001B: Pulse (A) and direction (B) 10B: Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) 10B: Quadruple 0010B: Count up (A), count down (B) 11B: Not permitted 11B: Not permitted 0011B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B, N) 0101 to 1111B: Not permitted 7 Reaction to signal N: 00B: No reaction to signal N Invert direction1 01B: Synchronization at signal N Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break1 Filter frequency3: 0000B: 100 Hz 0001B: 200 Hz 0010B: 500 Hz 0011B: 1 kHz 10B: Capture at signal N 0100B: 2 kHz 11B: Not permitted 0101B: 5 kHz 0110B: 10 kHz 0111B: 20 kHz 1000B: 50 kHz 1001B: 100 kHz 1010B: 200 kHz 1011 to 1111B: Not permitted 8...9 Hardware interrupts1 8 Reserved2 9 SynchroniNew Capzation of the ture value counter by available an external signal Reserved2 Change of direction Underflow (low counting limit violated) Overflow (high counting limit violated) Gate stop Zero crossing Reserved2 Comparison Reserved2 event for DQ1 has occurred Gate start Comparison event for DQ0 has occurred Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 93 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 10...15 10 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Behavior of DQ0/1 Set output (DQ1): Set output (DQ0): 0000B: Use by user program 0000B: Use by user program 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit; Measuring: Measured value >= comparison value 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit; Measuring: Measured value >= comparison value 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit; Measuring: Measured value <= comparison value 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit; Measuring: Measured value <= comparison value 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0100B: Between comparison value 0 and 1 0100B: Not permitted 0101B: After set command from CPU until comparison value 0101B: After set command from CPU until comparison value 0110B: Not between comparison value 0 and 1 0110 to 1111B: Not permitted 0111 to 1111B: Not permitted 11 Count direction (DQ1): Count direction (DQ0): 00B: Not permitted 00B: Not permitted 01B: Up 01B: Up 10B: Down 10B: Down 11B: In both directions 11B: In both directions Reserved2 Substitute value for DQ1 12 Pulse duration (DQ0): 13 WORD: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D 14 Pulse duration (DQ1): 15 WORD: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D 16 Behavior of DI0 16 Behavior of counter value after Capture (DI0): Edge selection (DI0): 0B: Continue counting 11B: At rising and falling edge 1B: Set to start value and continue counting 00B: Not permitted5 01B: At rising edge 10B: At falling edge Select level (DI0): Reserved2 Substitute value for DQ0 Set function of DI (DI0): 000B: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) 0B: Active with high level 001B: Gate start (edge-triggered) 1B: Active with low level 011B: Synchronization 010B: Gate stop (edge-triggered) 100B: Enable synchronization at signal N 101B: Capture 110B: Digital input without function 111B: Not permitted Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 94 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 17 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Behavior of DI1: See Byte 16 18 Behavior of DI2: See Byte 16 19 Frequency of synchronization: Reserved2 Frequency of Capture function: Input delay: 0000B: None 0B: Once 0B: Once 0010B: 0.1 ms 1B: Periodic 1B: Periodic 0001B: 0.05 ms 0011B: 0.4 ms 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101B: 1.6 ms 0110B: 3.2 ms 0111B: 12.8 ms 1000B: 20 ms 1001 to 1111B: Not permitted 20...43 Values 20...23 High counting limit: DWORD: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 24...27 Comparison value 0: Operating mode Counting: DWORD: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH; Measuring operating mode: REAL: Floating point number in the configured unit of the measured variable 28...31 Comparison value 1: Operating mode Counting: DWORD: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D: or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH; Measuring operating mode: REAL: Floating point number in the configured unit of the measured variable 32...35 Start value: DWORD: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 36...39 Low counting limit: DWORD: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 40...43 Update time: DWORD: Value range in s: 0 to 25000000D 44 44 Counter behavior at limits and gate start Reaction to gate start: Reaction to violation of a counting limit: Reset when counting limit is violated: 00B: Set to start value 000B: Stop counting 000B: To opposite counting limit 01B: Continue with current value 001B: Continue counting 001B: To start value 10 to 11B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 95 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 45 45 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Specify measured value Reserved2) Time base for velocity measurement: Measured variable: 000B: 1 ms 00B: Frequency 001B: 10 ms 01B: Period 010B: 100 ms 10B: Velocity 011B: 1 s 11B: Not permitted 100B: 60 s/1 min 101 to 111B: Not permitted 46 Increments per unit: 47 WORD: Value range: 1 to 65535D 48 Set hysteresis range: Value range: 0 to 255D 49...51 Reserved2 1 You activate the respective parameter by setting the associated bit to 1. 2 Reserved bits must be set to 0 3 In isochronous mode, the parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameter in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. 4 Applies to: Set function of DI = 001B; 010B; 011B; 101B Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 96 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of the data record 128 in Fast Mode The following table shows you the structure of data record 128 for TM Count 1x24V for Fast Mode. The values in byte 0 to byte 3 are fixed and must not be changed. Table A- 2 Parameter data record 128: "Fast Mode" operating mode Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 0 Major Version = 0 Bit 0 Minor Version = 1 1 Length of the parameter data per channel = 48 2 Reserved2 3 Reserved2 4 4 Bit 1 Header Operating mode Reserved2 Operating mode: 0000B: Not permitted 0001B: Counting / Position input 0010 to 1111B: Not permitted 5 5 Basic parameters Reserved2 Enable additional diagnostic interrupts1) Reaction to CPU STOP: 00B: Output substitute value 01B: Keep last value 10B: Continue operation 11B: Not permitted Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 97 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 6...7 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter inputs (parameters for incremental and pulse encoders) Sensor type: Signal evaluation: Signal type: 00B: Sourcing output 00B: Single 0000B: Pulse (A) 01B: Sinking output 01B: Double 0001B: Pulse (A) and direction (B) 10B: Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) 10B: Quadruple 0010B: Count up (A), count down (B) 11B: Not permitted 11B: Not permitted 0011B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B, N) 0101 to 1111B: Not permitted 7 Reaction to signal N: 00B: No reaction to signal N Invert direction1 01B: Synchronization at signal N Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break1 Filter frequency3: 0000B: 100 Hz 0001B: 200 Hz 0010B: 500 Hz 0011B: 1 kHz 10 to 11B: Not permitted 0100B: 2 kHz 0101B: 5 kHz 0110B: 10 kHz 0111B: 20 kHz 1000B: 50 kHz 1001B: 100 kHz 1010B: 200 kHz 1011 to 1111B: Not permitted 8...9 Reserved2 10...15 Behavior of a DQ 10 Set output (DQ1): Set output (DQ0): 0000B: Digital output without function 0000B: Digital output without function 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0100B: Between comparison value 0 and 1 0100B to 1111B: Not permitted 0101 to 1111B: Not permitted 11 Count direction (DQ1): Count direction (DQ0): 00B: Reserved 00B: Reserved 01B: Up 01B: Up 10B: Down 10B: Down 11B: In both directions 11B: In both directions Reserved2 Reserved2 12 Pulse duration (DQ0): 13 UINT: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D 14 Pulse duration (DQ1): 15 UINT: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D Substitute value for DQ1 Substitute value for DQ0 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 98 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 16 16 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Behavior of DI0 Reserved2 Edge selection (DI0): 00B: Not permitted5 01B: At rising edge 10B: At falling edge 11B: Not permitted Select level (DI0): Reserved2 Set function of DI (DI0): 000B: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) 0B: Active with high level 001B: Gate start (edge-triggered) 010B: Gate stop (edge-triggered) 1B: Active with low level 011B: Synchronization3 100B: Enable synchronization at signal N 101B: Not permitted 110B: Digital input without function 111B: Not permitted 17 Behavior of DI1: See Byte 16 18 Behavior of DI2: See Byte 16 19 Frequency of synchronization: Count direction for synchronization Reserved2 Input delay: 0B: Once 00B: Not permitted 0000B: None 1B: Periodic 01B: Up 0001B: 0.05 ms 10B: Down 0010B: 0.1 ms 11B: In both directions 0011B: 0.4 ms 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101B: 1.6 ms 0110B: 3.2 ms 0111B: 12.8 ms 1000B: 20 ms 1001 to 1111B: Not permitted 20...43 Values 20...23 High counting limit: DWORD: Value range: 1 to 33554431D or 1 to 01FFFFFFH 24...27 Comparison value 0: DWORD: Value range: 0 to 33554431D or 0 to 01FFFFFFH 28...31 Comparison value 1: DWORD: Value range: 0 to 33554431D or 0 to 01FFFFFFH 32...35 Start value: DWORD: Value range: 0 to 33554431D or 0 to 01FFFFFFH 36...39 Low counting limit: DWORD: Value range: 0 to 33554430D or 0 to 01FFFFFEH 40...43 Reserved2 Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 99 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 44 44 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter behavior at limits and gate start Reaction to gate start: Reaction to violation of a counting limit: Reset when counting limit is violated: 00B: Set to start value 000B: Stop counting 000B: To opposite counting limit 01B: Continue with current value 001B: Continue counting 001B: To start value 10 to 11B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted 45...47 Reserved2 48 Set hysteresis range: Value range: 0 to 255D: 49...51 Reserved2 1 You activate the respective parameter by setting the associated bit to 1. 2 Reserved bits must be set to 0 3 In isochronous mode, the parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameter in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. 4 Applies to: Set function of DI = 001B; 010B; 011B Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 100 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error A.2 Parameter validation error If you make the parameter settings in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or in STEP 7 , the parameter values are checked before they are transferred to the technology module. This process prevents parameter errors. In other use cases, the technology module checks the transferred parameter data record. If the technology module finds invalid or inconsistent parameter values, it outputs an error code (see below). The new parameter data record is rejected in this case, and work continues with the current parameter values until a valid parameter data record has been transferred. WRREC When the CPU is in RUN, you can change the parameter data record with the instruction WRREC (Write Record). In case of errors, the WRREC instruction returns corresponding error codes in the STATUS parameter. Example: Let us assume that an invalid value, for example 9, is written to the module for the operating mode with WRREC. As a consequence, the module rejects the entire parameter data record. You can recognize this by evaluating the STATUS output parameter of the WRREC instruction. The STATUS output parameter is output as an ARRAY[1..4] of BYTE data with the value 16#DF80E111: Example of WRREC STATUS data Address Meaning DFH STATUS[1] Error when writing a data record via PROFINET IO (IEC 61158-6) 80H STATUS[2] Error when reading or writing a data record via PROFINET IO (IEC 61158-6) E1H STATUS[3] Module-specific error 11H STATUS[4] Error code from the table below: The "Operating mode" parameter has an invalid value. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 101 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error codes The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Table A- 3 Error codes for parameter validation Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Data record number unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or not accessible * Check whether module is inserted or removed. * Check assigned values for parameters of the WRREC instruction. * Check byte 0. * Enter valid values. * Check byte 1. * Correct the length of the parameter blocks. DF DF 80 80 E0 E0 01 02 Wrong version Error in the header information DF 80 E1 00 Parameter invalid: No detailed information available Check all parameter values. DF 80 E1 11 "Operating mode" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 12 "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 13 "Signal type" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 14 "Sensor type" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 15 "Filter frequency" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 16 "Reaction to signal N" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 17 "Set function of DI" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 18 "Set function of DI" parameter configured the same for DI0 and DI1. Enter different parameter values for DI0 and DI1. DF 80 E1 19 * "Edge selection" parameter invalid * Enter valid parameter value. * "Gate start (edge-triggered)" configured as function for DIm and "At rising and falling edge" * Only configure "Gate start (edge-triggered)" as function for DIm together with "At rising edge" or "At falling edge". * "Gate stop (edge-triggered)" configured as function for DIm and "At rising and falling edge" * Only configure "Gate stop (edge-triggered)" as function for DIm together with "At rising edge" or "At falling edge". * "Synchronization" configured as function for DIm and "At rising and falling edge" * Only configure "Synchronization" as function for DIm together with "At rising edge" or "At falling edge". DF 80 E1 1A "Input delay" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1B "Set output" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1C "Count direction" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1D "Reset when counting limit is violated" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1E "Reaction to violation of a counting limit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 20 "Reaction to gate start" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 102 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF DF DF DF 80 80 80 80 E1 E1 E1 E1 211,5 221,5 23 24 * Low counting limit > comparison value 0 * Low counting limit < comparison value 0 * Low counting limit > comparison value 1 * Low counting limit < comparison value 1 * Counting high limit < comparison value 0 * High counting limit > comparison value 0 * Counting high limit < comparison value 1 * High counting limit > comparison value 1 * "Start value" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value: * "Low counting limit" parameter invalid * "Start value" parameter invalid * "High counting limit" parameter invalid Start value > low counting limit Enter valid parameter value: Start value < high counting limit DF 80 E1 25 "Update time" parameter invalid Enter parameter value from range 0 to 25000000D. DF 80 E1 262 "Reference speed" parameter invalid Enter parameter value from range 6.00 to 210000.00D. DF 80 E1 27 "Measured variable" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 28 "Time base for velocity measurement" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 29 "Increments per unit" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 2A * "High counting limit" parameter invalid * "Low counting limit" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 0" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 1" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 2B3 Enter valid parameter value: Low counting limit < high counting limit Enter valid parameter value: Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 DF 80 E1 2C "Signal evaluation" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 2D Enter valid parameter value. * "Between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ0 * Configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" only for DQ1 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ0 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured only for DQ1 * "Between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ1, but "Use by user program" not configured for DQ0 * Only configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" for DQ1 when "Use by user program" is configured for DQ0 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ1, but "Use by user program" not configured for DQ0 * Only configure "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" for DQ1 when "Use by user program" is configured for DQ0 DF 80 E1 2E "Capture" configured for DIm in "Measuring" operating mode Do not configure "Capture" for DIm in "Measuring" operating mode DF 80 E1 364 "Counting high limit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 374,5 * "Comparison value 0" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 1" parameter invalid DF DF 80 80 Enter valid parameter value. E1 384 "Start value" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. E1 394 "Counting low limit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC 103 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 3A4 "Count direction for synchronization" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 F0 Reserved bit is not set to 0. Set reserved bit to 0. 1 Only for "Counting" operating mode 2 Only for "Position input for technology object "Motion Control"" operating mode 3 Only for DQ1 functions "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" 4 Only for operating mode "Fast Mode" 5 Not for DQm function "Use by user program" or "Digital output without function" Technology Module TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0) 104 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33002339-AC ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Configuring/address space Interrupts/diagnostic 5 ___________________ messages 6 ___________________ Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record 06/2018 A5E33015755-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33015755-AD 05/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual includes module-specific information on wiring, diagnostics and the technical specifications of the technology module. General information regarding the design and commissioning of the ET 200SP is available in the ET 200SP system manual. The counting and measuring functions as well as the position input of the TM PosInput 1 technology module are described in more detail in the Counting, measurement and position input (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) function manual. Conventions Please observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 3 Preface Open Source Software Open-source software is used in the firmware of the product described. Open Source Software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the product described, including the open-source software contained in it, pursuant to the conditions applicable to the product. Siemens accepts no liability for the use of the open source software over and above the intended program sequence, or for any faults caused by modifications to the software. For legal reasons, we are obliged to publish the original text of the license conditions and copyright notices. Please read the information on this on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740777). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 4 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 3 4 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 2.2.1.2 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 Functions ................................................................................................................................15 Acquisition of encoder signals ................................................................................................15 Position input with SSI absolute encoder ...............................................................................15 Counting with incremental or pulse encoder ..........................................................................17 Measured value determination ...............................................................................................18 Switching the outputs at comparison values ..........................................................................18 Position input for Motion Control .............................................................................................19 Fast Mode ...............................................................................................................................19 Additional functions .................................................................................................................20 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 21 3.1 SSI encoder signals ................................................................................................................23 3.2 RS422 encoder signals ...........................................................................................................25 3.3 TTL encoder signals ...............................................................................................................28 Configuring/address space .................................................................................................................... 31 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.3.1 4.1.3.2 4.1.4 4.1.5 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object ...........................................31 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................31 Reaction to CPU STOP ..........................................................................................................32 Parameter setting....................................................................................................................33 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) .......................................................................................34 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) ...........................................................................38 Address space ........................................................................................................................44 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................44 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object .............................................................46 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................46 Parameter setting....................................................................................................................47 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) .......................................................................................47 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) ...........................................................................50 Address space ........................................................................................................................51 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................52 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.3.1 4.3.3.2 Manual operation (without technology object) ........................................................................53 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................53 Reaction to CPU STOP ..........................................................................................................55 Parameter setting....................................................................................................................56 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) .......................................................................................57 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) ...........................................................................61 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 5 Table of contents 5 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 4.3.6 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 66 Control and feedback interface .............................................................................................. 66 Assignment of the control interface........................................................................................ 66 Assignment of the feedback interface .................................................................................... 69 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 73 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.3.1 4.4.3.2 4.4.3.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 Fast Mode .............................................................................................................................. 74 Configuring ............................................................................................................................. 75 Reaction to CPU STOP ......................................................................................................... 77 Parameter setting ................................................................................................................... 78 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder)....................................................................................... 79 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) .......................................................................... 82 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 86 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 97 Assignment of the feedback interface .................................................................................... 97 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 99 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................100 5.1 Status and error display ....................................................................................................... 100 5.2 Diagnostic alarms................................................................................................................. 103 5.3 Hardware interrupts ............................................................................................................. 107 6 Technical specifications .......................................................................................................................109 A Parameter data record .........................................................................................................................118 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .......................................... 118 A.2 Parameter validation error ................................................................................................... 130 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 6 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 7 Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 8 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 9 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 10 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 Firmware version This manual describes the properties of the module with firmware version V1.3. View of the module Module type and designation LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for encoder supply Figure 2-1 LED for supply voltage Function class Module type color coding Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color-coded labels Article number View of the TM PosInput 1 module Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The TM PosInput 1 technology module has the following properties: Technical properties - One channel - Interfaces: SSI encoder signals D und C or RS422/TTL encoder signals A, B and N 24 V encoder supply, short-circuit-proof Digital inputs signals DI0 and DI1 Digital output signals DQ0 and DQ1 Supply voltage L+ - Count range: 32 bits - Channel-by-channel monitoring of encoder signals for wire break, short-circuit and faulty supply voltage - Hardware interrupts configurable - Input filters for suppression of interferences at encoder inputs and digital inputs can be configured Supported encoder/signal types - SSI absolute encoder - RS422/TTL incremental encoder with N signal - RS422/TTL incremental encoder without N signal - RS422/TTL pulse encoder with direction signal - RS422/TTL pulse encoder without direction signal - RS422/TTL pulse encoder with up/down count signal Supported system functions - Isochronous mode - Firmware update - Identification data I&M Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 12 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Product overview 2.1 Properties The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions Function Firmware version of module Configurable as of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 GSD PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Firmware update V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X -- I&M identification data V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X X Parameter reassignment in RUN V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X X Isochronous mode V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 -- -- Counting/measuring V1.0 or higher V13 V5.5 SP4 X X Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object V1.0 or higher V13 -- -- -- Position input for "Motion Control" technology object V1.0 or higher V13 -- -- -- Central operation on CPU 151xSP V1.1 or higher V13 SP1 -- -- -- Fast Mode V1.2 or higher V14 SP1 V5.6 X X or V14 with HSP0199 or V5.5 SP4 with HSP0240 V5.0 or V5.5 SP3 with HSP0240 V1.0 Operating with "Measuring input" technology object V1.3 or higher V15 with HSP0256 -- -- -- Position value range of 32 bits V1.3 or higher V15 with HSP0256 -- X X Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessories can be used with the module and are not included in the scope of delivery: Labeling strip Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connector A BaseUnit of the A0 type is required to operate the technology module. You can find an overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the technology module in the product information for the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864). For detailed information on the installation procedure, refer to the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 14 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 Acquisition of encoder signals 2.2.1.1 Position input with SSI absolute encoder You can use the TM PosInput 1 technology module with an SSI absolute encoder for position input. The technology module reads the position via a synchronous, serial interface from the SSI absolute encoder and sends it to the controller. You can switch the digital outputs of the technology module exactly at defined position values, independently of the user program. Position input with an SSI absolute encoder does not involve gate control. Gray-dual conversion Gray-code and dual-code SSI absolute encoders are supported. Range for position value You can specify a frame length of 10 bits to 40 bits for the SSI absolute encoder. The configurable bit numbers of the LSB and the MSB of the position value in the frame define the value range. The technology module can read in a position value with a maximum length of 32 bits and transfer it to the controller. Complete SSI frame Instead of having a measured variable returned, you can choose to have the least significant 32 bit of the current unprocessed SSI frame returned. This provides you with encoderspecific additional bits, such as error bits, in addition to the position value. If the SSI frame is shorter than 32 bits, the complete SSI frame is returned right-aligned and the top unused bits are returned with "0" in the feedback interface. Capture (Latch) You can configure the edge of an external reference signal that triggers saving of the current position value as a Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Both edges of a digital input The "Frequency of Capture function" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 15 Product overview 2.2 Functions Measuring input If you use Position input for Motion Control (Page 19), you can use the "Measuring input" technology object to execute a measuring input function with a hardware digital input. Hardware interrupts The technology module can trigger a hardware interrupt in the CPU when a comparison event, zero crossing and/or direction reversal occurs. You can specify which events during operation are to trigger a hardware interrupt. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 16 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.1.2 Counting with incremental or pulse encoder Counting is the detecting and adding up of events. The counters of the technology module detect encoder signals and pulses and evaluate them accordingly. The count direction can be specified using encoder or pulse signals or through the user program. You can control the counting processes with the digital inputs. In addition, you can read the signal state of the respective digital input via the feedback interface. You can specify the counter characteristics using the functions described below. Counting limits The counting limits define the counter value range used. The counting limits are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user program. You can configure the behavior of the counter at the counting limits. Start value You can configure a start value within the counting limits. The start value can be modified during runtime with the user program. Gate control You can define the time window in which the count signals are acquired with the hardware gate (HW gate) and software gate (SW gate). Capture (Latch) You can configure an external reference signal edge that triggers the saving of the current counter value as Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Both edges of a digital input Rising edge of the N signal at the encoder input The "Frequency of Capture function" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. Measuring input If you use Position input for Motion Control (Page 19), you can use the "Measuring input" technology object to execute a measuring input function with a hardware digital input. Hardware interrupts The technology module can trigger a hardware interrupt in the CPU when a comparison event, zero crossing and/or direction reversal occurs. You can specify which events during operation are to trigger a hardware interrupt. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 17 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Measured value determination The following high-accuracy measurement functions are available (accuracy up to 100 ppm): Frequency measurement with the unit of hertz Period measurement with the unit of seconds Velocity measurement with a flexibly adaptable unit Complete SSI frame instead of a measured quantity Update time You can configure the interval at which the technology module updates the measured values cyclically as the update time. Gate control for incremental and pulse encoders You can define the time window in which the count signals are acquired with the hardware gate (HW gate) and software gate (SW gate). 2.2.3 Switching the outputs at comparison values The available digital outputs DQ0 and DQ1 can be directly activated/switched by the specified comparison values or via the user program. The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user program. This enables very fast reaction times to be achieved. Comparison values in the Counting/Position input operating mode In Counting/Position input operating mode you specify two position or counter values as comparison values depending on the encoder. If the current position or counter value meets the configured comparison condition, the corresponding digital output can be set to directly initiate control processes in the process. Comparison values in the Measuring mode You define two comparison values in the Measuring mode. If the current measured value meets the configured comparison condition, the corresponding digital output can be set to directly initiate control processes in the process. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 18 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.4 Position input for Motion Control You can use the technology module for position detection for the following axis technology objects of S7-1500 Motion Control : TO_PositioningAxis TO_SynchronousAxis TO_ExternalEncoder In this operating mode, you can use the measuring input technology object (TO_MeasuringInput) to execute a measuring input function with hardware digital input DI1. Additional information You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in the following: Function manual S7-1500 Motion Control available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59381279) Function manual S7-1500T Motion Control available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) 2.2.5 Fast Mode You can use the technology module in Fast Mode for very fast acquisition of counter or position value with compressed functionality. A reduced feedback interface but no control interface is available in Fast Mode. This allows you to use a shorter send clock for the CPU. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 19 Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.6 Additional functions Synchronization for incremental and pulse encoder You can configure the edge of an external reference signal that loads the counter with the specified start value. The following external signals can trigger a synchronization: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input depending on the level of the assigned digital input The "Frequency of synchronization" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. Hysteresis You can specify a hysteresis for the comparison values within which a digital output will be prevented from switching again. Diagnostic interrupt The technology module can trigger diagnostic interrupts. You enable the diagnostic interrupts in the device configuration. Input filter To suppress interference, you can configure an input filter for the RS422/TTL encoder inputs and for the digital inputs. Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. This system function enables position, counter and measured values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 20 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 3 Wiring Das TM PosInput 1 is used with a BaseUnit of type A0 (article number 6ES7193-6BPx00xA0). You connect the encoder signals, the digital input and output signals and the encoder supplies to the BaseUnit of the technology module. The supply voltage feed on the light BaseUnit BU...D of the associated potential group supplies the module and the digital outputs, and generates the encoder supply voltage. BaseUnit The BaseUnit is not included in the scope of delivery of the module and must be ordered separately. You can find an overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the technology module in the product information for the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864). You can find information about selecting a suitable BaseUnit in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) device manual. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit, connecting cable shields, etc. in the Connecting section of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Supply voltage L+/M You connect the supply voltage to terminals L+ and M on a light BaseUnit. For a dark BaseUnit, the supply voltage of the module to the left is used. An internal protection circuit protects the technology module from reverse polarity of the supply voltage. The technology module monitors whether the supply voltage is connected. Encoder supply For supplying the encoders and sensors connected to the digital inputs, the technology module provides a 24 V DC supply voltage at output 24VDC (terminal 15) with reference to M (terminals 14 and 16). The voltage is monitored for short-circuit and overload. Digital inputs DI0 and DI1 The digital inputs are used for gate control, synchronization and the Capture function. The digital inputs are not isolated from each other. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 21 Wiring Input delay for digital inputs In order to suppress noise you can configure an input delay for the digital inputs. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you must use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Digital outputs DQ0 and DQ1 The digital outputs are not isolated from each other. The digital outputs are 24 V sourcing outputs in reference to M and can carry a rated load current of 0.5 A. They are protected against overload and short-circuit. Relays and contactors can be directly connected without an external protective circuit. You can find information on the maximum possible operating frequencies and the inductive loads connected to the digital outputs in section Technical specifications (Page 109). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 22 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Wiring 3.1 SSI encoder signals 3.1 SSI encoder signals SSI encoder signals The TM PosInput 1 can process SSI encoder signals. These are designated with data and clock and use the RS422 signal standard. An RS422 encoder signal uses a pair of wires and the information is transmitted as differential voltage. This ensures interference-free transmission of RS422 encoder signals even with high frequencies over long distances. The RS422 wire pairs must be twisted together in the cable. The SSI encoder signals data and clock are connected via the D and C terminals. The N terminals remain unconnected. The inputs are not isolated from each other. The inputs are isolated from the backplane bus. Pin assignment of the BaseUnit The table below shows the pin assignment, using the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B as an example. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment of the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B Designation Signal name View Signal name Designation SSI data signal +D +A/D 1 2 DI0 Digital input DI0 SSI data signal -D -A/D 3 4 DI1 Digital input DI1 SSI clock signal +C +B/C 5 6 -- SSI clock signal -C -B/C 7 8 DQ0 Digital output DQ0 -- +N 9 10 DQ1 Digital output DQ1 -- -N 11 12 -- -- -- -- 13 14 M Encoder supply 24 V DC 24VDC 15 16 M Ground for encoder supply, digital inputs and digital outputs Supply voltage DC 24 V L+ M Ground for supply voltage -- Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 23 Wiring 3.1 SSI encoder signals Block diagram You must ground the shields of the cables between encoder and technology module both through the shield terminal on the BaseUnit (shield bracket and terminal) and also on the encoder. The figure below shows the block diagram of the technology module with one connected SSI absolute encoder. Electrical isolation Shield connection on the BaseUnit Technology Backplane bus interface module of the technology module Backplane bus Input filter SSI absolute encoder Twisted in pairs Figure 3-1 Block diagram with SSI absolute encoder Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 24 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Wiring 3.2 RS422 encoder signals 3.2 RS422 encoder signals RS422 encoder signals/count signals The TM PosInput 1 can process encoder signals that use the RS422 signal standard. These counting encoder signals are designated with the letters A, B and N. An RS422 encoder signal uses a pair of wires and the counter information is transmitted as differential voltage. This ensures interference-free transmission of RS422 encoder signals even with high frequencies over long distances. The RS422 wire pairs must be twisted together in the cable. You can connect the following encoder types: RS422 incremental encoder with N signal: The encoder signals A, B and N are connected using the correspondingly marked terminals. A and B are the two incremental signals phase-shifted by 90. N is the zero mark signal that supplies one pulse per revolution. RS422 incremental encoder without N signal: The encoder signals A and B are connected using the correspondingly marked terminals. A and B are the two incremental signals phase-shifted by 90. The N terminals remain unconnected. RS422 pulse encoder without direction signal: The counting signal is connected to the A terminals. The count direction can be specified via the control interface. The B and N terminals remain unconnected. RS422 pulse encoder with direction signal: The counting signal is connected to the A terminals. The direction signal is connected to the B terminals. Counting down takes place at a high level of the direction signal. The N terminals remain unconnected. RS422 pulse encoder with up/down count signal The up counting signal is connected to the A terminals. The down counting signal is connected to the B terminals. The N terminals remain unconnected. The inputs are not isolated from each other. The inputs are isolated from the backplane bus. Note The RS422 signal standard offers greater interference immunity than the TTL signal standard. If your incremental encoder or pulse encoder supports the RS422 and the TTL signal standard, we recommend using the RS422 signal standard. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 25 Wiring 3.2 RS422 encoder signals Pin assignment of the BaseUnit The table below shows the pin assignment, using the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B as an example. Table 3- 2 Pin assignment of theBaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B Designation RS422 incremental encoder with signal N without signal N Signal name RS422 pulse encoder with direction signal View Signal name Designation without direction signal up/down Encoder signal +A Counting signal A Up counting signal +A +A/D 1 2 DI0 Digital input DI0 Encoder signal A Counting signal -A Up counting signal -A -A/D 3 4 DI1 Digital input DI1 Encoder signal +B Direction signal +B -- Down counting signal +B +B/C 5 6 -- -- Encoder signal B Direction signal B -- Down counting signal -B -B/C 7 8 DQ0 Digital output DQ0 Digital output DQ1 Encoder signal +N -- +N 9 10 DQ1 Encoder signal N -- -N 11 12 -- -- -- 13 14 M Encoder supply 24 V DC 24VDC 15 16 M Ground for encoder supply, digital inputs and digital outputs Supply voltage DC 24 V L+ -- M Ground for supply voltage Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 26 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Wiring 3.2 RS422 encoder signals Block diagram You must ground the shields of the cables between encoder and technology module both through the shield terminal on the BaseUnit (shield bracket and terminal) and also on the encoder. The figure below shows the block diagram of the technology module with one connected RS422 incremental encoder. Electrical isolation Shield connection on the BaseUnit Technology Backplane bus interface module of the technology module Backplane bus Input filter RS422 incremental encoder Twisted in pairs Figure 3-2 Block diagram with RS422 incremental encoder Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 27 Wiring 3.3 TTL encoder signals 3.3 TTL encoder signals TTL encoder signals/counting signals The TM PosInput 1 can process encoder signals that use the TTL signal standard. The counting encoder signals are designated with the letters A, B and N. An encoder signal with TTL standard uses a single cable. You can connect the following encoder types: TTL incremental encoder with N signal: The encoder signals A, B and N are connected using the correspondingly marked terminals. A and B are the two incremental signals phase-shifted by 90. N is the zero mark signal that supplies one pulse per revolution. TTL incremental encoder without N signal: The encoder signals A and B are connected using the correspondingly marked terminals. A and B are the two incremental signals phase-shifted by 90. The N terminal remains unconnected. TTL pulse encoder without direction signal: The counting signal is connected to the A terminal. The count direction can be specified via the control interface. The B and N terminals remain unconnected. TTL pulse encoder with direction signal: The counting signal is connected to the A terminal. The direction signal is connected to the B terminal. Counting down takes place at a high level of the direction signal. The N terminal remains unconnected. TTL pulse encoder with up/down counting signal The up counting signal is connected to the A terminal. The down counting signal is connected to the B terminal. The N terminal remains unconnected. The inputs are not isolated from each other. The inputs are isolated from the backplane bus. Note The RS422 signal standard offers greater interference immunity than the TTL signal standard. If your incremental encoder or pulse encoder supports the RS422 and the TTL signal standard, we recommend using the RS422 signal standard. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 28 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Wiring 3.3 TTL encoder signals Pin assignment of the BaseUnit The table below shows the pin assignment, using the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B as an example. Table 3- 3 Pin assignment of the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B Designation TTL incremental encoder with signal N without signal N Signal name TTL pulse encoder with direction signal without direction signal up/down Counting signal A Up counting signal A View Signal name Designation +A/D 1 2 DI0 Digital input DI0 -A/D 3 4 DI1 Digital input DI1 +B/C 5 6 -- -- -B/C 7 8 DQ0 Digital output DQ0 +N 9 10 DQ1 Digital output DQ1 -- -N 11 12 -- -- -- -- 13 14 M Encoder supply 24 V DC 24VDC 15 16 M Ground for encoder supply, digital inputs and digital outputs Supply voltage DC 24 V L+ Encoder signal A -- Encoder signal B Direction signal B -- -- Encoder signal N -- Down counting signal B M Ground for supply voltage Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 29 Wiring 3.3 TTL encoder signals Block diagram You must ground the shields of the cables between encoder and technology module both through the shield terminal on the BaseUnit (shield bracket and terminal) and also on the encoder. The figure below shows the block diagram of the technology module with one connected TTL incremental encoder. Electrical isolation Shield connection on the BaseUnit Technology Backplane bus interface module of the technology module Backplane bus Input filter TTL incremental encoder Figure 3-3 Block diagram with TTL incremental encoder Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 30 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 4 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The technology object is used to control and monitor the functions of the technology module. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Central operation with a CPU 151xSP Components required Configuration software In the user program For incremental/pulse encoder: * S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): * TM PosInput 1 * Device configuration with hardware configuration * Parameter setting with High_Speed_Counter or SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * * S7-1500 automation system ET 200SP distributed I/O system TM PosInput 1 High_Speed_Counter instruction For SSI absolute encoder: SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction Additional information You can find a detailed description of the counting and measurement functions and their configuration in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 31 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.2 Reaction to CPU STOP Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP in the device configuration with the basic parameters. Table 4- 1 Reaction of technology module to CPU STOP Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed or the position value is read in. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the "At comparison value for a pulse duration" function is set at CPU STOP, the digital output is reset after the pulse duration elapses. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 32 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.3 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. When parameters are assigned in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and data record 128 (Page 118). You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration in the hardware configuration. "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Insert the High_Speed_Counter or SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object from the project tree in folder "Technology objects > Add new object > Counting and measurement". You can find information on configuring with a technology object in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). 4. Open the configuration of the respective technology object, e.g. using the Configuration button in the respective instruction for the technology object. 5. Set the parameters of the technology object. 6. Download the project to the CPU. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 33 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.3.1 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with SSI absolute encoder The following parameter settings are possible in the hardware configuration: Table 4- 2 Settable parameters and their default setting (SSI absolute encoder) Parameter Potential group Value range * Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) * Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: New Capture value available * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Direction reversal * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Zero crossing * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ0 occurred * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ1 occurred * Deactivated * Activated Reaction to CPU STOP Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) No Module Output substitute value Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 34 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object The following parameter settings are possible in the technology object: Table 4- 3 Settable parameters and their default setting (SSI absolute encoder) Parameter Value range Frame length 10 bits...40 bits Code type * Gray * Dual * 125 kHz * 250 kHz * 500 kHz Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity * 1 MHz * 1.5 MHz * 2 MHz * Automatically * 16 s * 32 s * 48 s * 64 s * None * Even * Odd Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) 13 bits Yes Channel Gray Yes Channel 125 kHz Yes Channel Automatically Yes Channel None Yes Channel Bit number LSB of the position value 0...38 0 Yes Channel Bit number MSB of the position value 1...39 12 Yes Channel Invert direction (counter inputs) * Deactivated Deactivated Yes Channel * Activated Set function of DI * Capture DI0, DI1: Yes Channel * Digital input without function Digital input without function * None 0.1 ms Yes Channel * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms Input delay for digital inputs Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 35 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Edge selection for DI Value range * At rising edge * At falling edge * At rising and falling edge Frequency of Capture func- * tion * Once Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) At rising edge Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Periodic Comparison value 0 -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Comparison value 1 -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Operating mode * Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference No Channel * Use measured value as reference Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference * Use by user program DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel * Between comparison value and high limit / measured value >= comparison value * Between comparison value and low limit / measured value <= comparison value * At comparison value for a pulse duration * After set command from CPU until comparison value * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 * Up In both directions Yes Channel * Down * In both directions 5000 (corresponds to 0.5 s) Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Set output Count direction of DQ function Pulse duration [ms/10] 0...65535 Substitute value for DQ0 * 0 * 1 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ1 Hysteresis (in increments) 0...255 Between comparison value and high limit Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 36 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Value range Measured variable * Frequency * Period * Velocity * Complete SSI frame Update time [ms] of measuring function 0...25000 Time base for velocity measurement * 1 ms * 10 ms * 100 ms * 1s * 60 s Increments per unit 1...65535 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Frequency Yes Channel 10 Yes Channel 60 s Yes Channel 1 Yes Channel NOTICE Too high an encoder speed can supply the wrong rotation direction If an SSI absolute encoder rotates so fast that more than half the value range is covered within one module cycle1, the velocity and rotation direction are no longer calculated correctly. As a result, the following may function incorrectly: * DQ functions * Feedback bits EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_ZERO, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1 and STS_DIR 1 Non-isochronous mode: 500 s; isochronous mode: PROFINET cycle time Note If you use an SSI absolute encoder whose value range does not correspond to a power of 2, the calculated velocity measurement can be incorrect at the moment of the overflow. Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection in sections Basic parameters and Configuring the SSI_Absolute_Encoder available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 37 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.3.2 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with incremental or pulse encoder The following parameter settings are possible in the hardware configuration: Table 4- 4 Settable parameters and their default setting (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameter Potential group Value range * Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) * Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: New Capture value available * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Synchronization of the counter by an external signal * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Gate start * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Gate stop * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Overflow (high counting limit violated) * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt:Underflow (low counting limit violated) * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Direction reversal * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Zero crossing * Deactivated * Activated Reaction to CPU STOP Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) No Module Output substitute value Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 38 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Value range Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ0 occurred * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ1 occurred * Deactivated * Activated Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 39 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object The following parameter settings are possible in the technology object: Table 4- 5 Settable parameters and their default setting (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameter Signal type Value range * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) * Single * Double * Quadruple Invert direction (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Filter frequency for counter inputs * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * RS422, symmetrical * TTL (5 V), asymmetrical * No reaction to signal N * Synchronization at signal N * Capture at signal N * Once * Periodic Signal evaluation for counter inputs Interface standard Reaction to signal N Frequency of synchronization Frequency of Capture func- * tion * Once Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Pulse (A) and direction (B) Yes Channel Single Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel 1 MHz Yes Channel RS422, symmetrical Yes Channel No reaction to signal N Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Periodic Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 40 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Counting high limit Value range Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 Yes Channel Start value -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Counting low limit -2147483648...2147483647 -2147483648 Yes Channel Reaction to violation of a counting limit * Stop counting Continue counting Yes Channel * Continue counting Reset when counting limit is violated * To opposite counting limit Yes Channel * To start value To opposite counting limit Reaction to gate start * Set to start value Yes Channel * Continue with current value Continue with current value * Gate start/stop (level-triggered) Yes Channel * Gate start (edge-triggered) * Gate stop (edge-triggered) * Synchronization * Enable synchronization at signal N * Capture * Digital input without function 0.1 ms Yes Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Active with high level Yes Channel Continue counting Yes Channel Set function of DI Input delay for digital inputs * None * DI0: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) * DI1: Digital input without function * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * At rising edge * At falling edge * At rising and falling edge * Active with high level * Active with low level Behavior of counter value after Capture with DI * Continue counting * Set to start value and continue counting Comparison value 0 -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Comparison value 1 -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Edge selection for DI Select level for DI Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 41 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Parameter Operating mode Set output Count direction of DQ function Value range * Use count value as reference * Use measured value as reference * Use by user program * Between comparison value and high limit / measured value >= comparison value * Between comparison value and low limit / measured value <= comparison value * At comparison value for a pulse duration * After set command from CPU until comparison value * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 * Up * Down * In both directions Pulse duration [ms/10] 0...65535 Substitute value for DQ0 * 0 * 1 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ1 Hysteresis (in increments) Measured variable 0...255 * Frequency * Period * Velocity Update time [ms] of measuring function 0...25000 Time base for velocity measurement * 1 ms * 10 ms * 100 ms Increments per unit * 1s * 60 s 1...65535 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Use count value as reference No Channel DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel In both directions Yes Channel 5000 (corresponds to 0.5 s) Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Between comparison value and high limit 0 Yes Channel Frequency Yes Channel 10 Yes Channel 60 s Yes Channel 1 Yes Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 42 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection in sections Basic parameters and Configuring the High_Speed_Counter available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 43 Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object 4.1.4 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 6 Size of input and output addresses of the TM PosInput 1 when operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Range Inputs Outputs 16 bytes 12 bytes The control and feedback interface is compatible with manual operation (Page 53) and is controlled by the High_Speed_Counter or SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction. 4.1.5 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. This system function enables position, counter and measured values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. Use an OB of type "Synchronous Cycle" (e.g. OB61) in this operating mode. The High_Speed_Counter or SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction is called in the assigned OB. The update time for the measured value is synchronized with the system cycle in a suitable ratio and, if necessary, adapted in length. If you set "0", the measured value is updated once per system cycle. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the position or counter value and the measured value as well as status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 44 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.1 Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the following parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Filter frequency Frame length Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change one or more of the indicated parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 45 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object 4.2.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The technology object is used to control and monitor the functions of the technology module. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Central operation with a CPU 151xSP Components required Configuration software In the user program Motion Control instructions * S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): * TM PosInput 1 * Device configuration with hardware configuration * Parameter setting with axis and measuring input technology objects Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * * S7-1500 automation system ET 200SP distributed I/O system TM PosInput 1 Additional information You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in the following: Function manual S7-1500 Motion Control available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59381279) Function manual S7-1500T Motion Control available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Motion Control > Motion Control (S7-1200, S7-1500)" You can find a description of configuring the technology module for position detection in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 46 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object 4.2.2 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters of the module in the hardware configuration. "Position input for "Motion Control" technology object" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Insert the axis technology object and, if necessary, the measuring input technology object from the project tree in folder "Technology objects > Add new object > Motion Control". You can find information on configuring with axis technology objects in function manual S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326). 4. Open the configuration of the axis technology object, e.g. using the Configuration button in the respective instruction for the technology object. 5. Set the parameters of the technology objects. 6. Download the project to the CPU. 4.2.2.1 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with SSI absolute encoder The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 7 Settable parameters and their default setting (SSI absolute encoder) Parameter Value range Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Potential group * Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) Invert direction (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Frame length 10 bits...40 bits Code type * Gray * Dual Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Module Deactivated Channel 13 bits Channel Gray Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 47 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object Parameter Value range Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity * 125 kHz * 250 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * 1.5 MHz * 2 MHz * Automatically * 16 s * 32 s * 48 s * 64 s * None * Even * Odd 125 kHz Channel Automatically Channel None Channel Bit number LSB of the position value 0...38 0 Channel Bit number MSB of the position value 1...39 12 Channel Measuring input DI1 DI1 Channel Steps per revolution 1...65535 1 Channel Number of revolutions1 is calculated automatically (read-only) -- Channel Reference speed 6.00...210000.00 U/min 3000.00 U/min Channel Deactivated Channel Deactivated Channel Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated 1 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher NOTICE Too high an encoder speed can falsify a position value The function of an axis technology object is based on the assumption that an SSI absolute encoder never changes by more than half the value range within one module cycle1. Ensure that this condition is always met when configuring your system. 1 Non-isochronous mode: 500 s; isochronous mode: PROFINET cycle time Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 48 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection, section Module parameters (position input for Motion Control) available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 49 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object 4.2.2.2 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with incremental or pulse encoder The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 8 Settable parameters and their default setting (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameter Value range Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Potential group * Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit) * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Invert direction (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Signal evaluation for counter inputs * Single * Double * Quadruple * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * RS422, symmetrical * TTL (5 V), asymmetrical Signal type Filter frequency for counter inputs Interface standard Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Module Pulse (A) and direction (B) Channel Deactivated Channel Single Channel 1 MHz Channel RS422, symmetrical Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 50 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object Parameter Value range Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Signal selection for reference mark 0 * DI0 DI0 Channel * Signal N of incremental encoder Measuring input DI1 DI1 Channel Increments per revolution / steps per revolution 1...65535 1 Channel Reference speed 6.00...210000.00 U/min 3000.00 U/min Channel Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break * Deactivated Deactivated Channel * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated Deactivated Channel * Activated Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection, section Module parameters (position input for Motion Control) available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). 4.2.3 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 9 Size of input and output addresses of the TM PosInput 1 with position input for "Motion Control" technology object Range Inputs Outputs 16 bytes 4 bytes Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 51 Configuring/address space 4.2 Position input for "Motion Control" technology object 4.2.4 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. Position and counter values can be acquired in a fixed system cycle with this system function. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. Use an OB of type "MC-Servo" in this operating mode. Isochronous mode is needed when using the output cam and cam track technology objects. When the measuring input technology is used in combination with hardware digital input DI1, isochronous mode is not needed. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the position or counter value as well as status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the following parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Filter frequency Frame length Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change one or more of the indicated parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 52 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with the configuration software. The functions of the technology module are controlled and checked by the user program via the control and feedback interface. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Components required Central operation with a CPU 151xSP * S7-1500 automation system * TM PosInput 1 Direct access to control Device configuration and parame- and feedback interface in ter setting with hardware configu- the I/O data ration S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * Distributed operation with an S7-300/400 CPU * TM PosInput 1 * S7-300/400 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM PosInput 1 Distributed operation * with an S7-1200 CPU * Distributed operation in a third-party system ET 200SP distributed I/O system S7-1200 automation system ET 200SP distributed I/O system Configuration software STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with HSP (up to firmware version V1.2) or GSD file STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration * TM PosInput 1 * Third-party automation system Third-party configuration software: ET 200SP distributed I/O Device configuration and paramesystem ter setting with GSD file TM PosInput 1 * * In the user program Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 53 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Additional information You can find a detailed description of the counting and measurement functions and their configuration in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) STEP 7 (TIA Portal) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". STEP 7 The Hardware Support Packages (HSP) supports the technology module up to firmware version V1.2. You can find the HSP for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/23183356) GSD file You can find the respective GSD file for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for download on the Internet: GSD file for PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621) GSD file for PROFIBUS DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73016883) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 54 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.2 Reaction to CPU STOP Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP in the device configuration with the basic parameters. Table 4- 10 Reaction of technology module to CPU STOP Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed or the position value is read in. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the "At comparison value for a pulse duration" function is set at CPU STOP, the digital output is reset after the pulse duration elapses. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 55 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.3 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. When parameters are assigned in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and data record 128 (Page 118). You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: Parameter setting using... Basic procedure Hardware configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters of the module in the hardware configuration. "Manual operation (without technology object)" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration in STEP 7 with HSP 1. Install the appropriate HSP file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "ET 200SP". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters in the hardware configuration. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFINET IO 1. Install the current PROFINET GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFINET IO > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. You can find information on the respective dependencies of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP 1. Install the current PROFIBUS GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFIBUS DP > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. You can find information on the respective dependencies of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are not configurable in the PROFIBUS GSD file. 3. Download the project to the CPU. The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are downloaded with their default setting. 4. If necessary, set the parameters marked with 1 in the user program using data record 128. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 56 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.3.1 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with SSI absolute encoder The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 11 Settable parameters and their default setting (SSI absolute encoder) Parameter Potential group Value range * * Operating mode3 Use the poten- No tial group of the left module Enable new potential group (light (dark BaseUnit) BaseUnit) Position input * Measuring Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation * 0 * 1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break2 * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Substitute value for DQ1 Parameter reassignment in RUN Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Reaction to CPU STOP1 * Default setting Hardware interrupt: New * Capture value available1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Direction reversal1 * Deactivated * Activated Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Module Position input No Channel Output substitute value Yes Channel DQ0, DQ1: 0 Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel 13 bits Yes Channel Activated Hardware interrupt: Zero * crossing1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ0 occurred1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ1 occurred1 * Deactivated * Activated Invert direction1 (position value) * Deactivated * Activated Frame length 10 bits...40 bits Activated Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 57 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Value range Code type Transmission rate Monoflop time1 Parity * Gray * Dual * 125 kHz * 250 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * 1.5 MHz * 2 MHz * Automatically * 16 s * 32 s * 48 s * 64 s * None * Even * Odd Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Gray Yes Channel 125 kHz Yes Channel Automatically Yes Channel None Yes Channel Bit number LSB of the position value 0...38 0 Yes Channel Bit number MSB of the position value 1...39 12 Yes Channel Set function of DI * Capture Channel * Digital input without function DI0, DI1: Digital Yes input without function * None 0.1 ms Yes Channel * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * At rising edge At rising edge Yes Channel * At falling edge * At rising and falling edge * Once Once Yes Channel * Periodic Input delay for digital inputs1 Edge selection for DI1 Frequency of Capture function1,4 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 58 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Value range Set output * Use by user program * Between comparison value and high limit / measured value >= comparison value * Between comparison value and low limit / measured value <= comparison value * At comparison value for a pulse duration * After set command from CPU until comparison value * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 Comparison value 01 -2147483648...2147483647 11 -2147483648...2147483647 Comparison value Count direction of DQ function1 * Up * Down * In both directions Default setting DQ0, DQ1: Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Yes Channel Yes Channel Between comparison value and high limit 0 10 Yes Channel In both directions Yes Channel Pulse duration [ms/10]1 0...65535 5000 (correYes sponds to 0.5 s) Channel Hysteresis (in increments)1 0...255 0 Yes Channel Measured variable * Frequency Frequency Yes Channel * Period * Velocity * Complete SSI frame 10 Yes Channel Update time [ms] of the measuring function1 0...25000 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 59 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Value range Time base for velocity measurement1 Increments per unit1 * 1 ms * 10 ms * 100 ms * 1s * 60 s 1...65535 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 60 s Yes Channel 1 Yes Channel 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per station in the PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the possible parameter assignments are limited. The parameters are preassigned default settings in the module. If your PROFIBUS master supports the "Write/read data record" function, you can set these parameters using data record 128. 2 When a GSD file is used, this diagnostic interrupt is enabled with the "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" parameter and is then not separately configurable. 3 When configuring with HSP for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. 4 Not available with HSP for STEP 7 NOTICE Too high an encoder speed can supply the wrong rotation direction If an SSI absolute encoder rotates so fast that more than half the value range is covered within one module cycle1, the velocity and rotation direction are no longer calculated correctly. As a result, the following may function incorrectly: * DQ functions * Feedback bits EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_ZERO, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1 and STS_DIR 1 Non-isochronous mode: 500 s; isochronous mode: PROFINET cycle time Note If you use an SSI absolute encoder whose value range does not correspond to a power of 2, the calculated velocity measurement can be incorrect at the moment of the overflow. Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection, sections Basic parameters and Manual operation available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 60 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.3.2 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with incremental or pulse encoder The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 12 Settable parameters and their default setting (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameter Potential group Value range * * Operating mode3 Parameter reassignment in RUN Use the poten- No tial group of the left module Enable new potential group (light (dark BaseUnit) BaseUnit) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Counting * Measuring Reaction to CPU STOP1 * Default setting Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Substitute value for DQ01 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ11 * 0 * 1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break2 * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Gate * start1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Gate * stop1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Overflow (high counting limit violated)1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt:Underflow (low counting limit violated)1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Direction reversal1 * Deactivated * Activated Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Module Counting No Channel Output substitute value Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Activated Activated Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 61 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Value range Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ0 occurred1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ1 occurred1 * Deactivated * Activated Hardware interrupt: Zero * crossing1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: New * Capture value available1 * Deactivated Hardware interrupt: Synchronization of the counter by an external signal1 * Deactivated * Activated Signal type * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) * Single Signal evaluation for counter inputs Filter frequency for counter inputs1 Invert direction (counter inputs)1 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Pulse (A) and direction (B) Yes Channel Single Yes Channel 1 MHz Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Activated Activated * Double * Quadruple * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * Deactivated * Activated Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 62 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Reaction to signal N1 Value range Channel Once Yes Channel Once Yes Channel RS422, symmetrical Yes Channel -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 Yes Channel -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel -2147483648...2147483647 -2147483648 Yes Channel Continue count- Yes ing Channel To opposite counting limit Yes Channel Continue with current value Yes Channel * DI0: Gate start/stop (leveltriggered) Yes Channel * DI1: Digital input without function Active with high Yes level Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Continue count- Yes ing Channel * Synchronization at signal N * Capture at signal N Frequency of synchronization1 * Once * Periodic Frequency of Capture function1,4 * Once * Periodic Interface standard * RS422, symmetrical * TTL (5 V), asymmetrical Start Counting low limit1 Reaction to violation of a * counting limit * Stop counting Continue counting Reset when counting limit is violated * To opposite counting limit * To start value Reaction to gate start * Set to start value * Continue with current value * Gate start/stop (level-triggered) * Gate start (edge-triggered) * Gate stop (edge-triggered) * Synchronization * Enable synchronization at signal N * Capture * Digital input without function * Active with high level * Active with low level * At rising edge * At falling edge * At rising and falling edge * Continue counting * Set to start value and continue counting Set function of DI Select level for DI1 Edge selection for DI1 Behavior of counter value after Capture with DI 1 Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Yes No reaction to signal N value1 Parameter reassignment in RUN No reaction to signal N * Counting high limit1 Default setting Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 63 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Input delay for digital inputs1 Set output Value range * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Use by user program * Between comparison value and high limit / measured value >= comparison value * Between comparison value and low limit / measured value <= comparison value * At comparison value for a pulse duration * After set command from CPU until comparison value * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Not between comparison value 0 and 1 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 0.1 ms Yes Channel DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel Between comparison value and high limit Comparison value 01 -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel Comparison value 11 -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Count direction of DQ function1 * Up Yes Channel * Down In both directions * In both directions 0...65535 5000 (correYes sponds to 0.5 s) Channel Hysteresis (in increments)1 0...255 0 Yes Channel Measured variable * Frequency Frequency Yes Channel * Period * Velocity 10 Yes Channel Pulse duration [ms/10]1 Update time [ms] of the measuring function1 0...25000 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 64 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter Value range Time base for velocity measurement1 Increments per unit1 * 1 ms * 10 ms * 100 ms * 1s * 60 s 1...65535 Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 60 s Yes Channel 1 Yes Channel 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per station in the PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the possible parameter assignments are limited. The parameters are preassigned default settings in the module. If your PROFIBUS master supports the "Write/read data record" function, you can set these parameters using data record 128. 2 When a GSD file is used, this diagnostic interrupt is enabled with the "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" parameter and is then not separately configurable. 3 When configuring with HSP for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name. 4 Not available with HSP for STEP 7 Explanation of parameters You can find a detailed description of the parameters in function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection, sections Basic parameters and Manual operation available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820). Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 65 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.4 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 13 Size of input and output addresses of the TM PosInput 1 with manual operation Range 4.3.5 Inputs Outputs 16 bytes 12 bytes Control and feedback interface Note The control and feedback interface is compatible with the control and feedback interface of the TM PosInput 2, TM Count 2x24V and TM Count 1x24V technology modules of the S7-1500 automation system. 4.3.5.1 Assignment of the control interface The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the technology module. Control interface The following table shows the assignment of the control interface: Byte offset from start address 0...3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 SLOT_0: DINT or REAL: Load value (meaning of the value is specified in LD_SLOT_0) Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 4...7 SLOT_1: DINT or REAL: Load value (meaning of the value is specified in LD_SLOT_1) Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 66 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Byte offset from start address Bit 7 Bit 6 8 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 LD_SLOT_1 9 EN_ CAPTURE 10 SET_DIR EN_ SYNC_DN EN_ SYNC_UP Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LD_SLOT_0 SET_DQ1 SET_DQ0 TM_ CTRL_DQ1 TM_ CTRL_DQ0 SW_GATE RES_ EVENT RES_ ERROR Reserved 11 Reserved Explanations Control bit/value Explanations EN_CAPTURE Use this bit to enable the Capture function. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_CAP in the feedback interface. EN_SYNC_DN Use this bit to enable the synchronization of the counter when counting in downward direction with an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_SYNC in the feedback interface. EN_SYNC_UP Use this bit to enable the synchronization of the counter when counting in upward direction with an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_SYNC in the feedback interface. LD_SLOT_m Use this load request to specify the meaning of the value in SLOT_m: * 0000 means: No action, idle * 0001 means: Load counter value (for incremental or pulse encoder) * 0010 not permitted * 0011 means: Load start value (for incremental or pulse encoder) * 0100 means: Load comparison value 0 * 0101 means: Load comparison value 1 * 0110 means: Load counting low limit (for incremental or pulse encoder) * 0111 means: Load counting high limit (for incremental or pulse encoder) * 1000 to 1111 not permitted The technology module executes the respective action as soon as LD_SLOT_m changes. If values are loaded simultaneously using LD_SLOT_0 and LD_SLOT_1, the value from SLOT_0 is internally applied first and then the value from SLOT_1 . This can produce unexpected intermediate states. RES_EVENT Use this bit to trigger the reset of the saved events in the EVENT_ZERO, EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1 feedback bits. Reserved Reserve bits must be set to 0. RES_ERROR Use this bit to trigger the reset of the saved error states LD_ERROR and ENC_ERROR . SET_DIR Use this bit to specify the count direction for signal type "Pulse (A)". * 0 means: Up * 1 means: Down Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 67 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Control bit/value Explanations SET_DQ0 Use this bit to set digital output DQ0 when TM_CTRL_DQ0 is set to 0. In the case of the function "After set command from CPU until comparison value", SET_DQ0 is effective regardless of TM_CTRL_DQ0 as long as the counter value is not equal to the comparison value. SET_DQ1 Use this bit to set digital output DQ1 when TM_CTRL_DQ1 is set to 0. In the case of the function "After set command from CPU until comparison value", SET_DQ1 is effective regardless of TM_CTRL_DQ1 as long as the counter value is not equal to the comparison value. SW_GATE Use this bit to open and close the software gate when using an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. The technology module only counts when the internal gate is open. * 0 means: Software gate closed * 1 means: Software gate open The digital inputs of the technology module externally control the hardware gate. The hardware gate can be activated by parameter assignment. The software gate cannot be deactivated. TM_CTRL_DQ0 TM_CTRL_DQ1 Use this bit to enable the technological function of digital output DQ0. * 0 means: SET_DQ0 defines the state of DQ0 * 1 means: assigned function defines the state of DQ0 Use this bit to enable the technological function of digital output DQ1. * 0 means: SET_DQ1 defines the state of DQ1 * 1 means: assigned function defines the state of DQ1 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 68 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.5.2 Assignment of the feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the technology module by means of the feedback interface. Feedback interface The following table shows the assignment of the feedback interface: Byte offset from start address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LD_ERROR ENC_ ERROR POWER_ ERROR COUNT_VALUE: DINT: Current counter value or position value 4...7 CAPTURED_VALUE: DINT: The last acquired Capture value 8...11 MEASURED_VALUE: REAL: Current measured value or DWORD: Complete SSI frame 12 13 Reserved Reserved STS_SW_ GATE STS_ READY LD_STS_ SLOT_1 LD_STS_ SLOT_0 RES_EVEN T_ACK Reserved 14 Reserved STS_DI1 STS_DI0 STS_DQ1 STS_DQ0 STS_GATE STS_CNT STS_DIR 15 STS_M_ INTERVAL EVENT_ CAP EVENT_ SYNC EVENT_ CMP1 EVENT_ CMP0 EVENT_ OFLW EVENT_ UFLW EVENT_ ZERO Note Validity of the position value The position value of an SSI absolute encoder is valid when STS_READY is set to 1 and ENC_ERROR is set to 0. STS_READY is set to 0 while the module starts up. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 69 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Explanations Feedback bit/value Explanations CAPTURED_VALUE This DINT value indicates the last acquired Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: * Rising or falling edge of a digital input * Both edges of a digital input The "Frequency of Capture function" parameter specifies whether the function is executed at each configured edge or only once after each enable. COUNT_VALUE This DINT value indicates the current counter value or position value. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length up to 31 bits, the position value is treated as unsigned and as a positive value and can assume values between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, the MSB of the position value corresponds to the sign and the position value can assume values between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use a 32-bit position value for the comparison function, the position value is interpreted as DINT. ENC_ERROR This bit indicates that one of the following errors has occurred at the encoder signals (retentive) for the respective technology module: * Invalid transition of A/B signals (with incremental encoder) * RS422/TTL error * SSI encoder error or SSI frame error (with SSI absolute encoder) If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts, the respective diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the event of encoder signal errors. For information on the meaning of the diagnostic interrupts, refer to the manual for the respective technology module. The bit is reset once you have acknowledged the error with RES_ERROR . EVENT_CAP This bit indicates that a Capture event has occurred and a counter value has been saved in CAPTURED_VALUE . You reset the status by resetting EN_CAPTURE . EVENT_CMP0 This bit indicates the saved status that a comparison event (status change) has occurred for the digital output DQ0 based on the selected comparison condition. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. If the counter value is set to the start value in counting mode, EVENT_CMP0 is not set. EVENT_CMP1 This bit indicates the saved status that a comparison event (status change) has occurred for the digital output DQ1 based on the selected comparison condition. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_OFLW This bit indicates the saved status that the counter value had an overflow. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_SYNC When an incremental or pulse encoder is used, this bit indicates the saved status that the counter was loaded with the start value by an external reference signal (synchronization). You reset the status by resetting EN_SYNC_UP or EN_SYNC_DN . EVENT_UFLW This bit indicates the saved status that the counter value had an underflow. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_ZERO This bit indicates the saved status that the counter value or position value had a zero crossing. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. If the counter value is set to the start value in counting mode, EVENT_CMP1 is not set. When the "Zero crossing" hardware interrupt is enabled, for system-related reasons it can also be triggered if "0" is outside the configured value range. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 70 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Feedback bit/value Explanations LD_ERROR This bit indicates that an error occurred (latching) during loading via the control interface. The loaded values were not applied. When using an incremental or pulse encoder, one of the following conditions is not fulfilled: * Low counting limit <= counter value <= high counting limit * Low counting limit <= start value <= high counting limit * Low counting limit <= comparison value 0/1 <= high counting limit When using an SSI absolute encoder, one of the following conditions is not fulfilled: * 0 <= position value <= maximum position value * 0 <= comparison value 0/1 <= maximum position value The bit is reset once you have acknowledged the error with RES_ERROR . LD_STS_SLOT_0 This bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that the load request for SLOT_0 (LD_SLOT_0) was detected and performed. LD_STS_SLOT_1 This bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that the load request for SLOT_1 (LD_SLOT_1) was detected and performed. MEASURED_VALUE This value indicates the current measured value with data type REAL or the complete SSI frame with data type DWORD: * Frequency: The mean frequency is calculated from the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes in one measurement interval and returned as a floating-point number in the unit of hertz. * Period: The mean period is calculated from the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes in one measurement interval and returned as a floating-point number in the unit of seconds. * Velocity: The mean velocity is calculated from the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes in one measurement interval and returned as a floating-point number in the configured unit. Complete SSI frame: Instead of a measured quantity, the least significant 32 bits of the unprocessed current SSI frame are returned. This provides you with encoder-specific additional bits, such as error bits, in addition to the position value. If the SSI frame is shorter than 32 bits, the complete SSI frame is returned right-aligned and the top unused bits are returned with "0" in the feedback interface. The measured values are returned as a signed value. The sign indicates whether the counter value or position value went up or down in the relevant time interval. * The update time is asynchronous to the opening of the internal gate, i.e. the update time is not started when the gate opens. After the internal gate closes, the last calculated measured value continues to be returned. POWER_ERROR This bit indicates that supply voltage L+ is too low. If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts (Page 103), the diagnostic interrupt "Load voltage missing" is triggered at a supply voltage error. When supply voltage L+ is available at a sufficient level once again, POWER_ERROR is automatically set to 0. RES_EVENT_ACK This bit indicates that the reset of event bit EVENT_SYNC, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1, EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_ZERO is active. Reserved Reserved bits are set to 0. STS_CNT This bit indicates that at least one count pulse or a position value change has occurred in the last ca. 0.5 s. STS_DI0 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI0. STS_DI1 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI1. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 71 Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) Feedback bit/value Explanations STS_DIR This bit indicates the count direction of the last count pulse or the direction of the last position value change. * 0 means: Down * 1 means: Up STS_DQ0 This bit indicates the status of digital output DQ0. STS_DQ1 This bit indicates the status of digital output DQ1. STS_GATE This bit indicates the status of the internal gate when using an incremental or pulse encoder. * 0 means: Gate closed * 1 means: Gate open Note: In order for the counting logic including the gate control to operate correctly, the startup of the technology module must finish correctly at least once with a connected incremental or pulse encoder (STS_READY auf 1). If a connected encoder is not yet ready during the startup, the function of feedback bit STS_GATE is delayed until the encoder for the technology module is available. When the technology module starts up without a connected encoder, the startup does not finish correctly and STS_READY as well as STS_GATE remain set to 0. As soon as an encoder is connected, the startup finishes and STS_GATE functions correctly. An encoder error after a finished startup has no effect on STS_GATE. STS_M_INTERVAL This bit indicates that at least one count pulse or a position value change was detected in the previous measurement interval. STS_READY This bit indicates that the technology module supplies valid user data. The technology module has been started up and configured. STS_SW_GATE This bit indicates the status of the software gate. * 0 means: Gate closed * 1 means: Gate open Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 72 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.3 Manual operation (without technology object) 4.3.6 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. This system function enables position, counter and measured values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. Use an OB of type "Synchronous Cycle" (e.g. OB61) in this operating mode. The input and output data are processed in the assigned OB. The update time for the measured value is synchronized with the system cycle in a suitable ratio and, if necessary, adapted in length. If you set "0", the measured value is updated once per system cycle. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the position or counter value and the measured value as well as status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the following parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Filter frequency Frame length Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change one or more of the indicated parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 73 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4 Fast Mode You can use the technology module in Fast Mode for very fast acquisition of counter or position value with compressed functionality. A reduced feedback interface but no control interface is available in Fast Mode. This allows you to use a shorter send clock for the CPU. The scope of functions of the technology module has the following additional restrictions in Fast Mode: Parameter change in RUN only possible with data record 128 Count/position value range: 25 bits No measured value available No software gate available No complete SSI frame available No Capture function available No hardware interrupts available Combined error message (feedback bit) that is acknowledged automatically Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 74 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.1 Configuring Introduction You configure the technology module and assign its parameters with the configuration software. The functions of the technology module are controlled and checked by the user program via the feedback interface. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Central operation with a CPU 151xSP Components required S7-1500 automation system * TM PosInput 1 Direct access to feedback Device configuration and parame- interface in the I/O data ter setting with hardware configuration S7-1500 automation system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM PosInput 1 * S7-300/400 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM PosInput 1 Distributed operation * with an S7-1200 CPU * Distributed operation in a third-party system In the user program * Distributed operation * with an S7-1500 CPU * Distributed operation with an S7-300/400 CPU Configuration software S7-1200 automation system ET 200SP distributed I/O system STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with HSP (up to firmware version V1.2) or GSD file STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration * TM PosInput 1 * Third-party automation system Third-party configuration software: ET 200SP distributed I/O Device configuration and paramesystem ter setting with GSD file TM PosInput 1 * * Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 75 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Additional information You can find a detailed description of the counting and measurement functions and their configuration in the following: Function manual Counting, Measurement and Position Detection available for download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59709820) Information system of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Hardware Support Packages (HSP) STEP 7 (TIA Portal) If firmware version V1.3 of the module is not yet integrated in your TIA Portal Version V15, you can integrate a corresponding module using HSP0256. You can find the Hardware Support Packages (HSP) for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72341852). You can also access this download from the menu bar of STEP 7 (TIA Portal): "Options > Support packages > Download from the Internet". STEP 7 The Hardware Support Packages (HSP) supports the technology module up to firmware version V1.2. You can find the HSP for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/23183356) GSD file You can find the respective GSD file for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for download on the Internet: GSD file for PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73016883) GSD file for PROFIBUS DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 76 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP in the device configuration with the basic parameters. Table 4- 14 Reaction of technology module to CPU STOP Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed or the position value is read in. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the "At comparison value for a pulse duration" function is set at CPU STOP, the digital output is reset after the pulse duration elapses. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 77 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.3 Parameter setting You specify the properties of the technology module using various parameters. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. When parameters are assigned in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and data record 128 (Page 118). You set the parameters of the module as follows in this operating mode: Parameter setting using... Basic procedure Hardware configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) 1. Insert the module from the hardware catalog under "Technology modules". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters of the module in the hardware configuration. "Fast Mode" must be set as the operating mode. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration in STEP 7 with HSP 1. Install the appropriate HSP file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "ET 200SP". 2. Set the device configuration and the parameters in the hardware configuration. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFINET IO 1. Install the current PROFINET GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFINET IO > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. 3. Download the project to the CPU. Hardware configuration with GSD file for distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP 1. Install the current PROFIBUS GSD file. You will then find the module in the hardware catalog under "Other field devices > PROFIBUS DP > I/O". 2. Set the parameters in the hardware configuration. The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are not configurable in the PROFIBUS GSD file. 3. Download the project to the CPU. The parameters marked with 1 in the following tables are downloaded with their default setting. 4. If necessary, set the parameters marked with 1 in the user program using data record 128. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 78 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.3.1 Parameters (SSI absolute encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with SSI absolute encoder The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 15 Settable parameters and their default setting (SSI absolute encoder) Parameter Potential group Value range * * Reaction to CPU STOP1 * Use the poten- No tial group of the left module Enable new potential group (light (dark BaseUnit) BaseUnit) Output substitute value Keep last value * Continue operation * 0 * 1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break2 * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated direction1 Invert (position value) * Deactivated * Activated Frame length 10 bits...40 bits Code type * Gray * Dual * 125 kHz * 250 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * 1.5 MHz * 2 MHz * Automatically * 16 s * 32 s * 48 s * 64 s Transmission rate Monoflop time1 Parameter reassignment in RUN Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) * Substitute value for DQ1 Default setting Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Module Output substitute value Yes Channel DQ0, DQ1: 0 Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel 13 bits Yes Channel Gray Yes Channel 125 kHz Yes Channel Automatically Yes Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 79 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Parity Value range * None * Even * Odd Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file None Yes Channel Bit number LSB of the position value 0...38 0 Yes Channel Bit number MSB of the position value 1...39 12 Yes Channel Set function of DI Digital input without function Digital input Yes without function Channel Input delay for digital inputs1 * None 0.1 ms Yes Channel * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Between comparison value and high limit Digital output Yes without function Channel * Between comparison value and low limit * At comparison value for a pulse duration * Digital output without function Set output Comparison value 01 0...33554431 0 Yes Channel Comparison value 11 0...33554431 10 Yes Channel Count direction of DQ function1 * Up Yes Channel * Down In both directions * In both directions 0...65535 5000 (correYes sponds to 0.5 s) Channel 0...255 0 Channel Pulse duration [ms/10]1 Hysteresis (in increments)1 Yes 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per station in the PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the possible parameter assignments are limited. The parameters are preassigned default settings in the module. If your PROFIBUS master supports the "Write/read data record" function, you can set these parameters using data record 128. 2 When a GSD file is used, this diagnostic interrupt is enabled with the "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" parameter and is then not separately configurable. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 80 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode NOTICE Too high an encoder speed can supply the wrong rotation direction If an SSI absolute encoder rotates so fast that more than half the value range is covered within one module cycle1, the velocity and rotation direction are no longer calculated correctly. As a result, the following may function incorrectly: * DQ functions * Feedback bit STS_DIR 1 Non-isochronous mode: 500 s; isochronous mode: PROFINET cycle time Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 81 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.3.2 Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameters of the TM PosInput 1 with incremental or pulse encoder The following parameter settings are possible: Table 4- 16 Settable parameters and their default setting (incremental or pulse encoder) Parameter Potential group Value range * * Reaction to CPU STOP1 * Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Use the poten- No tial group of the left module Enable new potential group (light (dark BaseUnit) BaseUnit) Use the potential group of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Output substitute value * Keep last value * Continue operation Substitute value for DQ01 * 0 * 1 Substitute value for DQ11 * 0 * 1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break2 * Deactivated * Activated Enable additional diagnostic interrupts * Deactivated * Activated Signal type * Pulse (A) * Pulse (A) and direction (B) * Count up (A), count down (B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Invert direction1 (counter inputs) * Deactivated * Activated Signal evaluation for counter inputs * Single * Double * Quadruple Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Module Output substitute value Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel 0 Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Pulse (A) and direction (B) Yes Channel Deactivated Yes Channel Single Yes Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 82 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Filter frequency for counter inputs1 Reaction to signal N1 Interface standard Counting high limit1 Start value1 Counting low limit1 Value range Reaction to gate start Set function of DI Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file 1 MHz Yes Channel No reaction to signal N Yes Channel RS422, symmetrical Yes Channel 1...33554431 33554431 Yes Channel 0...33554431 0 Yes Channel 0...33554430 0 * 100 Hz * 200 Hz * 500 Hz * 1 kHz * 2 kHz * 5 kHz * 10 kHz * 20 kHz * 50 kHz * 100 kHz * 200 kHz * 500 kHz * 1 MHz * No reaction to signal N * Synchronization at signal N * RS422, symmetrical * TTL (5 V), asymmetrical Reaction to violation of a * counting limit * Reset when counting limit is violated Default setting Stop counting Continue counting * To opposite counting limit * To start value * Set to start value * Continue with current value * Gate start/stop (level-triggered) * Gate start (edge-triggered) * Gate stop (edge-triggered) * Synchronization * Enable synchronization at signal N * Digital input without function Yes Channel Continue count- Yes ing Channel To opposite counting limit Yes Channel Continue with current value Yes Channel Digital input Yes without function Channel Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 83 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Value range Input delay for digital inputs1 * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 12.8 ms * 20 ms * Active with high level * Active with low level * At rising edge * At falling edge Frequency of synchronization1 * Once * Periodic Count direction for synchronization * Up * Down * In both directions * Between comparison value and high limit Select level for DI1 Edge selection for DI1 Set output * Between comparison value and low limit * At comparison value for a pulse duration * Between comparison value 0 and 1 * Digital output without function Default setting 0.1 ms Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Yes Channel Active with high Yes level Channel At rising edge Yes Channel Once Yes Channel Up Yes Channel DQ0, DQ1: Yes Channel Digital output without function Comparison value 01 0...33554431 0 Yes Channel 11 0...33554431 10 Yes Channel In both directions Yes Channel Comparison value Count direction of DQ function1 * Up * Down * In both directions Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 84 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Parameter Value range Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope HSP for STEP 7 (TIA Portal); HSP for STEP 7; GSD file Pulse duration [ms/10]1 0...65535 5000 (correYes sponds to 0.5 s) Channel Hysteresis (in increments)1 0...255 0 Channel Yes 1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per station in the PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the possible parameter assignments are limited. The parameters are preassigned default settings in the module. If your PROFIBUS master supports the "Write/read data record" function, you can set these parameters using data record 128. 2 When a GSD file is used, this diagnostic interrupt is enabled with the "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" parameter and is then not separately configurable. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 85 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.3.3 Explanation of parameters Potential group A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP station that are supplied from a common supply voltage. A potential group begins with a light BaseUnit, which feeds the required supply voltage for all modules of the potential group. The light BaseUnit interrupts the three self-configuring voltage bars P1, P2 and AUX to the neighboring modules on the left. All other I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark BaseUnits. They take on the potentials of the self-configuring busbars P1, P2 and AUX from the neighboring modules on the left. A potential group ends with the dark BaseUnit, which is followed by a light BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration. Signal type You can select from the following signal types: Signal type Meaning Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) An incremental encoder with phase-shifted A and B signals is connected. Incremental encoder (A, B, N) An incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals A and B and a zero signal N is connected. Pulse (A) and direction (B) A pulse encoder (signal A) with direction signal (signal B) is connected. Pulse (A) A pulse encoder (signal A) without direction signal is connected. Count up (A), count down (B) Signals for counting up (signal A) and down (signal B) are connected. Absolute encoder (SSI) An SSI absolute encoder with signals D and C is connected. Invert direction You can invert the counting direction to adapt it to the process. The inverting of the direction is configurable and active for the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 86 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Signal evaluation With the parameter assignment of the signal evaluation, you specify which edges of the signals are counted. You can select from the following options: Signal evaluation Meaning Single The edges of signal A are evaluated during a low level of signal B. Double Each edge of signal A is evaluated. Quadruple Each edge of signals A and B is evaluated. The parameter can be assigned with the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Filter frequency By configuring the filter frequency, you suppress interferences at the counting inputs A, B and N. The selected filter frequency is based on a pulse/break ratio of between around 40:60 and around 60:40. This results in a specific minimum pulse/break time. Signal changes with a duration shorter than the minimum pulse/break time are suppressed. You can select from the following filter frequencies: Filter frequency Minimum pulse/break time 100 Hz 4.0ms 200 Hz 2.0 ms 500 Hz 800 s 1 kHz 400 s 2 kHz 200 s 5 kHz 80 s 10 kHz 40 s 20 kHz 20 s 50 kHz 8.0 s 100 kHz 4.0 s 200 kHz 2.0 s 500 kHz 0.8 s 1 MHz 0.4 s Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 87 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Reaction to signal N You use this parameter to specify which reaction to signal N is triggered. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning No reaction to signal N The counter is not affected by signal N. Synchronization at signal N The counter is set to the start value at signal N. If you select the function "Enable synchronization at signal N" for a digital input, the synchronization depends on the level at the digital input. Note You can only select the reaction to signal N if you have selected the "Incremental encoder (A, B, N)" signal type. Note If you select "Synchronization at signal N", you can choose the "Enable synchronization at signal N" function for a digital input. Frequency of synchronization This parameter is used to define the frequency of the following events: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The counter is only set at the first signal N or the first configured edge of the digital input. Periodic The counter is set at each signal N or each configured edge of the digital input. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 88 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Count direction of the synchronization You use this parameter to specify the count direction for which the following functions are enabled: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning In both directions Synchronization takes place regardless of the count direction. Up Synchronization only takes place when the counter is counting up. Down Synchronization only takes place when the counter is counting down. Interface standard You use this parameter to specify whether the encoder supplies symmetrical signals (RS422) or asymmetrical signals (TTL). You can select from the following options: Interface standard Meaning RS422, symmetrical The encoder supplies symmetrical signals according to the RS422 standard. TTL (5 V), asymmetrical The encoder supplies asymmetrical 5 V signals according to the TTL standard. Note The RS422 standard provides greater interference immunity than the TTL standard. If your incremental or pulse encoder supports the RS422- and TTL standards, we recommend using the RS422 standard. Counting high limit With the parameter assignment of the counting high limit, you limit the counting range. You can enter a value up to 33554431 (225-1). You must enter a value above the counting low limit. Counting low limit With the parameter assignment of the counting low limit, you limit the counting range. You can enter a value starting with 0. You must enter a value below the counting high limit. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 89 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Start value With the parameter assignment of the start value, you specify the value at which counting is begun and is to continue in the case of defined events. You must enter a value at or within the counting limits. Reaction to violation of a counting limit You can configure the following reaction to violation of a counting limit: Reaction Meaning Stop counting After violation of a counting limit, counting is stopped and the internal gate is closed. To restart counting, you must close and reopen the SW gate or HW gate, if necessary. Continue counting Counting is continued with the start value or at the opposite counting limit depending on the additional parameter assignment. Reset when counting limit is violated You can reset the counter when a counting limit is violated: Reset the value Meaning To start value The counter value is set to the start value. To opposite counting limit The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit in each case. Reaction to gate start You can configure the following reaction to gate start: Reaction Meaning Set to start value When the gate is opened, the counter value is set to the start value. Continue with current value When the gate is opened, counting is continued with the last counter value. Note The parameter is only effective when you have configured a HW gate. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 90 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Set function of DI With the parameter assignment of a digital input, you specify which function the digital input triggers when switched. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital input Meaning Gate start/stop (level-triggered) The level at the respective digital input opens and closes the HW gate. Gate start (edge-triggered) The configured edge at the respective digital input opens the HW gate. Gate stop (edge-triggered) The configured edge at the respective digital input closes the HW gate. Synchronization The configured edge at the respective digital input sets the counter to the start value. Enable synchronization at signal N The active level at the respective digital input enables synchronization of the counter at signal N. Digital input without function No technological function is assigned to the respective digital input. You can read the signal status of the digital input via the feedback interface. Note Each function, except "Digital input without function", can be used only once per counter and can no longer be selected for the other digital inputs in each case. Input delay You use this parameter to suppress signal noise at the digital inputs. Changes to the signal are only detected if they remain stable for longer than the configured input delay time. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you must use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Note You configure the input delay under "Behavior of DI0" for all digital inputs together. The input delay is also displayed under "Behavior of DI1". Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 91 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Select level You use this parameter to specify the level at which the digital input is active. You can select from the following options: Level Active with high level Meaning The respective digital input is active when it is set. Active with low level The respective digital input is active when it is not set. The parameter can be configured for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) Enable synchronization at signal N Edge selection You use this parameter to specify the edge of the digital input at which the configured function is triggered. You can select from the following options depending on the function selected: At rising edge At falling edge The parameter can be configured for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start (edge-triggered) Gate stop (edge-triggered) Synchronization Set output With the parameter assignment of a digital output, you specify the condition upon which the digital output switches. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital output Between comparison value and high limit Meaning The respective digital output is active if: Comparison value <= counter value <= counting high limit Between comparison value and low The respective digital output is active if: limit Low limit <= counter value <= comparison value Between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration The respective digital output is active once for the configured time and count direction when the counter value corresponds to the comparison value. Digital output without function The respective digital output is set to 0 irrespective of the reaction to CPU STOP. Note You can only set the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" function for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Digital output without function" function for digital output DQ0. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 92 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Comparison value 0 With the parameter assignment of the comparison value, you specify the counter value or position value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is greater than or equal to the counting low limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", comparison value 0 must be less than comparison value 1. Comparison value 1 With the parameter assignment of the comparison value, you specify the counter value or position value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is less than or equal to the counting high limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", comparison value 0 must be less than comparison value 1. Count direction You use this parameter to specify the count direction for which the selected functions is valid: You can select from the following options: Count direction Meaning In both directions The comparison and switching of the respective digital output takes places regardless of the count direction or whether the position value increases or decreases Up The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts up or the position value increases. Down The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts down or the position value decreases. The parameter can be configured for the following functions: Between comparison value 0 and 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration Pulse duration With the parameter assignment of the pulse duration for the "At comparison value for a pulse duration" function, you specify how many milliseconds the respective digital output is active. If you enter "0" and the counter value corresponds to the respective comparison value, the digital output is active until the next count pulse. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 93 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Hysteresis (in increments) With the parameter assignment of the hysteresis, you specify a range around the comparison values. Within the hysteresis range, the digital outputs cannot switch again before the counter value or position value has left this range. An encoder can stop at a certain position, and slight movements can cause the counter value or position value to fluctuate around this position. If a comparison value or counting limit is within the fluctuation range and a hysteresis is not used, the associated digital output will switch on and off with corresponding frequency. The hysteresis prevents these unwanted switching actions. Regardless of the hysteresis value, the hysteresis range ends at the low or counting high limit. If you enter "0", the hysteresis is turned off. Invert direction You use this parameter to invert the values supplied by the SSI absolute encoder. This allows you to adapt the detected direction of the encoder to the direction of rotation of the motor. Note This parameter acts only on the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value in the frame. Frame length With the parameter assignment of the frame length, you specify the number of bits of an SSI frame of the SSI absolute encoder used. You can find the frame length of your SSI absolute encoder in the data sheet of the encoder. Special bits are also included in the frame length. A parity bit does not count in the frame length. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 94 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Code type With the parameter assignment of the code type, you specify whether the encoder supplies Dual code or Gray code. You can select from the following options: Code type Meaning Gray The position value supplied by the SSI absolute encoder in Gray code is converted to Dual code. Dual The value supplied by the SSI absolute encoder is not converted. Transmission rate With the parameter assignment of the transmission rate, you specify the data transmission rate between the technology module and SSI absolute encoder. The maximum transmission rate depends on the cable length and the technical specifications of the SSI absolute encoder. For additional information, refer to the description of the encoder. Monoflop time With the parameter assignment of the monoflop time, you specify the idle time between two SSI frames. The configured monoflop time must be at least equal to the monoflop time of the SSI absolute encoder used. You can find this value in the technical specifications of the SSI absolute encoder. Note If you select the "Automatically" option, the monoflop time automatically adapts to the encoder used. In isochronous mode, the "Automatically" option corresponds to a monoflop time of 64 s. If the monoflop time of the utilized SSI absolute encoder is less than 64 s, you can select the value of the encoder to achieve faster isochronous times. Parity With the parameter assignment of the parity, you specify whether the SSI absolute encoder transfers a parity bit. If, for example, a 25-bit encoder with parity is configured, the technology module reads 26 bits. A parity error is signaled in the feedback interface using bit EXT_F. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 95 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Bit number LSB of the position value You use this parameter to specify the bit number of the LSB (least significant bit) of the position value in the frame of the SSI absolute encoder. In this way, you limit the range in the frame that supplies the position value. The value must be less than the bit number of the MSB of the position value. The difference between the bit numbers of the MSB and the LSB of the position value must be less than 32. Note If you have selected "Gray" as the code type, only the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value is converted to Dual code. Bit number MSB of the position value You use this parameter to specify the bit number of the MSB (most significant bit) of the position value in the frame of the SSI absolute encoder. In this way, you limit the range in the frame that supplies the position value. The value must be less than the frame length and greater than the bit number of the LSB of the position value. The difference between the bit numbers of the MSB and the LSB of the position value must be less than 32. Note If you have selected "Gray" as the code type, only the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value is converted to Dual code. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 96 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.4 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 17 Size of input and output addresses of the TM PosInput 1 with Fast Mode Range 4.4.5 Inputs Outputs 4 bytes 0 bytes Assignment of the feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the technology module by means of the feedback interface. Feedback interface The following table shows the assignment of the feedback interface: Byte offset from start address 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LS STS_ READY Reserved EXT_F STS_DI0 STS_DIR STS_DI1 COUNT_ VALUE 1 COUNT_VALUE: 2 DINT: Current counter value or position value 3 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 97 Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode Explanations Feedback bit/value Explanations COUNT_VALUE This value returns the current counter value or position value in the first 25 bits of a DINT value. EXT_F This bit indicates that one of the following errors has occurred at the encoder signals for the technology module: * Load voltage missing * Invalid transition of A/B signals (with incremental encoder) * RS422/TTL error * SSI encoder error or SSI frame error (with SSI absolute encoder) If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts, the respective diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the event of encoder signal errors. For information on the meaning of the diagnostic interrupts, refer to the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 103). The bit is reset automatically as soon as an error no longer exists. LS As a life sign, this bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that isochronous mode is functioning and the module has updated the feedback interface in the respective bus cycle. In non-isochronous mode, this bit is set to 0. Reserved Reserved bits are set to 0. STS_DI0 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI0. STS_DI1 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI1. STS_DIR This bit indicates the count direction of the last count pulse or the direction of the last position value change. 0 means: Down 1 means: Up STS_READY This bit indicates that the technology module supplies valid user data. The technology module has been started up and configured. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 98 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Configuring/address space 4.4 Fast Mode 4.4.6 Isochronous mode The technology module supports the "Isochronous mode" system function. Position and counter values can be acquired in a fixed system cycle with this system function. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A status change of a digital input immediately triggers the specified reaction of the technology module and the change of the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. This operating mode is especially well-suited for short send clocks of the CPU starting from 125 s, because only input data is used. Use an OB of type "Synchronous Cycle" (e.g. OB61) in this operating mode. Data processing At the time the input data is read in (Ti), the position or counter value as well as status bits are acquired and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Isochronous mode parameters In isochronous mode, the following parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Filter frequency Frame length Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change one or more of the indicated parameters in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. Additional information You can find a detailed description of isochronous mode in the following: Function manual Isochronous Mode (STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1 or higher) available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 99 5 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error display LEDs The following figure shows you the LED displays (status and error displays) of TM PosInput 1. DIAG (green/red) Status A/D (green) Status B/C (green) Status N (green) 24VDC (green) PWR (green) Figure 5-1 Status DI0 (green) Status DI1 (green) Status DQ0 (green) Status DQ1 (green) Status UP (green) Status DN (green) LED displays of the TM PosInput 1 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 100 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in section Diagnostic alarms (Page 103). Table 5- 1 Status and error displays DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Remedy Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the interface module. Technology module parameters not set --- Off Flashes Technology module parameters set and no module diagnostics On Technology module parameters set and module diagnostics (at least one error is present) Flashes Table 5- 2 PWR/24VDC status displays LEDs Meaning PWR 24VDC Off Off Supply voltage L+ missing On On Evaluate the diagnostic alarms and eliminate the error. Remedy * Check the supply voltage. * Check the BaseUnit type and the wiring of the BaseUnit. Supply voltage L+ is present and OK --- Short-circuit or overload at the encoder supply or supply voltage too low * Check the encoder wiring. * Check the loads connected to the encoder supply. * Check the supply voltage. On Off Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 101 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error display Channel LEDs The A, B, N and DIm LEDs indicate the current level of the associated signals. The LEDs of the DQm digital outputs indicate the desired state. The flashing frequency of the channel LEDs is limited to approximately 12 Hz. If higher frequencies are present, the channel LEDs will flash at 12 Hz instead of indicating the current status. If you are using an SSI absolute encoder, the LEDs D and C light up green during the transmission of encoder frames. The LEDs D and C are off when an error has occurred. Table 5- 3 Status displays A/B/N/DIm/DQm LEDs A/B/N/DIm/DQm Meaning Counter input/digital input/digital output at 0 level Off Counter input/digital input/digital output at 1 level On Table 5- 4 Status displays UP/DN LEDs Meaning UP DN Off Off On Off The last count pulse has incremented the counter and took place no more than 0.5 s ago. Off On The last count pulse has decremented the counter and took place no more than 0.5 s ago. No count pulse has been detected for the last 0.5 s. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 102 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic alarms 5.2 Diagnostic alarms Enabling of diagnostic interrupts You enable the diagnostic interrupts in the device configuration with the basic parameters. The technology module can trigger the following diagnostic interrupts: Table 5- 5 Possible diagnostic interrupts Diagnostic interrupt * Monitoring Parameter error lost1 Monitoring is always active. A diagnostic interrupt is triggered each time an error is detected. * Hardware interrupt * Channel/component temporarily unavailable * Internal error * Watchdog tripped. Module is defective. * RS422/TTL error Monitoring is always active. When an error is detected, a diagnostic interrupt is only triggered if "Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break" is activated in the device configuration. * Error * Load voltage missing * Short-circuit / overload at external encoder supply Monitoring is always active. When an error is detected, a diagnostic interrupt is only triggered if "Enable additional diagnostic interrupts" is activated in the device configuration. * Error at digital outputs * Supply voltage error2 * SSI encoder error * Invalid transition of A/B signals * Overtemperature 1 Not available in "Position input for "Motion Control"" technology object" and "Fast Mode" operating modes 2 No longer available as of module version V1.3. This case is then taken into account by diagnostic interrupt "Load voltage missing". Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 103 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic alarms Reactions to a diagnostic interrupt The following happens when an event occurs that triggers a diagnostic interrupt: The DIAG LED flashes red. When you have eliminated all errors, the DIAG LED stops flashing red and turns green. The S7-1500 CPU interrupts the processing of the user program. The diagnostic interrupt OB (e.g. OB 82) is called. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostic interrupt OB. The S7-1500 CPU remains in RUN even if no diagnostic interrupt OB is present in the CPU. The technology module continues working unchanged if this is possible despite the error. You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error organization block with instruction "RALRM" (Read additional alarm information), in the information system of STEP 7 and in function manual Diagnostics (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926), section "System diagnostics in user program". If the module is being operated as a distributed module in an ET 200SP system with PROFIBUS DP, you have the option of reading out diagnostic data with the RDREC or RD_REC instruction using data record 0 and 1. You can find the structure of the data records in the manual for the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module available for download on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/73098660). Diagnostic alarms The display of diagnostics is in plain text in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in the online and diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. The following diagnostics can be signaled: Table 5- 6 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Error 9H * Internal module error occurred * Possible cause: Technology module defective * The received parameter data record is invalid * The configured BaseUnit is not the used BaseUnit Parameter error 10H Load voltage miss- 11H ing Remedy Replace technology module * Check parameter data record * Check BaseUnit * Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check BaseUnit type * Wiring of supply voltage L+ faulty * * Possible cause: BaseUnit type incorrect Check supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * Check wiring of supply voltage L+ * Check total consumption of the load group Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 104 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic alarms Diagnostic alarm Error code Hardware interrupt 16H lost Channel/component temporarily unavailable 1FH Internal error 100H Watchdog tripped. Module is defective. 103H Short-circuit / 10EH overload at external encoder supply Error at digital outputs 10FH Meaning * Module cannot issue interrupt because a preceding interrupt has not yet been processed * Change interrupt processing in the CPU and re-assign technology module parameters correspondingly * Possible cause: Too many hardware interrupts in too short a time * Check frequency of interrupts from the process Firmware update in progress or update was * aborted. The module reads no process values * in this state. Technology module defective 110H Invalid transition of 500H A/B signals Wait for firmware update If firmware update aborts: - Check minimum firmware version required - Check supply voltage - Repeat firmware update Replace technology module Firmware error Run firmware update Technology module defective Replace technology module * Error at encoder supply * Check encoder wiring * Possible causes: * Check consumers connected to encoder supply * Check wiring at the digital outputs * Check consumers connected to the digital outputs * * Supply voltage error1 Remedy - Short circuit - Overload Error at digital outputs (LED display DQm lit red) Possible causes: - Short circuit - Overload * Error at supply voltage L+ * Check supply voltage L+ * Possible causes: * Check wiring of supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * * - Low voltage - Wiring of supply voltage L+ faulty * Check total consumption of the load group Time profile of signals A and B of the incremental encoder does not meet certain requirements (relative phase shift of the two signals is too small) * Check process wiring * Check encoder/sensor * Check parameter assignment Possible causes: - Signal frequency too high - Encoder faulty - Process wiring faulty Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 105 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Diagnostic alarms Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning RS422/TTL error 502H * Error at connection of the RS 422, TTL encoder or SSI absolute encoder * Check process wiring * * Possible causes: Check encoder/sensor * Check parameter assignment SSI encoder error Overtemperature 1 503H 506H - Wire break - No encoder connected - Cable too long - Short circuit - Overload - External voltage - Overtemperature - Parameter assignment error Remedy * Error at SSI absolute encoder connection * Check process wiring * Possible causes: * Check SSI absolute encoder - Wire break * Check parameter assignment - Cable too long - Frame error (error of the start bit or stop bit) - Parity error - Parameter assignment error * Module temperature is too high * Check process wiring * Possible causes: * Improve cooling - Short-circuit or overload at the digital * outputs or output of the encoder supply - Ambient temperature outside specifications - Contamination in the module prevents cooling Check connected loads No longer available as of module version V1.3. This case is then taken into account by diagnostic interrupt "Load voltage missing". Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 106 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3 Hardware interrupts 5.3 Hardware interrupts Introduction For the technology module, you can configure which events are to trigger a hardware interrupt during operation. What is a hardware interrupt? The technology module will trigger a hardware interrupt as configured in response to specific events/states. When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the assigned hardware interrupt OB. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the assigned hardware interrupt OB by the CPU. Lost hardware interrupt If an event occurs that is to trigger a hardware interrupt and the preceding event has not yet been processed, another hardware interrupt cannot be triggered. The hardware interrupt is lost and the diagnostic interrupt "Lost hardware interrupt" is triggered. Enabling of hardware interrupts A hardware interrupt is triggered when the condition for the change of the respective status or event bit in the feedback interface is met. You enable the hardware interrupts in the device configuration with the basic parameters. You can configure hardware interrupts to be triggered for the following event types: Opening of internal gate (gate start)1 Closing of internal gate (gate stop)1 Overflow (counting high limit violated)1 Underflow (counting low limit violated)1 Comparison event for DQ0 has occurred Comparison event for DQ1 has occurred Zero crossing4 New Capture value available2 Synchronization of the counter by an external signal1 Direction reversal3 1 Not for SSI absolute encoder 2 Only configurable in Counting / Position input operating mode 3 Feedback bit STS_DIR is preassigned with "0". If the first counter value change occurs in the downwards direction directly after switching on the technology module, no hardware interrupt is triggered. When the hardware interrupt is enabled, for system-related reasons it can also be triggered if "0" is outside the configured value range. 4 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 107 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3 Hardware interrupts You can activate any combination of events to trigger hardware interrupts. You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with instruction "RALRM" (Read additional alarm information) and in the information system of STEP 7. Which event has triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of the local data double word 8. Figure 5-2 Start information of the organization block Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 108 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 6 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 General information Product type designation TM PosInput 1 Firmware version V1.3 * FW update possible usable BaseUnits Yes BU type A0 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 (FW V1.0), V14 (V1.2), V15 (FW V1.3) / V13 (FW V1.0), V14 SP1 (V1.2) * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version As of V5.5 SP3, only up to FW V1.2 * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5 * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Supply voltage Load voltage L+ * Rated value (DC) 24 V * permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V * permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V * Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 75 mA; without load Encoder supply Number of outputs 1 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes; L+ (-0.8 V) * Short-circuit protection Yes; electronic/thermal * Output current, max. 300 mA Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.9 W Address area Occupied address area * Inputs 16 byte; 4 bytes in Fast mode * Outputs 12 byte; 4 bytes for Motion Control, 0 bytes for Fast mode Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 109 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 2 Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Yes Digital input functions, parameterizable * Gate start/stop Yes; only for pulse and incremental encoders * Capture Yes * Synchronization Yes; only for pulse and incremental encoders * Freely usable digital input Yes Input voltage * Rated value (DC) 24 V * for signal "0" -5 ... +5 V * for signal "1" +11 to +30V * permissible voltage at input, min. -30 V; -5 V continuous, -30 V brief reverse polarity protection * permissible voltage at input, max. 30 V Input current * for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) for standard inputs - parameterizable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms - at "0" to "1", min. 6 s; for parameterization "none" - at "1" to "0", min. 6 s; for parameterization "none" for counter/technological functions - parameterizable Yes Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 110 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 Digital outputs Type of digital output Transistor Number of digital outputs 2 Short-circuit protection Yes; electronic/thermal * Response threshold, typ. 1A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ (-33 V) Controlling a digital input Yes Digital output functions, parameterizable * Switching tripped by comparison values Yes * Freely usable digital output Yes Switching capacity of the outputs * with resistive load, max. 0.5 A; Per digital output * on lamp load, max. 5W Load resistance range * lower limit 48 * upper limit 12 k Output voltage * for signal "1", min. 23.2 V; L+ (-0.8 V) Output current * for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A; Per digital output * for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.6 A; Per digital output * for signal "1" minimum load current 2 mA * for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA Output delay with resistive load * "0" to "1", max. 50 s * "1" to "0", max. 50 s Switching frequency * with resistive load, max. 10 kHz * with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz; Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, DC-13; observe derating curve * on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs * Current per module, max. 1A Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m * unshielded, max. 600 m Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 111 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 Encoder signals, incremental encoder (symmetrical) * Input voltage RS 422 * Input frequency, max. 1 MHz * Counting frequency, max. 4 MHz; with quadruple evaluation * Cable length, shielded, max. 32 m; at 1 MHz * Signal filter, parameterizable Yes * Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, 90 phase offset Yes * Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, 90 phase offset Yes and zero track * Pulse encoder Yes * Pulse encoder with direction Yes * Pulse encoder with one impulse signal per count direction Yes Encoder signals, incremental encoder (asymmetrical) * Input voltage 5 V TTL (push-pull encoders only) * Input frequency, max. 1 MHz * Counting frequency, max. 4 MHz; with quadruple evaluation * Signal filter, parameterizable Yes * Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, 90 phase offset Yes * Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, 90 phase offset Yes and zero track * Pulse encoder Yes * Pulse encoder with direction Yes * Pulse encoder with one impulse signal per count direction Yes Encoder signals, absolute encoder (SSI) * Input signal to RS-422 * Telegram length, parameterizable 10 ... 40 bit * Clock frequency, max. 2 MHz; 125 kHz, 250 kHz, 500 kHz, 1 MHz, 1.5 MHz or 2 MHz * Binary code Yes * Gray code Yes * Cable length, shielded, max. 320 m; Cable length, RS-422 SSI absolute encoders, Siemens type 6FX2001-5, 24 V supply: 125 kHz, 320 meters shielded, max.; 250 kHz, 160 meters shielded, max.; 500 kHz, 60 meters shielded, max.; 1 MHz, 20 meters shielded, max. 1.5 MHz, 10 meters shielded, max.; 2 MHz, 8 meters shielded, max. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 112 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 * Parity bit, parameterizable Yes * Monoflop time 16, 32, 48, 64 s & automatic * Multiturn Yes * Singleturn Yes Interface types * TTL 5 V Yes; push-pull encoders only * RS 422 Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) Yes Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Substitute values connectable Yes; Parameterizable Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Hardware interrupt Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes * Short-circuit Yes * A/B transition error at incremental encoder Yes * Telegram error at SSI encoder Yes * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED * Status indicator backward counting (green) Yes * Status indicator forward counting (green) Yes Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 113 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 Integrated Functions Number of counters 1 Counting frequency (counter) max. 4 MHz; with quadruple evaluation Counting functions * Can be used with TO High_Speed_Counter Yes; only for pulse and incremental encoders * Continuous counting Yes * Counter response parameterizable Yes * Hardware gate via digital input Yes * Software gate Yes * Event-controlled stop Yes * Synchronization via digital input Yes * Counting range, parameterizable Yes Comparator - Number of comparators 2 - Direction dependency Yes - Can be changed from user program Yes Position detection * Incremental acquisition Yes * Absolute acquisition Yes * Suitable for S7-1500 Motion Control Yes Measuring functions * Measuring time, parameterizable Yes * Dynamic measurement period adjustment Yes * Number of thresholds, parameterizable 2 Measuring range - Frequency measurement, min. 0.04 Hz - Frequency measurement, max. 4 MHz - Cycle duration measurement, min. 0.25 s - Cycle duration measurement, max. 25 s - Frequency measurement 100 ppm; depending on measuring interval and signal evaluation - Cycle duration measurement 100 ppm; depending on measuring interval and signal evaluation - Velocity measurement 100 ppm; depending on measuring interval and signal evaluation Accuracy Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 114 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Technical specifications Article number 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels and backplane bus Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C; Observe derating * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C; Observe derating Decentralized operation to SIMATIC S7-300 Yes to SIMATIC S7-400 Yes to SIMATIC S7-1200 Yes to SIMATIC S7-1500 Yes to standard PROFIBUS master Yes to standard PROFINET controller Yes Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 45 g Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 115 Technical specifications Derating information for total current of outputs If the digital outputs of the TM PosInput 1 are operated with resistive or inductive loads, you should derate the total current of the loads at the digital outputs of the technology module. The total current is the sum of the load currents at all digital outputs of the module (without encoder supply). The following derating curve shows the load capacity of the digital outputs depending on the ambient temperature and mounting position under the following conditions: Load resistance: 48 (IEC 947-5-1) Vertical installation of the system Horizontal installation of the system Figure 6-1 Total current depending on ambient temperature and mounting position for resistive loads Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 116 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Technical specifications The following derating curve shows the load capacity of the digital outputs depending on the ambient temperature and mounting position under the following conditions: Maximum switching frequency at digital outputs of 0.5 Hz Load resistance: 48 (IEC 947-5-1) Load inductance: 1150 mH (IEC 947-5-1) Vertical installation of the system Horizontal installation of the system Figure 6-2 Total current depending on ambient temperature and mounting position for inductive loads Note If the switching frequency is greater than 0.5 Hz or there is greater inductance at the digital outputs, the total current must be reduced further. Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 117 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record You have the option of reassigning module parameters with the user program while the CPU is in RUN. The parameters are transferred to the module using data record 128, e.g. with the WRREC instruction. If an error occurs while transferring or validating parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operating with the existing parameter assignment. A corresponding error code is then written to the STATUS output parameter. If no errors occur, the STATUS output parameter contains the length of the actually transferred data. You can find a description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes in section Parameter validation error (Page 130) or in the online help of STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Structure of data record 128 for operation with technology object and manual operation The following table shows you the structure of data record 128 for TM PosInput 1 for operation with technology object and manual operation without technology object. The values in byte 0 to byte 3 are fixed and must not be changed. The value in byte 4 can only be changed by means of new parameter assignment and not in RUN mode of the CPU. Note After each writing of data record 128, the module is set to its startup state and the counter value is set to the start value. If "Continue operation" is set for Reaction to CPU STOP, the module is then only set to its startup state when data record 128 has been changed. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 118 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Table A- 1 Data record 128: Operating modes "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object", "Manual operation (without technology object)" Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 0 Major Version = 0 Bit 0 Minor Version = 2 1 Length of the parameter data per channel = 48 2 Reserved2 3 Reserved2 4 4 Bit 1 Header Operating mode Reserved2 Operating mode: 0000B: Not permitted 0001B: Counting / Position input 0010B: Measuring 0011 to 1111B: Not permitted 5 5 Basic parameters Interface standard: Reserved2 Enable additional diagnostic interrupts1) Reaction to CPU STOP: 00B: Output substitute value 01B: Keep last value 0B: RS422, symmetrical 10B: Continue operation 1B: TTL (5 V), asymmetrical 11B: Not permitted Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 119 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 6...7 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter inputs (parameters for incremental and pulse encoders) Reserved2 Signal evaluation: Signal type: 00B: Single 0000B: Pulse (A) 01B: Double 0001B: Pulse (A) and direction (B) 10B: Quadruple 0010B: Count up (A), count down (B) 11B: Not permitted 0011B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B, N) 0101B: Absolute encoder (SSI) 0110 to 1111B: Not permitted 7 Reaction to signal N: 00B: No reaction to signal N 01B: Synchronization at signal N Invert direction1) Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break1 Filter frequency4: 0000B: 100 Hz 0001B: 200 Hz 10B: Capture at signal N 0010B: 500 Hz 11B: Not permitted 0011B: 1 kHz 0100B: 2 kHz 0101B: 5 kHz 0110B: 10 kHz 0111B: 20 kHz 1000B: 50 kHz 1001B: 100 kHz 1010B: 200 kHz 1011B: 500 kHz 1100B: 1 MHz 1101 to 1111B: Not permitted Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 120 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 6...7 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter inputs (parameters for SSI absolute encoder) Monoflop time4: Code type: Signal type: 000B: Automatically 0B: Gray 0000B: Pulse (A) 001B: 16 s 1B: Dual 0001B: Pulse (A) and direction (B) 010B: 32 s 0010B: Count up (A), count down (B) 011B: 48 s 0011B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 100B: 64 s 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B, N) 101 to 111B: Not permitted 0101B: Absolute encoder (SSI) 0110 to 1111B: Not permitted 7 Parity4: Invert direction1 00B: None 01B: Even 10B: Odd Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break1 Reserved2 Transmission rate4: 000B: 125 kHz 001B: 250 kHz 010B: 500 kHz 11B: Not permitted 011B: 1 MHz 100B: 1.5 MHz 101B: 2 MHz 110 to 111B: Not permitted 8...9 Hardware interrupts1 8 Reserved2 Reserved2 Reserved2 Change of direction Underflow (low counting limit violated) Overflow (high counting limit violated) Gate stop3 9 SynchroniNew Capzation of the ture value counter by available an external signal3) Reserved2 Zero crossing Reserved2 Comparison Reserved2 event for DQ1 has occurred Gate start3 Comparison event for DQ0 has occurred Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 121 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 10...15 10 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Behavior of a DQ Set output (DQ1): Set output (DQ0): 0000B: Use by user program 0000B: Use by user program 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit; Measuring: Measured value >= comparison value 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit; Measuring: Measured value >= comparison value 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit; Measuring: Measured value <= comparison value 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit; Measuring: Measured value <= comparison value 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0100B: Between comparison value 0 and 1 0100B: Not permitted 0101B: After set command from CPU until comparison value 0101B: After set command from CPU until comparison value 0110B: Not between comparison value 0 and 1 0110 to 1111B: Not permitted 0111 to 1111B: Not permitted 11 Count direction (DQ1): Count direction (DQ0): 00B: Not permitted 00B: Not permitted 01B: Up 01B: Up 10B: Down 10B: Down 11B: In both directions 11B: In both directions Reserved2 Reserved2 12 Pulse duration (DQ0): 13 UINT: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D 14 Pulse duration (DQ1): 15 UINT: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D 16 Behavior of DI0 16 Behavior of counter value after Capture3 (DI0): Edge selection (DI0): 0B: Continue counting 11B: At rising and falling edge 1B: Set to start value and continue counting 00B: Not permitted5 01B: At rising edge 10B: At falling edge Select level (DI0): Reserved2 Substitute value for DQ1 Substitute value for DQ0 Set function of DI (DI0): 000B: Gate start/stop (level-triggered)3 0B: Active with high level 001B: Gate start (edge-triggered)3 1B: Active with low level 011B: Synchronization3 010B: Gate stop (edge-triggered)3 100B: Enable synchronization at signal N3 101B: Capture 110B: Digital input without function 111B: Not permitted Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 122 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 17 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Behavior of DI1: See Byte 16 18 19 Reserved2 Frequency of synchronization: Reserved2 0B: Once Frequency of Capture function: Input delay: 0B: Once 0010B: 0.1 ms 0000B: None 0001B: 0.05 ms 0011B: 0.4 ms 1B: Periodic 1B: Periodic 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101B: 1.6 ms 0110B: 3.2 ms 0111B: 12.8 ms 1000B: 20 ms 1001 to 1111B: Not permitted 20...43 Values 20...23 Counting high limit3: DINT: Value range: -2147483647 to 2147483647D or 7FFFFFFF to 7FFFFFFFH 24...27 Comparison value 0: Counting operating mode: DINT: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH; Measuring operating mode: REAL: Floating point number in the configured unit of the measured variable 28...31 Comparison value 1: Counting operating mode: DINT: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH; Measuring operating mode: REAL: Floating point number in the configured unit of the measured variable 32...35 Start value3: DINT: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH 36...39 Counting low limit3 DINT: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483646D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFEH 40...43 Update time: DINT: Value range in s: 0 to 25000000D 44 44 Counter behavior at limits and gate start Behavior at gate start3: Reaction to violation of a counting limit3: Reset when counting limit is violated3: 00B: Set to start value 000B: Stop counting 000B: To opposite counting limit 01B: Continue with current value 001B: Continue counting 001B: To start value 10 to 11B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 123 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 45 45 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Specify measured value Reserved2 Time base for velocity measurement: Measured variable: 000B: 1 ms 00B: Frequency 001B: 10 ms 01B: Period 010B: 100 ms 10B: Velocity 011B: 1 s 11B: Complete SSI frame 100B: 60 s/1 min 101 to 111B: Not permitted 46 Increments per unit: 47 UINT: Value range: 1 to 65535D 48 Set hysteresis range: 49...51 Parameters for SSI absolute encoder Value range: 0 to 255D: 49 Reserved2 50 Reserved2 51 Reserved2 Frame length4: 10 to 40D: Value range Bit number LSB of the position value: 0 to 38D: Value range Bit number MSB of the position value: 0 to 39D: Value range 1 You activate the respective parameter by setting the associated bit to 1. 2 Reserved bits must be set to 0 3 For signal type "Absolute encoder (SSI)", the following applies: Reserved2 4 In isochronous mode, the parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameter in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. 5 Applies to: Set function of DI = 001B; 010B; 011B; 101B Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 124 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Structure of the data record 128 in Fast Mode The following table shows you the structure of data record 128 for TM PosInput 1 for Fast Mode. The values in byte 0 to byte 3 are fixed and must not be changed. Table A- 2 Parameter data record 128: Fast Mode operating mode Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 0 Major Version = 0 Bit 0 Minor Version = 1 1 Length of the parameter data per channel = 48 2 Reserved2 3 Reserved2 4 4 Bit 1 Header Operating mode Reserved2 Operating mode: 0000B: Not permitted 0001B: Counting / Position input 0010 to 1111B: Not permitted 5 5 Basic parameters Interface standard: Reserved2 Enable additional diagnostic interrupts1) Reaction to CPU STOP: 00B: Output substitute value 01B: Keep last value 0B: RS422, symmetrical 10B: Continue operation 1B: TTL (5 V), asymmetrical 11B: Not permitted Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 125 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 6...7 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter inputs (parameters for incremental and pulse encoders) Reserved2 Signal evaluation: Signal type: 00B: Single 0000B: Pulse (A) 01B: Double 0001B: Pulse (A) and direction (B) 10B: Quadruple 0010B: Count up (A), count down (B) 11B: Not permitted 0011B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B, N) 0101B: Absolute encoder (SSI) 0110 to 1111B: Not permitted 7 Reaction to signal N: 00B: No reaction to signal N 01B: Synchronization at signal N 10 to 11B: Not permitted Invert direction1 Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break1 Filter frequency4: 0000B: 100 Hz 0001B: 200 Hz 0011B: 1 kHz 0100B: 2 kHz 0101B: 5 kHz 0110B: 10 kHz 0111B: 20 kHz 1000B: 50 kHz 1001B: 100 kHz 1010B: 200 kHz 1011B: 500 kHz 1100B: 1 MHz 1101 to 1111B: Not permitted Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 126 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 6...7 6 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter inputs (parameters for SSI absolute encoder) Monoflop time4: Code type: Signal type: 000B: Automatically 0B: Gray 0000B: Pulse (A) 001B: 16 s 1B: Dual 0001B: Pulse (A) and direction (B) 010B: 32 s 0010B: Count up (A), count down (B) 011B: 48 s 0011B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 100B: 64 s 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B, N) 101 to 111B: Not permitted 0101B: Absolute encoder (SSI) 0110 to 1111B: Not permitted 7 Parity4: 00B: None Invert direction1 01B: Even 10B: Odd Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break1 Reserved2 Transmission rate4: 000B: 125 kHz 001B: 250 kHz 010B: 500 kHz 11B: Not permitted 011B: 1 MHz 100B: 1.5 MHz 101B: 2 MHz 110 to 111B: Not permitted 8...9 Reserved2 10...15 Behavior of a DQ 10 Set output (DQ1): Set output (DQ0): 0000B: Digital output without function 0000B: Digital output without function 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit 0001B: Between comparison value and high limit 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit 0010B: Between comparison value and low limit 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0011B: At comparison value for a pulse duration 0100B: Between comparison value 0 and 1 0100B to 1111B: Not permitted 0101 to 1111B: Not permitted 11 Count direction (DQ1): Count direction (DQ0): 00B: Reserved 00B: Reserved 01B: Up 01B: Up 10B: Down 10B: Down 11B: In both directions 11B: In both directions Reserved2 Reserved2 12 Pulse duration (DQ0): 13 UINT: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D 14 Pulse duration (DQ1): 15 UINT: Value range in ms/10: 0 to 65535D Substitute value for DQ1 Substitute value for DQ0 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 127 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 16 16 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Behavior of DI0 Reserved2) Edge selection (DI0): 00B: Not permitted5 01B: At rising edge 10B: At falling edge 11B: Not permitted Select level (DI0): Reserved2 Set function of DI (DI0): 000B: Gate start/stop (level-triggered)3 0B: Active with high level 001B: Gate start (edge-triggered)3 1B: Active with low level 011B: Synchronization3 010B: Gate stop (edge-triggered)3 100B: Enable synchronization at signal N3 101B: Not permitted 110B: Digital input without function 111B: Not permitted 17 Behavior of DI1: See Byte 16 18 19 Reserved2 Frequency of synchronization: Count direction for synchronization Reserved2 Input delay: 0B: Once 00B: Not permitted 0000B: None 1B: Periodic 01B: Up 0001B: 0.05 ms 10B: Down 0010B: 0.1 ms 11B: In both directions 0011B: 0.4 ms 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101B: 1.6 ms 0110B: 3.2 ms 0111B: 12.8 ms 1000B: 20 ms 1001 to 1111B: Not permitted 20...43 Values 20...23 Counting high limit3: Value range: 1 to 33554431D or 1 to 01FFFFFFH 24...27 Comparison value 0: Value range: 0 to 33554431D or 0 to 01FFFFFFH 28...31 Comparison value 1: Value range: 0 to 33554431D or 0 to 01FFFFFFH 32...35 Start value3: Value range: 0 to 33554431D or 0 to 01FFFFFFH 36...39 Counting low limit3 Value range: 0 to 33554430D or 0 to 01FFFFFEH 40...43 Reserved2 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 128 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 44 44 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Counter behavior at limits and gate start Behavior at gate start3: Reaction to violation of a counting limit3: Reset when counting limit is violated3: 00B: Set to start value 000B: Stop counting 000B: To opposite counting limit 01B: Continue with current value 001B: Continue counting 001B: To start value 10 to 11B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted 010 to 111B: Not permitted 45...47 Reserved2) 48 Set hysteresis range: 49...51 Parameters for SSI absolute encoder Value range: 0 to 255D: 49 Reserved2 Frame length4: 50 Reserved2 Bit number LSB of the position value: 51 Reserved2 Bit number MSB of the position value: 10 to 40D: Value range 0 to 38D: Value range 1 to 39D: Value range 1 You activate the respective parameter by setting the associated bit to 1. 2 Reserved bits must be set to 0. 3 For signal type "Absolute encoder (SSI)", the following applies: Reserved2 4 In isochronous mode, the parameter can affect the isochronous mode parameters of the sync domain. Because the isochronous mode parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur if you change the parameter in RUN. To prevent overflows, select the option with the largest time required in the offline parameter assignment. 5 Applies to: Set function of DI = 001B; 010B; 011B Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 129 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error A.2 Parameter validation error If you make the parameter settings in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or in STEP 7 , the parameter values are checked before they are transferred to the technology module. This process prevents parameter errors. In other use cases, the technology module checks the transferred parameter data record. If the technology module finds invalid or inconsistent parameter values, it outputs an error code (see below). The new parameter data record is rejected in this case, and work continues with the current parameter values until a valid parameter data record has been transferred. WRREC When the CPU is in RUN, you can change the parameter data record with the instruction WRREC (Write Record). In case of errors, the WRREC instruction returns corresponding error codes in the STATUS parameter. Example: Let us assume that an invalid value, for example 9, is written to the module for the operating mode with WRREC. As a consequence, the module rejects the entire parameter data record. You can recognize this by evaluating the STATUS output parameter of the WRREC instruction. The STATUS output parameter is output as an ARRAY[1..4] of BYTE data with the value 16#DF80E111: Example of WRREC STATUS data Address Meaning DFH STATUS[1] Error when writing a data record via PROFINET IO (IEC 61158-6) 80H STATUS[2] Error when reading or writing a data record via PROFINET IO (IEC 61158-6) E1H STATUS[3] Module-specific error 11H STATUS[4] Error code from the table below: The "Operating mode" parameter has an invalid value. Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 130 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error codes The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128. Table A- 3 Error codes for parameter validation (incremental or pulse encoder) Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Data record number unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or not accessible * Check whether module is inserted or removed. * Check assigned values for parameters of the WRREC instruction. * Check byte 0. * Enter valid values. * Check byte 1. * Correct the length of the parameter blocks. DF DF 80 80 E0 E0 01 02 Wrong version Error in the header information DF 80 E1 00 Parameter invalid: No detailed information available Check all parameter values. DF 80 E1 11 "Operating mode" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 12 "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 13 "Signal type" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 14 "Sensor type" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 15 "Filter frequency" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 16 "Reaction to signal N" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 17 "Set function of DI" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 18 "Set function of DI" parameter configured the same for DI0 and DI1. Enter different parameter values for DI0 and DI1. DF 80 E1 19 * "Edge selection" parameter invalid * Enter valid parameter value. * "Gate start (edge-triggered)" configured as function for DIm and "At rising and falling edge" * Only configure "Gate start (edge-triggered)" as function for DIm together with "At rising edge" or "At falling edge". * "Gate stop (edge-triggered)" configured as function for DIm and "At rising and falling edge" * Only configure "Gate stop (edge-triggered)" as function for DIm together with "At rising edge" or "At falling edge". * "Synchronization" configured as function for DIm and "At rising and falling edge" * Only configure "Synchronization" as function for DIm together with "At rising edge" or "At falling edge". Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 131 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 1A "Input delay" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1B "Set output" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1C "Count direction" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1D "Reset when counting limit is violated" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1E "Reaction to violation of a counting limit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 20 "Reaction to gate start" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. E1 211,5 * Low counting limit > comparison value 0 * Low counting limit < comparison value 0 * Low counting limit > comparison value 1 * Low counting limit < comparison value 1 * Counting high limit < comparison value 0 * High counting limit > comparison value 0 * Counting high limit < comparison value 1 * High counting limit > comparison value 1 * "Start value" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value: * "Low counting limit" parameter invalid * "Start value" parameter invalid * "High counting limit" parameter invalid DF DF DF DF DF 80 80 80 80 80 E1 E1 E1 221,5 23 24 Start value > low counting limit Enter valid parameter value: Start value < high counting limit E1 25 "Update time" parameter invalid Enter parameter value from range 0 to 25000000D. "Reference speed" parameter invalid Enter parameter value from range 6.00 to 210000.00D. DF 80 E1 262 DF 80 E1 27 "Measured variable" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 28 "Time base for velocity measurement" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 29 "Increments per unit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 2A * "High counting limit" parameter invalid * "Low counting limit" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 0" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 1" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 2B3 Enter valid parameter value: Low counting limit < high counting limit Enter valid parameter value: Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 DF 80 E1 2C "Signal evaluation" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 2D * "Between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ0 * Configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" only for DQ1 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ0 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured only for DQ1 * "Between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ1, but "Use by user program" not configured for DQ0 * Only configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" for DQ1 when "Use by user program" is configured for DQ0 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ1, but "Use by user program" not configured for DQ0 * Only configure "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" for DQ1 when "Use by user program" is configured for DQ0 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 132 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 2E "Capture" configured for DIm in "Measuring" operating mode Do not configure "Capture" for DIm in "Measuring" operating mode DF 80 E1 364 "Counting high limit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 374,5 * "Comparison value 0" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 1" parameter invalid DF 80 Enter valid parameter value. E1 384 "Start value" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 394 "Counting low limit" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 3A4 "Count direction for synchronization" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 F0 Reserved bit is not set to 0. Set reserved bit to 0. 1 Only for "Counting" operating mode 2 Only for "Position input for technology object "Motion Control"" operating mode 3 Only for DQ1 functions "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" 4 Only for operating mode "Fast Mode" 5 Not for DQm function "Use by user program" or "Digital output without function" Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 133 Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter data record 128 when using an SSI absolute encoder. Table A- 4 Error codes for parameter validation (SSI absolute encoder) Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 B0 00 Data record number unknown Enter valid number for data record. DF 80 B1 01 Length of data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length. DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or not accessible * Check whether module is inserted or removed. * Check assigned values for parameters of the WRREC instruction. DF DF 80 80 E0 E0 01 02 Wrong version Error in the header information * Check byte 0. * Enter valid values. * Check byte 1. * Correct the length of the parameter blocks. DF 80 E1 00 Parameter invalid: No detailed information available Check all parameter values. DF 80 E1 11 "Operating mode" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 12 "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 13 "Signal type" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 18 "Set function of DI" parameter configured the same for DI0 and DI1. Enter different parameter values for DI0 and DI1. DF 80 E1 19 * DF 80 E1 1A "Input delay" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1B "Set output" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 1C "Count direction" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. Enter valid parameter value. "Edge selection" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 25 "Update time" parameter invalid Enter parameter value from range 0 to 25000000D. DF 80 E1 261 "Reference speed" parameter invalid Enter parameter value from range 6.00 to 210000.00D. DF 80 E1 27 "Measured variable" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 28 "Time base for velocity measurement" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 29 "Increments per unit" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 2B2 * "Comparison value 0" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 1" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value: Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) 134 Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD Parameter data record A.2 Parameter validation error Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning ter (hexadecimal) Remedy Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DF 80 E1 2D * "Between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ0 * Configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" only for DQ1 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ0 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured only for DQ1 * "Between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ1, but "Use by user program" not configured for DQ0 * Only configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" for DQ1 when "Use by user program" is configured for DQ0 * "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" configured for DQ1, but "Use by user program" not configured for DQ0 * Only configure "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" for DQ1 when "Use by user program" is configured for DQ0 DF 80 E1 2E "Capture" configured for DIm in "Measuring" operating mode Do not configure "Capture" for DIm in "Measuring" operating mode DF 80 E1 2F "Set function of DI" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 30 "Monoflop time" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 31 "Transmission rate" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 32 "Parity" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 33 "Frame length" parameter invalid Enter valid parameter value. DF 80 E1 34 * Bit number LSB of the position value < 0 * Bit number LSB of the position value >= 0 * Bit number LSB of the position value > Bit number MSB of the position value * Bit number LSB of the position value < Bit number MSB of the position value * (Bit number MSB of the position value) (Bit number LSB of the position value) >= 31 * (Bit number MSB of the position value) (Bit number LSB of the position value) < 32 * * Bit number MSB of the position value > Frame length Bit number MSB of the position value <= Frame length DF 80 E1 35 "0" configured for "Pulse duration" parameter DF 80 E1 373 * "Comparison value 0" parameter invalid * "Comparison value 1" parameter invalid DF 80 E1 F0 Reserved bit is not set to 0. Enter valid parameter value. Enter valid parameter value. Set reserved bit to 0. 1 Only for "Position input for "Motion Control"" technology object" operating mode 2 Only for DQ1 functions "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" 3 Only for "Fast Mode" operating mode; not for DQm function "Digital output without function" Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0) Manual, 06/2018, A5E33015755-AD 135 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V SIMATIC (6ES71386CG000BA0) ET 200SP Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual 08/2014 A5E34301686-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting ___________________ 4 Configuring/address space Interrupts/diagnostic ___________________ 5 messages ___________________ 6 Technical specifications ___________________ A Parameter data record B Open Source Software Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E34301686-AA 09/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual includes module-specific information on wiring, diagnostics and the technical specifications of the technology module. General information regarding the design and commissioning of the ET 200SP is available in the ET 200SP system manual. The "Time-based IO" technology supported by the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V technology module is described in detail in the function manual High-precision input/output with Timebased IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/82527590). Conventions Please observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 4 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Preface Open Source Software Open-source software is used in the firmware of the product described. Open Source Software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the product described, including the open-source software contained in it, pursuant to the conditions applicable to the product. Siemens accepts no liability for the use of the open source software over and above the intended program sequence, or for any faults caused by modifications to the software. For legal reasons, we are obliged to publish the original text of the license conditions and copyright notices. Please read the information relating to this in the appendix. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 5 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide ................................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview ....................................................................................................................................... 9 3 2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................. 9 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 Functions................................................................................................................................ 11 Detection of the input signals ................................................................................................. 11 Switching the outputs ............................................................................................................. 13 Additional functions ................................................................................................................ 15 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 16 3.1 4 5 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 16 Configuring/address space ...................................................................................................................... 22 4.1 Configuring ............................................................................................................................. 22 4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP ......................................................................................................... 24 4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 24 4.4 Parameters............................................................................................................................. 25 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 Control and feedback interface .............................................................................................. 27 Assignment of the control interface........................................................................................ 27 Assignment of the feedback interface .................................................................................... 30 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................... 33 5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 33 5.2 Trigger a diagnostic interrupt ................................................................................................. 36 5.3 Diagnostic alarms................................................................................................................... 37 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................... 39 A Parameter data record ............................................................................................................................. 46 B Open Source Software ............................................................................................................................ 51 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 6 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 1 Documentation guide Introduction This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the ET 200SP and S7-1500 systems consists of the respective system manuals, function manuals and device manuals. The STEP 7 information system (TIA Portal) also helps you to configure and program your automation system. Overview of the documentation for TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V technology module The following table lists further documentation that you will need when using the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V technology module. Table 1- 1 Documentation for TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V technology module Topic Documentation Most important contents System description System manual * ET 200SP Distributed I/O System * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/58649293) * S7-1500 Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/59191792) system manual Device manual * Interface Module * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/55683316/133300) * * Application planning Installation Connecting Commissioning Connecting Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages Technical specifications Dimension drawing Device manual Technical specifications ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/58532597/133300) Configuring interference-free controllers * Designing interference-free controllers * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/59193566) Function Manual Basics Electromagnetic compatibility Lightning protection Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 7 Documentation guide Topic Documentation Most important contents Time-based IO Function manual High-precision input/output with Timebased IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/82527590) * Basics * Configuration * Programming * Diagnostics Isochronous mode PROFINET with STEP 7 * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/49948856) function manual * Benefits Use Parameter settings SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for the SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 8 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V module Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V technology module has the following properties: Technical properties - 4 Digital inputs and 6 digital outputs - Rated output voltage 24V DC - Rated output current 0.5 A or 0.1 A (high-speed operation) per digital output - 24 V encoder supply output, short-circuit proof - Configurable substitute values (per digital output) - Configurable diagnostics - Configurable input filters for suppression of interference at digital inputs Supported encoder/signal types for digital inputs - 24 V incremental encoder with A and B signals - 24 V pulse encoder with one signal Supported functions - Time stamp function for inputs and outputs (resolution 1 s) - Counting (counting range 32-bit) - Oversampling for inputs and outputs - Pulse width modulation Supported system functions - Isochronous mode - Firmware Update - Identification data I&M Accessories The following accessories can be used with the module and are not included in the product package: Labeling strip Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connector A BaseUnit of the A0 type is required to operate the technology module. For an overview of the BaseUnits to be used with the technology module, refer to the product information on the documentation for the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864). For detailed information on the installation procedure, refer to the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 10 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions 2.2.1 Detection of the input signals You can configure up to four digital inputs with the technology module. You can evaluate the signals at the digital inputs for the following functions: Time stamp detection (Timer DI) The technology module can detect an associated time stamp for an edge at a digital input. The time stamp indicates when the edge was detected in relation to a time base. These time stamps can be used, for example, to calculate a time difference. The time stamp is based on the "Time-based IO" technology supported by the technology module and requires isochronous mode. Hardware enable (HW enable) You can configure a hardware enable by a digital input for the detection of time stamps. A hardware enable defines the time window in which the time stamps are acquired. You can override the hardware enable via the control interface (Page 27) with the respective SETEN bit. The figure below shows an example for the detection of time stamps at rising and falling edges with enable of the DI2 through the high level of the DI3: R Associated time stamp detected at rising DI2-edge F Associated time stamp detected at falling DI2 edge Counting Counting refers to the recording and adding up of events. You can configure up to three counters for the technology module. You can use an incremental encoder as well as a pulse encoder at the digital inputs. The two phase-shifted signals from an incremental encoder are evaluated four times. Only the rising or falling edges are counted with the signal of a pulse encoder. A counter starts at 0, goes up to 232-1 and starts again at 0 (overflow). The technology module can also count down if an incremental encoder is used. The counter value is returned in the feedback interface (Page 30) as a 32-bit value for each digital input. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 11 Product overview 2.2 Functions Oversampling The Oversampling function is used by the technology module to detect the status of the respective digital input for each application cycle (for example, OB61) at 32 points in time at regular intervals. The 32 states are returned together in the feedback interface (Page 30) as a 32-bit value. Oversampling requires isochronous mode. If the OB of the type "Synchronous Cycle" works with a clock different than the send clock, you must use the TIO_SYNC instruction. The figure below shows an example for Oversampling of DI0: TAPP Application cycle MSB Most significant bit LSB Least significant bit Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 12 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.2 Switching the outputs You can configure up to six digital outputs for the technology module. You can configure the following functions for switching the digital outputs: Time-controlled switching (Timer DQ) The use of time stamps enables reproducibility of controlled operations with very accurate time. Using this function, the technology module outputs edges at the respective digital output at precisely defined points in time. For example, you can implement a defined reaction time between input and output in conjunction with a digital input. The Timer function is based on Time-based IO and requires isochronous mode. Hardware enable (HW enable) You can configure a hardware enable by means of a digital input for a Timer digital output. A hardware enable defines the time window in which the respective digital output can be set. The resetting of the digital output is independent of the hardware enable. You can override the hardware enable via the control interface (Page 27) with the respective SETEN bit. The figure below shows an example for the output of rising and falling edges with enable of the DQ0 through the high level of the DI0: R Specified time of a rising DQ0-edge F Specified time of a falling DQ0-edge Pulse width modulation (PWM) The Pulse width modulation function enables you to specify the time period in the hardware configuration and the pulse-pause ratio in the control interface (Page 27) for the respective digital output. The setpoint for the pulse-pause ratio is a percentage and is evaluated with an accuracy of about 3%. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 13 Product overview 2.2 Functions Oversampling The Oversampling function is used by the technology module to output 32 states at regular intervals for each application cycle (for example, OB61). This allows up to 32 edges at the respective digital output per application cycle. The 32 states are sent via the control interface (Page 27) as a 32-bit string for the respective digital output to the technology module. Oversampling requires isochronous mode. If the OB of the type "Synchronous Cycle" works with a clock different than the send clock, you must use the TIO_SYNC instruction. The figure below shows an example for Oversampling of DQ0: TAPP Application cycle MSB Most significant bit LSB Least significant bit Note When you use the Oversampling function, make sure that the combination of application cycle and the 32-bit output sequence do not result in an output frequency which exceeds the maximum switching frequency for the digital outputs. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 14 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2.3 Additional functions Isochronous mode The technology module supports the system function "isochronous mode" in distributed mode on PROFINET. This system function is required for the following functions of the technology module: Time stamp detection (Timer DI) Time-controlled switching (Timer DQ) Oversampling of digital input Oversampling of digital output In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input signals and processing in the technology module are synchronized. Data processing The time stamp, counter values and Oversampling bit string as well as status bits are detected at the time Ti and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. The output of the current Oversampling bit stings is started at the time To. Diagnostic interrupt The technology module can trigger a diagnostic interrupt (Page 36), among other things, if no supply voltage is available or if there is an error at the digital outputs. Input filter To suppress interferences, you can configure an input filter for the digital inputs. Distributed application You can use the technology module in a distributed system by means of an interface module in the ET 200SP distributed I/O device. The following applications are possible: Distributed operation in an S7-1500 system Distributed operation in an S7-300/400 system Centralized application You can use the technology module centrally in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 15 3 Connecting 3.1 Pin assignment The TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V is used with a BaseUnit of the A0 type. The encoder signals, the digital input and output signals and the encoder supply are connected to the BaseUnit of the technology module. The supply voltage feed on the light BaseUnit BU...D of the associated potential group supplies the module and the digital outputs, and generates the encoder supply voltage. BaseUnit The BaseUnit is not included in the product package of the module and must be ordered separately. For an overview of the BaseUnits to be used with the technology module, refer to the product information on the documentation for the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864). You can find information about selecting a suitable BaseUnit in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) device manual. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit, connecting cable shields, etc. in the Connecting section of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 16 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Connecting 3.1 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the BaseUnit The table below shows the pin assignment, using the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B as an example. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment of the BaseUnit BU15-P16+A0+2B Designation Signal name View Signal name Designation Digital input DI0 DI0 1 2 DQ0 Digital output DQ0 Digital input DI1 DI1 3 4 DQ1 Digital output DQ1 Digital input DI2 DI2 5 6 DQ2 Digital output DQ2 Digital input DI3 DI3 7 8 DQ3 Digital output DQ3 Ground for encoder supply, digital inputs and digital outputs M 9 10 DQ4 Digital output DQ4 M 11 12 DQ5 Digital output DQ5 M 13 14 M 24 V encoder supply 24VDC 15 16 M Ground for encoder supply, digital inputs and digital outputs DC 24 V supply voltage L+ M Ground for supply voltage Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 17 Connecting 3.1 Pin assignment Block diagram When you connect encoders you must, depending on the configured input delay and potential effect of interference, ground the shields of the cables between encoder and technology module both through the shield connection on the BaseUnit (shield connection element and terminal) and at the encoder. The figure below shows the block diagram of the technology module to which an incremental encoder and a pulse encoder are connected. Pulse encoder with signal A Incremental encoder with A and B signals Input filter for supply voltage Shield connection on the BaseUnit Technology Electrical isolation Backplane bus interface module of the technology module Backplane bus Figure 3-1 Block diagram with incremental encoder and pulse encoder Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 18 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Connecting 3.1 Pin assignment L+/M supply voltage Connect the supply voltage (DC 24V) to the L+ and M connections. An internal protective circuit protects the technology module against damage due to reversed polarity of the supply voltage. Unexpected conditions can occur at the digital outputs with reversed polarity of the supply voltage. The technology module monitors the connection of the supply voltage. 24VDC encoder supply To supply the encoders and sensors at the digital inputs, the technology module supplies the DC 24V supply voltage at the 24VDC output with reference to M. Voltage is supplied from the L+/M supply voltage and monitored for short-circuits and overload. Digital inputs DI0 to DI3 You can use four digital inputs. The technology module can evaluate the edges at the digital inputs for the following functions: Table 3- 2 Evaluation of the signals at the digital inputs Evaluation of the signals for ... Usable digital inputs DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 Time stamp detection Hardware enable for time stamp detection -- -- -- Hardware enable for time-controlled switching -- Counting with incremental encoder with signals A and B -- -- Counting with pulse encoder with signal A -- Oversampling When you use the counting function, you can connect the following encoder types with 24 V signals to the digital inputs: Incremental encoder with signals A and B: Signals A and B are connected via the connections of the digital inputs DI2 and DI3. Signals A and B are the two incremental signals phase-shifted by 90. Pulse encoder / sensor with signal A: Signal A is connected via the connection of the digital input DI0, DI1 or DI2. The digital inputs are not electrically isolated from each other or from the digital outputs. The digital inputs are electrically isolated from the backplane bus. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 19 Connecting 3.1 Pin assignment Input filters for digital inputs You can configure an input filter for each digital input to suppress interference. Signals with a pulse duration below the configured input delay are suppressed. You can specify the following values for the input delay: None (input delay of 4 s, minimum pulse width of 3 s) 0.05 ms 0.1 ms (default) 0.4 ms 0.8 ms The input delay has the following effect on the functions of the signal evaluation at the digital inputs: Table 3- 3 Influence of the input delay Function Influence of the input delay Time stamp detection The detected time stamp is moved by the input delay. Counting The counter value that was valid at time Ti minus the input delay is returned. Oversampling The detected states are moved together by the input delay. Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. To increase the accuracy of the time stamp function, we recommend the use of shielded cables even for longer input delays. The use of shielded cables limits the jitter to maximum of 1 s. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 20 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Connecting 3.1 Pin assignment Digital outputs DQ0 to DQ5 You can use six digital outputs. The digital outputs can be switched directly at defined points in time or via the user program. Alternatively, you can output pulse width modulation or Oversampling at the respective digital output. The digital outputs are not electrically isolated from each other or from the digital inputs. The digital outputs are electrically isolated from the backplane bus. You can use each of the digital outputs as a high-speed output or as a sourcing output: High-speed output (default): The digital output works as fast push-pull switch and can carry a rated load current of 0.1 A. A push-pull switch is alternately switched to DC 24 V and ground. This makes for very steep edges. Sourcing output: The digital output works as 24 V sourcing output in reference to M and can carry a rated load current of 0.5 A. The digital outputs are protected from overload and short-circuit. NOTICE Overtemperature from unsuitable loads A high-speed output generates edges that are very steep. This creates very powerful charge reversals for the connected load, which can overheat the load at very high switching frequencies. The connected load must therefore be approved for high input frequencies. Note If you use a digital output as sourcing output, the switch-off response / switch-off edge depends on the load. Thus, it is possible that very short pulses cannot be output correctly. Note Relays and contactors can be connected direct without external circuitry. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 21 4 Configuring/address space 4.1 Configuring Introduction The technology module is configured and assigned parameters with the configuration software. The technology module functions are controlled and monitored by the user program. System environment The technology module can be used in the following system environments: Table 4- 1 Applications of the technology module with PROFINET IO Applications Components required Distributed operation in an S7-1500 system * Central operation in an S7-1500 system Distributed operation in an S7-300/400 system S7-1500 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V * S7-1500 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V * S7-300/400 automation system * ET 200SP distributed I/O system * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Time stamp functions: Device configuration and parameter settings with hardware configuration (HWCN) TIO instructions TIO_SYNC, TIO_DI and TIO_DQ Counting, PWM and Oversampling: Direct access to the control and feedback interface (Page 27) of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V in the I/O data STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Counting and PWM: Device configuration and parameter settings with hardware configuration (HWCN) Direct access to the control and feedback interface of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V in the I/O data STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Time stamp functions*, counting, PWM and Oversampling: Device configuration and parameter settings with hardware configuration (HWCN) STEP 7: Direct access to the control and feedback interface (Page 27) of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V in the I/O data Device configuration and parameter settings with HSP * on request Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 22 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Configuring/address space 4.1 Configuring Additional information You can find a detailed description of the time stamp functions and their configuration with the TIO instructions TIO_SYNC, TIO_DI and TIO_DQ in: High-precision input/output with Time-based IO function manual available as download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/82527590) In the STEP 7 (TIA Portal) information system under "Using technology functions > Counting, measurement and position input > Counting, measurement and position input (S7-1500)" Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 23 Configuring/address space 4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP 4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module to CPU STOP for each channel in the basic parameters. Table 4- 2 Response of the technology module to CPU STOP depending on parameter assignment Reaction to CPU STOP Meaning Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: If you are using counters, the counter values are set to 0 and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment and the setpoints. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The last valid period duration with the last valid pulse-pause ratio is output for a configured pulse width modulation until the next STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: If you are using counters, the counter values are set to 0 and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment and the setpoints. 4.3 Address space Address space of the technology module Table 4- 3 Range Range of the input addresses and output addresses of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Inputs Outputs 26 bytes 32 bytes Additional information A description on how to use the control and feedback interface of TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V can be found in the chapter Control and feedback interface (Page 27). Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 24 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Configuring/address space 4.4 Parameters 4.4 Parameters You can use various parameters to define the properties of the technology module in the hardware configuration. Depending on the settings, not all parameters are available. You can change the parameter assignment in the user program using data record 128 (Page 46). If you use STEP 7 (TIA Portal), you can find the module in the Hardware catalog under "Technology modules". If you use STEP 7, you can find the module following installation of the corresponding HSP file in the Hardware catalog. Parameters of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V You can configure the following parameters: Table 4- 4 Configurable parameters and their defaults Parameter Value range Default setting Basic parameters PWM period for the digital outputs Reaction to CPU STOP Enable diagnostic interrupts * 10 ms * 5 ms * 2 ms 10 ms * 1 ms * 0.5 ms * 0.2 ms * Output substitute value * Keep last value * Disabled * Enabled Output substitute value Disabled Channel parameters Configuration DQ/DI group (DQ0/DI0 or DQ1/DI1) Operating mode of the digital output Substitute value for the digital output High-speed output (0.1 A) Invert input or output signal HW enable by the digital input * Timer DQ with enable input * Use input/output individually * Timer DQ * Oversampling * Pulse width modulation PWM * 0 * 1 * Disabled * Enabled * Disabled * Enabled * Level-triggered * Edge-triggered Timer DQ with enable input Timer DQ 0 Enabled Disabled Level-triggered Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 25 Configuring/address space 4.4 Parameters Parameter Level selection for HW enable Configuration DQ/DI group (DQ2/DI2/DI3) Invert counting direction (incremental encoder) Operating mode of the digital input Input delay for the digital input Signal evaluation for counters Value range * Active with high level * Active with low level * Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) * Timer-DI2 with enable input DI3 * Timer DQ2 with enable input DI2 * Use inputs individually * Disabled * Enabled * Counter * Timer-DI * Oversampling * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * At rising edge * At falling edge Default setting Active with high level Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Disabled Timer-DI 0.1 ms At rising edge Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 26 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Configuring/address space 4.5 Control and feedback interface 4.5 Control and feedback interface Direct access to the control and feedback interface on the PROFINET is not necessary for distributed operation in a S7-1500 system to use the time stamp functions. The TIO instructions TIO_SYNC, TIO_DI and TIO_DQ are available for this case. You can find a detailed description of the use of the TIO instructions in the High-precision input/output with Time-based IO function manual available as download on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/82527590). Additional information on using the control and feedback interface is available in the section Configuring (Page 22). 4.5.1 Assignment of the control interface The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the technology module. Control interface The following table shows control interface assignment: Table 4- 5 Control interface of the technology module Offset to the start address Parameter Meaning Byte 0 -- Bits 6 to 7: Reserved; bits must be set to 0 SET_DQ (DQ0 ... DQ5) Bit 5: Set DQ5 Bit 4: Set DQ4 Bit 3: Set DQ3 Bit 2: Set DQ2 Bit 1: Set DQ1 Bit 0: Set DQ0 Byte 1 SETEN (DI0 ... DI3, DQ0 ... DQ3) Bit 7: Override hardware enable for DQ3 Bit 6: Override hardware enable for DQ2 Bit 5: Override hardware enable for DQ1 Bit 4: Override hardware enable for DQ0 Bit 3: Override hardware enable for DI3 Bit 2: Override hardware enable for DI2 Bit 1: Override hardware enable for DI1 Bit 0: Override hardware enable for DI0 Byte 2 SETEN (DQ4 ... DQ5) Bits 2 to 7: Reserved; bits must be set to 0 Bits 0 to 1: Override hardware enable for DQ4 to DQ5 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 27 Configuring/address space 4.5 Control and feedback interface Offset to the start address Parameter Meaning Byte 3 -- Reserved; bits must be set to 0 Bytes 4 to 7 TEC_OUT (DQ0) For DQ operating mode "Timer DQ": For DQ operating mode "Oversampling": For DQ operating mode "Pulse width modulation PWM": Byte 0...1: OFF TIME: Bytes 0 to 3: Bytes 0 to 2: Starting time stamp of the module for resetting the DQ0 32 states for Oversampling Reserved; bits must be set to 0 Bytes 8 to 11 TEC_OUT (DQ1) Bytes 12 to 15 TEC_OUT (DQ2) Bytes 16 to 19 TEC_OUT (DQ3) Bytes 20 to 23 TEC_OUT (DQ4) Bytes 24 to 27 TEC_OUT (DQ5) Byte 28 SEL (DI1) EDGESEL Bytes 2 to 3: ON TIME: Byte 3: Starting time stamp of the module for setting the DQ0 Pulse-pause ratio for PWM as a percentage See bytes 4 to 7 Bits 5...7: edge selection for time stamp detection DI1: 000B: Reserved 001B: Rising edges only 010B: Falling edges only 011B: Rising and falling edge (order depending on occurrence) 100B: Reserved 101B: First rising, then falling edge 110B: First falling, then rising edge 111B: Reserved SEL (DI0) REARM Bit 4: cyclic time stamp detection for DI1 EDGESEL Bits 0...3: See SEL (DI1) REARM Byte 29 SEL (DI3) Bytes 30 to 31 STW See byte 28 SEL (DI2) MSL Bits 12...15: sign of life counter (Master Sign of Life) -- Bits 1...11: Reserved; bits must be set to 0 SYN Bit 0: Synchronization of the module with the user program Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 28 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Configuring/address space 4.5 Control and feedback interface Notes on the control bits Control bit Notes SEL (DIm) This value is supplied by the TIO instruction TIO_DI. SET_DQm You can use this bit to set the DQm digital output in the DQ operating mode "Timer DQ". SETEN (DIm/DQm) You can use this bit to override the hardware enable that is configured for a digital input DIm or digital output DQm. STW This value is controlled by the TIO instruction TIO_SYNC. Detailed information is available on request. TEC_OUT (DQm) If you use the time stamp function for the respective digital output DQm, the TIO instruction TIO_DQ returns the two output time stamps for the module in this value. If you use the Oversampling function for the respective digital output DQm, you specify the 32 states with this value. If you use pulse width modulation for the respective digital output DQm, you specify the pulsepause ratio with this value as percentage. The following overview shows how the technology module evaluates the specified percentage. Pulse-pause ratio for PWM You specify the setpoint for the pulse-pause ratio as a percentage. The technology module outputs the following pulse-pause ratio in each case: Setpoint in % 0 Output value in % 1 2 0 3 4 5 3.13 6 7 8 6.25 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 9.38 12.50 15.63 18.75 21.88 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 25 28.13 31.25 34.38 37.50 40.63 43.75 46.88 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 53.13 80 81 81.25 56.25 82 83 59.38 84 85 84.38 62.50 86 87 87.50 88 65.63 89 90 91 90.63 68.75 92 93 71.88 94 93.75 95 75 96 97 96.88 78.13 98 99 100 100 Additional information Detailed information about the time stamp function is available from Technical Supporton request. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 29 Configuring/address space 4.5 Control and feedback interface 4.5.2 Assignment of the feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the technology module by means of the feedback interface. Feedback interface The following table shows the assignment of the feedback interface: Table 4- 6 Feedback interface of the technology module Offset to the start Parameter address Meaning Byte 0 Bits 4 to 7: Reserved STS_DI (DI0 ... DI3) Bit 3: Status DI3 Bit 2: Status DI2 Bit 1: Status DI1 Bit 0: Status DI0 Byte 1 QI (DI0 ... DI3) Bits 4 to 7: Reserved Bit 3: Quality Information DI3 Bit 2: Quality Information DI2 Bit 1: Quality Information DI1 Bit 0: Quality Information DI0 Byte 2 QI (DQ0 ... DQ5) Bits 6 to 7: Reserved Bit 5: Quality Information DQ5 Bit 4: Quality Information DQ4 Bit 3: Quality Information DQ3 Bit 2: Quality Information DQ2 Bit 1: Quality Information DQ1 Bit 0: Quality Information DQ0 Byte 3 -- Reserved Bytes 4 to 7 TEC_IN (DI0) For DI operating mode "Timer DI": For DI operating mode "Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted)" or "Counter": For DI operating mode "Oversampling": Byte 0...1: 2nd TIME/OFF TIME: Current counter value Oversampling value Second input time stamp of module Byte 2...3: 1st TIME/ON TIME: First input time stamp of module Bytes 8 to 11 TEC_IN (DI1) See bytes 4 to 7 Bytes 12 to 15 TEC_IN (DI2) Bytes 16 to 19 TEC_IN (DI3) Byte 20 EN (DI1) Bit 7: DI1 active as Timer DQ LEC (DI1) Bit 4...6: Lost edge counter for DI1 EN (DI0) Bit 3: DI0 active as Timer DQ LEC (DI0) Bit 0...2: Lost edge counter for DI0 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 30 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Configuring/address space 4.5 Control and feedback interface Offset to the start Parameter address Meaning Byte 21 See byte 20 EN (DI3) LEC (DI3) EN (DI2) LEC (DI2) Byte 22 -- Bits 6 to 7: Reserved EN (DQ5) Bit 5: DQ5 active as Timer DQ EN (DQ4) Bit 4: DQ4 active as Timer DQ EN (DQ3) Bit 3: DQ3 active as Timer DQ EN (DQ2) Bit 2: DQ2 active as Timer DQ EN (DQ1) Bit 1: DQ1 active as Timer DQ EN (DQ0) Bit 0: DQ0 active as Timer DQ Byte 23 Layout Property Module-specific value Bytes 24 to 25 ZSW SSL Bits 12...15: sign of life counter (Slave Sign of Life) -- Bits 10 to 11: Reserved SYNC Bit 8: Module is synchronized with the user program Channel address Bits 4 to 7 and 9: Number of the respective DI or DQ Channel mode Bits 0 to 3: Operating mode of the respective DI or DQ Notes on the feedback bits Table 4- 7 Feedback bits with notes Feedback bit Notes STS_DI (DIm) This bit indicates the status of respective digital input DIm. EN (DIm/DQm) This bit indicates that * The respective digital input is active as Timer DI and, if required, is enabled, or * The respective digital output is active as Timer DQ and, if required, is enabled. For digital inputs and digital outputs with the operating modes "Counter", "Oversampling", "Pulse Width Modulation PWM" and for level-controlled hardware enable, this bit is permanently "0". Layout Property This value is a module-specific constant and used by the TIO instructions for the recognition of the technology module. LEC (DIm) This value indicates the number of edges at the respective digital input DIm for which no time stamp could be stored. The module can count a maximum of seven edges per application cycle. The counter is reset with each new application cycle. QI (DIm) This bit indicates that an error has occurred at the respective digital input. 0 means: Supply voltage L+ not present or too low. 1 means: Supply voltage is present and OK If the diagnostic interrupts are enabled, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered when there is a problem with the L+ supply voltage. Refer to the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 37) for details on the diagnostic interrupts. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 31 Configuring/address space 4.5 Control and feedback interface Feedback bit Notes QI (DQm) This bit indicates that an error has occurred at the respective digital output. 0 means: Short-circuit, overload or overtemperature 1 means: Supply voltage is present and OK If the diagnostic interrupts are enabled, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered when there is a fault at the digital output. Refer to the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 37) for details on the diagnostic interrupts. TEC_IN (DIm) If you use the time stamp function for the respective digital input DIm, this value returns the two input time stamps for the module. The input time stamps are read by the TIO instruction TIO_DI and converted to the TIO_Time. If you use the counting function for the respective digital input DIm, this value returns the current counter value. If you use the Oversampling function for the respective digital input DIm, this value returns the 32 states of the Dlm. ZSW This value is controlled by the technology module and is used for communication with the TIO instruction TIO_SYNC. Additional information Detailed information about the time stamp function is available from Technical Support on request. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 32 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 5 Status and error displays LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs (status and error displays) of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V. Figure 5-1 LEDs of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 33 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 37). Table 5- 1 Status and error displays DIAG LED DIAG Meaning To correct or avoid errors Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Check or switch on the supply voltage on the interface module or on the CPU. Technology module not configured -- Off Flashes Technology module configured but no module diagnostics On Technology module configured and module diagnostics (at least one error pending) Flashes Table 5- 2 PWR/24VDC status displays LEDs Meaning PWR 24VDC Off Off To correct or avoid errors No supply voltage On On Evaluate the diagnostic alarms and eliminate the error. * Check the supply voltage. * Check the BaseUnit type and the wiring of the BaseUnit. Supply voltage is present and OK -- Short-circuit or overload at the encoder supply or supply voltage too low * Check the encoder wiring. * Check the loads connected to the encoder supply. * Check the supply voltage. On Off Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 34 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.1 Status and error displays ChannelLEDs TheDIm LEDs indicate the current level of the associated signals. The LEDs of the digital outputs DQm indicate the desired state. The flashing frequency of the channel LEDs is limited to approximately 14 Hz. If higher frequencies are present, the channel LEDs will flash at 14 Hz instead of indicating the current status. Table 5- 3 Status displays DIm/DQm LEDs DIm/DQm Meaning Digital input / digital output at 0 level Off Digital input / digital output at 1 level On Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 35 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.2 Trigger a diagnostic interrupt 5.2 Trigger a diagnostic interrupt Enabling the diagnostic interrupts You enable the diagnostic interrupts at the basic parameters. The technology module can trigger the following diagnostic interrupts: Table 5- 4 Possible diagnostic interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Monitoring * Internal error * Watchdog tripped. Module is defective. * Error * Load voltage missing * Module temporarily unavailable * Short-circuit or overload at encoder supply * Error at the digital outputs * Supply voltage error * Overtemperature Monitoring is always active. A diagnostic interrupt is triggered each time an error is detected. Monitoring is always active. A detected error only triggers a diagnostic interrupt if "Enable diagnostic interrupts" has been enabled in the device parameters. The diagnostic interrupts are not enabled in the default setting. Reactions to a diagnostic interrupt The following happens when an event occurs that triggers a diagnostic interrupt: The DIAG LED flashes red. Once you have remedied the error, the DIAG LED goes out. The S7-1500 CPU interrupts processing of the user program. The diagnostic interrupt OB (e.g. OB 82) is called. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostic interrupt OB. The S7-1500 CPU remains in RUN even if no diagnostic interrupt OB is present in the CPU. The technology module continues working unchanged if this is possible despite the error. Detailed information on the error event is available with the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 36 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3 Diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostic alarms Diagnostic alarms If a diagnostic alarm is pending, the DIAG LED flashes red. The diagnostics are displayed as plain text in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in the online and diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. The technology module only has one channel as far as diagnostics is concerned. Channel number "0" is therefore displayed for each diagnostic with a few exceptions. The following diagnostics can be signaled: Table 5- 5 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and remedies Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Error 9H * Internal module error occurred * Possible cause: Technology module defective Load voltage miss- 11H ing* Module temporarily unavailable* 1FH To correct or avoid errors Replace technology module * No technology module L+ supply voltage * Check BaseUnit type * Possible cause: BaseUnit type wrong * Check the wiring of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit * No normal operation of the technology module possible Wait until technology module is available again * Possible cause: Technology module is performing a firmware update Internal error 100H Technology module defective Replace technology module Watchdog tripped. Module is defective. 103H Firmware error Run firmware update Technology module defective Replace technology module Short-circuit or overload at encoder supply 10EH Error at the digital outputs 10FH * Error at encoder supply * Check encoder wiring * Possible causes: * Check consumers connected to encoder supply - Short-circuit - Overload * Error at the digital outputs * Check wiring at the digital outputs * Possible causes: * Check consumers connected to the digital outputs - Short-circuit - Overload Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 37 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 5.3 Diagnostic alarms Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Supply voltage error* 110H * Error at supply voltage L+ * Check the L+ supply voltage * Possible causes: * Check the wiring of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit Overtemperature 506H * * * To correct or avoid errors - Low voltage - Wiring of L+ supply voltage defective Short-circuit or overload at the digital * outputs or outputs of the encoder supplies * Ambient temperature outside specifica* tions Check process wiring Improve cooling Check connected loads This diagnostic alarm is displayed with the channel number "32768". Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 38 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 6 Technical specifications 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 Product type designation TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V General information BaseUnits that can be used BU type A0 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M 0 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 Update 3 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / Supply voltage Load voltage L+ Rated value (DC) 24 V Low limit of valid range (DC) 19.2 V High limit of valid range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction Input current Current consumption, max. 50 mA; without load Encoder supply Number of outputs 1 24 V encoder supply 24 V Yes; L+ (-0.8 V) Short-circuit protection Yes Output current, max. 500 mA; note derating Power loss Power loss, typ. 1.5 W Address area Occupied address area Inputs 26 bytes Outputs 32 bytes Digital inputs Number of inputs 4 Digital inputs, configurable Yes Input characteristics to IEC 61131, Type 3 Yes Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 39 Technical specifications 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 Digital input functions, configurable Digital input with time stamp * Yes 4 Number, max. Counter * Yes 3 Number, max. Counter for incremental encoder * Yes 1 Number, max. Digital input with oversampling * Yes 4 Number, max. Hardware enable for digital input * Yes 1 Number, max. Hardware enable for digital output * Yes 3 Number, max. Input voltage Type of input voltage DC Rated value, DC 24 V For signal "0" -30 V to +5 V For signal "1" +11 V to +30 V Permitted voltage at input, min. -30 V Permitted voltage at input, max. 30 V Input current for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA Input delay (at rated value of input voltage) Minimum pulse width for program reaction 3 s; with parameter assignment "none" For standard inputs * Configurable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 ms) * at "0" to "1", min. 4 s * at "1" to "0", min. 4 s Cable length Cable length shielded, max. 1000 m; depending on sensor, cable quality and edge slope Cable length unshielded, max. 600 m; depending on sensor, cable quality and edge slope Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 40 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Technical specifications 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 Digital outputs Type of digital output Transistor Number of outputs 6 M switching Yes; with high-speed output Sourcing Yes Digital outputs, configurable Yes Short-circuit protection Yes; electronic/thermal * Response threshold, typ. 1.7 A with standard output; 0.5 A with high-speed output Limiting of inductive shutdown voltage to -0.8 V Control of a digital input Yes Digital output functions, configurable Digital output with time stamp * Number, max. PWM output * Number, max. Digital output with oversampling * Number, max. Yes 6 Yes 6 Yes 6 Output switching capacity With resistive load, max. 0.5 A; 0.1 A with high-speed output With lamp load, max. 5 W; 1 W with high-speed output Load resistance range Low limit 48 ; 240 Ohm with high-speed output High limit 12 k Output voltage Type of output voltage DC for signal "0", max. 1 V; with high-speed output for signal "1", min. 23.2 V; L+ (-0.8 V) Output current for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A; 0.1 A with high-speed output, note derating for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.6 A; 0.12 A with high-speed output, note derating for signal "1" minimum load current 2 mA for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA Output delay with resistive load "0" to "1", max. 1 s; for high-speed output, 5 s with standard output "1" to "0", max. 1 s; for high-speed output, 6 s with standard output Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 41 Technical specifications 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 10 kHz With lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of outputs Max. current per module 3.5 A; note derating Cable length Cable length shielded, max. 1000 m; depending on load and cable quality Cable length unshielded, max. 600 m; depending on load and cable quality Encoders Supported encoders Incremental encoder (asymmetric) Yes 24 V initiator Yes 2-wire sensor Yes * Permitted quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. 1.5 mA Encoder signals, incremental encoders (asymmetrical) Input voltage 24 V Input frequency, max. 50 kHz Counting frequency, max. 200 kHz; with quadruple evaluation Cable length shielded, max. 600 m; depends on input frequency, encoder and cable quality; max. 200 m with 50 kHz Incremental encoder with A/B tracks, phaseshifted by 90 Yes Pulse encoder Yes 24 V encoder signal * Permitted voltage at input, min. -30 V * Permitted voltage at input, max. 30 V Interface hardware Input characteristics to IEC 61131, Type 3 Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous mode (application synchronized until terminal) Yes Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 375 s Jitter, max. 1 s Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Activation of substitute values Yes Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes Diagnostic alarms Diagnostics Yes Monitoring of supply voltage Yes Short-circuit Yes Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 42 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Technical specifications 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0 LED diagnostics display Monitoring of supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes, green PWR LED For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED Integrated functions Number of counters 3 Counting frequency (counters), max. 200 kHz; with quadruple evaluation Counting functions Continuous counting Yes Electrical isolation Electrical isolation channels Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation) Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Ambient conditions Operating temperature Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C; note derating Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C; note derating Distributed operation At SIMATIC S7-300 Yes At SIMATIC S7-400 Yes At SIMATIC S7-1500 Yes Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 45 g Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 43 Technical specifications Derating information for standardized total current of outputs If the digital outputs of the TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V are operated with resistive loads, you should derate the standardized total current of the loads at the outputs of the technology module. The standardized total current is the standardized total of the mean output currents at all digital outputs and encoder supply related to its nominal current in each case. The following derating curve shows the load capacity of the digital outputs depending on the ambient temperature and mounting position: Vertical installation of the system Horizontal installation of the system Figure 6-1 Standardized total current depending on ambient temperature and mounting position for resistive loads Note In the following cases, the voltage at the digital inputs and the load current supply L+ must not exceed DC 24 V + 5 %: * When the system is mounted vertically, as of an ambient temperature of 35 C * When the system is mounted horizontally, as of an ambient temperature of 45 C Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 44 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Technical specifications Example The following example shows the calculation of the standardized total current: Table 6- 1 Digital output Calculation of the standardized total current High-speed output (0.1 A) Output current Nominal value according to parameter assignment Mean value Mean value in relation to the nominal value 50 % DQ0 Yes 0.1 A 0.05 A DQ1 Yes 0.1 A 0.08 A 80 % DQ2 No 0.5 A 0.5 A 100 % DQ3 No 0.5 A 0.1 A 20 % DQ4 Yes 0.1 A 0.01 A 10 % DQ5 No 0.5 A 0.15 A 30 % Encoder supply -- 0.5 A 0.2 A 40 % Total 330 % Standardized total current = total / number of outputs = 330 % / 7 outputs 47 % With a standardized total current of 47 % and horizontal mounting of the system, the ambient temperature according to the derating curve may amount to a maximum of approx. 57 C. Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 45 A Parameter data record You may edit the module parameters in RUN. The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. If errors occur during the transfer or validation of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. A corresponding error code is then written to the STATUS output parameter. If no errors occur, the STATUS output parameter contains the length of the actually transferred data. The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7 online help (TIA Portal). Structure of data record The following table shows you the structure of data record 128 for TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V. The values in byte 0 to byte 3 are fixed and may not be changed. Table A- 1 Parameter data record 128 Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Header 0 Reserved2) 1 Length of the parameter data = 36 Major Version = 0 2 Reserved2) Minor Version = 1 3 4...7 4 Basic parameters Reserved2) PWM period for the digital outputs: 0000B: 10 ms 0001B: 5 ms 0010B: 2 ms 0011B: 1 ms 0100B: 0.5 ms 0101B: 0.2 ms 0110 to 1111B: Reserved 5 Reserved2) Enable diagnostic interrupt1) Reaction to CPU STOP: 00B: Output substitute value 01B: Keep last value 10 to 11B: Reserved 6 Reserved2) 7 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 46 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Parameter data record Bit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 8...9 8 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel parameters for DI0 Reserved2) Invert input signal1 Reserved2) Operating mode of the digital input: 0000B: Timer-DI 0001B: Reserved 0010B: Oversampling 0011B: Counter 0100 to 1111B: Reserved 9 Reserved2) Input delay / Filter frequency: 0000B: None 0001B: 0.05 ms 0010B: 0.1 ms 0011B: 0.4 ms 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101 to 1110B: Reserved 1111B: 50 kHz 10...11 Channel parameters for DI1: See bytes 8 and 9 12...13 12 Channel parameters for DI2 Reserved2) Invert input signal1 HW enable with DI31 Operating mode of the digital input: 0000B: Timer-DI 0001B: Reserved 0010B: Oversampling 0011B: Counter 0100B: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) 0101 to 1111B: Reserved 13 Reserved2) Input delay / Filter frequency: 0000B: None 0001B: 0.05 ms 0010B: 0.1 ms 0011B: 0.4 ms 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101 to 1110B: Reserved 1111B: 50 kHz 14...15 14 Channel parameters for DI3 Reserved2) Invert input signal1 Reserved2) Operating mode of the digital input: 0000B: Timer-DI 0001B: Reserved 0010B: Oversampling 0011 to 1111B: Reserved Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 47 Parameter data record Bit Byte 15 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved2) Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Input delay: 0000B: None 0001B: 0.05 ms 0010B: 0.1 ms 0011B: 0.4 ms 0100B: 0.8 ms 0101 to 1111B: Reserved 16...17 16 Channel parameters for DQ0 High-speed output (0.1 A)1 Substitute value Invert output signal1 HW enable Operating mode of the digital output: with next 0000 to 0111B: Reserved digital input1 1000B: Timer DQ 1001B: Reserved 1010B: Oversampling 1011B: PWM 1100 to 1111B: Reserved 17 Reserved2) 18...19 Channel parameters for DQ1: 20...21 Channel parameters for DQ2: See bytes 16 and 17 See bytes 16 and 17 22...23 22 Channel parameters for DQ3 High-speed output (0.1 A)1 Substitute value Invert output signal1 Reserved2) Operating mode of the digital output: 0000 to 0111B: Reserved 1000B: Timer DQ 1001B: Reserved 1010B: Oversampling 1011B: PWM 1100 to 1111B: Reserved 23 Reserved2) 24...25 Channel parameters for DQ4: 26...27 Channel parameters for DQ5: See bytes 22 and 23 See bytes 22 and 23 28...39 Reserved2) 1) You enable a specific parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1. 2) Must be set to 0. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 48 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Parameter data record Counting The following table shows the properties for counting that you can set in the channel parameters of the respective digital input: Operating mode for counting Usable digital inputs Counter (0011B) Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) (0100B) * DI0 * DI1 * DI2 "Invert input signal" set to... DI2 with DI3 (all bits of the channel parameters for DI3 are set to 0) 0 1 Counting of rising edges Counting of falling edges Counting direction not inverted Counting direction inverted Hardware enable (HW enable) You can use a hardware enable by an enable input for the operating modes "Timer DI" and "Timer DQ". You set a hardware enable with bit 4 of the respective channel parameter. You can set a hardware enable for the following inputs and outputs: Digital input / digital output Hardware enable by digital input... DI2 DI3 DQ0 DI0 DQ1 DI1 DQ2 DI2 You set a hardware enable with the channel parameters of the enable input "Operating mode" and "Invert" signal input: Operating mode "Invert input signal" set to... 0 1 Oversampling (0010B) Hardware enable by High level Hardware enable by Low level Timer DI (0000B) When using the SIMOTION control system only Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 49 Parameter data record Input filter The following overview shows the input filters that can be set for specific operating modes of a digital input: Table A- 2 Setting options for the input filter Operating mode of the digital input * Timer DI (0000B) * Oversampling (0010B) * Counter (0011B) * Incremental encoder (A, B phaseshifted) (0100B) Type of input filter Assignable values Input delay * None * 0.05 ms * 0.1 ms * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms Filter frequency 50 kHz (cannot be changed) Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 50 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA B Open Source Software For Resellers: In order to avoid infringements of the license conditions by the reseller or the buyer, the instructions and license conditions provided here must be passed on to the buyers. License Conditions and Disclaimers for Open Source Software and other licensing software The Open Source software listed below is used in unmodified form or in a form we have modified as well as other license software listed below in the "digital modules, analog modules, technology modules, communication modules and power supply modules of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200SP" Copyright Siemens AG, 2013-2014 (hereinafter referred to as "Product"). Liability for Open Source Software The Open Source software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source software contained in it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product. We explicitly reject any liability for the use of Open Source software beyond the program sequence intended for the Product. Furthermore, any liability for defects resulting from modifications to the Open Source software is excluded. We do not provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified. Please read the license conditions and copyright information of Open Source software as well as other licensing software: Component Open Source Software[Yes/No] Acknowledgements Copyright Information / File Dinkumware C/C++ Library - 5.01 NO LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT DINKUMWARE C/C++ LIBRARY - 5.01 GNU GCC libstdc++ / libsupc++ - 4.4.1 YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT GNU GCC LIBSTDC++ / LIBSUPC++ - 4.4.1 libgcc - 4.4.1 YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT LIBGCC - 4.4.1 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 51 Open Source Software Commercial Software: Dinkumware C/C++ Library - 5.01 Enclosed you'll find the license conditions and copyright notices applicable for Commercial Software Dinkumware C/C++ Library - 5.01 License conditions: 1 Copyright (c) 1991-1999 Unicode, Inc. All Rights reserved. This file is provided as-is by Unicode, Inc. (The Unicode Consortium).No claims are made as to fitness for any particular purpose. Nowarranties of any kind are expressed or implied. The recipientagrees to determine applicability of information provided. If thisfile has been provided on optical media by Unicode, Inc., the soleremedy for any claim will be exchange of defective media within 90days of receipt.Unicode, Inc. hereby grants the right to freely use the informationsupplied in this file in the creation of products supporting theUnicode Standard, and to make copies of this file in any form forinternal or external distribution as long as this notice remainsattached. 2 (c) Copyright William E. Kempf 2001 Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. William E. Kempf makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. 3 Copyright (c) 1994 Hewlett-Packard CompanyPermission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. HewlettPackard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided as is'' without express or implied warranty. Copyrights: copyright 1992 - 2006 by p.j. plauger and jim brodie. all rights reserved. copyright 1992-2006 by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved.ip copyright 1992-2006 by p.j. plauger. portions derived from work copyright 1994 by hewlettpackard company. all rights reserved Copyright 1992-2006 by dinkumware, ltd. all rights reserved copyright 1992-2006 by dinkumware, ltd. portions derived from work copyright 2001 by william e. kempf. all rights reserved copyright 1994 hewlettpackard company copyright 1994 by hewlettpackard company copyright william e. kempf 2001 copyright 1989-2006 by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved. copyright (c) by dinkumware, ltd. all rights reserved. copyright (c) unicode, inc. all rights reserved. (c) copyright william e. kempf 2001 copyright (c) hewlettpackard company Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 52 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved. copyright 2006 by dinkumware, ltd. copyright (c) by p.j. plauger, licensed by dinkumware, ltd. all rights reserved. the dinkum cec++ library reference is copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. this code is protected by copyright. all rights reserved. the dinkum cc++ library reference is copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. this code is protected by copyright. all rights reserved. dinkum compleat library, vc++ package (vc++ compilers only) the dinkum compleat library and the dinkum compleat library reference are copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved. Open Source Software: GNU GCC libstdc++ / libsupc++ - 4.4.1 Enclosed you'll find the license conditions and copyright notices applicable for Open Source Software GNU GCC libstdc++ / libsupc++ - 4.4.1 Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 53 Open Source Software License conditions: 1 License There are two licenses affecting GNU libstdc++: one for the code, and one for the documentation. There is a license section in the FAQ regarding common questions. If you have more questions, ask the FSF or the gcc mailing list. The Code: GPL The source code is distributed under the GNU General Public License version 3, with the addition under section 7 of an exception described in the "GCC Runtime Library Exception, version 3.1" as follows (or see the file COPYING.RUNTIME): GCC RUNTIME LIBRARY EXCEPTION Version 3.1, 31 March 2009 Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. This GCC Runtime Library Exception ("Exception") is an additional permission under section 7 of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). It applies to a given file (the "Runtime Library") that bears a notice placed by the copyright holder of the file stating that the file is governed by GPLv3 along with this Exception. When you use GCC to compile a program, GCC may combine portions of certain GCC header files and runtime libraries with the compiled program. The purpose of this Exception is to allow compilation of non-GPL (including proprietary) programs to use, in this way, the header files and runtime libraries covered by this Exception. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 54 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software 0. Definitions. A file is an "Independent Module" if it either requires the Runtime Library for execution after a Compilation Process, or makes use of an interface provided by the Runtime Library, but is not otherwise based on the Runtime Library. "GCC" means a version of the GNU Compiler Collection, with or without modifications, governed by version 3 (or a specified later version) of the GNU General Public License (GPL) with the option of using any subsequent versions published by the FSF. "GPL-compatible Software" is software whose conditions of propagation, modification and use would permit combination with GCC in accord with the license of GCC. "Target Code" refers to output from any compiler for a real or virtual target processor architecture, in executable form or suitable for input to an assembler, loader, linker and/or execution phase. Notwithstanding that, Target Code does not include data in any format that is used as a compiler intermediate representation, or used for producing a compiler intermediate representation. The "Compilation Process" transforms code entirely represented in non-intermediate languages designed for human-written code, and/or in Java Virtual Machine byte code, into Target Code. Thus, for example, use of source code generators and preprocessors need not be considered part of the Compilation Process, since the Compilation Process can be understood as starting with the output of the generators or preprocessors. A Compilation Process is "Eligible" if it is done using GCC, alone or with other GPL-compatible software, or if it is done without using any work based on GCC. For example, using non-GPL-compatible Software to optimize any GCC intermediate representations would not qualify as an Eligible Compilation Process. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 55 Open Source Software 1. Grant of Additional Permission. You have permission to propagate a work of Target Code formed by combining the Runtime Library with Independent Modules, even if such propagation would otherwise violate the terms of GPLv3, provided that all Target Code was generated by Eligible Compilation Processes. You may then convey such a combination under terms of your choice, consistent with the licensing of the Independent Modules. 2. No Weakening of GCC Copyleft. The availability of this Exception does not imply any general presumption that third-party software is unaffected by the copyleft requirements of the license of GCC. Hopefully that text is self-explanatory. If it isn't, you need to speak to your lawyer, or the Free Software Foundation. The Documentation: GPL, FDL The documentation shipped with the library and made available over the web, excluding the pages generated from source comments, are copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, and placed under the GNU Free Documentation License version 1.2. There are no Front-Cover Texts, no Back-Cover Texts, and no Invariant Sections. For documentation generated by doxygen or other automated tools via processing source code comments and markup, the original source code license applies to the generated files. Thus, the doxygen documents are licensed GPL. If you plan on making copies of the documentation, please let us know. We can probably offer suggestions. 2 This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version 3.1, as published by the Free Software Foundation. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see . Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 56 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software 3 // This file is part of the GNU ISO C++ Library. This library is free // software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the // terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the // Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) // any later version. // This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, // but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of // MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the // GNU General Public License for more details. // Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional // permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version // 3.1, as published by the Free Software Foundation. // You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and // a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; // see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see // . // (C) Copyright Jeremy Siek 2000. Permission to copy, use, modify, // sell and distribute this software is granted provided this // copyright notice appears in all copies. This software is provided // "as is" without express or implied warranty, and with no claim as // to its suitability for any purpose. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 57 Open Source Software 4 // This file is part of the GNU ISO C++ Library. This library is free // software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the // terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the // Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) // any later version. // This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, // but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of // MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the // GNU General Public License for more details. // Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional // permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version // 3.1, as published by the, 2009 Free Software Foundation. // You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and // a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; // see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see // . /* * * Copyright (c) 1994 * Hewlett-Packard Company * * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. * * Copyright (c) 1996,1997 * Silicon Graphics * * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 58 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software 5 // This file is part of the GNU ISO C++ Library. This library is free // software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the // terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the // Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) // any later version. // This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, // but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of // MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the // GNU General Public License for more details. // Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional // permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version // 3.1, as published by the Free Software Foundation. // You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and // a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; // see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see // . /* * * Copyright (c) 1996,1997 * Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. * * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. * * * Copyright (c) 1994 * Hewlett-Packard Company * * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 59 Open Source Software 6 This library is free // software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms // of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software // Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later // version. // This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but // WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of // MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU // General Public License for more details. // Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional // permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version // 3.1, as published by the Free Software Foundation. // You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and // a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; // see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see // . // Copyright (C) 2004 Ami Tavory and Vladimir Dreizin, IBM-HRL. // Permission to use, copy, modify, sell, and distribute this software // is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright // notice appears in all copies, and that both that copyright notice // and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. None // of the above authors, nor IBM Haifa Research Laboratories, make any // representation about the suitability of this software for any // purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied // warranty. /** * @file splay_tree_.hpp * Contains an implementation class for splay_tree_. */ /* * This implementation uses an idea from the SGI STL (using a "header" node * which is needed for efficient iteration). Following is the SGI STL * copyright. * * Copyright (c) 1996,1997 * Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. * * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. * * * Copyright (c) 1994 * Hewlett-Packard Company * Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 60 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. 7 This library is free // software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the // terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the // Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) // any later version. // This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, // but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of // MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the // GNU General Public License for more details. // Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional // permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version // 3.1, as published by the Free Software Foundation. // You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and // a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; // see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see // . /* * Copyright (c) 1997 * Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. * * Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software * and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, * provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and * that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear * in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no * representations about the suitability of this software for any * purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. 8 Verbatim copying and distribution of this entire article are permitted worldwide, without royalty, in any medium, provided this notice is preserved. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 61 Open Source Software 9 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 62 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 63 Open Source Software To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source form of a work. A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A "Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 64 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 65 Open Source Software 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to "keep intact all notices". c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 66 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 67 Open Source Software A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 68 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 69 Open Source Software All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 70 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 71 Open Source Software Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 72 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 73 Open Source Software If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) 74 Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA Open Source Software 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see . Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type show c' for details. The hypothetical commands show w' and show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES71386CG000BA0) Manual, 08/2014, A5E34301686-AA 75 Open Source Software You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see . The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read . 10 Disclaimer and Copyright

Revised 16 February, 2004

Permission to use, copy, modify, sell, and distribute this software is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies, and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

Revised 16 February, 2004

None of the above authors, nor IBM Haifa Research Laboratories, Red Hat, or both, make any representation about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.< 11 # This file file be copied and used freely without restrictions. It can # be used in projects which are not available under the GNU Public License # but which still want to provide support for the GNU gettext functionality. # Please note that the actual code is *not* freely available. 12 This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 13 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 14 This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. 15 Permission to use, copy, modify, sell, and distribute this software is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies, and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. None of the above authors, nor IBM Haifa Research Laboratories, make any representation about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 167 Open Source Software 16 This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. 17 This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 18 Distributed under the Boost Software License, Version 1.0. (See accompanying file LICENSE_1_0.txt or copy at http:www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th, 2003 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following: The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Copyrights: C) Copyright Jeremy Siek 2000 Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright 1998 by Information Technology Industry Council Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation 1984-2002 Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 168 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1994, 1999, 2000, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1994, 1999, 2000, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1994, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1994, 1999, 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1996, 1998, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 169 Open Source Software Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 170 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2004, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2002, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1998, 2009, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997-1999, 2001, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1997-1999, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1998, 1999 Greg Colvin and Beman Dawes Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 171 Open Source Software Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2002, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 172 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2003, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2001, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 1999, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999-2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 1999-2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 173 Open Source Software Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2000, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2000, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 174 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) 2000, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc Benjamin Kosnik , 2001. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003 Peter Dimov Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 175 Open Source Software Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2004, 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2001, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2001, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002 Peter Dimov Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 176 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2004, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2002, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2002, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 177 Open Source Software Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2003, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004 Ami Tavory and Vladimir Dreizin, IBM-HRL. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2004, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 178 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2005, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2006, 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2006-2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (c) 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright (c) 1996 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1996,1997 Silicon Graphics Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 179 Open Source Software Copyright (c) 1996,1997 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1996-1998 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1996-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1997 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 1998 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003 Peter Dimov and Multi Media Ltd. Copyright 2008 FSF Copyright Ami Tavory and Vladimir Dreizin, IBM-HRL, 2004, and Benjamin Kosnik, Red Hat, 2004. Copyright (c) 1999 The Open Group/The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. Copyright (c) 1999 ISO Copyright (c) 2000 Addison Wesley Longman, Inc. Copyright (c) 2000 Addison Wesley, Inc. Copyright (c) 2002 OOPSLA Copyright (c) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc Copyright (c) 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc Copyright (c) 2007 FSF Copyright (c) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Open Source Software: libgcc - 4.4.1 Enclosed you'll find the license conditions and copyright notices applicable for Open Source Software libgcc - 4.4.1 Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 180 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software License conditions: 1 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later version. GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. Under Section 7 of GPL version 3, you are granted additional permissions described in the GCC Runtime Library Exception, version 3.1, as published by the Free Software Foundation. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License and a copy of the GCC Runtime Library Exception along with this program; see the files COPYING3 and COPYING.RUNTIME respectively. If not, see . GCC RUNTIME LIBRARY EXCEPTION Version 3.1, 31 March 2009 Copyright (C) 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. This GCC Runtime Library Exception ("Exception") is an additional permission under section 7 of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). It applies to a given file (the "Runtime Library") that bears a notice placed by the copyright holder of the file stating that the file is governed by GPLv3 along with this Exception. When you use GCC to compile a program, GCC may combine portions of certain GCC header files and runtime libraries with the compiled program. The purpose of this Exception is to allow compilation of non-GPL (including proprietary) programs to use, in this way, the header files and runtime libraries covered by this Exception. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 181 Open Source Software 0. Definitions. A file is an "Independent Module" if it either requires the Runtime Library for execution after a Compilation Process, or makes use of an interface provided by the Runtime Library, but is not otherwise based on the Runtime Library. "GCC" means a version of the GNU Compiler Collection, with or without modifications, governed by version 3 (or a specified later version) of the GNU General Public License (GPL) with the option of using any subsequent versions published by the FSF. "GPL-compatible Software" is software whose conditions of propagation, modification and use would permit combination with GCC in accord with the license of GCC. "Target Code" refers to output from any compiler for a real or virtual target processor architecture, in executable form or suitable for input to an assembler, loader, linker and/or execution phase. Notwithstanding that, Target Code does not include data in any format that is used as a compiler intermediate representation, or used for producing a compiler intermediate representation. The "Compilation Process" transforms code entirely represented in non-intermediate languages designed for human-written code, and/or in Java Virtual Machine byte code, into Target Code. Thus, for example, use of source code generators and preprocessors need not be considered part of the Compilation Process, since the Compilation Process can be understood as starting with the output of the generators or preprocessors. A Compilation Process is "Eligible" if it is done using GCC, alone or with other GPL-compatible software, or if it is done without using any work based on GCC. For example, using non-GPL-compatible Software to optimize any GCC intermediate representations would not qualify as an Eligible Compilation Process. 1. Grant of Additional Permission. You have permission to propagate a work of Target Code formed by combining the Runtime Library with Independent Modules, even if such propagation would otherwise violate the terms of GPLv3, provided that all Target Code was generated by Eligible Compilation Processes. You may then convey such a combination under terms of your choice, consistent with the licensing of the Independent Modules. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 182 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software 2. No Weakening of GCC Copyright. The availability of this Exception does not imply any general presumption that third-party software is unaffected by the copyright requirements of the license of GCC. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (c) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyright license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 183 Open Source Software Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. "This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 184 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source form of a work. A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A "Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 185 Open Source Software You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 186 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to "keep intact all notices". c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 187 Open Source Software d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 188 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 189 Open Source Software All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 190 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 191 Open Source Software If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 192 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 193 Open Source Software 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see . Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 194 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Open Source Software Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type show c' for details. The hypothetical commands show w' and show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see . The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read . 2 This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. Copyrights: Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2005, 2006, 2009 Free Software Foundation Copyright (C) 2007, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright (C) 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 195 Index B BaseUnit wiring, 91 C Channel status LEDs, 117 Configuration channel configuration 1 (4 A) or 2 ( 2 A) channels), 102 control system hardware/software options, 98 diagnostics options, 105 general parameters, 102 I/O address space usage, 100 I/O addresses, 109 operating mode, 103 overview, 99 Parameter (channel parameters), 106 potential group, 102 reaction to CPU STOP, 103 TIA Portal module selection, 101 Control interface, 110 Current control function, 78 dithering and cycle time, 81 limit reached flags, 80 PID function diagram, 78 PID parameters, 79 resetting the PID controller, 81 set point control, 80 Current measurement function, 76 accuracy, 77 D DC motor mode, 65 control and feedback signals of PWM mode, 71 input and output signals of PWM mode, 73 isochronous mode, 69 parameters of DC motor mode, 70 setting and changing the period duration, 68 setting and changing the pulse duty cycle and rotation direction, 68 truth table, 67 DIAG LEDs, 117 Diagnostics error detection and diagnostics, 122 options, 105 Direct control of a digital output, 87 Dither PWM output function, 82 amplitude, 82 example diagrams, 84 period, 83 ramp-up and ramp-down, 83 E Errors error detection and diagnostics, 122 parameter validation, 120 F Feedback interface, 115 Firmware version, 117 Frequency output mode, 57 control and feedback signals, 61 input and output signals, 64 isochronous mode, 60 on-delay, 60 output value (frequency), 59 parameters, 61 truth table, 59 Functional state (FS), 117 Functions current control, 78 current measurement, 76 direct control of a digital output, 87 dither PWM output, 82 high-speed output, 74 isochronous mode, 86 overview, 14 sequence counter, 75 H High-speed output function, 74 I I/O address configuration, 109 Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 196 Index I/O address space usage, 100 Interfaces control, 110 feedback, 115 SLOT, 113 isochronous mode Pulse output (single pulse) mode, 20 Isochronous mode DC motor mode, 69 frequency output mode, 60 On/Off-delay mode, 53 overview, 86 pulse width modulation (PWM) mode, 29 L LD_SLOT, 113 LED status display, 117 Load wiring, 91 M MODE_SLOT, 113 Modes DC motor, 65 Frequency output, 57 On/Off-delay, 46 overview, 14 pulse output (single pulse), 17 pulse train, 36 pulse width modulation (PWM), 25 O On/Off-delay mode, 46 control and feedback signals, 54 input and output signals, 56 isochronous mode, 53 minimum pulse duration, 49 Off-delay, 52 On-delay, 52 parameters, 53 retriggering Off-delay, 52 retriggering On-delay, 51 truth table, 49 Open source software, 142 Overview TM Pulse 2x24V, 10 P Parameter data record, 138 Parameter validation errors, 120 PID parameters, 79 Pin assignment, 91 Potential group, 102 Power source wiring, 91 Programming reference, 131 Pulse output (single pulse) mode, 17 control and feedback signals, 22 input and output signals, 24 On-delay, 20 parameters, 21 pulse duration, 19 sequence counter, 20 truth table, 19 Pulse train mode, 36 control and feedback signals, 43 current measurement, 41 duty cycle, 40 input and output signals, 45 on-delay, 39 period duration, 39 pulse count, 38 truth table, 38 Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode, 25 control and feedback signals, 33 current control, 31 current measurement, 31 duty cycle, 28 input and output signals, 35 isochronous mode, 29 minimum pulse duration, 27 On-delay, 31 parameters, 32 period duration, 28 setting the minimum pulse duration, 31 truth table, 26 R Reaction to CPU STOP, 103 Record 128 (module parameters), 138 S sensor wiring, 91 Sequence counter, 75 SLOT, 113 Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 197 Index T Technical specifications ambient temperature derating, 130 hardware/software, 125 programming reference, 131 TM Pulse 2x24V overview, 10 TM_CTRL_DQ signal, 87 Truth table DC motor mode, 67 frequency output mode, 59 On/Off-delay mode, 49 pulse output (single pulse) mode, 19 pulse train mode, 38 Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode, 26 W Wiring, 91 WRREC parameter write errors, 120 Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) 198 Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA Index Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES71386DB000BB1) Manual, 09/2015, A5E35061186-AA 199 Introduction 1 Safety instructions 2 Weighing systems Description 3 Electronic weighing system SIWAREX WP321 Application planning 4 Mounting 5 Connecting 6 Commissioning 7 Scale parameters and functions 8 Messages 9 Manual Command lists 10 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11 Technical specifications 12 Accessories 13 Appendix A ESD guidelines B List of abbreviations C 7MH4138-6AA00-0BA0 09/2018 A5E33715669A-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Document order number: A5E33715669A 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014 - 2018. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 2 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................9 1.1 Purpose of this documentation.................................................................................................9 1.2 Document history...................................................................................................................10 1.3 Product compatibility..............................................................................................................10 1.4 Checking the consignment.....................................................................................................11 1.5 Security information...............................................................................................................11 1.6 Transportation and storage....................................................................................................12 1.7 Basic knowledge required......................................................................................................12 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................................13 2.1 3 4 5 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................13 Description..................................................................................................................................................15 3.1 Product overview....................................................................................................................15 3.2 Area of application.................................................................................................................15 3.3 System integration in SIMATIC..............................................................................................15 3.4 Customer benefits..................................................................................................................16 3.5 Scope of delivery....................................................................................................................17 Application planning...................................................................................................................................19 4.1 Functions................................................................................................................................19 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Parameter assignment options..............................................................................................19 Parameter assignment with the PC........................................................................................19 Parameter assignment with the SIMATIC Panel....................................................................20 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................21 5.1 Safety notices for installation.................................................................................................21 5.2 Safety information according to FM and UL...........................................................................21 5.3 Installation guideline...............................................................................................................22 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 EMC-compliant setup.............................................................................................................22 Introduction............................................................................................................................22 Possible effects of interference..............................................................................................23 Coupling mechanisms............................................................................................................23 Five basic rules for securing EMC.........................................................................................23 5.5 Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP....................................................................................24 5.6 Configuration of the hardware in SIMATIC............................................................................25 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 3 Table of contents 6 7 8 4 Connecting.................................................................................................................................................27 6.1 24 V connection.....................................................................................................................27 6.2 Connecting the load cells ......................................................................................................27 6.3 Shield connection...................................................................................................................30 6.4 Connection of RS485 serial interface.....................................................................................31 6.5 Connection of Siebert display via RS485...............................................................................32 Commissioning...........................................................................................................................................33 7.1 Factory-set parameters..........................................................................................................33 7.2 Commissioning tools..............................................................................................................33 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7 7.3.8 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software......................34 Start........................................................................................................................................34 Factory setting of the parameters..........................................................................................35 Selecting the calibration method............................................................................................36 Defining the calibration weights.............................................................................................37 Setting calibration points........................................................................................................38 Calibrating the scale automatically.........................................................................................39 Performing the automatic calibration......................................................................................40 Checking the scale following calibration................................................................................40 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.3.1 7.4.3.2 7.4.3.3 7.4.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL...............................................................41 Service with the SIWATOOL program...................................................................................41 Establish communication to SIWAREX WP321.....................................................................41 Calibration..............................................................................................................................42 Selecting the calibration method............................................................................................42 Calibration with calibration weight..........................................................................................43 Automatic calibration (without calibration weight)..................................................................47 Receive all data......................................................................................................................51 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program...................................................................................52 Windows and functions of SIWATOOL..................................................................................53 Offline parameter assignment................................................................................................53 Online parameter assignment................................................................................................54 Available help options............................................................................................................54 Entering parameters with SIWATOOL...................................................................................54 Scale parameters and functions.................................................................................................................57 8.1 Parameters and functions......................................................................................................57 8.2 DR 2 command code.............................................................................................................57 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 DR 3 calibration parameters..................................................................................................57 Scale name............................................................................................................................60 Unit of weight.........................................................................................................................60 Gross identifier.......................................................................................................................60 Maximum weighing range......................................................................................................60 Calibration weights 0, 1, 2 and calibration digits 0, 1, 2.........................................................60 Scale interval..........................................................................................................................61 Automatic zero adjustment.....................................................................................................61 Decimal places for process values.........................................................................................61 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Table of contents 8.3.9 8.3.10 8.3.11 8.3.12 8.3.13 8.3.14 8.3.15 8.3.16 8.3.17 Maximum tare load.................................................................................................................61 Maximum negative zeroing limit.............................................................................................61 Maximum positive zeroing limit..............................................................................................61 Standstill range......................................................................................................................62 Standstill time.........................................................................................................................62 Standstill waiting time.............................................................................................................62 Low-pass filter limit frequency................................................................................................63 Low-pass filter number...........................................................................................................63 Mean value filter depth...........................................................................................................64 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 Calibration procedure.............................................................................................................64 Calibration with calibration weights........................................................................................64 Automatic calibration .............................................................................................................67 8.5 8.5.1 DR 4 Output of calculated calibration digits...........................................................................67 Calibration digits 0, 1, 2 (calculated)......................................................................................68 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 DR 5 zeroing memory............................................................................................................68 Effective tare weight - from specification................................................................................69 Effective tare weight (semi-automatic)...................................................................................69 Zero weight (semi-automatic).................................................................................................69 Current zero tracking weight..................................................................................................70 Dead load...............................................................................................................................70 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 DR 6 limit value settings.........................................................................................................70 Limit reference.......................................................................................................................71 Limit value 1 ON, limit value 2 ON, limit value 1 OFF, limit value 2 OFF...............................72 Limit value "Empty" ON..........................................................................................................72 Delay time for limits................................................................................................................73 8.8 DR 9 module information.......................................................................................................73 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 DR 10 load cell parameters....................................................................................................74 Selection of the sampling rate................................................................................................75 Number of support points.......................................................................................................76 Load cell characteristic value.................................................................................................77 Rated load of a load cell.........................................................................................................77 8.10 8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4 DR 13 RS485 parameters......................................................................................................77 RS485 protocol......................................................................................................................78 RS485 baud rate....................................................................................................................78 RS485 character parity..........................................................................................................78 Decimal place for Siebert indicator........................................................................................79 8.11 8.11.1 DR 14 SIMATIC interface parameters...................................................................................79 Selection of process value 1, 2..............................................................................................80 8.12 8.12.1 DR 15 manual tare specification............................................................................................80 Specification of tare weight ...................................................................................................81 8.13 8.13.1 8.13.2 8.13.3 8.13.4 8.13.5 8.13.6 DR 30 current process values................................................................................................81 Gross process weight.............................................................................................................83 Net process weight.................................................................................................................83 Tare process weight...............................................................................................................83 Gross / net weight..................................................................................................................84 Gross / net weight with increased resolution (x 10)...............................................................84 Tare weight............................................................................................................................84 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 5 Table of contents 9 8.13.7 Refresh counter for process values.......................................................................................84 8.14 8.14.1 8.14.2 8.14.3 DR 31 advanced current process values...............................................................................84 Unfiltered digit value...............................................................................................................85 Filtered digit value..................................................................................................................85 Refresh counter for process values.......................................................................................85 8.15 8.15.1 DR 32 Message display.........................................................................................................85 Error bytes 0 to 7....................................................................................................................88 8.16 8.16.1 DR 34 ASCII main display value............................................................................................88 Content of main display as ACII string...................................................................................88 Messages...................................................................................................................................................91 9.1 Message types.......................................................................................................................91 9.2 Message paths.......................................................................................................................91 9.3 Evaluating messages with the help of SIWATOOL................................................................92 9.4 Detecting messages with the help of FB SIWA......................................................................92 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 Message list...........................................................................................................................92 System status message list....................................................................................................92 Technology error message list...............................................................................................93 Data and operating errors message list.................................................................................93 Messages by LEDs on the module........................................................................................94 10 Command lists............................................................................................................................................95 11 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500..................................................................................97 12 6 11.1 General information................................................................................................................97 11.2 Structure of the program "Ready for use"..............................................................................97 11.3 Advantages of task sharing....................................................................................................97 11.4 Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system....................................................98 11.5 Calling of function block.......................................................................................................100 11.6 Working with the function block............................................................................................101 11.7 I/O interface of function block...............................................................................................104 11.8 Error codes of function block................................................................................................104 11.9 Diagnostics messages.........................................................................................................105 11.10 Diagnostics interrupts...........................................................................................................105 11.11 Hardware interrupts..............................................................................................................106 Technical specifications............................................................................................................................109 12.1 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................109 12.2 Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements...........................................................................111 12.3 Reliability..............................................................................................................................114 12.4 Approvals.............................................................................................................................114 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Table of contents 13 Accessories..............................................................................................................................................117 A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................119 A.1 B ESD guidelines.........................................................................................................................................121 B.1 C Technical support.................................................................................................................119 ESD Guidelines....................................................................................................................121 List of abbreviations..................................................................................................................................123 C.1 List of abbreviations.............................................................................................................123 Index.........................................................................................................................................................125 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 7 Table of contents 8 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 1 Introduction 1.1 Purpose of this documentation These instructions contain all information required to commission and use the device. Read the instructions carefully prior to installation and commissioning. In order to use the device correctly, first review its principle of operation. The instructions are aimed at persons mechanically installing the device, connecting it electronically, configuring the parameters and commissioning it, as well as service and maintenance engineers. CAUTION To prevent injury, read the manual before use. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 9 Introduction 1.3 Product compatibility 1.2 Document history The most important changes in the documentation when compared with the respective previous edition are given in the following table. Manual edition Note 09/2018 Section "Safety instructions (Page 13)" revised Section "Mounting (Page 21)" revised Section "Scale parameters and functions (Page 57)" revised - DR 3 (Page 57): "Limit frequency of low-pass filter 2" and "Order no. low pass filter 2" new Data types renamed as follows: FLOAT --> REAL USHORT --> UINT SHORT --> INT LONG --> DINT CHAR --> STRING 09/2017 "Introduction" section and Safety instructions (Page 13): revised Section Connection of Siebert display via RS485 (Page 32): Graphic enhanced Section Automatic calibration (without calibration weight) (Page 47): revised Section Scale parameters and functions (Page 57): - Calibration procedure (Page 64): revised - DR 3 (Page 57) and DR 6 (Page 70): revised - DR 10 (Page 74): New "Selection of sampling rate" tag - DR 14 (Page 79): revised - DR 32 (Page 85): revised Section Technology error message list (Page 93): revised Section Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 (Page 97): revised Section Reliability (Page 114): new Section Approvals (Page 114): RoHS new 1.3 Product compatibility The following table describes compatibility between manual edition, device revision, and the engineering system. Manual edition Comment Device revision Engineering system 09/2018 New characteristics FW: 1.3.0 STEP 7 TIA Portal V14 or higher HW: FS 1 or higher 09/2017 New characteristics FW: 1.2.0 STEP 7 TIA Portal V14 or higher HW: until FS 3 10 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Introduction 1.5 Security information 1.4 Checking the consignment 1. Check the packaging and the delivered items for visible damage. 2. Report any claims for damages immediately to the shipping company. 3. Retain damaged parts for clarification. 4. Check the scope of delivery by comparing your order to the shipping documents for correctness and completeness. WARNING Using a damaged or incomplete device Risk of explosion in hazardous areas. Do not use damaged or incomplete devices. 1.5 Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit: http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity. Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 11 Introduction 1.7 Basic knowledge required 1.6 Transportation and storage To guarantee sufficient protection during transport and storage, observe the following: Keep the original packaging for subsequent transportation. Devices/replacement parts should be returned in their original packaging. If the original packaging is no longer available, ensure that all shipments are properly packaged to provide sufficient protection during transport. Siemens cannot assume liability for any costs associated with transportation damages. NOTICE Insufficient protection during storage The packaging only provides limited protection against moisture and infiltration. Provide additional packaging as necessary. Special conditions for storage and transportation of the device are listed in Technical specifications (Page 109). 1.7 Basic knowledge required Knowledge of weighing technology as well as general knowledge of the SIMATIC system including the TIA Portal are necessary in order to understand the manual. 12 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Safety instructions 2.1 2 General safety instructions WARNING Non-compliance with warning notes or non-qualified handling of the system Failure to observe the warning notes or handling of the device/system by non-qualified personnel can result in serious injury or damage to property. This means only qualified personnel are permitted to handle this device/system. WARNING Permission for installation in machines Start-up/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that the machine in which the component described here is to be installed fulfills the regulations/specifications of Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC. Note The specifications of the manual for the SIMATIC ET 200SP system apply for configuration, installation and commissioning in the SIMATIC environment. This chapter includes additional information on hardware configuration, installation and preparation for operation of the SIWAREX WP321. The safety notes must be observed. Note The device was developed, manufactured, tested and documented in compliance with the relevant safety standards. The device does usually not pose any risks of material damage or personal injury. Safety notices when using the device according to Hazardous Locations (HazLoc) If you use the device under HazLoc conditions you must also keep to the following safety notices in addition to the general safety notices for protection against explosion: This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or non-hazardous locations only. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 13 Safety instructions 2.1 General safety instructions 14 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Description 3.1 3 Product overview SIWAREX WP321 is a versatile and flexible weighing module that can be operated as a static weighing instrument. The electronic weighing system can be used in SIMATIC ET 200SP and uses all features of a modern automation system, such as integrated communication, operation and monitoring, the diagnostics system as well as the configuration tools in the TIA Portal or SIMATIC STEP, WinCC flexible and PCS7. 3.2 Area of application The electronic weighing system described here is the perfect solution for applications in which signals from weighing or force sensors are acquired and processed. The SIWAREX WP321 is a very accurate electronic weighing system with high measuring speed. It can be used in almost all industrial weighing applications not requiring official calibration. Use in potentially explosive atmospheres (with Ex interface SIWAREX IS) it's also possible. 3.3 System integration in SIMATIC The electronic weighing system described here is a technology module for SIMATIC ET 200SP. It can be used as desired in the configuration of the automation solution, including the weighing application. You can create optimal solutions for small and mediumsized plants by combining the suitable SIMATIC modules. You can create customized or industry-specific solutions in no time with the help of the configuration package available under the "Ready for use" application for SIMATIC. Solutions are possible with S7-300, S7-1200 as well as S7-1500 CPUs. TIA Portal, Step 7 Classic or PCS7 can be used as the configuration software. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 15 Description 3.4 Customer benefits Figure 3-1 3.4 System overview Customer benefits The electronic weighing system described here is characterized by decisive advantages: Uniform design technology and consistent communication in SIMATIC ET 200SP Parameter assignment by means of an operator panel, STEP7 user program or PC Uniform configuration option in the SIMATIC TIA Portal, SIMATIC STEP7 or PCS7 16 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Description 3.5 Scope of delivery Measuring of weight with a resolution of up to +/- 2 million parts High accuracy 0.05% High measuring rate of 100/120/600 Hz Limit monitoring Flexible adaptation to varying requirements Easy calibration of the scales using the SIWATOOL program Automatic calibration is possible without the need for calibration weights Module replacement is possible without recalibrating the scales Use in Ex Zone 2 / ATEX approval Intrinsically safe load cell supply for Ex Zone 1 (SIWAREX IS option) Diagnostics functions 3.5 Scope of delivery The scope of supply consists of the SIWAREX WP321 weighing module. Required accessories Accessories (Page 117) Note The SIWAREX WP321 configuration package is required for configuration of the SIWAREX WP321 electronic weighing system Accessories (Page 117). The configuration package is not included in the scope of delivery of the module. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 17 Description 3.5 Scope of delivery 18 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Application planning 4.1 4 Functions The primary task of the electronic weighing system is the measurement and registration of the current weight value. The integration in SIMATIC gives you the option to process the weight value directly in the PLC (ProgrammabelLogic Controller). The SIWAREX WP321 is calibrated at the factory. This allows for automatic calibration of the scale without the need for calibration weights and replacement of modules without the need for recalibrating the scale. A PC for setting the parameters of the electronic weighing system can be connected via the RS485 interface. The SIWAREX WP321 electronic weighing system can also be used in potentially explosive atmospheres (Zone 2). The load cells are supplied intrinsically safe in Zone 1 applications when you use the optional Ex interface SIWAREX IS. 4.2 Parameter assignment options 4.2.1 Parameter assignment with the PC You can set the scale parameters with the convenience of the familiar Windows interface by using the "SIWATOOL" PC parameter assignment software. You can use the program for commissioning the scale without any knowledge of automation technology. When servicing is required, you can analyze and test the processes in the scale independently of the automation system or Operator Panel with the help of the PC. You can read out the diagnostic buffer from the SIWAREX module to assist you in the event analysis. The figure below illustrates the structure of the individual program windows. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 19 Application planning 4.2 Parameter assignment options Figure 4-1 SIWATOOL overview SIWATOOL does not only offer support when you set the scale but also when you analyze the diagnostic buffer that can be saved after being read out of the module together with the parameters. The display of the current scale status can be configured. You can switch between several languages in the program. You require an RS485/USB converter (see Accessories (Page 117)). 4.2.2 Parameter assignment with the SIMATIC Panel SIWAREX WP321 parameters can be assigned using a SIMATIC Panel connected to the SIMATIC CPU. The "Ready-for-use" application software is used for this. 20 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 5 Mounting 5.1 Safety notices for installation Safety notices When installing the device, keep to the safety notices listed below. WARNING If a device is operated in an ambient temperature of more than 50 C, the temperature of the device housing may be higher than 70 C. The device must therefore be installed so that it is only accessible to service personnel or users that are aware of the reason for restricted access and the required safety measures at an ambient temperature higher than 50 C. WARNING If the device is installed in a cabinet, the inner temperature of the cabinet corresponds to the ambient temperature of the device. Safety notices on use in hazardous areas General safety notices relating to protection against explosion WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Replacing components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2 or Zone 2. WARNING Substitution of components may impair suitability of the equipment. 5.2 Safety information according to FM and UL Safety information for use according to FM and UL If you use the device under FM conditions you must also keep to the following safety notices in addition to the general safety notices for protection against explosion: SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 21 Mounting 5.4 EMC-compliant setup WARNING Substitution of components may impair suitability for Division 2. WARNING Do not remove or replace while circuit is live when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is present. WARNING Explosion hazard Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is present. WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD The device is designed for operation in closed housing or control cabinet. The inner service temperature of the enclosure/control cabinet corresponds to the ambient temperature of the module. Use cables with a maximum permitted operating temperature of at least 20 C higher than the maximum ambient temperature. 5.3 Installation guideline When assembling the SIMATIC components together with the electronic weighing system described here, the setup, installation and wiring guidelines for the SIMATIC ET 200SP must be observed (see system manual "SIMATIC ET 200SP, ET 200SP distributed I/O system", order no.: A5E03576848). This manual describes additional installation and wiring aspects specific to the electronic weighing system. 5.4 EMC-compliant setup 5.4.1 Introduction The electronic weighing system described here was developed for use in industrial environments and complies with high EMC requirements. It ensures safe operation even in harsh environmental conditions. Nevertheless, you should still carry out EMC planning before installing your devices in order to determine any sources of interference and include them in your considerations. 22 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Mounting 5.4 EMC-compliant setup EMC EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) describes the capability of electrical equipment to operate without errors in a given electromagnetic environment, without being subject to external influence and without influencing external devices in any way. 5.4.2 Possible effects of interference Electromagnetic interferences can influence the electronic weighing system described here in various ways: Electromagnetic fields having a direct influence on the system Interferences transported by communication cables Interferences having an effect via process cables Interferences entering the system via the power supply and/or protective ground Interferences can impair the fault-free functioning of the electronic weighing system. 5.4.3 Coupling mechanisms Depending on the propagation medium (conducted or non-conducted) and the distance between the interference source and the device, interferences can enter the faulty device through four different coupling mechanisms: Electrical coupling Capacitive coupling Inductive coupling Radiation coupling 5.4.4 Five basic rules for securing EMC Observe these five basic rules to secure EMC. Rule 1: Large area grounding contact When installing the devices, make sure that the surfaces of inactive metal parts are properly bonded to chassis ground (see following sections). Bond all inactive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large area and low-impedance contact (large cross-sections). When using screw connections on varnished or anodized metal parts, support contact with special contact washers or remove the protective insulating finish on the points of contact. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 23 Mounting 5.5 Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP Wherever possible, avoid the use of aluminum parts for ground bonding. Aluminum oxidizes very easily and is therefore less suitable for ground bonding. Provide a central connection between chassis ground and the ground/protective conductor system. Rule 2: Proper cable routing Organize your wiring system into cable groups (high-voltage/power supply/signal/ measurement/data cables). Always route high-voltage and data cables in separate ducts or in separate bundles. Install the measurement cables as close as possible to grounded surfaces (e.g. supporting beans, metal rails, steel cabinet walls). Rule 3: Fixing the cable shielding Ensure proper fixation of the cable shielding. Always use shielded data cables. Always connect both ends of the data cable shielding to ground on a large area. Keep unshielded cable ends as short as possible. Always use metal/metalized connector housings only for shielded data cables. Rule 4: Special EMC measures All inductors that are to be controlled should be connected with suppressors. For cabinet lighting in the immediate range of your controller, use interference suppressed fluorescent lamps. Rule 5: Homogeneous reference potential Create a homogeneous reference potential and ground all electrical equipment. Use sufficiently dimensioned equipotential bonding conductors if potential differences exist or are expected between your system components. Equipotential bonding is absolutely mandatory for applications in hazardous areas. 5.5 Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP The electronic weighing system described here is a module of the SIMATIC ET 200SP series and can be directly connected to the automation system's bus system. The 15 mm wide module has very low installation and cabling requirements. The module is snapped onto the ET 200SP base unit (BU). You must use base units of type A0 ( Accessories (Page 117)). The load cells, power supply and serial interfaces are connected via the terminal box. 24 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Mounting 5.6 Configuration of the hardware in SIMATIC Figure 5-1 5.6 Installation of the I/O or SIWAREX modules Configuration of the hardware in SIMATIC A station has a maximum width of 1 m, and you can use up to 64 modules depending on the type of PN head-end, or up to 15 modules with the Profibus version. Observe the system conditions when planning the configuration. Each SIWAREX electronic weighing system requires 16 bytes of the I/O area. Address assignment is carried out in the TIA Portal or in the SIMATIC Manager during hardware configuration. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 25 Mounting 5.6 Configuration of the hardware in SIMATIC 26 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 6 Connecting All external connections are made via the terminal box. Figure 6-1 6.1 SIWAREX WP321 process terminals on the base unit 24 V connection The 24 V DC supply voltage is connected by means of the corresponding terminals on the base unit. Table 6-1 6.2 Connection of the 24 V supply Labeling Function L+ +24 V voltage supply M Ground voltage supply Connecting the load cells Pickups can be connected to the SIWAREX WP321 electronic weighing system which are equipped with strain gauges (full bridge) and meet the following requirements. Characteristic value 1 to 4 mV/V A supply voltage of 5 V is permitted The power supply for the load cells is 4.85 V. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 27 Connecting 6.2 Connecting the load cells The following condition must be met in order to check the maximum possible number of load cells which can be connected to a WP321: Scale operation without Ex interface: (input resistance of load cell) / (number of load cells) > 40 Ohm Scale operation without Ex interface: (input resistance of load cell) / (number of load cells) > 50 Ohm Connection with 4-wire or 6-wire system The connection versions are shown in the following two figures. Figure 6-2 28 Connection of DMS load cell with 4-wire system SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Connecting 6.2 Connecting the load cells Figure 6-3 Connection of load cell with 6-wire system Observe the following rules for connection of analog (DMS) load cells 1. The use of a junction box (SIWAREX JB junction box) is required when more than one load cell is connected (the load cells must be connected in parallel). If the distance of a load cell to the SIWAREX WP321 or the junction box is greater than the available length of the load cell connection cable, use the SIWAREX EB extension box. 2. The cable shield is always applied at the cable gland of the junction box (SIWAREX JB) or the extension box. If there is a risk of equipotential bonding through the cable shield, connect a equipotential equalization conductor parallel to the load cell cable. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 29 Connecting 6.3 Shield connection 3. Twisted wire pairs that are also shielded are required for the specified cables: - Sensor cable (+) and (-) - Measuring voltage cable (+) and (-) - Supply voltage cable (+) and (-) Figure 6-4 Shielding in the screw gland We recommended that you use the cables listed in chapter Accessories (Page 117). 4. The shield must be applied to the ground in close proximity to the SIWAREX WP321. The maximum distance between the SIWAREX WP321 and the load cell is relevant when you use the recommended cables. 6.3 Labeling Function Connection pin Sig- Measurement cable load cell - 2 Sig+ Measurement cable load cell - 1 Sen- Sensor cable load cell - 4 Sen+ Sensor cable load cell + 3 Exc- Supply load cell - 6 Exc+ Supply load cell + 5 Shield connection Make sure you observe the correct design of the shield support for the shielded cables. It is the only way to ensure immunity of the system. A cable is shielded to attenuate the effects of magnetic, electrical and electromagnetic interference on the cable. Interference currents on cable shielding are diverted to ground by conductive isolation rails. To avoid interference as a result of these currents, it is imperative to provide a low-impedance connection to the ground. Only use cables equipped with a shielding braid. Shielding density must be at least 80%. 30 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Connecting 6.4 Connection of RS485 serial interface Figure 6-5 6.4 Shield connection and shield terminal Connection of RS485 serial interface The following devices can be connected to the serial interface: Siebert display type S102 (connections: see chapter Connection of Siebert display via RS485 (Page 32)) PC with RS485/USB converter (see accessories) for use of SIWATOOL Table 6-2 Termination of RS485 serial interface Labeling Function Connection pin RS485: T+ RS485 termination +: 9 Is used at the physical end of the bus for inserting termi nation jumpers RS485: T- RS485 termination -: 10 Is used at the physical end of the bus for inserting termi nation jumpers RS485: D+' RS485 data line +': 11 Is used at the physical end of the bus for inserting termi nation jumpers and in between for looping through the bus cables RS485: D-' RS485 data line -': 12 Is used at the physical end of the bus for inserting termi nation jumpers and in between for looping through the bus cables RS485: D+ RS485 data cable + 13 RS485: D- RS485 data cable - 14 If a SIWAREX WP321 module is connected to SIWATOOL or a Siebert display, insert wire jumpers between the T+ and D+' terminals and between the T- and D-' terminals. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 31 Connecting 6.5 Connection of Siebert display via RS485 6.5 Connection of Siebert display via RS485 A Siebert display S102 with the order no. S102-W6/14/0R-000/0B-SM can be connected to the RS485 interface of the weighing module. Connect a 24 V DC supply to the Siebert display. Connect the latter to the RS485 interface of the weighing module as shown in the figure below. 6,:$5(;:3 6LHEHUW6 (,$' 5[ (,$' 5[ (,$7 (,$' (,$7 9 (,$' 9 Figure 6-6 Connection of Siebert display S102 The RS485 interface in the DR 13 of the SIWAREX WP is set as follows: RS485 protocol: Siebert display S102 Baud rate: 9600 bps Character parity: Even The S102 is set as follows: Table 6-3 32 Settings of Siebert display S102 Menu item Setting Meaning 1 Interface 485 RS485 interface 9 Station address 01 Address meaning: Address Weight value 01 Weight 02 Total 03 Net 04 Tare t Timeout 2 e.g. timeout after 2 seconds C 0.0 No decimal point F Segment test ----* No segment test when switching on 8.8.8 Segment test when switching on SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7 Commissioning essentially comprises: Checking the scale construction Specifying the parameters Calibration Verifying the envisaged functionality 7.1 Factory-set parameters The electronic weighing system described here is provided with factory-set parameters. The parameters have been provided for a typical 100 kg scale based on three load cells. Parameters which can be entered in % or time are preset in such a way that they provide good results for most applications. With these default parameters, commissioning can be carried out in 5 minutes (see chapter 5minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software (Page 34)). 7.2 Commissioning tools Commission the electronic weighing system using the following alternatives: Touch panel und SIWAREX WP321 function block in S7-300/400/1200 or 1500 A free example project is available for download online at TIA Portal project "Ready-foruse" for SIWAREX WP321 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/ 94109373). Commissioning with SIWATOOL V7 SIWATOOL V7 is included in the WP configuration package available for purchase, Accessories (Page 117). To communicate between SIWAREX WP and SIWATOOL V7, use an additional interface converter USB/RS485. Use SIWATOOL V7 to commission the scale without SIMATIC expertise with a standard PC. Backup files can also be created and loaded. In the event of a fault, additional SIWATOOL diagnostics functions enable fast analysis of the cause. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 33 Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.1 Start The 5 minutes of quick start is performed in this example with a TP700 Comfort Panel connected directly to the electronic weighing system. The Panel communicates directly over MODBUS TCP/IP or via the SIMATIC S7-1200 CPU. To carry out the quick start, select the "1.0 Setup" function in the main menu and then "1.2 Quick Start". You will be guided through the individual tasks for setting the most important parameters. The remaining parameters are factory-set in such a way that they can be used in most cases without any changes. You can download the HMI software used below as free TIA Portal project "Ready-for-use" for SIWAREX WP321 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/94109373). Figure 7-1 34 Quick start step 1 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.2 Factory setting of the parameters The quick start is based on the factory setting of the parameters. Therefore, the previous parameter settings must be reset prior to the quick setup. Service mode must be switched on first. Resetting to the factory setting can then be carried out. Figure 7-2 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Quick start step 2 35 Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.3 Selecting the calibration method Figure 7-3 Quick start step 3 The module can always be calibrated in two different ways: Using reference weights: in the case of a calibration with weights, mechanical influences of the scale construction are also partially taken into account. Without weights, using the technical specifications of the connected load cell(s): in the case of automatic calibration, the accuracy of the scale is influenced by the mechanical properties to a greater extent than with calibration using reference weights. With both methods, make sure that the mechanical properties of the scale are flawless prior to calibration. 36 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.4 Defining the calibration weights Figure 7-4 Quick start step 4a In step 4 you enter the calibration weights which are to be positioned on the scale during the calibration. If the scale is not empty and the current contents are known, you can define an "Calibration weight 0" with the current contents of the scale. With an empty scale, this parameter remains as 0 kg. "Calibration weight 1" usually defines the first reference point of the scale characteristic. A further reference point ("Calibration weight 2") can also be set in addition. This is optional, and may not be necessary depending on the mechanical properties of the scale. Note that the interval between the calibration weights must be at least 2% of the nominal load of the scale. With a 1 000 kg scale, a calibration weight of at least 20 kg must therefore be used. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 37 Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.5 Setting calibration points Figure 7-5 Quick start step 5a Carry out the calibration commands at the end of the quick start: 1. Carry out the "Set calibration weight 0" command. The "Calibration weight 0" defined in step 4 is now visible in the display. 2. Place the "Calibration weight 1" defined in step 4 on the scale construction, and execute the "Set calibration weight 1" command. 3. If an "Calibration weight 2" was selected: Place "Calibration weight 2" defined in step 4 on the scale construction, and execute the "Set calibration weight 2" command. 4. Calibration of the scale is now complete. Return to the start screen by clicking on the house icon. 38 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.6 Calibrating the scale automatically The scale can also be calibrated without weights. To do this, it is necessary to enter data specific to the load cells. In addition, it is essential that the scale is empty. Figure 7-6 Quick start step 4b The number of points of support corresponds with a silo, for example, to the number of clamps or feet of the silo. A quadratic platform scale with a load cell at each corner has 4 support points. The characteristic values of the individual load cells are required to calculate the average characteristic value of the cells. The equation for the calculation is as follows: (characteristic of cell 1 + characteristic of cell 2 + characteristic of cell n) / n If the exact characteristic values are unknown, it is permissible to also use rounded-off numbers (e.g. 1.0 mV/V, 2.0 mV/V). The nominal load of an individual load cell (not the nominal load of the complete scale!) must subsequently be defined. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 39 Commissioning 7.3 5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software 7.3.7 Performing the automatic calibration Figure 7-7 Quick start step 5b Subsequently enter the "Perform automatic calibration" command with the scale empty. The scale is calibrated directly, and clicking on the house icon returns you to the start screen. 7.3.8 Checking the scale following calibration If the scale is only used for company-internal purposes, a simple check is sufficient. Perform the following steps: 1. The scale is unloaded and shows "0 kg". 2. Place a known reference weight on the scale. Check the displayed value. 3. If a second known reference weight is available, place it on the scale in addition. Check whether the scale displays the sum of the reference weights. 4. Remove the reference weights from the scale. Check that the display is "0 kg" again. 40 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL 7.4.1 Service with the SIWATOOL program You can use the SIWATOOL program to commission the scale independent of the SIMATIC automation system. The program is included in the configuration package. Install the SIWATOOL program (SIWATOOL folder) on your PC for commissioning. The SIWATOOL program is described in the sectionService with the SIWATOOL program (Page 52). You require an RS485-USB converter from Siemens in order to connect the PC to the SIWAREX (see section Accessories (Page 117)). You can then connect the RS485 interface of the SIWAREX to the USB port of the PC. Close the RS485-USB converter proposed by Siemens (see section Accessories (Page 117)) at the base unit of SIWAREX WP321 as follows: 7.4.2 RS485-USB converter Base unit of SIWAREX WP321 Terminal A Terminal 13 (D+) Terminal B Terminal 14 (D-) Terminal X - - Bridge between terminals 9 (T+) and 11 (D+`) - Bridge between terminals 10 (T-) and 12 (D-`) Establish communication to SIWAREX WP321 After starting the SIWATOOL program, select the SIWAREX WP321 from the "Device selection" window. Figure 7-8 SIWATOOL: Device selection window Select the menu command "Communication" > "Choose interface". SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 41 Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Select the COM port of your PC used for the RS485-USB converter (for example: COM3). Figure 7-9 SIWATOOL: Select Com port window Click on the "Online" button The communication to SIWAREX WP321 is established. 7.4.3 Calibration 7.4.3.1 Selecting the calibration method You can calibrate the SIWAREX module in two different ways: Calibration with calibration weight (Page 43) When calibrating with calibration weights, mechanical influences of the scale construction are also taken into account. Automatic calibration (without calibration weight) (Page 47) When calibrating without calibration weights, the technical specifications of the connected load cell(s) are taken into account. With automatic calibration, the accuracy of the scale depends on the mechanical properties of the scale. With both methods, make sure that the mechanical properties of the scale are flawless prior to calibration. 42 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL 7.4.3.2 Calibration with calibration weight Define calibration parameters Enter the marked and described calibration parameters. The defined weight unit applies to all weight specifications. You can specify a string with up to 4 digits as the weight unit, e.g.: t, kg, lbs. Exceeding the maximum weight (= maximum material to be weighed) is indicated in DS30, status 1-2, at parameter "Max 9e". If the maximum weight is exceeded, this bit is set to TRUE. The resolution d is used for the weight display in the SIWATOOL program. You can set the resolution d in accordance with EN 45501 (0.0001 to 50). Calibration weight 1 and its corresponding calibration digits define the characteristic curve of the scale. Use a minimum calibration weight as calibration weight 1, with a load cell characteristic value of: 1 mV/V: 4 % of the total rated load of all load cells 2 mV/V: 2 % of the total rated load of all load cells 4 mV/V: 1 % of the total rated load of all load cells Example Number of load cells: 3 Nominal load of one single load cell: 100 kg Load cell characteristic value: 2 mV/V Use the following minimum calibration weight for calibration: 2 % x 3 x 100 kg = 6 kg Figure 7-10 SIWATOOL: Calibration parameters for calibration with calibration weight SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 43 Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Send calibration parameters Send the calibration parameters set on your PC to SIWAREX. Select "Service mode on" in the Service menu. The calibration parameter (DR3) can only be sent and the calibration commands executed with service mode switched on. After switching on service mode, the following red wrench icon is displayed in the SIWATOOL next to the weight value. Figure 7-11 SIWATOOL: Symbol for service mode NOTICE Parameters overwritten It is not possible to send or receive individual parameters within a data record. The complete data record must initially be received for every change to parameters within it. The desired parameter can then be edited and the data record sent again. If not all the data can be received from the scale before the parameter change, the active offline parameters in the scale can be overwritten by the "Send data record" function. Therefore, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Receive data record" function. 2. Change the parameters. 3. Select the "Send data record" function. Right-click on "Calibration parameter (DR3)" and select "Send data record". Figure 7-12 SIWATOOL calibration parameters: Send data record All parameter settings in DR3 are identical between PC and SIWAREX. All calibration parameters (DR3) are shown in black. 44 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Assign calibration weight After sending the calibration parameters to SIWAREX, select "Set Calibration Point 0" in the Service menu with an empty scale. Empty scale means only the mechanical dead load (e.g. empty container) rests on the load cells. Place the previously defined "Calibration weight 1" on the scale Select "Set Calibration Point 1" in the Service menu. Select "Service mode off" in the Service menu. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 45 Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL The calibration is finished and the correct weight value is now displayed in the SIWATOOL program. Receiving calibration parameters During the calibration, the SIWAREX internally changes its calibration digits. This means that SIWATOOL now has obsolete parameter values. Obsolete calibration parameters are marked in red. The calibration parameter (DR3) must be read back in order once again obtain the calibration digits in the SIWATOOL which are consistent with the SIWAREX. Figure 7-13 SIWATOOL: Obsolete calibration parameters Right-click on "Calibration parameter (DR3)" and select "Receive data record". Figure 7-14 46 SIWATOOL calibration parameters: Receive data record SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Checking the scale following calibration If the scale is to be used for business purposes only, check it as follows: 1. The scale is unloaded and the display shows "0 kg". 2. Place one or more known test weights on the scale. To check other weight points of the scale in addition to the calibration weight, do not use the calibration weight. 3. Check the displayed weight value in the SIWATOOL program. 4. Remove the test weights from the scale. 5. Check that the display of the scale is 0 kg again. 7.4.3.3 Automatic calibration (without calibration weight) The scale can also be calibrated without a weight. To do this, the parameters marked in bold in DR3 / basic parameters are checked or entered, and the data specific to the load cells are specified in DR10. Requirement: The scale is empty. Procedure Enter the marked and described calibration parameters. The defined weight unit applies to all weight specifications. You can specify a string with up to 4 digits as the weight unit, e.g.: t, kg, lbs. Exceeding the maximum weight (= maximum material to be weighed) is indicated in DS30, status 1-2, at parameter "Max 9e". If the maximum weight is exceeded, this bit is set to TRUE. The resolution d is used for the weight display in the SIWATOOL program. You can set the resolution d in accordance with EN 45501 (0.0001 to 50). If the scale is not empty during automatic calibration, but the material weight on the scale is known (e.g. after conversion to SIWAREX WP321), the known material weight can be specified as calibration weight 0. This means the material weight is taken into account during automatic calibration. NOTE: If the specified material weight is incorrect (old electronic weighing system was not calibrated correctly, for example), the weighing result of SIWAREX WP321 will be distorted or incorrect! Figure 7-15 SIWATOOL: Calibration parameters for automatic calibration (without calibration weight) SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 47 Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Send calibration parameters Send the calibration parameters set on your PC to SIWAREX. Select "Service mode on" in the Service menu. The calibration parameter (DR3) can only be sent and the calibration commands executed with service mode switched on. After switching on service mode, the following red wrench icon is displayed in the SIWATOOL next to the weight value. Figure 7-16 SIWATOOL: Symbol for service mode NOTICE Parameters overwritten It is not possible to send or receive individual parameters within a data record. The complete data record must initially be received for every change to parameters within it. The desired parameter can then be edited and the data record sent again. If not all the data can be received from the scale before the parameter change, the active offline parameters in the scale can be overwritten by the "Send data record" function. Therefore, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Receive data record" function. 2. Change the parameters. 3. Select the "Send data record" function. Right-click on "Calibration parameter (DR3)" and select "Send data record". Figure 7-17 SIWATOOL calibration parameters: Send data record All parameter settings in DR3 are identical between PC and SIWAREX. All calibration parameters (DR3) are shown in black. 48 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Defining load cell parameters Enter the marked and described load cell parameters (DR10) in DS10. The No. of mechanical support points corresponds with a silo, for example, to the number of clamps or feet of the silo. A quadratic platform scale with a load cell at each corner has four support points. Averaged characteristic value (mV/V) This parameter is the mean value of the characteristic values of all connected load cells (for example, Identifier = 2.018 mV/V). You can obtain the exact characteristic value of a load cell from its test report or read it directly at the load cell. If the characteristic values of the individual load cells are unknown, you can assume the value "1.0" for 1 mV/V load cells, the value "2.0" for 2 mV/V load cells, etc. Specify the Nominal load of one single load cell. Figure 7-18 SIWATOOL load cell parameters (DR10) Right-click on "Load cells parameter (DR10)" and select "Send data record". Figure 7-19 SIWATOOL load cell parameters: Send data record All parameter settings in DR10 are identical between PC and SIWAREX. All load cell parameters (DR10) are shown in black. NOTICE Parameters overwritten It is not possible to send or receive individual parameters within a data record. The complete data record must initially be received for every change to parameters within it. The desired parameter can then be edited and the data record sent again. If not all the data can be received from the scale before the parameter change, the active offline parameters in the scale can be overwritten by the "Send data record" function. Therefore, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Receive data record" function. 2. Change the parameters. 3. Select the "Send data record" function. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 49 Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL Run automatic calibration After sending the calibration parameters to SIWAREX, select "Automatic calibration" in the Service menu with an empty scale. Empty scale means only the mechanical dead load (e.g. empty container) rests on the load cells. Select "Service mode off" in the Service menu. The calibration is finished and the correct weight value is now displayed in the SIWATOOL program. Receiving calibration parameters During the calibration, the SIWAREX internally changes its calibration digits. This means that SIWATOOL now has obsolete parameter values. Obsolete calibration parameters are marked in red. 50 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.4 Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL The calibration parameter (DR3) must be read back in order once again obtain the calibration digits in the SIWATOOL which are consistent with the SIWAREX. Figure 7-20 SIWATOOL: Obsolete calibration parameters Right-click on "Calibration parameter (DR3)" and select "Receive data record". Figure 7-21 SIWATOOL calibration parameters: Receive data record Checking the scale following calibration If the scale is to be used for business purposes only, check it as follows: 1. The scale is unloaded and the display shows "0 kg". 2. Place one or more known test weights on the scale. To check other weight points of the scale in addition to the calibration weight, do not use the calibration weight. 3. Check the displayed weight value in the SIWATOOL program. 4. Remove the test weights from the scale. 5. Check that the display of the scale is 0 kg again. 7.4.4 Receive all data Activate the "Receive all data" function in the "Communication" menu. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 51 Commissioning 7.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program All parameters can be saved as a backup file on the hard disk. If a module is replaced, the backup file can be downloaded to the new module within a few seconds. The new module is right back to the calibrated state - without repeated calibration. 7.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program You can use the SIWATOOL program to commission the scale independently of the SIMATIC automation system. You require an RS485/USB converter in order to connect the PC to the SIWAREX (see section Accessories (Page 117)). You can then connect the RS485 interface of the SIWAREX to the USB port of the PC. The SIWATOOL program is included in the configuration package. Install SIWATOOL for commissioning (part of the SIWAREX WP321 configuration package, see section Accessories (Page 117)) on your PC. 52 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program 7.5.1 Windows and functions of SIWATOOL Control elements for SIWATOOL and operation of the scale Parameter list of the SIWATOOL module Figure 7-22 Layout of the SIWATOOL user interface Offline values of the SIWAREX module Online values of the connected SIWAREX module For sending, receiving and transferring, select the corresponding data record and call the command list with a right mouse click. The complete data record (all parameters of the data record) is always transferred, not just individual parameters. Parameters marked in bold are relevant for typical application cases. 7.5.2 Offline parameter assignment All scale parameters can be edited and saved without an electronic weighing system. This reduces the setup time. You can thus prepare the parameters for several scales in your office, and subsequently transfer them to the electronic weighing system during setup. Data from one scale currently in operation can be exported and used to set up another scale. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 53 Commissioning 7.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program 7.5.3 Online parameter assignment To switch to online mode, connect the PC to the SIWAREX module via an RS485/USB converter. Set the appropriate interface in the communication menu. You can change all parameters in the SIWAREX module in online mode. The message window shows the current contents of the message buffer of the SIWAREX module. The current process values are displayed in the "Online" column. For test purposes, you can send various commands to the SIWAREX module. Differences between the online/offline data are marked in red by SIWATOOL. This affects both the associated data record and the individual parameter. In order to archive data, all data can be exported from the SIWAREX module and saved as a file or printed. Note You can edit all data in the SIWAREX module in online mode. The changes are not automatically imported to the corresponding scale data block in the SIMATIC CPU. To download the data to the SIWAREX module, select the data record with a right mouse click and send it explicitly to the SIWAREX module. Online parameter trends can be recorded and played back using the recorder function located at the top right-hand edge of SIWATOOL. You can use the "Configure recorder" button to select the data records to be recorded and to set the save parameters. The playback speed can be set using a slider. 7.5.4 Available help options SIWATOOL offers various help options for operation: Info card You can select the "Info" item directly underneath the individual data records in the navigation tree. This info card explains how the data record influences the scale behavior. Tooltip If you move the mouse over a button or parameter, a corresponding help text is displayed. Help Click on the menu option "Help" to call up the SIWATOOL help. The Help can be opened separately. 7.5.5 Entering parameters with SIWATOOL There is a defined procedure for handling parameters. The current parameters in the SIWAREX module are displayed in the right-hand window, while the parameter values on the PC are displayed in the left-hand window. The new parameter value is entered first in the lefthand window. If several parameters of the data record are to be changed, they are entered consecutively. The data record is subsequently selected in the tree view and sent to the SIWAREX modules using the right mouse button. 54 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Commissioning 7.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program Parameters are always changed as complete data records, rather than individually. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 55 Commissioning 7.5 Service with the SIWATOOL program 56 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.1 8 Parameters and functions All parameters are set to default values in the factory. You can restore the configuration to factory settings using the "Load factory settings" command. The scales are ready for operation with the default parameter settings. You do not need to reenter all parameters. The advantage of this solution is that you can decide the default values to be retain and the parameters that need to be adapted for your application. All parameters are divided into data records (DR). The data records are organized in steps (tasks) to be implemented during commissioning or during the process. The scale functions governed by the parameters are also described in the parameter description below. First, the parameters of a given data record are displayed in a table. The detailed parameter description for the parameters of this data record then follows. When it receives new parameters, the SIWAREX module runs a validation check. In the event of a parameter assignment error, the data record is not applied (not saved) by the SIWAREX module and a data/operator error is reported. 8.2 DR 2 command code DR 2 is a special data record used to transfer commands to the SIWAREX module by SIWATOOL. 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters The calibration parameters need to be checked and if necessary modified for all scales. The scale is basically defined by calibration parameters and calibration operation. Procedure Check all parameters and modify them as required. Transfer the DR 3 data record from SIWATOOL to the scale. Calibrate the scale. Transfer the DR 3 data record from the scale to SIWATOOL. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 57 Scale parameters and functions 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters Table 8-1 Assignment of data record 3 Variable Note Type Lengt h (byte s) Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 3 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 124 - - Application Information on which application the DR belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version iden Information on the current data record UINT tifier version 2 r 1 1 65 635 Scale name header Maximum length and actual length of string for scale name UBYTE[2] 2 rw 12,12 - - Scale name (Page 60) Scale name specified by user STRING[12] 12 rw "" - - Weight unit header Maximum length and actual length of string for weight unit (for example, g, kg, t, ...) UBYTE[2] 2 rw 04,04 - - Unit of weight (Page 60)1) Weight unit STRING[4] 4 rw "kg**" - - Gross identi fier header Maximum length and actual length of string for weight unit UBYTE[2] 2 rw 02,02 - - Gross identi fier (Page 60) Abbreviation of gross (B or G), only one byte is used! STRING[2] 2 rw "B" "B" "G" - Reserve Reserve UINT 8 rw 0 - Maximum weighing range (Page 60) 1) Maximum weight REAL 4 rw 100 > wb_min* maximum ZIF.step number range Calibration weights 0, 1, 2 and calibra tion digits 0, 1, 2 (Page 60) Calibration weight 01) (usually the zero point) REAL 4 rw 0 1 9 999 999 Calibration weight 11) REAL 4 rw 100 1 9 999 999 Calibration weight 2 REAL 4 rw 0 1 9 999 999 Calibration digits 0 determined during calibration with calibration weight 0 DINT 4 rw 0 -3 999 999 +3 999 999 Calibration digits 1 determined during calibration with calibration weight 1 DINT 4 rw 2 000 000 0 +3 999 999 Calibration digits 2 determined during calibration with calibration weight 2 DINT 4 rw 0 0 +3 999 999 Scale inter Resolution weighing range 1 REAL val (Page 61) (1*10**k, 2*10**k, 5*10**k]; k: -3 ... 2) 4 rw 0.1 0.001 50 Reserve Bit 1: Reserve BIT 2 rw 0 0 1 Reserve Bit 2: Reserve BIT 0 rw 0 0 1 1) 58 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters Variable Note Type Lengt h (byte s) Rw Default Min. Max. Automatic zero adjust ment (Page 61) Automatic zero tracking (zero tracking device) 0: Autom. zeroing off 1: Autom. zeroing on BIT 0 rw 0 0 1 Reserve (13 bits) Bit 3: Reserve BIT 0 rw 0 0 1 Decimal pla ces for proc ess values (Page 61) 0: No rounding 1: Rounding to 1 decimal place 2: Rounding to 2 decimal places 3: Rounding to 3 decimal places 4: Rounding to 4 decimal places 5: Rounding to 5 decimal places 6: Rounding to 6 decimal places UINT 2 rw 0 0 6 Maximum tare load (Page 61) Range of subtractive tare unit [in % of max. weighing range ] REAL 4 rw 0 0 250 Reserve Reserve REAL 8 rw 1.0 0 100.0 Maximum negative zeroing limit (Page 61) Negative range of semi-automatic zeroing device [in % of max. weighing range] REAL 4 rw 1 0 100.0 Maximum Positive range of semi-automatic positive zero zeroing device [in % of max. weighing ing limit range] (Page 61) REAL 4 rw 3.0 0 100.0 Standstill range (Page 62) Standstill range (in d) REAL 4 rw 0.1 0 maximum number range+ Standstill time (Page 62) Standstill time 1 in ms TIME 4 rw 2 000 10 10 000 Standstill waiting time (Page 62) Waiting time until standstill. TIME 0: standstill-dependent scale com mand, if there is no standstill, imme diately rejected. > 0: Maximum waiting time until com mand is executed 4 rw 2 000 0 10 000 Limit frequen Low-pass filter cut-off frequency: cy low pass 0: Filter disabled filter 1 (Page 63) REAL 4 rw 1 0.01 200 Order no. low pass filter 1 (Page 63) Filter number UINT 2 rw 4 0 4 Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 - - SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 59 Scale parameters and functions 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters Variable Type Lengt h (byte s) Rw Default Min. Max. Limit frequen Low-pass filter limit frequency: cy low pass 0: Filter disabled filter 2 (Page 63) REAL 4 rw 0 0.01 200 Order no. low pass filter 2 (Page 63) Filter number UINT 2 rw 4 0 4 Mean value filter depth (Page 64) Filter for digit values, Permissible filter depth: 0 ... 250 UINT 2 rw 10 0 500 1) Note Parameter for calculation of calibration points 8.3.1 Scale name You can select any name, but it may not exceed 12 characters. You can enter any designation. 8.3.2 Unit of weight A string with up to four digits can be specified as the unit of weight, e.g.: t, kg, lbs. The defined unit of weight applies to all weight specifications. Entries are not be converted if the unit of weight has changed. Entries must be left-aligned. 8.3.3 Gross identifier The gross identifier specifies the letter, B (for brutto) or G (for gross), to be used in the display for gross weights. 8.3.4 Maximum weighing range The weight can only be used with the defined scale interval below the maximum weight (+ 9 d, d = scale interval). The maximum weight is defined during commissioning. Exceeding the maximum weight is indicated in the status (DR30). The maximum weight depends on the number and type of load cells used. 8.3.5 Calibration weights 0, 1, 2 and calibration digits 0, 1, 2 The calibration weights and corresponding calibration digits define the characteristic curve of the scales. A detailed description can be found in section Calibration procedure (Page 64). 60 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters 8.3.6 Scale interval The scale interval for the weighing range can be defined in accordance with EN 45501 (0.0001 to 50). 8.3.7 Automatic zero adjustment If required, you can carry out semi-automatic zeroing of the scale using the "Zeroing" command. The automatic adjustment sets the scale to zero without a further command in the event of slow zero drifting. Slow drift is assumed if the OIML R76 criteria are met. Note If this function is enabled, the scale may eventually read zero after a slow drift even if they are fully loaded. The function can, however, be limited by specifying a maximum and minimum weight for zeroing. 8.3.8 Decimal places for process values This parameter is used to specify the number of decimal places to which the process values are to be rounded. This value decouples the main display of the weight values from the values used in the control software. 8.3.9 Maximum tare load The weighing module accepts any external tare specification which is less than the maximum tare load (percentage of maximum weighing range). Tare commands are also accepted provided that the current gross weight is less than the configured maximum tare load. 8.3.10 Maximum negative zeroing limit Zeroing defines the current weight of the scales as zero. You can limit the effect of the zeroing function. The limitation is based not on the current gross weight, but rather on the weight which the scales would display had there been no zeroing (time of scale calibration). 8.3.11 Maximum positive zeroing limit You can limit the effect of the zeroing function. The limitation is based not on the current weight, but rather on the weight which the scales would display had there been no zeroing (time of scale calibration). SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 61 Scale parameters and functions 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters 8.3.12 Standstill range Standstill monitoring checks whether the scales are correctly balanced. Scale standstill is registered if the weight changes by less than a specified fluctuation in d (standstill value) over a specified time (standstill time). Standstill monitoring is used in static scale mode (commands: zeroing, taring). The diagram below illustrates how standstill monitoring works. The current weight can only be registered in legal trade applications if standstill is reached. :HLJKWFXUYH WV GV WV 6WDQGVWLOOWLPH GV 6WDQGVWLOOYDOXH 7LPH 6WDQGVWLOOVWDWXV Figure 8-1 8.3.13 Standstill monitoring Standstill time Standstill monitoring checks whether the scales are correctly balanced. Scale standstill is registered if the weight changes by less than a specified fluctuation in d (standstill value) over a specified time (standstill time). Standstill monitoring is used in static scale mode (with the following commands: zeroing, taring). 8.3.14 Standstill waiting time Standstill waiting time is a maximum waiting time for standstill on execution of a command which depends on standstill (taring, zeroing). A technology message is generated if the command cannot be executed during the standstill waiting time because there is no standstill. 62 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.3 DR 3 calibration parameters If the standstill waiting time is equal to zero, a command requiring standstill is rejected immediately if there is no standstill. 8.3.15 Low-pass filter limit frequency There is a critically damped low-pass filter for suppressing faults. The diagram below shows the step response of the filter (fg = 2 Hz). The entry "0" means that the filter is switched off. The setting range of the limit frequency is 0.01 to 50.0 Hz. Figure 8-2 Step response of the digital low-pass filter when fg = 2 Hz When you define the limit frequency, it is extremely important for the suppression of faults. Defining the limit frequency defines the "speed" of the scale's response to changes in the measured value. A value of 5 Hz, for example, results in a relatively rapid response to a change in weight. A value of 0.5 Hz, for example, makes the scale "slower". Note Process values filtered with low-pass filter 1 are available at the SIMATIC I/O (DR 14) and in the DR 30. Process values filtered with low-pass filter 2 can only be set to the SIMATIC I/O with the corresponding selection in DR 14. 8.3.16 Low-pass filter number The number of the filter defines the effect of damping. The values 2 and 4 can be set. The higher the selected filter number, the higher the effect. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 63 Scale parameters and functions 8.4 Calibration procedure 8.3.17 Mean value filter depth The mean value filter is used to steady the weight against random interference. The weight is the mean value of n (n = max. 250) weights which are recorded by the weighing module every 10 ms, e.g. when n = 10, the mean of 10 weights is calculated. Every 10 ms, the oldest value is discarded and the newest value included in the calculation. 8.4 Calibration procedure 8.4.1 Calibration with calibration weights The incoming analog measured value from the load cells is converted into a digital value in an analog-to-digital converter. A weight is calculated using this digital value. This weight is then used by all weighing module functions for messages and for determining the status. The characteristic curve of the measuring system must be defined before the weight can be calculated from the digital value. In the simplest case, the characteristic curve is defined with points 0 and 1. The first working point (point 0) is defined by the empty scale (no load) at their own weight. The load cells return a voltage measurement to the weighing module as a result of the weight of the scales themselves. Following analog-to-digital conversion of the measured voltage, the zero point is assigned to the digital value (calibration digits for the zero point). If the scales are loaded with a defined standard weight (e.g. 50% of the measuring range), the new digital value returned by the analog-to-digital converter is assigned the standard weight. The characteristic curve can also be determined with a third point, which must be higher than point 1. Make sure that the difference between two calibration weights is at least 40 000 digits, as the calibration command may otherwise be rejected. The calibration procedure involves the following steps: Activation of service mode using the "Service mode on" command. Define the calibration weight and other parameters of the DR 3 data record. Transfer the DR 3 data record to the scales. Trigger "Adjustment weight 0 valid" for empty scales. Load the scale with the defined standard weight. Trigger "Adjustment weight 1 valid". Transfer data record DR 3 from the scale to SIWATOOL and save the data on a data medium. You must follow the correct calibration sequence with increasing calibration weights. Example 64 Zero point = 0.0 kg (always) equals 326348 digits Calibration weight 1 = 100 kg equals 1324765 digits SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.4 Calibration procedure Load cell characteristic value Calibration digit 1 (ca.) when rated load is 1 mV/V 500 000 2 mV/V 1 000 000 4 mV/V 2 000 000 This defines the characteristic curve and the scale can now calculate weights for the full measuring range. The diagram below illustrates the relationship between calibration digits and the calibration weight. /RDG /PD[ / /R / / !GLJLWV Figure 8-3 /R!/RGLJLWV /!/GLJLWV /PD[!GLJLWVPD[ 'LJLWV Calibration digits and calibration weight Load Comment Load Digits L=0 Load cells empty Lo Calibration weight 0 "Zero point" 0 kg e.g. 70 682 for calibration point 0 L1 Calibration weight 1 e.g. 60 kg e.g. 308 452 for calibration digits 1 Lmax Rated load of the load cell(s) e.g. 100 kg 1 000 000 Lmax +10 % Rated weight + approximately 10% e.g. approximately 110 kg 1 090 000 Approx. 0 You do not need to perform calibration if the calibration digits and the calibration weights are known to the weighing module described here. They are simply sent to SIWAREX by data record DR 3 and the scale is ready for use immediately. The SIWATOOL program facilitates rapid calibration. Following commissioning and calibration, all data records must be read from the weighing module and saved as a scale file. Identical scales can be put into operation immediately. Connect the PC to the new scale and enable the "Send all data records" function in service mode. This transfers the parameters for SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 65 Scale parameters and functions 8.4 Calibration procedure calibration weights and calibration digits, and the characteristic curve is determined immediately. The same applies when you change a weighing module. Note Two working points are usually sufficient for determining the scale's characteristic curve. An additional working point is only required for non-linear systems. Specification of negative calibration points is not possible. However, the characteristic can also be used in the negative range down to -2 000 000 digits. To achieve this, the characteristic curve generated in the positive range is extended into the negative range. /RDG /PD[ / / /R / / !GLJLWV Figure 8-4 Load 66 /R!/RGLJLWV /!/GLJLWV /!/GLJLWV /PD[!GLJLWVPD[ 'LJLWV Linearizing the scale's characteristic curve Comment Load Digits L=0 Load cells empty Lo Calibration weight 0 "Zero point" 0 kg Approx. 0 e.g. 76 082 for calibra tion point 0 L1 Calibration weight 1 e.g. 60 kg e.g. 386 452 for calibra tion digits 1 L2 Calibration weight 2 e.g. 80 kg e.g. 451 367 for calibra tion digits 2 Lmax Rated load of the load cell(s) e.g. 100 kg 1 000 000 Lmax +10 % Rated weight + approximately 10% e.g. approximately 110 kg 1 090 000 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.5 DR 4 Output of calculated calibration digits 8.4.2 Automatic calibration Scales can be rapidly commissioned with automatic calibration. The accuracy of the scale greatly depends on the entered parameters and the mechanical properties of the scale. However, you achieve the best level of accuracy for the scales by using calibration weights. During initial commissioning with automatic calibration, you must reset the module using the "Load factory settings" command. Subsequently specify the basic parameters in DR 3 and the load cell parameters in data record 10. See also the section: Automatic calibration (without calibration weight) (Page 47). Command 82 "Perform automatic calibration" then uses this data and the currently applied dead load to calculate the characteristic curve of the scale. The characteristic curve is active immediately. Note The characteristic curve data in data record 3 active prior to execution of command 82 is directly overwritten. Automatic calibration requires the following criteria: Correct mechanical installation of the scale Scale is empty (only mechanical installation (= dead load) present on the cells) or the material weight in/on the scale is known (e.g. after conversion to WP321). Load cells are evenly loaded There are no shunt circuits 8.5 DR 4 Output of calculated calibration digits Date record DR 4 outputs the digits calculated from automatic scale calibration. This data record cannot be sent to the scale. Table 8-2 Assignment of data record 4 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record num ber Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 4 - - Length Data record length in UINT formation 2 r 28 - - Application Information about which application the DR belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version identifier Information on the current data record version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 67 Scale parameters and functions 8.6 DR 5 zeroing memory Variable Note Type L Rw Default 4 r ? Calibration digits 0, 1, 2 (calculated) (Page 68) Calibration digits 0 DINT (calculated): Calibra tion digits calculated in "Automatic Calibra tion" Calibration digits 1 DINT (calculated): Calibra tion digits calculated in "Automatic Calibra tion" 4 r 0 Calibration digits 2 DINT (calculated): Calibra tion digits calculated in "Automatic Calibra tion" 4 r 0 Reserve 1 Reserve INT 2 r Reserve 2 Reserve UINT 2 Reserve 3 Reserve REAL 4 8.5.1 Min. Max. 0 - - r 0 - - r 0 - - Calibration digits 0, 1, 2 (calculated) The calculation is based on the parameters from DR 3 and DR 10 identified by bold font and is activated by the command no. 82. 8.6 DR 5 zeroing memory Data record DR 5 displays the current values in the tare memory and the zeroing memory. Procedure Check all parameters Transfer the data record to the scale Table 8-3 Assignment of data record 5 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data re cord UINT 2 r 5 - - Length Data record length infor mation UINT 2 r 40 - - Application Information about which application the DR be longs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version identifi er Information on the current data record version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 68 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.6 DR 5 zeroing memory Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Effective tare weight - from specification (Page 69) Current tare weight from specification as process value REAL 4 rw 0 0 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Effective tare weight (semiautomatic) (Page 69) Current tare weight from semi-automatic mode as process value REAL 4 rw 0 0 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Reserve Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - Zero weight (semi-automat ic) (Page 69) Current zeroing weight (affected by zeroing) REAL 4 rw 0 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Current zero tracking weight (Page 70) Zero point correction weight affected by auto matic zeroing REAL 4 rw 0 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Dead load (Page 70) Dead load determined during calibration REAL 4 r 0 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Depends on specifi cation in DR 3 Reserve 1 Reserve INT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve 2 Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve 3 Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - 8.6.1 Effective tare weight - from specification A tare weight can be specified in data record DR 15. You activate the specified tare weight with a command (see command 1013). From this point on, the activated tare weight is factored into the weight calculations. The "Delete tare" command deactivates the active tare weight. This does not delete the specification in data record DR 15. 8.6.2 Effective tare weight (semi-automatic) The corresponding command (see command 1011) applies the current gross weight as the active tare weight. From this point on, the activated tare weight is factored into the weight calculations. The "Delete tare" command deactivates the active tare weight. 8.6.3 Zero weight (semi-automatic) The zero weight command (see command 1001) entered by the user sets the current gross weight to "Zero" provided it is within the defined zero setting limits. The current gross weight is saved as the zero weight. The zeroing weight must be within the specified range (usually +3 / 1 % of the set zero point). SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 69 Scale parameters and functions 8.7 DR 6 limit value settings 8.6.4 Current zero tracking weight The current zero tracking weight is recorded in this parameter if automatic zero tracking is activated. 8.6.5 Dead load The characteristic curve of the scales is determined during calibration. When there is no load, the main display returns "0". The dead load is the weight of the empty scales, i.e. the weight of the scales themselves. 8.7 DR 6 limit value settings The switch-on and switch-off values for the limits are configured in data record DR 6. Procedure Check all parameters and modify them as required Transfer the data record to the scale Table 8-4 Assignment of data record 6 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record num Contains no. of data record ber UINT 2 r 6 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 60 - - Application Information on which application the DR belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version identifier Information on the current data record version UINT 2 r 1 1 65 635 Limit reference (Page 71) Reference value for limits UINT 2 rw 0 0 1 0: Gross weight in % of max. weighing range 1: Net weight in % of max. weighing range 2: Gross weight, absolute 3: Net weight, absolute Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 0 - Limit value 1 ON (Page 72) Switch-on point for Limit 1 REAL 4 rw 0 maxi mum number range maxi mum number range Reserve Reserve TIME 4 rw 0 0 maxi mum number range+ 70 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.7 DR 6 limit value settings Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Limit value 1 OFF (Page 72) Switch-off point for Limit 1 REAL 4 rw 0 maxi mum number range maxi mum number range Reserve Reserve TIME 4 rw 0 0 maxi mum number range+ Limit value 2 ON (Page 72) Switch-on point for Limit 2 REAL 4 rw 0 maxi mum number range maxi mum number range Reserve Reserve TIME 4 rw 0 0 maxi mum number range+ Limit value 2 OFF (Page 72) Switch-off point for Limit 2 REAL 4 rw 0 maxi mum number range maxi mum number range Reserve Reserve TIME 4 rw 0 0 maxi mum number range+ Limit value "Emp Limit value "empty" ON REAL ty" ON (Page 72) With limit reference 0 and 1: Based on the gross weight in % of max. weighing range With limit reference 2 and 3: in relation to absolute gross weight 4 rw 0 maxi mum number range maxi mum number range Delay time for limits (Page 73) Uniform delay time for limits in ms TIME 4 rw 0 0 maxi mum number range+ Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - 8.7.1 Limit reference Value Limit values relate to 0 Gross weight in % of max. weighing range 1 Net weight in % of max. weighing range 2 Absolute gross weight 3 Absolute net weight The limit value "Empty" always relates to gross weight zero. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 71 Scale parameters and functions 8.7 DR 6 limit value settings 8.7.2 Limit value 1 ON, limit value 2 ON, limit value 1 OFF, limit value 2 OFF The switch-on and switch-off points can be specified separately for each limit as a percentage of the measuring range or as absolutely values (based on "Limit reference" parameter setting). This allows both minimum and maximum value violation monitoring with hysteresis. A delay time for switch-on and switch-off can also be specified. Either the current net weight or the current gross weight can be selected as the reference value for limits 1 and 2. Negative limits are only possible with input of absolute values. Negative limits as percentage are rejected. Maximum value monitoring is implemented with the following specifications: Switch-on value > switch-off value Minimum value monitoring is implemented with the following specification: Switch-on value < switch-off value The diagram below illustrates the function of limit values 1 and 2. 2XWSXW 2XWSXW 2Q 2Q 2II 2II &RQILJXUDWLRQDV PD[OLPLWYDOXH Figure 8-5 8.7.3 *URVV &RQILJXUDWLRQDV PLQOLPLWYDOXH *URVV Limit value configuration Limit value "Empty" ON The value for the empty range is a limit value below which the weighing module registers and returns the status "empty". The values are entered as a percentage of the measuring range. The "Empty" limit always refers to the current gross weight in the scale. The setting, whether absolute or a percentage, also affects the "Empty" limit. 72 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.8 DR 9 module information 8.7.4 Delay time for limits If the weight reaches the specified switch value, a delay time (defined in ms) is launched. Once the delay time is over, the limit switch changes status provided the weight still reaches the specified switch value. This delay time applies to the switch-on and switch-off values 1 and 2 and to the switch-on limit for the empty value. The empty value does not have a switch-off delay. 8.8 DR 9 module information No entries can be made in data record DR 9. This data record provides information on the inner workings of the SIWAREX module. This information is used to identify the module at the manufacturer plant (e.g. in the event of repairs). The entries in the data record are of no importance to the user for operation. Table 8-5 Assignment of data record 9 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 9 - - Length Data record length infor mation UINT 2 r 68 - - Application Information about which application the DR be longs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version identi fier Information on the current data record version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 Order number - header Maximum and current string length for the order number UBYTE[2] 2 r 16,16 - - Order number Order number of the mod STRING[16] ule 7MH .. 16 r "7MH ..." - - Serial number - header String header UBYTE[2] 2 r 12,12 - - Serial number Serial number " XXX00001" STRING[12] 12 r "" - - Firmware type - header String header UBYTE[2] 2 r 2.2 - - Firmware type Reference V - Release B - Test etc. STRING[2] 2 r 'V ' - - FW version 1st digit Version 1. UINT 2 r 1 - - FW version 2nd digit Version 2. UINT 2 r 0 - - FW version 3rd digit Version 3. UINT 2 r 0 - - SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 73 Scale parameters and functions 8.9 DR 10 load cell parameters Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Hardware ver sion number ES hardware version num UINT ber (e.g. 03) 2 r 1 - - OS version header String header UBYTE[2] 2 r 2.2 - - OS version (loader) - des ignation Reference V - Release B - Test etc. STRING[2] 2 r 'V ' - - OS version (loader) - des ignation e.g. version n UINT 2 r 'V ' - - Reserve Reserve UINT 6 r 0 - - Reserve 4 0 REAL 4 r 0 - - 8.9 DR 10 load cell parameters The parameters of the analog load cells must be checked prior to the automatic calibration and modified if necessary. Only the parameters identified by bold font and asterisk (*) need be entered. Procedure Check the parameters and modify them as required Transfer the data record to the scale Adjust the scales Table 8-6 Assignment of data record 10 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 10 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 44 - - Application Information about which application the DR belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version identifi er Information on the current data re cord version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 UINT 2 rw 1 1 6 Selection of the sampling rate (Page 75) Parameter code 0: Sampling rate UINT 100 Hz (preferably with line frequen cy of 50 Hz) Parameter code 1: 120 Hz (prefera bly with line frequency of 60 Hz) Parameter code 2: 600 Hz for fast measurements 2 rw 0 0 1 Number of sup port points (Page 76) 1) Number of support points UINT 2 rw 0 0 8 UINT 2 rw 0 0 0 Reserve Reserve 74 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.9 DR 10 load cell parameters Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Load cell char acteristic value (Page 77) 1) Characteristic value of the load cell (n) [mV/V], the mean value is used if there is more than one cell. REAL 4 rw 2 > 0.1 10 REAL 4 rw 0 Rated load of a load cell (Page 77) 1) Rated load of a load cell REAL 4 rw 60 - - Reserve Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve INT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - Reserve 1) Parameter for calculation of calibration points with theoretical calibration 8.9.1 Selection of the sampling rate For better suppression of interferences, set the measuring rate and the line frequency as follows: Measuring rate Line frequency 100 Hz 50 Hz (parameter code 0) 120 Hz 60 Hz (parameter code 1) Interferences can be caused by the power supply grid. For fast measurements, you can select a measuring rate of 600 Hz (parameter code 2) as of firmware V1.2.0. The setting has an effect on the frequency response of the signal path. The following diagrams show the frequency response: SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 75 Scale parameters and functions 8.9 DR 10 load cell parameters Figure 8-6 Signal behavior SIWAREX WP321: Sampling rate 50 Hz (unfiltered) Figure 8-7 Signal behavior SIWAREX WP321: Sampling rate 600 Hz (unfiltered) 8.9.2 Number of support points If no anchor points are used, the number of support points is equal to the number of load cells. If anchor points are used in addition to load cells, the number of support points is equal to the total number of load cells and fixed support points. 76 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.10 DR 13 RS485 parameters 8.9.3 Load cell characteristic value The load cell characteristic value is required to correctly interpret the output voltage from the load cell. This specification is also necessary for determining load cell overload. The exact value can be entered if the measurement log for the load cell is available. The mean value can be entered if there is more than one load cell. Example Characteristic value = 2.018 mV/V 8.9.4 Rated load of a load cell The rated load of a load cell is required for checking the maximum weighing range of the scales. The rated load is entered in the specified units of weight. 8.10 DR 13 RS485 parameters The parameters which define the response of the RS485 interface are specified in data record DR 13. If the interface is not used, the default values can be retained. Procedure Check the parameters and modify them as required Transfer the data record to the scale Table 8-7 Assignment of data record 13 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 13 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 24 - - Application Information about which applica tion the data record belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version iden Information on the current data re UINT tifier cord version 2 r 1 1 65635 RS485 proto 0: No protocol col (Page 78) 2: SIEBERT display UINT 2 rw 1 0 2 RS485 baud rate (Page 78) 0: 9 600 bps 1: 19 200 bps 2: 38 400 bps 3: 57 600 bps 4:115 000 bps UINT 2 rw 3 0 6 RS485 char acter parity (Page 78) Character parity 0: Even 1: Odd BIT 2 rw 0 0 1 Bit 1 BIT 0 rw 0 0 1 Bit 2 BIT 0 rw 0 0 1 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 77 Scale parameters and functions 8.10 DR 13 RS485 parameters Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Reserve (13 bits) Reserve BIT 0 rw 0 0 1 Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 20 1 255 Decimal Decimal place for Siebert display place for Sie bert indicator (Page 79) INT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 - - Reserve Reserve REAL 4 rw 0 - - 8.10.1 RS485 protocol This parameter defines the protocol for communication via the RS485 interface. The SIWATOOL program does not require any presettings. 8.10.2 Value Protocol 0 No communication/protocol 2 SIEBERT display RS485 baud rate This parameter defines the baud rate for the RS485 interface. 8.10.3 Value Baud rate 0 9 600 bps 1 19 200 bps 2 38 400 bps 3 57 600 bps 4 115 000 bps RS485 character parity This parameter defines the character parity for the RS485 interface. 78 Value Character parity 0 Even (for digital load cells from Mettler-Toledo) 1 Odd (for digital load cells from Wipotec) SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.11 DR 14 SIMATIC interface parameters 8.10.4 Decimal place for Siebert indicator A fixed decimal place must be specified if a Siebert indicator is used. The following values are permitted: 0 ... 4 8.11 DR 14 SIMATIC interface parameters The parameters which define the response of the SIMATIC interface are specified in data record DR 14. It is possible to define the process values to be output on the basis of the I/O area. Procedure Check the parameters and modify them as required Transfer the data record to the scale Table 8-8 Assignment of data record 14 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. UINT of data record 2 r 14 - - Length Data record length infor mation UINT 2 r 16 - - Application Information on which ap plication the DR belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version iden tifier Information on the cur rent data re cord version UINT 2 r 1 1 65 635 Selection of process val ue 1, 2 (Page 80) Code for the selection of the process variable to be updated UINT 2 rw 4 0 10 Selection of process val ue 1, 2 (Page 80) Code for the selection of the process variable to be updated UINT 2 rw 3 0 10 Reserve 1 Reserve INT 2 rw 0 0 - Reserve 2 Reserve UINT 2 rw 0 0 - SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 79 Scale parameters and functions 8.12 DR 15 manual tare specification 8.11.1 Selection of process value 1, 2 Read the current process values to the SIMATIC CPU with the DR 30 and DR 31 data records and the FB SIWA function block. The transfer of a larger data record is based on "acyclic services". It may take several SIMATIC CPU cycles and therefore have a negative effect on system performance. The I/O interface of the SIWAREX module is the best option if a process value is to be rapidly transferred to the SIMATIC CPU as soon as it is created in the SIWAREX module. Data is applied cyclically by FB321 and provided as a tag in the scales data block. The relevant code from the table below must be entered to define the tag for output via the I/ O interface. Table 8-9 Selection table for process value 1,2 Process value Decimal code From DR Format No process selected 0 - - Gross process (after low-pass filter 1) 1 30 REAL Net process (after low-pass filter 1) 2 30 REAL Tare process 3 30 REAL G/N weight (after low-pass filter 1) 4 30 REAL G/N weight_x10 5 30 REAL Unfiltered digit value 9 31 DINT filtered digit value (after low-pass fil ter 1) 10 31 DINT Refresh counter 12 30 UINT Async. Error bits (32-bit): bits 0..15: operator error Bits 16..31: technology error 15 32 DINT Gross process (after low-pass filter 2) 7 - REAL Net process (after low-pass filter 2) - REAL - DINT 8 Filtered digit value (after low-pass fil 11 ter 2) 8.12 DR 15 manual tare specification Data recorder DR 15 is used for an external specification of a tare weight. Procedure Enter the tare weight Transfer the data record to the scale Enable the tare weight using command 1013 80 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.13 DR 30 current process values Table 8-10 Assignment of data record 15 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. UINT of data record 2 r 15 - - Length Data record length infor mation UINT 2 r 16 - - Application Information about which application the DR be longs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version iden tifier Information on the cur rent data re cord version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 Specification of tare weight (Page 81) Tare specifi REAL cation memo ry (manual tare value) 4 rw 0 0 Depends on specification in DR 3 Reserve Reserve 4 rw 0 0 - 8.12.1 REAL Specification of tare weight You can enter a tare weight. If a tare weight is to be applied, it must be enabled with the corresponding command. The tare weight must not exceed the maximum tare load specified in data record DR 3. 8.13 DR 30 current process values Current states and process values in the scales can be monitored using process values and advanced process values from data record DR 31. Monitoring selected data during commissioning is extremely useful as it helps you to optimize parameters. Procedure Read data record DR 30 cyclically or on a time-triggered basis Display/analyze the required tags It is not always necessary to cyclically read data record DR 30. If the relevant process tags have already been selected in data record DR 14 ( DR 14 SIMATIC interface parameters SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 81 Scale parameters and functions 8.13 DR 30 current process values (Page 79) ), they are immediately transferred via the I/O interface. In this case, these tags and all status bits and messages are accessible without data record communication. Table 8-11 Assignment of data record 30 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 30 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 44 - - Application Information on which applica UINT tion the data record belongs to 2 r 201 - - Version identi fier Information on the current da ta record version 2 r 1 1 255 1/4d zero Set if gross is less than 0.25e BIT 2 r 0 - - 9e max Set if the weight has exceeded the gross weighing range by more than 9 display steps (d) BIT 0 r 0 - - Tared Set if tare memory is not equal to zero BIT 0 r 0 - - Manual tare set (pT) Set if the tare memory is as signed an external specified value BIT 0 r 0 - - Reserve UINT BIT 0 r 0 - - Waiting for standstill Set if module is waiting for BIT standstill to execute command 0 r 0 - - Standstill Set if standstill condition is met BIT 0 r 0 - - BIT 0 r 0 - - Empty Set if "Empty" condition is met BIT 0 r 0 - - Limit value 1 Limit value 1 has responded BIT 0 r 0 - - Limit value 2 Limit value 2 has responded BIT 0 r 0 - - BIT 0 r 0 - - BIT 2 r 0 - - BIT 0 r 0 - - Reserve Reserve (5 bits) DS32 error status change Is set interface-specific with each DS32 change Reserved (7 bits) Calibrated SIWAREX is calibrated BIT 0 r 0 - - Service mode Service mode is enabled BIT 0 r 0 - - BIT 0 r 0 - - SIMATIC con nection inac tive Set if no connection to the SI BIT MATIC exists on the part of the application 0 r 0 - - Startup Startup has taken place (is de BIT leted again after 5 seconds) 0 r 0 - - Fault status Operating fault 0 r 0 - - Reserve (3 bits) 82 BIT SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.13 DR 30 current process values Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Gross process weight (Page 83) Gross weight (process value) REAL 4 r 0 - - Net process weight (Page 83) Net weight (process value) REAL 4 r 0 - - Tare process weight (Page 83) Tare weight (process value) REAL 4 r 0 - - Gross / net weight (Page 84) Gross or net weight REAL 4 r 0 - - Gross / net weight with in creased reso lution (x 10) (Page 84) Legal trade G/N weight with 10x REAL 4 r 0 - - Refresh coun ter for process values (Page 84) Cycle counter incremented by 1 if weight values have been changed UINT 2 r 0 - - Operating time (hours) Total operating time of the module (hours) UINT 2 r 0 - - Operating time (minutes) Total operating time of the module (minutes) UINT 2 r 0 - - Reserve 3 Reserve REAL 4 r 0 - - 8.13.1 resolution Gross process weight The current gross weight. Values are rounded as specified in data record DR 3 with the "Decimal places for process values" (Page 61) parameter. 8.13.2 Net process weight The current net weight. Values are rounded as specified in data record DR 3 with the "Decimal places for process values" (Page 61) parameter. 8.13.3 Tare process weight The current tare weight. Values are rounded as specified in data record DR 3 with the "Decimal places for process values" (Page 61) parameter. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 83 Scale parameters and functions 8.14 DR 31 advanced current process values 8.13.4 Gross / net weight The current weight for the main display. The resolution corresponds to the scale interval (Page 61) specified in data record DR 3. 8.13.5 Gross / net weight with increased resolution (x 10) The current weight for the main display in higher resolution. The resolution corresponds to the scale interval specified in data record DR 3 x 10. 8.13.6 Tare weight The current tare weight (scale interval from DR 3). The resolution corresponds to the scale interval specified in data record DR 3. 8.13.7 Refresh counter for process values Measured values are calculated every 10 ms in the SIWAREX module. A counter is incremented by 1 each time. Once the counter reaches the value 65536, it starts again from zero. The counter can be used as a time stamp for data record DR 30. 8.14 DR 31 advanced current process values Current states and process values in the scales can be monitored using advanced process values and process values (DR 30). This data is not required for standard operation of the scales. Monitoring selected data during trial operation is extremely useful as it helps you to optimize parameters. Procedure Read data record DR 31 Display/analyze the required tags Table 8-12 Assignment of data record 31 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 31 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 24 - - Application Information about which applica tion the data record belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version iden tifier Information on the current data re UINT cord version 2 r 1 1 65635 84 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.15 DR 32 Message display Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. DINT 4 r 0 - - Filtered digit value of AD convert DINT ers or digital load cells after dig. fil ter 1 4 r 0 - - Unfiltered dig Unfiltered digit value of AD con it value verters / digital load cells (Page 85) Filtered digit value (Page 85) Reserve 1 INT 2 r 0 -100 100 Refresh Refresh counter incremented by 1 counter for if weight values have been process val changed ues (Page 85) UINT 2 r 0 - - Reserve 2 REAL 4 r 0 - - 8.14.1 Unfiltered digit value The unfiltered digit value is the internal measured value immediately before filtering. 8.14.2 Filtered digit value The filtered digit value is the internal measured value immediately after filtering. 8.14.3 Refresh counter for process values Measured values are calculated every 10 ms in the SIWAREX module. A counter is incremented by 1 each time. Once the counter reaches the value 65536, it starts again from zero. The counter can be used as a time stamp for data record DR 31. 8.15 DR 32 Message display Data record 32 indicates all pending message bits. The bit "Error status changed" is present in the status bits of the DR30. If this bit is set, the message area of the DR32 has been changed. The DR32 indicates which message has been newly added or deleted. The data record is automatically read by the SIMATIC FB in the event of an error. Following successful reading, the status bit is reset in DR30. Table 8-13 Assignment of data record 32 Variable Note Type L Rw De fault Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 32 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 26 - - SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 85 Scale parameters and functions 8.15 DR 32 Message display Variable Note Type L Rw De fault Min. Max. Application Information about which application the data record belongs to UINT 2 r 101 - - Version identi Information on the current data record fier version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 1000 Operator error BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 1104 Undervoltage BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 1105 Overload BIT r 0 0 1 1106 Underload BIT r 0 0 1 1002 RAM error BIT r 0 0 1 1102 ADC error BIT r 0 0 1 1005 Hardware interrupt lost BIT r 0 0 1 1003 Checksum error data BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 1004 Checksum error program BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 1001 RESET / restart following error (watch dog) BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 2000 Technology error BIT r 0 0 1 2001 Taring or zeroing timeout BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve (3 bits) - BIT r 0 0 1 2005 Cold restart after voltage recovery BIT r 0 0 1 BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve (10 bits) 5000 Data or operating error exists BIT r 0 0 1 5001 Command code or data record unknown BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 5003 Leaving calibration mode not possible BIT r 0 0 1 5004 Command or data transmission only available in service mode BIT r 0 0 1 5005 Command or data transmission not pos sible because service mode is active BIT r 0 0 1 5006 Command or data transmission not pos sible because BUSY BIT r 0 0 1 5007 Command or data transmission not pos sible because module is faulty or ODIS is active BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 86 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.15 DR 32 Message display Variable Note 5101 Rw De fault Min. Max. Command is not permissible in this oper BIT ating state r 0 0 1 5102 Command not possible because not at standstill BIT r 0 0 1 5104 Command not possible because range is exceeded BIT r 0 0 1 5105 Load cell parameter not plausible BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve Type L BIT r 0 0 1 5107 Shifting characteristic not possible BIT r 0 0 1 7000 Permitted number range violated BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 7002 Specifications of string lengths not plau sible BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 7006 Command only possible in test field BIT r 0 0 1 7007 The calibration weights or calibration dig BIT its are not plausible r 0 0 1 7008 Zeroing/zero setting or tare parameter not plausible BIT r 0 0 1 7009 Standstill range / standstill wait time not plausible BIT r 0 0 1 7010 Scale interval / rounding not plausible BIT r 0 0 1 7011 Filter parameter not plausible BIT r 0 0 1 7014 Time input not plausible BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - BIT r 0 0 1 7019 RS485 parameter error BIT r 0 0 1 Reserve - UINT 2 r 0 - - Reserve - UINT 2 r 0 - - Reserve - UINT 2 r 0 - - 8.15.1 Error bytes 0 to 7 In these areas, messages are represented by bits. A set bit means that the corresponding message is activated. The message bit is set following a data or operator error and automatically reset approximately 3 seconds later. Message bits are analyzed by the operator panel message system. The data/operator errors (error numbers 1xxx) are present in the first two bytes. These are followed by two bytes with technology errors (error numbers 2xxx) and six bytes with data and operator errors (error numbers 5xxx and 7xxx). SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 87 Scale parameters and functions 8.16 DR 34 ASCII main display value 8.16 DR 34 ASCII main display value The ASCII weight corresponds to the value on the main display of the scales and can be used for a supplementary display as well as the main display. Table 8-14 Assignment of data record 34 Variable Note Type L Rw Default Min. Max. Data record number Contains no. of data record UINT 2 r 34 - - Length Data record length information UINT 2 r 26 - - Application Information about which application the DR belongs to UINT 2 r 201 - - Version identi Information on the current data re fier cord version UINT 2 r 1 1 65635 ASCII display string header Maximum length and actual length of string UBYTE[2] 2 r 16,2 - - Content of main display as ACII string (Page 88) For display of the weight value and other current values (see below) STRING[16] 16 r "" - - 8.16.1 Content of main display as ACII string The following values can be displayed: Variable Command Switch on increased resolution 701 Current tare weight 705 Gross/net display 710 Net process value 714 Gross process value 715 Serial number 871 Firmware version 875 Below are some display examples. Commands are used to toggle the display values. The values to be displayed are suppressed if a fault is present. Value designation Blank Display value Unit of weight (from DR 3) N: Net, B/G: Gross, T: Tare, pT: Preset tare, S: Sum, ... Weight (Tare 0) N * * * * * 2 2 0 , 5 0 *kg* Neg. weight (Tare = 0) B * * * * * * - 0 , 0 3 *t** 88 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Scale parameters and functions 8.16 DR 34 ASCII main display value Value designation Blank Display value Unit of weight (from DR 3) N: Net, B/G: Gross, T: Tare, pT: Preset tare, S: Sum, ... Weight in increased resolu tion * * * * * * 1 0 , 0 0 3 HIGH Operator error B * * * * * * I r o r **** Tare display activated (pt) p T * * * * * 5 0 , 5 0 *kg* Tare display activated T * * * * * * 5 0 , 5 0 *kg* SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC r 89 Scale parameters and functions 8.16 DR 34 ASCII main display value 90 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 9 Messages 9.1 Message types The messages in the electronic weighing system described here are divided into three types. System status messages System status messages can be generated spontaneously at any time by an unexpected event. They include internal and external hardware problems which can occur spontaneously during weighing. Data and operating errors The data and operating errors are always a response to a command due to a plausibility check. These are data errors if a plausibility error has been detected in a data packet which was sent to the module and receipt of the packet has been rejected by the module. These are operating errors if the module cannot execute the sent command in its current operating state. Technology errors Technology errors occur spontaneously due to the process flow of a weighing. Status bits, on the other hand, are not messages. The status displays describe the status of the scale during normal operation and can be monitored or evaluated at any time. 9.2 Message paths You can read out the messages using different paths. You define the path for forwarding and processing of messages during configuration. The messages are processed for two basic purposes: For display or recording on an operator panel for the operator For linking in the control software to control specific reactions in the process. The following message paths are possible: Output of the message buffer to the SIWATOOL program (takes place automatically) Output by means of function block as bit field in Scale data block Certain operating errors can be transmitted as diagnostic interrupts to the SIMATIC CPU and evaluated by OB82 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 91 Messages 9.5 Message list 9.3 Evaluating messages with the help of SIWATOOL The electronic weighing system has a message buffer that can hold up to 10 entries. If the number of messages in the message buffer exceeds 10, the oldest entry is overwritten. The message buffer can be read out at any time with the help of SIWATOOL (menu item "Read out all data records") and saved together with the scale parameters. This facilitates the detection, analysis and correction of errors in the system. 9.4 Detecting messages with the help of FB SIWA All messages of the SIWAREX module can be completely detected and processed in the controller with the help of the SIWAREX WP321 function block. The messages can be evaluated directly in a signaling system by means of a bit signaling area in the scale data block. The message texts are stored in the signaling system. The message text is output when a bit becomes "1". 9.5 Message list The message list is an overview of all messages that the SIWAREX module can generate. A message can be quickly identified by the message code (number). 9.5.1 System status message list Operator error (code 1000 to 1999) Error code Description and remedy 1000 operating error exists 1000 Group message, at least one operating error exists. 1001 Watchdog 1001 Watchdog, error is displayed for at least 10 seconds. A serious error has occurred in the function of SIWAREX, e.g. program error, severe electromagnetic influence on device, etc. Contact the SIWAREX Support if the error occurs multiple times. 1002 RAM error 1002 RAM error. An error has occurred in the memory; the memory content is no longer correct. The module must be switched off. If the error occurs again, SIWAREX is defective. 1003 Checksum incorrect parameter 1003 Checksum error at parameter. Critical error because the pa rameters are no longer safe. 1004 Checksum incorrect program 1004 Checksum error program code. Critical error because the pro gram is no longer safe. 1102 ADU error 1102 AD converter error when reading in the measured value. If the error occurs again, make sure that the EMC recommendations are observed (chapter EMC-compliant setup (Page 22)). 1104 Undervoltage 1104 Undervoltage at sensor cables 1105 Overload 1105 Overload of scale (ca. 110%) 1106 Underload 1106 Underload of scale (ca. -10%) 92 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Messages 9.5 Message list 9.5.2 Technology error message list Technology error (code 2000 to 4999) Error code Description and remedy 2000 Technology error exists 2000 Group message, at least one technology error exists 2001 Taring/zeroing timeout 2001 Taring of scale or set to zero is not possible because a standstill was not reached during the standstill time. The command was dis carded. 2005 Reboot after power reset 2005 Reboot after voltage recovery or FW update 9.5.3 Data and operating errors message list Data and command errors (code 5000 to 8999) Error code Description and remedy 5000 Data or comand error exists 5000 Group error, a bit is set in the data and operating error bits 5001 Data record or comand unknown 5001 Command code or data record is not known with current appli cation 5003 Cannot exit service mode 5003 Cannot exit service mode; calibration incomplete 5004 Command or data transfer only per mitted in service mode 5004 Activation of service mode is required to execute command or transmit data 5005 Command or data transmission not possible because service mode is active 5005 Command can currently not be executed because service mode is active 5006 Command or data transfer not possi ble while BUSY 5006 Command can currently not be executed because module is BUSY (data record or command transmission already active, ...) 5007 Command or data transmission not possible because module is faulty or SI MATIC CPU stop 5007 Command can currently not be executed because of a problem or SIMATIC CPU stop 5101 Command is not permissible in this operating state 5101 Command is not permissible in the current operating state 5102 Comand not possible while not stand 5102 still Scale command (set to zero, tare, log, ... ) cannot be executed because standstill is missing. 5104 Command not possible while limit ex 5104 ceeded Command (e.g. set to zero, tare, calibrate command) cannot be executed because the permitted range has been exceeded. 5105 Load cell parameters not plausible 5105 Load cell parameters in data record DR 10(a) or data record DR 11(d) not plausible (number, supporting points, load spec ifications, etc.). 5107 Calibration charcteristic shift not pos 5107 sible Characteristic cannot be moved due to possibility of range vi olation. 7000 Permitted number range violated 7000 The permitted number range, such as for weight values, was violated. 7002 Length of ASCII string not plausible 7002 The string header in a specified string variable is not plausible. 7007 Calibration weights / Calibration digits not plausible 7007 Specifications for calibration weights or digits in data record DR 3 are incorrect (minimum distance, reversal of incline). 7008 Zeroing or tare parameter not plausi ble 7008 The specifications (data record DR 3) or tare specifications (data record DR 15) are not plausible. 7009 Standstill range / standstill wait time 7009 Standstill range or standstill wait time are not plausible. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 93 Messages 9.5 Message list Data and command errors (code 5000 to 8999) Error code Description and remedy 7010 Scale interval / rounding 7010 Resolution or selection for rounding to decimal places is not plausible. 7011 Filter parameters 7011 Specification of filter parameters is not plausible. 9.5.4 Messages by LEDs on the module The LEDs on the front of the SIWAREX module signal the following status and error messages. Item Color Labeling Function Line 1 H1 red H2 Green DIAG H11 yellow H12 yellow H13 yellow 2 yellow {E} Ready 1 Standstill triggered Not used Green 0 H20 Max H22 Green LC 94 Load cell(s) ready for operation (LED off = load cells faulty) Not used yellow Rx/Tx H26 H40 Weighing range exceeded Not used H24 H25 1/4 d zero status Not used H21 H23 Empty message Not used Green H18 H19 Limit 2 responded Not used H16 H17 Limit 1 responded Service mode H14 H15 System fault EIA-RS485 communication active Not used Green PRW Status of local 24 V supply SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 10 Command lists The commands for the electronic weighing system described here can be transmitted by several interfaces: From the operator panel via the controller to the SIWAREX module From SIWATOOL direct to the SIWAREX module A data or command error is signaled if a command cannot be executed or if the sent data record is rejected. Command code Command 1... 99 Service commands 1 Service mode On Turn on service mode x 2 Service mode Off Turn off service mode x 11 Load factory setting The command resets the SIWAREX to the "Ex facto ry" status: - All parameters and saved data are loaded with the default values. - All message buffers are reset. x 60 Set Calibration Point 0 Set Calibration Point 0 / save values for calibration point 0. x 61 Set Calibration Point 1 Set Calibration Point 1 / save values for calibration point 1. x 62 Set Calibration Point 2 Set Calibration Point 2 / save values for calibration point 2. x 81 Characteristic shift Move calibration characteristic. The command de fines the current weight of the scale as the new zero point (0 kg) and shifts the complete characteristic without changing the gradient. The command can be used, for example, in order to compensate parts used for mounting calibration weights on the scale at the end of the calibration. x 82 Perform automatic calibration Calculating the scale characteristic curve with refer ence to the load cell from data record 10. The calcu lated characteristic curve is entered directly in data record 3 and 4, and thus activated immediately after executing the command. x 83 Perform calibration check The command calculates the theoretical digital val ues in relation to the calibration weights using the load cell parameters from data record 10 and the ad justment weights 0, 1 and 2 from data record 3. The output of these theoretical digits is made in data re cord 4. The function can be used to check the plau sibility of adjustment digits in data record 3, which have been determined in a legal-for-trade calibration. 700 ... 899 HMI display switching SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Description Service 95 Command lists Command code Command Description Service 701 Increased resolution Activate increased resolution on main display (x 10) x 705 Display current tare weight Display current tare weight on main display x 710 Activate standard display Activate standard display gross/net x 711 G/N display Display gross/net weight on main display x 712 N display 713 G display 714 N process value Display net process weight on main display x 715 B process value Display gross process weight on main display x 871 Show serial number The serial number of the module is displayed 875 Display FW version Show firmware version in current display x 1000 ... Basic functions for weighing commands 1001 Set to zero Set to zero x 1011 Tare Tare x 1012 Delete tare Delete current tare weight x 1013 Tare specification valid Activate specification of tare weight x 1016 S7 tare specification valid Activate specification of S7 tare weight The following commands can be triggered in the scale data block SCALE_DB in the area CMD1 to CMD3: Table 10-1 Command groups of the SIWAREX WP321 Command group Description 1 ... 99 Commands are forwarded from the FB_SIWA via data record DR 2 to the module (scale commands, weighing commands, log commands). The meaning of the com mands corresponds to the command list. 2000 + X Reading of a data record, X corresponds to the data record number. Example: Data record 3 transmitted by SIWAREX module to the SIMATIC CPU 2000 + 3 = command code 2003 4000 + X Writing of a data record, X corresponds to the data record number. Example: Data record 3 transmitted by SIMATIC CPU to the SIWAREX module 4000 + 3 = command code 4003 7001 Read all data records from SIWAREX into CPU (only for SIMATIC FB) 7002 Write all data records 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 13, 14 and 15 from CPU into SIWAREX (module must be in service mode, only for SIMATIC FB) Additional information on transmission of commands from the control program by means of the SIMATIC interface is available in chapter Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 (Page 97). 96 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.1 11 General information A SIWAREX WP321 occupies 16 bytes each in the I/O areas of the CPU. Communication between SIWAREX and SIMATIC CPU is supported by the FB. Table 11-1 Memory requirements of the function block FB 1, WP321DR Read weight and status YES Send commands YES Send parameters YES Main memory requirements in CPU 11 600 byte + n x 1 232 byte Load memory requirements in CPU 138 788 byte + n x 28 470 byte n = number of WP321 modules The function block described above including HMI configuring can be downloaded as a predefined example project ("Ready-for-use") from the Siemens Customer Support. 11.2 Structure of the program "Ready for use" There is one program for Step 7 Classic and another for TIA Portal. The two programs each consist of two parts: STEP 7 software for the SIMATIC CPU WinCC project (integrated in SIMATIC Manager) All messages are saved as bit information. The message system can thus directly access the bit fields and display the message texts. 11.3 Advantages of task sharing The weight is calculated in the SIWAREX module like in a separate electronic weighing system. However, thanks to integration in SIMATIC, it is possible to directly transfer the weight value to the PLC program. This results in sensible sharing of tasks: the weighing functions are performed in the SIWAREX module, while interlocking and signal linking are performed in the PLC. SIWAREX "Ready for use" takes over the task of a standardized program in the SIMATIC S7. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 97 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.4 Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system An FB handle several tasks: It controls communication between the SIMATIC CPU and the SIWAREX module It transfers commands and adjustment values to the SIWAREX module according to the process trend It prepares the scale data for visualization 11.4 Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system The SIWAREX WP321 module can be found in the directory PLC/SIMATIC S7-1200/ technology modules/weighing modules of the hardware catalog. The following basic properties of the module are defined during hardware configuration in the TIA Portal. Note that the SIWAREX WP321 module is always completely in the process image of the CPU. Installation location of the module Address in I/O area Diagnostics interrupts Hardware interrupts I&M (Identification & Maintenance) data The electronic weighing system occupies 16 bytes in the input/output area. Figure 11-1 98 Hardware configuration in the TIA Portal SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.4 Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system TIA Portal automatically assigns a separate I/O start address and a HW ID for every SIWAREX present in the project. These two parameters are relevant for calling the function block, and can be obtained from the properties of the respective module. Figure 11-2 Start address of module in TIA Portal Diagnostics interrupts can be optionally enabled or deactivated in the module properties. The configuration scope for diagnostics and hardware interrupts depends on the SIMATIC CPU used (S7-300, S7-400, S7-1200 or S7-1500) Diagnostics interrupts (Page 105) and Hardware interrupts (Page 106) Figure 11-3 Configuration of interrupts in TIA Portal Figure 11-4 HW ID of module in TIA Portal (up to TIA Portal V14) SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 99 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.5 Calling of function block 11.5 Calling of function block This description is based on use of the WP321DR block with data record communication and the following data: Start address SIWAREX WP321: 1 (see Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system (Page 98)) HW ID SIWAREX WP321: 280 (see Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system (Page 98)) Instance data block number of SIWAREX WP321 function block: DB321 The function block can be integrated at the desired position in the user program using drag and drop. Calling of the FB must be carried out cyclically in the control program. Figure 11-5 100 Calling WP321 DR block (V1.x and V2.x) in the user program SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.6 Working with the function block Figure 11-6 Calling WP321 DR block (V3.x) in the user program Function block parameter Description ADDR Start address WP321 (see Hardware configura tion of the electronic weighing system (Page 98)) HW_ID HW ID WP321 (see Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system (Page 98)) DB_NO Number of FB-internal instance DB LIFEBIT Optional status bit can be used to monitor commu nication The generated instance DB (WP321 in this case) contains all data records of the WP321 as well as all parameters required to exchange data between CPU and weighing module. A separate FB call must be made in the user program for each weighing module. In this manner, each scale receives its own instance DB which provides the respective scale parameters. The input and output parameters of the FB must be matched to the respective WP321 for each call. 11.6 Working with the function block Data records in SIWAREX weighing modules All parameters in SIWAREX weighing modules are structured in data records. These data records must be considered as connected packages and can only be respectively read into the CPU or written to the SIWAREX as complete packages. Reading or writing of a single parameter within a data record is not possible. You can find a description of all data records and their parameters in chapter Scale parameters and functions (Page 57). Reading and writing of data records is performed using special command codes which can be sent with three command mailboxes handled according to priority within the instance DB: SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 101 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.6 Working with the function block Figure 11-7 CMD command mailboxes As shown in the graphics, a command mailbox always consists of a command code (Int) and four bits (Bool). A command is set by entering the desired command code in the "i_CMD_CODE" parameter and setting the respective command trigger "bo_CMD_TRIGGER". The status bits "bo_CMD_InProgress" (command being processed), "bo_CMD_FinishedOk" (command finished without errors) and "bo_CMD_FinishedError" (command rejected or finished with error) can be evaluated in the user program. In addition, the three command mailboxes are managed and processed according to priority. CMD1 has the highest priority, CMD3 has the lowest priority. If all three command mailboxes are triggered simultaneously by the user program, for example, the function block initially processes CMD1, then CMD2, and finally CMD3. Cyclic triggering of command mailbox 3 is also interrupted by intermediate sending of a command in mailbox 2 or 1 for processing of the respective command. Note Cyclic triggering of the CMD1 command mailbox makes it impossible to send commands in mailbox 2 or 3. A summary of all existing command codes can be found in chapter Command lists (Page 95). The following equation for generation of a corresponding command code applies to the reading of data records from the SIWAREX to the data block: 102 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.6 Working with the function block Command code = 2000 + X (X = desired data record number) The following equation for generation of a corresponding command code applies to the writing of data records from the data block to the SIWAREX: Command code = 4000 + X (X = desired data record number) Example The following example clarifies the actions with command mailboxes and data records: "Calibration weight" is to be set to a value of 60.5 by the CPU. Since "Calibration weight" is a parameter of data record 3 (see chapter Scale parameters and functions (Page 57)), service mode must first be activated. This is possible using command code "1" (see chapter Command lists (Page 95)). The variable "i_CMD_CODE" must therefore be assigned the value "1" and the associated "bo_CMD_TRIGGER" set to TRUE. Subsequently, the module is directly in service mode (DIAG LED flashes green): i_CMD_CODE = 1 bo_CMD_TRIGGER = TRUE Since only complete data records can be read or written, it is recommendable to now read data record 3 into the CPU. This is carried out using command code 2003 (see chapter Command lists (Page 95)): i_CMD_CODE = 2003 bo_CMD_TRIGGER = TRUE All current data from data record 3 are now present in the data block. The calibration weight is then set as desired to a value of 60.5: CALIBRATION_WEIGHT = 60.5 The modified data record 3 must now be written into the SIWAREX again. This is carried out using command code 4003 (see chapter Command lists (Page 95)): i_CMD_CODE = 4003 bo_CMD_TRIGGER = TRUE The new calibration weight is now present in the SIWAREX and can be used. Service mode for the module should subsequently be switched off again using the command "2". This procedure for reading and writing data records or parameters is identical for all data records. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 103 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.8 Error codes of function block 11.7 I/O interface of function block The following scale parameters are available cyclically in the data block in the controller without special reading of data records or can be sent to the scale without sending of data records: Table 11-2 I/O data of the function block Parameter (read) Meaning SCALE_STATUS_1 (UINT) Bytes 0 & 1 of the scale status ( DR 30 current process values (Page 81)) SCALE_STATUS_2 (UINT) Bytes 2 & 3 of the scale status ( DR 30 current process values (Page 81)) Process value 1 Selection Selection of process value 1, 2 (Page 80) Process value 2 Selection Selection of process value 1, 2 (Page 80) Parameter (write) S7 tare specification 11.8 Table 11-3 Specified value for tare weight. The value is applied by using the "Tare specification valid (1016)" command. Error codes of function block Statuses/errors when working with the function block Error bit Error description bo_ApplIDError Address module does not match the function block bo_ApplIDDRError Data record does not match the inserted module bo_SFBError Runtime error during transmission of data record bo_RdPerError Reading of I/O data failed bo_LifeBitError SIWAREX no longer responds bo_StartUpError Command was sent although StartUp is still TRUE bo_WrongFW Data record version does not match the firmware bo_InvalidCMD An invalid command code was sent bo_DataOperationError Synchronous data operation error has occurred bo_StartUp Startup synchronization of module running bo_InvalidHW_ID An invalid hardware ID was created at the function block call ("HW_ID" input). Note If execution of the function block is faulty, the variables shown do not correspond to the actual status in the module. 104 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.10 Diagnostics interrupts 11.9 Diagnostics messages The DIAG LED flashes red when a diagnostics message is present. Diagnostics messages are displayed as plain text in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) by means of online and diagnostics views. You can evaluate the error codes by means of the user program. The following diagnostics messages can be signaled: Table 11-4 Diagnostics messages Diagnostics message Error code Meaning Remedy Fault 9H Internal module fault, defective Replace technology module Load voltage missing 11H L+ for technology mod Check supply voltage on BaseUnit ule missing Hardware interrupt lost 16H Technology module Change interrupt processing in the cannot send an inter CPU, change technology module rupt because the previ parameter settings. ous interrupt has not yet been processed Module temporarily not available 1FH Normal operation of module not possible because, for example, a FW update is being carried out. Wait until the module assumes nor mal operation. Undervoltage 02H Undervoltage of sense lines Voltage drop up to the load cell is too large. Find out why. Load high 07H Upper limit for sensor voltage exceeded Eliminate scale overload Underload 08H Lower limit for sensor voltage fallen below Check mechanics of the scale, check the wiring of the sensor. Checksum error in parameter 0DH The checksum for the Download factory setting of the pa integrity of the parame rameters. ters is incorrect Checksum error program 0EH The checksum for the Download firmware again, replace integrity of the parame module ters is incorrect 11.10 Diagnostics interrupts The enable for triggering of diagnostics interrupts is possible for all SIMATIC CPUs (S7-300, S7-400, S7-1200, S7-1500) and is assigned in the device configuration. The diagnostics interrupts can be evaluated to detect fault events in the SIMATIC CPU. Fault events (operating faults) are signaled by a diagnostics interrupt to the S7 CPU if the diagnostics interrupt is enabled (in the HW Config). You can evaluate the diagnostics messages using the local data of OB82. Contrary to the S7-1200 and S7-1500, the CPUs of the S7-300 and S7-400 systems enter the stop status following a diagnostics interrupt if the OB82 is not loaded. You can find detailed information with the "RALARM" instruction (read interrupt status). SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 105 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.11 Hardware interrupts 11.11 Hardware interrupts You can configure which events during operation are to trigger a hardware interrupt for the SIWAREX module. Based on the configuration, the SIWAREX module triggers a hardware interrupt for specific events/limits. When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the associated hardware interrupt OB. The event that triggered the interrupt is entered by the CPU into the start information of the associated hardware interrupt OB. Activation of the hardware interrupts For the device configuration of the SIWAREX module, activate the hardware interrupts in the TIA Portal under "Parameters". Lost hardware interrupt When an event that triggers a hardware interrupt occurs and a previous event of the same kind has not yet been processed, no further hardware interrupt is triggered. The hardware interrupt is lost. This may lead to the "Hardware interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt, depending on the parameterization. No hardware interrupts are activated by default. One result of triggering a hardware interrupt is that the following two variables are entered in the start information of the associated hardware interrupt OB: EventType: One byte with a set bit IChannel: Number of the channel that triggered the hardware interrupt Table 11-5 106 Table of event bits Hardware interrupt Event type bit Limit 1 OFF ON 0 0 Limit 1 ON OFF 1 1 Limit 2 OFF ON 2 2 Limit 2 ON OFF 3 3 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.11 Hardware interrupts Figure 11-8 Configuration of hardware interrupts for S7-1500 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 107 Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500 11.11 Hardware interrupts 108 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 12 Technical specifications 12.1 Technical specifications 24 V power supply Note A protective extra-low voltage (to EN 602041) is to be ensured by system power supply. Rated voltage 24 V DC Static low / high limits 19.2 V DC / 28.8 V DC Dynamic low / high limits 18.5 V DC / 30.2 V DC Non-periodic overvoltages 35 V DC for 500 ms with a recovery time of 50 s Maximum current consumption 100 mA with 24 V DC Typical power consumption of the module 2W Power supply from SIMATIC S7 backplane bus Power consumption from SIMATIC S7 backplane bus Typically 20 mA Analog load cell interface connection Error limit to DIN1319-1 at 20 C +10 K 0.05% v.E.1) Accuracy according to OIML R76 (no approval for measurements requiring verification) Class III and IV Resolution (d=e) 3000d Error percentage pi 0.4 0.5 V/e Step voltage Accuracy delivery state 2) typ. 0.1% v.E. Sampling rate 100/120/600 Hz (depending on parameterization) Input signal resolution 2 000 000 (for cells with 4 mV/V) Measuring range 4 mV/V Common mode voltage range 0.25 to 4.75 V DMS supply3) 4.85 V DC 2 % Short-circuit and overload protection Yes Connection 6-wire Sensor voltage monitoring 4V min. DMS input resistance SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 109 Technical specifications 12.1 Technical specifications without Ex-i interface SIWAREX IS 40 with Ex-i interface SIWAREX IS 50 min. DMS output resistance 4 100 Temperature coefficient range 5 ppm/K v. E. Temperature coefficient zero point 0.1 V/K Linearity error 0.01% Measured value filtering Low pass Electrical isolation 500 V AC 50 Hz / 60 Hz noise suppression CMRR > 80 dB Input resistance Signal cable typ. 4*106 Sensor cable typ. 2*106 1) Relative accuracy! (Absolute accuracy is only achieved by calibration on-site with calibration standard) 2) Accuracy for module replacement or theoretical calibration decisive 3) Value valid at sensor; voltage drops on cables are compensated up to 5 V Cable length Maximum cable length 500 m with SIWAREX cable, Accessories (Page 117). RS485 interface Standard EIA-485 Baud rate up to 115 kbps* Data bits 7 or 8 Parity even | odd | none Stop bits 1 or 2 Terminating resistors (can be activated) 390 / 220 / 390 Electrical isolation 500 V AC Transfer protocol ASCII for remote display from Siebert Cable length 115 kbps max. 1 000 m (fieldbus cable 2-wire, shielded, e.g. 6XV1830-0EH10) Dimensions and weights Dimensions 110 Width 15 mm Weight, approx. 31 g SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Technical specifications 12.2 Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements Mechanical requirements and data Testing Standards Vibrational load during op IEC 61131-2 eration IEC 60068-2-6 Test values 5 to 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm out. 8.4 to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 (=1G) Test Fc Shock load during opera tion IEC 61131-2 150 m/s2 (approx. 15 g), half sine IEC 60068-2-27 Test Ea Vibration load during transport IEC 60068-2-6 5 to 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm out. Test Fc 8.4 Hz to 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Shock load during trans port IEC 60068-2-27: 250 m/s2 (25G), half sine Free fall IEC 61131-2 In product packaging: 300 mm drop height IEC 60068-2-31: In shipping package: 1.0 m drop height Test Ea Test Ec, procedure 1 12.2 Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements Electrical protection and safety requirements Fulfilled requirement Standards Safety regulations IEC 61010-1 IEC 61131-2; UL 508 CSA C22.2 No.142 IEC 61010-2-201 FM3611 Comments Protection class IEC 61140 Module is operated with protective extralow voltage. The protective conductor connection serves only a functional earth to dissipate interference currents IP rating IP 20 to IEC 60529 Protection against contact with standard probe Protection against solid bodies with diameters greater than 12.5 mm No special protection against water SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 111 Technical specifications 12.2 Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements Fulfilled requirement Standards Comments Air gaps and creepage dis tances IEC 60664 IEC 61131-2 IEC 61010-1 UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 145 EN 50156-1 Overvoltage category II Isolation stability IEC 61131-2 CSA C22.2, No. 142 UL508 Test voltage: 500 V AC or 707 V DC Pollution degree 2 Electromagnetic compatibility Table 12-1 Interference emission (industrial area): EN 6100064 Comments Standard Limits Emission of radio interferences (electromagnetic fields) Class A industrial environment: 30 ... 230 MHz, 40 dB (V/m) Q Emission on power supply ca bles 24 V EN 61000-6-4 IEC/CISPR 16-2-3: 2008 Class A: Industrial environment: EN 61000-6-4 IEC/CISPR 16-2-1: 2010; EN 55016-2-1: 2009 230 ... 1 000 MHz, 47 dB (V/ m) Q Class A: Industrial environment 0.15 ... 0.5 MHz, 79 dB (V) Q 0.15 ... 0.5 MHz, 66 dB (V) M 0.5 ... 30 MHz, 73 dB (V) Q 0.5 ... 30 MHz, 60 dB (V) M Table 12-2 Interference immunity (industrial environment): EN 61000-6-2 Comments Standard Severity class Burst pulses on power supply ca bles EN45501 OIML R 76 EN 61000-4-4 NAMUR NE21 1 kV Burst pulses on data and signal ca EN 61000-4-4 bles NAMUR NE21 EN 61326 2.0 kV, opt. 2.4 kV Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 NAMUR NE21 EN 61326 EN 45501 6 kV direct/indirect EN 61000-4-2 NAMUR NE21 EN 61326 EN 45501 8 kV Electrostatic air discharge (ESD) 112 1 min. per priority 5/50 ns / 5 kHz 10 discharges pos/neg < 1 s repeat time SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Technical specifications 12.2 Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements Comments Standard Severity class Surge on power supply cables EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61131-2 1 kV symmetric1) NAMUR NE21 EN 61326 Surge on data and signal cables EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61131-2 NAMUR NE21 EN 61326 2 kV asymmetric 1) 1.2/50 s (8/20) s pos./neg. Internal generator resistance: 2 2 kV asymmetric HF irradiation amplitude modulated IEC61000-4-3 NAMUR NE21 OIML R76 EN 45501*3 80 to 2 000 MHz: 20 V/m HF irradiation, cell phone frequen cies 900 MHz ( 5 MHz) IEC 61000-4-3 1.89 Ghz ( 10 MHz) 20 V/m HF voltage on data, signal and pow IEC 61000-4-6 er supply cables 0.15 to 80 MHz NAMUR NE21 EN 61326 OIML R 76 10 kHz to 80 MHz: 10 Vrms Mod.: 80% AM with 1 kHz 1) An external protection element has to be installed to meet the requirement (e.g.: Blitzductor VT AD24V, Dehn&Sohne) 2) Not applicable for shielded cables and symmetric ports NOTICE Radio interference is possible This is a device of class A. The device may cause radio interference in residential areas. Implement appropriate measures (e.g.: use in 8MC cabinets) to prevent radio interference. Ambient conditions The use of SIWAREX WP321 is intended under the following conditions in SIMATIC ET 200SP. Table 12-3 Operating conditions to IEC 60721 Mode IEC60721-3-3 Class 3M3, stationary use, weather-proofed Storage/transport IEC 60721-3-2 class 2M2 without precipitation Contaminant concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm RH < 60%, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 ppm; SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 113 Technical specifications 12.4 Approvals Table 12-4 Climatic requirements Comments Ambient conditions Application areas Horizontal installation in S7 -25 ... +60 C Vertical installation in S7 -25 ... +50 C The S7 standard modules may not be operated at temperatures below 0 C. Storage and transport tempera ture -40 ... +85 C Relative humidity 5 ... 95 % No condensation; corresponds to relative humidity (RH) stress level 2 to DIN IEC 61131-2 Air pressure during operation IEC 60068-2-13 1 080 ... 795 hPa (operation) (1 000 ... +2 000 m above sea level) Air pressure during transport and IEC 60068-2-13 storage 1 080 to 660 hPa (storage) (1 000 to +3 500 m above sea level) Operating temperature: 12.3 Reliability Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) The MTBF calculation results in the following value: Table 12-5 12.4 MTBF Electronic Weighing System MTBF in years SIWAREX WP321 107 years @TA = 40 C Approvals NOTICE Safety guidelines for applications in hazardous areas For applications in hazardous areas, read the safety instructions in the document "Product Information - Use of SIWAREX Modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area (https:// support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)". Note The current approvals for your device can be found on the nameplate. 114 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Technical specifications 12.4 Approvals CE approval (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ view/102423743/en) UL approval USA (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/ de/view/19248974/en) UL approval Canada (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ ww/de/view/89339055/en) FM approval (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ view/109476227/en) ATEX certificate (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/ view/22750040/en) IECEx certificate (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/ de/view/109476230/en) EAC certificate (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ view/109476219/en) Tick mark for Australia and New Zealand KCC approval The modules are RoHS-compliant according to EU Directive 2016/65/EU SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 115 Technical specifications 12.4 Approvals 116 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 13 Accessories Table 13-1 Essential accessories Ordering data Description Article No. BaseUnit type A0, essential accessories For opening a new potential group BU15P-16+A0+2D1) or 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0 BU15P-16+A10+2D 6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0 1) For continuing the potential group BU15P-16+A0+2B1) BU15P-16+A10+2B 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 1) Shield connection 1) 6ES7193-6BP20-0BA0 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0 FM-certified Table 13-2 Optional accessories Ordering data Description Article No. Configuration Package SIWAREX WP321 for TIA- 7MH4138-1AK01 Portal SIWATOOL program for adjustment of scales during commissioning Software "Ready for use" This contains the SIMATIC S7 blocks for operation with SIMATIC 300 und S7-1500 and a project for SIMATIC Operator Panel KTP600 Manuals in several languages Configuration Package SIWAREX WP321 for PCS7 V8.1 7MH4138-1AK61 Function block for CFC Faceplate PC configuration software SIWATOOL Device manuals SIWAREX WP321 manual in various languages Free download from the Internet SIWAREX WP321 "Ready for use" Free download from the Internet RS485/USB converter Commercially available converter with FTDI chip, e.g. USB-Nano-485 from CTI (http://www.ctishop.com/RS485-Konverter/USB-Nano-485) SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 117 Accessories Ordering data Description Article No. Digital remote display The digital remote displays can be connected di rectly to the SIWAREX WP321 through the RS485 interface. Suitable remote display: S102 Siebert Industrieelektronik GmbH Postfach 1180 D-66565 Eppelborn, Germany Tel.: 06806/980-0 Fax: 06806/980-999 Internet: Siebert (http://www.siebert-group.com) Detailed information can be obtained from the manufacturer. SIWAREX JB junction box 7MH4 710-1BA For parallel connection of load cells SIWAREX EB extension box 7MH4 710-2AA For extending load cell cables Ex interface, type SIWAREX IS With ATEX approval for intrinsically-safe connec tion of load cells, including manual, suitable for the load cell groups SIWAREX CS, U, M, FTA, and P With short-circuit current < 199 mA DC 7MH4 710-5BA With short-circuit current < 137 mA DC 7MH4 710-5CA Cable (optional) Cable Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) - CY 7MH4 702-8AG To connect SIWAREX CS, U, M, P, A, WP321 to the junction box (JB), extension box (EB) or Ex interface (Ex-I) or between two JBs, for fixed laying Occasional bending is possible 10.8 mm outer diameter For ambient temperature -20 to +70 C Cable Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) CY, blue sheath 7MH4 702-8AF To connect junction box (JB) or extension box (EB) in hazardous area and Ex interface (Ex-I), for fixed laying Occasional bending is possible, blue PVC insulating sheath, approx. 10.8 mm outer diameter For ambient temperature -20 to +70 C 118 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC A Appendix A.1 Technical support Technical Support If this documentation does not provide complete answers to any technical questions you may have, contact Technical Support at: Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) More information about our Technical Support is available at Technical support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/service) Internet Service & Support In addition to our documentation, Siemens provides a comprehensive support solution at: Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) Personal contact If you have additional questions about the device, please contact your Siemens personal contact at: Partner (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner) In order to find the contact for your product, select under 'All Products and Branches' the path 'Automation Technology > Sensor Systems'. Documentation You can find documentation on various products and systems at: Instructions and manuals Instructions and manuals (https://support.industry.siemens.com/ cs/ww/en/ps/17781/man) See also Process instrumentation catalog (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/catalogs) SIWAREX support E-mail (mailto:hotline.siwarex@siemens.com) Phone: +49 (721) 595-2811 CET 8:00 to 17:00 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 119 Appendix A.1 Technical support 120 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC ESD guidelines B.1 B ESD Guidelines Definition of ESD All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any electrostatic discharge. The electrostatic sensitive components/modules are commonly referred to as ESD devices. This is also the international abbreviation for such devices. ESD modules are identified by the following symbol: NOTICE ESD devices can be destroyed by voltages well below the threshold of human perception. These static voltages develop when you touch a component or electrical connection of a device without having drained the static charges present on your body. The electrostatic discharge current may lead to latent failure of a module, that is, this damage may not be significant immediately, but in operation may cause malfunction. Electrostatic charging Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings can be electrostatically charged. The figure below shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated. These values correspond to IEC 801-2 specifications. SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 121 ESD guidelines B.1 ESD Guidelines 9ROWDJHLQN9 N9 6\QWKHWLFPDWHULDO :RRO $QWLVWDWLFPDWHULDOVXFKDVZRRGRU FRQFUHWH Figure B-1 5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\LQ Electrostatic voltages which an operator can be subjected to Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge Ensure good equipotential bonding: When handling electrostatic sensitive devices, ensure that your body, the workplace and packaging are grounded. This prevents electrostatic charge. Avoid direct contact: As a general rule, only touch electrostatic sensitive devices when this is unavoidable (e.g. during maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In this way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices. Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments. 122 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC C List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange B Gross weight CPU Central processor, in this case SIMATIC CPU DB Data block FB SIMATIC S7 function block HMI Human machine interface (e.g. SIMATIC Operator Panel) HW Hardware NAWI Non-automatic weighing instrument NAW Non-automatic scales OIML Organisation Internationale de Metrologie Legale OP Operator Panel (SIMATIC) PC Personal computer pT Preset tare (predefined tare weight with manual taring) RAM Random access memory PLC Programmable logic controller STEP 7 Programming device software for SIMATIC S7 T Tare weight TM Technology module TP Touch Panel (SIMATIC) UDT Universal Data Type (S7) WRP Write protection LC Load cell(s) NR Numerical range SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 123 List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations 124 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Index C Customer Support Hotline, 119 D Documentation Edition, 10 E ESD guidelines, 121 G Guidelines ESD guidelines, 121 H History, 10 Hotline, 119 I Internet, 119 M MTBF, 114 R Reliability, 114 S Safety notices for installation, 21 Use in hazardous areas, 21 Scope of delivery, 11 Service, 119 Support, 119 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC 125 Index 126 SIWAREX WP321 Manual, 09/2018, A5E33715669A-AC Communication module CM DP ___________________ Preface (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) ET 200SP Documentation 1 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Wiring 4 ___________________ Programming Diagnostics, error and ___________________ 5 system alarms ___________________ 6 Technical specifications ___________________ A Dimension drawing 12/2014 A5E33619758-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33619758-AB 12/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 4 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide............................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8 3 2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8 2.2 Operating and display elements .............................................................................................11 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12 3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................12 3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................13 4 Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 14 5 Diagnostics, error and system alarms .................................................................................................... 16 6 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................16 5.2 DP slave diagnostics...............................................................................................................18 5.3 Standard diagnostics ..............................................................................................................20 5.4 Device-specific diagnostics with DP-V1..................................................................................22 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 25 6.1 A Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................25 Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 28 A.1 Dimension drawing of the CM DP communication module ....................................................28 Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 5 1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing interference-free controllers. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 6 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB ET 200SP Documentation Guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38715968). Applications & Tools Applications & Tools supports you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find Applications & Tools on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20208582). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42455541). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 7 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the CM DP communication module Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 8 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The communication module CM DP can be used with the ET 200SP CPUs. You insert the communication module to the right next to the CPU. The communication module has the following properties: Technical properties - Connects the CPU of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP - Bus connection via RS485 interface Supported functions - Operation as DP master or DP slave - Enable/disable DP slave - Diagnostics requirements - Identify the bus topology in a DP master system - Identification data I&M 0 - Time-of-day synchronization - Line diagnostics - S7 services Supported communication services The communication module supports the following communication services: PROFIBUS DP-Master, as of STEP 7 V13, Update 3 - PROFIBUS DP according to IEC 61158 and 61784 DPV1, DP master for DP slaves according to PROFIBUS DP and DPV1 standard PROFIBUS DP slave, as of STEP 7 V13, SP1 - PROFIBUS DP according to IEC 61158 and 61784 DPV1, DP slave and I-slave Note DP master or DP slave Note however: The CM DP only supports alternative operation as DP master or DP slave. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties Maximum configuration as DP Master Table 2- 1 General characteristics of DP mode Feature Explanation/values Number of operable DP slaves 125 Max. size of the input area over all DP slaves 8 KB Max. size of the output area via all DP slaves 8 KB Maximum number of inputs per DP slave 244 bytes Maximum number of outputs per DP slave 244 bytes Max. size of the consistency area for a module 128 bytes Note Setting the PROFIBUS DP address on the communication module CM DP The communication module CM DP does not have a DIP switch. You set the PROFIBUS DP address via STEP 7 (TIA Portal). You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help. Accessories A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Additional information You can obtain detailed information on the topic of PROFIBUS in the function manual PROFIBUS (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/59193579/0/en) Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 10 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Product overview 2.2 Operating and display elements 2.2 Operating and display elements Operating and connection elements The following figure shows the operating and connection elements of the CM DP communication module. Mounting rail release DIAG LED DP interface Figure 2-2 Operating and display elements of the communication module CM DP Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 11 3 Wiring 3.1 Pin assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface The following table shows the signal names and the designations of the pin assignment for the PROFIBUS DP interface. Table 3- 1 Pin assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface View Signal name Designation 1 - - 2 - - 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B 4 RTS Request To Send 5 M5V2 DP data reference potential (from station) 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station) 7 - - 8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A 9 - - Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 12 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Wiring 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the CM DP communication module. Backplane bus PB PROFIBUS interface DIAG LED diagnostics (green/red) ET 200SP PROFIBUS interface and backplane bus transmission Internal power supply Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the CM DP Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 13 4 Programming Instructions Pre-written instructions are available as an interface in your STEP 7 user program for communication services. Table 4- 1 Instructions for PROFIBUS DP Instructions Meaning when used with CM DP DP master DP slave (I-slave) DPSYC_FR Synchronize DP slaves/Freeze inputs (SYNC/FREEZE instruction) - DPNRM_DG Read diagnostics data of a DP slave - DP_TOPOL Determine topology for DP master system - WRREC Write data record of a DP slave - RDREC Read data record of a DP slave - GETIO Read process image of a DP standard slave Read process image SETIO Transfer process image of a DP standard slave Transfer process image GETIO_PART Read process image area of a DP standard slave Read process image area SETIO_PART Transfer process image area of a DP standard slave Transfer process image area D_ACT_DP Enable/disable DP slaves - DPRD_DAT Read consistent data of a module (user data) DPWR_DAT Write consistent data of a module RALRM Event-driven reading of alarm information Event-driven reading of interrupt information (diagnostics, pull/plug, hardware interrupt) as (diagnostic interrupt) well as DPV1-specific interrupts (update, status, vendor-specific interrupt) Read the documentation for the instructions in the STEP 7 online help Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 14 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Programming Calling instructions for distributed I/O Multiple calls are required for the instructions of the distributed I/O. The duration of the call processing is dependent on the load, bus cycle time and transmission rate. Timeouts may occur if these instructions are called in a loop within a cycle. Exceptions: Only one call is necessary for the RALRM instruction "Receive interrupt". Program blocks for DPV1 (according to PNO standard) 1): "Read data record from a DP slave" RDREC instruction is functionally equivalent to SFC59 (write record) "Write data record to a DP slave" WRREC instruction is functionally equivalent to SFC58 (read record) "Read interrupt information from a DP slave" RALRM instruction call is made within an interrupt OB 1) PNO: PROFIBUS user organization Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 15 5 Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Introduction Diagnostics by means of LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. In order to localize errors still further, you usually evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 or the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has occurred. For example, you will find the number of the relevant error OB in the plain text information. LED display The figure below shows the LED display on the CM DP communication module. DIAG (green/red) Figure 5-1 LED display on the CM DP communication module Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 16 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the DIAG LED display on the communication module The CM DP communication module has an LED for monitoring the diagnostics. DIAG LED Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display DIAG LED Meaning Module parameters not assigned Flashes Module parameters assigned and no diagnostics On Diagnostics of subordinate modules (as of firmware version V1.7) Flashes Additional information You can find more information on diagnostics in the Diagnostics function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/59192926/0/en) for diagnostic options that are available for SIMATIC systems S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 17 Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.2 DP slave diagnostics 5.2 DP slave diagnostics DP V1 slave: Diagnostic interrupt Transmission of diagnostic data is made as a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostic interrupts must be acknowledged by the DP master. Supported diagnostic functions The CM DP supports the following blocks of the DP diagnostics: Standard diagnostics (6 bytes) Identifier-related diagnostics (2...17 bytes depending on the number of configured transfer areas) Module status (5...35 bytes depending on the number of configured transfer areas) Diagnostic interrupt (8 bytes, if any) User program (DP master) The "DPNRM_DG" instruction is used to read the diagnostic data of a DP slave (DP single diagnostics) in the DP master. The diagnostic interrupts for DP V1 slaves are periodically evaluated in the user program of the master via the "RALRM" instruction. You can find the required parameter assignment for the instruction in the STEP 7 online help. The following is a structural overview of the diagnostic data. Overview of standard diagnostics Standard diagnostics Byte Meaning 0 Station status 1 1 Station status 2 2 Station status 3 3 Master address 4...5 Manufacturer ID of the slave Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 18 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.2 DP slave diagnostics Overview of device-specific diagnostics The device-specific diagnostics data depends on the protocol variant in which the DP slave is operated: DP-V1 slave Table 5- 2 Overview of device-specific diagnostics of the CM DP for DP V1 slaves Device-specific diagnostics Byte Meaning 0 Header 1 Variant Interrupt type Variant Status type 2 3 Slot number Variant Interrupt specifier 4...62 Variant Status specifier Module-specific diagnostic data Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 19 Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.3 Standard diagnostics 5.3 Standard diagnostics Standard diagnostics The coding of the standard diagnostic bytes is explained below. Byte 0: Station status 1 Table 5- 3 Structure of station status byte 1 Bit no. Name Explanation 7 Master_Lock The DP slave was configured by a different DP master. The DP slave can only be accessed read-only by the DP master configured as productive. This bit is set by the DP master when its bus address does not match the configured address. 6 Parameter_Fault The most recently received parameter frame was corrupt or not permitted. This bit is set by the DP slave. Remedy: Check the parameter assignment with respect to invalid parameters. 5 Invalid_Slave_Response This bit is set by the DP master if an implausible response has been received by the DP slave. 4 Service_Not_Supported This bit is set by the DP master if a function is called by the master that is not supported by the DP slave. Remedy: Disable the parameter assignment of the required function at the master. 3 2 Ext_Diag Slave_Config_Check_Fault This bit is set by the slave. * Bit =1: Diagnostic data is available in the diagnostic area specific to the slave. The diagnostic data can be evaluated in the user program of the master. * Bit =0: A status message can be available in the diagnostic area specific to the slave. The status message can be evaluated in the user program of the master. The configuration data sent by the DP master is rejected by the DP slave. Cause: Configuration error. Remedy: Change the configuration. 1 Station_Not_Ready The DP slave is not yet ready for productive data exchange. This is a temporary condition and cannot be influenced by the DP master. 0 Station_Non_Existent The DP slave is not responding on the bus. This bit is set by the DP master 1 (the slave permanently sets this bit to 0). If the bit is set, the diagnostic bits contain the status of the last diagnostic alarm or the initial value. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 20 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.3 Standard diagnostics Byte 1: Station status 2 Table 5- 4 Structure of station status byte 2 Bit no. Name Explanation 7 Deactivated The DP slave was shown as inactive in the local parameter set and will not be cyclically queried. 6 Reserved - Reserved - 5 Sync_Mode The DP slave is in SYNC mode. The bit is set by the slave. 4 Freeze_Mode The DP slave is in FREEZE mode. The bit is set by the slave. 3 Watchdog_On The watchdog is activated on the DP slave. The bit is set by the slave. 2 Status_From_Slave Bit =1: The diagnostics comes from the DP slave. The bit is permanently set by the slave to 1. 1 Static_Diag Static diagnostics If the DP slave sets this bit, the DP master must fetch the diagnostic data from the DP slave until the DP slave resets this bit. The DP slave sets this bit, for example, if it cannot perform data transfer. 0 Parameter_Request The DP slave sets this bit when it has to be re-parameterized and configured. If bit 0 and bit 1 are both set, bit 0 has the higher priority. Byte 2: Station status 3 Table 5- 5 Structure of station status byte 3 Bit no. Name Explanation 7 Ext_Data_Overflow If this bit is set, there is more diagnostic information than is specified in the diagnostics data. This data cannot be viewed. 6...0 Reserved - Reserved - Byte 3: Master address The address of the DP master that has configured this DP slave is entered in the "Master_Add" byte. If the DP slave was not configured by a DP master, the DP slave sets address 255 in this byte. Bytes 4 and 5: Manufacturer ID of the slave ("Ident_Number") The manufacturer ID ("Ident_Number") for the DP slave type is entered in the bytes 4 and 5. This identifier can be used to identify the slave. The most significant part of the value is in byte 5. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 21 Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.4 Device-specific diagnostics with DP-V1 5.4 Device-specific diagnostics with DP-V1 Device-specific diagnostics The device-specific diagnostics of DP V1 slaves is available in two variants: Interrupt type Status type The two variants differ in the coding of byte 1, bit 7 of the device-specific diagnostic data. The distinction is component-specific. Byte 0: Header The two most significant bits have the value 00. This identifies the "Module-specific diagnostic data" block as a whole (see bytes 4...62). The remaining six bits indicate the length of the data block including byte 0. Byte 1: "Interrupt type" variant Table 5- 6 Structure of byte 1 of the device-specific diagnostics ("Interrupt type" variant) Bit no. 7 6...0 Meaning Value Meaning 0 Interrupt Alarm_Type 0 - Reserved - 1 Diagnostic interrupt 2 Process interrupt 3 Pull interrupt 4 Plug interrupt 5 Status interrupt 6 Update interrupt 7...31 - Reserved - 32...126 Manufacturer-specific 127 - Reserved - Older status interrupts can be overwritten by newer ones when status interrupts occur in rapid succession. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 22 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.4 Device-specific diagnostics with DP-V1 Byte 1: "Status type" variant Table 5- 7 Structure of byte 1 of the device-specific diagnostics ("Status type" variant) Bit no. 7 6...0 Meaning Value Meaning 1 Status message Status_Type 0 - Reserved - 1 Status message 2 Module_Status (see also bytes 4...62) 3...31 - Reserved - 32...126 Vendor-specific 127 - Reserved - Byte 2: Slot number Slot number (1...n) of the slave module 0 is the placeholder for the overall device. Byte 3: "Interrupt specifier" variant Table 5- 8 Structure of byte 3 of the device-specific diagnostics ("Interrupt specifier" variant) Bit no. Meaning 7...3 Seq_No Unique identification of an alarm message 2 Add_Ack If this bit is set, the DP V1 master indicates that this interrupt expects an acknowledgment in the form of a WRITE job. 1...0 Alarm_Specifier 0 No further distinction 1 Interrupt appears, slot is disrupted The slot generates an interrupt due to an error. 2 Interrupt disappears, slot is OK The slot generates an interrupt and indicates that there is no other error. 3 Interrupt disappears, slot is still disrupted The slot generates an interrupt and indicates that errors remain. Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 23 Diagnostics, error and system alarms 5.4 Device-specific diagnostics with DP-V1 Byte 3: "Status specifier" variant Table 5- 9 Structure of byte 3 of the device-specific diagnostics ("Status specifier" variant) Bit no. Meaning 7...2 - Reserved - 1...0 Status_Specifier 0 No further distinction 1 Status appears 2 Status disappears 3 - Reserved - Bytes 4...62: Module-specific diagnostic data: General coding This byte contains data with module-specific information that is described in the respective module documentation. The particular module is identified by the slot (byte 2). Bytes 4...62: Module-specific diagnostics for "Status type" and "Modul_Status" In the case of the "Status type" variant of device-specific diagnostics from DP V1 slaves (see byte 1, bit 7) and the "Module_Status" setting (see byte 1, bits 0...6) two status bits are provided here for each slot (= module). Unneeded bits are set to 0. Table 5- 10 Structure of the bytes for the module-specific diagnostic data Byte Bit assignment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 Module status 4 Module status 3 Module status 2 Module status 1 5 Module status 8 Module status 7 Module status 6 Module status 5 ... ... ... ... ... 62 Module status 236 Module status 235 Module status 234 Module status 233 The respective status bits are coded as follows: Table 5- 11 Meaning of the values of the status bits Value Meaning 00 Data valid 01 Data invalid - error (e.g. short-circuit) 10 Data invalid - wrong module 11 Data invalid - no module plugged Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 24 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 6 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) communication module 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0 Product type designation ET 200SP, CM DP General information Hardware version FS01 HW functional status FS01 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13 Update 3 Installation type/mounting Rack mounting possible No Rail mounting possible Yes; standard DIN rail Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 VDC Rated value (DC) 24 V Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Interfaces Number of interfaces PROFIBUS 1 1. interface Interface hardware * RS 485 Yes Protocols * SIMATIC communication Yes * PROFIBUS DP master Yes * PROFIBUS DP slave Yes Interface hardware RS 485 Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Max. cable length 100 m Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 25 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0 Protocols PROFIBUS DP master Services * PG/OP communication Yes * S7 routing Yes * Data record routing Yes * Isochronous mode No * Constant bus cycle time No * Number of DP slaves 125 * Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes PROFIBUS DP slave Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps Automatic baud rate search Yes Address area, max. 120 User data per address area, max. 128 bytes Services * PG/OP communication Yes, only with active interface * Routing Yes, only with active interface * S7 communication Yes, only with active interface * Direct data exchange (data exchange broadcast) Yes, no subscriber possible - only passive publisher * DPV1 Yes Transfer memory * Inputs 244 bytes * Outputs 244 bytes Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostic alarms Diagnostics Yes Diagnostic indicator LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Between backplane bus and interface Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature in operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 26 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0 Dimensions Width 35 mm Height 117 mm Depth 75 mm Weights Weight, approx. 80 g Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB 27 A Dimension drawing A.1 Dimension drawing of the CM DP communication module This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail. Observe the dimensions when installing in cabinets, control rooms, etc. Dimension drawing of the CM DP communication module Figure A-1 Dimension drawing CM DP Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0) 28 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33619758-AB CM PtP communication module ___________________ Preface (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Programming 6 ___________________ Error and system messages 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Dimensional drawing 01/2013 A5E03790792-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03790792-01 01/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation provides important information on installing, wiring and commissioning the ET 200SP point-to-point communications module. This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). General functions of the ET 200SP are described in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Conventions This documentation contains figures of the described device. The figures may differ slightly from the devices supplied. Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contain important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Note on IT security Siemens offers IT security mechanisms for its automation and drive product portfolio in order to support the safe operation of the plant/machine. We recommend that you inform yourself regularly on the IT security developments regarding your products. You can find information on this on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). You can register for a product-specific newsletter here. For the safe operation of a plant/machine, however, it is also necessary to integrate the automation components into an overall IT security concept for the entire plant/machine, which corresponds to the state-of-the-art IT technology. You can find information on this on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Products used from other manufacturers should also be taken into account here. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 3 Preface Copyright notice for the open-source software used Open-source software is used in the firmware of the product described. The open-source software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the product described, including the open-source software contained in it, pursuant to the conditions applicable to the product. Siemens accepts no liability for the use of the open source software over and above the intended program sequence, or for any faults caused by modifications to the software. For legal reasons, we are obliged to publish the original text of the following copyright notices. (c) Copyright William E. Kempf 2001 Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. William E. Kempf makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Copyright (c) 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided as is'' without express or implied warranty. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 4 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide................................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview ....................................................................................................................................... 9 3 4 2.1 Properties.......................................................................................................................................9 2.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................................10 2.3 Functions......................................................................................................................................11 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 Properties of the interfaces ..........................................................................................................13 Properties of the RS232 interface................................................................................................13 Properties of the RS422/485 interface.........................................................................................15 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 17 3.1 RS232 and RS422/485 interface of the communication module.................................................17 3.2 Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................18 Parameters/address space ...................................................................................................................... 19 4.1 Parameter assignment.................................................................................................................19 4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP ...............................................................................................................19 4.3 Address space .............................................................................................................................20 5 Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 21 6 Error and system messages .................................................................................................................... 23 7 Technical specifications........................................................................................................................... 25 A Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................................... 29 CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 5 Table of contents CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 6 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 1 Documentation guide Introduction This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the S7-1500 and ET 200SP automation systems consists of system manuals, function manuals and manuals. The STEP 7 information system (Online Help) also helps you configure and program your automation system. Overview of the documentation provided for the CM PtP communication module (ET 200SP) The following table lists additional references that you will need when using the CM PtP communication module. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the CM PtP communication module Topic Documentation Key content System description System Manual S7 -1500 Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59191792) * Application planning * Installation System Manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/58649293) * Connecting * Addressing * Commissioning * Maintenance Device manual Interface module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/55683316/133300) * Connecting * Interrupt, error and system messages * Technical specifications * Dimensional drawing Function manual EMC/EMI compatible installation of control systems (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59193566) * Basics * Electromagnetic compatibility * Lightning protection Function manual CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59057093) * Basic information * Data transmission functions * Diagnostics functions Point-to-point communication CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 7 Documentation guide SIMATIC Manuals All current manuals for the SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 8 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Order number 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of CM PtP (without BaseUnit) CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 9 Product overview 2.2 Accessories Properties The communication module has the following properties: Technical properties - RS232 interface (via BaseUnit) - RS422/485 interface (via BaseUnit) - short-circuit proof - electrically disconnected - Protocols: 3964(R), Modbus master (RTU), Modbus slave (RTU), Freeport and USS with instructions Supported system functions - Firmware update - Identification data I&M0 - Parameter re-assignment in CPU RUN mode (using instructions) - Diagnostic interrupts Additional information Additional information on the properties of the CM PtP can be found in the function manual CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093). You can find additional information on the design of the ET 200SP and the associated modules in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). 2.2 Accessories ET 200SP accessories Accessories and spare parts for ET 200SP can be found in the System Manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Online catalog Additional order numbers for ET 200SP can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall) in the online catalog and online ordering system. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 10 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Product overview 2.3 Functions 2.3 Functions Introduction The communication module allows you to exchange data between your own and other programmable controllers or computers by means of a point-to-point connection, and to connect various devices from a variety of manufacturers. Functionality of the CM PtP The CM PtP communication module offers the following functionality: RS232 and RS422/485 interface Data transmission rate: 300 to 115200 bps Maximum frame length: 2 kbyte Transmission protocols: Freeport, 3964(R) and Modbus Note The USS protocol can be implemented with instructions included in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Hardware components of a point-to-point connection You require certain hardware components for a point-to-point connection with the CM PtP. Components Function Automation system ... contains the CPU and PROFINET interface, and the central I/O, if applicable, and executes the user program. ET 200SP Distributed I/O System ... contains the distributed I/O. Interface module (IM) ... connects the distributed I/O system ET 200SP to PROFINET IO and supports all ET 200SP I/O modules. CM PtP communication module ... communicates with a communication partner (point-to-point) by means of the interface. BaseUnit (6ES7193-6BP00-0xA0) ... connects the communication module with the I/O system and the supply voltage. Server module ... completes the setup of the ET 200SP CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 11 Product overview 2.3 Functions System environment The communication module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Components required Distributed operation in an S7-1500 system * CPU 151x * IM 155-6 * CM PtP * Power supply (optional) * CPU 31x / CPU 41x * IM 155-6 * CM PtP * BaseUnit * Third-party automation system * IM 155-6 * CM PtP Distributed operation in an S7-300/400 system Distributed operation in a third-party automation system Configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 with integration of a GSD file GSD file imported to/installed in the engineering system 1) 1) Information on using the communication module in a third-party system is available in the programming and operating manual CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59062563). Additional information Information on configuration and programming of the CM PtP communications module is available in the function manual CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093) and in the information system of the TIA Portal. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 12 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Product overview 2.4 Properties of the interfaces 2.4 Properties of the interfaces Interfaces of the CM PtP The CM PtP has the following interfaces, which are connected by means of the associated BaseUnit (see RS232 and RS422/485 interface of the communication module (Page 17) for assignment): RS232 interface RS422/485 interface 2.4.1 Properties of the RS232 interface Definition - RS232 interface The RS232 interface is a voltage interface used for serial data transmission. Properties - RS232 interface The RS232 interface has the following properties and meets the following requirements: Type Voltage interface BaseUnit terminals Terminals connected to the electronics module (see RS232 and RS422/485 interface of the communication module (Page 17) for assignment) RS232 signals TXD, RXD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, RI, DCD, GND; all signals isolated against the backplane bus and load voltage Max. data transmission rate 115.2 kbps max. cable length 15 m, cable type LIYCY 9 x 0.14 Standard DIN 66020, DIN 66259, EIA-RS 232C, CCITT V.24/V.28 CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 13 Product overview 2.4 Properties of the interfaces RS232 signals The table below shows the meaning of the individual RS232 accompanying signals. Table 2- 1 Signals of the RS232 interface Signal Designation Meaning TXD Transmit Data Transmit data; transmit cable logically held to "1" by communication module in idle state. RXD Receive Data Receive data; receive cable logically held to "1" by communication partner in idle state. RTS Request To Send Request to send RTS set to "ON": Communication module ready to send; signals to the communication partner that there is data ready to send RTS set to "OFF": Communication module does not send CTS Clear To Send Clear to send CTS set to "ON": Signals "clear to send" to the communication partner CTS set to "OFF": Signals "Not clear to send" to the communication partner DTR Data Terminal Ready DTR set to "ON": Communications module switched on, ready for operation DTR set to "OFF": Communications module not switched on, not ready for operation DSR Data Set Ready DSR set to "ON": Communication partner signals "ready for operation" DSR set to "OFF": Communication partner not switched on, not ready for operation RI Ring Indicator Incoming call when connecting a modem DCD Data Carrier Detect Carrier signal when connecting a modem. The communication partner signals with a high level that it detects incoming data on the cable. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 14 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Product overview 2.4 Properties of the interfaces 2.4.2 Properties of the RS422/485 interface Definition - RS422/485 interface The RS422/485 (X27) interface is a differential voltage interface for serial data transmission. Properties - RS422/485 interface The RS422/485 (X27) interface has the following properties and meets the following requirements: Type Differential voltage interface BaseUnit terminals Terminals connected to the electronics module (see RS232 and RS422/485 interface of the communication module (Page 17) for assignment) RS422 signals: T (A), R (A), T (B), R (B), GND; all signals are isolated against the backplane bus and the load voltage RS485 signals: R/T (A), R/T (B), GND; all signals isolated against backplane bus and load voltage Max. data transmission rate: 115.2 kbps Max. cable length: 1200 m; cable type LIYCY 3 x 2 x 0.14. T(A)/T(B) and R(A)/R(B) twisted in pairs. Standard: DIN 66259 Parts 1 and 3, EIA-RS422/485, CCITT V.11 CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 15 Product overview 2.4 Properties of the interfaces CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 16 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 3 Connecting 3.1 RS232 and RS422/485 interface of the communication module Pin assignment Table 3- 1 RS232 connection Terminal assignment of the communication module BaseUnit Pin Designation Input/output Meaning 1 TXD Transmit Data Output Transmit data Receive data 2 RXD Receive Data Input 3 RTS Request To Send Output Request to send 4 CTS Clear To Send Input Clear to send 5 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output Data terminal ready 6 DSR Data Set Ready Input Data set ready 7 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input Received signal level 8 RI Ring Indicator Input Incoming call 9+10 PE Ground - GND functional ground (isolated) / 0 Front view CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 17 Connecting 3.2 Installation guidelines Table 3- 2 RS422/485 connection Terminal assignment of the communication module BaseUnit Pin Designation Input/output Meaning 11 T (A) - Output Send data (four-wire mode) 12 R (A) - Input Receive data (four-wire mode) T(A)/R(A) Input/output Receive/send data (two-wire mode) T (B) + Output Send data (four-wire mode) 13 14 / 0 15+16 R (B) + Input Receive data (four-wire mode) T(B)/R(B) Input/output Receive/send data (two-wire mode) PE Ground - GND functional ground (isolated) Front view Note Ensure the power supply is disconnected before you wire the communication module. Additional information Information on connecting the modules can be found in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. 3.2 Installation guidelines To take into consideration The general installation guidelines must be taken into consideration (see function manual EMC/EMI compatible installation of control systems (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)). The cable shield must be installed on a grounding rail to maintain the EMC values (electromagnetic compatibility). CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 18 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Parameters/address space 4.1 4 Parameter assignment Introduction You configure and assign the parameters of the communication module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal V12 or later) or with STEP 7 with integration of a GSD file. Additional information The device manual of the communication module is supplemented by the function manual CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093) and the TIA Portal information system. There you will find information on the following topics: Operating modes Receive buffer Data flow control Transmission integrity Data transmission - protocol specific Programming/configuring in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Module-specific instructions Diagnostics 4.2 Reaction to CPU STOP Ongoing transmissions are aborted when the higher-level control (CPU) goes to STOP. Frames in the receive buffer are retained. With a corresponding configuration in the properties dialog of the communication module, you can automatically clear the receive buffer on the communication module during CPU startup. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 19 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space Address space of the communication module The input addresses of the communications module total 8 bytes. The input addresses are automatically assigned for each communications module when you specify the device configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Output addresses are not required. Hardware identification (not freely configurable) The hardware identification (HW ID) is automatically assigned for each communications module when you specify the device configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The hardware ID is issued along with the diagnostic messages to localize the module. In addition, the HW identification is required for S7-1500 at the communication instructions in order to identify the communication module. For S7-300/400, the communication module is identified by the start address of the input data. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 20 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 5 Programming Overview of the instructions Communication between the CPU, the communication module and a communication partner takes place by means of special instructions and protocols that support the corresponding communication modules. The instructions process the exchange of data between the CPU and the communication module. They must be called cyclically from the user program. Data transmission takes place asynchronously across several cycles. The transmission protocols are implemented on the communication module. The protocol is used to adapt the interface of the communication module to the interface of the communication partner. Instruction Meaning Port_Config You use the Port_Config instruction to dynamically assign basic interface parameters. Send_Config You use the Send_Config (send configuration) instruction to dynamically assign serial send parameters of a protocol. Receive_Config You use the Receive_Config (receive configuration) instruction to dynamically assign serial receive parameters of a protocol. P3964_Config You use the P3964_Config (protocol configuration) instruction to dynamically assign the parameters of the 3964(R) procedure. Send_P2P You use the Send_P2P instruction to send data to a communication partner. Receive_P2P You use the Receive_P2P instruction to receive data from a communication partner. Receive_Reset You use the Receive_Reset instruction to delete the receive buffer of the communication module. Signal_Get You use the Signal_Get instruction to read the RS232 accompanying signals. Signal_Set You use the Signal_Set instruction to set the RS232 accompanying signals. Get_Features You use the Get_Features instruction to read expanded functions supported by the communication module. Set_Features You use the Set_Features instruction to set expanded functions supported by the communication module. USS_Port_Scan You use the USS_Port_Scan instruction to communicate using the USS. USS_Drive_Control You use the USS_Drive_Control instruction to exchange data with a drive. USS_Read_Param You use the USS_Read_Param instruction to read parameters from the drive. USS_Write_Param You use the USS_Write_Param instruction to change parameters in the drive. Modbus_Comm_Load The instruction Modbus_Comm_Load allows you to configure the port of the communication module for Modbus RTU. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 21 Programming Instruction Meaning Modbus_Master The instruction Modbus_Master allows you to communicate as Modbus master by means of the PtP port. Modbus_Slave The instruction Modbus_Slave allows you to communicate as Modbus slave by means of the PtP port. The instructions are part of STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The instructions are available in the "Instructions" task card under Communication > Communication processor. Additional information Additional information on programming the communication modules can be found in the function manual CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093). CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 22 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Error and system messages 6 LED displays of the communication module The figure below shows the LED displays of the CM PtP communication module. &03W3 ',$* 7; 5; 3:5 LED display DIAG LED display TX LED display RX LED display PWR Figure 6-1 View of CM PtP (without BaseUnit) CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 23 Error and system messages Meaning of DIAG LED display LED Meaning Solution DIAG CM configured and ready for operation --- CM in startup, parameters not assigned yet --- Error information; diagnostic interrupt (break) Evaluate the diagnostics data and eliminate the error. 1) On Flashes Flashes 1) Information on communication module startup and diagnostics is available in the CM PtP Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093) function manual Meaning of the TXD/RXD LED displays LED TX Flashes Off Meaning Solution RX Interface is transmitting --- Interface is receiving --- Off Flashes Meaning of PWR LED display LED Meaning Solution PWR Power ON (supply voltage present) --- Power OFF (supply voltage missing) Check the voltage supply of the load group On Off Additional information Information on communication module startup and diagnostics is available in the CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093) function manual. CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 24 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the CM PtP communication module Product type designation 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 ET 200SP CM PtP General information * I&M data Yes: I&M 0 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V12.0 / V12.0 STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP2 or higher with a GSD file PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision -/- PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 Installation type/mounting * Rail mounting possible Yes; standard - DIN rail Supply voltage Voltage type of supply voltage 24 V DC * Rated value (DC) 24 V * Low limit of valid range (DC) 19.2 V * High limit of valid range (DC) 28.8 V * Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current * Current consumption (rated value) 29 mA Power loss * Power loss, typ. 0.7 W Address area Occupied address area * Inputs 8 bytes CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 25 Technical specifications 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 Interfaces 1. Interface Interface hardware * RS 232 Yes * RS 422 Yes * RS 485 Yes Interface hardware RS 232 * Transmission rate, max. 115.2 kbps * Max. cable length 15 m RS-232 accompanying signals RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, RI, DCD RS 485 * Transmission rate, max. 115.2 kbps * Max. cable length 1200 m RS 422 * Transmission rate, max. 115.2 kbps * Max. cable length 1200 m * 4-wire full duplex connection Yes * 4-wire multipoint connection Yes Protocols Integrated protocols Freeport * Frame length, max. 2 kbyte * Bits per character 7 or 8 * Number of stop bits 1 or 2 bits * Parity None, even, odd, always 1, always 0, any 3964 (R) * Frame length, max. 2 kbyte * Bits per character 7 or 8 * Number of stop bits 1 or 2 bits * Parity None, even, odd, always 1, always 0, any Modbus RTU master Address area * Max. number of slaves 1 to 247, extended 1 to 65,535 32 CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 26 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 Technical specifications 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 Modbus RTU slave Address area 1 to 247, extended 1 to 65,535 Frame buffer * Buffer memory for frames 4 kbyte * Number of frames which can be buffered 255 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts * Diagnostic interrupt Yes * Hardware interrupt No Diagnostic messages Diagnostics * Wire break Yes Yes Diagnostics display LED * Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR-LED * For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG-LED * Receive RxD Yes; green LED * Send TxD Yes; green LED Electrical isolation * between backplane bus and interface Yes Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (Basic insulation) Insulation Insulation tested with 707 V DC (Type Test) Ambient conditions Operating temperature * Horizontal installation, min. 0 C * Horizontal installation, max. 60 C * Vertical installation, min. 0 C * Vertical installation, max. 50 C Distributed operation * At SIMATIC S7-300 Yes * At SIMATIC S7-400 Yes * At SIMATIC S7-1200 No * At SIMATIC S7-1500 Yes * At Standard Profinet Controller Yes CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 27 Technical specifications 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 Dimensions * Width 15 mm * Height 73 mm * Depth 58 mm Weights * Weight, approx. 30 g Additional general technical specifications for SIMATIC ET 200SP can be found in the system manual S7-1500 Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) 28 Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 A Dimensional drawing In this appendix, you will find the dimensional drawing of the communication module, inserted into a BaseUnit and mounted on a DIN rail. You have to consider the dimensions during installation in control cabinets, control rooms, etc (BaseUnit: 6ES7193-6BP00-0xA0). Figure A-1 Dimensional drawing of the CM PtP communication module CM PtP communication module (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) Manual, 01/2013, A5E03790792-01 29 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Application and functions SIMATIC NET ET 200SP - Industrial Ethernet CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions 2 ___________________ LEDs and connectors Installation, wiring, 3 ___________________ commissioning 4 ___________________ Configuration 5 ___________________ Program blocks Diagnostics and 6 ___________________ maintenance 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Approvals B Dimension drawings ___________________ C Accessories ___________________ D Documentation references ___________________ CP 1542SP-1 CP 1542SP-1 IRC CP 1543SP-1 02/2018 C79000-G8976-C426-04 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY C79000-G8976-C426-04 02/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2016 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Validity of this manual This document contains information on the following modules: CP 1542SP-1 Article number 6GK7542-6UX00-0XE0 Hardware version 1 Firmware version V2.0 Communications processor for connecting a SIMATIC ET 200SP CPU to Industrial Ethernet CP 1542SP-1 IRC Article number 6GK7542-6VX00-0XE0 Hardware version 1 Firmware version V2.0 Communications processor for connecting a SIMATIC ET 200SP CPU via Industrial Ethernet to a control room (TCSB, ST7, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-104) CP 1543SP-1 Article number 6GK7543-6WX00-0XE0 Hardware version 1 Firmware version V2.0 Communications processor for connecting a SIMATIC ET 200SP CPU to Industrial Ethernet, Security Figure 1 CP 1542SP-1 with plugged in BusAdapter (here BA 2xRJ45) On the front of the module at the right edge, the hardware version is printed as a placeholder "X". If the printed text is, for example, "X 2 3 4", "X" would be the placeholder for hardware product version 1. Directly below, you will find the firmware version of the CP as it shipped. The MAC address is printed on the front at the bottom left, above the connectors for the power supply: 00:1B:1B:xx:xx:01 (interface) CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 3 Preface 00:1B:1B:xx:xx:02 (port X1P1) 00:1B:1B:xx:xx:03 (port X1P2) Product names, terms and abbreviations/acronyms Below you will find abbreviations and product names used often in this manual. CP / module / device When the property being described is valid in the current context for all three CP types or if the CP type being used is clear from the context, these terms will be used instead of the full product name. If information in the running text applies only to a certain CP type. the full module name is specified. TCSB Control center software "TeleControl Server Basic" Telecontrol server PC with installed software "TeleControl Server Basic" ES Engineering station - PC with the STEP 7 project Purpose of the manual This manual describes the properties of this module and supports you when installing and commissioning it. The required configuration steps are described as an overview and there are explanations of the relationship between firmware functions and configuration. You will also find information about the diagnostics options of the device. Required experience To install, commission and operate the CP, you require experience in the following areas: Automation engineering Setting up the SIMATIC ET 200SP SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional New in this issue New firmware version with the following new functions, among others: New functions for the CP 1542SP-1 IRC: - SINAUT ST7 telecontrol protocol - Remote maintenance via SINEMA Remote Connect - Extended CP diagnostics CP 154xSP-1 4 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Preface New functions for the CP 1543SP-1: - Remote maintenance via SINEMA Remote Connect - Configurable e-mails - Extended CP diagnostics Editorial revision Replaced edition Edition 01/2017 Current manual release on the Internet You will also find the current version of this manual on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support under at the following addresses: CP 1542SP-1 / CP 1543SP-1 Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22144/man) CP 1542SP-1 IRC Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22143/man) Cross references In this manual there are often cross references to other sections. To be able to return to the initial page after jumping to a cross reference, some PDF readers support the command +. Sources of information and other documentation You will find an overview of further reading and references in the Appendix of this manual. License conditions Note Open source software Read the license conditions for open source software carefully before using the product. You will find license conditions in the following document on the supplied data medium: OSS_CP-ET200SP_99.pdf Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 5 Preface necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit Link: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under Link: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Firmware The firmware is signed and encrypted. This ensures that only firmware created by Siemens can be downloaded to the device. Recycling and disposal The product is low in pollutants, can be recycled and meets the requirements of the WEEE directive 2012/19/EU "Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment". Do not dispose of the product at public disposal sites. For environmentally friendly recycling and the disposal of your old device contact a certified disposal company for electronic scrap or your Siemens contact. Keep to the local regulations. You will find information on returning the product on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479891) SIMATIC NET glossary Explanations of many of the specialist terms used in this documentation can be found in the SIMATIC NET glossary. You will find the SIMATIC NET glossary here: SIMATIC NET Manual Collection or product DVD The DVD ships with certain SIMATIC NET products. On the Internet under the following address: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/50305045) Training, Service & Support You will find information on training, service and support in the multilanguage document "DC_support_99.pdf" on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/38652101) CP 154xSP-1 6 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 2 3 4 Application and functions ...................................................................................................................... 11 1.1 Components of the product ....................................................................................................11 1.2 Application ..............................................................................................................................11 1.3 Communications services .......................................................................................................12 1.4 Other services and properties .................................................................................................13 1.5 Telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC ............................................................14 1.6 Security functions (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1)...........................................................16 1.7 Connection to SINEMA RC .....................................................................................................19 1.8 Configuration limits and performance data .............................................................................21 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 Requirements for use..............................................................................................................23 Hardware requirements ..........................................................................................................23 Software requirements ............................................................................................................24 1.10 Configuration examples ..........................................................................................................25 LEDs and connectors ............................................................................................................................ 33 2.1 LEDs .......................................................................................................................................33 2.2 Power supply ..........................................................................................................................34 2.3 Connector for the BusAdapter ................................................................................................35 Installation, wiring, commissioning ........................................................................................................ 37 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 Important notes on using the device .......................................................................................37 Notes on use in hazardous areas ...........................................................................................37 Notes on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX / IECEx ..............................................38 Notes on use in hazardous areas according to UL HazLoc ...................................................39 General notices on use in hazardous areas according to FM ................................................39 3.2 Installing the CP ......................................................................................................................40 3.3 Connecting the CP ..................................................................................................................44 3.4 Commissioning the CP ...........................................................................................................44 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 47 4.1 Security recommendations .....................................................................................................47 4.2 Configuration in STEP 7 .........................................................................................................51 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 Ethernet interface....................................................................................................................52 IPv6 .........................................................................................................................................52 Advanced options ...................................................................................................................52 4.4 DNS configuration ...................................................................................................................53 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 7 Table of contents 4.5 Time-of-day synchronization .................................................................................................. 53 4.6 SNMP ..................................................................................................................................... 55 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.7 4.7.7.1 4.7.7.2 4.7.7.3 4.7.8 4.7.8.1 4.7.8.2 4.7.9 4.7.10 4.7.11 4.7.12 4.7.12.1 4.7.12.2 4.7.12.3 4.7.12.4 4.7.12.5 4.7.12.6 4.7.12.7 4.7.12.8 4.7.12.9 4.7.12.10 4.7.12.11 4.7.12.12 4.7.12.13 4.7.12.14 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC)............................................................................................. 56 Address and authentication information ................................................................................ 56 Communication types ............................................................................................................ 57 SINAUT ST7 PG routing ........................................................................................................ 59 Telecontrol via SINEMA RC................................................................................................... 60 Ethernet interface > CP identification .................................................................................... 61 Ethernet interface (X1) > Advanced options .......................................................................... 61 Partner stations ...................................................................................................................... 65 Partner configuration .............................................................................................................. 65 Addressing of single and redundant communications partners ............................................. 69 Partner for inter-station communication ................................................................................. 69 Communication with the CPU ................................................................................................ 70 Communication with the CPU ................................................................................................ 70 CP diagnostics ....................................................................................................................... 72 Subscriber numbers ............................................................................................................... 73 Security (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) ................................................................................................. 73 Creating telecontrol connections for the ST7 communication ............................................... 73 Data points ............................................................................................................................. 79 Data point configuration ......................................................................................................... 79 Datapoint types ...................................................................................................................... 86 Time stamp of the "ST7" protocol .......................................................................................... 92 Status IDs of the data points .................................................................................................. 93 "General" tab .......................................................................................................................... 95 Configuration of the data point index ..................................................................................... 96 Process image, type of transmission, event classes ............................................................. 97 Read cycle ........................................................................................................................... 100 ST7 objects .......................................................................................................................... 101 "Trigger" tab ......................................................................................................................... 102 Threshold value trigger ........................................................................................................ 103 Analog value preprocessing................................................................................................. 105 Command output.................................................................................................................. 111 Partner stations .................................................................................................................... 116 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.2.1 4.8.2.2 4.8.2.3 4.8.3 4.8.3.1 4.8.3.2 Security ................................................................................................................................ 117 Security user ........................................................................................................................ 117 Security parameters of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC .................................................................... 118 CP identification ................................................................................................................... 118 MSC authentication .............................................................................................................. 118 DNP3 security options ......................................................................................................... 119 Firewall ................................................................................................................................. 121 Pre-check of messages by the MAC firewall. ...................................................................... 121 Settings for online security diagnostics and downloading to station with the firewall activated ............................................................................................................................... 121 Notation for the source IP address (advanced firewall mode) ............................................. 122 Firewall settings for S7 connections via a VPN tunnel ........................................................ 122 Log settings - Filtering of the system events ....................................................................... 122 E-mail configuration ............................................................................................................. 123 VPN ...................................................................................................................................... 123 VPN (Virtual Private Network).............................................................................................. 123 Creating a VPN tunnel for S7 communication between stations ......................................... 125 4.8.3.3 4.8.3.4 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.6.1 4.8.6.2 CP 154xSP-1 8 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Table of contents 5 6 4.8.6.3 4.8.6.4 4.8.6.5 4.8.6.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 VPN communication with SOFTNET Security Client (engineering station) ..........................126 Establishment of VPN tunnel communication between the CP and SCALANCE M ............127 CP as passive subscriber of VPN connections ....................................................................127 SINEMA Remote Connect ....................................................................................................128 SNMP ....................................................................................................................................130 Certificate manager ...............................................................................................................132 4.9 Messages (e-mail) ................................................................................................................133 Program blocks ................................................................................................................................... 137 5.1 Program blocks for OUC .......................................................................................................137 5.2 Changing the IP parameters during runtime .........................................................................139 5.3 MODBUS blocks ...................................................................................................................140 Diagnostics and maintenance ............................................................................................................. 141 6.1 Diagnostics options ...............................................................................................................141 6.2 Online security diagnostics via port 8448 (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) ....................144 6.3 Diagnostics with SNMP.........................................................................................................144 6.4 Web server of the CPU .........................................................................................................147 6.5 Processing status of the telecontrol e-mails .........................................................................149 6.6 Downloading firmware ..........................................................................................................151 6.7 Module replacement .............................................................................................................153 7 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 155 A Approvals............................................................................................................................................ 157 B Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 161 C Accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 163 D C.1 BusAdapter ...........................................................................................................................163 C.2 Router SCALANCE M ...........................................................................................................165 Documentation references .................................................................................................................. 167 Index................................................................................................................................................... 171 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 9 Table of contents CP 154xSP-1 10 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.1 1 Components of the product The following components are supplied with the product: CP 154xSP-1 Plug for the socket of the power supply (24VDC) of the CP DVD with documentation and license texts A BusAdapter for the Ethernet connection of the CP does not ship with the product. 1.2 Application Application of the CP variants The CP is used to connect the ET 200SP to Industrial Ethernet via a copper cable or fiberoptic cable. It can be used as an additional Ethernet interface of the CPU for S7 communication. For the Ethernet connection, the CP requires a BusAdapter. The BusAdapter is not supplied with the CP. For information on the compatible BusAdapters, refer to the section BusAdapter (Page 163). The three CP types are intended for the following communication tasks: CP 1542SP-1 The CP 1542SP-1 allows the ET 200SP a further Ethernet connection. CP 1543SP-1 The CP 1543SP-1 has Security functions for network security, such as a firewall and VPN. This makes protected access to the ET 200SP possible. CP 1542SP-1 IRC The CP 1542SP-1 IRC supports telecontrol communication for connecting the ET 200SP CPU to a control center. One of the following telecontrol protocols can be used as an alternative: - TeleControl Basic For connection of the ET 200SP CPU to a control center with telecontrol server (TCSB) - ST7 For connection of the ET 200SP CPU to a control center with SINAUT ST7 - DNP3 For connection of the ET 200SP CPU to DNP3 master - IEC 60870-5-104 For connection of the ET 200SP CPU to IEC master CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 11 Application and functions 1.3 Communications services 1.3 Communications services Communications services The following communications services are supported: S7 communication and PG/OP communication with the following functions: - PUT/GET as client and server for data exchange with S7 stations - USEND/URCV for uncoordinated data exchange with a remote partner - BSEND/BRCV for exchanging large volumes of data with a partner - PG functions - Operator control and monitoring functions (HMI) For S7 communication, the CP requires a fixed IP address. S7 routing - Routing of S7 connections via the backplane bus and the CPU to other S7 stations SINEMA Remote Connect (SINEMA RC) As of firmware version V2.0, the following CP types support SINEMA RC with software version V1.3: - CP 1542SP-1 IRC - CP 1543SP-1 See section Connection to SINEMA RC (Page 19). For the manual, see /9/ (Page 169). Open User Communication (OUC) OUC via program blocks with the following protocols: - TCP/IP - ISO-on-TCP - UDP The CP 1543SP-1 supports Secure OUC. You will find the program blocks supported by the three CP types in the section Program blocks (Page 137). E-mail using program blocks HTTP / HTTPS Via HTTP / HTTPS you can access the Web server of the CPU. For telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC, see section Telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC (Page 14). For information on the Security functions of the CP 1543SP-1, refer to the section Security functions (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) (Page 16). CP 154xSP-1 12 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.4 Other services and properties 1.4 Other services and properties Further services and properties of the CP IP configuration - Address types The CP supports IP addresses according to IPv4 and IPv6. - Addressing The IP address, the subnet mask and the address of a gateway can be set manually in the configuration. As an alternative, the IP address can be obtained using program blocks. - DHCP: As an alternative, the IP address can be obtained from a DHCP server. - DCP (Discovery and Configuration Protocol) is supported. Time-of-day synchronization - NTP The CP can synchronize its time of day via NTP. Only CP 1543SP-1: If the Security functions are enabled, the secure method NTP (secure) can be used. - Time from partner (only CP 1542SP-1 IRC) If telecontrol communication is enabled, the CP can also obtain its time of day via from the communications partner. UTC time is used for TeleControl Basic and DNP3. The local time of the partner PC is used for ST7 and IEC. The time of day of the CP can be read by the CPU using a PLC tag. For information on the format of the time stamp of the data frames, refer to the section Datapoint types (Page 86). For more detailed information, refer to section Time-of-day synchronization (Page 53). SNMP As SNMP agent, the CP supports queries via SNMPv1. The CP 1543SP-1 also supports SNMPv3. For more detailed information, refer to section SNMP (Page 55). E-mail The CP 1542SP-1 IRC and CP 1543SP-1 support sending e-mails. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 13 Application and functions 1.5 Telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC 1.5 Telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC Telecontrol protocols In addition to the communications services named above, the CP 1542SP-1 IRC supports the following telecontrol protocols for communication with a master station: TeleControl Basic * Proprietary protocol for telecontrol applications. The IP-based protocol is used to connect the CP to the application TCSB. TCSB is installed on a PC in the master station, the telecontrol server. Via the OPC-DA or OPC-UA server of TCSB, an OPC client can access the process data of the CP. TCSb is supported as of the following version: V3.0 + SP3 For the TCSB manual, see /4/ (Page 168). ST7 Proprietary protocol for telecontrol applications in the SINAUT ST7 system. The protocol is used to connect the CP to ST7 control centers. The SINAUT ST7 supports the following functions, among others: - Communication with the master station - Communication with other stations - MSC transmission protocol Under SINAUT S7, the CP uses the following variants of the MSC transmission protocol on OSI layer 3: - MSC (default setting) - MSCsec when security requirements are higher ("Security" activated) - Communication using mobile wireless Communication via a mobile wireless network combined with the Internet is made possible by a SCALANCE M router. The SCALANCE M product series provides various VPN routers with IPsec, encryption software and their own firewall. You will find a list of routers in the appendix Router SCALANCE M (Page 165). CP 154xSP-1 14 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.5 Telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC DNP3 * The CP functions as a DNP3 station (Outstation). Communication is based on the DNP3 SPECIFICATION Version 2.11 (2007/2009). You will find a detailed overview of the attributes and properties of the DNP3 protocol that are supported by the CP in the DNP3 device profile; see Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22143/man) You will find the supported object groups and variations in the section Datapoint types (Page 86). Communications partner (DNP3) can be: - SIMATIC PCS 7 TeleControl - SIMATIC WinCC TeleControl - SIMATIC WinCC OA - A TIM module with DNP3 capability (TIM 3V IE DNP3 / TIM 4R IE DNP3) For the manual of the TIM module see /6/ (Page 168). - Third-party systems that support the DNP3 specification named above. IEC 60870-5-104 * The CP functions as a substation (slave). Communication is based on the specification IEC 60870-5 Part 104 (2006). You will find a detailed overview of the attributes and properties of the IEC specification that are supported by the CP in the IEC device profile; see Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22143/man) You will find the supported IEC type identifiers as in the section Datapoint types (Page 86). Communications partner (IEC master) can be: - SIMATIC PCS 7 TeleControl - SIMATIC WinCC TeleControl - SIMATIC WinCC OA - Third-party systems that support the IEC specification named above. * Optional telecontrol via SINEMA Remote Connect; see section Connection to SINEMA RC (Page 19). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 15 Application and functions 1.6 Security functions (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) Further properties of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC Data point configuration The process values are configured as data points for the communication. No program blocks need to be programmed for the CP 1542SP-1 IRC to transfer user data between the station and communications partner. The data areas in the memory of the CPU intended for communication with the partner are configured for the specific data points in the CP. Each data point addresses a PLC tag or element in a data block of the CPU. The data points can be processed individually in the control system. Messages / e-mail With configurable events in the process image of the CPU, the CP 1542SP-1 IRC can send messages as e-mails. The data sent by e-mail is configured using PLC tags. Send buffer CP 1542SP-1 IRC saves the values of data points configured as an event in the send buffer. It transmits the data from the send buffer spontaneously or bundled to the communications partner. The data is not saved retentively. It is lost in the event of a power failure. Analog value processing Analog values can be preprocessed on the CP 1542SP-1 IRC according to various methods. 1.6 Security functions (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) Security functions are available for the following CP types: CP 1543SP-1 CP 1542SP-1 IRC The security functions are enabled in the configuration of the CP. For information on the security functions of Open User Communication, refer to the section Program blocks (Page 137). Note Recommendation for critical security plants Refer to the information in the section Security recommendations (Page 47). CP 154xSP-1 16 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.6 Security functions (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) CP 1543SP-1 With Industrial Ethernet Security, individual devices, automation cells or network segments of an Ethernet network can be protected. The data transfer via the CP 1543SP-1 can be protected from the following attacks by a combination of different security measures: Data espionage Data manipulation Unauthorized access Secure underlying networks can be operated via additional Ethernet/PROFINET interfaces of the CPU. As a result of using the CP, as a security module, the following security functions are accessible to the ET 200SP station on the interface to the Ethernet network: Firewall The firewall protects the device with: - IP firewall with stateful packet inspection (layer 3 and 4) - Firewall also for "non-IP" Ethernet frames according to IEEE 802.3 (layer 2) - Limitation of the transmission speed to restrict flooding and DoS attacks ("Define IP packet filter rules") Certificates Certificates are used for the secure authentication of the communications partners. VPN The following alternatives can be used: - Secured communication via IPsec tunnels VPN communication allows the establishment of secure IPsec tunnels for communication with one or more security modules. The CP can be grouped together with other modules to form VPN groups during configuration. IPsec tunnels are created between all security modules of a VPN group. - Remote maintenance via SINEMA Remote Connect It is not necessary and not possible to create a VPN group for communication via a SINEMA RC server. The SINEMA RC Server manages the communication between the devices and the security mechanisms (OpenVPN). For information on communication via SINEMA Remote Connect, see section Telecontrol via SINEMA RC (Page 60). Logging Sending of events can be enabled for monitoring. The events can be read out using STEP 7 or sent to a Syslog server. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 17 Application and functions 1.6 Security functions (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) Encrypted e-mails For secure transfer of information with encrypted e-mails, you can use the following as an alternative: - SSL/TLS - STARTTLS For information on the configuration, see section E-mail configuration (Page 123). NTP (secure) For secure transfer during time-of-day synchronization SNMPv3 For secure transmission of network analysis information safe from eavesdropping For information on configuring the security functions, refer to the section Security (Page 117). You will find further information on the functionality and configuration of the security functions in the information system of STEP 7 and in the manual /5/ (Page 168). CP 1542SP-1 IRC The CP supports the following security functions: Encrypted e-mails For secure transfer of information with encrypted e-mails, you can use the following as an alternative: - SSL/TLS - STARTTLS For information on the configuration, see section E-mail configuration (Page 123). Certificates Certificates are used for the secure authentication of the communications partners. Secure telecontrol communication The telecontrol protocols provide the following Security functions: TeleControl Basic As an integrated security function, the telecontrol protocol encrypts the data for transfer between the CP and telecontrol server. The interval for the key exchange between the CP and telecontrol server can be set. The telecontrol password is used to authenticate the CP on the telecontrol server. If the security functions are enabled, the CP can process telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect. CP 154xSP-1 18 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.7 Connection to SINEMA RC SINAUT ST7 The transmission protocols that can be used by the CP for telecontrol communication via the ST7 protocol support the following security functions: - MSC The MSC protocol supports authentication of the communications partners and simple encryption of data. A user name and a password are included in the encryption. A tunnel is established between the MSC station and MSC master station. - MSCsec In addition to MSC, with MSCsec, the shared automatically generated key is renewed between the communications partners at configurable intervals. DNP3 The CP supports authentication according to the "Secure Authentication V5" specification. If the security functions are enabled, the CP can process telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect. IEC 60870-5-104 If the security functions are enabled, the CP can process telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect. For information on communication via SINEMA Remote Connect, see section Connection to SINEMA RC (Page 19). 1.7 Connection to SINEMA RC Communication via SINEMA Remote Connect is supported by: CP 1543SP-1 CP 1542SP-1 IRC Communication via SINEMA Remote Connect (SINEMA RC) The "SINEMA RC Server" application provides end-to-end connection management of distributed networks via the Internet. This also includes secure remote access to lower-level stations. Communication between SINEMA RC Server and the remote devices takes place via a VPN tunnel with consideration of the stored access rights. SINEMA RC uses OpenVPN for encryption of the data. The center of the communication is SINEMA RC Server via which communication runs between the subscribers and that manages the configuration of the communications system. SCALANCE M routers, which you can use for the connection, also support OpenVPN and connection to SINEMA Remote Connect. For the CP firmware version required for communication via SINEMA RC see section Communications services (Page 12). The CP can also handle telecontrol communication via the SINEMA RC server. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 19 Application and functions 1.7 Connection to SINEMA RC Parameter groups You configure communication via SINEMA RC and telecontrol communication via SINEMA RC in two parameter groups: Communication via SINEMA RC: > "Security > VPN" Telecontrol communication via SINEMA RC: > "Communication types" For information on the supported protocols and configuration, see section Telecontrol via SINEMA RC (Page 60). Applications The following application options of the CP result from the combination of the parameters for telecontrol communication and SINEMA RC: (1) No telecontrol and no SINEMA RC (CP for network separation only) (2) CP only for remote maintenance via SINEMA RC (3) CP for telecontrol communication only (4) CP uses telecontrol communication, but SINEMA RC only for remote maintenance. (5) CP uses SINEMA RC for telecontrol communication and remote maintenance. The table provides an overview of the applications with the respective parameter settings. "On" means that the parameter is activated. "Off" means that the parameter is deactivated. Table 1- 1 Use cases and parameters to be activated Use case Parameter settings (Parameters abbreviated) * SRC TC TC-SRC (1) Off Off Off (2) On Off Off (3) Off On Off (4) On On Off (5) On On On * Explanation of the parameter abbreviations: SRC - Security > VPN (activated) > "VPN connection type": "Automatic OpenVPN configuration via SINEMA Remote Connect Server" TC - Communication types > Telecontrol communication enabled TC-SRC - Communication types > "Activate telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect" CP 154xSP-1 20 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.8 Configuration limits and performance data 1.8 Configuration limits and performance data Number of CPs per station In each ET 200SP station, up to three special modules can be plugged in and configured; this allows a maximum of two CP 154xSP-1 modules. For details of the permitted special modules and the slot rules, refer to section Installing the CP (Page 40). Connection resources Connection resources - valid for all CP variants Number of connections via Industrial Ethernet, maximum of 32 in total, of which: S7: Max. 16 TCP/IP: Max. 32 ISO-on-TCP: Max. 32 UDP: Max. 32 Also: Online connections of the engineering station (STEP 7): Max. 2 TCP connections for HTTP For HTTP access upp to 12 TCP connection resources are available that are used by one or more Web browsers to display data of the CP. PG/OP connections (HMI): In total maximum of 16, of which: - Connection resources for PG connections: Max. 16 - Connection resources for OP connections: Max. 16 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 21 Application and functions 1.8 Configuration limits and performance data CP 1543SP-1 Security functions of the CP 1543SP-1 VPN tunnel (IPsec) A maximum of four IPsec tunnels can be established for secure communication with other security modules. Firewall rules The maximum number of firewall rules in advanced firewall mode is limited to 256. The firewall rules are divided up as follows: - Maximum 226 rules with individual addresses - Maximum 30 rules with address ranges or network addresses (e.g. 140.90.120.1 - 140.90.120.20 or 140.90.120.0/16) - Maximum 128 rules with limitation of the transmission speed ("Bandwidth limitation") E-mail (via message editor) Up to 10 e-mails to be sent can be configured. Maximum number of characters that can be transferred per e-mail: 256 ASCII characters including any value sent at the same time CP 1542SP-1 IRC Telecontrol functions of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC Telecontrol connections - TeleControl Basic A connection can be established to a single or redundant telecontrol server. - SINAUT ST7 The CP can establish up to eight ST7 connections, of which maximum: - 8 individual connections with partners - 4 redundant connections with partners - 8 connections for inter-station communication between ST7 stations - A combination of the three options - DNP3 / IEC 60870-5-104 Connections to up to four single or redundant masters can be established. E-mail (via message editor) Up to 10 e-mails to be sent can be configured. Maximum number of characters that can be transferred per e-mail: 256 ASCII characters including any value sent at the same time CP 154xSP-1 22 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.9 Requirements for use Frame memory (send buffer) The CP has a frame memory (send buffer) for the values of data points configured as an event. The volume of the send buffer is divided equally among all configured communications partners. The size of the send buffer can be configured in STEP 7, refer to the section Communication with the CPU (Page 70). The maximum size of the send buffer with the respective remote control protocol is: - TeleControl Basic 64000 events - SINAUT ST7 32000 events - DNP3 100000 events - IEC 60870-5-104 100000 events You will find details of how the send buffer works such as storing events as well as the options for transferring the data in the section Process image, type of transmission, event classes (Page 97). Data points The data to be transferred by the CP is assigned to various data points in the STEP 7 configuration. The size of the user data per data point depends on the data type of the relevant data point. You will find details in the section Data point configuration (Page 79). The maximum number of configurable data points is 500. 1.9 Requirements for use 1.9.1 Hardware requirements Bus adapter To connect to the Ethernet network, the CP requires a BusAdapter. A BusAdapter does not ship with the CP. The CP supports the following BusAdapter: BA 2xRJ45 BA 2xFC BA 2xSCRJ BA SCRJ/RJ45 BA SCRJ/FC CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 23 Application and functions 1.9 Requirements for use You can find further details on the BusAdapters in the appendix BusAdapter (Page 163) and the manual /3/ (Page 168). CPUs and other components of the ET 200SP The CP supports operation in stations that contain one of the following CPUs: CPU 1510SP-1 PN Article number: 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0 CPU 1510SP F-1 PN Article number: 6ES7510-1SJ01-0AB0 CPU 1512SP-1 PN Article number: 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 CPU 1512SP F-1 PN Article number: 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0 Further parts and modules that are also required to set up the ET 200SP station, such as rails, I/O modules or cabling are not listed here. See also /3/ (Page 168) for information on this. Components of the communications partner Components required by the communications partners of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC are not listed here. You will find references to other products (e.g. TCSB) in the list of references in the appendix of the manual. 1.9.2 Software requirements Configuration software To configure the entire functionality of the CP firmware version described in this document, the following configuration tool is required: STEP 7 Professional V15 Software for online functions To use the online functions, the following software is required: STEP 7 in the version specified above. CPU firmware To use the CP, a CPU 151xSP with a firmware version V2.0 is required. CP 154xSP-1 24 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples 1.10 Configuration examples Below you will find configuration examples for the use of the three CP types. CP 1542SP-1 - Network separation The CP is used in the ET 200SP to operate lower-level networks separately or to achieve separation from the higher-level network. The ET 200SP can be expanded flexibly with further Ethernet interfaces via the CP. The network separation allows the setting up of identical machines with the same IP address. The CP takes over the communication and relieves the CPU. Figure 1-1 Configuration example of an ET 200SP with CP 1542SP-1 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 25 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples CP 1543SP-1 - Cell protection with security functions The CP communicates encrypted with communications partners in the connected network. The firewall monitors the access to the ET 200SP and therefore protects lower-level networks. This avoids data loss, disruptions of production and damage to machines. Figure 1-2 Configuration example of an ET 200SP with CP 1543SP-1 CP 154xSP-1 26 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples CP 1542SP-1 IRC - Connection to control centers By using the CP the ET 200SP can be used as a remote terminal unit. The following protocols can be used for telecontrol communication: TeleControl Basic SINAUT ST7 IEC 60870-5-104 DNP3 Figure 1-3 Configuration example of an ET 200SP with CP 1542SP-1 IRC; protocol: TeleControl Basic CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 27 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples Figure 1-4 Configuration example of an ET 200SP with CP 1542SP-1 IRC; protocol: ST7 CP 154xSP-1 28 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples Figure 1-5 Configuration example of an ET 200SP with CP 1542SP-1 IRC; protocol: DNP3 A configuration with which the protocol IEC 60870-5-104 is used could look similar. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 29 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples Telecontrol via SINEMA Remote Connect The following figure shows a configuration in which the CP 1542SP-1 IRC communicates with the master station via a SINEMA Remote Connect Server. In this example, the CP uses the protocol IEC 60870-5-104. Figure 1-6 Configuration example of an ET 200SP with CP 1542SP-1 IRC for telecontrol communication via SINEMA RC CP 154xSP-1 30 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples Remote maintenance with SINEMA RC The following figure shows the connection of different stations with Security CP to an engineering station via SINEMA Remote Connect - Server. Figure 1-7 Connection of stations to engineering station via SINEMA RC CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 31 Application and functions 1.10 Configuration examples CP 154xSP-1 32 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 2 LEDs and connectors 2.1 LEDs Meaning of the LED displays of the CP The CP has the following light emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front: LED name Meaning PWR Power supply RN Operating mode ER Error MT Maintenance Table 2- 1 Legend for the following tables Symbol - Meaning / LED status Table 2- 2 PWR (green) ON (LED lit) OFF LED flashes Any Meaning of the LED displays of the CP RN (green) ER (red) MT (yellow) Meaning No supply voltage on the CP or supply voltage too low CP startup CP in RUN mode - Error. LED display with the following events: * Duplicate IP address * Bus adapter not plugged in or pulled * No telecontrol connection (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Error: CP defective Missing configuration data Firmware update running There is a maintenance request from the CP. Example: * End of the firmware update CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 33 LEDs and connectors 2.2 Power supply LEDs of the bus adapter Every port of a bus adapter has an LED "LKx" that informs about the connection status with Ethernet and the frame traffic of the port. Table 2- 3 Meaning of the LED displays of the bus adapters LK (green) Meaning No Ethernet connection. Possible causes: * No physical connection to the network * Port disabled in the configuration LED flashing test There is an Ethernet connection between the port and communications partner. 2.2 Power supply External power supply required The connector for the external 24 VDC power supply is located on the front of the CP. Figure 2-1 Power supply of the CP Connector X80 is intended for connection to a single or redundant power supply. The power supply is connected to the CP with the supplied plug-in terminal block. The terminal block is plugged in to the socket X80 of the CP. For information on installing and connecting up, refer to the sections Installing the CP (Page 40) and Connecting the CP (Page 44). CP 154xSP-1 34 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 LEDs and connectors 2.3 Connector for the BusAdapter Reverse polarity protection The plug-in terminal block for connector X80 is designed so that it can only be plugged in in one position. This provides constructional reverse polarity protection. The connector X80 also has electronic reverse polarity protection. You will find further data on the power supply in section Technical specifications (Page 155). 2.3 Connector for the BusAdapter Operation of the device only with BusAdapter For connecting to Ethernet the CP requires a BusAdapter. A BusAdapter does not ship with the CP. The slot is on the front of the device: Figure 2-2 Front of the CP, the slot for the bus adapter is marked gray. You will find the bus adapters supported by the CP in section BusAdapter (Page 163). For information on installing and connecting up, refer to the sections Installing the CP (Page 40) and Connecting the CP (Page 44). You will find the pinout of the Ethernet interface in section BusAdapter (Page 163). You will find further technical specifications of the bus adapter in the manual /3/ (Page 168). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 35 LEDs and connectors 2.3 Connector for the BusAdapter CP 154xSP-1 36 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.1 3 Important notes on using the device Safety notices on the use of the device Note the following safety notices when setting up and operating the device and during all associated work such as installation, connecting up or replacing the device. Overvoltage protection NOTICE Protection of the external power supply If power is supplied to the module or station over longer power cables or networks, the coupling in of strong electromagnetic pulses onto the power supply cables is possible. This can be caused, for example by lightning strikes or switching of higher loads. The connector of the external power supply is not protected from strong electromagnetic pulses. To protect it, an external overvoltage protection module is necessary. The requirements of EN61000-4-5, surge immunity tests on power supply lines, are met only when a suitable protective element is used. A suitable device is, for example, the Dehn Blitzductor BVT AVD 24, article number 918 422 or a comparable protective element. Manufacturer: DEHN+SOEHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt, Germany 3.1.1 Notes on use in hazardous areas WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not open the device when the supply voltage is turned on. WARNING The device may only be operated in an environment with pollution degree 1 or 2 (see IEC 60664-1). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 37 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.1 Important notes on using the device WARNING The equipment is designed for operation with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) by a Limited Power Source (LPS). This means that only SELV / LPS complying with IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 / VDE 0805-1 must be connected to the power supply terminals, or the power supply unit for the equipment power supply must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the National Electrical Code (r) (ANSI / NFPA 70). If the equipment is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies), both must meet these requirements. WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not connect or disconnect cables to or from the device when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is present. WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Replacing components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2 or Zone 2. WARNING When used in hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or a suitable enclosure. WARNING DIN rail In the ATEX and IECEx area of application only the Siemens DIN rail 6ES5 710-8MA11 may be used to mount the modules. 3.1.2 Notes on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX / IECEx WARNING Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure To comply with EU Directive 94/9 (ATEX95), the enclosure or cabinet must meet the requirements of at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529. CP 154xSP-1 38 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.1 Important notes on using the device WARNING Cable If the cable or conduit entry point exceeds 70 C or the branching point of conductors exceeds 80 C, special precautions must be taken. If the equipment is operated in an air ambient in excess of 50 C, only use cables with admitted maximum operating temperature of at least 80 C. WARNING Take measures to prevent transient voltage surges of more than 40% of the rated voltage. This is the case if you only operate devices with SELV (safety extra-low voltage). 3.1.3 Notes on use in hazardous areas according to UL HazLoc WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD You may only connect or disconnect cables carrying electricity when the power supply is switched off or when the device is in an area without inflammable gas concentrations. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or nonhazardous locations only. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or non-hazardous locations only. 3.1.4 General notices on use in hazardous areas according to FM WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD You may only connect or disconnect cables carrying electricity when the power supply is switched off or when the device is in an area without inflammable gas concentrations. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or nonhazardous locations only. This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or non-hazardous locations only. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 39 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.2 Installing the CP WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD The equipment is intended to be installed within an ultimate enclosure. The inner service temperature of the enclosure corresponds to the ambient temperature of the module. Use installation wiring connections with admitted maximum operating temperature of at least 30 C higher than maximum ambient temperature. 3.2 Installing the CP NOTICE Install and remove the CP only when the power is off. Switch off the power supply of the ET 200SP and the CP before you install or remove modules. Installing and removing modules with the power supply on can lead to damage to the modules and to loss of data. Note Note the installation guidelines When installing and connecting up the CP note the instructions in the manual /3/ (Page 168). NOTICE Installation location - Dependency of the temperature range The module must be installed so that its upper and lower ventilation slits are not covered, allowing adequate ventilation. Above and below the modules, there must be a clearance of 25 mm to allow air to circulate and prevent overheating. Note the dependency of the permitted temperature range on the installation location: * Horizontal installation of the rack (DIN rail) means vertical position of the CP. * Vertical installation of the rack (DIN rail) means horizontal position of the CP. You will find the permitted temperature ranges in the section Technical specifications (Page 155). Installation of the rack Installation position of the CP Horizontal installation of the rack CP 154xSP-1 40 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.2 Installing the CP Installation of the rack Installation position of the CP Vertical installation of the rack Slot rules The CPU always occupies slot 1. In an ET 200SP you can plug in up to three of the following modules in slots 2 ... 4 (see figure) to the right of the CPU: CMs CPs BusAdapter Send Of these three modules, up to two CP 154xSP-1 modules can be plugged in. These two CPs can be of the same type or different. The CM DP can only be plugged in directly next to the CPU. Slot 1 - only permitted for the CPU. Slot 2 - for CM / CP / BusAdapter Send * If you use a PROFIBUS CM, you must plug this in directly beside the CPU in slot 1. Slot 3 - for CM / CP / BusAdapter Send * Slot 4 - for CM / CP / BusAdapter Send * Slot 5 ff for IO modules * If you use a BusAdapter Send, this must be plugged in to the slot directly beside the IO modules. Figure 3-1 Slots of the ET 200SP CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 41 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.2 Installing the CP Installation on a DIN rail Note Protecting the modules from slipping on the DIN rail If you install the modules in an area with mechanical load, use suitable clamping devices at both ends of the device group to secure the modules on the DIN rail, e.g. Siemens and retainer 8WA1808. The end retainers prevent the modules separating under mechanical load. When using the device in the areas of application ATEX or IECEx, note the information on the DIN rai in section Notes on use in hazardous areas (Page 37). The ET 200SP system is suitable for installation on a mounting rail according to EN 60715 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm) 1. Hang the CPU / the interface module on the mounting rail. 2. Tilt the CPU / the interface module to the back until the mounting rail release audibly locks in place. 3. Hang the CP to the right next to the CPU. 4. Tilt the CP to the back until the mounting rail release audibly locks in place. 5. Move the CP to the left until it audibly locks in place in the CPU. 6. Mount the other base units and modules accordingly. See manual /3/ (Page 168) for information on this. Plugging in the bus adapter NOTICE Touching the plug-in contacts Do not touch the plug-in contacts when no bus adapter is plugged in. CP 154xSP-1 42 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.2 Installing the CP 1. Connect the appropriate cable to the bus adapter if you use a bus adapter with optical or direct electrical or optical connection (without plug). 2. Plug the bus adapter into the slot of the CP. Figure 3-2 Front of the CP, the slot for the bus adapter is marked gray. 3. Screw the bus adapter to the CP. The securing screw is located at the top left on the front of the bus adapter. To do this use a screwdriver with 3 to 3.5 mm blade width or a suitable Torx screwdriver (T15). The maximum tightening torque is 0.25 Nm. 4. Plug the connector of the connecting cable into the socket of the bus adapter if you use a bus adapter with plug. For information on plugging in the bus adapter and fitting cables see also the manual /3/ (Page 168). Removal from the DIN rail Follow the steps below to remove a CP from the DIN rail: 1. Turn off the power supply to the entire station including the CP and CPU. 2. Activate the mounting rail release of the modules to be moved (CPU, CPs) and move them parallel to the left until they are released from the remaining module group (free space approx. 16 mm). Press the locking slide marked "PUSH" on the top of a module down to be able to move the module in the DIN rail. 3. Activate the mounting rail release on the CP and move it to the right until it is released from the CPU (free space approx. 8 mm). 4. While holding the mounting rail release on the CP, swing the CP out of the mounting rail. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 43 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.3 Connecting the CP 3.3 Connecting the CP Order of the work NOTICE Connection only with power off Connect the CP only when the power is off. Refer to the information in the system manual, see /2/ (Page 168). The bus adapter is already connected to the relevant cable, see section Installing the CP (Page 40). 1. Connect the external power supply to the terminal block of connector X80. Use the same power supply as the CPU. 2. Turn the power supply on only after the CP has been completely wired and connected. Power supply at connector X80 You will find the location of the connector X80 four the power supply to the CP in section Power supply (Page 34). There, you will also find notes on reverse polarity protection.. The 2-terminal plug-in terminal block has the following pin assignment for the socket: Terminal Assignment 1L+ / 2L+ 24 VDC 1M / 2M Ground The two terminals 1L+/L2+ and 1M/2m of the terminal block are each bridged internally so that you can connect either a single or a redundant power supply. Connectable cable cross-section Without wire end ferrule 0.2 .. 2.5 mm2 / AWG 24 .. 13 With wire end ferrule 0.25 .. 1.5 mm2 / AWG 24 .. 16 With TWIN wire end ferrule: 0.5 .. 1.0 mm2 / AWG 20 .. 17 You will find information about the power consumption and further technical details of the connectors in section Technical specifications (Page 155). 3.4 Commissioning the CP Requirement: Configuration prior to commissioning A prerequisite for full commissioning of the module is the completeness of the STEP 7 project data. CP 154xSP-1 44 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.4 Commissioning the CP Commissioning the module The remaining steps in commissioning involve downloading the STEP 7 project data. The STEP 7 project data of the CP is transferred when you load to the station. To load the station, connect the engineering station on which the project data is located to the CPU. You will find more detailed information on loading in the following sections of the STEP 7 information system: Note Time synchronization for telecontrol via SINEMA RC When using SINEMA Remote Connect for telecontrol communication, set the CPU time manually during commissioning; see note in section Telecontrol via SINEMA RC (Page 60). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 45 Installation, wiring, commissioning 3.4 Commissioning the CP CP 154xSP-1 46 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.1 4 Security recommendations Observe the following security recommendations to prevent unauthorized access to the system. Note Security functions of the CP types Depending on the supported function, the following notes do not apply to every CP type described in this manual. General You should make regular checks to make sure that the device meets these recommendations and other internal security guidelines if applicable. Evaluate your plant as a whole in terms of security. Use a cell protection concept with suitable products. Do not connect the device directly to the Internet. Operate the device within a protected network area. Keep the firmware up to date. Check regularly for security updates of the firmware and use them. Check regularly for new features on the Siemens Internet pages. - You can find information on Industrial Security here: Link: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) - You can find information on security in industrial communication here: Link: (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-communication/en/ie/industrial-ethernetsecurity/Seiten/industrial-security.aspx) - You can find a publication on the topic of network security (6ZB5530-1AP02-0BA5) here: Link: (http://w3app.siemens.com/mcms/infocenter/content/en/Pages/order_form.aspx?node Key=key_518693&infotype=brochures) Enter the following filter: 6ZB5530 Physical access Restrict physical access to the device to qualified personnel. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 47 Configuration 4.1 Security recommendations Network attachment Do not connect the PC directly to the Internet. If a connection from the CP to the Internet is required, arrange for suitable protection before the CP, for example a SCALANCE S with firewall or use the CP 1543SP-1. Security functions of the product Use the options for security settings in the configuration of the product. These includes among others: Protection levels Configure a protection level of the CPU. You will find information on this in the information system of STEP 7. Disabling the bus adapter ports In the configuration disable a port of the bus adapter being used that is not required. Security function of the communication - Enable the security functions of the CP and set up the firewall. If you connect to public networks, you should use the firewall. Think about the services you want to allow access to the station via public networks. By limiting the "transmission speed" via IP packet filter rules in the firewall, you make use of the possibility of restricting flooding and DoS attacks. - Use the secure protocol variants NTP (secure) and SNMPv3. - Use the security functions of the telecontrol protocols, e.g. the DNP3 security options. - Use the secure Open User Communication (Secure OUC) via the appropriate program blocks. - Leave access to the Web server of the CPU (CPU configuration) and to the Web server of the CP disabled. Protection of the passwords for access to program blocks Protect the passwords stored in data blocks for the program blocks from being viewed. You will find information on the procedure in the STEP 7 information system in the topic "Know-how protection". Logging function Enable the function in the security configuration and check the logged events regularly for unauthorized access. Passwords Define rules for the use of devices and assignment of passwords. Regularly update the passwords to increase security. Only use passwords with a high password strength. Avoid weak passwords for example "password1", "123456789" or similar. CP 154xSP-1 48 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.1 Security recommendations Make sure that all passwords are protected and inaccessible to unauthorized personnel. See also the preceding section for information on this. Do not use one password for different users and systems. Protocols Secure and non-secure protocols Only activate protocols that you require to use the system. Use secure protocols when access to the device is not prevented by physical protection measures. The NTP protocol provides a secure alternative with NTP (secure). Table: Meaning of the column titles and entries The following table provides you with an overview of the open ports on this device. Protocol / function Protocols that the device supports. Port number (protocol) Port number assigned to the protocol. Default of the port - Open The port is open at the start of the configuration. - Closed The port is closed at the start of the configuration. Port status - Open The port is always open and cannot be closed. - Open after configuration The port is open if it has been configured. - Open (login, when configured) As default the port is open. After configuring the port, the communications partner needs to log in. - Closed after configuration The port is closed because the CP is always client for this service. Authentication Specifies whether or not the protocol authenticates the communications partner during access. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 49 Configuration 4.1 Security recommendations Table 4- 1 Server ports Protocol / function Port number (protocol) Default of the port Port status Authentication DHCP 68 (UDP) Closed Open after configuration (while the CP obtains a new address) No S7 and online connections 102 (TCP) Open Open after configuration * No Online diagnostics (CP 1543SP-1) 8448 (TCP) Closed Open after configuration No Communication via 8448 (TCP) SINEMA RC (CP 1542SP-1 IRC / CP 1543SP-1) Closed Open after configuration Yes DNP3 Closed Open after configuration Yes, when security is enabled. Closed Open after configuration No 20000 (TCP/UDP) can be set IEC 60870-5-104 2404 (TCP) can be set HTTP 80 (TCP) Closed Open after configuration Yes HTTPS 443 (TCP) Closed Open after configuration Yes SNMP 161 (UDP) Open Open after configuration Yes (with SNMPv3) * For information on avoiding opening the port during diagnostics, see section Online security diagnostics via port 8448 (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) (Page 144). Ports of communications partners and routers Make sure that you enable the required client ports in the corresponding firewall on the communications partners of the CP and in intermediary routers. These can be: TeleControl Basic / 55097 (TCP) - can be set ST7 with MSC protocol / 26382 (TCP) - can be set DHCP / 67, 68 (UDP) SMTP / 25 (TCP) STARTTLS / 587 (TCP) SSL/TLS / 465 (TCP) NTP / 123 (UDP) DNS / 53 (UDP) SINEMA RC Auto-configuration / 443 (TCP) - can be set SINEMA RC and OpenVPN / 1194 (UDP) - can be set in SINEMA RC CP 154xSP-1 50 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.2 Configuration in STEP 7 4.2 Configuration in STEP 7 Configuration in STEP 7 You configure the modules and networks in SIMATIC STEP 7. You will find the required version in the section Software requirements (Page 24). You can configure a maximum of two CP 154xSP-1 for an ET 200SP. You will find comprehensive information on configuration in the Information system of STEP 7 and in the following sections. Overview of configuration of the CP Follow the steps below when configuring: 1. Create a STEP 7 project. 2. Insert the required SIMATIC stations from the following catalog directory: Controller > SIMATIC ET200 CPU > ET 200SP CPU 3. Insert the CPs and the input and output modules from the following catalog directory into the stations. Distributed I/O > ET 200SP 4. Create an Ethernet network. 5. Connect the stations to the Ethernet subnet. 6. Configure the inserted CPs. When the device view of the CP is open, you can find the BusAdapters in a separate catalog directory. 7. Optional: Create the program blocks for the Open User Communication. 8. Save and compile the project. Here you will find information on individual parameter groups in the following sections. You will find information on parameters not described in this manual in the information system of STEP 7. Details on the parameters of the telecontrol communication of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC can be found in the section Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) (Page 56). Details on the parameters of the security functions can be found in the section Security (Page 117). Loading and saving the configuration data When you load the station, the project data of the station including the configuration data of the CP is stored on the CPU. You will find information on loading the station in the STEP 7 information system. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 51 Configuration 4.3 Ethernet interface 4.3 Ethernet interface Configure the generally available parameters just as for every other Ethernet interface: General data (name etc.) Addresses and possibly routers Port settings Access to the Web server See also Changing the IP parameters during runtime (Page 139) 4.3.1 IPv6 Configuring the Ethernet addresses If you configure additional IPv6 addresses ("Manual configuration" option), make sure that the two addresses belong to different subnets. Note Communication via IPv6 If you want to use IPv6 addresses and connect the CP to the Internet, make sure that the router connected to the Internet and the providers of the Internet services used (e.g. e-mail) also support IPv6 addresses. You will find information on configuration in the STEP 7 information system. 4.3.2 Advanced options Protocol-specific transmission settings of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC For information on the protocol-specific parameter groups, see section Ethernet interface (X1) > Advanced options (Page 61). BA ... (BusAdapter) Here, you configure the settings of the network connection via the BusAdapter that you configured in the device view of the CP. BusAdapter "BA 2xRJ45" is used by default. If you do not use both ports of the BusAdapter, you can disable one of the two ports. CP 154xSP-1 52 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.4 DNS configuration 4.4 DNS configuration DNS server A DNS server may be required when the module itself, a communications partner, or for example an e-mail server should be reachable via the host name (FQDN). If you specify the address of a device as FQDN, you need to configure a DNS server. In this case, the IP address of the device is determined via the configured DNS server. 4.5 Time-of-day synchronization You will find the parameter group for time-of-day synchronization in the following location: CP 1542SP-1 At the Ethernet interface CP 1543SP-1 If the security functions are enabled, under "Security" CP 1542SP-1 IRC Depending on the telecontrol protocol: - TeleControl Basic / DNP3 / IEC At the Ethernet interface - ST7 Under the parameter group "Communication with the CPU" Procedure for time-of-day synchronization Note Recommendation for setting the time With Ethernet connections, synchronization with an external clock is recommended at intervals of approximately 10 seconds. This achieves as small a deviation as possible between the internal time and the UTC time. With telecontrol functions, particularly in the case of transmission via mobile wireless networks, a larger update interval is usually pertinent. Note Consistent time-of-day synchronization via NTP / NTP (secure) Both the CPU and CP can have the time of day synchronized using NTP. If you enable time-of-day synchronization for both modules, use the same NTP server, if possible, in order to retain a consistent time of day within the station. Forwarding time of day is only supported by CP 1542SP-1 IRC. The time-of-day synchronization procedures of the respective CP types are described below. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 53 Configuration 4.5 Time-of-day synchronization CP 1542SP-1 NTP You configure the addresses of the NTP server(s), the synchronization interval and the "Accept time from non-synchronized NTP servers" option. CP 1543SP-1 Note Ensuring a valid time of day If you use security functions, a valid time of day is extremely important. It is recommended to use the NTP (secure) method. NTP See above for information on parameters. NTP (secure) The secure method NTP (secure) uses authentication with symmetrical keys according to the hash algorithms MD5 or SHA-1. In the global security settings, you can create and manage additional NTP servers also of the type NTP (secure). CP 1542SP-1 IRC The configurable procedures depend on the Telecontrol protocol used. TeleControl Basic / DNP3 / IEC NTP See above for information on parameters. Time from partner The CP sets its clock using the time of day that it receives with the data transferred by the communications partner. ST7 With the ST7 protocol, the time source can be selected: None The time of the CP is not synchronized. From NTP server See above for information on parameters. From WAN The CP obtains its time via the WAN network to which it is connected. A prerequisite for CP clock synchronization is that a suitable time-of-day master forwards the time of day to the WAN network. CP 154xSP-1 54 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.6 SNMP Forwarding time of day The CP 1542SP-1 IRC provides the CPU with the option of taking its time of day from the CP using a PLC tag. See section Communication with the CPU (Page 70) for information on this. Note No time-of-day synchronization of the CPU when the time is taken from the CP When the CPU takes the time from the CP using a PLC tag, disable the CPU's own time-ofday synchronization. Observe the special note when using telecontrol via SINEMA RC; see section Telecontrol via SINEMA RC (Page 60). 4.6 SNMP "SNMP" parameter group "Enable SNMP" parameter group Releases the function of the SNMP agent on the CP. Note If the security functions are enabled for the CP 1543SP-1 you will find the parameter group "SNMP" in "Security". Scope of performance of the CPs The CPs support the following SNMP version: CP 1542SP-1, CP 1542SP-1 IRC - SNMPv1 CP 1543SP-1 - SNMPv1 - SNMPv3 (with activated Security functions) Traps are not supported by the CP. You will find detailed information about the supported functions in the section Diagnostics with SNMP (Page 144). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 55 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Telecontrol-specific parameter groups of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC In this section, you will find only the description of the specific parameter groups of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC for telecontrol communication. You can find some parameter groups in the section Security (Page 117). Data points Configured data points are required to transfer the process data and for some options of the parameter groups "Partner stations" and "Communication with the CPU". The data areas in the memory of the CPU intended for communication with the partner are configured for the specific data points in the CP. Each data point addresses a PLC tag or element in a data block of the CPU. For more detailed information, refer to section Data points (Page 79). 4.7.1 Address and authentication information Address and authentication information of the telecontrol protocols Depending on the telecontrol protocol used, the communications partners require the following address and authentication information that needs to be configured: TeleControl Basic The telecontrol server requires: - Project number - Station number - Telecontrol password (for authentication) You will find the parameters in the parameter group "Security > CP identification". - IP address (in the "Ethernet interface" parameter group) Since the CP always establishes the connection to the telecontrol server, the IP address of the CP does not need to be configured in TCSB. CP 154xSP-1 56 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) ST7 The subscriber number is unique as addressing parameter for every ST7 subscriber in a STEP 7 project. The following subscribers require a subscriber number: - Communications module (TIM, CP) Configuration in the "Subscriber numbers" parameter group - CPU The local CPU that is assigned to the CP receives a subscriber number as the end point of an ST7 connection. Configuration in the "Subscriber numbers" parameter group - Application of the master station PC The ST7 application that you configure in the PC station of the master station. Configuration in the telecontrol connection: "Network data" editor > "Telecontrol" tab. When the MSC protocol is used, the ST7 master station requires a unique user name and a unique password from each MSC station. You will find the parameters in the parameter group "Security > MSC identification". DNP3 / IEC The master requires: - Station address (parameter group "Ethernet interface > CP identification") - IP address and port number of the CP ("Ethernet interface" parameter group) Address information required by the CP You will find information about the address information of the communications partner required by the CP in section Partner stations (Page 65). Addressing the data The process data to be transferred is configured as data points. 4.7.2 Communication types The parameter group does not exist for the CP 1542SP-1, since the communications services supported by this CP are always enabled. In this parameter group, you enable the communication types you want to use for the particular CP.. To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to the station via Ethernet, you need to enable the communications services that the CP will execute individually. You can leave all options disabled if you do not need them, for example if you only use the CP for Open User Communication. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 57 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The Open User Communication does not exist in the parameter group because these communications services are not configured but programmed using program blocks. "Communication types" parameter group Note Full telecontrol functionality only with enabled security functions For the following functions, you need to enable the security functions: * Sending e-mails using the telecontrol functions (message editor) * Use of the "TeleControl Basic" (general) protocol * Use of the DNP3 security functions (Secure Authentication) * Use of certificates * Use of remote maintenance via SINEMA Remote Connect Enable telecontrol communication Only with the CP 1542SP-1 IRC Enables telecontrol communication on the CP. The following protocols can be used as alternatives: - TeleControl Basic * Enables communication with the telecontrol server. - ST7 Enables telecontrol communication via the ST7 protocol. - DNP3 * Enables communication with up to four DNP3 masters. - IEC 60870-5-104 * Enables communication with up to four IEC masters. * For information on telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect, see section Telecontrol via SINEMA RC (Page 60). Note Loss of configuration data when changing the telecontrol protocol If you change the protocol on a configured module, protocol-specific configuration data is lost. This includes the following: * Partner configuration * Data point configuration * Configured messages (e-mails) * Configured time-of-day synchronization CP 154xSP-1 58 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Enable online functions Enables access to the CPU for the online functions via the CP (diagnostics, loading project data etc.). If the function is enabled, the engineering station can access the CPU via the CP. If the option is disabled, you have no access to the CPU via the CP with the online functions. Online diagnostics of the CPU with a direct connection to the interface of the CPU however remains possible. Enabling S7 communication Enables the functions of S7 communication with a SIMATIC S7, S7 routing and PG routing on the CP. If you configure S7 connections to the relevant station, and these run via the CP, you will need to enable this option. 4.7.3 SINAUT ST7 PG routing PG routing between telecontrol modules PG routing is supported between the modules listed in the table and via the specified media. A requirement for the CPs is that the options "S7 communication" and "Online functions" are enabled in the "Communication types" parameter group. Module TIM 1531 IRC TIM 4R-IE TIM 3V-IE / TIM 3V-IE Advanced CP 1243-8 IRC CP 1542SP-1 IRC Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (MSC) Ethernet (MSC) Ethernet (MSC) RS-232 - - Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (MSC) Ethernet (MSC) Ethernet (MSC) - RS-232 RS-232 Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (S7) Ethernet (MSC) Ethernet (MSC) Ethernet (MSC) - RS-232 RS-232 Medium (protocol) TIM 1531 IRC TIM 4R-IE TIM 3V-IE - - - - CP 1243-8 IRC Ethernet (S7) - - - - CP 1542SP-1 IRC Ethernet (S7) - - - - "RS-232" means communication via dedicated line or dialup network. See the performance data and the configuration limits for the number of supported connections. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 59 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 4.7.4 Telecontrol via SINEMA RC For information on possible applications of communication via SINEMA Remote Connect, see section Connection to SINEMA RC (Page 19). Requirements Configure the SINEMA Remote Connect - Server before configuring the CP (not in STEP 7). The CP and the communication partner of the CP must be configured in the SINEMA RC Server. Supported telecontrol protocols The following protocols support communication via SINEMA Remote Connect: TeleControl Basic DNP3 IEC 60870-5-104 Configuration of the telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect Follow the steps below when configuring the CP for use of telecontrol communication via SINEMA RC: 1. In the "Communication types" parameter group activate telecontrol communication and select the protocol. The option for communication via SINEMA RC is not yet visible. 2. Change to the "Security" parameter group and enable the security functions. (In the "Communication types" parameter group the SINEMA RC option appears disabled and grayed out) 3. Open the "Security > VPN" parameter group and enable VPN. 4. For the parameter "VPN connection type" select the option "Automatic OpenVPN configuration via SINEMA Remote Connect Server" if this is not preset. (In the "Communication types" parameter group the SINEMA RC option becomes usable.) 5. Change to the "Communication types" parameter group and enable the option "Telecontrol communication via SINEMA Remote Connect". 6. Create the remaining configuration of the SINEMA RC connection of the CP under "Security > VPN". For information on the configuration, see section SINEMA Remote Connect (Page 128). CP 154xSP-1 60 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Manual setting the time of day during commissioning Note Time synchronization for telecontrol via SINEMA RC When using SINEMA Remote Connect for telecontrol communication, the communication module needs the current time for authentication on the SINEMA RC Server. The module receives the time from the CPU or from an NTP server before the connection is established for the first time. Recommendation: During commissioning, set the time of the CPU manually at least once using the STEP 7 online functions. This is necessary especially if you have configured the "Time from partner" option for the time synchronization. In this way, you ensure that the CPU has a valid time of day when the station starts up and that the CP can exchange the required certificates with the SINEMA RC Server. 4.7.5 Ethernet interface > CP identification DNP3 / IEC Station address The master requires the station address as address information from every CP in the DNP3 or IEC network. 4.7.6 Ethernet interface (X1) > Advanced options MSC protocol settings (ST7) The parameter group is available only when using the ST7 protocol and for one MSC master station. You configure the user name and password for the authentication with the MSC protocol in the security functions. TCP connection monitoring The settings made here apply to all TCP connections of the CP. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 61 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Special feature with the protocols TeleControl Basic, DNP3 and IEC: With these three protocols, you have the option of overwriting the value configured here for individual communications partners; see below. TCP connection monitoring time If there is no data traffic within the connection monitoring time, the CP sends a keepalive to the communications partner. Permitted range: 1 ... 65535 s. Default setting: 180 The monitoring time is configured for the Ethernet interface as the default for all TCP connections. The default value can be adapted individually for each connection in "Partner stations", compare section Partner stations (Page 65). The function can only be disabled by entering 0 (zero) for the partners. TCP keepalive monitoring time After sending a keepalive, the CP expects a reply from the communications partner within the keepalive monitoring time. If the CP does not receive a reply within the configured time, it terminates the connection. Permitted range: 1 ... 65535 s. Default setting: 10 The monitoring time is configured for the Ethernet interface as the default for all TCP connections. The default value can be adapted individually for each connection in "Partner stations". The function can only be disabled by entering 0 (zero) for the partners. Transmission settings - TeleControl Basic Connection establishment delay Basic value for the wait time until the next connection establishment following an unsuccessful attempt to establish a connection. After every 3 attempts, the basic value is doubled up to a maximum of 900 s. Permitted range: 10 ... 300. Default setting: 10 Example: The basic value 20 results in the following wait times: 3 x 20 s, 3 x 40 s, 3 x 80 s etc. up to max. 3 x 900 s. Send monitoring time Time (seconds) for the arrival of the acknowledgment from the communications partner (Telecontrol server) after sending spontaneous frames. The time is started after sending an unsolicited frame. If no acknowledgement has been received from the partner when the connection monitoring time elapses, the frame is repeated up to three times. After three unsuccessful attempts, the connection is terminated and re-established. Permitted range: 1 ... 65535. Default setting: 5 Key exchange interval Here, you enter the interval in hours after which the key is exchanged again between the CP and the communications partner (TCSB V3). The key is a security function of the telecontrol protocol used by the CP and TCSB V3. Permitted range: 0 ... 65535. Default setting: 8 If you enter 0 (zero), the function is disabled. CP 154xSP-1 62 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Transmission settings - ST7 Send conditional spontaneous frames as blocks Specifies the form in which data is sent with the Transmission mode "Conditional spontaneous": - Option enabled Transfer as individual data frames - Option disabled Several data frames as block The transmission mode (Spontaneous / Conditional spontaneous) of the data to be sent is set in the "Trigger" tab of the data point. With this option, you specify whether data of events is sent immediately or following a delay. Max. allowed disruption time Tolerance time (s) for a detected connection disruption If there is still a disruption on the connection when the set time has elapsed, the disruption is signaled to all connection partners of the disrupted station. Default setting: 0. Permitted range: 0...255. If you enter 0 (zero), the function is disabled. Transmission settings - DNP3 You will find information on the permitted ranges of the functions and defaults in the tooltips of STEP 7. Disturbance bit The disturbance bit can be used as bit 1.6 (IIN1.6) of the "Internal Indication Bytes" to indicate to the master when the CPU is in STOP mode. Max. time between Select and Operate Frame repetitions Connection confirmation Connection monitoring time Transfer mode "Unsolicited" Max. number of unsolicited frames Monitoring time for unsolicited frames Buffer for class 1 / 2 / 3 events Here, for each of the three event classes you specify the number of events after which the stored events are sent to the communications partner. Permitted range: 1 ... 255. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 63 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Delay time class 1 / 2 / 3 events Here, for each of the three event classes you specify the maximum time in seconds the events can be stored in the send buffer before they are sent to the communications partner. Permitted range: 0 ... 255. If you enter 0 (zero), the function is disabled. You will find details of how the send buffer works (storing and sending events) as well as the options for transferring data in the section Process image, type of transmission, event classes (Page 97). Transmission settings - IEC Note Settings on the master When configuring the monitoring times t1 and t2 make sure that you make the corresponding settings on the master so that there are no unwanted error messages or connection aborts. You will find information on the permitted ranges of the functions and defaults in the tooltips of STEP 7. Max. time between Select and Operate Monitoring time for connection establishment (t0) Frame monitoring time (t1) Monitoring time for the acknowledgement of frames sent by the CP by the communications partner. The monitoring time applies to all frames sent by the CP in I, S and U format. If the partner does not send an acknowledgment during the monitoring time, the CP terminates the connection to the partner. Monitoring time for S and U frames (t2) Monitoring time for the acknowledgment of data frames of the master by the CP. After receiving data from the master, the CP acknowledges the received data alternatively: - If the CP sends data to the master itself within t2, it acknowledges the data frames received from the master during t2 at the same time along with the sent data frame (I format). - The CP sends an acknowledgment frame (S format) to the master at the latest when t2 elapses. The value of t2 should be less than that of t1. CP 154xSP-1 64 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Idle time for test frames (t3) Monitoring time during which the CP has not received any frames from the master. When t3 elapses, the CP sends a test/control frame (U format) to the master. This parameter is intended for longer times without data traffic. Difference between send sequence number N(S) and receive sequence number N(R) Maximum number of unacknowledged data frames (I-APDUs) as maximum difference between send sequence number N(S) and receive sequence number N(R). When k is reached and t1 has not yet elapsed, the CP does not send any frames until all the frames sent have been acknowledged by the master. When k is reached and t1 has elapsed, the TCP connection is terminated. Max. number of unacknowledged data frames Maximum number of received data frames (I-APDUs), after which the oldest frame received from the master must be acknowledged. Acknowledgment mechanism for the IEC protocol With each sent data frame, the CP sends a continuous send sequence number. The data frame remains initially stored in the send buffer. When it receives the data frame, the master sends the send sequence number from this or (if several frames are received) the last frame as an acknowledgement to the CP. The CP saves the send sequence number returned by the master as a receive sequence number and uses it as an acknowledgement. Frames whose send sequence number is equal to or lower than the current receive sequence number are evaluated as having been successfully transferred and are deleted from the send buffer of the CP. Recommendations of the specification: w should not be higher than 2/3 of k. Recommended value for k: 12 Recommended value for w: 8 4.7.7 Partner stations 4.7.7.1 Partner configuration The STEP 7 configuration of the communications partners of the CP (telecontrol server, DNP3 or IEC master) and the connections to the partners is not possible and not necessary. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 65 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Address information of the communications partners For the communications partners of the CP, the following information is required during the configuration of the CP: TeleControl Basic - Partner IP address See section AUTOHOTSPOT for information on this. - Partner port (port number of the listener port of TCSB) DNP3 / IEC - Master station address Station address specified on the master With the IEC protocol the Master station address is not evaluated. - Partner IP address IP address of the master For the addressing of redundant partners, see section Addressing of single and redundant communications partners (Page 69). - Partner port "Partner stations" (only with DNP3 / IEC) Listener port CP's own listener port "Telecontrol server" / "Partner" Activate partner Enable the option to be able to use the partners configured later for the communication. In "TeleControl Basic" the telecontrol server is always enabled as a partner. Partner number The partner number is always signed by STEP 7. Station address / Master station address The station address of the telecontrol server is assigned automatically by the system if telecontrol communication is enabled. CP 154xSP-1 66 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) "Connection to partner" You will find information on the permitted ranges and defaults in the tooltips of STEP 7. Partner IP address IP address or host name (FQDN) of the telecontrol server. This can, for example, also be the FQDN of a DynDNS service. Connection monitoring When the function is enabled, the connection to the communications partner is monitored by sending keepalive frames. The TCP connection monitoring time is set for all TCP connections of the CP in the parameter group of the Ethernet interface, see also the section Ethernet interface (X1) > Advanced options (Page 61). These settings apply to all TCP connections of the CP. Here in the parameter group "Partner stations" the globally set monitoring time can also be set separately for this partner. The value set here overwrites the global value for this partner that was set in the "Ethernet interface (X1) > Advanced options > TCP connection monitoring" parameter group. TCP connection monitoring time Only with TCP: If there is no data traffic within the connection monitoring time, the CP sends a keepalive to the communications partner. The monitoring time is configured for the Ethernet interface as the default for all TCP connections. The default value can be adapted individually for each connection in "Partner stations" and this overwrites the global value for this partner that was set in the parameter group "Ethernet interface". The function can be disabled by entering 0 (zero) for the individual partners. TCP keepalive monitoring time Only with TCP: After sending a keepalive, the CP expects a reply from the communications partner within the keepalive monitoring time. If the CP does not receive a reply within the configured time, it terminates the connection. The monitoring time is configured for the Ethernet interface as the default for all TCP connections. The default value can be adapted individually for each connection in "Partner stations". The function can be disabled by entering 0 (zero) for the individual partners. Connection mode In the "Permanent" connection mode, there is a permanent connection to the communications partner. Connection establishment Specifies the communications partner that establishes the connection (always the CP). Partner port Port number of the communications partner CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 67 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) "Connection to redundant partner" (only with DNP3 / IEC) Redundancy mode Enable the option if the communications partner is a redundant master. For information on the other parameters see above. "Advanced settings" Partner monitoring time (only with DNP3 / IEC) If the CP does not receive a sign of life from the communications partner within the configured time, the CP interprets this as a fault/error on the partner. If you enter 0, the function is deactivated. Report partner status (connection to partner) If the function is enabled, the CP signals the status of the connection to the communications partner to the CPU. - Bit 0 of "PLC tag for partner status" (data type WORD) is set to 1 if the partner can be reached. - Bit 1 is set to 1 if all the paths to the remote partner are OK (useful with redundant paths). - Bits 2-3 indicate the status of the send buffer (frame memory). The following values are possible: - 0: Send buffer OK - 1: Send buffer threatening to overflow (more than 80 % full). - 3: Send buffer has overflowed (fill level 100 % reached). As soon as the fill level drops below 50%, bits 2 and 3 are reset to 0. Bits 4 to 15 of the PLC tags are not used and do not need to be evaluated in the program. DNP3-specific settings DNP3 level DNP3 conformity level supported by the partner. Event transmission mode Mode with which the frames in the send buffer of the CP (events) are transferred: - Chronological transfer of individual frames or - Block-by-block transfer of the frames of a data point CP 154xSP-1 68 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 4.7.7.2 Addressing of single and redundant communications partners Addressing the telecontrol server Addressing of a single telecontrol server Configure the IP address of the telecontrol server or the DSL router when connecting via the Internet. When using a DynDNS service with the host name (FQDN) can be specified. Addressing of the TCSB redundancy group by the stations using one IP address In the LAN in the master station to which the TCSB server PCs and the DSL router (e.g. SCALANCE M) are connected, the Network Load Balancing (NLB) of the computer operating system will assign a common virtual IP address to the two server PCs. This IP address is configured depending on the network setup: - If a CP without a DSL router is connected, the virtual address assigned by the NLB must be configured in the CP as the IP address of the telecontrol server. - If a DSL router is used, only one IP address will be configured to address the redundant telecontrol server in the stations, the public address of the DSL router. Set the port forwarding (TCP) on the DSL router so that the public IP address (external network) is led to the virtual IP address of the TCSB server PCs (internal network). Only the public IP address is reachable from the Internet. The station does not therefore receive any information telling it which of the two computers of the redundancy group it is connected to. Addressing redundant DNP3 or IEC masters For each master specify the master station address and the IP address being used. 4.7.7.3 Partner for inter-station communication Only when using the "TeleControl Basic" protocol Inter-station communication In this table, you specify the S7 stations and CPs with which the current station will use interstation communication. Connections for inter-station communication run via the telecontrol server. Partner The partner number is assigned by the system. It is required during data point configuration to assign data points to their communications partners. For inter-station communication, the partner is addressed with the parameters "Project", "Station" and "Slot". CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 69 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Project Here, enter the project number of the CP in the partner station. (Parameter group "Security > CP identification" on the partner) Station Here, enter the station number of the CP in the partner station. (Parameter group "Security > CP identification" on the partner) Slot Here, enter the slot number of the CP in the partner station via which the connection will be established. Frame memory Activate the option for enabling inter-station communication. The frames are stored in the send buffer (frame memory) of the CP if the connection is disturbed. Note that the capacity of the frame memory is shared by all communications partners. Access ID The access ID displayed here is formed from the hexadecimal values of project number, station number and slot. The parameter of the type DWORD is allocated as follows: Bits 0 - 7: Slot Bits 8 - 20: Station number Bits 21 - 31: Project number 4.7.8 Communication with the CPU 4.7.8.1 Communication with the CPU Communication with the CPU Using the first three parameters you specify the CPU access by the CP in the CPU scan cycle. You will find the structure of the CPU scan cycle in the section Read cycle (Page 100). CP 154xSP-1 70 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The fourth parameter "Frame memory size" decides the size of the send buffer on the CP for frames of data points that are configured as an event. Cycle pause time Wait time between two scan cycles of the CPU memory area Max. number of write jobs Maximum number of write jobs to the CPU memory area within a CPU scan cycle Max. number of read jobs Maximum number of low-priority read jobs from the CPU memory area within a CPU scan cycle. Frame memory size Here, you set the size of the frame memory for events (send buffer). The size of the frame memory is divided equally among all configured communications partners. You will find the size of the frame memory in the section Configuration limits and performance data (Page 21). You will find details of how the send buffer works (storing and sending events) as well as the options for transferring data in the section Process image, type of transmission, event classes (Page 97). Watchdog bit CP monitoring Via the watchdog bit the CPU can be informed of the status of the telecontrol communication of the CP. CP time of day CP time to CPU Using this function, the CP can make its time of day available to the CPU. You will find details in the STEP 7 information system. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 71 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 4.7.8.2 CP diagnostics CP diagnostics With the parameter group, you have the option of reading out advanced diagnostics data from the CP using PLC tags. Enable advanced CP diagnostics Enable the option to be able to use advanced CP diagnostics. If the option is enabled, at least the "Diagnostics trigger tag" must be configured. The following PLC tags for the individual items of diagnostics data can be enabled selectively. Diagnostics trigger tag If the PLC tag (BOOL) from the user program of the CPU is set to 1, the CP updates the values of the PLC tags that can then be configured for the advanced diagnostics. After writing the current values to the following PLC tags, the CP sets the "Diagnostics trigger tag" to 0 signaling the CPU that the updated values can be read from the PLC tags. Note Fast setting of the diagnostics trigger variable Triggers must not be set faster than a minimum interval of 500 milliseconds. Frame memory overflow warning PLC tag (data type byte) for the send buffer overflow pre-warning. Bit 0 is set to 1 in the following situations: - TeleControl Basic / DNP3 / IEC: The fill level of the send buffer has reached 80%. - ST7 : The fill level of the send buffer has reached 90%. Frame memory size PLC tag (data type DWord) for the occupation of the send buffer. The number of saved frames is displayed. Current IP address PLC tag (data type String) for the current IP address of the CP. Date of last successful logon to TCSB Only for TeleControl Basic PLC tag (data type DTL) for the date on which the CP last logged in to the telecontrol server. Date of last unsuccessful logon to TCSB Only for TeleControl Basic PLC tag (data type DTL) for the date on which the CP was last unable to log in to the telecontrol server. CP 154xSP-1 72 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) TeleService status Only for TeleControl Basic The PLC tag (BOOL) indicates whether a TeleService session is active: - 0 = No TeleService session active - 1 = TeleService session active VPN IPsec status Connection to SINEMA Remote Connect The PLC tag (BOOL) indicates whether an OpenVPN tunnel to SINEMA RC is established: - 0 = No tunnel established - 1 = Tunnel established 4.7.9 Subscriber numbers Subscriber numbers Here you assign the subscriber numbers of the CPU and the CP. The subscriber number is unique for every subscriber in an ST7 network. For the meaning of the subscriber numbers, see section Address and authentication information (Page 56). CPU subscriber number Subscriber number of the local CPU of the station CP subscriber number Subscriber number of the CP 4.7.10 Security (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) For information on the parameters, see section Security parameters of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC (Page 118). 4.7.11 Creating telecontrol connections for the ST7 communication Single and redundant connections For ST7 communication of a communication module, you need to create at least one telecontrol connection in the "Network data" editor. If two subscribers can be reached via different networks, to establish path redundancy for modules with multiple ST7 capable interfaces you create a maximum of two connections CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 73 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) between the two subscribers. You specify redundant connections in the "Connection path" table (see below). Not all communication modules have serial interfaces or only one Ethernet port with ST7 capability. These modules cannot use redundant paths. Opening the editor "Network data" > "Telecontrol" tab To open the editor, follow the steps below: 1. Open the network view of the project. On the right you will find the collapsed "Network data" editor. 2. Open the "Network data" editor using the arrow symbol. The editor is displayed with several tabs, on the left the "Network overview" tab. 3. Expand the editor until the "Telecontrol" tab appears. In this tab you configure the telecontrol connections. Creating telecontrol connections for the ST7 communication of the module For communication between two ST7 subscribers, you require a telecontrol connection. To create the connection, follow the steps below: 1. In the "Starting point" box, click on a free row in the "Telecontrol" tab. The drop-down list shows the configurable starting points that can use the ST7 protocol: - S7 stations: Assigned CPU - PC stations: Application (e.g. ST7cc / ST7sc) For connections between an application on the master station PC and an S7 station, always select the application as the starting point because it can only be selected in the list of starting points. 2. Select the starting point of the connection by double-clicking. The connection will then be included in the list of telecontrol connections. The name of the connection is preset, but you can change it. 3. Now in the "Endpoint" box select the connection partner from the drop-down list. Boxes with a missing or bad configuration are shown on a red background, in the example the representation "TC_Connection_3". CP 154xSP-1 74 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Figure 4-1 "Network data" editor, "Telecontrol" tab Specification of the connection sequence Then specify the connection sequence of the created telecontrol connection. 1. Above the second table "Configured connection paths" click the paths symbol . The dialog "Add connection paths" opens and the possible connection path are searched for. 2. Select one of the possible connection paths in the top table. The connection path(s) are shown with details in the second table. - If several connections are displayed in the upper table, you can select one or two redundant connections. - If no connection is displayed in the upper table, there is a configuration error in the corresponding stations or networks. In this case, close the dialog with the "Close" button and complete the configration. 3. If you want to choose the selected connection path as a "configured connection" click on "Add". "Information" in the lower part of the dialog shows whether the connection was added or it is already configured. 4. Close the dialog with the "Close" button if the configured connections correspond to the demands of the project. The connection details of every configured connection are displayed in the lower table "Connection path". CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 75 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The "Configured connection paths" and "Connection path" tables "Configured connection paths" table This table shows the configured connections (connection paths) of a telecontrol connection. Figure 4-2 Redundant connection with incorrectly configured connection path (Route_2) Connections shown on a red background are invalid. In the example the PC station was connected via the PC CP to the MSC network between TIM_11 and TIM_12 which is not allowed. "Connection path" table When checking the configured connections. the "Connection path" table supports you. For every configured connection, the detailed connection path is shown here. The "Position" column shows a station symbol with a symbol for the connection point (starting point, node, endpoint). Based on the color of the symbols for the connection endpoint you can recognize connections that are not permitted. Blue symbols for the connection point: Valid connections Red symbols for the connection point: Invalid connections Bad connections In the example the connection path "Route_2" was originally created from the application "ST7cc_1" (PC_1) via the MSC network to TIM_12. This continued via the dedicated line network from TIM_12 to TIM_11. A connection path from the application via an MSC network or via modules with ST7 capability is not permitted. The connection of the PC station to the MSC network was deleted in the meantime, so that the connection points "ST7cc_1" and "TIM_12" are invalid and their symbols are red. Redundant telecontrol connections When different networks between two subscribers have been created in the network configuration the different connection paths are shown in the "Add connection paths" table. CP 154xSP-1 76 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) If you only want to use one connection, select only this connection in the table and click "Add". If you only want to establish a redundant connection, select two connection paths in the table and click "Add". You specify the main and substitute paths between the subscribers after closing the dialog using the "Configured connections" table. Main and substitute path of a redundant connection When you have created two connection paths for a telecontrol connection, the first of the two is the main path and the second the substitute path. This is displayed in the "Priority" column of the "Configured connections" table. You can change the priority of the two connection paths later, i.e. the specification of the main and substitute path. The arrow keys serve this purpose: Delete invalid or redundant connections If you have non-permitted or unwanted redundant connections you need to delete one connection. Follow the steps outlined below: 1. To delete a connection in the table "Configured connections", select the connection you do not need. 2. Delete the connection using the shortcut menu "Delete". Rules for connection configuration Note the following rules for connection configuration: A connection via an inconsistent network is invalid. Examples: - Subscriber with incompatible modems - Incompatible settings of two modems in a connection - Incompatible settings between modem and network parameters - Connections via nodes that are not configured as node stations. Two connections to one partner (endpoint) via the same interface of a module (start point) are not permitted. An MSC connection can only run via the first Ethernet interface [X1] of a TIM or via the serial interface of a module with the setting "IP-based". Connections between a PC application and a module can only be of the Network type "Neutral" (S7 connections). For connections between a redundant PC application and a module, you need to create two connections. For a redundant ST7cc control center, in STEP 7 create two PC stations each with an ST7cc application (see below). Only in this way can you configure a connection from each application. A connection via a network in which two MD3 modems communicate with each other and that are configured with 1200 bps / half duplex / AT mode is invalid. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 77 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Connections to redundant control centers and other properties If you select a connection in the table "Telecontrol connections" at the top in the "Network data" editor, three parameter groups are displayed in the "Properties" tab of the Inspector window. Here you can check and, if necessary, correct the connection configuration and configure the following properties: General Here, you will find the basic properties of a telecontrol connection. You can change the subscriber number of the connection starting point and endpoint. This affects the configuration data of the subscriber. Redundant ST7cc/sc If you use a redundant control center in your project (e.g. ST7cc or ST7sc), you must first create two PC stations with CP and application and connect these to the communication module via Ethernet. Then you create a telecontrol connection from the application of a PC station (start point) and the communication module (end point). Only afterwards do you create the connection to the second application in the redundancy group in this telecontrol connection. - Add redundant ST7cc/cc partner Activate the option for the selected telecontrol connection between application and module. - Redundant application Select the second application from the "Redundant application" drop-down list. Destination subscriber properties The parameter group relates to the destination subscriber that was configured as the endpoint of the connection. - General request supervision time This is the maximum time that may be required by a destination subscriber (communication module capable of ST7) to respond fully to a general request (GR). If the GR response has not arrived completely at the requesting partner when the supervision time has expired, a message is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the module. The general request supervision time is 900 seconds. - Frames to destination subscriber with time stamp Regardless of the configuration all frames are sent to the destination subscriber with a time stamp. CP 154xSP-1 78 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 4.7.12 Data points 4.7.12.1 Data point configuration Data point-related communication with the CPU No program blocks need to be programmed for telecontrol modules with data point configuration to transfer user data between the station and communications partner. The data areas in the memory of the CPU intended for communication with the communications partner are configured data point-related on the module. Each data point is linked to a PLC tag or the tag of a data block. Requirement: Created PLC tags and/or data blocks (DBs) PLC tags or DBs must first be created on the CPU to allow configuration of the data points. The PLC tags for data point configuration can be created in the standard tag table or in a user-defined tag table. All PLC tags intended to be used for data point configuration must have the attribute "Visible in HMI". Address areas of the PLC tags are input, output or bit memory areas on the CPU. Note Number of PLC tags Remember the maximum possible number of PLC tags the can be used for data point configuration in the section Configuration limits and performance data (Page 21). The formats and S7 data types of the PLC tags that are compatible with the protocol-specific data point types of the module can be found in the section Datapoint types (Page 86). Access to the memory areas of the CPU The values of the PLC tags or DBs referenced by the data points are read and transferred to the communications partner by the module. Data received from the communications partner is written by the module to the CPU via the PLC tags or DBs. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 79 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Configuring the data points and messages in STEP 7 You configure the data points in STEP 7 in the data point and message editor. You can open both editors alternatively as follows: Selecting the communication module Shortcut menu "Open the data point and messages editor" Via the project navigation: Project > directory of the relevant station > Local modules > required communication module By double-clicking on the entry, the data point or message editor opens. Figure 4-3 Configuring data points and messages After opening the editor window using the two entries to the right above the table, you can switch over between the data point and message editor. Figure 4-4 Switching over between the two editors CP 154xSP-1 80 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Creating obects With the data point or message editor open, create a new object (data point / message) by double clicking "" in the first table row with the grayed out entry. A preset name is written in the cell. You can change the name to suit your purposes but it must be unique within the module. Figure 4-5 Data point table You configure the remaining properties of every object using the drop-down lists of the other table columns and using the parameter boxes shown at the bottom of the screen. Assigning data points to their data source After creating it, you assign a new data point to its data source. Depending on the data type of the data point a PLC tag can serve as the data source. For the assignment you have the following options: Click on the table symbol in the cell of the "PLC tag" column. All configured PLC tags and the tags of the created data blocks are displayed. Select the required data source with the mouse or keyboard. Click the symbol . A selection list of the configured PLC Tags and the blocks is displayed. From the relevant table, select the required data source. In the name box of the PLC tag, enter part of the name of the required data source. All configured PLC tags and tags of the data blocks whose names contain the letters you have entered are displayed. Select the required data source. Note Assignment of parameter values to PLC tags The mechanisms described here also apply when you need to assign the value of a parameter to a PLC tag. The input boxes fro the PLC tag (e.g.: PLC tag for partner status support the functions described here for selecting the PLC tag. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 81 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Arranging and copying objects As with many other programs in the data point or message editor you can also arrange the columns, sort the table according to your requirements and copy and insert objects. Arrange columns If you click on a column header with the left mouse button pressed, you can move the column. Sorting objects If you click briefly with the left mouse button on a column header, you can sort the objects of the table in ascending or descending order according to the entries in this column. The sorting is indicated by an arrow in the column header. After sorting in descending order of a column the sorting can be turned off by clicking on the column header again. Adapting the column width You can reach this function with the following actions: - Using the shortcut menu that opens when you click on a column header with the right mouse key. "Optimize width", "Optimize width of all columns" - If you move the cursor close to the limit of a column header, the following symbol appears: When it does, click immediately on the column header. The column width adapts itself to the broadest entry in this column. Showing / hiding columns You call this function using the shortcut menu that opens when you click on a column header with the right mouse key. Copying, pasting, cutting and deleting objects If you click in a parameter box of an object in the table with the right mouse key, you can use the functions named with the shortcut menu (copy, paste, cut, delete). You can paste cut or copied objects within the table or in the first free row below the table. Exporting and importing data points To simplify the engineering of larger plants, you can export the data points of a configured module and import them into other modules in the project. This is an advantage particularly in projects with many identical or similar stations or data point modules. The export / import function is available when you select the module for example in the network or device view and select the relevant shortcut menu. CP 154xSP-1 82 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Figure 4-6 Shortcut menu of the module When it is exported the data point information of a module is written to a CSV file. Export When you call the export function, the export dialog opens. Here, you select the module or modules of the project whose data point information needs to be exported. When necessary, you can export the data points of all modules of the project together. In the export dialog, you can select the storage location in the file directory. When you export the data of a module you can also change the preset file name. When you export from several modules, the files are formed with preset names made up of the station name and module name. The file itself contains the following information in addition to the data point information: Module name Module type CPU name CPU type Editing the export files You can edit the data point information in an exported CSV file. This allows you to use this file as a configuration template for many other stations. If you have a project with many stations of the same type, you can copy the CSV file with the data points of a fully configured module for other as yet unconfigured stations and adapt individual parameters to the particular station. This saves you having to configure the data points for every module in STEP 7. Instead, you simply import the copied and adapted CSV file to the other modules of the same type. When you import this file into another module, the changed parameter values of the CSV file are adopted in the data point configuration of this module. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 83 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The lines of the CSV file have the following content: Line 1: ,Name,Type, This line must not be changed. Line 2: PLC,, , Meaning: PLC (designation of the station class), CPU name, CPU type Only the elements and may be changed. The CPU type must correspond exactly to the name of the CPU in the catalog. Line 3: Module,,, Meaning: Module (Designation of the module class), module type, module name Only the elements and may be changed. Be careful when changing the module names if you want to import data points into several modules (see below). The module type must correspond exactly to the name of the module in the catalog. Line 4: Parameter names (English) of the data points This line must not be changed. Lines 5..n: Values of the parameters according to line 4 of the individual data points You can change the parameter values for the particular station. Importing into a module Before importing the data points make sure that the PLC tags required for the data points have been created. Note that when you import a CSV file all the data points existing on the module will be deleted and replaced by the imported data points. Select a module and select the import function from the shortcut menu of the module. The import dialog opens in which you select the required CSV file in the file directory. If the information on the assignment of the individual data points to the relevant PLC tags matches the assignment in the original module, the data points will be assigned to the corresponding PLC tags. When you import data points into a module, but some required PLC tags have not yet been created in the CPU, the corresponding data point information cannot be assigned. In this case, you can subsequently create missing PLC tags and them assign them the imported data point information. The "Assignment repair" function is available for this (see below). If the names of the PLC tags in the module into which the import is made have different names than in the module that exported, the corresponding data points cannot be assigned to your PLC tags. Importing into several modules You can import the data points from several modules into the modules of a different project. To do this in the import dialog select all the required CSV files with the control key. CP 154xSP-1 84 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Before importing the data points, make sure that the respective stations have been created with CPUs of the same name, modules of the same name and PLC tags of the same name. When you import the corresponding stations of the project are searched for based on the module names in the CSV files. If a target station does not exist in the project or the module has a different name, the import of the particular CSV file will be ignored. Restrictions for the import of data points In the following situations the import of data points will be aborted: An attribute required by the module is missing in the CSV file to be imported. Example: If a data point to be imported uses a time trigger, the import will be aborted if no time-of-day synchronization was configured for the module. The telecontrol protocol used by the module differs from that of the original module. Only when importing into several modules: The import is aborted when a module or CPU name is different from the data in the CSV file. Note: Modules with the same telecontrol protocol are compatible with each other: TeleControl Basic All SIMATIC NET modules with the TeleControl Basic protocol: CP 1243-1, CP 1242-7 GPRS V2, CP 1243-7 LTE, CP 1542SP-1 IRC ST7 CP 1243-8 IRC, CP 1542SP-1 IRC, ST7 TIM DNP3 CP 1243-1, CP 1243-8 IRC, TIM modules capable of DNP3 IEC CP 1243-1, CP 1243-8 IRC Data points can be imported and exported between compatible modules. Assignment repair If you have named the PLC tags in a station into which you want to import differently from the station from which the CSV file was exported, the assignment between data point and PLC tag is lost when you import. You then have the option to either rename the existing PLC tags appropriately or add missing PLC tags. You can then repair the assignment between unassigned data points and PLC tags. This function is available either via the shortcut menu of the module (see above) or with the following icon to the upper left in the data point editor: If a PLC tag with a matching name is found for a data point by the repair function, the assignment is restored. However the data type of the tag is not checked. After the assignment repair make sure that you check whether the newly assigned PLC tags are correct. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 85 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Character set for data point names When you create a data point, a preset name "DataPoint_n" is adopted. In the data point table and in the "General" tab of the data point you can change the name of the data point. When assigning names only ASCII characters from the band 0x20 ... 0x7e (no. 32-126) may be used with the exceptions listed below. Forbidden characters: .'[]/\| period, apostrophe, square brackets, slash, back slash, vertical line (pipe) 4.7.12.2 Datapoint types Supported data point types of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC During the configuration of the user data to be transferred by the CP 1542SP-1 IRC, each data point is assigned a protocol-specific data point type. The data point types along with the compatible S7 data types are listed below. They are grouped according to format (memory requirements). Note Effect of the change of arrays for data points If an array is modified later, the data point must be recreated. TeleControl Basic: Data point types Table 4- 2 Supported data point types and compatible S7 data types Format (memory requirements) Data point type Bit Digital input Digital output Digital input Byte Direction S7 data types Operand area in Bool I, Q, M, DB in Bool Q, M, DB in Byte, Char, USInt I, Q, M, DB Digital output out Byte, Char, USInt Q, M, DB Analog input in Int I, Q, M, DB Analog output out Int Q, M, DB Counter (16 bits) Counter input in Word, UInt I, Q, M, DB Integer with sign (32 bits) Analog input in DInt Q, M, DB Integer with sign (16 bits) Analog output out DInt Q, M, DB Counter (32 bits) Counter input in UDInt, DWord I, Q, M, DB Floating-point number with sign (32 bits) Analog input in Real Q, M, DB Analog output out Real Q, M, DB Floating-point number with sign (64 bits) Analog input out LReal Q, M, DB out LReal Q, M, DB Block of data (1 .. 64 bytes) Data in / out ARRAY 1) DB Data in / out ARRAY DB 1) Analog output 1) For the possible formats of the ARRAY data type, refer to the following section. CP 154xSP-1 86 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Block of data (ARRAY) With the ARRAY data type, contiguous memory areas up to a size of 64 bytes can be transferred. The following S7 data types are compatible components of ARRAY: Byte, USInt (total of up to 64 per data block) Char (total of up to 64 per data block) Int, UInt, Word (total of up to 32 per data block) DInt, UDInt, DWord (total of up to 16 per data block) Time stamp in UTC format Time stamps are output by the OPC server applications in UTC format (48 bits) and contain milliseconds. Data point types of the "ST7" protocol The direction of the data transfer is specified in the "Data point type" column: Monitoring direction The objects (right column) for the monitoring direction have the abbreviation "_S". Control direction The objects (right column) for the control direction have the abbreviation "_R". Table 4- 3 Supported data point types and compatible S7 data types Format (memory Data point type requirements) Bit S7 data type Operand area Number of data Object points per object Digital input Bool I, Q, M, DB 8 Bin08X_S Digital output Bool Q, M, DB 8 Bin08X_R Digital input Byte, USInt I, Q, M, DB 4 Bin04B_S Digital output Byte, USInt Q, M, DB 4 Bin04B_R Command output Byte, USInt Q, M, DB 1 Cmd01B_R Int I, M, DB 4 Ana04W_S Int I, M, DB 4 Mean04W_S Analog output Int Q, M, DB 4 Ana04W_R Mean value output Int Q, M, DB 4 Mean04W_R Setpoint output 1) Int Q, M, DB 1 Set01W_R Counter (16 bits) Counter input UInt, Word I, Q, M, DB 1 Cnt01D_S Counter input UInt, Word I, Q, M, DB 4 Cnt04D_S Floating-point Analog input number (32 bits) Analog output Real M, DB 4 Ana04R_S Real Q, M, DB Block of data (4 .. 48 bytes) ARRAY [1...12] of DB DInt / UDInt / DB DWord / Real 2) DB Byte Integer with sign Analog input (16 bits) Mean value input Data input Data output Parameter output 1) 1) See below, section "1: Mirroring back" 3) See below, section "2: Block of data" 4 Ana04R_R 12 Dat12D_S 12 Dat12D_R 12 Par12D_R CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 87 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 1: Mirroring back The mirroring back function using the "Value monitoring" parameter can be configured for the following data point types: Setpoint Output Parameter Output The local values of the data points of this type can be monitored for changes and the changes transferred to the master with the "Value monitoring" function. A change to a local value can be caused by, for example, manual operator input on site. To allow the value resulting from local events or interventions to be transferred to the master station, a mirroring back channel is generated for the relevant data point with the "Value monitoring" function via which the locally changed value is mirrored back. Remember that to use the mirror back function, you need to interconnect the local values in the controller with the relevant PLC tag of the data point. 2: Block of data With the ARRAY data type, blocks of data from contiguous memory areas up to a size of 4 .. 48 bytes can be transferred. Compatible components of ARRAY are DInt, UDint, DWord or Real. The components within an array must be of the same type. Format of the time stamp For information on the format of the time stamp, see section Time stamp of the "ST7" protocol (Page 92). Data point types of the "DNP3" protocol Table 4- 4 Supported data point types, DNP3 object groups, variants and compatible S7 data types Format (memory requirements) Data point type DNP3 object group Direction [variations] Bit TIM Operand area Binary Input 1 [1, 2] in Bool Bool I, Q, M, DB Binary Input Event 2 [1, 2] in Bool Bool I, Q, M, DB 10 [2] out Bool Bool Q, M, DB Binary Output 1) Binary Output Event Binary Command 1) 11 [1, 2] out Bool Bool Q, M, DB 12 [1] out Bool - Q, M, DB - Byte in / out Integer (16 bits) S7 data types CP Counter Static 20 [2] Counter Static Frozen Counter in out UInt, Word - I, Q, M, DB - Q, M, DB Word 21 [2, 6] in UInt, Word Word I, Q, M, DB Counter Event 22 [2, 6] in UInt, Word Word I, Q, M, DB Frozen Counter Event 3) 23 [2, 6] in UInt, Word Word I, Q, M, DB 30 [2] in Int I, Q, M, DB Analog Input 2) Int CP 154xSP-1 88 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Format (memory requirements) Data point type DNP3 object group Direction [variations] Integer (32 bits) S7 data types CP TIM Analog Input Event 32 [2] in Int Int I, Q, M, DB Analog Output Status 4) 40 [2] out Int Int Q, M, DB Analog Output 41 [2] out Int Int Q, M, DB Analog Output Event 4) 42 [2, 4] out Int Int Q, M, DB Counter Static 20 [1] DWord DWord I, Q, M, DB in out Frozen Counter 21 [1, 5] 2) in Q, M, DB DWord DWord DWord DWord DWord DWord out Counter Event 22 [1, 5] Frozen Counter Event 3) 23 [1, 5] in Floating-point number (64 bits) in I, Q, M, DB Q, M, DB out Floating-point number (32 bits) Operand area I, Q, M, DB Q, M, DB out I, Q, M, DB Q, M, DB Analog Input 30 [1] in DInt - Q, M, DB Analog Input Event 32 [1] in DInt - Q, M, DB Analog Output Status 4) 40 [1, 3] out DInt DWord Q, M, DB Analog Output 41 [1] out DInt DWord Q, M, DB Analog Output Event 4) 42 [1] out DInt DWord Q, M, DB Analog Input 30 [5] in Real - Q, M, DB Analog Input Event 32 [5, 7] in Real - Q, M, DB Analog Output Status 4) 40 [3] out Real - Q, M, DB Analog Output 41 [3] out Real - Q, M, DB Analog Output Event 4) 42 [5, 7] out Real - Q, M, DB 30 [6] in LReal - Q, M, DB Analog Input Analog Input Event 32 [6, 8] in LReal - Q, M, DB Analog Output 41 [4] out LReal - Q, M, DB Analog Output Event 4) 42 [6, 8] out LReal - Q, M, DB 110 [ - ] in, out 5) 5) DB 111 [ - ] in, out 5) 5) DB Block of data (1...64 Octet String / Octet bytes) 5) String Output Octet String Event 5) 1) This object group can be configured in the Data point editor of STEP 7 using the substitute object group 12. 2) This object group can be configured in the Data point editor of STEP 7 using the substitute object group 20. 3) This object group can be configured in the Data point editor of STEP 7 using the substitute object group 22. 4) This object group can be configured in the Data point editor of STEP 7 using the substitute object group 41. 5) With these data point types, contiguous memory areas up to a size of 64 bytes can be transferred. All S7 data types with a size between 1 and 64 bytes are compatible. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 89 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Explanation of the table footnotes 1), 2), 3), 4): Configuring data points using substitute object groups The initial data point types of the following object groups can be configured using the substitute object groups listed above: 10 [2] 11 [1, 2] 21 [1, 2, 5, 6] 23 [1, 2, 5, 6] 40 [1, 2, 3] 42 [1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8] To configure in the DNP3 CP, use the specified substitute object group. Assign each data point on the master using the configurable data point index in STEP 7. The data point of the DNP3 CP is then assigned to the corresponding data point on the master. Example of configuring the data point Binary Output (10 [2]) The data point is configured as follows: On the DNP3 CP as Binary Command (12 [1]) On the master as Binary Output (10 [2]) With the data point types Binary Output Event (11) and Analog Output Event (42), you also need to enable mirroring back; refer to the next section. Configuration of mirroring back for output events (object groups 11 and 42) You first create the data point types Binary Output Event (object group 11) and Analog Output Event (object group 42) as described above as data points of the object groups 12 or 41. The local values of these two object groups can be monitored for changes and the changes transferred to the master. A change to a local value can be caused by, for example, manual operator input on site. To allow the value resulting from local events or interventions to be transferred to the master, the data point in question requires a channel for mirroring back. You configure this mirroring back function using the "Value monitoring" option in data point configuration, "General" tab. Remember that to use the mirror back function, you need to interconnect the local values in the controller with the relevant PLC tag of the data point. Time stamp of the data with the DNP3 protocol in UTC format Time stamps are transferred in UTC format (48 bits) and contain milliseconds. CP 154xSP-1 90 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Data point types of the "IEC 60870-5" protocol Table 4- 5 Supported data point types, IEC types and compatible S7 data types Format (memory requirements) Data point type Bit Byte Integer (16 bits) Integer (32 bits) Floating-point number (32 bits) Block of data (1...2 Bit) 2) IEC type Direction S7 data types Operand area Single-point information <1> in Bool I, Q, M, DB Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <30> in Bool I, Q, M, DB Single command <45> out Bool Q, M, DB Single command with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <58> out Bool Q, M, DB Step position information <5> in Byte, USInt I, Q, M, DB Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <32> in Byte, USInt I, Q, M, DB Measured value, normalized value <9> in Int I, Q, M, DB Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <34> in Int I, Q, M, DB Measured value, scaled value <11> in Int I, Q, M, DB Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <35> in Int I, Q, M, DB Set point command, normalised value <48> out Int Q, M, DB Set point command, scaled value <49> out Int Q, M, DB Set point command, normalised value with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <61> out Int Q, M, DB Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <62> out Int Q, M, DB Bitstring of 32 bits <7> in UDInt, DWord I, Q, M, DB Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <33> in UDInt, DWord I, Q, M, DB Integrated totals <15> in UDInt, DWord I, Q, M, DB Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <37> in UDInt, DWord I, Q, M, DB Bitstring of 32 bits <51> out UDInt, DWord Q, M, DB Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a - control direction 1) <64> out UDInt, DWord Q, M, DB Measured value, short floating point number <13> in Real Q, M, DB Measured value, short floating point number with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <36> in Real Q, M, DB Set point command, short floating point number <50> out Real Q, M, DB Set point command, short floating point with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <63> out Real Q, M, DB Double-point information <3> in 2) DB Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a 1) <31> in 2) DB Double command <46> out 2) DB CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 91 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Format (memory requirements) Block of data (1...32 Bit) 3) Data point type IEC type Direction S7 data types Operand area Regulating step command <47> out 2) DB Double command with time tag CP56Time2a 1) 2) <59> out 2) DB Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a 1) 2) <60> out 2) DB Bitstring of 32 bits 3) <7> in 3) DB Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a 1) 3) <33> in 3) DB Bitstring of 32 bits 3) <51> out 3) DB Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a - control direction 1) 3) <64> out 3) DB 1) For the format of the time stamp, see the following section. 2) For these data point types, create a data block with an array of precisely 2 bool. 3) With these data point types, contiguous memory areas up to a size of 32 bits can be transferred. Only the S7 Bool data type is compatible. Time stamp of the data with the IEC protocol Time stamps are transferred according to the IEC specification in the "CP56Time2a" format. Note that only the first 3 bytes for milliseconds and minutes are transferred. 4.7.12.3 Time stamp of the "ST7" protocol Time stamp of the ST7 frames The values of the data points are transferred by the communications moduel with a time stamp, see also section Creating telecontrol connections for the ST7 communication (Page 73), subsection "Connections to redundant control centers and other properties". Format of the time stamp The ST7 time stamp is coded in BCD format. The exception is the half byte (nibble) with the time status. The structure of 8 bytes is assigned as follows: Table 4- 6 Byte no. Assignment of the structure of the time stamp Content High nibble Low nibble 0 Year * 10 Year * 1 1 Month * 10 Month * 1 2 Day * 10 Day * 1 3 Hour * 10 Hour * 1 4 Minute * 10 Minute * 1 5 Second * 10 Second * 1 6 Millisecond * 100 Millisecond * 10 7 Millisecond * 1 Time status CP 154xSP-1 92 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Table 4- 7 The assignment of the half byte "time status" (low nibble of byte 7) Bit No. Value 0 0 Time is invalid 1 Time is valid 1 4.7.12.4 Meaning 0 Standard time 1 Daylight saving time 2 Not used 3 Not used Status IDs of the data points Status IDs of data points The status IDs od the data points listed below are transferred for each data point in each frame. They differ slightly in the three protocol types. For the meaning of the status bits, see below. The "Meaning" (2nd table row) relates to the "bit status" (3rd table row). Generation of events if a data point status changes With data points that were configured as an event, the change to the status bit of the status identifiers described below also leads to an event being generated. Example: If the value of the status "RESTART" of a data point configured as an event changes form 1 (value not yet updated) to 0 (value updated) when the station starts up, this causes an event to be generated. Status IDs - TeleControl Basic The status bits are converted to the OPC quality code as follows by TCSB. Quality = BAD, If: NON_EXISTENT or OVER_RANGE = 1 Quality = UNCERTAIN, If: RESTART or CARRY or SB = 1 Quality = GOOD, If: Bits 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 = 0 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 93 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Table 4- 8 Bit assignment of status byte 0 Bit Flag name 7 6 - 5 NON_ 4 SB EXISTENT Meaning - Data point Substitute does not value exist or S7 address unreachable Bit status (always 0) 1 3 2 1 0 LOCAL_ FORCED CARRY OVER_ RANGE RESTART ONLINE (Bit is not set) Counted value overflow before reading the value Limit value of the analog value preprocessing overshot / undershot Value not yet updated after start Value is valid, CPU in RUN (irrelevant) 1 1 1 1 1 Status IDs - TeleControl Basic The status IDs can be evaluated by the master. They correspond to the following elements of the specification: OBJECT FLAGS - DNP3 Specification, Volume 6, Data Object Library - Part 1 Table 4- 9 Bit assignment of the status byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Flag name - - - LOCAL_ FORCED DISCONTI NUITY OVER_ RANGE Meaning - - - Local operator control Counted value overflow before reading the value Limit value of Value not the analog updated after value prepro- start cessing overshot / undershot Bit status (always 0) (always 0) (always 0) 1 1 1 1 RESTART 1 0 ONLINE Value is invalid 1 Status IDs - IEC The status IDs can be evaluated by the master. They correspond to the following elements of the specification: Quality descriptor - IEC 60870 Part 5-101 Table 4- 10 Bit Bit assignment of the status byte 7 6 5 Flag name - - SB substituted - CY carry OV overflow NT not topical IV invalid Meaning - - Substitute value - Counted value overflow before reading the value Value range exceeded, analog value Value not updated Value is valid Bit status (always 0) (always 0) 1 4 (always 0) 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 0 CP 154xSP-1 94 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) 4.7.12.5 "General" tab "General" tab Not all of the following parameters are supported by all protocols. General parameters Data point index With the TeleControl Basic, DNP3 and IEC protocols, the index is an addressing parameter for a data point. Below you will find the rules for configuring in the section Configuration of the data point index (Page 96). In ST7 a data point is addressed by the object number and the channel (see below). Type of transmission The type of transmission determines whether the value of the data point is only saved in the image memory or also in the send buffer of the CP. See section Process image, type of transmission, event classes (Page 97) for information on this. Read cycle Prioritizes the reading or writing of the data point value in the scan cycle of the CPU; see section Read cycle (Page 100). The fast cycle is suitable for data to be acquired quickly (alarms, contact changeover messages) and ST7 data points for the 1-out-of-n check. They are read in every cycle. DNP3- and IEC-specific parameters Value monitoring If the option is enabled, the value of the PLC tag of the output data point is monitored for changes. If the value of the PLC tag is changed, for example by manual operator input on site, an event is generated and the changed value is transferred to the communications partner (mirrored back). Remember that to use the mirror back function, you need to interconnect the local values in the controller with the PLC tag of the data point. Response to general request Enables the data point for the response to a general request. If the function is disabled, the value of the data point is not sent to the communications partner following a general request. Assignment to group request Assigns the data point to a station group for group requests. If a group request is sent to this group by the master, the value of the data point is sent to the master. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 95 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) ST7-specific parameters High priority If the option is enabled, the transfer has higher priority (important process data). The values of the data point are transferred before those of lower priority data points. Object number The object number must be unique and the maximum permitted number of data points per SINAUT object must not be exceeded. Refer to the column "Number of data points per SINAUT object" in the section Datapoint types (Page 86). Object channel The object channel is the channel of the corresponding SINAUT object. Partner object number Object number of the data point on the partner Per object number, you need to specify a unique object number of the communications partner. This must result in unique pairs of "Object number" and "Partner object number". 4.7.12.6 Configuration of the data point index Configuration of the data point index Below you will find the rules for configuring the data point index for the various protocols. TeleControl Basic Within a CP, the indexes of the data point classes must comply with the following rules: Input The index of an input data point must be unique throughout all data point types (digital inputs, analog inputs etc.). Output The index of an output data point must be unique throughout all data point types (digital inputs, analog inputs etc.). Note Index for data points with inter-station communication Note that for inter-station communication with a CP in another S7 station, the indexes of the two corresponding data points (data point pair) must be identical on the sending and receiving CP. For information on the configuration, see section Partner stations (Page 116). CP 154xSP-1 96 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) DNP3 On a CP, data point indexes must be unique within each of the following object groups: Binary Input / Binary Input Event Binary Output / Binary Command Counter / Counter Event Analog Input / Analog Input Event Analog Output Octet String / Octet String Event Indexes of two data points in different object groups can be identical. IEC The data point indexes must be unique in a CP. Data point indexes assigned twice are indicated as errors in the consistency check and prevent the project being compiled. 4.7.12.7 Process image, type of transmission, event classes Saving the data point values The values of data points are generally stored in the image memory of the CP. Events are also stored in the send buffer and can be transferred unsolicited. Data points are configured as a static value or as an event using the "Type of transmission" parameter (see below). The image memory, the process image of the CP The image memory is the process image of the communications module. All the current values of the configured data points are stored in the image memory. New values of a data point overwrite the last stored value in the image memory. The values are only transferred under the following conditions: After a query by the communications partner; see "Transfer after call" in the "Types of transmission" section below. Along with a data frame from the send buffer that needs to be transferred immediately. The send buffer The send buffer of the CP is the memory for the individual values of data points that are configured as an event. The maximum number is divided equally among all configured and enabled communications partners. You configure the size of the send buffer with the parameter "Frame memory size", see the section Communication with the CPU (Page 70). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 97 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) If the connection to a communications partner is interrupted, the individual values of the events are retained in the buffer. When the connection returns, the buffered values are sent. The frame memory operates chronologically; in other words, the oldest data is sent first (FIFO principle). If a data frame was transferred to the communications partner, the transferred data is deleted from the send buffer. If data cannot be transferred for a longer period of time and the send buffer is threatening to overflow, the protocol-dependent response is as follows: Telecontrol Basic, ST7 The forced image mode If the send buffer reaches a certain fill level, the module changes to the forced image mode. The fill level for changing to the forced image mode is: - Telecontrol Basic: 80% occupation of the send buffer - ST7: 90% occupation of the send buffer New values of data points configured as an event are no longer added to the send buffer in forced image mode. Rather, they overwrite older existing values in the image memory. When the connection to the communications partner returns, the module changes back to the send buffer mode as soon as the fill level of the send buffer has fallen below 50%. DNP3 / IEC If the fill level of the send buffer reaches 100%, no more values are saved until the fill level falls below 100% again. Static values and events The following relationship exists between the memory areas of the CP and the "Type of transmission": Static value (no event) Static values are entered in the image memory (process image of the CP). With DNP3 and IEC, static values correspond to the following classes: - DNP3: Class 0 - IEC: Class 2 Event The values of data points configured as an event are also entered in the image memory. The values of events are entered in the send buffer of the communications module in addition. With DNP3 and IEC, events correspond to the following classes: - DNP3: Class 1 / 2 / 3 - IEC: Class 1 A data point is configured as a static value or as an event using the "Type of transmission" parameter (see below). CP 154xSP-1 98 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Type of transmission The following types of transmission are possible: Transfer after call (class 0) The current value of the data point is entered as static value in the image memory of the CP. New values of a data point overwrite the last stored value in the image memory. After being called by the communications partner, the current value at the time is transferred. Triggered (events) The values of data points configured as an event are entered in the image memory and also in the send buffer of the CP. The values of events are saved in the following situations: - The configured trigger conditions are fulfilled (data point configuration > "Trigger" tab, see below) - The value of a status bit of the status identifiers of the data point changes; see also the section Status IDs of the data points (Page 93). Example: When the value of a data point configured as an event is updated during startup of the station by reading the CPU data for the first time, the status "RESTART" of this data point changes (bit status change 1 0). This leads to the generation of an event. Events can be transmitted spontaneously; see below (Time of transmission). Event classes with the "Triggered" type of transmission Depending on the protocol used the following event classes are available: TeleControl Basic / ST7 - Every value triggered Each value change is entered in the send buffer in chronological order. - Current value triggered Only the last, current value is entered in the send buffer. It overwrites the value stored there previously. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 99 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) DNP3 The evaluation of the following classification must be handled by the master. - Event class 1 Class according to DNP3 protocol: Class 1 Each value change is entered in the send buffer in chronological order. - Event class 2 Class according to DNP3 protocol: Class 2 Each value change is entered in the send buffer in chronological order. - Event class 3 Class according to DNP3 protocol: Class 3 Only the current value at the time the trigger condition is met is entered in the send buffer and overwrites the last value stored there. IEC Both of the following event classes correspond to the user data class 1 of the IEC protocol - Every value triggered Each value change is entered in the send buffer in chronological order. - Current value triggered Only the current value at the time the trigger condition is met is entered in the send buffer and overwrites the last value stored there. For the possible trigger types, see section "Trigger" tab (Page 102). 4.7.12.8 Read cycle Priority of the data points The cyclic reading of the values of input data points from their assigned PLC tags on the CPU can be prioritized. Less important input data points do not need to be read in every CPU scan cycle. Important input data points, on the other hand, can be prioritized for updating in every CPU scan cycle. You can prioritize the data points in STEP 7 in the data point configuration in the "General" tab with the "Read cycle" parameter. There you will find the two following options for input data points: Fast cycle Normal cycle The data points are read according to the method described below. CP 154xSP-1 100 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Structure of the CPU scan cycle The cycle (including the pause) with which the CP scans the memory area of the CPU is made up of the following phases: High-priority read jobs The values of input data points with the scan priority "High-priority" are read in every scan cycle. Low priority read jobs Some of the values of input data points with the scan priority "Low-priority" are read in every scan cycle. The number of values read per cycle is specified for the CP in the "Communication with the CPU" parameter group with the "Max. number of read jobs" parameter. The values that exceed this value and can therefore not be read in one cycle are then read in the next or one of the following cycles. Write jobs In every cycle, the values of a certain number of unsolicited write jobs are written to the CPU. The number of values written per cycle is specified for the CP in the "Communication with the CPU" parameter group with the "Max. number of write jobs" parameter. The values whose number exceeds this value are then written in the next or one of the following cycles. Cycle pause time This is the waiting time between two scan cycles. It is used to reserve adequate time for other processes that access the CPU via the backplane bus of the station. 4.7.12.9 ST7 objects Objects of TD7 software The telecontrol communication of modules that use the SINAUT ST7 telecontrol protocol is handled by the TD7 software. The data to be transferred is configured with SINAUT objects. Data objects The sending and receiving of process data is configured with the aid of standardized data objects. According to the two transmission directions, these are divided into: Send objects (.._S) Data objects for acquiring and sending data Their names have the ending "_S" (send). Receive objects (.._R) The data objects for receiving and outputting data Their names have the ending "_R" (receive). The data objects are available in the Data point editor and are configured for the communication between the partners. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 101 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Object channels The send and receive channels of the data objects are responsible for the processing of an individual process value, for example for processing and sending an analog value or receiving and outputting a command byte. Each data object contains one or more send or receive channels. The number and type of send and receive channels per data object cannot be modified. The data object "Ana04W_S", for example, has 4 send channels of the type "send analog value". If objects have multiple channels of the same type, not all channels need to be activated if they are not required. 4.7.12.10 "Trigger" tab Trigger Data points are configured as a static value or as an event using the "Type of transmission" parameter: Saving the value of a data point configured as an event Saving the value of a data point configured as an event in the send buffer (frame memory) can be triggered by various trigger types: Threshold value trigger The value of the data point is saved when this reaches a certain threshold. The threshold is calculated as the difference compared with the last stored value, refer to the section Threshold value trigger (Page 103). Time trigger The value of the data point is saved at configurable intervals or at a specific time of day. Event trigger (Trigger tag) The value of the data point is saved when a configurable trigger signal is fired. For the trigger signal, the edge change (0 1) of a trigger tag is evaluated that is set by the user program. When necessary, a separate trigger tag can be configured for each data point. Resetting the trigger tag in the bit memory area / DB: If the memory area of a trigger tag is in the bit memory or in a data block, the CP resets the trigger variable itself to 0 (zero) as soon as the value of the data point has been transferred. This can take up to 500 milliseconds. Note Fast setting of triggers Triggers must not be set faster than a minimum interval of 500 milliseconds. This also applies to hardware triggers (input area). Note Hardware trigger You need to reset hardware triggers via the user program. CP 154xSP-1 102 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Time of transmission of a triggered data point (event) With the DNP3 and IEC protocols, the spontaneous transmission of events depends on whether spontaneous sending or asymmetric communication is possible in the network. With DNP3, spontaneous sending of the module over the "Transmission mode" parameter can be enabled in the transfer settings of the Ethernet interface. With the TeleControl Basic and ST7 protocols, you define the time using the "Transmission mode" parameter. Transmission mode You determine whether TeleControl Basic and ST7 values are sent immediately or following a delay with the transmission mode of a data point ("Trigger" tab): Spontaneous (unsolicited - direct transfer) The value is transferred immediately. Conditional spontaneous (buffered transfer) The value is transferred only when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - The communications partner queries the station. - The value of another event with the transmission mode "Spontaneous" is transferred. - The fill level of the send buffer has reached 80% (TeleControl Basic) or 90% (ST7) of its maximum capacity. 4.7.12.11 Threshold value trigger Note Threshold value trigger: Calculation only after "Analog value preprocessing" Note that the analog value preprocessing is performed before the check for a configured threshold value and before calculating the threshold value. This affects the value that is configured for the threshold value trigger. Note No Threshold value trigger if Mean value generation is configured If mean value generation is configured, no threshold value trigger can be configured for the analog value event involved. For the time sequence of the analog value preprocessing refer to the section Analog value preprocessing (Page 105). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 103 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Threshold value trigger Function If the process value deviates by the amount of the threshold value, the process value is saved. Two methods are used to calculate the threshold value deviation: Absolute method With binary and counter values as well as with analog values with configured mean value generation, the absolute method is used to calculate the threshold value deviation. Integrative method With analog values without configured mean value generation, the integrating method is used to calculate the threshold value deviation. In the integration threshold value calculation, it is not the absolute value of the deviation of the process value from the last stored value that is evaluated but rather the integrated deviation. Absolute method For each binary value a check is made to determine whether the current (possibly smoothed) value is outside the threshold value band. The current threshold value band results from the last saved value and the amount of the configured threshold value: Upper limit of the threshold value band: Last saved value + threshold value Lower limit of the threshold value band: Last saved value - threshold value As soon as the process value reaches the upper or lower limit of the threshold value band, the value is saved. The newly saved value serves as the basis for calculating the new threshold value band. Integrative method The integration threshold value calculation works with a cyclic comparison of the integrated current value with the last stored value. The calculation cycle in which the two values are compared is 500 milliseconds. (Note: The calculation cycle must not be confused with the scan cycle of the CPU memory areas). The deviations of the current process value are totaled in each calculation cycle. The trigger is set only when the totaled value reaches the configured value of the threshold value trigger and a new process value is entered in the send buffer. The method is explained based on the following example in which a threshold value of 2.0 is configured. CP 154xSP-1 104 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Table 4- 11 Example of the integration calculation of a threshold value configured with 2.0 Time [s] (calculation cycle) Process value stored in the send buffer Current process value 0 20.0 Absolute deviation from the stored value Integrated deviation 20.0 0 0 0.5 20.3 +0.3 0.3 1.0 19.8 -0.2 0.1 1.5 20.2 +0.2 0.3 2.0 20.5 +0.5 0.8 2.5 20.3 +0.3 1.1 3.0 20.4 +0.4 1.5 20.5 +0.5 2.0 4.0 20.4 -0.1 -0.1 4.5 20.1 -0.4 -0.5 5.0 19.9 -0.6 -1.1 5.5 20.1 -0.4 -1.5 19.9 -0.6 -2.1 3.5 6.0 20.5 19.9 With the changes in the process value shown in the example, the threshold value trigger configured with 2.0 fires twice: At the time 3.5 s: The value of the integrated deviation is at 2.0. The new process value stored in the send buffer is 20.5. At the time 6.0 s: The value of the integrated deviation is at 2.1. The new process value stored in the send buffer is 19.9. In this example, if a deviation of the process value of approximately 0.5 should fire the trigger, then with the behavior of the process value shown here a threshold value of approximately 1.5 ... 2.5 would need to be configured. 4.7.12.12 Analog value preprocessing CPs with data point configuration support analog value preprocessing. For analog value data points, some or all of the functions described below can be configured. Requirements and restrictions You will find the requirements for the configuration of the preprocessing options and restrictions in the section relating to the particular function. Note Restrictions due to configured triggers The analog value preprocessing options "Error suppression time", "Limit value calculation" and "Smoothing" are not performed if no threshold value trigger is configured for the relevant data point. In these cases, the read process value of the data point is entered in the image memory of the CP before the preprocessing cycle of the threshold value calculation (500 ms) elapses. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 105 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Sequence of the analog value preprocessing options The values of analog inputs configured as an event are processed on the CPU according to the following scheme: Figure 4-7 Sequence of the analog value preprocessing CP 154xSP-1 106 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The 500 millisecond cycle is started by the integrative threshold value calculation. In this cycle, the values are saved even when the following preprocessing options are enabled: Unipolar transfer Fault suppression time Limit value calculation Smoothing Mean value generation Note Restricted preprocessing options if mean value generation is configured If you configure mean value generation for an analog value event, the following preprocessing options are not available: * Unipolar transfer * Fault suppression time * Smoothing Function With this parameter, acquired analog values are transferred as mean values. If mean value generation is active, it makes sense to configure a time trigger.. The current values of an analog data point are read in a 100 millisecond cycle and totaled. The number of read values per time unit depends on the read cycle of the CPU and the CPU scan cycle of the CP. The mean value is calculated from the accumulated values as soon as the transfer is triggered by a trigger. Following this, the accumulation starts again so that the next mean value can be calculated. The mean value can also be calculated if the transmission of the analog value message is triggered by a request from the communications partner. The duration of the mean value calculation period is then the time from the last transmission (for example triggered by the trigger) to the time of the request. Once again, the accumulation restarts so that the next mean value can be calculated. Input modules: Overflow range / underflow range As soon as a value is acquired in the overflow or underflow range, mean value generation is stopped. The value 32767 / 7FFFh or -32768 / 8000h is saved as an invalid mean value for the current mean value calculation period and sent with the next message. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 107 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The calculation of a new mean value is then started. If the analog value remains in the overflow or underflow range, one of the two values named is again saved as an invalid mean value and sent when the next message is triggered. Note Fault suppression time > 0 configured If you have configured an error suppression time and then enable mean value generation, the value of the error suppression time is grayed out but no longer used. If mean value generation is enabled, the error suppression time is set to 0 (zero) internally. Unipolar transfer Restrictions Unipolar transfer cannot be configured at the same time as mean value generation. Enabling unipolar transfer has no effect when mean value generation is activated. Function With unipolar transfer, negative values are corrected to zero. This can be desirable if values from the underrange should not be transferred as real measured values. Exception: With process data from input modules, the value -32768 / 8000h for wire break of a live zero input is transferred. With a software input, on the other hand, all values lower than zero are corrected to zero. Fault suppression time Requirements for the function Configuration of the threshold trigger for this data point Restrictions The fault suppression time cannot be configured at the same time as mean value generation. A configured value has no effect when mean value generation is activated. Function A typical use case for this parameter is the suppression of peak current values when starting up powerful motors that would otherwise be signaled to the control center as a disruption. The transmission of an analog value in the overflow (7FFFh) or underflow range (8000h) is suppressed for the specified time. The value 7FFFH or 8000H is only sent after the fault suppression time has elapsed, if it is still pending. If the value returns to the measuring range before the fault suppression time elapses, the current value is transferred. CP 154xSP-1 108 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Input modules The suppression is adjusted to analog values that are acquired directly by the S7 analog input modules as raw values. These modules return the specified values for the overflow or underflow range for all input ranges (also for live zero inputs). An analog value in the overflow range (32767 / 7FFFh) or underflow range (-32768 / 8000h) is not transferred for the duration of the fault suppression time. This also applies to live zero inputs. The value in the overflow/underflow range is only sent after the fault suppression time has elapsed, if it is still pending. Recommendation for finished values that were preprocessed by the CPU: If the CPU makes preprocessed finished values available in bit memory or in a data block, suppression is only possible or useful if these finished values also adopt the values listed above 32767 / 7FFFh or -32768 / 8000h in the overflow or underflow range. If this is not the case, the parameter should not be configured for preprocessed values. For finished values preprocess in the CPU, the limits for the overflow and underflow can be freely assigned. Smoothing factor Requirements for the function Configuration of the threshold trigger for this data point Restrictions The smoothing factor cannot be configured at the same time as mean value generation. A configured value has no effect when mean value generation is activated. Function Analog values that fluctuate quickly can be evened out using the smoothing function. The smoothing factors are calculated according to the following formula as with S7 analog input modules. where yn = smoothed value in the current cycle n yn-1 = smoothed value in the previous cycle n-1 xn = acquired value in the current cycle n k = smoothing factor The following values can be configured for the module as the smoothing factor. 1 = No smoothing 4 = Weak smoothing 32 = Medium smoothing 64 = Strong smoothing CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 109 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Set limit value 'low' / Set limit value 'high' Requirements for the function Configuration of the threshold trigger for this data point PLC tag in the bit memory operand area or data area The analog value data point must be linked to a PLC tag in the bit memory or data area (data block). For PLC tags of hardware modules (input operand area) limit value configuration is not possible. The configuration of limit values is pointless for measured values that have already been preprocessed on the CPU. Function In these two input boxes, you can set a limit value in the direction of the start of the measuring range or in the direction of the end of the measuring range. You can also evaluate the limit values, for example as the start or end of the measuring range. Status identifier "OVER_RANGE" If a limit value is overshot or undershot, the status identifier "OVER_RANGE" of the data point is set. This status identifiers are described in the section Status IDs of the data points (Page 93). The "OVER_RANGE" bit of the status identifier of the data point is set as follows when the relevant analog value is transferred: Limit value 'high': - If the limit value is exceeded: OVER_RANGE = 1 - If the value then falls below the limit value: OVER_RANGE = 0 Limit value 'low': - If the value falls below the limit value: OVER_RANGE = 1 - If the value then exceeds the limit value: OVER_RANGE = 0 Configuration of the limit value The limit value is configured as a whole decimal number. The range of values is based on the range of values of the raw value of analog input modules. Range Raw value (16 bits) of the PLC tag Decimal Hexadecimal Module output [mA] 0 .. 20 -20 .. +20 4 .. 20 (unipolar) (bipolar) (life zero) Measuring range [%] Overflow 32767 7FFF > 23.515 > 23.515 > 22.810 > 117.593 Overrange 32511 7EFF 23.515 23.515 22.810 117.593 Nominal range (unipolar / life zero) ... ... ... ... ... ... 27649 6C01 20.001 20.001 20.001 100.004 27648 6C00 20 20 100 ... ... ... ... ... 0 0000 0 4 0 CP 154xSP-1 110 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Range Raw value (16 bits) of the PLC tag Decimal Nominal range (bipolar) Undershoot / wire break Module output [mA] 0 .. 20 -20 .. +20 4 .. 20 (unipolar) (bipolar) (life zero) Measuring range [%] 27648 6C00 20 100 ... ... ... ... 0 0000 0 0 ... .... ... ... -27648 9400 -1 FFFF Underrange (unipolar / life zero) Underrange (bipolar) Hexadecimal -20 -0.001 -100 3.999 -0.004 ... ... ... ... ... -4864 ED00 -3.518 1.185 -17.59 -27649 93FF -20.001 -100.004 ... ... ... ... -32512 8100 -23.516 -117.593 -32768 8000 < -3.518 < 1.185 < -17.593 Note Evaluation of the value even when the option is disabled If you enable one or both options and configure a value and then disable the option later, the grayed out value is nevertheless evaluated. To disable the two options, delete the previously configured values limit values from the input boxes and then disable the relevant option. Recommendation for quickly fluctuating analog values: If the analog value fluctuates quickly, it may be useful to smooth the analog value first if limit values are configured. 4.7.12.13 Command output Processing options of command outputs Parameters Special output options can be enabled for command outputs in stations which process commands from a central station or a master. The two output options can be enabled alternatively: CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 111 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) LATCH_ON/OFF The function permanently latches a command output to the value 0 or 1. Note: The latched value is only canceled by a new command. Alternatively, the command can be reset by the user program. PULSE_ON/OFF The function evaluates the number and length of the signals (pulses) of commands from a master station. Data point types The output options can be configured dependent on the protocol for the following data point types: ST7 Command output (Cmd01B_R) IEC Single command DNP3 Binary Command Output Reference to specifications The output options correspond to the following parts of the specification: IEC Qualifier of command - IEC 60870-5-101, Part 1 DNP3 Control Code, Operation Type field (OP Type) - Volume 6, Part 2, Objects Protocol-dependent processing ST7 LATCH_ON/OFF The function latches the value of a command as described above. PULSE_ON/OFF The function evaluates the "command output time" for a single pulse (see below). IEC LATCH_ON/OFF The function latches the value of a command as described above. CP 154xSP-1 112 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) PULSE_ON/OFF The function is coded by the master via a "Qualifier of command". The following codings are evaluated by the communication module in the station: - QU (Type 1.1) <1> short pulse duration Corresponding parameter for the module: "Short pulse duration" - QU (Type 1.1) <2> long pulse duration Corresponding parameter for the module: "Long pulse duration" - S/E (Type 6) <0> execute Corresponding parameter for the module: "Command execution mode" - S/E (Type 6) <1> select Corresponding parameter for the module: "Command execution mode" For parameter assignment see below. DNP3 The two functions are encoded by the master via the control code of the object. LATCH_ON/OFF The function latches the value of a command as described above. PULSE_ON/OFF The function evaluates the number of pulses and duration. The master sends a "Control Code" to the station with the "PULSE_ON" function with information on the "Count", "On-time" and "Off-time". The data point of the communication module in the station evaluates this information via the parameters "Max. pulse duration", "Pulse duration replacement time" and "Max. number of pulses". The following encodings of the control code are evaluated by the data point: Table 4- 12 DNP3 Control Codes Receipt of: Reaction of data point upon activation of: Control Code TripClose Code Operation Type field PULSE_ON / OFF LATCH_ON / OFF 0x01 NUL PULSE_ON The output is set to 1 for the "Max. pulse duration". The command is rejected. 0x03 NUL LATCH_ON The command is rejected. The output is set permanently to 1. 0x04 NUL LATCH_OFF The command is rejected. The output is set permanently to 0. 0x41 CLOSE PULSE_ON The output is set permanently to 1. The command is rejected. 0x81 TRIP PULSE_ON The output is set permanently to 0. The command is rejected. The clear field (CR) is not evaluated. The count field is always = 1. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 113 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Parameter Name: Max. number of pulses Range of values: * DNP3: 0 ... 255 Default: 1 Explanation: Monitors the number of pulses sent by the master (Count). If the number of pulses received from the master exceeds the value configured here, the command is discarded. * ST7 and IEC: Fixed assignment with "1" If 0 (zero) is set, the monitoring is disabled. Name: Max. pulse duration (s) (DNP3 only) Range of values: 0 ... 65535 Default: 0 Explanation: Monitors the pulse duration transmitted by the master with the command (On-time). If the pulse duration sent by the master exceeds the value configured here, the command is discarded by the communication module if no "Pulse duration replacement time" has been configured. When the "Max. pulse duration" is exceeded and "Pulse duration replacement time" is configured, the pulse duration sent by the master is checked for the "Pulse duration replacement time". If the value is 0 (zero), no "Max. pulse duration" is checked. Name: Pulse duration replacement time (s) (DNP3 only) Range of values: 0 ... 65535 Default: 0 Explanation: Replacement value for the pulse duration If the pulse duration received from the master exceeds the value configured in "Max pulse duration". If the value is 0 (zero), no replacement value is used. If the ""Max. pulse duration" and "Pulse duration replacement time" are both configured with zero, each command is discarded. Name: Short pulse duration (s) (IEC only) Range of values: 0 ... 65535 Default: 0 CP 154xSP-1 114 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Explanation: Commands from the master with the Qualifier of command = <1> (short pulse duration) are output by the communication module for the duration configured here. If "Short pulse duration" is configured with the value 0 (zero), commands are discarded by the module with the Qualifier of command of <1>. Name: Long pulse duration (s) (IEC only) Range of values: 0 ... 65535 Default: 0 Explanation: Commands from the master with the Qualifier of command = <2> (long pulse duration) are output by the communication module for the duration configured here. If "Long pulse duration" is configured with the value 0 (zero), commands are discarded by the module with the Qualifier of command of <2>. Name: Command output time (s) (ST7 only) Range of values: 0 ... 65535 Default: 0 Explanation: Period for which the command is output. The duration is valid for all 8 channels of the SINAUT object. When the time expires, the output is automatically reset. With zero, a set command output is not automatically reset. In this case, you need to reset the output via the user program. Name: Command execution mode (IEC only) Range of values: * Execute directly * Select and operate CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 115 Configuration 4.7 Telecontrol (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) Default: Execute directly Explanation: * Execute directly The command is transferred immediately to the CPU. * Select and operate (select and execute) The command is transferred to the communication module after selection in the master station. The communication module acknowledges receipt of the selection ASDU with the Qualifier "S/E (Type 6) <1> select". After receiving the acknowledgment the master sends the execute command with the Qualifier "S/E (Type 6) <1> execute". Only then does the communication module transfer the command to the CPU. 4.7.12.14 Partner stations Partner of the data point Enable the partner or partners with which the selected data point will exchange data using the check box: You can configure or change the partners in the overview table or in the "Partner stations" tab of the CP. The data is applied in the data point editor. With the TeleControl Basic protocol, you can choose between the telecontrol server or a partner for inter-station communication (S7 station) as partner. With the ST7 protocol, only those partners to which a telecontrol connection was configured can be selected. Enabling the partner for data points - TeleControl Basic Enable the partner with which the selected data point will exchange data. A communications can be configured. The telecontrol server and an S7 station cannot be selected as the partner for a data point at the same time. The communications partner may be: The telecontrol server Since the telecontrol server is always enabled as a communications partner of the CP, it is adopted as default in this tab. The option "Telecontrol server enabled" is selected and grayed out. An S7 station The station must be reachable via the "TeleControl Basic" protocol. You specify the communications partners of the CP in the "Partner stations" parameter group. CP 154xSP-1 116 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security Activate one of the two options. Telecontrol server enabled Only the telecontrol server is a communications partner of the data point. Partner for inter-station communication Only the S7 station is a communications partner of the data point. Partner number (inter-station communication) Specify the partner CP for inter-station communication for the selected data point by selecting the required partner from the drop-down list. The access ID of the relevant partner is shown in brackets. The partners you specified in the "Partner stations" > "Partner for inter-station communication" can be selected. Data point index Index of the corresponding data point on the communications partner. Note: The data pair of the sending and receiving CP must have an identical data point index. A receiving data point of CP 2 corresponds to a sending data point of CP 1 with the same data point index. For the opposite communications direction, a second pair of data points must be created: A sending data point of CP 2 corresponds to the receiving data point of CP 1. Once again, both have an identical data point index. 4.8 Security The parameters and their configurability depend on the CP type and the telecontrol protocol used. For information on individual functions, see section Application and functions (Page 11). To be able to configure the security functions, you need to create a security user; see section Security user (Page 117). 4.8.1 Security user Creating a security user You need the relevant configuration rights to be able to configure security functions. For this purpose, you need to create at least one security user with the corresponding rights. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 117 Configuration 4.8 Security Navigate to the global security settings > "User and roles" > "Users" tab. 1. Create a user with the associated parameters such as authentication mode, session duration, etc. 2. Assign this user the role "NET Standard" or "NET Administrator" in the area below "Assigned roles". After logging on, this user can make the necessary settings in the STEP 7 project. In the future, continue to log on as this user when working on security parameters. 4.8.2 Security parameters of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC 4.8.2.1 CP identification TeleControl Basic Project number The project number is the same for all telecontrol CPs in a STEP 7 project. TCSB evaluates project numbers from 1 ... 2000. If you change the project number, this parameter is changed for all CPs in the STEP 7 project. Station number For each station with a telecontrol CP, an individual station number is configured. TCSB evaluates station numbers from 1 ... 8000. Telecontrol password Password for the authentication of the CP on the telecontrol server. 8 ... 29 characters of the ASCII character set 0x20...0x7e. The password can be the same for all CPs of the STEP 7 project. The same password is configured in the "TCSB" application for this station. 4.8.2.2 MSC authentication MSC authentication - Ethernet interface When using the ST7 protocol, the authentication data for the "MSC / MSCsec" protocol must be configured for the CP as MSC station. Parameter User name User name for communication using MSC Password Password for communication using MSC CP 154xSP-1 118 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security The user name and password must be different for every MSC station in the network. 4.8.2.3 DNP3 security options Authentication and key exchange with the DNP3 protocol If the Security functions are enabled, the master and station (CP) authenticate themselves with a secret key, the pre-shared key. With the help of the common pre-shared key, after the first connection establishment between master and DNP CP session keys are agreed that are then renewed cyclically. Renewal of the session keys is normally initiated by the master. The criteria for renewing the key are specified in the following parameters. Authentication requests before key exchange Key exchange interval As soon as one of these conditions is met, the session key is renewed. DNP3 security options Enable DNP3 security options Method with which the CP authenticates itself to the master. - Disabled Non-secure authentication. If this option is selected the CP logs on only using its station address. - Enabled Secure authentication. If this option is selected, the CP and master use the DNP3 Security mechanisms. The parameters are configured as follows. IKE mode Selection of the mode for key exchange (IKE) - The Main Mode is the default mode. - The Aggressive Mode is somewhat faster but transfers the identity unencrypted. Security statistics Specifies whether the statistics of security events are sent to the master. Security events are authentication requests to the CP. If the option is enabled, authentication requests with date, time and result are saved on the CP and sent to the master for further evaluation. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 119 Configuration 4.8 Security SHA-1 interlock Setting to select whether the CP may use the secure hash algorithm SHA-1 if "SHA-256" was configured as the Secure hash algorithm and the master does not support SHA-256. Meaning of the options: - SHA-1 mode allowed The CP can use SHA-1 if the master does not support SHA-256. - SHA-1 mode not allowed The CP may not use SHA-1. Note: If the master does not support SHA-256, no connection will be established if this option is selected. Secure hash algorithm Selection of the Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA). Possible selections: - SHA-1 - SHA-256 Key wrap algorithm Selection of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). Possible selections: - AES-128 - AES-256 Key length Length of the pre-shared key in bytes The following lengths are used depending on the key wrap algorithm. - For AES-128: 16 bytes - For AES-256: 32 bytes Max. number of key exchange requests The function is disabled. Authentication requests before key exchange Maximum number of authentication requests of the CP with the master before the session key is renewed. If you enter 0 (zero), the function is deactivated and the session key is renewed only depending on the key exchange interval. Recommendation: Set the number for the CP twice as high as for the master. Key exchange interval Period after which the session key is exchanged again between the CP and the master. If you enter 0 (zero), the function is deactivated and the key will never be renewed. The interval must be matched up on both communications partners. CP 154xSP-1 120 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security Authentication timeout Maximum waiting (seconds) time for the response from the master to an authentication request of the CP. Exceeding the wait time is evaluated as an error by the CP. In this case, the CP generates a Security event and sends this to the master. Range of values: 1 ... 65535 Pre-shared key The pre-shared key of the CP must be identical to the pre-shared key that the master uses. The key must have the key length configured above (2 characters per byte). The pre-shared key can be configured in two ways: - Manual configuration Enter the pre-shared key manually as a hexadecimal value. - Import as file Import the pre-shared key from the file system of the engineering station if the preshared key was generated by the master or another system. 4.8.3 Firewall 4.8.3.1 Pre-check of messages by the MAC firewall. Each incoming or outgoing frame initially runs through the MAC firewall (layer 2). If the frame is discarded at this level, it will not be checked by the IP firewall (layer 3). This means that with suitable MAC firewall rules, IP communication can be restricted or blocked. 4.8.3.2 Settings for online security diagnostics and downloading to station with the firewall activated Setting the firewall for online functions With the security functions enabled, follow the steps outlined below: 1. In the global security settings (see project tree), select the entry "Firewall > Services > Define services for IP rules". 2. Select the "ICMP" tab. 3. Insert a new entry of the type "Echo Reply" and another of the type "Echo Request". 4. Now select the CP in the S7 station. 5. Enable the advanced firewall mode in the local security settings of the CP in the "Security > Firewall" parameter group. 6. Open the "IP rules" parameter group. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 121 Configuration 4.8 Security 7. In the table, insert a new IP rule for the previously created global services as follows: - Action: Allow; "From external -> To station " with the globally created "Echo request" service - Action: Allow; "From station -> to external" with the globally created "Echo reply" service 8. For the IP rule for the Echo Request, enter the IP address of the engineering station in "Source IP address". This ensures that only ICMP frames (ping) from your engineering station can pass through the firewall. 4.8.3.3 Notation for the source IP address (advanced firewall mode) If you specify an address range for the source IP address in the advanced firewall settings of the CP, make sure that the notation is correct: Separate the two IP addresses only using a hyphen. Correct: 192.168.10.0-192.168.10.255 Do not enter any other characters between the two IP addresses. Incorrect: 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.255 If you enter the range incorrectly, the firewall rule will not be used. 4.8.3.4 Firewall settings for S7 connections via a VPN tunnel IP rules in advanced firewall mode If you set up configured connections (S7, OUC) with a VPN tunnel between the CP and a communications partner, you will need to adapt the local firewall settings of the CP: In advanced firewall mode ("Security > Firewall > IP rules") select the action "Allow*" for both communications directions of the VPN tunnel. 4.8.4 Log settings - Filtering of the system events Communications problems if the value for system events is set too high If the value for filtering the system events is set too high, you may not be able to achieve the maximum performance for the communication. The high number of output error messages can delay or prevent the processing of the communications connections. In "Security > Log settings > Configure system events", set the "Level:" parameter to the value "3 (Error)" to ensure the reliable establishment of the communications connections. CP 154xSP-1 122 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security 4.8.5 E-mail configuration Requirements and necessary information Note the following requirements in the CP configuration for the transfer of e-mails: The security functions are enabled. The time of the CP is synchronized. For the configuration, you require the data of the SMTP server and the user account: Server address, port number, user name, password, e-mail address of the sender (CP) E-mail configuration No configuration As default, the sending of e-mails is disabled. Activate SMTP Enable this option if you want to use the sending of unencrypted e-mails via SMTP port 25. Enable SSL/TLS If your e-mail service provider only supports encrypted transfer, enable this option. Select the protocol via the port number: - Port no. 587 When using STARTTLS the CP sends encrypted e-mails. - Port no. 465 When using SSL/TLS (SMTPS) the CP sends encrypted e-mails. Ask your e.mail service provider which option is supported. If you want to use an Internet connection with an IPv6 infrastructure, note the information in the section IPv6 (Page 52). 4.8.6 VPN 4.8.6.1 VPN (Virtual Private Network) VPN - IPsec Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a technology for secure transportation of confidential data in public IP networks, for example the Internet. With VPN, a secure connection (IPsec tunnel) is set up and operated between two secure IT systems or networks via a non-secure network. The IPsec tunnel forwards all data even from protocols of higher layers (HTTP, FTP, etc.). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 123 Configuration 4.8 Security The data traffic between two network components is transported unrestricted through another network. This allows entire networks to be connected together via a neighboring or intermediate network. Properties VPN forms a logical subnet that is embedded in a neighboring (assigned) network. VPN uses the usual addressing mechanisms of the assigned network, however in terms of the data, it transports its own frames and therefore operates independent of the rest of this network. VPN allows communication of the VPN partners with the assigned network. VPN is based on tunnel technology and can be individually configured. Communication between the VPN partners is protected from eavesdropping or manipulation by using passwords, public keys or a digital certificate (authentication). Areas of application Local area networks can be connected together securely via the Internet ("site-to-site" connection). Secure access to a company network ("end-to-site" connection) Secure access to a server ("end-to-end" connection) Communication between two servers without being accessible to third parties (end-to-end or host-to-host connection) Ensuring information security in networked automation systems Securing the computer systems including the associated data communication within an automation network or secure remote access via the Internet Secure remote access from a PC/programming device to automation devices or networks protected by security modules via public networks. Cell protection concept With Industrial Ethernet Security, individual devices or network segments of an Ethernet network can be protected: Access to individual devices and network segments protected by security modules is allowed. Secure connections via non-secure network structures becomes possible. Due to the combination of different security measures such as firewall, NAT/NAPT routers and VPN via IPsec tunnels, security modules protect against the following: Data espionage Data manipulation Unwanted access CP 154xSP-1 124 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security 4.8.6.2 Creating a VPN tunnel for S7 communication between stations Requirements To allow a VPN tunnel to be created for S7 communication between two S7 stations or between an S7 station and an engineering station with a security CP (for example CP 1628), the following requirements must be met: The two stations have been configured. The CPs in both stations must support the security functions. The Ethernet interfaces of the two stations must be networked. Note Communication also possible via an IP router Communication between the two stations is also possible via an IP router. To use this communications path, however, you need to make further settings. Procedure To create a VPN tunnel, you need to work through the following steps: 1. Creating a security user If the security user has already been created: Log on as this user. 2. Enable the "Activate security features" option 3. Creating the VPN group and assigning security modules 4. Configure the properties of the VPN group 5. Configure local VPN properties of the two CPs You will find a detailed description of the individual steps in the following paragraphs of this section. Enable security functions After logon, enable the "Activate security features" option on both CPs under "Security". You now have the security functions available for both CPs. Creating the VPN group and assigning security modules 1. In the global security settings, navigate to "VPN groups" > "Add new VPN group". 2. Double-click on the entry "Add new VPN group", to create a VPN group. Result: A new VPN group is displayed below the selected entry. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 125 Configuration 4.8 Security 3. Double-click on the "VPN groups" > "Assign module to a VPN group" entry. 4. Assign the security modules between which VPN tunnels will be established to the VPN group. Note Current date and current time on the CP for VPN connections To establish a VPN connection and for the associated recognition of the certificates to be exchanged, the current date and the current time are required on both stations. Configure the properties of the VPN group 1. Double-click on the newly created VPN group. Result: The properties of the VPN group are displayed under "Authentication". 2. Enter a name for the VPN group. Configure the settings of the VPN group in the properties. These properties define the default settings of the VPN group that you can change at any time. Note Specifying the VPN properties of the CPs You specify the VPN properties of the CPs in the "Security" > "Firewall" > "VPN" parameter group of the relevant module. Result You have created a VPN tunnel. The firewalls of the CPs are activated automatically: The "Activate firewall" check box is selected by default when you create a VPN group. You cannot disable the option. Download the configuration to all modules that belong to the VPN group. 4.8.6.3 VPN communication with SOFTNET Security Client (engineering station) VPN tunnel communication works only if the internal node is disabled Under certain circumstances the establishment of VPN tunnel communication between SOFTNET Security ClientSOFTNET Security Client and the CP fails. SOFTNET Security Client also attempts to establish VPN tunnel communication to a lowerlevel internal node. This communication establishment to a non-existing node prevents the required communication being established to the CP. To establish successful VPN tunnel communication to the CP, you need to disable the internal node. CP 154xSP-1 126 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security Use the procedure for disabling the node as explained below only if the described problem occurs. Disable the node in the SOFTNET Security Client tunnel overview: 1. Remove the checkmark in the "Enable active learning" check box. The lower-level node initially disappears from the tunnel list. 2. In the tunnel list, select the required connection to the CP. 3. With the right mouse button, select "Enable all members" in the shortcut menu. The lower-level node appears again temporarily in the tunnel list. 4. Select the lower-level node in the tunnel list. 5. With the right mouse button, select "Delete entry" in the shortcut menu. Result: The lower-level node is now fully disabled. VPN tunnel communication to the CP can be established. 4.8.6.4 Establishment of VPN tunnel communication between the CP and SCALANCE M Create a VPN tunnel between the CP and a SCALANCE M router as described for the stations. VPN tunnel communication will only be established if you have selected the check box "Perfect Forward Secrecy" in the global security settings of the created VPN group ("VPN groups > Authentication"). If the check box is not selected, the CP rejects establishment of the tunnel. 4.8.6.5 CP as passive subscriber of VPN connections Setting permission for VPN connection establishment with passive subscribers If the CP is connected to another VPN subscriber via a gateway, you need to set the permission for VPN connection establishment to "Responder". This is the case in the following typical configuration: VPN subscriber (active) gateway (dyn. IP address) Internet gateway (fixed IP address) CP (passive) Configure the permission for VPN connection establishment for the CP as a passive subscriber as follows: 1. In STEP 7, go to the devices and network view. 2. Select the CP. 3. Open the parameter group "VPN" in the local security settings. 4. For each VPN connection with the CP as a passive VPN subscriber, change the default setting "Initiator/Responder" to the setting "Responder". CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 127 Configuration 4.8 Security 4.8.6.6 SINEMA Remote Connect Remote maintenance with SINEMA Remote Connect (SINEMA RC) The application "SINEMA Remote Connect" (SINEMA RC) is available for remote maintenance purposes. SINEMA RC uses OpenVPN for encryption of the data. The center of the communication is SINEMA RC Server via which communication runs between the subscribers and that manages the configuration of the communications system. Preparatory steps Execute the following steps before start configuring the SINEMA RC connection of the module in STEP 7. They are the prerequisite for a consistent STEP 7 project. Configuration of SINEMA Remote Connect - Server Configure SINEMA RC - Server as necessary (not in STEP 7). The communication module and its communication partners must be configured in the SINEMA RC Server. Exporting the CA certificate (optional) If you want to use the server certificate as authentication method of the communication module during connection establishment, export the CA certificate from SINEMA RC Server. Then import the CA certificate from SINEMA RC - Server to the engineering station. Alternatively, you can use the fingerprint of the server certificate as authentication method of the communication module. Note Recommended authentication method: The recommended authentication method is the one using the CA certificate. The certificate is valid for 10 years. The fingerprint, on the other hand, is derived from the server certificate. Its validity may be significantly shorter. Configuration of SINEMA Remote Connect Importing your own certificate 1. Navigate to the parameter group "Security > Certificate manager". 2. Open the certificate selection with a double-click on the first free table row of the local certificate manager. 3. Select the CA certificate of SINEMA RC - Server. Then navigate to the parameter group "Security > VPN". CP 154xSP-1 128 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security VPN > General 1. Activate VPN 2. For the parameter "VPN connection type", select the option "Automatic OpenVPN configuration via SINEMA Remote Connect Server" if you wish to use communication via SINEMA Remote Connect. If you select "Internet Key Exchange (IKE) ...", you can use communication via IPsec tunnels. SINEMA Remote Connect Server Enter the address and port number of the server. Server Verification Here you select the authentication method of the communication module during connection establishment. CA Certificate Under "CA certificate" select the CA certificate from SINEMA RC - Server that was previously imported and activated in the local certificate manager. The module generally checks the CA certificate of the server and its validity period. The two options cannot be changed. Fingerprint When you select this authentication method, you enter the fingerprint of the server certificate of SINEMA RC - Server. Authentication Device ID Enter the device ID generated for the module in SINEMA RC. Device password Enter the device password of the module configured in SINEMA RC. Max. number of characters: 127 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 129 Configuration 4.8 Security Optional settings The connection establishment is configured in the "Security > VPN > Optional settings" parameter group with the parameter "Connection type". Update interval With this parameter you set the interval at which the CP queries the configuration on the SINEMA RC Server. Note that with the setting 0 (zero) changes to the configuration of the SINEMA RC Server may result in the CP no longer being capable of establishing a connection to the SINEMA RC Server. "Connection type" The two options of the parameter have the following effect on the connection establishment: - Auto The module establishes a connection to the SINEMA RCServer. The OpenVPN connection is retained until the connection parameters are changed by the SINEMA Remote Connect Server. If the connection is interrupted, the CP automatically reestablishes the connection. If the connection parameters are changed by the SINEMA Remote Connect Server, the CP requests the new connection data after the update interval configured above has elapsed. - PLC trigger The option is intended for sporadic communication of the module via the SINEMA RC Server. You can use this option when you want to establish temporary connections between the module and a PC. The temporary connections are established via a PLC tag and can be used in servicing situations, for example. PLC tag for connection establishment If the option "PLC trigger" is selected, the module establishes a connection when the PLC tag (Bool) changes to the value 1. During operation the PLC tag can be set when necessary, for example using an HMI panel. When the PLC tag is reset to 0, the connection is terminated again. 4.8.7 SNMP SNMP You will find the range of functions of the device for SNMP in the section Diagnostics with SNMP (Page 144). If the security functions are enabled, you have the following selection and setting options. CP 154xSP-1 130 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.8 Security SNMP "Enable SNMP" If the option is enabled, communication via SNMP is released on the device. As default, SNMPv1 is enabled. If the option is disabled, queries from SNMP clients are not replied to either via SNMPv1 or via SNMPv3. "Use SNMPv1" Enables the use of SNMPv1 for the device. For information on the configuration of the required community strings see below (SNMPv1). "Use SNMPv3" Enables the use of SNMPv3 for the device. For information on the configuration of the required algorithms see below (SNMPv3). SNMPv1 The community strings need to be sent along with queries to the device via SNMPv1. Note the use of lowercase letters with the preset community strings! "Reading community string" The string is required for read access. Leave the preset string "public" or configure a string. "Allow write access" If the option is enabled write access to the device is released and the corresponding community string can be edited. "Writing community string" The string is required for write access and can also be used for read access. Leave the preset string "private" or configure a string. Note Security of the access For security reasons, change the preset and generally known strings "public" and "private". SNMPv3 The algorithms need to be configured for encrypted access to the device via SNMPv3. "Authentication algorithm" Select the authentication method to be used from the drop-down list. "Encryption algorithm" Select the encryption method to be used from the drop-down list. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 131 Configuration 4.8 Security User management In the user management that you will find in the global security settings, assign the various users their role. Below the properties of the roles you can see the rights list of the particular role, for example the various types of access using SNMP. For new roles, you can freely configure individual rights. You will find information on users, roles and the password policy in the information system of STEP 7. 4.8.8 Certificate manager If the security functions are enabled, the certificates for all security modules involved are generated in the STEP 7 project, for example to allow communication via VPN connections. Certificates generated by STEP 7 such as SSL certificates or VPN group certificates are automatically assigned to the corresponding modules and do not need to be assigned using the local security settings. The local certificate manager Certificates that were imported via the certificate manager in the global security settings are not automatically assigned to the corresponding modules. Imported certificates must be included in the list of trustworthy partner certificates manually via the "Certificate manager" entry in the local security settings. When assigning a CA certificate the module is also assigned the certificates derived from it. Adding certificates Via the local certificate manager, assign certificates of the partners to the CP for certain services, e.g. secure sending of e-mails. 1. To do this, click the table cell "Add new". 2. Click on the button on a white background "...". 3. In the certificate list that opens, you can either add a new certificate using the "Add" button or select an existing certificate of the project using the check mark symbol. You can recognize the properties of the displayed certificates in the global certificate manager. Certificates for the CP 1542SP-1 IRC Requirement in the global security settings For the secure sending of e-mails, import the certificate of the e-mail service provider into the certificate manager. CP 154xSP-1 132 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.9 Messages (e-mail) Assign the certificate in the CP configuration Select the following certificate in the CP configuration: Table "Trustworthy client certificates": The certificate of the e-mail service provider Certificates for the CP 1543SP-1 Before certificates can be referenced in the program blocks for Secure Communication, these certificates must be assigned to the Security module as device certificates via the local certificate manager. Requirement in the global security settings To be able to assign the CP certificate of a communications partner, you need to first import the certificates of the partner in the global certificate manager (Global security settings). To make the assigned certificate known to the partner module, this certificate must be entered in the list of trustworthy partner certificates after import. Assign the certificates in the CP configuration Select the following certificates in the CP configuration: Table "Device certificates": The device certificate of the CP generated by STEP 7 Table "Certificates of the partner devices": The imported certificate of the partner 4.9 Messages (e-mail) Validity The function is supported by: CP 1542SP-1 IRC CP 1543SP-1 Configuring e-mails If important events occur, the CP can send e-mails to communications partners. Note E-mails via the message editor The following information applies to e-mails configured with the message editor. Sending e-mails via OUC program blocks is not affected. For information on opening the message editor, see section Data point configuration (Page 79). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 133 Configuration 4.9 Messages (e-mail) Requirements Note the following requirements in the CP configuration for the transfer of e-mails: The security functions are enabled. The time of the CP is synchronized. Configuring the "E-mail configuration" parameter group (see "Security" parameter group) You require the recipient addresses to configure the messages. Trigger: Triggering e-mail transfer Using the "Trigger" parameter group in the message table, you configure which of the following events triggers the sending of the e-mail: CPU changes to STOP. CPU changes to RUN. The connection to the partner is interrupted. The connection to the partner is re-established. The trigger signal of a PLC tag is sent. For the trigger signal to send the e-mail, the edge change (0 1) of a trigger bit is evaluated that is set by the user program. When necessary, a separate trigger bit can be configured for each e-mail. If the memory area of the trigger bit is in the bit memory or in a data block, the trigger bit is reset to zero (FALSE) when the e-mail is sent. For other memory areas, you need to reset the trigger bit with the user program. With the "TeleControl Basic" protocol, the following events can be configured as the trigger of an e-mail: Connection establishment to the partner has failed. A TeleService session has started. A TeleService session has ended. Enable identifier for processing status If this option is enabled in STEP 7, a status is output on the CP that provides information about the processing status of the sent message. The status is written to a PLC tag of the type DWORD or UDInt. Select this tag via the "PLC tag for processing status" box. If there are problems delivering messages, you can determine the status, for example via the Web server of the CPU, by displaying the value of the PLC tag there. For information on the significance of the individual statuses, see section Processing status of the telecontrol e-mails (Page 149). CP 154xSP-1 134 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Configuration 4.9 Messages (e-mail) Include value: Transfer the value of a PLC tag with a message If you enable the option "Include value" in the "Trigger" parameter group, the CP sends a value for the placeholder $$ from the memory area of the CPU in the message. To do this enter "$$" as a placeholder for the value to be sent in the message text. Select a PLC tag whose value will be integrated in the message. The value is entered in the message text instead of the placeholder $$. $$ can be a placeholder for data point types with a simple data type up to a size of 32 bits. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 135 Configuration 4.9 Messages (e-mail) CP 154xSP-1 136 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Program blocks 5.1 5 Program blocks for OUC Program blocks for Open User Communication (OUC) Connections of Open User Communication are not configured. For TCP / UDP / ISO-on-TCP communication via Ethernet, the blocks of Open User Communication (OUC) listed below are used. For this, create a suitable program blocks. You will find details on the program blocks in the information system of STEP 7. Note Program block versions Note that in STEP 7 you cannot use different versions of a program block in a station. Program blocks Together with the three CP types, the following OUC blocks with the specified minimum version are available to the CPU: TSEND_C V3.0 / TRCV_C V3.0 Compact blocks for: - Connection establishment/termination and sending data - Connection establishment/termination and receiving data As an alternative, use: TCON V4.0 / TDISCON V2.1 Connection establishment / connection termination TUSEND V4.0 / TURCV V4.0 Sending and receiving data via UDP TSEND V4.0 / TRCV V4.0 Sending and receiving data via TCP or ISOonTCP TMAIL_C V4.0 Sending e-mails To transfer encrypted e-mails with this block, the precise time of day is required on the CP. Configure the time-of-day synchronization. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 137 Program blocks 5.1 Program blocks for OUC For changing configuration data of the CP during runtime: T_CONFIG V1.0 Program-controlled configuration of the IP parameters See section Changing the IP parameters during runtime (Page 139) for information on this. The program block can be found in STEP 7 in the "Instructions > Communication > Open User Communication" window. Connection descriptions in system data types (SDTs) For the connection description, the blocks listed above use the parameter CONNECT (or MAIL_ADDR_PARAM with TMAIL_C). The connection description is stored in a data block whose structure is specified by the system data type (SDT). Creating an SDT for the data blocks Create the SDT required for every connection description as a data block (global DB). The SDT type is not created by selecting an entry from the "Data type" drop-down list in the declaration table of the block, but by entering the name manually in the "Data type" box, for example "TCON_IP_V4". The corresponding SDT is then created with its parameters. SDTs Depending on the CP-specific security functions, the three CP types support the following SDTs: SDTs for all three CP types - TCON_IP_V4 For transferring data via TCP or UDP - TADDR_Param For transferring data via UDP - TCON_IP_RFC For transferring data via ISO-on-TCP (direct communication between two SIMATIC S7 stations) - TMail_V4 For transferring e-mails addressing the e-mail server using an IPv4 address - TMail_V6 For transferring e-mails addressing the e-mail server using an IPv6 address - TMail_FQDN For transferring e-mails addressing the e-mail server using its name (FQDN) CP 154xSP-1 138 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Program blocks 5.2 Changing the IP parameters during runtime SDT for CP 1542SP-1 IRC and CP 1543SP-1 - TMail_V4_SEC For secure transfer of e-mails addressing the e-mail server using an IPv4 address - TMail_V6_SEC For secure transfer of e-mails addressing the e-mail server using an IPv6 address - TMail_QDN_SEC For secure transfer of e-mails addressing the e-mail server using the host name SDT only for CP 1543SP-1 - TCON_IP_V4_SEC For the secure transfer of data via TCP You will find the description of the SDTs with their parameters in the STEP 7 information system under the relevant name of the SDT. Connection establishment and termination Connections are established using the program block TCON. Note that a separate program block TCON must be called for each connection. A separate connection must be established for each communications partner even if identical blocks of data are being sent. After a successful transfer of the data, a connection can be terminated. A connection is also terminated by calling "TDISCON". Note Connection abort If an existing connection is aborted by the communications partner or due to disturbances on the network, the connection must also be terminated by calling TDISCON. Make sure that you take this into account in your programming. 5.2 Changing the IP parameters during runtime Changing the IP address during runtime As of STEP 7 V14, you can change the following address parameters of the CP programatically during runtime with T_CONFIG: IP address Subnet mask Router address CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 139 Program blocks 5.3 MODBUS blocks Note Changing the IP parameters with a dynamic IP address Note the effects of program-controlled changes to the IP parameters if the CP obtains a dynamic IP address from the Internet service provider: In this case, the CP can no longer be reached by communications partners. Note Requirement in the CP configuration To be able to change the IP parameters programatically, the option "IP address is set directly at the device" must be enabled in the configuration of the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the CP. Program blocks Program-controlled changing of the IP parameters is supported by program blocks. The program blocks access address data stored in a suitable system data type (SDT). Apart from the address parameters of the CP, with T_CONFIG the address parameters of DNS servers (IF_CONF_DNS) and NTP servers (IF_CONF_NTP) can also be changed program controlled. The following program blocks and system data types can be used: T_CONFIG Together with the following SDTs: - IF_CONF_V4 - IF_CONF_V6 - IF_CONF_NTP - IF_CONF_DNS You can find detailed information on the blocks and SDTs in the STEP 7 information system. 5.3 MODBUS blocks MODBUS (TCP) All three CP types support the program blocks for MODBUS (TCP) for the S7-1500-CPU as of V4.0: MB_CLIENT MB_SERVER You can find detailed information in the STEP 7 information system. CP 154xSP-1 140 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.1 6 Diagnostics options The following diagnostics options are available. LEDs of the module For information on the LED displays, refer to the section LEDs (Page 33). STEP 7: The "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window Here, you can obtain the following information about the online status of the selected module. STEP 7: Diagnostics functions in the "Online > Online and diagnostics" menu Using the online functions, you can read diagnostics information from the CP from an engineering station on which the project with the CP is stored. If you want to operate online diagnostics with the station via the CP, you need to select the type of communication "Enable online functions"; see section Communication types (Page 57). "Diagnostics" group The diagnostics pages are divided into the following groups: General This group displays general information on the module. Diagnostic status This group displays status information of the module from the view of the CPU. - Device-specific events Information on internal module events are displayed for modules with security or telecontrol functions. Ethernet interface Address and statistical information CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 141 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.1 Diagnostics options Industrial Remote Communication For the CP 1542SP-1 IRC, you receive telecontrol-specific information here. The group has the following diagnostics pages: - Partner Information about the address settings of the partner, connection statistics, configuration data of the partner and other diagnostics information. - Data point list Various information on the data points such as configuration data, value, connection status etc. - Protocol diagnostics With the button "Enable protocol trace", the frames received and sent by the module are logged for several seconds. With the function "Disable protocol trace", the logging is stopped and the data is written to a log file. With the function "Save", you can save the log file on the engineering station and then analyze it. Time of day Information on the time on the device Security This group is available for modules with security functions. For CP 1542SP-1 IRC, only the parameter groups "Status" and "SINEMA RC - Automatic VPN configuration" are available. - Status This diagnostics page displays the most important security settings, the time of day, and data relating to the configuration. - System log You can start logging system entries on this diagnostics page if a connection to a SCALANCE S module is established. You can save the entries. - Audit log You can start logging the log data of the module on this diagnostics page. You can save the entries. - Communication status This diagnostics page shows the states of the known security modules of the VPN groups, their endpoints and the tunnel properties. - SINEMA RC - automatic VPN configuration This diagnostics page shows the status of the automatic OpenVPN configuration and the OpenVPN connections. CP 154xSP-1 142 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.1 Diagnostics options "Functions" group Firmware update For a description, see section Downloading firmware (Page 151). Assign IP address Assign PROFINET device name Save service data The function is used for logging of internal module processes in situations in which you cannot eliminate unexpected or unwanted behavior of the module yourself. The log file is created with the "Save service data" button. The data is saved in a file with the format "*.dmp" that can be evaluated by the Siemens hotline. Web server of the CPU Via the CP you can access the Web server of the CPU and the information available there. For access, refer to the section Web server of the CPU (Page 147). SNMP For information on the functions, refer to the section Diagnostics with SNMP (Page 144). Diagnostics e-mail Validity: CP 1542SP-1 IRC / CP 1543SP-1 The two CPs can send a diagnostics e-mail if configurable events occur, for example a partner cannot be reached or CPU STOP. The configuration is described in section Messages (e-mail) (Page 133). Telecontrol diagnostics Validity: CP 1542SP-1 IRC Partner status The CP can signal the status of the connection to the communications partner to the CPU via a PLC tag. For information on the configuration, see section Partner configuration (Page 65). CP diagnostics The CP can store extended diagnostic data in PLC tags. For information on the configuration, see section CP diagnostics (Page 72). You can display the states of the PLC tags via the Web server of the CPU or via a watch table, for example. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 143 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.2 Online security diagnostics via port 8448 (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) 6.2 Online security diagnostics via port 8448 (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1) Security diagnostics without opening port 102 If you want to perform security diagnostics without opening port 102, follow the steps below: 1. Select the CP in STEP 7. 2. Open the "Online & diagnostics" shortcut menu. 3. In the parameter group "Security" click the "Connect online" button. In this way you perform the security diagnostics via port 8448. See also Settings for online security diagnostics and downloading to station with the firewall activated (Page 121) 6.3 Diagnostics with SNMP Requirement The requirement for using SNMP is the enabling of the function in the configuration, see section SNMP (Page 55). SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP is a protocol for diagnostics and managing networks and nodes in the network. To transmit data, SNMP uses the connectionless UDP protocol. The information on the properties of SNMP-compliant devices is entered in MIB files (MIB = Management Information Base). You will find detailed information on SNMP and the Siemens Automation MIB in the manual /7/ (Page 169). CP 154xSP-1 144 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.3 Diagnostics with SNMP Scope of performance of the CPs The CPs support the following SNMP version: CP 1542SP-1, CP 1542SP-1 IRC - SNMPv1 CP 1543SP-1 - SNMPv1 - SNMPv3 (with activated Security functions) For information on configuring SNMPv3, see section SNMP (Page 130). Traps are not supported by the CP. Supported MIBs in SNMPv1 The CPs support the following MIBs: MIB II (acc. to RFC1213) The CP supports the following groups of MIB objects: - System - Interfaces - IP - ICMP - TCP - UDP - SNMP LLDP MIB Siemens Automation MIB Note the rights for writing to the MIB objects, see the next section (SNMPv3). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 145 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.3 Diagnostics with SNMP Supported MIB objects in SNMPv3 If SNMPv3 is enabled, the CP returns the contents of the following MIB objects: MIB II (acc. to RFC1213) The CP supports the following groups of MIB objects: - System - Interfaces The "Interfaces" MIB object provides status information about the CP interfaces. - IP (IPv4/IPv6) - ICMP - TCP - UDP - SNMP The following groups of the standard MIB II are not supported: - Adress Translation (AT) - EGP - Transmission LLDP MIB Siemens Automation MIB Note that write access is permitted only for the following MIB objects of the "System" group: - sysContact - sysLocation - sysName A set sysName is sent as the host name using DHCP option 12 to the DHCP server to register with a DNS server. For all other MIB objects and groups, only read access is possible for security reasons. Access rights using community names (SNMPv1) TCP uses the following community strings to control the permissions for access to the SNMP agent: Table 6- 1 Access rights in the SNMP agent Type of access Community string *) Read access public Read and write access private *) Note the use of lowercase letters! CP 154xSP-1 146 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.4 Web server of the CPU 6.4 Web server of the CPU The Web server of the CPU The CPU has a Web server which you can access from an engineering station using HTTP/HTTPS via the CP. The Web server of the CPU provides a wide variety of functions for diagnostics and service purposes, for example, loading firmware files. You will find detailed information in the system manual /2/ (Page 168) and in the information system of STEP 7 in the topic and under the heading "Web server". Requirements for access to the Web server Permitted web browsers You will find the Web browsers supported on the engineering station for access to the Web server of the CPU in the STEP 7 information system under the heading "Web server". Requirements in the CPU configuration 1. Open the corresponding project on the engineering station. 2. Select the CPU of the station involved in STEP 7. 3. Select the "Web server" entry. 4. In the parameter group "General", select the "Enable Web server for this interface" option. 5. In the user management create a user with suitable rights on the CPU. To load firmware you need to assign this user the right to perform firmware updates in the access level. The user name and password are required later for access. 6. Configuration of the option "Allow access only using HTTPS" in the parameter group "General" Depending on whether you want to access the Web server using HTTP or HTTPS, the configuration of the parameter differs: - "Allow access only using HTTPS" enabled Connection establishment is possible only using HTTPS. - "Allow access only using HTTPS" disabled Connection establishment is possible using HTTP and HTTPS. Additional requirements in the configuration of the CP 1543SP-1 Activate the firewall in the "Security" parameter group. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 147 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.4 Web server of the CPU Depending on the protocol used you need to make the following further settings in the parameter group of the firewall "From external to station". With connection establishment using HTTP - Enable the "Allow HTTP" option. - Enable the "Allow HTTPS" option Reason: There is a switch to HTTPs after authentication on the Web server. With connection establishment using HTTPS - Disable the "Allow HTTP" option - Enable the "Allow HTTPS" option. Establishing a connection to the Web server Follow the steps below to connect to the Web server of the CPU from the engineering station. These two variants are described in the following sections. Connection establishment with HTTP 1. Connect the PC on which the new firmware file is located to the CP via the Ethernet interface. 2. Enter the address of the CP in the address box of your web browser: http:// 3. Press the Enter key. The start page of the Web server opens. 4. Click on the "Download certificate" entry at the top right of the window. The "Certificate" dialog opens. 5. Download the certificate to your PC by clicking the "Install certificate ..." button. The certificate is loaded on your PC. You will find information on downloading a certificate in the help of your Web browser and in the STEP 7 information system under the keyword "Certificates for Web server". When the connection has changed to the secure mode HTTPS ("https:///..." in the address box of the Web server), you can work with the Web server to, for example, download a firmware file (see the following section). If you terminate the connection to the Web server, the next time you can log in with the Web server without downloading the certificate using HTTP. CP 154xSP-1 148 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.5 Processing status of the telecontrol e-mails Connection establishment with HTTPS 1. Connect the PC on which the new firmware is located to the CP or CPU via the Ethernet interface. 2. Enter the address of the CP in the address box of your web browser: https:// 3. Press the Enter key. The start page of the Web server opens. You can work with the Web server. Downloading firmware files via the Web server of the CPU Requirement: The new firmware file is stored on your engineering station. 1. Log in on the start page of the Web server. 2. After logging in, select the entry "Module status" in the navigation panel of the Web server. 3. Select the CP in the module list. 4. Select the "Firmware" tab lower down in the window. 5. Browse for the firmware file on your PC using the "Browse..." button and download the file to the station using the "Run update" button. Refer to the information on the duration of the firmware update in the section Downloading firmware (Page 151). 6.5 Processing status of the telecontrol e-mails Configuration of the processing status of telecontrol e-mails (CP 1542SP-1 IRC) The following status identifiers apply to e-mails configured with the message editor of the CP 1542SP-1 IRC, see also section Messages (e-mail) (Page 133). E-mails sent via program blocks of Open User Communication return a different status via the block (see block help). Processing status of the telecontrol e-mails The meaning of the status of the "PLC tag for processing status" is as follows: CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 149 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.5 Processing status of the telecontrol e-mails Table 6- 2 Meaning of the status ID output in hexadecimal format Status Meaning 0000 Transfer completed free of errors 82xx Other error message from the e-mail server Apart from the leading "8", the message corresponds to the three-digit error number of the SMTP protocol. 8401 No channel available. Possible cause: There is already an e-mail connection via the CP. A second connection cannot be set up at the same time. 8403 No TCP/IP connection could be established to the SMTP server. 8405 The SMTP server has denied the login request. 8406 An internal SSL error or a problem with the structure of the certificate was detected by the SMTP client. 8407 Request to use SSL was denied. 8408 The client could not obtain a socket for creating a TCP/IP connection to the mail server. 8409 It is not possible to write via the connection. Possible cause: The communications partner reset the connection or the connection aborted. 8410 It is not possible to read via the connection. Possible cause: The communications partner terminated the connection or the connection was aborted. 8411 Sending the e-mail failed. Cause: There was not enough memory space for sending. 8412 The configured DNS server could not resolve specified domain name. 8413 Due to an internal error in the DNS subsystem, the domain name could not be resolved. 8414 An empty character string was specified as the domain name. 8415 An internal error occurred in the cURL module. Execution was aborted. 8416 An internal error occurred in the SMTP module. Execution was aborted. 8417 Requests to SMTP on a channel already being used or invalid channel ID. Execution was aborted. 8418 Sending the e-mail was aborted. Possible cause: Execution time exceeded. 8419 The channel was interrupted and cannot be used before the connection is terminated. 8420 Certificate chain from the server could not be verified with the root certificate of the CP. 8421 Internal error occurred. Execution was stopped. 8450 Action not executed: Mailbox not available / unreachable. Try again later. 84xx Other error message from the e-mail server Apart from the leading "8", the message corresponds to the three-digit error number of the SMTP protocol. 8500 Syntax error: Command unknown. This also includes the error of having a command chain that is too long. The cause may be that the e-mail server does not support the LOGIN authentication method. Try sending e-mails without authentication (no user name). 8501 Syntax error. Check the following configuration data: Alarm configuration > E-mail data (Content): * 8502 Recipient address ("To" or "Cc"). Syntax error. Check the following configuration data: Alarm configuration > E-mail data (Content): * Email address (sender) CP 154xSP-1 150 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.6 Downloading firmware Status Meaning 8535 SMTP authentication incomplete. Check the "User name" and "Password" parameters in the CP configuration. 8550 SMTP server cannot be reached. You have no access rights. Check the following configuration data: * * CP configuration > E-mail configuration: - User name - Password - Email address (sender) Alarm configuration > E-mail data (Content): - Recipient address ("To" or "Cc"). 8554 Transfer failed 85xx Other error message from the e-mail server Apart from the leading "8", the message corresponds to the three-digit error number of the SMTP protocol. 6.6 Downloading firmware New firmware versions of the CP If a new firmware version is available for the CP, you will find this on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22144/dl) Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22143/dl) There are three different ways of loading a new firmware file on the CP: Saving the firmware file on the memory card of the CPU You will find a description of the procedure for loading on the memory card of the CPU on the Internet page of Industry Online Support shown above. Loading the firmware with the online functions of STEP 7 via Ethernet / Internet You will find the description below. Downloading the firmware via the Web server of the CPU You will find the description in the section Web server of the CPU (Page 147). Note Duration of the firmware update Downloading a new firmware file can take several minutes. Note that the procedure takes longer the larger the station due to I/O modules. Always wait until the completion of the firmware update can be recognized from the LEDs (LED pattern "Maintenance demanded" - End of the firmware update). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 151 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.6 Downloading firmware Loading the firmware with the online functions of STEP 7 via Ethernet / Internet Requirements: The CP or the CPU can be reached via the IP address. The engineering station and the CP are located in the same subnet. The new firmware file is stored on your engineering station. The engineering station is connected to the network. The relevant STEP 7 project is open on the engineering station. Procedure: 1. Select the CP or the CPU of the station whose CP you want to update with new firmware. 2. Enable the online functions using the "Connect online" icon. 3. In the "Connect online" dialog, select the Ethernet interface in the "Type of PG/PC interface" list box. 4. Select the slot of the CP or the CPU. Both methods are possible. 5. Click on "Start search" to search for the module in the network and to specify the connection path. When the module is found it is displayed in the table. 6. Connect using the "Connect" button. The "Connect online" wizard guides you through the remaining steps in installation. 7. In the network view, select the CP and select the "Online & Diagnostics" shortcut menu (right mouse button). 8. In the navigation panel of the Online & Diagnostics view, select the entry "Functions > Firmware update". 9. Using the "Browse" button (parameter group "Firmware loader"), search for the new firmware file in the file system of the engineering station. 10.Start the firmware download with the "Start update" button when the correct version of the signed firmware is displayed in the "Status" output box. You will find further information on the online functions in the STEP 7 information system. CP 154xSP-1 152 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.7 Module replacement 6.7 Module replacement CAUTION Read the system manual "SIMATIC ET 200SP Distributed I/O System" Prior to installation, connecting up and commissioning, read the relevant sections in the system manual "SIMATIC ET 200SP Distributed I/O System" refer to the documentation in the Appendix. When installing and connecting up, keep to the procedures described in the system manual "SIMATIC ET 200SP Distributed I/O System". Make sure that the power supply is turned off when installing/uninstalling the devices. Module replacement The STEP -7 project data of the CP is stored on the local CPU. If there is a fault on the device, this allows simple replacement of the CP without needing to download the project data to the station again. When the station starts up again, the new CP reads the project data from the CPU. CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 153 Diagnostics and maintenance 6.7 Module replacement CP 154xSP-1 154 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications Article numbers CP 1542SP-1 6GK7542-6UX00-0XE0 CP 1542SP-1 IRC 6GK7542-6VX00-0XE0 CP 1543SP-1 6GK7543-6WX00-0XE0 Attachment to Industrial Ethernet Quantity 1 Design Slot for bus adapter Properties For information on the properties of the BusAdapters and the permissible cable lengths, see /3/ (Page 168). Electrical data External power supply (X80), design Socket Terminal block for socket Power supply (external) Current consumption Two terminals with reverse polarity protection 2 x two terminal for single or redundant power supply * Type of voltage * 24 VDC * Permitted low limit * 19.2 V * Permitted high limit * 28.8 V * From 24 VDC (external) * 250 mA (typ.) * From backplane bus (3.3 V) * 4 mA (typ.) Maximum Inrush current (Rated value) 12 A Effective power loss (typical) 6W Overvoltage category according to IEC / EN 60664-1 Category I Permitted ambient conditions Ambient temperature Relative humidity During operation with the rack installed horizontally 0 .. + 60 C During operation with the rack installed vertically 0 .. + 50 C During storage -40 .. +70 C During transportation -40 .. +70 C During operation 95 % at 25 C, no condensation Design, dimensions and weight Module format Compact module ET 200SP Degree of protection IP20 Weight * Without bus adapter * 180 g * With bus adapter 2xRJ45 * 230 g CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 155 Technical specifications Technical specifications Dimensions (W x H x D) 60 x 117 x 74 mm Installation options DIN rail (35 mm) Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) * At + 40 C * 56.87 years * At + 60 C * 24.78 years Product functions You will find additional properties and performance data in the section Application and functions (Page 11). CP 154xSP-1 156 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 A Approvals Approvals issued Note Issued approvals on the type plate of the device The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product. You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate. Scope of validity of the approvals The approvals listed below are valid for the CP. The tests required for the approvals were performed with a plugged-in bus adapter. The bus adapters have their own approvals, that are not listed here. EC declaration of conformity The CP meets the requirements and safety objectives of the following EU directives and it complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable logic controllers which are published in the official documentation of the European Union. 2014/34/EU (ATEX explosion protection directive) Directive of the European Parliament and the Council of 26 Febrary 2014 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, official journal of the EU L96, 29/03/2014, pages. 309-356 2014/30/EU (EMC) EMC directive of the European Parliament and of the Council of February 26, 2014 on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility.; official journal of the EU L96, 29/03/2014, pages. 79-106 2011/65/EU (RoHS) Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 June 2011 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, official journal of the EC L174, 01/07/2011, page 88-110 The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for all responsible authorities at: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Division Process Industries and Drives Process Automation DE-76181 Karlsruhe Germany CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 157 Approvals You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity on the Internet at the following address: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/) > Certificate type: "EC declaration of conformity" IECEx The CP meet the requirements of explosion protection according to IECEx. IECEx classification: Ex nA IIC T4 Gc IECEx certificate: IECEx DEK 14.0025X The CP meets the requirements of the following standards: IEC 60079-0 Hazardous areas - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements EN 60079-15 Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection 'n' You can see the current versions of the standards in the IECEx certificate that you will find on the Internet at the following address: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/) The conditions must be met for the safe deployment of the CP according to the section Notes on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX / IECEx (Page 38). You should also note the information in the document "Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area" that you will find on the Internet at the following address: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78381013) ATEX The CP meets the requirements of the EC directive 2014/34/EU "Equipment and Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres". Applied standards: EN 60079-0 Hazardous areas - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements EN 60079-15 Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection 'n' The current versions of the standards can be seen in the EC Declaration of Conformity, see above. ATEX approval: II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Test number: KEMA 07ATEX0145 X Observe the conditions for safe usage of the CP according to the section Notes on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX / IECEx (Page 38). You should also note the information in the document "Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area" that you will find on the Internet at the following address: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78381013) CP 154xSP-1 158 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Approvals EMC The CP meets the requirements of the EC Directive 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC directive). Applied standards: EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial environments EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards - Immunity for industrial environments RoHS The CP meets the requirements of the EC directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Applied standard: EN 50581:2012 c(UL)us Applied standards: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1: General Requirements) IEC/UL 61010-2-201 (Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use. Particular requirements for control equipment) Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) Report / UL file: E85972 (NRAG, NRAG7) cULus Hazardous (Classified) Locations Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: CULUS Listed E223122 IND. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC. Applied standards: ANSI ISA 12.12.01 CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 APPROVED for Use in: Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4 Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4 Ta: Refer to the temperature class on the type plate of the CP Report / UL file: E223122 (NRAG, NRAG7) Observe the conditions for safe usage of the CP according to the section Notes on use in hazardous areas according to UL HazLoc (Page 39). CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 159 Approvals FM Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3600, 3611, 3810, ANSI/ISA-61010-1 Equipment rating: Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D, Temperature Class T4, Ta = 60 C Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC, Temperature Class T4, Ta = 60 C Ta: Refer to the temperature class on the type plate of the CP Observe the conditions for safe usage of the CP according to the section General notices on use in hazardous areas according to FM (Page 39). Australia - RCM The CP meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standards (Class A). Marking for the customs union EAC (Eurasian Conformity) Customs union of Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan Declaration of the conformity according to the technical regulations of the customs union (TR CU) MSIP - For Korea only Registration Number: MSIP REI S7M ET200SP A ( ) (A) , . Current approvals SIMATIC NET products are regularly submitted to the relevant authorities and approval centers for approvals relating to specific markets and applications. If you require a list of the current approvals for individual devices, consult your Siemens contact or check the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support: Link: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/45605894) CP 154xSP-1 160 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Dimension drawings B All dimensions in the dimension drawings are in millimeters. Figure B-1 Front view of the CP CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 161 Dimension drawings Figure B-2 Side view (left) of the CP CP 154xSP-1 162 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 C Accessories C.1 BusAdapter Compatible BusAdapter To connect to the Ethernet network, the CP requires a BusAdapter. A BusAdapter does not ship with the CP. Figure C-1 Example of a bus adapter, here BA SCRJ/RJ45 The CP supports the following bus adapters: BA 2xRJ45 PROFINET bus adapter with the following connectors: - 2 x Ethernet jack RJ-45 Article number: 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 BA 2xFC PROFINET bus adapter with the following connectors: - 2 x direct connection of the bus cable (FastConnect) Article number: 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 BA 2xSCRJ PROFINET bus adapter with the following connectors: - 2 x fiber-optic cable POF/PCF Article number: 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 163 Accessories C.1 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 PROFINET bus adapter, media converter FO - copper with the following connectors: - 1 x fiber-optic cable POF/PCF - 1 x Ethernet jack RJ-45 Article number: 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 BA SCRJ/FC PROFINET bus adapter, media converter FO - copper with the following connectors: - 1 x fiber-optic cable POF/PCF - 1 x direct connection of the bus cable (FastConnect) Article number: 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 You will find further details in the manual /2/ (Page 168) and in the Siemens Industry Mall in Link: (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Pinout of the Ethernet interface The table below shows the pin assignment of the Ethernet interface. The pin assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard 802.3-2005, 100BASE-TX version. Table C- 1 Pin assignment of the Ethernet interface View of the RJ-45 jack Pin Signal name Assignment 1 TD Transmit Data + 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 6 RD_N Receive Data - 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground CP 154xSP-1 164 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Accessories C.2 Router SCALANCE M C.2 Router SCALANCE M Routers for IP-based communication To connect a communications module to IP-based infrastructure networks, the following routers are available: SCALANCE M812 ADSL router for wired IP communication via the Internet, VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 RJ-45 Ethernet interface,1 digital input, 1 digital output, ADSL2T or ADSL2+ - ADSL2T (analog phone connection - Annex A) Article number: 6GK5812-1AA00-2AA2 - ADSL2+ (ISDN connection - Annex B) Article number: 6GK5812-1BA00-2AA2 SCALANCE M816 ADSL router for wired IP communication via the Internet, VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 RJ-45 Ethernet interface with 4-port switch,1 digital input, 1 digital output, ADSL2T or ADSL2+ - ADSL2T (analog phone connection - Annex A) Article number: 6GK5816-1AA00-2AA2 - ADSL2+ (ISDN connection - Annex B) Article number: 6GK5816-1BA00-2AA2 SCALANCE M826-2 SHDSL router for IP communication via 2- and 4-wire cables, ITU-T standard G.991.2 / SHDSL.biz, SHDSL topology: Point-to point, bonding, line bridge mode; routing mode with VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 Ethernet interface with 4-port switch, 1 digital input, 1 digital output Article number 6GK5826-2AB00-2AB2 SCALANCE M874-2 2.5G router for wireless IP communication via 2.5G mobile phone, VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 RJ45 Ethernet interface with 2-port switch, SMA antenna connector, 1 digital input, 1 digital output Article number: 6GK5874-2AA00-2AA2 SCALANCE M874-3 3G router for wireless IP communication via 3G mobile phone HSPA+, VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 RJ45 Ethernet interface with 2-port switch, SMA antenna connector, 1 digital input, 1 digital output Article number: 6GK5874-3AA00-2AA2 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 165 Accessories C.2 Router SCALANCE M SCALANCE M876-3 3G router for wireless IP communication via 3G mobile phone HSPA+/EV-DO, VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 RJ45 Ethernet interface with 4-port switch, SMA antenna connector, antenna diversity,1 digital input, 1 digital output Note network provider approvals! - International version Article number: 6GK5876-3AA02-2BA2 - Version for Korea Article number: 6GK5876-3AA02-2EA2 SCALANCE M876-4 4G router for wireless IP communication via LTE mobile phone, VPN, firewall, NAT, 1 RJ45 Ethernet interface with 4-port switch, 2 SMA antenna connectors, MIMO technology, 1 digital input, 1 digital output - Version for Europe Article number: 6GK5876-4AA00-2BA2 - Version for North America Article number: 6GK5876-4AA00-2DA2 Information on the devices can be found on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15982) CP 154xSP-1 166 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Documentation references D Where to find Siemens documentation Article numbers You will find the article numbers for the Siemens products of relevance here in the following catalogs: - SIMATIC NET - Industrial Communication / Industrial Identification, catalog IK PI - SIMATIC - Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation, catalog ST 70 You can request the catalogs and additional information from your Siemens representative. You will also find the product information in the Siemens Industry Mall at the following address: Link: (https://mall.industry.siemens.com) Manuals on the Internet You will find SIMATIC NET manuals on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support: Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15247/man) Go to the required product in the product tree and make the following settings: Entry type "Manuals" Manuals on the data medium You will find manuals of SIMATIC NET products on the data medium that ships with many of the SIMATIC NET products. /1/ SIMATIC CP 1542SP-1, CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1 Operating instructions Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22144/man) Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22143/man) CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 167 Documentation references /2/ /2/ SIMATIC ET 200SP - Distributed I/O System system manual Siemens AG Link: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) /3/ SIMATIC ET 200SP Manual Collection Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) /4/ SIMATIC NET TeleControl Server Basic (Version V3) Operating Instructions Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15918/man) /5/ SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Security Security basics and applications Configuration manual Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15326/man) /6/ SIMATIC NET TIM DNP3 System manual Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15940/man) CP 154xSP-1 168 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Documentation references /7/ /7/ SIMATIC NET Diagnostics and configuration with SNMP Diagnostics manual Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15392/man) /8/ SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET System manual Siemens AG Industrial Ethernet Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/27069465) Passive network components Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84922825) /9/ SIMATIC NET SINEMA Remote Connect - Server Operating Instructions Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/21816/man) /10/ SIMATIC NET SINAUT ST7 System Manual - Volume 1: Station control system - Band 2: Software (STEP 7 V5) - Volume 3: Software (STEP 7 Professional) Siemens AG Link: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/21771/man) CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 169 Documentation references /10/ CP 154xSP-1 170 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 Index A G Abbreviations/acronyms, 4 Article number, 3 Assign - IP address, 143 Gateway, 127 General request supervision time, 78 Glossary, 6 B H BusAdapter, 35 Hardware product version, 3 C I Conditional spontaneous, 103 Connection resources, 21 CPU firmware, 24 Cross references (PDF), 5 IEC 60870-5-104 Device profile, 15 Protocol, 15 Image memory, 97 Inter-station communication, 14, 96 IP address - program-controlled change, 139 IP_CONF_V4, 139 IPsec, 123 IPv4, 13 IPv6, 13 D Data buffering, 23 Data points - Configuration, 79 Disposal, 6 DNP3 Device profile, 15 Protocol, 15 DNS server - program-controlled change, 139 E E-mail Configuration, 133 Quantity, 22 Engineering station, 4 Ethernet interface Assignment, 164 F Firewall, 17 Firmware version, 3 Forwarding time of day, 55 Frame memory, 23 M MAC address, 3 MIB, 144 Mirroring back, 90 MODBUS (TCP), 140 N NTP, 54 NTP (secure), 54 NTP server - program-controlled change, 139 IPsec tunnel, O Online diagnostics, 59, 141 Online functions, 143 OUC (Open User Communication), 137 CP 154xSP-1 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 171 Index P VPN, 22, 123 Passive VPN connection establishment, 127 Port 8448, 144 Power supply, 34 Pre-shared key (DNP3), 119 Product name, 4 R Recycling, 6 Redundant telecontrol connections, 76 Replacing a module, 153 S S7 connections - enable, 58 Safety notices, 37 Security diagnostics without port 102, 144 Security functions, 18 Send buffer, 23, 97 Service & Support, 6 SIMATIC NET glossary, 6 SINEMA Remote Connect, 12 Slot rules, 41 SMTPS, 123 SNMP, 13, 144 SNMPv3, 18, 130 Spontaneous, 103 STARTTLS, 123 STEP 7 version, 24 Subscriber number, 73 T T_CONFIG, 139 TC_CONFIG, 139 TCSB, 4 TeleControl Basic, 14 Telecontrol server, 4 Time stamp, 78, 87, 92 TLS, 123 Training, 6 Transmission mode, 103 Trigger tag - resetting, 102 TSCB Version, 14 V Virtual IP address, 69 CP 154xSP-1 172 Operating Instructions, 02/2018, C79000-G8976-C426-04 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space 5 ___________________ Diagnostic alarms 6 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Parameter data record 10/2017 A5E03856846-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03856846-AD 11/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. It describes functions that generally affect the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The information provided in this manual and in the system manual and function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 4 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide ................................................................................................................................. 6 2 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 10 3 2.1 Properties................................................................................................................................10 2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................13 2.3 Replacement of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module with an electronic coding element type H............................................................................................13 2.4 Time-based IO ........................................................................................................................15 2.5 Reset communication module to factory settings ...................................................................16 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 17 3.1 4 5 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................17 Parameters/address space ...................................................................................................................... 21 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................21 4.2 Declaration of parameters ......................................................................................................23 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................25 Diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................................... 28 5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................28 5.2 Diagnostic alarms ...................................................................................................................31 6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................... 32 A Parameter data record ............................................................................................................................. 36 A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set ..................................................36 Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 5 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 6 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Documentation guide Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 7 Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 8 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 9 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics QR code Connection diagram LEDs for status and error displays LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version BU type Color code for selecting the color-coded labels Article number View of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 10 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: IO-Link master according to IO-Link specification V1.1 Serial communication module with 4 ports (channels) Data transmission rate COM1 (4.8 kbaud), COM2 (38.4 kbaud), COM3 (230.4 kbaud) SIO mode (standard IO mode) Suitable for connecting up to 4 IO-Link devices (3-wire connection) or 4 standard actuators or encoders Programmable diagnostics function by port Automatic backup of the master and device parameters via electronic coding element The module supports the following functions: Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the module functions Function Firmware update Firmware version of the module V1.0 or higher Identification and maintenance data (I&M) V1.0 or higher PROFIenergy V1.0 or higher IO-Link port configuration with S7-PCT V1.0 or higher Module replacement with automatic data recovery without engineering for IO-Link master and IO-Link device V1.0 or higher Time-based IO (time stamping) V2.0 or higher Variable address range of I/O data with up to 32-byte inputs and 32-byte outputs V2.0 or higher Variable address range of I/O data with up to 144-byte inputs and 128-byte outputs V2.1 or higher IO-Link port configuration without S7-PCT V2.2 or higher Master Backup with function block IO_LINK_MASTER V2.2 or higher PortQualifierInformation (PQI) V2.2 or higher Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties The module can be used with the following engineering tools: Table 2- 2 Engineering tools depending on the firmware version of the module Firmware version of the module S7-PCT STEP 7 (TIA Portal) STEP 7 V5.5 GSD file V1.0 (in PROFINET station) V3.0 or higher V12 SP1 or higher As of V5.5 SP3 with HSP0231 as of V1.0 X V1.0.3 (in PROFIBUS station) V3.1 or higher V13 or higher As of V5.5 SP3 with HSP0231 as of V1.0 X V2.0 V3.2 or higher As of V13 (Time-based IO only with CPU S7-1500) As of V5.5 SP3 with HSP0231 as of V1.0 (without Time-based IO) X (without time-based IO) V2.1 As of V3.3 and SupportedModules.xml V1.2 As of V13 SP1 with HSP0136 as of V1.0 (Time-based IO only with CPU S7-1500) As of V5.5 SP4 with HSP0231 as of V4.0 (without Time-based IO) X (without time-based IO) V2.2 V3.5 or higher V15 or higher (without timebased IO) V5.5 SP4 or higher X with HSP0231, V4.1 (without or higher time-based IO) (without time-based IO) Accessories/spare parts The following accessories / replacement parts are available for the module and are not included in the scope of delivery: Labeling strips Color-coded labels Reference identification label Electronic coding element type H See also You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual in the Accessories/Spare parts section. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 12 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Product overview 2.2 Functions 2.2 Functions IO-Link is a point-to-point connection between a master and a device. Both conventional and intelligent sensors/actuators can be used as devices at the IO-Link via unshielded standard cables using proven 3-wire technology. IO-Link is backward compatible with conventional digital sensors and actuators. The circuit state and data channel are designed in proven 24 V DC technology. Reference Additional information can be found in the IO-Link System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/65949252) function manual. 2.3 Replacement of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module with an electronic coding element type H If you remove the communication module from the BaseUnit, part of the electronic coding element remains in the BaseUnit. The parameters of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link and of the IO-Link devices are stored in this part. A newly inserted (but not yet configured) IO-Link master takes over the parameters from the electronic coding element. CAUTION Removal and insertion Plugging in the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module when the load is switched on can result in dangerous conditions in your plant. The ET 200SP distributed I/O system may be damaged as a result. The IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module should only be plugged in or pulled out when the load is switched off. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 13 Product overview 2.3 Replacement of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module with an electronic coding element type H Master Backup In addition to saving the parameters in the electronic coding element, you can back up the parameters of your module, firmware version V2.2 or higher, with the function block "IO_LINK_MASTER". The "IO_LINK_MASTER" function block is used to read all relevant IO-Link device and IO-Link master parameters. These can be stored retentively at a central location, such as in a data block in the IO controller. The status of the IO-Link devices or IO-Link ports stored in the IO-Link master can be restored with the "IO_LINK_MASTER" function block. As a result, the IO-Link ports and the IO-Link master are configured with the values stored in the master backup. A typical application is restoring the parameters after replacement of the IO-Link master. Note Availability Note that the Master Backup function is available only for IO-Link devices that are specified for the IO-Link Standard as of V1.1. You will find further information on the Master Backup functions in section "Master backup" of chapter "Integration into the automation system" of the IO-Link System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/65949252) function manual. Reference For more information on the topic of "Coding element", refer to the Changing the type of an I/O module chapter of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 14 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Product overview 2.4 Time-based IO 2.4 Time-based IO Time-based IO ensures that signals are output with a precisely defined response time. A combination of inputs and outputs allows, for example, passing products to be measured precisely or liquids to be dosed optimally. As of firmware version V2.0.0, the IO-Link master supports the Time-based IO function. You configure the connected IO-Link devices with time stamp functionality as normal with the SIMATIC S7 Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT). In the "Ports" tab in S7-PCT, set the necessary parameters in the "Operating mode" section: IO-Link_Time_based_IO_IN IO-Link_Time_based_IO_OUT IO-Link_Time_based_IO_INOUT The Time-based IO function can be used for IO-Link master with 32 bytes I/O data. Larger I/O data ranges are not supported by Time-based IO. Note Time stamp function The time stamp function requires defined address assignment (mapping). If the address area you require is already occupied, you must modify the user data arrangement of the IO-Link devices in the address space of the IO-Link master. The "High-precision input/output with Time-based IO" function manual describes how to move user data in the address space. Reference You can find more information about Time-based IO in the High-precision input/output with Time-based IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/82527590) function manual. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 15 Product overview 2.5 Reset communication module to factory settings 2.5 Reset communication module to factory settings Effects of resetting to the factory settings Use the "Reset to factory settings" function to restore the parameter assignments of your IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module made with S7-PCT to the factory state. After a "Reset to factory settings", the parameters of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module are assigned as follows: The ports are in DI mode The ports are mapped to the relative addresses 0.0 ... 0.3 The PortQualifier is disabled I&M data 1 to 3 is deleted The electronic coding element (if it exists) is deleted Note The device parameters are deleted and the factory state is restored. You should reset a removed IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module to the factory settings before you place it in storage. Procedure To perform a "Reset to factory settings", proceed as described in the S7-PCT online help. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 16 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Connecting 3.1 3 Wiring and block diagram This section includes the block diagram of the communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link with the terminal assignments for 3-wire and 5-wire connection of IO-Link devices or 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DI or DQ operating mode. You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels. You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). NOTICE Internal encoder supply Use only the supply voltage (USn/M) made available by the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module to supply the IO-Link device (L+/L-). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 17 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 3-wire and 5-wire connection of IO-Link devices The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (3-wire and 5-wire connection of IO-Link devices). 3-wire connection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) 5-wire connection Cn Communication signal, DI, DQ Backplane bus interface RES Reserved, must not be assigned Microprocessor USn Supply voltage (positive) IO-Link circuitry DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red) Polarity reversal protection Cn LED port status IO-Link mode (green) Color-coded label with color code CC04 (optional) Qn LED port status SIO mode 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Fn LED port error M PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Ground Block diagram and terminal assignment for 3-wire and 5-wire connection of IO-Link devices Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 18 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DI operating mode The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (2-wire and 3-wire connection) in DI operating mode. 2-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals 3-wire connection PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color-coded labels with color code CC04 and CC73 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Cn Communication signal, DI, DQ 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) RES Reserved, must not be assigned M Ground USn Supply voltage (positive) Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DI operating mode Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 19 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Wiring: 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (2-wire and 3-wire connection) in DQ operating mode. 2-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals 3-wire connection PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection Color-coded labels with color code CC04 and CC71 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present) Cn Communication signal, DI, DQ 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only) RES Reserved, must not be assigned M Ground USn Supply voltage (positive) Figure 3-3 Terminal assignment for 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 20 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters (GSD file) The following table shows the general parameters for the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module. Table 4- 1 General parameters (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Configuration in RUN Efficiency range disable Yes Module disable Yes Port (channel) disable Yes Port (channel) disable Yes Port (channel) disable Yes Port (channel) Use potential group of the left module (dark-colored BaseUnit) No Module Enable No Module Disable No Module Diagnostics Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ * disable * enable Diagnostics port 1 * disable * enable * disable * enable * disable * enable * disable * enable * Use potential group of the left module (dark-colored BaseUnit) * Enable new potential group (light-colored BaseUnit) * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Diagnostics port 2 Diagnostics port 3 Diagnostics port 4 Potential group Master parameter PortQualifier Information (PQI) Port configuration without P7-PCT Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Declaration of parameters The following table shows the port parameters for the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module. Table 4- 2 Port parameter (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Port configuration Operating mode * IO-Link Autostart * IO-Link manual * DI * DQ * Deactivated IO-Link Autostart Length of input data depending on the selected I/O type* depending on the selected I/O type* Length of output data depending on the selected I/O type* depending on the selected I/O type* VendorID** Manufacturer ID of the connected IO-Link devices 0 DeviceID** Device ID of the connected IO-Link devices 0 Test level / Data storage** * Identical type (V1.0) without Backup&Restore * Type-compatible (V1.1) without Backup&Restore * Type-compatible (V1.1) with Backup&Restore * Type-compatible (V1.1) with Restore Type-compatible (V1.1) with Backup&Restore * Ensure that you do not exceed the maximum length of the input and output data for all ports. Example: You have selected the configuration 32I/32O. You have assigned 16 bytes of input data to the first port. You can still assign a total of 16 bytes of input data to the remaining three ports. ** Only effective if you use the "IO-Link Manual" port mode. Reference Additional information on the VendorID and DeviceID can be found on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852). Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 22 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Parameters/address space 4.2 Declaration of parameters 4.2 Declaration of parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+ Enabling the diagnostic alarm for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. Diagnostics port This parameter allows the enabling of the diagnostics for the selected port. The possible diagnostics are dependent on the IO-Link device used. Additional information about the diagnostic interrupts can be found in the description of the utilized IO-Link device. Potential group With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is inserted on a lightcolored or dark-colored BaseUnit. A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored BaseUnits. The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station. PortQualifierInformation This parameter enables the PortQualifierInformation (PQI). The PQI provides information on the port and IO-Link device status. Port configuration without P7-PCT This parameter enables the port configuration without S7-PCT for the module. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 23 Parameters/address space 4.2 Declaration of parameters Operating mode This parameter specifies in which mode the selected port is to be operated. You can select from the following options: IO-Link Autostart IO-Link manual DI DQ Deactivated IO-Link Autostart The connected IO-Link device starts automatically (Plug&Play functionality). The IO-Link device is immediately available to you and operational. IO-Link manual The connected IO-Link devices are not started automatically. You must store the VendorID and DeviceID of the connected IO-Link devices in STEP 7. In addition, you can select the test level for the data storage: Identical type (V1.0) without Backup&Restore Type-compatible (V1.1) without Backup&Restore Type-compatible (V1.1) with Backup&Restore Type-compatible (V1.1) with Restore The VendorID and DeviceID can be found on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852). DI The port operates as standard digital input. DQ The port operates as standard digital output. Deactivated The port is deactivated. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 24 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space Configuration options of the communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link The size of the input and output addresses of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module with firmware version V1.0 is 32 bytes in each case. As of firmware version V2.0, the modules support a variable address space for I/O data. As of firmware version V2.2, you can configure the port directly in STEP 7. The following table provides an overview of the configuration options of the supported address areas for I/O data: Module configuration/ supported address space for I/O data IO-Link master with firmware V1.0 IO-Link master with firmware V2.0 IO-Link master with firmware V2.1 1 byte input/1 byte output X X 2-byte inputs/2-byte outputs X X IO-Link master with firmware V2.2 4-byte inputs/4-byte outputs X* 8-byte inputs/0-byte outputs X 8-byte inputs/8-byte outputs X X 12-byte inputs/8-byte outputs X X 12-byte inputs/12-byte outputs 16-byte inputs/16-byte outputs X X 20-byte inputs/16-byte outputs 32-byte inputs/32-byte outputs X X X X X 36-byte inputs/32-byte outputs 64-byte inputs/64-byte outputs X X 68-byte inputs/64-byte outputs 144-byte inputs**/128-byte outputs X X X X X * No PortQualifierInformation is transferred with this configuration. ** The 144-byte input address range covers additional quality information (PortQualifier) in addition to the 128-byte process data. Note Use of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link with I/O data > 32 bytes IM 155-6 PN HF/ST interface modules with firmware versions up to V3.0 only support I/O data up to 32 bytes. If you are using IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link with I/O data > 32 bytes, you need the IM 155-6 PN HF/ST interface module with firmware version as of V3.1. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Port configuration With a IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link as of firmware version V2.2, you can commission the IO-Link port of the IO-Link master and the connected IO-Link devices in two different ways: Port configuration without S7-PCT Port configuration with S7-PCT Port configuration without S7-PCT Requirements You have activated the "Port configuration without S7-PCT" check box in the configuration of the IO-Link master in STEP 7. Procedure You configure the IO-Link master directly in STEP 7: Activate the diagnostics Configuration of the I/O data lengths for each port Activate the PortQualifierInformation (PQI) Port mode: - Operation in "IO-Link Autostart" mode (default) - Operation in "IO-Link Manual" mode - Operated as DI - Operated as DQ - Deactivated Port configuration with S7-PCT Requirements You have deactivated the "Port configuration without S7-PCT" check box in the configuration of the IO-Link master in STEP 7. Procedure You configure the IO-Link master with the Port Configuration Tool S7-PCT, V3.2 or higher. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 26 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space PortQualifierInformation (PQI) You can activate the PortQualifierInfortion (PQI) for your IO-Link master, firmware version V2.2 or higher. Note PortQualifierInformation (PQI) If you have activated the PortQualifierInformation (PQI), these are always transferred with the size 1 byte together with the input data of the IO-Link device. The following figure shows the structure of the PQI byte. Activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure 4-1 Structure of the PQI byte Reference For more information, please refer to the IO-Link system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/65949252) function manual. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 27 5 Diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED display Diagnostics (DIAG) (green/red) Port status / IO-Link status (Cn) (green) Channel status in SIO mode (Qn) (green) Port error (Fn) (red) Supply voltage L+ (PWR) (green) n - Channel number Figure 5-1 LED display Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 28 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the Diagnostic alarms (Page 31) chapter. LED DIAG Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module is not configured Flashes Module parameterized and no module diagnostics On Module parameterized and module diagnostics Flashes Cn LEDs Table 5- 2 Status displays of C1, C2, C3 and C4 LEDs C1, C2, C3 or C4 Meaning Port disabled or in SIO mode Off Flashes Port in IO-Link mode, device not connected or port not connected with the configured device Port in IO-Link mode, device not connected On Qn LEDs Table 5- 3 Status displays of Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 LEDs Q1, Q2, Q3 or Q4 Meaning Process signal = 0 in SIO mode, deactivated or in IO-Link mode Off Process signal = 1 in SIO mode On Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 29 Diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Fn LEDs Table 5- 4 F1, F2, F3 and F4 LED error displays F1, F2, F3 or F4 Meaning No error Off Error On LED PWR Table 5- 5 Status display of the PWR LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ present On Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 30 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Diagnostic alarms 5.2 Diagnostic alarms 5.2 Diagnostic alarms For each diagnostics event, a diagnostic alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the communication module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 5- 6 Error types Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning (IO-Link error code) IO-Link master IO-Link device Short-circuit 1H * Short-circuit in the process cables on the IO-Link device (1804H) * Short-circuit on IO device (7710H) X X Undervoltage 2H * Supply voltage too low (5111H, 5112H) X Overvoltage 3H * Supply voltage too high (5110H) X Overheating 5H * Temperature exceeded on master (1805H) * Temperature exceeded on device (4000H, 4210H) * No IO-Link device connected * There is a break in the signal line to the IO-Link device * IO-Link device cannot communicate due to another error (1800H) * Process tag range exceeded (8C10H) * Measuring range exceeded (8C20H) Wire break Overflow 6H 7H X X X X Underflow 8H * Process tag range too low (8C30H) X Error 9H * All IO-Link error codes which are not listed here are mapped to this PROFIBUS DP error X Configuration error 10H * Incorrect device (1802H) * Vendor ID and Device ID not defined (1817H) * Process data length of the IO-Link device exceeded (1818H) * No cycle time configured (1819H) * Cannot configure IO-Link master (1882H, 1883H) * Storage error (1886H) * Process data length exceeded (1887H) * PQI not supported (1889H) * Device was not configured correctly (6320H, 6321H, 6350H) * L+ supply voltage for device missing (1806H) * L+ supply voltage for device too low (<20 V) (1807H) X X Supply voltage missing 11H Defective fuse 12H * Fuse on device is defective (5101H) Safety shutdown 19H * Serious error (master has to be replaced) (1880H) X External fault 1AH X * Error in data storage (1809H, 180AH, 180BH, 180CH, 180DH) * More than 6 errors are pending simultaneously on the IO-Link device (1808H) * Consistency error in electronic coding element (1885H) * Process data length exceeded (1887H) X X Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 31 6 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module Article number 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0 General information Product type designation CM 4 x IO-Link ST, PU 1 Firmware version V2.2 * FW update possible Yes usable BaseUnits BU type A0 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC04 Product function * I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V15 or higher * STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version STEP 7 V5.5 or higher * PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher * PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V; 20.5 V if IO-Link is used, as the supply voltage for IO-Link devices has to be at least 20 V at the master. permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption, max. 45 mA; without load Encoder supply Number of outputs 4 Output current * Rated value 200 mA; Per channel 24 V encoder supply * Short-circuit protection Yes Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 32 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Technical specifications Article number 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0 Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Digital outputs Cable length * unshielded, max. 20 m; Also applies for shielded cables IO-Link Number of ports * of which simultaneously controllable 4 4 IO-Link protocol 1.0 Yes IO-Link protocol 1.1 Yes Transmission rate 4.8 kBaud (COM1); 38.4 kBaud (COM2), 230.4 kBaud (COM3) Cycle time, min. 2 ms; dynamic, depending on user data length Size of process data, input per port 32 byte; max. Size of process data, input per module 144 byte; max. Size of process data, output per port 32 byte; max. Size of process data, output per module 128 byte; max. Memory size for device parameter 2 kbyte; for each port Master backup Yes Configuration without S7-PCT Yes Cable length unshielded, max. 20 m Operating modes * IO-Link Yes * DI Yes * DQ Yes; max. 100 mA per channel Time Based IO - TIO IO-Link IN No; Only for PROFINET and configuration as version with FW V2.0 or V2.1 - TIO IO-Link OUT No; Only for PROFINET and configuration as version with FW V2.0 or V2.1 - TIO IO-Link IN/OUT No; Only for PROFINET and configuration as version with FW V2.0 or V2.1 Connection of IO-Link devices * Port type A Yes * Port type B Yes; 24 V DC via external terminal * via three-wire connection Yes Isochronous mode Isochronous operation (application synchronized up to terminal) No; Only for PROFINET and configuration as version with FW V2.0 or V2.1 Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 33 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes; The port diagnosis is available in the IO-Link mode only. Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes * Short-circuit Yes * Group error Yes Diagnostics indication LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; one green LED for channel status Qn (SIO mode) and port status Cn (IO-Link mode) per channel * for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED * for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 73 mm Depth 58 mm Weights Weight, approx. 30 g Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 34 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Technical specifications Overview of the response time The following figure shows the response time for IO-Link without Time-based IO. Figure 6-1 Cycle time for IO-Link without Time-based IO Dimensional drawing See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 35 A Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. The following describes the structure of data record 128 as of firmware version V2.2. Configuration in the user program You can configure the modules in runtime. Changing parameters in RUN The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart. Output parameter STATUS If errors occur when transmitting parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code. You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online help. Error message The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record. The instruction WRREC for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when errors occur in the parameter STATUS. The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the parameter data record 128: Table A- 1 Error message Error code Meaning 80B1H Error in data length 80E0H Error in header information 80E1H Parameter error Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 36 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set Structure of data record 128 Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 Header information The figure below shows the structure of the header information. Figure A-2 Header information Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 37 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set IO-Link start parameters The following figure shows the structure of the IO-Link start parameter. Activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure A-3 IO-Link start parameters Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 38 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set Port parameter The following figure shows an extract from the structure of the port parameter. Activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". If you have selected IO-Link Manual operating mode, you must enter the Vendor ID (byte x+5 and x+6) and Device ID (byte x+7 to x+10) yourself. You can find the Vendor ID and Device ID in the IODD of the IO-Link device being used. Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD 39 Parameter data record A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set Figure A-4 Port parameter Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0) 40 Manual, 10/2017, A5E03856846-AD Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP AS-Interface Master CM AS-i Master ST 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1 Edition 07/2017 siemens.com ___________________ Foreword 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual 2 ___________________ Safety instructions 3 ___________________ Product overview 4 ___________________ Connection ___________________ 5 Configuring Parameter ___________________ 6 assignment/addressing 7 ___________ Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves Alarms, faults and system ___________________ 8 events Using the command ___________________ 9 interface ___________________ 10 Technical data A ___________ AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements Readme Open Source ___________________ B Software ___________________ C Data sets ___________________ D List of abbreviations 07/2017 A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY 3ZX1012-0RK71-6AC1 07/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Foreword Purpose of the documentation This device manual supplements the "ET 200SP Distributed I/O System" System Manual. Functions that pertain generally to the ET 200SP can be found in the "ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en)" System Manual. The information provided in this device manual and the system manual enables you to commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 5 Foreword AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 6 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Table of contents Foreword ................................................................................................................................................... 5 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................... 11 2 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 15 4 5 6 7 3.1 Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST ..............................................................................15 3.2 Operating modes of the CM AS-i Master ST ..........................................................................19 3.3 Firmware update .....................................................................................................................21 Connection .............................................................................................................................................. 25 4.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................25 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram .......................................................................................................27 Configuring .............................................................................................................................................. 29 5.1 Requirements..........................................................................................................................29 5.2 Basic configuration of the CM AS-i Master ST .......................................................................30 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 Configuration of the AS-i slaves .............................................................................................31 Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 ............................................................................31 Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button ........................................................34 Configuration of the AS-i slaves via the control panel in the TIA Portal .................................36 Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the PLC program .......................................................36 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 Online functions in the TIA Portal ...........................................................................................37 Switching from one operating mode to another ......................................................................37 Applying the slave configuration .............................................................................................38 Setting the address of an AS-i slave.......................................................................................39 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 5.5.2 Variable configuration .............................................................................................................39 Option handling .......................................................................................................................39 DS 131 Activate/deactivate optional slaves ............................................................................40 DS 131 Read status of option handling ..................................................................................41 AS-i proxy slave ......................................................................................................................42 Parameter assignment/addressing .......................................................................................................... 43 6.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................43 6.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................44 6.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................44 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves .................................................................... 45 7.1 Access to AS-Interface ...........................................................................................................45 7.2 7.2.1 Transmitting AS-i digital values ..............................................................................................46 I/O addresses when configuring AS-i slaves in STEP 7 .........................................................46 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 7 Table of contents 7.2.2 7.2.3 I/O addresses without configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 ........................................ 50 Special characteristics of AS-i Safety slaves ......................................................................... 55 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred .............................................................................................................................. 56 Accessing AS-i analog data via the process image ............................................................... 58 Accessing AS-i analog data via acyclic services ................................................................... 58 7.3.1 7.3.2 8 9 Alarms, faults and system events ............................................................................................................ 61 8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 61 8.2 Diagnostics in STEP 7 ........................................................................................................... 62 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 LED statuses .......................................................................................................................... 63 Arrangement of the LEDs on the CM AS-i Master ST ........................................................... 63 Meaning of the LEDs ............................................................................................................. 64 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 69 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 69 Possible response to the diagnostic interrupt ........................................................................ 69 Error messages ...................................................................................................................... 70 8.5 Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming .................................... 74 8.6 Duplicate address detection................................................................................................... 76 8.7 Diagnosis via the web server ................................................................................................. 79 8.8 Fault indications/fault remedies ............................................................................................. 80 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 8.9.4.1 8.9.4.2 8.9.4.3 8.9.4.4 8.9.5 Data records for diagnostics .................................................................................................. 82 DS 92 Diagnostic data record (FW V1.1 and higher) ............................................................ 82 DS 96 Read AS-i master error counters and status messages (FW V1.1 and higher) ......... 86 DS 97 Read and reset AS-i master error counters (FW V1.1 and higher) ............................ 89 DS 150 to DS 153 Read AS-i error counters ......................................................................... 89 DS 150 Read AS-i slave error counters 1/1A to 16/16A ........................................................ 92 DS 151 Read AS-i slave error counters 16/16A to 31/31A .................................................... 93 DS 152 Read AS-i slave error counters 1B to 16B ................................................................ 94 DS 153 Read AS-i slave error counters 16B to 31B .............................................................. 95 DS 154 Delete AS-i error counters (from FW V1.1)............................................................... 96 Using the command interface .................................................................................................................. 97 9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 97 9.2 Command interface with SIMATIC S7 ................................................................................... 97 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers ................................................. 98 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6 9.4.7 9.4.8 9.4.9 Description of the AS-i commands....................................................................................... 103 No. 00: Set_Permanent_Parameter ..................................................................................... 107 No. 01: GET_Permanent_Parameter ................................................................................... 108 No. 02: Write_Parameter ..................................................................................................... 109 No. 03: Read_Parameter ..................................................................................................... 110 No. 04: Store_Actual_Parameters........................................................................................ 111 No. A5: Set_Permanent_Configuration ................................................................................ 112 No. A6: Get_Permanent_Configuration ............................................................................... 113 No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration ..................................................................................... 114 No. A8: Read_Actual_Configuration .................................................................................... 115 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 8 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Table of contents 9.4.10 9.4.11 9.4.12 9.4.13 9.4.14 9.4.15 9.4.16 9.4.17 9.4.18 9.4.19 9.4.20 9.4.21 9.4.22 9.4.23 9.4.24 9.4.25 9.4.26 9.4.27 9.4.28 9.4.29 9.4.30 9.4.31 9.4.32 9.4.33 9.4.34 9.4.35 9.4.36 9.4.37 9.4.38 9.4.39 10 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 161 10.1 A D AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) ..............................163 Readme Open Source Software ............................................................................................................ 167 B.1 C Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support.............................................................161 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements .......................................................... 163 A.1 B No. A9: Set_LPS ...................................................................................................................116 No. 0A: SET_Offline_Mode ...................................................................................................117 No. 08: Set_Auto_Address_Enable.......................................................................................118 No. 0C: Set_Operation_Mode ...............................................................................................119 No. 0D: Change_AS-i-Slave_Address ..................................................................................120 No. 0F: Read_Status.............................................................................................................121 No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags ...............................................................122 No. B9: Read_overall_configuration .....................................................................................125 No. BA: Write_overall_configuration .....................................................................................131 No. 3C: Set_PI ......................................................................................................................138 No. 33: AS-i Parameter Echolist ...........................................................................................141 No. 44: Read_Write_CTT2_String ........................................................................................142 No. 14: Read_Version ...........................................................................................................144 No. 17: Read ID_Code ..........................................................................................................144 No. 37: Read_ID1-Code .......................................................................................................145 No. 3F: Write ID1-Code ........................................................................................................145 No. 38: Read_ID2-Code .......................................................................................................146 No. 18: Read_IO-Code .........................................................................................................146 No. BE: Get_LPF ..................................................................................................................147 No. 40: Write_Parameter_String ...........................................................................................148 No. 41: Read_String..............................................................................................................149 No. 42: Read_String..............................................................................................................150 No. 43: Read_String..............................................................................................................151 No. CA: Read_Error_Counter ...............................................................................................152 No. CB: Read_and_Delete_AS-i-Master_Error_Counter ......................................................155 No. CC: Read_AS-i_error_counter........................................................................................156 No. CD: Read_and_delete_AS-i_Slave_error_counter .........................................................157 No. 13: Activate_ground fault detection (reset EFD) ............................................................158 No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online ........................................................................................159 No. D1: AS-i-Slave_ID1_schreiben_mit_Zieladresse (Write ID1 code with destination address) ................................................................................................................................160 Read_me OSS ......................................................................................................................167 Data sets ............................................................................................................................................... 171 C.1 DS 100 Switch duplicate address detection on/off ...............................................................171 C.2 DS 100 Read setting for duplicate address detection ..........................................................172 C.3 DS 101 Read version identifier .............................................................................................172 List of abbreviations ............................................................................................................................... 173 D.1 List of abbreviations ..............................................................................................................173 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 9 Table of contents Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 175 Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 181 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 10 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Documentation guide 1 The following paragraph gives you an overview of the additional documentation you need to use the CM AS-i Master ST. The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is subdivided into three areas. This enables you to access the required content quickly. Basic information The System Manual describes configuration, assembly, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you with configuration and programming. Device information Manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, connection diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The Function Manuals contain detailed descriptions on topics relating to the SIMATIC ET 200SP environment, such as configuring diagnostics, communications, web servers and controllers for problem-free operation. The following paragraph gives you an overview of the additional documentation you need to use the CM AS-i Master ST. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 11 Documentation guide Documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with the CM AS-i master ST Figure 1-1 Table 1- 1 Example of a system structure Documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with the CM AS-i master ST No. Component Documentation System SIMATIC ET 200SP ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) Most important contents SIMATIC distributed I/O (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrialautomation-systems-simatic/en/manual-overview/tech-docet200/Pages/Default.aspx) BaseUnits SIMATIC ET 200SP BaseUnits (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59753521) * Application planning * Installation * Connecting * Commissioning * Technical specifications * Connecting * Technical specifications AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 12 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Safety instructions 2 Important safety instructions WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. For use in Pollution Degree 2 Environment. WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. When used in hazardous hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or a suitable enclosure. To comply with EU Directive 94/9 (ATEX 95), this enclosure must meet the requirements of at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529. WARNING Explosion Hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is present. WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Substitution of components may impair suitability for class I, division 2 or zone 2. WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Do not open when energized. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 13 Safety instructions WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. The equipment is designed for operation with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) by a Limited Power Source (LPS). This means that only SELV / LPS complying with IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-1, VDE 0805-1 must be connected to the power supply terminals. The power supply unit for the equipment power supply must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the National Electrical Code (r) (ANSI / NFPA 70). WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Provisions shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 %. This criteria is fulfilled if supples are derived from SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) only. CAUTION Failure to observe this information may result in property damage and bodily injury This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D or nonhazardous locations only. CAUTION Failure to observe this information may result in property damage and bodily injury This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or non-hazardous locations only. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 14 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Product overview 3.1 3 Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST Article number 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1 Brief introduction to AS-Interface AS-Interface or Actuator-Sensor-Interface (AS-i for short) is a fieldbus system for industrial use that is used to transmit digital and analog signals between a controller and machine or process in real-time. The system can be used for standard signals as well as for safetyrelated signals. AS-Interface is designed to connect actuators and sensors to the controller as easily, flexibly and efficiently as possible. The system consists of an AS-i master and up to 62 AS-i slaves that are simply plugged onto the yellow AS-i flat ribbon cable at any point or connected via terminals. The AS-i cable can be up to 100 m long with free choice of topology. A length of up to 200 m is possible with an additional extension plug. The system can be extended beyond that through the use of repeaters. In addition, an AS-i power supply unit is connected to the cable such that the slaves and their connected sensors are supplied with operating voltage without additional cabling. Actuators are usually supplied with voltage by means of a 24 V cable, because they generally need more power than sensors. A typical digital AS-i slave has up to 4 inputs and 4 outputs. The slaves are installed directly in the plant as close as possible to the sensors or actuators so that the connecting cables can be kept very short. The insulation displacement method is the preferred method for connection to the AS-i flat ribbon cable so that assembly can be completed without errors in the least amount of time. For safety-related signals, safety slaves and modules are available for safety-related processing of signals. In addition, analog slaves and complete switchgear with integrated AS-i slave are offered. The default voltage fed in from the AS-i power supply unit is 30 V DC. As a result, sensors with a rated voltage of 24 V can be used without any problems despite the voltage drop on a longer AS-i cable. Because the AS-i cable transmits both operating DC voltage and modulated communication signals, the AS-i power supply unit contains a data decoupling unit for separating the two voltage waveforms. A standard power supply can be used in place of the easy-to-use AS-i power supply if the AS-i cable is connected via a separate data decoupling module. When a standard power supply with 24 V DC is used, it must be ensured that the connected AS-i components and sensors are designed for operation with the corresponding lower voltage. You will find further information on the Internet at: AS-Interface (http://www.siemens.com/as-interface). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 15 Product overview 3.1 Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST Use of the module The CM AS-i Master ST module is a communication module for use in the SIMATIC ET 200SP Distributed I/O System. The CM AS-i Master ST features a 20 mm wide ET 200SP module housing. A BaseUnit (BU) is required for use in the ET 200SP. The CM AS-i Master ST can be plugged into C0-type BaseUnits (BU). You can plug several CM AS-i Master ST modules into one SIMATIC ET 200SP station. Each CM AS-i Master with firmware version V1.0 occupies 32 bytes of I/O address space. From firmware version V1.1 onwards, the CM AS-i Master ST supports up to 288 bytes of I/O address space. The number of possible AS-i master modules depends on the maximum address space of the utilized Interface Module (IM) of the ET 200SP or the utilized ET 200SP CPU. In a SIMATIC ET 200SP station with an IM 155-6 PN ST standard interface module and a maximum address space of 256 bytes, up to eight CM AS-i Master ST modules can be plugged in (when the I/O address space is configured as 32 bytes). Significantly more modules can be plugged into a SIMATIC ET 200SP station with High Feature Interface Module IM 156-6 PN HF and a maximum address space of 1440 bytes. If the ET 200SP contains other modules, the available address space is reduced and the maximum number of AS-i master modules is reduced accordingly. The maximum number of modules can be increased by shortening the I/O address space of the CM AS-i Master ST module. For further information, see the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942). The CM AS-i Master ST module can generally be combined with all ET 200SP interface modules. Any exceptions to this are documented in the delivery release product announcement(s) of the interface module. The CM AS-i Master ST module (Firmware V1.1 and higher) can generally be combined with all ET 200SP CPU modules (Firmware V1.8 and higher). Any exceptions to this are documented in the delivery release product announcement(s) for a CPU module. The interface modules und CPU modules differ, among other things, in terms of the maximum number of I/O modules, the length of the I/O process image in the station and the length of the I/O process image for each I/O module. The technical specifications of the interface modules and CPU modules can limit the selection of possible parameters of the CM AS-i Master ST module. Note, in particular, that the length of the I/O process image of the CM AS-i Master ST module must be selected in such a way that the maximum length of the I/O process image of the interface module or CPU module is not exceeded. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 16 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Product overview 3.1 Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST View of the module Figure 3-1 View of the CM AS-i Master ST Properties Technical properties - AS-i master acc. to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 - Transmission of digital I/O values to cyclic process image - Transmission of analog I/O values in the cyclic process image (Firmware V1.1 and higher) or via acyclic data record communication. - Configuration button can be connected to terminals Supported functions - I&M identification data - Firmware update - Configuration of the AS-i master and AS-i slaves via data records (Read / Write or command interface) The module can be used with the following engineering versions: Table 3- 1 Version dependence of the CM AS-i Master ST engineering versions Firmware version of the module STEP 7 (TIA portal) STEP 7 V5.5 GSD file V1.0 V12 and higher V5.5 SP3 HF5 and higher X V1.1 V13 SP1 and higher V5.5 SP3 HF5 and higher X AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 17 Product overview 3.1 Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST For additional information, see product announcement for: CM AS-i Master ST (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/72865595) Table 3- 2 Version dependence of the CM AS-i Master ST functions Function Firmware version of the module Configuring in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12 and higher V1.0 and higher GSD file (PROFIBUS) V1.0 and higher GSD file (PROFINET) V1.0 and higher Access via command data records V1.0 and higher Structure of the process image: 32 bytes V1.0 and higher Transmission of digital I/O values in the cyclic process image V1.0 and higher Transmission of analog I/O values via data record transfer V1.0 and higher Firmware update V1.0 and higher Duplicate address detection V1.0 and higher Automatic address programming with manual writing of the ID1 code V1.0 and higher Write ID1 code to AS-i address "0" V1.0 and higher Configuring in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 and higher V1.1 and higher Status information for all slaves of the AS-i master system (TIA Portal) V1.1 and higher Detailed, device-specific diagnostics (TIA Portal) V1.1 and higher Configuring in STEP 7 V5.5 and higher V1.1 and higher Option handling V1.1 and higher Proxy slave V1.1 and higher Structure of the process image: Up to 288 bytes, adjustable length V1.1 and higher Transmission of analog I/O values via process data V1.1 and higher Variable address area for I/O data V1.1 and higher Automatic address programming with automatic writing of the ID1 code V1.1 and higher AS-i slave_ID1_write_with_target_address V1.1 and higher Automatic duplicate address detection for AS-i voltage of either 24 V or 30 V V1.1 and higher Accessories The following components can be used with the module: Labeling strips Reference identification label AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 18 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the CM AS-i Master ST 3.2 Operating modes of the CM AS-i Master ST The AS-i master has two operating modes: "Configuration mode" "Protected operation" "Configuration mode" "Configuration mode" can be used for commissioning an AS-i installation. You can also use "configuration mode" for productive operation. The AS-i bus configuration is not defined in this case. This means that error messages for a change of bus configuration are not possible. You switch the AS-i master from "protected operation" to "configuration mode" in STEP 7. The "CM" LED (Configuration Mode) then lights up green. In "configuration mode", the AS-i master can exchange data with every AS-i slave that is connected to the AS-i cable. This does not apply to AS-i slaves with the address "0". The AS-i master immediately detects and activates newly added AS-i slaves and includes them in cyclic data exchange. The digital process data of the connected AS-i slaves are stored according to a fixed scheme in the process image starting from a configurable start address. See "Special characteristics of AS-i Safety slaves (Page 55)". The digital process image for the inputs of non-existent slaves is filled with the substitute value "0". Analog process data can only be accessed by means of data record communication. In "configuration mode", configuration errors of AS-i slaves are not signaled to the higherlevel station via an alarm and are not indicated by the "DIAG" LED. "Protected operation" In "protected operation", the AS-i master only exchanges data with the configured ASi slaves. In case of changes to the bus configuration, error messages are automatically generated if diagnostics is enabled. See "Parameter assignment/addressing (Page 43)". You can configure in one of the following ways: Configuration of the AS i slaves in the STEP 7 project (Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 31)) Applying the slave configuration with the online "ACTUAL CONF" function in STEP 7 (Applying the slave configuration (Page 38)) Calling the command interface in the SIMATIC user program with the following commands: - No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration (Page 114) - No. BA: Write_overall_configuration (Page 131) Using the connected "SET" button (Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34)) If you have configured the AS-i slave in the STEP 7 project, the changeover to "protected operation" occurs automatically. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 19 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the CM AS-i Master ST Changeover between "configuration mode" and "protected operation" You can change between "configuration mode" and "protection operation" in one of the following ways: By switching the operating mode using the "Online functions in the TIA Portal (Page 37)". By calling the command interface in the user program of SIMATIC with command "No. 0C: Set_Operation_Mode (Page 119)". Using the connected "SET" button (Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34)). Changeover is not possible if the AS-i slaves have been configured in the STEP 7 project and the CPU is in RUN operating mode. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 20 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update 3.3 Firmware update Performing a firmware update Information about updating the firmware can be found in the ET 200SP System Manual. Note Following a firmware update, mark the current firmware version on the housing of the CM AS-i Master ST. Current firmware updates are available on the Internet for download (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108742051). Pay careful attention to the information on performing the firmware update contained in the download entry. LED behavior during a firmware update During a firmware update, the LEDs exhibit the following behavior: DIAG flashes red PWR is lit green Remaining AS-i LEDs are off Note Supply voltage during a firmware update The AS-i voltage and the supply voltage of the ET 200SP station must not be switched off during a firmware update. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 21 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update LED behavior after a successfully completed firmware update When the TIA Portal is used, an error-free firmware update is indicated by the message that the firmware was successfully transferred. Note Confirming a message after an error-free firmware update You must confirm the message using the button before you continue. Without confirmation, the LED status remains unchanged so that the firmware update is incomplete and must be repeated. When STEP 7 V5.5 (classic) is used, there is no concluding message and the LED status changes autonomously. If the firmware is updated without errors, the LED status is updated: DIAG flashes red until the AS-i voltage is switched off and back on again PWR is lit green Remaining AS-i LEDs are lit WARNING Required intermediate step for firmware update of a CM AS-i Master ST with FW V1.0 using an ET 200SP CPU. Failure to perform this step causes the CM AS-i Master ST to become permanently inoperable. If you want to perform an update to a higher firmware version for a CM AS-i Master ST module with FW V1.0 and are using an ET 200SP configuration with an ET 200SP CPU in place of an interface module (IM), you must always perform the following intermediate step: After the update of the LED status, the CM AS-i master ST module must be removed from the ET 200SP BaseUnit. Instead of removing the module, it is also sufficient to switch off the AS-i voltage and the 24 V voltage of the ET 200SP. A TIA Portal error message appears approximately one minute after the module has been removed indicating that online access to the module is no longer possible. Confirm the error message. Then plug the module onto the BaseUnit again or switch the voltages back on. Now repeat the firmware update. In this case, the intermediate step described here can be skipped. The intermediate step is not required for: * Firmware update of a CM AS-i Master ST module with active FW V1.1 or higher * Use of an ET 200SP configuration with a PROFINET interface module (IM) and PROFINET connection to a released SIMATIC CPU * Use of an ET 200SP configuration with a PROFIBUS interface module (IM) and PROFIBUS connection to a released SIMATIC CPU. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 22 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update Note For operation of the CM AS-i Master ST module in an ET 200SP configuration with an ET 200SP CPU in place of an interface module (IM), the following minimum requirements of the firmware and software versions apply: * CM AS-i Master ST with FW V1.1 or higher, and * ET 200SP CPU with FW V1.8 or higher (CPU 1510SP-1 PN, CPU 1510SP F-1 PN, CPU 1512SP-1 PN, CPU 1512SP F-1 PN, Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC) * Configuration with STEP 7 V13 SP 1 Update 4 or higher Note Restart after a firmware update Following a firmware update, the AS-i voltage must be switched off and back on again in order for the new firmware to be activated. Wait for the LED status to update before performing the restart. Otherwise the firmware update is not complete and must be repeated. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 23 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update LED behavior in the event of an error during a firmware update If an error occurs during the firmware update, the LEDs assume the following status: DIAG flashes red PWR is lit green Remaining AS-i LEDs indicate the status of the AS-i and are not relevant here. In this case, switch the AS-i voltage off and back on again and repeat the firmware update. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 24 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 4 Connection 4.1 Terminal assignment Requirements For connecting, you require a BaseUnit: Type C0 (light BaseUnit, e.g., item number 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0) Note that, within a BaseUnit group for AS-i consisting of light and dark BaseUnits, only the AS-i modules CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST may be combined. Other I/O module types of the ET 200SP must always be separated from the BaseUnit group for AS-i using light BaseUnits. Exception: BaseUnits with power busbars without connection to the terminals of the plug-in I/O module can be used within a BaseUnit group for AS-i. These BaseUnits include the following dark BaseUnits with 20 mm width: BU20-P12+A0+4B (BU type B1) BU20-P12+A0+0B (BU type D0) BU20-P8+A4+0B (BU type F0) NOTICE Make sure that external voltage from adjacent BaseUnits cannot under any circumstances be connected to the AS-i modules. WARNING Connection of the BaseUnit only to safety extra-low voltage with limiting of output voltage to max. 40 V under fault condition Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Connect the BaseUnit only to an AS-i power supply unit that meets the conditions indicated in Section "Schematic circuit diagram (Page 27)", "Power supply units for AS-Interface". Connection to a higher voltage may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 25 Connection 4.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 4- 1 Terminal assignment of the CM AS-i Master ST Terminal Assignment 1 SET1 Connection of the "SET" button (optional), 2 SET2 see "Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34)" 3 RES Reserved 4 RES Reserved 5 RES Reserved 6 RES Reserved 2L 1) ASI+ Connection of the AS-i cable, positive polarity 1N, 2N 1) ASI- Connection of the AS-i cable, negative polarity 1L, Description 1) The terminals are connected through in the BaseUnit. Connecting an external "SET" button You can connect a "SET" button to terminals "SET1" and "SET2" of the AS-i master. This enables you to apply the ACTUAL configuration of the connected AS-i slaves as the CONFIGURED configuration. This function is activated by closing the button contact on the SET1 and SET2 terminals. The maximum cable length between the terminal and "SET" button is 0.5 m. Use two wires routed in parallel for connecting the button (not included in the scope of delivery). See also "ET 200SP Distributed I/O System" System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) "ET 200SP BaseUnits" Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521/0/en) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 26 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Connection 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram Schematic circuit diagram Figure 4-1 Circuit diagram of the CM AS-i Master ST 1L, 2L are connected through in the BaseUnit. 1N, 2N are connected through in the BaseUnit. Connection to power busbars The following are connected via the CM AS-i Master ST: 1L and power busbar P1 1N and power busbar P2 The maximum permitted current here is 4 A. For a conducted current of 4 A, the reduced ambient temperature range applies: Max. 55 C for a horizontally mounted rail Max. 50 C for a vertically mounted rail AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 27 Connection 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram If safety-related signals are to be processed on the AS-i cable, you can arrange a dark BaseUnit type C1 to the right of the light BaseUnit type C0 with the CM AS-i Master ST module and plug a safety-related F-CM AS-i Safety ST module onto this dark BaseUnit. The AS-i cable is continued from the light BaseUnit to the dark BaseUnit via the power busbars so that the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is connected to the AS-i network of the master without additional wiring. It is not permitted to transmit the AS-i voltage from the connecting terminals on the front of the dark BaseUnit because a current draw of this type may cause an overload in the modules. Connect the AS-i cable with AS-i power supply unit and AS-i slaves only to terminals 1L, 2L (ASI+) and 1N, 2N (ASI-) of the light BaseUnit. You can find additional information on safety-related processing in the "Fail-safe module F-CM AS-i Safety ST (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/90265988)" manual. Power supply units supported for AS-Interface A connected power supply unit must have the following properties: Rated output voltage 30 V DC (AS-Interface Standard) or 24 V DC (AS-i Power24V) PELV/SELV (Protective/Safety Extra-Low Voltage) standard Residual ripple < 250 mVpp Limiting of output voltage to max. 40 V in the event of a fault The Siemens power supply units for AS-Interface meet these requirements (see operating instructions of the power supply unit). Use an AS-Interface power supply unit (with integrated data decoupling) or a combination of a standard power supply unit and a data decoupling module. When AS-i Power24V is used, there are limitations on the cable length (max. 50 m AS-i cable) and usability of AS-i components and connected sensors/actuators due to the reduced voltage. Additional notes: AS-Interface System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26250840/0/en) FAQ "Compatibility for AS-i Power24V" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42806066) Power supply The CM AS-i Master ST is fully powered from the AS-i voltage. Only the internal backplane bus interface for the ET 200SP station (including the DIAG LED) is powered from the operating voltage of the ET 200SP station. If the operating voltage of the ET 200SP station fails, the communication between the AS-i master and AS-i slaves continues without interruption, in which case the outputs of the AS-i slave are reset to zero. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 28 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 5 Configuring 5.1 Requirements Introduction You configure the ET 200SP station and its CM AS-i Master ST and assign their parameters using STEP 7 or the configuration software of another manufacturer. Configuring the CM AS-i Master ST Configuring in STEP 7 or another configuration software is required in order to use the CM AS-i Master ST in an ET 200SP. A distinction is made here between the necessary basic configuration of the AS-i master and the optional configuration of the AS-i slaves. You can configure the module using STEP 7 or with a GSD file. Version dependencies: Table 3-1 Version dependence of the CM AS-i Master ST engineering versions (Page 17) Note CM AS-i Master ST in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 If the CM AS-i Master ST module in the applicable firmware version is not listed in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 , you will need a "Hardware Support Package". You can install this HSP from the Internet using the corresponding function in STEP 7. Further information can be found in the documentation and in the online help for STEP 7. Installing the HSP in STEP 7 V5.5 (classic) "HW Config" > "Options" menu > "Install HW Updates" Installing the HSP in STEP 7 V13 (TIA Portal): "Options" menu > "Support packages" You can find additional information on the HSP and download it in Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108742051). Download the GSD file from the internet: PROFINET GSD file (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/57138621) PROFIBUS GSD file (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/73016883) Observe the STEP 7 online help or the documentation of the configuration software manufacturer. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 29 Configuring 5.2 Basic configuration of the CM AS-i Master ST Configuring the AS-i system requires two steps: 1. Basic configuration of the AS-i master (Basic configuration of the CM AS-i Master ST (Page 30)) 2. Configuration of the AS-i slaves Configuring the AS-i slaves includes defining the slave modules and, if necessary, assigning the slave operating parameters. See also Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 31) Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34) Configuration of the AS-i slaves via the control panel in the TIA Portal (Page 36) Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the PLC program (Page 36) Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST (Page 15) 5.2 Basic configuration of the CM AS-i Master ST The following is carried out as a result of the basic configuration: The AS-i master is made known with the system. The length of the cyclic process image is made known (length can be set in FW V1.1 and higher). The operating parameters of the AS-i master are assigned. Procedure The basic configuration is performed by inserting the AS-i master module into the project of the configuration software. Change the operating parameters according to their use. You will find information on operating parameters in the Sections: Parameters (Page 43) Explanation of the parameters (Page 44) Should the need arise, you can change the size of the process image to be transferred as follows: In STEP 7 in the "Properties" dialog of the AS-i master When the GSD file is used, by selecting the respective module variant from the GSD selection list Further information on the process image: Address space (Page 44) See also Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 31) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 30 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Configuring 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves 5.3.1 Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 During configuration of the AS-i slaves, you specify the stations that the AS-i master is to communicate with in STEP 7. Configuration in STEP 7 provides the following advantages: AS-i slaves are displayed graphically in the network view along with their AS-i addresses (STEP 7 (TIA Portal)) or displayed as a list (STEP 7 V5.5 and higher). The assigned I/O addresses of an AS-i slave are displayed in the Properties window of the AS-i slave. The slave parameters can be configured in the STEP 7 user interface. The configuration of the slaves is stored in the STEP 7 project, which makes documentation easier. The configuration data is stored in the PLC and transferred automatically when the AS-i master is replaced. During power-up, the AS-i master switches automatically to "protected operation". The diagnostic status of the slave is displayed in STEP 7 (TIA portal) in the network view as a symbol (currently only in combination with S7-300 / S7-400 CPU). Note If you do not configure any AS-i slaves in STEP 7 or if you configure using a GSD file, ASInterface uses the CONFIGURED configuration saved in the AS-i master. The following sections describe how you can create the CONFIGURED configuration: * Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34) * Configuration of the AS-i slaves via the control panel in the TIA Portal (Page 36) This does not apply when configuring with a GSD file. * Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the PLC program (Page 36) Procedure You activate configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 as follows: In STEP 7 (TIA Portal): by connecting at least one AS-i slave to the AS-i master over an AS-i network in the network view. In STEP 7 V5.5: by inserting at least one AS-i slave in the configuration table of the AS-i master (FW V1.1 and higher). When the AS-i slaves are configured in STEP 7, configuration is not possible using the "SET" button, via the online function or the PLC program. This configuration switches the AS-i master automatically to "protected operation". AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 31 Configuring 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves Option 1: Selection from the hardware catalog To configure the AS-i slaves, open the hardware catalog in STEP 7. STEP 7 (TIA Portal): In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), you will find the AS-i slaves under "Field devices". 1. Select a module from the hardware catalog. 2. Drag the module to the network view. 3. Connect the AS-i interface of the module (yellow square in the slave symbol) to the AS-i interface of the AS-i master (yellow square in the master) or directly to the yellow line of the AS-i subnet. When a connection is made to the AS-i subnet, a free AS-i address is automatically assigned in the configuration. You can change this AS-i address in the properties dialog of the AS-i slave in the "ASInterface" area. STEP 7 V5.5: 1. Open the "Object properties" dialog of the CM AS-i Master ST in the ET 200SP. To do so, select "Object properties" in the shortcut menu. 2. Click the "Slave configuration" tab (FW V1.1 and higher) in the "Properties..." dialog of the CM AS-i Master ST (FW V1.1 and higher) to open it. 3. Double-click the desired AS-i address (1A, B, 2A, B, etc.) to open the "Configuration" of the AS-i slave. 4. Click the "Select" button to open the "Slave selection dialog". 5. Select a slave in this dialog. Alternatively: Select a slave from the "Module" list box. Option 2: Reading out an existing AS-i configuration If an AS-i cable with AS-i slaves is connected to the AS-i master, you can transfer the connected slaves to the configuration of STEP 7. The connected AS-i slaves must have addresses other than "0". Procedure: 1. Switch on the AS-i voltage. 2. Compile the project and download it to the station. 3. STEP 7 (TIA Portal): - Right click the AS-i master. - Select "Hardware detection" in the shortcut menu. STEP 7 V5.5: - Select the ET 200SP. - Open the "Properties" dialog of the CM AS-i Master ST by double-clicking the slot of the CM AS-i Master ST, for example. - Change to the "Options AS-i slaves" tab. - Click the "Upload to PG" button. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 32 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Configuring 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves 4. The detected slaves are applied as universal slaves in the project. Note Automatic reading out of article numbers is not possible. Slave addresses already present in the project are not overwritten. If you want to transfer a slave address that is already present, you must delete the existing slave in the hardware detection before the readout. 5. You can now edit the slaves applied to the project as if you had taken them directly from the hardware catalog. The following basic types are available: Siemens AS-i slave Universal slave with the following forms: - AS-i F Slave Universal for safety-related applications - AS-i Standard Slave Universal, for configuring with standard address or extended address (A/B slaves) - Universal AS-i Proxy Slave The article numbers for the slaves are only saved in the offline project. Comparison of the article numbers in the offline project with those of the slaves on the AS-i cable is not performed. The AS-i master uses the configuration data of the slave profile (IO.ID.ID2) and ID1 code of the AS-i slave for comparison of the actual status with the configured status. Configuring the properties of Siemens AS-i slaves When you use an AS-i slave from Siemens, you select the slave directly from the hardware catalog. This selection offers the following properties: The device type is represented in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) using an image. The meaning of the slave parameters is displayed as text. The underlying slave profile is already set. The IO, ID and ID2 identifiers do not need to be entered. Parameter bits that are irrelevant for the Siemens slave are set to the default value "1". They cannot be changed. The ID1 code is preassigned according to the factory setting of the Siemens slave. If you change the ID1 code of the slave, you must also change the setting in the slave configuration. See also the command "No. D1: AS-i-Slave_ID1_schreiben_mit_Zieladresse (Write ID1 code with destination address) (Page 160)". AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 33 Configuring 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves Configuring the properties of universal AS-i slaves When configuring with the universal AS-i slave or universal AS-i F slave, you must make the following settings: Profile identification of the AS-i slave (IO, ID, ID2) Parameters of the AS-i slave You will find the profile identification, the ID1 code, and the meaning of the AS-i slave parameters in the documentation for the AS-i slave. The I/O assignment of the slave is shown, depending on the specified profile identification, in the "Configuration" section. See also Applying the slave configuration (Page 38) No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration (Page 114) 5.3.2 Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button Functional principle You can connect a "SET" button to terminals "SET1" and "SET2" of the AS-i master. This supports the teaching procedure for the connected AS-i slaves. This function is activated by closing the button contact on the SET1 and SET2 terminals. Behavior in "configuration mode" and in "protected operation" Table 5- 1 "Configuration mode"/"Protected operation" Mode of the CM AS-i Master ST Behavior of the "CM" LED "Configuration mode" The "CM" LED lights up. "Protected operation" The "CM" LED does not light up. When the AS-i master is in "configuration mode", the AS-i master is configured automatically when the "SET" button is pressed. Configuration is carried out as follows: 1. The CM AS-i Master ST saves the AS-i slave configuration present on the AS-i cable as the CONF configuration in non-volatile memory. 2. The AS-i master then switches over to "protected operation". If the AS-i master is in "protected operation", it will switch to "configuration mode" when the "SET" button is pressed. The "SET" button is only activated when the CPU is in "STOP" state or after disconnecting the bus from the IM module of the ET 200SP. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 34 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Configuring 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves Requirements Ensure the following states exist: 1. The CPU is in "STOP" state or the bus is disconnected from the IM module of the ET 200SP. 2. The AS-i master and all AS-i slaves are connected to the AS-Interface and supplied with voltage. 3. No AS-i slave with address 0 is connected to AS-Interface. The AS-i slaves have unique addresses that differ from one another. Procedure 1. Check whether the AS-i master is in "configuration mode". (The "CM" LED lights up.) If the "CM" LED does not light up, switch the AS-i master to "configuration mode" by pressing the "SET" button once. 2. Press the "SET" button. This configures the AS-i master. In so doing, the ACTUAL configuration detected is saved as the CONF configuration in non-volatile memory in the CM AS-i Master ST. At the same time, the AS-i master switches over to "protected operation". The "CM" LED goes out. Note Parameter setting when configuring with the "SET" button If no AS-i slaves are connected, all internal lists are set to default values. In particular, the following are set: all AS-i parameters = FHex and bit "AutoAdress_Enable = 1". When configuring is performed using the "SET" button, the parameter value in the volatile memory of the AS-i master for each slave applied to the CONF configuration is saved as a non-volatile parameter. For slaves that are not present, the default value FH is applied to the non-volatile memory. This corresponds to the function of the No. 00: Set_Permanent_Parameter (Page 107) command. Note The existing configuration can be overwritten using the "SET" button Note regarding the CM AS-i Master ST: A configuration of AS-i slaves specified using STEP 7 and downloaded to the S7 station is transferred to the AS-i master again during S7 station start-up or after station recovery of the head module. Any configuration implemented using the "SET" button will be overwritten. When configuring with the "SET" button, if no slaves are connected to AS-Interface, the CONFIGURED configuration in the master is deleted along with the profile definition for proxy slaves (see Section "AS-i proxy slave (Page 42)"). The AS-i voltage must be present. See also Terminal assignment (Page 25) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 35 Configuring 5.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves 5.3.3 Configuration of the AS-i slaves via the control panel in the TIA Portal You can also execute the functionality of the "SET" button described in Section "Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34)" via the control panel in STEP 7. When configuring the AS-i slaves over the control panel in TIA Portal, if no slaves are connected to AS-Interface, the CONFIGURED configuration in the master is deleted along with the profile definition for proxy slaves (see Section "AS-i proxy slave (Page 42)"). The AS-i voltage must be present. 5.3.4 Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the PLC program You can use the PLC program to completely define the configuration of the AS-i slaves. The command interface of the AS-i master is available for this. You use the No. BA: Write_overall_configuration (Page 131) command to specify the CONF configuration of the AS-i slaves in the AS-i master, similarly as when configuring the slave in the TIA Portal. The No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration (Page 114) command allows you to save the ACTUAL configuration as the CONF configuration in the AS-i master, similarly as when using the "SET" button for this. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 36 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Configuring 5.4 Online functions in the TIA Portal 5.4 Online functions in the TIA Portal 5.4.1 Switching from one operating mode to another In STEP 7 "Online" > "Diagnostics", you can switch between "protected operation" and "configuration mode" under "Functions". There are two buttons: "Configuration mode" "Protected operation" The LEDs on the AS-i master and in STEP 7 indicate the current operating mode of the AS-i master. You will find additional information in Section "Meaning of the LEDs (Page 64)". The operating mode can only be switched when the CPU is in "STOP" state. Note Online functions The online functions can only be performed when at least the basic configuration has been completed and the configuration has been loaded into the ET 200SP station. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 37 Configuring 5.4 Online functions in the TIA Portal 5.4.2 Applying the slave configuration Application This step is only necessary if AS-i slaves have not been configured in STEP 7 and the configuration of the AS-i slaves is not performed using the "SET" button. If AS-i slaves have already been configured in STEP 7 and the slave configuration has been downloaded to the AS-i master, the system deactivates the function for applying the slave configuration. It is then no longer possible for this function to be called. Requirements The following requirements must be satisfied to do this: The CPU is in "STOP" state. The AS-i master and all AS-i slaves are connected to the AS-Interface and supplied with voltage. No AS-i slave with address 0 is connected to AS-Interface. The AS-i slaves have unique addresses that differ from one another. The AS-i master is in "configuration mode". Applying the slave configuration The "ACTUAL CONF" button in the "Online" > "Diagnostics" window can be used to apply the configuration of slaves connected to the master. The following data of the AS-i slaves is saved in non-volatile memory in the AS-i master: AS-i addresses The slave profile for each AS-i slave: IO code, ID code, ID2 code ID1 code for each AS-i slave It is not possible to apply the slave configuration via the "ACTUAL -> CONF" button if AS-i slaves have already been configured in STEP 7 and downloaded to the AS-i master or if the CPU is in "RUN" state. You reactivate the function "ACTUAL CONF" by reloading the AS-i master in STEP 7 with the basic configuration only - that is, without configured AS-i slaves. Note Parameter setting when applying the slave configuration When configuring is performed using the "ACTUALCONF" button, the parameter value in the volatile memory of the AS-i master for each slave applied to the CONF configuration is saved as a non-volatile parameter. For slaves that are not present, the default value FH is applied to the non-volatile memory. This corresponds to the function of the No. 00: Set_Permanent_Parameter (Page 107) command. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 38 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Configuring 5.5 Variable configuration 5.4.3 Setting the address of an AS-i slave In the "Online" > "Diagnostics" window, you can assign a new address to an AS-i slave using a selection menu and the "Execute addressing" button. Only free AS-i addresses are available here. 5.5 Variable configuration Option handling and proxy slaves can be combined. 5.5.1 Option handling A machine consists of a basic configuration and several expansion stages. The overall configuration is configured in the STEP 7 project. The slaves that belong to an expansion stage are configured as optional slaves. When the system is commissioned, the user program (PLC) defines which expansion stages are installed. The configuration in STEP 7 remains unchanged. You can use option handling to activate and deactivate AS-i slaves that you have defined in HW Config in the user program during operation. You configure the AS-i slaves in the AS-i master as described in Section "Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 31)": 1. Activate option handling. STEP 7 (TIA Portal): - Select "Options > Option handling" in the slave properties dialog. - Select the "Option handling" check box. STEP 7 V5.5: - Select the "Slave configuration" tab in the "Properties..." dialog of the CM AS-i Master ST. - Double-click the desired AS-i address (1A, B, 2A, B, etc.) to open the "Configuration" of the AS-i slave. - Select the "Option handling" check box. This activates the option handling for this slave. 2. Activate the slave using the user program (PLC). You can also deactivate the slave in the user program. The AS-i master treats an optional slave that is not activated like a slave that is not configured. The AS-i master treats an activated optional slave like a slave that is configured without option handling. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 39 Configuring 5.5 Variable configuration Procedure 1. Define the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) > Network view or in STEP 7 V5.5 > "HW Config". 2. Specify whether option handling is enabled for each AS-i slave. 3. In the user program, you can activate or deactivate AS-i slaves for which option handling is activated during runtime. To do this, a combination of 2 bits must be set or reset in data record DS 131. Note Option handling and safe AS-i slaves When data record DS 131 is written to the CM AS-i Master ST module, the signals of the safety-related slaves on the same bus are reset. Before transferring the option data record DS 131, ensure that the system is in an operating state in which a safety signal reset will not adversely affect the course of operation. Before restarting, error acknowledgement or reintegration must be performed for the safe AS-i inputs and, where applicable, the safe AS-i outputs. The correct procedure for the fail-safe evaluation system used must be observed. See also DS 131 Activate/deactivate optional slaves (Page 40) DS 131 Read status of option handling (Page 41) No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online (Page 159) 5.5.1.1 DS 131 Activate/deactivate optional slaves Description By writing this data record, you activate or deactivate slaves configured as optional on the AS-i bus. Table 5- 2 Structure of DS 131 write Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0...1 Reserved 2...9 List of slaves to be activated 10 ... 17 Bit = 0 No action Bit = 1 The slave will be activated. Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 List of slaves to be deactivated Bit = 0 The slave will not be deactivated. Bit = 1 The slave will be deactivated. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 40 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Configuring 5.5 Variable configuration Note Identical entries in each list If a "1" is entered for an AS-i slave in both lists, the slave will be deactivated. Note Activated/deactivated status of the optional slaves The activated/deactivated status of the optional slaves is stored in non-volatile memory of the master and is retained even if a new configuration is downloaded to the master. The status of an optional slave is set to deactivated if the slave is not set as optional in a configuration. If a configuration contains slaves without option handling, the status stored internally in the master for these slaves is reset (bit = 0). See also Address space (Page 44) Option handling (Page 39) 5.5.1.2 DS 131 Read status of option handling Description The current status of the slaves configured as optional is returned by reading this data record. Table 5- 3 Structure of DS 131 read Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 0...1 Reserved 2...9 List of activated, optional slaves Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit = 0 The optional slave is deactivated or the optional slave is not an optional slave. Bit = 1 The optional slave is activated. Bit = 0 The slave is not configured as an optional slave or it is not contained in the configuration. Bit = 1 The slave is configured as an optional slave. 10 ... 17 List of configured, optional slaves If a slave is configured as not optional, then the associated bit in the list of activated optional slaves in the non-volatile memory of the master is reset to the value 0. See also Option handling (Page 39) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 41 Configuring 5.5 Variable configuration 5.5.2 AS-i proxy slave Description A proxy slave is used to represent any given slave. This means you define the I/O addresses in the PLC program in advance. You define the slave itself at runtime. Procedure Configure a proxy slave in "STEP 7 > HW Config" with the associated digital and / or analog I/O addresses. You can then use these I/O addresses in the user program to access the data of the proxy slave once you have defined the slave profile at runtime. To do this, select the proxy slave from the universal AS-i slaves in the hardware catalog. At runtime, specify in the PLC program which slave type should be operated under this address. You define the slave profile of the proxy slave by changing the overall configuration ("No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online (Page 159)" command). In this case, the AS-i branch is not reset. The slave type defined in the user program is retained in the CM AS-i Master ST module, even after the power supply has been switched off. The slave type of a proxy slave defined in the user program is retained in the CM AS-i Master ST module, even after the hardware configuration has been reloaded into the station. Applications Variable machine configurations that can be changed at runtime. Flexible expansion of the system in the future, without the need to specify the actual type of slave beforehand. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 42 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 6 Parameter assignment/addressing 6.1 Parameters Parameters of the AS-i master Table 6- 1 Assignable parameters and their default setting (GSD file) Parameters Diagnostic interrupt in case of errors in AS-i configuration Diagnostic interrupt in case of AS-i cable fault Automatic address programming Ground-fault monitoring activated Automatic ID1 code assignment (Firmware V1.1 and higher) Duplicate address detection1) Value range * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable for AS-i voltage 24 V * Enable for AS-i voltage 30 V * Disable Default Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable 1) This parameter is divided into "Deactivate duplicate address detection" and "Duplicate address detection for 24 V" depending on the GSD variant. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 43 Parameter assignment/addressing 6.2 Explanation of the parameters 6.2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostic interrupt if AS-i configuration error: With this parameter, you specify whether AS-i configuration errors will be signaled to the higher-level system. The following are signaled as a configuration error: A surplus slave A missing slave A slave of the wrong type Diagnostic interrupt if AS-i cable fault: This parameter is used to specify whether faults concerning the AS-i cable should be reported to the higher-level system. Possible AS-i cable faults are: Ground fault Insufficient AS-i voltage Peripheral fault of an AS-i slave Automatic address programming: When a defective AS-i slave is being replaced, you use this parameter to specify whether the configured AS-i address will be automatically assigned to the new device. For details on this functionality, see Section "Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming (Page 74)" Ground-fault monitoring activated: This parameter is used to specify whether ground faults on the AS-i cable should be detected by the AS-i master. Deactivate this setting if you are using an external unit for ground fault detection. Automatic ID1 code assignment: When you activate this parameter, in the case of automatic address programming the ID1 code of a slave is written to the value specified during configuring. Duplicate address detection: The duplicate address detection function can identify inadvertent duplicate addressing. When you activate it, you must select the AS-i line voltage in use. This parameter is divided into "Deactivate duplicate address detection" and "Duplicate address detection for 24 V" depending on the GSD variant. 6.3 Address space The assignment of the address space is described in the following Section: Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves (Page 45) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 44 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.1 7 Access to AS-Interface The distributed I/O system communicates with the AS-i slaves via the CM AS-i Master ST. The AS-i communication objects are mapped onto a continuous data area for input and output data. What's new in firmware V1.1 and higher The following options are available as of firmware V1.1: You can design the process image flexibly according to your needs. You can reduce the length of the reserved I/O area (depending on the configuration software version). Designing the process image flexibly. You can design the process image in the following way: Reduce or increase the process image (default length 32 bytes): - If the AS-i slaves are configured in STEP 7: the length can be set in steps in the range 4 ... 288 bytes. In this case, the maximum length of the process image depends on the ET 200SP interface module (IM) or ET 200SP CPU used. - If the AS-i slaves are not configured in STEP 7 length can be set to 16 or 32 bytes Variable division of the process image if AS-i slaves are configured in STEP 7: - Analog values and digital values can be mapped in one process image. - The slave address is not bound to a specific position in the process image. - The number of bits per slave can vary. For example, the digital input data of the slave at address 1 can be one bit long and the analog data of the slave at address 5 can be two bytes long. Length of the reserved I/O area can be reduced If your configuration contains fewer AS-i slaves, you may reduce the length of the reserved I/O area (depending on the configuration software version). This reduces the volume of data to be transmitted on PROFIBUS or PROFINET. You set the length of the I/O area in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in the properties of the AS-i master. This does not change the assignment of the slave address to the offset. This means: When the length is reduced, the higher AS-i bus addresses can no longer be addressed. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 45 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Address overview In the Properties dialog box of module CM AS-i master ST under "I/O Addresses", you can call up an address overview in which the I/O addresses are assigned to the AS-i slaves (as of TIA Portal V14 SP1 extended for any configuration) 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values A missing or failed digital slave results in the substitute value 0 in the input data. In the output direction, the non-assigned values have no effect. Refer to the information about display of transparent values / digital values in Section Accessing AS-i analog data via the process image (Page 58). 7.2.1 I/O addresses when configuring AS-i slaves in STEP 7 Process image transmission time The time it takes to transmit a process image depends on its size: If the length of the process image is set to up to 32 bytes, the I/O data in the ET 200SP station are transmitted within 1 backplane bus cycle. This setting results in the shortest transmission time on the backplane bus. If the length of the process image is set to more than 32 bytes, the I/O data of the CM AS-i masterST in the ET 200SP station are transmitted in several consecutive backplane bus cycles. Data consistency is maintained from the point of view of the IM or the CPU. Division into several backplane bus cycles is performed automatically by the ET 200SP system. The number of required backplane bus cycles is automatically determined and depends on the set length of the process image. In this case, the maximum length of the process image depends on the ET 200SP interface module (IM) or ET 200SP CPU used. For more detailed information, see the technical data of the IM or CPU. CM AS-i Master ST with configured AS-i slaves If you configure the AS-i slaves as described in Section "Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 31)", you will set the I/O addresses of the slaves using the Properties dialog box of the AS-i slave. The I/O address can be set individually in the area of the defined process image of the AS-i master. The input/output bits x.4 to x.7 in the first byte of the process image of the AS-imaster cannot be used for AS-i slaves. The process image can contain input/output data of digital and analog slaves. The bit length of a slave depends on the configured profile. If the option "Reserve 4 bits length" is activated, 4 input bits and 4 output bits will be reserved for the slave. In this case, the real I/O data of the AS-i slave fall within the 4 bit range as described in Table 7-6 "Standard assignment table for inputs/outputs of digital AS-i slaves" in SectionI/O addresses without configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 50). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 46 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Arrangement of the AS-i slaves in the process image (Sort) In TIA Portal V14 SP1 and higher, the arrangement of the AS-i slaves in the process image can be sorted automatically. 3 options are offered in the Properties of the AS-i master under "I/O Addresses > Arrangement": Sort - CLASSIC: The digital inputs/outputs of the slaves are sorted into the process image as described in Table 7-1 "Bit assignment per digital slave (CLASSIC sorting)", starting from the set start address of module CM AS-i master ST. CLASSIC sorting is the same as that described in SectionI/O addresses without configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 50). After the digital inputs/outputs, the analog inputs/outputs are sorted into the process image. The status information (EFD, CM, CFGOK, DIAG) is displayed if the option "Process image for status information" (FW V1.1 and higher) is activated, see Table 7-3 "Overview of status information". Sort - LINEAR: The digital inputs/outputs of the slaves are sorted into the process image as described in Table 7-2 "Bit assignment per digital slave (LINEAR sorting)": The digital inputs/outputs of the slaves with a standard address or A address are mapped in bits 0 ... 3, whereas the digital inputs/outputs of the slaves with a B address are mapped in bits 4 ... 7. After the digital inputs/outputs, the analog inputs/outputs are sorted into the process image. The status information (EFD, CM, CFGOK, DIAG) is displayed if the option "Process image for status information" (FW V1.1 and higher) is activated, see Table 7-3 "Overview of status information". Packing: Address usage for the inputs/outputs of the slaves is optimized, i.e. all gaps are eliminated and the length of the I/O area is adapted. You can see the selected I/O addresses directly in the address overview of the I/O addresses in the configuration of the CM AS-i master ST. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 47 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Table 7- 1 Bit assignment per digital slave (CLASSIC sorting) Byte number 1) Bit 7 ... 4 n+0 Reserved Bit 3 Bit 3 ... 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 n+1 Slave 2 or 2A Slave 3 or 3A n+2 Slave 4 or 4A Slave 5 or 5A n+3 Slave 6 or 6A Slave 7 or 7A n+4 Slave 8 or 8A Slave 9 or 9A n+5 Slave 10 or 10A Slave 11 or 11A n+6 Slave 12 or 12A Slave 13 or 13A n+7 Slave 14 or 14A Slave 15 or 15A n+8 Slave 16 or 16A Slave 17 or 17A n+9 Slave 18 or 18A Slave 19 or 19A n+10 Slave 20 or 20A Slave 21 or 21A n+11 Slave 22 or 22A Slave 23 or 23A n+12 Slave 24 or 24A Slave 25 or 25A n+13 Slave 26 or 26A Slave 27 or 27A n+14 Slave 28 or 28A Slave 29 or 29A n+15 Slave 30 or 30A Slave 31 or 31A FW V1.0 Reserved Slave 1B FW V1.1 and higher EFD n+16 CM CFGOK Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 DIAG n+17 Slave 2B Slave 3B n+18 Slave 4B Slave 5B n+19 Slave 6B Slave 7B n+20 Slave 8B Slave 9B n+21 Slave 10B Slave 11B n+22 Slave 12B Slave 13B n+23 Slave 14B Slave 15B n+24 Slave 16B Slave 17B n+25 Slave 18B Slave 19B n+26 Slave 20B Slave 21B n+27 Slave 22B Slave 23B n+28 Slave 24B Slave 25B n+29 Slave 26B Slave 27B n+30 Slave 28B Slave 29B n+31 Slave 30B Bit 3 Bit 1 Slave 1 or 1A Slave 31B Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 1) n = Start address AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 48 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Table 7- 2 Bit assignment per digital slave (LINEAR sorting) Byte number 1) Bit 7 ... 4 Bit 3 n+0 FW V1.0 Bit 3 ... 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reserved Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 CM CFGOK DIAG Bit 1 Bit 0 Reserved FW V1.1 and higher EFD n+1 Slave 1B Slave 1 or 1A n+2 Slave 2B Slave 2 or 2A n+3 Slave 3B Slave 3 or 3A n+4 Slave 4B Slave 4 or 4A n+5 Slave 5B Slave 5 or 5A n+6 Slave 6B Slave 6 or 6A n+7 Slave 7B Slave 7 or 7A n+8 Slave 8B Slave 8 or 8A n+9 Slave 9B Slave 9 or 9A n+10 Slave 10B Slave 10 or 10A n+11 Slave 11B Slave 11 or 11A n+12 Slave 12B Slave 12 or 12A n+13 Slave 13B Slave 13 or 13A n+14 Slave 14B Slave 14 or 14A n+15 Slave 15B Slave 15 or 15A n+16 Slave 16B Slave 16 or 16A n+17 Slave 17B Slave 17 or 17A n+18 Slave 18B Slave 18 or 18A n+19 Slave 19B Slave 19 or 19A n+20 Slave 20B Slave 20 or 20A n+21 Slave 21B Slave 21 or 21A n+22 Slave 22B Slave 22 or 22A n+23 Slave 23B Slave 23 or 23A n+24 Slave 24B Slave 24 or 24A n+25 Slave 25B Slave 25 or 25A n+26 Slave 26B Slave 26 or 26A n+27 Slave 27B Slave 27 or 27A n+28 Slave 28B Slave 28 or 28A n+29 Slave 29B Slave 29 or 29A n+30 Slave 30B Slave 30 or 30A n+31 Slave 31B Bit 3 Slave 31 or 31A Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 1) n = Start address AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 49 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Status information in input process image To provide a quick summary diagnosis, the following status information can optionally be transferred to a selectable address in the input process image (FW V1.1 and higher). Table 7- 3 Overview of status information EFD 0 = No ground fault detected 1 = Ground fault detected CM 0 = Master in protected operation 1 = Master in configuration mode CFGOK 0 = Configuration not OK or slave exists with address 0 1 = Configuration OK DIAG 0 = No diagnostics pending 1 = Diagnostics pending. This information is set for the following events: -The AS-i master is in "offline" mode. - The AS-i voltage is not OK. - Multiple addressing was detected. - An I/O error was detected. - A configuration error was detected. - A slave with address 0 exists. 7.2.2 I/O addresses without configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 I/O addresses of the slaves in the process image If you configure according to Sections "Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34)" to "Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the PLC program (Page 36)", the I/O addresses of digital slaves in the process image of the AS-i master are located at a fixed position according to the following table. The I/O data of analog slaves can be accessed via a data record. Input data and output data of the AS-i slaves are exchanged with the controller via an I/O area of 16 or 32 bytes. As a result, the digital values of up to 62 AS-i slaves are transmitted. In doing so, 4 bits are assigned to each digital slave. The offset for accessing this data depends on the AS-i address of the AS-i slave. In a project in which the AS-i slaves are not configured in STEP 7, the standard length of the process image is 32 bytes. In firmware V1.1 and higher, the length can be set to 16 or 32 bytes. In an I/O address area of 16 bytes, you can only assign standard addresses or A addresses for slaves. In an I/O address area of 32 bytes, you can also assign B addresses for slaves. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 50 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Table 7- 4 Bit assignment per digital slave Byte number 1) Bit 7 ... 4 Bit 3 Bit 3 ... 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 n+0 Reserved Slave 1 or 1A n+1 Slave 2 or 2A Slave 3 or 3A n+2 Slave 4 or 4A Slave 5 or 5A n+3 Slave 6 or 6A Slave 7 or 7A n+4 Slave 8 or 8A Slave 9 or 9A n+5 Slave 10 or 10A Slave 11 or 11A n+6 Slave 12 or 12A Slave 13 or 13A n+7 Slave 14 or 14A Slave 15 or 15A n+8 Slave 16 or 16A Slave 17 or 17A n+9 Slave 18 or 18A Slave 19 or 19A n+10 Slave 20 or 20A Slave 21 or 21A n+11 Slave 22 or 22A Slave 23 or 23A n+12 Slave 24 or 24A Slave 25 or 25A n+13 Slave 26 or 26A Slave 27 or 27A n+14 Slave 28 or 28A Slave 29 or 29A n+15 Slave 30 or 30A Slave 31 or 31A FW V1.0 Reserved Slave 1B FW V1.1 and higher EFD n+16 CM CFGOK Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 DIAG n+17 Slave 2B Slave 3B n+18 Slave 4B Slave 5B n+19 Slave 6B Slave 7B n+20 Slave 8B Slave 9B n+21 Slave 10B Slave 11B n+22 Slave 12B Slave 13B n+23 Slave 14B Slave 15B n+24 Slave 16B Slave 17B n+25 Slave 18B Slave 19B n+26 Slave 20B Slave 21B n+27 Slave 22B Slave 23B n+28 Slave 24B Slave 25B n+29 Slave 26B Slave 27B n+30 Slave 28B Slave 29B n+31 Slave 30B Bit 3 Bit 1 Slave 31B Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 1) n = Start address AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 51 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Status information for process image with 32 bytes For a process image that is 32 bytes long, the following information is transferred in byte n+16 (FW V1.1 and higher): Table 7- 5 Status information in byte n+16 for a process image that is 32 bytes long: Bit 7: EFD 0 = No ground fault detected 1 = Ground fault detected Bit 6: CM 0 = Master in protected operation 1 = Master in configuration mode Bit 5: CFGOK 0 = Configuration not OK or slave exists with address 0 1 = Configuration OK Bit 4: DIAG 0 = No diagnostics pending 1 = Diagnostics pending. This information is set for the following events: -The AS-i master is in "offline" mode. - The AS-i voltage is not OK. - Multiple addressing was detected. - An I/O error was detected. - A configuration error was detected. - A slave with address 0 exists. The status information provides a quick summary diagnosis. If a process image is 16 bytes long, only the first 16 bytes (byte n to byte n+15) are transferred. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 52 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Bit assignment of the process image In a project in which the AS-i slaves are not configured in STEP 7, 4 bits of digital input data and 4 bits of digital output data are assigned to the process image. I/O bits that are not assigned by the slave contain the substitute value 0. The assignment of the process image depends on the AS-i slave type. For digital slaves with up to 4-bit inputs and 4-bit outputs, the following standard assignment table applies: Table 7- 6 Standard assignment table for inputs/outputs of digital AS-i slaves IO code Number (Hex value) Inputs/ outputs Input process image Bit 3 Bit 2 Output process image Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 4 DI IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 - - - - 1 3 DI / 1 DQ - IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 OUT 0 - - - 2 4 DI / 1 DQ IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 OUT 0 - - - 3 2 DI / 2 DQ - - IN 1 IN 0 OUT 1 OUT 0 - - 4 4 DI / 2 DQ IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 OUT 1 OUT 0 - - 5 1 DI / 3 DQ - - - IN 0 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 - 6 4 DI / 3 DQ IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 - 7 4 DI/4 DQ IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 8 4 DQ - - - - OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 9 1 DI / 3 DQ IN 0 - - - - OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 A 1 DI / 4 DQ IN 0 - - - OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 B 2 DI / 2 DQ IN 1 IN 0 - - - - OUT 1 OUT 0 C 2 DI / 4 DQ IN 1 IN 0 - - OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 D 3 DI / 1 DQ IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 - - - - OUT 0 E 3 DI / 4 DQ IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 - OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 0 Information about the table: DI: Digital input DQ: Digital output The actual numbering of the inputs/outputs of the AS-i slaves depends on the manufacturer of the slave. In the case of slaves with extended addressing (A/B slaves), column "Bit 3" of the output process image is not assigned data. Exception: In the case of slaves with profile IO.ID.ID2 = 7.A.7, "Bit 3" of the output process image is also assigned. In particular, the table does not apply to slaves of Combined Transaction Type (CTT) with profiles 6.0, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5.5, 7.A.5, 7.A.8, 7.A.9, 7.A.A, B.A.5 (IO.ID or IO.ID.ID2), see data sheet of slave. For assignment of safety slaves (profile 0.B and 7.B), see Section 7.2.3 "Special characteristics of AS-i Safety Slaves". AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 53 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values Configuration example The following graphic shows an example of addressing 4 digital slaves. In the example, you configure the start addresses n = 40 for the I/O data in STEP 7 . The bits with a gray background are relevant for the user program. The bits with a white background are not relevant for the user program, because AS-i slave bits are not assigned here. Figure 7-1 Example of addressing 4 digital slaves The AS-i slave with address 3 and with two inputs and two outputs, referred to as a 2I/2O module, occupies bits 0 and 1 in input byte 41 and bits 2 and 3 in output byte 41 in the graphic, for example. Figure 7-2 Example to show assignment of the AS-i connections of the 2I/2O modules to the data bits of the input bytes for slave with address 3 Figure 7-3 Example to show assignment of the AS-i connections of the 2I/2O modules to the data bits of the output bytes for slave with address 3 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 54 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.2 Transmitting AS-i digital values 7.2.3 Special characteristics of AS-i Safety slaves The AS-i master performs a non-safe evaluation for the data of safe input slaves. The evaluation is represented in the process image of a Safety input slave as follows: Table 7- 7 Input process image of a Safety input slave Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning 0 0 0 0 All contacts are open. 0 0 0 1 F-IN1 is closed. 0 1 0 0 F-IN2 is closed. 0 1 0 1 F-IN1 and F-IN2 are closed. In addition, the AS-i master evaluates in a non-safe manner how a safe AS-i output is to be addressed. The information is in the input process image of the standard controller: Table 7- 8 Input process image of the control unit for a safe AS-i output. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning 0 0 0 0 The safe AS-i output is controlled with status OFF position. 1 1 1 1 The safe AS-i output is controlled with status ON position. Note This involves a non-safe evaluation of the safe signals for diagnostic purposes. Non-safe evaluation must not be used for safety-related switching. See also List of abbreviations (Page 173) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 55 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred The following information only applies to AS-i slaves whose data is stored as analog values or as transparent or digital values more than 4 bits in length. Note The CM AS-i Master ST does not support the transmission of analog values in accordance with AS-i Slave Profile 7.1 / 7.2. Transmission of analog values must be implemented in the software for these slaves. Analog interface between the CPU and the CM AS-i Master ST In the user program, you use the process image (Firmware V1.1 and higher) or data records to access I/O data of analog slaves. For more detailed information, refer to Section "Accessing AS-i analog data via the process image (Page 58)". Representation of the analog values or the transparent values The analog values are to be interpreted as 16-bit values in two's complement. The transparent/digital values must be interpreted as two independent bytes. In the case of AS-i slave profiles for transparent/digital data, the AS-i master passes through the data of the AS-i slave to the controller without interpreting the content. For universal AS-i slaves, the following is displayed in the "Configuration" field in STEP 7: Information about the number of channels Information about the resolution Information about the data frame of transparent I/O data In the documentation for the respective AS-i slave, you will find further information about: Value range Measuring range Accuracy of analog slaves Meaning of transparent data AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 56 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred Special cases in analog value transfer In the input direction, the AS-i master sends a substitute value in the event of a slave failure or AS-i communication error: - For slaves with analog transmission, the AS-i master always supplies the substitute value 7FFFH, if the slave fails after power-up of the master. "Transparent" mode exception: For slaves according to the following profiles, the AS-i master supplies the substitute value 0000H: 7.3.0 to 7.3.3 (Type CTT1, output slave 16 DO in "Transparent" mode) 7.3.8 to 7.3.A (Type CTT1, input slave 16 DI in "Transparent" mode) 7.A.A (CTT3, 8 DI / 8 DO slave with A/B address) 7.A.8 (ID1 = 3, 4, 5) (Type CTT4, max. 16 DI slave with A/B address) 7.A.5, 7.5.5 and B.A.5, if you have transparent input (Type CTT2) 6.0.x where x = 2 ... 7 (Type CTT5, in "Transparent" mode) In the output direction, the AS-i master sends logic "0" to all slaves in the event of a failure or in "STOP" state. If the AS-i master or the communication between the AS-i master and PLC fails, data record access to the analog values or transparent/digital input values is not possible. Note that the analog input values and transparent/digital input values are not updated in your user program in this case, and ensure a substitute value processing via the program. NOTICE Behavior in the event of a slave failure If the slave fails prior to or during the power-up of the AS-i master, the substitute value 7FFFH may also be supplied. That is, the input bits of these transparent or digital slaves have the substitute value 1. For this reason, check whether the diagnostic data of these slaves indicate a slave failure and, if required, ensure an appropriate substitute value processing via the program. Special characteristics of combined transaction type slaves When using slaves in accordance with CTT 1 to 5, all or some I/O bits are used for special transfer functions in the process image for AS-i digital values. For further details, please refer to the documentation of the respective AS-i slave. The following applies to these protocol bits: In the input direction, the AS-i master sets the value "0". In the output direction, the AS-i master ignores the bits. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 57 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred 7.3.1 Accessing AS-i analog data via the process image If you assigned I/O addresses to the analog slaves when configuring, you can access the AS-i analog values with word commands (Firmware V1.1 and higher). Analog and transparent I/O addresses for configured AS-i slaves The analog and transparent I/O addresses of an AS-i slave can be freely assigned within the overall process image of the CM AS-i Master ST. This is regardless of the size of the process image. If you only require a few analog inputs and outputs in the process image and want to save space, you can change the length of the I/O data of an AS-i slave. If the set length is less than the actual length of the I/O data of the AS-i slaves, you cannot access the data at addresses greater than the set length via the process image. You can also deactivate the process image for analog inputs/outputs. Please also see the description of the options "Sorting" and "Packing" in Section I/O addresses when configuring AS-i slaves in STEP 7 (Page 46). Access to analog I/O data is also possible via data records independent of the process image. You can find more detailed information on this in Section "Accessing AS-i analog data via acyclic services (Page 58)". 7.3.2 Accessing AS-i analog data via acyclic services Representation of the analog values in the data records Analog values are transferred in the data records numbered from 140 to 147. You access the analog input values using system functions for reading data records. You output analog values using system functions for writing data records. In combination with SIMATIC S7, system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC" enable this. Access to analog data via acyclic services can also be selected, for example, if there is a need to save I/O address space in SIMATIC S7. NOTICE Simultaneous write access via cyclic and acyclic services not possible Simultaneous write access to analog data of a slave is not permissible with different process values either via cyclic or acyclic services. If both services are used the analog output values that are output via cyclic and acyclic services to the same slave address must be synchronized with each other via the user program. You can use data record lengths ranging from 2 bytes to 240 bytes for each data record number. For each slave address, an area of 8 bytes is available to address 4 analog channels. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 58 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred The table below shows which data record is used by each AS-i slave to transfer the analog values. The subsequent table shows the assignment of analog values to the respective analog slaves. The tables are applicable to analog inputs and analog outputs. Table 7- 9 Access to analog values via data records AS-I address of the slave Start addresses for analog values in the data record DS 140 DS 141 DS 142 DS 143 DS 144 DS 145 DS 146 DS 147 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 16 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 4 24 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5 32 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- 6 40 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- 7 48 16 -- -- -- -- -- -- 8 56 24 -- -- -- -- -- -- 9 64 32 0 -- -- -- -- -- 10 72 40 8 -- -- -- -- -- 11 80 48 16 -- -- -- -- -- 12 88 56 24 -- -- -- -- -- 13 96 64 32 0 -- -- -- -- 14 104 72 40 8 -- -- -- -- 15 112 80 48 16 -- -- -- -- 16 120 88 56 24 -- -- -- -- 17 128 96 64 32 0 -- -- -- 18 136 104 72 40 8 -- -- -- 19 144 112 80 48 16 -- -- -- 20 152 120 88 56 24 -- -- -- 21 160 128 96 64 32 0 -- -- 22 168 136 104 72 40 8 -- -- 23 176 144 112 80 48 16 -- -- 24 184 152 120 88 56 24 -- -- 25 192 160 128 96 64 32 0 -- 26 200 168 136 104 72 40 8 -- 27 208 176 144 112 80 48 16 -- 28 216 184 152 120 88 56 24 -- 29 224 192 160 128 96 64 32 0 30 232 200 168 136 104 72 40 8 31 -- 208 176 144 112 80 48 16 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 59 Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves 7.3 AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred Examples / notes on reading this table: The subsequent table shows the assignment of analog values to the respective analog slaves. For additional information, refer to the operating instructions of the slaves. Table 7- 10 Address range for the analog values of an AS-i slave Byte no. (start address + offset) Analog value channel Start address + 0 Channel 1 / high byte Start address + 1 Channel 1 / low byte Start address + 2 Channel 2 / high byte Start address + 3 Channel 2 / low byte Start address + 4 Channel 3 / high byte Start address + 5 Channel 3 / low byte Start address + 6 Channel 4 / high byte Start address + 7 Channel 4 / low byte Analog A/B slaves with 2 channels only reserve half the address range. A slaves occupy bytes 0 to 3 and B slaves bytes 4 to 7. Examples of the configuration: 1. Configuration: Analog slaves have the AS-i addresses 1 to 6. You use data record 140 and enter 48 as data record length. 2. Configuration: 1 analog slave with AS-i address 7 is used. You use data record 141 and enter 24 as data record length. Only bytes 16 to 23 are relevant. 3. Configuration: The full address range for 31 analog slaves is used. You use data record 140 and enter 224 as data record length. You can then address analog slaves 1 to 28. For the remaining analog slaves 29 to 31, you use data record 147 in a second job and enter 24 as data record length. 4. Configuration: Analog slaves have the addresses 29 to 31. You use data record 147 and enter 24 as data record length. Mixed access: Configuration: You want to access slaves 1 to 12 using I/O commands and slaves 13 to 31 using data records. You use data record 143 for slaves 13 to 31. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 60 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.1 8 Overview Diagnostics options The following diagnostics options are available for the AS-i master: LEDs on the module Diagnostics in STEP 7: - Online presentation of the network and device view - Diagnostic buffer Alarm messages in user program Creation of user-specific web pages via the web server of a connected SIMATIC controller You will find information on the LEDs in Section "Meaning of the LEDs (Page 64)". The diagnostic possibilities in STEP 7 and in the user program are described in the following sections. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 61 Alarms, faults and system events 8.2 Diagnostics in STEP 7 8.2 Diagnostics in STEP 7 Diagnostics in STEP 7 For diagnostics of the AS-i master and the AS-i slave, use the "Go online" function to switch STEP 7 to "Online" status. If you have configured AS-i slaves in STEP 7, the diagnostic information about slaves can be displayed in STEP 7. The diagnostics of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 V13 SP1 (TIA Portal) are not displayed via the online network view function. The information of the AS-i master is displayed symbolically in the device view. The status of these devices will also be displayed to the right of the device in the project navigation by means of a symbol. For an explanation of the different status symbols, please refer to the relevant tool tip. STEP 7 offers several possibilities for requesting the diagnostic information of the ASi master: Special diagnostic symbols indicate the status of the AS-i master in the network view of the device configuration. Red symbols signal an error, and green symbols indicate that the devices are OK. In STEP 7 V13 SP1 (TIA Portal), you can call up information about the status of the AS-i master and AS-i slaves. To do so, open the diagnostics as follows: - Select the AS-i master. - Select "Online & diagnostics" in the shortcut menu. - In the "Online & diagnostics" view, select "Detailed diagnostics > Error overview". Here you see the current status of every AS-i slave address. To analyze sporadic errors, you can read out the error counter for the AS-i network. Diagnostics are also available in STEP 7 V5.5 HSP 2092 V3.0 and higher. The control panel of the AS-i master can also be called up in this display. This shows the status of the LEDs. All the relevant events are stored in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU. You can display the diagnostic buffer in the "Online & Diagnostics" window for a selected CPU. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 62 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.3 LED statuses 8.3 LED statuses 8.3.1 Arrangement of the LEDs on the CM AS-i Master ST Introduction DIAG (green/red) Status LEDs (AS-Interface) PWR (green) Figure 8-1 Arrangement of the LEDs on the CM AS-i Master ST AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 63 Alarms, faults and system events 8.3 LED statuses 8.3.2 Meaning of the LEDs Meaning of the LEDs The tables below explain the status and fault indications. Remedies for the diagnostic messages are in Section "Diagnostic messages (Page 69)". "PWR" LED Table 8- 1 Meaning of the "PWR" LED PWR Meaning The AS-i voltage is not provided (terminals L+, M). OFF The AS-i voltage is provided (terminals L+, M). Green ON "DIAG" LED Table 8- 2 Meaning of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning The supply voltage for the interface module of the ET 200SP is not provided. OFF The AS-i master parameters have not been assigned. Green flashes The AS-i master parameters have been assigned and are error-free. No diagnostic message of the AS-i master is pending. Green ON The AS-i master parameters have been assigned and the AS-i master signals diagnostic errors for the AS-i master or an AS-i slave or an active firmware update. Red flashes AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 64 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.3 LED statuses "AS-i OK" LED Table 8- 3 Meaning of the AS-i OK LED AS-i OK Meaning An error has occurred (see AS-i FAULT LED) or the AS-i master is offline. This means: No I/O data exchange is taking place, e.g., during power-up. OFF The AS-i bus is fault-free. I/O data exchange takes place. Green ON "AS-i FAULT" LED Table 8- 4 Meaning of the AS-i FAULT LED AS-i FAULT Meaning No AS-i cable faults have occurred. Red OFF The AS-i master is in "Offline" mode. The AS-i bus has failed, e.g. the supply voltage for AS-Interface is too low, ground fault. Red ON A fault has occurred, e.g. a duplicate address or parameterization error has been detected. Red "flashes" AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 65 Alarms, faults and system events 8.3 LED statuses "PF" LED This LED indicates peripheral faults. Table 8- 5 PF Meaning of the "PF" LED Meaning No peripheral fault is being signaled. Red OFF Red ON At least one AS-i slave is signaling a peripheral fault. Refer to the operating instructions for the respective slave for the meaning of the peripheral fault, e.g., overload at the standard outputs and/or overload of the sensor power supply of the standard inputs. Firmware update (Page 21) "CER" LED This LED indicates configuration errors. It lights when the slave configuration detected on the AS-i cable does not match the CONFIGURED configuration in the AS-i master. Table 8- 6 CER Meaning of the "CER" LED Meaning No AS-i configuration error. Yellow OFF Failure of an AS-i slave: Yellow ON * A configured AS-i slave is not present on the AS-i cable. * An excess slave not configured beforehand is present on the AS-i cable. * A connected slave has different configuration data (IO, ID, ID1, ID2) than the slave configured in the AS-i master. * A slave with address "0" is in "Configuration mode" on the AS-i bus. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 66 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.3 LED statuses "CM" LED This LED indicates the operating status (Configuration Mode). Table 8- 7 Meaning of the "CM" LED CM Meaning The AS-i master is in "protected operation". Green OFF The AS-i master is in "configuration mode". Green ON During a firmware update: Green flashes Errors have occurred during the firmware update. "AUP" LED This LED indicates whether automatic address programming is possible or not. Table 8- 8 AUP Meaning of the "AUP" LED Meaning Automatic address programming is not possible. Green OFF Green ON This LED is always off in configuration mode. When the AS-i master is in "protected operation", this LED indicates that automatic address programming of an AS-i slave is possible. Automatic address programming makes it easier to replace a defective AS-i slave on the AS-i cable. For more detailed information, refer to Section "Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming (Page 74)". AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 67 Alarms, faults and system events 8.3 LED statuses "SL_Xy(A)" and "SL_xY(B)" LEDs These LEDs indicate the slave addresses to which an error is signaled. The following states are taken into account: The slave has failed. The slave is an excess slave. The slave type is incorrect. Double addressing detected. The following diagram shows the indication sequence: Figure 8-2 Indication sequence Example: Slave 15 and 21B have failed Figure 8-3 Example: Slave 15 and 21B have failed AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 68 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.4 Diagnostic messages 8.4 Diagnostic messages 8.4.1 Alarms The AS-i master sends a diagnostic interrupt request to the CPU in the following situations: The AS-i master has detected a problem, e.g. failure of a slave (incoming event). The problem was rectified or no longer exists (outgoing event). If there is no OB 82 in the user program, a CPU of the S7-300 / S7-400 product range will switch to "STOP". If an OB 82 exists, the operating system responds to an incoming event by calling the OB 82. The S7 CPU then interrupts the cyclic user program and enters the event in the system diagnostic buffer as a "Module fault" message. Some diagnostic information is made available to the user in the local data of the OB 82, e.g.: Which module triggered the interrupt? What type of error has occurred? Following execution of the OB 82, the S7 CPU continues the cyclic program from the point of interruption. When parameterizing the CM AS-i Master ST, you can specify whether and in what cases a diagnostics interrupt should be triggered. See Section "Parameter assignment/addressing (Page 43)" See Section "Fault indications/fault remedies (Page 80)" for a list of possible error cases. 8.4.2 Possible response to the diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic events of the AS-i master and all AS-i slaves are signaled by means of OB82, e.g. No voltage on AS-Interface, peripheral fault Note Diagnostic buffer Please note that OB 82 is only called for the first error event. If an error caused by an ASi slave is already active, subsequent AS-i slave errors will only be noted in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU. The cause of the interrupt can be determined by reading out data records with diagnostic data during execution of the OB 82 block or during cyclic program execution. See Section "Data records for diagnostics (Page 82)". AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 69 Alarms, faults and system events 8.4 Diagnostic messages 8.4.3 Error messages AS-i-specific faults The following AS-i-specific faults are possible: Channel / Fault type Fault No. Message 0400H 1024 AS-i slave failed 0401H 1025 AS-i slave on B address failed Cause Remedial measures An AS-i slave on an A address or a slave with standard address has failed. The channel number of the message shows the address of the affected AS-i slave. Check: Possible causes: * The slave is defective. * There is a break in the cable * An overload of the sensor supply at the input slave or an overload of the actuator supply * Overload at the output for some slaves * AS-i slave * Connecting cables * Overload * EMC environment * Connected sensors and actuators An AS-i slave on a B address has failed. The channel number of the message shows the address of the affected AS-i slave. Check: Possible causes: * AS-i slave * Connecting cables * Overload * The slave is defective. * EMC environment * The cable is interrupted. * * An overload of the sensor supply at the input slave or an overload of the actuator supply Connected sensors and actuators * Overload at the output for some slaves AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 70 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.4 Diagnostic messages Channel / Fault type Fault No. Message 0402H 1026 Peripheral fault in AS-i slave Cause Remedial measures An AS-i slave on an A address or a slave with a standard address signals a peripheral fault. The channel number of the message shows the address of the affected AS-i slave. Note the information in the manual for the AS-i slave. Possible cause: 0403H 1027 Peripheral fault in AS-i slave on B address * An overload at the output of a digital slave or an overload at the actuator * Measuring range exceeded for analog input slaves * Overload of the sensor supply at the input slave (only for some slave types) * Group fault message for M200D motor starters Check: * Slave * Overload * Connected sensors and actuators An AS-i slave on a "B" address signals Note the information in the a peripheral fault. The channel number manual for the AS-i slave. of the message shows the address of Check: the affected AS-i slave. * Slave Possible cause: * Overload * An overload at the output of a * Connected sensors digital slave or an overload at the and actuators actuator * Measuring range exceeded for analog input slaves * Overload of the sensor supply at the input slave (only for some slave types) * Group fault message for M200D motor starters 0404H 1028 AS-i address used multiple times Multiple AS-i slaves with the same profile and address are located on the AS-i bus. The affected slaves have a standard address or A address. The channel number of the message shows the address of the affected AS-i slave. Change the addresses of the AS-i slaves to addresses that are unique in the network. 0405H 1029 AS-i B address used multiple times Change the addresses of the AS-i slaves to addresses that are unique in the network. Multiple AS-i slaves with the same profile and address are located on the AS-i bus. The affected slaves have a B address. The channel number of the message shows the address of the affected AS-i slave. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 71 Alarms, faults and system events 8.4 Diagnostic messages Channel / Fault type Fault No. Message 0406H 1030 No or erroneous voltage on the AS-i cable 0407H 1031 AS-i configuration error (CER) Cause Remedial measures The AS-i master has detected insufficient voltage on the AS-i cable. Data exchange on the AS-Interface has been stopped. Check: * Voltage * Polarity on AS-i cable * Power supply The ACTUAL configuration of the AS-i slaves on the AS-i cable differs from the CONFIGURED configuration saved in the AS-i master. Check: * AS-i slave failure * Overload Possible causes of short-term failures: * Excess slave High levels of electromagnetic interference are affecting the AS-i installation. Other possible causes: * Incorrect address * Incorrect slave type * * The functional ground connection to the AS-i power supply unit or AS-i data decoupling module is not connected to ground potential. * Protected operation: * EMC environment Remove the electromagnetic interference. A configured slave has failed or there is an excess slave on the bus. * Configuration mode: A slave with address "0" has been detected on the bus. 0408H 1032 Ground fault on AS-i cable A ground fault is present between AS-i+ and ground or between AS-iand ground. Possible consequences: * Disruption of communication * Slave failure * Configuration error * Hazard as a result of secondary faults Check: * Insulation fault on AS-i cable * Sensor/actuator cable Ensure that the ground fault is rectified. 040AH 1034 Excess AS-i slave There is an unconfigured AS-i slave with a default address or an A address on the AS-i bus. The channel number of the message shows the address of the affected AS-i slave. Change the CONFIGURED configuration in the AS-i master or remove the AS-i slave. 040BH 1035 Excess AS-i slave at B address On the AS-i bus there is an unconfigured AS-i slave with a B address. The channel number of the message indicates the B address of the affected AS-i slave Change the CONFIGURED configuration in the AS-i master or remove the AS-i slave. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 72 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.4 Diagnostic messages Channel / Fault type Fault No. Message 040CH 1036 Incorrect AS-i slave 040DH 1037 Cause Remedial measures On the AS-i bus there is an incorrect AS-i slave with a default address or an A address. The channel number of the message shows the address of the AS-i slave involved. * Use the correct slave type. * Set the ID1 code on the slave in accordance with the CONFIGURED configuration. Incorrect AS-i slave at B address There is an incorrect AS-i slave with a B address on the AS-i bus. The channel number indicates the B address of the affected slave. * Use the correct slave type. * Set the ID1 code on the slave in accordance with the CONFIGURED configuration. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 73 Alarms, faults and system events 8.5 Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming 8.5 Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming Automatic address programming after failure of one or more AS-i slaves - replacement of AS-i slave The "Automatic address programming" function allows you to easily replace defective AS-i slaves. Note Automatic address programming Automatic address programming is only possible if the AS-i master is operating in "protected operation" and one or more AS-i slaves have failed. If several AS-i slaves have failed, you must uniquely identify the failed slaves in the configuration using the slave profile: * IO code * ID code * ID2 code * ID1 code The automatic address programming function also supports slaves with the "CTT5" profile (multi-address slaves) and AS-i devices that contain multiple internal slave addresses. This requires each internal slave to have different identifications (IO code, ID code, ID2 code, and ID1 code). Note The automatic address programming function does not work if two identical slaves have failed. Examples of devices with multiple internal slave addresses which support automatic address programming: Module K60 with 8DI/2DO (3RK2400-1HQ00-0AA3) Motor Starter M200D AS-i Standard (3RK1325-...). If no address has yet been assigned to these devices (delivery state), only one address "0" is visible on the bus. The device automatically suppresses the other internal "0" addresses. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 74 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.5 Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming Note Exceptions The automatic address programming function is not available for the following devices, because the identifications of each internal slave are identical (IO code, ID code, ID2 code, and ID1 code). * Module K60 with 8 DI (3RK1200-0DQ00-0AA3, 3RK2200-0DQ00-0AA3, 3RK2200-1DQ00-1AA3) * Safety-related module K45 with 4 F-DI (3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3). Detection of a defective AS-i slave An illuminated "AUP" LED signals the following in "protected operation": Slave failure was detected: - Exactly one slave has failed, or - A device containing multiple different slaves has failed, or - Multiple slaves or devices have failed, each of the failed slaves having a different configuration Automatic address programming by the AS-i master is possible. If an AS-i slave fails, the AS-i master indicates the address of the failed slave via the "SL_Xy (A)" and "SL_xY (B)" LEDs. If a device with multiple internal slave addresses fails, the AS-i master indicates the failure of multiple slaves. Replacement of a defective AS-i slave Replace the defective AS-i slave with an identical AS-i slave with address "0" (setting in delivery state). Replace the defective AS-I device containing multiple internal slave addresses with an identical AS-i device with address "0" on all internal slaves (setting in delivery state). Note Replacement of a defective AS-i slave Only one address "0" may be configured on the bus at any one time. If you want to replace several slaves or devices, you must replace them one after the other with the ASi master switched on. For the new slave or device, the AS-i master programs the address or addresses of the original failed device. The LEDs "AUP" and "CER" go out once all slaves have been correctly replaced. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 75 Alarms, faults and system events 8.6 Duplicate address detection 8.6 Duplicate address detection To ensure that the AS-Interface system functions correctly, all the AS-i slaves must have a unique AS-i address on the bus. If the same AS-i address is assigned to one or more slaves, this incorrect assignment is referred to herein as a duplicate address. Note For slaves without cyclic data communication, the duplicate address detection function of the CM AS-i master ST cannot be executed. Duplicate addresses where slave types are different and where the states at the inputs are different. As part of standard operation, the AS-i master monitors the data exchange for errors and thus often excludes slaves with a duplicate address automatically from the cyclic data exchange. This is the case for duplicate addresses in which the slave types are different (profile identification IO code, ID code, ID2 code, and ID1 code) and duplicate addresses for slaves having a different status at their inputs. In "protected operation", this fault condition is displayed on the AS-i master as a configuration error with the relevant AS-i address and the affected slaves detect a communication error. Duplicate addresses where the slave types are identical and where the states at the inputs are identical or there are no inputs. The duplicate address detection function of the CM AS-i Master ST also detects cases of slaves with duplicate address in which the cyclic data exchange is not excluded by standard mechanisms. Such cases include duplicate addresses in which the slave types are identical (profile identification, IO code, ID code, ID2 code, and ID1 code) and in which the slaves either have the same status at their inputs or have no inputs (output slaves). When a duplicate address is detected, the AS-i master signals a duplicate address error and automatically resets the output data of the address concerned to "0" so that the outputs of the affected slaves are switched off. Communication with the affected slaves is not interrupted, i.e. the slaves do not signal a communication error. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 76 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.6 Duplicate address detection Note System behavior according to AS-i specification If you connect a slave with duplicate address to the AS-i cable while the bus is operating, the added slave is initially excluded from cyclic data communication and its LEDs indicate a communication error. According to the specification, the AS-i master does not activate an AS-i slave until its address is recognized as a new address on the bus, e.g., when a powerup of the bus takes place. If the bus contains an active slave, no further automatic slave activation occurs on the same address during operation, even if an additional slave with the same address (duplicate address) is added. However, manual activation of the the slave can be initiated via the command interface by writing parameters to the slave address. For physical reasons, the duplicate address detection function of the CM AS-i Master ST cannot detect a duplicate address during cyclic data exchange in every configuration. Therefore, like for any AS-i system, it is essential to ensure when assigning AS-i addresses that each AS-i slave contains a unique AS-i address on the bus, e.g., by using addressing device 3RK1904-32AB02. The duplicate address detection function can assist in identifying inadvertent duplicate addressing. The duplicate address detection of the CM AS-i Master ST from firmware V1.1 and higher has been optimized for an AS-i cable length up to 100 m without branches. The duplicate address detection function of firmware V1.0 is designed for shorter cable lengths. The duplicate address detection function can be used in the specified and additional configurations, but it cannot be guaranteed that duplicate addresses will be uniquely detected in every case. For configurations with an AS-i repeater, the duplicate address detection function does not work due to the separation of the cable into multiple segments. Enabling the duplicate address detection function For the CM AS-i master ST with firmware V1.1 and higher, the duplicate address detection function is activated in the configuration via HW Config or the GSD setting. After a start or restart of the CM AS-i Master ST V1.1 and higher, the setting is accepted from HW Config or the GSD setting. For the CM AS-i master ST with firmware V1.0 and higher, the duplicate address detection function is deactivated when the AS-i master is switched on and can be set by writing data record DS 100, see Section "DS 100 Switch duplicate address detection on/off (Page 171)". The activation status is saved in volatile memory of the AS-i master. After a startup or restart of the CM AS-i Master ST V1.0, the duplicate address detection function must be activated via the user program, if required. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 77 Alarms, faults and system events 8.6 Duplicate address detection Function description The duplicate address detection function assists you in identifying inadvertent duplicate addressing. When commissioning the AS-i system, check that duplicate address detection can be used for the AS-i configuration used. Install the complete AS-i system and ensure that the specified addresses of the slaves are correct and unique. Enable the duplicate address detection function. In firmware V1.1 and higher, you can do this for AS-i voltages of either 24 V or 30 V. Check whether the CM AS-i Master ST signals a duplicate address in spite of correct slave address assignment. If a duplicate address is signaled on the AS-i master even though the bus configuration is correct, this means that duplicate address detection cannot be used for this bus configuration. Should this occur, disable the duplicate address detection function. Note that when the duplicate address detection function is enabled, the presence of a duplicate address may not be detected, depending on the bus configuration. Note The activation status is saved in volatile memory of the AS-i master. After a startup or restart of the CM AS-i Master ST, duplicate address detection must be activated again via the user program, if required. The CM AS-i Master ST signals a detected duplicate address as follows: The "CER" LED lights up to indicate a configuration error. The "SL_Xy (A)" and "SL_xY (B)" LEDs signal the AS-i address concerned. The message "AS-i address used multiple times" is output. To rectify the fault, check and change the address of the affected AS-i slave, e.g. using the addressing unit. Via the online function of STEP 7 it is not possible to change the AS-i address of an individual slave if there are multiple slaves with the same address on the AS-i cable. See also DS 100 Read setting for duplicate address detection (Page 172) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 78 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.7 Diagnosis via the web server 8.7 Diagnosis via the web server Web server functionality Many SIMATIC controllers provide integrated web server functionality. This enables access via a web browser to the data of the CPU and its connected components, e.g. the ASi master. A STEP 7 library is available as a download for diagnosing the AS-i master via a web browser. It presents the most important diagnostic information in a clear overview. The package is based on the concept of user-defined web pages. You can obtain the package from the Siemens Service & Support Portal under the following link: Service and support portal (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50897766) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 79 Alarms, faults and system events 8.8 Fault indications/fault remedies 8.8 Fault indications/fault remedies Fault indications/remedies for faults on the CM AS-i Master ST Below are possible fault indications during operation of the AS-i master and potential remedial measures. Table 8- 9 Fault indications and remedies for faults on the AS-i Master Fault Possible cause Remedy "AS-i fault" LED lights up red The current consumption of the AS-i slaves is too high. Result: Voltage on the AS-i cable is too low. Check the current consumption of the AS-i slaves. No voltage is present on the AS-i cable or the voltage is too low. Check the connection with the AS-i power supply unit. Short-circuit on the AS-i cable Check the AS-i cable and the connected AS-i slaves. "DIAG" LED not lit There is no supply over the communications bus. Check whether the module is inserted correctly. "DIAG" LED flashes green, but does not switch to constant green light The AS-i master is not configured. Configure the AS-i master in STEP 7. "CER" LED is lit. A configured AS-i slave has failed. Replace the defective AS-i slave or configure the AS-i master again if the AS-i slave is not required. * "CER" LED flashes erratically , i.e. a configured AS-i slave fails sporadically. The AS-i master does not switch from "configuration mode" to "protected operation". In STEP 7 it is not possible to switch between "configuration mode" and "protected operation" Evaluate the slave indication. A non-configured AS-i slave was connected to the AS-i cable. Remove the AS-i slave or configure the AS-i master again. An AS-i slave has been connected whose configuration data, e.g., IO code, ID codes, does not match the values of the configured AS-i slave. Check whether an incorrect AS-i slave has been connected. Configure the AS-i master again, if necessary. Loose connection Check the connections of the AS-i slaves. Injection of interference on the AS-i cable. Check that the grounding of the ASi master and routing of the AS-i cable are correct. Check whether the shield of the AS-i power supply unit is connected correctly. The connected sensor is causing an overload. Check the sensor and the sensor cable for damage. An AS-i slave with address 0 is connected to the AS-i cable. Remove the AS-i slave with address 0 or set the correct address using the AS-i addressing device. The AS-i master is unable to switch to "protected operation" as long as this slave is connected. The automation system is in the "RUN" state. Switch the automation system to the "STOP" state. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 80 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.8 Fault indications/fault remedies Fault Possible cause Remedy The AS-i master does not switch from "protected operation" to "configuration mode". The automation system is in the "RUN" state. Switch the automation system to the "STOP" state. Automatic address programming does not take place. The configuration data, e.g., IO code, ID code, ID2 code, and ID1 code, of the replaced AS-i slave does not match the values of the original slave. Check that the correct replacement slave was used. Compare the manufacturer's information with regard to configuration data. If the original slave is to be replaced by a different type, assign the address with the AS-i addressing device and configure the AS-i master again. Replaced AS-i slave does not have the address "0". Set the address of the replaced slave with the AS-i addressing device. Replaced AS-i slave is not correctly connected or is defective. Check the connections of the slave. Replace the slave, if necessary. The AS-i master is in "configuration mode". Program the address of the new AS-i slave with the AS-i addressing device or via the command interface of the AS-i master. Several slaves with the same profile have failed. Program the addresses of the new AS-i slaves with the AS-i addressing device. No LEDs are lit, except possibly for the "DIAG" LED The AS-i voltage is missing. "PF" LED is lit One or more AS-i slaves signal a fault in the connected I/O. Check the I/O components connected to the AS-i slaves and the cabling for wire break or short-circuit. Reference You will find further information about the LEDs on the AS-i master in Section "Meaning of the LEDs (Page 64)". AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 81 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.1 DS 92 Diagnostic data record (FW V1.1 and higher) The operating status of the AS-i master, the connected AS-i network and the AS-i slave is stored as diagnostic data record DS 92 in the CM AS-i Master ST module. Description This data record provides information about the status of an AS-i network. Table 8- 10 Byte Structure of diagnostic data record DS 92, read Description Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 1 2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Res. MADDR PF CER EFD CM CFGOK DIAG Reserved Reserved MA30V 3 MA24V Res. Res. Reserved 4 Flags_1 (See Table "AS-i master flags") 5 Flags_2 (See Table "AS-i master flags") 6 Reserved 7 Reserved Slave diagnostics 8 ... 15 List of active slaves (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 Slave is not in the list of active slaves. Bit = 1 Slave is in the list of active slaves. Bit = 0 The configured slave has not failed. Bit = 1 The configured slave has failed. 16 ... 23 List of failed slaves (see Table "Structure of bit fields") 24 ... 31 List of incorrect slaves (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 The profile of the connected slave is correct. Bit = 1 The profile of the connected slave is incorrect. 32 ... 39 List of excess slaves (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 The connected slave is configured or no slave is connected. Bit = 1 The connected slave is not configured. 40 ... 47 List of multiple addressing (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 The AS-i address is not assigned or is only assigned once. Bit = 1 The AS-i address is assigned more than once. 48 ... 55 List of I/O errors (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 The slave at the AS-i address does not have an I/O error. Bit = 1 The slave at the AS-i addresshas an I/O error. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 82 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics Byte Description Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 56 ... 63 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 List of configured ID = A (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 A standard slave is configured at the AS-i address. Bit = 1 An A/B slave is configured at the AS-iaddress. Bit = 0 A standard slave is connected at the AS-i address. Bit = 1 An A/B slave is connected at the AS-iaddress. Bit = 0 No slave detected at the AS-iaddress. Bit = 1 Slave detected at the AS-iaddress. 64 ... 71 List of actual ID = A (see Table "Structure of bit fields") 72 ... 79 List of detected slaves (see Table "Structure of bit fields") 80 ... 87 List of configured slaves (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 No slave configured at the AS-iaddress. Bit = 1 Slave configured at the AS-iaddress. Structure of the bit fields: Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 7/7A 6/6A 5/5A 4/4A 3/3A 2/2A 1/1A 0/Reserved 1 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 15/15A 14/14A 13/13A 12/12A 11/11A 10/10A 9/9A 8/8A SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 23/23A 22/22A 21/21A 20/20A 19/19A 18/18A 17/17A 16/16A SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 31/31A 30/30A 29/29A 28/28A 27/27A 26/26A 25/25A 24/24A SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE Reserved 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 6 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B 7 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 2 3 4 5 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 83 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics Explanation of bit information in bytes 2 and 3: MA30V MA24V =0 Multiple address detection for AS-i 30 V is deactivated. =1 Multiple address detection for AS-i 30 V is activated. =0 Multiple address detection for Power24V is deactivated. =1 Multiple address detection for Power24V is activated. MADDR = 0 PF CER EFD CM =1 Multiple addressing detected for at least one AS-i address on the AS-i cable. This means that multiple slaves have the same AS-i address. =0 No I/O errors detected. =1 I/O errors detected. =0 No AS-i configuration errors detected. =1 AS-i configuration errors detected. 0= No ground fault detected 1= Ground fault detected 0= Master in protected operation 1= Master in configuration mode CFGOK 0 = DIAG No multiple addresses detected on the AS-icable. Configuration not OK or slave exists with address 0. 1= Configuration OK 0= No diagnostics pending 1= Diagnostics pending. It is set when: * * * * * * The AS-i master is in "offline" mode. The AS-i voltage is not OK. Multiple addresses were detected. An I/O error was detected. A configuration error was detected. A slave with address 0 exists. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 84 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics AS-i master flags: Flag Bit Flag_1 0 Config_OK 1 LDS.0 The flag is set when an AS-i slave with address 0 is present. (List of Detected Slaves) 2 Auto_Address_Assign The flag is set if automatic address programming is possible. This means that AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE = 1 and no "incorrect" AS-i slaves is connected to AS-Interface. 3 Auto_Address_Available The flag is set when automatic address programming is performed as soon as a slave with a valid configuration is connected at address zero. 4 Configuration_Active The flag is set in "configuration mode" and reset in "protected operation". 5 Normal_Operation_Active The flag is set when the AS-i master is in "protected operation". 6 APF The flag is set when the voltage on the AS-i cable is too low, or a power down was detected during data transmission. (AS-i Power Fail) 7 Offline_Ready The flag is set if the offline phase is active. 0 Periphery_OK The flag is set if none of the AS-i slaves signal a peripheral fault. All bits in the LPF are zero. 1 Data_Exchange_Active Controlling: When the flag is set, data transfer starts between the master and slave. 2 Off_Line Controlling: When the flag is set, the device is switched "OFFLINE" or is "Offline". 3 AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE The flag is set when automatic address programming is enabled by the user. 4 GROUND FAULT The flag is set if a ground fault has been detected on the AS-i cable. 5 EEPROM_OK The flag is set if the test of the internal EEPROM was successful. 6 EFD_Disable The flag indicates whether ground fault detection is switched on (BIT = 0) or off (BIT = 1). 7 Reserved -- Flag_2 Name of the bit Meaning The flag is set when the CONFIGURED configuration and the ACTUAL configuration match. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 85 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.2 DS 96 Read AS-i master error counters and status messages (FW V1.1 and higher) Meaning This data record reads out error counters that pertain to the overall AS-i network. If the AS-i power supply is missing, the overall device fails. This leads to all counters being reset. The count starts again each time the device is powered up. Table 8- 11 Meaning of error counter Count value / Information Meaning AS-i Power Fail The count value is incremented when the AS-i power supply drops to a value that is too low. Ground fault The count value is increased when a ground fault has been detected on the AS-i cable. Slave failure The count value is increased when an active slave fails, that is, when process data transmission has been interrupted. An active slave only fails when it does not respond to six consecutive master calls. Missing slave message frame The count value is increased when a slave does not respond to a master call or the master does not receive the response. Process data transmission is not interrupted in this case. Erroneous slave message frame The count value is increased when the master receives an incomplete slave response, such as when slaves are added during operation. Process data transmission is not interrupted in this case. I/O fault The count value is increased when a slave signals an I/O error. Protocol error The count value is increased when the master detects a transmission error for a slave that needs multiple cycles for transmission of data, e.g. for analog data. Erroneous master frame The count value is incremented when a master call cannot be sent correctly, e.g. in the event of strong interfering signals on the AS-i cable. Process data transmission is not interrupted in this case. Sent master frames Number of master frames This counter counts all frames sent by the master, regardless of whether or not a slave response was received. The total number of master frames is calculated as follows: MT_CNT_TOTAL = (MT_CNT_HIGH x MT_CNT_BASE) + MT_CNT_LOW The error count starts over each time the device is powered up. By dividing the absolute values of the error counters by the number of master frames, it is possible to calculate the percentage of errors and thus the error frequency. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 86 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics Table 8- 12 Structure of the data record Byte Meaning 0 Reserved 1 High byte Low byte 2 Summation counter: AS-i Power Fail 3 High byte Low byte 4 Summation counter: Ground fault 5 High byte Low byte 6 Summation counter: Slave failure High word, high byte 7 High word, low byte 8 Low word, high byte 9 Low word, low byte 10 Summation counter: Missing slave frame High word, high byte 11 High word, low byte 12 Low word, high byte 13 Low word, low byte 14 Summation counter: Erroneous slave frame High word, high byte 15 High word, low byte 16 Low word, high byte 17 Low word, low byte 18 Summation counter: Slave peripheral fault High word, high byte 19 High word, low byte 20 Low word, high byte 21 22 23 Low word, low byte Summation counter: Slave protocol error (for slaves according to CTT1 ... CTT5) High word, high byte High word, low byte 24 Low word, high byte 25 Low word, low byte 26 Summation counter: Erroneous master frame High word, high byte 27 High word, low byte 28 Low word, high byte 29 Low word, low byte 30 ... 37 38 39 List of count values > 0 (see "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 Count value = 0 for all error counters of the AS-i address Bit = 1 Count value > 0 for at least one error counter of the AS-i address Summation counter: Sent master frames, less significant part (MT_CNT_LOW) 40 43 High word, low byte Low word, high byte 41 42 High word, high byte Low word, low byte Summation counter: Sent master frames, more significant part (MT_CNT_HIGH) High word, high byte High word, low byte 44 Low word, high byte 45 Low word, low byte AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 87 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics Byte Meaning 46 Summation counter: Sent master frames, factor (MT_CNT_BASE) High word, high byte 47 High word, low byte 48 Low word, high byte 49 Low word, low byte 50 Reserved 51 Bit 0 = MADDR Reserved 52 ... 59 List of multiple addressing (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 The AS-i address is assigned once or is not present. Bit = 1 The AS-i address is assigned more than once. The counters are integer values (2 bytes or 4 bytes). Structure of the bit fields: Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 7/7A 6/6A 5/5A 4/4A 3/3A 2/2A 1/1A 0/Reserved 1 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 15/15A 14/14A 13/13A 12/12A 11/11A 10/10A 9/9A 8/8A 2 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 23/23A 22/22A 21/21A 20/20A 19/19A 18/18A 17/17A 16/16A 3 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 31/31A 30/30A 29/29A 28/28A 27/27A 26/26A 25/25A 24/24A 4 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE Reserved 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 5 6 7 Explanation of the status bits MADDR = 0 =1 No multiple addressing detected on the AS-icable. Multiple addressing detected for at least one AS-i address on the AS-i cable. This means that multiple slaves have the same AS-i address. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 88 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.3 DS 97 Read and reset AS-i master error counters (FW V1.1 and higher) Description This data record functions in the same manner as the "DS 96 Read AS-i slave error counters" data record. After the DS 97 data record is read, all error counters in the AS-i master are reset to "0". The structure of the DS 97 data record is identical to the structure of the DS 96 data record. For an explanation of the error counter see Section "DS 96 Read AS-i master error counters and status messages (FW V1.1 and higher) (Page 86)". 8.9.4 DS 150 to DS 153 Read AS-i error counters These data records read the error counters of the AS-i slaves. Data records DS 150 and DS 151 access the standard addresses and the A addresses. Data records DS 152 and DS 153 access the B addresses. The counters for addresses 16 / 16A exist identically in data records DS 150 and DS 151. The counters for address 16B exist identically in data records DS 152 and DS 153. Error counter The CM AS-i Master ST module manages several counters internally which log the number of master frames sent and the number of different error occurrences. These counter values can be read out using data records DS 150 to DS 153: DS 150 contains counter values for slave addresses 1(A) to 16(A). DS 151 contains counter values for slave addresses 16(A) to 31(A). DS 152 contains counter values for slave addresses 1B to 16B DS 153 contains counter values for slave addresses 16B to 31B Each data record also contains the total count of master frames sent. To determine a relative error rate, divide the count of error occurrences by the number of master frames sent. The bus system allows the automatic sending of repeat message frames. This ensures that the process data is reliably transferred between master and slave in the industrial environment, even in the case of brief interruptions in transmission, e.g. due to switching operations. If the fault limit value is exceeded, or the slave is not functioning correctly due to a defect, communication to the slave cannot be performed within the defined time period. In this case, transmission of the process data is interrupted. The master signals failure of the slave address and tries to establish communication again. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 89 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics Under error-free conditions, one master frame is sent to every available slave address for cyclic data transfer per AS-i bus cycle. The addressed slave responds with a corresponding slave frame. Depending on the configuration of the bus, between 1 and 31 slaves are addressed in each AS-i bus cycle. This results in a maximum bus cycle time of 5 ms. When two slaves with extended addressing have the same numerical address, but one is the A address and one the B address, these two slaves are automatically addressed in two consecutive bus cycles. It can be assumed that around 64 000 master frames are sent per second. Table 8- 13 Meaning of error counter Count value / Information Meaning Slave failure The count value is increased when an active slave fails, that is, when process data transmission has been interrupted. An active slave only fails when it does not respond to six consecutive master calls. Missing slave frame The count value is increased when a slave does not respond to a master call or the master does not receive the response. Transmission of process data is not interrupted in this case. Erroneous slave frame The count value is increased when the master receives an incomplete slave response, such as when slaves are added during operation. Transmission of process data is not interrupted in this case. I/O fault The count value is increased when a slave signals an I/O error. Protocol error The count value is increased when the master detects a transmission error for a slave that needs multiple cycles for transmission of data, e.g. for analog data. Erroneous master frame The count value is incremented when a master call cannot be sent correctly, e.g. in the event of strong interfering signals on the AS-i cable. Transmission of process data is not interrupted in this case. Sent master frames Number of master frames This counter counts all frames sent by the master, regardless of whether or not a slave response was received. The total number of master frames is calculated as follows: MT_CNT_TOTAL = (MT_CNT_HIGH x MT_CNT_BASE) + MT_CNT_LOW The error count starts over each time the device is powered up. By dividing the absolute values of the error counters by the number of master frames, it is possible to calculate the percentage of errors and thus the error frequency. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 90 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics Table 8- 14 Slave address structure of the counters Byte Counter 0 Counter: Slave failure High byte 1 2 Low byte Counter: Missing slave frame High byte 3 4 Low byte Counter: Erroneous slave frame High byte 5 6 Low byte Counter: I/O fault High byte 7 8 Low byte Counter: Protocol error High byte 9 10 Low byte Counter: Erroneous master frame High byte 11 Low byte The counters are integer values (2 bytes). Table 8- 15 Master frame structure of the counters Byte 0 Meaning Summation counter: Sent master frames, less significant part (MT_CNT_LOW) High word, high byte 1 High word, low byte 2 Low word, high byte 3 Low word, low byte 4 Summation counter: Sent master frames, more significant part (MT_CNT_HIGH) High word, high byte 5 High word, low byte 6 Low word, high byte 7 8 Low word, low byte Summation counter: Sent master frames, factor (MT_CNT_BASE) High word, high byte 9 High word, low byte 10 Low word, high byte 11 Low word, low byte The counters are integer values (4 bytes). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 91 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.4.1 Table 8- 16 DS 150 Read AS-i slave error counters 1/1A to 16/16A Structure of data record DS 150 Byte Meaning 0 Version High 1 Version Low 2 ... 13 Counter for slave address 1 / 1A 14 ... 25 Counter for slave address 2 / 2A 26 ... 37 Counter for slave address 3 / 3A 38 ... 49 Counter for slave address 4 / 4A 50 ... 61 Counter for slave address 5 / 5A 62 ... 73 Counter for slave address 6 / 6A 74 ... 85 Counter for slave address 7 / 7A 86 ... 97 Counter for slave address 8 / 8A 98 ... 109 Counter for slave address 9 / 9A 110 ... 121 Counter for slave address 10 / 10A 122 ... 133 Counter for slave address 11 / 11A 134 ... 145 Counter for slave address 12 / 12A 146 ... 157 Counter for slave address 13 / 13A 158 ... 169 Counter for slave address 14 / 14A 170 ... 181 Counter for slave address 15 / 15A 182 ... 193 Counter for slave address 16 / 16A 194 ... 205 Master frame counter AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 92 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.4.2 Table 8- 17 DS 151 Read AS-i slave error counters 16/16A to 31/31A Structure of data record DS 151 Byte Meaning 0 Version High 1 Version Low 2 ... 13 Counter for slave address 16 / 16A 14 ... 25 Counter for slave address 17 / 17A 26 ... 37 Counter for slave address 18 / 18A 38 ... 49 Counter for slave address 19 / 19A 50 ... 61 Counter for slave address 20 / 20A 62 ... 73 Counter for slave address 21 / 21A 74 ... 85 Counter for slave address 22 / 22A 86 ... 97 Counter for slave address 23 / 23A 98 ... 109 Counter for slave address 24 / 24A 110 ... 121 Counter for slave address 25 / 25A 122 ... 133 Counter for slave address 26 / 26A 134 ... 145 Counter for slave address 27 / 27A 146 ... 157 Counter for slave address 28 / 28A 158 ... 169 Counter for slave address 29 / 29A 170 ... 181 Counter for slave address 30 / 30A 182 ... 193 Counter for slave address 31 / 31A 194 ... 205 Master frame counter AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 93 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.4.3 Table 8- 18 DS 152 Read AS-i slave error counters 1B to 16B Structure of data record DS152 Byte Meaning 0 Version High 1 Version Low 2 ... 13 Counter for slave address 1B 14 ... 25 Counter for slave address 2B 26 ... 37 Counter for slave address 3B 38 ... 49 Counter for slave address 4B 50 ... 61 Counter for slave address 5B 62 ... 73 Counter for slave address 6B 74 ... 85 Counter for slave address 7B 86 ... 97 Counter for slave address 8B 98 ... 109 Counter for slave address 9B 110 ... 121 Counter for slave address 10B 122 ... 133 Counter for slave address 11B 134 ... 145 Counter for slave address 12B 146 ... 157 Counter for slave address 13B 158 ... 169 Counter for slave address 14B 170 ... 181 Counter for slave address 15B 182 ... 193 Counter for slave address 16B 194 ... 205 Master frame counter AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 94 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.4.4 Table 8- 19 DS 153 Read AS-i slave error counters 16B to 31B Structure of data record DS 153 Byte Meaning 0 Version High 1 Version Low 2 ... 13 Counter for slave address 16B 14 ... 25 Counter for slave address 17B 26 ... 37 Counter for slave address 18B 38 ... 49 Counter for slave address 19B 50 ... 61 Counter for slave address 20B 62 ... 73 Counter for slave address 21B 74 ... 85 Counter for slave address 22B 86 ... 97 Counter for slave address 23B 98 ... 109 Counter for slave address 24B 110 ... 121 Counter for slave address 25B 122 ... 133 Counter for slave address 26B 134 ... 145 Counter for slave address 27B 146 ... 157 Counter for slave address 28B 158 ... 169 Counter for slave address 29B 170 ... 181 Counter for slave address 30B 182 ... 193 Counter for slave address 31B 194 ... 205 Master frame counter AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 95 Alarms, faults and system events 8.9 Data records for diagnostics 8.9.5 DS 154 Delete AS-i error counters (from FW V1.1) Description When writing this data record all the error counters are reset. The content of the data record has to be filled with zero values. Table 8- 20 Byte Structure of DS 154 write Meaning 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 96 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.1 9 Introduction You control the behavior of the AS-i master in your user program entirely through the command interface. This chapter contains the information you need for accessing the command interface of the CM AS-i Master ST. 9.2 Command interface with SIMATIC S7 Instruction "ASI_CTRL" The instruction "ASI_CTRL" is available for controlling the command interface. You will find this instruction in STEP 7 in the task card "Instructions" under "Advanced instructions" > "Distributed I/O" > "Others" > "ASI". For detailed instructions on using the instruction "ASI_CTRL", see: ASI_CTRL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/51678777). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 97 Using the command interface 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers Functional principle AS-i commands are read and written via the acyclic services of PROFINET/PROFIBUS. You use the "Read_data_record" and "Write_data_record" (data record 2) services in the user program of the IO controller/DP master for this. Figure 9-1 Functional principle Job parameters You assign parameters for the "Read_data_record" and "Write_data_record" jobs. The following parameters control the issuance of the commands: Index: Defines the data record number = 2 Length: - With "Write_data_record", you specify the length of the send data depending on the command. - With "Read_data_record", the CM AS-i Master ST signals the length of the receive data via the status nibble. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 98 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers Command processing in the user program Structure the command processing in the user program as follows: 1. Specify the command call (Page 103) in a send buffer in the user program. 2. Send this data record call to the CM AS-i Master ST with Write_data_record (data record 2). 3. Then, query the status of the command processing in the input range for digital values (cyclic services). The status information is stored in the first byte reserved for it (byte 0) in bits 4 to 7 of the input range (status nibble). 4. Different reactions occur depending on the result of the status evaluation. You can find these in the following sequence chart. Details on the meaning of the status nibble can be found in the "Coding of the status nibble" table. To complete the command processing, you must always issue a Read_data_record (data record 2) job either to obtain further information or to apply the response data. Figure 9-2 Flowchart AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 99 Using the command interface 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers Table 9- 1 Coding of the status nibble Status nibble (byte 1 of the digital input data) Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Meaning Bit 4 0 Startup detection 1: The status nibble switches between the values 1000B and 1110B following a startup/restart of the AS-i master. Initiation of a command by the user program is possible. 1 1 1 0 Startup detection 2: The status nibble switches between the values 1000B and 1110B following a startup/restart of the AS-i master. Initiation of a command by the user program is possible. 1 1 0 0 Reserved for SIMATIC S7 use FB ASI_CTRL 0 0 1 0 The command processing is active 0 0 0 1 Command processing has ended. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve a 2-byte return value from the AS-i master. Initiation of a command by the user program is possible. Initiation of a command by the user program is not possible. Two cases are distinguished here: * The return value is 0: A command without response data has been ended without errors. The return value is a value other than 0: The command has been ended with error (see "Return value in response buffer" table). Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. * 0 0 1 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 1 byte of response data from the AS-i master. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. 0 1 0 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 4 bytes of response data from the AS-i master. 0 1 1 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 14 bytes of response data from the AS-i master. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. 1 0 0 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 16 bytes of response data from the AS-i master. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. 1 0 1 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 32 bytes of response data from the AS-i master. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 100 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers Status nibble (byte 1 of the digital input data) Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 Meaning Bit 4 0 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 56 bytes of response data from the AS-i master. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. 1 1 1 1 Command processing has been ended without errors. An asynchronous read access can be used to retrieve 221 bytes of response data from the AS-i master. 0 1 0 0 Job processing is complete. The response data or return value of the previous job has already been read by the user. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. Initiation of a new command by the user program is possible. Example The table below indicates the behavior of the status nibble display as a result of the device status and the command processing in the user program: Action Response in the status nibble 1. Switching on the AS-i voltage of the CM AS-i Master ST. 1110B ... 1000B ... 1110B ... 2. The user program transfers a command (e.g., Write_parameter) to the CM AS-i Master ST with an asynchronous write access. 0010B (briefly, dependent on command) 3. The AS-i master ends the command. The user program can read the return value 0001B 4. The user program reads the 2 byte return value with an asynchronous read access. 0100B 5. ... Further program processing ... ... 6. The user program transfers a command (e.g., Read_expanded_lists_and_flags) to the CM AS-i Master ST with an asynchronous write access. 0010B (briefly, dependent on command) 7. The AS-i master ends the command without errors. The user program can read the response data. 1011B 8. The user program reads 32 bytes of response data with an asynchronous read access. 1011B AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 101 Using the command interface 9.3 Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers Return value Processing errors are itemized in the return value of the response buffer, if necessary. An error indication exists when "ended without error and without response data or ended with error" is displayed in the status nibble (coding: 0001H). Table 9- 2 Return value in the response buffer STATUS Meaning 0000H Job completed without errors 8381H The AS-i slave address is incorrect. 8382H The AS-i slave is not activated (not in LAS). 8383H Error on the AS-Interface 8384H The command is not permitted in the current state of the AS-i master. 8385H An AS-i slave with address 0 exists. 8386H The AS-i slave has impermissible configuration data (IO, ID, ID2, or ID1 code). 83A1H The referenced AS-i slave was not found on the AS-Interface. 83A2H An AS-i slave with address 0 exists. 83A3H An AS-i slave with the new address already exists on the AS-Interface. 83A4H The AS-i slave address cannot be deleted. 83A5H The AS-i slave address cannot be set. 83A6H The AS-i slave address cannot be permanently saved. 83A7H Error while reading the ID1 code 83A8H The destination address is not plausible: e.g. a B slave address is used for a standard slave. 83B1H A length error occurred during the string transfer in accordance with Profile 7.4. 83B2H A protocol error occurred during the string transfer in accordance with Profile 7.4. 83C0H The AS-i slave has an invalid profile, e.g. the standard slave or A slave is configured at a B address. 83C1H The standard slave cannot be configured, because the B address is already assigned. 83F8H The job number or the job parameter is not known. 83F9H The AS-i master has detected an EEPROM error. Note Errors that occur during processing of acyclic services and are reported via call parameters, such as "Return Value", can be found in the documentation of the relevant programming interface. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 102 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Overview The commands that the user program can issue to the CM AS-i Master ST are described below. With these commands, the AS-i master makes available the complete functionality of the M4 master profile of the AS-i master specification. Note Adaptations when using existing user programs Please observe the following adaptations when using existing user programs: For some commands of the CM AS-i Master ST, the command numbers have been changed and the data structures belonging to the command have been optimized compared to other AS-i masters (e.g., DP/AS-i LINK Advanced). The following table provides an overview of the modified command numbers: Command name Coding for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced Coding for CM AS-i Master ST No. A5: Set_Permanent_Configuration (Page 112) 25H A5H No. A6: Get_Permanent_Configuration (Page 113) 26H A6H No. A8: Read_Actual_Configuration (Page 115) 28H A8H No. A9: Set_LPS (Page 116) 29H A9H No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags (Page 122) 30H B0H No. B9: Read_overall_configuration (Page 125) 39H B9H No. BA: Write_overall_configuration (Page 131) 3AH BAH No. BE: Get_LPF (Page 147) 3EH BEH No. CA: Read_Error_Counter (Page 152) 4AH CAH No. CB: Read_and_Delete_AS-i-Master_Error_Counter (Page 155) 4BH CBH No. CC: Read_AS-i_error_counter (Page 156) 4CH CCH No. CD: Read_and_delete_AS-i_Slave_error_counter (Page 157) 4DH CDH AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 103 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands The following table lists the commands that can be executed with the CM AS-i Master ST. Table 9- 3 AS-i commands Name Parameters Return value Coding No. 00: Set_Permanent_Parameter (Page 107) Slave address, parameter -- 00H No. 01: GET_Permanent_Parameter (Page 108) Slave address Parameter 01H No. 02: Write_Parameter (Page 109) Slave address, parameter Optional: Parameter echo 02H No. 03: Read_Parameter (Page 110) Slave address Parameter value 03H No. 04: Store_Actual_Parameters (Page 111) -- -- 04H No. A5: Set_Permanent_Configuration (Page 112) Slave address, configuration data to be configured -- A5H No. A6: Get_Permanent_Configuration (Page 113) Slave address Configured configuration data A6H No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration (Page 114) -- -- 07H No. A8: Read_Actual_Configuration (Page 115) Slave address ACTUAL configuration A8H No. A9: Set_LPS (Page 116) LPS -- A9H No. 0A: SET_Offline_Mode (Page 117) Mode -- 0AH No. 08: Set_Auto_Address_Enable (Page 118) Mode -- 0BH No. 0C: Set_Operation_Mode (Page 119) Mode -- 0CH No. 0D: Change_AS-i-Slave_Address (Page 120) Address 1, Address 2 -- 0D H No. 0F: Read_Status (Page 121) Slave address Error data record of AS-i slave 0FH No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags (Page 122) -- LDS, LAS, LPS, flags B0H No. B9: Read_overall_configuration (Page 125) -- ACTUAL configuration data, actual parameters, LAS, flags B9H No. BA: Write_overall_configuration (Page 131) Overall configuration -- BAH No. 3C: Set_PI (Page 138) Parameter list -- 3CH No. 33: AS-i Parameter Echolist (Page 141) -- Parameter echo list 33H No. 44: Read_Write_CTT2_String (Page 142) Slave address CTT2 string CTT2 string 44H No. 14: Read_Version (Page 144) -- Version string 14H No. 17: Read ID_Code (Page 144) Slave address ID code 17H No. 37: Read_ID1-Code (Page 145) Slave address ID1 code 37H No. 3F: Write ID1-Code (Page 145) ID1 code -- 3FH No. 38: Read_ID2-Code (Page 146) Slave address ID2 code 38H No. 18: Read_IO-Code (Page 146) Slave address IO code 18H No. BE: Get_LPF (Page 147) -- LPF BEH AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 104 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Name Parameters Return value Coding No. 40: Write_Parameter_String (Page 148) Slave address, parameter string -- 40H No. 41: Read_String (Page 149) Slave address Parameter string 41H No. 42: Read_String (Page 150) Slave address Identification string 42H No. 43: Read_String (Page 151) Slave address Diagnostics string 43H No. CA: Read_Error_Counter (Page 152) -- -- CAH No. CB: Read_and_Delete_AS-iMaster_Error_Counter (Page 155) -- -- CBH No. CC: Read_AS-i_error_counter (Page 156) Slave address -- CCH No. CD: Read_and_delete_AS-i_Slave_error_counter (Page 157) Slave address -- CDH No. 13: Activate_ground fault detection (reset EFD) (Page 158) Mode -- 13H No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online (Page 159) Slave address, configuration data to be configured, parameters -- D0H No. D1: AS-i-Slave_ID1_schreiben_mit_Zieladresse (Write ID1 code with destination address) (Page 160) Address, ID1 code -- D1H General structure of the send buffer The basic structure of the send buffer for commands is shown below. The length of the job data depends on the respective command. Some commands do not require any job data. In this case, the send buffer only has one byte (byte 0). Table 9- 4 Basic structure of the send buffer for commands Byte Meaning 0 Number of the command 1 Job data ... Job data AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 105 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands General structure of the receive buffer The basic structure of the receive buffer for commands is shown below. The length of the response data depends on the respective command. Some commands do not supply any response data. In this case, there is no receive buffer. Table 9- 5 Basic structure of the receive buffer Byte Meaning 0 Response data 1 Response data ... Response data General operating state of the AS-i slave address If an AS-i slave must be addressed in a command or in a response, it must be addressed as follows: Table 9- 6 Structure of the AS-i slave address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0 0 Select bit Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Slave address The Select bit for the selection of the slave type is specified as follows: Select bit = 0 AS-i slave with standard-address (0 to 31) or AS-i slave with extended address in address area A (1A to 31A) Select bit = 1: AS-i slave with extended address in address area B (1B to 31B) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 106 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.1 No. 00: Set_Permanent_Parameter Meaning This command configures a parameter value for the specified AS-i slave in the AS-i master. The value is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM of the CM AS-i Master ST. The parameter value is additionally forwarded to the addressed AS-i slave. However, the "parameter echo" of the AS-i slave cannot be read out with this command (see No. 02: Write_Parameter (Page 109) command). Note Use of other Siemens AS-i masters Other Siemens AS-i masters do not transfer the configured parameters to the AS-i slave immediately. For AS-i slaves that meet the AS-i standard slave profile 7.4, this command is not permitted. For these slaves, the AS-i master itself administers the parameter assignment of the AS-i slave. In this case, the configured parameters are always equal to FH. Note Configuration data are overwritten If you configure the AS-i slaves using HW Config, there is normally no need to use the command described here. If you use this command, you will overwrite the respective configuration data that resulted from SET button configuration or HW Config configuration. When this command is executed, the AS-i master switches to the offline phase and then switches back to "normal operation". The AS-i master restarts. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 7 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Command number: 00H 1 Slave address 2 0 Bit 0 Parameters AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 107 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.2 No. 01: GET_Permanent_Parameter Significance This command reads a slave-specific parameter value that has been saved in EEPROM of the CM AS-i Master ST. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 8 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Significance 0 Command number: 01H 1 Slave address Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Table 9- 9 Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Byte Significance Bit 7 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Bit 0 Configured parameters AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 108 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.3 No. 02: Write_Parameter Meaning of the command The command transfers an AS-i slave parameter value. The AS-i master subsequently makes a parameter call to the addressed AS-i slave and passes the parameter value to the AS-i slave in this call. The slave sends the parameter echo as receipt acknowledgment to the master. The value of the parameter echo is sent in the reply data of the command. The parameter value is only stored in the volatile memory of the AS-i master and is not transferred to the EEPROM as a configured parameter! The AS-i slave can provide any parameter echo value. As a general rule, the returned parameter echo value is not a "mirror image" of the parameter value that is sent by the master to the slave. If necessary, refer to the documentation of the AS-i slave to ascertain whether the echo value has a special meaning. This command is not permissible for AS-i slaves that meet AS-i slave standard profile 7.4. For these slaves, the AS-i master itself administers the AS-i slave parameter assignment. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 10 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Command number: 02H 1 Slave address 2 0 Bit 0 Parameter value Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 11 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Bit 0 Parameter echo AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 109 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.4 No. 03: Read_Parameter Meaning This command returns the parameter value (ACT parameter) active in the slave. The returned parameter value corresponds to the value that was transferred from the master to the slave in the last parameter call. Because read-back of the parameter value from the AS-i slave is not possible according to the AS-i specification, the master stores the parameter values of all slaves internally in a volatile memory as "ACT parameters". The command reads out the ACT parameter value from the memory, so that the command is executed without a query from the AS-i slave. You must not confuse this value with the parameter echo that the AS-i slave supplies as reply to Write_Parameter. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 12 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 03H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 13 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Bit 0 Parameters AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 110 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.5 No. 04: Store_Actual_Parameters Meaning This command overwrites the configured parameters stored in the EEPROM with the current ACTUAL parameters stored in volatile memory of the AS-i slave. As a result, the ACTUAL parameters in the non-volatile memory of the master are stored as the configuration definition for the next time the slaves are powered up. The AS-i master parameterizes the AS-i slaves itself in the case of AS-i slaves that meet AS-i slave standard profile 7.4. The configured parameters for these AS-i slaves are always equal to FH. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 14 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 04H AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 111 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.6 No. A5: Set_Permanent_Configuration Meaning With this command, the following configuration data are configured for the addressed AS-i slave: IO code ID code ID1 code ID2 code The configuration data are stored in the non-volatile EEPROM of the CM AS-i Master ST. The AS-i master uses these configuration data as the specified expected configuration data for "protected operation". The configuration data are defined by the manufacturer of the AS-i slave. The meaning of the configuration data is described in the "AS-Interface Complete Specification". If the addressed AS-i slave does not support ID code 1 or ID code 2, the value FH must be specified for this in the command. When this command is executed, the AS-i master switches to the offline phase and then switches back to "normal operation". The AS-i master restarts. This command is not executed in "protected operation". Note Configuration data are overwritten If you configure the AS-i slaves using HW Config, there is normally no need to use the command described here. If you use this command, you will overwrite the respective configuration data that resulted from SET button configuration or HW Config configuration. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 15 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Bit 0 Command number: A5H 1 Slave address 2 IO code ID code 3 ID1 code ID2 code AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 112 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.7 No. A6: Get_Permanent_Configuration Meaning The configuration data (configured CONF data) of an addressed AS-i slave stored on the EEPROM of the AS-i master are read with this command: IO code ID code ID1 code ID2 code The configuration data are defined by the manufacturer of the AS-i slave. The meaning of the configuration data is described in the "AS-Interface Complete Specification". Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 16 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number A6H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 17 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 IO code 1 ID1 code Bit 0 ID code ID2 code 2 0 3 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 113 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.8 No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration Meaning The following ACTUAL configuration data of all AS-i slaves is obtained from the AS-i master: Slave profile (IO, ID, ID2 codes) ID1 code This command saves the obtained ACTUAL configuration data as CONF configuration data in the non-volatile EEPROM. The List of activated AS-i slaves (LAS) is also loaded into the List of configured AS-i slaves (LPS). When this command is executed, the AS-i master switches to the offline phase and then switches back to "protected operation". The AS-i master restarts. This command is not executed in "protected operation". The slave parameter values in volatile memory of the AS-i master and the content of the non-volatile memory for the parameters are not changed. The "Set_Permanent_Parameter" command must be executed, if necessary. Note Configuration data are overwritten If you configure the AS-i slaves using HW Config, there is normally no need to use the command described here. If you use this command, you will overwrite the respective configuration data that resulted from SET button configuration or HW Config configuration. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 18 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 07H AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 114 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.9 No. A8: Read_Actual_Configuration Meaning This command reads the following configuration data of an addressed AS-i slave obtained from the AS-i master on the AS-Interface: IO code ID code ID1 code ID2 code The configuration data are defined by the manufacturer of the AS-i slave. The meaning of the configuration data is described in the "AS-Interface Complete Specification". Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 19 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: A8H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 20 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 IO code 1 ID1 code Bit 0 ID code ID2 code 2 Reserved 3 Reserved AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 115 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.10 No. A9: Set_LPS Meaning This command transfers the list of configured AS-i slaves for non-volatile storage in the EEPROM of the master. When this command is executed, the AS-i master switches to the offline phase and then switches back to "normal operation". The AS-i master restarts. This command is not executed in "protected operation". Note Configuration data are overwritten If you configure the AS-i slaves using HW Config, there is normally no need to use the command described here. If you use this command, you will overwrite the respective configuration data that resulted from SET button configuration or HW Config configuration. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 21 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Command number: A9H 1 00H 2 Slave 7(A) Slave 6(A) Slave 5(A) Slave 4(A) Slave 3(A) Slave 2(A) Slave 1(A) 0 3 Slave 15(A) Slave 14(A) Slave 13(A) Slave 12(A) Slave 11(A) Slave 10(A) Slave 9(A) Slave 8(A) 4 Slave 23(A) Slave 22(A) Slave 21(A) Slave 20(A) Slave 19(A) Slave 18(A) Slave 17(A) Slave 16(A) 5 Slave 31(A) Slave 30(A) Slave 29(A) Slave 28(A) Slave 27(A) Slave 26(A) Slave 25(A) Slave 24(A) 6 Slave 7B Slave 6B Slave 5B Slave 4B Slave 3B Slave 2B Slave 1B 0 7 Slave 15B Slave 14B Slave 13B Slave 12B Slave 11B Slave 10B Slave 9B Slave 8B 8 Slave 23B Slave 22B Slave 21B Slave 20B Slave 19B Slave 18B Slave 17B Slave 16B 9 Slave 31B Slave 30B Slave 29B Slave 28B Slave 27B Slave 26B Slave 25B Slave 24B The bits have the following meanings in the LPS data: 0: AS-i slave is not configured 1: AS-i slave is configured AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 116 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.11 No. 0A: SET_Offline_Mode Meaning This command switches between online and offline mode. Online mode is the normal mode for the AS-i master. The following jobs are processed in online mode: 1. In the data exchange phase, the fields of the output data are transferred to the slave outputs for all AS-i slaves of the LAS. In error-free transmission, the addressed AS-i slaves transfer the values of the slave inputs to the master. 2. In the loading phase, a search is conducted for the existing AS-i slaves. Newly added ASi slaves are inserted in the LDS or LAS. 3. In the management phase, jobs forwarded by the user, such as writing parameters, are executed. In offline mode, the AS-i master only processes jobs from the user. Jobs that immediately activate an AS-i slave are rejected with an error. Cyclic data exchange is not performed with the AS-i slaves. The bit OFFLINE=TRUE is not stored permanently. This means that after startup or restart, the AS-i master is in online mode again. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 22 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Command number: 0AH 0 Mode 0 = Online 1 = Offline AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 117 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.12 No. 08: Set_Auto_Address_Enable Meaning This command enables or disables the "Automatic address programming" function. The bit AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE is stored in non-volatile memory. It is retained even after startup or warm restart of the AS-i master. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 23 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 1 0 1 Bit 0 Command number: 0BH 0 Value for AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE 1 = Automatic address programming enabled 0 = Automatic address programming disabled AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 118 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.13 No. 0C: Set_Operation_Mode Meaning This command chooses between "configuration mode" and "protected operation". In "protected operation", only the AS-i slaves that are flagged in the LPS and whose CONFIGURED and ACTUAL configurations match are activated. This is the case when the I/O code and the ID codes of the detected AS-i slaves are identical to the configured values. In "configuration mode", all the detected AS-i slaves are activated - with the exception of AS-i slave "0". This also applies to AS-i slaves that differ in their CONFIGURED and ACTUAL configurations. The "OPERATING MODE" bit is saved in non-volatile memory. As a result, this bit is retained in the event of startup or restart. On switching from "configuration mode" to "protected operation", the AS-i master restarts. It enters the offline phase and then switches to online mode. Note AS-i slave with address 0 prevents switchover to "protected operation" If an AS-i slave with address 0 is present on the AS-i bus, the AS-i master cannot switch from "configuration mode" to "protected operation". Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 24 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 1 0 1 Bit 0 Command number: 0CH 0 Operating mode 0 = "Protected operation" 1 = "Configuration mode" AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 119 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.14 No. 0D: Change_AS-i-Slave_Address Meaning of the command This command changes the AS-i slave address of an AS-i slave. This command is used predominantly for adding a new AS-i slave with the default address "0". In this case, the address is changed from "AS-i slave address, old" = 0 to "AS-i slave address, new". The change is only executed if the following conditions are met: 1. An AS-i slave with "AS-i slave address, old" must exist. 2. If "AS-i address, old" is not equal to "0", an AS-i slave with the address "0" must not be connected at the same time. 3. "AS-i slave address, new" must have a valid value. 4. An AS-i slave with "AS-i slave address, new" must not already exist. Note When changing the AS-i slave address, the AS-i slave is not reset. The output data of the AS-i slave are retained until the slave resets its data automatically by internal time watchdog monitoring or the slave receives new data at the new address. Today's AS-i slaves mostly feature watchdog monitoring that reset the internal I/O data of the slave when cyclic communication with the AS-i master is interrupted. Check the technical data of the slave to find out whether it features watchdog monitoring. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 25 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 0D H 1 Slave address, old 2 Slave address, new AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 120 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.15 No. 0F: Read_Status Meaning This command reads the status register for the addressed AS-i slave. Generally, this command is not required because the slave status is automatically managed by the AS-i master. The following functions are available for detecting an I/O fault: alarm message, read diagnostic data sets, execution of command "Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags" command number B0 hex. The flags of the status register have the following meaning depending on the type of the AS-i slave: Table 9- 26 Meaning of the flags of the status register depending on the type of the AS-i slave Status bit AS-i slave according to AS-i specification V2.0 AS-i slave AS-i specification V2.1 and higher S0 Address volatile Address/ID code volatile This flag is set if S1 S2 * The internal routine of the AS-i slave for permanent storage of the AS-i slave address is running. This can last up to 15 ms and must not be interrupted by another addressing call. * The internal address comparison of the AS-i slave determines that the permanently saved address is not identical to the entry in the address register. Parity error detected Peripheral fault detected This flag is set if the AS-i slave has detected a parity error in a receive frame since the last "Read and delete status" job. An AS-i slave can set this flag if it detects a fault, e.g. wire break, on the connected I/O. End bit error detected Reserved This flag is set if the AS-i slave has detected an end bit error in a message frame since the last "Read and delete status" job. S3 Read error in non-volatile memory (EEPROM) This bit is set if the AS-i slave has discovered a read error when reading the non-volatile memory. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 27 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 0FH 1 Slave address Structure of the job data in the receive buffer Table 9- 28 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 S3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 S2 S1 S0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 121 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.16 No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags Meaning This command reads the following entries from the AS-i master: List of activated AS-i slaves, LAS List of detected AS-i slaves, LDS List of configured AS-i slaves, LPS The flags in accordance with the AS-i slave specification Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 29 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: B0H Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 30 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reserved LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 7(A) Slave 6(A) Slave 5(A) Slave 4(A) Slave 3(A) Slave 2(A) Slave 1(A) LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 15(A) Slave 14(A) Slave 13(A) Slave 12(A) Slave 11(A) Slave 10(A) Slave 9(A) Slave 8(A) LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 23(A) Slave 22(A) Slave 21(A) Slave 20(A) Slave 19(A) Slave 18(A) Slave 17(A) Slave 16(A) LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 31(A) Slave 30(A) Slave 29(A) Slave 28(A) Slave 27(A) Slave 26(A) Slave 25(A) Slave 24(A) LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Reserved Slave 7B Slave 6B Slave 5B Slave 4B Slave 3B Slave 2B Slave 1B LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 15B Slave 14B Slave 13B Slave 12B Slave 11B Slave 10B Slave 9B Slave 8B LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 23B Slave 22B Slave 21B Slave 20B Slave 19B Slave 18B Slave 17B Slave 16B LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS LAS Slave 31B Slave 30B Slave 29B Slave 28B Slave 27B Slave 26B Slave 25B Slave 24B LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 7(A) Slave 6(A) Slave 5(A) Slave 4(A) Slave 3(A) Slave 2(A) Slave 1(A) Slave 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 122 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Bit 6 21 22 23 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 15(A) Slave 14(A) Slave 13(A) Slave 12(A) Slave 11(A) Slave 10(A) Slave 9(A) Slave 8(A) LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 23(A) Slave 22(A) Slave 21(A) Slave 20(A) Slave 19(A) Slave 18(A) Slave 17(A) Slave 16(A) LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 31(A) Slave 30(A) Slave 29(A) Slave 28(A) Slave 27(A) Slave 26(A) Slave 25(A) Slave 24(A) LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Reserved Slave 7B Slave 6B Slave 5B Slave 4B Slave 3B Slave 2B Slave 1B LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 15B Slave 14B Slave 13B Slave 12B Slave 11B Slave 10B Slave 9B Slave 8B LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 23B Slave 22B Slave 21B Slave 20B Slave 19B Slave 18B Slave 17B Slave 16B LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS LDS Slave 31B Slave 30B Slave 29B Slave 28B Slave 27B Slave 26B Slave 25B Slave 24B Reserved LPS LPS LPS S LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 7(A) Slave 6(A) Slave 5(A) Slave 4(A) Slave 3(A) Slave 2(A) Slave 1(A) LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 15(A) Slave 14(A) Slave 13(A) Slave 12(A) LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 11(A) Slave 10(A) Slave 9(A) Slave 8(A) LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 23(A) Slave 22(A) Slave 21(A) Slave 20(A) LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 31(A) 20 Bit 5 Slave 30(A) Slave 29(A) LPS LPS Slave 17(A) Slave 16(A) LPS LPS LPS Slave 19(A) Slave 18(A) Slave 28(A) Slave 27(A) Slave 26(A) Slave 25(A) Slave 24(A) LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS Reserved Slave 7B Slave 6B Slave 5B Slave 4B Slave 3B Slave 2B Slave 1B LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 15B Slave 14B Slave 13B Slave 12B Slave 11B Slave 10B Slave 9B Slave 8B LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 23B Slave 22B Slave 21B Slave 20B Slave 19B Slave 18B Slave 17B Slave 16B LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS LPS Slave 31B Slave 30B Slave 29B Slave 28B Slave 27B Slave 26B Slave 25B Slave 24B 24 Flag 1 25 Flag 2 26 ... 31 Reserved Meaning of the bits in Byte 0 to 23 Bit = 0: The AS-i slave is not activated, detected or configured. Bit = 1: The AS-i slave is activated, detected or configured. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 123 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Table 9- 31 Structure of flag 1 and flag 2 Flag 1 Flag 2 Bit Meaning Bit Meaning 0 Config_OK 0 Periphery_OK 1 LDS.0 1 Data_Exchange_Active 2 Auto_Address_Assign 2 Off_Line 3 Auto_Address_Available 3 AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE 4 Configuration_Active 4 Earth_Fault 5 Normal_Operation_Active 5 EEPROM_OK 6 APF 6 EFD-ENABLE 7 Offline_Ready 7 Reserved Table 9- 32 Meaning of the flags Flag Meaning Config_OK The flag is set when the CONFIGURED configuration and the ACTUAL configuration match. LDS.0 The flag is set when an AS-i slave with address 0 is present. (List of Detected Slaves) Auto_Address_Assign The flag is set if automatic address programming is possible. This means that AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE = 1 and no "incorrect" AS-i slaves are connected to AS-Interface. Auto_Address_Available The flag is set if automatic address programming can be performed. This means that one AS-i slave has failed. Configuration_Active The flag is set in "configuration mode" and reset in "protected operation". Normal_Operation_Active The flag is set when the AS-i master is in "protected operation". APF The flag is set when the voltage on the AS-i cable is too low (AS-i Power Fail). Offline_Ready The flag is set if the offline phase is active. Periphery_OK The flag is set if none of the AS-i slaves signal a peripheral fault. Data_Exchange_Active The "Data_Exchange_Active" flag is set when cyclic data exchange is in "protected operation". Off_Line The flag is set if the "OFFLINE" operating status is to be adopted or has already been adopted. AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE The flag indicates whether automatic address programming is disabled (BIT = 0) or enabled (BIT = 1) by the user. Earth_Fault The flag is set if a ground fault has been detected on the AS-i cable. EEPROM_OK The flag is set if the test of the internal EEPROM was successful. EFD Disable The flag indicates whether ground fault detection is enabled (BIT = 0) or disabled (BIT = 1) by the user. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 124 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.17 No. B9: Read_overall_configuration Meaning This command reads the following data from the AS-i master: List of activated AS-i slaves (LAS). It specifies which of the connected AS-i slaves are activated The current configuration data for the connected AS-i slaves: - IO code - ID code - ID1 code - ID2 code The current parameters of the AS-i slaves (ACTUAL parameters) The current status of the AS-i master (Flag 1, Flag 2) After commissioning, you can use this command, for example, to determine the configuration of the stations connected to the AS-i cable. You can modify this read-in configuration data if required and store it as the CONFIGURED configuration in the AS-i master with the "Write_overall_configuration" command. No. BA: Write_overall_configuration (Page 131) Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 33 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: B9H AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 125 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 34 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 00H 1 00H 2 LAS Slave 7(A) LAS Slave 6(A) LAS Slave 5(A) LAS Slave 4(A) LAS Slave 3(A) LAS Slave 2(A) LAS Slave 1(A) Reserved 3 LAS Slave 15(A) LAS Slave 14(A) LAS Slave 13(A) LAS Slave 12(A) LAS Slave 11(A) LAS Slave 10(A) LAS Slave 9(A) LAS Slave 8(A) 4 LAS Slave 23(A) LAS Slave 22(A) LAS Slave 21(A) LAS Slave 20(A) LAS Slave 19(A) LAS Slave 18(A) LAS Slave 17(A) LAS Slave 16(A) 5 LAS Slave 31(A) LAS Slave 30(A) LAS Slave 29(A) LAS Slave 28(A) LAS Slave 27(A) LAS Slave 26(A) LAS Slave 25(A) LAS Slave 24(A) 6 LAS Slave 7B LAS Slave 6B LAS Slave 5B LAS Slave 4B LAS Slave 3B LAS Slave 2B LAS Slave 1B Reserved 7 LAS Slave 15B LAS Slave 14B LAS Slave 13B LAS Slave 12B LAS Slave 11B LAS Slave 10B LAS Slave 9B LAS Slave 8B 8 LAS Slave 23B LAS Slave 22B LAS Slave 21B LAS Slave 20B LAS Slave 19B LAS Slave 18B LAS Slave 17B LAS Slave 16B 9 LAS Slave 31B LAS Slave 30B LAS Slave 29B LAS Slave 28B LAS Slave 27B LAS Slave 26B LAS Slave 25B LAS Slave 24B 10 IO code Slave 0 ID_CODE Slave 0 11 ID1 Slave 0 ID2 Slave 0 12 IO code Slave 1 / 1A ID_CODE Slave 1 / 1A 13 ID1 Slave 1 / 1A ID2 Slave 1 / 1A 14 IO code Slave 2 / 2A ID_CODE Slave 2 / 2A 15 ID1 Slave 2 / 2A ID2 Slave 2 / 2A 16 IO code Slave 3 / 3A ID_CODE Slave 3 / 3A 17 ID1 Slave 3 / 3A ID2 Slave 3 / 3A 18 IO code Slave 4 / 4A ID_CODE Slave 4 / 4A 19 ID1 Slave 4 / 4A ID2 Slave 4 / 4A 20 IO code Slave 5 / 5A ID_CODE Slave 5 / 5A 21 ID1 Slave 5 / 5A ID2 Slave 5 / 5A 22 IO code Slave 6 / 6A ID_CODE Slave 6 / 6A 23 ID1 Slave 6 / 6A ID2 Slave 6 / 6A 24 IO code Slave 7 / 7A ID_CODE Slave 7 / 7A 25 ID1 Slave 7 / 7A ID2 Slave 7 / 7A 26 IO code Slave 8 / 8A ID_CODE Slave 8 / 8A 27 ID1 Slave 8 / 8A ID2 Slave 8 / 8A 28 IO code Slave 9 / 9A ID_CODE Slave 9 / 9A 29 ID1 Slave 9 / 9A ID2 Slave 9 / 9A 30 IO code Slave 10 / 10A ID_CODE Slave 10 / 10A AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 126 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 31 ID1 Slave 10 / 10A ID2 Slave 10 / 10A 32 IO code Slave 11 / 11A ID_CODE Slave 11 / 11A 33 ID1 Slave 11 / 11A ID2 Slave 11 / 11A 34 IO code Slave 12 / 12A ID_CODE Slave 12 / 12A 35 ID1 Slave 12 / 12A ID2 Slave 12 / 12A 36 IO code Slave 13 / 13A ID_CODE Slave 13 / 13A 37 ID1 Slave 13 / 13A ID2 Slave 13 / 13A 38 IO code Slave 14 / 14A ID_CODE Slave 14 / 14A 39 ID1 Slave 14 / 14A ID2 Slave 14 / 14A 40 IO code Slave 15 / 15A ID_CODE Slave 15 / 15A 41 ID1 Slave 15 / 15A ID2 Slave 15 / 15A 42 IO code Slave 16 / 16A ID_CODE Slave 16 / 16A 43 ID1 Slave 16 / 16A ID2 Slave 16 / 16A 44 IO code Slave 17 / 17A ID_CODE Slave 17 / 17A 45 ID1 Slave 17 / 17A ID2 Slave 17 / 17A 46 IO code Slave 18 / 18A ID_CODE Slave 18 / 18A 47 ID1 Slave 18 / 18A ID2 Slave 18 / 18A 48 IO code Slave 19 / 19A ID_CODE Slave 19 / 19A 49 ID1 Slave 19 / 19A ID2 Slave 19 / 19A 50 IO code Slave 20 / 20A ID_CODE Slave 20 / 20A 51 ID1 Slave 20 / 20A ID2 Slave 20 / 20A 52 IO code Slave 21 / 21A ID_CODE Slave 21 / 21A 53 ID1 Slave 21 / 21A ID2 Slave 21 / 21A 54 IO code Slave 22 / 22A ID_CODE Slave 22 / 22A 55 ID1 Slave 22 / 22A ID2 Slave 22 / 22A 56 IO code Slave 23 / 23A ID_CODE Slave 23 / 23A 57 ID1 Slave 23 / 23A ID2 Slave 23 / 23A 58 IO code Slave 24 / 24A ID_CODE Slave 24 / 24A 59 ID1 Slave 24 / 24A ID2 Slave 24 / 24A 60 IO code Slave 25 / 25A ID_CODE Slave 25 / 25A 61 ID1 Slave 25 / 25A ID2 Slave 25 / 25A 62 IO code Slave 26 / 26A ID_CODE Slave 26 / 26A 63 ID1 Slave 26 / 26A ID2 Slave 26 / 26A 64 IO code Slave 27 / 27A ID_CODE Slave 27 / 27A 65 ID1 Slave 27 / 27A ID2 Slave 27 / 27A 66 IO code Slave 28 / 28A ID_CODE Slave 28 / 28A 67 ID1 Slave 28 / 28A ID2 Slave 28 / 28A 68 IO code Slave 29 / 29A ID_CODE Slave 29 / 29A 69 ID1 Slave 29 / 29A ID2 Slave 29 / 29A 70 IO code Slave 30 / 30A ID_CODE Slave 30 / 30A 71 ID1 Slave 30 / 30A ID2 Slave 30 / 30A Bit 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 127 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 72 IO code Slave 31 / 31A ID_CODE Slave 31 / 31A 73 ID1 Slave 31 / 31A ID2 Slave 31 / 31A 74 Reserved Reserved 75 Reserved Reserved 76 IO code Slave 1B ID_CODE Slave 1B 77 ID1 Slave 1B ID2 Slave 1B 78 IO code Slave 2B ID_CODE Slave 2B 79 ID1 Slave 2B ID2 Slave 2B 80 IO code Slave 3B ID_CODE Slave 3B 81 ID1 Slave 3B ID2 Slave 3B 82 IO code Slave 4B ID_CODE Slave 4B 83 ID1 Slave 4B ID2 Slave 4B 84 IO code Slave 5B ID_CODE Slave 5B 85 ID1 Slave 5B ID2 Slave 5B 86 IO code Slave 6B ID_CODE Slave 6B 87 ID1 Slave 6B ID2 Slave 6B 88 IO code Slave 7B ID_CODE Slave 7B 89 ID1 Slave 7B ID2 Slave 7B 90 IO code Slave 8B ID_CODE Slave 8B 91 ID1 Slave 8B ID2 Slave 8B 92 IO code Slave 9B ID_CODE Slave 9B 93 ID1 Slave 9B ID2 Slave 9B 94 IO code Slave 10B ID_CODE Slave 10B 95 ID1 Slave 10B ID2 Slave 10B 96 IO code Slave 11B ID_CODE Slave 11B 97 ID1 Slave 11B ID2 Slave 11B 98 IO code Slave 12B ID_CODE Slave 12B 99 ID1 Slave 12B ID2 Slave 12B 100 IO code Slave 13B ID_CODE Slave 13B 101 ID1 Slave 13B ID2 Slave 13B 102 IO code Slave 14B ID_CODE Slave 14B 103 ID1 Slave 14B ID2 Slave 14B 104 IO code Slave 15B ID_CODE Slave 15B 105 ID1 Slave 15B ID2 Slave 15B 106 IO code Slave 16B ID_CODE Slave 16B 107 ID1 Slave 16B ID2 Slave 16B 108 IO code Slave 17B ID_CODE Slave 17B 109 ID1 Slave 17B ID2 Slave 17B 110 IO code Slave 18B ID_CODE Slave 18B 111 ID1 Slave 18B ID2 Slave 18B 112 IO code Slave 19B ID_CODE Slave 19B Bit 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 128 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 113 ID1 Slave 19B ID2 Slave 19B 114 IO code Slave 20B ID_CODE Slave 20B 115 ID1 Slave 20B ID2 Slave 20B 116 IO code Slave 21B ID_CODE Slave 21B 117 ID1 Slave 21B ID2 Slave 21B 118 IO code Slave 22B ID_CODE Slave 22B 119 ID1 Slave 22B ID2 Slave 22B 120 IO code Slave 23B ID_CODE Slave 23B 121 ID1 Slave 23B ID2 Slave 23B 122 IO code Slave 24B ID_CODE Slave 24B 123 ID1 Slave 24B ID2 Slave 24B 124 IO code Slave 25B ID_CODE Slave 25B 125 ID1 Slave 25B ID2 Slave 25B 126 IO code Slave 26B ID_CODE Slave 26B 127 ID1 Slave 26B ID2 Slave 26B 128 IO code Slave 27B ID_CODE Slave 27B 129 ID1 Slave 27B ID2 Slave 27B 130 IO code Slave 28B ID_CODE Slave 28B 131 ID1 Slave 28B ID2 Slave 28B 132 IO code Slave 29B ID_CODE Slave 29B 133 ID1 Slave 29B ID2 Slave 29B 134 IO code Slave 30B ID_CODE Slave 30B 135 ID1 Slave 30B ID2 Slave 30B 136 IO code Slave 31B ID_CODE Slave 31B 137 ID1 Slave 31B ID2 Slave 31B 138 Reserved Parameter Slave 1 / 1A 139 Parameter Slave 2 / 2A Parameter Slave 3 / 3A 140 Parameter Slave 4 / 4A Parameter Slave 5 / 5A 141 Parameter Slave 6 / 6A Parameter Slave 7 / 7A 142 Parameter Slave 8 / 8A Parameter Slave 9 / 9A 143 Parameter Slave 10 / 10A Parameter Slave 11 / 11A 144 Parameter Slave 12 / 12A Parameter Slave 13 / 13A 145 Parameter Slave 14 / 14A Parameter Slave 15 / 15A 146 Parameter Slave 16 / 16A Parameter Slave 17 / 17A 147 Parameter Slave 18 / 18A Parameter Slave 19 / 19A 148 Parameter Slave 20 / 20A Parameter Slave 21 / 21A 149 Parameter Slave 22 / 22A Parameter Slave 23 / 23A 150 Parameter Slave 24 / 24A Parameter Slave 25 / 25A 151 Parameter Slave 26 / 26A Parameter Slave 27 / 27A 152 Parameter Slave 28 / 28A Parameter Slave 29 / 29A 153 Parameter Slave 30 / 30A Parameter Slave 31 / 31A Bit 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 129 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 154 Reserved Parameter Slave 1B 155 Parameter Slave 2B Parameter Slave 3B 156 Parameter Slave 4B Parameter Slave 5B 157 Parameter Slave 6B Parameter Slave 7B 158 Parameter Slave 8B Parameter Slave 9B 159 Parameter Slave 10B Parameter Slave 11B 160 Parameter Slave 12B Parameter Slave 13B 161 Parameter Slave 14B Parameter Slave 15B 162 Parameter Slave 16B Parameter Slave 17B 163 Parameter Slave 18B Parameter Slave 19B 164 Parameter Slave 20B Parameter Slave 21B 165 Parameter Slave 22B Parameter Slave 23B 166 Parameter Slave 24B Parameter Slave 25B 167 Parameter Slave 26B Parameter Slave 27B 168 Parameter Slave 28B Parameter Slave 29B 169 Parameter Slave 30B Parameter Slave 31B 170 Flag 1 171 Flag 2 172 ... 218 Reserved Table 9- 35 Structure of flag 1 and flag 2 Flag 1 Bit number Bit 0 Meaning Flag 2 Bit number Meaning 0 Config_OK 0 Periphery_OK 1 LDS.0 1 Data_Exchange_Active 2 Auto_Address_Assign 2 Off_Line 3 Auto_Address_Available 3 AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE 4 Configuration_Active 4 Earth_Fault 5 Normal_Operation_Active 5 EEPROM_OK 6 APF 6 EFD-ENABLE 7 Offline_Ready 7 Reserved For the meanings of flags, refer to Chapter: No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags (Page 122) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 130 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.18 No. BA: Write_overall_configuration Meaning This command transfers the desired overall configuration of AS-Interface to the AS-i master and saves it as the CONFIGURED configuration in the non-volatile EEPROM. This configures the AS-i master. When this command is executed, the AS-i master changes to the offline phase and then switches back over to "normal operation". The AS-i master restarts. The "Protected operation" or "Configuration mode" operating mode of the AS-i master after execution of the command is determined by the "Configuration_Active" flag (see Table "Structure of Flag 1 and Flag 2"). This command is permissible both in "Protected operation" and "Configuration mode. Note Configuration data are overwritten If you configure the AS-i slaves using STEP 7, there is normally no need to use the command described here. If you have configured proxy slaves, you can specify the configuration data of the proxy slaves with this command. To avoid the offline changeover, the configuration data of the proxy slaves can be specified preferentially with the "No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online (Page 159)" command. If you use this command, you will overwrite the corresponding configuration data that resulted from configuring the AS-i master using the "SET" button or configuring using STEP 7. Specifically, the following data are transferred: List of configured AS-i slaves This specifies which AS-i slaves are permitted to be activated by the AS-i master in "protected operation". List of configuration data. This specifies the ID codes and the IO code that the connected AS-i slaves must have. The list of the AS-i slave parameters that have been configured in the AS-i master and stored in non-volatile memory. These parameters are transferred to the AS-i slaves when the AS-i master starts up. The flags that determine the operating state of the AS-i master after startup. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 131 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands The AS-i master parameterizes the AS-i slaves itself in the case of AS-i slaves that comply with standard profile 7.4. For slaves in accordance with standard profile 7.4, the AS-i master ignores the parameter values specified in the command. NOTICE Note the size of the I/O image If you have configured the AS-i slaves in STEP 7, the size of the I/O image of the individual slaves is defined using STEP 7. When using this command, ensure that the I/O image of the individual slaves corresponds to the slaves configured using the command. If the size of the I/O image does not match, only the lower-order data will be transferred. The data that do not fit into the image are truncated or are filled with substitute value "0" in the case of digital values and with substitute value 7FFF (Hex) in the case of analog values. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 36 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Command number: BAH 1 00H Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 2 LPS Slave 7(A) LPS Slave 6(A) LPS Slave 5(A) LPS Slave 4(A) LPS Slave 3(A) LPS Slave 2(A) LPS Slave 1(A) 0 3 LPS Slave 15(A) LPS Slave 14(A) LPS Slave 13(A) LPS Slave 12(A) LPS Slave 11(A) LPS Slave 10(A) LPS Slave 9(A) LPS Slave 8(A) 4 LPS Slave 23(A) LPS Slave 22(A) LPS Slave 21(A) LPS Slave 20(A) LPS Slave 19(A) LPS Slave 18(A) LPS Slave 17(A) LPS Slave 16(A) 5 LPS Slave 31(A) LPS Slave 30(A) LPS Slave 29(A) LPS Slave 28(A) LPS Slave 27(A) LPS Slave 26(A) LPS Slave 25(A) LPS Slave 24(A) 6 LPS Slave 7B LPS Slave 6B LPS Slave 5B LPS Slave 4B LPS Slave 3B LPS Slave 2B LPS Slave 1B 0 7 LPS Slave 15B LPS Slave 14B LPS Slave 13B LPS Slave 12B LPS Slave 11B LPS Slave 10B LPS Slave 9B LPS Slave 8B 8 LPS Slave 23B LPS Slave 22B LPS Slave 21B LPS Slave 20B LPS Slave 19B LPS Slave 18B LPS Slave 17B LPS Slave 16B 9 LPS Slave 31B LPS Slave 30B LPS Slave 29B LPS Slave 28B LPS Slave 27B LPS Slave 26B LPS Slave 25B LPS Slave 24B 10 IO code Slave 0 ID_CODE Slave 0 11 ID1 Slave 0 ID2 Slave 0 12 IO code Slave 1 / 1A ID_CODE Slave 1 / 1A 13 ID1 Slave 1 / 1A ID2 Slave 1 / 1A 14 IO code Slave 2 / 2A ID_CODE Slave 2 / 2A 15 ID1 Slave 2 / 2A ID2 Slave 2 / 2A 16 IO code Slave 3 / 3A ID_CODE Slave 3 / 3A AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 132 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 17 ID1 Slave 3 / 3A ID2 Slave 3 / 3A 18 IO code Slave 4 / 4A ID_CODE Slave 4 / 4A 19 ID1 Slave 4 / 4A ID2 Slave 4 / 4A 20 IO code Slave 5 / 5A ID_CODE Slave 5 / 5A 21 ID1 Slave 5 / 5A ID2 Slave 5 / 5A 22 IO code Slave 6 / 6A ID_CODE Slave 6 / 6A 23 ID1 Slave 6 / 6A ID2 Slave 6 / 6A 24 IO code Slave 7 / 7A ID_CODE Slave 7 / 7A 25 ID1 Slave 7 / 7A ID2 Slave 7 / 7A 26 IO code Slave 8 / 8A ID_CODE Slave 8 / 8A 27 ID1 Slave 8 / 8A ID2 Slave 8 / 8A 28 IO code Slave 9 / 9A ID_CODE Slave 9 / 9A 29 ID1 Slave 9 / 9A ID2 Slave 9 / 9A 30 IO code Slave 10 / 10A ID_CODE Slave 10 / 10A 31 ID1 Slave 10 / 10A ID2 Slave 10 / 10A 32 IO code Slave 11 / 11A ID_CODE Slave 11 / 11A 33 ID1 Slave 11 / 11A ID2 Slave 11 / 11A 34 IO code Slave 12 / 12A ID_CODE Slave 12 / 12A 35 ID1 Slave 12 / 12A ID2 Slave 12 / 12A 36 IO code Slave 13 / 13A ID_CODE Slave 13 / 13A 37 ID1 Slave 13 / 13A ID2 Slave 13 / 13A 38 IO code Slave 14 / 14A ID_CODE Slave 14 / 14A 39 ID1 Slave 14 / 14A ID2 Slave 14 / 14A 40 IO code Slave 15 / 15A ID_CODE Slave 15 / 15A 41 ID1 Slave 15 / 15A ID2 Slave 15 / 15A 42 IO code Slave 16 / 16A ID_CODE Slave 16 / 16A 43 ID1 Slave 16 / 16A ID2 Slave 16 / 16A 44 IO code Slave 17 / 17A ID_CODE Slave 17 / 17A 45 ID1 Slave 17 / 17A ID2 Slave 17 / 17A 46 IO code Slave 18 / 18A ID_CODE Slave 18 / 18A 47 ID1 Slave 18 / 18A ID2 Slave 18 / 18A 48 IO code Slave 19 / 19A ID_CODE Slave 19 / 19A 49 ID1 Slave 19 / 19A ID2 Slave 19 / 19A 50 IO code Slave 20 / 20A ID_CODE Slave 20 / 20A 51 ID1 Slave 20 / 20A ID2 Slave 20 / 20A 52 IO code Slave 21 / 21A ID_CODE Slave 21 / 21A 53 ID1 Slave 21 / 21A ID2 Slave 21 / 21A 54 IO code Slave 22 / 22A ID_CODE Slave 22 / 21A 55 ID1 Slave 22 / 22A ID2 Slave 22 / 22A 56 IO code Slave 23 / 23A ID_CODE Slave 23 / 23A 57 ID1 Slave 23 / 23A ID2 Slave 23 / 23A Bit 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 133 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 58 Bit 6 Bit 5 IO code Slave 24 / 24A Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ID_CODE Slave 24 / 24A 59 ID1 Slave 24 / 24A ID2 Slave 24 / 24A 60 IO code Slave 25 / 25A ID_CODE Slave 25 / 25A 61 ID1 Slave 25 / 25A ID2 Slave 25 / 25A 62 IO code Slave 26 / 26A ID_CODE Slave 26 / 26A 63 ID1 Slave 26 / 26A ID2 Slave 26 / 26A 64 IO code Slave 27 / 27A ID_CODE Slave 27 / 27A 65 ID1 Slave 27 / 27A ID2 Slave 27 / 27A 66 IO code Slave 28 / 28A ID_CODE Slave 28 / 28A 67 ID1 Slave 28 / 28A ID2 Slave 28 / 28A 68 IO code Slave 29 / 29A ID_CODE Slave 29 / 29A 69 ID1 Slave 29 / 29A ID2 Slave 29 / 29A 70 IO code Slave 30 / 30A ID_CODE Slave 30 / 30A 71 ID1 Slave 30 / 30A ID2 Slave 30 / 30A 72 IO code Slave 31 / 31A ID_CODE Slave 31 / 31A 73 ID1 Slave 31 / 31A ID2 Slave 31 / 31A 74 0 0 75 0 0 76 IO code Slave 1B ID_CODE Slave 1B 77 ID1 Slave 1B ID2 Slave 1B 78 IO code Slave 2B ID_CODE Slave 2B 79 ID1 Slave 2B ID2 Slave 2B 80 IO code Slave 3B ID_CODE Slave 3B 81 ID1 Slave 3B ID2 Slave 3B 82 IO code Slave 4B ID_CODE Slave 4B 83 ID1 Slave 4B ID2 Slave 4B 84 IO code Slave 5B ID_CODE Slave 5B 85 ID1 Slave 5B ID2 Slave 5B 86 IO code Slave 6B ID_CODE Slave 6B 87 ID1 Slave 6B ID2 Slave 6B 88 IO code Slave 7B ID_CODE Slave 7B 89 ID1 Slave 7B ID2 Slave 7B 90 IO code Slave 8B ID_CODE Slave 8B 91 ID1 Slave 8B ID2 Slave 8B 92 IO code Slave 9B ID_CODE Slave 9B 93 ID1 Slave 9B ID2 Slave 9B 94 IO code Slave 10B ID_CODE Slave 10B 95 ID1 Slave 10B ID2 Slave 10B 96 IO code Slave 11B ID_CODE Slave 11B 97 ID1 Slave 11B ID2 Slave 11B 98 IO code Slave 12B ID_CODE Slave 12B AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 134 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 99 ID1 Slave 12B ID2 Slave 12B 100 IO code Slave 13B ID_CODE Slave 13B 101 ID1 Slave 13B ID2 Slave 13B 102 IO code Slave 14B ID_CODE Slave 14B 103 ID1 Slave 14B ID2 Slave 14B 104 IO code Slave 15B ID_CODE Slave 15B 105 ID1 Slave 15B ID2 Slave 15B 106 IO code Slave 16B ID_CODE Slave 16B 107 ID1 Slave 16B ID2 Slave 16B 108 IO code Slave 17B ID_CODE Slave 17B 109 ID1 Slave 17B ID2 Slave 17B 110 IO code Slave 18B ID_CODE Slave 18B 111 ID1 Slave 18B ID2 Slave 18B 112 IO code Slave 19B ID_CODE Slave 19B 113 ID1 Slave 19B ID2 Slave 19B 114 IO code Slave 20B ID_CODE Slave 20B 115 ID1 Slave 20B ID2 Slave 20B 116 IO code Slave 21B ID_CODE Slave 21B 117 ID1 Slave 21B ID2 Slave 21B 118 IO code Slave 22B ID_CODE Slave 22B 119 ID1 Slave 22B ID2 Slave 22B 120 IO code Slave 23B ID_CODE Slave 23B 121 ID1 Slave 23B ID2 Slave 23B 122 IO code Slave 24B ID_CODE Slave 24B 123 ID1 Slave 24B ID2 Slave 24B 124 IO code Slave 25B ID_CODE Slave 25B 125 ID1 Slave 25B ID2 Slave 25B 126 IO code Slave 26B ID_CODE Slave 26B 127 ID1 Slave 26B ID2 Slave 26B 128 IO code Slave 27B ID_CODE Slave 27B 129 ID1 Slave 27B ID2 Slave 27B 130 IO code Slave 28B ID_CODE Slave 28B 131 ID1 Slave 28B ID2 Slave 28B 132 IO code Slave 29B ID_CODE Slave 29B 133 ID1 Slave 29B ID2 Slave 29B 134 IO code Slave 30B ID_CODE Slave 30B 135 ID1 Slave 30B ID2 Slave 30B 136 IO code Slave 31B ID_CODE Slave 31B 137 ID1 Slave 31B ID2 Slave 31B 138 0 Parameter Slave 1 / 1A 139 Parameter Slave 2 / 2A Parameter Slave 3 / 3A Bit 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 135 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 140 Parameter Slave 4 / 4A 141 Parameter Slave 6 / 6A Parameter Slave 7 / 7A 142 Parameter Slave 8 / 8A Parameter Slave 9 / 9A 143 Parameter Slave 10 / 10A Parameter Slave 11 / 11A 144 Parameter Slave 12 / 12A Parameter Slave 13 / 13A 145 Parameter Slave 14 / 14A Parameter Slave 15 / 15A 146 Parameter Slave 16 / 16A Parameter Slave 17 / 17A 147 Parameter Slave 18 / 18A Parameter Slave 19 / 19A 148 Parameter Slave 20 / 20A Parameter Slave 21 / 21A 149 Parameter Slave 22 / 22A Parameter Slave 23 / 23A 150 Parameter Slave 24 / 24A Parameter Slave 25 / 25A 151 Parameter Slave 26 / 26A Parameter Slave 27 / 27A 152 Parameter Slave 28 / 28A Parameter Slave 29 / 29A 153 Parameter Slave 30 / 30A Parameter Slave 31 / 31A 154 0 Parameter Slave 1B 155 Parameter Slave 2B Parameter Slave 3B 156 Parameter Slave 4B Parameter Slave 5B 157 Parameter Slave 6B Parameter Slave 7B 158 Parameter Slave 8B Parameter Slave 9B 159 Parameter Slave 10B Parameter Slave 11B 160 Parameter Slave 12B Parameter Slave 13B 161 Parameter Slave 14B Parameter Slave 15B 162 Parameter Slave 16B Parameter Slave 17B 163 Parameter Slave 18B Parameter Slave 19B 164 Parameter Slave 20B Parameter Slave 21B 165 Parameter Slave 22B Parameter Slave 23B 166 Parameter Slave 24B Parameter Slave 25B 167 Parameter Slave 26B Parameter Slave 27B 168 Parameter Slave 28B Parameter Slave 29B 169 Parameter Slave 30B Parameter Slave 31B Bit 0 Parameter Slave 5 / 5A 170 Flag 1 171 Flag 2 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 136 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Table 9- 37 Structure of flag 1 and flag 2 Flag 1 Bit number Meaning Flag 2 Bit number Meaning 0 Config_OK 0 Periphery_OK 1 LDS.0 1 Data_Exchange_Active 2 Auto_Address_Assign 2 Off_Line 3 Auto_Address_Available 3 AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE 1) 4 Configuration_Active 1) 4 Earth_Fault 5 Normal_Operation_Active 5 EEPROM_OK 6 APF 6 EFD-ENABLE 7 Offline_Ready 7 Reserved 1) The "Configuration_Active" and "AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE" flags change the operating mode of the AS-i master. The values of the remaining flags are insignificant for the command "Set_LPS, Set_PCD, Set_PP, Set_Flags" and cannot be modified in the AS-i master by this call. Configuration_Active "0" means: After the command has been executed, the AS-i master will switch to "protected operation". "1" means: The AS-i master runs in "configuration mode" after completion of the job. AUTO_ADDR_ENABLE "0" means: Automatic address programming is disabled. "1" means: Automatic address programming is enabled. For the meanings of flags, refer to Chapter: No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags (Page 122) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 137 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.19 No. 3C: Set_PI Meaning This command passes parameter values for all AS-islaves to the AS-i master. The AS-i master only sends a parameter call to the slaves whose parameter value passed in the command deviates from the ACTUAL parameter value of the slave. If all parameter values passed in the command are identical to the current parameter values (ACT parameters) of the AS-i slaves, no parameters are passed from the AS-i master to the AS-i slaves. Control via the function code The response of the command can be set using the value of the "function code" in byte 1 of the job data (firmware V1.1.16 and higher) As of firmware V1.1.16, the function code is defined for values 0, 1, and 2. For firmware versions up to and including V1.1.15, the function code is only defined for the value 0. Other values are not permissible. The function code determines the response of the command as described below. The new parameter values are transferred via 3 subfunctions in byte 1 with different responses. Function code = 0: The passed parameter values are stored in the non-volatile EEPROM of the CM AS-i master ST. If the passed parameter value of at least one AS-i slave differs from the parameter value previously active in the slave, the AS-i master powers up on the AS-i bus (offline-online transition). This resets and restarts all slaves with the parameter values currently stored in the EEPROM. If there are no changes in the passed parameter values, the master does not power up. Function code = 1 (firmware V1.1.16 and higher): The passed parameter values are only stored in the volatile memory of the CM AS-i master ST module, i.e. the EEPROM remains unchanged. For every AS-i slave, the AS-i master checks whether the passed parameter value differs from the parameter value previously active in the slave (ACT parameter). If it does differ, the AS-i master calls a parameter from that AS-i slave and returns a new parameter value. The AS-i master does not call a parameter from the AS-i slave if the passed parameter value is identical to the parameter value previously active in the slave. The AS-i master does not perform a power-up on the AS-i bus. The command is considered completed without errors when the parameter values have been passed to the master. Subsequently, the parameters are passed to the slaves in parameter calls with no time monitoring. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 138 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Function code = 2 (firmware V1.1.16 and higher): The passed parameter values are stored in the non-volatile EEPROM of the CM AS-i master ST. For every AS-i slave, the AS-i master checks whether the passed parameter value differs from the parameter value previously active in the slave (ACT parameter). If it does differ, the AS-i master calls a parameter from that AS-i slave and returns a new parameter value. The AS-i master does not call a parameter from the AS-i slave if the passed parameter value is identical to the parameter value previously active in the slave. The AS-i master does not perform a power-up on the AS-i bus. The command is considered completed without errors when the parameter values have been passed to the master. Subsequently, the parameters are passed to the slaves in parameter calls with no time monitoring. Note Limited number of write accesses to an EEPROM If function code = 0 and function code = 2, the EEPROM is written to. Because the number of write accesses to an EEPROM is in principle limited (100 000 write accesses), these function codes should not be used in cyclic mode. Write access always means the actual change of a value in the EEPROM. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 139 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 38 Structure of the job data Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Command number: 3CH 1 Function code 2 0 Parameter value slave 1 / 1A 3 Parameter value slave 2 / 2A Parameter value slave 3 / 3A 4 Parameter value slave 4 / 4A Parameter value slave 5 / 5A 5 Parameter value slave 6 / 6A Parameter value slave 7 / 7A 6 Parameter value slave 8 / 8A Parameter value slave 9 / 9A 7 Parameter value slave 10 / 10A Parameter value slave 11 / 11A 8 Parameter value slave 12 / 12A Parameter value slave 13 / 13A 9 Parameter value slave 14 / 14A Parameter value slave 15 / 15A 10 Parameter value slave 16 / 16A Parameter value slave 17 / 17A 11 Parameter value slave 18 / 18A Parameter value slave 19 / 19A 12 Parameter value slave 20 / 20A Parameter value slave 21 / 21A 13 Parameter value slave 22 / 22A Parameter value slave 23 / 23A 14 Parameter value slave 24 / 24A Parameter value slave 25 / 25A 15 Parameter value slave 26 / 26A Parameter value slave 27 / 27A 16 Parameter value slave 28 / 28A Parameter value slave 29 / 29A 17 Parameter value slave 30 / 30A Parameter value slave 31 / 31A 18 0 Parameter value slave 1B 19 Parameter value slave 2B Parameter value slave 3B 20 Parameter value slave 4B Parameter value slave 5B 21 Parameter value slave 6B Parameter value slave 7B 22 Parameter value slave 8B Parameter value slave 9B 23 Parameter value slave 10B Parameter value slave 11B 24 Parameter value slave 12B Parameter value slave 13B 25 Parameter value slave 14B Parameter value slave 15B 26 Parameter value slave 16B Parameter value slave 17B 27 Parameter value slave 18B Parameter value slave 19B 28 Parameter value slave 20B Parameter value slave 21B 29 Parameter value slave 22B Parameter value slave 23B 30 Parameter value slave 24B Parameter value slave 25B 31 Parameter value slave 26B Parameter value slave 27B 32 Parameter value slave 28B Parameter value slave 29B 33 Parameter value slave 30B Parameter value slave 31B AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 140 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.20 No. 33: AS-i Parameter Echolist Meaning This command returns the parameter echo values of all AS-i slaves. The parameter echo of an AS-i slave originates in the last parameter call that was sent to this AS-i slave. The AS-i slave can provide any parameter echo value. As a general rule, the returned parameter echo value is not a "mirror image" of the parameter value that is sent by the master to the slave. If necessary, refer to the documentation of the AS-i slave to ascertain whether the echo value has a special meaning. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 39 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 33H 1 00H Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer f(ParEcho = parameter echo) Table 9- 40 Structure of the job data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 Reserved Par.Echo Slave 1 1 Par.Echo Slave 2 Par.Echo Slave 3 2 Par.Echo Slave 4 Par.Echo Slave 5 3 Par.Echo Slave 6 Par.Echo Slave 7 4 Par.Echo Slave 8 Par.Echo Slave 9 5 Par.Echo Slave 10 Par.Echo Slave 11 6 Par.Echo Slave 12 Par.Echo Slave 13 7 Par.Echo Slave 14 Par.Echo Slave 15 8 Par.Echo Slave 16 Par.Echo Slave 17 9 Par.Echo Slave 18 Par.Echo Slave 19 10 Par.Echo Slave 20 Par.Echo Slave 21 11 Par.Echo Slave 22 Par.Echo Slave 23 12 Par.Echo Slave 24 Par.Echo Slave 25 13 Par.Echo Slave 26 Par.Echo Slave 27 14 Par.Echo Slave 28 Par.Echo Slave 29 15 Par.Echo Slave 30 Par.Echo Slave 31 16 Reserved Par.Echo Slave 1B 17 Par.Echo Slave 2B Par.Echo Slave 3B 18 Par.Echo Slave 4B Par.Echo Slave 5B Bit 0 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 141 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 19 Bit 5 Bit 4 Par.Echo Slave 6B Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Par.Echo Slave 7B 20 Par.Echo Slave 8B Par.Echo Slave 9B 21 Par.Echo Slave 10B Par.Echo Slave 11B 22 Par.Echo Slave 12B Par.Echo Slave 13B 23 Par.Echo Slave 14B Par.Echo Slave 15B 24 Par.Echo Slave 16B Par.Echo Slave 17B 25 Par.Echo Slave 18B Par.Echo Slave 19B 26 Par.Echo Slave 20B Par.Echo Slave 21B 27 Par.Echo Slave 22B Par.Echo Slave 23B 28 Par.Echo Slave 24B Par.Echo Slave 25B 29 Par.Echo Slave 26B Par.Echo Slave 27B 30 Par.Echo Slave 28B Par.Echo Slave 29B 31 Par.Echo Slave 30B Par.Echo Slave 31B 9.4.21 Bit 0 No. 44: Read_Write_CTT2_String Meaning This command sends a CTT2 request according to the AS-i slave profile "CombinedTransactionType2" to the AS-i master with a byte string. The master forwards the string bytes to the AS-i slave address specified in the send buffer. This command transfers a send buffer with up to 222 bytes to the AS-i master. The AS-i master calculates the actual number of string bytes to be sent to the AS-i slave from byte 2 of the send buffer. The addressed AS-i slave answers the CTT2 request with a CTT2 response. The ASi master communicates this response as a byte string in the receive buffer. The strings are transmitted by the AS-i master with the response. The structure of the CTT2 request or CTT2 response (code, index, etc.) starts with string byte 1 in each case. You will find details about this in the respective AS-i slave description. Note While transmission of the strings is being executed on AS-i, there is no cyclic data transfer with the addressed AS-i slave. The type of protocol used means that transfer of up to 200 bytes can take up to half a minute. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 142 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 41 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 44H 1 Slave address 2 Number of string bytes 3 String byte 1 4 String byte 2 ... -- n+1 String byte n-1 n+2 String byte n Maximum value for n = 220 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 42 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning 0 Number of string bytes 1 String byte 1 2 String byte 2 ... ... m-1 String byte m - 1 m String byte m Maximum value for m = 220 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 143 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.22 No. 14: Read_Version Meaning This command reads the version ID for the firmware of the AS-i master. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 43 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 14H Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 44 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning 0 ... 31 Versions string 1) 1) "Siemens AG CM ASi M V aa.bb.cc.dd" 9.4.23 No. 17: Read ID_Code Significance This command reads the ID code of an AS-i slave directly over the AS-i cable. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 45 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Significance 0 Command number: 17H 1 Slave address Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Table 9- 46 Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Byte Significance Bit 7 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved Bit 0 ID code AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 144 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.24 No. 37: Read_ID1-Code Meaning This command reads the ID1 code of an AS-i slave directly over the AS-i cable. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 47 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 37H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 48 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 9.4.25 Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved Bit 0 ID1 code No. 3F: Write ID1-Code Meaning This command writes the ID1 code of an AS-i slave with the address "0" directly over the AS-i cable. The AS-i master forwards the ID1 code to the AS-i slave without a plausibility check. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 49 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 3FH 1 Not relevant ID1 code AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 145 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.26 No. 38: Read_ID2-Code Meaning This command reads the ID2 code of an AS-i slave directly over the AS-i cable. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 50 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 38H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 51 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved 9.4.27 Bit 0 ID2 code No. 18: Read_IO-Code Meaning This command reads the IO code of an AS-i slave directly over the AS-i cable. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 52 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 18H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 53 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved Bit 0 IO code AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 146 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.28 No. BE: Get_LPF Meaning This command reads the list of I/O faults (periphery faults) (LPF) signaled by the AS-i slaves from the AS-i master. The AS-i master updates the LPF cyclically. Refer to the description of the AS-i slave to learn whether the slave can detect a fault in the connected I/O, e.g. wire break, and when it signals the fault. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 54 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: BEH Structure of the responses in the receive buffer Table 9- 55 Structure of the responses in the receive buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Slave 7(A) Slave 6(A) Slave 5(A) Slave 4(A) Slave 3(A) Slave 2(A) Slave 1(A) Reserved 1 Slave 15(A) Slave 14(A) Slave 13(A) Slave 12(A) Slave 11(A) Slave 10(A) Slave 9(A) 2 Slave 23(A) Slave 22(A) Slave 21(A) Slave 20(A) Slave 19(A) Slave 18(A) Slave 17(A) Slave 16(A) 3 Slave 31(A) Slave 30(A) Slave 29(A) Slave 28(A) Slave 27(A) Slave 26(A) Slave 25(A) Slave 24(A) 4 Slave 7B Slave 6B Slave 5B Slave 4B Slave 3B Slave 2B Slave 1B Reserved 5 Slave 15B Slave 14B Slave 13B Slave 12B Slave 11B Slave 10B Slave 9B Slave 8B 6 Slave 23B Slave 22B Slave 21B Slave 20B Slave 19B Slave 18B Slave 17B Slave 16B 7 Slave 31B Slave 30B Slave 29B Slave 28B Slave 27B Slave 26B Slave 25B Slave 24B 8 ... 13 Slave 8(A) Reserved The bits have the following meanings in the LPF data: Bit = 0: The slave signals no I/O fault. Bit = 1: The slave signals I/O fault. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 147 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.29 No. 40: Write_Parameter_String Meaning This command sends a parameter string in accordance with AS-i slave profile 7.4 to the AS-i master. The master forwards the parameter string to the AS-i slave address specified in the send buffer. This command transfers a send buffer with up to 223 bytes to the AS-i master. The AS-i master calculates the actual number of parameter bytes to be sent to the AS-i slave from byte 2 of the send buffer. The AS-i master does not evaluate any other information in the parameter string. It transfers this to the AS-i slave transparently. While transmission of the parameter string is being executed, there is no transfer of user data / analog data with the addressed AS-i slave. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 56 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 40H 1 Slave address 2 Number of parameter bytes 3 Parameter string byte 1 4 Parameter string byte 2 ... ... n+1 Parameter string byte n - 1 n+2 Parameter string byte n Maximum value for n = 220 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 148 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.30 No. 41: Read_String Meaning This command causes the AS-i slave to read a parameter string in accordance with ASi slave profile 7.4 with the AS-i slave address specified in the send buffer. The AS-i master supplies up to 221 bytes of response data. The AS-i master signals the actual number of parameter bytes sent by the AS-i slave in Byte 0 of the receive buffer. If the AS-i slave sends a parameter string longer than 220 bytes, the AS-i master aborts string transfer and terminates the job with an error. The received data is not made available to the job program. While transmission of the parameter string is being executed, there is no transfer of user data / analog data with the addressed AS-i slave. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 57 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 41H 1 Slave address Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Table 9- 58 Structure of the response data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning 0 Number of parameter bytes 1 Parameter string byte 1 2 Parameter string byte 2 ... ... n-1 Parameter string byte n - 1 n Parameter string byte n Maximum value for n = 220 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 149 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.31 No. 42: Read_String Meaning This command causes the AS-i slave to read an identification string in accordance with ASi slave profile 7.4 with the AS-i slave address specified in the send buffer. The AS-i master supplies up to 221 bytes of reply data. The AS-i master signals the actual number of ID bytes sent by the AS-i slave in Byte 0 of the receive buffer. If the AS-i slave sends an ID string longer than 220 bytes, the AS-i master aborts string transfer and terminates the job with an error. The received data is not made available to the user program. As long as the transmission of the identification string is running, there is no transfer of user/analog data with the addressed AS-i slave. Note In a deviation from normal procedure, this command also transfers the bytes that contain the bits "Follows" and "Valid". For further details, refer to AS-i slave profile 7.4 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 59 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: 42H 1 Slave address Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Table 9- 60 Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Byte Meaning 0 Number of ID bytes 1 ID string byte 1 2 ID string byte 2 ... ... n-1 ID string byte n - 1 n ID string byte n Maximum value for n = 220 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 150 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.32 No. 43: Read_String Significance This command causes the AS-i slave to read a diagnostics string in accordance with ASi slave profile 7.4 with the AS-i slave address specified in the send buffer. The AS-i master supplies up to 221 bytes of reply data. The AS-i master signals the actual number of diagnostics bytes sent by the AS-i slave in Byte 0 of the receive buffer. If the AS-i slave sends a diagnostics string longer than 220 bytes, the AS-i master aborts string transfer and terminates the job with an error. The received data is not made available to the user program. While transmission of the diagnostics string is being executed, there is no transfer of user data / analog data with the addressed AS-i slave. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 61 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Significance 0 Command number: 43H 1 Slave address Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Table 9- 62 Structure of the reply data in the receive buffer Byte Significance 0 Number of diagnostics bytes 1 Diagnostic string byte 1 2 Diagnostic string byte 2 ... ... n-1 Diagnostic string byte n - 1 n Diagnostic string byte n Maximum value for n = 220 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 151 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.33 No. CA: Read_Error_Counter Note With Firmware V1.1 or higher, use data record "DS 96 Read AS-i master error counters and status messages (FW V1.1 and higher) (Page 86)" for reading out the error counters. The Read_AS-i_Master_Error_Counters command continues to exist for compatibility reasons. Meaning This command reads out error counters that concern the overall AS-i network. If the AS-i power supply is missing, the overall device fails. This leads to all counters being reset. The counting starts over each time the device is powered up. For the meaning of the error counters, refer to Table "Table 8-11 Meaning of error counter (Page 86)". Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 63 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: CAH Structure of the responses in the receive buffer Table 9- 64 Byte 0 Structure of the data record Meaning Summation counter: AS-i Power Fail 1 2 Low byte Summation counter: Ground fault 3 4 High byte High byte Low byte Summation counter: Slave failure High word, high byte 5 High word, low byte 6 Low word, high byte 7 8 Low word, low byte Summation counter: Missing slave frame High word, high byte 9 High word, low byte 10 Low word, high byte 11 Low word, low byte AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 152 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte Meaning 12 Summation counter: Erroneous slave frame High word, high byte 13 High word, low byte 14 Low word, high byte 15 Low word, low byte 16 Summation counter: Slave peripheral fault High word, high byte 17 High word, low byte 18 Low word, high byte 19 Low word, low byte 20 Summation counter: Slave protocol error (for slaves according to CTT1 ... CTT5) High word, high byte 21 High word, low byte 22 Low word, high byte 23 Low word, low byte 24 Summation counter: Erroneous master frame High word, high byte 25 High word, low byte 26 Low word, high byte 27 Low word, low byte 28 ... 35 36 List of count values > 0 (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 Count value = 0 for all error counters of the AS-i address Bit = 1 Count value > 0 for at least one error counter of the AS-i address Summation counter: Sent master frames, less significant part (MT_CNT_LOW) High word, high byte 37 High word, low byte 38 Low word, high byte 39 40 Low word, low byte Summation counter: Sent master frames, more significant part (MT_CNT_HIGH) High word, high byte 41 High word, low byte 42 Low word, high byte 43 Low word, low byte 44 Summation counter: Sent master frames, factor (MT_CNT_BASE) High word, high byte 45 High word, low byte 46 Low word, high byte 47 Low word, low byte 48 Reserved 49 Bit 0 = MADDR Reserved 50 ... 57 List of multiple addressing (see Table "Structure of bit fields") Bit = 0 The AS-i address is assigned once or is not present. Bit = 1 The AS-i address is assigned more than once. 58 ... 220 Reserved The counters are integer values (2 bytes or 4 bytes). Multiple addressing has been detected for at least one AS-i address on the AS-i cable. This means that multiple slaves have the same AS-i address. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 153 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Structure of the bit fields Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE Reserved 7/7A 6/6A 5/5A 4/4A 3/3A 2/2A 1/1A 1 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 15/15A 14/14A 13/13A 12/12A 11/11A 10/10A 9/9A 8/8A 2 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 23/23A 22/22A 21/21A 20/20A 19/19A 18/18A 17/17A 16/16A 3 SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 31/31A 30/30A 29/29A 28/28A 27/27A 26/26A 25/25A 24/24A SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE Reserved 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 4 5 6 7 SLAVE AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 154 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.34 No. CB: Read_and_Delete_AS-i-Master_Error_Counter Note With Firmware V1.1 or higher, use data record "DS 97 Read and reset AS-i master error counters (FW V1.1 and higher) (Page 89)" for reading out the error counters. The Read_and_Reset_AS-i_Master_Error_Counters command continues to exist for compatibility reasons. Meaning This command functions like the "Read_AS-i-Master_Error_Counter" command. In addition, the AS-i master then sets all error counters to 0. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 65 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: CBH Structure of the responses in the receive buffer The receive buffer is identical to the receive buffer of the "No. CA: Read_Error_Counter (Page 152)" command. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 155 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.35 No. CC: Read_AS-i_error_counter Note With Firmware V1.1 or higher, use data records "DS 150 to DS 153 Read AS-i error counters (Page 89)". The Read_AS-i_Slave_Error_Counters command continues to exist for compatibility reasons. Meaning This command reads out AS-i slave-specific error counters. For the meaning of the error counters, refer to Section "Table 8-13 Meaning of error counter (Page 90)". Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 66 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: CCH 1 AS-i slave address Structure of the responses in the receive buffer Table 9- 67 Byte 0 Structure of the responses in the receive buffer Meaning Counter: Slave failure High byte 1 2 Low byte Counter: Missing slave frame High byte Counter: Faulty slave frame High byte 3 4 Low byte 5 6 Low byte Counter: Peripheral fault High byte 7 8 Low byte Counter: Protocol error High byte 9 10 Low byte Counter: Faulty master frame High byte Summation counter: Sent master frames, less significant part (MT_CNT_LOW) High word / high byte 11 12 Low byte 13 High word / low byte 14 Low word / high byte 15 Low word / low byte AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 156 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Byte 16 Meaning Summation counter: Sent master frames, more significant part (MT_CNT_HIGH) High word / high byte 17 High word / low byte 18 Low word / high byte 19 Low word / low byte 20 Summation counter: Sent master frames, factor (MT_CNT_BASE) High word / high byte 21 High word / low byte 22 Low word / high byte 23 Low word / low byte 24 ... 31 9.4.36 Reserved No. CD: Read_and_delete_AS-i_Slave_error_counter Note With Firmware V1.1 or higher, use data records "DS 150 to DS 153 Read AS-i error counters (Page 89)" and "DS 154 Delete AS-i error counters (from FW V1.1) (Page 96)". The Read_and_Reset_AS-i_Slave_Error_Counters command continues to exist for compatibility reasons. Meaning This command reads out the error counters of the AS-i slaves. Data records DS 150 and DS 151 access the standard addresses and the A addresses. Data records DS 152 and DS 153 access the B addresses. The counters for addresses 16 / 16A exist identically in data records DS 150 and DS 151. The counters for address 16B exist identically in data records DS 152 and DS 153. Data record DS 154 resets all AS-i slave error counters. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 68 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning 0 Command number: CDH 1 AS-i slave address Structure of the responses in the receive buffer The receive buffer is identical to the receive buffer of the "No. CC: Read_AS-i_error_counter (Page 156)" command. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 157 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.37 No. 13: Activate_ground fault detection (reset EFD) Meaning The setting for enabling the integrated ground fault detection is always made when configuring the CM AS-i Master. This command is used to enable or disable the ground fault detection via the user program so as to overwrite the configured setting. After a startup or restart, the configured setting is applied again. Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 69 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Command number 13H 0 0 = Ground fault detection is enabled 1 = Ground fault detection is disabled AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 158 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands 9.4.38 No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online Meaning The following configuration data for the addressed AS-i slave is configured with this command: IO code ID code ID1 code ID2 code Parameter value The configuration data is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM of the CM AS-i Master ST. The AS-i master uses this configuration data as the specified expected configuration for "protected operation". The configuration data are defined by the manufacturer of the ASi slave. The meaning of the configuration data is described in the "AS-Interface Complete Specification". If the addressed AS-i slave does not support an ID1 code or ID2 code, ID1 code = F (hex) and ID2 code = F (hex) must be used as the preset values. When this command is executed, the AS-i master remains in the online phase. This means that the ASi master is not restarted. The command can be executed in "Protected operation". The command can be executed for any slaves including proxy slaves. Ensure that you have defined an adequate length for the I/O image when configuring the slave. If the the I/O image for the slave is not long enough, surplus input data are truncated and surplus output data are transmitted with substitute value 0. This applies to a digital I/O image and an analog I/O image. If the value F (hex) is written to a proxy slave for all four codes (IO code, ID code, ID1 code and ID2 code), any slave type at this AS-i address is activated by the AS-i master. Note Configuration data are overwritten If you use this command, you will overwrite the corresponding configuration data that resulted from configuring using the "SET" button or configuring using HW Config. Note The configuration data for all proxy slaves can be reset to value F (hex) in the CM ASi Master ST module by configuring the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button with no slaves connected (see Section "Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button (Page 34)"). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 159 Using the command interface 9.4 Description of the AS-i commands Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 70 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Bit 0 Command: D0H 1 Slave address 2 IO code 3 ID1 code ID2 code 4 0 Parameter 9.4.39 ID code No. D1: AS-i-Slave_ID1_schreiben_mit_Zieladresse (Write ID1 code with destination address) Meaning This command writes the ID1 code of an AS-i slave with the specified address directly via the AS-i cable. The AS-i master forwards the ID1 code to the AS-i slave without a plausibility check. Requirements The AS-i slave at the target address must support writing of the ID1 code. There are no AS-i slaves on the AS-i bus with address "0". Structure of the job data in the send buffer Table 9- 71 Structure of the job data in the send buffer Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 Command: D1H 1 AS-i slave address 2 0 Bit 0 ID1 code AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 160 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Technical data 10.1 10 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support Technical data sheet You can also find the technical data of the product at Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15756/td). 1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the Enter key. 2. Click the "Technical data link. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 161 Technical data 10.1 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 162 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements A.1 A AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) PICS for the CM AS-i Master ST Vendor SIEMENS AG Product name CM AS-i Master ST Article number 3RK137-6SA00-0BC1 Firmware version V1.0, V1.1 Master profile M4 Date -- List of available master functions Character Meaning X Function available -- Function not available No. Function or command to the host interface (symbolic representation) M4 Remark / implementation of the function with 1 Image, Status = Read_IDI() X Through automation system access to the I/O data of the AS-i master 2 Status = Write_ODI(Image) X Through automation system access to the I/O data of the AS-i master 3 Status = Set_Permanent_Parameter (Addr, Param) X 4 Param, Status = Get_Permanent_Parameter (Addr) X See Section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)" 5 Status, Param = Write_Parameter (Addr, Param) X 6 Status, Param = Read_Parameter(Addr) X 7 Status = Store_Actual_Parameters() X 8 Status = Set_Permanent_Configuration (Addr, Config) X 9 Status, Config = Get_Permanent_Configuration (Addr) X 10 Status = Store_Actual_Configuration() X In STEP 7, in the control panel, by pressing the "ACTUAL CONFIGURED" button. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 163 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements A.1 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) No. Function or command to the host interface (symbolic representation) M4 Remark / implementation of the function with 11 Status, Config = Read_Actual_Configuration (Addr) X 12 Status = Set_LPS(List31) X See Section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)". 13 Status, LPS = Get_LPS() X 14 Status, LAS = Get_LAS() X 15 Status, LDS = Get_LDS() X 16.0 Status = Get_Flags() X 16.1 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Config_OK() X 16.2 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_LDS.0() X 16.3 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Auto_Address_Assign() X 16.4 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Auto_Prog_Available() X 16.5 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Configuration_Active() X 16.6 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Normal_Operation_Active() X 16.7 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_APF() X Access to data record 84. CP error bit, LED indication (see Section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)"). Access to data record 84. 16.8 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Offline_Ready() X Access to data record 84. 16.9 Status, Flag = Get_Flag_Periphery_OK() X 17 Status = Set_Operation_Mode(Mode) X By pressing the "Configuration mode" or "Protected operation" button in the control panel of STEP 7. 18 Status = Set_Offline_Mode(Mode) X See section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)" 19 Status = Activate_Data_Exchange(Mode) - Optional command; not implemented 20 Status = Change_Slave_Address (Addr1, Addr2) X 21.1 Status = Set_Auto_Address_Enable X See Section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)". 21.2 Status = Get_Auto_Address_Enable X 22.1 Status, Resp = Cmd_Reset_ASI_Slave (Addr, RESET) - 22.2 Status, Resp = Cmd_Read_IO_Configuration (Addr, CONF) X 22.3 Status, Resp = Cmd_Read_Identification_Code(Addr, IDCOD) X 22.4 Status, Resp = Cmd_Read_Status (Addr, STAT) X 22.5 Status, Resp = Cmd_Read_Reset_Status (Addr, STATRES) - Not relevant for AS-i master acc. to profile M4; not implemented 22.6 Status, Resp = Cmd_Read_ID-Code_1(Addr, IDCOD1) X Not implemented 22.7 Status, Resp = Cmd_Read_ID-Code_2(Addr, IDCOD2) X 23 Status, S_List = Get_LPF() X See Section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)". Access to data record 84. 24 Status = Write_ID-Code_11(S_ID-Code_1) X See Section "Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103)". Not implemented AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 164 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements A.1 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) No. Function or command to the host interface (symbolic representation) M4 Remark / implementation of the function with 25 AImage, Status = Read_AIDI() X 26 Status = Write_AODI(AImage) X See Section Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103). 27 String, Status = Read_ParamStr(S_Addr) X See "Read_Parameter_String" in Section Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103) 28 Status = Write_ParamStr(S_Addr, String) X See Section Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103) 29 String, Status = Read_DiagStr(S_Addr) X See Section Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103) 30 String, Status = Read_IdentStr(S_Addr) X See Section Description of the AS-i commands (Page 103) B Supported slave profiles Through automation system access to the I/O data of the AS-i master 1 Support of extended address mode X -- 2 Support of Combined transaction type 1 integrated (S-7.3 only) X -- 3 Full support of Combined transaction type 1 integrated X 4 Support of Combined transaction type 2 integrated X -- 5 Support of Combined transaction type 3 integrated X -- 6 Support of Combined transaction type 4 integrated X -- 7 Support of Combined transaction type 5 integrated X -- Support for profiles 7.3 and 7.4 only. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 165 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements A.1 AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 166 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Readme Open Source Software B.1 B Read_me OSS Note For Resellers In order to avoid infringements of the license conditions by the reseller or the buyer these instructions and license conditions and accompanying CD - if applicable - have to be forwarded to the buyers. License Conditions and Disclaimers for Open Source Software and other Licensed Software In the product "CM AS-i Master ST" (herinafter "Product"), the following Open Source Software is used either unchanged or in a form that we have modified, and additionally the other License Software noted below: Table B- 1 License Summary Component Open Source Software ("OSS) Copyright Information / File [Yes / No] Dinkumware C/C++ Library 5.01 NO LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT DINKUMWARE C/C++LIBRARY - 5.01 Liability for Open Source Software Open Source Software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the Product including Open Source Software contained in accordance with the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for use of Open Source Software beyond the program flow intened for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore, any liability for defects resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. Note We do not provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 167 Readme Open Source Software B.1 Read_me OSS Please note the following license conditions and copyright notices applicable to Open Source Software and other License Software: LICENSE CONDITIONS AND COPRIGHT NOTICE Commercial Software: Dinkumware C/C++ Library - 5.01 Enclosed you'll find the license conditions and copyright notes for Commercial Software Dinkumware C/C++ Library - 5.01. License conditions: Copyright (c) 1991 - 1999 Unicode, Inc. All Rights reserved. This file is provided as-is by Unicode, Inc. (The Unicode Consortium). No claims are made as to fitness for any particular purpose. No warranties of any kind are expressed or implied. The recipient agrees to determine applicabiliy of information provided. If this file has been provided on optical media by Unicode, Inc., the sole remedy for any claim will be exchange of defective media within 90 days of receipt. Unicode, Inc. hereby grants the right to freely use the information aupplied in this file in the creation of products supporting the Unicode Standard, and to make copies of this file in any form for internal or external distribution as long as this notice remains attached. (c) Copyright William E. Kempf 2001 Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. William E. Kempf makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Copyright (c) 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Permission to use, copy modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"; without express or implied warranty. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 168 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Readme Open Source Software B.1 Read_me OSS Copyrights: Copyright 1992 ... 2006 by p.j. plauger and jim brodie. all rights reserved. Copyright 1992 ... 2006 by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved.ip Copyright 1992 ... 2006 by p.j.plauger. portions derived from work copyright 1994 by hewettpackard company. all rights reserved Copyright 1992 ... 2006 by dinkumware, Itd. all rights reserved Copyright 1992 ... 2006 by dinkumware, Itd. portions derived from work copyright 2001 by william e. kempf. all rights reserved Copyright 1994 hewlettpackard company Copyright 1994 by hewlettpackard company Copyright william e. kempf 2001 Copyright 1989 ... 2006 by p.j.plauger. all rights reserved. Copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved Copyright(c) by dinumware, Itd. all rights reserved. Copyight (c) unicode, inc. all rights reserved. (c) copyright william e. kempf 2001 Copyright (c) hewlettpackard company Copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved. Copyright 2006 by dinkumware, Itd. Copyright (c) by p.j. plauger, licensed by dinkumware, Itd. all rights reserved. The dinkum cec++ library reference is copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. this code is protected by copyright. all rights reserved. The dinkum cc++ library reference is copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. this code is protected by copyright. all rights reserved. Dinkum compleat library, vc++ package (vc++ compilers only) the dinkum complete library and the dinkum compleat library reference are copyright (c) by p.j. plauger. all rights reserved. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 169 Readme Open Source Software B.1 Read_me OSS AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 170 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 C Data sets C.1 DS 100 Switch duplicate address detection on/off Description The duplicate address detection function can be activated/deactivated via the user program by means of write access to data record DS 100. For the CM AS-i Master firmware V1.0 the status is stored in the AS-i Master volatile memory, i.e. if the AS-i voltage fails, duplicate address detection is deactivated. For the CM AS-i Master firmware V1.0 and higher, duplicate address detection is adopted according to the setting in HW Config or GSD after failure of the AS-i voltage. Note From firmware V1.1 onwards use the setting option via HW Config or GSD to activate duplicate address detection. Data record DS 100 continues to exist for compatibility reasons. Table C- 1 Structure of DS 100 write Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 0 0 1 0 2 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0/1 3 0 Bit 0 = 0 Duplicate address detection is activated. = 1 Duplicate address detection is deactivated (default setting for FW V1.0). The setting for which AS-i voltage duplicate address detection is activated (possible for FW V1.1 and higher) cannot be changed in this case. See also Duplicate address detection (Page 76) AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 171 Data sets C.2 DS 100 Read setting for duplicate address detection C.2 DS 100 Read setting for duplicate address detection Description Via read access to data record DS 100 the enable status of duplicate address detection can be read back. Table C- 2 Structure of DS 100 read Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0...1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 0/1 Reserved Bit 0 = 0 Duplicate address detection is activated = 1 Duplicate address detection is deactivated (default setting for FW V1.0). The setting for which AS-i voltage duplicate address detection is activated (possible for FW V1.1 and higher) cannot be read out in this case. See also Duplicate address detection (Page 76) C.3 DS 101 Read version identifier Description This data record reads the version identifier. Table C- 3 Structure of data record DS 101 Byte Meaning Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 0...1 Reserved 2 ... 33 Version identifier as a string Siemens AG CM ASi M V01.00.00 1........1.........1.........1.. Bit 1 Bit 0 e. g.: AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 172 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 List of abbreviations D.1 D List of abbreviations Meaning of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning APF AS-i Power Fail (problem with the AS-i supply voltage) AS-i AS-Interface ATEX Atmosphere Explosive AUP Automatic address programming AWP Automation Web Pages CER Configuration error CBA Component Based Automation CDI Configuration Data Image CFGOK Configuration OK CM Configuration mode; Communication module Configuration mode activated CPU Central Processing Unit CTT Combined Transaction Type Glossary (Page 175) DIAG Diagnosis Diagnostics available DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normierung e. V. DP Distributed peripherals DS Data record/data set I/O Input/Output EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory EFD Ground fault detection EN Europaische Norm (European standard) FB Function Block FC Function Code GSD Device master data GSDML Generic Station Description Markup Language HSP Hardware support package HW Hardware HW ID Hardware identifier I&M Identification and Maintenance ID Identifier (Identification number, e.g., ID1 code) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 173 List of abbreviations D.1 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IO Input Output IP Ingress Protection (enclosure class) ISO International Organization for Standardization LAS List of Activated Slaves LDS List of Detected Slaves LED Light Emitting Diode LPF List of peripheral faults (list of peripheral faults signaled by the AS-i slaves) LPS List of configured AS-i slaves (list of "projected" slaves) MPO Master Power On NEC National Electrical Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association OB Organization block PIQ Process Image Output PII Process image input PCD Permanent Configuration Data PELV Protective extra low voltage PF Peripheral fault PI Parameter Image PP Permanent Parameter RDREC Read record SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage SIL Safety Integrity Level GF, CF System fault SFB System function block PLC Programmable logic controller SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol TIA Totally Integrated Automation USB Universal Serial Bus WRREC Write record AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 174 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Glossary "Protected operation" In "protected operation", the AS-i master only exchanges data with the configured AS-i slaves. "Configured" means that the slave addresses and configuration data stored in the AS-i master agree with the values of existing AS-i slaves. APF AS-i Power Fail. Flag or LED display that indicates that the supply voltage on the AS-i cable is too low or has failed, e.g., failure of the AS-i power supply unit. AS-i (AS-Interface) Actuator-Sensor-Interface. A networking system for the plant-floor automation layer. It is suitable for networking sensors and actuators with controllers. AS-i analog slave AS-i analog slaves are special AS-i standard slaves that exchange analog values with the AS-i master; see also CTT. AS-i master The AS-i master monitors and controls simple digital or analog sensors and actuators via AS-i modules or AS-i slaves. AS-i slave All devices that can be addressed by an AS-i master are referred to as AS-i slaves. ASi slaves are distinguished according to their design (AS-i modules as well as sensors or actuators with integrated AS-i connection) and their addressing type (AS-i slave with standard address in the range 0 ... 31 and AS-i slave with A/B address in the range 0, 1A ... 31A, 1B, 31B) or their functionality (standard slave for non-safety-related data transmission and ASIsafe slave for safety-related data). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 175 Glossary AS-i slave with A/B address AS-i slaves with A/B address use extended addressing. A (numerical) address can thus be used by two slaves with A/B address, e.g., 1A and 1B. Based on the address organization, up to 62 slaves with A/B address can be connected to the AS-Interface. For cyclic data transmission, the master accesses each (numerical) address once per AS-i cycle (max. 5 ms). If two slaves use a (numerical) address on the bus both as an A address and a B address, two consecutive AS-i cycles are required for their data transmission (max. 10 ms rms). If a (numerical) address is used only as an A address or as a B address on the bus, the data transmission for these slaves occurs in every AS-i cycle. AS-i slave with standard address Each AS-i slave with standard address occupies one address on the AS-Interface; based on the address organization, up to 31 AS-i slaves with standard address can therefore be connected to the AS-Interface. If a slave with standard address occupies an address, this address is no longer available for slaves with A/B address. For cyclic data transmission, the master accesses each address once per AS-i cycle (max. 5 ms). CER Configuration Error (Indication of configuration errors). The configuration error is indicated by an LED if the actual bus configuration does not match the specified configuration. CM Communication module Module for communication tasks that is used in an automation system as an interface expansion for the CPU. CPU Central Processing Unit AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 176 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Glossary CTT Combined Transaction Type. Special AS-i slave profile: CTT slaves require several AS-i cycles or several AS-i addresses for updating process data between an AS-I slave and AS-i master. The following CTT variants are defined: CTT1: Slave profiles S-7.3, S-7.4 For cyclic data transmission of analog values or transparent data (up to 16 bits per channel). Depending on the slave, the data transmission is in the direction of the input or output. The S-7.1 and S-7.2 profiles are outdated profiles that are not managed automatically by the AS-i master (function blocks are required for decoding the process data). CTT2: Slave profiles S-7.5.5, S-7.A.5, S-B.A.5 For transmission of data blocks similar to data record transmission in PROFIBUS/PROFINET. The transmission can be initiated individually via the user program (acyclically, see "CTT2Request_lesen_schreiben (Read_Write_CTT2_String)") or automatically by the master (cyclically, same as for analog values). Refer to the slave documentation. The transmission process is managed automatically by the master and corresponds to a serial data transmission with approximately 12 bytes (or 6 bytes for A/B address with maximum configuration). Depending on the slave, in parallel to the data block transmission, digital data of up to 2 DI / DO are also transmitted per AS-i cycle (5 ms or 10 ms for A/B address with maximum configuration). CTT3: Slave profiles S-7.A.7, S-7.A.A For cyclic transmission of digital data. Slave profile S-7.A.7 transmits 4 DI / 4 DO using a slave with A/B address. Like for standard slaves, the inputs are transmitted in each AS-i cycle (5 ms or 10 ms for A/B address with maximum configuration). The outputs require double the transmission time. Slave profile S-7.A.A transmits 8 DI / 8 DO using a slave with A/B address. The inputs and outputs are transmitted using four AS-i cycles. CTT4: Slave profiles S-7.A.8, S-7.A.9 For cyclic transmission of analog values or transparent data (up to 16 bits per channel) in the input direction using a slave with A/B address. Depending on the slave, in parallel to the data block transmission, digital data of up to 1 DO can also be transmitted per AS-i cycle (5 ms or 10 ms for A/B address with maximum configuration). CTT5: Slave profile S-6.0.x, where x = 2 ... 7, A ... C For cyclic transmission of analog values or transparent data (up to 16 bits) in the input and output direction. The CTT5 types each occupy 2, 3, or 4 slave addresses simultaneously, depending on the data record, so that consistent transmission of the full data width occurs in each AS-i cycle (5 ms). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 177 Glossary DIAG Diagnosis EFD Ground fault detection GSD file Generic station description file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET devices GSDML file GSD file for PROFINET devices. As a generic station description, this file contains all of the properties of a PROFINET device necessary for its configuration. HSP The Hardware Support Package supplements the hardware catalog of STEP 7. ID code Fixed identification code saved in the AS-i slave; part of the slave profile. See also: Slave profile ID1 code Also called: Extended ID1 code Fixed or editable identification code saved in the AS-i slave. See also: Slave profile ID2 code Also called: Extended ID2 code Fixed identification code saved in the AS-i slave; part of the slave profile. See also: Slave profile Inspector window The inspector window of STEP 7 / TIA Portal displays additional information about a selected object or executed actions. The indicated properties and parameters of the selected object can be edited within the inspector window. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 178 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Glossary IO code Also called: I/O configuration Fixed identification code saved in the AS-i slave; part of the slave profile. See also: Slave profile LAS List of Activated Slaves LDS List of Detected Slaves LED A light-emitting diode that is used to display the signal status. LPF List of periphery faults This list in the AS-i master designates the status of the peripheral fault of the activated slaves. LPS List of Projected Slave (list of configured slaves) Nibble A nibble is a unit of information that comprises four bits. Option handling Option handling allows the user program to activate optional functions during normal operation without the need for reconfiguration. PF Peripheral fault: Error message of an active AS-i slave to the master, e.g., overload at output (depending on slave, see documentation of the AS-i slave). AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 179 Glossary Slave profile The slave profile classifies the basic properties of an AS-i slave. The slave profile consists of the IO code, ID code, and ID2 code, which are stored as fixed, uneditable codes in each slave. In addition, a slave has an ID1 code, which is saved in the slave as a fixed code or a code that is editable by the user (e.g., with an addressing device). The value of the ID1 code usually has no effect on the operating characteristics of the slave. In this case, the user should not change the value, so that compatibility problems do not occur if the device is replaced. Note the documentation of the slave for the ID1 setting. Each of the four identification codes consists of a 4-bit value that is usually written in hexadecimal notation with a value range of 0 to F. On power-up, the AS-i master reads the codes automatically from each slave and saves this ACTUAL configuration in the volatile memory of the AS-i master. If the AS-i master is in "protected operation", it compares the ACTUAL configuration with a CONFIGURED configuration, which is normally stored in non-volatile memory in the AS-i master. Slaves whose ACTUAL configuration matches the CONFIGURED configuration are activated and then participate in the cyclic data exchange. Slaves without a match are not activated and do not exchange cyclic data. A configuration error is also signaled. ID2 and ID1 are optional codes. That is, some slaves do not have these two codes. In this case, the master enters the hexadecimal value "F" as a substitute value in the ACTUAL configuration. Slaves with extended addressing, the so-called A/B slaves, use only the three less significant bits of the ID1 code as the slave identification. The most significant bit of the ID1 code is reserved and is used by the AS-i system to distinguish between an A address or B address. The effective value range of the ID1 code is thus 0 ... 7. For the read-out of the ID code, only the 3 less significant bits or all 4 bits are displayed, depending on the system, so that the displayed ID1 code can be within the value range 8 to F for slaves with B address. The user or programmer can ignore the most significant bit of the ID1 code for A/B slaves since it is managed automatically by the system. The slave profile is usually shown in the documentation with the S prefix and a hyphen (in some cases), followed by the IO, ID, and ID2 codes, each separated by a dot. Example: S-7.0.F Since the ID1 code is usually editable, the value is often not documented or documented only as a default value. AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 180 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Index Automatic ID1 code assignment, 43, 44 " "CM" LED, 34 "SET" button, 26, 31, 34 "SET1" terminal, 26, 34 "SET2" terminal, 26, 34 2 2I/2O module, 54 A A/B slave, 33 Accessories, 18 Activate slaves configured as optional on the AS-i bus, 40 Acyclic data record communication, 17 Acyclic services, 102 Ambient temperature range Reduced, 27 Analog channel, 58 Analog data transfer, 148, 149 Analog I/O value, 17 Analog input, 59 Analog output, 59 Analog slave, 59 Analog value, 58 AS-i cable error, 43, 44 AS-i command, 98 AS-i configuration error, 43, 44 AS-i F Slave Universal, 33 AS-i master Basic configuration, 30 AS-i network, 31 AS-i output, 55 AS-i Power Fail, 87, 152 AS-i slave Configuration, 34 Configuring, 35 Profile identification, 34 AS-i slave address Structure, 106 AS-i Standard Slave Universal,, 33 Asynchronous read access, 100 Automatic address programming, 43, 44 B BaseUnits, 16, 28 Basic configuration of the AS-i master, 30 Basic information, 11 Bus cycle time, 90 Button contact, 34 C Combined transaction type slave, 57 Command interface, 17 Configuration, 29, 31 Options, 19 Configuration button, 17 Configuration data, 31, 112 Configuration mode, 19, 34, 37, 38, 119, 137, 164 Configuration of the AS-i slaves, 30 Configuration software, 29 Configuring, 34 Cyclic data exchange, 124 Cyclic data transfer, 142 Cyclic process image, 17 Cyclic services, 99 D Data decoupling, 28 Deactivate slaves configured as optional on the AS-i bus, 40 Device information, 11 Device type, 33 Diagnostic interrupt in case of AS-i cable fault, 43, 44 Diagnostic interrupt in case of errors in AS-i configuration, 43, 44 Diagnostic status of the slaves, 31 Digital I/O value, 17 Digital process data, 19 Digital value, 99 Duplicate address detection, 43, 44 Read status, 172 Switch off, 171 Switch on, 171 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 181 Index E N End bit error, 121 Error counter, 89 ET 200SP Assigning parameters, 29 Configuring, 29, 29 Negative polarity, 26 Network view, 31 O FB ASI_CTRL, 100 Firmware update, 17 OB 82, 69 Operating parameters, 30 Operational voltage, 28 Option handling, 39, 41 Output byte, 54 G P General information, 11 Ground fault, 87, 152 Ground-fault monitoring activated, 43, 44 GSD file, 29, 30, 31, 43 Parameter string, 148, 149 Parity error, 121 PELV, 28 Peripheral fault, 121, 124, 147, 153 PLC program, 31 Pollution degree 2, 13 Positive polarity, 26 Process data, 90 Process image, 17, 30, 45, 45 Cyclic, 30 flexibly, 45 Reducing, 45 PROFIBUS, 29 PROFINET, 29 Protected operation, 19, 31, 34, 37, 85, 112, 114, 116, 119, 124, 131, 164 Protective Extra-Low Voltage, 28 Protocol error, 87, 102, 153 Proxy slave, 33, 42 F H Hardware support package, 29 HSP, 29 I I&M identification data, 17 I/O address, 31 I/O address space, 16 I/O assignment of the slave, 34 I/O data, 54, 163 I/O fault, 85, 87 I/O module, 29 Input byte, 54 Input process image, 55 Interface module, 29 IO code, 119, 131, 146 L Labeling strips, 18 LDS, 85, 124 Limited Power Source, 14 LPF, 147 LPS, 14, 119 LPS data, 116 R Rated voltage, 14 Read access Asynchronous, 100 Read status of option handling, 41 Reference identification label, 18 Residual ripple, 28 Return value, 102 S Safety Extra-Low Voltage, 14 Safety input slave, 55 SELV, 14, 28 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 182 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Index Server module, 29 Siemens AS-i slave, 33 Slave configuration, 38 Slave diagnostics, 82 Slave failure, 87, 152 Slave parameters, 33 Slave profile, 33, 38 Startup detection, 100 Status evaluation, 99 Status information, 99 Status nibble, 98, 99 Status register, 121 String transfer, 102, 149 Supported power supply units, 28 T Technical properties, 17 Terminal assignment, 26 Transient disturbance, 14 U Universal AS-i Slave, 34 Universal slave, 33 User data transfer, 148, 149 User program, 31 AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 183 Index AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) 184 Manual, 07/2017, A5E02655262020A/RS-AD/004 Digital input module ___________________ Preface F-DI 8x24VDC HF 1 ___________________ Documentation guide (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Applications of the F-I/O 5 ___________________ module Interrupts/diagnostic 6 ___________________ messages 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Response times 07/2013 A5E03858068-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03858068-01 08/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. General functions of the ET 200SP are described in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). The information provided in this device manual and the system manual enables you to commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Note the following identified notes: Note A note includes important information on the product described in the documentation, on handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which you ought to pay special attention. Security information Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous development. We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with respect to our product updates. Please find further information and newsletters on this subject at: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine it is also necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or machine. Any third-party products that may be in use must also be taken into account. Please find further information at: (http://support.automation.siemens.com) Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 3 Preface Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 4 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 1.1 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 4 5 Documentation guide for the F-DI 8x24VDC HF digital input module ...........................................7 Properties of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF .............................................................................................. 9 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 13 3.1 Terminal assignment ....................................................................................................................13 3.2 Block diagram ..............................................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15 4.1 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................15 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.2 4.2.3.3 4.2.3.4 4.2.3.5 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.4 4.2.4.5 Explanation of parameters ...........................................................................................................18 F-parameters................................................................................................................................18 Parameters of the sensor supply .................................................................................................18 Short circuit test ...........................................................................................................................18 Time for short circuit test ..............................................................................................................19 Startup time of sensors after short circuit test .............................................................................19 Parameters of the channel pairs ..................................................................................................20 Activated ......................................................................................................................................20 Sensor evaluation ........................................................................................................................20 Discrepancy behavior ..................................................................................................................21 Discrepancy time..........................................................................................................................22 Reintegration after discrepancy error...........................................................................................23 Parameters of the channels .........................................................................................................24 Sensor supply ..............................................................................................................................24 Input delay ....................................................................................................................................24 Pulse extension ............................................................................................................................25 Chatter monitoring .......................................................................................................................25 Monitoring window .......................................................................................................................26 4.3 Address space .............................................................................................................................27 Applications of the F-I/O module ........................................................................................................... 29 5.1 Applications of the electronic module ..........................................................................................29 5.2 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd .................................................................................31 5.3 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe .................................................................................34 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe .................................................................................36 Use case 3.1 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) ....................................................................................................38 Use case 3.2 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) ....................................................................................................40 Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 5 Table of contents 6 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 43 6.1 Status and error display .............................................................................................................. 43 6.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 45 6.3 Diagnostic messages .................................................................................................................. 47 6.4 Value status ................................................................................................................................ 52 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 53 A Response times .................................................................................................................................... 57 Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 6 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 1 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation guide for the F-DI 8x24VDC HF digital input module Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular design and includes topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation of the ET 200SP system consists of different modules divided into system manuals, function manuals and manuals. The STEP 7 (online help) information system supports you in configuring and programming your automation system. Overview of documentation for the fail-safe digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF The table below lists additional documents that complement this description of the fail-safe digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF and are available on the Internet. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the fail-safe digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF Topic Documentation Description of the system System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58649293) Most important contents * Application planning * Installation * Connecting * Commissioning * Approvals * TUV certificate BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Technical specifications Description of the SIMATIC Safety F-system Programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/54110126) * Configuring * Programming * Approvals SIMATIC manuals The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) for free download. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 7 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation guide for the F-DI 8x24VDC HF digital input module Functional Safety Services Siemens Functional Safety Services support you with a comprehensive package of services from risk assessment to verification all the way to plant commissioning and modernization. We also offer consultation on the use of fail-safe and fault-tolerant SIMATIC S7 automation systems. You will find more detailed information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/safety-services). Please send your questions to us by e-mail (mailto:safety-services.industry@siemens.com). Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 8 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Order number 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF module Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Properties Technical properties - Fail-safe digital module - 8 inputs (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) - 8 outputs for sensor supply - Use of various interconnection types (1oo1, 1oo2) is possible - Supply voltage L+ - Sink input (P-reading) - Suitable for connection of 3/4-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1 - Channel-specific assignable input delay 0.4 ms to 20 ms - Internal short circuit proof sensor supplies for each input - External sensor supply possible - Diagnostic display (DIAG red/green LED) - Status display for each input (green LED) - Error display for each input (red LED) - Diagnostics, e.g., short circuit/wire break, channel-specific - Diagnostics, e.g., load voltage missing, module-specific - Channel-specific or passivation throughout the module Supported functions - Firmware update - I&M identification data - PROFIsafe WARNING The fail-safe performance characteristics in the technical specifications apply to a proof-test interval of 20 years and a mean time to repair of 100 hours. If a repair within 100 hours is not possible, remove the respective module from the BaseUnit or switch off its supply voltage before 100 hours expires. The module switches off independently after the 100 hours have expired. Follow the repair procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 47). Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 10 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Accessories The following accessories, which are not included in the product package of the F-module, can be used with the F-module: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connection Additional information on accessories can be found in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 12 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 3 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment for F-DI 8x24VDC HF Terminal assignment for F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 1 Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Description 1 DI0 2 DI1 * DIn: Input signal, channel n 3 DI2 4 DI3 * 5 DI4 6 DI5 VSn: Internal sensor supply, channel n 7 DI6 8 DI7 9 VS0 10 VS1 11 VS2 12 VS3 13 VS4 14 VS5 15 VS6 16 VS7 L+ DC24V M M BaseUnit1 Color identification label (terminals 1 to 16) A0 CC01 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0 Usable BaseUnit types can be identified by the last two digits of their order number. See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O Systemsystem manual Note The first BaseUnit must be a light BaseUnit. Note Make sure that you only use digital modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 13 Connecting 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 14 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters WARNING Diagnostic functions should be activated or deactivated in accordance with the application. Table 4- 1 Parameters for F-DI 8x24VDC HF Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope F-parameters: Manual assignment of the F-monitoring time * disable * enable no Module F-monitoring time 1 to 65535 ms no Module F-source address 1 to 65534 no Module F-destination address 1 to 65534 no Module F-parameter signature (without address) 0 to 65535 no Module Behavior after channel faults no Module no Module F-I/O DB manual number assignment * Passivate entire module * Passivate channel * disable * enable F-I/O DB number -- no Module F-I/O DB name -- no Module no Channel DI parameters: Sensor supply Short circuit test * disable * enable Time for short circuit test 0.5 ms to 2 s no Channel Startup time of the sensors after short circuit test 0.5 ms to 2 s no Channel Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 15 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Channel parameters Channel n, n+4 Sensor evaluation Discrepancy behavior * 1oo1 evaluation * 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent * 1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent * Supply 0 value * Supply last valid value Discrepancy time 5 ms to 30 s Reintegration after discrepancy error * Test 0-signal not necessary * Test 0-signal necessary * enable * disable * Sensor supply 0 to 7 * External sensor supply * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 6.4 ms * 10.0 ms * 12.8 ms no Channel pair no Channel pair no Channel pair no Channel pair no Channel no Channel no Channel no Channel Channel n Activated Sensor supply Input delay * 20 ms The provided value range depends on the parameter assignment of the employed sensor supply. Pulse extension * -- * 0.5 s * 1s * 2s Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 16 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Chatter monitoring activated Value range * disable * enable Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope no Channel Number of signal changes 2 to 31 no Channel Monitoring window 0 to 100 s (If 0 s is configured, the monitoring window is 0.5 s long.) no Channel Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 F-parameters F-parameters Information on F-parameters is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. 4.2.2 Parameters of the sensor supply 4.2.2.1 Short circuit test Here you enable the short-circuit detection for the channels of the F-module for which "Internal sensor supply" is set. The short-circuit test is only useful if you are using simple switches that do not have their own power supply. For switches with power supply, for example, 3/4-wire proximity switches, a short-circuit test is not possible. The short-circuit detection switches off the sensor supply briefly. The length of the deactivation period is equivalent to the configured "Time for sensor test". If a short-circuit is detected, the F-module triggers a diagnostic interrupt and the input is passivated. The following short-circuits are detected: Short-circuit of input to L+ Short-circuit of the input of another channel when it has a 1 signal Short-circuit between the input and sensor supply of another channel Short-circuit between the sensor supply and the sensor supply of another channel If the short-circuit test is disabled, you must make your wiring short-circuit and cross-circuit proof or select a connection type (discrepancy, non-equivalent) which also detect the crosscircuits using discrepancy. During the execution time (Time for sensor test + Startup time of sensor after sensor test) of the short circuit test, the last valid value of the input before the start of the short circuit test is passed to the F-CPU. The activation of the short-circuit test thus affects the response time of the respective channel or channel pair. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 18 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.2.2 Time for short circuit test Function When the short-circuit test is enabled, the corresponding sensor supply is switched off for the configured time. If the module does not detect a "0" signal at the input within the assigned time, a diagnostic message is generated. When assigning parameters, note that If the channel is passivated, this may be due to too high capacitance between sensor supply and input. This consists of the capacitance per unit length of the cable and the capacitance of the employed sensor. If the connected capacitance does not discharge within the assigned time, you need to adjust the "Time for sensor test" parameter. The values available for the input delay depend on the "Ramp-up time of the sensor after short-circuit test" and the "Time for short-circuit test" of the configured sensor supply. 4.2.2.3 Startup time of sensors after short circuit test Function In addition to the off time ("Time for sensor test"), a startup time must be specified for performing the short circuit test. You use this parameter to notify the module how long the utilized sensor needs to start up after connecting the sensor supply. This prevents an undefined input state due to transient reactions in the sensor. When assigning parameters, note that This parameter must be greater than the transient recovery time of the employed sensor. Because the assigned time affects the response time of the module, we recommend that you set the time as short as possible but long enough so that your sensor can settle safely. The values available for the input delay depend on the "Ramp-up time of the sensor after short-circuit test" and the "Time for short-circuit test" of the configured sensor supply. Requirement The short circuit test is enabled. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.3 Parameters of the channel pairs 4.2.3.1 Activated You hereby enable the corresponding channel for signal processing in the safety program. 4.2.3.2 Sensor evaluation Overview Select the type of sensor evaluation with the "Evaluation of the sensors" parameter: 1oo1 evaluation 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent 1oo2 evaluation, non-equivalent 1oo1 evaluation The sensor is available once for 1oo1 evaluation. 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent/non-equivalent With a 1oo2 evaluation equivalent/non-equivalent, two input channels are occupied by: One two-channel sensor Two single-channel sensors One non-equivalent sensor The input signals are compared internally for equivalence or non equivalence. Note that in 1oo2 evaluation, two channels are combined into a channel pair. The number of available process signals of the F-module is reduced accordingly. Discrepancy analysis When using a two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors which measure the same process variable, the sensors interact with a slight time delay due to the limited precision of their arrangement. The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non equivalence is used for fail-safe applications to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input signals (when testing for non equivalence: the same levels). A check is made to determine whether the difference in levels (when testing for non equivalence: the same levels) has disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this means that a discrepancy error exists. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 20 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.3.3 Discrepancy behavior Function For the "Discrepancy behavior", you assign the value that is supplied to the safety program in the F-CPU during a discrepancy between two relevant input channels, which means while discrepancy time is running. You assign the discrepancy behavior as follows: "Supply last valid value" "Supply value 0" Requirements You have assigned the following: "Evaluation of the sensors": "1oo2 evaluation, equivalent" or "1oo2 evaluation, nonequivalent" "Supply last valid value" The most recent valid value (old value) before the discrepancy occurred is made available to the safety program in the F-CPU as soon as a discrepancy is detected between the signals of the two affected input channels. This value is supplied until the discrepancy disappears or the discrepancy time expires and a discrepancy error is detected. The sensor-actuator response time is correspondingly increased by this time. This means the discrepancy time of connected sensors with 1oo2 evaluation must be adjusted to fast response times. It makes no sense, for example, if connected sensors with a discrepancy time of 500 ms trigger a time-critical shutdown.. In the worst-case scenario, the sensor-actuator response time is extended by an amount approximately equal to the discrepancy time: For this reason, position the sensors in the process in such a way as to minimize discrepancy. Then select the shortest possible discrepancy time which is also sufficient to compensate for faulty triggering of discrepancy errors. "Supply value 0" As soon as a discrepancy between the signals of the two relevant input channels is detected, the value "0" is made available to the safety program in the F-CPU. If you have set "Supply value 0", the sensor-actuator response time is not affected by the discrepancy time. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.3.4 Discrepancy time Function You can set the discrepancy time for each channel pair. Requirements You have assigned the following: "Evaluation of the sensors": "1oo2 evaluation, equivalent" or "1oo2 evaluation, nonequivalent" In most cases, a discrepancy time is started, but does not fully expire because the signal differences are cleared within a short time. Set the discrepancy time high enough that in the error-free case the difference between the two signals (when testing for non equivalence: the same levels) has always disappeared before the discrepancy time has expired. Behavior while discrepancy time is running While the programmed discrepancy time is running internally on the module, either the last valid value or "0" is returned to the safety program on the F-CPU by the input channels involved, depending on the parameter settings for the behavior at discrepancy. Behavior after expiration of the discrepancy time If no agreement (when checking for non equivalence: inequality) of the input signals exists once the assigned discrepancy time expires, for example, due to a break in a sensor wire, a discrepancy error is detected and the "Discrepancy error" diagnostic message containing information on which channels are faulty is generated. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 22 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.3.5 Reintegration after discrepancy error Function This parameter specifies the criteria for when a discrepancy error is regarded as corrected, thus enabling reintegration of the relevant input channels. The following parameter assignment options are available: "Test 0-signal necessary" "Test 0-signal not necessary" Requirements You have assigned the following: "Sensor evaluation": "1oo2 evaluation, equivalent" or "1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent" "Test 0-signal necessary" If you have assigned "Test 0-signal necessary", a discrepancy error is not regarded as corrected until a 0-signal is present at both of the relevant input channels. If you are using non equivalent sensors, which means you have set "Sensor evaluation" to "1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent", a 0-signal must be present again at the low order channel of the channel pair. "Test 0-signal not necessary" If you have assigned "Test 0-Signal not necessary", a discrepancy error is regarded as corrected when a discrepancy no longer exists at both of the relevant input channels. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 23 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4 Parameters of the channels 4.2.4.1 Sensor supply Here you select one of the internal sensor supplies VS0 to VSn or an external sensor supply. The selection of an internal sensor supply is required for using the short circuit test. See also Time for short circuit test (Page 19) 4.2.4.2 Input delay Function To suppress stray interference, you can set an input delay for the entire channel or channel pair. Interference pulses whose pulse time is less than the set input delay (in ms) are suppressed. Suppressed interference pulses are invisible in the PII. A high input delay suppresses longer interference pulses, but results in a longer response time. The values available for the input delay depend on the "Startup time of sensors after short circuit test" and the "Time for short circuit test" of the configured sensor supply. Note Due to the physical properties, there is a possibility of crosstalk between signals in the case of long, unshielded signal lines (see section "Electromagnetic compatibility" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Adapt the input delay or use shielded signal lines in order to prevent possible passivation of the fail-safe digital inputs and switch-off of the sensor supply. See also Technical specifications (Page 53) Response times (Page 57) Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 24 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4.3 Pulse extension Function Pulse extension is a function to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input is extended to at least the assigned length. If the input pulse is already longer than the assigned length, the pulse is not changed. The fail-safe electronic module only lengthens pulses with the value "0" because the basis of the safety concept is that there is a safe state for all process variables. For digital F-I/O, this is the value "0", which applies to sensors as well as to actuators. With 1oo2 evaluation, the result of the evaluation of both sensors is used for the pulse extension. 4.2.4.4 Chatter monitoring Function Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports unusual signal sequences in the process with 1oo1 evaluation, for example, an input signal fluctuating between "0" and "1" too frequently. The occurrence of such signal characteristics is an indication of faulty sensors or process control instability. Recognizing unusual signal patterns An assigned monitoring window is available for each input channel. The monitoring window starts with the first signal change of the input signal. If the input signal changes within the monitoring window at least as often as the assigned "Number of signal changes", a chatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the next signal change restarts the monitoring window. If a chatter error is detected, a diagnostic is signaled. If the chatter error does not occur for the monitoring window for three times the configured period, the diagnostic is reset. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Principle The figure below shows the principle of chatter monitoring as a graphic. Figure 4-1 Figure chatter monitoring Number of signal changes Sets the number of signal changes after which a chatter error should be reported. 4.2.4.5 Monitoring window Sets the time for the monitoring window of flutter monitoring. You can set times of 1 s to 100 s in whole seconds for the monitoring window. You can configure a monitoring window of 0.5 s when you set 0 s. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 26 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space Address assignment of the digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF The digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF occupies the following address areas in the FCPU: Table 4- 2 Address assignment in the F-CPU Occupied bytes in the F-CPU: In input range In output range x + 0 to x + 5 x + 0 to x + 3 x = Module start address Address assignment of the user data and the value status of digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF The user data occupy the following addresses in the F-CPU out of all the assigned addresses of the digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF: Table 4- 3 Byte in the F-CPU Address assignment through user data Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x+0 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 x+1 Value status for DI7 Value status for DI6 Value status for DI5 Value status for DI4 Value status for DI3 Value status for DI2 Value status for DI1 Value status for DI0 x = Module start address Note You may only access the addresses occupied by user data and value status. The other address areas occupied by the F-modules are assigned for functions including safety-related communication between the F-modules and F-CPU in accordance with PROFIsafe. 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors combines the two channels. With 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors you may only access the low order channel in the safety program. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 27 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Additional information For detailed information about F-I/O access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. See also Value status (Page 52) Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 28 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 5 Applications of the electronic module Selecting the application The diagram below supports you in selecting the application that suits your fail-safe requirements. In the following sections, you will learn how to wire the F-module, the specific parameters you must assign in STEP 7 Safety and the errors that are detected. Figure 5-1 Selecting the application - digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF WARNING The achievable safety class depends on the quality of the sensor and the duration of the proof-test interval in accordance with IEC 61508:2010. If the quality of the sensor is lower than the quality required by the safety class, redundant sensors connected via two channels must be used and evaluated. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 29 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Applications of the electronic module Conditions for achieving SIL/Cat./PL The table below lists the conditions which have to be met for achieving at least the corresponding safety requirements. Table 5- 1 Conditions for achieving SIL/Cat./PL Application Sensor evaluation Sensor supply Achievable SIL/Cat./PL 1 2 1oo1 Any 3/3/d 1oo2 equivalent Internal, without short circuit test 3/3/e 3.1 1oo2 equivalent Internal, with short circuit test 3.2 1oo2 non-equivalent External/internal, with short circuit test External 3/4/e Note You can operate the various inputs of an F-DI module simultaneously in SIL3/Cat.3/PLd and in SIL3/Cat.3 or Cat.4/PLe. You only have to interconnect the inputs and assign parameters as described in the following sections. Sensor requirements Information on safety-related use of sensors is available in the section Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 30 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd 5.2 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). Sensor supply The sensor supply can be powered internally or externally. Wiring diagram - connecting one sensor via one channel One sensor is connected via one channel (1oo1 evaluation) for each process signal. Any sensor supply of the module can be assigned to each input. Figure 5-2 One sensor connected via one channel, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-3 One sensor connected via one channel, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLd using this wiring, you must use a qualified sensor. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 31 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 2 Parameter assignment Parameter Channel with internal sensor supply Sensor evaluation 1oo1 evaluation Short circuit test * disable * enable * Sensor supply n * External sensor supply Sensor supply Channel with external sensor supply disable External sensor supply* *) Otherwise a diagnostic message will be generated when short circuit test is activated. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 32 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 3 Fault detection Fault Fault detection Internal sensor supply and short circuit test activated Internal sensor supply and short circuit test deactivated External sensor supply yes* no no Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes no no Short circuit with M to DIn yes* yes* no Discrepancy error -- -- -- Short circuit with L+ to VSn yes no -- Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes yes -- Short circuit of the input with other channels or other sensor supplies (short circuit with other channels is detected only if they use a different sensor supply) *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal. If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. WARNING If the short circuit test is not activated or the sensor supply to digital inputs is set to "External sensor supply", the cable must be routed short circuit proof. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 33 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe 5.3 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe Assigning inputs to each other The digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF has 8 fail-safe inputs, DI0 to DI7 (SIL3). You can combine two of these inputs each to one input. You can combine the following inputs: DI0 and DI4 DI1 and DI5 DI2 and DI6 DI3 and DI7 The process signals are provided by channels DI0, DI1, DI2 and DI3. Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). Sensor supply The sensor supply can be powered internally or externally. Wiring diagram - connecting a two-channel sensor equivalent A two-channel sensor is connected equivalent to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Figure 5-4 One two-channel sensor connected via two channels, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-5 One two-channel sensor connected via two channels, external sensor supply Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 34 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe Wiring diagram - connecting two single-channel sensors via two channels Two single-channel sensors that capture the same process value are connected to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Figure 5-6 Two single-channel sensors connected via two channels, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-7 Two single-channel sensors connected via two channels, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLe using this wiring, you must use a qualified sensor. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 4 Parameter assignment Parameter Channel with internal sensor supply Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent Short circuit test * disable * enable Channel with external sensor supply disable Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 35 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 5 Fault detection Fault Fault detection Internal sensor supply and short circuit test deactivated External sensor supply no no Short circuit with other channels or other sensor supplies yes* yes Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes* yes* Short circuit with M to DIn yes* yes* Discrepancy error yes yes Short circuit with L+ to VSn no no Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes -- Short circuit within the channel pair *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal (discrepancy error). If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Assigning inputs to each other The digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF has 8 fail-safe inputs, DI0 to DI7 (SIL3). You can combine two of these inputs each to one input. You can combine the following inputs: DI0 with DI4 DI1 with DI5 DI2 with DI6 DI3 with DI7 The process signals are provided by channels DI0, DI1, DI2 and DI3. Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 36 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Sensor supply The sensor must be supplied internally by at least one channel for application 3.1. The sensor can be supplied internally or externally for application 3.2. Requirements for applications in machine protection with Cat.4 Both conditions must be met for applications in machine protection with Cat.4: The wiring between sensors and automation system and between automation system and actuators must be designed to state-of-the-art engineering and standards to prevent short circuits. The actuators must be wired as seen in sections Use case 3.1 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) (Page 38) or Use case 3.2 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) (Page 40). You only need to detect one short circuit because two faults are required to generate it. This means both signal cables in short circuit have an isolation fault. A multiple short circuit analysis is not required. Procedures for locating all short circuits are also permitted if single short circuits are not located. One of the two conditions must be met for this purpose: Short circuits may not corrupt the read signals compared to the sensor signals. Short circuits cause a corruption of the read signals compared to sensor signals in the direction that ensures safety. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 37 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe 5.4.1 Use case 3.1 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Wiring diagram - connecting a two-channel sensor via two channels A two-channel sensor is connected to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Supply the sensors from two different sensor supplies. Figure 5-8 One two-channel sensor connected via two channels, internal sensor supply You can also connect two single-channel sensors via two channels. In this case, the same process variable is acquired with two mechanically separate sensors. Figure 5-9 Two single-channel sensors connected via two channels, internal sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 6 Parameter assignment Parameter Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent Short circuit test enable Sensor supply * Sensor supply n (internally by at least one channel) * External Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 38 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 7 Fault detection Fault Short circuit within the channel pair, with other channels or other sensor supplies Fault detection yes* Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes* / yes (for channel whose short circuit test is activated) Short circuit with M to DIn yes* Discrepancy error yes Short circuit with L+ to VSn yes Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal (discrepancy error). If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 39 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe 5.4.2 Use case 3.2 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Wiring diagram - connecting a nonequivalent sensor A nonequivalent sensor is connected to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent). Figure 5-10 Nonequivalent sensor connected, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-11 Nonequivalent sensor connected, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 40 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Wiring diagram - connecting two single-channel sensors nonequivalent Two single-channel sensors are connected nonequivalent to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Figure 5-12 Two single-channel sensors connected nonequivalent, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-13 Two single-channel sensors connected nonequivalent, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 8 Parameter assignment Parameter Sensor evaluation Short circuit test Sensor supply 1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent * disable * enable * Sensor supply n * External sensor supply Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 41 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 9 Fault detection Fault Short circuit within the channel pair, with other channels or other sensor supplies Fault detection yes Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes* / yes (for channel whose short circuit test is activated) Short circuit with M to DIn yes* Discrepancy error yes Short circuit with L+ to VSn Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes, if used yes, if sensor supply is activated *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal (discrepancy error). If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 42 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 6 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green), channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 6-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostic messages can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 47). WARNING The DIAG LED and the channel status and channel fault LEDs of the inputs are not designed as safety-related LEDs and therefore may not be evaluated for safety-related activities. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 43 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display PWR LED Table 6- 1 Meaning of the PWR LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ available On DIAG LED Table 6- 2 Meaning of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not okay Off Module parameters not configured Flashing Module parameters configured and no module diagnostics On Module parameters configured and module diagnostics Flashing Channel status/channel fault LED Table 6- 3 Meaning of the channel status/channel fault LED Channel status Channel fault Meaning Process signal = 0 and no channel diagnostics Off Off Process signal = 1 and no channel diagnostics On Off Process signal = 0 and channel diagnostics Off On / Channel waiting for user acknowledgment Alternately flashing Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 44 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED Table 6- 4 Channel status Off Meaning of the channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED DIAG Flashin g Flashing Flashin g 6.2 Channel fault All On Off Meaning The PROFIsafe address does not match the configured PROFIsafe address Identification of the F-module when assigning the PROFIsafe address Interrupts Introduction The F-DI 8x24VDC HF fail-safe digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The F-module generates a diagnostic interrupt for each diagnostic message described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 47). The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic interrupts of the F-module . The diagnostic interrupts are assigned either to one channel or the entire F-module. Table 6- 5 Diagnostic interrupts of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Overtemperature 5D Parameter assignment error 16D Load voltage missing 17D Access to retentive storage of F-address not possible 30D Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D Invalid destination address (F_Dest_Add) 65D Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66D Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67D "F_SIL" parameter exceeds the application-specific SIL 68D "F_CRC_Length" parameter does not match the generated CRC 69D Signaled in application 1, 2, 3 Scope of diagnostic interrupt F-module Configurable No Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 45 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID 70D CRC1 error 71D Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D F_Block_ID not supported 76D Internal error 256D Time monitoring activated 259D Internal supply voltage of the module failed 260D Incorrect/inconsistent firmware present. Firmware update required 283D Discrepancy error, channel status 0/0 768D Discrepancy error, channel status 0/1 769D Discrepancy error, channel status 1/0 770D Discrepancy error, channel status 1/1 771D Input signal could not be clearly detected 773D Short circuit of internal sensor supply to L+ 774D Overload or short circuit of internal sensor supply to ground 775D No pulse detected 778D Sensor signal chatters 784D Signaled in application 2, 3 Scope of diagnostic interrupt Configurable Channel 1, 2, 3 Yes 1 Switching frequency too high 785D Undertemperature 786D F-module No Fault in input circuit 787D Channel PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 792D F-module PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) 793D PROFIsafe address assignment error 794D Input short-circuited to L+ 796D Channel Yes Supply voltage too high 803D F-module No Supply voltage too low 804D Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 46 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic messages Module faults are indicated as diagnostics (module status). Once the fault is eliminated, the F-module must be reintegrated in the safety program. For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Table 6- 6 Diagnostic messages of the F-DI 8x24VDC HF Diagnostic message Fault code Overtemperature 5D Meaning An excessively high temperature was measured in the F-module. Remedy Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range. (see Technical specifications (Page 53)) Once the fault has been eliminated, the F-module must be removed and inserted or the power switched OFF and ON Parameter assignment error Load voltage missing 16D 17D Parameter assignment errors include: * The F-module cannot use the parameters (unknown, invalid combination, etc.). * The F-module parameters have not been configured. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ Correct the parameter assignment. * Check supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Access to retentive storage of 30D F-address not possible The F-destination address stored in the coding element cannot be accessed. Verify that the coding element is present or replace the coding element. Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a different F-destination address. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver and the address setting of the F-module. Invalid destination address (F_Dest_Add) 65D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid F-destination address. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid F-source address. Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid watchdog time. "F_SIL" parameter exceeds the application-specific SIL 68D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy between the SIL setting of the communication and the application. "F_CRC_Length" parameter does not match the generated CRC 69D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy in the CRC length. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 47 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Meaning Remedy Incorrect F-parameter version 70D or F_Block_ID The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect version of the F-parameters or an invalid F_Block_ID. CRC1 error 71D The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent F-parameters. Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent iParameters. Check the parameter assignment. F_Block_ID not supported 76D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect Block ID. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Internal error 256D Possible causes: * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * Replace the F-module. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * Replace the F-module. The firmware is incomplete and/or firmware added to the F-module is incompatible. This leads to errors or functional limitations when operating the F-module. * Perform a firmware update for all parts of the F-module and note any error messages. * Use only firmware versions released for this F-module. * Check the process signal. Internal supply voltage of the module failed Incorrect/inconsistent firmware present. Firmware update required 260D 283D * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Possible causes: * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Discrepancy error, channel status 0/0 768D Possible causes: Discrepancy error, channel status 0/1 769D * The process signal is faulty. * Replace the sensor. * The sensor is defective. * Discrepancy error, channel status 1/0 770D * The configured discrepancy time is too low. Check the parameter assignment of the discrepancy time. * Check the process wiring. Discrepancy error, channel status 1/1 771D * There is a short circuit between an unconnected sensor cable and the sensor supply cable. * Wire break in connected sensor cable or the sensor supply cable * An error occurred during the discrepancy check. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 48 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Input signal could not be clearly detected 773D Meaning Remedy An error occurred in the plausibility check * of the input signal between the processors. * You must eliminate the error within 100 * hours. If you do not eliminate the error within 100 hours, the F-module will become inoperative. Use shielded cables to reduce the EMC effects. Reduce the input frequency. Check the wiring of the sensor. Possible causes: Short circuit of internal sensor 774D supply to L+ Overload or short circuit of internal sensor supply to ground 775D * The input signal is faulty, e.g., as a result of impermissibly high electromagnetic interference. * A high-frequency input signal is present, e.g., due to mutual interference of sensors or the signal being above the sampling frequency of the input signal. * A momentary interruption/short circuit of the sensor cable (loose contact) is present. * The sensor/switch is bouncing. Possible causes: * Eliminate the short circuit in the process wiring. * There is a short circuit of the internal sensor supply with L+. * * There is a short circuit of two sensor supplies. Check the configured test time and the process wiring. * Replace the sensor. * The capacitance of the connected sensor for the configured test time is too high. * The sensor is defective. * Eliminate the overload. Possible causes: * The internal sensor supply is shortcircuited to ground. * Eliminate the short circuit in the process wiring. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * Check the "Sensor supply" parameter. * Eliminate/reduce the electromagnetic interference. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 49 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code No pulse detected 778D Meaning Remedy A pulse with a length greater than or equal to "Minimum pulse time" has not occurred within the time configured with the "Pulse monitoring window" parameter. Possible causes: Sensor signal chatters 784D * The "Pulse monitoring window" parameter setting is too high. * The "Minimum pulse time" parameter setting is too low. * There is a wire break in the process wiring. Too many signal changes have occurred within the time configured with the "Monitoring window" parameter. * The "Monitoring window" parameter setting is too high. * The "Number of signal changes" parameter setting is too low. * A momentary interruption/short circuit of the sensor cable (loose contact) is present. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The sensor/switch is bouncing. * The sensor is defective. * Check the "Pulse monitoring window" parameter. * Check the "Minimum pulse time" parameter. * Check the process wiring. * Check the "Monitoring window" parameter. * Check the "Number of signal changes" parameter. * Check the process wiring. * Eliminate/reduce the electromagnetic interference. * Replace the sensor. Switching frequency too high 785D The maximum switching frequency of the F-module has been exceeded. Reduce the switching frequency. (see Technical specifications (Page 53)) Undertemperature 786D The minimum permissible temperature limit has been violated. Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range. (see Technical specifications (Page 53)) Fault in input circuit 787D The F-module has detected an internal error. Possible causes: * Eliminate/reduce the electromagnetic interference. * Replace the F-module. * Check the parameter assignment. * Ensure that communication is functioning correctly. PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 792D * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. The PROFIsafe driver has detected a timeout. Possible causes: * The F-monitoring time is set incorrectly. * Bus faults are present. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 50 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) 793D Meaning The PROFIsafe driver has detected a CRC error. Remedy * Check the communication connection between the F-module and F-CPU. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. Possible causes: * The communication between the FCPU and F-module is disturbed. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * An error occurred in the sign-of-life monitoring. PROFIsafe address assignment error 794D An error occurred during the automatic PROFIsafe address assignment. Check the configuration. Input short-circuited to L+ 796D The input signal is short-circuited to L+. Eliminate the short circuit. Supply voltage too high 802D The supply voltage is too high. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage too low 803D The supply voltage is too low. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage outside the nominal range If the supply voltage L+ is outside the specified value range, the DIAG LED flashes and the module is passivated. When the voltage has recovered (level must remain above the specified value for at least 1 minute (see Technical specifications (Page 53) Voltages, Currents, Potentials)), the DIAG LED stops flashing. The module remains passivated. Behavior in case of cross circuit/short circuit to the sensor supply When internal sensor supply is specified and short circuit test is deactivated, short circuits to ground at the sensor supplies are detected. Channels for which the relevant sensor supply is configured will be passivated. When internal sensor supply is specified and short circuit test is enabled, short circuits to ground and potential at the sensor supply are detected. Channels for which the relevant sensor supply is configured will be passivated. Special features for fault detection The detection of certain faults (short-circuits or discrepancy errors, for example) depends on the application, the wiring, and the parameter assignment of the short circuit test and the sensor power supply. For this reason, tables on fault detection for the applications are presented under Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 29). Generally applicable information on diagnostics Information on diagnostics that pertains to all F-modules (for example, readout of diagnostics functions or passivation of channels) is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 51 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.4 Value status 6.4 Value status Properties In addition to the diagnostic messages and the status and error display, the F-module makes available information about the validity of each input and output signal - the value status. The value status is entered in the process image along with the input signal. Value status for digital input and output modules The value status is additional binary information of a digital input or output signal. It is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) at the same time as the process signal. It provides information about the validity of the input or output signal. The value status is influenced by the wire break check, short-circuit, chatter monitoring, pulse extension, and plausibility check. 1B: A valid process value is output for the channel. 0B: A fail-safe value is output for the channel, or the channel is deactivated. Assignment of inputs and outputs for the value status in the PII Each channel of the F-module is assigned a value status in the process image of the inputs. You can find the assignment in section Address space (Page 27). Reference A detailed description of the evaluation and processing of the value status can be found in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 52 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of F-DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0 Product type designation F-DI 8x24VDC HF General information Hardware product version 01 Firmware version V1.0.0 Product function I&M data Yes; IM0 to IM3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V12.0 STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version as of V5.5 SP3 / - PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.31 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Rated value (DC) 24 V Low limit of permissible range (DC) 20.4 V High limit of permissible range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 75 mA; without load Current consumption, max. 21 mA; from backplane bus Sensor supply Number of outputs 8 Output current Up to 60 C, max. 0.3 A Short circuit protection Yes; electronic (response threshold 0.7 A to 1.8 A) 24 V sensor supply 24 V Yes; min. L+ (-1.5 V) Short circuit protection Yes Output current, max. 800 mA; total current of all sensors Power Power consumption from the backplane bus 70 mW Power loss Power loss, typ. 4W Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 53 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0 Address space Address space per module Input 6 bytes Output 4 bytes Digital inputs Number of inputs 8 m/p-reading Yes; p-reading Input characteristic curve according to IEC 61131, Type 1 Yes Input voltage Type of input voltage DC Rated value, DC 24 V For "0" signal -30 to +5 V For "1" signal +15 to +30 V Input current For "1" signal, typ. 3.7 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) For standard inputs * Assignable Yes * For "0" to "1", min. 0.4 ms * For "0" to "1", max. 20 ms * For "1" to "0", min. 0.4 ms * For "1" to "0", max. 20 ms For counter/technological functions * Assignable No Length of cable Cable length, shielded, max. 1000 m Cable length unshielded, max. 500 m Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes Hardware interrupt No Diagnostic messages Diagnostics Yes, see section "Interrupts/diagnostic messages" in the manual Diagnostics display LED RUN LED Yes; green LED ERROR LED Yes; red LED Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 54 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0 Electrical isolation Electrical isolation channels Between channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC Isolation Isolation test voltage 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates SIL acc. to IEC 61508 SIL 3 Suitable for safety functions Yes Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode Performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1 PLe Low demand (PFD) acc. to SIL3 < 2.00E-05 1/h High demand (PFH) acc. to SIL3 < 1.00E-09 1/h Environmental conditions Operating temperature Min. 0 C Max. 60 C Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C Storage/transport temperature Min. -40 C Max. 70 C Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 49 g Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 55 Technical specifications Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 56 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 Response times A Introduction The next section shows the response times of the digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF. The response time of the digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF is included in the calculation of the F-system response time. Definition of response time for fail-safe digital inputs The response time represents the interval between a signal change at the digital input and reliable availability of the safety frame on the backplane bus. Times required for the calculation Maximum internal processing time: Tmax. = 20 ms Maximum cycle time: Tcycle = 11.5 ms Short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for the channel = "Time for short circuit test" + "Startup time after short circuit test" The input delay, short circuit test times, and discrepancy time are configured in STEP 7. If you have configured "Supply value 0", the sensor-actuator response time is not affected by the discrepancy time. Maximum response time in the error-free case with 1oo1 evaluation Maximum response time = Tmax + Input delay + Short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for the channel Maximum response time in the error-free case with 1oo2 evaluation Maximum response time = Tmax + Input delay + Maximum (short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel n, short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel n+4) Maximum response time with external short circuits Maximum response time = input delay + (n x Tcycle) + sum ("Time for short circuit test" + "Startup time after short circuit test" for sensor with activated short circuit test) n = Number of sensor supplies with activated short circuit test Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 57 Response times Maximum response time with discrepancy error and 1oo2 evaluation Maximum response time = Tmax + Input delay + Discrepancy time + 2 x Maximum (short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel n, short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel n+4) Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0) 58 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858068-01 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Applications of the F-I/O 5 ___________________ module Interrupts/diagnostic 6 ___________________ messages 7 ___________________ Technical specifications Original operating instructions A ___________________ Response times Representation of analog B ___________________ values 08/2018 A5E41448857-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E41448857-AB 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that affect the system in general are described in the system manual. The information in this manual and the system/function manuals provide support when you commission the system. A description of the F-system SIMATIC Safety can be found in the programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used hereafter, it refers to both the CPUs of the S71200/1500 automation system and CPUs of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software " (STEP 7 TIA Portal)". Note the following identified notes: Note A note includes important information on the product described in the documentation, on handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which you ought to pay special attention. Standards You can find a dated reference to the respective standards in the certificate (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/57141281) or in the EC Declaration of Conformity (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/71764057) for the Fmodule. Certified versions You can find the certified product and firmware versions in annex 1 of the report on the TUV certificate (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/57141289). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 3 Preface Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system WARNING The operators of systems with safety-related characteristics must adhere to specific operational safety requirements. The supplier is also obliged to comply with special product monitoring measures. Siemens informs system operators in the form of personal notifications about product developments and properties which may be or become important issues in terms of operational safety. You should subscribe to the corresponding notifications in order to obtain the latest information and to allow you to make any necessary modifications to your system. Log on to Industry Online Support. Follow the links below and click on "Email on update" on the right-hand side in each case: * SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13751&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13828&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC WinAC RTX (F) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13915) * SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13716&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-1200/SIMATIC S7-1200F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13683&lc=en-WW) * Distributed I/O (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=14029&lc=enWW) * STEP 7 (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=24471&lc=en-WW) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 4 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 8 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 13 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 16 3.1 4 5 6 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 13 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 16 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 20 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges .......................................................................... 20 4.2 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 20 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2 4.3.2.3 4.3.2.4 4.3.2.5 4.3.2.6 4.3.2.7 4.3.2.8 4.3.2.9 4.3.2.10 4.3.2.11 4.3.2.12 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 22 F-parameters.......................................................................................................................... 22 Parameters of the channels ................................................................................................... 23 Interference frequency suppression....................................................................................... 23 Evaluation of the sensors ....................................................................................................... 23 Standard value ....................................................................................................................... 24 Discrepancy time.................................................................................................................... 24 Tolerance window %, absolute .............................................................................................. 25 Tolerance window %, relative ................................................................................................ 26 Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation..................................... 27 Activated ................................................................................................................................ 34 Channel failure acknowledge ................................................................................................. 34 Measuring range .................................................................................................................... 34 Diagnostics: Wire break ......................................................................................................... 35 Smoothing .............................................................................................................................. 35 4.4 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 38 Applications of the F-I/O module ........................................................................................................... 40 5.1 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 2-wire transducer ...................................... 40 5.2 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 2-wire transducer ...................................... 44 5.3 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 4-wire transducer ...................................... 47 5.4 Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 4-wire transducer ...................................... 50 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 53 6.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 53 6.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 56 6.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 58 6.4 Value status ........................................................................................................................... 63 Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 6 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Table of contents 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 64 7.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................64 A Response times .................................................................................................................................... 69 B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 71 B.1 Representation of analog values ............................................................................................72 Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 7 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 8 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 9 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 10 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 11 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 12 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Wiring diagram LEDs for channel status LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 Function class Color coding module type Function and firmware version Color code for selecting the color identification labels BU type Article number View of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF module Properties The module has the following technical properties: Fail-safe module PROFIsafe Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 13 Product overview 2.1 Properties Supports the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile on F-CPUs S7-1200/1500. PROFIsafe address type 2 4 analog inputs with electrical isolation between channels and the backplane bus (up to SIL3/Cat.4/PLd) Measuring ranges: 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA Resolution: 16 bits including sign Short circuit-proof power supply for 2-wire or 4-wire transmitter Supply voltage L+ External sensor supply possible Assignable diagnostics Diagnostics display (DIAG, red/green LED) Status display for each input (green LED) Error display for each input (red LED) Diagnostics - e.g., short-circuit, channel-specific - e.g. supply voltage missing, module-specific Channel- and module-wide passivation The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data Value status WARNING The fail-safe performance characteristics in the technical specifications apply for a mission time life of 20 years and a repair time of 100 hours. If a repair within 100 hours is not possible, remove the respective module from the BaseUnit or switch off its supply voltage before 100 hours expires. The module switches off independently after the 100 hours have expired. Follow the repair procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 58). Note Cyclic reading of I&M data Cyclic reading of I&M data can affect the timing of the F-modules. You should therefore avoid short read cycles of less than 500 ms. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 14 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories You can order the following accessories separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification label Shield connector Electronic coding element as spare part (article number 6ES7193-6EF00-1AA0) You can find additional information about accessories in the Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) System Manual. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 15 3 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram This section provides the block diagram of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF analog input module with the terminal assignment. You can find additional information about wiring BaseUnits in the Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) System Manual. Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF analog input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 16 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Backplane bus interface UV Sensor supply Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) M Supply voltage ground Sensor supply/reverse polarity protection Mn Ground to channel n Temperature measurement for BU type A1 only (the function cannot be used for this module.) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (available DIAG with light-colored BaseUnit only) In+ Current input positive, channel n AI0, AI1, Channel status LED (green) AI2, AI3 In - Current input negative, channel n F0, F1, F2, F3 Channel fault LED (red) PWR Power LED (green) Figure 3-1 Diagnostics LED (green, red) Block diagram Sensor supply WARNING Voltage dips and voltage fluctuations of the voltage supply are not buffered by the Fmodule and, thus, affect the sensor supply. This can cause the measured value to be false and must be taken into account when determining the safety function. To ensure that the sensor functions problem-free, we recommend one of the following options: * You can avoid voltage dips by using a voltage supply according to the NAMUR recommendation NE 21. or * Use a transducer with an appropriate battery backup or diagnostics. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 17 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Recommendation: Internal sensor supply You are strongly advised to use the short circuit-proof internal sensor supply of the Fmodule. This internal sensor supply is monitored and its status is indicated by the Fn LED. The input is also protected in the event of short-circuits in the wiring or at the sensor. Note The internal sensor supply is switched off in case of a short circuit to ground or during power-up in the event of short circuit to L+. The sensor supply is also switched off at input currents > 35 mA. A check is made approximately 1 minute later to determine if the error has gone. Note Behavior of process values and diagnostics evaluation Sensor startup during module startup: After the internal sensor supply is activated, the evaluation of wire break and underflow diagnostics is suppressed for 3 seconds. During this time, the module makes the secure process data 0 available at all channels. This suppresses a possible wire break or underflow diagnostics caused by the sensor startup. If the sensor startup is not yet complete after the 3 seconds have elapsed, it is possible that the module might detect wire break or underflow and passivate the affected channel. In this case, the channel fault must be acknowledged during startup. Sensor startup during operation: If a sensor startup takes place during operation, e.g. the sensor supply is reactivated after a short-circuit, all analog values are invalid and wire break or underflow diagnostics can occur on the sensors connected to the internal sensor supply. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 18 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram External/internal sensor supply The figures in section "Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 40)" show how you can supply power to the sensors via an external sensor supply (for example, from another module). WARNING If there is a short-circuit from L+ to Mn+, the input resistors could be destroyed, depending on the selected interconnection type. You can avoid this problem through proper wiring and use of the internal sensor supply. When an external sensor supply is used, other suitable measures are necessary to protect the input resistors (e.g. external fast 50 mA fuse in the input circuit of the F-module). WARNING External sensor supply If you use an external sensor supply, you need to take into consideration the voltage dips and voltage fluctuations when determining the safety function. To ensure that the sensor functions problem-free, we recommend one of the following options: * Use a transducer with an appropriate battery backup or diagnostics. or * Use a redundant external sensor supply or * Monitor the external sensor supply for undervoltage/overvoltage, including shutdown of the sensor supply in the event of a fault (single channel for SIL2; two-channel for SIL3). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 19 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges The following table shows the measurement types and the respective measuring range. Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Resolution Current 0 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 16 bits including sign 4 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 16 bits including sign You can find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc. in the Appendix Representation of analog values (Page 71). 4.2 Parameters Parameters for F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF WARNING Diagnostics functions should be activated or deactivated in accordance with the application, see section Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 40). The following parameters are possible: Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters Parameters Value range Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope F-parameters: Manual assignment of the Fmonitoring time * Disable * Enable Disable No Module F-monitoring time 1 to 65535 ms 150 ms No Module F-source address 1 to 65534 depends on parameter assignment of FCPU No Module F-destination address 1 to 65534 suggested by Fsystem No Module F-parameter signature (without address) 0 to 65535 calculated by Fsystem No Module Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 20 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Behavior after channel faults Reintegration after channel fault F-I/O DB manual number assignment Value range * Passivate entire module * Passivate channel * Adjustable * All channels automatically * All channels manually * Disable * Enable Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Passivate channel No Module (S7-300/400) Adjustable No Module Disable No Module (S7-1200/1500) All channels manually F-I/O DB number -- suggested by Fsystem No Module F-I/O DB name -- suggested by Fsystem No Module 50 Hz No Module AI parameters Interference frequency suppression * 50 Hz * 60 Hz * 1oo1 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.3/PLd) * 1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) * MIN * MAX Channel parameters: Channel n Sensor evaluation Standard value 1oo1 evaluation (max. No SIL3/Cat.3/PLd) Channel MIN No Channel Discrepancy time * 100 to 30000 ms 100 ms No Channel Tolerance window %, absolute 2.0 to 20.0% 5.0% No Channel Tolerance window %, relative 2.0 to 20.0% Activated Channel fault acknowledgment Measuring range * Disable * Enable * Manual * Automatic The value range offered depends on the F-CPU in use and on the configuration of the F-parameter "Reintegration after channel fault". * 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA 5.0% No Channel Enable No Channel (S7-300/400) Parame- No ter is not supported Channel (S7-1200/1500) Manual 4 to 20 mA No Channel Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 21 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Parameters Diagnostics: Wire break ** Smoothing Value range * Disable * Enable * 1 * 2 * 4 * 8 * 16 * 32 * 64 Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Enable No Channel 1 No Channel * See formula under Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation (Page 27) * Can only be set with 4 to 20 mA measuring range 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.1 F-parameters You must assign the PROFIsafe address (F-destination address together with F-source address) to the F-module before you put it into operation. You define the F-source address using the "Base for PROFIsafe addresses" parameter in the F-CPU. An F-destination address unique throughout the CPU is automatically assigned for each F-module. You can manually change the F-destination addresses set in the hardware configuration. You can find information on F-parameters for the F-monitoring time, the PROFIsafe addressing (F-source address, F-destination address) and the F-I/O DB in the manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 22 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2 Parameters of the channels 4.3.2.1 Interference frequency suppression Here you set the interference frequency suppression for the line frequency: 50 Hz 60 Hz You can find additional information on this in the Analog value processing function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67989094). 4.3.2.2 Evaluation of the sensors Overview Here you select the type of sensor evaluation: "1oo1 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.3/PLd)" "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)" If you do not want to measure with a channel or channel pair, disable the channel or the channel pair. 1oo1 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.3/PLd) With the 1oo1 evaluation, there is one sensor, and it is connected to the F-module via a single channel. 1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) With the 1oo2 evaluation, two input channels are occupied by: Two single-channel sensors One two-channel sensor Note that in 1oo2 evaluation, two channels are combined into a channel pair. Achievable safety class Depending on the selected sensor evaluation, you achieve the following safety classes with a sensor that is qualified accordingly: SIL3/Cat.3/PLd for "1oo1 evaluation" or SIL3/Cat.4/PLe for "1oo2 evaluation" See also Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation (Page 27) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 23 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2.3 Standard value Function If you have selected "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)", you can choose for each input channel pair which of the two F-CPU values is provided. "MIN": the lesser of the two values. "MAX": the greater of the two values. During a discrepancy between the two input channels, the last valid standard value prior to the occurrence of the discrepancy is made available to the F-CPU. 4.3.2.4 Discrepancy time Function If you have selected "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)", you can enter the discrepancy time for each channel pair here in milliseconds. The discrepancy time does not start until the standard value is outside the assigned tolerance window (relative or absolute). If the two redundant input channels of the channel pair differ by more than the specified tolerance and for longer than the specified discrepancy time but no longer than the duration of the maximum response time, the F-module detects a discrepancy error and triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If the input channels fall below the specified tolerance prior to expiration of the discrepancy time (input channels are no longer discrepant), the discrepancy time is cleared and is restarted only when a new discrepancy is detected. You can find additional information about configuring the discrepancy analysis under Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation (Page 27). A discrepancy error is handled by the safety program in the same way as a channel fault. Additional information is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 24 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2.5 Tolerance window %, absolute Function If you have selected "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)", you can enter the size of a tolerance window for the discrepancy here for the channel pair. You specify the tolerance window as a percentage of the full-scale value. The reference value is the full-scale value, i.e. 20 mA. The entered value is rounded to one decimal place. If two redundant input channels of the channel pair differ by more than the tolerance specified here and for longer than the specified discrepancy time, the F-module detects a discrepancy error and triggers a diagnostic interrupt. For more information regarding setting the tolerance window, refer to Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation (Page 27). Example You have assigned the following: The "Tolerance window % absolute" 10% The measuring range 0..20 mA A discrepancy time of 100 ms The input channels may differ from the configured discrepancy time (100 ms) up to the max. reaction time for a time window with a difference of more than 2 mA. See also Discrepancy time (Page 24) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 25 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2.6 Tolerance window %, relative Function If you have selected "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)", you can enter the size of a tolerance window for the discrepancy here for each channel pair. You specify the tolerance window as a percentage of the assigned standard value. The entered value is rounded to one decimal place. If two redundant input channels of the channel pair differ by more than the tolerance specified here and for longer than the specified discrepancy time, the F-module detects a discrepancy error and triggers a diagnostic interrupt. The two parameters "Tolerance window % absolute" and "Tolerance window % relative" are combined. The "Tolerance window % absolute" parameter is decisive in case of low process values. For more information regarding setting the tolerance window, refer to Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation (Page 27). Example You have assigned the following: The "tolerance window % relative" is set at 10% A measuring range of 0 to 20 mA A discrepancy time of 200 ms A unit value of 20 mA The input channels may differ from the configured discrepancy time (200 ms) up to the max. reaction time for a time window with a difference of more than 2 mA. See also Discrepancy time (Page 24) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 26 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2.7 Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation Operating principle of discrepancy analysis A discrepancy analysis is performed with a configured 1oo2 evaluation. Smoothed process values are used for the discrepancy analysis. An assignable tolerance window is formed around the process value that represents the instantaneous standard value (value that is signaled to the F-CPU). The tolerance window is formed relative to the process value or as an absolute value relative to the measuring range end value. Relative and absolute tolerance windows are combined. If the process value does not represent the standard value at an instant and is within the tolerance window, no discrepancy exists. Figure 4-1 Example of a relative tolerance window without discrepancy (parameter assignment: standard value = MAX) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 27 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters If the process value does not represent the standard value at an instant but is outside the tolerance window, a discrepancy exists. Figure 4-2 Example of a relative tolerance window with discrepancy (parameter assignment: standard value = MAX) The assigned discrepancy time starts as soon as a discrepancy is detected. The discrepancy time runs as long as the discrepancy exists. During a discrepancy between the two input channels, the last valid standard value prior to occurrence of the discrepancy is signaled to the F-CPU. If the input channels fall below the specified tolerance prior to expiration of the discrepancy time (input channels are no longer discrepant), the discrepancy time is cleared and is restarted only when a new discrepancy is detected. There is no valid old value after startup. If the discrepancy is detected during this time, 7FFFH is output for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 is output for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs and the discrepancy time is started. If there is no longer a discrepancy between the input channels when the discrepancy time expires, the standard value is output. If the discrepancy time has expired, an error is signaled and the process value is set to 7FFFH for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. In the PII, the substitute value 0 is set for the safety program. A discrepancy error is handled by the safety program in the same way as a channel fault. Additional information is available in the STEP 7 Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 28 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Configuring the discrepancy analysis parameters The following four parameters for the discrepancy analysis are assigned for each channel pair: Discrepancy time Standard value Tolerance window %, absolute Tolerance window %, relative "Discrepancy time" parameter If the following is true, the F-module detects a discrepancy error: The process value that does not represent the standard value is outside the configured tolerance window. Lasts longer than the configured discrepancy time. Lasts at maximum the duration of the maximum response time. In the case of a discrepancy error, the F-module triggers a diagnostic interrupt and sets the process value to 7FFFH for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. The discrepancy time is reset if the standard value lies within the tolerance window again. In the PII, the substitute value 0 is set for the safety program. You calculate the maximum discrepancy time that is permitted in the respective application using the following formula: Discrepancy time = Maximum response time (in case of discrepancy error) - 2 x Conversion cycle time x Smoothing - 2 x Conversion cycle time Note You calculate the discrepancy time by using the values from section Discrepancy time (Page 69) in the above equation. You can assign the discrepancy time for each channel pair. "Standard value" parameter You can select which of the two values is to be signaled to the F-CPU for each input channel pair. During a discrepancy between the two input channels, the last valid standard value prior to occurrence of the discrepancy is signaled to the F-CPU. "MIN": The lower of the two values is signaled to the F-CPU as the standard value. "MAX": The higher of the two values is signaled to the F-CPU as the standard value. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 29 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters "Tolerance window %, absolute" parameter You can calculate the absolute tolerance window using the following formula: Calculate the maximum deviation of the current using the following formula: With IME = 20 mA (full-scale value) IMA = 0 mA for measuring range 0 ... 20 mA (start-of-scale value) IMA = 4 mA for measuring range 4 ... 20 mA (start-of-scale value) Tabs = Tolerance in % Iabs = Maximum deviation of current (+/-) You can assign a value of 2.0 to 20.0% for the "Tolerance window %, absolute" parameter for each channel pair. Figure 4-3 Absolute deviation in % of the nominal range for measuring range 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 30 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters "Tolerance window %, relative" parameter The tolerance window is calculated as a percentage of the smoothed process value that represents the MIN or MAX value (depending on the parameter assignment of the standard value) in this instant. You can calculate the relative tolerance window using the following formula: Calculate the maximum deviation of the current using the following formula: With IEW = Process standard value (min./max.) IMA = 0 mA for measuring range 0 ... 20 mA IMA = 4 mA for measuring range 4 ... 20 mA Trel = Tolerance in % Irel = Maximum deviation of current (+/-) You can assign a value of 2.0 to 20.0% for the "Tolerance window %, relative" parameter for each channel pair. Figure 4-4 Relative deviation in % of the nominal range for measuring range 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 31 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Combination of the "Tolerance window %, absolute" and "Tolerance window %, relative" parameters You can combine the "Tolerance window %, absolute" and "Tolerance window %, relative" parameters as needed. The combined tolerance window (shown in gray in the figure below) is the maximum of Trel and Tabs. T = MAX { Trel, Tabs } I = MAX { Irel, Iabs } With T = Tolerance, in % I = Maximum deviation of current (+/-) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 32 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Example The following diagrams show you the behavior of the discrepancy evaluation when standard value = MAX. The upper of the two diagrams shows you the characteristic curve of the two process values. The dashed line represents the absolute tolerance range configured in this example. The lower of the two diagrams shows you the standard value signaled to the F-CPU. In this example, on the first occurrence of a discrepancy, process value 1 is within the tolerance range again before expiration of the discrepancy time. This means the discrepancy error is not signaled. In this example, on the second occurrence of a discrepancy, process value 1 is outside the tolerance range when the discrepancy time expires. As a result, a discrepancy error is signaled with 7FFFH for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs after expiration of the discrepancy time. In the PII, the substitute value 0 is set for the safety program. See also Discrepancy time (Page 24) Tolerance window %, absolute (Page 25) Tolerance window %, relative (Page 26) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 33 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2.8 Activated If you select this check box, the corresponding channel is enabled for signal processing. You can deactivate an unused channel with this parameter. If you deactivate unused channels, the response time of the F-module is reduced. 4.3.2.9 Channel failure acknowledge Use on S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The parameter is only relevant if the F-module can be operated on an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU. The parameter can only be set if the F-parameter "Behavior after channel fault" is set to "Passivate channel" and the F-parameter "Reintegration after channel fault" is set to "Adjustable". The value of this parameter specifies how the channel reacts after a channel fault: Manual: A channel failure is reintegrated after manual acknowledgment. Automatically: The channel is reintegrated automatically after a channel fault. Manual acknowledgment is not necessary. Use in S7-300/400 F-CPUs The value of this parameter is not relevant in the case of operation on S7-300/400 F-CPUs. For S7-300/400 F-CPUs you set the corresponding property at the F-I/O DB by means of the ACK_NEC tag. For detailed information about the F-I/O DB, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. 4.3.2.10 Measuring range You select the measuring range for the channel with this parameter: 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 34 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2.11 Diagnostics: Wire break Function Here you activate wire break detection for a configured measuring range of 4 to 20 mA. With an assigned measuring range of 4 to 20 mA: With assigned wire break diagnostics and currents < 3.6 mA, a wire break is detected and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the F-CPU. Without configured wire break and currents diagnostics < 0.4444 mA detects "underflow" and triggers a diagnostic interrupt in the F-CPU. With an assigned measuring range of 0 to 20 mA, the wire break diagnostics is permanently set by default. With currents < 0.4442 mA, a wire break is detected and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the F-CPU. If you do not need a channel, deactivate the channel. Then, a wire break is not detected. 4.3.2.12 Smoothing Using smoothing Smoothing of analog values provides a stabilized analog signal for further processing. Smoothed values are always used for discrepancy analysis. WARNING The smoothing takes place as a result of averaging over the selected number of most recently converted analog values of a channel, e.g. 64. The mean value generation causes a discrepancy to be delayed with a configured "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)". You can find an example below. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 35 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Smoothing principle The measured values are smoothed by a digital filter. Smoothing is achieved by the Fmodule forming the mean of a number of converted (digitized) analog values determined by the "Smoothing" parameter. You assign smoothing in 7 levels (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 conversion cycles). The level determines the number of analog signals that are averaged. If smoothing = 1 is configured, the smoothing is deactivated. A higher smoothing provides a more stable analog value, and prolongs the time it takes to apply a smoothed analog signal following a unit step. You can find an example below. Note Smoothing is reset after startup, short circuit, wire break or another channel fault. If, for example, smoothing with 16 conversion cycles is assigned and all channels are active, it takes up to 2000 ms until the process value is signaled with a configured interference frequency suppression of 50 Hz. Until the first valid process value, the F-module signals for the channel 7FFFH for S7300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. If a discrepancy occurs, measuring and smoothing continues and is not restarted. Example The figure below shows the number of conversion cycles, depending on the smoothing setting, after which the analog value is completely smoothed and available in the case of a unit step. The figure applies to all signal changes at the analog input. Smoothing - 4 conversion cycles Smoothing - 16 conversion cycles Smoothing - 64 conversion cycles Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 36 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Example: Effect of smoothing on the maximum response time for a configured "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)" in case of error If an error (One Fault Delay Time, OFDT) occurred with a configured "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)", you calculate the maximum response time according to the following formula: Maximum response time (in case of discrepancy error) = 2 x Conversion cycle time x Smoothing + Discrepancy time + 2 x Conversion cycle time Example: One channel pair connected and configured (activated), interference frequency 50 Hz, smoothing = 16 conversion cycles, discrepancy time = 2000 ms, conversion cycle time calculated with the formula from section Response times (Page 69): Max. response time (in case of discrepancy error) = 2 x 70 ms x 16 + 2000 ms + 2 x 70 ms = 4380 ms If a discrepancy exists between the two input channels, it can take 4380 ms until the Fmodule signals a discrepancy error to the F-CPU. If the discrepancy time expires, an error is signaled and the process value is set to 7FFFH for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. In the PII, the substitute value 0 is set for the safety program. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 37 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space 4.4 Address space Address assignment for the analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF The analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF occupies the following address areas in the F-CPU: Table 4- 3 Address assignment in the F-CPU Occupied bytes in the F-CPU: F-CPU In input range In output range S7-300/400 F-CPUs IB x + 0 to x + 12 QB x + 0 to x + 3 S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs IB x + 0 to x + 13 QB x + 0 to x + 4 x = Module start address Address assignment of the user data and the value status of the analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF The user data occupy the following addresses in the analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF out of all the assigned addresses in the F-CPU: Table 4- 4 User data address assignment in the input range Byte in the FCPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 IB x + 0 Input value at channel 0 IB x + 1 (Result of the 1oo2 evaluation channel 0/2) IB x + 2 Input value at channel 1 IB x + 3 (Result of the 1oo2 evaluation channel 1/3) IB x + 4 Input value at channel 2 1 0 Value status* for AI1 Value status* for AI0 IB x + 5 IB x + 6 Input value at channel 3 IB x + 7 IB x + 8 -- -- -- -- Value status* for AI3 Value status* for AI2 * Only S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs x = Module start address Note You may only access the addresses occupied by user data and value status. The other address areas occupied by the F-modules are assigned for functions including safety-related communication between the F-modules and F-CPU in accordance with PROFIsafe. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 38 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Additional information For detailed information about F-I/O access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 39 5 Applications of the F-I/O module You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with the following applications. The wiring is performed on the suitable BaseUnit. Additional information is available in the Connecting section in the Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) System Manual. 5.1 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 2-wire transducer Introduction Below you will find the wiring scheme and the parameter assignment of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF for Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd, 1oo1 (1v1) evaluation. Possible diagnostic messages, the error causes and possible corrective measures are given in section "Diagnostic messages (Page 58)". Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 40 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 2-wire transducer Current measurement 0/4 to 20 mA, 2-wire transducer Four process signals can be connected to the F-module in this interconnection variant. Sensor supply UV is provided by the F-module for 4 channels. You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 41 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 2-wire transducer Backplane bus interface UV Sensor supply Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) M Supply voltage ground Sensor supply/reverse polarity protection Mn Ground reference to UV, channel n L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with lightcolored BaseUnit) Temperature measurement for BU type A1 only (the function cannot be used for this module.) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (available with light-colored BaseUnit only) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) External fuse AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green) In+ Current input positive, channel n F0, F1, F2, F3 LED channel fault (red) In - Current input negative, channel n PWR Power LED (green) * Create the bridge directly at the terminal connection. ** Measuring transducer Figure 5-1 1oo1 evaluation WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLd using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. WARNING All cables need to be laid in such a way that they are resistant to interference voltage. Use shielded cables. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 42 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 2-wire transducer Assignable parameters for application 1 Table 5- 1 Parameters for application 1 of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Parameters Behavior after channel faults Interference frequency suppression Range of values in safety mode * Passivate the entire F-module * Passivate channel * 50 Hz * 60 Hz Sensor evaluation 1oo1 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.3/PLd) Measuring range * 0 ... 20 mA * 4 ... 20 mA Diagnostics: Wire break Smoothing (in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA) * Disable * Enable 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 conversion cycles Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 43 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 2-wire transducer 5.2 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 2-wire transducer Introduction Below you will find the wiring scheme and the parameter assignment of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF for application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe, 1oo2 (2v2) evaluation. Possible diagnostic messages, the error causes and possible corrective measures are given in section "Diagnostic messages (Page 58)". Current measurement 0/4 to 20 mA, 2-wire transducer Two process signals can be connected to the F-module in this interconnection variant. Sensor supply UV is provided by the F-module for 4 channels. You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 44 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 2-wire transducer Backplane bus interface UV Sensor supply Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) M Supply voltage ground Sensor supply/reverse polarity protection Mn Ground reference to UV, channel n L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with lightcolored BaseUnit) Temperature measurement for BU type A1 only (the function cannot be used for this module.) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (available with light-colored BaseUnit only) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) External fuse AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green) In+ Current input positive, channel n F0, F1, F2, F3 LED channel fault (red) In - Current input negative, channel n PWR Power LED (green) * Create the bridge directly at the terminal connection. ** Measuring transducer Figure 5-2 1oo2 evaluation WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a qualified, two-channel sensor or two qualified single-channel sensors. WARNING All cables need to be laid in such a way that they are resistant to interference voltage. Use shielded cables. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 45 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 2-wire transducer Assignable parameters for application 2 Table 5- 2 Parameters for application 2 of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Parameters Range of values in safety mode Standard value * MIN * MAX Discrepancy time 100 to 30000 ms Tolerance window %, absolute 2.0 to 20.0% Tolerance window %, relative 2.0 to 20.0% Behavior after channel faults * Passivate the entire F-module * Passivate channel * 50 Hz * 60 Hz Interference frequency suppression Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Measuring range * 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA Diagnostics: Wire break Smoothing (in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA) * Disable * Enable 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 conversion cycles Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 46 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 4-wire transducer 5.3 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 4-wire transducer Introduction Below you will find the wiring scheme and the parameter assignment of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF for Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd, 1oo1 (1v1) evaluation. Possible diagnostic messages, the error causes and possible corrective measures are given in section "Diagnostic messages (Page 58)". Current measurement 0/4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transducer Four process signals can be connected to the F-module in this interconnection variant. Sensor supply UV is provided by the F-module for 4 channels. You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 47 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 4-wire transducer Backplane bus interface UV Sensor supply Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) M Supply voltage ground Sensor supply/reverse polarity protection Mn Ground reference to UV, channel n Temperature measurement for BU type A1 only (the function cannot be used for this module.) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with lightcolored BaseUnit) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (available with light-colored BaseUnit only) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) External fuse AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green) In + Current input positive, channel n F0, F1, F2, F3 LED channel fault (red) In - Current input negative, channel n PWR Power LED (green) * Measuring transducer Figure 5-3 1oo1 evaluation WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLd using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. WARNING All cables need to be laid in such a way that they are resistant to interference voltage. Use shielded cables. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 48 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 4-wire transducer Assignable parameters for application 3 Table 5- 3 Parameters for application 3 of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Parameters Behavior after channel faults Interference frequency suppression Range of values in safety mode * Passivate the entire F-module * Passivate channel * 50 Hz * 60 Hz Sensor evaluation 1oo1 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.3/PLd) Measuring range * 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA Diagnostics: Wire break Smoothing (in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA) * Disable * Enable 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 conversion cycles Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 49 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 4-wire transducer 5.4 Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 4-wire transducer Introduction Below you will find the wiring scheme and the parameter assignment of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire for application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe, 1oo2 (2v2) evaluation. Possible diagnostic messages, the error causes and possible corrective measures are given in section "Diagnostic messages (Page 58)". Current measurement 0/4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transducer Two process signals can be connected to the F-module in this interconnection variant. Sensor supply UV is provided by the F-module for 4 channels. You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 50 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 4-wire transducer Backplane bus interface UV Sensor supply Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) M Supply voltage ground Sensor supply/reverse polarity protection Mn Ground reference to UV, channel n L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with lightcolored BaseUnit) Temperature measurement for BU type A1 only (the function cannot be used for this module.) Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to left interrupted (lightcolored BaseUnit) Filter connection supply voltage (available with light-colored BaseUnit only) DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red) External fuse AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green) In + Current input positive, channel n F0, F1, F2, LED channel fault (red) F3 In - Current input negative, channel n PWR * Measuring transducer Figure 5-4 Power LED (green) 1oo2 evaluation WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use suitably qualified sensors. WARNING All cables need to be laid in such a way that they are resistant to interference voltage. Use shielded cables. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 51 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 4-wire transducer Assignable parameters for application 4 Table 5- 4 Parameters for application 4 of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Parameters Range of values in safety mode Standard value * MIN * MAX Discrepancy time 100 to 30000 ms Tolerance window %, absolute 2.0 to 20.0% Tolerance window %, relative 2.0 to 20.0% Behavior after channel faults * Passivate the entire F-module * Passivate channel * 50 Hz * 60 Hz Interference frequency suppression Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Measuring range * 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA Diagnostics: Wire break Smoothing (in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA) * Disable * Enable 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 conversion cycles Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 52 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 6 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows the LED display of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 6-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 58). WARNING The DIAG LED and the channel status and channel fault LEDs of the outputs are not designed as safety-related LEDs and therefore may not be evaluated for safety-related activities. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 53 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display DIAG LED Table 6- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not okay Off Module parameters not configured Flashing Module parameters configured and no module diagnostics On Flashing Flashing * Module parameters configured and module diagnostics * Operation in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: At least one channel is waiting for a user acknowledgment. * Operation in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: The F-module is waiting for a user acknowledgment after a module fault. * Operation in S7-300/400 F-CPUs: The F-module is waiting for a user acknowledgment. Channel status/channel fault LED Table 6- 2 Status display of the LEDs channel status / channel error Channel status Channel fault Meaning Channel deactivated or supply voltage L+ missing. Off Off On Off Channel activated and no channel diagnostics Channel activated and channel diagnostics Off On / At least one channel is waiting for a user acknowledgment. Alternately flashing Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 54 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display Channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED Table 6- 3 Channel status Off Flashing Status display of the LEDs channel status / DIAG / channel error DIAG Channel fault Meaning Flashing All On The PROFIsafe address does not match the configured PROFIsafe address. Flashing Off Identification of the F-module when assigning the PROFIsafe address. PWR LED Table 6- 4 PWR Status display of LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ available On Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 55 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts 6.2 Interrupts Introduction The fail-safe analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The F-module generates a diagnostic interrupt for each diagnostic message described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 58). The list below provides an overview of the diagnostic interrupts of the F-module. The diagnostic interrupts are assigned either to one channel or the entire F-module. WARNING Before acknowledging the short circuit diagnostic message, remedy the respective fault and validate your safety function. Follow the fault remedying procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 58) Scope of diagnostic interrupt: F-module Overtemperature Parameter error Supply voltage missing Channel/component temporarily not available Mismatch of safety destination address (F_Dest_Add) Safety destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add) Safety source address not valid (F_Source_Add) Safety watchdog timer value is 0 ms (F_WD_Time) Parameter F_SIL exceeds SIL from specific device application Parameter F_CRC_Length does not match the generated values Version of F-parameter set incorrectly CRC1 fault Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) F_Block_ID not supported Transmission error: Inconsistent data (CRC error) Transmission error: Timeout (monitoring time 1 or 2 expired) Module is defective Watchdog tripped Invalid/inconsistent firmware present Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 56 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Diagnostics memory overflow Channel failure acknowledgment F-address memory not accessible No valid F-address available Diagnostics memory overflow Undertemperature Supply voltage too high Supply voltage too low Channel/component not available Scope of diagnostic interrupt: Channel Diagnostics: Wire break (can only be configured for measuring range 4..20mA) High limit exceeded Low limit violated Safety-related switch off Internal supply voltage of the module failed Common mode error Analog input signal not recorded unique Internal sensor supply short-circuit to P Overload or internal sensor supply short-circuit to M Discrepancy error Analog input signal not recorded unique Internal sensor supply short-circuit to P Overload or internal sensor supply short-circuit to M Read back failure ADC error Fault in test circuit Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 57 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic messages Module faults are indicated as diagnostics (module status). Once the fault is eliminated, the F-module must be reintegrated in the safety program. For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Table 6- 5 Diagnostic messages of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Diagnostic message Fault code Overtemperature 5H Meaning The F-module measured an excessively high temperature. Remedy Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range (see Technical specifications (Page 64)) Once the temperature has been reduced and returns to the specified range, the F-module must be removed and inserted or the power switched OFF and ON. Wire break 6H Possible causes: * A cable to the sensor is broken. * Fault at the external circuit * Defective sensor * Wrong sensor type set in the parameters * Input channel not used * Measurement resistance too high Check the possible causes and eliminate the fault. High limit exceeded 7H The measured value exceeds the measuring range. Check the interaction between the module and the sensor. Low limit violated 8H The measured input value is below a measuring range. Check the interaction between the module and the sensor. Parameter error 10H Parameter assignment errors include: Correct the parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing 11H * The F-module cannot use the parameters (unknown, invalid combination, etc.). * The F-module parameters have not been configured. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Check the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit. * Check the BaseUnit. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 58 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Safety-related switch off 19H Meaning For safety purposes, channel was switched off due to an error on another channel. Possible causes: * Channel/component temporarily not available 1FH Remedy Short circuit is present. * Correct the process wiring. Possible causes: * Internal fault in the F-module * Replace the F-module. * Firmware update error * Repeat the firmware update. * Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver and the PROFIsafe address assigned to the F-module. * Assign the PROFIsafe address to the F-module (again). * Check the communication connection between the F-module and FCPU. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. Mismatch of safety destination address (F_Dest_Add) 40H The F-module detected a different Fdestination address. Safety destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add) 41H The F-module detected an invalid Fdestination address. Safety source address not valid (F_Source_Add) 42H The F-module detected a different Fsource address. Safety watchdog timer value is 0 ms (F_WD_Time) 43H The F-module detected an invalid safety watchdog time. Parameter F_SIL exceeds SIL from specific device application 44H The F-module detected a discrepancy between the SIL setting of the communication and the application. Parameter F_CRC_Length does not match the generated values 45H The F-module detected a discrepancy in the CRC length. Version of F-parameter set incorrectly 46H The F-module detected an incorrect F_Par_Version or an invalid F_Block_ID. CRC1 fault 47H The F-module detected inconsistent Fparameters. Transmission error: Inconsistent data (CRC error) 4DH The F-module detected a CRC error. Possible causes: * The communication between the FCPU and F-module is disturbed. * Electromagnetic interference has exceeded limits. * An error occurred in the sign-of-life monitoring. Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 51H The firmware of the F-module has detected inconsistent iParameters. F_Block_ID not supported 52H The F-module detected an incorrect block Check the parameter assignment of ID. the PROFIsafe driver. Transmission error: Timeout (monitoring time 1 or 2 expired) 54H The F-module detected a timeout. * Possible causes: Check the parameter assignment. * Ensure that communication is functioning correctly. * The F-monitoring time is set incorrectly. * A bus fault is present. Check the parameter assignment. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 59 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Module is defective 100H Watchdog tripped 103H Meaning Remedy Possible causes: * Electromagnetic interference has exceeded limits. * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON. * The F-module has detected an internal error and has reacted in a safetyrelated manner. * If the F-module cannot be put back into operation, consider replacing it. Possible causes: * Electromagnetic interference has exceeded limits. * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON. * The F-module has detected an internal error and has reacted in a safetyrelated manner. * If the F-module cannot be put back into operation, consider replacing it. Internal supply voltage of the module failed 104H Internal voltage is too low. Replace the F-module. Common mode error 118H Voltage between two input channels is too high. Correct the input wiring. Invalid/inconsistent firmware present 11BH The firmware is incomplete and/or firmware added to the F-module is incompatible. This leads to errors or functional limitations when operating the F-module. * Perform a firmware update for the F-module. Note any error messages. * Use only firmware versions released for this F-module. Diagnostics memory overflow 13EH Overflow of the diagnostics memory. It Remedy the cause of the diagnostics was not possible to send all pending surge. diagnostics. This error can lead to deactivation of the F-module and even to switch off/on of the supply voltage. Analog input signal not recorded unique 304H Measured values from the sensor are not plausible. Check the interaction between the Fmodule and the sensor. Possible causes: Internal sensor supply shortcircuit to P 306H Overload or internal sensor supply short-circuit to M 307H * Increased EMC * F-module defective Possible causes: Check the process wiring. * Short-circuit of internal sensor supply to P * The internal sensor supply is overloaded. * Eliminate the short-circuit in the process wiring. * Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+. * Check the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit. * Check the BaseUnit. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 60 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Meaning Remedy Channel failure acknowledgment 30BH A channel fault was detected. Confirmation is required to enable the channel. Confirm the channel fault. No valid F-address available 30DH The F-source address and F-destination address stored in the electronic coding element cannot be accessed. Verify that the coding element is present. Replace the coding element, if necessary. F-address memory not accessible 30EH No valid PROFIsafe address is saved in the retentive memory. * In the case of initial commissioning or deliberate parameter change, assign the PROFIsafe address. * Check the consistency of the target and actual configuration. Possible causes: * Initial commissioning * Deliberate parameter change of the PROFIsafe address * Deviation between target and actual configuration of the plant. Undertemperature 312H The minimum permissible temperature limit has been violated. Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range (see Technical specifications (Page 64)) Discrepancy error 314H The discrepancy time set for 1oo2 operation has been exceeded. Check the discrepancy time, the sensors and the cabling. Possible causes of the discrepancy error: Read back failure 31EH * Incorrect parameter assignment * Wire break in the sensor's supply cable The F-module detected an internal error in the test connection. If the error persists, replace the Fmodule. Possible causes: * Increased EMC * F-module defective Auxiliary voltage too high 321H The supply voltage is too high. Check the supply voltage and then test the safety application. Auxiliary voltage too low 322H The supply voltage is too low. Check the supply voltage and then test the safety application. ADC error 331H Internal error during analog-digital conversion. If the error persists, replace the Fmodule. Possible causes: Fault in test connection 332H * Increased EMC * F-module defective The F-module detected an internal error in the test connection. If the error persists, replace the Fmodule. Possible causes: * Increased EMC * F-module defective Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 61 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Supply voltage outside the nominal range If the supply voltage L+ is outside the specified value range, the DIAG LED flashes and the module is passivated. When the voltage is then recovered (level must remain within the specified value for at least 1 minute (see Technical specifications (Page 64): Voltages, Currents, Potentials)), the DIAG LED stops flashing. The module remains passivated. Generally applicable information on diagnostics Information on diagnostics that pertains to all fail-safe modules (for example, readout of diagnostics functions or passivation of channels) is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 62 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.4 Value status 6.4 Value status Properties In addition to the diagnostic messages and the status and fault display, the F-module provides information about the validity of each analog input signal - the value status. The value status is entered in the process image along with the input signal. Value status for digital input and output modules The value status is the binary additional information of an analog input signal. The value status is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) at the same time as the process signal. It provides information about the validity of the analog input signal. The value status is affected by all faults. 1B: A valid process value is output for the channel. 0B: A fail-safe value is output for the channel, or the channel is deactivated. Note You may only access the addresses occupied by user data and value status. The other address areas occupied by the F-modules are assigned for functions including safety-related communication between the F-modules and F-CPU in accordance with PROFIsafe. 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors combines the two channels. With 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors, you can only access the low order channel in the safety program, e.g. channel 0. Assignment of the inputs and value status in the PII Each channel of the F-module is assigned a value status in the process image of the inputs. You can find the assignment in section Address space (Page 38). Reference A detailed description of the evaluation and processing of the respective input signals can be found in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 63 7 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Article number 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1 General information Product type designation F-AI 4xI 0(4) ... 20 mA 2/4-wire HF Firmware version * Yes FW update possible usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1 Color code for module-specific color identification plate CC00 Product function * Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 I&M data Engineering with * STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V15 with HSP 203 CiR - Configuration in RUN Reparameterization possible in RUN No Calibration possible in RUN No Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 0.38 A Current consumption, max. 0.4 A 24 V encoder supply * 24 V Yes; min. L+ (-1.5 V) * Short-circuit protection Yes * Output current, max. 300 mA; total current of all encoders/ channels Power Power available from the backplane bus 70 mW Power loss Power loss, typ. 2W Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 64 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1 Address area Address space per module * Inputs 14 byte; S7-300/400F CPU, 13 byte * Outputs 5 byte; S7-300/400F CPU, 4 byte Hardware configuration Automatic encoding * Electronic coding element type F Yes Analog inputs Number of analog inputs * For current measurement permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. 4 4 35 mA Input ranges (rated values), currents * 0 to 20 mA Yes * Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 125 * 4 mA to 20 mA Yes * Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 125 Cable length * shielded, max. 1 000 m Analog value generation for the inputs Measurement principle Sigma Delta Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel * Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit * Integration time, parameterizable Yes * Integration time (ms) 20 / 16,667 * Interference voltage suppression for interference 50 / 60 Hz frequency f1 in Hz Smoothing of measured values * Number of smoothing levels 7 * parameterizable Yes * Step: None Yes; 1x conversion cycle time * Step: low Yes; 2x / 4x conversion cycle time * Step: Medium Yes; 8x / 16x conversion cycle time * Step: High Yes; 32x / 64x conversion cycle time Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 65 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1 Encoder Connection of signal encoders * * for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes - 650 Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. Yes for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.1 % Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.023 %/K Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 C (relative to 0.1 % input range), (+/-) Operational error limit in overall temperature range * 2% Current, relative to input range, (+/-) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C) * 0.1 % Current, relative to input range, (+/-) Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %), f1 = interference frequency * Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. 40 dB * Common mode interference, min. 70 dB Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Yes, "Alarms/diagnostic messages" section in the manual Alarms * Diagnostic alarm Yes * Limit value alarm Yes Diagnostic messages * Monitoring the supply voltage Yes * Wire-break Yes; Measuring range 4 to 20 mA only * Short-circuit Yes Diagnostics indication LED * RUN LED Yes; Green LED * ERROR LED Yes; Red LED * Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; green PWR LED * Channel status display Yes; Green LED * for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED * for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 66 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1 Potential separation Potential separation channels * between the channels No * between the channels and backplane bus Yes * between the channels and the power supply of the electronics Yes Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vpp Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Highest safety class achievable in safety mode * Performance level according to ISO 13849-1 PLe * Category according to ISO 13849-1 Cat. 4 * SIL acc. to IEC 61508 SIL 3 Probability of failure (for service life of 20 years and repair time of 100 hours) - Low demand mode: PFDavg in accordance with SIL3 < 5.00E-05 - High demand/continuous mode: PFH in accordance with SIL3 < 1.00E-09 1/h Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C * vertical installation, max. 50 C Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 48 g Operational limit in complete temperature range WARNING When designing the safety function, you must take into account the information "Operational limit in complete temperature range" for the entire mission time. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 67 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Temperature characteristic values Note When the ambient temperature exceeds 55 C, you must only apply a maximum total current of 3 A to an adjacent F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF. Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits manual See also ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 68 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Response times A Introduction You will find the response times of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF below. The response times are included in the calculation of the F-system response time. Definition of response time for fail-safe analog inputs The response time results from the number of channels/channel pairs, the response time per channel/channel pair, the basic response time and the configured smoothing. Times required for the calculation Max. acknowledgment time (Device Acknowledgment Time): TDAT = 20 ms Basic response time: 20 ms Response time per channel - At 50 Hz: 25 ms - At 60 Hz: 22 ms Conversion cycle time = basic response time + (N x response time per channel) (N = number of active channels) The conversion cycle time is the time in which all activated channels are processed/converted once. Typical response time You can calculate the typical response time of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF using the following formula: Typical response time = Conversion cycle time x Smoothing Max. response time (worst case delay time, WCDT) You can calculate the maximum response time of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (worst case delay time, WCDT) using the following formula: Max. response time = 2 x Conversion cycle time x Smoothing Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 69 Response times Response time in the case of a fault (one fault delay time, OFDT) You can calculate the response time of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (one fault delay time, OFDT) as follows: According to the following formula if a discrepancy error is present: Typical response time = Conversion cycle time x Smoothing + Discrepancy time + Conversion cycle time Maximum response time = 2 x Conversion cycle time x Smoothing + Discrepancy time + 2 x Conversion cycle time According to the following formula if a channel fault is present: Typical response time = Conversion cycle time Max. response time = 2 x Conversion cycle time This means that, for OFDT, the time on occurrence of a discrepancy error should be taken with parameter assignment "1oo2 evaluation (max. SIL3/Kat.4/PLe)" and the time on occurrence of a channel fault should be taken with parameter assignment "1oo1 evaluation (max. SIL3/Kat.3/PLd)". Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 70 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB B Representation of analog values In this section we are presenting the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF analog input module. Measured value resolution The analog values are shown as fixed-point number in two's complement. The resolutions shown here are 16 bits including sign. Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values Resolution in bits 16 Values Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 71 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current measuring ranges. Table B- 2 Current measuring range 0 to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 32512 7F00H > 23.518 mA Overflow2 32511 7EFFH 23.518 mA Overrange . . . . . . 27649 6C01H 20.0007 mA 27648 6C00H 20 mA . . . . . . 614 266H 0.4442 mA 613 265H < 0.4442 mA . . . . . . 1 1H 723.4 nA 0 0H 0 mA Nominal range Wire break1 1 The F-module signals a wire break, 7FFFH for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. 2 In STEP 7 Safety, the fail-safe value 0 is provided in place of 7FFFH (for overflow) in the PII for the safety program. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) 72 Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB Representation of analog values B.1 Representation of analog values Table B- 3 Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA Values Current measur- Range ing range Dec. Hex. Diagnostics wire break: No Diagnostics wire break: Yes 32512 7F00H > 22.814 mA Overflow2 Overflow2 32511 7EFFH 22.814 mA Overrange Overrange . . . . . . 27649 6C01H 20.0006 mA 27648 6C00H 20 mA Nominal range Nominal range . . . . . . 1 1H 0 0H 4 mA + 578.7 nA -1 FFFFH 3.9994 mA Underrange Underrange . . . . . . -691 FD4DH 3.6 mA -692 FD4CH < 3.6 mA . . . . . . -6144 E800H 0.4444 mA -6145 E7FFH < 0.4444 mA 4 mA Wire break1 Underflow2 1 The F-module signals a wire break, 7FFFH for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or 0 for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. 2 In STEP 7 Safety, the substitute value 0 is provided in place of 7FFFH (for overflow) or 8000H (for underflow) in the PII for the safety program. Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) Manual, 08/2018, A5E41448857-AB 73 Digital output module ___________________ Preface F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136- 1 ___________________ Documentation guide 6DB00-0CA0) SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Applications of the F-I/O 5 ___________________ module Interrupts/diagnostic 6 ___________________ messages 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Response times B ___________________ Switching of loads 07/2013 A5E03858037-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03858037-01 08/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. General functions of the ET 200SP are described in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). The information provided in this device manual and the system manual enables you to commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Note the following identified notes: Note A note includes important information on the product described in the documentation, on handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which you ought to pay special attention. Security information Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous development. We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with respect to our product updates. Please find further information and newsletters on this subject at: (http://support.automation.siemens.com) To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine it is also necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or machine. Any third-party products that may be in use must also be taken into account. Please find further information at: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 3 Preface Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 4 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 1.1 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 4 5 6 7 Documentation guide for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF digital output module .................................7 Properties of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF ................................................................................. 9 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 13 3.1 Terminal assignment ....................................................................................................................13 3.2 Block diagram ..............................................................................................................................15 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................17 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.2.3 4.2.2.4 4.2.2.5 4.2.2.6 4.2.2.7 Explanation of parameters ...........................................................................................................19 F-parameters................................................................................................................................19 Parameters of the channels .........................................................................................................19 Maximal test period ......................................................................................................................19 Activated ......................................................................................................................................19 Max. readback time dark test .......................................................................................................20 Disable dark test for 48 hours ......................................................................................................22 Max. readback time switch on test ...............................................................................................23 Activated light test ........................................................................................................................25 Diagnosis: Wire break ..................................................................................................................26 4.3 Address space .............................................................................................................................27 Applications of the F-I/O module ........................................................................................................... 29 5.1 Applications of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF ............................................................................29 5.2 Application: Wiring a load to each digital output ..........................................................................29 5.3 Application: Connection of loads to L+ and M at each digital output ...........................................30 5.4 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output ....................................................31 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 33 6.1 Status and error display ...............................................................................................................33 6.2 Interrupts ......................................................................................................................................36 6.3 Diagnostic messages ...................................................................................................................38 6.4 Value status .................................................................................................................................42 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 43 Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 5 Table of contents A Response times .................................................................................................................................... 47 B Switching of loads ................................................................................................................................. 49 B.1 Connecting capacitive loads ....................................................................................................... 49 B.2 Switching of inductive loads ........................................................................................................ 50 Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 6 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 1 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation guide for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF digital output module Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular design and includes topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation of the ET 200SP system consists of different modules divided into system manuals, function manuals and manuals. The STEP 7 (online help) information system supports you in configuring and programming your automation system. Overview of documentation for the fail-safe digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF The table below lists additional documents that complement this description of the fail-safe digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF and are available on the Internet. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the fail-safe digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Topic Documentation Description of the system System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58649293) Most important contents * Application planning * Installation * Connecting * Commissioning * Approvals * TUV certificate BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Technical specifications Description of the SIMATIC Safety Fsystem Programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/54110126) * Configuring * Programming * Approvals SIMATIC manuals The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) for free download. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 7 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation guide for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF digital output module Functional Safety Services Siemens Functional Safety Services support you with a comprehensive package of services from risk assessment to verification all the way to plant commissioning and modernization. We also offer consultation on the use of fail-safe and fault-tolerant SIMATIC S7 automation systems. You will find more detailed information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/safety-services). Please send your questions to us by e-mail (mailto:safety-services.industry@siemens.com). Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 8 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Order number 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF module Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Properties Technical properties - Fail-safe digital module - 4 outputs, PM-switching (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) - Supply voltage L+ - Output current per output 2 A - Source output (PM-switching) - Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and signal lamps - Diagnostic display (DIAG red/green LED) - Status display for each output (green LED) - Fault display for each output (red LED) - Diagnostics, e.g., short circuit/wire break/load voltage missing, channel-specific - Channel-specific or passivation throughout the module - Direct interconnection to F-DI possible (single channel: SIL1, two-channel: SIL3) Supported functions - Firmware update - I&M identification data - PROFIsafe WARNING The fail-safe performance characteristics in the technical specifications apply to a proof-test interval of 20 years and a mean time to repair of 100 hours. If a repair within 100 hours is not possible, remove the respective module from the BaseUnit or switch off its supply voltage before 100 hours expires. The module switches off independently after the 100 hours have expired. Follow the repair procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 38). Accessories The following accessories, which are not included in the product package of the F-module, can be used with the F-module: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connection Additional information on accessories can be found in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 10 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Passivation of fail-safe outputs over a long period of time WARNING Unintentional activation of F-I/O with fail-safe outputs If an F-I/O with fail-safe outputs is passivated for a period longer than that specified in the safety parameters (> 100 hours) and the fault remains uncorrected, you need to exclude the possibility that the F-I/O can be activated unintentionally by a second fault, and thus place the F-system in a dangerous state. Even though it is highly unlikely that such hardware faults occur, you must prevent the unintentional activation of F-I/O with fail-safe outputs by using circuit measures or organizational measures. One possibility is the shutdown of the power supply of the passivated F-I/O within a time period of 100 hours, for example. The required measures are standardized for plants with product standards. For all other plants, the plant operator must create a concept for the required measures and have it approved by the inspector. Property of the individual shutdown of F-modules with fail-safe outputs: A channel-specific shutdown occurs when a fault is detected. It is also possible to react to critical process states staggered over time or to perform safety-related shutdown of individual outputs. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 12 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 3 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Terminal assignment for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 1 Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Description 1 DQ-P0 2 DQ-P1 * 3 DQ-P2 4 DQ-P3 DQ-Pn: Output signal, channel n, P-switching 5 DQ-P0 6 DQ-P1 * 7 DQ-P2 8 DQ-P3 9 DQ-M0 10 DQ-M1 DQ-Mn: Ground for output signal, channel n, Mswitching 11 DQ-M2 12 DQ-M3 13 DQ-M0 14 DQ-M1 15 DQ-M2 16 DQ-M3 L+ DC24V M M BaseUnit1 Color identification label (terminals 1 to 16) A0 CC02 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0 Usable BaseUnit types can be identified by the last two digits of their order number. See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O Systemsystem manual Note The first BaseUnit must be a light BaseUnit. Note The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 can trigger with the digital output module which renders the terminals useless. Make sure that you only use digital modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 13 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment Switching of grounded loads The F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF can switch loads with a connection between chassis and ground of at least 100 k. Otherwise a short circuit is detected. From the perspective of the F-module, the M-switch is bridged by the chassis-ground connection. Figure 3-1 Switching of grounded loads (resistance between chassis and ground) Alternatively, you can use F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module in which the output is configured as a PP-switching output. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 14 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Connecting 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram Figure 3-2 Block diagram F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 15 Connecting 3.2 Block diagram Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 16 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters WARNING Diagnostic functions should be activated or deactivated in accordance with the application. Table 4- 1 Parameters for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope F-parameters: Manual assignment of the F-monitoring time * disable * enable no Module F-monitoring time 1 to 65535 ms no Module F-source address 1 to 65534 no Module F-destination address 1 to 65534 no Module F-parameter signature (without address) 0 to 65535 no Module Behavior after channel faults no Module no Module F-I/O DB manual number assignment * Passivate entire module * Passivate channel * disable * enable F-I/O DB number -- no Module F-I/O DB name -- no Module no Module DQ parameters: Maximum test period * 100 s * 1000 s Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Channel parameters: Channel n Activated * disable * enable no Channel Max. readback time dark test 0.6 to 400.0 ms no Channel Disable dark test for 48 hours * disable no Channel * enable Max. readback time switch on test 0.6 to 5.0 ms no Channel Activated light test * disable no Channel * enable * disable no Channel * enable Diagnosis: Wire break Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 18 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 F-parameters F-parameters Information on F-parameters is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. 4.2.2 Parameters of the channels 4.2.2.1 Maximal test period With this parameter, you specify the time within which the light, dark and switch on tests (complete bit pattern test) should be performed throughout the module. When this time expires, the tests are repeated. In case of a fault, the test time is reduced to 60 seconds. Use "1000 s", for example, to conserve your actuators. Use "100 s" to detect faults more quickly. 4.2.2.2 Activated If you select this check box, the corresponding channel is enabled for signal processing in the safety program. You can deactivate an unused channel with this parameter. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.2.3 Max. readback time dark test Function Dark tests are shutdown tests with bit pattern test. For a dark test, a test signal is switched to the output channel while the output channel is active (output signal "1"). This output channel is then briefly disabled (= "dark period") and read back. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched on. Readback Figure 4-1 Functional principle of the dark test (PM switching) This parameter allows you to set the time for the readback. If the expected signals (P-readback and M-readback) could not be read back correctly after expiration of the readback time dark test, the output channel is passivated. No new process values are switched to the output channels while a bit pattern is still active (switch test is carried out). This means that a higher maximum readback time for the dark test increases the response time of the F-module. WARNING Through the configured readback time dark test, short circuits (cross-circuits) to a signal with a frequency greater than 1/(2 x configured readback time dark test) Hz cannot be recognized (50:50 sampling ratio). Short circuits (cross-circuits) to an output of the same module are recognized. The parameter also has an effect on the short circuit detection (cross-circuit) with "1" signal when the output signal is changed from "1" to "0" with the safety program. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 20 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Setting readback time dark test Because the fault reaction time is extended by the length of the readback time dark test, we recommend that you set the readback time dark test by trial and error as low as possible, but high enough that the output channel is not passivated. You determine the readback time required for your actuator with the diagram in the chapter Switching capacitive loads. If the capacity of the actuator is not known, it may be necessary for you to determine the value for the readback time light test by trial and error. This may also be necessary due to the part variances in the actuator or external influences. Proceed as follows: Set the readback time dark test so that the output channel can be read back correctly but your actuator does not respond yet. If the output channel is passivated sporadically, set a higher value for the maximum readback time dark test. If the output channel is passivated, the readback time dark test is too small for a connected capacitive load. The discharge cannot take place during the configured readback time dark test. Increase the readback time dark test. If you have set the readback time dark test to the maximum value of 400 ms and there is still a passivation of the output channel, there is either an external fault or the connected capacity is outside the permitted range. Test pulses of the dark test Figure 4-2 Test pulses of the dark test The interval between two test pulses is 100 ms. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.2.4 Disable dark test for 48 hours This option allows you to suppress the dark test. If the channel is permanently active (1) for 48 hours, a single dark test pulse is directed to this channel once the time has expired. You must provide the signal change from 1 to 0 at the channel yourself within 48 hours to prevent the dark test pulse. This also applies to the operating time if the operating time is < 48 hours. The dark test is suspended for another 48 hours after the signal change from 0 to 1. The dark test is permanently suppressed if the following condition is met: A signal change from 1 to 0 takes place before the 48 hours have expired. WARNING If an error caused by short-circuits (cross-circuits) is detected when you request the safety function (shutdown of the output), not only is this output passivated but all outputs are shut down and the module is passivated. This is necessary because a complete bit pattern test is not performed within 48 hours, which means an undetected error burst may not be ruled out. Consult the respective requirements of your product standards regarding error detection time. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 22 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.2.5 Max. readback time switch on test Function The switch on test is part of the bit pattern test. During the switch on test, the P-switch and M-switch of the output channel are alternately closed and read back when the output channel is inactive (output signal "0"). Contrary to the light test, no power flows through the connected load during the switch on test. Readback Figure 4-3 Functional principle of the switch on test (PM switching) This parameter allows you to set the time for the readback. If the signal was not read back correctly once the time has expired, the output channel is passivated. The switch on test detects the following faults: Short circuit to L+ with output signal "0" Short circuit to ground with output signal "0" WARNING Through the configured readback time, short circuits (cross-circuits) to an interfering signal with a frequency > 1 / (2 x configured readback time) Hz can be suppressed (50:50 sampling ratio). Short circuits (cross-circuits) to an output of the same module are recognized. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 23 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Setting readback time Because the fault reaction time is extended by the length of the set readback time, we recommend that you set the readback time by trial and error as low as possible but high enough that the output channel is not passivated. To determine the readback time required for your actuator, refer to the diagram in the section Switching capacitive loads. If the capacitance of the actuator is not known, you may have to determine the required value for the readback time switch-on test by trial and error. This may also be necessary due to the part variances in the actuator or external influences. Proceed as follows: Set the readback time switch on test in such a way that the output channel can be read back correctly but your actuator does not respond yet. If the output channel is passivated sporadically, set a higher value for the maximum readback time switch on test. If the output channel is passivated, the readback time is too small for a connected capacitive load. The charge of the capacitive load cannot take place during the configured readback time. Increase the readback time. If you have set the readback time to the maximum value of 5 ms and there is still a passivation of the output channel, there is either an external fault or the connected capacity is outside the permitted range. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 24 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.2.6 Function Activated light test Overload and wire break are detected with a 0 signal at the output. For a light test, a test signal is switched to the output channel while the output channel is inactive (output signal "0"). The output channel is switched on briefly during the light test (= "light period") and read back. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched off. Readback Figure 4-4 Functional principle of the light test (PM switching) In contrast to the switch on test, the P-switch and the M-switch switch at the same time during the light test and power flows through the connected load. If the readback signals are incorrect, the signal is present for the configured readback time at the output channel before the fault causes passivation of the output channel. If the signal was not read back correctly once the maximum readback time switch on test has expired, the output channel is passivated. No new process values are switched to the output channels while a bit pattern is still active (switch test is carried out). This means that a higher maximum readback time switch on test for the light test increases the response time of the F-module. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 25 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Test pulses of the light test Figure 4-5 Test pulses of the light test A light pulse with the configured duration takes place within the configured maximum test time per output channel. If a light pulse returns a fault, the same light pulse (which means the same bit pattern) is repeated once after 100 ms. If the fault is still present, the maximum test time is automatically reduced to 60 seconds and a diagnostic message is generated. If the fault is no longer present, the output channel is reintegrated after the next fault-free test cycle. 4.2.2.7 Diagnosis: Wire break You can use a wire break test to monitor the connection from the output channel to the actuator. Selecting this check box enables the wire break monitoring for the relevant channel. You also have to activate the light test to detect a wire break with an output signal "0". Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 26 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space Address assignment of the digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF The digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF occupies the following address areas in the F-CPU: Table 4- 2 Address assignment in the F-CPU Occupied bytes in the F-CPU: In input range In output range x + 0 to x + 4 x + 0 to x + 4 x = Module start address Address assignment of the user data and the value status of digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF The user data occupy the following addresses in the F-CPU out of all the assigned addresses of the digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF: Table 4- 3 Byte in the F-CPU x+0 Address assignment of user data in the input range Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- Value status DQ3 Value status DQ2 Value status DQ1 Value status DQ0 x = Module start address Table 4- 4 Address assignment of user data in the output range Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x+0 -- -- -- -- DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 x = Module start address Note You may only access the addresses occupied by user data and value status. The other address areas occupied by the F-modules are assigned for functions including safety-related communication between the F-modules and F-CPU in accordance with PROFIsafe. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 27 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Additional information For detailed information about F-I/O access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. See also Value status (Page 42) Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 28 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 5 Applications of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with the following applications. The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). 5.2 Application: Wiring a load to each digital output Each of the four fail-safe digital output consists of a P-switch DQ-Pn and an M-switch DQ-Mn. You connect the load between the P-switch and the M-switch. The two switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the load. This circuit achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. Figure 5-1 Wiring diagram for 1 relay each at 1 F-DQ of the digital output module FDQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF WARNING In order to achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with this wiring, you must install a qualified actuator, for example, in accordance with IEC 60947. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 29 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application: Connection of loads to L+ and M at each digital output 5.3 Application: Connection of loads to L+ and M at each digital output You can connect two relays using one fail-safe digital output. The following conditions should be kept in mind: Same reference potential The normally open contacts of the two relays must be connected in series. This configuration achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe (process status readback required). Figure 5-2 Wiring diagram for connecting 2 relays each to 1 F-DQ of the digital output module FDQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF WARNING When two relays are connected to one digital output, as shown in the figure above, the "wire break" and "overload" faults are detected only at the P-switch of the output (not at the M-switch). WARNING With a cross circuit between P-switch and M-switch of the output, the module detects the fault and switches off the output. But the actuator is still supplied with power due to the external fault. To avoid cross circuits between the P-switch and M-switch of a fail-safe digital output, you should always install the cables for the connection of the relays to the P-switch and Mswitch separately to prevent any cross circuits (for example, as separately sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts). Note The digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF performs a bit pattern test depending on the parameter assignment. For this, the module outputs up to 5 ms pulses depending on the parameter assignment. This test (switch-on test) is run with a time offset between the Pswitch and M-switch to prevent the actuator from being activated. This pulse may cause the corresponding relay to operated, which may reduce its service life. We therefore recommend adhering to the wiring scheme described below. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 30 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output 5.4 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output To protect against cross-circuits between P-switch and M-switch in fail-safe digital outputs, we recommend the following wiring scheme. This circuit achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. Figure 5-3 Wiring diagram for 2 relays each parallel at 1 F-DQ of the digital output module FDQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Note With a parallel connection of two relays on one digital output (as shown above) the "wire break" fault is only detected if the wire break disconnects both relays from P or M. This diagnostics is not safety-related. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 31 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 32 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 6 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green), channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 6-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostic messages can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 38). WARNING The DIAG LED and the channel status and channel fault LEDs of the outputs are not designed as safety-related LEDs and therefore may not be evaluated for safety-related activities. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 33 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display PWR LED Table 6- 1 Meaning of the PWR LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ available On DIAG LED Table 6- 2 Meaning of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not okay Off Module parameters not configured Flashing Module parameters configured and no module diagnostics On Module parameters configured and module diagnostics Flashing Channel status/channel fault LED Table 6- 3 Meaning of the channel status/channel fault LED Channel status Channel fault Meaning Process signal = 0 and no channel diagnostics Off Off Process signal = 1 and no channel diagnostics On Off Process signal = 0 and channel diagnostics Off On / Channel waiting for user acknowledgment Alternately flashing Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 34 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display Channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED Table 6- 4 Channel status Off Meaning of the channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED DIAG Flashing Flashing Flashing Channel fault All On Off Meaning The PROFIsafe address does not match the configured PROFIsafe address Identification of the F-module when assigning the PROFIsafe address Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 35 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts 6.2 Interrupts Introduction The F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF fail-safe digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The F-module generates a diagnostic interrupt for each diagnostic message described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 38). The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic interrupts of the F-module . The diagnostic interrupts are assigned either to one channel or the entire F-module. WARNING Before acknowledging the short circuit diagnostic message, remedy the respective fault and validate your safety function. Follow the fault remedying procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 38). Table 6- 5 Diagnostic interrupts of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Overtemperature 5D Parameter assignment error 16D Load voltage missing 17D Access to retentive storage of F-address not possible 30D Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D Invalid destination address (F_Dest_Add) 65D Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66D Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67D "F_SIL" parameter exceeds the application-specific SIL 68D "F_CRC_Length" parameter does not match the generated CRC 69D Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID 70D CRC1 error 71D Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D F_Block_ID not supported 76D Scope of diagnostic interrupt F-module Configurable No Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 36 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Internal error 256D Time monitoring activated 259D Internal supply voltage of the module failed 260D Output short-circuited to L+ 261D Output short-circuited to ground 262D Wire break 265D Incorrect/inconsistent firmware present. Firmware update required Scope of diagnostic interrupt Configurable Channel Yes 283D F-module No Switching frequency too high 785D Channel Undertemperature 786D F-module PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 792D F-module PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) 793D F-module PROFIsafe address assignment error 794D F-module Output defective 797D Readback error 798D Channel Overload 800D Channel Supply voltage too high 802D F-module Supply voltage too low 803D F-module Channel No Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 37 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic messages Module faults are indicated as diagnostics (module status). Note You can connect two actuators per output. The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring. This means: * a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected * a single short circuit affects both actuators. Once the fault is eliminated, the F-module must be reintegrated in the safety program. For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Table 6- 6 Diagnostic messages of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Diagnostic message Fault code Overtemperature 5D Meaning An excessively high temperature was measured in the F-module. Remedy Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range. (see Technical specifications (Page 43)) Once the fault has been eliminated, the F-module must be removed and inserted or the power switched OFF and ON Wire break Parameter assignment error Load voltage missing 6D 16D 17D Possible causes: * * There is an interrupted cable between * the module and actuator. * The channel is not connected (open). * There is a short circuit between channels with different signals. Parameter assignment errors include: * The F-module cannot use the parameters (unknown, invalid combination, etc.). * The F-module parameters have not been configured. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Establish a cable connection. Disable the wire break detection for the channel in the parameter assignment. Eliminate the short circuit. Correct the parameter assignment. * Check supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 38 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Access to retentive storage of F-address not possible 30D The F-destination address stored in the coding element cannot be accessed. Verify that the coding element is present or replace the coding element. Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a different F-destination address. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver and the address setting of the F-module. Invalid destination address (F_Dest_Add) 65D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid F-destination address. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid F-source address. Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid watchdog time. "F_SIL" parameter exceeds the application-specific SIL 68D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy between the SIL setting of the communication and the application. "F_CRC_Length" parameter does not match the generated CRC 69D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy in the CRC length. Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID 70D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect version of the F-parameters or an invalid F_Block_ID. CRC1 error 71D The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent F-parameters. Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent iParameters. Check the parameter assignment. F_Block_ID not supported 76D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect Block ID. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Internal error 256D Possible causes: * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * Replace the F-module. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * Replace the F-module. * Correct the process wiring. * Increase the test times (dark, light, switch-on tests). Internal supply voltage of the 260D module failed Output short-circuited to L+ 261D Meaning * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Possible causes: * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Short circuit to L+ can mean: * The output cable is short-circuited to L+. * The capacitive load is too high. Remedy Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 39 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Output short-circuited to ground 262D Incorrect/inconsistent firmware present. Firmware update required 283D Meaning Short circuit to ground can mean: Remedy * Correct the process wiring. * Increase the test times (dark, light, switch-on tests). The firmware is incomplete and/or firmware added to the F-module is incompatible. This leads to errors or functional limitations when operating the F-module. * Perform a firmware update for all parts of the F-module and note any error messages. * Use only firmware versions released for this F-module. * The output cable is short-circuited to ground. * The output signal is short-circuited to ground. * There is a short circuit between two output channels. * The capacitive load is too high. Switching frequency too high 785D The maximum switching frequency of the F-module has been exceeded. Reduce the switching frequency. (see Technical specifications (Page 43)) Undertemperature 786D The minimum permissible temperature limit has been violated. Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range. (see Technical specifications (Page 43)) PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 792D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a timeout. * Check the parameter assignment. * Ensure that communication is functioning correctly. * Check the communication connection between the F-module and F-CPU. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. Possible causes: PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) 793D * The F-monitoring time is set incorrectly. * Bus faults are present. The PROFIsafe driver has detected a CRC error. Possible causes: * The communication between the FCPU and F-module is disturbed. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * An error occurred in the sign-of-life monitoring. PROFIsafe address assignment error 794D An error occurred during the automatic PROFIsafe address assignment. Check the configuration. Output defective 797D The F-module has detected an internal error. * Possible causes: Increase the test times (dark, light, switch-on tests). * Check the wiring. * Replace the F-module. * The capacitive load is too high. * Short circuit to L+ or M * The F-module is defective Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 40 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Readback error 798D Overload 800D Meaning Remedy The F-module has detected an internal error. * Possible causes: Increase the test times (dark, light, switch-on tests). * If the error persists, replace the Fmodule. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The capacitive load is too high. * The F-module is defective. The maximum permissible output current has been exceeded. The output stage has been switched off. Check the process wiring. Possible causes: * A short circuit exists. Supply voltage too high 802D The supply voltage is too high. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage too low 803D The supply voltage is too low. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage outside the nominal range If the supply voltage L+ is outside the specified value range, the DIAG LED flashes and the module is passivated. When the voltage is then recovered (level must remain within the specified value for at least 1 minute (see Technical specifications (Page 43) Voltages, Currents, Potentials)), the DIAG LED stops flashing. The module remains passivated. Generally applicable information on diagnostics Information on diagnostics that pertains to all fail-safe modules (for example, readout of diagnostics functions or passivation of channels) is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 41 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.4 Value status 6.4 Value status Properties In addition to the diagnostic messages and the status and error display, the F-module makes available information about the validity of each input and output signal - the value status. The value status is entered in the process image along with the input signal. Value status for digital input and output modules The value status is additional binary information of a digital input or output signal. It is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) at the same time as the process signal. It provides information about the validity of the input or output signal. The value status is influenced by the wire break check, short-circuit, chatter monitoring, pulse extension, and plausibility check. 1B: A valid process value is output for the channel. 0B: A fail-safe value is output for the channel, or the channel is deactivated. Assignment of the inputs and value status in the PII Each channel of the F-module is assigned a value status in the process image of the inputs. You can find the assignment in section Address space (Page 27). Reference A detailed description of the evaluation and processing of the respective input signals can be found in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 42 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0 Product type designation F-DQ 4x24VDC HF General information Hardware product version 01 Firmware version V1.0.0 Product function I&M data Yes; IM0 to IM3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V12.0 STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version as of V5.5 SP3 / - PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.31 Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Rated value (DC) 24 V Low limit of permissible range (DC) 20.4 V High limit of permissible range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 75 mA; without load Current consumption, max. 21 mA; from backplane bus Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power Power consumption from the backplane bus 70 mW Power loss Power loss, typ. 4W Address space Address space per module Input 5 bytes Output 5 bytes Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 43 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0 Digital outputs Number of outputs 4 Digital outputs, configurable Yes Short circuit protection Yes * > 3.3 A Response threshold, typ. Wire break detection * Yes 8 mA Response threshold, typ. Overload protection * Yes 2.9 A Response threshold, typ. Voltage induced on current interruption limited to typ. 2*47V Switching capacity of outputs With resistive load, max. 2A With lamp load, max. 10 W Load resistance range Low limit 12 High limit 2000 Output voltage Type of output voltage DC For "1" signal, min. 24 V; L+ (-0.5 V) Output current For "1" signal, rated value 2A For "0" signal, residual current, max. 0.5 mA Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 30 Hz; symmetrical With inductive load, max. 0.1 Hz; acc. to IEC 947-5-1, DC13, symmetrical With lamp load, max. 10 Hz; symmetrical Total current of outputs Max. current per channel 2 A; (note derating data in the manual) Max. current per module 6 A; (note derating data in the manual) Length of cable Cable length, shielded, max. 1000 m Cable length unshielded, max. 500 m Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Fail-safe values can be switched to No Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes Diagnostic messages Diagnostics Yes, see section "Interrupts/diagnostic messages" in the manual Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 44 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0 Diagnostics display LED RUN LED Yes; green LED ERROR LED Yes; red LED Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation channels Between channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC Isolation Isolation test voltage 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates SIL acc. to IEC 61508 SIL 3 Suitable for safety functions Yes Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode Performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1 PLe Low demand (PFD) acc. to SIL3 < 2.00E-05 1/h High demand (PFH) acc. to SIL3 < 1.00E-09 1/h Environmental conditions Operating temperature Min. 0 C Max. 60 C Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C Storage/transport temperature Min. -40 C Max. 70 C Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 45 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0 Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 57 g Temperature characteristic values Mounting position Maximum temperature Total current across all channels Horizontal 40 C 6A 50 C 5A 60 C 4A 50 C 4A Vertical Note Because of the small size of the modules, pay attention to the development of heat between adjacent modules when output modules are exposed to elevated loads. If overtemperature occurs in an output module exposed to an elevated load, shutdown may result and reduce the plant availability. If you fully load an output module, the average total current of the modules directly adjacent to it should not exceed 75% of the values listed in the technical specifications. If you load directly adjacent modules with their maximum total current, reduce the maximum total current of the output module by 1 A (e.g., for horizontal installation up to 60 C total current of 3 A across all channels). Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 46 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Response times A Introduction The next section shows the response times of the digital output moduleF-DQ 4x24VDC HF. The response times of digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC HF are included in the calculation of the F-system response time. Definition of response time for fail-safe digital outputs The response time represents the interval between an incoming safety message frame from the backplane bus and the signal change at the digital output. Times required for the calculation Maximum cycle time: Tcycle = 15.5 ms You assign the dark test time and switch-on time in STEP 7. Maximum response time in the error-free case The maximum response time for fail-safe digital outputs in the error-free case is equal to: Maximum response time = 2 x Tcycle + Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) Maximum response time with error and change of user data Maximum response time = 3 x Tcycle + Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) Maximum response time with detection by bit pattern test Maximum response time = Tcycle + Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) + configured test time Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 47 Response times Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 48 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 Switching of loads B.1 B Connecting capacitive loads If an F-DQ 4x24VDC HF digital output module is interconnected with loads that require little current and have capacitance, this can lead to detection of a short circuit or overload. Reason: The capacitance cannot be sufficiently discharged or charged during the configured readback time of the bit pattern test. The typical trend shown in the diagram below represents the correlation between load impedance and maximum switched load capacitance at a supply voltage of 24 V DC. Figure B-1 Switching of capacitive loads for the F-DQ 4x24VDC HF digital output module depending on the configured dark and light test times Remedy for detecting a short circuit 1. Determine the load current and capacitance of the load. 2. Locate the operating point in the diagram above. 3. If the operating point is above the curve, you must increase the load current until the new operating point is below the curve by connecting a resistor in parallel. Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 49 Switching of loads B.2 Switching of inductive loads B.2 Switching of inductive loads Switching of inductive loads The diagram below shows the maximum permitted inductive loads as a function of the load current and switching frequency. Figure B-2 Switching of inductive loads for the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF digital output module depending on the load current and switching frequency Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) 50 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03858037-01 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Applications of the 5 ___________________ F-I/O module Interrupts/diagnostic 6 ___________________ messages ___________________ 7 Technical specifications Original operating instructions ___________________ A Response times ___________________ B Switching of loads 05/2017 A5E38578424-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E38578424-AA 05/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that affect the system in general are described in this system manual. The information in this manual and the system/function manuals provide support when you commission the system. A description of the F-system SIMATIC Safety can be found in the programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). Conventions CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it refers to both the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system as well CPUs / interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software " (STEP 7 TIA Portal)". Note the following identified notes: Note A note includes important information on the product described in the documentation, on handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which you ought to pay special attention. Standards You can find a dated reference to the respective standards in the certificate (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/57141281) or in the EC Declaration of Conformity (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/71764057) for the F-module. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 3 Preface Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system Note The operators of systems with safety-related characteristics must adhere to specific operational safety requirements. The supplier is also obliged to comply with special product monitoring measures. Siemens informs system operators in the form of personal notifications about product developments and properties which may be or become important issues in terms of operational safety. You should subscribe to the corresponding notifications in order to obtain the latest information and to allow you to make any necessary modifications to your system. Log on to Industry Online Support. Follow the links below and click on "Email on update" on the right-hand side in each case: * SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13751&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13828&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC WinAC RTX (F) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13915) * SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13716&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-1200/SIMATIC S7-1200F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13683&lc=en-WW) * Distributed I/O (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=14029&lc=enWW) * STEP 7 (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=14340&lc=en-WW) Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 4 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1 3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14 3.1 4 5 6 7 Properties ................................................................................................................................11 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.3 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.2.3 4.2.2.4 4.2.2.5 4.2.2.6 4.2.2.7 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................18 F-parameters ..........................................................................................................................18 F-parameters ..........................................................................................................................18 Behavior after channel fault ....................................................................................................18 Reintegration after channel fault .............................................................................................18 Parameters of the channels ....................................................................................................19 Maximum test period...............................................................................................................19 Disable dark test for 48 hours .................................................................................................19 Activated .................................................................................................................................20 Max. readback time dark test ..................................................................................................20 Max. readback time light test ..................................................................................................22 Activated light test ...................................................................................................................23 Channel failure acknowledge ..................................................................................................24 4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................24 Applications of the F-I/O module ........................................................................................................... 26 5.1 Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit ..........................26 5.2 Application: Wiring a load to each digital output .....................................................................27 5.3 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output ...............................................29 5.4 Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output................................31 5.5 Application: Connection of the ET 200SP digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) ..............................................................35 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 37 6.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................37 6.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................40 6.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................42 6.4 Value status ............................................................................................................................46 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 47 Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 5 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Table of contents A Response times .................................................................................................................................... 50 B Switching of loads ................................................................................................................................. 51 B.1 Connecting capacitive loads .................................................................................................. 51 B.2 Switching of inductive loads ................................................................................................... 53 Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 6 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 7 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 8 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 9 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 10 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties Article number 6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics 2D matrix code Connection diagram LEDs for channel status Function class Color identification module type Function and firmware version Color code to select the color identification labels Article number LED for supply voltage Figure 2-1 View of the module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 11 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical characteristics: Fail-safe digital module PROFIsafe Supports the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile on F-CPUs S7-1200/1500. PROFIsafe address type 2 8 outputs, PP-switching (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Supply voltage L+ Output current 0.5 A per output Sourcing output (PP-switching) Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and signal lamps Direct interconnection to inputs of an F-DI possible Diagnostics display (DIAG red/green LED) Status display for each output (green LED) Fault display for each output (red LED) Diagnostics - e.g., short-circuit, channel-specific - e.g. supply voltage missing, module-specific module-wide passivation The module supports the following functions: Firmware update I&M identification data WARNING The fail-safe performance characteristics in the technical specifications apply for a mission time of 20 years and a repair time of 100 hours. If a repair within 100 hours is not possible, remove the respective module from the BaseUnit or switch off its supply voltage before 100 hours expires. The module switches off independently after the 100 hours have expired. Follow the repair procedure described in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 42). Note Cyclic reading of I&M data Cyclic reading of I&M data can affect the timing of the F-modules. You should therefore avoid short read cycles of less than 500 ms. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 12 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Product overview 2.1 Properties Accessories The following accessory must be ordered separately: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connection Electronic coding element as spare part You can find additional information about accessories in the Distributed I/O System ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Passivation of fail-safe outputs over a long period of time WARNING Unintentional activation of F-I/O with fail-safe outputs If an F-I/O with fail-safe outputs is passivated for a period longer than that specified in the safety parameters (> 100 hours) and the fault remains uncorrected, you need to exclude the possibility that the F-I/O can be activated unintentionally by a second fault, and thus put the F-system in a dangerous state. Even though it is highly unlikely that such hardware faults occur, you must prevent the unintentional activation of F-I/O with fail-safe outputs by using circuit measures or organizational measures. One possibility is the shutdown of the power supply of the passivated F-I/O within a time period of 100 hours, for example. The required measures are standardized for plants with product standards. For all other plants, the plant operator must create a concept for the required measures and have it approved by the inspector. Property of the individual shutdown of F-modules with fail-safe outputs: A channel-specific shutdown occurs when a fault is detected. It is also possible to react to critical process states staggered over time or to perform safety-related shutdown of individual outputs. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 13 Connecting 3.1 3 Wiring and block diagram This section provides the block diagram of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF F-module with the terminal assignment. You can find information about the various connection options and their configuration in the section Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 26) or Parameters/address space (Page 16). You can find additional information about wiring BaseUnits in the Distributed I/O System ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Note The load group of the F-module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind as well during configuration. Note Make sure that you only use the digital output module with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 14 Connecting 3.1 Wiring and block diagram Block diagram The following figure shows the wiring of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF digital output module on BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals. Backplane bus interface Output electronics Mn P1, P2, AUX Reverse polarity protection DQ-PPn Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) Filter circuit supply voltage (available in light-colored BaseUnit only) Supply voltage L+ (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only) Supply voltage ground DIAG Ground for connection of actuator of channel n. Internal self-assembling voltage buses Connection to the left (dark-colored BaseUnit) Connection to the left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit) Output bit n, channel n, PP-switching (sourcing output) LED error of diagnostics (green, red) .0 to .7 LED channel status (green) F0 to F7 LED channel error (red) PWR LED Power (green) 24 VDC M Figure 3-1 Block diagram Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 15 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters for F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF WARNING Diagnostics functions should be activated or deactivated in accordance with the application, see section Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 26). The following parameters are possible: Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters Parameters Value range Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope F-parameters: Manual assignment of Fmonitoring time * disable * enable disabled No Module F-monitoring time 1 to 65535 ms 150 ms No Module F-source address 1 to 65534 depends on parameter assignment of F-CPU No Module F-destination address 1 to 65534 suggested by F-system No Module F-parameter signature (without addresses) 0 to 65535 calculated by F-system No Module Behavior after channel faults * Passivate the entire module Passivate channel No Module * Passivate channel * Adjustable (S7-300/400) Adjustable No Module * All channels automatically * All channels manually * disable disabled No Module * enable Reintegration after channel fault F-I/O DB manual number assignment (S7-1200/1500) All channels manually F-I/O DB number -- suggested by F-system No Module F-I/O DB name -- suggested by F-system No Module Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 16 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope DQ parameters: Maximum test period 1000 s No Module disabled No Module enable enabled No Channel Max. readback time light test / * dark test * 0.8 / 1.0 ms 0.8 / 1.0 ms No Channel Activated light test * enable enabled No Channel Channel failure acknowledge * Manual (S7-300/400) Parameter is not supported No Channel Disable dark test for 48 hours * 100 s * 1000 s * disable * enable * Channel parameters: Channel n Activated 3.0 / 5.0 ms * Automatic (S7-1200/1500) Manual The value range offered depends on the F-CPU in use and on the configuration of the F-parameter "Reintegration after channel fault". Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 17 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 F-parameters 4.2.1.1 F-parameters You must assign the PROFIsafe address (F-destination address together with F-source address) to the F-module before you put it into operation. You define the F-source address using the "Base for PROFIsafe addresses" parameter in the F-CPU. An F-destination address unique throughout the CPU is automatically assigned for each F-module. You can manually change the F-destination addresses assigned in the hardware configuration. You can find information on F-parameters for the F-monitoring time, the PROFIsafe address assignment (F-source address, F-destination address) and the F I/O DB in the manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). 4.2.1.2 Behavior after channel fault This parameter is used to specify whether the entire F-module is passivated or just the faulty channel(s) in the event of channel faults: "Passivate the entire module" "Passivate channel" 4.2.1.3 Reintegration after channel fault Use this parameter to select how the channels of the fail-safe module are reintegrated after a fault. Use in S7-300/400 F-CPUs This parameter is always set to "Adjustable" when you use the fail-safe module in S7300/400 F-CPUs. You make the required setting in the F-I/O DB of the fail-safe module. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 18 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Use in S7-1500 F-CPUs When using the fail-safe module in S7-1500 F-CPUs, you set this parameter in the STEP 7 dialog of the fail-safe module: "Adjustable" "All channels automatically" "All channels manually" If you have set the "Behavior after channel fault" parameter to "Passivate channel", you enable individual setting of the reintegration type per channel with the parameter assignment "Adjustable". The reintegration type of the respective channel is specified with the "Channel failure acknowledge" channel parameter. If you have set the "Behavior after channel fault" parameter to "Passivate the entire module", you can only select the same reintegration type for all channels. 4.2.2 Parameters of the channels 4.2.2.1 Maximum test period With this parameter, you specify the time within which the light, dark tests (complete bit pattern test) should be performed throughout the module. When this time expires, the tests are repeated. In case of a fault, the test period is reduced to 60 seconds. Use "1000 s", for example, to conserve your actuators. Use "100 s" to detect faults more quickly. 4.2.2.2 Disable dark test for 48 hours This option allows you to suppress the dark test. To suppress dark test pulses, you must ensure that all channels together carry the 0-signal once within the 48 hours. If this condition is not fulfilled, all dark test pulses will be applied anyway on all channels after expiration of this time. With 0-signal channels, the test pulses of light test continue to occur. WARNING When you use the function "Disable dark test for 48 hours", cross-circuits between channels with 1-signal are not detected. If an error caused by short-circuits (cross-circuits) is detected when you request the safety function (shutdown of the output), not only is this output passivated, but all outputs are shut down and the F-module is passivated. Also take into consideration the respective requirements of your product standards regarding error detection time. When you activate the parameter "Disable dark test for 48 hours", all channels use the values set for channel 0 for the parameter "Max. readback time light test / dark test". Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.2.3 Activated The channel is always activated for this F-module. 4.2.2.4 Max. readback time dark test Function Dark tests are shutdown tests with bit pattern test. For a dark test, a test signal is switched to the output channel while the output channel has the 1-signal. This output channel is then briefly disabled (= "dark period") and read back. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched on. Readback Figure 4-1 Functional principle of the dark test (PP switching) This parameter allows you to set the time for the readback. If the expected signals could not be read back correctly after expiration of the readback time dark test, the output channel is passivated. No new process values are switched to the output channels while a bit pattern is still active (switch test is carried out). This means that a higher maximum readback time for the dark test increases the reaction time of the F-module. WARNING Through the configured readback time dark test, short circuits (cross-circuits) to a signal with a frequency greater than 1/(2 x configured readback time dark test) Hz cannot be recognized (50:50 sampling ratio). Short-circuits (cross-circuits) to an output of the same module are recognized. The parameter also has an effect on the short-circuit detection (cross-circuit) with 1-signal when the output signal is changed from "1" to "0" with the safety program. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 20 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Setting readback time dark test Because the fault reaction time is extended by the length of the readback time dark test, we recommend that you set the readback time dark test as low as possible, but high enough that the output channel is not passivated. In case of the "Connecting a load per digital output" (Page 27) application, see the warnings and notes in the section describing the application. To determine the readback time required for your actuator, refer to the diagram in the section Switching capacitive loads (Page 51). Setting readback time dark test with unknown actuator capacity If the capacity of the actuator is not known, it may be necessary for you to determine the value for the readback time dark test by trial and error. This may also be necessary due to the part variances in the actuator or external influences. Proceed as follows: Set the readback time dark test so that the output channel can be read back correctly but your actuator does not respond yet. For verification use a 1-signal with a minimum duration that corresponds to the "Maximum test period". If the output channel is passivated sporadically, set a higher value for the maximum readback time dark test. If the output channel is passivated, the readback time dark test is too small for a connected capacitive load. The discharge cannot take place during the configured readback time dark test. Increase the readback time dark test. If you have set the readback time dark test to the maximum value of 5 ms and there is still a passivation of the output channel, there is either an external fault or the connected capacity is outside the permitted range. To increase availability, we recommend that you maintain an interval to the determined limit for the times. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Test pulses of the dark test The interval between two test pulses is 500 ms. * Output of test pulses only during test cycle. Figure 4-2 Test pulses of the dark test Note If the dark test detects an error, the affected channel is switched off with the error message "Short circuit to L+", all the other channels with the error message "Safety-related shutoff". 4.2.2.5 Max. readback time light test Function Short-circuit is detected with a 0-signal at the output. For a light test, a test signal is switched to the output channel while the output channel has the 0-signal. The output channel is switched on briefly during the light test (= "light period") and read back. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched off. Readback Figure 4-3 Functional principle of the light test Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 22 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters If the signal was not read back correctly once the maximum readback time light test has expired, the output channel is passivated. No new process values are switched to the output channels while a bit pattern is still active (switch test is carried out). This means that a higher maximum readback time light test for the light test increases the reaction time of the F-module. Test pulses of the light test * Output of test pulses only during test cycle. Figure 4-4 Test pulses of the light test A light pulse with the configured duration takes place within the configured maximum test period per output channel. If a light pulse returns a fault, the same light pulse (which means the same bit pattern) is repeated once after 500 ms. If the fault is still present, the maximum test period is automatically reduced to 60 seconds and a diagnostics alarm is generated. If the fault is no longer present, the output channel is reintegrated after the next fault-free test cycle. 4.2.2.6 Activated light test The light test is always enabled for this F-module. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 23 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.2.2.7 Channel failure acknowledge Use in S7-1500 F-CPUs This parameter is only relevant if the fail-safe module is operated on an S7-1500 F-CPU, and can only be set if the F-parameter "Behavior after channel fault" is set to "Passivate channel" and the F-parameter "Reintegration after channel fault" is set to "Adjustable". The value of this parameter specifies how the channel should react to a channel fault: Manual: A channel failure is reintegrated after manual acknowledgment. Automatically: The channel is reintegrated automatically after a channel fault. Manual acknowledgment is not necessary. Use in S7-300/400 F-CPUs The value of this parameter is not relevant in the case of operation on S7-300/400 F-CPUs. There you set the corresponding property at the F-I/O DB by means of the ACK_NEC tag. For detailed information about the F-I/O DB, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. 4.3 Address space Address assignment of the digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF The digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF occupies the following address areas in the F-CPU: Table 4- 2 Address assignment in the F-CPU Occupied bytes in the F-CPU: F-CPU In input range In output range S7-300/400 F-CPUs IB x + 0 to x + 4 QB x + 0 to x + 4 S7-1500 F-CPUs IB x + 0 to x + 5 QB x + 0 to x + 5 x = Module start address Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 24 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address assignment of the user data and the value status of digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF The user data occupy the following addresses in the F-CPU out of all the assigned addresses of the digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF: Table 4- 3 Address assignment of user data in the input range Byte in the FCPU IB x + 0 Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value status DQ7 Value status DQ6 Value status DQ5 Value status DQ4 Value status DQ3 Value status DQ2 Value status DQ1 Value status DQ0 x = Module start address Table 4- 4 Address assignment of user data in the output range Byte in the FCPU QB x + 0 Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DQ7 DQ6 DQ5 DQ4 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 x = Module start address Note You may only access the addresses occupied by user data and value status. The other address areas occupied by the F-modules are assigned for functions including safety-related communication between the F-modules and F-CPU in accordance with PROFIsafe. Additional information For detailed information about F-I/O access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. See also Value status (Page 46) Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 25 5 Applications of the F-I/O module You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with the following applications. The wiring is performed on the suitable BaseUnit. For more on this, see Connecting section in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). 5.1 Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit Interconnection Achievable fail-safe performance characteristics Single ground line Redundant ground line Connection of the load to the Mn terminal of the BaseUnit SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Not required Connection of the load to the ground of the BaseUnit SIL3/Cat.3/PLd SIL3/Cat.4/PLe In case of redundant installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnits, the ground connection to the BaseUnits must be installed as follows: When the fail-safe digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF is installed on a dark-colored BaseUnit, terminal M of this dark-colored BaseUnit must be additionally connected to the ground of the power supply. When the fail-safe digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF is installed on a light-colored BaseUnit, terminal M of the dark-colored BaseUnit installed to the right of the light-colored BaseUnit must be additionally connected to the ground of the power supply. WARNING When connecting the load to the ground of the power supply, you must run two ground lines between the power supply and the BaseUnits for safety reasons to achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. Otherwise, the maximum residual current at signal "0" (specified in the technical specifications) cannot be maintained if a single ground line is interrupted. See also Connecting (Page 14) Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 26 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application: Wiring a load to each digital output 5.2 Application: Wiring a load to each digital output Each of the 8 fail-safe digital outputs consists of two P-switches, which form a PP-switch DQ-PPn. You connect the load between the sourcing output DQ-PPn and ground. The ground may be the internal ground Mn or an external ground. The two P-switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the load. This circuit achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe see section Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit (Page 26). Backplane bus interface Reverse polarity protection Output electronics Figure 5-1 Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) Filter circuit supply voltage (available in light-colored BaseUnit only) Wiring diagram for one relay each to a F-DQ of the digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 27 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application: Wiring a load to each digital output WARNING In order to achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with this wiring, you must install a suitably-qualified actuator, for example in accordance with IEC 60947. WARNING The actuator can no longer be shut down if a cross circuit has developed between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn. To prevent cross-circuits between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, you must route the lines used to connect the actuators in a cross-circuitproof manner (for example, as separate, sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts). WARNING If there is cross-circuit to another output at a non-passivated, switched off output, a brief 1signal can occur with a duration of 2x max. cycle time (Tcycle) + Max. readback time dark test (Trb). If there is a cross-circuit between two outputs, the test pulses of light tests of the respective other output are also visible. With a different setting of the "Max. readback time light test" parameter, this can cause cyclically occurring 1-signals that last as long as the longest configured "Max. readback time light test". If the above mentioned 1-signals dangerously affect the plant when a cross-circuit occurs between outputs, you need to guard against the cross-circuits between the outputs with a cross-circuit-proof installation, for example, with separate sheathed cables or separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 28 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output 5.3 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output The ground may be the internal ground Mn or an external ground. This circuit achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe see section Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit (Page 26). Backplane bus interface Reverse polarity protection Output electronics Figure 5-2 Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) Filter circuit supply voltage (available in light-colored BaseUnit only) Wiring diagram for two relays in parallel to a F-DQ of the digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 29 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output WARNING The actuator can no longer be shut down if a cross circuit has developed between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn. To prevent cross-circuits between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, you must route the lines used to connect the actuators in a cross-circuitproof manner (for example, as separate, sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts). WARNING If there is cross-circuit to another output at a non-passivated, switched off output, a brief 1-signal can occur with a duration of 2x max. cycle time (Tcycle) + Max. readback time dark test (Trb). If there is a cross-circuit between two outputs, the test pulses of light tests of the respective other output are also visible. With a different setting of the "Max. readback time light test" parameter, this can cause cyclically occurring 1-signals that last as long as the longest configured "Max. readback time light test". If the above mentioned 1-signals dangerously affect the plant when a cross-circuit occurs between outputs, you need to guard against the cross-circuits between the outputs with a cross-circuit-proof installation, for example, with separate sheathed cables or separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 30 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output 5.4 Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output Each of the 8 fail-safe digital outputs can be connected to a fail-safe digital input of the type 1, 2 or 3 in accordance with IEC61131-2. In this application, the input delay of the fail-safe digital input must be set so that the light test and the dark test of the fail-safe digital output do not impair the fail-safe digital input. You can achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with this circuit. WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified fail-safe digital input, e.g. ET 200SP F-DI 8x24VDC HF. Input without ground return To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe see section Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit (Page 26). If the fail-safe digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF and the fail-safe digital input module are supplied by different power supply units, the grounds of the two power supply units must be connected to each other. Figure 5-3 Wiring diagram of an output of the digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF with an input of a fail-safe digital input module (without ground return). Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 31 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output WARNING To avoid an impermissible process value at the fail-safe digital input, the wiring must be installed so that an interruption of the connection between the ground of the fail-safe digital output module and the ground of the fail-safe digital input module can be excluded (e.g. redundant lines). WARNING In case of a cross-circuit between a positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, a 1-signal is permanently present at the fail-safe digital input. To prevent cross-circuits between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, you must route the lines used to connect the fail-safe digital inputs in a cross-circuit-proof manner, for example, as separate, sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts. WARNING If there is cross-circuit to another output at a non-passivated, switched off output, a brief 1-signal can occur with a duration of 2x max. cycle time (Tcycle) + Max. readback time dark test (Trb). If there is a cross-circuit between two outputs, the test pulses of light tests of the respective other output are also visible. With a different setting of the "Max. readback time light test" parameter, this can cause cyclically occurring 1-signals that last as long as the longest configured "Max. readback time light test". If the above mentioned 1-signals dangerously affect the plant when a cross-circuit occurs between outputs, you need to guard against the cross-circuits between the outputs with a cross-circuit-proof installation, for example, with separate sheathed cables or separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 32 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output Input with ground return To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe see section Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit (Page 26). In this application for potential-free, fail-safe digital inputs, the connection DIn- of the fail-safe digital input is returned to the internal ground Mn of the fail-safe digital output module. Figure 5-4 Wiring diagram of an output of the digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF with an input of a fail-safe digital input module (with ground return). WARNING In case of a cross-circuit between a positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, a 1-signal is permanently present at the fail-safe digital input. To prevent cross-circuits between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, you must route the lines used to connect the fail-safe digital inputs in a cross-circuit-proof manner, for example, as separate, sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 33 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output WARNING If there is cross-circuit to another output at a non-passivated, switched off output, a brief 1-signal can occur with a duration of 2x max. cycle time (Tcycle) + Max. readback time dark test (Trb). If there is a cross-circuit between two outputs, the test pulses of light tests of the respective other output are also visible. With a different setting of the "Max. readback time light test" parameter, this can cause cyclically occurring 1-signals that last as long as the longest configured "Max. readback time light test". If the above mentioned 1-signals dangerously affect the plant when a cross-circuit occurs between outputs, you need to guard against the cross-circuits between the outputs with a cross-circuit-proof installation, for example, with separate sheathed cables or separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 34 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.5 Application: Connection of the ET 200SP digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 5.5 Application: Connection of the ET 200SP digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) You can use any of the 8 fail-safe digital outputs to actuate one or more digital output modules F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A. Pay attention to the permitted current for the corresponding output channel and the total current over all outputs at the corresponding ambient temperature. To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe see section Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit (Page 26). For the operation of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A, the use of extended readback times is required (channel parameter Max. readback time light test / dark test with "3.0 / 5.0 ms"). Figure 5-5 Wiring diagram Note The output signals "OUT P, OUT M" of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A are looped through from "IN P, IN M" and should therefore be considered like the output signals of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF "DQ-PPn, Mn". For this reason, please observe the wiring rules for the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF. WARNING The digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A can no longer be shut down if a cross circuit has developed between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn. To prevent cross-circuits between positive potential (e.g. L+) and DQ-PPn, you must route the lines used to connect the digital output modules F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A in a crosscircuit-proof manner, e.g. as separate, sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 35 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.5 Application: Connection of the ET 200SP digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) WARNING If there is cross-circuit to another output at a non-passivated, switched off output, a brief 1-signal can occur with a duration of 2x max. cycle time (Tcycle) + Max. readback time dark test (Trb). If there is a cross-circuit between two outputs, the test pulses of light tests of the respective other output are also visible. With a different setting of the "Max. readback time light test" parameter, this can cause cyclically occurring 1-signals that last as long as the longest configured "Max. readback time light test". If the above mentioned 1-signals dangerously affect the plant when a cross-circuit occurs between outputs, you need to guard against the cross-circuits between the outputs with a cross-circuit-proof installation, for example, with separate sheathed cables or separate cable ducts. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 36 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 6 Status and error display LED display The following figure shows the LED display of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF. DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green), channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 6-1 LED display Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 37 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. You can find solutions for diagnostics alarms in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 42). WARNING The DIAG LED and the channel status and channel fault LEDs of the outputs are not designed as safety-related LEDs and therefore may not be evaluated for safety-related activities. DIAG LED Table 6- 1 DIAG Error display of the LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not okay Off Module parameters not configured Flashing Module parameters configured and no module diagnostics On Flashing Flashing * Module parameters configured and module diagnostics * Operation in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: At least one channel is waiting for user acknowledgment. * Operation in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: The F-module expects user acknowledgment after a module error. * Operation in S7-300/400 F-CPUs: The F-module is waiting for user acknowledgment. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 38 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display Channel status/channel fault LED Table 6- 2 Status display of the LEDs channel status / channel error Channel status Channel fault Meaning Process signal = 0 and no channel diagnostics Off Off Process signal = 1 and no channel diagnostics On Off Process signal = 0 and channel diagnostics Off On / * Operation in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: At least one channel is waiting for user acknowledgment. * Operation in S7-300/400 F-CPUs: At least one channel is waiting for user acknowledgment. Alternately flashing Channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED Table 6- 3 Channel status Off Flashing Status display of the LEDs channel status / DIAG / channel error DIAG Channel fault Flashing All On The PROFIsafe address does not match the configured PROFIsafe address Off Identification of the F-module when assigning the PROFIsafe address Flashing Meaning PWR LED Table 6- 4 PWR Status display of LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ available On Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 39 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts 6.2 Interrupts The fail-safe digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts The F-module generates a diagnostic interrupt for each diagnostics alarm described in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 42). The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic interrupts of the F-module . The diagnostic interrupts are assigned either to one channel or the entire F-module. WARNING Before acknowledging the short circuit diagnostics message, correct the respective fault and validate your safety function. In this case, follow the steps described in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 42). Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 40 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Table 6- 5 Diagnostic interrupts of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Scope of diag- Configurable nostics interrupt Overtemperature 5D F-module Error 9D Parameter error 16D Supply voltage missing 17D Safety-related shutoff 25D Channel/component temporarily unavailable 31D Mismatch of safety destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D Safety destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add) 65D Safety source address not valid (F_Source_Add) 66D Safety watchdog time value is 0 ms (F_WD_Time) 67D Parameter F_SIL exceeds SIL from specific device application 68D Parameter F_CRC_Length does not match the generated values 69D Version of F-parameter set incorrectly 70D CRC1 fault 71D Save iParameter watchdog time exceeded 73D Restore iParameter watchdog time exceeded 74D Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D F_Block_ID not supported 76D Transmission error: Inconsistent data (CRC error) 77D Transmission error: Timeout (watchdog time 1 or 2 expired) 78D Module is defective 256D Watchdog tripped 259D Short-circuit to L+ 261D Short-circuit to ground 262D Invalid/inconsistent firmware present 283D F-module Channel failure acknowledgment 779D Channel F-address memory not accessible 781D F-module Frequency too high 785D Channel Undertemperature 786D F-module Supply voltage too high 801D F-module Supply voltage too low 802D F-module No Channel No No Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 41 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostics alarms 6.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is generated for each diagnostics event and the F-module flashes the DIAG LED. You can read out the diagnostics alarm, for example, from the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You can evaluate the error codes using the user program. Note You can connect several actuators per output. If several actuators are connected to an output, the diagnostics of each actuator affects the other ones. In other words, a single short-circuit affects multiple actuators. Once the fault is eliminated, the F-module must be reintegrated in the safety program. For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Table 6- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and possible remedies Diagnostics alarm Fault code Overtemperature 5D Meaning An excessively high temperature was measured in the F-module. Solution Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range (see Technical specifications (Page 47)) Once the temperature has been reduced and returns to the specified range, the F-module must be removed and inserted or the power switched OFF and ON. Error 9D The F-module has detected an internal error and does not start. Replace the F-module. Parameter error 16D Parameter assignment errors include: Correct the parameter assignment. Supply voltage missing 17D * The F-module cannot use the parameters (unknown, invalid combination, etc.). * The F-module parameters have not been configured. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Operate the F-module within the specified supply voltage range. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 42 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarm Fault code Safety-related shutoff 25D Meaning For safety purposes, channel was switched off due to an error on another channel. Solution * Correct the process wiring. * Increase the test times (dark, light). Possible causes: * A short-circuit exists. * The capacitive load is too high. Channel/component temporarily unavailable 31D The firmware version of the F-module is inconsistent. Repeat the firmware update. Mismatch of safety destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D The firmware of the F-module has detected a different F-destination address. * Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver and the PROFIsafe address assigned to the F-module. * Assign the PROFIsafe address to the F-module (again). Safety destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add) 65D The firmware of the F-module has detected an illegal different F-destination address. Check the configuration/parameter assignment of the iPar server. Safety source address not valid (F_Source_Add) 66D The firmware of the F-module has detected a different F-source address. Safety watchdog time value is 0 ms (F_WD_Time) 67D The firmware of the F-module has detected an invalid watchdog time. Parameter F_SIL exceeds SIL from specific device application 68D The firmware of the F-module has detected a discrepancy between the SIL setting of the communication and the application. Parameter F_CRC_Length does not match the generated values 69D The firmware of the F-module has detected a discrepancy in the CRC length. Version of F-parameter set incorrectly 70D The firmware of the F-module has detected an incorrect F_Par_Version or an invalid F_Block_ID. CRC1 fault 71D The firmware of the F-module has detected inconsistent F-parameters. Save iParameter watchdog time exceeded 73D iPar server does not respond to "save IPar" within 4.4 minutes. Restore iParameter watchdog time exceeded 74D iPar server does not respond to "restore IPar" within 4.4 minutes. Check the configuration/parameter assignment of the iPar server. Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D The firmware of the F-module has detected inconsistent iParameters. Check the parameter assignment. F_Block_ID not supported 76D The firmware of the F-module has detected an incorrect block ID. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 43 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarm Fault code Transmission error: Inconsistent data (CRC error) 77D Meaning The firmware of the F-module has detected a CRC error. Solution * Check the communication connection between the F-module and FCPU. Possible causes: Transmission error: Timeout (watchdog time 1 or 2 expired) Module is defective Watchdog tripped Short-circuit to L+ 78D * The communication between the FCPU and F-module is disturbed. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * Power switched OFF and ON for station * An error occurred in the sign-of-life monitoring. * Assign the configuration and parameter assignment to the Fmodule (of the station). The firmware of the F-module has detected a timeout. * Check the parameter assignment. * Ensure that communication is functioning correctly. * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON Possible causes: 256D 259D 261D * The F-monitoring time is set incorrectly. * A bus fault is present. Possible causes: * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module has detected an internal error and has reacted in a safetyrelated manner. * If the F-module cannot be put back into operation, consider replacing it. * wrong BaseUnit * Use a BaseUnit of the type A0. * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * If the F-module cannot be put back into operation, consider replacing it. * Correct the process wiring. Possible causes: * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module has detected an internal error and has reacted in a safetyrelated manner. Short circuit to L+ can mean: * * The output cable is short-circuited to L+. The capacitive load between the channels is too high (for example, due to cable length or load current being too low). * Increase the test times (dark, light). * Pay attention to the warnings in Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 26). There is a short circuit between two output channels. You must eliminate the error within 100 hours; otherwise, the F-module is permanently passivated and an acknowledgment is no longer possible. * Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 44 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarm Fault code Short-circuit to ground 262D Meaning Short-circuit to ground can mean: Solution * Correct the process wiring. * Increase the test times (dark, light). * Check the actuator. The firmware is incomplete and/or firmware added to the F-module is incompatible. This leads to errors or functional limitations when operating the F-module. * Perform a firmware update for all parts of the F-module and note any error messages. * Use only firmware versions released for this F-module. * The output cable is short-circuited to ground. * The output signal is short-circuited to ground. * The capacitive load is too high. You must eliminate the error within 100 hours; otherwise, the F-module is permanently passivated and an acknowledgment is no longer possible. Invalid/inconsistent firmware present 283D Channel failure acknowledgment 779D A channel fault was detected. Confirmation is required to enable the channel. Confirm the channel fault. F-address memory not accessible 781D The F-source address and F-destination address stored in the coding element cannot be accessed. Verify that the coding element is present or replace the coding element. Frequency too high 785D The maximum switching frequency of the F-module has been exceeded. Reduce the switching frequency (see Technical specifications (Page 47)) Undertemperature 786D The minimum permissible temperature limit has been violated. Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range (see Technical specifications (Page 47)) Once the temperature has increased and returns to the specified range, the F-module must be removed and inserted or the power switched OFF and ON. Supply voltage too high 801D The supply voltage is too high. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage too low 802D The supply voltage is too low. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage outside the nominal range If the supply voltage L+ is outside the specified value range, the DIAG LED flashes and the module is passivated. When the voltage is then recovered (level must remain within the specified value for at least 1 minute (see Technical specifications (Page 47) Voltages, Currents, Potentials)), the DIAG LED stops flashing. The module remains passivated. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 45 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.4 Value status Generally applicable information on diagnostics Information on diagnostics that pertains to all fail-safe modules (for example, readout of diagnostics functions or passivation of channels) is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. See also S7 Distributed Safety - Configuring and Programming (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/22099875) 6.4 Value status Properties In addition to the diagnostics alarm and the status and error display, the F-module provides information about the validity of each input and output signal - the value status. The value status is entered in the process image along with the input signal. Value status for digital input and output modules The value status is additional binary information of a digital input or output signal. It is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) at the same time as the process signal. It provides information about the validity of the input or output signal. The value status is affected by a short-circuit and the plausibility check. 1B: A valid process value is output for the channel. 0B: A fail-safe value is output for the channel, or the channel is deactivated. Assignment of the inputs and value status in the PII Each channel of the F-module is assigned a value status in the process image of the inputs. You can find the assignment in section Address space (Page 24). Reference A detailed description of the evaluation and processing of the respective input signals can be found in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 46 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF 6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0 General information Product type designation Firmware version * FW update possible Usable BaseUnits Color code for module-specific color-coded label Product function I&M data Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version Supply voltage Rated value (DC) Low limit of permissible range (DC) High limit of permissible range (DC) Reverse polarity protection Input current Current consumption (rated value) Current consumption, max. Output voltage Rated value (DC) Power Power consumption from the backplane bus Power loss Power loss, typ. Address area Address space per module Inputs Outputs F-DQ 8x24 V DC/0.5 A PP HF Yes BU type A0 CC02 Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 V14 SP1 with HSP 202 Check the entry (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/vi ew/15208817). 24 V 20.4 V 28.8 V Yes 75 mA; without load 21 mA; from backplane bus 24 V 70 mW 3W 6 bytes; 5 bytes non-RIO for FA; 6 bytes RIO for FA 6 bytes; 5 bytes non-RIO for FA; 6 bytes RIO for FA Hardware configuration Automatic coding * Electronic coding element type F Yes Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 47 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0 Digital outputs Number of outputs Short-circuit protection * 8 Yes min. 0.7 A Response threshold, typ. Wire break detection Voltage induced on current interruption limited to Control of a digital input Switching capacity of outputs No Typ. -39 V Yes With resistive load, max. With lamp load, max. Load resistance range 0.5 A 2W Low limit High limit Output voltage 48 12000 For "1" signal, min. Output current For "1" signal, rated value For "0" signal, residual current, max. 24 V; L+ (-0.5 V) Switching frequency With resistive load, max. With inductive load, max. 0.5 A 0.5 mA For capacitive load, max. With lamp load, max. 30 Hz; symmetrical 0.1 Hz; according to IEC 60947-5-1, DC-13, balanced 2 Hz; balanced 10 Hz; symmetrical Total current of outputs Max. current per channel Current per module, max. 0.5 A; note derating information in the manual 3 A; note derating information in the manual Total current of the outputs (per module) Horizontal mounting position * Up to 40 , max. 3A * Up to 50 , max. 2.5 A * Up to 60 , max. 2A Vertical mounting position * 2A Up to 50 , max. Length of cable shielded, max. unshielded, max. 100 m 100 m Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics function Fail-safe values can be switched to Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes, see section "Interrupts/diagnostics alarms" in the manual No Yes Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 48 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Technical specifications 6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0 Diagnostics display LED RUN LED Yes; green LED ERROR LED Yes; red LED Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation channels Between channels No Between channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the voltage supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation test voltage 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode Performance Level according to ISO 13849-1 PLe Category according to ISO 13849-1 Cat. 4 SIL according to IEC 61508 SIL 3 Probability of failure (with a mission time of 20 years and time to repair of 100 hours) * Low demand mode: PFDavg according to SIL3 < 6.00E-05 * High demand/continuous mode: PFH according to SIL3 < 2.00E-09 1/h Environmental conditions Ambient temperature in operation Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C Dimensions Width 15 mm Weights Weight, approx. 48 g Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 49 A Response times Introduction You can find the reaction times of the F-DQ 8x24 V DC/0.5 A PP HF digital output module below. The reaction times of the F-DQ 8x24 V DC/0.5 A PP HF digital output module are included in the calculation of the F-system reaction time. Definition of reaction time for fail-safe digital outputs The reaction time represents the interval between an incoming safety message frame from the backplane bus and the signal change at the digital output. Times required for the calculation Max. cycle time: Tcycle = 8 ms Max. acknowledgment time (Device Acknowledgment Time): TDAT = 16 ms The maximum reaction time in the case of fault (One Fault Delay Time, OFDT) is equivalent to the maximum reaction time with no faults (Worst Case Delay Time, WCDT). Assign the parameters for maximum readback time dark test (Maximum Readback Time, Trb) and maximum readback time light test (Maximum Readback Time Light Test, Trb_lt) in STEP 7/in the TIA Portal. Operating mode: Disable dark test for 48 hours - disabled Maximum reaction time with no faults (Worst Case Delay Time, WCDT) t <= 4 * Tcycle Maximum reaction time with detection of a channel fault by readback t <= 6 * Tcycle + Trb Maximum reaction time with detection of a channel fault by bit pattern test t <= 2 * Tcycle + maximum test period Operating mode: Disable dark test for 48 hours - enabled Maximum reaction time with no faults (Worst Case Delay Time, WCDT) t <= 5 * Tcycle + Trb + Trb_lt Maximum reaction time with detection of a channel fault A channel fault may not be detected until a 0-1 process value change takes place on the corresponding channel. Please note the restrictions detailed in section Disable dark test for 48 hours (Page 19) Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 50 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Switching of loads B.1 B Connecting capacitive loads If an F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF digital output module is interconnected with loads that have an excessive capacitance, this can lead to detection of a short-circuit. Reason: The capacitance cannot be sufficiently discharged or charged during the configured readback time of the bit pattern test. The typical trend shown in the diagram below represents the correlation between load current and maximum switchable load capacitance at a supply voltage of 24 V DC. Figure B-1 Switching of capacitive loads for the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF digital output module depending on the configured max. readback time light test / dark test. Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 51 Switching of loads B.1 Connecting capacitive loads Remedy for detecting a short circuit 1. Determine the load current and capacitance of the load. 2. Locate the operating point in the diagram above. 3. If the operating point is above the trend, select an actuator with higher current consumption so that the new operating point is below the curve. Example You have configured a maximum readback time light test/dark test of "0.8 / 1.0 ms". You have set the load current to 20 mA and the capacity to 0.2 F. The operating point is thus outside the range defined by the trend (gray background). Solution: Select an actuator with higher current consumption. In this example, 40 mA. Alternatively, you can configure the parameter "Max. readback time light test / dark test" with "3.0 / 5.0 ms". Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) 52 Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA Switching of loads B.2 Switching of inductive loads B.2 Switching of inductive loads Switching of inductive loads The diagram below shows the maximum permitted inductive loads as a function of the load current and switching frequency. Figure B-2 Switching of inductive loads for the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF digital output module depending on the load current and switching frequency Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0) Manual, 05/2017, A5E38578424-AA 53 Digital output module ___________________ Preface F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A 1 ___________________ Guide to the documentation (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting up 4 ___________________ Addressing Applications of the F-I/O 5 ___________________ module 6 ___________________ Status and error display 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Response times 03/2014 A5E33267029-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33267029-AA 04/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of this documentation This manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. General functions of the ET 200SP are described in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). The information in this manual and the system manual supports you when commissioning the ET 200SP system. Conventions Pay particular attention to notes highlighted as follows:: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which you should pay special attention. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 3 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to the documentation .................................................................................................................... 5 1.1 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 7 2.1 3 4 6 3.1 Terminal assignment ..................................................................................................................... 9 3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 10 Addressing............................................................................................................................................ 11 A Address space ............................................................................................................................ 11 Applications of the F-I/O module ........................................................................................................... 13 5.1 Applications of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A .................................................................. 13 5.2 Application 1: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off .............................................................................. 15 5.3 Application 2: 1 load, single-pole switch-off ................................................................................ 17 5.4 Application 3: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 1 F-RQ module................................................... 19 5.5 Application 4: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules ................................................. 21 5.6 Application 5: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules ........................................... 24 Status and error display ........................................................................................................................ 27 6.1 7 Properties of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A ....................................................................... 7 Connecting up......................................................................................................................................... 9 4.1 5 Guide to the documentation for the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A ........ 5 Status and error display .............................................................................................................. 27 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 29 7.1 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 29 7.2 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions ............................................................................... 33 7.3 Switching capacity and service life of contacts ........................................................................... 34 Response times .................................................................................................................................... 35 A.1 Response times .......................................................................................................................... 35 Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 4 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 1 Guide to the documentation 1.1 Guide to the documentation for the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and includes topics relating to your automation system. The complete documentation of the ET 200SP system consists of different modules made up of system manuals, function manuals and device manuals. The STEP 7 (online help) information system supports you when configuring and programming your automation system. Overview of the documentation for the fail-safe digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A The table below lists additional documents that complement this description of the fail-safe digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A and that are available on the Internet. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the fail-safe digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Topic Documentation Description of the system System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58649293) Most important contents * Application planning * Installation * Connecting up * Commissioning * Approvals * TUV certificates BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Technical specifications Description of the SIMATIC Safety F-system Programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/54110126) * Configuring * Programming * Approvals Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 5 Guide to the documentation 1.1 Guide to the documentation for the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A SIMATIC manuals The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) for free download. Functional Safety Services Siemens Functional Safety Services support you with a comprehensive package of services from risk assessment and verification right through to plant commissioning and modernization. We also offer consultation on the use of fail-safe and fault-tolerant SIMATIC S7 automation systems. You will find more detailed information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Please e-mail any queries you may have e-mail (mailto:safety-services.industry@siemens.com). Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 6 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Article number 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A module Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 7 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Properties Technical properties - Digital module with 1 relay output (2 isolated NO contacts) - Safety class SIL3/category 4/PLecan be achieved if the F-RQ module is controlled by a fail-safe output (for example F-module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF) - Control voltage 24 VDC - Total current for both NO contacts 5 A max. - Isolated from control voltage - Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and signal lamps Supported system functions - I&M identification data - Firmware update WARNING The fail-safe performance characteristics in the technical specifications apply for a service life of 20 years and a repair time of 100 hours. If a repair within 100 hours is not possible, remove the module in question from the BaseUnit or switch off its supply voltage before 100 hours are up. Accessories The following components can be used with the module: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 8 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 3 Connecting up 3.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment for F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Terminal assignment for F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Description BaseUnit 1 RQ01+ [13] 2 RQ01- [14] * RQn+, RQn-: Channel n 3 RQ02+ [23] 4 RQ02- [24] * 5 -- 6 -- IN: Control input BU20P8+A4+0B 7 -- 8 -- * OUT: Control input for loopthrough 9 IN P 10 OUT P 11 IN M 12 OUT M 13 AUX 14 AUX 15 AUX 16 AUX Color identification label (terminals 1 to 16) CC42 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0 Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 9 Connecting up 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram Figure 3-1 Block diagram F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 10 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 4 Addressing 4.1 Address space Address assignment of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A The digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A occupies the following address ranges in the F-CPU: Table 4- 1 Address assignment in the F-CPU Occupied bytes in the F-CPU: in input range in output range x.0 and x.1 -- x = Module start address Address assignment of the user data of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Of the occupied addresses of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A, the user data occupies the following addresses in the F-CPU: Table 4- 2 User data address assignment in the input range Byte in the F-CPU x+0 Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-RQ module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- RQ1 RQ0 Inverted Readback readback channel channel (correspon ds to process signal at IN) x = Module start address Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 11 Addressing 4.1 Address space The user data is in the standard process image of the inputs and is not transferred to the F-CPU in safety-related communication. The readback channel in the user program is therefore displayed as a non-failsafe variable. Note With migration projects from the ET 200S product family, note the following: The readback channel RQ0 (bit 0) allows direct interconnection with the FDBACK instruction (F-block F_FDBACK) to its FEEDBACK input without additional inversion. The readback channel RQ1 (bit 1) is inverted. Additional information For detailed information about F-I/O access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety, Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 12 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 5 Applications of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A You can achieve SIL3/category 4/PLe in the following applications if the activating F-module supports SIL3/category 4/PLe. The wiring is carried out on the suitable BaseUnit (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300). Wiring the 24 VDC power supply Apply the 24 VDC control voltage to IN P (terminal 9) and IN M (terminal 11). The 24 VDC supply line is usually connected via a sourcing/sinking fail-safe output (e.g. digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF). Wire the P output (sourcing) of the F-DQ to the IN P of the F-RQ module and the M output (sinking)to the IN M of the F-RQ module. As an alternative, you can also connect to a sourcing-sourcing fail-safe output. However, note that external short-circuits to P at the P input cannot be controlled. In this case, IN M would be connected directly to the control voltage ground. NOTICE Connecting the control voltage to the IN P and IN M inputs with the reverse polarity will destroy the F-module. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 13 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Applications of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Wiring the load voltage and the load The connectors of the relay output are electrically isolated NO contacts. This means that power must be supplied to these contacts from an external source. Connect the load supply (supply 1) and the load (load 1) in series to the RQ01 connectors (terminals 1;2). This ensures that the NO contacts of the relay interrupt the current flow of the power supply through the load. Due to the two relay contacts connected in series, the current flow can still be interrupted if one of the two relays has a fault.. The second circuit is independent of the first. They are logically interconnected by the common control. This means that the potential in the RQ02 (terminals 3;4), supply 2 and load 2 circuit may be different. WARNING If you connect a non-SELV/PELV power supply to one channel, you must not use the other channel. Parameter assignment of the digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Assign the following parameters for the channel of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF digital output module to be activated: Table 5- 1 Parameter assignment Parameter Max. readback time dark test 1 ms Max. readback time switch on test 1 ms As the relays are highly inductive, you have the option of activating "Diagnostics: wire break" or "enable light test". Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 14 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 1: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off 5.2 Application 1: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off Wiring diagram Figure 5-1 Wiring diagram of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A to an F-DQ module In this application, you can use one F-RQ module for single-pole switching of two loads with a total of 5A and one/two SELV/PELV power supplies. WARNING * Always install an external fuse with the following properties to protect the relay contacts from overload and short-circuits: Fuse, 6 A, operating class gL/gG or C6A miniature circuit breaker, rated short-circuit current of 400 A. Note that for applications in accordance with EN 50156-1 the specified rated current of the overcurrent protective device must be multiplied by a safety factor of 0.6 to rule out the error "non-opening of contact elements due to permanent contact welding". Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 15 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Application 1: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off Reading back the relay contacts In the safety program, always compare the readback value returned by the F-RQ module with the control status. In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you can use the instruction "FDBACK: Feedback circuit monitoring" in your safety program (see the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual). F-RQ with integrated FEEDBACK input Relay contacts for switching the load Output Q Figure 5-2 Wiring example for the FDBACK instruction If the 24 VDC control voltage falls below the value required for relay pick-up or if the wire to the input connectors breaks, the relays are released and "1" is read back instead of "0". This fault is only detected if the F-DQ module output is switched on. If one of the two load contacts connected in series fails to open, "0" is read back by the module. The fault is detected by comparing this readback value with the setpoint "1" in the safety program. This fault is only detected if the control voltage is switched off. Note SIL3/category 4/PLe requires that there is a signal change at least once a month and that the process status is read back. SIL2/category 3/PLd requires that there is a signal change at least once a year and that the process status is read back. If a fault is detected during this function test, replace the F-RQ module. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 16 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 2: 1 load, single-pole switch-off 5.3 Application 2: 1 load, single-pole switch-off Wiring diagram Figure 5-3 Wiring diagram of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A to an F-DQ module This application allows single-pole switching of one load with a total of 5A with one F-RQ module. WARNING * Always install an external fuse with the following properties to protect the relay contacts from overload and short-circuits: Fuse, 6 A, operating class gL/gG or C6A miniature circuit breaker, rated short-circuit current of 400 A. Please note that for applications in accordance with EN 50156-1, the specified rated current of the overcurrent protective device must be multiplied by the safety factor 0.6 to rule out the error "non-opening of contact elements due to permanent contact welding". Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 17 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application 2: 1 load, single-pole switch-off Reading back the relay contacts In the safety program, always compare the readback value returned by the F-RQ module with the control status. In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you can use the instruction "FDBACK: Feedback circuit monitoring" in your safety program (see the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual). F-RQ with integrated FEEDBACK input Relay contacts for switching the load Output Q Figure 5-4 Wiring example for the FDBACK instruction If the 24 VDC control voltage falls below the value required for relay pick-up or if the wire to the input connectors breaks, the relays are released and "1" is read back instead of "0". This fault is only detected if the F-DQ module output is switched on. If one of the two load contacts connected in series fails to open, "0" is read back by the module. The fault is detected by comparing this readback value with the setpoint "1" in the safety program. This fault is only detected if the control voltage is switched off. Note SIL3/category 4/PLe requires that there is a signal change at least once a month and that the process status is read back. SIL2/category 3/PLd requires that there is a signal change at least once a year and that the process status is read back. If a fault is detected during this function test, replace the F-RQ module. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 18 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 1 F-RQ module 5.4 Application 3: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 1 F-RQ module Wiring diagram Figure 5-5 Wiring diagram for two F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A to one F-DQ module This application allows two-pole switching with one F-RQ module of one load with a maximum of 2.5A and an SELV/PELV power supply. WARNING * Always install an external fuse with the following properties to protect the relay contacts from overload and short-circuits: Fuse, 6 A, operating class gL/gG or C6A miniature circuit breaker, rated short-circuit current of 400 A. Note that for applications in accordance with EN 50156-1 the specified rated current of the overcurrent protective device must be multiplied by a safety factor of 0.6 to rule out the error "non-opening of contact elements due to permanent contact welding". Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 19 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Application 3: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 1 F-RQ module Reading back the relay contacts In the safety program, always compare the readback value returned by the F-RQ module with the control status. In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you can use the instruction "FDBACK: Feedback circuit monitoring" in your safety program (see the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual). F-RQ with integrated FEEDBACK input Relay contacts for switching the load Output Q Figure 5-6 Wiring example for the FDBACK instruction If the 24 VDC control voltage falls below the value required for relay pick-up or if the wire to the input connectors breaks, the relays are released and "1" is read back instead of "0". This fault is only detected if the F-DQ module output is switched on. If one of the two load contacts connected in series fails to open, "0" is read back by the module. The fault is detected by comparing this readback value with the setpoint "1" in the safety program. This fault is only detected if the control voltage is switched off. Note SIL3/category 4/PLe requires that there is a signal change at least once a month and that the process status is read back. SIL2/category 3/PLd requires that there is a signal change at least once a year and that the process status is read back. If a fault is detected during this function test, replace the F-RQ module. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 20 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.5 Application 4: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules 5.5 Application 4: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules Wiring diagram Figure 5-7 Wiring diagram for two F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A to one F-DQ module This application allows two-pole switching of one load with a max. of 5A with two F-RQ modules. WARNING * Always install an external fuse with the following properties to protect the relay contacts from overload and short-circuits: Fuse, 6 A, operating class gL/gG or C6A miniature circuit breaker, rated short-circuit current of 400 A. Note that for applications in accordance with EN 50156-1 the specified rated current of the overcurrent protective device must be multiplied by a safety factor of 0.6 to rule out the error "non-opening of contact elements due to permanent contact welding". Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 21 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.5 Application 4: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules Reading back the relay contacts In the safety program, always compare the readback value returned by the F-RQ module with the control status. In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you can use the instruction "FDBACK: Feedback circuit monitoring" in your safety program (see the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual). F-RQ with integrated FEEDBACK input Relay contacts for switching the load Output Q Figure 5-8 Wiring example for the FDBACK instruction If the 24 VDC control voltage falls below the value required for relay pick-up or if the wire to the input connectors breaks, the relays are released and "1" is read back instead of "0". This fault is only detected if the F-DQ module output is switched on. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 22 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.5 Application 4: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules If one of the two load contacts connected in series fails to open, "0" is read back by the module. The fault is detected by comparing this readback value with the setpoint "1" in the safety program. This fault is only detected if the control voltage is switched off. Note SIL3/category 4/PLe requires that there is a signal change at least once a month and that the process status is read back. SIL2/category 3/PLd requires that there is a signal change at least once a year and that the process status is read back. If a fault is detected during this function test, replace the F-RQ module. Program example For this application, program an FDBACK instruction for each F-RQ module as follows: Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 23 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.6 Application 5: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules 5.6 Application 5: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules Wiring diagram Figure 5-9 Wiring diagram for two F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A to one F-DQ module This application allows the single-pole switching of two loads with 5A each with two F-RQ modules. One power supply is not SELV/PELV. WARNING * Always install an external fuse with the following properties to protect the relay contacts from overload and short-circuits: Fuse, 6 A, operating class gL/gG or C6A miniature circuit breaker, rated short-circuit current of 400 A. Note that for applications in accordance with EN 50156-1 the specified rated current of the overcurrent protective device must be multiplied by a safety factor of 0.6 to rule out the error "non-opening of contact elements due to permanent contact welding". Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 24 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Applications of the F-I/O module 5.6 Application 5: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules Reading back the relay contacts In the safety program, always compare the readback value returned by the F-RQ module with the control status. In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you can use the instruction "FDBACK: Feedback circuit monitoring" in your safety program (see the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual). F-RQ with integrated FEEDBACK input Relay contacts for switching the load Output Q Figure 5-10 Wiring example for the FDBACK instruction If the 24 VDC control voltage falls below the value required for relay pick-up or if the wire to the input connectors breaks, the relays are released and "1" is read back instead of "0". This fault is only detected if the F-DQ module output is switched on. Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 25 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.6 Application 5: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules If one of the two load contacts connected in series fails to open, "0" is read back by the module. The fault is detected by comparing this readback value with the setpoint "1" in the safety program. This fault is only detected if the control voltage is switched off. Note SIL3/category 4/PLe requires that there is a signal change at least once a month and that the process status is read back. SIL2/category 3/PLd requires that there is a signal change at least once a year and that the process status is read back. If a fault is detected during this function test, replace the F-RQ module. Program example For this application, program an FDBACK instruction for each F-RQ module as follows: Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 26 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Status and error display 6.1 6 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green) Figure 6-1 LED display Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 27 Status and error display 6.1 Status and error display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. WARNING The DIAG LED and the channel status LED of the output are not designed as safety-related LEDs and therefore must not be evaluated for safety-related activities. DIAG LED Table 6- 1 Meaning of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK Off Module parameters not set Flashing Module parameters set and no module diagnostics On Channel status LED Table 6- 2 Meaning of the channel status LED Status Meaning Process signal = 0 Off Process signal = 1 On Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 28 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 7 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Technical specifications of F-RQ 1x24VDC/24...230VAC/5A 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0 Product type designation F-RQ 1x24VDC/24 ... 230VAC/5A General information Hardware product version 01 Firmware version V1.0.0 Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V13 STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 and higher Installation type/mounting Rail mounting possible Yes; standard mounting rail Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 VDC Rated value (DC) 24 V; coil voltage Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V Power Power consumption from the backplane bus 100 mW Power loss Power loss, typ. 1W Address range Address space per module Input 1 byte Digital outputs Number of outputs 1 Voltage induced on current interruption limited to No Control of a digital input Yes Switching capacity of outputs With resistive load, max. 5A With lamp load, max. 25 W Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 29 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0 Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 2 Hz With inductive load, max. 0.1 Hz; see information in the manual With inductive load (to IEC 60947-5-1, DC13), max. 0.1 Hz With inductive load (to IEC 60947-5-1, AC15), max. 2 Hz Total current of the outputs (per module) Horizontal installation * Up to 40 , max. 5 A; note derating information in the manual * Up to 50 , max. 4 A; note derating information in the manual * Up to 60 , max. 3 A; note derating information in the manual Vertical installation * 3 A; note derating information in the manual Up to 50 , max. Relay outputs Number of relay outputs 1; 2 NO contacts Rated input voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V Current consumption of relays (coil current of all relays), max. 70 mA External fuse for relay outputs Yes, 6 A, see information in the manual Relay approved acc. to UL 508 Yes; Pilot Duty B300 R300 Switching capacity of contacts * With inductive load, max. See additional description in the manual * With resistive load, max. See additional description in the manual * Thermal continuous current, max. 5A * Contact rating, min. 1 mA * Contact rating after exceeding 300 mA, min. 10 mA * Contact rating after exceeding 300 mA, max. 5A * Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V * Rated switching voltage (AC) 230 V Length of cable Cable length, shielded, max. 500 m; for load contacts Cable length unshielded, max. 300 m; for load contacts Control cable (input), max. 10 m Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Diagnostics messages Diagnostics Yes, firmware update Diagnostics display LED RUN LED Yes; green/red DIAG LED Channel status display Yes; green LED Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 30 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0 Electrical isolation Electrical isolation, channels Between channels Yes; only with SELV / PELV Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics Yes Permitted potential difference Between channels and backplane bus/supply voltage 250 VAC (reinforced insulation) Between backplane bus and supply voltage 60 VAC/75 VDC Insulation Insulation test voltage 2545 VDC 2 s (routine test) Overvoltage category III Tested with Between channels and backplane bus/supply voltage 2545 VDC 2s (routine test), surge voltage test 7200 VDC/5 positive and 5 negative pulses (type test) Between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 VDC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates Suitable for safety functions Yes Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode Performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 PLe Category according to ISO 13849-1:2008 4 SIL according to IEC 61508:2010 SIL 3 Low demand (PFD) acc. to SIL2 <1.00E-04, proof test interval 1 year Low demand (PFD) acc. to SIL3 <1.00E-05, proof test interval 1 month High demand (PFH) acc. to SIL2 <1.00E-08 1/h, proof test interval 1 year High demand (PFH) acc. to SIL3 <6.00E-09 1/h, proof test interval 1 month Dimensions Width 20 mm Weights Weight, approx. 56 g Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 31 Technical specifications 7.1 Technical specifications Supplement to the technical specifications Technical specifications Relay outputs Current consumption of relays (coil current of all relays), min. 20 mA Permitted potential difference * Between NO contacts 75 VDC / 60 VAC Insulation tested * Between the NO contacts 707 VDC (type test) Derating Note As the modules are small, you need to monitor the heat build-up between adjacent modules if output modules are subject to high loads. A temperature rise in an output module exposed to a high load can result in shutdown and reduce plant availability. If the operating voltage > 25 VDC, the average total current of the modules directly adjacent should not exceed 50% of the levels listed in the technical specifications, and the ambient temperature should not exceed 50 C. If the ambient temperature exceeds 50 C, supply voltage L+ must not exceed 25 VDC. Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 32 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Technical specifications 7.2 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions 7.2 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions In contrast to the specifications for mechanical environmental conditions and mechanical environmental conditions testing in the "Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions" section of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual, the following applies to this F-module: Mechanical ambient conditions The following table shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal vibrations. Table 7- 1 Mechanical ambient conditions Frequency band ET 200SP with BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5 f 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude 8.4 f 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration ET 200SP with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45/ BA 2xSCRJ Tests of mechanical ambient conditions The following table provides important information about the type and scope of the tests for ambient mechanical conditions. Table 7- 2 Tests of mechanical ambient conditions Check for ... Test standard Comment Vibration Vibration test Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of according to 1 octave/minute. IEC 60068-2-6 (sinus) * 5 Hz f 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude * 8.4 Hz f 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three vertically aligned axes Shock Shock, tested according to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: Half sine Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three vertically aligned axes Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 33 Technical specifications 7.3 Switching capacity and service life of contacts 7.3 Switching capacity and service life of contacts Switching capacity and service life of contacts You can extend the service life beyond the value indicated in the tables below by installing an external protective circuit. The tables below show the switching capacity and service life of the contacts. Table 7- 3 Switching capacity and service life of contacts with resistive load Voltage Current 24 VDC 230 VAC Table 7- 4 5.0 A 350000 3.0 A 500000 2.0 A 750000 1.0 A 1800000 0.5 A 4000000 5.0 A 100000 3.0 A 150000 2.0 A 200000 1.0 A 400000 0.5 A 800000 Switching capacity and service life of contacts with inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15 Voltage 24 VDC 230 VAC Table 7- 5 Duty cycles (typ.) NO contact Current Duty cycles (typ.) NO contact 1.0 A 100000 0.5 A 200000 1.0 A 200000 0.5 A 350000 B10d values AC 750000 DC 10000000 Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) 34 Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA Response times A.1 A Response times Introduction The section below shows the response times of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A. The response times of digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A are included in the calculation of the F-system response time. Definition of response time for fail-safe relay outputs The response time defines the interval between controlling by means of a fail-safe digital output module until the signal change at the relay output. Maximum response time without errors The maximum response time for fail-safe relay outputs when there are no errors is equal to: Max. response time = 16 ms Readback response time The readback response time for fail-safe relay outputs is equal to: Readback response time = 30 ms Maximum response time until error detection Max. response time = cycle time of the safety program + max. readback time of the FDBACK instruction + max. response time of the F-DQ module + max. response time of the F-RQ module + 12.8 ms Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0) Manual, 03/2014, A5E33267029-AA 35 Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP Fail-safe Modul F-CM AS-i Safety ST 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1 Edition 03/2017 siemens.com ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC ET 200SP Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual 2 ___________________ Safety instructions 3 ___________________ Product overview ___________________ 4 Connection ___________________ 5 Configuring Assigning parameters / ___________________ 6 Setting the address space Code sequences 7 Alarm, fault, and system ___________________ 8 events ___________________ 9 Technical specifications ___________________ A List of abbreviations ___________________ B References 03/2017 A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY 3ZX1012-0RK71-6CC1 03/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual complements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system system manual. General functions of the ET 200SP are listed in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en). The information provided in this device manual and the system manual enables you to commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 4 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide ................................................................................................................................. 7 2 Safety instructions ..................................................................................................................................... 9 3 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 13 4 5 6 3.1 Properties of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST ...................................................................................13 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.2.4 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST .......................................................................16 Standard mode .......................................................................................................................16 Error statuses..........................................................................................................................17 Serious device fault.................................................................................................................18 Device fault .............................................................................................................................19 Process signal error ................................................................................................................20 Parameter assignment error ...................................................................................................23 3.3 Firmware update .....................................................................................................................24 Connection .............................................................................................................................................. 27 4.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................27 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram .......................................................................................................31 Configuring .............................................................................................................................................. 33 5.1 Configuring the F-CM AS-i Safety ST .....................................................................................33 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 Safety-related communication with AS-Interface....................................................................35 Operating principle of code sequences of safe AS-i slaves ...................................................35 Operating principle of the safe AS-i outputs ...........................................................................36 5.3 AS-i bus configuration with multiple F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules ......................................38 5.4 Configuring with STEP 7 (classic) ..........................................................................................39 5.5 Configuring with the TIA Portal ...............................................................................................39 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space .................................................................................. 41 6.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................41 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................44 F-parameters ..........................................................................................................................44 Potential group / AS-i network ................................................................................................44 Module parameters - General .................................................................................................46 Module parameters - Safe inputs............................................................................................46 Module parameters - Safe outputs .........................................................................................52 6.3 6.3.1 Address space ........................................................................................................................54 Address assignment for user data and value status of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module ....................................................................................................................................54 Value status ............................................................................................................................56 6.3.2 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 5 Table of contents 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 7 8 9 A Code sequences ...................................................................................................................................... 75 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access ...................................................... 76 "Teach ASIsafe code sequences" dialog ............................................................................... 76 Transferring taught code sequences ..................................................................................... 80 "Progress of teaching operation" display ............................................................................... 80 7.2 Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button. ....................................................... 81 7.3 7.3.1 Final steps .............................................................................................................................. 82 Reintegrating passivated input channels ............................................................................... 82 Alarm, fault, and system events ............................................................................................................... 83 8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 83 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 LED statuses .......................................................................................................................... 84 Arrangement of the LEDs on the F-CM AS-i Safety ST ........................................................ 84 Meaning of the LEDs ............................................................................................................. 85 8.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 90 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 Replacement of defective devices ......................................................................................... 91 Replacing a safe AS-i input slave .......................................................................................... 91 Replacing the safe AS-i output module (evaluation unit) ....................................................... 91 Replacing the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module ......................................................................... 92 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................... 93 9.1 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support .............................................................. 93 9.2 Configuration software ........................................................................................................... 93 9.3 Safe technical specifications .................................................................................................. 94 9.4 Response times ..................................................................................................................... 95 9.5 Calculation of monitoring times and response times ............................................................. 97 List of abbreviations ................................................................................................................................. 99 A.1 B Data records for diagnostics .................................................................................................. 57 DS 92 Device-specific diagnostics ......................................................................................... 57 DS 202 Status safe inputs/outputs......................................................................................... 64 DS 204 Status code sequences............................................................................................. 66 DS 206 Diagnostic data record .............................................................................................. 69 List of abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 99 References ............................................................................................................................................ 101 B.1 References ........................................................................................................................... 101 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 102 Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 106 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 6 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 1 Documentation guide Introduction The following paragraph gives you an overview of the additional documentation you need to use the F-CM AS-i Safety ST. Documentation for the distributed I/O system ET 200SP with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Figure 1-1 Table 1- 1 Example of a system structure Documentation for the distributed I/O system ET 200SP with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST No. Component Documentation Most important contents System Fail-safe modules: * Product Information ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/78361093/0/en) Application planning * Installation * Connecting ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) * Commissioning * Technical specifications Fail-safe system: * Programming and Operating Manual S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) Configuration * Programming Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126/0/en) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 7 Documentation guide No. Component Documentation Most important contents BaseUnits SIMATIC ET 200 SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521/0/en) * Connecting * Technical specifications CM AS-i Master ST Manual CM AS-i Master ST for SIMATIC ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/71756485) * Commissioning * Technical specifications ET 200SP F-CM AS-i Safety ST fail-safe module Device manual ET 200SP F-CM AS-i Safety ST fail-safe module (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1) * Installation * Connecting * Configuration Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 8 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Safety instructions 2 Important safety instructions WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. For operation in Pollution Degree 2 environment. WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. When used in hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or an enclosure. To comply with EU Directive 94/9 (ATEX 95), this enclosure must meet the requirements of at least IP54 according to EN 60529. WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Wires must not be connected to the device or disconnected from the device within a flammable or combustible environment. WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Do not disconnect live wires from the device if it cannot be ensured that an explosive atmosphere is not present in the environment. WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Replacement of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 9 Safety instructions WARNING Explosion hazard; failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Do not open the device when the supply voltage is switched on. WARNING Connection only to safety extra-low voltage with limiting of output voltage to max. 40 V under fault condition Connect the BaseUnit only to an AS-i power supply unit that meets the conditions indicated in the Section "Power supply units for AS-Interface". Connection to a higher voltage may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. For this reason, you are only permitted to connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) with limited power source (LPS) according to IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-1, VDE 0805-1 to the supply connections. The supply of the device must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the National Electrical Code (r) (ANSI / NFPA 70). WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Take measures to prevent transient overvoltages of more than 40% of the rated voltage. You can ensure this by using only AS-i power supply units that meet the requirements indicated in Section Terminal assignment (Page 27) in "Power supply units for AS-Interface". Transient overvoltages are not permitted to exceed 119 V under any circumstances. This will ensure compliance with an ATEX requirement. CAUTION Failure to observe this information may result in property damage and bodily injury This device is only suitable for use in areas defined as Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D and is not suitable for use in hazardous areas. WARNING To be operated by experienced users only Improper operation may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Users must be familiar with ASIsafe and the safety system used, e.g., SIMATIC, Distributed Safety, SIMATIC Safety Advanced. Only an experienced user is permitted to teach the code sequences of safe AS-i slaves (organizational specification). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 10 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Safety instructions CAUTION Failure to observe this information may result in property damage and bodily injury This equipment is only suitable for use in areas defined as Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC and in non-hazardous areas. NOTICE Checking parameters Check that all parameters are correctly set before final acceptance. NOTICE Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules If you are using the module in safety-critical applications, the PROFIsafe mechanism of passivation and reintegration is enabled and must be used. Observe the information concerning passivation and other fault reactions in the documentation for the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System, see Section Documentation guide (Page 7). NOTICE Single-channel use of safe AS-i input slaves The values in the PROFIsafe process image input have Safety Integrity Level SIL 3. If two-channel interconnection is not used for a safe AS-i input slave, the application has a maximum safety integrity level of SIL 2 or less. The configuration tool / STEP 7 cannot detect this. You must ensure that the signals are correctly processed in the safety application. NOTICE Ensure that the plant is functioning correctly in productive operation Carry out a function test before the system goes into productive operation. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 11 Safety instructions Important note for maintaining the operational safety of the system Note Newsletter containing information on product development and product features Owners of systems with safety-related characteristics must ensure compliance with special operational safety requirements. Suppliers are required to comply with special product monitoring measures. For this reason, Siemens publishes a special newsletter containing information on product developments and features that are (or could be) relevant to operation of systems from a safety perspective. A newsletter keeps you constantly up to date in this regard. A subscription to the newsletter is necessary so that you can make any needed changes to your system. To sign up for the newsletter, go to: Internet (https://www.industry.siemens.com/newsletter) Select "Service & Support" > "Industry Online Support" > "Automation Technology" > "AS-Interface". Select the "Update" entry type. See also References (Page 101) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 12 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 3 Product overview 3.1 Properties of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Item number 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1 View of the module Figure 3-1 View of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module Use of the module The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is a communication module for use in the SIMATIC ET 200SP Distributed I/O System. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module features a 20 mm wide ET 200SP module housing. A BaseUnit (BU) is required for use in the ET 200SP. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module can be plugged in to: BaseUnit Type C0 BaseUnit Type C1 The F-CM AS-i Safety ST fail-safe communication module expands a standard AS-Interface network to include safety-related communication. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module reads the input states of safety-related AS-Interface input modules and provides these states to a fail-safe F-CPU for further evaluation. In the opposite direction, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module receives safe output states of an F-CPU and outputs them for control of safety-related outputs on AS-Interface. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 13 Product overview 3.1 Properties of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST The F-CM AS-i Safety ST fail-safe module supports safety-related applications up to SIL 3 according to EN 62061 or safety category up to PL e according to EN 13849-1. The input and output values of the safety-related AS-i slaves are addressed using the safe cyclic process image. You need an F-CPU for safe processing. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module has no AS-i master functionality. For operation of the ASi network, you need a CM AS-i Master ST module (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) or another AS-i master conforming to AS-i Specification V3.0. You can plug several F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules into one SIMATIC ET 200SP station. An F-CM AS-i Safety ST occupies 16 input bytes and 8 output bytes in the I/O address space. The number of F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules that can be plugged in depends on: The maximum address space of the utilized interface module (IM) of the ET 200SP The amount of address space occupied by other modules Up to five module combinations of CM AS-i Master ST (32 input bytes/32 output bytes) and F-CM AS-i Safety ST (16 input bytes/8 output bytes) can be plugged in to one SIMATIC ET 200SP station with standard interface module IM 155-6 PN ST having a maximum address space of 256 input bytes/256 output bytes. If other modules are present in the ET 200SP station, the available address space and the maximum number of AS-i modules are reduced. In a SIMATIC ET 200SP station with High Feature Interface Module IM 155-6 PN HF and a maximum address space of 1 440 input bytes/1 440 output bytes, a correspondingly greater number of modules can be plugged in. You can find additional information in ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 14 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Product overview 3.1 Properties of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Properties Technical properties - Gateway between PROFIsafe and ASIsafe, without master functionality - Expands a standard AS-i network to include safety-related communication (ASIsafe) - Transfer of safety-related digital I/O values in the cyclic process image - Monitoring of up to 31 safety-related input slaves - Control of up to 16 safety-related AS-i output slaves or switch-off groups - Power supplied from the AS-i voltage - Use of various interconnection types (1oo1 and 1oo2) is possible - Input delay of 0 ms to 150 ms can be assigned for each channel - Startup test can be activated for each channel - Discrepancy monitoring can be configured for each channel - Sequence monitoring can be set for each channel - Channel-wise passivation - Test for 0 signal before reintegration - 8 LED displays for status and error diagnostics Supported functions - I&M identification data - PROFIsafe V2.4 - Firmware update NOTICE Max. proof test interval When the proof test interval has expired, you must replace the device; see "Technical specifications (Page 93)". New properties as from FW V1.0.1 As from product version 02, the module is shipped with FW V1.0.1 (or higher). - Extended functions (diagnostic texts) - New messages - New diagnostics data record 206 For more information, see Section "Parameterizing (Page 41)". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 15 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Accessories The following components can be used with the module: Labeling strips Reference identification label Ease of maintenance The following features support maintenance: Code sequences are saved in the coding element. As a result, teaching of the code sequences does not have to be repeated after an F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is replaced. Use is automated to the greatest extent possible. This applies, in particular, to the teaching of the code sequences of safe AS-i slaves. An F-address that has already been assigned is stored in the coding element. This means that there is no need to repeat teaching-in after replacing the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. The module/BaseUnit concept allows you to easily replace defective hardware. Remove the defective module from the rack and plug in the new module. Further information can be found in the Section "Code sequences (Page 75)". Certifications More detailed information regarding certifications can be found in the ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en). 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST 3.2.1 Standard mode Self test during device startup After the AS-i voltage is switched on (PWR LED shows steady green light), the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module performs a comprehensive self-test. During this test, all LEDs are lit for approximately 3 seconds. Exception: the "DIAG" LED is controlled directly by the ET 200SP backplane bus and indicates the communication status for the ET 200SP system. Checking of the F-address After the self-test, the module checks the F-address. If no valid F-address is available, the "DIAG" and "PROFIsafe" LEDs flash red (the status LED flashes green). You must then assign the F-address, see Section "F-parameters (Page 44). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 16 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Downloading of the module parameters The F-CM AS-i Safety ST then begins to read in code sequences of the safe AS-i slaves on the connected AS-i bus. At the same time, the module downloads the module parameters that were stored in the PLC CPU. The module parameters can only be downloaded when the operating voltage is applied to the interface module of the ET 200SP and the parameters have been made available by the PLC CPU during startup of the ET 200SP station. The "Status" LED flashes green until the module parameters are completely downloaded or the PLC CPU is in STOP state, or the PLC communication is interrupted. Cyclic data exchange of safe input/output data When a valid set of module parameters has been downloaded and the PLC CPU is in "RUN" state, the safe input/output data is evaluated according the parameter assignment and exchanged with the PLC CPU. The PROFIsafe protocol is used for the data exchange. The "Status" LED is lit green during cyclic data exchange. If the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module starts cyclic data exchange directly after startup, but communication cannot yet be established on the AS-i bus, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module supplies the substitute value "0" in the input image. Passivation is delayed by a maximum of 30 s in this case. As a result, communication can start on the AS-i bus within this time window without passivation. After this time window, the input/output channels are passivated if there is no AS-i communication. 3.2.2 Error statuses Note Statuses not considered to be errors The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module does not consider the following statuses to be errors, i.e. no alarm and no passivation is triggered: * Waiting for start-up test * Input/output with value = 0 in the process image without error condition, e.g. normal opening of the input contacts by pressing an emergency stop button or opening a protective door. Diagnostic information can be read out in the user program using data records. For information, please refer to Section "Data records for diagnostics (Page 57)". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 17 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST 3.2.2.1 Serious device fault Description Examples of conditions that trigger a serious device fault are: Fault in the electronics Repeated synchronization error You can read the following pattern on the LEDs: Table 3- 1 LED LED display for a serious device fault Display "Status" "Off" "Error" Red "On" "CFG" Red "On" "PSF" Red "On" In the event of a serious device fault, communication with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, e.g., reading a data record, is not possible. The substitute value "0" is processed for inputs and outputs, and all channels are passivated. 1. Switch off the module. 2. Wait for the module to cool down, if necessary. 3. Switch on the device again. 4. If the error persists after the module is switched on, the module must be replaced. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 18 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST 3.2.2.2 Device fault Description Examples of conditions that trigger a device fault are: Device fault (e.g. sporadic synchronization error, see also DS92) Configuration error (e.g. problem with contact to backplane bus, coding plug missing, see also DS92) You can read the following pattern on the LEDs: Table 3- 2 LED LED display for device faults Display "Status" "Off" "Error" Red "flashes" "CFG" "Off" "PSF" "Off" In the event of a device fault of this type, communication with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is only possible. e.g., for reading out additional diagnostic information via data records. The substitute value "0" is processed for inputs and outputs, and all channels are passivated. Make sure that the station is properly grounded. Check whether the coding element is present or replace it if necessary. Plug the module into the BaseUnit in an untwisted position. Switch off the module. If the error persists after the module is switched on and no external error cause can be found, the module must be replaced. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 19 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST 3.2.2.3 Process signal error Description Examples of conditions that trigger a process signal error are: Discrepancy error at the inputs of a safe AS-i input slave Sequence error at the inputs of a safe AS-i input slave Sporadic code sequence error (from FW V1.0.1), e.g. fault caused by EMC in the input circuit Code sequence error at a safe AS-i input slave, e.g. due to cross-circuit at the inputs Failure of a safe AS-i input slave You can read the following pattern on the LEDs: Table 3- 3 LED LED display for discrepancy error or sequence error Display "Status" Green "On" "Error" "Off" "CFG" "Off" "PSF" Red "flashes" Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 20 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Table 3- 4 LED LED display for code sequence errors (e.g. due to cross-circuit) or for slave failure Display "Status" Green "On" "Error" "Off" "CFG" Red "flashes" "PSF" Flashes red if the CPU is in RUN "off" if the CPU is in STOP. In the event of a process signal error, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module remains in cyclic data exchange. Only at the safe input slave involved in each case is the substitute value "0" processed and the channel passivated. After the cause of the error has been eliminated, the channel can be reintegrated via the safety program. The "PSF" LED goes out only after all channels have been reintegrated. The "DIAG" LED switches from flashing red to green as soon as all errors that led to a passivation of the individual channels have been cleared. Communication with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is possible, for example, for reading out additional diagnostic information via data records. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 21 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Response to code sequence errors Sporadic code sequence error Momentary interruption to code sequence, e.g. due to electromagnetic interference on the sensor cable. Behavior as from firmware V1.0.1: - Sporadic code sequence error leads to passivation of the channel, which must then be reintegrated. - Safety input bit of the channel is reset to substitute value 0 until the channel is reintegrated. - The resetting to the substitute value 0 takes place without any delay. - Diagnostic alarm is triggered (after a short delay, in order to distinguish between sporadic code sequence errors and general code sequence errors). - Response to FW V1.0.0 - No message as diagnostic alarm in FW V1.0.0 and no passivation of the channel. - Safety input bit of the channel is reset to substitute value 0 without a delay and automatically switches to the process value 0 or 1 if there is no interference to the code sequence. Code sequence error (general) Permanent interruption to code sequence, e.g. due to electromagnetic interference on the sensor cable or code sequence corruption after replacement of the fail-safe input module. Behavior (identical for firmware V1.0.0 and V1.0.1 or higher): - Code sequence error leads to passivation of the channel, which must then be reintegrated. - Safety input bit of the channel is reset to substitute value 0 until the channel is reintegrated. - The reset to the substitute value 0 takes place without a delay, while the diagnostic alarm is triggered after a short delay (delay necessary in order to distinguish between sporadic code sequence errors and general code sequence errors). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 22 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Product overview 3.2 Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST 3.2.2.4 Parameter assignment error Description In the event of invalid configuration data, the cyclic data exchange will not start. You can read the following pattern on the LEDs: Table 3- 5 LED LED display for parameter assignment errors Display "Status" Green "flashing" "Error" "Off" "CFG" "Off" "PSF" Red "flashes" 1. Check the hardware configuration in STEP 7. 2. Perform a compilation. 3. Download the configuration data to the PLC CPU. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 23 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update 3.3 Firmware update Performing a firmware update Information about updating the firmware can be found in the ET 200SP System Manual. Note Noting the firmware version After a firmware update, mark the current firmware version on the housing of the FCM AS-i Safety ST. Note Requirement for the firmware update Always perform the firmware update of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST in a separate ET 200SP rack. Ensure that no other modules besides the interface module (IM), the F-CM AS-i Safety ST, and the terminating server module are located in the ET 200SP rack. During the firmware update of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, the associated CPU must be in the STOP operating state. To do this, switch the CPU to the STOP state before starting the firmware update. Note If the FW V1.0.0 is replaced by another FW version, then an intermediate step is necessary. If you would like to replace a higher FW version with FW version V1.0.0, then this intermediate step is also necessary. As an intermediate step, the Bootloader Version (B1.0.0) of the firmware must be loaded before the actual firmware V1.x.x. NOTICE Observe references to the download page for executing the firmware change Failure to do so can result in the destruction of the device. The firmware versions are made available in the Online Support: Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743655) NOTICE Checking the firmware version for F-permission Before using a new firmware version, check whether it is permitted for use in the respective module. The permissible firmware version is specified in the appendices of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Safety certificate. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 24 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update See also: Certificate for failsafe module F-CM AS-i Safety ST (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/90477145) Certificate for ET 200SP modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200) Handling of the F-address and the code sequences Note Saving of the F-address in the coding element During a firmware update, the F-address that is saved in the coding element is retained. Observe the information in the description of the firmware version. Note Saving of the code sequences in the coding element During a firmware update, the ASIsafe code sequences that are saved in the coding element are retained. Observe the information in the description of the firmware version. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 25 Product overview 3.3 Firmware update LED behavior during a firmware update During a firmware update, the LEDs exhibit the following behavior: "DIAG" LED flashes red. "ADDR" LED flashes green. "PWR" LED lights up green. The rest of the LEDs are Off. Note Supply voltage during a firmware update The AS-i voltage and the supply voltage of the ET 200SP station must not be switched off during a firmware update. On successful completion of a firmware update, the module performs a hot restart. It is not necessary to switch off the voltage. After the restart, the LEDs indicate the status of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST same as after a device startup. If the firmware update cannot be completed, switch the AS-i voltage off and back on again and repeat the firmware update. See also Error statuses (Page 17) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 26 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 4 Connection 4.1 Terminal assignment Requirement For connecting, you require a BaseUnit: Type C1 (dark BaseUnit, e.g., item number 6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1) Type C0 (light BaseUnit, e.g., item number 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0) Note that, within a BaseUnit group for AS-i consisting of light and dark BaseUnits, only the AS-i modules CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST may be combined. Other module types of the ET 200SP must always be separated from the BaseUnit group for AS-i using light BaseUnits. WARNING Connection of the BaseUnit only to safety extra-low voltage with limiting of output voltage to max. 40 V under fault condition Connect the BaseUnit only to AS-i power supply units that meet the requirements given in Section "Power supply units for AS-Interface". Connection to a higher voltage may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Variants Use with light BaseUnit Type C0 If the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is connected to an AS-i network whose AS-i master is located outside the ET 200SP station, use the light BaseUnit Type C0. If the AS-i master is located within the ET 200SP station, you can also use the light BaseUnit. However, you must wire the AS-i network explicitly using the connecting terminals. The light BaseUnit Type C0 has no internal connection to the module plugged in on the left. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 27 Connection 4.1 Terminal assignment Use with dark BaseUnit Type C1 If you are using a combination of CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST on the same AS-i network, use the dark BaseUnit. In this case, plug the CM AS-i Master ST module into a light BaseUnit Type C0. Next to it on the right, plug the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module into a dark BaseUnit Type C1. In this case, connect the AS-i network to the light BaseUnit. The dark BaseUnit does not have to be connected to the AS-i network because the connection is made automatically via the BaseUnit group. In contrast to other BaseUnit types, for the BaseUnits Type C0 and Type C1, the P1 and P2 busbars of the BaseUnit are electrically isolated from the front panel connecting terminals 1L/2L (ASI+) and 1N/2N (ASI-). An electrical connection is made in each case via the plugged-in CM AS-i Master ST module or F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. The AS-i voltage connected to the light BaseUnit Type C0 is applied through the plugged CM AS-i Master ST module to the busbars. The busbars of the BaseUnit group are connected-through. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is supplied with AS-i voltage via the busbars of the dark BaseUnit Type C1. It is not permitted to continue the AS-i voltage from the front panel connecting terminals 1L/2L (ASI+) and 1N/2N (ASI-) of the dark BaseUnit because this type of current draw can cause an overload in the modules. If you want to maintain the voltage supply of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module when the CM AS-i Master ST module is unplugged from the light BaseUnit, you can wire an external connection of the connecting terminals 1L/2L (ASI+) and 1N/2N (ASI-) between the light BaseUnit Type C0 and the dark BaseUnit Type C1. Grouping of a light BaseUnit Type C0 with several dark BaseUnits Type C1 The use of a single F-CM AS-i Safety ST module on an AS-i network is generally sufficient. If several F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules are being used on an AS-i network by means of series connected dark BaseUnits Type C1, you must wire an external connection of the connecting terminals 1L/2L (ASI+) and 1N/2N (ASI-) between the light BaseUnit Type C0 and a dark BaseUnit Type C1. This will prevent an overload of the modules. A current draw from the dark BaseUnit is not allowed. Additional information about this can be found in "Use with dark BaseUnit Type C1". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 28 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Connection 4.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 4- 1 Terminal assignment of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Terminal Assignment Description 1 TEACH1 Connection of the "TEACH" button (optional) 2 TEACH2 See Section Code sequences (Page 75). 3 RES Reserved 4 RES Reserved 5 RES Reserved 6 RES Reserved 1L, 2L1) ASI+ Dark BaseUnit Type C1: optional connection of the AS-i cable, positive polarity Light BaseUnit Type C0: connection of the AS-i cable, positive polarity 1N, 2N 1) ASI- Dark BaseUnit Type C1: optional connection of the AS-i cable, negative polarity Light BaseUnit Type C0: connection of the AS-i cable, negative polarity 1) The terminals are connected through in the BaseUnit. Connecting an external "TEACH" button You can connect a "TEACH" button to the "TEACH1" and "TEACH2" terminals of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. The "TEACH" button enables the transfer of code sequences of the connected safe AS-i input slaves. This function is activated by closing the button contact on the TEACH1 and TEACH2 terminals. The maximum cable length between the terminal and "TEACH" button is 0.5 m. Use two wires routed in parallel for connecting the button (not included in the scope of delivery). Additional rules and instructions for operating the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules Observe generally the information in Section "Connecting" in the following documentation: Manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) Product Information ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/78361093/0/en) The conditions for connecting sensors and actuators to the modules of the ET 200SP also apply generally to the connecting of sensors and actuators to the slaves and modules of the AS-i network. In addition, the information in the documentation of the AS-i component applies. Ensure that all components of the AS-i network are connected in such a way that the voltage applied to the safety-related AS-i modules is limited to a maximum of 40 V. The ET 200SP modules CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST have internal safe electrical isolation from the backplane bus of the ET 200SP. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 29 Connection 4.1 Terminal assignment Power supply units for AS-Interface A connected power supply unit must have the following properties: Rated output voltage 30 V DC (AS-Interface Standard) or 24 V DC (AS-i Power24V) PELV/SELV (Protective/Safety Extra-Low Voltage) standard Residual ripple < 250 mVpp Limiting of output voltage to a maximum of 40 V in the event of a fault, including a second fault. The Siemens power supply units for AS-Interface meet these requirements. For additional information, refer to the operating instructions of the power supply unit. Use an AS-Interface power supply unit with integrated data decoupling or a combination of a power supply unit that meets the above-indicated requirements and an AS-i data decoupling unit. In the following text, the expression "AS-i power supply unit" stands, unless described otherwise, for an AS-Interface power supply unit with integrated data decoupling or a combination of a power supply unit and an AS-i data decoupling unit. When AS-i Power24V is used, there are limitations on the cable length (max. 50 m AS-i cable) and usability of AS-i components and connected sensors/actuators due to the reduced voltage. Use a PELV / SELV power supply when operating the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module on PROFIsafe. Additional notes: AS-Interface System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26250840/0/en) FAQ "Compatibility for AS-i Power24V" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20025980/133000) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 30 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Connection 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram Schematic circuit diagram 1) AS-i cable: Connection not applicable for dark BaseUnit Figure 4-1 Schematic diagram of F-CM AS-i Safety ST Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 31 Connection 4.2 Schematic circuit diagram Connection to busbars Requirement: An AS-i power supply unit is connected to the light BaseUnit Type C0 of the BaseUnit group. A CM AS-i Master ST module is plugged into the light BaseUnit. If you plug an F-CM AS-i Safety ST module into a dark BaseUnit Type C1, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module will be automatically supplied with AS-i voltage via the busbars. It is not permitted to continue the AS-i voltage from the front panel connecting terminals 1L, 2L (ASI+) and 1N, 2N (ASI-) of the dark BaseUnit because this type of current draw can cause an overload of the modules. Note the additional explanations in Section Terminal assignment (Page 27). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 32 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 5 Configuring 5.1 Configuring the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Notes on configuration You configure the ET 200SP station and its F-CM AS-i Safety ST module and assign their parameters with STEP 7. There is currently no provision for configuration via a GSD file, because the GSD configuration procedure does not permit safety-related parameter assignment (according to PROFIsafe Specification V2.4). Note F-CM AS-i Safety ST in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 If the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is not listed in the hardware catalog of STEP 7 , you will need a "Hardware Support Package". This HSP can be obtained from the Internet using the corresponding function in STEP 7. Note Operation under S7 F systems is not approved. Note The data exchange with "F-DX-MOD" is not supported. Software for configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Configuration software Requirements Installation information STEP 7 (classic) V5.5 SP3 HF4 or Hardware Support Package HSP 20931) Online Help for STEP 7 higher with Distributed Safety Internet STEP 7 (classic) V5.5 SP4 or higher with Distributed Safety STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 or higher with Safety Advanced Hardware Support Package HSP 701) Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W W/view/en/29156492/133100) STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V14 or higher with Safety Advanced / Basic 1) Download optional, if not already contained in the hardware catalog Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 33 Configuring 5.1 Configuring the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Note Observe the online help on STEP 7. The "S7 F-Configuration Pack" can be found on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15208817). Procedure 1. Assign the parameters of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module according to your safety application. 2. Configure the AS-i Master in such a way that it includes all AS-i slaves in the communication - including the control addresses for safe AS-i outputs that are activated in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. 3. Download the hardware configuration to the PLC-CPU. 4. Assign the associated F-address to the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. 5. Start the teaching and transferring of the code sequences of the safe AS-i input slaves. 6. Create the safety program in the F-CPU. 7. Test your application. Information concerning these steps can be found in the following sections and in the manuals of the utilized devices. WARNING Failure to observe this information may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage Observe instructions in the programming and operating manuals Observe the instructions in the manuals. * Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety - Programming and Configuring (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126/0/en) * Programming and Operating Manual S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) See also HSP WinCC "classic" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23183356) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 34 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Configuring 5.2 Safety-related communication with AS-Interface 5.2 Safety-related communication with AS-Interface 5.2.1 Operating principle of code sequences of safe AS-i slaves For realization of safety-related communication, each safe AS-i input slave sends a code sequence over the AS-i bus. To prevent a mix-up of the AS-i input slaves on an AS-i bus, each AS-i input slave sends a different code sequence. The code sequences are permanently stored in the AS-i input slave. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module checks every code sequence for correct data content. Depending on the result of the evaluation, the module sets the the safe input image. During initial commissioning, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module must teach the code sequences of all safe AS-i input slaves present on the AS-i bus and transfer them to nonvolatile memory. In so doing, the module detects both the slaves for which input monitoring is activated as well as the other safe input slaves. After replacement of a safe AS-i input slave, the new code sequence must be taught and saved. If the code sequence is not saved for a safe AS-i input slave, or if the code sequence does not correspond to the saved code sequence, the input channel will be passivated and assigned the substitute value "0". As soon as the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module detects a new code sequence, the code sequences are automatically taught. Confirm the transfer of the code sequences into the memory to prevent unauthorized changes to the AS-i component. You will find more information about teaching code sequences, and the LED behavior, in Section "Code sequences (Page 75)". You can find a description of the individual parameters in the Section "Process signal errors (Page 20)". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 35 Configuring 5.2 Safety-related communication with AS-Interface 5.2.2 Operating principle of the safe AS-i outputs Safety-related communication for safe AS-i outputs also uses code sequences. However, they have a different data structure compared to the code sequences of safe AS-i input slaves. The code sequences for safe AS-i outputs do not have to be taught and transferred. For the function of a safe AS-i output, you need the following components: A control unit An evaluation unit Control unit The control unit outputs safety-related IN or OUT control commands to the AS-i bus. The control unit is integrated in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. The control unit assumes an active position in the communication. It acts like an AS-i slave and has an AS-i address that must be called by the AS-i master. The values in the output data of the AS-i master are not relevant in this case. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module inserts the safety-related control data into the communication data. Besides controlling the OFF state according to specification, a control unit can control up to four different output switching states: F-OUT 1, F-OUT 2, F-OUT 3, and F-OUT 4. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, however, makes available only the output switching state F-OUT 1, i.e., The OFF and ON states are controlled. In addition to the switching states, a control unit can send out two different auxiliary signals: AUX1 and AUX2. You can use these auxiliary signals for error acknowledgement in the evaluation unit. For technical reasons, the AUX1 and AUX2 signals are mapped in the safe process image output. The auxiliary signals are not safety-related signals, however. During control by the safety program, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module sends a sequence from each auxiliary signal one after the other on the AS-i bus. Up to 16 different control units can be activated in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. The control units are managed in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module as switching group 0 to switching group 15. If you want to use more than 16 different control units, you can plug two F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules into the ET 200SP station. Observe the information on the bus configuration in Section AS-i bus configuration with multiple F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules (Page 38). NOTICE Uniqueness of the AS-i address on the AS-i bus Carefully check the AS-i addresses for the control of the safe AS-i outputs. Ensure that the assigned AS-i address exists only once on the AS-i bus. This is particularly important when you are using multiple devices that can control safe AS-i outputs on the same AS-i bus. If this is not observed, reliable shutdown of a safe output module is not guaranteed. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 36 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Configuring 5.2 Safety-related communication with AS-Interface Evaluation unit The evaluation unit reads the safety-related control commands ON or OFF on the AS-i bus and passes corresponding switching commands, e.g., to switching contacts. In case of error, e.g., communication error on the AS-i bus, the evaluation unit switches off. The evaluation unit is integrated in the safe AS-i output module to which, for example, drive contactor coils are connected. The evaluation unit behaves as a passive unit in the AS-i communication. The master does not detect the evaluation unit and does not call it. The evaluation unit monitors the communication of the AS-i address of the control unit and reacts to its safetyrelated control signals. You set the AS-i address (see Section "Control unit") the evaluation unit is to monitor. You can set multiple evaluation units to the same address so that a control unit can control multiple safe output modules simultaneously. NOTICE Bus cycle time for safe AS-i outputs An evaluation unit requires a minimum AS-i bus cycle time. Ensure that at least 5 AS-i addresses are present on the AS-i bus. Otherwise, the control unit goes to error state. When A/B slaves are used, at least 5 different numerical AS-i addresses must be present. That is, a combination of slave addresses 1A and 1B count as 1 numerical address. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module does not have a monitoring function for this configuration rule. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 37 Configuring 5.3 AS-i bus configuration with multiple F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules 5.3 AS-i bus configuration with multiple F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module generates an additional physical bus load on the ASi cable. To avoid faults due to too low levels of the communication signals on the AS-i cable, the entire bus load on the AS-i cable must not exceed a maximum value. The following rules apply to the determination of the physical bus load on the AS-i cable: Device type Bus load value Slave with A/B address 0.5 Slave with standard address 1.0 F-CM AS-i Safety ST module 2.5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Maximum value as sum of all devices 35.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Determine the total bus load by adding the bus load values of the components connected to the AS-i cable. You do not have to include the standard AS-i master and AS-i power supply unit system components when calculating the bus load. To avoid disturbances, the maximum bus load must not exceed the value 35. The bus load value of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module remains unchanged if switching groups are activated in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module for control of safe outputs. In other words, the internally generated AS-i addresses do not influence the bus load value. If you connect additional components, e.g., an MSS 3RK3 modular safety system, to the AS-i cable, you must take into consideration the bus load values of these components. For more detailed information, refer to the relevant manual. When a repeater is used, this yields multiple cable segments for which the bus load can be determined separately. The following configuration examples result from the table: In a fully expanded AS-Interface network configuration (with 31 slaves with standard address), you can install 1 F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. In an AS-Interface network configuration with 30 slaves with standard address, you can install 2 F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 38 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Configuring 5.4 Configuring with STEP 7 (classic) 5.4 Configuring with STEP 7 (classic) With STEP 7 (classic) the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is configured independently of the configuration of further ET 200SP modules, e.g. CM AS-i Master ST. If a safe AS-i slave, which is not available on the connected AS-i network, is configured on the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, then this configuration error is not recognized when compiling the configuration. The F-CM module does not report that the slave cannot be detected until operation is in progress or code sequences are being read. 5.5 Configuring with the TIA Portal TIA Portal V13 SP1 With TIA Portal V13 SP1, an F-CM AS-i Safety module can only be configured in combination with an AS-i master, necessitating the configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7. The AS-i subnet of the AS-i master, including the configured AS-i slaves, must be linked to the configuration with the F-CM. The safety parameters of the AS-i input slaves are set in the properties window of the AS-i slaves. TIA Portal V14 or higher From TIA Portal V14 onwards, an F-CM AS-i Safety module can be configured: In combination with an AS-i Master, necessitating the configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7. The AS-i subnet of the AS-i master, including the configured AS-i slaves, must be linked to the configuration with the F-CM. The safety parameters of the AS-i input slaves are set in the properties window of the AS-i slaves. Regardless of an AS-i master, i.e. no configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7 is required. In this case, the parameters of the AS-i input slaves are set in the properties window of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. In the case of safe inputs/outputs, the "Configuration status" output field in the properties of the F-CM reports whether the configuration of the F-CM is compatible with the configuration of the connected AS-i subnet. If a safe AS-i slave, which is not available on the connected AS-i network, is configured on the F-CM module, then the compilation of the configuration is nevertheless still possible. During operation or when reading the code sequences, however, the F-CM module reports that the slave cannot be detected. The affected input address is passivated. Configuration of safe AS-i outputs The F-CM module contains a control unit for the safe AS-i outputs, see Section "Functional principle of the safe AS-i outputs (Page 36)". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 39 Configuring 5.5 Configuring with the TIA Portal TIA Portal V13 SP1 When configuring with TIA Portal V13 SP1, this control unit is not visible in the network view on the AS-Interface subnet of the AS-i master. The configuration of the F-CM module, however, is always combined with the AS-i master. TIA Portal V14 or higher In TIA Portal V14 or higher, the control unit must additionally be configured as a virtual slave on the AS-i subnet of the master, in the event that the AS-i slaves are configured in STEP 7. A virtual slave is inserted automatically if a safe AS-i output is activated in the properties of the F-CM module and the F-CM module is already linked with the AS-i subnet. If necessary, by using the "Add AS-i Slave to AS-i network" button, the virtual slave can be inserted in the properties of the F-CM module under "Safe outputs". If no AS-i subnet is connected to the F-CM when the "Add AS-i slave to AS-i network" button is actuated, a subnet is automatically inserted. The virtual slave can be managed like any other slave on the subnet, which means that all AS-i slave addresses existing in the AS-i subnet are visible. The virtual slave can be deleted if the control of the safe AS-i output is no longer required. If necessary, the virtual slave can also be inserted straight from the hardware catalog (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1F-DQ) into the subnet of the master. Note The virtual slave 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1F-DQ is not a hardware module that is connected to the AS-i cable, but only a tool for the configuration of the AS-i master. The AS-i address assigned to the virtual slave 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1F-DQ is emulated in the F-CM AS-i Safety module as soon as the corresponding safe output is activated in the properties of the F-CM. If the AS-i master is engineered without configuring the AS-i slaves in STEP 7, i.e. either configuration of the AS-i slaves via the "SET" button or via the control panel in the TIA Portal, then the secure outputs in the F-CM must be configured and must have been loaded into the station before the configuration of the AS-i slaves is read into the master by means of the "SET" button or via the control panel in the TIA Portal. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 40 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 6 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.1 Parameters List of parameters Table 6- 1 F-parameters Parameter F-monitoring time (ms) Value range Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope 1 ... 65534 ms 150 ms No F-CM AS-i Safety ST F-source address 1 ... 65534 Assigned by the F-system No F-CM AS-i Safety ST F-destination address 1 ... 65534 Is suggested by the F-system No F-CM AS-i Safety ST For information on the F-parameters and the assignment of the F-address, refer to the Programming and Operating Manuals: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) Table 6- 2 Potential group / AS-i network Parameter BaseUnit with AS-i voltage supply Value Potential group: The AS-i network of the left module (dark BaseUnit) is used Default setting The AS-i network of the left module (dark BaseUnit) is used Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope No F-CM AS-i Safety ST New potential group: New AS-i network (light BaseUnit) Table 6- 3 Module parameters: Behavior after channel faults Parameter Behavior after channel faults Value Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Passivate the channel (setting cannot be changed). Passivate the channel - F-CM AS-i Safety ST Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 41 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.1 Parameters Safe inputs Up to 31 safe AS-i input slaves are monitored. Open the settings for each required ASi address. Activate the input monitoring and assign the parameters. Table 6- 4 Module parameters: Safe inputs, AS-i address 1 to 31 Parameter Activate input monitoring I address Value Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Disable No If this parameter is not activated, none of the following settings are possible. Output field, value is calculated automatically - No Channel / safe AS-i input slave 0 ms, 0 ms No Channel / safe AS-i input slave 1oo2 evaluation No Channel / safe AS-i input slave Disable No Channel / safe AS-i input slave * "Disable" if 1oo1 evaluation No Channel / safe AS-i input slave * "Enable" if 1oo2 evaluation Supply "0" value - Channel / safe AS-i input slave Disable No Channel / safe AS-i input slave 500 ms No Channel / safe AS-i input slave Deactivated No Channel / safe AS-i input slave * Disable * Enable Input delay (ms) 50 ms ... 150 ms1) Sensor evaluation Startup test Discrepancy monitoring * 1oo1 evaluation * 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent * Disable * Enable * Disable * Enable Discrepancy behavior Discrepancy time infinite Supply "0" value2) * Disable * Enable Discrepancy time (ms) Sequence monitoring 0 ms ... 60 000 ms * Deactivated * In ascending order (input 1 before input 2 at HIGH state) * In descending order (input 2 before input 1 at HIGH state) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 42 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.1 Parameters Parameter Reintegration after discrepancy error Value Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Test 0 signal necessary on both channels2) Test 0 signal necessary on both channels - F-CM AS-i Safety ST - - - (read-only) Configuration status 1) In increments of 10 ms 2) The setting cannot be changed. Safe outputs You can activate up to 16 safe AS-i switching groups Open the settings for each required switching group. Activate the output control and set the associated AS-i address. Table 6- 5 Safe outputs: Switching group 0 to 15 Parameter Value Activate output control AS-i address * Disable * Enable Default setting Parameter reassignment in RUN Disable No If this parameter is not activated, none of the following settings are possible. No Channel / safe AS-i output slave 1 ... 31 Scope AS-i address switching output Output field, value is calculated automatically - No Channel / safe AS-i output slave AS-i address error acknowledgement Output field, value is calculated automatically - No Channel / safe AS-i output slave - - - Configuration status (read-only) You will find additional information in the Programming and Operating Manuals: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 43 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters 6.2 Explanation of the parameters 6.2.1 F-parameters Specify F-destination address for F-I/O of the PROFIsafe address type 2 The F-destination address of F-I/O of the PROFIsafe address type 2 is automatically assigned for every F-CPU. F-source address With the parameter "Central F-source address" you specify the F-source address for the FI/O of the PROFIsafe address type 2 assigned to this F-CPU. The F-source address must be unique throughout the network. Note A change to the parameter "Central F-source address" results in a modification to the safety program when it is recompiled. A new acceptance may therefore be required, as this centrally modifies the F-source address of all F-I/O devices of address type 2 retrospectively. See also S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126/0/en) 6.2.2 Potential group / AS-i network Here, you set: The BaseUnit you are using. How the F-CM AS-i Safety ST I/O module is connected to the AS-i network. The module can be connected to the AS-i cable by external wiring or automatically via the module plugged in on the left. Enable new AS-i network (light BaseUnit) Use AS-i network of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 44 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters BaseUnit with voltage supply Enable new AS-i network (light BaseUnit) Select this option if the module is plugged into a light BaseUnit. Connect the module to the AS-i cable (ASI+ / ASI-) via the BaseUnit. The module is supplied with voltage from the AS-i cable. Connect the AS-i cable to an AS-i power supply unit or to a combination of a data decoupling unit and a suitable power supply unit. There is no module-internal connection of the AS-i cable to the module plugged in on the left. With TIA Portal or with STEP 7 (classic) the F-CM AS-i Safety module is configured independently of the configuration of the module inserted on the left (normally: CM AS-i Master ST). WARNING Connection of the BaseUnit only to safety extra-low voltage with limiting of output voltage to max. 40 V under fault condition Connect the BaseUnit only to AS-i power supply units that meet the requirements named in Section Terminal assignment (Page 27), "Power supply units for AS-Interface". Connection to higher voltage may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Use AS-i network of the left module (dark BaseUnit) Select this option if the module is plugged into the dark BaseUnit. The module inserted on the left must be a CM AS-i Master ST module (normal situation) or another F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (special case). The module is connected to the AS-i cable of the module plugged in on the left and supplied with voltage via the module-internal connection. The module-internal connection is designed only for supplying power to the F-CM AS-i Safety ST I/O module. If several dark BaseUnits are connected in series, a direct connection of the dark BaseUnits to the AS-i cable using external wiring is additionally recommended. Supplying power to AS-i modules, e.g., AS-i slaves, via the terminals of the dark BaseUnit is not permitted. With TIA Portal, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module uses the same AS-Interface subnet as the module inserted on the left (normally: CM AS-i Master ST). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 45 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters With STEP 7 (classic) the F-CM AS-i Safety module is configured independently of the configuration of the module inserted on the left (as a rule: CM AS-i Master ST). WARNING Connection of the BaseUnit only to safety extra-low voltage with limiting of output voltage to max. 40 V under fault condition Connect the BaseUnit only to AS-i power supply units that meet the requirements named in Section Terminal assignment (Page 27), "Power supply units for AS-Interface". Connection to higher voltage may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. 6.2.3 Module parameters - General Behavior after channel faults This parameter is permanently set to "Passivate the channel". After channel faults have occurred, only the faulty PROFIsafe channels are passivated. The PROFIsafe channel corresponds to the safe input and output address in the process image. 6.2.4 Module parameters - Safe inputs Configuration status A valid evaluation is only possible if a compatible safe AS-i slave is actively operating on the network. Input monitoring where there is a missing safe input or a missing AS-i slave causes a passivation of the input address. If no configuration of the slaves is saved in the STEP 7 project, the settings of the AS-i master must ensure that the connected compatible safe AS-i slave is actively operating, for example, using the "SET" button of the master. Input monitoring activated With activation of the input monitoring, you activate the corresponding AS-i slave as an input channel for signal processing in the safety program. The AS-i address must be assigned to a safe AS-i input slave. When the input monitoring is activated, the value of the input channel is calculated based on the input states of the assigned safe AS-i input slave and the evaluation conditions specified by the parameter assignment. If a fault occurs, the substitute value "0" is transferred and the channel is passivated. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 46 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters If input monitoring is deactivated, the substitute value "0" is transferred. The channel is not passivated. If required, the AS-i slave can be monitored by another evaluation module, e.g., by another F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, the 3RK3 Modular Safety System. This applies both when input monitoring is deactivated and when it is activated. Note Call of the AS-i slave The AS-i slave must be called by the AS-i master. Set up the configuration of the AS-i master in such a way that the communication of the AS-i master with the AS-i address functions properly. Note Slave profile A safe AS-i input slave has the slave profile (IO.ID) = 0.B or 7.B. I address The input bit address of the input channel for the signal processing in the safety program is indicated here. It is calculated automatically from the start of the inputs entered on the "Addresses" tab. Input delay To suppress coupled-in interference or brief switching pulses, you can set an input delay for each AS-i slave. This will suppress interference pulses whose pulse time is less than the set input delay, in ms. The input delay applies to both channels of the channel pair of the ASi slave. Note Time of fault suppression shortened by up to 75 ms It can take 15 AS-i cycles until the valid code sequence is detected. As a result, the time of the fault suppression is shortened by up to 75 ms compared to the set value. A long input delay suppresses longer interference pulses but results in a longer response time. Range of values: 0 to 150 ms Default 0 ms The values 0, 50 to 150 ms can be selected in 10 ms increments. The input delay time acts in addition to the system response time. Suppressed interference pulses are not visible in the safety program. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 47 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters Evaluation of the sensors This parameter specifies how the connected sensors are to be evaluated. 1oo1 evaluation In 1oo1 evaluation, the sensor exists once and is connected to the first input of the safe AS-i slave via a single channel. You jumper the second input of the AS-i slave. Instead of the jumper, you can also connect another single-channel sensor to the second input. Only when both inputs supply an ON signal does the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module transfer the "1" value to the safety program (the two inputs are ANDed). The individual states of the two inputs of the AS-i slave are not visible in the safety program. A discrepancy analysis is not performed in 1oo1 evaluation. 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent In 1oo2 (2v2) evaluation, equivalent, both inputs of the safe AS-i slave are occupied by one two-channel sensor or by two single-channel sensors. The two single-channel sensors then belong together functionally as a pair. The input signals are compared internally for equivalence. The two inputs of the AS-i slave are combined to form a channel pair. A discrepancy analysis is possible in 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent. Discrepancy analysis If you are using a two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors that acquire the same physical process variable, the sensors will, for example, respond with a delay due to the limited accuracy of their arrangement to each other. For fail-safe inputs, the discrepancy analysis for equivalence is used to infer errors from the time characteristic of two signals of the same functionality. For two associated input signals, if different levels are detected after the input delay time has expired, the discrepancy analysis is started. A check is made to determine if the difference has disappeared after expiration of an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, there is a discrepancy error. Startup test If the "Startup test" parameter is activated, after startup of the channel or after a cross-circuit error (code sequence error), the value transferred to the safety program is kept at the substitute value "0" until the connected sensor has been correctly actuated at least once. Afterwards, the value of the input channel is calculated according to the set functionality. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 48 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters The actuation of the sensor is defined to mean that both inputs of the safe AS-i slave must supply an ON signal, e.g., both switching contacts of the sensor are closed. Then, they must supply an OFF signal, e.g., switching contacts open. Finally, an ON signal must be supplied again, e.g., switching contacts closed. During the sensor actuation phase, none of the following errors may occur: Discrepancy error Sequence error Cross-circuit error (code sequence error) After reintegration is complete, you must perform a startup test. For this purpose, you actuate the sensor to be monitored once. A discrepancy error or a sequence monitoring error does not trigger a new startup test. Discrepancy monitoring If the discrepancy monitoring is activated, a discrepancy analysis is performed. This is the normal setting for 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent, in order to achieve high error uncovering. You can deactivate the discrepancy monitoring for special situations. This corresponds in principle to 1oo1 evaluation of sensors. Check whether the lower error uncovering is sufficient for the required safety level. You may possibly use a sensor with integrated error uncovering. If required, you can activate the sequence monitoring. When 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors is set, discrepancies in signal states between input 1 and input 2 are monitored. When discrepancy monitoring is activated, the discrepancy time starts to elapse as soon as a difference is detected between the signal on input 1 and the signal on input 2. If the set discrepancy time is exceeded and the difference continues to exist, a discrepancy error is triggered. Before switch-on, the signal value 0 must be present at both inputs, even when a discrepancy error has not occurred or the discrepancy time has not been set to "infinite". If the "Evaluation of the sensors" parameter has been assigned with 1oo1, discrepancy monitoring is not performed. Discrepancy behavior This parameter is permanently set to "Supply 0 value". The discrepancy behavior determines the value that is made available to the safety program in the F-CPU during the discrepancy, i.e., while the discrepancy time is running. After expiration of the set input delay time, once an "OFF" signal is detected at one of the two input channels of the channel pair involved, this parameter setting causes the value "0" to be provided to the safety program in the F-CPU. This setting does not affect the sensoractuator response time as a result of the discrepancy time. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 49 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters Discrepancy time infinite If you activate "Discrepancy time infinite", the time period for the discrepancy analysis never expires. As a result, a time-related discrepancy error will not be detected. Nevertheless, the following switch-on condition applies: After a channel has been switched off, a "0" signal must be read in simultaneously at both input channels of the relevant channel pair before the channel can be switched on again. If this condition is not satisfied, especially in the event of a single-channel switch-off (i.e., signal OFF at only one of the two input channels of the relevant channel pair) followed by a change to signal ON at both input channels, a discrepancy error will be detected at the time of the change to signal ON (at both input channels) even though the time for the discrepancy analysis has not expired. In data record 202, the bit 0.2 "= 1" is set in the status of the input monitoring of AS-i address n. A discrepancy error is only detected if both input channels of the affected channel pair have not received the "0" signal simultaneously. If "Discrepancy time infinite" is deactivated, the discrepancy analysis uses the value set for the "Discrepancy time" parameter. Discrepancy time You can specify the discrepancy time in the range of 0 to 60 000 ms for each channel pair. The following settings are required: "Sensor evaluation": 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent "Discrepancy monitoring": Active "Discrepancy time infinite": Deactivated In most cases, the discrepancy time is started but does not completely elapse, because the signal differences are evened out again after a short time. Select a large enough discrepancy time so that in error-free cases, the difference between the two signals always disappears before the discrepancy time expires. If the input signals do not match after expiration of the assigned discrepancy time, e.g., due to a mechanical defect of the sensor or sensor wire break, a discrepancy error is detected. When discrepancy time is running, the switch-on condition also applies that after a channel has been switched off, a "0" signal must be read in simultaneously at both input channels of the relevant channel pair before the channel can be switched on again. If this condition is not satisfied, especially in the event of brief switch-off of a channel (due to signal OFF at only one of the two input channels) followed by a change to signal ON at both input channels, a discrepancy error will be detected at the time of the change to signal ON (at both input channels) if the time for the discrepancy analysis has not expired. A detected discrepancy error indicates to the user that the switch-on condition is not satisfied. Assign a discrepancy time that is greater than the input delay time. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 50 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters Sequence monitoring Overview The sequence monitoring monitors the sequence of the signals of the channel pair when there is a signal change OFF >>> ON at the inputs of the safe AS-i slave. The following settings are possible: Deactivated: The sequence is not a condition that has to be satisfied for switching on the function output. Ascending order: Input 1 before input 2 at "HIGH" state Descending order: Input 2 before input 1 at "HIGH" state If the sequence is violated, the "Sequence condition violated" error is detected. The value transferred to the safety program is kept at "0" until the "OFF" signal is read in at both input channels. Switch-on condition is, for example, both switching contacts of the sensor open. The inputs must be switched on one after the other in the assigned sequence and must not switch on simultaneously. You can activate the sequence monitoring if 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent, is set for the sensor evaluation. In this case, the discrepancy monitoring can be activated or deactivated. Deactivated The sequence of the inputs is not monitored. Ascending order: Input 1 before input 2 at "HIGH" state For switch-on of the channel, input channel 1 must first read in and hold an "ON" signal followed by input channel 2. When the channel is switched off, the sequence of the input channels is not monitored. Descending order: Input 2 before input 1 at "HIGH" state For switch-on of the channel, input channel 2 must first read in and hold an "ON" signal followed by input channel 1. When the channel is switched off, the sequence of the input channels is not monitored. Reintegration after discrepancy error This parameter is permanently set to: "Test 0-signal necessary on both channels". A discrepancy error is not considered to be rectified until an "OFF" signal is present again at both input channels. Reintegration of the PROFIsafe channel is then possible. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 51 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters 6.2.5 Module parameters - Safe outputs Configuration status For operation of the switching group the AS-i master must activate communication with the associated AS-i address of the control unit in the F-CM. For this reason the configuration of the AS-i network must include a virtual AS-i slave with the profile IO.ID.ID2 = 6.B.D and ID1 = 0. If the slaves are not configured, the AS-i master must be set such that the AS-i address of the control unit in the F-CM is actively operating, for example, using the "SET" button of the master while the F-CM module is being configured and connected to the AS-i master. Activate output control With this parameter, you activate the corresponding switching group and the associated ASi address of the control unit in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. You will find additional information in Section Operating principle of the safe AS-i outputs (Page 36), "Operating principle of the safe AS-i outputs." When output control is activated, the control unit in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is switched on so that the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module generates an additional AS-i address on the AS-i Bus. The associated value is output from the safe process image via this ASi address. When output control is deactivated, the corresponding control unit in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is switched off, and an AS-i slave is not emulated on the ASi bus. AS-i address Here, you set the AS-i address within the range of 1 to 31 that the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is to use for control of a safe AS-i output. WARNING Uniqueness of the AS-i address on the AS-i bus Carefully check the AS-i addresses for the control of the safe AS-i outputs. Ensure that the assigned AS-i address exists only once on the AS-i bus. This is particularly important when you are using multiple devices that can control safe AS-i outputs on the same AS-i bus. If this is not observed, reliable shutdown of a safe output module is not guaranteed. Note Communication of the AS-i master with the AS-i address The AS-i address of the control unit must be called by the AS-i master. Set up the communication of the AS-i master in such a way that communication with the AS-i address of the control unit functions properly. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 52 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.2 Explanation of the parameters Note Slave profile of the control unit in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (control of a safe AS-i output) The AS-i address of the control unit corresponds to a slave with slave profile (IO.ID.ID2) = 6.B.D and ID1 = 0. Q address switching output The output bit address is displayed here. It determines the switching state of the safe output (control signal F-OUT 1). Interconnect the "Q address switching output" in your safety program according to the required safety logic. The output bit address is calculated automatically from the start of the outputs entered on the "Addresses" tab. Q address error acknowledgment The output bit address that sends an acknowledgment signal to the safe output is displayed here. The output bit address is calculated automatically from the start of the outputs entered on the "Addresses" tab. A positive edge (0 >>> 1) triggers the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module to first send the AUX1 auxiliary signal to the safe output followed by the AUX2 auxiliary signal. Another positive edge is necessary for sending another sequence of auxiliary signals. The auxiliary signals are used, in general, for acknowledging an error state at the safe output. Refer to the AS-Interface (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26250840/0/en) System Manual and the Operating Instructions of the safe output module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/43666143/0/en) used to find out which functions the auxiliary signals are used for. Note "Q address error acknowledgment" The "Q address error acknowledgment" does not trigger an error acknowledgment in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. Rather, as described above, it sends an acknowledgement signal to the safe output module on the AS-i bus. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 53 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.3 Address space 6.3 Address space 6.3.1 Address assignment for user data and value status of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module Input and output address assignment Of the assigned addresses of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, the user data occupy the following addresses in the F-CPU: Table 6- 6 Byte in the F-CPU Input address assignment in the F-CPU Assigned bits in the F-CPU per F-CM AS-i Safety ST module Bit 7 DI0.7 AS-i address 7 Bit 6 DI0.6 AS-i address 6 Bit 5 DI0.5 AS-i address 5 Bit 4 DI0.4 AS-i address 4 Bit 3 DI0.3 AS-i address 3 Bit 2 DI0.2 AS-i address 2 Bit 1 DI0.1 AS-i address 1 Bit 0 DI0.0 Reserved x+1 DI1.7 AS-i address 15 DI1.6 AS-i address 14 DI1.5 AS-i address 13 DI1.4 AS-i address 12 DI1.3 AS-i address 11 DI1.2 AS-i address 10 DI1.1 AS-i address 9 DI1.0 AS-i address 8 x+2 DI2.7 AS-i address 23 DI2.6 AS-i address 22 DI2.5 AS-i address 21 DI2.4 AS-i address 20 DI2.3 AS-i address 19 DI2.2 AS-i address 18 DI2.1 AS-i address 17 DI2.0 AS-i address 16 x+3 DI3.7 AS-i address 31 DI3.6 AS-i address 30 DI3.5 AS-i address 29 DI3.4 AS-i address 28 DI3.3 AS-i address 27 DI3.2 AS-i address 26 DI3.1 AS-i address 25 DI3.0 AS-i address 24 x+4 Value status for DI0.7 Value status for DI0.6 Value status for DI0.5 Value status for DI0.4 Value status for DI0.3 Value status for DI0.2 Value status for DI0.1 Reserved x+5 Value status for DI1.7 Value status for DI1.6 Value status for DI1.5 Value status for DI1.4 Value status for DI1.3 Value status for DI1.2 Value status for DI1.1 Value status for DI1.0 x+6 Value status for DI2.7 Value status for DI2.6 Value status for DI2.5 Value status for DI2.4 Value status for DI2.3 Value status for DI2.2 Value status for DI2.1 Value status for DI2.0 x+7 Value status for DI3.7 Value status for DI3.6 Value status for DI3.5 Value status for DI3.4 Value status for DI3.3 Value status for DI3.2 Value status for DI3.1 Value status for DI3.0 x+8 Value status for DQ0.7 Value status for DQ0.6 Value status for DQ0.5 Value status for DQ0.4 Value status for DQ0.3 Value status for DQ0.2 Value status for DQ0.1 Value status for DQ0.0 x+9 Value status for DQ1.7 Value status for DQ1.6 Value status for DQ1.5 Value status for DQ1.4 Value status for DQ1.3 Value status for DQ1.2 Value status for DQ1.1 Value status for DQ1.0 x+0 x + 10 Reserved ... x + 15 Reserved X = Module start address Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 54 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.3 Address space NOTICE Process value "0" is transmitted as a non-safety related value Based on the transfer principle of the code sequences, the process value "1" is transferred via AS-Interface as a safe value, so that the enable for switching on a machine can be issued in a safety-related manner. If an error occurs during transfer of the value "1", this error is detected and substitute value "0" is used. The process value "0" is transferred via AS-interface as an unsafe value. That is, a faulty transmission of the "0" value cannot be detected. The "0" value must therefore not be used as safety-related information that initiates a dangerous action (e.g. feedback "0" of a switch position). Table 6- 7 Byte in the FCPU x+0 Output address assignment in the F-CPU Assigned bits in the F-CPU per F-CM AS-i Safety ST module Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DQ0.7 DQ0.6 DQ0.5 DQ0.4 DQ0.3 DQ0.2 DQ0.1 DQ0.0 Switching group 7 Switching group 6 Switching group 5 Switching group 4 Switching group 3 Switching group 2 Switching group 1 Switching group 0 DQ1.7 DQ1.6 DQ1.5 DQ1.4 DQ1.3 DQ1.2 DQ1.1 DQ1.0 Switching group 15 Switching group 14 Switching group 13 Switching group 12 Switching group 11 Switching group 10 Switching group 9 Switching group 8 Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowled gment for DQ0.7 DQ0.6 DQ0.5 DQ0.4 DQ0.3 DQ0.2 DQ0.1 DQ0.0 x+3 Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowledg ment for Error acknowled gment for DQ1.7 DQ1.6 D1.5 DQ1.4 DQ1.3 DQ1.2 DQ1.1 DQ1.0 x+4 Reserved x+1 x+2 ... x+7 Reserved X = Module start address The error acknowledgment bit initiates the AUX1 and AUX2 signals one after the other. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 55 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.3 Address space Note Use of the error acknowledgment bit of a safe AS-i output The values in the PROFIsafe process output image have Safety Integrity Level SIL 3. In addition to the switching states, a control unit can send out two different auxiliary signals to a safe AS-i output: AUX1 and AUX2. These auxiliary signals are not safety-related signals. You can use the auxiliary signals for error acknowledgement in the evaluation unit. For technical reasons, these error acknowledgment bits are mapped in the safe process output image. If error acknowledgment bits are sent to a safe AS-i output, the STEP 7 or SIMATIC Manager configuration tool is unable to detect that the error acknowledgment bits are not safe. This means: No warnings or faults will be output for it when the safety application is generated. The user is responsible for the correct processing of these signals in the safety application. 6.3.2 Value status Properties For each input signal and output signal, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module provides information about the signal's validity, i.e., the "value status". Like the input signal, the value status is stored in the process image. Value status for the digital input and output modules The value status is binary supplementary information of a digital input or output signal. It is entered in the process input image simultaneously with the process signal. The value status provides information regarding the validity of the input or output signal. The value status is influenced by the following: Code sequence errors, e.g, caused by a permanent fault on the AS-i bus, wiring error, etc. Missing safe AS-i input slaves Channel faults Replacement of a safe AS-i slave by a non-safe AS-i slave Discrepancy error Sequence error Value status = 1: A valid process value is output for the channel. Value status = 0: A substitute value is output for the channel or the channel is deactivated. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 56 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Assignment of the inputs and outputs to the value status in the process image A value status is assigned to each channel of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module in the process input image. Additional information A detailed description of the evaluation and processing of the value status can be found in the Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety - Programming and Configuring (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126/0/en). See also Address assignment for user data and value status of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (Page 54) 6.4 Data records for diagnostics For diagnostic purposes, you can read out the following data records via your user program. In firmware V1.0.1 or higher the diagnostics data record 206 is available. This data record contains a summary of the information that is relevant for a comprehensive diagnosis via your user program. Note Use of the DS 206 for diagnostic purposes is recommended (firmware V1.0.1 or higher). The data records 92, 202 and 204 are required for the diagnosis via the user program for a module with firmware V1.0.0. For reasons of compatibility, these data records also remain available in firmware V1.0.1 or higher. See also Firmware update (Page 24) 6.4.1 DS 92 Device-specific diagnostics Meaning Note Use of the data set 206 is recommended for diagnosis via the user program (firmware V1.0.1 or higher). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 57 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Data record 92 contains device-specific messages and information on the device function states of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. For some events, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module generates a diagnostic alarm. The following applies for diagnostic alarms of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module with firmware V1.0.0: The "Error code" column in the table below indicates which events are relevant here. If the associated bit changes in the data record, a diagnostic alarm with the indicated error code is generated (incoming alarm when bit changes to value "1" and outgoing alarm when bit changes to value "0"). The text inside parentheses after the error code corresponds to the error text that is specified for the given error code according to the PROFIBUS Standard. Several error codes can be output. If no error code is specified ("-"), a diagnostic alarm is not generated. The diagnostic alarms in firmware V1.0.1 or higher are described in Section "DS 206 Diagnostic Data Record (Page 69)". Table 6- 8 DS 92 device-specific diagnostics Byte.Bit Description Only with firmware V1.0.0: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm Remark 0.0 ... 0.7 Reserved - - 1.0 ... 1.7 Reserved - - 2.0 ... 2.7 Reserved - - 3.0 ... 3.7 Reserved - - 4.0 ... 4.7 Reserved - - 5.0 ... 5.7 Reserved - - 6.0 ... 6.7 Reserved - - 7.0 ... 7.7 Reserved - - 8.0 ... 8.7 Reserved - - 9.0 ... 9.7 Reserved - - 10.0 ... 10.7 Reserved - - 11.0 ... 11.7 Reserved - - 12.0 Serious device fault 9 ("Error") See Section Error statuses (Page 17) 12.1 Group error 24 ("Switch-off") At least one error is present. 12.2 AS-i communication error 19 ("Communication error") Failure of an AS-i slave configured in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module or code sequence error 12.3 Group_Message_Device - At least one message about the device state is present, e.g., configuration missing. 12.4 Group_Message_Application - At least one message about the application state is present, e.g., startup test necessary, safety sensor tripped (Emergency Stop, protective door, etc.). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 58 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description Only with firmware V1.0.0: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm Remark 12.5 ... 12.7 Reserved - - 13.0 Reserved - - 13.1 Device fault 24 ("Switch-off") See Section Error statuses (Page 17) 13.2 Parameter assignment error 24 ("Switch-off") 27 ("Unclear error") 16 ("Parameter assignment error") 13.3 Process signal error 24 ("Switch-off") 13.4 Code sequence error 24 ("Switch-off") 27 ("Unclear error") 26 ("External error") Parameter not permitted in configuration. See Section Error statuses (Page 17) A code sequence error can occur, for example, in case of: * Cross-circuit at the inputs * EMC problem Bit 18.0 is additionally set. 13.5 Logic error 24 ("Switch-off") 25 ("Safety-related switchoff") A logic error can occur, for example, in case of: * Discrepancy error * Sequence error Bit 18.0 is additionally set. 13.6 ... 13.7 Reserved - - 14.0 Downloading of module parameters is not yet complete - 14.1 Reserved - - 14.2 Cyclic data exchange is active - - 14.3 ... 14.7 Reserved - - 15 ... 17 Reserved - - 18.0 Group error code sequence_Logic 24 ("Switch-off") A code sequence error or logic error is present for at least one safe input. Bytes 90 ... 91 contain the AS-i address of the first safe input for which the error is present. 18.1 Reserved - - 18.2 Group_Message_Input_Triggered - At least one monitored safe input has value status "0". Possible cause: * Startup test necessary * Safety sensor triggered Bytes 94 ... 95 contain the AS-i address of the first safe input for which the value status "0" is present. 18.3 ... 18.7 Reserved - - Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 59 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description Only with firmware V1.0.0: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm Remark 19 ... 21 Reserved - - 22.0 ... 22.1 Reserved - - 22.2 Timeout 24 ("Switch-off") An internal data processing error has occurred. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module signals a device fault. 8 ("Lower limit undershot") Bit 13.2 is additionally set. 22.3 ... 22.6 Reserved - - 22.7 AS-i slave failure 26 ("External error") No communication is detected in the case of at least one monitored safe input slave or control unit for a safe AS-i output. 23.0 ... 23.7 Reserved - - 24 ... 25 Reserved - - 26.0 ... 26.3 Reserved - - 26.4 Coding element error 24 ("Switch-off") A data error occurred or coding element is missing when a coding element is accessed. 27 ("Unclear error") The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module signals a device fault. 26.5 ... 26.7 Reserved - - 27 ... 28 Reserved - - 29.0 ... 29.7 Reserved - - 30 ... 33 Reserved - - 34 ... 35 Parameter assignment error object - Object number for which a parameter assignment error was detected. 0 = No error 1 ... 31 = The number corresponds to the AS-i address of a safe input. 32 ... 47 = A number 32 ... 47 corresponds to the number of the switching group 0 ... 15 36 ... 37 Reserved - - 38.0 AS-i bus error 26 ("External error") The AS-i data communication is interrupted, substitute values in the interconnection logic Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 60 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description Only with firmware V1.0.0: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm Remark 38.1 AS-i parameter assignment error 26 ("External error") In addition, the AS-i address of the affected AS-i slave with the lowest address is entered in byte 55. If an AS-i address of an output switching group is not included by the AS-i master in the data communication, this bit is set. A substitute value will be used instead. 38.2 AS-i configuration error - In addition, the AS-i address of the affected AS-i slave with the lowest address is entered in byte 39. This bit is set when SET ACTUAL on the AS-i bus, when, for example, an AS-i slave is missing. A substitute value will be used instead. 38.3 AS-i voltage too low - If the AS-i voltage is too low during operation, a serious device fault results. 38.4 Reserved - - 38.5 AS-i communication okay - - 38.6 ... 38.7 Reserved - - 39 Incorrect AS-i address - AS-i address of the AS-i slave that the device has identified as faulty: 0 = No error 1 ... 31 = AS-i slave address 40 ... 47 Reserved - - 48.0 ASIsafe safe input active - As soon as safe AS-i slaves become monitored, this bit is set. 48.1 ASIsafe safe output active - If safe AS-i outputs are controlled, this bit is set. 48.2 ... 48.7 Reserved - - 49.0 ASIsafe code sequences missing 26 ("External error") Safe input In addition, the AS-i address is entered in byte 50. 49.1 ASIsafe code sequences duplicated 24 ("Switch-off") 19 ("Communication error") In addition, the AS-i address is entered in byte 50. 49.2 ASIsafe code sequences new - New code sequences are available for transfer. In addition, the AS-i address is entered in byte 50. 49.3 ASIsafe code sequences known - The code sequences are taught and saved in the coding element. 49.4 ASIsafe code sequence error 24 ("Switch-off") In addition, the AS-i address is entered in byte 50. 19 ("Communication error") Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 61 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description Only with firmware V1.0.0: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm Remark 49.5 ASIsafe code sequence teaching active - The code sequences are being collected. When the code sequences for all safe AS-i input slaves detected on the bus are taught, this bit is reset. 49.6 ... 49.7 Reserved - - 50 Code sequence error object - This bit contains the lowest AS-i address for which a code sequence problem has occurred. Code sequence problems are: * 49.0 ASIsafe code sequences missing (Prio 3) * 49.1 ASIsafe code sequences duplicated (Prio 1) * 49.2 ASIsafe code sequences new (Prio 4) * 49.4 ASIsafe code sequence error (Prio 2) 51 ... 54 Reserved - - 55 Switching group error object - This byte contains the lowest AS-i address that is configured for an output switching group but is not addressed by the master. Correct the slave configuration of the master. 56 ... 61 Reserved - - 62.0 F_Dest_Adr does not match 24 ("Switch-off") - 19 ("Communication error") 64 ("Different destination address") 62.1 F_Dest_Adr invalid 24 ("Switch-off") 19 ("Communication error") The coding element does not contain an F-address. 65 ("Invalid destination address") 62.2 F_Source_Adr invalid 24 ("Switch-off") - 19 ("Communication error") 66 ("Invalid source address") 62.3 F_WD-Time_0 24 ("Switch-off") F_WD-Time value is 0 ms. 19 ("Communication error") 67 ("Watchdog time is 0 ms") 62.4 F_SIL value 24 ("Switch-off") 19 ("Communication error") F_SIL value exceeds SIL value of the specified device application 68 ("Parameter 'F_SIL' exceeds the appl. SIL") Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 62 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description Only with firmware V1.0.0: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm Remark 62.5 F_CRC_Length 24 ("Switch-off") F_CRC_Length value does not match the actual CRC length. 19 ("Communication error") 69 ("Parameter 'F_CRC_Length' does not match ...") 62.6 F_Par_Version 24 ("Switch-off") 19 ("Communication error") 70 ("Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID") 62.7 CRC1 error 24 ("Switch-off") F_Par_Version does not match the F-parameter set or F-Block_ID is invalid Block_ID - 19 ("Communication error") 71 ("CRC1 error") 63.0 ... 63.2 Reserved - - 63.3 iPAR_CRC error 24 ("Switch-off") - 19 ("Communication error") 75 ("Inconsistent I-parameters [iParCRC error]") 63.4 Operator acknowledge requested - Channel is ready for reintegration 63.5 ... 63.7 Reserved - - 64 ... 65 Reserved - - 70 ... 89 Reserved - - 90 ... 91 Object_Code_Sequence_Logic - AS-i address of the first safe AS-i slave for which a code sequence error or logic error i present. See also bit 18.0. 0 = No error 0 = No error 1 ... 31 = AS-i slave address 32 = Internal error numbers 92 ... 93 Reserved - - 94 ... 95 Object_input_triggered - AS-i address of the first safe ASi slave for which the input_triggered message is present. See also bit 18.2. 0 96 ... 199 Reserved - = No error 1 ... 31 = AS-i slave address 32 = Internal error numbers - Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 63 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics 6.4.2 DS 202 Status safe inputs/outputs Description Note Use of the data set 206 is recommended for diagnosis via the user program (firmware V1.0.1 or higher). DS 202 contains non-safety-related status information for the safe input slaves and for the control of the safe output slaves. The status information for the control of the safe output slaves relates either to the control units activated in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module or to data of external control units for safe output slaves that is also read on the AS-i bus. Table 6- 9 DS 202 Status safe inputs/safe outputs Byte Description 0...1 Reserved 2...5 Status input monitoring AS-i address 1 6...9 Status input monitoring AS-i address 2 10 ... 13 Status input monitoring AS-i address 3 14 ... 17 Status input monitoring AS-i address 4 18 ... 21 Status input monitoring AS-i address 5 22 ... 25 Status input monitoring AS-i address 6 26 ... 29 Status input monitoring AS-i address 7 30 ... 33 Status input monitoring AS-i address 8 34 ... 37 Status input monitoring AS-i address 9 38 ... 41 Status input monitoring AS-i address 10 42 ... 45 Status input monitoring AS-i address 11 46 ... 49 Status input monitoring AS-i address 12 50 ... 53 Status input monitoring AS-i address 13 54 ... 57 Status input monitoring AS-i address 14 58 ... 61 Status input monitoring AS-i address 15 62 ... 65 Status input monitoring AS-i address 16 66 ... 69 Status input monitoring AS-i address 17 70 ... 73 Status input monitoring AS-i address 18 74 ... 77 Status input monitoring AS-i address 19 78 ... 81 Status input monitoring AS-i address 20 82 ... 85 Status input monitoring AS-i address 21 86 ... 89 Status input monitoring AS-i address 22 90 ... 93 Status input monitoring AS-i address 23 94 ... 97 Status input monitoring AS-i address 24 98 ... 101 Status input monitoring AS-i address 25 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 64 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte Description 102 ... 105 Status input monitoring AS-i address 26 106 ... 109 Status input monitoring AS-i address 27 110 ... 113 Status input monitoring AS-i address 28 114 ... 117 Status input monitoring AS-i address 29 118 ... 121 Status input monitoring AS-i address 30 122 ... 125 Status input monitoring AS-i address 31 126 ... 129 Status output control switching group 0 130 ... 133 Status output control switching group 1 134 ... 137 Status output control switching group 2 138 ... 141 Status output control switching group 3 142 ... 145 Status output control switching group 4 146 ... 149 Status output control switching group 5 150 ... 153 Status output control switching group 6 154 ... 157 Status output control switching group 7 158 ... 161 Status output control switching group 8 162 ... 165 Status output control switching group 9 166 ... 169 Status output control switching group 10 170 ... 173 Status output control switching group 11 174 ... 177 Status output control switching group 12 178 ... 181 Status output control switching group 13 182 ... 185 Status output control switching group 14 186 ... 189 Status output control switching group 15 190 ... 199 Reserved Table 6- 10 Input monitoring: Structure of the status information in DS 202 Byte.Bit Message bit Remark 0.0 Value = 1: Startup test necessary - 0.1 Value = 1: Sequence condition violated - 0.2 Value = 1: Discrepancy condition violated - 0.3 Value = 1: Safety sensor triggered - 0.4 ... 0.7 Reserved - 1.0 Value = 1: Code sequence error Cross-circuit at input 1.1 ... 1.7 Reserved - 2.0 Reserved - 2.1 Value = 1: Switch-on condition not met - 2.2 ... 2.7 Reserved - 3.0 ... 3.7 Reserved Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 65 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Table 6- 11 Output control: Structure of the status information in DS 202 Byte.Bit Message bit Remark 0.0 Output active The control unit of the switching group sends the "F-OUT 1" control signal. 0.1 ... 0.7 Reserved - 1.0 ... 1.3 Reserved - 1.4 Auxiliary signal AUX1 sent Auxiliary control signal AUX1 was transferred with value "1." If the error acknowledgment bit in the output process image has the value "0", the message is reset. 1.5 Auxiliary signal AUX2 sent Auxiliary control signal AUX2 was transmitted with value "1." If the error acknowledgment bit in the output process image has the value "0", the message is reset. 1.6 ... 1.7 Reserved - 2.0 ... 2.7 Reserved - 3.0 ... 3.7 Reserved - 6.4.3 DS 204 Status code sequences Description Note Use of the data set 206 is recommended for diagnosis via the user program (firmware V1.0.1 or higher). The DS 204 contains the statuses of all AS-i slaves that are known to the FCM AS-i Safety ST module. Table 6- 12 DS 204: Status code sequence for an AS-i address in DS 204 Byte Description 0 ... 13 Reserved 14 ... 17 Status code sequence for AS-i address 1 18 ... 21 Status code sequence for AS-i address 2 22 ... 25 Status code sequence for AS-i address 3 26 ... 29 Status code sequence for AS-i address 4 30 ... 33 Status code sequence for AS-i address 5 34 ... 37 Status code sequence for AS-i address 6 38 ... 41 Status code sequence for AS-i address 7 42 ... 45 Status code sequence for AS-i address 8 46 ... 49 Status code sequence for AS-i address 9 50 ... 53 Status code sequence for AS-i address 10 54 ... 57 Status code sequence for AS-i address 11 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 66 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte Description 58 ... 61 Status code sequence for AS-i address 12 62 ... 65 Status code sequence for AS-i address 13 66 ... 69 Status code sequence for AS-i address 14 70 ... 73 Status code sequence for AS-i address 15 74 ... 77 Status code sequence for AS-i address 16 78 ... 81 Status code sequence for AS-i address 17 82 ... 85 Status code sequence for AS-i address 18 86 ... 90 Status code sequence for AS-i address 19 90 ... 91 Status code sequence for AS-i address 20 94 ... 97 Status code sequence for AS-i address 21 98 ... 101 Status code sequence for AS-i address 22 102 ... 105 Status code sequence for AS-i address 23 106 ... 109 Status code sequence for AS-i address 24 110 ... 113 Status code sequence for AS-i address 25 114 ... 117 Status code sequence for AS-i address 26 118 ... 121 Status code sequence for AS-i address 27 122 ... 125 Status code sequence for AS-i address 28 126 ... 129 Status code sequence for AS-i address 29 130 ... 133 Status code sequence for AS-i address 30 134 ... 137 Status code sequence for AS-i address 31 138 ... 199 Reserved Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 67 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Table 6- 13 Assignment of the bits of an AS-i address in the "Status code sequence" data structure Byte Bit Description Setting Meaning of the setting 0 0...2 Status of the slave =0 No slave present =1 Standard slave (not safety-related) =2 Safe slave, but the code sequence type safe input/safe output is not yet decoded. =3 Code sequence type safe output =4 Code sequence type safe input =5...7 Reserved 3 4...6 7 1 0...2 3 4...5 6...7 Status of parameter assignment Status of the code sequence Status of the safe input 1 Status of the safe input 2 Reserved - =0 No safe AS-i output slave or AS-i input slave is configured. =1 Reserved =2 Safe AS-i slave is configured The detected slave corresponds to the activation. =3 Safe AS-i slave is configured The detected slave does not correspond to the activation. =4...7 Reserved Reserved - =0 Code sequence irrelevant: No activation or no slave is present. =1 Code sequence missing: No code sequence is taught or transferred. =2 Code sequence duplicated: At least one other slave has the same code sequence. =3 Code sequence new: The taught code sequence does not correspond to the transferred code sequence. =4 Code sequence known: The taught code sequence does not correspond to the transferred code sequence. =5...7 Reserved Reserved - =0 The input is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Input signal = 0: The contact is open. =3 Input signal = 1: The contact is closed. =0 The input is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Input signal = 0: The contact is open. =3 Input signal = 1: The contact is closed. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 68 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte Bit Description Setting Meaning of the setting 2 0...1 Status of the "F-OUT 1" control signal for safe output =0 The output is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Control signal for output = 0 =3 Control signal for output = 1 =0 The output is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Control signal for output = 0 =3 Control signal for output = 1 =0 The output is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Control signal for output = 0 2...3 4...5 6...7 3 0...1 2...3 Status of the "F-OUT 2" control signal for safe output Status of the "F-OUT 3" control signal for safe output Status of the "F-OUT 4" control signal for safe output Status of the auxiliary signal 1 Status of the auxiliary signal 2 4...7 6.4.4 - =3 Control signal for output = 1 =0 The output is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Control signal for output = 0 =3 Control signal for output = 1 =0 The signal is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Auxiliary signal = 0 =3 Auxiliary signal = 1 =0 The signal is not present (or the code sequence type is not yet decoded). =1 Error, e.g., code sequence error =2 Auxiliary signal = 0 =3 Auxiliary signal = 1 Reserved = 0 - DS 206 Diagnostic data record Meaning Note Use of the data set 206 is recommended for diagnosis via the user program (firmware V1.0.1 or higher). Data record 206 contains a summary of the information that is relevant for a comprehensive diagnosis of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module via your user program. For some events, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module generates a diagnostic alarm. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 69 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics The following applies for diagnostic alarms of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module with firmware V1.0.1 or higher: The "Error code" column in the table below indicates which events are relevant here. If the associated bit changes in the data record, a diagnostic alarm with the indicated error code is generated (incoming alarm when bit changes to value "1" and outgoing alarm when bit changes to value "0"). If no error code is specified ("-"), a diagnostic alarm is not generated. The diagnostic alarms for firmware V1.0.0 are described in Section "DS 92 Devicespecific diagnosis (Page 57)". Table 6- 14 DS 206 Diagnosis Byte.Bit Description In the case of binary values, the description declares the status "1" FW V1.0.1 and Remark higher: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm 0 Version High - - 1 Version Low - - 2.0 Overtemperature 1048 Maximum operating temperature exceeded 2.1 Undertemperature 786 Ambient temperature too low 2.2 Incorrect parameter value 16 Configuration data contains errors 2.3 Incorrect or inconsistent firmware 283 Firmware is faulty 2.4 Supply voltage too high 1038 AS-i voltage too high 2.5 Supply voltage too low 1039 AS-i voltage too low Firmware update necessary 2.6 Program cycle time exceeded 259 Internal cycle time exceeded 2.7 Device fault 1059 Self-test has determined a device fault. For details, see further error messages. 3.0 Serious device fault 9 Serious device fault. No communication possible 3.1 Teaching necessary 1055 New code tables are available for transfer. 3.2 Normal operation - Cyclic I/O data exchange active 3.3 Startup - Parameters are loaded No cyclic I/O data exchange 3.4 Serious device fault - Serious device fault. No communication possible 3.5 I/O device signal error - One or more channels are passivated 3.6 Code sequence cannot be read correctly - A code sequence is non-existent or incomplete 3.7 Reintegration necessary - Error is cleared, but at least one channel is still passivated 4.0 Access to device settings - Assignment of the F-address Acceptance of the code sequences Firmware update Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 70 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description In the case of binary values, the description declares the status "1" FW V1.0.1 and Remark higher: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm 4.1 ASIsafe code table teaching active - Teach LED flashes yellow; code sequences are collected. Is reset when the code tables for all safe AS-i input slaves detected on the bus have been taught. 4.2 Diagnostic memory overflow 33 Too many simultaneous error messages 4.3 Change of parameters not permissible - Modification of parameter data is rejected in normal mode 4.4 ... 4.7 Reserved - - 5.0 Status LED flashes green - - 5.1 Status LED lit green - - 5.2 Error LED flashes red - - 5.3 CFG LED flashes red - - 5.4 PSF LED flashes red - - 5.5 Teach LED flashes yellow - - 5.6 Teach LED lit yellow - - 5.7 ADDR LED flashes green - - 6.0 No access possible to the retentive storage of the F-address 781 The coding element (type H) in the BaseUnit is missing or there is an access error 6.1 Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64 The PROFIsafe driver has detected a different Fdestination address. 6.2 Invalid target address (F_Dest_Add) 65 The PROFIsafe driver has detected an inadmissible F-destination address. 6.3 Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66 The PROFIsafe driver has detected an inadmissible F-source address. 6.4 Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67 The PROFIsafe driver has detected an inadmissible watchdog time. 6.5 Parameter "F_SIL" exceeds the application-specific SIL 68 The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy between the communication SIL setting and the application SIL setting. 6.6 Parameter "F_CRC_Length" does not match the generation 69 The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy in the CRC length. 6.7 Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID 70 The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect version of the F-parameters or an invalid F_Block_ID. 7.0 CRC1 error 71 The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent Fparameters. 7.1 Inconsistent i-parameters (iParCRC 75 error) 7.2 PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 92 7.3 PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) F93 The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent iparameters. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 71 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description In the case of binary values, the description declares the status "1" FW V1.0.1 and Remark higher: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm 7.4 PROFIsafe address assignment error F94 Coding element contains inadmissible data 7.5 ... 7.7 Reserved - - 8 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 0 - - 9 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 1 - - 10 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 2 - - 11 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 3 - - 12 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 4 - - 13 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 5 - - 14 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 6 - - 15 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 7 - - 16 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 8 - - 17 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 9 - - 18 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 10 - - 19 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 11 - - 20 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 12 - - 21 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 13 - - 22 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 14 - - 23 Configured AS-i address for output switching group 15 - - 24 ... 27 Status AS-i address 1 - - 28 ... 31 Status AS-i address 2 - - 32 ... 35 Status AS-i address 3 - - 36 ... 39 Status AS-i address 4 - - 40 ... 43 Status AS-i address 5 - - 44 ... 47 Status AS-i address 6 - - 48 ... 51 Status AS-i address 7 - - 52 ... 55 Status AS-i address 8 - - Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 72 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description In the case of binary values, the description declares the status "1" FW V1.0.1 and Remark higher: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm 56 ... 59 Status AS-i address 9 - - 60 ... 63 Status AS-i address 10 - - 64 ... 67 Status AS-i address 11 - - 68 ... 71 Status AS-i address 12 - - 72 ... 75 Status AS-i address 13 - - 76 ... 79 Status AS-i address 14 - - 80 ... 83 Status AS-i address 15 - - 84 ... 87 Status AS-i address 16 - - 88 ... 91 Status AS-i address 17 - - 92 ... 95 Status AS-i address 18 - - 96 ... 99 Status AS-i address 19 - - 100 ... 103 Status AS-i address 20 - - 104 ... 107 Status AS-i address 21 - - 108 ... 111 Status AS-i address 22 - - 112 ... 115 Status AS-i address 23 - - 116 ... 119 Status AS-i address 24 - - 120 ... 123 Status AS-i address 25 - - 124 ... 127 Status AS-i address 26 - - 128 ... 131 Status AS-i address 27 - - 132 ... 135 Status AS-i address 28 - - 136 ... 139 Status AS-i address 29 - - 140 ... 143 Status AS-i address 30 - - 144 ... 147 Status AS-i address 31 - - Table 6- 15 Byte.Bit Status AS-i addresses: Structure of the status information Description FW V1.0.1 and Remark higher: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm 0.0 Reserved - - 0.1 Discrepancy error, channel status 0/1 1041 When the error occurs, the pair of channels at input 1 has the status "0" and at input 2 the status "1". 0.2 Discrepancy error, channel status 1/0 1042 When the error occurs, the pair of channels at input 1 has the status "1" and at input 2 the status "0". 0.3 ... 0.4 Reserved - - 0.5 Sequence error, channel status 0/1 1045 When the error occurs, the pair of channels at input 1 has the status "0" and at input 2 the status "1". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 73 Assigning parameters / Setting the address space 6.4 Data records for diagnostics Byte.Bit Description FW V1.0.1 and Remark higher: Error code (decimal) in the diagnostic alarm 0.6 Sequence error, channel status 1/0 1046 When the error occurs, the pair of channels at input 1 has the status "1" and at input 2 the status "0". 0.7 Sequence error, channel status 1/1 1047 When the error occurs, the pair of channels at input 1 has the status "1" and at input 2 the status "1". 1.0 Input slave missing or of the incorrect type 1050 - 1.1 Control unit of the output switching group not in cyclic data exchange 1051 The AS-i master does not address the configured AS-i address of the output switching group. 1.2 Code sequence error (systematic fault) 1054 Permanent interruption to code sequence, e.g. due to electromagnetic interference on the sensor cable or code sequence corruption after replacement of the safe input module. 1.3 Code sequence missing in the memory of the F-CM 1056 - 1.4 ASIsafe code sequences duplicated 1057 Identical code sequence occurs several times 1.5 Sporadic code sequence error 1058 Momentary interruption to code sequence, e.g. due to electromagnetic interference on the sensor cable. 1.6 ... 1.7 Reserved - - 2.0 Safety sensor triggered - - 2.1 Switch-on condition not met 2.2 Startup test necessary 2.3 Status of process image (user data) - - 2.4 Value status Value status = 1: A valid process value is output for the channel. The safe input value has been reset to the status "0" - - Test of the input is necessary: Both inputs of the channel pair must assume the status "0". Value status = 0: A substitute value is output for the channel (error on channel or the channel is deactivated). 2.5... 2.7 Reserved - - 3.0 Safe AS-i input slave configured - - 3.1 Safe AS-i output slave configured - - 3.2 Unsafe slave detected - - 3.3 Safe slave detected, type unknown - - 3.4 Safe slave detected, type input slave - - 3.5 Safe slave detected, type output slave - - 3.6 Slave is located in cyclic data exchange - - 3.7 Reserved - - Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 74 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Code sequences 7 The principle of the ASIsafe code sequences is briefly explained in Section Safety-related communication with AS-Interface (Page 35). The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module manages the code sequences of the safe AS-i slaves in two steps. First, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module reads all code sequences on the AS-i bus and checks whether the respective code sequence is plausible. This operation is referred to as "teaching the code sequences". The code sequences taught in this way are in volatile memory. The taught code sequences are transferred to the non-volatile memory after a request by the user. Initial commissioning During initial commissioning, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module must teach the code sequences of all safe AS-i input slaves present on the AS-i bus and transfer them to nonvolatile memory. In so doing, the module detects both the slaves for which input monitoring is activated as well as the other safe input slaves. Replacement of a safe AS-i input slave After replacement of a safe AS-i input slave, the new code sequence must be taught and saved. If the code sequence is not saved for a safe AS-i input slave, or if the code sequence does not correspond to the saved code sequence, the input channel will be passivated and assigned the substitute value "0". As soon as the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module detects a new code sequence, the code sequences are automatically taught. Confirm the transfer of the code sequences into the memory to prevent unauthorized changes to the AS-i component. For the transfer of the code sequences to the non-volatile memory, you can open the "Teach ASIsafe" dialog by pressing the "Teach ..." button. Alternatively, the transfer is also possible by pressing the optional "TEACH" button (at least 3 s). Replacement of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module The non-volatile memory is located in the BaseUnit. The transferred code sequences are retained in this memory after replacement of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. Below is a description of the options offered by the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module for transferring code sequences. See also Connection (Page 27) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 75 Code sequences 7.1 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access 7.1 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access When code sequence are managed via STEP 7 online access, you have the option of monitoring the status of the existing code sequences in a graphic overview. In particular, the graphic overview offers advantages for initial commissioning. In addition, you can use the graphic overview for transferring the code sequences of replaced slaves during operation. You can open the graphic overview for diagnostic purposes without changing the saved code sequences. The transfer of taught code sequences is possible but not mandatory. In order to open this dialog, there must be an online connection to the controller or to the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. Load the hardware configuration into the modules of the controller before teaching the code sequences so that the online configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module matches the offline configuration. 7.1.1 "Teach ASIsafe code sequences" dialog The "Teach ASIsafe code sequences" dialog contains an overview of the code sequences of the existing safety-related AS-i slaves. In this dialog, you start the transfer of the code sequences read in on the AS-i bus into the memory of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. The "Teach ASIsafe code sequences" dialog does not make any changes to the module configuration. You can open the dialog for information purposes during operation. The information displayed in the dialog are obtained online from the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. There is no comparison with the offline configuration in this case. Within the "AS-i addresses 0...15" and "AS-i adresses 16...31", you see the following information for each AS-i address: Slave status Code sequence F-IN 1 ... 2 F-OUT 1 ... 4 For the AS-i address 0, only information about the slave status can be displayed because a slave with the address 0 does not exchange cyclic input/output data. Below this information you see: The "Transfer taught code sequences" button The "Progress of teaching operation" display By double-clicking the "Close" button, you can exit the dialog at any time. If the button is actuated, the data will not be changed. If the code sequences have not been transferred or have only been partially transferred, a corresponding notice appears. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 76 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Code sequences 7.1 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access "Slave Status" column The "Slave status" column shows the following information about the AS-i address via a color code: Gray The address does not exist on the AS-i bus. It is not needed in the configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (input monitoring control / output monitoring control deactivated) Green (without check mark) The address belongs to a slave that exists on the AS-i bus. However, the slave is not needed in the configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (input monitoring control / output monitoring control deactivated). The slave on the AS-i bus is a safe slave or a standard slave. It is available for use by the AS-i master or another module. Green (with check mark) The address is present on the AS-i bus and corresponds to the configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (input monitoring or output monitoring is activated). Yellow An error has been detected: The address is present on the AS-i bus but does not correspond to the configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (input monitoring control or output monitoring control is activated). Check the slave. Replace the slave with the required slave or change the configuration. Red An error has been detected: The address is not present on the AS-i bus but is needed in the configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (input monitoring or output monitoring is activated). * Check whether the slave exists on the AS-i bus and has been included in the communication by the AS-i master. * Check whether the slave is contained in the configuration of the AS-i master. Correct the configuration of the AS-i bus, if required. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 77 Code sequences 7.1 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access "Code sequence" column The "Code sequence" column shows the following information about the AS-i address via a color code: Gray No code sequence is needed for the address. Green (without check mark) A code sequence was taught but not transferred to the memory. Start the transfer of the code sequence by double-clicking the "Transfer taught code sequences" button. Green (with check mark) The code sequence was transferred to the non-volatile memory. Note: This status is also displayed when the output control is activated for this address. The code sequences for safe outputs are automatically predefined in the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. They are not transferred to the non-volatile memory of the code sequences. Yellow An error has been detected: A code sequence was taught that is already being used by another slave. The code sequence cannot be used. Replace the slave with a different slave. Red Warning or error: The address is sending an incomplete or invalid code sequence. Check whether both inputs of the safe input slave are assigned with the "ON" signal. If required, actuate the associated safety contacts. The contacts must be closed. * Check whether a cross-circuit exists at the inputs. If necessary, correct the wiring of the inputs. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 78 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Code sequences 7.1 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access "F-IN 1 ... 2" column The "F-IN 1 ... 2" column shows the following information about the AS-i address via a color code: The numbers 1 to 2 designate the number of the input channel. Gray The input channel is not present. A safe input slave was not detected at the address. Green The input channel shows the value 1 ("ON" status). White The input channel shows the value 0 ("OFF" status). Yellow The input channel shows the value 0 ("OFF" state) or is not present. Note: The status indication is unambiguous once the code sequence has been taught for a safe input slave (both inputs assigned with "ON" signal), or when an "ON" signal has been read in for an externally controlled safe output slave. Red An error was detected, e.g., a code sequence error: The status of the input channel cannot be read in. Substitute value 0 is used. "F-OUT 1 ... 4" column The "F-OUT 1 ... 4" column shows the following information about the AS-i address via a color code: The numbers 1 to 4 designate the number of the output channel. Gray The output channel is not present. A safe output channel was not detected at the address. Green The output channel shows the value 1 ("ON" status). White The output channel shows the value 0 ("OFF" status). Yellow The output channel shows the value 0 ("OFF" state) or is not present. Note: The status indication is unambiguous once the code sequence has been taught for a safe input slave (both inputs assigned with "ON" signal), or when an "ON" signal has been read in for an externally controlled safe output slave. Red An error was detected, e.g., a code sequence error: The status of the output channel cannot be read in. If the output control is activated for the address, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module can control the status for F-OUT 1. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module cannot control F-OUT 2 ... 4. The value 0 is output here. If an external control unit uses the output address, the dialog shows the statuses for F-OUT 1 ... 4 read in on the AS-i bus. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 79 Code sequences 7.2 Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button. 7.1.2 Transferring taught code sequences In order for the input data of a safe AS-i input slave to be evaluated and made available to the safety program, the taught code sequences must be transferred to the non-volatile memory. To do so, click the "Transfer taught code sequences..." button. A dialog opens prompting you whether the code sequences are to be transferred. With "Yes" you confirm that you are addressing the correct module. For checking purposes, the "ADDR" LED flashes green on the front of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module The code sequences are transferred to the non-volatile memory. The input data of the safe AS-i input slaves are then evaluated. Reintegration in the safety program is enabled. With "No" you cancel the prompt without transferring the code sequence. WARNING The switching on of plant components may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Depending on the safety program, the transfer of code sequences may cause plant components to be switched on. Before transferring the code sequences, ensure that no personal injury or property damage can occur. After transferring the code sequences, check the safety equipment for proper functioning. The "Transfer taught code sequences" button is deactivated when all taught code sequences have already been transferred to the non-volatile memory. 7.1.3 "Progress of teaching operation" display You can track the progress of the teaching operation. Progress bar "Teaching in progress": If at least one safe slave is detected on the AS-i bus whose code sequence has not yet been taught an active progress bar and the text "Teaching in progress" is displayed. Check the displays in the "Code sequences" column and ensure that the safe slaves send their code sequences. For further information, refer to the "'Code sequence' column". Taught slaves: The "Taught slaves" output field shows the number of already transferred code sequences in relation to the number of code sequences that must still be transferred. You will additionally see the numerical ratio as a percentage. When 100% is indicated, all code sequences have been transferred to the non-volatile memory. You will find additional information in the section "Accept taught code sequences". Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 80 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Code sequences 7.2 Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button. 7.2 Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button. The use of the "TEACH" button provides an easy way of transferring taught code sequences. The "TEACH" button can be used, for example, to transfer code sequences of replaced modules during operation. However, it is also suitable for initial commissioning. To learn how to connect the button to the BaseUnit, refer to Section "Connecting". You can track the progress of the code sequence transfer via the LEDs. Press the "TEACH" button for at least 3 s. This action causes all currently taught code sequences that are unique and consistent to be transferred to the non-volatile memory. The input data of the safe AS-i input slaves are then evaluated. Reintegration in the safety program is enabled. WARNING The switching on of plant components may result in death, severe injury, and serious property damage. Depending on the safety program, the transfer of code sequences may cause plant components to be switched on. Before transferring the code sequences, ensure that no personal injury or property damage can occur. After transferring the code sequences, check the safety equipment for proper functioning. When the transfer of the code sequences has been ended successfully, the "TEACH" LED goes out and you can release the "TEACH" button. If you press the "TEACH" button before all code sequences are taught, the code sequences received up to then will be transferred. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 81 Code sequences 7.3 Final steps 7.3 Final steps 7.3.1 Reintegrating passivated input channels The input channels of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module for which no valid code sequences are saved supply the substitute value "0" and are passivated. After the transfer of the code sequences, the passivated channels must be reintegrated so that the application can work with the real process values. The procedure for this can be found in the following Programming and Operating Manuals: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126/0/en) S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) After transferring the code sequences, check the safety equipment for proper functioning. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 82 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.1 8 Overview Diagnostics options The following diagnostics options are available for the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module: LEDs on the module Diagnostics in STEP 7: - Diagnostic buffer Alarm messages in user program See also Meaning of the LEDs (Page 85) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 83 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.2 LED statuses 8.2 LED statuses 8.2.1 Arrangement of the LEDs on the F-CM AS-i Safety ST Introduction LEDs on the front plate of the respective module display module-internal and moduleexternal faults. The LEDs and their evaluation are described in the manuals for the relevant modules of the SIMATIC devices. DIAG Diagnosis STATUS Operating state of the module Error Operating state of the module CFG Fault on the AS-i bus PSF Process signal error, e.g.,channel fault on AS-i-F input slave Teach Teaching: Teaching of code sequences ADDR Addressing of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. F-addressing and teaching. The LED indicates whether the module is conducting safety-relevant communication with the software tool. PWR Supply voltage Figure 8-1 LEDs of F-CM AS-i Safety ST Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 84 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.2 LED statuses 8.2.2 Meaning of the LEDs The "F-CM AS-i Safety ST" module has 8 LEDs on the front: LED "DIAG" The "DIAG" LED displays the general status of the ET 200SP module Table 8- 1 Meaning of the "DIAG" LED "DIAG" Meaning The voltage is not OK. Off The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is not ready for operation. The module parameters are not assigned. Green flashes The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is parameterized and error-free. Green ON No diagnostic alarms of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST are active. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is parameterized and indicates a diagnostic fault, or a firmware update is in progress. Red flashes The position (ping) is displayed for 3 seconds. The two-color LED alternately flashes red/green Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 85 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.2 LED statuses LED "Status" The "Status" and "Error" LEDs indicate the operating state of the device. Table 8- 2 Meaning of the "Status" LED "Status" Meaning Green ON Green flashes * The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is OK. * Cyclic I/O data exchange active * The system is powering up. * No cyclic I/O data exchange LED "Error" The "Status" and "Error" LEDs indicate the operating state of the device. Table 8- 3 "Error" Meaning of the "Error" LED Meaning Serious device fault, e.g., Red ON * Fault in the electronics * Overtemperature Device fault, e.g., Red flashes * Intermittent data processing error (EMC problem) * Contact problem with the backplane bus * Missing coding element in the BaseUnit * Missing firmware update No error Off Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 86 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.2 LED statuses LED "CFG" The "CFG" LED indicates errors on the AS-i bus. Table 8- 4 Meaning of the "CFG" LED "CFG" Meaning The AS-i bus is OK, but a code sequence error exists. Red ON Fault on the AS-i bus: * Red flashes A code sequence does not exist or it is incomplete. All code sequences are completely transferred. "Off" LED "PSF" The "PSF" LED indicates process signal errors at one or more channels of the module. Table 8- 5 Meaning of the "PSF" LED LED "PSF" Meaning PROFIsafe channel fault for the complete F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, e.g. fault on F-CM AS-i input slave Red ON Red "flashes" * Discrepancy error at the inputs of a safe AS-i input slave * Sequence error at the inputs of a safe AS-i input slave * Code sequence error at a safe AS-i input slave, e.g., due to cross-circuit at inputs or an EMC problem * Failure of a safe AS-i input slave The channel involved is passivated. The "PSF" LED goes out only after all channels have been reintegrated. No process signal error "Off" Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 87 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.2 LED statuses LED "TEACH" This LED indicates teaching of safe AS-i slaves. The "TEACH" LED indicates the progress of the teaching operation. Table 8- 6 Meaning of the "TEACH" LED LED "TEACH" Meaning Yellow ON The code sequences have been successfully taught, but have not yet been accepted. Transfer the code sequences either via the STEP 7 online dialog or by pressing the optional "TEACH" button (for at least 3 s). For more information, see the Section "Code sequences (Page 75)". Teaching of code sequences in progress. Yellow flashes The code sequences are completely transferred. "Off" Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 88 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.2 LED statuses LED "ADDR" The "ADDR" LED indicates that the device is conducting safety-relevant communication with a software tool. Table 8- 7 Meaning of the "ADDR" LED LED "ADDR" Meaning Feedback that the module is addressed: Green flashes * For assignment of the F-address * For transfer of the code sequences * Firmware update in progress Not relevant Off LED "PWR" The "PWR" LED indicates the status of the voltage supply. Table 8- 8 LED "PWR" Meaning of the "PWR" LED Meaning AS-i voltage is applied. Green ON Insufficient AS-i voltage is applied. "Off" Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 89 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.3 Diagnostic messages 8.3 Diagnostic messages The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module generates one or more alarms when various events occur. Note When replacing an F-CM AS-i Safety module with firmware V1.0.0, the following must be observed: With firmware V1.0.1 or higher, the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module generates a modified range of alarm messages compared with V1.0.0. If the user program evaluates the error numbers of the generated alarms directly, the user program may have to be adapted if the firmware version is changed (e.g. when changing a device). If necessary, the firmware version of a replacement device can be modified to the previously used firmware version (see Section "Firmware update (Page 24)"). It is expected that the upgrading of the firmware version from V1.0.0 to V1.0.1 will not usually have any influence on the user program. The safety functionality of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module does not change when the firmware is replaced. If, after the replacement of a device, an alarm message of the F-CM AS-i Safety module appears in the message system (e.g. on an HMI panel), which contains an error code instead of a message text, then the assigned message texts are not known to the message system. In order to update the message texts, the project must be re-compiled with a current version of the TIA Portal / STEP 7 and loaded into the controller or into the message system. The function of the message system can be checked by generating an alarm (e.g. by removing an assigned AS-i safety slave). Diagnostic messages for firmware V1.0.0 The following applies for firmware V1.0.0: Which events lead to which alarm messages is indicated in the description of data record DS 92 "Device-specific diagnostics" (Page 57). The alarms use the diagnostic codes 0 to 31 according to the PROFIBUS Standard. Diagnostic messages as from firmware V1.0.1 The following applies as from firmware V1.0.1: Which events lead to which alarm messages is indicated in the description of data record DS 206 "Data record diagnostics" (Page 69). The alarms use diagnostic codes in the extended range of values according to the PROFINET Standard. The alarms allow a meaningful system diagnosis to be made, specifying the type of error and the AS-i address affected. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 90 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.4 Replacement of defective devices 8.4 Replacement of defective devices 8.4.1 Replacing a safe AS-i input slave Replace a failed safe AS-i input slave with a new device of the same type and assign the correct AS-i address to the slave. This address assignment can be performed automatically by the AS-i master (see manual of the AS-i master) or manually, e.g., with the AS-i addressing device (1904-2AB02). Close the contacts on the inputs of the safe AS-i input slave so that the slave sends the code sequences. The F-CM AS-i Safety ST module detects a new code sequence automatically and teaches it. For reintegration, the taught code sequence must be transferred. The transfer can be started from the STEP 7 online dialog or by pressing the optional "TEACH" button (at least 3 s). For more information, see Section Code sequences (Page 75). Observe the "CFG" and "TEACH" LEDs, see Section Meaning of the LEDs (Page 85). To exclude impermissible duplicate code sequences for two safe input slaves, code sequences from all safe input slaves present on the AS-i bus must be transferred, regardless of whether the monitoring is activated or deactivated. 8.4.2 Replacing the safe AS-i output module (evaluation unit) After replacement of a safe AS-i output module (evaluation unit), no setting is necessary on the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. Observe the operating instructions of the AS-i output module, and set the correct F-address for the AS-i output module and the AS-i address of any integrated standard slave. An error acknowledgment for the affected output switching group must be performed, if necessary. See Section 6.3 Address space. Non-safety related AS-i slaves (standard slaves) are not evaluated by the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module. Observe the replacement instructions in the operating instructions of the AS-i master or the slave. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 91 Alarm, fault, and system events 8.4 Replacement of defective devices 8.4.3 Replacing the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module When the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module is replaced, the new device automatically receives all necessary settings from the head module (IM) of the ET 200SP and the coding element in the BaseUnit. When replacing an F-CM AS-i Safety module with firmware V1.0.0, the instructions in Section "DS 206 Diagnostic data record (Page 69)" must be observed. For more information, see Manual "ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 92 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Technical specifications 9.1 9 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support Technical data sheet You can also find the technical data of the product at Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15757/td). 1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the Enter key. 2. Click the "Technical data link. 9.2 Configuration software Information on the configuration software that you can use can be found in the Table "Software for configuration of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST" in Section Configuring the F-CM AS-i Safety ST (Page 33). Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 93 Technical specifications 9.3 Safe technical specifications 9.3 Safe technical specifications Safety characteristics Table 9- 1 Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode Standard Designation Value SIL according to IEC 61508 SIL 3 PL e Category 4 Designation Value PFHD 1.00 x 10-9 x 1 / h EN ISO 13849-11) 1) Performance Level Table 9- 2 Safety characteristics Characteristic High Demand according to SIL 31) Total value for AS-i system with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module2) 1.89 x 10-9 x 1 / h Individual value for F-CM AS-i Safety ST PFHD 0.89 x 10-9 x 1 / h Individual value for AS-Interface transfer procedure PFHD 1.00 x 10-9 x 1 / h PFHD 0 Individual value for AS-Interface slave2) Proof test interval T1 20 years Low Demand according to SIL 33) PFD 2.00 x 10-5 Total value for AS-i system with the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module2) 1.55 x 10-5 Individual value for F-CM AS-i Safety ST PFD 0.55 x 10-5 Individual value for AS-Interface transfer procedure PFD 1.00 x 10-5 PFD 0 MTTFd 100 years Individual value for AS-Interface Mean Time To dangerous Failure slave2) (37 000 years) High (according to EN ISO 13849-1) Diagnostic Coverage level DC >99 % Common Cause Failure CCF 75 points (requirements met according to EN ISO 13849-1) 1) Probability of a dangerous failure in the case of an operating mode with high or continuous demand rate 2) Value "0" as an approximation for the individual value for AS-Interface slave applies only under the assumption that the PFHD or PFD value of the AS-i slave is comparatively low and, thus, the PFHD or PFD value of the AS-i slave does not contributed significantly to the PFHD or PFD value of the total system. For this, observe the technical specifications of the safe AS-i slaves and use the specific values of the manufacturer. 3) Probability of a dangerous failure in the case of an operating mode with lower demand rate Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 94 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Technical specifications 9.4 Response times 9.4 Response times The response times specified below represent worst case specifications. The response times relate to the switch-off operation (status change "1" "0"). The response times for the switch-on operation (status change "0" "1") can be longer but are not relevant for the given safety-related examination. Maximum response time in the input direction The maximum response time in the input direction results from the calculation of the response time from the safe AS-i input slave up to the head module (IM) of the ET 200SP: max. 5 ms AS-i bus cycle with maximum configuration max. 5 ms Disturbance in AS-i bus cycle with maximum configuration max. 20 ms Module-internal processing max. 2 ms Transfer ET 200SP backplane bus -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------max. 32 ms Total response time in input direction (with 0 ms input delay) WARNING Increased response time If an input delay time > 0 is assigned for a safe input, this input delay time must be added to the total response time. In the total response time indicated above, external influencing variables are not included: * Response time of the sensor * * * * Additional response time in the safe AS-i input slave (see operating instructions) Bus response time between the head module (IM) of the ET 200SP and the controller Response time of the controller Timeout time (F-monitoring time) of the controller in case of PROFIsafe failure These influencing variables must be taken into consideration when calculating the system response time of the total system. In the above-indicated total response time, it is taken into consideration that a maximum of 4 AS-i bus cycle times elapse between a safe input slave failure and detection of an error. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 95 Technical specifications 9.4 Response times Maximum response time in the output direction The maximum response time in the output direction results from the calculation of the response time from the head module (IM) of the ET 200SP to the safe AS-i input slave (evaluation unit). max. 2 ms Transfer ET 200SP backplane bus max. 20 ms Module-internal processing max. 5 ms AS-i bus cycle with maximum configuration max. 5 ms Disturbance in AS-i bus cycle with maximum configuration -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------max. 32 ms Total response time in output direction (for disturbance-free PROFIsafe transmission) WARNING Increased response time In case of PROFIsafe failure, the total response time in the output direction increases by the set timeout time of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module (see F-parameters, F-monitoring time). In the total response time indicated above, external influencing variables are not included: * Response time of the controller * Bus response time between the controller and the head module (IM) of the ET 200SP * Response time in the safe AS-i output module (evaluation unit), see operating instructions * For response time of the safe AS-i output module (evaluation unit) in case of AS-i failure, see operating instructions * Response time of the actuator (e.g., contactor) These influencing variables must be taken into consideration when calculating the system response time of the total system. Additional information Further information is provided in System Manual SIMATIC Industrial Software Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12490443/0/en) For calculation of response times, the following aid is available on the Internet: For S7 Distributed Safety, the Excel file S7fcotia.xls (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25412441) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 96 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Technical specifications 9.5 Calculation of monitoring times and response times 9.5 Calculation of monitoring times and response times The Excel file S7fcotia.xls for S7 Distributed Safety is available on the Internet to aid the approximate calculation of the runtime of the F-runtime group, the minimum F-monitoring time, and the maximum response time of the safety program: S7fcotia (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25412441) Additional information is available in Manual "Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7". You can download this free of charge on the Internet at: Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12490443/0/en) Notes on completing the Excel file S7fcotia.xls (when used without IE/PB Link) Tab "max. runtime F-run-time group" Enter the number of modules (in the relevant F-runtime group) in the "F-CM AS-i Safety ST" row under "ET 200SP fail-safe modules". Tab "min. F-Monitoring times" In the "Configuring the PROFIsafe monitoring time" section, select one of the following variants depending on which head module (IM) of the ET 200SP is being used. Variant 3 (distributed F-I/O via PROFINET IO) Use the values from the following table. Table 9- 3 Values for calculating the minimum F-monitoring times Description Max. acknowledgment time of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST F-I/O with inputs and outputs Designation Value T_DAT 20 ms - Yes Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 97 Technical specifications 9.5 Calculation of monitoring times and response times Tab "max. response times" In the "Input" section, select one of the following variants for the relevant signal flow of the safety function depending on which head module (IM) of the ET 200SP is being used: Variant 3 (distributed F-I/O via PROFINET IO) Use the values from the following table. Table 9- 4 Values for calculating the max. response times Description Designation Value T_DIS 0 Maximum response time in error-free operation T_WCDT 20 ms Maximum response time T_OFDT 20 ms Max. acknowledgment time of the F-I/O T_DAT 20 ms Configured PROFIsafe monitoring time T_PSTO, conf. F_WD_TIME Max. discrepancy time (Note: The safe value 0 is supplied while the discrepancy time is running) when an error is present (see the setting on the PROFISAFE tab of the properties dialog) Max. response time of sensor 10 ms (signal flow of AS-i Bus) T_Sensor_DLY Note: + Assigned input delay For T_Sensor_DLY, the part of the system starting from the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module up to the sensor, including the AS-i bus, is considered. + Response time of the sensor + Additional response time in the safe AS-i input slave Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 98 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 List of abbreviations A.1 A List of abbreviations Meaning of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning ADDR Addressing AS-i AS-Interface ATEX Atmosphere Explosive AUX Auxiliary BF AS-i bus error BU BaseUnit CFG Configuration CM Communication Module CPU Central Processing Unit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check DI Digital Input DIAG Diagnosis DP Distributed peripherals DS Data record/data set I/O Input/Output EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EN Europaische Norm (European standard) F- Fail-safe GSD Generic Station Description GSDML Generic Station Description Markup Language HF High Feature HSP Hardware support package HW Hardware HW ID Hardware identifier I&M Identification and Maintenance ID Identifier IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IM Interface module IO Input Output IP Ingress Protection (enclosure class) ISO International Organization for Standardization LED Light Emitting Diode LPS List of configured AS-i slaves (list of "projected" slaves) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 99 List of abbreviations A.1 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning NEC National Electrical Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association PIQ Process Image Output PII Process image input PELV Protective extra low voltage PF Peripheral fault PFD Probability of dangerous failure on demand (from IEC 61508) PFHD Probability of dangerous failure per hour (from IEC 61508) PL Performance Level PSF Process signal error PWR Power SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage SIL Safety Integrity Level GF, CF System fault PLC Programmable logic controller Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 100 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 B References B.1 References Additional documentation Further information is available in the following documents: Document type Internet link System Manual ET 200SP System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521/0/en) System Manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293/0/en) Product Information Product Information ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/78361093/0/en) Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety - Programming and configuring (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126/0/en) Programming and Operating Manual S7 Distributed Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875/0/en) Manual CM AS-i Master ST for SIMATIC ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/71756485) System Manual AS-Interface System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26250840/0/en) FAQ FAQ "Compatibility for AS-i Power24V" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20025980/133000) IEC 61508 standard System Manual SIMATIC Industrial Software Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12490443/0/en) Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 101 Glossary 1oo1 evaluation Type of sensor evaluation. With 1oo1 evaluation, the sensor exists once. The sensor is connected to the F-module over a single channel. 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent Type of sensor evaluation. With 1oo2 evaluation, two input channels are occupied by one two-channel sensor or by two single-channel sensors. The input signals are compared internally for equivalence. AS-i (AS-Interface) Actuator-sensor interface. A networking system for the lowest field level of the automation level. The networking system is suitable for networking sensors and actuators with control devices (previous designation: SINEC S1). AS-i A/B slave AS-i A/B slaves use the extended address range. You can assign two A/B slaves as a pair to an address on AS-Interface. Because of the address organization, you can therefore connect up to 62 AS-i A/B slaves to AS-Interface. AS-i analog slave AS-i analog slaves are AS-i slaves that exchange analog values with the AS-i master. AS-i master The AS-i master monitors and controls binary or analog sensors and actuators via AS-i modules or AS-i slaves. AS-i slave All devices that can be addressed by an AS-i master are referred to as AS-i slaves. AS-i slaves are distinguished according to their design (AS-i modules as well as sensors or actuators with integrated AS-i connection) and their addressing mode (AS-i standard slave and AS-i A/B slave with extended addressing mode). AS-i standard slave The AS-i standard slave occupies one address on AS-Interface; because of to the address organization, up to 31 AS-i standard slaves can therefore be connected to AS-Interface. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 102 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Glossary ASIsafe(R) The AS-Interface Safety at Work concept allows the integration of safety-related components in an AS-Interface network, e.g.: EMERGENCY STOP switch Protective door switch Safety light grid These safety-related components are fully compatible, according to EN 50 295, with the wellknown AS-Interface components, e.g., master, slaves, power supply unit, etc. They can be operated together on the yellow AS-Interface cable. Siemens supplies all components for configuring a safe AS-Interface network. CM Communication Module Module for communication tasks that is used in an automation system as an interface expansion for the CPU. CPU Central Processing Unit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is a test procedure for checking the integrity of data. A generator polynomial is used to calculate a checksum over the data to be monitored. This checksum is, in the signature sense, characteristic of the data concerned. The generator polynomial can be calculated according to various algorithms. DIAG Diagnosis Distributed Safety Siemens-specific addition to PROFIsafe. The Distributed Safety fail-safe system with FConfiguration Pack supports implementation of safety concepts for machine and personal protection. With Distributed Safety, passivation of selective channels has possible since PROFIsafe V2.0. The quality bits transferred in the process image are used to enter a substitute value in the process image for the channel concerned. The quality bits for the inputs and outputs are subsequently transferred in the process image to the actual process data. The same mechanism that PROFIsafe uses for reintegration of the module is used for reintegration of passivated channels. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 103 Glossary F-address Each fail-safe module has an F-address. For the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module, the F-address must initially be assigned online using Step 7. You specify the F-address in the configuration. Fail-safe systems Fail-safe systems are characterized in that, when certain failures occur, the system remains in a safe state or changes over directly to another safe state. F-parameters The fail-safe parameters are safety-relevant parameters. They are needed for communication via PROFIsafe. I-parameters Individual parameters for revising the AS-i functionality. The I-parameters are safetyrelevant. LED A light-emitting diode that is used to display the signal status. Nibble A nibble is a unit of information that comprises four bits. Passivation When a fail-safe I/O device detects an error, it switches the affected channel, or all channels, to the safe state. That is, the channels of these fail-safe I/O devices are passivated. The failsafe I/O device signals the detected fault to the F-CPU. In the case of passivation of a fail-safe I/O device with inputs, the fail-safe system provides the safety program with substitute value "0" instead of the process values that are present at the fail-safe inputs. In the case of passivation of a fail-safe I/O device with outputs, the fail-safe system transfers substitute value "0" to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values supplied by the safety program. PROFIsafe Safety-related bus profile of PROFINET IO for communication between the safety program and the fail-safe I/Os in a fail-safe system. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 104 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Glossary Proof test interval Time interval after which a component must be put into error-free state. The component is replaced or proof is furnished that it is entirely free of errors. Safe state The basis of the safety concept in fail-safe systems is that a safe state exists for all process variables. Safety class Safety Integrated Level (SIL) acc. to IEC 61508. The higher the safety integrity level, the stronger the measures for avoiding systematic failures as well as for overcoming intermittent failures and hardware failures. Fail-safe modules used in safety mode can achieve up to safety class SIL 3. Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 105 Index " "TEACH" button, 29, 81 "TEACH" terminal, 29 1 1oo1 evaluation, 48 1oo2 evaluation, 48 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent, 48 A Accessories, 16 Activate input monitoring, 42, 46 Activate output control, 43, 52 Activated input monitoring, 47 Activated output control, 52 Address space, 14 Addressing, 84 Alarm, 90 Alarm message, 90 AS-i address, 42, 52, 54 AS-i address error acknowledgement, 43 AS-i address switching output, 43 AS-i bus, 84 AS-i communication error, 58 AS-i input slave, 35, 75 AS-i network, 41 AS-i output, 61 AS-i output slave, 56 AS-i voltage, 89 ASIsafe, 15 AUX1, 55, 66 AUX2, 55, 66 Auxiliary controller signal, 66 Auxiliary signal, 53, 69 B BaseUnit Dark, 28 Light, 27 BaseUnit with AS-i voltage supply, 41 BaseUnit with voltage supply, 45 Behavior after channel faults, 41, 46 Busbars, 28, 32 C Cable length, 29 Certification, 16 Channel faults, 41, 46 Code sequence, 66, 75 Code sequence duplicated, 68 Code sequence error, 49, 59, 59, 65, 79, 87 Code sequence known:, 68 Code sequence new, 68 Code sequence type safe input, 68 Code sequence type safe output, 68 Coding element, 16, 62, 86 Color code, 77 Common Cause Failure, 94 Communication, 89 Safety-related, 15 Safety-relevant, 89 Communication error, 37 Communication module, 13 Configuring, 33 Connecting an external "TEACH" button, 29 Contact problem with the backplane bus, 86 Control signal, 69, 69 Control signal for output, 69 Control unit, 36, 52 Cross-circuit, 65, 78 Cross-circuit error, 49 Cycle with maximum configuration, 95 Cyclic I/O data exchange, 86 D Dark BaseUnit, 28, 41, 45 Device fault, 59, 86 Diagnostic Coverage level, 94 Diagnostic errors, 85 Diagnostic fault code, 90 Discrepancy analysis, 48 Discrepancy behavior, 42, 49 Discrepancy condition, 65 Discrepancy error, 43, 49, 49, 87 Reintegration after, 51 Discrepancy monitoring, 15, 42, 49 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 106 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Index Discrepancy time, 42, 50 Discrepancy time infinite, 42, 50 E Ease of maintenance, 16 EMC problem, 86 Error acknowledgment, 55 Error acknowledgment bit, 55, 66 ET 200SP Configuring, 33 Evaluation of the sensors, 48 Evaluation unit, 37 F F-address, 25 F-destination address, 41, 44 Firmware update, 15, 85 F-monitoring time, 41 F-source address, 41, 44 Function test, 11 G Group_Message_Application, 58 Group_Message_Device, 58 H Head module, 96 I I address, 47 I&M identification data, 15 Input address assignment, 54 Input channel, 79 Input delay, 15, 42, 47 Input monitoring, 42, 65, 75 Status, 64 Input signal, 68 Interconnection logic, 60 Interface module, 14, 17, 97 Interference pulse, 47 Intermittent data processing error, 86 L LED "ADDR", 89 LED "CFG", 87 LED "DIAG", 85 LED "Error", 86 LED "PSF", 87 LED "PWR", 89 LED "Status", 86 LED "TEACH", 88 LED displays, 15, 85 Light BaseUnit, 27, 41, 45 Limited power source, 10 Logic error, 59 Low Demand, 94 LPS, 10 N Negative polarity, 29 Non-volatile memory, 75 Null sequence, 55 O Operating principle of code sequences, 35 Operating state of the device, 86 Operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules, 29 Output address assignment, 55 Output bit address, 53 Output channel, 79 Output control, 66, 79 Status, 65 Output module, 52, 91, 96 Output process image, 66 P Parameter assignment error, 59 Passivate the channel, 46 PELV, 30, 45 Pollution Degree 2, 9 Positive edge, 53 Positive polarity, 29 Process image, 15, 46, 52, 55 Process image input, 57 Process signal error, 59, 84, 87 PROFIsafe, 15 PROFIsafe process output image, 56 Progress of teaching operation display, 80 Proof test interval, 15, 94 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 107 Index Protective Extra-Low Voltage, 30 Q Q address error acknowledgment, 53 Q address switching output, 53 R Rated voltage, 10 Reintegration, 15, 87, 87 Reintegration after discrepancy error, 43, 51 Residual ripple, 30 Response time During operation, 95 S Safe AS-i input slave, 42 Safe AS-i output, 36 Safe AS-i output slave, 43 Safe input, 42, 61, 68 Safe input slave, 79 Safe output, 43, 61, 69 Safety characteristics, 94 Safety class, 94 Safety equipment, 82 Safety Extra Low Voltage, 30 Safety extra-low voltage, 10, 45 Safety mode, 94 Safety program, 46, 48 Safety-relevant communication, 89 SELV, 10, 30, 45 Sensor evaluation, 42 Sequence condition, 65 Sequence error, 49, 87 Sequence monitoring, 15, 42, 51 Serious device fault, 58, 70, 86 SIL, 56, 94 Slave profile, 47, 53 Startup test, 15, 42, 48, 65 Status code sequence for AS-i address, 66 Status information, 66 Status input monitoring, 64 Status of the slave, 68 Status output control, 65 Supply voltage, 84 Supported power supply units, 30 Switching group, 43, 52, 55, 65 Switch-on condition not met, 65 T Taught slaves, 80 Teaching, 84, 84, 88 Teaching of code sequences, 88 Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access, 80 Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button., 81 Transient overvoltage, 10 U Use in hazardous environment, 9 Use of the module, 13 V Value status, 54, 56 Voltage supply, 89 W Wiring, 78 Fail-safe Module FCM ASi Safety ST (3RK71366SC000BC1) 108 Manual, 03/2017, A5E03957059020A/RS-AB/002 Power Module ___________________ Preface F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136- 1 ___________________ Documentation guide 6PA00-0BC0) SIMATIC ET 200SP Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Connecting 4 ___________________ Parameters/address space Applications of the F-I/O 5 ___________________ module Interrupts/diagnostic 6 ___________________ messages 7 ___________________ Technical specifications A ___________________ Response times B ___________________ Switching of loads 07/2013 A5E03857933-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03857933-01 08/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system. General functions of the ET 200SP are described in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). The information provided in this device manual and the system manual enables you to commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Conventions Note the following identified notes: Note A note includes important information on the product described in the documentation, on handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which you should pay special attention. Security information Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous development. We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with respect to our product updates. Please find further information and newsletters on this subject at: (http://support.automation.siemens.com) To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine it is also necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or machine. Any third-party products that may be in use must also be taken into account. Please find further information at: (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 3 Preface Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 4 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 1.1 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 3 4 Documentation Guide for Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST .........................................7 Properties of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST ............................................................................... 9 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 13 3.1 Terminal assignment ....................................................................................................................13 3.2 Block diagram ..............................................................................................................................16 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................17 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.3 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.2 4.2.3.3 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.4 4.2.4.5 4.2.4.6 4.2.4.7 4.2.4.8 4.2.4.9 4.2.4.10 4.2.5 4.2.5.1 4.2.5.2 4.2.5.3 4.2.5.4 4.2.5.5 4.2.5.6 4.2.5.7 4.2.5.8 Explanation of parameters ...........................................................................................................19 F-parameters................................................................................................................................19 PM-parameters ............................................................................................................................19 Maximum test period ....................................................................................................................19 Parameters of the sensor supply .................................................................................................20 Short circuit test ...........................................................................................................................20 Time for short circuit test ..............................................................................................................20 Startup time of sensors after short circuit test .............................................................................21 Parameters of the inputs ..............................................................................................................21 Sensor evaluation ........................................................................................................................21 Discrepancy behavior ..................................................................................................................23 Discrepancy time..........................................................................................................................24 Reintegration after discrepancy error...........................................................................................24 Activated ......................................................................................................................................25 Sensor supply ..............................................................................................................................25 Input delay ....................................................................................................................................26 Pulse extension ............................................................................................................................26 Chatter monitoring .......................................................................................................................27 Monitoring window .......................................................................................................................28 Parameters of the output .............................................................................................................28 Activated ......................................................................................................................................28 Controlling the output ...................................................................................................................28 Output type...................................................................................................................................28 Max. readback time dark test .......................................................................................................29 Disable dark test for 48 hours ......................................................................................................31 Max. readback time switch on test ...............................................................................................32 Activated light test ........................................................................................................................34 Diagnosis: Wire break ..................................................................................................................35 4.3 Address space .............................................................................................................................36 Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 5 Table of contents 5 6 Applications of the F-I/O module ........................................................................................................... 39 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.1.1 5.1.1.2 5.1.1.3 5.1.1.4 Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 .................................................................................. 39 Applications: Safety mode up to SIL3/Cat.4/PLe ........................................................................ 40 Application: Wiring a load to the digital output, PM switching..................................................... 40 Application: Wiring a load to the digital output, PP switching ..................................................... 41 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to the digital output, PM switching ............................... 41 Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to the digital output, PP switching ............................... 42 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.4.1 5.2.4.2 Applications for inputs ................................................................................................................. 43 Applications of the electronic module ......................................................................................... 43 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd ................................................................................ 45 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe ................................................................................ 48 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe ................................................................................ 51 Application 3.1 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) ................................................................................................. 52 Application 3.2 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) ................................................................................................. 54 5.3 Application for internal evaluation ............................................................................................... 57 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules .................................................. 59 Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PM-switching ......................................... 59 Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PP-switching ......................................... 61 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 65 6.1 Status and error display .............................................................................................................. 65 6.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 67 6.3 Diagnostic messages .................................................................................................................. 69 6.4 Value status ................................................................................................................................ 75 7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 77 A Response times .................................................................................................................................... 83 B A.1 Response times .......................................................................................................................... 83 A.2 Minimum distance of test pulses ................................................................................................. 84 Switching of loads ................................................................................................................................. 85 B.1 Connecting capacitive loads ....................................................................................................... 85 B.2 Switching of inductive loads ........................................................................................................ 86 Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 6 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 1 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation Guide for Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular design and includes topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation of the ET 200SP system consists of different modules divided into system manuals, function manuals and manuals. The STEP 7 (online help) information system supports you in configuring and programming your automation system. Overview of documentation for the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST fail-safe power module The table below lists additional documents that complement this description of the F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST fail-safe power module and are available on the Internet. Table 1- 1 Documentation for the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST fail-safe power module Topic Documentation Description of the system System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58649293) Most important contents * Application planning * Installation * Connecting * Commissioning * Approvals * TUV certificate BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) Technical specifications Description of the SIMATIC Safety Fsystem Programming and operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.co m/WW/view/en/54110126) * Configuring * Programming * Approvals SIMATIC manuals The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) for free download. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 7 Documentation guide 1.1 Documentation Guide for Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Functional Safety Services Siemens Functional Safety Services support you with a comprehensive package of services from risk assessment to verification all the way to plant commissioning and modernization. We also offer consultation on the use of fail-safe and fault-tolerant SIMATIC S7 automation systems. You will find more detailed information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/safety-services). Please send your questions to us by e-mail (mailto:safety-services.industry@siemens.com). Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 8 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 2 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Order number 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 View of the module Figure 2-1 View of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST module Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 9 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Properties Technical properties - Fail-safe digital module - 2 inputs (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) - 1 output PM-switching or PP-switching, output current 8 A (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) - 2 outputs for sensor supply - Sink input (P-reading) - Source output (PM/PP-switching) - Supply voltage L+ - Suitable for connection of 2-wire sensors to IEC 61131, type 1 - Channel-specific assignable input delay 0.4 ms to 20 ms - Diagnostic display (DIAG red/green LED) - Status display for each input or output (green LED) - Fault display for each input or output (red LED) - Diagnostics, e.g., short circuit/wire break, channel-specific - Diagnostics, e.g., load voltage missing, module-specific - Channel-specific or passivation throughout the module Supported functions - Firmware update - I&M identification data - PROFIsafe WARNING The fail-safe performance characteristics in the technical specifications apply to a proof-test interval of 20 years and a mean time to repair of 100 hours. If a repair within 100 hours is not possible, remove the respective module from the BaseUnit or switch off its supply voltage before 100 hours expires. The module switches off independently after the 100 hours have expired. Follow the repair procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 69). Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 10 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Accessories The following accessories, which are not included in the product package of the F-module, can be used with the F-module: Labeling strips Color identification labels Reference identification labels Shield connection Additional information on accessories can be found in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Safety-related shutdown of standard DQ modules by the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST This cost-effective solution allows for full and simultaneous shutdown of all affected outputs of the standard DQ modules when a fault is detected in the process or on the F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module. You achieve SIL2/Cat.3/PLd with safety-related shutdown of standard DQ modules. You can use the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module with all standard DQ modules within a potential group. Additional information is available in Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules (Page 59). Passivation of fail-safe outputs over a long period of time WARNING Unintentional activation of F-I/O with fail-safe outputs If an F-I/O with fail-safe outputs is passivated for a period longer than that specified in the safety parameters (> 100 hours) and the fault remains uncorrected, you need to exclude the possibility that the F-I/O can be activated unintentionally by a second fault, and thus place the F-system in a dangerous state. Even though it is highly unlikely that such hardware faults occur, you must prevent the unintentional activation of F-I/O with fail-safe outputs by using circuit measures or organizational measures. One possibility is the shutdown of the power supply of the passivated F-I/O within a time period of 100 hours, for example. The required measures are standardized for plants with product standards. For all other plants, the plant operator must create a concept for the required measures and have it approved by the inspector. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 11 Product overview 2.1 Properties of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 12 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 3 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment General terminal assignment Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment for F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Terminal assignment for F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 1 Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Description 1 DI0 2 DI1 * DIn: Input signal, channel n 3 VS0 4 VS1 * 5 DQ-P0 6 DQ-M0 VSn: Internal sensor supply, channel n 7 AUX 8 AUX * L+ DC24V N M DQ-P0: Output signal, channel 0, P-switching L+ DC24V N M * DQ-M0: Ground for output signal, channel 0, M-switching * AUX: Protective conductor connection or voltage bus for SELV/PELV circuits BaseUnit1 Color identification label (terminals 1 to 16) C0 CC52 6ES7193-6CP522MC0 Usable BaseUnit types can be identified by the last two digits of their order number. See also ET 200SP Distributed I/O Systemsystem manual Note Make sure that you only use the power module with BaseUnit type C0 during commissioning. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 13 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment Digital output The digital output switches the voltage L+ and M using two electronic switches (see Block diagram (Page 16)). The switched voltage and chassis are conducted to the internal voltage buses P1 and P2. The switched voltage and chassis is also available at the BaseUnit at DQP0 and DQ-M0. This results in two connection options that can be used at the same time, if desired: One load can be wired directly to the BaseUnit (see Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 (Page 39)). The standard modules can be supplied and switched off safety-related by means of the internal voltage buses P1 and P2. You can, in turn, connect loads to the standard modules (see Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules (Page 59)). WARNING It is no longer possible to shut down an actuator if a cross circuit has developed between L+ and DQ. To prevent cross circuits between L+ and DQ, you must route the cables used to connect the actuators in a cross-circuit proof manner (for example, as separate, sheathed cables or in separate cable ducts). Redundant ground conductor required WARNING The ground conductor to the BaseUnit for F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST must be installed twice for safety reasons. Any interruption of a single ground conductor would prevent the safety-related shutdown of voltage bus P2. Property of the individual shutdown of F-modules with fail-safe outputs A channel-specific shutdown occurs when a fault is detected. It is also possible to react to critical process states staggered over time or to perform safety-related shutdown of individual outputs. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 14 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Connecting 3.1 Terminal assignment Switching of loads with ground if the F-module is configured PM-switching If the following two conditions are met, F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST detects a short circuit: If loads that have a connection between chassis and ground are switched by the F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST , for example, to improve the EMC properties. If chassis and ground are connected at the power supply unit. From the perspective of the F-module, the M-switch is bridged by the chassis-ground connection (refer to the diagram below as an example for an F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST). Remedy: Use the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST configured as a PP-switching module. Increase the value of the resistance between chassis and ground at the load end to more than 100 k. Reduce the capacitance value between chassis and ground at the load end to less than 2 F. Figure 3-1 Switching of grounded loads (resistance between chassis and ground) WARNING During startup, the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST carries out a switch-on test of approximately 3 ms. The capacitance between chassis and ground at the load end is charged by way of the load resistance. This low charging current may briefly trigger sensitive load circuits. See also ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 15 Connecting 3.2 Block diagram 3.2 Block diagram Block diagram Figure 3-2 Block diagram F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 16 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 4 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameters WARNING Diagnostic functions should be activated or deactivated in accordance with the application. Table 4- 1 Parameters for power module Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope F-parameters: Manual assignment of the F-monitoring time * disable * enable no Module F-monitoring time 1 to 65535 ms no Module F-source address 1 to 65534 no Module F-destination address 1 to 65534 no Module F-parameter signature (without address) 0 to 65535 no Module Behavior after channel faults * Passivate entire module no Module * Passivate channel * disable no Module * enable F-I/O DB manual number assignment F-I/O DB number -- no Module F-I/O DB name -- no Module no Module no Channel PM-parameters: Maximum test period * 100 s * 1000 s * disable * enable Sensor supply: Short circuit test Time for short circuit test 0.5 ms to 2 s no Channel Startup time of the sensors after short circuit test 0.5 ms to 2 s no Channel Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 17 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Inputs: Sensor evaluation Discrepancy behavior no Channel pair no Channel pair no Channel pair no Channel pair no Channel no Channel no Channel no Channel no Channel 2 to 31 no Channel 0 to 100 s no Channel * 1oo1 evaluation * 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent * 1oo2 evaluation, nonequivalent * Supply last valid value * Supply 0 value Discrepancy time 5 ms to 30 s Reintegration after discrepancy error * Test 0-signal necessary * Test 0-signal not necessary * disable * enable * Sensor supply 0 * Sensor supply 1 * External sensor supply * 0.4 ms * 0.8 ms * 1.6 ms * 3.2 ms * 6.4 ms * 10.0 ms * 12.8 ms Activated Sensor supply Input delay * 20 ms The provided value range depends on the parameter assignment of the employed sensor supply. Pulse extension Chatter monitoring activated Number of signal changes Monitoring window * -- * 0.5 s * 1s * 2s * disable * enable (If 0 s is configured, the monitoring window is 0.5 s long.) Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 18 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Parameter Value range Parameter reassignment in RUN Scope Output: Activated Control of the output Output type * disable * enable * F-CPU * F-CPU and onboard F-DI * PM switching * PP switching no Channel no Module no Channel Max. readback time dark test 0.8 to 400.0 ms no Channel Disable dark test for 48 hours * disable no Channel * enable Max. readback time switch on test 0.8 to 5.0 ms no Channel Activated light test * disable no Channel * enable * disable no Channel * enable Diagnosis: Wire break 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.1 F-parameters F-parameters Information on F-parameters is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. 4.2.2 PM-parameters 4.2.2.1 Maximum test period Here you specify the time within which the light and dark tests (in all combinations) should be performed throughout the module. When this time expires, the tests are repeated. The "Maximum test period" parameter is a module parameter, which means the test cycle for the entire fail-safe output module is performed within the configured maximum test time. If the bit pattern test is not performed within the configured time (or the shortened test time of 60 seconds in case of an error), the module goes into the error state. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 19 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.3 Parameters of the sensor supply 4.2.3.1 Short circuit test Here you enable the short-circuit detection for the channels of the F-module for which "Internal sensor supply" is set. The short-circuit test is only useful if you are using simple switches that do not have their own power supply. For switches with power supply, for example, 3/4-wire proximity switches, a short-circuit test is not possible. The short-circuit detection switches off the sensor supply briefly. The length of the deactivation period is equivalent to the configured "Time for sensor test". If a short-circuit is detected, the F-module triggers a diagnostic interrupt and the input is passivated. The following short-circuits are detected: Short-circuit of input to L+ Short-circuit of the input of another channel when it has a 1 signal Short-circuit between the input and sensor supply of another channel Short-circuit between the sensor supply and the sensor supply of another channel If the short-circuit test is disabled, you must make your wiring short-circuit and cross-circuit proof or select a connection type (discrepancy, non-equivalent) which also detect the crosscircuits using discrepancy. During the execution time (Time for sensor test + Startup time of sensor after sensor test) of the short circuit test, the last valid value of the input before the start of the short circuit test is passed to the F-CPU. The activation of the short-circuit test thus affects the response time of the respective channel or channel pair. 4.2.3.2 Time for short circuit test Function When the short-circuit test is enabled, the corresponding sensor supply is switched off for the configured time. If the module does not detect a "0" signal at the input within the assigned time, a diagnostic message is generated. When assigning parameters, note that If the channel is passivated, this may be due to too high capacitance between sensor supply and input. This consists of the capacitance per unit length of the cable and the capacitance of the employed sensor. If the connected capacitance does not discharge within the assigned time, you need to adjust the "Time for sensor test" parameter. The values available for the input delay depend on the "Ramp-up time of the sensor after short-circuit test" and the "Time for short-circuit test" of the configured sensor supply. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 20 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.3.3 Startup time of sensors after short circuit test Function In addition to the off time ("Time for sensor test"), a startup time must be specified for performing the short circuit test. You use this parameter to notify the module how long the utilized sensor needs to start up after connecting the sensor supply. This prevents an undefined input state due to transient reactions in the sensor. When assigning parameters, note that This parameter must be greater than the transient recovery time of the employed sensor. Because the assigned time affects the response time of the module, we recommend that you set the time as short as possible but long enough so that your sensor can settle safely. The values available for the input delay depend on the "Ramp-up time of the sensor after short-circuit test" and the "Time for short-circuit test" of the configured sensor supply. Requirement The short circuit test is enabled. 4.2.4 Parameters of the inputs 4.2.4.1 Sensor evaluation Overview Select the type of sensor evaluation with the "Sensor evaluation" parameter: 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent 1oo2 evaluation, non-equivalent 1oo2 evaluation equivalent/non-equivalent With a 1oo2 evaluation equivalent/non-equivalent, two input channels are occupied by: One single-channel sensor One non-equivalent sensor One two-channel sensor Two single-channel sensors The input signals are compared internally for equivalence or non equivalence. Note that in 1oo2 evaluation, two channels are combined into a channel pair. The number of available process signals of the F-module is reduced accordingly. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 21 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Discrepancy analysis When using a two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors which measure the same process variable, the sensors interact with a slight time delay due to the limited precision of their arrangement. The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non-equivalence is used for fail-safe applications to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same levels). A check is made to determine whether the difference in levels (when testing for non equivalence: the same levels) has disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this means that a discrepancy error exists. Achievable safety class The following safety class can be achieved depending on the selected sensor evaluation: SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with "1oo2 evaluation equivalent/non-equivalent" Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 22 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4.2 Discrepancy behavior Function For the "Discrepancy behavior", you assign the value that is supplied to the safety program in the F-CPU during a discrepancy between two relevant input channels, which means while discrepancy time is running. You assign the discrepancy behavior as follows: "Supply last valid value" "Supply value 0" Requirements You have assigned the following: "Evaluation of the sensors": "1oo2 evaluation, equivalent" or "1oo2 evaluation, nonequivalent" "Supply last valid value" The most recent valid value (old value) before the discrepancy occurred is made available to the safety program in the F-CPU as soon as a discrepancy is detected between the signals of the two affected input channels. This value is supplied until the discrepancy disappears or the discrepancy time expires and a discrepancy error is detected. The sensor-actuator response time is correspondingly increased by this time. This means the discrepancy time of connected sensors with 1oo2 evaluation must be adjusted to fast response times. It makes no sense, for example, if connected sensors with a discrepancy time of 500 ms trigger a time-critical shutdown.. In the worst-case scenario, the sensor-actuator response time is extended by an amount approximately equal to the discrepancy time: For this reason, position the sensors in the process in such a way as to minimize discrepancy. Then select the shortest possible discrepancy time which is also sufficient to compensate for faulty triggering of discrepancy errors. "Supply value 0" As soon as a discrepancy between the signals of the two relevant input channels is detected, the value "0" is made available to the safety program in the F-CPU. If you have set "Supply value 0", the sensor-actuator response time is not affected by the discrepancy time. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 23 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4.3 Discrepancy time Function You can set the discrepancy time for each channel pair. Requirements You have assigned the following: "Evaluation of the sensors": "1oo2 evaluation, equivalent" or "1oo2 evaluation, nonequivalent" In most cases, a discrepancy time is started, but does not fully expire because the signal differences are cleared within a short time. Set the discrepancy time high enough that in the error-free case the difference between the two signals (when testing for non equivalence: the same levels) has always disappeared before the discrepancy time has expired. Behavior while discrepancy time is running While the programmed discrepancy time is running internally on the module, either the last valid value or "0" is returned to the safety program on the F-CPU by the input channels involved, depending on the parameter settings for the behavior at discrepancy. Behavior after expiration of the discrepancy time If no agreement (when checking for non equivalence: inequality) of the input signals exists once the assigned discrepancy time expires, for example, due to a break in a sensor wire, a discrepancy error is detected and the "Discrepancy error" diagnostic message containing information on which channels are faulty is generated. 4.2.4.4 Reintegration after discrepancy error Function This parameter specifies the criteria for when a discrepancy error is regarded as corrected, thus enabling reintegration of the relevant input channels. The following parameter assignment options are available: "Test 0-signal necessary" "Test 0-signal not necessary" Requirements You have assigned the following: "Sensor evaluation": "1oo2 evaluation, equivalent" or "1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent" Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 24 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters "Test 0-signal necessary" If you have assigned "Test 0-signal necessary", a discrepancy error is not regarded as corrected until a 0-signal is present at both of the relevant input channels. If you are using non equivalent sensors, which means you have set "Sensor evaluation" to "1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent", a 0-signal must be present again at the low order channel of the channel pair. "Test 0-signal not necessary" If you have assigned "Test 0-Signal not necessary", a discrepancy error is regarded as corrected when a discrepancy no longer exists at both of the relevant input channels. 4.2.4.5 Activated You hereby enable the corresponding channel for signal processing in the safety program. 4.2.4.6 Sensor supply Here you select one of the internal sensor supplies VS0 to VSn or an external sensor supply. The selection of an internal sensor supply is required for using the short circuit test. See also Time for short circuit test (Page 20) Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 25 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4.7 Input delay Function To suppress stray interference, you can set an input delay for the entire channel or channel pair. Interference pulses whose pulse time is less than the set input delay (in ms) are suppressed. Suppressed interference pulses are invisible in the PII. A high input delay suppresses longer interference pulses, but results in a longer response time. The values available for the input delay depend on the "Startup time of sensors after short circuit test" and the "Time for short circuit test" of the configured sensor supply. Note Due to the physical properties, there is a possibility of crosstalk between signals in the case of long, unshielded signal lines (see section "Electromagnetic compatibility" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)). Adapt the input delay or use shielded signal lines in order to prevent possible passivation of the fail-safe digital inputs and switch-off of the sensor supply. See also Technical specifications (Page 77) 4.2.4.8 Pulse extension Function Pulse extension is a function to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input is extended to at least the assigned length. If the input pulse is already longer than the assigned length, the pulse is not changed. The fail-safe electronic module only lengthens pulses with the value "0" because the basis of the safety concept is that there is a safe state for all process variables. For digital F-I/O, this is the value "0", which applies to sensors as well as to actuators. With 1oo2 evaluation, the result of the evaluation of both sensors is used for the pulse extension. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 26 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4.9 Chatter monitoring Function Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports unusual signal sequences in the process with 1oo1 evaluation, for example, an input signal fluctuating between "0" and "1" too frequently. The occurrence of such signal characteristics is an indication of faulty sensors or process control instability. Recognizing unusual signal patterns An assigned monitoring window is available for each input channel. The monitoring window starts with the first signal change of the input signal. If the input signal changes within the monitoring window at least as often as the assigned "Number of signal changes", a chatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the next signal change restarts the monitoring window. If a chatter error is detected, a diagnostic is signaled. If the chatter error does not occur for the monitoring window for three times the configured period, the diagnostic is reset. Principle The figure below shows the principle of chatter monitoring as a graphic. Figure 4-1 Figure chatter monitoring Number of signal changes Sets the number of signal changes after which a chatter error should be reported. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 27 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.4.10 Monitoring window Sets the time for the monitoring window of flutter monitoring. You can set times of 1 s to 100 s in whole seconds for the monitoring window. You can configure a monitoring window of 0.5 s when you set 0 s. 4.2.5 Parameters of the output 4.2.5.1 Activated If you select this check box, the corresponding channel is enabled for signal processing in the safety program. You can deactivate an unused channel with this parameter. 4.2.5.2 Controlling the output Activates the internal evaluation. Additional information on internal evaluation is available in the chapter "Application for internal evaluation" (Page 57). 4.2.5.3 Output type The parameter specifies if the output switches PM or PP. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 28 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.5.4 Max. readback time dark test Function Dark tests are shutdown tests with bit pattern test. For a dark test, a test signal is switched to the output channel while the output channel is active (output signal "1"). This output channel is then briefly disabled (= "dark period") and read back. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched on. Readback Figure 4-2 Functional principle of the dark test (PM switching) This parameter allows you to set the time for the readback. If the expected signals (P-readback and M-readback) could not be read back correctly after expiration of the readback time dark test, the output channel is passivated. No new process values are switched to the output channels while a bit pattern is still active (switch test is carried out). This means that a higher maximum readback time for the dark test increases the response time of the F-module. WARNING Through the configured readback time dark test, short circuits (cross-circuits) to a signal with a frequency greater than 1/(2 x configured readback time dark test) Hz cannot be recognized (50:50 sampling ratio). Short circuits (cross-circuits) to an output of the same module are recognized. The parameter also has an effect on the short circuit detection (cross-circuit) with "1" signal when the output signal is changed from "1" to "0" with the safety program. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 29 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Setting readback time dark test Because the fault reaction time is extended by the length of the readback time dark test, we recommend that you set the readback time dark test by trial and error as low as possible, but high enough that the output channel is not passivated. You determine the readback time required for your actuator with the diagram in the chapter Switching capacitive loads (Page 85). If the capacity of the actuator is not known, it may be necessary for you to determine the value for the readback time light test by trial and error. This may also be necessary due to the part variances in the actuator or external influences. Proceed as follows: Set the readback time dark test so that the output channel can be read back correctly but your actuator does not respond yet. If the output channel is passivated sporadically, set a higher value for the maximum readback time dark test. If the output channel is passivated, the readback time dark test is too small for a connected capacitive load. The discharge cannot take place during the configured readback time dark test. Increase the readback time dark test. If you have set the readback time dark test to the maximum value of 400 ms and there is still a passivation of the output channel, there is either an external fault or the connected capacity is outside the permitted range. Test pulses of the dark test Figure 4-3 Test pulses of the dark test The distance between two test pulses (t) depends on the parameter assignment. Additional information is available in Minimum distance of test pulses (Page 84). Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 30 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.5.5 Disable dark test for 48 hours This option allows you to suppress the dark test. If the channel is permanently active (1) for 48 hours, 2 dark test pulses (PP switching) or 3 dark test pulses (PM switching) are directed to this channel once the time has expired. You must provide the signal change from 1 to 0 at the channel yourself within 48 hours to prevent the dark test pulse. The dark test is suspended for another 48 hours after the signal change from 0 to 1. The dark test is permanently suppressed if the following condition is met: A signal change from 1 to 0 takes place before the 48 hours have expired. WARNING The output is passivated if an error caused by a short-circuit is recognized when the safetyfunction is executed (output turned off). This is necessary because a complete bit pattern test is not performed within 48 hours, which means an undetected error burst may not be ruled out. If the channel can retain signal 0 for 48 hours and longer, the function "Disable dark test for 48 hours" must not be used. Consult the respective requirements of your product standards regarding error detection time. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 31 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.5.6 Max. readback time switch on test Function The switch on test is part of the bit pattern test. During the switch on test, the P-switch and M-switch of the output channel are alternately closed and read back when the output channel is inactive (output signal "0"). Contrary to the light test, no power flows through the connected load during the switch on test. Readback Figure 4-4 Functional principle of the switch on test (PM switching) This parameter allows you to set the time for the readback. If the signal was not read back correctly once the time has expired, the output channel is passivated. The switch on test detects the following faults: Short circuit to L+ with output signal "0" Short circuit to ground with output signal "0" WARNING Through the configured readback time, short circuits (cross-circuits) to an interfering signal with a frequency > 1 / (2 x configured readback time) Hz can be suppressed (50:50 sampling ratio). Short circuits (cross-circuits) to an output of the same module are recognized. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 32 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Setting readback time Because the fault reaction time is extended by the length of the set readback time, we recommend that you set the readback time by trial and error as low as possible but high enough that the output channel is not passivated. To determine the readback time required for your actuator, refer to the diagram in the chapter Switching capacitive loads (Page 85). If the capacity of the actuator is not known, it may be necessary for you to determine the required value for the readback time by trial and error. This may also be necessary due to the part variances in the actuator or external influences. Proceed as follows: Set the readback time switch on test in such a way that the output channel can be read back correctly but your actuator does not respond yet. If the output channel is passivated sporadically, set a higher value for the maximum readback time switch on test. If the output channel is passivated, the readback time switch on test is too small for a connected capacitive load. The charge of the capacitive load cannot take place within the configured readback time switch on test. Increase the readback time. If you have set the readback time to the maximum value of 5 ms and there is still a passivation of the output channel, there is either an external fault or the connected capacity is outside the permitted range. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 33 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters 4.2.5.7 Activated light test Function Overload and wire break are detected with a 0 signal at the output. For a light test, several test signals are switched to the output channel while the output channel is inactive (output signal "0"). The output channel is switched on briefly during the light test (= "light period") and read back. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched off. Readback Figure 4-5 Functional principle of the light test (PM switching) In contrast to the switch on test, the P-switch and the M-switch switch at the same time during the light test and power flows through the connected load. If the readback signals are incorrect, the signal is present for the configured readback time at the output channel before the fault causes passivation of the output channel. If the signal was not read back correctly once the maximum readback time switch on test has expired, the output channel is passivated. No new process values are switched to the output channels while a bit pattern is still active (switch test is carried out). This means that a higher maximum readback time switch on test for the light test increases the response time of the F-module. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 34 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of parameters Test pulses of the light test Figure 4-6 Test pulses of the light test The distance between two test pulses (t) depends on the parameter assignment. Additional information is available in Minimum distance of test pulses (Page 84). If a light pulse returns a fault, the same light pulse (which means the same bit pattern) is repeated once after t. If the fault is still present, the maximum test time is automatically reduced to 60 seconds and a diagnostic message is generated. If the fault is no longer present, the output channel is reintegrated after the next fault-free test cycle. 4.2.5.8 Diagnosis: Wire break You can use a wire break test to monitor the connection from the output channel to the actuator. Selecting this check box enables the wire break monitoring for the relevant channel. Wire break is signaled when the following conditions are met: Wiring to the actuator is interrupted. A module that is disabled in fail-safe mode by the F-PM module has been removed. You also have to activate the light test to detect a wire break with an output signal "0". Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 35 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space 4.3 Address space Address assignment of power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST The F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module occupies the following address areas in the F-CPU: Table 4- 2 Address assignment in the F-CPU Occupied bytes in the F-CPU: In input range In output range x + 0 to x + 6 x + 0 to x + 4 x = Module start address Address assignment of the user data and value status of power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Of the assigned addresses of power module F-PM E 24VDC/8A PPM ST, the user data occupy the following addresses in the F-CPU: Table 4- 3 Byte in the F-CPU Address assignment of user data in the input range Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x+0 -- -- -- -- -- -- DI1 DI0 x+1 -- -- -- -- -- -- Value status for DI1 Value status for DI0 x+2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Value status DQ0 x = Module start address Table 4- 4 Address assignment of user data in the output range Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-module: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x+0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- DQ0 x = Module start address Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 36 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Note You may only access the addresses occupied by user data and value status. The other address areas occupied by the F-modules are assigned for functions including safety-related communication between the F-modules and F-CPU in accordance with PROFIsafe. 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors combines the two channels. With 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors you may only access the low order channel in the safety program. Additional information For detailed information about F-I/O access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. See also Value status (Page 75) Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 37 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 38 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 5 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 Conditions for achieving SIL/Cat./PL The table below lists the conditions which have to be met for achieving the various safety categories. Table 5- 1 Conditions for achieving SIL/Cat./PL F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Achievable safety class Digital output DQ Without standard DQ modules SIL3/Cat.4/PLe With standard DQ modules SIL2/Cat.3/PLd Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 39 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 5.1.1 Applications: Safety mode up to SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). 5.1.1.1 Application: Wiring a load to the digital output, PM switching The fail-safe digital output consists of two P-switches for DQ-P0 and one M-switch for DQM0. They connect the load between the P-switches DQ-P0 and the M-switch DQ-M0. The two P-switches and the M-switch are always activated so that voltage is applied to the load. This circuit achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. Figure 5-1 Wiring diagram of power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST WARNING In order to achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with this wiring, you must install a qualified actuator, for example, in accordance with IEC 60947. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameter for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 2 Parameters Parameter Output type PM switching Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 40 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 5.1.1.2 Application: Wiring a load to the digital output, PP switching The fail-safe digital output consists of two P-switches for DQ-P0 and one M-switch for DQM0. You connect the load between the P-switch DQ-P0 and chassis in this case. The two Pswitches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the load. This circuit achieves SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. Figure 5-2 Wiring diagram of power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST WARNING In order to achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with this wiring, you must install a qualified actuator, for example, in accordance with IEC 60947. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameter for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 3 Parameters Parameter Output type 5.1.1.3 PP switching Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to the digital output, PM switching You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with the following wiring variant. Figure 5-3 Wiring diagram for connecting two relays each in parallel to F-DQ of power module FPM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Note When two relays are connected in parallel to one digital output (as shown above), a wire break is only detected if the wire break disconnects both relays from P or M. The diagnostics generated in the process is not safety-related. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 41 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 Parameter assignment Assign the following parameter for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 4 Parameters Parameter Output type 5.1.1.4 PM switching Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to the digital output, PP switching You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with the following wiring variant. Figure 5-4 Wiring diagram for connecting two relays each in parallel to F-DQ of power module FPM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Note When two relays are connected in parallel to one digital output (as shown above), a wire break is only detected if the wire break disconnects both relays from P or M. The diagnostics generated in the process is not safety-related. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameter for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 5 Parameters Parameter Output type PP switching Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 42 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2.1 Applications of the electronic module Selecting the application The diagram below supports you in selecting the application that suits your fail-safe requirements. In the following sections, you will learn how to wire the F-module, the specific parameters you must assign in STEP 7 Safety and the errors that are detected. Figure 5-5 Selecting the application - digital inputs of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST WARNING The achievable safety class depends on the quality of the sensor and the duration of the proof-test interval in accordance with IEC 61508:2010. If the quality of the sensor is lower than the quality required by the safety class, redundant sensors connected via two channels must be used and evaluated. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 43 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Conditions for achieving SIL/Cat./PL The table below lists the conditions which have to be met for achieving at least the corresponding safety requirements. Table 5- 6 Conditions for achieving SIL/Cat./PL Application Sensor evaluation Sensor supply Achievable SIL/Cat./PL 1 2 1oo1 Any 3/3/d 1oo2 equivalent Internal, without short circuit test 3/3/e 3.1 1oo2 equivalent Internal, with short circuit test 3.2 1oo2 non-equivalent External/internal, with short circuit test External 3/4/e Sensor requirements Information on safety-related use of sensors is available in the section Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 44 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2.2 Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). Sensor supply The sensor supply can be powered internally or externally. Wiring diagram - connecting one sensor via one channel One sensor is connected via one channel (1oo1 evaluation) for each process signal. Any sensor supply of the module can be assigned to each input. Figure 5-6 One sensor connected via one channel, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-7 One sensor connected via one channel, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLd using this wiring, you must use a qualified sensor. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 45 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 7 Parameter assignment Parameters Channel with internal sensor supply Sensor evaluation 1oo1 evaluation Short circuit test * disable * enable * Sensor supply n Sensor supply Channel with external sensor supply disable External sensor supply* *) Otherwise a diagnostic message will be generated when short circuit test is activated. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 46 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 8 Fault detection Fault Fault detection Internal sensor supply and short circuit test activated Internal sensor supply and short circuit test deactivated External sensor supply yes* no no Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes no no Short circuit with M to DIn yes* yes* no Short circuit with other channels or other sensor supplies (short circuit with other channels is detected only if they use a different sensor supply) Discrepancy error -- -- -- Short circuit with L+ to VSn yes no -- Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes yes -- *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal. If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. WARNING If the short circuit test is not activated or the sensor supply to digital inputs is set to "External sensor supply", the wiring between the sensor and the input channel must be short circuit proof. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 47 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2.3 Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe Assigning inputs to each other The F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module has two fail-safe inputs, DI0 and DI1 (SIL3). You can combine the two inputs into one input. The process signal is supplied by channel DI0. Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). Sensor supply The sensor supply can be powered internally or externally. Wiring diagram - connecting a two-channel sensor via two channels A two-channel sensor is connected equivalent to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Figure 5-8 One two-channel sensor connected via two channels, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-9 One two-channel sensor connected via two channels, external sensor supply Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 48 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Wiring diagram - connecting two single-channel sensors via two channels Two single-channel sensors that capture the same process value are connected to two inputs of the F-module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Figure 5-10 Two single-channel sensors connected via two channels, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-11 Two single-channel sensors connected via two channels, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLe using this wiring, you must use a qualified sensor. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 9 Parameter assignment Parameter Channel with internal sensor supply Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent Short circuit test * disable * enable Channel with external sensor supply disable Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 49 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 10 Fault detection Fault Fault detection Internal sensor supply and short circuit test deactivated External sensor supply no no Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes* yes* Short circuit with M to DIn yes* yes* Discrepancy error yes yes Short circuit with L+ to VSn no no Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes -- Short circuit within the channel pair, with other channels or other sensor supplies *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal (discrepancy error). If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 50 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2.4 Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe Assigning inputs to each other The F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module has two fail-safe inputs, DI0 and DI1 (SIL3). You can combine the two inputs into one input. The process signal is supplied by channel DI0. Wiring The wiring is carried out on the matching BaseUnit (Page 13). Sensor supply The sensor must be supplied internally for application 3.1 (Page 52). The sensor can be supplied internally or externally for application 3.2 (Page 54). Requirements for applications in machine protection with Cat.4 Both conditions must be met for applications in machine protection with Cat.4: The wiring between sensors and automation system and between automation system and actuators must be designed to state-of-the-art engineering and standards to prevent short circuits. All short circuits listed in Table 5-12 Fault detection (Page 53) and Table 5-14 Fault detection (Page 56) must be detected. You only need to detect one short circuit because two faults are required to generate it. This means both signal cables in short circuit have an isolation fault. A multiple short circuit analysis is not required. Procedures for locating all short circuits are also permitted if single short circuits are not located. One of the two conditions must be met for this purpose: Short circuits may not corrupt the read signals compared to the sensor signals. Short circuits cause a corruption of the read signals compared to sensor signals in the direction that ensures safety. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 51 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2.4.1 Application 3.1 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Wiring diagram - connecting a two-channel sensor via two channels A two-channel sensor is connected to both inputs of the power module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Supply the sensors from two different sensor supplies. Figure 5-12 One two-channel sensor connected via two channels, internal sensor supply You can also connect two single-channel sensors via two channels. In this case, the same process variable is acquired with two mechanically separate sensors. Figure 5-13 Two single-channel sensors connected via two channels, internal sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 11 Parameter assignment Parameter Channel with internal sensor supply Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation, equivalent Short circuit test enable Sensor supply * Sensor supply n * External sensor supply Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 52 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 12 Fault detection Fault Short circuit within the channel pair, with other channels or other sensor supplies Fault detection yes* Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes* / yes (for channel whose short circuit test is activated) Short circuit with M to DIn yes* Discrepancy error yes Short circuit with L+ to VSn yes Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal (discrepancy error). If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 53 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs 5.2.4.2 Application 3.2 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe) Wiring diagram - connecting a nonequivalent sensor nonequivalent via two channels A nonequivalent sensor is connected nonequivalent via 2 channels to both inputs of the power module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation, nonequivalent). Figure 5-14 Nonequivalent sensor connected, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensor by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-15 Nonequivalent sensor connected, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 54 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Wiring diagram - connecting two single-channel sensors nonequivalent via two channels Two single-channel sensors are connected nonequivalent to both inputs of the power module for each process signal (1oo2 evaluation). Figure 5-16 Two single-channel sensors connected nonequivalent, internal sensor supply You can also supply the sensors by means of an external sensor supply. Figure 5-17 Two single-channel sensors connected nonequivalent, external sensor supply WARNING To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe using this wiring, you must use a suitably qualified sensor. Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the corresponding channel: Table 5- 13 Parameter assignment Parameters Sensor evaluation Short circuit test Sensor supply 1oo2 evaluation, non equivalent * disable * enable * Sensor supply n * External sensor supply Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 55 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Applications for inputs Fault detection The following table presents fault detection according to the sensor supply and the parameter assignment for the short circuit test: Table 5- 14 Fault detection Fault Short circuit within the channel pair, with other channels or other sensor supplies Fault detection yes Short circuit with L+ to DIn yes* / yes (for channel whose short circuit test is activated) Short circuit with M to DIn yes* Discrepancy error yes Short circuit with L+ to VSn Short circuit with M to VSn or defective yes, if used yes, if sensor supply is activated *) Fault detection only if signals are corrupted. That is, the read signal differs from the sensor signal (discrepancy error). If there is no signal corruption with respect to the sensor signal, fault detection is not possible and is not required from a safety standpoint. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 56 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application for internal evaluation 5.3 Application for internal evaluation Function The evaluation of the safety function takes place internally in the F-module. You can choose between 1oo1 evaluation or nonequivalent/equivalent 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors. With 1oo1 evaluation, the activated inputs are logically ANDed with the process image of output DQ0. With 1oo2 evaluation, the result of the inputs is logically ANDed with the process image of output DQ0. The acknowledgment in case of an error takes place by the safety program in the F-CPU. Use the wiring diagrams Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2 (Page 39) and Applications for inputs (Page 43). You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe. WARNING In order to achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with this wiring, you must install a qualified actuator and sensor, for example, in accordance with IEC 60947. Note If an error occurs at the inputs in this application, the F-module also outputs the error message "Safety-related shutdown" or "Safety event" for the output. Following elimination of the error at the inputs, a reintegration of the output is only possible after the bit pattern test (within the test time shortened to 60 s) has been performed. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 57 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Application for internal evaluation Interconnection example Figure 5-18 Emergency Off shutdown of a motor with equivalent 1oo2 evaluation Parameter assignment Assign the following parameters for the F-module: Parameter Control of the output F-CPU and onboard F-DI Type of sensor interconnection * 1-channel * 2-channel equivalent * 2-channel, non equivalent Sensor supply Sensor supply 0, Sensor supply 1, or External sensor supply Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 58 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules 5.4.1 Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PM-switching The F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module opens, together with the matching BaseUnit, a new potential group . Standard DQ modules that you use in the potential group can undergo a safety-related shutdown by the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module. For this, the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module performs a safety-related shutdown of voltage buses P1 and P2. Configure the power module parameters as described in section Terminal assignment (Page 13). Figure 5-19 Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 59 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules You achieve SIL2/Cat.3/PLd with safety-related shutdown of standard DQ modules. WARNING Safety-related activation of standard DQ module outputs is not possible; only safety-related shutdown is possible. You must therefore take the following possible effects into consideration: In the worst case scenario, you must consider all possible faults of the standard DQ modules and the program controlling them for which there is no direct fault detection. For example, the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST and F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF do not detect external short circuits to L+ at the standard DQ module outputs. All faults of the standard DQ modules act on the process via final controlling elements. The process must be made known to the F-CPU by way of sensors and a corresponding safety program. Because safety-critical faults in the standard DQ modules cannot be detected by self-tests within the module, the "diagnostics" must be performed indirectly via the controlled process. As long as the incorrectly controlled process does not pose a hazard, the safety-related control does not intervene It only performs a shutdown if the process exhibits unwanted or potentially dangerous behavior. It therefore follows that the reaction times for faults within standard DQ modules are not based on the specified short fault detection times of S7 but rather depend on the controlled process and the evaluation of feedback from the process. Safety-related process values must be * safely * read in by way of fail-safe inputs or fail-safe input modules (e.g., F-DI) * the safety function must be evaluated locally in the power module F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST or processed by the fail-safe CPU to form output commands and * output by the fail-safe output module for shutdown of the corresponding safety relay or * output by the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST fail-safe power module. If the expectations at the process end are not met (due to a process malfunction or faulty standard DO modules), the standard DQ modules must be brought to a safe state by way of the higher-level safety circuit. The process safety time is of particular importance here. During this process safety time, no hazard is posed by an incorrectly controlled process. The safety program must react in a safety-related and logical manner to unwanted or potentially dangerous states in the process via the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST, FDQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF and fail-safe output modules. If you want to avoid the problems described above completely, we recommend that you use the PM-switching F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF module instead of standard DQ modules. WARNING Always connect the 24 V DC supply for the standard ET 200SP modules to the F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST. Otherwise, the outputs of DQ modules may exhibit safety-critical behavior. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 60 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules WARNING When supplying standard DQ modules, always use the BaseUnits of these modules to supply the actuators (actuator feedback on the DQ module). See also Terminal assignment (Page 13). WARNING Note the following for the "Safety-related shutdown of standard modules" application: If standard modules behind a F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module are exposed to surge conditions, immunity according to failure criterion B is achieved (according to EN 298 and IEC 61326-3-2), i.e., the standard modules may fail in the event of surge conditions. 5.4.2 Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PP-switching The F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module opens, together with the matching BaseUnit, a new potential group . Standard DQ modules that you use in the potential group can undergo a safety-related shutdown by the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module. For this, the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module performs a safety-related shutdown of voltage bus P1. Configure the power module parameters as described in section Terminal assignment (Page 13). Figure 5-20 Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 61 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules You achieve SIL2/Cat.3/PLd with safety-related shutdown of standard DQ modules. WARNING Safety-related activation of standard DQ module outputs is not possible; only safety-related shutdown is possible. You must therefore take the following possible effects into consideration: In the worst case scenario, you must consider all possible faults of the standard DQ modules and the program controlling them for which there is no direct fault detection. For example, the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST and F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF do not detect external short circuits to L+ at the standard DQ module outputs. All faults of the standard DQ modules act on the process via final controlling elements. The process must be made known to the F-CPU by way of sensors and a corresponding safety program. Because safety-critical faults in the standard DQ modules cannot be detected by self-tests within the module, the "diagnostics" must be performed indirectly via the controlled process. As long as the incorrectly controlled process does not pose a hazard, the safety-related control does not intervene It only performs a shutdown if the process exhibits unwanted or potentially dangerous behavior. It therefore follows that the reaction times for faults within standard DQ modules are not based on the specified short fault detection times of S7 but rather depend on the controlled process and the evaluation of feedback from the process. Safety-related process values must be * safely * read in by way of fail-safe inputs or fail-safe input modules (e.g., F-DI) * the safety function must be evaluated locally in the power module F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST or processed by the fail-safe CPU to form output commands and * output by the fail-safe output module for shutdown of the corresponding safety relay or * output by the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST fail-safe power module. If the expectations at the process end are not met (due to a process malfunction or faulty standard DO modules), the standard DQ modules must be brought to a safe state by way of the higher-level safety circuit. The process safety time is of particular importance here. During this process safety time, no hazard is posed by an incorrectly controlled process. The safety program must react in a safety-related and logical manner to unwanted or potentially dangerous states in the process via the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST, FDQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF and fail-safe output modules. If you want to avoid the problems described above completely, we recommend that you use the PM-switching F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF module instead of standard DQ modules. WARNING Always connect the 24 V DC supply for the standard ET 200SP modules to the F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST. Otherwise, the outputs of DQ modules may exhibit safety-critical behavior. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 62 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules WARNING When supplying standard DQ modules, always use the BaseUnits of these modules to supply the actuators (actuator feedback on the DQ module). See also Terminal assignment (Page 13). WARNING Note the following for the "Safety-related shutdown of standard modules" application: If standard modules behind a F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module are exposed to surge conditions, immunity according to failure criterion B is achieved (according to EN 298 and IEC 61326-3-2), i.e., the standard modules may fail in the event of surge conditions. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 63 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.4 Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 64 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 6 Status and error display LED display DIAG (green/red) Channel status (green), channel fault (red) PWR (green) Figure 6-1 LED display Meaning of the LED displays The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for diagnostic messages can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 69). WARNING The DIAG LED and the channel status and channel fault LEDs of the inputs and outputs are not designed as safety-related LEDs and therefore may not be evaluated for safetyrelated activities. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 65 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.1 Status and error display PWR LED Table 6- 1 Meaning of the PWR LED PWR Meaning Supply voltage L+ missing Off Supply voltage L+ available On DIAG LED Table 6- 2 Meaning of the DIAG LED DIAG Meaning Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not okay Off Module parameters not configured Flashing Module parameters configured and no module diagnostics On Module parameters configured and module diagnostics Flashing Channel status/channel fault LED Table 6- 3 Meaning of the channel status/channel fault LED Channel status Channel fault Meaning Process signal = 0 and no channel diagnostics Off Off Process signal = 1 and no channel diagnostics On Off Process signal = 0 and channel diagnostics Off On / Channel waiting for user acknowledgment Alternately flashing Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 66 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED Table 6- 4 Channel status Off Meaning of the channel status/DIAG/channel fault LED DIAG Flashin g Flashing Flashin g 6.2 Channel fault All On Off Meaning The PROFIsafe address does not match the configured PROFIsafe address Identification of the F-module when assigning the PROFIsafe address Interrupts Introduction The F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST fail-safe power module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The F-module generates a diagnostic interrupt for each diagnostic message described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 69). The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic interrupts of the F-module . The diagnostic interrupts are assigned either to one channel or the entire F-module. WARNING Before acknowledging the short circuit diagnostic message, remedy the respective fault and validate your safety function. Follow the fault remedying procedure described in section Diagnostic messages (Page 69). Table 6- 5 Diagnostic interrupts of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Overtemperature 5D Parameter assignment error 16D Load voltage missing 17D Access to retentive storage of F-address not possible 30D Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D Signaled in application -- Scope of diagnostic interrupt F-module Configurable No Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 67 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.2 Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Fault code Invalid destination address (F_Dest_Add) 65D Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66D Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67D "F_SIL" parameter exceeds the application-specific SIL 68D "F_CRC_Length" parameter does not match the generated CRC 69D Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID 70D CRC1 error 71D Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D F_Block_ID not supported 76D Internal error 256D Time monitoring activated 259D Internal supply voltage of the module failed 260D Output short-circuited to L+ 261D Output short-circuited to ground 262D Wire break 265D Incorrect/inconsistent firmware present. Firmware update required 283D Discrepancy error, channel status 0/0 768D Discrepancy error, channel status 0/1 769D Discrepancy error, channel status 1/0 770D Discrepancy error, channel status 1/1 771D Input signal could not be clearly detected 773D Short circuit of internal sensor supply to L+ 774D Overload or short circuit of internal sensor supply to ground 775D No pulse detected 778D Sensor signal chatters 784D Switching frequency too high 785D Undertemperature 786D Fault in input circuit 787D PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 792D PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) 793D PROFIsafe address assignment error 794D Input short-circuited to L+ 796D Output defective 797D Readback error 798D Overload 800D Supply voltage too high 802D Supply voltage too low 803D Signaled in application Scope of diagnostic interrupt Channel Configurable Yes No 2, 3 1, 2, 3 Yes 1 1,2,3 No F-module Channel -- 1, 2, 3 Yes No F-module Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 68 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Digital module error types Module faults are indicated as diagnostics (module status). Once the fault is eliminated, the F-module must be reintegrated in the safety program. For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Table 6- 6 Diagnostic messages of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Diagnostic message Fault code Overtemperature 5D Meaning An excessively high temperature was measured in the F-module. Remedy Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range. (see Technical specifications (Page 77)) Once the fault has been eliminated, the F-module must be removed and inserted or the power switched OFF and ON Wire break Parameter assignment error Load voltage missing 6D 16D 17D Possible causes: * * There is an interrupted cable between * the module and actuator. * The channel is not connected (open). * There is a short circuit between channels with different signals. Parameter assignment errors include: * The F-module cannot use the parameters (unknown, invalid combination, etc.). * The F-module parameters have not been configured. Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ * Establish a cable connection. Disable the wire break detection for the channel in the parameter assignment. Eliminate the short circuit. Correct the parameter assignment. * Check supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit * Check BaseUnit type Access to retentive storage of F-address not possible 30D The F-destination address stored in the coding element cannot be accessed. Verify that the coding element is present or replace the coding element. Different destination address (F_Dest_Add) 64D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a different F-destination address. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver and the address setting of the F-module. Invalid destination address (F_Dest_Add) 65D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid F-destination address. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Invalid source address (F_Source_Add) 66D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid F-source address. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 69 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Watchdog time is 0 ms (F_WD_Time or F_WD_Time2) 67D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an invalid watchdog time. "F_SIL" parameter exceeds the application-specific SIL 68D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy between the SIL setting of the communication and the application. "F_CRC_Length" parameter does not match the generated CRC 69D The PROFIsafe driver has detected a discrepancy in the CRC length. Incorrect F-parameter version or F_Block_ID 70D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect version of the F-parameters or an invalid F_Block_ID. CRC1 error 71D The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent F-parameters. Inconsistent iParameters (iParCRC error) 75D The PROFIsafe driver has detected inconsistent iParameters. Check the parameter assignment. F_Block_ID not supported 76D The PROFIsafe driver has detected an incorrect Block ID. Check the parameter assignment of the PROFIsafe driver. Internal error 256D Possible causes: * Eliminate the interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * Replace the F-module. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. The module must then be pulled and plugged, or the power switched OFF and ON * Replace the F-module. Internal supply voltage of the module failed Output short-circuited to L+ Output short-circuited to ground Incorrect/inconsistent firmware present. Firmware update required 260D 261D 262D 283D Meaning * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Possible causes: * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Short circuit to L+ can mean: * The sensor cable is short-circuited to L+. * The output cable is short-circuited to L+. Short circuit to ground can mean: * The sensor cable is short-circuited to ground. * The output cable is short-circuited to ground. * The output signal is short-circuited to ground. The firmware is incomplete and/or firmware added to the F-module is incompatible. This leads to errors or functional limitations when operating the F-module. Remedy Correct the process wiring. Correct the process wiring. * Perform a firmware update for all parts of the F-module and note any error messages. * Use only firmware versions released for this F-module. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 70 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Discrepancy error, channel status 0/0 768D Discrepancy error, channel status 0/1 769D Discrepancy error, channel status 1/0 770D Discrepancy error, channel status 1/1 771D Input signal could not be clearly detected 773D Meaning Possible causes: Remedy * Check the process signal. * The process signal is faulty. * Replace the sensor. * The sensor is defective. * * The configured discrepancy time is too low. Check the parameter assignment of the discrepancy time. * Check the process wiring. * There is a short circuit between an unconnected sensor cable and the sensor supply cable. * Wire break in connected sensor cable or the sensor supply cable * An error occurred during the discrepancy check. An error occurred in the plausibility check * of the input signal between the processors. * You must eliminate the error within 100 * hours. If you do not eliminate the error within 100 hours, the F-module will become inoperative. Use shielded cables to reduce the EMC effects. Reduce the input frequency. Check the wiring of the sensor. Possible causes: Short circuit of internal sensor supply to L+ 774D * The input signal is faulty, e.g., as a result of impermissibly high electromagnetic interference. * A high-frequency input signal is present, e.g., due to mutual interference of sensors or the signal being above the sampling frequency of the input signal. * A momentary interruption/short circuit of the sensor cable (loose contact) is present. * The sensor/switch is bouncing. Possible causes: * * There is a short circuit of the internal sensor supply with L+. Eliminate the short circuit in the process wiring. * * There is a short circuit of two sensor supplies. Check the configured test time and the process wiring. * Replace the sensor. * The capacitance of the connected sensor for the configured test time is too high. * The sensor is defective. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 71 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code Overload or short circuit of internal sensor supply to ground 775D No pulse detected 778D Meaning Possible causes: * Eliminate the overload. * The internal sensor supply is shortcircuited to ground. * Eliminate the short circuit in the process wiring. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * Check the "Sensor supply" parameter. * Eliminate/reduce the electromagnetic interference. * Check the "Pulse monitoring window" parameter. * Check the "Minimum pulse time" parameter. * Check the process wiring. * Check the "Monitoring window" parameter. * Check the "Number of signal changes" parameter. * Check the process wiring. * Eliminate/reduce the electromagnetic interference. * Replace the sensor. A pulse with a length greater than or equal to "Minimum pulse time" has not occurred within the time configured with the "Pulse monitoring window" parameter. Possible causes: Sensor signal chatters 784D Remedy * The "Pulse monitoring window" parameter setting is too low. * The "Minimum pulse time" parameter setting is too high. * There is a wire break in the process wiring. Too many signal changes have occurred within the time configured with the "Monitoring window" parameter. * The "Monitoring window" parameter setting is too high. * The "Number of signal changes" parameter setting is too low. * A momentary interruption/short circuit of the sensor cable (loose contact) is present. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The sensor is bouncing. * The sensor is defective. Switching frequency too high 785D The maximum switching frequency of the F-module has been exceeded. Reduce the switching frequency. (see Technical specifications (Page 77)) Undertemperature 786D The minimum permissible temperature limit has been violated. Operate the F-module within the specified temperature range. (see Technical specifications (Page 77)) Fault in input circuit 787D The F-module has detected an internal error. Possible causes: * Eliminate/reduce the electromagnetic interference. * Replace the F-module. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 72 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Fault code PROFIsafe communication error (timeout) 792D Meaning The PROFIsafe driver has detected a timeout. Possible causes: PROFIsafe communication error (CRC) 793D * The F-monitoring time is set incorrectly. * Bus faults are present. The PROFIsafe driver has detected a CRC error. Remedy * Check the parameter assignment. * Ensure that communication is functioning correctly. * Check the communication connection between the F-module and F-CPU. * Eliminate the electromagnetic interference. Possible causes: PROFIsafe address assignment error 794D Input short-circuited to L+ Output defective * The communication between the FCPU and F-module is disturbed. * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * An error occurred in the sign-of-life monitoring. An error occurred during the automatic PROFIsafe address assignment. Check the configuration. 796D The input signal is short-circuited to L+. Eliminate the short circuit. 797D The F-module has detected an internal error. * Check the wiring. * Replace the F-module. Possible causes: Readback error 798D * Short circuit to L+ or M * The F-module is defective. The F-module has detected an internal error. If the error persists, replace the Fmodule. Possible causes: Overload 800D * Impermissibly high electromagnetic interference is present. * The F-module is defective. The maximum permissible output current has been exceeded. The output stage has been switched off. Check the process wiring. Possible causes: * A short circuit exists. Supply voltage too high 802D The supply voltage is too high. Check the supply voltage. Supply voltage too low 803D The supply voltage is too low. Check the supply voltage. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 73 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.3 Diagnostic messages Supply voltage outside the nominal range In the case of a voltage dip in the supply voltage L+, the DIAG LED flashes and the module is passivated. When the voltage has recovered (level must remain above the specified value for at least 1 minute (see Technical specifications (Page 77): Voltages, Currents, Potentials)), the DIAG LED stops flashing. The module remains passivated. Behavior in case of cross circuit/short circuit to the sensor supply When internal sensor supply is specified and short circuit test is disabled, short circuits to ground at the sensor supplies are detected. Channels for which the relevant sensor supply is configured will be passivated. When internal sensor supply is specified and short circuit test is enabled, short circuits to ground and potential at the sensor supply are detected. Channels for which the relevant sensor supply is configured will be passivated. Special features for fault detection The detection of certain faults (short-circuits or discrepancy errors, for example) depends on the application, the wiring, and the parameter assignment of the short circuit test and the sensor power supply. The corresponding tables for fault detection for the applications are available under Applications of the F-I/O module (Page 39). Generally applicable information on diagnostics Information on diagnostics that pertains to all fail-safe modules (for example, readout of diagnostics functions or passivation of channels) is available in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 74 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.4 Value status 6.4 Value status Properties In addition to the diagnostic messages and the status and error display, the F-module makes available information about the validity of each input and output signal - the value status. The value status is entered in the process image along with the input signal. Value status for digital input and output modules The value status is additional binary information of a digital input or output signal. It is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) at the same time as the process signal. It provides information about the validity of the input or output signal. The value status is influenced by the wire break check, short-circuit, chatter monitoring, pulse extension, and plausibility check. 1B: A valid process value is output for the channel. 0B: A fail-safe value is output for the channel, or the channel is deactivated. Assignment of the inputs and value status in the PII Each channel of the F-module is assigned a value status in the process image of the inputs. You can find the assignment in section Address space (Page 36). Reference A detailed description of the evaluation and processing of the respective input signals can be found in the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 75 Interrupts/diagnostic messages 6.4 Value status Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 76 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 7 Technical specifications Technical specifications of F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 Product type designation F-PM-E PPM 24VDC General information Hardware product version 01 Firmware version V1.0.0 Product function I&M data Yes; IM0 to IM3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of version V12.0 STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version as of V5.5 SP3 / - PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.31 Operating mode Multi-output No Installation type/mounting Rack mounting possible No Front installation possible No Rail mounting possible Yes; standard DIN rail Wall mounting/direct mounting possible No Supply voltage Type of supply voltage 24 V DC Rated value (DC) 24 V Low limit of permissible range (DC) 20.4 V High limit of permissible range (DC) 28.8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current Current consumption (rated value) 75 mA; without load Current consumption, max. 21 mA; from backplane bus Output voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 77 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 Sensor supply Number of outputs 2 Output current Up to 60 C, max. 0.3 A Short circuit protection Yes; electronic (response threshold 0.7 A to 2.1 A) 24 V sensor supply 24 V Yes; min. L+ (-1.5 V) Short circuit protection Yes Output current, max. 600 mA; total current of all sensors Power Power consumption from the backplane bus 70 mW Power loss Power loss, typ. 5W Address space Address space per module Input 7 bytes Output 5 bytes Digital inputs Number of inputs 2 m/p-reading Yes; p-reading Input characteristic curve according to IEC 61131, Type 1 Yes Input voltage Type of input voltage DC Rated value, DC 24 V For "0" signal -30 to +5 V For "1" signal +15 to +30 V Input current For "1" signal, typ. 3.7 mA Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) For standard inputs * Assignable Yes * For "0" to "1", min. 0.4 ms * For "0" to "1", max. 20 ms * For "1" to "0", min. 0.4 ms * For "1" to "0", max. 20 ms For counter/technological functions * Assignable No Length of cable Cable length, shielded, max. 1000 m Cable length unshielded, max. 500 m Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 78 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 Digital outputs Number of outputs 1 Digital outputs, configurable Yes Short circuit protection Yes * Response threshold, typ. Wire break detection * Response threshold, typ. Overload protection * Response threshold, typ. Voltage induced on current interruption limited to > 14.8 A Yes 8 mA Yes 8.8 A max 1.5 V Switching capacity of outputs With resistive load, max. 8A With lamp load, max. 100 W Load resistance range Low limit 3 High limit 2000 Output voltage Type of output voltage DC For "1" signal, min. 24 V; L+ (-0.5 V) Output current For "1" signal, rated value 8A For "0" signal, residual current, max. 1.5 mA; PP-switching: Max. 1.5 mA; PMswitching: Max. 1 mA Switching frequency With resistive load, max. 10 Hz; symmetrical With inductive load, max. 0.1 Hz; acc. to IEC 947-5-1, DC13, symmetrical With lamp load, max. 4 Hz; symmetrical Total current of outputs Max. current per channel 8 A; (note derating data in the manual) Max. current per module 8 A; (note derating data in the manual) Length of cable Cable length, shielded, max. 1000 m Cable length unshielded, max. 500 m Interrupts/diagnostics/status information Fail-safe values can be switched to No Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Yes Hardware interrupt No Diagnostic messages Diagnostics Yes, see section "Interrupts/diagnostic messages" in the manual Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 79 Technical specifications 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 Diagnostics display LED RUN LED Yes; green LED ERROR LED Yes; red LED Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED Channel status display Yes; green LED For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED Electrical isolation Electrical isolation channels Between channels No Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics No Permitted potential difference Between different circuits 60 V DC / 75 V AC Isolation Isolation test voltage 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates SIL acc. to IEC 61508 SIL 3 Suitable for safety functions Yes Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode Performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1 PLe Low demand (PFD) acc. to SIL3 < 2.00E-05 1/h High demand (PFH) acc. to SIL3 < 1.00E-09 1/h Environmental conditions Operating temperature Min. 0 C Max. 60 C Horizontal installation, min. 0 C Horizontal installation, max. 60 C Vertical installation, min. 0 C Vertical installation, max. 50 C Storage/transport temperature Min. -40 C Max. 70 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 72 mm Depth 55 mm Weights Weight, approx. 70 g Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 80 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Technical specifications Temperature characteristic values (derating) Mounting position Maximum temperature Maximum output current Horizontal 40 C 8A 50 C 6A 60 C 4A 50 C 4A Vertical Dimension drawing See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300) manual Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 81 Technical specifications Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 82 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Response times A.1 A Response times Introduction The next section shows the response times of power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST. The response times of the fail-safe modules are included in the calculation of the F-system response time. Times required for the calculation Maximum internal processing time: Tmax. = 29 ms Maximum cycle time: Tcycle = 14 ms Short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for the channel = "Time for short circuit test" + "Startup time after short circuit test" The input delay, short circuit test times, dark test time, switch-on time, discrepancy time, and test time are configured in STEP 7. Definition of response time for fail-safe digital inputs The response time represents the interval between a signal change at the digital input and reliable availability of the safety frame on the backplane bus. Definition of response time for internal evaluation: Cycle time + Input delay + Short circuit test time + Maximum(readback time, switch-on time, light test time) Maximum response time in the error-free case with 1oo1 evaluation Maximum response time = Tmax + Input delay + Short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for the channel Maximum response time in the error-free case with 1oo2 evaluation Maximum response time = Tmax + Input delay + Maximum (short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel 0, short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel n1) Maximum response time with external short circuits Maximum response time = Input delay + (n x Tcycle) + Sum(all short circuit test times + all startup times of sensors with activated short circuit test) n = Number of sensor supplies with activated short circuit test Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 83 Response times A.2 Minimum distance of test pulses Maximum response time with discrepancy error and 1oo2 evaluation Maximum response time = Tmax + Input delay + Discrepancy time + 2 x Maximum (short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel 0, short circuit test time for the sensor supply configured for channel 1) Maximum response time with error and change of user data Maximum response time = 3 x Tcycle + Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) Maximum response time with detection by bit pattern test Maximum response time = Tcycle + Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) + configured test time Definition of response time for fail-safe digital outputs The response time represents the interval between an incoming safety message frame from the backplane bus and the signal change at the digital output. Maximum response time for fail-safe digital outputs The maximum response time for fail-safe digital outputs in the error-free case is equal to: Maximum response time = 2 x Tcycle + Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) The maximum response time for fail-safe digital outputs in the presence of an error is equal to: Maximum response time = Tcycle + 2 x Maximum(dark test time, switch-on time) + interval between test pulses A.2 Minimum distance of test pulses The minimum interval between two test pulses depends on the activation of the light test, the configured maximum test time, and whether the output has been specified as a PMswitching or PP-switching output. You can find the dependencies in the table below: Assigned maximum test PM switching, light test time not active PM switching, light test active PP switching, light test not active PP switching, light test active 1000 s 62.080 s 45.147 s 82.913 s 38.137 s 100 s 5.830 s 4.238 s 7.913 s 3.521 s Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 84 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 Switching of loads B.1 B Connecting capacitive loads If the output of power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST is interconnected with loads that require little current and have capacitance, this can lead to detection of a short circuit or overload. Reason: The capacitance cannot be sufficiently discharged or charged during the configured readback time of the bit pattern test. The figure below shows typical curves for the assignable readback times representing the correlation between load resistance and switchable load capacitance at a supply voltage of 24 V DC. Figure B-1 Switching of capacitive loads for the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module depending on the configured dark and light test times The curves shown were plotted using a SIMATIC PS 307 10A power supply unit with a cable length of 25 m (cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2) between the output of the F-PME 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module and the load. Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 85 Switching of loads B.2 Switching of inductive loads Remedy for detecting a short circuit 1. Determine the load current and capacitance of the load. 2. Locate the operating point in the diagram above. 3. If the operating point is above the curve, you must increase the load current until the new operating point is below the curve by connecting a resistor in parallel. B.2 Switching of inductive loads Switching of inductive loads The diagram below shows the maximum permitted inductive loads as a function of the load current and switching frequency. Figure B-2 Switching of inductive loads for the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST power module depending on the load current and switching frequency Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) 86 Manual, 07/2013, A5E03857933-01 SIMATIC ET 200SP Produktinformation zur Dokumentation der fehlersicheren Module ET 200SP Produktinformation Security-Hinweise Siemens bietet Produkte und Losungen mit Industrial Security-Funktionen an, die den sicheren Betrieb von Anlagen, Losungen, Maschinen, Geraten und/oder Netzwerken unterstutzen. Sie sind wichtige Komponenten in einem ganzheitlichen Industrial Security-Konzept. Die Produkte und Losungen von Siemens werden unter diesem Gesichtspunkt standig weiterentwickelt. Siemens empfiehlt, sich unbedingt regelmaig uber Produkt-Updates zu informieren. Fur den sicheren Betrieb von Produkten und Losungen von Siemens ist es erforderlich, geeignete Schutzmanahmen (z. B. Zellenschutzkonzept) zu ergreifen und jede Komponente in ein ganzheitliches Industrial Security-Konzept zu integrieren, das dem aktuellen Stand der Technik entspricht. Dabei sind auch eingesetzte Produkte von anderen Herstellern zu berucksichtigen. Weitergehende Informationen uber Industrial Security finden Sie unter (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Um stets uber Produkt-Updates informiert zu sein, melden Sie sich fur unseren produktspezifischen Newsletter an. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie unter (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Allgemeine Erganzungen zur Dokumentation Inhalt Diese Produktinformation enthalt Erganzungen und Korrekturen zur Dokumentation der F-Module ET 200SP. Erganzung der Kapitel 5.1.1.2 "Anwendungsfall: Anschluss von einer Last am Digitalausgang, PP schaltend", 5.1.1.4 "Anwendungsfall: Anschluss von 2 Lasten parallel liegend am Digitalausgang, PP schaltend" und 5.4.2 "Sicherheitsgerichtete Abschaltung von Standard-Ausgabemodulen, PP schaltend" des Geratehandbuchs "Powermodul F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)" WARNUNG Wenn der Ausgangskanal 100 Stunden, und langer, dauerhaft 0"-Signal fuhren kann, muss der Helltest aktiviert werden. Beachten Sie die jeweiligen Anforderungen Ihrer Produktnormen hinsichtlich der Fehleraufdeckungszeit. Nicht unterstutzte Parameter Die Parameter "Impulsverlangerung" und "Dunkeltest fur 48 Stunden deaktivieren" werden nicht unterstutzt. Abhangigkeiten zwischen den Parametern "Diskrepanzzeit" und "Eingangsverzogerung" Die Diskrepanzzeit muss groer als die Eingangsverzogerung parametriert werden. Abhangigkeiten zwischen den Parametern "Hochlaufzeit des Gebers nach Kurzschlusstest" und "Zeit fur Kurzschlusstest" Die Hochlaufzeit des Gebers nach Kurzschlusstest muss mindestens 1% der Zeit fur den Kurzschlusstest betragen. Einschalten der Versorgungsspannung L+ fur F-Module ET 200SP und IM Stellen Sie sicher, dass vor dem Einschalten der Versorgungsspannung L+ eines F-Moduls sowohl das F-Modul als auch die IM gleichzeitig spannungslos waren. Eine Einschaltreihenfolge mussen Sie dabei nicht beachten. (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2014. Alle Rechte vorbehalten A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 1 Zyklisches Lesen von I&M-Daten Zyklisches Lesen von I&M-Daten kann das Timing der F-Module belasten. Vermeiden Sie deshalb schnelle Lesezyklen von unter 500 ms. Drahtbrucherkennung F-Modul F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Die Ansprechschwelle der Drahtbrucherkennung betragt < 15 mA. Einsatz von nicht-fehlersicheren Modulen Fehlersichere Module ET 200SP durfen Sie in einem Dezentralen Peripheriesystem ET 200SP nur zusammen mit nichtfehlersicheren Modulen einsetzen, die mit SELV/PELV betrieben werden. Auerdem darf das Digitalausgabemodul RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST nicht mit der gleichen Spannung wie die fehlersicheren Module ET 200SP versorgt werden. Quittierungzeit TDAT F-Modul Quittierungszeit TDAT Digitaleingabemodul F-DI 8x24VDC HF 23 ms Digitalausgabemodul F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF 31 ms Powermodul F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST 30 ms Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Produktinformation zur Dokumentation der fehlersicheren Module ET 200SP Produktinformation zur Dokumentation der fehlersicheren Module ET 200SP A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 2 A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 SIMATIC ET 200SP Product Information for the documentation on Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) Product Information Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). General amendments to the documentation Content This Product Information contains additional information and corrections relating to the documentation on Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) up to and including hardware version (FS) 04. The Product Information is part of the product supplied. The information in it should be considered more up-to-date if uncertainties arise. Technical specifications of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST up to and including hardware version (FS) 04. 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0 Output current For "0" signal, residual current max. 6 mA; PP switching: typ. 1.5 mA, max. 6 mA PM switching: max. 1 mA Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Product Information for the documentation on Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) (c) Siemens AG 2015 - 2017. All rights reserved A5E35730426-AB, 01/2017 2 A5E35730426-AB, 01/2017 SIMATIC ET 200SP Product Information for the Documentation of ET 200SP Fail-safe Modules Product Information Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). General amendments to the documentation Content This product information contains amendments and corrections to the documentation of the ET 200SP fail-safe modules. Amendment to chapter 5.1.1.2 "Use case: Wiring a load to the digital output, PP switching", 5.1.1.4 "Use case: Wiring of two parallel loads to the digital output, PP switching" and 5.4.2 "Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PP switching" of the manual "Power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)" WARNING The light test must be activated if the output channel can permanently carry the "0" signal for 100 hours or more. Consult the respective requirements of your product standards regarding error detection time. Unsupported parameters The "Pulse stretching" and "Disable dark test for 48 hours" parameters are not supported. Dependencies between the "Discrepancy time" and "Input delay" parameters The configured discrepancy time must be greater than the configured input delay. Dependencies between the "Startup time of the sensors after short circuit test" and "Time for short circuit test" parameters The startup time of the sensor after a short circuit test must amount to at least 1% of the time for the short circuit test. Switching on the supply voltage L+ for the ET 200SP F-modules and IM Make sure that the F-module as well as the IM were de-energized at the same time before you switch on the supply voltage L+ for an F-module. You do not have to observe a switch-on sequence. (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2014. All rights reserved A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 3 Cyclic reading of I&M data Cyclic reading of I&M data can affect the timing of the F-modules. You should therefore avoid short read cycles of less than 500 ms. Open-circuit detection for F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF fail-safe module The response threshold of the open-circuit detection is < 15 mA. Using non-fail-safe modules In an ET 200SP distributed I/O system, you can only use ET 200SP fail-safe modules together with non-fail-safe modules that are operated with SELV/PELV. In addition, the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST cannot be supplied with the same voltage as the ET 200SP fail-safe modules. TDAT acknowledgment time F-Module TDAT acknowledgment time Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF 23 ms Digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF 31 ms Power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST 30 ms Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Product Information for the Documentation of ET 200SP Fail-safe Product ModulesInformation for the Documentation of ET 200SP Fail-safe Modules A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 4 A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 SIMATIC ET 200SP Information produit sur la documentation des modules de securite ET 200SP Information produit Notes relatives a la securite Siemens commercialise des produits et solutions comprenant des fonctions de securite industrielle qui contribuent a une exploitation sure des installations, solutions, machines, equipements et/ou reseaux. Ces fonctions jouent un role important dans un systeme global de securite industrielle. Dans cette optique, les produits et solutions Siemens font l'objet de developpements continus. Siemens vous recommande donc vivement de vous tenir regulierement informe des mises a jour des produits. Pour garantir une exploitation fiable des produits et solutions Siemens, il est necessaire de prendre des mesures de protection adequates (par ex. concept de protection des cellules) et d'integrer chaque composant dans un systeme de securite industrielle global et moderne. Veuillez egalement tenir compte des produits que vous utilisez et qui proviennent d'autres fabricants. Pour plus d'informations sur la securite industrielle, rendez-vous sur (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Veuillez vous abonner a la newsletter d'un produit particulier afin d'etre informe des mises a jour des qu'elles surviennent. Pour plus d'informations, rendez-vous sur (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Addenda generaux a la documentation Contenu Cette information produit contient des addenda et des correctifs a la documentation des modules de securite ET 200SP. Addendum au chapitre 5.1.1.2 "Cas d'application : Connexion d'une charge a la sortie TOR, commutation PP", 5.1.1.4 "Cas d'application : Connexion de 2 charges paralleles a la sortie TOR, commutation PP" et 5.4.2 "Desactivation de securite de modules de sorties standard, commutation PP" du manuel "Module de puissance F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)" ATTENTION Si la voie de sortie peut fournir un signal "0" en continu pendant 100 heures et plus, le test avec activation doit etre active. Tenez compte des exigences specifiques aux normes de votre produit en ce qui concerne le temps de detection des erreurs. Parametres non pris en charge Les parametres "Impulsion prolongee" et "Desactivation du test avec desactivation pour 48 heures" ne sont pas pris en charge. Dependances entre les parametres "Temps de discordance" et "Retard a l'entree" Le temps de discordance doit etre superieur au retard a l'entree. Dependances entre les parametres "Temps de demarrage du capteur apres le test de court-circuit" et "Temps de test de court-circuit" Le temps de demarrage du capteur apres le test de court-circuit doit etre egal au moins egal a 1% au temps de test de court-circuit. (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2014. Tous droits reserves A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 5 Mise en route de la tension d'alimentation L+ des modules F ET 200SP et IM Assurez-vous que le module F et l'IM sont tous deux hors tension avant de mettre en route la tension d'alimentation L+ d'un module F. Pour ce faire, il n'est pas necessaire de suivre un ordre d'activation. Lecture cyclique des donnees I&M La lecture cyclique des donnees I&M peut surcharger la synchronisation des modules F. Il convient donc d'eviter les cycles rapides de lecture inferieurs a 500 ms. Detection de rupture de fil du module de securite F-DQ 4x24 V CC/2A PM HF Le seuil de declenchement de la detection de rupture de fil est < 15 mA. Utilisation de modules non de securite Les modules de securite ET 200SP ne doivent etre utilises dans un systeme de peripherie decentralisee ET 200SP qu'avec des modules non de securite fonctionnant avec une TBTS/TBTP. En outre, le module de sorties TOR RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST ne doit pas etre alimente avec la meme tension que les modules de securite ET 200SP. Temps d'acquittement TDAT Module F Temps d'acquittement TDAT Module d'entrees TOR F-DI 8x24 V CC HF 23 ms Module de sorties TOR F-DQ 4x24 V CC/2A PM HF 31 ms Module d'alimentation F-PM-E 24 V CC/8A PPM ST 30 ms Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Information Information produit sur la documentation des modules de securite ET 200SPproduit sur la documentation des modules de securite ET 200SP A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 6 A5E32586870-AF, 02/2014 ET 200SP distributed I/O system ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Product overview SIMATIC ET 200SP ET 200SP distributed I/O system 2 ___________________ Application planning 3 ___________________ Installation 4 ___________________ Connecting 5 ___________________ Configuring Product Information 6 ___________________ Maintenance 7 ___________________ Technical specifications 8 ___________________ Accessories/spare parts 07/2013 A5E32288220-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32288220-AA 08/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Preface Scope of the product information This product information amends the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) to include ET 200SP failsafe modules. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 3 Preface ET 200SP distributed I/O system 4 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 7 1.1 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? ....................................................7 1.2 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules ..........................................................................................10 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 13 2.1 3 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 15 3.1 4 8 Assigning the F-destination address for fail-safe modules ..........................................................21 Assigning the F-destination address ............................................................................................21 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 23 6.1 7 Additional rules and provisions for operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules ...............17 Safe functional extra-low voltage (SELV) for fail-safe modules ...................................................17 Requirements of sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules ....................................................18 Capacitive crosstalk of digital input/output signals ......................................................................20 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 21 5.1 5.1.1 6 Basics ...........................................................................................................................................15 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 17 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 5 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules .........................................................................13 Firmware update ..........................................................................................................................23 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 25 7.1 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules ......................................................................25 7.2 Standards and approvals .............................................................................................................27 Accessories/spare parts ........................................................................................................................ 29 8.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules ........................................29 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 31 ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 5 Table of contents ET 200SP distributed I/O system 6 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Product overview 1.1 1 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? Fail-safe automation systems Fail-safe automation systems (F-systems) are used in systems with higher-level safety requirements. F-systems serve to control processes and ensure that they are in a safe state immediately after shutdown. In other words, F-systems control processes in which an immediate shutdown does not endanger persons or the environment. Fail-safe modules The key difference between fail-safe modules (F-modules) and standard ET 200SP modules is that they have an internal two-channel design. The two integrated processors monitor each other, automatically test the input and output circuits, and switch the F-I/O module to a safe state in the event of a fault. The F-CPU communicates with the fail-safe modules via the fail-safe PROFIsafe bus profile. Fail-safe power modules, together with the respective BaseUnit, serve the load voltage supply of the potential group and the safety-oriented tripping of the load voltage for standard output modules. Fail-safe digital input modules detect the signal states of safety-oriented sensors and send the relevant safety message frames to the F-CPU. Fail-safe digital output modules are suitable for safety-related shutdown procedures with short circuit and cross-circuit protection up to the actuator. Possible uses of ET 200SP with fail-safe modules The use of ET 200SP with fail-safe modules allows conventional configurations in safety engineering to be replaced with PROFNET IO components. This includes the replacement of switching devices for emergency STOP, protective door monitors, two-hand operation, etc. ET 200SP fail-safe modules are supported with the STEP 7 Safety Advanced optional package V12 including HSP 54 or higher. ET 200SP fail-safe modules are supported with IM155-6PN ST as of firmware V1.1. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 7 Product overview 1.1 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? Achievable safety classes Fail-safe modules are equipped with integrated safety functions for safety mode. The following safety classes can be achieved through appropriate parameter assignment of the safety functions in STEP 7 Professional V12 SP1 or higher with STEP 7 Safety Advanced optional package V12 or higher, through a specific combination of fail-safe and standard modules, and through a specific arrangement and wiring of sensors and actuators: Safety class in safety mode According to IEC 61508 According to ISO 13849-1:2006 SIL2 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level d SIL3 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level e SIL3 Category 4 (PL) Performance Level e Use in SIMATIC Safety F-systems ET 200SP fail-safe modules can be used with the STEP 7 Safety Advanced optional package, V12 or higher under PROFINET IO, together with an F-CPU. ET 200SP distributed I/O system 8 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Product overview 1.1 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? SIMATIC Safety F-system with ET 200SP The following figure shows a sample configuration for a SIMATIC Safety F-system with, among other things, an ET 200SP on a PROFINET IO. The PROFINET IO lines can be set up with copper cable, with fiber-optic cable or WLAN. You will find further information on the Internet at Application planning (Page 13). Tasks of the fail-safe IO controller (F-CPU) include the exchange of safety-related and nonsafety-related data with fail-safe and standard ET 200SP modules. Figure 1-1 Fail-safe SIMATIC Safety automation system (sample configuration) Use in safety mode only Fail-safe modules can only be used in fail-safe mode. They cannot be used in non-fail-safe mode In this context, fail-safe mode/non-fail-safe mode refers to the operating mode of the F-I/O module, which either does or doesn't support safety-related communication via safety message frames. Fail-safe modules and non-fail-safe modules can be combined within an ET 200SP. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 9 Product overview 1.2 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules 1.2 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules Safe state (safety concept) The basic principle behind the safety concept is the existence of a safe state for all process variables. Note For digital F-modules, this safe state is the value "0". This applies to both sensors and actuators. Fault reactions and startup of the F-system The safety function requires that fail-safe values (safe state) be applied to the fail-safe module instead of process values (passivation of the fail-safe module) in the following situations: When the F-system is started up If errors are detected during safety-related communication between the F-CPU and the Fmodule via the PROFIsafe safety protocol (communication error) If F-I/O faults or channel faults are detected (e.g., wire break, discrepancy error) Detected faults are written to the diagnostic buffer of the F-CPU and communicated to the safety program in the F-CPU. F-modules cannot save errors as retentive data. When the system is powered down and then restarted, any faults still existing are detected again during startup. However, you have the option of saving faults in your safety program. WARNING For channels that you set to "deactivated" in STEP 7, no diagnostic response or error handling is triggered when a channel fault occurs, not even when such a channel is affected indirectly by a channel group fault ("Channel activated/deactivated" parameter). Remedying faults in the F-system To remedy faults in your F-system, follow the procedure described in IEC 61508-1:2010 section 7.15.2.4 and IEC 61508-2:2010 section 7.6.2.1 e. The following steps must be performed: 1. Diagnostic and repair of the fault 2. Revalidation of the safety function 3. Recording in the service report ET 200SP distributed I/O system 10 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Product overview 1.2 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules Fail-safe value output for F-modules In the case of F-modules with inputs, the F-system provides fail-safe values (0) for the safety program instead of the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs in case of passivation. In the case of F-modules with outputs, the F-system transfers fail-safe values (0) to the failsafe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program in case of passivation. The output channels are de-energized. This also applies when the F-CPU goes into STOP mode. The parameter assignment of fail-safe values is not possible. Depending on which F-system you are using and the type of fault that occurred (F-I/O fault, channel fault or communication error), fail-safe values are used either for the relevant channel only or for all channels of the relevant fail-safe module. Reintegration of a fail-safe module The system changes from fail-safe to process values (reintegration of an F-module) either automatically or only after user acknowledgment in the safety program. If channel faults occur, it may be necessary to remove and reinsert the F-module. A detailed listing of faults requiring removal and insertion of the F-module can be found in the section Diagnostic messages of the respective F-module. After reintegration, the following occurs: In the case of an F-module with inputs, the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs are provided to the safety program In the case of an F-module with outputs, the output values provided in the safety program are again transferred to the fail-safe outputs Additional information on passivation and reintegration For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC Safety, Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual. Reaction of the F-module with inputs to communication errors F-modules with inputs respond differently to communication errors compared to other errors. If a communication error is detected, the current process values remain set at the inputs of the F-module. There is no passivation of the channels. The current process values are passivated in the F-CPU. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 11 Product overview 1.2 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules ET 200SP distributed I/O system 12 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Application planning 2.1 2 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules Introduction ET 200SP distributed I/O systems can be configured using fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules. This chapter provides an example of a mixed configuration comprising fail-safe and non-fails-safe modules. Assembly example for ET 200SP with fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules Generally speaking, it is not necessary to operate fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules in separate potential groups. You can divide the modules into fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential groups and mount them. The following diagram shows an assembly example with fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules within a single ET 200SP. Interface module IM 155-6 PN HF F-module Non-fail-safe module Power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Mixed fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B. You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe for the fail-safe modules. Non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B. Fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU20..D and BU15..B. Through disconnection of the power bus, and thus of the non-fail-safe modules, up to SIL2/Cat.3/PLd is possible. Server module P1/P2 power buses Figure 2-1 ET 200SP assembly example with fail-safe modules ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 13 Application planning 2.1 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules ET 200SP distributed I/O system 14 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 3 Installation 3.1 Basics The following applies to ET 200SP fail-safe modules: WARNING Protection from conductive contaminants In consideration of the environmental conditions, the devices must be protected from conductive contaminants. One way to accomplish this is by installing the devices in a control cabinet with an appropriate degree of protection. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 15 Installation 3.1 Basics ET 200SP distributed I/O system 16 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 4 Connecting 4.1 Additional rules and provisions for operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules 4.1.1 Safe functional extra-low voltage (SELV) for fail-safe modules WARNING The fail-safe modules must be operated with safe functional extra low voltage (SELV, PELV). You can find more information on safe functional extra-low voltage in the data sheets, for example, of the applicable power supplies. The fail-safe modules work with a rated voltage of 24 V DC. The tolerance range is 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC. Within the overvoltage range from 32 V DC to 36 V DC, the F-modules react in a fail-safe manner and the inputs and outputs are passivated. For overvoltages greater than 36 V DC, the F-modules are permanently de-energized. Use a power supply unit that does not exceed Um = 36 V DC even in the event of a fault. For more on this, refer to the information in the data sheet on overvoltage protection in the case of an internal error. Or implement appropriate measures to limit the voltage, e.g., use of an overvoltage protector. All system components that can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill this condition. Each additional circuit (24 V DC) used in the system must have a safe functional extra low voltage (SELV, PELV). Refer to the relevant data sheets or contact the manufacturer. Sensors and actuators with an external power supply can also be connected to F-modules. Make sure that power is supplied to these components from safe functional extra-low voltage as well. The process signal of a 24 V DC digital module may not exceed a fault voltage Um in the event of a fault. WARNING Even when a fault occurs, the permissible potential difference between the supply of the interface module (bus voltage) and the load voltage must not be exceeded. An external direct electrical connection is one way to meet this requirement. This also prevents potential differences from causing voltage additions at the individual voltage sources, which would cause the fault voltage Um to be exceeded. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 17 Connecting 4.1 Additional rules and provisions for operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules Power supply requirements for compliance with NAMUR recommendations Note To ensure adherence to the NAMUR recommendation NE 21, IEC 61131-2 and EN 298, only use power packs/power supply units (230 V AC 24 V DC) with a mains buffering time of at least 20 ms. The latest up-to-date information on PS components is available on the Internet (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). It goes without saying that these requirements also apply to power packs/power supply units not constructed using ET 200SP / S7-300/-400/-1500 technology. 4.1.2 Requirements of sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules General requirements for sensors and actuators Note the following important warning regarding safety-related use of sensors and actuators: WARNING Note that instrumentation with sensors and actuators bears a considerable safety responsibility. Also bear in mind that sensors and actuators generally do not have proof-test intervals of 20 years as defined in IEC 61508:2010 without considerable loss of safety. The probability of hazardous faults and the rate of hazardous faults of safety functions must comply with an SIL-defined high limit. A listing of values achieved by F-modules in the technical specifications of the F-modules is available under "Fail-safe performance characteristics". To achieve the respective safety class, suitably qualified sensors and actuators are necessary. ET 200SP distributed I/O system 18 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Connecting 4.1 Additional rules and provisions for operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules Additional sensor requirements General rule: To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLe, a single-channel sensor is all you need. However, to achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLe with a single-channel sensor, the sensor itself must be SIL3/Cat.3/PLe-capable; otherwise the sensor must be connected by two channels to achieve this safety level. To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe, sensors must be connected by two channels. WARNING In the case of fail-safe input modules, a "0" value is output to the F-CPU after detection of faults. You therefore need to make sure that the sensors are implemented in such a way as to ensure the reliable reaction of the safety program when the sensor is in the "0" state. Example: In its safety program, an EMERGENCY-STOP sensor must achieve the shutdown of the respective actuator when it is in the "0" state (EMERGENCY-STOP button pressed). Duration requirements for sensor signals WARNING Observe the following requirements for sensor signals: * In order to ensure the correct detection of the sensor signals via fail-safe modules with inputs, you need to make sure that the sensor signals are output for a minimum duration. * In order for pulses to be detected with certainty, the time between two signal changes (pulse duration) must be greater than the PROFIsafe monitoring time. Reliable detection by F-modules with inputs The minimum duration of sensor signals for F-modules with inputs depends on the configured input delay, the parameters of the short circuit test of the sensor supplies, and the configured discrepancy behavior for 1oo2 evaluation. The signal must be greater than the maximum response time of the configured application. Information on calculating the maximum response time can be found in section "Response times" of the respective Fmodule. The maximum permitted switching frequency of the sensor signals results from the minimum duration. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 19 Connecting 4.1 Additional rules and provisions for operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules Additional requirements for actuators The fail-safe output modules test the outputs at regular intervals. The F-module briefly switches off the activated outputs and, if necessary, switches on the deactivated outputs. You can assign the maximum duration of the test pulses (dark and light period) with parameters. High-speed actuators may briefly drop out or be activated during this test. If your process does not tolerate this, set the pulse duration of the light or dark test correspondingly or use actuators that have sufficient lag. WARNING If the actuators switch voltages greater than 24 V DC (e.g., 230 V DC), the outputs of a failsafe output module and the parts carrying a higher voltage must be electrically isolated (according to IEC 60664-1). This is generally the case for relays and contactors. Particular attention must be paid to this issue for semiconductor switching devices. Technical specifications of sensors and actuators Refer to the manuals of the fail-safe modules for technical specifications to assist you in selecting sensors and actuators. 4.1.3 Capacitive crosstalk of digital input/output signals When fail-safe digital output and input signals are in a single cable, F-DQ modules and FPM-E modules may experience readback errors. Cause: Capacitive crosstalk During the bit pattern test of the outputs or the sensor supply of the inputs, the steep switching edge of the output drivers caused by the coupling capacitance of the line may result in crosstalk to other non-activated output or input channels. This may then lead to a response of the readback circuit in these channels. The module detects a cross circuit/short circuit and performs a safety-related shutdown. Remedy: Separate cables for F-DI modules, F-DQ modules, and F-PM-E modules or non-fail-safe DQ modules Separate cables for F-DQ channel and F-DI channels for the F-PM-E module Coupling relay or diodes in the outputs Disable the sensor supply test if safety class requirements allow it Cause: magnetic crosstalk Note that an inductive load connected to the F-DQ channels can induce capacitive coupling of a strong magnetic field. Remedy: Spatially disconnect the inductive loads or shield against the magnetic field. Configure the readback time to 50 ms or higher. ET 200SP distributed I/O system 20 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Configuring 5.1 Assigning the F-destination address for fail-safe modules 5.1.1 Assigning the F-destination address 5 The F-destination address is saved permanently on the coding element of the ET 200SP failsafe modules. Note During assignment of the F-destination address, the F-modules must be supplied with supply voltage L+. Note Note the following in conjunction with configuration control: Before you can use configuration control together with F-modules, you must assign the Fdestination address to the F-modules at the designated slots. For this, each F-module must be inserted in the slot configured for it. The actual configuration can then differ from the specified configuration. For additional information on assigning the F-destination address, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) programming and operating manual. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 21 Configuring 5.1 Assigning the F-destination address for fail-safe modules ET 200SP distributed I/O system 22 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 6 Maintenance 6.1 Firmware update Introduction It may be necessary to update the firmware during operation (e.g. function expansions). Update the firmware of the interface module and I/O modules using firmware files. Options for the firmware update Online via PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP (with STEP 7) Requirements The ET 200SP is accessible online via PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP. Additional requirement for fail-safe modules WARNING Check of the firmware version for F-validity When using a new firmware version, you must check whether the employed firmware version is approved for use in the respective module. The approved firmware version is specified in the appendices of the Certificate for SIMATIC Safety. Procedure Connect the programming device or PC to the PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP interface of the ET 200SP. Note Firmware update of analog I/O modules For analog I/O modules, L+ supply voltage must be present on the module at the start of and during the firmware update. You can find additional information on the procedure in the online help for STEP 7. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 23 Maintenance 6.1 Firmware update See also Certificate (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200) ET 200SP distributed I/O system 24 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Technical specifications 7.1 7 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules Protecting ET 200SP with fail-safe modules against overvoltages If your equipment requires protection from overvoltage, we recommend that you use an external protective circuit (surge filter) between the load voltage power supply and the load voltage input of the BaseUnits to ensure surge immunity for the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules. Note Lightning protection measures always require a case-by-case examination of the entire system. An almost complete protection from overvoltages, however, can only be achieved if the entire building surroundings have been designed for overvoltage protection. In particular, this involves structural measures in the building design phase. For detailed information regarding overvoltage protection, we recommend that you contact your Siemens representative or a company specializing in lightning protection. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 25 Technical specifications 7.1 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules The following figure shows an example configuration with fail-safe modules. Voltage is supplied by 1 power supply unit. Note, however, that the total current of the modules fed by the power supply unit must not exceed the permissible limits. You can also use multiple power supply units. Figure 7-1 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with fail-safe modules Name Order number of Dehn Co. A = BVT AD 24 918 402 B = DCO RK D 5 24 919 986 C = DEHNconnect DCO RK E 60 919 990 ET 200SP distributed I/O system 26 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Technical specifications 7.2 Standards and approvals 7.2 Standards and approvals CE mark The ET 200SP F distributed I/O system meets the requirements and safety objectives of the following EC directives and satisfies the harmonized European Standards (EN) for programmable logic controllers published in the official journals of the European Community: 2006/42/EC "Directive on Machinery" (Machinery Directive) 2006/95/EC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits" (LowVoltage Directive) 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) 94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Systems Intended for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive) The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the relevant authorities at: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Industry Sector I IA AS FA DH AMB PO Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg, Germany These are also available for download on the Customer Support web page, keyword "Declaration of Conformity". ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 27 Technical specifications 7.2 Standards and approvals ET 200SP distributed I/O system 28 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 8 Accessories/spare parts 8.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules Overvoltage suppressors for fail-safe electronic modules Note This section lists only those overvoltage suppressors that may be used for the protection of fail-safe modules. Be sure to observe the detailed information on lightning protection and overvoltage protection of the ET 200SP distributed I/O device in ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Components for overvoltage protection of fail-safe modules (lightning protection zone transition 0B to 1) The table below lists overvoltage arresters you can use for fail-safe modules: Table 8- 1 Components for the overvoltage protection (only for unshielded lines) Fail-safe modules Connecting of the lines to interface 0B to 1 with: Article number Supply voltage 1L+, L+ (24 BLITZDUCTOR BVT AD 24 V DC) 918 402 Inputs/outputs of the Fmodules (24 V DC) 919 986 DEHNconnect RK DCO RK D 5 24 Direct ordering of the components from: DEHN + SOHNE GmbH + CO. KG. Hans-Dehn-Str. 1 D-92318 Neumarkt, Germany Phone +49 (0)9181-906-730 ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 29 Accessories/spare parts 8.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules ET 200SP distributed I/O system 30 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Glossary 1oo1 evaluation Type of sensor evaluation - in the case of the 1oo1 evaluation, there is one sensor with a 1-channel connection to the F module. 1oo2 evaluation Type of sensor evaluation - in the case of 1oo2 evaluation , two input channels are assigned one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors. The input signals are compared internally for equivalence or nonequivalence. Acknowledgment time During the acknowledgment time, the F-I/O acknowledge the sign of life specified by the F-CPU. The acknowledgment time is included in the calculation of the monitoring time and response time of the overall fail-safe system. Actuator Actuators can be power relays or contactors for switching on loads, or they can be loads themselves (e.g., directly controlled solenoid valves). Availability Availability is the probability that a system is functional at a specific point in time. Availability can be increased by redundancy, e.g., by using multiple -> sensors at thesame measuring point. Channel fault Channel-specific fault, such as a wire break or short circuit. In channel-specific passivation, the affected channel is either automatically reintegrated or the fail-safe module must be removed and reinserted after the fault has been eliminated. Channel group The channels of a module are grouped together in a channel group. Certain parameters in STEP 7 can only be assigned to channel groups, rather than to individual channels. Channel number Channel numbers are used to uniquely identify the inputs and outputs of a module and to assign channel-specific diagnostic messages. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 31 Glossary Channel-specific passivation With this type of passivation, only the affected channel is passivated in the event of a channel fault. In the event of a module fault, all channels of the fail-safe module are passivated. CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC signature The validity of the process values in the safety message frame, the accuracy of the assigned address references, and the safety-related parameters are validated by means of the CRC signature in the safety message frame. Dark period Dark periods occur during shutdown tests and complete bit pattern tests. The fail-safe output module switches test-related zero signals to the active output. This output is then briefly disabled (= dark period). An adequate carrier actuator will not respond to this and will remain activated. Derating See temperature characteristics Discrepancy analysis The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non-equivalence is used for fail-safe applications to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same levels). A check is performed to determine whether the difference (for nonequivalence testing: the same levels) has disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this means that a discrepancy error exists. The discrepancy analysis compares the two input signals of the 1oo2 sensor evaluation in the fail-safe input module. Discrepancy time Configurable time for the discrepancy analysis. If the discrepancy time is set too high, the fault detection time and fault reaction time are extended unnecessarily. If the discrepancy time is set too low, availability is decreased unnecessarily since a discrepancy error is detected when, in reality, no error exists. ET 200SP distributed I/O system 32 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Glossary Fail-safe modules ET 200SP modules with integrated safety functions that can be used for safety-related operation (safety mode). Fail-safe systems Fail-safe systems (F-systems) remain in a safe state or immediately assume another safe state as soon as particular failures occur. Fault response time The maximum fault response time of an F-system defines the interval between the occurrence of any fault and a safe reaction at all affected fail-safe outputs. For F-systems overall: The maximum fault response time defines the interval between the occurrence of any fault at any F-I/O and the safe reaction at the corresponding fail-safe output. For digital inputs: The maximum fault response time defines the interval between the occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the backplane bus. For digital outputs: The maximum fault response time defines the interval between the occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the digital output. Fault tolerance time The fault tolerance time of a process is the time a process can be left unattended without risk to life and limb of the operating personnel, or damage to the environment. Any type of F-system control is tolerated within this fault tolerance time, i.e. the F-system can control its processes incorrectly or even not at all. The fault tolerance time depends on the type of process and must be determined on a case-by-case basis. F-CPU An F-CPU is a central processing unit with fail-safe capability that is permitted for use in SIMATIC Safety. A standard user program can also be run on the F-CPU. F-I/O Collective name for fail-safe inputs and outputs available in SIMATIC S7 for integration into the SIMATIC Safety F-system. Available F-I/O modules: Fail-safe I/O module for ET 200eco Fail-safe signal modules S7-300 (F-SMs) Fail-safe modules for ET 200S Fail-safe modules for ET 200SP Fail-safe DP standard slaves Fail-safe PA field devices Fail-safe IO devices ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 33 Glossary F-monitoring time PROFIsafe monitoring time F-Systems fail-safe systems Module fault Module faults can be external faults (e.g. missing load voltage) or internal faults (e.g. processor failure). Internal faults always require module replacement. Monitoring time PROFIsafe monitoring time M-switch Each fail-safe digital output of ET 200SP F-modules consists of a P-switch DO-Px (current sourcing) and an M-switch DO-Mx (current sinking). The load is connected between the Pswitch and M-switch. The two switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the load. Nonequivalent sensor A nonequivalent sensor is a two-way switch that is connected to two inputs of an F-I/O (via 2 channels) in fail-safe systems (for 1oo2 evaluation of sensor signals). Passivation If an F-I/O module detects a fault it switches either the affected channel or all channels to a safe state, i.e. the channels of this F-I/O module are passivated. The F-I/O module signals the detected faults to the F-CPU. When passivating channels at F-I/O with inputs, the F-System provides fail-safe values for the safety program instead of the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs. When passivating channels at F-I/O with outputs, the F-system returns fail-safe values (0) to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program. Performance Level Performance Level (PL) according to ISO 13849-1:2006 or EN ISO 13849-1:2008 PROFIsafe Safety-oriented PROFINET I/O bus profile for communication between the safety program and the F-I/O module in a fail-safe system. ET 200SP distributed I/O system 34 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Glossary PROFIsafe address Every fail-safe module has a PROFIsafe address. You have to configure the PROFIsafe address. PROFIsafe monitoring time Monitoring time for safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O Proof-test interval Period after which a component must be forced to fail-safe state, that is, it is either replaced with an unused component, or is proven faultless. P-switch M-switch Redundancy, availability-enhancing Multiple instances of components with the objective of maintaining component functionality in the event of hardware faults. Redundancy, safety-enhancing Multiple availability of components with the aim of exposing hardware faults based on comparison; such as 1oo2 evaluation in fail-safe modules. Reintegration After the elimination of a fault, it is necessary to ensure the reintegration (depassivation) of the F-I/O. Reintegration (switchover from fail-safe values to process values) occurs either automatically or only after a user acknowledgment in the safety program. In the case of a fail-safe input module, the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs are made available to thesafety program again after reintegration. In the case of a fail-safe output module, the fail-safe system transfers the output values in the safety program to the fail-safe outputs again. Safe state The basic principle of the safety concept in F-systems is the existence of a safe state for all process variables. For the digital F-I/O, for example, the safe state is the value "0". ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 35 Glossary Safety class Safety level (Safety Integrity Level) SIL according to IEC 61508:2010. The higher the Safety Integrity Level, the more rigid the measures for prevention of systematic faults and for management of systematic faults and hardware failures. The fail-safe modules support operation in safety mode up to safety class SIL3. Safety function A mechanism integrated in the F-CPU and F-I/O that enables their use in the fail-safe system SIMATIC Safety. According to IEC 61508:2010 A safety function is implemented by a safety system in order to maintain or force a system safe state in the event of a specific fault. Safety message frame In safety mode, data are transferred between the F-CPU and F-I/O in a safety message frame. Safety mode Operating mode of F-I/O that enables safety-related communication via safety message frames. ET 200SP fail-safe modules can only used in safety mode. Safety program Safety-related user program Safety-related communication Communication used to exchange fail-safe data. Sensor evaluation There are two types of sensor evaluation: 1oo1 evaluation - sensor signal is read once 1oo2 evaluation - sensor signal is read in twice by the same F-module and compared internally Sensors Sensors are used for accurate detection of digital and analog signals as well as routes, positions, velocities, rotational speeds, masses, etc. ET 200SP distributed I/O system 36 Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA Glossary SIL Safety Integrated Level safety class Standard mode Operating mode of F-I/O in which standard communication is possible by means of safety message frames, but not safety-related communication. Fail-safe ET 200SP modules can only be operated in safety mode. Value status The value status is the binary additional information of a digital signal. The value status is entered in the process image of the input and provides information on the validity of the signal. ET 200SP distributed I/O system Product Information, 07/2013, A5E32288220-AA 37 Preface SIMATIC ET 200SP BaseUnits (6ES71936BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual ___________________ 1 Guide to the documentation ___________________ 2 New properties ___________________ 3 Product overview ___________________ 4 BaseUnits for I/O modules ___________________ 5 BaseUnits for motor starters ___________________ 6 Potential distributor modules ___________________ Dimension drawings of I/O ___________________ A modules Dimension drawings of motor ___________________ B starters C ___________ Dimension drawings of the potential distributor modules 09/2018 A5E03727049-AJ Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03727049-AJ 10/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions affecting the system in general are described there. The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in commissioning the system. Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Changes compared to the previous version In contrast to the previous version, the chapters "BaseUnits for motor starters" and "Dimension drawings for motor starters" have been added to this manual. Recycling and disposal For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certificated disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the regulations in your country. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to the documentation .................................................................................................................... 8 2 New properties ...................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 14 4 BaseUnits for I/O modules .................................................................................................................... 21 4.1 4.1.1 Product description .................................................................................................................21 Introduction .............................................................................................................................21 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals ............................................................22 Product overview ....................................................................................................................22 Connecting up .........................................................................................................................24 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................25 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 BU type A0, light-colored version without AUX terminals .......................................................26 Product overview ....................................................................................................................26 Connection ..............................................................................................................................28 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................29 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals ..........................................................30 Product overview ....................................................................................................................30 Connection ..............................................................................................................................32 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................33 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals .....................................................34 Product overview ....................................................................................................................34 Connection ..............................................................................................................................36 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................37 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals ...................................................38 Product overview ....................................................................................................................38 Connection ..............................................................................................................................40 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................41 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals ..............................................42 Product overview ....................................................................................................................42 Connection ..............................................................................................................................44 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................45 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals ..................................................46 Product overview ....................................................................................................................46 Connection ..............................................................................................................................48 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................49 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals .............................................50 Product overview ....................................................................................................................50 Connection ..............................................................................................................................52 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................53 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 5 Table of contents 5 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar ............. 54 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 54 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 56 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 57 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals ..... 58 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 58 Connecting up ........................................................................................................................ 60 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 61 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals .......... 62 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 62 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 64 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 65 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 4.13.3 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar ............. 66 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 66 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 68 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 69 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals ................................................................................................................................. 70 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 70 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 72 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 73 4.15 4.15.1 4.15.2 4.15.3 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals .......... 74 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 74 Connecting up ........................................................................................................................ 76 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 77 4.16 4.16.1 4.16.2 4.16.3 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals ...................................................... 78 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 78 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 80 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 81 4.17 4.17.1 4.17.2 4.17.3 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals .................................................... 82 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 82 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 84 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 85 BaseUnits for motor starters .................................................................................................................. 86 5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 86 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed ................................................... 87 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 87 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 89 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 90 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed ......................................................................... 91 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 91 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 93 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 94 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed ........................................................................... 95 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 95 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 97 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Table of contents 6 5.4.3 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................98 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed .....................................................................................99 Product overview ....................................................................................................................99 Connection ............................................................................................................................101 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................102 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI ...........................................................103 Product overview ..................................................................................................................103 Connection ............................................................................................................................105 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................106 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 BU30-MS6 BaseUnit without infeed and with F-DI ...............................................................107 Product overview ..................................................................................................................107 Connection ............................................................................................................................109 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................110 Potential distributor modules ............................................................................................................... 111 6.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................111 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version..............................................................................113 Short designation ..................................................................................................................113 Product overview ..................................................................................................................113 Connecting ............................................................................................................................115 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................116 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version .............................................................................118 Product overview ..................................................................................................................118 Connecting ............................................................................................................................120 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................121 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version..............................................................................123 Short designation ..................................................................................................................123 Product overview ..................................................................................................................123 Connecting ............................................................................................................................125 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................126 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version .............................................................................128 Short designation ..................................................................................................................128 Product overview ..................................................................................................................128 Connecting ............................................................................................................................130 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................131 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 PotDis-TB ..............................................................................................................................133 Product overview ..................................................................................................................133 Connecting ............................................................................................................................136 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................137 A Dimension drawings of I/O modules .................................................................................................... 145 B Dimension drawings of motor starters ................................................................................................. 148 C Dimension drawings of the potential distributor modules ...................................................................... 149 Index................................................................................................................................................... 150 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 7 Guide to the documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Guide to the documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion control and OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864). Manual Collection ET 200SP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 9 Guide to the documentation "mySupport" - CAx Data In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Guide to the documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 11 Guide to the documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 2 New properties What's new in the BaseUnits manual, edition 02/2018, compared to edition 12/2016? What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information? New Potential distributor contents modules A system-integrated potential distribution can be implemented via the PotDis modules. Section Potential distributor modules (Page 111) One application is, for example, the design of digital input modules with 16 channels and three-wire connection. You use the potential distributor modules to reserve the unused signal cables of antivalent sensors. Another application is the supply of potentials for supply of external components. BaseUnit type U0 Can be used for all I/O modules whose article number ends in U0 Light-colored version: BU20-P16+A0+2D Per slot, up to 16 process terminals can be supplied to the module with max. 230 V/5 A per terminal. * 2 supply terminals on integrated self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2, max. 230 V AC/10 A * Separation of voltage buses P1/P2 and AUX from the adjacent module on the left Dark-colored version: BU20-P16+A0+2B Per slot, up to 16 process terminals can be supplied to the module with max. 230 V/5 A per terminal. * 2 terminals for external supply/forwarding from integrated self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2 * Bridging voltage buses P1/P2 and AUX to the adjacent module on the left Section BU20-P16+A0+2D (Page 78) Section BU20-P16+A0+2B (Page 82) BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 13 Product overview 3 General properties of the BaseUnits The ET 200SP distributed I/O system includes various BaseUnits. You use the BaseUnit to specify the following, for example: Process connection Plug-in I/O module/motor starter Infeed of supply voltage specified BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Product overview You can recognize the properties of the BaseUnits from their short description: Table 3- 1 Properties of the BaseUnits Short description BU15-P16+A10+2D/T (example) BaseUnit properties Name/module width 15 BaseUnit with width of 15 mm 20 BaseUnit with width of 20 mm 30 BaseUnit with width of 30 mm 4 * Connection method: Push-in terminal * Number of terminals to the I/O module: 4 Process connection BU P 8 16 0 * Connection method: Push-in terminal * Number of terminals to the I/O module: 8 * Connection method: Push-in terminal * Number of terminals to the I/O module: 16 Connection to the AUX busbar A Self-assembling voltage buses 2 2 push-in terminals for supplying or tapping the supply voltage via the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 (see D, B) 12 * 2 push-in terminals for supplying or tapping the supply voltage via the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 (see D, B) * 2x5 push-in additional terminals (1 B to 5 B, 1 C to 5 C). For connecting further potential up to a maximum supply current of 24 V DC/10 A 10 0 D T n = number of AUX terminals, e.g. 10 No terminals with access to the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 B Additional functions No connection to the AUX busbar * Looping through the potential group * Tapping of the supply voltage for external components or looping through with a maximum total current of 10 A per potential group * Opening a new potential group * Feeding in of supply voltage up to a maximum supply current of 10 A Integrated temperature sensor to compensate the reference junction temperature for thermocouples BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 15 Product overview Properties of the BaseUnits for motor starters The following table lists the properties of the individual BaseUnits for motor starters: BaseUnit Properties BU30-MS1 * Push-in terminals for opening a new potential group (24 V DC). * Feeding in of supply voltage up to a maximum supply current of 7 A DC. * Opening a new supply voltage potential group (500 V AC) * Feeding in of supply voltage up to a maximum supply current of 32 A AC. * Further conduction of the potential group (24 V DC) * Push-in terminals for opening a new supply voltage potential group (500 V AC) * Infeed of supply voltage up to a maximum supply current up to 32 A AC. * Push-in terminals for opening a new potential group (24 V DC). * Infeed of the supply voltage L+ up to an infeed current of 7 A DC * Further conduction of the supply voltage potential group (500 V AC) * Further conduction of the supply voltage potential group (500 V AC) * Further conduction of the potential group (24 V DC) * Further conduction of the potential group (24 V DC) * Push-in terminals for opening a new supply voltage potential group (500 V AC) * Infeed of supply voltage up to a maximum supply current of 32 A AC * A fail-safe digital input * Further conduction of the potential group (24 V DC) * Further conduction of the supply voltage potential group (500 V AC) * Push-In terminals * A fail-safe digital input BU30-MS2 BU30-MS3 BU30-MS4 BU30-MS5 BU30-MS6 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Product overview Properties of the potential distributor modules The following table shows the properties of the individual potential distributor modules: Table 3- 2 PotDis-BaseUnits properties Short description PotDis-BU-P1/D-R (example) PotDis-BaseUnit properties Designation PotDis-BU PotDis-BaseUnit Process connection P1 Terminals for supplying or tapping the supply voltage with connection to the voltage bus P1 (see D, B) P2 Terminals for supplying or tapping the supply voltage with connection to the voltage bus P2 (see D, B) (24 V DC / 10 A) Self-assembling voltage buses D B Color coding of the spring releases R * Opening a new PotDis potential group * Feeding in of supply voltage up to a maximum supply current up to 10 A * Tapping the supply voltage for external components or looping with a maximum total current of 10 A per potential group * Further conduction of the potential group * Tapping the supply voltage for external components or looping with a maximum total current of 10 A per potential group Connection to the internal voltage bus P1 Red spring release B Connection to the internal voltage bus P2 Blue spring release BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 17 Product overview Properties of the terminal blocks PotDis-TB The following table shows the properties of the individual terminal blocks: Table 3- 3 Properties of the PotDis-Terminalblocks Short description PotDis-TB-P1-R (example) PotDis-Terminalblock properties Designation PotDis-TB Process connection P1 (24 V DC / 10 A) P2 n.c. BR Color coding of the spring releases PotDis terminal block * Connection to the voltage bus P1 * Terminals for picking off the rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A of the same voltage level * Connection to the voltage bus P2 * Terminals for picking off the rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A of the same voltage level * No connection to the P1, P2 or AUX bus * Terminals can be used freely up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A * No connection to the P1, P2 or AUX bus * Terminals for protective conductor connection or voltage bus (internal connected) freely usable up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A R Red spring release B Blue spring release W White spring release G Gray spring release BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Product overview Selecting, installing and connecting BaseUnits You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). WARNING Personal injury or damage to equipment is possible. Connecting a rated supply voltage to the BaseUnit higher than the one given in the technical specifications may lead to dangerous situations in your plant or cause defects in ET 200SP components. Therefore, only connect the rated supply voltage given in the technical specifications to the BaseUnit. The connected rated supply voltage must correspond to the rated supply voltage of the I/O modules in the potential group. When mains voltage is connected to the BaseUnit, ensure that all other supply voltages on this BaseUnit use the same phase as the mains. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 19 Product overview The Totally Integrated Automation Selection Tool (TIA Selection Tool) (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/de/simatic/tia-selection-tool) supports you in selecting, configuring and ordering the ET 200SP modules. The free TIA Selection Tool is available on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). WARNING Hazardous Voltage (when using ET 200SP motor starters) Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage. Proper use of hardware products This equipment is only allowed to be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the technical description, and only in conjunction with non-Siemens equipment and components recommended by Siemens. Correct transport, storage, installation and assembly, as well as careful operation and maintenance, are required to ensure that the product operates safely and without faults. EU note: Start-up/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that the machine in which the component described here is to be installed fulfills the regulations/specifications of Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. WARNING Hazardous Voltage (when using ET 200SP motor starters) Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage. Please take note of our latest information. Systems with safety-related characteristics are subject to special operational safety requirements on the part of the operator. The supplier is also obliged to comply with special product monitoring measures. For this reason, we publish a special newsletter containing information on product developments and features that are (or could be) relevant to operation of safety-related systems. You need to subscribe to the corresponding newsletter to ensure that you always remain up-to-date and are able to make any necessary changes to your plant regarding operational safety should the need arise. Siemens Newsletter (http://www.industry.siemens.com/newsletter) Sign on to the following newsletter under "Products & Solutions": * Control Components and System Engineering News * Safety Integrated Newsletter BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.1 Product description 4.1.1 Introduction 4 Properties of the BaseUnits The ET 200SP distributed I/O system offers you a rugged and service-friendly design with permanent wiring over the BaseUnits (BU). The BaseUnits provide the electrical and mechanical connection of the ET 200SP modules. A wide range of BaseUnits is available to suit individual requirements. You can place BaseUnits at any location with the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Thanks to the push-in connection system, you can wire the terminals without tools. Note the following restrictions: The potential group based on SELV/PELV supply or the PotDis version is light-colored. The infeed of protective conductor via BU is not permitted. You can find additional information on using the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Note All BaseUnits placed in a load group must match the infeed potential of the corresponding light-colored BaseUnits. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 21 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.2 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals 4.2 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A10+2D 4.2.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP20-2DA0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-1 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.2 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "A0/A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Supply voltage (L+ terminal, ground): Max. 24 V DC/10 A - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit opens up a new potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are interrupted to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module). Access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) 10 AUX terminals for connecting a protective conductor or potential. The AUX busbar is not connected to the I/O module. Max. 24 V DC/10 A Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Maximum configuration per potential group The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 10 A. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 23 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.2 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals 4.2.2 Connecting up Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 1 A, 2 A, 3 A, 4 A, 5 A, 6 A, 7 A, 8 A, 9 A, 10 A Protective conductor connection or voltage bus freely usable up to 24 V DC with max. 10 A L+/ M L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus with connection to the 10 AUX terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) Figure 4-2 Block diagram of the BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.2 BU type A0, light-colored version with AUX terminals 4.2.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU-Typ A0, Variante hell mit AUX-Klemmen Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-2DA0 General information Product type designation Type A0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group * Potential group continued from the left Yes No Potential separation between the potential groups Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals CC71 to CC73 * for add-on terminals does not exist Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth 15 mm 141 mm 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 25 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.3 BU type A0, light-colored version without AUX terminals 4.3 BU type A0, light-colored version without AUX terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A0+2D 4.3.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP00-2DA0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-3 BU type A0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.3 BU type A0, light-colored version without AUX terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "A0/A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Supply voltage (L+ terminal, ground): Max. 24 V DC/10 A - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit opens up a new potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are interrupted to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Maximum configuration per potential group The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 10 A. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 27 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.3 BU type A0, light-colored version without AUX terminals 4.3.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit BU type A0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals L+ / M L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the BU type A0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.3 BU type A0, light-colored version without AUX terminals 4.3.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit BU type A0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-2DA0 General information Product type designation Supply voltage Rated value (DC) external protection for power supply lines Type A0 24 V Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group Yes * Potential group continued from the left No Potential separation between the potential groups Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals CC71 to CC73 * for add-on terminals does not exist Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth 15 mm 141 mm 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 29 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.4 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals 4.4 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A10+2B 4.4.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0BA0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP20-2BA0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-5 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.4 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "A0/A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). Access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) 10 AUX terminals for connecting a protective conductor or potential. The AUX busbar is not connected to the I/O module. Max. 24 V DC/10 A Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 31 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.4 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals 4.4.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 1 A, 2 A, 3 A, 4 A, 5 A, 6 A, 7 A, 8 A, 9 A, 10 A, AUX Protective conductor connection or voltage bus freely usable up to 24 V DC with max. 10 A L+ / M L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus with connection to the 10 AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-6 Block diagram of the BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.4 BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals 4.4.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-0BA0 General information Product type designation Type A0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals CC71 to CC73 * for add-on terminals does not exist Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 141 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 33 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.5 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals 4.5 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A0+2B 4.5.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP00-2BA0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-7 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.5 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "A0/A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 35 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.5 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals 4.5.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals L+ / M L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-8 Block diagram of the BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.5 BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals 4.5.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 General information Product type designation BU type A0, dark version, without AUX terminals, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals does not exist * for add-on terminals does not exist Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 37 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.6 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals 4.6 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A0+12D/T 4.6.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP40-0DA1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-9 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.6 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of BaseUnit type "A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. Note Using another I/O module can trigger an internal, non-exchangeable fuse and you must exchange the terminal box. - Supply voltage (L+ terminal, ground): Max. 24 V DC/10 A - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit opens up a new potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are interrupted to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) 2x5 additional terminals for supplying a supply voltage up to 24 V DC/ 10 A. The additional terminals are not connected to the I/O module. Recording of the terminal temperature for internal temperature compensation at connected thermocouples Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Maximum configuration per potential group The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 10 A. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 39 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.6 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals 4.6.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 1 B, 2 B, 3 B, 4 B, 5B/ 2 x 5 add-on terminals for the infeed of a supply voltage up to 24 V DC with max. 10 A 1 C, 2 C, 3 C, 4 C, 5C (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals L+ / M L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) I/O module Internal reference junction for temperature compensation Terminals with connection to the I/O module Additional terminals for feeding an additional supply voltage System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) Figure 4-10 Block diagram of the BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.6 BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals 4.6.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type A1, light-colored version, with additional terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP40-0DA1 General information Product type designation Supply voltage Rated value (DC) external protection for power supply lines Type A1 24 V Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Additional terminals Yes Temperature sensor Yes Formation of potential groups * New potential group * Potential group continued from the left Yes No Potential separation between the potential groups Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals does not exist * for add-on terminals CC74 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth 15 mm 141 mm 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 41 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.7 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals 4.7 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A0+2D/T 4.7.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-11 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.7 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of BaseUnit type "A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. Note Using another I/O module can trigger an internal, non-exchangeable fuse and you must exchange the terminal box. - Supply voltage (L+ terminal, ground): Max. 24 V DC/10 A - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit opens up a new potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are interrupted to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) Recording of the terminal temperature for internal temperature compensation at connected thermocouples Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Maximum configuration per potential group The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 10 A. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 43 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.7 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals 4.7.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals L+, P1 / M, P2 L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) I/O module Internal reference junction for temperature compensation Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) Figure 4-12 Block diagram of the BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.7 BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals 4.7.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type A1, light-colored version, without additional terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA1 General information Product type designation Type A1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Temperature sensor Formation of potential groups * New potential group * Potential group continued from the left Yes Yes No Potential separation between the potential groups Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals does not exist * for add-on terminals does not exist Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth 15 mm 117 mm 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 45 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.8 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals 4.8 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A0+12B/T 4.8.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP40-0BA1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-13 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.8 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of BaseUnit type "A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. Note Using another I/O module can trigger an internal, non-exchangeable fuse and you must exchange the terminal box. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) 2x5 additional terminals for supplying a supply voltage up to 24 V DC/ 10 A. The additional terminals are not connected to the I/O module. Recording of the terminal temperature for internal temperature compensation at connected thermocouples Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 47 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.8 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals 4.8.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 1 B, 2 B, 3 B, 4 B, 5B/ 1 C, 2 C, 3 C, 4 C, 5C Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 2 x 5 add-on terminals for the infeed of a supply voltage up to 24 V DC with max. 10 A (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals L+, P1 / M, P2 L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Internal reference junction for temperature compensation Terminals with connection to the I/O module Additional terminals for feeding an additional supply voltage System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-14 Block diagram of the BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.8 BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals 4.8.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type A1, dark-colored version, with additional terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP40-0BA1 General information Product type designation Type A1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Additional terminals Yes Temperature sensor Yes Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals does not exist * for add-on terminals CC74 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth 15 mm 141 mm 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 49 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.9 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals 4.9 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals Short designation Short designation: BU15-P16+A0+2B/T 4.9.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-15 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 50 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.9 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of BaseUnit type "A1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. Note Using another I/O module can trigger an internal, non-exchangeable fuse and you must exchange the terminal box. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 2 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) Recording of the terminal temperature for internal temperature compensation at connected thermocouples Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 51 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.9 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals 4.9.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals L+, P1 / M, P2 L+: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 10 A M: Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Internal reference junction for temperature compensation Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-16 Block diagram of the BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 52 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.9 BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals 4.9.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type A1, dark-colored version, without additional terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA1 General information Product type designation Type A1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 2A Hardware configuration Temperature sensor Yes Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC00 to CC09 * for AUX terminals does not exist * for add-on terminals does not exist Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; AWG 26 * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; AWG 14 * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 53 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.10 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar 4.10 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Short designation Short designation: BU20-P12+A4+0B 4.10.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP20-2BB0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-17 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 54 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.10 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "B0/B1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 12): Max. 5 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). Access to the AUX busbar via terminals 12 terminals to the process (assignment with the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 55 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.10 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar 4.10.2 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Terminal Descriptions 1 to 12 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 1 A, 2 A, 3 A, 4 A, AUX Protective conductor connection or voltage bus. Freely usable up to 230 V AC/DC with max 10 A. If you connect a voltage, it must belong to the same potential group as the rated supply voltage. Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus with connection to the 4 AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-18 Block diagram of the BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 56 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.10 BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar 4.10.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0 General information Product type designation Type B0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Rated value (AC) 230 V; 110 V Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 48 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 57 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.11 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.11 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Short designation Short designation: BU20-P12+A0+4B 4.11.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP20-2BB1 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-19 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 58 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.11 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "B1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 12): Max. 5 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). No access to the power and AUX busbars via terminals 12 terminals to the process (assignment with the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 59 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.11 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.11.2 Connecting up Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 12 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 1 L, 2 L, (P1) / 1 N, 2 N, (P2) 1 N, 2 N: Neutral/Ground 1 L, 2 L: Rated supply voltage up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 without connection to the terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-20 Block diagram of the BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 60 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.11 BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.11.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1 General information Product type designation Type B1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V Rated value (AC) 230 V; 110 V Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes between process terminals and supply voltage Yes between power bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 48 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 61 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.12 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.12 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Short designation Short designation: BU20-P6+A2+4D 4.12.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-21 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 62 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.12 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of BaseUnit type "C0/C1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Supply voltage (terminal 1 L, 2 / 1 N, 2 N): Max. 230 V AC/10 A - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 4): Max. 5 A - Current carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 5 and 6): Max. 10 A The BaseUnit opens up a new potential group by means of the inserted I/O module. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are interrupted to the lefthand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module). Access to the AUX busbar via terminals 6 terminals to the process (assignment with the I/O module) Two AUX terminals for connecting a PE terminal or potential. The AUX busbar is not connected to the I/O module. Max. 24 V DC/10 A Connection system in the form of push-in terminals You can find more information in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Maximum configuration per potential group The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 10 A. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 63 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.12 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.12.2 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 6 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 1 A, 2 A, AUX Protective conductor connection or voltage bus, freely usable up to 230 V AC/DC with max. 10 A. If you connect a voltage, it must belong to the same potential group as the rated supply voltage. 1 L, 2 L, (P1) / 1 N, 2 N, (P2) 1 L, 2 L: Rated supply voltage up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A 1 N, 2 N: Neutral/Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus with connection to the AUX terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals (through the inserted I/O module) Interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) Figure 4-22 Block diagram of the BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 64 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.12 BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.12.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0 General information Product type designation Type C0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V; 30 V Rated value (AC) 230 V; 110 V external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes between process terminals and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 47 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 65 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.13 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar 4.13 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Short designation Short designation: BU20-P6+A2+4B 4.13.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-23 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 66 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.13 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of BaseUnit type "C0/C1". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 4): Max. 5 A - Current carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 5 and 6): Max. 10 A The BaseUnit further conducts the potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). Access to the AUX busbar via terminals 6 terminals to the process (assignment with the I/O module) Two AUX terminals for connecting a PE terminal or potential. The AUX busbar is not connected to the I/O module. Max. 24 V DC/10 A Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 67 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.13 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar 4.13.2 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Terminal Descriptions 1 to 6 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. 1 A, 2 A, AUX Protective conductor connection or voltage bus, freely usable up to 230 V AC/DC with max 10 A. If you connect a voltage, it must belong to the same potential group as the rated supply voltage. 1 L, 2 L, (P1) / 1 N, 2 N, (P2) 1 L, 2 L: Rated supply voltage up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A 1 N, 2 N: Neutral/Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus with connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Power module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals (through the inserted I/O module) Connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-24 Block diagram of the BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 68 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.13 BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar 4.13.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1 General information Product type designation Type C1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V; 30 V Rated value (AC) 230 V; 110 V Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes between process terminals and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 47 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 69 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.14 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.14 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Short designation Short designation: BU20-P12+A0+0B 4.14.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-25 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 70 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.14 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "D0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 12): Max. 5 A The BaseUnit further conducts the potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). No access to the power and AUX busbars via terminals 12 terminals to the process (assignment with the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Note The shield connection (shield support and shield terminal) is not intended for BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+0B and must not be installed. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 71 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.14 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.14.2 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 12 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 without connection to the terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-26 Block diagram of the BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 72 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.14 BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.14.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0 General information Product type designation Type D0 Supply voltage Rated value (AC) 400 V; 230 V AC (L1, N) Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 5A Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 47 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 73 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.15 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.15 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Short designation Short designation: BU20-P8+A4+0B 4.15.1 Product overview When you use the AUX terminals as a PE busbar: NOTICE When AUX is used as PE, AUX must be identified as green-yellow (e.g., gn/ye color-coded labels). These identifications must be removed if the terminals are no longer used as PE. Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP20-0BF0 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 4-27 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 74 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.15 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "F0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current carrying capacity per process terminal (terminals 1 to 4 and 9 to 12): Max. 5 A The BaseUnit loops the potential group through with the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and the AUX bus of the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). Access to the AUX busbar via terminals 1 A to 4 A max. 24 V DC/10 A 8 terminals to the process (occupied by the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 75 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.15 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.15.2 Connecting up Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Terminals of a potential Fail-safe module Non-fail-safe module group Overvoltage category 3 Overvoltage category 2 Up to 230 V AC/DC (AC only one phase) 1 to 4 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/13330 0) manual. Safe extra low voltage SELV/PELV 9 to 12 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/13330 0) manual. SELV/PELV SELV/PELV P1, P2, AUX (1 A to 4 A) (max. 10 A) or up to 230 V AC/DC (AC only one phase) (max. 10 A) Use the AUX terminals only with an identical voltage or PE associated with the supply voltage. Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus with connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 without connection to the terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-28 Block diagram of the BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 76 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.15 BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals 4.15.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals Article number 6ES7193-6BP20-0BF0 General information Product type designation Type F0 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) See manual Rated value (AC) See manual Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes between process terminals and supply voltage Yes between power bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC/1 min (type test), 2 545 V DC/2 s (routine test) Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 48 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 77 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.16 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals 4.16 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals Short designation Short designation: BU20-P16+A0+2D 4.16.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0DU0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP00-2DU0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-29 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 78 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.16 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "U0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 10 A The BaseUnit opens up a new potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and the AUX busbar are disconnected from the adjacent module on the left (BaseUnit, interface module, CPU). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). Maximum configuration per potential group The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 10 A. Note A potential group opened with light-colored BaseUnit of type U0 must contain no darkcolored BaseUnit of type A0 or A1. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 79 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.16 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals 4.16.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type U0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals P1 / P2 P1: Rated supply voltage up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A P2: Neutral/Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, interrupted to the adjacent module on the left (forms a new potential group) Figure 4-30 Block diagram of the BU type U0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 80 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.16 BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals 4.16.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals Article number General information Product type designation Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus * For AUX bus Rated value (AC) * For P1 and P2 bus * For AUX bus * for process terminals external protection for power supply lines Mains filter * integrated Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. For P1 and P2 bus, max. For AUX bus, max. For process terminals, max. Hardware configuration Automatic encoding Formation of potential groups * New potential group * Potential group continued from the left Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage between the potential groups Isolation Isolation tested with Connection method Terminals * Terminal type 6ES7193-6BP00-0DU0 BU type U0, BU20-P16+A0+2D, PU 1 120 V 120 V 120 V 240 V; 400 V (L1 - L2 - L3); 240 V (L1, N) 240 V 240 V 240 V Yes Yes 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A Yes No Yes Yes Yes 3 100 V DC for 2 s Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; 0.2 mm without wire end ferrule * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; 1.5 mm with wire end ferrule * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth Weights Weight, approx. 20 mm 117 mm 35 mm 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 81 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.17 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals 4.17 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Short designation Short designation: BU20-P16+A0+2B 4.17.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6BP00-0BU0 (VPE: 1 unit) 6ES7193-6BP00-2BU0 (VPE: 10 units) View Figure 4-31 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 82 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.17 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Properties BaseUnit suitable for all I/O modules of the BaseUnit type "U0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current-carrying capacity per process terminal (terminal 1 to 16): Max. 10 A The BaseUnit conducts the potential group further. The self-assembling voltage buses P1 and P2, and the AUX busbar are connected to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit). No access to the AUX busbar via terminals 16 terminals to the process (assignment through the I/O module) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals Connection cross-sections are available in the ET 200SP System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 83 BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.17 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals 4.17.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Terminal Descriptions 1 to 16 Assignment is determined by the I/O module. You can find additional information in the I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/55679691/133300) manual. (AUX) No access to the AUX busbar via terminals P1 / P2 P1: Rated supply voltage up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A P2: Neutral/Ground Block diagram Backplane bus System-integrated, self-assembling AUX voltage bus without connection to the AUX terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left I/O module Terminals with connection to the I/O module System-integrated, self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 with connection to the supply terminals, connected to the adjacent module on the left Figure 4-32 Block diagram of the BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 84 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for I/O modules 4.17 BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals 4.17.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals Article number General information Product type designation Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus * For AUX bus Rated value (AC) * For P1 and P2 bus * For AUX bus * for process terminals external protection for power supply lines Mains filter * integrated Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. For P1 and P2 bus, max. For AUX bus, max. For process terminals, max. Hardware configuration Automatic encoding Formation of potential groups * New potential group * Potential group continued from the left Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Isolation Isolation tested with Connection method Terminals * Terminal type 6ES7193-6BP00-0BU0 BU type U0, BU20-P16+A0+2B, PU 1 120 V 120 V 120 V 240 V; 400 V (L1 - L2 - L3); 240 V (L1, N) 240 V 240 V 240 V Yes No 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A Yes No Yes Yes 3 100 V DC for 2 s Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; 0.2 mm without wire end ferrule * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; 1.5 mm with wire end ferrule * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 2 Dimensions Width Height Depth Weights Weight, approx. 20 mm 117 mm 35 mm 50 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 85 5 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.1 Introduction Properties of the infeed bus The infeed bus is set up by connecting the BaseUnits, and wiring takes place automatically The infeed bus distributes the energy to the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter within one load group The max. current carrying capacity is up to 32 A (3-phase) - With infeed (for one load group) and motor connection - Infeed bus: 3-pole + PE - The voltage range for power infeed is 48 ... 500 V AC You must observe the deratings depending on the configuration. Properties of the self-assembling voltage bus (power bus) Maximum current: 7 A Rated voltage: 24 V DC You must observe the deratings depending on the configuration. AUX1 bus The AUX1 bus is not supported in the BaseUnits of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters. You can find assembly rules of the BaseUnits for the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter in the System Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 86 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.2 BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed 5.2 BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed 5.2.1 Product overview Article number 3RK1908-0AP00-0AP0 View Figure 5-1 BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 87 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.2 BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed Properties BaseUnit suitable for all fail-safe and non-fail-safe SIMATIC ET 200SP High Feature motor starters The BaseUnit opens a new potential group (24 V DC). The power buses P1 and P2 are interrupted to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module/CPU). The BaseUnit opens a new potential group (500 V DC). The infeed bus L1 (L), L2 (N), L3, PE is interrupted to the left-hand BaseUnit of the ET 200SP motor starter. Connection method using push-in terminals The touch protection cover for the infeed bus (3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0) is included in the scope of delivery. The fail-safe input F-DI of the fail-safe motor starter is connected to the power bus. Maximum configuration per voltage group (24 V DC) The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 7 A. Maximum configuration of the infeed bus (500 V AC) The number of motor starters that can be used per infeed group depends on the following factors: 1. Total current requirement of all motor starters operated on this infeed group. 2. Ambient temperature and installation type in which the motor starters are operated. You can find further information in the derating table in the Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973). BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 88 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.2 BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed 5.2.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed Terminal L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE T1, T2, T3, PE 24 V DC, M Descriptions Power supply Assignment is determined by the motor starter. You can find more information in the ET 200SP Motor Starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual. Motor feeder 24 V DC: Supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 7 A M: Ground Block diagram The figure below shows the block diagram of the BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed. Backplane bus Motor starter module Interrupted busbars 24 V DC, M Interrupted AUX bus Terminals for 24 V DC and ground M Interrupted busbars for the infeed system L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Infeed terminal for protective ground PE Infeed terminal L3 Infeed terminal L2(N) Infeed terminal L1(L) Terminal for protective ground PE Terminal T3 Terminal T2 Terminal T1 Figure 5-2 Block diagram BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 89 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.2 BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed 5.2.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed 3RK1908-0AP00-0AP0 Product type designation BU30-MS1 Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Insulation tested with 2500 V AC Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Max. operating current 7 A (observe derating) Rated insulation voltage in accordance with IEC 60947-1 500 V Impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp accord- 6 kV ing to IEC 60947-1 Operating voltage range 48 ... 500 V AC Max. current-carrying capacity 32 A (observe derating) Isolating function between the infeed terminals L1(L), L2 (N), L3 and motor feeder terminals T1, T2, T3 for motor starters in parking position, or removed motor starters: impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp according to IEC 60947-1 6 kV Wiring Push-in Required tools for releasing: Standard screwdriver size 1 (SZF1 - 0.6x3.5) Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 215 mm Weights Weight, approx. 164 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 90 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.3 BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed 5.3 BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed 5.3.1 Product overview Article number 3RK1908-0AP00-0CP0 View Figure 5-3 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 91 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.3 BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed Properties BaseUnit suitable for all fail-safe and non-fail-safe SIMATIC ET 200SP High Feature motor starters The BaseUnit takes over the potential group (P1, P2) from the adjacent module on the left. The BaseUnit opens a new supply group 500 V AC. The potential group (24 V DC) is further continued Connection method using push-in terminals The touch protection cover for the infeed bus is included in the scope of delivery. The fail-safe input F-DI of the fail-safe motor starter is connected to the power bus. Maximum configuration of the infeed bus (500 V AC) The number of motor starters that can be used per infeed group depends on the following factors: 1. Total current requirement of all motor starters operated on this infeed group. 2. Ambient temperature and installation type in which the motor starters are operated. You can find further information in the derating table in the Manual SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 92 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.3 BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed 5.3.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed Terminal Descriptions L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Power supply Assignment is determined by the motor starter. See Manual ET 200SP motor starters (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973). T1, T2, T3, PE Motor feeder Block diagram The figure below shows the block diagram of the BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed. Backplane bus Motor starter module Connected power buses 24 V DC, M Interrupted AUX bus Interrupted busbars for the infeed system L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Infeed terminal for protective ground PE Infeed terminal L3 Infeed terminal L2(N) Infeed terminal L1(L) Terminal for protective ground PE Terminal T3 Terminal T2 Terminal T1 Figure 5-4 Block diagram BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 93 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.3 BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed 5.3.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed 3RK1908-0AP00-0CP0 Product type designation BU30-MS2 Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Insulation tested with 2500 V AC Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Max. operating current 7 A (observe derating) Rated insulation voltage in accordance with IEC 60947-1 500 V Impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp accord- 6 kV ing to IEC 60947-1 Operating voltage range 48 ... 500 V AC Max. current-carrying capacity 32 A (observe derating) Isolating function between the infeed terminals L1(L), L2 (N), L3 and motor feeder terminals T1, T2, T3 for motor starters in parking position, or removed motor starters: impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp according to IEC 60947-1 6 kV Wiring Push-in Required tools for releasing: Standard screwdriver size 1 (SZF1 - 0.6x3.5) Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 215 mm Weight, approx. 160 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 94 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.4 BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed 5.4 BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed 5.4.1 Product overview Article number 3RK1908-0AP00-0BP0 View Figure 5-5 BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 95 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.4 BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed Properties BaseUnit suitable for all fail-safe and non-fail-safe SIMATIC ET 200SP High Feature motor starters The BaseUnit opens a new potential group (24 V DC). The power buses P1 and P2 are interrupted to the left-hand neighboring module (BaseUnit, interface module/CPU). This BaseUnit handles the infeed bus (500 V AC) of the left-hand BaseUnit and loops this through. Connection method using push-in terminals The touch protection cover for the infeed bus is not included in the scope of delivery. The fail-safe input F-DI of the fail-safe motor starter is connected to the power bus. Maximum configuration per voltage group (24 V DC) The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 7 A. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 96 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.4 BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed 5.4.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed Terminal Descriptions T1, T2, T3, PE Motor feeder 24 V DC, M 24 V DC: Rated supply voltage 24 V DC with max. 7 A M: Ground Block diagram The figure below shows the three-phase connection with 24 V infeed and mains infeed. Backplane bus Motor starter module Interrupted busbars 24 V DC, M Interrupted AUX bus Terminal for 24 V DC and ground M Connected busbars for the infeed system L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Terminal for protective ground PE Terminal T3 Terminal T2 Terminal T1 Figure 5-6 Block diagram BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 97 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.4 BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed 5.4.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed 3RK1908-0AP00-0BP0 Product type designation BU30-MS3 Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Insulation tested with 2500 V AC Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Max. operating current 7 A (observe derating) Rated insulation voltage in accordance with IEC 60947-1 500 V Impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp accord- 6 kV ing to IEC 60947-1 Operating voltage range 48 ... 500 V AC Max. current-carrying capacity 32 A (observe derating) Isolating function between the infeed terminals L1(L), L2 (N), L3 and motor feeder terminals T1, T2, T3 for motor starters in parking position, or removed motor starters: impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp according to IEC 60947-1 6 kV Wiring Push-in Required tools for releasing: Standard screwdriver size 1 (SZF1 - 0.6x3.5) Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 215 mm Weight, approx. 152 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 98 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.5 BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed 5.5 BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed 5.5.1 Product overview Article number 3RK1908-0AP00-0DP0 View Figure 5-7 BaseUnit without infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 99 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.5 BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed Properties BaseUnit suitable for all fail-safe and non-fail-safe SIMATIC ET 200SP High Feature motor starters No new potential groups are opened with this BaseUnit. The potential group (24 V DC) is looped through. The infeed group (500 V AC) is looped through. Connection method using push-in terminals The touch protection cover for the infeed bus is not included in the scope of delivery. The fail-safe input F-DI of the fail-safe motor starter is connected to the power bus. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 100 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.5 BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed 5.5.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit without infeed Terminal Descriptions T1, T2, T3, PE Motor feeder Block diagram The figure below shows the block diagram of the BaseUnit without infeed. Backplane bus Motor starter module Connected busbars 24 V DC, M Interrupted AUX bus Connected busbars for the infeed system L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Terminal for protective ground PE Terminal T3 Terminal T2 Terminal T1 Figure 5-8 Block diagram BaseUnit without infeed BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 101 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.5 BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed 5.5.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of BaseUnit without infeed 3RK1908-0AP00-0DP0 Product type designation BU30-MS4 Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Insulation tested with 2500 V AC Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Max. operating current 7 A (observe derating) Rated insulation voltage in accordance with IEC 60947-1 500 V Impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp accord- 6 kV ing to IEC 60947-1 Operating voltage range 48 ... 500 V AC Max. current-carrying capacity 32 A (observe derating) Isolating function between the infeed terminals L1(L), L2 (N), L3 and motor feeder terminals T1, T2, T3 for motor starters in parking position, or removed motor starters: impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp according to IEC 60947-1 6 kV Wiring Push-in Required tools for releasing: Standard screwdriver size 1 (SZF1 - 0.6x3.5) Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 215 mm Weight, approx. 150 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 102 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.6 BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI 5.6 BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI 5.6.1 Product overview Article number 3RK1908-0AP00-0EP0 View Figure 5-9 BaseUnit with 500 V AC and F-DI BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 103 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.6 BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI Properties BaseUnit suitable for all fail-safe SIMATIC ET 200SP High Feature motor starters The BaseUnit takes over the potential group (P1, P2) from the adjacent module on the left. The BaseUnit opens a new supply group 500 V AC. The potential group (24 V DC) is further continued The BaseUnit has an F-DI input terminal for fail-safe control signals of the motor starter. This signal is not forwarded to neighboring motor starters. Connection method using push-in terminals The touch protection cover for the infeed bus is included in the scope of delivery. Maximum configuration of the supply bus The number of I/O modules that can be used per potential group depends on the following factors: 1. Total power requirement of all I/O modules operated on this potential group 2. Total power requirement of all loads connected externally to this potential group The total current calculated according to item 1. and item 2. must not exceed 7 A. Properties of the F-DI input The fail-safe digital input "F-DI" has the following properties: Use of interconnection type 1oo1 possible Sink input Input delay 10 ms Status display of the input F-DI at the motor starter module (green LED) BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 104 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.6 BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI 5.6.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI Terminal Descriptions T1, T2, T3, PE F-DI, M L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Block diagram Motor feeder F-DI: Connection of fail-safe signal M: Reference potential of fail-safe signal Power supply Assignment is determined by the motor starter. You can find more information in the ET 200SP Motor Starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual. The figure below shows the two-phase connection with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI: Backplane bus Motor starter module Connected busbars 24 V DC, M Interrupted AUX bus Safety input F-DI (P24/M) Interrupted busbars for the infeed system L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE Infeed terminal for protective ground PE Infeed terminal L3 Infeed terminal L2(N) Infeed terminal L1(L) Terminal for protective ground PE Terminal T3 Terminal T2 Terminal T1 Figure 5-10 BaseUnit block diagram with 500 V AC infeed and fail-safe input BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 105 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.6 BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI 5.6.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI 3RK1908-0AP00-0EP0 Product type designation BU30-MS5 Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Insulation tested with 2500 V AC Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Max. operating current 7 A (observe derating) Galvanic isolation between fail-safe digital input and supply voltage Yes Rated insulation voltage in accordance with IEC 60947-1 500 V Impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp accord- 6 kV ing to IEC 60947-1 Operating voltage range 48 ... 500 V AC Max. current-carrying capacity 32 A (observe derating) Isolating function between the infeed terminals L1(L), L2 (N), L3 and motor feeder terminals T1, T2, T3 for motor starters in parking position, or removed motor starters: impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp according to IEC 60947-1 6 kV Wiring Push-in Required tools for releasing: Standard screwdriver size 1 (SZF1 - 0.6x3.5) Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 215 mm Weight, approx. 152 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 106 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.7 BU30-MS6 BaseUnit without infeed and with F-DI 5.7 BU30-MS6 BaseUnit without infeed and with F-DI 5.7.1 Product overview Article number 3RK1908-0AP00-0FP0 View Figure 5-11 BaseUnit without 500 V AC infeed, with F-DI BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 107 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.7 BU30-MS6 BaseUnit without infeed and with F-DI Properties BaseUnit suitable for all fail-safe SIMATIC ET 200SP High Feature motor starters The BaseUnit takes over the potential group (P1, P2) from the adjacent module on the left. This BaseUnit handles the potential group/infeed bus (500 V AC) of the left-hand BaseUnit and loops this through. The BaseUnit has an F-DI input terminal for fail-safe control signals of the motor starter. This signal is not forwarded to neighboring motor starters. Connection method using push-in terminals The touch protection cover for the infeed bus is not included in the scope of delivery. Properties of the F-DI input The fail-safe digital input "F-DI" has the following properties: Use of interconnection type 1oo1 possible Sink input Input delay 10 ms Status display of the input F-DI at the motor starter module (green LED) BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 108 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ BaseUnits for motor starters 5.7 BU30-MS6 BaseUnit without infeed and with F-DI 5.7.2 Connection Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed Terminal Descriptions T1, T2, T3, PE Motor feeder F-DI, M F-DI: Connection of fail-safe signal M: Reference potential of fail-safe signal Block diagram The following figure shows the block diagram for the BaseUnit without infeed, but with fail-safe input: Backplane bus Motor starter module Connected busbars 24 V DC, M Interrupted AUX bus Safety input F-DI (P24/M) Connected busbars infeed system L1, L2, L3, PE Terminal for protective ground PE Terminal T3 Terminal T2 Terminal T1 Figure 5-12 Block diagram BaseUnit without infeed, with fail-safe input BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 109 BaseUnits for motor starters 5.7 BU30-MS6 BaseUnit without infeed and with F-DI 5.7.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of BaseUnit without infeed, with F-DI 3RK1908-0AP00-0FP0 Product type designation BU30-MS6 Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Insulation tested with 2500 V AC Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Max. operating current 7 A (observe derating) Rated insulation voltage in accordance with IEC 60947-1 500 V Galvanic isolation between fail-safe digital input and supply voltage Yes Impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp accord- 6 kV ing to IEC 60947-1 Operating voltage range 48 ... 500 V AC Max. current-carrying capacity 32 A (observe derating) Isolating function between the infeed terminals L1(L), L2 (N), L3 and motor feeder terminals T1, T2, T3 for motor starters in parking position, or removed motor starters: impulse withstand voltage/rated value Uimp according to IEC 60947-1 6 kV Wiring Push-in Required tools for releasing: Standard screwdriver size 1 (SZF1 - 0.6x3.5) Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 215 mm Weight, approx. 152 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 110 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.1 6 Introduction Properties of potential distributor modules A potential distributor module (PotDis module) consists of a potential distributor BaseUnit (PotDis-BU) and a potential distributor terminal block (PotDis-TB) installed on top of it. A system-integrated potential distribution is possible with the various PotDis-BUs and PotDis-TBs. You can place potential distributor modules at any location with the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. In doing so, you must observe the same design rules that apply to the design of a potential group from the BaseUnits for I/O modules. The following information is particularly important: The potential groups opened with a light-colored PotDis-BU must contain no I/O modules. You can integrate any dark-colored PotDis-BUs into I/O module potential groups provided these are based on SELV/PELV supply. If you do not need the additional terminals of the PotDis-TB in a potential distributor module, replace the PotDis-TB with a BU-Cover. You may only connect one potential group within a combination of PotDis-BU and PotDis-TB. Only SELV/PELV potentials are permitted on PotDis-BUs. Separate different SELV/PELV potential groups using light-colored PotDis-BUs. With potential distributor modules you may only connect to the PotDis-TB versions BR-W and n.c.-G potential, which exceed the voltage level of SELV/PELV. PotDis terminals are not directly configurable as PotDis via GSD/GSDML. When configuring with GSD, always use an empty module; with GSDML, integrate a free space. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 111 Potential distributor modules 6.1 Introduction Potential distributor modules are configurable with STEP 7/STEP 7 TIA Portal. Individual versions are listed in the following table: Engineering with version/HSP STEP 7 TIA Portal * Configurable as of version * Configurable as of version * Configurable as of version * Configurable as of version HSP0241 up to V13 SP1 Update 8 HSP0241 up to V14 HSP0241 up to V14 SP1 Update 5 HSP0241 up to V15 Update 1 STEP 7 * Configurable as of version HSP0293 up to V5.5 SP4 You can find additional information on the use of the potential distributor modules in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 112 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.2 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version 6.2 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version 6.2.1 Short designation Short designation Light-colored version with 16 terminals to P1 + 2 supply terminals P1/P2. Short designation: PotDis-BU-P1/D-R. D stands for a new potential group, which means P1, P2, AUX separated to the left, R stands for red spring release. 6.2.2 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 6-1 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 113 Potential distributor modules 6.2 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version Properties BaseUnit suitable for all PotDis terminal blocks of the type "P1/P2/N0/P0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Supply voltage (terminal P1, P2) up to DC 48 V/10 A - Current carrying capacity per terminal: Max. 10 A BaseUnit opens up a new PotDis potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and the AUX busbar are disconnected from the adjacent module on the left (BaseUnit, CPU, interface module). NOTICE Opening a potential group for I/O modules is not permitted with the BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P1/D-R. The BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P1/D-R opens a new potential group only for the potential distributor modules. Opening a potential group for I/O modules is not permitted with the BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P1/D-R. 18 terminals - 17 red terminals (P1) - 1 blue terminal (P2) 36 terminals (with PotDis-TB) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 114 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.2 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version 6.2.3 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version Terminal Explanation P1 Rated supply voltage up to 48 V DC with max. 10 A (17 red terminals) P2 Ground (1 terminal) Block diagram Backplane bus PotDis-TB terminal block Terminals with connection to the supply voltage P1 Disconnected voltage bus with connection to the terminals for supply Interrupted AUX busbar Figure 6-2 Block diagram of the PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 115 Potential distributor modules 6.2 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version 6.2.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP1 General information Product type designation PotDis BU type P1, light version, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus 48 V; max. * for process terminals 48 V; max. external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group Yes * Potential group continued from the left No Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * Vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Vertical installation, max. 50 C * Horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Horizontal installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC62 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 116 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.2 PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP1 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm * Number of terminals with connection 17 terminals to P1, 1 terminal to P2 to P1 and P2 bus Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 117 Potential distributor modules 6.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version 6.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version Short designation Dark-colored version with 16 terminals to P1 + 2 supply terminals P1/P2. Short designation: PotDis-BU-P1/B-R. B stands for bridged potential group, which means P1, P2, AUX bridged to the left, R stands for red spring release. 6.3.1 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP1 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 6-3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 118 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version Properties BaseUnit suitable for all PotDis terminal blocks of the type "P1/P2/N0/P0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current carrying capacity per terminal: Max. 10 A BaseUnit further conducts the potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and the AUX busbar are connected to the adjacent module on the left (BaseUnit). 18 terminals - 17 red terminals (P1) - 1 blue terminal (P2) 36 terminals (with PotDis-TB) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 119 Potential distributor modules 6.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version 6.3.2 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for BaseUnit PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version Terminal Explanation P1 Rated supply voltage up to 48 V DC with max. 10 A (17 red terminals) P2 Ground (1 terminal) Block diagram Backplane bus PotDis-TB terminal block Terminals with connection to the supply voltage P1 Connected voltage bus with connection to the terminals Connected AUX busbar Figure 6-4 Block diagram of the PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 120 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version 6.3.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP1 General information Product type designation PotDis BU type P1, dark version, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus 48 V; max. * for process terminals 48 V; max. external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * Vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Vertical installation, max. 50 C * Horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Horizontal installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC62 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 121 Potential distributor modules 6.3 PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP1 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 17 terminals to P1, 1 terminal to P2 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 122 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version 6.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version 6.4.1 Short designation Short designation Light-colored version with 16 terminals to P2 + 2 supply terminals P1/P2. Short designation: PotDis-BU-P2/D-B. D stands for a new potential group, which means P1, P2, AUX separated to the left, B stands for blue spring release. 6.4.2 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP2 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 6-5 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 123 Potential distributor modules 6.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version Properties BaseUnit suitable for all PotDis terminal blocks of the type "P1/P2/N0/P0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Supply voltage (terminal P1, P2) up to DC 48 V/10 A - Current carrying capacity per terminal: Max. 10 A BaseUnit opens up a new PotDis potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and the AUX busbar are disconnected from the adjacent module on the left (BaseUnit, CPU, interface module). NOTICE Opening a potential group for I/O modules is not permitted with the BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/D-B. The BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/D-B opens a new potential group only for the potential distributor modules. Opening a potential group for I/O modules is not permitted with the BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/D-B. 18 terminals - 1 red terminal (P1) - 17 blue terminals (P2) 36 terminals (with PotDis-TB) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 124 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version 6.4.3 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version Terminal Explanation P1 Rated supply voltage up to 48 V DC with max. 10 A (1 terminal) P2 Ground (17 terminals) Block diagram Backplane bus PotDis-TB terminal block Terminals with connection to ground P2 Disconnected voltage bus with connection to the terminals for supply Interrupted AUX busbar Figure 6-6 Block diagram of the PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 125 Potential distributor modules 6.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version 6.4.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP2 General information Product type designation PotDis BU type P2, light version, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus 48 V; max. * for process terminals 48 V; max. external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * Vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Vertical installation, max. 50 C * Horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Horizontal installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC63 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 126 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.4 PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP2 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 18; 17 terminals to P2, 1 terminal to P1 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 127 Potential distributor modules 6.5 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version 6.5 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version 6.5.1 Short designation Short designation Dark-colored version with 16 terminals to P2 + 2 supply terminals P1/P2. Short designation: PotDis-BU-P2/B-B. B stands for bridged potential group, which means P1, P2, AUX bridged to the left, B stands for blue spring release. 6.5.2 Product overview Delivery options (packing unit VPE) 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP2 (VPE: 1 unit) View Figure 6-7 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 128 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.5 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version Properties BaseUnit suitable for all PotDis terminal blocks of the type "P1/P2/N0/P0". Can be recognized by the laser inscription on the front and/or the last two digits of the article number. - Current carrying capacity per terminal: Max. 10 A BaseUnit further conducts the potential group. The self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and the AUX busbar are connected to the adjacent module on the left (BaseUnit). 18 terminals - 1 red terminal (P1) - 17 blue terminals (P2) 36 terminals (with PotDis-TB) Connection system in the form of push-in terminals BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 129 Potential distributor modules 6.5 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version 6.5.3 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version Terminal Explanation P1 Rated supply voltage up to 48 V DC with max. 10 A (1 terminal) P2 Ground (17 terminals) Block diagram Backplane bus PotDis-TB terminal block Terminals with connection to ground P2 Connected voltage bus with connection to the terminals Connected AUX busbar Figure 6-8 Block diagram of the PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 130 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.5 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version 6.5.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP2 General information Product type designation PotDis BU type P2, dark version, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus 48 V; max. * for process terminals 48 V; max. external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Hardware configuration Formation of potential groups * New potential group No * Potential group continued from the left Yes Potential separation between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes Isolation Isolation tested with 3 250 V DC Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * Vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Vertical installation, max. 50 C * Horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * Horizontal installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC63 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 131 Potential distributor modules 6.5 PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version Article number 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP2 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm * Number of terminals with connection to P1 and P2 bus 18; 17 terminals to P2, 1 terminal to P1 Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 117 mm Depth 35 mm Weights Weight, approx. 40 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 132 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB 6.6 PotDis-TB 6.6.1 Product overview Article number PotDis-TB-P1-R terminal block: 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP1 PotDis-TB-P2-B terminal block: 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP2 PotDis-TB-n.c.-G terminal block: 6ES7193-6TP00-0TN0 PotDis-TB-BR-W terminal block: 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP0 View PotDis-TB-P1-R PotDis-TB-P2-B PotDis-TB-n.c.-G PotDis-TB-BR-W Figure 6-9 PotDis terminal blocks BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 133 Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Properties Terminal blocks matching all BaseUnits PotDis-BU - Current carrying capacity per terminal: Max. 10 A 18 terminals - PotDis-TB-P1-R terminal block: Red terminals with connection to the supply voltage P1 of the BaseUnit PotDis-BU - PotDis-TB-P2-B terminal block: Blue terminals with connection to ground P2 of the BaseUnit PotDis-BU - PotDis-TB-n.c.-G terminal block: Gray (internal not connected) terminals without connection to the BaseUnit PotDis-BU NOTICE Mixed connection of direct current or alternating current (DC/AC) is not permitted on the PotDis-TB-n.c-G Connect direct currents up to 48 V or alternating currents up to 230 V to the terminals of the PotDis-TB-n.c.-G. A mixed connection of both types of voltages (DC/AC) is not permitted at the terminals of the PotDis-TB-n.c.-G. - PotDis-TB-BR-W terminal block: White (internal not connected) terminals without connection to the BaseUnit-BU NOTICE Only PotDis-TB-BR may be used for protective conductors. Check all protective conductors. Check the required conductor cross-section for the respective plant unit before commissioning of the plant (especially for motor starters). Connection system in the form of push-in terminals You can find the assignment of color-coded labels in the ET 200SP System Manual under Accessories. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 134 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB NOTICE Use of color-coded labels Before commissioning the system, check that the color-coded labels attached correspond to the wired potential. NOTICE Voltages greater than SELV/PELV Voltages greater than SELV/PELV are only permitted for the PO PotDis-TBs BR (bridged) and NC (not connected). This applies equally to protective conductors. No voltages greater than SELV/PELV are present on the terminals of the PotDis module with connection to the P1/P2 rails. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 135 Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB 6.6.2 Connecting Pin assignment Pin assignment for PotDis-TB terminal block Terminal block Terminal Explanation PotDis-TBP1-R P1 Rated supply voltage up to 48 V DC with max. 10 A (18 red terminals) PotDis-TBP2-B P2 Ground (18 blue terminals) PotDis-TBn.c.-G n c. (not connected) Terminals can be used freely up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A (18 gray terminals). If you connect voltage, it must belong to the same potential group. PotDis-TBBR-W BR (bridged) Terminals for protective conductor connection or voltage bus freely usable up to 230 V AC with max. 10 A (18 white terminals) Block diagram PotDis-TB-P1-R PotDis-TB-P2-B PotDis-TB-n.c.-G PotDis-TB-BR-W Figure 6-10 PotDis-TB block diagram BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 136 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB 6.6.3 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the PotDis-TB-P1_R terminal block Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP1 General information Product type designation PotDis TB P1-R, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus 48 V; max. * for process terminals 48 V; max. external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * ceiling installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * ceiling installation, max. 50 C * floor installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * floor installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC10, CC12 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 137 Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP1 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; 0.2 mm without wire end ferrule * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; 1.5 mm with wire end ferrule * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection 2 to P1 and P2 bus Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 74 mm Depth 34 mm Weights Weight, approx. 24 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 138 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Technical specifications of the PotDis-TB-P2-B terminal block Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP2 General information Product type designation PotDis TB P2-B, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * For P1 and P2 bus 48 V; max. * for process terminals 48 V; max. external protection for power supply lines Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Potential separation between process terminals and supply voltage No Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * ceiling installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * ceiling installation, max. 50 C * floor installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * floor installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC10, CC13 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 139 Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP2 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; 0.2 mm without wire end ferrule * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; 1.5 mm with wire end ferrule * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection 2 to P1 and P2 bus Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 74 mm Depth 34 mm Weights Weight, approx. 24 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 140 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Technical specifications of the PotDis-TB-n.c.-G Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TN0 General information Product type designation PotDis TB n.c. G, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * for process terminals 48 V; max. Rated value (AC) * for process terminals external protection for power supply lines 240 V; max. Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A Potential separation between process terminals and supply voltage Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * ceiling installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * ceiling installation, max. 50 C * floor installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * floor installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC10 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 141 Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TN0 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; 0.2 mm without wire end ferrule * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; 1.5 mm with wire end ferrule * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection 2 to P1 and P2 bus Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 74 mm Depth 34 mm Weights Weight, approx. 24 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 142 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Technical specifications of the PotDis-TB-BR-W terminal block Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP0 General information Product type designation PotDis TB BR-W, PU 1 Supply voltage Rated value (DC) * for process terminals 48 V; max. Rated value (AC) * for process terminals external protection for power supply lines 240 V; max. Yes; 10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C tripping characteristic for the respective rated supply voltage Current carrying capacity up to 60 C, max. 10 A For P1 and P2 bus, max. 10 A For AUX bus, max. 10 A For process terminals, max. 10 A Potential separation between process terminals and supply voltage Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * horizontal installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * horizontal installation, max. 60 C * vertical installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * vertical installation, max. 50 C * ceiling installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * ceiling installation, max. 50 C * floor installation, min. 0 C; No condensation * floor installation, max. 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level * Ambient air temperature-barometric pressure-altitude On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0 C (without condensation) and/or installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Accessories Color coding labels * for process terminals CC10, CC11, CC12, CC13 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 143 Potential distributor modules 6.6 PotDis-TB Article number 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP0 Connection method Terminals * Terminal type Push-in terminal * Conductor cross-section, min. 0.14 mm; 0.2 mm without wire end ferrule * Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm; 1.5 mm with wire end ferrule * Number of process terminals to I/O module 16 * Number of terminals to AUX bus 0 * Number of add-on terminals 0 * Number of terminals with connection 2 to P1 and P2 bus Dimensions Width 15 mm Height 74 mm Depth 34 mm Weights Weight, approx. 24 g BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 144 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Dimension drawings of I/O modules A Dimension drawing BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B, BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the BU15-P16+A10+2D with plugged-in I/O module as an example. Figure A-1 Dimension drawing BU15-P16+A10+2D BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 145 Dimension drawings of I/O modules Dimension drawing BU15-P16+A0+2D, BU15-P16+A0+2B, BU15-P16+A0+2D/T, BU15-P16+A0+2B/T The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the BU15-P16+A0+2D with plugged-in I/O module as an example. Figure A-2 Dimension drawing BU15-P16+A0+2D BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 146 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ Dimension drawings of I/O modules Dimension drawing BU20-P6+A2+4D, BU20-P6+A2+4B, BU20-P12+A4+0B, BU20-P12+A0+0B, BU20-P12+A0+4B, BU20-P8+A4+0B The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the BU20-P12+A4+0B with plugged-in I/O module as an example. Figure A-3 Dimension drawing BU20-P12+A4+0B Dimension drawing test probe for measurement tap The figure below shows the dimension drawing of a suitable test probe for measurement tap at the BaseUnit. Figure A-4 Dimension drawing test probe BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 147 Dimension drawings of motor starters B Dimension drawing BU30-MS1, BU30-MS2, BU30-MS3, BU30-MS4, BU30-MS5, BU30-MS6 The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the BU30-MS-1 with plugged-in motor starter module as an example. Figure B-1 Dimension drawing BU30-MS1 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 148 Dimension drawings of the potential distributor modules C Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the PotDis-BU-P1/B-R with plugged-in PotDis-TB-P1-R terminal block. Figure C-1 Dimension drawing of PotDis BU-P1/B-R with plugged-in terminal block BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 149 Index No index entries found. BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00...) 150 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03727049-AJ 1 ___________________ Preface 2 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC ET 200SP BusAdapter Manual 3 ___________________ Product overview 4 ___________________ BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 5 ___________________ BusAdapter BA 2xFC 6 ___________________ BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 7 ___________________ BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 8 ___________________ BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 9 ___________________ BusAdapter BA 2xLC 10 ___________________ BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 ___________________ 11 BusAdapter BA LC/FC ___________________ 12 Strain relief ___________________ A Dimension drawings ___________________ B Accessories 03/2018 A5E41449003-AA Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E41449003-AA 02/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 5 2 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 8 2.1 BusAdapter guide ..................................................................................................................... 8 3 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11 4 BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45......................................................................................................................... 14 5 6 7 8 4.1 Product overview ....................................................................................................................14 4.2 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................15 4.3 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................18 4.4 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................19 BusAdapter BA 2xFC ............................................................................................................................ 20 5.1 Product overview ....................................................................................................................20 5.2 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................21 5.3 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................25 5.4 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................26 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ........................................................................................................................ 27 6.1 Product overview ....................................................................................................................27 6.2 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................28 6.3 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................32 6.4 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................34 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 .................................................................................................................. 35 7.1 Product overview ....................................................................................................................35 7.2 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................36 7.3 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................38 7.4 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................40 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC...................................................................................................................... 41 8.1 Product overview ....................................................................................................................41 8.2 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................42 8.3 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................44 8.4 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................46 BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 3 Table of contents 9 10 11 12 A B BusAdapter BA 2xLC ............................................................................................................................ 47 9.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 47 9.2 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 48 9.3 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................. 52 9.4 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 53 BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 ....................................................................................................................... 54 10.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 54 10.2 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 55 10.3 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................. 57 10.4 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 58 BusAdapter BA LC/FC .......................................................................................................................... 59 11.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 59 11.2 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 60 11.3 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................. 62 11.4 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 63 Strain relief ........................................................................................................................................... 64 12.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 64 12.2 Installing ................................................................................................................................. 65 Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................................. 67 A.1 BusAdapter dimension drawings ........................................................................................... 67 A.2 Strain relief dimension drawings ............................................................................................ 67 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 68 B.1 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 68 BusAdapter 4 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 1 Preface Purpose of the manual This manual provides all the necessary information for configuring, installing, connecting and commissioning the BusAdapter. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the manual: General knowledge in the field of automation technology Knowledge of the use of computers or PC -like tools (e.g. programming devices) under the Windows operating system. Knowledge of working with STEP 7. You can find information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help. Range of validity of this manual The manual describes the components based on the data valid at the time of its release. We reserve the right to include up-to-date Product Information with new components and new versions of components. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 5 Preface Recycling and disposal The BusAdapter can be recycled due to their low pollutant content. For environmentally sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company certified for the disposal of electronic waste. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). BusAdapter 6 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal work area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 7 2 Guide 2.1 BusAdapter guide Device information The BusAdapter manual contains information, for example, on properties, assembling, connecting, configuring and parameter assignment, alarms and diagnostics and technical specifications of the BusAdapter. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as PROFINET and communication. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/109742709). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal work area, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/de/). BusAdapter 8 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA Guide 2.1 BusAdapter guide "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. Your documentation is available in My Documentation Manager (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/de/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/de/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. Additional information can be found on the Internet under Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/de/sc/2054). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 9 Guide 2.1 BusAdapter guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN/STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error information Reading of the CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Firmware update of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. PRONETA also scans: configuration of the station name, IP subnet mask and identification and maintenance data (I&M1..3) For more information, refer to SIEMENS PRONETA (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/67460624). BusAdapter 10 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 3 Product overview Introduction The SIMATIC BusAdapters connect PROFINET IO to their ET 200SP system. You select the required connection technology and connection method for your process from the different versions of SIMATIC BusAdapter. Supported PROFINET devices The SIMATIC BusAdapters are used for: ET 200SP interface module and central processing unit (CPU and Open Controller) PN/PN Coupler Switches Overview The SIMATIC BusAdapters can be ordered in the following versions: BusAdapter Article number Property BA 2xRJ45 6ES7193-6AR000AA0 PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket for standard RJ45 connector BA 2xFC 6ES7193-6AF000AA0 PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect Ethernet connection for direct connection of the bus cable for applications with increased EMC and vibration/shock load Figure BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 11 Product overview BusAdapter Article number Property BA 2xSCRJ 6ES7193-6AP000AA0 PROFINET BusAdapter with fiberoptic cable connection POF/PCF for SCRJ connector for applications with increased EMC and vibration/shock load as well as electrical potential differences between two stations Figure BA SCRJ/RJ45 6ES7193-6AP200AA0 Media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with POF/PCF fiberoptic cable standard RJ45 connector BA SCRJ/FC 6ES7 193-6AP400AA0 Media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with POF/PCF fiberoptic cable direct connection of bus cable BA 2xLC 6ES7193-6AG000AA0 PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic cable connection for LC connector for applications with increased EMC and vibration/shock load as well as electrical potential differences between two stations BusAdapter 12 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA Product overview BusAdapter Article number Property BA LC/RJ45 6ES7193-6AG200AA0 Media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic cable standard RJ45 connector BA LC/FC 6ES7193-6AG400AA0 Media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic cable direct connection of bus cable Figure See also Strain relief (Page 64) BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 13 4 BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 4.1 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 View Figure 4-1 BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Properties You connect PROFINET IO cable with RJ45 connector to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45. To do this, screw the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 to the PROFINET device and insert the PROFINET connecting cable. You loop through the PROFINET via the integrated 2-port switch. BusAdapter 14 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 4.2 Connecting 4.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector according to the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Tools required 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver, alternatively TX10 (torx). Accessories required Connector: - IE FC RJ45 plug 180 2X2 (6GK1901-1BB10-2A) - IE FC RJ45 plug 180 4X2 (6GK1901-1BB12-2A) Cables: - IE FC TP standard cable (6XV1840-2A) - IE FC TP trailing cable (6XV1840-3AH10) - IE FC TP marine cable (6XV1840-4AH10) - IE FC TP robust cable (6XV1841-2) - IE TP torsion cable (6XV1870-2F) Please observe the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 15 BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 4.2 Connecting Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45. Table 4- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 View Signal name Description 1 TD Transmit Data + 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 TERM1 Termination Network 1 5 TERM1 Termination Network 1 6 RD_N Receive Data - 7 TERM2 Termination Network 2 8 TERM2 Termination Network 1 Procedure Watch video sequence "Connect BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 to the ET 200SP interface module" (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/95886218) To connect PROFINET IO to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45, follow these steps: 1. Plug the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 into the PROFINET device. 2. Screw the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). 3. Plug the RJ45 bus connector into the PROFINET port on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45. You can also swap steps 2 and 3. BusAdapter 16 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 4.2 Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 installed CPU BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 PROFINET connecting cable Interface module Figure 4-2 BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 installed (using an ET 200SP CPU/interface module as an example) Note Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces Ensure that all devices are connected to the SELV/PELV power supply (or equivalent). Only then are you permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in LAN networks (Local Area Networks). A data transfer point that guarantees this degree of safety is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 17 BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 4.3 Diagnostics 4.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45: LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 4-3 LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 LK1/LK2 LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 4- 2 Status and error displays LED Meaning Remedy LK1/LK2 off There is no Ethernet connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. on There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. flashes The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - BusAdapter 18 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 4.4 Technical specifications 4.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Article number 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 PROFINET IO * RJ 45 Yes; 2 x * FC (FastConnect) No * Number of SCRJ ports 0 * Number of LC ports 0 Cable length - Cu conductors 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 46 g BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 19 5 BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.1 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 View Figure 5-1 BusAdapter BA 2xFC Properties You connect PROFINET IO cable with FastConnect connection method to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA 2xFC. To do this, screw the BusAdapter BA 2xFC with the connected PROFINET connection cable in place on the PROFINET device. You loop through the PROFINET via the integrated 2-port switch. BusAdapter 20 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.2 Connecting 5.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector according to the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Tools required 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver, alternatively TX10 (torx). Accessories required If you use Fast Connect Cable, we recommend the Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect Stripping Tool (6GK1901-1GA00) with green knife cassette (6GK1901-1B). This guarantees fast and safe stripping. Fast Connect Cable (recommended types): - IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2x2 (6XV1840-2AH10) - IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (6XV1840-3AH10) - IE FC TP Marine Cable (6XV1840-4AH10) - IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (6XV1870-2B) - IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (6XV1870-2D) - IE TP Torsion Cable 2x2 (6XV1870-2F) - FC TP FRNC Cable GP (6XV1871-2F) - IE FC TP Food Cable GP 2x2 (6XV1871-2L) - IE FC TP Festoon Cable 2x2 (6XV1871-2S) Please observe the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 21 BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.2 Connecting Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA 2xFC:. Table 5- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xFC View Signal name Description 1 RD_N Receive Data - 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 TD Transmit Data + Procedure Watch the video sequence "Connecting the BusAdapter BA 2xFC to the interface module" (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/95886218) To connect PROFINET IO to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA 2xFC, follow these steps: 1. Strip insulation from the sheath of the PROFINET connecting cable as follows: Figure 5-2 PROFINET connecting cable 2. Pull back the locking slide and fold up the cover of the connection element. 3. Pull up the wire guide as far as it will go. 4. Insert the unstripped single cores of the PROFINET connecting cable into the cable routing as far as it will go. Firmly press down the wire guide as far as it will go. Please refer to the color coding. BusAdapter 22 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.2 Connecting 5. Close the cover of the connection element. Then push the locking slide forwards as far as it will go. 6. Screw the BusAdapter BA 2xFC to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade, alternatively TX10. Locking slide Wire guide Figure 5-3 Shield contact PROFINET connecting cable Connection of the PROFINET IO BusAdapter BA 2xFC BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 23 BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.2 Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xFC installed CPU BA 2xFC BusAdapter PROFINET connecting cable Connection element Figure 5-4 BusAdapter BA 2xFC installed (using an ET 200SP CPU/interface module as an example) Note Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces Ensure that all devices are connected to the SELV/PELV power supply (or equivalent). Only then are you permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in LAN networks (Local Area Networks). A data transfer point that guarantees this degree of safety is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network). BusAdapter 24 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.3 Diagnostics 5.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC: LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 5-5 LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC LK1/LK2 LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 5- 2 Status and error displays LED Meaning Remedy LK1/LK2 off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. - on The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - flashes BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 25 BusAdapter BA 2xFC 5.4 Technical specifications 5.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA 2xFC Article number 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 PROFINET IO * FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x Cable length - Cu conductors 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 53 g BusAdapter 26 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.1 6 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 View Figure 6-1 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ Properties Using BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ , you connect PROFINET IO to the PROFINET device optically with fiber-optic cables via an SCRJ connector. To do this, screw the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ to the PROFINET device and plug in the SCRJ connector. You loop through the PROFINET via the integrated 2-port switch. SCRJ connector is suitable for POF and PCF. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 27 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.2 Connecting 6.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector according to the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Tools required 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver, alternatively TX10 (torx). Accessories required Connector for PROFINET connection: IE SCRJ POF Plug Fiber-optic cable: - IE POF standard cable (6XV1874-2A) - IE POF trailing cable (6XV1874-2B) - IE PCF standard cable (6XV1861-2A) - IE PCF trailing cable (6XV1861-2C) - IE PCF trailing cable, GI (6XV1861-2D) BusAdapter 28 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.2 Connecting Requirements Prepare the IE POF cables with the connectors IE SCRJ POF Plug or IE SC RJ PCF Plug. You will find more Instructions in the installation instructions: - POF fiber-optic cables with IE SCRJ POF plugs (A5E00351141). - PCF fiber-optic cables with IE SCRJ PCF plugs (A5E00835119). When installing the fiber-optic cable, make sure the bending radius is not less than permitted: - IE POF/PCF standard cable: 150 mm - IE POF/PCF trailing cable: 60 mm The maximum lengths of the fiber-optic cables are as follows: - IE POF standard cable: 50 m - IE POF trailing cable: 50 m - IE POF standard cable: 100 m - IE PCF trailing cable: 100 m - IE PCF trailing cable, GI: 250 m When the PROFINET device is the last device of the fiber-optic cable network, the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be closed with a blanking plug. When the modules ship, the blanking plugs are inserted in the PROFINET sockets of the BusAdapter. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 29 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.2 Connecting Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ. Table 6- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ View Signal name Description Receive Data Transmit Data Procedure 1. Plug the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ into the PROFINET device. 2. Screw the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade, alternatively TX10. 3. Remove the blanking plugs from the PROFINET sockets. 4. Hold the prepared connector by the housing. Insert it into the PROFINET socket on the BusAdapter BA 2xLC until you hear it click into place. The coding of the connectors ensures a safe connection. CAUTION Risk of damage to eyes Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmitter diodes. The emitted light beam damages your eyes. You can swap steps 3 and 4. BusAdapter 30 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.2 Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ installed Interface module BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ PROFINET connecting cable (fiber-optic cable) Figure 6-2 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ connected to interface module (using ET 200SP interface module as an example) Reusing used fiber-optic cables Note Shorten both fiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reassemble the connectors. This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by re-bent, heavily stressed portions of the fiber-optic cores. Reference For more information on the installation guidelines for fiber-optic cables, refer to the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Network Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/1172302). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 31 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.3 Diagnostics 6.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LED display on the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ: LK1 (green) MT1 (yellow) LK2 (green) MT2 (yellow) Figure 6-3 LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter 32 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.3 Diagnostics LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 6- 2 Status and error displays LED LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy Not relevant There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. Not relevant There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. - Not relevant The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - No error - MT1/MT2 off on flashes Not relevant off Not relevant on Causes and measures for the transmission route: * Fiber-optic error * Maintenance demanded: attenua* tion through the fiber-optic cable is already so high that operation will soon no longer be possible. * Replace the fiber-optic cable if damaged or aged. Ensure correct installation of the PROFINET plugs or PROFINET connectors. * Adhere to maximum length of 50 m for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable. * Ensure that the FOC connectors fit securely. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 33 BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ 6.4 Technical specifications 6.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ Article number 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO PROFINET IO * RJ 45 No * FC (FastConnect) No * Number of SCRJ ports 2 * Number of LC ports 0 Cable length - PCF 100 m - Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m - PCF-GI 250 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BusAdapter 34 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 7.1 7 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 View Fiber-optic cable SCRJ RJ45 Figure 7-1 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 Properties You connect PROFINET IO connection cables to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45: Optically with fiber-optic cables (FOC) with an SCRJ connector to port 1 Electrically with a standard RJ45 connector to port 2 To do this, screw the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 to the PROFINET device and plug in the SCRJ connector or the RJ45 connector. You can loop through PROFINET IO via the integrated 2-port switch. You can use any port of the BusAdapter for feeding or for looping through. The integrated media converter converts the signals automatically. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 35 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 7.2 Connecting 7.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Connecting the SCRJ connector You can find more information about the required tools, accessories, requirements and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ (Page 28). Connecting the RJ45 connector You can find more information about the required tools, accessories and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (Page 15). Pin assignment The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45: Table 7- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 View Signal name Description Receive Data Transmit Data 1 TD Transmit Data + 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 TERM1 Termination Network 1 5 TERM1 Termination Network 1 6 RD_N Receive Data - 7 TERM2 Termination Network 2 8 TERM2 Termination Network 2 BusAdapter 36 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 7.2 Connecting BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter mounted Interface module BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 PROFINET connecting cable Figure 7-2 Connecting the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 to the interface module Note Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces Ensure that all devices are connected to the SELV/PELV power supply (or equivalent). Only then are you permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in LAN networks (Local Area Networks). A data transfer point that guarantees this degree of safety is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 37 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 7.3 Diagnostics 7.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45: LK1 (green) MT (yellow) LK2 (green) Figure 7-3 LED displays on the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter 38 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 7.3 Diagnostics LK1/LK2 and MT LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 7- 2 Status and error displays LED LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy Not relevant There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. Not relevant There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. - Not relevant The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - No error - MT off on flashes Not relevant off Not relevant on Causes and measures for the transmission route: * Fiber-optic error * Maintenance demanded: attenua* tion through the fiber-optic cable is already so high that operation will soon no longer be possible. * Replace the fiber-optic cable if damaged or aged. Ensure correct installation of the PROFINET plugs or PROFINET connectors. * Adhere to maximum length of 50 m for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable. * Ensure that the FOC connectors fit securely. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 39 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 7.4 Technical specifications 7.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 Article number 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45) PROFINET IO * RJ 45 Yes; 1x * FC (FastConnect) No * Number of SCRJ ports 1 * Number of LC ports 0 Cable length - PCF 100 m - Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m - PCF-GI 250 m - Cu conductors 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BusAdapter 40 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 8.1 8 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 View SCRJ fiber-optic cable FastConnect FC Figure 8-1 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC Properties You connect PROFINET IO to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC . The BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC has one port for connection of a copper cable and one port for connection of a fiber-optic cable. Screw the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC with the attached Fast Connect bus cable onto the interface module and plug in the SCRJ connector. You loop through the PROFINET IO via the integrated 2-port switch. You can use any port of the BusAdapter for feeding or for looping through. The integrated media converter converts the signals automatically. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 41 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 8.2 Connecting 8.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector according to the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Connecting the SCRJ connector You can find more information about the required tools, accessories, requirements and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ (Page 28). Connecting the RJ45 connector You can find more information about the required tools, accessories and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xFC (Page 21). Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC. Table 8- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC View Signal name Description Receive Data Transmit Data 1 RD_N Receive Data - 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 TD Transmit Data + BusAdapter 42 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 8.2 Connecting Procedure To connect PROFINET IO to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC, follow these steps: 1. Plug the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC into the PROFINET device. 2. Screw the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade, alternatively TX10. 3. Plug the RJ45 bus connector into the PROFINET port on the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC. BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter mounted Interface module BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC PROFINET connecting cable Figure 8-2 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC installed (using an ET 200SP interface module as an example) Note Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces Ensure that all devices are connected to the SELV/PELV power supply (or equivalent). Only then are you permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in LAN networks (Local Area Networks). A data transfer point that guarantees this degree of safety is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 43 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 8.3 Diagnostics 8.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC: LK1 (green) MT (yellow) LK2 (green) Figure 8-3 LEDs on the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 44 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 8.3 Diagnostics LK1/LK2 and MT LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 8- 2 Status and error displays LED LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy Not relevant There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. Not relevant There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. - Not relevant The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - No error - MT off on flashes Not relevant off Not relevant on * Fiber-optic error * Maintenance demanded: attenuation through the fiber-optic cable is already so high that operation will soon no longer be possible. Causes and measures for the transmission route: * Replace the fiber-optic cable if damaged or aged. * Ensure correct installation of the PROFINET plugs or PROFINET connectors. * Adhere to maximum length of 50 m for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable. * Ensure that the FOC connectors fit securely. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 45 BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC 8.4 Technical specifications 8.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC Article number 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC) PROFINET IO * RJ 45 No * FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x * Number of SCRJ ports 1 * Number of LC ports 0 Cable length - PCF 100 m - Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m - PCF-GI 250 m - Cu conductors 100 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BusAdapter 46 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.1 9 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0 View Figure 9-1 BusAdapter BA 2xLC Properties You connect PROFINET IO fiber-optic cables to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA 2xLC. To do this, screw the BusAdapter BA 2xLC to the PROFINET device and insert the PROFINET connection cable. You loop through the PROFINET via the integrated 2-port switch. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 47 BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.2 Connecting 9.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Tools required 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver, alternatively TX10 (torx). Accessories required If you prepare the FC FO cables with the IE FC FO LC plug, we recommend the FC FO Termination Kit (LC) (6GK1900-0RL00-0AA0). You can cleave the glass fiber precisely using the FC FO Termination Kit (LC). CAUTION Cleaving the glass fiber * Wear protective glasses during the cleaving process. * Dispose of the remaining fibers in a suitable waste container. Connector for PROFINET fiber-optic cable connection: IE FC FO LC Plug (10 duplex plugs: 6GK1900-1RB00-2AB0) Fiber-optic cable: - IE FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230) (6XV1847-2A) - IE FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230) (6XV1847-2C) - IE FC FO Robust Cable (6XV1873-5Rxx) - IE FC FO Standard Cable (6XV1873-3Axx) BusAdapter 48 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.2 Connecting Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA 2xLC: Table 9- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2xLC View Signal name Description Receive Data Transmit Data Requirements Prepare the IE FC FO cable with the IE FC FO LC plug connectors. For detailed instructions, refer to the assembly instructions Preparing IE FC FO Cable with the plug-in connector IE FC FO LC Plug (A5E36312721). When installing the fiber-optic cable, make sure the bending radius is not less than permitted: - IE FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230): 70 mm - IE FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230) (6XV1847-2C): 88 mm The maximum lengths of the fiber-optic cables are as follows: - IE FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230): 2 km - IE FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230): 2 km When the interface module is the last device of the fiber-optic cable network, the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be closed with a blanking plug. When the modules ship, the blanking plugs are inserted in the PROFINET sockets of the BusAdapter. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 49 BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.2 Connecting Procedure To connect PROFINET IO to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA 2xLC, follow these steps: 1. Plug the BusAdapter BA 2xLC into the PROFINET device. 2. Screw the BusAdapter BA 2xLC to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade, alternatively TX10. 3. Remove the blanking plugs from the PROFINET sockets. 4. Hold the prepared connector by the housing. Insert it into the PROFINET socket on the BusAdapter BA 2xLC until you hear it click into place. The coding of the connectors ensures a safe connection. CAUTION Risk of damage to eyes Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmitter diodes. The emitted light beam damages your eyes. BusAdapter 50 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.2 Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xLC installed Interface module BusAdapter BA 2xLC PROFINET glass fiber connecting cable Figure 9-2 Connecting the BusAdapter BA 2xLC to the interface module Reusing used fiber-optic cables Note Shorten both fiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reassemble the connectors. This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by re-bent, heavily stressed portions of the fiber-optic cores. Reference For more information on the installation guidelines for fiber-optic cables, refer to the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Network Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/1172302). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 51 BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.3 Diagnostics 9.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xLC: LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 9-3 LEDs on the BusAdapter BA 2xLC LK1/LK2 LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 9- 2 Status and error displays LED Meaning Remedy LK1/LK2 off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. - on The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - flashes BusAdapter 52 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA 2xLC 9.4 Technical specifications 9.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of BusAdapter BA 2xLC Article number 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC Multimode Glass Fibre PROFINET IO * RJ 45 No * FC (FastConnect) No * Number of SCRJ ports 0 * Number of LC ports 2; Wavelength of 1 270 ... 1 380 nm, corresponds to 100BASE-FX Cable length - Multimode graded-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km - Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. 60 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 53 10 BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 10.1 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0 View Glass fiber-optic cable LC RJ45 Figure 10-1 BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 Properties You connect PROFINET IO connection cables to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45: Optically with glass fiber-optic cables with an LC connector to port 1 Electrically with a standard RJ45 connector to port 2 To do this, screw the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 to the PROFINET device and plug in the LC connector or the RJ45 connector. You can loop through PROFINET IO via the integrated 2-port switch. You can use any port of the BusAdapter for feeding or for looping through. The integrated media converter converts the signals automatically. BusAdapter 54 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 10.2 Connecting 10.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Attaching LC connectors You can find more information about the required tools, accessories, requirements and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xLC (Page 48). Connecting the RJ45 connector You can find more information about the required tools, accessories and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (Page 15). Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45. Table 10- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 View Signal name Description Receive Data Transmit Data 1 TD Transmit Data + 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 TERM1 Termination Network 1 5 TERM1 Termination Network 1 6 RD_N Receive Data - 7 TERM2 Termination Network 2 8 TERM2 Termination Network 2 BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 55 BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 10.2 Connecting BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter mounted Interface module BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter PROFINET connecting cable Figure 10-2 BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 installed (using an ET 200SP interface module as an example) Note Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces Ensure that all devices are connected to the SELV/PELV power supply (or equivalent). Only then are you permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in LAN networks (Local Area Networks). A data transfer point that guarantees this degree of safety is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network). BusAdapter 56 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 10.3 Diagnostics 10.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45: LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 10-3 LED displays on the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 LEDs LK1/LK2 on the BusAdapter Table 10- 2 Status and error displays LED Meaning Remedy LK1/LK2 off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. - on There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - flashes BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 57 BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 10.4 Technical specifications 10.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA LC/RJ45 Article number 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC / RJ45 PROFINET IO * RJ 45 Yes; 1x * FC (FastConnect) No * Number of SCRJ ports 0 * Number of LC ports 1 Cable length - Cu conductors 100 m - Multimode graded-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km - Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. 60 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 32 g BusAdapter 58 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA LC/FC 11.1 11 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0 View Glass fiber-optic cable LC FastConnect FC Figure 11-1 BusAdapter BA LC/FC Properties You connect PROFINET IO connection cables to the PROFINET device via the BusAdapter BA LC/FC: Optically with glass fiber-optic cables with an LC connector to port 1 Electrically with direct connection of the Fast Connect bus cable to port 2 Screw the BusAdapter BA LC/FC with the attached Fast Connect bus cable onto the PROFINET device and plug in the LC connector. You loop through the PROFINET IO via the integrated 2-port switch. You can use any port of the BusAdapter for feeding or for looping through. The integrated media converter converts the signals automatically. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 59 BusAdapter BA LC/FC 11.2 Connecting 11.2 Connecting Installing the bus connector Install the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com/). Attaching LC connectors You can find more information about the required tools, accessories, requirements and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xLC (Page 48). Connecting FastConnect bus cable You can find more information about the required tools, accessories and procedures in the section Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xFC (Page 21). Pin assignment The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of BusAdapter BA LC/FC. Table 11- 1 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/FC View Signal name Description Receive Data Transmit Data 1 RD_N Receive Data - 2 TD_N Transmit Data - 3 RD Receive Data + 4 TD Transmit Data + BusAdapter 60 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA LC/FC 11.2 Connecting BusAdapter BA LC/FC installed Interface module BA LC/FC BusAdapter PROFINET connecting cable Figure 11-2 Connecting the BusAdapter BA LC/FC to the interface module Note Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces Ensure that all devices are connected to the SELV/PELV power supply (or equivalent). Only then are you permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in LAN networks (Local Area Networks). A data transfer point that guarantees this degree of safety is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network). BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 61 BusAdapter BA LC/FC 11.3 Diagnostics 11.3 Diagnostics LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the BusAdapter BA LC/FC: LK1 (green) LK2 (green) Figure 11-3 LEDs on the BusAdapter BA LC/FC LK1/LK2 LEDs on the BusAdapter Table 11- 2 Status and error displays LED Meaning Remedy LK1/LK2 off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. Check whether the bus cable to the switch or IO controller is disconnected. - on There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner, e.g. IO controller. The "Node flash test" is running. The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing. - flashes BusAdapter 62 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA BusAdapter BA LC/FC 11.4 Technical specifications 11.4 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA LC/FC Article number 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0 Interfaces Number of PROFINET interfaces 1 PROFINET IO * RJ 45 No * FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x * Number of SCRJ ports 0 * Number of LC ports 1 Cable length - Cu conductors 100 m - Multimode graded-index fiber 50/125 m 3 km - Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125 m 3 km Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation * min. 0 C * max. 60 C Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 69.5 mm Depth 59 mm Weights Weight, approx. 50 g BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 63 12 Strain relief 12.1 Product overview Article number 6ES7193-6RA00-1AN0 (VPE: 5 strain relief units incl. screws) View Figure 12-1 Strain relief Properties The strain relief is a mechanical protective device for the electrical PROFINET cables on the BusAdapter. The strain relief is suitable for all optical and electrical PROFINET cables of the BusAdapter. The strain relief is an optional accessories. The cable ties are not included in the delivery. We recommend cable ties with a width of 4.8 mm. The maximum width is 7.0 mm. The length of the cable tie is min. 60 mm. BusAdapter 64 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA Strain relief 12.2 Installing 12.2 Installing Requirement The PROFINET cables are not inserted on the BusAdapter. The inserted PROFINET cables hamper the mounting of the strain relief. BusAdapter and strain relief can be mounted separately. Tools required Screwdriver TX10 (torx). Procedure To install the strain relief, follow these steps: 1. Press the strain relief below the BusAdapter seat of the PROFINET device. Figure 12-2 Strain relief before mounting 2. Fasten the strain relief (1 screw with 0.7 to 0.8 Nm tightening torque). 3. Plug the BusAdapter into the PROFINET device. BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 65 Strain relief 12.2 Installing 4. Screw the BusAdapter to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque). 5. Attach the PROFINET cables with the cable ties to the strain relief. Figure 12-3 Strain relief installed BusAdapter 66 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA Dimension drawings A.1 A BusAdapter dimension drawings The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 as an example. Figure A-1 A.2 Dimensional drawing of BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 Strain relief dimension drawings The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the strain relief. Figure A-2 Strain relief dimension drawing BusAdapter Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA 67 B Accessories B.1 Accessories Additional accessories are available for the SIMATIC BusAdapters: Accessories Article number Property Figure Strain relief 6ES7193-6RA001AN0 The strain relief is a mechanical protective device for the electrical PROFINET cables on the BusAdapter. The strain relief can be ordered as optional accessories. You install the strain relief on the PROFINET device (e.g.: interface module) before you install the BusAdapter. You can find additional information in section Strain relief (Page 64). Reference identification label (10 mats with 16 labels each) 6ES7193-6LF300AW0 The labels enable the reference identification labeling of the BusAdapter. The labels can be ordered on a mat for thermal transfer and inkjet printers as optional accessories. You insert the reference identification label into the opening on the top of the BusAdapter. Cables and connectors You can find the recommended cables and connectors with the respective BusAdapters. Assembly tools Tool MLFB Description Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool 6GK1901-1GA00 Stripping tool for the fast stripping of IE FastConnect cables with green blade cassette FC FO Termination Kit 6GK1900-0RL00-0AA0 Stripping tool for FC FO cable with the IE FC FO LC plug (cleaving of the glass fiber). BusAdapter 68 Manual, 03/2018, A5E41449003-AA ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, S7-1500R/H, ET 200SP, ET 200pro Cycle and response times Function Manual 10/2018 A5E03461504-AD 2 ___________________ Program execution 3 ___________________ Cyclic program execution Event-driven program 4 ___________________ execution Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5 ___________ Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03461504-AD 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation The controller offers various options for program execution with different run priorities. Cyclic-driven and time-driven program execution have the largest share. The response times of a controller are therefore significantly determined by the processing cycles. There is also the possibility of event-driven program execution. The event-driven program execution is normally limited to a few selected events. This manual provides information on the following topics: Types of program execution Run priorities Cycle and response times, and the influences to which they are subject Configuration options for the optimization of your user program Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the SIMATIC industrial automation system Knowledge of the use of Windows-based computers Knowledge of working with STEP 7 Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 3 Preface Scope of the documentation This documentation mainly covers the description of the CPU components of the cycle and response times of the following systems: S7-1500 automation system S7-1500R/H redundant system ET 200SP distributed I/O system CPU 1516pro-2 PN of the ET 200pro distributed I/O system You can find links to more information on the ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200pro distributed I/O systems at the corresponding points in this manual. What's new in edition 10/2018 as compared to edition 09/2016? What's new? Changed contents Scope of the function manual expanded to include CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information? The determination of the cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system follows the same principle as for the CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system. Section Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system (Page 51) What's new in the 09/2016 edition compared to the 02/2014 edition? What's new? Changed contents What are the customer benefits? Scope of the function manual expanded to include the CPUs of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and CPU 1516pro-2 PN of the ET 200pro distributed I/O system Where can I find information? Functions that you will be familiar with Starting from section Program from the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPUs are execution (Page 13) implemented in CPUs in other designs (ET 200SP) and in the CPU 1516pro-2 PN (degree of protection IP 65, IP 66 and IP 67). Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Cycle and response times 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 5 Preface Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Cycle and response times 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 8 2 Program execution ................................................................................................................................ 13 3 4 5 2.1 Principle of operation ..............................................................................................................13 2.2 Overload behavior ...................................................................................................................16 Cyclic program execution ...................................................................................................................... 20 3.1 Cycle .......................................................................................................................................21 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.2.4 Cycle time ...............................................................................................................................24 Different cycle times................................................................................................................24 Influences on the cycle time ...................................................................................................28 Update time for process image partitions ...............................................................................28 User program execution time ..................................................................................................31 Extension of cycle time due to communication load ...............................................................36 Special consideration when PROFINET IO communication is configured on the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) .......................................................................................................38 3.3 Time-driven program execution in cyclic interrupts ................................................................40 3.4 Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution ................................................42 3.5 Summary of response time with cyclic and time-controlled program execution .....................45 Event-driven program execution ............................................................................................................ 47 4.1 Response time of the CPUs when program execution is event-controlled ............................47 4.2 Process response time when program execution is event-driven ..........................................49 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system ........................................................... 51 5.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................51 5.2 Maximum cycle time and time errors ......................................................................................52 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system .......................................54 Influences on the cycle time in RUN-Solo system state .........................................................54 Influences on the cycle time in SYNCUP system state ..........................................................55 Influences on the cycle time in RUN-Redundant system state...............................................59 Influences on the cycle time when a CPU fails .......................................................................63 5.4 Response time of R/H CPUs ..................................................................................................66 5.5 Timetables for the RUN-Redundant system state ..................................................................69 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 72 Index..................................................................................................................................................... 77 Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 7 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Cycle and response times 8 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 9 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Cycle and response times 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 11 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Cycle and response times 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Program execution 2.1 2 Principle of operation Introduction You often program your user program with a cyclic OB, usually in OB 1. With complex applications, problems are often encountered in complying with the response times required by the application. You can often meet the response time requirements by splitting the user program up into several parts with different response time requirements. The CPU offers a number of different OB types for this purpose, the properties (priority, frequency, etc.) of which can be adapted to meet your requirements. Program organization You can choose from the following types of program execution for running your user program: Program execution in the cyclic program of the CPU: The CPU executes the user program cyclically. When the execution has reached the end of a cycle, the program execution starts again in the next cycle. In the simplest case, you execute the entire user program in the cyclic program of the CPU. All tasks in the user program are then processed with equal rank. This also results in the same response times for all tasks. In addition to program execution in the cyclic program, there is time-driven and event-driven program execution. Time-driven execution: In a complex user program, there are frequently portions with different response time requirements. You can optimize the response times by taking advantage of these differences in the requirements. To do so, you can break down the program parts with higher response time requirements into higher-priority OBs with shorter cycles, for example cyclic interrupt OBs. The execution of these parts can thus occur at different frequencies and with different priorities. Event-driven execution: Depending on the I/O modules used, you can configure hardware interrupts for specific process events (such as an edge change of a digital input) that result in the call of the assigned hardware interrupt OB. The hardware interrupts have a higher priority and interrupt the cyclic program of the CPU. You can achieve very short response times in the CPU with hardware interrupts by directly triggering program execution. Keep in mind that the time characteristics of your application becomes less predictable with intense use of hardware interrupts. The reason for this is that the time at which the triggering events occur can result in drastically different response times. Tip: Use hardware interrupts only for a few selected events. Special consideration for hardware interrupts: If you have assigned an OB to an event (hardware interrupt), the OB then has the priority of the event. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 13 Program execution 2.1 Principle of operation Using process image partitions If you have distributed a program over various OBs, for example, due to different response time requirements, it is advisable and often necessary to assign the update of the used I/O data directly to these OBs. You can use process image partitions for this purpose. You group the input and output data in a process image partition according to their use in the program and assign the data to the OB. A process image partition of the inputs (PIPI) permits the associated input data for an OB program to be updated immediately before the OB program starts. A process image partition of the outputs (PIPQ) permits the output data associated with an OB program to become effective on the outputs immediately after the OB program runs. You have 32 (0 ... 31) process image partitions at your disposal. The I/O is assigned to the process image partition 0 by default (setting: "Automatic update"). Process image partition 0 is permanently assigned to cyclic execution. You have to configure the "system-side update of process image partitions". You can find additional information on configuration of process image partitions in the online help for STEP 7 under the keyword "Assign process image/process image partition". Interruptibility of program execution Each organization block is processed according to the priority it has been assigned. You can adapt the priority according to the response time requirements for most organization blocks. All cycle OBs always have the lowest priority of 1. The highest priority is 26. Communication tasks always have priority 15. If necessary, you can change the priority of your blocks and select a higher priority than the communication. Organization blocks or system activities with higher priority interrupt organization blocks or system activities with lower priority. Organization blocks or system activities with higher priority interrupt thus extend the runtime of the interrupted organization blocks or system activities. If two pending tasks have the same priority, these tasks are processed in the order in which the tasks occurred. Note Higher priority OBs Communication functionality is strongly influenced by too many and/or runtime-intensive OBs with a priority > 15. When using OBs with a priority > 15, you should therefore consider the runtime load that they cause. Cycle and response times 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Program execution 2.1 Principle of operation Reference You can find additional information on the subject of "priorities" in the "Events and OBs" section of the following manuals: S7-1500 automation system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59191792) system manual S7-1500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) operating instructions You can find additional information on organization blocks and their priorities for Motion Control in the S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) function manual. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 15 Program execution 2.2 Overload behavior 2.2 Overload behavior CPU overload behavior An occurring event triggers the execution of the associated OB. Depending on the OB priority and the current processor load, a time delay may occur before the OB is executed when there is an overload. The same event can therefore occur once or several times before the user program processes the OB belonging to the preceding event. The CPU handles such a situation as follows: The operating system queues the events in the queue associated with their priority in the order of their occurrence. The CPU then takes the oldest event for the highest priority and processes the associated OB. After the OB has been processed, the CPU processes the OB for the next event. To control temporary overload situations, you can limit the number of queued events that originate from the same source. The next event is discarded as soon as the maximum number of pending triggers of a specific cyclic interrupt OB, for example, is reached. Overload occurs when similar events occur faster than the CPU can process these events. Similar events are events from a single source, such as start events for a specific cyclic interrupt OB. Configuration of the overload response In the properties of an organization block in which an overload can occur, you can select the response to the overload response under "Attributes" and "Event queuing". Figure 2-1 Configuration of the overload response in the block properties Cycle and response times 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Program execution 2.2 Overload behavior Events to be queued The OB parameter "Events to be queued" is used to specify how many similar events the operating system places in the associated queue and therefore post-processes. If this parameter has the value 1, for example, exactly one event is stored temporarily. If the maximum number of similar start events is reached in the queue, each additional start event is only counted and subsequently discarded. During the next scheduled processing of the event, the CPU provides the number of discarded start events in the "Event_Count" input parameter (in the start information). You can then react appropriately to the overload situation. The CPU then resets the counter for lost events to zero. Note Post-processing of cyclic events is often not desirable, as this can lead to an overload with OBs of the same or lower priority. Therefore, it is generally advantageous to discard similar events and to react to the overload situation during the next scheduled OB processing. A low value of the "Events to be queued" parameter mitigates an overload situation. To ensure that the CPU processes the OB of at least one queued event, the minimum number of events to be queued is "1". The maximum number of events that can be queued is "12". Report event overflow into diagnostic buffer If the CPU first discards a start event of a cyclic interrupt OB, for example, its further behavior depends on the OB parameter "Report event overflow into diagnostic buffer". If you have selected the check box, the CPU enters the event DW#16#0002:3507 in the diagnostic buffer for the overload situation at this event source. If an overload situation occurs again (overflow counter changes from 0 to 1), another diagnostic buffer entry is made at the next OB end. Enable time error The cyclic interrupt OB parameter "Enable time error" is used to specify whether the CPU is to call a time error OB when a specific overload level is reached for similar events. You use the OB parameter "Enable time error" to program a reaction to an overload before the limit for similar events is reached. The reaction occurs before the CPU discards similar events. By default, the "Enable time error" parameter is not set. Event threshold for time error Select the "Enable time error" check box to enable the "Event threshold for time error" OB parameter. You use the "Event threshold for time error" OB parameter to specify how many similar events in the queue are permitted before the CPU calls a time error OB. The following value range applies to the "Event threshold for time error" parameter: 1 "Event threshold for time error" "Events to be queued". Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 17 Program execution 2.2 Overload behavior Example 1 The following example shows the response of the CPU when multiple similar events occur faster than the CPU can process the associated OBs. In example 1, the user selected the following parameter assignment: Figure 2-2 Example of parameter assignment for the overload behavior The figure below shows the processing sequence as soon as an event calls an associated OB. Figure 2-3 Example 1 As soon as an occurring event calls an OB, the event occupies a slot of the OB. The occupied slot is free again as soon as the CPU has processed the event. If the CPU has not completed processing the OB of an occurring event, additional occurring events each occupy an additional slot of the OB during this time. As soon as this number exceeds the configured number of events to be queued, these events are discarded and counted by the overflow counter. When an OB which takes a long time to run is completed, the CPU creates an entry in the diagnostic buffer and sets the overflow counter to zero (). After the CPU has processed this long-running OP, the CPU then processes the OBs of the events that are queued one after the other. At the next new occurring event, the CPU writes the previous value of the reset overflow counter to the start information of the OB. The CPU then processes the OB (). Cycle and response times 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Program execution 2.2 Overload behavior Example 2 In example 2, the user has selected the following parameter assignment: Figure 2-4 Example of parameter assignment for the overload behavior Contrary to example 1, the CPU in example 2 requests a time error as soon as the configured event threshold has been exceeded. An additional time error can then only occur if all slots of the OB have been free once in the meantime. Figure 2-5 Example 2 Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 19 3 Cyclic program execution Validity The statements of the section "Cyclic program execution" apply to the CPU components of the following systems: S7-1500 automation system ET 200MP and ET 200SP distributed I/O systems CPU 1516pro-2 PN of the ET 200pro distributed I/O system S7-1500R/H redundant system (in RUN-Solo system state) In RUN-Redundant system state, the statements of section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system (Page 51)" apply. Restrictions With the S7-1500R/H redundant system, there are restrictions compared to the S7-1500 automation system. The S7-1500R/H redundant system does not support all hardware properties and firmware functions of the S7-1500 automation system (for example, it does not support PROFIBUS DP, central I/O, web server, etc.). The restrictions are described in the S7-1500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual. Cycle and response times 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.1 Cycle 3.1 Cycle Definition of cycle A cycle includes the following sections: Update of process image partition 0 of the outputs (PIPQ 0) Automatic update of the process image partition 0 of the inputs (PIPI 0) Execution of the cyclic program The process image partition 0 is automatically updated in the cycle. You assign the I/O addresses to these process image partitions (PIPI 0/PIPQ 0) when you configure the I/O modules via the "Automatic update" setting (default). Figure 3-1 Assigning I/O addresses to process image partitions Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 21 Cyclic program execution 3.1 Cycle The figure below illustrates the phases that are passed through during a cycle. In the example below the user has configured a minimum cycle time. Updating of the process image partitions and processing of the cyclic program is completed before the end of the configured minimum cycle time. Therefore, the CPU waits until the configured minimum cycle time has expired before the next program cycle starts. The operating system starts measurement of the cycle time. The CPU processes the user program and executes the instructions specified in the program. The CPU writes the states from the process image output to the output modules. The CPU reads the status of the inputs at the input modules and writes the input data to the process image input. The CPU updates the process image partitions and processes the cyclic program. Wait phase until end of configured minimum cycle time The operating system restarts the monitoring of the maximum cycle time, evaluates the calculated cycle time, and starts the new measurement. Figure 3-2 Cycle Cycle and response times 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.1 Cycle Cycle control point When the cycle control point is reached, the CPU has completed the cycle program and is no longer executing OBs. All user data are consistent at this time. Requirement is that no communication that modifies user data (such as HMI communication or PUT/GET communication) is active. The cycle control point marks: The end of a cycle and its cycle time statistics The start of the next cycle and its cycle time statistics The restart of the monitoring of the configured maximum cycle time (time-out counter is reset) The cycle control point is reached depending on which of the following events occurred last: End of the last cyclic OB Expiry of the minimum cycle time (if configured) After the cycle control point has been reached, the CPU executes the following steps: 1. Writes the process image outputs to the output modules 2. Reads the state of the inputs into the input modules 3. Executes the first cyclic OB Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 23 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time 3.2 Cycle time Definition of cycle time The cycle time is the time the CPU needs for: Updating the process image inputs/outputs Executing the cyclic program All program parts and system activities interrupting this cycle Waiting for the minimum cycle time (if it is parameterized and is longer than the program execution time) 3.2.1 Different cycle times Introduction The cycle time (Tcyc) is not the same in each cycle because the processing times may vary. Causes of this include: For example, different program runtimes: - Program loops - Conditional commands - Conditional block calls - Different program paths Lengthening due to interruptions, for example: - Time-driven interrupt processing - Event-driven interrupt processing - Communication Cycle and response times 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Causes of different cycle times The figure below shows the different cycle times Tcyc1 and Tcyc2 using an example. Because the cyclic program is interrupted by a cyclic interrupt OB in this example (for example: OB 30), the cycle time Tcyc2 is greater than Tcyc1. The cyclic interrupt OB in turn is interrupted by Motion Control functions and communication. Figure 3-3 Possible causes of differing cycle times Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 25 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Minimum cycle time In STEP 7, you can set a minimum cycle time for a CPU. The default for the minimum cycle time is one millisecond. It is advisable to increase this setting in the following cases: To reduce the cycle time's fluctuation range. To make remaining computing time available for communication tasks. The CPU then processes these communication tasks until the minimum cycle time has expired. Making the remaining computing time available to communication tasks offers the following advantages: - Longer minimum cycle times prevent that process images are updated unnecessarily often and thus lead to less load on the backplane bus. - Longer minimum cycle times result in an increase in communication performance. Maximum cycle time The maximum cycle time is a configurable high limit of the cyclic program runtime. The task of the cycle time is to monitor the response time required for the respective process. The maximum cycle time of non-redundant CPUs is set to 150 ms by default. You can set this value from 1 ms to 6000 ms when assigning parameters to the CPU. When the cycle time is longer than the maximum cycle time, the time error OB (OB 80) is called. You have the option of restarting the maximum cycle time using the "RE_TRIGR" instruction, and thus extending it. You specify how the CPU responds to the time error with the user program in OB 80. The CPU switches to STOP under the following conditions: If you have not loaded an OB 80. If the cycle is still not completed after an additional maximum cycle time. Note Behavior of the CPU on the second cycle timeout Note that you can only extend the cycle time a maximum of once. On the second consecutive cycle timeout, the CPU always goes into STOP state. Cycle and response times 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Cycle time statistics You can read the cycle time statistics either directly from STEP 7 ("Online tools" task card) or with the "RT_INFO" instruction. You can use the "RT_INFO" instruction to generate statistics in STEP 7 on the runtime of specific organization blocks for communication or for the user program. For example, this includes The shortest and longest cycle time The portions of runtime used for communication and the user program Note Showing the cycle time statistics on the display and Web server With the S7-1500 CPUs, you also have the option of calling the cycle time statistics via the display of the CPU. As of firmware version 2.0 of the CPUs, the cycle time statistics are also displayed in the Web server. To view the cycle time statistics directly in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Establish an online connection to the CPU with STEP 7. 2. Select the "Online tools" task card. Result: The diagram of the cycle time statistics is displayed in the cycle time section. The following figure shows an extract from STEP 7 with the cycle time statistics. In this example, the cycle time fluctuates between 7 ms and 12 ms. The current cycle time is 10 ms. The maximum cycle time that can be set in this example is 40 ms. Figure 3-4 Cycle time statistics You can find additional information on the runtime characteristics of the CPU with the "RT_INFO" instruction in the user program. The instruction includes information about: The utilization of the CPU by the user program and communication in percentage The runtimes of the individual OBs Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 27 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Reference Additional information on the "RT_INFO" instruction is available in the STEP 7 online help. 3.2.2 Influences on the cycle time 3.2.2.1 Update time for process image partitions Estimating update time for process image partitions The update time of the process image partitions depends on the volume of assigned central and distributed I/O module data. You can estimate the update time using the following formula: Base load for process image update + Number of words in the process image x copy time for central I/O + Number of words in the process image via DP x copy time for PROFIBUS I/O + Number of words in the process image via PROFINET x copy time for PROFINET I/O __________________________________________________________________________________ = Update time of the process image partition Cycle and response times 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Update times of the process image partitions The following table contains the times for estimating the typical update times of the process image partitions. Table 3- 1 Data for estimating the typical update time of the process image partitions Components Update times of the CPUs S7-1500 1511(F)-1 PN 1515(F)-2 PN 1517(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP 1511T(F)-1 PN 1515T(F)-2 PN 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP 1511C-1 PN 1516(F)-3 PN/DP 1512C-1 PN 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP 1513(F)-1 PN Basic load for updating process image partitions 35 s 30 s 7 s 5 s Copy time for central I/O 9 s/word 8 s/word 5 s/word 4 s/word Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFIBUS 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word 0.4 s/word 0.3 s/word Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFINET 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word 0.4 s/word 0.3 s/word Components Update time of the CPU in RUN-Solo system state S7-1500R/H* 1513R-1 PN 1515R-2 PN 1517H-3 PN Basic load for updating process image partitions 35 s 30 s 7 s Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFINET 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word 0.4 s/word * Additional information about cycle and response times of R/H CPUs is available in the section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 29 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Components Update time of the CPU ET 200SP 1510SP(F)-1 PN 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC Basic load for updating process image partitions 60 s 60 s 30 s Copy time for central I/O 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFIBUS 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFINET 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word 0.5 s/word Components Update time of the CPU ET 200pro 1516pro(F)-2 PN Basic load for updating process image partitions 30 s Copy time for central I/O 120 s/word Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFIBUS 0.5 s/word Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFINET 0.5 s/word Note Update time of the backplane bus for ET 200SP CPUs For the update time of the ET 200SP CPUs, observe also the information in table "Update time of the ET 200SP CPUs" in the section Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution (Page 42). Cycle and response times 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time 3.2.2.2 User program execution time Introduction Organization blocks or system activities with higher priority interrupt organization blocks or system activities with lower priority, and thus extend their runtime. Program execution time without interruptions The user program has a certain runtime without interruptions. The runtime depends on the number of operations that are executed in the user program. The following table contains the typical durations of operations. Table 3- 2 Duration of an operation S7-1500 1511(F)-1 P N 1512C-1 P N 1513(F)-1 P N 1511T(F)-1 PN 1515(F)-2 P N 1516(F)-3 P N/DP 1517(F)-3 P N/DP 1518(F)-4 P N/DP 1515T(F)-2 PN 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 P N/DP MFP 1511C-1 PN Bit operations, typ. 60 ns 48 ns 40 ns 30 ns 10 ns 2 ns 1 ns Word operations, typ. 72 ns 58 ns 48 ns 36 ns 12 ns 3 ns 2 ns Fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 96 ns 77 ns 64 ns 48 ns 16 ns 3 ns 2 ns Floating-point arithmetic, typ. 384 ns 307 ns 256 ns 192 ns 64 ns 12 ns 6 ns S7-1500R/H* in RUN-Solo system state 1513R-1 PN 1515R-2 PN 1517H-3 PN Bit operations, typ. 40 ns 30 ns 2 ns Word operations, typ. 48 ns 36 ns 3 ns Fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 64 ns 48 ns 3 ns Floating-point arithmetic, typ. 256 ns 192 ns 12 ns * Additional information about cycle and response times of R/H CPUs is available in the section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 31 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time ET 200SP 1510SP(F)-1 PN 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC Bit operations, typ. 72 ns 48 ns 30 ns Word operations, typ. 86 ns 58 ns 36 ns Fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 115 ns 77 ns 48 ns Floating-point arithmetic, typ. 461 ns 307 ns 192 ns ET 200pro 1516pro(F)-2 PN Bit operations, typ. 10 ns Word operations, typ. 12 ns Fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 16 ns Floating-point arithmetic, typ. 64 ns Note Instruction "RUNTIME" You can measure the runtimes of program sequences with the instruction "RUNTIME". Cycle and response times 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Extension due to nesting of higher-priority OBs and/or interrupts The interruption of a user program at the end of an instruction by a higher-priority OB causes a certain basic time expenditure. Take account of this basic time expenditure in addition to the update time of the assigned process image partitions and the execution time of the contained user program. The following tables contain the typical times for the various interrupts and error events. Table 3- 3 Basic time expenditure for an interrupt S7-1500 1511(F)-1 PN 1515(F)-2 PN 1517(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP 1511T(F)-1 PN 1515T(F)-2 PN 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP 1511C-1 PN 1516(F)-3 PN/DP 1512C-1 PN 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP 1513(F)-1 PN Hardware interrupt 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s Time-of-day inter- 90 s rupt 80 s 20 s 12 s Time-delay interrupt 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s Cyclic interrupt 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s S7-1500R/H* in RUN-Solo system state 1513R-1 PN 1515R-2 PN 1517H-3 PN 170 s 140 s 20 s Time-of-day inter- 170 s rupt 140 s 20 s Time-delay interrupt 170 s 140 s 20 s Cyclic interrupt 170 s 140 s 20 s Hardware interrupt * Additional information about cycle and response times of R/H CPUs is available in the section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" ET 200SP 1510SP(F)-1 PN 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC 90 s 90 s 80 s Time-of-day inter- 90 s rupt 90 s 80 s Time-delay interrupt 90 s 90 s 80 s Cyclic interrupt 90 s 90 s 80 s Hardware interrupt Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 33 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time ET 200pro 1516pro(F)-2 PN Table 3- 4 Hardware interrupt 80 s Time-of-day interrupt 80 s Time-delay interrupt 80 s Cyclic interrupt 80 s Basic time expenditure for an error OB S7-1500 1511(F)-1 PN 1515(F)-2 PN 1517(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP 1511T(F)-1 PN 1515T(F)-2 PN 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP 1511C-1 PN 1516(F)-3 PN/DP 1512C-1 PN 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP 1513(F)-1 PN Programming error 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s I/O access error 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s Time error 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s Diagnostic interrupt 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s Module failure/recovery 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s Station failure/recovery 90 s 80 s 20 s 12 s S7-1500R/H* in RUN-Solo system state 1513R-1 PN 1515R-2 PN 1517H-3 PN Programming error 170 s 140 s 20 s I/O access error 170 s 140 s 20 s Time error 170 s 140 s 20 s Diagnostic interrupt 170 s 140 s 20 s Module failure/recovery 170 s 140 s 20 s Station failure/recovery 170 s 140 s 20 s * Additional information about cycle and response times of R/H CPUs is available in the section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" Cycle and response times 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time ET 200SP 1510SP(F)-1 PN 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC Programming error 90 s 90 s 80 s I/O access error 90 s 90 s 80 s Time error 90 s 90 s 80 s Diagnostic interrupt 90 s 90 s 80 s Module failure/recovery 90 s 90 s 80 s Station failure/recovery 90 s 90 s 80 s CPU ET 200pro 1516pro(F)-2 PN Programming error 80 s I/O access error 80 s Time error 80 s Diagnostic interrupt 80 s Module failure/recovery 80 s Station failure/recovery 80 s Reference You can find additional information on the topic of error handling in the Events and OBs section of the S7-1500 automation system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) system manual S7-1500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual CPU 1516pro-2 PN operating instructions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) You can find additional information on the topic of the complete cycle time of a program in an FAQ on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/87668055). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 35 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time 3.2.2.3 Extension of cycle time due to communication load Impact of communication on the cycle time In the sequence model of the CPU, communication tasks are processed with priority 15. All program parts with priority > 15 (e.g. for Motion Control functions) are unaffected by communication. Configured communication load The CPU operating system provides the maximum specified percentage of total CPU processing power for communication tasks. The communication load is preset in STEP 7 at 50%, for example, for the CPUs of the S7 series. If the processing power is not needed for communication, then the processing power is available to the operating system and the user program. Communication is allocated the requisite computing time in 1 ms increments, with priority 15. At 50% communication load, 500 s of each 1 millisecond are used for communication. The following formula may be used to estimate the extension of the cycle time by communication. Figure 3-5 Formula: Impact of communication load With a complete use of the communication load of 50% (default), the following value results: Figure 3-6 Extension of cycle time due to communication load The actual cycle time is up to twice as long as the cycle time without communication when you use the default communication load. Cycle and response times 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Dependency of maximum cycle time on the configured communication load The diagram shows the nonlinear relationship between maximum cycle time and configured communication load with a pure cycle time of 10 ms. No interruptions occur in the example. CPUs 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP, 1517(F)-3 PN/DP, CPU 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP, CPU 1518(F)-4 PN/DP, 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP: The (minimum) communication load that can be set is 5%. Figure 3-7 Maximum cycle time depending on the configured communication load The described influence of the communication load on the execution time applies to all OBs with a priority < 15. Reducing the cycle time with a lower communication load You can reduce the setting for the communication load in the hardware configuration. If you set a communication load of 20% instead of 50%, for example, the cycle time extension due to the communication is reduced from a factor of 2 to 1.25. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 37 Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Effect on the actual cycle time Communication is only one cause of extension of the cycle time. All configured events that extend the cycle time (e.g. hardware interrupts) mean that more asynchronous events can occur within a cycle. These asynchronous events further extend the cyclic program. The extension depends on the number of events that occur and are processed in the cycle. Note Checking parameter changes * Check the effects of a value change on the "Cycle load due to communication" parameter during system operation. You can use the "RT_INFO" instruction to determine which portions of runtime are used for communication and the user program. * Take the communication load into consideration when setting the maximum cycle time to prevent time errors (for example, exceeding the cycle time within a cycle) from occurring. Tips Whenever possible, use the default setting for the configured communication load. If you reduce the value of the communication load, keep in mind that communication tasks are interrupted by higher-priority OBs. This means it will also take longer to process the communication. 3.2.2.4 Special consideration when PROFINET IO communication is configured on the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) If you configure the PROFINET IO communication at the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) on the following CPUs as of firmware version 2.0, an additional system load occurs: CPU 1515(F)-2 PN CPU 1515T(F)-2 PN CPU 1516(F)-3 PN/DP CPU 1516(F)pro-2 PN CPU 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP This additional system load has priority 26 and extends the runtime of the program. The execution of synchronous cycle interrupts or hardware interrupts, for example, can be delayed as a result. The additional system load depends on: Communication traffic at the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) The communication traffic at the interface in frames per second causes communication load as well as system load. You cannot limit the communication traffic using the "Communication load" parameter. Number of IO devices which the CPU at the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) updates within a millisecond You determine the additional system load with the "RT_INFO" (read RUNTIME statistics) instruction at the Mode parameter with mode 10 or mode 20. Cycle and response times 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.2 Cycle time Reducing additional system load You reduce the communication load at the 2nd PROFINET interface, e.g. with: Fewer HMI devices or slower update cycles of the HMI devices Less or slower communication with other CPUs Increase the update times in STEP 7 for all IO devices that are assigned to the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2): 1. Select the "IO Communication" in the "Network view" of STEP 7. 2. Set the "Update mode" parameter to "Adjustable". 3. Select a higher value for the "Update time [ms]" parameter in the drop-down list. 4. Repeat this setting for the other IO devices. Figure 3-8 Increasing update times Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 39 Cyclic program execution 3.3 Time-driven program execution in cyclic interrupts 3.3 Time-driven program execution in cyclic interrupts With a cyclic interrupt you have the option of having a specific OB processed in a time interval. The time interval is independent of the execution time of the cyclic program. A priority from 2 to 24 can be selected for the cyclic interrupt. This makes the priority of cyclic interrupts higher than the priority of the cyclic program. A cyclic interrupt increases the execution time of the cyclic program. Tip: By shifting program sections to cyclic interrupts, you can reduce the response times or better adapt them to your requirements. In STEP 7 the organization blocks OB 30 to OB 38 are intended for processing cyclic interrupts. You can create additional cyclic interrupts starting with organization block OB 123. The number of available organization blocks depends on the CPU used. Cyclic interrupt A cyclic interrupt is an interrupt initiated according to a defined cycle that causes a cyclic interrupt OB to be processed. A cyclic interrupt OB is assigned to the "Cyclic interrupt" event class. Cycle of a cyclic interrupt The cycle of a cyclic interrupt is defined as the time from the call of a cyclic interrupt OB to the next call of a cyclic interrupt OB. The following figure shows an example of the cycle of a cyclic interrupt. Figure 3-9 Call interval of a cyclic interrupt Cycle and response times 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.3 Time-driven program execution in cyclic interrupts Accuracy of a cyclic interrupt Even if a cyclic interrupt is not delayed by a higher-priority OB or communication activities, the accuracy with which it is started is nevertheless subject to system-dependent fluctuations. The following table shows the accuracy with which a cyclic interrupt is triggered: Table 3- 5 Accuracy of cyclic interrupts S7-1500 1511(F)-1 PN 1515(F)-2 PN 1517(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP 1511T(F)-1 PN 1515T(F)-2 PN 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP 1511C-1 PN 1516(F)-3 PN/DP 1512C-1 PN 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP 30 s 25 s 1513(F)-1 PN Cyclic interrupt 90 s 80 s S7-1500R/H* in RUN-Solo system state Cyclic interrupt 1513R-1 PN 1515R-2 PN 1517H-3 PN 390 s 300 s 90 s * Additional information about cycle and response times of R/H CPUs is available in the section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" ET 200SP Cyclic interrupt 1510SP(F)-1 PN 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC 90 s 90 s 80 s ET 200pro 1516pro(F)-2 PN Cyclic interrupt 80 s Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 41 Cyclic program execution 3.4 Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution 3.4 Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution Introduction In this section you learn: How the response time is composed How to calculate the response time Definition The response time in the case of cyclic or time-controlled program execution is the time between the detection of an input signal and the change of a connected output signal. Fluctuation in the response time of the CPU The actual response time of the CPU fluctuates between one and two cycles for cyclic program execution and between one and two cyclic interrupt cycles for time-controlled program execution. You should always assume the longest response time when configuring your system. The following figure shows the shortest and longest response times of the CPU to an event. Figure 3-10 Shortest and longest response times of the CPU Cycle and response times 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.4 Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution Factors To determine the process response time, you must take account of the following factors in addition to the CPU response time described above: Delay of the inputs and outputs at the I/O module Switching times of the sensors and actuators used Update times for PROFINET IO or DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP; update time of the backplane bus for ET 200SP CPUs Delay at the inputs and outputs of the modules The delay and cycle times can be found in the technical specifications of the I/O modules. Update times for PROFINET IO and DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP When distributed I/O is used, the maximum response time is additionally extended by the bus transmission times of PROFIBUS or PROFINET. These bus transmission times occur during both the reading and output of the process image partitions. The bus transmission times correspond to the bus update cycle of the distributed device. PROFINET IO If you use STEP 7 to configure your PROFINET IO system, STEP 7 calculates the update time. To display the update time, follow these steps: Select the PROFINET interface of the I/O module. In the General tab, select "Advanced options > Real time settings > IO cycle". The update time is displayed in the "Update time" field and can be set for each IO device. PROFIBUS DP If you use STEP 7 to configure your PROFIBUS DP master system, STEP 7 calculates the DP cycle time. To display the DP cycle time, follow these steps: Select the PROFIBUS subnet in the network view. In the General tab of the Inspector window, navigate to the Bus parameters. The DP cycle time is displayed in the "Parameters" field at "Typical Ttr". The following figure illustrates the additional bus runtimes using distributed I/O. Figure 3-11 Additional bus runtimes with distributed I/O A further optimization of the response times is achieved by using isochronous mode. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 43 Cyclic program execution 3.4 Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution Update time of the backplane bus for ET 200SP CPUs The following table shows the central (typical) update times of the backplane bus for the ET 200SP CPUs. Table 3- 6 Update time of the ET 200SP CPUs Update time of the CPU ET 200SP 1510SP(F)-1 PN Update time for central I/O 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC 250 s to 1 ms, depending on number and type of central I/O modules1 The duration of the update time depends on the number of the I/O modules and their type (ST, HF, HS). The update time is set at 1 ms for a max. central I/O configuration with standard I/O modules. You can reduce the update time down to 250 s, for example, by using HF I/O modules and by reducing the number of modules. 1 The table below is an orientation guide. It shows the approximate relationship between the number of ET 200SP I/O modules and the bus cycle that is used. As an example, 8 bytes of I/O data per I/O module are assumed in the table. Number of ET 200SP I/O modules Input data (bytes) Output data (bytes) Used bus cycle (s) 8 64 64 250 16 128 128 250 24 192 192 281.25 32 256 256 312.5 40 320 320 343.75 48 384 384 375 56 448 448 406.25 64 512 512 437.5 For I/O modules with more than 32 bytes of I/O data, the bus cycle is calculated with an I/O module of 32 bytes. In this case the I/O module requires multiple bus cycles to update its I/O data. Cycle and response times 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cyclic program execution 3.5 Summary of response time with cyclic and time-controlled program execution Reference The following links provide additional information: Application example for determining the response time for PROFINET (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21869080) Transmission times and isochronous mode in function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856); see also the section "Tips on assembly" Transmission times and isochronous mode in function manual PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V15 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193579); see also the section "Network settings" Delays at the input or output of the modules can be found in the manual for the respective device. Information on device-internal delays can be found in the manuals for the ET 200MP and ET 200SP distributed I/O systems. 3.5 Summary of response time with cyclic and time-controlled program execution Estimation of the shortest and longest response time The following formulas may be used to estimate the shortest and longest response time: Estimation of the shortest response time The shortest response time is the sum of: 1 x delay of the input/output module for inputs + 1 x (update PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP)*; (update time of the backplane bus for the ET 200SP CPUs) + 1 x transfer time of the process image input + 1 x execution of the user program + 1 x transfer time of the process image output + 1 x (update PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP)*; (update time of the backplane bus for the ET 200SP CPUs) + 1 x delay of the input/output module for outputs _________________________________________________________________________________ = Shortest response time * Time is dependent on the configuration and the extent of the network. The shortest response time is equivalent to the sum of the cycle time plus the input and output delay times. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 45 Cyclic program execution 3.5 Summary of response time with cyclic and time-controlled program execution Estimation of the longest response time The longest response time is the sum of: 1 x delay of the input/output module for inputs + 2 x (update PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP)*; (update time of the backplane bus for the ET 200SP CPUs) + 2 x transfer time of the process image input + 2 x execution of the user program + 2 x transfer time of the process image output + 2 x (update PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP)*; (update time of the backplane bus for the ET 200SP CPUs) + 1 x delay of the input/output module for outputs _________________________________________________________________________________ = Longest response time * Time is dependent on the configuration and the extent of the network. The longest response time is equivalent to the sum of twice the cycle time plus the delay times of the inputs and outputs. Twice the update time for PROFINET IO or twice the DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP is added to the longest response time. Cycle and response times 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Event-driven program execution 4.1 4 Response time of the CPUs when program execution is eventcontrolled Introduction Hardware interrupts are used to detect events in the process in the user program and to react to them with an appropriate program. In STEP 7, the organization blocks OB 40 to OB 47 are intended for processing hardware alarms. You can create additional hardware interrupts starting with organization block OB 123. The number of available organization blocks depends on the CPU used. Hardware interrupt A hardware interrupt is an interrupt that occurs during the running program execution, due to an interrupt-triggering process event. The operating system calls the assigned interrupt OB; as a result, the execution of the program cycle or of lower priority program parts is interrupted. A hardware interrupt OB is assigned to the "Hardware interrupt" event class. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 47 Event-driven program execution 4.1 Response time of the CPUs when program execution is event-controlled Interrupt response times of the CPUs for hardware interrupts The interrupt response time starts with the occurrence of a hardware interrupt event in the CPU. The interrupt response time ends with the start of processing of the assigned hardware interrupt OB. This time is subject to system-inherent fluctuations, and this is expressed using a minimum and maximum interrupt response time. The following table contains the length of the typical response times of the CPUs for hardware interrupts. Table 4- 1 Response times of the CPUs for hardware interrupts S7-1500 1511(F)-1 PN 1515(F)-2 PN 1517(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP 1511T(F)-1 PN 1515T(F)-2 PN 1517T(F)-3 PN/DP 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP 1511C-1 PN 1516(F)-3 PN/DP 1512C-1 PN 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP 1513(F)-1 PN Interrupt response times Min. 100 s 90 s 30 s 20 s Max. 400 s 360 s 120 s 90 s S7-1500R/H* in RUN-Solo system state 1513R-1 PN Interrupt response times 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN Min. 100 s 90 s 30 s Max. 400 s 360 s 120 s * Additional information about cycle and response times of R/H CPUs is available in the section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" ET 200SP Interrupt response times 1510SP(F)-1 PN 1512SP(F)-1 PN 1515SP(F)-PC Min. 100 s 100 s 90 s Max. 400 s 400 s 360 s ET 200pro 1516pro(F)-2 PN Interrupt response times Min. 90 s Max. 360 s The specified times are extended: If higher-priority interrupts are queued for execution If the hardware interrupt OB is assigned to a process image partition Cycle and response times 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Event-driven program execution 4.2 Process response time when program execution is event-driven You can find these times in the tables in the section "Extension due to nesting of higherpriority OBs and/or interrupts" in the chapter User program execution time (Page 31). If you need fast interrupt response times, do not assign a process image partition to the hardware interrupt OB and use direct access in the hardware interrupt OB. You can find additional information on determining response times for PROFINET in the application example with the entry ID 21869080 on the Service&Support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21869080) Internet page. Influence of input modules on the interrupt response times of hardware interrupts Digital input modules: Interrupt response time of hardware interrupts = internal interrupt processing time + input delay (see section Technical specifications in the relevant manual) Analog input modules: Interrupt response time of hardware interrupts = internal interrupt processing time + conversion time (see section Technical specifications in the relevant manual) Impact of communication on interrupts Communication tasks are always processed by the CPU with priority 15. If you do not want the interrupt execution to be delayed or interrupted by communication, configure the interrupt execution with priority > 15. The default setting for interrupt execution is priority 16. Special consideration when PROFINET IO communication is configured on the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) Additional information on this is available in section Special consideration when PROFINET IO communication is configured on the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2) (Page 38). 4.2 Process response time when program execution is event-driven When program execution is event-driven, the process response time is determined by the following: Delay times of the input and output modules used Update times for PROFIBUS/PROFINET for distributed modules; update time of the backplane bus for ET 200SP CPUs Interrupt response time of CPU Runtimes of the interrupt OB including update of the process image partition Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 49 Event-driven program execution 4.2 Process response time when program execution is event-driven The following figure shows the individual execution steps for event-driven program execution. Figure 4-1 Schematic representation of event-driven program execution Cycle and response times 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.1 5 Introduction CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system are designed as being redundant. The goal of the redundant configuration is to avoid production downtimes. When a CPU fails, the other CPU maintains control over the process. Compared to non-redundant CPUs, the CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system have the following special features: Longer cycle and response times Specific operating and system states Additional load and delays through synchronization Contents of this section This section describes the effects of the mode of operation of the S7-1500R/H redundant system on the cycle and response times. It also describes how to estimate and control the cycle response times of the CPUs. This prevents excessive cycle times. Note Classification of this chapter The statements in the previous chapters describe the response of an individual CPU. The section "Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system" supplements the information of the previous sections with information on the S7-1500R/H redundant system. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 51 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.2 Maximum cycle time and time errors 5.2 Maximum cycle time and time errors Maximum cycle time As with non-redundant CPUs, you can parameterize a high limit of the cyclic program by setting the maximum cycle time. The cycle time of redundant CPUs is usually longer as compared to non-redundant CPUs. The factor by which the cycle time for redundant CPUs is higher than that for non-redundant CPUs depends very strongly on your specific automation task. Note Maximum cycle time in SYNCUP system state The length of the parameterized maximum cycle time also affects the SYNCUP system state. If the following condition is fulfilled during the SYNCUP, the system initiates a transition to RUN-Redundant: The actual cycle time is 80% of the maximum cycle time over several cycles. More information on this is available in section Influences on the cycle time in SYNCUP system state (Page 55). Maximum cycle time in RUN-Redundant system state On the failure of one of the two CPUs, the cycle time also contains a dead time of up to 300 ms for R-CPUs and up to 50 ms for the H-CPU. You must schedule this time as cycle time reserve in case of failure of one of the two CPUs. Therefore, ensure that the longest cycle time plus this dead time is < 60% of the configured maximum cycle time in RUNRedundant system state. By doing so, you prevent the parameterized maximum cycle time from being exceeded in case of load fluctuations and delays due to synchronization. Cycle and response times 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Time error As with non-redundant CPUs, you can specify the response to a time error for the CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. In RUN-Solo system state, the redundant CPUs behave like non-redundant CPUs when the maximum cycle time is exceeded (see section Cycle time (Page 24)). In the SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant system states the redundant CPUs behave as follows: Behavior without OB 80 Without loaded OB 80 the backup CPU switches to STOP operating state after a maximum cycle time has been exceeded once in the same cycle. Note System state change after STOP without OB 80 The primary CPU also switches to STOP after the maximum cycle time has been exceeded twice in the same cycle. Behavior with OB 80 When OB 80 is loaded, the backup CPU switches to STOP operating state after the maximum cycle time has been exceeded twice in the same cycle. Note System state change after STOP with OB 80 The primary CPU also switches to STOP after the maximum cycle time has been exceeded three times in the same cycle. Ensure that the actual maximum cycle time is < 60% of the parameterized maximum cycle time. Switchover of the backup CPU to STOP operating state when the maximum cycle time is exceeded A switchover of the backup CPU to STOP operating state reduces the synchronization load and stabilizes the primary CPU. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 53 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3.1 Influences on the cycle time in RUN-Solo system state RUN-Solo system state In RUN-Solo system state, the primary CPU is in RUN operating state. The primary CPU executes the cyclic, time- and interrupt-controlled program execution on its own. The backup CPU is in STOP operating state, is switched off or defective. Influence on the cycle time In RUN-Solo system state, the primary CPU behaves exactly the same as a standard CPU (non-redundant CPU) with regard to cycle time monitoring. Additional information on this is available in section "Cycle time (Page 24)". Cycle and response times 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3.2 Influences on the cycle time in SYNCUP system state SYNCUP system state In SYNCUP system state, the primary CPU is in RUN-Syncup operating state. The backup CPU is in SYNCUP operating state. The task of the SYNCUP system state is to synchronize the data of both CPUs so that the CPUs can subsequently work redundantly. Influence on the cycle time The figure below shows the chronological behavior of primary CPU and backup CPU during the SYNCUP system state. Synchronization of data from the primary CPU to the backup CPU Copying the load memory and terminating the asynchronous instructions Snapshot of the work memory contents Transfer of the work memory contents to the backup CPU Backup CPU makes up the time lag to the primary CPU Figure 5-1 Effects of the SYNCUP on the cycle times of the CPUs Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 55 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system In SYNCUP system state, all relevant data is synchronized from the primary CPU to the backup CPU. At the end of SYNCUP, the backup CPU makes up the time lag to the primary CPU caused by the synchronization. CAUTION SYNCUP system state * The synchronization of data, in particular the snapshot of the work memory contents, extends the cycle time. In addition, no test and commissioning functions can be carried out during the SYNCUP. * During SYNCUP, hardware interrupts are processed with a very significant delay. * The cycle time increases greatly during the transition from SYNCUP system state to RUN-Redundant. Therefore, only execute the SYNCUP during uncritical process states. Synchronization of data from the primary CPU to the backup CPU During this phase all relevant contents of the load memory, work memory, and system memory of the primary CPU are synchronized to the backup CPU. Copying the load memory and terminating the asynchronous instructions The primary CPU copies parts of its load memory from its SIMATIC memory card to the SIMATIC memory card of the backup CPU. The backup CPU restarts and automatically switches to SYNCUP operating state. The backup CPU copies the transferred load memory contents to its work memory. Data blocks, process image, etc. are immediately overwritten with current data from the primary CPU. Snapshot of the work memory contents The primary CPU saves a consistent snapshot of its work memory contents at the next cycle control point. Transfer of work memory contents to the backup CPU During this phase the consistent snapshot is transferred from the primary CPU to the backup CPU. The transfer of the work memory contents extends the cycle time. The time required for the transfer of the work memory contents depends on the performance capability of the CPU and the amount of work memory data. Backup CPU makes up the time lag to the primary CPU During this phase the backup CPU makes up the time lag in program execution to the primary CPU. As in redundant mode, events are already synchronized during this phase as needed. Note No switchover possible during SYNCUP If a fault occurs in the primary CPU during SYNCUP, no switchover to the backup CPU is possible. The SYNCUP is canceled and the backup CPU returns to STOP operating state. Cycle and response times 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Switchover from SYNCUP to RUN-Redundant The system checks continuously which cycle time would result from a change to the RUNRedundant system state. If this cycle time would be 80% of the maximum cycle time over multiple cycles, the transition is initiated. Note Determination of the cycle time during the SYNCUP You can track the progress of the SYNCUP on the display of the primary CPU and backup CPU. At each cycle control point the backup CPU sends a status message on its program progress to the primary CPU. The display of the primary CPU indicates the duration of the time lag of the backup CPU. In addition to viewing the progress in the displays, the progress of the SYNCUP can also be read out using the "RT_INFO" instruction. Reasons for cancellation of the SYNCUP Possible causes for the cancellation of the SYNCUP are: The load of the user program or the load on the redundancy connections between primary and backup CPU is too high The maximum cycle time of the primary CPU was exceeded An overview of all reasons for the cancellation of the SYNCUP and remedial measures is available in the system manual S7-1500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833). Disable SYNCUP To avoid the described effects of the SYNCUP on the cycle times during critical process states, use the instruction "RH_CTRL". The "RH_CTRL" instruction can be used to disable the SYNCUP system state for the S7-1500R/H redundant system. If the disable is no longer required, the "RH_CTRL" instruction can be used to enable the SYNCUP system state once again. More information on the "RH_CTRL" instruction is available in the system manual S71500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 57 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Minimum cycle time It is often necessary to set a longer minimum cycle time for the CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system than for those of the non-redundant CPUs. Recommendation: Select the minimum cycle time so that the cyclic program does not have to be executed more frequently than your process requires. A longer minimum cycle time that has been adapted to your process optimizes the entire system. The computing power that is available per cycle by extending the minimum cycle time is then available for system tasks such as communication. Note Too low cycle times Cycle times that are too low can result in an excessive synchronization load and thus terminate the SYNCUP. Cycle and response times 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3.3 Influences on the cycle time in RUN-Redundant system state RUN-Redundant system state In RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU guides the process. The primary CPU continuously synchronizes itself with the backup CPU. In the event of a failure of the primary CPU, the backup CPU adopts its role and thus control over the process. Cycle time without interruption of the cyclic program In RUN-Redundant system state, the backup CPU has a time lag compared to the primary CPU. This time lag results from the time required for event-controlled synchronization of data from the primary CPU to the backup CPU. The following figure shows the phases which the CPUs run through without an interruption of the cyclic program. Cycle time Cycle of the backup CPU Time lag Cycle end and start of the next cycle (cycle control point) Figure 5-2 Cycle time without interruption of the cyclic program The cycle time includes the cycle of the backup CPU and the time lag of the backup CPU compared to the primary CPU. The time lag results from the time required for the synchronization of the data between primary CPU and backup CPU. The synchronization between primary CPU and backup CPU occurs automatically if required. The more data has to be synchronized between the CPUs during a cycle, the greater the time lag. The program cycle ends as soon as the backup CPU has reached the end of its cyclic program. The primary CPU starts the next cycle as soon as the backup CPU reports the cycle end to the primary CPU . Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 59 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Extension of the cycle As with non-redundant CPUs, an occurring event and the associated OB can extend the cycle. Events can occur both during the execution of the cyclic program and during the time lag. In the following example the CPU must process a higher-priority OB (OB 30 with priority 7), while the primary CPU waits for the end of the cycle of the backup CPU. The figure below shows the phases which the CPUs run through in such a case. Cycle time Cycle of the backup CPU Time lag Cycle end and start of the next cycle (cycle control point) Figure 5-3 Processing of a higher-priority OB Cycle and response times 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Execution of the cyclic program (CP with priority 1) is complete. While the primary CPU waits for the end of the cycle of the backup CPU, a higher priority OB (OB 30 with priority 7) starts. The primary CPU starts the next cycle as soon as the following conditions have been fulfilled: The primary CPU has received the message from the backup CPU that the backup CPU has finished processing the cyclic program. The primary CPU has processed OB 30 and updated PIPQ1. Note Due to the change of the run level and the synchronization, interruptions of the program cycle by higher-priority OBs result in a higher load. Interruptions of the program cycle extend the cycle time. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 61 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Differences between the synchronization times The available bandwidth has a significant impact on the synchronization time. With the R-CPUs both the synchronization of data and the synchronization of communication tasks operate over the PROFINET ring. 25% of the bandwidth is reserved for the synchronization. With the H-CPU, synchronization works independently of the PROFINET ring over fiber optic cables. The full bandwidth on the PROFINET cable is available for PROFINET IO communication. The table below provides an overview of performance features of R-CPUs and H-CPU. Table 5- 1 Performance features of S7-1500R and S7-1500H S7-1500R CPU 1513R-1 PN Performance Hardware S7-1500H CPU 1515R-2 PN * Data transfer rate of 100 Mbps (for synchronization and communication) * Data work memory: max. * 1.5 MB Data work memory: max. 3 MB * Code work memory: max. 300 KB Code work memory: max. 500 KB * CPU 1517H-3 PN * Significantly greater performance than S7-1500R due to - Separate redundancy connections over fiber-optic cables - Greater computing power * Transmission rate of 1 Gbps (for the synchronization) * Data work memory: max. 8 MB * Code work memory: max. 2 MB * The CPUs each have two optical interfaces. * The CPUs are identical in design with the respective S7-1500 standard versions. * The synchronization of the CPUs takes place over the * PROFINET ring. * The H-Sync-Forwarding function is recommended for all devices in the PROFINET ring. * Part of the bandwidth on the PROFINET cable is used to synchronize the CPUs. Less bandwidth is therefore available for PROFINET IO communication. * The synchronization of the CPUs operates independently of the PROFINET ring over fiber-optic cables. The full bandwidth on the PROFINET cable is available for PROFINET IO communication. Technical specifications More information about the technical specifications is available in the manuals of the specific CPUs. Cycle and response times 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3.4 Influences on the cycle time when a CPU fails If one of the two CPUs fails during redundant operation, the other CPU controls the process alone. If a CPU fails, the system state switches from RUN-Redundant to RUN-Solo. The CPU continues executing the user program in RUN operating state. Note Dead time in case of a CPU failure On the failure of a CPU, the cycle time also contains a dead time of up to 300 ms for R-CPUs and up to 50 ms for the H-CPU. You must schedule this time as cycle time reserve for a CPU failure. To avoid excessive cycle times after a CPU failure, further increase the maximum cycle time by this value. Note Change of the system state from RUN-Redundant to Run-Solo by the user If you deliberately trigger a change of the system state, e.g. by switching the backup CPU to STOP via the display, this will also extend the cycle time. However, the cycle time will not increase to the same extent as with switchover of the CPUs in the event of an error (failure of one of the CPUs). Information on the causes for the failure of a CPU is available in the S7-1500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 63 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Failure of the primary CPU The figure below shows the impact of the failure of the primary CPU on the cycle time. Cycle time Failure of the primary CPU Backup CPU continues processing the program Backup CPU no longer receives synchronization telegrams Backup CPU waits for the monitoring time to expire End of the monitoring time, switchover time and system state transition Cycle time of the new primary CPU in RUN operating state Figure 5-4 Impact of the failure of the primary CPU on the cycle time The example shows the failure of the primary CPU while it is processing the cyclic program. The primary CPU no longer sends any synchronization telegrams to the backup CPU. During the period , the backup CPU continues operating only on the basis of the synchronization data transferred before the failure of the primary CPU. At , the backup CPU has reached the point in the program where the primary CPU stopped sending synchronization telegrams. During the phase , the backup CPU waits to see whether data will again be sent from the primary CPU after all. Because the synchronization data is not transferred even after the monitoring time has expired, the backup CPU becomes the new primary CPU at point . The redundant system switches from RUN-Redundant system state to RUN-Solo system state. The cycle time extends from the time processing of the cyclic program is started in RUNRedundant to the time when processing of the cyclic program ends in RUN-Solo. Because data can no longer be synchronized in the RUN-Solo system state, the cycle time is shorter than the cycle time . Note Monitoring time The monitoring time is an internal time with fixed duration. You cannot assign parameters for the internal time. The monitoring time starts as soon as the synchronization data arrives at the backup CPU. If no synchronization data is received from the primary CPU, the system automatically performs a system state change after the monitoring time has expired. Cycle and response times 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.3 Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Failure of the backup CPU The figure below shows the impact of the failure of the backup CPU on the cycle time. Cycle time Failure of the backup CPU Expiration of the monitoring time System status transition Cycle time of the primary CPU in RUN-Solo operating state Figure 5-5 Impact of the failure of the backup CPU on the cycle time The backup CPU fails before processing of the cyclic program has ended . The primary CPU detects the failure of the backup CPU because no synchronization data has been received until the monitoring time has expired. The primary CPU terminates the synchronization with the backup CPU. The redundant system switches from RUNRedundant system state to RUN-Solo system state . Because no more data can be synchronized in RUN operating state, the cycle time is shorter than the cycle time . Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 65 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.4 Response time of R/H CPUs 5.4 Response time of R/H CPUs Relationship between the cycle time and response time The cycle time of the system also forms the basis for its response time. The response time depends, among other things, on the cycle time of the individual program cycles. Fluctuation of the response time The actual response time fluctuates between one and two cycles during cyclic program execution. The actual response time fluctuates between one and two cyclic interrupt cycles for time-controlled program execution. You should always assume the longest response time when configuring your system. In the figure below the process image is updated immediately after the change of the encoder signal. The output can therefore respond to the signal change after a cycle has ended. Synchronization of the encoder signal change in the backup CPU Time lag of the backup CPU to the primary CPU Synchronization of the output signal change in the backup CPU Time lag of the backup CPU to the primary CPU until actual output of the signal change to the IO devices in the PROFINET ring Figure 5-6 Shortest response time Cycle and response times 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.4 Response time of R/H CPUs In the figure below, the process image has already been updated by the time of the signal change. It therefore takes one cycle until the system detects the change and sets the input in the process image. The output signal is changed after an additional cycle. Synchronization of the encoder signal change in the backup CPU Time lag of the backup CPU to the primary CPU Synchronization of the output signal change in the backup CPU Time lag of the backup CPU to the primary CPU until actual output of the signal change to the IO devices in the PROFINET ring Figure 5-7 Longest response time The cycle times include the time lag. The time lag of the backup CPU to the primary CPU depends on the synchronization load. The synchronization load results from the data to be synchronized in the user program and in the communication. Note Effect of the time lag The synchronization and transfer of the changes requires computing time. The time lag therefore affects both CPUs (from the primary CPU to the backup CPU and from the backup CPU to the primary CPU). The slower the CPU and the slower and longer the synchronization connection, the greater the time lag. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 67 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.4 Response time of R/H CPUs Determination of cycle and response times At the end of the cyclic program, the primary CPU waits until the backup CPU too has acknowledged the end of the cyclic program. The cycle time of the primary CPU therefore also includes the time lag of the backup CPU. The cycle is extended by the time lag. Advantages The fact that the cycle time includes the time lag of the backup CPU to the primary CPU offers the following advantages: By monitoring the maximum cycle time in STEP 7, in the HMI or in the user program after SYNCUP, it is possible to determine the cycle time for a switchover of the CPUs in case of an error. Requirement: You have reset the maximum cycle time after the end of SYNCUP. During commissioning it is not necessary to perform complicated tests to determine whether the required response time can still be complied with if a CPU fails. During commissioning and ongoing operation you can estimate whether your automation task can meet the response times required for the process. The same functions as those for the non-redundant CPUs are available for determining the cycle and response times: Table 5- 2 Functions for determining the cycle and response times Function Additional information Defining the minimum cycle time and the maximum cycle time in STEP 7 Section Cycle time (Page 24) Defining the desired response of the user program if the maximum cycle time has been exceeded Reading out the cycle time statistics via STEP 7 and the display of the CPU Note that this function always shows the cycle time statistics from the primary CPU viewpoint, even when you go online via the backup CPU. Reading out the cycle time and reading out the progress in the SYNCUP system state with the instruction "RT_INFO" Display of measurements (traces) which record special time-critical signal characteristics Function manual Using the trace and logic analyzer functions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/en/64897128) Reading out the progress of the SYNCUP system state using the display of the CPU S7-1500R/H redundant system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/c s/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual Cycle and response times 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.5 Timetables for the RUN-Redundant system state 5.5 Timetables for the RUN-Redundant system state The following section describes the typical times of the CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system in the RUN-Redundant system state. Update times of the process image partitions The following table contains the times for estimating the typical update times of the process image partitions. Table 5- 3 Data for estimating the typical update time of the process image partitions Update times of the CPUs in the RUN-Redundant system state CPU 1513R-1 PN CPU 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN Basic load for updating process image partitions 63 s 57 s 13 s Copy time for distributed I/O via PROFINET 6.5 s/word 6.5 s/word 2.6 s/word A table of the update times of the CPUs in the RUN-Solo system state is available in section Update time for process image partitions (Page 28). Program execution time without interruptions The user program has a certain runtime without interruptions. The runtime depends on the number of operations that are executed in the user program. The following table contains the typical durations of operations. Table 5- 4 Duration of an operation Program execution times of the CPUs in RUN-Redundant system state CPU 1513R-1 PN CPU 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN Bit operations, typ. 80 ns 60 ns 4 ns Word operations, typ. 96 ns 72 ns 6 ns Fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 128 ns 96 ns 6 ns Floating-point arithmetic, typ. 512 ns 384 ns 24 ns A table of the program execution times of the CPUs in the RUN-Solo system state is available in section User program execution time (Page 31). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 69 Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.5 Timetables for the RUN-Redundant system state Extension due to nesting of higher-priority OBs and/or interrupts The interruption of a user program at the end of an instruction by a higher-priority OB causes a certain basic time expenditure. Take account of this basic time expenditure in addition to the update time of the assigned process image partitions and the execution time of the contained user program. The following tables contain the typical times for the various interrupts and error events. Table 5- 5 Basic time expenditure for an interrupt Basic time expenditure of the CPUs for an interrupt in the RUN-Redundant system state CPU 1513R-1 PN CPU 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN 560 s 430 s 70 s Time-of-day inter- 560 s rupt 430 s 70 s Time-delay interrupt 560 s 430 s 70 s Cyclic interrupt 560 s 430 s 70 s Hardware interrupt A table of the time expenditure of the CPUs for an interrupt in the RUN-Solo system state is available in section User program execution time (Page 31). Table 5- 6 Basic time expenditure for an error OB Basic time expenditure of the CPUs for an error OB in the RUN-Redundant system state CPU 1513R-1 PN CPU 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN Programming error 560 s 430 s 70 s I/O access error 560 s 430 s 70 s Time error 560 s 430 s 70 s Diagnostic interrupt 560 s 430 s 70 s Module failure/recovery 560 s 430 s 70 s Station failure/recovery 560 s 430 s 70 s A table with the basic time expenditure of the CPUs for an error OB in the RUN-Solo system state is available in section User program execution time (Page 31). Cycle and response times 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5.5 Timetables for the RUN-Redundant system state Accuracy of a cyclic interrupt Even if a cyclic interrupt is not delayed by a higher-priority OB or communication activities, the accuracy with which it is started is nevertheless subject to system-dependent fluctuations. The following table shows the accuracy with which a cyclic interrupt is triggered: Table 5- 7 Accuracy of cyclic interrupts Accuracy of cyclic interrupts of the CPUs in the RUN-Redundant system state Cyclic interrupt CPU 1513R-1 PN CPU 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN 5.8 ms 3.2 ms 1.6 ms A table with the accuracy of cyclic interrupts of the CPUs in the RUN-Solo system state is available in section Time-driven program execution in cyclic interrupts (Page 40). Interrupt response times for hardware interrupts The interrupt response times of the CPUs start with the occurrence of a hardware interrupt event in the CPU and end with the start of the assigned hardware interrupt OB. This time is subject to system-inherent fluctuations, and this is expressed using a minimum and maximum interrupt response time. The following table contains the length of the typical response times of the CPUs for hardware interrupts. Table 5- 8 Interrupt response times for hardware interrupts Interrupt response times of the CPUs for hardware interrupts in the RUN-Redundant system state Interrupt response times CPU 1513R-1 PN CPU 1515R-2 PN CPU 1517H-3 PN Min. 180 s 150 s 40 s Max. 1420 s 1360 s 470 s A table of the interrupt response times of the CPUs in the RUN-Solo system state is available in section Response time of the CPUs when program execution is event-controlled (Page 47). Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 71 Glossary Backup CPU Role of a CPU in the S7-1500R/H redundant system. If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU guides the process. The backup CPU processes the user program synchronously and can take over the process management if the primary CPU fails. Cycle time The cycle time represents the time a CPU requires to process the user program once. Data block Data blocks (DBs) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. The following data blocks exist: Global data blocks which you can access from all code blocks. Instance data blocks that are assigned to a specific FB call. Diagnostic interrupt See "Interrupt, diagnostic" Diagnostics Monitoring functions include: The detection, localization and classification of errors, faults and alarms. Displaying and further evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This increases the availability of systems by reducing commissioning times and downtimes. Diagnostics buffer The diagnostics buffer represents a backup memory in the CPU, used to store diagnostics events in their order of occurrence. Distributed I/O system System with I/O modules that are configured on a distributed basis, at a large distance from the CPU controlling them. Cycle and response times 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Glossary Firmware of the CPU In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between the firmware of the CPU and user programs. The firmware is a software embedded in electronic devices, which means it is permanently connected with the hardware functionally. It is usually saved in a flash memory, such as EPROM, EEPROM or ROM, and cannot be replaced by the user or only with special means or functions. User program: see glossary entry "User program" H-Sync Forwarding H-Sync Forwarding enables a PROFINET device with MRP to forward synchronization data (synchronization frames) only within the PROFINET ring. Through H-Sync Forwarding, the synchronization data is also forwarded during reconfiguration of the PROFINET ring. This reduces the cycle time utilization. H-Sync Forwarding is recommended for PROFINET devices that you use in the PROFINET ring of redundant S7-1500R systems. H-Sync Forwarding is not relevant for redundant S7-1500H systems. I/O module Device of the distributed I/O that is used as interface between the controller and the process. Interrupt The CPU's operating system distinguishes between various priority classes that control the execution of the user program. These priority classes include interrupts, such as hardware interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block. The required response is programmed in the organization block (for example, in an FB). Interrupt, cyclic The CPU generates a cyclic interrupt periodically within a parameterizable time grid and then processes the corresponding organization block. Interrupt, diagnostics Diagnostics-capable modules signal detected system errors to the CPU using diagnostic interrupts. Interrupt, hardware A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules due to a certain event in the process. The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. The CPU then processes the assigned organization block according to the priority of this interrupt. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 73 Glossary Interrupt, time-delay The time-delay interrupt is one of the program execution priority classes of SIMATIC S7. The time-delay interrupt is generated after the expiration of a timer started in the user program. The CPU then processes the corresponding organization block. Interrupt, time-of-day The time-of-day interrupt is one of the program execution priority classes of SIMATIC S7. The time-of-day interrupt is generated depending on a specific date and time. The CPU then processes the corresponding organization block. IO controller See "PROFINET IO controller" IO device See "PROFINET IO device" Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of a single CPU at a specific time. The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems have the STOP, STARTUP and RUN operating states. The primary CPU of the redundant system S7-1500R/H has the operating states STOP, STARTUP, RUN, RUN-Syncup and RUN-Redundant. The backup CPU has the operating states STOP, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. Organization block Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the CPU operating system and the user program. The organization blocks determine the order in which the user program is executed. Parameter Tag of a STEP 7 code block: Tag for setting the behavior of a module (one or more per module). In as-delivered state, every module has an appropriate basic setting, which you can change by configuring in STEP 7. There are static and dynamic parameters. Parameters, dynamic Dynamic parameters of modules can be changed during operation by calling an SFC in the user program, for example, limit values of an analog input module. Cycle and response times 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Glossary Parameters, static Static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the user program but only by the configuration in STEP 7, e.g. input delay of a digital input module. Primary CPU If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU guides the process. The backup CPU processes the user program synchronously and can take over the process management if the primary CPU fails. Process image (I/O) The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the start of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the process image output as a signal state to the output modules. The CPU then transfers the signal states of the input modules into the process image input. The CPU then executes the user program. PROFINET PROcess FIeld NETwork, open Industrial Ethernet standard which further develops PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation, and engineering model defined by PROFIBUS International e.V. as an automation standard. PROFINET IO Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the scope of PROFINET. PROFINET IO controller Device used to address connected I/O devices (e.g. distributed I/O systems). The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned I/O devices. The IO controller often corresponds to the CPU in which the automation program is running. PROFINET IO device Distributed field device that can be assigned to one or more IO controllers (e.g. distributed I/O system, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches). Redundancy connection The redundancy connection in an S7-1500R system is the PROFINET ring with MRP. The redundancy connection uses part of the bandwidth on the PROFINET cable to synchronize the CPUs, which means the bandwidth is not available for PROFINET IO communication. Contrary to S7-1500R, PROFINET ring and redundancy connection are separate in an S71500H. The two redundancy connections are fiber-optic cables which directly connect the CPUs to each other via synchronization modules. The bandwidth on the PROFINET cable is available for PROFINET IO communication. Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 75 Glossary Redundant systems Redundant systems are identified by the fact that important automation components are available in multiple units (redundant). If one redundant component fails, control of the process is maintained. Retentivity A memory area whose content is retained even after a power failure and after a transition from STOP to RUN is retentive. The non-retentive bit memory area, timers and counters are reset after a power failure and after a STOP-RUN transition. System states The system states of the S7-1500R/H redundant system result from the operating states of the primary and backup CPU. The term system state is used as a simplified expression that identifies the operating states of the two CPUs that occur at the same time. The S7-1500R/H redundant system features the STOP, STARTUP, RUN-Solo, SYNCUP and RUNRedundant system states. TIA Portal Totally Integrated Automation Portal The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation. The software optimizes all operating, machine and process sequences. Timers Timers are components of the CPU system memory. The operating system automatically updates the content of the "timer cells" asynchronously to the user program. STEP 7 instructions define the precise function of the timer cell (e.g. on-delay) and trigger its execution. User program In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between user programs and the firmware of the CPU. The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a system or process can be controlled. The user program is assigned to a programmable module (for example, CPU, FM) and can be structured in smaller units. Firmware: see glossary entry "Firmware of the CPU" Cycle and response times 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD Index C M Cycle Definition, 21 Cycle control point, 23 Cycle time Definition, 24 Different, 25 Process image partition, 28 Update, 28 Cycle time statistics, 27 Maximum cycle time, 26, 37, 52 Minimum cycle time, 22, 26, 58 O OB 80 Time error OB, 26 P D Dead time, 52, 63 E Execution Event-driven, 13 Time-driven, 13 F FAQ Total cycle time of a program, 35 Parameter Enable time error, 17 Event threshold for time error, 17 Events to be queued, 17 Report event overflow into diagnostic buffer, 17 Process image partitions, 14 Program execution, 13 Program execution in the cyclic program, 13 Program execution times Without interruption, 31 Program execution times of R/H CPUs Without interruption, 69 Program organization, 13 R H Hardware interrupts, 13, 47 I Instruction RE_TRIGR, 26 RT_Info, 27, 38, 38, 57, 68 RUNTIME, 32 Interrupt response times CPU, 48 R/H CPUs, 71 Interruptibility, 14 R/H CPUs Interrupt response times, 71 Response time Definition, 42 Response time of CPU, 42 Fluctuation, 42 Response time of R/H CPUs Fluctuation, 66 S Synchronization in RUN-Redundant system state, 59 in SYNCUP system state, 55 Cycle and response times Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD 77 Index T Time error OB OB 80, 26, 53 Times Basic expenditure for error OB, 34, 70 Basic expenditure for interrupts, 33, 70 Cyclic interrupts for S7-1500 CPUs, 41 Cyclic interrupts for S7-1500R/H-CPUs, 71 For one operation, 31, 34, 34, 35, 35, 70 U Update times Backplane bus ET 200SP CPUs, 44 PROFIBUS DP, 43 PROFINET IO, 43 S7-1500 CPUs, 29 S7-1500R/H-CPUs, 69 Cycle and response times 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461504-AD ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200SP, ET 200pro Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual 10/2018 A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive 2 ___________________ memory Memory usage and 3 ___________________ application examples 4 ___________________ SIMATIC memory card Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03461664-AC 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation describes the various memory areas of the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, the SIMATIC S7-1500-based CPU 1516pro-2 and the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and shows you how to optimally use these memory areas. In addition, this manual shows you how to reduce work memory utilization by using recipes and data logs. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the SIMATIC industrial automation system Knowledge about the use of computers Proficiency with STEP 7 Conventions STEP 7: in this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)" configuring and programming software. Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Scope of the documentation This documentation is valid for the central modules of the S7-1500 and ET 200SP systems and for the ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H do not support all the memory objects described in this function manual. The limitations of the redundant S7-1500R/H system are pointed out where appropriate in the manual. You can find a list of the unsupported functions in the Redundant System S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 3 Preface What's new in Edition 10/2018 compared to Edition 09/2016 What's new? Changed contents Scope of the function manual expanded to include the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information? The CPUs of the redundant system S71500R/H support the memory structure familiar from the S7-1500 automation system. * In the corresponding sections of the manual * System manual Redundant System S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.sie mens.com/cs/ww/en/view/1 09754833) Information on the particularities of the redundant S7-1500R/H system is provided where appropriate in the manual. What's new in Edition 09/2016 compared to Edition 01/2013 What's new? New contents What are the customer benefits? Analyzing memory requirements and memory usage * Memory requirements in load memory for downloading software changes Where can I find information? You have various options for analyzing the Section Memory requirements memory requirements and the memory and memory usage (Page 18) usage of the CPU: With STEP 7 * With the display of the CPU * With the web server of the CPU When loading software changes to the SIMATIC memory card, the files in question are only deleted after creation of the new files. For this reason, the CPU requires adequate free memory space on the SIMATIC memory card. Section Memory requirements for downloading software changes (Page 34) You have various options for creating memory space; these will be explained. Changed contents Service life of SIMATIC memory cards Using calculation examples of the service life of a SIMATIC memory card, you can estimate which SIMATIC memory card is required for your automation task. Section Service life of the SIMATIC memory card (Page 68) Scope of the function manual expanded to include the CPUs of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and the CPU 1516pro-2 PN Functions that you will be familiar with * from the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPUs are implemented in CPUs in other designs (ET 200SP) and in the CPU 1516pro-2 PN (degree of protection IP65, IP66 and * IP67). * Manual CPU 1510SP-1 PN (https://support.industry.sie mens.com/cs/ww/en/view/9 0157130) Manual CPU 1512SP-1 PN (https://support.industry.sie mens.com/cs/ww/en/view/9 0157013) Operating instructions CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.sie mens.com/cs/ww/en/view/1 09482416) Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Preface Recycling and disposal For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable regulations in your country. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 5 Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 8 2 Memory areas and retentive memory .................................................................................................... 13 3 4 2.1 2.1.1 Memory areas .........................................................................................................................13 Specifics of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H ................................................16 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage .............................................................................18 2.3 Retentive memory areas .........................................................................................................26 2.4 2.4.1 Summary of retentive behavior ...............................................................................................30 Retentive behavior of the memory objects .............................................................................30 2.5 Memory behavior when loading software changes ................................................................32 2.6 Memory requirements for downloading software changes .....................................................34 Memory usage and application examples .............................................................................................. 38 3.1 Memory usage for recipes ......................................................................................................38 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 Memory usage for data logging ..............................................................................................43 Overview of data logging ........................................................................................................43 Data structure of the data logs ................................................................................................45 Instructions for data logging ....................................................................................................46 Example program for data logging ..........................................................................................47 Calculation of the data log size ...............................................................................................53 SIMATIC memory card .......................................................................................................................... 57 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview .........................................................................................57 4.2 Setting the card type ...............................................................................................................64 4.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards ............................................................................65 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card...............................................................................68 4.5 Expanding the load memory of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H ..................73 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 74 Index..................................................................................................................................................... 80 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 7 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 8 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 9 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 11 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.1 2 Memory areas The automation data is located in the automation system in different memory areas. The offline data of the project created in STEP 7 is located on the hard disk of the programming device. The online data of the project is located in the load memory on the SIMATIC memory card. In addition, the work memory, retentive memory and other memory areas are located on the CPU. The following figure shows an overview of the memory areas of the CPUs: Figure 2-1 Memory areas Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 13 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.1 Memory areas Load memory Load memory is non-volatile memory for code blocks, data blocks, technology objects and the hardware configuration. This load memory is located on the SIMATIC memory card. STEP 7 transfers the project data from the programming device to the load memory. You can copy additional data (e.g. HMI backups and other files) to the SIMATIC memory card using the web server or Explorer. This data can then be found in the load memory on the SIMATIC memory card. Note An inserted SIMATIC memory card is required to operate the CPU. Load memory: CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP On these CPUs additional memory space is used in the load memory by: Linux runtime, which runs in parallel with the CPU runtime C/C++ runtime applications Files that are needed for C/C++ runtime applications CPU function libraries Note CPU runtime In the context of the CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and the CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP as well as the Open Development Kit (ODK), the term "CPU runtime" has the following meaning: The CPU runtime is the runtime environment in which a CPU runtime application can be executed. CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP run a Linux runtime in parallel with the CPU runtime. The Linux runtime is the runtime environment for applications that are executable in Linux, e.g. C/C++ runtime applications. For additional information on the CPUs, refer to the CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109749061) manual and the CPU 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109756478) product information. You can find information on creating C/C++ runtime applications in the SIMATIC S7-1500 ODK 1500S (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109752683) manual. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.1 Memory areas Work memory The work memory is volatile memory that contains the code and data blocks. The work memory is integrated into the CPU and cannot be extended. The work memory is only used in operation of the CPU. In the CPUs, the work memory is divided into two areas: Code work memory: The code work memory contains runtime-relevant parts of the program code. Data work memory: The data work memory contains the runtime-relevant parts of the data blocks and technology objects. Tags of global data blocks, instance data blocks and technology objects are initialized with their start values at the operating states changes below. Retentive tags receive their actual values saved in the retentive memory. - POWER ON STARTUP - STOP STARTUP Work memory of CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP Additional work memory is needed for use of the CPU function libraries and C/C++ runtime applications. Retentive memory The retentive memory is non-volatile memory for saving a limited amount of data in the event of power failure. The following actions delete certain memory objects of the retentive memory: Memory reset Reset to factory settings You can find an overview of the retentive behavior of the individual memory objects in section Retentive behavior of the memory objects (Page 30). You can find additional information on the memory reset and reset to factory settings functions in the following manuals: System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 15 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.1 Memory areas Additional memory areas Besides the memory areas that have been described for the user program and data, the CPU has additional memory areas available. The additional memory areas include the following: Process images Temporary local data The CPU-specific sizes can be found in the technical specifications for the respective CPU. 2.1.1 Specifics of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H The redundant system S7-1500R/H consists of two CPUs. A SIMATIC memory card must be inserted in each of the CPUs. During redundant operation, both CPUs execute the user program in parallel. In so doing, one CPU takes the role of the leading CPU (Primary CPU) and one CPU takes the role of the following CPU (Backup CPU). If one CPU fails, the second CPU maintains control over the process. Memory areas The two CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H have the same memory areas as the CPUs of non-redundant systems. You create the hardware configuration of the offline project data only once in STEP 7 STEP 7 loads the offline project data into the current primary CPU. The system synchronizes all data required for redundant operation from the primary CPU to the backup CPU. Both CPUs receive identical online project data. The online project data contains the hardware configuration of the H-system. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.1 Memory areas Particularities of the retentive memory Like for non-redundant CPUs, the retentive memory is a non-volatile memory. The retentive memory saves a limited amount of data in the event of power failure. Each of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H has its own retentive memory. If one of the CPUs changes to POWER OFF and the second CPU is still in RUN, the retentive data of the CPU in RUN continues to be updated. If the remaining CPU also goes from RUN to POWER OFF, the retentive memory of this CPU contains the most up-to-date retentive data. Note the following for when you switch the CPUs back to RUN afterwards. Note Characteristics of retentive data after a STOP or POWER OFF of both CPUs After a STOP or POWER OFF of both CPUs, switch the CPU with the more up-to-date data to RUN first. The more up-to-date data is located in the CPU that controlled the process before STOP or POWER OFF. This procedure gives you certainty that you are using the most up-to-date retentive data. The precondition for this is that you did not change any data using STEP 7 or the HMI while the CPUs were in STOP. Redundancy ID Unlike in a non-redundant CPU, an additional memory object is contained in the retentive memory of the respective redundant CPU. Each CPU saves its respective redundancy ID in this memory object. The redundancy IDs can assume the values 1 and 2. Different redundancy IDs are required for redundant operation in order to clearly identify the CPUs and assign the project data to the respective CPUs. For additional information on redundancy IDs of the CPUs, refer to the Redundant System S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual. You can find an overview of the retentive behavior of the individual memory objects in section Retentive behavior of the memory objects (Page 30). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 17 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage You can access information regarding the memory areas of the CPUs in the following ways depending on product family used: Product family Information regarding the memory areas of the CPU is accessible via: STEP 7 Web server Display S7-1500 S7-1500R/H -- ET 200SP -- ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN -- Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage Memory requirements of the program in the offline project During creation or modification of a project, the display of memory utilization in STEP 7 shows you the size of the project in the following memories: Load memory Work memory Retentive memory You can find this information for the CPU under "Program info" in the project tree, "Resources" tab. Total size of the memory areas of the respective CPU project (in the figure below line "Total:") Memory requirements of the program elements (blocks, data types, objects for motion technology and PLC tags) Memory amounts in the respective memory area of the offline project (in figure below, line "Used:") Used inputs and outputs The following figure shows an overview of the utilization of the various memory areas of the "Resources" tab: Figure 2-2 Display of the utilization of the various memory areas Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 19 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage For a CPU, you can select the total size of the load memory in a drop-down list. Select the size of the load memory in accordance with the size of the SIMATIC memory card you are using. The percentage shown in the Load memory column depends on the selected size of the load memory. As soon as the memory size exceeds the size of the load memory of the memory card you are using, the sizes indicated turn red. Note Determination of the memory utilization Note that the SIMATIC memory card also contains data other than the user program that you cannot determine using "Resources". This data includes: * Hardware configuration * Recipes, data logs and HMI backups (not supported for S7-1500R/H) * Non-SIMATIC files, such as PDF, etc. Therefore, the drop-down list with the size of your SIMATIC memory card only serves as a visual orientation aid. Also refer to the FAQ "How do you estimate the memory requirements of your project in the load memory of a SIMATIC S7-1500" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/97553417). Note Display of the memory utilization under "Program info" The display of the memory utilization in the program information is an offline display in STEP 7 and only shows the memory requirements of the program in the project. The program on the memory card of the CPU may differ, however, e.g. if the program: * is more up to date * contains blocks generated by other projects * contains blocks generated on the CPU Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage Data on the SIMATIC memory card In addition to the program and the associated program elements (blocks, data types, objects for motion control and PLC tags), the following data is also stored on the memory card: Hardware configuration Project information Force jobs Trace recordings (not supported for S7-1500R/H) Symbols and comments The following further data may also be found on the memory card: Recipes, data logs and HMI backups (not supported for S7-1500R/H) Non-SIMATIC files that were copied to the memory card via the web server of the CPU or offline in Explorer (e.g. PDF files etc.) Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 21 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage Display of the memory utilization in STEP 7 In online mode, the online function "Memory" provides you with the following up-to-date memory information: Size of the total free and already allocated load memory on the SIMATIC memory card. Size of the total free and already allocated work memory, separated by code and data. Size of the total free and already allocated retentive memory. The online function "Memory" can be found in Online & Diagnostics under "Diagnostics > Memory". You can access the functions under Online & Diagnostics in various ways: In the project tree under each configured CPU. In the project tree under Online access > Accessible devices, in order to display the memory utilization of CPUs that were not configured in the project. In all views of the device configuration (topology view, network view, device view) by selecting a CPU with the right mouse button. Figure 2-3 "Memory" online function Note Fill levels of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H The CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H can have CPU-specific fill levels in nonredundant operation. The fill levels of the load memory of the CPUs can differ in redundant operation and nonredundant operation (e.g. due to stored PDF files or SIMATIC memory cards of different sizes). You can have the memory utilization of both CPU 1 and CPU 2 displayed in STEP 7. Alternatively to the "Memory" online function, you will also find a display of the current memory functions on the "Online tools" task card in the "Memory" section. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage Display of the memory utilization on the display of the CPU To obtain information about the available memory via the display, proceed as follows: Select the "Diagnostics" menu on the display with the help of the arrow keys. Select the "Used memory" command from the "Diagnostics" menu. Under the "Used memory" menu item, you can find information about the utilization of the various memory areas (see following figure). Note that the memory usage is a snapshot of the memory used at the time of the request and is not continuously updated. To find out details about the respective memory areas (e.g. code work memory), select the required memory area with the help of the arrow keys (see following figure). In the detail view, e.g. of the code work memory, the display provides you with the following information: Memory space which is still available in the code work memory. Memory space which is already allocated in the code work memory. Total available memory space in the code work memory. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 23 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage Note Display of the memory utilization of redundant system S7-1500R/H in non-redundant operation The CPU displays indicate the local memory utilization of the respective CPU. Display of the memory utilization of redundant system S7-1500R/H in redundant operation Irrespective of the sizes of the inserted SIMATIC memory cards, both CPU displays indicate the same (synchronized) fill level. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.2 Memory requirements and memory usage Display of the memory usage in the Web server On the Web server, you can find information about the current usage of the individual memory areas on the Web page "Diagnostics" in the "Memory" tab. Detailed information about the use of the Web server can be found in the S7-1500 Web server (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193560) function manual. Figure 2-4 Display of the memory usage in the Web server Note Redundant system S7-1500R/H The web server is not supported by the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 25 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.3 Retentive memory areas 2.3 Retentive memory areas Introduction The CPUs have a memory for storing retentive data at POWER OFF. You can find the size of the retentive memory in the technical specifications of the respective CPU. You can find the utilization of the retentive memory of the configured CPU in STEP 7 offline under "Program info > Resources" or online under Online & diagnostics with "Diagnostics > Memory". If you define data as retentive, its content is retained for the startup of a program after STOP or a power failure. You can define the following data and objects as retentive: Tags of global data blocks Tags of instance data blocks of a function block Bit memories, timers and counters Tags of technology objects are retentive, e.g. calibration values of absolute encoders. STEP 7 manages the retentivity of the technology object tags automatically. Hence, you do not have to configure retentivity. The retentive tags of technology objects are unaffected by a memory reset. You can delete these retentive tags only by a reset to factory settings. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.3 Retentive memory areas Tags of a global data block In a global data block, you can define either individual tags from a block or all of its tags collectively as retentive, depending on the setting for the "Optimized block access" attribute: "Optimized block access" activated: In the declaration table of the data block, you can define individual tags as retentive. Figure 2-5 Retentivity setting "Optimized block access" activated "Optimized block access" not activated: In the declaration table of the data block, you can only define the retentivity of all tags collectively. Figure 2-6 Retentivity setting "Optimized block access" not activated You can find additional information on optimized and non-optimized data blocks in the Programming guideline for S7-1200/S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/90885040/en). Tags of an instance data block of a function block You can define the tags of the instance data block of a function block as retentive in STEP 7. Depending on the setting for the "Optimized block access" attribute, you can define retentivity either for individual tags from a block or for all of its tags collectively: "Optimized block access" activated: In the interface of the function block, you can define individual tags as retentive. "Optimized block access" not activated: In the instance data block, you can only define the retentivity of all tags collectively. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 27 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.3 Retentive memory areas Creation of a data block in the user program The instruction "CREATE_DB" is used to create a new data block in the load and/or work memory. For data blocks which you create in the load memory, depending on the selection for the ATTRIB parameter, the generated data block either has the property "retentive" or the property "non-retentive". Setting the retentivity for individual tags is not possible here. The "Optimized block access" attribute is disabled. You can find additional information on the "CREATE_DB" instruction in the STEP 7 online help under "Programming a PLC > Instructions > Extended instructions > Data block control > CREATE_DB: Create data block". Note Redundant S7-1500R/H system The "CREATE_DB" instruction is not supported by the CPUs of the redundant system S71500R/H. Tags of technology objects Tags of technology objects are retentive, e.g. calibration values of absolute encoders. STEP 7 manages the retentivity of the technology object tags automatically. Hence, you do not have to configure retentivity. The retentive tags of technology objects are unaffected by a memory reset. They can be deleted only by a reset to factory settings. Note Redundant S7-1500R/H system Technology objects are not supported by the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.3 Retentive memory areas Bit memories, timers and counters You can define the number of retentive bit memories, timers and counters in STEP 7 in the PLC tag table using the "Retain" button. Figure 2-7 Definition of the number of retentive bit memories, timers and counters (beginning at 0, continuing without gaps) using the "Retain" button Reference You can find additional information on setting the retentivity in the STEP 7 online help. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 29 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.4 Summary of retentive behavior 2.4 Summary of retentive behavior 2.4.1 Retentive behavior of the memory objects This section gives an overview of the retentive behavior of the memory objects of the CPUs. In addition to the retentive memory areas described, there are other objects with retentive characteristics, for example, the diagnostics buffer. These objects do not occupy any storage space in the retentive memory. The following table shows the retentive behavior of the memory objects in the case of the following: STOP STARTUP POWER ON STARTUP POWER ON STOP "Memory reset" "Reset to factory settings" Table 2- 1 Retentive behavior of the memory objects Memory object STOP STARTUP Memory reset Reset to factory settings Can be set in the properties of the DB in STEP 7 1) - - Bit memories, timers and counters - configured as retentive x - - Bit memories, timers and counters - configured as non-retentive - - - Retentive tags of technology objects (e.g. calibration values of absolute encoders) 2) x x - Diagnostic buffer entries x x - Operating hours counter x x - Clock time x x - x x - POWER ON STARTUP POWER ON STOP Actual values of the data blocks, instance data blocks Redundancy ID 3) x = content is retained - = object is initialized 1) For DBs with optimized access the retentive behavior is configurable for specific tags. 2) Not for the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H 3) Only for the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.4 Summary of retentive behavior Diagnostics buffer The 500 most recent entries in the diagnostics buffer are retained after power failure and are not affected by a memory reset. The diagnostics buffer can be cleared only by a reset to factory settings. The entries in the diagnostics buffer do not occupy any memory space in the retentive memory. Operating hours counter The operating hours counters of the CPUs are retentive and are not affected by a memory reset. By resetting to factory settings, the operating hours counters are set to zero. Clock time The clock time of the CPUs is retentive and is not affected by a memory reset. By resetting to factory settings, the clock time is reset. Reference You can find additional information on the memory reset and reset to factory settings functions in the following manuals: System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) System manual Redundant System S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 31 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.5 Memory behavior when loading software changes 2.5 Memory behavior when loading software changes Introduction You can download software changes in STOP and RUN without affecting the actual values of previously loaded tags. You load changes to the software in STEP 7 (in the project tree and with selected PLC station) under "Download to device > Software (only changes)". Note Redundant system S7-1500R/H The CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H permit the downloading of software changes only in the STOP or RUN-Solo system state. Impact of software changes on PLC tags You can load the following software changes without affecting the actual values of PLC tags that have already been loaded: Name change Comment change Addition of new tags Deletion of tags Change of retentivity settings for Retentive memory areas (Page 26) The actual values are affected by loading the following software changes: Data type change Address change Memory reserve of global DBs and instance DBs Each function block or data block with the "Optimized block access" attribute activated contains, by default, a memory reserve which you can use for subsequent interface changes. The memory reserve is initially not used. When you have compiled and loaded the block, and then observe that you want to reload interface changes, activate the memory reserve. All tags that you subsequently declare will be placed in the memory reserve. During the next load, the new tags are then initialized to their start values. Tags which have already been loaded are not reinitialized. The setting of the memory reserve can be found in STEP 7 under the data block properties in the "Download without reinitialization" category. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.5 Memory behavior when loading software changes Impacts of software changes on data blocks without memory reserve If you are not using memory reserve, you can load the following software changes without this reinitializing the actual values of DB tags that have already been loaded: Change of start value Comment change Impacts of software changes on data blocks with memory reserve If you are using the memory reserve for data blocks ("Optimized block access" attribute and "Enable download without reinitialization for retentive tags" button selected), you can load the following software changes. The actual values of previously downloaded DB tags are not reinitialized by this. Change of start value Comment change Addition of new tags If the button "Enable download without reinitialization for retentive tags" is deactivated, then all actual values of the data block are reinitialized on the next loading of the following software changes: Name change Data type change Retentivity change Deletion of tags Changes to the memory reserve settings Reference You can find additional information on setting and activating the memory reserve and on downloading block changes in the STEP 7 online help under "Programming a PLC > Compiling and downloading PLC programs > Downloading blocks for S7-1200/1500 > Loading block extensions without reinitialization". Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 33 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.6 Memory requirements for downloading software changes 2.6 Memory requirements for downloading software changes Memory requirements in RUN state For the consistent and atomic execution of the complete download operation, the CPU requires adequate free memory space in the work memory and on the SIMATIC memory card. The files affected by loading the software changes to the CPU are only deleted after the new files have been created. This SIMATIC memory card therefore requires free memory space corresponding approximately to the space required for all program objects to be loaded on the memory card. If this amount of memory is not available on your SIMATIC memory card, the following message is displayed in STEP 7 during the download operation to the CPU: "There is insufficient memory on the memory card for this amount of data." In order to still enable the loading of changes to the CPU in such a case, we recommend one or more of the following options: Download in RUN state - Delete any files no longer required (e.g. CSV files, panel backups, etc.) on the memory card using the Web server. - Preferably, you should download extensive changes in RUN state in multiple steps or perform the download after each change step. Download in STOP state - If downloading in several steps is not possible, load extensive changes in STOP state. Note that when loading in STOP state, the actual values of non-retentive data are not initialized. Use a larger memory card - In order to perform extensive downloads in RUN state of the CPU in the future, use a larger memory card. A description of how to change the memory card can be found in the section "Changing the memory card without loss of retentive data". Impact of minor program changes on the load procedure Under the objects of a program, there are dependencies, e.g. Of code blocks to called code blocks Of code blocks to data blocks Of data blocks to data types (PLC data types, FB types) This means that the load procedure for a minor change may be very time-consuming if the change affects a large number of dependent objects. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.6 Memory requirements for downloading software changes Example: A STEP 7 program contains an organization block (OB), 20 functions (FC) and a data block (DB). The OB calls the 20 FCs. All the FCs access the DB. If you change the program code in one of the FCs, the following load procedure only contains the changed FC. If you change the data type of a tag in the DB, however, the following load procedure then contains all the FCs and the DB. The following figure shows the objects in the load procedure in a preview. Figure 2-8 Preview for loading Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 35 Memory areas and retentive memory 2.6 Memory requirements for downloading software changes To find the interdependencies of the individual objects, double-click "Program info" in the project tree. Change to the "Dependency structure" tab in the "Program info" dialog. Figure 2-9 Dependency structure Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory areas and retentive memory 2.6 Memory requirements for downloading software changes Memory requirements in STOP state Even when downloading in STOP state, a certain amount of reserve memory is required, because your CPU needs sufficient free memory on the memory card for consistent downloading of individual data blocks. The files affected by loading the data blocks are only deleted after the new files have been created. Therefore, for the modifications you must have available at least the memory requirement of the largest data block. If insufficient reserve memory is available on your SIMATIC memory card when loading in STOP state, the following message is displayed in STEP 7 during the download to the CPU: "There is insufficient memory on the memory card for this amount of data." In order to still enable the loading of changes to the CPU in such a case, we recommend one or more of the following options: Delete any files no longer required (e.g. CSV files, panel backups, etc.) from the memory card using the Web server. Use a larger memory card. A description of how to change the memory card can be found in the section "Changing the memory card without loss of retentive data". Note Please note that retentive data and possibly also project data is lost with the following three options. Therefore only use the following options described if the two options described previously did not lead to the desired result. In STEP 7, download your program to the CPU with menu command "Online > Download and reset PLC program". Remove the memory card from the slot of the CPU. Delete the content that is longer needed from the memory card with your programming device. Delete the entire contents, e.g. by formatting the memory card. A description of how to format the memory card can be found in the section "Formatting a SIMATIC memory card". Note also the following FAQs: "When downloading to the S7-1500 CPU, why is the message "There is insufficient memory on the memory card for this amount of data" displayed although there is still enough memory available?" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/107108015). "Why can you not load the project data into the load memory of the S7-1500 CPU when the number of alarms and messages is too large?" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751485). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 37 3 Memory usage and application examples 3.1 Memory usage for recipes Introduction A recipe is a collection of parameter sets with the same structure. These recipe data records are located in a non-runtime-relevant data block in the load memory, and do not occupy any storage space in the work memory. You have the option of reading individual recipe data records into a data block in the work memory and accessing the data in the user program. You can write a recipe data record that has been changed in the user program back to the recipe data block. For example, recipes contain the related data of a particular batch in production. You can export recipe data records of a recipe DB as a csv file. A web browser can read data via the web server of the CPU, even when the CPU is in STOP state. You can also directly access the data of the SIMATIC memory card using a card reader on the programming device. Note Redundant S7-1500R/H system Recipes are not supported by the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.1 Memory usage for recipes Processing sequence Storing the recipe in the load memory STEP 7 fills the individual data records of a recipe into a non-runtime-relevant DB and downloads the DB to the CPU. In order to configure a non-runtime-relevant DB, you must enable the "Only store in load memory" block attribute. The recipes then only use memory space in the load memory and not in the work memory. Working with recipe data in the user program You use the "READ_DBL" instruction to copy a data record of the current recipe from the DB in the load memory to a runtime-relevant DB in the work memory. As a result, the work memory only has to accommodate the data for the currently required recipe data record. The user program can now access the data of the current data record. Saving back changed recipe data records The "WRIT_DBL" instruction writes new or changed data records of a recipe from the user program back to the load memory. The data written to the load memory is portable and not affected by a memory reset. To back up changed data records (recipes), you must upload the data blocks and back them up on the PG/PC. You can find information on uploading data blocks in the STEP 7 online help under "Programming a PLC > Compiling and downloading blocks > Downloading blocks for S7-1200/1500 > Uploading blocks from a memory card". Figure 3-1 Processing sequence with "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL" Also note the FAQ "How do you configure data blocks with the "Only store in load memory" attribute for the S7-1200/S7-1500? " in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/53034113). Note Instructions that access the SIMATIC memory card have a lower performance than instructions that access the work memory. The associated blocks (e.g. READ_DBL and WRIT_DBL) are therefore asynchronous. Their execution extends if necessary over several cycles. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 39 Memory usage and application examples 3.1 Memory usage for recipes NOTICE Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Only a limited number of delete and write operations are possible on the SIMATIC memory card. After expiration of the service life, there is a risk that the card can no longer be used. Therefore, use a SIMATIC memory card with sufficient memory for your particular purposes. Additional information on the service life of the SIMATIC memory card can be found in the section Service life of the SIMATIC memory card (Page 68). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.1 Memory usage for recipes Import and export of recipe data You have the option of exporting recipe data records of a recipe DB as a CSV file, and importing them from a CSV file into a DB. The CSV file is located in the "\recipes" directory on the SIMATIC memory card. You can open and process this file further with a spreadsheet program, e.g. Microsoft Excel. You can easily work with CSV files on the SIMATIC memory card via the web server of the CPU (e.g. rename, save to hard disk, delete, etc.). To avoid undesired manipulation, set access rights for the web server in STEP 7. You can find additional information on the Web server in the Web Server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) function manual. Export of recipe data The "RecipeExport" instruction exports all the recipe data records of a recipe DB from the load memory to a CSV file on the SIMATIC memory card. The CSV file has the same name as the recipe of the DB. The CSV file is stored in the "\recipes" directory on the SIMATIC memory card. The "RecipeExport" instruction only exports valid and unencrypted recipe data records. Import of recipe data The "RecipeImport" instruction imports all recipe data records from the CSV file into the recipe DB in the load memory. The name of the CSV file must match the name of the recipe DB. Figure 3-2 Import and export of recipe data Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 41 Memory usage and application examples 3.1 Memory usage for recipes Note Asynchronous instructions Please note that the "RecipeExport" and "RecipeImport" instructions are asynchronous instructions. In contrast to synchronous instructions, this means the execution of an asynchronous instruction can extend over multiple calls before execution is completed. The CPU processes asynchronous instructions in parallel with the cyclic user program. A CPU can process several asynchronous instruction jobs in parallel. The CPU can process a maximum of 10 jobs of the instructions listed in parallel. You can find additional information about asynchronous instructions in the following manuals: * System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) * System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) * Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) Reference You can find additional information on the instructions for recipes in the STEP 7 online help under "Programming a PLC > Instructions > Instructions (S7-1200, S7-1500) > Extended instructions > Recipes and data logging > Recipe functions". Note also FAQ "Using recipe functions for persistent data with SIMATIC S7-1200 and S7 1500" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479727). Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging 3.2 Memory usage for data logging 3.2.1 Overview of data logging With data logging, you save selected process values from the user program in a file, the data log. The data logs are saved on the SIMATIC memory card in csv format and stored in the "\datalogs" directory. A web browser can read data via the web server of the CPU, even when the CPU is in STOP state. You can also directly access the data of the SIMATIC memory card using a card reader on the programming device. NOTICE Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Only a limited number of delete and write operations are possible on the SIMATIC memory card. Cyclic write operations to the SIMATIC memory card by the user program reduce the service life of the SIMATIC memory card. After expiration of the service life, there is a risk that the card can no longer be used. Therefore, use a SIMATIC memory card with sufficient memory for your particular purposes. Information on the service life of the SIMATIC memory card can be found in the section Service life of the SIMATIC memory card (Page 68). The "data logging" instructions may be used in your program to create, open, write, and close data logs. You decide which tags are logged by creating a data block that defines a single data log data record. Your data block is used as temporary storage for a new data log data record. New current values for the tags must be transferred into the data block during runtime by means of user program instructions. If all tag values have been updated, you can execute the "DataLogWrite" instruction, in order to transfer data from the data block into the data log. You manage your data logs with the integrated web server. You can download data logs from the standard "File Browser" website. After you have transferred a data log to your PC, you can analyze the data using popular spreadsheet programs, e.g. Microsoft Excel. Note Redundant system S7-1500R/H Data logging is not supported by the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 43 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging The following figure shows the basic sequence for creating a data log: Figure 3-3 Basic sequence during the creation of a data log Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging 3.2.2 Data structure of the data logs Introduction You use the "DataLogCreate" instruction to create a data log in STEP 7. The NAME parameter assigns the data log a name. The DATA and HEADER parameters specify the data type of all data elements in a data log data record, and the header line of the data log. The RECORDS parameter indicates the maximum number of records in the data log. NAME parameter for the "DataLogCreate" instruction You use the NAME parameter to assign a name for the data log. This is the name under which the data log is saved in the "\datalogs" directory of the SIMATIC memory card. DATA parameter for the "DataLogCreate" instruction The DATA block parameter specifies the structure of the data log's records. The columns and data types of a data record in the data log are determined by the elements of the structure declaration or array declaration of this data buffer. Each element of a structure or array corresponds to a column in a row in the data log. HEADER parameter for the "DataLogCreate" instruction Using the HEADER block parameter, you can assign a heading in the header row to each column in the data log. RECORDS parameter for the "DataLogCreate" instruction The RECORDS parameter specifies the maximum number of records that can be stored in a data log. When the specified maximum number of data records in a data log is reached, the next write operation overwrites the oldest data record. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 45 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging 3.2.3 Instructions for data logging Overview The following table gives an overview of the instructions for data logging. You will find the data logging instructions in "STEP 7" in the "Instructions" task card, under "Extended instructions > Recipe and data logging > Data Logging". Table 3- 1 Overview of the data logging instructions Name of the instruction Description "DataLogCreate": Create data log With the "DataLogCreate" instruction you create a data log. The data log is saved on the SIMATIC memory card in the "\datalogs" directory. You can use the data logging instructions to save process data. The amount of data in a data log depends on the available memory space on the SIMATIC memory card. "DataLogOpen": Open data log With the "DataLogOpen" instruction, you open an existing data log on the SIMATIC memory card. A data log must be open before you can write new data records to it. The data log opens automatically when the "DataLogCreate" and "DataLogNewFile" instructions are executed. A maximum of 10 data logs can be open at any one time. The data log to be opened can be selected using the ID or name of the data log. The maximum file size of data logs is 2 GB. A maximum number of 1000 data log files is possible with firmware version V2.0. "DataLogWrite": Write data log With the "DataLogWrite" instruction you write a data record into an existing data log. Use the ID parameter to select the data log to which the data record is to be written. To write a new data record, the data log must be open. "DataLogClose": Close data log With the "DataLogClose" instruction, you close an open data log. You select the data log using the ID parameter. When the CPU changes to STOP state, all open data logs are closed. "DataLogNewFile": Data log in new file With the "DataLogNewFile" instruction you create a new data log. The new data log has the same properties as an already existing data log. By creating a new data log, you prevent cyclic overwriting of existing data records. When the instruction is called it creates a new data log on the SIMATIC memory card using the name defined in the NAME parameter. You use the ID parameter to specify the ID of the old data log whose properties you want to apply to the new data log. The ID parameter then outputs the ID of the new data log. "DataLogClear": Empty data log The "DataLogClear" instruction deletes all data records in an existing data log. The header of the data log is not deleted (see description of parameter Data structure of the data logs (Page 45)). "DataLogDelete": Delete data log The "DataLogDelete" instruction is used to delete a data log from the SIMATIC memory card. Select the data log to be deleted using the NAME and ID parameters. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Note Asynchronous instructions Note that the instructions in the table are asynchronous instructions. In contrast to synchronous instructions, this means the execution of an asynchronous instruction can extend over multiple calls before execution is completed. The CPU processes asynchronous instructions in parallel with the cyclic user program. A CPU can process several asynchronous instruction jobs in parallel. The CPU can process a maximum of 10 jobs of the instructions listed in the table in parallel. You can find additional information about asynchronous instructions in the following manuals: * System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) * System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) * Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) 3.2.4 Example program for data logging This example program shows the storing of process values for counter content, temperature, and pressure in a data log. The example shows the basic functioning of the instructions for data logs. The complete program logic is not shown. Note General use of data logs * Data logs are automatically opened after execution of the "DataLogCreate" and "DataLogNewFile" instructions. * Data logs are automatically closed at a change of the CPU from RUN to STOP or a restart of the CPU. * A data log must be open so that data can be written to the data log with the "DataLogWrite" instruction. * A maximum of 10 data logs can be open at any one time, even when more than 10 data logs exist. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 47 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Tags of the data block The following figure shows the tags of the "My_Datalog_Vars" data block. These tags are used by the "Data logging" instructions "DataLogCreate" and "DataLogNewFile". The "MyDataLogName" and "MyNEWDataLogName" tags are called in the NAME block parameter, and give the data logs a name. The "MyData" structure is called in the DATA block parameter and specifies the structure of the csv file. The three MyData tags temporarily store new values. The tag values at these DB addresses are transferred to a data log using the "DataLogWrite" instruction. The "MyDataLogHeaders" tag is called in the HEADER block parameter and specifies a header for the data log. Figure 3-4 Declaration table with the data block's tags Network 1 A rising edge at REQ starts the creation of the data log. Figure 3-5 Network 1 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Network 2 Detect the output DONE of "DataLogCreate", because after the execution of "DataLogCreate" it is only set to 1 for one cycle. Figure 3-6 Network 2 Network 3 A rising edge triggers the point in time at which new process values are stored in the MyData structure. Figure 3-7 Network 3 Network 4 The state of the input EN is based on the point in time at which the execution of "DataLogCreate" was completed. One execution of "DataLogCreate" extends over multiple cycles, and must be completed before a write operation is executed. The rising edge at input REQ is the event that triggers an activated write operation. Figure 3-8 Network 4 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 49 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Network 5 Close the data log after the last data record has been written. After execution of the "DataLogWrite" instruction, which writes the last data record, the STATUS output is set to "1". Figure 3-9 Network 5 Network 6 A rising edge at the input REQ of the instruction "DataLogOpen" simulates that the user presses a button on an HMI device, which opens a data log. If you open a data log in which all records are occupied by process data, then the next execution of the "DataLogWrite" instruction overwrites the oldest data record. You can however also preserve the old data log, and create a new data log instead. This is shown in network 7. Figure 3-10 Network 6 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Network 7 The ID parameter is an IN/OUT type. First you indicate the ID value of the existing data log whose structure you want to copy. After the "DataLogNewFile" instruction has been executed, a new and unique ID value for the new data log is written back into the address of the ID reference. The required detection DONE bit = TRUE is not shown. An example for the logic of the DONE bit can be found in networks 1, 2 and 4. Figure 3-11 Network 7 The data logs created in the example program can be found on the CPU Web server's standard "File browser" Web page in the "\datalogs" folder. The following figure shows the standard Web page of the Web server using the example of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP. Figure 3-12 Standard "File browser" web page of the Web server Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 51 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging In the file browser, you can download the data logs created in the example program. It is not possible to delete or rename the data logs in the Web server. To delete a data log you either use the "DataLogDelete" instruction or you format the SIMATIC memory card. On the DataLogs web page, you can have all the data logs that you created displayed. You can call and empty the relevant data log file by clicking the icon . Note Manipulation of the data logs using a card reader Do not delete or change the data logs using a card reader on the PG/PC. You can copy the data logs on the SIMATIC memory card, however, using a card reader on the PG/PC. The recommended medium for viewing, downloading (copying) and deleting data logs is the file browser of the web server, however. Direct file access via Windows Explorer brings with it the risk of inadvertent deletion of modification of data logs or system files. This can cause the files to be damaged or the SIMATIC memory card to become unusable. Figure 3-13 Example - Data logs in the folder "\datalogs" of the file browser Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Table 3- 2 Downloaded examples of data logs displayed in Microsoft Excel Two data records written in a data log which contains a maximum of five data records. Five data records written in a data log which contains a maximum of five data records. After another data record has been written, the 6th write operation overwrites the oldest data record (record 1) with data record 6. Another write operation overwrites data record 2 with data record 7, etc. 3.2.5 Calculation of the data log size The maximum memory size is allocated when you create the data log. Besides ensuring enough memory space for all the data records, you must take into account the memory space of the following elements for the memory allocation: Data log header (if used) Time stamp header (if used) Data record index header Minimum block size The formula below represents a method to help you determine the estimated size of your data log. Make sure that you observe the rule for the maximum size. Data bytes of the data log = ((data bytes in a data record + time stamp bytes + 12 bytes) * number of data records) Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 53 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Header Header bytes of the data log = header character bytes + 2 bytes Header character bytes No data header and no time stamp = 7 bytes No data header and time stamp (with time stamp header) = 21 bytes Data header and no time stamp = Number of character bytes in all column headers including separating commas Data header and time stamp (with time stamp header) = Number of character bytes in all column headers including separating commas + 21 bytes Data Data bytes of the data log = ((data bytes in a data record + time stamp bytes + 12 bytes) * number of data records) Data bytes in a data record The DATA parameter of the "DataLogCreate" instruction points to a structure. The structure assigns the number of data fields and the data type of each data field for a data log data record. Multiply the number of the respective data type with the number of bytes required for this data type. Repeat this step for each data type in a data record. Add all the data bytes to obtain the sum of all the data elements in a data record. Size of the individual data types The data in data logs is saved as character bytes in csv format (comma separated values). The table below shows the number of bytes that are required to save each data type. Data type Bytes Any 10 Bool 1 Byte 4 Char 1 Date 10 DInt 12 DTL 31 DWORD 11 Int 7 LDT 31 LReal 25 Real 16 Sint 5 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Data type Bytes String Example 1: MyString String[10] The maximum character string size is specified with 10 characters. * Text character + automatic filling with spaces = 10 bytes * Quotation marks at the start and end + comma character = 3 bytes 10 + 3 = 13 bytes total Example 2: Mystring2 String If no size is specified in square brackets, 254 bytes are assigned by default. * Text character + automatic filling with spaces = 254 bytes * Quotation marks at the start and end + comma character = 3 bytes 254 + 3 = 257 bytes total Time 14 Tod 12 UDInt 12 UInt 7 USInt 5 WChar 1 Word 6 Number of data records in a data log The RECORDS parameter of the "DataLogCreate" instruction specifies the maximum number of data records that can be stored in a data log. Time stamp bytes in a data record No time stamp = 0 bytes Time stamp = 22 bytes Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 55 Memory usage and application examples 3.2 Memory usage for data logging Example for size of a CSV file The figure "Open CSV file" shows a CSV file opened in a spreadsheet program with five written data records in one data log. The figure "Size of the header and the data records" shows the size of the header used in the CSV file and the size of the individual data records on the SIMATIC memory card. The figure "Column size" shows the size of the respective columns depending on the data type used. Open CSV file Size of the header and the data records Column size Each data record also has a separator comma. Therefore, the calculation of the total size per column also includes 1 byte for each separator comma. Note that the calculation of the size of the header, the data records and the columns is not an integral component of the open CSV file. The size information was added manually to illustrate the elements that make up the size of a data log. You can have the total size of a data log you have created as CSV file displayed in the web server on the "DataLogs" page. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.1 4 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Introduction The automation system uses a SIMATIC memory card as the program memory. The SIMATIC memory card is a preformatted memory card compatible with the Windows file system. The memory card is available in different memory sizes and can be used for the following purposes: Transportable data carrier Program card Firmware update card Service data card When you transfer the user program to the CPU via an online connection, it is written to the SIMATIC memory card. The SIMATIC memory card must be in the card slot of the CPU for this. You can also write the SIMATIC memory card in the programming device or PC. A commercially available SD card reader is needed to read or write the SIMATIC memory card with the programming device or PC. You use this, for example, to copy files directly to the SIMATIC memory card with Windows Explorer. The SIMATIC memory card is mandatory for operation of the CPU. Note SIMATIC memory cards of the redundant system S7-1500R/H For the redundant system S7-1500R/H you need a SIMATIC memory card for each of the two CPUs. During redundant operation, both CPUs access the memory cards. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 57 SIMATIC memory card 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Labeling of the SIMATIC memory card Article number Serial number Production version Memory size Slider for setting the write protection: * Slider up: not write-protected * Slider down: write-protected Figure 4-1 Labeling of the SIMATIC memory card Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Folders and files on the SIMATIC memory card The following folders and files can be found on the SIMATIC memory card: Table 4- 1 Folder structure Folder Description FWUPDATE.S7S Firmware update files for CPU and I/O modules SIMATIC.S7S User program, i.e. all blocks (OBs, FCs, FBs, DBs) and system blocks, project data of the CPU SIMATIC.HMI HMI-relevant data DataLogs* DataLog files Recipes* Recipe files UserFiles* You have to manually create the folder named "UserFiles" on the memory card for your user data. Only files in this folder (*.pdf, *.txt, *.csv, etc) are also loaded into the STEP 7 project with the "Upload device as new station" function. Backups Files for backing up and restoring via the display * The content of these folders is also loaded into the STEP 7 project with the "Upload device as new station" function. Table 4- 2 File structure File type Description S7_JOB.S7S Job file SIMATIC.HMI\Backup\*.psb Panel backup files SIMATICHMI_Backups_DMS. Protected file (necessary for use of panel backup files in STEP 7) bin __LOG__ Protected system file (necessary for use of card) crdinfo.bin Protected system file (necessary for use of card) DUMP.S7S Service data file *.pdf, *.txt, *.csv, etc. Additional file with different formats that you can also store in folders of the SIMATIC memory card If you store the files in the "UserFiles" folder, the files are stored in the STEP 7 project with "Upload device as new station" and can be used, for example, for restoring files in the event of a defective SIMATIC memory card. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 59 SIMATIC memory card 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Additional folders and files: CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP The SIMATIC memory card of the CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP also contain the following folders and files: The following C/C++ runtime containers are located in the "/CppEnv1.MFP" directory on the SIMATIC memory card and are mounted in the file system in Linux: - System.img Mount point: "/etc/mfp" (system files) - User.img Mount point: "/home" (home directories of users, for C/C++ runtime application, for example) - Data.img Mount point: "/var/userdata" (e.g. log data) RAM-Disk Mount point: "/var/volatile" Note First-time startup of CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP with empty SIMATIC memory card When the CPU starts up for the first time with an empty SIMATIC memory card, the card is prepared for use with C/C++ runtime. This process takes up to three minutes. Do not turn off the CPU during this phase; the STOP LED flashes. Note Impact on performance of the CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP and CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP Depending on the type of programming, C/C++ runtime applications, such as mass storage accesses to the SIMATIC memory card, can affect the performance of the CPU. You can find additional information on these CPUs in the CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109749061) manual and the CPU 1518(F)-4 PN/DP MFP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109756478) product information. You can find information on creating C/C++ runtime applications in the SIMATIC S7-1500 ODK 1500S (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109752683) manual. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Using the serial number for copy protection You can set up copy protection for CPUs that binds execution of the block to a specific SIMATIC memory card. You can then only execute the block if it is on the SIMATIC memory card with the specified serial number. Note Redundant system S7-1500R/H The copy protection function is not supported by the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. You can find additional information about copy protection in the following manuals: System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) Removing a SIMATIC memory card from the CPU Only remove the SIMATIC memory card in POWER OFF or STOP of the CPU. Ensure that no writing functions (online functions with the programming device, e.g. loading/deleting a block, test functions) are active in STOP or were active before POWER OFF. If you remove the SIMATIC memory card during a write operation, the following problems can occur: The data content of a file is incomplete. The file is no longer readable, or no longer exists. The entire data content is corrupted. Inserting the SIMATIC memory card in the CPU in STOP state triggers a re-evaluation of the SIMATIC memory card. The CPU compares the content of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card with the backed-up retentive data. If the backed-up retentive data matches the data of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card, the retentive data is retained. If the data differs, the CPU automatically performs a memory reset. A memory reset deletes the retentive data on the CPU. After the memory reset, the CPU goes to STOP. With regard to removal of the SIMATIC memory card, note also the following FAQ on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59457183). Note Using the SIMATIC memory card as a firmware update card If you use the SIMATIC memory card as a firmware update card, removing and inserting the card will not result in the loss of retentive data. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 61 SIMATIC memory card 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Removing a SIMATIC memory card from Windows computers If you are using the card in a commercially available card reader under Windows, use the "Eject" function before you remove the card from the card reader. If you remove the card without using the "Eject" function, you may lose data. Deleting contents of the SIMATIC memory card You have the following options for deleting the content of the SIMATIC memory card: Delete files with Windows Explorer Format with STEP 7 Note If you format the card with Windows tools, you will render the SIMATIC memory card unusable as a storage medium for a CPU. Deletion of files and folders is permitted, with the exception of the "__LOG__" and "crdinfo.bin" system files. The CPU needs these system files. When you delete the files, you will no longer be able to use the SIMATIC memory card with the CPU. If you have deleted the "__LOG__" and "crdinfo.bin" system files, format the SIMATIC memory card as described in the following section. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.1 SIMATIC memory card - Overview Formatting a SIMATIC memory card NOTICE Formatting the SIMATIC memory card Do not format the memory card with Windows tools. Formatting with Windows renders the memory card unusable by a CPU initially. You can find information on how to repair an inconsistent or incorrectly formatted card in the following FAQ on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/69063974). To free up memory space on your SIMATIC memory card, you have the option of formatting the SIMATIC memory card. During formatting, the entire content of the memory card is deleted with the exception of the IP address. The SIMATIC memory card may only be formatted in the CPU. With a SIMATIC memory card inserted, follow these steps: Formatting with STEP 7: Establish an online connection. Double-click "Online & diagnostics" in the project tree. In the dialog window select "Functions > Format memory card" and then select the "Format" button. Formatting via the display of the CPU In the display of the CPU, select the menu "Settings" > "Card functions" > "Format card" and confirm with OK. Changing the memory card without loss of retentive data You can change the memory card or use a larger SIMATIC memory card without losing the retentive data. When you switch off the CPU, the retentive data is backed up in the retentive memory of the CPU. While the CPU is switched off, you can remove the memory card and copy its content to a larger memory card. After switching on the CPU, the data backed up in the CPU when the CPU was switched off is restored. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 63 SIMATIC memory card 4.2 Setting the card type 4.2 Setting the card type Introduction You can use the SIMATIC memory card as a program card or as a firmware update card. Procedure 1. To set the card type, insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of the programming device. 2. Select the "SIMATIC Card Reader" folder in the project tree. 3. In the properties of the selected SIMATIC memory card, specify the card type: Program card You use a program card as an external load memory for the CPU. It contains the complete user program for the CPU. The CPU transfers the user program from the load memory to the work memory. The user program runs in the work memory. The following folder is created on the SIMATIC memory card: SIMATIC.S7 Firmware update card You can save firmware for a CPU and for I/O modules on a SIMATIC memory card. This enables you to perform a firmware update with the help of a specially prepared SIMATIC memory card. The following folder is created on the SIMATIC memory card: FWUPDATE.S7S Reference You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards 4.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards Transferring objects from the project to the SIMATIC memory card When the SIMATIC memory card is inserted in the programming device or in the external card reader, you can transfer the following objects from the project tree (STEP 7) to the SIMATIC memory card: Individual blocks (multiple selection possible) In this case, the transfer is consistent, i.e. the function takes dependencies between blocks due to block calls into account. CPU folder In this case, all the runtime-relevant objects, such as blocks and the hardware configuration, are transferred to the SIMATIC memory card, just as with downloading. Service data In this case, the service data saved beforehand is transferred to the SIMATIC memory card. You will find additional information on the service data in the following manuals: - System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) - System manual Redundant System S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) - System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) - Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) You have the following options for performing the transfer: Transfer the objects using drag-and-drop. Use the "Card Reader/USB memory > Write to memory card" command in the "Project" menu. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 65 SIMATIC memory card 4.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards Transferring trace recordings to the SIMATIC memory card The "Save measurements on device (memory card)" function allows you to save trace recordings on your SIMATIC memory card. Note Redundant system S7-1500R/H The CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H do not support the saving of measurements on the SIMATIC memory card. Response when number reached The "Deactivate recording" parameter repeats the measurements until the configured "Number of measurements" is reached. The "Overwrite oldest recording" parameter replaces the oldest measurement with the latest measurement when the configured "Number of measurements" is reached. Note, however, that continuously writing data to the SIMATIC memory card shortens its service life. Figure 4-2 Dialog of settings for saving measurements on the memory card in STEP 7 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards Number of measurements The CPU supports a maximum of 999 measurements. The CPU writes the trace recordings to the load memory of the memory card. Meanwhile, the CPU pauses the checking of trigger conditions for the trace job. Once the CPU finishes saving the trace recordings, the CPU continues checking the trigger conditions. NOTICE Memory required on the SIMATIC memory card When the trace function "Measurements on device (memory card)" requires more memory than is available on the SIMATIC memory card, undesired effects may result. Ensure there is always sufficient free memory space to use the "Measurements on device (memory card)" function. In addition to the "Measurements on device (memory card)" trace function, other functions such as storing data logs use memory space on the SIMATIC memory card. Ensure there is always sufficient memory space available for all functions that use memory. You can find additional information about trace measurements and trace recordings in the following: Function manual Using the Trace and Logic Analyzer Function (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/64897128) Function manual Web Server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) STEP 7 online help Firmware update using SIMATIC memory card You can find information on how to perform a firmware update in the following: System manual S7-1500, ET 200MP Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) System manual Redundant System S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Operating instructions ET 200pro CPU 1516pro-2 PN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) Reference You can find additional information about the SIMATIC memory card in the STEP 7 online help. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 67 SIMATIC memory card 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Calculation of the theoretical service life of a SIMATIC memory card serves as a decisionmaking aid for selecting which card you need for your automation task. The following examples only return a guide value, however. A precise calculation of the service life is not possible due to the fact that the description cannot cover all the theoretically possible scenarios. Influences on the service life You can influence the service life of SIMATIC memory cards by the following factors: Size of card Number and type of write operations The number of physical write operations to the memory blocks of the card results from the following: - Number of write operations from the application - Type of write operations from the application Structure of a SIMATIC memory card The internal flash memory of the SIMATIC memory card is organized in memory blocks. A memory block is a memory area of a fixed size. A write operation always addresses entire memory blocks on the SIMATIC memory card. When a memory block has been written once it must be deleted before it can be written again. The number of delete/write operations per memory block is limited. The service life of the SIMATIC memory card is measured by the maximum number of supported delete or write operations per memory block. In contrast to delete or write operations, read operations have a negligible impact on the service life. Therefore, the impact of the read operations on the service life is not included in this calculation. A very high number of read operations can, however, influence the service life to a small extent. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Maximum number of write/delete operations The internal controller of the memory card ensures that the available memory blocks are evenly used. In this way, a maximum number of write operations is possible on the SIMATIC memory card. Internal algorithms distribute the write accesses to the same logical memory area over changing physical memory areas in order to use the memory blocks evenly. The following table shows the maximum possible number of write/delete operations as a function of the SIMATIC memory card used. The number of maximum write/delete operations of the respective SIMATIC memory card is also available online in the technical specifications of the respective SIMATIC memory card. Memory size of the SIMATIC memory card * Article number Max. number of write/delete operations per memory block 4 MB 6ES7954-8LCxx-0AA0 500 000 12 MB 6ES7954-8LExx-0AA0 500 000 24 MB 6ES7954-8LFxx-0AA0 500 000 256 MB 6ES7954-8LL02-0AA0 200 000 2 GB 6ES7954-8LP01-0AA0 100 000 2 GB 6ES7954-8LP02-0AA0 60 000 32 GB 6ES7954-8LT02-0AA0 50 000 * The memory size figures named in the table are theoretical values. The actual existing memory size in practice is below the theoretical value. The reason for this is that the internal controller of the card and the file system reserve part of the existing memory for internal memory management. Note Write or delete operations Write or delete operations, particularly repeated (cyclic) write/delete operations by the user program on the SIMATIC memory card reduces its service life. Cyclic execution of the following instructions reduces the service life of the memory card depending on the number of write operations and data: * "CREATE_DB" (with ATTRIB "Create DB in load memory") * "DataLogWrite" * "RecipeExport" * "RecipeImport" (if target DB in load memory) * "WRIT_DBL" * "SET_TIMEZONE" Note also that, in addition to the cyclic write/delete operations, the writing or deleting of very large amounts of data also adversely affects the service life of the SIMATIC memory card. Note Redundant system S7-1500R/H The CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H do not support the instructions specified in this "Write or delete operations" notice, except for "SET_TIMEZONE". Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 69 SIMATIC memory card 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Guaranteed data retention time If you do not use your SIMATIC memory card for an extended period of time, there is the risk that data contained on the memory card may no longer be readable after a certain amount of time. The guaranteed data retention time of a SIMATIC memory card is 10 years on delivery and with proper storage. With a number of 10% of the maximum write/delete operations, the data stored on the card has a retention time of 10 years. Please note that increasing numbers of write/delete operations to the card reduces its data retention time. If 90% of the maximum write/delete operations is reached, the guaranteed data retention time is reduced to 1 year. If 100% of the maximum write/delete operations is reached, the retention time of the saved data can no longer be guaranteed. Determining the current usage level of a SIMATIC memory card in STEP 7 When you activate the "Aging of the SIMATIC memory card" option, you enter a threshold value as a percentage in the text box below. As soon as the service life of the SIMATIC memory card has reached the specified threshold value (e.g.: 80%), the CPU outputs a diagnostics alarm. Figure 4-3 Enabled option "Aging of the SIMATIC memory card" Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Calculation of the theoretical service life of a SIMATIC memory card We will use the following example as a basis for calculation: The user is using a new 256 MB memory card. In accordance with the table, this memory card type supports 200000 write operations. After parameter changes, the user would like to write 200 data blocks of 5 Kbytes each to the SIMATIC memory card at a frequency of 50 times per day with the "RecipeExport" instruction. Step 1: Calculating the write operations First use the following formula to calculate the service life of the SIMATIC memory card: We first use the sizes from the example in the formula "Write operations" as a basis for calculating the service life: Size of the memory card: 256 MB = 268435456 bytes Maximum number of write operations: 200000 Number of written bytes: 1024000 bytes (200 x 5 KB) If we use the sizes from the example in the formula, we obtain the following result: Step 2: Calculating the service life Use the following formula to calculate the service life in years: Note Net-gross factor Internal data (metadata) are also written to the SIMATIC memory card with each write operation. Due to this additional data, include the net-gross factor 10 when calculating the service life. If we use the sizes from the example in the formula, we obtain the following result: Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 71 SIMATIC memory card 4.4 Service life of the SIMATIC memory card Calculation with more frequent write accesses and a higher number of bytes written If the frequency of write accesses and the number of bytes written per day increases, the service life of the SIMATIC memory card is reduced. The following table shows, based on empirical values, how the service life of a SIMATIC memory card with a size of 256 MB is reduced Write accesses per day Number of bytes written per instruction Service life of the SIMATIC memory card in years 50 1024000 287 100 1024000 143 400 1024000 36 400 2048000 18 400 4096000 9 The following table shows how the same values impact the service life of a SIMATIC memory card with a size of 2 GB (6ES7954-8LP01-0AA0). Write accesses per day Number of bytes written per instruction Service life of the SIMATIC memory card in years 50 1024000 1149 100 1024000 575 400 1024000 144 400 2048000 72 400 4096000 36 The result shows that a high number of write accesses together with a high number of written bytes significantly shortens the service life of the SIMATIC memory card. Reference You can find an alternative method for calculating the service life of a SIMATIC memory card in an FAQ on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482591). GetSMCinfo instruction In STEP 7 (TIA Portal) you have the option of reading out the inserted SIMATIC memory card using the GetSMCinfo instruction. The following information can be read out with the instruction: Memory size in KB Memory space used in KB Maintenance information: Previously used up portion of the service life in % Configured amount of the service life in % after which the CPU creates a diagnostics buffer entry and the maintenance LED switches on. You can find additional information on the GetSMCinfo instruction in the STEP 7 online help. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC SIMATIC memory card 4.5 Expanding the load memory of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H 4.5 Expanding the load memory of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H Memory requirements If the memory space on one of the two SIMATIC memory cards is not sufficient, you can replace this card during operation of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Note To avoid errors on the SIMATIC memory card due to insufficient memory, use memory cards with enough memory space. Expanding the load memory during operation To expand the load memory of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H during operation, follow these steps: Action System response 1. Switch the first CPU to STOP while in redundant operation. The system changes to system state RUNSolo. 2. Remove the existing SIMATIC memory card from the CPU that is in STOP. Insert a larger SIMATIC memory card. The CPU performs a memory reset. 3. After the memory reset switch the CPU back to RUN. The CPU performs a SYNCUP. 4. Wait until the SYNCUP of the CPU is complete and then switch the second CPU to STOP. The system changes to system state RUNSolo again. 5. Remove the existing SIMATIC memory card from the CPU that is in STOP. Insert a larger SIMATIC memory card. The CPU performs a memory reset. 6. After the memory reset, switch the CPU back to RUN. The CPU performs a SYNCUP. 7. Wait until the SyncUp of the CPU is complete. The CPUs now have a larger load memory and are in system state RUN-Redundant again. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 73 Glossary Backup CPU When the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the Primary CPU controls the process. The Backup CPU synchronously executes the user program and can take over the process control at a failure of the Primary CPU. Bit memory Bit memory is a component of the system memory of the CPU for saving intermediate results. You access the bit memory from the user program in bit, byte, word or double-word mode. Code block In SIMATIC S7, a code block contains a portion of the STEP 7 user program. Consistent data Consistent data is data whose content belongs together. Consistent data is read and written contiguously. Counter Counters are components of the system memory of the CPU. You can modify the content of the "counter cells" using STEP 7 instructions. Example: Count up or down. Data block Data blocks (DBs) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. The following data blocks are available: Global data blocks that you access from all code blocks. Instance data blocks that are assigned to a particular FB call. Data log Data logs are CSV files for the saving of tag values. The data logs are stored on the SIMATIC memory card in the "\datalogs" directory. Instructions in the user program write data records of tag values to a data log. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Glossary Diagnostics Monitoring functions include: Detection, localization, classification of errors, faults and alarms. Display and further evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. The monitoring functions run automatically during system operation. This increases the availability of systems because commissioning times and downtimes are reduced. Diagnostics buffer The diagnostics buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which diagnostics events are stored in their order of occurrence. Firmware of the CPU In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between the firmware of the CPU and user programs. Firmware is software that is embedded in electronic devices, i.e. functionally connected permanently to the hardware. It is usually saved in a flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM or ROM and cannot be replaced by the user or can only be replaced with special tools or functions. User program: see glossary entry "User program" Firmware update You use a firmware update to update the firmware of modules. A firmware update is performed, e.g. for functional extensions of a CPU or interface module. Function block A function block (FB) is a code block with static data. An FB allows you to pass parameters in the user program. Function blocks are thus suited for programming frequently recurring complex functions, such as closed-loop controls or operating states selection. Global data block (DB) Every function block, every function, and every organization block can read the data from a global data block, or write its own data to a global data block. This data is retained in the data block, even when the data block is exited. I/O module Device of the distributed I/O that is used as an interface between the controller and the process. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 75 Glossary Instance data block (DB) Each call of a function block in the STEP 7 user program is assigned a data block that is automatically generated. Values of the input, output and in/out parameters, as well as local block data, are stored in the instance data block. IP address The IP address is made up of four decimal numbers, each with a value range of 0 to 255. The decimal numbers are separated by a dot (e.g. 192.162.0.0). The IP address consists of the following: Address of the network Device address (PROFINET interface of the IO controller/IO devices) Local data This memory area accepts the temporary local data of a block for the duration of processing. Memory reset Procedure for setting the memories of the CPU to a defined initial state. Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of an individual CPU at any given point in time. The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems feature the STOP, STARTUP and RUN operating states. The primary CPU of the redundant system S7-1500R/H has the operating states STOP, STARTUP, RUN, RUN-Syncup and RUN-Redundant. The backup CPU has the operating states STOP, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. Optimized block access Data blocks with optimized access have no fixed structure. In the declaration, the data elements only receive a symbolic name, and no fixed address within the block. The elements are automatically arranged in the block's available memory area in such a way that its capacity is optimally exploited. In these data blocks, you can only address tags symbolically. For example, you would access the "FillState" tag in the "Data" DB as follows: "Data".FillState Optimized access offers the following advantages: The data is structured and saved in a manner that is optimal for the CPU used. This allows you to increase CPU performance. Access errors, e.g. from the HMI, are not possible. You can selectively define individual tags as retentive. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Glossary Organization block Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system of the CPU and the user program. The organization blocks determine the order in which the user program is executed. Parameter Variable of a STEP 7 code block Variable for setting the behavior of a module (one or more per module). In delivery state, each module has an appropriate basic setting that can be changed by configuring in STEP 7. There are static and dynamic parameters. Parameters, dynamic In contrast to static parameters, you can change dynamic parameters of modules during operation by calling an SFC in the user program, e.g. limit values of an analog input module. Parameters, static In contrast to dynamic parameters, you cannot change static parameters of modules with the user program but only by configuring in STEP 7, e.g. input delay of a digital input module. Primary CPU When the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the Primary CPU controls the process. The Backup CPU synchronously executes the user program and can take over the process control at a failure of the Primary CPU. Process image (I/O) The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the start of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the process image output as a signal state to the output modules. The CPU then reads the signal states of the input modules to the process image of the inputs. Then the CPU executes the user program. Redundant systems Redundant systems are characterized in that important automation components are present multiple times (redundantly). Process control is maintained if a redundant component fails. Reset to factory settings Resetting to factory settings restores the CPU settings to the delivery state. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 77 Glossary Restart A restart (warm restart) deletes all non-retentive bit memory and resets non-retentive DB contents to the start values from the load memory. Retentive bit memory and retentive DB contents are retained. Program execution begins at the call of the first startup OB. Retentivity A memory area whose content is retained after power failure and after a transition from STOP to RUN is retentive. The non-retentive bit memory area, timers and counters are reset after power failure and after a STOP to RUN transition. SIMATIC memory card Memory for the user program for programmable modules and communications processors. You can also use the SIMATIC memory card for exchange of user software and user data. Standard access Data blocks with standard access have a fixed structure. In the declaration, the data elements contain both a symbolic name and a fixed address within the block. The address is displayed in the "Offset" column. In these data blocks, you can address tags both symbolically and absolutely: "Data".FillState DB1.DBW2 System states The redundant S7-1500R/H system has various system states. The system states result from the operating states of the Primary and Backup CPUs. The concept of the system state is used to obtain a simplified expression that characterizes the simultaneously occurring operating states of the two CPUs. The following system states are available for the redundant system S7-1500R/H: STOP, STARTUP, RUN-Solo, SYNCUP and RUNRedundant. Timer Timers are components of the system memory of the CPU. The operating system automatically updates the content of the "timer cells" asynchronously to the user program. STEP 7 instructions specify the precise function of the timer cell (e.g. on delay) and trigger its execution. Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Glossary User program In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between user programs and the firmware of the CPU. The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data that enable a plant or process to be controlled. The user program is assigned to a programmable module (e.g. CPU, FM) and can be structured in smaller units. Firmware: see glossary entry "Firmware of the CPU" Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 79 Index DataLogNewFile, 46 DataLogOpen, 46 DataLogWrite, 46 GetSMCinfo, 72 READ_DBL, 39 RecipeExport, 41 RecipeImport, 41 WRIT_DBL, 39 B Bit memory, 29 C C/C++, 14, 60 Counter, 29 D Data block, 27, 33 Data logging Data structure, 45 DataLogCreate, 45 Example program, 48 Overview of data logging, 43 Data retention time, 70 Diagnostics buffer, 31 Display, 23, 59, 63 Disposal, 5 F FAQ Calculate service life SMC, 72 Configure data blocks, 39 Estimating memory requirements, 20 Formatting a SIMATIC memory card, 63 Insufficient load memory, 37 Load project data in load memory, 37 Removing a SIMATIC memory card, 61 Repairing the SIMATIC memory card, 63 Using recipe phases, 42 Function block, 27 I Instructions Asynchronous, 42, 47 CREATE_DB, 28 DataLogClear, 46 DataLogClose, 46 DataLogCreate, 45, 46, 54 DataLogDelete, 46 L Linux, 14, 60 Load memory, 14 Load memory S7-1500/H-CPUs, 73 M Memory reserve, 32 O Offline project, 16, 19 Offline project data, 13 Online project data, 13 Operating hours counter, 31 P PLC tags, 32 R Redundancy ID, 17 Redundant S7-1500R/H system, 73 Retentive data, 17, 61, 63 Retentive memory, 13, 15, 26 S7-1500R/H-CPUs, 17 Runtime, 14, 60 S Scope, 3 SIMATIC memory card, 57, 64, 65 Basics, 57 Firmware card, 64 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory 80 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC Index Possible applications, 65 Program card, 64 Repairing, 63 Updating firmware, 67 Software change, 32 T Technology objects, 28 Timer, 29 Trace recordings, 66 W Web server, 14, 25, 51, 67 Work memory, 13, 15 Structure and Use of the CPU Memory Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03461664-AC 81 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200SP, ET 200pro Web server Function Manual 12/2017 A5E03484625-AF 2 ___________________ General information 3 ___________________ Web pages Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03484625-AF 12/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation supports you in the operation of the Web server. The Web server offers, among other things, web page access to diagnostic data and to process data of the CPU. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge in the field of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Experience of working with Windows-based computers Knowledge about how to use STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Scope of the documentation This documentation is valid for CPUs as of firmware version V2.5 and contains illustrations of the Web server user interface. The images used are identical for all CPUs of the S7-1500 automation system and distributed I/O system ET 200SP and the CPU 1516pro-2 PN of distributed I/O system ET 200pro. The displayed illustrations can differ from the interface of the Web server in some details, e.g. depending on the browser used. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 3 Preface What's new in the Web Server function manual, Version 12/2017 compared to Version 09/2016 What's new? New contents What are the customer benefits? New web page "User files" Where can I find the information? You can download ASCII files (files in Section User files (Page 115) binary format) from the SIMATIC Memory Card, directory UserFiles\ to the web page and delete them. Time display as Coordinated The display of the UTC allows you to use Universal Time (UTC) or as a uniform time for the web pages. PLC local time You can set the format of the time display to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) or PLC local time (default setting). Section Start page with general CPU information (Page 35) Automated downloading, reading out and archiving of DataLogs Section Automated reading out of data logs (Page 113) You can, for example, read out and archive DataLogs daily from one or more CPUs at a specific time via the Web server. Automatic downloading of DataLogs is realized either by the execution of scripts in, for example, Bash or via JavaScript on your HTML user page. Changed contents The "Permit access only with HTTPS" check box is activated in the default setting of a configured CPU. The web pages are transmitted by default via a secure connection and are protected from attacks by third parties. Section Configuring the Web server (Page 21) Web page "Module information": New column Device number You can read the assignment of the device number to the device name. Section Module information (Page 47) Web page "Topology": Selection of the available PROFINET interfaces, for example X1, X2, CM 1542-1 You can select the topology display for the Section Topology (Page 62) PROFINET interfaces X1, X2 and for connected PROFINET communication modules. Web page "DataLogs": New You can delete DataLog files via the Web column for deleting DataLog server. files Section DataLogs (Page 112) Web page "Trace": Changes You can evaluate the Trace recordings in in the display of Trace remore detail through the extension of the cordings display. Section Trace (Page 133) Web page "Trace": New arithmetic functions In the case of completed measurements you can combine the measured signals mathematically with each other and this generate signals that were not recorded. You can, for example, form the difference of two signals in order to better display the deviation of the current pressure of a boiler from the set setpoint value. Web server 4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Preface What's new in the Web Server function manual, Version 09/2016 compared to Version 12/2014 What's new? New contents What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the information? Handling of certificate modified You protect the Web server against tapping or distortion of the communication through access via the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS" including a special Web server certificate. Section Configuring the Web server (Page 21) Four additional languages for the Web server interface You can set the Web server interface to the following languages: Section Start page with general CPU information (Page 35) * Korean * Russian * Turkish * Portuguese (Brazil) Assignment of different project languages extended You can assign up to three different project languages for comments, alarm texts and diagnostic information to the user interface languages of the Web server. Section Language settings (Page 31) "Start page" web page extended The display of the TIA project name immediately indicates whether the desired project is selected. Section Start page with general CPU information (Page 35) "Diagnostics" web page extended by one tab: Here you can find information about: Section Diagnostics (Page 40) * Know-how protection or copy protection of the PLC program "Runtime information" * "Fail-safe" (with an FCPU) Program/communication load and cycle time * F-collective signatures, cycle times and runtimes of the F-runtime group(s) * "Program protection" * * "Alarms" web page extended You can acknowledge alarms of the CPU via the Web server. Section Alarms (Page 55) "Tag status" and "Watch You can change the value of tags and tables" web pages extended write them to the CPU, also using the absolute address. Section Tag status (Page 72) New web page "Online backup" You can back up and restore the CPU configuration to/from the SIMATIC memory card via the Web server. Section Online backup (Page 120) New "Motion Control diagnostics" web page You can monitor statuses, errors, technology alarms and the current values of configured technology objects (TOs) with the Web server without STEP 7. Section Motion Control diagnostics (Page 125) New web page "Online backup" You can read, view and save trace record- Section Trace (Page 133) ings via the Web server and thus obtain plant and project information for diagnostics and maintenance without STEP 7. Section Watch tables (Page 75) Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 5 Preface What's new? Changed contents Scope of the function manual expanded to include CPUs of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP and the CPU 1516pro-2 PN What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the information? Functions that you will be familiar with from the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPUs are implemented in CPUs in other designs (ET 200SP) and in the CPU 1516pro-2 PN (degree of protection IP65, IP66 and IP67). Manual CPU 1510SP-1 PN (https://support.industry.sieme ns.com/cs/ww/en/view/901571 30) Manual CPU 1512SP-1 PN (https://support.industry.sieme ns.com/cs/ww/en/view/901570 13) Operating instructions CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.sieme ns.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482 416) Web page "Watch tables": Note added on the maximum configuration limits. Section Watch tables (Page 75) Web page "User pages": Note added on the maximum size of the HTML pages. Section User pages (Page 77) Conventions In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Web server 6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 7 Preface Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Web server 8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 11 2 General information .............................................................................................................................. 16 3 2.1 Properties of the Web server ..................................................................................................16 2.2 Configuring the Web server ....................................................................................................21 2.3 Language settings ...................................................................................................................31 2.4 Updating and saving information ............................................................................................34 Web pages ........................................................................................................................................... 35 3.1 Start page with general CPU information ...............................................................................35 3.2 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................40 3.3 Diagnostics buffer ...................................................................................................................45 3.4 Module information .................................................................................................................47 3.5 Firmware update .....................................................................................................................52 3.6 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................55 3.7 Communication .......................................................................................................................57 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 Topology .................................................................................................................................62 Introduction .............................................................................................................................62 Graphical view ........................................................................................................................63 Tabular view ............................................................................................................................66 Status overview .......................................................................................................................68 Examples for graphical topology views...................................................................................69 3.9 Tag status ...............................................................................................................................72 3.10 Watch tables ...........................................................................................................................75 3.11 3.11.1 3.11.1.1 3.11.1.2 3.11.1.3 3.11.1.4 3.11.1.5 3.11.1.6 3.11.2 3.11.3 3.11.4 3.11.5 3.11.5.1 3.11.5.2 User pages ..............................................................................................................................77 AWP commands .....................................................................................................................81 PLC tags .................................................................................................................................82 Special tags ............................................................................................................................86 Enum types .............................................................................................................................88 Fragments ...............................................................................................................................90 Arrays ......................................................................................................................................91 Structures ................................................................................................................................93 Configuring user pages ...........................................................................................................94 Programming the WWW instruction ........................................................................................96 Defining the user page as start page ......................................................................................98 Example of a user page ........................................................................................................100 Website for monitoring and controlling a wind turbine ..........................................................100 Reading and displaying data from the CPU..........................................................................103 Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 9 Table of contents 3.11.5.3 3.11.5.4 3.11.5.5 3.11.5.6 Using enum types ................................................................................................................ 104 Writing user inputs into the controller .................................................................................. 105 Writing special tags .............................................................................................................. 106 HTML code of the user page "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor" ........................................... 107 3.12 Filebrowser........................................................................................................................... 111 3.13 3.13.1 DataLogs .............................................................................................................................. 112 Automated reading out of DataLogs .................................................................................... 113 3.14 3.14.1 UserFiles .............................................................................................................................. 115 Reading or upload user files automatically .......................................................................... 117 3.15 Online backup ...................................................................................................................... 120 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics................................................................................................... 125 3.17 Trace .................................................................................................................................... 133 3.18 Reading out service data ..................................................................................................... 154 3.19 Basic websites ..................................................................................................................... 155 Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................157 Index ...................................................................................................................................................161 Web server 10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 11 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Web server 12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 13 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Web server 14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 15 2 General information 2.1 Properties of the Web server Benefits of the Web server The Web server lets you monitor and administer the CPU through authorized users by means of a network. Evaluations, diagnostics, and modifications are thus possible over long distances. Monitoring and evaluation is possible without STEP 7; all you need is a web browser. Make sure that you take appropriate measures (e.g., limiting network access, using firewalls) to protect the CPU from being compromised. Activating the Web server The Web server is deactivated in the delivery state of the CPU. This means that you must load a project in which the Web server is activated to enable access using the Web browser. Security functions The Web server provides the following security functions: Access via the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS" using the CA-signed Web server certificate User authorizations you can configure by means of user list Activation for specific interfaces Web server 16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.1 Properties of the Web server Web browser You need a web browser to access the HTML pages of the CPU. The following web browsers have been tested for communication with the CPU. Other web browsers may also work, especially newer versions. However, if problems occur with web browsers not mentioned here that cannot be rectified, use one of the following tested web browsers: Internet Explorer (Version 11) Microsoft Edge (Version 40) Google Chrome (versions 47 to 62) Mozilla Firefox (version 47 to 56) Opera (Version 48) Mobile Safari and Chrome for iOS (iOS 10) Android browser (Android 6) Android Chrome (Android 6 to 8 (Certificate only works with restriction under Android 8)) Note If you are using Internet Explorer, disable "Compatibility view" in the settings ("Options" menu). Note For access to display devices with low screen resolution, we recommend the use of basic websites, see section Basic websites (Page 155). Note Older versions of the web browsers mentioned which previously supported access to the HTML pages of the CPU continue to do so. However, these older versions do not support the new functions and HTML pages described in this edition. Note Two reserved communication connections are available to the Web server for communication with the CPU. Depending on the web browser used, different numbers of connections to the CPU are established. If more connections are available, more communication connections will be established. If no more connections are available, display or functional problems may occur, because the Web server will reject all other communication connections apart from the two that are reserved. For this reason, the web pages may not load fully. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 17 General information 2.1 Properties of the Web server Note If you access the Web server of the CPU using a communication processor (CP), ensure that the cache (temporary Internet files) is enabled in your browser. Choose the "Automatically" option in the cache settings of your browser. If the cache is disabled or if a setting other than "Automatically" is made in the cache settings of your browser, this may result in slow access times and incomplete display. Note After a firmware update of the CPU, incorrect display of Web pages can occur in various Web browsers. This is caused by problems of the new CPU firmware with the cache of the Web browser. Solution: Press F5 or clear the Web browser cache. Web server 18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.1 Properties of the Web server Reading out data With the Web server, you can read out the following data from the CPU and, in some cases, modify and write back the data to the CPU: Start page with general CPU information (Page 35) Information on Diagnostics (Page 40) - Identification - Program protection - Memory - Runtime information - Fail-safe (with an F CPU) Contents of the diagnostics buffer (Page 45) Module information (Page 47) Firmware update (Page 52) Alarms (Page 55) Information on Communication (Page 57) - Important interface parameters - Port statistics - Display of the communication resources - Display of the communication connections PROFINET Topology (Page 62) - Graphical view (set and actual topology) - Table view (actual topology) - Status overview Tag status (Page 72) Watch tables (Page 75) User pages (Page 77) Filebrowser (Page 111) DataLogs (Page 112) User files (Page 115) Online backup and restoration of the configuration (Page 120) Diagnostic information for technology objects (Page 125) Evaluation of trace recordings (Page 133) Reading out service data (Page 154) Basic websites (Page 155) On the following pages, you will find more detailed descriptions of the HTML pages. Note Max. characters at data type WSTRING Note that the data type WSTRING is limited to 254 characters for the display in the Web server. If the 254 characters are exceeded, the Web server does not display the superfluous characters. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 19 General information 2.1 Properties of the Web server Web access to the CPU via PG/PC, HMI devices and mobile terminal devices Proceed as follows to access the Web server: 1. Use STEP 7 to download a project in which the Web server is enabled to the CPU. 2. Connect the display device (PG/PC, HMI, mobile terminal device) with the CPU or a communication module using a PROFINET interface. If you are working with WLAN, activate the WLAN on the display device and establish a connection to the access point (e.g. SCALANCE W788-1RR or SCALANCE W784-1), which is in turn connected to the CPU. 3. Open the web browser on the display device. 4. Enter the IP address of the interface of the CPU which is connected to the client in the "Address" field of the web browser in the following format: http://a.b.c.d or https://a.b.c.d (sample input: http://192.168.3.141). The CPU intro page opens. From the intro page you can navigate to additional information. Additional information on access using the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS" is available in the section Configuring the Web server (Page 21) under "Permit access only with HTTPS". Additional information Using a smartphone, you can access the Web server of the CPU either via WLAN or access to the CPU via the SIMATIC S7 app (using Web server functionality). You can find additional information in the FAQ entry ID 103473392 on the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103473392) Internet page. Note: The Web server must also be activated for access to the CPU via the SIMATIC S7 app. The SIMATIC S7 app offers you additional functions. You can find a detailed application example with further documentation and example projects on the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133612) Internet page. Web server 20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server 2.2 Configuring the Web server To use the full range of functions offered by the Web server, you need to make the settings in STEP 7 listed below: Procedure You have opened the properties dialog of the CPU in the STEP 7 project view. Figure 2-1 Web server settings in STEP 7 Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 21 General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server Activate Web server In the default setting of a configured CPU, the Web server is disabled. Proceed as follows to enable the Web server: 1. Open the "Devices & Networks" view with a double-click in the STEP 7 project tree. 2. Select the required CPU in the device view, network view or topology view. 3. Navigate to the "Web server" area in the Inspector window properties, "General" tab. 4. Select the "Activate web server on this module" check box. The following note is output: Figure 2-2 Security note upon activation of the Web server in STEP 7 Note When projects from deliveries are applied in which the Web server was already activated and configured on the module, this security note is not shown. Web server 22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server Creating and assigning a Web server certificate The activation of the Web server using the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS" requires a valid Web server certificate. With SIMATIC S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware V2.0, you have to create the certificate for the Web server of the CPU with STEP 7 yourself and assign it to the Web server in the CPU properties. When the hardware configuration is downloaded to the CPU, this certificate is also automatically downloaded. STEP 7 itself has a Certification Authority (CA) certificate, with which the device certificate (end-entity certificate) of the Web server is signed. Note If you update the firmware of a SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU or ET 200SP with firmware version < V2.0 to firmware version V2.0, a valid server certificate is automatically generated and used. The same applies to the replacement parts scenario in which a newer CPU replaces a CPU with firmware version < V2.0. You can create different Web server certificates: If you use the certificate manager in the global security settings, the certificate authority of the project (CA certificate) signs the device certificate of the Web server. During loading, the CA certificate of the project is automatically loaded as well. If you do not use the certificate manager in the global security settings, STEP 7 generates the device certificate as a self-signed certificate. NOTICE Utilizing the full functionality of the Web server A valid CA-signed Web server certificate in the CPU is a requirement for: * User management with password-protected users * The use of safety-related functions (online backup and restore of the CPU configuration, saving and downloading diagnostic information in csv files) To use the full functionality of the Web server, we therefore recommend that you use the Certificate Manager to create a CA-signed server certificate in the global security settings and assign it to the CPU. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 23 General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server Creating a self-signed server certificate To create a self-signed Web server certificate, follow these steps: 1. in the Inspector window Properties of the CPU, "General" tab, navigate to the "Web server > Security" area. 2. Click the "Add" button in the drop-down list to select a certificate. The "Create a new certificate" dialog opens. 3. Select the "Self-signed" check box in the subsequent dialog. 4. Enter the parameters for the new certificate or confirm the default settings. - Select "Web server" in the "Usage" box. - Enter the IP address(es) of the interface(s) or the domain name of the configured CPU in the "Subject Alternative Name" field. 5. Click "OK" to confirm. 6. Compile and load the configuration into the CPU. The device certificate of the Web server is a component of the configuration. Creating and assigning a CA-signed Web server certificate To create a CA-signed Web server certificate, follow these steps: 1. In the Inspector window Properties of the CPU, "General" tab, navigate to the "Protection & Security > Certificate Manager" area and select the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option. The "Global security settings" appear in the project tree. Note To edit the Certificate Manager in the global security settings, you require the "Configure security" configuration permission. 2. Log on as a user in the project tree in the "Global security settings > User logon" area. The "Administrator" role is the default for the first logon for a new project. 3. in the Inspector window Properties of the CPU, "General" tab, navigate to the "Web server > Security" area. 4. Click the "Add" button in the drop-down list to select a certificate. The "Create a new certificate" dialog opens. 5. In the following dialog, select the "Signed by certificate authority" check box and select the certificate authority from the drop-down list. 6. Enter the parameters for the new certificate or confirm the default settings. - Select "Web server" in the "Usage" box. - Enter the IP address(es) of the interface(s) or the domain name of the configured CPU in the "Subject Alternative Name" field. 7. Click "OK" to confirm. 8. Compile and load the configuration in the CPU. The device certificate of the Web server and the CA certificate are components of the configuration. Web server 24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server NOTICE Addressing the Web server of the CPU via domain names If you enter the IP address(es) of the interface(s) of the configured CPU in the "Subject Alternative Name" field, the generated certificate may not be accepted by all Internet browsers. You also need to create and load a new server certificate (end-entity certificate) every time you change the IP address of an Ethernet interface of the CPU, since the identity of the CPU changes along with the IP address. You can avoid this problem by addressing the Web server of the CPU using domain names instead of IP address(es), e.g. "myconveyer-cpu.room13.myfactory.com". For this purpose, you have to manage the domain names of your CPU via a DNS server. Additional information Detailed information on local self-signed certificates and global CA certificates, on the "Public Key Infrastructure" (PKI) and on certificate management can be found in the Communication function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925) and in the online help for STEP 7, keyword "Secure communication". Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 25 General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server Permit access only with HTTPS Note: The activation of the Web server using the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS" requires a valid Web server certificate in the CPU. See "Creating and assigning a Web server certificate" in the section above. To ensure secure access to the Web server the "Permit access only with HTTPS" check box is activated in the basic setting of a configured CPU. The web pages are transmitted by default via a secure connection and are protected from attacks by third parties. Note that the URL of the CPU starts with "https://" in this case. For error-free HTTPS access to the CPU, the following conditions must be met: The current date/time must be set in the CPU. Note When using secure communication (e.g. HTTPS), make sure that the corresponding modules have the current time of day and the current date. Otherwise, the modules evaluate the used certificates as invalid and the secure connection will not be established. The IP address of the CPU must be set. A valid server certificate offered by the CPU is installed in the Web browser. NOTICE Safety-related functions only possible with CA-signed Web server certificate Online backup and restore of the CPU configuration, see section Online backup (Page 120), as well as saving and downloading diagnostic information to csv files are only possible with a CA-signed Web server certificate. A valid CA-signed Web server certificate in the CPU is also required for user administration with password-protected users. To use the full functionality of the Web server, we therefore recommend that you use the Certificate Manager to create a CA-signed server certificate in the global security settings and assign it to the CPU. If no CA-signed Web server certificate is installed, a warning is output recommending that you do not use the page. To view the page, you may need to "Add an exception", depending on the Web browser used. A valid CA certificate is available for download from the "Intro" web page under "Download certificate". You can find instructions for installing the certificate in the help system of your Web browser and in the FAQ with the entry ID 103528224 at the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103528224) website. Web server 26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server Note To protect against manipulation from the outside, download the certificate only in an environment that is guaranteed not to be compromised. Installation of the CA certificate has to be carried out once for each display device you wish to use. Access protection The certificate establishes an encrypted connection that prevents tapping or distortion of the communication but does not provide access protection. This means you have to protect your CPU from unauthorized access with the corresponding configuration in the user management. You can find additional information on access protection in the online help for STEP 7, keyword: "Protection". Automatic update Automatic updating is activated in the default setting of a configured CPU. The following web pages are updated automatically: Start page Diagnostics (memory, runtime information, fail-safe) Diagnostics buffer Module information Alarms Communication Topology Tag status Watch tables Filebrowser DataLogs User files Motion Control diagnostics Trace Note The preset activation interval is 10 seconds. Larger amounts of data or several HTTP-/HTTPS connections increase the update time. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 27 General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server Setting the language for the Web In total, you can assign up to three different project languages to the user interface languages of the Web server. In STEP 7, activate the project languages you wish to use and then assign one of the activated project languages to each interface language of the Web server. You can find additional information about the language settings and a description of how to assign a project language to the interface languages in the section Language settings (Page 31). Amending user management Note: A valid CA-signed Web server certificate in the CPU along with a secure HTTPS connection are required for user administration with password-protected users. See "Creating and assigning a Web server certificate" and "Permit access only with HTTPS" in this section. Figure 2-3 User management in STEP 7 In STEP 7, you can manage the user list in the "Web server > User management" area. The user list provides the following options: Create users Specify access permissions Assign passwords Users only have access to the options that are permanently linked to the access rights. You can assign different user rights depending on the used CPU and firmware. Web server 28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server The available user rights can be available for selection as follows in STEP 7: Figure 2-4 Assignment of user rights in STEP 7 If you are not logged in, you automatically access the Web server as the user "Everybody". It does not matter in this case whether you have configured additional users. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 29 General information 2.2 Configuring the Web server User "Everybody" A user with the name "Everybody" is preset in the user list; this user has minimum access rights. These are read-only access to the intro page and start page. The user "Everybody" is defined without a password. However, you can assign all access authorizations available in STEP 7 to this user. You can create a maximum of 20 users and a user "Everybody". Because the user "Everybody" is defined in STEP 7 without assignment of a password, be careful of the access authorizations that you assign to this user. Certain authorizations, such as the possibility of changing the operating mode, could represent a security risk. For the assignment of security-relevant authorizations, we recommend that you create a user with password protection in STEP 7. WARNING With an F-CPU, do not assign the access authorization "F-Admin" to the user "Everybody". Make sure that you observe the warnings relating to this in the section "Restoring a backup of the safety program to an S7-300/1500 F-CPU" in the manual SIMATIC Safety Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126). Passwords should always be more than 8 characters in length and contain uppercase and lowercase characters as well as special characters and numbers (?!+%$1234...). Computer keyboard character strings and words from the dictionary are unsuitable. Change the password regularly. Note When assigning rights, note that read or write access to the watch tables and tag status is retained even if you have disabled the "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" attribute in the PLC tag table when configuring the data block in STEP 7. User pages In the "User pages" area you can download your own web pages to the CPU and make your own web applications available via the web browser. You can find additional information in section User pages (Page 77). Web server 30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.3 Language settings Activation of the Web server for specific interfaces In the area "Overview of interfaces", you have the option to enable or disable access to the Web server. Figure 2-5 Activation of access to the Web server via the interfaces 2.3 Language settings Introduction The Web server provides the user interface in the following languages: German (Germany) English (U.S.) French (France) Italian (Italy) Spanish (traditional sort) Japanese Chinese (Simplified) Korean Russian Turkish Portuguese (Brazil) Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 31 General information 2.3 Language settings Requirements for the availability of the East Asian languages The following requirements must be met for the East Asian languages: The corresponding support package for East Asian languages is installed on the display device (e.g., PC). For this purpose, activate the "Install files for East Asian languages" option in the "Regional and Language Options > Languages" tab of the Windows Control Panel. STEP 7 for East Asian languages is installed on the programming device used to configure the CPU. Note East Asian languages are not supported for SIMATIC HMI devices with Windows CE operating system. Requirements for multilingual output of text To ensure that the Web server displays alarms, comments and diagnostic information correctly in the various project languages, you have to assign a project language of the Web server to each required interface language in STEP 7. Note The project languages of the STEP 7 project you want to assign must be activated and the corresponding texts (translations) must be available in the project. The project languages selection is available in the project tree under "Languages & Resources". Web server 32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF General information 2.3 Language settings Setting the language for the Web Once you have activated the Web server on your module, assign a project language of the STEP 7 project from the drop-down list to each interface language. 1. Navigate to the "Multilingual support" area in the Inspector window Properties of the CPU, "General" tab. 2. Assign a project language from the drop-down list to each interface language of the Web server. Figure 2-6 Language settings for the Web server in STEP 7 You can also assign interface languages the same project language, for example: Project language German for user interface language German, English (US) for Project language English (US) for all other available interface languages of the Web English, French for French. server. In total, you can assign up to three different project languages of the STEP 7 project to the user interface languages of the Web server. Reference You can find additional information on how to set the project language in STEP 7 in the online help for STEP 7, keyword: "Selecting project languages". Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 33 General information 2.4 Updating and saving information See also Configuring the Web server (Page 21) 2.4 Updating and saving information Updating the screen content Automatic updating is activated in the default setting. The preset update time is 10 s. You update the web pages manually with the function key. Disabling automatic updating for an individual web page Click to temporarily deactivate automatic updating for a web page. Note that the deactivation affects only the currently visited web page. Automatic updating is activated again when you change to a different web page. You reactivate automatic updating by clicking . Note If the load on the CPU is very high during operation, for example, due to a large number of PROFINET interrupts or extensive communication jobs, the updating of web pages may be significantly delayed for the duration of this high CPU load. Printing web pages The Web server offers you a print preview on most web pages. Click the symbol it. to open Created printouts always contain the current information in the CPU. This means that it is possible that the information in the print preview is more up-to-date than the information in the standard view. Web server 34 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 3 Web pages 3.1 Start page with general CPU information Connecting to the Web server Establish a connection to the Web server by entering the IP address of the interface of the configured CPU which is connected to the client in the address bar of the web browser, for example, http://192.168.3.141 or https://192.168.3.141. The connection is set up and the "Intro" page opens. The examples in the next section provide information about the different web pages. Intro The figure below shows the first page (Intro) called by the Web server. Figure 3-1 Intro page of the Web server of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP Click the NEXT link to go to the Web server pages. Note Select the "Skip Intro" check box in order to skip the intro. The Web server will then take you directly to its start page in future. This setting is saved in the user profile of the current PC user. You can undo the setting "Skip Intro" by clicking the "Intro" link in the left-hand navigation bar of a web page. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 35 Web pages 3.1 Start page with general CPU information Setting the user interface language You can change the language for the Web server interface, e.g., from English to German, in the upper right corner. This option is available to you on all web pages of the Web server. Switching the time display You can set the format of the time display to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) or PLC local time (default setting) on the left next to the language setting. Figure 3-2 Switching the time display You can switch the time display on all the Web pages that provide this drop-down list. The displayed PLC local time result from the time zone and Daylight Savings Time / Standard Time setting that are set in the CPU properties. Figure 3-3 Setting the time in the CPU properties Web server 36 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.1 Start page with general CPU information The switchover has an effect on the following Web pages: Table 3- 1 Switching the time display: Display on Web pages Web pages Display as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) or as PLC local time Start page Last F-change Diagnostics buffer Date and time of the diagnostic buffer entry Alarms Date and time of the alarms Online backup Backup file with date and time of the backup DataLogs Date of change and time of change File browser Date of change and time of change User files Date of change and time of change Save service data File with time stamp of the storage Start page The start page before login offers information as shown in the figure below. The CPU image with LEDs returns the actual CPU status at the time of the data request. Figure 3-4 Start page before login Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 37 Web pages 3.1 Start page with general CPU information Log in To use the full functionality of the web pages, you must be logged in. Log in with a user name and password specified in the Web configuration in STEP 7. You now have corresponding permissions to access the web pages released for this user. If you have not configured a user, read-only access is granted to intro and start pages by default. Note After carrying out your required actions, log out explicitly from the Web server by clicking "Logout" in order to minimize the risk of unauthorized external access. Figure 3-5 Start page after login "General" "General" contains information on the CPU with the Web server to which you are currently connected, as well as the version of the TIA Portal with which the CPU was configured. "Status" "Status" contains information about the CPU at the moment of the query. Web server 38 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.1 Start page with general CPU information "CPU operator panel" If you have the necessary access permissions, you can change the operating mode of the CPU ("RUN"/"STOP" buttons) or have the LEDs flash ("Flash LED" button) in the "CPU operator panel" area. Additional information for F-CPUs Figure 3-6 Start page after login to an F-CPU "Fail-safe" "Fail-safe" contains additional information on the F-CPU. Further information about the specification is available in the Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety Configuring and Programming (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/54110126/en?dl=en). Reference You can find additional information in the section Configuring the Web server (Page 21). Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 39 Web pages 3.2 Diagnostics 3.2 Diagnostics Overview The "Diagnostics" web page provides more information about the tabs: Identification Program protection Memory Runtime information Fail-safe (with an F CPU) "Identification" tab The CPU characteristics are available in the "Identification" tab. Figure 3-7 Identification tab "Identification" The "Identification" info box contains the plant and location designation and the serial number. Plant and location designations can be configured in STEP 7 in the properties dialog box of the CPU, in the "General" tab. "Order number" The "Order number" info box contains the order number for the hardware. Web server 40 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.2 Diagnostics "Version" You can find the hardware, firmware and bootloader versions in the "Version" info box. "Program protection" tab The "Program protection" tab provides information on whether the PLC program contains know-how protection or copy protection. Figure 3-8 "Program protection" tab "Know-how protection" Information on whether the PLC program contains at least one block with know-how protection or not can be found in the info field "Know-how protection". "Binding" In the info field "Binding" you can find information on whether copy protection has been activated by binding at least one program block of the PLC program to the serial number of the CPU or memory card. "Binding" "No binding" "No matching binding": At least one block is bound to a different serial number (load process is rejected) Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 41 Web pages 3.2 Diagnostics "Memory" tab The "Memory" tab contains current values on the memory currently in use. Figure 3-9 "Memory" tab Web server 42 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.2 Diagnostics "Runtime information" tab Current information on program/communication load and cycle time can be found in the "Runtime information" tab. This enables you to see whether there may be runtime problems during execution of your user program. Figure 3-10 "Runtime information" tab The current user communication load is the actual load arising through communication, for example through Web server access or PROFINET communication. In the example above, 4% of the project-defined communication load is "used". The remaining 46% is available for the operating system and the user program. You can find additional information about the influence of the communication on the cycle time in the Cycle and Response Times (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/59193558) function manual. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 43 Web pages 3.2 Diagnostics "Fail-safe" tab (with an F-CPU) The safety program of an F-CPU consists of one or two F-runtime groups. You can find their F-runtime group signature, cycle times (F-monitoring time) and runtimes in the "Fail-safe" tab. Figure 3-11 "Fail-safe" tab Web server 44 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.3 Diagnostics buffer 3.3 Diagnostics buffer Requirements The Web server is activated, languages are set, the text libraries are loaded and the project has been compiled and downloaded with STEP 7. Diagnostics buffer The browser displays the content of the diagnostics buffer on the "Diagnostics buffer" web page. Figure 3-12 Diagnostics buffer "Diagnostics buffer entries 1-50" The diagnostics buffer can accommodate different numbers of alarms depending on the CPU used. For information on the maximum number of diagnostics buffer entries, refer to the technical specifications of the CPU used. Select an interval for the entries from the drop-down list. Each interval comprises 50 entries. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 45 Web pages 3.3 Diagnostics buffer "Event" The "Event" info box contains the diagnostics interrupts with date and time. Note that the diagnostics events are displayed in the project language of the STEP 7 project that is assigned to the current user interface language of the Web server. You can find out how to assign project languages to interface languages in section Language settings (Page 31). "Details" This field outputs detailed information about a selected event. Select the corresponding event from the "Event" info field. Saving diagnostics buffer entries You can save diagnostics buffer entries to a csv file for further processing in a spreadsheet program or database program. icon. Save the data by clicking the A dialog opens in which you can specify the file name and target directory. Web server 46 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.4 Module information 3.4 Module information Module information The status of a device is indicated by means of symbols and comments on the "Module information" web page. Figure 3-13 Module information Meaning of the symbols in the "Status" column Table 3- 2 Symbol Meaning of symbols Symbol color Green Meaning Gray Deactivated PROFIBUS slaves or PROFINET devices. Gray State cannot be determined Component is OK * "State cannot be determined" is displayed during system diagnostics for all configured I/O modules and I/O systems after restart of the CPU. * However, this state can also be displayed temporarily during operation if a diagnostics interrupt burst occurs for all modules. * It is not possible to determine the status of modules on a subsystem that is connected to a CP. Red Component "not reachable" "Not reachable" is displayed when a module has been removed or a module has been configured but does not exist. Black Green No input or output data available. Input or output channels of the (sub)module are disabled. Maintenance required (Maintenance Required) Yellow Maintenance demanded (Maintenance Demanded) Red Error - component faulty or not available due to an incorrect type Red A module in a lower module level does not have the status "Component OK" Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 47 Web pages 3.4 Module information Navigation to further module levels The status of individual components/modules/submodules is displayed when you navigate to the further module levels: To the next higher module level using the links in the display of the module levels To the next lower module level using the links in the "Name" column Figure 3-14 Navigation to further module levels "Module information" Depending on the selected level, the table contains information about the rack, the DP master system, the PROFINET IO master system, about the devices, the individual modules, as well as the modules or submodules of the device. "Display of the module levels" The links are used to access the "Module information" of the higher module levels. "Topology" The two web pages, "Topology" and "Module information", are linked. A click on "Topology" of the selected module automatically takes you to this module in the graphic view of the set topology on the "Topology" web page. The module is displayed in the visible area of the "Topology" web page. The device header of the selected module flashes for a few seconds. Web server 48 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.4 Module information "IP address" If a link is available, you can use it to access the Web server of the configured device you selected. "Details" Additional information about the selected module is provided in the "Status" and "Identification" tabs via the "Details" link. "Status" tab The tab contains information about the status of the selected module when a fault or alarm exists. "Identification" tab The tab contains data on the identification of the selected module. Note This tab displays only the data configured offline of the module. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 49 Web pages 3.4 Module information "Statistics" tab The tab is only displayed for PROFINET IO devices and includes the following information on communication statistics of the selected IO device: "Total statistics - Sent data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the transmit line based on the key data in this info box. "Total statistics - Received data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the receive line based on the key data in this info box. "Statistics port x - Sent data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the transmit line for each port based on the key data in this info box. "Statistics port x - Received data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the receive line for each port based on the key data in this info box. Figure 3-15 "Statistics" tab Reference You can find additional information in the "Statistics" tab in the section Communication (Page 57). Web server 50 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.4 Module information Example: Module information - module Figure 3-16 Example: Module information - module Note If you are using the function Configuration control (option handling) in the central configuration of your plant, the information text in the headings area of the web page informs you that the status of the I/O modules may be displayed inconsistently. No corresponding text is displayed for the distributed I/O. Example: Module information - submodule Figure 3-17 Example: Module information - submodule Reference You can find additional information on the "Module information" in the online help for STEP 7, keyword: "Module information". Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 51 Web pages 3.5 Firmware update 3.5 Firmware update Introduction You update the firmware as a user with the corresponding access rights on the "Module information" web page at the module level. You will find information on user management in section Configuring the Web server (Page 21) under "Amending user management". You use an update file to update the firmware of the CPU, the display of the CPU, or the individual central or distributed modules. Note that all modules you want to update must be compatible with the TIA Portal as of V12.0. Note A firmware update is not possible if access is via a mobile terminal device with the "iOS" operating system. Web server 52 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.5 Firmware update Procedure The following steps are required to perform a firmware update: Click on "Browse" in the Firmware Loader area. Select the file you would like to use for the firmware update. You can find the available firmware updates on the Service&Support page on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Status of the selected firmware file Button to execute the update Figure 3-18 Module information, "Firmware" tab, "Ready for update" status If the status is "Ready for update", click "Run update". If the CPU is in RUN mode during the update, the following alarm is output: Figure 3-19 Alarm after clicking "Run update" Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 53 Web pages 3.5 Firmware update Acknowledge the alarm output by clicking "OK". The CPU is set to STOP mode and the firmware update is executed. If you click "Cancel", the CPU remains in the current mode and the firmware update is canceled. A alarm informs you about the order number and version ID of the updated firmware once the update is complete. The CPU is automatically placed in RUN mode when the mode selector of the CPU is in RUN and when you acknowledge the alarm with "OK". This may take a few minutes; there is no progress indicator. If you click "Cancel", the CPU remains in STOP mode and you can run additional updates. Figure 3-20 Alarm: Firmware successfully transferred Web server 54 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.6 Alarms 3.6 Alarms Requirements The alarm texts were configured in the user-specific languages. For information about configuring alarm texts, refer to STEP 7 and to the Service&Support pages (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Alarms To receive compact information on fault analysis, we recommend that you always first read out the content of the alarm buffer. This is the most effective method to get an overview of the pending faults. The browser displays the content of the alarm buffer on the "Alarms" web page. Figure 3-21 Alarms Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 55 Web pages 3.6 Alarms "Alarms" CPU alarms are displayed in descending chronological order with date and time in info box . The alarm text parameter is an entry which contains the alarm texts configured for the corresponding fault definitions. Note that the alarm texts are displayed in the project language of the STEP 7 project that is assigned to the current user interface language of the Web server. You can find out how to assign project languages to interface languages in section Language settings (Page 31). Sorting You also have the option to display the individual parameters of the currently displayed web page (max. 50 entries) sorted in ascending or descending order. For this purpose, click on one of the parameters in the column header: Alarm number Date Time (of the CPU) Alarm text Status Acknowledgment The alarms are returned in chronological order when you click the "Date" entry. Incoming and outgoing events are output at the Status parameter. If you have the appropriate user rights (see section Configuring the Web server (Page 21)), for alarms which can be acknowledged, a button is available to you in the "Acknowledgment" column with which you can acknowledge the alarm. "Details on alarm number" You can view detailed alarm information in this info box. Select the corresponding alarm from the info field . Saving alarms You can save alarms to a csv file for further processing in a spreadsheet program or database program. icon. Save the data by clicking the A dialog opens in which you can specify the file name and target directory. Web server 56 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.7 Communication 3.7 Communication Overview The "Communication" web page provides detailed information about the following tabs: Parameters Statistics Resources Connections "Parameter" tab A summary of the information on the PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces of the selected CPU is available in the "Parameter" tab. Figure 3-22 Parameters of the integrated PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces "Network connection" The item "Network connection" includes information for identification of the integrated PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces of the corresponding CPU. The MAC address is located on the CPU above the respective PROFINET or Ethernet interface. "IP parameter" This parameter includes information on the configured IP address and number of the subnet in which the corresponding CPU is located. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 57 Web pages 3.7 Communication "Physical properties" The following information on the interface hardware is available in the "Physical properties" field: Port number Link status Settings Mode Connection medium Web server 58 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.7 Communication "Statistics" tab Information on the data transmission can be found on the "Statistics" tab. Figure 3-23 "Statistics" tab with key data on data transmission "Total statistics - Sent data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the transmit line based on the key data in this info box. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 59 Web pages 3.7 Communication "Total statistics - Received data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the receive line based on the key data in this info box. "Statistics Port x - Sent data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the transmit line for each port based on the key data in this info box. "Statistics port x - Received data packages" You can assess the data transmission on the receive line for each port based on the key data in this info box. The "Resources" tab For information about the resource consumption of the connections, refer to the "Resources" tab. Figure 3-24 "Resources" tab Number of connections Under "Number of connections", you will find information on the maximum number of connections and the number of connections not assigned. Connections The item "Connections" provides information on the number of connections reserved or used for ES, HMI, S7, OpenUser, web communication and other communication functions. Web server 60 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.7 Communication "Connections" tab The "Connections" tab contains information on the status of the communication connections. Figure 3-25 "Connections" tab Status Under "Status", you will find an overview of the communication connections being established and the already established communication connections. For each connection, the table contains the following information: status of the connection, local ID, slot of gateway, remote address (IP address), the corresponding remote address type, method of connection, and type of connection. Details Under "Details", you will find detailed information about the selected connection. Reference For an explanation of the error message displayed when a connection is interrupted or an attempt to establish a connection fails, refer to the STEP 7 online help. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 61 Web pages 3.8 Topology 3.8 Topology 3.8.1 Introduction Topology of the PROFINET devices The "Topology" web page provides information on the topological configuration and status of the PROFINET devices on your PROFINET IO system. There are three tabs for the following views: Graphical view (set and actual topology) Table view (actual topology only) Status overview (excluding topological correlations) You can print the table view and status overview. Before printing, use the print preview of your browser and, if necessary, correct the format. Set topology The set topology is displayed if you have topologically interconnected the connections in the configuration with STEP 7. This view identifies the topological assignment of PROFINET devices that have failed, the differences between the set and actual topology, and interchanged ports. Note The configured set topology is always displayed by default in the following scenarios: * When the "Topology" web page is called via the navigation bar * When you change from the overview of PROFINET IO devices on the "Module information" web page to the "Topology" web page by means of the "Topology" link. If a setpoint topology was not configured, the actual topology is displayed. Actual topology Displays the current topological structure of the "configured" PROFINET devices of a PROFINET IO system and the directly adjacent, non-configured PROFINET devices (display of the neighbor relationships, provided these can be determined; but the status of these adjacent PROFINET devices is not displayed). Web server 62 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.8 Topology 3.8.2 Graphical view Requirements For error-free operation of the topology, the following conditions must be met: You have made the Language settings (Page 31). In the Topology Editor of STEP 7, you configured the topological interconnection of ports (requirement for display of the set topology and the corresponding topological target connections). The project has been compiled in STEP 7. The project is completely loaded. Set and actual topology - graphical view You can select the interface with the topology you want to display (X1, X2, X3 or PROFINET communication modules such as CM 1542-1) at the top left of the "Topology" Web page. Figure 3-26 Graphical view - Set and actual topology Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 63 Web pages 3.8 Topology Meaning of the colored connections in the set/actual topology: Table 3- 3 Meaning of the colored connections in the set/actual topology Connection Meaning Set topology Actual topology Green The current actual connection matches the configured target Connections detected connection. Red Mismatch between the current actual connection and the configured target connection (e.g., port interchanged). - Yellow Connection diagnostics not possible. Causes: - * Malfunction of communication with a device (e.g., cable was removed) * Connection to a passive component (e.g., switches or cables) * Connection to devices/PROFINET devices on a different IO controller or IO subsystem. Configured and accessible PROFINET devices Configured and accessible PROFINET devices are displayed in dark gray. Connections indicate the ports used to connect the PROFINET devices of a station. Configured but inaccessible PROFINET devices Configured but inaccessible PROFINET devices are indicated in pink with red frame (e.g., device failure, cable disconnected). Deactivated devices All deactivated, configured PROFINET devices are displayed in light gray. Interchanged ports Interchanged ports are highlighted in red in the set topology view. The actual topology view indicates the actually connected ports, while the set topology view displays the configured target connections. Web server 64 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.8 Topology PROFINET devices of a different PROFINET IO subsystem In the set topology: A PROFINET device of a different PROFINET IO subsystem is indicated by means of a green link (or red link for interchanged ports) if it is available on the bus and directly adjacent to an accessible configured PROFINET device . If the PROFINET device of a different PROFINET IO subsystem is inaccessible, it is identified by means of a yellow connecting line. The connection between two PROFINET devices which both belong to a different PROFINET IO subsystem cannot be identified and is always indicated in yellow color. In the actual topology: The PROFINET device of a different PROFINET IO subsystem is not displayed unless it is directly adjacent to a configured PROFINET device. The PROFINET device is shown in light gray with a dashed line around the device header. The status of PROFINET devices of a different PROFINET IO subsystem is not displayed in the device header. Displaying faulty neighbor relationships Devices from which the relation data could not be read completely or with error are highlighted in light gray with a red frame. Note Displaying faulty neighbor relationships If a device does not have the matching firmware, the relationships cannot be displayed correctly. This means a firmware update of the respective device is required in case a faulty neighbor relationship is displayed. Views after changes to the configuration If a device fails, it remains at the same position in the "Set topology" view. This error state is indicated with a red border around the device header and the icon . If a device fails, it is displayed in the "Actual topology" view. This error state is indicated separately in the bottom area with a red border around the device header and the icon . Link between the "Topology" and "Module information" web pages The two web pages, "Topology" and "Module information", are linked. A click on the header of a selected module in the topology view automatically takes you to this module on the "Module information" web page. You can find additional information on this in the section Module information (Page 47). Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 65 Web pages 3.8 Topology Reference Additional examples for graphical topology view are available in the section Examples for graphical topology views (Page 69). 3.8.3 Tabular view Topology - tabular view The "Tabular view" always shows the "Actual topology". Figure 3-27 Topology - tabular view Meaning of the symbols relating to the status of the PROFINET devices Table 3- 4 Symbol Meaning of the symbols relating to the status of the PROFINET devices Meaning Configured and accessible PROFINET devices Unconfigured and accessible PROFINET devices Configured but inaccessible PROFINET devices Devices for which neighbor relations cannot be determined, or for which the neighbor relationship could not be read out completely, or only with errors Web server 66 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.8 Topology Meaning of the symbols relating to the module status of the PROFINET devices Table 3- 5 Symbol Meaning of the symbols relating to the module status of the PROFINET devices Color Meaning green Component is OK. gray Deactivated PROFIBUS slaves or PROFINET devices black State cannot be determined red * For example, "Status cannot be determined" is always displayed while the CPU is in STOP mode, or during startup evaluation of "Report system error" for all configured I/O modules and I/O systems after a CPU restart. * However, this status can also be displayed temporarily during operation if a diagnostics interrupt burst occurs at all modules. * It is not possible to determine the status of modules on a subsystem that is connected to a CP. Component failed or is not reachable * "Not reachable" is displayed for e.g. a module that has been removed or a module that has been configured but does not exist. green Maintenance required (Maintenance Required) yellow Maintenance demanded (Maintenance Demanded) red Error - component faulty or not available due to an incorrect type. - A module in a lower module level does not have the status "Component OK". Reference For additional information on the "Report System Error" function, refer to the STEP 7 online help, keyword: "System diagnostics". Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 67 Web pages 3.8 Topology 3.8.4 Status overview Topology - status overview The "Status overview" provides a clear presentation of all PROFINET IO devices/PROFINET devices (without connection relations) on one page. A quick error diagnostics is possible based on the symbols that show the module statuses. The overview also provides a link of the modules to the Web page Module information (Page 47). Figure 3-28 Topology - status overview Web server 68 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.8 Topology 3.8.5 Examples for graphical topology views The following section shows, as an example, some displays of the different topology views for a simple project. "Set topology" is OK Here you see the connections as they are configured in the topology editor by STEP 7. The configuration and wiring match. Figure 3-29 "Set topology" is OK "Actual topology" is OK Shows the actual layout of all configured devices that can be reached topologically. Figure 3-30 "Actual topology" is OK Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 69 Web pages 3.8 Topology "Set topology" with failed device If a device has failed in the meantime, this device remains in the same place in the "Set topology" view. The failed device is displayed with a red border around the device header icon. and the Figure 3-31 "Set topology" with failed device "Actual topology" with failed device In the "Actual topology" view, the device that has failed in the meantime is displayed separately in the bottom area of the view. The failed device is displayed with a red border icon. around the device header and the Figure 3-32 "Actual topology" with failed device Web server 70 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.8 Topology "Set topology" with interchanged ports If a port was interchanged for a configured, directly adjacent PROFINET device, this device remains in the same place in the "Set topology" view. The interchanged connection is indicated by a red line. Figure 3-33 "Set topology" with interchanged ports Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 71 Web pages 3.9 Tag status 3.9 Tag status Tag status The browser outputs the tag status on the web page of the same name. Note Saving the tag status as a bookmark When the page is exited, the entries made on it are not saved. If you want to monitor the same entered tags again later on, then create a bookmark in your Web browser for the "Tag status" page. Otherwise, you will have to enter the tags again when the page is reopened. If you have defined your user page as start page of the Web server, you cannot access the tag status via the saved bookmarks. You can find additional information in section Defining the user page as start page (Page 98). Note Selected tag addresses are copied to the URL The maximum number of characters for the URL of the tag status page is 2083. You can see the URL which corresponds to your current tag status page in the address bar of your Web browser. To monitor several tags, we recommend the use of the watch tables (Page 75). Figure 3-34 Tag status Web server 72 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.9 Tag status "Name" In the "Name" text box, enter the address of the tag whose behavior you want to monitor. This may be a symbolic or absolute address. PLC tags (inputs and outputs, bit memories, times and counters) and DB tags in blocks with standard access have an absolute and a symbolic address. DB tags in blocks with optimized access have a symbolic address and no absolute address. Example for access to the absolute address of a data block with standard access: The absolute address consists of the preceding address ID %, the number of the data block and the absolute address of the tags in the data block, separated by a period: %DB1.DBX1.0 = absolute addressing of the tags "DBX1.0" in the global data block "DB1". Invalid entries are displayed in red font. "Display format" Using the drop-down list box, select the desired display format of the respective tag. If the tag cannot be displayed in the desired format, it will be displayed in hexadecimal format. "Value" Under "Value", the value of the corresponding operand is displayed in the selected format. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 73 Web pages 3.9 Tag status "Modify value" You can change the value of tags and write them to the CPU in this column. To transfer several changed values in one operation, click the "Apply" button below the table. To be able to read values and write values to the CPU, you need to have configured a user with the appropriate access rights in STEP 7. If the value you entered is not valid (e.g. binary value in a BOOL field), the entry is not applied and the corresponding input field remains empty. A specific message relating to this is not output. You can change the values of the following data types: Bool, Byte DWord, LWord, Word Int, DInt, LInt, SInt, UDInt, UInt, ULInt, USInt Real, LReal LDT Counter, Date Time, LTime, Time_Of_Day, LTime_Of_Day, Timer S5Time Char, WChar, String Note The following generally applies: To be able to write data, the "Referrer" transfer must be activated in your Web browser (this is the default in all common browsers). Special considerations when changing languages You can change the language, e.g., from German to English, in the upper right corner. Note that the German mnemonics differ from those of the other languages. For monitoring available data types In principle, all data types of PLC tags that can be monitored in STEP 7 can also be monitored via the Web server. Note that structured data types such as ARRAY, STRUCT and DTL are not available as data types for PLC tags because of their data volume. Reference You can find additional information on the available data types in the STEP 7 online help, keyword: "Overview of the valid data types". Web server 74 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.10 Watch tables See also Configuring the Web server (Page 21) 3.10 Watch tables Watch tables The browser displays the content of the configured, web-enabled watch tables on the web page of the same name. Note Please note that you can observe a maximum of 50 of the watch tables configured in STEP 7 in the Web server. Each of these tables is displayed in the Web server with a maximum of 200 entries. If you are monitoring many large watch tables in the Web server, the update time may increase due to the large data volumes. The number of watch tables that you can monitor download into the CPU also depends on the size of the SIMATIC memory card used. Figure 3-35 Watch tables Selection Select one of the configured watch tables from the drop-down list. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 75 Web pages 3.10 Watch tables "Name" The symbolic name of the tag is shown in this info box. "Address" The absolute address of the tags is displayed within this info field (if present, e.g. for inputs or outputs; DB tags in blocks with optimized access have no absolute address). "Format" Select the display format of the respective tag from the drop-down list. "Value" This column shows the values in the corresponding display format. "Modify value" You can change the value of tags and write them to the CPU in this column. To be able to read values and write values to the CPU, you need to have configured a user with the appropriate access rights in STEP 7. If the value you entered is not valid (e.g. binary value in a BOOL field), the entry is not applied and the corresponding input field remains empty. A specific message relating to this is not output. Note The following generally applies: To be able to write data, the "Referrer" transfer must be activated in your Web browser (this is the default in all common browsers). Note that the comments are displayed in the project language of the STEP 7 project that is assigned to the current user interface language of the Web server. You can find out how to assign project languages to interface languages in section Language settings (Page 31). Reference You can find additional information on the available data types in the STEP 7 online help, keyword: "Overview of the valid data types". Web server 76 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11 User pages User pages In the "User pages" area of the Web server you can upload HTML pages you have created yourself for reading out data of the target system. Figure 3-36 User pages You create the pages with an HTML editor of your choice from which you generate data blocks (Web control DB and Fragment DBs) in STEP 7 and download them to the CPU. The "WWW" instruction synchronizes the user program with the Web server on the CPU and initializes the Web server. With the first call of the "WWW" instruction, the link to the user page is displayed on the web page of the CPU. A click on the link opens the user page in a new window. Note Write access to user pages allows the process parameters and, thus, the operation of the CPU to be influenced. To prevent external manipulation, always assign a password for users with write access to user pages in the user management. You will find information on user management in section Configuring the Web server (Page 21) under "Amending user management". Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 77 Web pages 3.11 User pages Requirements You have assigned symbolic names to the tags you want to use on your web page in STEP 7 . In the Inspector window under "Properties > General > Web server", you have at least: - Activated the Web server - Assigned read-only or read and write permissions to the users for user pages (see section Configuring the Web server (Page 21)) You have completed all necessary communication settings (IP address parameter, subnet mask, etc.). You have downloaded the configuration. You have created your user page in an HTML editor of your choice: - Automatic HTML pages, if you want to disable control of the page layout by means of the user program (requires at least one call of SFC 99). Changes in mode from RUN to STOP do not affect the call of the user pages. - Manual HTML pages, if you want to enable control of the page layout by means of the user program (cyclic call of SFC 99 required). Web server 78 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Creating user pages You can use any HTML editor to create your own user page(s). Make sure that your HTML code complies with the standards of the W3C (World Wide Web Consortium), because STEP 7 does not check the HTML syntax in any way. In addition to the simple HTML code, you can also use JavaScript commands in your user pages. Proceed as follows: 1. Create the HTML file for your user page with an HTML editor. To allow data from the CPU to be output on your web page, integrate the AWP commands as HTML comments (see section AWP commands (Page 81)). 2. Store the HTML file and all associated source files (e.g., *.gif, *.jpg, *.js, etc.) in a directory on your PG/PC and note the storage path. 3. Call the "WWW" instruction in STEP 7 and program it (see section Programming the WWW instruction (Page 96)). 4. Configure the user page in STEP 7 (see section Configuring user pages (Page 94)). In this way, you compile the contents of your HTML files, among other things, into data blocks. 5. Download the configuration and the user program to the CPU. 6. Open your user page with your display device by means of a web browser in the Web server of the CPU. Note Extensive HTML pages, especially those with a lot of images, take up a lot of space in the load memory. Make sure you select a SIMATIC memory card with enough memory to provide sufficient load memory. If the sum of the HTML pages > 1 MB, performance losses may occur as only 1 MB data is saved in the cache. We recommend that you create each individual file of an HTML page with a size not exceeding 512 KB; otherwise, problems can occur when sending the file from the Web server to the browser. You can view the size of the respective file in the file explorer of the directory. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 79 Web pages 3.11 User pages Updating user pages User pages are not updated automatically in the browser. You can program the HTML code so that the pages are updated automatically. Pages which read out data from the controller are always up-to-date due to regular updates. Note If the HTML page contains form fields for data input, automatic update can impair the correct data input by the user. To update the entire page automatically, you can add the following instruction to the area of your HTML page, whereby the number "10" stands for the update interval in seconds: References The description of a user page is available in the section Example of a user page (Page 100). Additional help for visualization with user pages is available in the application examples on the Internet: Creating and using your own Web pages for S7-1200 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58862931) Creating and using your own Web pages for S7-1200 / S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/68011496) Visualizing with user-defined Web pages on SIMATIC CPUs with PROFINET interface (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/44212999) How do you integrate the string contents in your user-defined Web page of the S7-1500 CPU as of Firmware V1.6? (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98754370) You will find more information on JavaScript commands in the ECMAScript specification on the Internet (http://www.ecma-international.org/ecma-262/5.1/). For more information about how to automatically update web pages and how to incorporate user pages with relative path names, refer to the FAQ with entry ID 62543256 on the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/62543256) Internet page. Web server 80 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.1 AWP commands Overview Automation Web Programming (AWP) commands are a special command syntax for data exchange between CPU and user page (HTML file). AWP commands are entered as HTML comments and offer the following options for your user pages: Reading PLC tags Writing PLC tags Reading special tags Writing special tags Defining enum types Assigning enum types to tags Defining data block fragments Importing data block fragments Accessing the values of an array Accessing the values of a PLC tag of STRUCT data type General syntax All AWP commands, except for the command for reading a PLC tag, have this structure: Files including AWP commands: must be UTF-8 encoded. To define UTF-8 as character set of the page, add the following line to your HTML code: Note Saving the HTML page Make sure that you save the file in the editor in UTF 8 character encoding as well. may not include the following sequence: ]]> may not include the following sequence outside "read tag areas" (:="":): depending on the use, must identify special characters in tag names or data block names with character escape sequences or quotation marks are case-sensitive should be additionally enclosed by JavaScript comments ("/*...*/") in JavaScript files Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 81 Web pages 3.11 User pages Overview of AWP commands Table 3- 6 AWP commands Function Representation :=: Reading PLC tags Writing PLC tags Reading special tags Writing special tags Defining enum types Assigning enum types to tags Defining data block fragments Importing data block fragments Accessing the values of an array Accessing the values of a PLC tag of STRUCT data type 3.11.1.1 ... PLC tags Introduction to PLC tags User pages can read PLC tags from the CPU and write data to the CPU. To do so, PLC tags must: be enclosed by double quotation marks ("..."). also be enclosed by single quotation marks ('" ... "') or with quotation marks masked with a backslash ("\" ... "\"). be specified by a PLC tag name. if the PLC tag name includes the characters \ (backslash) or ', identify these characters with the escape sequence \\ or \' as normal characters of the PLC tag name. be enclosed with single quotation marks ('...'), if an absolute address (input, output, bit memory) is used in the AWP command. Web server 82 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Reading PLC tags These out-tags (output direction as seen from the controller) are inserted at any place in the HTML text with the syntax described below. Syntax :=: corresponds to the tag to be read from your STEP 7 project and can be a simple shared tag or a complete tag path to a structural element. Make sure that you use the name of the data block and not its number when you use data blocks. Examples :="Conveying speed": :="My_datablock".bitmemory1: :=%MW100: Reading tags of the String and Character type Below, these types of quotation marks are used in the explanation: single quotation marks ('), double quotation marks ("). As of firmware V1.6, with the "Read PLC tags" function, the CPU outputs tags of the String or Character type enclosed in single quotation marks to the browser. For example: "Varname".MyString = ABC string tag You read the tag in HTML using the function :="Varname".MyString: The Web server outputs the character string 'ABC' to the browser Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 83 Web pages 3.11 User pages Using String or Character tags in expressions On your HTML page, you use an expression in which the character string for reading a tag is enclosed in quotation marks, for example in forms. Possible HTML code used: If you read the displayed value for the "value" attribute from a PLC tag in this expression, the HTML code appears as follows: By reading the PLC tag, the Web server outputs the value 'ABC'. In HTML, the code is then represented as follows: If you have used single quotation marks instead of double quotation marks in your HTML code to enclose the attributes, the Web server passes on the content of the tags enclosed in two single quotation marks to the browser. As a result of this, the browser does not output the content of the String or Character tag, since two consecutive single quotation marks each form a closed sequence. The values to be read are located between these sequences and are not output by the browser. In this context, note in particular that the character string with double quotation marks is not identical to two single quotation marks even if they appear to be identical. Note The code is not adapted automatically during an update to firmware as of V1.6. Adapt your HTML code if you have used single quotation marks to enclose attributes for the "Read PLC tags" function. Figure 3-37 Example of HTML code with attribute in single quotation marks Web server 84 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Writing PLC tags These in-tags (input direction as seen from the controller) are set on the browser page. This can take place in a form on your HTML page, for example, with text input or list selection boxes that correspond to the tags that can be written. The tags are either set in the HTTP Header (per cookie or POST method) or in the URL (GET method) by the browser in the HTTP request and are then written by the Web server into the respective PLC tag. Note Write access during operation For data to be written from a user page to the CPU, a user must have the required write permissions and be logged on as this user. This applies to all write accesses of web pages to the CPU. Syntax If the name of the tag that you are using for the web application is not identical with the name of the PLC tag, you can assign it to a PLC tag with the "Use" parameter. Examples with HTML input boxes

Examples with HTML drop-down list Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 85 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.1.2 Special tags Special tags Special tags are mainly the HTTP tags specified in the definitions of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). Special tags are also used for cookies and server tags. Reading special tags The Web server can read PLC tags and transfer them to special tags in the HTTP response header. You can, for example, read out a path name from a PLC tag to redirect the URL to another storage location with the special tag "HEADER:Storage location". Syntax corresponds to the type of special tag. Options are: HEADER COOKIE_VALUE COOKIE_EXPIRES corresponds to the name of the HEADER tag or the cookie: HEADER tags: - Status: HTTP status code (if no other value was set, status code 302 is returned). - Location: path for redirection to another page. Status code 302 must be set. - Retry-After: time for which the service is most likely not available. Status code 503 must be set. COOKIE_VALUE:name: value of the named cookie. COOKIE_EXPIRES:name: expiration time of the named cookie in seconds. Examples The HTTP HEADER tag is written to the PLC tag of the same name: If the name of the special tag is not identical with the name of the PLC tag, you can assign it to a PLC tag with the "Use" parameter: Web server 86 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Writing special tags The Web server gives you the option to write values of special tags written in the HTTP header in the CPU. You can, for example, save information on the cookie of a user page or on the user that accesses a page in STEP 7. Syntax corresponds to the type of special tag. Options are: HEADER SERVER COOKIE_VALUE corresponds to the name of the HEADER tag or the cookie: HEADER tags: - Accept-Language: accepted or preferred language - User-Agent: information on the browser - Authorization: credentials for a requested resource SERVER tags: - current_user_id: Indicates whether a user is logged on: current_user_id=0: No user is logged on / access by "Everybody" user. current_user_id=1: At least one user is logged on. - current_user_name: user name of the logged-on user COOKIE_VALUE:name: value of the named cookie. Examples The HTTP-SERVER tag is written to the PLC tag of the same name: The HTTP-SERVER tag is written to the PLC tag "My_userID": Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 87 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.1.3 Enum types Enumeration types (enum types) Enum types convert numerical values from the PLC program into texts or vice versa. The numerical values may also be assigned for use with several languages. Define enum types You can define enum types in your user pages and assign the values in an AWP command. Syntax Examples To store German values as HTML file in the "de" folder of the HTML directory: is the symbolic tag name from the user program; the previously specified name of the enum type. Example for a declaration Web server 88 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Example for use when reading a tag ...

The current value of "Alarm" is :="Alarm":

If the value of "Alarm" in the CPU is 2, the HTML page shows 'The current value of "Alarm" is container is empty' because the definition of the enum type assigns the numerical value 2 to the character sequence "Container is empty". Example for use when writing a tag ... The value 1 is written to the PLC tag "Alarm" because the definition of the enum type assigns the numerical value 1 the text "Container is full". Keep in mind that the name specified in "AWP_In_Variable" must be exactly the same in "AWP_Enum_Ref". Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 89 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.1.4 Fragments Fragments Fragments are "short paragraphs" of a website that the CPU processes separately. Fragments are usually entire pages, but they can be individual elements, such as files (e.g. images) or documents. Note In each fragment in which enum texts are referenced by a PLC tag, this PLC tag must be assigned to the enum type name with the appropriate AWP command. Defining fragments A fragment extends to the beginning of the next fragment or to the end of the file. Syntax This command specifies the start of a fragment. Specifies the name of the fragment. The name must start with a letter [a-zA-Z] or an underscore ( _ ). This first character can be followed by letters, underscores or numbers [0-9]. Specifies the type of the fragment. - "manual": The user program is notified of the request for a fragment and can react accordingly. The function of the fragment must be controlled with STEP 7 and the tags of the control DB. - "automatic": The page is automatically processed (default) You can specify a numerical ID for the fragment. If no ID is assigned, the fragment is automatically assigned an ID. For manual pages (=manual), the fragment can be addressed with this ID in the user program of the CPU. Note ID assignment Set the ID as low as possible because the highest ID influences the size of the Web control DB. - "visible": The contents of the fragment are displayed on the user page (default). - "hidden": The contents of the fragment are not displayed on the user page. Web server 90 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Importing fragments You can specify a fragment in an HTML page and import this fragment into other websites. Note Ensure that no AWP command for importing fragments is positioned between an enum assignment and enum usage, because this import can result in the enum assignment being located in a different fragment than the enum usage. Example A company logo is to be displayed on all websites of a web application. The HTML code for the fragment that displays the company logo exists only once. You can import the fragment as often and into as many HTML files as necessary. Syntax corresponds to the name of the fragment to be imported. Example HTML code within a website that creates a fragment for displaying an image:

HTML code that imports the created fragment into another website: 3.11.1.5 Arrays Arrays The Web server provides the user program commands AWP_Start_Array and AWP_End_Array for accessing all values of an array. Only one-dimensional arrays are supported. Multidimensional arrays of the form array[x][y] are not supported. Syntax ... Content of the array, utilized keywords: ArrayIndex and value.. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 91 Web pages 3.11 User pages Parameter defines the name of the array with the elements you want to access. - You require the DB name and the name of the array corresponding to the data block structure defined in STEP 7. - The name must be within single or double quotation marks. - The DB name is within double quotation marks. Index of an array element Value of an array element Example The example reads all elements of the "MyArray" structure in the "DB_Name" data block of the CPU and displays the index and the values of the tags on the user-defined web page. Index: :=ArrayIndex: Value: :=value: The code indicated above generates the following display: Index: 1 Value: 42 Index: 2 Value: 43 Index: 3 Value: 44 Web server 92 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Representation of arrays of the BOOL data type The output of arrays of the BOOL type is always filled to the next full 8 bits. This particular feature only occurs with BOOL arrays. Example: "DB_1".bitArray is a BOOL array with 5 elements. :=ArrayIndex: -> :=value: Edition: 0 -> Value from "DB_1".bitArray[0] 1 -> Value from "DB_1".bitArray[1] 2 -> Value from "DB_1".bitArray[2] 3 -> Value from "DB_1".bitArray[3] 4 -> Value from "DB_1".bitArray[4] 5 -> 0 6 -> 0 7 -> 0 3.11.1.6 Structures Structures The Web server provides user program commands for accessing structures in order to access the values of a PLC tag of the STRUCT data type. Syntax ... Content of structure ... Parameter defines the name of the structure with the elements you want to access. - You require the DB name and the name of the structure corresponding to the data block structure defined in STEP 7. - The name must be within single or double quotation marks. - The DB name is within double quotation marks. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 93 Web pages 3.11 User pages Example The example reads elements of the "MyStruct" structure in the "DB_Name" data blocks of the CPU and displays the value of the tag on the user-defined web page. :=A: :=B: :=C: The code indicated above corresponds to the following commands: :="DB_Name".MyStruct.A: :="DB_Name".MyStruct.B: :="DB_Name".MyStruct.C: 3.11.2 Configuring user pages Configuring user pages Figure 3-38 Configuring user pages in STEP 7 Web server 94 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Proceed as follows to configure the user pages in STEP 7: 1. Select the CPU in the device configuration. 2. Open the settings in the Inspector window of the CPU under "Properties > General > Web server". 3. In the area "User pages" under "HTML directory", select the folder on your display device in which you have saved your HTML page. 4. Enter the name of the HTML page under "Start HTML page" that is to open when you start the application. 5. You can also specify a name for your application under "Application name". This name is used to further divide or group the webpages. If an application name already exists, the URL is displayed in the following format: http://a.b.c.d/awp//.html 6. In the "Extended" area, enter the file extensions that have to be checked for AWP commands in input box "Files with dynamic contents". By default, STEP 7 analyses files with the extensions ".js", ".htm" and ".html". Here you can enter other file extensions that you have used when creating your user page. 7. You can accept the number for the Web DB and the fragment DB start number or you can assign a new number of your choice that is not assigned. 8. Click the button "Create blocks" to create data blocks from the source files. The created data blocks are stored in the STEP 7 project tree in the folder "System blocks > Web server". These data blocks consist of a control data block (Web control DB) that controls the display of the webpages and one or several data block fragments (fragment DBs) with the compiled webpages. 9. In the network view, select the CPU you want to download and select the command "Download to device" in the "Online" menu to download the blocks. The compilation of the blocks is implicitly triggered before the download. If errors are signaled during this process, they must be remedied before you can download the configuration. Deleting data blocks Click the "Delete block" button to delete previously generated data blocks. STEP 7 deletes the Web Control DB and all fragment DBs from the project containing your user pages. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 95 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.3 Programming the WWW instruction The WWW instruction The WWW instruction initializes the Web server of the CPU or synchronizes the user pages with the user program in the CPU. The Web control DB is the input parameter for the WWW instruction and specifies the content of the pages as they are displayed in the fragment DBs as well as the status and control information. STEP 7 creates the Web control DB when you click the button "Create blocks". Note DB number of the web control DB. If you change the DB number of the DB 333, the user pages in the Web server can no longer be reached at renewed downloading into the CPU. Error code W#16#007F is output at the parameter RET_VAL. Therefore observe the default setting DB 333 for the Web Control DB. If you want to change the DB number nevertheless, you have to switch the CPU POWEROFF POWER ON, so that the user pages in the Web server can be reached. Programming the WWW instruction The user program must execute the WWW instruction so that the user pages can be accessed in the Web server. Table 3- 7 WWW instruction LAD/FBD SCL Description ret_val Access to user pages by means :=WWW(ctrl_db:=uint_in_) of the Web server ; Parameters The table below shows the parameters of the WWW instruction. Table 3- 8 Parameters Parameters Declaration Data type Description CTRL_DB Input DB_WWW Data block that describes the user pages (Web control DB) RET_VAL Output INT Error information Web server 96 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages RET_VAL parameter Table 3- 9 RET_VAL Error code (W#16#...) Explanation 0000 No error has occurred. There are no pending website requests that must be released by the user program. 00xy x: indicates if an error occurred during initialization of the Web control DB (CTRL_DB): x=0: No errors occurred. x=1: Error(s) occurred. The error is encoded in the "CTRL_DB.last_error" byte of the Web control DB. y: Number of the pending request. Several requests are possible (e.g., request "0" and "1" are pending: y="3"). y="1": Request "0" y="2": Request "1" y="4": Request "2" y="8": Request "3" 803A The specified Web Control DB does not exist on the CPU. 8081 Incorrect version or incorrect format of the Web Control DB. 80C1 There are no resources available to initialize the Web application. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 97 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.4 Defining the user page as start page Defining the user page as start page In addition to the default intro page, you can also define the start page of your user pages as the start page of the Web server. Figure 3-39 Example of user page as start page of the Web server Requirements The following requirements must be met before the user page is displayed as the start page of the Web server: You have configured the user page as the start page. You have configured a user in STEP 7 whom you have assigned at least the authorization "... open user-defined web pages". The CPU is in RUN mode. Web server 98 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Procedure Proceed as follows to define the user pages in STEP 7 as start page of the Web server: 1. Select the CPU in the device configuration. 2. Open the settings in the Inspector window of the CPU under "Properties > General > Web server". 3. Select the entry "AWP1" in the area "Entry page" under "Select entry page". Figure 3-40 Setting user page in STEP 7 as start page 4. Download the configuration to the CPU. If you now enter the IP address of the CPU in the browser, a connection is automatically established to your user pages. If you want to access the web pages of your CPU again, link the web pages from your user pages, via the URL "http://a.b.c.d./Portal/Portal.mwsl?PriNav=Start" or "https://a.b.c.d/Portal/Portal.mwsl?PriNav=Start" for example. In this case, the information "a.b.c.d" represents, as an example, the IP address of the configured CPU. Example of link in HTML: SIMATIC web pages Note If you define your user page as start page of the Web server, all direct access to the web pages of the CPU is disabled. This applies also to the bookmarks you saved for the web pages of the CPU as well as the page for reading out the service data. Reading out service data If you define your user page as start page of the Web server, all direct access to the web pages for reading out the service data is also disabled. If you want to continue to read out service data via the Web server when servicing is required, here is how you can link the service data page directly to your user page. Just as for the web pages of the CPU, link the service data page e.g. via the URL "http://a.b.c.d/save_service_data" or "https://a.b.c.d/save_service_data", the "a.b.c.d" here is an example of the IP address of the configured CPU. Example of link in HTML: Service data Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 99 Web pages 3.11 User pages Reference You can find additional information on the topic of user page as start page in the FAQ with entry ID 67184104 on the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67184104) Internet page. 3.11.5 Example of a user page 3.11.5.1 Website for monitoring and controlling a wind turbine Example of a user page Here you see a user page for monitoring and controlling a wind turbine: Figure 3-41 Overview of user page wind turbine The user page was created in English in this example, but you can select any language you wish when you create your own user page. In this application, each wind turbine of the wind farm has a data block in STEP 7 with specific data for the respective location and the turbine. The user page gives you the option to access the turbine remotely with a display device. A user can open the standard websites for a CPU of a specific wind turbine and go to the "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor" user page to view the turbine data. A user with the corresponding access permissions can also set the turbine into the manually controlled mode and thus control the tags for speed, orientation and angle of attack of the turbine by means of the website. The user can also specify a brake value regardless of manual or automatic control of the turbine. STEP 7 checks the Boolean values for override of the automatic control and, if set, uses the values for speed, orientation and angle of attack of the turbine as defined by the user. Web server 100 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages Files used Three files are used in the application example: Wind_turbine.html: The user page in the figure shown above. The control data is accessed by AWP commands. Wind_turbine.css: The Cascading Style Sheet which includes the formatting specifications of the user page. The use is optional but can simplify the design of the user page. Wind_turbine.jpg: The background image displayed on the user page. The use of images is optional, user pages with lots of images require a lot more memory in the load memory. These files are not part of your installation but they are described as an example below. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 101 Web pages 3.11 User pages Implementation The user page uses AWP commands to read out values from the CPU as well as writing values to it. The user page also uses AWP commands for the definition of enum types, such as the assignment of tags to enum types for handling the ON/OFF settings. The user page is structured as follows: Header of the website with number and location of the wind turbine. Read-out power output. Atmospheric conditions at the turbine, wind speed, wind direction and current temperature are displayed. Manual override: Activates manual override of the turbine. To make manual settings for speed, orientation and angle of attack, the STEP 7 user program requires that manual override has been activated. Override of the orientation: Activates manual override of the turbine orientation. Override of the angle of attack: Activates manual override of the angle of attack of the rotor blades. By clicking this button, you transfer the override settings to the CPU. Manual setting of a percentage value for braking. The setting "Manual override" is not required to enter a brake value. Figure 3-42 Overview of user page wind turbine The user page also uses an AWP command which writes the special tag into the tag table; it includes the user ID of the user who currently accesses the page. Web server 102 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.5.2 Reading and displaying data from the CPU Example HTML code for reading out and displaying data from the CPU This part of the HTML code is used for displaying the power output on the user side. The text "Power Output:" is displayed on the left-hand side; on the right-hand side, the value of the tags for the power output including the unit ("KW") is displayed. The AWP command :="Data_block_1".PowerOutput executes the reading operation. The data block is referenced by its symbolic name here and not by its number ("Data_block_1" instead of "DB1"). The code used in the example is:

Power output:

:="Data_block_1".PowerOutput: KW

See also PLC tags (Page 82) Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 103 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.5.3 Using enum types Definition of enum types The described user page uses enum types in three locations. "On" or "Off" is displayed for a Boolean value at these locations. The enum type for "On" results in a value of 1; the enum type for "Off" results in a value of 0. The following excerpts from the HTML code of the user page show the declaration of an enum type with the name "OverrideStatus" and the values "0" and "1" for "Off" or "On" as well as the specification of an enum type reference of "OverrideStatus" for the tag "ManualOverrideEnable" in the data block "Data_block_1". Note Assignment of enum types If the user page writes into a tag by using an enum type, there has to be a declaration "AWP_In_Variable" for each "AWP_Enum_Ref" declaration. The code used in the example is: The following code describes a display box for displaying the current status of "ManualOverrideEnable". A normal read command for tags is used but because of the declared and referenced enum type, the website displays the values "On" and "Off" instead of "1" and "0".

Manual override: :="Data_block_1".ManualOverrideEnable:

The following code describes a drop-down list for changing "ManualOverrideEnable" by the user. The drop-down list consists of the "Yes" and "No" options that are assigned to the "On" or "Off" values by means of the enum type reference. If you make no selection, the status remains the same. The drop-down list is included in the form on the website. The form is uploaded, when the user clicks on the "Send" button. If the user has selected "Yes", the value "1" is written in the tag "ManualOverrideEnable" in the "Data_block_1" data block; if the user has selected "No", the value "0" is written. Web server 104 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.5.4 Writing user inputs into the controller Setting options The user page "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor" includes different AWP commands for writing data into the controller. A user with the corresponding access permissions can control the wind turbine manually, activate the override for the turbine speed and the turbine orientation as well as the angle of attack of the rotor blades with the declaration of different "AWP_In_Variable" write commands. The user can also specify floating-point numbers for turbine speed, orientation angle of attack and percentage of braking. The user page uses an HTTP command in the format "POST" to write the tags into the controller. The code used in the example for setting the brake value is: ...

Braking:

This excerpt from the HTML code first defines a "AWP_In_Variable" for the "Data_block_1" data block which enables the user page to write any number of tags into the data block. The text "Braking:" is displayed on the left-hand side; on the right-hand side is a box in which the user can make entries for the "Braking" tag in the data block. The user page reads out the actual braking value from the controller and displays it in the text box. A user with the corresponding access permissions can then write a brake value that controls the braking process into the data block of the CPU. Note Declaration of data blocks If you declare an entire data block by means of a "AWP_In_Variable", each tag in the data block can be written by means of the user page. If only certain tags in the data block are to be writable, you declare this specifically using , for example. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 105 Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.5.5 Writing special tags Using special tags The user page "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor" writes the special tag "Server:current_user_id" into a tag of the CPU. The tag value contains the value "1" if a user is logged on and "0" if a user is not logged on. In this example, a user is logged on, so the tag value is set to "1". The special tag is written into the CPU by the user page and does not need a user interface. The code used in the example is: Web server 106 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages 3.11.5.6 HTML code of the user page "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor" The complete HTML code of the example user page "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor" as well as the used Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) is listed below. Wind_turbine.html --> Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 107 Web pages 3.11 User pages Remote monitoring of wind turbines Web server 108 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.11 User pages

Remote Wind Turbine Monitor: Turbine #:="Data_block_1".TurbineNumber:
Wind speed:	:="Data_block_1".WindSpeed: km/h
Wind direction:	:="Data_block_1".WindDirection: deg.
Temperature:	:="Data_block_1".Temperature: deg. C
Power output:	:="Data_block_1".PowerOutput: kW
Manual override: :="Data_block_1".ManualOverrideEnable:	Set:
Turbine speed:	RPM
Yaw override: :="Data_block_1".YawOverride:	Set:
Turbine yaw:	deg.
Pitch override: :="Data_block_1".PitchOverride:	Set:
Blade pitch:	deg.

Braking:	% Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 109 Web pages 3.11 User pages

Wind_turbine.css BODY { background-image: url('./Wind_turbine.jpg') background-position: 0% 0%; background-repeat: no-repeat; background-size: cover; H2 { font-family: Arial; font-weight: bold; font-size: 14.0pt; color: #FFFFFF; margin-top:0px; margin-bottom:10px; } P { font-family: Arial; font-weight: bold; color: #FFFFFF; font-size: 12.0pt; margin-top:0px; margin-bottom:0px; } TD.Text { font-family: Arial; font-weight: bold; color: #FFFFFF; font-size: 12.0pt; margin-top:0px; margin-bottom:0px; } Web server 110 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.12 Filebrowser 3.12 Filebrowser Requirements Access rights must be assigned for the user in the user management. Filebrowser The browser displays the content of the SIMATIC memory card on the "Filebrowser" web page. This means, for example, that you can read and edit the log files generated by the CPU without having to use STEP 7. Figure 3-43 Filebrowser view The Filebrowser lists all existing files and directories on the SIMATIC memory card. You can download, delete, rename and upload the files. You can create, delete and rename the directories. Note The Filebrowser only grants you read access to the "DataLogs", "Backups" and "UserFiles" directories. Exception system files The system files include the job file and all special directories including their contents to which the job file refers. System files are not displayed, and cannot be changed or deleted. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 111 Web pages 3.13 DataLogs 3.13 DataLogs DataLogs On the DataLogs web page, you can view all the DataLogs that you have created. You can sort the DataLogs according to individual parameters in ascending or descending order. For this purpose, click on one of the parameters in the column header: Name Size Changed You can download the relevant DataLog file by clicking the file name. The "Active" column shows whether the respective DataLog file is used (is active) or not. When the DataLog file is active, you can call (download) and empty the relevant DataLog file by clicking the icon . The file must be closed. The empty DataLog file is still maintained in the list of DataLogs. You delete the DataLog file by clicking the closed. icon in the "Delete" column. The file must be You close an opened DataLog file in STEP 7 by using the "DataLogClose" instruction. Figure 3-44 DataLogs Web server 112 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.13 DataLogs 3.13.1 Automated reading out of DataLogs In addition to the downloading of individual DataLogs via the user interface of the Web server, you can download, read out and archive DataLogs. Automatic downloading of DataLogs is realized either by the execution of scripts in, for example, Bash or on your HTML user page via JavaScript. A typical application for this functionality is the daily reading out and archiving of DataLogs from one or more CPUs at a specific time. Calling up of the DataLogs from the SIMATIC memory card The CPU makes a URL in the following format available so that you can download DataLogs automatically from the SIMATIC memory card of your CPU: http[s]://[ip]/DataLogs?Action=List Enter the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS), for example https://192.168.2.132/DataLogs?Action=LIST. Subsequently call up the URL in your browser or command line interpreter. The URL returns a list of the DataLogs on the SIMATIC memory card. Each entry returns the URL by which you download the corresponding DataLog. For simple syntax analysis of the list by command line interpreters (such as Bash) or webbased programming languages (such as JavaScript) the individual URLs are separated by a line break . The following example shows the syntax of two URLs that access the DataLog files Test.txt and Test2.txt: /DataLogs?Path=/DataLogs/Test.txt&Action=DOWNLOAD&E=1 /DataLogs?Path=/DataLogs/Test2.txt&Action=DOWNLOAD&E=1 When the URLs are called successfully, the CPU returns the status code 200 OK. The CPU also returns this status code if no DataLogs exist on the SIMATIC memory card. Note Access authorization to the CPU for the reading out of data In order to download DataLogs from the CPU, the user has to dispose of reading rights on the CPU. If the user does not have the required rights, the CPU returns the status code 403 FORBIDDEN in the HTTP Response. Downloading of the DataLogs via Bash scripts The following example shows how you can download DataLogs automatically from the CPU by using a Bash script. Replace the URL of the example by the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS). wget --content-disposition -i "http://192.168.2.132/DataLogs?Action=LIST" Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 113 Web pages 3.13 DataLogs Downloading of the DataLogs via JavaScript The following example shows how you can download DataLogs automatically by using JavaScript. Replace the URL of the example by the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS). DataLog JavaScript Test

DataLog JavaScript Test

Web server 114 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.14 UserFiles 3.14 UserFiles Introduction You read and write with the instructions "FileReadC" (Compact Read Data of a File) or "FileWriteC" (Compact Write Data to a File) in STEP 7 ASCII files (files in binary format). Requirements You need to save the UserFiles in the "UserFiles" directory on the SIMATIC memory card. You specify the storage location in the path of the "FileReadC" or "FileWriteC" instruction. Path and file name for UserFiles have to fulfill the following rules: The file name must not be longer than 55 characters. The following characters are permitted for the directory and file name: 0 to 9, a to z in upper- and lower-case, "-" and "_" The path name must not start with "/", "\" or "." The path name must not contain ".." Examples: UserFiles\Lift16_DataBase.txt UserFiles\2017-04-13_ErrorLog.bin Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 115 Web pages 3.14 UserFiles "User files" Web page The browser displays the content of the SIMATIC memory card, directory UserFiles\ on the "User files" Web page. You can sort the UserFiles according to the individual parameters in ascending or descending order. To do this, click on one of the parameters in the column header: Name Size Changed You can download, delete, and upload files. You download the UserFile by clicking the file name. By clicking on the Figure 3-45 icon, you can delete the UserFile. The file must be closed. User files view NOTICE Size UserFiles When you open a large UserFile through this Web page, the processing times of the instructions that process this file can increase notably. Web server 116 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.14 UserFiles 3.14.1 Reading or upload user files automatically In addition to the Web server's user interface, you can automatically list, delete, download and upload UserFiles. Use JavaScript or Bash for this, for example. Opening UserFiles from the SIMATIC memory card The CPU makes a URL in the following format available so that you can list UserFiles automatically from the SIMATIC memory card of your CPU: http[s]://[ip]/UserFiles?Action=List Enter the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS), e.g. https://192.168.2.132/UserFiles?Action=LIST. Subsequently call up the URL in your browser or command line interpreter. The URL returns a list of the UserFiles on the SIMATIC memory card. Each entry returns the URL by which you download or delete the corresponding UserFile from the CPU. The actions to be performed are separated by a vertical line "|". For simple syntax analysis of the list by web-based programming languages (such as JavaScript), the individual URLs are separated by a line break . The following example shows the syntax of two URLs that access the UserFiles File1.csv and File2.csv: File1.csv|/UserFiles?Name=File1.csv&Action=DOWNLOAD&E=1|/UserFiles?Name=File1.csv&Acti on=DELETE&E=1 File2.csv|/UserFiles?Name=File2.csv&Action=DOWNLOAD&E=1|/UserFiles?Name=File2.csv&Acti on=DELETE&E=1 When the URLs are called successfully, the CPU returns the status code 200 OK. The CPU also returns this status code if there are no UserFiles on the SIMATIC memory card. Note Access authorization to the CPU for the reading out of data In order to download UserFiles from the CPU, the user must have reading rights for the CPU. If the user does not have the required rights, the CPU returns the status code 403 FORBIDDEN in the HTTP Response. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 117 Web pages 3.14 UserFiles Uploading UserFiles to the SIMATIC memory card The CPU makes a URL in the following format available so that you can upload UserFiles automatically to the SIMATIC memory card of your CPU: http[s]://[ip]/UserFiles?Action=UPLOAD The following example shows how you can upload a UserFile to your HTML user page automatically using JavaScript. Replace the URL of the example by the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS). UserFiles Upload When the upload of the UserFile is successful, the CPU returns the status code 201 CREATED. If the UserFile already exists on the SIMATIC memory card, the CPU returns the status code 409 CONFLICT. Note Access authorization to the CPU for uploading data In order to download UserFiles to the CPU, the user must have write rights for the CPU. If the user does not have the required rights, the CPU returns the status code 403 FORBIDDEN in the HTTP Response. Downloading UserFiles via Bash scripts The following example shows how you can download UserFiles automatically from the CPU using a Bash script. Replace the URL of the example by the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS). wget --content-disposition -i "http://192.168.2.132/UserFiles?Action=LIST" Web server 118 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.15 Online backup Downloading UserFiles via JavaScript The following example shows how you can download UserFiles automatically using JavaScript. Replace the URL of the example by the correct IP address of the interface of your CPU at this URL and use the appropriate transfer protocol (HTTP or HTTPS). UserFiles JavaScript Test

UserFiles JavaScript Test

Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 119 Web pages 3.15 Online backup 3.15 Online backup Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration You can back up a CPU configuration using the Web server with the corresponding access rights. If necessary, you can also restore this configuration at a later time using the Web server. You can create as many backups as you want and store a variety of configurations for a CPU. NOTICE Prior to every restoration of the CPU configuration, always first perform an online backup of the current CPU configuration and save this backup file to a local directory of your PC. This ensures that you can undo a restoration which failed (e.g. due to a damaged backup file) or which does not show the desired result. Note You can also perform online backup and restoration of the CPU configuration in STEP 7 (see online help for STEP 7, keyword: "Creating a backup of an S7 CPU"). With a backup using STEP 7, the backup file is saved within the STEP 7 project. With a backup using the Web server, the backup file is saved to a local directory of your PG/PC (e.g. "Downloads" directory). Web server backup files cannot be restored via STEP 7, nor can STEP 7 backup files be restored directly using the Web server. To restore a STEP 7 backup file using the Web server, first save the STEP 7 backup file to a local directory of your PG/PC (e.g. "Downloads" directory). From there, you can restore the backup with the Web server. Requirements You access the CPU via the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS". A valid CA-signed certificate is installed in the Web browser; see section Configuring the Web server (Page 21). Web server 120 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.15 Online backup Online backup Figure 3-46 Online backup Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 121 Web pages 3.15 Online backup Perform online backup of the configuration To perform an online backup of the CPU configuration, proceed as follows: 1. Click the "Create online backup" button in the "PLC backup" area. 2. If the CPU is in RUN mode, the following alarm is output: "Creation of an online backup requires PLC STOP. Do you want to set the PLC to STOP mode?" Acknowledge the alarm output by clicking "OK". The CPU is set to STOP mode and online backup is performed. (If you click "Cancel", the CPU remains in the current mode and the online backup is canceled.) 3. Save the backup file to a local directory of your PC. 4. Set the CPU back to RUN mode ("RUN" button in the "CPU operator panel" area of the start page). Scope of the backup The backup includes all data needed to restore a particular state of a CPU, i.e. the specific combination of the configuration of the CPU with the current values of the user-related retentive data. The following data of the configuration of the CPU is backed up: The contents of the SIMATIC memory card, e.g. configuration, program code, recipes and archives, DataLogs The following user-relevant retentive data is backed up: Retentive memory areas of data blocks, bit memories, counters and timers Front-panel settings, dynamic IP configuration data, operating hours counters, retentive Motion Control sensor data Note: Entries in the diagnostic buffer are not included in the backup. The current time of day is not backed up for a SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU. The entire contents of the SIMATIC memory card are backed up, i.e. any data stored on the card (e.g. PDF files, GSD files). The backup file is assigned the name of the CPU and the project with the time and date of the backup, e.g. "2015-09-10_11-01_03_online backup_PLC69_machineControl.s7pbkp". The backup file of an F-CPU also contains the collective signature of the safety program in the file name. Check whether it is the expected F-collective signature. You can rename the backup, but you cannot make any changes to the contents of the backup. Web server 122 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.15 Online backup Restore the configuration To restore the CPU configuration, follow these steps: 1. Enter the password of the currently logged-in user in the "PLC restore" area. 2. Click the "Browse" button and select the backup file of the configuration that you want to restore. 3. Click "Load online backup". 4. If the CPU is in RUN mode, the following alarm is output: "Download online backup to device. The CPU is set to STOP and the contents of the CPU will be overwritten. Do you want to continue?" If the CPU is already in STOP mode, the following alarm is output: "Download online backup to device. The contents of the CPU will be overwritten. Do you want to continue?" Acknowledge the alarm output by clicking "OK". The CPU is set to "STOP" mode if required, and the online backup is downloaded. (If you click "Cancel", the CPU remains in the current mode and downloading is canceled.) 5. An alarm informs you that you must not leave the web page during the "restore procedure". Acknowledge the alarm output by clicking "OK". The restoration of the CPU configuration starts and you will be continuously informed of the current status: - "Download of online backup has been started." - "Checking backup file." - "Formatting memory card and resetting CPU." Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 123 Web pages 3.15 Online backup 6. If you have started the restoration procedure with a user name and password defined in the Web server configuration, you will be asked to enter these again after restoration of the CPU. Enter the required information and click "Login". If you have started the restoration procedure as the user "Everybody" without a password (but with appropriate access rights), this prompt is not displayed. Note To restore the configuration of an F-CPU whose security program and/or password has been changed for the F-CPU in the meantime, you also need the access authorization "FAdmin"; see "Amending user management" in the section Configuring the Web server (Page 21). WARNING The authorization "F-admin" for the Web server without password protection (User "Everybody") is only for test purposes, commissioning etc. i.e. only when the system is in productive operation. In this case, you have to ensure the security of the plant through other organizational measures, e.g. through spatial protection. Prior to the transition to productive operation, you must remove the right "F-Admin" for the user "Everybody". The password of the user of the Web server with the right "F-Admin" should only be accessible to authorized persons. The restoration of the CPU configuration starts and you will be continuously informed of the current status: - "Loading configuration." - "Resetting CPU." This may take a few minutes. 7. When the procedure is complete, you will be logged out and the "Reload page..." button will be displayed. If you did not receive an error message during the restoration procedure, the restoration of the CPU configuration was successfully completed and you will receive a corresponding message. Click the "Reload page..." button and log on to the newly downloaded CPU configuration with your user name and password. You will receive the following error message if: - the newly downloaded CPU configuration does not contain the same IP address as the former one - the Web server is deactivated in the newly downloaded CPU configuration - the browser does not receive a response from the CPU after 3 minutes Error message: "The CPU is not reachable anymore. Please check the IP address and the Web server configuration. The result of the restore can be checked in the ASLog." Web server 124 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics Overview The Web server displays statuses, errors, technology alarms and the current values of the configured technology objects (TOs): Speed-controlled axis (TO_SpeedAxis) Positioning axis (TO_PositioningAxis) Synchronous axis (TO_SynchronousAxis) External encoder (TO_ExternalEncoder) Measuring input (TO_MeasuringInput) Output cam (TO_OutputCam) Cam track (TO_CamTrack) The "Motion Control Diagnostics" web page provides detailed information on the configured technology objects in the following views: Diagnostics Service overview Diagnostics The "Diagnostics" view offers you: An overview list of the configured technology objects The status and error messages of a selected technology object Values and limits of the status of a selected axis/cam Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 125 Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics "Diagnostics" view Under "Status", you will find an overview list of the configured technology objects with the designation and type, which indicates whether the technology object in question is "released" and "referenced". The technology object is enabled: The axis can be moved with motion jobs. The technology object is homed: The relationship between the position in the technology object and the mechanical position was successfully created. Figure 3-47 Motion Control diagnostics: Status and error bits Web server 126 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics Meaning of the symbols in the "Status" column Table 3- 10 Symbol Meaning of symbols Symbol color Meaning Green Component is OK Yellow Warning pending Red Error - component faulty or not available Select the required technology object. The related diagnostics information is shown in the bottom tabs. "Status and error bits" tab You use the "Status and error bits" tab to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object as in STEP 7. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 127 Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics "Motion status"/"Cam track status" tab You use the "Motion status" tab to monitor the motion status of the axis as in STEP 7. Figure 3-48 Motion Control diagnostics: Motion status Web server 128 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics You use the "Cam track status" tab to monitor the cam track status as in STEP 7. Figure 3-49 Motion Control diagnostics: Cam track status Service overview The "Service overview" view offers you: Diagnostics information for several technology objects A filter option for selecting the displayed technology objects Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 129 Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics "Service overview" view The "Service overview" shows the diagnostics information for several technology objects in table form. Figure 3-50 Motion Control diagnostics, service overview: Status and error information Web server 130 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics To select the information to be displayed, click the list symbol in the first column of the table. Make your selection in the next window. Click the list symbol again to leave the selection window. Figure 3-51 Motion Control diagnostics, service overview: Configuring the status and error information Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 131 Web pages 3.16 Motion Control diagnostics Selection "Select technology objects" You can make a selection of the displayed technology objects with the selection "Select technology objects". Figure 3-52 Motion Control diagnostics, service overview: Status and error information - Select technology objects Reference You can find explanations of the diagnostics functions "Status and error bits" and "Motion status"/Cam track status" of the individual technology objects in the online help for STEP 7. Web server 132 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace 3.17 Trace Trace and logic analyzer function You record device tags and evaluate the recordings with the trace and logic analyzer function. Tags are, for example, drive parameters or system and user tags of a CPU. The recordings are saved on the device and can be read out by users with appropriate access rights via the Web server and saved. The trace and logic analyzer function is therefore suitable for monitoring highly dynamic processes in the Web server. Requirements A trace configuration has been created, i.e. you have defined the recording and trigger conditions and selected the signals to be recorded. - Note: Only measurements which are saved on the SIMATIC memory card can be displayed on the "Trace" Web page. For the CPU to save the measurements on the SIMATIC memory card, you must make the following settings for the trace configuration in STEP 7: 1. Set the "Trigger mode" to "Trigger on tag". 2. Select the "Save measurements on device (memory card)" check box. You have transferred the trace configuration to the device and activated it there. You have been assigned the access right "The user is authorized to..." > "...query diagnostics" in the user administration of the Web server; see section Configuring the Web server (Page 21). Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 133 Web pages 3.17 Trace Space requirements for storing trace recordings The "Save measurements on device (memory card)" function in STEP 7 saves Trace recordings on your SIMATIC memory card. Response when number reached The "Deactivate recording" parameter repeats the measurements until the configured "Number of measurements" is reached. The "Overwrite oldest recording" parameter replaces the oldest measurement with the latest measurement when the configured "Number of measurements" is reached. Note, however, that continuously writing data to the SIMATIC memory card shortens its service life. Figure 3-53 Dialog of settings for storing measurements on the memory card in STEP 7 Number of measurements The CPU supports a maximum of 999 measurements. While the CPU writes the trace recordings to the load memory of the memory card, it pauses monitoring of the trigger conditions for the trace job. After the CPU has terminated the storing of Trace recordings, the CPU continues checking of the trigger conditions. NOTICE Required memory on the SIMATIC memory card Note that the "Save measurements on device (memory card)" function needs >1024 KB of free space on your SIMATIC memory card. This amount of required space is independent of the size of the SIMATIC memory card you are using. If this space is no longer available, the CPU stops storing measurements on the memory card and writes a corresponding entry to the diagnostic buffer. Therefore, ensure that there is enough space on the SIMATIC memory card before running the "Save measurements on device (memory card)" function. Delete trace recordings no longer required from the SIMATIC memory card. You can view the current values on the currently used space in the load memory in the "Memory" tab on the "Diagnostics" web page. Web server 134 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Additional information The operation of the interface of the "Trace" web page largely corresponds to the operation of the trace function in STEP 7. See the Using the trace and logic analyzer function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64897128) and the online help for STEP 7 for more on this. Displaying the trace recordings The web page of the trace and logic analyzer function consists of several areas. The example in the figure below shows how the Web server user interface is divided when the "Trace" web page is first called. Trace recordings Toolbar of the trend diagram Trend diagram and bit track Signal tables Figure 3-54 Trace start page without measurement Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 135 Web pages 3.17 Trace Opening measurements To open a measurement, right-click on a measurement to select it from the "Trace recordings" area. Then select the command "Display in diagram" in the shortcut menu. The measurement is displayed in the "Curve diagram and bit track" area. Figure 3-55 Displaying an individual measurement To display multiple measurement at once, right-click on a measurement to select it from the "Trace recordings" area. Then select the command "Add to table" in the shortcut menu. The measurements are displayed in the "Curve diagram and bit track" area. Figure 3-56 Displaying several measurements Web server 136 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Trace recordings The "Trace recordings" area shows a list of all existing measurements, sorted by date and time of the trace recordings. A measurement always consists of a trace configuration with an associated recording. The following table shows the special Web server shortcut menu commands in the Trace recordings area: Table 3- 11 Web server shortcut menu commands in the trace recordings area Shortcut menu command Description "Delete" Deletes the selected measurement on the memory card of the CPU. A confirmation dialog opens. After deletion, the display in the trend diagram is not automatically overwritten. "Save as" Saves the selected measurement. "Show in chart" Loads the selected measurement to the display area of the Web server. Some data types offer the display of individual bit tracks. Enable the individual bit tracks of icon. the signal opened in the signal table using the You can adjust the display of the signals in the signal table and with the toolbar of the curve diagram. Figure 3-57 Trace measurement - All areas visible Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 137 Web pages 3.17 Trace Toolbar of the trend diagram As in STEP 7, tools are available for adapting the display via buttons of the toolbar of the trend diagram. The following table shows the Web server buttons in the trend diagram toolbar: Table 3- 12 Symbol Buttons of the trend diagram toolbar Function Description Open / add measurement Opens measurements or adds measurement to an existing measurement. Save as Saves measurement(s) as a file with the extension .csv, .wtrc (SIMOTION format for saving Trace data) or .ttrecx (TIA Portal format for saving Trace data). In addition to the measured data the command also saves the diagram, snapshots, marking and calculated signals. Undo move / zoom Undoes the move / zoom function executed last. If you have carried out several move / zoom functions, you can undo these stepby-step. Repeat move / zoom Redoes the last undone move / zoom function. If you have undone several move / zoom functions, you can redo these step-by-step. Snapshot Saves the current view as a snapshot (see the section "Settings and displays of the Snapshot symbol"). Move view Moves the display with a pressed mouse button - corresponds to the button in STEP 7. Zoom selection Selection of an arbitrary range with the mouse button pressed. The button scales the display to the range selection. Vertical zoom selection Selection of a vertical range with the mouse button pressed. The button scales the display to the range selection. Horizontal zoom selection Selection of a horizontal range with the mouse button pressed. The button scales the display to the range selection. Zoom in Enlargement of the display. The ranges of the X axis and Y axis are reduced every time the button is clicked. The curves are displayed larger. Zoom out Reduction of the display. The ranges of the X axis and Y axis are reduced every time the button is clicked. The curves are displayed smaller. Scaling Scales all the signals or also only signal / signal group vertically and horizontally. Restore standard view The button undoes scaling and move commands. The view is reset to the status at the time of loading of the measurement. Hidden signals are also reset but remain disabled. Display all The button moves all the signals completely into the display area without changing the relative positions of the signals to each other. Scale X automatically Automatic scaling of all visible signals on the horizontal X area. Scale Y automatically Automatic scaling of all visible signals on the vertical Y area. Web server 138 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Symbol Function Description Arrange in tracks Activate or deactivate the trace arrangement. When the trace arrangement is activated the signals are arranged among themselves with the relevant value axes. Signal groups are displayed in the same trace. This setting does not affect the display for the bit tracks. / Unit switching of the time axis Switching the unit of the time axis You can enter the following information: / * Measuring points * Time (relative time related to the trigger time) * Trigger stamp of the measurement points Display measurement points The button displays the measurement point as small circles on the curves. Interpolation on/off The buttons activate / deactivate the interpolation of the data of the trend diagram. Grid The button activates / deactivates the grid of the trend diagram and regulates its brightness in the Levels 1 to 9. Vertical measurement cursor Display of vertical measurement cursor. The vertical position of the two measurement cursors can be moved with the mouse. The values of the signals and the difference between two measuring points are displayed in the signal table for all displayed signals and also in the trend diagram for the selected signal. The measuring point or the relative/absolute time to the measurement cursors is displayed depending on the set unit of the time axis (X axis) in the movable pop-up window "Measuring points/Time values". Horizontal measurement cursor Display of the horizontal measurement cursors. The horizontal position of the two measurement cursors can be moved with the mouse. The Y values of the measurement cursor for the selected signal are displayed in the movable pop-up window "Y values". Difference of the measurement cursor Display of the difference of the horizontal and vertical measurement cursors and the Y values at the intersections with the vertical measurement cursors. Show legend Showing or hiding of the legend in the curve diagram and the bit track labels. Align the chart legend to the left Display of the legend and the bit track labels on the left side of the curve diagram. Align the chart legend to the right Display of the legend and the bit track labels on the right side of the curve diagram. Change background color Changeover between various background colors. Identification The following table provides an overview of marked signal areas. Note that markings are only possible for analog signal. All icons in the toolbar are equipped with tooltips. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 139 Web pages 3.17 Trace Trend diagram The trend diagram displays the selected signals of a recording. Bits are shown in the lower diagram as a bit track. Trace recordings (minimized) Toolbar of the trend diagram Trend diagram and bit track Signal table (minimized) Figure 3-58 Trace measurement - only trend diagram visible The following table shows the special Web server shortcut menu commands of a selected signal in the trend diagram: Table 3- 13 Web server shortcut menu commands in the trend diagram area Shortcut menu command Description "Scale Y automatically" Automatic scaling of the selected signal in Y direction. "Hide signal" Hides the selected signal in the trend diagram. Web server 140 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Use of the trend diagram You can zoom the display area as you like. Measurement cursors (see " Toolbar of the trend diagram") can be used to select individual values for display in the signal table. The following image shows how you can change the display area of the trend diagram as required with rulers and scroll bars. Vertical ruler Vertical scroll bar Horizontal ruler Horizontal scroll bar Figure 3-59 Trace measurement - rulers and scroll bars Using the vertical ruler If you click the vertical ruler at the top or the bottom, you increase the size of the display at the top or bottom. If you click the vertical ruler at the top or the bottom while keeping the shift key pressed, you scale both ends. If you click the vertical ruler at the top or the bottom while keeping the Ctrl key pressed, you move the display up or down. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 141 Web pages 3.17 Trace Using the horizontal ruler If you click the horizontal ruler on the left or the right, you increase the size of the display on the left or right. If you click the horizontal ruler on the left or right while keeping the shift key pressed, you scale both ends. If you click the horizontal ruler on the left or the right while keeping the Ctrl key pressed, you move the display to the left or right. Using the mouse wheel If you activate the mouse wheel in the display, you move the display up or down. If you activate the mouse wheel in the display while keeping the shift key pressed, you move the display to the left or right. If you activate the mouse wheel in the display while keeping the Ctrl key pressed, you increase/reduce the size of the display at the position of the mouse pointer. Signal tables The signal tables list the signals of the selected measurement and provides setting options for some properties. The area of the signal tables is divided into the tabs "Measurements", "Signals" and "Calculated signal". Web server 142 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Settings and displays in the "Signals" tab The following figure shows the signal table of the "Signals" tab. Figure 3-60 Display in the "Signals" tab The following table shows the settings and displays of the recorded signals of the "Signals" tab: Column Description Signal or error symbol Signal symbol Symbol for calculated signals (formulas) Error in the formula of the calculated signal Selection for the display in the trend diagram The point indicates that at least one bit has been selected for display as bit track for the signal in the bit selection. Signal number Automatically generated number of the signal The signal can be accessed via the signal number in the formulas. Name Display of the signal name A click on the name of a displayed signal updates the scale in the trend diagram. Open bit selection Individual bits can also be selected for the following data types for display as a bit track in the lower curve diagram: * Byte, Word, DWord, LWord * SInt, USInt, Int, UInt, DInt, UDInt, LInt, ULInt Example of an opened bit selection for the DWORD data type: Select or deselect the relevant bit for display by clicking the Data type icon. Display of the data type Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 143 Web pages 3.17 Trace Column Description Address Display of the address of the signal The field remains empty with optimized / type correct tags. Color Display and setting option for the color of the signal Signal group Display or input of the signal group name for one signal group The Y-scales are scaled identically for all signals of one signal group. Enter an identical signal group name for those signals that you want to scale identically. To remove signals from a signal group: * Delete the signal group name. * Click the empty entry in the shortcut menu of the signal group Note that you cannot group binary signals. Gray field for the chain icon of the signal group To add or delete the signal from a signal group, move the mouse pointer over the grey field or the or ), chain icon ( Clicking the Clicking the chain icon adds the signal to a signal group or creates a new signal group. chain icon removes the signal from the signal group. For a selected signal with signal group, the group. chain icon displays all signals of the same signal Input field of the signal group The input field displays the signal group name. As an alternative to the chain icon, you can assign or delete a group name via text input in this field. Min. Y-scale Display or input of the minimum value for the scaling of the signal Max. Y-scale Display or input of the maximum value for the scaling of the signal Comment Display and input option for a comment about the signal The following table shows the possible Web server shortcut menu commands of the "Signals" tab: Table 3- 14 Web server shortcut menu commands of the "Signals" tab Shortcut menu command Description "Scale Y automatically" Automatic scaling of the selected signal in Y direction. "Show signal" Shows the signal in the trend diagram "Hide signal" Hides the signal in the trend diagram "Show all bits" Shows all the bits of a signal "Hide all bits" Hides all the bits of a signal Web server 144 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Settings and displays in the "Measurements" tab The following figure shows the display of the "Measurements" tab and the shortcut menu of the "Alignment" column of a selected measurement. Figure 3-61 Tab "Measurements" with shortcut menu Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 145 Web pages 3.17 Trace The following table shows the settings and displays for the measurements: Column Description Alignment of the measurements Trigger/Sample Alignment of the measurements in accordance with the trigger or measurement point. The individual zero point for the measurement is predefined in the table under the "Alignment" column. Time stamp (absolute time) Alignment of the measurements in accordance with their time stamp. The signals are aligned in accordance with the time from the absolute time stamp. Table columns Static display of the measurement icon Name Display and change options for the name Note that the name must be unique. Alignment Alignment of the measurement (only adjustable with the "Trigger/Sample" check box selected). Determines the individual zero point for a measurement. All signals for the measurement are displayed in relation to this zero point. The following settings are possible: Offset * Trigger * First sample after the trigger event * First sample * Last sample Offset related to the time axis Moves the measurement left or right by the offset stated on the time axis. If you enter solely a numerical value without a unit of measurement, the system automatically assigns the unit "ms" (for example 0=0ms, 100=100ms, 1000=1s, -1001=-1s 1ms , LT#2000ms=2s, LT#-3605000ms=-1h 5s , LT#-1h5s=-1h 5s ) Time stamp Display of the trigger time Comments Display and input option for a comment about the signal Shortcut menu commands "Save as WTRC" Saves the measurement(s) as a file with the extension .csv, .wtrc (SIMOTION format for saving Trace data) or .ttrecx (TIA Portal format for saving Trace data). "Save as CSV" Exports a measurement as a file with the file extension .csv. Note that the command only saves the measured data. The command does not save the diagram, snapshots, markings and calculated signals. "Edit name" Switches the name in editing mode "Edit offset" Switches the offset in editing mode "Edit comment" Switches the comment in editing mode Web server 146 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Settings and displays in the "Calculated signal" tab You can use this function to calculate new signals based on real signals. The system calculates the Y-values of the signal points in the process. To parameterize the signals to be calculated, open the "Calculated signal" tab. In the "General" section specify the name, the data type and color of a signal to be calculated. Note that the name of the signal to be calculated must differ from the name of a real signal. Figure 3-62 "General" section of the "Calculated signal" tab Add the basic signals in the "Basic signals" section. The basic signals form the basis for calculating the new signal. You can change the default name of the variable in the "Name" column. You select real signals for the specification of the number of signal points to be calculated in the "Signal" column. Figure 3-63 "Basic signals" section of the "Calculated signal" tab Enter the code for the calculation of the Y values of the signal points in the "Calculated signal value" section. The section is divided into: Basic mode (expression) Advanced mode (JavaScript) Use the JavaScript syntax to enter the code for both modes. Take into account, however, that not the full JavaScript functionality is supported. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 147 Web pages 3.17 Trace Basic mode (expression) In this mode you use the following to create your code: Standardized JavaScript expressions and operators (for example +, -, /, *, %, ~, &, |, ?, !) Standardized math libraries The tag names specified under "Basic signals" (the system writes the Y-value directly to the variable name) Figure 3-64 Basic mode (expression) Web server 148 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Advanced mode (JavaScript) This mode offers you an advanced functional scope for the calculation of the Y value by means of a complex JavaScript code. You can, for example, specify own static tags for the iteration of code sections: Figure 3-65 Advanced mode (JavaScript) The following table shows all the elements that you can use for your code: Reserved words (case-sensitive) if var Math Array catch typeof unescape encodeURI in for else break escape delete Infinity decodeURI do Date case false String Object continue parseFloat new case true while return Number parseInt try null isNaN throw switch default undefined <= |= && Operators % - *= != !== + -- / > = || ^ === ++ -= /= >= == & ~ += * ! < | &= ? [ ] . Delimiters ( ) { , : ; } Comments /* */ Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 149 Web pages 3.17 Trace Every signal point consists of the following attributes: 1. x (measuring point) 2. t (relative ^time in milliseconds) 3. y (Y value) 4. points (number of signal points that are available for the calculation of a new signal) In "Advanced mode (JavaScript)" you can access all four attributes (e.g. "$1.y", 485 "$1.t", "$1.x", $1.points[i].y, ...). The following function tables support you in writing expressions or complex code in JavaScript. The function table contains the functions used most often: Figure 3-66 "Calculated signal" tab with function table Web server 150 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace You also have the possibility to generate the JavaScript code of a real signal from the "Signals" tab. Alternatively you can also select one of predefined templates of the function table, change the code and generate a calculated signal. Figure 3-67 Real signals of the "Signals" tab The following templates are available in the function table: Numerical differentiation Numerical integration Arithmetic mean Figure 3-68 Templates To check the syntax click the symbol "Check syntax" or generate the signal by clicking the icon in the toolbar. If the code has any errors, these are displayed to the right of the "Check syntax" icon in red lettering. If the code does not have any errors, the "Syntax check successful" message is displayed. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 151 Web pages 3.17 Trace How does the system calculate a new signal? The system checks: Whether you have selected a basic signal for the calculation of a new signal The name of the signal to be calculated The syntax of your JavaScript code Subsequently the system defines the counting of the measuring points and executes the code for each measuring point to be calculated. In each iteration the system stores the measuring points of the new signal on the basis of the following four attributes: Measuring point Relative time Calculated Y value Signal point with x-, t, y-values The course is displayed after calculation has been completed. Example for calculating on the basis of a basic signal You use a single basic signal to calculate the new signal. The basic signal consists of 1000 measuring points. In this case the system carries out your written code a thousand times. The calculated signal then consists of 1000 calculated signal points with the same x- and t-values, but with own yvalues. Importing/exporting settings You can import/export certain parameters (formulas, calculation method, signal type and icon in the toolbar of the "Calculated signal" signal name. To import parameters click the icon in the toolbar of the "Calculated signal" tab. tab. To export parameters click the Web server 152 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.17 Trace Settings and displays of the Snapshot icon With the "Snapshot" icon in the toolbar of the trend diagram you save the current signal course in the form of a snapshot. To create a snapshot of the signal course click the icon. To manage the created snapshots click the arrow on the left next to the "Snapshot" icon and select the entry "Manage snapshots". Figure 3-69 Managing snapshots The following table shows the settings and displays of the "Managing snapshots" window. Column Description Static display of the snapshot icon Name Display and change options for the name Time stamp Display of the creation time of the snapshot Comments Display and input option for a comment Several rows can be selected. The following table shows the possible shortcut menu commands: Shortcut menu command Description "Restore snapshot" Shows the measurement with the saved view in the "Diagram" tab. "Remove snapshot" Deletes the snapshot. "Edit name" Switches the name in editing mode "Edit comment" Switches the comment in editing mode Several rows can be selected. Note Delete measurement If you delete a measurement of a calculated signal, all the associated snapshots are also deleted. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 153 Web pages 3.18 Reading out service data 3.18 Reading out service data The Web server gives you the option to save service data. In addition to the content of the diagnostic buffer, they include additional information on the internal status of the CPU. If you should encounter a problem with the CPU that cannot be resolved otherwise, you therefore have the option to submit the service data to the Service&Support team. Procedure 1. Enter the following address in the address bar of your web browser: "http:///save_service_data", e.g., "http://192.168.3.141/save_service_data" 2. Your screen displays the service data page with a button for saving the service data. 3. Save the service data locally on your display device by clicking "Save ServiceData". Result The data is saved into a .dmp file with the following naming convention: ".dmp". The user can change the file name at a later time. Note If you have defined your user page as the start page, observe the note on reading out service data in section Defining the user page as start page (Page 98). Web server 154 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Web pages 3.19 Basic websites 3.19 Basic websites Web pages with reduced contents Basic websites are offered for display devices with smaller screens, for example HMI, on the Web server. Basic websites are web pages with reduced content that are adapted to the requirements of small screens with low resolution. These sites do not support JavaScript for the sake of fast access. This means that not all standard websites are available as basic websites. The basic website can also have fewer functions than the standard website. The switch to basic websites takes place automatically for HMI devices. You access basic websites from other end devices by entering the IP address of the configured and the extension "/basic" in the address bar of the Web browser, for example http://192.168.3.141/basic or https://192.168.3.141/basic. The following standard websites are also available as basic websites: Start page (in Basic: "Status") Diagnostics (without the "Program protection", "Runtime information" and "Fail-safe" tabs) Diagnostics buffer Memory usage Module information Alarms (without acknowledgment option) Communication Tag status Watch tables User pages Filebrowser (read access only) DataLogs Intro Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 155 Web pages 3.19 Basic websites The basic websites are displayed as follows: Figure 3-70 Example basic websites, "Status" web page Web server 156 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Glossary Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller that consists of at least one CPU, various input and output modules, as well as operating and monitoring devices. AWP Automation Web Programming AWP commands Special command syntax for data exchange between CPU and HTML file. Configuration Systematic arrangement of individual modules (design). CSS A CSS (Cascading Style Sheet) specifies how an area or content marked up in HTML is displayed. Device Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g., IO controller. Diagnostics The detection, localization, classification, visualization and further evaluation of errors, malfunction and alarms. Diagnostics provides monitoring functions that run automatically during plant operation. This increases the availability of plants by reducing commissioning times and downtimes. Firewall A firewall is used to restrict the network access based on sender or target address of the used services. The firewall decides based on specified rules which of the network packets it handles are forwarded and which are not. This way the firewall tries to prevent unauthorized network access. It is not the function of a firewall to detect attacks. It only implements rules for network communication. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 157 Glossary HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP). Protocol for data transmission across a network. HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS). Protocol for tap-proof transmission of sensitive data across a network. Identification data Identification data is stored on a module, and contains information which supports the user in Checking the system configuration Locating hardware changes in a system Correcting errors in a system Modules can be clearly identified online using the identification data. Master The master in possession of the token is an active device. This master has the option to receive data from other devices and to send data to other devices. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, process and field bus standard specified in standard IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. It specifies functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus system. PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= Distributed I/O), FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological Functions). PROFINET Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET represents the consistent continuation of: PROFIBUS DP, the established field bus Industrial Ethernet, the communications bus for the cell level Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET. PROFINET as an Ethernet-based automation standard from PROFIBUS International (previously PROFIBUS User Organization) defines a vendor-independent communication, automation, and engineering model. Web server 158 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Glossary PROFINET component A PROFINET component includes the entire data of the hardware configuration, the parameters of the modules, and the corresponding user program. The PROFINET component is made up as follows: Technological Function The (optional) technological (software) function includes the interface to other PROFINET components in the form of interconnectable inputs and outputs. Device The device is the representation of the physical programmable controller or field device including the I/O, sensors and actuators, mechanical parts, and the device firmware. PROFINET IO As part of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept that is used to implement modular, distributed applications. PROFINET IO allows you to create automation solutions which are familiar to you from PROFIBUS. PROFINET IO is implemented by the PROFINET standard for automation devices on the one hand, and on the other hand by the engineering tool STEP 7. That is, you have the same application view in STEP 7, regardless of whether you configure PROFINET or PROFIBUS devices. Programming your user program is essentially the same for PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP if you use the extended blocks and system status lists for PROFINET IO. PROFINET IO controller Device used to address connected I/O devices. This means that the IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the controller on which the automation program runs. PROFINET IO device A distributed field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers (e.g., remote IO, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches). URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL). Identifies and localizes a source, such as a web page, uniquely via the method of access used and the location of the source in computer networks. Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 159 Glossary UTF-8 Abbreviation for 8-bit UCS (Universal Character Set) transformation format. Most popular coding of Unicode characters. Each Unicode character is assigned a specially coded byte string of variable length in this format. UTF-8 supports up to four bytes on which all Unicode characters can be mapped. Web browser Web browsers are visualization programs for web pages and can communicate with Web servers. Typical web browsers are, for example: Microsoft Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox Web server 160 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF Index A E Access restriction, 31 Activating the Web server, 22 Alarms, 55 Automatic updating, 27 AWP commands, 81 Arrays, 91 Enumeration types, 88 Fragments, 90 PLC tags, 82, 85 Special tags, 86 Structures, 93 East Asian languages, 32 F Backup of configuration, 122 Binding, 41 Fail-safe, 44 FAQs Automatically updating web pages, 80 Download certificate, 26 Incorporating web pages with relative path names, 80 User page as start page, 100 Web server access via smartphone, 20 Filebrowser, 111 System files, 111 Firmware update, 52 F-runtime groups, 44 C G CA certificate, 23 Certificate Web server certificate, 23 Certificate manager Global CA-signed certificate, 24 Global security settings, 24 Local CPU-specific certificate, 24 Communication, 57 Connections, 61 Parameters, 57 Resources, 60 Statistics, 59 Configuring Backup, 120 Restoring, 120 Copy protection, 41 CPU-specific certificate, 23 Global security settings, 24 B D Diagnostics (Motion Control), 125 Diagnostics buffer, 45 Display of texts in different languages, 32 H HTTPS, 26 I Identification, 40 Diagnostics, 40 Module information, 49 K Know-how protection, 41 L Language settings, 31 Web server Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF 161 Index M Measurements (trace), 137 Memory, 42 Motion Control Diagnostics, 125 Service overview, 125 Motion status, 128 Status overview, 68 Tabular view, 66 Trace recordings, 135 Trend diagram (Trace), 138 U Reading out service data, 154 Reading PLC tags Overview, 83 String or character tags in expressions, 84 Tags of the String and Character type, 83 Restoring the configuration, 123 Runtime information, 43 Updating and saving, 34 Deactivating automatic updating, 34 Printing web pages, 34 Saving alarms, 56 Saving diagnostics buffer entries, 46 Updating user pages, 80 User interface language assign to project language, 33 Setting, 36 User management, 28 User pages, 30, 77 Configuring user pages, 94 Example user page, 100 User page as start page, 98 WWW instruction, 96 S W Security functions, 16 Select technology objects, 132 Self-signed certificates, 23 Service overview, 130 Signal table (Trace), 142, 143 Start page, 35 Intro, 35 Log in, 38 Logout, 38 Statistics Communication, 59 Module information, 50 Status and error bits, 127 Web access Via HMI devices and mobile terminal devices, 20 Via PG/PC, 20 Web browser, 17 Web server Certificate, 23 Properties, 16 Web server - web pages Tag status, 72 Watch table, 75 Web server certificate creating and assigning, 23 Web server language, 28 P Program protection, 41 R T Tags writing, 74, 76 Technology objects Status, errors, technology alarms, 125 Topology, 62 Actual topology, 62 Examples, 69 Graphical view, 63 Set topology, 62 Web server 162 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03484625-AF ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC S7-1500 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Installing 4 ___________________ Communication paths 5 ___________________ Simulate CPU 6 ___________________ Virtual time response ___________________ 7 User interfaces (API) ___________________ 8 Restrictions ___________________ A List of abbreviations 12/2017 A5E37039512-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E37039512-AB 12/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2016 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This function manual describes the simulation software, SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0. You can use this software to simulate and test your SIMATIC STEP 7 programs on a virtual controller. You can obtain updates to the function manual as downloads on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109739154). An application example for S7-PLCSIM Advanced is also available on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109739660). Scope This function manual is valid for the following order versions 6ES7823-1FA01-0YA5 - SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 Floating License (DVD) 6ES7823-1FE01-0YA5 - SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 Floating License (Download) 6ES7823-1FA01-0YE5 - Upgrade SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V1.0 V2.0 (DVD) 6ES7823-1FE01-0YE5 - Upgrade SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V1.0 V2.0 (Download) The articles each contain one license for up to three instances. Basic knowledge required The system may only be used by qualified staff. The following knowledge is required: Industrial Automation and Automation Technology Programming with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) SIMATIC CPUs and CPU programming PC-based automation using S7-1500 and WinCC Runtime Advanced Development of software in C++ or C# PC technology Windows operating system S7-PLCSIM Advanced 4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Preface Conventions Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". We also abbreviate SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 as "PLCSIM Advanced". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions only form one element of such a concept. Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place. Additionally, Siemens' guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into account. For more information about industrial security, please visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 2 3 4 5 Guide .................................................................................................................................................... 27 1.1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................. 27 1.2 S7-PLCSIM products ............................................................................................................. 29 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 30 2.1 What is S7-PLCSIM Advanced? ............................................................................................ 30 2.2 Compatibility during upgrade ................................................................................................. 31 2.3 Security for S7-PLCSIM Advanced ........................................................................................ 32 2.4 Simulations support ............................................................................................................... 33 2.5 Supported CPUs .................................................................................................................... 34 2.6 2.6.1 Differences between a simulated and a real CPU ................................................................. 36 Restrictions for all supported CPUs ....................................................................................... 37 2.7 Simulating Motion Control ...................................................................................................... 39 Installing ............................................................................................................................................... 40 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 40 System requirements ............................................................................................................. 40 Licenses ................................................................................................................................. 42 Trial License ........................................................................................................................... 42 Installation log ........................................................................................................................ 44 3.2 S7-PLCSIM Advanced ........................................................................................................... 45 3.3 Installing S7-PLCSIM Advanced ............................................................................................ 46 3.4 Changing S7-PLCSIM Advanced........................................................................................... 48 3.5 Repairing S7-PLCSIM Advanced........................................................................................... 49 3.6 Uninstalling S7-PLCSIM Advanced ....................................................................................... 50 Communication paths ........................................................................................................................... 51 4.1 Local communication ............................................................................................................. 53 4.2 Communication via TCP / IP .................................................................................................. 54 4.3 Enable distributed communication ......................................................................................... 56 Simulate CPU ....................................................................................................................................... 58 5.1 Basic procedure for the simulation......................................................................................... 58 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 User interface ......................................................................................................................... 59 S7 PLCSIM Advanced Symbol .............................................................................................. 59 S7 PLCSIM Advanced Control Panel .................................................................................... 60 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents 6 7 5.3 Download ................................................................................................................................64 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 Network addresses in the simulation ......................................................................................66 Siemens PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter ............................................................................66 PLCSIM Advanced instances .................................................................................................66 5.5 Simulate peripheral I/O ...........................................................................................................68 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 Simulate communication .........................................................................................................69 Communication services that can be simulated .....................................................................69 Communication between instances ........................................................................................70 5.7 Provide project data offline for simulation ...............................................................................71 Virtual time response ............................................................................................................................ 73 6.1 Speed up and slow down simulation ......................................................................................75 6.2 Stop simulation .......................................................................................................................76 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 Synchronize simulation partner ..............................................................................................78 Synchronize simulation partner cycle-controlled ....................................................................78 Synchronize simulation partner time-controlled ......................................................................80 User interfaces (API) ............................................................................................................................. 82 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 Introduction .............................................................................................................................82 Access to instances ................................................................................................................84 User interfaces (API)...............................................................................................................85 Overview of user interfaces for native C++ ............................................................................86 Overview of user interfaces for managed code ......................................................................90 Overview of data types for native C++....................................................................................93 Overview of data types for managed code .............................................................................94 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.2.1 7.2.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.3.1 Initialize API ............................................................................................................................96 Load API library ......................................................................................................................96 Native C++ ..............................................................................................................................96 InitializeApi() ...........................................................................................................................96 RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize ......................................................................................................98 .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................................99 Initialize ...................................................................................................................................99 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.1.1 7.3.1.2 7.3.1.3 7.3.1.4 7.3.2 7.3.2.1 Shut down API ......................................................................................................................100 Native C++ ............................................................................................................................100 DestroyInterface() .................................................................................................................101 RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface .......................................................................................102 FreeApi() ...............................................................................................................................103 ShutdownAndFreeApi().........................................................................................................104 .NET (C#) ..............................................................................................................................105 Shut down API ......................................................................................................................105 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 7 Table of contents 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) .............................................................................................. 106 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.4.1 7.5.4.2 API ISimulationRuntimeManager ......................................................................................... 111 Interfaces - Information and settings.................................................................................... 111 Simulation Runtime instances.............................................................................................. 113 Remote connections ............................................................................................................ 119 Events .................................................................................................................................. 124 OnConfigurationChanged events......................................................................................... 124 OnRuntimeManagerLost events .......................................................................................... 127 7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.5.1 7.6.5.2 7.6.5.3 7.6.5.4 7.6.5.5 7.6.6 7.6.7 7.6.8 7.6.8.1 7.6.8.2 7.6.8.3 7.6.8.4 7.6.8.5 7.6.8.6 7.6.8.7 7.6.8.8 7.6.8.9 7.6.8.10 7.6.9 7.6.9.1 7.6.9.2 7.6.9.3 7.6.9.4 7.6.9.5 7.6.10 7.6.10.1 7.6.10.2 7.6.10.3 7.6.10.4 7.6.10.5 7.6.10.6 7.6.10.7 7.6.10.8 API IInstances ...................................................................................................................... 130 Interfaces - Information and settings.................................................................................... 130 Controller - Information and settings .................................................................................... 136 Operating state..................................................................................................................... 144 Tag list .................................................................................................................................. 152 I/O access ............................................................................................................................ 158 Synchronizing inputs and outputs ........................................................................................ 158 I/O access via address - Reading ........................................................................................ 158 I/O access via address - Writing .......................................................................................... 166 I/O access via tag name - Reading ...................................................................................... 173 I/O access via tag name - Writing ........................................................................................ 191 Settings for the virtual time .................................................................................................. 220 Cycle control ........................................................................................................................ 223 Acyclic services .................................................................................................................... 228 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 228 ReadRecordDone / WriteRecordDone ................................................................................ 230 AlarmNotification .................................................................................................................. 232 ProcessEvent ....................................................................................................................... 234 PullOrPlugEvent ................................................................................................................... 236 StatusEvent .......................................................................................................................... 238 ProfileEvent .......................................................................................................................... 239 UpdateEvent ........................................................................................................................ 240 GetConfiguredProcessEvent ............................................................................................... 241 RackOrStationFaultEvent .................................................................................................... 242 Events .................................................................................................................................. 243 OnOperatingStateChanged events ...................................................................................... 243 OnSyncPointReached events .............................................................................................. 247 OnConfigurationChanging events ........................................................................................ 249 OnConfigurationChanged events......................................................................................... 252 OnLedChanged events ........................................................................................................ 254 Events for acyclic services ................................................................................................... 257 OnDataRecordRead / OnDataRecordWrite events ............................................................. 257 OnAlarmNotification events ................................................................................................. 258 OnProcessEvent events ...................................................................................................... 259 OnPullOrPlugEvent events .................................................................................................. 260 OnStatusEvent events ......................................................................................................... 261 OnProfileEvent events ......................................................................................................... 262 OnUpdateEvent events ........................................................................................................ 263 RackOrStationFault events .................................................................................................. 264 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents 7.7 7.7.1 7.7.2 7.7.2.1 7.7.3 7.7.3.1 API IRemoteRuntimeManager ..............................................................................................265 Interfaces - Information and settings ....................................................................................265 Simulation Runtime instances ..............................................................................................268 Simulation Runtime instances (remote) ................................................................................268 Events ...................................................................................................................................275 OnConnectionLost events ....................................................................................................275 7.8 7.8.1 7.8.1.1 7.8.1.2 7.8.2 7.8.2.1 7.8.2.2 7.8.2.3 7.8.2.4 7.8.2.5 7.8.2.6 7.8.2.7 7.8.2.8 7.8.2.9 7.8.2.10 7.8.2.11 7.8.2.12 7.8.2.13 7.8.2.14 7.8.2.15 7.8.3 7.8.3.1 7.8.3.2 7.8.3.3 7.8.3.4 7.8.3.5 7.8.3.6 7.8.3.7 7.8.3.8 7.8.3.9 7.8.3.10 7.8.3.11 7.8.3.12 7.8.3.13 7.8.3.14 7.8.3.15 7.8.4 7.8.5 7.8.5.1 7.8.5.2 Data types .............................................................................................................................279 DLL import functions (Native C++) .......................................................................................280 ApiEntry_Initialize..................................................................................................................280 ApiEntry_DestroyInterface ....................................................................................................280 Event callback functions (Native C++) ..................................................................................281 EventCallback_VOID ............................................................................................................281 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST .................................................................................................281 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS .........................................................................282 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM ..........................................................................283 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 .............................................284 EventCallback_IRRTM ..........................................................................................................285 EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 ...................................................................285 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 ...........................286 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI ......................................................................................287 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDR .......................................................................................288 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 .......................................................289 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 ...........................................290 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32...................................................................................291 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 ....................................................................292 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET ..................................................................293 Delegate definitions (managed code) ...................................................................................293 Delegate_Void .......................................................................................................................293 Delegate_II_EREC_DT .........................................................................................................294 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS ......................................................................................294 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM ........................................................................................295 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 .....................................................296 Delegate_IRRTM ..................................................................................................................297 Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 ...........................................................................297 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 ...................................298 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI ...............................................................................................299 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR ................................................................................................300 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 ...................................................................301 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 .......................................................302 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 ...............................................................................................303 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 .................................................................................304 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET ...............................................................................305 Definitions and constants ......................................................................................................306 Unions (Native C++) .............................................................................................................307 UIP ........................................................................................................................................307 UDataValue ...........................................................................................................................308 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 9 Table of contents 7.8.6 7.8.6.1 7.8.6.2 7.8.6.3 7.8.6.4 7.8.6.5 7.8.6.6 7.8.6.7 7.8.6.8 7.8.6.9 7.8.6.10 7.8.6.11 7.8.6.12 7.8.6.13 7.8.6.14 7.8.6.15 7.8.6.16 7.8.6.17 7.8.7 7.8.7.1 7.8.7.2 7.8.7.3 7.8.7.4 7.8.7.5 7.8.7.6 7.8.7.7 7.8.7.8 7.8.7.9 7.8.7.10 7.8.7.11 7.8.7.12 7.8.7.13 7.8.7.14 7.8.7.15 7.8.7.16 7.8.7.17 7.8.7.18 7.8.7.19 8 Structures ............................................................................................................................. 309 SDataValue .......................................................................................................................... 309 SDVBNI ................................................................................................................................ 311 SDataValueByAddress ........................................................................................................ 311 SDataValueByAddressWithCheck ....................................................................................... 312 SDataValueByName ............................................................................................................ 312 SDataValueByNameWithCheck........................................................................................... 313 SConnectionInfo................................................................................................................... 313 SInstanceInfo ....................................................................................................................... 314 SDimension .......................................................................................................................... 314 STagInfo ............................................................................................................................... 315 SIP ....................................................................................................................................... 317 SIPSuite4 ............................................................................................................................. 317 SOnSyncPointReachedResult ............................................................................................. 319 SDataRecordInfo.................................................................................................................. 321 SDataRecord........................................................................................................................ 322 SConfiguredProcessEvents ................................................................................................. 323 SDiagExtChannelDescription............................................................................................... 324 Enumerations ....................................................................................................................... 326 ERuntimeErrorCode ............................................................................................................. 327 EArea ................................................................................................................................... 330 EOperatingState................................................................................................................... 330 EOperatingMode .................................................................................................................. 331 ECPUType ........................................................................................................................... 332 ECommunicationInterface .................................................................................................... 334 ELEDType ............................................................................................................................ 334 ELEDMode ........................................................................................................................... 335 EPrimitiveDataType ............................................................................................................. 335 EDataType ........................................................................................................................... 338 ETagListDetails .................................................................................................................... 342 ERuntimeConfigChanged .................................................................................................... 343 EInstanceConfigChanged .................................................................................................... 343 EPullOrPlugEventType ........................................................................................................ 344 EProcessEventType ............................................................................................................ 344 EDirection ............................................................................................................................. 345 EDiagProperty ...................................................................................................................... 345 EDiagSeverity ...................................................................................................................... 346 ERackOrStationFaultType ................................................................................................... 346 Restrictions ..........................................................................................................................................347 8.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 347 8.2 Restrictions with fail-safe CPUs ........................................................................................... 347 8.3 OPC UA server .................................................................................................................... 348 8.4 Web server ........................................................................................................................... 349 8.5 Backing up and restoring the configuration of a PLCSIM Advanced instance .................... 350 8.6 Restrictions for file paths ...................................................................................................... 350 8.7 Restrictions for communications services ............................................................................ 351 8.8 Restrictions for instructions .................................................................................................. 351 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 Restrictions with Motion Control ...........................................................................................352 MCR and EMCR ...................................................................................................................352 Technology modules .............................................................................................................353 OB 91 and OB 92..................................................................................................................353 8.10 Restrictions to local communication via Softbus ..................................................................354 8.11 Restrictions of security with VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) ........................................355 8.12 Error with overflow of cyclical events and motion OBs .........................................................355 8.13 Deviating I/O values in the STEP 7 user program ................................................................356 8.14 Multiple simulations and possible collision of IP addresses .................................................356 8.15 Lacking access to an IP address ..........................................................................................356 8.16 Simulation in standby mode ..................................................................................................356 8.17 Error installing the antivirus software from Kaspersky ..........................................................357 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 11 Table of contents A List of abbreviations .............................................................................................................................358 Tables Table 1- 1 Comparison of S7-PLCSIM products ........................................................................................... 29 Table 2- 1 Compatibility of API and Runtime versions .................................................................................. 31 Table 2- 2 Supported CPUs .......................................................................................................................... 34 Table 2- 3 Compatibility to the TIA Portal...................................................................................................... 35 Table 3- 1 Minimum requirements for hardware ........................................................................................... 40 Table 5- 1 Assignment of the Ethernet interfaces, for example, for a CPU 1518-4 PN/DP .......................... 67 Table 5- 2 Supported communication options ............................................................................................... 69 Table 6- 1 Cycle-controlled operating modes (SingleStep)........................................................................... 78 Table 6- 2 Time-controlled operating modes (TimespanSynchronized) ....................................................... 80 Table 7- 1 Overview of initializing and shutting down API - Native C++ ....................................................... 86 Table 7- 2 Overview of global functions - Native C++ ................................................................................... 86 Table 7- 3 Overview of API ISimulationRuntimeManager functions - Native C++ ........................................ 87 Table 7- 4 Overview of API ISimulationRuntimeManager events - Native C++ ............................................ 87 Table 7- 5 Overview of IInstances functions - Native C++ ............................................................................ 87 Table 7- 6 Overview of IInstances events - Native C++ ................................................................................ 89 Table 7- 7 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager functions - Native C++ ................................................... 89 Table 7- 8 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager events - Native C++ ....................................................... 89 Table 7- 9 Overview of initializing and shutting down API - .NET (C#) ......................................................... 90 Table 7- 10 Overview of ISimulationRuntimeManager functions - .NET (C#)................................................. 90 Table 7- 11 Overview of ISimulationRuntimeManager events - .NET (C#) .................................................... 90 Table 7- 12 Overview of IInstances functions - .NET (C#) .............................................................................. 91 Table 7- 13 Overview of IInstances events - .NET (C#).................................................................................. 92 Table 7- 14 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager functions - .NET (C#) ..................................................... 92 Table 7- 15 Overview IRemoteRuntimeManager events - .NET (C#)............................................................. 92 Table 7- 16 Overview of data types - Native C++ ........................................................................................... 93 Table 7- 17 Overview of data types - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................. 94 Table 7- 18 InitializeApi() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 97 Table 7- 19 RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize - Native C++ ...................................................................................... 98 Table 7- 20 Initialize - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................................................... 99 Table 7- 21 DestroyInterface() - Native C++ ................................................................................................. 101 Table 7- 22 RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface() - Native C++ .................................................................... 102 Table 7- 23 FreeApi() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................... 103 Table 7- 24 ShutdownAndFreeApi() - Native C++ ........................................................................................ 104 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 25 GetNameOfAreaSection() - Native C++ .................................................................................... 106 Table 7- 26 GetNameOfCPUType() - Native C++ ........................................................................................ 106 Table 7- 27 GetNameOfCommunicationInterface() - Native C++ ................................................................. 106 Table 7- 28 GetNameOfDataType() - Native C++ ........................................................................................ 106 Table 7- 29 GetNameOfErrorCode() - Native C++ ....................................................................................... 107 Table 7- 30 GetNameOfLEDMode() - Native C++ ........................................................................................ 107 Table 7- 31 GetNameOfLEDType() - Native C++ ......................................................................................... 107 Table 7- 32 GetNameOfOperatingMode() - Native C++ ............................................................................... 107 Table 7- 33 GetNameOfErrorCode() - Native C++ ....................................................................................... 108 Table 7- 34 GetNameOfOperatingState() - Native C++ ................................................................................ 108 Table 7- 35 GetNameOfPrimitiveDataType() - Native C++ ........................................................................... 108 Table 7- 36 GetNameOfTagListDetails() - Native C++ ................................................................................. 108 Table 7- 37 GetNameOfRuntimeConfigChanged() - Native C++.................................................................. 109 Table 7- 38 GetNameOfInstanceConfigChanged() - Native C++ ................................................................. 109 Table 7- 39 GetNameOfDirection() - Native C++ .......................................................................................... 109 Table 7- 40 GetNameOfDiagSeverity() - Native C++ .................................................................................... 109 Table 7- 41 GetNameOfRackOrStationFaultType() - Native C++................................................................. 110 Table 7- 42 GetVersion() - Native C++ ......................................................................................................... 111 Table 7- 43 Version { get; } - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................ 111 Table 7- 44 IsInitialized() - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 111 Table 7- 45 IsInitialized { get; } - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................. 111 Table 7- 46 IsRuntimeManagerAvailable() - Native C++ .............................................................................. 112 Table 7- 47 IsRuntimeManagerAvailable { get; } - .NET (C#) ....................................................................... 112 Table 7- 48 Shutdown() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 112 Table 7- 49 Shutdown() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 112 Table 7- 50 GetRegisteredInstancesCount() - Native C++ ........................................................................... 113 Table 7- 51 GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() - Native C++ ............................................................................. 113 Table 7- 52 RegisteredInstanceInfo { get; } - .NET (C#) ............................................................................... 113 Table 7- 53 RegisterInstance() - Native C++ ................................................................................................ 114 Table 7- 54 RegisterInstance() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................. 115 Table 7- 55 RegisterCustomInstance() - Native C++ .................................................................................... 116 Table 7- 56 RegisterCustomInstance() - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................... 117 Table 7- 57 CreateInterface() - Native C++................................................................................................... 118 Table 7- 58 CreateInterface() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................... 119 Table 7- 59 OpenPort() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 119 Table 7- 60 OpenPort() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 120 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 13 Table of contents Table 7- 61 ClosePort() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 120 Table 7- 62 ClosePort() - .NET (C#).............................................................................................................. 120 Table 7- 63 GetPort() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................... 120 Table 7- 64 Port { get; } - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 121 Table 7- 65 GetRemoteConnectionsCount() - Native C++ ........................................................................... 121 Table 7- 66 GetRemoteConnectionInfoAt()- Native C++ .............................................................................. 121 Table 7- 67 RemoteConnectionInfo { get; } - .NET (C#) ............................................................................... 121 Table 7- 68 RemoteConnect() - Native C++ ................................................................................................. 122 Table 7- 69 RemoteConnect() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................... 123 Table 7- 70 Events for the ISimulationRuntimeManager interface ............................................................... 124 Table 7- 71 OnConfigurationChanged - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................... 124 Table 7- 72 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ ....................................................... 124 Table 7- 73 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................ 125 Table 7- 74 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) .............................................................. 125 Table 7- 75 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ .................................................... 125 Table 7- 76 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ ......................................................... 125 Table 7- 77 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) .......................................................... 126 Table 7- 78 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................. 126 Table 7- 79 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent - .NET (C#) ................................................................. 126 Table 7- 80 OnRuntimeManagerLost - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................ 127 Table 7- 81 RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() - Native C++ ......................................................... 127 Table 7- 82 RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................. 127 Table 7- 83 RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - .NET (C#) ............................................................... 128 Table 7- 84 UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() - Native C++...................................................... 128 Table 7- 85 UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - Native C++ .......................................................... 128 Table 7- 86 UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - .NET (C#) ............................................................ 128 Table 7- 87 WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - Native C++ .............................................................. 129 Table 7- 88 WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - .NET (C#) ................................................................ 129 Table 7- 89 Dispose() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................ 130 Table 7- 90 GetID() - Native C++ .................................................................................................................. 130 Table 7- 91 ID { get; } - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................. 130 Table 7- 92 GetName() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 131 Table 7- 93 Name { get; } - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................... 131 Table 7- 94 GetCPUType() - Native C++ ...................................................................................................... 132 Table 7- 95 SetCPUType() - Native C++....................................................................................................... 132 Table 7- 96 CPUType { get; set; } - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................. 132 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 97 GetCommunicationInterface() - Native C++ .............................................................................. 133 Table 7- 98 SetCommunicationInterface() - Native C++ ............................................................................... 133 Table 7- 99 CommunicationInterface { get; set; } - .NET (C#) ...................................................................... 134 Table 7- 100 GetInfo() - Native C++ ................................................................................................................ 134 Table 7- 101 Info { get; } - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 134 Table 7- 102 UnregisterInstance() - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 135 Table 7- 103 UnregisterInstance() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................... 135 Table 7- 104 GetControllerName() - Native C++ ............................................................................................ 136 Table 7- 105 ControllerName { get; } - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................... 136 Table 7- 106 GetControllerShortDesignation() - Native C++ .......................................................................... 137 Table 7- 107 ControllerShortDesignation { get; } - .NET (C#) ......................................................................... 137 Table 7- 108 GetControllerIPCount() - Native C++ ......................................................................................... 137 Table 7- 109 GetControllerIP() - Native C++ ................................................................................................... 138 Table 7- 110 ControllerIP { get; } - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................. 138 Table 7- 111 GetControllerIPSuite4() Native C++........................................................................................... 138 Table 7- 112 ControllerIPSuite4 { get; } - .NET (#) ......................................................................................... 138 Table 7- 113 SetIPSuite() - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 139 Table 7- 114 SetIPSuite() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 140 Table 7- 115 GetStoragePath() - Native C++.................................................................................................. 140 Table 7- 116 SetStoragePath() - Native C++ .................................................................................................. 141 Table 7- 117 StoragePath { get; set; } - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................... 141 Table 7- 118 ArchiveStorage() - Native C++ ................................................................................................... 142 Table 7- 119 ArchiveStorage() - .NET (C#)..................................................................................................... 142 Table 7- 120 RetrieveStorage() - Native C++ ................................................................................................. 143 Table 7- 121 RetrieveStorage() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................... 143 Table 7- 122 GetOperatingState() - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 144 Table 7- 123 OperatingState { get; } - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................ 145 Table 7- 124 PowerOn() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 146 Table 7- 125 PowerOn() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 147 Table 7- 126 PowerOff() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 148 Table 7- 127 PowerOff() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 148 Table 7- 128 MemoryReset() - Native C++ ..................................................................................................... 149 Table 7- 129 MemoryReset() - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................................... 149 Table 7- 130 Run() - Native C++ ..................................................................................................................... 150 Table 7- 131 Run() - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................................................... 150 Table 7- 132 Stop() - Native C++ .................................................................................................................... 151 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 15 Table of contents Table 7- 133 Stop() - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................................................... 151 Table 7- 134 UpdateTagList() - Native C++ .................................................................................................... 153 Table 7- 135 UpdateTagList() - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................................... 154 Table 7- 136 GetTagListStatus() - Native C++ ................................................................................................ 155 Table 7- 137 GetTagListStatus() - .NET (C#).................................................................................................. 155 Table 7- 138 GetTagInfoCount() - Native C++ ................................................................................................ 155 Table 7- 139 GetTagInfos() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 156 Table 7- 140 TagInfos { get; } - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................................... 156 Table 7- 141 CreateConfigurationFile() - Native C++ ..................................................................................... 157 Table 7- 142 CreateConfigurationFile() - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................... 157 Table 7- 143 InputArea { get; } MarkerArea { get; } OutputArea { get; } - .NET (C#) ...................................... 158 Table 7- 144 GetAreaSize() - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 159 Table 7- 145 AreaSize { get; } - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................................... 159 Table 7- 146 ReadBit() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................... 160 Table 7- 147 ReadBit() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................. 160 Table 7- 148 ReadByte() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 161 Table 7- 149 ReadByte() - .NET (C#).............................................................................................................. 162 Table 7- 150 ReadByte() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 163 Table 7- 151 ReadBytes() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 164 Table 7- 152 ReadSignals() - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 165 Table 7- 153 ReadSignals() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 166 Table 7- 154 WriteBit() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................... 167 Table 7- 155 WriteBit() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................. 168 Table 7- 156 WriteByte() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 169 Table 7- 157 WriteByte() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 169 Table 7- 158 WriteBytes() - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 170 Table 7- 159 WriteBytes() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 171 Table 7- 160 WriteSignals() - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 172 Table 7- 161 WriteSignals() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 173 Table 7- 162 Read() - Native C++ ................................................................................................................... 174 Table 7- 163 Read() - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................................................... 175 Table 7- 164 ReadBool() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 176 Table 7- 165 ReadBool() - .NET (C#).............................................................................................................. 176 Table 7- 166 ReadInt8() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................. 177 Table 7- 167 ReadInt8() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................... 177 Table 7- 168 ReadInt16() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 178 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 169 ReadInt16() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 178 Table 7- 170 ReadInt32() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 179 Table 7- 171 ReadInt32() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 179 Table 7- 172 ReadInt64() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 180 Table 7- 173 ReadInt64() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 180 Table 7- 174 ReadUInt8() - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 181 Table 7- 175 ReadUInt8() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 181 Table 7- 176 ReadUInt16() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 182 Table 7- 177 ReadUInt16() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 182 Table 7- 178 ReadUInt32() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 183 Table 7- 179 ReadUInt32() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 183 Table 7- 180 ReadInt64() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 184 Table 7- 181 ReadUInt64() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 184 Table 7- 182 ReadFloat() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 185 Table 7- 183 ReadFloat() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 185 Table 7- 184 ReadDouble() - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 186 Table 7- 185 ReadDouble() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 186 Table 7- 186 ReadChar() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 187 Table 7- 187 ReadChar() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 187 Table 7- 188 ReadWChar() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 188 Table 7- 189 ReadWChar() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 188 Table 7- 190 ReadSignals() - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 189 Table 7- 191 ReadSignals() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 190 Table 7- 192 Write() - Native C++ ................................................................................................................... 191 Table 7- 193 Write() - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................................................... 192 Table 7- 194 WriteBool() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 193 Table 7- 195 WriteBool() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 194 Table 7- 196 WriteInt8() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................. 195 Table 7- 197 WriteInt8() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................... 196 Table 7- 198 WriteInt16() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 197 Table 7- 199 WriteInt16() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 198 Table 7- 200 WriteInt32() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 199 Table 7- 201 WriteInt32() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 200 Table 7- 202 WriteInt64() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 201 Table 7- 203 WriteInt64() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 202 Table 7- 204 WriteUInt8() - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 203 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 17 Table of contents Table 7- 205 WriteUInt8() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 204 Table 7- 206 WriteUInt16() - Native C++......................................................................................................... 205 Table 7- 207 WriteUInt16() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 206 Table 7- 208 WriteUInt32() - Native C++......................................................................................................... 207 Table 7- 209 WriteUInt32() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 208 Table 7- 210 WriteUInt64() - Native C++......................................................................................................... 209 Table 7- 211 WriteUInt64() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 210 Table 7- 212 WriteFloat() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 211 Table 7- 213 WriteFloat() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 212 Table 7- 214 WriteDouble() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 213 Table 7- 215 WriteDouble() - .NET (C#).......................................................................................................... 214 Table 7- 216 WriteChar() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 215 Table 7- 217 WriteChar() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 216 Table 7- 218 WriteWChar() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 217 Table 7- 219 WriteWChar() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 218 Table 7- 220 WriteSignals() - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 219 Table 7- 221 WriteSignals() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 220 Table 7- 222 GetSystemTime() - Native C++ .................................................................................................. 220 Table 7- 223 SetSystemTime() - Native C++ .................................................................................................. 221 Table 7- 224 SystemTime { get; set; } - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................... 221 Table 7- 225 GetScaleFactor() - Native C++ .................................................................................................. 221 Table 7- 226 SetScaleFactor() - Native C++ ................................................................................................... 222 Table 7- 227 ScaleFactor { get; set; } - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................... 223 Table 7- 228 GetOperatingMode() - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 223 Table 7- 229 SetOperatingMode() - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 223 Table 7- 230 OperatingMode { get; set; } - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................... 224 Table 7- 231 SetSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() - Native C++ ........................................................ 224 Table 7- 232 IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() - Native C++ .......................................................... 224 Table 7- 233 IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled { get; set; } - .NET (C#) ............................................ 225 Table 7- 234 GetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() - Native C++ ................................................................ 225 Table 7- 235 SetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() - Native C++ ................................................................ 225 Table 7- 236 OverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns { get; set; } - .NET (C#) ........................................................ 226 Table 7- 237 RunToNextSyncPoint() - Native C++ ......................................................................................... 226 Table 7- 238 RunToNextSyncPoint() - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................... 226 Table 7- 239 StartProcessing() - Native C++ .................................................................................................. 227 Table 7- 240 StartProcessing() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................... 227 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 241 Overview - API methods and associated events ....................................................................... 228 Table 7- 242 ReadRecordDone() - Native C++............................................................................................... 230 Table 7- 243 ReadRecordDone() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................ 230 Table 7- 244 WriteRecordDone() - Native C++ ............................................................................................... 231 Table 7- 245 WriteRecordDone() - .NET (C#)................................................................................................. 231 Table 7- 246 AlarmNotification() - Native C++ ................................................................................................ 232 Table 7- 247 AlarmNotification() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................. 233 Table 7- 248 ProcessEvent() - Native C++ ..................................................................................................... 234 Table 7- 249 ProcessEvent() - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................................... 235 Table 7- 250 PullOrPlugEvent() - Native C++ ................................................................................................. 236 Table 7- 251 PullOrPlugEvent() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................... 237 Table 7- 252 StatusEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 238 Table 7- 253 StatusEvent() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 238 Table 7- 254 ProfileEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 239 Table 7- 255 ProfileEvent() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 239 Table 7- 256 UpdateEvent() - Native C++....................................................................................................... 240 Table 7- 257 UpdateEvent() - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................ 240 Table 7- 258 GetConfiguredProcessEvents() - Native C++ ............................................................................ 241 Table 7- 259 GetConfiguredProcessEvents() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................. 241 Table 7- 260 RackOrStationFaultEvent() - Native C++ ................................................................................... 242 Table 7- 261 RackOrStationFaultEvent() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................... 242 Table 7- 262 Events for the IInstances interface............................................................................................. 243 Table 7- 263 OnOperatingStateChanged - .NET (C#) .................................................................................... 243 Table 7- 264 RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() - Native C++ .................................................... 244 Table 7- 265 RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - Native C++ ......................................................... 244 Table 7- 266 UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() - Native C++ ................................................. 245 Table 7- 267 UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - Native C++ ...................................................... 245 Table 7- 268 UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) ....................................................... 246 Table 7- 269 WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - Native C++ .......................................................... 246 Table 7- 270 WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - .NET (C#)............................................................ 246 Table 7- 271 OnSyncPointReached - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................ 247 Table 7- 272 RegisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() - Native C++............................................................. 247 Table 7- 273 RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - Native C++ ................................................................. 248 Table 7- 274 UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() - Native C++ ......................................................... 248 Table 7- 275 UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - Native C++ .............................................................. 248 Table 7- 276 UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - .NET (C#) ................................................................ 248 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 19 Table of contents Table 7- 277 WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - Native C++ .................................................................. 249 Table 7- 278 WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - .NET (C#) .................................................................... 249 Table 7- 279 OnConfigurationChanging - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................... 249 Table 7- 280 RegisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() - Native C++ ...................................................... 250 Table 7- 281 RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................... 250 Table 7- 282 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() - Native C++ ................................................... 250 Table 7- 283 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................ 251 Table 7- 284 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - .NET (C#) .......................................................... 251 Table 7- 285 WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................ 251 Table 7- 286 WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - .NET (C#) .............................................................. 251 Table 7- 287 OnConfigurationChanged - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................... 252 Table 7- 288 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ ....................................................... 252 Table 7- 289 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................ 253 Table 7- 290 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ .................................................... 253 Table 7- 291 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ ......................................................... 253 Table 7- 292 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) .......................................................... 253 Table 7- 293 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................. 254 Table 7- 294 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) .............................................................. 254 Table 7- 295 OnLedChanged - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................................... 254 Table 7- 296 RegisterOnLedChangedCallback() - Native C++ ....................................................................... 255 Table 7- 297 RegisterOnLedChangedEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................................... 255 Table 7- 298 UnregisterOnLedChangedCallback() - Native C++ ................................................................... 255 Table 7- 299 UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................................ 256 Table 7- 300 UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................... 256 Table 7- 301 WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() - Native C++ ............................................................................ 256 Table 7- 302 WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) .............................................................................. 256 Table 7- 303 OnDataRecordRead - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................... 257 Table 7- 304 OnDataRecordWrite - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................... 257 Table 7- 305 RegisterOnDataRecordReadCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................... 257 Table 7- 306 UnregisterOnDataRecordReadCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................ 258 Table 7- 307 OnAlarmNotificationDone() - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................... 258 Table 7- 308 RegisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback() - Native C++ ....................................................... 258 Table 7- 309 UnregisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback() - Native C++ .................................................... 259 Table 7- 310 OnProcessEventDone() - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................... 259 Table 7- 311 RegisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................ 259 Table 7- 312 UnregisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ......................................................... 260 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 313 OnPullOrPlugEventDone() - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................... 260 Table 7- 314 RegisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ........................................................ 260 Table 7- 315 UnregisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ..................................................... 261 Table 7- 316 OnStatusEventDone() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................ 261 Table 7- 317 RegisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................... 261 Table 7- 318 UnregisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................ 262 Table 7- 319 OnProfileEventDone() - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................ 262 Table 7- 320 RegisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................... 262 Table 7- 321 UnregisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................ 263 Table 7- 322 OnUpdateEventDone() - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................... 263 Table 7- 323 RegisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ .............................................................. 263 Table 7- 324 UnregisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ .......................................................... 264 Table 7- 325 OnRackOrStationFaultEvent - .NET (C#) .................................................................................. 264 Table 7- 326 RegisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback() - Native C++ .................................................. 264 Table 7- 327 UnregisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback() - Native C++ ............................................... 264 Table 7- 328 Dispose() - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................ 265 Table 7- 329 GetVersion() - Native C++ ......................................................................................................... 265 Table 7- 330 Version { get; } - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................ 265 Table 7- 331 GetIP() - Native C++ .................................................................................................................. 266 Table 7- 332 IP { get; } - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................. 266 Table 7- 333 GetPort() - Native C++ ............................................................................................................... 266 Table 7- 334 Port { get; } - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 266 Table 7- 335 GetRemoteComputerName() - Native C++ ............................................................................... 267 Table 7- 336 RemoteComputerName { get; } - .NET (C#) .............................................................................. 267 Table 7- 337 Disconnect() - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 267 Table 7- 338 Disconnect() - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................... 268 Table 7- 339 GetRegisteredInstancesCount() - Native C++ ........................................................................... 268 Table 7- 340 GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() - Native C++ ............................................................................. 268 Table 7- 341 RegisterInstanceInfo { get; } - .NET (C#) ................................................................................... 269 Table 7- 342 RegisterInstance() - Native C++ ................................................................................................ 269 Table 7- 343 RegisterInstance() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................. 271 Table 7- 344 RegisterCustomInstance() - Native C++ .................................................................................... 272 Table 7- 345 RegisterCustomInstance() - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................... 273 Table 7- 346 CreateInterface() - Native C++................................................................................................... 274 Table 7- 347 CreateInterface() - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................... 275 Table 7- 348 OnConnectionLost - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................. 275 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 21 Table of contents Table 7- 349 RegisterOnConnectionLostCallback() - Native C++ .................................................................. 276 Table 7- 350 RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - Native C++ ....................................................................... 276 Table 7- 351 RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - .NET (C#) ......................................................................... 276 Table 7- 352 UnregisterOnConnectionLostCallback() - Native C++ ............................................................... 277 Table 7- 353 UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - Native C++ .................................................................... 277 Table 7- 354 UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - .NET (C#) ..................................................................... 277 Table 7- 355 WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() - Native C++ ........................................................................ 277 Table 7- 356 WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() - .NET (C#).......................................................................... 278 Table 7- 357 ApiEntry_Initialize - Native C++ ................................................................................................. 280 Table 7- 358 ApiEntry_DestroyInterface - Native C++ .................................................................................... 280 Table 7- 359 EventCallback_VOID - Native C++ ............................................................................................ 281 Table 7- 360 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST - Native C++ ................................................................................. 281 Table 7- 361 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS - Native C++ ......................................................... 282 Table 7- 362 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM - Native C++ .......................................................... 283 Table 7- 363 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 - Native C++ ............................. 284 Table 7- 364 EventCallback_IRRTM - Native C++ .......................................................................................... 285 Table 7- 365 EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 - Native C++................................................... 285 Table 7- 366 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 - Native C++........... 286 Table 7- 367 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI - Native C++ ...................................................................... 287 Table 7- 368 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDR - .NET (C#) ......................................................................... 288 Table 7- 369 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 - Native C++....................................... 289 Table 7- 370 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 - Native C++ ........................... 290 Table 7- 371 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 - Native C++ .................................................................. 291 Table 7- 372 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 - Native C++ .................................................... 292 Table 7- 373 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET - Native C++ .................................................. 293 Table 7- 374 Delegate_Void - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................ 293 Table 7- 375 Delegate_II_EREC_DT - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................... 294 Table 7- 376 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS - .NET (C#) ........................................................................ 294 Table 7- 377 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM - .NET (C#) ......................................................................... 295 Table 7- 378 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 - .NET (C#) ....................................... 296 Table 7- 379 Delegate_IRRTM - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................... 297 Table 7- 380 Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 - .NET (C#) ............................................................. 297 Table 7- 381 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 - .NET (C#) ..................... 298 Table 7- 382 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI - .NET (C#)................................................................................. 299 Table 7- 383 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR - .NET (C#).................................................................................. 300 Table 7- 384 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 - .NET (C#) ..................................................... 301 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 385 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 - Native C++ ....................................... 302 Table 7- 386 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 - .NET (C#) ................................................................................. 303 Table 7- 387 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 - .NET (C#) .................................................................. 304 Table 7- 388 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET - .NET (C#)................................................................. 305 Table 7- 389 Definitions - Native C++ ............................................................................................................. 306 Table 7- 390 Constants - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................... 306 Table 7- 391 UIP - Native C++ ........................................................................................................................ 307 Table 7- 392 UDataValue - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 308 Table 7- 393 SDataValue - Native C++ ........................................................................................................... 309 Table 7- 394 SDataValue - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 310 Table 7- 395 SDVBNI - Native C++ ................................................................................................................ 311 Table 7- 396 SDVBNI - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................................. 311 Table 7- 397 SDataValueByAddress - Native C++ ......................................................................................... 311 Table 7- 398 SDataValueByAddress - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................... 311 Table 7- 399 SDataValueByAddressWithCheck - Native C++ ........................................................................ 312 Table 7- 400 SDataValueByAddressWithCheck - .NET (C#) ......................................................................... 312 Table 7- 401 SDataValueByName - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 312 Table 7- 402 SDataValueByName - .NET (C#)............................................................................................... 312 Table 7- 403 SDataValueByNameWithCheck - Native C++ ........................................................................... 313 Table 7- 404 SDataValueByNameWithCheck - .NET (C#) ............................................................................. 313 Table 7- 405 SConnectionInfo - Native C++ ................................................................................................... 313 Table 7- 406 SConnectionInfo - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................................... 313 Table 7- 407 SInstanceInfo - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 314 Table 7- 408 SInstanceInfo - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 314 Table 7- 409 SDimension - Native C++ .......................................................................................................... 314 Table 7- 410 SDimension - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................ 314 Table 7- 411 STagInfo - Native C++ ............................................................................................................... 315 Table 7- 412 STagInfo - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................. 316 Table 7- 413 SIP - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................................... 317 Table 7- 414 SIPSuite4 - Native C++ .............................................................................................................. 317 Table 7- 415 SIPSuite4 - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................................ 318 Table 7- 416 SOnSyncPointReachedResult - Native C++ .............................................................................. 319 Table 7- 417 SOnSyncPointReachedResult - .NET (C#) ............................................................................... 320 Table 7- 418 SDataRecordInfo - Native C++ .................................................................................................. 321 Table 7- 419 SDataRecordInfo - .NET (C#) .................................................................................................... 321 Table 7- 420 SDataRecord - Native C++ ........................................................................................................ 322 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 23 Table of contents Table 7- 421 SDataRecord - .NET (C#) .......................................................................................................... 322 Table 7- 422 SConfiguredProcessEvents - Native C++ .................................................................................. 323 Table 7- 423 SConfiguredProcessEvents - .NET (C#) .................................................................................... 323 Table 7- 424 SDiagExtChannelDescription - Native C++ ............................................................................... 324 Table 7- 425 SDiagExtChannelDescription - .NET (C#) ................................................................................. 325 Table 7- 426 Error types according to PROFINET standard........................................................................... 325 Table 7- 427 ExtChannelErrType error types.................................................................................................. 326 Table 7- 428 ERuntimeErrorCode - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 327 Table 7- 429 ERuntimeErrorCode - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................... 329 Table 7- 430 EArea - Native C++ .................................................................................................................... 330 Table 7- 431 EArea - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................................................... 330 Table 7- 432 EOperatingState - Native C++ ................................................................................................... 330 Table 7- 433 EOperatingState - .NET (C#) ..................................................................................................... 331 Table 7- 434 EOperatingMode - Native C++ ................................................................................................... 331 Table 7- 435 EOperatingMode - .NET (C#)..................................................................................................... 331 Table 7- 436 ECPUType - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 332 Table 7- 437 ECPUType - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 333 Table 7- 438 ECommunicationInterface - Native C++ .................................................................................... 334 Table 7- 439 ECommunicationInterface - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................... 334 Table 7- 440 ELEDType - Native C++............................................................................................................. 334 Table 7- 441 ELEDType - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 334 Table 7- 442 ELEDMode - Native C++............................................................................................................ 335 Table 7- 443 ELEDMode - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................. 335 Table 7- 444 EPrimitiveDataType - Native C++ .............................................................................................. 335 Table 7- 445 EPrimitiveDataType - .NET (C#) ................................................................................................ 336 Table 7- 446 Compatible primitive data types - Reading ................................................................................ 336 Table 7- 447 Compatible primitive data types - Write ..................................................................................... 337 Table 7- 448 EDataType - Native C++ ............................................................................................................ 338 Table 7- 449 EDataType - .NET (C#) .............................................................................................................. 340 Table 7- 450 ETagListDetails - Native C++ ..................................................................................................... 342 Table 7- 451 ETagListDetails - .NET (C#)....................................................................................................... 342 Table 7- 452 ERuntimeConfigChanged - Native C++ ..................................................................................... 343 Table 7- 453 ERuntimeConfigChanged - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................... 343 Table 7- 454 EInstanceConfigChanged - Native C++ ..................................................................................... 343 Table 7- 455 EInstanceConfigChanged - .NET (C#) ....................................................................................... 343 Table 7- 456 EPullOrPlugEventType - Native C++ ......................................................................................... 344 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Table of contents Table 7- 457 EPullOrPlugEventType - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................... 344 Table 7- 458 EProcessEventType - Native C++ ............................................................................................. 344 Table 7- 459 EProcessEventType - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................... 345 Table 7- 460 EDirection - Native C++ ............................................................................................................. 345 Table 7- 461 EDirection - .NET (C#) ............................................................................................................... 345 Table 7- 462 EDiagProperty - Native C++ ...................................................................................................... 345 Table 7- 463 EDiagProperty - .NET (C#) ........................................................................................................ 345 Table 7- 464 EDiagSeverity - Native C++ ....................................................................................................... 346 Table 7- 465 EDiagSeverity - .NET (C#) ......................................................................................................... 346 Table 7- 466 ERackOrStationFaultType - Native C++ .................................................................................... 346 Table 7- 467 ERackOrStationFaultType - .NET (C#) ...................................................................................... 346 Table 8- 1 CPUs with limited Motion Control resources (MCR, EMCR) during the simulation ................... 352 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 25 Table of contents Figures Figure 2-1 Enable simulation capability ......................................................................................................... 33 Figure 4-1 Local communication via Softbus ................................................................................................ 53 Figure 4-2 Local communication via TCP/IP ................................................................................................. 53 Figure 4-3 Distributed communication via Ethernet ...................................................................................... 54 Figure 4-4 Distributed communication via network adapters ........................................................................ 55 Figure 4-5 Activate PLCSIM Virtual Switch ................................................................................................... 56 Figure 4-6 Accessible devices on the Virtual Ethernet Adapter .................................................................... 57 Figure 5-1 PLCSIM Advanced Symbol .......................................................................................................... 59 Figure 5-2 Example: Message in the taskbar ................................................................................................ 59 Figure 5-3 Control Panel ............................................................................................................................... 61 Figure 5-4 Example: Download via the "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP) after naming............. 65 Figure 5-5 Structure of the MAC address for an instance ............................................................................. 67 Figure 5-6 Add card reader ........................................................................................................................... 71 Figure 5-7 Preview of download dialog ......................................................................................................... 71 Figure 6-1 Freeze state of the virtual controller ............................................................................................. 76 Figure 6-2 Overview of the synchronization points ....................................................................................... 77 Figure 6-3 Example: Sequence in the SingleStep_CP operating mode ........................................................ 79 Figure 6-4 Example: Sequence in the TimespanSynchronized_CP operating mode ................................... 81 Figure 7-1 External applications and Simulation Runtime............................................................................. 83 Figure 7-2 Access to instances with distributed communication ................................................................... 84 Figure 7-3 API and external applications....................................................................................................... 85 Figure 7-4 Flowchart for the simulation of events ....................................................................................... 228 Figure 7-5 Flowchart .................................................................................................................................... 229 Figure 8-1 Policy exceptions for VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) ........................................................ 355 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 1 Guide 1.1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200SP systems. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742691). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 27 Guide 1.2 S7-PLCSIM products "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool The TIA Selection Tool can be used to select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). It assembles the configuration editors for automation technology already familiar into a single tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Guide 1.2 S7-PLCSIM products 1.2 S7-PLCSIM products PLCSIM Advanced V2.0, PLCSIM V15 and PLCSIM V5.x Table 1- 1 Comparison of S7-PLCSIM products Function PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 PLCSIM V15 PLCSIM V5.x Runtime Independent Programming with STEP 7 Programming with STEP 7 User interface Control Panel Look&Feel of TIA Portal Look&Feel of STEP 7 V5.x Communication Softbus, TCP/IP Softbus only Softbus only Supported CPU families S7-1500 (C, T, F), ET 200SP, ET 200SP F S7-1200 (F), S7-1500 (C, T, F), ET 200SP, ET 200SP F S7-300, S7-300F S7-400, S7-400F API for co-simulation1 - - Web server - - OPC UA - - Process diagnostics - S7 communication Softbus Softbus Open user communication , UDP only via TCP/IP Softbus - Traces2 () - Motion3 () - Protected blocks (KHP) , for S7-1500 CPUs only - Multiple instances Up to 16 Up to 2 - Support of distributed instances - - Virtual time - - Connection of real CPUs/HMIs - - DNS usage - - Virtual memory card - - Communication between the instances - PLCSIM as of V12 and PLCSIM V5.x can be installed and operated on the same PC or the same virtual machine. Instances of PLCSIM as of V12 can communicate via Softbus with PLCSIM V5.x. PLCSIM Advanced 2.0 and PLCSIM V15 and higher can be installed and operated on the same PC or the same virtual machine. The communication between the two applications cannot be simulated. - PLCSIM V5.4 SP8 is automatically installed with PLCSIM Advanced. The communication between the two applications can be simulated. Instances of PLCSIM Advanced can communicate via Softbus with PLCSIM V5.4 SP8. 1 Via C++ and C# programs and simulation software 2 Can be monitored with PLCSIM V15 in the TIA Portal; can also be monitored with PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 in the Web server. 3 With PLCSIM V15 the axes are always in simulation mode irrespective of the axis configuration. With PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 the axes can also be operated in "Real" mode over the API. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 29 2 Product overview 2.1 What is S7-PLCSIM Advanced? Using PLCSIM Advanced, you can simulate your CPU programs on a virtual controller. You do not need any real controllers for this. You can configure your CPU with STEP 7 in the TIA Portal, program your application logic and then load the hardware configuration and the program into the virtual controller. From there you can run your program logic, observe the effects of simulated inputs and outputs and adapt your programs. In addition to communicating via Softbus, PLCSIM Advanced provides a full Ethernet connection and can thus also communicate distributed. PLCSIM Advanced enables interaction with native C++/C# programs or simulation software over the user interface (API). Application areas Verification of the user program (TIA Portal) Automatic testing of the STEP 7 program Software in the loop simulation for the virtual commissioning of machine tools/production machines, production cells and production lines in a plant. Advantages The use of PLCSIM Advanced offers numerous advantages: Improve quality of automation projects by early error detection Avoid costs for hardware in simulation environments Reduced response times Reduce risk for commissioning Earlier training of operator is possible Increase production efficiency by optimizing program components Increase efficiency during replacement of machine components Increase efficiency during expansion of existing plants S7-PLCSIM Advanced 30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Product overview 2.2 Compatibility during upgrade 2.2 Compatibility during upgrade Compatibility of API and Runtime versions The installation of PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 leads to an upgrade of an existing earlier version. However, the Runtime Manager of PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 is compatible with projects that were created with the API version V1.0. You can therefore continue to use already created projects. Note PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 contains the API versions V1.0 (SP1) and V2.0 and the Runtime version V2.0. An API with higher version number cannot connect with the Runtime of an earlier version. Table 2- 1 Compatibility of API and Runtime versions API version Runtime version Supported V1.0 (SP1) V1.0 (SP1) Yes V1.0 (SP1) V2.0 Yes V2.0 V1.0 (SP1) No1 V2.0 V2.0 Yes 1 The combination leads to a "WRONG_VERSION" error. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 31 Product overview 2.3 Security for S7-PLCSIM Advanced 2.3 Security for S7-PLCSIM Advanced Restrictions for security Note the following restrictions when using PLCSIM Advanced: Authentication The user interfaces (API) do not have options for authentication and authorization. There is no protection using user accounts and passwords. The Runtime Manager communication is not protected by authentication. Communication The multi-computer simulation communication is not encrypted. A TCP/IP port is opened on the PC for cross-network communication. The installed WinPcap component provides access to TCP/IP network communication. Note For cross-computer communication, it is recommended to use a closed simulation network that is not connected to a production network. Know-how protection Note If know-how-protected blocks for the simulation support are enabled, the know-how protection is limited. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Product overview 2.4 Simulations support 2.4 Simulations support Requirement for simulation Note Enable simulation capability To use a STEP 7 project with simulation, you must select the "Support simulation during block compilation" option in the "Protection" tab in the properties of the project and confirm with OK. Figure 2-1 Enable simulation capability Know-how protection If a know-how-protected block is to be used for the simulation, it must be unlocked by entering a password. Only through unlocking can the "Simulation with SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced" option in the tab "General > Compilation" in the properties of the block be activated. Global libraries You cannot use know-how protection with global libraries, because the libraries are writeprotected. The "Simulation with SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced" option must be set when generating the blocks (source of the blocks). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 33 Product overview 2.5 Supported CPUs 2.5 Supported CPUs Supported CPUs from the S7-1500 family PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 supports the simulation of the following CPUs: Table 2- 2 Supported CPUs Type Version V1.8, V2.0, V2.1, V2.5 Standard CPUs CPU 1511-1 PN CPU 1511F-1 PN CPU 1513-1 PN CPU 1513F-1 PN CPU 1515-2 PN CPU 1515F-2 PN CPU 1516-3 PN/DP CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517-3 PN/DP2 CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP2 CPU 1518-4 PN/DP2 CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP2 CPU 1518-4 PN/DP Compact CPUs1 ODK2, 3 CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP ODK2, 3 CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP2, 3 CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP2, 3 CPU 1511C-1 PN CPU 1512C-1 PN ET 200SP CPUs Technology CPUs CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN CPU 1511T-1 PN CPU 1511TF-1 PN CPU 1515T-2 PN CPU 1515TF-2 PN CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP2 CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP2 PN/DP2 CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP2 CPU 1517T-3 1 The on-board I/O within the compact CPUs is not simulated. The simulation interface corresponds to the process image. 2 The simulation of this CPU only supports Motion Control Resources (MCR) and Extended Motion Control Resources (EMCR) to a limited extent. 3 The ODK functionality of this CPU is not simulated. Unsupported CPUs PLCSIM Advanced does not support the simulation of the following CPUs: S7-1200 CPUs ET 200pro, ET 200pro F CPUs ET 200SP Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC Software Controller S7-PLCSIM Advanced 34 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Product overview 2.5 Supported CPUs Compatibility to the TIA Portal The following versions of PLCSIM Advanced and the TIA Portal are compatible: Table 2- 3 Compatibility to the TIA Portal PLCSIM Advanced version TIA Portal version Supported CPU version V1.0 SP1 V14 (SP1), V15 V1.8, V2.0 V2.0 V14 (SP1), V15 V1.8, V2.0, V2.1, V2.5 Note Firmware version The firmware used in PLCSIM Advanced corresponds to that of a CPU S7-15xx V2.5. You can configure a CPU with an earlier firmware version (for example V1.8) and load it onto PLCSIM Advanced. The online diagnostics then also displays the firmware version V2.5. Downloading a CPU with a newer firmware version results in aborting. See also Restrictions with Motion Control (Page 352) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 35 Product overview 2.6 Differences between a simulated and a real CPU 2.6 Differences between a simulated and a real CPU The virtual controller cannot fully simulate a real CPU down to the individual details. Even if a program is downloaded without errors to the CPU and running successfully, this does not necessarily mean that the virtual controller in the simulation behaves exactly like a real CPU. Deterministic PLCSIM Advanced runs on a PC with the Windows operating system. Therefore, the scan cycle time and the exact time of actions in PLCSIM Advanced are not the same as when these actions run on physical hardware. This is because that several programs share the processing resources on your PC. To provide the best possible deterministic behavior under these conditions, PLCSIM Advanced as of V2.0 requires one free Core (CPU core) per instance. If your program depends heavily on the time required to execute actions, then make sure that you do not evaluate your program based only on the results of the simulation time. Know-how protection Projects with know-how protection for blocks can only be simulated if they are enabled for simulation. You need the block password for this purpose. Instructions Instructions are simulated with a few exceptions, see Restrictions for instructions (Page 351). Programs that are based on the instructions behave different than real CPUs in the simulation. Display of the quantity structure In STEP 7 the maximum quantity structure that is based on the CPU 1518-4 PN/DP is shown in the project navigation under "Program info" for all the CPUs. The maximum quantity structure of the currently simulated CPU is displayed under "Online & diagnositics". S7-PLCSIM Advanced 36 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Product overview 2.6 Differences between a simulated and a real CPU 2.6.1 Restrictions for all supported CPUs Bus systems PLCSIM Advanced does not simulate bus systems (PROFINET IO, PROFIBUS DP, backplane bus). I/O PLCSIM Advanced simulates the real CPU, but not configured I/O modules and the on-board I/O of the compact CPUs. Process image partitions Process image partitions are supported as with the real CPU. Address spaces that are not assigned to a process image partition are updated at the cycle control point. Update PLCSIM Advanced does not support updating of the process image partitions for IO systems that are connected to the CPU via CMs or CPs. Diagnostics / diagnostic alarms With PLCSIM Advanced, simple diagnostics buffer entries can be simulated according to PROFINET standard. PROFIBUS-specific diagnostics (e.g. via DS0, DS1) and user-specific text lists are not supported. Online and diagnostic functions Some online and diagnostic functions are not very useful in the simulation and are therefore not supported. These include, for example, the functions "Format memory card" and "Firmware update". Status indicators LED flashing In STEP 7, you can have the LED displayed on an CPU flash using the "Extended download to device" dialog. PLCSIM Advanced does not simulate this function. Data logging PLCSIM Advanced does not simulate data logging. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 37 Product overview 2.6 Differences between a simulated and a real CPU Recipes PLCSIM Advanced does not simulate the use of recipes. Copy protection PLCSIM Advanced does not simulate copy protection. Limited support PLCSIM Advanced simulates some functions to a limited extent. You can find an overview in the section Restrictions (Page 347). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 38 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Product overview 2.7 Simulating Motion Control 2.7 Simulating Motion Control Restrictions PLCSIM Advanced supports STEP 7 projects with configurations and functions for motion control for the CPUs S7-1500 (F), S7-1500C, S7-1500T (F) und ET 200SP (F). PLCSIM Advanced provides only limited support for technology objects in some CPUs, see Restrictions with Motion Control (Page 352). Simulation with external simulation software Note In a virtual S7-1500 controller, the technology objects are connected to the process image. Simulation software can thus access the process image via the user interfaces (API) of PLCSIM Advanced and simulate the behavior of the other connected axes. Simulation mode in STEP 7 The simulation mode in STEP 7 is a standard function of the technology objects and is independent of PLCSIM Advanced. If you want to move an axis in simulation mode, select the "Activate simulation" check box in STEP 7 under "Technology Object > Configuration> Basic Parameters > Simulation". No additional setting is required for a virtual axis. Feedback of the axis position The speed setpoint of the simulated drive is integrated into the actual position value with a time delay (PT1). The result of this calculation is returned to the technology object as position actual value of the axis. Reference point approach of the axis If you selected "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive frame" in STEP 7 for the reference point approach, PLCSIM Advanced responds immediately to any active (mode 2, 3, 8) or passive (mode 4, 5) reference point approach command (MC_Home). The actual position is predefined as the reference point. Additional information Information on "Setting in the drive and encoder connection" for actual value calculation of a virtual axis and on the topic "Virtual axis/Simulation" is available in the S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) function manual. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 39 3 Installing 3.1 Introduction 3.1.1 System requirements You need high-performance computer hardware if you intend to run multiple instances of PLCSIM Advanced at the same time or to simulate communication between PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 and HMI devices as of version 14.0. Recommendation: Create up to 4 local instances on your PC or virtualization platform. Minimum requirements for hardware Preferably, you should install PLCSIM Advanced stand-alone on a Siemens field programming device or PC, independent of STEP 7. Alternatively, you can install PLCSIM Advanced on the configuration PC on which STEP 7 is already installed. For PLCSIM Advanced to operate efficiently, the computer hardware must meet minimum requirements. Table 3- 1 Minimum requirements for hardware Hardware Requirement Processor * 2.2 GHz Intel(R) Celeron(R) Dual Core for one instance * One further free core per additional instance * 4 GB for one instance * 8 GB for 4 instances RAM Free hard disk space 5 GB Screen resolution Minimum 1024 x 768 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 40 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Installing 3.1 Introduction Operating systems (64-bit versions) PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 supports the following operating systems: Windows 7 Home Premium SP1 Windows 7 Professional SP1 Windows 7 Enterprise SP1 Windows 7 Ultimate SP1 Windows 10 Home Version 1703 Windows 10 Pro Version 1703 Windows 10 Enterprise Version 1703 (for Field PG M5) Windows 10 Enterprise 2016 LTSB Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2016 LTSB Windows Server 2012 R2 StdE (full installation) Windows Server 2016 Standard (full installation) Note Make sure that the Windows operating system you are using is up to date. Virtualization platforms You can install STEP 7 and PLCSIM Advanced on a virtual machine. For this purpose, use one of the following virtualization platforms in the specified version or a newer version: VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) 6.5 VMware Workstation 12.5.5 VMware Workstation Player 12.5.5 The information that you need to install STEP 7 (TIA Portal) on a virtual machine is available on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/en/en/view/78788417). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 41 Installing 3.1 Introduction 3.1.2 Licenses Floating license PLCSIM Advanced is supplied with a floating type license. It can be stored locally and shared for a network. Note Validity A license is valid for up to three instances within a PLCSIM Advanced installation. PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 cannot be used with a V1.0 license. PLCSIM Advanced V1.0 can be used with a V2.0 license. Handling licenses Handling of licenses is described in the Help for SIMATIC Automation License Manager (ALM). 3.1.3 Trial License A license is available for the limited period of 21 days for S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0. Activating the Trial License As soon as you start an instance in the Control Panel, the Automation License Manager (ALM) searches the network for a valid license. If a Floating License is available for S7-PLCSIM Advanced, the ALM offers the Trial License for activation. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 42 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Installing 3.1 Introduction A message at the start of the instances shows the remaining number of days. Note Remote access With remote access, the message must be confirmed on the computer on which the instance was started. Note Sequence of the Trial License If no valid license is available after the Trial License has elapsed, the instance is no longer started. Timeout alarm If you do not confirm the message for the license in a certain amount of time, the instance is not started and the following message appears: Remedy Start the instance again and confirm the message for the license. API functions for licenses Return values for API function PowerOn() (Page 144) and callback function OnOperatingStateChanged (Page 243) - SREC_OK when a floating license is available. - SREC_WARNING_TRIAL_MODE_ACTIVE when an instance is started with the Trial License. Return value for callback function OnOperatingStateChanged - SREC_LICENSE_NOT_FOUND when the instance is automatically shut down after 21 days. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 43 Installing 3.1 Introduction 3.1.4 Installation log The log files contains automatically recorded information on the following installation processes: Installation of S7-PLCSIM Advanced Change or update of installation of S7-PLCSIM Advanced Repair of an existing installation of S7-PLCSIM Advanced Uninstallation of S7-PLCSIM Advanced You can evaluate installation errors and warnings using the log files. You can troubleshoot the installation yourself or contact Siemens Technical Support. Product Support personnel need information from the installation log to analyze the problem. Send the folder with the log files as a ZIP file to Support. Memory location of the installation log The memory location of the log file depends on the operating system. To open the folder with the log files, enter the environment variable "%autinstlog%" in the address bar in Windows Explorer. Alternatively, you reach the appropriate directory by entering "cd %autinstlog%" in the command line. The log files are named as follows: SIA_S7-PLCSIM_Advanced_V02@.log SIA_S7-PLCSIM_Advanced_V02@_summary.log Setup_Report (CAB file) An archive file with the installation log and all other required files is stored in CAB format. This archive file can be found at "%autinstlog%\Reports\Setup_report.cab". If you need help during installation, send this CAB file to SIEMENS Technical Support. Technical Support personnel can troubleshoot your installation based on the information in the CAB file. A separate CAB file with a date ID is saved for each installation. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 44 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Installing 3.2 S7-PLCSIM Advanced 3.2 S7-PLCSIM Advanced The S7-PLCSIM Advanced package contains the following software: S7-PLCSIM Advanced Automation License Manager S7-PLCSIM V5.4 .NET Framework WinPcap The package is available as download and on DVD. SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 Floating License Download SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 Floating License (DVD) After installing PLCSIM Advanced, keep the DVD in a secure, easily accessible place. Setup program You can use the Setup program to change, repair or uninstall your installation, if necessary. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 45 Installing 3.3 Installing S7-PLCSIM Advanced 3.3 Installing S7-PLCSIM Advanced Installation requirements The Setup program starts automatically with a double-click on the download package or when you insert the DVD in the drive. Make sure that the following conditions are met before you begin the installation process: The hardware and software of the computer meet the system requirements. You have administrator rights on the installation computer. No other programs are active. This also applies to the Siemens Automation License Manager and other Siemens applications. All S7-PLCSIM versions prior or equal to V14 are uninstalled. Note Security settings For licensing via the ALM, you must agree during installation that port 4410 for TCP can be entered as an exception in the Windows Firewall (procedure step 5). Installing S7-PLCSIM Advanced To install, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the download package or insert the installation medium into the DVD drive of your computer. The setup program starts up automatically, provided you have not disabled the Autostart function on the computer. If the setup program does not start up automatically, start it manually by double-clicking the "Start.exe" file. The "General settings" window is displayed. 2. Click the "Read installation notes" button. After you have read the notes, close the file. 3. Click the "Read product information" button. After you have read the information, close the file. 4. Click the "Browse" button if you want to change the default installation path. The installation path must not exceed 89 characters. The path name must not contain any UNICODE characters. If you select a different installation path than the default installation path, the desktop icon may not be displayed correctly. 5. Click "Next". The window with the security settings is displayed. To continue the installation, select the check box at the bottom of the screen to accept changes to the security and permissions settings of your system. 6. Click "Next". The window with the installation settings is displayed. You can save or print a report of the settings by clicking "Save report" or "Print report". Check the settings for correctness. If you want to make any changes, click "Back" until you reach the point in the installation process where you want to make changes. Once you have completed your changes, click "Next". S7-PLCSIM Advanced 46 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Installing 3.3 Installing S7-PLCSIM Advanced 7. The overview screen shows your installation details. Click the "Install" button. The installation then starts. 8. After completion of the setup program, you must restart your computer. Select "Yes, I want to restart the computer now" to restart the computer immediately or select "No, I will restart computer later" to restart the computer later. 9. Click "Restart". If the computer is not restarted, click "Finish". Error during installation of S7-PLCSIM Advanced When PLCSIM Advanced is installed, any existing installation of S7-PLCSIM is displayed. A requirement for installation of S7-PLCSIM Advanced is that no other S7-PLCSIM installation prior or equal to V14 is located on the same computer. Even though no installation of S7-PLCSIM is displayed in the "Programs and Features" list, it is still possible that the computer has an existing installation. Remedy Run the setup for S7-PLCSIM prior or equal to V14 and uninstall the program. When the setup is not available, download the setup files for S7-PLCSIM via Siemens Mall (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/65601780). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 47 Installing 3.4 Changing S7-PLCSIM Advanced 3.4 Changing S7-PLCSIM Advanced Requirements The following conditions must be met before you can start changing the installation: The hardware and software of the computer meet the system requirements. You have administrator rights on the installation computer. No other programs are active. Procedure To change your S7-PLCSIM Advanced installation, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the download package or insert the installation medium into the drive. The setup program starts up automatically, provided you have not disabled the Autostart function on the computer. If the setup program does not start up automatically, start it manually by double-clicking the "Start.exe" file. 2. Follow the prompts until you reach the "Configuration" window. 3. Select the "Change upgrade" check box. 4. Follow the remaining prompts to change your installation. 5. Complete the installation operation by restarting your computer. Note Target directory You cannot change the target directory because you are changing an existing installation. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 48 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Installing 3.5 Repairing S7-PLCSIM Advanced 3.5 Repairing S7-PLCSIM Advanced Requirements The following conditions must be met before you can start repairing the installation: The hardware and software meet the system requirements. You have administrator rights on the installation computer. No other programs are active. Procedure To repair your installation, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the download package or insert the installation medium into the drive. The setup program starts up automatically, provided you have not disabled the Autostart function on the computer. If the setup program does not start up automatically, start it manually by double-clicking the "Start.exe" file. 2. Follow the prompts until you reach the "Configuration" window. Select the "Repair" check box. 3. Follow the remaining prompts to repair your installation. 4. Complete the repair operation by restarting your computer. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 49 Installing 3.6 Uninstalling S7-PLCSIM Advanced 3.6 Uninstalling S7-PLCSIM Advanced You have two options for uninstalling S7-PLCSIM Advanced: You uninstall the program using the Windows Control Panel. You uninstall the entire product using the Setup program. Uninstalling S7-PLCSIM Advanced using the Windows Control Panel Proceed as follows: 1. Double-click the "Programs and Features" option in the Windows Control Panel. 2. Right-click "Siemens S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0" and select "Uninstall". 3. Follow the prompts for uninstallation. 4. Complete the uninstallation operation by restarting your computer. If you do not perform a restart, the Runtime Manager continues running. If problems occur when uninstalling PLCSIM Advanced using the Windows Control Panel, use the installation medium for uninstalling. Uninstalling S7-PLCSIM Advanced using the Setup program Proceed as follows: 1. Double-click the download package or insert the installation medium into the drive. The setup program starts up automatically, provided you have not disabled the Autostart function on the computer. If the setup program does not start up automatically, start it manually by double-clicking the "Start.exe" file. If you do not perform a restart, the Runtime Manager continues running. 2. Follow the prompts until you reach the "Configuration" window. Your previous installation is detected. Select the "Uninstall" check box. 3. Follow the prompts for uninstallation. 4. Complete the uninstallation operation by restarting your computer. If you do not perform a restart, the Runtime Manager continues running. Uninstalling additional software During uninstalling the following software from the S7-PLCSIM Advanced package remains installed: Automation License Manager S7-PLCSIM V5.4 .NET Framework WinPcap If you also want to uninstall this software, use the Windows Control Panel. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 50 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 4 Communication paths Local and distributed communication The following paths are open for communication between STEP 7 V15 or higher and the instances of PLCSIM Advanced user interfaces: Communication paths Local Local Distributed Protocol Softbus TCP/IP TCP/IP Communication interface in PLCSIM Advanced PLCSIM PLCSIM Virtual PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter Ethernet Adapter STEP 7 and instances On a PC / VM On a PC / VM Distributed between STEP 7 and instances Yes Yes Yes among instances Yes Yes Yes possible via OPC UA server and Web serv- No er Yes Yes between an instance and a real hardware CPU No No Yes between an instance and a real HMI V14 and higher No No Yes between an instance and a simulated HMI V14 and higher Yes Yes Yes Communication... Softbus Softbus is a communication path via a virtual software interface. The communication is limited to a local PC or a virtual machine. The advantage here is that no data can be accidentally downloaded to a hardware CPU or communicate with real hardware. Selecting a communication interface You program the communication interface via the user interfaces (API) or select them in the Control Panel under "Online Access". The setting is valid for all generated instances. The default setting is the communication via "PLCSIM" (Softbus). Additional network settings are necessary for the distributed communication via the "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP), see Network addresses in the simulation (Page 66). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 51 Communication paths API functions for selecting the communication interface GetCommunicationInterface() (Page 133) SetCommunicationInterface() (Page 133) CommunicationInterface { get; set; } (Page 134) See also Interfaces - Information and settings (Page 130) S7 PLCSIM Advanced Control Panel (Page 60) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 52 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Communication paths 4.1 Local communication 4.1 Local communication Local communication can be performed via the Softbus protocol or TCP/IP. For local communication, the PLCSIM Advanced instance is on the same PC or on the same virtualization platform (VMware) as STEP 7 or another communication partner. Local communication via Softbus Local communication is performed via Softbus in PLCSIM Advanced by default. This ensures that no data can be accidentally downloaded to a hardware CPU or that there is communication with real hardware. Figure 4-1 Local communication via Softbus Local communication via TCP/IP Communication is performed via the PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter, a virtual network interface that behaves like a real network interface. Figure 4-2 Local communication via TCP/IP S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 53 Communication paths 4.2 Communication via TCP / IP 4.2 Communication via TCP / IP Distributed communication Distributed communication via TCP/IP means that the PLCSIM Advanced instances communicate with the other devices via the Virtual Switch . Communication is possible with real or simulated CPUs, real or simulated HMIs. The PLCSIM Virtual Switch must be activated on the PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter for instances on the network to be visible. Example 1: Distributed communication In the following example, STEP 7 is on a PC and the PLCSIM Advanced instances are on another PC. The PCs are connected via the Ethernet adapter. Figure 4-3 Distributed communication via Ethernet Example 2: Distributed communication In the following example, STEP 7 is on a PC and the PLCSIM Advanced instances are on a virtual machine on the same PC. PC and virtual machine are connected via the network adapters. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 54 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Communication paths 4.2 Communication via TCP / IP Recommendation Use to ensure the VMware settings as the network adapter type for the Bridged Mode to ensure error-free operation. Figure 4-4 Distributed communication via network adapters S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 55 Communication paths 4.3 Enable distributed communication 4.3 Enable distributed communication By default, the PLCSIM Virtual Switch can only communicate locally. For a distributed, i.e. multi-computer, communication to be possible, you must activate the PLCSIM Virtual Switch for a real network adapter. Note Network adapter Make sure that only one network adapter of the PLCSIM Virtual Switch is activated. The Control Panel of PLCSIM Advanced checks the activation and may report an incorrect configuration (error code -50). Activate PLCSIM Virtual Switch To make the PLCSIM instances visible on the network and to reach other devices, activate the PLCSIM Virtual Switch in the Control Panel of PLCSIM Advanced or under Windows: 1. To do this, open the "Network and Sharing Center" in the Windows Control Panel. 2. Open the properties of the desired network adapter, for example, for the "Local Area Connection". 3. Select the check box for the "Siemens PLCSIM Virtual Switch" and confirm with OK. Figure 4-5 Activate PLCSIM Virtual Switch S7-PLCSIM Advanced 56 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Communication paths 4.3 Enable distributed communication Accessible devices When the PLCSIM Virtual Switch is activated, STEP 7 shows the devices available on the Virtual Ethernet Adapter in the project tree. Figure 4-6 Accessible devices on the Virtual Ethernet Adapter Distributed communication via WLAN When using distributed communication via WLAN, it may happen that the WinPcap software installed by PLCSIM Advanced does not work with the integrated WLAN adapter of the computer. In this case, no WLAN connection can be established. Remedy Use the wired network adapter of the PC/notebook and connect a WLAN adapter upstream. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 57 5 Simulate CPU 5.1 Basic procedure for the simulation The following overview shows the basic steps to perform simulation with an instance of a virtual controller. Requirements The following requirements must be met for starting simulation via local communication: STEP 7 as of V14 and S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 are installed on the same PC. The CPU hardware is configured in STEP 7. Note Enable simulation support In the "Protection" tab in the properties of the project in STEP 7, select the check box "Support simulation during block compilation". Create and activate an instance via the Control Panel Open PLCSIM Advanced Control Panel Open the "Start Virtual S7-1500 PLC" options Enter a name for an instance Select CPU type Create an instance using the "Start" button In STEP 7, perform the download and start the simulation Download the program to the virtual controller Switch the controller to RUN to start the simulation Perform diagnostics ... See also Simulations support (Page 33) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 58 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.2 User interface 5.2 User interface 5.2.1 S7 PLCSIM Advanced Symbol After installing PLCSIM Advanced, the following icons are on the Windows desktop: Figure 5-1 PLCSIM Advanced Symbol After double-clicking the icon, the icon appears in the taskbar of the information area. You can use Windows functions to permanently display the icon in the information area of the taskbar. Opening a graphical interface Right-clicking on the icon in the taskbar opens the graphical interface of PLCSIM Advanced, the Control Panel. If the Control Panel is open, you can use the mouse-over function to display messages about the current status of the instances. Figure 5-2 Example: Message in the taskbar S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 59 Simulate CPU 5.2 User interface 5.2.2 S7 PLCSIM Advanced Control Panel Control Panel The Control Panel is optional and is not needed to use PLCSIM Advanced via the API. It is available in English in version 2.0. Online access Switch to select the communication interface TCP/IP communication Selection of network adapter for distributed communication Virtual time Slider to adjust the scaling factor Start Virtual S7-1500 PLC Name of the instance Here you enter a unique name for the instance. Enter a minimum of 3, a maximum of 64 characters. If the name is unique in the network, the "Start" button is enabled. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 60 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.2 User interface * IP address * Subnet mask * Standard gateway The input boxes are visible when you switch the communication interface to "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter". The IP address is entered automatically. CPU type Here you select the type of CPU to be simulated. "Start" button Use the button to create and start an instance with the entered or selected name. Instance list The "RUN", "STOP" and "MRES" buttons for the operating mode and memory reset. LED displays The meaning of the LED is displayed when you move the mouse over it. Runtime Manager Port Here you open a port on the local PC. Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card ... Open an Explorer window here in which you select the path to the virtual memory card. Display messages Here you disable the PLCSIM Advanced messages in the Windows task bar for the duration of the operation. Function manual This is where you open the S7 PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual in a standard PDF viewer. Exit Exit switches all instances off and closes the Control Panel. The list displays the available local instances of the CPUs. Figure 5-3 Control Panel Switch for communication interface Use the switch to select the communication interface for all instances to be created: "PLCSIM corresponds to the local communication via Softbus (default). "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter corresponds to the communication via TCP/IP. The setting applies to all other instances. The selected communication interface for starting an instance is maintained until all instances are shut down. When an instance is already started, it sets "its" communication interface as the default for other instances. To change the communication interface, switch off all instances and enable the other interface. TCP/IP communication You can select a real network adapter from the drop-down list during operation. You thus activate the PLCSIM Virtual Switch and establish TCP/IP communication between the instances and the real network. The setting disables the PLCSIM Virtual Switch and disconnects the instances from the real network. Only local TCP/IP communication over virtual adapter is possible in this case. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 61 Simulate CPU 5.2 User interface Virtual time Use the slider or the mouse wheel to select the scaling factor for the virtual time. The selected scaling factor applies to the instances for which the virtual time is enabled. Clicking on "Off" restores the default (1) again. For more information, seeVirtual time response (Page 73). Create instance (local) To create an instance, enter a unique name under "Instance Name". If the name already exists in the directory of the Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card, the existing instance is started. In the "PLC-Type" drop-down list, select the Unspecified CPU 1500 or Unspecified ET 200SP CPU type. The CPU is named with the first download of the TIA Portal. Recommendation: Create up to 4 local instances on your PC or virtualization platform. Remote instances cannot be created through the Control Panel. Instance list The list contains the active instances of the CPU that are started locally on the PC or virtualization platform. Instances that have already been started on the runtime API are detected and displayed in the list. Select the operating mode of the instance with the "RUN" and "STOP" buttons. Select one or more instances for this purpose. Perform a memory reset with the "MRES" button. The LED displays show the status of the instance that corresponds to those of the hardware CPU. RUN and STOP are displayed depending on the current operating state of the instance. You can "operate" the instance with icons: Apply scaling factor for the virtual time, Switch on instance, disable virtual time, Switch off instance, Switch off instance and log out of the Runtime Manager Runtime Manager Port A remote connection can be established to another Runtime Manager via the specified port. The value must be greater than 1024. If you select the check box, the port remains stored. You can use the remote connection without having to make this setting every time you start the Control Panel. To use this functionality, the Control Panel must be started and running in the background. Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card The user program, the hardware configuration and the retentive data are stored on the Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card. Use the button to open an Explorer window in which you select the path to the virtual memory card or in which the path is displayed. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 62 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.2 User interface Display messages Each time the panel starts, help information and messages relating to the Control Panel are displayed, for example, when changing the IP address or when a license is missing. Disable the display if you do not need the messages. Exit The command switches off all local instances on the PC or the VM and logs them off from the Runtime Manager. This command closes the Runtime Manager if there is no remote connections to other Runtime Managers. If the Runtime Manager has remote connections to instances on additional PCs, these instances and the Runtime Manager continue to run. Minimize Control Panel Clicking on an empty area on the desktop minimizes the Control Panel. The instances are not affected. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 63 Simulate CPU 5.3 Download 5.3 Download Requirements You can download the STEP 7 project to the virtual controller when the following conditions are met: The instance is created via the Control Panel. The check box "Support simulation during block compilation" is selected. Selecting the communication interface In the Download dialog box, select the PG/PC interface: "PLCSIM" for download via Softbus "Siemens PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" for download via TCP/IP For distributed communication the real adapter that is connected to the network Display in the download dialog The dialog in STEP 7 at the first download of the CPU shows the compatible PLCSIM Advanced instances. If the instance has not yet been configured after the first download only one interface is visible and it appears with the device type "CPU-1500 Simulation". If the instance has been configured, the number of interfaces visible is determined my the number the CPU type has. The lifelist shows the interfaces of an instance with their IP addresses. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 64 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.3 Download Perform download 1. Select the PG/PC interface. 2. Click "Download". In the "Load preview" window, STEP 7 shows the message "The downloads are performed on a simulated CPU". After the first download, the PLCSIM Advanced instance displays the CPU type. Figure 5-4 Example: Download via the "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP) after naming S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 65 Simulate CPU 5.4 Network addresses in the simulation 5.4 Network addresses in the simulation 5.4.1 Siemens PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter IP address At the PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter you assign a static IP address or obtain an IP address via DHCP (default). MAC address A randomly generated MAC address is assigned to the PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter during its installation. PLCSIM Advanced only uses MAC addresses that are designated as "locally administered" (bit 2 in LSB). The Siemens-specific prefix is: 02-1B-1B Three bytes follow, which are determined at random. Storage location This MAC address is stored in the registry key "PlcsimvminiMacAddress". You can overwrite this value. 5.4.2 PLCSIM Advanced instances Detect CPUs and instances If Ethernet interfaces of CPUs and PLCSIM Advanced instances are mixed in a network, the instances can be recognized by the "PLCSIM" suffix on the station type. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 66 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.4 Network addresses in the simulation Structure of the MAC address for an instance The following figure shows the structure of the dynamically generated, locally managed MAC address: Figure 5-5 Structure of the MAC address for an instance The MAC address tells you the PC on which a PLCSIM Advanced instance has been started. Assignment of the Ethernet interfaces Port configurations of the Ethernet interfaces cannot be simulated in PLCSIM Advanced V2.0. Topological interconnection is not supported. A MAC address for a port is reserved internally for each Ethernet interface. Table 5- 1 Assignment of the Ethernet interfaces, for example, for a CPU 1518-4 PN/DP Ethernet interface Last digit of the MAC Address IE 1 IE 1 / Port 1 ...........0 ...........1 IE 2 IE 2 / Port 1 ...........2 ...........3 IE 3 IE 3 / Port 1 ...........4 ...........5 Example 02-C0-A8-00-83-10 means: 02 locally managed MAC address of a PLCSIM Advanced instance C0-A8-00-83 IP of the Siemens PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet adapter = 192.168.0.131 1 Instance 1 0 Ethernet interface IE 1 If no Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card is loaded during startup of PLCSIM Advanced, the interfaces of PLCSIM Advanced display instances with their locally managed MAC address. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 67 Simulate CPU 5.5 Simulate peripheral I/O 5.5 Simulate peripheral I/O The Runtime API writes to and reads from a memory area. This memory is synchronized with the internal process image of the virtual S7-1500 controller at the cycle control point and when calling cyclic and acyclic OBs (process image partitions, interrupts, events). The direct I/O accesses are made to this memory area. Only one process can access this memory at a given time. The virtual controller must be in RUN to apply changes made by the API. Note Dominance of the API when synchronizing The API dominates when synchronizing. If the user program writes to the same address range as the API, the changes of the API overwrite those of the virtual controller. See also Deviating I/O values in the STEP 7 user program (Page 356) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 68 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.6 Simulate communication 5.6 Simulate communication 5.6.1 Communication services that can be simulated PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 supports the following communication options: Table 5- 2 Supported communication options Communications options Functionality / instructions PG communication On commissioning, testing, diagnostics Open communication using TCP/IP * TSEND_C / TRCV_C * TSEND / TRCV * TCON1, 3 * T_DISCON * TSEND_C / TRCV_C * TSEND / TRCV * TCON * T_DISCON * TUSEND / TURCV * TCON * T_DISCON * MB_CLIENT * MB_SERVER E-mail2, 3 * TMAIL_C S7 communication * PUT / GET * BSEND / BRCV * USEND / URCV Open communication using ISO-onTCP Open communication via UDP2 Communication via Modbus TCP OPC UA Server2 Web server2, 3 Data exchange with OPC UA clients Data exchange via HTTP 1 When the "PLCSIM" interface (Softbus) is set, communication is performed internally via ISO-onTCP. 2 Only via the communication interface "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP) 3 Secure TCP communication is not supported. Special conditions apply when communicating with TUSEND/TURCV, see Restrictions for communications services (Page 351). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 69 Simulate CPU 5.6 Simulate communication TMAIL_C When the TMAIL_C instruction is used, the mail server may not be located on the same computer as the PLCSIM Advanced instance. Remedy Make the mail server available via a different computer in the network. 5.6.2 Communication between instances PLCSIM Advanced supports communication between instances. An instance may be a simulation in PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 or a simulation in WinCC Runtime as of V14. You can run two instances of PLCSIM Advanced, which then communicate with each other. To enable instances to communicate with each other, they must have a unique IP address. Each simulated CPU requires a unique IP address If the CPUs have the same IP address, you cannot run multiple simulations. Each simulated CPU requires a unique IP address. Make sure that the IP addresses in STEP 7 are unique before you start your simulations. T-block instructions and UDP PLCSIM Advanced simulates T-block connections for which the UDP protocol is configured only via the communication interface "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP). T-block instructions and data segmentation PLCSIM Advanced implements T-block instructions with a data segmentation of 4 KB. A real CPU has data segmentation of 8192 bytes. If you send more than 4 KB in a single TSEND instruction and receive data in ad hoc mode with a TRCV instruction, the TRCV instruction generates new data with only 4 KB. You must perform the TRCV instruction several times to receive additional bytes. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 70 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Simulate CPU 5.7 Provide project data offline for simulation 5.7 Provide project data offline for simulation Simulations regardless of STEP 7 To perform simulations independent of STEP 7, you can save the user program and the hardware configuration in STEP 7 in a directory. Provide project data offline 1. Create a "User-defined Card Reader" for your project data under Card Reader/USB storage in the project tree of STEP 7 for the CPU. 2. In the "Load preview" dialog for the target device, select "PLC Simulation Advanced" as an action, click in the selection field for this. The project is saved to the \SIMATIC.S7S\OMSSTORE directory. 3. Save the folder\SIMATIC.S7S with the project data to a medium of your choice. Figure 5-6 Add card reader Figure 5-7 Preview of download dialog S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 71 Simulate CPU 5.7 Provide project data offline for simulation Provide project data for simulation 1. On the PC on which PLCSIM Advanced is installed, create the directory \SIMATIC_MC in the directory in which the instance saves its data. 2. Move the \SIMATIC.S7S folder to the directory you have created. The instances can be started with the project data. API functions The project data can be used for an instance via the user interface. Use of the following functions for this: API functions GetStoragePath() (Page 140) StoragePath { get; set; } (Page 141) See also Controller - Information and settings (Page 136) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 72 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Virtual time response 6 The virtual controller uses internally two types of clocks for simulation: A virtual clock and a real clock. The virtual clock is always the basis for the user program. It is used by components that are relevant for running the STEP 7 user program, such as cyclic OBs, cycle time monitoring, minimum cycle time, virtual system time and time calculations. Also, the time between two cycle control points is measured in virtual time. The virtual time can be accelerated or slowed for test purposes. The real clock always runs unchanged. It is used by components that are not subject to control processes, for example, communication with STEP 7. Virtual system time When you start PLCSIM Advanced, the virtual system time of the virtual controller starts with the system time of Windows. The virtual system time is based on the virtual clock, i.e. if a scaling factor is used, the system time runs correspondingly faster or slower. All events that the virtual controller sends to the API provides a time stamp based on the system time. Note Difference between system time and local time * System time: UTC 0 with daylight saving / standard time * Local time: UTC time zone with daylight saving time / winter time API functions GetSystemTime() (Page 220) SetSystemTime() (Page 221) SystemTime { get; set; } (Page 221) Time offset Note Keep in mind that the time information of virtual system time and real local time differs by the time offset that is formed in addition to the selected scaling factor from the time zone offset and the daylight saving time/standard time offset. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 73 Virtual time response Scaling factor Using a scaling factor, you can speed up or slow down the virtual clock of the virtual controller for simulations. The default is 1, i.e. the course of the virtual time corresponds to the course of real time. Fast forward: A scaling factor greater than 1 accelerates the virtual clock. Example: Scaling factor 2.0 The virtual time is running twice as fast. Slow motion: A scaling factor less than 1 decelerates the virtual clock. Example: Scaling factor 0.5 The progress of the virtual time slows down to 50%. API functions GetScaleFactor() (Page 221) SetScaleFactor() (Page 222) ScaleFactor { get; set; } (Page 223) See also Settings for the virtual time (Page 220) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 74 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Virtual time response 6.1 Speed up and slow down simulation 6.1 Speed up and slow down simulation Influence of fast forward and slow motion Simulations can be accelerated and slowed down. Fast forward and slow motion only affects time-based components, for example, cyclic OBs. Compared to the real time, they are performed more frequently with fast forward and less frequently with slow motion. Fast forward and slow motion do not change the execution speed of the CPU machine codes. For example, the speed at which all operations of an OB1 cycle are executed does not change. The execution speed depends on the processor of the PC on which the virtual controller running. If you change the scaling factor, more or fewer cycle control points are reached in a given period of virtual time. Fast forward To speed up the virtual time, select a scaling factor greater than 1 in the Control Panel or in the API. Note Performance The performance depends on the size of your project, among other things. If the scaling factor is too high and the cycle-time monitoring indicates that the PC was incapable of calculating the OB1 or cyclic OBs in the specified time, the virtual controller goes to STOP. Recommendation: To avoid this, start with a small scaling factor and gradually increase it step-by-step while keeping the virtual controller in RUN. Slow motion To slow down the virtual time, select a scaling factor less than 1 in the Control Panel or in the API. API functions GetScaleFactor() (Page 221) SetScaleFactor() (Page 222) ScaleFactor { get; set; } (Page 223) See also Cycle control (Page 223) Settings for the virtual time (Page 220) Error with overflow of cyclical events and motion OBs (Page 355) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 75 Virtual time response 6.2 Stop simulation 6.2 Stop simulation Freeze state of the virtual controller To stop a simulation and to synchronize a simulation partner, a virtual controller can be set to a freeze state via the API. When the virtual controller has reached a synchronization point, it sends the event OnSyncPointReached to the API clients. Figure 6-1 Freeze state of the virtual controller The following occurs in the freeze state: The virtual time is stopped. No OBs and no timers are running. The user program is no longer executed. The virtual controller is still accessible from the TIA Portal. The input and output data of the virtual controller are in a consistent state. Note Cancelation of the freeze state during downloading During a download the freeze state is canceled. After completion of the download the virtual controller at the synchronization point is reset to the freeze state. Note Freeze-state operating state The freeze state is an internal operating state of the virtual controller. It does not correspond to RUN/STOP mode of a CPU. In the freeze state, the virtual controller maintains the last operating state. * The LED display on the Control Panel and on the Web server accordingly shows RUN or STOP for instance. * The instance shows the operating state SROS_FREEZE / Freeze, see EOperatingState (Page 330). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 76 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Virtual time response 6.2 Stop simulation Synchronization points A synchronization point always exists before inputs are read in, for example at the cycle control point or at the beginning of a cyclic OB. Figure 6-2 Overview of the synchronization points Trigger freeze state To trigger the freeze state, following modes are available for the virtual controller: SingleStep operating modes See Synchronize simulation partner cycle-controlled (Page 78). TimespanSynchronized operating modes See Synchronize simulation partner time-controlled (Page 80). In Default operating mode, the virtual controller does not change into a freeze state. API functions Settings for the cycle control (Page 223) GetOperatingMode() (Page 223) SetOperatingMode() (Page 223) OperatingMode { get; set; } (Page 224) EOperatingMode (Page 331) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 77 Virtual time response 6.3 Synchronize simulation partner 6.3 Synchronize simulation partner 6.3.1 Synchronize simulation partner cycle-controlled SingleStep operating modes Several simulation partners (clients) are synchronized cycle-controlled with the SingleStep operating modes of the virtual controller. The operating modes define the synchronization point at which the virtual controller changes to the freeze state and sends the OnSyncPointReached event. Table 6- 1 Cycle-controlled operating modes (SingleStep) Operating mode SingleStep_C Synchronization point Cycle control point Before reading in the process image partition "C" "P" "T" SingleStep_P 1 Minimum cycle time1 SingleStep_CP SingleStep_CT SingleStep_CPT In addition, the minimum cycle time of the OB 1 is overwritten in this operating mode. When you define a minimum cycle time of 200 ms via the API, the minimum distance between two cycle control points is 200 virtual milliseconds. The default setting is 100 ms. API functions / events GetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() (Page 225) SetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() (Page 225) OverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns { get; set; } (Page 226) RunToNextSyncPoint() (Page 226) OnSyncPointReached (Page 247) EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 (Page 284) / Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 (Page 296) Terminating the freeze state The RunToNextSyncPoint() function cancels the freeze state and induces the virtual controller to continue running until the next synchronization point. Switching to the Default operating mode also terminates the freeze state. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 78 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Virtual time response 6.3 Synchronize simulation partner Example The figure schematically shows the sequence in the SingleStep_CP operating mode. In addition to the OnSyncPointReached event the virtual controller also sends the virtual time since the last synchronization point of the same process image partition ID or of any process image partition ID has been reached (TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns / TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns). The RunToNextSyncPoint() function cancels the freeze state. Figure 6-3 Example: Sequence in the SingleStep_CP operating mode Changing the settings in the watch table Note Selecting triggers for monitoring of tags in the SingleStep operating modes In TIA Portal the watch table in basic mode shows the values for outputs and bit memories before the processing. In order to display the tag values after the processing, select the extended mode for the watch table and then select "Permanently, at end of scan cycle" in the "Monitor with trigger" column. See also Cycle control (Page 223) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 79 Virtual time response 6.3 Synchronize simulation partner 6.3.2 Synchronize simulation partner time-controlled TimespanSynchronized operating modes Several simulation partners (clients) are synchronized time-controlled with the TimespanSynchronized operating modes of the virtual controller. The operating modes define the synchronization point at which the virtual controller changes to the freeze state and sends the OnSyncPointReached event. Table 6- 2 Time-controlled operating modes (TimespanSynchronized) Operating mode Synchronization point Cycle control point Before reading in the process image partition "C" "P" TimespanSynchronized_C TimespanSynchronized_CP TimespanSynchronized_P API functions / events Settings for cycle control (Page 223) StartProcessing() (Page 227) OnSyncPointReached (Page 247) Terminating the freeze state The StartProcessing(t) function cancels the freeze state and induces the virtual controller to continue running at least as long as required (on the basis of the virtual time) before it changes back to the freeze state at the next synchronization point. Switching to the Default operating mode also terminates the freeze state. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 80 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Virtual time response 6.3 Synchronize simulation partner Example The figure schematically shows the sequence in the TimespanSynchronized_CP operating mode. In addition to the OnSyncPointReached event the virtual controller also sends the runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing(t) (TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns / TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns) function. The StartProcessing() function cancels the freeze state. Figure 6-4 Example: Sequence in the TimespanSynchronized_CP operating mode Description At least two clients are synchronized on the basis of a virtual period for the time-controlled operating modes. A client can be an instance of a virtual controller or an application that uses the Runtime API (API client). The synchronization must be performed by a synchronization master. The synchronization master instructs a client to run for a specific period. The time period is specified by the master in nanoseconds. The client then runs for the expected period before he goes into the freeze state at the next synchronization point. Before switching to the freeze state, the client sends the master the exact amount of time that he currently needed. Thereafter, the master signals the next client to catch up. API client as master The API client as master signals each client when it should start. The master receives events from every client when they occur. An API client can only "time manage" instances of a virtual controller. The API client does not receive events from other API clients. It cannot send messages to other API clients. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 81 7 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction Components of the Simulation Runtime The following components are relevant for handling the Simulation Runtime of PLCSIM Advanced: Runtime - Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Manager.exe - Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Instance.exe Libraries - Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Api.x86.dll - Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Api.x64.dll - SimulationRuntimeApi.h Documentation of interfaces with examples in native C++ and .NET (Managed Code) Description Runtime and libraries Description Siemens.Simatic.Simulation. Runtime.Manager.exe A Windows process that runs in the background. Main component of Runtime that manages all other Runtime components. The process is started automatically as soon as an application attempts to initialize the Runtime API. It is ended automatically as soon as there is no longer any application running that initialized the Runtime API. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation. Runtime.Instance.exe The process of the instance that loads a DLL of a virtual controller. Each virtual controller generates its own process. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation. Runtime.Api.x86.dll API libraries that must load an application to use the Simulation Runtime. The libraries contain interfaces for native code and managed code. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation. Runtime.Api.x64.dll SimulationRuntimeApi.h The "Runtime.Api.x86.dll" is loaded exclusively by 32-bit applications, and the "Runtime.Api.x64.dll" by 64-bit applications. Header file that describes all data types that require a native C++ application to use the API library. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 82 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction External applications and Simulation Runtime The following figure schematically presents the access of external applications to Simulation Runtime via the Runtime API. The Simulation Runtime Manager manages the Runtime instances. These load the libraries of the virtual controllers. An external application can be other simulation software or a graphical user interface (GUI), for example. Figure 7-1 External applications and Simulation Runtime S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 83 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction 7.1.1 Access to instances Access via the Control Panel and the API You can access only one instance that is available locally on the PC via the Control Panel. It does not matter on which PC an instance was created and started. With distributed communication, the Runtime API accesses the instance of the other PCs via the Simulation Runtime Manager. Access to a local instance via the Control Panel Access to a remote instance on the Runtime API Figure 7-2 Access to instances with distributed communication API functions Table 7-7 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager functions - Native C++ (Page 89) Table 7-14 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager functions - .NET (C#) (Page 92) Table 7-5 Overview of IInstances functions - Native C++ (Page 87) Table 7-12 Overview of IInstances functions - .NET (C#) (Page 91) See also Overview of user interfaces for managed code (Page 90) S7 PLCSIM Advanced Control Panel (Page 60) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 84 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction 7.1.2 User interfaces (API) The user interfaces of Simulation Runtime include functions you use, for example, to create instances, to change the operating state of a virtual controller, or to exchange I/O data. Simulation Runtime has the following user interfaces: ISimulationRuntimeManager IInstances IRemoteRuntimeManager API and external applications The Runtime API makes the interfaces available to an external application. ISimulationRuntimeManager Interface of the Runtime Manager. It is used to register new Runtime instances, to search through existing Runtime instances, and to receive an interface of a registered instance. Up to 16 instances can be registered in one Runtime Manager. IInstances Interface of a Runtime instance. It is used to change the operating state of a virtual controller and to exchange I/O data. Each instance has a unique name and an ID. Figure 7-3 API and external applications Access to API functions and data types Required functions and data types are available for native C++ and .NET (C#). Overview of user interfaces for native C++ (Page 86) Overview of data types for native C++ (Page 93) Overview of user interfaces for managed code (Page 90) Overview of data types for managed code (Page 94) Note The list of tables in this manual gives you direct access to the description of the individual functions and data types. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 85 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction 7.1.3 Overview of user interfaces for native C++ Initializing and shutting down API Table 7- 1 Overview of initializing and shutting down API - Native C++ Actions Functions Initialize API InitializeApi (Page 96) RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize (Page 98) Shut down API (Page 100) Logging off API library (Page 103) DestroyInterface RuntimeApiEntry DestroyInterface FreeApi ShutdownAndFreeApi Global functions Table 7- 2 Overview of global functions - Native C++ Actions Global functions (Page 106) Functions GetNameOfAreaSection() GetNameOfCPUType() GetNameOfCommunicationInterface() GetNameOfDataType() GetNameOfLEDMode() GetNameOfLEDType() GetNameOfOperatingMode() GetNameOfOperatingState() GetNameOfPrimitiveDataType() GetNameOfTagListDetails() GetNameOfErrorCode() GetNameOfRuntimeConfigChanged() GetNameOfInstanceConfigChanged() GetNameOfDiagSeverity() GetNameOfDirection() GetNameOfRackOrStationFaultType() S7-PLCSIM Advanced 86 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 3 Overview of API ISimulationRuntimeManager functions - Native C++ Settings and information Interface (Page 111) Simulation Runtime instances (Page 113) Remote connections (Page 119) Table 7- 4 Functions GetVersion() IsInitialized() IsRuntimeManagerAvailable() Shutdown() GetRegisteredInstancesCount() GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() RegisterInstance() RegisterCustomInstance() CreateInterface() OpenPort() ClosePort() GetPort() GetRemoteConnectionsCount() GetRemoteConnectionInfoAt() RemoteConnect() Overview of API ISimulationRuntimeManager events - Native C++ Events Functions OnConfigurationChanged (Page 252) OnRuntimeManagerLost (Page 127) RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() API IInstances Table 7- 5 Overview of IInstances functions - Native C++ Settings and information Interface (Page 130) Controller (Page 136) Functions GetID() GetName() GetCPUType() SetCPUType() GetCommunicationInterface() SetCommunicationInterface() GetInfo() UnregisterInstance() GetControllerName() GetControllerShortDesignation() GetControllerIPCount() GetControllerIP() GetControllerIPSuite4() SetIPSuite() GetStoragePath() SetStoragePath() ArchiveStorage() RetrieveStorage() S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 87 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction Settings and information Functions GetOperatingState() PowerOn() PowerOff() MemoryReset() Run() Stop() UpdateTagList() Tag list (Page 152) GetTagListStatus() GetTagInfoCount() GetTagInfos() CreateConfigurationFile() I/O access via address - Read- GetAreaSize() ReadBit() ing (Page 158) ReadByte() ReadBytes() ReadSignals() I/O access via address - Writ- WriteBit() WriteByte() ing (Page 166) WriteBytes() WriteSignals() Read() I/O access via tag name ReadBool() Reading (Page 173) ReadChar(), ReadWChar() ReadDouble() ReadFloat() ReadInt8(), ReadInt16(), ReadInt32(), ReadInt64() ReadUInt8(), ReadUInt16(), ReadUInt32(), ReadUInt64() ReadSignals() Write() I/O access via tag name WriteBool() Writing (Page 191) WriteChar(), WriteWChar() WriteDouble() WriteFloat() WriteInt8(), WriteInt16(), WriteInt32(), WriteInt64(), WriteUInt8(),WriteUInt16(), WriteUInt32(), WriteUInt64() WriteSignals() GetSystemTime() Virtual time (Page 220) SetSystemTime() GetScaleFactor() SetScaleFactor() GetOperatingMode() Cycle control (Page 223) SetOperatingMode() SetSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled GetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() SetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() RunToNextSyncPoint() StartProcessing() Operating state (Page 144) Acyclic services (Page 228) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 88 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction Table 7- 6 Overview of IInstances events - Native C++ Events Functions OnOperatingStateChanged (Page 243) OnSyncPointReached (Page 247) OnConfigurationChanging (Page 249) OnConfigurationChanged (Page 252) OnLedChanged (Page 254) RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() RegisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() RegisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() RegisterOnLedChangedCallback() UnregisterOnLedChangedCallback() RegisterOnLedChangedEvent() UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 7 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager functions - Native C++ Settings and information Interface (Page 265) Simulation Runtime instances (Page 268) Table 7- 8 Functions GetVersion() GetIP() GetPort() GetRemoteComputerName() Disconnect() GetRegisteredInstancesCount() GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() RegisterInstance() RegisterCustomInstance() CreateInterface() Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager events - Native C++ Events OnConnectionLost (Page 275) Functions RegisterOnConnectionLostCallback() UnregisterOnConnectionLostCallback() RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 89 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction 7.1.4 Overview of user interfaces for managed code Initializing and shutting down API Table 7- 9 Overview of initializing and shutting down API - .NET (C#) Actions Functions Initialize API (Page 99) Shut down API (Page 105) Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeManager API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 10 Overview of ISimulationRuntimeManager functions - .NET (C#) Settings and information Interface (Page 111) Simulation Runtime instances (Page 113) Remote connections (Page 119) Table 7- 11 Functions Version { get; } IsInitialized { get; } IsRuntimeManagerAvailable { get; } Shutdown() RegisterInstanceInfo { get; } RegisterInstance() RegisterCustomInstance() CreateInterface() OpenPort() ClosePort() Port { get; } RemoteConnectionInfo { get; } RemoteConnect() Overview of ISimulationRuntimeManager events - .NET (C#) Events OnConfigurationChanged (Page 124) OnRuntimeManagerLost (Page 127) Functions OnConfigurationChanged RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() OnRuntimeManagerLost() RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() S7-PLCSIM Advanced 90 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction API IInstances Table 7- 12 Overview of IInstances functions - .NET (C#) Settings and information Interface (Page 130) Controller - Information and settings (Page 136) Operating state (Page 144) Tag list (Page 152) I/O access via address - Reading (Page 158) I/O access via address - Writing (Page 166) I/O access via tag name Reading (Page 173) I/O access via tag name Writing (Page 191) Virtual time (Page 220) Cycle control (Page 223) Acyclic services (Page 228) Functions Dispose () ID { get; } Name { get; } CPUType { get; set; } CommunicationInterface { get; } Info { get; } UnregisterInstance() ControllerName { get; } ControllerShortDesignation { get; } ControllerIPSuite4 { get; } SetIPSuite() StoragePath { get; set; } ArchiveStorage() RetrieveStorage() OperatingState { get; } PowerOn() PowerOff() MemoryReset() Run() Stop() UpdateTagList() GetTagListStatus() TagInfos { get; } CreateConfigurationFile() InputArea | MarkerArea | OutputArea { get; } AreaSize { get; } ReadBit() ReadByte() ReadBytes() ReadSignals() WriteBit() WriteByte() WriteBytes() WriteSignals() Read() ReadBool() ReadChar(), ReadWChar() ReadDouble() ReadFloat() ReadInt8(), ReadInt16(), ReadInt32(), ReadInt64() ReadUInt8(), ReadUInt16(), ReadUInt32(), ReadUInt64() ReadSignals() Write() WriteBool() WriteChar(), WriteWChar() WriteDouble() WriteFloat() WriteInt8(), WriteInt16(), WriteInt32(), WriteInt64(), WriteUInt8(),WriteUInt16(), WriteUInt32(), WriteUInt64() WriteSignals() SystemTime { get; set; } ScaleFactor { get; set; } OperatingMode { get; set; } IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled { get; set; } OverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns { get; set; } RunToNextSyncPoint StartProcessing() S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 91 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction Table 7- 13 Overview of IInstances events - .NET (C#) Events Functions OnOperatingStateChanged (Page 243) OnSyncPointReached (Page 247) OnConfigurationChanging (Page 249) OnConfigurationChanged (Page 252) OnLedChanged (Page 254) OnOperatingStateChanged RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() OnSyncPointReached RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() OnConfigurationChanging RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() OnConfigurationChanged RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() OnLedChanged RegisterOnLedChangedEvent() UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 14 Overview of IRemoteRuntimeManager functions - .NET (C#) Settings and information Interface (Page 265) Simulation Runtime instances (Page 113) Table 7- 15 Functions Dispose() Version { get; } IP { get; } Port { get; } RemoteComputerName { get; } Disconnect() RegisterInstanceInfo { get; } RegisterInstance() RegisterCustomInstance() CreateInterface() Overview IRemoteRuntimeManager events - .NET (C#) Events OnConnectionLost() (Page 275) Functions OnConnectionLost() RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() S7-PLCSIM Advanced 92 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction 7.1.5 Overview of data types for native C++ The following table shows which data types are available for the simulation in Runtime Manager. Table 7- 16 Overview of data types - Native C++ Data type DLL import functions (Page 280) ApiEntry_Initialize ApiEntry_DestroyInterface Event callback functions (Page 281) EventCallback_VOID EventCallback_II_SREC_ST EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM EventCallback_IRRTM EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 New in V2.0: EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDR EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 EventCallback II SREC ST UINT32 ERSFET Definitions and constants (Page 306) Unions (Page 307) Structures (Page 309) UIP UDataValue SDataValue SDVBNI SDataValueByAddress SDataValueByName SConnectionInfo SInstanceInfo SDimension STagInfo SIP SIPSuite4 SOnSyncPointReachedResult New in V2.0: SDataValueByAddressWithCheck SDataValueByNameWithCheck SDataRecordInfo SDataRecord SConfiguredProcessEvents SDiagExtChannelDescription S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 93 User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction Data type Enumerations (Page 327) ERuntimeErrorCode EArea EOperatingState EOperatingMode ECPUType ECommunicationInterface ELEDType ELEDMode EPrimitiveDataTypes EDataType ETagListDetails ERuntimeConfigChanged EInstanceConfigChanged New in V2.0: EPullOrPlugEventType EProcessEventType EDirection EDiagProperty EDiagSeverity ERackOrStationFaultType 7.1.6 Overview of data types for managed code The following table shows which data types are available for the simulation in Runtime Manager. Table 7- 17 Overview of data types - .NET (C#) Data type Delegate definitions (Page 293) - Event handler methods Delegate_Void Delegate_II_EREC_DT Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM Delegate_IRRTM Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 New in V2.0: Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 Delegate SREC ST UINT32 ERSFET Definitions and constants (Page 306) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 94 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.1 Introduction Data type Structures (Page 309) SDataValue SDVBNI SDataValueByAddress SDataValueByName SConnectionInfo SInstanceInfo SDimension STagInfo SIP SIPSuite4 SOnSyncPointReachedResult New in V2.0: Enumerations (Page 326) SDataValueByAddressWithCheck SDataValueByNameWithCheck SDataRecordInfo SDataRecord SConfiguredProcessEvents SDiagExtChannelDescription ERuntimeErrorCode EArea EOperatingState EOperatingMode ECPUType ECommunicationInterface ELEDType ELEDMode EPrimitiveDataTypes EDataType ETagListDetails ERuntimeConfigChanged EInstanceConfigChanged New in V2.0: EPullOrPlugEventType EProcessEventType EDirection EDiagProperty EDiagSeverity ERackOrStationFaultType S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 95 User interfaces (API) 7.2 Initialize API 7.2 Initialize API 7.2.1 Load API library Description With PLCSIM Advanced the interfaces of the API V2.0 are not compatible with the interfaces of the API V1.0. However, the Runtime Manager of PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 is compatible with the API of PLCSIM Advanced V1.0. Earlier versions of the API are also installed during the installation of PLCSIM Advanced V2.0. The default path is: C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Siemens\PLCSIMADV\API\1.0 C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Siemens\PLCSIMADV\API\2.0 The installation path of PLCSIM Advanced is contained in the registry: Key: "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Siemens\Shared Tools\PLCSIMADV_SimRT" Value: "Path" To maintain the path to the API, add the character string of the following subdirectory at the end: "API\" (e.g. "API\2.0"). When you use this path the API library (DLL) is loaded directly from the installation directory. Reference Additional information can be found in: For Native C++ in section InitializeApi() (Page 96). For .NET via the call of the function "System.Reflection.Assembly.LoadFile(string)" in the online documentation for MSDN. 7.2.2 Native C++ 7.2.2.1 InitializeApi() Description The InitializeApi function loads the API library (DLL) and initializes the API. The function loads the version of the DLL that is compatible with the architecture of your application and which is also compatible with the header file of the API (SimulationRuntimeApi.h). To load the DLL, the function InitializeApi searches in the following directories one after the other: In the directory to which the parameter of the function leads (in_SimulationRuntimeApiDllPath) In the directory of your application that calls this function. In the installation directory of PLCSIM Advanced S7-PLCSIM Advanced 96 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.2 Initialize API If no DLL is available, the function accesses the next directory. The function returns an interface to the Simulation Runtime Manager. Use this interface to create a new instance of the virtual controller or to obtain access to an existing instance. Table 7- 18 InitializeApi() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode InitializeApi( ISimulationRuntimeManager** out_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode InitializeApi( WCHAR* in_SimulationRuntimeApiDllPath, ISimulationRuntimeManager** inout_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface ); * ISimulationRuntimeManager** out_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface: Pointer to a Runtime Manager interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with NULL. The interface is created within the function. See Data types (Page 279). * Return values WCHAR* in_SimulationRuntimeApiDllPath: The path to the Runtime API library. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The pointer to the Runtime Manager interface does not equal NULL. SREC_WRONG_VERSION * The required version of the interface is incompatible with the version used to compile the API. The version of the API is not compatible with Runtime. See Compatibility during upgrade (Page 31). Unable to establish a connection to the Runtime Manager. * SREC_CONNECTION_ERROR SREC_ERROR_LOADING_DLL SREC_RUNTIME_NOT_AVAILABLE Example C++ The API library cannot be loaded. No Runtime Manager runs in this Windows user session. // Include The Headerfile Of The API #include "SimulationRuntimeApi.h" // Prepare The Variables ERuntimeErrorCode result = SREC_INVALID_ERROR_CODE; ISimulationRuntimeManager* api = NULL; // Initialize The API And Get The RuntimeManager Interface result = InitializeApi(&api); Note If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 97 User interfaces (API) 7.2 Initialize API 7.2.2.2 RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize Description Use the function RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize only if the API library (DLL) is to be loaded from a different directory than the directory of your application that calls this function. When the API is initialized, the API library is first loaded and the Initialize function is then imported and called. The function returns an interface to the Simulation Runtime Manager. Use this interface to create a new instance of the virtual controller or to obtain access to an existing instance. Table 7- 19 RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize - Native C++ Syntax Parameters __declspec(dllexport) ERuntimeErrorCode RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize( ISimulationRuntimeManager** out_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface, UINT32 in_InterfaceVersion ); * ISimulationRuntimeManager** out_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface: Pointer to a Runtime Manager interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with NULL. The interface is created within the function. See Data types (Page 279). * Return values UINT32 in_InterfaceVersion: Version of the API interface to be downloaded: DAPI_DLL_INTERFACE_VERSION. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT SREC_WRONG_VERSION Condition The function is successful. The pointer to the Runtime Manager interface does not equal NULL. * The required version of the interface is incompatible with the version used to compile the API. The version of the API is not compatible with Runtime. See Compatibility during upgrade (Page 31). * SREC_CONNECTION_ERROR Unable to establish a connection to the Runtime Manager. SREC_RUNTIME_NOT_AVAILABLE No Runtime Manager runs in this Windows user session. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 98 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.2 Initialize API Example C++ // Include The Headerfile Of The API #include "SimulationRuntimeApi.h" // Prepare The Variables ERuntimeErrorCode result = SREC_INVALID_ERROR_CODE; HMODULE dllHandle = NULL; ApiEntry_Initialize Initialize = NULL; ISimulationRuntimeManager* api = NULL; // Load The DLL And Import The "Initialize" Function (using the Win32 API) dllHandle = LoadLibrary(DAPI_DLL_NAME_X86); if ( dllHandle != NULL ) { Initialize = (ApiEntry_Initialize)GetProcAddress(dllHandle, DAPI_ENTRY_INITIALIZE); } // Initialize The API And Get The RuntimeManager Interface if ( Initialize != NULL ) { result = Initialize(&api, DAPI_DLL_INTERFACE_VERSION); } Note If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). 7.2.3 .NET (C#) 7.2.3.1 Initialize Description The entry point to the API is the static class Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeManager. The API is initialized when a function of this class is used the first time. Table 7- 20 Initialize - .NET (C#) Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationInitializationException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.ConnectionError ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongVersion Condition Unable to establish a connection to the Runtime Manager. The version of the API is not compatible with Runtime. See Compatibility during upgrade (Page 31). ERuntimeErrorCode.RuntimeNotAvailable No Runtime Manager runs in this Windows user session. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 99 User interfaces (API) 7.3 Shut down API 7.3 Shut down API 7.3.1 Native C++ Basic procedure for deleting the user interfaces To delete all user interfaces, generally follow these steps: 1. Delete the interfaces IInstances and IRemoteRuntimeManager. 2. Call the Shutdown() function of the ISimulationRuntimeManager interface. 3. Delete the ISimulationRuntimeManager interface. 4. Unload the API library (DLL) with the Win32 API-Funktion FreeLibrary(). Deleting the user interfaces via functions Deleting the user interfaces is also possible via functions. If the API was initialized using the InitializeApi() function, you delete the user interfaces using the following functions: FreeApi() (Page 103) ShutdownAndFreeApi() (Page 104) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 100 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.3 Shut down API 7.3.1.1 DestroyInterface() Description A function pointer to the RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface function. The function pointer DestoyInterface() is only valid if the InitializeApi function has been successfully called. The function unloads the memory of an ISimulationRuntimeManager, IRemoteRuntimeManager or IInstance interface. Table 7- 21 DestroyInterface() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode DestroyInterface( IBaseInterface* in_Interface ); Parameters * Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. IBaseInterface* in_Interface: The interface to be deleted. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT Example C++ The pointer to the interface is NULL. // Include The Headerfile Of The API #include "SimulationRuntimeApi.h" // The Interfaces ERuntimeErrorCode result; ISimulationRuntimeManager* api = NULL; IInstance* instance = NULL; // Init the DLL and create an instance result = InitializeApi(&api); result = api->RegisterInstance(&instance); // Destroy Instance Interfaces result = DestroyInterface(instance); instance = NULL; S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 101 User interfaces (API) 7.3 Shut down API 7.3.1.2 RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface Description Use the RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface function only if the API library (DLL) is to be loaded from a different directory than the Startup directory of the application that calls this function. If the API was initialized using the InitializeApi function, you select the DestroyInterface() (Page 101) function. The function unloads the memory of an ISimulationRuntimeManager, IRemoteRuntimeManager or IInstance interface. Table 7- 22 RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters __declspec(dllexport) ERuntimeErrorCode RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface( IBaseInterface* in_Interface ); * IBaseInterface* in_Interface: The interface to be deleted. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT Example C++ Condition The function is successful. The pointer to the interface is NULL. // Include The Headerfile Of The API #include "SimulationRuntimeApi.h" // Prepare The Variables ERuntimeErrorCode result = SREC_INVALID_ERROR_CODE; HMODULE dllHandle = NULL; ApiEntry_DestroyInterface Destroy = NULL; IInstance* instance = NULL; // Load The DLL And Import The "DestroyInterface" Function (using the Win32 API) dllHandle = LoadLibraryA(DAPI_DLL_NAME_X86); if ( dllHandle != NULL ) { Destroy = (ApiEntry_ DestroyInterface)GetProcAddress(dllHandle, DAPI_ENTRY_DESTROY_INTERFACE); } ... // Frees the memory of an IInstance interface result = Destroy(instance); S7-PLCSIM Advanced 102 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.3 Shut down API 7.3.1.3 FreeApi() Description The FreeApi() function unloads the library of the Runtime API. This function can only be called after the successful call of the InitializeApi function. If the not called, the library must be unloaded using the Win32 API InitializeApi function was function FreeLibrary(). Table 7- 23 FreeApi() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode FreeApi(); Parameters None Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_API_NOT_INITIALIZED The InitializeApi function was not called successfully. Example C++ // Include The Headerfile Of The API #include "SimulationRuntimeApi.h" // The Interfaces ERuntimeErrorCode result; ISimulationRuntimeManager* api = NULL; IInstance* instance = NULL; // Init the API result = InitializeApi(&api); ... // Shutdown The API api->Shutdown(); result = DestroyInterface(api); api = NULL; result = FreeApi(); S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 103 User interfaces (API) 7.3 Shut down API 7.3.1.4 ShutdownAndFreeApi() Description The ShutdownAndFreeApi() function shuts down the Runtime API, deletes the IRuntimeManager interface and unloads the library of the Runtime API. This function can only be called after the successful call of the InitializeApi function. If the InitializeApi function was not called, the library must be unloaded using the Win32 APIFunktion FreeLibrary(). Table 7- 24 ShutdownAndFreeApi() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode ShutdownAndFreeApi( ISimulationRuntimeManager* in_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface ); Parameters * Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. ISimulationRuntimeManager* in_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface: The interface of the Runtime Manager to be deleted. SREC_API_NOT_INITIALIZED SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT Example C++ The InitializeApi function was not called successfully. The pointer to the interface is NULL. // Include The Headerfile Of The API #include "SimulationRuntimeApi.h" // The Interfaces ERuntimeErrorCode result; ISimulationRuntimeManager* api = NULL; IInstance* instance = NULL; // Init the API result = InitializeApi(&api); ... // Shutdown The API result = ShutdownAndFreeApi(api); api = NULL; S7-PLCSIM Advanced 104 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.3 Shut down API 7.3.2 .NET (C#) 7.3.2.1 Shut down API You can terminate the .NET components of the API for the IInstance and IRemoteRuntimeManager interfaces by calling the Dispose (Page 130) function. In addition these interfaces can also be cleared automatically by the .NET Garbage Collector. Manually clearing the API To manually clear the API, follow these steps: 1. Delete all interfaces. Interfaces - Information and settings (Page 130) 2. Call the Shutdown() (Page 111) function of the ISimulationRuntimeManager interface. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 105 User interfaces (API) 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) The global functions GetNameOf... return the name of the enumeration entry. GetNameOfAreaSection() Table 7- 25 GetNameOfAreaSection() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfAreaSection( EArea in_AreaSection ); Syntax Parameters * Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry EArea in_AreaSection: Enumeration entry GetNameOfCPUType() Table 7- 26 GetNameOfCPUType() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfCPUType( ECPUType in_CPUType ); Syntax Parameters * ECPUType in_CPUType: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfCommunicationInterface() Table 7- 27 GetNameOfCommunicationInterface() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfCommunicationInterface( ECommunicationInterface in_CommunicationInterface ); Syntax Parameters * ECommunicationInterface in_CommunicationInterface: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfDataType() Table 7- 28 GetNameOfDataType() - Native C++ Syntax const WCHAR* GetNameOfDataType( EDataType in_DataType ); Parameters * Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry EDataType in_DataType: Enumeration entry S7-PLCSIM Advanced 106 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) GetNameOfErrorCode() Table 7- 29 GetNameOfErrorCode() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfErrorCode( ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode ); Syntax Parameters * Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: Enumeration entry GetNameOfLEDMode() Table 7- 30 GetNameOfLEDMode() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfLEDMode( ELEDMode in_LEDMode ); Syntax Parameters * ELEDMode in_LEDMode: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfLEDType() Table 7- 31 GetNameOfLEDType() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfLEDType( ELEDType in_LEDType ); Syntax Parameters * ELEDType in_LEDType: Enumeration entry. Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfOperatingMode() Table 7- 32 GetNameOfOperatingMode() - Native C++ Syntax const WCHAR* GetNameOfOperatingMode( EOperatingMode in_OperatingMode ); Parameters * Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry EOperatingMode in_OperatingMode: Enumeration entry S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 107 User interfaces (API) 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) GetNameOfErrorCode() Table 7- 33 GetNameOfErrorCode() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfErrorCode( ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode ); Syntax Parameters * Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: Enumeration entry GetNameOfOperatingState Table 7- 34 GetNameOfOperatingState() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfOperatingState( EOperatingState in_OperatingState ); Syntax Parameters * EOperatingState in_OperatingState: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfPrimitiveDataType Table 7- 35 GetNameOfPrimitiveDataType() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfPrimitiveDataType( EPrimitiveDataType in_DataType ); Syntax Parameters * EPrimitiveDataType in_DataType: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfTagListDetails Table 7- 36 GetNameOfTagListDetails() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters const WCHAR* GetNameOfTagListDetails( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails ); * ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry S7-PLCSIM Advanced 108 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) GetNameOfRuntimeConfigChanged() Table 7- 37 GetNameOfRuntimeConfigChanged() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfRuntimeConfigChanged( ERuntimeConfigChanged in_RuntimeConfigChanged); ); Syntax Parameters * Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry ERuntimeConfigChanged in_RuntimeConfigChanged: Enumeration entry GetNameOfInstanceConfigChanged() Table 7- 38 GetNameOfInstanceConfigChanged() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfInstanceConfigChanged( EInstanceConfigChanged in_InstanceConfigChanged); ); Syntax Parameters * EInstanceConfigChanged in_InstanceConfigChanged: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfDirection() Table 7- 39 GetNameOfDirection() - Native C++ const WCHAR* GetNameOfDirection( EDirection in_Direction ); Syntax Parameter * EDirection in_Direction: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry GetNameOfDiagSeverity() Table 7- 40 GetNameOfDiagSeverity() - Native C++ Syntax Parameter const WCHAR* GetNameOfDiagSeverity( EDiagSeverity in_DiagSeverity ); * EDiagSeverity in_DiagSeverity: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 109 User interfaces (API) 7.4 Global functions (Native C++) GetNameOfRackOrStationFaultType() Table 7- 41 GetNameOfRackOrStationFaultType() - Native C++ Syntax Parameter const WCHAR* GetNameOfRackOrStationFaultType( ERackOrStationFaultType in_RackOrStationFaultType ); * ERackOrStationFaultType in_RackOrStationFaultType: Enumeration entry Return values const WCHAR*: Name of the enumeration entry See also EPrimitiveDataType (Page 335) EDataType (Page 338) Enumerations (Page 326) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 110 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager 7.5.1 Interfaces - Information and settings GetVersion() / Version { get; } Returns the version of Runtime Manager. If the function fails, version 0.0 is returned. Table 7- 42 GetVersion() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetVersion(); Parameters None Return values UINT32: Runtime Manager Version (HIWORD = Major, LOWORD = Minor) Table 7- 43 Version { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax UInt32 Version { get; } Parameters None Return values Uint32: Runtime Manager Version (HIWORD = Major, LOWORD = Minor) IsInitialized() / IsInitialized { get; } Returns a value that indicates whether the API was successfully initialized. Table 7- 44 IsInitialized() - Native C++ Syntax bool IsInitialized(); Parameters None Return values * * Table 7- 45 false: If the API was not initialized. true: If the API was initialized. IsInitialized { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax bool IsInitialized { get; } Parameters None Return values * * false: If the API was not initialized. true: If the API was initialized. IsRuntimeManagerAvailable() / IsRuntimeManagerAvailable { get; } The function returns false when the connection to Runtime Manager is interrupted. This happens only when the Runtime Manager process is closed. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 111 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Subscribe to the OnRuntimeManagerLost() event to find out whether the connection is interrupted. See Events (Page 124). Table 7- 46 IsRuntimeManagerAvailable() - Native C++ Syntax bool IsRuntimeManagerAvailable(); Parameters None Return values * * Table 7- 47 false: If the connection is interrupted. true: If the connection is active. IsRuntimeManagerAvailable { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax bool IsRuntimeManagerAvailable{ get; } Parameters None Return values * * false: If the connection is interrupted. true: If the connection is active. Shutdown() Ends communication with Runtime Manager and clears the interfaces. Call this function in the following cases: Immediately before the API library (DLL) is unregistered (native C++). When your application is no longer using Runtime Manager. Table 7- 48 Shutdown() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode Shutdown() Parameters None Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. Table 7- 49 Shutdown() - .NET (C#) Syntax void Shutdown() Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 112 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager 7.5.2 Simulation Runtime instances GetRegisteredInstancesCount() Returns the number of instances that are registered in Runtime Manager. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 50 GetRegisteredInstancesCount() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetRegisteredInstancesCount(); Parameters None Return values UINT32: Number of available instances. GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() Returns information about an already registered instance. You can use the ID or name to create an interface of this instance, see CreateInterface(). Table 7- 51 GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() - Native C++ ERuntimeErrorCode GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt( UINT32 in_Index, SInstanceInfo* out_InstanceInfo ); Syntax Parameters * UINT32 in_Index: Index of the created instance from which you want to receive the information. The index must be less than the value you receive when you call GetRegisteredInstanceCount(). * SInstanceInfo* out_InstanceInfo: The information with name and ID of the instance. See Data types (Page 306). Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_INDEX OUT_OF_RANGE Condition The function is successful. The function does not return on time. There is no instance information for this index. The index is greater than 15. RegisteredInstanceInfo { get; } Returns information about all already registered instances. Use the ID or name of this instance to create an interface of this instance, see CreateInterface(). Table 7- 52 RegisteredInstanceInfo { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values Exceptions SInstanceInfo[] RegisteredInstanceInfo { get; } None SInstanceInfo[]: An array of information about all registered instances. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 113 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager RegisterInstance() Registers a new instance of a virtual controller in Runtime Manager. Creates and returns an interface of this instance. Table 7- 53 RegisterInstance() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType, WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); * ECPUType in_CPUType: Defines which CPU type is simulated at the start of the instance. The default setting is "SRCT_1500_Unspecified". When a different CPU type is loaded via STEP 7 or from the Virtual Memory Card, this CPU type applies. * WCHAR* in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). * Return values Example C++ IInstance** out_InstanceInterface: Pointer to a Simulation Runtime interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with ZERO. The interface is created within the function. Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The name or the IInstance pointer is invalid. SREC_LIMIT_REACHED There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_ALREADY_EXISTS An instance with this name already exists. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = ZERO; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); // Example: How To Create And Register An Instance IInstance* psa = ZERO; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterInstance(&psa); } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 114 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). Table 7- 54 RegisterInstance() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters IInstance RegisterInstance(); IInstance RegisterInstance( string in_InstanceName ); IInstance RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType ); IInstance RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType string in_InstanceName ); * ECPUType in_CPUType: Defines which CPU type is simulated at the start of the instance. The default setting is "ECPUType.Unspecified". When a different CPU type is loaded via STEP 7 or from the Virtual Memory Card, this CPU type applies. * string in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). Return values If the function is successful, an interface of a virtual controller, otherwise a null pointer. Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The name is invalid. ERuntimeErrorCode.LimitReached There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.AlreadyExists An instance with this name already exists. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 115 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager RegisterCustomInstance() Registers a new instance of a virtual controller in Runtime Manager. Creates and returns an interface of this instance. Table 7- 55 RegisterCustomInstance() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterCustomInstance( WCHAR* in_VplcDll, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterCustomInstance( WCHAR* in_VplcDll, WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); * WCHAR* in_VplcDll: The complete path to the DLL of the virtual controller that Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Instance.exe loads at PowerOn. * WCHAR* in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). * Return values Example C++ IInstance** out_InstanceInterface: Pointer to a Simulation Runtime interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with ZERO. The interface is created within the function. Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The DLL name, the instance name or the IInstance pointer is invalid. SREC_LIMIT_REACHED There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_ALREADY_EXISTS An instance with this name already exists. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = ZERO; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); // Example: How To Create And Register An Instance IInstance* psa = ZERO; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterCustomInstance("C:\\Temp\\vplc.dll"); } Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 116 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 56 RegisterCustomInstance() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters IInstance RegisterCustomInstance( string in_VplcDll ); IInstance RegisterCustomInstance( string in_VplcDll, string in_InstanceName ); * string in_VplcDll: The complete path to the DLL of the virtual controller that Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Instance.exe loads at PowerOn. * Return values Exceptions string in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). If the function is successful, an interface of a virtual controller; otherwise a Null pointer. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument ERuntimeErrorCode.LimitReached ERuntimeErrorCode.AlreadyExists The name or the ID is invalid. There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. An instance with this name already exists. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 117 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager CreateInterface() Creates and returns an interface of an already registered instance of a virtual controller. The instance could have been registered via the application or another application that uses the Simulation Runtime API. Table 7- 57 CreateInterface() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode CreateInterface( WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode CreateInterface( INT32 in_InstanceID, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); * INT32 in_InstanceID: The ID of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. * WCHAR* in_InstanceName: The name of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. * Return values IInstance** out_InstanceInterface: Pointer to a Simulation Runtime interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with ZERO. The interface is created within the function. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST Example C++ The function is successful. The function does not return on time. The name, the ID or the IInstance pointer is invalid. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = ZERO; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa1 = ZERO; IInstance* psa2 = ZERO; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->CreateInterface(0, &psa1); Example C++ result = api->CreateInterface(0, &psa2); // psa2 will be the same as psa1 } ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = ZERO; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa = ZERO; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->CreateInterface(L"My SimulationRuntime Instance", &psa); } Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 118 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 58 CreateInterface() - .NET (C#) IInstance CreateInterface( string in_InstanceName ); IInstance CreateInterface( INT32 in_InstanceID ); Syntax Parameters * INT32 in_InstanceID: The ID of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. * string in_InstanceName: The name of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. Return values If the function is successful, an interface of a virtual controller; otherwise a Null pointer. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The name or the ID is invalid. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExists 7.5.3 The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. Remote connections OpenPort() Opens a port to which another Runtime Manager can connect. Table 7- 59 OpenPort() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode OpenPort( UINT16 in_Port ); * UINT16 in_Port: The port. The value must be greater than 1024. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_ALREADY_EXISTS A port is already open. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The port is invalid. SREC_CONNECTION_ERROR The port cannot be opened. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 119 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 60 OpenPort() - .NET (C#) void OpenPort( UInt16 in_Port ); Syntax Parameters * UInt16 in_Port: The port. The value must be greater than 1024. Return values Exceptions None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.AlreadyExists A port is already open. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument ERuntimeErrorCode.ConnectionError The port is invalid. The port cannot be opened. ClosePort() Closes an open port and all open connections that another Runtime Manager has created to this open port. Table 7- 61 ClosePort() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode ClosePort(); Parameters None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_WARNING_INVALID_CALL Table 7- 62 The function does not return on time. No port is open. ClosePort() - .NET (C#) void ClosePort( UInt16 in_Port ); Syntax Parameters None Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. GetPort() / Port { get; } Returns the open port. If no port is open or the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 63 GetPort() - Native C++ Syntax UINT16 GetPort(); Parameters None Return values UINT16: The open port. 0, if no port is open. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 120 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 64 Port { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax UInt16 Port { get; } Parameters None Return values UInt16: The open port. 0, if no port is open. Exceptions None GetRemoteConnectionsCount() Supplies the number of open remote connections. Table 7- 65 GetRemoteConnectionsCount() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetRemoteConnectionsCount(); Parameters None Return values UINT32: Number of open remote connections. GetRemoteConnectionInfoAt() Returns information about an open connection. Table 7- 66 GetRemoteConnectionInfoAt()- Native C++ ERuntimeErrorCode GetRemoteConnectionInfoAt( UINT32 in_Index, SConnectionInfo* out_ConnectionInfo ); Syntax Parameters * UINT32 in_Index: Index of the connection information that is expected. * SConnectionInfo* out_ConnectionInfo: The connection information for this index. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE The function does not return on time. Connection information for this index does not exist. RemoteConnectionInfo { get; } Returns an array of information about all open connections. Table 7- 67 RemoteConnectionInfo { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax SConnectionInfo[] RemoteConnectionInfo { get; } Parameters None Return values SConnectionInfo[]: An array of information about all open connections. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 121 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager RemoteConnect() Creates a new connection to a remote Runtime Manager or uses an existing connection to create an IRemoteRuntimeManager interface. Table 7- 68 RemoteConnect() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode RemoteConnect( UINT8 in_IP3, UINT8 in_IP2, UINT8 in_IP1, UINT8 in_IP0, UINT16 in_Port, IRemoteRuntimeManager** out_RemoteRuntimeManagerInterface ERuntimeErrorCode RemoteConnect( UIP in_IP, UINT16 in_Port, IRemoteRuntimeManager** out_RunTimeManagerInterface ); * UINT8 in_IP3: First part of the IP address of the remote PC. * UINT8 in_IP2: Second part of the IP address of the remote PC. * UINT8 in_IP1: Third part of the IP address of the remote PC. UINT8 in_IP0: Last part of the IP address of the remote PC. * UIP in_IP: IP address of the remote PC. * UINT16 in_Port: * IRemoteRuntimeManager** out_RemoteRuntimeManagerInterface: The port that is open on the remote PC. Return values Pointer to a remote Runtime Manager interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with ZERO. The interface is created in the function. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_CONNECTION_ERROR SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT SREC_WRONG_VERSION The connection to the remote Runtime Manager cannot be established. IP, port or IInstance pointer is invalid. The version of the API is not compatible with Runtime. See Compatibility during upgrade (Page 31). Example C++ ISimulationRuntimeManager* api = ZERO; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IRemoteRuntimeManager * client = ZERO; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RemoteConnect(192,203,145,144, 4444, &client); } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 122 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). Table 7- 69 RemoteConnect() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters IRemoteRuntimeManager RemoteConnect( string in_ConnectionString ); IRemoteRuntimeManager RemoteConnect( SIP in_IP, UInt16 in_Port ); IRemoteRuntimeManager RemoteConnect( Byte in_IP3, Byte in_IP2, Byte in_IP1, Byte in_IP0, UInt16 in_Port ); * Byte in_IP3: First part of the IP address of the remote PC. * Byte in_IP2: Second part of the IP address of the remote PC. * Byte in_IP1: Third part of the IP address of the remote PC. * Byte in_IP0: Last part of the IP address of the remote PC. * string in_ConnectionString: A string in the form of "...:" Example: "182.203.145.144:4444". * SIP in_IP: * UInt16 in_Port: IP address of the remote PC. The port that is open on the remote PC. Return values Exceptions IRemoteRuntimeManager: Interface to the remote Runtime Manager. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.ConnectionError Connection to the remote Runtime Manager cannot be established. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongVersion The function does not return on time. IP or port is invalid. The version of the API is not compatible with Runtime. See Compatibility during upgrade (Page 31). See also Tag list (Page 152) Data types (Page 279) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 123 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager 7.5.4 Events Events for the ISimulationRuntimeManager interface The following events are differentiated in the API: Table 7- 70 Events for the ISimulationRuntimeManager interface Event Cause OnConfigurationChanged (Page 124) This event is triggered at a change of the Runtime Manager configuration. For example, when a new instance is registered, an instance is removed or a connection to a client is established. The Control Panel uses such an event to update the list of available instances. OnRuntimeManagerLost (Page 127) 7.5.4.1 The event is triggered when the connection to Runtime Manager is interrupted. OnConfigurationChanged events OnConfigurationChanged Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 71 OnConfigurationChanged - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 OnConfigurationChanged; Parameters None. See Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 (Page 297). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. The registration of a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 72 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback( EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function to subscribe to an event. See EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 (Page 285). Return values None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 124 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registration of a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 73 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); Syntax Parameters * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values Table 7- 74 None RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 75 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 76 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 125 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 77 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is set to the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 78 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); Syntax Parameters * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * Table 7- 79 true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 126 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager 7.5.4.2 OnRuntimeManagerLost events OnRuntimeManagerLost Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 80 OnRuntimeManagerLost - .NET (C#) event Delegate_Void OnRuntimeManagerLost; Syntax Parameters None. See Delegate_Void (Page 293). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. The registration of a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 81 RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() - Native C++ void RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback( EventCallback_VOID in_CallbackFunction ); Syntax Parameters * EventCallback_VOID in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_VOID (Page 281). Return values None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registration of a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 82 RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent(); void RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event handle is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A user-specific event handle is registered. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 127 User interfaces (API) 7.5 API ISimulationRuntimeManager Table 7- 83 RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void RegisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 84 UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostCallback(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 85 UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent(); Parameters None Return values None Table 7- 86 UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 128 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() The function will block the program until the registered event object is set to the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 87 WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - Native C++ bool WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent(); bool WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); Syntax Parameters * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * Table 7- 88 true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined timeout interval. WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent(); bool WaitForOnRuntimeManagerLostEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined timeout interval. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 129 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.1 Interfaces - Information and settings Dispose() Deletes the managed interface and unloads the native components of the user interfaces. Table 7- 89 Dispose() - .NET (C#) Syntax void Dispose() Parameters None Return values None GetID() / ID { get; } Returns the instance ID. The ID is assigned by Runtime Manager when the instance is registered. Table 7- 90 GetID() - Native C++ Syntax INT32 GetID(); Parameters None Return values INT32: Instance ID Table 7- 91 ID { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax UInt32 ID { get; } Parameters None Return values Uint32: Instance ID Exceptions None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 130 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetName() / Name { get; } Returns the name of the instance. Table 7- 92 GetName() - Native C++ ERuntimeErrorCode GetName( WCHAR inout_Name[], UINT32 in_ArrayLength ); Syntax Parameters * WCHAR inout_Name[]: A user-allocated storage for the name of the instance. The field length should be at least as long as DINSTANCE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH. See Definitions and constants (Page 306). * UINT32 in_ArrayLength: Field length (Wide character) Return values Example C++ Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The name does not fit in the storage. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterInstance(&psa); } WCHAR name[DINSTANCE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = psa->GetName(name, DINSTANCE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH); } Table 7- 93 Name { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax string Name { get; } Parameters None Return values Name of the instance. Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 131 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetCPUType() Returns the CPU type of the virtual controller. Table 7- 94 GetCPUType() - Native C++ Syntax ECPUType GetCPUType(); Parameters None Return values An enumeration element that defines the CPU type. See ECPUType (Page 332). SetCPUType() Sets the CPU type of the virtual controller. A change of CPU type occurs only when the controller is restarted. Table 7- 95 SetCPUType() - Native C++ Syntax void SetCPUType(ECPUType in_Value); Parameters * ECPUType in_Value: Defines which CPU type is simulated at the start of the instance. When a different CPU type is loaded via STEP 7 or from the Virtual Memory Card, this CPU type applies. Return values None CPUType { get; set; } Returns or sets the CPU type of the virtual controller. A change of CPU type occurs only when the controller is restarted. When a different CPU type is loaded via STEP 7 or from the Virtual Memory Card, this CPU type applies. Table 7- 96 CPUType { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax ECPUType CPUType { get; set; } Parameters None Return values An enumeration element that defines the CPU type. Exceptions None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 132 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetCommunicationInterface() Returns the communication interface of the virtual controller: Local communication (Softbus) or TCPIP. A change of communication interface occurs only when the controller is restarted. All instances that are started must use the same communication interface. PowerOn is prevented if a communication interface that is not used by the started instances is selected. Table 7- 97 GetCommunicationInterface() - Native C++ Syntax ECommunicationInterface GetCommunicationInterface(); Parameters None Return values * SRCI_NONE Cannot be selected. Is returned if the instance interface is no longer valid. * SRCI_SOFTBUS * SRCI_TCPIP Is returned if the virtual controller uses the Softbus. Is returned if the virtual controller communicates over the virtual adapter. SetCommunicationInterface() Sets the communication interface of the virtual controller: Local communication (Softbus) or TCPIP. A change of communication interface occurs only when the controller is restarted. All instances that are started must use the same communication interface. PowerOn is prevented if a communication interface that is not used by the started instances is selected. Table 7- 98 SetCommunicationInterface() - Native C++ Syntax void SetCommunicationInterface(ECommunicationInterface in_Value); Parameters * SRCI_NONE Cannot be selected. * SRCI_SOFTBUS Is set to activate communication via Softbus. * SRCI_TCPIP Is set to activate communication over the virtual adapter. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 133 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances CommunicationInterface { get; set; } Sets or returns the communication interface of the virtual controller: Local communication (Softbus) or TCPIP. A change of communication interface occurs only when the controller is restarted. All instances that are started must use the same communication interface. PowerOn is prevented if a communication interface that is not used by the started instances is selected. Table 7- 99 CommunicationInterface { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax ECommunicationInterface CommunicationInterface { get; set; } Parameters None Return values * ECommunicationInterface.None Cannot be selected. Is returned if the instance interface is no longer valid. * ECommunicationInterface.Softbus * ECommunicationInterface.TCPIP Is returned if the virtual controller uses the Softbus. Is returned if the virtual controller communicates over the virtual adapter. Exceptions None GetInfo() / Info { get; } Returns a structure that provides information about the instance. Table 7- 100 GetInfo() - Native C++ Syntax SInstanceInfo GetInfo(); Parameters None Return values SInstanceInfo: A structure that provides information about the instance. See SInstanceInfo (Page 314). Table 7- 101 Info { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax SInstanceInfo Info { get; } Parameters None Return values SInstanceInfo: A structure that provides information about the instance. Exceptions None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 134 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterInstance() Unregisters this instance from Runtime Manager. Note Loss of the interfaces Other applications that are connected to this instance will lose their interface to this instance. Table 7- 102 UnregisterInstance() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode UnregisterInstance(); Parameters None Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 103 UnregisterInstance() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterInstance(); Parameters None Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 135 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.2 Controller - Information and settings GetControllerName() / ControllerName { get; } Returns the downloaded name of the virtual controller. Table 7- 104 GetControllerName() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetControllerName( WCHAR inout_Name[], UINT32 in_ArrayLength ); * WCHAR inout_Name[]: A user-allocated storage for the name. * UINT32 in_ArrayLength: The length of the storage. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE The name does not fit in the storage. Table 7- 105 ControllerName { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax string ControllerName { get; } Parameters None Return values string: Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException The downloaded name of the virtual controller. Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 136 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetControllerShortDesignation() / ControllerShortDesignation { get; } Returns the downloaded short designation of the virtual controller. Table 7- 106 GetControllerShortDesignation() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetControllerShortDesignation( WCHAR inout_ShortDesignation[], UINT32 in_ArrayLength ); * WCHAR inout_ShortDesignation[]: A user-allocated storage for the short designation. * UINT32 in_ArrayLength: The length of the storage. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE The name does not fit in the storage. Table 7- 107 ControllerShortDesignation { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax string ControllerShortDesignation { get; } Parameters None Return values string: Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException The downloaded short designation of the virtual controller. Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. GetControllerIPCount() Returns the number of configured IP addresses of the virtual controller. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 108 GetControllerIPCount() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetControllerIPCount(); Parameters None Return values INT32: Number of configured IP addresses of the virtual controller. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 137 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetControllerIP() / ControllerIP { get; } Returns a configured IP address of the instance. Table 7- 109 GetControllerIP() - Native C++ UIP GetControllerIP(); UIP GetControllerIP( UINT32 in_Index ); Syntax Parameters * WCHAR in_Index: The index of the IP address you want to receive. The index must be less than the value you receive from GetControllerIPCount(). The default setting is 0. Return values UIP: IP address of the virtual controller. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 110 ControllerIP { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax string[] ControllerIP { get; } Parameters None Return values string: All downloaded IP addresses of the virtual controller. If the function Exceptions None fails, the field is empty. GetControllerIPSuite4() / ControllerIPSuite4 { get; } Returns the IP suite instance. If the "Softbus" communication interface is used, the subnet mask and default gateway are 0. Table 7- 111 GetControllerIPSuite4() Native C++ Syntax Parameters Return values SIPSuite4 GetControllerIPSuite4(); SIPSuite4 GetControllerIPSuite4( UINT32 in_Index ); * WCHAR in_Index: The index of the IP address you want to receive. The index must be less than the value you receive from GetControllerIPCount(). The default setting is 0. SIPSuite4: The IP suite of the virtual controller. If the function fails, the return values are 0. Table 7- 112 ControllerIPSuite4 { get; } - .NET (#) Syntax SIPSuite4[] ControllerIPSuite4 { get; }; Parameters None Return values SIPSuite4[]: All downloaded IP suites of the virtual controller. If the function fails, the field is empty. Exceptions None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 138 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances SetIPSuite() Sets the IP suite of the network interface of a virtual controller. Table 7- 113 SetIPSuite() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode SetIPSuite( UINT32 in_InterfaceID, SIPSuite4 in_IPSuite, bool in_IsRemanent ); * UINT32 in_InterfaceID: The ID of the network interface. * SIPSuite4 in_IPSuite: The IP suite that is to be assigned to the network interface. The IP suite contains the IP address, the subnet mask and the standard gateway. If the communication interface is "Softbus", the subnet mask and standard gateway are ignored. * bool in_IsRemanent: If true, the IP suite is saved after restart of the virtual controller. If the communication interface is "Softbus", this flag is ignored. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_INVALID_OPERATING_STATE The process of the virtual controller is not running. There is no network interface with this ID. The virtual controller has not yet completed the boot process or is already in the shutdown phase. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 139 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 114 SetIPSuite() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void SetIPSuite( UInt32 in_InterfaceID, SIPSuite4 in_IPSuite, bool in IsRemanent ); * UInt32 in_InterfaceID: The ID of the network interface. * SIPSuite4 in_IPSuite: If the communication interface is "Softbus", the subnet mask and standard gateway are ignored. * bool in_IsRemanent: If true, the IP suite is saved after restart of the virtual controller. If the communication interface is "Softbus", this flag is ignored. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.InvalidOperatingState The process of the virtual controller is not running. There is no network interface with this ID. The virtual controller has not yet completed the boot process or is already in the shutdown phase. GetStoragePath() Returns the full directory in which the instance stores its data. Table 7- 115 GetStoragePath() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetStoragePath( WCHAR inout_StoragePath[], UINT32 in_ArrayLength ); * WCHAR inout_StoragePath[]: A user-allocated storage for the storage path. The length of the array should be at least as long as DSTORAGE_PATH_MAX_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 279). * UINT32 in_ArrayLength: Length of the array (Wide character) Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE The path does not fit in the storage. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 140 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances SetStoragePath() Sets the full path of the directory in which the instance stores its data. This can also be a network share. Set the path before you start the instance. A change to the path takes effect only when the controller is restarted. If no path is set, the default setting: >\Siemens\Simatic\Simulation\Runtime\Persistence\ is used. Table 7- 116 SetStoragePath() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters Return values ERuntimeErrorCode SetStoragePath( WCHAR* in_StoragePath ); * WCHAR* in_StoragePath: Full name of the storage path. The length of the name must be less than DSTORAGE_PATH_MAX_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 279). Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE The length of the path exceeds the limit. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The path contains invalid characters. StoragePath { get; set; } Returns or sets the full path of the directory in which the instance stores its retentive data. This can also be a network share. Set the path before you start the instance. A change to the path takes effect only when the controller is restarted. If no path is set, the default setting: >\Siemens\Simatic\Simulation\Runtime\Persistence\ is used. Table 7- 117 StoragePath { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax string StoragePath { get; set; } Parameters None Return values string: The configured storage path. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The length of the path exceeds the limit. The path contains invalid characters. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 141 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ArchiveStorage() The user program, the hardware configuration and the retentive data are stored in a file, the Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card. ArchiveStorage() stores this file as a ZIP file. The instance of the virtual controller must be in OFF operating state for this. Table 7- 118 ArchiveStorage() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters Return values ERuntimeErrorCode ArchiveStorage( WCHAR* in_FullFileName ); * WCHAR in_FullFileName: The full path to the ZIP file. The path relates to directories of the computer where the API is being called. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INVALID_OPERATING_STATE SREC_INVALID_ARCHIVE_PATH SREC_CREATE_DIRECTORIES_FAILED SREC_ARCHIVE_STORAGE_FAILED SREC_STORAGE_TRANSFER_ERROR The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The instance is not in OFF operating state. The archive path is invalid. The directory for the ZIP file could not be created. The ZIP file could not be created. Error during network data transfer. Memory data between client and server computers do not match. Table 7- 119 ArchiveStorage() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void ArchiveStorage( string in_FullFileName ); * string in_FullFileName: The full path to the ZIP file. The path relates to directories of the computer where the API is being called. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InvalidOperatingState The instance is not in OFF operating state. ERuntimeErrorCode.InvalidArchivePath ERuntimeErrorCode.CreateDirectoriesFailed The archive path is invalid. ERuntimeErrorCode.ArchiveStorageNotCreated ERuntimeErrorCode.StorageTransferError The ZIP file could not be created. The directory for the ZIP file could not be created. Error during network data transfer. Memory data between client and server computers do not match. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 142 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances RetrieveStorage() RetrieveStorage() creates a Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card from the archived ZIP file. The virtual controller must be in OFF operating state for this. Table 7- 120 RetrieveStorage() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode RetrieveStorage( WCHAR* in_FullFileName ); * WCHAR* in_FullFileName: The full path to the ZIP file. The path relates to directories of the computer where the API is being called. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INVALID_OPERATING_STATE The instance is not in OFF operating state. SREC_INVALID_ARCHIVE_PATH The archive path is invalid. SREC_DELETE_EXISTING_STORAGE_FAI LED SREC_RETRIEVE_STORAGE_FAILURE SREC_STORAGE_TRANSFER_ERROR The old storage cannot be deleted. The ZIP file cannot be unzipped. Error during network data transfer. Memory data between client and server computers do not match. Table 7- 121 RetrieveStorage() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void RetrieveStorage( string in_FullFileName ); * string in_FullFileName: The full path to the ZIP file. The path relates to directories of the computer where the API is being called. Return values Exceptions None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InvalidOperatingState The instance is not in OFF operating state. ERuntimeErrorCode.InvalidArchivePath ERuntimeErrorCode.DeleteExistingStorageFailed ERuntimeErrorCode.RetrieveStorageFailure ERuntimeErrorCode.StorageTransferError The archive path is invalid. The old storage cannot be deleted. The ZIP file cannot be unzipped. Error during network data transfer. Memory data between client and server computers do not match. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 143 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.3 Operating state GetOperatingState() / OperatingState { get; } Returns the operating state of the virtual controller. When the operating state changes, the OnOperatingStateChanged() (Page 243) event is triggered. For details about the operating state, see Data types (Page 330). Table 7- 122 GetOperatingState() - Native C++ Syntax EOperatingState GetOperatingState(); Parameters None Return values * SROS_INVALID_OPERATING_STATE: If the function fails. * SROS_OFF: If the Simulation Runtime instance is not running. * SROS_BOOTING: If PowerOn() was called while in this state and the virtual controller is not yet ready to start the user program. * SROS_STOP: If the virtual controller is in STOP state. * SROS_STARTUP: If the user program is currently changing from STOP to RUN. * SROS_RUN: If the user program is running. * SROS_FREEZE: If the user program is being stopped (Freeze status). * SROS_HOLD: If the user program is set to HOLD when the breakpoint is reached. * SROS_SHUTTING_DOWN: If PowerOff() was called but the virtual controller is still in the Shutdown phase. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 144 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 123 OperatingState { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax EOperatingState OperatingState { get; } Parameters None Return values * EOperatingState.InvalidOperatingState: If the function fails. * EOperatingState.Off: If the Simulation Runtime instance is not running. * EOperatingState.Booting: If PowerOn() was called while in this state and the virtual controller is not yet ready to start the user program. * EOperatingState.Stop: If the virtual controller is in STOP state. * EOperatingState.Startup: If the user program is currently changing from STOP to RUN. * EOperatingState.Run: If the user program is running. * EOperatingState.Freeze: If the user program is being stopped (Freeze status). * EOperatingState.Hold: If the user program is set to HOLD when the breakpoint is reached. * EOperatingState.ShuttingDown: If PowerOff() was called but the virtual controller is still in the Shutdown phase. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 145 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances PowerOn() The function creates the process for the Simulation Runtime instance and starts the firmware of the virtual controller. Table 7- 124 PowerOn() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode PowerOn(); ERuntimeErrorCode PowerOn( UINT32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UINT32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. Return values - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. - Expected operating states if this function is successful: { SROS_STOP , SROS_RUN } Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The expected operating state does not occur on time. SREC_ERROR_LOADING_DLL The Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Instan ce.exe cannot load the Siemens.Simatic.PlcSim.Vplc1500.dll. SREC_STORAGE_PATH_ALREADY_IN_USE The selected path for this instance is already being used by another instance. SREC_NO_STORAGE_PATH_SET The path could not be created. The length of the DSTORAGE_PATH_MAX_LENGTH characters may be exceeded. SREC_WARNING_ALREADY_EXISTS Warning. The instance is started. SREC_WARNING_TRIAL_MODE_ACTIVE SREC_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MISCONFIGURE D SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING No license available. You can use the instance without restrictions with the Trial License. Afterwards, the instance is shut down. The virtual switch is configured incorrectly. The process of the virtual controller is no longer running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 146 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 125 PowerOn() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode PowerOn(); ERuntimeErrorCode PowerOn( UInt32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UInt32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values { EOperatingState.Run, EOperatingState.Stop } Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.OK ERuntimeErrorCode.WarningAlreadyExists ERuntimeErrorCode.WarningTrialModeActive Exceptions Condition The function is successful. Warning: The instance is started. No license available. You can use the instance without restrictions with the Trial License. Afterwards, the instance is shut down. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The expected operating state does not occur on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.ErrorLoadingDll The Siemens.Simatic.Simulation. Runtime.Instance.exe cannot load the Siemens.Simatic.PlcSim.Vplc1500.dll. ERuntimeErrorCode.StoragePathAlreadyInUse ERuntimeErrorCode.NoStoragePathSet The selected path for this instance is already being used by another instance. The path could not be created. The length of the DSTORAGE_PATH_MAX_LENGTH characters may be exceeded. ERuntimeErrorCode.VirtualSwitchMisconfigured The virtual switch is configured incorrectly. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is no longer running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 147 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances PowerOff() Shuts down the Simulation Runtime and closes its process. Table 7- 126 PowerOff() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode PowerOff(); ERuntimeErrorCode PowerOff( UINT32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UINT32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values { SROS_OFF } Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The expected operating state does not occur on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Table 7- 127 PowerOff() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void PowerOff(); void PowerOff( UInt32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UInt32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values Exceptions None { EOperatingState.Off } Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The expected operating state does not occur on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 148 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances MemoryReset() Shuts down the virtual controller, closes its processes and performs a restart. Table 7- 128 MemoryReset() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode MemoryReset(); ERuntimeErrorCode MemoryReset( UINT32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UINT32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values { SROS_STOP , SROS_RUN } Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The expected operating state does not occur on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Table 7- 129 MemoryReset() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void MemoryReset(); void MemoryReset( UInt32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UInt32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values Exceptions None { EOperatingState.Run, EOperatingState.Stop } Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The expected operating state does not occur on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 149 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Run() Calls on the virtual controller to change to RUN operating state. Table 7- 130 Run() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode Run(); ERuntimeErrorCode Run( UINT32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UINT32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values { SROS_STOP , SROS_RUN } Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The expected operating state does not occur on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Table 7- 131 Run() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void Run(); void Run( Uint32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UInt32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values Exceptions None { EOperatingState.Run } Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The expected operating state does not occur on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 150 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Stop() Calls on the virtual controller to change to STOP operating state. Table 7- 132 Stop() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode Stop(); ERuntimeErrorCode Stop( UINT32 in_Timeout_ms ); * UINT32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values { SROS_STOP } Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The expected operating state does not occur on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Table 7- 133 Stop() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void Stop(); void Stop( bool in_IsSynchronous ); * UInt32 in_Timeout_ms: A timeout value in milliseconds. - If no timeout value is set, the function returns immediately. Subscribe to the OnOperatingStateChanged() event to find out when the operation has been completed. - If the value is greater than 0 (a value of 60000 is recommended), the function returns when the operation has been completed or after a timeout. Expected operating states when this function is successful: Return values Exceptions None { EOperatingState.Stop } Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The expected operating state does not occur on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 151 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.4 Tag list UpdateTagList() The function reads the tags from the virtual controller and writes them to the shared storage arranged by name. If the tag is an array or a structure, there are multiple entries. In the case of a structure, there is an entry for the structure itself and an additional entry for each structure element. Entry_1: "StructName" Entry_2: "StructName.ElementName_1" .. Entry_N: "StructName.ElementName_n" In the case of an array, in this example a two-dimensional array, there is an entry for the array itself and an additional entry for each array element. Entry_1: "ArrayName" Entry_2: "ArrayName[a,b]", where {a} and {b} correspond to the first index of the respective dimension .. Entry_N: "ArrayName[x,y]", where {x} and {y} correspond to the last index of the respective dimension Memory for up to 500000 entries (not PLC tags) is reserved for the list. If the list becomes too large, the function returns the error/exception "NOT_ENOUGH_MEMORY". S7-PLCSIM Advanced 152 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances If there are problems with the maximum number of entries and not all tags are needed, two filters can be used when refreshing the tag table. Table 7- 134 UpdateTagList() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode UpdateTagList(); ERuntimeErrorCode UpdateTagList( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails ); ERuntimeErrorCode UpdateTagList( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails, bool in_IsHMIVisibleOnly ); ERuntimeErrorCode UpdateTagList( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails, bool in_IsHMIVisibleOnly, WCHAR* in_DataBlockFilterList ); * ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails: Every combination of the following four areas: IO: Inputs and Outputs M: Bit memory CT: Counters and Timers DB: Data Blocks The default setting is IOMCTDB. Example: IOM reads only the tags from the area Inputs / Outputs and Bit memory. * bool in_IsHMIVisibleOnly: If true, only tags marked with "HMI Visible" are read. The default setting is true. * WCHAR* in_DataBlockFilterList: A string that includes the name of all data blocks that are supposed to be available in the tag table. The string must be in quotation marks. Example: ""\"DB_1\", \"DB_2\" \"DB_3\"|\"DB_4\"\"DB_5\"" All characters within the quotation marks are interpreted as a DB name. If the data block does not exist in the PLC program, it is not added to the tag table memory. No error is triggered in the process. Return values For this list to be taken into consideration, in_DataBlockFilterList has to be unequal to NULL and in_TagListDetails has to contain "DB". Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_NOT_ENOUGH_MEMORY The process of the virtual controller is not running. More than 500000 entries are requested. SREC_WARNING_ALREADY_EXISTS The tag table is current. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The syntax of in_DataBlockFilterList is invalid. The list has to be 3 characters long; the first and last character have to be a quotation mark. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 153 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 135 UpdateTagList() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void UpdateTagList(); void UpdateTagList( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails ); void UpdateTagList( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails, bool in_IsHMIVisibleOnly ); ERuntimeErrorCode UpdateTagList( ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails, bool in_IsHMIVisibleOnly, string in_DataBlockFilterList ); * ETagListDetails in_TagListDetails: Every combination of the following four areas: IO: Inputs and Outputs M: Bit memory CT: Counters and Timers DB: Data Blocks The default setting is IOMCTDB. Example: IOM reads only the tags from the area Inputs / Outputs and Bit memory. * bool in_IsHMIVisibleOnly: If true, only tags marked with "HMI Visible" are read. The default setting is true. * string in_DataBlockFilterList: A string that includes the name of all data blocks that are supposed to be available in the tag table. The string must be in quotation marks. Example: ""\"DB_1\", \"DB_2\" \"DB_3\"|\"DB_4\"\"DB_5\"" All characters within the quotation marks are interpreted as a DB name. If the data block does not exist in the PLC program, it is not added to the tag table memory. No error is triggered in the process. For this list to be taken into consideration, in_DataBlockFilterList has to be unequal to NULL and in_TagListDetails has to contain "DB". Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.NotEnoughMemory ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The process of the virtual controller is not running. More than 500000 entries are requested. The syntax of in_DataBlockFilterList is invalid. The list has to be 3 characters long; the first and last character have to be a quotation mark. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 154 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetTagListStatus() Returns the current update status of the tag list storage. "inout_TagListDetails" is NONE, if the list needs to be updated. Table 7- 136 GetTagListStatus() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetTagListStatus( ETagListDetails* out_TagListDetails, bool* out_IsHMIVisibleOnly ); * ETagListDetails out_TagListDetails: Status of the tag list details. SRTLD_NONE when an update of the list is required. * Return values bool out_IsHMIVisibleOnly: If true, only tags marked with "HMI Visible" are available in the list. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. Table 7- 137 GetTagListStatus() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void GetTagListStatus( out ETagListDetails out_TagListDetails, out bool out_IsHMIVisibleOnly ); * out ETagListDetails out_TagListDetails: Status of the tag list details. ETagListDetails.None when an update of the list is required. * out bool out_IsHMIVisibleOnly: If true, only tags marked with "HMI Visible" are available in the list. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. GetTagInfoCount() Returns the number of entries in the tag list storage. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 138 GetTagInfoCount() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetTagInfoCount(); Parameters None Return values Number of entries in the tag list storage. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 155 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetTagInfos() / TagInfos { get; } Returns a list of all tags. Table 7- 139 GetTagInfos() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetTagInfos( UINT32 in_BufferLength, STagInfo* inout_TagInfos, UINT32* out_TagCount ); * UINT32 in_BufferLength: The number of elements that the storage can accommodate. * STagInfo* inout_TagInfos: * UINT32* out_TagCount: The user-allocated storage that accommodates the tags. Returns the number of tags that were written to the storage. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE The process of the virtual controller is not running. The elements do not fit in the storage. Table 7- 140 TagInfos { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax STagInfo[] TagInfos { get; } Parameters None Return values An array that contains all available entries of the storage. Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 156 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances CreateConfigurationFile() Writes all entries from the tag list to an XML file. Table 7- 141 CreateConfigurationFile() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode CreateConfigurationFile( WCHAR* in_FullFileName ); * WCHAR* in_FullFileName: Full file name of the XML file: + + . Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The file name is invalid. Table 7- 142 CreateConfigurationFile() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values void CreateConfigurationFile( string in_FullFileName ); None * string in_FullFileName: File name of the XML file that is to be written to: + + . Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The file name is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 157 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.5 I/O access 7.6.5.1 Synchronizing inputs and outputs Description In PLCSIM Advanced the complete scope of the input and output area is used (see GetAreaSize/AreaSize (Page 158)). This is also possible when no IO module is configured. Inputs and outputs that are defined via configured IO modules are synchronized to the defined update of the process image partition (PIP). Inputs and outputs that are not assigned to an IO module are synchronized in the cycle control point. Note the following when synchronizing these inputs and outputs: Inputs can only be used as inputs. You can write the values via the API, but values which are written via the user program (TIA Portal) are not visible in the API. Outputs can be used as output and as input. You can write the values via the API and via the CPU / the user program (TIA Portal). If API and user program write to the same area, the values from the API will overwrite the vales from the user program. 7.6.5.2 I/O access via address - Reading InputArea { get; }, MarkerArea { get; }, OutputArea { get; } Returns an interface that you use to call the .NET functions in this section. Table 7- 143 InputArea { get; } MarkerArea { get; } OutputArea { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values IIOArea InputArea { get; } IIOArea MarkerArea { get; } IIOArea OutputArea { get; } None IIOArea: The interface is used to call the "I/O access via address" functions. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 158 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances GetAreaSize() / AreaSize { get; } Returns the size of the area in bytes. Table 7- 144 GetAreaSize() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters Return values UINT32 GetAreaSize( EArea in_Area ); * EArea in_Area: The area whose size you want to receive. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). UINT32: Size of the area in bytes. If the function was successful, the value is not equal to 0. Table 7- 145 AreaSize { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values UInt32 InputArea.AreaSize { get; } UInt32 MarkerArea.AreaSize { get; } UInt32 OutputArea.AreaSize { get; } None Uint32: Size of the area in bytes. If the function was successful, the value is not equal to 0. ReadBit() Reads an individual bit from the area. Note The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name (Page 173) and not via the address areas. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 159 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 146 ReadBit() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadBit( EArea in_Area, UINT32 in_Offset, UINT8 in_Bit, bool* out_Value ); * * EArea in_Area: The area from which you want to read. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that GetAreaSize() returns. * UINT8 in_Bit: * bool* out_Value: The bit offset within the byte. The value must be between 0 and 7. Return values Returns the bit value. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Offset or bits are invaid. The area is invalid. Table 7- 147 ReadBit() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool InputArea.ReadBit( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Bit ); bool MarkerArea.ReadBit( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Bit ); bool OutputArea.ReadBit( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Bit ); * * UInt32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that AreaSize returns. Byte in_Bit: The bit offset within the byte. The value must be between 0 and 7. Return values Exceptions bool: Bit value Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Offset or bits are invaid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 160 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadByte() Reads an individual bit from the area. Note The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name and not via the address areas. Table 7- 148 ReadByte() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadByte( EArea in_Area, UINT32 in_Offset, BYTE* out Value); * EArea in_Area: The area from which you want to read. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that GetAreaSize() returns. * BYTE* out_Value: Returns the byte value. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE Offset is invalid. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The area is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 161 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 149 ReadByte() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values Exceptions Byte InputArea.ReadByte( UInt32 in_Offset ); Byte MarkerArea.ReadByte( UInt32 in_Offset ); Byte OutputArea.ReadByte( UInt32 in_Offset ); * UInt32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that AreaSize returns. Byte: Byte value. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange Offset is invalid. ReadBytes() Reads a byte array from the area. Note The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name and not via the address areas. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 162 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 150 ReadByte() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadBytes( EArea in_Area, UINT32 in_Offset, UINT32 in_BytesToRead, UINT32* out_BytesRead, BYTE inout_Values[] ); * EArea in_Area: The area from which you want to read. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that GetAreaSize() returns. * UINT32 in_BytesToRead: Contains the size of the value storage. * UINT32* out_BytesRead: Returns the number of bytes that were just written to the value storage. * BYTE inout_Values[]: The storage for the bytes that are read from the area. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The offset is outside the area size. No byte could be read. The area is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 163 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 151 ReadBytes() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Byte[] InputArea.ReadBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, UInt32 in_BytesToRead ); Byte[] MarkerArea.ReadBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, UInt32 in_BytesToRead ); Byte[] OutputArea.ReadBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, UInt32 in_BytesToRead ); * UInt32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that AreaSize returns. * UInt32 in_BytesToRead: The number of bytes to be read. Return values Exceptions Byte[]: The read bytes. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange The process of the virtual controller is not running. The offset is outside the area size. No byte could be read. ReadSignals() Structures and fields can be emulated through signal lists and be read by using the ReadSignals() function. The function also takes into consideration the byte order (Endianness). Only primitive data type signals are supported, but the function is not type-safe. Note The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name (Page 173) and not via the address areas. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 164 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 152 ReadSignals() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadSignals( EArea in_Area, SDataValueByAddress* inout_Signals, UINT32 in_SignalCount ); ERuntimeErrorCode ReadSignals( EArea in_Area, SDataValueByAddressWithCheck* inout_Signals, UINT32 in_SignalCount, bool* out_SignalsHaveChanged ); * EArea in_Area: The area from which you want to read. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * SDataValueByAddress* inout_Signals: The signal list to be read. The result is stored in the structure. * SDataValueByAddressWithCheck* inout_Signals: The signal list that is read. The result is stored in the structure. "ValueHasChanged" is set to true if the value of the signal has changed since the preceding call. * UINT32 in_SignalCount: Number of signals in the list. * bool* out_SignalsHaveChanged: Returns true if the value of at least one signal has changed since the preceding call. Signal error Return values Error code SREC_OK Condition The signal operation is successful. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag table. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The area is invalid. SREC_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_ER ROR At least one signal error is in the list. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 165 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 153 ReadSignals() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void ref ); void ref out ); * ReadSignals( SDataValueByAddress[] inout_Signals ReadSignals( SDataValueByAddressWithCheck[] inout_Signals bool out_SignalsHaveChanged); ref SDataValueByAddress[] inout_Signals: The signal list to be read. * ref SDataValueByAddressWithCheck[] inout_Signals: The signal list that is read. The result is stored in the structure. "ValueHasChanged" is set to true if the value of the signal has changed since the preceding call. * out bool out_SignalsHaveChanged: Returns true if the value of at least one signal has changed since the preceding call. Return values None Signal error Runtime error code Exceptions ERuntimeErrorOffset or bits are invalid. Code.IndexOutOfRange Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException ERuntimeErrorCode.OK The signal operation is successful. Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.SignalConfigurationError 7.6.5.3 Condition The process of the virtual controller is not running. At least one signal error is in the list. I/O access via address - Writing WriteBit() Writes an individual bit to the area. Note Data can be overwritten The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name (Page 191) and not via the address areas. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 166 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 154 WriteBit() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteBit( EArea in_Area, UINT32 in_Offset, UINT8 in_Bit, bool in_Value ); * EArea in_Area: The area that is to be written. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that GetAreaSize() returns. * UINT8 in_Bit: The bit offset within the byte. The value must be between 0 and 7. * bool in_Value: Bit value. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Offset or bits are invaid. Area is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 167 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 155 WriteBit() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void InputArea WriteBit( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Bit, bool in_Value ); void MarkerArea WriteBit( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Bit, bool in_Value ); void OutputArea WriteBit( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Bit, bool in_Value ); * UInt32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that AreaSize returns. * Byte in_Bit: The bit offset within the byte. The value must be between 0 and 7. * bool in_Value: Bit value. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange Offset or bits are invaid. WriteByte() Writes an individual byte to the area. Note Data can be overwritten The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name (Page 191) and not via the address areas. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 168 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 156 WriteByte() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteByte( EArea in_Area, UINT32 in_Offset, BYTE in Value); * EArea in_Area: The area that is to be written. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that GetAreaSize() returns. * BYTE in_Value: Byte value. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The process of the virtual controller is not running. Offset is invalid. Area is invalid. Table 7- 157 WriteByte() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void InputArea.WriteByte( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Value ); void MarkerArea.WriteByte( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Value ); void OutputArea.WriteByte( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte in_Value ); * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that AreaSize returns. * BYTE in_Value: Byte value. Return values Exceptions None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange Offset is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 169 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteBytes() Writes a byte array to the area. Note Data can be overwritten The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. In particular, do not write to bytes that belong to other applications or contain internal data, for example, qualifier bits for fail-safe I/O modules. Therefore, use access via the tag name (Page 191) and not via the address areas. Table 7- 158 WriteBytes() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteBytes( EArea in_Area, UINT32 in_Offset, UINT32 in_BytesToWrite, UINT32* out_BytesWritten, BYTE in_Values[]) ; * EArea in_Area: The area that is to be written. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that GetAreaSize() returns. * UINT32 in_BytesToWrite: * UINT32* out_BytesWritten: Contains the size of the array value to be written. Contains the number of bytes that were just written. * BYTE in_Values[]: Byte array that is to be written to the area. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The offset is outside the area size. No byte could be written. The area is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 170 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 159 WriteBytes() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters UInt32 InputArea.WriteBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte[] in_Values ); UInt32 InputArea.WriteBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, UInt32 in_BytesToWrite, Byte[] in_Values ); UInt32 MarkerArea.WriteBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte[] in_Values ); UInt32 MarkerArea.WriteBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, UInt32 in_BytesToWrite, Byte[] in_Values ); UInt32 OutputArea.WriteBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, Byte[] in_Values ); UInt32 OutputArea.WriteBytes( UInt32 in_Offset, UInt32 in_BytesToWrite, Byte[] in_Values ); * UINT32 in_Offset: The byte offset within the area. The value must be between 0 and the value that AreaSize returns. * UInt32 in_BytesToWrite: Contains the number of bytes to be written. The value must be between 1 and the size of the array value. * BYTE in_Value: Byte value. Return values Exceptions Uint32: Contains the number of bytes that were just written. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange The offset is outside the area size. No byte could be written. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 171 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteSignals() Writes multiple signals within an API call. The function also takes into consideration the byte order (Endianness). The function supports only primitive data type signals, but it is not typical. Note Data can be overwritten The function allows access to the entire storage area of the virtual controller. Therefore, use access via the tag name (Page 191) and not via the address areas. Table 7- 160 WriteSignals() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteSignals( EArea in_Area, SDataValueByAddress* in_Signals, UINT32 in_SignalCount ); * EArea in_Area: The area that is to be written. Permissible values: {SRA_INPUT, SRA_MARKER, SRA_OUTPUT}. See EArea (Page 330). * SDataValueByAddress* inout_Signals: The signal list to be written. * UINT32 in_SignalCount: Number of signals in the list. Signal error Return values Error code Condition SREC_OK The signal operation is successful. SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE Offset or bits are invalid. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_ERROR SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The process of the virtual controller is not running. At least one signal error is in the list. The area is invalid. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 172 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 161 WriteSignals() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void InputArea.WriteSignals( SDataValueByAddress[] in_Signals ); void MarkerArea.WriteSignals( SDataValueByAddress[] in_Signals ); void OutputArea.WriteSignals( SDataValueByAddress[] in_Signals ); * SDataValueByAddress[] in_Signals: The signal list to be written. Return values None Signal error Error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.OK The signal operation is successful. Exceptions ERuntimeErrorOffset or bits are invalid. Code.IndexOutOfRange Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout 7.6.5.4 Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.SignalConfigurationError At least one signal error is in the list. I/O access via tag name - Reading Individual access to IO data is used for displaying and writing values that are not refreshed regularly in a graphical user interface (GUI). Note To simulate a regular exchange of signals, create a signal list for each set of signals. Use this signal list for all further accesses. Create a new list as soon as the set of signals changes. For the signal lists use the functions ReadSignals() and WriteSignals(). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 173 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Read() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 162 Read() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode Read( WCHAR* in_Tag, SDataValue* inout_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * SDataValue* inout_Value: Contains the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. If the expected type is UNSPECIFIC, it is set to the stored type when the function was successful. The STRUCT type is not supported. Return values Structures and fields can be emulated through signal lists and be read by using the ReadSignals() function. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 174 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 163 Read() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters SDataValue Read( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions SDataValue: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 336). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 175 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadBool() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 164 ReadBool() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadBool( WCHAR* in_Tag, bool* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values bool* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 165 ReadBool() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool ReadBool( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions bool: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 176 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadInt8() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 166 ReadInt8() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadInt8( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT8* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values INT8* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 167 ReadInt8() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Int8 ReadInt8( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions Int8: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 177 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadInt16() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 168 ReadInt16() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadInt16( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT16* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values INT16* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 169 ReadInt16() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Int16 ReadInt16( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions Int16: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 178 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadInt32() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 170 ReadInt32() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadInt32( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT32* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values INT32* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 171 ReadInt32() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Int32 ReadInt32( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions Int32: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 179 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadInt64() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 172 ReadInt64() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadInt64( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT64* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values INT64* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 173 ReadInt64() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Int64 ReadInt64( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions Int64: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 180 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadUInt8() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 174 ReadUInt8() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadUInt8( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT8* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values UINT8* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 175 ReadUInt8() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters UInt8 ReadUInt8( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions UInt8: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 181 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadUInt16() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 176 ReadUInt16() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadUInt16( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT16* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values UINT16* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 177 ReadUInt16() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters UInt16 ReadUInt16( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions UInt16: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 182 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadUInt32() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 178 ReadUInt32() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadUInt32( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT32* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values UINT32* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 179 ReadUInt32() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters UInt32 ReadUInt32( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions Uint32: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 183 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadUInt64() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 180 ReadInt64() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadUInt64( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT64* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values UINT64* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 181 ReadUInt64() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters UInt64 ReadUInt64( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions UInt64: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 184 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadFloat() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 182 ReadFloat() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadFloat( WCHAR* in_Tag, float* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values float* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 183 ReadFloat() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters float ReadFloat( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions float: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 185 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadDouble() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 184 ReadDouble() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadDouble( WCHAR* in_Tag, double* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values double* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 185 ReadDouble() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters double ReadDouble( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions double: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 186 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadChar() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 186 ReadChar() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadChar( WCHAR* in_Tag, char* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values char* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 187 ReadChar() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters sbyte ReadChar( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions sbyte: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 187 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadWChar() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 188 ReadWChar() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadWChar( WCHAR* in_Tag, WCHAR* out_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. * Return values WCHAR* out_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. Table 7- 189 ReadWChar() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters char ReadWChar( string in_Tag ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be read. Return values Exceptions char: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 188 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances ReadSignals() Reads multiple signals within an API call. When the function is called for the first time, it stores internal information in the structures SDataValueByName* to improve the performance of the subsequent calls. Note To simulate a regular exchange of signals, create a signal list for each set of signals. Use this signal list for all further accesses. Create a new list as soon as the set of signals changes. Table 7- 190 ReadSignals() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode ReadSignals( SDataValueByName* inout_Signals, UINT32 in_SignalCount ); Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadSignals( SDataValueByNameWithCheck* inout_Signals, UINT32 in_SignalCount bool* out_SignalsHaveChanged ); * * * SDataValueByName* inout_Signals: Contains the name, the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. If the expected type is UNSPECIFIC, it is set to the stored type when the function was successful. The STRUCT type is not supported. SDataValueByNameWithCheck* inout_Signals: Contains the name, the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. If the expected type is UNSPECIFIC, it is set to the stored type when the function was successful. The STRUCT type is not supported. "ValueHasChanged" is set to true if the value of the signal has changed since the preceding call. UINT32 in_SignalCount: The number of signals to be read. * Signal error bool* out_SignalsHaveChanged: Returns true if the value of at least one signal has changed since the preceding call. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The signal operation is successful. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag table. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE SREC_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_ERROR The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The stored tag list must be updated. At least one signal error is in the list. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 189 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 191 ReadSignals() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void ref ) void ref out ); * ReadSignals( SDataValueByName[] inout_Signals ReadSignals( SDataValueByNameWithCheck[] inout_Signals bool out_SignalsHaveChanged ref SDataValueByName[] inout_Signals: Contains the name, the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. If the expected type is UNSPECIFIC, it is set to the stored type when the function was successful. The STRUCT type is not supported. * ref SDataValueByNameWithCheck[] inout_Signals: Contains the name, the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. If the expected type is UNSPECIFIC, it is set to the stored type when the function was successful. The STRUCT type is not supported. "ValueHasChanged" is set to true if the value of the signal has changed since the preceding call. * out bool out_SignalsHaveChanged: Returns true if the value of at least one signal has changed since the preceding call. Return values Signal error SDataValue: Contains the value and the type of the PLC tag. Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.OK The signal operation is successful. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag table. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch Exceptions Condition The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 190 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.5.5 I/O access via tag name - Writing Individual access to IO data is used for displaying and writing values that are not refreshed regularly in a graphical user interface (GUI). Note To simulate a regular exchange of signals, create a signal list for each set of signals. Use this signal list for all further accesses. Create a new list as soon as the set of signals changes. For the signal lists use the functions ReadSignals() and WriteSignals(). Write() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 192 Write() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode Write( WCHAR* in_Tag, SDataValue* in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * SDataValue* in_Value: Contains the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. The UNSPECIFIC and STRUCT types are not supported. Structures and fields can be emulated through signal lists and then be read by using the ReadSignals() function and written by using the WriteSignals() function. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). The stored tag list must be updated. The expected type is UNSPECIFIC. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 191 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 193 Write() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void Write( string in_Tag SDataValue in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * SDataValue in_Value: Contains the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. The UNSPECIFIC and STRUCT types are not supported. Structures and fields can be emulated through signal lists and then be written by using the WriteSignals() function. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The stored tag list must be updated. The expected type is UNSPECIFIC. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 192 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteBool() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 194 WriteBool() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteBool( WCHAR* in_Tag, bool in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * bool in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 193 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 195 WriteBool() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteBool( string in_Tag bool in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * bool in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 337). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 194 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteInt8() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 196 WriteInt8() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteInt8( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT8 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * INT8 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 195 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 197 WriteInt8() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteInt8( string in_Tag Int8 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * Int8 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 196 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteInt16() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 198 WriteInt16() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteInt16( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT16 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * INT16 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 197 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 199 WriteInt16() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteInt16( string in_Tag Int16 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * Int16 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 198 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteInt32() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 200 WriteInt32() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteInt32( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT32 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * INT32 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 199 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 201 WriteInt32() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteInt32( string in_Tag Int32 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * Int32 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 200 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteInt64() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 202 WriteInt64() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteInt64( WCHAR* in_Tag, INT64 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * INT64 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 201 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 203 WriteInt64() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteInt64( string in_Tag Int64 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * Int64 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 202 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteInt8() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 204 WriteUInt8() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteUInt8( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT8 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UINT8 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 203 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 205 WriteUInt8() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteUInt8( string in_Tag UInt8 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UInt8 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 204 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteUInt16() Reads the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 206 WriteUInt16() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteUInt16( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT16 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UINT16 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 205 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 207 WriteUInt16() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteUInt16( string in_Tag UInt16 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UInt16 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 206 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteUInt32() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 208 WriteUInt32() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteUInt32( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT32 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UINT32 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 207 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 209 WriteUInt32() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteUInt32( string in_Tag UInt32 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UInt32 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 208 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteUInt64() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 210 WriteUInt64() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteUInt64( WCHAR* in_Tag, UINT64 in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UINT64 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 209 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 211 WriteUInt64() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteUInt64( string in_Tag UInt64 in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * UInt64 in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 210 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteFloat() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 212 WriteFloat() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteFloat( WCHAR* in_Tag, float in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * float in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 211 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 213 WriteFloat() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteFloat( string in_Tag float in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * float in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 212 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteDouble() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 214 WriteDouble() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteDouble( WCHAR* in_Tag, double in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * double in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 213 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 215 WriteDouble() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteDouble( string in_Tag double in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * double in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 214 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteChar() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 216 WriteChar() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteChar( WCHAR* in_Tag, char in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * char in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 215 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 217 WriteChar() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteChar( string in_Tag sbyte in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * sbyte in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 216 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteWChar() Writes the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 218 WriteWChar() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteWChar( WCHAR* in_Tag, WCHAR in_Value ); * WCHAR* in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * WCHAR in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 217 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 219 WriteWChar() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteWChar( string in_Tag char in_Value ) * string in_Tag: The name of the PLC tag that is to be written. * char in_Value: Contains the value of the PLC tag. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMissmatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData The stored tag list must be updated. WriteSignals() Writes multiple signals within an API call. When the function is called for the first time, it stores internal information in the structures SDataValueByName* to improve the performance of the subsequent calls. Note To simulate a regular exchange of signals, create a signal list for each set of signals. Use this signal list for all further accesses. Create a new list as soon as the set of signals changes. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 218 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 220 WriteSignals() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode WriteSignals( SDataValueByName* inout_Signals, UINT32 in_SignalCount ); Parameters * SDataValueByName* inout_Signals: Contains the name, the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. The UNSPECIFIC and STRUCT types are not supported. * UINT32 in_SignalCount: Number of signals. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 335). SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE The stored tag list must be updated. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The expected type is UNSPECIFIC. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 219 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 221 WriteSignals() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values Exceptions void WriteSignals( SDataValueByName[] in_Signals ) * SDataValueByName: Contains the name, the value and the expected type of the PLC tag. The UNSPECIFIC and STRUCT types are not supported. None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist The entry does not exist in the stored tag list. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupported Access to entire structures or arrays is not supported. ERuntimeErrorCode.TypeMismatch The expected type does not match the stored type. See Compatible primitive data types (Page 337). ERuntimeErrorCode.NotUpToData ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument 7.6.6 The stored tag list must be updated. The expected type is UNSPECIFIC. Settings for the virtual time GetSystemTime() Returns the virtual system time of the virtual controller. Returns an empty structure when the function fails. Table 7- 222 GetSystemTime() - Native C++ Syntax SYSTEMTIME GetSystemTime(); Parameters None Return values SYSTEMTIME: System time of the virtual controller. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 220 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances SetSystemTime() Sets the virtual system time of the virtual controller. A system time between "Jan 1 1970 00:00:00:000" and "Dec 31 2200 23:59:59:999" is valid. Table 7- 223 SetSystemTime() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode SetSystemTime( SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime ); * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: System time that is to be set for the virtual controller. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The value is outside the limits. SystemTime { get; set; } Sets or returns the virtual system time of the virtual controller. A system time between "Jan 1 1970 00:00:00:000" and "Dec 31 2200 23:59:59:999" is valid. Table 7- 224 SystemTime { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax DateTime SystemTime { get; set; } Parameters None Return values Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The value is outside the limits. GetScaleFactor() Returns the scaling factor with which the virtual time advances. Table 7- 225 GetScaleFactor() - Native C++ Syntax double GetScaleFactor(); Parameters None Return values double: Scaling factor of the virtual time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 221 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances SetScaleFactor() Sets the scaling factor with which the virtual time advances. Start with a small scaling factor and incrementally approach a scaling factor at which the virtual controller remains in RUN. A value between 0.01 and 100 is valid. The default setting is 1. If the value is less than 1, the virtual time of the virtual controller runs X-times slower than the real time. If the value is greater than 1, the virtual time of the virtual controller runs X-times faster than the real time. A change in the value during runtime only takes effect at the cycle control point. Table 7- 226 SetScaleFactor() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode SetScaleFactor ( double in_Value ); Parameters * Return values Runtime error code double in_Value: Scaling factor of the virtual time. SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The value is outside the limits. ScaleFactor { get; set; } Sets or returns the scaling factor with which the virtual time advances. Start with a small scaling factor and incrementally approach a scaling factor at which the virtual controller remains in RUN. A value between 0.01 and 100 is valid. The default setting is 1. If the value is less than 1, the virtual time of the virtual controller runs X-times slower than the real time. If the value is greater than 1, the virtual time of the virtual controller runs X-times faster than the real time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 222 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances A change in the value during runtime only takes effect at the cycle control point. Table 7- 227 ScaleFactor { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax double ScaleFactor { get; set; } Parameters None Return values double: Scaling factor of the virtual time. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument 7.6.7 Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The value is outside the limits. Cycle control GetOperatingMode() Returns the operating mode (Page 331) of the virtual controller. Table 7- 228 GetOperatingMode() - Native C++ Syntax EOperatingMode GetOperatingMode(); Parameters None Return values EOperatingMode: Operating mode of the virtual controller SetOperatingMode() Sets the operating mode of the virtual controller. A change in the value during runtime only takes effect at the synchronization point. Table 7- 229 SetOperatingMode() - Native C++ Syntax void SetOperatingMode( EOperatingMode in_OperatingMode ); Parameters * Return values Runtime error code EOperatingMode in_OperatingMode: Operating mode of the virtual controller SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 223 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances OperatingMode { get; set; } Returns or sets the operating mode of the virtual controller. A change in the value during runtime only takes effect at the synchronization point. Table 7- 230 OperatingMode { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax EOperatingMode OperatingMode { get; set; } Parameters None Return values EOperatingMode: Operating mode of the virtual controller Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. SetSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() Sets the SendSyncEventInDefault mode. In this mode the OnSyncPointReached event is triggered after each cycle end in the Default operating mode. See OnSyncPointReached (Page 247). Table 7- 231 SetSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode SetSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled( bool in_Enable ); * bool in_Enable: If true, the OnSyncPointReached event is triggered after each cycle in the Default operating mode. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() Returns the SendSyncEventInDefaultMode mode. When the function fails, the return value is false. Table 7- 232 IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled() - Native C++ Syntax bool IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled(); Parameters None Return values * * false: The event is not triggered (unless the Sync-Freeze mode is active). true: The event is triggered after every cycle. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 224 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled { get; set; } Returns or sets the SendSyncEventInDefaultMode mode. In this mode the OnSyncPointReached event is triggered after each cycle end for every operating mode. If the event is also to be received in the Default operating mode, set the return value to true. See OnSyncPointReached (Page 247). Table 7- 233 IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax bool IsSendSyncEventInDefaultModeEnabled { get; set;} Parameters None Return values * * Exceptions false: The event is not triggered (unless the Sync-Freeze mode is active). true: The event is triggered after every cycle. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. GetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() Returns the overwritten minimum cycle time (in nanoseconds) that is used in the SingleStep_CT and SingleStep_CPT operating modes. Table 7- 234 GetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() - Native C++ Syntax INT64 GetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns(); Parameters None Return values INT64: The overwritten minimum cycle time in nanoseconds. SetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() Sets the overwritten minimum cycle time (in nanoseconds) that is used in the SingleStep_CT and SingleStep_CPT operating modes. A value between 0 and 6000000000 is valid. The default setting is 100 ms. A change in the value during runtime only takes effect at the cycle control point. Table 7- 235 SetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode SetOverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns( INT64 in_CycleTime_ns ); Parameters * Return values Runtime error code INT64 in_CycleTime_ns: The overwritten minimum cycle time in nanoseconds. SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The value is outside the limits. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 225 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances OverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns { get; set; } Returns or sets the overwritten minimum cycle time in nanoseconds that is used in the SingleStep_CT and SingleStep_CPT operating modes. A value between 0 and 6000000000 is valid. The default setting is 100 ms. A change in the value during runtime only takes effect at the cycle control point. Table 7- 236 OverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns { get; set; } - .NET (C#) Syntax Int64 OverwrittenMinimalCycleTime_ns { get; set; } Parameters None Return values Int64: The overwritten minimum cycle time in nanoseconds. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The value is outside the limits. RunToNextSyncPoint() If the virtual controller is running in a SingleStep operating mode, it is stopped at the synchronization point (Freeze state). The RunToNextSyncPoint() function cancels the freeze state. The virtual controller continues to run until the next synchronization point. Table 7- 237 RunToNextSyncPoint() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode RunToNextSyncPoint(); Parameters None Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The process of the virtual controller is not running. Table 7- 238 RunToNextSyncPoint() - .NET (C#) Syntax void RunToNextSyncPoint(); Parameters None Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning The process of the virtual controller is not running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 226 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances StartProcessing() If the virtual controller is running in a TimespanSynchronized operating mode, it is stopped at the synchronization point (Freeze state). The StartProcessing() function cancels the freeze state. The virtual controller will now run for at least the requested time before it changes to Freeze state at the next synchronization point. Table 7- 239 StartProcessing() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode StartProcessing( INT64 in_MinimalTimeToRun_ns ); * INT64 in_MinimalTimeToRun_ns: The minimum virtual time (in nanoseconds) that the virtual controller runs before it changes to Freeze state. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING The process of the virtual controller is not running. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The value is less than 0. Table 7- 240 StartProcessing() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void StartProcessing( Int64 in_MinimalTimeToRun_ns ); * Int64 in_MinimalTimeToRun_ns: The minimum virtual time (in nanoseconds) that the virtual controller runs before it changes to Freeze state. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InstanceNotRunning ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The process of the virtual controller is not running. The value is less than 0. Additional information For further information, see sections Virtual time response (Page 73), Stop simulation (Page 76). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 227 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8 Acyclic services 7.6.8.1 Overview The acyclic services of PLCSIM Advanced include: Interrupt and event information which the I/O modules send to the CPU. Read and write processes of parameter and status data from the user program of the PLC to the I/O modules. API methods and associated events Events which are triggered by the I/O modules and associated API methods: Table 7- 241 Overview - API methods and associated events OB Name API methods for triggering the OB (query) API event after OB execution (alarm) 4x Hardware Interrupt ProcessEvent (Page 234) OnProcessEventDone (Page 259) 55 Status StatusEvent (Page 238) OnStatusEventDone (Page 261) 56 Update UpdateEvent (Page 240) OnUpdateEventDone (Page 263) 57 Profile ProfileEvent (Page 239) OnProfileEventDone (Page 262) 82 Diagnostic error Interrupt AlarmNotification (Page 232) OnAlarmNotificationDone (Page 258) 83 Pull or Plug of module PullOrPlugEvent (Page 236) OnPullOrPlugEventDone (Page 260) 86 Rack or station failure RackOrStationFaultEvent (Page 242) OnRackOrStationFaultEventDone (Page 264) Flowchart for the simulation of events which are triggered by the I/O modules. Figure 7-4 Flowchart for the simulation of events S7-PLCSIM Advanced 228 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Events Events triggered by the user program (TIA Portal), which have logged on for the notification: Figure 7-5 SFB Name API event for triggering the SFB API method (alarm) 52 RDREC OnDataRecordRead (Page 257) ReadRecordDone (Page 230) 53 WRREC OnDataRecordWrite (Page 257) WriteRecordDone (Page 230) Flowchart S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 229 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.2 ReadRecordDone / WriteRecordDone ReadRecordDone() With this API method, the simulation of an I/O module signals to the CPU that the asynchronous reading of a data record has been completed. The simulation hereby makes the read information available. Table 7- 242 ReadRecordDone() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ReadRecordDone( SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo, BYTE* in_Data, UINT32 in_Status ); * SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo: Structure which contains the data record information. See SDataRecordInfo (Page 321). * * Return values BYTE* in_Data: Byte array of the read data record with the length defined by DataSize in the structure SDataRecordInfo. UINT32 in_Status: Status of the job execution Runtime error code SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_TIMEOUT Condition The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 243 ReadRecordDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void ReadRecordDone( SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo, BYTE[] in_Data, UInt32 in_Status ); * SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo: Structure which contains the data record information. See SDataRecordInfo (Page 321). * * Return values Exceptions BYTE[] in_Data: Byte array of the read data record with the length defined by DataSize in the structure SDataRecordInfo. UInt32 in_Status: Status of the job execution None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 230 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WriteRecordDone() With this API method, the simulation of an I/O module signals to the CPU that the asynchronous writing of a data record has been completed. Table 7- 244 WriteRecordDone() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode WriteRecordDone( SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo, UINT32 in_Status ); * SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo: Structure which contains the data record information. See SDataRecordInfo (Page 321). * UINT32 in_Status: Status of the job execution Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST No hardware identifier of the module. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. Table 7- 245 WriteRecordDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void WriteRecordDone( SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo, UInt32 in_Status ); * SDataRecordInfo in_RecordInfo: Structure which contains the data record information. See SDataRecordInfo (Page 321). * UInt32 in_Status: Status of the job execution Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 231 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.3 AlarmNotification AlarmNotification() This function triggers diagnostic alarms according to the PROFINET standard. Each call of this function calls the OB 82 once, regardless of the number and the severity level of the transferred diagnostic entries. Table 7- 246 AlarmNotification() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode AlarmNotification( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, UINT16 in_ModuleState, UINT16 in_NumberOfDiagnosisEvents, SDiagExtChannelDescription* in_ArrayOfDiagnosisEvents, UINT16* out_SequenceNumber ); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the diagnostics entry. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * UINT16 in_ModuleState: Module status. The following statuses are valid: DMODULE_STATE_OK, DMODULE_STATE_ERROR, DMODULE_STATE_MAINT_DEMANDED, DMODULE_STATE_MAINT_REQUIRED * UINT16 in_NumberOfDiagnosisEvents: Multiple diagnostic entries can be sent to the CPU with a single API call. Valid range: 0 to 16. 0 means that no diagnostics entry should appear for the submodule or the channel. * SDiagExtChannelDescription* in_ArrayOfDiagnosisEvents: Pointer to a field with diagnostic entries. The field must match the number of diagnostic entries. It can also be a zero pointer. For definitions, see SDiagExtChannelDescription (Page 324). * UINT16* out_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. Return values According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_WRONG_MODULE_TYPE The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. No hardware identifier of the module. The field size of in_ArrayOfDiagnosisEvents is less than the number of the currently available diagnostic events. The channel number does not exist for the module. SREC_TIMEOUT The value for the module status is invalid. The function does not return on time. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT S7-PLCSIM Advanced 232 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 247 AlarmNotification() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void AlarmNotification( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, ushort in_ModuleState, ushort in_NumberOfDiagnosisEvents, SDiagExtChannelDescription [] in_ArrayOfDiagnosisEvents, Out ushort out_SequenceNumber ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the diagnostics entry. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * ushort in_ModuleState: Module status. The following statuses are valid: ModuleState.Ok, ModuleState.Error, ModuleState.MaintenanceDemanded, ModuleState.MaintenanceRequired * ushort in_NumberOfDiagnosisEvents Multiple diagnostic entries can be sent to the CPU with a single API call. Valid range: 0 to 16. 0 means that no diagnostics entry should appear for the submodule or the channel. * SDiagExtChannelDescription [] in_ArrayOfDiagnosisEvents: Pointer to a field with diagnostic entries. The field must match the number of diagnostic entries. It can also be a zero pointer. For definitions, see SDiagExtChannelDescription. * Out ushort out_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each alarm event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist No hardware identifier of the module. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongModuleType ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The value for the module status is invalid. The channel number does not exist for the module. The field size of in_ArrayOfDiagnosisEvents is less than the number of the currently available diagnostic events. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 233 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.4 ProcessEvent ProcessEvent() Process events from central and distributed input modules can be simulated with this function. Table 7- 248 ProcessEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ProcessEvent( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, UINT16 in_Channel, EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType, UINT16* out SequenceNumber); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the process event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * UINT16 in_Channel: The channel of the IO module which sends the process event. * EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events for S7 modules, see EProcessEventType (Page 344). * UINT16* out_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST No hardware identifier of the module. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED_BY_MODULE The module is not supported by this user action. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 234 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 249 ProcessEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void ProcessEvent( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, ushort in_Channel, EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType, Out ushort out_SequenceNumber ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which generates the process event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * ushort in_Channel: The channel of the IO module which generates the process event. * EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events for S7 modules, see EProcessEventType (Page 344). * Out ushort out_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupportedByModule ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. No hardware identifier of the module. The module is not supported by this user action. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 235 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.5 PullOrPlugEvent PullOrPlugEvent() This function triggers pull/plug events. The interrupt OB (OB 83) "Pull or plug of modules" is executed for these events. Table 7- 250 PullOrPlugEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode PullOrPlugEvent( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType, UINT16* out_SequenceNumber ); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which generates the pull/plug event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of pull/plug events, see EPullOrPlugEventType (Page 344). * UINT16* out_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Return values Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_WRONG_MODULE_STATE The module is currently unplugged. SREC_WRONG_MODULE_TYPE The wrong module type was selected. SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED_BY_MODULE SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_TIMEOUT For example, if an onboard IO of a compact CPU is to be pulled. The module is not supported by this user action. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 236 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 251 PullOrPlugEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void PullOrPlugEvent( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType, Out ushort out_SequenceNumber ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which generates the pull/plug event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of pull/plug events, see EPullOrPlugEventType (Page 344). * Out ushort out_SequenceNumber PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongModuleState ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongModuleType The module is currently unplugged. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist No hardware identifier of the module. The wrong module type was selected. For example, if an onboard IO of a compact CPU is to be pulled. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupportedByModule The module is not supported by this user action. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 237 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.6 StatusEvent StatusEvent() This function is used to trigger the status event OB (OB 55). Status events are only supported for modules in a distributed IO system. Table 7- 252 StatusEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode StatusEvent( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, UINT16 in_Specifier ); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module that generates the status event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * Return values UINT16 in_Specifier: The parameter is transferred to the interrupt frame as interrupt specifier. It is available as input parameter of the OB 55 call. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED_BY_MODULE SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_TIMEOUT The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The module is not supported by this user action. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 253 StatusEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void StatusEvent( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, ushort in_Specifier ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module that generates the status event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * ushort in_Specifier: The parameter is transferred to the interrupt frame as interrupt specifier. It is available as input parameter of the OB 55 call. Return values Exceptions None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist No hardware identifier of the module. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupportedByModule The module is not supported by this user action. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 238 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.7 ProfileEvent ProfileEvent() This function is used to trigger the Profile event OB (OB 57). Profile events are only supported for modules in a distributed IO system. Table 7- 254 ProfileEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode ProfileEvent( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, UINT16 in_Specifier ); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module that generates the profile event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * Return values UINT16 in_Specifier: The parameter is transferred to the interrupt frame as interrupt specifier. It is available as input parameter of the OB 57 call. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED_BY_MODULE SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_TIMEOUT The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The module is not supported by this user action. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 255 ProfileEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void ProfileEvent( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, ushort in_Specifier ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module that generates the profile event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * ushort in_Specifier: The parameter is transferred to the interrupt frame as interrupt specifier. It is available as input parameter of the OB 57 call. Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist No hardware identifier of the module. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupportedByModule ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The module is not supported by this user action. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 239 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.8 UpdateEvent UpdateEvent() This function is used to trigger the Update event OB (OB 56). Update events are only supported for modules in a distributed IO system. Table 7- 256 UpdateEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode UpdateEvent( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, UINT16 in_Specifier ); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module that triggers the update event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * Return values UINT16 in_Specifier: The parameter is transferred to the interrupt frame as interrupt specifier. It is available as input parameter of the OB 56 call. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED_BY_MODULE SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_TIMEOUT The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The module is not supported by this user action. No hardware identifier of the module. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 257 UpdateEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters void UpdateEvent( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, ushort in_Specifier ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module that triggers the update event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. * ushort in_Specifier: The parameter is transferred to the interrupt frame as interrupt specifier. It is available as input parameter of the OB 56 call. Return values Exceptions None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist No hardware identifier of the module. ERuntimeErrorCode.NotSupportedByModule The module is not supported by this user action. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 240 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.9 GetConfiguredProcessEvent GetConfiguredProcessEvents() With this API method, the process events configured in the TIA Portal can be read out during runtime. If no process events are present, SREC_OK is returned. The value for EventsCount is then 0. Table 7- 258 GetConfiguredProcessEvents() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetConfiguredProcessEvents( UINT16* out_EventsCount, ); * SConfiguredProcessEvents* inout_ProcessEvents: Pointer or reference to a user-defined memory which contains the field with the downloaded configured process events. The structure SConfiguredProcessEvents (Page 323) contains information about these process events. * UINT16* out_EventsCount: Pointer or reference to a tag which contains the number of configured process events. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 259 GetConfiguredProcessEvents() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters SConfiguredProcessEvents [] GetConfiguredProcessEvents( ); None Return values Field with configured process events and field size provide the number of configured process events. Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 241 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.8.10 RackOrStationFaultEvent Description This function is used to trigger the RackOrStationFault event OB (OB 86). These events are only supported for distributed devices. Table 7- 260 RackOrStationFaultEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameter ERuntimeErrorCode RackOrStationFaultEvent( UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier, ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType ); * UINT16 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the device that sends the event. * Return values ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events, see ERackOrStationFaultType (Page 346). Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_WRONG_MODULE_TYPE SREC_WRONG_MODULE_STATE SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST SREC_TIMEOUT The function is successful. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The specified HW identifier is not that of a distributed device. The device with the specified HW identifier already reports the status Fault/Return. The specified HW identifier of the device does not exist. The function does not return on time. Table 7- 261 RackOrStationFaultEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameter void RackOrStationFaultEvent( ushort in_HardwareIdentifier, ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType ); * ushort in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the device that sends the event. * ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events, see ERackOrStationFaultType (Page 346). Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExist ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongModuleType ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongModuleState ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. The specified HW identifier of the device does not exist. The specified HW identifier is not that of a distributed device. The device with the specified HW identifier already reports the status Fault/Return. The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 242 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.9 Events Events for IInstances The following events are differentiated in the API: Table 7- 262 Events for the IInstances interface Event Cause OnOperatingStateChanged (Page 243) This event is always triggered when the operating state of the virtual controller has changed. OnSyncPointReached (Page 247) This event is triggered when the virtual controller reaches a synchronization point. If the virtual controller is being operated in Default mode, the SendSyncEventInDefaultMode flag must be set to receive the event. See SendSyncEventInDefaultMode (Page 223). OnConfigurationChanging (Page 249) This event is triggered when changing of the configuration of the virtual controller starts. * During power up from the Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card * At the start of a download When this event is triggered, the stored tag list is reset. OnConfigurationChanged (Page 252) OnLedChanged (Page 254) 7.6.9.1 This event is triggered when the configuration of the virtual controller has changed: * After power up from the Virtual SIMATIC Memory Card * At the end of a download * When the IP address changes This event is triggered when the LED display of the virtual controller has changed. OnOperatingStateChanged events OnOperatingStateChanged Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 263 OnOperatingStateChanged - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS OnOperatingStateChanged; Parameters None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS (Page 294). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 243 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 264 RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS (Page 282). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registering a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 265 RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); void RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values Example C++ None // Thread 1 -------------------------------------------------ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterInstance(&psa); } // Register the internal event object psa->RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); // Thread 2 -------------------------------------------------while (condition) { // Wait for the event to be set (timeout after 10s) bool isEventSet = psa>WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(10000); if (isEventSet) { // Do Something ... } } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 244 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Example C++ // Thread 1 -------------------------------------------------ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterInstance(&psa); } // Create an event object HANDLE eventHandle = CreateEvent(NULL, FALSE, FALSE, NULL); // Register the user created event object psa->RegisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(&eventHandle); // Do Something ... // Clean up the handle CloseHandle(eventHandle); // Thread 2 -------------------------------------------------while (condition) { // Wait for the event to be set //OR: WaitForSingleObject(eventHandle, INFINITE); //psa>WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); // Do Something ... } UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 266 UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedCallback(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 267 UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 245 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances Table 7- 268 UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is in the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 269 WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. Table 7- 270 WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnOperatingStateChangedEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 246 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.9.2 OnSyncPointReached events OnSyncPointReached Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 271 OnSyncPointReached - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters event Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 OnSyncPointReached; None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 (Page 296). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 272 RegisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to an event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 (Page 281). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 247 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registering a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 273 RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent(); void RegisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values None UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 274 UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedCallback(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 275 UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None Table 7- 276 UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnSyncPointReachedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 248 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is in the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 277 WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters SOnSyncPointReachedResult WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent(); SOnSyncPontReachedResult WaitForOnEndOfCycleOnSyncPointReachedEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * SOnSyncPointReachedResult: A structure that supplies information about the event. See SOnSyncPointReachedResult (Page 319). Table 7- 278 WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters SOnSyncPointReachedResult WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent(); SOnSyncPointReachedResult WaitForOnSyncPointReachedEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * SOnSyncPointReachedResult: A structure that supplies information about the event. See SOnSyncPointReachedResult (Page 319). 7.6.9.3 OnConfigurationChanging events OnConfigurationChanging Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 279 OnConfigurationChanging - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_II_EREC_DT OnConfigurationChanging; Parameters None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT (Page 294). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 249 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances RegisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 280 RegisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to an event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST (Page 281). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registration of a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 281 RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent(); void RegisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values None UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 282 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingCallback(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 250 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 283 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent(); Parameters None Return values None Table 7- 284 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangingEvent(); Parameters None Return values None WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is in the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 285 WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent(); bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. Table 7- 286 WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent(); bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangingEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 251 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.9.4 OnConfigurationChanged events OnConfigurationChanged Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 287 OnConfigurationChanged - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 OnConfigurationChanged; Parameters None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 (Page 298). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 288 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to an event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 (Page 286) . Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 252 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registering a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 289 RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); void RegisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values None UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 290 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedCallback(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 291 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None Table 7- 292 UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 253 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is in the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 293 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. Table 7- 294 WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnConfigurationChangedEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * 7.6.9.5 true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. OnLedChanged events OnLedChanged Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 295 OnLedChanged - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM OnLedChanged; Parameters None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM (Page 295). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 254 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances RegisterOnLedChangedCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 296 RegisterOnLedChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnLedChangedCallback( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to an event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM (Page 283). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnLedChangedEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registering a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 297 RegisterOnLedChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnLedChangedEvent(); void RegisterOnLedChangedEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values None UnregisterOnLedChangedCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 298 UnregisterOnLedChangedCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnLedChangedCallback(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 255 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 299 UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None Table 7- 300 UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnLedChangedEvent(); Parameters None Return values None WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is in the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 301 WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnLedChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnLedChangedEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. Table 7- 302 WaitForOnLedChangedEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnLedChangedEvent(); bool WaitForOnLedChangedEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ); * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 256 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances 7.6.10 Events for acyclic services 7.6.10.1 OnDataRecordRead / OnDataRecordWrite events OnDataRecordRead Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 303 OnDataRecordRead - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI OnDataRecordRead; Parameter None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI (Page 300). Return values None Exceptions None Note The Event-Handler Methode runs in a separate thread. OnDataRecordWrite Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 304 OnDataRecordWrite - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR OnDataRecordWrite; Parameter None. See Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR (Page 299). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnDataRecordReadCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 305 RegisterOnDataRecordReadCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnDataRecordReadCallback ( Event Callback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI (Page 288). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 257 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnDataRecordReadCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 306 UnregisterOnDataRecordReadCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.2 Syntax void UnregisterOnDataRecordReadCallback(); Parameters None Return values None OnAlarmNotification events OnAlarmNotificationDone() Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 307 OnAlarmNotificationDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 OnAlarmNotificationDone; Parameters None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 (Page 304). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 308 RegisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback ( Event Callback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 (Page 292). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 258 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 309 UnregisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.3 Syntax void UnregisterOnAlarmNotificationDoneCallback (); Parameters None Return values None OnProcessEvent events OnProcessEventDone() Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 310 OnProcessEventDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 OnProcessEventDone; None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32. (Page 302) Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 311 RegisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ Syntax * Parameters * ); void RegisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback ( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 (Page 290) Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 259 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 312 UnregisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.4 Syntax void UnregisterOnProcessEventDoneCallback (); Parameters None Return values None OnPullOrPlugEvent events OnPullOrPlugEventDone() Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 313 OnPullOrPlugEventDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 OnPullOrPlugEventDone; Parameters None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 (Page 301). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 314 RegisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters * ); * void RegisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback ( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 (Page 289). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 260 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 315 UnregisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.5 Syntax void UnregisterOnPullOrPlugEventDoneCallback (); Parameters None Return values None OnStatusEvent events OnStatusEventDone() Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 316 OnStatusEventDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 OnStatusEventDone; Parameters None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 (Page 303). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 317 RegisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters * ); * void RegisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback ( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 (Page 291). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 261 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 318 UnregisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.6 Syntax void UnregisterOnStatusEventDoneCallback (); Parameters None Return values None OnProfileEvent events OnProfileEventDone() Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 319 OnProfileEventDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 OnProfileEventDone; Parameters None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 (Page 303). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 320 RegisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters * ); * void RegisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback ( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 (Page 291). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 262 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 321 UnregisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.7 Syntax void UnregisterOnProfileEventDoneCallback (); Parameters None Return values None OnUpdateEvent events OnUpdateEventDone() Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 322 OnUpdateEventDone() - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 OnUpdateEventDone; Parameters None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 (Page 303). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 323 RegisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters * ); * void RegisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback ( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 (Page 291). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 263 User interfaces (API) 7.6 API IInstances UnregisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 324 UnregisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback() - Native C++ 7.6.10.8 Syntax void UnregisterOnUpdateEventDoneCallback (); Parameters None Return values None RackOrStationFault events OnRackOrStationFaultEvent Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 325 OnRackOrStationFaultEvent - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET OnRackOrStationFault; Parameter None. See Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET (Page 305). Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be deleted. Table 7- 326 RegisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameter void RegisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback ( EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_II_ SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET in_CallbackFunction. A callback function that subscribes to the event. See EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET (Page 293) Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. UnregisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 327 UnregisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnRackOrStationFaultEventCallback (); Parameter None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 264 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager 7.7.1 Interfaces - Information and settings Dispose() Deletes the managed interface and unloads the native components of the user interfaces. Note When the interface of the Remote Runtime Manager is deleted, no IInstance interface which was generated by the IRemoteRuntimeManager interface can be used. The .NET Garbage Collector clears its IRemoteRuntimeManager interface when no active references are present. Table 7- 328 Dispose() - .NET (C#) Syntax void Dispose() Parameters None Return values None GetVersion() Returns the version of the remote Runtime Manager. If the function fails, version 0.0 is returned. Table 7- 329 GetVersion() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetVersion(); Parameters None Return values UINT32: Remote Runtime Manager Version (HIWORD = Major, LOWORD = Minor) Table 7- 330 Version { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax UInt32 Version { get; } Parameters None Return values Uint32: Remote Runtime Manager Version (HIWORD = Major, LOWORD = Minor) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 265 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager GetIP() / IP { get; } Returns the IP address of the PC on which the remote Runtime Manager is running. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 331 GetIP() - Native C++ Syntax UIP GetIP(); Parameters None Return values UIP: Returns the IP address of the PC on which the Runtime Manager is run- ning. Table 7- 332 IP { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax SIP IP { get; } Parameters None Return values SIP: Returns the IP address of the PC on which the Runtime Manager is run- ning. GetPort() / Port { get; } Returns the open port of the PC on which the remote Runtime Manager is running. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 333 GetPort() - Native C++ Syntax UINT16 GetPort(); Parameters None Return values UINT16: Open port of the PC on which the remote Runtime Manager is running. Table 7- 334 Port { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax UInt16 Port { get; } Parameters None Return values UInt16: Open port of the PC on which the remote Runtime Manager is running. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 266 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager GetRemoteComputerName() / RemoteComputerName { get; } Returns the name of the PC on which the remote Runtime Manager is running. Table 7- 335 GetRemoteComputerName() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetRemoteComputerName( WCHAR* inout_Name, UINT32 in_ArrayLength ); * WCHAR* inout_Name: A user-allocated array for the computer name. * Return values UINT32 in_ArrayLength: The array length. The array should be longer than MAX_COMPUTERNAME_LENGTH. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. SREC_INDEX_OT_OF_RANGE The array is too small to accommodate the computer name. Table 7- 336 RemoteComputerName { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax string RemoteComputerName { get; } Parameters None Return values string: Name of the PC on which the remote Runtime Manager is running. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Exceptions Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.IndexOutOfRange The array is too small to accommodate the computer name. Disconnect() Closes the connection to the remote Runtime Manager. Note All applications that are connected to the remote Runtime Manager lose this connection. Table 7- 337 Disconnect() - Native C++ Syntax ERuntimeErrorCode Disconnect(); Parameters None Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 267 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 338 Disconnect() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters Return values Exceptions void Disconnect(); None None Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved 7.7.2 Simulation Runtime instances 7.7.2.1 Simulation Runtime instances (remote) GetRegisteredInstancesCount() Returns the number of instances that are registered in Runtime Manager. If the function fails, the return value is 0. Table 7- 339 GetRegisteredInstancesCount() - Native C++ Syntax UINT32 GetRegisteredInstancesCount(); Parameters None Return values UINT32: Number of available instances. GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() Returns information about an already registered instance. You can use the ID or name to create an interface of this instance (see CreateInterface()). Table 7- 340 GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode GetRegisteredInstanceInfoAt( UINT32 in_Index, SInstanceInfo* out_InstanceInfo ); * * Return values UINT32 in_Index: Index of the created instance from which you want to receive the information. The index must be less than the value you receive when you call GetRegisteredInstanceCount(). SInstanceInfo* out_InstanceInfo: The information with name and ID of the instance. See SInstanceInfo (Page 314). Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_INDEX OUT_OF_RANGE The function is successful. The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. There is no instance information for this index. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 268 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager RegisteredInstanceInfo { get; } Returns information about an already registered instance. You can use the ID or name of this instance to create an interface of this instance, see CreateInterface(). Table 7- 341 RegisterInstanceInfo { get; } - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters SInstanceInfo[] RegisteredInstanceInfo { get; } None Return values None Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. RegisterInstance() Registers a new instance of a virtual controller in Runtime Manager. Creates and returns an interface of this instance. Table 7- 342 RegisterInstance() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType, WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); * ECPUType in_CPUType: Defines which CPU type is simulated at the start of the instance. The default setting is "SRCT_1500_Unspecified". When a different CPU type is loaded via STEP 7 or from the Virtual Memory Card, this CPU type applies. * WCHAR* in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). * IInstance** out_InstanceInterface: Pointer to a Simulation Runtime interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with NULL. The interface is created within the function. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 269 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager Return values Example C++ Runtime error code SREC_OK Condition The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. SREC_TIMEOUT The function does not return on time. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The name or the IInstance pointer is invalid. SREC_LIMIT_REACHED There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. SREC_ALREADY_EXISTS An instance with this name already exists. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); // Example: How To Create And Register An Instance // And To Get An Interface Of The Instance The Same Time IInstance* psa = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterInstance(&psa); } Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 270 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 343 RegisterInstance() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters IInstance RegisterInstance(); IInstance RegisterInstance( string in_InstanceName ); IInstance RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType ); IInstance RegisterInstance( ECPUType in_CPUType string in_InstanceName ); * ECPUType in_CPUType: Defines which CPU type is simulated at the start of the instance. The default setting is "ECPUType.Unspecified". When a different CPU type is loaded via STEP 7 or from the Virtual Memory Card, this CPU type applies. * string in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). Return values If the function is successful, an interface of a virtual controller. Otherwise, a Null pointer. Exceptions Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout Condition The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The name is invalid. ERuntimeErrorCode.LimitReached There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.AlreadyExists An instance with this name already exists. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 271 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager RegisterCustomInstance() Registers a new instance of a virtual controller in Runtime Manager. Creates and returns an interface of this instance. Table 7- 344 RegisterCustomInstance() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterCustomInstance( WCHAR* in_VplcDll, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode RegisterCustomInstance( WCHAR* in_VplcDll, WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); * WCHAR* in_VplcDll: The complete path to the DLL of the virtual controller that Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Instance.exe loads at PowerOn. * * Return values WCHAR* in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). IInstance** out_InstanceInterface: Pointer to a Simulation Runtime interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with NULL. The interface is created within the function. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT SREC_LIMIT_REACHED SREC_ALREADY_EXISTS Example C++ The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The DLL name, the instance name or the IInstance pointer is invalid. There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. An instance with this name already exists. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); // Example: How To Create And Register An Instance // And To Get An Interface Of The Instance The Same Time IInstance* psa = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->RegisterCustomInstance("C:\\Temp\\vplc.dll"); } Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101). S7-PLCSIM Advanced 272 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 345 RegisterCustomInstance() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters IInstance RegisterCustomInstance( string in_VplcDll ); IInstance RegisterCustomInstance( string in_VplcDll, string in_InstanceName ); * string in_VplcDll: The complete path to the DLL of the virtual controller that Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.Instance.exe loads at PowerOn. * Return values Exceptions string in_InstanceName: Name to be assigned to the instance. Every instance must have a unique name. If no name is assigned when registering a new instance, the instance is given the name "Instance_#" (# is the ID of the instance). If this name already exists, the name "Instance_#.#" is used, in which the second # is a counter that is incremented until the name is unique. The length of the name must be less than DINSTANCE_NAME_LENGTH. See Data types (Page 306). If the function is successful, an interface of a virtual controller; otherwise a Null pointer. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The name or the ID is invalid. ERuntimeErrorCode.LimitReached ERuntimeErrorCode.AlreadyExists There are already 16 instances registered in Runtime Manager. An instance with this name already exists. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 273 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager CreateInterface() Creates and returns an interface of an already registered instance of a virtual controller. The instance could have been registered via the application or another application that uses the Simulation Runtime API. Table 7- 346 CreateInterface() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeErrorCode CreateInterface( WCHAR* in_InstanceName, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); ERuntimeErrorCode CreateInterface( INT32 in_InstanceID, IInstance** out_InstanceInterface ); * INT32 in_InstanceID: The ID of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. * WCHAR* in_InstanceName: The name of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. * Return values IInstance** out_InstanceInterface: Pointer to a Simulation Runtime interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with NULL. The interface is created within the function. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVE D SREC_TIMEOUT SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST Example C++ The function is successful. The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. The function does not return on time. The name, the ID or the IInstance- pointer is invalid. The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa1 = NULL; IInstance* psa2 = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->CreateInterface(0, &psa1); Example C++ result = api->CreateInterface(0, &psa2); // psa2 will be the same as psa1 } ISimulationRuntimeManager * api = NULL; ERuntimeErrorCode result = Initialize(&api); IInstance* psa = NULL; if (result == SREC_OK) { result = api->CreateInterface(L"My SimulationRuntime Instance", &psa); } Note Native C++ If you no longer require the interface, delete it. See DestroyInterface() (Page 101) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 274 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 347 CreateInterface() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters IInstance CreateInterface( string in_InstanceName ); IInstance CreateInterface( INT32 in_InstanceID ); * INT32 in_InstanceID: The ID of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. * string in_InstanceName: The name of the registered instance from which you want to receive the interface. Return values Exceptions If the function is successful, an interface of a virtual controller; otherwise a Null pointer. Siemens.Simatic.Simulation.Runtime.SimulationRuntimeException Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.InterfaceRemoved The interface is disconnected from the remote Runtime Manager. ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout The function does not return on time. ERuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument The name or the ID is invalid. ERuntimeErrorCode.DoesNotExists 7.7.3 Events 7.7.3.1 OnConnectionLost events The instance is not registered in Runtime Manager. Description The event is triggered when the connection to the Remote Runtime Manager has been terminated. OnConnectionLost Registers or unregisters an event handler method. Table 7- 348 OnConnectionLost - .NET (C#) Syntax event Delegate_IRRTM OnConnectionLost; Parameters None. See Delegate_IRRTM (Page 297) Return values None Exceptions None Note The event handler method runs in a separate thread. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 275 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager RegisterOnConnectionLostCallback() When the event occurs, the registered callback function is called. Only one callback function can be registered for the event. Registering a new callback function causes the previous callback function to be unregistered. Table 7- 349 RegisterOnConnectionLostCallback() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConnectionLostCallback( EventCallback_IRRTM in_CallbackFunction ); * EventCallback_IRRTM in_CallbackFunction: A callback function that subscribes to an event. See EventCallback_IRRTM (Page 285). Return values None Note The callback function runs in a separate thread. RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() When the event occurs, the registered event object is set to the signaled state. Only one event object can be registered for the event. Registration of a new event object causes the previous event object to be deleted. Table 7- 350 RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters void RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent(); void RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent( HANDLE* in_Event ); * None: An internal event object is registered. * HANDLE* in_Event: A handle for a user-specific event object. The event object is registered. Return values None Table 7- 351 RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void RegisterOnConnectionLostEvent(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 276 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager UnregisterOnConnectionLostCallback() Unregisters the callback function. When the event occurs, no callback function is called. Table 7- 352 UnregisterOnConnectionLostCallback() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConnectionLostCallback(); Parameters None Return values None UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() Unregisters the event object. Table 7- 353 UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - Native C++ Syntax void UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent(); Parameters None Return values None Table 7- 354 UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax void UnregisterOnConnectionLostEvent(); Parameters None Return values None WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() The function blocks the program until the registered event object is in the signaled state or the timeout interval is exceeded. Table 7- 355 WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() - Native C++ Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent(); bool WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent( UINT32 in_Time_ms ) ; * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UINT32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 277 User interfaces (API) 7.7 API IRemoteRuntimeManager Table 7- 356 WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent() - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters bool WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent(); bool WaitForOnConnectionLostEvent( UInt32 in_Time_ms ) ; * None: The time limit is set to INFINITE. * UInt32 in_Time_ms: Value for the time limit in milliseconds. Return values * * true: If the event object was set to the signaled state. false: If no event was received during the defined time limit. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 278 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8 Data types Note Unsupported data types The Runtime API does not support the STRING and WSTRING data types. Supported data types In PLCSIM Advanced V2.0, the Runtime API supports the data types of the S7-1500 CPUs. Converting data types When writing, data types are not transferred BCD-coded but mapped onto primitive data types. The data types Counter, Date and Time must be transferred to the API BDC-coded so that the values are written to the counter and no incorrect values are returned when reading. For these data types, you must perform a BCD conversion before writing and a BCD backconversion after reading. Example: If the value 999 is transferred to the API as 2457H, then Write modifies the value 2457H to 999. Without BCD conversion, there is no UInt16 value and Write writes no value at all. Additional information For information on data types and conversion, refer to section "Data types" in the STEP 7 Professional (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747136) System Manual. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 279 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.1 DLL import functions (Native C++) 7.8.1.1 ApiEntry_Initialize Description Type of the central entry point for the API library (DLL). Table 7- 357 ApiEntry_Initialize - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef ERuntimeErrorCode(*ApiEntry_Initialize)( ISimulationRuntimeManager** out_RuntimeManagerInterface ); * ISimulationRuntimeManager** out_SimulationRuntimeManagerInterface: Pointer to a Runtime Manager interface pointer. The pointer must be initialized with NULL. The interface is created within the function. * Return values UINT32 in_InterfaceVersion: Version of the API interface to be downloaded: API_DLL_INTERFACE_VERSION. Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT SREC_WRONG_VERSION SREC_CONNECTION_ERROR 7.8.1.2 The pointer to the Runtime Manager interface is NULL. The version of the interface in use does not match the version of the API library (DLL). Unable to establish a connection to the Runtime Manager. ApiEntry_DestroyInterface Description Type of the entry point for DestroyInterface (Page 101). Table 7- 358 ApiEntry_DestroyInterface - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef ERuntimeErrorCode(*ApiEntry_DestroyInterface)( IBaseInterface* in_Interface ); * IBaseInterface* in_Interface: The interface to be deleted. Return values Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT The pointer to the interface is NULL. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 280 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2 Event callback functions (Native C++) 7.8.2.1 EventCallback_VOID Description Table 7- 359 EventCallback_VOID - Native C++ Syntax 7.8.2.2 typedef void (*EventCallback_VOID)(); Parameters None Return values None EventCallback_II_SREC_ST Description Table 7- 360 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 281 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.3 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS Description Table 7- 361 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, EOperatingState in_PrevState, EOperatingState in_OperatingState ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * EOperatingState in_PrevState: The operating state before the change. * EOperatingState in_OperatingState: The current operating state. Return values None Error codes Runtime error code Condition SREC_OK The function is successful. SREC_WARNING_TRIAL_MODE_ACTIVE SREC_LICENSE_NOT_FOUND SREC_COMMUNICATION_INTERFACE_NOT _AVAILABLE No license available. You can use the instance without restrictions with the Trial License. Afterwards, the instance is shut down. Test mode has expired. A problem has occurred with the selected communication interface. Check your settings. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 282 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.4 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM Description Table 7- 362 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, ELEDType in_LEDType, ELEDMode in_LEDMode, ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * ELEDType in_LEDType: The LED type that changed its state. * ELEDMode in_LEDMode: The new state of the LED display. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 283 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.5 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 Description Table 7- 363 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, UINT32 in_PipId, INT64 in_TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns, INT64 in_TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns, UINT32 in_SyncPointCount ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 in_PipId: The ID of the process image partition (PIP) that triggers this event. 0 for the cycle control point (End of cycle). * INT64 in_TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of the same process image partition ID was reached. For the time-controlled operating modes (Page 80): The runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing() function. * INT64 in_TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of any process image partition ID was reached. For the time-controlled operating modes: The runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing() function. * UINT32 in_SyncPointCount: The number of synchronization points since the last event. If the events are triggered faster than they are received, multiple events are combined into one event. In this case, this value contains the number of cycles since the last event was received. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 284 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.6 EventCallback_IRRTM Description Table 7- 364 EventCallback_IRRTM - Native C++ Syntax typedef void (*EventCallback_IRRTM)( IRemoteRuntimeManager* in_Sender ); Parameters * Return values None IRemoteRuntimeManager* in_Sender: An interface of the remote Runtime Manager that receives this event. 7.8.2.7 EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 Description Table 7- 365 EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters ERuntimeConfigChanged in_RuntimeConfigChanged, UINT32 in_Param1, UINT32 in_Param2, INT32 in_Param3 ); ERuntimeConUInt32 UInt32 figChanged in_Param1 in_Param2 in_RuntimeConfi gChanged SRCC_INSTANCE_R EGISTERED Int32 in_Param3 SRCC_INSTANCE_U NREGISTERED - - SRCC_CONNECTION _OPENED ID of the unregistered instance IP of the remote Runtime Manager Port of the remote Runtime Manager IP of the remote Runtime Manager Port of the remote Runtime Manager - The open port - - - - - SRCC_CONNECTION _CLOSED Return values SRCC_PORT_OPENE D SRCC_PORT_CLOSE D ID of the registered instance - None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 285 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.8 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 Description Table 7- 366 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, EInstanceConfigChanged in_InstanceConfigChanged, UINT32 in_Param1, UINT32 in_Param2, UINT32 in_Param3, UINT32 in_Param4 ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. EInstanceConfigChanged in_Instance ConfigChanged SRICC_HARDW ARE_SOFTWAR E CHANGED SRICC_IP_CH ANGED Return values UINT32 in_Param1 UINT32 in_Param2 UINT32 in_Param3 UINT32 in_Param4 - - - - The ID of the interface The new IP The new subnet mask The new standard gateway None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 286 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.9 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI Description Table 7- 367 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, SDataRecordInfo in_DataRecordInfo ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * SDataRecordInfo in_DataRecordInfo: The structure SDataRecordInfo contains the following information: Return values - The HW identifier from which the CPU wants to read the data record - The index of the collected data record - The maximum size of the data record which the IO device can transfer. None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 287 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.10 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDR Description Table 7- 368 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDR - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDR)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, SDataRecord in_DataRecord ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * SDataRecord in_DataRecord: The structure SDataRecord contains the following information: Return values - The HW identifier to which the CPU wants to write the data record - The index of the supplied data record - Size of data record - The data record None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 288 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.11 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 Description Table 7- 369 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SYSTEMTIME, UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier, EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType, UINT32 in_SequenceNumber ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SYSTEMTIME: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the pull/plug event. * EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events for S7 modules, see EPullOrPlugEventType (Page 344). * UINT32 in_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Note In a real hardware system the IO controller uses the sequence number to check if it has lost a hardware interrupt. During the simulation, the sequence number creates the relation between interrupt request and the associated acyclic alarm. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 289 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.12 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 Description Table 7- 370 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier, UINT32 in_Channel, EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType, UINT32 in_SequenceNumber ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: * SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime: A possible error code. The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the IO module that sends the process event. * UINT32 in_Channel: The channel of the IO module which sends the process event. * EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events for S7 modules, see EProcessEventType (Page 344). * UINT32 in_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Note In a real hardware system the IO controller uses the sequence number to check if it has lost a hardware interrupt. During the simulation, the sequence number creates the relation between interrupt request and the associated acyclic alarm. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 290 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.13 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 Description Table 7- 371 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier); ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SYSTEMTIME: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which generates the status, update or Profile event. The identifier must belong to a hardware component in the currently loaded project. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 291 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.14 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 Description Table 7- 372 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier), UINT32 in_SequenceNumber ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SYSTEMTIME: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the diagnostics event. * UINT32 in_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Note In a real hardware system the IO controller uses the sequence number to check if it has lost a hardware interrupt. During the simulation, the sequence number creates the relation between interrupt request and the associated acyclic alarm. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 292 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.2.15 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET Description Table 7- 373 EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET - Native C++ Syntax Parameters typedef void (*EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET)( IInstance* in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, SYSTEMTIME in_SystemTime, UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier, ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType ); * IInstance* in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * SYSTEMTIME in_SYSTEMTIME: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the diagnostics event. * ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType: A value from the list of predefined RackOrStationFault event types. See ERackOrStationFaultType (Page 346). Return values None 7.8.3 Delegate definitions (managed code) 7.8.3.1 Delegate_Void Description Table 7- 374 Delegate_Void - .NET (C#) Syntax delegate void Delegate_Void(); Parameters None Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 293 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.2 Delegate_II_EREC_DT Description Table 7- 375 Delegate_II_EREC_DT - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. Return values 7.8.3.3 None Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS Description Table 7- 376 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, EOperatingState in_PrevState, EOperatingState in_OperatingState ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * EOperatingState in_PrevState: The operating state before the change. * EOperatingState in_OperatingState: The current operating state. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 294 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.4 Return values None Error codes Runtime error code Condition ERuntimeErrorCode.OK The function is successful. ERuntimeErrorCode.WarningTrialModeActive No license available. You can use the instance without restrictions with the Trial License. Afterwards, the instance is shut down. ERuntimeErrorCode.LicenseNotFound ERuntimeErrorCode.CommunicationInterfaceNotAv ailable Test mode has expired. A problem has occurred with the selected communication interface. Check your settings. Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM Description Table 7- 377 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, ELEDType in_LEDType, ELEDMode in_LEDMode, ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * ELEDType in_LEDType: The LED type that changed its state. * ELEDMode in_LEDMode: The new state of the LED display. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 295 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.5 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 Description Table 7- 378 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32 ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, UInt32 in_PipId, Int64 in_TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns, Int64 in_TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns, UInt32 in_SyncPointCount ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 in_PipId: The ID of the process image partition (PIP) that triggers this event. 0 for the cycle control point (End of cycle). * Int64 in_TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of the same process image partition ID was reached. Or the process time for the time-controlled operating modes (Page 80). * Int64 in_TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of any process image partition ID was reached. Or the process time for the time-controlled operating modes (Page 80). * UInt32 in_SyncPointCount: The number of synchronization points since the last event. If the events are triggered faster than they are received, multiple events are combined into one event. In this case, this value contains the number of cycles since the last event was received. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 296 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.6 Delegate_IRRTM Description Table 7- 379 Delegate_IRRTM - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_IRRTM( IRemoteRuntimeManager in_Sender, ); * IRemoteRuntimeManager in_Sender: An interface of the remote Runtime Manager that receives this event. Return values 7.8.3.7 None Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 Description Table 7- 380 Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32 - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32( ERuntimeConfigChanged in_RuntimeConfigChanged, UInt32 in_Param1, UInt32 in_Param2, Int32 in_Param3 ); ERuntimeConUInt32 UInt32 figChanged in_Param1 in_Param2 in_RuntimeConfi gChanged InstanceRegistered ID of the registered instance InstanceUnregistered - - ConnectionOpened IP of the Remote Runtime Manager Port of the remote Runtime Manager IP of the Remote Runtime Manager Port of the remote Runtime Manager - The open port - - - - - ConnectionClosed PortOpened Return values Int32 in_Param3 PortClosed None ID of the unregistered instance - S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 297 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.8 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 Description Table 7- 381 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32 - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SRICC_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32_UINT32( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, EInstanceConfigChanged in_InstanceConfigChanged, UInt32 in_Param1, UInt32 in_Param2, UInt32 in_Param3, UInt32 in_Param4 ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. EInstanceConfigChanged in_Instance ConfigChanged HardwareSoftwareChanged IPChanged Return values UInt32 in_Param1 UInt32 in_Param2 UInt32 in_Param3 UInt32 in_Param4 - - - - The ID of the interface The new IP The new subnet mask The new standard gateway None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 298 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.9 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI Description Table 7- 382 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, SDataRecordInfo in_DataRecordInfo ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * SDataRecordInfo in_DataRecordInfo: The structure SDataRecordInfo contains the following information: Return values - The HW identifier to which the CPU wants to write the data record - The index of the supplied data record - Size of data record - The data record None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 299 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.10 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR Description Table 7- 383 Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, SDataRecord in_DataRecord ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * SDataRecord in_DataRecord: The structure SDataRecord contains the following information: Return values - The HW identifier to which the CPU wants to write the data record - The index of the supplied data record - Size of data record - The data record None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 300 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.11 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 Description Table 7- 384 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32 - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier, EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType, UInt32 in_SequenceNumber ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the pull/plug event. * EPullOrPlugEventType in_PullOrPlugEventType: A value from the list of predefined types of events for S7 modules, see EPullOrPlugEventType (Page 344). * UInt32 in_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to the PROFINET standard, the sequence number is only 10 bits wide, from 1 to 0x7FF. When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Note In a real hardware system the IO controller uses the sequence number to check if it has lost a hardware interrupt. During the simulation, the sequence number creates the relation between interrupt request and the associated acyclic alarm. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 301 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.12 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 Description Table 7- 385 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32 - Native C++ Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier UInt32 in_Channel, EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType, UInt32 in_SequenceNumber ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule that sends the process event. * UInt32 in_Channel: * EProcessEventType in_ProcessEventType: The channel of the IO module which sends the process event. A value from the list of predefined types of events for S7 modules, see EProcessEventType (Page 344). * UInt32 in_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Note In a real hardware system the IO controller uses the sequence number to check if it has lost a hardware interrupt. During the simulation, the sequence number creates the relation between interrupt request and the associated acyclic alarm. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 302 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.13 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 Description Table 7- 386 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The ID of the module which generates the status event, update event or profile event. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 303 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.14 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 Description Table 7- 387 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32 - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32 ( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier UInt32 in_SequenceNumber ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the diagnostics entry. * UInt32 in_SequenceNumber: PLCSIM Advanced assigns a unique consecutive number to each interrupt event. According to PROFINET standard the sequence number is 10 bits wide (1 to 7FFH). When the highest number is reached the numbering starts again at 1. Note In a real hardware system the IO controller uses the sequence number to check if it has lost a hardware interrupt. During the simulation, the sequence number creates the relation between interrupt request and the associated acyclic alarm. Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced 304 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.3.15 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET Description Table 7- 388 Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET - .NET (C#) Syntax Parameters delegate void Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET( IInstance in_Sender, ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode, DateTime in_DateTime, UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier, ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType ); * IInstance in_Sender: An interface of the instance that receives this event. * ERuntimeErrorCode in_ErrorCode: A possible error code. * DateTime in_DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 in_HardwareIdentifier: The hardware identifier of the module or submodule which sends the diagnostics entry. * ERackOrStationFaultType in_EventType: A value from the list of predefined RackOrStationFault event types. See ERackOrStationFaultType (Page 346). Return values None S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 305 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.4 Definitions and constants The following identifiers are used in the API: Table 7- 389 Definitions - Native C++ Identifier DINSTANCE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH Value Description 64 The unique name of an instance must be less than this value. DSTORAGE_PATH_MAX_LENGTH 130 The maximum path length to the virtual memory card. Including ZERO termination. DTAG_NAME_MAX_LENGTH 300 The maximum length of the name of a PLC tag. Including ZERO termination. DTAG_ARRAY_DIMENSION 6 The maximum number of dimension for a multidimensional field. 128 DCONTROLLER_SHORT_DESIGNATION_MA X_LENGTH The maximum length of the controller name. Including ZERO termination. 32 DALARM_NOTIFICATION_MAX_DIAG_EVE NTS The maximum length of the abbreviation of the controller (CPU type). Including ZERO termination. 100 The maximum number of diagnostic events that are sent in a diagnostic alarm. DPROCESS_EVENT_NAME_MAX_LENGTH 123 The maximum length of the name for the process event. Including NULL termination. DPROCESS_EVENTS_MAX_ITEMS 256 The maximum number of configurable process events. DCONTROLLER_NAME_MAX_LENGTH DMODULE_STATE_OK 0 AlarmNotification: Module status OK 1 AlarmNotification: Module status faulty DMODULE_STATE_MAINT_DEMANDED 2 AlarmNotification: Maintenance demanded DMODULE_STATE_MAINT_REQUIRED 4 AlarmNotification: Maintenance required DMODULE_STATE_ERROR Table 7- 390 Constants - .NET (C#) Identifier RuntimeConstants.InstanceNameLength Value Description 64 The unique name of an instance must be less than this value. RuntimeConstants.StoragePathMaxLength 130 The maximum path length to the virtual memory card. Including ZERO termination. RuntimeConstants.TagNameMaxLength 300 The maximum length of the name of a PLC tag. Including ZERO termination. RuntimeConstants.TagArrayDimension 6 The maximum number of dimension for a multidimensional field. 128 The maximum length of the controller name. Including ZERO termination. 32 ModuleState.Ok The maximum length of the abbreviation of the controller (CPU type). Including ZERO termination. 0 AlarmNotification: Module status OK ModuleState.Error 1 AlarmNotification: Module status faulty 2 AlarmNotification: Maintenance demanded 4 AlarmNotification: Maintenance required RuntimeConstants.ControllerNameMaxLength RuntimeConstants.ControllerShortDesignatio nMaxLength ModuleState. MaintenanceDemanded ModuleState. MaintenanceRequired S7-PLCSIM Advanced 306 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.5 Unions (Native C++) 7.8.5.1 UIP Description Contains an IPv4 address. Table 7- 391 UIP - Native C++ Syntax Member union UIP { DWORD IP; BYTE IPs[4]; }; * DWORD IP: The IP address in a single DWORD * BYTE IPs[4]: The four elements of IP in descending order Example Example for an IP address: 192.168.0.1 UIP.IP = 0xC0A80001 UIP.IPs[3] = 192, UIP.IPs[2] = 168, UIP.IPs[1] = 0, UIP.IPs[0] = 1 S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 307 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.5.2 UDataValue Description Contains the value of a PLC tag. Table 7- 392 UDataValue - Native C++ Syntax Member union UDataValue { bool Bool; INT8 Int8; INT16 Int16; INT32 Int32; INT64 Int64; UINT8 UInt8; UINT16 UInt16; UINT32 UInt32; UINT64 UInt64; float Float; double Double; CHAR Char; WCHAR WChar; }; * bool Bool: * INT8 Int8: * INT16 Int16: 1 byte boolean value 1 byte integer with sign 2 byte integer with sign * INT32 Int32: 4 byte integer with sign * INT64 Int64: * UINT8 UInt8: * UINT16 UInt16: 8 byte integer with sign 1 byte integer without sign 2 byte integer without sign * UINT32 UInt32: 4 byte integer without sign * UINT64 UInt64: 8 byte integer without sign * float Float: * double Double: 4 byte floating-point value 8 byte floating-point value * CHAR Char: 1 byte value character * WCHAR WChar: 2 byte value character S7-PLCSIM Advanced 308 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6 Structures 7.8.6.1 SDataValue Description The structure contains the value and type of a PLC tag. Table 7- 393 SDataValue - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SDataValue { UDataValue Value; EPrimitiveDataType Type; }; * UDataValue Value: The value of the PLC tags * EPrimitiveDataType Type: Type of PLC tag S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 309 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 394 SDataValue - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SDataValue { bool Bool { get; set; } Int8 Int8 { get; set; } Int16 Int16 { get; set; } Int32 Int32 { get; set; } Int64 Int64 { get; set; } UInt8 UInt8 { get; set; } UInt16 UInt16 { get; set; UInt32 UInt32 { get; set; UInt64 UInt64 { get; set; float Float { get; set; } double Double { get; set; sbyte Char { get; set; } char WChar { get; set; } } } } } EPrimitiveDataType Type { get; set; } } * bool Bool: * Int8 Int8: 1 byte boolean value 1 byte integer with sign * Int16 Int16: 2 byte integer with sign * Int32 Int32: * Int64 Int64: * UntT8 UInt8: * UInt16 UInt16: 4 byte integer with sign 8 byte integer with sign 1 byte integer without sign 2 byte integer without sign * UInt32 UInt32: 4 byte integer without sign * UInt64 UInt64: 8 byte integer without sign * float Float: 4 byte floating-point value * double Double: 8 byte floating-point value * sbyte Char: 1 byte value character * char WChar: 2 byte value character * EPrimitiveDataType Type: Type of PLC tag S7-PLCSIM Advanced 310 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.2 SDVBNI Description This structure is for internal use only. Do not change this structure. Table 7- 395 SDVBNI - Native C++ Syntax struct SDVBNI Table 7- 396 SDVBNI - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.6.3 struct SDVBNI SDataValueByAddress Description This structure represents a PLC tag that is accessed via its address. Table 7- 397 SDataValueByAddress - Native C++ Syntax struct SDataValueByAddress { UINT32 Offset; UINT8 Bit; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; }; Table 7- 398 SDataValueByAddress - .NET (C#) Syntax struct SDataValueByAddress { UInt32 Offset; UInt8 Bit; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 311 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.4 SDataValueByAddressWithCheck Description This structure represents a PLC tag that is accessed via its address. Table 7- 399 SDataValueByAddressWithCheck - Native C++ Syntax struct SDataValueByAddressWithCheck { UINT32 Offset; UINT8 Bit; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; bool ValueHasChanged; }; Table 7- 400 SDataValueByAddressWithCheck - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.6.5 struct SDataValueByAddressWithCheck { UInt32 Offset; UInt8 Bit; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; bool ValueHasChanged; } SDataValueByName Description This structure represents a PLC tag that is called by its name. Table 7- 401 SDataValueByName - Native C++ Syntax struct SDataValueByName { WCHAR Name[DTAG_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; SDVBNI Internal; }; Table 7- 402 SDataValueByName - .NET (C#) Syntax struct SDataValueByName { String Name; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; SDVBNI Internal; } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 312 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.6 SDataValueByNameWithCheck Description This structure represents a PLC tag that is called by its name. Table 7- 403 SDataValueByNameWithCheck - Native C++ Syntax struct SDataValueByNameWithCheck { WCHAR Name[DTAG_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; SDVBNI Internal; bool ValueHasChanged; }; Table 7- 404 SDataValueByNameWithCheck - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.6.7 struct SDataValueByNameWithCheck { String Name; SDataValue DataValue; ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; SDVBNI Internal; bool ValueHasChanged; } SConnectionInfo Description This structure contains the IP address and port of a TCP/IP connection. Table 7- 405 SConnectionInfo - Native C++ Syntax struct SConnectionInfo { UIP IP; UINT16 Port; }; Table 7- 406 SConnectionInfo - .NET (C#) Syntax struct SConnectionInfo { SIP IP; UInt16 Port; } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 313 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.8 SInstanceInfo Description This structure contains an IPv4 address. Table 7- 407 SInstanceInfo - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SInstanceInfo { INT32 ID; WCHAR Name[DINSTANCE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; }; * INT32 ID: The ID of the instance * WCHAR Name[DINSTANCE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]: The name of the instance Table 7- 408 SInstanceInfo - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SInstanceInfo { Int32 ID; String Name; } * Int32 ID: The ID of the instance * String name: The name of the instance 7.8.6.9 SDimension Description This structure contains information about the dimension of a field. Table 7- 409 SDimension - Native C++ Syntax struct SDimension { INT32 StartIndex; UINT32 Count; }; Table 7- 410 SDimension - .NET (C#) Syntax struct SDimension { Int32 StartIndex; UInt32 Count; } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 314 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.10 STagInfo Description This structure contains information about a PLC tag. Table 7- 411 STagInfo - Native C++ Syntax Member struct STagInfo { WCHAR Name[DTAG_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; EArea Area; EDataType DataType; EPrimitiveDataType PrimitiveDataType; UINT16 Size; UINT32 Offset; UINT8 Bit; UINT8 DimensionCount; UINT32 Index; UINT32 ParentIndex; SDimension Dimension[DTAG_ARRAY_DIMENSION]; }; * WCHAR Name[DTAG_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]: The name of the tag * EArea area: The CPU area where the tag is located. * EDataType DataType: The CPU data type of the tag * EPrimitiveDataType PrimitiveDataType: The primitive data type of the tag * UINT16 size: * UINT32 offset: The size of the tag in bytes The byte offset of the tag if it is not located in a data block. * UINT8 bit: The bit offset of the tag if it is not located in a data block. * UINT8 DimensionCount: The number of dimensions of the array. 0 if it is not a field for the tag. * UINT32 index: * UINT32 ParentIndex: The index of the tag If this tag is embedded in another tag (for example, an element of a structure), this value then displays the index of the parent tag. The value is 0 if the tag has no parent tag. * SDimension Dimension[DTAG_ARRAY_DIMENSION]: Information about each dimension of the field S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 315 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 412 STagInfo - .NET (C#) Syntax Member public struct STagInfo { String Name; EArea Area; EDataType DataType; EPrimitiveDataType PrimitiveDataType; UInt16 Size; UInt32 Offset; UInt8 Bit; UInt32 Index; UInt32 ParentIndex; SDimension[] Dimension; } * String name: The name of the tag * EArea area: The CPU area where the tag is located. * EDataType DataType: * EPrimitiveDataType PrimitiveDataType: The CPU data type of the tag The primitive data type of the tag * UInt16 size: The size of the tag in bytes. * UInt32 offset: The byte offset of the tag if it is not located in a data block. * UInt8 bit: * UInt32 index: The bit offset of the tag if it is not located in a data block. The index of the tag * UInt32 ParentIndex: If this tag is embedded in another tag (for example, an element of a structure), this value then displays the index of the parent tag. The value is 0 if the tag has no parent tag. * SDimension[] Dimension: Information about each dimension of the field. Empty, if the tag is not an array. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 316 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.11 SIP Description This structure contains an IPv4 address. Table 7- 413 SIP - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SIP { byte[] IPArray { get; set; } UInt32 IPDWord { get; set; } string IPString { get; set; } } * UInt32 IPDWord: The IP address in a single DWORD * byte[] IPArray: The four elements of IP in descending order * string IPString: The IPv4 address as a string Example Example for an IP address: 192.168.0.1 SIP.IPDWord = 0xC0A80001 SIP.IPArray[3] = 192, SIP.IPArray[2] = 168, SIP.IPArray[1] = 0, SIP.IPArray[0] = 1 SIP.IPString = "192.168.0.1" 7.8.6.12 SIPSuite4 Description This structure contains an IPv4 suite. Table 7- 414 SIPSuite4 - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SIPSuite4 { UIP IPAddress; UIP SubnetMask; UIP DefaultGateway; }; * UIP IPAddress: The IP address * UIP SubnetMask: The subnet mask * UIP DefaultGateway: The standard gateway S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 317 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 415 SIPSuite4 - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SIPSuite4 { SIP IPAddress; SIP SubnetMask; SIP DefaultGateway; } * SIP IPAddress: The IP address * SIP SubnetMask: The subnet mask * SIP DefaultGateway: The standard gateway S7-PLCSIM Advanced 318 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.13 SOnSyncPointReachedResult Description This structure contains the results of the OnSyncPointReached event. Table 7- 416 SOnSyncPointReachedResult - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SOnSyncPointReachedResult { ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; SYSTEMTIME SystemTime; UINT32 PipId; INT64 TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns; INT64 TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns; UINT32 SyncPointCount; }; * ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode: A possible error code (Page 327). If no event was triggered during the defined time interval: SREC_TIMEOUT. * SYSTEMTIME SystemTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UINT32 PipId: The ID of the process image partition (PIP) that triggers this event. 0 for the cycle control point (End of cycle). * INT64 TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of the same process image partition ID was reached. For the time-controlled operating modes (Page 80): The runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing() function. * INT64 TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of any process image partition ID was reached. For the time-controlled operating modes (Page 80): The runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing() function. * UINT32 SyncPointCount: The number of synchronization points since the last event. If the events are triggered faster than they are received, multiple events are combined into one event. In this case, this value contains the number of cycles since the last event was received. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 319 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 417 SOnSyncPointReachedResult - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SOnSyncPointReachedResult { ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode; DateTime SystemTime; UInt32 PipId; Int64 TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns; Int64 TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns; UInt32 SyncPointCount; } * ERuntimeErrorCode ErrorCode: A possible error code (Page 327). If no event was triggered during the defined time interval: ERuntimeErrorCode.Timeout. * DateTime DateTime: The virtual system time of the virtual controller at the time when this event was triggered. * UInt32 PipId: The ID of the process image partition (PIP) that triggers this event. 0 for the cycle control point (End of cycle). * Int64 TimeSinceSameSyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of the same process image partition ID was reached. For the time-controlled operating modes: The runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing() function. * Int64 TimeSinceAnySyncPoint_ns: The virtual time (in nanoseconds) since the last synchronization point of any process image partition ID was reached. For the time-controlled operating modes: The runtime since the last call of the StartProcessing() function. * UInt32 SyncPointCount: The number of synchronization points since the last event. If the events are triggered faster than they are received, multiple events are combined into one event. In this case, this value contains the number of cycles since the last event was received. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 320 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.14 SDataRecordInfo Description This structure contains read/write data record information. Table 7- 418 SDataRecordInfo - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SDataRecordInfo { UINT32 HardwareId; UINT32 RecordIdx; UINT32 DataSize; }; * UINT32 HardwareId: The ID of the hardware module (hardware identifier) * UINT32 RecordIdx: The data record number * UINT32 DataSize: The data record size Table 7- 419 SDataRecordInfo - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SDataRecordInfo { UInt32 HardwareId; UInt32 RecordIdx; UInt32 DataSize; } * UInt32 ID: * UInt32 RecordIdx: The ID of the hardware module The data record number * UInt32 DataSize: The data record size S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 321 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.15 SDataRecord Description This structure contains read/write data record information and data records. Table 7- 420 SDataRecord - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SDataRecord { SDataRecordInfo Info; BYTE Data[DDATARECORD_MAX_SIZE]; }; * SDataRecordInfo Info: The data record information, see SDataRecordInfo (Page 321) * BYTE Data[DDATARECORD_MAX_SIZE]: The array length of the user data DDATARECORD_MAX_SIZE Table 7- 421 SDataRecord - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SDataRecord { UInt32 HardwareId; byte[] Data } * SDataRecordInfo Info: The data record information, see SDataRecordInfo (Page 321) * byte[] Data: The array length S7-PLCSIM Advanced 322 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.16 SConfiguredProcessEvents Description This structure contains information about the configured process events. Table 7- 422 SConfiguredProcessEvents - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SConfiguredProcessEvents { UINT16 HardwareIdentifier; UINT16 Channel; EProcessEventType ProcessEventType; WCHAR Name[DPROCESS_EVENT_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; }; * UINT16 HardwareIdentifier: The HW identifier * UINT16 Channel: The channel of the IO module which generates the process event. * EProcessEventType ProcessEventType: The type of the configured process event * WCHAR Name[DPROCESS_EVENT_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]: The name of the process event Table 7- 423 SConfiguredProcessEvents - .NET (C#) Syntax Member public struct SConfiguredProcessEvents { ushort HardwareIdentifier; ushort Channel; EProcessEventType ProcessEventType; string Name; } * ushort HardwareIdentifier: The HW identifier * ushort Channel: The channel of the IO module which generates the process event. * EProcessEventType ProcessEventType: The type of the configured process event * String name: The name of the process event S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 323 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.6.17 SDiagExtChannelDescription Description This structure contains read/write data record information and data records. Table 7- 424 SDiagExtChannelDescription - Native C++ Syntax Member struct SDiagExtChannelDescription { UINT16 ChannelNumber; UINT16 ErrorType; UINT16 ExtErrorType; EDiagSeverity Severity; EDiagProperty Direction; }; * UINT16 ChannelNumber: If the interrupt relates to a specific channel of the IO device (e.g. short circuit), this parameter must contain the number of the faulty channel. If the interrupt was generated by a module or submodule, the number of the channel must be set to 0x8000. * UINT16 ErrorType: The parameter defines error types according to PROFINET standard, see "Error types" section. * EDiagSeverity Severity: The value of the severity for the diagnostics, see EDiagSeverity (Page 346). * EDiagProperty Direction: The value for the incoming/outgoing information, see EDiagProperty (Page 345). * UINT16 ExtErrorType: This parameter provides the option of defining more details for the diagnostic interrupt. This is helpful in combination with PDEV error types which are generated for CPU-internal modules. Should be 0 by default. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 324 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 425 SDiagExtChannelDescription - .NET (C#) Syntax Member struct SDiagExtChannelDescription { UInt16 ChannelNumber; UInt16 ErrorType; UInt16 ExtErrorType; EDiagSeverity Severity; EDiagProperty Direction; }; * UInt16 ChannelNumber: If the interrupt relates to a specific channel of the IO device (e.g. short circuit), this parameter must contain the number of the faulty channel. If the interrupt was generated by a module or submodule, the number of the channel must be set to 0x8000. * UInt16 ErrorType: The parameter defines error types according to PROFINET standard, see "Error types" section. * EDiagSeverity Severity: The value of the severity for the diagnostics, see EDiagSeverity (Page 346). * EDiagProperty Direction: The value for the incoming/outgoing information, see EDiagProperty (Page 345). * UInt16 ExtErrorType: This parameter provides the option of defining more details for the diagnostic interrupt. This is helpful in combination with PDEV error types which are generated for CPU-internal modules. Should be 0 by default. Error types The following table contains important error types (ErrorType) according to PROFINET standard: Table 7- 426 Error types according to PROFINET standard Value Meaning 0x0000 Reserved / unknown error 0x0001 Short-circuit 0x0002 Undervoltage 0x0003 Overvoltage 0x0004 Overload 0x0005 Overtemperature 0x0006 Wire break 0x0007 High limit violated 0x0008: Low limit violated 0x0009 Error S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 325 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types The following table contains error types ExtChannelErrorType for ChannelErrorType "Remote mismatch": Table 7- 427 ExtChannelErrType error types 7.8.7 Value Meaning Use 0x0000 Reserved - 0x0001 to 0x7FFF Manufacturer ID Interrupt/diagnostics 0x8000 Peer name of station mismatch Interrupt/diagnostics 0x8001 Peer name of port mismatch Interrupt/diagnostics 0x8002 Peer RT_CLASS_3 mismatch Interrupt/diagnostics 0x8003 Peer MAU Type mismatch Interrupt/diagnostics Enumerations The following enumerations are available: ERuntimeErrorCode (Page 327) EArea (Page 330) EOperatingState (Page 330) EOperatingMode (Page 331) ECPUType (Page 332) ECommunicationInterface (Page 334) ELEDType (Page 334) ELEDMode (Page 335) EPrimitiveDataType (Page 335) EDataType (Page 338) ETagListDetails (Page 342) ERuntimeConfigChanged (Page 343) EInstanceConfigChanged (Page 343) EPullOrPlugEventType (Page 344) EProcessEventType (Page 344) EDirection (Page 345) EDiagProperty (Page 345) EDiagSeverity (Page 346) ERackOrStationFaultType (Page 346) See also Global functions (Native C++) (Page 106) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 326 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.1 ERuntimeErrorCode Description This enumeration contains all error codes that are used by the Simulation Runtime API. Most API functions return one of these error codes. If the function is successful, the return value is always SREC_OK. Errors are returned with negative values, and alarms with positive values. Table 7- 428 ERuntimeErrorCode - Native C++ Syntax enum ERuntimeErrorCode { SREC_ISyntaxenum ERuntimeErrorCode{ SREC_OK = 0, SREC_INVALID_ERROR_CODE = -1, SREC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED = -2, SREC_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE = -3, SREC_DOES_NOT_EXIST = -4, SREC_ALREADY_EXISTS = -5, SREC_UNKNOWN_MESSAGE_TYPE = -6, SREC_INVALID_MESSAGE_ID = -7, SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT = -8, SREC_WRONG_PIPE = -9, SREC_CONNECTION_ERROR = -10, SREC_TIMEOUT = -11, SREC_MESSAGE_CORRUPT = -12, SREC_WRONG_VERSION = -13, SREC_INSTANCE_NOT_RUNNING = -14, SREC_INTERFACE_REMOVED = -15, SREC_SHARED_MEMORY_NOT_INITIALIZED = -16, SREC_API_NOT_INITIALIZED = -17, SREC_WARNING_ALREADY_EXISTS = 18, SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED = -19, SREC_WARNING_INVALID_CALL = 20, SREC_ERROR_LOADING_DLL = -21, SREC_SIGNAL_NAME_DOES_NOT_EXIST = -22, SREC_SIGNAL_TYPE_MISMATCH = -23, SREC_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_ERROR = -24, SREC_NO_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_LOADED = -25, SREC_CONFIGURED_CONNECTION_NOT_FOUND = -26, SREC_CONFIGURED_DEVICE_NOT_FOUND = -27, S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 327 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types SREC_INVALID_CONFIGURATION = -28, SREC_TYPE_MISMATCH = -29, SREC_LICENSE_NOT_FOUND = -30, SREC_NO_LICENSE_AVAILABLE = -31, SREC_WRONG_COMMUNICATION_INTERFACE = -32, SREC_LIMIT_REACHED = -33, SREC_NO_STORAGE_PATH_SET = -34, SREC_STORAGE_PATH_ALREADY_IN_USE = -35, SREC_MESSAGE_INCOMPLETE = -36, SREC_ARCHIVE_STORAGE_NOT_CREATED = -37, SREC_RETRIEVE_STORAGE_FAILURE = -38 SREC_INVALID_OPERATING_STATE = -39, SREC_INVALID_ARCHIVE_PATH = -40, SREC_DELETE_EXISTING_STORAGE_FAILED = -41, SREC_CREATE_DIRECTORIES_FAILED = -42, SREC_NOT_ENOUGH_MEMORY = -43, SREC_WARNING_TRIAL_MODE_ACTIVE = 44, SREC_NOT_RUNNING = -45, SREC_NOT_EMPTY = -46, SREC_NOT_UP_TO_DATE = -47, SREC_COMMUNICATION_INTERFACE_NOT_AVAILABLE = -48, SREC_WARNING_NOT_COMPLETE = 49, SREC_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MISCONFIGURED = -50, SREC_RUNTIME_NOT_AVAILABLE = -51, SREC_IS_EMPTY = -52, SREC_WRONG_MODULE_STATE = -53, SREC_WRONG_MODULE_TYPE = -54, SREC_NOT_SUPPORTED_BY_MODULE = -55, SREC_INTERNAL_ERROR = -56, SREC_STORAGE_TRANSFER_ERROR = -57, SREC_ANOTHER_VARIANT_OF_PLCSIM_RUNNING = -58, SREC_ACCESS_DENIED = -59, SREC_NOT_ALLOWED_DURING_DOWNLOAD = -60 }; S7-PLCSIM Advanced 328 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 429 ERuntimeErrorCode - .NET (C#) Syntax enum ERuntimeErrorCode { OK = 0, InvalidErrorCode = -1, NotImplemented = -2, IndexOutOfRange = -3, DoesNotExist = -4, AlreadyExists = -5, UnknownMessageType = -6, InvalidMessageId = -7, WrongArgument = -8, WrongPipe = -9, ConnectionError = -10, Timeout = -11, MessageCorrupt = -12, WrongVersion = -13, InstanceNotRunning = -14, InterfaceRemoved = -15, SharedMemoryNotInitialized = -16, ApiNotInitialized = -17, WarningAlreadyExists = 18, NotSupported = -19, WarningInvalidCall = 20, ErrorLoadingDll = -21, SignalNameDoesNotExist = -22, SignalTypeMismatch = -23, SignalConfigurationError = -24, NoSignalConfigurationLoaded = -25, ConfiguredConnectionNotFound = -26, ConfiguredDeviceNotFound = -27, InvalidConfiguration = -28, TypeMismatch = -29, LicenseNotFound = -30, NoLicenseAvailable = -31, WrongCommunicationInterface = -32, LimitReached = -33, NoStartupPathSet = -34, StartupPathAlreadyInUse = -35, MesssageIncomplete = -36, ArchiveStorageNotCreated = -37, RetrieveStorageFailure = -38, InvalidOperatingState = -39, InvalidArchivePath = -40, DeleteExistingStorageFailed = -41, CreateDirectoriesFailed = -42, NotEnoughMemory = -43, WarningTrialModeActive = 44, NotRunning = -45, NotEmpty = -46, NotUpToData = -47, CommunicationInterfaceNotAvailable = -48, WarningNotComplete = 49, RuntimeNotAvailable = -51, IsEmpty = -52, WrongModuleState = -53, WrongModuleType = -54, NotSupportedByModule = -55, InternalError = -56, StorageTransferError = -57, AnotherVariantOfPlcsimRunning = -58, AccessDenied = -59, NotAllowedDuringDownload = -60 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 329 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.2 EArea Description This enumeration contains all PLC areas that contain the available PLC tags. Table 7- 430 EArea - Native C++ Syntax enum EArea { SRA_INVALID_AREA = 0, SRA_INPUT = 1, SRA_MARKER = 2, SRA_OUTPUT = 3, SRA_COUNTER = 4, SRA_TIMER = 5, SRA_DATABLOCK = 6, SRA_ENUMERATION_SIZE = 7 }; Table 7- 431 EArea - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.3 public enum EArea { InvalidArea = 0, Input = 1, Marker = 2, Output = 3, Counter = 4, Timer = 5, DataBlock = 6, } EOperatingState Description This enumeration contains all the operating states of a virtual controller. Table 7- 432 EOperatingState - Native C++ Syntax enum EOperatingState { SROS_INVALID_OPERATING_STATE = 0, SROS_OFF = 1, SROS_BOOTING = 2, SROS_STOP = 3, SROS_STARTUP = 4, SROS_RUN = 5, SROS_FREEZE = 6, SROS_SHUTTING_DOWN = 7, SROS_HOLD = 8, SROS_ENUMERATION_SIZE = 9 }; S7-PLCSIM Advanced 330 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 433 EOperatingState - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.4 enum EOperatingState { InvalidOperatingState = 0, Off = 1, Booting = 2, Stop = 3, Startup = 4, Run = 5, Freeze = 6, ShuttingDown = 7, Hold = 8 } EOperatingMode Description This enumeration contains all the operating modes of a virtual controller. Table 7- 434 EOperatingMode - Native C++ Syntax enum EOperatingMode { SROM_DEFAULT = 0, SROM_SINGLE_STEP_C = 1, SROM_SINGLE_STEP_CT = 2, SROM_TIMESPAN_SYNCHNRONIZED_C = 3, SROM_SINGLE_STEP_P = 4, SROM_TIMESPAN_SYNCHNRONIZED_P = 5, SROM_SINGLE_STEP_CP = 6, SROM_SINGLE_STEP_CPT = 7, SROM_TIMESPAN_SYNCHNRONIZED_CP = 8 }; Table 7- 435 EOperatingMode - .NET (C#) Syntax public enum EOperatingMode { Default = 0, SingleStep_C = 1, SingleStep_CT = 2, TimespanSynchronized_C = 3, SingleStep_P = 4, TimespanSynchronized_P = 5, SingleStep_CP = 6, SingleStep_CPT = 7, TimespanSynchronized_CP = 8 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 331 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.5 ECPUType Description This enumeration contains all CPU types that can be loaded in a virtual controller. Table 7- 436 ECPUType - Native C++ Syntax enum ECPUType { SRCT_1500_Unspecified = 0x000005DC, SRCT_1511 = 0x000005E7, SRCT_1511v2 = 0x010005E7, SRCT_1511v3 = 0x020005E7, SRCT_1513 = 0x000005E9, SRCT_1513v2 = 0x010005E9, SRCT_1513v3 = 0x020005E9 SRCT_1515 = 0x000005EB, SRCT_1515v2 = 0x010005EB, SRCT_1516 = 0x000005EC, SRCT_1516v2 = 0x010005EC, SRCT_1517 = 0x000005ED, SRCT_1518 = 0x000005EE, SRCT_1511C = 0x000405E7, SRCT_1511Cv2 = 0x010405E7, SRCT_1512C = 0x000405E8, SRCT_1512Cv2 = 0x010405E8, SRCT_1511F = 0x000105E7, SRCT_1511Fv2 = 0x010105E7, SRCT_1511Fv3 = 0x020105E7, SRCT_1513F = 0x000105E9, SRCT_1513Fv2 = 0x010105E9, SRCT_1513Fv3 = 0x020105E9, SRCT_1515F = 0x000105EB, SRCT_1515Fv2 = 0x010105EB, SRCT_1516F = 0x000105EC, SRCT_1516Fv2 = 0x010105EC, SRCT_1517F = 0x000105ED, SRCT_1518F = 0x000105EE, SRCT_1511T = 0x000805E7, SRCT_1515T = 0x000805EB, SRCT_1516T = 0x000805EC, SRCT_1517T = 0x000805ED, SRCT_1511TF = 0x000905E7, SRCT_1515TF = 0x000905EB, SRCT_1516TF = 0x000905EC, SRCT_1517TF = 0x000905ED, SRCT_1518ODK = 0x001005EE, SRCT_1518FODK = 0x001105EE, SRCT_1518MFP = 0x004005EE, SRCT_1518FMFP = 0x004105EE, SRCT_ET200SP_Unspecified = 0x000205DC, SRCT_1510SP = 0x000205E6, SRCT_1510SPv2 = 0x010205E6, SRCT_1512SP = 0x000205E8, SRCT_1512SPv2 = 0x010205E8, SRCT_1510SPF = 0x000305E6, SRCT_1510SPFv2 = 0x010305E6, SRCT_1512SPF = 0x000305E8, SRCT_1512SPFv2 = 0x010305E8 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 332 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 437 ECPUType - .NET (C#) Syntax enum ECPUType { CPU1500_Unspecified = 0x000005DC, CPU1511 = 0x000005E7, CPU1511v2 = 0x010005E7, CPU1513 = 0x000005E9, CPU1513v2 = 0x010005E9, CPU1511v3 = 0x020005E7, CPU1515 = 0x000005EB, CPU1515v2 = 0x010005EB, CPU1513v3 = 0x020005E9, CPU1516 = 0x000005EC, CPU1516v2 = 0x010005EC, CPU1517 = 0x000005ED, CPU1518 = 0x000005EE, CPU1511C = 0x000405E7, CPU1511Cv2 = 0x010405E7, CPU1512C = 0x000405E8, CPU1512Cv2 = 0x010405E8, CPU1511F = 0x000105E7, CPU1511Fv2 = 0x010105E7, CPU1511Fv3 = 0x020105E7, CPU1513F = 0x000105E9, CPU1513Fv2 = 0x010105E9, CPU1513Fv3 = 0x020105E9, CPU1515F = 0x000105EB, CPU1515Fv2 = 0x010105EB, CPU1516F = 0x000105EC, CPU1516Fv2 = 0x010105EC, CPU1517F = 0x000105ED, CPU1518F = 0x000105EE, CPU1511T = 0x000805E7, CPU1515T = 0x000805EB, CPU1516T = 0x000805EC, CPU1517T = 0x000805ED, CPU1511TF = 0x000905E7, CPU1515TF = 0x000905EB, CPU1516TF = 0x000905EC, CPU1517TF = 0x000905ED, CPU1518ODK = 0x001005EE, CPU1518FODK = 0x001105EE, CPU1518MFP = 0x004005EE, CPU1518FMFP = 0x004105EE, CPUET200SP_Unspecified = 0x000205DC, CPU1510SP = 0x000205E6, CPU1510SPv2 = 0x010205E6, CPU1512SP = 0x000205E8, CPU1512SPv2 = 0x010205E8, CPU1510SPF = 0x000305E6, CPU1510SPFv2 = 0x010305E6, CPU1512SPF = 0x000305E8, CPU1512SPFv2 = 0x010305E8 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 333 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.6 ECommunicationInterface Description This enumeration contains the available communication interfaces of a virtual controller. Table 7- 438 ECommunicationInterface - Native C++ Syntax enum ECommunicationInterface { SRCI_NONE = 0, SRCI_SOFTBUS = 1, SRCI_TCPIP = 2, SRCI_ENUMERATION_SIZE = 3 }; Table 7- 439 ECommunicationInterface - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.7 enum ECommunicationInterface { None = 0, Softbus = 1, TCPIP = 2, } ELEDType Description This list includes all types of LEDs of a virtual controller. Table 7- 440 ELEDType - Native C++ Syntax enum ELEDType { SRLT_STOP = 0, SRLT_RUN = 1, SRLT_ERROR = 2, SRLT_MAINT = 3, SRLT_REDUND = 4, SRLT_FORCE = 5, SRLT_BUSF1 = 6, SRLT_BUSF2 = 7, SRLT_BUSF3 = 8, SRLT_BUSF4 = 9, SRLT_ENUMERATION_SIZE = 10 }; Table 7- 441 ELEDType - .NET (C#) Syntax enum ELEDType { Stop = 0, Run = 1, Error = 2 Maint = 3, Redund = 4, Force = 5, Busf1 = 6, Busf2 = 7, Busf3 = 8, Busf4 = 9 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 334 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.8 ELEDMode Description This list contains all the LED states of a virtual controller. Table 7- 442 ELEDMode - Native C++ Syntax enum ELEDMode { SRLM_OFF = 0, SRLM_ON = 1, SRLM_FLASH_FAST = 2, SRLM_FLASH_SLOW = 3, SRLM_INVALID = 4 }; Table 7- 443 ELEDMode - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.9 enum ELEDMode { Off = 0, On = 1, FlashFast = 2, FlashSlow = 3, Invalid = 4 } EPrimitiveDataType Description This list contains all the primitive data types that are used by the I/O access functions. Table 7- 444 EPrimitiveDataType - Native C++ Syntax enum EPrimitiveDataType { SRPDT_UNSPECIFIC = 0, SRPDT_STRUCT = 1, SRPDT_BOOL = 2, SRPDT_INT8 = 3, SRPDT_INT16 = 4, SRPDT_INT32 = 5, SRPDT_INT64 = 6, SRPDT_UINT8 = 7, SRPDT_UINT16 = 8, SRPDT_UINT32 = 9, SRPDT_UINT64 = 10, SRPDT_FLOAT = 11, SRPDT_DOUBLE = 12, SRPDT_CHAR = 13, SRPDT_WCHAR = 14 }; S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 335 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 445 EPrimitiveDataType - .NET (C#) enum EPrimitiveDataType { Unspecific = 0, Struct = 1, Bool = 2, Int8 = 3, Int16 = 4, Int32 = 5, Int64 = 6, UInt8 = 7, UInt16 = 8, UInt32 = 9, UInt64 = 10, Float = 11, Double = 12, Char = 13, WChar = 14 } Syntax Compatible primitive data types The following tables shows the primitive data types of the user interface (API) and the data types of the PLCSIM Advanced instance that are configured in the stored tag list. The data types that can be used as compatible are marked with "X". Table 7- 446 Compatible primitive data types - Reading API PLCSIM Advanced instance Bool Bool INT8 INT16 INT32 INT64 UINT8 UINT16 UINT32 X INT16 X X INT32 X X X INT64 X X X X X X X X X X X UINT32 X X X UINT64 X X X WChar Char WChar X UINT16 Char Double X UINT8 Double Float X INT8 Float UINT6 4 X X X X X S7-PLCSIM Advanced 336 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 447 Compatible primitive data types - Write API PLCSIM Advanced instance Bool Bool INT8 INT16 INT32 INT64 X X X X X X X X X UINT8 UINT16 UINT32 UINT6 4 X X X X X X X X X Float Double Char WChar X INT8 INT16 INT32 INT64 UINT8 X X X UINT16 UINT32 UINT64 Float Double Char WChar X X X X X X S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 337 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.10 EDataType Description This enumeration contains all the PLC data types (STEP 7). Table 7- 448 EDataType - Native C++ Syntax enum EDataType { SRDT_UNKNOWN = 0, SRDT_BOOL = 1, SRDT_BYTE = 2, SRDT_CHAR = 3, SRDT_WORD = 4, SRDT_INT = 5, SRDT_DWORD = 6, SRDT_DINT = 7, SRDT_REAL = 8, SRDT_DATE = 9, SRDT_TIME_OF_DAY = 10, SRDT_TIME = 11, SRDT_S5TIME = 12, SRDT_DATE_AND_TIME = 14, SRDT_STRUCT = 17, SRDT_STRING = 19, SRDT_COUNTER = 28, SRDT_TIMER = 29, SRDT_IEC_Counter = 30, SRDT_IEC_Timer = 31, SRDT_LREAL = 48, SRDT_ULINT = 49, SRDT_LINT = 50, SRDT_LWORD = 51, SRDT_USINT = 52, SRDT_UINT = 53, SRDT_UDINT = 54, SRDT_SINT = 55, SRDT_WCHAR = 61, SRDT_WSTRING = 62, SRDT_LTIME = 64, SRDT_LTIME_OF_DAY = 65, SRDT_LDT = 66, SRDT_DTL = 67, SRDT_IEC_LTimer = 68, SRDT_IEC_SCounter = 69, SRDT_IEC_DCounter = 70, SRDT_IEC_LCounter = 71, SRDT_IEC_UCounter = 72, SRDT_IEC_USCounter = 73, SRDT_IEC_UDCounter = 74, SRDT_IEC_ULCounter = 75, SRDT_ERROR_STRUCT = 97, SRDT NREF = 98, S7-PLCSIM Advanced 338 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types SRDT_CREF = 101, SRDT_AOM_IDENT = 128, SRDT_EVENT_ANY = 129, SRDT_EVENT_ATT = 130, SRDT_EVENT_HWINT = 131, SRDT_HW_ANY = 144, SRDT_HW_IOSYSTEM = 145, SRDT_HW_DPMASTER = 146, SRDT_HW_DEVICE = 147, SRDT_HW_DPSLAVE = 148, SRDT_HW_IO = 149, SRDT_HW_MODULE = 150, SRDT_HW_SUBMODULE = 151, SRDT_HW_HSC = 152, SRDT_HW_PWM = 153, SRDT_HW_PTO = 154, SRDT_HW_INTERFACE = 155, SRDT_HW_IEPORT = 156, SRDT_OB_ANY = 160, SRDT_OB_DELAY = 161, SRDT_OB_TOD = 162, SRDT_OB_CYCLIC = 163, SRDT_OB_ATT = 164, SRDT_CONN_ANY = 168, SRDT_CONN_PRG = 169, SRDT_CONN_OUC = 170, SRDT_CONN_R_ID = 171, SRDT_PORT = 173, SRDT_RTM = 174, SRDT_PIP = 175, SRDT_OB_PCYCLE = 192, SRDT_OB_HWINT = 193, SRDT_OB_DIAG = 195, SRDT_OB_TIMEERROR = 196, SRDT_OB_STARTUP = 197, SRDT_DB_ANY = 208, SRDT_DB_WWW = 209, SRDT_DB_DYN = 210, SRDT_DB = 257 }; S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 339 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 449 EDataType - .NET (C#) Syntax public enum EDataType { Unknown = 0, Bool = 1, Byte = 2, Char = 3, Word = 4, Int = 5, DWord = 6, DInt = 7, Real = 8, Date = 9, TimeOfDay = 10, Time = 11, S5Time = 12, DateAndTime = 14, Struct = 17, String = 19, Counter = 28, Timer = 29, IEC_Counter = 30, IEC_Timer = 31, LReal = 48, ULInt = 49, LInt = 50, LWord = 51, USInt = 52, UInt = 53, UDInt = 54, SInt = 55, WChar = 61, WString = 62, LTime = 64, LTimeOfDay = 65, LDT = 66, DTL = 67, IEC_LTimer = 68, IEC_SCounter = 69, IEC_DCounter = 70, IEC_LCounter = 71, IEC_UCounter = 72, IEC_USCounter = 73, IEC_UDCounte = 74, IEC_ULCounter = 75, ErrorStruct = 97, NREF = 98, CREF = 101, S7-PLCSIM Advanced 340 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Aom_Ident = 128, Event_Any = 129, Event_Att = 130, Event_HwInt = 131, Hw_Any = 144, Hw_IoSystem = 145, Hw_DpMaster = 146, Hw_Device = 147, Hw_DpSlave = 148, Hw_Io = 149, Hw_Module = 150, Hw_SubModule = 151, Hw_Hsc = 152, Hw_Pwm = 153, Hw_Pto = 154, Hw_Interface = 155, Hw_IEPort = 156, OB_Any = 160, OB_Delay = 161, OB_Tod = 162, OB_Cyclic = 163, OB_Att = 164, Conn_Any = 168, Conn_Prg = 169, Conn_Ouc = 170, Conn_R_ID = 171, Port = 173, Rtm = 174, Pip = 175, OB_PCycle = 192, OB_HwInt = 193, OB_Diag = 195, OB_TimeError = 196, OB_Startup = 197, DB_Any = 208, DB_WWW = 209, DB_Dyn = 210, DB = 257 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 341 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.11 ETagListDetails Description This list contains all PLC areas that can be used as a filter to update the tag table. Table 7- 450 ETagListDetails - Native C++ Syntax enum ETagListDetails { SRTLD_NONE = 0, SRTLD_IO = 1, SRTLD_M = 2, SRTLD_IOM = 3, SRTLD_CT = 4, SRTLD_IOCT = 5, SRTLD_MCT = 6, SRTLD_IOMCT = 7, SRTLD_DB = 8, SRTLD_IODB = 9, SRTLD_MDB = 10, SRTLD_IOMDB = 11, SRTLD_CTDB = 12, SRTLD_IOCTDB = 13, SRTLD_MCTDB = 14, SRTLD_IOMCTDB = 15 }; Table 7- 451 ETagListDetails - .NET (C#) Syntax enum ETagListDetails { None = 0, IO = 1, M = 2, IOM = 3, CT = 4, IOCT = 5, MCT = 6, IOMCT = 7, DB = 8, IODB = 9, MDB = 10, IOMDB = 11, CTDB = 12, IOCTDB = 13, MCTDB = 14, IOMCTDB = 15 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 342 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.12 ERuntimeConfigChanged Description This list contains all possible causes of a OnConfigurationChanged event that the Runtime Manager sends. Table 7- 452 ERuntimeConfigChanged - Native C++ Syntax enum ERuntimeConfigChanged { SRCC_INSTANCE_REGISTERED = 0, SRCC_INSTANCE_UNREGISTERED = 1 SRCC_CONNECTION_OPENED = 2, SRCC_CONNECTION_CLOSED = 3, SRCC_PORT_OPENED = 4, SRCC_PORT_CLOSED = 5 }; Table 7- 453 ERuntimeConfigChanged - .NET (C#) Syntax enum ERuntimeConfigChanged { InstanceRegistered = 0, InstanceUnregistered = 1, ConnectionOpened = 2, ConnectionClosed = 3, PortOpened = 4, PortClosed = 5 } 7.8.7.13 EInstanceConfigChanged Description This list contains all possible causes for a OnConfigurationChanged event that the virtual controller sends. Table 7- 454 EInstanceConfigChanged - Native C++ Syntax enum EInstanceConfigChanged { SRICC_HARDWARE_SOFTWARE_CHANGED = 0, SRICC_IP_CHANGED = 1 }; Table 7- 455 EInstanceConfigChanged - .NET (C#) Syntax enum EInstanceConfigChanged { HardwareSoftwareChanged = 0, IPChanged = 1 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 343 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.14 EPullOrPlugEventType Description This enumeration contains predefined types of pull/plug events for S7 modules. Table 7- 456 EPullOrPlugEventType - Native C++ Syntax enum EPullOrPlugEventType { SR_PPE_UNDEFINED = 0, SR_PPE_PULL_EVENT = 1, SR_PPE_PLUG_EVENT = 2, SR_PPE_PLUG_EVENT_ERROR_REMAINS = 3, SR_PPE_PLUG_WRONG_MODULE_EVENT = 4 }; Table 7- 457 EPullOrPlugEventType - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.15 enum EPullOrPlugEventType { Undefined = 0, Pull = 1, Plug = 2, PlugErrorRemains = 3, PlugWrongModule = 4 } EProcessEventType Description This enumeration contains predefined types of process events for S7 modules. Table 7- 458 EProcessEventType - Native C++ Syntax enum EProcessEventType { SR_PET_UNDEFINED = 0, SR_PET_RISING_EDGE = 1, SR_PET_FALLING_EDGE = 2, SR_PET_LIMIT1_UNDERRUN = 3, SR_PET_LIMIT1_OVERRUN = 4, SR_PET_LIMIT2_UNDERRUN = 5, SR_PET_LIMIT2_OVERRUN = 6 }; S7-PLCSIM Advanced 344 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types Table 7- 459 EProcessEventType - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.16 enum EProcessEventType { Undefined = 0, RisingEdge = 1, FallingEdge = 2, Limit_1_Underrun = 3, Limit_1_Overrun = 4, Limit_2_Underrun = 5, Limit_2_Overrun = 6 } EDirection Description This enumeration contains properties of the diagnostic alarm. Table 7- 460 EDirection - Native C++ Syntax enum EDirection { SRD_DIRECTION_INPUT = 0, SRD_DIRECTION_OUTPUT = 1 }; Table 7- 461 EDirection - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.17 enum EDirection { Input = 0, Output = 1 } EDiagProperty Description This enumeration contains the incoming/outgoing information of the diagnostic alarm. Table 7- 462 EDiagProperty - Native C++ Syntax enum EDiagProperty { SRP_DIAG_APPEAR = 1, SRP_DIAG_DISAPPEAR = 2 }; Table 7- 463 EDiagProperty - .NET (C#) Syntax enum EDiagProperty { Appear = 1, Disappear = 2 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 345 User interfaces (API) 7.8 Data types 7.8.7.18 EDiagSeverity Description This enumeration contains the severity of the diagnostic alarm (error, maintenance demanded, maintenance required). Table 7- 464 EDiagSeverity - Native C++ Syntax enum EDiagSeverity { SRDS_SEVERITY_FAILURE = 0, SRDS_SEVERITY_MAINTENANCE_DEMANDED = 1, SRDS_SEVERITY_MAINTENANCE_REQUIRED = 2 }; Table 7- 465 EDiagSeverity - .NET (C#) Syntax 7.8.7.19 enum EDiagSeverity { Failure = 0, MaintDemanded = 1, MaintRequired = 2 } ERackOrStationFaultType Description This enumeration contains the types of the RackOrStationFault event. Table 7- 466 ERackOrStationFaultType - Native C++ Syntax enum ERackOrStationFaultType { SR_RSF_FAULT = 0, SR_RSF_RETURN = 1 }; Table 7- 467 ERackOrStationFaultType - .NET (C#) Syntax enum ERackOrStationFaultType { Fault = 0, Return = 1 } S7-PLCSIM Advanced 346 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Restrictions 8.1 8 Overview Certain actions or events may lead to behavior in PLCSIM Advanced or in STEP 7 which deviates from that of a hardware CPU. Restrictions and possible remedies can be found in the following sections: Restrictions with fail-safe CPUs (Page 347) OPC UA server (Page 348) Web server (Page 349) Backing up and restoring the configuration of a PLCSIM Advanced instance (Page 350) Restrictions for file paths (Page 350) Restrictions for communications services (Page 351) Restrictions for instructions (Page 351) Restrictions with Motion Control (Page 352) Restrictions to local communication via Softbus (Page 354) Restrictions of security with VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) (Page 355) Error with overflow of cyclical events and motion OBs (Page 355) Deviating I/O values in the STEP 7 user program (Page 356) Multiple simulations and possible collision of IP addresses (Page 356) Lacking access to an IP address (Page 356) Simulation in standby mode (Page 356) Error installing the antivirus software from Kaspersky (Page 357) 8.2 Restrictions with fail-safe CPUs Error downloading program changes The error message "Corrupt" appears when downloading program changes to an F-CPU. The F-CPU remains in STOP mode when the "Start all" check box is selected. Remedy Deselect the "Start all" check box in the "Load results" dialog. Once the download is complete, set the CPU to RUN mode manually using the RUN button. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 347 Restrictions 8.3 OPC UA server 8.3 OPC UA server With OPC UA, data exchange is performed through an open, standardized and manufacturer-independent communication protocol. The CPU acting as the OPC UA server can communicate with OPC UA clients, for example, with HMI panels V14 and SCADA systems. For technical reasons, the security settings in PLCSIM Advanced differ from a hardware CPU. Some features are disabled for simulations or are available to a limited extent. Configuring OPC UA server Start the instances via the communication interface "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP) to use the OPC UA server. The OPC UA server functionality is not available if communication takes place via the Softbus. OPC UA security settings Based on the OPC UA security settings, the same settings can be made in STEP 7 for the hardware CPU. However, PLCSIM Advanced does not take these security settings into consideration. This ensures that the user does not have his project change to perform a simulation. Certificate Note Server certificate PLCSIM Advanced uses its own certificate in the firmware and not that of STEP 7. The certificate need not be changed for simulations. However, it does not have the same security level as a downloaded server certificate and cannot be used for secure connections! Server Security Endpoints PLCSIM Advanced only supports Security Endpoint "none". Client certificate PLCSIM Advanced does not evaluate certificates the imported and configured in STEP 7 . PLCSIM Advanced accepts all client certificates automatically. This setting cannot be changed. User authentication PLCSIM Advanced does not use the user name configured in STEP 7. Only one logon is possible as "guest" or "anonymous". User authorization for OPC UA The PLCSIM Advanced license also contains the user authorization for OPC UA. The user authorization applies for three instances. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 348 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Restrictions 8.4 Web server 8.4 Web server The Web server integrated in a CPU enables monitoring and administering of the CPU by authorized users over a network. This permits evaluation and diagnostics over long distances. Each PLCSIM Advanced instance can simulate its own Web server. The simulation of the Web server is restricted under S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0. It is not possible to back up and restore a configuration via the Web server. The freeze state of a virtual controller is not shown as an internal operating state. Configuring the Web server S7 PLCSIM Advanced Start the instances via the communication interface "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP) to use the Web server. The Web server functionality is not available if the communication is performed via the Softbus. STEP 7 Configure the Web server in STEP 7 in the CPU properties. Restricted Web server functionality Logon "PLCSIM" is preset as the user. There is no logon for users. A user configured in STEP 7 and his rights have no effect on the "PLCSIM" user. There is no access via the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS". The information may not be fully displayed on some websites due to different data handling. There is no topology information. "Online Backup&Restore" is not available. FW updates are not supported. Number of maximum connections A fixed value of 384 is displayed in the Web server for the maximum possible number of connections. Remedy The correct value can be found in the technical data for the loaded CPU. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 349 Restrictions 8.5 Backing up and restoring the configuration of a PLCSIM Advanced instance 8.5 Backing up and restoring the configuration of a PLCSIM Advanced instance Backing up and restoring the configuration As of PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 it is possible to back up and restore a PLCSIM Advanced instance. You can create as many backups as you want and store a variety of configurations for a PLCSIM Advanced instance. You perform the backup and restore in the TIA Portal as you would in a real CPU. Backup and restore via the Web server and (simulated) display are not supported. A backup that was created with PLCSIM Advanced can only be used with PLCSIM Advanced. It is not possible to restore the configuration of a real CPU with a backup from PLCSIM Advanced. Requirements The configuration of a PLCSIM Advanced instance is backed up and restored over the TCP/IP protocol, Softbus is not supported. It is only possible to restore the configuration of a PLCSIM Advanced instance with the corresponding backup from PLCSIM Advanced. 8.6 Restrictions for file paths The following restrictions apply for user interfaces which expect a path or a complete file name as the transfer parameter: Restrictions for local paths Restrictions for network paths Write permissions to system-critical directories such as the Windows directory (%Windows%) or the program directories (%Program Files%, %Program Files (x86)%) are not allowed. In this case the C++ user interface returns the error code SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT. In this case the managed user interface returns an exception with the error code RuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument. In order to be able to use network paths, you must incorporate them as a network drive. Otherwise, the C++ user interface returns the error code SREC_WRONG_ARGUMENT. The managed user interface returns an exception with the error code RuntimeErrorCode.WrongArgument. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 350 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Restrictions 8.7 Restrictions for communications services 8.7 Restrictions for communications services TUSEND / TURCV When you run the UDP blocks TUSEND and TURCV via the "PLCSIM" communication interface (Softbus), you get error code 0x80C4 at the transmission end and receiving end: Temporary communications error. The specified connection is temporarily down. Remedy Set "PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter" (TCP/IP) as the communication interface in PLCSIM Advanced. Secure TCP connections PLCSIM Advanced does not support TLS (Transport Layer Security) and has no certificate management. It is therefore not possible to establish secure TCP connections from the simulation. This means that the following connections are not supported: Secure OUC connections (Secure Open User Communication) Secure connections to a mail server using TMAIL_C HTTPS connections to the Web server 8.8 Restrictions for instructions PLCSIM Advanced simulates instructions for CPUs S7-1500 and ET 200SP as close to reality as possible. PLCSIM Advanced checks the input parameters for validity and returns outputs that are valid but do not necessarily correspond to those that a real CPU with physical inputs/outputs would return. Instructions not supported Unsupported instructions are handled as not ready, their value is always "OK". PLCSIM Advanced does not support the following instructions: DP_TOPOL PORT_CFG S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 351 Restrictions 8.9 Restrictions with Motion Control 8.9 Restrictions with Motion Control 8.9.1 MCR and EMCR There are Motion Control resources (MCR) and Extended Motion Control resources (EMCR) on each CPU that can be distributed to the technology objects. Note PLCSIM Advanced does not support the complete quantity structure of MCR und EMCR. The simulation of motion control is therefore restricted for the following CPUs: Table 8- 1 CPUs with limited Motion Control resources (MCR, EMCR) during the simulation Type CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP Motion Control resources MCR EMCR 5120 128 5120 - 5120 128 5120 - CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP CPU 1517-3 PN/DP CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP CPU 1518-4 PN/DP CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP CPU 1518-4 PN/DP ODK1 CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP ODK1 CPU 1518-4 PN/DP MFP1 CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP MFP1 1 The ODK functionality of this CPU is not simulated. Exceeding the quantity structure STEP 7 checks whether the quantity structure for a configured CPU is complied with, and alerts you when it is exceeded. When you load a project into a CPU, another message appears. Note A project that uses more MCRs / EMCRs than PLCSIM Advanced supports can be downloaded to a virtual controller. However, there is no message indicating that the quantity structure has been exceeded. Only when the user program accesses the technology objects do you recognize by the error message at the block and the value 0 of the object that motion control objects cannot be used due to an overrun of the quantity structure. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 352 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Restrictions 8.9 Restrictions with Motion Control 8.9.2 Technology modules PLCSIM Advanced simulates the real CPU, but not configured, connected technology modules or other I/O devices. It is possible to download a project with technology modules for operation of motion control. However, the built-in logic of the technology modules is not part of the simulation, which is why the associated Motion Control instructions are not supported. Additional information For more information on Motion Control, refer to the following manuals: Device manuals to support SIMATIC controllers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109744173) Function manual S7-1500 Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109739589) Function manual S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) 8.9.3 OB 91 and OB 92 If you convert a Motion Control project which contains the OB 91 and OB 92 from STEP 7 V13, then you cannot load this project to a PLCSIM Advanced. Remedy Delete OB 91 and OB 92 in the project and recompile the project. The OBs are thus created again with the simulation support required for PLCSIM Advanced. Compilation resets the properties of the blocks to the default values. Restore the required settings in the properties. S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 353 Restrictions 8.10 Restrictions to local communication via Softbus 8.10 Restrictions to local communication via Softbus Identical IP addresses for instances If the "PLCSIM" communication interface (Softbus) is set, then identical IP addresses are created automatically for all instances when creating the instances through the Control Panel. In STEP 7, only one instance is therefore displayed in the lifelist. Remedy Use the API function SetIPSuite() to assign a unique address for each instance, then all instances are displayed in STEP 7 with their IP addresses. API function SetIPSuite() (Page 139) Online and diagnostics If the "PLCSIM" (Softbus) communication interface is set, no details are displayed for the "Online and Diagnostics" function under the PROFINET interface (IP address, MAC address, etc.). See also Controller - Information and settings (Page 136) S7-PLCSIM Advanced 354 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Restrictions 8.11 Restrictions of security with VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) 8.11 Restrictions of security with VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) When you use the virtualization platform VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi), you must change the policy exception to communicate over TCP/IP. Remedy Accept the "Promiscuous mode and "Forged transmit" options for the Virtual Switch of the ESXi. NOTICE Restrictions of security For security reasons, Promiscuous mode is disabled by default. If you accept the Promiscuousmode, the real Ethernet adapter even receives telegrams that are not addressed to it. Figure 8-1 8.12 Policy exceptions for VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi) Error with overflow of cyclical events and motion OBs If your simulation contains cyclic interrupts, the queue of PLCSIM Advanced may overflow for cyclic events and for motion OBs. Due to the execution speed of PLCSIM Advanced compared to real hardware, the time required to create the diagnostics buffer entry may be longer than the time until the next cyclic interrupt. In this case, an additional entry is placed in the queue, causing another overflow. In the event of an overflow, PLCSIM Advanced provides visual information in the form of diagnostics buffer messages and a red error icon in the project tree. See also Speed up and slow down simulation (Page 75) S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 355 Restrictions 8.13 Deviating I/O values in the STEP 7 user program 8.13 Deviating I/O values in the STEP 7 user program Updated values Each value change made by a STEP 7 user program in the I/O address areas is overwritten in the cycle control point with the updated value that was written via the API functions Write...(). The API functions Read...() only return this updated value and not the value from STEP 7 for the input range. Non-updated values If the value was not updated via the API functions Write...(), the API functions Read...() return the value from STEP 7 for the output range. See also Simulate peripheral I/O (Page 68) 8.14 Multiple simulations and possible collision of IP addresses You can simultaneously simulate multiple CPUs, but each simulated CPU interface requires a unique IP address. Make sure your CPUs have different IP addresses before starting the simulation. 8.15 Lacking access to an IP address Special feature of distributed communication If you use multiple network nodes on the same subnet through different virtual or real adapters, the operating system may search for the node on the wrong adapter. Remedy Repeat your requests or enter "arp -d " in the command line editor of Windows. 8.16 Simulation in standby mode If your computer or programming device goes into standby or hibernation mode, the simulation may be stopped. In this case, the communication between STEP 7 and PLCSIM Advanced is stopped. When your computer or programming device starts up again, the communication may need to be reestablished. In some cases, it may also be necessary to open the simulation project again. To prevent this situation, disable the standby mode on your computer or programming device. S7-PLCSIM Advanced 356 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB Restrictions 8.17 Error installing the antivirus software from Kaspersky 8.17 Error installing the antivirus software from Kaspersky When using the Anti-Virus virus scanner from Kaspersky, the network settings may not be set correctly during the installation of PLCSIM Advanced. The result is that communication via TCP/IP cannot be used (error code -50 in the Control Panel). Remedy Check your network settings as described in the sectionEnable distributed communication (Page 56). S7-PLCSIM Advanced Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB 357 A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Term ALM Automation License Manager Tool for managing license keys in STEP 7 API Application Programming Interface user interface arp Address resolution protocol BCD Binary Coded Decimal CPU Central Processing Unit (Synonym for PLC) EMCR Extended Motion Control resources ES Engineering System HMI Human Machine Interface user interface IE Industrial Ethernet GUI Graphical User Interface LAN Local Area Network Computer network that is limited to a local area. MCR Motion Control resources OB Organization Block ODK Open Development Kit OPC UA Open Platform Communications Unified Architecture PG Programming device PLC Programmable Logic Controller PN PROFINET RAM Random Access Memory RT Runtime TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TIA Totally Integrated Automation PIP Process Image Partition UTC Coordinated Universal Time VM Virtual Machine VPLC Virtual Programmable Logic Controller WinCC Windows Control Center S7-PLCSIM Advanced 358 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37039512-AB ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro Diagnostics Function Manual Overview of system 2 ___________________ diagnostics 3 ___________________ Quick start Setting and determining ___________________ 4 system diagnostics System diagnostics by ___________________ 5 means of the user program ___________________ 6 Alarms Diagnostics of the S7___________________ 7 1500R/H redundant system 10/2018 A5E03735838-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03735838-AE 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This function manual provides an overview of the diagnostics options for the automation system SIMATIC S7-1500, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL. The documentation covers the following: Illustration of the uniformity and consistency of system diagnostics Overview of the options for establishing system diagnostics information Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the function manual: General knowledge in the field of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge of working with STEP 7 and WinCC Knowledge about the use of Microsoft Windows operating systems Scope of the documentation This documentation is the basic documentation for all products of the S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems, as well as for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The product documentation is based on this documentation. What's new compared to the previous version of the function manual (09/2016 edition) What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the information? New contents Description of the diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system You obtain information in compact form on the special features of the diagnostics in the S7-1500R/H redundant systems. Section Diagnostics of the S71500R/H redundant system (Page 100) Changed contents Scope of the function manual expanded to include the S7-1500R/H redundant system Functions with which you are familiar from the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system are implemented for the S71500R/H redundant system. Redundant System S7-1500R/H System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 3 Preface What's new compared to the previous version of the function manual (06/2014 edition) What's new? New contents Changed contents What are the customer benefits? Extended functionality of the * Web server Where can I find the information? You obtain information about: - Know-how protection or copy protection of the PLC program - Program/communication load and cycle time - F-collective signatures, cycle times and runtimes of the Fruntime group(s) (with an FCPU) * You can monitor statuses, errors, technology alarms and the current values of technology objects (TOs) with the Web server. * You can read, view and save trace recordings via the Web server and thus obtain plant and project information for diagnostics and maintenance without STEP 7. * You can set four additional languages for the Web interface. Section Diagnostics information using the web server (Page 51), Web server (http://support.automation.siemen s.com/WW/view/en/59193560) function manual, Using the trace and logic analyzer function (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/64897128) function manual Assignment of different project languages extended You can assign up to three different project languages for comments and alarm texts to the user interface languages of display devices. Section Editing alarms in the alarm editor (Page 81) Scope of the function manual expanded to include CPU 1516pro-2 PN Functions that you will be familiar with from the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPUs are implemented in the CPU 1516pro-2 PN (degree of protection IP65, IP66 and IP67). Operating instructions CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/109482416) Security events added You know which types of events are registered as security events in the diagnostics buffer and can configure group alarms for them. Section CPU diagnostics buffer (Page 45) Influence of the value status explained You know which factors influence the bit Section System diagnostics using in the value status and can take this into process image inputs (Page 76) account during configuration. Note added on the maximum configuration limits of program alarms. Section Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction (Page 80). Diagnostics 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Preface Conventions STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions. This document contains illustrations of the described devices. The illustrations may differ slightly from the device supplied. You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below: Note A note contains important information on the product, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 5 Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Diagnostics 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Overview of system diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 14 3 4 5 2.1 Properties of system diagnostics ............................................................................................14 2.2 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics ..............................................................................16 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 17 3.1 Using the display of the CPU ..................................................................................................18 3.2 Using STEP 7 .........................................................................................................................20 Setting and determining system diagnostics .......................................................................................... 25 4.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics .............................................................................26 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.2.3 4.2.2.4 4.2.2.5 4.2.2.6 4.2.2.7 4.2.2.8 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.4 Options for displaying system diagnostics ..............................................................................28 Diagnostics information at the devices ...................................................................................29 LEDs .......................................................................................................................................29 Display of the CPU..................................................................................................................30 Diagnostics information in STEP 7 .........................................................................................32 Explanation of diagnostics symbols ........................................................................................32 Accessible devices (without project) .......................................................................................34 Devices & networks ................................................................................................................36 Online & diagnostics ...............................................................................................................39 "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window ..............................................................................42 CPU diagnostics buffer ...........................................................................................................45 "Online tools" task card ...........................................................................................................48 Configuring the settings for I/O modules in STEP 7 ...............................................................50 Diagnostics information using the web server ........................................................................51 Diagnostics information using the HMI diagnostics view ........................................................62 Configuring system diagnostics ..............................................................................................63 Different views of the HMI diagnostics view ...........................................................................66 Inserting system diagnostics indicator ....................................................................................69 Configuring button as system diagnostics indicator ...............................................................71 System diagnostics by means of the user program ................................................................................ 74 5.1 Options of system diagnostics in the user program ................................................................74 5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs ....................................................................76 Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 7 Table of contents 6 7 Alarms .................................................................................................................................................. 79 6.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction .......................................................... 80 6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor .......................................................................................... 81 6.3 Display of program alarms ..................................................................................................... 84 6.4 Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction ........................................... 85 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 Example program for program alarms ................................................................................... 86 Task ....................................................................................................................................... 86 Example 1: Program alarm without associated values .......................................................... 87 Example 2: Program alarm with associated value ................................................................. 92 Displaying the alarm .............................................................................................................. 99 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system................................................................................100 7.1 Online and Diagnostics view ................................................................................................ 103 7.2 "Online Tools" task card ....................................................................................................... 106 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view .................... 109 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state................................................................ 114 7.5 Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state .......................................................................... 120 7.6 System diagnostics by means of the user program ............................................................. 121 Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................122 Index ...................................................................................................................................................126 Diagnostics 8 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 9 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Diagnostics 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 11 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Diagnostics 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 13 2 Overview of system diagnostics 2.1 Properties of system diagnostics Introduction In the SIMATIC environment, the term "system diagnostics" refers to diagnostics of devices and modules. All SIMATIC products have integrated diagnostic functions that you can use to detect and remedy faults. The components automatically flag a potential fault in the operation and provide detailed information. You can minimize unscheduled standstill times with plant-wide diagnostics. The SIMATIC automation system monitors the following states in the running plant: Device failure/recovery Insert/remove event Module fault I/O access error Channel fault Parameter assignment error Failure of the external auxiliary voltage Properties of SIMATIC system diagnostics Integrated as standard in the hardware System-wide across bus limits Automatic localization of the error source Automatic output of the cause of the error in plain text Plant-wide diagnostics of all components Archiving and logging of alarms Configurability of alarms Diagnostics 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Overview of system diagnostics 2.1 Properties of system diagnostics Consistent diagnostics from the field level all the way to the management level The various diagnostics media give you a uniform view of maintenance-related information of every automation component in the plant: System status (module and network status, alarms for system errors) are available plant-wide in a uniform display. Figure 2-1 Overview of system diagnostics in a plant Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 15 Overview of system diagnostics 2.2 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics 2.2 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics System diagnostics is also possible in STOP The system diagnostics is integrated in the firmware of the CPU and works independently of the cyclic user program. This means it is also available in the STOP CPU operating mode. Faults are detected immediately and signaled to the higher-level HMI devices, the Web server and the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU, even in STOP mode. This makes system diagnostics consistent with the actual plant state at all times. Uniform display concept All clients of a system are provided with diagnostics information by a uniform mechanism. The same system diagnostics information is used regardless of the display medium. Step Description The device detects an error and sends diagnostics data to the assigned CPU. The CPU informs the connected display media. The display of the system diagnostics is updated. Figure 2-2 Sequence of the system diagnostics Diagnostics 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Quick start 3 Introduction The following chapters of this documentation describe the different options for establishing system diagnostics. All described options can be used independently of one another. This chapter gives you an overview of the basic procedure to get initial diagnostics information fast. Note System diagnostics is generally available for the devices of the SIMATIC series. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 17 Quick start 3.1 Using the display of the CPU 3.1 Using the display of the CPU The display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU offers a fast and direct option to get diagnostics information. You can call up status information in different menus on the display. Requirements A project has been created. The project has been downloaded to the CPU. Determining diagnostics information using the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU To determine diagnostics information using the display, follow these steps: 1. Select the "Diagnostics" menu on the display. 2. Select the "Diagnostics buffer" command from the "Diagnostics" menu. Figure 3-1 Display of SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU Diagnostics 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Quick start 3.1 Using the display of the CPU Result The diagnostics events are displayed in the diagnostics buffer in the sequence in which they occur. Figure 3-2 Display of the diagnostics buffer in the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU Note Automatic updating of diagnostics information You set automatic updating of the diagnostics information under: "Display" > "DiagnosticRefresh". Additional information You can find information about the configuration of alarms in the section Configuring alarms for system diagnostics (Page 26). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 19 Quick start 3.2 Using STEP 7 3.2 Using STEP 7 Getting started with STEP 7 gives you fast access to detailed diagnostics information. Requirements A project has been created. The project has been downloaded to the CPU. An error has occurred. The programming device must be able to establish a connection to the CPU via an interface. Determining diagnostics information using STEP 7 To determine diagnostics information using STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Open the respective project in STEP 7. 2. Open the portal view of STEP 7. 3. Select the "Online & Diagnostics" portal. 4. Select the "Online status" action. The "Select device" dialog opens. The dialog is an image of the configured devices in the project. Figure 3-3 Device selection for online connection in the portal view 5. Activate the "Go online" option button for the device that you want to use to establish an online connection. 6. Click on the "Go online" button. Diagnostics 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Quick start 3.2 Using STEP 7 7. The "Go online" dialog opens. Figure 3-4 Establishing an online connection 8. Make the settings for the interface. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 21 Quick start 3.2 Using STEP 7 9. Click on the "Go online" button. The project view of STEP 7 opens. The network view is opened in the work area. The symbols in the project tree provide initial information about the faulty modules. Figure 3-5 Display of the fault in the network view Diagnostics 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Quick start 3.2 Using STEP 7 10.Double-click the device which displays an alarm message to access the faulty module directly. This is the CPU in the example. The device view of the CPU is opened in the work area. In this view you can see directly in which module the error has occurred. Figure 3-6 Display of the faulty module in the device view 11.Open the "Diagnostics" tab and the subordinate "Device information" tab in the Inspector window for a more detailed error description. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 23 Quick start 3.2 Using STEP 7 Result The link in the "Details" table column takes you to the online and diagnostics view of the device and to the diagnostics buffer there, for example. This includes more information on all diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred. Figure 3-7 Diagnostics buffer with detailed error description Note Symbols and their meaning You can find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics symbols (Page 32) and in the online help for STEP 7. Diagnostics 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4 Introduction System diagnostics is generally available for the devices of the SIMATIC series. In the properties of each individual CPU, you can specify if you want to receive alarms for system diagnostics on your display device. Alarms are provided on the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU, the CPU Web server and the HMI device. Alarms are enabled by default. If you do not want to receive alarms for system diagnostics on your display devices, you can disable the sending of alarms. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 25 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics 4.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics Predefined alarm texts are available for establishing the system diagnostics. Requirements STEP 7 is open. A project is open. Procedure To make alarm settings for system diagnostics of the project in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Common data" folder in the project tree. 2. Double-click the "System diagnostics settings" entry. You now have access to the alarm settings. System diagnostics is enabled by default. System diagnostics cannot be disabled for the use of a CPU from the SIMATIC S7-1500 product series. Figure 4-1 Properties of system diagnostics and alarm settings 3. In the settings, specify the alarm category that is to be displayed and if it needs to be acknowledged. The check boxes in the "Activation" column are enabled by default. When you disable all check boxes, the status of the HMI system diagnostics view is still updated with the "Info Report" functionality. Diagnostics 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics Result You have configured the alarms for system diagnostics of the project in STEP 7. The settings are saved with the project and become effective after the compiling and downloading of the hardware configuration to the involved components. Maintenance events (maintenance demanded, maintenance required) are entered in the alarm buffer of the CPU just like any other event. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 27 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Example This section includes a diagnostics example to show how system diagnostics is established with the help of different display options. The example includes a CPU from the SIMATIC S7-1500 product series that is connected to an ET 200S distributed I/O system and an HMI Comfort Panel via PROFINET. Figure 4-2 System diagnostics display options The following sections include figures that illustrate how diagnostics information is displayed with the help of different display options. Using the LEDs on the hardware (Page 29) Local error analysis via the display of the CPU (Page 30) Using STEP 7 as of V12 (Page 32) Remote diagnostics using the Web server (Page 51) Stationary system diagnostics using the HMI diagnostics view (Page 62) Diagnostics 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.1 Diagnostics information at the devices 4.2.1.1 LEDs Overview All hardware components, such as CPUs, interface modules and modules, provide information about their operating mode as well as internal and external errors through their LEDs. Diagnostics by means of LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. The graphics below include examples for the arrangement of LEDs on some modules. Table 4- 1 LED displays on the modules CPU 1516-3 PN/DP IM 155-5 PN ST RUN/STOP LED RUN LED (two-colored LED: green/yellow) (two-colored LED: green/yellow) ERROR LED ERROR LED (single-colored LED: red) (single-colored LED: red) MAINT LED MAINT LED (single-colored LED: yellow) (single-colored LED: yellow) X1 P1 X1 P1 (two-colored LED: (single-colored LED: green/yellow) green) X1 P2 X1 P2 (two-colored LED: (single-colored LED: green/yellow) green) X2 P1 (two-colored LED: green/yellow) DI 32x24VDC HF PS 25W 24VDC RUN LED (single-colored LED: green) ERROR LED (single-colored LED: red) without function RUN LED (single-colored LED: green) ERROR LED (single-colored LED: red) MAINT LED (single-colored LED: yellow) LED CHx (two-colored LED: green/red) Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 29 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Additional information The meaning of the individual LED displays, their different combinations and the remedial measures resulting from them in case of errors are device-specific. The explanation can be found in the manuals of the modules. 4.2.1.2 Display of the CPU Introduction Each CPU in the S7-1500 automation system has a front cover with a display and operating keys. You can display status information in various menus on the display of the CPU. You use the operating keys to navigate through the menus. Figure 4-3 Display - diagnostics screen Diagnostics 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Display options The display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU shows the following diagnostics information: CPU operating state "Diagnostics" menu Error and alarm texts (system diagnostics alarms) Information entered in the diagnostics buffer Watch tables Information on the cycle times of the user program Utilization of the CPU memory "Modules" menu Information on modules and the network Detailed device view with diagnostics symbols Order number, CPU version and central I/O modules Module status for central and distributed modules Information about the currently installed firmware Additional information For additional information on the topic "Functions and operation of the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU", see the documentation for the S7-1500 automation system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). You can find detailed information on the individual options, a training course and a simulation of the available menu commands of the display for the CPU in the SIMATIC S7-1500 Display Simulator (http://www.automation.siemens.com/salesmaterial-as/interactive-manuals/gettingstarted_simatic-s7-1500/disp_tool/start_en.html). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 31 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.2 Diagnostics information in STEP 7 4.2.2.1 Explanation of diagnostics symbols Diagnostics symbols for modules and devices When the online connection to a device is established in STEP 7, the diagnostics status of the device and its lower-level components and, if applicable, the device operating mode are also determined. The following table shows the possible symbols and their meaning. Table 4- 2 Symbol Diagnostics symbols for modules and devices Meaning The connection with a CPU is being established. The CPU is not reachable at the set address. The configured CPU and the CPU actually present are of incompatible types. Example: An existing CPU 315-2 DP is incompatible with a configured CPU 15163 PN/DP. On establishment of the online connection to a protected CPU, the password dialog was terminated without specification of the correct password. No fault Maintenance required Maintenance demanded Error The module or device is deactivated. The module or the device cannot be reached from the CPU (valid for modules and devices below a CPU). Diagnostics data is not available because the current online configuration data differ from the offline configuration data. The configured module or device and the module or device actually present are incompatible (valid for modules or devices under a CPU). The configured module does not support display of the diagnostics status (valid for modules under a CPU). The connection is established, but the module status has not yet been determined or is unknown. Hardware error in lower-level component: A hardware fault has occurred in at least one lower-level hardware component (occurs as a separate symbol only in the project tree). Diagnostics 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Symbols for the comparison status The diagnostics symbols can be combined at the bottom right with additional smaller symbols that indicate the result of the online/offline comparison. The following table shows the possible comparison symbols and their meaning. Table 4- 3 Symbol Symbols for the comparison status Meaning Hardware error in lower-level component: The online and offline versions differ (only in the project tree) in at least one lower-level hardware component. Software error in lower-level component: The online and offline versions differ (only in the project tree) in at least one lower-level software component. Online and offline versions of the object are different Object only exists online Object only exists offline Online and offline versions of the object are the same Operating mode symbols for CPUs and CPs The following table shows the possible symbols and their respective operating states. Table 4- 4 Operating mode symbols for CPUs and CPs Symbol Operating mode RUN STOP STARTUP DEFECTIVE Unknown operating mode The configured module does not support display of the operating mode. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 33 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Event table The following information is displayed in the table for each diagnostics event: Sequential number of the entry The first entry contains the latest event. Date and time of the diagnostics event If no date and time are shown, the module has no integrated clock. Short designation of the event and, if applicable, the reaction of the CPU Symbol for information on incoming/outgoing status The following table shows the possible symbols and their meaning. Table 4- 5 Symbol Symbols in the event table Meaning Incoming event Outgoing event Incoming event for which there is no independent outgoing event User-defined diagnostics event Additional information For additional information on the individual symbols, please refer to the online help for STEP 7. 4.2.2.2 Accessible devices (without project) Accessible devices Accessible devices are all devices that are connected to a PG/PC either directly by an interface or by means of a subnet and that are switched on. These devices can display diagnostic information even without an offline project. Requirements STEP 7 is open. The portal view or project view is open. Diagnostics 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To display diagnostic information for specific devices even without an offline project, follow these steps: 1. Establish a connection to the respective CPU. 2. Select the command "Accessible devices" from the "Online" menu. The "Accessible devices" dialog opens. Figure 4-4 "Accessible devices" dialog 3. Make the settings for the interface. 4. Select the respective device under "Accessible nodes of the selected interface". 5. Confirm the dialog with the "Display" button. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 35 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result The device is displayed in the project tree. You open the diagnostic information in the work area with a double-click on "Online & Diagnostics". Information is available on the diagnostic status, cycle times, memory usage and the diagnostics buffer. Figure 4-5 4.2.2.3 Device in the project tree Devices & networks Devices & networks - Go online You can get an overview of the current state of your automation system in the device view or network view. You implement the following tasks in the device view: Device configuration and parameter assignment Module configuration and parameter assignment You implement the following tasks in the network view: Device configuration and parameter assignment Networking devices Requirements STEP 7 is open. A project is open. The project view is open. Diagnostics 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To get an overview of the current state of your automation system, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Network view" in the working area. 2. Select the CPU. 3. Click the "Go online" button in the toolbar. The "Go online" dialog opens. Figure 4-6 Go online 4. Make the settings for the interface. 5. Select the respective device under "Compatible devices in the target subnet". 6. Confirm the dialog with the "Connect" button. The online mode is started. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 37 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result The connected devices are now displayed with diagnostic information in the network view in the working area. Here you get an overview of the current state of your automation device. Figure 4-7 CPU with diagnostic information You get to the "Device view" with a double-click on the device. The diagnostic information for the individual modules is displayed in this view. Note Symbols and their meaning You will find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics symbols (Page 32) and in the online help for STEP 7. Diagnostics 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.2.4 Online & diagnostics Online mode In online mode there is an online connection between your PG/PC and one or several devices. Depending on the properties of a device, you are offered specific diagnostics options and certain functions in online mode. Diagnostics - General module information - Diagnostics status - Cycle time - Memory - Diagnostics buffer - Display - Interface information (e.g. IP parameter, port information) Functions - Assign IP address - Set time and date of the CPU - Firmware update (e.g. for PLC, display) - Assign device name - Reset to factory settings - Format memory card - Save service data Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 39 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics To establish an online connection at least one PG/PC interface must be installed that is physically connected with a device, for example, with an Ethernet cable. The current online status of a device is indicated by a symbol to the right of the device in the project tree. Figure 4-8 Partial view of network view Requirements STEP 7 is open. A project is open. The project view is open. Diagnostics 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To display an overview of the faulty devices, follow these steps: 1. Select the affected device folder in the project tree. 2. Select the shortcut menu command "Online & Diagnostics". The online and diagnostics view of the module to be diagnosed is started. Figure 4-9 Setting online access 3. Make the settings for the interface. Here you can change an interface access that has already been set for an online connection that was successfully established previously. 4. Click on the "Go online" button. The online connection is established. Result You can find detailed diagnostics information on each device in the Inspector window, in the "Diagnostics" section of the area navigation on the "Properties" tab. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 41 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.2.5 "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window The "Diagnostics" tab of the Inspector window includes information on diagnostics events and configured alarm events. Figure 4-10 Diagnostics in the Inspector window, "Device information" tab Note Symbols and their meaning You can find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics symbols (Page 32) and in the online help for STEP 7. Subordinate "Device information" tab This tab gives you an overview of faulty devices to which an online connection exists or has existed. The table provides the following diagnostics information on the faulty devices: Online status: Includes the online status as diagnostics symbol and in words Operating mode: Includes the operating mode as symbol and in words Device/module: Name of the affected device or the affected module Connection established via ...: Specifies the path used to establish the connection to the failed device. Alarm: This explains the entry in the previous columns and displays an alarm, if necessary Details: The link opens the online and diagnostics view associated with the device or puts it in the foreground. If the device cannot be reached, the link opens the "Go online" dialog. Help: The link provides additional information on the fault. Note Communication and access errors Errors that occur in the user program (e.g., communication errors, access errors) are not reported in the "Diagnostics" tab of the device information. You must read out the diagnostics buffer of the CPU in the online and diagnostics view to get this information. The link in the "Details" column opens the diagnostics buffer. Diagnostics 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Subordinate "Connection information" tab The "Connection information" tab displays detailed diagnostics information for connections. There will only be information on the "Connection information" tab if there is an active online connection to at least one end point of the relevant connection. If a connection has been selected (connection table), the tab contains the following groups: Connection details Address details of the connection Figure 4-11 "Connection information" tab and open connection overview If a module has been selected (network view), the tab contains the following group: Connection resources Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 43 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Subordinate "Alarm display" tab System diagnostics alarms are output in the "Alarm display" tab. Figure 4-12 "Alarm display" tab To receive alarms in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Open the project view. 2. Select the required CPU in the project tree. 3. To connect online with the respective CPU, select the shortcut menu command "Go online". 4. Select the required CPU once again in the project tree and select the shortcut menu command "Receive alarms". Figure 4-13 Receive alarms 5. Alarms are now displayed in the alarm display. "Archive view" is enabled by default. 6. To display the latest alarms, click the "Active alarms" icon . Diagnostics 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.2.6 CPU diagnostics buffer Definition Each CPU and some other modules have their own diagnostics buffer, in which detailed information on all diagnostic events is entered in the order in which they occurred. The CPU diagnostics buffer can be displayed on all display media (STEP 7, SIMATIC HMI devices, SIMATIC S7-1500 Web server and display of the CPU). Diagnostic events The entries available in the diagnostics buffer include: Internal and external errors on a module System errors in the CPU Operating mode transitions (e.g., from RUN to STOP) Errors in the user program Removal/insertion of modules Security events The contents of the diagnostics buffer are stored in the retentive memory in case of a memory reset of the CPU. Errors or events can be evaluated even after a longer period of time thanks to the diagnostics buffer to determine the cause of a STOP or to trace the occurrence of a single diagnostic event and to be able to assign it. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 45 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To display the diagnostics buffer of a CPU in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Select the respective CPU. 2. Select the shortcut menu command "Online & Diagnostics". The "Online access" view is opened in the work area. Figure 4-14 Setting up online access 3. Set the interface. Diagnostics 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4. Click . 5. Select the area "Diagnostics buffer". Figure 4-15 Diagnostics buffer in STEP 7 Note Filtering events You can filter the entries in the diagnostics buffer in the settings of the "Diagnostics buffer" area to only display specific types of events. This means that specific events, such as "CPU and configuration-internal events" or "Connection diagnostics events", can be displayed separately. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 47 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Security events The following security events (event types) result in an entry in the diagnostics buffer. Going online with the correct or incorrect password Manipulated communications data detected Manipulated data detected on memory card Manipulated firmware update file detected Changed protection level (access protection) downloaded to the CPU Password legitimization restricted or enabled (by instruction or CPU display) Online access denied due to the possible number of simultaneous access attempts being exceeded Timeout when an existing online connection is inactive Logging on to the Web server with the correct or incorrect password Creating a backup of the CPU Restoring the CPU configuration (Restore) To prevent the diagnostics buffer being "swamped" by large numbers of identical security events, you can set parameters so that these events are entered in the diagnostics buffer as a group alarm. For every interval (monitoring time), the CPU then only generates one group alarm per event type. Configuring a group alarm for security events To configure group alarms for security events, follow these steps: 1. Click on the CPU icon in the network view. The properties of the CPU are displayed in the Inspector window. 2. Navigate to the "Protection" > "Security event" area. 3. Click "Security event". 4. Select the option "Summarize security events in case of high message volume" to enable group alarms for security events. 5. Set the duration of an interval (monitoring period); the default is 20 seconds. 4.2.2.7 "Online tools" task card Online view in the "Online tools" task card The following requirements must be met to display the online view of the "Online tools" task card in STEP 7: An online connection to the CPU is available. You have selected the CPU in the topology view, network view or device view. Diagnostics 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics The "Online tools" task card provides an overview of the CPU state, the cycle time and the memory usage. The "CPU operator panel" pane displays the current state of some LEDs and the mode selector of a CPU. The "Cycle time" pane displays the cycle time diagram and below it the measured cycle times as absolute values. The "Memory" pane contains the current memory usage of the associated CPU. The free memory is shown both as a bar graph and as a numerical value (percentage). The display for "Load memory" contains, in addition to the online project data (program code, data blocks, hardware configuration etc.), all other data that may be on the SIMATIC memory card, such as recipes, data logs, HMI backups or non-SIMATIC files that have been copied to the memory card via the Web server of the CPU or offline in Explorer (for example, PDF files). Figure 4-16 "Online tools" task card Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 49 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.2.8 Configuring the settings for I/O modules in STEP 7 You can also make settings for system diagnostics in STEP 7 for I/O modules. The parameters you have to configure depend on the I/O module. The settings are optional. Requirements STEP 7 is open. A project is open. The project view is open. A design with I/O modules has been configured. Procedure To make settings for system diagnostics of I/O modules in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Select the respective I/O module in the device view. 2. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window. 3. Select the area "Inputs", for example. You have access to the settings for system diagnostics of the I/O module. If you select "Wire break", for example, a possible wire break for the channel is signaled during operation. Figure 4-17 I/O setting with a digital input module 4. Save the hardware configuration. 5. Download the new hardware configuration to the CPU. Diagnostics 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Additional information The documentation for the respective module includes additional information on parameter assignment of I/O modules. 4.2.3 Diagnostics information using the web server System diagnostics using the CPU Web server The CPUs of the SIMATIC series have an integrated Web server and let you display the system diagnostics information by means of PROFINET. Any terminal devices, such as PCs or smartphones, can thus access module data, user program data and diagnostics data of a CPU by using an Internet browser. This means access to CPUs is possible without installed STEP 7. In addition to normal websites, the Web server provides so-called basic websites with reduced content that are adapted to the requirements of small screens with low resolution. Using CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as an example, the following figure shows the start page of the Web server: Figure 4-18 Web server, Start page Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 51 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics The following diagnostics options are available with the integrated Web server: Start page with general CPU information Information on diagnostics Contents of the diagnostics buffer Module information Alarms Information about communication PROFINET topology Motion Control diagnostics Trace Configuring the Web server in STEP 7 Proceed as follows to activate the Web server: Requirements You have opened STEP 7. You have added a CPU to the project. You have opened the project view. Procedure 1. Open the network view. 2. Select the CPU. 3. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window. 4. Select the entry "Web server" in the "General" area navigation. Figure 4-19 Activate the Web server Diagnostics 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5. Select the "Activate web server on this module" check box. 6. "Permit access only with HTTPS": The activation of the Web server using the secure transmission protocol "HTTPS" requires a valid Web server certificate in the CPU. NOTICE Utilizing the full functionality of the Web server A valid CA-signed Web server certificate in the CPU is a requirement for: * User management with password-protected users * The use of safety-related functions (online backup and restore of the CPU configuration, saving and downloading diagnostic information in csv files) To use the full functionality of the Web server, we recommend that you create a CAsigned server certificate and assign it to the CPU. To create a CA-signed Web server certificate, you must enable the Certificate Manager in the global security settings of STEP 7 and assign a CA-signed server certificate to the Web server in the properties of the CPU. You can find additional information on handling Web server certificates in the "Configuring the Web server" section of the Web server function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560). Detailed information on Certification Authority (CA) certificates, device certificates (End Entity certificate), "Public Key Infrastructure" (PKI) and certificate management can be found in the Communication function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925) and in the online help for STEP 7, keyword "Secure communication". 7. Automatic updating is activated in the default setting of a configured CPU. 8. Activate the Web server also for each interface via which you want to access the Web server. To do this, open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window and select the "Web server" entry in the "General" area navigation. In the "Overview of interfaces" area, select the "Enabled web server access" check box for the corresponding interface. 9. Compile and load the configuration into the CPU. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 53 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Accessing the Web server To access the Web server, proceed as follows: 1. Connect the display device (PG/PC, HMI, mobile terminal device) with the CPU or a communication module using a PROFINET interface. If you are working with WLAN, activate the WLAN on the display device and establish a connection to the access point (e.g. SCALANCE W788-1RR or SCALANCE W784-1), which is in turn connected to the CPU. 2. Open the web browser on the display device. 3. Enter the IP address of the interface of the CPU which is connected to the client in the "Address" field of the web browser in the following format: http://a.b.c.d or https://a.b.c.d (example input: https://192.168.3.141). The intro page of the CPU opens. 4. You need to perform the installation of the CA certificate again for each display device you want to use. A valid CA certificate is available for download from the "Intro" web page under "Download certificate". You can find instructions for installing the certificate in the help system of your Web browser and in the FAQ with the entry ID 103528224 at the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103528224) website. 5. Click the NEXT link to go to the Web server pages. Note Managing access rights In STEP 7, you can create users, define access rights and assign passwords under "Web server > User management". Users only have access to the options that are permanently linked to the access rights. You can find additional information on managing access rights in the "Configuring the Web server" section of the Web server function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560). Diagnostics 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics "Diagnostics" option The "Diagnostics" web page provides more information about the tabs: Identification This tab contains the characteristics of the CPU (serial number, article number, hardware and firmware version, etc.). Program protection This tab provides information on whether the PLC program contains know-how protection or copy protection. Memory This tab contains current values on the memory currently in use. Runtime information Current information on program/communication load and cycle time can be found in this tab. Fail-safe (only with an F CPU) The safety program of an F-CPU consists of one or two F-runtime groups. You can find their cycle time (F-monitoring time) and runtime in this tab. Figure 4-20 Web server, "Diagnostics" Web page Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 55 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Diagnostics option "Diagnostics buffer" The browser displays the content of the diagnostics buffer on the "Diagnostics buffer" Web page. Figure 4-21 Web server, "Diagnostics buffer" Web page Diagnostics 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Diagnostics option "Module information" The status of a device is indicated by the Web browser with symbols and comments on the "Module information" Web page. Modules are displayed on the "Module information" Web page in the "Name" column with a link. You can thus get to the faulty module in hierarchical order. Figure 4-22 Web server, "Module information" Web page Diagnostics option "Messages" The Web browser displays the content of the message buffer on the "Messages" Web page. The messages can be acknowledged via the Web server if you have the appropriate user rights. Figure 4-23 Web server, "Messages" Web page Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 57 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Diagnostics option "Communication" The "Communication" web page provides detailed information about the following tabs: Parameter A summary of the information on the PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces of the selected CPU is available in this tab. Statistics You will find information on data transmission in this tab. Resources Information about the resource consumption of the connections is available in this tab. Connections Information about the status of the communication connections is available in this tab. Figure 4-24 Web server, "Communication" Web page Diagnostics 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics "Topology" diagnostics option The "Topology" Web page provides information on the topological configuration and status of the PROFINET devices in your PROFINET IO system. Figure 4-25 Web server, "Topology" Web page Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 59 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics "Motion Control Diagnostics" diagnostic option The Web server displays statuses, errors, technology alarms and the current values of the configured technology objects (TOs). The "Motion Control Diagnostics" web page provides detailed information on the configured technology objects in the following views: Diagnostics This view provides an overview list of configured technology objects, the status and error messages of a selected technology object, as well as values and limits of the movement status for a selected axis. Service overview This view contains diagnostic information for multiple technology objects and a filter option for selecting the displayed technology objects. Figure 4-26 Web server, "Motion Control diagnostics" webpage Diagnostics 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics "Trace" diagnostic options You can read, view and save the trace recordings via the Web server and thus obtain plant and project information for diagnostics and maintenance. The web page of the trace and logic analyzer function consists of several areas. The example in the figure below shows how the Web server user interface is divided when the "Trace" web page is first called. Figure 4-27 Web server, "Trace" home page (without measurement) Additional information Additional information on the topic is available in the Web server function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560). You can find additional information on the trace function in the Using the trace and logic analyzer function (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64897128) function manual. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 61 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.4 Diagnostics information using the HMI diagnostics view Objects for system diagnostics The full functionality of the HIM diagnostics view is only available with Comfort Panels and WinCC RT Advanced . Basic Panels do not support the complete range of system diagnostics functions. Two objects are available for system diagnostics on an HMI device. System diagnostics view The system diagnostics view reflects the current status of all accessible devices in your plant. You navigate directly to the cause of the error and the associated device. You have access to all diagnostics-capable devices that you have configured in the STEP 7 hardware and network editor. System diagnostics window The system diagnostics window is an operating element and display object. The functions of the system diagnostics window are the same as for the system diagnostics view. Because the system diagnostics window is configured in the "Global screen", you can also specify, for example, if the object can be closed in WinCC Runtime. Note Compatibility with Basic Panels Only the "System diagnostics view" object is available with Basic Panels. Basic Panels do not support the "System diagnostics window" object or the graphic symbol "System diagnostics indicator". Diagnostics 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.4.1 Configuring system diagnostics Introduction You add a system diagnostics view or a system diagnostics window to your project to get an overview of all devices available in your plant. The system diagnostics window behaves like the system diagnostics view but is only available in the global screen. Requirements At least one CPU has been set up in the project. An HMI device (e.g., Comfort Panel) has been set up in the project. CPU and the HMI device are connected with each other by an HMI connection. You have created a screen (for the system diagnostics view). The global screen is open (for the system diagnostics window). The Inspector window is open. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 63 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure Proceed as follows to configure the system diagnostics: 1. Double-click the "System diagnostics view" object in the "Tools" task card. The object is added to the screen. Figure 4-28 Adding a system diagnostics view 2. Select the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window. 3. Select the area "Columns". 4. Enable the columns that you require in the device view for WinCC Runtime, for example: - Status - Name - Operating mode - Slot - Address 5. Enable the columns that you require in the detail view for WinCC Runtime, for example: - Status - Name - Operating mode - Plant designation - Address 6. You can change the column headers in the "Columns" area, if necessary. 7. Select the "Display" area. 8. Enable "Column settings > Columns moveable" to move the columns in WinCC Runtime. 9. To close the system diagnostics window in WinCC Runtime, select "Properties > Window > Closable" in the "Properties" tab of the Inspector window. Diagnostics 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result The system diagnostics view has been added to the screen. The diagnostics status of the entire plant is displayed in the system diagnostics view in WinCC Runtime. Figure 4-29 System diagnostics view in the screen The system diagnostics window has been added to the global screen. If there is an error message in the plant, the system diagnostics window responds and displays the affected device. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 65 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.4.2 Different views of the HMI diagnostics view Introduction There are three different views available in the system diagnostics view and the system diagnostics window. Device view Details view Distributed I/O view (only for PROFIBUS and PROFINET systems) Device view The device view shows all the available devices of a layer in a table. Double-clicking on a device opens either the lower-level devices or the detail view. Symbols in the first column provide information about the current state of the device. Figure 4-30 Device view Diagnostics 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Details view The detail view gives detailed information about the selected device and any pending errors. Check whether the data is correct in the detail view. Figure 4-31 Details view Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 67 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Distributed I/O view The distributed I/O view is only available for distributed I/O systems. The distributed I/O view shows the status of the devices of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET subnet. Each element in the view shows the device name, the device type and the IP address or the PROFIBUS address. Figure 4-32 Distributed I/O view Navigation buttons Button Function Opens the lower-level devices or the detail view if there are no lowerlevel devices. Opens the higher-level device or the device view if there is no higherlevel device. Opens the device view. Diagnostics 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4.2.4.3 Inserting system diagnostics indicator Introduction The system diagnostics indicator is a predefined graphic symbol of the library which alerts you to errors in your plant. The library object shows two different states: No error Error Requirements An HMI device (e.g., Comfort Panel) has been set up in the project. The "Libraries" task card is opened. The global library "Buttons and Switches > DiagnosticsButtons" is open. A screen is open. The system diagnostics window has been set up in the global screen. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 69 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure 1. Select the "DiagnosticsIndicator" object in the library. 2. Drag-and-drop the library object to the position in the work area where you want to insert the object. The library object is added. Figure 4-33 Inserting library object in the work area 3. Select the library object. 4. Open the "Events" tab in the Inspector window. The "ShowSystemDiagnosticsWindow" is preset for the event "Click". Diagnostics 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result The system diagnostics indicator has been added to the project and connected with the system diagnostics window. The system diagnostics indicator changes its appearance if an error message is output in WinCC Runtime. The system diagnostics window opens when you click on the system diagnostics indicator. The system diagnostics window shows the detail view of the affected device. Configuring access protection for the system diagnostics window Configure access protection for the system diagnostics indicator to prevent unauthorized access to the system diagnostics windows. 1. Select the "DiagnosticsIndicator" object in the screen. 2. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window. 3. Select an authorization in the "Security in Runtime" area. A logon dialog opens when you click on the system diagnostics indicator in WinCC Runtime. The system diagnostics window does not open unless you have the required authorization. 4.2.4.4 Configuring button as system diagnostics indicator Introduction Instead of using the object "DiagnosticsIndicator" from the library, you can, for example, configure a button in "Graphic" mode to indicate errors in your plant. Requirements At least one CPU has been created. An HMI device (e.g., Comfort Panel) has been set up in the project. The "Tools" task card is open. A bit graphics list has been created with two different graphics for the states. A screen is open. You have created a system diagnostics view. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 71 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure Follow these steps to configure a button as system diagnostics indicator: 1. Double-click the "Button" object in the "Tools" task card. A button is added to the screen. 2. Enable the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window and the "Graphic" mode in the "General" area. 3. Select the bit graphics list as graphics list. 4. Select the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window and select the tag @DiagnosticsIndicatorTag under "Tag" in the "General" area. 5. To assign a function to the button, select the "Events" tab in the Inspector window. 6. Select the "Click" event. 7. Click on "Add function" in the table. 8. Select "EnableSystemDiagnosticsView". 9. Select the system diagnostics view. Diagnostics 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Setting and determining system diagnostics 4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result You have configured an interface that reacts to error events from the CPU. The button changes when an error event occurs in Runtime. Figure 4-34 Configured button The button has two states. Error The system diagnostics view opens when you click on the button. The system diagnostics view shows the detail view of the affected device. No error The system diagnostics view opens when you click on the button. The system diagnostics view shows the device view. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 73 5 System diagnostics by means of the user program 5.1 Options of system diagnostics in the user program Introduction You can configure responses to diagnostics alarms in the user program. You can, for example, specify that your plant is stopped in case of specific diagnostics alarms. Instructions A vendor-independent structure of data records with diagnostics information applies. The following instructions are available for determining the system diagnostics of a device: Table 5- 1 Instructions for determining the system diagnostics Instruction RDREC Description * Reads data records of a component (module or submodule) of a DP slave/IO device that may contain error information * Works asynchronously, which means processing takes place across several calls * Reads the start information of the OB when calling the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB 82) * Provides information on cause and location of error DPNRM_DG * Reads the current diagnostics data of a DP slave (DP standard diagnostics) GEN_DIAG * Generates diagnostics information * To generate diagnostics information, the module or submodule is identified with its logical address Gen_UsrMsg * Generates an alarm that is entered in the diagnostics buffer GET_DIAG * Provides diagnostics information * To provide diagnostics information, the module or submodule is selected GET_NAME * Reads the name of an IO device T_DIAG * Provides diagnostics and status information on a connection * Works asynchronously, which means processing takes place across several calls * Reads the start information of the OB called last that has not been processed completely and the startup OB started last * Provides general error information LED * Reads the status of the module LED Get_IM_Data * Reads the Information&Maintenance data of the CPU * Works asynchronously, which means processing takes place across several calls Transfer_IM_Data * Transmits the Information&Maintenance data of the CPU DeviceStates * Outputs the state of all devices of an IO system ModuleStates * Outputs the state of all modules of a device RALRM RD_SINFO Diagnostics 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE System diagnostics by means of the user program 5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs Additional information Online help In the online help for STEP 7, you can find: Additional information on instructions for system diagnostics Information about further options for evaluating diagnostic information in the user program (e.g. with the "RDREC", "RALRM", "GET_DIAG" instructions) Information on SIMATIC ProDiag. This functionality enables targeted and fast machine and plant diagnostics for SIMATIC S7-1500 and SIMATIC HMI: - Standardized diagnostics concept for different SIMATIC components - No additional configuration work for diagnostics functionality - Reduces the load on PLC memory and program run time You can find details in the online help under "Supervising machinery and plants with ProDiag". Manuals You can find additional information about evaluating diagnostic information in the user program in the following manuals: PROFINET function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19289930) programming manual Manual for the respective module Application examples You can find detailed application examples with further documentation and example projects on the Service&Support Website: Diagnostics in the user program with S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98210758) System diagnostics with S7-1500 and TIA Portal (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/68011497) FAQ For more information about how to realize channel diagnostics in the user program of the SIMATIC S7-1500, refer to the FAQ with entry ID 109480387 on the Service&Support Website (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109480387). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 75 System diagnostics by means of the user program 5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs 5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs Introduction In addition to event-driven system diagnostics, the input and output modules of the SIMATIC series provide diagnostics information using the process image input. The system diagnostics described in the preceding sections is made available asynchronously to the program processing. To ensure the correct processing of the input and output data in the case of faults while reading the input and output data, some modules offer the so-called value status (QI = Quality Information) for evaluation. Requirement for evaluation of the value status The diagnostics information about the process image input is transmitted synchronized with the user data. Select the "Value status" check box in the properties of the I/O module in STEP 7 if you want to evaluate the value status of the channel. Figure 5-1 Enable value status Diagnostics 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE System diagnostics by means of the user program 5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs Evaluation of the value status If you have enabled the value status for an I/O module, this module provides additional information on the value status in addition to the user data. This information is directly available in the process image input and can be called with simple binary operations. Each channel is uniquely assigned one bit in the value status. The bit in the value status indicates the validity of the read-in value in the user data. Table 5- 2 Example for evaluation of the user datum in case of a wire break for a digital input module Bit in user datum Bit in value status Value in user datum Faulty channel Logical 0 0 Invalid Fault-free channel Logical 0 (actual value) 1 Valid Influence of the value status The value status of an active channel is "Invalid" when any one of the following factors is given: Channel diagnostics pending (regardless of whether diagnostics, for example wire break, is configured for this channel) For output channels: "Reaction to CPU STOP" feature is active (due to CPU STOP, interrupted connection) For output channels of the digital on-board I/O of compact CPUs: If a channel is used for technology functions, it returns the value status 0 ("Invalid"). It does not matter in this context whether the output value is incorrect or not. PROFIenergy is active, i.e. hibernation is enabled (except in "Continue working mode") When working with non-fail-safe modules, note that an invalid active channel also sets the value status of all other active channels to "Invalid". We therefore recommend that you disable all unconnected or unused channels. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 77 System diagnostics by means of the user program 5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs Example - Evaluation of the value status for the input channel of an analog input module The example below shows the basic evaluation of the value status for the input channel of an analog input module in the user program. The diameter of a cylinder is measured by means of a channel and its circumference is calculated. If the value status indicates the channel is error-free, the circumference is to be calculated. If the value status indicates the channel is defective, the value "0" is to be output as substitute value for the circumference. The figure below shows the evaluation of the value status in the user program. Figure 5-2 Example - Evaluation of the value status in the user program Additional information Depending on the I/O module, the value status reserves different addresses in the process image input. The manual for the module used includes specific information on the assignment and arrangement. Diagnostics 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 6 Alarms Introduction Alarms allow you to display events from processing in the automation system and to quickly detect errors, to precisely localize them and to remove them. Downtimes are significantly reduced in a plant. Before alarms can be output, they need to be configured. You can create, edit and compile event-dependent alarms along with their alarm texts and alarm attributes and display them on display devices. In STEP 7, you create program alarms in the user program with the "Program_Alarm" instruction. You edit the attributes and alarm texts in the alarm editor in STEP 7. You can output the alarm status with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction. Advantages of program alarms Compared to other alarm methods, such as HMI discrete alarms, program alarms offer the following advantages: Central engineering in STEP 7: You only configure a program alarm once for the CPU. The program alarm is automatically transferred from the CPU to all registered HMI devices. System-supported acknowledgment: The acknowledgment of a program alarm on an HMI device is automatically updated on other HMI devices by the CPU. Time stamping close to the event in the CPU Identical time stamps of the alarms on multiple HMI devices without time synchronization Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 79 Alarms 6.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction 6.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction "Program_Alarm" instruction You create a program alarm in STEP 7 with the "Program_Alarm" instruction. The figure below shows the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the most important input tags. The "Program_Alarm" instruction monitors the signal at the SIG block input and generates a program alarm in case of a signal change at the SIG parameter. The instruction generates an incoming alarm when the signal changes from 0 to 1 and an outgoing program alarm if the signal changes from 1 to 0. The program alarm is triggered synchronously to program execution. The time stamp is automatically created when the alarm event occurs in the automation system and is passed along with the alarm. You can append up to ten associated values to the program alarm at the parameters SD_i (1 i 10). The associated values are acquired at the time of the signal change at the SIG parameter and assigned to the program alarm. Associated values are used to display dynamic contents in alarms. Example: The temperature in the tank is C. You can find more information on associated values in the STEP 7 online help. Figure 6-1 "Program_Alarm" instruction Diagnostics 80 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor Note The "Program_Alarm" instruction can only be called in a function block. A program alarm can be up to 256 bytes long in total (with associated values and texts from the text list). The associated values can be a maximum of 512 bytes in length. Text lists are not affected by this. The CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-1500 product series have the following memory for text lists: * CPU 1510-x to CPU 1513-x: 2.25 MB * CPU 1515-x to CPU 1516-x: 4.5 MB * CPU 1517-x to CPU 1518-x: 6.75 MB The number of configurable program alarms depends on the CPU used. With a CPU 1515-2 PN, for example, a maximum of 10,000 program alarms are possible. You can find this information in the device manual for the respective CPU under "Number of configurable alarms". The number of simultaneously active "Program_Alarms" depends on the CPU used. With a 1515-2 PN CPU, for example, a maximum of 600 program alarms are possible. You can find this information in the device manual for the respective CPU under "Number of reserved user interrupts". Sometimes, it is not possible for all program alarms that are active at the same time to be output within one cycle. Query the status of each "Program_Alarm" and activate the instruction again, if necessary. The cycle time is increased for a short time by simultaneously activating/sending multiple "Program_Alarms". A maximum of 40,000 program alarms should be configured in a STEP 7 project on a 64-bit operating system. Additional information You can find more information on creating program alarms in the STEP 7 online help under "Creating and editing alarms". 6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor Introduction You can edit the created alarms in STEP 7 either in the program editor or in the alarm editor. You can find additional information on editing alarms in the program editor in the STEP 7 online help under "Creating and editing alarms". Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 81 Alarms 6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor Editing alarms in the alarm editor You can edit alarm texts in the alarm editor and specify attributes such as alarm class or priority for the alarms. 1. Double-click "PLC supervisions & alarms" in the project tree. Select the "Alarms" tab. The alarm editor opens. 2. Enter the required texts and attributes in the appropriate columns. The figure below shows the layout of the alarm editor. "Program alarms" tab: You can edit program alarms here. "Type alarms" area: "System alarms" tab: System alarms can only be viewed but not edited. To edit these alarms, you must navigate to the device view ("Go to device" menu command), where you can modify the system diagnostics alarms in the Inspector window. This is where the type alarms created in a function block with the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed. Type alarms serves as templates for instance alarms (). All the inputs you make for the type alarm are automatically included in the instance alarms derived from it. You can find more information on type alarms in the STEP 7 online help under "Alarm types and alarms". "Instance alarms" area: When you assign an instance DB to the message block (for example, call in an OB, FB, FC), instance alarms are automatically generated based on the template of the type alarm and alarm numbers are assigned. You can modify the instance alarms for specific instances. You can find more information on instance alarms in the STEP 7 online help under "Alarm types and alarms". Properties of the selected type and instance alarm in the Inspector window Figure 6-2 Layout of the alarm editor Diagnostics 82 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor You can enter or modify the necessary parameters, texts and attributes in the table or in the Inspector window. Multilingual alarms You can have program alarms displayed in multiple languages by assigning different project languages to the interface languages of the display devices. Note The project languages you want to assign must be activated and the corresponding texts (translations) must be available in the project. The project language selection can be found in the project tree under "Languages & Resources". To create the texts of the program alarm as multilingual, follow these steps: 1. In the Inspector window of the alarm editor, open the "Properties" tab and the lower-level "Texts" tab. 2. Enter the text in the desired project language. 3. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window of the CPU and select the "Display" command in the "General" area navigation. Under "Multilingual", assign one of the activated project languages to each interface language of the display devices. Overall, you can assign up to three different project languages to the user interface languages. All assigned project languages are loaded into the CPU. Additional information You can find additional information on texts and attributes in the STEP 7 online help under "Texts and attributes". You can find more information on text lists in the STEP 7 online help under "Text lists for alarms". Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 83 Alarms 6.3 Display of program alarms 6.3 Display of program alarms Program alarms you create with the "Program_Alarm" instruction are automatically made available to the display devices. You have the following options to display the alarms: STEP 7 HMI Web server of the CPU Display of the CPU Figure 6-3 Display of program alarms Multilingual alarms You can have program alarms displayed in multiple languages by assigning different project languages to the interface languages. See section Editing alarms in the alarm editor (Page 81). Diagnostics 84 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.4 Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction 6.4 Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction "Get_AlarmState" instruction The "Get_AlarmState" instruction outputs the alarm state of a program alarm. The output of the alarm state always refers to a program alarm that was created using the "Program_Alarm" instruction. The program alarm is selected with the "Alarm" input parameter. Specify the instance DB of the "Program_Alarm" instruction at the "Alarm" parameter. Figure 6-4 Call - Get_AlarmState Additional information You can find additional information on evaluation of the "Get_AlarmState" instruction in the STEP 7 online help. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 85 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms 6.5.1 Task Introduction This section describes the basic configuration of program alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction based on two examples. The two examples solve the same problem but use a different approach. Example 1 does not use associated values. In example 2, an associated value is assigned to the program alarm to reference a text list. Example - Minimum/maximum fill level of a tank A tank is filled with a liquid. The fill level is monitored by two sensors. If the liquid in the tank drops below a minimum fill level, an alarm is output for low fill level. If the liquid in the tank exceeds a maximum fill level, an alarm is output for high fill level. Figure 6-5 Example for fill level alarms Diagnostics 86 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms 6.5.2 Example 1: Program alarm without associated values Introduction In this example, you create a program alarm for the maximum and the minimum fill level. How the example works When the maximum fill level is exceeded in the tank, a program alarm with the alarm text for the excessive fill level is output. When the minimum fill level is undershot in the tank, a program alarm with the alarm text indicating that the fill level is too low is output. Steps The following steps are necessary for this example: 1. Define tags for signal acquisition 2. Create function block 3. Create program alarms 4. Call function block 5. Edit alarm text Define tags for signal acquisition The following table shows the tags that are used in this example. Define these tags in the standard tag table. The standard tag table is available in the project tree under "PLC tags". Table 6- 1 Tags for fill level alarms Name Data type Description max BOOL Tag for maximum fill level If "max" = 1, the maximum fill level is exceeded. min BOOL Tag for minimum fill level If "min" = 1, the minimum fill level is undershot. The figure below shows the standard tag table with the defined tags "max" and "min". Figure 6-6 Define tags Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 87 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Create function block To create a function block, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Program blocks" folder in the project tree. 2. Double-click "Add new block". The "Add new block" dialog opens. 3. Select the button "Function block". Figure 6-7 Create FB 4. Enter a name for the new block. 5. Select the language SCL. 6. Click on "OK" to confirm your input. Result: You have created a function block. Diagnostics 88 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Create program alarms To create the program alarm for the example program, follow these steps: 1. Select the created function block (FB) in the "Program blocks" folder in the project tree and double-click the function block to open it. 2. Insert the call of the "Program_Alarm" instruction in the instruction part of the function block. The "Program_Alarm" instruction is available in the "Instructions" task card under "Extended instructions" > "Alarms". The "Call options" window opens. Figure 6-8 Call Program_Alarm 3. Enter "level_max" as the name and confirm the call options by clicking "OK". Result: The input tags of the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed in the instruction part. 4. Supply the SIG input tag of the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the tags for the maximum fill level. #level_max(SIG:="max"); SIG: If a signal change occurs at the SIG input tag, the "Program_Alarm" instruction generates a program alarm. 5. Insert another call of the "Program_Alarm" instruction. The "Call options" window opens. 6. Enter "level_min" as the name and confirm the call options by clicking "OK". Result: The input tags of the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed in the instruction part. 7. Supply the SIG input tag of the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the tags for the minimum fill level. #level_min(SIG:="min"); Result: You have created two type alarms. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 89 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Call function block To call the function block in the user program, follow these steps: 1. In the "Program blocks" folder, select the cycle OB (e.g., OB1) in which you want to call the function block and open the cycle OB with a double-click. 2. Select the function block you want to call in the "Program blocks" folder. 3. Drag the function block into the instruction part of the cycle OB. The "Call options" window opens. Figure 6-9 Call function block 4. Confirm the call options by clicking "OK". Result: You have called the alarm block in the user program and created an instance alarm. Diagnostics 90 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Edit alarm text To edit the alarm text, follow these steps: 1. Double-click "PLC supervisions & alarms" in the project tree. Select the "Alarms" tab. The alarm editor opens. 2. Select the type alarm for the maximum fill level. 3. Enter the alarm text for the maximum fill level in the "Alarm text" column. 4. Select the type alarm for the minimum fill level. 5. Enter the alarm text for the minimum fill level in the "Alarm text" column. Figure 6-10 Edit alarm text Result: You have created the alarm texts for both type alarms. Additional information You can learn how to create multilingual texts under "Multilingual alarms" in the section Editing alarms in the alarm editor (Page 81). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 91 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms 6.5.3 Example 2: Program alarm with associated value Introduction In this example, you create a shared program alarm for the maximum and the minimum fill level. The program alarm is given an associated value. The program alarm uses the associated value to access a text list entry and outputs a separate alarm text for the minimum and the maximum fill level. How the example works The program alarm is output if either the minimum fill level is undershot or the maximum fill level is exceeded. The associated value 1 of the "Program_Alarm" instruction is assigned the tag for the maximum fill level. The associated value references a text list with the entries "0" and "1". The following scenarios are possible for output of the alarm text: Associated value is "0": The entry "0" of the text list with the alarm text for the undershot fill level is output. Associated value is "1": The entry "1" of the text list with the alarm text for the excessive fill level is output. Steps The following steps are necessary for this example: 1. Define tags for signal acquisition 2. Create function block 3. Create program alarm 4. Call function block 5. Create a text list 6. Edit alarm text Diagnostics 92 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Define tags for signal acquisition The following table shows the tags that are used in this example. Define these tags in the standard tag table. The standard tag table is available in the project tree under "PLC tags". Table 6- 2 Tags for fill level alarms Name Data type Description max BOOL Tag for maximum fill level If "max" = 1, the maximum fill level is exceeded. min BOOL Tag for minimum fill level If "min" = 1, the minimum fill level is undershot. The figure below shows the standard tag table with the defined tags "max" and "min". Figure 6-11 Define tags Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 93 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Create function block To create a function block, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Program blocks" folder in the project tree. 2. Double-click "Add new block". The "Add new block" dialog opens. 3. Select the button "Function block". Figure 6-12 Create FB 4. Enter a name for the new block. 5. Select the language SCL. 6. Click on "OK" to confirm your input. Result: You have created a function block. Diagnostics 94 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Create program alarm To create the program alarm for the example program, follow these steps: 1. Select the created function block (FB) in the "Program blocks" folder in the project tree. 2. Insert the call of the "Program_Alarm" instruction in the instruction part of the function block. The "Program_Alarm" instruction is available in the "Instructions" task card under "Extended instructions" > "Alarms". The "Call options" window opens. Figure 6-13 Call Program_Alarm 3. Enter "level_alarm" as the name and confirm the call options by clicking "OK". Result: The input tags of the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed in the instruction part. 4. Supply the SIG input tag of the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the XOR logic operation of the tags for minimum and maximum fill level and the input tag SD_1 with the tag for the maximum fill level. #level_alarm(SIG:="min"XOR"max",SD_1:="max"); SIG: If a signal change occurs at the SIG input tag, the "Program_Alarm" instruction generates a program alarm. SD_1: The associated value is acquired at the time of the signal change at the input tag and assigned to the program alarm. Result: You have created a type alarm. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 95 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Call function block To call the function block in the user program, follow these steps: 1. In the "Program blocks" folder, select the cycle OB (e.g., OB1) in which you want to call the function block and open the cycle OB with a double-click. 2. Select the function block you want to call in the "Program blocks" folder. 3. Drag the function block into the instruction part of the cycle OB. The "Call options" window opens. Figure 6-14 Call function block 4. Confirm the call options by clicking "OK". Result: You have called the alarm block in the user program and created an instance alarm. Diagnostics 96 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Creating a text list To create the text list for the example program, follow these steps: 1. Double-click on the "Text lists" command in the program tree. The text list editor opens. 2. Double-click "" in the Text lists area. A new text list is added. 3. Name the text list "level_textlist". 4. Double-click "" in the Text list entries area of level_textlist. A new text list entry is added in the level_textlist text list. 5. Enter the alarm text for the maximum fill level in the "Entry" column. 6. Add another entry in the text list. 7. Enter the alarm text for the minimum fill level in the "Entry" column. Figure 6-15 Creating a text list Result: You have created the text list for the alarm text. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 97 Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms Edit alarm text To edit the alarm text for the example program, follow these steps: 1. Double-click "PLC supervisions & alarms" in the project tree. Select the "Alarms" tab. The alarm editor opens. 2. Select the type alarm created for the example. 3. Click in the "Alarm text" column. 4. Open the shortcut menu and select the command "Insert a dynamic parameter (text list)". Figure 6-16 Edit alarm text The window below opens. Figure 6-17 Insert a dynamic parameter (text list) 5. Select the text list "level_textlist" and the tag "max". Confirm your selection by clicking "OK". Result: You have created the alarm text for the type alarms. If the tag "max" (associated value 1) is 0, the alarm text "level too low" is output. If the tag "max" (associated value 1) is 1, the alarm text "level too high" is output. Additional information You can learn how to create multilingual texts under "Multilingual alarms" in the section Editing alarms in the alarm editor (Page 81). Diagnostics 98 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Alarms 6.5 Example program for program alarms 6.5.4 Displaying the alarm Displaying the alarm in the Web server The figure below shows the display of the alarm in the Web server for both examples. Figure 6-18 Displaying the alarm in the Web server Displaying the alarm in STEP 7 Note Displaying alarms in STEP 7 To display alarms in STEP 7, enable the option "Receive alarms" in the shortcut menu of the CPU. The figure below shows the display of the alarm in STEP 7 for both examples. Figure 6-19 Display in STEP 7 Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 99 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7 S7-1500R/H diagnostics Diagnostics for a S7-1500R/H redundant system is basically the same as a standard S71500. You have the following display options: Via STEP 7 Via HMI devices Via the display of the CPUs The CPUs provide information about their operating states as well as internal and external errors through their LEDs. The special features of the diagnostics of S7-1500R/H redundant systems are described below. In addition, the information of the current function manual and the STEP 7 online help also apply to S7-1500R/H redundant systems. Diagnostics information in STEP 7 Hardware diagnostics can be performed as follows: Via the Online and Diagnostics view Via the "Online Tools" task card Via the "Diagnostics > Device Information" area of the Inspector window Via diagnostics icons, for example, in the device view and in the project tree Diagnostics 100 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Diagnostics view in STEP 7 in dependence on the online connection and system states The diagnostics view for S7-1500R/H redundant systems is partly dependent on: Which of the two CPUs the programming device / PC currently has a connection to The current system state in the redundant system The table below provides an overview. The following sections illustrate the diagnostics view for S7-1500R/H using examples. Table 7- 1 Diagnostics view in dependence on the online connection and system states Diagnostics view in STEP 7 An online connection is available to the Online data and diagnostics of the redundant system Primary CPU or backup RUN-Redundant CPU Online and Diagnostics view (Page 103) Online data and diagnostics of the primary CPU Primary CPU RUN-Solo or STOP Online and Diagnostics view (Page 103) Backup CPU RUN-Solo or STOP The following are not displayed: Online data and diagnostics from the backup CPU Online data and diagnostics of the backup CPU * Online data and diagnostics from the primary CPU Online data and diagnostics of the distributed I/O Examples in section and The following are not displayed: * System state Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state (Page 120) Display of the 3 operator panels in the "Online Tools" task card Primary CPU or backup Not relevant CPU Cycle time of the primary CPU (of the system) and memory of the primary CPU in "Online Tools" task card Primary CPU or backup RUN-Redundant CPU Cycle time and memory of the primary CPU in the "Online Tools" task card Primary CPU RUN-Solo or STOP Cycle time and memory of the backup CPU in the "Online Tools" task card Backup CPU RUN-Solo or STOP Memory reset of the primary CPU via "Online Tools" task card Primary CPU STOP Memory reset of the backup CPU via "Online Tools" task card Backup CPU RUN-Solo or STOP "Alarm display" tab: Alarms from the primary CPU Primary CPU Not relevant "Alarm display" tab: Alarms from the backup CPU Backup CPU Not relevant Diagnostics of the distributed I/O Primary CPU or backup RUN-Redundant CPU Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state (Page 114) Diagnostics of the distributed I/O Primary CPU Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state (Page 120) RUN-Solo "Online Tools" task card (Page 106) Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view (Page 109) Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 101 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system Accessible devices As for standard S7-1500 systems, the following can be displayed in STEP 7: All devices accessible from programming device/PC The diagnostics information of devices of a redundant system, for example, from the R/H CPUs The procedure is described in the section Accessible devices (without project) (Page 34). Diagnostics 102 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.1 Online and Diagnostics view 7.1 Online and Diagnostics view Introduction You open the Online and Diagnostics view for the redundant system or for each CPU of the redundant system. Online & diagnostics for the redundant system "Online access": For the S7-1500R/H redundant system, it is displayed whether an online connection exists between the programming device/PC and a CPU. The additional note "Online (via Primary CPU)" or "Online (via Backup CPU)" indicates which role the "Online" connected CPU has. If you enable "Receive alarms", you receive asynchronous alarms of diagnostics events from the CPU with online connection. The display corresponds to the representation for standard CPUs. Figure 7-1 Online and Diagnostics view: Redundant system S7-1500R/H Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 103 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.1 Online and Diagnostics view "Diagnostics": "Diagnostics" provides an overview for the redundant system about the: System state Pairing state Operating states of the CPU Status of which CPU is the primary CPU and which CPU is the backup CPU Figure 7-2 Online and Diagnostics view: Diagnostics status of the S7-1500R/H system Diagnostics 104 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.1 Online and Diagnostics view Online & diagnostics for the primary CPU or backup CPU The Online and Diagnostics view for the CPUs of the redundant system match the display for standard CPUs. In the RUN-Redundant system state, the primary and backup CPU display the online data of the redundant system irrespective of which of the two CPUs the online connection has been made. In the RUN-Solo system state, the programming device/PC displays the data of the CPU for which there is an online connection, i.e. either the primary CPU or of the backup CPU. You select the CPU for display of the online data in the project tree. Figure 7-3 Online and Diagnostics view: CPU (RUN-Redundant system state) Reference You can find information on the operating and system states in the Redundant System S71500R/H System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 105 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.2 "Online Tools" task card 7.2 "Online Tools" task card Introduction If an online connection exists to a CPU of the redundant system, the "Online Tools" task card displays online information for the redundant system. For a S7-1500R/H redundant system, "Online Tools" displays: 3 panes operator panel Cycle time Memory R/H system operator panel For the redundant system, the "R/H system operator panel" pane shows the: Current states of the LEDs of the primary CPU System state Status of which CPU is the primary CPU and which CPU is the backup CPU with their current operating states The "STOP R/H-System" button can be used to switch the S7-1500R/H system to the system state STOP. Note Reaching RUN-Redundant system state Note that you cannot switch the S7-1500R/H to RUN-Redundant system state using the R/HSystem operator panel. You reach the RUN-Redundant system state by switching the operating state for each CPU to RUN in the operator panel of the respective CPU. CPU operator panel The two "CPU operator panel" panes show for the respective CPU of the redundant system: The role of the CPU, primary CPU or backup CPU The current states of the LEDs The operating state of the CPU Use the "RUN / STOP" button to change the operating state for the respective CPU. Use the "MRES" button to perform a memory rest for the CPU, under the following conditions: Online connection to this CPU is available The CPU is in STOP operating state. Diagnostics 106 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.2 "Online Tools" task card Example The following figure shows an example of the "Online Tools" task card for the RUN-Solo system state. The primary CPU is in RUN operating state, the backup CPU in STOP operating state. As long as the backup CPU is in STOP operating state, the backup CPU does not establish any connection to the I/O devices. Therefore, the ERROR LED of the backup CPU always flashes red in the system states STOP and RUN-Solo. Figure 7-4 "Online Tools" task card: Operator panel (RUN-Solo system state) Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 107 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.2 "Online Tools" task card Cycle time and memory In the RUN-Redundant system state, the "Cycle time" and "Memory" panes show the current values of the primary CPU. In redundant mode, the cycle time of the primary CPU matches the cycle time of the system. In the RUN-Solo system state, the panes show the current values for the CPU for which there is an online connection. The display corresponds to the representation for standard CPUs. Figure 7-5 "Online Tools" task card: Cycle time and memory of the primary CPU Reference You can find information on the operating and system states in the Redundant System S7-1500R/H System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833). Diagnostics 108 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view Additional icons for redundant systems in the project tree Table 7- 2 Icons for redundant systems in the project tree of STEP 7 Icon in the project tree Meaning Identifier of the folder S7-1500R/H-System: RUN-Redundant system state Identifier of the folder S7-1500R/H-System: RUN-Solo system state Identifier of the folder S7-1500R/H-System: STARTUP system state Identifier of the folder S7-1500R/H-System: STOP system state Identifier of the folder for the primary CPU: RUN operating state Identifier of the folder for the backup CPU: RUN operating state Identifier of the folder for the primary CPU: STARTUP operating state Identifier of the folder for the backup CPU: STARTUP operating state Identifier of the folder for the primary CPU: STOP operating state Identifier of the folder for the backup CPU: STOP operating state Identifier of the folder of a CPU of the redundant system: "Online via partner": The other CPU of the redundant system is connected online to the programming device / PC. Example: Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view An example of the diagnostics view for a S7-1500R/H system is shown below. The sample configuration consists of two CPUs S7-1517H-3 PN and one interface module IM 155-6 PN HF as PROFINET IO device. PLC_1 is the primary CPU (in RUN operating state). PLC_2 is the backup CPU (in STOP operating state). The hardware configuration and the user program were loaded in the primary CPU. The system is connected online via PLC_1 (primary CPU) and is in RUN-Solo system state. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 109 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view View of the system in the project tree The system is in RUN-Solo system state in STOP operating state . . PLC_1 is in RUN operating state , PLC_2 is Because the system is in RUN-Solo system state, the following is displayed: For the system, maintenance demanded with problem in lower-level component For PLC_1, maintenance demanded For PLC_2, online connection via partner connected online to PLC_1. Figure 7-6 is displayed, as the programming device/PC is Diagnostics example: Redundant system project tree (RUN-Solo) Diagnostics 110 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view Network view of the system The network view shows no faults for the H-CPUs or the IO device. Maintenance demanded in lower-level component indicated for the system, since the system is in RUN-Solo system state. No operating states and system states of the redundant system are displayed in the network view. Figure 7-7 Diagnostics example: Network view of redundant system (RUN-Solo) Doubling-clicking on the system gives you access to the device view of both CPUs. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 111 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view Device view of the system In the device view, you see the operating states of the CPUs based on the icons above PLC_1: Green icon: PLC_1 is in the RUN operating state. Yellow icon for maintenance demanded: PLC_2 is in the STOP operating state. PLC_2 indicates that the online connection is available through the partner (PLC_1). You can find more detailed information on the system faults in the "Diagnostics" tab, in "Device information". The device information indicates maintenance demanded and RUN operating state for PLC_1. Figure 7-8 Diagnostics example: Device view of redundant system (RUN-Solo) Diagnostics 112 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view Alarm display of the system As in the RUN-Solo system state, the alarms of the CPU for which there is an online connection are displayed via the "Alarm display" tab (in the example from PLC_1). Figure 7-9 Diagnostics example: Alarm display of redundant system (RUN-Solo) Device view of the IO device The IO device is an interface module IM 155-6 PN HF with two I/O modules and one server module. The device view shows that there is no faults in the modules. Figure 7-10 Diagnostics example: Device view of IO device Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 113 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state Diagnostics view in redundant mode Primary CPU and backup CPU are each in the RUN-Redundant operating state. In the RUN-Redundant system state, the primary and backup CPU display the online data of the redundant system irrespective of which of the two CPUs the online connection has been made. The diagnostics between the two CPUs is synchronized (diagnostics entries, diagnostics events). As in the RUN-Solo system state, the alarms of the CPU to which there is an online connection are displayed via the "Alarm display" tab. You can find more information in the Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view (Page 109). No error in RUN-Redundant system state If no error is detected in the RUN-Redundant system state, all diagnostics icons in the navigation tree and in the network view show "No fault" . Figure 7-11 Diagnostics example: No fault in the RUN-Redundant project tree Diagnostics 114 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state Error in the RUN-Redundant system state If there are too many errors in the redundant system, the RUN-Redundant system state is retained, for example, if a module in an IO device fails. The diagnostics view is similar to the standard S7-1500 systems. Special examples of a redundant system S7-1500H are shown below: S7-1500H Example 1: The PROFINET ring was interrupted. Evaluate diagnostics via LINK TX/RX LEDs on the CPU TX/RX X1 P1 LED is not illuminated. This means: No Ethernet connection between the P1 port of the respective PROFINET interface and the communication partner Diagnostics in STEP 7 The diagnostics in the project tree shows: Maintenance demanded in lower-level component in the S7-1500H system Maintenance demanded in lower-level component for PLC_1 and PLC_2 Maintenance demanded in lower-level components of local modules of PLC_2 The diagnostics in the network view indicates errors at the affected port of the PROFINET interfaces of PLC_2. Figure 7-12 Diagnostics example: RUN-Redundant system state, open PROFINET ring You can evaluate the diagnostics using the displays of the CPUs via the "Diagnostics" menu as with standard CPUs. You can find additional information in the section Display of the CPU (Page 30). Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 115 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state S7-1500H Example 2: A synchronization module has been removed in S7-1500H. Evaluating diagnostics via X3 and X4 LEDs on the CPU The X3 LED on PLC_2 CPU is not illuminated. This means: The redundancy connection on the synchronization module was interrupted at the H-Sync interface X3. or There is no synchronization module at the H-Sync interface X3. Diagnostics in STEP 7 The diagnostics in the project tree shows: Maintenance demanded in lower-level component in the S7-1500H system Maintenance demanded for PLC_1 Maintenance demanded in lower-level component for PLC_2 Hardware fault in local modules of PLC_1 and PLC_2 Diagnostics 116 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state The diagnostics in the network view indicates that synchronization module 1 of PLC_2 is not accessible. Figure 7-13 Diagnostics example: RUN-Redundant system state, a synchronization module fails Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 117 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state Evaluate diagnostics on the display For example 2, display of the PLC_2 CPU shows: In the "Overview" menu command: A message is available in the next lower level page. In the "Diagnostics" menu command: A message is available in the next lower level page. In the Module menu command: An error has occurred. To evaluate the display, proceed as follows: 1. Navigate to "Pairing state" via the menu commands "Overview" > "Redundancy". 2. This is displayed as the pairing state: Single paired (X4). This means that the redundancy connection is available at the H-Sync interface X4, but not at the X3. 3. Navigate to "Alarms" via the "Diagnostics" menu command. 4. View the details of the alarm (evaluate diagnostics buffer). S7-1500H Example 3: A redundancy connection in S7-1500H is interrupted. Evaluating diagnostics via X3 and X4 LEDs on the CPU The X4 LED on PLC_2 CPU is not illuminated. This means: The redundancy connection on the synchronization module was interrupted at the H-Sync interface X4. or that There is no synchronization module at the H-Sync interface X4. Diagnostics in STEP 7 The diagnostics in the project tree shows: Maintenance demanded in lower-level component in the S7-1500H system Maintenance demanded for PLC_1 and PLC_2 Hardware fault in local modules of PLC_1 and PLC_2 Diagnostics 118 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.4 Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state Maintenance demanded is displayed for both CPUs in the network view. The lower-level components have no fault. Figure 7-14 Diagnostics example: RUN-Redundant system state, a redundancy connection has failed Evaluate diagnostics on the display Perform the analysis of the display of PLC_2 CPU exactly as for example 2. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 119 Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.5 Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state 7.5 Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state The primary CPU is in RUN operating state. The Backup CPU is in STOP operating state, is switched off, defective, or not available. Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state The primary CPU records the diagnostics states of the distributed I/O. Figure 7-15 Diagnostics of the primary CPU and backup CPU in RUN-Solo system state Diagnostics of the backup CPU The following restrictions apply to the backup CPU: Diagnostics information from the backup CPU is only available when there is an online connection to the backup CPU. The distributed I/O is not accessible from the backup CPU. As a result the ERROR LED of the backup CPU always flashes red in the STOP and RUN-Solo system states. A memory reset can only be performed with the backup CPU operator panel when an online connection to the backup CPU is available. Diagnostics 120 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 7.6 System diagnostics by means of the user program Reference You can evaluate the diagnostics using the displays of the CPUs via the "Diagnostics" menu as with standard CPUs. You can find additional information in the section Display of the CPU (Page 30). 7.6 System diagnostics by means of the user program Instructions Instructions for determining the system diagnostics are listed in the section System diagnostics options in the user program (Page 74). The following instructions for diagnostics cannot be used for S7-1500R/H redundant systems: GEN_DIAG: Generate diagnostics information GEN_UsrMsg: Generate user diagnostic alarms GetStationInfo: Read information of an IO device DeviceStates: Read module state information in an IO system Please note: The "DeviceStates" instruction can be selected in STEP 7. The S7-1500R/H CPUs with firmware version V2.6 do not support the "DeviceStates" instruction. Do not use the "DeviceStates" instruction. To read out the module state information, use the "Get_DIAG" instruction. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 121 Glossary Alarm An message sent to the operator due to events or states of the system. Backup CPU Role of a CPU in the S7-1500R/H redundant system. If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU controls the process. The backup CPU processes the user program synchronously and can take over the process control if the primary CPU fails. Button (WinCC) Object in WinCC that points out faults in the plant Channel fault Channel-related error of an individual channel - an I/O with inputs, for example, wire break or short circuit Device Modules with a network connection are referred to as device. Devices are installed on racks where they can be interconnected with other modules. Diagnostics buffer A buffered memory area in the CPU; it stores diagnostics events in the order of their occurrence Firmware of the CPU In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between the firmware of the CPU and user programs. The firmware is a software embedded in electronic devices, which means it is permanently connected with the hardware functionally. It is usually saved in a flash memory, such as EPROM, EEPROM or ROM, and cannot be replaced by the user or only with special means or functions. User program: see glossary entry "User program" Global screen (WinCC) A screen that is opened in the system diagnostics window is a global screen. Diagnostics 122 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Glossary HMI device Human Machine Interface, device for visualization and control of automation processes. HMI diagnostics view (WinCC) The HMI diagnostics view is an object in WinCC. The HMI diagnostics view can only be used with Comfort Panels and WinCC Advanced RT. I/O module Device of the distributed I/O that is used as interface between the controller and the process. Industrial Ethernet Guideline for setting up Ethernet in an industrial environment. The main difference to the standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and interference immunity of the individual components. Memory reset Procedure to set the memories of the CPU to a defined initial state. Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of a single CPU at a specific time. The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems feature the STOP, STARTUP and RUN operating states. The primary CPU of the S7-1500R/H features the STOP, STARTUP, RUN, RUN-Syncup and RUN-Redundant operating states. The backup CPU features the STOP, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant operating states. PLC Programmable Logic Controller: Component of the CNC by which the machine manufacturer coordinates the interaction between the NC requirements (part program), the inputs of the machine operator and the current machine state. Primary CPU Role of a CPU in the S7-1500R/H redundant system. If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU controls the process. The backup CPU processes the user program synchronously and can take over the process control if the primary CPU fails. PROFIBUS Standard for fieldbus communication in automation technology. Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 123 Glossary PROFINET PROcess FIeld NETwork, open industrial Ethernet standard which further develops PROFIBUS and industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation, and engineering model defined by PROFIBUS International e.V., as an automation standard. Redundant systems Redundant systems are identified by the fact that important automation components are available in multiple units (redundant). Process control is maintained if a redundant component fails. Subnet Part of a network whose parameters must be synchronized with the devices (e.g., with PROFINET). It includes the bus components and all connected stations. Subnets can be linked by means of gateways, for example, to form a network. Synchronization module The synchronization module is used to provide a redundant connection between the CPUs of the S7-1500H redundant system. You require two synchronization modules per CPU, which you connect using a fiber-optic cable. System diagnostics In the SIMATIC environment, the term "system diagnostics" refers to diagnostics of devices and modules. System diagnostics is used, for example, to monitor the states of the following components in the system: Power supply, device, I/O. System diagnostics indicator (WinCC) The system diagnostics indicator is a predefined graphic symbol of the library which alerts you to errors in your plant and displays two states: No error, error System states The system states of the S7-1500R/H redundant system result from the operating states of the primary and backup CPU. The term 'system state' is used as simple expression that identifies the operating states of the two CPUs that occur at the same time. The S7-1500R/H redundant system features the system states STOP, STARTUP, RUN-Solo, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. Diagnostics 124 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Glossary Topology Structure of a network. Common structures include: Linear bus topology Ring topology Star topology Tree topology User program In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between user programs and the firmware of the CPU. The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a plant or process can be controlled. It is assigned to a programmable module (for example, CPU, FM) and can be structured in smaller units. Firmware: see glossary entry "Firmware of the CPU" Value status The value status describes a specific signal state. The value status is constantly updated and cyclically transmitted by the field device as quality statement together with the measured value. Web server Software/ communication service for data exchange using Ethernet. The web server provides the documents by means of standardized transmission protocols (HTTP, HTTPS) to a web browser. Documents can be static or dynamic upon request by the web browser composed from different sources by the web server. WinCC Windows Control Center: a PC-based process visualization system WinCC Runtime Component of the basic software WinCC Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 125 Index " F "Diagnostics" tab Alarm display, 42 Connection information, 42 Device information, 42 Inspector window, 42 FAQs Download certificate, 54 Implementing channel diagnostics in the user program, 75 A H HMI Accessible devices System diagnostics view, 62 Diagnostics status, 34 System diagnostics window, 62 Offline project, 34 HMI diagnostics view S7-1500R/H, 102 Comfort Panels, 62 Alarm display Details view, 66 Active alarms, 44 Device view, 66 Archive view, 44 Distributed I/O view, 66 Alarms Views, 66 Editing in the alarm editor, 82 WinCC Advanced RT, 62 Multilingual, 83 Application examples I Diagnostics in the user program with S7-1500, 75 System diagnostics with S7-1500 and TIA Portal, 75 I/O module Inputs, 50 Settings, 50 B Backup CPU, 105, 120 D Device information Online status, 42 Operating mode, 42 Devices & networks Current state, 36 Go online, 36 Diagnostics buffer Diagnostic events, 45 Retentive memory, 45 Display of the CPU Display options, 30 Input options, 30 Status information, 30 dynamize Object appearance, 71 L LED arrangement, 29 Library System diagnostics indicator, 69 O Online & diagnostics Activities, 39 Information, 39 Online access, 39 Online mode, 39 S7-1500R/H, 103 Online tools CPU operator panel, 48 Cycle time, 48 Memory, 48 Memory usage, 48 Diagnostics 126 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE Index Online view, 48 S7-1500R/H, 106 Task card, 48 P Primary CPU, 105, 120 Process image inputs, 76 Quality Information, 76 User datum, 76 Value status, 76 System diagnostics indicator Button as system diagnostics indicator, 71 Inserting, 69 System diagnostics window, 69 System diagnostics view, 62 Configuring, 63 System diagnostics indicator, 69 System diagnostics window, 62 Configuring, 63 Global screen, 63 U Q Quick start, 17 Using display, 18 Using STEP 7, 20 User program Instructions, 74 Response to diagnostics alarms, 74 W R Redundancy connection, 118 Redundant mode Diagnostics, 114 Redundant system, 103 RUN-Redundant system state Diagnostics, 114 RUN-Solo system state Diagnostics, 120 S S7-1500H, 116 S7-1500R/H Diagnostics, 100 Instructions, 121 Security events, 48 Setting options, 25 Symbol For comparison, 33 For hardware diagnostics, 32 For operating mode, 33 For software diagnostics, 33 Synchronization module, 116 System diagnostics Advantages, 16 Alarm settings, 26 Button, 71 Display concept, 16 Properties, 14 Web server Access to, 54 Activating, 52 Alarms, 57 Browser, 51 Certificate, 52 Configuring, 52 Diagnostics, 55 Diagnostics buffer, 56 HTTPS, 52 Integrated Web server, 51 Module information, 57 Motion Control diagnostics, 60 Topology, 59 Trace, 61 Web pages, 51 Diagnostics Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735838-AE 127 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Description SIMATIC / SINAMICS S7-1500, S7-1200 / S120, G120 Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual 12/2017 A5E31277292-AE 2 ___________________ Software user interface 3 ___________________ Operation 4 ___________________ Devices Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E31277292-AE 12/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation The diagnostics options available with the trace and logic analyzer function are described in this documentation. Depending on the device used, the recording options can vary. Required basic knowledge In order to understand this documentation, the following knowledge is required: General knowledge in the field of automation Knowledge about the use of Windows-based computers S7-1200/1500 CPUs, ET 200SP, ET 200Pro - Knowledge of the SIMATIC industrial automation system - Knowledge of working with STEP 7 SINAMICS Drives - Knowledge of working with the drive SIRIUS SIMOCODE pro, SIRIUS Soft Starter 3RW - Proficiency in using these systems Validity of the documentation This documentation applies to all products of the product series S7-1200, S7-1500, S7-1500 Software Controller, ET 200SP, CPU 1516(F)pro-2 PN, SINAMICS drives, SIRIUS SIMOCODE pro and SIRIUS Soft Starter 3RW as of TIA Portal V15. Conventions This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The pictures may differ slightly from the devices supplied. Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Preface "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal working area, you make the most of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests. You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete manuals or parts of them to make your own manual. You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Further support The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and automation systems can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-techdoku-portal). The online catalog and the online ordering system is available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 5 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 2 3 Description ................................................................................................................................................. 8 1.1 Supported hardware ................................................................................................................ 8 1.2 Recording of measured values with the trace function ............................................................ 8 1.3 Trace configuration, recording, installed trace and measurement......................................... 11 1.4 Data storage........................................................................................................................... 13 Software user interface ............................................................................................................................ 14 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 Project navigator .................................................................................................................... 16 User interface - "Traces" project tree folder ........................................................................... 16 User interface - "Measurements" project tree folder .............................................................. 18 User interface - "Installed measurements (memory card)" project tree folder ....................... 19 User interface - "Overlay measurements" project tree folder ................................................ 20 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.3.4 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 Working area .......................................................................................................................... 21 User interface - trace toolbar ................................................................................................. 21 User interface - Configuration tab .......................................................................................... 22 User interface - Configuration ................................................................................................ 22 User interface - Diagram tab .................................................................................................. 23 User interface - curve diagram............................................................................................... 23 User interface - signal table ................................................................................................... 29 Interface - Formula editor....................................................................................................... 33 User interface - Measurements (overlay measurements) ..................................................... 37 User interface - Signal selection tab (overlay measurements) .............................................. 40 User interface - Signal selection (overlay measurements) .................................................... 40 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 Trace task card ...................................................................................................................... 41 User interface - Measurement cursor pane ........................................................................... 41 User interface - Snapshots pane ........................................................................................... 43 2.4 2.4.1 Inspector window ................................................................................................................... 44 Interface - Inspector window .................................................................................................. 44 Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 45 3.1 Quick start .............................................................................................................................. 45 3.2 Using the trace function - overview ........................................................................................ 49 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 Project tree ............................................................................................................................. 50 Creating a trace...................................................................................................................... 50 Displaying a configuration ...................................................................................................... 50 Displaying a diagram ............................................................................................................. 51 Apply overlay measurement .................................................................................................. 51 Configuring objects in groups ................................................................................................ 52 Using the trace and logic analyzer function 6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Table of contents 4 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 Working area - general ...........................................................................................................53 Transferring the trace configuration to the device ..................................................................53 Activating/deactivating an installed trace ................................................................................54 Displaying the recording .........................................................................................................55 Analyze an ongoing recording ................................................................................................56 Saving measurements in the project ......................................................................................57 Exporting and importing measurements .................................................................................58 Transferring the trace configuration from the device to the project ........................................59 Deleting installed traces ..........................................................................................................60 3.5 3.5.1 Working area - Configuration tab ............................................................................................61 Configuring the trace...............................................................................................................61 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.6.7 Working area - Diagram tab ....................................................................................................62 Use of the curve diagram ........................................................................................................62 Use of the signal table ............................................................................................................64 Using the signal group in the signal table ...............................................................................65 Observation of fast signals .....................................................................................................66 Compare records (overlay measurements) ............................................................................67 Align measurements precisely (overlay measurements) ........................................................69 Printing a recording .................................................................................................................70 Devices .................................................................................................................................................... 71 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.6.1 4.1.6.2 4.1.6.3 4.1.7 4.1.7.1 4.1.7.2 4.1.7.3 4.1.7.4 4.1.7.5 S7-1200/1500 CPUs ...............................................................................................................71 Recordable variables ..............................................................................................................71 Lifetime of the installed trace configuration and recorded values ..........................................72 Recording levels .....................................................................................................................73 Quantity structure....................................................................................................................73 CPU load through trace recording ..........................................................................................73 Software user interface of the configuration ...........................................................................74 Structure of the user interface ................................................................................................74 User interface - Signals ..........................................................................................................75 Recording conditions ..............................................................................................................77 Configuration...........................................................................................................................87 Trace configuration - overview................................................................................................87 Selecting signals .....................................................................................................................88 Configuring the recording cycle and duration .........................................................................88 Configuring the trigger conditions ...........................................................................................89 Configure installed measurements (memory card).................................................................90 Glossary .................................................................................................................................................. 91 Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 93 Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 7 1 Description 1.1 Supported hardware If a device supports the trace and logic analyzer function, in the project tree below the device. "Traces" is offered for selection The following devices (Page 71) support the trace and logic analyzer function: SIMATIC S7-1200 CPUs (as of firmware version V4.0) SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200SP and CPU 1516pro-2 PN CPUs SIMATIC S7-1500 Software Controller SINAMICS drives that are supported in Startdrive SIRIUS SIMOCODE pro (with Simocode ES) SIRIUS Soft Starter 3RW (with Soft Starter ES) 1.2 Recording of measured values with the trace function Introduction The trace and logic analyzer function can be called in the project navigator (Page 14) by double-clicking an entry in the "Traces" system folder. The measurements on the memory card can also be read and displayed via the diagnostic interface of the Web server. You record device tags and evaluate the recordings with the trace and logic analyzer function. Tags are, for example, drive parameters or system and user tags of a CPU. The number of installed traces is hardware-dependent. The recordings are saved on the device and, when required, can be read out with the engineering system (ES) and saved permanently. The trace and logic analyzer function is therefore suitable for monitoring highly dynamic processes. The recorded values are overwritten when the recording is activated again. The trace and logic analyzer functions are also used in the commissioning editors of technology objects (for example, axle control panels). Active recordings from the axis control panel are displayed in the "Traces" system folder as installed traces. Recordings can be added to the measurements in the curve diagram of the axis control panel or the PID via a shortcut menu command. Depending on the device (Page 71) used, the recording options can vary. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Description 1.2 Recording of measured values with the trace function A quick start (Page 45) for working with the trace and logic analyzer function can be found in the Operation section. The following figure shows the method of operation of the "Traces": Trace configuration on the programming device (PG) in the TIA Portal You can specify the signals to be recorded, the duration of the recording and the trigger condition in the trace configuration. The trace configuration depends on the device and is described at the respective device (Page 71). Transferring the trace configuration from the PG to the device You can transfer the complete trace configuration (Page 53) to the device when an online connection is established. Waiting for the recording If the installed trace configuration is activated (Page 54), then the recording is performed independently of the PG. The recording is started as soon as the trigger condition is satisfied. Transferring the measurement from the device to the PG The saving of the measurement in the project (Page 57) stores the measurement in the opened project of the TIA Portal. The measurement can be saved at any time after completing the recording, irrespective of the time of the measurement. Evaluating, managing and saving the measurement Numerous options are available for the evaluation of the measurement in the curve diagram and in the signal table (Page 55). Various display types are possible, for example, a bit representation for binary signals. Signal waves from different measurements can be put together as an overlay measurement and compared with each other. Measurements can also be exported and imported as a file. With the saving of the project (Page 57) in the TIA Portal, the measurements transferred to the project are also saved. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 9 Description 1.2 Recording of measured values with the trace function Additional features The following features are supported as of TIA Portal V14: Saving of trace configurations and measurements in libraries Multiuser support for trace configurations and measurements (device-dependent) Global search in the project Using the trace and logic analyzer function 10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Description 1.3 Trace configuration, recording, installed trace and measurement 1.3 Trace configuration, recording, installed trace and measurement This section explains the meaning and relationships of the terms: trace configuration, recording, installed trace and measurement. Trace configuration Implement the following settings in the trace configuration: Signals to be recorded Recording conditions - Sampling - Trigger - Installed measurements (memory card) Recording A recording is performed in the device. There is only one recording for each installed trace configuration. When a new recording is started, the old recording is overwritten. An installed recording is not retentive (it is lost when the device is switched off/on) but can be saved permanently in the project as a measurement. Installed trace An installed trace consists of a trace configuration and optionally a recording. The maximum number of installed traces depends on the device. The trace configuration is stored retentively on the device. The retentivity of the trace configuration may also be configurable depending on the device, e.g. with the S120. Measurement A measurement consists of a trace configuration and a recording, provided that recorded data is present. Each installed trace can be saved as a measurement in the project. The recording of a measurement can be viewed offline. The configuration for a measurement can be transferred to the "Traces" folder using drag & drop. Installed measurements (memory card) The folder contains measurements that are saved on the device (e.g. on the memory card). These measurements are retentive and can only be deleted by the user. The installed measurements can be transferred to the Measurements folder using drag & drop and are then saved as measurements in the project. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 11 Description 1.3 Trace configuration, recording, installed trace and measurement Trace configuration with an installed trace of the same name Usually, there is a trace configuration in the project with the same name for an installed trace. When there is an online connection, this trace is displayed with the icon in the project tree. See also User interface - "Traces" project tree folder (Page 16). Overlay measurement The overlay measurement allows a comparison and analysis of signals from different measurements with each other. The measurements can be synchronized with each other and displayed as overlay measurements. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Description 1.4 Data storage 1.4 Data storage The trace toolbar and the curve diagram also enable the transfer of the trace configuration and the viewing of the recording. The following figure is a schematic diagram of the data storage: Note Saving the trace configuration and measurement You save the trace configuration and measurement with the project in the TIA Portal. If you close the project without saving, the trace configurations and the measurements transferred to the project are discarded. The trace editor can be closed and reopened without loss of data until the project is closed. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 13 2 Software user interface Display areas The user interface of the trace and logic analyzer function consists of several areas. The example in the figure below shows the division of the user interface in the TIA Portal: Using the trace and logic analyzer function 14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface Project navigator Management and creation of the trace and measurements directly in the project tree and via context menu commands. Working area Title bar of the working area Shows the device to which the current display belongs. Trace toolbar Buttons for managing the trace in the project and device: * Activation/deactivation of installed traces * Deletion of installed traces * Transfer of trace configurations and measurements between the device and the project * Export of trace configurations and measurements * Switchover between offline and online display Status display of the trace Display of the current status of the recording. Configuration tab Device-specific configuration of the recording duration, trigger condition and signal selection. See Device-specific descriptions (Page 71). Diagram tab Display of the recorded values as a curve diagram and the signals from the displayed measurement. Signal selection tab Display of all signals that are contained in the overlay measurements. "Trace" task card Display of the measurement cursor data with mathematical evaluation and snapshots. Inspector window Display of general information about the trace configuration Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 15 Software user interface 2.1 Project navigator 2.1 Project navigator 2.1.1 User interface - "Traces" project tree folder Trace configurations and installed traces are displayed in the "Traces" folder. More information about the "Traces" sub-folder is provided in the following sections. Double-click a trace to open the corresponding "Diagram" or "Configuration" tab in the working area. Icons in the "Traces" folder The following table explains the icons in the Icon "Traces" folder: Description Add trace configuration Double-click the icon to add a new trace configuration. Trace configuration (offline) Double-click the icon to open the "Configuration" tab. Installed trace (online) The icon is only displayed when there is no offline trace configuration of the same name for the installed trace. Double-click the icon to open the "Diagram" tab. Trace configuration with an installed trace of the same name If the button is deactivated, the trace configuration from the project is displayed. The trace corresponds to a trace configuration. If the button is activated, the trace configuration from the device is displayed. The trace corresponds to an installed trace. Double-click on the symbol to open the "Diagram" tab of the trace in the device. Status When there is an online connection, the status is displayed in the right-hand column of the project tree. The status is also displayed as tooltip above the respective icon. The following table shows the meaning of the icons: Icon Description Online and offline configuration are identical Online and offline configuration are different Configuration only exists online Using the trace and logic analyzer function 16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.1 Project navigator Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for the "Traces" system folder: Shortcut menu command Description "Add new group" Inserts a new folder. "Add new trace" Inserts a new trace configuration and opens the configuration tab. "Import trace configuration" Imports a trace configuration from a file. The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for trace configurations installed traces / : Shortcut menu command and Trace configuration Installed trace Description "Copy" x - Copies the trace configuration or trace to the clipboard. "Paste" x - Inserts a trace configuration or measurement from the clipboard. "Delete" x x Deletes the selected objects from the project tree or from the device. "Rename" x - Switches the selected object to the editing mode. "Export trace configuration" x - Export a trace configuration as a file with the file extension "* .ttcfgx" or a trace in the device with the file extension "* .ttrecx". For reasons of compatibility, the "* .ttcfg" and "* .ttrec" file extensions are supported by TIA Portal V12, although they do not contain any information about the device family. The trace configuration can also be copied across devices within the same device family. Several objects can be selected. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 17 Software user interface 2.1 Project navigator 2.1.2 User interface - "Measurements" project tree folder The "Measurements" folder shows the saved measurements. Icons in the "Measurements" folder The following table explains the icons in the Icon "Measurements" folder: Description Measurement (offline) Double-click the icon to open the "Diagram" tab. The configuration for a measurement can be transferred to the "Traces" folder using drag & drop. Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for the folder: "Measurements" system Shortcut menu command Description "Add new group" Inserts a new folder. "Import measurement" Imports a measurement from a file with the "*.ttrecx" file extension. The import is device-independent. For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for measurements : Shortcut menu command Description "Copy" Copies the trace configuration of the selected objects to the clipboard. "Paste" Inserts a measurement from the clipboard. "Delete" Deletes the selected objects from the project tree or from the device. "Rename" Switches the selected object to the editing mode. "Generate new overlay measurement" Generates a new overlay measurement with the selected measurements. "Export measurement" Exports a measurement with the last saved standard view The measurement is saved with the extension "*.ttrecx" or "*.csv". For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. The measurements can also be copied independent of the device family. Several objects can be selected. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.1 Project navigator 2.1.3 User interface - "Installed measurements (memory card)" project tree folder The folder shows all measurements present on the memory card. The folder is only displayed when there is an online connection to the device. Drag folders or measurements contained here to the "Measurements" system folder using drag & drop. This transfers the measurements to the project. Icons in the "Traces" folder The following table explains the icons in the system folder Icon : Description Folders generated automatically with information on the recording activation time: The name of the folder cannot be changed. Installed measurement Double-click the icon to open the "Diagram" tab. The time stamp in the name shows the occurrence of the trigger event. Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for the folder : Shortcut menu command Description "Copy" Copies the selected objects to the clipboard. "Delete" Deletes the selected objects from the project tree and from the device. The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for measurements : Shortcut menu command Description "Open" Opens the measurement in the "Diagram" tab. "Copy" Copies the selected objects to the clipboard. "Delete" Deletes the selected objects from the project tree and from the device. "Export measurement" Exports a measurement as a file with the extension "*.ttrecx" or "*.csv". For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. "Properties" Displays the general properties of the measurement (Page 44). Several objects can be selected. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 19 Software user interface 2.1 Project navigator 2.1.4 User interface - "Overlay measurements" project tree folder The system folder "Overlay measurements" shows the configured overlay measurements. Icons in the "Overlay measurements" folder The following table explains the icons in the system folder Icon "Overlay measurements": Description Add new overlay measurements Double-click the icon to add a new overlay measurement and open the "Diagram" tab. Overlay measurement Double-click the icon to open the "Diagram" tab. Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for the system folder measurements" or for a group folder contained within this : "Overlay Shortcut menu command Description "Add new group" Inserts a new folder. "Add new overlay measurement" Inserts a new overlay measurement and opens the "Diagram" tab. "Import overlay measurement" Imports an overlay measurement from a file with the file extension "*.ttcbmx" The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for overlay measurements : Shortcut menu command Description "Open" Opens the selected overlay measurements in the working area. "Import measurement" Imports a measurement from a file with the file extension "*.ttrecx" For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. "Export overlay measurement" Exports an overlay measurement "Copy" Copies the selected objects to the clipboard. "Paste" Pastes measurements, measurements from traces in the device or from an overlay measurement from the clipboard. The overlay measurement is saved with the extension "*.ttcbmx" or "*.csv". The "*.ttcbmx" format can also be imported again. Multiple objects can be inserted from the clipboard if they are all of the same type. "Delete" Deletes the selected objects from the project tree or from the device. "Rename" Switches the selected object to the editing mode. "Properties" Displays the general properties for the overlay measurements. The overlay measurements can also be copied device-wide. Several objects can be selected. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area 2.2 Working area 2.2.1 User interface - trace toolbar Tools are available for handling the trace via buttons. The following table shows the functions of the buttons: Icon Description Transfer the selected trace configuration to the device The selected trace configuration is transferred to the device. Transfer the selected trace configuration from the device The selected trace configuration is transferred from the device to the project. Observe on/off Change of the display between online and offline. Note Once monitor and automatic scaling are activated at the same time, no more actions can be undone using the "Undo" button. Note When an installed trace is first started the display in the curve diagram is set to automatic scaling by default. Make sure when the recording is restarted that any changes to the scaling settings are retained. Reactivate automatic scaling manually if necessary in order to monitor the recording. Activate recording If the recording of an installed trace is repeated, then the settings relevant for the display (curve diagram and signal table) are also retained for the new recording. Note When a recording is restarted, the previously recorded values are lost. To save the recorded values, save the measurement in the project (Page 57) before you activate the recording again. Deactivate recording Delete installed trace Deletes the selected trace from the device. Automatically repeat recording After a recording, the recording is automatically activated again. The display of the curve is refreshed when the recording is completed. This type of refresh is particularly suitable for monitoring fast signals (Page 66). Transfer the selected measurement from the device to the project The measurement is added to the "Measurements" system folder. Note In order to be able to save the installed trace data as a measurement, it must first have been displayed once in the curve diagram. The recording data is loaded from the device when displayed. If necessary wait until the display is updated, as only the displayed data is transferred to the project in all cases. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 21 Software user interface 2.2 Working area Icon Description Export trace configuration Exports a trace configuration as a file with the file extension "*.ttcfgx". For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttcfg" file extension is supported by V12, although it does not contain information about the device family. Generate a trace configuration Generates a new trace configuration from the measurement. Export measurement with the settings from the current view Exports a measurement as a file with the file extension "*.ttrecx" or "*.csv". For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. Import measurement (only with overlay measurements) Imports a measurement from a file with the file extension "*.ttrecx". For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. Export overlay measurement (only with overlay measurements) The overlay measurement is saved with the extension "*.ttcbmx" or "*.csv". The "*.ttcbmx" format can also be imported again. Select a measurement (only with overlay measurements) The drop down list box contains the imported measurements. Select the desired measurement to display the configuration. 2.2.2 User interface - Configuration tab 2.2.2.1 User interface - Configuration The trace configuration depends on the device and is described at the respective device (Page 71). Using the trace and logic analyzer function 22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area 2.2.3 User interface - Diagram tab 2.2.3.1 User interface - curve diagram The curve diagram displays the selected signals of a recording. Analog signals are displayed in the upper curve diagram. Binary signals are displayed as bit track in the lower diagram. You can adjust the display of the signals in the signal table (Page 29) and with the toolbar of the curve diagram. Setting options and displays in the curve diagram The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: The scale in the diagram applies to the selected (highlighted in gray) signal in the legend. The legend can be moved and its size can be adjusted with the mouse. The icon shows the device trigger time with a vertical line. A drop-down list for selecting the unit is available below the curve for the "Time" setting for the time axis. The "Automatic" setting automatically adjusts the unit based on the displayed time range. Note Non-interpretable data types Some data types require a defined format, e.g. the S7 data type LTime_of_Day. If this format is not available, the data type is interpreted as INT. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 23 Software user interface 2.2 Working area Functions using the mouse wheel The following table shows which functions are possible in the curve diagram using the mouse wheel: Function of the mouse wheel Description Move the curve diagram vertically Turning the mouse wheel moves the display in the upper curve diagram up or down. If the signals are arranged in traces the display for the group is shifted that is located below the cursor. The mouse pointer must be positioned above the curve with the analog signals. Move the curve diagram horizontally Turning the mouse wheel with the button pressed down moves the display in the curve diagram to the left or the right. The cursor must be positioned above the curve diagram. Zoom in and zoom out Turning the mouse wheel with the button pressed down zooms in or out of the display in the curve diagram. The cursor position is the starting point for zooming in or out. The value axis of the lower curve diagram (bit tracks) is not affected. The cursor must be positioned above the curve diagram. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area Functions using the keyboard The following table shows which keyboard commands are possible with a focus on the curve diagram: Shortcut key Description Selecting a measurement cursor The vertical measurement cursor t1 is selected or deselected. The vertical measurement cursor t2 is selected or deselected. The horizontal measurement cursor Y1 is selected or deselected. The horizontal measurement cursor Y2 is selected or deselected. The next measurement cursor is selected. Positioning a vertical measurement cursor , With the unit "Samples", the selected measurement cursor is moved by one sample by the signal in the foreground. With the unit "Time", it is moved by one pixel. , With the unit "Samples", the selected measurement cursor is moved by 10 samples by the signal in the foreground. With the unit "Time", it is moved by 10 pixels. Positioning a horizontal measurement cursor , The selected measurement cursor is moved by one pixel along the value axis. , The selected measurement cursor is moved by 10 pixels along the value axis. Display of vertical measurement cursors The vertical measurement cursors are shown or hidden. The vertical measurement cursors are shown and centered for the current view. Changing the view Move view Set 100% view in open editor Apply zoom in with 10% Apply zoom out with 10% Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 25 Software user interface 2.2 Working area Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands in the curve diagram: Shortcut menu command Description "Save diagram as image" Exports the current display in graphic format, e.g. as a bitmap. "Copy image to clipboard" Copies the current display to the clipboard. "Center measurement cursors" Positions the activated measurement cursors at a central point in the current display. "Add to measurements" Adds the displayed recording to the folder. (only axis control panel and PID) "Automatic bit track height" "Measurements" system Automatically adjusts the height of the bit tracks and thereby determines the size of the lower curve diagram. The setting is automatically deactivated once you change the space allocation between the curve diagrams manually. Note You can change the vertical space allocation between the upper and lower curve diagram. To do this drag the time axis of the upper curve diagram up or down with the mouse. Toolbar of the curve diagram Tools are available for adapting the display via buttons. The following table shows the functions of the buttons: Icon Function Description Undo zoom Undoes the zoom function executed last. If several zoom functions have been executed, they can be undone step-by-step. Redo zoom Redoes the last undone zoom function. If several zoom functions have been undone, they can be redone step-by-step. Standard view Uses the current view as standard for this recording. If the trace recording is shown again later, the standard view is restored. Move view Moves the display with the mouse button pressed. Zoom selection Selection of an arbitrary range with the mouse button pressed. The display is scaled to the range selection. Vertical zoom selection Selection of a vertical range with the mouse button pressed. The display is scaled to the range selection. Horizontal zoom selection Selection of a horizontal range with the mouse button pressed. The display is scaled to the range selection. Zoom in Enlargement of the display. The ranges of the time axis and value axis are reduced every time the button is clicked. The curves are displayed larger. Zoom out Reduction of the display. The ranges of the time axis and value axis are increased every time the button is clicked. The curves are displayed smaller. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area Icon Function Description Display all Scales the display of the available data so that the entire time range and all values are displayed. Automatic scaling of the value axis Scaling of the display so that all values are displayed for the currently displayed time range. The relative scaling ratio between the signals may change. Note The automatic scaling of the value axis is stopped when the zoom function is activated for the value axis. This button reactivates the automatic adjustments to the minimum/maximum values. Show the overall time range Scaling of the display so that the values in the value range currently displayed are displayed for the overall time range. The value range displayed only then changes if "Display all values" is activated. Note The automatic scaling of the time axis is stopped when a zoom function is activated for the time axis. This button reactivates the automatic adjustments for the time range. Arrange in tracks Activate or deactivate the trace arrangement. When the trace arrangement is activated the signals are arranged among themselves with the relevant value axes. Signal groups are displayed in the same trace. This setting does not affect the display for the bit tracks. Unit changeover of the time axis Switching the unit of the time axis The following units are adjustable: * Measurement points * Time (relative time related to the trigger time) * Trigger stamp of the measurement points Display samples The samples are displayed as small circles on the curves. Interpolated representation Linear interpolation between two consecutive measuring points for floating point numbers If linear interpolation is not enabled (default), the connection between the measuring points is drawn in steps. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 27 Software user interface 2.2 Working area Icon Function Description Display vertical measurement cursors Display of the vertical measurement cursors. The vertical position of the two measurement cursors can be moved with the mouse. The associated measured values and the difference of the measurement cursors corresponding to the position are shown in the signal table. Display the "Measurement cursor" pane (Page 41) in the Trace task card in order to display further information. Also use the cursor keys. The following actions are possible for vertical measurement cursors with the cursor keys: Display horizontal measurement cursors * Select * Positioning * Show or hide measurement cursor * Center measurement cursors Display of the horizontal measurement cursors. The horizontal position of the two measurement cursors can be moved with the mouse. Display the "Measurement cursor" pane (Page 41) in the Trace task card in order to display the values or to reposition the measurement cursor through entering the position. Also use the cursor keys. The following actions are possible for horizontal measurement cursors with the cursor keys: Time range display * Select * Positioning Show or hide the time range display below the curve The time range display shows the area in the curve in yellow based on a selected signal. The yellow area can be moved with the mouse and the borders can be changed horizontally. Display chart legend Showing or hiding of the legend in the curve diagram and the bit track labels. Align the chart legend to the left Display of the legend and the bit track labels on the left side of the curve diagram. Align the chart legend to the right Display of the legend and the bit track labels on the right side of the curve diagram. Change background color Changeover between various background colors. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area 2.2.3.2 User interface - signal table The signal table lists the signals of the selected measurement and provides setting options for some properties. If recording data of installed traces is displayed and the settings are changed in the signal table, these settings are retained until there is a change to the offline mode. If the installed trace is added to the measurements, the current settings of the signal table are saved in the measurement. The signals can be sorted using drag-and-drop. The bits of a signal can be resorted within a signal. Setting options and displays in the signal table The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 29 Software user interface 2.2 Working area The following table shows the settings and displays of the recorded signals: Column Description Signal or error symbol Signal Failsafe signal Signal from a data block Signal from a failsafe data block Calculated signal (formula) Error in the formula of the calculated signal Selection for the display in the curve diagram - a maximum of 16 signals can be selected. The point indicates that at least one bit has been selected for display as bit track for the signal in the bit selection. "Signal reference" Automatically generated number of the signal The signal can be accessed via the signal reference in the formulas. "Name" Display of the signal name A click on the name of a displayed signal updates the scale in the curve diagram. You can enter a name for a calculated signal in the last line without a signal symbol. The calculated signal is entered with its name. "Measurement" Display of the measurement (in the "Diagram" tab only with overlay measurements) Shows the name of the measurement to which the signal belongs. Open bit selection Individual bits can also be selected for the following data types for display as a bit track in the lower curve diagram. * Byte, Word, DWord, LWord * SInt, USInt, Int, UInt, DInt, UDInt, LInt, ULInt Example of an opened bit selection for the DWORD data type: Select or deselect the relevant bit for display by clicking the "Data type" Display of the data type "Display format" Display format of the signal icon. The display formats supported for the signal are offered for selection. A display format suitable for the data type is set with "Default". "Address" Display of the address of the signal The field remains empty with optimized / type correct tags. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area Column Description "Formula" Display or entry of a formula A formula can contain mathematical functions with numbers and signals. Use the formula editor to conveniently create formulas. Call of the formula editor for calculated signals Click on the icon to open the formula editor. "Color" Display and setting option for the color of the signal "Signal group" Display or input of the signal group name for one signal group The Y-scales are scaled identically for all signals of one signal group. Enter an identical signal group name for those signals that are to be scaled identically. Signals can be removed from the signal group by deleting the signal group name. The signal groups can be saved via the function "Use current view as standard" (button ). Notes Binary signals cannot be grouped. In hex display format, group only the signals with a format compatible to the sign for the display. Gray field for chain icon Move the cursor over the gray field or the chain icon ( or to a signal group or delete the signal from the signal group. Clicking the signal group. chain icon adds the signal to a signal group or creates a new Clicking the chain icon removes the signal from the signal group. For a selected signal with signal group, the the same signal group. Input field ) to add the signal chain icon displays all signals of The input field displays the signal group name. As an alternative to the chain icon, you can assign or delete a group name via text input in this field. "Min. Y-scale" Display or input of the minimum value for the scaling of the signal "Max. Y-scale" Display or input of the maximum value for the scaling of the signal "Y(t1)" Display of the value at the position of the first measurement cursor "Y(t2)" Display of the value at the position of the second measurement cursor "Y" Display of the value difference between the first and the second measurement cursor "Unit" Display of the unit (e.g. for used-based values from technology objects) "Comment" Display and input option for a comment about the signal Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 31 Software user interface 2.2 Working area Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands of the signal table: Shortcut menu command Description "Insert calculated signal" Inserts a new calculated signal at the top of the table "Edit formula" Opens the formula editor for the calculated signal "Cut" Cannot be selected. "Copy" Copies the contents of the selected lines to the clipboard. "Paste" Cannot be selected. "Delete" Cannot be selected. "Rename" Cannot be selected "Display format" Allows you to switch the display format The display formats supported for the signal are offered for selection. "Display signal(s)" Displays the selected signals in the curve diagram. "Hide signal(s)" Hides the selected signals in the curve diagram. See also Use of the signal table (Page 64) Using the signal group in the signal table (Page 65) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area 2.2.3.3 Interface - Formula editor The formula editor provides various mathematical functions for analyzing signals. Open the button. editor in the signal table by clicking the Configuration options and displays in the formula editor The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: Figure 2-1 Formula editor Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 33 Software user interface 2.2 Working area The following table shows the configuration options and displays of the formula editor: Field/Button Description "Name" Display and input of the name for the created formula The name must be unique and only contain characters that are allowed in Windows file names. "Data type" Display of formula data type The data type is pre-assigned with a floating-point number of LREAL type and cannot be changed. "Unit" Display and input of a unit Freely specified user-defined unit. Drop-down list with signals "Formula entry" Selection of the signals The drop-down list contains the signals from the signal table and inserts a selected signal into the formula. Text field to display and enter the formula Create a formula by typing into this text box or by using the buttons for the mathematical functions. Signals can be referenced in the text box using the signal reference with a prefixed $ character or the name in double quotes in the formula. Mixed input is possible. Bits from a bit selection (e.g. below the INT data type) are not allowed in the formula. Mathematical functions + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication / Division () Brackets Grouping expressions SQR Square SQRT Square root ABS Absolute value Calculates the size of a number. Examples ABS(5) 5 ABS(-3) 3 MOD ABS(-3.14) 3.14 Modulo Calculates the residual value of a division Examples MOD(5,3) 2 REC MOD(3.14,3) 0.14 Reciprocal value (1/x) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 34 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area Field/Button Description DIFF 1) Numerical differentiation Examples INT Formula: DIFF($0,SAMPLETIME) 1) Numerical integration Examples RMS 1) Formula: INT($0,SAMPLETIME) Quadratic mean The quadratic mean is given by first adding the squares of all the measured values and dividing them by the number of measured values. The quadratic mean is the square root of this value. Examples AV Formula: RMS($0,SAMPLETIME) Mean value filter from 1st to 5th order If the specification of an order is missing, the mean filter of the 1st order is used. Examples AV($0,1) Mean filter 1st order AV($0,5) Mean filter 5th order Mathematical constant Pi AM Arithmetic mean DIF Simple subtraction with mean filter from 1st to 5th order The arithmetic mean is a moving average over five measuring points. If the specification of an order is missing, simple subtraction is performed with a 1st order filter. Examples DIF($0,1) Single subtraction with 1st order filter DIF($0,5) Single subtraction with 5th order filter DIF($0) Single subtraction with 1st order filter Example: Calculate an acceleration curve from a velocity signal $0: Velocity signal in meters per second Cycle time of the constant cycle velocity recording: 1 ms Formula: DIF($0,1)/0.001 DIF2 Unit: m/s2 Double subtraction with mean filter from 1st to 5th order If the specification of an order is missing, then double subtraction is executed with a 1st order filter. Examples DIF2($0,1) Double subtraction with 1st order filter DIF2($0,5) Double subtraction with 5th order filter DIF2($0) Double subtraction with 1st order filter Example: Calculate an acceleration curve from a position sequence $0: Position sequence in meters Cycle time of the constant cycle position recording: 1 ms Formula: DIF2($0,1)/SQR(0.001) Unit: m/s2 Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 35 Software user interface 2.2 Working area Field/Button Description "Show signal name" Display of the signal names "Validate" Check the validity of the formula "Result of validation" Result of validation "OK" Transfer the entries in the formula editor "Cancel" Discard the entries in the formula editor 1) If the check box is selected, the signal names in the formula are displayed instead of the signal references. Displays the result of the validation and indicates errors and error locations. The constant SAMPLETIME is only available for equidistant recording cycles. Time unit for SAMPLETIME is always s. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 36 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area 2.2.3.4 User interface - Measurements (overlay measurements) The Measurements tab displays the individual measurements and among other things provides the setting options for synchronization. Setting options and displays in the Measurements tab The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 37 Software user interface 2.2 Working area The following table shows the settings and displays for the measurements: Column Description Alignment of the measurements "Trigger/ measurement point" Alignment of the measurements in accordance with the trigger or measurement point The individual zero point for the measurement is predefined in the table under the "Alignment" column. "Time stamp Alignment of the measurements in accordance with their time stamp (absolute time)" The signals are aligned in accordance with the time from the absolute time stamp. Table columns Static display of the measurement icon "Name" Display and change options for the measurement name The name must be a unique one and can be changed. "Alignment" Alignment of the measurement (only adjustable with the "Trigger/ measurement point" check box activated) Determines the individual zero point for a measurement. All signals for the measurement are displayed in relation to this zero point. The following settings are possible: "Offset" * Trigger * First measurement point following the trigger event * First measurement point * Last measurement point Offset related to the time axis Moves the measurement left or right by the offset stated on the time axis. The offset can also be transferred via the clipboard to the cell from the X value of the measurement cursor. See Align measurements precisely (overlay measurements) (Page 69). "Time stamp" Display of the trigger time "Comment" Display and input option for a comment about the signal Using the trace and logic analyzer function 38 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.2 Working area Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands of the signal table: Shortcut menu command Description "Cut" Cannot be selected. "Copy" Copies the contents of the selected lines to the clipboard. "Paste" Cannot be selected. "Delete" Cannot be selected. "Rename" Switches the selected cell to the editing mode. "Import measurement" Imports a measurement from a file, e.g. with the "*.ttrecx" file extension. The import is device-independent and also suitable, for example, for comparing measurements of a PLC with the measurements of a drive device. For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. "Export measurement" Exports a measurement as a file with the extension "*.ttrecx" or "*.csv". For reasons of compatibility, the "*.ttrec" file extension is supported in V12, although it does not contain any information about the device family. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 39 Software user interface 2.2 Working area 2.2.4 User interface - Signal selection tab (overlay measurements) 2.2.4.1 User interface - Signal selection (overlay measurements) The Signal selection tab shows the signals for all measurements and allows signals that are presented in the signal table of the diagram to be preselected. Setting options and displays in the Signal selection tab. The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: The following table shows the settings and displays for the table: Column Description Static display of the signal icon "Available in the diagram" Selection for the display in the curve diagram When the selection is activated the signal is transferred to the signal table for the curve diagram. "Measurement" Display of the measurement to which the signal belongs "Name" Display of the signal name "Data type " Display of the data type "Address" Display of the address (not for symbolic tags) "Comment" Display of a comment on the signal You will find further information on the specific settings in User interface - signal table (Page 29). Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands for the signal selection: Shortcut menu command Description "Copy" Copies the content of the selected lines to the clipboard. "Display selection in the signal table" The selected signals are displayed in the signal table and are available in the diagram. "Remove selection from the signal table" The removed signals are not available in the diagram. Several objects can be selected. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 40 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.3 Trace task card 2.3 Trace task card 2.3.1 User interface - Measurement cursor pane The "Measurement cursor" pane shows the position of the measurement cursor in the curve diagram and the values at the intersection points. Setting options and displays of the "Measurement cursor" pane The figure below shows the "Measurement cursor" pane: Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 41 Software user interface 2.3 Trace task card The following table describes the settings and displays: Setting/display Description Horizontal measurement cursor Y1 Position of first measurement cursor The value states the position in relation to the scale of the signal currently selected. You also have the option of specifying a new position for the measurement cursor in this entry field for moving with the mouse. Y2 Position of the second measurement cursor The value states the position in relation to the scale of the signal currently selected. You also have the option of specifying a new position for the measurement cursor in this entry field for moving with the mouse. Y Display of the position difference between the first and the second measurement cursor Vertical measurement cursor t1 Position of first measurement cursor You also have the option of specifying a new position for the measurement cursor in this entry field for moving with the mouse. t2 Position of the second measurement cursor You also have the option of specifying a new position for the measurement cursor in this entry field for moving with the mouse. t Display of the position difference between the first and the second measurement cursor Intersection points with selected signal Y(t1) Display of the value at the position of the first measurement cursor Y(t2) Display of the value at the position of the second measurement cursor Y Display of the value difference between the first and the second measurement cursor Mathematical analysis in the range of the measurement cursor*[t1;t2] for the selected signal AM(Y) Mean The arithmetic mean is calculated for the range between the vertical measurement cursors. INT(Y) Integral The integral is calculated for the range between the vertical measurement cursors. RMS(Y) RMS value The root-mean square (RMS value) is calculated for the range between the vertical measurement cursors. See also User interface - curve diagram (Page 23) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 42 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Software user interface 2.3 Trace task card 2.3.2 User interface - Snapshots pane The "Snapshots" pane allows the user to save and restore different views for a measurement. A snapshot is taken of the current view in the "Diagram" tab. The snapshots are saved in the measurement with the project. Setting options and displays of the "Snapshots" pane The figure below shows the "Snapshots" pane: The following table shows the functions of the buttons: Icon Description Generate snapshot of the current view Saves the current view as a snapshot in the "Diagram" tab. The following table shows the settings and displays: Column Description Static display of the snapshot symbol "Name" Display and change options for the name "Time stamp" Display of the snapshot generation time "Comment" Display and input option for a comment Several rows can be selected and deleted. Double-clicking on a row opens the measurement with the saved view in the "Diagram" tab. Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands of the table: Shortcut menu command Description "Restore snapshot" Shows the measurement with the saved view in the "Diagram" tab. "Delete" Deletes the snapshot "Rename" Switches the cell to the editing mode Several rows can be selected and deleted. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 43 Software user interface 2.4 Inspector window 2.4 Inspector window 2.4.1 Interface - Inspector window The Inspector window displays general information about the trace. Additional information is available for measurements: Time stamp range The availability of the time stamps depends on the configured recording conditions. Measuring point range Cycle time range For equidistant cycle recordings, the time duration between two measurement points is displayed. This time, for example, can be used in the formula editor. Sample time stamp The following figure shows the time stamps for a measurement: Note Analysis of measurements with sporadically occurring recording condition When evaluating your measurements, keep in mind that the recording condition between the activation time and the trigger time may not have been fulfilled. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 44 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 3 Operation 3.1 Quick start This description shows the steps for a recording of the S7-1500 CPU as an example. The displayed settings can differ depending on the device. Requirement A device is configured that supports the trace and logic analyzer function. Creating a trace The following figure shows the project tree with the device: "Traces" system folder below the Procedure: 1. Double-click the "Add new trace" entry. A new trace configuration area. is created and the "Configuration" tab opens in the working 2. Adapt the name of the trace configuration by clicking the text. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 45 Operation 3.1 Quick start Selecting signals The following figure shows the configuration of the signals: Procedure: 1. Select the signals to be recorded in the "Signals" area. Or: 2. Drag one or more signals, e.g. from a tag table, and drop them in the signal table. Configuring the recording cycle The following figure shows the configuration of the sampling: Procedure: 1. Configure the sampling. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 46 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.1 Quick start Configuring the trigger The following figure shows the configuration of the trigger: Procedure: 1. Configure the trigger mode and the condition for the selected trigger. Transferring the trace configuration to the device Procedure: 1. Transfer the trace configuration to the device with the button. The following functions are executed: - An online connection is established to the device. - The trace configuration is transferred to the device. - The monitoring is activated. - The display switches to the "Diagram" tab. Activating a recording Procedure: 1. Click the button. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 47 Operation 3.1 Quick start Displaying the recording The following figure shows the curve diagram with a recording: Procedure: 1. Wait until the "Recording" or "Recording completed" status is displayed in the status display of the trace. 2. Switch to the "Diagram" tab. 3. Click the icon of a signal in the signal table. The individual bits of the signal are offered for display as a bit track. 4. In the signal table, select or deselect the individual signals and bits for display with the icon. Saving the measurement in the project Procedure: 1. Transfer the measurement to the project with the button. The measurement is displayed in the project tree under the folder. "Measurements" system See also User interface - trace toolbar (Page 21) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 48 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.2 Using the trace function - overview 3.2 Using the trace function - overview Requirement A device is configured in the TIA Portal that supports the trace and logic analyzer function and to which an online connection has been established. Procedure The following table shows a procedural overview with typical steps when working with the trace and logic analyzer function. Step Description 1 Creating a trace (Page 50) 2 Configuring the trace (Page 61) 3 Transferring the trace configuration to the device (Page 53) 4 Activating/deactivating an installed trace (Page 54) 5 Monitoring the recording (Page 55) 6 Saving measurements in the project (Page 57) 7 Displaying the recording (Page 55) 8 Analyze an ongoing recording (Page 56) 9 Compare records (overlay measurements) (Page 67) See also Displaying a configuration (Page 50) Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 49 Operation 3.3 Project tree 3.3 Project tree 3.3.1 Creating a trace Traces can be created in the form of trace configurations in the project navigator. The following instructions describe how you can create a trace configuration under the "Traces" system folder Procedure To create a trace configuration, proceed as follows: 1. Double-click the "Add new trace" entry. A new trace configuration is created. 3.3.2 Displaying a configuration Requirement A trace configuration, an installed trace, a measurement or an overlay measurement is available in the "Traces" system folder. Procedure To display a trace configuration, proceed as follows: 1. Double-click the appropriate icon of a trace configuration, an installed trace, a measurement or an overlay measurement in the project tree. The "Configuration" or "Diagram" tab opens in the working area. 2. If required, click the "Configuration" tab for the display. Note Write protection The configuration data of an installed trace and in all measurements is displayed with write protection. See also User interface - "Traces" project tree folder (Page 16) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 50 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.3 Project tree 3.3.3 Displaying a diagram Requirement An installed trace, a measurement or an overlay measurement is available in the system folder. "Traces" Procedure To display a diagram, proceed as follows: 1. Double-click the appropriate icon of an installed trace, a measurement or an overlay measurement in the project tree. The "Configuration" or "Diagram" tab opens in the working area. 2. If required, click the "Diagram" tab for the display. See also User interface - "Traces" project tree folder (Page 16) 3.3.4 Apply overlay measurement Overlay measurements can be applied in the project tree with a comparison function for different measurements. The following instructions describe how you can create an overlay measurement under the "Overlay measurements" system folder Requirement A device is configured that supports the trace and logic analyzer function. Procedure To apply an overlay measurement, proceed as follows: 1. Select one or more measurements in the 2. Drag the measurements to the "Measurements" system folder. "Overlay measurements" system folder. A new overlay measurement is created. This contains copies of the selected measurements. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 51 Operation 3.3 Project tree 3.3.5 Configuring objects in groups You can set up groups in system folders in the project navigator. Use this option to configure the view for multiple objects. The following instructions use measurements as an example in order to describe how to consolidate the measurements into groups. The same functionality is also available for the Traces and Overlay measurements system folders. Note Traces in the device can also be displayed in groups A trace configuration in a group with a trace of the same name in the device is displayed under the group. Therefore, all traces in the device on the first level in the "Traces" folder are not necessarily displayed. Requirement Measurements are available in the "Measurements" system folder. Procedure Proceed as follows to configure measurements into groups: 1. Select the shortcut menu command "Add new group" by right-clicking on the "Measurements" system folder. A new group folder is created. 2. Assign a meaningful name to the new group. 3. Repeat step 1 until all required groups have been created. (Sub-groups (groups within groups) can also be created.) 4. Drag & drop the corresponding measurements to the group folder that has been created. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 52 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.1 Transferring the trace configuration to the device Requirement A valid trace configuration is in the "Traces" system folder. The maximum number of installed traces has not been reached yet. Procedure To transfer a trace configuration to the device, proceed as follows: 1. Open a valid trace configuration in the working area. 2. Click the button. Result The trace configuration is transferred to the device. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 53 Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.2 Activating/deactivating an installed trace Requirement There is an online connection to the device. There is a trace in the device. The installed trace is displayed in the working area. The button is activated for viewing the displayed trace. Activating an installed trace To activate the recording for an installed trace, proceed as follows: 1. Click the button. The installed trace is activated and starts the recording according to the configured trigger condition. The trigger condition is device-specific and described in Section "Configuration" below the respective device (Page 71). The current status of the recording is displayed in the status display of the trace. Note When a recording is restarted, the previously recorded values are lost. To save the recorded values, save the measurement in the project (Page 57) before you activate the recording again. Deactivating an installed trace To deactivate an activated installed trace, proceed as follows: 1. Click the button. The installed trace is deactivated. The status display of the trace changes to "Inactive". Using the trace and logic analyzer function 54 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.3 Displaying the recording Requirement There is an online connection to the device. There is a trace with recording in the device. Or: A measurement is in the "Measurements" system folder. Procedure To display the recording, proceed as follows: 1. Select an installed trace. 2. Double-click the selected trace. 3. If required, activate the button for viewing. Or: 1. Select a measurement in the "Measurements" system folder. 2. Double-click the selected measurement. Result The recording is displayed in the "Diagram" tab. See also User interface - "Traces" project tree folder (Page 16) Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 55 Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.4 Analyze an ongoing recording Requirements An ongoing recording is displayed in the "Diagram" tab. Save the data currently recorded as a measurement To analyze a certain time range for an ongoing recording, follow these steps: 1. Click the button. The data recorded up to now is added to the measurements. The current recording is not affected by this and continues running uninterrupted. Analyze the measurement To display the saved measurement, follow these steps: 1. In the "Measurements" system folder double-click the measurement that has just been saved in order to open it The "Diagram" tab for the measurement opens in the working area. See also Displaying the recording (Page 55) Working area - Diagram tab (Page 62) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 56 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.5 Saving measurements in the project Requirement There is an online connection to the device. There is a trace with recording in the device. The installed trace data must have been displayed at least once in the curve diagram. The recording data is loaded from the device for the display. Procedure To save a recording in the project, proceed as follows: 1. Open the installed trace with the recorded data. 2. If required, make sure that the current data is loaded from the device by activating the button. 3. After activating the 4. Click the button wait until all data has been loaded and displayed. button. The measurement is added to the "Measurements" system folder. 5. Save the project in the TIA Portal. Note Generate measurements A measurement of an installed trace can be generated at any time. Use this functionality e.g. to save the data recorded up until this point in a recording and to analyze it as a static measurement. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 57 Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.6 Exporting and importing measurements Requirement At least one measurement is in the "Measurements" system folder for export. Exporting measurements To export a measurement, proceed as follows: 1. Right-click a measurement in the "Measurements" system folder and select the shortcut menu command "Export measurement". 2. Select a folder, a file name and a data type to save the measurement. 3. Click the "Save" button. Importing measurements To import a measurement, proceed as follows: 1. Right-click in the "Measurements" system folder and select the shortcut menu command "Import measurement". 2. Select the file e.g. of the "*.ttrecx" file type with the measurement to be imported. 3. Click the "Open" button. The imported measurement is displayed with the file name in the system folder. "Measurements" Note Export and import trace configurations The same functionality is available for exporting and importing trace configurations. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 58 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.7 Transferring the trace configuration from the device to the project Requirement There is an online connection to the device. There is a trace in the device. Procedure To transfer a trace configuration to the project, proceed as follows: 1. Open an installed trace. 2. If required, activate the 3. Click the button for viewing. button to transfer the trace configuration from the device. Result The configuration is taken over as new trace configuration in the "Traces" system folder. A trace configuration of the same name is overwritten in the system folder. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 59 Operation 3.4 Working area - general 3.4.8 Deleting installed traces Requirement There is an online connection to the device. There is a trace in the device. Procedure To delete an installed trace, proceed as follows: 1. Open an installed trace. 2. If required, activate the 3. Click the button for viewing. button. A confirmation prompt opens. 4. Confirm the prompt for deletion. Or 1. Select one or more installed traces / in the project tree. 2. Press to delete the installed traces. A confirmation prompt opens. 3. If required, select an option for deletion and confirm the prompt. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 60 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.5 Working area - Configuration tab 3.5 Working area - Configuration tab 3.5.1 Configuring the trace Requirement The "Configuration" tab is open in the working area. Configuring the trace In the configuration, you specify the recording and trigger conditions and select the signals to be recorded. See Section "Configuration" below the respective device (Page 71). Note Saving the trace configuration You save the trace configuration with the project in the TIA Portal. If you close the project without saving, the configuration is discarded. See also Displaying a configuration (Page 50) Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 61 Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6.1 Use of the curve diagram The curve diagram shows the signals of a recording selected in the signal table. The display area can be zoomed as required. Measurement cursors can be used to select individual values for display in the signal table. The following operating instructions describe the use of the curve diagram and of the measurement cursors as examples. Requirements An installed trace or a measurement has been selected for display. The button is activated to monitor an installed trace. The "Diagram" tab is open in the working area. Monitor an ongoing recording. To display all of the data in an ongoing recording, proceed as follows: 1. Activate "Display all" via the button. The entire time range and all values for the ongoing recording are displayed. To display a consistent time window in an ongoing recording, proceed as follows: 1. Activate "Display all" via the button. 2. Select the desired time range via the button. The trend view is updated while the scaling of the time range remains the same. Evaluation of a certain instant of a recording To display the values for a specific sample, proceed as follows: 1. Display the vertical measurement cursors via the button. 2. Move a measurement cursor with the mouse to the required position in the recording. The values of the signals are displayed in the signal table and in the "Measurement cursor" pane of the "Trace" task card. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 62 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab Evaluation of the difference between two samples To display the difference, proceed as follows: 1. Display the vertical measurement cursors via the button. 2. Move both measurement cursors with the mouse to the required samples in the recording. The values of the signals and the difference are displayed in the signal table and in the "Measurement cursor" pane of the "Trace" task card. Using horizontal measurement cursors To check whether a certain value has been reached, proceed as follows: 1. Display the horizontal measurement cursors via the button. 2. Move a measurement cursor with the mouse to the required value of the recording. The values of the measurement cursors for the selected signal are displayed in the "Measurement cursor" pane of the "Trace" task card. Moving the time range displayed Proceed as follows to move the time range displayed: 1. Select a time range via the button. 2. Move the curve to the desired time range by turning the mouse wheel with the key pressed down. Bringing a signal into the foreground 1. Display the legend via the button. 2. Click a signal in the legend. Or: 1. Click a signal in the curve diagram. The signal is displayed in the foreground and is highlighted/selected in the signal table. The value axis is updated for the selected signal. See also Displaying a diagram (Page 51) User interface - curve diagram (Page 23) User interface - signal table (Page 29) Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 63 Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6.2 Use of the signal table The signal table shows the signals of an installed trace or a measurement. The preselected signals in the signal selection are displayed with an overlay measurement. You can show or hide individual signals for the display in the table and adapt the properties for the display. Individual bits can be selected for some data types and displayed as a bit track. The following operating instructions describe the operation of the signal table. Requirements An installed trace or a measurement has been opened in the "Diagram" tab. The button is activated to monitor an installed trace. For the display of individual bits as a bit track: at least one recorded signal supports the display as a bit track. Display or hide individual signals and change the color To adapt the display to suit your requirements, proceed as follows: 1. Click the icon of the respective signal in the display. column to select or deselect it for the 2. Click in the "Color" column for the respective signal and select a color. The default color for the signal changes. Bringing a signal into the foreground 1. In the signal table, select the line of the signal. The Y-scale of the signal is displayed. The signal curve is brought into the foreground in the curve diagram. Selecting individual bits for display as a bit track To display individual bits as a bit track in the lower curve diagram, proceed as follows: 1. Click the icon of a signal in the signal table. 2. Click the icon in the open bit selection of the signal. The bits are selected or deselected for display. See also Displaying the recording (Page 55) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 64 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6.3 Using the signal group in the signal table Individual signals can be scaled identically in a signal group, which makes it easier to compare the curve characteristics. Binary signals cannot be grouped. The following operating instructions describe how to work with the signal group. Note Saving signal groups The signal groups can be saved individually for each measurement via the "Use current view as standard" function ( button). If the signal groups and the project are not saved then the signal groups created will be lost when the "Diagram" tab is closed. Requirements An installed trace or a measurement is displayed. The button is activated to monitor an installed trace. The "Diagram" tab is open in the working area. There are at least two signals in the signal table that are not of the BOOL type. Assigning signals to a signal group To apply a signal group and assign signals to this group, proceed as follows: 1. In the signal table, select the line or cell of the required signal. 2. Click the gray field in the "Signal group" column. The sequence icon is displayed in the gray field and the name of the signal group is pre-assigned: 3. Click the gray fields of further signals that are to be assigned to this signal group. Or: 1. Click in the text field of the "Signal group" column for a signal to be grouped. 2. Enter a name for the group. 3. Enter the same group name in the respective text fields for further signals or select the group name via the drop-down list. The Y-scales of the grouped signals are scaled with the values of the signal that was selected first. Changes to a scale value always affect the entire group. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 65 Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab Removing signals from a signal group To delete the assignment of a signal to a signal group, proceed as follows: 1. Click the sequence icon for the required signal in the "Signal group" column. Or: 1. Click the text field for the required signal in the "Signal group" column. 2. Press the key. Or: 1. Select the respective text field in the "Signal group" column for several signals using the and keys. 2. Press the key. The signals are removed from the signal group or the signal group is deleted. 3.6.4 Observation of fast signals Requirements There is an online connection to the device. There is a trace in the device. Procedure To monitor the progress of a fast signal, proceed as follows: 1. Select a trace in the device. 2. Double-click the selected trace. 3. Click on the button for monitoring. 4. Click on the button to automatically repeat the recording. Result The recording is automatically re-activated at the end of each recording. The display in the curve is similar to the display of an oscilloscope. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 66 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6.5 Compare records (overlay measurements) Requirement An overlay measurement is created or is created implicitly by dragging the measurements to the system folder "Overlay measurements". See also Apply overlay measurement (Page 51). Adding measurements for comparison To compare measurements, insert the measurements to be compared to the overlay measurements. Proceed as follows for this: 1. In the project tree drag one or more measurements from the system folder "Measurements" to the icon for the overlay measurement . Or: 1. Import saved measurements via the "Import measurement" shortcut menu command. A copy of the measurements is added to the overlay measurement. Note Changes to the settings for measurements within the overlay measurement have no impact on the original measurements. The original measurements remain unchanged. Select signals of the measurements for the signal table Proceed as follows to select the signals for the signal table in the "Diagram" tab: 1. Double-click on the icon for the overlay measurement in the project tree. The tabs for the overlay measurement will be displayed in the working area. 2. Click the "Signal selection" tab in the working area. The signals for all measurements are displayed in the table. 3. Activate or deactivate the signal check box for those signals that should be visible or should not be visible in the signal table. The activated signals are displayed in the signal table of the "Diagram" tab. Use of the signal table Proceed as follows to open and use the signal tables: 1. Click the "Diagram" tab in the working area. 2. Click on the "Signals" tab within the "Diagram" tab. 3. Use the signal tables as described under Use of the signal table (Page 64). Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 67 Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab Align measurements Proceed as follows to align the time axis for the measurements for the comparison: 1. Click on the "Measurements" tab within the "Diagram" tab. 2. Select the alignment for the measurements via the check box. 3. Adjust the alignment and if necessary set an offset for the alignment of the individual measurements. The measurements are aligned with each other accordingly on the time axis. (The precise alignment of two measurements is described in the next section.) Use of the curve diagram Proceed as follows to open and use the curve diagram: 1. Click the "Diagram" tab in the working area. 2. Use the curve diagram as described under Use of the curve diagram (Page 62). See also Align measurements precisely (overlay measurements) (Page 69) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 68 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6.6 Align measurements precisely (overlay measurements) Requirement An overlay measurement is applied. Measurements for comparison are added to the overlay measurement. Signals of the measurements for the signal table are selected. The "Diagram" tab for the overlay measurement opens in the working area. Align measurements precisely with position difference X Proceed as follows to align the time axis for two measurements precisely: 1. Display the vertical measurement cursors via the button. 2. Zoom into the time range, e.g. with the button until you are able to position the first measurement cursor precisely on the desired reference point for the first measurement. 3. Move the first measurement cursor with the mouse to the required position. 4. Search for the reference point for the second measurement, e.g. by switching to "Display all" with the button. 5. Zoom into the time range, e.g. with the button until you are able to position the second measurement cursor precisely on the desired reference point for the second measurement. 6. Move the second measurement cursor with the mouse to the required position. 7. Open the "Trace" task card. 8. In the "Measurement cursor" pane select the position difference value X. 9. Copy the value to the clipboard. 10.Insert the value from the clipboard into the Offset cell of the first or second measurement. Both measurements are precisely aligned with each other at the desired measurement points. Note When inserting the position difference as the offset make sure that you also adjust the leading character as necessary. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 69 Operation 3.6 Working area - Diagram tab 3.6.7 Printing a recording The curve diagram supports the saving of the display as a graphic and the copying of the display to the clipboard. Also use these functions (Page 23) for printing. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 70 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 4 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.1 Recordable variables Device-dependent recording of tags The following list shows the operand areas from which tags can be recorded: Process image input Process image output Bit memory Data blocks Data types A selection of elementary and composite data types can be recorded. The availability of the individual data types depends on the device used: For more information, see the help under "Overview of valid data types". The following table lists the supported data types: Data types Note Binary numbers BOOL - Bit strings BYTE - WORD - DWORD LWORD 1) Symbolic name required Integers SINT - USINT - INT - UINT - DINT - UDINT - LINT 1) Symbolic name required ULINT 1) Symbolic name required Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 71 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs Data types Note Floating-point numbers REAL - LREAL Symbolic name required Timers TIME - LTIME 1) - Date and time DATE - TOD LTOD LDT 1) 1) - 1) Not supported by S7-1200. 4.1.2 Lifetime of the installed trace configuration and recorded values Installed trace configurations are retained after POWER OFF. The recording is activated again after the restart of the CPU. Recorded values are lost during the restart. Note Downloading a configuration to the device in the "STOP" operating state Note that after downloading a configuration in the "STOP" operating state, you must check the installed traces and, if required, reactivate them or transfer them again. Note If trigger tags that affect the address are changed, the trace configuration must also be transferred to the device again. This is the case for example, when a data block is shortened or extended or the data type is changed. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 72 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.3 Recording levels All runtime levels can be used for the recording cycle. The cyclic execution levels are offered for selection via the button . In non-periodic recording levels, the recording time is undefined. Note The measured values are recorded at the end of the OB after the processing of the user program. 4.1.4 Quantity structure The following table shows the maximum quantity structure that can be recorded with the trace and logic analyzer function: Device Maximum number of installed traces Maximum number of signals per trace configuration 2 16 At least 4 16 S7-1200 (as of firmware version V4.0) S7-1500, ET 200SP, CPU 1516pro-2 PN, S7-1500 Software Controller (depending on the CPU type) Example CPU 1516-3 PN/DP Maximum of 3854 samples for 16 signals from PLC tags of the DWORD data type Maximum of 21844 samples for 16 signals from PLC tags of the BOOL data type Maximum of 58250 samples for 1 signal from a PLC tag of the BOOL data type Further information can also be found in the form of FAQs under the ID 102781176 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/102781176). 4.1.5 CPU load through trace recording A trace recording increases the runtime of the respective recording level that can result in an execution level overflow with high utilization of the CPU. Remedy for execution level overflow: Change the trace configuration 1) Configure fewer tags and signals. 2) Then increase the number of tags and signals up to the maximum number of signals step-by-step without an execution level overflow. Select a slower recording level Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 73 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.6 Software user interface of the configuration 4.1.6.1 Structure of the user interface Display areas in the "Configuration" tab of the working area The settings options differ depending on the configured device. The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: The area navigation provides the following entries for selection: Configuration - Signals (Page 75) - Recording conditions (Page 77) Displaying and changing properties of a trace configuration A trace is selected in the project tree and displayed in the "Configuration" tab. The trace configuration can only be changed offline and is displayed online with the write protection. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 74 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.6.2 User interface - Signals The "Signals" area shows a table in which the signals to be recorded are configured for the selected trace configuration. Signals can also be inserted in the table using drag-and-drop. The signals can be sorted using drag-and-drop. Setting options and displays in "Signals" The following figure shows an example of the display in the TIA Portal: The following table shows the settings and displays: Column Icon Description Display of the signal icon for a selected signal. "Name" - Input field for the name or address of the signal. Examples: - * "Data_block_1".pressure * M0.0 * DB1.DBW3 Button to open the signal selection table. The button is displayed when the table line is selected. Clicking the icon opens a table which offers possible signals for selection. The selected signal is displayed in the input field. "Data type" - Text field with display of the data type for the signal. "Address" - Input field for the address of the signal. The field remains empty with optimized / type correct tags. "Color" - Text field for display and selection of the color. Click the signal color to open the color selection dialog. "Comment" Input field for a comment on the signal. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 75 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs Shortcut menu commands The following table shows the shortcut menu commands of the table: Shortcut menu command Description "Cut" Cannot be selected. "Copy" Copies the contents of the selected lines to the clipboard. "Paste" Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the selected line. The existing contents are overwritten. "Delete" Deletes the selected lines from the table or deletes the content of the selected cell. "Rename" Switches the selected cell to the editing mode. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 76 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.6.3 Recording conditions User interface - Recording conditions The "Recording conditions" area shows the trigger condition for the selected trace configuration and in which cycle, how fast and how long the recording is made. Configuration is possible when the trace configuration is displayed in offline mode or online mode with deactivated viewing . Setting options and displays in "Recording conditions" The following figure shows an example of the settings for the sampling in the TIA Portal: Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 77 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs The following table explains the settings and displays: Setting/display Description "Recording time" Recording level entry field Selection of the recording time. Address of the OB text field Detailed information on the selected recording time. See Recording levels (Page 73) "Record every" Reduction entry field Input of the reduction in relation to the reduction ratio and the unit. Reduction ratio drop-down list Selection of the reduction ratio unit The following settings are possible: * "Cycle" * "s" (setting option depends on the recording level selected under "recording time") Sampling time text field Display of the sampling time, taking into account the configured reduction and the selected unit (only for constant bus cycle time OBs). "Max. recording duration" Max. recording duration Displays the calculated maximum recording duration. text field The "Max. recording duration" depends on how many signals are recorded and the data type of these signals. "Use max. recording duration" Set the recording duration to the maximum value. When the checkbox is activated, the recording duration is set to the maximum possible recording duration. The set reduction in the "Record every" input field is taken into account. The recording duration is also adapted when additional signals are added. Further information can also be found in the form of FAQs under the ID 102781176 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/102781176). "Recording duration" Recording duration entry field Unit drop-down list Input of the recording duration in relation to the selected unit. If the "Recording duration = max. recording duration" checkbox is activated, entries are overwritten by the value displayed in "Max. recording duration". Selection of the unit for the recording duration. The following settings are possible: * "Samples" The maximum number of samples recorded is the number for which parameters are assigned under recording duration. * Calculated recording duration text field "s" (setting option depends on the recording level selected under "recording time") Display of the calculated recording duration (only for constant bus cycle time OBs) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 78 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs The following figure shows an example of the settings for the trigger in the TIA Portal: Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 79 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs The following table explains the settings and displays: Setting/display Description "Trigger mode" Selection of the trigger mode. Trigger mode drop-down list The following settings are possible: * "Record immediately" The recording is made immediately after the device is activated. * "Trigger on tag" The recording is made as soon as the installed trace is activated and the configured trigger condition is fulfilled. Text field "Trigger tag" Trigger tag entry field The "Trigger tag" specifies a signal that triggers the recording. Enter a signal. Examples: * "DataBlock_1".Temperature * M0.0 * DB1.DBW3 See also Data types for trigger tags (Page 84). Opens the signal selection table. Clicking the icon opens a table which offers possible signals for selection as trigger tag. The selected signal is displayed in the input field. Trigger tag address text field "Event" Display of the trigger tag address. With purely symbolic signals the field remains empty. The events that can be used on this trigger tag are offered for selection according to the data type of the trigger tag. The event can only be configured when a valid signal has been entered as trigger tag. Trigger events drop-down list Event selection for which the trigger tag is checked. Text field - "Value" The entries in the drop-down list are described in Section Trigger event (Page 84). Configuration of the selected event. The configuration options differ depending on the format of the trigger tag and the selected event. SeeTrigger event (Page 84). Using the trace and logic analyzer function 80 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs Setting/display Description "Pre-trigger" "Pre-trigger" defines the number of samples that are already recorded before the actual trigger condition is fulfilled. If the trigger event occurs immediately or shortly after the activation of the recording, this may result in a shorter recording duration. Examples of "Recording duration (a)" = 20 samples and "Pre-trigger (b)" = 5 samples: * Case 1: Trigger event occurs 50 samples after activation of the recording * Case 2: Trigger event occurs 2 samples after activation of the recording Actual recording duration (a) = 20 samples Actual recording duration (a) = 17 samples Duration entry field Input of the duration in relation to the selection in the drop-down list. Unit drop-down list Selection of the unit The following settings are possible: Resulting pre-trigger duration text field * "Samples" * "s" (setting option depends on the recording level selected under "recording time") Display of the calculated "Pre-trigger" duration (only for recording in constant bus cycle time OBs) Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 81 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs The following figure shows an example of the settings for the saving of installed measurements: Note Available memory in the device (memory card) The memory in the device (memory card) is partly used by system-relevant functions or reserved for that purpose. Thus it is not possible for the entire memory to be used for saving measurements. For further information please refer to the Function Manual Structure and Use of the CPU Memory (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/59193101). Note Memory requirements upon restart Following a device reboot the maximum number of measurements saved in the device is the number configured under "Number of measurements". With repeated restarts note that the measurements already saved are not overwritten and the "Number of measurements" configured in the device is saved once again. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 82 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs The following table explains the settings and displays: Setting/display Description "Saving of installed measurements (memory card)" Repeat measurement automatically and store in the device retentively This setting is only possible with "Trigger on tag" trigger mode. The measurements are stored on the "primary" memory card. For traces which have been saved in the device (memory card), the function for automatically repeating the recording is not available. Note Only completed measurements are saved on the device. Any recording deactivated by the user is not saved on the device. This function is available with the following firmware versions: * S7-1200 as of V4.2 * S7-1500 as of V2.0 The function is not supported by CPU S7-1500 R/H. "Number of measurements" Input of the number of measurements to be saved on the card. "Memory requirements" Display of the expected memory requirement for all measurements Displaying memory usage Shows the tab with the memory usage "Behavior if number reached" Selection for the behavior once "Number of measurements" is reached The following settings are possible: * "Deactivating a recording" The measurements are repeated until the "Number of measurements on the card" is reached. * "Overwrite oldest recording" The measurements are saved in a ring buffer and repeated until the user deactivates the recording. Once the number of measurements exceeds the "Number of measurements on the card" the oldest measurement on the card is overwritten in each case. Note Note that write processes that are repeated frequently may damage the card. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 83 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs Data types for trigger tags The following table shows the supported data types for the trigger tag: Memory requirement and format of the number Data type 1 byte BOOL 8-bit integers SINT, USINT, BYTE 16-bit integers INT, UINT, WORD, DATE 32-bit integers 64-bit integers DINT, UDINT, DWORD, TIME, TOD 1) LINT, ULINT, LWORD, LTIME, LTOD, LDT 32-bit floating-point numbers REAL 64-bit floating-point numbers LREAL 1) Not supported by S7-1200. Trigger event Depending on the selection in the drop-down list, the further settings differ for the "event". The individual events are described below. "=TRUE" Supported data types: Bit (Page 84) The recording starts when the state of the trigger is TRUE. "=FALSE" Supported data types: Bit (Page 84) The recording starts when the state of the trigger is FALSE. "Rising edge" Supported data types: Bit (Page 84) The recording is started when the trigger state changes from FALSE to TRUE. After activation of the installed trace, at least two cycles are required to identify the edge. "Rising signal" Supported data types: Integers and floating-point numbers (Page 84) (no times, date and time of day) The recording is started when the rising value of the trigger reaches or exceeds the value configured for this event. After activation of the installed trace, at least two cycles are required to identify the edge. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 84 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs "Falling edge" Supported data types: Bit (Page 84) The recording is started when the trigger state changes from TRUE to FALSE. After activation of the installed trace, at least two cycles are required to identify the edge. "Falling signal" Supported data types: Integers and floating-point numbers (Page 84) (no times, date and time of day) The recording is started when the falling value of the trigger reaches or falls below the value configured for this event. After activation of the installed trace, at least two cycles are required to identify the edge. "In the range" Supported data types: Integers and floating-point numbers (Page 84) The recording starts as soon as the value of the trigger is in the value range configured for this event. "Outside of the range" Supported data types: Integers and floating-point numbers (Page 84) The recording starts as soon as the value of the trigger is outside the value range configured for this event. "Value change" All data types are supported. The value is checked for change when the recording is activated. The recording starts when the value of the trigger changes. This trigger event is supported as of V13 SP1. Older versions of the TIA Portal cannot interpret the trigger. Note that no explicit information is output in this case. This can occur, for example, when the trace is transferred from a CPU to a TIA Portal less than V13 SP1 or a trace configuration is imported. "= value" Supported data types: Integers (Page 84) The recording starts when the value of the trigger is equal to the value configured for this event. "<> value" Supported data types: Integers (Page 84) The recording starts when the value of the trigger is not equal to the value configured for this event. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 85 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs "= bit pattern" Supported data types: Integers and floating-point numbers (Page 84) (no times, date and time of day) The recording starts when the value of the trigger matches the bit pattern configured for this event. The following figure shows the setting options for a "bit pattern": It is possible to switch between the icons by clicking the respective button. The following table shows the icons: Icon Description Bit is not evaluated Bit is checked for FALSE Bit is checked for TRUE "<> bit pattern" Supported data types: Integers and floating-point numbers (Page 84) (no times, date and time of day) The recording starts when the value of the trigger does not match the bit pattern configured for this event. See also Configuring the trigger conditions (Page 89) Recordable variables (Page 71) Using the trace and logic analyzer function 86 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.7 Configuration 4.1.7.1 Trace configuration - overview The configuration of the recording conditions and the signals to be recorded is device-specific. Requirement A trace configuration has been created and opened in the working area of the "Configuration" tab. Procedure The following table shows the procedure for configuring. Step Description 1 Documentation of the configuration (optional) Enter a comment and an author for the configuration in the Inspector window. 2 Selecting signals (Page 88) Select the signals to be recorded in the "Signals" area. 3 Select a recording time, a cycle and the duration in the "Recording conditions" area. 4 Configuring the trigger conditions (Page 89) In the "Recording conditions" area, select whether the recording is to be performed immediately or depending on a trigger condition. 5 Configure installed measurements (memory card) (Page 90) In the "Recording conditions" area, select whether the recording is to be saved on the device (memory card). Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 87 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.7.2 Selecting signals Requirement A trace configuration has been created and opened. The "Signals" area is open in the "Configuration" tab. Procedure To configure the signals to be recorded, proceed as follows: 1. Select a signal. The following options are available: - In the "Name" column, click the button and select a tag. - Enter the symbolic tag name in the cell in the "Name" column. - Enter the address directly in the "Address" column. - Drag a signal to the table using drag-and-drop. 2. Click in the "Color" column and select a color for the display of the signal. 3. Click in the "Comment" column and enter a comment for the signal. 4. Repeat the procedure from step 1 until all the signals to be recorded have been entered in the table. 4.1.7.3 Configuring the recording cycle and duration Requirement A trace configuration has been created and opened. The "Recording conditions" area is open in the "Configuration" tab. Procedure To configure the cycle and the duration of a recording, proceed as follows: 1. Click the button for the recording time. 2. Select an OB for the recording time (Page 73). 3. Select a unit for the reduction factor in the drop-down list for "Record every". 4. Enter the factor for the reduction in the input field for "Record every". 5. Select a unit in the drop-down list for "Recording duration". 6. Specify the recording duration. The following options are available: - Enter a value for the duration in the input field for "Recording duration". - Activate the "Use max. recording duration" checkbox. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 88 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.7.4 Configuring the trigger conditions Requirement A trace configuration has been created and opened. The "Recording conditions" area is open in the "Configuration" tab. "Record immediately" trigger condition To start the recording immediately, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Record immediately" entry in the drop-down list for "Trigger mode". The input fields for the trigger tag are hidden. "Trigger on tag" trigger condition To start the recording depending on a condition, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Trigger on tag" entry in the drop-down list for "Trigger mode". 2. Select a trigger tag. The following options are available: - Click the button for the trigger tag and select a tag. - Enter the address or the symbolic name of the tag directly in the input field for the trigger tag. A drop-down list with events and input fields is displayed. The display depends on the data type of the tag. 3. Configure the event. 4. Select a unit for the pre-trigger in the drop-down list for "Pre-trigger". 5. In order to record a period before the trigger event, enter a value greater than 0 in the input field for the pre-trigger. Note Cyclic test of the trigger condition The trigger condition is checked in every cycle irrespective of the setting in "Record every". To reliably identify the trigger, the trigger signal must be present for at least one full cycle. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 89 Devices 4.1 S7-1200/1500 CPUs 4.1.7.5 Configure installed measurements (memory card) Requirement A trace configuration has been created and opened. The "Recording conditions" area is open in the "Configuration" tab. The "Trigger on tag" trigger mode is set. The firmware on the device supports the recording of an installed measurement. Procedure Proceed as follows to save the installed measurement (on the memory card): 1. Select the "Save measurements on device (memory card)" check box. 2. Enter the number of measurements that ought to be saved on the card in the "Number of measurements" entry field. 3. Set the desired behavior once the "Number of measurements" has been reached in the "Behavior if number reached" drop-down list. Note No evaluation of the trigger during saving No new trigger can be evaluated as long as the recording is saved. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 90 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Glossary Curve diagram Displays the selected signals of a recording. Installed trace Consists of a trace configuration and optionally a recording. Measurement Consists of a trace configuration with an associated recording. Overlay measurement Permits a comparison and analysis of signals from different measurements. Pre-trigger Defines the interval in which the signals are already recorded before the actual trigger condition is fulfilled. Recording Is performed in the device. There is only one recording for each installed trace configuration. Recording condition Sampling and trigger for a trace configuration. Recording duration Factor in number of samples. The factor of 100 means, for example, that 100 samples are recorded. Reduction Factor in number of cycles. A factor of 2 means, for example, that a recording is made every second cycle. Sampling Setting, in which cycle, how fast and how long the recording is to be made. Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 91 Glossary Signal table Lists the signals of the selected measurement and provides setting options for some properties. Snapshot Contains the settings for the view for a measurement. Trace configuration Contains all the information required to record values in a device. Trigger Specifies the trigger mode and the condition for the "Trigger on tag" mode. Trigger mode Specifies whether the recording should be started immediately or based on a trigger tag. Trigger tag Signal to trigger the recording. Trigger time The meaning of the measurement trigger time depends on the device. e.g. SIMATIC S7-1200/1500 CPUs: Specifies the absolute time of the control system at the start of recording. Using the trace and logic analyzer function 92 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE Index C CPU load through trace, 73 L Logic analyzer function, 8 M Measurements Project navigator, 18 T Trace, 8, 8, (Trigger time) Align overlay measurements, 69 Analyze an ongoing recording, 56 Apply overlay measurement, 51 Bit track, 23 Configure project navigator into groups, 52 CPU load, 73 Creating a trace configuration, 50 Curve diagram, 23, 62 Data storage, 13 Displaying a diagram, 51 Displaying a trace configuration, 50 Inspector window, 44 Installed measurements (memory card), 11, 19 Installed trace, 11 Keyboard operation, 25 Lifetime of the values, 72 Mathematical functions, 33 Measurement, 11, 13, 57, 58 Measurement cursor, 62 Measurement cursor pane, 41 Monitor fast signals, 66 Mouse wheel, 24 Overlay measurement, 12, 20, 37, 67 Pre-trigger, 81 Printing, 70 Project navigator, 16 Quantity structure, 73 Quick start, 45 Recordable tags, 71 Recording, 11, 54, 55 Recording conditions, 77, 84, 84 Recording cycle, 46, 88 Recording duration, 88 Recording levels, 73 Reduction, 78 Sampling, 46 Save installed measurements, 83, 90 Saving the trace configuration, 61 Signal group, 65 Signal table, 29, 64 Signals, 75, 88 Snapshots pane, 43 Status, 16 Supported devices, 8 Time stamp, 44 Trace configuration, 11, 13, 53, 59, 60, 61, 87 Trigger, 89 Trigger mode, 80 Trigger tag, 80, 84 User interface, 14, 44, 74 Trace function, 8 Trace S7-1200/1500, 71 Using the trace and logic analyzer function Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31277292-AE 93 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro Communication Function Manual 2 ___________________ Product overview 3 ___________________ Communications services 4 ___________________ PG communication 5 ___________________ HMI communication 6 ___________________ Open User Communication ___________________ 7 S7 communication ___________________ 8 Point-to-point link ___________________ 9 OPC UA communication ___________________ 10 Routing ___________________ 11 Connection resources Diagnostics and fault ___________________ 12 correction 13 ___________ Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H Industrial Ethernet Security ___________________ 14 with CP 1543-1 10/2018 A5E03735815-AG Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03735815-AG 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This function manual provides you with an overview of the communication options, the CPUs, communication modules and processors and PC systems of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL and ET 200pro systems. This function manual describes the connection-oriented, asynchronous communication. The documentation covers the following: Overview of the communication services Properties of the communication services Overview of the user activities for setting up the communication services Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the Function manual: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about how to use STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Scope of the documentation This documentation is the basic documentation for all products of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL and ET 200pro systems. The product documentation is based on this documentation. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 3 Preface What's new in the Communication Function Manual, Edition 10/2018 as compared to Edition 12/2017? What's new? New contents What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information? Description of communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H You receive information on the particularities of communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H Section Communication with the redundant system S71500R/H (Page 283) Scope of the function manual expanded to include the redundant system S7-1500R/H Functions with which you are familiar from the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system are implemented for the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Redundant System S71500R/H System Manual (https://support.industry.sieme ns.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754 833) What's new in the Communication Function Manual, Edition 12/2017 compared to Edition 09/2016 What's new? New contents OPC UA Companion Specification What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the information? Through OPC UA Companion Specification, methods can be specified in a uniform and manufacturer-neutral way. Using these specified methods, you can easily integrate devices from various manufacturers into the plant and the production processes. Section AUTOHOTSPOT Setting up a secure connec- You can set up a secure connection to a tion to a mail server over the mail server without additional hardware. CPU interface Section Secure OUC via e-mail (Page 109) Secure communication over Modbus TCP Section Secure OUC with Modbus TCP (Page 108) You can establish secure TCP connections between a Modbus TCP client and a Modbus TCP server. Communication 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Preface What's new in the Communication Function Manual, Edition 09/2016 compared to Edition 12/2014 What's new? New contents OPC UA server What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the information? OPC UA is a uniform standard for data communication and is independent of any particular operating system platforms. Section AUTOHOTSPOT OPC UA uses integrated safety mechanisms on various automation systems, for example with data exchange, at application level, for the legitimation of the user. The OPC UA server provides a large amount of data: * Values of PLC tags that clients can access * Data types of these PLC tags Information about the OPC UA server itself and the CPU In this way, clients can gain an overview of the tag management and can read and write values. * Secure Open User Communication Secure data exchange with other devices. Section Secure Open User Communication (Page 94) Certificate handling in STEP You can manage certificates for the follow- Section Managing certificates 7 ing applications in STEP 7: with STEP 7 (Page 46) Deactivating SNMP for the CPU * OPC UA server * Secure Open User Communication * Web server of the CPU You can deactivate SNMP for the CPU. Section Disabling SNMP This can make sense under certain condi- (Page 60) tions, for example if the security guidelines in your network do not permit SNMP. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 5 Preface Conventions STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)". "S7-1500 CPUs" also refers to the CPU variants S7-1500F, S7-1500T, S7-1500TF, S7-1500C as well as S7-1500pro CPUs, ET200SP CPUs as well as the SIMATIC S7-1500 SW controller. This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The figures may differ slightly from the device supplied. You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below: Note A note contains important information on the product, on handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention. Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Communication 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Preface Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 7 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 12 2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 17 3 Communications services ..................................................................................................................... 22 3.1 Overview of communication options ...................................................................................... 22 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication ................. 25 3.3 Overview of connection resources ......................................................................................... 30 3.4 Setting up a connection ......................................................................................................... 30 3.5 Data consistency .................................................................................................................... 34 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 Secure Communication .......................................................................................................... 37 Basics of Secure Communication .......................................................................................... 37 Confidentiality through encryption.......................................................................................... 40 Authenticity and integrity through signatures ......................................................................... 43 Managing certificates with STEP 7 ........................................................................................ 46 Examples for the management of certificates. ....................................................................... 50 Example: HTTP over TLS ...................................................................................................... 56 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 SNMP ..................................................................................................................................... 60 Disabling SNMP ..................................................................................................................... 60 Example: Disabling SNMP for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP............................................................ 61 4 PG communication................................................................................................................................ 63 5 HMI communication .............................................................................................................................. 65 6 Open User Communication ................................................................................................................... 67 6.1 Overview of Open User Communication ............................................................................... 67 6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication .............................................................................. 68 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication ........................................................................... 70 6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names ........................................... 75 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO ...................... 77 6.6 Setting up communication over FDL ...................................................................................... 83 6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP ........................................................................ 86 6.8 Setting up communication via e-mail ..................................................................................... 89 6.9 Setting up communication via FTP ........................................................................................ 90 6.10 Establishment and termination of communications relations ................................................. 93 Communication 8 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Table of contents 6.11 6.11.1 6.11.2 6.11.3 6.11.4 6.11.5 6.11.6 Secure Open User Communication ........................................................................................94 Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to an external PLC (TLS server) .................94 Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to an external PLC (TLS client) .................97 Secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs .............................................................................99 Secure OUC via CP interface ...............................................................................................103 Secure OUC with Modbus TCP ............................................................................................108 Secure OUC via e-mail .........................................................................................................109 7 S7 communication .............................................................................................................................. 114 8 Point-to-point link ................................................................................................................................ 123 9 OPC UA communication ..................................................................................................................... 128 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.5 9.1.6 9.1.7 What you need to know about OPC UA ...............................................................................128 OPC UA and Industrie 4.0 ....................................................................................................128 OPC UA for S7-1500 CPUs ..................................................................................................128 General features of OPC UA ................................................................................................130 From the Classic OPC interface to OPC UA ........................................................................131 Addressing nodes .................................................................................................................132 Mapping of data types...........................................................................................................136 What you need to know about OPC UA clients ....................................................................138 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 Security at OPC UA ..............................................................................................................143 Security settings ....................................................................................................................143 Certificates pursuant to ITU X.509 ........................................................................................144 Certificates with OPC UA ......................................................................................................147 Creating self-signed certificates ............................................................................................148 Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself ...............................................................149 Secure transfer of messages ................................................................................................152 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.2 9.3.1.3 9.3.1.4 9.3.2 9.3.2.1 9.3.2.2 9.3.2.3 9.3.2.4 9.3.3 9.3.3.1 9.3.3.2 9.3.3.3 9.3.3.4 9.3.3.5 9.3.3.6 9.3.3.7 9.3.3.8 9.3.3.9 9.3.3.10 9.3.3.11 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server ............................................................................155 Useful information about the S7-1500 CPU OPC UA server................................................155 The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPUs ...........................................................................155 End points of the OPC UA server .........................................................................................157 Runtime behavior of the OPC UA server ..............................................................................159 Diagnostics of the OPC UA server .......................................................................................161 Configuring access to PLC tags ...........................................................................................163 Managing write and read rights ............................................................................................163 Managing write and read rights for a complete DB ..............................................................165 Accessing OPC UA server data ............................................................................................166 Export OPC UA XML file .......................................................................................................167 Configuring the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU ..........................................................168 Enabling the OPC UA server ................................................................................................168 Access to the OPC UA server ..............................................................................................170 General settings of the OPC UA server ................................................................................172 Settings of the server for subscriptions.................................................................................173 Handling client and server certificates ..................................................................................175 Handling of the client certificates of the S7-1500 CPU.........................................................180 Generating server certificates with STEP 7 ..........................................................................183 Editing the security settings of the OPC UA server. .............................................................186 User authentication ...............................................................................................................189 Users and roles with OPC UA function rights .......................................................................190 Licenses for the OPC UA server ...........................................................................................192 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 9 Table of contents 10 11 12 13 9.3.4 9.3.4.1 9.3.4.2 9.3.5 9.3.5.1 9.3.5.2 9.3.5.3 9.3.5.4 9.3.5.5 9.3.5.6 9.3.5.7 Providing methods on the OPC UA server .......................................................................... 193 Important facts about server methods ................................................................................. 193 Boundary conditions for using server methods .................................................................... 196 OPC UA server interface configuration ................................................................................ 198 What is a server interface? .................................................................................................. 198 Create a server interface ..................................................................................................... 199 Using OPC UA companion specifications ............................................................................ 202 Missing namespaces ........................................................................................................... 217 Coordinating write and read rights for CPU tags ................................................................. 218 Consistency of CPU tags ..................................................................................................... 220 Notes on configuration limits when using server interfaces ................................................. 222 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6 9.4.7 9.4.8 9.4.9 9.4.9.1 9.4.9.2 9.4.9.3 9.4.9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client .................................................................... 223 Overview and requirements ................................................................................................. 223 Useful information about the client instructions ................................................................... 224 Number of client instructions that can be used simultaneously ........................................... 226 Example configuration for OPC UA ..................................................................................... 227 Creating client interfaces ..................................................................................................... 228 Determine server interface online ........................................................................................ 237 Using multilingual texts ........................................................................................................ 241 Rules for the access to structures........................................................................................ 243 Using connection parameter assignment ............................................................................ 245 Creating and configuring connections ................................................................................. 245 Handling of the client certificates of the S7-1500 CPU ........................................................ 249 User authentication .............................................................................................................. 252 Using a configured connection............................................................................................. 253 Routing ................................................................................................................................................260 10.1 S7 routing ............................................................................................................................. 260 10.2 Data record routing .............................................................................................................. 265 Connection resources ..........................................................................................................................267 11.1 Connection resources of a station ....................................................................................... 267 11.2 Allocation of connection resources ...................................................................................... 271 11.3 Display of the connection resources .................................................................................... 275 Diagnostics and fault correction ...........................................................................................................279 12.1 Connection diagnostics ........................................................................................................ 279 12.2 Emergency address ............................................................................................................. 282 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H ......................................................................283 13.1 System IP addresses ........................................................................................................... 284 13.2 Response to Snycup ............................................................................................................ 289 13.3 Response to primary-backup switchover ............................................................................. 289 13.4 Connection resources of the redundant system S7-1500R/H ............................................. 290 13.5 13.5.1 HMI communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H ............................................. 292 HMI connection via the system IP address .......................................................................... 292 13.6 13.6.1 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H ................................. 294 Setting up an Open User Communication connection via the system IP address .............. 295 Communication 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Table of contents 14 Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1......................................................................................... 300 14.1 Firewall ..................................................................................................................................301 14.2 Logging .................................................................................................................................302 14.3 NTP client .............................................................................................................................302 14.4 SNMP ....................................................................................................................................303 14.5 VPN .......................................................................................................................................303 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 304 Index................................................................................................................................................... 316 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 11 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Communication 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 13 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Communication 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 15 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Communication 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 2 Product overview CPUs, communications modules and processors, and PC systems of the S7-1500, , ET 200MPET 200SPET 200pro and ET 200AL systems provide you with interfaces for communication via PROFINET, PROFIBUS and point-to-point connections. CPUs, communications modules and communications processors PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces are integrated in the S7-1500 CPUs. The CPU 1516-3 PN/DP for example has two PROFINET interfaces and one PROFIBUS DP interface. Other PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces are available by using communications modules (CM) and communications processors (CP). PROFINET interface (X2) with 1 port PROFINET interface (X1) with 2-port switch PROFIBUS DP interface (X3) PROFINET interface (X1) with 3-port switch Figure 2-1 Interfaces of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP and CPU 1512SP-1 PN Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 17 Product overview Interfaces of communications modules Interfaces of communications modules (CMs) extend the interfaces of CPUs (for example, the communication module CM 1542-5 adds a PROFIBUS interface to S7-1500 automation system). PROFIBUS DP interface Figure 2-2 PROFIBUS DP interface of the CM 1542-5 and CM DP Communication 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Product overview Interfaces of communications processors Interfaces of communications processors (CPs) provide an additional functionality compared with the integrated interfaces of the CPUs. CPs allow special applications, for example the CP 1543-1 provides Industrial Ethernet security functions for protecting Industrial Ethernet networks via its Industrial Ethernet interface. Industrial Ethernet interface Figure 2-3 Industrial Ethernet interface of the CP 1543-1 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 19 Product overview Interfaces of communications modules for point-to-point connections The communication modules for point-to-point connections provide communication via their RS 232-, RS 422- and RS 485 interfaces, for example, Freeport or Modbus communication. Interface for point-to-point connections Figure 2-4 Example of interface for point-to-point connection at the CM PtP RS422/485 BA Communication 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Product overview Interfaces of interface modules PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces of the interface modules (IM) in ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL are used to connect the distributed I/O ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL to PROFINET or PROFIBUS of the higher-level IO controller or DP master. PROFINET interface with 2-port switch Figure 2-5 PROFINET interfaces IM 155-5 PN ST (ET 200MP), IM 155-6 PN ST (ET 200SP), and IM 157-1 PN (ET 200AL) Communications services The communications services described below use the interfaces and communication mechanisms provided by the system via CPUs, communication modules and processors. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 21 3 Communications services 3.1 Overview of communication options Overview of communications options The following communications options are available for your automation task. Table 3- 1 Communications options Communications options PG Functionality communication2 HMI communication2 Open communication via TCP/IP2 Via interface: PN/IE1 DP serial On commissioning, testing, diagnostics X X - On operator control and monitoring X X - Data exchange via PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet with TCP/IP X - - X - - X - - Instructions: Open communication using ISO-on-TCP2 * TSEND_C/TRCV_C * TSEND/TRCV * TCON * T_DISCON Data exchange via PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet with ISO-on-TCP Instructions: Open communication via UDP2 * TSEND_C/TRCV_C * TSEND/TRCV * TCON * T_DISCON Data exchange via PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet with UDP Instructions: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C * TUSEND/TURCV * TCON * T_DISCON Communication 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.1 Overview of communication options Communications options Functionality Open communication via ISO (only CPs with Data exchange via PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet interface) PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet with the ISO protocol Via interface: PN/IE1 DP serial X - - - X - Instructions: Open communication with FDL (only CM 1542-5 as of firmware V2.0) * TSEND_C/TRCV_C * TSEND/TRCV * TCON * T_DISCON Data exchange via PROFIBUS with the FDL protocol Instructions: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C * TSEND/TRCV * TUSEND/TURCV * TCON * T_DISCON OPC UA server (only via internal PROFINET interfaces of the CPU) Data exchange with OPC UA clients X - - Communication via Modbus TCP Data exchange via PROFINET with Modbus TCP protocol X - - X - - X - - X - - X X - Instructions: E-mail * MB_CLIENT * MB_SERVER Sending process alarms via e-mail Instruction: * FTP (only CPs with PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet interface) TMAIL_C File management and file access via FTP (File Transfer Protocol); CP can be FTP client and FTP server Instruction: * Fetch/Write (only CPs with PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet interface) FTP_CMD Server services via TCP/IP, ISO-on-TCP and ISO Via special instructions for Fetch/Write S7 communication Data exchange via PROFINET/PROFIBUS with the S7 protocol. Instructions: * PUT/GET * BSEND/BRCV * USEND/URCV Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 23 Communications services 3.1 Overview of communication options Communications options Serial point-to-point connection Functionality Via interface: Data exchange via point-to-point with Freeport, 3964(R), USS or Modbus protocol PN/IE1 DP serial - - X Via special instructions for PtP, USS or Modbus RTU Web server Data exchange via HTTP(S), for example for diagnostics X - - SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) For monitoring and error recognition of IP networks, possibly parameterization of the IP network components via standard SNMP protocol X - - Time-of-day synchronization Via PN/IE interface: CPU is NTP client (Network Time Protocol) X - - Via DP interface: CPU/CM/CP is time-of-day master or time slave - X - 1 IE - Industrial Ethernet 2 Observe the special characteristics for S7-1500R/H Information on S7-1500R/H You can find information on the communication possibilities with the redundant system S7-1500R/H in the section Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H (Page 283). Additional information Application example: CPU-CPU communication with SIMATIC controllers (compendium) You can find the application example on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/20982954). This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/102420020) describes how to configure fetch/write communication via CP1543-1 with S7-1500. Additional information about the Fetch/Write services is available in the STEP 7 online help. You can find additional information on the PtP link in the function manual CM PtP Configurations for Point-to-Point Connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093). You will find the description of the web server functionality in the function manual Web server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560). You will find information about the standard protocol SNMP on the Service & Support pages on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15166742). You will find information about time-of-day synchronization in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86535497). Communication 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication This section provides an overview of the supported protocols and port numbers used for communication over PN/IE interfaces. For each protocol the address parameters, the respective communications layer as well as the communications role and the communications direction are specified. This information makes it possible to match the security measures for protection of the automation system to the used protocols (for example firewall). Because security measures are limited to Ethernet or PROFINET networks, the tables do not include PROFIBUS protocols. Note Port numbers used The specified port numbers are the standard port numbers used by the S7-1500 CPU. Many communication protocols and implementations enable you to use other port numbers. The tables below show the different layers and protocols that are being used. The following table shows the protocols supported by the S7-1500 CPUs, ET 200SP CPUs and the CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The S7-1500 software controllers also support the protocols listed in the following table for the Ethernet interfaces that are assigned to the software controller. Table 3- 2 Layers and protocols of the S7-1500 CPUs and software controllers (via PROFINET interface of the CPU) Protocol Port number (2) Link layer (4) Transport layer Function Description Not relevant (2) Ethertype 0x8892 (PROFINET) Accessible devices DCP is used by PROFINET to discover PROFINET devices and provide basic settings. Not relevant (2) Ethertype 0x88CC (LLDP) PROFINET Link Layer Discovery protocol PROFINET protocols DCP Discovery and basic configuration protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery protocol MRP PROFINET Discovery and configuration Not relevant (2) Ethertype 0x88E3 (IEC Media Redun62493-2-2010) dancy Protocol PROFINET medium redundancy PTCP PROFINET Precision Transparent Clock Protocol Not relevant (2) Ethertype 0x8892 (PROFINET) send clock and time synchronization, based on IEEE 1588 LLDP is used by PROFINET to discover and manage neighbor relationships between PROFINET devices. LLDP uses the special multicast MAC address: 01-80C2-00-00-0E MRP provides control of redundant transmission paths by means of a ring topology. MRP uses standard-compliant Multicast MAC addresses. PTC provides a time delay measurement between RJ45 ports and thus send clock synchronization and time synchronization. PTCP uses standard-compliant Multicast MAC addresses. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 25 Communications services 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication Protocol Port number PROFINET IO data PROFINET Context Manager (2) Link layer (4) Transport layer Function Description Not relevant (2) Ethertype 0x8892 (PROFINET) PROFINET Cyclic IO data transfer The PROFINET IO frames are used to transmit IO data cyclically between PROFINET IO controller and IO devices via Ethernet. 34964 PROFINET connection less RPC The PROFINET Context Manager provides an endpoint mapper in order to establish an application relation (PROFINET AR). (4) UDP Connection-oriented communications protocols SMTP 25 (4) TCP Simple mail transfer protocol SMTP is used for sending e-mails. SMTPS (SMTP over TLS) 465 (4) TCP Secure SMTP SMTP is used for sending e-mails over secure connections. SMTP with STARTTLS 25 587 (4) TCP Simple mail transfer protocol with the SMTP command "STARTTLS" SMTP with STARTTLS is used for sending e-mails over secure connections. HTTP 80 (4) TCP Hypertext transfer protocol HTTP is used for communication with the CPUinternal web server. ISO-on-TCP (according to RFC 1006) 102 (4) TCP ISO-on-TCP protocol ISO-on-TCP (according to RFC 1006) is used for message-oriented data exchange with remote CPU or software controller. NTP 123 (4) UDP Network time protocol NTP is used for synchronization of the CPU system time with the time of an NTP server. SNMP 161 (4) UDP Simple network management protocol 162 (trap) Simple network management protocol SNMP is used for reading and setting of network management data (SNMP managed Objects) by the SNMP Manager. HTTPS 443 (4) TCP Secure Hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS is used for communication with the CPUinternal web server via Secure Socket Layer (SSL). 502 (4) TCP Modbus/TCP protocol Modbus/TCP is used by MB_CLIENT/MB_SERVER instructions in the user program. Simple mail transfer protocol Hypertext transfer protocol S7 communication with ES, HMI, OPC server, etc. Network time protocol Secure Hypertext transfer protocol Modbus TCP Modbus Transmission Control Protocol Communication 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication Protocol Port number (2) Link layer (4) Transport layer Function Description OPC UA 4840 (4) TCP Based on the TCP/IP protocol Communication standard ranging from the enterprise level to the field level. OUC1 1 ... 1999 (4) TCP Open User Communication can be used (4) UDP to limited extent2 Open User Communication OUC instructions provide connection establishment, connection termination and data transfer based on the socket layer. and 2000 ... 5000 Open Platform Communications Unified Architecture Secure OUC (TCP/UDP) Secure Open User Communication (TLS) Recommended 5001 ... 49151 can be used to limited extent2 IGMPv2 Not relevant (3) Network layer Internet Group Management Protocol Network protocol for the organization of multicast groups. 49152 ... 65535 - Dynamic port area used for active connection end point if the application does not determine the local port number. Internet Group Management Protocol Reserved (4) TCP (4) UDP 1 Note: The open communication provides direct access to the UDP/TCP for the user. The user is responsible for observing the port restrictions/definitions of the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). 2 Do not use ports for OUC, which are already used by other protocols. The following table shows the protocols that are supported by the S7-1500 software controller via the Ethernet interfaces assigned to Windows. Table 3- 3 Layers and protocols of the S7-1500 Software Controller (via Ethernet interface on the Windows side) Protocol Port number (2) Link layer (4) Transport layer Function Description Accessible devices DCP is used by PROFINET to discover PROFINET devices and provide basic settings. PROFINET protocols DCP Discovery and basic configuration protocol Not relevant (2) Ethertype 0x8892 (PROFINET) PROFINET Discovery and configuration Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 27 Communications services 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication Protocol Port number (2) Link layer (4) Transport layer Function Description (4) TCP Simple mail transfer protocol SMTP is used for sending e-mails. Adjustable 1 (4) TCP Hypertext transfer protocol HTTP is used for communication with CPU-internal web server. You can change the port number to avoid conflict with other web servers on Windows. Connection-oriented communications protocols SMTP 25 Simple mail transfer protocol HTTP Hypertext transfer protocol If you want to use web server access, you must activate the port in the Windows Firewall. ISO-on-TCP (according to RFC 1006) 102 (4) TCP ISO-on-TCP protocol ISO-on-TCP (according to RFC 1006) for S7 communication with PG/PC or HMI. OUC2 1 ... 1999 (4) TCP Open User Communication can be used (4) UDP to limited extent3, 4 Open User Communication OUC instructions provide connection establishment, connection termination and data transfer based on the socket layer. (TCP/UDP) and 2000 ... 5000 If you want to use OUC, you must activate the ports in the Windows Firewall. Secure OUC Secure Open User Communication (TLS) recommended4 5001 ... 49151 can be used to limited extent3, 4 IGMPv2 Not relevant (3) Network layer Internet Group Management Protocol Network protocol for the organization of multicast groups. 49152 ... 65535 - Dynamic port range that is used for the active connection end point, if the application does not determine the local port number. If you wish to use this communication, you must activate the ports in the Windows Firewall. Internet Group Management Protocol Reserved (4) TCP (4) UDP 1 Default setting for Windows assigned interfaces: 81 2 Note: The open user communication provides direct access to the UDP/TCP for the user. The user is responsible for observing the port restrictions/definitions of the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). 3 Do not use ports for OUC, which are already used by other protocols. 4 Do not use ports for OUC, which are already used by other Windows applications. Communication 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication The following table shows the protocols that are supported in addition to those listed in the tables for the S7-1500 communications modules (e.g. CP 1543-1). Table 3- 4 Layers and protocols of S7-1500 communications modules Protocol Port number (2) Link layer (4) Transport layer Function Description (4) TCP File transfer protocol FTP is used for the transmission of files (only in connection with CP 1543-1). (4) TCP File transfer protocol SecureFTP is used for the transmission of files by means of a TSL connection (only in connection with CP 1543-1). PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet protocols Connection-oriented communications protocols FTP 20 (data) File transfer protocol 21 (control) secureFTP 20 (data) File transfer protocol 21 (control) DHCP 68 (4) UDP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is used to retrieve the IP Address Suite from a DHCP server when starting up the IE interface. 123 (4) UDP Network time protocol Secure NTP is used to synchronize the CP 1543-1 internal system clock with an NTP server. SNMP 161 (4) UDP Simple network management protocol 162 (trap) Simple network management protocol SNMPv3 permits the CP 1543-1 to read network management data (MIBs) from SNMPv3 agent with authentication. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Secure NTPv3 Network time protocol Special consideration S7-1500 MFP: Port 111: The S7-1500 MFP uses Port 111 to the NFS service for internal communication. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 29 Communications services 3.3 Overview of connection resources 3.3 Overview of connection resources Connection resources Some communications services require connections. Connections allocate resources on the CPUs, CPs and CMs involved (for example memory areas in the CPU operating system). In most cases one resource per CPU/CP/CM is allocated for a connection. In HMI communication, up to 3 connection resources are required per HMI connection. The connection resources available depend on the CPU being used, the CPs and CMs and must not exceed a defined high limit for the automation system. Available connection resources in a station The maximum number of resources of a station is determined by the CPU. Each CPU has reserved connection resources for PG, HMI and web server communication. There are also resources available that can be used for SNMP, e-mail connections, HMI, S7 communication as well as for open communication. When are connection resources allocated? The time for allocation of connection resources depends on how the connection is set up, automatic, programmed or configured (see section Setting up a connection (Page 30)). Additional information You will find more detailed information on the allocation of connection resources and the display of connection resources in STEP 7 in the section Connection resources (Page 267). 3.4 Setting up a connection Automatic connection STEP 7 sets up a connection automatically (for example PG or HMI connection) if you have connected the PG/PC interface to an interface of the CPU physically and have made the interface assignment in STEP 7 in the "Go online" dialog. Communication 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.4 Setting up a connection Setting up a programmed connection You set up the programmed connection in the program editor of STEP 7 in the context of a CPU by assigning instructions for communication, for example TSEND_C. When specifying the connection parameters (in the Inspector window, in the properties of the instruction), you are supported by the easy-to-use user interface. Figure 3-1 Programmed setup Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 31 Communications services 3.4 Setting up a connection Setting up a configured connection You set up the configured connection in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7 in the context of a CPU or a software controller. Figure 3-2 Configured setup Communication 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.4 Setting up a connection Effects on the connection resources of the CPU You can often choose between a configured or a programmed connection. Programmed connection setup allows connection resources to be released following data transfer. Like routed connections, programmed connections are not guaranteed, meaning that they are only established when resources are available. With configured connection setup, the resource is available after download of the configuration until the configuration changes again. Corresponding resources are therefore reserved for connection establishment via configured connections. The "Connection resources" table in the Inspector window of the CPU displays an overview of connection resources already used and those still available. How do I set up a connection? Table 3- 5 Setting up the connection Connection Automatically Programmed setup Configured setup Programming device connection X - - HMI connection X - X Open communication via TCP/IP connection - X X Open communication via ISO-onTCP connection - X X Open communication via UDP connection - X X Open communication via ISO connection - X X Open communication via FDL connection - X X Communication via Modbus TCP connection - X - E-mail connection - X - FTP connection - X - S7 connection* - - X * Note that for an S7-1500 CPU with firmware version lower than V2.0, the use of PUT/GET communication must be enabled in the properties of the CPU. You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help. Additional information You will find further information on the allocation of connection resources and the display of connection resources in STEP 7 in the section Connection resources (Page 267). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 33 Communications services 3.5 Data consistency 3.5 Data consistency Definition Data consistency is important for data transfer and you need to take this into account when configuring the communication task. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. A data area which cannot be modified by concurrent processes is called a consistent data area. This means that a data area which belongs together and which is larger than the maximum size of the consistent data area can consist in part of new and of old data at the same time. An inconsistency can occur when an instruction for communication is interrupted, for example by a hardware interrupt OB with higher priority. This interrupts the transfer of the data area. If the user program in this OB now changes the data that has not yet been processed by the communication instruction, the transferred data originates from different times: The following figure shows a data area that is smaller than the maximum size of the consistent data area. In this case, when transferring the data area, it is ensured that there is no interruption by the user program during data access so that the data is not changed. The source data area is smaller than the maximum size of the consistent data area (). The instruction transfers the data together to the destination data area. Maximum size of the consistent data area Figure 3-3 Consistent transfer of data Communication 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.5 Data consistency The following figure shows a data area that is larger than the maximum size of the consistent data area. In this case, the data can be changed during an interruption of the data transfer. An interruption also occurs if, for example, the data area needs to be transferred in several parts. If the data is changed during the interruption, the transferred data originates from different times. The source data area is larger than the maximum size of the consistent data area (). At time T1, the instruction only transfers as much data from the source data area into the destination data area as fits in the consistent data area. At time T2, the instruction transfers the rest of the source data area to the destination data area. After the transfer, data from different points in time exist in the destination data area. If the data in the source data area has changed in the meantime, an inconsistency may result. Maximum size of the consistent data area Figure 3-4 Transfer of data larger than the maximum consistency area Example of an inconsistency The figure below shows an example of changing data during the transfer. The destination data area contains data from different points in time. Maximum size of the consistent data area Figure 3-5 Example: Changing data during the transfer Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 35 Communications services 3.5 Data consistency System-specific maximum data consistency for S7-1500: No inconsistency occurs if the system-specific maximum size of the consistent data is kept to. With an S7-1500, communication data is copied consistently into or out of the user memory in blocks of up to 512 bytes during the program cycle. Data consistency is not ensured for larger data areas. Where defined data consistency is required, the length of communication data in the user program of the CPU must not exceed 512 bytes. You can then access these data areas consistently, for example from an HMI device by reading/writing tags. If more data than the system-specific maximum size needs to be transferred consistently, you yourself must ensure the data consistency with suitable measures in the user program. Ensuring data consistency Use of instructions for access to common data: If the user program contains instructions for communication that access common data, for example TSEND/TRCV, you can coordinate access to this data area yourself, for example using the "DONE" parameter. The data consistency of the data areas that are transferred with an instruction for communication can therefore be ensured in the user program. Note Measures in the user program To achieve data consistency, you can copy transferred data to a separate data area (for example, global data block). While the user program continues to work with the original data, you can transfer the data saved in the separate data area consistently with the communication instruction. For the copying, use uninterruptible instructions such as UMOVE_BLK or UFILL_BLK. These instructions ensure data consistency up to 16 KB. Use of PUT/GET instructions or Write/Read via HMI communication: In S7 communication with the PUT/GET instructions or Write/Read via HMI communication, you need to take into account the size of the consistent data areas during programming or configuration. In the user program of an S7-1500 as server, there is no instruction available that can coordinate the data transfer in the user program. The data exchanged using PUT/GET instructions updates the S7-1500 while the user program is running. There is no point in time within the processing of the cyclic user program at which the data is exchanged consistently. The length of the data area to be transferred should be smaller than 512 bytes. Additional information You will also find the maximum amount of consistent data in the device manuals of the communications modules in the Technical Specifications. You will find further information on data consistency in the description of the instructions in the STEP 7 online help. Communication 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication 3.6 Secure Communication 3.6.1 Basics of Secure Communication For STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V14 and for S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware V2.0, the options for secure communication have been broadened considerably. Introduction The attribute "secure" is used for the identification of communication mechanisms that are based on a Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) (for example RFC 5280 for Internet X.509 Public Key Infrastructure Certificate and Certificate Revocation List Profile). A Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) is a system that can issue, distribute and check digital certificates. The digital certificates issued are used in the PKI to secure computer-based communication. If a PKI uses asymmetric key cryptography, the messages in a network can be digitally signed and encrypted. Components that you have configured in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) for secure communication use an asymmetric key encryption scheme with a Public Key and Private Key. TLS (Transport Layer Security) is used as the encryption protocol. TLS is the successor for the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol. Objectives of secure communication Secure communication is used to achieve the following objectives: Confidentiality i.e. the data are secret / cannot by read by eavesdroppers. Integrity i.e. the message that reaches the recipient is the same message, unchanged, that the sender sent. The message has not been altered on the way. End point authentication i.e. the end point communication partner is exactly who it claims to be and the party who is to be reached. The identity of the partner has been checked. These objectives were in the past primarily relevant to IT and networked computers. Now, industrial machinery and control systems with sensitive data are at equally high risk, as they are also networked, and consequently pose strict security requirements for data exchange. Protection of the automation cell by means of the cell protection concept through firewall, or via connection through VPN, for example with the security module, was common in the past and remains so. However, it is becoming increasingly necessary to also transfer data to external computers in encrypted form via Intranet or public networks. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 37 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Common principles of secure communication Independent of the context, secure communication is based on the concept of the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) and contains the following components: An asymmetric encryption scheme that allows: - Encryption or decryption of messages using public or private keys. - The verification of signatures in messages and certificates. The messages/certificates are signed by the sender/certificate subject with their private key. The recipient/verifier checks the signature with the public key of the sender/certificate subject. Transport and storage of the public key using X.509 certificates: - X.509 certificates are digitally signed data that allow public key authentication in terms of the bound identity. - X.509 certificates can contain information that describes in more detail or restricts use of the public key. For example the date as of which a public key in a certificate is valid and when it expires. - X.509 certificates contain information about the issuer of the certificate in secure form. The following paragraphs give an overview of these basic concepts, which are required for managing certificates in STEP 7 (TIA Portal), for example, and for programming communication instructions for secure Open User Communication (sOUC). Communication 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Secure communication with STEP 7 STEP 7 as of V14 provides the required PKI for the configuration and operation of secure communication. Examples: The Hypertext Transfer Protokoll (HTTP) turns into Hypertext Transfer Protokoll Secure (HTTPS) with the help of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol. Since HTTPS is a combination of HTTP and TLS, it is called "HTTP over TLS" in the corresponding RFC. You can see in the browser that HTTPS is being used; this is indicated by the URL "https://" instead of "http://" in the address bar of the browser. Most browsers highlight such secure connections. Open User Communication turns into secure Open User Communication. The underlying protocol is also TLS. E-mail providers also offer access over the "Secure SMTP over TLS" protocol to increase the security of e-mail communication. The figure below shows the TLS protocol in the context of communication layers. Figure 3-6 TLS protocol in the context of communication layers Secure communication with OPC UA An OPC UA server is implemented in S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware V2.0. OPC UA Security also covers authentication, encryption and data integrity with digital X.509 certificates and also uses a Public Key Infrastructure (PKI). Depending on the requirements placed by the application, you can select different security levels for the end point security. You will find the description of the OPC UA server functionality in the section AUTOHOTSPOT. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 39 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication 3.6.2 Confidentiality through encryption Message encryption is an important element of data security. When encrypted messages are intercepted by third parties during communication, these potential eavesdroppers cannot access the information they contain. There is a wide range of mathematical processes (algorithms) for encrypting messages. All algorithms process a "key" parameter to encrypt and decrypt messages. Algorithm + key + message => encrypted message Encrypted message + key + algorithm => (decrypted) message Symmetric encryption The central aspect of symmetric encryption is that both communication partners use the same key for message encryption and decryption, as shown in the figure below. Bob uses the same key for encryption as Alice uses for decryption. In general, we also say that the two sides share the secret key with which they encrypt or decrypt a message as a secret. Bob encrypts his message with the symmetric key Alice decrypts the encrypted message with the symmetric key Figure 3-7 Symmetric encryption The process can be compared to a briefcase to which the sender and recipient have the same key, which both locks and opens the case. Advantage: Symmetric encryption algorithms (such as AES, Advanced Encryption Algorithm) are fast. Disadvantages: How can the key be sent to a recipient without getting into the wrong hands? This is a key distribution problem. If enough messages are intercepted, the key can also be worked out and must therefore be changed regularly. If there are a large number of communication partners, there is also a large number of keys to distribute. Communication 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Asymmetric encryption Asymmetric encryption works with a pair of keys consisting of one public key and one private key. Used with a PKI, it is also known as Public Key cryptography or simply PKI cryptography. A communication partner, Alice in the figure below, has a private key and a public key. The public key is provided to the public, in other words any potential communication partner. Anyone with the public key can encrypt messages for Alice. In the figure below, this is Bob. Alice's private key, which she must not disclose, is used by Alice to decrypt an encrypted message addressed to her. Alice provides Bob with her public key. No precautionary measures are required to this purpose: Anyone can use the public key for messages to Alice if they are sure that it is actually Alice's public key. Bob encrypts his message with Alice's public key. Alice decrypts the encrypted message from Bob with her private key. As only Alice has the private key and never discloses it, only she can decrypt the message. With her private key, she can decrypt any message encrypted with her public key - not only messages from Bob. Figure 3-8 Asymmetric encryption The system can be compared to a mailbox into which anyone can put a message, but from which only the person with the key can remove messages. Advantages: A message encrypted with a public key can only be decrypted by the owner of the private key. As another (private) key is required for decryption, it is also much harder to work out the decryption key on the basis of large numbers of encrypted messages. This means that the public key does not have to be kept strictly confidential, unlike with symmetric keys. Another advantage is easier distribution of public keys. No specially secured channel is required in asymmetric cryptography to transfer the public key from the recipient to the sender encrypting the messages. Less work is thus required in managing the keys than would be the case in symmetric encryption procedures. Disadvantages: Complex algorithm (e.g. RSA, named after the three mathematicians Rivest, Shamir and Adleman), and therefore poorer performance than with symmetric encryption. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 41 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Encryption processes in practice In practice, for example with a CPU Web server and Secure Open User Communication, the TLS protocol is used below the relevant application layer. Application layers are HTTP or SMTP, for example, as detailed above. TLS (Transport Layer Security) uses a combination of asymmetric encryption and symmetric encryption (hybrid encryption) for secure data transfer, for example, over the Internet, and uses the following subprotocols: TLS Handshake Protocol, responsible for authentication of communication partners and negotiation of the algorithms and keys to be used for subsequent data transfer on the basis of asymmetric encryption. TLS Record Protocol, responsible for encryption of user data with symmetric encryption and data exchange. Both asymmetric and symmetric encryption are considered secure encryption schemes there is basically no difference in security between the two procedures. The degree of security depends on parameters such as the selected key length. Abuse of encryption You cannot tell what identity is assigned to a public key from the bit string. A fraud could provide their public key and claim to be someone else. If a third party then uses this key thinking that they are addressing their required communication partner, confidential information could end up with the fraud. The fraud then uses their private key to decrypt the message that was not intended for them, and sensitive information falls into the wrong hands. To prevent this type of abuse, the communication partners must be confident that they are dealing with the right communication partner. This trust is established by using digital certificates in a PKI. Communication 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication 3.6.3 Authenticity and integrity through signatures Attacks from programs that intercept communication between the server and client and act as if they themselves were client or server, are called man-in-the-middle attacks. If the false identity of these programs is not detected, they can obtain important information about the S7 program, for example, or set values in the CPU and attack a machine or plants. Digital certificates are used to avoid such attacks. Secure communication uses digital certificates that meet the X.509 standard of the International Telecommunication Union (ITU). This allows the identity of a program, a computer or an organization to be checked (authenticated). How certificates establish trust The main role of X.509 certificates is to bind an identity with the data of a certificate subject (for example, e-mail address or computer name) to the public key of the identity. Identities can be people, computers or machines. Certificates are issued by certificate authorities (Certificate Authority, CA) or by the subject of a certificate itself. PKI systems specify how users can trust the certificate authorities and the certificates that they issue. The certificate process: 1. Anyone wishing to own a certificate submits a certificate application to a registration authority linked to the certificate authority. 2. The certificate authority assesses the application and applicant on the basis of set criteria. 3. If the identity of the applicant can be clearly established, the certificate authority confirms that identity by issuing a signed certificate. The applicant has now become the certificate subject. The figure below is a simplified overview of the process. It does not show how Alice can check the digital signature. Figure 3-9 Signing of a certificate by a certificate authority Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 43 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Self-signed certificates Self-signed certificates are certificates whose signature comes from the certificate subject and not from an independent certificate authority. Examples: You can create and sign a certificate yourself, for example, to encrypt messages to a communication partner. In the example above, Bob (instead of Twent) could himself sign his certificate with his private key. Using Bob's public key, Alice can check that the signature and public key from Bob match. This procedure is sufficient for simple internal plant communication that is to be encrypted. A root certificate is, for example, a self-signed certificate, signed by the certificate authority (CA), that contains the public key of the certificate authority. Features of self-signed certificates The "CN" (Common Name of Subject) for the certificate subject and "Issuer" attributes of self-signed certificates are identical: You have signed your certificate yourself. The field "CA" (Certificate Autority) must be set to "False"; the self-signed certificate should not be used to sign other certificates. Self-signed certificates are not embedded in a PKI hierarchy. Certificate content A certificate to the X.509 V3 standard, the standard that is also used by STEP 7 and the S71500 CPUs, consists primarily of the following elements: Public key Details of the certificate subject (i.e. the holder of the key), for example, the Common Name (CN) of Subject . Attributes such as serial number and validity period Digital signature from the certificate authority (CA) confirming that the information is correct. There are also extensions, for example: Specification of what the public key may be used for (Key Usage), for example, signing or key encryption. When you create a new certificate with STEP 7, for example in the context of Secure Open User Communication, select the correct entry from the list of possible usages, e.g. "TLS". Specification of a Subject Alternative Name (SAN), which is used in secure communication with Web servers (HTTP over TLS), for example, to ensure that the certificate in the address bar of the Web browser also belongs to the Web server specified in the URL. Communication 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication How signatures are generated and verified Asymmetric key usage ensures that certificates can be verified: The example of the "MyCert" certificate illustrates the "Sign" and "Verify signature" processes. Generating a signature: 1. The issuer of the "MyCert" certificate generates a hash value from the certificate data using a specific hash function (for example SHA-1, Secure Hash Algorithm). The hash value is a bit string of a constant length. The advantage of the constant length of the hash value is that it always takes the same amount of time to sign. 2. Using the hash value generated in this way and the private key, the issuer of the certificate then generates a digital signature. The RSA signature scheme is often used. 3. The digital signature is saved in the certificate. The certificate is now signed. Verifying a signature: 1. The authenticator of the "MyCert" certificate obtains the certificate of the issuer and thus the public key. 2. A new hash value is formed from the certificate data with the same hash algorithm that was used for signing (for example SHA-1). 3. This hash value is then compared with the hash value that is determined by means of the public key of the certificate issuer and the signature algorithm for checking the signature. 4. If the signature check produces a positive result, both the identity of the certificate subject as well as the integrity, meaning authenticity and genuineness, of the certificate content are proven. Anyone who has the public key, i.e. the certificate from the certificate authority, can check the signature and thus recognize that the certificate was actually signed by the certificate authority. The figure below shows how Alice uses the public key in the certificate from Twent (who represents the certificate authority, CA) to verify the signature on Bob's public key. All that is required for verification is therefore the availability of the certificate from the certificate authority at the moment of checking. The validation itself is executed automatically in the TLS session. Figure 3-10 Verification of a certificate with the public key of the certificate of a certificate authority Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 45 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Signing messages The method described above for signing and verifying also uses the TLS session for signing and verifying messages. If a hash value is generated by a message and this hash value is signed with the private key of the sender and attached to the original message, the recipient of the message is able to check the integrity of the message. The recipient decrypts the hash value with the public key of the sender, puts together the hash value from the message received and compares the two values. If the values are not the same, the message has been tampered with on the way. Chain of certificates to root certificate The certificates of a PKI are often organized hierarchically: The top of the hierarchy is formed by root certificates. Root certificates are certificates that are not signed by a higherlevel certificate authority. The certificate subject and certificate issuer of root certificates are identical. Root certificates enjoy absolute trust. They form the "anchor" of trust and must therefore be known to the receiver as trusted certificates. They are stored in an area provided for trusted certificates. Depending on the PKI, the function of root certificates is, for example, to sign certificates from lower-level certificate authorities, so-called intermediate certificates. This transfers the trust from the root certificate to the intermediate certificate. An intermediate certificate can sign a certificate just like a root certificate; both are therefore referred to as "CA certificates". This hierarchy can be continued over multiple intermediate certificates until the end-entity certificate. The end-entity certificate is the certificate of the user who is to be identified. The validation process runs through the hierarchy in the opposite direction: As described above, the certificate issuer is established and the signature checked with the issuer's public key, then the certificate of the higher-level certificate issuer is established along the entire chain of trust to the root certificate. Conclusion: The chain of intermediate certificates to the root certificate, the certificate path, must be available in every device that is to validate an end-entity certificate of the communication partner, irrespective of the type of secure communication that you configure. 3.6.4 Managing certificates with STEP 7 STEP 7 as of version V14 together with the S7-1500-CPUs as of firmware version 2.0 support the Internet PKI (RFC 5280) in as far as an S7-1500-CPU is able to communicate with devices that also support the Internet PKI. The usage of X.509 certificates for verifying certificates as described in the preceding sections, for example, is a result of this. STEP 7 as of V14 uses a PKI similar to Internet PKI. Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs), for example, are not supported. Communication 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Creating or assigning certificates You create certificates for various applications in STEP 7 for devices with security properties, such as an S7-1500 CPU as of firmware V2.0. The following areas in the Inspector window of the CPU allow the creation of new certificates or the selection of existing ones: "Protection & Security > Certificate manager" - for the generation and assignment of all types of certificates. TLS certificates for Secure Open User Communication are preset for the generation of certificates. "Web server > Security" - for the generation and assignment of Web server certificates. "OPC UA > Server > Security" - for the generation and assignment OPC UA certificates. Figure 3-11 Security settings for an S7-1500 CPU in STEP 7 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 47 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Special features of the section "Protection & Security > Certificate manager" Only in this section of the Inspector window do you switch between the global, i.e. projectwide, and the local, i.e. device-specific, certificate manager (option "Use global security settings for the certificate manager"). The option decides whether you have access to all the certificates in the project or not. If you do not use the certificate manager in the global security settings, you only have access to the local certificate memory of the CPU. You do not have access, for example, to imported certificates or root certificates. Without these certificates only a restricted functionality is available. You can, for example, only generate self-signed certificates. If you use the certificate manager in the global security settings and you are logged on as an administrator, you have access to the global, project-wide certificate memory. You can, for example, assign imported certificates to the CPU, or create certificates that are issued and signed by the project CA (certificate authority of the project). The figure below shows how the "Global security settings" are shown in the project tree after the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option has been activated in the Inspector window of the CPU. Communication 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication When you double-click "User login" in the project tree below the global security settings and log in, a line called "Certificate manager" is displayed, among other data. When you double-click the "Certificate manager" line, you obtain access to all the certificates in the project, divided into the tabs "CA" (certificate authorities), "Device certificates" and "Trusted certificates and root certificate authorities". Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 49 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Private keys STEP 7 generates private keys while generating device certificates and server certificates (end-entity certificates). The location where the private key is stored encrypted depends on the use of the global security settings for the certificate manager: If you use global security settings, the private key is stored encrypted in the global (project-wide) certificate memory. If you do not use global security settings, the private key is stored encrypted in the local (CPU-specific) certificate memory. The existence of the private key, which is required to decrypt data, for example, is displayed in the "Private key" column of the "Device certificates" tab of the certificate manager in the global security settings. When the hardware configuration is loaded, the device certificate, the public key as well as the private key are loaded into the CPU. NOTICE The "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option influences the previously used private key: If you have already created certificates without using the certificate manager in the global security settings and then change the option for using the certificate manager, the private keys are lost and the certificate ID can change. A warning draws your attention to this fact. Therefore specify at the beginning of the project configuration which option is required for the certificate manager. 3.6.5 Examples for the management of certificates. As explained in the preceding sections, certificates are required for every type of secure communication. The following section shows as an example how you handle the certificates with STEP 7 so that the requirements for Secure Open User Communication are fulfilled. The devices which are involved at the respective communication partners are differentiated below. The respective steps for supplying the required certificates to the communications participants are described. An S7-1500 CPU or an S7-1500 software controller as of firmware version 2.0 is always required. The general rule is: While a secure connection is being established (handshake"), the communication partners as a rule only communicate their end-entity certificates (device certificates). Therefore the CA certificates required to verify the transmitted device certificate must be located in the certificate memory of the respective communication partner. Communication 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Secure Open User Communication between two S7-1500 CPUs Two S7-1500-CPUs, PLC_1 and PLC_2, are to exchange data with each other via Secure Open User Communication. You generate the required device certificates with STEP 7 and assign them to the CPUs as described below. STEP 7 project certificate authorities (CA of the project) are used to sign the device certificates. The certificates are to be referenced by their certificate ID in the user program (TCON communication instruction in combination with the associated system data type, for example TCON_IPV4_SEC). STEP 7 assigns the certificate ID automatically during the generation or creation of certificates. Procedure STEP 7 automatically loads the required CA certificates together with the hardware configuration to the participating CPUs so that the requirements for certificate verification exist for both CPUs. You therefore only have to generate the device certificates for the respective CPU; STEP 7 does the rest for you. 1. Mark PLC_1 and activate the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option in the "Protection & Security" section. 2. Log in as a user in the project tree in the "Global security settings" section. For a new project, the "Administrator" role is planned for the first login. 3. Return to the PLC-1 in the "Protection & Security" section. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column in the "Device certificates" table to add a new certificate. 4. In the drop-down list for selecting a certificate click the "Add" button. The "Create Certificate" dialog opens. 5. Leave the default settings in this dialog. They are tailored to the usage of Secure Open User Communication (usage: TLS). Tip: Supplement the default name of the certificate subject, in this case the CPU name. In order to differentiate you better leave the default CPU name in case you have to manage a large number of device certificates. Example: PLC_1/TLS becomes PLC_1-SecOUC-Chassis17FactoryState. 6. Compile the configuration. The device certificate and the CA certificate are part of the configuration. 7. Repeat the steps described above for PLC_2. In the next step you have to create the user programs for the data exchange and load the configurations together with the program. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 51 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Using self-signed certificates instead of CA certificates When creating device certificates you can select the "Self-signed" option. You can create self-signed certificates without being logged in for the global security settings. This procedure is not recommended because the resulting certificates do not exist in the global certificate memory and can therefore not be assigned directly to a partner CPU. As described above, you should select the name of the certificate subject with care so that the right certificate can be assigned to a device without any doubt. Verification with the CA certificates of the STEP 7 project is not possible for self-signed certificates. To ensure that self-signed certificates can be verified you have to include the self-signed certificates of the communication partner into the list of trusted partner devices for each CPU. To this purpose you must have activated the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option and be logged in as a user in the global security settings. Proceed as follows to add the self-signed certificate of the communication partner of the CPU: 1. Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the "Certificates of partner devices" table in the "Protection & Security" section. 2. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column in the "Device certificates" table to add a new certificate. 3. Select the self-signed certificate of the communication partner from the drop-down list and confirm the selection. In the next step you have to create the user programs for the data exchange and load the configurations together with the program. Secure Open User Communication between S7-1500 CPU as a TLS client and an external device as a TLS server Two devices are to exchange data with each other via TLS connection or TLS session, for example, exchanging recipes, production data or quality data: An S7-1500 CPU (PLC_1) as TLS client; the CPU uses Secure Open User Communication An external device, for example a Manufacturing Execution System (MES), as TLS server The S7-1500 CPU establishes the TLS connection / session to the MES system as TLS client. TLS client TLS server Communication 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication The S7-1500 CPU requires the CA certificates of the MES system to authenticate the TLS server: The root certificate and, if appropriate, the intermediate certificates for verifying the certificate path. You have to import these certificates into the global certificate memory of the S7-1500 CPU. Proceed as follows to import certificates of the communication partner: 1. Open the certificate manager in the global security settings in the project tree. 2. Select the appropriate table (trusted certificates and root certificate authorities) for the certificate to be imported. 3. Right-click in the table to open the shortcut menu. Click "Import" and import the required certificate or the required CA certificates. Through the import the certificate has a certificate ID assigned to it and can be assigned to a module in the next step. 4. Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the "Certificates of partner devices" table in the "Protection & Security" section. 5. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column to add the imported certificates. 6. Select the required CA certificates of the communication partner from the drop-down list and confirm the selection. Optionally the MES system can also request a device certificate of the CPU to authenticate the CPU (i.e., the TLS client). In this case, the CA certificates of the CPU must be made available to the MES system. The prerequisite for importing the certificates into the MES system is a preceding export of the CA certificates from the STEP 7 project of the CPU. Follow these steps: 1. Open the certificate manager in the global security settings in the project tree. 2. Select the matching table (CA certificate) for the certificate to be exported. 3. Right-click the selected certificate to open the shortcut menu. 4. Click "Export". 5. Select the export format of the certificate. In the next step you have to create the user programs for the data exchange and load the configurations together with the program. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 53 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Secure Open User Communication between an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server and an external device as TLS client If the S7-1500 CPU acts as TLS server and the external device, for example an ERP system (Enterprise Resource Planning System) establishes the TLS connection / session, you require the following certificates: For the S7-1500 CPU, you generate a device certificate (server certificate) with a private key and download it with the hardware configuration into the S7-1500 CPU. You use the "Signed by certificate authority" option when generating the server certificate. The private key is required for the key exchange as explained in the figure for the example "HTTP over TLS". You have to export the CA certificate of the STEP 7 project for the ERP system and import / load it into the ERP system. With the CA certificate the ERP system verifies the server certificate of the S7-1500 that was transferred from the CPU to the ERP system during the establishment of the TLS connection / session. TLS server TLS client Figure 3-12 Secure OUC between an S7-1500 CPU and ERP system The required steps are described in the preceding sections. Communication 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Secure Open User Communication to a mail server (SMTP over TLS) An S7-1500 CPU can establish a secure connection to an e-mail server with the communication instruction TMAIL-C. The system data types TMail_V4_SEC and TMail_QDN_SEC allow you to determine the partner port of the e-mail server and thus to reach the e-mail server via "SMTP over TLS". Figure 3-13 Secure OUC between a S7-1500 CPU and a mail server Requirement for secure e-mail connection is the importing of the root certificate and the intermediate certificates of the mail server (provider) into the global certificate memory of the S7-1500 CPU. By means of these certificates the CPU can check the server certificate that is sent by the mail server during the establishment of the TLS connection / session. Proceed as follows to import certificates of the mail server: 1. Open the certificate manager in the global security settings in the project tree. 2. Select the appropriate table (trusted certificates and root certificate authorities) for the certificate to be imported. 3. Right-click in the table to open the shortcut menu. Click "Import" and import the required certificate or the required CA certificates. As a result of the import, the certificate has a certificate ID assigned to it and can be assigned to a module in the next step. 4. Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the "Certificates of partner devices" table in the "Protection & Security" section. 5. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column to add the imported certificates. 6. Select the required CA certificates of the communication partner from the drop-down list and confirm the selection. In the next step you have to create the user programs for the e-mail client function of the CPU and load the configurations together with the program. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 55 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication 3.6.6 Example: HTTP over TLS The following paragraphs show how the mechanisms described are used to establish a secure communication between a Web browser and the Web server of an S7-1500 CPU. Initially the changes for the "Permit access only with HTTPS" option in STEP 7 are described. As of STEP 7 V14 you have the possibility to influence the server certificate of the Web server of an S7-1500 CPU as of firmware V2.0: The server certificate is generated as of these versions with STEP 7. In addition it illustrates the processes that are executed when a website of the CPU Web server is called with a Web browser of a PC through an encrypted HTTPS connection. Using Web server certificates for S7-1500 CPUs, FW V2.0 or higher For S7-1500 CPUs with a firmware version before V2.0, you were able to set "Permit access only with HTTPS" when setting the Web server properties, without specific requirements applying. You did not have to handle certificates for these CPUs; the CPU automatically generates the certificates required for the Web server. For S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware V2.0, STEP 7 generates the server certificate (end-entity certificate) for the CPU. You assign a server certificate to the Web server in the properties of the CPU (Web server > Security). Because a server certificate name is always preset, there is no change to the easy configuration of the Web server: You activate the Web server. The "Permit access only with HTTPS" option is enabled by default - STEP 7 generates a server certificate with the default name during compiling. Irrespective of whether you use the certificate manager in the global security settings or not: STEP 7 has all the information required to generate the server certificate. In addition, you have the possibility to determine the properties of the server certificate, for example, the name or the validity period. Communication 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Loading the Web server certificate The server certificate generated by STEP 7 is then automatically also loaded to the CPU when the hardware configuration is loaded. If you use the certificate manager in the global security settings, the certificate authority of the project (CA certificate) signs the server certificate of the Web server: During loading the CA certificate of the project is loaded as well automatically. If you do not use the certificate manager in the global security settings, STEP 7 generates the server certificate as a self-signed certificate. When you address the Web server of the CPU over the IP address of the CPU, a new server certificate (end-entity certificate) must be generated and loaded with each change in the IP address of an Ethernet interface of the CPU. This is necessary because the identity of the CPU changes with the IP address - and the identity requires a signature in accordance with the PKI rules. You can avoid this problem by addressing the CPU with a domain name instead of its IP address, for example "myconveyer-cpu.room13.myfactory.com". For this purpose, you have to manage the domain names of the CPU via a DNS server. Supplying a Web browser with a CA certificate of the Web server In the Web browser the user who accesses the websites of the CPU through HTTPS should install the CA certificate of the CPU. If no certificate is installed, a warning is output recommending that you do not use the page. To view this page, you must explicitly "Add an exception". The user receives the valid root certificate for download from the "Intro" Web page of the CPU Web server under "Download certificate". STEP 7 offers a different possibility: Export the CA certificate of the project with the certificate manager into the global security settings in STEP 7. Subsequently import the CA certificate into the browser. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 57 Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication Course of the secure communication The figure below shows, in simplified terms, how communication is established ("handshake") focusing on the negotiation of keys used for data exchange (here with HTTP over TLS). However, the course can be applied to all communication options that are based on the usage of TLS, i.e. also for Secure Open User Communication (see Basics for secure communication). Figure 3-14 Handshake with https The figure does not show the measures taken at Alice's end (browser) to verify the certificate sent by the Web server. Whether Alice can trust the Web server certificate received and therefore the identity of the Web server, and can accept the exchange of data, depends on positive verification. Communication 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.6 Secure Communication The steps for verifying the authenticity of the Web server: 1. Alice must know the public keys of all relevant certificate authorities, which means she requires the complete certificate chain to verify the Web server certificate (i.e. the endentity certificate of the Web server): Alice will generally have the required root certificate in her certificate memory. When a Web browser is installed, a range of trusted root certificates is also installed. If she does not have the root certificate, she has to download it from the certificate authority and install it in the certificate store of the browser. The certificate authority can also be the device on which the Web server is located. You have the following options for obtaining the intermediate certificates: - The server itself sends the required intermediate certificates to Alice along with its end-entity certificate - in the form of a signed message so that Alice can verify the integrity of the certificate chain. - The certificates often contain the URLs of the certificate issuer. Alice can load the required intermediate certificates from these URLs. When you work with certificates in STEP 7 it is always assumed that you have imported the intermediate certificates and the root certificate into the project and assigned them to the module. 2. Alice validates the signatures in the certificate chain with the public keys of the certificates. 3. The symmetric key must be generated and transferred to the Web server. 4. If the Web server is addressed by its domain name, Alice also verifies the identity of the Web server in accordance with the Internet PKI rules defined in RFC 2818. She is able to do this because the URL of the Web server, in this case the "Fully Qualified Domain Name" (FQDN), is saved in the end-entity certificate of the Web server. If the certificate entry in the "Subject Alternative Name" field corresponds to the entry in the address bar of the browser, everything is fine. The process continues with the exchange of data with the symmetric key, as shown in the figure above. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 59 Communications services 3.7 SNMP 3.7 SNMP 3.7.1 Disabling SNMP The network management protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol that uses various services and tools for detection and diagnostics of the network topology. Which SNMP requests the S7-1500 CPUs and the S7-1200 CPUs can receive, is described in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/79993228). SNMP uses the transport protocol UDP. SNMP recognizes two network components, the SNMP manager and the SNMP client. The SNMP manager monitors the network nodes: The SNMP clients collect the various network-specific information in the individual network nodes and store it in a structured form in the MIB (Management Information Base). Various services and tools can run detailed network diagnostics with the help of these data. Under certain conditions, it is useful to disable SNMP. Examples: The security guidelines in your network do not allow the use of SNMP. You use your own SNMP solution, e.g. with your own communications instructions. If you disable SNMP for a device, various options for diagnostics of the network topology (e.g. using the PRONETA tool or the Web server of the CPU) are no longer available to you. Disabling SNMP To disable SNMP for one of the integrated interfaces of a S7-1500 CPU, follow these steps: 1. In STEP 7, create a data block that contains the structure of data record B071H. - The following table shows the structure of the data record B071H. Byte Element Code Explanation 0-1 BlockID F003H Header 2-3 BlockLength 8 4 Version 01 H 5 Subversion 00 H The data record length is counted starting at byte 4 "Version". 6-7 Reserved - - 8-11 SNMP controller Disable/enable SNMP If you want to disable SNMP, enter the value 0. If you want to enable SNMP, enter the value 1. 2. Transfer the data record B071H in the startup OB (OB100) with the WRREC instruction (write data record) to the CPU. Use the hardware ID of an integrated interface of the CPU here. Communication 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communications services 3.7 SNMP 3.7.2 Example: Disabling SNMP for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP Task As the security guidelines in your network do not allow SNMP, you want to disable SNMP for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP. Requirements CPU 1516-3 PN/DP with firmware version V2.0 STEP 7 as of V14 Solution First, create a data block that contains the structure of data record B071H. The figure below shows the data block "Deactivate SNMP". The data block "Deactivate SNMP" contains the data record B071H as well as additional tags that you use to transfer the data record. The tag "snmp_deactivate" is used to trigger the job for WRREC. Place this tag in the retentive memory area so that the value is also available in the startup OB (OB100). Figure 3-15 Example: Data block for disabling SNMP Transfer the data record B071H in the startup OB (OB100) to CPU 1516-3 PN/DP with the WRREC instruction (write data record). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 61 Communications services 3.7 SNMP In the following program code, the data record B071H is transferred with the WRREC instruction in a REPEAT UNTIL loop. ORGANIZATION_BLOCK "Startup" TITLE = "Complete Restart" { S7_Optimized_Access := 'TRUE' } VERSION : 0.1 BEGIN REPEAT "WRREC_DB_1" (REQ := "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_deactivate, //Transfer data record INDEX:=16#B071, //Data record number for SNMP deactivation ID:="Local~PROFINET_interface_1", //any integrated PROFINET Interface DONE => "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_done, ERROR => "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_error, STATUS => "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_status, RECORD := "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_record) //Data record UNTIL "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_done OR "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_error END_REPEAT; END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK Using program code You will find the full program code here. Follow these steps to apply the program code to your project: 1. Copy the entire program code to the clipboard with Ctrl+A, Ctrl+C. 2. Open a text editor (e.g. "Editor"). 3. Paste the content of the clipboard to the text editor with Ctrl+V. 4. Save the document as an scl file, e.g. SNMP_DEACT.scl. 5. Open your project in STEP 7. 6. Import the scl file as an external source. You will find further information on importing external sources in the STEP 7 online help. 7. Generate the startup OB and the data blocks. (right-click on the scl file, shortcut menu: "Generate blocks from source") Re-enabling SNMP With small changes, you can use the program code used above to enable SNMP. In the user program, assign the "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_record.SNMPControl tag the value "1": "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_record.SNMPControl := 1; SNMP will then be enabled again the next time the CPU is started. Communication 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG PG communication 4 Properties Using PG communication, the CPU or another module capable of communication exchanges data with an engineering station (for example PG, PC). The data exchange is possible via PROFIBUS and PROFINET subnets. The gateway between S7 subnets is also supported. PG communication provides functions needed to load programs and configuration data, run tests, and evaluate diagnostic information. These functions are integrated in the operating system of the module capable of communication. A PG/PC can be connected to a CPU online. The PG/PC can operate a maximum of 4 online connections at one time (for example to 4 CPUs). Requirements The PG/PC is physically connected to the communication-capable module. If the communication-capable module is to be reached via S7 routing, the hardware configuration has to be loaded in the participating stations (S7 router and end point). Procedure for connecting online You must establish an online connection to the CPU for the programming device communication: 1. Select the CPU in the project tree in STEP 7. 2. Select the "Online > Go online" menu command. 3. In the "Go online" dialog, make the following settings for your online connection: - Select interface type (e.g. PN/IE) in the "Type of PG/PC interface" drop-down list. - In the "PG/PC interface" drop-down list, select the PG/PC interface (e.g. Ind. Ethernet card) you want to use to establish the online connection. - Select the interface or the S7 subnet with which the programming device/PC is physically connected from the "Connection to interface/subnet" drop-down list. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 63 PG communication - If the communication-capable module can be reached via an S7 router (gateway), select the S7 router that connects the subnets in question from the "1st gateway" drop-down list. Figure 4-1 Setting up PG communication 4. Click "Start search". All devices that you can address with PG communication appear shortly thereafter in the table "Compatible devices in target subnet". 5. In the "Compatible devices in target subnet" table, select the relevant CPU and confirm with "Go online". Additional information You can find more information on "Go online" in the STEP 7 online help. Communication 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG HMI communication 5 Properties Using HMI communication, one or more HMI devices (for example HMI Basic/Comfort/Mobile Panel) exchanges data with a CPU for operator control and monitoring with via the PROFINET or PROFIBUS DP interface. The data exchange is via HMI connections. If you want to set up several HMI connections to a CPU, use for example: The PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces of the CPU CPs and CMs with the relevant interfaces Procedure for setting up HMI communication As soon as you drag-and-drop a tag, for example a tag from a global data block into an HMI screen or into the HMI tag table, STEP 7 automatically sets up an HMI connection. Alternatively, you can also set up the HMI connection yourself. To set up an HMI connection, follow these steps. 1. Configure the HMI device in an existing configuration with a CPU in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. 2. Select the "Connections" button and then "HMI connection" from the drop-down list. 3. Drag-and-drop a line between the end points of the connection (HMI device and CPU). The end points are highlighted in color. If the required S7 subnet does not yet exist, it is created automatically. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 65 HMI communication 4. In the "Connections" tab, select the row of the HMI connection. In the "General" area of the "Properties" tab, you see the properties of the HMI connection, some of which you can change. Figure 5-1 Setting up HMI communication 5. Download the hardware configuration to the CPU. 6. Download the hardware configuration to the HMI device. Additional information You can find information on S7 routing for HMI connections in the section S7 Routing (Page 260). You can find more information on setting up HMI connections in the STEP 7 online help. Communication 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.1 6 Overview of Open User Communication Features of Open User Communication Through Open User Communication, also called "open communication", the CPU exchanges data with another device capable of communication. Open User Communication has the following features and characteristics: Open standard (communication partners can be two SIMATIC CPUs or a SIMATIC CPU and a suitable third-party device). Communication via various protocols (in STEP 7 known as "Connection types") High degree of flexibility in terms of the data structures transferred; this allows open data exchange with any communications devices as long as these support the connection types available. Secure Communication: To protect your automation system, you can exchange data securely over Open User Communication. With Secure Open User Communication, the data is sent signed and encrypted. Open User Communication is possible in various automation systems, see technical specifications of the respective manuals. Examples: - Integrated PROFINET / Ind. Ethernet interfaces of CPUs (S7-1500, ET 200SP CPU, S7-1500 Software Controller, CPU 1516pro-2 PN) - PROFINET / Ind. Ethernet interfaces of communications modules (for example CP 1543-1, CM 1542-1) Information on Secure Open User Communication is available in the section Secure Communication (Page 37). Information on S7-1500R/H You can find information on Open User Communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system in section Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H (Page 283). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 67 Open User Communication 6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication 6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication Protocols for Open User Communication The following protocols are available for open communication: Table 6- 1 Transport protocols for open communication Transport protocol Via interface TCP according to RFC 793 PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet ISO-on-TCP according to RFC 1006 (Class 4) PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet ISO according to ISO/IEC 8073 Industrial Ethernet (only CP 1543-1) UDP according to RFC 768 PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet FDL PROFIBUS Table 6- 2 Application protocols for open communication Application protocol Used transport protocol Modbus TCP TCP according to RFC 793 E-mail TCP according to RFC 793 FTP TCP according to RFC 793 TCP, ISO-on-TCP, ISO, UDP Prior to data transfer, these protocols (except UDP) establish a transport connection to the communications partner. Connection-oriented protocols are used when potential loss of data needs to be avoided. The following is possible with UDP: Unicast to one device or broadcast to all devices on PROFINET via the PROFINET interface of the CPU or the Industrial Ethernet interface of the CP 1543-1 Multicast to all recipients of a multicast group via the PROFINET interface of the CPU* or the PROFINET / Industrial Ethernet interface of the CP 1543-1 * As of firmware version V2.0, the PROFINET interface of the CPU supports a maximum of 5 multicast groups Maximum user data lengths UDP: Which maximum user data length is supported for the UPD is described in the technical specifications in the respective manuals. Communication 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication Protocol for communication via PROFIBUS: FDL Data transfer via an FDL connection (Fieldbus Data Link) is suitable for the transfer of related blocks of data to a communications partner on PROFIBUS that supports the sending and receiving of data according to the FDL service SDA (Send Data with Acknowledge) according to EN 50170, Vol 2. Both partners have the same rights; in other words, each partner can initiate sending and receiving event-driven. In keeping with the FDL service SDN (Send Data with No Acknowledge) according to EN 50170, Vol 2, the following is possible with FDL: Broadcast to all devices on PROFIBUS via the PROFIBUS interface of the CM 1542-5 Multicast to all recipients of a multicast group via the PROFIBUS interface of the CM 1542-5 Modbus TCP The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol with linear topology based on a master/slave architecture. In the Modbus TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), the data is transmitted as TCP/IP packets. Communication is controlled solely by suitable instructions in the user program. E-mail and FTP You can use email to send for example, data block contents (e.g. process data) as an attachment. You can use the FTP connection (FTP = File Transfer Protocol) to transmit files to and from S7 devices. The communication is controlled by instructions in the user program at the client end. Application example: MQTT Publisher for the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU The "Message Queue Telemetry Transport" (MQTT) is a simple protocol on the TCP/IP level. It is suitable for the exchange of messages between devices with lower functionality and for the transfer via unreliable networks. The application example provides a function block with which you can implement the MQTT protocol into the SIMATIC S7-1500. You can find the application example on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748872). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 69 Open User Communication 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication Block library for SYSLOG messages Syslog is a simply structured binary profile on UDP/IP level. It enables applications to send messages, warnings or error states to a Syslog server. Syslog is typically used for computer system management and security monitoring, and has established itself as a standard in the field of protocols. The "LSyslog" library offers you a solution to implement the Syslog protocol in an S7-1500. In addition to the library, an application example is provided that shows you how to generate Syslog messages in your controller and send them to the Syslog server. You can find the block library "LSyslog" and the associated application example on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/51929235). 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication Introduction You set up Open User Communication via the corresponding connection (for example, TCP connection) as follows: By programming in the user programs of the communications partners or By configuring the connection in STEP 7 in the hardware and network editor Regardless of whether you set up the connection by programming or configuring, instructions are always required in the user programs of both communications partners for sending and receiving the data. Communication 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication Setting up the connection via the user program If the connection is set up by programming, the connection establishment and termination is implemented using instructions in the user program. In certain areas of application it is an advantage not to set up the communications connections statically by configuring in the hardware configuration, but to have them set up by the user program. You can set up the connections via a specific application programcontrolled and therefore when necessary. Programmed connection setup also allows connection resources to be released following data transfer. A data structure is necessary for each communications connection that contains the parameters for establishing the connection (for example system data type "TCON_IP_v4" for TCP). The system data types (SDT) are provided by the system and have a predefined structure that cannot be changed. The various protocols have their own data structures (see table below). The parameters are stored in a data block ("connection description DB") for example of the system data type TCON_IP_v4. There are two ways in which you can specify the DB with the data structure: Recommendation: Have the data block created automatically in the properties in the program editor during parameter assignment of the connection for the TSEND_C, TRCV_C and TCON instructions. Create the data block manually, assign parameters to it and write it directly to the instruction Necessary for: - Secure OUC - Connection over DNS - E-mail - FTP You can modify the connection parameters in the "connection description DB". This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58875807) describes how to program the TCON instruction to set up a connection for Open User Communication between two S7-1500 CPUs. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 71 Open User Communication 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication Protocols, system data types and employable instructions for programmed setup The following table shows the protocols of the Open User Communication and the matching system data types and instructions. Table 6- 3 Instructions for programmed setup of the connection Protocol System data type TCP * TCON_QDN * TCON_IP_v4 ISO-on-TCP * TCON_IP_RFC ISO according to ISO/IEC 8073 (Class 4) * TCON_ISOnative1 * TCON_Configured * TCON_IP_v4 * TADDR_Param * TADDR_SEND_QDN * * UDP FDL1 Modbus TCP E-mail FTP2 Instructions Establish connection and send/receive data via: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or * TCON, TSEND/TRCV or * TCON, TUSEND/TURCV (connection can be terminated via TDISCON) Establish connection and send/receive data via: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C TADDR_RCV_IP * TUSEND/TURCV/TRCV (connection can be terminated via TDISCON) TCON_FDL Establish connection and send/receive data via: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or * TCON, TSEND/TRCV or * TCON, TUSEND/TURCV (connection can be terminated via TDISCON) * TCON_IP_v4 * MB_CLIENT * TCON_QDN * MB_SERVER * TMAIL_v4 * TMAIL_C * TMAIL_v6 * TMAIL_FQDN * FTP_CONNECT_IPV * 43 * FTP_CONNECT_IPV 63 * FTP_CONNECT_NA ME3 1 This protocol can only be used with the CM 1542-5 2 This protocol can only be used with the CP 1543-1 3 User-defined data type FTP_CMD Communication 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication The following table shows you the different connections of the Secure Open User Communication and the matching system data types and instructions. Secure OUC connection System data type Secure TCP connection from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to a third-party PLC (TLS server) * TCON_QDN_SEC Instructions * TSEND_C/TRCV_C * TCON * TMAIL_C (V5.0 or higher) Secure TCP connection from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to a third-party PLC (TLS client) Secure TCP connection between two S7-1500 stations * TCON_IP_V4_SEC1 Secure connection to a mail server2 * TMAIL_V4_SEC * TMAIL_QDN_SEC Secure Modbus TCP connection * TCON_IP_V4_SEC1 * MB_Client * TCON_QDN_SEC * MB_Server 1 Also possible for CP 1543-1 2 Secure connection to a mail server also possible with CP1543-1 und TMAIL_C (V4.0) Setting up the connection with connection configuration When setting up through the configuration of the connection, the address parameters of the connection are specified in the hardware and network editor of STEP 7. To send and receive the data, use the same instructions as when the connections are set up by programming: Table 6- 4 Instructions for sending/receiving with configured connections Protocol Send/receive with configured connections Supported instructions: TCP Send/receive data via: ISO-on-TCP * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or ISO according to ISO/IEC 8073 (Class 4) * TSEND/TRCV or * TUSEND/TURCV UDP Send/receive data via: FDL * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or * TUSEND/TURCV Send/receive data via: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or * TSEND/TRCV or * TUSEND/TURCV Modbus TCP Not supported E-mail Not supported FTP Not supported Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 73 Open User Communication 6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication Additional instructions for open communication You can use the following instructions for connections set up in the user program as well as for configured connections: T_RESET: Terminating and establishing a connection T_DIAG: Check the connection Basic examples for Open User Communication The Siemens Online Support offers you function blocks (FBs) that facilitate the handling of the instructions of the Open User Communication. You can find the function block with corresponding examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747710). Additional information The STEP 7 online help describes: The user and system data types The instructions for open communication The connection parameters You will find information about the allocation and release of connection resources in the section Allocation of connection resources (Page 271). See also Secure Open User Communication (Page 94) Communication 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names 6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names As of firmware version V2.0, S7-1500 CPUs, ET 200SP CPUs and the CPU 1516pro-2 PN support Open User Communication with addressing via Domain Name System (DNS). A DNS client is integrated in the CPU. In the case of communication via DNS, you use domain names as an alias for IP addresses to address communication partners. Addressing of the communication partners via domain names is possible for open communication via TCP and UDP. At least one DNS server must be located in your network as a requirement for communication via DNS. The S7-1500 software controller supports communication via DNS for all interfaces that are assigned to the software controller. Setting up communication via DNS The DNS client of the CPU must know the IPv4 address of at least one DNS server so that a CPU can establish a connection to a communication partner via its domain name. The CPU supports up to 4 different DNS servers. To set up communication via domain names for an S7-1500 CPU, follow these steps: 1. Select the CPU in the network view of STEP 7. 2. In the Inspector window go to "Properties" > "General" > "DNS configuration". 3. Enter the IPv4 address of a DNS server in the "DNS server addresses" column of the "Server list" table. You can enter up to 4 IPv4 addresses of DNS servers. Figure 6-1 Entering DNS server addresses using a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as an example Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 75 Open User Communication 6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names Setting up a TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner For TCP communication via the domain name you need to create a data block with the TCON_QDN system data type yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at the instruction. The TCON, TSEND_C and TRCV_C instructions support the system data type TCON_QDN: To set up a TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "DNS Connection1" of data type TCON_QDN is defined. Figure 6-2 Data type TCON_QDN 3. Program the parameters of the TCP connection (for example the fully qualified domain name (FQDN)) in the tag of data type TCON_QDN. 4. Create a TCON instruction in the program editor. 5. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction with the tag of the data type TCON_QDN. In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction is interconnected with the tag "DNS connection1" (data type TCON_QDN). Figure 6-3 TCON instruction Communication 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO Addressing a UDP connection via the domain name of the communication partner For S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2.0, you can address the recipient with its fully qualified domain name (FQDN) when sending data via UDP. With the instruction TUSEND at the parameter ADDR, you hereby reference a structure of the type TADDR_SEND_QDN. The receiver can return an IPv4 or an IPv6 address. With the TURCV instruction at the ADDR parameter, you therefore reference a structure of the TADDR_RCV_IP type. Only this structure can include both IP address types. Note Network load In contrast to the TCP the UDP protocol does not work connection-oriented. For every edge at the block parameter REQ, the TUSEND or TURCV command performs queries of the DNS server. This can lead to high network load or load on the DNS server. Additional information You can find more information about the system data types TCON_QDN, TADDR_SEND_QDN and TADDR_RCV_IP in the STEP 7 online help. How to set up a secure TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner is described in the section Secure Open User Communication (Page 94). 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO Configuring a connection for the TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON instructions Requirement: A TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON instruction is created in the programming editor. 1. Select a TCON, TSEND_C or TRCV_C block of Open User Communication in the program editor. 2. Open the "Properties > Configuration" tab in the inspector window. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 77 Open User Communication 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO 3. Select the "Connection parameters" group. Until you select a connection partner, only the empty drop-down list for the partner end point is enabled. All other input options are disabled. The connection parameters already known are displayed: - Name of the local end point - Interface of the local end point - IPv4 address of the local end point Figure 6-4 Connection parameters for TSEND_C 4. In the drop-down list box of the partner end point, select a connection partner. You can select an unspecified device or a CPU in the project as the communication partner. Certain connection parameters are then entered automatically. The following parameters are set: - Name of the partner end point - Interface of the partner end point Communication 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO - IPv4 address of the partner end point If the connection partners are networked, the name of the subnet is displayed. 5. In the "Configuration type" drop-down list, select between using program blocks or configured connections. 6. Select an existing connection description DB in the "Connection data" drop-down list or for configured connections select an existing connection under "Connection name". You can also create a new connection description DB or a new configured connection. Later, you can still select other connection description DBs or configured connections or change the names of the connection description DBs in order to create new data blocks: - You can also see the selected data block at the interconnection of the CONNECT input parameter of the selected TCON, TSEND_C or TRCV_C instruction. - If you have already specified a connection description DB for the connection partner using the CONNECT parameter of the TCON, TSEND_C or TRCV_C instruction, you can either use this DB or create a new DB. - If you edit the name of the displayed data block in the drop-down list, a new data block with the changed name but with the same structure and content is generated and used for the connection. - Changed names of a data block must be unique in the context of the communication partner. - A connection description DB must have the structure TCON_Param, TCON_IP_v4 or TCON_IP_RFC, depending on CPU type and connection. - A data block cannot be selected for an unspecified partner. Additional values are determined and entered after the selection or creation of the connection description DB or configured connection. The following is valid for specified connection partners: - ISO-on-TCP connection type - Connection ID with default of 1 - Active connection establishment by local partner - TSAP ID for S7-1200/1500: E0.01.49.53.4F.6F.6E.54.43.50.2D.31 The following is valid for unspecified connection partners: - TCP connection type - Partner port 2000 The following applies for a configured connection with a specified connection partner: - TCP connection type - Connection ID with default of 257 - Active connection establishment by local partner - Partner port 2000 The following applies for a configured connection with an unspecified connection partner: - TCP connection type - Local port 2000 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 79 Open User Communication 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO 7. Enter a connection ID as needed for the connection partner. No connection ID can be assigned to an unspecified partner. Note You must enter a unique value for the connection ID at a known connection partner. The uniqueness of the connection ID is not checked by the connection parameter settings and there is no default value entered for the connection ID when you create a new connection. 8. Select the desired connection type in the relevant drop-down list. Default values are set for the address details depending on the connection type. You can choose between the following: - TCP - ISO-on-TCP - UDP - ISO (only with Configuration mode "Use configured connection") You can edit the input boxes in the address details. Depending on the selected protocol, you can edit the ports (for TCP and UDP) or the TSAPs (for ISO-on-TCP and ISO). 9. Use the "Active connection establishment" check box to set the connection establishment characteristics for TCP, ISO and ISO-on-TCP. You can decide which communication partner establishes the connection actively. Changed values are checked immediately for input errors by the connection configuration and entered in the data block for the connection description. Note Open User Communication between two communication partners can only work when the program section for the partner end point has been downloaded to the hardware. To achieve fully functional communication, make sure that you load not only the connection description of the local CPU on the device but also that of the partner CPU as well. Communication 80 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO Configuring connections, e.g. for TSEND/TRCV If you want to use the instructions for TSEND/TRCV for open communication, for example, you first need to configure a connection (e.g. TCP connection). To configure a TCP connection, follow these steps: 1. Configure the communications partners in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. 2. Click the "Connections" button and select the "TCP connection" connection type from the drop-down list. 3. Using drag-and-drop, connect the communication partner with each other (via an interface or local end point). If the required S7 subnet does not yet exist, it is created automatically. You can also set up a connection to unspecified partners. 4. Select the created connection in the network view. 5. Set the properties of the connection in the "Properties" tab in the "General" area, for example the name of the connection and the interfaces of the communications partner that will be used. For connections to an unspecified partner, set the address of the partner. You can find the local ID (reference of the connection in the user program) in the "Local ID" area. 6. In the Project tree, select the "Program blocks" folder for one of the CPUs and open OB1 in the folder by double-clicking on it. The program editor opens. 7. Select the required instruction from the "Instructions" task card, "Communication" area, "Open user communication", for example TSEND and drag it to a network of OB1. 8. At the ID parameter of the instruction, assign the local ID of the configured connection to be used for the transmission of data. 9. Interconnect the "DATA" parameter of the TSEND instruction with the user data, for example in a data block. 10.Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Based on the procedure described above, set up the connection on the partner CPU with the instruction for receiving, TRCV, and download it to the CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 81 Open User Communication 6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO Point to note with ISO connections with CP 1543-1 If you use the "ISO connection" connection type, you will need to select the "Use ISO protocol" check box in the properties of the CP so that addressing using MAC addresses will work. Figure 6-5 Select CP 1543-1 ISO protocol Additional information The STEP 7 online help describes: The instructions for open communication The connection parameters This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479564) describes how the instructions TSEND_C and TRCV_C behave in the S7-1500. Communication 82 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.6 Setting up communication over FDL 6.6 Setting up communication over FDL Requirements Configuration software: STEP 7 Professional V14 End point of the connection: CPU S7-1500 firmware version V2.0 or higher with communication module CM 1542-5 with firmware version V2.0 Setting up a configured FDL connection Proceed as follows to set up a configured FDL connection in STEP 7: 1. Create a TSEND_C instruction in the program editor. 2. Select the TSEND_C instruction and go to "Properties" > "General" > "Connection parameters" in the Inspector window. 3. Under End point, select the partner end point. Use one of the two partner end points below: - CPU S7-1500 with CM 1542-5 - Unspecified 4. Under Configuration type, select "Use configured connection". 5. Under Connection type, select "FDL". 6. Under Interface, select the following interfaces: - Local: PROFIBUS interface of CM 1542-5 - Specified partner: PROFIBUS interface of CM 1542-5 7. Under Connection data, select the setting . Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 83 Open User Communication 6.6 Setting up communication over FDL The figure below shows a fully configured FDL connection in STEP 7. Figure 6-6 Configuring the FDL connection Setting up an FDL connection in the user program For communication via FDL, you need to create the data block of the TCON_FDL system data type yourself in each case, assign parameters and call it directly at the instruction. Follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. In the global data block, define a tag of the data type TCON_FDL. The example below shows the global data block "FDL_connection" in which the tag "FDL_connection" of the data type TCON_FDL is defined. Figure 6-7 Programming an FDL connection 3. Program the parameters of the FDL connection (e.g. the PROFIBUS addresses) in the tag of the data type TCON_FDL. Communication 84 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.6 Setting up communication over FDL 4. Create a TCON instruction in the program editor. 5. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction with the tag of the data type TCON_FDL. In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction is interconnected with the tag "FDL_Connection" (data type TCON_FDL). Figure 6-8 Example: TCON Instruction for FDL connection Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 85 Open User Communication 6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP 6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP Setting up a connection for Modbus TCP via the user program The parameter assignment takes place in the program editor at the instruction MB_CLIENT or MB_SERVER. Procedure for setting up communication using Modbus TCP The MB_CLIENT instruction communicates as a Modbus TCP client via the TCP connection. You establish a connection between the client and the server with the instruction, send Modbus requests to the server and receive the corresponding Modbus responses. You also control the setup of the TCP connection with this instruction. The MB_SERVER instruction communicates as a Modbus TCP server via the TCP connection. The instruction processes connection requests of a Modbus client, receives and processes Modbus requests and sends responses. You also control the setup of the TCP connection. Requirement: The client can reach the server via IP communication in the network. 1. Configure an S7-1500 automation system with CPU in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. 2. In the Project tree, select the "Program blocks" folder and open OB1 in the folder by double-clicking on it. The program editor opens. 3. Select the required instruction, for example MB_CLIENT, from the "Instructions" task card, "Communication" area, "Other", "MODBUS TCP" and drag it to a network of OB1. Communication 86 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP 4. Assign the parameters of the MB_CLIENT or MB_SERVER instruction. Observe the following rules: An IPv4 server address must be specified for each MB_CLIENT connection. Each MB_CLIENT or MB_SERVER connection must use a unique instance DB with one of the data structures TCON_IP_v4 or TCON_QDN. Each connection requires a unique connection ID. The connection ID and instance DB belong together in pairs and must be unique for each connection. Figure 6-9 MB_CLIENT Figure 6-10 MB_SERVER 5. Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 87 Open User Communication 6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP Modbus TCP server as gateway to Modbus RTU If you use a Modbus TCP server as a gateway to a Modbus RTU protocol, address the slave device in the serial network using the static parameter, MB_UNIT_ID. The MB_UNIT_ID parameter corresponds to the field of the slave address in the Modbus RTU protocol. The MB_UNIT_ID parameter in this case would forward the request to the correct Modbus RTU slave address. You do not have to program the gateway function yourself. You can find the MB_UNIT_ID parameter in the instance data block associated with MB_CLIENT instruction. You can find more information on the MB_UNIT_ID parameter in the STEP 7 online help. Reference This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/94766380) describes how to program and configure the Modbus TCP communication between two S7-1500 CPUs. This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/102020340) describes how to program and configure Modbus TCP communication between an S7-1500 CPU and an S7-1200 CPU. Communication 88 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.8 Setting up communication via e-mail 6.8 Setting up communication via e-mail Setting up a connection for e-mail via the user program For communication using e-mail, you need to create the data block of the relevant system data type yourself, assign parameters and call the instruction directly. This procedure is introduced below. Procedure for setting up communication using e-mail A CPU can send e-mails. To send e-mails from the user program of the CPU, use the TMAIL_C instruction. Requirement: The SMTP server can be reached via the IPv4 network. 1. Configure an S7-1500 automation system with CPU in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. 2. Assign parameters to the instruction TMAIL_C, for example enter the subject of the e-mail in Subject. 3. In a global data block create a variable of the type TMAIL_v4, TMAIL_v6 (only CP 1543-1) or TMAIL_FQDN (only CP 1543-1). 4. Set the connecting parameters of the TCP connection in the variable in the "Start value" column. Enter the IPv4 address of the mail server, for example, for the "MailServerAddress" (for TMAIL_v4) Note Connection parameters InterfaceId and ID Note that you can enter the value "0" for the interface ID and the ID with instruction version V5.0 or higher of the instruction TMAIL_C in the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC. In this case the CPU itself searches for a matching local CPU interface or a free connection ID. Interconnect the variable to the MAIL_ADDR_PARAM parameter of the TMAIL_C instruction. 5. Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Additional information The STEP 7 online help describes: The system data types The instructions for open communication The connection parameters Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 89 Open User Communication 6.9 Setting up communication via FTP 6.9 Setting up communication via FTP Setting up a connection for FTP via the user program For communication via FTP, you need to create the data block of the relevant system data type yourself, assign parameters and call the instruction directly. This procedure is introduced below. FTP client and server functionality Files can be sent by a CPU to an FTP server and can be received from the FTP server. Communication with FTP is only possible for the S7-1500 using the CP 1543-1. The CP can be an FTP server, FTP client or both. FTP clients can also be third-party systems/PCs. For the FTP server functionality, configure the CP accordingly in STEP 7. You can use the FTP client functionality to implement, for example, the establishment and termination of an FTP connection, the transfer and deletion of files on the server. For the FTP client functionality, use the FTP_CMD instruction. Communication 90 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.9 Setting up communication via FTP Procedure for setting up FTP server functionality Requirement: The FTP server can be reached via the IPv4 network. 1. Configure an S7-1500 automation system with CPU and CP 1543-1 in the device view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. At the same time, you need to select the check box "Permit access with PUT/GET communication from remote partner (PLC, HMI, OPC, ...)" in the HW configuration of the S7-1500 CPU under the "Protection" area navigation in the section "Connection mechanisms". 2. Make the following settings in the properties of the CP under "FTP configuration": - Select the "Use FTP server for S7 CPU data" check box. - Assign the CPU, a data block and a file name under which the DB for FTP will be stored. Figure 6-11 Setting up the FTP configuration 3. Download the hardware configuration to the CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 91 Open User Communication 6.9 Setting up communication via FTP Procedure for setting up FTP client functionality Requirement: The FTP server can be reached via the IPv4 network. 1. Configure an S7-1500 automation system with CPU and CP 1543-1 in the device view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. At the same time, you need to select the check box "Permit access with PUT/GET communication from remote partner (PLC, HMI, OPC, ...)" in the HW configuration of the S7-1500 CPU under the "Protection" area navigation in the section "Connection mechanisms". 2. Call the FTP_CMD instruction in the user program of the CPU. 3. Set the connection parameters for the FTP server in the FTP_CMD instruction. 4. Create a global DB and within this DB a tag of the type FTP_CONNECT_IPV4, FTP_CONNECT_IPV6 or FTP_CONNECT_NAME. 5. Interconnect the tag within the data block with the FTP_CMD instruction. 6. For the connection to the FTP server, specify the following in the DB: - The user name, the password and the IP address for the FTP access in the relevant data type (FTP_CONNECT_IPV4, FTP_CONNECT_IPV6 or FTP_CONNECT_NAME) 7. Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Application examples Application example: FTP communication with S7-1500 and CP 1543-1 You can find the application example on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103550797). Application example: FTP client communication with S7-1200/1500 You can find the application example on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/81367009). Additional information The STEP 7 online help describes: The system data types The instructions for open communication The connection parameters Communication 92 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.10 Establishment and termination of communications relations 6.10 Establishment and termination of communications relations Establishment and termination of communications The table below shows the establishment and termination of communications as part of open communication. Table 6- 5 Establishment and termination of communications Setting up the connection Establishing communication Terminating communication With the user program After downloading the user program to the CPUs: * The passive communications partner sets up * the local connection access by calling TSEND_C/TRCV_C or TCON. Calling * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or TCON on the active partner starts connection establishment. If the connection could be established, there is positive feedback to the instructions in the user program. Using the TSEND_C/TRCV_C, TDISCON and T_RESET instructions When the CPU changes from RUN to STOP mode With POWER OFF/POWER ON on a CPU After you have terminated a connection using the instruction T_RESET, the connection is reestablished. If the connection aborts, the active partner attempts to re-establish the connection. This applies only if the connection was successfully established beforehand with TCON. By configuring a connection After downloading the connection configuration and the user program to the CPUs. By deleting the connection configuration in STEP 7 and downloading the changed configuration to the CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 93 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 6.11.1 Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to an external PLC (TLS server) The following section describes how you can set up Open User Communication via TCP from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to a TLS server. Setting up a secure TCP connection from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to a TLS server S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2.0 support secure communication with addressing via a Domain Name System (DNS). For secure TCP communication over the domain name you need to create a data block with the TCON_QDN_SEC system data type yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON. Requirements: Current date and time are set in the CPU. Your network includes at least one DNS server. You have configured at least one DNS server for the S7-1500 CPU. TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates. To set up a secure TCP connection to a TLS server, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "DNS ConnectionSEC" of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC is defined. Figure 6-12 Data type TCON_QDN_SEC Communication 94 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the TLS server, for example, for "RemoteQDN". 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "ExtTLSCapabilities": If you enter the value 1, the client validates the subjectAlternateName in the X.509-V3 certificate of the server to verify the identity of the server. This validation is executed in the context of the instruction. - "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the X.509-V3 certificate (usually a CA certificate) that is used by the TLS client to validate the TLS server authentication. If this parameter is 0, the TLS client uses all (CA) certificates currently loaded in the client certificate store to validate the server authentication. Figure 6-13 Certificate handling from the perspective of the S7-1500 as a TLS client - "TLSClientCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 95 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC. In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction is interconnected with the tag "DNS connectionSEC" (data type TCON_QDN_SEC). Figure 6-14 TCON instruction Additional information You can find more information on the TCON_QDN_SEC system data type in the STEP 7 online help. For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure Communication (Page 37). Communication 96 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 6.11.2 Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to an external PLC (TLS client) The following section describes how you can set up Open User Communication via TCP from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to a TLS client. Setting up a secure TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2.0 support secure communication with addressing via a Domain Name System (DNS). For secure TCP communication over the domain name you need to create a data block with the TCON_QDN_SEC system data type yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON. Requirements: Current date and time are set in the CPU. Your network includes at least one DNS server. You have configured at least one DNS server for the S7-1500 CPU. TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates. To set up a secure TCP connection to a TLS client, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "DNS ConnectionSEC" of the data type TCON_FDL_SEC is defined. Figure 6-15 TCON_QDN_SEC_Server 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter, for example, the local ID of the TCP connection for "ID". Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 97 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "TLSServerReqClientCert": Request for an X.509-V3 certificate from the TLS client. - "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate. Figure 6-16 Certificate handling from the perspective of the S7-1500 as TLS server - "TLSClientCertRef": ID of the X.509-V3 certificate (or a group of X.509-V3 certificates) that is used by the TLS server to validate TLS client authentication. If this parameter is 0, the TLS server uses all (CA) certificates currently loaded in the server certificate store to validate the client authentication. 5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC. In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction is interconnected with the tag "DNS connectionSEC" (data type TCON_QDN_SEC). Figure 6-17 TCON instruction Communication 98 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Additional information You can find more information about the system data types TCON_QDN_SEC in the STEP 7 online help. For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure Communication (Page 37). 6.11.3 Secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs The following section describes how you can set Secure Open User Communication via TCP between two S7-1500 CPUs. In the process one S7-1500 CPU acts as TLS client (active establishing of the connection) and the other S7-1500 CPU as TLS server (passive establishing of the connection). Setting up a secure TCP connection between two S7-1500 CPUs For secure TCP communication between two S7-1500 CPUs you need to create a data block with the TCON_IP_V4_SEC system data type yourself in every CPU, assign parameters and call it directly at one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON. Requirements: Current date and time are set in the CPU. Both S7-1500 CPUs have at least firmware version V2.0 TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates. Figure 6-18 Certificate handling for Secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 99 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Settings at the TLS client To set up a secure TCP connection in the TLS client, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "SEC connection 1 TLS-Client" of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC is defined. Figure 6-19 IP_V4_SEC_Client 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. For example, enter the IPv4 address of the TLS server for "RemoteAddress". Note Connection parameters InterfaceId and ID Note that you can enter the value "0" for the interface ID and the ID in the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC. In this case the CPU itself searches for a matching local CPU interface or a free connection ID. Communication 100 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "TLSServerCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID from the certificate manager of the global security settings. - "TLSClientCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate. 5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC. Settings at the TLS server To set up a secure TCP connection in the TLS server, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "SEC connection 1 TLS-Server" of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC is defined. Figure 6-20 IP_V4_SEC_Server 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. For example, enter the IPv4 address of the TLS client for "RemoteAddress". Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 101 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "TLSServerReqClientCert ": Request for an X.509-V3 certificate from the TLS client. Enter the value "true". - "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate. - "TLSClientCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID from the certificate manager of the global security settings. 5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC. In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TSEND_C instruction is interconnected with the "SEC connection 1 TLS client" tags (data type TCON_IP_4_SEC). Figure 6-21 TSEND_C Additional information You can find more information about the system data types TCON_IP_4_SEC in the STEP 7 online help. For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure Communication (Page 37). Communication 102 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 6.11.4 Secure OUC via CP interface The following sections describes the particular points to be taken into consideration in the case of Secure Open User Communication via a CP interface. At least one station is an S71500 station with the following modules: S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version V2.0 (with the exception of S7-1500 Software Controller) CP 1543-1 as of firmware version V2.0 or CP 1543SP-1 as firmware version V1.0 The CP acts in an S7-1500 station as a TLS client (active connection establishment) or a TLS server (passive connection establishment). The fundamental procedure and the concept for using secure communication via a CP interface is similar to that of secure communication via the interfaces of the S7-1500 CPUs. Essentially, you have to assign the certificates to the CPU in the role of a TLS server or TLS client and not to the CPU. Other rules and procedures therefore apply. These are described below. Handling certificates for CPs The following applies in general: You have to be logged on at the certificate manager in the global security settings. The generation of self-signed certificates also requires logon for the global security settings. You have to have sufficient rights as a user (administrator or user with the "Standard" role with the right to "Configure security"). The starting point for the generation or assignment of certificates at the CP is the section "Security > Security properties". In this section, you log on for the global security settings. Procedure: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, mark the CP and select the section "Security > Security properties" in the Inspector window. 2. Click on the "User logon" button. 3. Log on using your user name and password. 4. Enable the "Activate security functions" option. The security properties are initialized. 5. Click in the first line of the "Device certificates" table to generate a new certificate or select an existing device certificate. 6. If the communication partner is also an S7-1500 station, you also have to assign a device certificate to the communication partner with STEP 7 as described here or for the S71500 CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 103 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Example: Setting up a secure TCP connection between two S7-1500 CPUs via CP interfaces For secure TCP communication between two S7-1500 CPUs you need to create a data block with the TCON_IPv4_SEC system data type yourself in every CPU, assign parameters and call it directly at the one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON. Requirements: Both S7 1500 CPUs have at least firmware version V2.0. If you use the CP 1543SP-1: Firmware version as of V1.0. Both CPs (for example CP 1543-1) must have at least firmware version V2.0 TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates. - A device certificate (end-entity certificate) for the CP must be generated and be located in the certificate memory of the CP. If a communication partner is an external device (for example an MES or ERP system), a device certificate also has to exist for this device. - The root certificate (CA certificate) with which the device certificate of the communication partner is signed must also be located in the certificate memory of the CP or in the certificate memory of the external device. If you use intermediate certificates, you have to ensure that the complete certificate path exists in the validating device. A device uses these certificates to validate the device certificate of the communication partner. The communication partner must always be addressed via its IPv4 address, not via its domain name. The following figure shows the different certificates in the devices for the case that both communication partners communicate via a CP 1543-1. In addition, the figure shows the transfer of the device certificates during establishment of the connection ("Hello"). Figure 6-22 Certificate handling in secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs via CP interfaces. Communication 104 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Settings at the TLS client To set up a secure TCP connection in the TLS client, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC in the global data block. To do so, enter the string "TCON_IP_V4_SEC" in the "Data type" field. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "SEC connection 1 TLS-Client" of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC is defined. The Interface ID has the value of the HW identifier of the IE interface of the local CP (TLS client). Figure 6-23 IP_V4_SEC_Client 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. For example, enter the IPv4 address of the TLS server for "RemoteAddress". 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "TLSServerCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID from the certificate manager of the global security settings. - "TLSClientCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 105 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC. Settings at the TLS server To set up a secure TCP connection in the TLS server, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag "SEC connection 1 TLS-Server" of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC is defined. The interface ID has the value of the HW identifier of the IE interface of the local CP (TLS server). Figure 6-24 IP_V4_SEC_Server 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. For example, enter the IPv4 address of the TLS client for "RemoteAddress". Communication 106 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "TLSServerReqClientCert ": Request for an X.509-V3 certificate from the TLS client. Enter the value "true". - "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate. - "TLSClientCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID from the certificate manager of the global security settings. 5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the instruction TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC. Upload device as new station When you upload a configuration with certificates and configured secure Open User Communication as a new station into your STEP 7 project, the certificates of the CP are not uploaded, in contrast to the certificates of the CPU. After the device has been loaded as a new station, no more certificates are contained in the corresponding tables of the CPs for the device certificates. You have to perform configuration of certificates again after the upload. Otherwise, renewed loading of the configuration results in the certificates that originally exist in the CP being deleted so that secure communication does not function. Secure OUC connections via CPU and CP interfaces - similarities Connection resources: No differences between OUC and secure OUC. A programmed secure OUC connection uses a connection resource just like an OUC connection, irrespective of which IE/PROFINET interface communicates with the station. Connection diagnostics: No differences between OUC and secure OUC connection diagnostics. Loading of projects with secure OUC connections into the CPU: Only possible in STOP of the CPU, if certificates are loaded as well. Recommendation: Load to device > Hardware and software. Reason: Ensuring the consistency between the program with secure OUC, hardware configuration and certificates. Certificates are loaded with the hardware configuration - therefore loading requires a stop of the CPU. The reloading of blocks that utilize further secure OUC connections is only possible in RUN if the certificates required for this purpose are already located on the module. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 107 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 6.11.5 Secure OUC with Modbus TCP For secure Modbus TCP connection you need to create a data block with one of the system data types TCON_IP_V4_SEC or TCON_QDN_SEC yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at the MB_Server or MB_CLIENT instruction. Requirements: S7-1500 CPU CPU firmware version V2.5 or higher The Modbus client (TLS client) can reach the Modbus server (TLS server) over IP communication in the network. TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates. Example of setting up a secure Modbus TCP connection to a Modbus TCP server The following section describes how you can set up a Secure Open User Communication over Modbus TCP from a Modbus TCP client to a Modbus TCP server. To set up a secure connection from a Modus TCP client (TLS client) to a Modbus TCP server (TLS server) and set up the IPv4 address of the mail server, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_IP_V4 SEC in the global data block. Figure 6-25 TCON_IP_V4_SEC 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter the IPv4 address of the mail server, for example, for the "MailServerAddress". Communication 108 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. Enter the certificate ID of the CA certificate of the communication partner, for example, for "TLSServerCertRef". - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. In this case you can set up an unsecured Modbus TCP connection. - "TLSServerCertRef": Reference to the X.509 V3 (CA) certificate of the Modbus TCP server, which is used by the TLS client to validate the authentication of the Modbus TCP server. 5. Create an MB_CLIENT instruction in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the MB_Client instruction with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC. 6.11.6 Secure OUC via e-mail Setting up a secure connection to a mail server over the CPU interface For secure communication to a mail server you need to create a data block with one of the system data types TMAIL_V4_SEC, TMAIL_QDN_SEC yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at the TMAIL_C instruction. Requirements: TMAIL_C instruction version V5.0 or higher STEP 7 V15 and higher S7-1500 CPU V2.5 and higher You have assigned all the CA certificates of the mail server (TLS server) to the CPU (TLS client) and have downloaded the configuration to the CPU. Current date and time are set in the CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 109 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Process for establishing a secure connection to the mail server You can choose between two processes for establishing the secure connection to the mail server: SMTPS: The client attempts to immediately establish a TLS connection to the mail server ("handshake" process). If the mail server does not support TLS, then no connection is established. STARTTLS: Client establishes a TCP connection to the mail server. The client sends a request to "upgrade" the existing connection to a secure TLC connection over the TCP connection. If the mail server supports TLS, the client sends the command to establish a secure connection. The mail server uses the SMTP command "STARTTLS" to do this. The client then establishes a secure connection to the mail server. Advantage: If the mail server does not support TLS, client and mail server can communicate unsecured with each other. You use the "Remote Port" setting in the data types at the block parameter "MAIL_ADDR_PARAM" to define which process is used for the communication. Table 6- 6 Port numbers for the SMTPS and STARTTLS processes Process Port SMTPS: 4651 STARTTLS Any (465)2 1 The instruction TMAIL_C uses SMTPS only for Port 465. For all other ports STARTTLS is used. 2 According to RFC, mail servers use Ports 25 and 587 for secure connections with STARTTLS. The use of other port numbers for SMTP is not RFC-compliant, successful communication with such a mail server is not guaranteed. Communication 110 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Example: Setting up a secure connection to a mail server over IPv4 The following section describes how to set up a secure connection to an IPv4 mail server with the TMAIL_C communication instruction. To set up a secure connection via the IP4 address of the mail server, follow these steps: 1. Create a global data block in the project tree. 2. Define a tag of the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC in the global data block. The example below shows the global data block "MailConnDB" in which the tag "MailConnectionSEC" of the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC is defined. Figure 6-26 Data type TMAIL_V4_SEC 3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter the IPv4 address of the mail server, for example, for the "MailServerAddress". Note Connection parameters InterfaceId and ID Note that you can enter the value "0" for the interface ID and the ID with instruction version V5.0 or higher of the instruction TMAIL_C in the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC. In this case the CPU itself searches for a matching local CPU interface or a free connection ID. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 111 Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication 4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. Enter the certificate ID of the CA certificate of the communication partner, for example, for "TLSServerCertRef". - "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case. - "TLSServerCertRef": Reference to the X.509 V3 (CA) certificate of the mail server, which is used by the TLS client to validate the authentication of the mail server. 5. Create a TMAIL_C instruction in the program editor. 6. Interconnect the MAIL_ADDR_PARAM parameter of the TMAIL_C instruction with the tag of the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC. In the following example the MAIL_ADDR_PARAM parameter of the TMAIL_C instruction is interconnected with the tag "MailConnectionSEC" (data type TMAIL_V4_SEC). Figure 6-27 TMAIL_C instruction Setting up a secure connection to a mail server over the interface of a communication module For secure communication to a mail server over a communication module, you need to create a data block with one of the system data types TMAIL_V4_SEC, TMAIL_QDN_SEC or TMAIL_V6_SEC yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at the TMAIL_C instruction. Requirements: TMAIL_C instruction with version V4.0 S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version V2.0 with communication module CP 1543-1 as of firmware version V2.0 ET 200SP CPU as of firmware version V2.0 with communication module CP 1542SP-1 (IRC) as of firmware version V1.0 You have assigned all the CA certificates of the mail server (TLS server) to the CP (TLS client) and have downloaded the configuration to the CPU. Current date and time are set in the CPU. The STEP 7 online help describes how to set up a secure connection to a mail server over the interface of a communication module. Communication 112 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Open User Communication 6.11 Secure Open User Communication Application example This application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/46817803) show how you can use the CP of an S7-1500 or S7-1200 station to set up a secure connection to an email server and send an email with the default application "TMAIL_C" from the S7 CPU. Additional information You can find more information about the system data types TMail_V4_SEC and TMAIL_QDN_SEC in the STEP 7 online help. For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure Communication (Page 37). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 113 7 S7 communication Characteristics of S7 communication S7 communication as homogeneous SIMATIC communication is characterized by vendorspecific communication between SIMATIC CPUs (not an open standard). S7 communication is used for migration and for connecting to existing systems (S7-300, S7-400). For data transfer between two S7-1500 automation systems, we recommend that you use open communication (see section Open User Communication (Page 67)). Properties of S7 communication Using S7 communication, the CPU exchanges data with another CPU. Once the user has received the data at the receiver end, the reception data is automatically acknowledged to the sending CPU. The data is exchanged via configured S7 connections. S7 connections can be configured at one end or at both ends. S7 communication is possible via: Integrated PROFINET or PROFIBUS DP interface of a CPU Interface of a CP/CM S7 connections configured at one end For an S7 connection configured at one end, the configuration for this connection takes place in only one communication partner and is only downloaded to it. A one-sided S7 connection can be configured to a CPU that is only a server of an S7 connection (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP). The CPU is configured and the address parameters and interfaces are thus known. In addition, a one-sided S7 connection can be configured to a partner who is not in the project and whose address parameters and interface and therefore are not known. You need to enter the address; it is not checked by STEP 7. The partner is initially unspecified (no partner address is registered when you create the S7 connection). Once you enter the address, it is "unknown" (i.e. it is named, but the project is unknown). This makes it possible to use S7 connections beyond the boundaries of a project. The communication partner is unknown to the local project (unspecified) and is configured in another STEP 7 or third-party project. S7 connections configured at both ends When an S7 connection is configured at both ends, the configuration and download of the configured S7 connection parameters takes place in both communication partners. Communication 114 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG S7 communication Instructions for S7 communication For S7 communication with S7-1500, the following instructions can be used: PUT/GET You write data to a remote CPU with the PUT instruction. You can use the GET instruction to read data from a remote CPU. The PUT and GET instructions and are onesided instructions, i.e. you need only an instruction in one communication partner. You can can easily set up the PUT and GET instructions via the connection configuration. Note Data blocks for PUT/GET instructions When using the PUT/GET instructions, you can only use data blocks with absolute addressing. Symbolic addressing of data blocks is not possible. You must also enable this service for protection in the CPU configuration in the "Protection" area. This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82212115) provides information about how to configure and program an S7 instruction and the GET and PUT communication instructions for data exchange between two S7-1500 CPUs. BSEND/BRCV The BSEND instruction sends data to a remote partner instruction of the type BRCV. The BRCV instruction receives data from a remote partner instruction of the type BSEND. You use the S7 communication via the BSEND/BRCV instruction pair for secure transmission of data. USEND/URCV The USEND instruction sends data to a remote partner instruction of the type URCV. The URCV instruction receives data from a remote partner instruction of the type USEND. You use the S7 communication via the USEND/URCV instruction pair for fast, non-secure transmission of data regardless of the timing of the processing by the communications partner; for example for operating and maintenance messages. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 115 S7 communication S7 communication via PROFIBUS DP interface in slave mode You can find the "Test, commissioning, routing" check box in STEP 7 in the properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface of communications modules (e.g. CM 1542-5). Using this check box, you decide whether the PROFIBUS DP interface of the DP slave is an active or passive device on PROFIBUS. Check box selected: The slave is an active device on PROFIBUS. Check box cleared: The DP slave is a passive device on PROFIBUS. You can only set up S7 connections configured at one end for this DP slave. Figure 7-1 "Test, commissioning, routing" check box Communication 116 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG S7 communication Configuring S7 connections for PUT/GET instructions You can create S7 connections and assign the parameters for these in the connection parameter assignment of the PUT/GET instructions. Changed values are checked immediately by the connection parameter assignment for input errors. Requirement: A PUT or GET instruction is created in the programming editor. To configure an S7 connection using PUT/GET instructions, follow these steps: 1. In the program editor, select the call of the PUT or GET instruction. 2. Open the "Properties > Configuration" tab in the inspector window. 3. Select the "Connection parameters" group. Until you select a connection partner, only the empty drop-down list for the partner end point is enabled. All other input options are disabled. The connection parameters already known are displayed: - Name of the local end point - Interface of the local end point - IPv4 address of the local end point Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 117 S7 communication Figure 7-2 Connection configuration for PUT instruction 4. In the drop-down list box of the partner end point, select a connection partner. You can select an unspecified device or a CPU in the project as the communication partner. The following parameters are automatically entered as soon as you have selected the connection partner: - Name of the partner end point - Interface of the partner end point. If several interfaces are available, you can change the interface as required. - Interface type of the partner end point - Subnet name of both end points - IPv4 address of the partner end point - Name of the connection which is used for the communication. 5. If required, change the connection name in the "Connection name" input box. If you want to create a new connection or edit an existing connection, click on the "Select connection" button on the right side next to the input box for the connection name. Note The PUT and GET instructions between two communication partners can only run if both the hardware configuration and the program part for the partner end point have been loaded into the hardware. To achieve fully functional communication, make sure that you load not only the connection description of the local CPU on the device but also that of the partner CPU as well. Communication 118 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG S7 communication Configuring S7 connections for e.g. BSEND/BRCV If you want to use the instructions for BSEND/BRCV for S7 communication, for example, you first need to configure an S7 connection. To configure a S7 connection, follow these steps: 1. Configure the communications partners in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. 2. Select the "Connections" button and the "S7 connection" entry from the drop-down list. 3. Using drag-and-drop, connect the communication partner with each other (via an interface or local end point). If the required S7 subnet does not yet exist, it is created automatically. You can also set up a connection to unspecified partners. 4. In the "Connections" tab, select the row of the S7 connection. 5. Set the properties of the S7 connection in the "Properties" tab in the "General" area, for example the name of the connection and the interfaces of the communications partner that will be used. For S7 connections to an unspecified partner, set the address of the partner. You can find the local ID (reference of the S7 connection in the user program) in the "Local ID" area. 6. In the Project tree, select the "Program blocks" folder for one of the CPUs and open OB1 in the folder by double-clicking on it. The program editor opens. 7. In the program editor, call the relevant instructions for S7 communication in the user program of the communication partner (configured at one end) or in the user programs of the communication partners (configured at both ends). Select the BSEND and BRCV instructions from the "Communication" area of the "Instructions" task card, for example, and drag them to a network of OB1. 8. At the ID parameter of the instruction, assign the local ID of the configured connection to be used for the transmission of data. 9. Assign the parameters for the instructions indicating which data will be written to where and which data will be read from where. 10.Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU(s). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 119 S7 communication S7 communication via CP 1543-1 If you set up S7 communication via the Industrial Ethernet interface of the CP 1543-1, you can select the transport protocol for data transfer in the properties of the S7 connection under "General": "TCP/IP" check box selected (default): ISO-on-TCP (RFC 1006): for S7 communication between S7-1500 CPUs "TCP/IP" check box cleared: ISO protocol (ISO/IEC 8073): Addressing using MAC addresses Figure 7-3 Selecting the CP 1543-1 transport protocol Communication 120 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG S7 communication Procedure for setting up an S7 connection via different S7 subnets You have the option of using an S7 connection over multiple S7 subnets (PROFIBUS, PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet) (S7 routing (Page 260)). 1. Configure the communications partners in the network view of the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7. 2. Select the "Network" button. 3. Connect the relevant interfaces with the S7 subnets (PROFIBUS, PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet) using drag-and-drop. 4. Select the "Connections" button and the "S7 connection" entry from the drop-down list. 5. Using drag-and-drop in our example, connect PLC_1 in the left S7 subnet (PROFIBUS) to PLC_3 in the right S7 subnet (PROFINET). The S7 connection between CPU 1 and CPU 3 is configured. Figure 7-4 S7 connections via different subnets Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 121 S7 communication ET 200SP Open Controller as router for S7 connections If you assign the "PROFINET onboard [X2]" interface to the CPU 1515SP PC (F) of the SIMATIC PC station, the CPU 1515SP PC (F) can be used as a router for S7 connections. If you use the CP interface for "None, or a different Windows setting", you cannot use the Open Controller as a router for routed S7 connections. An existing S7 connection routed by the CPU 1515SP PC (F) becomes invalid if the assignment of the interface of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is changed from "SIMATIC PC station" to "None, or a different Windows setting". Since the PLC now no longer handles routing functions for this connection, when the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is compiled, no message relating to the invalid connection is displayed. The invalid routed S7 connection is displayed only when the end points of the connection are compiled. The interfaces required for routed S7 connections must remain explicitly assigned on the CPU 1515SP PC (F) . You can edit the assignment of the interface of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the properties under "PROFINET onboard [X2] > Interface assignment". Figure 7-5 S7 routing PC station Additional information You can find detailed information on configuring S7 connections and how to use the instructions for S7 communication in the user program in the STEP 7 online help. Communication 122 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Point-to-point link 8 Functionality A point-to-point connection for S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP is established via communications modules (CMs) with serial interfaces (RS232, RS422 or RS485): S7-1500/ET 200MP: - CM PtP RS232 BA - CM PtP RS422/485 BA - CM PtP RS232 HF - CM PtP RS422/485 HF ET 200SP: - CM PtP The bidirectional data exchange via a point-to-point connection works between communications modules or third-party systems or devices capable of communication. At least 2 communication partners are required for communication ("point-to-point"). With RS422 and RS485, more than two communications partners are possible. Protocols for communication via a point-to-point connection Freeport protocol (also called ASCII protocol) Procedure 3964(R) Modbus protocol in RTU format (RTU: Remote Terminal Unit) USS protocol (universal serial interface protocol) The protocols use different layers according to the ISO/OSI reference model: Freeport: Uses layer 1 (physical layer) 3964 (R), USS and Modbus: Use layer 1 and 2 (physical layer and data link layer; therefore greater transmission reliability than with Freeport). USS and Modbus use additionally layer 4. Properties of the Freeport protocol The recipient recognizes the end of the data transfer by means of a selectable end criterion (e.g. character delay time elapsed, receipt of end character, receipt of a fixed amount of data). The sender cannot recognize whether the sent data arrived free of errors at the recipient. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 123 Point-to-point link Properties of procedure 3964 (R) When the data is sent, control characters are added (start, end and block check characters). Make sure that these control characters are not included as data in the frame. Connection establishment and termination makes use of control characters. If transfer errors occur, data transfer is automatically repeated. Data exchange using Freeport or 3964 (R) communication The data to be sent is stored in the user program of the corresponding CPU in data blocks (send buffer). A receive buffer is available on the communications module for the received data. Check the properties of the receive buffer and adapt them if necessary. You must create a data block for receiving in the CPU. In the user program of the CPU, the "Send_P2P" and "Receive_P2P" instructions handle the data transfer between the CPU and CM. Procedure for setting up Freeport or 3964 (R) communication 1. Configure an S7-1500 configuration with CPU and CM in the device view of the hardware and network editor of STEP 7. 2. Select the interface of the CM in the device view of STEP 7. 3. Assign the parameters of the interface (for example connection communication, configuration of message sending) in the Inspector window of STEP 7 under "Properties" > "General". 4. Select the "Send_P2P" or "Receive_P2P" instruction in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication" > "Communications processor" and drag-and-drop the instruction into the user program (for example into a FB). 5. Assign the parameters for the instructions according to your configuration. 6. Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Otherwise: Dynamic parameter assignment of the communications module In certain types of application it is an advantage to set up communication dynamically; in other words, program-controlled by a specific application. Typical applications for this, could be, for example manufacturers of serial machines. To make the user interfaces as convenient as possible for their customers, these manufacturers adapt the communications services to the particular operator entries. Communication 124 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Point-to-point link Instructions for Freeport communication There are 3 instructions available for the dynamic configuration in the user program for Freeport communication. The following applies to all 3 instructions: the previously valid configuration data is overwritten but not stored permanently in the target system. The "Port_Config" instruction is used for the program-controlled configuration of the relevant port of the communications module. The "Send_Config" instruction is used for the dynamic configuration, for example of time intervals and breaks in transmission (serial transmission parameters) for the relevant port. The "Receive_Config" instruction is used for dynamic configuration, for example of conditions for the start and end of a message to be transferred (serial receive parameters) for the relevant port. Instructions for 3964 (R) communication There are 2 instructions available for dynamic configuration in the user program for 3964 (R) communication. The following applies to the instructions: the previously valid configuration data is overwritten but not stored permanently in the target system. The "Port_Config" instruction is used for the program-controlled configuration of the relevant port of the communications module. The "P3964_Config" instruction is used for the dynamic configuration of protocol parameters. Properties of the USS protocol Simple, serial data transfer protocol with cyclic message frame traffic in half duplex mode that is tailored to the requirements of drive technology. Data transfer works according to the master-slave principle. - The master has access to the functions of the drive and can, among other things, control the drive, read status values and read and write the drive parameters. Data exchange using USS communication The communications module is the master. The master continuously sends frames (job frames) to the up to 16 drives and expects a response frame from each addressed drive. A drive sends a response frame under the following conditions: When a frame is received without errors When the drive is addressed in this frame A drive must not send if these conditions are not met or the drive was addressed in the broadcast. The connection to the relevant drives exists for the master once it receives a response frame from the drive after a specified processing time (response delay time). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 125 Point-to-point link Procedure for setting up USS communication 1. Configure an S7-1500 configuration with CPU and CM in the device view of the hardware and network editor of STEP 7. 2. In the Project tree, select the "Program blocks" folder and open OB1 in the folder by double-clicking on it. The program editor opens. 3. Select the instructions for USS communication according to your task in the "Communication" area, "Communications processor" folder of the "Instructions" task card and drag them to a network of OB1: - The "USS_Port_Scan" instruction allows you to communicate via the USS network. - The "USS_Drive_Control" instruction prepares send data for the drive and evaluates the response data of the drive. - The "USS_Read_Param" instruction is used to read out parameters from the drive. - The "USS_Write_Param" instruction is used to change parameters on the drive. 4. Assign the parameters for the instructions according to your configuration. 5. Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Properties of the Modbus protocol (RTU) Communication takes the form of serial, asynchronous transfer with a transmission speed of up to 115.2 kbps, half duplex. Data transfer works according to the master-slave principle. The Modbus master can send jobs for reading and writing operands to the Modbus slave: - Reading inputs, timers, counters, outputs, memory bits, data blocks - Writing outputs, memory bits, data blocks Broadcast to all slaves is possible. Data exchange using Modbus communication (RTU) The communications module can be a Modbus master or Modbus slave. A Modbus master can communicate with one or more Modbus slaves (the number depends on the physical interface). Only the Modbus slave explicitly addressed by the Modbus master is permitted to return data to the Modbus master. The slave detects the end of the data transfer and acknowledges it. If an error occurs, it provides an error code to the master. Communication 126 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Point-to-point link Procedure for setting up Modbus communication (RTU) 1. Configure an S7-1500 configuration with CPU and CM in the device view of the hardware and network editor of STEP 7. 2. In the Project tree, select the "Program blocks" folder and open OB1 in the folder by double-clicking on it. The program editor opens. 3. Select the instructions for Modbus communication according to your task in the "Communication" area, "Communications processor" folder of the "Instructions" task card and drag them to a network of OB1: - The "Modbus_Comm_Load" instruction configures the port of the CM for Modbus communication. - The "Modbus_Master" instruction is used for Modbus master functionality. - The "Modbus_Slave" instruction is used for Modbus slave functionality. 4. Assign the parameters for the instructions according to your configuration. 5. Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU. Additional information You can find more detailed information on communication via point-to-point connections and basics of serial data transmission in the function manual CM PtP communication module - Configurations for point-to-point connections (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093). You can find a description of how to use the instructions for point-to-point connections in the user program in the STEP 7 online help. You can find information about the communications modules with a serial interface in the manual of the particular communications module. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 127 9 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA 9.1.1 OPC UA and Industrie 4.0 Uniform standard for information and data exchange Industry 4.0 stands for the intensive utilization, evaluation and analysis of the large volumes of data from production in IT systems at the enterprise level. With Industry 4.0, data exchange between the production and enterprise levels is rapidly increasing. However, a prerequisite for success is a uniform standard for the information and data exchange. The OPC UA (OPC Unified Architecture) standard is particularly suitable for data exchange across different levels thanks to its independence from specific operating systems, its secure transfer procedures and the semantic description of data. OPC UA makes available not only data but also information about the data (data types), at the same time making possible machine-interpretable access to the data. 9.1.2 OPC UA for S7-1500 CPUs In OPC UA, one system operates as a server and provides data the existing information to other systems (clients). OPC UA clients, for example, have read and write access to data on an OPC UA server. OPC UA clients call methods on the OPC UA server. You can access this data online with a client, including e.g. information on performance and diagnostics. In OPC UA terminology, this function is called "Browsen". The "Subscription" function saves the regular reading of a tag - a client only has values sent to it from the server when a change has occurred. A system can be both a client and a server. OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU As of firmware version 2.0, an S7-1500 CPU is equipped with an OPC UA server. The following sections describe how you configure the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU to make data and methods available for OPC UA clients so that clients have read or write access to PLC tags on the CPU and can call server methods. The following sections also set out how to integrate companion specifications into the address space of the OPC UA server. Communication 128 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU As of firmware version V2.6, an S7-1500 CPU is additionally equipped with an OPC UA client. The following sections show how to use standardized instructions (PLCopen function blocks) to create a user program that, as an OPC UA client, reads data from an OPC UA server or writes data to an OPC UA server or calls methods from an OPC UA server. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) assists you in creating user programs by providing an editor for client interfaces and a parameter assignment for OPC UA connections: The OPC UA instructions for an S7-1500 CPU as client are described in detail in the help to the instructions (Instructions > Communication > OPC UA). OPC UA client for test purposes The following description uses various different OPC UA clients to illustrate the use of OPC UA clients: "UaExpert" of Unified Automation. An extensive client that can be used free of charge: Link for downloading UaExpert (https://www.unified-automation.com/downloads/opc-uaclients.html) "UA Sample Client" of the OPC Foundation. This client is available free of charge for users who are registered with the OPC Foundation : Link for downloading the example client of the OPC Foundation (https://opcfoundation.org) Application example in Industry online support Siemens Industry Online Support provides an application example with a client API free of charge. .NET developers can use the functions of this interface to access the OPC UA server of an S7-1500. The client API is based on the .NET OPC UA stack of the OPC Foundation. The application example shows how to establish connections between servers and clients, for example. It also demonstrates the reading and writing of PLC tags. Link to download: OPC UA .NET client for the SIMATIC S7-1500 OPC UA Server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109737901) Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 129 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA 9.1.3 General features of OPC UA The key features of OPC UA OPC UA does not depend on a specific operating system platform. OPC UA can, for example, be used with Windows, Linux, Mac OS X, a real-time operating system or a mobile operating system (such as Android). OPC UA is implemented in various different programming languages. The OPC Foundation has implemented the OPC UA standard in several programming languages: Stacks for ANSI C, .NET and Java are available. The OPC Foundation offers the Java stack and .NET stack as well as example programs as open source software. See Github (https://github.com/opcfoundation). A number of companies offer Software Development Kits (SDK) containing the OPC Foundation stacks and other functions to facilitate the development of solutions. Advantages of using SDKs: - Support from the supplier - Tested software - Detailed documentation - Clear license conditions (important for selling of solutions) Scalability OPC UA can be used in sensors, embedded systems, controllers, PC systems and smartphones, as well as in servers running MES and ERP applications. OPC UA and PROFINET can also be used together. The two protocols use the same network infrastructure. Simple client-server principle An OPC UA server provides information within a network and an OPC UA client retrieves this information. Integrated security mechanisms OPC UA uses security mechanisms at various levels: - A secure connection can only be established between an OPC UA server and an OPC UA client if the client and server can register with X.509-v3 certificates and accept each other's certificates (security at the application level). Various security policies are possible, including a non-secure connection between server and client (Security Policy: "No security"). - Before allowing access, a server can request the following information from the user: - A certificate (cannot be configured in STEP 7) - User name and password - No user authorization Communication 130 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA The security mechanisms are optional and configurable. Independence of a specific transport layer The following transport mechanisms are currently supported by OPC UA: - The transfer of messages as a binary stream directly via TCP/IP - The transfer of messages with XML over TCP/IP and HTTP. This transport mechanism allows only a slow transfer and is therefore almost never used. The S71500 CPUs do not support this transport mechanism. Binary data exchange is supported by all OPC UA applications (required in OPC UA specification). PLC tag mapping The information of the OPC UA server (for example the PLC tags) is modeled as nodes connected to one another via references. This makes it possible to browse from node to node with an OPC UA client and find out what content can be read, monitored or written. Information OPC UA servers provide a lot of information, for example about the CPU, the OPC UA server itself, the data and the data types. Instance concept OPC UA is based on a type instance concept. Both instances and their type definitions are available in runtime. Differentiation of the functionality with profiles: S7-1500 supports the Embedded UA Server Profile, for example 9.1.4 From the Classic OPC interface to OPC UA Standardized interface Classic OPC only runs on Windows operating systems. To get around this restriction, the OPC Foundation developed the OPC UA standard. The standard is not platform-specific and uses an optimized, TCP-based binary protocol for high-performance applications. Different systems are therefore able to exchange data, for example: Controllers with MES and ERP systems Siemens controllers with controllers from other manufacturers Smartphones with controllers Embedded systems with controllers Smart sensors with controllers Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 131 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA 9.1.5 Addressing nodes Nodes in the OPC UA address space are uniquely identified by a NodeId (Node ID or Node Identifier). The NodeId consists of an identifier, identifier type and a namespace index. Namespaces are used to avoid naming conflicts. The OPC Foundation has defined a wide range of nodes that provide information about the given OPC UA server. These nodes can be found in the namespace of the OPC Foundation and have the index 0. The OPC Foundation also defines data types and tag types. Namespace All the tags or methods of an S7-1500 are contained in the namespace (Namespace) "http://www.siemens.com/simatic-s7-opcua". By default this namespace has the Index 3. The index may change later if additional namespaces are inserted into the server or if existing ones are deleted. The current index of the namespace therefore needs to be requested from the server before values are read or written. The figure below shows the result of such a query. The Siemens "UaClient" program is used as an example. Communication 132 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Identifier The Identifier corresponds to the name of the PLC tag in quotation marks. The quotation mark is the only sign that is not permitted as part of a name in STEP 7. Quotation marks avoid naming conflicts. The following example reads the value of the "StartTimer" tag: The Identifier can consist of several components. The individual components are then separated by a dot. The following example reads the "MyDB" array data block completely. This data block contains an array with ten integer values. All ten values should be read in one pass. Therefore, "0:9" is entered at the array range. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 133 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA PLC tags in the address space of the OPC UA server The figure below shows where the PLC tags in the example are located in the address space of the OPC UA server (excerpt from UA client): The "MyDB" data block is a global data block. The data block is therefore located below the node "DataBlocksGlobal". "StartTimer" is a memory tag and is therefore stored below the "Memory" node. Figure 9-1 PLC tags in the address space of the OPC UA server Communication 134 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Methods in the address space of the OPC UA server If you implement a method via your user program, this takes the following form in the address space of the OPC UA Server (see AUTOHOTSPOT): Figure 9-2 Methods in the address space of the OPC UA server Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 135 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA 9.1.6 Mapping of data types SIMATIC and OPC UA data types SIMATIC data types do not always correspond with OPC UA data types. S7-1500 CPUs provide SIMATIC tags (with SIMATIC data types) to their own OPC UA server as OPC UA data types so that OPC UA clients can access these tags over the server interface with OPC UA data types. A client can read the attribute "DataType" from such a tag and reconstruct the original data type in SIMATIC. Example A tag has the SIMATIC data type "COUNTER". You read COUNTER UInt16 in the table. You now know that you do not need to convert; the COUNTER value is sent over the line as a UInt16 data type. The client detects from the attribute "DataType" that the tag is actually the SIMATIC data type "COUNTER". With this knowledge, the client reconstructs the data type. Table 9- 1 SIMATIC and OPC UA data types SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type BOOL Boolean BYTE BYTE Byte WORD WORD UInt16 DWORD DWORD UInt32 LWORD LWORD UInt64 SINT SByte INT Int16 DINT Int32 LINT Int64 USINT Byte UINT UInt16 UDINT UInt32 ULINT UInt64 REAL Float LREAL Double S5TIME S5TIME UInt16 TIME TIME Int32 Communication 136 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type LTIME LTIME Int64 DATE DATE UInt16 TIME_OF_DAY (TOD) TOD UInt32 LTIME_OF_DAY (LTOD) LTOD UInt64 DATE_AND_TIME (DT) DT Byte[8] LDT DateTime DTL mapped as structure Special note: You can only describe the structure completely with an OPC UA client. You have read-only access individual elements of this structure (e.g. "YEAR") CHAR CHAR Byte WCHAR WCHAR UInt16 STRING STRING (Code page 1252 or Windows-1252) String WSTRING String (UCS-2; Universal Coded Character Set) TIMER TIMER UInt16 COUNTER COUNTER UInt16 Arrays A read or write job with OPC UA is always an array access, which means that it always has an index and length. A single tag is a special case of an array (index 0 and length 1). The data type is simply sent repeatedly on the line. For the tags, the "DataType" attribute indicates the basic data type. The attributes "ValueRank" and "ArrayDimensions" show whether or not you are dealing with an array and how large the array is. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 137 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Data types based on arrays There are SIMATIC data types for which an OPC UA value is mapped to an array of bytes. An array of these data types is then mapped to a two-dimensional array. Example: The SIMATIC data type DATE_AND_TIME (DT) is mapped to an 8-byte array (Byte[8]), see table above. When you define an array of the SIMATIC data type DATE_AND_TIME (DT), it is considered a two-dimensional array. This fact affects the use of system data types such as OPC_UA_NodeAdditionalInfo and OPC_UA_NodeAdditionalInfoExt, for example: For the data types described above, you must use the system data type OPC_UA_NodeAdditionalInfoExt for multidimensional arrays instead of OPC_UA_NodeAdditionalInfo. Structures Structures are transferred as ExtensionObject. The S7-1500 server uses binary representation for transmission of the ExtensionObjects over the line; the individual structure elements come one after the other. At the front is the NodeId of the data type; this is used by the client to establish the structure. For the OPC UA specification <= V1.03, a client must read, decode and interpret the complete DataTypeDictionary for this purpose (unless it has already done so offline with an XML import). Additional information More details on mapping of basic data types, arrays and structures can be found in the OPC UA Specification Part 6, "Mappings" (see OPC UA BINARY there). 9.1.7 What you need to know about OPC UA clients Basics of OPC UA clients OPC UA clients are programs that do the following: Access the information from an OPC UA server (for example an S7-1500 CPU): read, write, subscriptions Execute methods through the OPC UA server However, OPC US clients can access data that is enabled for this purpose (see "Managing write and read rights"). You need the endpoint of the server to establish a connection to an OPC UA server (see "Endpoints of the OPC UA servers (Page 157)"). Communication 138 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Reading out information from the OPC UA server When a connection to an end point of the server exists, you can use the navigation function of the client: You navigate starting from a defined starting point (from the "root" node) through the address space of the server. The following information is provided in the process: Enabled PLC tags, data blocks and data block components Namespace index and identifiers of these PLC tags, data blocks and DB components Data types of the PLC tags and DB components Number of components in arrays (required for reading and writing arrays) In addition, you receive information about the OPC UA server itself as well as information about the S7-1500 based on the "OPC UA for Devices" standard of the OPC Foundation (for example, serial number, firmware version). Reading data from the server and writing to the server You now know the namespace, identifier and data type of PLC tags. This means that you can now specifically read individual PLC tags and DB components as well as complete arrays and structures. Examples for reading Boolean tags and array data blocks are available under Addressing nodes (Page 132). Rules for access to structures are available here (Page 243). With the information that you obtain while navigating through the address space of the server (index, identifier and data type), you can also transfer values to the S7-1500 with the OPC UA client. The following example overwrites the first three values in the array data block "MyDB". For "Array Range" you specify which components of the array you want to overwrite. The "Good" status code indicates that the values were transferred successfully. However, you can only write the values to the S7-1500 but not the time stamps of these values. The time stamps can only be read. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 139 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Faster access through registration The examples up to now use strings as Identifier, for example, "MyBD2"."THIS". If, however, an Identifier is used as a numeric Node ID instead of a String Node ID, access is much faster. If you access specific tags regularly, you should use the functions "RegisteredRead" and "RegisteredWrite": In this case, your client first logs in the PLC tag on the server., The server returns an Identifier that the client uses for the actual access. This Identifier applies solely to the current session and has to be queried again when the session connection is terminated/lost. In the following example, the "StartTimer" tag is first registered on the server. Afterwards, the rapid function "RegisteredWrite" is used for setting the value. In accordance with the same scheme, the "RegisteredRead" function can also be used, which is particularly useful for recurring data readouts. Take into account, however, that depending on the application it may be advisable to use a Subscription instead. Recommendation: It is best to place registrations in the startup program of the OPC UA client, since the registration takes up time. Please note that you can set the maximum number of registered nodes in the properties of the S7-1500 CPU and that the Clients have to respect this number, see AUTOHOTSPOT. Communication 140 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Subscription The term "Subscription" is used for a function in which only those tags for which an OPC UA client has registered at the OPC UA server are transferred. The OPC UA server only sends a message to the OPC UA client for these registered tags (Subscriptions) when a value has changed. The monitoring of these tags makes constant sampling by the OPC UA client (Polling) superfluous, which reduces the network load. You have to create a Subscription to use this function. For this purpose, you specify the "Publishing Interval" at the UA client and click the "Create" button. The publishing interval is the time interval in which the server sends new values to the client in a notification (data change notification). In the following example a subscription has been created: The client receives a message with the new values (publishing interval 50 ms) every 50 milliseconds here. Preventing server overload You can set the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU by means of the "Minimum publishing interval" in such a way that it does not serve extremely short send intervals requested by the client; see Settings of the OPC UA server. Example: A client wants to be operated at a publishing interval of 50 ms as detailed above. Such a short publishing interval would, however, result in a high network and server load. You should therefore set 1000 ms as the "Minimum publishing interval" for the server. Clients whose subscription requires shorter publishing intervals are "slowed" to 1000 ms and the server is protected from overload. Sampling and transmission (Sampling & Publishing) within the scope of a subscription are communication processes which, like other communication processes (TCP/UDP/Web server communication...), are processed by the CPU with priority 15. OBs with higher priority interrupt the communication. If you set the sampling and publishing intervals too short, this setting causes a high communication load. Therefore, select intervals as large as possible, which are still sufficient for the application. For information about the consistency of tags, refer to Consistency of CPU tags (Page 220). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 141 OPC UA communication 9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA Monitoring of PLC tags When the Subscription has been created, you inform the server which tags are to be monitored with it. In the following example, the "Voltage" tag was added to the subscription. The "Voltage" tag contains the value of a voltage that is detected by an S7-1500 CPU. The sampling interval ("Sampling Interval") contains a negative value (-1). This determines that the default setting of the OPC UA server is used for the sampling interval. The default setting is defined by the "Publishing Interval" of the subscription. If you want to set the smallest possible sampling interval, select the value "0". In this example, the length of the queue is set to "1": Only one value is read from the CPU at an interval of 50 milliseconds and subsequently sent to the OPC UA client when the value has changed. The "Deadband" parameter in this example is "0.1": Changes in value have to amount to 0.1 Volt; only then does the sender send the new value to the client. The server does not send smaller changes in value. You can use this parameter, for example, to disable signal noise: Slight changes in a process variable which do not have a real meaning. Communication 142 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA 9.2 Security at OPC UA 9.2.1 Security settings Addressing risks OPC UA allows the exchange of data between different systems, both within the process and production levels and to systems at the control and enterprise level. This possibility also entails security risks. That is why OPC UA uses a range of security mechanisms: Verification of the identity of OPC UA server and clients. Checking of the identity of the users. Signed/encrypted data exchange between OPC UA server and clients. These security policies should only be bypassed in cases where it is absolutely necessary: During commissioning In stand-alone projects without external Ethernet connection If you have selected the endpoint "None" for "UA Sample Client" of the OPC Foundation, for example, the program issues a clear warning: When STEP 7 compiles your project it also checks whether you have considered the setting options for the protection and warns you of possible risks. This also includes an OPC UA security policy with the setting "no security", which corresponds to the end point "None". Note Disabling security policies you do not want If you have selected all security policies (default setting) in the secure channel settings of the S7-1500 OPC UA server - in other words the end point "None" (no security) - non-secure data traffic (neither signed nor encrypted) between the server and client is also possible. The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU also sends its public certificate to the client at "None" (No security). And some clients check this certificate. However, the client is not forced to send a certificate to the server. The identity of the client may possibly remain unknown. Each OPC UA client can then connect to the server irrespective of any subsequent security settings. When configuring the OPC UA server, make sure that only security policies that are compatible with the security concept for your machine or plant are selected. All other security policies should be disabled. Recommendation: Use the setting "Basic256Sha256 - Sign and Encrypt", which means that the server only accepts Sha256 certificates. The security policy "Basic128Rsa15" is disabled by default and should not be used as an end point. Select end points with a higher security policy. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 143 OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA Additional security rules Only use the end point "None" in exceptional cases. Only use the "guest authentication" of the user in exceptional cases. Only allow access to PLC tags and DB components via OPC UA if it is genuinely necessary. Use the list of trusted clients in the settings of the S7-1500 OPC UA client to allow access to certain clients only. 9.2.2 Certificates pursuant to ITU X.509 Security mechanisms are integrated in several layers in OPC UA. Digital certificates have an important role here. An OPC UA client can only establish a secure connection to an OPC UA server when the server accepts the digital certificate of the client and classifies it as trusted. See section "Configuring the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU". The client must also check and trust the certificate of the server. The server and client must show their identities and prove that they are what they claim to be: They must prove their identity. Mutual authentication of client and server, for example, prevents man-in-the-middle attacks. Man-in-the-middle attacks A "man-in-the-middle" could have positioned itself between server and client. A man-in-themiddle is a program that intercepts communication between server and client and claims to be a client or server, and is thus able to obtain information about the S7 program or to set values in the CPU and attack a machine or plant. OPC UA uses digital certificates that meet standard X.509 of the International Telecommunication Union (ITU). This allows the identity of a program, a computer or an organization to be proven (authenticated). Communication 144 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA X.509 certificates An X.509 certificate includes the following information: Version number of the certificate Serial number of the certificate Information on the algorithm used by the certificate authority to sign the certificate. Name of the certificate authority Start and end of the validity period of the certificate Name of the program, person or organization for which/whom the certificate has been signed by the certificate authority. The public key of the program, person or organization. An X509 certificate thus links an identity (name of a program, person or an organization) to the public key of the program, person or organization. Check during connection establishment When a connection is being established between the client and server, the devices check all information from the certificate that is required to establish integrity, for example signature, validity, application name (URN) and as of firmware V2.5 also the IP addresses of the client in the client certificate. The validity period stored in the certificate is also checked. The CPU clock must therefore be set and date/time must be within the validity period, otherwise no communication takes place. Signing and encryption To allow you to check whether a certificate has been manipulated, certificates are signed. There are various possible procedures here: Within the TIA Portal you have the possibility to generate and sign certificates. If you have protected your project and are logged in as a user with the function right to make security settings, you can use the global security settings. The global security settings allow access to the certificate manager and therefore to the certificate authority (CA) of the TIA Portal. Additional options are available for creating and signing certificates. In the TIA Portal, you can import certificates into the global certificate manager. - You contact a certificate authority (CA) and have your certificate signed. In this case, the certificate authority checks your identity and signs your certificate with the private key of the certificate authority. For this purpose you send a CSR (Certificate Signing Request) to the certificate authority. The process of creating a CSSR with the OpenSSL tool yourself is described here. (Page 148) - You yourself create a certificate and sign it. To this purpose you use, for example, the "Opc.Ua.CertificateGenerator" program of the OPC Foundation. The procedure is described here (Page 37). Or use OpenSSL: Instructions are available under Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself (Page 149). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 145 OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA Useful information: Certificate types Self-signed certificate: Each device generates and signs its own certificate. Application examples: Static configuration with limited number of communication nodes. No new certificates can be derived from a self-signed certificate. However, you need to load all self-signed certificates from partner devices to the CPU (STOP required). CA certificate: All certificates are generated and signed by a certificate authority. Application examples: Dynamically growing plants. You only need to download the certificate from the certificate authority to the CPU. The certificate authority can generate new certificates (partner devices can be added without CPU STOP). Signing The signature makes it possible to prove the integrity and source of a message as detailed below. Signing starts with the sender creating a hash value from the plain text (plain text message). The sender then encrypts the hash value with its private key and subsequently transfers the plain text together with the encrypted hash value to the recipient. To verify the signature, the recipient needs the public key of the sender (this is contained in the X509 certificate of the sender). The recipient uses the sender's public key to decrypt the hash value received. The recipient then forms the hash value themselves from the plain text received (the hash process is contained in the sender's certificate). The recipient compares the two hash values: If the two hash values are identical, the plain text message has reached the receiver unchanged and has not been manipulated. If the two hash values do not match, the plain text message has not reached the receiver unchanged. The plain text message has been manipulated or has been distorted during transfer. Encryption Encrypting data prevents unauthorized parties from reading the content. X509 certificates are not encrypted; they are public and can be viewed by anyone. Encryption involves the sender encrypting the plain text message with the public key of the recipient. To do so, the sender requires the recipient's X509 certificate, as it contains the public key of the recipient. The recipient decrypts the message with their private key. Only the recipient can decrypt the message: They alone hold the private key. The private key must therefore never be disclosed. Communication 146 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA Secure channel OPC UA uses the private and public key of client and server to establish a secure connection, the secure channel. Once the secure connection has been established, the client and server generate an internal key. The internal key is only known to the client and server. The client and server use this internal key to sign and encrypt messages. This symmetric process (a shared key) is much faster than asymmetric processes (private and public key). 9.2.3 Certificates with OPC UA Usage of X509 certificates with OPC UA OPC UA uses three types of X.509 certificates for establishing connections from client to server: OPC UA application certificates Such X.509 certificates identify the software instance, the installation of client or server software. For the "Organization name" attribute, you enter the name of the company that uses the software. Note The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 uses application certificates also for the security setting "None" (No security). This ensures compatibility to OPC UA V1.1 and earlier versions. OPC UA software certificates This X-509 certificate identifies a specific version of the client or server software. These certificates contain attributes that describe which tests this version of the software has passed during certification by the OPC Foundation (or recognized test laboratories). For the "Organization name" attribute, you enter the name of the company that has developed or markets the software. Note Software certificates are not supported in STEP 7. OPC UA user certificates This X.509 certificate identifies the specific user who, for example, accesses process data from the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU. This certificate is not required if the user can authenticate themselves with a password, or if anonymous access is configured. Note User certificates are not supported in STEP 7. These certificates are end-entity certificates: They identify, for example, a person, an organization, a company or an instance (installation) of a software. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 147 OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA 9.2.4 Creating self-signed certificates Using the client's certificate generator Many OPC UA client applications or SDKs are integrated in a sample application that allows you to generate certificates for the client from this application. The description for certificate generation can generally be found in the context for describing the OPC UA client application. Example client from the online support The OPC UA .NET client for the SIMATIC S7-1500 OPC UA server (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109737901) creates a self-signed software certificate of the client application in the Windows Certificate Store during the first program start. The documentation on this example describes the procedure for handling these certificates. Using the certificate generator of the TIA Portal If you use an OPC UA client that does not generate a client certificate, self-signed certificates can be created with STEP 7. To do this, follow these steps: 1. In the properties of the CPU, double-click "" under "Protection & Security > Certificate manager > Device certificates". 2. Click "Add". 3. In the "Create a new certificate" dialog, select the "OPC UA client" option for "Usage". 4. Click "OK". In the field "Subject Alternative Name" STEP 7 automatically enters the URI for the generated certificate. In the program-specific certificate generation by means of the .NET stack of the OPC Foundation, the field is called, for example, "ApplicationUri" - it can have a different name in other tools for certificate generation. Communication 148 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA 9.2.5 Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself This section is only relevant if you want to use an OPC UA client that cannot itself create a PKI key pair and a client certificate. In this case, you generate a private and a public key using OpenSSL, generate an X.509 certificate, and sign the certificate yourself. Using OpenSSL OpenSSL is a tool for Transport Layer Security that you can use to create certificates. You can also use other tools, for example XCA, a type of key management software with a graphical user interface for an improved overview of certificates issued. To work with OpenSSL under Windows, follow these steps: 1. Install OpenSSL under Windows. If you are using a 64-bit version of the operating system, install OpenSSL in the "C:\OpenSSL-Win64" directory, for example. You can obtain OpenSSL-Win64 as a download from various providers for open source software. 2. Create a directory, for example "C:\demo". 3. Open the command line (cmd.exe). To do so, click "Start" and enter "cmd" in the search field. Right-click "cmd.exe" in the results list and run the program as an administrator. Windows then opens the command line (DOS prompt) 4. Change to the "C:\demo" directory. To do this, enter the following command: "cd C:\demo". 5. Set the following network variables: - set RANDFILE=c:\demo\.rnd - set OPENSSL_CONF=C:\OpenSSL-Win64\bin\openssl.cfg The figure below shows the command line with the following commands: 6. Now start OpenSSL. If OpenSSL has been installed in the C:\OpenSSL-Win64 directory, enter the following: C:\OpenSSL-Win64\bin\openssl.exe The figure below shows the command line with the following command: Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 149 OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA 7. Generate a private key. Save the key to the "myKey.key" file. The key in this example is 1024 bits long; for greater RSA security, use 2048 bits in practice. Enter the following command: "genrsa -out myKey.key 2048" ("genrsa -out myKey.key 1024" in the example). The figure below shows the command line with the command and the output of OpenSSL: 8. Generate a CSR (Certificate Signing Request). To do this, enter the following command: "req -new -key myKey.key -out myRequest.csr". During execution of this command, OpenSSL queries information about your certificate: - Country name: for example "DE" for Germany, "FR" for France - State or province name: for example "Bavaria". - Location Name: for example "Augsburg". - Organization Name: Enter the name of your company. - Organizational Unit Name: for example "IT" - Common Name: for example "OPC UA client of machine A" - Email Address: Important: Both the IP address and the URL of the client program (application) have to be stored in the "Subject Alternative Name" field of the created certificate; otherwise, the CPU will not accept the certificate. The information you enter is added to the certificate. The figure below shows the command line with the command and the output of OpenSSL: The command creates a file in the C:\demo directory containing the Certificate Signing Request (CSR); in the example, this is "myRequest.csr". Communication 150 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA Using the CSR There are two ways to use a CSR: You send the CSR to a certificate authority (CA): Read the information of the respective certification authority. The certificate authority (CA) checks your information and identity (authentication) and signs the certificate with the private key of the certificate authority. You receive the signed X.509 certificate and use this certificate for OPC UA, HTTPS or Secure OUC (secure open user communication), for example. Your communication partners use the public key of the certificate authority to check whether your certificate was really issued and signed by that CA. The certificate authority has confirmed your information in the certificate. You sign the CSR yourself: Using your private key. This option is shown in the next step. Signing the certificate yourself Enter the following command so that you can generate and sign your certificate (self-signed certificate) yourself: "x509 -req -days 365 -in myRequest.csr -signkey myKey.key -out myCertificate.crt". The figure below shows the command line with the command and OpenSSL: The command generates an X.509 certificate with the attributes that you transfer with the CSR (in the example "myRequest.csr"), for example with a validity of one year (-days 365). The command also signs the certificate with your private key ("myKey.key" in the example). Your communication partners can use your public key (contained in your certificate) to check that you are in possession of the private key that belongs to this public key. This also prevents your public key from being misused by an attacker. With self-signed certificates, you yourself confirm that the information in your certificate is correct. There is no independent body that checks your information. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 151 OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA 9.2.6 Secure transfer of messages Establishing secure connections with OPC UA OPC UA uses secure connections between client and server. OPC UA checks the identity of the communication partners. OPC UA uses certificates in accordance with X.509-V3 from the ITU (International Telecommunication Union) for client and server authentication. Exception: A secure connection is not established with the "No security" security policy. Message security mode OPC UA uses the following security policies to protect messages: No security All messages are unsecured. In order to use this security policy, establish a connection to a None end point of a server. Signing All message are signed. This allows the integrity of the messages received to be checked. Manipulations are detected. In order to use this security policy, establish a connection to a Sign end point of a server. Sign & Encrypt All messages are signed and encrypted. This allows the integrity of the messages received to be checked. Manipulations are detected. What is more, no attacker can read the contents of the message (protection of confidentiality). In order to use this security policy, establish a connection to a "SignAndEncrypt" end point of a server. The security policies are also named according to the algorithms used. Example: "Basic256Sha256 - Sign & Encrypt" means: Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit encryption. Communication 152 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA Layers required The figure below shows the three layers that are always required for establishing a connection: the transport layer, the secure channel and the session. Figure 9-3 Necessary layers: transport layer, secure channel and session Transport layer: This layer sends and receives messages. OPC UA uses an optimized TCP-based binary protocol here. The transport layer is the basis for the subsequent secure channel. Secure channel The secure channel receives the data received from the transport layer, and forwards that data to the session. The secure channel forwards data of the session that is to be sent to the transport layer. In "Sign" security mode, the secure channel signs the data (messages) that is sent. When a message is received, the secure channel checks the signature to detect any manipulations. With a "SignAndEncrypt" security policy, the secure channel signs and encrypts the send data. Data received is decrypted by the secure channel, and the secure channel then checks the signature. With the "No security" security policy, the message packages pass the secure channel unchanged (the messages are received and sent in plain text). Session The session forwards the messages from the secure channel to the application, or receives from the application the messages that are to be sent. The application uses the process values or provides the values. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 153 OPC UA communication 9.2 Security at OPC UA Establishing the secure channel The secure channel is established as follows: 1. The server starts establishing the secure channel when it receives a request to this effect from the client. This request is signed or signed and encrypted, or the message is sent in plain text (security mode of the selected server end point). With "Sign" and "Sign & Encrypt", the client sends a "secret" (random number) with the request. 2. The server validates the client certificate (contained in the request, unencrypted) and checks the identity of the client. If the server trusts the client certificate, - it decrypts the message and checks the signature ("Sign & Encrypt"), - checks the signature only ("Sign"), - or leaves the message unchanged ("No security") 3. The server then sends a response to the client (same level of security as the request). The server secret is contained in the response. The client and server calculate a symmetric key from the client and server secret. The secure channel is now established. The symmetric key (instead of the private and public key of client and server) is now used for signing and encrypting messages. Establishment of the session The session is executed as follows: 1. The client starts establishing the session by sending a CreateSessionRequest to the server. This message contains a Nonce, a random number that is only used once. The server must sign this random number (Nonce) to prove that it is the owner of the private key. The private key belongs to the certificate that the server uses to establish the secure channel. This message (and all subsequent messages) is secured in line with the security policies for the selected server endpoint (selected security policies). 2. The server responds with the CreateSession Response. This message contains the public key of the server and the signed Nonce. The client checks the signed Nonce. 3. If the server passes the test, the client sends a SessionActivateRequest to the server. This message contains the information that is required for user authentication: - Either the user name and password - Or the X.509 certificate of the user (not supported in STEP 7 V15) - Or no data (if anonymous access is configured). 4. If the user has the necessary rights, the server returns a message to the client (ActivateSessionResponse). This activates the session. The secure connection between the OPC UA client and server has been established. Establishing a connection to PLCopen function block The PLCopen specification defines a range of IEC 61131 function blocks for OPC UA clients. The instruction UA_Connect initiates both a secure channel and a session following the pattern described above. Communication 154 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.1 Useful information about the S7-1500 CPU OPC UA server 9.3.1.1 The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPUs The S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware V2.0 are equipped with an OPC UA server. Apart from the Standard-S7-1500 CPUs this applies to the variants S7-1500F, S7-1500T, S7-1500C, S7-1500pro CPUs, ET 200SP CPUs, SIMATIC S7-1500 SW controllers and PLCSIM Advanced. Convention: "S7-1500 CPUs" also includes the above-mentioned CPU variants. S7-1500 CPU OPC UA server basics Access to the OPC UA server of the CPU is possible via all integrated PROFINET interfaces of the S7-1500 CPU. Direct access to the OPC UA server of the CPU over the backplane bus of the automation system is not possible via a CP or CM. For access by clients, the server saves the enabled PLC tags and other information in the form of nodes (see Configuring access to PLC tags). These nodes are interconnected and form a network. OPC UA defines access points to this network (well-known nodes) that enable navigation to subordinate nodes. With an OPC UA client you can read, observe or write values of tags of the PLC program as well as call methods that are available to the server. As of firmware version 2.5 you can implement methods, see AUTOHOTSPOT. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 155 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Node classes OPC UA servers provide information in the form of nodes. A node can be, for example, an object, a tag, a method or a property. The example below shows the address space of the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU (extract from the OPC UA client "UaExpert" from Unified Automation). Figure 9-4 Example of the address space of the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU In the figure above, the "MyValue" tag is selected (highlighted in gray). This tag is located below the "Memory" node, which has the node class "Object". "Memory" is below the "PLC_1" node (also an Object). Address space The nodes are linked over references, for example, the reference "HasComponent, which represents a hierarchical relationship between a node and its subordinate nodes. With their references, the nodes form a network that can, for example, take the form of a tree. A network of nodes is also called an address space. Starting from the root, all nodes can be reached in the address space. Communication 156 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.1.2 End points of the OPC UA server The end points of the OPC UA server define the security level for a connection. Depending on the purpose of use or desired security level, you have to carry out the corresponding settings for the connection at the end point. Different security settings Before establishing a secure connection, OPC UA clients ask the server with which security settings connections are possible. The server returns a list with all the security settings (endpoints) that the server offers. Structure of end points End points consist of the following components: Identifier for OPC: "opc.tcp" IP address: 192.168.178.151 (in the example) Port number for OPC UA: 4840 (standard port) The port number can be configured, see "Settings of the OPC UA server". Security setting for messages (Message Security Mode): None, Sign, SignAndEncrypt. Encryption and hash procedures (Security Policy): None, Basic128Rsa15, Basic256, Basic256Sha256 (in the example). The following figure shows the "UA Sample Client" of the OPC Foundation. The client has established a secure connection to the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU to the end point "opc.tcp://192.168.178.151:4840 - [SignAndEncrypt: Basic128Rsa15:Binary]". The security settings "SignAndEncrypt:Basic128Rsa15" are contained in the end point. Note Select an endpoint with as strict as possible a security policy Select an application-appropriate security policy for the end point and disable the less strict security policy at the OPC UA server. A Sha256 certificate is required for the most secure end points (Basic256Sha256) of the S7-1500 CPU OPC UA server. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 157 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Figure 9-5 "UA Sample Client" program of the OPC Foundation A connection to a server end point is only established if the OPC UA client complies with the security policies of that end point. Through the information provided by the OPC UA server OPC UA servers provide a wide range of information: The values of PLC tabs and DB components which clients may access. The data types of these PLC tags and DB components. Information on the OPC UA server itself and on the CPU. This gives clients an overview and allows them to read out specific information. Previous knowledge of the PLC program and the CPU data is not required. You do not need to ask the developer of the PLC program when PLC tags are to be read. All necessary information is stored on the server itself (for example, the data types of the PLC tags). Communication 158 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Display of the information of the OPC UA server You have the following options: Online: You have all the available information displayed during the runtime of the OPC UA server. To do so, navigate (browse) the address space of the server. Offline: You export an XML file that is based on the XML schemes of the OPC Foundation. Server methods created by the user (FB instance that can be called by an OPC UA client) are not exported as of STEP 7 V15.1), see AUTOHOTSPOT. Offline with the Openness API: In your program, you use the API (Application Programming Interface) of the TIA Portal to access the function for exporting all PLC tags that can be read by OPC UA. This requires .NET Framework 4.0; see TIA Portal Openness, Automating SIMATIC projects with scripts (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477163). If you already know the syntax and the PLC program, you can access the OPC UA server without first researching the information. 9.3.1.3 Runtime behavior of the OPC UA server OPC UA server in operation The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU starts when you activate the server and download the project to the CPU. How to activate the OPC UA server is described here. Response to CPU STOP An activated OPC UA server remains in operation even if the CPU switches to "STOP". The OPC UA server continues to respond to requests from OPC UA clients. Server response in detail: If you request the values of PLC tags, you will get what were the latest values before the CPU switched to or was set to "STOP". If you write values to the OPC UA server, the OPC UA server will accept those values. However, the CPU will not process the values because the user program is not executed in "STOP" mode. An OPC UA client can nonetheless read the values written at STOP from the OPC UA server of the CPU. During restart, the CPU overwrites the values written at STOP with the start of the PLC tags. If you call a server method, the error message 16#00AF_0000 (BadInvalidState) is output because the server method (user program) is not running. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 159 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Server restart The OPC UA server is stopped upon each download to the CPU (for example after a configuration or block is downloaded) and then restarts. The duration of the restart depends on the scope of the data structure. Reading CPU operating mode over OPC UA server The OPC UA server allows you to read out the CPU mode, see figure below: Figure 9-6 Reading CPU operating mode over OPC UA server In addition to the operating mode of the CPU you can, for example, read out the diagnostics status of the CPU (Good). Communication 160 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.1.4 Diagnostics of the OPC UA server Online diagnostics of the OPC UA server The S7-1500 CPU OPC UA server can be diagnosed online with standard OPC UA clients, such as UaExpert. The diagnostic information is subdivided into the following areas: Server Diagnostics Sessions Diagnostics Subscriptions Diagnostics In the address space of the server, for example, the following nodes are available with diagnostic information: ServerDiagnosticsSummary: Server diagnostics summary - CurrentSessionCount: Number of active sessions SessionsDiagnosticsSummary: Session diagnostics summary - SessionTimeout: Set time that a session lasts, e.g. in the event of disconnection - SecurityRejectedSessionCount: Number of sessions rejected due to mismatching end point security settings between client and server SubscriptionsDiagnosticsArray: Array with one element per subscription for each session Figure 9-7 Server Diagnostics Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 161 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server The SessionsDiagnosticsSummary node also shows the properties of the client application accessing the server within the session. Figure 9-8 Sessions Diagnostics with the properties of the client application Diagnostics of the connection between client and server To diagnose the status of the connection during program runtime in the client, use the following instruction: OPC_UA_ConnectionGetStatus: Read connection status. Communication 162 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.2 Configuring access to PLC tags 9.3.2.1 Managing write and read rights Enabling PLC tags and DB tags for OPC UA OPC UA clients can have read and write access to PLC tags and DB tags if the tags are enabled for OPC UA (default setting). For an enabled tag the check box "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" is activated. The following example shows an array data block: Figure 9-9 Enabling PLC tags and DB tags for OPC UA This array can be read completely in one pass by OPC UA clients (see Addressing nodes). The check boxes at "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" and "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" are activated for all the components of the array. Result: OPC UA clients can both read and write these components. Removing write rights If you want to write-protect a tag, deselect the "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" option for that tag. This removes the write right for the OPC UA clients and HMI devices. Result: Only read access by OPC UA clients and HMI devices is possible. OPC UA clients cannot assign values to this tag and therefore cannot influence execution of the S7 program. Removing write and read rights To write-protect and read-protect a tag, disable the "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" option for that tag (checkbox not selected). This makes the OPC UA server remove the tag from its address space. OPC UA clients can no longer see that CPU tag. Result: OPC UA clients and HMI devices can neither read nor write the tag. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 163 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Write and read rights of structures If you remove the read or write right for the component of a structure, the structure or the data block cannot be written or read as a whole. If you remove read and write rights for individual components of a PLC data type (UDT), the rights will also be removed from any data block based on the UDT. Visible in HMI engineering The option "Visible in HMI Engineering" applies to Siemens engineering tools. If you disable the option "Visible in HMI Engineering" (check mark not set), you can no longer configure the tag in WinCC (TIA Portal). The option does not have any effect on OPC UA. Rules Only allow read access to PLC tags and tags of data blocks in STEP 7 if this is necessary for communication with other systems (controllers, embedded systems or MES). You should not enable other PLC tags. Only allow write access over OPC UA if write rights are genuinely necessary for specific PLC tags and tags of data blocks. If you have reset the "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" option for all elements of a data block, the data block for an OPC UA client is no longer visible in the address space of the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU. You can also prevent access to an entire data block centrally (see AUTOHOTSPOT). This setting "overrules" the settings for the components in the DB editor. Communication 164 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.2.2 Managing write and read rights for a complete DB Hiding DBs or DB contents for OPC UA clients As of STEP 7 V15, you have the option of easily preventing access to a complete data block by an OPC UA client. With this option, the data of the corresponding DB, including instance DBs of function blocks, remains hidden for OPC UA clients. In the default setting, data blocks can be read and written from OPC UA clients. Procedure Proceed as follows to completely hide a data block for OPC UA clients or to protect a data block from write access from OPC UA clients: 1. Select the data block to be protected in the project tree. 2. Select the "Properties" shortcut menu. 3. Select the "Attributes" area. 4. Select/clear the "DB accessible from OPC UA" checkbox as required. Figure 9-10 Hiding DBs or DB contents for OPC UA clients Note Effect on settings in the DB editor If you hide a DB using the DB attribute described here, the settings for the components in the DB editor are no longer relevant; individual components can no longer be accessed or written. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 165 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.2.3 Accessing OPC UA server data High performance in line with application OPC UA is designed for the transfer of a high volume of data within a short period of time. You can increase the performance significantly if you do not access individual PLC tags, but rather read and write arrays and structures as a whole. It is fastest to access arrays. Therefore, you should combine the data for OPC UA clients into arrays. Recommendations for access to the OPC UA server by the OPC UA client For one-off or infrequent data access, use standard read/write access. For cyclic access to small amounts of data (up to ca. every 5 seconds), use subscriptions. Optimize the settings for the smallest publishing interval and the smallest sampling interval at the OPC UA server. If you access specific tags regularly (recurring access), you should use the functions "RegisteredRead" and "RegisteredWrite". Allow a greater communication load for the PLC by increasing the value for "Cycle load due to communication". Make sure that your application still works properly with the changed settings. Procedure for creating an array DB You can create arrays for example in global data blocks, in the instance data block of a function block or as an array DB . The following sections describe how to create an ArrayDB. To create a data block with an array (array data block), follow these steps: 1. Select the CPU with the OPC UA server in the project tree. 2. Double-click "Program blocks". 3. Double-click "Add new block". 4. Click "Data block". 5. Select a unique name for the data block and accept the name that is already entered. 6. Select the "Array DB" entry from the drop-down list for "Type". 7. Select the data type for the individual components of the array from the drop-down list for "Array data type". 8. Enter the high limit of the array for "Array limit". 9. Click "OK". Communication 166 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.2.4 Export OPC UA XML file Generating an OPC UA export file OPC UA specifies an information model XML scheme with a standard syntax, with which manufacturers can define their information model of a system component, for example, and make it available in machine-readable form. A file that uses this scheme is also known as a node set file. With STEP 7 (TIA Portal) you can easily export the standard SIMATIC information model of the S7-1500 CPU as a server to an OPC UA XML file (node set file); including all PLC variables and methods you have enabled for OPC UA. You use the OPC UA XML file for the offline configuration of an OPC UA client; it is structured according to the OPC UA specification and acts as a standard SIMATIC server interface. To create and export the OPC UA XML file, follow these steps: 1. Select the CPU. Click on the CPU symbol (for example in the network view). 2. Click "General > OPC UA > Server > Export" in the properties of the CPU. 3. Click "Export OPC UA XML file". 4. Select the directory in which you want to save the export file. 5. Select a new name for the file or keep the name that is already entered. 6. Click "Save". Note As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V15.1, server methods are contained in the OPC UA export file (node set) together with their input and output parameters. Exporting all array elements separately If the "Export all array elements as separate nodes" option is selected in the CPU properties under "OPC UA > Server > Export", the OPC UA XML file contains all elements of arrays as individual XML elements. In addition, the arrays themselves are each described in an XML element in the XML file. If an array contains many array elements, the XML file can be very large. Tip The following FAQ contains a converter with which you can convert the export file into CSV format. You then obtain a list of the tags of the CPU that can be accessed by OPC UA. You can find the FAQ on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742903). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 167 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3 Configuring the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU 9.3.3.1 Enabling the OPC UA server Requirement You have acquired a Runtime license for the operation of the OPC UA server; see Licenses for the OPC UA server (Page 192). When using certificates for secure communication (for example, HTTPS, secure OUC, OPC UA), make sure that the corresponding modules have the current time of day and the current date. Otherwise, the modules will evaluate the certificates used as invalid and secure communication will not work. Commissioning an OPC UA server By default, the OPC UA server of the CPU is not enabled for reasons of security: OPC UA clients have neither write nor read access to the S7-1500 CPU. Follow these steps to activate the OPC UA server of the CPU: 1. Select the CPU. Click on the CPU symbol (for example in the network view). 2. Click "OPC UA > Server" in the properties of the CPU. 3. Activate the OPC UA server of the CPU. 4. Confirm the security notes. 5. Go to the CPU properties, select "Runtime licenses" and set the runtime license acquired for the OPC UA server. 6. Compile the project. 7. Download the project to the CPU. The OPC UA server of CPU now starts. Settings remain stored If you have already enabled the server and made settings, those settings are not lost if the server is disabled. The settings are saved as before and are available when you enable the server again. Communication 168 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Application name The application name is the name of the OPC UA application. The name is displayed under "OPC UA > General": The default setting for the server name is: "SIMATIC.S7-1500.OPC-UAServer:PLC1". The default consists of "SIMATIC.S7-1500.OPC-UAServer:" and the name of the CPU selected under "General > Product information > Name", in this case "PLC_1". Clients identify the server using the application name. The example below originates from UaExpert: If you have activated the server, you can also use a different name that is meaningful in your project and which fulfills the requirements of your project, e.g. for worldwide uniqueness. Changing the application name To change the name of the OPC UA server, follow these steps: 1. Select the CPU. Click on the CPU symbol (for example in the network view). 2. Click "OPC UA > General" in the properties of the CPU. 3. Enter a meaningful name. Please note that the application name is also entered on the certificate (Subject Alternative Name) and you may have to generate an existing certificate again after changing the application name. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 169 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.2 Access to the OPC UA server Server addresses The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU can be accessed over all internal PROFINET interfaces of the CPU (as of firmware V2.0), but not over the PROFINET interfaces of CP/CM. With SIMATIC S7-1500 SW controllers, access to the OPC UA server is only possible via PROFINET interfaces that are assigned to the software PLC. In the example, connections to the OPC UA server of the CPU can be established over the following URLs (Uniform Resource Locator): The URLs are structured as follows: Protocol identifier "opc.tcp://" IP address - 192.168.178.151 The IP address at which the OPC UA server can be accessed from the Ethernet subnet 192.168.178. - 192.168.1.1 The IP address at which the OPC UA server can be accessed from the Ethernet subnet 192.168.1. TCP Port number - Default: 4840 (standard port) The port number can be changed under "OPC > UA > Server > Port". Communication 170 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Dynamic IP addresses In the example below, the IP address for the PROFINET interface [X2] has not yet been specified. The placeholder "" appears in the table. The IP address of this PROFINET interface is set later on the device, e.g. via the display of the CPU. Activating the standard SIMATIC Server interface If the "Activate Standard SIMATIC server interface" option is selected, the OPC UA server of the CPU provides the enabled PLC tags and server methods to the clients, as is specified in the OPC UA specification. This option is selected in the default setting. Leave the option selected so that OPC UA clients can automatically connect to the OPC UA server of the CPU and exchange data. If you do not select this option, you must add the server interface by entering the "OPC UA communication" entry in the project tree. This interface is then used as OPC UA server interface, see OPC UA server interface configuration (Page 198). Backward compatible data type definitions according to OPC UA specification V1.03 The OPC UA specification (<= V1.03) defines mechanisms in order to read out data type definitions, for example for user-defined structures (UDTs), from a server by means of the TypeDictionaries. In the OPC UA server properties of the CPU, you can set whether the CPU generates these backward compatible data type definitions according to the OPC UA specification V1.03 for the standard SIMATIC server interface or not. Because TypeDictionaries are complex and result in large OPC UA XML files (server interfaces) which the client has to interpret, a simpler solution was introduced with OPC UA Specification V1.04 (attribute "DataTypeDefinition" at the data type node). If your client supports the OPC UA specification V1.04 or higher, then disable the option. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 171 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.3 General settings of the OPC UA server TCP port for OPC UA By default, OPC UA uses TCP port 4840. You can, however, select a different port. Entries from 1024 to 49151 are possible. You must, however, make sure that there are no conflicts with other applications. OPC UA clients must use the selected port when establishing a connection. In the example below, port 48400 is selected: Settings for sessions Maximum timeout for sessions In this field, you specify the maximum time period before the OPC UA server closes a session without data exchange. Possible values between 1 and 600000 seconds. Maximum number of OPC UA sessions In this field, you specify the maximum number of sessions the OPC UA server starts and simultaneously operates. The maximum number of sessions is dependent on the performance capability of the CPU. Each session ties up resources. Maximum number of registered nodes In this field, you specify the maximum number of nodes the OPC UA server registers. The maximum number of registered nodes depends on the capacity of the CPU and is displayed when you configure the field content (place cursor in field). Each registration ties up resources. Note No error message following attempt to register more than the configured maximum number of registrable nodes If a client tries to register more nodes during runtime than the configured maximum number, the server of the S7-1500 CPU only registers the configured maximum number. From the configured maximum number of registrable nodes, the server sends the client the regular string node IDs so the speed advantage gained by registration for these nodes is lost. The client does not receive an error message. When configuring, make sure you have a sufficient reserve or have the client calculate the maximum number of nodes allowed before registration. Communication 172 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Additional information Details on which ports are used by the various services for data transfer via TCP and UDP, and what are the points to note when using routers and firewalls can be found in the FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/8970169). 9.3.3.4 Settings of the server for subscriptions Subscription instead of cyclic queries An alternative to cyclic queries for a PLC tag (polling) is to monitor this value. Use a Subscription: The server informs the client if the value of PLC tags changes. See "The OPC UA client". One server usually monitors a large number of PLC values. At regular intervals, the server therefore sends the client messages (notifications) containing the new values of the PLC tags. How frequently does the server send notifications? When a Subscription is set up, the OPC UA client specifies the intervals at which it wants to be sent the new values in the event of changes. To limit the communication load through OPC UA, set a minimum interval for the messages. For this purpose, use the parameters for the minimum publishing interval and the minimum sampling interval. Minimum publishing interval With "Minimum publishing interval", you set the time intervals at which the server sends a message to the client with the new values in the event of changes. 250 ms is used as the "Minimum sampling interval" in the figure below. The value 200 ms is entered as the "Minimum publishing interval". In the example, following a value change the OPC UA server will send a new message every 200 ms if the OPC UA client requests an update. If the OPC UA client requests an update every 1000 ms, the OPC UA server will only send a message with the new values once every 1000 ms (one second). If the OPC UA client requests an update every 100 ms, the server will still only send a message every 200 ms (minimum publishing interval). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 173 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Minimum sampling interval With "Minimum sampling interval", you set the time intervals at which the OPC UA server records the value of a CPU tag and compares it with the previous value to detect any changes. If the sampling interval is selected smaller than the publishing interval and an OPC UA client requests a high sampling rate for certain PLC tags, two or more values may be measured during each publishing interval. In this case, the OPC UA server writes the value changes into the queue and sends all value changes to the client after the completion of the publishing interval. If more value changes occur in the publishing interval than fit in the queue, the OPC UA server overwrites the oldest values. (depending on the set "Discard Policy", the option "Discard Oldest" has to be activated in this case). The most recent values are sent to the client. Maximum number of monitored elements (monitored items) In this field, you specify the maximum number of elements that the OPC UA server of the CPU simultaneously monitors for a value change. The monitoring ties up resources. The maximum number of monitored elements is dependent on the utilized CPU. Additional information Information about the system limits of the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPUs (firmware V2.0 and V2.1) regarding subscriptions, sampling intervals and publishing intervals can be found in the following FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755846). When using subscriptions, certain status codes of errors provide information on the error that occurred. For information on causes and remedies for status codes of OPC UA client that appear, see the list of error codes in the online help of Step 7 (TIA Portal) or in the following FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755860). Communication 174 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.5 Handling client and server certificates A secure connection between the OPC UA server and an OPC UA client is only established when the server can prove its identity to the client. This is done with the server certificate. Certificate of the OPC UA server When you have activated the OPC UA server and have confirmed the security prompts, STEP 7 automatically generates the certificate for the server and saves it in the local certificate directory of the CPU. You can view and manage this directory with the local certificate manager of the CPU (exporting or deleting certificates). The figure below shows the local certificate manager of the CPU with the automatically generated certificate for the OPC UA server: Figure 9-11 Local certificate manager of the CPU Alternatively, you can also generate a server certificate yourself. The certificate of the server is transferred from the server to the client during establishment of a connection. The client checks the certificate. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 175 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server The client user decides whether the server certificate is to be trusted. The user at the client side now has to decide whether the server certificate is to be trusted. If the user trusts the server certificate, the client stores the server certificate in its directory containing the trusted server certificates. The following example shows a dialog of the client "UA Sample Client". When the user clicks the "Yes" button, the client trusts the server certificate: Figure 9-12 Dialog of the client "UA Sample Client" See also Generating server certificates with STEP 7 (Page 183) Secured transferring of messages Where does a client certificate come from? When you use UA clients from manufacturers or the OPC Foundation, a client certificate is generated automatically during installation or upon the first program call. You have to import these certificates via the global certificate manager in STEP 7 and use them for the corresponding CPU (as shown above). When you program an OPC UA client yourself, you can have the certificates generated by the program; see the section "Instance certificate for the client". Alternatively, you can generate certificates with tools, for example with OpenSSL or the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation: The procedure for OpenSSL is described here: "Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself". Working with the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation is described here: "Creating self-signed certificates". Communication 176 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Announcing client certificates to the server You need to send client certificates to the server to allow a secure connection to be established. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Select the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option in the local certificate manager of the server. This makes the global certificate manager available. You will find this option under "Protection & Security > Certificate manager" in the properties of the CPU that is acting as server. If the project is not yet protected, select "Security settings > Settings" in the STEP 7 project tree, click the "Protect this project" button and log on. The "Global security settings" item is now displayed under "Security settings" in the STEP 7 project tree. 2. Double click "Global security settings". 3. Double click "Certificate manager". STEP 7 opens the global certificate manager. 4. Click on the "Trusted certificates" tab. 5. Right-click in the tab on a free area (not on a certificate). 6. Select the "Import" command from the shortcut menu. The dialog for importing certificates is displayed. 7. Select the client certificate that the server is to trust. 8. Click "Open" to import the certificate. The certificate of the client is now contained in the global certificate manager. Note the ID of the client certificate just imported. 9. Click the "General" tab in the properties of the CPU that is acting as server. 10.Click "OPC UA > Server > Security > Secure Channel". 11.Scroll down in the "Secure Channel" dialog to the section "Trusted clients". 12.Double-click in the table on the empty row with "". A browse button is displayed in the row. 13.Click this button. 14.Select the client certificate that you have imported. 15.Click the button with the green check mark. 16.Compile the project. 17.Load the configuration onto the S7-1500 CPU. Result The server now trusts the client. If the server certificate is also considered trusted, the server and client can establish a secure connection. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 177 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Accepting client certificates automatically When you select the option "Automatically accept all client certificates during runtime" (below the "Trusted clients" list), the server automatically accepts all client certificates. NOTICE Setting after commissioning In order to avoid security risks, deactivate the "Automatically accept client certificates during runtime" option again after commissioning. Configuring security settings of the server The figure below shows the available server security settings for signing and encrypting messages. Figure 9-13 Configuring security settings of the server Communication 178 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server By default, a server certificate is created that uses SHA256 signing. The following security policies are released: None Insecure end point Note Disabling security policies you do not want If you have selected all security policies (default setting) in the secure channel settings of the S7-1500 OPC UA server - in other words the end point "No Security" - non-secure data traffic (neither signed nor encrypted) between the server and client is also possible. The identity of the client remains unknown with "No security". Each OPC UA client can then connect to the server irrespective of any subsequent security settings. When configuring the OPC UA server, make sure that only security policies that are compatible with the security concept for your machine or plant are selected. All other security policies should be disabled. Recommendation: If possible, use the setting "Basic256Sha256". Basic128Rsa15 -Sign Insecure end point, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 128-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing. Basic128Rsa15 -Sign & Encrypt Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 128-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encrypting. Basic256Rsa15 -Sign Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 256-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing. Basic256Rsa15 -Sign & Encrypt Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 256-bit encryption. This end point protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encrypting. Basic256Sha256 - Sign Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing. Basic256Sha256 - Sign & Encrypt Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encryption. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 179 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server To enable the security setting, click the check box in the relevant line. Note If you use the settings "Basic256Sha256 -Sign" and "Basic256Sha256 -Sign & Encrypt", the OPC UA server and OPC UA clients must use "SHA256"-signed certificates. For the settings "Basic256Sha256 -Sign" and "Basic256Sha256 -Sign & Encrypt", the certificate authority of STEP 7 automatically signs the certificates with "SHA256". "No Security" security policy and authentication via user name and password You can set the following combination: Security policy = "No Security" and authentication via user name and password. The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 supports this combination. OPC UA clients can connect and encrypt the authentication data or not. OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU also supports this combination: However, in runtime it only connects if it can send the authentication data encrypted via cable! 9.3.3.6 Handling of the client certificates of the S7-1500 CPU Where does the client certificate come from? If you are using the OPC UA client of an S7-1500 CPU (OPC UA client enabled), you can create certificates for these clients with STEP 7 V15 and higher as described in the following sections. When you use UA clients from manufacturers or the OPC Foundation, a client certificate is generated automatically during installation or upon the first program call. You have to import these certificates with the global certificate manager in STEP 7 and use them for the respective CPU. When you program an OPC UA client yourself, you can have the certificates generated by the program; see the section "Instance certificate for the client". Alternatively, you can generate certificates with tools, for example with OpenSSL or the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation: The procedure for OpenSSL is described here: "Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself". Working with the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation is described here: "Creating self-signed certificates". Communication 180 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Certificate of the OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU A secure connection between the OPC UA server and an OPC UA client is only established if the server classifies the certificate of the client as trusted. Therefore you have to make the client certificate known to the server. The following sections describe how you can initially generate a certificate for the OPC UA Client of the S7-1500 CPU and then make it available to the Server. 1. Generate and export a certificate for the client For a secure connection you have to generate a client certificate and export the certificate. To do this, follow these steps: 1. In the "Project tree" area, select the CPU you want to use as a client. 2. Double-click "device configuration". 3. In the properties of the CPU click "Protection & Security > Certificate manager". 4. Double-click "" in the "Device certificates" table. STEP 7 opens a dialog. 5. Click "Add". 6. Select the "OPC UA client" entry from the list at the "Usage". Attention: Under "Alternative name of the certificate holder (SAN)" the IP addresses under which the CPU in your system can be accessed has to be entered. You must therefore configure the IP interface of the CPU before you have generate a Client certificate. 7. Click "OK". STEP 7 now lists the client certificate in the "Device certificates" table. 8. Right-click this row and select the "Export certificate" entry from the shortcut menu. 9. Select a directory in which you store the Client certificate. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 181 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 2. Announcing the Client certificate to the server You have to make the Client certificate available to the server to allow a secure connection to be established. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Select the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option in the local certificate manager of the server. This makes the global certificate manager available. You will find this option under "Protection & Security > Certificate manager" in the properties of the CPU that is acting as server. If the project is not yet protected, select "Security settings > Settings" in the STEP 7 project tree, click the "Protect this project" button and log on. The "Global security settings" item is now displayed under "Security settings" in the STEP 7 project tree. 2. Double click "Global security settings". 3. Double click "Certificate manager". STEP 7 opens the global certificate manager. 4. Click on the "Trusted certificates" tab. 5. Right-click in the tab on a free area (not on a certificate). 6. Select the "Import" command from the shortcut menu. The dialog for importing certificates is displayed. 7. Select the client certificate that the server is to trust. 8. Click "Open" to import the certificate. The certificate of the client is now contained in the global certificate manager. Note the ID of the client certificate just imported. 9. Click the "General" tab in the properties of the CPU that is acting as server. 10.Click "OPC UA > Server > Security > Secure Channel". 11.Scroll down in the "Secure Channel" dialog to the section "Trusted clients". 12.Double-click in the table on the empty row with "". A browse button is displayed in the row. 13.Click this button. 14.Select the client certificate that you have imported. 15.Click the button with the green check mark. 16.Compile the project. 17.Load the configuration onto the S7-1500 CPU. Result The server now trusts the client. If the server certificate is also considered trusted, the server and client can establish a secure connection. Communication 182 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.7 Generating server certificates with STEP 7 The description below shows the procedure for generating new certificates with STEP 7 and applies in principle to various uses of the certificates. STEP 7 sets the appropriate purpose in this case "OPC UA Client & Server" - depending on which area of the CPU properties is used to start the following dialog. Recommendation: To use the full functionality for the security of the OPC UA server, use the global security settings. The global security settings are enabled in the CPU properties under "Protection & Security > Certificate manager". Customizing server certificates STEP 7 automatically generates a certificate for the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 when you activate the server (see "Activating the OPC UA server (Page 168)"). In the process STEP 7 uses the default values for the parameters of the certificate. If you want to change the parameters, follow these steps: 1. Click the Browse button under "General > OPC UA > Server > Security > Secure channel > Server certificate" in the properties of the CPU. A dialog is displayed that shows the certificates available locally. 2. Click the "Add" button. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 183 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 3. The dialog for generating new certificates is displayed (figure below). The values for an example are already entered: Figure 9-14 Customizing server certificates 4. Use other parameters if this is necessary in accordance with the security specifications in your company or your customer. Communication 184 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Explanation of fields for certificate generation CA Select whether the certificate is to be self-signed or signed by one of the CA certificates of the TIA Portal. The certificates are described under "Certificates with OPC UA". If you want to generate a certificate that is to be signed by one of the CA certificates of the TIAPortal, the project must be protected and you must be logged in as a user with all the required function rights. Further information can be found under "Basics of user administration in the TIA Portal". Certificate holder The default setting always consists of the name of the project and "\OPCUA-1". In the example, the project name is "PLC1". In the properties of the CPU set the project name under "General > Project information" > Name". Keep the default or enter a different name that is more meaningful for the OPC-UA server under "Certificate holder". Signature Here you select the hash and encryption process that is to be used when signing the server certificate. The following entries are available: - "sha1RSA", - "sha256RSA". Valid from Here you enter the date and time for the beginning of the validity of the server certificate. Valid until Here you enter the date and time for the end of the validity of the server certificate. Ensure that the certificate is valid not only for one year or a few years. In the example the certificate is valid for 30 years. However, for reasons of security you should renew the certificate at much shorter intervals. The long period of validity gives you the opportunity to decide when a suitable moment would be, for example, when the system is being serviced. Usage The default is "OPC UA client & server". Keep this default for the OPC UA server. The "Generate new certificate" dialog can be called from several points in STEP 7. If, for example, you call this dialog for the Web server of the CPU, "Web server" is entered under "Application". The following entries are available in the Usage drop-down list: - "OPC UA client" - "OPC UA client & server" - "OPC UA server" - "TLS" - "Web server" Alternative name of the certificate holder The following is entered in the example above: "URI:urn:SIMATIC.S7-1500.OPCUAServer:PLC1,IP:192.168.178.151,IP:192.168.1.1". The following entry would also be valid: "IP: 192.168.178.151, IP: 192.168.1.1". It is important that the IP addresses over which the OPC UA server of the CPU can be accessed are entered here (see "Access to the OPC UA server (Page 170)"). This allows OPC UA clients to verify whether a connection to the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 is really to be established or whether in fact an attacker is trying to send manipulated values from another PC to the OPC UA client. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 185 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.8 Editing the security settings of the OPC UA server. OPC UA uses secure connections between client and server. OPC UA checks the identity of the communication partners. OPC UA uses certificates in accordance with X.509-V3 from the ITU (International Telecommunication Union) for client and server authentication. Exception: A secure connection is not established with the "No security" security policy. Configuring security settings of the server The figure below shows the available server security settings for signing and encrypting messages. The security policies are named according to the algorithms used. Example: "Basic256Sha256 - Sign & Encrypt" means: Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit encryption. Figure 9-15 Configuring security settings of the server Communication 186 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server By default, a server certificate is created that uses SHA256 signing. The following security policies are released: None Insecure end point Note Disabling security policies you do not want If you have selected all security policies (default setting) in the secure channel settings of the S7-1500 OPC UA server - in other words the end point "No Security" - non-secure data traffic (neither signed nor encrypted) between the server and client is also possible. The identity of the client remains unknown with "No security". Each OPC UA client can then connect to the server irrespective of any subsequent security settings. When configuring the OPC UA server, make sure that only security policies that are compatible with the security concept for your machine or plant are selected. All other security policies should be disabled. Recommendation: If possible, use the setting "Basic256Sha256". Basic128Rsa15 -Sign Insecure end point, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 128-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing. Basic128Rsa15 -Sign & Encrypt Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 128-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encrypting. Basic256Rsa15 -Sign Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 256-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing. Basic256Rsa15 -Sign & Encrypt Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and 256-bit encryption. This end point protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encrypting. Basic256Sha256 - Sign Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing. Basic256Sha256 - Sign & Encrypt Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit encryption. This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encryption. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 187 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server To enable the security setting click the check box in the relevant line. Note If you use the settings "Basic256Sha256 -Sign" and "Basic256Sha256 -Sign & Encrypt", the OPC UA server and OPC UA clients must use "SHA256"-signed certificates. For the settings "Basic256Sha256 -Sign" and "Basic256Sha256 -Sign & Encrypt", the certificate authority of STEP 7 automatically signs the certificates with "SHA256". "No Security" security policy and authentication via user name and password You can set the following combination: Security policy = "No Security" and authentication via user name and password. The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 supports this combination. OPC UA clients can connect and encrypt the authentication data or not. OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU also supports this combination: However, in runtime it only connects if it can send the authentication data encrypted via cable! Communication 188 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.9 User authentication Types of user authentication For the OPC UA server of the S7-1500, you can set what authentication is required for a user of the OPC UA client wishing to access the server. You have the following options: Guest authentication The user does not have to prove their authorization (anonymous access). The OPC UA server does not check the authorization of the client user If you want to use this type of user authentication, select the "Enable guest authentication" option under "OPC UA > Server > Security > User authentication". Note To increase security, you should only allow access to the OPC UA server with user authentication. User name and password authentication The user has to prove their authorization (no anonymous access). The OPC UA server checks whether the client user is authorized to access the server. Authorization is given by the user name and the correct password. If you want to use this type of user authentication, select the "Enable user name and password authentication" option under "OPC UA > Server > Security > User authentication". Deactivate the guest authentication. Enter the user in the "User management" table. To do so, click the "" entry. A new user is created with an automatically assigned name. You can edit the user name and enter the password for the user name. You can add a maximum of 21 users. Additional user administration via the security settings of the project If you select this option, the user management for the open project will also be used for user authentication for the OPC UA server: The same user names and passwords are then valid in OPC UA as in the current project. Proceed as follows to activate user management for the project: - Click "Security settings > Settings" in the project tree. - Click the "Protect this project" button. - Enter your user name and your password. - Enter additional users under "Security settings > Users and roles". If you configure an additional OPC UA server in your project, also select the option "Enable additional user administration via the security settings of the project". Repeated input of user names and passwords is then unnecessary. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 189 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.10 Users and roles with OPC UA function rights The following options for user authentication use central project settings for project users: For the server: For configuration of CPU properties (OPC UA > Server > Security > User authentication). Option: "Enable additional user administration via the security settings of the project" For the client: For configuration of client interface ("Configuration" tab, "Security"). Option: "User (TIA Portal - security settings)" Requirement Before you can edit the security settings, the project must be protected and you must be logged on with sufficient rights, for example as administrator. Settings in the project tree > "Security settings" You access the central user settings and roles in the protected project in the project tree under "Security settings". This is where you centrally define users with user name, password and function rights. You can simply use these settings elsewhere. Reusing central security settings Examples for reusing elsewhere: User selection for user authentication for OPC UA server With this setting, you tell the server which client (user) with which user name and which password is allowed to access the server. User selection for OPC UA client authentication With this setting, you tell the client the user name and password that it is to use for client authentication for the server. The settings for the client and server must correspond: The user name and password used by the client to log on must have been set up on the server and assigned the required authorizations. Communication 190 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Function rights for server and client The corresponding function rights for the client or the server must also be enabled for users of the client function and users of the server function on an S7-1500 CPU. It is not enough simply to save the user name and password centrally. Here is an example to illustrate this type of rights use. 1. Under "Security settings > Users and roles", you define a new role in the "Roles" tab with the name "PLC-opcua-role-all-inclusive", for example. Tip: The tab may be covered by an information window ("The current status has not yet been checked..."). In this case, first close the information window. 2. In the "Categories of function rights" section, you navigate to the runtime rights and then to the CPU function rights, and select the CPU whose function rights you want to set, for example PLC_2. 3. You will find the following function rights in the "Function rights" section: - OPC UA server access This function right apples on the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU. Only when this option is selected does a user of the CPU PLC_2 server who has been assigned the role "PLC-opcua-role-all-inclusive" have the following right: For the establishment of a session with the server, the user requires client authentication with one of the user names and corresponding passwords that have been centrally defined (and loaded to the CPU). - User authentication of the OPC UA client This function right apples on the OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU (with client instructions). Only when this option is selected can the user of the client of CPU PLC_2 who has been assigned the role "PLC-opcua-role-all-inclusive" use the user name and password for authentication to establish a session with a server. 4. The role "PLC-opcua-role-all-inclusive" still needs to be assigned to the relevant users ("Users" tab under "Security settings" in the project tree). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 191 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.3.11 Licenses for the OPC UA server Runtime licenses A license is required to run the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU. The type of license required depends on the performance of the respective CPU. The following license types are differentiated: SIMATIC OPC UA S7-1500 small (required for CPU 1511, CPU 1512, CPU 1513, ET 200SP CPUs, CPU 1515SP PC) SIMATIC OPC UA S7-1500 medium (required for CPU 1515, CPU 1516, Software Controller CPU 1507, CPU 1516pro-2PN) SIMATIC OPC UA S7-1500 large (required for CPU 1517, CPU 1518) The required license type is displayed under "Properties > General > Runtime licenses > OPC-UA > Type of required license": To confirm purchase of the required license, follow these steps: 1. Click "Runtime licenses > OPC UA" in the properties of the CPU. 2. Select the required license from the "Type of purchased license" drop-down list. Communication 192 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.4 Providing methods on the OPC UA server 9.3.4.1 Important facts about server methods Providing user program for server methods On the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU (as of firmware V2.5), you have the option of providing methods via your user program. These methods can be used by OPC UA clients, for example to start a manufacturing job using the method call of the S7-1500 CPU. OPC UA methods, an implementation of "Remote Procedure Calls", provide an efficient mechanism for interactions between different communication nodes. The mechanism provides both job confirmation and feedback values so you no longer have to program handshaking mechanisms. Using OPC UA methods, you can transfer data consistently without trigger bits/handshaking, for example, or trigger specific actions on the controller. How does an OPC UA method work? An OPC UA method in principle operates like a know-how protected function block that is called by an external OPC UA client in runtime. The OPC UA client only "sees" the defined inputs and outputs. The content of the function block, the method or algorithm, remains hidden to the external OPC UA client. The OPC UA client receives feedback on successful execution and values returned by the function block (method), or an error message if execution has not been successful. As the programmer, you have full control over and responsibility for the program context in which the OPC UA method runs. Rules for programming a method and runtime behavior Make sure that the values returned by the OPC UA method are consistent with the input values provided by the OPC UA client. Follow the rules on assigning name and the structure of parameters, and the permitted data types (see description of the OPC UA server instructions). Behavior during runtime: The OPC UA server accepts one call per instance. The method instance is not available for other OPC UA clients until the call has been processed by the user program or has timed out. The basic procedure for implementing a user program as a server method is set out below. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 193 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Implementing a server method A program (function block) for implementing a server method is structured as follows: 1. Querying the server method call with OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre You first call the "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" instruction in your user program (i.e. in your server method). This instruction has the following tasks: - With this instruction you ask the OPC UA server of the CPU whether your server method was called from an OPC UA client. - If the method was called and the server method has input parameters, your server method now receives the input parameters. The input parameters of the server method come from the calling OPC UA client. 2. Editing the server method In this section of the server method, you provide the actual user program. You have the same options as in any other user program (for example, access to other function blocks or global data blocks). If the server method uses input parameters, these parameters are available to you. This section of the server method should only be executed if an OPC UA client has called the server method. After successful execution of the method, you set the output parameters of the server method if the method has output parameters. 3. Responding to server method with OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost To complete the server method, call the "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" instruction. Use the parameters to notify the "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" instruction whether or not the user program has been processed. If the user program has been successfully executed, the OPC UA server is notified via the relevant parameters. The OPC UA server then sends the output parameters of the server method to the OPC UA client. Always call the instructions "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" and "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" as a pair irrespective of whether the user program is processed by both instructions or continued in the next cycle. You will find an example of a server method implementation in the STEP 7 online help. Integrating the server method The diagram below shows how an OPC UA client (A) calls the server method "Cool": The CPU executes the instance "Cool1" of the server method "Cool" in the cyclic user program . The CPU first uses the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" to query whether an OPC UA client has called the server method "Cool" . If the server method has not been called, program execution returns directly to the cyclic user program over and . The CPU resumes the cyclic user program after "Cool1". If the server method has been called, this information is returned to the server method "Cool" over . The actual functionality is now executed in the Cool server method, see"" in the graphic. Communication 194 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server The server method then uses the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" to notify the firmware (B) that the instruction has been executed . The firmware returns this information over to the calling OPC UA client (A). The CPU resumes the cyclic user program after "Cool1". A B C D Call of the server method and management of the "Done" information (method complete) Asynchronous call of the server method Asynchronous "Done" information for the method called (method complete) Wait for OPC UA client calls, management of calls in the queue, forwarding of "Done" information from the cyclic user program to the OPC UA client Data transfer from the OPC UA server to the method instances of the user program and vice versa Check whether method has been called. If it has, forwarding of input data from the OPC UA server to the method instance of the user program and feedback to the method instance that the method has been called ("called") Synchronous call of the instruction OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre as a multi-instance stating the storage area for the input data from the OPC UA server. The return value indicates whether or not the method has been called by the OPC UA client. Check whether the method has been completed or is still active ("busy"). Check whether the method has been completed. If it has, the output data of the method instance is forwarded to the OPC UA server and the method instance is notified that the method has been completed. The OPC UA server is notified. Call of the method FB (in this case: FB Cool) with the required instance and the process parameters Information about server instructions The "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" and "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" are described in detail in the help to the Instructions > Communication > OPC UA > OPC UA server. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 195 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.4.2 Boundary conditions for using server methods Permitted data types If you provide server methods, observe the following rule: Assign the data types as shown below (SIMATIC data type - OPC UA data type). Other assignments are not permitted. STEP 7 does not check the observance of this rule and does not prevent an incorrect assignment. You are responsible for the rule-compliant selection and assignment of the data types. You can also use the listed data types, for example, as elements of structures/UDTs for input and output parameters of self-created server methods (UAMethod_InParameters and UAMethod_OutParameters). SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type BOOL Boolean SINT SByte INT Int16 DINT Int32 LINT Int64 USINT Byte UINT UInt16 UDINT UInt32 ULINT UInt64 REAL Float LREAL Double LDT DateTime WSTRING String DINT Enumeration (Encoding Int32) and all derived data types User-defined data type required (UDT, user-defined data type) UNION and all derived data types The user-defined data type must be created with the prefix "Union_", for example "Union_MyDatatype". The first element (Selector) in this UDT must have the data type "UDINT". Communication 196 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Number of implementable server methods and number of arguments If you implement server methods via your user program, the number of usable methods is limited depending on the CPU type, see the following table. Technical specification value CPU 1510SP (F) CPU 1511 (C/F/T/TF) CPU 1512C CPU 1512SP (F) CPU 1513 (F) CPU 1505 (S/SP/SP F/SP T/SP TF) CPU 1507S (F) CPU 1515 (F/T/TF) CPU 1518 (F) CPU 1515 SP PC (F/T/TF) CPU 1517 (F/T/TF) CPU 1516 (F/T/TF) Maximum number of usable 20 server methods or max. number of server method instances (OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre, OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost instructions) 50 100 Maximum number of arguments per method 20 20 20 (More than the specified number of arguments can be configured and loaded into the CPU, but an OPC UA client cannot call the method). Error message when exceeded If the maximum number of server methods is exceeded, the OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre or OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost instructions report the error code 0xB080_B000 (TooManyMethods). Supply of structured data types with nested arrays If a structured data type (Struct/UDT) contains an array, the OPC UA server does not provide information about the length of this array. If you use such a structure as the input or output parameter of a server method, for example, you must ensure that the nested array is supplied with the correct length when the method is called. If you do not adhere to this rule, the method fails with the error code "BadInvalidArgument". Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 197 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.5 OPC UA server interface configuration 9.3.5.1 What is a server interface? Definition A server interface combines related nodes of an OPC UA address space of a CPU into a unit, so that a specific view of this CPU is provided for OPC UA clients. 1st example: A CPU controls an injection molding machine. In this example, a server interface contains all OPC UA nodes of the CPU, which you can read with an OPC UA client, to get information about this injection molding machine (from readable PLC tags), which you can write with an OPC UA client write, to transfer values to the injection molding machine (in writable PLC tags), which you can call with an OPC UA client to start injection molding machine functions (via server methods). This server interface allows a view of a CPU which can be used to control an injection molding machine. For injection molding machines, the companion specification "Euromap" defines a whole series of OPC UA nodes that you can combine in a server interface. Other OPC UA nodes of the CPU are not included in this view. This provides a better overview. The section "Create server interface (Page 199)" shows how to create a server interface and add related OPC UA nodes to this server interface. The "Euromap77" serves as an example for related OPC UA nodes. 2nd example Plant-specific or customer-specific tasks You can also define a server interface which, for example, meets the requirements in a customer-specific project. Specify all required OPC UA nodes in an XML file. Use a tool for this purpose, for example the free program "SiOME" from Siemens; you can find the explanations and download link here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755133). Communication 198 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.5.2 Create a server interface Create server interfaces To create an Server interface, follow these steps: 1. Select the project view in the TIA Portal. 2. Select the CPU that you want to use as an OPC UA server. 3. Click "OPC UA communication > Server interfaces". 4. Double-click "Add new server interface". STEP 7 creates a new server interface, names it "Server interface_1" and opens the editor for server interfaces. 5. Change the name of the new server interface so that it is descriptive in your project. 6. Click the "Import companion specification" button in the top right of the Server Interfaces view. STEP 7 displays the "Import" dialog. 7. Select an XML file which contains an instance (or multiple instances) of a companion specification. The "Using OPC UA companion specification (Page 202)" section describes how to create such an XML file. STEP 7 imports the XML file and displays the new server interface in the editor. The following figure shows a section of a server interface which uses an instance of the "Euromap" companion specification: Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 199 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Information on the server interface The editor for server interfaces is structured as table and provides a range of information about the imported node set file (OPC UA-XML file). The tables provides the following information: Name of the node The top node is named "IMM_manufacturer_01234" in the example. This name stands for the injection molding machine as a whole. It is the name of the instance of the "Euromap" companion specification that is used here. According to the companion specification, the instance name should begin with "IMM", followed by the name of the manufacturer of the injection molding machine; the serial number of the machine is added to the end. This allows a unique identification of the machine. The name of this node is assigned by the user. The names of all other (lower-level) nodes are defined by the specification (in the example above by the "Euromap" companion specification). These node names must not be changed by the user. This ensures a uniform view of all injection molding machines, which complies with the specification. Node type Type of the node. The type is specified by the companion specification that is used. STEP 7 shows a node type in red in the table when the imported XML file contains no type definition. In this case, you can find the referenced but missing namespaces in the properties of the server interface under "Namespaces". Import the referenced XML files that contain the missing namespaces (and all data types defined in them) into a server interface to be created. Access level Nodes (tags) can only be readable (RD) or readable and writeable (RD/WR). The server methods of a specification can always be called. If they were not callable, they would not have been included in the specification. Description The imported XML file may contain descriptions of the nodes in several languages. If you have imported such a file, STEP 7 displays the description in the project language. If no description is available in the XML file in the project language, then the English description is displayed. Communication 200 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Local data STEP 7 displays the data block which is assigned to the node in the CPU (mapping). The CPU reads the value of the OPC UA node from this data block. The OPC UA server then makes this value available for OPC UA clients. If a data block is displayed in red, then the specified data block is not available in the CPU. In this case you have to create the missing data block in the CPU (of user program) and supply it with a value. Alternative: Change the mapping of the OPC UA node to a local data block (or to a tag of a tag table of your user program) in the XML file. The "Using OPC UA companion specification (Page 202)" section describes how to change mapping. Data type This is the data type of the data block in the CPU, from which the value of an OPC UA node is read, or to which a value is written. Consistency check You have the option of checking the server interface. STEP 7 hereby checks whether the nodes (e.g. tags) are mapped correctly in the imported node set file (OPC UA XML file). 1. Select the nodes that you want to check. 2. Click "Consistency check". The consistency check checks the mapping of the local data against the displayed server interface: - Do the names of the PLC tags in the CPU program correspond to those of the imported server interface? - Do the data types of the PLC tags correspond to the corresponding nodes in the server interface? STEP 7 displays corresponding warnings and errors if the above conditions are not met. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 201 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.5.3 Using OPC UA companion specifications Introduction OPC UA is universally applicable: The standard itself does not, for example, specify how PLC tags are to be named. It is also up to the individual user (application developer) to program and name server methods that can be called over OPC UA. Information modeling and standardization for devices and sectors For applications of the same kind, it is worth standardizing your device or machine interface with the "OPC UA toolkit". Many different bodies and working groups have driven forward standardization and developed a range of companion specifications. These specifications define: The objects, methods and tags with which a typical device or machine is to be described. The namespace intended for the specified objects. Machines are typically structured in functional or technological units, and these units are then standardized. Companion specifications offer machine and plant operators the benefits of a standardized interface. For example, all RFID readers that comply with the AutoID specifications can be integrated in the same way. This means that all RFID readers that comply with the AutoID specifications can be addressed by OPC UA clients in the same way irrespective of manufacturer. Another example of companion specifications is the Euromap 77 Companion Specifications from the injection molding machinery sector. The following section uses the example of Euromap 77 to detail how to apply companion specifications in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and create the necessary PLC tags. Example: Euromap 77 Euromap 77 standardizes the exchange of data between injection molding machines and the higher-level MES (manufacturing execution system). This allows the MES to connect all lower-level injection molding machines in the same way. The standardized data interface facilitates the integration of injection molding machines into a plant. Communication 202 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Using companion specifications: Overview Euromap 77 is described in the OPC UA XML file "Opc_Ua.EUROMAP77.NodeSet2.xml". Note Euromap 77, Euromap 83 and OPC UA for Devices (DI) With Release Candidate 2, some of the Euromap definitions have been transferred from Euromap 77 to Euromap 83. You will therefore also need to import the OPC UA server interface of Euromap 83. "OPC UA for Devices" is a generally applicable information model for the configuration of hardware and software components. The information model also serves as the basis for other companion standards and is therefore also imported. The OPC UA XML files are available here: Euromap77 (http://www.euromap.org/euromap77) Euromap83 (http://www.euromap.org/euromap83) OPC UA for Devices (https://opcfoundation.org/UA/schemas/DI/) The Euromap OPC UA XML files define the interface of the OPC UA server of an injection molding machine that complies with the Euromap 77 companion standard. Proceed as follows to model the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU in accordance with the Euromap 77 standard: 1. Generate an XML file by creating an instance of the type "IMM_MES_InterfaceType". "IMM_MES_InterfaceType" is the highest-level node in Euromap 77: This data type is directly derived from the OPC UA data type BaseObjectType". All Euromap 77 (83) tags and methods are defined under "IMM_MES_InterfaceType". "Step 1" sets out the procedure in detail. 2. Assign PLC tags and FB instances (server methods) from your S7-1500 CPU to the tags and methods of Euromap 77 (the Euromap 77 information model). "Step 2" sets out the procedure in detail. 3. Import the XML file as "Server interface". "Step 3" sets out the procedure in detail. Compile the STEP 7 project. Download the project to the CPU that acts as the controller for an injection molding machine. 4. In your STEP 7 project, create the PLC tags and server methods to which you have assigned Euromap 77 tags and methods under 2. The PLC tags must have compatible data types; see "Mapping data types". Enable read and write access to these PLC tags for OPC UA clients in accordance with Euromap 77. Save the PLC tags in a data block, for example. "Step 4" sets out the procedure in detail. Result: The Euromap 77 tags and server methods are available for OPC UA clients in the address space of the OPC UA server of your CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 203 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Step 1: Creating an instance The following section describes how to use the free program "SiOME", the "Siemens OPC UA Modelling Editor". With SiOME, you can create an OPC UA XML file, which describes the server interface (an information model). To load and publish the new interface into the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU, import the server interface into the STEP 7 project, see section "Create server interface (Page 199)". When the project is loaded into the CPU, the new server interface is available for OPC UA clients. Other tools for designing information models You can also work with other tools to design information models to create a server interface, such as the program "UaModeler" from Unified Automation. You can download the "UaModeler" program from here (https://www.unified-automation.com/downloads/opc-uadevelopment.html). The tools for designing information models are constantly being honed and improved. You should therefore always use the documentation provided by the manufacturer. SiOME With the help of SiOME (Siemens OPC UA Modeling Editor), a tool for implementing OPC UA companion specifications, you can design information models / address spaces for your OPC UA server and can create new types and instances of OPC UA nodes. You can also use SiOME to map UA tags to PLC tags and UA methods to PLC function blocks (instances). Download link and explanations about SIOME are available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755133). Proceed as follows to create an XML file with an instance of "IMM_MES_InterfaceType": 1. Download the files "Opc_Ua.EUROMAP77.NodeSet2.xml" and "Opc_Ua_EUROMAP83_NodeSet2.xml" from the Euromap website (see above). 2. Download the file "Opc.Ua.Di.NodeSet2.xml" from the OPC Foundation website. Euromap77/83 is an OPC UA Companion specification, this means that it is based on OPC UA and uses data types defined in the file "Opc.Ua.Di.NodeSet2.xml". 3. Start SiOME. Communication 204 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 4. First, import the namespace "http://opcfoundation.org/UA/DI/". To do so, click the ""Import XML" button in the "Information model" area. Select the file "OPCUaDiNodeSet2 "xml" and click "Open" to import the file. SiOME imports the XML file and shows the namespace "http://opcfoundation.org/UA/DI/" in the "Namespaces" area. The standard namespace "http://opfoundation.org/UA/" is always available in SiOME and does not have to be imported. 5. Now import the namespace "http://www.euromap.org/euromap83/" To do so, click the ""Import XML" button in the "Information model" area. Select the file "Opc_Ua.EUROMAP83.NodeSet2.xml". SiOME imports the XML file and shows the namespace "http://www.euromap.org/euromap83/" in the "Namespaces" area. 6. Now import the namespace "http://www.euromap.org/euromap77/" To do so, click the ""Import XML" button again in the "Information model" area. Select the file "Opc_Ua.EUROMAP77.NodeSet2.xml". 7. Defining your own namespace and creating an instance So far, you have imported Euromap77. Now use the companion specification for an injection molding machine, i.e. you create an instance of Euromap77 (a usage). In the "Namespaces" area, right-click "Models" and select "Add Model". SiOME opens the "Add Model" dialog. 8. Click "New Model", to create a new model. SiOME now shows in green the switch in front "New Model": Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 205 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9. Add your own namespace to the XML file. Use a unique name for this purpose. In the example, enter "YourCompany.com": 10.Create new sequence Now create now a new instance of Euromap77. This allows you to use the Euromap77 for an injection molding machine. Right-click on "Objects" in the "Information model" area. SiOME shows a shortcut menu. 11.Click "Add Instance" to add a new instance. SiOME displays the "Add Instance" dialog. At "Name" insert a descriptive name for your instance, i.e. for the machine you are using for Euromap77. In the example, enter "IMM_Manufacturer_01234". For "TypeDefinition", select "IMM_MES_InterfaceType". Click "OK". SiOME shows the new instance in the "Information model" area under "Objects": Communication 206 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 12.Click the black arrow in front of "IMM_Manufacturer_01234", to open the instance: 13.Now create a new instance for "InjectionUnits". Right-click "InjectionUnits". SiOME displays the "Add Instance" dialog. At "Name", insert a descriptive name for your instance. In the example, enter "InjectionUnit_1. For "TypeDefinition", select "InjectionUnitType". Click "OK". 14.Now create a new instance each for "Molds" and "PowerUnits", as described above for "InjectionUnits". 15.Now save the XML file. Export the file for this purpose. Click the ""Export XML" button in the "Information model" area. SiOME shows the "Export XML" dialog. 16.Leave the "Include mappings" option unselected, because the file still contains no mappings (UAtags on PLC tags, UAmethods on server methods of the CPU). The imported namespaces are required for Euromap77. Therefore, SiOME displays these in grey. Click "OK". SiOME shows a dialog. 17.Select a descriptive name for the XML file and save the file. Result: You have now created an XML file containing the companion specification "Euromap77" and the instances you added. Euromap77 is used for this purpose. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 207 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Step 2: Assigning PLC tags The description below uses the example of a tag to show how you assign specific PLC tags and server methods to the tags and methods of Euromap 77. The easy way We recommend using the SiOME tool here as well. You have to enable mapping in SiOME for this purpose: In the "TIA Portal" area, select the data blocks whose tags you want to assign ("map") to the OPC UA tags of the information model. The tags from the TIA Portal project can easily be connected to the OPC UA tags using drag-and-drop. To link methods, you must use drag-and-drop to link the instance data blocks of the corresponding TIA Portal function blocks to the methods of the information model. When exporting, select the "Include mappings" option, since the information model for an OPC UA server is required here. This option is not required if you need the information model for an OPC UA client. A detailed description can be found in the online support application example (OPC UA for Devices (https://opcfoundation.org/UA/schemas/DI/)). Communication 208 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Assigning PLC tags manually If you do not assign the data with SiOME, proceed as follows: 1. Use an editor to open the file "demo.xml" that you created in "Step 1". In the XML file, search for the UA tag with NodeId="ns=1;s=MyIMM_MES_Interface.InjectionUnits.NodeVersion". These tags are assigned a PLC tag in the next step. 2. To assign this OPC UA tag a PLC tag, add an extension to the XML element of the OPC UA tag. In turn, you then add an element of the type "" to this extension: 3. The XML element "" is defined in the XML namespace "http://www.siemens.com/OPCUA/2017/SimaticNodeSetExtensions". You therefore need to assign this namespace to the XML element "", for example in a one-off operation with the following code line at the start of the XML file: If you do not add the namespace, the element "" will not be known in the file. 4. Save the "demo.xml" file and close the editor. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 209 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Useful information: Assigning PLC methods As well as assigning tags, you can also assign methods to an FB instance (user program or function block as representation of the method). To assign an OPC UA method to an FB instance, you also need to add an extension to the OPC UA XML file following the procedure outlined below. Please note that the suffix ".Method" without quotation marks must be added to the instance name. You add an element of the type to the extension: The properties of an OPC UA method with the BrowseName "InputArguments" and "OutputArguments" are OPC UA tags and are not assigned. Step 3: Importing server interfaces Proceed as follows to import an OPC UA XML file as "Server interface": 1. Open the STEP 7 project. 2. Click "OPC UA communication > Server interfaces". 3. Double-click on "Import server interface". 4. In the "Import" dialog, select the file that you want to import as server interface. In the example, this is the file "demo.xml". 5. Click the "Import" button. 6. Also import the files "Opc.Ua.Di.NodeSet2.xml", "Opc_Ua.EUROMAP77.NodeSet2.xml" and "Opc_Ua.EUROMAP83.NodeSet2.xml". The "demo.xml" file relates to the files just specified. Always use the latest versions of these files as STEP 7 does not compile OPC UA XML files with errors. The above image of the machine generated in accordance with Euromap 77 specifications is now available in the address space of the OPC UA server. Communication 210 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Step 4: Creating PLC tags and server methods in the STEP 7 project In the example, you have assigned the PLC tag "MyIMM_MES_Interface"."InjectionUnits.NodeVersion" to the UA tag with NodeId="ns=1;s=MyIMM_MES_Interface.InjectionUnits.NodeVersion"; see "Step 2: Assigning PLC tags". Proceed as follows to create the required PLC tag with STEP 7 (TIA Portal): 1. Generate a "MyIMM_MES_Interface" data block. 2. Generate the DB element "InjectionUnits.NodeVersion". Use the SIMATIC data type compatible with the OPC UA data type. The UA tag in the example has the OPC UA data type "String" (DataType="String"). The compatible SIMATIC data type is WSTRING. 3. Compile the project. 4. Download the project to the CPU. Importing exported OPC UA XML files to an S7-1500 CPU Please note the following information when importing server interfaces that come from the OPC UA XML export of an S7-1500. Note Import blocked for namespace "http://www.siemens.com/simatic-s7-opcua" You cannot import server interfaces with the namespace "http://www.siemens.com/simatics7-opcua" to an S7-1500 CPU because this namespace is reserved for S7-1500 CPUs (standard SIMATIC server interface) and is not available for imports. If you want to import a server interface with the namespace "http://www.siemens.com/simatic-s7-opcua", open the server interface to be imported (OPC UA XML file) and change the namespace in the relevant places. The file thus changed can then be imported. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 211 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Integrity of the OPC UA XML files OPC UA XML files represent the server address space. These files are, for example, imported by you in the context of OPC UA Companion specifications as a server interface after adaptation to the application, loaded with the hardware configuration into the S7-1500 CPU and tested. WARNING No checking of imported OPC UA XML files Protect these OPC UA XML files against unauthorized manipulation since STEP 7 does not check the integrity of these files. Recommendation To minimize risks in the case of an extension or adaptation of the server address space, follow these steps: 1. Protect the project (project navigation: Security settings > Settings). 2. Export the corresponding server interface before the extension or adaptation. 3. Revise this OPC UA XML file. 4. Import the file again as a server interface. Mapping data types The table below shows the compatible SIMATIC data type for each OPC UA data type. Assign the data types as shown below (SIMATIC data type - OPC UA data type). Other assignments are not permitted. STEP 7 does not check the observance of this rule and does not prevent an incorrect assignment. You are responsible for the rule-compliant selection and assignment of the data types. You can also use the listed data types, for example, as elements of structures/UDTs for input and output parameters of self-created server methods (UAMethod_InParameters and UAMethod_OutParameters). Table 9- 2 Mapping of data types SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type BOOL Boolean SINT SByte INT Int16 DINT Int32 LINT Int64 USINT Byte UINT UInt16 UDINT UInt32 ULINT UInt64 Communication 212 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type REAL Float LREAL Double LDT DateTime WSTRING String DINT Enumeration (Encoding Int32) and all derived data types User-defined data type required (UDT, user-defined data type) UNION and all derived data types The user-defined data type must be created with the prefix "Union_", for example "Union_MyDatatype"; see example below the table. The first element (Selector) in this UDT must have the data type "UDINT". User-defined data type for UNION required The figure below shows the tag "MyVariable", which has the data type "Union_MyDatatype". This SIMATIC data type corresponds to an OPC UA tag with the data type UNION. The figure shows an example of the declaration: When Selector = 1, Union accepts one ByteString; when Selector = 2, Union accepts one WString. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 213 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Using other OPC UA basic data types Apart from the OPC UA data types listed in the section "Mapping of data types" and their correspondences on the SIMATIC side, there are the following OPC UA basic data types which you can also use: OpcUa_NodeId OpcUa_QualifiedName OpcUa_Guid OpcUa_LocalizedText OpcUa_ByteString OpcUa_XmlElement Requirement for the use of the basic data types listed above as variables in the application program: The basic data types have to exist as complex data types that are structured exactly like the corresponding OPC UA basic data types. OpcUa_NodeId and OpcUa_QualifiedName exist as system data types; that's why you can use these data types not only for single variables but also as elements of a structure. For the remaining basic data types, you have to create a PLC data type in accordance with the OPC UA specification and subsequently use it as an element in a structure so that the data types of the elements can be resolved. What each PLC data type must look like is described below for every single basic data type. "EUInformation" is an example of a data structure in which, for example, the UDT "LocalizedText" is used. EUInformation contains information on EngineeringUnits. You can find an example of the implementation of the EUInformation data structure at the end of the PLC data type descriptions. System data type "OPC_UA_NodeId" For the OPC UA basic data type "OpcUa_NodeId", please refer to the following table for the meaning of the parameters. Use OPC_UA_NodeId for the identification of a node in the OPC UA server. Parameter S7 data type NamespaceIndex UINT Meaning Namespace index of the node in the OPC UA server. A node can, for example, be a tag. Identifier IdentifierType WSTRING[254] UDINT The designation of the node (object or tag) depends on the identifier type: * Numeric identifier: The node is labeled with a number, for example "12345678". * String identifier: The node is labeled with a name, for example "MyTag". No distinction is made between upper and lower case. Type of identifier * 0: Numeric identifier * 1: String identifier * 2: GUID * 3: Opaque Communication 214 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server System data type "OPC_UA_QualifiedName" See the following table for the structure of the system data type "OPC_UA_QualifiedName": Name S7 data type Meaning NamespaceIndex UINT The namespace index of the name. Name WSTRING[64] Name of the node or tag. UDT "Guid" For the basic data type "Guid", create the following PLC data type. The default values used as examples can also be set differently. UDT "LocalizedText" For the basic data type "LocalizedText", create the following PLC data type: The EncodingByte indicates which fields (Locale or Text) are available: EncodingByte Meaning 0 The fields Locale and Text are empty 1 The field Locale has content, the field Text is empty 2 The field Locale is empty, the field Text has content 3 The fields Locale and Text have content Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 215 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server UDT "ByteString" For the basic data type "ByteString", create the following PLC data type; in this case, for example, a ByteString array with 12 elements: UDT "XmlElement" An XmlElement is a serialized XML fragment (UTF-8 string) For the basic data type "XmlElement", create the following PLC data type: Example: Structure of EUInformation with UDT "LocalizedText" Communication 216 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server MinimumSamplingInterval attribute of tags In addition to "Value", "DataType" and "AccessLevel", you can also set the "MinimumSamplingInterval" attribute for a tag in the XML file that represents the server address space. The attribute specifies how fast the server can sample the tag value. The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU handles the values for MinimumSamplingInterval as follows: Negative values and values greater than 4294967 are set to -1 (meaning: Default setting of the server should be used for the sampling interval for sampling. This is defined by the publishing interval of the subscription, see OPC UA specification part 4). Decimal numbers are rounded to three decimal places. 9.3.5.4 Missing namespaces Introduction A node set file (OPC UA XML file) may contain references to other OPC UA XML files that provide type definitions in other namespaces. You must import all required definitions for the information model in order for the server interface to work properly. Example for list of namespaces (NamespaceUris) in an OPC UA XML file Importing additional namespaces If namespaces are still missing after the import of an OPC UA XML file, STEP 7 generates an error message. In this case, import the OPC UA XML files with the missing namespaces into a new server interface. You must create a new server interface, otherwise the additional imported XML file would overwrite the current companion specification (the current information model). The missing namespaces are displayed in red in the properties of the server interface. After importing the XML files, you must click the "Refresh interface" button to refresh the view. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 217 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.5.5 Coordinating write and read rights for CPU tags Definition of write and read rights in the information model (OPC UA XML) In the OPC UA information model, the attribute "AccessLevel" regulates access to tags. AccessLevel is defined bit by bit: Bit 0 = CurrentRead and Bit 1 = CurrentWrite. The meaning of the bit combinations is as follows: AccessLevel = 0: no access AccessLevel = 1: read only AccessLevel = 2: write only AccessLevel = 3: read+write Example of the assignment of write and read rights (read+write) Definition of write and read rights in STEP 7 When you define tags, you specify the access rights using the properties "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" and "Writable from HMI/OPC UA". Example of the assignment of write and read rights Interaction between write and read rights If you have imported an OPC UA server interface and AccessLevel attributes are set in this OPC UA XML file, the write and read rights are defined by the following rule: The least extensive access rights for each setting apply. Example AccessLevel = 1 (read only) in the OPC UA server interface Both "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" and "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" are selected in the PLC tag table Result: The tag is only read. Communication 218 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Rules If write rights are required: AccessLevel = 2 oder 3 "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" enabled If read rights are required: AccessLevel = 1 (AccessLevel 3 is also possible, but misleading. The settings suggests that an OPC UA client has write and read rights) "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" enabled, "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" disabled If neither read nor write rights are to be granted (no access): AccessLevel = 0 "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" disabled Only one of the two conditions needs to be met to block all access. In this case, review whether the tag in the OPC UA server interface is actually necessary at all. Access table "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" must be set if access over OPC UA is to be possible at all. "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" must be set to allow an OPC UA client to write a tag / DB element. Please see the table for the resulting access right. Table 9- 3 Access table OPC UA XML STEP 7 (TIA Portal), for example tag table AccessLevel Accessible from HMI/OPC UA Writable from HMI/OPC Resulting access right UA 0 x x No access x 0 x No access 1 Enabled x Read only 2 Enabled Disabled No access 3 Enabled Disabled Read only 2 Enabled Enabled Write only 3 Enabled Enabled Read+write (x = don't care) Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 219 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.5.6 Consistency of CPU tags "AccessLevelEx" attribute extends access properties As of firmware version V2.6, the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU supports not only the attribute "AccessLevel" (see Coordinating write and read rights for CPU tags (Page 218)) but also the attribute "AccessLevelEx" which, in addition to the already explained bits for read access and write access, provides information on the consistency of a OPC UA tag. The new attribute was introduced with version V1.04 of the OPC UA specification (Part 3, Address Space Model). Reading consistency properties In the OPC UA information model of the OPC UA server, the attribute "AccessLevel" defines the access. AccessLevelEx is defined bit by bit; in this case, the relevant bits are: Bit 0 = CurrentRead Bit 1 = CurrentWrite Bits 2 to 7 are not relevant for the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU The meaning of the bit combinations is explained in the section on read and write rights. The following bits for consistency are also added: Bit 8 = NonatomicRead; the bit is set if the tag cannot be read consistently. For read consistency of tags, bit 8=0. Bit 9 = NonatomicWrite; is set if the tag cannot be written consistently. For write consistency of tags, or if no write access is granted, bit 9=0. Examples An OPC UA tag (structure) is readable and writable; but inconsistent for reading and writing access. Consequently: Bits 0, 1, 8 and 9 are set: AccessLevelEx = "771" (1+2+256+512). Another structure is read-only. Consequently: Bits 0 and 8 are set, bit 1 and bit 9 are not set: AccessLevelEx = "257" (1+0+256+0). Communication 220 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server Handling of the attribute in the server The "AccessLevelEx" attribute is only available in the OPC UA server. The attribute is not present in a node set file (XML export file). However, the attribute "AccessLevel", which is exported, includes the information from "AccessLevelEx", see next section. Export With XML export of the standard Simatic server interface, the server sets the attribute "AccessLevel", which was extended to 32 Bit Advanced in V1.04 compared to V1.03, to the value of attribute "AccessLevelEx". Import When importing a node set file (e.g. from an export of a server interface), the S7-1500 CPU sets the attribute "AccessLevelEx" according to its own estimate of the consistency of the imported data type, see next section. The imported value is ignored. Consistency of data types at the server interface The consistency of tags ("atomicity" in the language usage of OPC UA) within a program cycle of an S7-1500 CPU is ensured at the nodes of the server interface for the following data types: BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD SINT, INT, LINT, DINT, USINT, UINT, ULINT, UDINT REAL, LREAL DATE, LDT, TIME, LTIME, TIME_OF_DAY, LTIME_OF_DAY, S5TIME CHAR, WCHAR System data types and hardware data types that are based on the above-mentioned data types are also consistent. Example: HW_ANY, derived from UINT (UInt16). Tip: If you browse in the address space of the S7-1500 CPU (e.g. with the OPC UA Client UaExpert), you can find the consistent data types under Types > BaseDataType > Enumeration/Number/String. Tags of the following data types are not consistent ("nonatomic" in the language usage of OPC UA): SIMATIC structures are generally not consistent. This means that all tags which, for example, have unknown structures or a UDT data type are not consistent. System data types such as DTL, IEC_Counter, IEC_TIMER, etc. are data types that are derived from structures. Tip: If you browse in the address space of the S7-1500 CPU (e.g. with the OPC UA Client UaExpert), you can find data types based on structures under Types > BaseDataType > Structure. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 221 OPC UA communication 9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server 9.3.5.7 Notes on configuration limits when using server interfaces When you use OPC UA server interfaces, you must comply with limits for the following objects in line with the S7-1500 CPU performance class: Number of server interfaces Number of OPC UA nodes Load object data volume If you have implemented methods: Number of server methods or server method instances Configuration limits for OPC UA server interfaces and methods The table below sets out the configuration limits for S7-1500 CPUs; these must also be taken into account when you compile and load a configuration. A violation of configuration limits results in an error message. Table 9- 4 Configuration limits for OPC UA server interfaces Technical specification value CPU 1510SP (F) CPU 1511 (C/F/T/TF) CPU 1512C CPU 1512SP (F) CPU 1513 (F) CPU 1505 (S/SP/SP F/SP T/SP TF) CPU 1507S (F) CPU 1515 (F/T/TF) CPU 1518 (F) CPU 1515 SP PC (F/T/TF) CPU 1517 (F/T/TF) CPU 1516 (F/T/TF) Use of imported companion specifications (information models) * Maximum number of OPC UA server interfaces 10 10 10 * Maximum number of OPC UA nodes in user-defined server interfaces 1000 5000 30000 * Maximum size of loadable OPC UA server interfaces 1024 KB 5120 KB 15360 KB 50 100 Provision of methods Maximum number of usable 20 server methods or max. number of server method instances (instructions OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre, OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost) Communication 222 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.1 Overview and requirements With STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Version 15.1 and higher, you can configure and program an OPC UA client that can read PLC tags in an OPC UA server. Furthermore it is possible to transfer new values for PLC tags to an OPC UA server. In addition, you can call methods that an OPC UA server provides in your user program. You use the new instructions for OPC UA clients for this purpose in your user program. The instructions of the OPC UA client are based on the standard "PLCopen OPC UA Client for IEC61131-3". PLCopen companion specification With these standardized instructions, you can use OPC UA client functions in your user program that can be executed in an S7-1500 CPU. In addition, it is possible with just a few adaptations to run this user program in controllers of other manufacturers if these manufacturers also implemented the OPC UA Companion Specification "PLCopen OPC UA client for IEC61131-3". Convenient editors in STEP 7 For the parameter assignment of the instructions for OPC UA clients, a convenient editor is available in the TIA Portal - the connection parameter assignment (Page 245). As of Version 15.1, STEP 7 also features an editor for client interfaces (Page 228). This section describes how you work with these editors. First, you will be shown how to create and configure a new interface with the interface editor, because you need this type of interface for the subsequent connection parameter assignment. The description uses an example for better comprehensibility, see Description of the example (Page 227). Requirement To use the client of the S7-1500 CPU, you must enable it: 1. Select the area "OPC UA > Client" in the properties of the CPU. 2. Select the "Enable OPC UA client" option. If you do not enable the client, the connection is not established. You receive a corresponding error message at the instructions, for example "OPC_UA_Connect". Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 223 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Overview To use the editor and the connection parameter assignment, follow these steps: 1. First, specify a client interface. Add to the interface the PLC tags and PLC methods that you want to access ("First step (Page 228)"). 2. Next, configure the connection to the OPC UA server (Second step (Page 245)). 3. Finally, use the configured connection for the OPC UA client instructions (Third step (Page 253)). 9.4.2 Useful information about the client instructions With the standardized OPC UA client instructions you are able to control communication for the following tasks with the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client: Read/write tags of the OPC UA server Call methods in the OPC UA server Optional instructions can be used to determine the status of the connection between the OPC UA client and OPC UA server or to determine nodes along a know hierarchy. Standardized sequence of OPC UA communication The sequence of the communication, and thus the order of the instructions, follows a pattern that is illustrated in the following. Run sequence for a read or write operation Instructions for preparation of read and write operations Read and write instructions Instructions for "clean-up" after a completed read or write operation Communication 224 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Run sequence for a method call in the OPC UA server Instructions for preparation of method calls Method calls Instructions for "clean-up" after completed method calls Optional instructions for reading out the status of a connection between the OPC UA client and OPC UA server and for reading out complete paths from the OPC UA server. Instructions for preparation of read and write operations with inserted instruction for requesting, for example, the NodeIDs of nodes of the OPC UA server. You can determine the connection status between the establishment and termination of the connection in parallel with other instructions. Instructions for "clean-up" Convenient editors in STEP 7 The OPC UA client instructions are described in detail in the reference part (STEP 7 information system). For parameter assignment of the instructions, a convenient editor is available in the TIA Portal - the connection parameter assignment (Page 245). We recommend starting with the connection parameter assignment for the first program draft and using additional instructions and manually optimizing the program as required. Information about the client instructions The client instructions are described in detail in the help to the Instructions > Communication > OPC UA > OPC UA client. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 225 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.3 Number of client instructions that can be used simultaneously SIMATIC error codes for OPC UA client instructions The following limits apply to the simultaneous use of OPC UA client instructions: Table 9- 5 Quantity structures for OPC UA client instructions OPC UA instruction Maximum number for Maximum number for Maximum number for CPU 1510SP (F) CPU 1505 (S/SP/SP F/SP T/SP TF) CPU 1507S (F) CPU 1515 (F/T/TF) CPU 1518 (F) CPU 1511 (C/F/T/TF) CPU 1512C CPU 1512SP (F) CPU 1515 SP PC (F/T/TF) CPU 1517 (F/T/TF) CPU 1513 (F) CPU 1516 (F/T/TF) 4 10 OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList 4 10 40 OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList 4 10 40 OPC_UA_MethodGetHandleList 4 10 40 OPC_UA_TranslatePathList 4 10 40 OPC_UA_ReadList 20 in total (max. 5 per connection, see OPC_UA_Connect) 50 in total (max. 5 per connection, see OPC_UA_Connect) 200 in total (max. 5 per connection, see OPC_UA_Connect) OPC_UA_WriteList 20 50 200 OPC_UA_MethodCall 20 50 200 OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList 4 10 40 OPC_UA_MethodReleaseHandleLi st 4 10 40 OPC_UA_Disconnect 4 10 40 OPC_UA_ConnectionGetStatus 4 10 40 OPC_UA_Connect 40 Maximum number of usable OPC UA client interfaces If you create OPC UA client interfaces using the connection parameter assignment, the number of client interfaces is limited to 40. Create the OPC UA client interfaces by double-clicking the "Add new client interface" symbol in the project tree of the "OPC UA communication" area. The maximum number of OPC UA client interfaces is independent of whether you also use the CPU as OPC UA server. Communication 226 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.4 Example configuration for OPC UA The following sections describe how you can use the client interfaces editor and the connection parameter assignment. The description is based on a specific example: Two S7-1500 CPUs operate in the system: One CPU serves as the OPC UA client and the other as the OPC UA server. You can, of course, also use controllers, sensors and IT systems of other manufacturers as OPC UA clients or servers. In particular, the data exchange between different systems (interoperability) is a major advantage of OPC UA. Connection parameter assignment using an example: The plant produces blanks in a production line. The following controllers are used: 1. An S7-1511 CPU serves as the controller of the production line. The controller is named "Productionline" in the example. The OPC UA server of the controller is enabled. The CPU has the IP address 192.168.1.1 in the example. This CPU publishes the values of following tags via the OPC UA server: - NewProduct The tag has the data type "BOOL". When this PLC tag has the value TRUE, the production line has processed a blank. The blank is ready for pick-up. - ProductNumber This tag contains the identification number of the blank. The tag has the data type "Int". - Temperature This tag contains temperature values recorded during the production of the blank. The tag is an array with elements of the "Real" data type. In addition, this CPU provides the following writable tag: - ProductionEnabled The tag is set by the OPC UA client. The tag has the data type "BOOL". If the value is set to TRUE, the production line is released and may produce blanks. In addition, this CPU provides the following method via the OPC UA server: - OpenDoor. OPC UA clients can hereby arrange for an access door to be opened to the production line. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 227 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 2. An S7-1516 CPU controls the interaction with other production lines. This CPU is named "Supervisor" in the example. The OPC UA client of this CPU is enabled. Using OPC UA, this CPU can read the NewProduct and ProductNumber tags, set the ProductionEnabled tag and call the OpenDoor method. The CPU has the IP address 192.168.1.2 in the example. The following figure shows the example in the network view of the TIA Portal: 9.4.5 Creating client interfaces As of Version 15.1, the TIA Portal has an editor for client interfaces. You group all PLC tags that you want to read or write from an OPC UA server in a client interface. In addition, the client interface contains all methods that the OPC UA server provides and that you want to call with your user program (that acts as an OPC UA client). If you create a client interface, STEP 7 also creates data blocks for the parameter assignment of the connection to the OPC UA server from which you want to read data or to which you want to write data. Maximum number of client interfaces You can create a maximum of 40 client interfaces. Communication 228 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Editor for client interfaces To create a client interface, follow these steps: 1. Select the project view in the TIA Portal. 2. In the "Devices" area, select the CPU you want to use as an OPC UA client. 3. Click "OPC UA communication > Client interfaces". 4. Double-click "Add new client interface". STEP 7 creates a new client interface and display in the editor. STEP 7 names the new interface "Client interface_1". If a "Client interface_1" already exists, the new interface receives the designation "Client interface_2" etc. In addition, STEP 7 creates the following data blocks: - Client_Interface_1_Configuration The data block already contains all system data types that are needed for the instructions of the OPC UA client. This data block is filled when you configure the connection to the OPC UA server. You configure a connection in the properties of the client interface, see: Example configuration for OPC UA (Page 227). - Client_Interface_1_Data A data block for the PLC tags that you want to read or write from an OPC UA server. You use this data block in your user program. This data block is currently still empty. 5. Select a descriptive name for the new client interface. Select "Productionline" in the example. This also changes the names of the associated data blocks to: - Productionline_Data - Productionline_Configuration Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 229 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 6. To import an OPC UA server interface, click the "Import interface" button in the top right of the editor. This allows you to import an XML file which describes the server interface of an OPC UA server. Alternative: To determine online the server interface of a connected OPC UA server, see: Determine server interface online (Page 237). 7. STEP 7 displays a dialog with which you can select an XML file. This XML file describes a server interface (address space of an OPC UA server). A server interface is the grouping of all PLC tags and server methods which an OPC UA server publishes. OPC UA clients can access the server interface: - Read PLC tags - Write PLC tags - Calling Server Methods For information on how to create a server interface for an OPC UA server, see Create a server interface (Page 199). 8. Create a read list in this client interface. To do this, follow these steps: - Click "Add new read list" in the left section of the editor. STEP 7 adds a new list named "ReadList_1". For the example, change the name to "ReadProduct" - Now add the new read list of the PLC tags that you want to read from the OPC UA server. In the example the "NewProduct" and "ProductNumber" tags are added to the "ReadProduct" read list. Select the "NewProduct" tag in the right-hand field of the editor ("OPC UA Server interface"). Drag the "NewProduct" tag to the "ReadProduct" read list in the middle field of the editor. Follow the same procedure with the "ProductNumber" tag. Communication 230 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client The figure below shows the right field of the editor. Alternative: You can also select a new read list by dragging the right field of the editor ("OPC UA Server interface") to a node of the type Object or Folder and then dragging it to "Add new read list" in the left field of the editor. The new read list then contains all PLC tags of the node that has been moved. In the example, select the object "Data_for_OPC_UA_Clients", which contains the tags "NewProduct" and "ProductNumber". STEP 7 generates the new write list "Data_for_OPC_UA_Clients". In addition, the object contains the tag "Temperature". Delete the "Temperature" tag from the read list. The OPC UA server should not query the "Temperature" tag. Change the name of the read list in "ReadProduct". The following figure shows the content of the read list: Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 231 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9. If you want assign new values to PLC tags, create a write list in this client interface. To do this, follow these steps: - Click "Add new write list" in the left section of the editor. STEP 7 adds a new list with the name "ReadList_1". For the example, change the name to "WriteStatus". - Now add the new write list of all OPC UA server tags to which you want to assign new values. In the example, add the "WriteStatus" tag to the write list "ProductionEnabled". Select the Tag of right field of the editor ("OPC UA Server interface"). Drag the tag to the write list in the middle field of the editor. Alternative: You can also create a new write list by selecting a node of the type Object or Folder in the right field of the editor ("OPC UA server interface") and then dragging to "Add new write list" in the left field of the editor. The new write list then contains all tags of the relevant node. In the example, select the object "Data_from_OPC_UA_Clients", which contains the tag "ProductionEnabled". STEP 7 generates the new write list "Data_from_OPC_UA_Clients". Change the name in "WriteStatus". The following figure shows the content of the write list: 10.If you want to call a method of this OPC UA server, generate a new method list. To do this, follow these steps: - In the left section of the editor, click "Add new method list". STEP 7 adds a new list with the name "Method list_1". For the example, change the name to "CallOpenDoor". - Now add a method of the OPC UA server to the new method list. In this example, add the method "OpenDoor" to the method list "CallOpenDoor". Select the method of right field of the editor ("OPC UA Server interface"). Drag the method to the method list in the middle field of the editor. Communication 232 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Alternative: You can also generate a new method list by selecting a method (node of the type Object) in the right field of the editor (OPC UA Server interface) and then dragging it to "Add new method list" in the left field of the editor. The new method list then contains the method of the relevant node. The following figure shows the content of the method list: If you want to call another method of the OPC UA server, you must create a new method list. Each method list contains only one method. 11.Compile the project. To do so, select the project and click the following button in the toolbar: STEP 7 compiles the project and updates the data blocks that belong to the "ProductionLine" client interface. Note During compilation, STEP 7 overwrites all data in the data blocks belonging to the client interface. For this reason, you should neither add to nor correct these data blocks manually. Note Renaming nod names (DisplayNames) In read lists, write lists and method lists you can rename the name of a node by means of the shortcut menu. This is the "DisplayName" in the OPC UA language usage. If you rename the name of a method list node and the node is already used in a programmed block for the method call "OPC_UA_MethodCall", the compilation of the project leads to consistency errors: During the compilation the UDTs of the method are generated with the changed name. The references to the method used in the program are then no longer correct. To correct the consistency errors, you can either undo the name change of the method in the client interface or navigate to the method call and assign the relevant parameters again there under "Properties > Block parameters" ("Configuration" tab). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 233 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Data blocks of client interface The following data blocks belong to the "Productionline" client interface: Productionline_Configuration A data block for the configuration. In the example, this data block is called "Productionline_Configuration". The data block already contains all system data types that are needed for the instructions of the OPC UA client. In addition, the data block contains general default values for parameter assignment of the connection to an OPC UA server. If you are working with connection parameter assignment, this data block will be filled. ProductionLine_Data A data block for the PLC tags that you have entered in the client interface editor. In the example, this data block is called "Productionline_Data". The figure below shows the data block. Use the "ProductionLine_Data" data block in your user program and access the read values of the "NewProduct" and "ProductNumber" PLC tags. This is explained in the following section using an example. Communication 234 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Reading and writing PLC tags of the client interface Example: Reading the "ProductNumber" value For example, you write in an SCL program: #MyLocalVariable := "ProductionLine_Data".ReadProduct.Variable.ProductNumber; You use this, for example, to assign the number of the blank that was just produced in the production line to the local tag "#MyLocalVariable". Requirements: A connection exists to the OPC UA server of the CPU, which controls the production line. The OPC UA client has read the current values. For this reason you check whether a read value is valid: Check whether the value in "ProductionLine_Data".Product.NodeStatusList[1]" is equal to 0. Check when this value was sent from the OPC UA server. This value is in "ProductionLine_Data".Product.TimeStamps[1]. Example: Writing the "ProductEnabled" value Transfer the new values for PLC tags, in the example for the "ProductionEnabled" tag, to the OPC UA server using the data block. With the following assignment, you enable the production line in the example plant: "ProductionLine_Data".WriteStatus.Variable.ProductionEnabled := TRUE; This is only successful, however, if the following requirements are met: A connection exists to the OPC UA server of the CPU, which controls the production line. Current values are being written via the OPC UA client Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 235 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Consistency check Finally, check the consistency of the read/write list or method list. 1. Select the list that you want to check. 2. Click the "Consistency check" button above the "OPC UA client interface" area. A green check mark indicates an error-free assignment of the tags or methods to the corresponding elements of the server interface. You can assume that the data exchange between client and server and method calls operate without problem in runtime. In the event of an error a list appears in the Inspector window. From this list you can jump to the respective error. During the consistency check, STEP 7 checks whether all elements that you use in the respective list are also present in the server. Do the data types used match? For methods: Do the number, name, order, and data types of method arguments match? Communication 236 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.6 Determine server interface online With STEP 7 (TIA Portal) you can determine the interface of an OPC UA server online. This provides information on which tags of a connected OPC UA server you can read or set (write) with OPC UA clients. It also provides information on which server methods of the OPC UA server are available for OPC UA clients. If you are work offline you can create the interface of the OPC UA server by means of an OPC UA XML file. The address space of the server is described in the OPC UA XML file, see: Export OPC UA XML file (Page 167). Determine online server interfaces To determine a server interface online, follow these steps: 1. In the STEP 7 project tree, select the CPU which is configured as OPC UA client (Supervisor in the example). 2. Select the client interface (in the example, OPC UA Communication > Client interfaces > Productionline). If no client interface has been created, double-click "Add new client interface". 3. Double-click the selected client interface. The editor for client interfaces is displayed. 4. In the left section of the editor, click "Add new read list", "Add new write list", or "Add new method list". 5. In the right field of the editor, select "Online[]" as data source for "Source of server data": Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 237 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 6. Click the "Online access" button. STEP 7 displays the "Connect to OPC UA server" dialog: Tip: When you are establishing an online connection to an OPC UA server for the first time, use the "Online access" button. When reconnecting after a disconnection, select the "Connect to online server" button next to the "Online" selection field. In the top right, enter the IP address of the OPC UA server whose server interface you want to determine online (in the example, 192.168.1.1). 7. Click "Find selected server". STEP 7 establishes a connection to the OPC UA server and determines all security settings (server endpoints) which the server provides. STEP 7 displays the end points as list: 8. Click on the end point you want to use for a connection of step 7 to the OPC UA server. Communication 238 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9. Do you want to use a secure connection? - If you have selected a secure end point, then select the entry "TIA Portal" for the "Certificate location". And under "Certificate (Client)", select a client certificate for your PC on which STEP 7 (TIA Portal) is currently running. If a client certificate does not yet exist for your PC, you can generate a client certificate here in the TIA Portal. Proceed as follows to generate a certificate for your PC: - Click on the button in the "Certificate (Client)" input field. - Click "Add". - For "Common name of subject", enter "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". - Select the "OPC UA client" entry at "Usage". - For "Subject Alternative Name (SAN)", enter the IP address of your PC on which you are currently running STEP 7 (TIA Portal) under "Value". Overwrite the already entered IP address. - If your PC uses a second IP address, enter this address as well. If your PC does not use a second IP address, delete the second IP address already entered. - Click "OK". - If you have not selected a secure end point, keep the default setting ("None"). 10.How do you want log on? - If you want to log onto the OPC UA server as guest, then apply the default with "User authentication". - If you want to log on with user name and password, select "User name and password". Use the user name and password which was stored during the configuration of the OPC UA server in the properties of the CPU under "General > OPC UA > Server > Security > User authentication > User management". 11.Click "Connect". When a secure connection is established, a message appears that you must accept the server certificate for the secure connection to be established. In the message window, you can display further details about the server certificate via a link. This standard Windows window only provides information about the server certificate. If you click on the button to install the server certificate, the server certificate is not included in the certificate memory of the TIA Portal, i.e. the next time you connect you will be prompted to accept the server certificate again. STEP 7 then establishes a connection to the OPC UA server and again displays the editor for client interfaces. In the right field of the editor, STEP 7 displays the uppermost level of the address space of the OPC UA server: Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 239 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 12.Click on the small black triangle next to "Objects". STEP 7 now also displays the level below Objects. 13.Click on the small black triangle next to "Productionline". STEP 7 now also displays the level below Productionline. 14.Now open additional lower-level folders: Alternative: To open the server interface in one stop, click the following symbol: STEP 7 now displays the fully expanded server interface. If you click on this symbol again, STEP 7 again displays only the uppermost level of the server address space. Communication 240 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.7 Using multilingual texts In the client interface editor, you are also importing texts that can be displayed in different languages with the OPC UA XML files (information models). Multilingualism is optional, and each node can be defined differently regarding the languages it offers. In the XML file, these are the following fields that can be prepared for different languages: DisplayName Description Example for multilingual texts in an OPC UA XML file In the XML file below, the display name and the description, for example, are entered with a "default" text and multiple localizable texts. Default text is the first entry without localization information. Localized text is the text after "Locale=" followed by a language code, e.g. "it-IT" for Italian Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 241 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Display of multilingual texts When importing a server interface, the available multilingual texts are saved internally and downloaded to a CPU together with the project. The client editor displays the text from the OPC UA XML file in the columns "Name of the node" (corresponds to "DisplayName") and "Description" (corresponds to "Description"). The following cascading rules determine which language is shown for a node: When the node contains text in the currently used editing language, the text is also displayed in the editing language. (Setting the editing language: In the project tree, select the area "Languages & resources > Project languages") When the node does not contain text in the editing language but a default text is defined there (without language code), the default text is displayed. "Name of the node" column: If no default text is defined either but a text in any other language exists, the DisplayName text is displayed in the first available language. This rule does not apply to description texts (Description). If none of the conditions listed above is met, no text is displayed. When you change the editing language, the multilingual text in the imported interface will also change according to the rules explained above. You can then apply the nodes in the corresponding lists (read list, write list, method list) with drag and drop. You cannot change the language in the lists (read list, write list, method list). Applying the displayed description texts as comment in PLC data types When you compile the program, STEP 7 automatically creates PLC data types (UDTs) for each read list, for each write list and for inputs or outputs of each method. These UDTs each have one element for each node. The UDTs apply the description text as comment according to the rules stated above. STEP 7 creates the comment in only one language, just like the texts in the OPC UA server interface can only be displayed in one language. Communication 242 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.8 Rules for the access to structures The rules for the access to structures are explained below. Note these rules when reading and writing values of complete structures provided by an OPC UA server. How the client of the S7-1500 CPU accesses structures The OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU uses neither TypeDictionaries nor DataTypeDefinition attributes, which a server offers for the resolution of these structures. These options of the OPC UA client for checking structural elements in runtime are limited in the client. Rules for the access to structures If you use the client interfaces to configure the read and write lists (connection parameterization) and assign the PLC data types to the imported or online determined address model of the server, the read and write accesses to structures operate trouble-free in runtime. The configuration by means of client interface automatically ensures that the sequence and the data type of the structural elements are coordinated on client and server side. In runtime the OPC UA client only checks the total length of the transmitted value; more detailed checks are not possible. Mapping rules apply to the assignment of OPC UA structures to PLC tags or DB tags (see AUTOHOTSPOT). Non-executed data type (such as OPC UA byte strings) are not supported. Example of an error-free assignment of the structure elements In the imported node set file (XML export), the structure is defined as follows: The structure mapped in the read list matches, both in the order and in the assigned data types, the corresponding nodes of the node set file. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 243 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client If the structure now changes on the server, for example tagA and tagB are swapped, and the read list remains the same in the client, the assignment is no longer correct: The total length of the data remains the same (only the order has changed) The configuration of the structure is different for client and server. WARNING No error message in the case of different structure configuration between client and server If the structures of client and server do not match, this rule violation will possibly not generate any error during compilation and also not in runtime. Make sure not to change the configured assignments for structures in runtime. If required, reconfigure the assignment in the read and write lists. Communication 244 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.9 Using connection parameter assignment 9.4.9.1 Creating and configuring connections With the instructions for OPC UA clients, you create a user program that exchanges data with an OPC UA server. A series of system data types are required for this. To simplify your work with these system data types, a connection parameter assignment for OPC UA clients is available starting in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Version 15.1. Use of the connection parameter assignment is optional and not mandatory. You can also manually create the required system data types. We use an example to make the description easier to follow, see description of the example (Page 227). Opening the connection parameter assignment To configure the connection to an OPC UA server, follow these steps: 1. In the "OPC UA communication" area, double-click the client interface whose parameters you want to assign in the project tree. For the example configuration: Double-click the "ProductionLine" client interface. The section "Create client interface (Page 228)" describes how to create a client interface. 2. Click the "Properties" tab (Inspector window) if the tab is not already displayed. STEP 7 now displays the connection parameter assignment for the instructions of the OPC UA client. The "General" tab is open. 3. Click the "Configuration" tab. Setting the connection parameters You set the connection to the OPC UA server in the "Configuration" tab. 1. Select a descriptive name for the session. For the example, select the name "OPC UA Connection to ProductionLine". 2. In the "Address" field, enter the IP address of the OPC UA server to which your user program (that operates as an OPC UA client) is to establish a connection. In the example configuration, the CPU that controls the production line has the IP address "192.168.1.1". A connection to the OPC UA server of this CPU is to be established. For this reason, you enter this IP address in the "Address" field. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 245 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 3. If the OPC UA server is not using the standard port 4840, you must insert the port number here. For example, enter the number 48040 in the field, if the OPC UA server to which you want to establish a connection uses this port number. For the example, we accept the default setting "4840" because the OPC UA server of the example is accessible via port 4840. 4. Enter a path within the OPC UA server to restrict access to this path. When you specify a path, it is automatically entered at the "ServerEndpointUrl" entry in the configuration DB for the client interface. The entry then consists of the components "OPC Schematic Prefix", "IP address", "Port number" and "Server path", for example: "opc.tcp://192.168.0.10:4840/example/path". The information is optional. However, some servers only establish a connection if a server path is specified. 5. In addition, you accept the default settings for session timeout (30 seconds) and monitoring time (5 seconds). The following figure shows the connection parameters of the example: Communication 246 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Setting the security parameters 1. Click the "Security" area in the "Configuration" tab. This area contains all security settings for the connection to the OPC UA server. The following settings are possible: "General" area Security mode: Select the security mode that the connection to the OPC UA server must meet from the drop-down list. If the server does not meet the selected mode, a session is not established. The following settings are available: No security: No secure connection. Sign: OPC UA server and OPC UA client sign the data transmission (all messages): Manipulations can thus be detected. Sign & Encrypt: OPC UA server and OPC UA client sign and encrypt the data transmission (all messages): Security policy: Set the encryption techniques for the signing and encryption of messages. The following settings are possible: No security Basic128Rsa15 Basic256 Basic256Sha256 To configure a secure connection, you must observe the following items: A certificate is required for the client for a secure connection. You have to make the client certificate known to the server. To find out how to proceed, see the section "Handling of the server and client certificates" under "Certificate of the OPC UA clients". "Certificates" area Client certificate: The certificate confirms the authenticity of the OPC UA client. To select a certificate, click the following symbol STEP 7 displays a list of certificates. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 247 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Select the certificate that you have introduced to the server, see the paragraphs under "Certificate of the OPC UA clients" in the section "Handling of the server and client certificates". Click the symbol with the green check mark: Or, create a new certificate. To do so, click the "Add" symbol. When you create a new certificate, you must introduce it to the server, see the paragraphs under "Certificate of the OPC UA clients" in the section "Handling of the server and client certificates". "User authentication" area The following settings are possible for user authentication: Guest User name and password Users (TIA Portal - Security Settings) For more information, see AUTOHOTSPOT. Setting languages UA tags of the String type can be localized with OPC UA, that is, texts (values for the UA tag) can be available in different languages for the server. For example, localized texts can be available for DisplayName (Name of the node) and Description (Description). In the "Languages" area of the "Configuration" tab you can, for example, influence the language of the texts returned by the server as follows: In the "Languages" area, enter a number of languages that the server transfers to the client during connection setup. The language or the local ID ("language code") associated with it that you enter in the first line is the language preferred by the client. If the server can provide the UA tag in the requested language, it is transferred to the client. If the server cannot provide the UA tag in the requested language, it checks whether it can provide the UA tag in the language you have entered in the second line (first substitute language). The server works its way down the list, and when it can provide neither the requested language nor a substitute language, it will provide the default language. Communication 248 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 9.4.9.2 Handling of the client certificates of the S7-1500 CPU Where does the client certificate come from? If you are using the OPC UA client of an S7-1500 CPU (OPC UA client enabled), you can create certificates for these clients with STEP 7 V15.1 and higher as described in the following sections. When you use UA clients from manufacturers or the OPC Foundation, a client certificate is generated automatically during installation or upon the first program call. You have to import these certificates with the global certificate manager in STEP 7 and use them for the respective CPU. If you program an OPC UA client yourself, you can generate certificates through the program. Alternatively, you can generate certificates with tools, for example with OpenSSL or the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation: The procedure for OpenSSL is described here: "Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself (Page 149)". Working with the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation is described here: "Creating self-signed certificates (Page 148)". Certificate of the OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU A secure connection between the OPC UA server and an OPC UA client is only established if the server classifies the certificate of the client as trusted. Therefore you have to make the client certificate known to the server. The following sections describe how you can initially generate a certificate for the OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU and then make it available to the server. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 249 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 1. Generate and export a certificate for the client For a secure connection, you have to generate a client certificate and - if the server and client are located in different projects - export the certificate. If client and server are in the same project, exporting the client certificate and subsequent import are not necessary. Requirements The IP interface of the CPU is configured, an IP address is available. Background: The IP address under which the CPU can be accessed in your system is entered under "Subject Alternative Name (SAN)". Generating an OPC UA client certificate The easiest way to generate a client certificate for an S7-1500 CPU is to configure a client interface. The configuration of the client interface provides for the selection or generation of a client certificate, see Creating and configuring connections (Page 245). Alternatively, you can create the client as follows: 1. In the "Project tree" area, select the CPU you want to use as a client. 2. Double-click "Device configuration". 3. In the properties of the CPU click "Protection & Security > Certificate manager". 4. Double-click "" in the "Device certificates" table. STEP 7 opens a dialog. 5. Click "Add". 6. Select the "OPC UA client" entry from the list at the "Usage". 7. Click "OK". STEP 7 now lists the client certificate in the "Device certificates" table. 8. If the server is in another project: Right-click this line and select "Export certificate" from the shortcut menu. 9. Select a directory in which you store the client certificate. Communication 250 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 2. Announcing the client certificate to the server You have to make the client certificate available to the server to allow a secure connection to be established. To do so, proceed as follows: 1. If the client was configured in another project and you created and exported the client certificate there: - Select the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option in the local certificate manager of the server. This makes the global certificate manager available. You will find this option under "Protection & Security > Certificate manager" in the properties of the CPU that is acting as server. - If the project is not yet protected, select "Security settings > Settings" in the STEP 7 project tree, click the "Protect this project" button and log on. The "Global security settings" item is now displayed under "Security settings" in the STEP 7 project tree. - Double click "Global security settings". - Double click "Certificate manager". STEP 7 opens the global certificate manager. - Click the "Device certificates" tab. - Right-click in the tab on a free area (not on a certificate). - Select the "Import" shortcut menu. The dialog for importing certificates is displayed. - Select the client certificate that the server is to trust. - Click "Open" to import the certificate. The certificate of the client is now contained in the global certificate manager. Note the ID of the client certificate just imported. 2. Click the "General" tab in the properties of the CPU that is acting as server. 3. Click "OPC UA > Server > Security > Secure Channel". 4. Scroll down in the "Secure Channel" dialog to the section "Trusted clients". 5. Double-click in the table on the empty row with "". A browse button is displayed in the row. 6. Click this button. 7. Select the prepared client certificate. 8. Click the button with the green check mark. 9. Compile the project. 10.Load the configuration into the S7-1500 CPU (server). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 251 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Result The server now trusts the client. If the server certificate is also considered trusted, the server and client can establish a secure connection. 9.4.9.3 User authentication In the OPC UA client interface of the S7-1500, you can set what authentication is required for a user of the OPC UA client wishing to access the server. To do so, you must select the corresponding client interface in the project tree of the requested S7-1500 CPU under "OPC UA communication > Client interfaces" and select the type of user authentication in the Inspector window under "Properties > Configuration > Security". Types of user authentication The following options are available for user authentication: Guest The user does not need to verify authorization (anonymous access). The CPU creates an anonymous session for the user, and the OPC UA server does not check the authorization of the client user. User name and password The user must prove authorization (no anonymous access). The OPC UA server checks whether the client user is authorized to access the server. Authorization is given by the user name and the correct password. These inputs cannot be checked by the client interface, which means all values are accepted as being valid. Note STEP 7 stores user name and password unencrypted in the data block/instance data block. Recommendation: Use the user authentication "User (TIA Portal - Security Settings)". Users (TIA Portal - Security Settings) You can enter a user name from the list of users entered in the project for authentication. The names of the registered users for the current project are available in the user administration in the project tree under "Security Settings > Users and roles". There you can also enter additional users. You can also enter a name that is not listed in the user administration of the project or leave the field blank. This is necessary when the corresponding user name is only provided by a different source during runtime, for example, via HMI or from a different OPC UA client. Communication 252 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client "No Security" security policy and authentication via user name and password You can set the following combination: Security policy = "No Security" and authentication via user name and password. The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 supports this combination. OPC UA clients can connect and encrypt the authentication data or not. OPC UA client of the S7-1500 CPU also supports this combination: However, in runtime it only connects if it can send the authentication data encrypted via cable! Result: With the following configuration, not connection can be established in runtime. S7-1500 as OPC UA client OPC UA server which supports no encryption of authentication data when "No Security" (="none") is set as security policy. Additional information See Users and roles with OPC UA function rights (Page 190) 9.4.9.4 Using a configured connection Introduction This section shows you how to use a configured connection for OPC UA instructions (third step). Requirements You have created a client interface and added PLC tags and PLC methods to this interface, see ("First step (Page 228)"). You have configured a connection to an OPC UA server (Second step (Page 245)). Overview To read data from an OPC UA server or write data to an OPC UA server, use the following instructions: OPC_UA_Connect OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList OPC_UA_ReadList or OPC_UA_WriteList OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList OPC_UA_Disconnect Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 253 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Order of the OPC UA instructions The following figure shows the order in which the OPC UA instructions are called in a user program in order to use these instructions to read or write PLC tags: Instructions for preparation of read and write operations Read and write instructions Instructions for "clean-up" after a completed read or write operation The "OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList" instruction can be omitted if "OPC_UA_Disconnect" is called immediately afterwards. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) automatically supplies the parameters of these instructions if you are using a client interface and a configured connection to an OPC UA server. The procedure is shown in the following section. Communication 254 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Using a client interface and configured connection To use a configured OPC UA connection, follow these steps: 1. Open your user program in the TIA Portal. 2. Using drag-and-drop, move the "UA_Connect" instruction into the program editor. You will find the instruction under "Instructions > Communication > OPC UA" in the TIA Portal. 3. Select a call option for the instruction The example uses a multi-instance. STEP 7 displays the instruction in the program editor. The editor for the Function Block Diagram (FBD) programming language uses the following display: The editor for the Ladder Logic (LAD) programming language displays the instruction similarly. 4. Click the toolbox symbol in the editor for FBD or LAD. The symbol is located in the heading of the instruction: If you are using the editor for STL or SCL: Click the small green rectangle below the first character of the instance name: The example (Page 227) uses "#OPC_UA_Connect_Instance" as the instance name. STEP 7 displays the properties of the instruction in a separate dialog. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 255 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 5. For "Client interface" select the client interface that you want to use for the instruction. We select the "ProductionLine" client interface in the example. STEP 7 now interconnects the "ProductionLine" client interface with the parameters of the OPC_UA_Connect instruction: "ProductionLine" is the interface that the OPC UA client of the example (Page 227) uses for data exchange with the OPC UA server "ProductionLine". 6. Using drag-and-drop, move the "UA_NamespaceGetIndexList" instruction into the program editor. You will find the instruction under "Instructions > Communication > OPC UA" in the TIA Portal. Select the "Multi-instance" call option. Click the toolbox symbol (LAD and FBD) or the small green box below the instance name (STL and SCL) if the editor is not already open. Select the client interface that you want to use ("ProductionLine" in the example). STEP 7 now automatically interconnects all parameters of the "OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList" instruction: Communication 256 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client 7. Using drag-and-drop, move the "UA_NodeGetHandleList" instruction into the program editor. Select the "Multi-instance" call option. Click the toolbox symbol (LAD and FBD) or the small green box below the instance name (STL and SCL) if the editor is not already open. Select the client interface that you want to use. The example uses the "ProductionLine" client interface. Under "Data access > Read/Writelist" select the read list that you want to use (in the example the read list "Product"). STEP 7 now automatically interconnects all parameters of the "OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList" instruction: Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 257 OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client If you want to write data to an OPC UA server, select the write list you want to use under "Data access > Read/Writelist" (the "ProductionStatus" write list in the example). 8. Using drag-and-drop, move the "UA_ReadList" instruction into the program editor. Select the "Multi-instance" call option. Click the toolbox symbol (LAD and FBD) or the small green box below the instance name (STL and SCL) if the editor is not already open. Select the client interface that you want to use. The example uses the "ProductionLine" client interface. Under "Data access > Read/Writelist" select the read list that you want to use (in the example the "Product" read list). STEP 7 now automatically interconnects all parameters of the "OPC_UA_ReadList" instruction. If you want to write data to an OPC UA server, use the "OPC_UA_Write" instruction and select the list of tags you want to send to the server under "Data access > Writelist" ("ProductionStatus" write list in the example). 9. If you use different read lists or write lists as program-controlled lists in your user program, move the "UA_NodeReleaseHandleList" instruction to the program editor using drag-and-drop operation. Select the client interface that you want to use. Now select a read list or write list that you want to release: Only release read or write lists that you rarely use, since re-registering is time-consuming. Then, repeat the steps starting with step 7 with the "UA_NodeGetHandleList" instruction. 10.Using drag-and-drop, move the "UA_Disconnect" instruction into the program editor. Select the "Multi-instance" call option. Click the toolbox symbol (LAD and FBD) or the small green box below the instance name (STL and SCL) if the editor is not already open. Select the client interface that you want to use. The example uses the "ProductionLine" client interface. STEP 7 now automatically interconnects all parameters of the "OPC_UA_Disconnect" instruction. Communication 258 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG OPC UA communication 9.4 Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Supported instructions For the following instructions, STEP 7 automatically supplies the parameters if you are using a client interface and a configured connection to an OPC UA server: OPC_UA_Connect OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList OPC_UA_MethodGetHandleList OPC_UA_MethodReleaseHandleList OPC_UA_ReadList OPC_UA_WriteList OPC_UA_MethodCall OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList OPC_UA_Disconnect Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 259 10 Routing 10.1 S7 routing Definition of S7 routing S7 routing is the transfer of data beyond S7 subnet boundaries. You can send information from a transmitter to a receiver across several s7 subnets. The gateway from one S7 subnet to one or more other subnets is provided by the S7 router The S7 router is a device which has interfaces to the respective S7 subnets. S7 routing is possible via various S7 subnets (PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet and/or PROFIBUS). Requirements for S7 routing All devices that can be reached in a network have been configured in a project in STEP 7 and downloaded. All devices involved in the S7 routing must receive routing information about the S7 subnets that can be reached through specific S7 routers. The devices obtain the routing information by downloading the hardware configuration to the CPUs, since the CPUs play the role of an S7 router. In a topology with several consecutive S7 subnets, the following order must be kept to when downloading: First download the hardware configuration to the CPU(s) directly connected to the same S7 subnet as the PG/PC, then download one by one the CPUs of the S7 subnets beyond this starting with the nearest S7 subnet through to the S7 subnet furthest away. The PG/PC you want to use to establish a connection via a S7 router must be assigned to the S7 subnet it is physically connected to. You can assign the PG/PC to a PG/PC in STEP 7 under Online & Diagnostics > Online accesses > Connection to interface/subnet. For S7 subnets of the type PROFIBUS: Either the CPU must be configured as DP master or, if it is configured as a DP slave, the "Test, commissioning, routing" check box must be selected in the properties of the DP interface of the DP slave. S7 routing for HMI connections is possible as of STEP 7 V13 SP1. Note Firewall and S7 routing A firewall does not recognize the IP address of the sender during S7 routing when the sender is located outside the S7 subnet adjacent to the firewall. An overview of the devices that support the "S7 routing" function is provided in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/584459). Communication 260 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Routing 10.1 S7 routing S7 routing for online connections With the PG/PC, you can reach devices beyond S7 subnets, for example to do the following: Download user programs Download a hardware configuration Execute test and diagnostics functions In the following figure, CPU 1 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 1 and S7 subnet 2. Figure 10-1 S7 routing: PROFINET - PROFINET Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 261 Routing 10.1 S7 routing The following figure shows the access from a PG via PROFINET to PROFIBUS. CPU 1 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 1 and S7 subnet 2; CPU 2 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 2 and S7 subnet 3. Figure 10-2 S7 routing: PROFINET - PROFIBUS S7 routing for HMI connections You have the option of setting up an S7 connection from an HMI to a CPU via different subnets (PROFIBUS and PROFINET or Industrial Ethernet). In the following figure, CPU 1 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 1 and S7 subnet 2. Figure 10-3 S7 routing via HMI connections Communication 262 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Routing 10.1 S7 routing S7 routing for CPU-CPU communication You have the option of setting up an S7 connection from a CPU to another CPU via different subnets (PROFIBUS and PROFINET or Industrial Ethernet). The procedure is described based on examples in the section S7 communication (Page 114). Figure 10-4 S7 routing via CPU-CPU communication Using S7 routing For the CPU, select the PG/PC interface and the S7 subnet in the "Go online" dialog of STEP 7. S7 routing is performed automatically. Number of connections for S7 routing The number of connections available for S7 routing in the S7 routers (CPUs, CMs or CPs) can be found in the technical specifications in the manuals of the relevant CPU/CM/CP. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 263 Routing 10.2 Data record routing S7 routing: Example of an application The figure below shows the example of an application for remote maintenance of a system using a PG. The connection is made here beyond two S7 subnets via a modem connection. You configure a remote connection via TeleService in STEP 7 using "Online access" or "Go online". Figure 10-5 Remote maintenance of a plant using TeleService Additional information The allocation of connection resources with S7 routing is described in the section Allocation of connection resources (Page 271). You can find more information on setting up TeleService in the STEP 7 online help. You can find more information on S7 routing and TeleService adapters when you search the Internet using the following links: - Device manual Industrial Software Engineering Tools TS Adapter IE Basic (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/51311100) - Downloads for the TS Adapter (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805406/133100) See also HMI communication (Page 65) Communication 264 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Routing 10.2 Data record routing 10.2 Data record routing Definition of data record routing Data can be sent over PROFINET from an engineering station to field devices via multiple networks. Since the engineering station addresses the field devices using standardized records and these records are routed via S7 devices, the term "data record routing" is used to refer to this type of routing. The data sent using data record routing include the parameter assignments for the participating field devices (slaves) and device-specific information (e.g. setpoint values, limit values). Data record routing is used, for example, when field devices of different manufacturers are used. The field devices are addressed using standardized data records ( PROFINET) for configuration and diagnostics. Data record routing with STEP 7 You can perform data routing with STEP 7 by calling a device tool (for example, PCT) via the TCI interface (Tool Calling Interface) and passing call parameters. The device tool uses the communication paths that STEP 7 also uses for communication with the field device. No configuration is required for this type of routing except the installation of the TCI tools on the STEP 7 computer. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 265 Routing 10.2 Data record routing Example: Data record routing with the Port Configuration Tool (PCT) You can use the Port Configuration Tool (PCT) to configure the IO link master of the ET200 and assign parameters to connected IO link devices. The subnets are connected via data record routers. Data record routers are, for example, CPUs, CPs, IMs, IO link master. You can learn about the constellations of data record routers supported by the PCT in this FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/87611392). The figure below shows an example configuration with the data record routing with PCT. Figure 10-6 Example configuration for data record routing with PCT Additional information The differences that exist between "normal" routing and data record routing are described in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/7000978). Whether or not the CPU, CP or CM you are using supports data record routing can be found in the relevant manuals. The allocation of connection resources with data record routing is described in the section Allocation of connection resources (Page 271). You can find additional information on configuration with STEP 7 in the STEP 7 online help. Communication 266 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Connection resources 11.1 11 Connection resources of a station Introduction Some communications services require connections. Connections occupy resources in the automation system (station). The connection resources are made available to the station by the CPUs, communications processors (CPs) and communications modules (CMs). Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 267 Connection resources 11.1 Connection resources of a station Connection resources of a station The connection resources available depend on the CPUs, CPs and CMs being used and must not exceed a maximum number per station. The maximum number of resources of a station is determined by the CPU. Each CPU has reserved connection resources for PG, HMI and Web server communication. This ensures, for example, that a PG can always establish at least one online connection with the CPU regardless of how many other communications services are already using connection resources. In addition, dynamic resources exist. The difference between the maximum number of connection resources and the number of reserved connection resources is the maximum number of dynamic connection resources. The communications services PG communication, HMI communication, S7 communication, Open User Communication, Web communication and other communication (for example OPC UA) use the dynamic connection resources from the pool. The figure below shows an example of how individual components make connection resources available to an S7-1500 station. Available connection resources of the station, of which A Reserved connection resources of the station A+B Connection resources of CPU 1518 C Connection resources of communications module CM 1542-1 D Connection resources of communications processor CP 1543-1 Maximum communications resources of the station using the example of a configuration from CPU 1518, CM 1542-1 and CP 1543-1 Figure 11-1 Connection resources of a station Communication 268 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Connection resources 11.1 Connection resources of a station Number of connection resources of a station Table 11- 1 Maximum number of connection resources supported for some CPU types Connection resources of a station Maximum connection resources of the station 1511 1511C 1512C 96 128 1515 1516 1517 1518 192 256 320 384 1513 of which reserved of which dynamic 10 86 118 182 246 310 374 Connection resources of the CPU 64 88 108 128 160 192 Max. additionally usable connection resources by plugging in CMs/CPs 32 40 84 128 160 192 Additional connection resources CM 1542-1 64 Additional connection resources CP 1543-1 118 Additional connection resources CM 1542-5 40 Additional connection resources CP 1542-5 16 The number of connection resources that a CPU or a communication module supports is specified in the device manuals in the Technical Specifications. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 269 Connection resources 11.1 Connection resources of a station Example You have configured a CPU 1518-4PN/DP with a communications module CM 1542-1 and a communications processor CP 1542-5. Maximum connection resources of the station: 384 Available connection resources: - CPU 1518-4 PN/DP: 192 - CM 1542-1: 64 - CP 1542-5: 16 - Total: 272 The setup provides 272 connection resources. By adding additional communications modules, the station can support a maximum of 112 additional connection resources. Reserved connection resources 10 connection resources are reserved for stations with S7-1500 CPU, ET 200SP CPU and ET 200pro CPU based on S7-1500: 4 for PG communication required by STEP 7, for example, for test and diagnostics functions or downloading to the CPU 4 for HMI communication which are occupied by the first HMI connections configured in STEP 7 2 for communication with the Web server Communication 270 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Connection resources 11.2 Allocation of connection resources 11.2 Allocation of connection resources Overview - occupation of connection resources The following figure shows how different connections occupy the resources of the S7-1500. HMI communication: See below. S7 communication: Connections of S7 communication occupy a connection resource in every end point. Open User Communication: Connections of Open User Communication occupy a connection resource in every end point. Web communication: The Web server connection occupies at least one connection resource in the station. The number of occupied connections depends on the browser. PG communication: The PG connection occupies one connection resource in the station. OPC UA communication: Each session that the OPC UA server of the CPU establishes with an OPC UA client as a rule occupies one connection resource (other communication) in the station. Connection resource for HMI communication Connection resource for Open User Communication Connection resource for S7 communication Connection resource for Web communication Connection resource for PG communication Connection resource for other communication (for example OPC UA) Figure 11-2 Allocation of connection resources Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 271 Connection resources 11.2 Allocation of connection resources Connection resources for HMI communication With HMI communication, the occupation of connection resources in the station depends on the HMI device being used. Table 11- 2 Maximum occupied connection resources for different HMI devices HMI device 1 Maximum occupied connection resources of the station per HMI connection Basic Panel 1 Comfort Panel 21 RT Advanced 21 RT Professional 3 If you do not use system diagnostics or alarm configuration, the station occupies only one connection resource per HMI connection. Example: You have configured the following HMI connections for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP: Two HMI connections to an HMI TP700 Comfort. (2 connection resources each) One HMI connection to an HMI KTP1000 Basic. (1 connection resource) In total 5 connection resources are occupied for HMI communication in the CPU. Communication 272 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Connection resources 11.2 Allocation of connection resources Connection resources for routing To transfer data beyond S7 subnets ("S7 routing"), an S7 connection is established between two CPUs. The S7 subnets are connected via gateways known as S7 routers. CPUs, CMs and CPs in S7-1500 are S7 routers. The following applies for a routed S7 connection: A routed connection occupies one connection resource each in both end points. STEP 7 shows these connection resources in the "Connection resources" table. On the S7 router, two special connection resources are occupied for S7 routing. STEP 7 does not show the special connection resources for S7 routing in the "Connection resources" table. The number of resources for S7 routing depends on the CPU. You will find the resources for S7 routing in the technical specifications of the CPU in "Number of S7 routing connections". Connection resource for S7 communication Special connection resources for S7 routing Figure 11-3 Connection resources with S7 routing Data record routing also enables transfer of data beyond S7 subnets from an engineering station connected to PROFINET to various field devices via PROFIBUS. With data record routing, as with S7 routing, two of the special connection resources for S7 routing are also occupied on every data record router. Note Connection resources with data record routing With data record routing, on the data record router, two special connection resources for S7 routing are occupied. Neither the data record connection nor the allocated connection resources are displayed in the table of connection resources. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 273 Connection resources 11.2 Allocation of connection resources When are connection resources occupied? The time for the occupation of connection resources depends on how the connection is set up (see section Setting up a connection (Page 30)). Programmed setup of a connection: As soon as an instruction to establish a connection is called in the user program (TSEND_C/TRCV_C or TCON), a connection resource is occupied. With suitable parameter assignment of the CONT parameter of the TSEND_C/TRCV_C instructions or by calling the TDISCON instruction, the connection can be terminated following data transfer and the connection resource is available again. When the connection is terminated, the connection resources on the CPU/CP/CM are available again. Configured connections (e.g. HMI connection): If you have configured a connection in STEP 7, the connection resource is occupied as soon as the hardware configuration is downloaded to the CPU. After using a configured connection for data transfer, the connection is not terminated. The connection resource is permanently occupied. To release the connection resource again, you need to delete the configured connection in STEP 7 and download the modified configuration to the CPU. PG connection: As soon as you have connected the PG to a CPU online in STEP 7, connection resources are occupied. Web server: As long as you have opened the Web server of the CPU in a browser, connection resources are occupied in the CPU. OPC UA server: A connection resource is occupied in the CPU as long as a session exists between the OPC UA server of the CPU and an OPC UA client. Monitoring the maximum possible number of connection resources Offline During configuration of connections, STEP 7 monitors the occupation of the connection resources. If the maximum possible number of connection resources is exceeded, STEP 7 signals this with a suitable warning. Online The CPU monitors the use of connection resources in the automation system. If you establish more connections in the user program than those provided by the automation system, the CPU acknowledges the instruction to establish the connection with an error. S7-1500 and S7-300 comparison You will find a comparison of how the communication resources of the S7-1500 and S7-300 are managed in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747092). Communication 274 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Connection resources 11.3 Display of the connection resources 11.3 Display of the connection resources Display of the connection resources in STEP 7 (offline view) You can display the connection resources of an automation system in the hardware configuration. You will find the connection resources in the Inspector window in the properties of the CPU. Figure 11-4 Example: Reserved and available connection resources (offline view) Station-specific connection resources The columns of the station-specific connection resources provide information about the used and available connection resources of the station. In the example, a maximum of 256 station-specific connection resources are available for the automation system. 10 reserved connection resources, of which 4 are already in use and a further 6 available. The used resources are divided up as follows: - 4 Resources for HMI communication 246 dynamic connection resources, of which 81 are already in use and a further 165 available. The used resources are divided up as follows: - 6 resources for HMI communication - 23 Resources for S7 communication - 52 resources for Open User Communication Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 275 Connection resources 11.3 Display of the connection resources The warning triangle in the column of the dynamic station resources is therefore displayed because the sum of the maximum available connection resources of CPU, CP and CM (= 294 connection resources) exceeds the station limit of 256. Note Available connection resources exceeded STEP 7 signals the exceeding of the station-specific connection resources with a warning. To make full use of the connection resources from the CPU, CP and CM, either use a CPU with a higher maximum number of available station-specific connection resources or reduce the number of communications connections. Module-specific connection resources The columns of the module-specific connection resources provide information about the use of resources on the CPUs, CPs and CMs of an automation system: The display is per module and not per interface. In the example, the CPU makes 128 connection resources available, of which 47 are already in use and a further 81 still available. The used resources are divided up as follows: 6 resources for HMI communication 2 resources for S7 communication 39 resources for Open User Communication Communication 276 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Connection resources 11.3 Display of the connection resources Display of the connection resources in STEP 7 (online view) If you are connected to the CPU online, you can also see how many resources are currently being used under "Connection information". Figure 11-5 Connection resources - online The online view of the "Connection resources" table in addition to the offline view also contains columns with the connection resources currently being used. Thus, the online view displays all used connection resources in the automation system, regardless of how the connection was set up. The "Other communication" row displays connection resources assigned for communication with external devices. The table is updated automatically. Note If a routed S7 connection goes through a CPU, the required connection resources of the CPU do not appear in the table of connection resources. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 277 Connection resources 11.3 Display of the connection resources Display of the connection resources for HMI For information regarding the availability and assignment of connection resources for HMI connections, refer to the "Connection resources" properties in the Inspector window of the offline view (in the context of the HMI device). Figure 11-6 Connection resources - HMI communication The following is displayed in the connection resources area: Number of available connections on the HMI reserved for HMI communication and HTTP communication Number of connection resources for HMI communication and HTTP communications used offline in the HMI If the maximum number of available connection resources for an HMI device is exceeded, a corresponding message is output by STEP 7. "Maximum number of used PLC resources per HMI connection". This parameter is a factor that is to be multiplied by the number of HMI connections used offline. The product is the number of HMI resources occupied on the CPU. Displaying the connection resources in the Web server You can display the connection resources not only in STEP 7, but also with a browser that displays the relevant page of the Web server. You will find information on displaying connection resources in the Web server in the Web Server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560)function manual. Communication 278 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Diagnostics and fault correction 12.1 12 Connection diagnostics Connections table in the online view After selecting a CPU in the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7, you will see the status of your connections displayed in the online view of the connections table. Figure 12-1 Online view of the connections table After selecting the connection in the connections table, you obtain detailed diagnostic information in the "Connection information" tab. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 279 Diagnostics and fault correction 12.1 Connection diagnostics "Connection information" tab: Connection details Figure 12-2 Diagnostics of connections - connection details Communication 280 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Diagnostics and fault correction 12.1 Connection diagnostics "Connection information" tab: Address details Figure 12-3 Diagnostics of connections - address details Diagnostics via web server You can evaluate diagnostic information from the CPU using a web browser via the integrated web server of a CPU. On the "Communication" Web page, you will find the following information about communication via PROFINET in various tabs: Information on the PROFINET interfaces of the CPU (for example addresses, subnets, physical properties). Information on the quality of the data transfer (for example number of data packets sent/received error-free). Information about the allocation/availability of connection resources. The "Connection status" page is similar to the online view in STEP 7 and also provides an overview of all connections with detail view. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 281 Diagnostics and fault correction 12.2 Emergency address Diagnostics with the user program When you program the T_DIAG instruction, you can evaluate diagnostic information about the configured and programmed connections of the CPU using the user program. Additional information You will find the description of the web server functionality in the function manual Web server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560). 12.2 Emergency address If you cannot reach the CPU via the IP address, you can set a temporary emergency address (emergency IP) for the CPU. Via this emergency address, you can re-establish the connection with a CPU in order to load a device configuration with a valid IP address. You can set an emergency address regardless of the protection level of the CPU When do you need an emergency address? Your CPU cannot be reached in the following cases: The IP address of your PROFINET interface is assigned twice. The subnet mask is set incorrectly. Requirements You have selected "Set IP address in the project" for the IP protocol in the device configuration in STEP 7. The CPU is in STOP mode. Restoring a valid device configuration with an emergency address 1. Set the emergency address for the interface of the CPU with a DCP tool. For example, the SIMATIC Automation Tool has a DCP command "Define IP address". The maintenance LED of the CPU lights up. The diagnostic buffer also shows that an emergency address was activated for an Ethernet interface. 2. Load a STEP 7 project with a valid IP address into the CPU. 3. Switch the CPU off and on again. The emergency address is reset. Result The CPU starts up with the valid IP address. Communication 282 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13 Introduction Communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system basically functions as with the S7-1500 standard system. This chapter describes the special features and restrictions for communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system. Communication options for the S7-1500R/H redundant system Open User Communication via TCP/IP, UDP and ISO-on-TCP S7 communication as server HMI communication PG communication SNMP Time-of-day synchronization via NTP Restrictions for communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system Open User Communication: - no configured connections - Secure Open User Communication: Not supported as certificate management is not possible for the R/H CPUs: If you have activated Secure OUC, then although you can compile the user program and load it, you cannot add certificates to the R/H-CPUs. - no FDL connections - Email: The S7-1500R/H CPUs with firmware version V2.6 do not support versions < V5.0 of the "TMAIL_C" instruction. Version V5.0 is not supported. - No support of connection descriptions according to "TCON_Param" no OPC UA no S7 communication as client no web server PG communication: - It is not possible to access two CPUs online at the same time. You can either access the primary CPU or the backup CPU. - Downloading blocks in redundant mode is not possible. - No support of the function "Upload device as new station" No S7-routing between the PROFINET interface X1 and the PROFINET-interface X2 of the CPUs The CPUs of the S7-1500R/H do not support any central communication modules Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 283 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.1 System IP addresses 13.1 System IP addresses The system IP address of the S7-1500R/H redundant system In addition to the device IP addresses of the CPUs, the S7-1500R/H redundant system supports system IP addresses: System IP address for the PROFINET interfaces X1 of the two CPUs (system IP-address X1) System IP address for the PROFINET interfaces X2 of the two CPUs (system IP-address X2) You use the system IP addresses for communication with other devices (for example, HMI devices, CPUs, PG/PC). The devices always communicate via the system IP address with the primary CPU of the redundant system. This ensures, for example, that the communication partner can communicate with the new primary CPU (previously backup CPU) in the RUN-Solo system state after failure of the original primary CPU in redundant operation. There is a virtual MAC address for each system IP address. You enable the system IP addresses in STEP 7. Advantages of the system IP addresses compared to device IP addresses The communication partner communicates specifically with the primary CPU. Communication of the S7-1500R/H redundant system via a system IP address still also works in the event of the failure of the primary CPU. Applications You use the system IP addresses for the following applications: HMI communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system: With an HMI you manage or monitor the process on the S7-1500R/H redundant system. Open User Communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system: - Another CPU or an application on a PC accesses data of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. - The S7-1500R/H redundant system accesses a different device. TCP, UDP and ISO-on-TCP-connections are possible. Requirements The communication partner and the PROFINET interfaces of the two CPUs are located in the same subnet. The communication partner is connected to both CPUs, each via the same interface (e.g. X2). The system IP address is enabled. Communication 284 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.1 System IP addresses Communication via the system IP address X2 If the CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system have two PROFINET interfaces, preferably use the PROFINET interface X2 for communication with other devices. The following figure shows a configuration in which the communication partners are connected via the respective PROFINET interfaces X2 with the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H. Open User Communication between a different CPU and the S7-1500R/H redundant system HMI communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system Open User Communication between the S7-1500R/H redundant system and a PC Figure 13-1 Example: Communication of the S7-1515R redundant system via the system IP address X2 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 285 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.1 System IP addresses Communication via the system IP address X1 The following diagram shows a configuration where the communication partners are connected with a switch to the PROFINET ring of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. The PROFINET ring connects the communication partners with the respective PROFINET interfaces X1 of the two CPUs. As the CPU 1513R only has one PROFINET interface, connection via the PROFINET ring is the only possibility of communicating via the system IP address X1. Open User Communication between the S7-1500R/H redundant system and a different CPU HMI communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system Open User Communication between the S7-1500R/H redundant system and a PC Figure 13-2 Example: Communication of the S7-1513R redundant system via the system IP address X1 Communication 286 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.1 System IP addresses Communication via the system IP addresses X1 and X2 If the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H have two PROFINET interfaces (X1 and X2), you can use the a system IP address for each PROFINET interface. PROFINET devices which are connected to the interfaces X1 of the CPUs communicate via the system IP address X1. PROFINET devices which are connected to the interfaces X2 of the CPUs communicate via the system IP address X2. Open User Communication between the S7-1500R/H redundant system and a different CPU. HMI communication with the S7-1500R/H redundant system Open User Communication between the S7-1500R/H redundant system and a PC Figure 13-3 Example: Communication of the S7-1515R redundant system via the system IP addresses X1 and X2 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 287 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.1 System IP addresses Enable system IP addresses Requirements: STEP 7 V15.1 or higher redundant system S7-1500R/H with two CPUs, e.g. two CPUs 1513R-1PN If the CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system have two PROFINET interfaces (X1 and X2), then you can use a system IP address for both PROFINET interfaces. The following section describes how to enable the system IP address for the interface X1. Proceed as follows to enable the system IP address for your S7-1500R/H redundant system: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the interface X1 of one of the two CPUs. 2. In the Inspector window go to "Properties" > "General" > "Ethernet addresses" in the area "System IP address for switched communication". 3. Select the check box "Enable the system IP address for switched communication". STEP 7 automatically creates a system IP address. Figure 13-4 Configure IP address 4. Change the system IP address if necessary. 5. If required, change the virtual MAC address. To do this, in "Virtual MAC address", assign a project-wide unique value (value range 01H to FFH) for the last byte. Note Uniqueness of the virtual MAC address The redundant system S7-1500R/H uses the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) for the system IP address and associated virtual MAC address. If you use further devices with VRRP, e.g. switches, ensure the uniqueness of the Mac addresses within an Ethernet-Broadcast-Domain. Result: The system IP address X1 for the PROFINET interface X1 of the two CPUs is enabled. Communication 288 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.2 Response to Snycup 13.2 Response to Snycup Response of communication connections via the system IP address in the system state SYNCUP HMI, PG- and S7-connections are temporarily closed. For a short time during the SYNCUP it is not possible to establish connections to the S7-1500R/H redundant system. All existing connections of Open User Communication are interrupted: - Connections set up by the CPUs of the redundant system as an active connection partner are set up again after the SYNCUP. - The S7-1500R/H redundant system sets up connection endpoints again for the passive connection establishment after the SYNCUP. The processing of running instances of the instructions TSEND and TRCV is stopped. The block parameter STATUS returns 80C4H (temporary communication error). 13.3 Response to primary-backup switchover Response of communication connections via the system IP address during a primary-backup switchover Running instances of the instructions TSEND and TRCV are stopped and return the status 80C4H (temporary communication error). Connections successfully established by the S7-1500R/H redundant system are established again by the new primary CPU. The new primary CPU sets up connection endpoints again for the passive connection establishment. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 289 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.4 Connection resources of the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.4 Connection resources of the redundant system S7-1500R/H Maximum number of connection resources of the S7-1500R/H redundant system The S7-1500R/H redundant system supports a maximum number of connection resources. The CPU used defines the maximum number of resources for an S7-1500R/H station: CPU 1513R: max. 88 connection resources CPU 1515R: max. 108 connection resources CPU 1517H: max. 160 connection resources Allocation of connection resources Communication connections occupy communication resources in the S7-1500R/H redundant system. Each communication connection to the S7-1500R/H redundant system occupies communication resources in the S7-1500R/H station. Depending on the IP address used, a communication connection also occupies resources in one or both CPUs of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. The following table shows in which CPU a communication connection occupies connection resources depending on the IP address used. Connect via... Connection resources of the station Connection resources CPU with redundancy ID 1 Connection resources CPU with redundancy ID 2 a system IP address X X X a device IP address of the CPU with redundancy ID 1 X X - a device IP address of the CPU with redundancy ID 2 X - X Communication 290 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.4 Connection resources of the redundant system S7-1500R/H Display of the occupied connection resources in STEP 7 Requirements: Online connection to the redundant system S7-1500R/H You will find the online display of the connection resources in the inspector window under "Diagnostics" > "Connection information". STEP 7 always displays the connection resources of the selected CPU and the S7-1500R/H-station. Figure 13-5 Display of the connection resources of the S7-1500R/H redundant system in STEP 7 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 291 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.5 HMI communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.5 HMI communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.5.1 HMI connection via the system IP address Requirements redundant system S7-1500R/H, e.g. CPU 1513R-1PN System IP address is enabled HMI device with PROFINETI-interface Procedure To set up a HMI connection to an S7-1500R/H redundant system, follow these steps: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select a PROFINET interface of the HMI device. 2. Using a drag&drop operation, draw a line between the PROFINET interface of the HMI device and a PROFINET-interface of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. The HMI-device and the S7-1500R/H redundant system are networked together. Figure 13-6 Networking an HMI device with the S7-1500R/H redundant system 3. In the list of functions, click the "Connections" icon. This activates connection mode. 4. Using a drag-and-drop operation, draw a line between the HMI device and a CPU of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. The list "Connection partners" opens. Figure 13-7 Setting up an HMI connection to the S7-1500R/H redundant system 5. Select the S7-1500R/H redundant system in the list "Connection partners". Result: You have set up a HMI connection between the HMI device and the S7-1500R/H redundant system. The HMI connection uses the system IP address. The HMI device always connects to the primary-CPU. Communication 292 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.5 HMI communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H Changing the HMI connection over to the device IP address To permanently change the HMI connection over to the selected CPU, clear the check box "Use the system IP address for switched communication" in the properties of the HMI connection. The HMI connection then uses the device IP address of the PROFINET interface. In the event of the failure of this CPU, then the HMI connection to this CPU permanently fails. Figure 13-8 Properties of the HMI connection Note Automatic setup of HMI connection When you drag-and-drop a tag from the S7-1500R/H redundant system into an HMI screen or into the HMI tag table, STEP 7 automatically sets up an HMI connection. This HMI connection exists by default between the PROFINET interface of the HMI device and the PROFINET interface X1 of the CPU with redundancy ID 1. The connection uses the device IP address of the PROFINET interface X1. You can change the HMI connection to a system IP address in the properties of the HMI connection. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 293 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H The following table shows which protocols of the Open User Communication you can use for the S7-1500R/H redundant system and the matching system data types and instructions. Table 13- 1 Protocols, system data types and usable instructions for Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H Protocol System data type TCP * TCON_QDN * TCON_IP_v4 * TCON_IP_RFC ISO-on-TCP UDP Modbus TCP * TCON_IP_v4 * TADDR_Param * TADDR_SEND_QDN * Instructions Establish connection and send/receive data via: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C or * TCON, TSEND/TRCV or * TCON, TUSEND/TURCV (connection can be terminated via TDISCON) Establish connection and send/receive data via: * TSEND_C/TRCV_C TADDR_RCV_IP * TUSEND/TURCV/TRCV (connection can be terminated via TDISCON) * TCON_IP_v4 * MB_CLIENT * TCON_QDN * MB_SERVER Communication 294 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6.1 Setting up an Open User Communication connection via the system IP address Introduction The S7-1500R/H redundant system can communicate with other devices via Open User Communication. You set up the connections in the user program, e.g. via the "TSEND_C" instruction. The S7-1500R/H redundant system does not support configured connections. You can either set up the connections either via the device IP addresses or via the system IP addresses of the PROFINET interfaces. Open User Communication via the system IP addresses of the S7-1500R/H redundant system If you set up the connection via a system IP address, then communication always takes place via the primary CPU. Recommendation: Always use a system IP address for Open User Communication. Open User Communication via the device IP addresses of the S7-1500R/H redundant system In redundant mode, the redundant system can establish or terminate connections and send or receive data via every device IP address. If you set up the connection via a device IP address, then communication takes place via the associated CPU. In the event of the failure of the CPU, then the entire communication via the device IP addresses of this CPU fails. Setting a connection via the system IP address How to set up a connection from the S7-1500R/H redundant system to a different CPU via the system IP address is described below. You set up the connection in the user program of the redundant system S7-1500R/H with a TSEND_C instruction. You create a corresponding TRCV_C instruction in the user program of the other CPU. The procedure is described using the example of a TCP connection between the S7-1500R/H redundant system and a CPU 1516-3PN/DP. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 295 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H Requirements S7-1500R redundant system with two CPUs 1513-1PN System IP address of the PROFINET interface X1 is enabled. CPU 1516-3PN/DP The PROFINET interfaces X1 of the CPUs 1513R and the PROFINET interface X2 of the CPU 1516-3PN/DP are located in the same subnet. Figure 13-9 Example configuration for TCP-connection TSEND_C instruction in the user program of the S7-1500R/H redundant system To set up a TCP-connection to a different CPU, follow these steps: 1. Create a "TSEND_C" instruction in the user program. Figure 13-10 S7-1500R/H: "TSEND_C" instruction 2. Select the "TSEND_C" instruction. Communication 296 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 3. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "Configuration" > "Connection parameters". On the left-hand side you can see the S7-1500R/H redundant system as a local end point of the connection: - "Interface:": X1 is the preset interface. - "Subnet:": If the interface X1 is assigned to an S7-subnet, then STEP 7 displays the name of the S7-subnet. - The check box "Use address of the H-system" is selected. The system IP address of the S7-1500R/H redundant system is in "Address". Figure 13-11 S7-1500R/H: Assigning parameters to the TSEND_C instruction in STEP 7 4. In "Partners" under "End point:" select the CPU 1516-3PN/DP as the communication partner. 5. In "Partners" under "Interface:" select the PROFINET interface X2 of the CPU 1516-3PN/DP. 6. In "Local" under "Connection data" select the setting "". STEP 7 creates a data block for the connection data in the user program of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. 7. In "Partners" under "Connection type" select the setting "TCP". STEP 7 creates a data block for the connection data in the user program of the other CPU. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 297 Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H TRCV_C instruction in the user program of the CPU 1516 Create a TRCV_C instruction in the user program of the CPU 1516-3PN/DP and assign parameters as below: Figure 13-12 S7-1500R/H: Assigning parameters to the TRCV_C instruction in STEP 7 Communication 298 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H 13.6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H Setting up a connection via a device IP address To set up an OUC-connection via a device IP address of one of the two CPUs: Select a suitable PROFINET interface of the S7-1500R/H redundant system. Deselect the "Use address of H-system" check box. Figure 13-13 OUC-connection via a device IP address Reference You can find additional information on system states in the S7-1500R/H (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) system manual. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 299 Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1 14 All-round protection - the task of Industrial Ethernet Security With Industrial Ethernet Security, individual devices, automation cells or network segments of an Ethernet network can be protected. Data transfer can also be protected by a combination of different security measures: Data espionage Data manipulation Unauthorized access Security measures Firewall - IP firewall with stateful packet inspection (layer 3 and 4) - Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3 (layer 2) - Bandwidth limitation - Global firewall rules All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a CP 1543-1 are protected by its firewall. Logging To allow monitoring, events can be stored in log files that can be read out using the configuration tool or can be sent automatically to a Syslog server. HTTPS For encrypted transfer of websites, for example during process control. FTPS (explicit mode) For encrypted transfer of files. Secure NTP For secure time-of-day synchronization and transmission. SNMPv3 For secure transmission of network analysis information safe from eavesdropping. VPN groups You can combine the CP 1543-1 with other security modules into VPN groups through configuration. IPsec tunnels are established between all the security modules of a VPN group (VPN). All internal nodes of these security modules can communicate securely with each other through this tunnel. Protection for devices and network segments The firewall and VPN groups protective functions can be applied to the operation of single devices, multiple devices, or entire network segments. Communication 300 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1 14.1 Firewall Additional information An overview with links to the most important contributions on Industrial Security is available in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/92651441). 14.1 Firewall Tasks of the firewall The purpose of the firewall functionality is to protect networks and stations from outside influences and disturbances. This means that only certain previously specified communications relations are permitted. To filter the data traffic, IPv4 addresses, IPv4 subnets, port numbers or MAC addresses among other things can be used. The firewall functionality can be configured for the following protocol levels: IP firewall with stateful packet inspection (layer 3 and 4) Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3 (layer 2) Firewall rules Firewall rules describe which packets are permitted or forbidden in which direction. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 301 Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1 14.2 Logging 14.2 Logging Functionality For test and monitoring purposes, the security module has diagnostics and logging functions. Diagnostics functions These include various system and status functions that you can use in online mode. Logging functions This involves the recording of system and security events. Depending on the event type, the recording is made in volatile or non-volatile local buffer areas of the CP 1543-1. As an alternative, it is also possible to record on a network server. The parameter assignment and evaluation of these functions is only possible with a network connection. Recording events with logging functions You specify which events should be recorded with the log settings. Here you can configure the following recording variants: Local logging With this variant, you record the events in local buffers of the CP 1543-1. In the online dialog of the Security Configuration Tool, you can then access these recordings, visualize them and archive them on the service station. Network Syslog With the network Syslog, you use a Syslog server in the network. This records the events according to the configuration in the log settings. 14.3 NTP client Functionality To check the time validity of a certificate and the time stamp of log entries, the date and time are maintained on the CP 1543-1 as on the CPU. This time can be synchronized with NTP. The CP 1543-1 forwards the synchronized time to the CPU via the backplane bus of the automation system. This way the CPU also receives a synchronized time for the time events in program execution. The automatic setting and periodic synchronization of the time takes place either via a secure or non-secure NTP server. You can assign a maximum of 4 NTP servers to the CP 1543-1. A mixed configuration of non-secure and secure NTP servers is not possible. Communication 302 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1 14.4 SNMP 14.4 SNMP Functionality Like the CPU, the CP 1543-1 supports the transfer of management information using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). To achieve this, an "SNMP agent" is installed on the CP/CPU that receives and responds to the SNMP queries. Information about the properties of devices capable of SNMP is contained in so-called MIB files (Management Information Base) for which the user needs to have the appropriate rights. With SNMPv1, the "community string" is also sent. The "community string" is like a password that is sent along with the SNMP query. The requested information is sent when the "community string" is correct. The request is discarded when the string is incorrect. With SNMPv3, data can be transferred encrypted. To do this, select either an authentication method or an authentication and encryption method. Possible selection: Authentication algorithm: none, MD5, SHA-1 Encryption algorithm: none, AES-128, DES You can deactivate the use of SNMP for the CP/CPU. Deactivate SNMP if the security guidelines in your network do not permit SNMP or if you use your own SNMP solution. To find out how to deactivate SNMP for the CPU, refer to section Disabling SNMP (Page 60). 14.5 VPN Functionality For security modules that protect the internal network, VPN (Virtual Private Network) tunnels provide a secure data connection through the non-secure external network. The module uses the IPsec protocol (tunnel mode of IPsec) for tunneling. In STEP 7 you can assign VPN groups to security modules. VPN tunnels are automatically established between all modules of a VPN group. A module in one project can belong to several different VPN groups at the same time in the process. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 303 Glossary Automation system Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process chains of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions according to the automation task. Backup CPU If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU controls the process. The backup CPU processes the user program synchronously and can take over process control if the primary CPU fails. Bus Transmission medium that connects several devices together. Data transmission can be performed electrically or via optical fibers, either in series or in parallel. Client Device in a network that requests a service from another device in the network (server). CM Communications module Communications module Module for communications tasks used in an automation system as an interface expansion of the CPU (for example PROFIBUS) and providing additional communications options (PtP). Communications processor Module for expanded communications tasks covering special applications, for example in the area of security. Consistent data Data that belongs together in terms of content and must not be separated when transferred. CP Communications processor Communication 304 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Glossary CPU Central Processing Unit - Central module of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic unit, memory, operating system and interface for programming device. Device Generic term for: Automation systems (PLC, PC, for example) Distributed I/O systems Field devices (for example, PLC, PC, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) and Active network components (for example, switches, routers) Gateways to PROFIBUS, AS interface or other fieldbus systems Device certificates Such certificates are signed by a certificate authority (CA). The signature of an end-entity certificate is checked with the public key of the certificate authority certificate. The "Subject" attribute must not be identical to the "Issuer" attribute. The "Subject", for example, contains the name of a program as with the OPC UA application certificate. "Issuer" is the certificate authority that signed the certificate. The "CA" field must be set to "False". DP master Within PROFIBUS DP, a master in the distributed I/O that behaves according to the EN 50170 standard, Part 3. See also DP slave DP slave Slave in the distributed I/O that is operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and behaves according to the EN 50170 standard, Part 3. See also DP master Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 305 Glossary Duplex Data transmission system; a distinction is made between full and half duplex. Half duplex: One channel is available for alternate data exchange (sending or receiving alternately but not at the same time). Full duplex: Two channels are available for simultaneous data exchange in both directions (simultaneous sending and receiving in both directions). End-entity certificate See also device certificate Ethernet International standard technology for local area networks (LAN) based on frames. It defines types of cables and signaling for the physical layer and packet formats and protocols for media access control. Ethernet network adapter Electronic circuitry for connecting a computer to an Ethernet network. It allows the exchange of data / communication within the network. FETCH/WRITE Server services using TCP/IP, ISO-on-TCP and ISO for access to system memory areas of S7 CPUs. Access (client function) is possible from a SIMATIC S5 or a third-party device/PC. FETCH: Read data directly; WRITE: Write data directly. Field device Device Freeport Freely programmable ASCII protocol; here for data transfer via a point-to-point connection. FTP File Transfer Protocol; a network protocol for transferring files via IP networks. FTP is used to download files from the server to the client or to upload files from the client to the server. FTP directories can also be created and read out and directories and files can be renamed or deleted. HMI Human Machine Interface, device for visualization and control of automation processes. Communication 306 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Glossary IE Industrial Ethernet IM Interface module Industrial Ethernet Guideline for setting up an Ethernet network in an industrial environment. The essential difference compared with standard Ethernet is the mechanical ruggedness and immunity to noise of the individual components. Instruction The smallest self-contained unit of a user program characterized by its structure, function or purpose as a separate part of the user program. An instruction represents an operation procedure for the processor. Interface module Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O system via a fieldbus to the CPU (IO controller/DP master) and prepares the data for the I/O modules. Intermediate CA certificate This is a certificate authority certificate that is signed with the private key of a root certificate authority. An intermediate certificate authority signs end-entity certificates with its private key. The signature of these end-entity certificates is verified with the public key of the intermediate certificate authority. The "Subject" and "Issuer" attributes of the intermediate CA certificate must not be identical. This certificate authority has after all not signed its certificate itself. The "CA" field must be set to "True". IO controller, PROFINET IO controller Central device in a PROFINET system, usually a classic programmable logic controller or PC. The IO controller sets up connections to the IO devices, exchanges data with them, thus controls and monitors the system. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 307 Glossary IO device, PROFINET IO device Device in the distributed I/O of a PROFINET system that is monitored and controlled by an IO controller (for example distributed inputs/outputs, valve islands, frequency converters, switches). IP address Binary number that is used as a unique address in computer networks in conjunction with the Internet Protocol (IP). It makes these devices uniquely addressable and individually accessible. An IPv4 address can be evaluated using a binary subnet mask that results in a network part or a host part as a structure. The textual representation of an IPv4 address consists, for example, of 4 decimal numbers with the value range 0 to 255. The decimal numbers are separated by periods. IPv4 subnet mask Binary mask, with which an IPv4 address (as a binary number) is divided into a "network part" and a "host part". ISO protocol Communications protocol for message or packet-oriented transfer of data in an Ethernet network. This protocol is hardware-oriented, very fast and allows dynamic data lengths. The ISO protocol is suitable for medium to large volumes of data. ISO-on-TCP protocol Communications protocol capable of S7 routing for packet-oriented transfer of data in an Ethernet network; provides network addressing. The ISO-on-TCP protocol is suitable for medium and large volumes of data and allows dynamic data lengths. Linear bus topology Network topology characterized by the arrangement of the devices in a line (bus). MAC address Worldwide unique device identification for all Ethernet devices. The MAC address is assigned by the manufacturer and has a 3-byte vendor ID and 3-byte device ID as a consecutive number. Master Higher-level, active participant in the communication/on a PROFIBUS subnet. The master has rights to access the bus (token) and can request and send data. See also DP master Communication 308 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Glossary Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit; Open communications protocol for serial interfaces based on a master/slave architecture. Modbus TCP Transmission Control Protocol; Open communications protocol for Ethernet based on a master/slave architecture. The data are transmitted as TCP/IP packets. Network A network consists of one or more interconnected subnets with any number of devices. Several networks can exist alongside each other. NTP The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a standard for synchronizing clocks in automation systems via Industrial Ethernet. NTP uses the connectionless UDP transport protocol for the Internet. OPC UA OPC Unified Automation is a protocol for communication between machines, developed by the OPC Foundation. Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of a single CPU at a specific time. The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems have the STOP, STARTUP and RUN operating states. The primary CPU of the redundant system S7-1500R/H has the operating states STOP, STARTUP, RUN, RUN-Syncup and RUN-Redundant. The backup CPU has the operating states STOP, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. Operating system Software that allows the use and operation of a computer. The operating system manages resources such as memory, input and output devices and controls the execution of programs. PG Programming device PNO PROFIBUS user organization Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 309 Glossary Point-to-point connection Bidirectional data exchange via communications modules with a serial interface between two communications partners (and two only). Port Physical connector to connect devices to PROFINET. PROFINET interfaces have one or more ports. Primary CPU If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU controls the process. The backup CPU processes the user program synchronously and can take over process control if the primary CPU fails. Process image (I/O) The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the start of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the process image output as a signal state to the output modules. The CPU then reads the signal states of the input modules into the process image input. The CPU then executes the user program. PROFIBUS Process Field Bus - European Fieldbus standard. PROFIBUS address Unique identifier of a device connected to PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS address is sent in the frame to address a device. PROFIBUS device Device with at least one PROFIBUS interface either electrical (for example RS-485) or optical (for example Polymer Optical Fiber). PROFIBUS user organization Technical committee dedicated to the definition and development of the PROFIBUS and PROFINET standard. PROFIBUS DP A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170. DP stands for distributed I/O = fast, real-time capable, cyclic data exchange. From the perspective of the user program, the distributed I/O is addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized IO. Communication 310 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Glossary PROFINET Open component-based industrial communications system based on Ethernet for distributed automation systems. Communications technology promoted by the PROFIBUS user organization. PROFINET device Device that always has a PROFINET interface (electrical, optical, wireless). PROFINET interface Interface of a module capable of communication (for example CPU, CP) with one or more ports. A MAC address is assigned to the interface in the factory. Along with the IP address and the device name (from the individual configuration), this interface address ensures that the PROFINET device is identified uniquely in the network. The interface can be electrical, optical or wireless. PROFINET IO IO stands for input/output; distributed I/O (fast, cyclic data exchange with real-time capability). From the perspective of the user program, the distributed I/O is addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized IO. PROFINET IO as the Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International defines a cross-vendor communication, automation, and engineering model. With PROFINET IO, a switching technology is used that allows all devices to access the network at any time. In this way, the network can be used much more efficiently through the simultaneous data transfer of several devices. Simultaneous sending and receiving is enabled via the full-duplex operation of Switched Ethernet. PROFINET IO is based on switched Ethernet with full-duplex operation and a bandwidth of 100 Mbps. Programming device Programming devices are essentially compact and portable PCs which are suitable for industrial applications. They are identified by a special hardware and software configuration for programmable logic controllers. Protocol Agreement on the rules by which the communication between two or more communication partners transpires. PtP Point-to-Point, interface and/or transmission protocol for bidirectional data exchange between two (and only two) communications partners. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 311 Glossary Redundant systems Redundant systems have multiple (redundant) instances of key automation components. Process control is maintained if a redundant component fails. Ring topology All devices of a network are connected together in a ring. Root CA certificates See also root certificate Root certificate This is the certificate of a certificate authority: It signs end-entity certificates and intermediate CA certificates with its private key. The "Subject" attribute and the "Issuer" of this certificate must be identical. This certificate authority has signed its certificate itself. The "CA" field must be set to "True". TIA Portal V14 has such a root CA certificate: If you configure the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 in the TIA Portal, the TIA Portal generates an end-entity certificate for the OPC UA server and signs that certificate with its own private key. The signature of this end-entity certificate can be verified with the public key of the TIA Portal. This key can be found in the root CA certificate of the TIA Portal. Router Network node with a unique identifier (name and address) that connects subnets together and allows transportation of data to uniquely identified communications nodes in the network. RS232, RS422 and RS485 Standard for serial interfaces. RTU Modbus RTU (RTU: Remote Terminal Unit, transfers the data in binary form; allows a good data throughput. The data must be converted to a readable format before it can be evaluated. S7 routing Communication between S7 automation systems, S7 applications or PC stations in different S7 subnets via one or more network nodes functioning as S7 routers. Communication 312 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Glossary SDA service Send Data with Acknowledge. SDA is an elementary service with which an initiator (for example DP master) can send a message to other devices and then receives acknowledgment of receipt immediately afterwards. SDN service Send Data with No Acknowledge. This service is used primarily to send data to multiple stations and the service therefore remains unacknowledged. Suitable for synchronization tasks and status messages. Security Generic term for all the measures taken to protect against Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized access to data Loss of integrity due to manipulation of data Loss of availability due to the destruction of data Self-signed certificates These are certificates that you sign with your private key and use as end-entity certificates. The signature of these end-entity certificates is verified with your public key. The "Subject" and "Issuer" attributes of self-signed certificates must be identical: You have signed your certificate yourself. The "CA" field must be set to "False". You can, for example, use self-signed certificates as application certificates for an OPC UA client. The procedure required to generate a self-signed certificate with the certificate generator of the OPC Foundation is described here (Page ). Server A device or more generally an object that can provide certain services; the service is performed at the request of a client. Slave Distributed device in a fieldbus system that can only exchange data with a master after the master has requested this. See also DP slave Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 313 Glossary SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol, uses the wireless UDP transport protocol. SNMP works in much the same way as the client/server model. The SNMP manager monitors the network nodes. The SNMP agents collect the various network-specific information in the individual network nodes and makes this information available in a structured form in the MIB (Management Information Base). This information allows a network management system to run detailed network diagnostics. Subnet Part of a network whose parameters must be matched up on the devices (for example in PROFINET). A subnet includes the bus components and all connected stations. Subnets can be linked together, for example using gateways or routers to form one network. Switch Network components used to connect several terminal devices or network segments in a local network (LAN). System states The system states of the redundant system S7-1500R/H result from the operating states of the primary and backup CPUs. The term system state is used as a simplified expression that refers to the operating states that occur simultaneously on both CPUs. The redundant system S7-1500R/H has the system states STOP, STARTUP, RUN-Solo, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. System IP address In addition to the device IP addresses of the CPUs, the redundant system S7-1500R/H supports system IP addresses: System IP address for the X1 PROFINET interfaces of the two CPUs (system IP address X1) System IP address for the X2 PROFINET interfaces of the two CPUs (system IP address X2) You use the system IP addresses for communication with other devices (for example, HMI devices, CPUs, PG/PC). The devices always communicate over the system IP address with the primary CPU of the redundant system. This ensures that the communication partner can communicate with the new primary CPU (previously backup CPU) in the RUN-Solo system state after failure of the original primary CPU in redundant operation. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, connection-oriented network protocol, generally recognized standard for data exchange in heterogeneous networks. Communication 314 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Glossary Time-of-day synchronization Capability of transferring a standard system time from a single source to all devices in the system so that their clocks can be set according to the standard time. Tree topology Network topology characterized by a branched structure: Two or more bus nodes are connected to each bus node. Twisted-pair Fast Ethernet via twisted-pair cables is based on the IEEE 802.3u standard (100 Base-TX). The transmission medium is a shielded 2x2 twisted-pair cable with an impedance of 100 Ohms (22 AWG). The transmission characteristics of this cable must meet the requirements of category 5. The maximum length of the connection between the terminal and the network component must not exceed 100 m. The connectors are designed according to the 100Base-TX standard with the RJ-45 connector system. UDP User Datagram Protocol; communications protocol for fast and uncomplicated data transfer, without acknowledgment. There are no error checking mechanisms as found in TCP/IP. User program In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between the CPU operating system and user programs. The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a system or process can be controlled. The user program is assigned to a programmable module (for example, CPU, FM) and can be structured in smaller units. USS Universal Serial Interface protocol (Universelles Serielles Schnittstellen-Protokoll); defines an access method according to the master-slave principle for communication via a serial bus. Web server Software/communications service for data exchange via the Internet. The web server transfers the documents using standardized transmission protocols (HTTP, HTTPS) to a Web browser. Documents can be static or put together dynamically from different sources by the web server on request from the Web browser. Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 315 Index A Advanced Encryption Algorithm, 40 AES, 40 Applicant, 43 Asymmetric encryption, 41 B BRCV, 115 BSEND, 115 C Certificate authorities, 43 Certificate subject, 43 CM, 17 Communication Data record routing, 265 HMI communication, 65 Open communication, 67 Open User Communication, 67 PG communication, 63 Point-to-point connection, 123 S7 communication, 114 S7 routing, 260 Communication options Overview, 22 Communication via PUT/GET instruction Creating and configuring a connection, 117 Communications Communication protocols, 68 Establishment and termination, 93 Communications module, 17 Communications processor, 17 Communications services Connection resources, 30 Connection Diagnostics, 279 Instructions for Open User Communication, 70 Connection diagnostics, 279 Connection resources Data record routing, 273 Display in STEP 7, 275 Display in the Web server, 278 HMI communication, 272 Module-specific, 276 occupying, 274 Overview, 30, 267 S7 routing, 273 Station specific, 275 Consistency of data, 34 CP, 17 D Data consistency, 34 Data record routing, 265 Digital certificates, 43 E E-mail, 22, 69, 89 End-entity certificate, 46 Establishment and termination of communications, 93 Export file for OPC UA, 167 F FDL, 69 Fetch, 22 Firewall, 301 Freeport protocol, 123 FTP, 22, 69, 89, 90 G GET, 115 H Handshake Protocol, 42 HMI communication, 22, 65 I IM, 21 Industrial Ethernet Security, 300 Interface module, 21 Interfaces for communication, 18 Communication 316 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG Index Interfaces of communications modules Point-to-point connection, 20 Interfaces of communications processors, 19 IP address, emergency address (temporary), 282 ISO, 22, 68 ISO-on-TCP, 68, 77 L Logging, 302 M Man-in-the-middle attack, 43 Modbus protocol (RTU), 123 Modbus TCP, 69 N NTP, 22, 302 Commissioning, 168 Customizing the server certificate, 183 Generating a server certificate, 175 Performance, 166 Performance increase, 166 Publishing interval, 173 Runtime licenses, 192 Sampling interval, 174 Security settings, 178, 186 Subscription, 172 TCP port, 172, 173 Write and read rights, 163 XML export file, 167 Open communication Connection configuration, 77 Setting up e-mail, 89 Setting up FTP, 90 Setting up TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP, 77 Open User Communication Features, 67 Instructions, 70 Protocols, 68 OpenSSL, 149 O Occupation of connection resources, 274 OPC UA Certificate generator, 148 DB tags, 163 End points, 157 Identifier, 133 Introduction, 129, 130, 131 Layer model, 153 Namespace, 132 OpenSSL, 149 PLC tags, 163 Secure channel, 152 Secure connection, 152 Security mechanisms, 143 Security settings, 157 Signing and encryption, 145 X.509 certificates, 147 OPC UA client Authentication, 252 Basics, 138 Certificate, 181, 249 OPC UA server Address space, 134 Addressing, 170 Application name, 169 Authentication, 189 Basics, 155 P PCT, 266 PG communication, 22, 63 Point-to-point connection, 22, 123 Private Key, 38 Procedure 3964(R), 123 Protocols for Open User Communication, 68 Public Key, 38 PUT, 115 R Record Protocol, 42 RFC 5280, 38 Root certificate, 46 S S7 communication, 22, 114, 273 S7 routing, 260 Connection resources, 273 Secure communication, 38 Secure Socket Layer, 42 Security, 300 Security measures, 300 Firewall, 301 Communication Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG 317 Index Logging, 302 NTP, 302 SNMP, 303 Self-signed certificates, 44 Server certificate, 183 Setting up a connection, 30 By configuring, 81 ISO connection with CP 1543-1, 82 Signature, 45 SNMP, 22, 303 SSL, 42 Symmetric encryption, 40 Syslog, 302 System data type, 72 T TCON, 71 TCP, 22, 68, 77 TDISCON, 71 Time-of-day synchronization, 22 TLS, 42 Transport Layer Security, 42 TRCV, 71 TRCV_C, 71 TSEND, 71 TSEND_C, 71 U UDP, 22, 68, 77 URCV, 115 USEND, 115 USS protocol, 123 W Web server, 22 Write, 22 X X.509, 38 Communication 318 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03735815-AG ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC PROFINET PROFINET mit STEP 7 V15 Function Manual 2 ___________________ Description Parameter 3 ___________________ assignment/addressing Diagnostics and ___________________ 4 maintenance ___________________ 5 Functions 6 ___________ PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 10/2018 A5E03444486-AH Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03444486-AH 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This function manual provides an overview of the PROFINET communication system with SIMATIC STEP 7 V15. STEP 7 V15 is integrated into the high-performance graphical Totally Integrated Automation Portal (TIA Portal), the new integration platform for all automation software tools. This function manual supports you in planning a PROFINET system. The manual is structured into the following subject areas: PROFINET basics PROFINET diagnostics PROFINET functions Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the manual: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows-based computers Knowledge about how to use STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Scope This documentation is the basic documentation for all SIMATIC products from the PROFINET environment. The product documentation is based on this documentation. The examples are based on the functionality of the S7-1500 automation system. What's new in the PROFINET Function Manual, Edition 10/2018 compared to Edition 12/2017 This manual (version 10/2018) includes the following new functions compared to the previous version (version 12/2017): Function Applications Your benefits PROFINET IO with the redundant S7-1500R/H system In a PROFINET IO system with the redundant S7-1500R/H system, the IO communication continues even when one CPU fails. The redundant S7-1500R/H system offers a high degree of reliability and system availability. A redundant configuration of the most important automation components reduces the probability of production downtimes and the consequences of component failures. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 3 Preface What's new in the PROFINET function manual, version 12/2017 compared to version 09/2016 This manual (version 12/2017) encompasses the following new functions compared to the previous version (version 09/2016): Function Applications Your benefits Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device You can specify the IP address of a router for each IO device. You reach the IO device from outside the IP subnet through the router. In the past, it was only possible to specify a router for a PROFINET IO interface at the IO controller. The IO devices inherited the setting of the IO controller interface. Now you can set the router address independently of the IO controller setting. This allows, for example, a router address at the IO device although you have not set a router address or have set a different address at the IO controller. Configuring an IO device through hardware detection You can detect an existing IO device and enter STEP 7 inserts the IO device with all the modules it in your project. and submodules into the project. Article numbers and firmware versions between real and configured IO devices match. Asset management You can centrally manage non-PROFINET components (assets) of a PROFINET device. The PROFINET device makes the identification data of the assets available for evaluation via a standardized data record. You reduce the project planning work required. Asset manageSpecial application of asset management: ment data record for I- From the point of view of a higher-level IO devices controller, the modules plugged into the Idevice represent assets. The user program in the I-device compiles the asset management data record. The IO controller can read identification data of the I-device modules through this data record. The new standardized PROFINET service makes it possible to manage all the hardware and firmware components of PROFINET devices centrally. The possibilities available for filtering device data, for example, depend on the range of performance of the evaluating application. See Asset management. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Preface What's new in the PROFINET function manual, Version 09/2016 compared to Version 12/2014 This manual (version 09/2016) encompasses the following new functions compared to the previous version (version 12/2014): Function Applications Your benefits PROFINET IO on the 2nd PROFINET interface You can operate another PROFINET IO system on the CPU or connect additional IO devices. You use a fieldbus type in the plant. The CPU can perform fast and deterministic data exchange as an I-device with a higher-level controller (PROFINET/Ethernet) through the second line. IRT with very short You realize high-end applications with IO data cycle times down communication which place very high perforto 125 s mance demands on the IO processing. You make PROFINET IO communication and standard communication possible via one cable even with a send clock of 125 s. MRPD: Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of frames PROFINET IO IRT enables you to realize applications that place particularly high demands on the reliability and accuracy (isochronous mode). By sending the cyclic IO data in both directions in the ring, the communication to the IO devices is maintained even when the ring is interrupted and does not result in device failure even with fast update times. You achieve higher reliability than with MRP. PROFINET performance upgrade You can implement applications with high speed and send clock requirements. This is of interest to applications with high demands on performance. Better utilization of the bandwidth results in short reaction times. Limitation of the data infeed into the network You limit the network load for standard Ethernet communication to a maximum value. You flatten peaks in the data feed. You share the remaining bandwidth based on demand. Conventions STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions. This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The figures may differ slightly from the device supplied. You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below: Note A note contains important information on the product, on handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 5 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Preface Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 7 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 12 2 Description............................................................................................................................................ 17 3 8 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 Introduction to PROFINET ..................................................................................................... 17 PROFINET terms ................................................................................................................... 19 Basic terminology of communication ..................................................................................... 23 PROFINET interface .............................................................................................................. 25 Implementation of the PROFINET device model in SIMATIC ............................................... 28 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 Setting up PROFINET ............................................................................................................ 30 Active Network Components.................................................................................................. 31 Cabling technology ................................................................................................................ 33 Wireless design ...................................................................................................................... 35 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 35 Tips on assembly ................................................................................................................... 37 Network security..................................................................................................................... 39 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 39 Network components and software........................................................................................ 41 Application example ............................................................................................................... 42 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 44 3.1 Assigning an IO device to an IO controller ............................................................................ 45 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 Device name and IP address ................................................................................................. 47 Device name .......................................................................................................................... 48 IP address .............................................................................................................................. 49 Assigning a device name and IP address .............................................................................. 52 Assign device name via communication table ....................................................................... 57 Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device .................... 60 3.3 Configuring an IO device through hardware detection .......................................................... 62 3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device .................................................................. 64 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 Configuring topology .............................................................................................................. 68 Topology view in STEP 7 ....................................................................................................... 71 Interconnecting ports in the topology view ............................................................................. 73 Interconnecting ports - Inspector window .............................................................................. 74 Automatic assignment of devices by offline/online comparison ............................................ 75 Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the project .............................. 76 Include the devices identified online manually in the project ................................................. 77 Automatic assignment of devices by advanced offline/online comparison ............................ 77 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Table of contents 4 5 Diagnostics and maintenance ............................................................................................................... 78 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2 4.1.2.3 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO ............................................................................78 Diagnostics levels in PROFINET IO .......................................................................................80 Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................82 I&M data (identification and maintenance) .............................................................................82 Loading I&M data to PROFINET IO devices and your modules ............................................82 Asset management .................................................................................................................84 4.2 Diagnostics using status LEDs ...............................................................................................97 4.3 Diagnostics via the display of the S7-1500 CPUs ..................................................................98 4.4 Diagnostics via Web server ..................................................................................................101 4.5 Diagnostics in STEP 7 ..........................................................................................................104 4.6 Extended maintenance concept ...........................................................................................107 4.7 Diagnostics of the network topology .....................................................................................109 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 Diagnostics in the user program ...........................................................................................110 Diagnostics and configuration data records .........................................................................110 Evaluate diagnostics in the user program ............................................................................112 Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 115 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 Connecting other bus systems .............................................................................................115 Linking PROFINET and PROFIBUS .....................................................................................117 Connect the DP slave via the IE/PB Link to a PROFINET IO system ..................................118 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices)...........................................................................................120 I-device functionality .............................................................................................................120 Properties and Advantages of the I-Device ..........................................................................121 Characteristics of an I-Device ...............................................................................................122 Data Exchange between higher- and lower-level IO system ................................................126 Configuring the I-device ........................................................................................................128 Program examples ................................................................................................................130 Diagnostics and interrupt characteristics ..............................................................................133 Rules for the Topology of a PROFINET IO System with I-Device ........................................137 Boundary conditions when using I-devices ..........................................................................140 Configuring PROFIenergy with I-devices..............................................................................141 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 Shared device .......................................................................................................................143 Useful information on shared devices ...................................................................................143 Configuring shared device ....................................................................................................147 Configuring an I-device as a shared device..........................................................................151 Module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO) ......................................................161 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) .....................................................................................168 Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) .....................................................................................170 Configuring media redundancy .............................................................................................173 Media redundancy with planned duplication of frames (MRPD; not for S7-1500R/H) .........176 Multiple rings .........................................................................................................................178 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 9 Table of contents 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 Real-time communication .................................................................................................... 182 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 182 RT ........................................................................................................................................ 183 IRT ....................................................................................................................................... 184 Comparison of RT and IRT .................................................................................................. 187 Configuring PROFINET IO with IRT .................................................................................... 188 Setting the bandwidth usage for the send clock .................................................................. 191 Setup recommendations for optimizing PROFINET ............................................................ 192 Limitation of the data infeed into the network ...................................................................... 196 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 PROFINET with performance upgrade ................................................................................ 197 Dynamic frame packing ....................................................................................................... 198 Fragmentation ...................................................................................................................... 200 Fast forwarding .................................................................................................................... 201 Configuration of IRT with high performance ........................................................................ 202 Sample configuration for IRT with high performance........................................................... 206 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.4.1 5.7.4.2 5.7.4.3 5.7.5 5.7.5.1 5.7.5.2 5.7.5.3 Isochronous mode ............................................................................................................... 207 What is isochronous mode?................................................................................................. 207 Use of isochronous mode .................................................................................................... 208 Time sequence of synchronization on PROFINET IO ......................................................... 210 Configuring isochronous mode ............................................................................................ 211 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 211 Configuring isochronous mode on PROFINET IO ............................................................... 213 Setting the application cycle and delay time ........................................................................ 216 Programming isochronous mode ......................................................................................... 217 Basics of Programming ........................................................................................................ 217 Program execution according to the IPO model .................................................................. 218 Program execution according to the OIP model .................................................................. 220 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 Device replacement without exchangeable medium ........................................................... 222 Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG function ....................................... 223 Replacing an IO device without exchangeable medium ...................................................... 224 Permit overwriting of PROFINET device name ................................................................... 226 5.9 5.9.1 5.9.1.1 5.9.1.2 5.9.1.3 5.9.2 5.9.2.1 5.9.2.2 5.9.2.3 5.9.2.4 5.9.2.5 5.9.2.6 Standard machine projects .................................................................................................. 229 Multiple use IO systems ....................................................................................................... 230 What you should know about multiple use IO systems ....................................................... 230 Configuring multiple use IO systems ................................................................................... 234 Adapt multiple use IO systems locally ................................................................................. 236 Configuration control for IO systems ................................................................................... 239 Information about configuration control of IO systems ........................................................ 239 Configuring IO devices as optional ...................................................................................... 242 Enabling optional IO devices in the program ....................................................................... 244 Configuring flexible order of IO devices ............................................................................... 250 Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the program ..................................................... 253 System behavior and rules .................................................................................................. 256 5.10 Saving energy with PROFIenergy........................................................................................ 258 5.11 5.11.1 Docking systems .................................................................................................................. 260 Configuring docking systems ............................................................................................... 263 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Table of contents 5.12 5.12.1 5.12.2 5.12.3 5.12.4 5.12.5 5.12.6 6 Accelerating startup ..............................................................................................................265 Options for accelerating the startup of IO devices ................................................................265 Prioritized startup ..................................................................................................................267 Configuring prioritized startup ...............................................................................................268 Optimize the port settings .....................................................................................................270 Optimize the cabling of the ports ..........................................................................................271 Measures in the user program ..............................................................................................272 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system ............................................................................ 273 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system .........................................274 6.2 Configuring an IO device with system redundancy S2 in the redundant S7-1500R/H system ...................................................................................................................................282 6.3 Configuring media redundancy (MRP) for a configuration with the redundant S71500R/H system ...................................................................................................................283 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 285 Index................................................................................................................................................... 299 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 11 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 13 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 15 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 2 Introduction to PROFINET What is PROFINET IO? Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET IO is the logical further development of: PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus and Industrial Ethernet PROFINET IO is based on 20 years of experience with the successful PROFIBUS DP and combines the normal user operations with the simultaneous use of innovative concepts of Ethernet technology. This ensures the integration of PROFIBUS DP into the PROFINET world. PROFINET IO as the Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS/PROFINET International defines a cross-vendor communication, automation, and engineering model. Objectives of PROFINET The objectives of PROFINET: Industrial networking, based on Industrial Ethernet (open Ethernet standard) Compatibility of Industrial Ethernet and standard Ethernet components High robustness due to Industrial Ethernet devices. Industrial Ethernet devices are suited to the industrial environment (temperature, noise immunity, etc.). Use of IT standards such as TCP/IP, http. Real-time capability Seamless integration of other fieldbus systems PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 17 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET Implementation of PROFINET in SIMATIC PROFINET is implemented in SIMATIC as follows: We have implemented communication between field devices in SIMATIC with PROFINET IO. Installation technology and network components are available as SIMATIC NET products. Ethernet standard protocol and procedures (e.g., SNMP = Simple Network Management Protocol for network parameter assignment and diagnostics) are used for remote maintenance and network diagnostics. Figure 2-1 PROFINET overview configuration PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET STEP 7 The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you in setting up and configuring an automation solution. STEP 7 provides a uniform application view over all bus systems. Documentation from PROFIBUS & PROFINET International on the Internet You will find numerous documents on the topic of PROFINET at the Internet address (http://www.profibus.com) of the "PROFIBUS & PROFINET International" PROFIBUS user organization, which is also responsible for PROFINET. Additional information can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/profinet). Overview of the most important documents and links A compilation of the most important PROFINET application examples, FAQs and other contributions in the Industry Online Support is available in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108165711). 2.1.1 PROFINET terms Definition: Devices in the PROFINET environment In the PROFINET environment, "device" is the generic term for: Automation systems (PLC, PC, for example) Distributed I/O systems Field devices (for example, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) Active network components (for example, switches, routers) Gateways to PROFIBUS, AS interface or other fieldbus systems PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 19 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET PROFINET IO devices The following graphic shows the general names used for the most important devices in PROFINET. In the table below the graphic you can find the names of the individual components in the PROFINET IO context. Number PROFINET Explanation PROFINET IO System IO controller Device used to address the connected IO devices. This means that: The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with field devices. Programming device / PC (PROFINET IO supervisor) PG/PC/HMI device used for commissioning and for diagnostics PROFINET/Industrial Ether Network infrastructure net HMI (Human Machine Interface) Device for operating and monitoring functions. IO device A distributed field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers (e.g., Distributed IO, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches with integrated PROFINET IO functionality) I-device Intelligent IO device Figure 2-2 PROFINET devices PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET IO communication via PROFINET IO The inputs and outputs of distributed I/O devices are read and written by means of PROFINET IO using what is referred to as IO communication. The following figure provides an overview of IO communication by means of PROFINET IO. A IO controller - IO controller communication via PN/PN coupler B IO controller - I-device communication C IO controller - IO-device communication Figure 2-3 IO communication via PROFINET IO PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 21 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET IO communication via PROFINET IO Table 2- 1 IO communication via PROFINET IO Communication between ... Explanation IO controllers and IO devices The IO controller sends data cyclically to the IO devices of its PROFINET IO system and receives data from these devices. IO controller and I-device A fixed quantity of data is transferred cyclically between the user programs in CPUs of IO controllers and I-devices. The IO controller does not access the I/O module of the I-device, but instead accesses configured address ranges, i.e. transfer ranges, which may be located inside our outside the process image of the CPU of the I-device. If parts of the process image are used as transfer ranges, it is not permitted to use these for real I/O modules. Data transfer takes place using load- and transfer operations via the process image or via direct access. IO controller and IO controller A fixed quantity of data is cyclically transferred between the user programs in CPUs of IO controllers. A PN/PN coupler is required as additional hardware. The IO controllers mutually access configured address ranges, i.e. transfer ranges, which may be located inside or outside the process image of the CPU. If parts of the process image are used as transfer ranges, it is not permitted to use these for real I/O modules. Data transfer takes place using load- and transfer operations via the process image or via direct access. See also Communication (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192925) Network security (Page 39) Functions (Page 115) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET 2.1.2 Basic terminology of communication PROFINET communication PROFINET communication takes place via Industrial Ethernet. The following transmission types are supported: Acyclic transmission of engineering and diagnostics data and interrupts Cyclic transmission of user data The PROFINET-IO communication takes place in real-time. For additional information on the real-time communication, refer to chapter Real-time communication (Page 182). Transparent data access Access to process data from different levels of the factory is supported by PROFINET communication. By using Industrial Ethernet, standard mechanisms of communication and information technology such as OPC/XML can now be used along with standard protocols such as UDP/TCP/IP and HTTP in automation engineering. This allows transparent access from company management level directly to the data from the automation systems at the control level and production level. Management level Control level Production level Figure 2-4 Access to process data PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 23 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET Update time The update time is a time interval. IO controller and IO device/I-device exchange IO data cyclically in the IO system within this time interval. The update time can be configured separately for each IO device and determines the interval at which output data is sent from the IO controller to the IO device (output module/submodule) as well as input data from the IO device to the IO controller (input module/submodule). STEP 7 calculates the update time automatically in the default setting for each IO device of the PROFINET IO system, taking into account the volume of data to be exchanged as well as the set send clock. For additional information on the update time, refer to section Real-time communication (Page 182). Watchdog time The watchdog time is the time interval that an IO controller or IO device permits, without receiving IO data. If the IO device is not supplied by the IO controller with data within the watchdog time, the device detects the missing frames and outputs substitute values. This is reported in the IO controller as a station failure. Send clock In STEP 7, the watchdog time is made up from an integral multiple of the update time and can be set by the user. The period of time between two consecutive communication cycles. The send clock is the shortest possible interval in data exchange. Relationship between the update time and send clock The calculated update times are reduction ratios (1, 2, 4, 8, ..., 512) of the send clock. The minimum possible update time thus depends on the minimum send clock of the IO controller that can be set and the efficiency of the IO controller and IO device. Depending on the send clock, it can be that only some of the reduction ratios are available (STEP 7 guarantees this through a pre-selection). The following tables illustrate the dependency of the update time that can be set on the send clock, using an example of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP. The update times satisfy the requirements of the PROFINET standard IEC 61158. Table 2- 2 Send clock 250 s 500 s 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms With real-time communication the following applies: Update time 250 s to 128 ms 500 s to 256 ms 1 ms to 512 ms 2 ms to 512 ms 4 ms to 512 ms Reduction ratios 1,2, ..., 512 1,2, ..., 512 1,2, ..., 512 1,2, ..., 256 1,2, ..., 128 Additional information For information on real-time communication, refer to the section Real-Time Communication (RT) (Page 183). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET 2.1.3 PROFINET interface Overview PROFINET devices of the SIMATIC product family have one or more PROFINET interfaces (Ethernet controller/interface). The PROFINET interfaces have one or more ports (physical connection options). In the case of PROFINET interfaces with multiple ports, the devices have an integrated switch. PROFINET devices with two ports on one interface allow you to configure the system in a line or ring topology. PROFINET devices with three or more ports on one interface are also ideal for setting up tree topologies. Properties and rules for naming the PROFINET interface and its representation in STEP 7 are explained in the following. Properties Every PROFINET device on the network is uniquely identified via its PROFINET interface. For this purpose, each PROFINET interface has: A MAC address (factory default) An IP address A PROFINET device name Identification and numbering of the interfaces and ports Interfaces and ports for all modules and devices in the PROFINET system are identified with the following characters: Table 2- 3 Identification for interfaces and ports of PROFINET devices Element Interface Symbol X Port P Ring port R Interface number In ascending order starting from number 1 In ascending order starting from number 1 (for each interface) Examples of identification Three examples illustrate the rules for identifying PROFINET interfaces: Table 2- 4 Examples for identifying PROFINET interfaces Sample labeling X2 P1 X1 P2 X1 P1 R Interface number 2 1 1 Port number 1 2 1 (ring port) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 25 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET Representation of PROFINET Interfaces in the Topology Overview in STEP 7 You can find the PROFINET interface in the topology overview in STEP 7. The PROFINET interface for an IO controller and an IO device is represented as follows in STEP 7: Number Description PROFINET interface of an IO controller in STEP 7 PROFINET interface of an IO device in STEP 7 These lines represent the PROFINET interface. These lines represent the "ports" of a PROFINET interface. Figure 2-5 Representation of the PROFINET interfaces in STEP 7 Schematic Representation of a PROFINET Interface with Integrated Switch The following schematic diagram shows the PROFINET interface with integrated switch and its ports for all PROFINETdevices. Figure 2-6 PROFINET interface with integrated switch Functional differences of the PROFINET interfaces PROFINET interfaces can provide different functions. PROFINET interface functions include identification, configuration, diagnostics and communication services (e.g., open communication). PROFINET interfaces that provide PROFINET IO functions and network security functions are also available. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET The following table illustrates the differences using the example of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP (as of firmware version V2.0), which features two PROFINET interfaces with different functionality. Table 2- 5 Differences between the PROFINET interfaces of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP (as of firmware version V2.0) PROFINET interface (X1) PROFINET interface (X2) 2 ports with PROFINET IO functionality: 1 port with PROFINET IO functionality: Identification, configuration and diagnostics PG communication HMI communication S7 communication Time-of-day synchronization Web server Open communication OPC UA server IO controller I-device RT IRT - Isochronous mode - Media redundancy - Prioritized startup - Additional Information on the Functionality of PROFINET interfaces You can find information on the number and functionality of the interfaces of a PROFINET device in the documentation for the specificPROFINET device. PROFINET communication services are described in the Communication function manual. In the Network security section you can find components that are used to protect networks against hazards. The Functions section describes the PROFINET IO functions. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 27 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET 2.1.4 Implementation of the PROFINET device model in SIMATIC Slots and modules A PROFINET device can have a modular and compact structure. A modular PROFINET device consists of slots into which the modules are inserted. The modules have channels which are used to read and output process signals. A compact device has the same design and can include modules, however, it cannot be physically expanded, which means that no modules can be inserted. This is illustrated by the following graphic. Figure 2-7 Configuration of a PROFINET device Number Description Slot with bus interface Slot with module Subslot with submodule Channel A module can contain multiple submodules. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFINET Representation of PROFINET Device Model in the Device View of STEP 7 The following figure shows the representation of the PROFINET device model in the device view of STEP 7, based on the example of a distributed I/O system ET 200MP: Figure 2-8 PROFINET device model in the device view of STEP 7 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 29 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2 Setting up PROFINET Contents of this chapter The following chapter provides background information on building your communication network. Overview of the most important passive network components: These are network components that forward a signal without the possibility of actively influencing it, for example, cables, connectors, etc. Overview of the most important active network components: These are network components that actively affect a signal, for example switches, routers, etc. Overview of the most common network structures (topologies). Physical connections of industrial networks PROFINET devices can be networked in industrial systems in two different physical ways: Connected line - By means of electrical pulses via copper cables - By means of optical pulses via fiber-optic cables Wireless via wireless network using electromagnetic waves PROFINET devices and cabling technology in SIMATIC are suited for industrial use, as they are based on Fast Ethernet and Industrial Ethernet. Fast Ethernet You can use Fast Ethernet to transfer data at a speed of 100 Mbps. This transmission technology uses the 100 Base-T standard for this. Industrial Ethernet Structure of Ethernet in industrial environment. The biggest difference from standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and noise immunity of the individual components. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2.1 Active Network Components Introduction The following active network components are available for PROFINET: Switch Router Switched Ethernet PROFINET IO is based on switched Ethernet with full-duplex operation and a bandwidth of 100 Mbps. In this way, the network can be used much more efficiently through the simultaneous data transfer of several devices. The PROFINET IO frames are processed with high priority. Switches Switches are network components used to connect several terminal devices or network segments in a local network (LAN). For the communication of a device with several other devices on PROFINET, the device is connected to the port of a switch. Other communication devices (including switches) can then be connected to the other ports of the switch. The connection between a communication device and the switch is a point-to-point connection. A switch has the task of receiving and distributing frames. The switch "learns" the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches and only forwards those frames that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or the connected switch. Switch variants Switches are available in two models: Integrated into a PROFINET device For PROFINET devices with multiple ports (two or more), we are dealing with devices with an integrated switch (for example, CPU 1516-3 PN/DP). As autonomous device (for example, switches of the SCALANCE product family) Selection Guide for Switches To use PROFINET with the RT class "RT", you can use any switch of "PROFINET Conformance Class A" or higher. All switches of the SCALANCE product family meet these requirements. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 31 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET If you want to use PROFINET functions that provide an additional value, such as topology recognition, diagnostics, device exchange without exchangeable medium/programming device, you have to use a switch of the "PROFINET Conformance Class B" or higher. To use PROFINET with the RT class "IRT", you must use a switch of "PROFINET Conformance Class C". With switches of the SCALANCE product family, watch out for the catalog feature "IRT PROFINET IO switch". To select appropriate switches, we recommend the SIMATIC NET Selection Tool on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39134641). Switches of the SCALANCE product family Use the switches of the SCALANCE product family if you want to use the full scope of PROFINET. They are optimized for use in PROFINET IO. In the SCALANCE X device family, you will find switches with electrical and optical ports and with a combination of both variants. SCALANCE X202-2IRT, for example, has two electrical ports and two optical ports and supports IRT communication. Beginning with the SCALANCE X200, you can configure, diagnose and address switches of the SCALANCE X device series as PROFINET IO devices using STEP 7. Router A router connects separated network segments with each other (e.g. management level and control level). The volume of data volume must be coordinated with the services of the respective network segment. A router also separates two networks and acts as a mediator between both networks. It thus reduces the network load. Routing functionality is provided in the SCALANCE X device family, with SCALANCE X300 or higher. Communication devices on different sides of a router can only communicate with one another if you have explicitly enabled communication between them via the router. If you want to access manufacturing data directly from SAP, for example, use a router to connect your Industrial Ethernet in the factory with the Ethernet in your office. Note If devices need to communicate beyond the limits of a network, you must configure the router so that it allows this communication to take place. Information on routing with STEP 7 is available in the function manual Communication (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192925). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2.2 Cabling technology Cables for PROFINET Electrical and optical cables are available for PROFINET. The type of cable depends on the data transfer requirements and on the ambient conditions. Simple method for the prefabrication of twisted pair cables When you set up your PROFINET system, you can cut the twisted-pair cable to the required length on site, strip it with the stripping tool (for Industrial Ethernet), and fit the Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect RJ45 plugs using the cut-and-clamp method. For more information on installation, refer to the installation instructions in the "SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Network Manual" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736). Note A maximum of four plug-in pairs are allowed between two switches per Ethernet path. Simple method for the prefabrication of fiber-optic cables The FastConnect FO cabling system is available for the easy, fast and error-free prefabrication of fiber-optic cables. The glass-fiber optic cable consists of: FC FO Termination Kit for SC and BFOC plug (cleave tool, Kevlar scissors, buffer grip, fiber remains container) FC BFOC Plug FC SC Duplex plug FO FC Standard cable FO FC Trailing cable Simple method for the prefabrication of POF and PCF cables The following special tools provide an easy and safe way to prefabricate POF / PCF cables and fit the SC RJ POF plugs: POF cable Prefabrication case IE Termination Kit SC RJ POF plug PCF cable Prefabrication case IE Termination Kit SC RJ PCF plug PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 33 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET Overview of transmission media with PROFINET The following table summarizes the technical specifications of a PROFINET interface with integrated switch or an external switch, and possible transmission media. Table 2- 6 Transmission media with PROFINET Physical properties Connection methods Electrical RJ45 connector ISO 60603-7 Optical SCRJ 45 ISO/IEC 61754-24 BFOC (Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector) and SC (Subscriber Connector) ISO/IEC 60874 Electromagnetic waves 1 - Cable type / transmission medium standard 100Base-TX 2x2 twisted, symmetrical and shielded copper cable, CAT 5 transmission requirement IEEE 802.3 100Base-FX POF fiber-optic cable (Polymer Optical Fiber, POF) 980/1000 m (core diameter / external diameter) ISO/IEC 60793-2 Plastic-cladded glass fiber (Polymer Cladded Fiber, PCF) 200/230 m (core diameter / external diameter) ISO/IEC 60793-2 Monomode glass fiber optic cable 10/125 m (core diameter / external diameter) ISO/IEC 60793-2 Multimode glass fiber optic cable 50/125 m and 62.5/125 m (core diameter / external diameter) ISO/IEC 9314-4 IEEE 802.11 x Transmission rate / mode Max. segment Advantages length (between two devices) 100 Mbps, full duplex 100 m Simple and cheap cable connection 100 Mbps, full duplex 50 m 100 Mbps, full duplex 100 m Use when there are large differences in potential Insensitive towards electromagnetic radiation Low line attenuation Considerably longer segments possible1 100 Mbps, full duplex 26 km 100 Mbps, full duplex 3000 m Depends on the extension used (a, g, h, etc.) 100 m Greater mobility Cost-effective networking to remote, difficult to access devices Applies for fiber-optic cables only See also PROFINET interface (Page 25) Assembly Instructions for SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465) PROFINET Installation Guideline (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installationguide/downloads/profinet-installation-guide/display/) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2.3 Wireless design 2.2.3.1 Basics What is Industrial Wireless LAN? In addition to data communication in accordance with the IEEE 802.11 standard, the SIMATIC NET Industrial Wireless LAN provides a number of enhancements which offer significant benefits for industrial customers. IWLAN is particularly suitable for demanding industrial applications that require reliable wireless communication. This is supported by the following properties: Automatic roaming when the connection to Industrial Ethernet is interrupted (Forced Roaming) Cost savings generated by using a single wireless network for reliable operation of a process with both process-critical data (alarm message, for example) and non-critical communication (service and diagnostics, for example) Cost-effective connection to devices in remote environments that are difficult to access Predictable data traffic (deterministic) and defined response times Cyclical monitoring of the wireless link (link check) Objectives and advantages of Industrial Wireless LAN Wireless data transmission achieves the following objectives: Seamless integration of PROFINET devices into the existing bus system via the wireless interface Mobile use of PROFINET devices for different production-linked tasks Flexible configuration of the system components for fast development in accordance with customer requirements Maintenance costs are minimized by savings in cables Application examples Communication with mobile subscribers (mobile controllers and devices, for example), conveyor lines, production belts, translation stages , and rotating machines Wireless coupling of communication segments for fast commissioning or cost-effective networking where routing of wires is extremely expensive (e.g. public streets, railroad lines) Stacker trucks, automated guided vehicle systems and suspended monorail systems PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 35 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET The following graphic illustrates the many possible applications and configurations for SIMATIC device family wireless networks. Figure 2-9 Application example for the use of Industrial Wireless LAN PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET Data transmission rate In Industrial Wireless LAN, gross data transmission rates of 11 Mbps or 54 Mbps without full duplex are permitted. Range With SCALANCE W (access points), wireless networks can be set up indoors and outdoors. Multiple access points can be installed to create large wireless networks in which mobile subscribers are transferred seamlessly from one access point to another (roaming). As an alternative to a wireless network, point-to-point connections of Industrial Ethernet segments can also be set up over large distances (several hundred meters). In this case, the range and characteristics of the RF field are determined by the antennas used. Note Range The range can be considerably less, depending on spatial factors, the wireless standard used, the data rate, and the antennas on the send and receive sides. 2.2.3.2 Tips on assembly Wireless networks, SCALANCE device family With PROFINET, you can also set up wireless networks with Industrial Wireless Local Area Network (IWLAN) technology. We recommend implementing the SCALANCE W device line for this. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 37 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET Update time in STEP 7 If you set up PROFINET with Industrial Wireless LAN, you may have to increase the update time for the wireless devices. The IWLAN interface provides lower performance than the wired data network: Several communication stations have to share the limited transmission bandwidth. For wired solutions, 100 Mbps is available for each communication device. The Update time parameter can be found in the "Realtime settings" section in the Inspector window of IO devices in STEP 7. Figure 2-10 Update time in STEP 7 Additional information More information about SCALANCE W Industrial Wireless LAN components can be found in the manual SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W-700 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42784493). More information about wired data transmission can be found in the manual SIMATIC NET Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736). More information about wireless data transmission can be found in the manual Basics for configuring an industrial wireless LAN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9975764). You should also read the PROFINET installation guideline of the PROFIBUS User Organization on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installationguide/downloads/profinet-installation-guide/display/). Various documents that assist with the setting up of your PROFINET automation solution are available here: PROFINET planning guideline PROFINET installation guideline PROFINET commissioning guideline Additional documents for setup of PROFINET PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2.4 Network security 2.2.4.1 Basics Introduction The topic of data security and access protection (Security) has become increasingly important in the industrial environment. The increased networking of entire industrial systems, vertical integration and networking of levels within a company and new techniques such as remote maintenance all result in higher requirements for protecting the industrial plant. Data security solutions for office environments cannot simply be transferred one-to-one to industrial applications to protect against manipulation in sensitive systems and production networks. Requirements Additional security requirements arise from the specific communication requirements in the industrial environment (real-time communication, for example): Protection against interaction between automated cells Protection of network segments Protection against faulty and unauthorized access Scalability of network security Must not influence the network structure Definition of security Generic term for all the measures taken to protect against: Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized access to data Loss of integrity due to manipulation of data Loss of availability due to destruction of data, for example, through faulty configuration and denial-of-service attacks Threats Threats can arise from external and internal manipulation. The loss of data security is not always caused by intentional actions. Internal threats can arise due to: Technical errors Operator errors Defective programs PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 39 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET Added to these internal threats there are also external ones. The external threats are not really any different to the known threats in the office environment: Software viruses and worms Trojans Man-in-the-middle attacks Password Phishing Denial of Service Protective measures The most important precautions to prevent manipulation and loss of data security in the industrial environment are: Filtering and control of data traffic by means of firewall A virtual private network (VPN) is used to exchange private data on a public network (Internet, for example). The most common VPN technology is IPsec. IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a collection of security protocols that are used as the basis for the IP protocol at the mediation level and allow a secured communication via potentially unsecure IP networks. Segmenting in protected automation cells This concept has the aim of protecting the lower-level network devices by means of security modules. A group of protected devices forms a protected automation cell. Authentication (identification) of the devices The security modules identify each other over a safe (encrypted) channel using authentication procedures. It is therefore impossible for unauthorized parties to access a protected segment. Encrypting the data traffic The confidentiality of data is ensured by encrypting the data traffic. Each security module is given a VPN certificate which includes the encryption key. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2.4.2 Network components and software Protection against unauthorized access The following solutions may be used to connect industrial networks to the intranet and Internet to protect against internal and external threats: Communication processors, such as the SIMATIC CP 1543-1 SCALANCE X-300 and SCALANCE S - the data security components of the SIMATIC NET product family SOFTNET security client for use on PCs Features Both of these products have a wide variety of features, such as: Easy integration of existing networks without configuration, with integrated firewall. Segmenting in protected automation cells Authentication (identification) of the devices Encrypting the data traffic PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 41 Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET 2.2.4.3 Application example Data security at the office and production levels The following graphic contains an application example with protected areas at different levels of the company created using SCALANCE S and the security client. The protected areas are highlighted in light gray. Figure 2-11 Network configuration with the SCALANCE S security module and the SOFTNET security client PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Description 2.2 Setting up PROFINET Additional information Additional information on the configuration of a security standard in PROFINET, is available: In the PROFINET security guideline. These guidelines can be found on the homepage of the PROFIBUS user organization on the Internet (http://www.profinet.com). In the Industrial Ethernet Security (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56577508) manual In the SCALANCE S and SOFTNET Security Client (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21718449) manual You can find general information on industrial security concepts, functions and news on the Industrial Security website (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 43 3 Parameter assignment/addressing To set up an automation system, you will need to configure, assign parameters and interlink the individual hardware components. In STEP 7, the work needed for this is undertaken in the device, topology and network view. Configuring "Configuring" is understood to mean arranging, setting and networking devices and modules within the device, topology or network view. An I/O address is automatically assigned to each module. The I/O addresses can be subsequently modified. The CPU compares the configuration preset in STEP 7 with the actual current configuration of the system. In this way, potential errors can be detected and reported straight away. The exact procedure for configuring devices is described in detail in the STEP 7 online help. Assigning parameters "Assigning parameters" is understood to mean setting the properties of the components used. The settings for the hardware components and for data communication are configured at the same time. In STEP 7, you can "assign parameters" for the following settings PROFINET: Device names and IP address parameters Port interconnection and topology Module properties / parameters The parameters are loaded into the CPU and transferred to the corresponding modules when the CPU starts up. Modules are easy to replace from spare parts, as the parameters assigned for the SIMATIC CPUs are automatically loaded into the new module at each startup. 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.1 Assigning an IO device to an IO controller Adjusting the hardware to the project requirements You need to configure hardware if you want to set up, expand or change an automation project. To do this, add hardware components to your structure, link these with existing components, and adapt the hardware properties to the tasks. The properties of the automation systems and modules are preset such that in many cases they do not have to be assigned parameters again. Parameter assignment is however needed in the following cases: You want to change the default parameter settings of a module. You want to use special functions. You want to configure communication connections. 3.1 Assigning an IO device to an IO controller PROFINET IO System A PROFINET IO system is comprised of a PROFINET IO controller and its assigned PROFINET IO devices. After these devices have been placed in the network or topology view, STEP 7 assigns default values for them. Initially, you only have to worry about the assignment of IO devices to an IO controller. Requirement You are in the network view of STEP 7. A CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP). An IO device has been placed (e.g., IM 155-6 PN ST). Procedure To assign IO devices to an IO controller, proceed as follows: 1. Place the pointer of the mouse over the interface of the IO device. 2. Press and hold down the left mouse button. 3. Move the pointer. The pointer now uses the networking symbol to indicate "Networking" mode. At the same time, you see the lock symbol on the pointer. The lock symbol disappears only when the pointer is over a valid target position. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 45 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address 4. Now move the pointer onto the interface of the IO controller. You can keep the left mouse button pressed or release it when performing this action. 5. Now release the left mouse button or press it again (depending on your previous action). Figure 3-1 Assigning an IO device to an IO controller in the network view of STEP 7 Result You have assigned an IO device to an IO controller. Checking the assignment You can find an overview of the communication relationships in the "IO communication" tab in the tabular area of the network view. This table is context-sensitive for selection in the graphic area: Selection of the interface shows the I/O communication of the respective interface. Selection of the CPU shows all I/O communication of the CPU (including PROFIBUS). Selection of the station (as in the above figure) interface shows the I/O communication of the complete station. Information on S7-1500R/H You can find the procedure for assigning an IO device with system redundancy S2 to the redundant S7-1500R/H system in section Configuring an IO device with system redundancy S2 in the redundant S7-1500R/H system (Page 282). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address 3.2 Device name and IP address Introduction In order that the PROFINET device can be addressed as node on PROFINET, the following are required: A unique PROFINET device name A unique IP address in the relevant IP subnet STEP 7 assigns a device name during the arrangement of a PROFINET device in the hardware and network editor. The IP addresses are typically assigned automatically by STEP 7 and assigned to the devices based on the device name. You can change the name and IP address manually. In STEP 7 You can find the device name and the IP address under "Ethernet addresses" in the properties of the PROFINET interface in the Inspector window. Figure 3-2 Device name and IP address in STEP 7 The function, the assignment and the changing of the device name and the IP address are described in the following sections. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 47 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address 3.2.1 Device name Device names Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name. In PROFINET, this method was selected because it is simpler to work with names than with complex IP addresses. The assignment of a device name for a specific IO device can be compared to setting the PROFIBUS address of a DP slave. In delivery state, an IO device does not have a device name. A device name must first be assigned before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, for example, for transferring configuration data during startup or for exchanging user data in cyclic mode. You assign the device names to the IO device, for example, with the programming device / PC. IO devices that have a slot for removable storage media provide the option of writing the device name directly to the removable storage medium in the programming device. When a device is replaced by a device without removable medium, the IO controller assigns the device name based on topological configuration (see section Configuring topology (Page 68)). Structured device names The device name is automatically assigned by default for PROFINET devices S7-1200, S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL when these are configured in STEP 7. The device names are formed from the name of the CPU or the name of the interface module. For devices with several PROFINET interfaces, the name of the interface is enhanced, for example, "plc_1.profinet-interface_2" or "io-device_1". You can structure the device names using DNS conventions. These conventions are defined by "Internationalizing Domain Names in Applications (IDNA). According to this, device names are written in lower case. The "Domain Name System" (DNS) is a distributed database (http://iana.org), which manages the name space on the Internet. To structure the names, you use the dot ("."). The hierarchy is shown in ascending order from left to right. ..... If the name is not DNS-compliant, the name will be converted by STEP 7, for example, to "plcxb1.profinet-schnittstellexb2022c" or "io-devicexb15b32". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Device number In addition to the device name, STEP 7 also assigns a device number beginning with "1" when an IO device is allocated. The device number is located in the Inspector window in the properties of the PROFINET interface, under "Ethernet addresses" in the area PROFINET. Figure 3-3 Device number This device number can be used to identify an IO device in the user program (for example, with the instruction "LOG2GEO"). 3.2.2 IP address IP address To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a device on Industrial Ethernet, this device also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. The IP addresses are typically assigned automatically by STEP 7 and assigned to the devices based on the device name. If it is a standalone network, you can apply the IP address and subnet mask suggested by STEP 7. If the network is part of an existing Ethernet company network, obtain the information from your network administrator. Configuration of the IP address In accordance with Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), the IP address is made up of four decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255. The decimal numbers are separated by periods (for example, 192.162.0.0). The IP address consists of the following: Address of the network Address of the device (PROFINET interface of the IO controller/IO device) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 49 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Generating IP addresses The IP addresses of the IO devices are generated by STEP 7 and first assigned to the IO devices when the CPU starts up. In addition, for some IO devices (e.g., SCALANCE X, S7-300 CPs), it is possible not to obtain the IP address during startup of the IO controller, but rather to set it beforehand on the device (see Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device (Page 60)). The IP addresses of the IO devices always have the same subnet mask as the IO controller and are assigned from the IP address of the IO controller in ascending order. The IP address can be changed manually, if necessary. For devices with several PROFINET interfaces (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP), the IP addresses must be located in different subnets. Default router The default router is used when data has to be forwarded via TCP/IP or UDP to a partner located outside the local network. In STEP 7, the default router is named Router. You can activate the use of a router in the Inspector window of a CPU with the "Use router" check box in the "IP protocol" section. STEP 7 assigns the local IP address to the default router by default. The router address that is set on the PROFINET interface of the IO controller is automatically transferred for the configured IO devices. Subnet mask The bits set in the subnet mask decide the part of the IP address that contains the address of the network. In general, the following applies: The network address is obtained from the AND operation of the IP address and subnet mask. The device address is obtained from the AND NOT operation of the IP address and subnet mask. Example of the subnet mask Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 (decimal) = 11111111.11111111.00000000.00000000 (binary) IP address: 192.168.0.2 (decimal) = 11000000.10101000.00000000.00000010 (binary) Meaning: The first 2 bytes of the IP address determine the network - i.e., 192.168. The last two bytes address the device, i.e. 0.2. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Relation between IP address and default subnet mask An agreement exists relating to the assignment of IP address ranges and so-called "Default subnet masks". The first decimal number (from the left) in the IP address determines the structure of the default subnet mask with respect to the number of "1" values (binary) as follows: IP address (decimal) IP address (binary) Address class Default subnet mask 0 to 126 0xxxxxxx.xxxxxxxx.... A 255.0.0.0 128 to 191 10xxxxxx.xxxxxxxx... B 255.255.0.0 192 to 223 110xxxxx.xxxxxxxx... C 255.255.255.0 Note Range of values for the first decimal point A value between 224 and 255 is also possible for the first decimal number of the IP address (address class D etc.). However, this is not recommended because there is no address check for these values. Masking other subnets You can use the subnet mask to add further structures and form "private" subnets for a subnet that is assigned one of the address classes A, B or C. This is done by setting other, less significant bits of the subnet mask to "1". For each bit set to "1", the number of "private" networks doubles and the number of devices they contain is halved. Externally, the network continues to function as an individual network. Example: You have a subnet of address class B (for example, IP address 129.80.xxx.xxx) and change the default subnet mask as follows: Masks Decimal Binary Default subnet mask 255.255.0.0 11111111.11111111.00000000. 00000000 Subnet mask 255.255.128.0 11111111.11111111.10000000. 00000000 Result: All devices with addresses from 129.80.001.000 to 129.80.127.254 are located in a subnet, all devices with addresses from 129.80.128.000 to 129.80.255.254 in a different subnet. Reading out an IP address in the user program You can read out the IP address of a PROFINET device in the user program of a S7-1500 CPU. You can find information in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82947835). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 51 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address 3.2.3 Assigning a device name and IP address Assigning an IP address and subnet mask for an IO controller for the first time You have the following options: Using a programming device or PC: Connect your programming device/PC to the same network as the relevant PROFINET device. The interface of the programming device/PC must be set to TCP/IP mode. During the download, first of all display all available devices via the "Accessible devices" download dialog box. Select the target device via its MAC address and then assign its IP address before you download the hardware configuration including the configured IP address (IP address is saved retentively). Using the display of a S7-1500 CPU: The S7-1500 CPUs have a front cover with a display and operating keys. You can use this display to assign or change the IP address. To set the IP address, navigate on the display via the menu items "Settings" > "Addresses" > "X1 (IE/PN)" > "Parameters". Using a memory card: If your PROFINET device is equipped for a memory card (Micro Memory Card/SIMATIC memory card), plug this into your programming device/PC and save the hardware configuration together with the configured IP address on this memory card. Then plug the memory card into the PROFINET device. Once inserted, the PROFINET device automatically applies the IP address. If you have saved a configuration to the memory card with the "IP address is set directly at the device" option, you must assign the IP address using a different method after inserting the memory card (see section Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device (Page 60)). Assigning device names and IP address for "Device replacement without exchangeable medium/programming device" For devices without exchangeable medium (e.g., ET 200MP, ET 200SP) and devices that support "Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG" (e.g., ET 200S), the IO controller can identify the device without name from the neighbor relationships specified by the set topology and from actual neighbor relationships determined by the real PROFINET devices. The IO controller then assigns the PROFINET device the configured name and incorporates the PROFINET device in the user data traffic. (See also Device replacement without exchangeable medium (Page 222)). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address IP address assignment when replacing IO devices with exchangeable mediumPG The following is contained on the memory card of the programmable logic controller: On the IO controller: Device name and IP address On the IO device: Device name When you remove the memory card from a PROFINET device and insert it in another PROFINET device with exchangeable medium (e.g., ET 200S), device-specific information and the device name are loaded to the device. If an IO device has to be replaced in its entirety due to a device or module defect, the IO controller automatically assigns parameters and configures the replaced device or module. The cyclic exchange of user data is then restarted. In addition to this, before the power ON of the IO device, the memory card with the valid name must be removed from the faulty IO device and added to the replaced device. In the event of an error in the PROFINET device, the memory card allows you to replace a module without a programming device/PC. You can also transfer the device data directly from the programming device/PC to the memory card. Procedure: Changing the device name using properties of the PROFINET interface You can change the PROFINET name via the properties of the PROFINET interface. This is useful when the PROFINET device has not received its previous name from the automatic generation, for example, in the case of a migration. 1. In the network or device view of the STEP 7 hardware and network editor, select the PROFINET interface of a PROFINET device. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Ethernet addresses" in the PROFINET area. 3. Clear the "Generate PROFINET device name automatically" check box. 4. Enter the new PROFINET device name in the relevant field. Figure 3-4 Changing the device name of a PROFINET device in the properties PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 53 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Alternative procedure: Changing the device name of a PROFINET device in the network view Requirement: The "Generate PROFINET device name automatically" check box is selected. 1. In STEP 7, select the "Network overview" tab in the tabular area of the network view. 2. In the "Device" column, overwrite the name in the row of the relevant PROFINET device. The name is also changed accordingly in the graphic area of the network view. Figure 3-5 Changing the device name of a PROFINET device in STEP 7 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Procedure: Changing the IP address To change the IP address, follow these steps: 1. In the network or device view of the STEP 7 hardware and network editor, select the PROFINET interface of a PROFINET device. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Ethernet addresses" in the "IP protocol" area. 3. Check that the option "Set IP address in the project" is selected. 4. Enter the new IP address in the relevant field. Figure 3-6 Changing the IP address of a PROFINET device in STEP 7 Downloading configured device name to IO device To load the configured device names to the IO device, follow these steps: 1. Connect your programming device/PC to the same network as the relevant IO device. The interface of the programming device/PC must be set to TCP/IP mode. 2. In STEP 7, select the relevant IO device in the "Accessible devices" dialog based on the MAC address. 3. Click "Assign name" to download the configured device name to the IO device. The IO controller recognizes the IO device automatically by its device name and automatically assigns the configured IP address to it. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 55 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Identification of the PROFINET device To clearly identify a device from several identical devices in a control cabinet, for example, you can flash the link LED of the PROFINET device. To do this, select the menu command Online > Accessible devices... in STEP 7. In the "Accessible devices" dialog, set the "PG/PC" interface by means of which you are connected to the devices. STEP 7 now automatically searches for the accessible devices and displays them in the "Accessible devices in target subnet" table. Select the desired PROFINET device and click on the "Flash LED" button. The PROFINET device is identified based on its MAC address. Figure 3-7 "Accessible devices" dialog Using an different way to assign IP addresses for IO devices Various IO devices, for example, SCALANCE X,S7-300 CPs, support the option of not having the IP addresses assigned by the IO controller during startup. In this case, the IP address is assigned in a different way. For additional information, refer to the manual of the respective PROFINET device of the SIMATIC device family. Additional information You can find a detailed description of the operation and functions of the display of the S7-1500 CPUs in the system manual S7-1500, ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address 3.2.4 Assign device name via communication table Introduction You can assign the device names of PROFINET IO devices configured offline to the devices online. You can do this in the table area of the network view in the table "I/O communication". You can also assign the device names to several devices at the same time. "Online assignment" tab In the I/O communication table, you will find the tabs "Offline configuration" and "Online assignment". In the "Online assignment" tab, you can assign the PROFINET device names that were assigned offline to the corresponding IO devices online. To do this, use the buttons "Check devices" and "Assign now". Figure 3-8 Assign device name via communication table The objects displayed in the table of the "Online assignment" tab depend on the setting of the filter function. If only selected objects should be displayed, only objects of the corresponding context are displayed depending on the selection in the network view. PROFINET subnet: All connected devices and their PROFINET interfaces IO system All devices involved and their PROFINET interfaces Sync domain: All devices involved and their PROFINET interfaces Devices: The device and any existing PROFINET interfaces Other subnets or interfaces such as MPI or PROFIBUS are not displayed If the display is set for all devices using the filter function, all devices are displayed that have a PROFINET interface, regardless of whether they are connected via a PROFINET subnet or are part of an IO system. Devices without a PROFINET interface, for example only with a DP or MPI interface, are not displayed. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 57 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address General procedure To assign PROFINET device names, you must first detect the IO devices available online. With this procedure, it matters whether the MAC addresses are known or unknown. This results in a general procedure in two steps: 1. Detecting the IO devices available online 2. Assigning configured PROFINET device names to the IO devices available online Requirements You are in the network view. There is an online connection to the devices. Procedure (step 1) To detect IO devices available online from the I/O communication table, follow these steps: 1. Optional: Entered known MAC addresses in the "MAC address" column. After every valid entry, the check box under "Assign device" is selected for the relevant row. Note You can enter, insert or import the MAC address in different formats. The correct format is automatically entered in the cell. The following entries are supported and then converted to the required format: * "08:00:06:BA:1F:20" * "08 00 06 BA 1F 20" * "080006BA1F20" The formats used in the example are automatically converted to "08-00-06-BA-1F-20". 2. Click "Check devices" to start the check of the IO devices available online. 3. Set the PG/PC interface in the dialog window and click "Start". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Intermediate result After the check, the result is displayed for every device in the table. Online data found is automatically entered in the table and the check box "Assign device" is set to "checked" in the rows in which a MAC address was entered or found online. The result of the check is shown as an icon in the "Status" column. Status Meaning Matching device and compatible type Matching device and incompatible type Non-matching device Device cannot be reached (with a known MAC address) Ready for assignment (with known MAC address) Note The icon "Ready for assignment" appears when a MAC address exists and matching device data was found, but no PROFINET device name was found online. You can update the data of the detected devices again via their MAC addresses at any time. To do this, you specify the MAC address and the status of the device is displayed immediately without having to re-detect the device. Procedure (step 2) All PROFINET device names configured offline will be assigned to the devices available online in a bulk operation. 1. Click the "Assign now" button. Note The bulk operation cannot be reversed. A message to this effect appears in a dialog window. 2. Click "Start" in the dialog window to start the assignment of the PROFINET device names. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 59 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address Result The PROFINET device names configured offline will be assigned to the devices available online. This relates to devices in whose row the check box under "Assign device" is selected, that have a MAC address and have the status "Ready for assignment". Importing and exporting data Using the import and export button, you can import or export the data of the I/O communication table for the online assignment: When you export, the currently displayed data of the table is exported to a CSV file. Using the filter function of the table, you can select which data will be exported. When you import, the data of the CSV file is written to the table. If there are conflicts with values already existing in the table, you can decide whether the data should be overwritten or whether the import needs to be stopped. 3.2.5 Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device Introduction Machines are frequently commissioned on site or integrated into the existing infrastructure without STEP 7. You can find typical applications in all areas of the series machine building. Alternative means for assigning the IP address are available for this. Procedure 1. In the network or device view of the STEP 7 Hardware and Network editor, select the PROFINET interface of an IO controller. 2. Navigate in the Inspector window to "Ethernet addresses". 3. Select the "IP address is set directly at the device" option in the "IP protocol" area. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 Device name and IP address 4. In the "PROFINET" area, select the " PROFINET device name is set directly at the device" check box. Figure 3-9 Setting the device name and IP address on the device Note Gateway When you operate a PROFINET device with the option "Allow adaption of the device name/IP address directly on device", you cannot use this PROFINET device as gateway for S7 routing. Options for assigning IP addresses and device names Apart from the known address and device name assignment in the "Ethernet addresses" section of the Inspector window, there are other ways in which the IP address and name can be assigned: Assigning by means of the user program with the instruction "T_CONFIG" Assignment when downloading the configuration to the target system via the "Extended download to device" dialog box. Assignment via the Primary Setup Tool (PST) Assignment via the PRONETA ("PROFINET network analysis") commissioning and diagnostics tool Assignment via the SIMATIC Automation Tool Additional information For information on the "T_CONFIG" instruction and on downloading to the target system, refer to the STEP 7 online help. A free Download (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14929629) of the Primary Setup Tool (PST) can be found on the Internet. On this Internet page, you will also find a list of devices for which the PST is approved. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 61 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.3 Configuring an IO device through hardware detection 3.3 Configuring an IO device through hardware detection Introduction As of STEP 7 V15, you have the possibility to detect a real existing IO device and to import it into your project. You find the IO device in STEP 7 through the "Hardware detection" function. A detected device can be imported into your project. STEP 7 inserts the IO device with all the modules and submodules. Requirements STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15 It must be possible to technically access the IO device via IP Procedure To detect one or more existing IO devices in STEP 7 and add them to the project, follow these steps: 1. In STEP 7, navigate to "Online" > "Hardware detection". 2. Click "IO devices". STEP 7 opens the "Hardware detection of IO devices" window. 3. Select the interface of your programming device at "PG/PC interface:". 4. Click "Start search". STEP 7 begins with the hardware detection. When the hardware detection is completed, STEP 7 displays all the detected IO devices. 5. Select the IO devices that you want to add to the project by clicking the corresponding check box before the IO device. 6. Click "Add devices". After a brief moment, a window is opens to report about the success or failure of the hardware detection. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.3 Configuring an IO device through hardware detection Result of the hardware detection If the hardware detection is successful, STEP 7 inserts the IO device with all the modules and submodules into the project. An IO device configured via hardware detection responds as follows: Modules configured through the "Hardware detection" are configured as if they have been inserted from the catalog. MAC address: STEP 7 imports the MAC address of the detected IO device into the project. IP settings: - If the detected IO device already has an IP address, STEP 7 imports the IP address into the project. - If the detected IO device does not have an IP address, STEP 7 automatically assigns an IP address in the project. PROFINET device name: - If the detected IO device already has a PROFINET device name, STEP 7 imports the PROFINET device name into the project. - If the detected IO device does not have a PROFINET device name, STEP 7 automatically assigns a PROFINET device name in the project. IO devices configured through "Hardware detection" have neither an IP subnet nor an IO controller assigned. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 63 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device 3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device Introduction You always require a router (also referred to as a "Standard Gateway") when the PROFINET device has to communicate with a node whose IP addresses lie outside the own IP subnet. If the PROFINET device sends an IP packet to an IP address outside its own IP subnet, the IP packet first goes to the configured router. The router in turn checks the IP address. If this lies outside its own subnet, the router passes the IP packet on to the next router. The IP packet is routed to the next router until it has reached the target address. Like all S7-1500 CPUs, S7-1500 CPUs with several PROFINET interfaces provide the possibility to configure the IP address of a router. However, there is the restriction that you can only enter the IP address of a router at a PROFINET interface. You cannot include an IP address of a router on the other PROFINET interfaces of the CPU. IO devices that are connected to this PROFINET interface adopt this setting. Up to and including STEP 7 V14 SP1, these IO devices did not have any possibility to reach devices in a different IP subnet. As of STEP 7 V15, you have the possibility to assign the address of a router for an IO device independent of the setting of the IO controller. You can now, for example, set a router address at the IO device in the following cases as well: You have not set an IP address of a router for the interface of the associated IO controller. You have already set a router address for a different interface in the CPU. Router R1 configured at PROFINET X1 If a router is configured at X1, you cannot configure a router at X2. Because a router is configured at X1, the IO device adopts the IP address of the router R1. The IO device can be reached from a different IP subnet. As of STEP 7 V15, you set the IP address of the router R2 at the IO device irrespective of the setting at the interface X2. The IO device can be reached from a different IP subnet. Figure 3-10 Specifying the router for an IO device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device Further information about the "User router" setting You have the possibility to configure the use of a router including IP address of the router in the "IP protocol" section of the settings for the PROFINET interface (Ethernet addresses). Rules Observe the following rules if you want to configure a router for the PROFINET interface of an IO controller: A PROFINET IO device supports exactly one router, irrespective of the number of interfaces. You can configure a router for exactly one PROFINET interface. All IO devices that are assigned to the PROFINET interface adopt the configured router from the IO controller. You cannot configure a router for the further PROFINET interfaces of the CPU. The further PROFINET interfaces take on the IP address "0.0.0.0" as the router and pass it on to their IO devices. As of STEP 7 V15, you can configure the use of a router for an IO device. This allows the IO device to communicate with a node outside its own IP subnet, irrespective of the setting of the PROFINET interface of the IO controller. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 65 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device Configuration example: Configuring a router for an IO device The following example shows a configuration in which you configure a router at the IO device so that the IO device reaches IP addresses in the higher-level network. Figure 3-11 Configuration example: Configuring a router for an IO device You have a CPU 1516-3PN/DP. The two PROFINET interfaces X1 and X2 of the CPU work in the "IO controller" operating mode. The PROFINET interface X1 is connected with the subnet "Production line 1". PROFINET interface X2 is connected with the subnet "Production line 2". The two subnets "Production line 1" and "Production line 2" are each connected via a router with the higher-level network "Superior line". For PROFINET X1, you configure the router "Router 1" with the IP address 192.168.1.100. The IO device (ET 200SP) in the "Production line 1" subnet adopts the router from the IO controller. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device You cannot configure a router for the PROFINET interface X2 because you have already configured a router for the PROFINET interface X1 of the CPU. No router is transferred by the PROFINET interface X2 to the IO device in the subnet "Production line 2". In order for the IO device in the subnet "Production line 2" to reach nodes in the higher-level "Superior line", configure the router "Router 2" with the IP address 192.168.2.100 for the IO device. Configuring the router for the IO controller Requirements: You use the "Set IP address in the project" option for the PROFINET interface. Follow these steps to configure a router for the IO controller in STEP 7: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the PROFINET interface of the IO controller. 2. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Properties" > "General" > "Ethernet addresses". 3. Select the "Use router" check box in the "IP protocol" field. 4. Enter the IP address of the router at "Router address". Configuring a router for an IO device Requirements: STEP 7 as of V15 CPU 1500 as of firmware version V2.5 IO device is assigned to the PROFINET interface of an IO controller. The PROFINET interface of the IO controller uses the "Set IP address in the project" option. Follow these steps to configure a router for the IO device in STEP 7: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the PROFINET interface of the IO device. 2. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Properties" > "General" > "Ethernet addresses". 3. Clear the "Synchronize router settings with IO controller" check box. 4. Select the "Use router" check box. 5. Enter the IP address of the router at "Router address". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 67 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5 Introduction Configuring topology If an IO device is assigned to an IO controller, this does not yet specify how the ports are connected to each other. A port interconnection is not required to use RT, but it provides the following advantages: A set topology is assigned with the port interconnection. Based on an online-offline comparison, it is possible to conduct a set-actual comparison with all devices that support this function. The "Device replacement without exchangeable medium" function can be used. A port interconnection is an essential requirement for using IRT. An overview of various options for setting up a PROFINET network is given below. Line All the communication devices are connected in a linear bus topology. In PROFINET, the linear bus topology is implemented with switches that are already integrated into the PROFINET devices. Therefore, the linear bus topology at PROFINET is merely a special form of tree / star topology. If a link element (switch, for example) fails, communication across the failed link element is no longer possible. The network is then divided into 2 subsegments. Linear bus topology structures require the least cabling. Star If you connect communication devices to a switch with more than two PROFINET ports, you automatically create a star network topology. If an individual PROFINET device fails, this does not automatically lead to failure of the entire network, in contrast to other structures. It is only if a switch fails that part of the communication network will fail as well Tree If you interconnect several star structures, you obtain a tree network topology. Ring In order to increase the availability of a network, use ring structures. In principle, a linear bus topology is connected to a ring through a so-called redundancy manager. The task of the redundancy manager is managed by an external switch SCALANCE X, a CPU that supports the Media Redundancy Protocol MRP (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP) or a CP (e.g., CP 343-1 Lean). If there is a break in the network, the redundancy manager ensures that the data is redirected over an alternative network connection in the ring. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology Example for topology The following example shows a combination of different topologies. Number Meaning S7-1500 as IO controller S7-300 as IO controller Industrial WLAN with SCALANCE W SCALANCE X 307-3 with seven electrical and three optical ports ET 200SP with integrated 2-port switch SCALANCE X 204 with four electrical ports PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet IE/PB-Link PN IO PROFIBUS DP ET 200S with two optical ports Star topology Linear bus topology The combination of topology forms results in a tree topology. Figure 3-12 Combined topology PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 69 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology Additional information Observe the PROFINET Installation Guideline (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installation-guide/downloads/profinet-installationguide/display/) of the PROFIBUS User Organization when planning your PROFINET topology. For more detailed information, see the SIMATIC NET Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736) manual. You can find basic information in the Communication with SIMATIC (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1254686) manual. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5.1 Topology view in STEP 7 Introduction The topology view is one of three working areas of the hardware and network editor. You undertake the following tasks here: Displaying the Ethernet topology Configuring the Ethernet topology Identify and minimize differences between the set and actual topology (online) The topology view in STEP 7 consists of a graphic area and a table area. Graphic area The graphic area of the topology view displays PROFINET devices with their appropriate ports and port connections. Here you can add more PROFINET devices. The following figure shows the graphic area of the topology view. Selector: Device view/Network view/Topology view Toolbar Graphic area of the topology view Overview navigation Selector for the table area of the topology view Figure 3-13 Graphic area of the topology view Overview navigation Click in the overview navigation to obtain an overview of the created objects in the graphic area. By holding down the mouse button, you can quickly navigate to the desired objects and display them in the graphic area. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 71 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology Table area Topology overview: This displays the Ethernet or PROFINET devices with their appropriate ports and port connections in a table. This table corresponds to the network overview table in the network view. Topology comparison: Here you can import devices and port interconnections automatically through offline/online comparison or extended Offline/Online comparison into STEP 7. Selector for the graphic area of the topology view Selector: Device view/Network view/Topology view Selector: Topology overview/Topology comparison Table area of the topology view Figure 3-14 Table area of the topology view PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5.2 Interconnecting ports in the topology view Requirement You are in the graphic view of the topology view. Procedure To interconnect ports in the topology view, follow these steps: 1. Place the pointer of the mouse on the port you want to interconnect. 2. Press and hold down the left mouse button. 3. Move the pointer. The pointer now uses the networking symbol to indicate "Interconnecting" mode. At the same time, you see the lock symbol on the pointer. The lock symbol disappears only when the pointer is over a valid target position. 4. Now drag the pointer to the target port. You can keep the left mouse button pressed or release it when performing this action. 5. Now release the left mouse button or press it again (depending on your previous action). Figure 3-15 Interconnecting ports in the topology view Result You have created a port interconnection. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 73 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5.3 Interconnecting ports - Inspector window Interconnecting ports in the Inspector window To interconnect ports, follow these steps: 1. In the device or network view, select the PROFINET device or PROFINET interface. 2. In the Inspector window, navigate to the port property "Port interconnection". When the PROFINET interface is selected, you can find this setting in the Inspector window as follows: "Properties > General > Advanced Options > Port [...] > Port Interconnection." 3. In the "Local port" section, you can find the settings at the local port. In the case of fiberoptic cable you can, for example, set the cable names here. In the "Partner port" area, select the drop-down list for "Partner port" in order to display the available partner ports and make a selection. Figure 3-16 Interconnecting ports in the Inspector window in STEP 7 If the PROFINET interface was disconnected, it is automatically connected by this action. In the properties of the subnet you can set whether this subnet should or should not be used for the networking. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5.4 Automatic assignment of devices by offline/online comparison Overview During the offline/online comparison, the configured topology is compared with the actual existing topology. Devices identified online are automatically assigned to configured devices as far as this is possible. Start of availability detection You start the availability detection the first time by clicking the "Compare offline/online" button in the toolbar of the "Topology comparison" tab. You restart availability detection by clicking the "Update" button. Note The availability detection can take several seconds. During this time, no user input is possible. Automatic assignment of a PNIO device A PNIO device identified online is automatically assigned to a configured device if the following properties of the two devices match up: Article no. Type PROFINET device name No automatic assignment In the following situations, no automatic assignment is possible: No device can be identified online to match a configured device. (This means that the corresponding columns in the "Online topology" area of the topology comparison table are empty.) In this case, you should add the already configured device to your system or delete the configured device from the configuration. A device identified online can be assigned to a configured device, but there are differences in the port interconnections. In this case, you can Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the project (Page 76). A device identified online cannot be assigned to a configured device. (In this case, the corresponding columns in the "Offline topology" area of the topology comparison table are empty.) In this case, you can Include the devices identified online manually in the project (Page 77). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 75 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5.5 Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the project Requirements You have run an offline/online comparison in the topology view. The result of this is that at least one device identified online was automatically assigned to a configured device, but that there are differences relating to the interconnection. Procedure To adopt one more port interconnections identified online in the project manually, follow these steps: 1. Select the row belonging to the port interconnection. 2. If applicable, select further roles using multi-selection. 3. Select "Apply" > "Use selected" in the shortcut menu. The content of the corresponding table cells in the "Action" column changes to "Apply". 4. If you have mistakenly prepared too many port interconnections to be included in the project: Select the rows belonging to the port interconnections you have mistakenly prepared for inclusion in the project using multi-selection. Select "Reset" > "Reset selected" in the shortcut menu. The content of the corresponding table cells in the "Action" column change to "No action". 5. Click the "Synchronize" button. Result The port interconnections identified online for the corresponding devices are included in the project. Successful adoption is indicated by the diagnostics icon "Identical topology information" for each port. Note If other port interconnections are recognized for a device identified online and these differ from those that exist in the project, adopting these in the project means that the port interconnections that were previously in the project are replaced by those identified online. If no port interconnections are detected for a device identified online, adopting in the project means that all the port interconnections of this device are deleted in the project. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Configuring topology 3.5.6 Include the devices identified online manually in the project Requirements You have run an offline/online comparison in the topology view. The result of this is that at least one device identified online could not be assigned to any configured device. Procedure To adopt one more devices identified online in the project manually, follow these steps: 1. For a configured device without an online partner, move the mouse pointer to the "Device/port" column of the online topology. 2. Select the device you want to assign to the configured device from the drop-down list of this box. 3. Repeat the previous steps if necessary for other configured devices without an online partner. Result The selected device that was identified online is moved up from the end of the table. Following this, it is in the row of the configured device to which you have just assigned it. 3.5.7 Automatic assignment of devices by advanced offline/online comparison Overview With the advanced offline/online comparison, ICMP is also used alongside DCP to be able to detect devices that do not support DCP. Automatic assignment of devices detected by ICMP With devices detected by ICMP, no type is available. With passive devices, no article number is available. For this reason, passive devices can only be assigned automatically if you have not assigned an article number in the configured data and the offline and online IP addresses match. With switches, automatic assignment is possible if the offline and online article number, IP address and PROFINET device name match. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 77 4 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Totally Integrated Diagnostics Concept All SIMATIC products have integrated diagnostics functions that they can use to detect and remedy faults. The components automatically flag a potential fault in the operation and provide detailed information. Each individual error or several errors occurring concurrently are transferred from the IO device to the IO controller. If you require the full status of the IO device including any pending errors, you can also read the status directly from the IO device. The following sections provide basic information on using diagnostics via PROFINET IO. You can find a detailed description of the system diagnostics for S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL in the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual. 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Accessing the status of an IO device with a PG/PC or an HMI device If you are connected to the Industrial Ethernet via a PG/PC with STEP 7 or an HMI device, you can also call up diagnostics information online. This is illustrated by the following graphic. Number Description The IO device detects an error and sends diagnostics data to the IO controller. In STEP 7, you can read the station status for "Accessible devices" directly from the IO device regardless of the IO controller. This is only possible if the programming device is connected to Industrial Ethernet. The IO controller notifies the programming/HMI device. The display of the system diagnostics is updated. This means that you can access diagnostics information during the commissioning phase or for servicing even if the IO controller is not operational. Figure 4-1 PROFINET IO diagnostics with PG/PC or HMI device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 79 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO 4.1.1 Diagnostics levels in PROFINET IO Concept The IO device sends all error messages that occur to the IO controller. The scope and volume of diagnostics information varies according to the level of diagnostics data evaluation and the PROFINET devices you are using. Diagnostics levels You can evaluate diagnostics data at different levels. The number and type of channels is selected, for example, at the diagnostics level 4. The following figure shows the diagnostics levels with PROFINET IO. Figure 4-2 Diagnostics levels with PROFINET IO PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 80 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Representation of diagnostics levels in the device view in STEP 7 The following figure shows the representation of the PROFINET device model in the device view of STEP 7, based on the example of a distributed I/O system ET 200MP: Number Figure 4-3 Description Level 1: Error(s) in the device Level 2: Error(s) in the module Diagnostics levels in the device view of STEP 7 Which PROFINET nodes support the extended PROFINET diagnostics? An overview of the PROFINET nodes that support extended PROFINET diagnostics and of what you have to configure is provided in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/23678970). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 81 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO 4.1.2 Maintenance 4.1.2.1 I&M data (identification and maintenance) Definition and properties Identification and maintenance data (I&M) is information saved to module memory in order to provide support when: Checking the plant configuration Locating hardware changes in a plant Identification data (I data) is module information (some of which may be printed on the module housing) such as the order and serial number. I data is read-only vendor-specific module data. Maintenance data (M data) is plant-specific information such as the location identifier and installation date. M data is created during configuration. The modules can be uniquely identified in online mode by means of the I&M data. Further information To find out whether and to what extent a PROFINET device supports I&M data, refer to the documentation of the relevant device. 4.1.2.2 Loading I&M data to PROFINET IO devices and your modules Which I&M data can be loaded to PROFINET IO devices and your modules? You can load I&M 1 data (plant designation and location identifier) and/or I&M 2 data (installation date) and/or I&M 3 data (additional information) to the actual hardware. Requirements In the project settings (Options > Settings, Hardware configuration > Compiling and downloading), the option "Download I&M data" must be enabled. There is an online connection to the PROFINET IO devices and the modules to which you want to load I&M data. You have entered the I&M data you want to download in the properties of the respective PROFINET IO devices and your modules (Inspector window: "Properties" tab > "General" tab, Settings > Identification & Maintenance). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 82 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Where do I specify which I&M data is downloaded to which PROFINET IO devices? You specify which I&M data you want to download to which PROFINET IO devices in the "Load preview" dialog. You will find the following alternatives in the drop-down list of the "Identification and maintenance data (I&M)" row: Load nothing The check boxes for all PROFINET IO devices as well as the check boxes for the loadable I&M data are cleared. No I&M data is transferred to the actual hardware during loading with this setting. Load data The check boxes for all PROFINET IO devices as well as the check boxes for the loadable I&M data are selected. The respective I&M 1, I&M 2 and I&M 3 data is transferred to all PROFINET IO devices during loading with this setting. Load selected You select the check boxes of those PROFINET IO devices to which you want to load I&M data. You also select the check boxes of the identification data you want to load. With this setting, you transfer the selected I&M data to the selected PROFINET IO devices during loading. Note Language dependency of the I&M data to be loaded The I&M data are loaded to the real hardware in the form that you specified in the properties of the relevant PROFINET IO devices and your modules. There is no language dependency. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 83 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO 4.1.2.3 Asset management Further information about asset management at PROFINET Operation of machines and plants without a detailed knowledge of devices and assets is difficult to imagine. Maintenance requires data for this - data that is extensive and up-to-date as far as possible. The requirement of greater transparency with regard to the data made available by plant components has been fulfilled by PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI): The identification and maintenance data familiar since PROFIBUS times have been extended. The current PROFINET fulfills this requirement through the definition of a special data record: the Asset Management Record (AMR). The aim of this definition is to enable you to acquire all the components to be maintained online - and not only those components that can be addressed and accessed through the PROFINET device model (Device / Module / Submodule). PROFINET now also reaches non-PROFINET components! Assets general and asset management data records Assets are components (hardware and software / firmware) of a machine, for example a laser welding machine, or a plant. A large number of these device components can already be identified through tried-andtested I&M functions or corresponding data records (I&M0 to I&M5) in the PROFINET context: The device itself as well as its modules and submodules. Meaning all components that can be addressed through the PROFINET device model. Components that cannot be addressed via the PROFINET device model, but whose data it should be possible to acquire online for operation and maintenance, can be identified through asset management functions. This asset management data (short: AM data) is stored in a defined structure in a special data record, the asset management record (AMR) mentioned above. The PROFINET Guideline "Identification & Maintenance Functions" differentiates here between I&M functions (I&M data) and asset management functions (AM data): The following sections only deal with the AM data. The components that can be read additionally online through asset management data records include both hardware components, such as backplane bus modules of a device as well as firmware components such as a drive control unit with own versioning. Application examples Importing asset management records enables you to read the following information during installation or operation, for example: Are only approved devices being used (whitelist check)? A firmware update is due. Obtain a fast overview: Which devices or components are affected and have to be upgraded? PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 84 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Making asset management data available The concept for the asset management of PROFINET devices stipulates that the manufacturers of PROFINET devices have to ensure that non-PROFINET automation components are made available through an asset management record. This data record is assigned to the PROFINET device. In contrast to a "standard" IO device, with an I-device the project engineer has to make the asset management record available. In this case, the central modules of the I-device are assets. From the perspective of PROFINET, these central modules are not visible from the point of view of the higher-level IO controller. The higher-level IO controller only "sees" the transfer areas through which it exchanges IO data with the I-device. The principle of this provision is explained in the section. Reading asset management data The asset management record has the index 0xF880 and is read with standard PROFINET mechanisms by the user of the records, for example a tool or program for evaluating these data. A user program in the S7-1500 IO controller, for example, can read out the AMR of an IO device with the RDREC instruction (Index 0xF880). It is not possible to write to this data record. Further information Whether and to which extent a PROFINET device supports asset management data, meaning whether it makes an AMR available, is specified in the documentation of the respective device. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 85 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Content and structure of an asset management record Basic structure of the asset management record You are first provided with an overview of the general structure of the record. The following table describes the framework within which the asset management data blocks are embedded. Each data block represents an asset, a terminal block for example. Element of the data structure Designation according to IEC 61158-6-10 Code Data type / length in bytes Header AssetManagementData BlockType 0x0035 UINT / 2 BlockLength Number of bytes without UINT / 2 counting the bytes for BlockType and BlockLength BlockVersion 0x0100 UINT / 2 NumbersOfEntries Number of AssetManagementBlocks UINT / 2 AssetManagementBlock 1 See the table below AssetManagementInfo AssetManagementBlocks (n) AssetManagementBlock 2 ... AssetManagementBlock n Structure of asset management blocks Each AssetManagementBlock contains identification data and localization information for an asset. An AssetManagementBlock has a substructure with basic characteristics described below. The header of an AssetManagementBlock contains the coded information about which of the three possible AM data compilations the data record contains. Devices make a suitable BlockType available in accordance with the various device types: Complex devices with information about the hardware and firmware (BlockType "AM_FullInformation") Complex devices with information about the hardware (BlockType "AM_HardwareOnlyInformation") Devices with information about the firmware (BlockType "AM_FirmwareOnlyInformation") The differentiation provides an efficient data structure below the header. Nevertheless, the data record can have a considerable size (maximum of 64 KB, depending on the number of assets that the IO device supplies). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 86 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Table 4- 1 Structure of AssetManagementBlock Element of the data structure Designation according to IEC 61158-6-10 Code Data type / length in bytes Header AssetManagementBlock BlockType 0x0036 (AM_FullInformation) UINT / 2 0x0037 (AM_HardwareOnlyInformation) 0x0038 (AM_FirmwareOnlyInformation) AssetManagementBlock BlockLength Number of bytes without counting the bytes for BlockType and BlockLength UINT / 2 BlockVersion 0x0100 UINT / 2 Padding 0x0000 (padding byte) USINT / 1 Padding 0x0000 (padding byte) USINT / 1 IM_UniqueIdentifier Manufacturer-generated Universal Unique Array of Byte Identifier (UUID) conforming to ISO/IEC / 16 9834-8. Used as a reference key to uniquely identify this asset. (Structure depends on the BlockType. Here it is shown using AM_FullInformation as an example) Example: 550c5300-d34a-22b4-11d35533991111 AM_Location Description of the location of the asset: Either slot-oriented ("Slot and SubslotNumber format") or hierarchical ("Twelve level tree format"). Array of Byte / 16 See following description IM_Annotation Manufacturer-specific notation Example: "Terminal block, Type xyz123 ". Array of Char / 64 64 bytes are always used. Spaces are used for padding if the string is shorter. IM_OrderID Manufacturer-specific article number Example: "6ES7 131-6BF00-0BA0 ". Array of Char / 64 64 bytes are always used. Spaces are used for padding if the string is shorter. AM_SoftwareRevision Manufacturer-specific SW version (not at AM_HardwareOnlyInformatio n) Example: "V6.3.8 ". Array of Char / 64 64 bytes are always used. Spaces are used for padding if the string is shorter. If the asset supports IM_Software_Revision, the AM_SoftwareRevision is padded with spaces. AM_HardwareRevision Manufacturer-specific hardware version (not at Example: "A4 ". AM_FirmwareOnlyInformation 64 bytes are always used. Spaces are used ) for padding if the string is shorter. Array of Char / 64 If the asset supports IM_Hardware_Revision, the AM_HardwareRevision is padded with spaces. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 87 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Element of the data structure Designation according to IEC 61158-6-10 Code Data type / length in bytes IM_Serial_Number Manufacturer-specific unique productionrelated number. Array of Char / 16 The characters come from the visible range (0x20 ... 0x7E), no control characters. Example: "A78C-1C82 ". 16 bytes are always used. Spaces are used for padding if the string is shorter. IM_Software_Revision (not at AM_HardwareOnlyInformatio n) Software version, follows a strict structure (SW version prefix, for example "V", digits for functional extension, digits for BugFix, digits for internal change). Example: 'V' 0x01 0x2 0x3 If AM_SoftwareRevision is padded with spaces, you should evaluate IM_Software_Revision. Array of Byte /4 Prefix (character "V", "R", "P", "U", or "T"), then 3 digits "0" to "9" If the asset does not support any hardware, the coding 'V' 0x00 0x00 0x00. AM_DeviceIdentification Identification of the device. The structure is as follows: Array of Byte /8 AM_DeviceIdentification.DeviceSubID (for SIEMENS e.g. 0x0000) AM_DeviceIdentification.DeviceID (Device ID from manufacturer, 0x0000 to 0xFFFF) AM_DeviceIdentification.VendorID (Example for Siemens assets: 0x002A) AM_DeviceIdentification.Organization: Example for Siemens assets: 0x0000 (PROFINET) AM_TypeIdentification Manufacturer-allocated type identification: UINT / 2 0x0000: Unspecified 0x0001: Controller (PLC) 0x0002: PC-based 0x0003: IO module, IO submodule 0x0004: Communications module / submodule 0x0005: Interface module / submodule 0x0006: Active network component 0c0007: Media attached unit (bus adapter) 0x0100 to 0x7FF: Manufacturer-specific IM_Hardware_Revision Version of the hardware (0x0000 to 0xFFFF) UINT / 2 (not at Example: 0x0003 AM_FirmwareOnlyInformation If AM_HardwareRevision is padded with ) spaces, you should evaluate IM_Hardware_Revision. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 88 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO AM_Location Asset management at PROFINET supports two formats for coding the location of an asset: Slot-oriented format ("Slot and SubslotNumber format") Hierarchical format ("Twelve Level Tree format" abbreviated LT format) Assets that are part of the PROFINET device use the slot-oriented format. These assets are bound completely to the PROFINET modules and submodules. Assets that are located outside the PROFINET device use the hierarchical format (LT format) for coding the location of an asset. These assets are localized by their tree level. The tree level begins with Level 0. The value of Level 0 provides information about the proximity to the PROFINET device: If the asset is connected to a module that can be addressed through the PROFINET device model, Level 0 has the value 0. The subsequent levels (Level 1 to Level 3) then have the meaning of slot address, subslot address and channel number. If further assets are connected to this asset, the next Level 4 is used. The limit is reached at Level 11. If the asset belongs to a PROFINET device but is not connected to a module that can be addressed through the PROFINET device model, Level 0 has a value between 1 and 0x1FF. An example of such an asset is a power supply unit in the PROFINET device. If a further asset is connected to this power supply unit, for example a sensor, the next tree level is used to localize this sensor (Level 1). If the asset is located outside the PROFINET device, but, for example, belongs to a machine into which the PROFINET device is installed, Level 0 has a value between 0x200 and 0x3FE. The value 0x3FF for a tree level shows that this tree level is not used. This means that no further asset is connected. In this case, all the lower tree levels down to Level 11 must also have this value. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 89 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Example AM_Location slot-oriented A rack and the terminal blocks located on it each supply AM data. The slot assignments are shown in the figure. Figure 4-4 Example of assets with slot-oriented AM_Location coding. Code the AM_Location as an asset for each module as follows: Bit 0 - 7: AM_Location.Structure = 0x02 (coding "Slot and SubslotNumber format") Bit 8 - 15: AM_Location.Reserved1 = 0x00 (padding byte) Bit 16 - 31: AM_Location.BeginSlotNumber = 2 (the "Rack" asset begins from Slot 2 on) Bit 32 - 47: AM_Location.BeginSubslotNumber = 0xFFFF (the asset encompasses all the subslots of Slot 2. Otherwise you specify the no. of the subslot at which the asset begins) Bit 48 - 63: AM_Location.EndSlotNumber = 4 (the asset ends at Slot 4) Bit 64 - 79: AM_Location.EndSubslotNumber = 0xFFFF (the asset encompasses all the subslots of Slot 4. Otherwise you specify the no. of the subslot at which the asset ends) Bit 80 - 95: AM_Location.Reserved2 = 0x0000 (padding byte) Bit 96 - 111: AM_Location.Reserved3 = 0x0000 Bit 112 - 127: AM_Location.Reserved4 = 0x0000 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 90 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Example AM_Location level-oriented A complex sensor is connected to an IO module (Slot 5, Subslot 1, Channel 1). Two simple sensors, in turn, are connected to the complex sensor. The module can be addressed within the PROFINET device model. Level 0 therefore has the value 0x0000. The next level (Level 1) is specified by the assigned slot. This is followed by the further levels for the subslot and channel and, if appropriate, further subordinate layers. Figure 4-5 Example of assets with hierarchical AM_Location coding. Detailed coding for the example: Bit 0 - 7: AM_Location.Structure = 0x01 (LT format) Bit 8 - 17: AM_Location.Level0 = 0x000 (assets that are assigned to modules always have the Level 0 value 0x000) Bit 18 - 27: AM_Location.Level1 = 0x005 (Slot 5) Bit 28 - 37: AM_Location.Level2 = 0x001 (Subslot 1) Bit 38 - 47: AM_Location.Level3 = 0x001 (Channel 1) Bit 48 - 57: AM_Location.Level4 = 0x3FF (coding for "Level not used") Bit 58 - 67: AM_Location.Level5 = 0x3FF (coding for "Level not used") ... Bit 118 - 127: AM_Location.Level11 = 0x3FF (coding for "Level not used") Notation used in the screen for the LT coding of complex sensors: 0.5.1.1 The following correspondingly applies for the remaining sensors: LT coding for simple Sensor 1 at complex sensor: 0.5.1.1.1 LT coding for second simple Sensor 2 at complex sensor: 0.5.1.1.2 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 91 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Asset management data record for I-devices With STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15 and with S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware V2.5, you have the option of compiling an asset management data record via a user program. Configured as an I-device, these CPUs then supply the data from centrally plugged modules to a requesting IO controller as assets. "S7-1500 CPUs" also refers to the CPU variants S7-1500F, S7-1500T, S7-1500C, S7-1500 SW Controller, S7-1500pro CPUs and ET 200SP CPUs. Asset management records for I-devices I-devices often represent machines. The PROFINET IO controller to which the I-device is assigned only sees the PROFINET interface (also configured as an IO device) and the transfer areas of the I-device configured by the machine manufacturer. The local modules of the I-device are not visible or cannot be accessed. The assigned IO controller can read the central modules as assets of the I-device by means of an asset management record that the user program of the I-device compiles. Figure 4-6 Assets of an I-device Requirement S7-1500-CPU as of firmware V2.5, configured as an I-device STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15 If an IO controller is to read the asset management record: The PROFINET IO controller is programmed correspondingly to read an asset management record. For a SIMATIC IO controller, for example, you call a read instruction (RDREC) with record index 0xF880. The instruction addresses any submodule of the I-device, for example the first configured transfer area submodule. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 92 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Basic procedure The following steps are fundamentally required to create the requirements so that an Idevice can make its local modules available as an asset management record to a requesting IO controller: 1. Make the settings in the properties of the PROFINET interface of the CPU. - Activate "IO device" operating mode - Activate the "Activate asset management using user program" option PROFINET interface forwards a request of an IO controller to the user program of the I-device for reading the asset management record only if the option is selected. Figure 4-7 Activating asset management using a data record 2. Configure the program routine for compiling the asset management record. The program part collects the required I&M0 data of the plugged central modules and stores them in the corresponding fields of the data record structure of the asset management record. 3. Configure the program part for coordinating the data record provision: For this, call the instruction PRVREC (Provide Record) in accordance with the following templates in the corresponding modes: - Cyclic calling (for example in the cycle OB) of the PRVREC instruction with Mode 0, in order to recognize the AMR request. - When the AM record request is recognized, the PRVREC program has to acknowledge within one second that the request has been recognized. This means that PRVREC must be called with the Mode 2, and with the required AM record. If the I-device does not adhere to the time frame, the I-device acknowledges the record request of the IO controller as negative. Particular aspect for configuration of the PRVREC call: PRVREC has to be called with F_ID = 0. This codes that this is an IO-device-specific data record. The SLOT and SUBSLOT output parameters therefore also return the value 0. - Within 10 seconds the AM record now has to be completed and PRVREC be called with Mode 3 (positive response to the IO controller with provision of the AM record). If the I-device does not adhere to the time frame, the I-device acknowledges the record request of the IO controller as negative. A detailed description of the PRVREC instruction and possible error codes for evaluating the function can be found in the online help of STEP 7 (TIA Portal). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 93 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Compilation of the asset management record You have various possibilities for compiling the asset management record for an I-device: Recommendation: The Siemens Industry Online Support makes an application available to you that helps you to compile the asset management record. The data area of the asset management record is divided in two. The first part consists of an automatically determined area that packages the IM0 data of the slots of the I-device into an asset management block. The second part consists of the user-specific asset management blocks. You configure the user-specific asset management blocks based on pre-configured asset management record structures, fill them with information and make them available to the application. The application performs the following: - The application determines the required size of all the asset management blocks. - The application fills the data block in accordance with the specifications of an asset management record with the automatically determined asset management blocks and your user-specific asset management blocks. - The application makes this asset management record available to the higher-level IO controller. The application is described in this application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748894) You create the asset management record yourself. The following section describes how you can compile an asset management record for an I-device yourself. The concept assumes you yourself determine the I&M data for each centrally plugged module and fill the asset management record with this information. The I&M0 data of a module contains basic information about the module such as the manufacturer's code, article number, serial number, hardware and firmware version. These are the data that are also required in the AM record for an asset. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 94 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Determine the I&M data of centrally plugged modules The central structure consists of an optionally plugged power supply unit (Slot 0), followed by the I-device CPU (Slot 1), and then followed by the further modules, such as digital modules, analog modules, etc. (as of Slot 2). You determine the I&M data with the "Get_IM_Data" instruction for the plugged modules with exception of the CPU: To assign parameters for the "Get_IM_Data" instruction, you require the hardware identifier (LADDR input parameter). You determine the hardware identifier for each occupied slot with the "GEO2LOG" instruction (Determine hardware identifier from slot). Summary of the theoretical steps: 1. In a loop, determine the hardware identifiers of the plugged modules with the "GEO2LOG" instruction. 2. For each hardware identifier found, determine the I&M data by using the "Get_IM_Data" instruction and store these data in a data block that you address with the input parameter DATA. Use ARRAY of BYTE for the data storage. This corresponds to the description of the AM record contents in the preceding section. Forming an AM record with the determined I&M data The following sections are based on the description of the fundamental structure of the AM record, see the preceding section. Since each module of an S7-1500 contains hardware and firmware information, select the coding for "AM_FullInformation" for the assigned BlockType. For the data types used: IM_Annotation, IM_OrderID, AM_SoftwareRevision and AM_HardwareRevision: Characters (UTF-8) IM_Serial_Number: Characters ("ASCII characters") with the exception of the characters for DEL (0x7F) Do not use String data types. They require additional bytes and therefore do not conform to the conventions of the PROFINET standard 61158-6-10 "Application layer protocol specification". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 95 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.1 Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO Form the AM_FullInformationBlock for each module as follows: Table 4- 2 AM_FullInformationBlock for modules Data record element Description IM_UniqueIdentifier Generate a (pseudo) random UUID (hash value) in accordance with ISO 9834-8 as follows: * Generate an 8-byte hash value across the I&M0 data of the module (as of Slot 2). Use the algorithm Fowler-Noll-Vo (in short: FNV); an algorithm for generating variance coefficients (hash values) across data field, see corresponding example code in the Internet or online support. * Generate an 8-byte hash value across the I&M0 data of the CPU. (Use the algorithm Fowler-Noll-Vo (in short: FNV) as described above) IM_UniqueIdentifier Byte 0 to 7: Hash value of module I&M0 data Bytes 8 to 15: Hash value for CPU-I&M0 data Required customizations to ISO 9834-8: Byte 8, Bit 7 has to be set to 1, and Byte 8, Bit 6 to 0 (result of the AND operator with 0011 1111, subsequent OR operator with 1000 0000) Byte 6, Bit 4 to 7 have to be set to 0100 (result of the AND operation with 0000 1111, then OR operation with 0001 0000) Since this algorithm is based on the I&M0 data of the CPU as well as of the modules, it generates a constant IM_UniqueIdentifier for an individual module. When the configuration changes the IM_UniqueIdentifier also changes. * AM_Location Byte 0 = 0x02 (slot-oriented coding), see description in the preceding section. IM_Annotation Example: "S7-1500 module" and pad the remaining bytes of IM_Annotation with spaces (0x20). IM_OrderID Copy 20 bytes of the I&M0 data of the module (beginning with offset 2 of the I&M0 data). Pad the remaining 44 bytes with spaces (0x20) AM_SoftwareRevision Pad the field with 64 spaces (0x20) AM_HardwareRevision Pad the field with 64 spaces (0x20) IM_Serial_Number Copy 16 bytes of the I&M0 data of the module (beginning with offset 22 of the I&M0 data) IM_Software_Revision Copy 4 bytes of the I&M0 data of the module (beginning with offset 40 of the I&M0 data) AM_DeviceIdentification Byte 0, 1, 2, 6, 7 = 0x00 Byte 3 = 0x2A (Vendor = Siemens) Byte 4 = 01, Byte 5 = DeviceID (e.g. CPU 15xx = 0x0E) AM_TypeIdentification Copy 2 bytes of the I&M0 data of the module (beginning with offset 48 of the I&M0 data) IM_Hardware_Revision Copy 2 bytes of the I&M0 data of the module (beginning with offset 38 of the I&M0 data) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 96 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.2 Diagnostics using status LEDs 4.2 Diagnostics using status LEDs LEDs for diagnostics on PROFINET Each port of a PROFINET interface of a SIMATIC device has one LED. The following table shows a summary of the meaning of these LEDs in the S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems. Table 4- 3 S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL: LEDs for diagnostics on PROFINET LED image Meaning S7-1500 ET 200MP LINK/TX/RX LED LED off ET 200SP ET 200AL LK LED P1 Link LED P2 Link LED X X X X There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner. X X X X The "LED flashing test" is being performed. X X X X Data is currently being received from or sent to a communications partner on Ethernet via the PROFINET interface of the PROFINET device. X X - - There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the PROFINET device and the communication partner. No data is currently being sent/received via the PROFINET interface. LED green LED flashes green LED flickers yellow Additional information You can find a detailed description of all LEDs of the module with cause of the error and remedies in the relevant documentation for the module. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 97 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.3 Diagnostics via the display of the S7-1500 CPUs 4.3 Diagnostics via the display of the S7-1500 CPUs Display The S7-1500 CPU has a display and operating keys. The display of the CPU shows you the control and status information in different menus. You use operating keys to navigate through the menus and make a variety of settings in the process. Diagnostics via the display The following indicators can be evaluated for diagnostics purposes on the display: Error and alarm texts (system diagnostics, alarm messages) Module status for central and distributed modules In the following example of a display of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP, you can see a warning on the diagnostics icon and an exclamation mark on the icon for module. Figure 4-8 Display of overview Module status To show the module status, navigate on the display through the menu items "Module" > "PROFINET I/O (X1)" > "Station" > "Slot" > "Status" > "Module status". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 98 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.3 Diagnostics via the display of the S7-1500 CPUs The module status indicates that a fault has occurred in the module. The "lower-level status" is the status of the module in the diagnostics level below this. In the example, the status is "good", i.e., the fault is not in the lower diagnostics level submodule or channel, but instead in the module. Figure 4-9 Display of module status Error and alarm texts You can show diagnostics buffer entries and alarm messages for the relevant automation system on the display. To show the diagnostics buffer entries of the CPU, navigate on the display via the menu items "Diagnostics" > "Diagnostics buffer". Figure 4-10 Display of diagnostics buffer To show the alarm messages of the automation system, navigate through the menu items "Diagnostics" > "Alarms" > "Alarm text" on the display. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 99 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.3 Diagnostics via the display of the S7-1500 CPUs Note Updating the alarm display The display shows the currently read status of the CPU in static form, the display is not automatically updated. The alarm display is updated after it has been exited and opened again. You set the automatic updating of the diagnostics information under: "Display" > "DiagnosticRefresh". Figure 4-11 Display of alarms Figure 4-12 Display of alarm message Additional information You can find the description of the operation and functions of the display in the SIMATIC S7-1500 Display Simulator (http://www.automation.siemens.com/salesmaterialas/interactive-manuals/getting-started_simatic-s7-1500/disp_tool/start_de.html). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 100 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.4 Diagnostics via Web server 4.4 Diagnostics via Web server The CPUs belonging to the S7 family have their own integrated Web server with a wide range of functions. The following diagnostics options are available to you: Start page with general CPU information Information on diagnostics Contents of the diagnostics buffer Module information Alarms Information about communication PROFINET topology Motion Control diagnostics Trace Contents of the diagnostic buffer Module status Actual topology of the PROFINET system Set topology of the PROFINET system (from the configuration) Set topology and actual topology - graphic view Requirements for displaying the set and actual topology: You have configured the PROFINET ports in the topology editor of the hardware and network editor of STEP 7. You have loaded the entire project with STEP 7 in the CPU. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 101 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.4 Diagnostics via Web server The following shows an example of the graphic view. Figure 4-13 Topology - graphic view via the Web server Meaning of the colored connections in the set/actual topology: Table 4- 4 Meaning of the colored connections in the set/actual topology: Connection Meaning Set topology Actual topology green The current actual connection matches the configured set connection. detected connections red The current actual connection does not match the configured set connection (e.g., port interchanged). - yellow The connection cannot be diagnosed. Causes: - * The communication to an IO device has been disrupted (e.g., cable removed) * Connection to a passive component * Connection to PROFINET devices of another IO controller or PROFINET system PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 102 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.4 Diagnostics via Web server Configured and accessible PROFINET devices Configured and accessible PROFINET devices are displayed dark-gray. Connections show the ports through which the PROFINET devices of a station are connected. Configured but not accessible PROFINET devices The configured but not accessible PROFINET devices are displayed in pink with red border (e.g., device has failed, cable disconnected). Disabled devices All disabled, configured PROFINET devices are displayed light-gray. Interchanged ports Interchanged ports are marked red in the set topology view. The currently connected ports are displayed in the actual topology, the configured set connection in the set topology. PROFINET devices of another PROFINET IO system In the set topology: A PROFINET device of another PROFINET IO system is displayed with a green connection (or red connected if the ports have been interchanged), when it is directly adjoining a configured and accessible PROFINET device and it is also accessible. When the PROFINET device of another PROFINET IO system is not accessible, a yellow connection line is displayed. The connection between two PROFINET devices that both belong to a different PROFINET IO system, cannot be determined and is always displayed in yellow. In the actual topology: A PROFINET device of another PROFINET IO system is only displayed if the PROFINET device is in direct proximity to a configured PROFINET device. The PROFINET device is displayed light-gray and with dashed line. For PROFINET devices of a different PROFINET IO system, no status display is shown on the device head. Representation of faulty neighbor relations The devices whose neighbor relations cannot be read out completely or correctly are displayed light-gray with red border. Additional information The tabular view of the actual topology and the status overview of the PROFINET devices in the project are possible. You can find these views, additional topology examples, and detailed information on the operation and the functions of the Web server in the Web server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) manual. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 103 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.5 Diagnostics in STEP 7 4.5 Diagnostics in STEP 7 For PROFINET, you have the following options to evaluate diagnostics in STEP 7: Online & diagnostics - Devices & networks Online & diagnostics - diagnostics of PROFINET ports Online & diagnostics network view In the hardware and network editor (launched from the "Project tree" by double-clicking "Devices & networks"), you can get an overview of the current state of your system by clicking on the "Go online" button. It also shows the configuration information (for example, non-configured modules). This option is also available in the topology view in similar form. Schematic drawing of the network view (online): Figure 4-14 Online & diagnostics network view PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 104 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.5 Diagnostics in STEP 7 Online & diagnostics device view In STEP 7, you can display an overview of the modules in which faults have occurred. To do this, select the menu command "Online > Online & diagnostics". Once you are connected, you can see the status of the accessible devices in the project tree. Double-click the device which displays an alarm message to access the faulty module directly. The device view is opened in the work area. In the device view of the device that reports the fault you can see directly in which module the fault occurs. Open the "Diagnostics" tab and the subordinate "Device information" tab in the Inspector window for a more detailed error description. Schematic drawing of the device view (online): Figure 4-15 Online & diagnostics device view PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 105 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.5 Diagnostics in STEP 7 Diagnostics of PROFINET ports If you select "PROFINET interface > Ports" in the Diagnostics area in the online & diagnostics device view of a PROFINET device, the ports of the PROFINET interface are listed in a table. The table provides you with the following information about the ports of the PROFINET interface. Name Status Settings Operating mode Figure 4-16 Diagnostics of PROFINET ports in STEP 7 Additional information You can find information on the system diagnostics for S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL in the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual and online help for STEP 7. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 106 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.6 Extended maintenance concept 4.6 Extended maintenance concept Extended maintenance concept The PROFINET interfaces with integrated switch of the SIMATIC devices support the fourlevel diagnostics concept in accordance with PROFINET specification Version V2.3 or higher with the following status: Table 4- 5 Classification of the diagnostic status Diagnostic status Symbol Good Green checkmark Maintenance Green wrench Severity of the error required Maintenance Yellow wrench demanded Bad Red wrench The aim of the diagnostics concept is the early detection and elimination of potential faults before they cause a production outage. Other status information is defined in addition to the Good (no fault) and Bad (fault) status information for a PROFINET device. The maintenance information is generated with the following system alarms: Maintenance required (symbolized by a green wrench) and Maintenance demanded (symbolized by a yellow wrench) The times at which the two system alarms are generated can be customized for most wear parameters. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 107 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.6 Extended maintenance concept Example: Maintenance demanded for a PROFINET cable The following graphic illustrates how diagnostics information is exchanged when the transmission quality on the optical cable decreases due to ageing, for example. In this example, the scenario is considered after a maintenance required has already been diagnosed. Number Description The system reserve of the fiber-optic cable drops below 0 dB. Based on the interrupts, the IO controller detects the maintenance demanded from the switch and from the IO device. The module information data is updated in the IO controller and the corresponding error OBs are called. Note: To be able to start the error OBs in the IO controller, the "Call the user program if communication errors occur" property must be selected in STEP 7 for the relevant IO controller. Both the ET 200S PN FO and the switch send the maintenance demanded alarm to the IO controller. In STEP 7 (on the programming device/PC), the maintenance demanded message is indicated on the IO device and at the switch by a yellow wrench symbol. STEP 7 can also read out detailed information directly from the switch. Figure 4-17 Maintenance demanded for a PROFINET cable PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 108 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.7 Diagnostics of the network topology 4.7 Availability Diagnostics of the network topology As an open standard, you can use any SNMP based systems or software solutions for diagnostics in PROFINET. Network diagnostics MIB The network management protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) uses the wireless UDP transport protocol. It consists of two network components, similar to the client/server model. The SNMP manager monitors the network nodes and the SNMP clients collect the various network-specific information in the individual network nodes and store it in a structured form in the MIB (Management Information Base). This information allows a network management system to run detailed network diagnostics. The MIB (Management Information Base) is the database of a device. SNMP clients access this database in the device. The S7 device family supports the following standard MIBs: MIB II, standardized in the RFC 1213 LLDP-MIB, standardized in the international standard IEC 802.1AB LLDP-PNIO-MIB, standardized in the international standard IEC 61158-6-10 Detecting the network topology LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a protocol that is used to detect the closest neighbor. LLDP enables a device to send information about itself and to receive information from its neighbor devices. This information is then saved in the LLDP MIB, for example, and can be queried using SNMP. This information allows a network management system to determine the network topology. Use of SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP can be used as follows: By users to integrate network diagnostics into a central HMI/SCADA system using the SIMATIC NET OPC server By the IT administration of machine and plant operators to monitor their Industrial Ethernet network using standard network management systems. By the IT administration, to monitor the automation network, alongside the office network, using standard network management systems. Use of SNMP in the SIMATIC NET environment SNMP-compliant devices from the SIMATIC NET family can be monitored and operated via a conventional standard Internet browser. The management system known as web-based management offers a wide range of device-specific information (network statistics, status of redundant supply, for example). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 109 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.8 Diagnostics in the user program 4.8 Diagnostics in the user program 4.8.1 Diagnostics and configuration data records Diagnostics mechanism The IO device outputs a diagnostics interrupt to the IO controller when it detects faults such as wire break on an IO module. This interrupt calls a corresponding organization block in the user program (diagnostics interrupt OB82), in order to generate a defined (programmed) response to the fault and passes a diagnostics data record. Diagnostics data records in PROFINET IO There are two different types of diagnostics data record: 1. Channel diagnostics data records Channel diagnostics data records are generated if a channel is in an error state and / or has triggered an interrupt. A diagnostics data record of length 0 is returned if there is no fault. 2. Vendor-specific diagnostics data records The structure and size of vendor-specific diagnostics data records depend on the vendor's settings. For information about vendor-specific diagnostics data records, refer to the appropriate device manual. Addressing levels of diagnostics data records Diagnostics and configuration data is evaluated at the following addressing levels: Device level AR (Application Relation) API (Application Process Identifier) Slot Subslot PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 110 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.8 Diagnostics in the user program A group of diagnostics and configuration data records are available for each address level (exception: device level always 0xF80c). In HEX representation, the individual groups of data records are distinguished by the first letter of the data record number. Figure 4-18 Addressing levels of diagnostics data records The information for each IO device (addressing level AR), module (addressing level slot) or submodule (addressing level subslot) is always transferred in separate diagnostics or configuration data records. The data record returns diagnostics data or configuration data for one or more subslots, slots and APIs, depending on the addressing level. Note The diagnostics information is only generated for configured modules / submodules / channels. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 111 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.8 Diagnostics in the user program Library for PROFINET data records The "LPNDR" block library contains various function blocks. You can use these blocks to read out various device and status information from a PROFINET device and write parameters. You can execute the following functions using the library blocks: Read device information: - Information about the interface, e.g. IP and MAC address - Information about the device interface, e.g. status, medium, name - Information about the link status of the interfaces, e.g. link down, link up - Information about the role of the device for MRP, e.g. client, manager - Information about the port statistics, e.g. number of received bytes Read the MRP status Modification of the parameters of analog input module of the ET 200SP in runtime, e.g. in order to disable/enable the channel diagnostics. The finished functions are freely adaptable and can therefore be used universally. The "LPNDR" block library with an example project can be found on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109753067). 4.8.2 Evaluate diagnostics in the user program Diagnostics in the user program For PROFINET IO, a cross-vendor structure of data records with diagnostics information applies. Diagnostics information is created only for channels on which a fault has occurred. With PROFINET, there are two basic ways to obtain diagnostics information. 1. Evaluating the diagnostics status Read out the diagnostics of your PROFINET IO system using the instructions "DeviceStates" and "ModuleStates", to localize those stations / modules or station / modules with maintenance demanded or maintenance required that have faults within a PROFINET IO system. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 112 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Diagnostics and maintenance 4.8 Diagnostics in the user program The instruction RDREC (read data record) is then used to read various diagnostics data records directly from the module concerned and thus obtain detailed information about the error. Number Description All individual errors are collected in a single data record on the interface module. In your user program, the instruction "RDREC" reads the entire station status asynchronously directly from the IO device. Figure 4-19 Example: Evaluating diagnostics data records with the instruction "RDREC" PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 113 Diagnostics and maintenance 4.8 Diagnostics in the user program 2. Evaluation of interrupts When the error OB (OB 82) is called, the OB's start information provides you with information on the cause and location of the error. Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information). Number Description Every error is sent to the IO controller individually as channel diagnostics information in the form of an interrupt. In the IO controller, the module status data is updated automatically and the error OB (OB 82) is started. In your user program in the error OB (OB 82), the instruction "RALRM" reads the error synchronously from the IO controller without addressing the IO device. Figure 4-20 Diagnostics with OB 82 and the instruction "RALRM" Instructions and OBs You will find information on the instructions and OBs in the STEP 7 online help. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 114 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 5 Functions Introduction The following section describes the PROFINET IO functions for field of application, properties and configuration in STEP 7. Refer to the documentation for the respective device to see to what extent the PROFINET devices support the described functions. You can find a tabular overview of the PROFINET devices and the functions these support on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/102325771). 5.1 Connecting other bus systems Fieldbus integration PROFINET allows you to use a proxy-capable PROFINET device to integrate existing fieldbus systems (for example, PROFIBUS, AS interface). The devices of these fieldbus systems are mapped on proxy PROFINET devices. In this way, you can set up any hybrid systems consisting of fieldbus and Ethernet-based subsystems. This allows a continuous exchange of information. Figure 5-1 Gateways on PROFINET IO PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 115 Functions 5.1 Connecting other bus systems Gateways of an S7-1500 CPU An overview of the gateways at an S7-1500 CPU is provided in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/88778900). Connecting to building busses BACnet: You can find the procedure for configuring communication between a SIMATIC PLC and a BACnet network with a gateway in this application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109476182). M-bus: You can find the procedure for configuring communication between a SIMATIC PLC and an M-bus network with a gateway in this application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478527). DALI: You can find the procedure for configuring communication between a SIMATIC PLC and a DALI network with a gateway in this application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740160). KNX: You can find the procedure for configuring communication between a SIMATIC PLC and a KNX network with a gateway in this application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109739689). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 116 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.1 Connecting other bus systems 5.1.1 Linking PROFINET and PROFIBUS Linking PROFINET and PROFIBUS With a proxy-capable PROFINET device which is equipped with a PROFINET interface in addition to a PROFIBUS interface (for example, IE/PB Link PN IO), you can integrate existing PROFIBUS configurations into the PROFINET configuration. The following figures shows how a PROFIBUS system is connected via IE/PB Link to a CPU S7-1500 (as of firmware version 1.7). Figure 5-2 Gateway from PROFINET and PROFIBUS via IE/PB link PROFINET device with proxy functionality The PROFINET device with proxy functionality is the substitute for a PROFIBUS device on Ethernet. The proxy functionality allows a PROFIBUS device to communicate not only with its master but also with all devices on PROFINET. With PROFINET you can connect an existing PROFIBUS system to an IO controller, for example with the help of an IE/PB Link PN IO. From the IO controller perspective, the PROFIBUS DP slaves are connected to the same network as the IE/PB Link PN IO. These slaves have the same device name and IP address as the IE/PB Link PN IO, but different device numbers. Furthermore, each also has a specific PROFIBUS address. In this way, you can link both DPV0 and DPV1 slaves to PROFINET. For information on how to connect a DP slave to a PROFINET IO system, refer to section Connect the DP slave via the IE/PB Link to a PROFINET IO system (Page 118). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 117 Functions 5.1 Connecting other bus systems Diagnostic options with a CPU S7-1500 as IO controller The CPU S7-1500 (as of firmware version 1.7) as IO controller detects disrupted DP slaves behind the IP/PB link. 5.1.2 Connect the DP slave via the IE/PB Link to a PROFINET IO system Requirements STEP 7 as of V13 SP1 S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version 1.7 ET 200SP CPU as of firmware version 1.7 CPU 1516pro-2 PN as of firmware version 2.0 S7-1500 Software Controller as of firmware version 1.7 S7-300/400 CPU Procedure for connecting a DP slave via an IE/PB Link To connect a DP slave to a PROFINET IO system via an IE/PB Link in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Drag-and-drop a PROFINET CPU, for example CPU 1513-1 PN, from the hardware catalog into the network view of STEP 7. 2. Drag-and-drop an IE/PB Link PN IO from the hardware catalog into the network view of STEP 7. The IE/PB Link PN IO is located under Network components > Gateways > IE/PB Link PN IO. 3. Assign the IE/PB Link PN IO to the CPU. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 118 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.1 Connecting other bus systems 4. Drag a PROFIBUS interface module e.g. IM155-6 DP HF, from the hardware catalog to the network view. 5. Assign the interface module to the IE/PB Link. Figure 5-3 Configuring an IE/PB link 6. Select the IE/PB Link PN IO in the network view of STEP 7. 7. In the Inspector window, go to the "Gateway" area and select the "Network gateway as PROFINET IO proxy" option. Figure 5-4 Setting a gateway 8. In the PROFINET device number area, you can assign a PROFINET device number for the DP slave. If you have selected the "Device number = PB address" check box (default), STEP 7 automatically assigns the device number according to the PROFIBUS address of the slave. In addition, you no longer need to update the device number if the PROFIBUS address changes. Figure 5-5 Assigning PN device numbers for IE/PB link Result You have connected the DP slave to the PROFINET IO system. Reference Additional information on the IE/PB link is available in the manual Gateway IE/PB Link PN IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19299692). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 119 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.1 I-device functionality I-device functionality The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality of a CPU facilitates data exchange with an IO controller and operation of the CPU as intelligent preprocessing unit of sub processes, for example. The I-device is linked as an IO device to a "higher-level" IO controller. The preprocessing is handled by the user program in the I-device. The process values acquired in the centralized or distributed (PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP) I/O are preprocessed by the user program and made available to the IO controller. Figure 5-6 I-device "I-device" naming conventions In the remainder of this description, a CPU or a CP with I-device functionality is simply called an "I-device". Application example: Configuration and application of the PROFINET I-device function A detailed application example is available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478798). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 120 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.2 Properties and Advantages of the I-Device Fields of application Fields of application of the I-device: Distributed processing A complex automation task can be divided into smaller units/subprocesses. This results in manageable processes which lead to simplified subtasks. Separating subprocesses Complicated, widely distributed and extensive processes can be subdivided into several subprocesses with manageable interfaces by using I-devices. These subprocesses can be stored in individual STEP 7 projects if necessary, which can later be merged to form one master project. Know-how protection Components can only be delivered with a GSD file for the I-device interface description instead of with a STEP 7 project. The know-how of the user program may no longer be published. Properties Properties of the I-device: Unlinking STEP 7 projects Creators and users of an I-device can have completely separated STEP 7 automation projects. The GSD file forms the interface between the STEP 7 projects. This allows a link to standard IO controllers via a standardized interface. Real-time communication The I-device is provided with a deterministic PROFINET IO system via a PROFINET IO interface and therefore supports RT (real-time communication) and IRT (isochronous real time). Advantages The I-device has the following advantages: Simple linking of IO controllers Real-time communication between IO controllers Relieving the IO controller by distributing the computing capacity to I-devices. Lower communication load by processing process data locally. Manageable, due to processing of subtasks in separate STEP 7 projects PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 121 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.3 Characteristics of an I-Device Principle An I-device is included in an IO system like a standard IO device. I-device without lower-level PROFINET IO system The I-device does not have its own distributed I/O. The configuration and parameter assignment of the I-devices in the role of an IO device is the same as for a distributed I/O system (for example ET 200). Figure 5-7 I-device without lower-level PROFINET IO system I-device with lower-level PROFINET IO system Depending on the configuration, an I-device can also be an IO controller on a PROFINET interface in addition to having the role of an IO device. This means that the I-device can be part of a higher-level IO system via its PROFINET interface and as an IO controller can support its own lower-level IO system. The lower-level IO system can, in turn, contain I-devices (see figure below). This makes hierarchically structured IO systems possible. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 122 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) In addition to its role as IO controller, an I-device can also be used via a PROFIBUS interface as DP master for a lower-level PROFIBUS system. Figure 5-8 I-device with lower-level IO system PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 123 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Example - the I-device as IO device and IO controller The I-device as IO device and IO controller is explained based on the example of a print process. The I-device controls a unit (a subprocess). One unit is used, for example, to insert additional sheets such as flyers or brochures in a package of printed material. Figure 5-9 Example - the I-device as IO device and IO controller Unit 1 and unit 2 each consist of an I-device with centralized I/O. The I-device along with the distributed I/O system (for example ET 200) forms unit 3. The user program on the I-device is responsible for preprocessing the process data. For this task, the user program of the I-device requires default settings (for example control data) from the higher-level IO controller. The I-device provides the higher-level IO controller with the results (for example status of its subtask). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 124 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) I-device as a shared device An I-device can also be used simultaneously by multiple IO controllers as a shared device. Figure 5-10 I-device as a shared device Information about configuring an I-device as a shared device is available in the section Configuring an I-device as a shared device (Page 151). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 125 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.4 Data Exchange between higher- and lower-level IO system Introduction The next chapter shows the data exchange between the higher- and lower-level IO system. Transfer areas Transfer areas are an interface to the user program of the I-device CPU. Inputs are processed in the user program and outputs are the result of the processing in the user program. The data for communication between IO controller and I-device is made available in the transfer areas. A transfer area contains an information unit that is exchanged consistently between IO controller and I-device. You can find more information on configuration and use of transfer areas in the section Configuring the I-device (Page 128). The next figure shows the data exchange between the higher- and lower-level IO system. The individual communication relations are explained below based on the numbers. Figure 5-11 Data exchange between higher- and lower-level IO system PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 126 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Data exchange between higher-level IO controller and normal IO-device In this way, the IO controller and IO devices exchange data through PROFINET. Data exchange between higher-level IO controller and I-device In this way, the IO controller and the I-device exchange data through PROFINET. The data exchange between a higher-level IO controller and an I-device is based on the conventional IO controller / IO device relationship. For the higher-level IO controller, the transfer areas of the I-devices represent submodules of a preconfigured station. The output data of the IO controller is the input data of the I-device. Analogously, the input data of the IO controller is the output data of the I-device. Transfer relationship between the user program and the transfer area In this way, the user program and the transfer area exchange input and output data. Data exchange between the user program and the I/O of the I-device In this way, the user program and the centralized / distributed I/O exchange input and output data. Data exchange between the I-device and a lower-level IO device In this way, the I-device and its IO devices exchange data. The data transfer is via PROFINET. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 127 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.5 Configuring the I-device Introduction There are basically two possibilities for configuration: Configuration of an I-device within a project Configuration of an I-device that is used in another project or in another engineering system. STEP 7 allows you to configure an I-device for another project or for another engineering system by exporting a configured I-device to a GSD file. You import the GSD file in other projects or engineering systems as with other GSD files. The transfer areas for the data exchange, among other data, are stored in this GSD file. Configuration of an I-device within a project 1. Drag-and-drop a PROFINET CPU from the hardware catalog into the network view. 2. Drag-and-drop a PROFINET CPU, which can also be configured as an IO device, from the hardware catalog into the network view. This device is configured as I-device (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP). 3. Select the PROFINET interface for the I-device. 4. In the Inspector window in the area navigation choose "Operating mode" and select the check box "IO device". 5. Now you have the option of choosing the IO controller in the "Assigned IO controller" drop-down list. Once you have chosen the IO controller, the networking and the IO system between both devices are displayed in the network view. Figure 5-12 Configuring the I-device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 128 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 6. With the "Parameter assignment of PN interface by higher-level IO controller" check box, you specify whether the interface parameters will be assigned by the I-device itself or by a higher-level IO controller. If you operate the I-device with a lower-level IO system, then the parameters of the Idevice PROFINET interface (for example, port parameter) cannot be assigned with the higher-level IO controller. 7. Configure the transfer areas. The transfer areas are found in the area navigation section "I-device communication". - Click in the first field of the "Transfer area" column. STEP 7 assigns a default name which you can change. - Select the type of communication relation: you can currently only select CD or F-CD for "Controller-device communication relation". - Addresses are automatically preset; you can correct addresses if necessary, and determine the length of the transfer area which is to be consistently transferred. Figure 5-13 Configuring the transfer areas 8. A separate entry is created in the area navigation for each transfer area. If you select one of these entries, you can adjust the details of the transfer area, or correct them and comment on them. Configuring an I-device with a GSD file If you use an I-device in another project, or if the I-device is used in another engineering system, then configure the higher-level IO controller and the I-device as described above. However, click on the "Export" button after configuring the transfer areas so a new GSD file is created from the I-device. This GSD file represents the configured I-device in other projects. The "Export" button is found in the "I-device communication" section of the Inspector window. The hardware configuration is compiled and the export dialog opened. Assign a name for the I-device proxy as well as a description in the fields provided. Click the "Export" button to complete your process. Finally, import the GSD file, for example, in another project. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 129 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.6 Program examples Introduction This simple program example shows how you use the transfer areas of an I-device. Requirements You have configured an I-device. Task The result of an "AND logic operation" of two inputs (preprocessing) in the I-device is to be provided to the higher-level IO controller. This result is to be assigned to a local output in the IO master (further processing). Use a transfer area with the following addresses for this purpose: Address in the I-device: Q568 Address in the IO controller: I68 Required steps The following steps to solve the task: 1. Configuring the transfer area 2. Programming I-device 3. Programming IO controller PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 130 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Configuring the transfer area Configure a transfer area with the following properties in the I-device: Figure 5-14 I-device transfer area, sample program Programming I-device To program the sample program for the I-device, follow these steps: 1. Using the SCL programming language, create a new function with the name "preprocessing" in the project tree in "Program blocks" > "Add new block". Open the function. 2. In the interface of the function "preprocessing", create the following tags: Name Data type Input / output type input 1 bool Input input 2 bool Input result bool Output 3. In the instruction window of the function "preprocessing", write the following program code: #result:=#input 1&#input 2; PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 131 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 4. Call the function "preprocessing" in a program cycle OB, for example, in OB1. 5. Wire the function "preprocessing" in the program cycle OB as follows: Figure 5-15 I-device sample program Programming IO controller To program the sample program for the IO controller, follow these steps: 1. Using the SCL programming language, create a new function with the name "further processing" in the project tree in "Program blocks" > "Add new block". Open the function. 2. In the interface of the function "further processing", create the following tags: Name Data type Input / output type result bool Input output bool Output 3. In the instruction window of the function "further processing", write the following program code: #output:=#result; 4. Call the function "further processing" in a program cycle OB, for example, in OB1. 5. Wire the function "further processing" in the program cycle OB as follows: Figure 5-16 IO controller sample program Result The IO controller and the I-device can exchange data with each other through the input/output transfer areas. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 132 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.7 Diagnostics and interrupt characteristics Diagnostics and interrupt characteristics S7 CPUs have numerous diagnostics and interrupt functions that can, for example, report errors or failures of lower-level IO systems. These diagnostics messages reduce down times and simplify localization and elimination of problems. Diagnostics options in the higher-level IO controller and in the I-device The following diagnostics functions are available to the higher-level IO controller and the Idevice CPU: OB 83 (pull/plug) OB 86 (rack failure) OB 122 (I/O access error) Note The diagnostics messages of the I/O can be processed in the user program of the Idevice CPU and passed on from there to the higher-level IO controller via transfer areas. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 133 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Operating state changes and station failure / station return In the following table, you can see which consequences an operating state change or the failure of an IO controller / I-device of the SIMATIC family has on the respective other(s): Table 5- 1 Operating state changes and station failure / station return Initial status Event I-device response Higher-level IO controller I-device CPU is in RUN, higherlevel IO controller is in RUN The I-device CPU changes to STOP - During the updating of the process image with the instructions "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO" an error report is returned at the parameter RET_VAL. With direct IO access to all transfer areas to the I-device: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). I-device CPU is in STOP higherlevel IO controller is in RUN The I-device CPU is starting up Call of OB 100 (startup). Call of OB 83 (pull/plug) for input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller. Until call of OB 83 in the case of direct access to the input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). I-device CPU is in RUN, higherlevel IO controller is in RUN The higher-level IO controller changes to STOP During the updating of the process image with the instructions "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO" an error report is returned at the parameter RET_VAL. Call of OB 83 (pull/plug) for all transfer areas to the I-device. Until call of OB 83 in the case of direct access to the transfer areas to the Idevice: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). - With direct IO access to the input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). Note: Output transfer areas can still be accessed. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 134 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Initial status Event I-device response Higher-level IO controller Higher-level IO controller is in STOP, I-device CPU in RUN The higher-level IO controller starts up Call of OB 83 (pull/plug) for input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller. Call of OB 100 (startup). I-device CPU is in RUN, higherlevel IO controller is in RUN Station failure Idevice, for example, through bus interruption Until call of OB 83 in the case of direct access to the input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). If the I-device continues to run without a bus connection: Call of OB 86 (rack failure). During the updating of the process image with the instructions "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO" an error report is returned at the parameter RET_VAL. With direct IO access to all transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). I-device CPU is in RUN, higherlevel IO controller is in RUN, communication connection between IO controller and I-device is interrupted (bus interruption). The bus connection between the IO controller and Idevice has been reestablished and the I-device is again included in the user data traffic. Call of OB 86 (rack failure). During the updating of the process image with the instructions "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO" an error report is returned at the parameter RET_VAL. With direct IO access to all transfer areas to the I-device: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). Call of OB 86 (rack failure). Call of OB 86 (rack failure). Call of OB 83 (pull/plug) for input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller. Until reporting of station re-integration by OB 86 with direct IO access to all transfer areas to the I-device: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error) Until call of OB 83 in the case of direct access to the input transfer areas to the higher-level IO controller: depending on the type of error handling, e.g., call of OB 122 (IO access error). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 135 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Note Special characteristic during startup of the higher-level IO controller In contrast to the station return message from IO devices in the IO controller, which are covered completely by the call of the OB 86, the station return message of a higher-level IO controller in the I-device is separated into 2 parts: 1. Call of the OB 86: The initial values for the outputs of the I-device are set. However, the input values are not yet valid. These values will first be valid with the opening of OB 86 in the higher-level IO controller. 2. Call of OB 83 for each input transfer area; with this call, the validity of an input transfer area is displayed. The starting up of the I device is first complete when the OB 83 has been called for the input transfer areas. This step can be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations: - Higher-level IO controller is in STOP: OB 83 is first called at the STOP-RUN transition of the higher-level IO controller. - The IRT communication has been disrupted (sync-master failure, topology error, ...). OB 83 is opened only after the IRT communication has taken place. Reference For more information on error handling in the case of direct I/O access, refer to "Error handling" in the STEP 7 online help. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 136 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.8 Rules for the Topology of a PROFINET IO System with I-Device Introduction The following recommendations for the structure and configuration of an IO system when using I-devices will help you to keep the bandwidths required for keeping communication small. The following communication paths should not overlap: Communication paths between the IO controller and the IO device of its IO system. Communication paths of the I-device CPU and the IO devices of your IO system. I-device with one port Connect an I-device with only one port to a PROFINET switch that is uncoupled from the higher-level IO system. Connect the lower-level IO system to another port of the switch as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-17 I-device with one port PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 137 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) I-device with two ports With an I-device with two ports, connect one port, uncoupled from the higher-level IO system, to the port of the PROFINET switch. Use the second port for the lower-level IO system as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-18 I-device with two ports PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 138 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) I-device with three or more ports If you have an I-device with three or more ports, connect the I-device to one or both ports to the higher-level IO system in a linear bus topology. Connect the third port to the lower-level IO system uncoupled from the linear bus topology as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-19 I-device with three or more ports PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 139 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.9 Boundary conditions when using I-devices Note the following boundary conditions when using I-devices: Bandwidth The number of addresses of the configured transfer areas affects the usable bandwidth of the I-device: Bandwidth of the transfer areas + bandwidth of the lower-level IO system = total bandwidth used on the I-device If the address space of the transfer areas is too large, this indicates a larger bandwidth requirement and can thus lead to longer update times. Tip: Keep the address space of the transfer area as small as possible. Rules for RT and IRT communication. IO systems with I-devices are also suitable for setting up real-time applications with RT and IRT communication. The following rules must be followed for this: Both the higher-level and the lower-level IO system support RT communication. You can use RT communication for both IO systems at the same time. IRT communication can be combined with RT communication. You can use IRT communication in one of the two IO systems. Use IRT either in a higher-level or in a lower-level IO system. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 140 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) 5.2.10 Configuring PROFIenergy with I-devices The requirement for program-controlled pauses for saving energy with PROFINET devices is that the PROFINET devices support the PROFIenergy protocol. Only if a PROFINET device (I/O device) supports the PROFIenergy protocol does an I/O controller actually send PE commands to this I/O device, for example to start or stop pauses. If an I/O device supports the PROFIenergy protocol, this property is saved in its PROFINET GSD file and is available for configuration in an engineering system. For S7-1500 CPUs as intelligent I/O devices (I-devices), you have the option with STEP 7 V13 service pack 1 or later to set PROFIenergy support for each transfer area. If you have selected the "Enable PROFIenergy communication" option for a transfer area and import the generated PROFINET GSD file into another project, you can handle an Idevice as a PE entity there. Requirements STEP 7 as of V13 service pack 1 CPU supports PROFIenergy with I-devices, for example CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC as of firmware version 4.2 You use the PROFINET IO interface as an I-device and have created transfer areas. The user program in the I-device handles PROFIenergy commands Background: You need to program PROFIenergy functions with I-devices in the user program using the "PE_I_DEV" instruction and corresponding auxiliary blocks; this is different compared with IO devices for which this functionality is made available by the firmware. You may therefore only activate the PROFIenergy support for transfer areas if the user program in the I-device is configured correspondingly as well. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 141 Functions 5.2 Intelligent IO devices (I-devices) Enabling PROFIenergy for transfer areas of I-devices Proceed as follows to assign parameters for the support of PROFIenergy: 1. Select the PROFINET interface (X1) of the CPU. 2. Select the required transfer area in the area navigation, for example: Operating mode > I-device communication > Transfer_area_1. 3. Select the check box "Enable PROFIenergy communication". Figure 5-20 Configuring PROFIenergy with I-devices Once the I-device is fully configured, generate the GSD file for the I-device and import this file in the project for the I/O controller. The GSD file generated contains an entry that specifies that the I-device supports the PROFIenergy profile. To address the I-device, for example for the PE command "PE_START_END", use the hardware identifier of the "PROFIenergy supporting" transfer area in the I-device. To address the IO controller for the PE command "PE_I_DEV", use the hardware identifier of the transfer area that is supplied with the data for PROFIenergy on the IO controller. You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the sectoin Saving energy with PROFIenergy (Page 258). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 142 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device 5.3 Shared device 5.3.1 Useful information on shared devices Shared device functionality Numerous IO controllers are often used in larger or widely distributed systems. Without the "Shared Device" function, each I/O module of an IO device is assigned to the same IO controller. If sensors that are physically close to each other must provide data to different IO controllers, several IO devices are required. The "Shared Device" function allows the modules or submodules of an IO device to be divided up among different IO controllers. Thus allowing flexible automation concepts. You have, for example, the possibility of combining I/O modules lying near other into an IO device. PROFINET Logical assignment Figure 5-21 Example: Shared device with 2 IO controllers PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 143 Functions 5.3 Shared device Principle Access to the submodules of the shared device is then divided up among the individual IO controllers. Each submodule of the shared device is assigned exclusively to one IO controller. Requirement STEP 7 V12 Service Pack 1 or higher IO device supports the shared device function, e.g. interface module IM 155-5 PN ST IO controller supports the shared device function, for example CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as of firmware version 1.1 or CPU 1215 DC/DC/DC as of firmware version 4.1 Explanatory notes: A CPU that is configured as an I-device can be used as a shared device. For this purpose, you create a GSD file for the I-device in STEP 7 via "GSD export". You then import the GSD file into a different project and assign the I-device to the IO controller there. The CPU has to support the GSD export, for example CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC as of firmware version 4.1. The maximum number of IO controllers that you can assign to a CPU configured as a shared I-device is given in the technical specifications in the CPU manuals. Configuring the access The IO device must be present in several projects so that the modules or submodules of an IO device can be assigned to different IO controllers. A separate project is required for each IO controller. You use the "Shared device" parameter of the interface module to determine the modules or submodules to which the IO controller has access: If the local IO controller has access to the configured module, select the name of the IO controller from the list. If the IO controller from a different project and not the local IO controller is to have access to the configured module, select the entry "---". The configuration is consistent regarding access if each module or submodule in exactly one project is assigned to an IO controller. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 144 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device Module or submodule is assigned to another IO controller The paragraph below describes the consequences of the "---" setting of the "Shared device" parameter from the point of view of the local IO controller. In this case, the local IO controller does not have access to the module configured in this way. Specifically, this means: No data exchange with the module or submodule No reception of alarms or diagnostics, which means no display of the diagnostics status in the online view No parameter assignment of the module or submodule Setting of the real-time properties STEP 7 calculates the communication load and thus the resulting update times. You must enter the number of project-external IO controllers in the project in which the PROFINET interface of the shared device is assigned to the IO controller so that a calculation is possible with shared device configurations. The maximum possible number of IO controllers for the shared device depends on the device. This number is stored in the GSD file of the shared device. You can set a very short send clock with a CPU as IO controller. The send clock can be shorter than the shortest send clock supported by the shared device. In this case, the shared device is operated by the IO controller with a send clock that it supports (send clock adaptation). Example: A CPU supports send clocks starting from 0.25 ms. A configured IO device also supports send clocks starting at 0.25 ms; another IO device supports send clocks starting at 1 ms. In this case, you have the option of setting the short send clock of 0.25 ms for the CPU. The CPU operates the "slow" IO device with the send clock of 1 ms, for example. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 145 Functions 5.3 Shared device Rules for the configuration IO controllers that use the shared device are created in different projects. In each project, care must be taken that the shared device is configured identically in each station. Only one IO controller may ever have full access to a submodule. Inconsistencies in the configuration result in a failure of the shared device. If you have selected the "Use router" option for the IO controllers involved, you must have set the same router address in all these IO controllers. I/O addresses of a module or submodule can only be edited if a module or submodule is assigned to the IO controller in the same project. The shared device must have the same IP parameters and the same device name in each project. The send clock must be identical for all IO controllers that have access to the shared device. The S7 subnet ID of the subnet to which the shared device is connected must be identical in all projects. The following functions are only available if the PROFINET interface of the shared device is assigned to the local IO controller: - IRT operation - Prioritized startup - Parameter assignment of the port properties Boundary conditions The following boundary conditions result because a shared device configuration is distributed across several projects: The addresses of modules or submodules that are not assigned to this IO controller are missing in the address overview of each IO controller that has access to a shared device. The modules or submodules that are not assigned are not taken into consideration in the configuration limit calculation for the shared device during the consistency check. For this reason, you must verify for yourself that the maximum number of submodules or the maximum amount of cyclic IO data for the shared device will not be exceeded. For information on the maximum quantities, refer to the documentation for the devices you are using. Configuration errors such as the assignment of a module or submodule to several IO controllers are not detected in STEP 7. CPUs that are loaded with a shared device configuration do not have any information on whether the IO device is a shared device. Modules or submodules that are assigned to other IO controllers and therefore other CPUs are missing in the loaded configuration. These modules or submodules are therefore displayed neither in the CPU web server nor in the CPU display. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 146 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device Response in the event of fault Information about how PROFINET IO controllers behave in the event of a fault when accessing the data of a shared device is available in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109572804). 5.3.2 Configuring shared device Below, you will find a description of how to configure a distributed I/O system as a shared device with STEP 7 V12, Service Pack 1 or higher. A "distributed" configuration with different engineering tools for different IO controller families is always possible. However, the description of the procedure is based solely on STEP 7 as of V12, service pack 1. The description is limited to two IO controllers of the S7-1500 family that share a shared device. Two projects are created (Shared-Device-1 and Shared-Device-2), each with one IO controller (PLC1 and PLC2). You must create the shared device in both projects, even though it is physically one and the same IO device. Requirements STEP 7 V12 Service Pack 1 or higher The IO controller supports the shared device function, for example CPU 1513-1 PN as of firmware version 1.1. IO device supports shared device functionality, for example interface module IM 155-5 PN ST as of firmware version 2.0. Procedure - Creating project 1 To create the first project with a shared device, follow these steps: 1. Start STEP 7. 2. Create a new project with the name "Shared-Device-1". 3. Insert, for example, a CPU 1513-1 PN from the hardware catalog in the network view. Name it "PLC1". 4. Insert an IO device with the "Shared device" function from the hardware catalog. 5. Assign the IO controller "PLC1" to the IO device. 6. Double-click the IO device and insert all required modules and submodules from the hardware catalog in the device overview table. 7. Assign the module parameters. 8. Save the project. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 147 Functions 5.3 Shared device Procedure - Creating project 2 To create the second project with a shared device, follow these steps: 1. Start STEP 7 once again. A new instance of STEP 7 opens. 2. In the new instance, create a new project with the name "Shared-Device-2". 3. Insert, for example, a CPU 1513-1 PN in the network view. Name it "PLC2". 4. Copy the IO device from the project "Shared-Device-1" and insert it in the network view of project "Shared-Device-2". 5. Assign the IO controller "PLC2" to the IO device. 6. Save the project. Both projects now have an identically structured IO device that must be configured in the next step for the different types of IO controller access. Procedure - Configuring access to the shared device The modules and submodules you insert in the shared device are automatically assigned to the local CPU. To change the assignment, follow these steps: 1. Select the interface module in the network view or device view of project "Shared-Device1". 2. Select the "Shared Device" area in the Inspector window. A table shows which CPU has access to the respective module or submodule for all configured modules. The default setting is that the local CPU has access to all modules and submodules. 3. Keep the "PLC1" setting for all modules and submodules that are to remain in the address range of the local CPU. Select the setting "---" for all modules and submodules that are to be located in the address range of the CPU from the "Shared-Device-2" project (PLC2). This means that an IO controller outside the project is to have access to the module or submodule. Figure 5-22 Configuring shared device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 148 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device 4. Select the interface module in the network view or device view of project "Shared-Device2". 5. Select the "Shared Device" area in the Inspector window. A table shows which CPU has access to the respective module or submodule for all configured modules. 6. Select the setting "---" for all modules and submodules that are to be located in the address range of the CPU from the "Shared-Device-1" project (PLC1). 7. Finally, check whether the settings for access are "complementary" for each module or submodule in both projects. This means that if the local CPU has access in one project, the option "---" must be set in the other project and vice versa. Special consideration: The option "---" for the PROFINET interface and therefore for the ports makes the associated parameters read-only and not changeable. Parameters of the PROFINET interface and port parameters can only be edited in the project in which the PROFINET interface is assigned to the local CPU. The ports can be interconnected in both projects regardless of this. 8. Check whether the same IP address parameters and device name are set for the shared device in all projects. Check whether the same S7 subnet ID is set in all projects for the subnet to which the shared device is connected (subnet properties, "General" area in the Inspector window). Note If you make changes to the shared device: Make the same changes in each project on the shared device. Make sure that only one IO controller has access to a module or submodule. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 149 Functions 5.3 Shared device Procedure - Adjusting the real-time settings To ensure that all IO controllers and shared devices are operated with the appropriate send clock and that the update times are calculated correctly based on the communication load, you must adjust and check the following settings: 1. Select the project whose IO controllers have access to the PROFINET interface and the ports of the shared device. 2. Select the interface module of the shared device in the network view. 3. In the Inspector window, navigate to the "PROFINET interface > Advanced options > Real time settings > IO cycle" area. 4. In the "Shared Device" area, set the number of project-external IO controllers. The maximum number depends on the IO device (specification in GSD file). 5. You must set the same send clock for each IO controller that has access to modules and submodules of the shared device: - If you configure the IO controller with STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Open the corresponding project. Select the PROFINET interface of the IO controller. Select the "Advanced options > Real time settings > IO communication" area in the Inspector window and set the shared send clock. - If you configure the IO controller with a different engineering tool: Select the PROFINET interface of the shared device in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and read out the send clock on the shared device ("Advanced options > Real time settings" area) Enter the read send clock in the engineering tool. - Special consideration: If you configure all IO controllers that have access to the shared device in STEP 7 (TIA Portal or V5.5), you can set shorter send clocks on the IO controller than supported by the shared device (send clock adaptation). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 150 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device Compiling and loading You must compile the configurations for the different IO controllers and load them to the CPUs one after the other. Due to the distributed configuration with separate projects, STEP 7 does not output consistency errors in the case of incorrect access parameter assignment. Example for incorrect access parameter assignment: Several IO controllers have access to the same module IP address parameters or send clocks are not identical These errors do not show up until operation and are output as configuration errors, for example. Note After a configuration has been loaded in the IO controller, non-assigned modules or submodules retain their current parameterization state to ensure the independence from the parameterizations of other IO controllers. 5.3.3 Configuring an I-device as a shared device Below, you will find a description of how you configure an S7-1500 as an I-device with STEP 7 Version 13 or higher and then use it in two projects as a shared device. A "distributed" configuration with different engineering tools for different IO controller families is generally also possible here. The procedure described below is based on STEP 7 V13 and is limited to a configuration with two IO controllers of the S7-1500 family that share the transfer areas of an I-device as a shared device. The I-device itself is also an S7-1500 CPU. Three projects are created with one IO controller each (PLC-I-Device, PLC_1, and PLC_2). PLC-I-Device is used to configure the I-device. The PROFINET GSD variant of PLC-I-Device is used in the PLC_1 and PLC_2 projects in order to assign the transfer areas in the respective higher-level IO controller. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 151 Functions 5.3 Shared device Shared I-device concept For the introduction of the shared I-device concept, two roles are distinguished: The role of manufacturer (e.g., machine manufacturer): The manufacturer configures and programs an I-device that performs a particular automation task. Transfer areas are defined as the I/O interface to the operator of the machine. These transfer areas can be assigned to different IO controllers. For the connection to higher-level IO controllers, the manufacturer provides a PROFINET GSD file and discloses the transfer areas via which the I-device can be accessed. The role of the operator: The operator uses the I-device as a PROFINET GSD variant during configuration of the PROFINET IO system and, in this process, specifies the I/O addresses under which the IO controllers access the transfer areas. Manufacturer view You assign the following parameters for an S7-1500 CPU as an I-device: centralized and distributed I/O, the desired transfer areas, and the number of IO controllers having access to this I-device (always greater than 1 for a shared device!). Special consideration: The I-device is configured without a higher-level IO controller. As a result, only the local I/O addresses of the transfer area are available (= "Address in the Idevice") in order to create the user program for editing the addresses from the transfer area. The I-device that has been completely configured except for the connection to the higherlevel IO controller is loaded to the S7-1500 CPU. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 152 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device You export a PROFINET GSD file from the I-device configuration. Figure 5-23 Exporting an I-device as a GSD file Operator view You must install the PROFINET GSD file created from the I-device configuration in all engineering systems that are involved in configuring a PROFINET IO system with this shared I-device. If all uses of this I-device will be configured with STEP 7 V13, it is sufficient to install the GSD file in STEP 7. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 153 Functions 5.3 Shared device You configure the I-device as a GSD variant on the PROFINET IO system in the projects involved. In STEP 7 V13, this I-device can be found under "Other field devices > PROFINET IO > PLCs & CPs" following installation. Figure 5-24 Configuring an I-device as a GSD file PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 154 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device In each of the projects involved, you define which transfer areas are assigned exclusively to the higher-level IO controller (default setting: all). You set the other transfer areas to "---" (not assigned). As a result of this setting, the local IO controller has no access to this transfer area and it can therefore be assigned to another IO controller in another project. Figure 5-25 Setting the access to the shared I-device. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 155 Functions 5.3 Shared device You adapt the addresses from the view of the IO controller in the device overview. To open the device overview, double-click the I-device. Figure 5-26 I/O addresses of the transfer areas in the device overview Requirements STEP 7 as of V13 Procedure - Creating the PLC-I-device project To create the project with a shared I-device, follow these steps: 1. Start STEP 7. 2. Create a new project with the name "PLC-I-device". 3. Insert, for example, a CPU 1518-4 PN/DP from the hardware catalog in the network view. Assign the name "PLC-I-device". 4. Double-click the IO device and configure all required modules and submodules. 5. Assign the module parameters. In particular, the following settings for the CPU are necessary in the area of the PROFINET interface [X1]: - Enable the "IO device" option in the "Operating mode" area. - Configure the transfer areas in the "Operating mode" > "I-device configuration" area. The "Address in IO controller" column remains empty because no IO controller is assigned. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 156 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device Note: To change an input area to an output area, and vice versa, you must navigate to the area of the corresponding transfer area. Figure 5-27 Changing the address type for the transfer area - Select the number of IO controllers (at least two) that will access the shared I-device during operation ("Operating mode" > "Real time settings" area, "Shared Device" area). 6. Save the project. 7. Click the "Export" button ("Mode" > "I-device configuration" area, "Export general station description file (GSD)" section). If you do not change the name in the Export dialog, the GSD file has a name in the form "GSDML-V2.31-#Siemens-PreConf_PLC-I-Device-20130925-123456", for example. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 157 Functions 5.3 Shared device Procedure - Creating the PLC_1 project To create the first project with a shared I-device, follow these steps: 1. Start STEP 7. 2. Install the PROFINET GSD file from the export of the I-device CPU (PLC-I-Device). 3. Create a new project with the name "PLC_1". 4. Insert, for example, a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP in the network view. The name of the CPU should be "PLC_1". 5. Insert the I-device from the hardware catalog (Hardware catalog: Other field devices > PROFINET IO > PLCs & CPs). 6. Assign the IO controller "PLC_1" to the I-device. 7. Select the "Shared Device" area in the properties of the I-device. In the table, all transfer areas and the PROFINET interface are assigned to the local IO controller (PLC_1). 8. Define the transfer areas to which the PLC_1 CPU should not have access. Select the "--" entry for these areas. These transfer areas are provided for PLC_2. 9. Save the project. Procedure - Creating the PLC_2 project To create the second project with a shared I-device, follow these steps: 1. Start STEP 7 once again. A new instance of STEP 7 opens. 2. In the new instance, create a new project with the name "PLC_2". 3. Insert, for example, a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP in the network view. Assign the name "PLC_2". 4. Insert the I-device from the hardware catalog (Hardware catalog: Other field devices > PROFINET IO > PLCs & CPs). 5. Assign the IO controller "PLC_2" to the I-device. 6. Adapt the access to the transfer areas as in the PLC_1 project. Ensure that no duplicate assignments result. 7. Adapt the parameters of the subnet and PROFINET interface. Because the shared Idevice involves the same device in different projects, these data must match. 8. Save the project. Both projects now have an identically configured shared I-device. The IO controller access and the parameters of the PROFINET interface should still be checked in the different projects during the next step. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 158 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device Summary - Assigning parameters for access to the shared device The transfer areas are automatically assigned to the local IO controller. To change the assignment, follow these steps: 1. Click the "PLC_I-Device" device in the network view of the "PLC_1" project, and select the "Shared Device" area. 2. A table shows which CPU has access to each of the configured transfer areas. The default setting is that the local CPU has access to all modules and submodules. 3. Keep the setting "PLC_1" for all transfer areas that are to remain in the address range of the local CPU Select the setting "---" for all transfer areas that are to be located in the address range of the "PLC_2" CPU from the "PLC_2" project. This means that an IO controller outside the project is to have access to the transfer area. 4. Follow the same procedure for the remaining projects. 5. Finally, check whether the settings for access are "complementary" for each module or submodule in both projects. This means that if the local CPU has access in one project, the option "---" must be set in the other project and vice versa. Special consideration: The option "---" for the PROFINET interface and therefore for the ports makes the associated parameters read-only and not changeable. Parameters of the PROFINET interface and port parameters can only be edited in the project in which the PROFINET interface is assigned to the local CPU. The ports can be interconnected in both projects regardless of this. 6. Check whether the same IP address parameters and device name are set for the shared device in all projects. Check whether the same S7 subnet ID is set in all projects for the subnet to which the shared device is connected (subnet properties, "General" area in the Inspector window). Note If you make changes to the I-device (e.g., change the number or length of the transfer areas): Export the I-device as a GSD file again. Re-install the GSD file in each project that uses the I-device as a shared device. Make sure that only one IO controller has access to a transfer area. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 159 Functions 5.3 Shared device Procedure - Adjusting the real-time settings To ensure that all IO controllers and shared devices are operated with the appropriate send clock and that the update times are calculated correctly based on the communication load, you must adjust and check the following settings: 1. You must set the same send clock for each IO controller that has access to modules and submodules of the shared device: - If you configure the IO controller with STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Open the corresponding project. Select the PROFINET interface of the IO controller. Select the "Advanced options > Real time settings > IO communication" area in the Inspector window and set the shared send clock. - If you configure the IO controller with a different engineering tool: Select the PROFINET interface of the shared device in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and read out the send clock on the shared device ("Advanced options > Real time settings" area) Enter the read send clock in the engineering tool. - Special consideration: If you configure all IO controllers that have access to the shared I-device in STEP 7 (TIA Portal or V5.5), you can set shorter send clocks on the IO controller than supported by the shared device (send clock adaptation). Compiling and loading You must compile the configurations for the different IO controllers and load them to the CPUs one after the other. Due to the distributed configuration with separate projects, STEP 7 does not output consistency errors in the case of incorrect access parameter assignment. Example for incorrect access parameter assignment: Several IO controllers have access to the same module IP address parameters or send clocks are not identical These errors do not show up until operation and are output as configuration errors, for example. Note After a configuration has been loaded in the IO controller, non-assigned modules or submodules retain their current parameterization state to ensure the independence from the parameterizations of other IO controllers. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 160 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device 5.3.4 Module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO) Introduction This section describes the module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO) functionality for I/O modules that are operated on PROFINET. Module-internal shared input/shared output functionality The module-internal shared input (MSI) function allows an input module to make its input data available to up to four IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels. The following figure shows the MSI functionality. CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as IO controller CPU 1511-1 PN as IO controller Input module with MSI Read access to the input channels of the input module Write access to the channels of the I/O module (only with MSO) Figure 5-28 Example configuration with MSI The module-internal shared output (MSO) function allows an output module to make its output data available to up to four IO controllers. An IO controller has write access to the channels of the output module. Up to three IO controllers can additionally have read-access to the channels. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 161 Functions 5.3 Shared device The following figure shows the MSO functionality. CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as IO controller CPU 1511-1 PN as IO controller Output module with MSO Write access to the output channels of the output module Read access to the output channels of the output module Figure 5-29 Example configuration with MSO Advantages of MSI/MSO Module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO) offers the following advantages: Real-time acquisition in multiple CPUs Lower costs due to saving on additional IO devices and modules Lower space requirements due to saving on additional IO devices and modules Reduced communication load because no CPU-CPU communication is needed No additional programming effort is needed for CPU-CPU communication PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 162 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device Requirements for the use of MSI/MSO Observe the following requirements: MSI/MSO can only be used with PROFINET IO Configuration software: STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V12 SP1 with GSD file; the modules are integrated in the hardware catalog as of V13. The IM 155-5 PN ST interface module and the modules support MSI/MSO as of firmware version V2.0.0. Boundary conditions for the use of MSI/MSO Note the following boundary conditions: The use of MSI/MSO is not possible in the case of module grouping. Modules with MSI/MSO cannot be operated in isochronous mode. The maximum number of IO controllers is dependent on the interface module. To find out how many IO controllers the interface module supports, refer to the manual for the respective interface module. MSI submodules The input values of all channels are copied to a basic submodule and up to three other MSI submodules during MSI configuration of an input module. The channels of the module are then available with identical input values in the basic submodule and the MSI submodules. The MSI submodules can be assigned to up to three IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each IO controller has read access to the same channels. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 163 Functions 5.3 Shared device The following figure shows a digital input module with the basic submodule and three MSI submodules. Each submodule is assigned to an IO controller. Diagnostics and parameter assignment of the digital input module can be performed from the IO controller 1 via the basic submodule. Read access Parameter assignment and system diagnostics Figure 5-30 DI module with MSI submodules Value status (Quality Information, QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule to which it pertains. With basic submodule (= 1st submodule), the "0" value status indicates that the value is incorrect. With an MSI submodule (2nd to 4th submodule), the "0" value status indicates that the value is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 164 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device MSO submodules During MSO configuration of an output module, the output values of all channels of the module are copied from a basic submodule to up to three other MSO submodules. The channels of the module are then available with identical values in the basic submodule and the MSO submodules. The MSO submodules can be assigned to up to three IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. The IO controller to which the basic submodule is assigned has write access to the outputs of the module. The basic submodule therefore occupies output addresses in the process image of the IO controller. The IO controllers to which the MSO submodules are assigned have read access to the outputs of the module. MSO submodules therefore occupy input addresses in the process image of the IO controller. The following figure shows a digital output module with the basic submodule and three MSO submodules. Each submodule is assigned to an IO controller. Diagnostics and parameter assignment of the digital output module can be performed from IO controller 1 via the basic submodule. Write access Read access Parameter assignment and system diagnostics Figure 5-31 DQ module with MSO submodule PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 165 Functions 5.3 Shared device Value status (Quality Information, QI) The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule to which it pertains. With basic submodule (= 1st submodule), the "0" value status indicates that the value is incorrect. With MSO submodule (= 2nd to 4th submodule) the "0" value status indicates that the value is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred: The basic submodule parameters have not yet been assigned (not ready for operation). The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted. The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state. Configuring I/O modules with MSI/MSO submodules Requirements Configuration software STEP 7 as of V13 IO device supports MSI/MSO (for example IM 155-5 PN ST as of firmware version 2.0.0) Procedure 1. In the network view of STEP 7, insert an IM 155-5 PN ST interface module as of V2.0. 2. Double-click the IO device. You are now in the device view. 3. Place the I/O modules from the hardware catalog in a suitable slot. 4. Add MSI/MSO submodules to the I/O modules: - Input modules: Select the number of MSI submodules under "Module parameters " > "DI configuration" or "AI configuration" in the area "Copy of module for Shared Device (MSI)". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 166 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.3 Shared device - Output modules: Select the number of MSO submodules under "Module parameters " > "DQ configuration" or "AW configuration" in the area "Copy of module for shared device (MSO)". Figure 5-32 Configuring I/O modules with MSI/MSO Assigning MSI/MSO submodules to an IO controller You can assign the submodules in a shared device to an IO controller. For more information, refer to Configuring shared device (Page 147). Configuring access to a shared device and the module-internal shared input / shared output (MSI /MSO) function You can learn how to access a shared device and the MSI /MSO function in STEP 7 with this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109736536). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 167 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) In order to increase the network availability of an Industrial Ethernet network with optical or electrical linear bus topologies, you can convert a linear bus topology to a ring topology by joining the ends together. Media redundancy in ring topologies Devices in a ring topology can be IO devices, IO controllers, external switches and/or the integrated switches of communication modules. To set up a ring topology with media redundancy, you need to bring together the two free ends of a linear bus topology in one device. Closing the linear bus topology to form a ring is achieved with two ports (ring ports) of a device in the ring. One device of the resulting ring then takes over the role of the redundancy manager. All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients. Redundancy manager Test frames Redundancy clients Figure 5-33 Media redundancy in ring topology The ring ports of a device are the ports that establish the connection to the two neighboring devices in the ring topology. The ring ports are selected and set in the configuration of the relevant device (is also preset, if applicable). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 168 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) How media redundancy works in a ring topology The data paths between the individual devices are automatically reconfigured if the ring is interrupted at any point. The devices are available again after reconfiguration. In the redundancy manager, one of the two ring ports is blocked in uninterrupted network operation for normal communication so that no data frames are circulated. In terms of data transmission, the ring topology is a linear bus topology. The redundancy manager monitors the ring for interruptions. For this purpose, it sends test frames not only from ring port 1 but also from ring port 2. The test frames pass through the ring in both directions until they arrive at the other ring port of the redundancy manager. An interruption of the ring can be caused by loss of the connection between two devices or by failure of a device in the ring. If the test frames of the redundancy manager no longer arrive at the other ring port during an interruption of the ring, the redundancy manager connects its two ring ports. This substitute path once again restores a functioning connection between all remaining devices in the form of a linear bus topology. The time between the ring interruption and restoration of a functional linear topology is known as the reconfiguration time. As soon as the interruption has been eliminated, one of the two ring ports is blocked again in the redundancy manager. The redundancy clients are informed about the change and use the original paths to the other devices again. Media redundancy method The standard method of media redundancy in SIMATIC is MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol) with a typical reconfiguration time of 200 ms. Up to 50 devices can participate per ring. In addition, the real-time capable media redundancy process MRPD (Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of frames) is also available. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 169 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) 5.4.1 Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) The "MRP" process works in conformity with the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) that is specified in the standard IEC 62439-2. Requirements All devices in the ring support MRP. You have complied with the rules for topology set out below. STEP 7 monitors compliance with the rules during compilation and outputs corresponding alarms. Topology The following schematic shows a possible topology for devices in a ring with MRP. The devices inside the shaded oval are in the redundancy domain. Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol: Figure 5-34 Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol: PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 170 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) The following rules apply to a ring topology with media redundancy using MRP: All devices must be connected to one other via their ring ports. All devices in the ring belong to the same redundancy domain. A device in the ring takes on the task of a redundancy manager. - One device only has the role of "Manager". No other device may have the role of "Manager". Or - Several devices in the ring have the role of "Manager (auto)". The devices with the role of "Manager (auto)" then negotiate between themselves which device is to take on the role of redundancy manager. In this case, no device is permitted to have the role of "Manager". All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients. You can connect up to 50 devices in a ring. Non MRP-compliant devices can, for example, be connected to the ring via a SCALANCE X switch or via a PC with a CP 1616. Rules for loading the devices of an MRP domain When loading devices of an MRP domain, frame loops can occur and result in network failure if there is an invalid MRP configuration. Example: You change the MRP roles of several devices and consecutively load the configuration into the devices involved. Configurations can arise that contradict the roles mentioned above, for example, there may be devices that simultaneously have the "Manager" and "Manager (auto)" roles in the ring. In order to ensure that an invalid MRP configuration does not result in the failure of the network, delete the ring before loading. Follow these steps: 1. Delete the ring. 2. Load the error-free and consistent MRP configuration from your project onto all the devices involved and ensure that the devices are in data exchange mode (i.e. the application relations (ARs) are set up). 3. Close the ring. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 171 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) Boundary conditions MRP and RT RT operation is possible with the use of MRP. Note The RT communication is disrupted (station failure) if the reconfiguration time of the ring is greater than the selected response monitoring time of the IO device. This is why you should select a response monitoring time of the IO devices that is sufficiently large. MRP and IRT IRT mode is not possible together with MRP. If you want to use media redundancy together with IRT in a ring, only use devices that support MRPD. MRP and TCP/IP (TSEND, HTTP, ...) The TCP/IP communication with MRP is possible, because lost data packages are resent, if applicable. MRP and prioritized startup If you configure MRP in a ring, you cannot use the "prioritized startup" function in PROFINET applications on the devices involved. If you want to use the "prioritized startup" function, then you must disable MRP in the configuration (the device may also not be part of the ring). Information on S7-1500R/H You can find information on the media redundancy method MRP of the redundant S7-1500R/H system in section Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system (Page 274). Application example: Reading the MRP status in the user program The "LPNDR_ReadMRPState" function block from the "LPNDR" block library helps you to determine the status of the MRP ring per program. The block reads the MRP information from the PROFINET device (MRP Manager) and outputs the status. The "LPNDR" block library and the corresponding documentation can be found in this application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/109753067). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 172 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) 5.4.2 Configuring media redundancy Configuring MRP Proceed as follows to create a PROFINET IO configuration with MRP in STEP 7: 1. Generate a ring via the port interconnections in the topology view. First interconnect the devices to a line topology. Connect the unassigned port of the last device in the line with the unassigned port of the first device. The following example shows one CPU 1516-3 PN/DP and two interface modules IM 155-6 PN HF that are interconnected in a ring in the topology view of STEP 7. Figure 5-35 Configuring media redundancy 2. Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view. 3. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "MRP domains" in the "Ring interconnections" field. This field shows you all the topological rings in the IO system with the associated MRP domains. 4. Select the ring generated above in the "Ring interconnections" field. The table below it shows all the PROFINET devices in the ring. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 173 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) 5. Set the media redundancy role for the PROFINET devices in the MRP role column. Figure 5-36 MRP domain Automatic MRP configuration You can also have the media redundancy roles assigned automatically for your PROFINET devices in the ring. To have the media redundancy roles assigned automatically, click the "Configure MRP automatically" button. STEP 7 automatically assigns the media redundancy role for each device in the ring. After the automatic MRP configuration, you can make modifications to the media redundancy roles in the "MRP role" column. "Media redundancy" setting options Media redundancy role Depending on the device used, the roles "Manager", "Manager (Auto)", "Client" and "Not device in the ring" are available. Rules: A ring must have precisely one device with the role "Manager". No additional devices with the role "Manager" or "Manager (Auto)" are permissible. All the other devices may only have the "Client" role. If a ring has no device with the "Manager" role, the ring must at least have a device with the role "Manager (Auto)". Any number of devices with the "Client" role may exist. Managers and clients of an MRP domain can be configured in different projects. In the project without a manager, you need to select the "Redundancy manager outside the project" option so that the configuration can be compiled. For multiple ring configurations, you need to set the option identically for each MRP domain. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 174 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) Ring port 1 / Ring port 2 Select one at a time those ports you want to configure as ring port 1 or ring port 2. The dropdown list box shows the selection of possible ports for each device type. If the ports are set at the factory, then the fields are unavailable. If you use single-stage commissioning, use the preset ring ports in STEP 7. Diagnostic interrupts If diagnostic interrupts to the MRP state are to be output in the local CPU, select the "Diagnostic interrupts" check box. The following diagnostic interrupts can be configured: Wiring or port error Diagnostic interrupts will be generated for the following errors in the ring ports: - A neighbor of the ring port does not support MRP. - A ring port is connected to a non-ring port - A ring port is connected to the ring port of another MRP domain. Interruption / return (redundancy manager only) If the ring is interrupted and the original configuration is returned, diagnostic interrupts will be generated. If both of these interrupts occur within 0.2 seconds, this indicates an interruption of the ring. You can respond to these events in the user program by programming the appropriate response in the diagnostic error interrupt OB (OB 82). Reference You can find the procedure for configuring a common MRP ring and the topology with two projects in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109741671). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 175 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) 5.4.3 Media redundancy with planned duplication of frames (MRPD; not for S7-1500R/H) MRP extension "Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of frames" (MRPD) The MRP extension "Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of frames" (MRPD) provides the advantage that, in the case of a failure of a device or a line in the ring, all other devices continue to be supplied with IO data without interruption and with short update times. MRPD is based on IRT and MRP. To realize media redundancy with short update times, the PROFINET devices participating in the ring send their data in both directions. The devices receive this data at both ring ports so that there is no reconfiguration time. Requirements for media redundancy with MRPD All the devices of the ring must support MRPD, for example interface module IM 155-6 PN HS as of firmware version 4.0. You have configured MRP for all the devices of the ring. You have assigned the MRP role "Not device in the ring" to devices that are not located in the ring. You have configured IRT for all the involved components. Configuring MRPD You do not have to explicitly activate MRPD in STEP 7. The function is available automatically as soon as all the requirements for MRPD are fulfilled. Redundancy levels of IO devices with MRPD The redundancy level of an IO device specifies how strongly the real-time communication is influenced in the case of a power interruption between an IO device and its IO controller. Full redundancy: No influence, because the IO controller and IO device are located in the same ring. Partial redundancy: - If the interruption takes place on a non-redundant part (line) between the IO device and IO controller, real-time communication is influenced. - If the interruption takes place on a redundant part (ring), real-time communication is not influenced. No redundancy: No redundant path between the IO device and its IO controller, communication is always influenced. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 176 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) The figure below shows the redundancy levels of the IO devices for an example configuration with MRPD. The three devices in the ring and the switch have the redundancy level "Full redundancy". Device 4 has the redundancy level "Partial redundancy", because the connection between the switch and the device is not redundant. IO controller in the ring IO device in the ring with redundancy level "Full redundancy" Switch in the ring with redundancy level "Full redundancy" IO device in the spur with the redundancy level "Partial redundancy" Figure 5-37 Example configuration with MRPD The figure below shows the display of the redundancy levels in STEP 7 for the example configuration. Figure 5-38 Display of the redundancy levels in STEP 7 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 177 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) 5.4.4 Multiple rings Multiple rings Use multiple rings to achieve higher availability for PROFINET IO networks with star topology. In a multiple ring configuration, several PROFINET lines lead from a switch (star topology). The individual PROFINET lines lead from IO device to IO device. Redundant PROFINET cables run back to the switch from the last IO device on each individual line. The switch operates as a manager. The manager must have two ring ports for each ring. Several rings are possible. For example, the SCALANCE X414 as of firmware version 3.10 supports up to 4 rings. The manager monitors all the rings individually: It checks for each particular ring (an MRP domain) whether the transmission path is intact. To do this, it uses an MRP instance in each case. An MRP instance is required for each connected ring (set up automatically by STEP 7). Figure 5-39 Configuration with several rings PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 178 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) Requirements SCALANCE X414 as of version 3.10 SCALANCE X300 as of version 4.0 (configured via GSD file) Rules for the configuration of multiple rings MRP role at multiple rings: - The device that belongs to all the rings must have the MRP role in every instance that is entered in the GSD file in the "SupportedMultipleRole" attribute. - The switches from the series SCALANCE X300 as of version 4.0 and the switch X414 as of version 4.10 support the MRP role "Manager" for multiple rings. If the device that belongs to all rings has the "Manager" role in one ring, no devices with the "Manager (Auto)" role may exist in this ring. Configuring multiple rings To configure an MRP configuration with multiple rings, follow these steps: 1. In the topology view, interconnect the ring ports of the devices that are intended to belong to an MRP domain to form a ring. 2. Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view. 3. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "MRP domains" in the "Ring interconnections" field. This field shows you all the topological rings in the IO system with the associated MRP domains. 4. Select one of the rings generated above in the "Ring interconnections" field. The table below it shows all the PROFINET devices in the ring. 5. Set the media redundancy role for the PROFINET devices in the MRP role column. Example of multiple rings The following figure shows an example configuration for multiple rings. Figure 5-40 Example configuration with two rings and PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 179 Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) In the example, Switch 1 belongs to two MRP rings. Ring 1 is formed by Switch 1 and PLC 1, Ring 2 by Switch 1 and IO device 1. STEP 7 automatically assigns the "Manager" role to the switch. The other devices receive the "Client" role. The manager is located at the point of intersection of the two rings 1 and 2. The manager monitors the two rings separately. To do this, it uses two MRP instances. One MRP instance checks whether all devices in ring 1 are reachable, another instance monitors whether all devices in ring 2 are reachable (only one device in each case in the example). You can configure each MRP instance separately. The following figure shows the two MRP instances in the manager (PROFINET interface of the switch). Here in the example, MRP instance 1 checks whether the devices in the MRP domain "mrpdomain-1" can be reached. The MRP instance 2 is responsible for monitoring the devices of the MRP domain "mrpdomain-2". Figure 5-41 Setting media redundancy for multiple rings PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 180 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.4 Media redundancy (ring topologies) The following figure shows Ring 1 (mrpdomain-1). The participants of the mrpdomain-1 are the PROFINET interface of the CPU as the "Client" and the MRP interface 1 of the PROFINET interface of the switch as the "Manager". Figure 5-42 Ring 1 The following figure shows Ring 2 (mrpdomain-2). The participants of the mrpdomain-2 are the PROFINET interface of the IO device as the "Client" and the MRP instance 2 of the PROFINET interface of the switch as the "Manager". Figure 5-43 Ring 2 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 181 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5.1 Introduction Properties PROFINET IO is a scalable real-time communication system based on the Layer 2 protocol for Fast Ethernet. With the RT transmission method, two real-time-support performance levels are available for time-critical process data and IRT for high-accuracy and also isochronous processes . Figure 5-44 Real-time communication performance Real-time communication and IT communication Industrial communication, especially in the factory automation and process automation, requires a punctual and deterministic data transmission. This is why, for the cyclic exchange of time-critical IO user data, PROFINET IO does not use TCP/IP, it uses real-time communication (RT) or isochronous real-time communication (IRT) for the synchronized data exchange in reserved time intervals. Fields of application of PROFINET with RT PROFINET with RT is suited for: Time-critical applications in factory automation The implementation of large quantity structures in line process plants PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 182 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Fields of application of PROFINET with IRT PROFINET with IRT is particularly suitable for: Considerable deterministics with large quantity structures concerning the I/O user data communication (productive data) Considerable performance also with many devices concerning the I/O user data communication (productive data) Parallel transfer of productive and TCP/IP data via a cable, even with considerable data traffic whilst ensuring the forwarding of productive data by reserving the transmission bandwidth. International standard IEC 61158 The communication procedures RT and IRT are standardized in the international standard IEC 61158. 5.5.2 RT PROFINET IO with real-time communication (RT) is the ideal solution for integrating IO systems. This is a solution that also uses standard Ethernet in the devices and commercially available industrial switches as infrastructure components. A special hardware support is not required. If you want to use PROFINET functions that provide an additional value, such as topology detection, diagnostics, device exchange without exchangeable medium/PG, you have to use switches that support the PROFINET standard according to the IEC 61158 standard. In the integrated switches of PROFINET devices and PROFINET switches (e.g., the SCALANCE product family), PROFINET functions in accordance with the PROFINET standard are implemented and can be used without restriction for integration in the PROFINET IO system (see also section Active network components (Page 31). Real-time communication (RT) PROFINET IO frames have priority over standard frames in accordance with IEEE802.1Q. This ensures the required determinism in the automation technology. The data is transferred via prioritized Ethernet frames. With RT, you can achieve update times 250 s with RT. Switching mechanisms Switches in SIMATIC meet the real-time requirements with two mechanisms on PROFINET: "Store and forward" and "Cut through". Store and forward In the Store and forward method, the switch stores the frames completely and places them in a queue. If the switch supports the international standard IEEE 802.1Q, then the data is sorted according to its priority in the queue. The frames are then forwarded selectively to the specific port that can access the addressed node (Store and forward). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 183 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Cut through In the Cut through process the entire data package is not stored temporarily in a buffer, it is passed directly onto the target port as soon as the target address and the target port have been determined. The times required by the data package to pass through the switch are then minimal and independent of the frame length. The data are only stored temporarily in accordance with the Store and forward process as per priority when the section between the target segment and the port of the next switch is occupied. 5.5.3 IRT Isochronous real-time communication (IRT) IRT is a synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth is available in the send cycle for IRT data. The reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can be transferred at reserved synchronized intervals, without being influenced also by higher other network loads (such as TCP/IP communication, or additional real-time communication). Advantages PROFINET with IRT is synchronized communication in reserved time intervals. With IRT you have the option to be able to control time-critical applications such as motion control via PROFINET. With IRT you use further advantages: High-precision deterministics allow highest control quality and thus, for example, exact positioning of axes Simple and flexible integration of PROFINET devices for real-time applications in existing company networks Shortest response times and highest deterministics by means of bandwidth reservation and thus also for applications that have to satisfy highest performance requirements (e.g., printing control/position control for presses, print-mark recognition with packaging machines) Secured standard communication parallel to real-time communication via the same transmission medium You can continue to use standard components for your PROFINET IO system outside of the sync domain PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 184 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Properties of isochronous real-time Topology configuration is a prerequisite for IRT. In addition to the reserved bandwidth, the frames from defined transmission paths are exchanged for the further optimization of data transfers. For this, the topological information from the configuration is used for planning the communication. Transmission and reception points of every individual data frame at every communication node are thus guaranteed. This allows you to achieve optimal usage of the bandwidth and reach the best possible performance in the PROFINET IO system. Use of IRT allows you to achieve update times with very high deterministics 125 s and a jitter accuracy of the send clock < 1 s. Isochronous applications are possible with IRT (see section Isochronous mode (Page 207)). * The minimum update time depends on the CPU used. The update times supported by a CPU are listed in the technical specifications of the CPU manual. Note IWLAN and IRT PROFINET devices that are connected to PROFINET IO via access points, do not support IRT. Synchronization The prerequisite for the IRTcommunication is a synchronization cycle for all PROFINET devices in a sync domain for distributing a mutual time basis. A synchronism of the transmission cycle of the PROFINET devices within a sync domain is achieved with this basic synchronization. A sync master specifies the clock to which sync slaves are synchronized. An IO controller or an IO device can have the role of sync master. If the sync master fails, all IO devices with IRT will fail. Sync master and sync slaves are always devices in a sync domain. Bandwidth is reserved within the sync domain for IRT communication. Real-time and non-real-time communication (TCP/IP communication) is possible outside of the reserved bandwidth. Default sync domain If you have created a PROFINET subnet, a special sync domain is automatically created, the default sync domain. All PROFINET devices configured for the PROFINET subnet automatically belong to this sync domain. For additional information on creating sync domains, refer to the STEP 7 online help. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 185 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Time ranges of the communication cycle The communication cycle is divided into three time ranges, which are shown in the following chart: Figure 5-45 Reserving bandwidth IRT data (synchronized communication) This time range can be reserved in specific steps, depending on the send clock. Only IRT data is transmitted during this time range. RT data (real-time communication) The cyclic RT data is transferred in this time range. RT data is prioritized over "normal" TCP/IP data. TCP/IP data or Ethernet frames can have a priority of between 1 and 7. RT data have the Priority 6. TCP/IP data (standard communication) Standard communication (e.g., TCP/IP) is transmitted in the remaining interval of the communication cycle. In STEP 7, you can set the ratio of the bandwidth usage of cyclic IO data to standard communication. For information on how to set the bandwidth usage, refer to the section Setting the bandwidth usage for the send clock (Page 191) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 186 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5.4 Comparison of RT and IRT The most important differences between RT and IRT Table 5- 2 Comparison between RT and IRT Property RT IRT Transmission method Prioritizing the RT frames through Ethernet priority (VLAN tag) Path-based switching on the basis of a communication path plan; no transmission of TCP/IP frames in the time range with IRT communication. Determinism Variance of the duration of transmission by the shared use of the transmission bandwidth with other protocols (e.g., TCP/IP) Exact, planned transmission, transmission and reception times are guaranteed for all topologies. Hardware support through special Not required Ethernet controllers is required Required Isochronous application - Yes Starting time of the isochronous application - The point in time for the reception of the data is planned exactly. Application can be started synchronized to the cycle. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 187 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5.5 Configuring PROFINET IO with IRT Introduction If you want to configure a PROFINET IO system with IRT, you have to configure the PROFINET IO devices. These PROFINET devices must support IRT. Set which device acts as the sync master and synchronizes the other devices. This is done by configuring a sync domain with a sync master and at least one sync slave. Requirement There is an IO system with an IO controller and at least one IO device. You have configured the topology for the IO system. The devices support IRT. Procedure Proceed as follows to enable an existing IO system for the use of IRT: 1. Select the PROFINET interface of the IO controller. 2. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Advanced options > Real time settings > Synchronization". Figure 5-46 IRT configuring sync master PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 188 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 3. Assign the IO controller the role of sync master under "Synchronization role". 4. Select the PROFINET interfaces of an associated IO device. 5. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Advanced options > Real time settings > Synchronization". Figure 5-47 IRT configuring sync slave 6. Activate the RT class "IRT". The IO device will then automatically be assigned the synchronization role "sync slave". 7. You can check and correct your settings at any time using the "Domain settings" button. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 189 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Or 1. Highlight the PROFINET IO system in the network view. 2. Click on the PROFINET IO system. 3. Navigate to the device of the required sync domain in the Inspector window. Figure 5-48 IRT configuring sync domain 4. Enter all necessary settings in the tables: - Select an IO system. - Set the synchronization role "sync master" for the IO controller. - Set the RT class for the IO devices to "IRT". The IO devices will then automatically be assigned the synchronization role "sync slave". You can now load the configuration to the relevant devices with PROFINET IRT. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 190 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5.6 Setting the bandwidth usage for the send clock Bandwidth level For PROFINET IO with IRT, you can specify the maximum portion of the send cycle that you want to use for cyclic IO communication. You have the following setting options for the bandwidth usage in STEP 7. Maximum 25% cyclic IO data. Focus on non-cyclic data. Maximum 37.5% cyclic IO data. Focus on non-cyclic data. Maximum 50% cyclic IO data. Balanced proportion. Maximum 90% cyclic IO data. Focus on cyclic IO data. (Requirement: The "Make 'high performance' possible" option is activated) Setting the bandwidth usage To set the bandwidth usage for a PROFINET IO system in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Select your IO system in the network view of STEP 7. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the sync domain" > "Details". 3. Select the desired level of bandwidth usage from the "Bandwidth use" drop-drop down list box. Figure 5-49 Setting the bandwidth usage For information on how to set the bandwidth usage for IRT with maximum performance, refer to the section Configuration of IRT with high performance (Page 202) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 191 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5.7 Setup recommendations for optimizing PROFINET Optimizing PROFINET with RT PROFINET provides you with high-performance communication on all levels. The following figures shows an example of an optimized PROFINET topology. Figure 5-50 Optimized PROFINET topology When setting up your PN network topology, take care that the various automation applications are distributed among separate network branches so that a sufficient bandwidth reserve will be available for future expansions. If you integrate standard Ethernet devices into the network topology or use standard Ethernet communication, take into account the network load caused by standard Ethernet and adapt the network topology as appropriate (max. bandwidth 100 Mbps). For communication with higher-level networks with a high data volume, use the most direct paths possible to the higher-level network infrastructure. Also observe the Installation Guideline (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installationguide/downloads/profinet-installation-guide/display/) of the PROFIBUS User Organization. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 192 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Setting up PROFINET with IRT Keep in mind the following rules for setting up and operating a PROFINET IO system in IRT mode. These rules will ensure best possible operation of your PROFINET IO system. When using IRT, you must configure the topology. This will enable exact calculation of the update time, bandwidth, and other parameters. If you would like to use multiple sync domains, configure a sync boundary for the port which is currently connected to the PROFINET device of another sync domain. In a sync domain, you can only configure one sync master at a time. A PROFINET IO system may only be part of a single sync domain. If you configure PROFINET devices in a sync domain and want to synchronize with IRT, the PROFINET devices concerned must support IRT communication. If possible, use the same PROFINET device as the PROFINET IO controller and sync master. If only some of the PROFINET devices in a PROFINET IO system are synchronized, please keep in mind the following: Assign PROFINET devices that are not participating in the IRT communication to the RT class "RT" and the synchronization role "unsynchronized" in the sync domain. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 193 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Applications for CPU with multiple PROFINET IO interfaces Connecting machines: Your configuration contains machines located on separate IO lines. You can perform real-time communication between the CPUs over PROFINET IO interface X2. Use the I-device or shared I-device function for this purpose. The figure below shows an example configuration for two machines connected over the X2 interface with an I-device relationship. Figure 5-51 I-device connection over 2nd PNIO interface Distribution by automation tasks: - For automation tasks with high performance and deterministic requirements, use PROFINET with IRT over the X1 interface. - For other tasks that you can implement with RT, use the X2 interface. If you use interface X2 as the PROFINET IO interface for one of the following CPUs, this can affect performance: CPU 1515(F)-2 PN CPU 1515T(F)-2 PN CPU 1516(F)-3 PN/DP CPU 1516T(F)-3 PN/DP CPU 1516(F)pro-2 PN You can find additional information in the section PROFINET interface (Page 25) and in the Cycle and Response Times (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193558) function manual. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 194 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.5 Real-time communication Topological overlap of IO systems in multi-controller applications In a configuration with multiple IO controllers, shared paths are subject to the combined network loads of all connected PROFINET IO systems. To avoid high communication loads in multi-controller applications, observe the following recommendations: Avoid paths that are shared by multiple IO systems. The figure below shows a configuration with two PROFINET IO systems that use the same paths. Shared path Figure 5-52 Multi-controller application with shared path In the figure below, the two PROFINET IO systems do not use shared paths. Figure 5-53 Multi-controller application with separate paths If separation is not possible: Increase the update time for the affected IO devices. Installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS user organization The installation guidelines can be found on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installation-guide/downloads/profinet-installationguide/display/). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 195 Functions 5.5 Real-time communication 5.5.8 Limitation of the data infeed into the network Limiting the data infeed into the network on PROFINET interfaces The "Limit data infeed into the network" function limits the network load of standard Ethernet communication which is fed into the network by the interface to a maximum value. This does not apply to cyclic real-time communication (RT/IRT). In a PROFINET IO system, critical network loads can occur quickly with standard Ethernet communication, especially in line topologies. Devices which feed a lot of standard Ethernet communication into the PROFINET IO system, should support the function "Limit data infeed into the network". If necessary, you should optimize your topology by avoiding e.g. standard Ethernet devices in line topologies. You can find additional information on this in section Setup recommendations for optimizing PROFINET (Page 192). Depending on the interface, you can activate or deactivate the "Limit data infeed into the network" function. If you use the X1 interface of an S7-1500 CPU as the IO controller or Idevice, the "Limit data infeed into the network" function is always enabled. Example: If you are not using the X1 interface of an S7-1500 CPU as IO controller or I-device, you can enable or disable the function. Uses of the limitation of the data infeed to the network Division of the bandwidth for standard Ethernet communication between devices: In PROFINET networks cyclic real-time communication and standard Ethernet communication share the same network. This means that only a limited bandwidth remains for standard Ethernet communication. The limitation of the data infeed ensures that the remaining bandwidth for standard Ethernet communication is not used just by one device, but is divided between several devices. Smoothing peaks in the data infeed: The limitation of the data infeed smooths peak loads of standard Ethernet communication (for example, from Open User Communication, access by the Web server). Limiting problems in the data infeed: If applications in a device generate too much data, this data is not forwarded to the PROFINET network. Negative effects (for example data loss, communication breakdown) remain limited to the device and its communications partner. Other nodes are not disturbed. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 196 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade Setting limitation of the data infeed into the network for a CPU To set the limitation of the data infeed into the network, follow these steps: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the interface of the CPU. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "Advanced options" > "Interface options". 3. Select or clear the "Limit data infeed into the network" check box. Figure 5-54 5.6 Limit data infeed into the network PROFINET with performance upgrade Performance upgrade The performance upgrade implements the application class "High Performance" of the PROFINET specification V2.3. The performance upgrade provides a series of measures that lead to the following improvements for PROFINET with IRT: Reduction of runtime delays in the IO devices Increase in the bandwidth for cyclic IO data Reduction of the bandwidth used for PROFINET frames Reduction of the send clocks The improvements achieved with the performance upgrade mean that you can operate your PROFINET IO system with more devices with the same send clock or the same number of devices with a shorter send clock. With PROFINET, it was previously possible to reach a send clock of 250 s. With the performance upgrade, it is now possible to achieve isochronous send clocks of up to 125 s with the fast forwarding, dynamic frame packing and fragmentation procedures, depending on the performance capability of the CPU (see Technical Specifications in the device manuals). With short send clocks, standard communication remains possible. The performance upgrade will help you to implement applications with high speed and send clock requirements. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 197 Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade 5.6.1 Dynamic frame packing Dynamic frame packing Previously, individual PROFINET IO frames were sent for every PROFINET IO device. The performance upgrade uses the dynamic frame packing procedure that is based on the summation frame method. With the summation frame method, a frame contains the user data for neighboring devices on a line. With Dynamic Frame Packing, every IO device takes its data from the frame and forwards the rest. The frame is shortened from IO device to IO device. Dynamic frame packing improves the use of the bandwidth in a line topology. The following figure shows how Dynamic Frame Packing works based on the example of a frame containing the user data for 3 IO devices. The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for all 3 IO devices (green, blue and orange). The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for two IO devices (blue and orange). The PROFINET IO frame reaches the first IO device. The IO device takes its user data (green) from the frame and forwards the remaining frame. The PROFINET IO frame reaches the second IO device. The IO device takes its user data (blue) from the frame and forwards the remaining frame. The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for one IO device (orange). The PROFINET IO frame reaches the last IO device. The IO device saves the entire frame including user data (orange). Figure 5-55 Dynamic Frame Packing (DFP) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 198 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade DFP groups Dynamic frame packing automatically groups IO devices that support the performance upgrade into DFP groups. To be grouped together in a DFP group. the IO devices must be located one after the other in a line and must have the same update time and watchdog time. As soon as a maximum frame size for the DFP group is exceeded or a maximum number of members for a DFP group is reached, Dynamic Frame Packing automatically opens a new DFP group. STEP 7 shows the DFP groups in "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the sync domain" > "Device" in the "IO devices" box. Figure 5-56 Display of the DFP groups in STEP 7 Note Dynamic frame packing with high watchdog times If you set the "Accepted update cycles without IO data" parameter higher than 31 for an IO device, Dynamic Frame Packing does not place this IO device in a DFP group. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 199 Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade 5.6.2 Fragmentation The transfer of a complete standard Ethernet frame with TCP/IP data takes up to 125 s. This means that the cycle time for PROFINET IO data cannot be reduced by any desired amount. The performance upgrade uses the fragmentation procedure, which breaks down TCP/IP frames into sub-frames. These frame segments are transferred to the target device over multiple send clocks; there they are reassembled to the original TCP/IP frame. Fragmentation is a requirement for cycle times lower than 250 s. In these short send clocks, you can use more bandwidth for cyclic IO data, since the fragments of the standard Ethernet frames use significantly less bandwidth than a complete standard Ethernet frame. The following figure shows how fragmentation works. A standard Ethernet frame with TCP/IP data is up to 125 s. During fragmentation, the standard Ethernet frame is divided into frame segments. The frame segments are divided into multiple short send clocks. Figure 5-57 Fragmentation Note The PROFINET IO interface of the IO controller supports fragmentation if all the ports except one are deactivated. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 200 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade 5.6.3 Fast forwarding To be able to decide whether a frame should be forwarded or used, a PROFINET IO device requires the frame ID. It previously took 1440 ns until the frame ID was present in the IO device. The performance upgrade uses the fast forwarding procedure in which the frame ID is located nearer the front of the frame. The throughput time in the device is reduced to 320 ns. With fast forwarding, the throughput time of the frame is reduced in your PROFINET IO system. This results in decisive performance advantages, particularly in line, ring and tree topologies. The figure below compares the throughput of a PROFINET IO frame in an IO device with and without fast forwarding. Start: * Both PROFINET frames reach the IO device. The IO devices start to check the frames for the frame ID After 320 ns: * Without fast forwarding: The IO device is still checking the PROFINET frame for the frame ID. * With fast forwarding: The IO device receives the frame ID from the PROFINET frame and forwards the frame. After 1440 ns: * Without fast forwarding: The IO device receives the frame ID from the PROFINET frame and forwards the frame. * The PROFINET frame with fast forwarding is "ahead" of the PROFINET frame without fast forwarding. Figure 5-58 Fast forwarding PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 201 Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade 5.6.4 Configuration of IRT with high performance High-end applications with IO communication require excellent performance in IO processing, for example in the control of wind turbines (converter control). To use IRT communication with the highest performance in your PROFINET IO system, enable the option "Make 'high performance' possible". When you enable the "Make 'high performance' possible" option, this has the following effects: You can set send clocks of 187.5 s and 125 s (for example CPU 1518-4 PN/DP) or 187.5 s (for example CPU 1517-3 PN/DP), see Technical specifications in the CPU device manuals. You can set more bandwidth use for cyclic IO data. You can use the option "Allows the use of 'fast forwarding'". Requirements S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version V2.0 Enable the "Make 'high performance' possible" option. Follow these steps to activate the "Make 'high performance' possible" option: 1. Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view of STEP 7. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the sync domain". 3. Enable the "Make 'high performance' possible" option. Figure 5-59 Activating high performance PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 202 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade Using more bandwidth for cyclic IO data Requirement: The "Make 'high performance' possible" option is enabled. To set more bandwidth for cyclic IO data for your PROFINET IO system, follow these steps: 1. Select your IO system in the network view of STEP 7. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the sync domain" > "Details". 3. In the drop-down list, select "Maximum 90% cyclic IO data. Focus on cyclic IO data". Figure 5-60 Using more bandwidth for cyclic IO data Note Bandwidth usage in isochronous mode If you operate your PROFINET IO system in isochronous mode, avoid using the setting for the bandwidth usage "Maximum 90% cyclic IO data. Focus on cyclic IO data." Setting low send clocks (example CPU 1518-4 PN/DP) Requirement: The "Make 'high performance' possible" option is enabled. 1. Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view of STEP 7. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the sync domain". 3. Select the send clock for "Send clock" in the drop-down list. Figure 5-61 Setting low send clocks PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 203 Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade Requirements for the fragmentation process (example CPU 1518-4 PN/DP) If you use the following combinations for send clock and bandwidth settings, the devices in the IO system use the fragmentation process. Send clock cycle 125 s: Always fragmentation irrespective of the bandwidth setting. Send clock cycle 187.5 s: Fragmentation with the bandwidth settings "Maximum 50% cyclic IO data. Balanced proportion." and "Maximum 90% cyclic IO data. Focus on cyclic IO data." The PROFINET IO interface of the controller supports fragmentation if all the ports except one are deactivated. Optimizing port settings for low send clocks You can further optimize the bandwidth use in your PROFINET IO system by using cables with a short cable length (< 20 m) or a short signal delay (max. 0.12 s) between the devices. To configure cables with a shorter length or signal delay in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Select the port in the topology view of STEP 7. 2. Navigate in the Inspector window to "Port interconnection" in the "Partner port" box. 3. Select the option "Cable length" or "Signal delay:". 4. Select the cable length or enter the signal delay. Figure 5-62 Optimizing port settings for low send clocks PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 204 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade Allowing fast forwarding Requirements: The PROFINET IO device has to support the fast forwarding process so that the process can be used by the device. The "Make 'high performance' possible" option is enabled. The PROFINET IO interface supports fast forwarding if all the ports except one are deactivated. Follow these steps to allow fast forwarding: 1. Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view of STEP 7. 2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "PROFINET" > "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the sync domain". 3. Enable the "Allows the use of `fast forwarding'" option. Figure 5-63 Allowing fast forwarding Note Fast forwarding and IPv6 The operation of fast forwarding in combination with IPv6 is not supported. As soon as an IO device in the subnet uses an IPv6 address, you must not activate "fast forwarding". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 205 Functions 5.6 PROFINET with performance upgrade 5.6.5 Sample configuration for IRT with high performance The figure below shows an example configuration with which you can achieve maximum performance. Port 1 of the X1 interface of the CPU is deactivated. Port 2 of the X1 interface and the ports of the interface modules on the bus use the following setting: Medium copper, cable length < 20 m or signal delay max. 0.12s A programming device connection to the CPU can be established via the interfaces X2 and X3 of the CPU or via the free port at the end of the line. Figure 5-64 Example configuration for IRT with high performance Use the following settings for the Sync domain: Enable the "Make 'high performance' possible" option. Set the send clock to 125 s. Enable the "Allows the use of `fast forwarding'" option. Standard Ethernet communication for IRT with high performance Standard Ethernet communication is still possible even in a PROFINET IO system with high performance. Keep in mind that you first arrange the IRT nodes, as seen from the IO controller, and arrange the standard Ethernet nodes at the end of the line. With a large volume of data through standard Ethernet communication, it makes sense to reduce the load on your network by separating standard Ethernet communication and cyclic real-time communication. Example: Use the interface X1 for the PROFINET IO communication and a different interface for the standard Ethernet communication. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 206 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode 5.7 Isochronous mode 5.7.1 What is isochronous mode? Objectives of isochronous operation The advantages of the isochronous mode function in automation engineering can be seen in an example from everyday life. The transmission of data corresponds to the transport of people on public transport. Assuming public transport were to operate at maximum speed while reducing stop times at the passenger terminals to absolute minimum, the last thing many potential passengers would notice of the departing contraption are its red tail lights. The overall travel time is, however, decided by the train, bus or underground-railway clock, because well adjusted timing is essential to a good service. This also applies in automation engineering. Not only fast cycles but also the adaptation and synchronization of the individual cycles result in optimum throughput. Just-In-Time Figure 5-65 System cycle The fast and reliable response time of a system operating in isochronous mode is due to the fact that all data is provided just-in-time. The basis for this is an equidistant cycle. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 207 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode The isochronous mode function guarantees synchronization of the following at constant time intervals: Signal acquisition and output by the distributed I/O Signal transmission via PROFINET IO Program execution in the CPU in time with the equidistant PROFINET IO The result is a system that acquires its input signals, processes them and outputs the output signals at constant time intervals. Isochronous mode guarantees precisely reproducible and defined process response times as well as equidistant and synchronous signal processing for distributed I/O. Advantages of isochronous mode The use of isochronous mode allows high-precision control. Optimized control loops through constant, calculable dead times Determinism, reliable reproducibility of response times Consistent (simultaneous) reading in of input data Consistent (simultaneous) output of output data 5.7.2 Use of isochronous mode An isochronous system acquires measured values and process data within a fixed system cycle, processes the signals and outputs them synchronously to the process. Isochronous mode contributes to a high control quality and increased production accuracy. With isochronous mode, the possible fluctuations of process response times are drastically reduced. You make use of the time-assured processing to improve machine cycle times. Even fast processes can be reliably controlled thanks to the precise time reproducibility of all sequences. Shorter cycle times increase the processing speed and help to lower production costs. In principle, isochronous mode is worthwhile whenever measured values must be acquired synchronously, movements must be coordinated, and process responses must be defined and simultaneously executed, as in the following example. Isochronous mode can thus be used in a wide variety of applications. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 208 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode Example: Measuring at multiple measurement points with isochronous mode Automation task A camshaft production process requires precise measurement of the camshafts for quality assurance purposes. Feature For this purpose, a component is needed that can synchronously measure the positions and displacements of the cam during a rotation of the camshaft. Solution Figure 5-66 Measuring of camshafts With use of isochronous mode, the measured values are simultaneously acquired at the various measuring points at fixed times. This results in the following workflow: Continuously rotate the camshaft During continuous rotation, synchronously measure the positions and cam displacements Process the next cam shaft Thus, during a single rotation of the camshaft, all the positions of the camshaft and the associated measured values (red) are measured synchronously. The machine cycle time improves with the same or better measuring accuracy. Advantage and benefits The time required for measurement is reduced. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 209 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode 5.7.3 Time sequence of synchronization on PROFINET IO Introduction On PROFINET IO, you can isochronously operate I/O modules in distributed I/O systems on a CPU, e.g. in distributed I/O systems ET 200SP, ET 200MP. Like the I/O modules, the interface modules of the I/O systems must support isochronous mode. From reading in input data to outputting output data The basic time sequence of all components involved in synchronization is explained below: Measured value acquisition in the process Isochronous read-in of input data Transport of input data to the IO controller (CPU) via the subnet Further processing in the isochronous application of the CPU Transport of output data to the outputting IO device via the subnet Isochronous output of output data T_DC Data cycle (Time_DataCycle) TI Time for reading in the input data TO Time for outputting the output data TV Configured delay time Figure 5-67 Time sequence of synchronization on PROFINET IO PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 210 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode To ensure that all input data is ready for transport via the subnet at the next start of the PROFINET IO cycle, the start of the I/O read-in cycle is advanced by the amount of lead time TI. TI is the "flashbulb" for the inputs; at this instant, all synchronized inputs are read in. TI is necessary in order to compensate for analog-to-digital conversion, backplane bus times, and the like. The lead time TI can be configured by STEP 7 or by you. Let the lead time TI be assigned automatically by STEP 7. With the default setting, STEP 7 ensures that a common, minimum TI is set. The subnet transports the input data to the IO controller/DP master. The application is started synchronized to the cycle. That is, the isochronous mode interrupt OB is called after a configurable delay time TV. The user program in the isochronous mode interrupt OB defines the process response and provides the output data in time for the start of the next data cycle. The length of the data cycle (send clock/DP cycle time) is always configured by you. TO is the time for the compensation arising from the backplane bus and the digital-to-analog conversion within the IO device/DP slave. TO is the "flashbulb" for the outputs. The synchronized outputs are output at this time. Time TO can be configured by STEP 7 or by you. Let time TO be assigned automatically by STEP 7. STEP 7 automatically calculates a common, minimum TO. 5.7.4 Configuring isochronous mode 5.7.4.1 Introduction Configuring at a glance Setting parameters for isochronous operation of the I/O module You use the properties of the I/O addresses of the corresponding I/O module to: Set isochronous mode for the module. Assign the inputs and outputs of the module to a process image partition and an isochronous mode interrupt OB. The data of the process image partition is updated synchronously to the assigned OB. Isochronous mode interrupts give you the option of starting programs isochronously with the PROFINET send clock. Isochronous mode interrupts are processed with high priority. Setting the send clock The send clock is the shortest possible transmission interval for the data exchange. In isochronous mode, the send clock corresponds to data cycle T_DC. You set the send clock in the properties of the PROFINET interface of the CPU or in the sync domain. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 211 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode Setting the application cycle The application cycle is a multiple of data cycle T_DC. If the runtime of the isochronous mode interrupt OB is short, the application cycle can be identical to the data cycle (= send clock). You can reduce the application cycle of the isochronous mode interrupt OB relative to the send clock of an isochronous PROFINET IO system. Set an integer multiple of the send clock as the reducing factor. You use the factor to reduce the CPU utilization by executing the isochronous mode interrupt OB less frequently. You set the application cycle in the properties of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. Setting the delay time The delay time is the time between the start of the send clock and the start of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. During this time, the IO controller performs cyclic data exchange with the IO devices. STEP 7 sets the default delay time in such a way that the isochronous update of the process image partition automatically falls within the execution window of the application cycle. You set the delay time in the properties of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. A shorter delay time enables you to increase the processing time for your user program in the isochronous mode interrupt OB. Additional configurations for isochronous mode on PROFINET IO: Setting IRT as the RT class for the interconnected PROFINET interfaces A precondition for isochronous operation on PROFINET IO is IRT communication (Isochronous Real Time Communication). IRT means synchronized data exchange at reserved time intervals. Configuring the topology of the configuration A precondition for IRT communication is the topology configuration. In addition to the reserved bandwidth, the exchange of frames on defined transmission paths is used for further optimization of data communication. For this, the topological information of the configuration is used for planning the communication. Using a sync domain, you assign the IO devices (sync slaves) to an IO controller (sync master) for the isochronous data exchange. A precondition for IRT communication is a synchronization cycle for all PROFINET devices in a sync domain, for distribution of a common time base. With this basic synchronization, synchronous operation of the transmission cycle of the PROFINET devices within a sync domain is achieved. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 212 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode 5.7.4.2 Configuring isochronous mode on PROFINET IO Introduction The configuring of isochronous mode for a module is described as IO device in the following based on the ET 200MP distributed I/O system. The procedure described also applies to other distributed I/O systems (e.g., ET 200S or ET 200SP). The IO controller is an S7-1500 CPU. Requirements The STEP 7 network view is open. A S7-1500 CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP). An IM 155-5 PN HF interface module (ET 200MP) has been placed and networked with the CPU via PROFINET IO. All requirements for an IRT configuration are met: - The ports of the networked PROFINET interfaces of the CPU and interface module are interconnected (topology configuration). - The RT class of the PROFINET interface of the interface module is set to "IRT" (area "Advanced options > Real time settings > Synchronization"). - The "sync master" and "sync slave" roles are assigned for the PROFINET interfaces of the CPU and interface module (in the properties of a PROFINET interface: area "Advanced options" > "Media redundancy" > "Domain settings"). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 213 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode Procedure To create an isochronous connection between the I/O and user program, follow these steps: 1. Select the IM 155-5 PN HF in the network view of STEP 7. Change to the device view. 2. Insert an I/O module that can be operated isochronously (e.g. DI 16 x 24VDC HF). 3. Go to the "I/O addresses" area in the Inspector window of the selected I/O module. Figure 5-68 Configuring isochronous mode on PROFINET IO 4. Make the following settings in the I/O addresses area: - Select the "Isochronous mode" option. - Select a process image partition, e.g., process image partition 1. - Click the "Organization block" drop-down list. Click the "Add" button or select an existing OB. A dialog box for selecting organization blocks opens. - Select the "Synchronous Cycle" OB. Confirm the selection with "OK". In the case of automatic number assignment, OB 61 will be generated and opened. In the Inspector window, you can continue directly with the setting of the application cycle and delay time (Page 216) in the "Isochronous mode" area and start the programming of the OB in the instruction section. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 214 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode 5. If required, insert additional IO devices in the network view. Adapt the configuration and the settings for the isochronous mode. 6. You want to retrieve information about calculated bandwidths or on adapting the send clock. Select the sync domain in the network view and navigate to the corresponding area of the domain management in the Inspector window. Reference You can find examples of parameter assignment and possible settings of isochronous mode for distributed I/O and drives in STEP 7 in this FAQ on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109480489). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 215 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode 5.7.4.3 Setting the application cycle and delay time Requirements You have created an isochronous mode configuration in STEP 7. You have created an isochronous mode interrupt OB Synchronous Cycle (OB 6x). The isochronous mode interrupt OB is open. Setting the application cycle The application cycle is a multiple of data cycle T_DC (send clock). You use the application cycle setting to reduce the CPU utilization caused by execution of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. In the following example, the OB is called only after every 2nd data cycle T_DC in the CPU. To set the application cycle for your isochronous mode application, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Properties" dialog of the isochronous mode interrupt OB under consideration. 2. In the area navigation, click the "Isochronous mode" group . 3. Set the application cycle in "Application cycle (ms)". Open the drop-down list box and select the application cycle. The drop-down list offers multiples of data cycle T_DC as possible values for the application cycle. Data cycle T_DC is set to 2 ms in the following figure. Figure 5-69 Setting the application cycle Setting the delay time The delay time is the time between the start of the send clock and the start of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. STEP 7 sets the delay time automatically to the start of the execution window by default. As a result, the isochronous mode update of the process image partition automatically falls within the execution window of the application cycle. You can also set the delay time manually. A shorter delay time enables you to increase the processing time for your user program in the isochronous mode interrupt OB. If a manual setting is made, note that you must call the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions in the execution window of the application cycle. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 216 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode To set the delay time for your isochronous mode application, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Properties" dialog of the isochronous mode interrupt OB under consideration. 2. In the area navigation, click the "Isochronous mode" group . 3. Clear the "Automatic setting" check box. 4. Enter your desired delay time in "Delay time (ms)". Figure 5-70 Setting the delay time 5.7.5 Programming isochronous mode 5.7.5.1 Basics of Programming Programming in the isochronous mode interrupt OBs You program the isochronous section of the program exclusively in the isochronous mode interrupt OBs Synchronous Cycle (OB 6x). Because the isochronous mode interrupts are processed with high priority, only the timecritical sections of the program should be processed in the isochronous mode interrupt OB. The isochronous mode interrupt OB is called with a configured delay time. Access to isochronous I/O through call of instructions You access the isochronous I/O via a process image partition. That is, the addresses of the isochronous modules must be within one process image partition. You program access to the isochronous IO in isochronous mode interrupt OB Synchronous Cycle (OB 6x) with the SYNC_PI and SYNC_PO instructions. The isochronous I/O is updated by the call of the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions and therefore in the corresponding process image partition. Note Recommendation: To prevent inconsistent data from being returned to OB 6x, do not use the "DPRD_DAT" and "DPWR_DAT" instructions (direct data access) in the isochronous mode interrupt OB. The "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions update the process image partition only within the permitted execution window. The execution window stretches from the end of the cyclic data exchange to the point in time before the end of T_DC at which the outputs can still be copied in time. The data exchange must be started within this time window. If the execution window is violated by the processing of the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions, the instructions indicate a corresponding error message. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 217 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode Program execution models Depending on the order of the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instruction calls in OB 6x, there are two basic models for the program execution: IPO model (read Inputs - Processing - write Outputs) OIP model (write Outputs - read Inputs - Processing) 5.7.5.2 Program execution according to the IPO model If the execution time of the isochronous mode interrupt OB is significantly shorter than one data cycle T_DC, use the IPO model. In the IPO model, you do not reduce the data cycle. That is, the application cycle of the isochronous mode interrupt OB is equal to data cycle T_DC. The IPO model enables the shortest response times. Programming according to the IPO model in the isochronous mode interrupt OB For programming according to the IPO model: 1. Call the SYNC_PI instruction at the start of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. 2. Then call the actual user program. 3. Call the SYNC_PO instruction at the end of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. Table 5- 3 Step Programming according to the IPO model Action Explanation 1 Read in (I) The SYNC_PI instruction reads in the inputs of the process image partition and provides them to the isochronous mode interrupt OB. 2 Process (P) You program the actual user program of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. 3 Output (O) The SYNC_PO instruction outputs the data changed by the user program via the process image partition. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 218 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode Signal sequence in the IPO model The following figure shows the signal sequence in the IPO model from the acquisition and the processing in the CPU to the output of the process values: Execution of isochronous mode interrupt OB "SYNC_PI" instruction "SYNC_PO" instruction Isochronous read-in of process values on I/O module at time TI Isochronous output of process values on I/O module at time TO Figure 5-71 Signal sequence in the IPO model At time TI the process values are read in isochronously on the I/O. The processing of the data in the IPO model is completed within one data cycle T_DC. The output data is always available on the I/O in the next data cycle T_DC at time TO. With the IPO model, there is a constant execution time from the "input terminal" to the "output terminal" of TI + T_DC + TO. TI + 2xT_DC + TO can be guaranteed for the process response time. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 219 Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode 5.7.5.3 Program execution according to the OIP model Use the OIP model in the case of execution cycles of the isochronous mode interrupt OB of different lengths, if the application cycle is greater than data cycle T_DC. The data exchange with the process is always deterministic in the OIP model, i.e. takes place at a precisely specified time. Programming according to the OIP model in the isochronous mode interrupt OB For programming according to the OIP model: 1. Call the SYNC_PO instruction at the start of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. 2. Then call the SYNC_PI instruction. 3. Then call the actual user program. Table 5- 4 Step Programming according to the OIP model Action Explanation 1 Output (O) The SYNC_PO instruction outputs the data that was changed by the user program in the previous cycle via the outputs of the process image partition. 2 Read in (I) The SYNC_PI instruction reads in the inputs of the process image partition of the current cycle and provides the inputs to the isochronous mode interrupt OB. 3 Process (P) You program the actual user program of the isochronous mode interrupt OB. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 220 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.7 Isochronous mode Signal sequence in the OIP model The following figure shows the signal sequence in the OIP model from the acquisition of process values and the processing in the CPU to the output of the process values. The application cycle is twice as long as data cycle T_DC in this example. Execution of isochronous mode interrupt OB "SYNC_PI" instruction "SYNC_PO" instruction Isochronous read-in of process values on I/O module at time TI Isochronous output of process values on I/O module at time TO Figure 5-72 Signal sequence in the OIP model At time TI the process values are read in isochronously on the I/O. The data is processed over 2 application cycles in the OIP model. The output data is always available on the I/O in the following application cycle at time T_DC + TO. With the IPO model, there is a constant execution time from the "input terminal" to the "output terminal" of TI + application cycle + T_DC + TO. TI + 2 x application cycle + T_DC + TO can be ensured as the process response time. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 221 Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Definition IO devices which have no slot for exchangeable medium (e.g. ET 200SP, ET 200MP) or IO devices which support the PROFINET functionality "Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG" can be replaced without having an exchangeable medium with saved device names inserted and without having to assign the device name with the PG. The new IO device is given a device name by the IO controller and not by the exchangeable medium or the PG. To assign the device name, the IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighborhood relations established from the IO devices. Figure 5-73 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Note When you exchange a device, make sure that the PROFINET cable is again inserted into the correct port, as it is configured in STEP 7. Otherwise, the system will not run. Advantages With the Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG PROFINET functionality, you can profit from the following advantages: After the replacement of the IO device, it automatically obtains its device name from the IO controller. You no longer have to assign device names with the PG or exchangeable medium. You can save on the storage medium for the IO device that replaces the removed one. Simple device name allocation with series machines that have the same configuration and set topology. It is no longer necessary to assign device names via exchangeable medium/PG. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 222 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Which devices support device replacement without exchangeable medium? An overview of the devices that support the "Device replacement without exchangeable medium" function is provided in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/36752540). 5.8.1 Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG function Neighborhood Neighborhood is the physical relationship between two ports of adjacent PROFINET devices. A PROFINET device is connected in this case through one of its ports over a physical Ethernet line to a specific port of the second PROFINET device in close proximity (neighbors). Both terminal devices, for example, IO controllers and IO devices with a port, and network components, for example, switches, IO controllers and IO devices with multiple ports, are considered PROFINET devices. Failure and replacement of an IO device The following example describes device replacement without exchangeable medium in the case of failure of an IO device. Figure 5-74 Example configuration of device replacement without exchangeable medium For the device replacement, the following information is available to the IO controller: PROFINET device Device alias Controller "port-001.Switch" Switch "port-002.Controller", "port-001.Press", "port-001.Pump" Press "port-002.Switch", "port-001.Mill" Mill "port-002.Press" Pump "port-004.Switch" The IO device with the device name "Mill" fails in this example: PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 223 Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Requirement The PROFINET device replacing the removed one has no device name. Principles of name assignment The failure of the "Mill" IO device is considered here. 1. The IO controller queries the device name of the replaced IO device. 2. The IO controller detects that the IO device with the device alias "port-002.Press" does not have a device name. 3. The IO controller assigns the device name "Mill" to the replaced IO device via the device alias "port-002.Press" of the failed IO devices. Note If you insert a device with the Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG PROFINET functionality at a different location than the configuration, a different device name is then assigned to the device. Reset a wrongly inserted device to delivery state before you use it again. 5.8.2 Replacing an IO device without exchangeable medium Introduction Replacement of IO devices is sometimes frequently required in automation systems. The IO devices are generally assigned a device name by either inserting an exchangeable medium or via the programming device. The CPU identifies the IO device by using these device names. Under certain circumstances, replacing an IO device can be done without inserting an exchangeable medium or without the PG. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 224 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Requirements The topology of the PROFINET IO system with the respective IO devices must be configured. By configuring the topology, the neighbor relationships of all the PROFINET devices located in the PROFINET IO system are announced to the PROFINET IO system or the IO controller. From the neighbor relationships specified by the set topology and the actual neighbor relationships established by the real PROFINET devices, the IO controller can identify the replaced IO device without a name and assign to it the configured name and the IP address and then again list it in the user data traffic. The affected IO devices in the automation system must support device replacement without exchangeable medium. If the individual IO devices in the automation system do not support device replacement without exchangeable medium, a corresponding alarm is output for the IO device. Note Use only new IO devices as replacements or restore configured IO devices to their delivery state. Activating/deactivating device replacement without exchangeable medium The "Device replacement without exchangeable medium" function is activated in the IO controller by default. To deactivate device replacement without exchangeable medium, follow these steps: 1. In the device or network view of the STEP 7, select the PROFINET interface in the corresponding IO controller. 2. In the interface properties under "Advanced options > Interface options", clear the "Support device replacement without exchangeable medium" check box. To reactivate device replacement without exchangeable medium, you must select the "Support device replacement without exchangeable medium" check box again. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 225 Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium 5.8.3 Permit overwriting of PROFINET device name With the option "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices", you can overwrite PROFINET device names of IO devices during startup of the CPU. This option reduces the effort during automatic commissioning, for example, when replacing a device. Requirements IO controller supports the "Permit overwriting of device names of all assigned IO devices" option, for example CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC as of firmware version 4.0 How the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices" option works The IO controller (CPU) can overwrite the PROFINET device names of IO devices in the IO system when the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices" option is enabled. Multiple use IO systems can only be operated when this option is enabled. The IO controller checks prior to overwriting if the type of the IO device matches the configured type. If the option is not selected, the IO controller cannot overwrite the device names of the IO devices. In this case, you must manually assign the PROFINET device name on the IO device if the PROFINET device name changes in the configuration or when a device is replaced, or delete the device names of the IO devices prior to an automatic commissioning. Response during commissioning Select the option "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices" only if the following requirements are fulfilled: All the configured IO devices are available. All IO devices are wired correctly in accordance with the topology configuration. No IO device is jumpered. If configured IO devices are missing or are jumpered (partial commissioning), do not use the option. CAUTION Error at partial commissioning If device names are assigned incorrectly during partial commissioning or incorrect wiring, these have to be deleted manually after a correction of the wiring in order to attain correct assignment of the device names. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 226 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Behavior during operation After commissioning, you may exchange or jumper IO devices as long as the IO devices do not have a PROFINET device name that is used for a different IO device in the project. Otherwise, incorrect assignment of PROFINET device names in the neighborhood or further vicinity of the IO device can occur. WARNING Wrong PROFINET device name When the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices" option is enabled, incorrectly connected devices can be assigned an incorrect PROFINET device name from the configuration. Depending on the connected I/O, there is risk of death, severe injuries or damage caused by malfunctions. To rule out any danger, check whether the suitable replacement device has been connected in case of a device replacement and whether the port interconnection matches the configured preset topology. Typical source of danger When replacing an IO device ("standard case"), it is almost guaranteed that the replaced device will be connected according to the configured port interconnection. The figure below shows a scenario whereby the connections of two identical PROFINET cables are swapped at two switch ports. Because the IO controller assigns the device names according to the preset topology, the incorrect connection of the devices has serious effects on the naming. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 227 Functions 5.8 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Due to the control of different actuators, the plant could become hazardous in this case. Switch with connected PROFINET cables Device A, device name "IOD-1": controls motor 1 Device B, device name "IOD-10": controls motor 10 Device A controls motor 10! Device B controls motor 1! Procedure Proceed as follows to change the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices" option: 1. Select the PROFINET interface of the CPU for which you want to change the option in the network view or in the device view. 2. Select the area "Advanced options", section "Interface options". 3. Change the option. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 228 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5.9 Standard machine projects Introduction Standard machine projects are STEP 7 projects that use a set of innovative functions allowing simple configuration and commissioning of flexible automation solutions for standard machines or for machines with a modular structure. A hardware configuration consisting of an IO controller and any number of connected IO devices represents a "PROFINET IO system master". This master is configured with a maximum configuration based on a template from which various options can be derived for different standard machines, for example with different configuration variants of the IO system. Greater flexibility at all levels Standard machine projects have the following central characteristics: Different variants of a standard machine can be loaded from precisely one project with an engineered maximum configuration (IO system options). The standard machine project covers all variants (options) of the IO system. An IO system option can be integrated in an existing network locally using simple tools. Flexibility is provided in more ways than one: With suitable configuration, adaptation of the IP address parameters of the IO controller is possible locally using simple tools. This allows a standard machine to be integrated in different plants with little effort or to be included in a network several times. IO systems with this property are known as multiple use IO systems. With suitable configuration and programming, different setups of IO system options can be operated locally that differ in terms of the selection of IO devices used or in terms of the arrangement of the IO devices. Since the specific configuration of the IO system is controlled by the user program, this is known as configuration control for IO systems. Independently of the functions described above, with suitable configuration and programming, you can use different station options of central devices or distributed I/O devices in one project. The devices can be different in terms of the selection and arrangement of the modules. Since the concrete configuration of the station is controlled by the user program, this is also known as configuration control at the device layer. Application examples You can find application examples for configuration control at the device layer, configuration control for IO systems and multiple-use IO systems on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 229 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Additional information For more information on multiple use IO systems, refer to section Multiple use IO systems (Page 230). For more information on the configuration control for IO systems, refer to section Configuration control for IO systems (Page 239). For more information on configuration control, refer to the system manual S7-1500, ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). 5.9.1 Multiple use IO systems 5.9.1.1 What you should know about multiple use IO systems Multiple use automation solutions For a flexible reusable automation solution as is the case with series machines, the following use cases are typical: The machine (and therefore also the PROFINET IO system) is used more than once by the customers. The machine is used in different plants by various customers. For this to be possible, the automation solution must meet the following requirements: A project (configuration and program) can be loaded on various machines of the same type without changes. Only a few easy adaptations need to be performed locally to integrate the machine into an existing network infrastructure. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 230 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects The following figure shows how an automation solution with a multiple use IO system is loaded on different automation systems and then one automation system is adapted to the existing network infrastructure locally. Load configuration with multiple use IO system Set IP address and device name locally on the IO controller Figure 5-75 "Multiple use IO system" principle Principle The automation components for a machine include a PROFINET IO system, consisting of an IO controller (PROFINET interface of a CPU) and the IO devices assigned to it. With the "Multiple use IO system" setting for the IO system, you turn a STEP 7 project into a "Standard machine project". The "Multiple use IO system" setting triggers various settings and checks of the configuration by STEP 7. The settings ensure that the IO system is self-contained and there are no dependencies on components outside the IO system. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 231 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Requirements STEP 7 as of V13 The IO controller supports the "Multiple use IO system" function, for example a CPU 1512SP-1 PN as of firmware version 1.6. Rules The following rules apply to a multiple use IO system: No IO device can be configured as shared device. The ports of the devices must be interconnected. Devices for which no port interconnection is configured, for example, interface module IM 154-6 IWLAN (ET 200pro PN), cannot be operated with STEP 7 V13 as IO devices on a multiple use IO system. If an IO device in a multiple use IO system is an I-device (CPU as an "intelligent" IO device): - If the I-device has a lower-level IO system, this I-device cannot be connected to the same PROFINET interface as the higher-level IO controller. Note: If the I-device is configured using a PROFINET GSD, STEP 7 cannot check for compliance with this rule. In this case, you are responsible for ensuring compliance with the rule. I-device in multiple use IO system. The PROFINET interface is operated as IO device. No other IO system is connected here. A lower-level IO system on the I-device is connected to another PROFINET interface. Figure 5-76 Example configuration for "Multiple use IO system" with I-device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 232 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects - The PROFINET interface of the I-device must be set to "Parameter assignment of PN interface by higher-level controller". If MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol) is configured: - All IO devices on the multiple use IO system must belong to the same MRP domain. If IRT (Isochronous Real Time) is configured: - All IO devices in multiple use IO systems must belong to the same sync domain. - The sync domain must not include any other IO devices. IE/PB Links cannot be operated as an IO device in a multiple use IO system with STEP 7 V13. Configuration You specify whether or not a configuration can be used multiple times in the properties of the IO system. All other parameter settings for the configured devices are then set automatically by STEP 7 and checked during compilation. Boundary conditions To prevent a standard machine project from having dependencies on other devices outside of the machine, observe the following: A standard machine project consists of an IO controller and the corresponding IO devices. You should therefore configure only one CPU as IO controller and the corresponding IO devices in the standard machine project. Do not use connection configured at both ends for the communication. Instead, use only a connection configured at one end or unspecified connections if necessary. Background: To configure the communication in a STEP 7 project, it is always possible to set the IP address parameters in the project. For multiple use IO systems, however, this strategy is not possible since the IP address parameters of the IO controller and the assigned IO devices are assigned locally. At the time of the configuration, the IP address parameters are therefore unknown. If you nevertheless want to configure communication with devices on PROFINET, for example with a central coordinator, you can only use communications mechanisms that allow dynamic assignment of the IP address parameters in the user program. Example: Open User Communication If, for example, the device is configured as an active end point (initiator of the connection), the IP address parameters can be stored, for example, in a data block. You then supply the data block with the currently valid IP address parameters during commissioning. For this dynamic type of IP address parameter assignment, there is no system support; in other words, if you change the configuration of the system, the IP address parameters are not automatically adapted. You will find a description of handling instructions for Open User Communication under this keyword in the STEP 7 online help. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 233 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5.9.1.2 Configuring multiple use IO systems Requirements STEP 7 as of V13 The IO controller supports the "Multiple use IO system" function, for example a CPU 1512SP-1 PN as of firmware version 1.6. Procedure The configuration of a series machine using an S7-1500-CPU as an example is described below. To create a standard machine project, follow these steps: 1. Create a project. 2. Configure a CPU as the IO controller, for example a CPU 1518-4 PN/DP as of firmware version 1.5. 3. Configure the required IO devices and assign the IO devices to the IO controller. 4. Configure the port interconnection between the devices. 5. Select the IO system so that you can edit the properties in the inspector window. 6. Select the "Multiple use IO system" check box in the "General" area of the inspector window. Figure 5-77 Activate "Multiple use IO system" Result: The following settings are made by STEP 7: The device name of the IO controller (CPU) in the standard machine project is set to "PROFINET device name is set directly at the device". The IO controller (CPU) has no PROFINET device name initially. The IP protocol of the IO controller (CPU) is set to "IP address is set directly at the device". The CPU has no IP address initially. The "Support device replacement without exchangeable medium" option is selected automatically. This option enables automatic commissioning. A commissioning engineer does not have to assign device names to the IO devices locally. The IO controller assigns the device name and IP address to the IO devices based on the preset topology and other settings during startup. The device name of the IO devices is set to "Generate PROFINET device name automatically" (from the configured name of the IO device). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 234 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects The IP protocol of the IO devices is set to "IP address is set by the IO controller during runtime". The IO devices have no IP address initially. If an IO device is not a typical distributed I/O system (e.g., ET 200 systems), but rather another device such as an HMI device, change the option to "IP address is set directly at the device"; see below. The device number for the IO devices is automatically assigned and is used locally for making the IP address unique. The option "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device name" must be selected (CPU parameters, properties of the PROFINET interface, Ethernet addresses area) so that the IO controller can adapt the device name later at the operator. This option is disabled by default. The following figure shows the above-described settings for the IP address and PROFINET device name. After the configuration is loaded from the standard machine project, the IO controller has no device name and no IP address. Following loading, the IO devices have a device name and a device number but no IP address. Figure 5-78 Settings for the IP address and the PROFINET device name PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 235 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects How an IO device obtains an IP address locally Below, you will find an explanation of the "IP address is set by the IO controller during runtime" and "IP address is set directly at the device" options, which can generally be configured for a multiple use IO system. If you have set the "Multiple use IO system" option for the IO system, STEP 7 automatically sets the "IP address is set by the IO controller during runtime" option for the IO devices. In this case, the IO controller assigns the IO device an IP address that results from the locally assigned IP address of the IO controller (see next section). This option is appropriate if the IO device is a field device, e.g., ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, or another distributed I/O system. If the IO device is not a "standard" field device, for example, an HMI device for a Windows operating system, the "IP address is set by the IO controller during runtime" option described above does not work. In this case, choose the "IP address is set directly at the device" option. You must then assign the IP address to the device locally and take steps to ensure that this address is suitable for the IP addresses of the other IO devices and the IP address of the IO controller. 5.9.1.3 Adapt multiple use IO systems locally A few steps are needed to adapt the machine that was loaded with the standard machine project. Only the device name and IP address of the IO controller must be adapted locally. The device names and IP addresses of the IO devices result from these adaptations. In this example, the effects of local settings are described for two specific machine modules. The local settings are possible, for example, with the CPU display and commissioning tools such as Primary Setup Tool (PST) or PRONETA. You do not need a programming device with STEP 7 to make these settings, even though it is possible to do so. Requirements The machine was loaded with a standard machine project (see Configuring multiple use IO systems (Page 234)). The display is ready for operation and the desired tool for assigning the IP address and device name is available (e.g., PST Tool, STEP 7). The ports of the IO controller and IO devices are interconnected according to the configuration. Procedure Observe the boundary conditions and instructions for commissioning an S7-1500. For more information on commissioning an S7-1500 CPU, refer to the system manual S7-1500, ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 236 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects To adapt a standard machine locally, follow these steps: 1. Integrate the machine into the network. 2. Connect the device for assigning the IP address and device name to the CPU, for example a PG/PC with the appropriate software. 3. Assign the desired device name and IP address to the IO controller. 4. Start up the CPU. The IO controller then assigns the adapted PROFINET device name and a unique IP address to the IO devices. The following rules apply to the assignment: The device names of the IO devices are formed by chaining together the following name components, separated by a period: . The IP addresses of the IO devices result from the locally configured IP address of the associated IO controller and the device number (sum). Note Make sure that duplicate IP addresses cannot be created on the subnet during the assignment. The IO controller does not assign a new IP address in this case. In the following figure, the device name "m1" and the IP address 192.168.1.10 have been assigned to the IO controller of the first machine. The device name "m2" and the IP address 192.168.1.20 has been assigned for the second machine. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 237 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Refer to the figure for the resulting device names and IP addresses. Set device name and IP address on the IO controller After startup, the IO devices have an updated device name (.) and an adapted IP address (= + ) Figure 5-79 Example of the assignment of IP addresses and device names at "Multiple use IO system" See also Configuring multiple use IO systems (Page 234) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 238 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5.9.2 Configuration control for IO systems 5.9.2.1 Information about configuration control of IO systems Configuration control of IO systems makes it possible to generate several concrete versions of a standard machine from a standard machine project. You are given the flexibility to vary the configuration of an IO system for a specific application as long as the real configuration can be derived from the set configuration. The configured configuration therefore represents the superset of all real configurations that can be derived from it. The following figure shows an example of how two IO systems with a different number of IO devices arise from one standard machine project. Figure 5-80 Example of configuration control for PROFINET IO systems In the following sections, you find a description of how to configure and program a PROFINET IO system to commission, for example, a standard machine on-site without using configuration software. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 239 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Concept The principle of configuration control is already known at the device level for the flexible use of submodules/modules ("option handling"). Different configurations can be derived from one engineering project both for central as well as for distributed I/O. With S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V1.7, this principle can also be applied at the IO system level. You have the option of omitting, adding or changing the order of stations (IO devices) of a PROFINET IO system in a specific plant. Configuration control for devices and configuration control for IO systems can be combined; the functions are independent of each other. It is possible to operate variants deviating from a maximum configuration of an IO system. In a standard machine project, you can prepare a kit of IO devices which can be flexibly customized for various configurations using configuration control. The following variations are available: Variation of the number of IO devices involved You include optional IO devices for the configuration control in the configuration by transferring a suitable data record with the required configuration in the user program. Variation of the order of IO devices involved You adapt the port interconnection of the IO devices to the topology being used by transferring a suitable data record with the required topology in the user program. The following figure shows how you serve two different configurations with an IO device marked as optional in the network view of STEP 7. Configuration without the optional IO device: In this case, you use the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" to transfer a data record to the PROFINET interface containing the information that no optional IO device is to be included in the configuration. Configuration with the optional IO device: PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 240 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects In this case, you use the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" to transfer a data record to the PROFINET interface adding the optional IO device to the configuration. Determined through parameter assignment: IO Device_2 is optional IO device Configuration without the optional IO device Configuration with the optional IO device Figure 5-81 Example configuration with "Optional IO device" and the associated configuration options PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 241 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Summary: The procedure in principle The following phases are distinguished when it comes to the implementation of a standard machine concept: 1. Engineering phase: Creating a standard machine project and loading into specific machine or plant: - Completely configuring all IO devices (options) ever required in a specific machine or plant - Configuring as optional those IO devices that will be omitted in specific machines or plants - Preparing user program (see Configuring flexible order of IO devices (Page 250)) with the possibility of selecting on-site the actually existing configuration via switch or HMI device 2. Commissioning phase: Preparing specific machine or plant for operation: - Integrating machine or plant in the on-site network (see Adapt multiple use IO systems locally (Page 236)) - Selecting the currently existing configuration of the IO system via configured option 5.9.2.2 Configuring IO devices as optional Requirements IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as of firmware version 1.7 STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher The rules (Page 256) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project have been considered. Port interconnection As of STEP 7 V15.1, port interconnection is not necessary for optional IO devices. A port interconnection between the devices of the IO system that you want to customize with the user program is mandatory in the following cases. You have configured IRT. You have configured MRP. You are using STEP 7 <= V15. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 242 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Procedure To configure an IO device as optional IO device, proceed as follows: 1. Create a project. 2. Configure an S7-1500 CPU firmware version V1.7 or higher as IO controller. 3. Configure the required IO devices and assign the IO devices to the IO controller. 4. Select the IO device you want to mark as optional. 5. Select the area "PROFINET interface [X1]" > Advanced options". 6. Enable the "Optional IO device" option. Figure 5-82 Configure the IO device as an optional IO device 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all IO devices to be configured as optional. 8. Load the configuration onto the CPU. Result: Once this configuration is loaded, the system behavior is as follows: The CPU is prepared for the configuration control of the IO system. All IO devices are disabled. Irrespective of whether you customize the configuration with the user program (adding optional IO devices) or make no changes to the loaded configuration: You must call the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" in the user program and notify the current configuration to the system! The system will not be operational without calling the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". For further information on the proceeding see Enabling optional IO devices in the program (Page 244). Fast parameter assignment in the "IO communication" table You can also specify whether or not an IO device is optional in the "IO communication" tab. In an additional "Optional IO device" column, a selectable check box is available for each IO device that indicates whether or not an IO device is optional. Here, you can adjust the setting centrally. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 243 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5.9.2.3 Enabling optional IO devices in the program Requirements IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as of firmware version 1.7 STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher At least one IO device was configured as optional IO device. The rules (Page 256) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project have been considered. Procedure Observe the information on and rules for commissioning in the documentation for SIMATIC S7-1500, for the ET 200SP CPUs and for the CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The following description of the proceeding only includes steps required to understand the program-controlled activation of an optional IO device. To activate or deactivate IO devices, follow these steps: 1. Create a data record "CTRLREC" for the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". You can find information on the structure of the data record in the STEP 7 online help. 2. Call the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" and select MODE 1 to deactivate all IO devices. If you set the CPU to STOP or POWER OFF state in order to modify the plant in this status (for example to add an optional IO device), explicit deactivation using "ReconfigIOSystem" with mode 1 is not necessary. In this case, i.e. following a STOPRUN transition and following a POWER-OFF > POWER-ON transition, all IO devices are deactivated automatically. 3. When you have brought the plant to a safe status that allows restructuring without any danger: Put the plant together according to your intended application. Add the required optional IO devices at the points at which you planned this in the configuration (observe the order!) or remove optional IO devices that you no longer require. 4. Network the IO devices. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 244 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5. Startup the S7-1500 system and call again the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". Select MODE 2 to transfer the data record CTRLREC. 6. Following successful transfer of the data record, call again the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". Select MODE 3 to activate all IO devices forming part of the current configuration. Result: The CPU activates the following IO devices: - All IO devices that you have not set as optional IO devices. - All optional IO devices listed in the control data record (CTRLREC). The following IO devices remain disabled: - Docking units (IO devices changing during operation). - Optional IO devices that are not listed in the control data record. Note Call the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" for all values of the parameter MODE with the same control data record (CTRLREC)! If you use different data records for the values of the MODE parameter, this results in an inconsistent customization of the configuration and thus to rather incomprehensible error messages. Example: Data record structure for the activation of an IO device The IO device "IO-Device_2" is to be activated as the only IO device in the user program. To do this, you only require the hardware identifier of "IO-Device_2". Recommendation: Use the system constants of the hardware identifiers instead of the absolute values as shown in this example. With this procedure, the content of the DB is not influenced by changes to the hardware identifiers as the result of changes to the configuration. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 245 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects The data record is to be stored in a data block and to be transmitted to the PROFINET interface of the IO controller in the user program using the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". IO device_2 is configured as optional IO device. Once the data record is transmitted and the configuration is activated using the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" IO device_2 is included in the configuration and participates in the data exchange with the IO controller. Figure 5-83 Example: Activating an optional IO device Creating data block In this example, the control data record is created in a data block. The data block is structured as follows: Line 2: Array definition: Array of type Word with 4 elements. Array of Word is permitted as the data type. Line 3: Version of the data record (currently: V1.0). Line 4: Number of optional IO devices to be activated (here: 1). Line 5: List of the hardware identifiers of the IO devices, inserted here as system constants. Line 6: Number of port interconnections that are set in the user program (here: 0). Line 7: Additional data records (optional) Figure 5-84 Data block with control records PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 246 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Parameter MODE of instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" You control how the "ReconfigIOSystem" instruction works with the MODE parameter. The following values are possible for the MODE input parameter: MODE Description 1 All IO devices of the IO system can be disabled by calling the instruction with MODE 1. The "ReconfigIOSystem" instruction uses the "D_ACT_DP" instruction internally. "ReconfigIOSystem" returns errors that are detected by D_ACT_DP in the following output parameters: * STATUS (error code) * ERR_INFO (hardware identifier of the IO device causing the error). In STATUS and ERR_INFO, the CPU enters the last determined error/HW identifier and in so doing overwrites an existing error code. For this reason, additional errors can be present besides the entered error. 2 For controlling the actual configuration of the IO system, the instruction transfers the data record to the PROFINET interface, which is addressed with LADDR block parameter (HW identifier of the PROFINET interface). 3 All non-optional IO devices in the IO system and optional IO devices that are listed in the control data record CTRLREC are enabled. The optional IO devices that are not listed in the CTRLREC data record remain disabled. If IO devices that are part of docking units (alternating IO devices in operation) are listed in the CTRLREC control data record, the PN IO system reacts as follows: * IO devices of the docking units remain disabled when ReconfigIOSystem is called with MODE 3. This reaction corresponds to the reaction of a configuration without configurationcontrolled IO devices. IO devices of docking units are disabled by default and must be enabled in the user program. For more information on docking units, refer to the section Docking systems (Page 260). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 247 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Rules for the call sequence of "ReconfigIOSystem" Always supply the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" with the same control data record (CTRLREC input parameter)! Call sequence following POWER OFF -> POWER ON transition: - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 1 (optional). - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 2 (mandatory, even without previous reconfiguration!). - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 3 (mandatory). Call sequence following STOP > RUN transition: - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 1 (optional). - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 2 (mandatory, even when configuration was modified in STOP state). Otherwise not required). - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 3 (mandatory). Call sequence for reconfiguration in RUN state: - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 1 (mandatory). - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 2 (mandatory). - ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 3 (mandatory). Explanations and recommendations concerning the rules If you do not list an IO device to be configured as optional IO device in the control data record or data block resp. this IO device does not form part of the configuration and does not take part in data exchange with the CPU. If you do not activate any optional IO device at all and work with the loaded configuration without reconfiguration, you still have to follow the proceeding described in the above section and transmit the control data record to the CPU. The control data record has the simple structure with the following tags: - Version (High Byte =1, Low Byte = 0) - Number of optional devices to be activated = 0 - Number of port interconnections that are set in the user program = 0 Following a STOP > RUN transition and following a POWER-OFF > POWER-ON transition, all IO devices are deactivated automatically. For this reason, no ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 1 is required for configuration control to function properly. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 248 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects If you use your project as a universally valid sample for programming the configuration control, we still recommend to perform the ReconfigIOSystem call with MODE 1 prior to any reconfiguration. This way, the sample can also be used for reconfigurations in RUN mode. Commissioning extensive I/O systems (more than 8 optional IO devices) while using IRT at the same time: To keep the startup times short when activating the optional IO devices (ReconfigIOSystem, mode 3), note the following tip: Check the device numbers of the IO devices. The device numbers should follow the topological interconnection starting at the IO controller in ascending order. The further an IO device is from the IO controller topologically, in other words the more IO devices there are between the IO controller and the IO device in question, the higher the device number should be. You set the device numbers in the "Ethernet addresses - PROFINET" area in the Inspector window with the PROFINET interface selected. Example of the assignment of device numbers with a linear topology: Figure 5-85 Example: Device numbers in a line topology The CPU processes the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" to transfer the control data record asynchronously. For this reason, you must call "ReconfigIOSystem" in a loop repeatedly when calling the instruction in the startup program until the output parameter "BUSY" or "DONE" indicate that the data record has been transferred. Tip: To program the loop, use the SCL programming language with the instruction REPEAT ... UNTIL. REPEAT "ReconfigIOSystem"(REQ := "start_config_ctrl", MODE := 1, LADDR := 64, CTRLREC := "myCTRLREC".ArrMachineConfig0, DONE => "conf_DONE", BUSY => "conf_BUSY", ERROR => "conf_ERROR", STATUS => "conf_STATUS"); UNTIL NOT "conf_BUSY" END_REPEAT; PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 249 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Additional information For information on the basic structure of the data record and on using the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" see the STEP 7 online help. See also Configuring IO devices as optional (Page 242) 5.9.2.4 Configuring flexible order of IO devices The following section shows how you can create the conditions required to change the order of IO devices in a PROFINET IO system. This function is also supported with optional IO devices. For simplicity, a maximum configuration without optional IO devices is shown below. Concept A typical application for a standard machine project consists of composing an entire plant from a set of various plant units which only differ with respect to the different arrangement of the units, e.g. in the case of transport systems. Each plant unit consists of a functional unit of mechanics (rails or conveyor belts) and electrics (power supply, IO device with IO modules, sensors, actuators, motors, PROFINET port for data exchange with central control ...). The following figure shows how, simply by exchanging two rail segments, a new transport system is created that is adapted with an upstream points to the local conditions. Figure 5-86 Example: Changing the arrangement of IO devices From the automation viewpoint, no change in the project is required for the flexible adjustment of the PROFINET configuration. The order of the IO devices is determined by the port interconnection. For each IO device, you define in the port properties the partner port and thus the neighboring device connected at the respective local port. If the partner port is to be defined by the user program, the option "Partner set by user program" is to be selected as partner port. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 250 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects The figure below shows the initial configuration of the transport system shown above, which is to permit the order of the connected IO devices to be changed via the user program. In the example, the order of IO-Device_2 and IO-Device_3 is to be controlled via the user program. Figure 5-87 Example configuration: Configuring flexible order of IO devices To determine how the partner port settings are to be selected, you must note for each device and each port of a device which partner can be interconnected. If the partner is always the same in the different configurations provided, you select the partner port for this partner. If the partners vary in the different configurations, you select "Setting partner by user program". For the example in the figure above, the following port settings result: Device Local port Partner port setting Explanation PLC_1 p1 p1 (IO device_1) Partner of PLC_1 at port 1 is IO device_1 (always) IO device_1 p1 p1 (PLC_1) Partner of IO device_1 at port 1 is PLC_1 (always) IO device_1 p2 Partner is set by user program Partner of IO device_1 at port 2 is either IO device_2 or IO device_3 => Setting partner by user program IO device_2 p1 Partner is set by user program Partner of IO device_2 at port 1 is either IO device_1 or IO device_3 => Setting partner by user program IO device_2 p2 Partner is set by user program Partner of IO device_2 at port 2 is either IO device_3 or IO device_4 => Setting partner by user program PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 251 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Device Local port Partner port setting Explanation IO device_3 p1 Partner is set by user program Partner of IO device_3 at port 1 is either IO device_2 or IO device_1 => Setting partner by user program IO device_3 p2 Partner is set by user program Partner of IO device_3 at port 2 is either IO device_4 or IO device_2 => Setting partner by user program IO device_4 p1 Partner is set by user program Partner of IO device_4 at port 1 is either IO device_3 or IO device_2 => Setting partner by user program IO device_4 p2 Any partner No partner planned at port 2 Requirement IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU 1515-2 PN as of firmware version 1.7 STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher The rules (Page 256) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project have been considered. Procedure To set the partner port for a program controlled interconnection, proceed as follows: 1. Select the PROFINET interface of the device (IO controller or IO device) whose port you want to set. 2. In the properties of the PROFINET interface, select the area "Port interconnection" (Extended options > Port [...] > Port interconnection). 3. From the drop-down list, select "Setting partner by user program" as partner port. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each port to be interconnected via the user program. See also Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the program (Page 253) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 252 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5.9.2.5 Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the program Requirements IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU 1516pro-2 PN as of firmware version 1.7 as an IO controller STEP 7 V13 SP1 At least one partner port was configured as "Partner set by user program". The rules (Page 256) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project have been considered. Procedure The proceedings corresponds to the proceeding for activating optional IO devices. Only the structure of the data record must be extended for the program-controlled assignment of the ports. The extension is described in the following sections. Example: Data record structure for the assignment of partner ports For the data record structure, you need the HW identifications of the ports. The data record is to be stored in a data block and to be transmitted to the PROFINET interface of the IO controller in the user program using the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". As the input parameter RECORD of the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" is of the VARIANT data type, you first have to create a data type for the data block. In the following sections, you find a description of the structure of the PLC data type as well as of the structure of the data block based on this type. Selecting derived configuration For the following selected configuration it is shown below what the data record must look like so that the IO devices are interconnected in the planned order by the user program. Figure 5-88 Example configuration: Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the user program This example is based on the flexible configuration from the previous section (Page 250) with the settings for the respective partner ports described there. The partner ports in the specific derived configuration have been defined so that it is possible to name the HW identifications of the ports involved. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 253 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects The following table only contains those devices whose ports can be defined by the user program. Only these devices are relevant for the data record structure. Device Local port Partner port setting IO device_1 p2 = Port 2 Partner is set by user HW identifier: 251 program Port 1 of IO device_3 IO device_2 p1 = Port 1 Partner is set by user HW identifier: 281 program Port 2 of IO device_3 IO device_2 p2 = Port 2 Port 1 of IO device_4 Partner is set by user HW identifier: 311 program Partner port of the selected configuration HW identifier: 261 HW identifier: 291 HW identifier: 321 Creating data block For the derived configuration, the structure of the data block "DB-IO-SYSTEM-PortInterconnections" is explained as an example. This data block is used when calling the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" at input parameter "CTRLREC". Instead of the absolute values for the hardware identifiers of the ports, the system constants of the hardware identifiers are used here. The data block is structured as follows: Line 2: Declaration of an Array of Word (only this data type is possible). Line 3: Version of the control data record: V1.0. Line 4: Number of optional IO devices: 0. Line 5: Number of specified port interconnections: 3. Line 6: Port interconnection 1, local port. Line 7: Port interconnection 1, partner port. Line 8: Port interconnection 2, local port. Line 9: Port interconnection 2, partner port Line 10: Port interconnection 3, local port. Line 11: Port interconnection 3, partner port. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 254 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Figure 5-89 Data block with data record for port interconnections Interconnection not listed in data block If the partner port was configured as "Setting partner by user program" in the port properties and this port is not listed in the data record or data block resp., then the CPU sets this port to the setting "any partner". If no data record is transmitted at all, the CPU sets this "any partner" setting for all program-controlled assignments. Additional information For information on the basic structure of the data record and on using the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" see the STEP 7 online help. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 255 Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects 5.9.2.6 System behavior and rules Below, you find a description of how an IO system whose configuration is controlled by the user program behaves in operation. In addition, rules and restrictions are listed here which must be considered when configuring the maximum structure of the configuration in a standard machine project. System behavior System diagnostics: If an optional IO device is deactivated, the IO device is displayed as "deactivated" from the system diagnostics viewpoint (online view or Online & Diagnostics). Topology view: Offline view: As configured. No interconnection is shown for ports with partner ports configured as "Setting partner by user program". Online view: Ports and interconnections with deactivated IO devices are shown in a different shade of green as error-free ports and interconnections of activated IO devices. Representation in the Web server: The names of devices are shown as configured (Properties > General > Project information). The assigned PROFINET device name for the CPU is shown on the "Communication" website, at the "Parameter" tab. IP address parameters: Currently assigned IP address parameters are shown on the site "Module state". Topology: The current topology resulting from any customizations via user program is shown in the Web server. IO devices configured as optional are shown as "deactivated" IO devices in the Web server. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 256 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.9 Standard machine projects Rules The rules for standard machine projects as described here (Page 230) apply. For configuration-controlled IO systems, the following additional rules apply: When configuring MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol): The ports configured as ring ports must not be interlinked via user program. However, devices with ring ports (devices of an MRP domain) can be optional IO devices. When configuring docking stations (= IO devices changing during operation): Neither the docking station nor the first IO device of a docking unit may be optional IO devices. The ports of the docking units must not be interlinked via user program. When configuring IRT: The order of synchronized IO devices ("IRT devices") must be defined by the configuration and must not be changed in the different variants of a standard machine. For this reason, the ports of the IRT devices must not be interlinked via user program. However, you have the possibility to configure IRT devices primarily as optional IO devices. You also have the option to interconnect, by user program, RT devices that are, for example, separated from this line by a switchport (see figure). Figure 5-90 Example: Configuration control for IO systems with separated RT device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 257 Functions 5.10 Saving energy with PROFIenergy 5.10 Saving energy with PROFIenergy Saving energy with PROFIenergy PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and with full coordination during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type. Through this, the process should only be provided with the energy that is absolutely required. The majority of the energy is saved by the process; the PROFINET device itself only contributes a few watts of savings potential. Figure 5-91 Energy savings during pauses with PROFIenergy Basic information In order to use the PROFIenergy functionality, the existing IO controller has to be "upgraded" to a so-called "PROFIenergy controller" by means of a function block in the PROFINET IO system and at least one PROFIenergy-capable IO device ("PROFIenergy device") has to exist. The PROFIenergy commands (for example to start or end a pause) are sent by the "PROFIenergy controller" to the individual "PROFIenergy devices". Each "PROFIenergy device" decides individually how it responds to the PROFIenergy command (response is device- and manufacturer-specific). No additional hardware is needed; the PROFIenergy commands are directly interpreted by the PROFINET devices. Principle of operation At the beginning and end of pauses, the system manager enables or disables the pause function of the system; then the IO controller sends the PROFIenergy command "Start_Pause"/"End_Pause" to the PROFINET devices. The device interprets the contents of the PROFIenergy command and switches off or back on. Through other PROFIenergy functions, device information can be accessed during pauses. The user can use this information in order to optimally time the transfer of the "Start_Pause"/"End_Pause" command. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 258 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.10 Saving energy with PROFIenergy PROFIenergy instructions for IO controllers Two instructions are needed for controlling and monitoring the PROFIenergy functions. The instruction PE_START_END allows you to easily activate and deactivate the idle state of PROFINET devices. This occurs by means of an incoming edge or outgoing edge. The instruction PE_START_END provides a simple interface for implementing the PROFIenergy commands Start_Pause and End_Pause. The instruction PE_CMD allows you to transmit all PROFIenergy commands, including Start_Pause and End_Pause. The other commands can be used, for example, to query the current status of the PROFINET device or the behavior during the pauses. The instruction PE_CMD is a convenient means for handling all PROFIenergy functions. PROFIenergy instruction for I-devices The instruction PE_I_DEV allows you to also implement PROFIenergy on I-devices. The instruction receives PROFIenergy commands on the I-device and forwards these to the user program for execution. After executing the command, the user program calls the PE_I_DEV instruction again in order to send the acknowledgment to the IO controller. For these replies, each command offers you a helper instruction that supplies the reply data to the instruction. The instructions can be found in the "Instructions" task card of the STEP 7 program editor. Configuration and programming The functions can be comfortably integrated into existing systems. No configuration is required for the use of PROFIenergy. However, amendments to the user program are required: Before the "Start_Pause" command, you must ensure that your system is brought into a condition that is suitable for a pause. A sequential control system for the beginning of the pause of the devices and for the punctual restarting of the device on break must be programmed (depending on the required startup times that the respective PROFINET device demands). The error messages of the PE_CMD instruction must be evaluated, and the required reaction must be programmed (for example, cancellation or continuation of further commands on lower-level PROFINET devices). Note In the case of the ET 200S distributed I/O system, you have to configure the application of PROFIenergy in STEP 7. You configure PROFIenergy by selecting the "Use energy saving for this potential group" check box in the PM-E DC24V/8A RO power module. If you want to use PROFIenergy for an I-device, you have to configure this in STEP 7. Information about configuring PROFIenergy for an I-device is available in the section Configuring PROFIenergy with I-devices (Page 141). PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 259 Functions 5.11 Docking systems Application examples SIMATIC S7 library for simple configuration of PROFIenergy. The application example is available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478388). Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy. The application example is available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/96837137). Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 PROFIenergy with I-device The application example is available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454). 5.11 Docking systems Using alternating IO devices ("alternating partners") during operation in a docking station The following figure shows an automation cell with a docking station and several docking units. Figure 5-92 Alternating IO devices (partner ports) in a docking system PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 260 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.11 Docking systems Area of application for alternating IO devices during operation You can use the PROFINET function "Alternating IO devices during operation" ("alternating partners"), for the tool changeover for robots, for example. Typical tools include: Welding guns Positioning tools for manufacturing parts Requirements for interconnecting alternating partner ports during operation You can interconnect IO devices with alternating partner ports during operation in the following situations: The alternating IO device (docking unit) has no IRT communication configured. The PROFINET interface is connected to the Ethernet subnet. The PROFINET devices support topology configuration. The IO controller, the alternating IO devices (docking unit) and the switch (docking station) on which the alternating IO devices are to be operated support this feature. Note Unique IP address Each docking unit of a docking system must be configured with a unique IP address in a shared project and operated on the same IO controller as all other docking units of the system. Applicative conditions The following points should be observed when implementing a docking system with alternating IO devices during operation: The IO devices of all docking units must be deactivated by default in the configuration. At any time, only one docking unit can be active, i.e., only the IO devices of one docking unit can be activated. All IO devices of other docking units must be deactivated or become deactivated before the IO devices of a docking unit can be activated. You activate an IO device with the "D_ACT_DP" instruction. A physical connection to this docking unit and its IO devices must be created in order to activate a docking unit. The IO devices are then switched on (power on). At the same time, all the IO devices of this docking unit must be activated in the user program with the "D_ACT_DP" instruction. Note Automatic deactivation in "Startup" mode of the CPU If the CPU is in "Startup" mode, IO devices of a docking system that alternate during operation are deactivated automatically. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 261 Functions 5.11 Docking systems After the feedback "IO device activated", you can access the IO device by means of direct I/O access. Call the "D_ACT_DP" instruction to activate and deactivate the IO device as close as possible to the start of the OB 1 cycle. Note Number of alternating IO devices during operation ("alternating partner port") - number of docking units If you wish to achieve the shortest possible tool changeover times, you must observe the following points that are dependent on the CPU or the CP that is being used: * Only those IO devices that have been configured with the PROFINET function "Prioritized startup" can start up in an optimized fashion. The number of IO devices with configuration for this PROFINET function is restricted. * Only a limited number of IO devices can be activated at the same time. This number depends on the available "D_ACT_DP" resources. A docking unit should not contain more than the corresponding number of IO devices. If more IO devices are operated in a docking unit, the IO devices must be activated one after the other, which takes correspondingly longer. Example: An S7-CPU 1516-3 PN/DP can operate a maximum of 32 IO devices with prioritized startup and can simultaneously activate 8 IO devices by means of "D_ACT_DP". Therefore, for a scheduled optimum use, a docking unit should include no more than 8 IO devices and no more than 32 IO devices should be used in all the alternating docking units. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 262 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.11 Docking systems 5.11.1 Configuring docking systems Configuring docking systems The possible connections to the individual IO devices must be configured in STEP 7. Procedure in STEP 7 1. Configure your system as usual, but do not yet configure the topological interconnections of the individual PROFINET devices. 2. Navigate to the "Topology view" tab. 3. Select the port which you want to operate with alternating partners during operation. 4. Navigate to the "Properties" tab of the inspector window and select "Port interconnection" in the area navigation. 5. Under "Partner port", select the "Alternative partners" option. 6. Select the desired partner ports: To do this, click " Advanced options > Interface options". 4. Select the "Prioritized startup" check box. Figure 5-96 Configuring prioritized startup in STEP 7 5. Download the configuration to the IO controller. Note Prioritized startup after a startup for the first time A prioritized startup of the IO device is always available to you after the first configuration of this IO device in the very first startup of the PROFINET IO system. Even in the case of spare parts or a reset to factory settings, the first startup is a standard startup for the respective configured IO devices. Note Number of IO devices (distributed I/O) with prioritized startup You can only start up a maximum number of IO devices with the "Prioritized startup" PROFINET functionality within one PROFINET IO system. This maximum number depends on the IO controller used. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 269 Functions 5.12 Accelerating startup 5.12.4 Optimize the port settings Optimizing port settings on the IO device and IO controller The transfer medium and the duplex option are checked during startup of the IO device in the case of copper cabling. These checks require time, but with specific presets of these options you can save the time the check requires. Make certain that the settings made correspond to the actual conditions (using the correct cables). Optimizing port settings for accelerated startup To optimize port settings for accelerated startup, follow these steps: 1. Select the ports of the IO controller or the partner port of the corresponding IO device. 2. Navigate to "Port options > Connection" in the Inspector window. Select the setting "TP 100 Mbps full duplex" under "Transmission rate/duplex" 3. Clear the "Enable autonegotiation" check box. Figure 5-97 Optimizing port settings for accelerated startup in STEP 7 These settings are automatically applied during topology configuration for the partner port. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 270 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Functions 5.12 Accelerating startup 5.12.5 Optimize the cabling of the ports Requirements You have made the following settings for the port in question to reduce the startup time of the IO device: Fixed transmission rate Autonegotiation deactivated The time for negotiating the transmission rate during startup is saved. If you have disabled autonegotiation, you must observe the cabling rules. Properties of ports PROFINET devices have the following two types of ports: Type of port PROFINET devices Switch port with crossed pin assignment For IO devices: Port 2 For S7-CPUs with two ports: Ports 1 and 2 Terminal device port with normal pin assignment For IO devices: Port 1 For S7-CPUs with one port: Port 1 Crossed pin assignment means that the pin assignment for the ports for sending and receiving between the respective PROFINET devices is inverted internally. Validity of the cabling rules The cabling rules described in the following paragraph apply exclusively for the situation in which you have specified a fixed port setting in STEP 7. Rules for cabling You can connect several IO devices in series using patch cables. To do this, connect port 2 of the IO device (distributed I/O) with port 1 of the next IO device. The following graphic provides an example with two IO devices. Figure 5-98 Optimized cabling for accelerated startup PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 271 Functions 5.12 Accelerating startup 5.12.6 Measures in the user program Introduction You can make certain changes in the user program to accelerate the startup for IO devices of docking systems that alternate during operation. Making the required changes to the user program To accelerate the startup by making changes to the user program, follow these steps: 1. Call the "D_ACT_DP" instruction to activate and deactivate the IO device at the start of the OB 1 cycle. If the IO device is replaced, the device that is no longer required must be deactivated and the new device must be activated. 2. If you control the "Power ON" command of the IO devices via the application, then start the activation of the IO devices via the corresponding call of the "D_ACT_DP" instruction as near to the same time as possible. The IO device has to be physically connected for this. 3. You access the IO device using direct access commands after the "D_ACT_DP" instruction has provided the feedback "IO device activated". PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 272 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6 Introduction The same basic rules apply to PROFINET IO communication with the redundant S7-1500R/H as with the S7-1500 automation system. The redundant S7-1500R/H system exchanges IO data cyclically with the IO devices. When configuring PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system, you must observe a few specifics, e.g. special configuration requirements. The redundant S7-1500R/H system supports a limited scope of PROFINET functions. Limitations Real-time communication: - RT with a fixed send clock of 1 ms - No IRT - No MRPD redundancy method - No PROFINET with performance upgrade No isochronous mode No operation as I-device No access to shared devices No support of docking systems No support of series machine projects Port options (only for PROFINET interface X1): - No port disabling possible - No configuring of boundaries possible Functionality as IO controller: - No prioritized startup - No enabling/disabling of IO devices - No support of series machine projects - No nested IO systems (e.g. via IE/PB Link) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 273 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system PROFINET interface X2 does not support IO functionality. No diagnostics using the web server No support of the following OBs: - OB 55 "Status interrupt OB" - OB 56 "Update interrupt OB" - OB 57 "OB for vendor or profile-specific interrupt" 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system Introduction The redundant S7-1500R/H system uses media redundancy (MRP) in the PROFINET ring. The IO devices must support system redundancy S2 for operation in a redundant S71500R/H system. Media redundancy in the redundant S7-1500R/H system The two CPUs of the redundant system must be located in a PROFINET ring that uses the media redundancy method MRP. All PROFINET devices in the PROFINET ring are connected to the S7-1500R/H in a media-redundant manner. If the PROFINET ring is interrupted, reconfiguration may occur. After a short reconfiguration time, the PROFINET devices can be accessed again via an alternative path. H-Sync Forwarding H-Sync Forwarding enables a PROFINET device with MRP to forward synchronization data (synchronization frames) only within the PROFINET ring. Through H-Sync Forwarding, the synchronization data is also forwarded during reconfiguration of the PROFINET ring. This reduces the cycle time or makes the CPU switchover time less dependent on the re-configuration time of the PROFINET ring. H-Sync Forwarding is not relevant for redundant S7-1500H systems. H-Sync Forwarding is recommended for PROFINET devices that you use in the PROFINET ring of redundant S7-1500R systems. Note If you use PROFINET devices that do not support H-Sync Forwarding in S7-1500R, additional cycle time increases may occur in system state RUN-Redundant. If the cyclic program exceeds the cycle monitoring time, the timeout OB (OB 80) may be started. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 274 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system System redundancy S2 An IO device with system redundancy S2 supports system redundancy ARs. The system redundancy ARs can be present in duplicate (redundantly). Thus, an IO device supports ARs of 2 IO controllers simultaneously (with respect to the same modules). A system redundancy AR can be either a primary AR or a backup AR. There can be only one primary AR at a time for an IO device. The other AR, if present, must be a backup AR. An IO device activates the data of the primary AR at the outputs. The data of the backup AR is only saved. Behavior in system state RUN-Redundant: Both CPUs are IO controllers. The PROFINET communication runs simultaneously on both system redundancy ARs, in each case between one of the CPUs (IO controllers) and the IO device. If the primary CPU now fails, the backup CPU becomes the primary CPU and, at the same time, the backup AR changes over to primary AR. The data of this AR becomes active at the outputs. Figure 6-1 Behavior of IO device with system redundancy S2 in system state RUN-Redundant and following failure of the primary CPU Behavior in system state RUN-Solo: Only the primary CPU is an IO controller. The PROFINET communication runs on the primary AR between the primary CPU (IO controller) and the IO device. There is no AR between the backup CPU and the IO device. You configure system redundancy S2 for an IO device in STEP 7 by assigning the IO device to both CPUs of the redundant S7-1500R/H system. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 275 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system Configuration requirements for a ring topology with the redundant S7-1500R system The two CPUs have the media redundancy role "Manager (auto)". All other devices in the PROFINET ring have the media redundancy role "Client". All IO devices that are assigned to the redundant S7-1500R/H system support system redundancy S2. No other redundant S7-1500R/H system is present in the PROFINET ring. Port interconnection: - The two CPUs are directly interconnected via one of the two ports of PROFINET interface X1. No other devices of the ring are located in between. - The two CPUs can be indirectly interconnected via the other two ports. The other devices of the ring are located in between. See the examples below. Max. number of IO devices: 64 Number of PROFINET devices (switches, S7-1500R/H CPUs, S7-1500 CPUs (V2.6 or higher) and HMI devices) in the PROFINET ring: - max. 50 (recommendation: max. 16) Note Recommendation: The number of devices in the PROFINET ring influences the availability of the S7-1500R system. For this reason, operate a maximum of 16 PROFINET devices (including R-CPUs) in the PROFINET ring. If you operate significantly more devices in the PROFINET ring, the availability of the IO devices and R-CPUs is reduced. The technical specifications in the documentation relate to the case in which the maximum recommended number of 16 PROFINET devices are operated in the ring in S7-1500R Configuration requirements for a ring topology with the redundant S7-1500H system The two CPUs have the media redundancy role "Manager (auto)". All other devices in the PROFINET ring have the media redundancy role "Client". All IO devices that are assigned to the redundant S7-1500R/H system support system redundancy S2. No other redundant S7-1500R/H system is present in the PROFINET ring. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 276 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system PROFINET IO configurations with the redundant S7-1500R/H system The following figures show you examples of PROFINET IO configurations with the redundant S7-1500R/H system. All the figures use the following abbreviations for ARs: SR-AR: System redundancy AR between an IO device (S2) and one of the CPUs of the redundant S7-1500R/H system AR: "normal" AR between an IO device (S1) and the associated IO controller All configurations use the CPU 1515R as an example. The PROFINET configurations shown also work with the CPU 1513R and CPU 1517H. IO devices with system redundancy S2 in the PROFINET ring The redundant S7-1500R system consists of the two CPUs 1515R and two IO devices in the PROFINET ring. The two IO devices are connected in a system-redundant and mediaredundant manner. Figure 6-2 Example of a redundant S7-1500R system with two IO devices in the PROFINET ring PROFINET devices downstream of a switch To connect additional PROFINET devices to the PROFINET ring, use a switch. For the redundant S7-1500R system, ensure that a switch in the PROFINET ring supports MRP. You connect the following devices to the PROFINET ring with a switch. IO devices with system redundancy S2 PROFINET devices without system redundancy S2, e.g. HMI devices PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 277 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system The following figure shows a redundant S7-1500R system with connected PROFINET devices downstream of a switch. IO device 1 (S2) IO device 1 is located in the PROFINET ring and is connected to the redundant S7-1500R/H system in a system-redundant and media-redundant manner. Switch The switch is located in the PROFINET ring. The switch supports the media redundancy protocol MRP. IO device 2 (S2) IO device 2 is connected to the redundant S7-1500R/H system via the switch. IO device 2 is connected to the redundant S7-1500R/H system in a system-redundant manner. HMI device The HMI device is connected to the redundant S7-1500R/H system via the switch. Figure 6-3 PROFINET devices downstream of a switch PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 278 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system Additional PROFINET IO system in the configuration The configuration can also contain additional IO controllers with their own IO devices. To ensure that enough bandwidth is available in the PROFINET ring for the redundant S7-1500R/H system, place additional IO controllers with their I/O downstream of a switch. When determining the maximum number of IO devices inside and outside the PROFINET ring, the redundant system does not detect the S7-1500 CPUs and their IO devices. If you use S7-1500 CPUs, you must check the maximum number yourself. The following figure shows a redundant S7-1515R system. An additional PROFINET IO system with a CPU 1516 as IO controller is located downstream of the switch. The IO controller is assigned its own IO device (S1). Figure 6-4 Example of a redundant S7-1500R system with an additional PROFINET IO system Because the redundant S7-1500R/H system does not support I-devices, direct cyclic IO data exchange with the other IO controller is not possible. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 279 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system Connection to another PROFINET IO system via the PN/PN coupler The redundant S7-1500R/H system cyclically exchanges IO data with another PROFINET IO system via a PN/PN coupler. In the following figure, the PN/PN coupler connects a redundant S7-1515R system to another PROFINET IO system. The left side of the PN/PN coupler is assigned to the redundant S7-1515R system. The left side of the PN/PN coupler is system-redundant and media-redundant. The right side of the PN/PN coupler is assigned to the CPU 1516 (IO controller). The PROFINET IO system of the CPU 1516 has no redundancy in this example. Figure 6-5 Configuration with the PN/PN coupler with one-sided system redundancy (S2/S1) PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 280 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.1 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system Connection to an additional redundant S7-1500R/H system via the PN/PN coupler Two redundant S7-1500R/H systems cyclically exchange IO data via the PN/PN coupler. In the following figure, the PN/PN coupler connects two redundant S7-1515R systems to each other. Each of the two PN/PN coupler sides are assigned to a redundant S7-1515R system. Each of the two sides of the PN/PN coupler are connected to the respective redundant S7-1515R system in a system-redundant and media-redundant manner. Figure 6-6 Configuration with the PN/PN coupler with two-sided system redundancy (S2/S2) Reference You can find more information on the PN/PN coupler in the PN/PN Coupler (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/44319532) manual. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 281 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.2 Configuring an IO device with system redundancy S2 in the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.2 Configuring an IO device with system redundancy S2 in the redundant S7-1500R/H system Requirements Redundant S7-1500R/H system IO device supports system redundancy S2, e.g. IM 155-6 PN HF as of firmware version V4.2 Procedure To assign an IO device with system redundancy S2 to the redundant S7-1500R/H system, follow these steps: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the PROFINET interface of the IO device. 2. Using drag-and-drop, draw a line between the PROFINET interface of the IO device and the PROFINET interface X1 of the left CPU. Figure 6-7 Assigning IO device to the left CPU The IO device is assigned to the left CPU. 3. Using drag-and-drop, draw a line between the PROFINET interface of the IO device and the PROFINET interface X1 of the right CPU. Figure 6-8 Assigning IO device to the right CPU Result: The IO device is connected to the redundant S7-1500R/H system in a systemredundant manner. Figure 6-9 IO device assigned in a system-redundant manner PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 282 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.3 Configuring media redundancy (MRP) for a configuration with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.3 Configuring media redundancy (MRP) for a configuration with the redundant S7-1500R/H system Requirements Redundant S7-1500R/H system All devices in the ring support the media redundancy protocol MRP. IO devices are assigned to the redundant S7-1500R/H system. Figure 6-10 Example configuration: Configuring MRP for S7-1500R/H MRP role of the CPUs of the redundant S7-1500R/H system As soon as you create a redundant S7-1500R/H system in STEP 7, STEP 7 automatically assigns the MRP role "Manager (auto)" to the PROFINET interfaces X1 of both CPUs. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 283 PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system 6.3 Configuring media redundancy (MRP) for a configuration with the redundant S7-1500R/H system Defining the MRP role for additional devices of the ring in STEP 7 To specify the media redundancy for additional devices in the ring, follow these steps: 1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the PROFINET interface X1 of one of the two CPUs of the redundant S7-1500R/H system. 2. In the Inspector window navigate to "Properties" > "General" > "Advanced options" > "Media redundancy". 3. Click the "Domain settings" button. Figure 6-11 S7-1500R/H: MRP role "Manager (auto)" In the Inspector window, STEP 7 displays the properties of the MRP domain in which the PROFINET interface X1 of the CPU is located. 4. In the "MRP role" column of the "Devices" table, assign the MRP role "Client" to all the other devices of the ring. Figure 6-12 S7-1500R/H: Assigning MRP roles for ring devices Parameter assignment for devices outside the STEP 7 project Set the MRP role "Client" for the devices of the ring that are not located in STEP 7. Example: For a switch, set the MRP role "Client" via the web interface of the switch. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 284 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary API API (Application Process Identifier) is a parameter, the value of which specifies the IO data processing process (application). The PROFINET standard IEC 61158 assigns profiles to specific APIs (PROFIdrive, PROFIsave), which are defined by the PROFINET user organization. The standard API is 0. Application An application is a program that runs directly on the MS-DOS/Windows operating system. An application on the PG is STEP 7, for example. AR The AR (Application Relation) comprises all the communication relationships between IO controller and IO device (e.g. IO data, data records, interrupts). AR is also an addressing level for diagnostic data records. Asset An asset is a component of a machine or plant This can be either hardware or software/firmware. Automation system Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process chains of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions according to the automation task. Backplane bus The backplane bus is a serial data bus for module intercommunication and the distribution of the necessary power to the modules. Bus connectors interconnect the modules. Backup AR The backup AR is the system redundancy AR between an IO device with system redundancy S2 and the backup CPU of the redundant S7-1500R/H system. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 285 Glossary Backup CPU If the R/H system is in RUN-Redundant system state, the primary CPU controls the process. The backup CPU synchronously executes the user program and can take over the process control on failure of the primary CPU. Bus A bus is a transfer medium that interconnects several devices. Data transmission can be performed electrically or via optical fibers, either in series or in parallel. Communications Cycle and Reservation of Transmission Bandwidth PROFINET IO is a scalable real-time communication system based on the Layer 2 protocol for Fast Ethernet. With the RT transmission method, two real-time-support performance levels are available for time-critical process data and IRT for high-accuracy and also isochronous processes . Communications processor Communication processors are modules used for point-to-point and bus connections. Configuring Selecting and putting together individual components of an automation system or installing necessary software and adapting it for a specific application (for example, by configuring the modules). Consistent data Data which belongs together in terms of content and must not be separated is known as consistent data. For example, the values of analog modules must always be handled as a whole, that is, the value of an analog module must not be corrupted as a result of reading out at two different points in time. CP Communications processor CPU Central Processing Unit - Central module of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic unit, memory, operating system and interface for programming device. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 286 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary DCP DCP (Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol). Enables the assignment of device parameters (for example, the IP address) using manufacturer-specific configuration/programming tools. Default router The default router is used when data has to be forwarded via TCP/IP to a partner located outside the local network. Determinism Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable (deterministic) manner. Device In the PROFINET environment, "device" is the generic term for: Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC) Distributed I/O systems Field devices (for example, PLC, PC, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) Active network components (for example, switches, routers) Gateways to PROFIBUS, AS interface or other fieldbus systems Device name (PROFINET device name) In the PROFINET IO environment, the device name is a unique identifier for the PROFINET IO interface of a device. Diagnostics System diagnostics Diagnostics buffer The diagnostics buffer represents a backup memory in the CPU, used to store diagnostics events in their order of occurrence. Diagnostics error interrupt Modules capable of diagnostics operations report detected system errors to the CPU by means of diagnostics interrupts. See also CPU PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 287 Glossary DP master A master which behaves in accordance with EN 50170, Part 3, is known as a DP master. See also Master DP slave A slave operated on PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS DP protocol and in accordance with EN 50170, Part 3 is referred to as DP slave. See also Slave DPV1 The designation DPV1 refers to the functional extension of acyclic services (to include new interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1 functionality is integrated in IEC 61158/EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Duplex Half duplex: One channel is available for alternating exchange of information. Full duplex: Two channels are available for simultaneous exchange of information in both directions. Ethernet Ethernet is an international standard technology for local area networks (LAN) based on frames. It defines types of cables and signaling for the physical layer and packet formats and protocols for media access control. GSD file As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET device that are necessary for its configuration in XML format. H-Sync Forwarding H-Sync Forwarding enables a PROFINET device with MRP to forward synchronization data (synchronization frames) only within the PROFINET ring. Through H-Sync Forwarding, the synchronization data is also forwarded during reconfiguration of the PROFINET ring. This reduces the cycle time utilization. H-Sync Forwarding is recommended for PROFINET devices that you use in the PROFINET ring of redundant S7-1500R systems. H-Sync Forwarding is not relevant for redundant S7-1500H systems. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 288 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary I-device The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality of a CPU facilitates data exchange with an IO controller, for example, as intelligent preprocessing unit of sub-processes. In its role as an IO device, the I-device is accordingly integrated into a "higher-level" IO controller. Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet is a guideline for installing an Ethernet in an industrial environment. The biggest difference from standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and noise immunity of the individual components. Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the operating system of an S7-CPU to automatically call an assigned organization block (interrupt OB) in which the user can program the desired reaction. Interrupt, diagnostics Diagnostics error interrupt IP address To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a device on Industrial Ethernet, this device also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. Example: An IPv4 address consists of 4 decimal numbers with the value range 0 to 255. The decimal numbers are separated by periods. The IP address is made up of the following components: Address of the network Address of the device (generally called the host or network node). IRT IRT is a synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth is available in the send cycle for IRT data. The reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can be transferred at reserved synchronized intervals, without being influenced also by higher other network loads (such as TCP/IP communication, or additional real-time communication). LAN Local Area Network - a local network to which multiple computers within a company are connected. The LAN therefore has a limited geographical span and is only available to the company or institution. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 289 Glossary Line depth Designates the number of external switches or integrated switches interconnected in series. MAC address Worldwide unique device identification for all Ethernet devices. It is assigned by the manufacturer and has a 3-byte vendor ID and 3-byte device ID as a consecutive number. Every PROFINET device is assigned a worldwide unique device identifier at the factory. This 6-byte long device identifier is the MAC address. Maintenance Required / Maintenance Demanded A "Maintenance required" system message can be defined for different wear parameters and an inspection of a component can be recommended, for example, when a certain number of operating hours has elapsed. The "Maintenance demanded" alarm is sent when the part involved needs to be replaced within a foreseeable period. (Example printer: The maintenance demanded alarm is sent when the ink/printer cartridges have to be replaced immediately.) Master Higher-level, active participant in the communication/on a PROFIBUS subnet. It has rights to access the bus (token), sends data and requests it. Media redundancy The so-called Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) enables the configuration of redundant networks. Redundant transmission links (ring topology) ensure that an alternating communication path is made available if a transmission link fails. The PROFINET devices that are a part of this redundant network form an MRP domain. Micro Memory Card (MMC) Micro Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs. Their only difference to the SIMATIC memory card is the smaller size. S7-1500 and ET 200SP-CPUs use SIMATIC memory cards. MPI The multipoint interface (Multi Point Interface,MPI) represents the programming device interface of SIMATIC S7. It enables multiple devices (programming devices, text-based displays, OPs) to be operated simultaneously by one or more CPUs. Each device is identified by its unique (MPI) address. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 290 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary MRPD MRPD (Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of Frames) based on IRT and MRP. To realize media redundancy with short update times, the PROFINET devices participating in the ring send their data in both directions. The devices receive this data at both ring ports so that there is no reconfiguration time. Network A network consists of one or more interconnected subnets with any number of devices. Several networks can exist alongside each other. OB Organization block OPC OPC (OLE for Process Control) refers to a standard interface for communication in automation technology. Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of a single CPU at a specific time. The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems feature the STOP, STARTUP and RUN operating states. The primary CPU of the S7-1500R/H redundant system has the operating states STOP, STARTUP, RUN, RUN-Syncup and RUN-Redundant. The backup CPU has the operating states STOP, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. Organization block Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the CPU operating system and the user program. The order in which the user program is executed is defined in the organization blocks. Parameter 1. Tag of a STEP 7 code block: 2. Tag used to set one or several characteristics of a module In delivery state, every module has practical basic settings, which can be modified by configuration in STEP 7. There are static and dynamic parameters PG Programming device PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 291 Glossary PLC Programmable logic controller Primary AR The primary AR is the system redundancy AR between an IO device with system redundancy S2 and the primary CPU of the redundant S7-1500R/H system. Primary CPU If at least one R/H CPU is in RUN state, the primary CPU is the controlling CPU. The primary CPU controls the process (productive data). The user program is executed identically in the primary CPU and the backup CPU. Prioritized startup Prioritized startup denotes the PROFINET functionality for accelerating the startup of IO devices operated on a PROFINET IO system with RT and IRT communication. It reduces the time that the correspondingly configured IO devices require in order to return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases: After the power supply has returned After a station has returned After activation of IO devices Process image (I/O) The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the start of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the process image output as a signal state to the output modules. The CPU then transfers the signal states of the input modules to the process image of the inputs. Then the CPU executes the user program. PROFIBUS Process Field Bus - European Fieldbus standard. PROFIBUS device A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical (RS485) or optical (polymer optical fiber, POF) interface. PROFIBUS DP A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170. DP stands for distributed I/O (fast, real-time capable, cyclic data exchange). From the perspective of the user program, the distributed I/Os are addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized I/Os. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 292 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary PROFIBUS Users Organization Technical committee dedicated to the definition and development of the PROFIBUS and PROFINETstandard. Additional information can be found on the Internet (Page ). PROFIenergy Function for energy saving in the process, for example, during pause times by briefly switching off the entire system via standardized PROFIenergy commands. PROFINET Open component-based industrial communication system based on Ethernet for distributed automation systems. Communication technology promoted by the PROFIBUS Users Organization. PROFINET device A PROFINET device always has a PROFINET interface (electrical, optical, wireless). A lot of devices also have a PROFIBUS DP interface to connect PROFIBUS devices. PROFINET IO Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the scope of PROFINET. PROFINET IO is based on switched Ethernet with full-duplex operation and a bandwidth of 100 Mbps. PROFINET IO Controller Device used to address the connected IO devices. This means that the IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the controller on which the automation program runs. PROFINET IO Device A distributed field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers (e.g. remote IO, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches) PROFINET IO System PROFINET IO controller with assigned PROFINET IO devices. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 293 Glossary Programmable logic controller Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose function is stored as a program in the control unit. The structure and wiring of the device does not therefore depend on the controller's function. A programmable logic controller is structured like a computer. It consists of a CPU with memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The IOs and the programming language are oriented to the requirements of the control technology. Programming device Programming devices are essentially compact and portable PCs which are suitable for industrial applications. They are identified by a special hardware and software configuration for programmable logic controllers. Proxy The PROFINET device with proxy functionality is the substitute for a PROFIBUS device on Ethernet. The proxy functionality allows a PROFIBUS device to communicate not only with its master but also with all devices on PROFINET. With PROFINET, existing PROFIBUS systems can be integrated into the PROFINET communication with the aid of an IE/PB link, for example. The IE/PB Link PN IO then handles communication via PROFINET on behalf of the PROFIBUS components. In this way, you can link both DPV0 and DPV1 slaves to PROFINET. Real-time Real-time means that a system processes external events within a defined time. Real-time communication Group error for RT and IRT. PROFINET uses its own real-time channel (RT) rather than TCP/IP for communication of time-critical IO user data. Redundant systems Redundant systems are characterized by the fact that important automation components are present multiple times (redundantly). Process control is maintained if a redundant component fails. Router A router interconnects two subnets. A router works in a similar way to a switch. With a router, however, you can also specify which communication devices may communicate via the router and which may not. The communication devices on various sides of a router can only communicate with one another if you have explicitly enabled communication between these devices via the router. Real-time data cannot be exchanged beyond subnet boundaries. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 294 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary RT PROFINET IO with Real Time communication (RT) is the optimal transmission method for time-critical applications in factory automation. PROFINET IO frames are prioritized over standard frames in accordance with IEEE802.1Q. This ensures the required determinism in the automation technology. Security Generic term for all the measures taken to protect against Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized access to data Loss of integrity due to manipulation of data Loss of availability due to the destruction of data Send clock Period between two consecutive intervals for IRT or RT communication. The send clock is the shortest possible transmit interval for exchanging data. SIMATIC The term denotes Siemens AG products and systems for industrial automation. SIMATIC NET Siemens Industrial Communication division for Networks and Network Components. SIMATIC PC Station A "PC station" is a PC with communication modules and software components within a SIMATIC automation solution. SIMATIC Memory Card (SMC) Micro Memory Card (MMC) Slave A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master. See also DP slave PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 295 Glossary SNMP The network management protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) uses the wireless UDP transport protocol. It consists of two network components, similar to the client/server model. The SNMP manager monitors the network nodes and the SNMP agents collect the various network-specific information in the individual network nodes and stores it in a structured form in the MIB (Management Information Base). This information allows a network management system to run detailed network diagnostics. STEP 7 STEP 7 is an engineering system and contains programming software for the creation of user programs for SIMATIC S7 controllers. Subnet All the devices interconnected by switches are nodes of the same network or subnet. All the devices in a subnet can communicate directly with each other. All devices in the same subnet have the same subnet mask. A subnet is physically restricted by a router. Subnet mask The bits set in the subnet mask decide the part of the IP address that contains the address of the network. In general, the following applies: The network address is obtained from the AND operation of the IP address and subnet mask. The device address is obtained from the AND NOT operation of the IP address and subnet mask. Switch Network components used to connect several terminal devices or network segments in a local network (LAN). Sync domain All PROFINET devices to be synchronized with IRT via PROFINET IO must belong to a sync domain. The sync domain consists of exactly one sync master and at least one sync slave. An IO controller or switch generally handles the role of the sync master. Non-synchronized PROFINET devices are not part of a sync domain. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 296 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Glossary System diagnostics System diagnostics refers to the detection, evaluation, and signaling of errors that occur within the automation system, for example, programming errors or module failures. System errors can be indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7. System redundancy AR In a redundant system, an IO device with system redundancy S2 has a system redundancy AR with each of the two CPUs (IO controllers). System states The system states of the redundant S7-1500R/H system result from the operating states of the primary and backup CPUs. The concept of the system state is used to obtain a simplified expression that characterizes the simultaneously occurring operating states of the two CPUs. The following system states are available for the redundant S7-1500R/H system: STOP, STARTUP, RUN-Solo, SYNCUP and RUN-Redundant. TCP/IP The Ethernet itself is only a transport system for data - similar to a highway, which is a transport system for people and goods. The actual data transport is performed by so-called protocols - similar to cars and trucks, which transport people and goods on the highway. The two basic protocols TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol) TCP/IP for short - perform the following tasks: 1. The data is broken down into packets at the sender. 2. The packets are transported over the Ethernet to the correct recipient. 3. At the recipient, the packets are reassembled in the correct order. 4. Corrupt packets continue to be sent until they are received correctly. Most higher-level protocols use TCP/IP to perform their duties. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP), for example transfers documents written in Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML) in the World Wide Web (WWW). This technique is what enables you to view web pages in your Internet browser in the first place. Topology Structure of a network. Common structures include: Linear bus topology Ring topology Star topology Tree topology PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 297 Glossary Topology configuration All the interconnected ports of the PROFINET devices in the STEP 7 project and their relationships to each other. Twisted-pair Fast Ethernet via twisted-pair cables is based on the IEEE 802.3u standard (100 Base-TX). The transmission medium is a shielded 2x2 twisted-pair cable with an impedance of 100 (AWG 22). The transmission characteristics of this cable must meet the requirements of category 5. The maximum length of the connection between the terminal and the network component must not exceed 100 m. The connectors are designed according to the 100Base-TX standard with the RJ45 connector system. Update time An IO device / IO controller in the PROFINET IO system is supplied cyclically with new data from the IO controller / IO device within this time interval. The update time can be configured separately for each IO device and determines the interval at which data is sent from the IO controller to the IO device (outputs) as well as from the IO device to the IO controller (inputs). User program In SIMATIC, we distinguish between the CPU operating system and user programs. The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a plant or process can be controlled. The user program is assigned to a programmable module (for example, CPU, CM) and can be structured in smaller units. WAN A network that extends beyond LAN boundaries and enables, for example, intercontinental network communication. Legal rights do not belong to the user but to the provider of the communication network. XML XML (Extensible Markup Language) is a flexible, easy to understand and easy to learn data description language. Information is exchanged using readable XML documents. These include continuous text supplemented by structure information. PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 298 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Index A Accelerating startup, 267, 267 Adapting the user program, 272 Optimize the port settings, 270 Optimizing cabling, 271 Advanced offline/online comparison Automatic device assignment, 77 Alarm texts, 99 Alternating IO devices during operation, 261 Alternating partner ports during operation, 260 Application cycle, 211 Setting, 216 Asset management, 84 Assigning parameters, 44 Assignment IO device - controller, 45 B Bandwidth, 140 C Cables, 33 Calling status from IO device, 79 Channel, 28 Communication, 23 Compare offline/online Automatic device assignment, 75 Configuration control, 229 Configuration control for IO systems, 229, 240, 256 Configuring, 44 Configuring docking system, 263 Configuring hardware and assigning parameters for hardware, 44 CPU display Diagnostics, 98 IP address, 52 Cut through, 184 D D_ACT_DP, 261 Data access, 23 Data cycle, 210 Data exchange between IO systems, 126 Data security Basics, 39 Example, 42 SCALANCE, 41 Security, 39 Default router, 50 Delay time, 211 Setting, 216 Device name, 48, 228 Automatically assign, 47 Changing, 54 Exchanging without removable storage medium, 52 Permitting changes directly on the device, 60 Structured, 48 Device number, 49 Device replacement Assign device name, 224 Configuring, 224 Failure and replacement of an IO device, 223 Neighborhood detection, 223 Without exchangeable medium/programming device, 222 Device replacement without exchangeable medium/programming device, 52, 222 Devices & networks, 104 DHCP, 61 Diagnostics, 78 Diagnostics status, 112 Evaluation of interrupts, 114 I-device, 133 PROFINET ports, 106 STEP 7, 104 User program, 112 via CPU display, 98 via LEDs, 97 via Web server, 101 Diagnostics buffer, 99 Diagnostics data record, 110 Channel-specific, 110 Vendor-specific, 110 Diagnostics levels, 80 Diagnostics status, 112 Display Diagnostics, 98 IP address, 52 DNS conventions, 48 Docking station, 260 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 299 Index Docking unit, 260 DP cycle time, 211 E Evaluation of interrupts, 114 Exchangeable medium, 222 Execution window, 217 F Fast Ethernet, 30 Fiber-optic cable (FOC), 33 Fieldbus integration, 115 Full-duplex mode, 31 Functionality I-device, 120 PROFINET IO, 26 G Gateway, 61 Go online, 104 GSD file, 129 H Hardware and network editor Assign device name, 47 Assign IP address, 47 Topology view, 71 I I&M data, 82 downloading to PROFINET IO devices, 82 I/O addresses, 211 I/O communication, 46, 57 Identification data, 82 Identification of the PROFINET device, 56 I-device, 142 Configuring with GSD file, 129 I-device (intelligent IO device) Alarm response, 133 Configuring, 128 Diagnostics, 133 Functionality, 120 Lower-level PN IO system, 122 Properties, 121 Topology rules, 137 IE/PB link, 117 Industrial Ethernet, 17, 30 Industrial Wireless LAN, 35 Application examples, 35 Range, 37 Instruction T_CONFIG, 61 Interconnecting ports In the Inspector window, 74 In topology view, 73 IO controller, 45 IO device, 214 Activating and deactivating during change, 261 Assigning, 45 Calling status, 79 Configuring alternating partners, 263 IO system, 230, 234, 236, 240, 243, 244, 252, 253 Checking the assignment, 46 Data exchange, 126 IP address, 49 Assigning for the first time, 52 assigning using an different way, 56 Changing, 55 Permitting changes directly on the device, 60 IPO model, 218, 218 IRT, 211 Area of application, 183 Communication, 184 Communication cycle, 186 Configuring, 188 Definition, 184 Differences of RT, 187 Properties, 185 Rules, 140 Setup recommendations, 193 Synchronization, 185 Isochronous mode Configuring, 214 Definition, 207 Example, 209 Time synchronization, 210 Isochronous mode interrupt OB, 210, 211 OB 6x, 217 Isochronous real-time, (see IRT) L Lead time, 210 LEDs for diagnostics, 97 Linking PROFINET and PROFIBUS, 117 LLDP, 109 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 300 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH Index M Machine tailoring, (see Configuration control for IO systems) Maintenance concept, 107 Maintenance data, 82 Maintenance demanded, 107 Maintenance required, 107 Media redundancy Configuring, 173 Functions in ring topology, 169 Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP), 170 MIB, 109 Module, 28 Module status, 98 Module-internal shared input (MSI), 161 Module-internal shared output (MSO), 161 MRP, 170 MRPD, 176 MSI/MSO, 161 Multiple use IO system, 228, 230, 234, 236 Multiple use IO systems, 229 N Neighborhood detection, 223 Network limits, 32 Network view I/O communication, 57 O OB 82, 114 OB MC Servo, 217 OIP model, 218, 220 Online & diagnostics network view, 104 Online assignment (PROFINET device names), 57 Option handling in the network see Configuration control for IO systems, 240 Optional IO device, 243 Overwriting the PROFINET device name, 228 P Port Alternating partners, 260 Diagnostics, 106 Switchport, 271 Terminal port, 271 Prefabricating PCF cables, 33 Prefabricating POF cables, 33 Primary Setup Tool (PST), 61 Prioritized startup, 261 Configuring, 268 Definition, 267 PROFIBUS, 17 PROFIBUS & PROFINET International, 19 PROFIenergy, 142, 258 PROFINET, 17 Assigning a device name, 57 Communication, 23 Device model, 28 Devices, 19 Equipment designations, 20 Implementation, 18 Interface, 19, 25 Objectives, 17 Optimizing with IRT, 193 Optimizing with RT, 192 Send clock, 24 Topology rules with I-device, 137 Transmission media, 34 Update time, 24 Watchdog time, 24 PROFINET device name, 228 PROFINET interface Properties, 25 Topology overview, 26 PROFINET IO, 18 Diagnostics levels, 80 Functionality, 26, 115 System, 45 Proxy functionality, 117 PST, 61 R Real-time class, 31 Real-time communication, 182, 183 Redundancy, 168 Redundancy clients, 168 Redundancy domains, 170 Redundancy manager, 168 Redundancy manager, 168 Ring port, 168, 175 Ring topology, 168 Router, 32, 50, 65 RT Area of application, 182 Communication cycle, 186 Definition, 183 Differences of IRT, 187 Rules, 140 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH 301 Index RT class, 211 S Saving energy, 258 SCALANCE, 32, 37, 41 Security Definition, 39 Example of data security, 42 Protective measures, 40 Send clock, 24, 210, 211 Set/actual topology, 101 Shared device, 143, 161 SNMP, 109 MIB, 109 Network diagnostics, 109 Standard machine project, 228, 229, 230, 234, 236, 243, 244, 252, 253 Startup of IO devices, 261, 265 Store and forward, 183 Submodule, 28, 161 Subnet, 46 Subnet mask, 50 Assigning for the first time, 52 Example, 50 Switch, 31 Integrated, 26 Selection guide, 31 Switched Ethernet, 31 Switchport, 271 Sync domain, 185, 211 SYNC_PI, 217, 218, 220 SYNC_PO, 217, 218, 220 Synchronous Cycle, 217 System diagnostics, 78 Star, 68 Tree, 68 Topology configuration, 211 Topology overview, 26 Topology view Adopt devices identified online, 77 Adopt port interconnections identified online, 76 Hardware and network editor, 71 Interconnecting ports, 73 Transfer area, 142 Transmission bandwidth, 31 Transmission media with PROFINET, 34 Twisted-pair, 33 U Update time, 24, 38 V Value status, 161 W Watchdog time, 24 Wire break, 108 Wireless networks, 37 T T_CONFIG, 61 T_DC, 210, 211, 219, 221 TCP/IP in the communication cycle, 186 Terminal port, 271 Ti, 210 To, 210 Tool changer, 260 Topology Example, 69 Line, 68 Ring, 68, 168, 170 Rules about the IO-system with I-device, 137 Set/actual, 101 PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 302 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E03444486-AH PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC PROFIBUS PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual 2 ___________________ Description Parameter 3 ___________________ assignment/addressing 4 ___________________ Diagnostics ___________________ 5 Functions ___________________ A Service & Support 12/2014 A5E03775446-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03775446-AC 12/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the manual This function manual provides an overview of the PROFIBUS communication system with SIMATIC STEP 7 V13. STEP 7 V13 is integrated into the powerful graphic Totally Integrated Automation Portal (TIA Portal), the new integration platform for all automation software tools. This function manual supports you in planning a PROFIBUS system. The manual is structured into the following subject areas: PROFIBUS basics PROFIBUS diagnostics PROFIBUS functions Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the manual: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows-based computers Proficiency with STEP 7 Scope This function manual is the basic documentation for all SIMATIC products from the PROFIBUS environment. The product documentation is based on this documentation. The examples are based on the functionality of the S7-1500 automation system. Changes compared to previous version As compared to the previous version (version 07/2014), this manual contains the following amendments/changes: Extension of the documentation to STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 Addition of the function Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) New guide PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 3 Preface Conventions STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions. This documentation contains figures of the devices described. The figures may differ slightly from the device supplied. You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Additional support You will find information about available technical support in the appendix Service & Support (Page 91). The technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (http://mall.industry.siemens.com). Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 4 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 10 3 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 Introduction to PROFIBUS ......................................................................................................10 Applications of PROFIBUS DP ...............................................................................................11 PROFIBUS terminology ..........................................................................................................12 PROFIBUS DP interface .........................................................................................................16 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 2.2.1.2 2.2.1.3 2.2.1.4 2.2.1.5 2.2.1.6 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4 2.2.4.5 Structure of PROFIBUS networks ..........................................................................................17 Passive network components for RS 485 networks ...............................................................19 RS 485 cables .........................................................................................................................19 PROFIBUS FastConnect system ............................................................................................20 PROFIBUS bus connector ......................................................................................................22 M12 bus connector .................................................................................................................24 Bus terminals for RS 485 networks ........................................................................................24 M12 bus terminating resistor ..................................................................................................24 Passive components for optical networks...............................................................................25 Fiber-optic cables ....................................................................................................................25 Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables ..........................................................................................26 Glass fiber-optic cables...........................................................................................................27 Active network components ....................................................................................................29 Network components in electrical networks............................................................................29 Network components in optical networks ...............................................................................33 Examples for topology ............................................................................................................35 Topology with RS485 repeater ...............................................................................................35 Topology with diagnostic repeater ..........................................................................................37 OLM topology ..........................................................................................................................40 WLAN topology .......................................................................................................................40 Connecting PROFIBUS to PROFINET ...................................................................................41 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 42 3.1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master ..................................................................................43 3.2 PROFIBUS address ................................................................................................................45 3.3 Network settings .....................................................................................................................46 3.4 Cable configuration .................................................................................................................49 3.5 Additional network stations .....................................................................................................51 3.6 Bus parameters .......................................................................................................................52 3.7 Constant bus cycle time ..........................................................................................................55 PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 5 Table of contents 4 5 A Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 57 4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 57 4.2 Diagnostics using the display of the S7-1500 ........................................................................ 58 4.3 Diagnostics with the diagnostic repeater ............................................................................... 60 4.4 I&M data (Identification and Maintenance) ............................................................................ 61 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 62 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.1.8 5.1.8.1 5.1.8.2 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 62 What is isochronous mode?................................................................................................... 62 Use of isochronous mode ...................................................................................................... 63 Isochronous applications ....................................................................................................... 64 Sequence of synchronization ................................................................................................. 65 Requirements for configuration .............................................................................................. 66 Configuring isochronous mode .............................................................................................. 67 Diagnostics and interrupt functions ........................................................................................ 70 Parameter settings for isochronous mode ............................................................................. 71 Viewing isochronous mode parameters ................................................................................. 71 Change parameters ............................................................................................................... 72 5.2 Acyclical data exchange ........................................................................................................ 74 5.3 SYNC/FREEZE groups .......................................................................................................... 75 5.4 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 77 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves)............................................................................................... 78 I-slave functionality ................................................................................................................ 78 Data exchange with higher-level DP master .......................................................................... 81 Configuring an I-slave ............................................................................................................ 82 Configuring transfer areas ..................................................................................................... 84 Sample program..................................................................................................................... 85 Diagnostics and interrupt behavior ........................................................................................ 89 Service & Support ................................................................................................................................. 91 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 94 Index .................................................................................................................................................... 99 PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 6 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL distributed I/O systems is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 7 Documentation guide Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/86140384) ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942) ET 200AL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95242965) My Documentation Manager The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38715968). Applications & Tools Applications & Tools supports you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products. You can find Applications & Tools on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20208582). CAx Download Manager The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe systems. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42455541). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 8 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Documentation guide TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 9 2 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS What is PROFIBUS? PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks automation systems and field devices that are compatible with PROFIBUS. As communication medium for the field level, PROFIBUS is an important part of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). The different communication networks can be used independent of one another or they can be combined with each other. PROFIBUS protocols PROFIBUS DP (distributed I/O) is a communication network for the field level according to IEC 61158-2 / EN 61158-2 with the hybrid access protocols token bus and master-slave. The networking takes place by means of two-wire lines or fiber-optic cables. Data transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are possible. PROFIBUS PA is the PROFIBUS for process automation (PA). It connects the PROFIBUS DP communication protocol with the MBP (Manchester Bus Powered) transmission technology to IEC 61158-2. PROFIBUS PA networks can be designed based on shielded, twisted two-wire lines intrinsically safe and are therefore suitable for hazardous areas (Ex zones 0 and 1). The data transmission rate is 31.25 kbps. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 10 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS 2.1.1 Applications of PROFIBUS DP Introduction The efficiency of control systems is not determined by automation devices alone, but depends to a large extent on the overall configuration of an automation solution. This includes a powerful communication system in addition to plant visualization and operator control and monitoring. The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you during the engineering and configuration of an automation solution. Applications of PROFIBUS DP The PROFIBUS network offers wireless connection of several controllers, components and subnets as electrical network, optical network or by using links. Sensors and actuators are controlled centrally by means of PROFIBUS DP. The following figure shows connection options to PROFIBUS DP: Figure 2-1 Connection options to PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 11 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS Objectives of PROFIBUS DP Distributed automation systems are increasingly used in production and process automation. This means a complex control task is divided up into smaller, more transparent subtasks with distributed control systems. This creates a high demand for communication between the distributed systems. Distributed systems offer the following benefits: Independent and simultaneous commissioning of individual devices is possible Small, manageable programs Parallel processing due to distributed automation systems Reduced response times Higher-level structures can take on additional diagnostics and logging functions. Increased plant availability because the rest of the overall system can continue to work when a subordinate station fails. 2.1.2 PROFIBUS terminology Definition: Devices in the PROFIBUS environment In the PROFIBUS environment, "device" is the generic term for: Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC) Distributed I/O systems Field devices (for example, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) Active network components (e.g., diagnostic repeater, optical link module) Gateways to AS interface or other fieldbus systems PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 12 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS Devices with PROFIBUS DP The figure below shows the most important components with PROFIBUS DP. The table below lists the designations of the individual components. Number PROFIBUS Note DP master system DP master Device used to address the connected DP slaves. The DP master exchanges input and output signals with field devices. The DP master is often the controller on which the automation program runs. PG/PC PG/PC/HMI device for commissioning and diagnostics DP master of class 2 PROFIBUS Network infrastructure HMI Device for operating and monitoring functions DP slave Distributed field device assigned to the DP master, e.g., valve terminals, frequency converters. I-slave Intelligent DP slave Figure 2-2 Devices with PROFIBUS PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 13 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS Overview of I/O communication I/O communication is the reading or writing of inputs/outputs of the distributed I/O. The figure below gives you an overview of I/O communication using PROFIBUS DP: Figure 2-3 I/O communication using PROFIBUS DP I/O communication is also available with the communication module (CM) or the interface module (IM) with integrated DP interface. These DP interfaces behave like integrated DP interfaces of the CPU. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 14 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS I/O communication using PROFIBUS DP Table 2- 1 I/O communication using PROFIBUS DP Communication between ... Explanation DP master and DP slave The data exchange between a DP master and DP slaves with I/O modules takes place as follows: The DP master queries the DP slaves of its master system one after the other, receives input values from the DP slaves, and transmits output data to the DP slaves (master-slave principle). DP master and I-slave A fixed amount of data is transmitted cyclically between the user programs in CPUs of DP masters and I-slaves. The DP master does not access the I/O modules of the I-slave, but instead accesses configured address areas, called transfer areas, that can be inside or outside the process image of the I-slave CPU. If parts of the process image are used as transfer areas, these may not be used for actual I/O modules. Data transmission takes place with load and transfer operations using the process image or by direct access. DP master and DP master A fixed amount of data is transmitted cyclically between the user programs in CPUs of DP masters. A DP/DP coupler is required as additional hardware. The DP masters mutually access configured address areas, called transfer areas, inside or outside the process image of the CPUs. If parts of the process image are used as transfer areas, these may not be used for actual I/O modules. Data transmission takes place with load and transfer operations using the process image or by direct access. Additional information You can find additional information on the hardware configuration in the STEP 7 online help. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 15 Description 2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS 2.1.3 PROFIBUS DP interface Properties A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical (RS 485) interface or optical (Polymer Optical Fiber, POF) interface. Table 2- 2 Properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface Standard PROFIBUS: IEC 61158/61784 Physical bus/media PROFIBUS cables (twisted two-wire lines RS 485 or fiber-optic cables) Transmission rate 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps Representation of the PROFIBUS DP interface in STEP 7 In the device view of STEP 7, the PROFIBUS DP interfaces for a DP master and a DP slave are highlighted by a purple rectangle: Figure 2-4 PROFIBUS DP interfaces PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 16 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Contents of this chapter The following chapter provides background information on building your communication network. Overview of the most important passive network components: These are network components that forward a signal without the possibility of actively influencing it, for example, cables, connectors. Overview of the most important active network components: These are network components that actively affect a signal, for example, repeaters, diagnostic repeaters. Overview of the most common network structures (topologies) Physical connections of industrial networks PROFIBUS devices can be networked in industrial plants in two different physical ways: By means of electrical signals via copper cables By means of optical signals via fiber-optic cables PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 17 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Selection criteria for networking The table below includes selection criteria for electrical and optical networking of PROFIBUS devices: Table 2- 3 Selection criteria for electrical and optical networking Criteria Transmission medium Distances Electrical PROFIBUS Optical network with OLM Optical network with OBT Shielded two-wire line - - POF - PCF - Glass - - Max. network span PROFIBUS DP: 9.6 km 90 km 9.6 km Between two devices up to 1 km 1) up to 15 km 2) up to 300 m 2) Bus - - Linear - Tree Ring - DP, PA DP, PA DP OLM - - Integrated interfaces - Bus terminal - Bus connector - - - PROFIBUS PA: 1.9 km Topology Transmission protocols Connection of devices by means of Electrical network segments can be connected Suitable - Not relevant for this application 1) Depending on data rate and type of service used 2) Depending on cable type used Installation guideline for PROFIBUS networks A PROFIBUS segment must be terminated at the start and end; passively with a connector or actively with a bus terminating resistor. The same principles apply to the installation of a PROFIBUS network as described in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591) manual. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 18 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.1 Passive network components for RS 485 networks 2.2.1.1 RS 485 cables Introduction The following applies to all RS 485 cables for PROFIBUS from Siemens: Their double shielding makes them especially suited for laying in industrial environments with electromagnetic interference. A continuous grounding concept can be implemented by means of the outer shield of the bus cable and the ground terminals of the bus terminals. The imprinted meter marking makes it easier to determine the length (accuracy 5%). RS 485 cables for PROFIBUS SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables are available in different versions which allow optimum adaptation to different areas of application: FC Standard Cable GP (bus cable for fixed laying inside buildings) FC Standard Cable IS GP (bus cable for hazardous area) FC-FRNC Cable GP (bus cable with halogen-free protective jacket for use inside buildings) FC Food Cable (bus cable with PE jacket for use in the food and beverage industry) FC Robust Cable (bus cable with PUR jacket for environments subject to chemical and mechanical stress) FC Ground Cable (ground cable with PE jacket) PROFIBUS FC Trailing Cable (trailing cable for tow chains) PROFIBUS Festoon Cable (bus cable for festoon mounting) PROFIBUS Torsion Cable (torsion-free bus cable for networking movable plant parts, for example, robots) PROFIBUS FC Flexible Cable (bus cable for machine parts that are moved infrequently or cabinet doors) SIENOPYR-FR ship cable (for permanent laying on ships and off-shore units in all rooms and on open deck) PROFIBUS Hybrid Standard Cable (hybrid cable with 2 power wires (1.5 mm2) for data and power supply of the ET 200pro) PROFIBUS Hybrid Robust Cable (trailable hybrid cable with 2 power wires (1.5 mm2) for data and power supply of the ET 200pro) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 19 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Maximum cable lengths When using copper cables, the maximum size of a PROFIBUS segment depends on the transmission rate. If these lengths are not sufficient for your application, you can expand the network by using repeaters. You can achieve a maximum size by cascading up to nine repeaters. Table 2- 4 2.2.1.2 Maximum cable lengths Transmission rate Maximum cable length of a bus segment Maximum distance between two stations 9.6 to 187.5 kbps 1000 m 10000 m 500 kbps 400 m 4000 m 1.5 Mbps 200 m 2000 m 3 to 12 Mbps 100 m 1000 m PROFIBUS FastConnect system PROFIBUS FastConnect (FC) PROFIBUS FastConnect is a system for fast and easy fabrication of PROFIBUS copper cables. The system consists of three components: FastConnect bus cables for quick mounting FastConnect stripping tool FastConnect bus connector for PROFIBUS with insulation displacement method FastConnect bus cables and stripping tool The special design of the FastConnect bus cables allows for the use of the FastConnect stripping tool to accurately strip away the protective jacket and the braided shield in one step. The connection of the prepared cables takes place in the FastConnect bus connectors using the insulation displacement method. All PROFIBUS FastConnect bus cables can also be connected to the conventional bus connectors with screw-type terminals. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 20 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Area of application You need FastConnect bus connectors for PROFIBUS for the following applications: Connect devices with an electrical 9-pin D-Sub interface to IEC 61158-2 directly with SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables. Connect electrical segments or individual devices to the Optical Link Module (OLM) and Optical Bus Terminal (OBT). Connect devices or programming devices to the repeater. Versions The FastConnect bus connector in degree of protection IP20 is available in the following versions: with integrated terminating resistor and isolating function with or without PG socket with a cable outlet of 35, 90 or 180 with device category 3G suitable for zone 2 hazardous area Figure 2-5 Example for PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector with PG socket, cable outlet 90 PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 21 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Additional information For additional information on the available components visit the Siemens Mall (http://mall.industry.siemens.com). 2.2.1.3 PROFIBUS bus connector Area of application You need PROFIBUS bus connectors for the following applications: Connect devices with a 9-pin D-Sub interface to IEC 61158-2 directly with the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables. Connect electrical segments or individual devices to the Optical Link Module (OLM) and Optical Bus Terminal (OBT). Connect devices or programming devices to the repeater. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 22 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Versions The PROFIBUS bus connector in degree of protection IP20 is available in the following versions: with integrated terminating resistor and isolating function with or without PG socket with a cable outlet of 35, 90 or 180 with device category 3G suitable for zone 2 hazardous area Figure 2-6 Example for PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket, cable outlet 35 Additional information For additional information on the available components visit the Siemens Mall (http://mall.industry.siemens.com). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 23 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.1.4 M12 bus connector Area of application Devices with an electrical M12 interface can use the M12 bus connector for SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS for direct connection with the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables. The M12 bus connector in degree of protection IP65 is available in the following versions: with screw-type terminals with insulation displacement termination with a cable outlet of 180 2.2.1.5 Bus terminals for RS 485 networks Bus terminal RS 485 and bus terminal M12 A bus terminal is used for the connection of an individual PROFIBUS station with RS485 interface to the PROFIBUS bus cable. Bus terminals in degree of protection IP20 are available in the following versions: Bus terminal RS 485 with or without PG interface, transmission rate 9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps, integrated terminating resistor combination (connectible), with 1.5 m and 3 m connecting cable Bus terminal M12, transmission rate 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps, integrated terminating resistor combination with isolating function, with 1.5 m connecting cable 2.2.1.6 M12 bus terminating resistor Terminating segment with terminating resistor If there is a station with M12 connection system at the beginning or end of a PROFIBUS segment, you need an M12 bus terminating resistor. The M12 PROFIBUS connection of a device consists of an M12 socket for the infeed and an M12 male connector to loop-through the bus signal. This means you need one bus terminating resistor with male contacts (6GK1905-0EC00) and with female contacts (6GK1905-0ED00) for each M12 bus cable. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 24 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.2 Passive components for optical networks 2.2.2.1 Fiber-optic cables Types of fiber-optic cables Data transmission with fiber-optic cables takes place through modulation of electromagnetic waves in the range of visible and invisible light. These cables are made of high-quality plastic fibers and glass fibers: Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables (Page 26) Glass fiber-optic cables (Page 27) The different types of fiber-optic cables provide solutions matched to the operating and environmental conditions for the connection of components with each other. Benefits Fiber-optic cables offer the following benefits when compared with electrical cables: Galvanic isolation of the devices and segments No potential equalization currents No impact on transmission path through external electromagnetic interference No lightning protection elements required No noise radiation along the transmission route Low weight Depending on the type of fiber you can implement cable lengths up to few kilometers at even higher transmission rates. No dependency of the maximum permitted distances on the transmission rate Additional information Additional information of the properties and technical specifications of the passive components and connectors for fiber-optic cables is available in the PROFIBUS network manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 25 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.2.2 Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables Plastic (POF) and PCF fiber-optic cables are used for the connection of Optical Link modules with connections for plastic fiber-optic cables (OLM/P), Optical Bus Terminal (OBT) and devices with integrated optical interfaces. Under certain conditions, they are an inexpensive alternative to conventional glass fiber-optic cables. Plastic Fiber Optic duplex core The plastic fiber-optic duplex core is a flat dual core with PVC inner jacket without protective jacket. The cable can be easily assembled on-site. The cable is intended for indoor applications with low mechanical loads or inside cabinets. For OLM connections and with integrated optical interfaces you cover a length of up to 50 m between two devices with this cable. Plastic Fiber Optic standard cable The plastic fiber optic standard cable consists of two plastic fibers with robust polyamide inner jacket surrounded by Kevlar tensile elements and a purple PVC protective jacket. The cable can be easily assembled on-site. The robust round cable is suited for indoor applications. The maximum distance that can be covered is 80 m for OLM/P connections and 50 m with integrated optical interfaces and OBT. PCF Standard Cable The pre-assembled PCF Standard Cable consists of two PCF fibers surrounded by Kevlar tensile elements and a purple PVC protective jacket. It is always supplied with a pulling aid installed on one end to pull in the cable channels. The robust round cable is suited for indoor applications with cable lengths up to 400 m (OLM) or 300 m (integrated optical interfaces, OBT) between two devices. PCF Standard Cable GP The PCF Standard Cable GP consists of two PCF fibers surrounded by Aramid tensile elements and a green PVC protective jacket. The cable is pre-assembled and can be ordered by the meter. It is supplied with a pulling aid installed on one end to pull in the cable channels. The robust round cable is suited for indoor and outdoor applications with cable lengths up to 400 m (OLM) or 300 m (integrated optical interfaces, OBT) between two devices. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 26 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks PCF Trailing Cable The PCF Trailing Cable consists of two PCF fibers surrounded by Aramid tensile elements and a green PUR protective jacket. The cable is pre-assembled and can be ordered by the meter. It is supplied with a pulling aid installed on one end to pull in the cable channels. The robust round cable is suited for moving indoor and outdoor applications with cable lengths up to 400 m (OLM) or 300 m (integrated optical interfaces, OBT) between two devices. PCF Trailing Cable GP The PCF Trailing Cable GP consists of two PCF fibers surrounded by Aramid tensile elements and a green PVC protective jacket. The cable is pre-assembled and can be ordered by the meter. It is supplied with a pulling aid installed on one end to pull in the cable channels. The robust round cable is suited for moving indoor and outdoor applications with cable lengths up to 400 m (OLM) or 300 m (integrated optical interfaces, OBT) between two devices. 2.2.2.3 Glass fiber-optic cables Glass fiber-optic cables Glass fiber-optic cables are suitable for connection of optical interfaces that work in the wavelength range around 850 nm and around 1300 nm. They include two graded-index multimode fibers of the type 62.5/125 m. The glass fiber-optic cables are available in different versions which makes for an optimum adaptation to different areas of application: Fiber Optic standard cable INDOOR Fiber Optic indoor cable Flexible Fiber Optic trailing cable Fiber Optic standard cable The standard cable is the universal cable for indoor and outdoor use. INDOOR Fiber Optic indoor cable The indoor cable is intended for weather-proof indoor use. It is halogen-free, non-crush and flame-retardant. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 27 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Flexible Fiber Optic trailing cable The trailing cable was designed for the special application of forced movement, for example, for constantly moved machine parts such as trailing chains. It is mechanically designed for 100,000 bending cycles by 90 (with the specified minimum radius). Integrated dummy elements ensure a round cross-section of the cable. The trailing cable can be used indoors and outdoors. Maximum distances between two optical link modules The following distances may not be exceeded between two OLMs regardless of the optical power budget: OLM/P11, OLM/P12: 400 m OLM/G11, OLM/G12, OLM/G12-EEC: 3 km OLM/G11-1300, OLM/G12-1300: 15 km Additional information All operating instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805951/133300) of the SIMATIC NET bus components include information on distances that can be covered with the SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables. You can configure your optical network without any calculations using simple limits. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 28 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.3 Active network components 2.2.3.1 Network components in electrical networks Active network components The following active network components are available for PROFIBUS in electrical networks: Repeater RS485 Diagnostics repeater PROFIBUS Terminator DP/DP coupler IE/PB Link PN IO IWLAN/PB Link PN IO Active components for the connection of CAN Active components for the gateway between PROFIBUS and AS-Interface - DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - DP/AS-i F-Link RS485 repeater The RS485 IP20 repeater connects two PROFIBUS bus segments in RS485 technology with up to 32 devices. It provides transmission rates from 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps. The RS485 repeater refreshes a signal regarding amplitude, signal width and edge steepness between two segments. It is used when more than 32 stations are connected to the bus or the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. Bus segments can be operated ungrounded (galvanic isolation of segments) with an RS485 repeater. Diagnostics repeater The diagnostic repeater connects three PROFIBUS segments in RS485 technology, two of which are diagnostics-capable segments with 31 devices each. It is designed as DP slave to send diagnostics alarms to the DP master. The diagnostic function provides the location and the cause of cable faults, such as wire break or missing terminating resistors. The fault location is indicated relative to the existing devices. The diagnostics repeater refreshes a signal regarding amplitude, signal width and edge steepness between the segments. The cascading depth between any two PROFIBUS devices is limited to nine diagnostics repeaters. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 29 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks PROFIBUS Terminator The PROFIBUS Terminator forms an active bus termination. Bus devices can be switched off, removed or replaced without affecting data transmission. This is particularly true for bus devices on both ends of the bus cable at which terminating resistors must be connected or supplied. The PROFIBUS Terminator can be mounted on a standard mounting rail. IE/PB Link PN for the connection of a PROFIBUS segment to an Industrial Ethernet network The IE/PB Link PN IO as independent component provides the seamless transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. Through the use of IE/PB Link PN IO as substitute on the Ethernet, the existing PROFIBUS devices can continue to be used and can be integrated into a PROFINET application. A PROFINET IO controller is required for this configuration. The IE/PB Link PN acts as master on the PROFIBUS end. IWLAN/PB Link PN IO as gateway between LAN and PROFIBUS PROFIBUS devices can be coupled to PROFINET IO by means of IWLAN/PB Link PN IO. This means you can integrate existing PROFIBUS configurations into PROFINET. The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO supports the use of IWLAN and WLAN antennas for wireless data transmission, for example, in suspended monorail systems or conveyor systems. Because of the PROFINET support, the numerous PROFIBUS system services, for example, diagnostics by bus, can continue to be used. A PROFINET IO controller is required for this configuration. The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO acts as master on the PROFIBUS end. CANopen module for connection to CAN You can use the CANopen module to easily connect CANopen applications to PROFIBUS. Typical areas of application: Control of hydraulic valves/hydraulic axes in vehicles Control of motors in packaging machines and on conveyor belts Use in wind turbines for detection of angular encoders Detection of HMI devices on machines, e.g., joysticks Detection of measured data from displacement transducers, inclination sensors or angle encoders on tower cranes or gantry cranes DP/DP coupler for connection of two PROFIBUS networks The PROFIBUS DP/DP coupler is used to connect two PROFIBUS DP networks. Data (0 to 244 bytes) is transmitted from the DP master of the first network to the DP master of another network and vice versa. The DP/DP coupler comes equipped with two independent DP interfaces that establish the connection to the two DP networks. There is one slave at each DP network. The data exchange between the two DP networks takes place by internal copying in the coupler. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 30 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks DP/PA bus link for connection of PROFIBUS PA The DP/PA bus link is the connection between PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA. This means it connects the process control systems with the field devices of the process automation. The following components are available for a DP/PA bus link: DP/PA coupler Ex [ia] DP/PA coupler FDC 157-0 Interface module IM 153-2 for establishing a DP/PA link. Active field distributor AFDiS for hazardous areas Active components for the gateway between PROFIBUS and AS-Interface DP/AS-i LINK Advanced: The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is PROFIBUS DPV1 slave (according to IEC 61158-2/EN 61158-2) and AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface specification V3.0 according to EN 50295) and provides transparent data access to AS-Interface from PROFIBUS DP. PROFIBUS DP masters can cyclically exchange I/O data with the AS-Interface; DP masters with acyclic services can also make AS-Interface master calls. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is particularly suited for distributed configurations and for the connection of a subordinate AS-Interface network. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in the version as AS-Interface single master is completely sufficient for applications with typical configuration limits. For applications with high configuration limits, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is used as AS-Interface double master. In this case, the duplicate configuration limits can be used on two independently running AS-Interface strands. DP/AS-Interface Link 20E: The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is PROFIBUS DP slave (in accordance with EN 61158) and AS-Interface master (in accordance with AS-Interface specification V3.0 according to EN 50295) and supports operation of the AS-Interface on PROFIBUS DP. Single PROFIBUS masters can cyclically exchange I/O data with the AS-Interface; masters with acyclic services can exchange I/O data and make master calls. DP/AS-i F-Link: The DP/AS-i F-Link is PROFIBUS DP-V1 slave (according to EN 61158) and AS-i master (according to AS-Interface specification V3.0 to EN 50295) and provides transparent data access to AS-Interface from PROFIBUS DP. The DP/AS-i F-Link is also the only AS-i master that can forward safety-oriented input data of ASIsafe slaves to a fail-safe CPU with PROFIBUS DP master by means of the PROFIsafe protocol. Additional safety cabling or monitoring is not required (in particular, no AS-Interface safety monitor). Depending on the slave type, you can transmit binary values or analog values. All slaves according to AS-Interface specification V2.0, V2.1 or V3.0 can be operated as AS-i slaves. As fully-featured AS-i master according to specification V3.0, you can use higher configuration limits on the AS-i network (496 inputs and outputs each, up to 62 digital or analog slaves). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 31 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Additional information Information on the components is available in the Siemens Mall (http://mall.industry.siemens.com). Additional information is available in these manuals: PROFIBUS Network Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591) Diagnostic repeater (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) DP/DP Coupler (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1179382) SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736) Basics on Setting up an Industrial Wireless LAN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9975764) SIMATIC bus links, DP/PA coupler, active field distributors, DP/PA Link and Y Link (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1142696) Information on the CANopen module is available on the Internet (http://www.hms-networks.com/can-for-et200s). DP/AS-interface LINK Advanced (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22502958/133300) manual DP/AS-i F-Link (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24196041) manual See also Topology with RS485 repeater (Page 35) OLM topology (Page 40) WLAN topology (Page 40) Connecting PROFIBUS to PROFINET (Page 41) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 32 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.3.2 Network components in optical networks Active network components The following active network components are available for PROFIBUS in optical networks: Optical Link Module OLM Optical Bus Terminal OBT Optical Link Module OLM You can use the PROFIBUS Optical Link Modul OLM to install PROFIBUS networks in line, star structure and redundant ring structure. The transmission rate of a fiber-optic cable line does not depend on the distance and can be 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps. Applications for OLM include, for example, plant buses on PROFIBUS base, networking across buildings using glass fiber-optic cables, mixed networks with electrical and optical segments, large networks (road tunnels, traffic guidance systems) and networks with high demands on availability (redundant ring networks). Optical Link modules can be combined by means of an RS485 interface and individual devices or entire electrical segments can be integrated into the optical PROFIBUS network. The following distances may not be exceeded between two OLMs regardless of the optical power budget: OLM/P11, OLM/P12: 400 m OLM/G11, OLM/G12, OLM/G12-EEC: 3 km OLM/G11-1300, OLM/G12-1300: 15 km Optical Bus Terminal OBT (optical bus terminal) The Optical Bus Terminal connects an individual PROFIBUS device without integrated optical interface or a PROFIBUS RS 485 segment with up to 31 devices to an optical PROFIBUS. An individual PROFIBUS DP device is connected with its RS 485 interface by means of a PROFIBUS cable with integrated terminating resistor, for example, connecting cable 830-1T, to the RS 485 interface of the OBT. The OBT is integrated into the optical line by means of two optical interfaces. The following optical transmission media can be connected to the OBT: Plastic fiber-optic cable up to 50 m single distance length. They can be assembled on-site with two 2x2 Simplex connectors. PCF fiber-optic cable up to 300 m single distance length. The cables are delivered pre-assembled. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 33 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Additional information Information on the components is available in the Siemens Mall (http://mall.industry.siemens.com). Additional information is available in these manuals: PROFIBUS network manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591) SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS, Optical Link Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/56606534/0/en) SIMATC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 34 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.4 Examples for topology 2.2.4.1 Topology with RS485 repeater Configuration options with the RS485 repeater You can operate the RS485 repeater in the following configurations: Figure 2-7 Segment 1 and segment 2 connected to RS485 repeater Figure 2-8 Segment 1 and segment 2 looped-through to RS485 repeater Figure 2-9 Segment 1 connected to RS485 repeater and segment 2 looped-through to RS485 repeater Connect terminating resistor Do not connect terminating resistor PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 35 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Configuration example Figure 2-10 Configuration example with five RS485 repeaters Connect terminating resistor Do not connect terminating resistor Maximum configuration If you install a PROFIBUS network with RS485 repeaters, you may not connect more than nine RS485 repeaters in series. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 36 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.4.2 Topology with diagnostic repeater Diagnostic repeater with three segments You may not exceed the maximum permitted cable length of 100 m per segment that can be monitored for the diagnostic repeater. The segments connected to DP2 and DP3 are diagnostics-capable. The cable length that can be monitored is limited for some cable types. Maximum cascade depth You can connect up to nine diagnostic repeaters in series between any two PROFIBUS stations. Figure 2-11 Schematic layout of a PROFIBUS network with maximum possible cascade depth at diagnostic repeaters PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 37 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Example: Maximum cascade depth exceeded Figure 2-12 Maximum cascade depth exceeded PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 38 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks Layout with several segments You can increase the number of used diagnostic repeaters by using several segments. The example shows a layout in which the maximum cascade depth is exceeded at two segments. Figure 2-13 Layout with several segments, maximum cascade depth exceeded Additional information Additional information is available in the Diagnostic Repeater (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) manual. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 39 Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.4.3 OLM topology Combination of electrical and optical networks with OLM Additional distances can be covered by means of the Optical Link Module. Because bus cables across several buildings are particularly vulnerable to damage caused by overvoltage (effect of lightning), the devices in the connected bus segment must be protected against overvoltage. Figure 2-14 2.2.4.4 Combination of electrical and optical networks WLAN topology IWLAN/PB Link PN IO as gateway between Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFIBUS The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO supports the use of IWLAN and WLAN antennas for wireless data transmission. This means the numerous PROFIBUS system services, for example, diagnostic by bus, can be used throughout. Figure 2-15 PROFIBUS and WLAN PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 40 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Description 2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks 2.2.4.5 Connecting PROFIBUS to PROFINET PROFIBUS can be integrated in PROFINET. In this way, you can set up any hybrid systems consisting of fieldbus and Ethernet-based subsystems. This provides a continuous data exchange. Coupling of PROFIBUS and PROFINET With a proxy-capable PROFINET device that is equipped with a PROFIBUS interface in addition to a PROFINET interface, you can integrate existing PROFIBUS configurations into the PROFINET configuration. Figure 2-16 Connection of PROFIBUS and PROFINET with IE/PB link PROFINET device with proxy functionality The PROFINET device with proxy functionality is the substitute for a PROFIBUS device on Ethernet. The proxy functionality allows a PROFIBUS device to communicate not only with its master but also with all devices on PROFINET. With PROFINET, existing PROFIBUS systems can be integrated into the PROFINET communication with the aid of an IE/PB link. The IE/PB link PN IO then handles communication via PROFINET on behalf of the PROFIBUS components. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 41 3 Parameter assignment/addressing To set up an automation system, you will need to configure, assign parameters and link the individual hardware components. The work needed for this is undertaken in the STEP 7 device, topology and network view. Configuration "Configuring" is understood to mean arranging, setting and networking devices and modules within the device or network view. A PROFIBUS address is automatically assigned to each module. The addresses can be subsequently modified. The CPU compares the preset configuration created in STEP 7 with the actual configuration of the plant. Errors can be detected and signaled immediately this way. The exact procedure for configuring devices is described in detail in the STEP 7 online help. Parameter assignment "Parameter assignment" is understood to mean setting the properties of the components used. The settings for the hardware components and for data exchange are assigned, for example, activating diagnostics, input delay with DI. The parameters are downloaded into the CPU and transferred to the corresponding modules when the CPU starts up. Modules can be replaced with ease because with SIMATIC CPUs the set parameters are automatically downloaded into the new module during each startup. Adjusting the hardware to the project requirements You need to adapt the hardware if you want to set up, expand or change an automation project. To do this, add hardware components to your layout, link them with existing components, and adapt the hardware properties to the tasks. The properties of the automation systems and modules are preset so that in many cases you do not have to assign parameters again. But parameter assignment is required in the following cases: You want to change the preset parameters of a module. You want to use special functions. You want to configure communication connections. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 42 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master Basic procedure for creating a PROFIBUS DP system Configuration - Creating PROFIBUS devices and modules in STEP 7 - Assigning the DP slave to a DP master (Page 43) Optional: Parameter assignment - Assigning the PROFIBUS address (Page 45) - Making network settings (Page 46) - Considering cable configuration (Page 49) - Considering additional network devices (Page 51) - Bus parameters - creating a user-defined profile (Page 52) - Configuring constant bus cycle time (Page 55) 3.1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master PROFIBUS DP system A PROFIBUS DP system consists of a PROFIBUS DP master and its assigned PROFIBUS DP slaves. Once the devices have been placed in the network view or device view, STEP 7 assigns default parameter values to them. Initially, you only have to assign the DP slaves to one DP master. Requirement The network view of STEP 7 is open. A CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP). A DP slave has been placed (e.g., IM151-1 HF). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 43 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master Procedure To assign DP slaves to a DP master, follow these steps: 1. On the DP slave, use the left mouse button to click on the "Not assigned" link. The "Select DP master" menu opens. 2. Select the DP master in the menu to which you want to assign the DP slave. Result: A subnet with a DP system is created on the CPU. The CPU is now the PROFIBUS DP master. The DP slave is assigned to the DP master. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all other DP slaves that you want to assign to the DP master. Figure 3-1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master Network overview You can check the communication relationships of the activated interface in the network overview. The network overview is context-sensitive for selection in the network view: The selection of the CPU shows the DP communication of the CPU. The selection of the station shows the communication of the entire station. The selection of the interface shows the DP communication of the interface. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 44 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.2 PROFIBUS address 3.2 PROFIBUS address Devices can be connected to the PROFIBUS subnet that communicate by means of configured connections or that are part of a PROFIBUS DP master system. If the DP slave has already been assigned to a DP master, the PROFIBUS subnet to which the device is connected is automatically displayed under "Interface linked with". In the Inspector window under "PROFIBUS", select the subnet to which the interface is linked or add a new subnet. All devices of a subnet must have different PROFIBUS addresses. Figure 3-2 PROFIBUS address Rules for address assignment STEP 7 automatically assigns device addresses. You can change the addresses if you observe the following points: Assign a unique PROFIBUS address to each device in the PROFIBUS network, each DP master and each DP slave in the PROFIBUS network. Depending on the DP slave, not all permitted PROFIBUS addresses are supported. For devices with BCD switches, it is often the case that only the PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 are supported. Changing the PROFIBUS address You change the PROFIBUS address under "Parameter". PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 45 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.3 Network settings 3.3 Network settings Highest PROFIBUS address (HSA) Outputs the highest PROFIBUS address of an active device. PROFIBUS addresses greater than HSA are permitted for passive devices, but only up to 126. Profile Depending on the connected device types and the protocols used, different profiles are available on the PROFIBUS. The profiles differ with respect to their setting options and calculation of the bus parameters. The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the bus parameters of all devices have the same values. Figure 3-3 Network settings Profiles and transmission rates Table 3- 1 Profiles and transmission rates Profiles Supported transmission rates DP 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps Standard 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps Universal (DP/FMS) (FMS is not supported) 9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps User-defined 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 46 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.3 Network settings DP (recommended profile) Select the "DP" profile if only devices meeting the requirements of the standard EN 61158-6-3 are connected to the PROFIBUS subnet. The setting of the bus parameters has been optimized for these devices. These include devices with DP master and DP slave interfaces of SIMATIC S7 as well as distributed I/O devices from third parties. Note Profile for constant bus cycle time and isochronous mode DP is the recommended profile for the configuration of constant bus cycle time and isochronous mode. Standard Compared with the "DP" profile, the "Standard" profile gives you the option to take into consideration devices of another project or devices that have not been configured here for calculation of the bus parameters. The bus parameters are then calculated with a simple algorithm that was not optimized. Universal (DP/FMS) (FMS is not supported) Select the "Universal (DP/FMS)" profile if individual devices in the PROFIBUS subnet use the FMS service (e.g., CP 343-5, PROFIBUS FMS devices). As with the "Standard" profile, here, too, you have the option to take additional devices into consideration for calculation of the bus parameters. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 47 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.3 Network settings User-defined The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the parameters for the profile have been synchronized. Select the "User-defined" profile if none of the other profiles "match" for operation of a PROFIBUS device and if you have to adapt the bus parameters for your special layout. You cannot configure all theoretically possible combinations with the user-defined profile either. The PROFIBUS standard prescribes some parameter limits depending on other parameters. It is, for example, not permitted that a responder responds (Min Tsdr) before the initiator is able to receive the frame (Trdy). These standard specifications are also checked in the "User-defined" profile. Note User-defined settings Use user-defined settings only if you are familiar with the PROFIBUS parameters. It is usually better to work with the "DP" profile. Contact Customer Support (Page 91) if you have any questions. The bus parameters that were last valid on the PROFIBUS subnet are automatically set as user-defined. If the "DP" bus profile was valid for the subnet, for example, the bus parameters for "DP" are set in the "User-defined" bus profile. You can modify the parameters based on these settings. The monitoring times are not automatically recalculated in the "User-defined settings" setting so that the uniformity of the set values is not changed without your knowledge, for example, to configure other configuration tools. You can calculate the monitoring times Ttr and watchdog based on the parameters you have set. To do so, click on the "Recalculate" button. See also Additional network stations (Page 51) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 48 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.4 Cable configuration 3.4 Cable configuration Considering cable configuration Information on the cable configuration can be taken into consideration for calculation of the bus parameters. To do so, select the check box "Take into account the following cable configuration" in the properties of the PROFIBUS subnet. The other information depends on the type of cable used. Figure 3-4 Cable configuration Cable configuration: Fiber-optic cables/optical ring The calculation depends on the used OLM types. Select the corresponding check box. Multiple selections are possible. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 49 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.4 Cable configuration Adapting bus parameters in the optical ring With the layout as ring, there is a kind of redundancy because you have the option to address all devices using the ring structure even if the connection between two devices is interrupted. The following configuration conditions must be met in the optical ring: A free address below HSA (Highest Station Address) Increase of the retry value to at least 3 (Network settings: user-defined profile) Checking and adapting of the slot time (Network settings: user-defined profile; bus parameters: Tslot parameter: You need short slot time values for OLM / P12, medium slot time values for OLM / G12 and OLM / G12-EEC and high slot time values for OLM / G12-1300. This results in a high performance for small networks and a medium to low performance with medium to large networks. Additional information Additional information on adaptation of the retry value and the slot time is available in the PROFIBUS Network Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 50 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.5 Additional network stations 3.5 Additional network stations Communication load - considering additional network stations The bus parameters depend on the communication volume of the active network stations. There are differences between cyclical communication (DP) and connection-oriented, acyclical communication (S7 communication, Send/Receive (FDL)). Contrary to DP, the number and size of the communication jobs (communication load) depends on the user program. This means the communication load cannot always be determined automatically. If you select the check box "Consider the following network stations", you can consider network stations in the calculation of the bus times that were not configured in the project. Figure 3-5 Additional network stations Calculating the bus times You can specify a network configuration in the parameter group "Additional network stations" for calculation of the bus times that deviates from the configured network configuration. The network configuration is available for the following profiles: Standard Universal (DP/FMS) User-defined PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 51 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.6 Bus parameters Quantification of the communication load The following settings are possible to take the communication load into consideration: Number of network stations that are not configured Information on the communication load from the user programs for FDL or S7 communication. You can choose from the following levels: - Low: Typical for DP, no larger data communication except DP. - Medium: Typical for mixed operation of DP and other communication services (e.g., S7 communication), if DP has high time requirements and with medium, acyclical communication volume. - High: For mixed operation of DP and other communication services (e.g., S7 communication), if DP has low time requirements and with high, acyclical communication volume. 3.6 Bus parameters Introduction Bus parameters control the transmission behavior on the bus. Each device on the bus must correspond with the bus parameters of other devices. Note The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the parameters for the bus profile have been synchronized. Change the preset values only if you are familiar with the parameter assignment of the bus profile for PROFIBUS. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 52 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.6 Bus parameters Cyclical distribution of the bus parameters If the check box "Activate cyclical distribution of bus parameters" is selected under "Bus parameters" with the selected PROFIBUS subnet in the Inspector window, the bus parameters are sent cyclically during operation by the modules that support this function. This way you can, for example, connect a programming device to the PROFIBUS during operation. Disable this function in the following cases: In constant bus cycle time mode to minimize the bus cycle. If third-party devices are connected in the PROFIBUS subnet whose protocol uses the DSAP 63 (Destination Service Access Point) for multicast. Figure 3-6 Bus parameters PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 53 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.6 Bus parameters Bus parameters for the bus profile of PROFIBUS subnets Note Display of offline values The offline values of the bus parameters are always displayed even if they are connected online with the target system. Table 3- 2 Bus parameters - value ranges Bus parameters Adjustable 1 Limit values Tslot_Init Yes Max. Tsdr + 15 <= Tslot_Init <= 16.383 t_Bit Max. Tsdr Yes 35 + 2*Tset + Tqui <= Max. Tsdr <= 1,023 t_Bit Min. Tsdr Yes 11 t_Bit <= Min. Tsdr <= MIN(255 t_Bit, ... Tset Yes 1 t_bit <= Tset <= 494 t_bit Tqui Yes 0 t_bit <= Tqui <= MIN(31 t_bit, Min. Tsdr - 1) GAP factor Yes 1 <= GAP factor <= 100 Retry limit Yes 1 <= Retry limit <= 15 Tslot ( slot time) No - Tid2 No Tid2 = Max. Tsdr Trdy No Trdy = Min. Tsdr Tid1 No Tid1 = 35 + 2*Tset + Tqui Ttr (Target Rotation Time) Yes 256 t_Bit <= Ttr <= 16,777,960 t_bit Ttr typical No This time is for information only and is not transmitted to the devices. ... Max. Tsdr - 1, 34 + 2*Tset + Tqui) Watchdog 1 10 ms <= Watchdog <= 650 s depending on bus profile User-defined bus profile Use the following settings to create a user-defined bus profile: minimum Target Rotation Time (Ttr) = 5000x HSA (highest PROFIBUS address of an active device) minimum watchdog (Watchdog) = 6250x HSA Recalculate Use the button "Recalculate" to recalculate the parameters. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 54 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Parameter assignment/addressing 3.7 Constant bus cycle time 3.7 Constant bus cycle time Constant bus cycle time The DP master addresses its assigned DP slaves cyclically. S7 communication may cause the intervals to vary. You can enable a "bus cycle with constant bus cycle time" to achieve identical intervals. This ensures data transmission at the same (constant bus cycle time) intervals. Figure 3-7 Enabling a bus cycle with constant bus cycle time Number of OPs/PGs/TDs at the PROFIBUS Here you enter the number of devices that are not configured. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 55 Parameter assignment/addressing 3.7 Constant bus cycle time Increasing DP cycle time manually The following situation can occur especially with very short DP cycle times: The runtime of the user program is greater than the shortest cycle (see Technical specifications of the CPU, section "Isochronous mode"). You have to manually increase the automatically calculated DP cycle time in this case. See also Configuring isochronous mode (Page 67) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 56 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Diagnostics 4.1 4 Overview Diagnostics options In case of an error you can determine the current status of your automation system and react specifically by using the event-related diagnostics and the evaluation of interrupts. You can use the following options for diagnostics of the PROFIBUS components: Determine the status of the system using the Lifelist in STEP 7. Evaluate the module status, error and message texts by using the display of the S7-1500 CPU. Run cable diagnostics during operation by means of the diagnostics repeater. Evaluate the diagnostics and interrupt behavior in isochronous mode. (Page 70) Determine status information for fault localization and fault rectification by using the DP/PA coupler FDC 157-0 configured as PROFIBUS diagnostics slave. Additional information Additional information on diagnostics is available in these manuals: In the Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS-DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) manual for diagnostics with STEP 7, diagnostics in the user program, monitoring function isochronous PROFIBUS, topology display in STEP 7. In the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual for diagnostics options that are available for the SIMATIC systems S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL. In the PROFIBUS Network Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591) system manual for diagnostics of fiber-optic cables. In the DP/PA Coupler, Active Field Distributors, DP/PA Link and Y Link (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1142696) operating instructions. In the Web Server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) function manual for diagnostics options (based on the functionality of the CPU). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 57 Diagnostics 4.2 Diagnostics using the display of the S7-1500 4.2 Diagnostics using the display of the S7-1500 Displays Each CPU in the S7-1500 automation system has a front cover with a display and operating buttons. Control and status information is displayed in different menus on the display. You use the operating buttons to navigate through the menus. The following states can be evaluated on the display: Module status for central and distributed modules Error and alarm texts (system diagnostics, user-defined alarms) Module status From the station overview you go to the module status for a distributed module via the module overview. Figure 4-1 Example: Station overview, module overview, module status PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 58 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Diagnostics 4.2 Diagnostics using the display of the S7-1500 Error and alarm texts Figure 4-2 Example: Diagnostic buffer, alarms Additional information Additional information on the topic "Functions and operation of the display" is available in the documentation for the S7-1500 automation system on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 59 Diagnostics 4.3 Diagnostics with the diagnostic repeater 4.3 Diagnostics with the diagnostic repeater Introduction The diagnostic repeater is a repeater that can monitor two segments of a RS485-PROFIBUS subnet (copper cable) during operation and signal cable faults to the DP master by sending a diagnostic frame. Fault location and the cause of the fault can be displayed in plain text by means of STEP 7 as well as operator control and monitoring devices (SIMATIC HMI). With its cable diagnostics during operation, the diagnostic repeater allows you to detect and localize cable faults early on. This means plant faults are detected early and plant downtimes can be prevented. Diagnostic functions The diagnostic function provides the location and the cause of cable faults, such as wire break or missing terminating resistors. The fault location is specified relative to the devices present, for example "Break on signal line A and/or B". Reading out the saved diagnostic and statistical information. Monitoring of the isochronous PROFIBUS, e.g., violation of cycle time. Providing identification data. Additional information Additional information on diagnostics with STEP 7 and for reading out the diagnostics with the user program is available in the Diagnostic repeater for PROFIBUS DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) manual. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 60 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Diagnostics 4.4 I&M data (Identification and Maintenance) 4.4 I&M data (Identification and Maintenance) Definition and properties Identification and maintenance data (I&M) is information saved in a module to provide support when: Checking the plant configuration Locating hardware changes in a plant Identification data (I data) is module information (some of which may be printed on the module housing) such as the order and serial number. I data is read-only, vendor-specific module information. Maintenance data (M data) is system-specific information such as the installation location and date. M data is generated in the course of configuration and is written to the module memory. The modules can be uniquely identified in online mode by means of the I&M data. Additional information Information if and to what extent a DP device supports I&M data is available in the respective device manual of the device. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 61 5 Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode 5.1.1 What is isochronous mode? Why isochronous mode? Assuming public transport were to operate at maximum speed while reducing stop times at the passenger terminals to absolute minimum, the last thing many potential passengers would notice of the departing contraption are its red tail lights. The overall travel time is, however, decided by the train, bus or underground clock, because well adjusted timing is essential to a good service. This also applies to distributed automation engineering. Not only fast cycles but also the adaptation and synchronization of the individual cycles result in optimum throughput. Just-In-Time Figure 5-1 System cycle The high speed and reliable reaction time of a system operating in isochronous mode is based on the fact that all data is provided just-in-time. The constant bus cycle time PROFIBUS DP cycle beats the time here. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 62 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode Advantages of isochronous mode The use of isochronous mode provides: Optimized controls Determinism Consistent (simultaneous) reading of input data Consistent (simultaneous) output of output data 5.1.2 Use of isochronous mode The system property "isochronous mode" enables recording of measured values and process data in a defined system cycle. Signal processing takes place in the same system cycle all the way to switching to the "output terminal". This means isochronous mode improves the control quality and provides greater manufacturing precision. Isochronous mode drastically reduces the possible fluctuations of process response times. The timeassured processing can be used for a higher machine cycle. Isochronous mode is basically always the choice when acquisition of measured values needs to be synchronized, movements need to be coordinated and process reactions need to be defined and take place simultaneously. This means the areas of applications for isochronous mode are manifold. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 63 Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode 5.1.3 Isochronous applications Example: Isochronous measurement at several measuring points QC requires precise measurement of dimensions within a camshaft production process. Figure 5-2 Measuring of camshafts Isochronous workflow By using the system property "isochronous mode" and the associated simultaneous measured value acquisition, measurement can be performed continuously and the time required for measurement is reduced. Resultant workflow: Continuous turning of the camshaft. During the continuous turning, measure the positions and cam excursion synchronously. Process the next camshaft. All camshaft positions and the corresponding measured values (red) are measured synchronously within a single rotation of the camshaft. This increases machine output and maintains or enhances precision of the measurement. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 64 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode 5.1.4 Sequence of synchronization From reading of input data to output of output data The sequence of all components involved in the synchronization is explained in the paragraphs below: Isochronous reading of input data Transport of input data by means of the PROFIBUS subnet to the DP master (CPU) Further processing in the isochronous application of the CPU Transport of output data by means of the PROFIBUS subnet to the output DP slave Isochronous output of output data T_DC Date cycle TI Time for reading the input data TO Time for output of output data Figure 5-3 Time sequence of synchronization To ensure that all input data is ready for transportation via the PROFIBUS DP line when the next PROFIBUS DP cycle begins, the I/O read cycle has a lead time TI so that it starts earlier. The TI is the "flash gun" for all inputs. This TI is necessary to compensate for analog to digital conversion, backplane bus times, etc. The lead time TI can be configured by STEP 7 or by the user. We recommend that you have TI assigned automatically by STEP 7 . The PROFIBUS DP line transports the input data to the DP master. The synchronous cycle interrupt OB SynchronousCycle is called. The user program in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB decides the process reaction and provides the output data in time for the start of the next data cycle. The length of the data cycle is always configured by the user. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 65 Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode To is the compensation from the backplane bus and the digital to analog conversion within the slave. The To is the "flash gun" for all outputs. The time To can be configured by STEP 7 or by the user. We recommend that you have To assigned automatically by STEP 7. Without isochronous mode, application, data transmission and field devices have their own, unsynchronized processing cycles; these result in a higher total cycle time with high jitter. With isochronous mode, application, data transmission and field device are synchronized resulting in a minimum total cycle with minimum jitter. Isochronous mode and non isochronous mode distributed I/O It is possible to combine isochronous mode distributed I/O with non isochronous mode distributed I/O on one DP master. 5.1.5 Requirements for configuration Note the following requirements for configuration of isochronous mode: Isochronous mode cannot be used in optical PROFIBUS networks. Constant bus cycle time and isochronous mode are only possible with the bus profiles "DP" and "User-defined". Isochronous mode is only possible with the DP interfaces integrated in the CPU. Isochronous mode with CPs for PROFIBUS is not possible. Only the constant bus cycle time master is permitted as active station on the isochronous PROFIBUS DP. OPs and PGs (for example, PCs with PG functionality) influence the time behavior of the isochronous DP cycle and are therefore not permitted. Isochronous mode is not permitted across lines. Isochronous I/O can only be processed in process image partitions. Isochronous consistent data transmission is not possible without the use of process image partitions. The adherence to quantity structures is monitored because the number of slaves and bytes on the DP master system is limited for each process image partition. The addresses of isochronous modules must be located in a process image partition. Full isochronous mode from "terminal" to "terminal" is only possible if all components involved in the chain support the system property "isochronous mode". Make sure you look for the entry "Isochronous mode" or "Isochronous processing" in the information box of the module when you select it in the catalog. When you configure isochronous mode, you may not assign a SYNC/FREEZE group to the slave. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 66 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode 5.1.6 Configuring isochronous mode Introduction A SIMATIC automation solution can be connected to the isochronous PROFIBUS with the isochronous mode function. Isochronous mode guarantees the synchronous reading of input data, the processing and output of output data at the same (isochronous) intervals. Basic procedure for configuration of isochronous mode 1. Setting the properties for isochronous mode on the DP slave: - Isochronous DP cycle - Isochronous mode of the modules 2. Setting the properties for isochronous mode on the modules: - Synchronous cycle interrupt (SynchronousCycle) - Process image partition - Input delay 3. Create user program with access to isochronous I/O Requirement The network view in STEP 7 is open. A CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP). An interface module has been placed and networked with the CPU (e.g., IM 151-1 HF). I/O modules have been placed (e.g., 2DI x DC24V HF and 2DO x DC24V/0,5A HF). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 67 Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode Configuring isochronous mode on the DP slave 1. Select the DP slave in the network view and navigate to the "isochronous mode" area in the Inspector window. 2. Enable the option for synchronization to the DP cycle for the DP slave. Default: The DP slaves get the Ti/To values from the subnet which means the values are automatically the same for all DP slaves of the DP master system. 3. Enable the "Isochronous mode" option the the "Detail view" for all I/O modules you want to operate in isochronous mode. 4. Repeat steps 1 and 3 for all DP slaves that you want to operate in isochronous mode. Figure 5-4 Configuring isochronous mode on the DP slave PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 68 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode Configuring synchronous cycle interrupt on the I/O module 1. Select an I/O module in the device view and navigate to the "I/O addresses" area in the Inspector window. - The option for isochronous mode is selected. 2. Select the synchronous cycle interrupt in the drop-down list. Figure 5-5 I/O addresses - creating the synchronous cycle interrupt OB 3. Assign the process image partition configured in the CPU. Figure 5-6 I/O addresses - assigning process image partitions 4. Repeat steps 1 and 3 for all I/O modules that you want to operate in isochronous mode. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 69 Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode Programming isochronous mode To operate your plant in isochronous mode, the user program must be structured accordingly. This means you have to add a synchronous cycle interrupt in the STEP 7 project tree. You access the isochronous I/O by means of a process image partition, which means the addresses of the isochronous modules must be located in a process image partition. You program access to isochronous I/O with the "SYNC_PI" instructions (updating the process image partitions of the inputs) and "SYNC_PO" (updating the process image partition of the outputs) in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB. You call the "SYNC_PI" instruction at the start of the synchronous cycle interrupt OB, provided you have selected the automatic setting for the delay time. You call the "SYNC_PO" instruction at the end of the synchronous cycle interrupt OB. 5.1.7 Diagnostics and interrupt functions The diagnostic and interrupt functions of STEP 7 are available for isochronous mode. These reduce downtimes and simplify localization and elimination of faults. Events, causes of errors and remedies Below, you will find the events for diagnostic and interrupt functions and remedies for the problem. Table 5- 1 Events, causes of errors and remedies Event Cause of the error Remedy Synchronous cycle interrupt OB is started with the input parameter EventCount > 0 (number of lost OB calls since last OB call) If configured: The synchronous cycle interrupt OB takes too long. * Shorten the synchronous cycle interrupt OB. * Increase the DP cycle. * Reduce the delay time setting (setting with isochronous mode at synchronous cycle interrupt OB). * * Call of the time error OB * Diagnostic buffer entry "Buffer overflow for OB6x events" Error (negative RetVals) when updating the isochronous process image partition with SYNC_PI / SYNC_PO: * Consistency warning * Update time is after / before the permitted access window. Error when updating the isochronous process image partition with SYNC_PI / SYNC_PO: * SYNC_PI / SYNC_PO are not called * in the permitted access window in * the synchronous cycle interrupt OB, * which means they are called or processed during the I/O data transfer on PROFIBUS. Increase the delay time. Increase the DP cycle. Adapt the program. DP slave / module does not respond / is not available. Access error PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 70 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode 5.1.8 Parameter settings for isochronous mode Parameter changes as task of the field service technician The task of a field service technician is to maintain the production process. In this context the technician has to detect, localize and eliminate errors and performance losses of isochronous mode. All parameters which influence isochronous mode can be checked and configured using the "Isochronous mode" dialog box. Parameters should only be changed by experienced users or service technicians. 5.1.8.1 Viewing isochronous mode parameters "Isochronous mode" dialog box 1. Select "Properties > Isochronous mode" in the Inspector window. The "isochronous mode" dialog box opens with an overview of parameters which influence isochronous mode. Information on the individual parameters is available under "Detail overview". 2. Compare the values shown with the values in the documentation, or with the value specified by a technician. Figure 5-7 Viewing parameters for isochronous mode PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 71 Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode 5.1.8.2 Change parameters Changing parameters for the DP master system You can change the parameters for isochronous mode in the "Constant bus cycle time" dialog box. 1. Select the DP master system in the network view. 2. Select the section "Constant bus cycle time" in the Inspector window. 3. Change the parameters according to the received instructions. Figure 5-8 Changing parameters for the DP master system PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 72 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.1 Isochronous mode Adapting the input delay 1. Select the input module in the device view. 2. Select the section "Inputs" in the Inspector window. 3. Adapt the input delay. Figure 5-9 Adapting the input delay Compile, load and save the changed configuration 1. Put the plant out of operation. 2. Select the CPU in the project navigator. 3. Select "Compile > Hardware" in the shortcut menu. 4. Select "Download to device" in the shortcut menu. 5. Save the project. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 73 Functions 5.2 Acyclical data exchange 5.2 Acyclical data exchange Additional functionality with DPV1 devices (DP master/DP slaves) DP masters and DP slaves that support DPV1 have the following additional functions compared to the devices that support only DPV0: The acyclic data exchange between master and slave is supported. Interrupts can be set by a DPV1 slave which ensure handling of the interrupt-triggering event in the master CPU. Acyclic data exchange Read/write data record, for example, to change the parameters of a slave during operation. The data records of a module and the structure of these data records is available in the documentation for the respective module. The table below contains the instructions with their functions for access to DPV1 slaves. Detailed information is available in the STEP 7 online help. Table 5- 2 Instructions for access to DPV1 slaves Instructions Function (DPV1) RDREC Read data record WRREC Write data record RALRM Receive interrupt from a DP slave. (The instruction must be called in the OB that triggers the interrupt.) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 74 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.3 SYNC/FREEZE groups 5.3 SYNC/FREEZE groups Assigning the SYNC/FREEZE group to the DP slave A DP master with the corresponding functionality can send the control commands SYNC and/or FREEZE for synchronization of the DP slaves simultaneously to a group of DP slaves. You must assign SYNC/FREEZE groups to the DP slaves for this purpose. Requirement: A DP master system has been created in the project. Procedure To assign a DP slave to a SYNC/FREEZE group, follow these steps: 1. Select the DP interface of the DP slave you want to assign to a group in the device view or network view. 2. Select the check boxes for the required SYNC/FREEZE groups under the group "SYNC/FREEZE" in the Inspector window. You can assign each DP slave to only one SYNC/FREEZE group. Figure 5-10 Assigning the DP slave to a SYNC/FREEZE group PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 75 Functions 5.3 SYNC/FREEZE groups Important information on the control commands SYNC and FREEZE You can use the control commands SYNC and FREEZE in the DP master to synchronize the DP slaves event-controlled. The DP master sends the control commands simultaneously to a group of DP slaves in its master system. It does not take into consideration DP slaves that have failed or are currently sending diagnostic information. Requirement for synchronization using control commands is that you have assigned the DP slaves to SYNC/FREEZE groups. For a S7 CPU use the instruction DPSYC_FR (SFC 11) to synchronize the DP slaves. When you select the DP master, you see a list of the eight SYNC/FREEZE groups under "Properties > DP interface > SYNC/FREEZE" in the Inspector window. Figure 5-11 SYNC/FREEZE groups on DP master SYNC control command The DP master uses the SYNC control command to cause a group of DP slaves to freeze the states of their outputs to the current value. The DP slaves save the output data of the DP master for the following frames. But the states of the DP slave outputs remain unchanged. Only after each new SYNC control command does the DP slave set its outputs to the values that it has saved as the output data of the DP master. The outputs are not updated cyclically again until the DP master has sent a UNSYNC control command. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 76 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.4 Interrupts FREEZE control command After receiving the FREEZE control command from the DP master, the DP slaves of a group freeze the current status of their inputs. The DP slaves send these frozen input data to the DP master with the following cyclical frames. The DP slaves freeze the current state of their inputs again after each new FREEZE control command. The state of the DP slave inputs is only send to the DP master cyclically again when the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command. 5.4 Interrupts Interrupts and interrupt OBs for DPV1 Interrupts can be set by a DPV1 slave which ensure handling of the interrupt-triggering event in the master CPU. The interrupt data is evaluated in the CPU and the diagnostics buffer and the module state are updated even in the "STOP" operating mode. The OB is not processed in STOP. The following DPV1 interrupts are supported: Status interrupt Update interrupt Vendor-specific interrupt Detailed information is available in the descriptions on the OBs. You can use the corresponding OBs that are provided by the operating system of the S7 CPUs for diagnostic interrupts, hardware interrupts, and pull/plug interrupts. OB 55 interrupt - Status interrupt The status interrupt can be triggered when the operating mode of a device or module changes, for example, from RUN to STOP. OB 56 interrupt - Update interrupt An update interrupt can be triggered if the parameters of a slot were changed. This may be caused by local access or partner access to the parameters. OB 57 interrupt - Vendor-specific interrupt The event that triggers the vendor-specific interrupt can be specified by the manufacturer of a DPV1 slave. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 77 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Additional information A detailed description of the events at which interrupts are triggered is available in the documentation of the respective manufacturer of the DPV1 slave. 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) 5.5.1 I-slave functionality I-slave functionality The "I-slave" (intelligent DP slave) functionality of a CPU supports the exchange of data with a DP master and thus allows the CPU to be used, for example, as intelligent preprocessing unit of subprocesses. The I-slave is connected in its role as DP slave to a "higher-level" DP master. The preprocessing is handled by the user program in the I-slave. The process values acquired by the I/O modules are preprocessed by the user program and made available to the DP master. Figure 5-12 I-slave functionality "I-slave" naming convention In the remainder of this description, a CPU or a CP with I-slave functionality is simply called an "I-slave". PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 78 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Advantages of configurations with I-slaves The I-slave offers the following advantages: Simple coupling of CPUs with PROFIBUS interface Real-time communication between CPUs and PROFIBUS interface Distributed processing A complex automation task can be divided into smaller units/subprocesses. This results in manageable processes which lead to simplified subtasks. Relieving the DP master by distributing the computing capacity to I-devices Lower communication load by processing process data locally Separating subprocesses Complicated, widely distributed and extensive processes can be subdivided into several subprocesses with manageable interfaces by using I-slaves. These subprocesses can be stored in individual STEP 7 projects if necessary, which can later be merged to form one master project. Separating STEP 7 projects Creators and users of an I-device can have completely separated STEP 7 projects. The GSD file together with the configuration of the transfer areas of the I-slave form the interface between the STEP 7 projects. This allows coupling to standard DP masters via a standardized interface. Know-how protection Plant units can now only be delivered with a GSD file and the configuration of the transfer areas instead of with a STEP 7 project for the I-slave interface description. This means that you no longer have to disclose the user program know-how. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 79 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Difference: DP slave - I-slave In the case of a DP slave, the DP master accesses the distributed inputs/outputs directly. In the case of an I-slave, the DP master accesses a transfer area in the I/O address space of the preprocessing CPU instead of accessing the connected inputs/outputs of the I-slave. The user program running on the preprocessing CPU is responsible for ensuring data exchange between the operand area and inputs/outputs. Figure 5-13 Data access to an I-slave Note DP master or DP slave Note: The communication modules of the S7-1500 CPUs/ET 200SP CPUs, for example the CP 1542-5, support the operation as DP master or DP slave only as alternative. Note The I/O areas configured for data exchange between the DP master and DP slaves must not be used by I/O modules. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 80 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) 5.5.2 Data exchange with higher-level DP master Introduction The following section describes the data exchange between the I-slave and the higher-level DP master. Transfer areas Transfer areas are an interface to the user program of the I-slave CPU. Inputs are processed in the user program and outputs are the result of the processing in the user program. The data for communication between DP master and I-slave is made available in the transfer areas. A transfer area contains an information unit that is exchanged consistently, in terms of bytes, words or overall, between DP master and I-slave. You can find more information on configuration and use of transfer areas in the section Configuring transfer areas (Page 84). The following figure shows the data exchange between the I-slave and the higher-level DP master. The individual communication relations are explained below based on the numbers. Figure 5-14 Data exchange with the DP master PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 81 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Data exchange between higher-level DP master and normal DP slave In this way, the DP master and the DP slave exchange data through PROFIBUS. Data exchange between higher-level DP master and I-slave In this way, the DP master and the slave exchange data through PROFIBUS. The data exchange between a higher-level DP master and an I-slave is based on the conventional DP master/DP slave relationship. For the higher-level DP master, the transfer areas of the I-slave represent submodules of a DP slave. The output data of the DP master is the input data of the I-slave. Analogously, the input data of the DP master is the output data of the I-slave. Transfer relationship between the user program and the transfer area In this way, the user program and the transfer area exchange input and output data. Data exchange between the user program and the I/O of the I-slave In this way, the user program and the centralized I/O of the I-slave exchange input and output data. 5.5.3 Configuring an I-slave Requirements for configuring an I-slave The I-slave consists of: A CPU from S7-1500 and a communications module CM 1542-5/CP 1542-5 (STEP 7 as of V12) A CPU from ET 200SP and a communications module CM DP (STEP 7 as of V13 SP1) PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 82 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Procedure for configuring an I-slave This section shows how to configure an I-slave in STEP 7 based on the example of a CPU 1512SP-1 PN. The procedure for the CPUs from S7-1500 with CM 1542-5/CP 1542-5 and for the CPU 1510SP-1 PN with CM DP is the same. To configure an I-slave, follow these steps: 1. Drag a CPU 1512SP-1 PN from the hardware catalog to the network view. 2. Open the device view of the CPU. 3. Double-click on the CM DP communications module in the hardware catalog. STEP 7 creates the CM DP in the device view. 4. Select the PROFIBUS interface of the CM DP communications module. 5. In the Inspector window in the area navigation, select the "Operating mode" entry and enable the "DP slave" check box. 6. Now you can select the DP master in the "Assigned DP Master" drop-down list. Once you have selected the DP master, the networking and the DP master system between both devices are displayed in the network view. Figure 5-15 Configuring an I-slave Note Operation using a GSD file If you operate an I-slave using a GSD file, you should not select the "Test, commissioning and routing" check box. Create a DP subnet on the PROFIBUS interface of the I-slave. Result You have configured an I-slave. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 83 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) 5.5.4 Configuring transfer areas Requirements for configuring transfer areas You have configured an I-slave in STEP 7. You are in the device view of the I-device and have selected the PROFIBUS interface of the communications module. Procedure for configuring transfer areas To configure transfer areas for an I-slave in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. In the area navigation, go to the section "Operating mode" > "I-slave communication" > "Transfer areas". 2. Create transfer areas. Set the properties of the created transfer areas. Click in the first cell of the "Transfer area" column. STEP 7 assigns a default name that you can change. Select the type of communication relation: Currently, you can only select MS for "master-slave communication relation". STEP 7 assigns the addresses for the transfer area automatically. Correct the addresses if necessary. Set the length of the transfer area. Specify the length of the transfer area in the cell in the following format: [1...64] Byte/Word. Examples: "32 Byte", "64 Word" Specify whether the transfer area is exchanged in units of bytes or words or consistently over the entire length between the DP master and I-slave. Figure 5-16 Configuring transfer areas A separate entry is created in the area navigation for each transfer area. If you select one of these entries, you can adjust the details of the transfer area, or correct them and comment on them. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 84 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) 5.5.5 Sample program Introduction This simple sample program shows how you use the transfer areas of an I-slave. Requirement You have configured an I-slave. Task The result of an "AND logic operation" of two inputs (preprocessing) in the I-slave is to be provided to the higher-level DP master. This result is to be assigned to a local output in the DP master (further processing). Use a transfer area with the following addresses for this purpose: Address in the I-slave: Q568 Address in the DP master: I68 Required steps The following steps are necessary to solve the task: 1. Configuring the transfer area 2. Programming the I-slave 3. Programming the DP master PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 85 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Configuring the transfer area Configure a transfer area with the following properties in the I-slave: Figure 5-17 Transfer area, I-slave sample program PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 86 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Programming the I-slave To program the sample program for the I-slave, follow these steps: 1. Using the SCL programming language, create a new function with the name "preprocessing" in the project tree under "Program blocks" > "Add new block". Open the function. 2. In the interface of the function "preprocessing", create the following tags: Name Data type Input/output type input 1 bool Input input 2 bool Input result bool Output 3. In the instruction window of the function "preprocessing", write the following program code: #result:=#input 1&#input 2; 4. Call the function "preprocessing" in a cycle OB, for example, in OB1. 5. Wire the function "preprocessing" in the cycle OB as follows: Figure 5-18 I-slave sample program PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 87 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Programming the DP master To program the sample program for the DP master, follow these steps: 1. Using the SCL programming language, create a new function with the name "further processing" in the project tree under "Program blocks" > "Add new block". Open the function. 2. In the interface of the function "further processing", create the following tags: Name Data type Input/output type result bool Input output bool Output 3. In the instruction window of the function "further processing", write the following program code: #output:=#result; 4. Call the function "further processing" in a cycle OB, for example, in OB1. 5. Wire the function "further processing" in the cycle OB as follows: Figure 5-19 DP master sample program Result You mastered the task successfully. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 88 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) 5.5.6 Diagnostics and interrupt behavior Diagnostics and interrupt behavior S7 CPUs have numerous diagnostics and interrupt functions that can, for example, report errors/faults or failures of underlying DP systems. These diagnostics alarms reduce downtimes and simplify localization and elimination of problems. Diagnostics options in the higher-level DP master and in the I-slave The following diagnostics mechanisms are available to the higher-level DP master and the I-slave: OB 82 (diagnostic interrupt) When the I-slave changes mode, the DP master calls OB 82 (diagnostic interrupt). When the DP master changes mode, the I-slave calls OB 82 (diagnostic interrupt). OB 86 (rack failure) If the bus connection to the I-slave is interrupted, the DP master calls OB 86 (rack failure). If the bus connection to the DP master is interrupted, the I-slave calls OB 86 (rack failure). OB 122 (I/O access error) If you have not set the attribute "Handle errors within block" for OB 122, the following applies: - If the bus connection to the I-slave is interrupted, the DP master calls OB 122 (I/O access error) if there is direct access to the relevant transfer areas. - If the bus connection to the DP master is interrupted, the I-slave calls OB 122 (I/O access error) if there is direct access to the relevant transfer areas. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 89 Functions 5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves) Reaction of the transfer areas to mode changes Table 5- 3 Reaction of the transfer areas to mode changes DP master I-slave Reaction of DP master input transfer areas Reaction of I-slave input transfer areas RUNSTOP RUN No updating of the process image The input transfer areas retain their current values. (no access error) STOPRUN RUN The input transfer areas are updated by the cyclic user program via the process image. The input transfer areas are updated via the process image. RUN RUNSTOP The I-slave sets the input transfer areas on the DP master to "0". No updating of the process image RUN STOPRUN The I-slave sets the input transfer areas on the DP master to "0". Prior to processing of the startup program, the input transfer areas are updated via the process image. After the startup program of the I-slave, the input transfer areas of the DP master are updated via the process image. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 90 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Service & Support A The unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle For machine constructors, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry. To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant - from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization. Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drive technology from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants. You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees - even across continents - ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 91 Service & Support Online Support The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service & Support at any time and from any location in the world. You can find Online Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Technical Consulting Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis, definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the creation of the automation solution. Technical Support Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems. You can find Technical Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). Training Extend your competitive edge - through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer. You can find the training courses we offer on the Internet at the following address: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain). Engineering Support Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project. Field Service Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance - to ensure that your machines and plants are always available. Spare parts In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains. Repairs Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to reduce both to a minimum - with our worldwide repair facilities. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 92 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Service & Support Optimization During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing productivity or reducing costs. To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services. Modernization You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization - with comprehensive services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning. Service programs Our service programs are selected service packages for an automation and drives system or product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems. The services of a Service Program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately. Examples of service programs: Service contracts Plant IT Security Services Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence SIMATIC Remote Support Services Advantages at a glance: Reduced downtimes for increased productivity Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks Complete service from one source: fewer interfaces and more know-how Contact At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training, service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products supplied by Industry Automation and Drive Technologies. You can find your personal contact in our contacts database at: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 93 Glossary Automation system Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process chains of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions according to the automation task. Bus A common transfer route to which all nodes are connected; it has two defined ends. In the case of PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire line or a fiber-optic cable. Bus connector Physical connection between the node and bus cable. Bus system All stations physically connected to a bus cable form a bus system. Device In the PROFIBUS environment, "device" is the generic term for: Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC) Distributed I/O systems Field devices (for example, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) Active network components Gateways to AS interface or other fieldbus systems Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, for example, a DP slave by means of PROFIBUS DP. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 94 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Glossary Device In the PROFIBUS environment, "device" is the generic term for: Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC) Distributed I/O systems Field devices (for example, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) Active network components Gateways to AS interface or other fieldbus systems Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, for example, a DP slave by means of PROFIBUS DP. Diagnostics Monitoring functions for the recognition, localization, classification, display and further evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This increases the availability of systems/plants by reducing commissioning times and downtimes. DP master CPU or device that conducts the communication with the DP slaves according to a defined algorithm. To do this, the DP master uses the functions for communication with the DP slaves which are defined by PROFIBUS DP. It acts according to standard EN 50170, Part 3. Master DP slave Slave in the distributed I/O that is operated on the PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS DP protocol and acts according to standard EN 50170, Part 3. The DP slave is addressed by the DP master and provides it with specified functions (I/O data, diagnostics, etc.). Slave DPV1 The designation DPV1 refers to the functional extension of acyclic services (to include new interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1 functionality is integrated in IEC 61158/EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. FDL Fieldbus Data Link (bus access protocol). Step 2 with PROFIBUS. HMI device Human Machine Interface, device for visualization and control of automation processes. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 95 Glossary HSA Highest Station Address. A bus parameter for PROFIBUS. Outputs the highest PROFIBUS address of an active device. PROFIBUS addresses greater than HSA are permitted for passive devices, up to 126. Industrial Ethernet Guideline for setting up Ethernet in an industrial environment. The main difference to the standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and interference immunity of the individual components. I-slave The "I-slave" functionality of a CPU supports the exchange of data with a DP master and can thus be used, for example, as intelligent preprocessing unit of partial processes. The I-slave is connected in its role as DP slave to a "higher-level" DP master. Master A master device that is in possession of the token can send data to other devices and request data from them (= active device). PCF Polymer Cladded Fiber (plastic-covered glass fiber) POF Polymer Optical Fiber (plastic fiber-optic cable made of light-conducting plastics) Process image Address area in the system memory of the DP master. At the start of the cyclic program the signal states of the input modules are transmitted to the process image of the inputs. And the end of cyclic program execution, the process image of the outputs is transmitted to the DP slave as signal state. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, in IEC 61158-2 as "Type 3" standardized, bit-serial fieldbus system. The standard specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties. PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks automation systems and field devices compatible with PROFIBUS at the cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= distributed I/O), FMS (= fieldbus message specification) or PA (process automation). PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 96 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Glossary PROFIBUS address Unique identification of a device connected to PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS address is transmitted in the frame for addressing a device. A PC or programming device has the PROFIBUS address "0". DP masters and DP slaves have a PROFIBUS address in the range from 1 to 125. PROFIBUS device A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical (RS 485) or optical (Polymer Optical Fiber, POF) interface. PROFIBUS DP A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170. DP stands for distributed I/O (fast, real-time capable, cyclic data exchange). From the perspective of the user program, the distributed I/Os are addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized I/Os. PROFINET Open component-based industrial communication system based on Ethernet for distributed automation systems. Communication technology promoted by the PROFIBUS Users Organization. RS 485 Asynchronous data transmission process for PROFIBUS DP to ANSI TIA/EIA-RS485-A. RS 485 repeater Equipment for amplifying bus signals and for coupling segments over long distances. Segment The bus line between two terminating resistors forms a bus segment. A bus segment can contain up to 32 bus nodes. Segments can be coupled, for example, by means of RS 485 repeaters or diagnostics repeaters. Slave Distributed device in a fieldbus system that may exchange data with a master after being requested to do so by the master. Slaves are all DP slaves, for example, such asET 200SP, ET 200MP, ET 200AL. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 97 Glossary Standard mounting rail Standardized metal profile to EN 50022. The standard mounting rail is used for quick snap-on installation of network components, such as OLM, repeaters, etc. Subnet Part of a network whose parameters must be synchronized with the devices (e.g., with PROFIBUS). A subnet includes the bus components and all connected stations. SynchronousCycle Name for synchronous cycle interrupt OB in STEP 7. Target-Rotation-Time (Ttr) Bus parameter for PROFIBUS. The token is the send permission for a device on PROFIBUS. A device compares a token rotation time it has measured with the TargetRotation-Time and controls the sending of frames with high priority or low priority based on this comparison. Terminating resistor Component that terminates the ends of a data transmission line to prevent reflections in the transmission medium. Terminator Terminating resistor of bus segments with transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps. The power supply is separate from the bus nodes. TIA Portal Totally Integrated Automation Portal Topology Structure of a network. Common structures are line topology, ring topology, star topology and tree topology. Transmission rate Specifies the number of bits transmitted per second. Watchdog Mechanism for monitoring the readiness for operation. PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 98 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Index A Acyclic data exchange, 74 Address assignment, 45 Addressing, 42 B Bus connector IP20, 22 M12 with IP65, 24 Bus parameters Adapting, 50 Description, 52 Value ranges, 54 Bus profile, user-defined, 54 Bus terminal M12, 24 RS 485, 24 Diagnostics, 60 Topology, 37 Diagnostics, 57 Display alarms, 58 I-slave, 89 Isochronous mode, errors and remedies, 70 Diagnostics repeater Description, 29 Display, diagnostic messages, 58 DP master Operated as, 80 DP slave, 43 Operated as, 80 DP/AS-i F-Link, 31 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, 31 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, 31 DP/DP coupler, 30 DP/PA bus link, 31 E Example of isochronous mode, 64 C Cable configuration, 49 Cables, 19 Calculate bus times, 51 CANopen module, 30 Communication I/O communication, 14 Communication load, 51 Components, (See network components) Configuration, 42 Configuring isochronous mode, 68 Basic procedure, 67 DP slave, 68 Requirements, 66 Updating the process image partition, 69 Connecting PROFIBUS DP with PROFINET IO, 41 Constant bus cycle time, 55 D Data exchange between IO systems, 81 Diagnostic repeater Cascade depth, 37 F FastConnect system, 20 Fiber-optic, 27 Fiber-optic cables, 25 Glass, 27 Optical ring, 49 PCF, 26 Plastic, 26 G GAP factor, 54 H Hardware Configuring, 42 Parameter assignment, 42 PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 99 Index I I/O addresses, 69 I/O communication, 14 Identification and maintenance data (I&M data), 61 IE/PB Link PN, 30 Increasing DP cycle time, 56 Installation, 17 Active network components, 29 Bus connection, 22 Cables, 19 FastConnect, 20 Topology, 35 Interrupt OBs, 77 Interrupts DPV1, 77 Isochronous mode, 70 IO system Data exchange, 81 I-slave (intelligent DP slave) Diagnostics, 89 Interrupt behavior, 89 Isochronous mode Change parameters, 71 Description, 62 Diagnostics, 70 Dialog box for isochronous mode, 71 Example, 64 Interrupts, 70 Sequence, in principle, 65 IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, 30, 40 M M12 Bus connector, 24 Bus terminating resistor, 24 M12 bus terminating resistor, 24 Maximum cable lengths Maximum cable lengths, 20 N Network, 18 electrical, conducted, 29 Optical, 33 optical, electrical, 18 Selection criteria, 18 Topology, 35 Network components Bus connections, 20 CANopen module, 30 Diagnostics repeater, 29 DP/AS-i F-Link, 31 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, 31 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, 31 DP/DP coupler, 30 Fiber-optic cables, 25 IE/PB Link PN, 30 IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, 30 OBT, Optical Bus Terminal, 33 OLM, Optical Link Module, 33 PROFIBUS terminator, 30 RS 485 cables, 19 RS485, 29 Network settings, 46 O Optical Bus Terminal, OBT, 33 Optical Link Module, OLM Description, 33 Topology, 40 Optical ring, 49, 50 P Parameter assignment, 42 Process image partition, 69 PROFIBUS Address, 45 Devices, 12 Installation, 17 PROFIBUS DP, 11 Protocols, 10 RS 485 cables, 19 PROFIBUS address, 45 Change, 45 HSA, 46 PROFIBUS DP Applications, 11 Assigning the DP slave, 43 Connecting with PROFINET, 41 Definition, 10 Devices and designations, 13 Interface, 16 PROFIBUS DP interface Properties, 16 Representation in STEP 7, 16 PROFIBUS terminator, 30 Profiles for network settings DP, Standard, 46 User-defined, 48 PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 100 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC Index PROFINET Proxy functionality, 41 Programming isochronous mode, 70 R Retry limit, 50, 54 RS 485 cables, 20 RS485 repeater Description, 29 Topology, 35 S Slot time, 50, 54 SYNC/FREEZE, 75 Synchronization, sequence, 65 Synchronous cycle interrupt, 69 Synchronous cycle interrupt OB, SynchronousCycle, 70 SynchronousCycle, synchronous cycle interrupt OB, 70 T Target Rotation Time, 54 Topology Connecting PROFIBUS DP with PROFINET, 41 OLM, 40 RS485 repeater, 35 WLAN, 40 PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual, 12/2014, A5E03775446-AC 101 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide to documentation SIMATIC S7-1500 / ET 200MP / ET 200SP CM PtP - Configurations for pointto-point connections Function Manual 2 ___________________ Introduction Basics of serial 3 ___________________ communication Configuring / parameter 4 ___________________ assignment Programming communication using instructions 5 ___________ ___________________ 6 Startup and Diagnostics ___________________ A Service & Support 12/2017 A5E37509394-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E37509394-AB 01/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation provides important information on configuring and commissioning the point-to-point communication modules for the S7-1500 (ET 200MP) and ET 200SP. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows-based computers Proficiency with STEP 7 Validity of the documentation This documentation is valid for all point-to-point communication modules of the S7-1500 (ET 200MP) and the ET 200SP when used with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12 and higher. Conventions The term "CPU" is used in this manual both for the CPUs of the S7-1500 as well as for interface modules of distributed I/O systems, such as the IM 155-5. Please also observe notes labeled as follows: Note The notes contain important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on part of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal The products can be recycled due to their low pollutant content. For environmentally compliant recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company certified for the disposal of electronic waste. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 3 Preface Additional assistance Information on the offers of our Technical Support are available in the appendix Service & Support (Page 206). The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 8 2 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 13 3 4 2.1 Overview of the communication modules ...............................................................................13 2.2 Overview of the processing steps ...........................................................................................16 2.3 Overview of instructions ..........................................................................................................17 Basics of serial communication ............................................................................................................. 19 3.1 Serial data transmission..........................................................................................................19 3.2 Transmission security .............................................................................................................20 3.3 RS232 mode ...........................................................................................................................23 3.4 RS422 mode ...........................................................................................................................26 3.5 RS485 mode ...........................................................................................................................29 3.6 Handshake procedure.............................................................................................................32 Configuring / parameter assignment ...................................................................................................... 37 4.1 Configuring / parameter assignment of a communication module .........................................37 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 Communication using Freeport ...............................................................................................38 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Freeport .................................................38 Data transmission with Freeport .............................................................................................39 Sending data with Freeport .....................................................................................................40 Receiving data with Freeport ..................................................................................................41 Code transparency..................................................................................................................45 Receive buffer .........................................................................................................................46 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 Communication using 3964(R) ...............................................................................................47 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with 3964(R) .................................................47 Data transmission with 3964(R) procedure ............................................................................48 Control characters ...................................................................................................................48 Block check character .............................................................................................................49 Sending data with 3964(R) .....................................................................................................49 Receiving data with 3964(R) ...................................................................................................51 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 Communication through Modbus RTU ...................................................................................52 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Modbus RTU .........................................52 Overview of modbus communication ......................................................................................53 Function Codes .......................................................................................................................57 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 Communication using USS .....................................................................................................59 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Modbus USS .........................................59 Overview of USS communication ...........................................................................................60 Overview of functions..............................................................................................................62 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 5 Table of contents 5 Programming - communication using instructions .................................................................................. 63 5.1 Overview of point-to-point programming ................................................................................ 63 5.2 Overview of Modbus programming ........................................................................................ 66 5.3 Overview of USS programming ............................................................................................. 68 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.1.1 5.4.1.2 5.4.1.3 5.4.1.4 5.4.1.5 5.4.1.6 5.4.1.7 5.4.1.8 5.4.1.9 5.4.1.10 5.4.1.11 5.4.1.12 5.4.1.13 5.4.1.14 5.4.1.15 5.4.1.16 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.2.4 5.4.2.5 5.4.2.6 5.4.3 5.4.3.1 5.4.3.2 5.4.3.3 5.4.3.4 Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 70 Point-to-point .......................................................................................................................... 70 Overview of Freeport communication .................................................................................... 70 Using the instructions ............................................................................................................. 72 General parameters for Freeport operations ......................................................................... 73 Port_Config: Configure PtP communication port ................................................................... 75 Send_Config: Configure PtP sender ...................................................................................... 78 Receive_Config: Configure PtP recipient ............................................................................... 80 P3964_Config: Configuring the 3964(R) protocol .................................................................. 85 Send_P2P: Sending data ....................................................................................................... 87 Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations ...................... 90 Receive_P2P: Receiving data................................................................................................ 91 Receive_Reset: Clear receive buffer ..................................................................................... 93 Signal_Get: Read status ........................................................................................................ 94 Signal_Set: Set accompanying signals .................................................................................. 96 Get_Features: Get extended functions .................................................................................. 98 Set_Features: Set extended functions ................................................................................. 100 Error messages .................................................................................................................... 102 MODBUS (RTU)................................................................................................................... 118 Overview of the Modbus RTU communication .................................................................... 118 Modbus_Comm_Load: Configure communication module for Modbus ............................... 120 Modbus_Master: Communicate as Modbus master ............................................................ 125 Modbus_Slave...................................................................................................................... 133 Frame structure .................................................................................................................... 142 Error messages .................................................................................................................... 151 USS ...................................................................................................................................... 167 Overview of USS communication ........................................................................................ 167 Requirements for using the USS protocol ........................................................................... 169 USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31: Communication by means of a USS network ....... 172 USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31: Preparing and displaying data for the drive ..................................................................................................................................... 176 USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31: Read data from drive .................................... 180 USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31: Change data in drive ..................................... 182 General information on drive setup ...................................................................................... 184 Error messages .................................................................................................................... 188 5.4.3.5 5.4.3.6 5.4.3.7 5.4.3.8 6 Startup and Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................204 6.1 Startup characteristics ......................................................................................................... 204 6.2 Diagnostic functions ............................................................................................................. 204 6.3 Diagnostic interrupts ............................................................................................................ 205 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Table of contents A Service & Support ............................................................................................................................... 206 A.1 Service & Support .................................................................................................................206 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 209 Index................................................................................................................................................... 213 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 7 Guide to documentation 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Guide to documentation General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 9 Guide to documentation "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Guide to documentation SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 11 Guide to documentation SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 2 Introduction 2.1 Overview of the communication modules Automation systems encompass a wide range of components. These also include communication modules. A simple possibility of data exchange is provided by serial communication via point-to-point connections. Customizing to a wide range of communication partners is possible by setting the communication parameters at a lower layer of the OSI layer model (see section Transmission security (Page 20)). Communication through point-to-point connection with S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP takes place exclusively by means of communication modules (CM) with serial interfaces. SIMATIC S7 offers a number of modules that provide the physical interface and fundamental protocol mechanisms for this purpose. RS232: An interface that can coordinate the communication between the partners through additional accompanying signals. RS422/RS485: An interface that allows longer lines through the use of differential voltages as transmission technology and also enables structures with more than 2 devices through a bus structure (RS485). Instructions that carry out the coordination between the CPU and CM (Communication Module) are available to transfer data from the CPU to the respective modules. They inform the user program about a successful transfer or the receipt of new data (in systems without a SIMATIC CPU users have to program the function of these instructions themselves). The function and use of the PtP communication modules is described in this function manual. Overview of components and order numbers Tabular overview of communication modules and their application suitability Communication module CM PtP RS232 BA S7-1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP Article number X X - 6ES7540-1AD00-0AA0 CM PtP RS422/485 BA X X - 6ES7540-1AB00-0AA0 CM PtP RS232 HF X X - 6ES7541-1AD00-0AB0 CM PtP RS422/485 HF X X - 6ES7541-1AB00-0AB0 CM PtP (ET 200SP) - - X 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0 1) 2) 1) BA = Basic 2) HF = High Feature CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 13 Introduction 2.1 Overview of the communication modules Overview of components and interfaces Tabular overview of communication modules and their functions. Communication module Interface Protocols Connection technology Freeport CM PtP RS232 BA RS232 CM PtP RS422/485 BA 3964(R) Modbus Master Modbus Slave - D-Sub 9-pin X D-Sub 15-pin X X RS422 X X - - X - X RS485 X - - - X - X CM PtP RS232 HF RS232 X X X X X X - CM PtP RS422/485 HF RS422 X X X X X - X RS485 X - X X X - X RS232 X X X X X RS422 2) X X X X X RS485 X - X X X CM PtP (ET 200SP) - USSMaster X - ET 200SP BaseUnit 1) 1) BaseUnit with terminals instead of D-Sub; assignment depending on physical transmission properties 2) The CM PtP communication module can also be used for multipoint connection in RS422 mode Overview of components and data transmission rates The communication modules can send and receive data with different data transmission rates. The table below shows the assignment to the individual communication modules. Communication module Data transmission rate in bps 300 600 1200 2400 CM PtP RS232 BA X X X X CM PtP RS422/485 BA X X X X CM PtP RS232 HF X X X CM PtP RS422/485 HF X X CM PtP (ET 200SP) X X 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115200 X X X - - - - X X X - - - - X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Overview of components and receive buffer size Each communication module has a buffer to temporarily store received frames. The table below shows the assignment of the maximum size of an individual frame as well as the size of the memory for the individual communication modules. Module Receive buffer size KB Max. frame length KB Bufferable frames CM PtP RS232 BA 2 1 255 CM PtP RS422/485 BA 2 1 255 CM PtP RS232 HF 8 4 255 CM PtP RS422/485 HF 8 4 255 CM PtP (ET 200SP) 4 2 255 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Introduction 2.1 Overview of the communication modules Accompanying signals and data flow control Software data flow control with XON/XOFF The Freeport protocol supports data flow control with XON/XOFF via the RS232 and RS422 interfaces. Hardware data flow control with RTS/CTS The Freeport protocol supports data flow control with RTS/CTS via the RS232 interface. Automatic operation of accompanying signals The RS232 accompanying signals can be controlled with the Freeport, Modbus master and Modbus slave protocols by means of the RS232 interface. (Only available if hardware data flow control is not activated.) Protocols of the communication modules You may set up a communication connection with different protocols, depending on the communication modules used: Freeport: Transmission of ASCII character strings without specified protocol format 3964(R): Communication between programmable logic controllers (master/master communication) Modbus RTU: Communication between programmable logic controllers (master/slave communication) The communication module can be the master as well as the slave. USS: Communication between a programmable logic controller and a drive (master/slave communication) Communication is tailored to the drive technology requirements. The communication module can only be master. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 15 Introduction 2.2 Overview of the processing steps 2.2 Overview of the processing steps Point-to-point connection The system provides various networking options for the exchange of data between two or more communication partners. The simplest form of data interchange is via a point-to-point connection between two communication partners. The communication module (CM) forms the interface between a programmable logic controller and a communication partner. Data is sent in serial mode via point-to-point connection with the communication module. Configuring / parameter assignment Configuring the communication module includes the arrangement of the communication module in the device configuration of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as well as the settings of the specific protocol parameters in the properties dialog of the communication module (static configuration). Programming Programming includes the program-specific connection of the communication module to the corresponding CPU by means of the user program. You program the communication module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Communication between CPU, communication module and a communication partner takes place through instructions (Page 70). A number of instructions are available for the S7-1500 and S7-1200 automation systems. You can use these instructions to initiate and control communication in the user program as well as influence the configuration for runtime (dynamic configuration). For more information, please refer to Overview of instructions (Page 17) and the STEP 7 (TIA Portal) online help. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Introduction 2.3 Overview of instructions 2.3 Overview of instructions Note CPU quantity structures The point-to-point instructions communicate with the communication modules by reading or writing data records. When using the instructions, you should therefore check the configuration limits of the CPU for reading and writing data records. If multiple instructions need to read or write data records simultaneously on a CPU, there may need to be a gap between the calls of each instruction by the user program. Overview of the instructions The communication protocols are implemented on the communication module. The protocol is used to adapt the interface of the communication module to the interface of the communication partner. Communication between the CPU, the communication module and a communication partner takes place by means of special instructions and protocols that support the corresponding communication modules. The instructions form the software interface between the CPU and the communication module. They must be called cyclically from the user program. Data transmission takes place across several cycles. The instructions are part of STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The instructions are available in the "Instructions" task card under Communication > Communication processor. They apply to all listed communication modules if they support the required function. Table 2- 1 Instructions for PtP Instruction Meaning Send_P2P (Page 87) The instruction Send_P2P allows you to send data to a communication partner. Receive_P2P (Page 91) The instruction Receive_P2P allows you to receive data from a communication partner. Receive_Reset (Page 93) The instruction Receive_Reset allows you to clear the receive buffer of the communication module. Port_Config (Page 75) The instruction Port_Config allows you to dynamically assign basic interface parameters. Send_Config (Page 78) The instruction Send_Config (send configuration) allows you to dynamically assign serial send parameters of a port. Receive_Config (Page 80) The instruction Receive_Config (receive configuration) allows you to dynamically assign serial receive parameters of a port. P3964_Config (Page 85) The instruction P3964_Config (protocol configuration) allows you to dynamically configure the parameters of the 3964(R) procedure. Signal_Get (Page 94) The instruction Signal_Get allows you to read the RS232 accompanying signals. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 17 Introduction 2.3 Overview of instructions Instruction Meaning Signal_Set (Page 96) The instruction Signal_Set allows you to set the RS232 accompanying signals. Get_Features (Page 98) The instruction Get_Features allows you to read the extended functions supported by the communication module. Set_Features (Page 100) The instruction Set_Features allows you to activate the extended functions supported by the communication module. Table 2- 2 Instructions for Modbus Instruction Meaning Modbus_Master (Page 125) The Modbus_Master instruction allows you to communicate as Modbus master by means of the PtP port. Modbus_Slave (Page 133) The Modbus_Slave instruction allows you to communicate as Modbus slave by means of the PtP port. Modbus_Comm_Load (Page 120) The Modbus_Comm_Load instruction allows you to configure the port of the communication module for Modbus RTU. Table 2- 3 Instructions for USS Instruction Meaning USS_Port_Scan (Page 172) The instruction USS_Port_Scan allows you to communicate by means of the USS network. USS_Drive_Control (Page 176) The instruction USS_Drive_Control allows you to swap data with the drive. USS_Read_Param (Page 180) The instruction USS_Read_Param allows you to read parameters from the drive. USS_Write_Param (Page 182) The instruction USS_Write_Param allows you to change parameters in the drive. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.1 3 Serial data transmission During serial data transmission, the individual bits of a character of information to be transmitted are sent successively in a defined sequence. Bidirectional data traffic - operating mode In the context of bidirectional data traffic, we distinguish between two operating modes for the communication module: Half-duplex operation The data is exchanged between the communication partners in both directions alternately. In half-duplex operation one communication partner is sending and the other communication partner is receiving at the same time. In the process one line is alternately used for sending or receiving. Full-duplex operation The data is exchanged between one or more communication partners in both directions simultaneously, which means you can send and receive data at the same time. This process requires one line for sending and one line for receiving. Asynchronous data transmission Serial data transmission is performed asynchronously with communication modules. The socalled time base synchronism (a fixed timing code used in the transmission of a fixed character string) is only upheld during transmission of a character. Each character to be sent is preceded by a synchronization impulse, also called start bit. The length of the start-bit transmission determines the clock pulse. The end of character transmission is formed by one or two stop bits. Declarations In addition to start and stop bits, additional declarations must be made between the sending and receiving partners before serial transmission can take place. These include: Data transmission rate Frame start and end criteria (e.g., character delay time) Parity Number of data bits (7 or 8 bits/characters) Number of stop bits (1 or 2) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 19 Basics of serial communication 3.2 Transmission security 3.2 Transmission security Transmission security plays an important role in the transmission of data and in the selection of the transmission procedure. Generally speaking, the more layers of the reference model are applied, the higher the transmission security. Classification of existing protocols The figure below illustrates how the protocols of the communication module fit into the reference model. Figure 3-1 Classification of the existing protocols of the communication module in the reference model CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.2 Transmission security Transmission security with Freeport Transmission security when using Freeport: When data is sent with Freeport, there are no data security measures other than the use of a parity bit. This means data transmission with Freeport is very efficient, but data security is not guaranteed. A certain degree of data security can be achieved through parameter assignment of the frame start and frame end conditions. Using the parity bit ensures that the inversion of a bit in a character to be sent can be recognized. If two or more bits of a character are inverted, however, there is no guarantee that these errors are still detected. To increase transmission security, you can, for example, implement a checksum, a frame length specification, or configurable end conditions. These measures must be implemented by the user. A further increase in data security can be achieved by means of acknowledgment frames in response to send or receive frames. This is the case with high-grade protocols for data communication (ISO 7-layer reference model). Transmission security with 3964(R) The parity bit is used to increase data security; depending on the configuration, it completes the number of data bits to be transmitted to form an even or odd number. Using the parity bit ensures that the inversion of a bit in a character to be sent can be recognized. If two or more bits of a character are inverted, however, these errors can no longer be reliably detected. If parity is set to "none", no parity bit is transmitted. This setup reduces transmission security. Two different procedures for data transmission can be used, either with or without a block check character: Data transmission without block check character: 3964 Transmission security is achieved by means of a specified frame structure, frame breakdown, and frame repetitions. Data transmission with block check character: 3964R The high degree of transmission security is achieved by means of a specified frame structure and breakdown, frame repetitions, as well as inclusion of a block check character (BCC). In this manual, the term 3964(R) is used when descriptions and notes refer to both data transmission modes. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 21 Basics of serial communication 3.2 Transmission security Transmission integrity for Modbus and USS The parity bit is used to increase transmission security; depending on the configuration, it completes the number of data bits to be transmitted to form an even or odd number. Using the parity bit ensures that the inversion of a bit in a character to be sent can be recognized. If two or more bits of a character are inverted, however, this error can no longer be clearly detected. If parity is set to "none", no parity bit is transmitted. This setup reduces transmission security. The CRC (cyclic redundancy check) is additionally used with Modbus. With this method additional redundancy in the form of a so-called CRC value is added for each data block of the user data before data transmission. This is a check value calculated by using a specific procedure that can be used to detect any errors that may occur during transmission. A BCC (block check character) is additionally used with USS. The block check character is formed during the receipt and is compared with the received BCC after the entire frame has been read in. If these two characters do not match, the frame is not evaluated. (If a character is incorrectly transmitted, an error is reliably detected. If an even number of characters are incorrectly transmitted, an error can no longer be reliably detected.) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.3 RS232 mode 3.3 RS232 mode The following communication modules support RS232 mode: CM PtP RS232 BA CM PtP RS232 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) In RS232 mode, data is sent via two lines. A separate line is available for the send direction and the receive direction. Simultaneous sending and receiving is possible (full duplex). RS232 signals In addition to the TXD, RXD and GND signals, the communication module provides additional RS232 signals when using RS232 hardware: TXD Output Transmitted data; Interface is transmitting RXD Input Received data; Interface is receiving GND Functional ground; isolated DCD Input Data carrier detect; Carrier signal when connecting a modem. The communication partner signals that it recognizes incoming data. DTR Output Data terminal ready; DTR set to "ON": Communication module switched on, ready for operation DTR set to "OFF": Communication module not switched on, not ready for operation DSR Input Data set ready; DSR set to "ON": Communication partner signals readiness for operation DSR set to "OFF": Communication partner not switched on, not ready for operation RTS Output Request to send; RTS set to "ON": Communication module ready to send; signals to the communication partner that there is data ready to send RTS set to "OFF": Communication module not ready to send CTS Input Clear to send; Communication partner can receive data from the communication module (response to RTS = ON of the communication module) CTS set to "ON": Signals readiness to receive to the communication partner CTS set to "OFF": Signals "Not ready to receive" to the communication partner RI Input Incoming call for connecting a modem (ring indicator) After power on of the communication module, the output signals are in the OFF state (inactive). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 23 Basics of serial communication 3.3 RS232 mode You configure the operation of the DTR/DSR and RTS/CTS control signals in the user interface of the communication module. The RS232 signals cannot be influenced in case of: configured data flow control "Hardware RTS always switched" (corresponds to automatic operation of the accompanying signals) configured data flow control "Hardware RTS always ON" (corresponds to hardware flow control with RTS/CTS) configured data flow control "Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR" For more information, refer to chapter Handshake procedure (Page 32). Connecting cables The following standard connecting cables of various lengths are available for connecting to a communication partner which also has a 9-pin D-sub male connector: Article number 6ES7902-1AB00-0AA0 Product type designation 6ES7902-1AC00-0AA0 6ES7902-1AD00-0AA0 S7 connecting cable RS232 Cable length 5m 10 m 15 m The table below shows the pin assignment for the 9-pin D-sub male connector of the respective communication module. Male connector* Pin Designation Input/ output Required/optional for selffabrication 1 DCD Input Optional 2 RXD Input Required 3 TXD Output Required 4 DTR Output Optional 5 GND -- Required 6 DSR Input Optional 7 RTS Output Optional 8 CTS Input Optional 9 RI Input Optional * View from the front The cable or the connector of the listed connecting cables are not available for order as separate items. If you fabricate your own connecting cables you must remember that unconnected inputs at the communication partner may have to be connected to open-circuit potential. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.3 RS232 mode Note that you may only use shielded connector enclosures. A large surface area of the cable shield must be in contact with the connector enclosure on both ends. CAUTION Never connect cable shield with GND Never connect the cable shield with the GND as this could destroy the interfaces. GND must always be connected on both sides (pin 5), otherwise the interface modules could be destroyed. The figure below illustrates the cable for a point-to-point connection between a communication module and a communication partner. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 25 Basics of serial communication 3.4 RS422 mode 3.4 RS422 mode The following communication modules support RS422 mode: CM PtP RS422/485 BA CM PtP RS422/485 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) In RS422 mode, data is transmitted via two line pairs (four-wire operation). A separate line pair is available for the send direction and the receive direction. Simultaneous sending and receiving is possible (full duplex). All communication partners must be capable of simultaneous operation of a sender and receiver unit. The data can be exchanged simultaneously between two or more communication partners. In RS422 multipoint mode, only one slave may send data at any given time. Interface operating modes The following table is a summary of the interface operating modes for the various communication modules and protocols. The communication module can be used in the following topologies in RS422 mode: Link between two nodes: Point-to-point connection Link between several nodes: Multipoint connection (only available with CM PtP (ET 200SP)) Operating mode Description Full duplex (RS422) four-wire operation (point-to-point connection) Both devices have the same priority in this operating mode. Full duplex (RS422) four-wire operation (multipoint master) The communication module can be used as multipoint master. Full duplex (RS422) four-wire operation (multipoint slave) The communication module can be used as multipoint slave. The following applies for a multipoint master/slave topology in RS422 mode: The sender of the master is interconnected with the receivers of all slaves. The senders of the slaves are interconnected with the master's receiver. Only the receiver of the master and the receiver of one slave have a default setting. All other slaves operate without default settings. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.4 RS422 mode RS422 signals The following signals are present on the communication module when using the RS422 hardware: T (A) - Output Transmitted data T (B) + Output Transmitted data R (A) - Input Received data R (B) + Input Received data GND Functional ground; isolated Connecting cables The following standard connecting cables of various lengths are available for connecting to a communication partner which also has a 15-pin D-sub female connector: Article number 6ES7902-3AB00-0AA0 Product type designation 6ES7902-3AC00-0AA0 6ES7902-3AG00-0AA0 S7 connecting cable RS422 Cable length 5m 10 m 50 m The table below shows the pin assignment of the 15-pin D-sub female connector of the respective communication module. Socket* Pin Designation Input/output 1 - - 2 T (A) - Output 3 - - 4 R (A) - Input 5 - - 6 - - 7 - - 8 GND - 9 T (B) + Output 10 - - 11 R (B) + Input 12 - - 13 - - 14 - - 15 - - * View from the front The cable or the connector of the listed connecting cables are not available for order as separate items. If you fabricate your own connecting cables you must remember that unconnected inputs at the communication partner may have to be connected to open-circuit potential. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 27 Basics of serial communication 3.4 RS422 mode Note that you may only use shielded connector enclosures. A large surface area of the cable shield must be in contact with the connector enclosure on both ends. CAUTION Never connect cable shield with GND Never connect the cable shield with the GND as this could destroy the interfaces. GND must always be connected on both ends (pin 8), otherwise the interface modules could be destroyed. The figure below illustrates the cable for a point-to-point connection between a communication module and a communication partner. Note This cable type can be used in the following lengths for a communication module as communication partner: max. 1200 m at 19200 baud, max. 500 m at 38400 baud max. 250 m at 115200 Baud. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.5 RS485 mode 3.5 RS485 mode The following communication modules support RS485 mode: CM PtP RS422/485 BA CM PtP RS422/485 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) In RS485 mode, data is transmitted via one line pair (two-wire operation). The line pair is available alternately for the send and receive directions. It is possible to either send or receive (half duplex). On completion of a send operation, operation is immediately switched to receive mode (ready to receive). Send mode is reset again as soon as a new send job is received. Interface operating modes The following table is a summary of the interface operating modes for the various communication modules and protocols. Operating mode Description Half duplex (RS485) twowire operation Operating mode for point-to-point connection or multipoint connection (multipoint) in two-wire operation. The communication module can be the master as well as the slave. If you operate the Freeport in RS485 mode (half duplex, two-wire operation), you must make provisions in the user program to ensure that only one device sends data at any given time. If more than one device sends data at the same time, the frames are corrupted. Modbus automatically ensures that only one device is sending. Changeover times for RS485 communication module in half duplex mode A maximum time of 0.1 ms is set for the changeover between sending and receiving. RS485 signals The following signals are present on the communication module when using the RS485 hardware: R (A)/T (A) - Input/output Received/transmitted data R (B)/T (B) + Input/output Received/transmitted data GND Functional ground; isolated CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 29 Basics of serial communication 3.5 RS485 mode Connecting cables The table below shows the pin assignment of the 15-pin D-sub female connector of the respective communication module. Socket* Pin Designation Input/output 1 - - 2 - - 3 - - 4 R (A)/T (A) - Input/output 5 - - 6 - - 7 - - 8 GND - 9 - - 10 - - 11 R (B)/T (B) + Input/output 12 - - 13 - - 14 - - 15 - - * View from the front When fabricating the connecting cables, you need to remember that unconnected inputs at the communication partner may have to be connected to open-circuit potential. Note that you may only use shielded connector enclosures. A large surface area of the cable shield must be in contact with the connector enclosure on both ends. CAUTION Never connect cable shield with GND Never connect the cable shield with the GND as this could destroy the interfaces. GND must always be connected on both ends (pin 8), otherwise the interface modules could be destroyed. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.5 RS485 mode The figure below illustrates the cable for a point-to-point connection between a communication module and a communication partner. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 31 Basics of serial communication 3.6 Handshake procedure 3.6 Handshake procedure Introduction Handshaking controls the data flow between two communication partners. The use of the handshaking method prevents data loss during transmission if the devices are operating at different speeds. We can basically distinguish between the following methods: Table 3- 1 Overview of methods and interfaces Method RS232 RS422 RS485 Software data flow control XON/XOFF X X - Hardware data flow control (RTS/CTS) X - - Automatic operation of accompanying signals X - - Software data flow control Software data flow control is implemented as follows on the communication module: XON/XOFF - As soon as the communication module has been set to the "XON/XOFF" operating mode by means of parameter assignment, it sends the XON character, thereby allowing the communication partner to send data. - On reaching the configured maximum number of frames, or 16 characters ahead of receive buffer overflow, the communication module sends the XOFF character, thereby requesting that the communication partners stop sending. If the communication partner nonetheless continues to send data, an error message is generated if the receive buffer overflows. Data received in the last frame is discarded. - As soon as a frame has been fetched by the CPU and the receive buffer is ready to receive data again, the communication module sends the XON character. - If the communication module receives the XOFF character during sending, it cancels the current send operation until it receives a XON again from its communication partner. If no XON is received within a specific configurable time, send operation is canceled and a corresponding error message is output. Note You can configure the characters for XON and XOFF (any ASCII character). During parameter assignment of the XON/XOFF software data flow control, user data may not contain any of the configured XON or XOFF characters. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.6 Handshake procedure Hardware data flow control Note The DTR/DSR signals do not have to be wired for "Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR" parameter assignment. If "Hardware RTS always ON" is configured, it is imperative that you fully wire the interface signals used. Make sure that the local RTS (out) is connected with the CTS (in) of the communication partner and the local CTS is connected with the RTS of the communication partner. Accordingly, the local DTR must be connected with the DSR of the communication partner and the local DSR with the DTR of the communication partner. Figure 3-2 Wiring of the interface signals CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 33 Basics of serial communication 3.6 Handshake procedure Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR - As soon as the communication module has been set to an operating mode with "Hardware RTS always ON" through parameter assignment, it outputs the RTS = ON signal to the communication partner to indicate its ready state. - RTS is set to OFF as soon as the configured maximum number of frames or 16 characters before buffer overflow is reached. If the communication partner nonetheless continues to send data, an error message is generated on overflow of the receive buffer. Data received in the last frame is discarded. - RTS is reset to ON as soon as the frame has been fetched by the CPU and the receive buffer is ready to receive data again. - If CTS switches to OFF during the send operation, the communication module interrupts the send operation until CTS is reset to ON. If CTS is not reset to ON within a specific configurable time, the send operation is canceled and a corresponding error message is output. Hardware RTS always ON The "Hardware RTS always ON" mode corresponds to the "Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR" mode. However, you also need to wire DTR and DSR. - As soon as the communication module has been set set to an operating mode with "Hardware RTS always ON" through parameter assignment, it sets DTR = ON and RTS = ON to signal its general ready state to the communication partner. - RTS is set to OFF as soon as the configured maximum number of frames or 16 characters before buffer overflow is reached. If the communication partner nonetheless continues to send data, an error message is generated on overflow of the receive buffer. Data received in the last frame is discarded. - RTS is reset to ON as soon as the frame has been fetched by the CPU and the receive buffer is ready to receive data again. - If CTS switches to OFF during the send operation, the communication module interrupts the send operation until CTS is reset to ON. If CTS is not reset to ON within a specific configurable time, the send operation is canceled and a corresponding error message is output. - A switch from DSR = ON to DSR = OFF cancels an active send job and triggers an error message. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 34 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Basics of serial communication 3.6 Handshake procedure Automatic operation of accompanying signals Hardware RTS always switched "Hardware RTS always switched" is implemented as follows on the communication module: - As soon as the communication module is set to the operating mode with "Hardware RTS always switched" through parameter assignment, it sets the line RTS to OFF and DTR to ON (communication module ready for operation). It is not possible to send frames until the DSR line is set to ON. No data is sent via the RS232C interface as long as DSR is set to OFF. A send job is canceled and a corresponding error message is generated. - When a send job is pending, RTS is set to ON and the configured RTS ON delay starts. On expiration of the data output time, the system checks whether the communication partner has set CTS to ON. If so, the data is sent via the RS232 interface. - If the CTS line is not set to ON within the RTS ON delay, or if CTS changes to OFF during transmission, the send job is aborted and an error message is generated. - Once the data has been sent and the configured clear RTS OFF delay has elapsed, the RTS line is set to OFF. The system does not wait for CTS to change to OFF. - It is always possible to receive data via the RS232 interface. There will be no reaction if there is a danger of the receive buffer of the communication module overflowing. - A switch from DSR = ON to DSR = OFF cancels an active send job and triggers an error message. Note Set the "RTS ON delay" in such a way that the communication partner is able to enter the ready to receive state before the time elapses. Set the "RTS OFF delay" in such a way that the communication partner is able to receive the last characters of the frame completely before RTS is set to OFF and the send request is canceled. Note When automatic operation of the RS232 signals is configured, RTS and DTR cannot be controlled by means of the corresponding instruction! CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 35 Basics of serial communication 3.6 Handshake procedure Time diagram The figure below shows the chronological sequence of a send job with configured data flow control "Hardware RTS always switched": Figure 3-3 Time diagram for Hardware RTS always switched Additional information Note Operation of DTR/DSR or RTS/CTS is accepted by the communication module with the following settings: * Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR * Hardware RTS always ON * Hardware RTS always switched CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 36 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.1 4 Configuring / parameter assignment of a communication module The following sections contain explanations on the following protocols and their parameters: Communication using Freeport (Page 38) Communication using 3964(R) (Page 47) Communication through Modbus RTU (Page 52) Communication using USS (Page 59) This information is required to carry out the parameter assignment and subsequently programming of the communication in accordance with the used protocol. Configuration and parameter assignment are carried out in the device view of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and in the properties dialog of the communication module. Some configurations can also be changed during runtime by means of the corresponding "Config" instructions (Port_Config, Send_Config, Receive_Config, P3964_Config). Procedure for setting up point-to-point communication The procedure does not depend on the communication module used. 1. Configure an S7-1500 design with CPU and communication module in the device view of the STEP 7 (TIA Portal) hardware editor. 2. You assign the parameters of the communication module interface (protocol, protocol parameters, addresses) in the "General" area of the "Properties" tab. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 37 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport 4.2 Communication using Freeport 4.2.1 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Freeport Requirements The hardware is set up and there is an electrical connection to the link partner. The project has been created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU has been inserted into the hardware configuration. Procedure - Hardware configuration 1. Insert the CM PtP communication module into the hardware configuration. 2. Set the communication parameters according to the link partner: For example, transmission speed, character frame, frame start and frame end These parameters are transferred to the CM PtP communication module every time the CPU is started. Procedure - Programming 1. Create the data structure that is to include the data to be transferred. Sending data 1. Insert the instructions from the PtP Communication library: Send_P2P for sending data 2. Interconnect the input and output parameters of the instruction, e.g.: - HWID from the system tags at the PORT input - Data structure with the data to be sent at the BUFFER input Note: During operation, each positive edge at the REQ input will send the specified data area once. The block must be called until DONE indicates that the data was transferred to the module. In case of an error, setting ERROR once and displaying the corresponding information in STATUS indicates that the data was not transferred. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 38 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport Receiving data: 1. Insert the instructions from the PtP Communication library: Receive_P2P for sending data 2. Interconnect the input and output parameters of the instruction, e.g.: - HWID from the system tags at the PORT input - Data structure for storage of received data at the BUFFER input Note: A high level at the NDR output during operation indicates that new data was received and stored in the specified data area. The block must be called until NDR=TRUE. The received data can then be analyzed and the RECEIVE_P2P can be called again. Optional additions Instructions that end in _Config can be used optionally to change the parameters of the hardware configuration during operation of the user program. The changes are not saved in the hardware configuration. They are overwritten at the next restart. The instructions Signal_Set and Signal_Get can be used to control the RS232 accompanying signals individually if automatic operation is not a suitable option. 4.2.2 Data transmission with Freeport Introduction Freeport is a freely programmable frame-based protocol that is also known as ASCII protocol. The Freeport protocol controls data transmission by means of a point-to-point connection between the communication module and a communication partner. The Freeport protocol contains the physical layer (Layer 1). The Freeport protocol supports sending and receiving of messages with any structure (all characters from 00H through FFH (for character frames with 8 data bits) or from 00H through 7FH (for character frames with 7 data bits)). The frame start and end criteria must be configured both for the send and the receive direction. The start and end criteria can be configured differently. Instructions are available for communication with a communication partner (see Overview of point-to-point programming (Page 63)). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 39 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport 4.2.3 Sending data with Freeport Specifying settings for sending To send a message, the partner must be informed of the start and end of the message. These settings can be set fixed in the hardware configuration or be adjusted during runtime by using the instruction Send_CFG. You can select one of the following options or also combine them: Send break before frame start You can specify that an additional Break is sent at the beginning of each message transmission on expiration of the RTS ON delay time. The duration of the "Break" is specified in bit times. Compliance with the send break can be deactivated if other mechanisms are used for synchronization. Send idle line You can specify that an additional "Idle Line" signal is output at the start of each message transmission. The duration of the "Idle Line" is specified in bit times. Compliance with the send break can be deactivated if other mechanisms are used for synchronization. RTS ON delay You can configure the time that has to expire after the RTS (Request to send) before the actual data transmission starts (RS232 only). RTS OFF delay You can configure the time that has to expire after transmission has been completed before the RTS signal is deactivated (RS232 only). Send up to and including the end delimiter You can configure the number of end delimiters (1 or 2) and their value. All data up to the end delimiter(s) is sent, independent of the selected frame length. The end delimiter must be included in the data to be sent. Data is sent only up to and including the delimiter, even if the specified data length is longer. Number of appended characters Input of the number of appended characters. Sending takes place up to the configured length. The end delimiter(s) is/are appended automatically. Depending on the number of end delimiters, one to five characters more than the number specified at the instruction are sent to the partner. Note If you combine "Send break before frame start", "Send idle line" and "RTS ON delay", these are processed in the order "RTS ON delay", "Send break before frame start" and "Send idle line". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 40 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport 4.2.4 Receiving data with Freeport Specifying the message start For data transmission with Freeport, you can choose between several different start criteria. The start criterion defines when a frame starts. Once a criterion that indicates the start of the message is met, the data stream is scanned for message end criteria. Here you select the settings that correspond to the properties of the sending communication partner. Two different methods are available for detecting the message start: Start on any character Any character can be used to define the start of the message (default). This means that the first character sent at the start of communication, or after the frame end has been detected, will be identified as the first character of a message. Start on special condition The start of the message is detected based on the following specified conditions. - After detection of a line break The frame start is not accepted unless a break has been received beforehand, in other words, it is compulsory for the partner to send a break before sending a frame. - After detection of an idle line The frame start is not accepted until the configured idle line duration has expired. This procedure requires a minimum interval between two frames. - After receipt of a start character The frame start is detected when the configured start character is identified. - After detection of one or several start sequences The frame start is detected when the configured string with a length of up to five characters is identified. You can configure up to 4 start sequences. The start sequences that are up to 5 characters long can also contain "don't care characters". Example: Table 4- 1 Configured start conditions Start condition 1. character 2. character 3. character 4. character 5. character 1 0x68 xx xx 0x68 xx 2 0x10 0xaa xx xx xx 3 0xdc 0xaa xx xx xx 4 0xe5 xx xx xx xx : The following message has been received: 68 10 aa 68 bb 10 aa 16 The evaluation of the start criteria begins with the receipt of the first character 0x68. The 2nd and 3rd characters are free. When the 4th character (second 0x68) is received, the first start condition is met and further evaluation of the message begins. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 41 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport Specifying the message end You can choose from several different end criteria for data transmission using the Freeport protocol. The end criterion defines the point at which a frame has been received completely. Configurable end criteria are: Recognize message end by message timeout Recognize message end by response timeout After character delay time elapses (default) After receipt of a fixed frame length After receipt of a maximum number of characters Read message length from message After receipt of an end sequence Message timeout When data is received, the end of frame is detected on expiration of the configured time for transferring a frame. Time measurement starts after the start criterion has been met. Response timeout The response time is used to monitor the response behavior of the communication partner. If a valid frame start is not recognized after the completion of a send job, the send job is acknowledged with a corresponding message. The actual end criterion has to be configured additionally. Expiration of character delay time When data is received, the frame end is detected when the configured maximum time between successive characters is exceeded (character delay time). The value is specified in bit times. In this case, the character delay time must be set in such a way as to ensure that it expires between two consecutive frames. However, it should be of sufficient length to exclude incorrect identification of the end of the frame whenever the communication partner performs a transmission pause within a frame. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 42 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport Fixed frame length When data is received, the end of the frame is identified after the configured frame length has been reached. An error message is output and the frame is discarded if the character delay time expires (if activated ) before the fixed frame length has been reached. Please note the following if the frame length of the received characters does not match the fixed configured frame length: All characters received after the fixed configured frame length has been reached will be discarded until a new start criterion is detected. An error message is output and the frame is discarded if another (activated) end criterion is met before the fixed frame length has been reached. Maximum number of characters When receiving data, the end of the frame is recognized after the declared number of characters have arrived. This setting can be combined with the "Character delay time" settings. The frame received is also assessed as free of error if another end condition occurs, regardless of whether the maximum number of characters has been reached. Please note the following if the frame length of the received characters does not match the configured maximum frame length: All characters received after the configured maximum number of characters has been reached will be discarded until a new start criterion (e.g. "Idle Line") is detected. If a different (activated) end criterion is met before the configured maximum number of characters has been reached, this "frame part" is assessed as a valid frame and the partner waits for a new start criterion. All characters received prior to fulfillment of a new start criterion are discarded. Note If no further end criterion is activated, the fixed frame length and maximum number of characters will respond in the same way. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 43 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport Message length in the message When data is received, the frame end is detected when the frame length sent with the received frame has been reached. The following parameters define the characters to be used for evaluation of the message length: Offset of length field in message In the message, the value defines the position of the character that is to be used to determine the message length. You can set values from 0 to 4095 characters, depending on the buffer size. Size of length field This value specifies the number of characters as of the first evaluation position to be used to determine the message length. You can set values of 1, 2 and 4 characters. Number of characters not counted in length specification Number of characters appended to the frame without counting towards the frame length. This value defines the number of bytes at the end of the frame which should not be included in the evaluation of the message length. You can set values from 0 to 255 characters. Example: Parameter assignments for "Message length in the message" Offset of length field in message: 3. byte ("2" has to be configured as offset) Size of length field: 1 byte Number of characters not counted in length 3 bytes specification: Message Number of characters not counted in length specification Start character Address Length field Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte ... Byte X Checksum End delimiter Byte X+1 Byte X+2 Byte X+3 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 44 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport End sequence When data is received, the end of the frame is identified when the configured end sequence (max. 5 characters) is received. The end sequence which is up to 5 characters long can also contain "don't care characters". The received data is applied by the CPU, including the end sequence. If you are working with the end sequence, transmission is not code-transparent and you must exclude the presence of end code in the user data. Note Frame end sequence If there is only one end delimiter, the entry must take place in the 5th line. If there are two end delimiters, the entries must take place in the 4th and 5th line (no gaps). The same applies to the use of additional characters. 4.2.5 Code transparency Code transparency Code-transparent means that any character combinations can occur in the user data without the end criterion being recognized. The code transparency of the procedure depends on the selection of the configured end criterion and flow control: With specified end sequence or using XON/XOFF flow control - Not code-transparent End criterion character delay time, fixed frame length, maximum frame length, message timeout, or response timeout and message length in the message - Code-transparent CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 45 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.2 Communication using Freeport 4.2.6 Receive buffer Receive buffer of the module The communication modules have a receive buffer that stores the received frames temporarily until they are transmitted to the CPU. The receive buffer is implemented as a ring buffer, which means the frames are transmitted to the CPU in the order in which they were received until the receive buffer is full. If additional frames are received once the buffer is full, the oldest frame is overwritten. If "Prevent overwriting" was configured, a corresponding message is generated when the receive buffer is full. All further frames are rejected until the receive buffer is ready to receive new ones. During the parameter assignment, you can specify whether the receive buffer should be deleted during startup. You can also specify the range of values (1 to 255) for the number of buffered receive frames. The receive buffer of the module may have a size of up to 8 KB, depending on the communication module used (see chapter Introduction (Page 13)). The frame has a maximum length of 4 KB. This means that each communication module is capable of buffering at least two frames. If you always want to transfer the last frame received to the CPU, you must set the value "1" for the number of buffered frames and deactivate overwrite protection. Note If continuous reading of the received data in the user program is interrupted for a certain time, you may find when the receive data is requested again, that the communication module first sends older frames before the CPU receives the most recent one. At the time of interruption, the old frame had already been transmitted from the receive buffer of the communication module and prepared for transmission to the CPU. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 46 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.3 Communication using 3964(R) 4.3 Communication using 3964(R) 4.3.1 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with 3964(R) Requirements The hardware is set up and there is an electrical connection to the link partner. The project has been created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU has been inserted into the hardware configuration. Procedure - Hardware configuration 1. Insert the CM PtP communication module into the hardware configuration. 2. Set the communication parameters according to the link partner: For example, transmission speed, character frame, frame start and frame end These parameters are transferred to the CM PtP communication module every time the CPU is started. Procedure - Programming 1. Create the data structure that is to include the data to be transferred. Sending data: 1. Insert the instructions from the PtP Communication library: Send_P2P for sending data 2. Interconnect the input and output parameters of the instruction, e.g.: - HWID from the system tags at the PORT input - Data structure with the data to be sent at the BUFFER input Note: During operation, each positive edge at the REQ input will send the specified data area once. The block must be called until DONE indicates that the data was transferred to the module. In case of an error, setting ERROR once and displaying the corresponding information in STATUS indicates that the data was not transferred. Receiving data: 1. Insert the instructions from the PtP Communication library: Receive_P2P for sending data 2. Interconnect the input and output parameters of the instruction, e.g.: - HWID from the system tags at the PORT input - Data structure for storage of received data at the BUFFER input Note: A high level at the NDR output during operation indicates that new data was received and stored in the specified data area. The block must be called until NDR=TRUE. The received data can then be analyzed and the RECEIVE_P2P can be called again. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 47 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.3 Communication using 3964(R) Optional additions Instructions that end in _Config can be used optionally to change the parameters of the hardware configuration during operation of the user program. The changes are not saved in the hardware configuration. They are overwritten at the next restart. The instructions Signal_Set and Signal_Get can be used to control the RS232 accompanying signals individually if automatic operation is not a suitable option. 4.3.2 Data transmission with 3964(R) procedure Introduction The 3964(R) procedure controls point-to-point data exchange between the communication module and a communication partner. and contains both the physical layer (layer 1) and the link layer (layer 2). Instructions are available for communication with a communication partner (see Overview of point-to-point programming (Page 63)). 4.3.3 Control characters Introduction During data transmission, the 3964(R) procedure adds control characters to the information data (link layer). The communication partner can use these control characters to check whether it has received all data completely and without errors. Control characters of the 3964(R) procedure The 3964(R) procedure evaluates the following control characters: STX DLE ETX NAK BCC Start of Text Data Link Escape End of Text Negative Acknowledge Block Check Character (only with 3964R) Beginning of the character string to be transmitted Data transmission changeover End of the character string to be transmitted Negative acknowledgment Block check character 02H 10H 03H 15H BCC is formed and monitored automatically in the communication module. The block check character is not transmitted as frame content to the CPU. Note If the DLE character is transmitted as an information character within a frame, it is sent twice (DLE duplication) to distinguish it from the DLE control character during connection establishment and termination. The receiver reverses the DLE duplication. Priority With the 3964(R) procedure, one communication partner must be assigned a higher and the other a lower priority. If both partners start to establish a connection at the same time, the partner having lower priority will cancel its send job. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 48 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.3 Communication using 3964(R) 4.3.4 Block check character Block check character With the 3964R transfer protocol, data security is enhanced by sending an additional block check character (BCC = Block Check Character). The block check character is the even longitudinal parity (EXOR logic operation of all data bytes) of a sent or received block. Its calculation begins with the first byte of user data (first byte of the frame) after the connection establishment, and ends after the DLE ETX character at connection termination. Note With DLE duplication, the DLE character is included twice in the BCC calculation. 4.3.5 Sending data with 3964(R) Connection establishment for sending The 3964(R) procedure sends the STX control character to set up the connection. If the communication partner responds with the DLE character before the acknowledgment delay time expires, the procedure switches to send mode. If the communication partner answers with NAK or any other character (except for DLE or STX), or the acknowledgment delay time expires without a response, the procedure tries to set up the connection again. After the configured number of unsuccessful setup attempts, the procedure cancels the connection setup and sends the NAK character to the communication partner. The communication module outputs a corresponding error message. Sending data If the connection is successfully established, the user data contained in the output buffer of the communication module is sent to the communication partner with the selected transmission parameters (a DLE recognized in the user data is doubled during the send job). The communication partner monitors the time intervals between the incoming characters. The interval between two characters must not exceed the character delay time. Monitoring of the character delay time starts immediately after the connection has been established. If the communication partner sends the NAK character during an active send operation, the procedure cancels the block and repeats it as described above, beginning with connection establishment. If a different character is sent, the procedure first waits for the character delay time to expire and then sends the NAK character to set the communication partner to idle state. Then, the procedure restarts sending with the connection setup STX. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 49 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.3 Communication using 3964(R) Connection termination during sending Once the contents of the buffer have been sent, the procedure appends the DLE and ETX characters and (only with 3964R) the block checksum BCC as the end identifier, and then waits for an acknowledgment character. If the communication partner sends the DLE characters within the acknowledgment delay time, the data block has been received without errors. If the communication partner responds with NAK, any other character (except DLE), or with a corrupted character, or if the acknowledgment delay time expires without a response, the procedure restarts sending with the connection setup STX. After the configured number of attempts to send, the procedure stops the process and sends an NAK to the communication partner. The communication module outputs a corresponding error message. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 50 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.3 Communication using 3964(R) 4.3.6 Receiving data with 3964(R) Connection setup for receiving In idle state, when there is no send job to be processed, the procedure waits for the communication partner to set up the connection. A wait time is started (wait time = acknowledgment delay time - 10 ms, however, maximum of 400 ms) if no free receive buffer is available during the connection setup with STX. An error message is generated if no free receive buffer is available on expiration of this time. The procedure sends the NAK character and returns to the idle state. Otherwise, the procedure sends a DLE and receives the data as described above. The acknowledgment delay time should be set to the same value at both communication partners. If the procedure receives any character (except for STX or NAK) while in idle state, it waits for the character delay time (CDT) to expire and then sends the NAK character. The communication module outputs a corresponding error message. Receiving data After a successful connection establishment, the incoming receive characters are saved to the receive buffer. If two consecutive DLE characters are received, only one of these is saved to the receive buffer. After connection has been established and after each receive character, the procedure waits for the next character during the character delay time. If this period expires before another character is received, an NAK is sent to the communication partner. The communication module outputs a corresponding error message. A retry is then expected. If transmission errors occur during receiving (frame errors, parity errors, etc.), the procedure continues to receive data until the connection is terminated and then sends an NAK to the communication partner. A retry is then expected. If the block still cannot be received without errors after the specified number of transfer attempts, or if the communication partner does not start the retry within a block wait time of 4 seconds, the procedure cancels the receive operation. The communication module reports the first corrupted transfer and the final cancelation. Connection setup for receiving If the 3964 procedure detects a DLE ETX string, it terminates the receive operation and confirms a successfully received block by sending a DLE to the communication partner. In the case of a receive error, an NAK is sent to the communication partner. A retry is then expected. The 3964R procedure terminates the receive operation after having detected the DLE ETX BCC string. It compares the received block check character BCC with the internally calculated longitudinal parity. If the BCC is correct and no other receive errors have occurred, the 3964R procedure sends a DLE and returns to the idle state. The communication module informs the control system that new receive data is available. If the BCC is faulty or a different receive error occurs, an NAK is sent to the communication partner. A retry is then expected. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 51 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU 4.4.1 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Modbus RTU Requirements The hardware is set up and there is an electrical connection to the link partner. The project has been created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU has been inserted into the hardware configuration. Procedure - Hardware configuration 1. Insert the CM PtP communication module into the hardware configuration. 2. Select the Modbus RTU protocol. Note: With Modbus RTU, most communication parameters are set using the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction during CPU start. Procedure - Programming 1. Create the data structure that is to include the data to be transferred. 2. Integrate the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction into the cyclic sequence for parameter assignment of the communication module. 3. Interconnect the HWID from the system tags at the PORT input. 4. Call the instruction until successful execution is displayed at the DONE output. Do not call the instruction again thereafter unless you want to change the communication parameters. Operation as Modbus master: 1. Insert the Modbus_Master instruction from the MODBUS (RTU) library: 2. Interconnect the data structure with the data to be sent at the BUFFER input. 3. Interconnect the instance DB of the Modbus_Master instruction at the MB_DB input of the Modbus_Comm_Load. Note: During operation, each positive edge at the REQ input will process the specified job once. The block must be called until DONE indicates that the data was transferred to the module. In case of an error, setting ERROR once and displaying the corresponding information in STATUS indicates that the data was not transferred. Operation as Modbus slave: 1. Insert the Modbus_Slave instruction from the MODBUS (RTU) library. 2. Interconnect the data structure with the Modbus hold registers. 3. Enter the Modbus slave address at the MB_ADDR input. 4. Interconnect the instance DB of the Modbus_Master instruction at the MB_DB input of the Modbus_Comm_Load. Note: A high level at the NDR output during operation indicates that new data was received and stored in the specified data area. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 52 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU 4.4.2 Overview of modbus communication Modbus RTU communication Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is a standard protocol for communication in the network and uses the electrical RS232 or RS422/485 connection for serial data transmission between Modbus devices in the network. Modbus RTU uses a master/slave network in which the entire communication is triggered by only one master device while the slaves can only respond to the request of the master. The master sends a request to a slave address and only this slave address responds to the command (exception: broadcast frames to slave address 0 which are not acknowledged by the slaves). The procedure used is a code-transparent, asynchronous half-duplex procedure. Data transmission is carried out without handshake. Position in the system environment The following Modbus description refers to the use of the corresponding communication modules. CM PtP RS232 HF CM PtP RS422/485 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) Function of the coupling With the corresponding communication modules and the related instructions, you can establish a communication connection between a remote Modbus control system and a SIMATIC S7. The GOULD-MODBUS protocol in RTU format is used for transmission. Function codes 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, 15 and 16 are used for communication between a communication module operated as a Modbus slave and a master system (see Function Codes (Page 57)). If a SIMATIC S7 communication module is operated as a Modbus master, function codes 11 and 12 are also available. SIMATIC S7 as a Modbus slave The master has the initiative for transmission, the communication module works as a slave. frame traffic from slave to slave is not possible. The instruction Modbus_Slave makes the data available on a SIMATIC data area in accordance with the mapping specification or stores them. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 53 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU SIMATIC S7 as a Modbus master As master, the communication module initiates transmission and, after outputting a request frame, it waits for the configured response monitoring time for a response frame from the slave. If the slave does not respond, the master repeats the request in accordance with the configuration before it outputs an error message. frame structure The data exchange "Master-Slave" and/or "Slave-Master" begins with the slave address, followed by the function code. Then the data are transferred. The structure of the data field depends on the function code used. The CRC check is transmitted at the end of the frame. ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC-CHECK Byte/Word Byte n byte 2 byte ADDRESS Modbus slave address * Standard address: 1 to 247 (bytes) * Extended station address: 1 to 65535 (word) FUNCTION Modbus Function Codes (Page 57) DATA frame data: Management and net data depending on the function code CRC-CHECK frame checksum Slave address The slave address can be range from 1 to 247 (byte) or 1 to 65535 (word). The address is used to address a defined slave on the bus. Broadcast Message The master uses slave address 0 to address all slaves on the bus. Broadcast messages are only permitted in conjunction with writing Function codes 05, 06, 15 and 16. A broadcast message is not followed by a response frame from the slave. Data Field DATA The data field DATA is used to transfer the function code-specific data such as: Bytecount, Coil_Startaddress, Register_Startaddress; Number_of_Coils, Number_of_Registers, ... . For details, see "Function Codes (Page 57)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 54 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU CRC-Check The end of the frame is identified by means of the CRC 16 checksum consisting of 2 bytes. It is calculated by the following polynominal: x16 + x15 + x2 + 1. The low byte is transmitted first, followed by the high byte. End of frame The end of frame is recognized when no transmission takes place during the time period required for the transmission of three and a half characters (3.5 times character delay time) (see Modbus Protocol Reference Guide). This end of frame TIME_OUT therefore depends on the data transmission rate and is indicated in bit times (35 bit times are fix coded internally; further bit times can be configured in addition at the instruction). The Modbus frame received from the connection partner is evaluated and formally checked after the end of frame TIME_OUT is received. Exception responses On recognition of an error in the request frame from the master, for example, register address illegal, the slave sets the highest value bit in the function code of the response frame. This step is followed by transmission of a byte exception code that describes the cause of the error. A detailed description of the meaning of the above-mentioned parameters is available in the "GOULD MODICON Modbus Protocol" (not part of this documentation). Exception code frame The exception code frame from the slave has the following structure: for example, slave address 5, function code 5, exception code 2 Response frame from the slave EXCEPTION_CODE_xx: 05H Slave address 85H Function code 02H Exception code (1...7) xxH CRC checksum "Low" xxH CRC checksum "High" On receipt of an exception code frame by the driver, the current job is completed with error. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 55 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU The following error codes are defined in accordance with the Modbus specification: Error code Meaning in accordance with Modbus specification Cause - Short Description * 1 Illegal function Illegal function code 2 Illegal data address Slave has illegal data address 3 Illegal data value Slave has illegal data value 4 Failure in Associated Device Slave has internal error 5 Acknowledge Function is carried out 6 Busy, Rejected message Slave is not ready to receive 7 Negative acknowledgement The function cannot be carried out. * Check slave for further details. RS232 mode The following communication modules support RS232 mode: CM PtP RS232 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) For more information on RS232 mode, see the chapter RS232 mode (Page 23). For information on hardware data flow control and on automatic operation of the accompanying signals, refer to the Handshake procedure (Page 32) chapter. RS422/485 mode The following communication modules support RS422/485 mode: CM PtP RS422/485 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) For more information on RS422/485 mode, see the chapters RS422 mode (Page 26) and RS485 mode (Page 29). FAQ For more information, see the following FAQs in the Siemens Industry Online Support: Entry ID 68202723 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/68202723) Entry ID 58386780 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58386780) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 56 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU 4.4.3 Function Codes Used function codes The function code defines the meaning of the frame. It also defines the structure of a frame. The following function codes are supported by the communication module: Function code Function in accordance with MODBUS specification Range 01 Read Coil Status 1 to 2000 bit/request 02 Read Input Status 1 to 2000 bit/request 03 Read Holding Registers 1 to 124/125 bit/request (124 at extended station address) 04 Read Input Registers 1 to 124/125 bit/request (124 at extended station address) 05 Force Single Coil 1 bit/request 06 Preset Single Register 1 word/request 08 * Loop Back Test Read slave status or reset event counter in the slave 11 * Fetch Communications Event Counter (only master) - 15 Force Multiple Coils 1 to 1968 bits/request 16 Preset Multiple Registers 1 to 123 bit/request * Diagnostic information for slave communication Modbus function code 00 sends a broadcast message to all slaves (without slave response). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 57 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.4 Communication through Modbus RTU Assignment of the Modbus addresses to the SIMATIC addresses The table below shows the assignment of the Modbus addresses to the SIMATIC addresses. Modbus FC S7-1500 Function Declaration Address area Declaration CPU address Read bits Output 1 - 9999 Process image of outputs Q0.0 - Q1249.6 Read bits Input 10001 - 19999 Process image of inputs I0.0 - I1249.6 Read words Holding Register 40001 - 49999 or 400001 - 465535 DW0 - DW19998 or DW0 - DW131068 The M address area depends on the CPU 04 Read words Input 30001 - 39999 Process image of inputs IW0 to IW19996 05 2) Write bits Output 1 - 9999 Process image of outputs Q0.0 to Q1248.7 06 Write words Holding Register 40001 - 49999 or 400001 - 465535 DW0 - DW19998 or DW0 - DW131068 The M address area depends on the CPU Write bits Output 1 - 9999 Process image of outputs Q0.0 - Q1249.6 Write words Holding Register 40001 - 49999 or 400001 - 465535 DW0 - DW19998 or DW0 - DW131068 The M address area depends on the CPU 1) 01 02 03 2) 15 16 2) 1) FC = function code 2) The value of the HR_Start_Offset determines whether data areas or bit memory address areas can be addressed with the FCs 03, 05 and 16 in the SIMATIC CPU. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 58 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.5 Communication using USS 4.5 Communication using USS 4.5.1 Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Modbus USS Requirements The hardware is set up and there is an electrical connection to the link partner. The project has been created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU has been inserted into the hardware configuration. Procedure - Hardware configuration 1. Insert the CM PtP communication module into the hardware configuration. 2. Select the Freeport protocol and set the communication parameters. Note: The USS functionality is implemented by the instructions. Procedure - Programming 1. Insert the USS_Port_Scan instruction from the USS Communication library. 2. Interconnect the HWID from the system tags at the PORT input. 3. Insert the USS_Drive_Control instruction from the USS Communication library. 4. Interconnect the USS_DB data structure in the instance DB of the USS_Drive_Control instruction to the USS_DB input of the USS_Port_Scan instruction. The data structure contains the data to be transferred for all drives. 5. Insert an additional call of the USS_Drive_Control instruction for each additional axis that is to be connected via the USS interface. Use the same instance DB each time. The distinction takes place with the help of the USS address that you specify at the DRIVE input of the USS_Drive_Control instruction. This means you have access to the control and feedback data at the parameters of the respective call for each drive. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 59 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.5 Communication using USS 4.5.2 Overview of USS communication Position in the system environment The following USS description refers to the use of the corresponding communication modules. CM PtP RS232 BA CM PtP RS422/485 BA CM PtP RS232 HF CM PtP RS422/485 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) Introduction The USS(R) protocol (Universal Serial Interface Protocol) is a basic serial data transmission protocol designed to meet the requirements of drive technology. The USS protocol defines an access method based on the master-slave principle for communication via a serial bus. One master and up to 16 drives (slaves) can be connected to the bus. The individual drives are selected by the master using an address character in the frame. A drive can never send anything without first being initiated by the master. Therefore, direct data transmission between individual drives is not possible. Communication functions in half-duplex mode. The master function cannot be transferred. Drive technology requires specific response times for the control tasks and therefore strict cyclical frame traffic: The master continuously sends frames (job frames) to the drives and expects a response frame from each addressed drive. A drive must send a response frame if it has a received a frame without errors and it was addressed in this frame. A drive may not send if these conditions are not met or the drive was addressed in the broadcast. The connection with the respective drives exists for the master once it receives a response frame from the drive after a specified processing time (response delay time). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 60 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Configuring / parameter assignment 4.5 Communication using USS frame structure Each frame begins with a start character (STX), followed by the length specification (LGE) and the address byte (ADR). The data field comes after that. The frame ends with the block check character (BCC). The frame length includes the user data (quantity n), the address byte (ADR) and the data verification character (BCC). STX LGE ADR 1 2 ... N BCC For single-word (16-bit) data, the high byte is sent first followed by the low byte. Correspondingly, with double-word data the high word is sent first, followed by the low word. The length of a frame is specified in bytes. Data encryption The data is encrypted as follows: STX: 1 byte, start of text, 02H LGE: 1 byte, contains the frame length as a binary number ADR: 1 byte, contains the slave address and frame type in binary code Data fields: One byte each, content depending on job BCC: 1 byte, block check character Data transmission procedure The master ensures cyclic data transmission in frames. The master addresses all slave devices one after another with a job frame. The nodes addressed respond with a response frame. In accordance with the master-slave procedure, the slave must send the response frame to the master after it has received the job frame. Only then can the master address the next slave. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 61 Configuring / parameter assignment 4.5 Communication using USS Data field in the frame The data field is divided into two areas: the parameter area (PKW) and the process data area (PZD). STX LGE ADR Parameter (PKW) Process data (PZD) BCC Parameter area (PKW) The PKW area handles parameter transmission between two communication partners (e.g., controller and drive). This involves, for example, reading and writing parameter values and reading parameter descriptions and the associated text. The PKW interface generally contains jobs for operation and display, maintenance and diagnostics. Process data area (PZD) The PZD area consists of signals that are required for automation: - Control words and setpoints from the master to the slave - Status words and actual values from the slave to the master The contents of the parameter area and process data area are defined by the slave drives. For additional information on this, refer to the drive documentation. 4.5.3 Overview of functions Transmission sequence The instructions process the data transmission cyclically with up to 16 drive slaves. Only one job is active for each drive at any one time. Performance features: Creation of data storage areas for communication, depending on the bus configuration Execution and monitoring of PKW jobs Monitoring of the complete system and troubleshooting Communication with the CPU Access to the drive functions Reading the drive parameters Writing the drive parameters CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 62 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.1 5 Overview of point-to-point programming Data exchange using Freeport or 3964(R) communication You must make the send data available in data blocks or in the bit memory address area in the user program of the corresponding CPU. A receive buffer is available in the communication module for the receive data. A corresponding data block is set up in the data block. In the user program of the CPU, the following instructions carry out the data transfer between the CPU and the communication module. Send_P2P Receive_P2P The receive buffer can be deleted with the instruction Receive_Reset. Dynamic configuration by means of the user program As an alternative to or in addition to the parameter assignment of the communication module interface described in section Configuring / parameter assignment of a communication module (Page 37), it may be advisable in certain application areas to set up the communication dynamically, i.e., program-controlled by a specific application. All parameters assigned in the properties dialog of the communication module can also be changed during runtime by means of one of the following "Config" instructions: Port_Config, Send_Config, Receive_Config, P3964_Config CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 63 Programming - communication using instructions 5.1 Overview of point-to-point programming Program calls for point-to-point communication - sequence The figure below shows the function of the point-to-point instructions for communication between the user program and communication partner. PtP instructions Application Data exchange between CPU, communication module and communication partner (communication) Instruction Send_P2P (Page 87) Description The instruction Send_P2P (send point-to-point data) can be used to send data to the communication partner. Call up the instruction Send_P2P to send data using the Freeport protocol. You have to call the instruction cyclically until you receive a corresponding acknowledgement at the output parameters of the instruction. Note: During parameter assignment of the XON/XOFF data flow control, user data may not contain any of the configured XON or XOFF characters. Default settings are DC1 = 11H for XON and DC3 = 13H for XOFF. Receive_P2P (Page 91) The instruction Receive_P2P (receive point-to-point data) can be used to pick up the messages received in the communication module from a communication partner. Call the Receive_P2P instruction cyclically to receive data using the Freeport protocol. The instruction indicates at the NDR parameter if new received data is available. To signal the start and end of a message transmission, you need to define criteria in the Freeport protocol which identify the start and end of the message. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 64 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.1 Overview of point-to-point programming Application Instruction Description Deletion of the receive buffer Receive_Reset (Page 93) The instruction Receive_Reset (delete receive buffer) allows you to clear the receive buffer of the communication module. Dynamic parameter Port_Config assignment of the inter- (Page 75) face or the protocol (optional) Send_Config (Page 78) Receive_Config (Page 80) You can use the Port_Config instruction (port configuration) to configure basic interface parameters, such as the data transmission rate, parity and data flow control dynamically through your user program. With the instruction Send_Config(send configuration) you can configure serial send parameters, such as RTS ON delay / RTS OFF delay, dynamically for a point-to-point communication interface. The instruction Receive_Config (receive parameter assignment) allows you to dynamically assign serial receive parameters to a communication module. This instruction configures the conditions that specify the start and the end of a received message. Operation of RS232 accompanying signals Enable Modbus CRC support and diagnostic interrupt P3964_Config (Page 85) The instruction P3964_Config(configure protocol) can be used to dynamically configure protocol parameters of the procedure 3964(R), such as character delay time, priority and block check using your program. Signal_Get (Page 94) With the Signal_Get instruction (get RS232 signals) you can read the current states of the RS232 signals. Signal_Set (Page 96) With the Signal_Set instruction (get RS232 signals), you can set the states of the RS232 signals DTR and RTS. Get_Features (Page 98) You can use the instruction Get_Features(get extended functions) to get information on the Modbus support and on generating diagnostic alarms. Set_Features (Page 100) If supported by the module, you can use the instruction Set_Features(set extended functions) to activate the generation of diagnostic alarms. Procedure for setting up Freeport or 3964(R) communication Requirement: The configuration and parameter assignment of a CPU and a communication module in the device view and in the properties dialog of the communication module are complete. 1. In the project navigation for the CPU select the folder "Program blocks" and open the Main (OB1) in the folder by double-clicking it. The program editor opens. 2. From the "Instructions" task card, "Communication" area select the instructions Send_P2P and Receive_P2P and drag-and-drop them into a network of the Main (OB1). 3. Configure the instructions in accordance with your specifications. 4. Download the hardware configuration and the user program to the CPU. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 65 Programming - communication using instructions 5.2 Overview of Modbus programming 5.2 Overview of Modbus programming Program calls for Modbus communication - sequence The figure below shows the function of the Modbus instructions for communication between user program and Modbus device. (The instructions Send_P2P, Receive_P2P and the Config instruction are required downstream). Modbus instructions Application Instruction Data exchange Modbus_Master between user pro(Page 125) gram and Modbus device (communication) Modbus_Slave (Page 133) Parameter assignment of the interface and the protocol (mandatory) Modbus _Comm_Load (Page 120) Description The Modbus_Master instruction allows you to communicate as Modbus master by means of the PtP port. The CPU can be used as Modbus RTU master device with the Modbus_Master instruction for communication with one or several Modbus slave devices. The Modbus_Slave instruction allows you to communicate as Modbus slave by means of the PtP port. The CPU can be used as Modbus RTU slave device with the Modbus_Slave instruction for communication with one Modbus master device. The instruction Modbus_Comm_Load allows you to configure the port of the communication module for Modbus RTU. You have to run Modbus_Comm_Load to set up PtP port parameters, such as data transmission rate, parity and flow control. Once you have configured the interface for the Modbus RTU protocol, it can only be used by the instruction Modbus_Master or the instruction Modbus_Slave . Note Alternative use of Modbus_Slave and Modbus_Master A communication module can be operated either as master or as slave. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 66 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.3 Overview of USS programming Procedure for setting up Modbus communication Requirement: The configuration and parameter assignment of a CPU and a communication module in the device view and in the properties dialog of the communication module are complete. 1. In the project navigation for the CPU select the folder "Program blocks" and open the Main (OB1) in the folder by double-clicking it. The program editor opens. 2. From the "Instructions" task card, "Communication" area select the instructions for Modbus communication in accordance with your task and drag-and-drop them into a network of the Main (OB1): - The instruction Modbus_Comm_Load configures the port of the communication module for Modbus communication. The Modbus_Comm_Load must be called in Main (OB1) until DONE (or ERROR) is reported. - The instruction Modbus_Master is used for the Modbus master functionality. - The instruction Modbus_Slave is used for the Modbus slave functionality. 3. Configure the instructions in accordance with your specifications. 4. Download the hardware configuration and the user program to the CPU. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 67 Programming - communication using instructions 5.3 Overview of USS programming 5.3 Overview of USS programming Program calls for USS communication - sequence The figure below shows the function of the USS instructions for communication between user program and USS drive. (The instructions Send_P2P, Receive_P2P and the Config instruction are required downstream). USS instructions Application Instruction Description Data communication between CPU, communication module and USS drive USS_Port_Scan (Page 172) The USS_Port_Scan instruction allows you to communicate via a communication module with up to 16 drives using a USS network (must be called cyclically). The instruction USS_Port_Scan controls the communication between CPU and the drives by means of the PtP communication port. A communication with the drive is processed every time you call this function. The instruction USS_Port_Scan is required once: Since most drives features a configurable internal function that monitors the integrity of the communication based on a timeout, the instruction USS_Port_Scan should be called from a time-controlled OB. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 68 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.3 Overview of USS programming Application Instruction Description Exchange data with USS drive USS_Drive_Control (Page 176) The USS_Drive_Control instruction allows you to prepare the send data for a drive and to display the received data. The inputs and outputs of the instruction correspond to the states and operating functions of the drive. The USS_Drive_Control instruction must be called once for each drive. Only one common instance DB is required for all calls of the instruction USS_Drive_Control for a USS network. Interconnect all calls of the instructions USS_Drive_Control for a USS network with the same instance DB. The USS_Drive_Control instruction should be called from the cyclic Main (OB1) of the main program. Read or modify parame- USS_Read_Param ters in USS drive (Page 180) The USS_Read_Param instruction allows you to read parameters from the drive. You use the USS_Read_Param instruction to read the operating parameters of the drive that controls the internal drive functions. The USS_Read_Param instruction should be called from the cyclic Main (OB1) of the main program. USS_Write_Param (Page 182) The USS_Write_Param instruction allows you to change parameters in the drive. The USS_Write_Param instruction should be called from the cyclic Main (OB1) of the main program. Procedure for setting up USS communication Requirement: The configuration and parameter assignment of a CPU and a communication module in the device view and in the properties dialog of the communication module are complete. 1. In the project tree for the CPU, select the "Program blocks" folder and open the desired time-controlled OB by double-clicking it. The program editor opens. 2. From the "Instructions" task card, "Communication" area select the instruction USS_Port_Scan and drag-and-drop it into a network of a time-controlled OB. The instruction USS_Port_Scan allows you to communicate by means of the USS network. 3. In the project navigation for the CPU select the folder "Program blocks" and open the Main (OB1) in the folder by double-clicking it. The program editor opens. 4. From the "Instructions" task card, "Communication" area select the instructions for USS communication in accordance with your task and drag-and-drop them into a network of the Main (OB1): - The instruction USS_Drive_Control is used for data exchange with the drive. - The instruction USS_Read_Param is used for reading parameters from the drive. - The instruction USS_Write_Param is used for changing parameters in the drive. 5. Configure the instructions in accordance with your specifications. 6. Download the hardware configuration and the user program to the CPU. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 69 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1 Point-to-point 5.4.1.1 Overview of Freeport communication STEP 7 offers extended instructions that can be used for Freeport communication with a protocol specified in the user program. These instructions can be divided into two categories: Configuration instructions Communication instructions Note CPU capacity The Freeport instructions communicate with the communication modules by reading or writing data records. When using the instructions, you should therefore check the capacity of the CPU for reading and writing data records. If several instructions need to read or write data records simultaneously on a CPU, the user program may need to create a time offset between the calls of each instruction. Configuration instructions Before the user program can start the Freeport communication, the communication interface and the parameters for sending and receiving of data must be configured. The interface configuration and the data configuration can be set for each CM in the device configuration or with the following instructions of your user program: Port_Config (Page 75) Send_Config (Page 78) Receive_Config (Page 80) P3964_Config (Page 85) NOTICE Device configuration <-> Configuration instructions The device configuration parameters are transferred to the CM upon each Power On of the CPU (return of voltage). The parameters of the configuration instructions are transferred to the CM as defined in your user program. The parameters of the device configuration are not synchronized with the parameters of the configuration instructions, which means the parameters of the configuration instructions are not applied to the CPU device configuration. With your user program, you determine the parameters that apply in the CM and when they apply. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 70 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Communication instructions The user program uses the instructions for Freeport communication to send data to and receive data from the communication interfaces. The CMs send data to and receive data from the communication stations. Send_P2P (Page 87) Receive_P2P (Page 91) Note Data consistency * If the data to be sent is transmitted consistently, it cannot be changed after the positive edge at the REQ parameter until DONE has been set by the Send_P2P instruction. * If the receive data is to be read consistently, it may only be evaluated in the cycle in which NDR = TRUE. The receive buffer can be reset with additional instructions and special RS232 signals can be queried and set. Receive_Reset (Page 93) Signal_Get (Page 94) Signal_Set (Page 96) The following instructions let you read or write extended functions, as long as these are supported by the module. Get_Features (Page 98) Set_Features (Page 100) All Freeport instructions work asynchronously. The instructions must therefore be called until the DONE output parameter indicates that execution is complete. The user program can determine the send and receive status with the help of the query architecture. Send_P2P and Receive_P2P can be run at the same time. The communication modules buffer the send and receive data as required until a module-specific maximum buffer size has been reached. Note Resolution of bit times The number of bit times is specified with the configured data transmission rate for different parameters. Specifying the parameter in bit times makes it independent of the data transmission rate. All parameters with unit of bit times can be specified with a maximum number of 65535. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 71 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.2 Using the instructions The Freeport instructions must be called cyclically to query received data or the end of transmission for a send process. Depending on the data volume, data transmission may take place over several calls (program cycles). If a command is completed with DONE = TRUE or NDR = TRUE, it has been executed without errors. Note Backing up STATUS The DONE, NDR, ERROR and STATUS parameters are only available for one block cycle. To display the STATUS, you should therefore copy it to a free data area. Master Typical sequence for a master: 1. The Send_P2P instruction triggers transmission to the CM. Data transmission is initiated by a positive edge at the REQ input. 2. The Send_P2P instruction is executed in subsequent cycles to query the status of the transmission process. 3. When the Send_P2P instruction signals that transmission is complete at the DONE output, the user code can prepare the receipt of the answer. 4. The Receive_P2P instruction is run repeatedly to query an answer. If the CM has acquired response data, the Receive_P2P instruction copies the response to the CPU and signals that new data has been received at the NDR output. 5. The user program can process the response. 6. Back to step 1 and repetition of the sequence. Slave Typical sequence for a slave: 1. The user program runs the Receive_P2P instruction in each cycle. 2. If the CM has received a request, the Receive_P2P signals that new data is available at the NDR output and the request is copied to the CPU. 3. The user program processes the request and creates a response. 4. The response is returned to the master with the Send_P2P instruction. 5. The Send_P2P instruction must be run repeatedly to ensure that the send process is actually taking place. 6. Back to step 1 and repetition of the sequence. The slave must ensure that Receive_P2P is called up often enough so that a transmission can be received by the master before it cancels the process due to a timeout while waiting for the response. To do so, the user program Receive_P2P can be called from within a cycle OB whose cycle time is sufficiently short so that the master can receive a transmission before the timeout setting expires. If the OB cycle time is set so that two runs can take place during the timeout setting of the master, the user program can receive all transmissions without any losses. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 72 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.3 Table 5- 1 Parameter REQ PORT General parameters for Freeport operations General input parameters of the Freeport instructions Description Data transmission is initiated by a positive edge at the REQ input. Another edge at REQ may only be generated after the command has been completed (DONE or ERROR). Data transmission can take several calls (program cycles), depending on the data volume. When you add a Freeport instruction to your program, STEP 7 prompts you to specify the instance DB (or to have STEP 7 create a corresponding instance DB). Use a unique DB for each PtP instruction call. A port address is assigned during configuration of the communication module. The PORT parameter communicates assignment to a specific communication module to the instruction. You can select a symbolic name for the standard port after the configuration. The assigned CM port value is the "Hardware ID" property of the device configuration with S7-1200/1500 and the "Input address" with S7300/400. The symbolic port name is assigned in the symbol table. The output parameters DONE, NDR, ERROR and STATUS of the Freeport instructions indicate the execution status of the Freeport functions. Table 5- 2 Output parameters DONE, NDR, ERROR and STATUS Parameter DONE Data type Bool Standard FALSE NDR Bool FALSE ERROR Bool FALSE STATUS Word 16#0000 or 16#7000 Description Set to TRUE for one cycle to indicate that the last request was completed with errors; otherwise FALSE. Set to TRUE for one cycle to indicate that new data has been received; otherwise FALSE. Set to TRUE for one cycle to indicate that the last request was completed with errors; the corresponding error code can be found in STATUS; otherwise FALSE. Result status: * If the DONE or NDR bit is set, STATUS is set to 0/16#7000 or to a specific error code. * If the ERROR bit is set, STATUS displays an error code. If none of the bits listed above is set, the instruction can return status results that describe the current status of the function. The value in STATUS is valid until you call this instruction again (with one and the same port address). * CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 73 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Table 5- 3 In/out parameter COM_RST Parameter COM_RST Data type Bool Standard FALSE Description Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. COM_RST is then set back to FALSE. Note: You must set COM_RST to TRUE during startup and should not subsequently change the parameter (that is, do not assign a value when you call the instruction). COM_RST is reset by the instruction following initialization of the instance DB. Note Please note that the parameters DONE, NDR, ERROR and STATUS are only set for one cycle. Table 5- 4 Shared error codes Error code Description 16#0000 No error 16#7000 Function not active 16#7001 Initial call after request started. 16#7002 Subsequent call after request started. 16#8x3A Invalid pointer in parameter x Table 5- 5 Shared error classes of the STATUS parameter Description of the class Error classes Description Port configuration 16#81Ax For the description of frequent errors in the interface configuration Send configuration 16#81Bx For the description of errors in the send configuration Receive configuration 16#81Cx For the description of errors in the receive configuration Sending 16#81Dx For the description of runtime errors during sending Receiving 16#81Ex For the description of runtime errors during receiving RS232 accompanying signals 16#81Fx For the description of errors in connection with signal processing CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 74 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.4 Port_Config: Configure PtP communication port Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Port_Config instruction (port configuration) allows you to change parameters such as the data transmission rate in runtime using your program. The data pending in the CM is deleted with the execution of Port_Config. Configuration changes of Port_Config are saved on the CM and not in the CPU. When the voltage returns, the CM is configured with the data saved in the device configuration. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN PROTOCOL IN Data type S71200/1500 UInt Description FALSE Starts the transmission of data to the CM upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word Word 0 * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. Protocol * 0 = Freeport protocol * 1 = Protocol 3964(R) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 75 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter BAUD PARITY DATABITS STOPBITS FLOWCTRL Declaration IN IN IN IN IN Data type S71200/1500 UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Default Description 6 Data transmission rate of the port: S7300/400/ WinAC Word Word Word Word Word 1 1 1 1 * 1 = 300 bps * 2 = 600 bps * 3 = 1200 bps * 4 = 2400 bps * 5 = 4800 bps * 6 = 9600 bps * 7 = 19200 bps * 8 = 38400 bps * 9 = 57600 bps * 10 = 76800 bps * 11 = 115200 bps Parity of the port: * 1 = no parity * 2 = even parity * 3 = odd parity * 4 = mark parity * 5 = space parity * 6 = any Bits per character: * 1 = 8 data bits * 2 = 7 data bits Stop bits: * 1 = 1 stop bit * 2 = 2 stop bits Flow control: * 1 = no flow control * 2 = XON/XOFF * 3 = Hardware RTS always ON * 4 = Hardware RTS switched * 5 = Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR XONCHAR IN Char 16#0011 Specifies the character that serves as XON character. It is typically a DC1 character (11H). This parameter is only evaluated when software flow control is active. XOFFCHAR IN Char 16#0013 Specifies the character that serves as XOFF character. It is typically a DC3 character (13H). This parameter is only evaluated when software flow control is active. WAITIME IN UInt Word 2000 Specifies how long to wait for an XOFF character after receipt of an XON character or how long to wait for a CTS = ON signal after CTS = OFF (0 to 65535 ms). This parameter is only evaluated when flow control is active. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 76 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter MODE Declaration IN Data type S71200/1500 USInt Default Description 0 Operating mode S7300/400/ WinAC Byte Valid operating modes are: LINE_PRE IN USInt Byte 0 * 0 = Full duplex (RS232) * 1 = Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-topoint) * 2 = Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint master; CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * 3 = Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave; CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * 4 = Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode 1) Receive line initial state Valid initial states are: BRK_DET IN USInt Byte 0 * 0 = "No" initial state 1) * 1 = signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection): Break detection is possible with this initial state. Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". * 2 = signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V: This default setting corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). No break detection is possible with this initial state. Break detection The following settings are permitted: COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE * 0 = break detection deactivated * 1 = break detection activated Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) 1) Required setting for the use of PROFIBUS cables with CM 1241 for RS485 Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 77 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.5 Send_Config: Configure PtP sender Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Send_Config instruction (send configuration) allows you to change send parameters in runtime using your program (conditions that identify the start and the end of the data to be sent). Any data pending in a CM is deleted when Send_Config is executed. Configuration changes of Send_Config are saved on the CM and not in the CPU. The parameters saved in the device configuration are restored once the voltage returns to the CPU or the communication module. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 Description%% FALSE Activates the configuration change upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. RTSONDLY IN UInt Word 0 Number of milliseconds to wait after activation of RTS before a transmission of send data is started. This parameter is only valid if the hardware flow control is active. The valid range is 0 to 65535 ms. The value 0 deactivates the function. RTSOFFDLY IN UInt Word 0 Number of milliseconds to wait after transmission of send data before RTS is deactivated: This parameter is only valid if the hardware flow control is active. The valid range is 0 to 65535 ms. The value 0 deactivates the function. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 78 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 Default Description%% S7300/400/ WinAC BREAK IN UInt Word 0 This parameter specifies that a BREAK is to be sent at the start of each frame for the specified number of bit times. The maximum is 65535 bit times. The value 0 deactivates the function. IDLELINE IN UInt Word 0 This parameter specifies that the line is to remain in idle for the specified number of bit times prior to the start of each frame. The maximum is 65535 bit times. The value 0 deactivates the function. USR_END IN STRING[2] 0 Input of end delimiters. No more than 2 end delimiters can be configured. All data including the end delimiter(s) is sent, independent of the configured frame length. APP_END IN STRING[5] 0 Input of characters to be appended. You can append up to 5 characters. COM_RST IN/OUT FALSE Initialization of the instruction --- Bool The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 79 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.6 Receive_Config: Configure PtP recipient Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Receive_Config instruction (receive configuration) allows you to change receive parameters in runtime using your program. This instruction configures the conditions that mark the start and the end of received data. Any data pending in a CM is deleted when Receive_Config is executed. Configuration changes of Receive_Config are saved non-retentive on the CM. The parameters saved in the device configuration are restored once the voltage returns to the CPU or the communication module. The Receive_Config instruction therefore must be called again from the user program when the voltage returns to the CPU or to the communication module in order to overwrite the parameters stored in the device configuration. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 Description FALSE Activates the configuration change upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. RECEIVE _CONDITIONS IN Variant Any - The data structure of Receive_Conditions specifies the start and end conditions used to identify the start and end of a frame. COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 80 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 Default Description S7300/400/ WinAC DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". Start conditions for the Receive_P2P instruction The Receive_P2P instruction uses the configuration specified in the device configuration or by the Receive_Config instruction to determine the start and end of Freeport communication frames. The start of the frame is defined by the start conditions. The start of the frame can be determined with one or several start conditions. If Break as well as Idle Line is activated, Break must be met first and then Idle Line as well. After that, one of the other conditions (start character or start sequence) is sufficient to start data transmission. The start condition "Any character" cannot be combined with other start conditions. Data type structure of the Receive_Conditions parameter, part 1 (start conditions) Table 5- 6 Structure of Receive_Conditions for start conditions Parameter START .STARTCOND Declaration IN Data type Default Description Word 16#0002 Specifying the start condition START .IDLETIME IN Word START .STARTCHAR IN Byte * 01H - detection of the start character * 02H - Any character * 04H - detection of a line break * 08H - detection of an idle line * 10H - detection of start sequence 1 * 20H - detection of start sequence 2 * 40H - detection of start sequence 3 * 80H - detection of start sequence 4 The start conditions can be combined by adding the values together. 16#0028 The number of bit times required in the idle state for a new frame start to be detected (default value: W#16#28). Only in connection with the condition "Detection of an idle line". 0 to FFFF 16#0002 The start character for the condition "Start character". (default value: B#16#2) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 81 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter START SEQ[1].CTL Declaration IN START.SEQ[1] .STR[1] .. START.SEQ[1] .STR.[5] START.SEQ[2] .CTL START.SEQ[2] .STR[1] .. START.SEQ[2] .STR.[5] START.SEQ[3] .CTL START.SEQ[3] .STR[1] .. START.SEQ[3] .STR.[5] START.SEQ[4] .CTL START.SEQ[4] .STR[1] .. START.SEQ[4] .STR.[5] Data type Default Byte 0 IN Char[5] 0 IN Byte 0 IN Char[5] 0 IN Byte 0 IN Char[5] 0 IN Byte 0 IN Char[5] 0 Description Start sequence 1, deactivate/activate comparison for each character: (default value: B#16#0) These are the activation bits for each character of the start character string. * 01H - character 1 * 02H - character 2 * 04H - character 3 * 08H - character 4 * 10H - character 5 When a bit is deactivated for a specific character, this means that each character in this position in the character string represents a valid start character string (e.g. 1FH = all 5 characters interpreted). Start sequence 1, start character (5 characters). Start sequence 2, deactivate/activate comparison for each character. Default value: B#16#0) Start sequence 2, start character (5 characters). Start sequence 3, deactivate/activate comparison for each character. Default value: B#16#0 Start sequence 3, start character (5 characters). Start sequence 4, deactivate/activate comparison for each character. Default value: B#16#0 Start sequence 4, start character (5 characters), Example Have a look at the following received data in hexadecimal coding: "68 10 aa 68 bb 10 aa 16". The configured start character strings are available in the following table. Start character strings are evaluated once the first character 68H has been successfully received. After the fourth character has been successfully received (the second 68H), start condition 1 has been met. Once the start conditions have been met, the evaluation of the end conditions starts. Processing of the start character string can be canceled due to different errors in parity, framing or time intervals between characters. These errors prevent receipt of the data because the start condition has not been met (an error message is output). Table 5- 7 Start conditions Start condition First character First character +1 First character +2 First character +3 First character +4 1 68H xx xx 68H xx 2 10H aaH xx xx xx 3 dcH aaH xx xx xx 4 e5H xx xx xx xx CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 82 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions End conditions for the Receive_P2P instruction The end of a frame is defined by the first occurrence of one or more configured end conditions. You can configure the end conditions either in the properties of the communication interface in the device configuration, or with the Receive_Config instruction. The receive parameters (start and end conditions) are reset to the settings in the device configuration each time the voltage returns to the CPU or the communication module. When the STEP 7 user program executes Receive_Config, the settings are set to the parameters of Receive_Config . Data type structure of the Receive_Conditions parameter, part 2 (end conditions) Table 5- 8 Structure of Receive_Conditions for end conditions Parameter Declaration END.ENDCOND IN Data type Word Default Description 0 This parameter specifies the condition for the frame end: * END.FIXLEN IN Word 1 END.MAXLEN IN Word 1 END.N IN Word 0 END.LENGTHSIZE IN Word 0 END.LENGTHM IN Word 0 END.RCVTIME IN Word 200 END.MSGTIME IN Word 200 END.CHARGAP IN Word 12 01H - response timeout * 02H - message timeout * 04H - character delay time * 08H - maximum frame length * 10H - read message length from message (N+LEN+M) * 20H - end sequence * 40H - fixed frame length Fixed frame length: Only used if the end condition "Fixed frame length" has been selected. 1 to 4000 bytes (up to 4 KB depending on the module) Maximum frame length: Only used if the end condition "Maximum frame length" has been selected. 1 to 4000 bytes (up to 4 KB depending on the module) Byte position of the length field in the frame. Only used with end condition N+LEN+M. 1 to 4000 bytes (up to 4 KB depending on the module) Size of the length field (1, 2, or 4 bytes). Only used with end condition N+LEN+M. Number of characters after the length field that are not included in the value of the length field. This entry is only used with end condition N+LEN+M. 0 to 255 bytes Specify the wait time for the first received character after a frame has been sent. The receive instruction is terminated with an error message if a character is not received within the specified time. This information is used only with the condition "Response timeout". (0 to 65535 ms). Note: This parameter cannot be used as sole end criterion but only in connection with at least one other end condition. Specify how long to wait for receipt of the complete frame after receipt of the first character. This parameter is used only if the condition "Message timeout" is selected. (0 to 65535 ms) Enter the maximum number of bit times between characters. If the number of bit times between characters exceeds the specified value, the end condition has been met. This information is used only with the condition "Character delay time". (0 to 65535 bit times) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 83 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration END.SEQ.CTL END.SEQ.STR[1] .. END.SEQ.STR[5] Table 5- 9 Default Description IN Data type Byte 0 IN Char[5] 0 Character sequence 1, deactivate/activate comparison for each character: These are the activation bits for each character of the end character string. Character 1 is bit 0, character 2 is bit 1, ..., character 5 is bit 4. If a bit is deactivated for a specific character, this means that each character represents a congruence at this position of the character string. Character string 1, start character (5 characters) General parameters of the Receive_P2P instruction Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description GENERAL .MBUF_SIZE IN Byte 255 Input number of frames that are to be buffered in the receive buffer of the CM. If no other conditions are active that influence the reaction of the receive buffer (prevent timeout, data flow control), additional frames are discarded once the limit has been reached. (1 to 255 frames) GENERAL .OW_PROT IN Byte 0 Activates the no overwriting function of the buffered frame if the CM receives a new frame and the receive buffer of the CM was not yet read. This step prevents already buffered received frames from being lost. GENERAL .CLR_MBUF IN Byte 0 * 0 - not activated * 1 - activated Activates deletion of the receive buffer during CPU startup. The receive buffer is automatically deleted when the CPU switches from STOP to RUN. The receive buffer only contains frames received after CPU startup. * 0 - not activated * 1 - activated CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 84 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.7 P3964_Config: Configuring the 3964(R) protocol Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The P3964_Config instruction (protocol configuration) allows you to change protocol parameters for 3964(R), such as character delay time, priority and block check, in runtime using your program. Configuration changes of P3964_Config are saved on the CM and not in the CPU. The parameters saved in the device configuration are restored once the voltage returns to the CPU or the communication module. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN BCC Priority IN IN Data type S71200/1500 USInt USInt Description FALSE Starts the instruction upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word Byte Byte 1 1 * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. Activates/deactivates the use of the block check * 0 = without block check * 1 = with block check Selection of the priority * 0 = low priority * 1 = high priority CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 85 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter CharacterDelayTime Declaration IN Data type S71200/1500 UInt Default Description 16#00DC Setting the character delay time (depending on the set data transmission rate) (default value: 220 ms) S7300/400/ WinAC Word 1 ms to 65535 ms AcknDelayTime IN UInt Word 16#07D0 Setting the acknowledgment delay time (depending on the set data transmission rate) (default value: 2000 ms) BuildupAttempts IN USInt Byte 16#0006 Setting the number of connection attempts (default value: 6 connection attempts) 1 to 255 RepetitionAttempts IN USInt Byte 16#0006 Setting the number of transmission attempts (default value: 6 connection attempts) 1 to 255 COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE 1 ms to 65535 ms Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 86 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.8 Send_P2P: Sending data Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Send_P2P instruction (send point-to-point data) starts the transmission of data and transmits the contents of the assigned buffer to the communication module. The CPU program is still being executed while the CM sends the data with the data transmission rate. Only one send instruction per communication module may be pending at any time. The CM signals an error if a second Send_P2P instruction is executed while the CM is already sending a frame. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 Description FALSE Starts the transmission of data to the CM upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 87 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter BUFFER Declaration IN Data type S71200/1500 Variant Default Description 0 This parameter points to the memory area of the send buffer. S7300/400/ WinAC Any Notes: * Boolean data and Boolean fields are not supported. * If the send buffer is in the optimized memory area, the maximum permitted length of the sent data is 1024 bytes. Exception: Arrays of Byte, Word or DWord are supported up to a length of 4096 bytes. If the send buffer is a String or WString, the content of the string is transferred without the current and maximum length. Additional information under "Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations (Page 90)" * LENGTH IN UInt Word 0 Length in bytes of the data to be transferred. The memory area addressed in the BUFFER parameter is completely transmitted with LENGTH = 0. Additional information under "Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations (Page 90)" COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE Initialization of the Send_P2P instruction The instruction is initialized with 1. The instruction then resets COM_RST to 0. Note: The parameter is only available for S7-300/400 instructions. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 88 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameters The DONE and ERROR outputs are in FALSE status when a send instruction is being processed. At the end of the send instruction, one of the DONE or ERROR outputs is set to TRUE for one cycle to signal the status of the send instruction. The error code at the STATUS output can be evaluated when the status of ERROR is TRUE. The instruction outputs the status 16#7001 when the communication interface accepts the send data. Subsequent executions of Send_P2P output the value 16#7002 if the CM is still sending. At the end of the send instruction, the CM outputs the status 16#0000 for the send instruction (if no error has occurred). Subsequent executions of Send_P2P with REQ = 0 output the status 16#7000 (free). The diagram below shows the relationship between the output values and REQ. It is based on the assumption that the instruction is called cyclically to check the status of the send process (indicated by the STATUS values). The figure below shows how the DONE and STATUS parameters are only valid for one cycle if a pulse is pending at the REQ line (for one cycle) to trigger the send instruction. The figure below shows the relationship of the DONE, ERROR and STATUS parameters in case of an error. The DONE, ERROR and STATUS values are only valid until Send_P2P is executed again with the same instance DB. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 89 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.9 Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations Interaction of BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for Send_P2P The minimum data size sent by the Send_P2P instruction is one byte. The BUFFER parameter specifies the size of the data to be sent if a "0" is passed at the LENGTH parameter during call. The specification of a tag is sufficient for this. You cannot use the data type Bool or arrays of the Bool type for the BUFFER parameter. If large amounts of data are being transferred we recommend the mapping to the array or structure data types. Table 5- 10 BUFFER parameter BUFFER Description Elementary data type When sending: The LENGTH value must include the byte size of this data type. Example: For a Word value, the LENGTH must be two. For a DWord value or Real value, the LENGTH must be four. Structure For optimized memory: The maximum permitted length of the BUFFER is 1024 Byte; otherwise 4 KB are permitted depending on the module. For sending: The LENGTH value can include a byte size smaller than the complete byte length of the structure; in this case, only the first LENGTH bytes of the structure from BUFFER are sent. Array For optimized memory: If the array data type is not equal to Byte, Word or DWord, the maximum permitted buffer length is 1024 Byte. Depending on the module, up to 4 KB can be transmitted if the memory is not optimized, independent of the data structure. For sending: The LENGTH value can include a byte size smaller than the complete byte length of the array, whereby, this byte size is a multiple of the byte size of the data element. Example: The LENGTH parameter of an array of the Word type must be a multiple of two and a multiple of four for an array of the Real type. If LENGTH is specified, the number of array elements is transmitted. If BUFFER includes an array with 15 DWord elements (a total of 60 Bytes), for example, and you specify LENGTH = 20, the first five DWord elements from the array are transmitted. String Table 5- 11 LENGTH =0 The LENGTH parameter includes the number or characters to be sent. Only the characters of the String are transmitted. The bytes with the maximum and actual length of the String are not sent. LENGTH parameter Description The complete content of the memory area specified by BUFFER is transferred. If BUFFER points to a string, the entire content of the string is transferred, without the bytes with the maximum and actual length. >0 The content up to the configured length of the memory area specified by BUFFER is transferred. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 90 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.10 Receive_P2P: Receiving data Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Receive_P2P instruction (receive data using point-to-point communication) checks the frames received in the CM. If a frame is available, it is transmitted from the CM to the CPU. A receive error is indicated at the STATUS parameter. Parameters Parameter Declaration PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 PORT (UInt) Default Description 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. This parameter points to the start address of the receive buffer. This buffer must be large enough to receive the maximum frame length. * BUFFER IN Variant Any 0 Note: * Boolean data or Boolean fields are not supported. * If the receive buffer is in the optimized memory area, the maximum permitted length of the received data is 1024 bytes. Exception: Arrays of Byte, Word or DWord are supported up to a length of 4096 bytes. If the receive buffer is a String or WString, the received data is written to the content of the string and the current length of the string is set accordingly. Additional information under "Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations (Page 90)" * CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 91 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration LENGTH OUT UInt NDR OUT Bool COM_RST IN/OUT Data type S71200/1500 --- S7300/400/ WinAC Word Default Description 0 Length of the frame received in bytes Additional information under "Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations (Page 90)" TRUE for one cycle if new data is available and the instruction has been completed without errors. Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. TRUE for one cycle once the instruction has been completed with an error. Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) FALSE Bool FALSE ERROR OUT Bool FALSE STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". The error code at the STATUS output can be evaluated if the status of ERROR is TRUE. The STATUS value provides the reason for terminating the receive operation in the CM. This is usually a positive value which indicates that the receive operation has been successful and the frame criterion that has been detected. If the STATUS value is negative (the most significant bit of the hexadecimal value is set), the receive operation was terminated due to an error condition, such as a parity, framing or overflow error. Each communication module can buffer a module-specific number for frames. If several frames are available in the CM, the Receive_P2P instruction outputs the oldest available frame (FIFO). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 92 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.11 Receive_Reset: Clear receive buffer Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Receive_Reset instruction (reset receiver) clears the receive buffer in the CM. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 COM_RST IN/OUT --- Description FALSE Starts the transmission of data to the CM upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word Bool FALSE * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle means that the last request was completed without errors. ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE means that the last request was completed with errors. If this output is TRUE, the STATUS output contains the corresponding error codes. STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 93 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.12 Signal_Get: Read status Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Signal_Get instruction (get RS232 signals) reads the current states of the RS232 accompanying signals and displays them at the corresponding instruction outputs. Note Restriction * This instruction can only be used with CMs RS232 BA and RS232 HF. * If RS232C is set for the operating mode, this instruction can also be used with CM PtP (ET200SP). Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 Description FALSE Starts the transmission of data to the CM upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. NDR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle if the RS232 accompanying signals have been read and the instruction has been completed without errors. ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle once the instruction has been completed with an error STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 94 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 Default Description S7300/400/ WinAC DTR OUT Bool FALSE Data device ready, module ready (output) DSR OUT Bool FALSE Data device ready, communication station ready (input) RTS OUT Bool FALSE Send request, module ready to send (output) CTS OUT Bool FALSE Ready to send, communication station can receive data (input) DCD OUT Bool FALSE Data carrier signal detected, signal level received RING OUT Bool FALSE Call display, signaling incoming call Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 95 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.13 Signal_Set: Set accompanying signals Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Signal_Set instruction (set RS232 signals) allows you to set the RS232 communication signals. Note Restrictions * This instruction can only be used with CMs RS232 BA and RS232 HF. * If RS232C is set for the operating mode, this instruction can also be used with CM PtP (ET200SP). Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN SIGNAL IN Data type S71200/1500 Description FALSE Starts the instruction upon a positive edge of this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word Byte 0 * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. Selection of the signal to be set (more than one possible): * 01H = RTS * 02H = DTR * 04H = DSR (for interface type DCE only) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 96 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter RTS Declaration Data type S71200/1500 IN Default Description FALSE Send request, module ready to send S7300/400/ WinAC Bool Set this value at the output (TRUE or FALSE), default value: FALSE DTR IN Bool FALSE Data terminal ready, module ready Set this value at the output (TRUE or FALSE), default value: FALSE DSR IN Bool COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE Data terminal ready (for DCE interface type only), not used. FALSE Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 97 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.14 Get_Features: Get extended functions Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description If supported by the module, you can use the Get_Features instruction (get extended functions) to get information on the ability of the module to support CRC and to generate diagnostic messages. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 Description FALSE Starts the instruction upon a positive edge of this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT Default Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. NDR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle if new data is available and the instruction has been completed without errors MODBUS _CRC OUT Bool FALSE Modbus CRC support DIAG _ALARM OUT Bool FALSE Generation of diagnostic messages SUPPLY _VOLT OUT Bool FALSE Diagnostics for missing supply voltage L+ is available COM_RST IN/OUT FALSE Initialization of the instruction --- Bool The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 98 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 Default Description S7300/400/ WinAC ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle once the instruction has been completed with an error STATUS OUT Word 16#700 0 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 99 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.15 Set_Features: Set extended functions Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description If supported by the module, you can use the Set_Features instruction (select extended functions) to activate CRC support and the generation of diagnostic messages. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN Data type S71200/1500 Description FALSE The instruction to set extended functions is started upon a positive edge at this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool PORT (UInt) Default Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. EN_MODBUS _CRC IN Bool FALSE Activate Modbus CRC support EN_DIAG _ALARM IN Bool FALSE Activate generation of diagnostic messages EN_SUPPLY _VOLT IN Bool FALSE Enable diagnostics for missing supply voltage L+ COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE Initialization of the instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. DONE OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one execution once the last request is completed without errors CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 100 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 Default Description S7300/400/ WinAC ERROR OUT Bool FALSE TRUE for one cycle once the instruction has been completed with an error STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 102)) Additional information about the general parameters is available at "General parameters for Freeport operations (Page 73)". CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 101 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.1.16 Error messages Overview of error messages - PtP The error messages are provided at the STATUS output of an instruction and can be evaluated there or processed in the user program. Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - RECEIVE status and error codes 16#0094 frame end identified based on the "Receipt of fixed/maximum frame length" - 16#0095 frame end identified based on "Message timeout" - 16#0096 frame end identified based on expiration of the "Char- acter delay time" 16#0097 The frame was aborted because the maximum response time was reached. - 16#0098 frame end identified based on the fulfillment of the "Read message length from message" conditions - 16#0099 frame end identified based on the receipt of the "End sequence" - SEND status and error codes 16#7000 Block idle - 16#7001 Initial call for a new frame: Data transmission initiated - 16#7002 Interim call: Data transmission running - 16#8085 Invalid length Select a suitable frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#8088 The specified length exceeds the range set in the receive buffer. Change the range in the receive buffer or select a frame length which corresponds to the range set in the receive buffer. Note: If the data type STRING has been specified at the BUFFER parameter, this error code also appears The following are valid (depending on the module): if the current string is shorter than the length specified 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) at the LENGTH parameter. 16#8090 Configuration error: Odd number of bytes for WString Select an even number of bytes. RECEIVE status and error codes 16#7002 Interim call: Data transmission running - 16#8088 The number of characters received exceeds the number specified at the BUFFER parameter. Select a suitable frame length. Configuration error: Odd number of bytes for WString Select an even number of bytes. 16#8090 The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 102 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error message codes of the special functions 16#818F Incorrect parameter number setting (with USS only) Select a suitable parameter number (PARAM). The following numbers are valid: 0-2047 16#8190 Incorrect setting of the CRC calculation Select a suitable value for the CRC calculation. The following are valid: deactivated or activated. Check whether the module addressed supports CRC calculation. 16#8191 Incorrect setting of the diagnostic error interrupt Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic error interrupt". The following are valid: Diagnostic error interrupt deactivated or diagnostic error interrupt activated. Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. 16#8193 The module does not support supply voltage diagnos- Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic interrupt". tics L+. The following are permitted: Diagnostic interrupt deactivated or diagnostic interrupt activated. Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. Error message codes of the "Port configuration" 16#81A0 The module does not support this protocol. Select a valid protocol for the module (PROTOCOL). 16#81A1 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module (BAUD). 16#81A2 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity" (PARITY). The following are valid: 16#81A3 The module does not support this number of data bits. * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) Select a suitable value for "Number of data bits" (DATABITS). The following are valid: 16#81A4 * 7 (2) * 8 (1) The module does not support this number of stop bits. Select a suitable value for "Number of stop bits" (STOPBITS). The following are valid: 16#81A5 The module does not support this type of data flow control. * 1 (1) * 2 (2) Select a valid data flow control for the module (FLOWCTRL). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 103 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81A7 Invalid value for XON or XOFF Select suitable values for XON (XONCHAR) and XOFF (XOFFCHAR). Valid range of values: 0...255 16#81AA 16#81AB 16#81AC 16#81AF Invalid operating mode Invalid receive line initial state Invalid value for "Break detection" The module does not support this protocol. Valid operating modes are: * Full duplex (RS232) (0) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-topoint) (1) / (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint master) (2)/ (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave) (3) * Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode. (4) Valid initial states are: * "No" default setting (0) * Signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection) (1): Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". * Signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V (2): This default setting corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). Select a suitable value for "Break detection". The following are valid: * Break detection deactivated (0) * Break detection activated (1). Select a valid protocol for the module. Error codes of the "Send configuration" 16#81B5 More than two end delimiters or end sequence > 5 characters Select suitable values for "End delimiter" and "End sequence". The following are valid: * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) or 2 (2) end delimiters or 16#81B6 Send configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) up to 5 (5) characters for the end sequence. Make sure that no send configuration is transmitted if the 3964(R) protocol is set. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 104 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the "Receive configuration" 16#81C0 Invalid start condition Select a suitable start condition. The following are valid: * Send break before frame start * Send Idle Line. 16#81C1 Invalid end condition or no end condition selected Select a suitable end condition (see Sending data with Freeport (Page 40)). 16#81C3 Invalid value for "Maximum message length" Select a suitable value for "Maximum message length" (MAXLEN). Valid range of values (depending on the module): 11024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#81C4 Invalid value for "Offset of the length specification in the message" Select a suitable value for "Offset of the length specification in the message". Valid range of values (depending on the module): 11024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#81C5 Invalid value for "Size of length field" Select a suitable value for "Size of length field" (LENGTHSIZE). Valid range of values in bytes: * 1 (1) * 2 (2) * 4 (4) 16#81C6 Invalid value for "Number of characters not counted in Select a suitable value for "Number of characters not counted in length specification" (LENGTHM). length specification" 16#81C7 The total of "Offset in the message + size of length field + number of characters not counted" is greater than the maximum frame length Valid range of values: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Offset in message", "Size of length field" and "Number of characters not counted". Valid range of values: 16#81C8 Invalid value for "Response timeout" * Offset in the message (depending on the module): 0-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) * Size of length field: 1, 2, or 4 (bytes) * Number of characters not counted: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Response timeout". Valid range of values: 1-65535 (ms) 16#81C9 Invalid value for "Character delay time" Select a suitable value for "Character delay time". 16#81CB frame end sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. 16#81CC frame start sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (bit times) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 105 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81CD Invalid value for "Prevent overwriting" Select a suitable value for "Prevent overwriting". The following are valid: 16#81CE Invalid value for "Clear receive buffer on startup" * Prevent overwriting is deactivated (0) or * Prevent overwriting is activated (1) Select a suitable value for "Clear receive buffer on startup". The following are valid: * Clear receive buffer at startup is deactivated (0) * Clear receive buffer at startup is activated (1) SEND status and error codes 16#81D0 Receiving send request during runtime of a send command Make sure that you do not receive an additional send request during runtime of a send command. 16#81D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or change the parameters, if necessary. 16#81D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send job canceled due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ON for the entire duration of transmission. 16#81D3 Send buffer overflow / send frame too long Select a shorter frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1 to 1024/2048/4096 (bytes) 16#81D5 Transmission canceled due to parameter changes, detected wire break, or CPU in STOP Check the parameter assignment, wire break, and CPU status. 16#81D6 Transmission canceled because end identifier was not received Check the parameter assignment of the end characters and the frame of the communication partner. 16#81D7 Communication error between the user program and module Check the communication (e.g., matching the sequence number). 16#81D8 Transmission attempt rejected because module is not configured Configure the module. 16#81DF The module has reset the interface to the FB for one of the following reasons: -- * Module was restarted * Module parameters were reassigned * CPU STOP CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 106 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the receive configuration 16#81E0 Frame aborted: Send buffer overflow / send frame too Increase the call rate for the receive function in the long user program or configure communication with data flow control. 16#81E1 Frame aborted: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number are configured for both devices. 16#81E2 Frame aborted: Character frame error Check the settings for start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 16#81E3 Frame aborted: Character overflow error Firmware error: Please contact Customer Support. 16#81E4 Frame aborted: The total length of "Offset in the message + size of the length field + number of characters not counted" is greater than the receive buffer Select a suitable value for offset in message, size of the length field, and number of characters not counted. 16#81E5 Frame aborted: Break Receive line to partner is interrupted. Reconnect or switch on partner. 16#81E6 Maximum number of "Buffered received frames" exceeded In the user program call the instruction more often or configure a communication with data flow control or increase the number of buffered frames. 16#81E7 Synchronization error module and Receive_P2P Make sure that different instances of the Receive_P2P do not access the same module. 16#81E8 Frame aborted: The character delay time has expired before the message end criterion was detected Partner device faulty or too slow. Check this, if required, using an interface tester that is interconnected in the transmission line. 16#81E9 Modbus CRC error (only communication modules which support Modbus) Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#81EA Modbus frame too short (only communication modules which support Modbus) Minimum length of Modbus frame not met. Check the communication partner. 16#81EB Frame aborted: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Check the parameters for end of frame detection. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 107 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes V24 accompanying signals 16#81F0 The module does not support V24 accompanying signals You have tried to set accompanying signals for a module that does not support V24 accompanying signals. Make sure that this is an RS232 module or that RS232 mode (ET 200SP) is set. 16#81F1 No operation of the V24 accompanying signals The V24 accompanying signals cannot be operated manually if hardware data flow control is active. 16#81F2 The DSR signal cannot be set because the module has the type DTE. Check the configured type of the module. 16#81F3 16#81F4 The DTR signal cannot be set because the module has the type DCE. Block header error (e.g. incorrect block type or incorrect block length) The module type must be DCE (data communication equipment). Check the configured type of the module. The module type must be DTE (data terminal equipment). Check the instance DB and the block header. Error codes of the receive configuration 16#8201 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to an invalid data type Enter a pointer to one of the following data types: DB, BOOL, BYTE, CHAR, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, REAL, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, TIME, S5TIME, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING 16#8225 Receive_Conditionspoints to an optimized memory area greater than 1 kB Enter a pointer to an area with a maximum length of: or Receive_Conditions points to an optimized memory area and the receive length is greater than the area addressed by Receive_Conditions. 16#8229 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to BOOL with a number of bits not equal to n * 8 * Optimized memory area: 1 KB * Non-optimized memory area: 4 KB Note: If the pointer points to an optimized memory area, do not send more than 1 KB. If you are using a pointer to BOOL, the number of bits must be a multiple of 8. Error codes, general 16#8280 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Negative acknowledgment when writing module You can find more detailed information on error causes in theRDREC.STATUS static parameters and in the description of the SFB RDREC. * Check the input at the PORT parameter * Set the COM_RST parameter before the 1st call. Check the input at the PORT parameter You can find more detailed information on error causes in the WRREC.STATUS static parameters and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8282 Module not available Check the input at the PORT parameter and ensure that the module can be reached. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 108 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the receive configuration 16#82C1 Invalid value for "Buffered received frames". Select a suitable value for "Buffered received frames". Valid range of values: 1-255 16#82C2 Receive configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected Make sure that no receive configuration is sent if the 3964(R) protocol is set. 16#8301 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to an invalid data type Select a valid data type. 16#8322 Range length error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8324 Range error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8328 Setting error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter The following are valid: DB, BOOL, BYTE, CHAR, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, REAL, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, TIME, S5TIME, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING SEND status and error codes 16#8328 1) BUFFER is a pointer to BOOL with a number of bits not equal to n * 8 If you are using a pointer to BOOL, the number of bits must be a multiple of 8. Error codes of the receive configuration 16#8332 Invalid data block at the Receive_Conditions parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#833A The designation of the data block at the Receive_Conditions parameter refers to a data block which is not loaded. Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8351 Invalid data type Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8352 1) Receive_Conditions does not point to a data block Check the pointer to Receive_Conditions 16#8353 1) Receive_Conditions does not point to a structure of the typeReceive_Conditions Check the pointer to Receive_Conditions Error codes 3964(R) protocol 16#8380 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Character delay time". Select a suitable value for "Character delay time" (CharacterDelayTime). 16#8381 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout" (AcknDelayTime). Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8382 16#8383 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Priority". Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Block check" Select a suitable value for "Priority" (Priority). The following are valid: * High (1) * Low (0) Select a suitable value for "Block check" (BCC). The following are valid: * With block check (1) * Without block check (0) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 109 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#8384 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Connection attempts". Select a suitable value for "Connection attempts" (BuildupAttempts). Valid range of values: 1-255 16#8385 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Transmission attempts". Select a suitable value for "Transmission attempts" (RepetitionAttempts). Valid range of values: 1-255 16#8386 Runtime error: Number of connection attempts exceeded Check the interface cable and the transmission parameters. Also check whether the receive function is configured correctly at the partner device. 16#8387 Runtime error: Number of transmission attempts exceeded Check the interface cable, the transmission parameters and the configuration of the communication partner. 16#8388 Runtime error: Error at the "Block check character" Check whether the connection is seriously disrupted; in this case you may also occasionally see error codes. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. The internally calculated value of the block check character does not correspond to the block check character received by the partner at the connection end. 16#8389 Runtime error: Invalid character received while waiting for free receive buffer The send request of the communication partner (STX, 02H) is only answered with DLE when the receive buffer is empty. No additional character may be received before (except STX again). Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 16#838A Runtime error: Logical error during receiving. After DLE was received, a further random character (other than DLE or ETX) was received. 16#838B Runtime error: Character delay time exceeded Check if partner DLE in frame header and in data string is always in duplicate or the connection is released with DLE ETX. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. Partner device too slow or faulty. Verify by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line, if necessary. 16#838C Runtime error: Wait time for free receive buffer has started In the user program call the instruction more often or configure a communication with data flow control. 16#838D Runtime error: frame repetition does not start within 4 s after NAK Check the communication partner. A received frame that is possibly corrupted must be repeated by the partner within 4 seconds. 16#838E Runtime error: In idle mode, one or several characters (other than NAK or STX) were received. Check for proper function of the partner device, possibly using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 16#838F Runtime error: Initialization conflict - Both partners have set high priority Set the "Low" priority at one of the partners 16#8391 Parameter assignment error: 3964 configuration data rejected because Freeport is set If the Freeport protocol is set, make sure that no 3964 parameter assignment data is sent. 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 110 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Overview of error messages - Modbus Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - Configuration error of the interface - Modbus_Comm_Load 16#8181 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module at the BAUD parameter. 16#8182 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity" at the PARITY parameter. The following are valid: * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) 16#8183 The module does not support this type of data flow control. Select a valid data flow control for the module at the FLOW_CTRL parameter. 16#8184 Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout" at the RESP_TO parameter. Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the Send_Config.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_Config.RDREC.STATUS static parameters or RDREC.STATUS and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the Send_Config.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_Config.WRREC.STATUS static parameters or WRREC.STATUS and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8282 Module not available Check the input at the PORT parameter and ensure that the module can be reached. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 111 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Configuration error - Modbus_Slave 16#8186 Invalid slave address Select a suitable slave address at the MB_ADDR parameter. The following are valid: 1-247 at standard address area; 1-65535 at extended address area (0 is reserved for Broadcast) 16#8187 Invalid value at MB_HOLD_REG parameter Select a suitable value for the hold register at the MB_HOLD_REG parameter. 16#8188 Invalid operating mode or broadcast (MB_ADDR = 0) and MODE parameter 1 Select the value 1 for MODE in Broadcast mode or select a different operating mode. 16#818C The pointer to a MB_HOLD_REG area must be a data Select a suitable value for the pointer to the block or a bit memory address area. MB_HOLD_REG area. 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.WRREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8452 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8453 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8454 1) The area addressed by MB_HOLD_REG is longer than the DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8455 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a write-protected DB Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8456 1) Error during instruction execution. The cause of the error is shown in the STATUS parameter. Determine the value of the SFCSTATUS parameter. Check what this means in the description for SFC51, STATUS parameter. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 112 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Configuration error - Modbus_Master 16#8180 Invalid value for MB_DB parameter The value configured for MB_DB (instance data DB) at the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction is not valid. Check the interconnection of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction and its error messages. 16#8186 Invalid station address Select a suitable station address at the MB_ADDR parameter. The following are valid: 1-247 at standard address area; 1-65535 at extended address area (0 is reserved for Broadcast) 16#8188 Invalid operating mode or broadcast (MB_ADDR = 0) and MODE parameter 1 Select the value 1 for MODE in Broadcast mode or select a different operating mode. 16#8189 Invalid data address Select a suitable value for the data address at the DATA_ADDR parameter. See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818A Invalid length Select a suitable data length at the DATA_LEN parameter. See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818B Invalid value for DATA_PTR Select a suitable value for the data pointer at the DATA_PTR parameter (M or DB address). See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818C Interconnection error of the DATA_PTR parameter 16#818D The area addressed by DATA_PTR is longer than the Check the DATA_PTR pointer DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the interconnection of the instruction. 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_Reset and in the description of the SFB WRREC. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 113 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Communication errors - Modbus_Master and Modbus_Slave 16#80D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or change the parameters, if necessary. 16#80D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send job canceled due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ON for the entire duration of transmission. 16#80E0 Frame aborted: Send buffer overflow / send frame too In the user program call the instruction more often or long configure a communication with data flow control. 16#80E1 Frame aborted: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number are configured for both devices. 16#80E2 Frame aborted: Character frame error Check the settings for start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 16#80E3 Frame aborted: Character overflow error Check the number of data in the frame of the communication partner. 16#80E4 Frame aborted: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1 to 1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Communication error - Modbus_Master 16#80C8 The slave does not respond within the set time Check the data transmission rate, parity and wiring of the slave. 16#80C9 The slave does not respond within the time set by Blocked_Proc_Timeout. Check the setting for Blocked_Proc_Timeout. The interface is busy with an ongoing request. Repeat the command later. Make sure that there are no commands still running before you start a new one. 16#8200 Check if the module has been configured with the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction. The module may possibly need to be reconfigured using Modbus_Comm_Load after a pull/plug or after voltage recovery. Protocol error - Modbus_Slave (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8380 CRC error Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#8381 The function code is not supported or is not supported Check the communication partner and make sure for broadcast. that a valid function code is sent. 16#8382 Invalid length information in the request frame Select a suitable data length at the DATA_LEN parameter. 16#8383 Invalid data address in the request frame Select a suitable value for the data address at the DATA_ADDR parameter. 16#8384 Invalid data value error in the request frame Check the data value in the request frame of the Modbus master 16#8385 The diagnostic value is not supported by the Modbus slave (function code 08) The Modbus slave only supports the diagnostic values 16#0000 and 16#000A. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 114 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Protocol error - Modbus_Master (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8380 CRC error Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#8381 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: The function code is not supported. Check the communication partner and make sure that a valid function code is sent. 16#8382 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: Invalid length Select a suitable data length. 16#8383 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the followSelect a suitable value for the data address at the ing error message: Invalid data address in the request DATA_ADDR parameter. frame 16#8384 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: Data value error Check the request frame to the Modbus slave. 16#8385 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: The diagnostic value is not supported by the Modbus slave The Modbus slave only supports the diagnostic values 16#0000 and 16#000A. 16#8386 The returned function code does not match the requested function code. Check the response frame and the addressing of the slave. 16#8387 A slave that was not requested answers Check the response frame of the slave. Check the address settings of the slave. 16#8388 Error in the response of the slave to a write request. Check the response frame of the slave. 16#8828 1) DATA_PTR points to a bit address that is not equal to n*8 Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8852 1) DATA_PTR is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8853 1) DATA_PTR is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8855 DATA_PTR points to a write-protected DB Check the DATA_PTR pointer Error during call of SFC51 Call the Modbus_Master instruction again 1) 16#8856 1) Error - Modbus_Slave (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8428 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a bit address that is not equal to n * 8 Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8452 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8453 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8454 1) The area addressed by MB_HOLD_REG is longer than the DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8455 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a write-protected DB Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8456 1) Error during call of SFC51 Call the Modbus_Slave instruction again 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 115 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Overview of error messages - USS Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - 16#8180 Length error in response of drive Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8181 Data type error Select a suitable data type. The following are valid: * Real * Word * Double word 16#8182 Data type error: "Double word" or "Real" may not be returned for the "Word" request. Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8183 Data type error: "Word" may not be returned for the "Double word" or "Real" request. Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8184 Checksum error in response of drive Check the drive and the communication connection. 16#8185 Addressing error Valid drive address range: 1 to 16 16#8186 Setpoint error Valid setpoint range: -200% to +200% 16#8187 Incorrect drive number returned Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8188 Invalid PZD length Permitted PZD lengths: 2, 4, 6, 8 words 16#8189 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module. 16#818A A different request for this drive is currently active. Repeat the parameter read or write command later. 16#818B The drive does not respond. Check the drive. 16#818C The drive responds with an error message to a parameter request. Check the response frame of the drive. Check the parameter request. Check if the instructions USS_Read_Param, USS_Write_Param or USS_Port_Scan have reported an error. If they have, check the value of the static tag USS_DB. w_USSExtendedError of the USS_Drive_Control instruction. 16#818D 16#818E The drive responds with an access error message to a parameter request. Check the response frame of the drive. The drive was not initialized. Check the user program and make sure that the USS_Drive_Control instruction is called for this drive. Check the parameter request. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 116 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Port_Config.RDREC.STATUS, Send_Config.RDREC.STATUS , Receive_Config.RDREC.STATUS , Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Port_Config.WRREC.STATUS, Send_Config.WRREC.STATUS , Receive_Config.WRREC.STATUS , Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 117 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.2 MODBUS (RTU) 5.4.2.1 Overview of the Modbus RTU communication Modbus RTU communication Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is a standard protocol for communication in the network and uses the RS232 or RS422/485 connection for serial data transmission between Modbus devices in the network. Modbus RTU uses a master/slave network in which all communication is triggered by a single master device while the slaves can only respond to the request of the master. The master sends a request to a slave address and only the slave with this slave address responds to the command. Exception: Modbus slave address 0 sends a broadcast frame to all slaves (without slave response). Modbus function codes A CPU that is operated as a Modbus RTU master can read and write data and I/O states in a Modbus RTU slave connected by means of a communication connection. A CPU operated as a Modbus RTU slave allows a Modbus RTU master connected over a communication connection to read and write data and I/O states in its own CPU. Table 5- 12 Functions for reading data: Reading distributed I/O and program data Modbus function code 01 02 03 04 Functions for reading data from the slave (server) - standard addressing Read output bits: 1 to 2000/19921) bits per request Read input bits: 1 to 2000/19921) bits per request Read hold register: 1 to 125/1241) words per request Read input words: 1 to 125/1241) words per request 1) for extended addressing Table 5- 13 Functions for writing data: Changing distributed I/O and program data Modbus function code 05 06 15 16 Functions for writing of data in the slave (server) - standard addressing Write one output bit: 1 bit per request Write one hold register: 1 word per request Write one or several output bits: 1 to 1960 bits per request Write one or several hold registers: 1 to 122 words per request The Modbus function codes 08 and 11 offer diagnostic options for communication with the slave device. Modbus slave address 0 sends a broadcast frame to all slaves (without slave response; for function codes 5, 6, 15, 16). Table 5- 14 Station RTU station Station addresses in the Modbus network Standard station address Extended station address Address 1 to 247 and 0 for broadcast 1 to 65535 and 0 for broadcast CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 118 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Modbus memory addresses The number of Modbus memory addresses (input/output addresses) that is actually available depends on the CPU version and the available work memory. Modbus RTU instructions in your program Modbus_Comm_Load: You need to run Modbus_Comm_Load to set up PtP parameters such as data transmission rate, parity and data flow control. Once you have configured the communication module for the Modbus RTU protocol, it can only be used by the Modbus_Master instruction or the Modbus_Slave instruction. Modbus_Master: The CPU can be used as Modbus RTU master device with the Modbus master instruction for communication with one or more Modbus slave devices. Modbus_Slave: The CPU can be used as Modbus RTU slave device with the Modbus slave instruction for communication with one Modbus master device. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 119 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.2.2 Modbus_Comm_Load: Configure communication module for Modbus Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Modbus_Comm_Load instruction configures a communication module for communication by means of the Modbus RTU protocol. An instance data block is automatically assigned when you add the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction in your program. Configuration changes of Modbus_Comm_Load are saved on the CM and not in the CPU. With voltage recovery and pulling/plugging, the CM is configured with the data saved in the device configuration. The Modbus_Comm_Load instruction must be called in these scenarios. Parameters Parameter Declaration REQ IN PORT IN BAUD IN Data type S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC Bool Port UDInt Standard Description Laddr DWord FALSE Starts the instruction upon a positive edge of this input. 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: 9600 * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. Selection of the data transmission rate Valid values are: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200 bit/s. PARITY IN UInt Word 0 Selection of parity: * 0 - None * 1 - Odd * 2 - Even CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 120 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter FLOW _CTRL RTS_ON _DLY RTS_OFF _DLY RESP_TO Declaration IN IN IN IN Data type S71200/1500 UInt Word UInt Word UInt Word UInt Standard Description S7300/400/ WinAC Word 0 0 0 1000 Selection of flow control: * 0 - (default) no flow control * 1 - Hardware flow control with RTS always ON (not with RS422/485 CMs) * 2 - Hardware flow control with RTS switched (not with RS422/485 CMs) Selection RTS ON delay: * 0 - No delay from "RTS active" until the first character of the frame is sent. * 1 to 65535 - Delay in milliseconds from "RTS active" until the first character of the frame is sent (not with RS422/485 CMs). RTS delays must be used independent of the selection FLOW_CTRL. Selection RTS OFF delay: * 0 - No delay after transmission of last character until "RTS inactive" * 1 to 65535 - Delay in milliseconds after transmission of last character until "RTS inactive" (not with RS422/485 ports). RTS delays must be used independent of the selection FLOW_CTRL. Response timeout: 5 ms to 65535 ms - Time in milliseconds that Modbus_Master waits for a response from the slave. If the slave does not respond within this period, Modbus_Master repeats the request or terminates the request with an error if the specified number of repetitions (see below, RETRIES parameter) has been sent. MB_DB IN/OUT MB_BASE - A reference to the instance data block of the Modbus_Master or Modbus_Slave instructions. The MB_DB parameter must be connected with the (static and therefore not visible in the instruction) MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Master or Modbus_Slave instruction. COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE Initialization of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. Note: The parameter is only available for S7-300/400 instructions. DONE OUT Bool FALSE The DONE bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 121 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 Standard Description S7300/400/ WinAC ERROR OUT Bool FALSE The ERROR bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors. The error code in the STATUS parameter is only valid in the cycle in which ERROR = TRUE. STATUS OUT Word 16#7000 Error code (see Error messages (Page 151)) Modbus_Comm_Load is executed to configure a port for the Modbus RTU protocol. Once you have configured the port for the Modbus RTU protocol, it can only be used by the Modbus_Master or Modbus_Slave instructions. You have to run Modbus_Comm_Load for the configuration of each communication port that is to be used for Modbus communication. You must assign a unique Modbus_Comm_Load instance DB to each port that you use. Only run Modbus_Comm_Load again if you need to change communication parameters, such as data transmission rate or parity, or in case the network has returned. For example, an instance data block is assigned to the instruction if you add Modbus_Master or Modbus_Slave to your program. You need to connect the MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction to the MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Master or Modbus_Slave instruction. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 122 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Modbus_Comm_Load data block tags The table below shows the public static tags in the instance DB of Modbus_Comm_Load that you can use in your program. Table 5- 15 Tag Static tags in the instance DB Data type S71200/1500 Standard Description S7300/400/ WinAC ICHAR_GAP Word 0 Maximum character delay time between characters. This parameter is specified in milliseconds and increases the anticipated period between the received characters. The corresponding number of bit times for this parameter is added to the Modbus default value of 35 bit times (3.5 character times). RETRIES Word 2 Number of retries that the master executes before the error code 0x80C8 for "No response" is returned. EN_SUPPLY _VOLT Bool 0 Enable diagnostics for missing supply voltage L+ 0 Operating mode MODE USInt Byte Valid operating modes are: LINE_PRE USInt Byte 0 * 0 = Full duplex (RS232) * 1 = Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point) * 2 = Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint master, CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * 3 = Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave, CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * 4 = Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode 1) Receive line initial state Valid initial states are: BRK_DET USInt Byte 0 * 0 = "No" initial state 1) * 1 = signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection): Break detection is possible with this initial state. Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". * 2 = signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V: This default setting corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). No break detection is possible with this initial state. Break detection The following are valid: * 0 = break detection deactivated * 1 = break detection activated CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 123 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Tag Data type S71200/1500 EN_DIAG _ALARM STOP_BITS 1) Bool USINT Standard Description 0 Activate diagnostics interrupt: S7300/400/ WinAC Byte 1 * 0 - not activated * 1 - activated Number of stop bits; * 1 = 1 stop bit, * 2 = 2 stop bits, * 0, 3 to 255 = reserved Required setting for the use of PROFIBUS cables with CM 1241 for RS485 Instruction versions Version 3.1 is functionally identical to version 3.0 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 124 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.2.3 Modbus_Master: Communicate as Modbus master Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description The Modbus_Master instruction communicates as Modbus master via a port configured by the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction. An instance data block is automatically assigned when you add the Modbus_Master instruction in your program. The MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction must be connected to the (static) MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Master instruction. Parameters Parameters Declaration REQ IN Data type S71200/1500 MB_ADDR IN Description FALSE FALSE = no request TRUE = request to send data to the Modbus slave - Modbus RTU station address: S7300/400/ WinAC Bool UInt Standard Word Standard addressing range (1 to 247 as well as 0 for Broadcast) Extended addressing range (1 to 65535 as well as 0 for Broadcast) The value 0 is reserved for the broadcast of a frame to all Modbus slaves. Only the Modbus function codes 05, 06, 15 and 16 are supported for the broadcast. MODE IN USInt Byte 0 Mode selection: Specifies the type of request (read, write or diagnostics). Additional information is available in the table of Modbus functions below. DATA_AD DR IN UDInt DWord 0 Start address in the slave: Specifies the start address of the data that is accessed in the Modbus slave. The valid addresses are listed in the table of Modbus functions below. DATA _LEN IN UInt Word 0 Data length: Specifies the number of bits or words this instruction is to access. The valid lengths are listed in the table of Modbus functions below. --- Bool FALSE Initialization of the Modbus_Master instruction COM_RST IN/OUT The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. Note: The parameter is only available for S7-300/400 instructions. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 125 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameters Declaration DATA _PTR IN/OUT Data type S71200/1500 Variant Standard Description - Data pointer: Points to the flag or DB address for the data to be written or read. S7300/400/ WinAC Any As of instruction version V3.0: The parameter may point to an optimized memory area. In the optimized memory area, a single element or an array is permitted with the following data types: Bool, Byte, Char, Word, Int, DWord, DInt, Real, USInt, UInt, UDInt, SInt, WChar. Every other data type results in error message 16#818C. DONE OUT Bool FALSE The DONE bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors. BUSY OUT Bool - * FALSE - no command active for Modbus_Master * TRUE - command for Modbus_Master in progress ERROR OUT Bool FALSE The ERROR bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors. The error code in the STATUS parameter is only valid in the cycle in which ERROR = TRUE. STATUS OUT Word 0 Error code (see Error messages (Page 151)) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 126 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Tags in the data block of the Modbus master The table below shows the public static tags in the instance DB of Modbus_Master that you can use in your program. Table 5- 16 Static tags in the instance DB Tag Data type Standard Description Blocked_Proc_Timeout Real Duration (in seconds) for which to wait for a blocked Modbus master instance before this instance is removed as ACTIVE. This may happen, for example, if a master request was output and the program then stops to call the master function before it has completely finished the request. The time value must be greater than 0 and less than 55 seconds to avoid an error to occur. 3.0 See also "Rules for communication by the Modbus-Master" and "Calling theModbus_Master instruction with different parameter settings". Extended_Addressing Compatibility_Mode 1) MB_DB 1) Bool Bool MB _BASE FALSE FALSE - Configures the slave station address as single or double byte. * FALSE = One-byte address; 0 to 247 * TRUE = Two-byte address (corresponds to extended addressing); 0 to 65535 Compatibility mode with CP 341 and CP 441-2 and ET 200SP 1SI with driver for Modbus RTU and with ET 200SP 1SI for Modbus. The default value is 0. * FALSE = as per Modbus specification, not compatible * TRUE = compatible - For FC1 and FC2: The data read from the received frame is written word for word to the addressed CPU memory and exchanged byte by byte. If the number of bits to be transmitted is not a multiple of 16, the bits which are not relevant are set to null in the last word. - For FC15: The words to be transmitted are read word by word from the addressed memory and written byte by byte to the send frame. If the number of bits to be transmitted is not a multiple of 8, the bits in the last byte which are not relevant are read unchanged from the addressed memory and entered in the send frame. The MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction must be connected to this MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Master instruction. The PtP communication modules respond as defined in the Modbus specification. To retain a response as with CP 341, CP 441-2 and ET 200SP 1SI for Modbus, use the "Compatibility_Mode" parameter. You program can write values to the Blocked_Proc_Timeout and Extended_Addressing tags to control the Modbus master operations. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 127 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Rules for communication by the Modbus-Master Modbus_Comm_Load must be run to configure a port so that the Modbus_Master instruction can communicate with this port. A port which is to be used as Modbus master must not be used by Modbus_Slave . You can use one or several instances of Modbus_Master 1) with this port. But all versions of the Modbus_Master must use the same instance DB for the port. The Modbus instructions do not use communication alarm events to control the communication process. Your program must query the Modbus_Master instruction for completed commands (DONE, ERROR). We recommend to call all executions of Modbus_Master for a specific port from a program cycle OB. Modbus master instructions can only be executed in one program cycle or in one cyclical/time-controlled processing level. They may not be processed in different processing levels. The priority interruption of a Modbus master instruction by another Modbus master instruction in a processing level with higher priority results in improper operation. Modbus master instructions may mot be processed in startup, diagnostic or time error levels. "Instance of Modbus master" here means a call of the Modbus_Master instruction with the same interconnection to a Modbus_Comm_Load instruction and the same setting for the MB_ADDR, MODE, DATA_ADDR and DATA_LEN parameters. 1) Example Modbus_Master is called with MODE=0 and DATA_ADDR=10 This job is now active until it is completed with DONE=1 or ERROR=1 or until the time monitoring configured at the Blocked_Proc_Timeout parameter has expired. If a new command is started after the watchdog time expires and before the previous command has been completed, the previous command is aborted without an error message. If, while this command is running, the instruction is now called a second time with the same instance data but different MODE and DATA_ADDR parameter settings, this second call is terminated with ERROR=1 and STATUS=8200. Calling the Modbus_Master instruction with different parameter settings If multiple calls of the Modbus_Master instruction with different settings for MB_ADDR, MODE, DATA_ADDR or DATA_LEN are placed in your program, you must ensure that only one of these calls is active at any given time. Otherwise, the error message 16#8200 is output (interface is busy with an ongoing request). If a call cannot be processed in full, the watchdog is activated by the Blocked_Proc_Timeout parameter and terminates the ongoing command. REQ parameter FALSE = no request; TRUE = request to send data to the Modbus slave Enable the requested transmission. This transmits the contents of the buffer to the point-topoint communication interface. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 128 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions You use the DATA_ADDR and MODE parameters to select the Modbus function code. DATA_ADDR (Modbus start address in the slave): Specifies the start address of the data that is accessed in the Modbus slave. The Modbus_Master instruction uses the MODE input instead of a function code input. The combination of MODE and DATA_ADDR specifies the function code that is used in the actual Modbus frame. The table below shows how the MODE parameter, the Modbus function code and the Modbus address range in DATA_ADDR are related. Table 5- 17 MODE Modbus functions DATA_ADDR (Modbus address) 0 Modbus function code Bits per request 1 to 9999 0 1 to 1 to 01 Read output bits: 2000/1992 19999 2000/1992 1 40001 to 49999 1 to 125/124 1 400001 to 465535 1 to 125/124 Words per request 9998 0 to 9998 03 Read hold register: 1 Words per request 0 to 9998 0 to 65534 04 Read input words: 30001 to 39999 1 to 9999 40001 to 49999 1 0 to 9998 400001 to 465535 1 0 to 65524 1 to 9999 1 1 to 0 to 02 Read input bits: 10001 to 0 Operation and data 1 Bits per request 0 125/124 1 Bits per request 1 0 to 1 9998 9998 06 Write one hold register: Bits per request 2 to 0 to 05 Write one output bit: 1 1 word per request 1 15 Write multiple output bits: 1968/1960 1 Words per request 0 to 9998 16 Write multiple hold registers: 40001 to 49999 2 to 123/122 0 to 9998 400001 to 465534 2 to 123/122 1 0 to 65534 1 to 9999 22 2 DATA_LEN (data length) Bits per request 1 to 15 Write one or several output bits: 1968/1960 1 Words per request 2 0 to 9998 16 Write one or several hold registers: 40001 to 49999 1 to 123 0 to 9998 400001 to 465535 1 to 122 1 0 to 65534 11 Both DATA_ADDR and DATA_LEN operands of the Modbus_Master are ignored with this function. 11 Read status word and event counter of the slave communication. The status word indicates busy (0 - not busy, 0xFFFF - busy). The event counter is incremented for each successful processing of a frame. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 129 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions MODE DATA_ADDR (Modbus address) 80 DATA_LEN (data length) 1 word per request - - 1 word per request - 08 Reset slave event counter using data diagnostic code 0x000A 1 104 - Words per request 0 to - 65535 1 to - Operation and data 08 Check slave status with data diagnostic code 0x0000 (loopback test - slave returns an echo of the request) 1 81 3 to 10, 12 to 79, 82 to 103, 105 to 255 Modbus function code 125/124 04 Read input words 0 to 1 65535 Reserved 1 In extended addressing, see the Extended_Adressing parameter, the maximum data length is shorter by 1 byte or 1 word depending on the data type of the function. 2 MODE 2 allows you to write one or more output bits and one or more holding registers using the Modbus functions 15 and 16. MODE 1 uses the Modbus functions 5 and 6 to write 1 output bit and 1 holding register, and Modbus functions 15 and 16 to write multiple output bits and multiple holding registers. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 130 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions DATA_PTR parameter The DATA_PTR parameter points to the DB or bit memory address in which reading or writing is performed. If you use a data block, you must create a global data block that provides the data memory for read and write processes on Modbus slaves. Note S7-1200/1500 - The data block addressed using DATA_PTR must support direct addressing The data block must permit direct (absolute) and symbolic addressing. Note Using function code 5 Function code 5 is used to set or delete individual bits. When a bit is set, the value "16#FF00" must be specified in the first word of the addressed DB or bit memory area via DATA_PTR. * With S7-1200, the value "16#0100" can also be specified to set a bit. * To reset a bit, the value "16#0000" must be specified in the first word of the DB or bit memory area addressed via DATA_PTR. All other values are rejected with ERROR = TRUE and STATUS = 16#8384. Data block structures for the DATA_PTR parameter These data types are valid for reading words of the Modbus address range (DATA_PTR) 30001 to 39999, 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465535 as well as for writing words to the Modbus address range (DATA_PTR parameter) 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465535. - Standard array of data types WORD, UINT or INT - Named structure of the WORD, UINT or INT type in which each element has a unique name and a 16-bit data type. - Named complex structure in which each element has a unique name and a 16-bit or 32-bit data type. For reading and writing bits for the Modbus address range (DATA_PTR parameter) 00001 to 09999 and for reading bits from 10001 to 19999. - Standard field from Boolean data types. - Named Boolean structure from clearly named Boolean tags. It is not essential, but nevertheless advisable, to allocate each Modbus_Master instruction its own separate memory area. The reason for this is that data destruction is far more likely if multiple Modbus_Master instructions are reading and writing in the same memory area. It is not necessary for the data areas for DATA_PTR to be located in the same global data block. You can create a data block with several areas for Modbus read processes, a data block for Modbus write processes or a data block for each slave station. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 131 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Instruction versions Version 3.0 is functionally identical to version 2.4 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. See also Modbus_Slave: Communicate as Modbus slave (Page 133) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 132 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.2.4 Modbus_Slave Modbus_Slave: Communicate as Modbus slave Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Description Your program can use the Modbus_Slave instruction to communicate as a Modbus slave by using a CM (RS422/485 or RS232). STEP 7 automatically creates an instance DB when you add the instruction. The MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction must be connected to the (static) MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Slave instruction. Parameters Parameters MB_ADDR Declaration IN Data type S71200/1500 UInt Standard Description - Standard address of the Modbus slave: Standard addressing range (1 to 247) Extended addressing range (0 to 65535) S7300/400/ WinAC Word Note: 0 is the broadcast address COM_RST IN/OUT --- Bool FALSE Initialization of the Modbus_Slave instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. Note: The parameter is only available for S7-300/400 instructions. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 133 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameters MB_HOLD _REG Declaration IN/OUT Data type S71200/1500 Variant Standard Description - Pointer to the Modbus hold register DB: The Modbus hold register may be the memory area of the flags or a data block. S7300/400/ WinAC Any As of instruction version V4.0: The parameter must point to a memory area that has a length of at least 16 bits. A shorter length results in error message 16#8187. This applies to single elements, arrays, STRUCTs and UDTs. For example, a Single Bool or an array consisting of less than 16 Boolean elements results in the error message. If the length is not a multiple of 16 bits, the remaining bits at the end of the memory area cannot be read or written by the Modbus_Slave instruction. The parameter may point to an optimized memory area. In the optimized memory area, a single element or an array is permitted with the following data types: Bool, Byte, Char, Word, Int, DWord, DInt, Real, USInt, UInt, UDInt, SInt, WChar. Every other data type results in error message 16#818C. NDR OUT Bool FALSE New data available: * FALSE - No new data TRUE - Indicates that new data was written by the Modbus master The NDR bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors. * DR OUT Bool FALSE Read data: * FALSE - No data read TRUE - Indicates that the instruction has stored the data received by the Modbus master in the target area. The DR bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed without errors. * ERROR OUT Bool FALSE The ERROR bit is TRUE for one cycle after the last request has been completed with errors. If the execution was terminated with an error, the error code in the STATUS parameter is only valid in the cycle in which ERROR = TRUE. STATUS OUT Word 0 Error code (see Error messages (Page 151)) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 134 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions The function codes of the Modbus communication (1, 2, 4, 5 and 15) can read and write bits and words directly in the process image input and in the process image output of the CPU. The MB_HOLD_REG parameter must be defined as data type greater than one byte for these function codes. The table below shows the sample assignment of Modbus addresses to the process image in the CPU. Table 5- 18 Assignment of Modbus addresses to the process image Modbus functions Code Function Data area 01 Read bits Output 02 Read bits 04 05 Write bit Output 15 Write bits Output Table 5- 19 S7-1200 Address area Data area CPU address 0 to 8191 Process image output O0.0 to O1023.7 Input 0 to Read words Input 0 to 8191 Process image input I0.0 to I1023.7 511 Process image input IW0 to IW1022 0 to 8191 Process image output O0.0 to O1023.7 0 to 8191 Process image output O0.0 to O1023.7 Assignment of Modbus addresses to the process image Modbus functions Function code S7-1500 / S7-300 / S7-400 Function Data area Address area Data area 01 Read bits Output 0 to 9998 Process image output 02 Read bits Input 0 to 04 Read words Input 0 to 05 Write bit Output 15 Write bits Output CPU address O0.0 to A1249.6 9998 Process image input I0.0 to I1249.6 9998 Process image input IW0 to IW19996 0 to 9998 Process image output O0.0 to A1249.6 0 to 9998 Process image output O0.0 to A1249.6 Note The available address area may be smaller, depending on the memory configuration of the CPU. The function codes of the Modbus communication (3, 6, 16) use a Modbus hold register which is an address area in the memory area of the flags or a data block. The type of holding register is specified by the MB_HOLD_REG parameter of the Modbus_Slave instruction. Note S7-1200/1500 - type of the MB_HOLD_REG data block The data block with Modbus hold register must permit direct (absolute) and symbolic addressing. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 135 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Table 5- 20 Diagnostics functions Modbus diagnostic functions of the S7-1200 Modbus_Slave Function codes 08 Subfunction 0000H 08 000AH 11 Description Output request data of echo test: The Modbus_Slave instruction returns the echo of a received data word to the Modbus master. Clear communication event counter: The Modbus_Slave instruction clears the communication event counter used for Modbus function 11. Call communication event counter: The Modbus_Slave instruction uses an internal communication event counter to detect the number of successful Modbus read and Modbus write requests that are sent to the Modbus slave. The counter is not incremented for function 8, function 11 and broadcast requests. It is also not incremented for requests that result in communication errors (for example, parity or CRC errors). The Modbus_Slave instruction supports broadcast write requests from Modbus masters as long as the requests include access to valid addresses. Modbus_Slave generates error code 16#8188 for function codes that are not supported by the broadcast function. Variables of the Modbus slave in instruction version V3.0 This table below shows the public static tags in the instance data block of Modbus_Slave that you can use in your program. Table 5- 21 Variables of the Modbus slave Tag HR_Start_Offset QB_Start Data type Standard Word 0 Word 0 QB_Count Word 0xFFFF Extended_Addressing Bool FALSE Request_Count Slave_Message_Count Bad_CRC_Count Broadcast_Count Exception_Count Word Word Word Word Word 0 0 0 0 0 Success_Count Word 0 MB_DB MB _BASE - Description Specifies the start address of the Modbus hold register (default = 0) Start address of the valid writable addressing range of the outputs (byte 0 to 65535) Note: The variable is not available for S7-300, S7-400 and WinAC. Number of output bytes that can be written by the Modbus master. Note: The variable is not available for S7-300, S7-400 and WinAC. Extended addressing, configures slave addressing as single or double byte (FALSE = single byte address, TRUE = double byte address) The number of all requests received by this slave The number of requests received for this specific slave The number of received requests that have a CRC error The number of received broadcast requests Modbus-specific errors that are acknowledged with an exception to the master The number of received requests without protocol errors for this specific slave The MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction must be connected to this MB_DB parameter of the Modbus_Master instruction. You program can write values to the HR_Start_Offset and Extended_Addressing tags and control the Modbus slave operations. The other tags can be read to monitor the Modbus status. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 136 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Rules for Modbus slave communication Modbus_Comm_Load must be run to configure a port so that the Modbus_Slave instruction can communicate by means of this port. If a port is to respond as slave to a Modbus master, this port may not be programmed with the Modbus_Master instruction. Only one instance of Modbus_Slave can be used with a specific port; otherwise you may encounter unexpected behavior. The Modbus instructions do not use communication alarm events to control the communication process. Your program must control the communication process by querying the Modbus_Slave instruction for completed send and receive processes. The Modbus_Slave instruction must be executed regularly with a frequency that allows a timely response to incoming requests of a Modbus master. We recommend executing Modbus_Slave in each cycle from a program cycle OB. Modbus_Slave can be executed from a cyclic interrupt OB but we do not recommend it, because excessive time delays in the interrupt program can temporarily block the execution of other interrupt programs. Time control of the Modbus signal Modbus_Slave must be executed regularly to receive each request of the Modbus master and respond accordingly. The frequency with which Modbus_Slave is executed depends on the timeout value specified for the response by the Modbus master. This can be seen in the figure below. The timeout period of the (RESP_TO) response is the duration that a Modbus master waits for the beginning of an answer from a Modbus slave. This period is not defined by the Modbus protocol, but by a parameter of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction. As both receiving and sending a frame requires multiple calls of the Modbus_Slave instruction (at least three), you should execute Modbus_Slave at least twelve times during the timeout period for the response of the Modbus master so that the Modbus slave receives and sends data twice as many times as specified by the timeout period. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 137 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions HR_Start_Offset The Modbus holding register addresses start at 40001 or 400001. These addresses correspond to the start address of the holding register in the target system memory. But you can configure the HR_Start_Offset tag to configure a start address different than 40001 or 400001 for the Modbus hold register. The address 0 in the received frame correspond to the start address of the hold register in the target system memory. Use the tag HR_Start_Offset to configure a start address other than 0 for the Modbus hold register. You can, for example, configure a hold register with start at MW100 and a length of 100 words. With HR_Start_Offset = 20, the address 20 in the received frame corresponds to the start address of the holding register in the target memory (MW100). Each address in the received frame below 20 and above 119 results in an addressing error. Table 5- 22 Example for addressing the Modbus hold register when DATA_PTR is a pointer to MW100 with a length of 100 words HR_Start_Offset 0 20 Address Minimum Maximum Modbus address (word) 0 99 S7-1500 address MW100 MW298 Modbus address (word) 20 119 S7-1500 address MW100 MW298 HR_Start_Offset is a word value which specifies the start address of the Modbus hold register and is saved in the Modbus_Slave instance data block. You select this public static tag by means of the parameter drop-down list once you have added Modbus_Slave in your program. If you have added Modbus_Slave to an LAD network, for example, you can go to a previous network and assign the value HR_Start_Offset using the move command. The value must be assigned prior to execution of Modbus_Slave. Enter Modbus slave tag using the standard DB name: 1. Position the cursor in the OUT1 parameter field and enter the character m. 2. Select the required instance DB of the Modbus_Slave instruction from the drop-down list. 3. Position the cursor to the right of the DB name (after the quotation mark) and enter a point. 4. Select "Modbus_Slave_DB.HR_Start_Offset" in the drop-down list. Instruction versions Version 4.0 is functionally identical to version 3.0 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 138 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Access to data areas in DBs instead of direct access to MODBUS addresses as of version V5.0 Access to data areas in DBs instead of direct access to MODBUS addresses as of version V4.0 As of instruction version V4.0 of Modbus_Slave and as of firmware versions V2.5 (S7-1500 CPUs) or V4.2 (S7-1200 CPUs), you can access data areas in DBs instead of directly accessing process images and holding registers. In doing so, the attribute "Optimized block access" must be disabled for the DB and it must not be located solely in the load memory. If a MODBUS request arrives and you have not defined a data area for the MODBUS data type of the corresponding function code, the request is treated as in the previous instruction versions, i.e. process images and holding registers are accessed directly. If you have defined a data area for the MODBUS data type of the function code, however, the Modbus_Slave instruction reads from this data area or writes to it. Whether it reads or writes depends on the job type. One individual MODBUS request can only ever be read from or written to one data area. If, for example, you want to read holding registers that extend over multiple data areas, you therefore require multiple MODBUS requests. Rules for defining data areas You can define up to eight data areas in different DBs; each DB must only contain one data area. An individual MODBUS request can only ever read from precisely one data area or write to precisely one data area. Each data area corresponds to one MODBUS address area. The data areas are defined in the static tag Data_Area_Array of the instance DB; Data_Area_Array is a field consisting of eight elements. If you want to use less than eight data areas, the required data areas must be located one behind the other without any gaps. The first blank entry in the data areas ends the data area search during processing. If, for example, you have defined the field elements 1, 2, 4 and 5, only field elements 1 and 2 will be recognized as field element 3 is empty. The Data_Area_Array field consists of 8 elements: Data_Area_Array[1] to Data_Area_Array[8] Each field element Data_Area_Array[x], 1 <= x <= 8, is a UDT of the type MB_DataArea and is structured as follows: Parameter Data type Meaning Data _type UInt Identifier for the MODBUS data type that is mapped to this data area: * 0: Identifier for an empty field element or an unused data area. In this case, the values of db, start and length are irrelevant. * 1: Process image output (used with function codes 1, 5 and 15) * 2: Process image input (used with function code 2) * 3: Holding register (used with function codes 3, 6 and 16) * 4: Input register (used with function code 4) Note: If you have defined a data area for a MODBUS data type, the instruction MB_SERVER can no longer access this MODBUS data type directly. If the address of a MODBUS request for such a data type does not correspond to a defined data area, a value of W#16#8383 is returned in STATUS. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 139 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Data type Meaning db UInt Number of the data block to which the MODBUS register or bits subsequently defined are mapped. The DB number must be unique in the data areas. The same DB number must not be defined in multiple data areas. The DB must have standard access and must not be located solely in the load memory. Data areas also start with the byte address 0 of the DB. Permitted values: 1 to 60999 start UInt First MODBUS address that is mapped to the data block starting from address 0.0. Permitted values: 0 to 65535 length UInt Number of bits (for the values 1 and 2 of data_type) or number of registers (for the values 3 and 4 of data_type). The MODBUS address areas of one and the same MODBUS data type must not overlap. Permitted values: 1 to 65535 Examples of the definition of data areas First example: data_type = 3, db = 1, start = 10, length = 6 The holding registers (data_type = 3) are mapped in data block 1 (db = 1). The Modbus address 10 (start = 10) is located at data word 0. The last valid Modbus address 15 (length = 6) is located at data word 5. Second example: data_type = 2, db = 15, start = 1700, length = 112 The inputs (data_type = 2) are mapped in data block 15 (db = 15). The Modbus address 1700 (start = 1700) is located at data word 0. The last valid Modbus address 1811 (length = 112) is located at data word 111. Restriction of read access to process images as of version V5.0 Restriction of read access to process images As of instruction version V4.0 of Modbus_Slave, you can define one area each in the process image of the inputs and in the process image of the outputs to which remote MODBUS devices have read access. Read access by remote MODBUS devices to addresses outside these process image areas is then no longer possible. Note Restriction of write access to process images The option for restricting write access to the process image of the outputs to a specific area is available as of instruction version V3.0. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 140 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Definition of read areas in the process images Read areas in the process images are defined in the following static tags of the instance DB: QB_Read_Start: Address of the first byte in the process image output that can be read by a remote MODBUS device (applies to function code 1) QB_Read_Count: Number of bytes in the process image output that can be read by a remote MODBUS device (applies to function code 1) IB_Read_Start: Address of the first byte in the process image input that can be read by a remote MODBUS device (applies to function codes 2 and 4) IB_Read_Count: Number of bytes in the process image input that can be read by a remote MODBUS device (applies to function codes 2 and 4) Static tags in the instance DB for defining write and read areas in the process images The following table describes the static variables listed above in the instance DB of the Modbus_Slave instruction that you use to define the read areas in the process images. For the sake of completeness, the static variables with which you define the write areas in the process images (QB_Start and QB_Count) as of version V3.0 are also specified. Tag Data type Start value QB_Start UInt 0 QB_Count UInt 65535 QB_Read_Start UInt 0 QB_Read_Count UInt 65535 IB_Read_Start UInt 0 IB_Read_Count UInt 65535 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 141 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.2.5 Frame structure Extended_Addressing You access the Extended_Addressing tag as described for the HR_Start_Offset reference, except that the Extended_Addressing tag is a Boolean value. You can configure a single byte (Modbus standard) or two bytes (Extended_Adressing = TRUE) with Extended_Adressing = FALSE for addressing the Modbus slave. Extended addressing is used to address more than 247 devices in a single network. With Extended_Adressing = TRUE you can address up to 65535 addresses. The following example shows a Modbus frame. Table 5- 23 Slave address with one byte (Byte 0) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Request Slave address Function code Valid response Slave address Function code Length Error message Slave address 0xxx Exception code Table 5- 24 Byte 4 Start address Byte 5 Data Data... Slave address with two bytes (Byte 0 and Byte 1) Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Request Slave address Function code Valid response Slave address Function code Length Error message Slave address 0xxx Exception code Byte 5 Start address Byte 6 Data Data... Frame description Data traffic between master and slave / slave and master starts with the slave address, following by the function code. The data is then transferred. The structure of the data field depends on the function code used. The checksum (CRC) is transmitted at the end of the frame. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 142 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 1 - This function allows individual output bits to be read Table 5- 25 FC 1 - Read output bits Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Valid response Slave address Function code 1 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x81 Exception code Byte 4 Start address Byte 5 Number of outputs Output data 3) --- 2 1 Length: If there is a remainder when the number of outputs is divided by 8, the number of bytes must be increased by 1. 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 3 The output data can comprise multiple bytes Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Query Slave address Function code 1 Start address Valid response Slave address Function code 1 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x81 Exception code 2 Byte 5 Byte 6 Number of outputs Output data --- 1 Length: If there is a remainder when the number of outputs is divided by 8, the number of bytes must be increased by 1. 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 3 The output data can comprise multiple bytes CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 143 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 2 - This function allows individual input bits to be read Table 5- 26 FC 2 - Read input bits Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 2 Byte 2 Byte 3 Valid response Slave address Function code 2 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x82 Exception code Byte 4 Start address Byte 5 Number of inputs Input data --- 2 1 Length: If there is a remainder when the number of inputs is divided by 8, the number of bytes must be increased by 1. 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Query Slave address Function code 2 Start address Valid response Slave address Function code 2 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x82 Exception code 2 Byte 5 Byte 6 Number of inputs Input data --- 1 Length: If there is a remainder when the number of inputs is divided by 8, the number of bytes must be increased by 1. 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 144 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 3 - This function allows individual registers to be read Table 5- 27 FC 3 - Read hold register Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 3 Valid response Slave address Function code 3 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x83 Exception code 1 Length: Number of bytes 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 --- 2 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Slave address Function code 3 Valid response Slave address Function code 3 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x83 Exception code 2 Length: Number of bytes 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 5 Number of registers Register data Query 1 Byte 4 Start address Start address Byte 5 Byte 6 Number of registers Register data --- CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 145 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 4 - This function allows individual registers to be read Table 5- 28 FC 4 - Read input words Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 4 Valid response Slave address Function code 4 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x84 Exception code 1 Length: 2 * number of input words 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 --- 2 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Slave address Function code 4 Valid response Slave address Function code 4 Length 1 Error message Slave address 0x84 Exception code 2 Length: 2 * number of input words 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 5 Number of input words Input data Query 1 Byte 4 Start address Start address Byte 5 Byte 6 Number of input words Input data --- CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 146 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 5 - This function can set or delete individual bits Table 5- 29 1 FC 5 - Write an output bit Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 5 Valid response Slave address Function code 5 Length Error message Slave address 0x85 Exception code Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Start address Value Value --- 1 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 1 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Query Slave address Function code 5 Valid response Slave address Function code 5 Length Error message Slave address 0x85 Exception code 1 Byte 5 Byte 6 Start address Value Value --- E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Function code 6 - This function allows individual registers to be written Table 5- 30 1 FC 6 - Write hold register Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 6 Address Register Valid response Slave address Function code 6 Address Register Error message Slave address 0x86 Byte 3 Byte 4 Exception code Byte 5 --- 1 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 1 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Query Slave address Function code 6 Address Register Valid response Slave address Function code 6 Address Register Error message Slave address 0x86 Exception code 1 --- E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 147 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 8 - This function is used to check the communication connection Table 5- 31 1 FC 8 - Slave status Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 8 Diagnostic code Test value Valid response Slave address Function code 8 Diagnostic code Test value Error message Slave address 0x88 Byte 3 Byte 4 Exception code Byte 5 --- 1 E code: 01 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 1 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Query Slave address Function code 8 Diagnostic code Test value Valid response Slave address Function code 8 Diagnostic code Test value Error message Slave address 0x88 Exception code 1 --- E code: 01 or 03 or 04 Function code 11 - This function can read 2 bytes of "Status word" and 2 bytes of "Event counter" Table 5- 32 1 FC 11 - Event counter for slave communication Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 11 Valid response Slave address Function code 11 Error message Slave address 0x8B Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 --Status Event counter Exception code --- 1 E code: 01 or 04 Byte 0 1 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 2 Query Slave address Function code 11 Valid response Slave address Function code 11 Error message Slave address 0x8B Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 --Status Exception code 1 Event counter --- E code: 01 or 04 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 148 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 15 - This function allows multiple bits to be written Table 5- 33 FC 15 - Write one/multiple output bits Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 15 Byte 2 Start address Byte 3 Byte 4 Number of output words Byte 5 Valid response Slave address Function code 15 Start address Number of output words Error message Slave address 0x8F Exception code 2 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte counter 1 Byte n Value ----- 1 Byte counter: If there is a remainder when the number of bytes is divided by 8, the number of bytes must be increased by 1. 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Query Slave address Function code 15 Start address Number of output words Valid response Slave address Function code 15 Start address Number of output words Error message Slave address 0x8F Exception code 2 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte counter 1 Byte n Value ----- 1 Byte counter: If there is a remainder when the number of bytes is divided by 8, the number of bytes must be increased by 1. 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 149 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Function code 16 - This function allows individual or multiple registers to be written Table 5- 34 FC 16 - Write one/multiple hold registers Byte 0 Byte 1 Query Slave address Function code 16 Start address Number of registers Byte counter 1 Valid response Slave address Function code 16 Start address Number of registers Error message Slave address 0x90 1 Byte counter: Number of registers * 2 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Exception code 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Slave address Function code 16 Start address Number of registers Valid response Slave address Function code 16 Start address Number of registers Error message Slave address 0x90 1 Byte counter: Number of registers * 2 2 E code: 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Byte 7 Byte n Value ----- Query Exception code 2 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte counter 1 Byte n Value ----- CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 150 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.2.6 Error messages Overview of error messages - PtP The error messages are provided at the STATUS output of an instruction and can be evaluated there or processed in the user program. Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - RECEIVE status and error codes 16#0094 frame end identified based on the "Receipt of fixed/maximum frame length" - 16#0095 frame end identified based on "Message timeout" - 16#0096 frame end identified based on expiration of the "Character delay time" - 16#0097 The frame was aborted because the maximum response time was reached. - 16#0098 frame end identified based on the fulfillment of the "Read message length from message" conditions - 16#0099 frame end identified based on the receipt of the "End sequence" - SEND status and error codes 16#7000 Block idle - 16#7001 Initial call for a new frame: Data transmission initiated - 16#7002 Interim call: Data transmission running - 16#8085 Invalid length Select a suitable frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#8088 The specified length exceeds the range set in the receive buffer. Change the range in the receive buffer or select a frame length which corresponds to the range set in the receive buffer. Note: If the data type STRING has been specified at the BUFFER parameter, this error code also appears The following are valid (depending on the module): if the current string is shorter than the length specified 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) at the LENGTH parameter. 16#8090 Configuration error: Odd number of bytes for WString Select an even number of bytes. RECEIVE status and error codes 16#7002 Interim call: Data transmission running 16#8088 The number of characters received exceeds the number specified at the BUFFER parameter. 16#8090 Configuration error: Odd number of bytes for WString Select a suitable frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Select an even number of bytes. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 151 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error message codes of the special functions 16#818F Incorrect parameter number setting (with USS only) Select a suitable parameter number (PARAM). The following numbers are valid: 0-2047 16#8190 Incorrect setting of the CRC calculation Select a suitable value for the CRC calculation. The following are valid: deactivated or activated. Check whether the module addressed supports CRC calculation. 16#8191 Incorrect setting of the diagnostic error interrupt Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic error interrupt". The following are valid: Diagnostic error interrupt deactivated or diagnostic error interrupt activated. Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. 16#8193 The module does not support supply voltage diagnos- Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic interrupt". tics L+. The following are permitted: Diagnostic interrupt deactivated or diagnostic interrupt activated. Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. Error message codes of the "Port configuration" 16#81A0 The module does not support this protocol. Select a valid protocol for the module (PROTOCOL). 16#81A1 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module (BAUD). 16#81A2 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity" (PARITY). The following are valid: 16#81A3 The module does not support this number of data bits. * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) Select a suitable value for "Number of data bits" (DATABITS). The following are valid: 16#81A4 * 7 (2) * 8 (1) The module does not support this number of stop bits. Select a suitable value for "Number of stop bits" (STOPBITS). The following are valid: 16#81A5 The module does not support this type of data flow control. * 1 (1) * 2 (2) Select a valid data flow control for the module (FLOWCTRL). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 152 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81A7 Invalid value for XON or XOFF Select suitable values for XON (XONCHAR) and XOFF (XOFFCHAR). Valid range of values: 0...255 16#81AA 16#81AB 16#81AC 16#81AF Invalid operating mode Invalid receive line initial state Invalid value for "Break detection" The module does not support this protocol. Valid operating modes are: * Full duplex (RS232) (0) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-topoint) (1) / (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint master) (2)/ (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave) (3) * Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode. (4) Valid initial states are: * "No" default setting (0) * Signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection) (1): Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". * Signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V (2): This default setting corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). Select a suitable value for "Break detection". The following are valid: * Break detection deactivated (0) * Break detection activated (1). Select a valid protocol for the module. Error codes of the "Send configuration" 16#81B5 More than two end delimiters or end sequence > 5 characters Select suitable values for "End delimiter" and "End sequence". The following are valid: * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) or 2 (2) end delimiters or 16#81B6 Send configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) up to 5 (5) characters for the end sequence. Make sure that no send configuration is transmitted if the 3964(R) protocol is set. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 153 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the "Receive configuration" 16#81C0 Invalid start condition Select a suitable start condition. The following are valid: * Send break before frame start * Send Idle Line. 16#81C1 Invalid end condition or no end condition selected Select a suitable end condition (see Receiving data with Freeport (Page 41)). 16#81C3 Invalid value for "Maximum message length" Select a suitable value for "Maximum message length" (MAXLEN). Valid range of values (depending on the module): 11024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#81C4 Invalid value for "Offset of the length specification in the message" Select a suitable value for "Offset of the length specification in the message". Valid range of values (depending on the module): 11024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#81C5 Invalid value for "Size of length field" Select a suitable value for "Size of length field" (LENGTHSIZE). Valid range of values in bytes: * 1 (1) * 2 (2) * 4 (4) 16#81C6 Invalid value for "Number of characters not counted in Select a suitable value for "Number of characters not counted in length specification" (LENGTHM). length specification" 16#81C7 The total of "Offset in the message + size of length field + number of characters not counted" is greater than the maximum frame length Valid range of values: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Offset in message", "Size of length field" and "Number of characters not counted". Valid range of values: 16#81C8 Invalid value for "Response timeout" * Offset in the message (depending on the module): 0-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) * Size of length field: 1, 2, or 4 (bytes) * Number of characters not counted: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Response timeout". Valid range of values: 1-65535 (ms) 16#81C9 Invalid value for "Character delay time" Select a suitable value for "Character delay time". 16#81CB frame end sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. 16#81CC frame start sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (bit times) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 154 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81CD Invalid value for "Prevent overwriting" Select a suitable value for "Prevent overwriting". The following are valid: 16#81CE Invalid value for "Clear receive buffer on startup" * Prevent overwriting is deactivated (0) or * Prevent overwriting is activated (1) Select a suitable value for "Clear receive buffer on startup". The following are valid: * Clear receive buffer at startup is deactivated (0) * Clear receive buffer at startup is activated (1) SEND status and error codes 16#81D0 Receiving send request during runtime of a send command Make sure that you do not receive an additional send request during runtime of a send command. 16#81D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or change the parameters, if necessary. 16#81D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send job canceled due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ON for the entire duration of transmission. 16#81D3 Send buffer overflow / send frame too long Select a shorter frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1 to 1024/2048/4096 (bytes) 16#81D5 Transmission canceled due to parameter changes, detected wire break, or CPU in STOP Check the parameter assignment, wire break, and CPU status. 16#81D6 Transmission canceled because end identifier was not received Check the parameter assignment of the end characters and the frame of the communication partner. 16#81D7 Communication error between the user program and module Check the communication (e.g., matching the sequence number). 16#81D8 Transmission attempt rejected because module is not configured Configure the module. 16#81DF The module has reset the interface to the FB for one of the following reasons: -- * Module was restarted * Module parameters were reassigned * CPU STOP Error codes of the receive configuration 16#81E0 Frame aborted: Send buffer overflow / send frame too Increase the call rate for the receive function in the long user program or configure communication with data flow control. 16#81E1 Frame aborted: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number are configured for both devices. 16#81E2 Frame aborted: Character frame error Check the settings for start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 16#81E3 Frame aborted: Character overflow error Firmware error: Please contact Customer Support. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 155 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81E4 Frame aborted: The total length of "Offset in the message + size of the length field + number of characters not counted" is greater than the receive buffer Select a suitable value for offset in message, size of the length field, and number of characters not counted. 16#81E5 Frame aborted: Break Receive line to partner is interrupted. 16#81E6 Maximum number of "Buffered received frames" exceeded In the user program call the instruction more often or configure a communication with data flow control or increase the number of buffered frames. 16#81E7 Synchronization error module and Receive_P2P Make sure that different instances of the Receive_P2P do not access the same module. 16#81E8 Frame aborted: The character delay time has expired before the message end criterion was detected Partner device faulty or too slow. Check this, if required, using an interface tester that is interconnected in the transmission line. 16#81E9 Modbus CRC error (only communication modules which support Modbus) Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#81EA Modbus frame too short (only communication modules which support Modbus) Minimum length of Modbus frame not met. Check the communication partner. 16#81EB Frame aborted: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. Reconnect or switch on partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Check the parameters for end of frame detection. Error codes V24 accompanying signals 16#81F0 The module does not support V24 accompanying signals You have tried to set accompanying signals for a module that does not support V24 accompanying signals. Make sure that this is an RS232 module or that RS232 mode (ET 200SP) is set. 16#81F1 No operation of the V24 accompanying signals The V24 accompanying signals cannot be operated manually if hardware data flow control is active. 16#81F2 The DSR signal cannot be set because the module has the type DTE. Check the configured type of the module. 16#81F3 16#81F4 The DTR signal cannot be set because the module has the type DCE. Block header error (e.g. incorrect block type or incorrect block length) The module type must be DCE (data communication equipment). Check the configured type of the module. The module type must be DTE (data terminal equipment). Check the instance DB and the block header. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 156 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the receive configuration 16#8201 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to an invalid data type Enter a pointer to one of the following data types: DB, BOOL, BYTE, CHAR, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, REAL, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, TIME, S5TIME, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING 16#8225 Receive_Conditionspoints to an optimized memory area greater than 1 kB Enter a pointer to an area with a maximum length of: or Receive_Conditions points to an optimized memory area and the receive length is greater than the area addressed by Receive_Conditions. 16#8229 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to BOOL with a number of bits not equal to n * 8 * Optimized memory area: 1 KB * Non-optimized memory area: 4 KB Note: If the pointer points to an optimized memory area, do not send more than 1 KB. If you are using a pointer to BOOL, the number of bits must be a multiple of 8. Error codes, general 16#8280 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Negative acknowledgment when writing module You can find more detailed information on error causes in theRDREC.STATUS static parameters and in the description of the SFB RDREC. * Check the input at the PORT parameter * Set the COM_RST parameter before the 1st call. Check the input at the PORT parameter You can find more detailed information on error causes in the WRREC.STATUS static parameters and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8282 Module not available Check the input at the PORT parameter and ensure that the module can be reached. Error codes of the receive configuration 16#82C1 Invalid value for "Buffered received frames". Select a suitable value for "Buffered received frames". 16#82C2 Receive configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected Make sure that no receive configuration is sent if the 3964(R) protocol is set. 16#8301 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to an invalid data type Select a valid data type. 16#8322 Range length error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8324 Range error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8328 Setting error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter Valid range of values: 1-255 The following are valid: DB, BOOL, BYTE, CHAR, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, REAL, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, TIME, S5TIME, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 157 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy SEND status and error codes 16#8328 1) BUFFER is a pointer to BOOL with a number of bits not equal to n * 8 If you are using a pointer to BOOL, the number of bits must be a multiple of 8. Error codes of the receive configuration 16#8332 Invalid data block at the Receive_Conditions parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#833A The designation of the data block at the Receive_Conditions parameter refers to a data block which is not loaded. Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8351 Invalid data type Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8352 1) Receive_Conditions does not point to a data block Check the pointer to Receive_Conditions 16#8353 Receive_Conditions does not point to a structure of the typeReceive_Conditions Check the pointer to Receive_Conditions 1) Error codes 3964(R) protocol 16#8380 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Character delay time". Select a suitable value for "Character delay time" (CharacterDelayTime). Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8381 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout" (AcknDelayTime). Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8382 16#8383 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Priority". Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Block check" Select a suitable value for "Priority" (Priority). The following are valid: * High (1) * Low (0) Select a suitable value for "Block check" (BCC). The following are valid: * With block check (1) * Without block check (0) 16#8384 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Connection attempts". Select a suitable value for "Connection attempts" (BuildupAttempts). 16#8385 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Transmission attempts". Select a suitable value for "Transmission attempts" (RepetitionAttempts). 16#8386 Runtime error: Number of connection attempts exceeded Check the interface cable and the transmission parameters. Valid range of values: 1-255 Valid range of values: 1-255 Also check whether the receive function is configured correctly at the partner device. 16#8387 Runtime error: Number of transmission attempts exceeded Check the interface cable, the transmission parameters and the configuration of the communication partner. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 158 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#8388 Runtime error: Error at the "Block check character" Check whether the connection is seriously disrupted; in this case you may also occasionally see error codes. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. The internally calculated value of the block check character does not correspond to the block check character received by the partner at the connection end. 16#8389 Runtime error: Invalid character received while waiting for free receive buffer The send request of the communication partner (STX, 02H) is only answered with DLE when the receive buffer is empty. No additional character may be received before (except STX again). Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 16#838A Runtime error: Logical error during receiving. After DLE was received, a further random character (other than DLE or ETX) was received. 16#838B Runtime error: Character delay time exceeded Check if partner DLE in frame header and in data string is always in duplicate or the connection is released with DLE ETX. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. Partner device too slow or faulty. Verify by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line, if necessary. 16#838C Runtime error: Wait time for free receive buffer has started In the user program call the instruction more often or configure a communication with data flow control. 16#838D Runtime error: frame repetition does not start within 4 s after NAK Check the communication partner. A received frame that is possibly corrupted must be repeated by the partner within 4 seconds. 16#838E Runtime error: In idle mode, one or several characters (other than NAK or STX) were received. Check for proper function of the partner device, possibly using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 16#838F Runtime error: Initialization conflict - Both partners have set high priority Set the "Low" priority at one of the partners 16#8391 Parameter assignment error: 3964 configuration data rejected because Freeport is set If the Freeport protocol is set, make sure that no 3964 parameter assignment data is sent. 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 159 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Overview of error messages - Modbus Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - Configuration error of the interface - Modbus_Comm_Load 16#8181 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module at the BAUD parameter. 16#8182 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity" at the PARITY parameter. The following are valid: * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) 16#8183 The module does not support this type of data flow control. Select a valid data flow control for the module at the FLOW_CTRL parameter. 16#8184 Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout" at the RESP_TO parameter. Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the Send_Config.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_Config.RDREC.STATUS static parameters or RDREC.STATUS and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the Send_Config.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_Config.WRREC.STATUS static parameters or WRREC.STATUS and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8282 Module not available Check the input at the PORT parameter and ensure that the module can be reached. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 160 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Configuration error - Modbus_Slave 16#8186 Invalid slave address Select a suitable slave address at the MB_ADDR parameter. The following are valid: 1-247 at standard address area; 1-65535 at extended address area (0 is reserved for Broadcast) 16#8187 Invalid value at MB_HOLD_REG parameter Select a suitable value for the hold register at the MB_HOLD_REG parameter. 16#8188 Invalid operating mode or broadcast (MB_ADDR = 0) and MODE parameter 1 Select the value 1 for MODE in Broadcast mode or select a different operating mode. 16#818C The pointer to a MB_HOLD_REG area must be a data Select a suitable value for the pointer to the block or a bit memory address area. MB_HOLD_REG area. 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.WRREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8452 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8453 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8454 1) The area addressed by MB_HOLD_REG is longer than the DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8455 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a write-protected DB Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8456 1) Error during instruction execution. The cause of the error is shown in the STATUS parameter. Determine the value of the SFCSTATUS parameter. Check what this means in the description for SFC51, STATUS parameter. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 161 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Configuration error - Modbus_Master 16#8180 Invalid value for MB_DB parameter The value configured for MB_DB (instance data DB) at the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction is not valid. Check the interconnection of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction and its error messages. 16#8186 Invalid station address Select a suitable station address at the MB_ADDR parameter. The following are valid: 1-247 at standard address area; 1-65535 at extended address area (0 is reserved for Broadcast) 16#8188 Invalid operating mode or broadcast (MB_ADDR = 0) and MODE parameter 1 Select the value 1 for MODE in Broadcast mode or select a different operating mode. 16#8189 Invalid data address Select a suitable value for the data address at the DATA_ADDR parameter. See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818A Invalid length Select a suitable data length at the DATA_LEN parameter. See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818B Invalid value for DATA_PTR Select a suitable value for the data pointer at the DATA_PTR parameter (M or DB address). See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818C Interconnection error of the DATA_PTR parameter 16#818D The area addressed by DATA_PTR is longer than the Check the DATA_PTR pointer DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the interconnection of the instruction. 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_Reset and in the description of the SFB WRREC. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 162 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Communication errors - Modbus_Master and Modbus_Slave 16#80D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or change the parameters, if necessary. 16#80D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send job canceled due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ON for the entire duration of transmission. 16#80E0 Frame aborted: Send buffer overflow / send frame too In the user program call the instruction more often or long configure a communication with data flow control. 16#80E1 Frame aborted: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number are configured for both devices. 16#80E2 Frame aborted: Character frame error Check the settings for start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 16#80E3 Frame aborted: Character overflow error Check the number of data in the frame of the communication partner. 16#80E4 Frame aborted: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1 to 1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Communication error - Modbus_Master 16#80C8 The slave does not respond within the set time Check the data transmission rate, parity and wiring of the slave. 16#80C9 The slave does not respond within the time set by Blocked_Proc_Timeout. Check the setting for Blocked_Proc_Timeout. The interface is busy with an ongoing request. Repeat the command later. Make sure that there are no commands still running before you start a new one. 16#8200 Check if the module has been configured with the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction. The module may possibly need to be reconfigured using Modbus_Comm_Load after a pull/plug or after voltage recovery. Protocol error - Modbus_Slave (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8380 CRC error Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#8381 The function code is not supported or is not supported Check the communication partner and make sure for broadcast. that a valid function code is sent. 16#8382 Invalid length information in the request frame Select a suitable data length at the DATA_LEN parameter. 16#8383 Invalid data address in the request frame Select a suitable value for the data address at the DATA_ADDR parameter. 16#8384 Invalid data value error in the request frame Check the data value in the request frame of the Modbus master 16#8385 The diagnostic value is not supported by the Modbus slave (function code 08) The Modbus slave only supports the diagnostic values 16#0000 and 16#000A. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 163 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Protocol error - Modbus_Master (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8380 CRC error Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#8381 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: The function code is not supported. Check the communication partner and make sure that a valid function code is sent. 16#8382 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: Invalid length Select a suitable data length. 16#8383 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the followSelect a suitable value for the data address at the ing error message: Invalid data address in the request DATA_ADDR parameter. frame 16#8384 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: Data value error Check the request frame to the Modbus slave. 16#8385 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: The diagnostic value is not supported by the Modbus slave The Modbus slave only supports the diagnostic values 16#0000 and 16#000A. 16#8386 The returned function code does not match the requested function code. Check the response frame and the addressing of the slave. 16#8387 A slave that was not requested answers Check the response frame of the slave. Check the address settings of the slave. 16#8388 Error in the response of the slave to a write request. Check the response frame of the slave. 16#8828 1) DATA_PTR points to a bit address that is not equal to n*8 Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8852 1) DATA_PTR is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8853 1) DATA_PTR is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8855 DATA_PTR points to a write-protected DB Check the DATA_PTR pointer Error during call of SFC51 Call the Modbus_Master instruction again 1) 16#8856 1) Error - Modbus_Slave (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8428 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a bit address that is not equal to n * 8 Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8452 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8453 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8454 1) The area addressed by MB_HOLD_REG is longer than the DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8455 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a write-protected DB Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8456 1) Error during call of SFC51 Call the Modbus_Slave instruction again 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 164 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Overview of error messages - USS Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - 16#8180 Length error in response of drive Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8181 Data type error Select a suitable data type. The following are valid: * Real * Word * Double word 16#8182 Data type error: "Double word" or "Real" may not be returned for the "Word" request. Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8183 Data type error: "Word" may not be returned for the "Double word" or "Real" request. Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8184 Checksum error in response of drive Check the drive and the communication connection. 16#8185 Addressing error Valid drive address range: 1 to 16 16#8186 Setpoint error Valid setpoint range: -200% to +200% 16#8187 Incorrect drive number returned Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8188 Invalid PZD length Permitted PZD lengths: 2, 4, 6, 8 words 16#8189 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module. 16#818A A different request for this drive is currently active. Repeat the parameter read or write command later. 16#818B The drive does not respond. Check the drive. 16#818C The drive responds with an error message to a parameter request. Check the parameter request. Check the response frame of the drive. Check if the instructions USS_Read_Param, USS_Write_Param or USS_Port_Scan have reported an error. If they have, check the value of the static tag USS_DB. w_USSExtendedError of the USS_Drive_Control instruction. 16#818D 16#818E The drive responds with an access error message to a parameter request. Check the response frame of the drive. The drive was not initialized. Check the user program and make sure that the USS_Drive_Control instruction is called for this drive. Check the parameter request. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 165 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Port_Config.RDREC.STATUS, Send_Config.RDREC.STATUS , Receive_Config.RDREC.STATUS , Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Port_Config.WRREC.STATUS, Send_Config.WRREC.STATUS , Receive_Config.WRREC.STATUS , Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 166 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3 USS 5.4.3.1 Overview of USS communication USS communication The USS instructions control the operation of drives which support the protocol of the universal serial interface (USS). You can communicate with several drives by means of RS485 connections and the USS instructions with the PtP communication modules. Each RS485 port can operate up to 16 drives. The USS protocol uses a master-slave network for communication via a serial bus. The master uses an address parameter to send data to a selected slave. A slave cannot send without having first received a send request. Communication between individual slaves is not possible. USS communication takes place in half-duplex mode. The figure below shows a network diagram for a sample application with 16 drives. CPU CM USS drives in a USS network Figure 5-1 Wiring example with S7-1500 communication module Note Communicating with a drive via RS232 You can basically also use CM PtP RS232 BA and CM PtP RS232 HF for communication with a drive. However, only one drive can be connected to an RS232 port. Communicating with a drive via RS422 You can basically also use the RS422 interface of the CM PtP RS422/485 BA and CM PtP RS422/485 HF for communication with a drive. However, only one drive can be connected to an RS422 port. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 167 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions USS instructions in your program USS_Port_Scan: The instruction USS_Port_Scan allows you to communicate via a communication module with up to 16 drives using a USS network (must be called cyclically). There is only one USS_Port_Scan instruction per PtP communication port in the program, and it controls transmission to all drives. USS_Drive_Control: The instruction USS_Drive_Control allows you to prepare the send data from USS_Port_Scan for a drive and display its receive data. USS_Drive_Control configures the data to be sent and evaluates the data received in a previous request from USS_Port_Scan. USS_Read_Param: The instruction USS_Read_Param allows you to read parameters from a drive. USS_Write_Param: The instruction USS_Write_Param allows you to change parameters in a drive. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 168 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.2 Requirements for using the USS protocol The four USS instructions use 2 FBs and 2 FCs to support the USS protocol. For each USS network, one instance data block (DB) is used for USS_Port_Scan and one instance data block for all calls of USS_Drive_Conrol. Figure 5-2 USS program sequence All drives (max. 16) that are connected to one RS485 port are part of the same USS network. All drives that are connected to another RS485 port are part of a different USS network. Each USS network is managed using a unique instance data block for all USS_Drive_Control instructions and one further instance data block for the USS_Port_Scan instruction. All instructions that are part of a USS network must share this instance data block for USS_Drive_Conrol. The USS_Port_Scan, USS_Read_Param and USS_Write_Param instructions have the USS_DB parameter for this function. This parameter must be connected to the (static) USS_DB parameter of the instance DB of the USS_Drive_Control instruction. The instructions USS_Drive_Control and USS_Port_Scan are function blocks (FB). If you add the USS_Drive_Control or USS_Port_Scan instruction to the programming editor, you are prompted to assign a DB for this FB in the "Call options" dialog. If it is the first USS_Drive_Control instruction in this program for this USS network, you can apply the DB standard assignment (or change the name, if necessary) and the new DB is created for you. If, however, it is not the first USS_Drive_Control instruction for this drive, you need to select the DB which has already been assigned to this USS network from the drop-down list in the "Call options" dialog. The USS_Write_Param and USS_Read_Param instructions are functions (FCs). No DB is assigned when you add these FCs in the editor. If you add these FCs or the USS_Port_Scan instruction in the editor, you need to assign the USS_DB parameter of the corresponding USS_Drive_Control instance DB to the USS_DB input of these instructions. Double-click the parameter field and click the symbol to display the available DBs. Enter a period "." and select the USS_DB parameter from the drop-down list. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 169 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions The USS_Port_Scan function controls communication between the CPU and the drives via the point-to-point RS485 communication port. A communication with the drive is processed every time you call this function. Your program must call this function fast enough so that the drives do not signal a timeout. To ensure a constant time response for frame communication, you should call this instruction in a cyclic interrupt OB. The USS_Drive_Control instruction gives your program access to a specified drive in the USS network. Its inputs and outputs correspond to the states and operating functions of the drive. If there are 16 drives in your network, you must call USS_Drive_Control at least 16 times in your program, i.e. once for each drive. You should only call the USS_Drive_Control instruction from a cyclic OB. The operating parameters of the drive are read and written with the USS_Read_Param and USS_Write_Param functions. These parameters control the internal operation of the drive. See the drive manual for a definition of these parameters. Your program may include any number of these functions, but only one read or write request may be active for a drive at any particular time. You may only call the USS_Read_Param and USS_Write_Param functions from the cycle OB of a main program. NOTICE USS instruction calls Only ever call USS_Drive_Control, USS_Read_Param or USS_Write_Param from a cycle OB of the main program. The USS_Port_Scan instruction function can be called from any OB, but it is usually called from a cyclic interrupt OB. Do not use the USS_Drive_Control, USS_Read_Param or USS_Write_Param instruction in an OB with a higher priority than the corresponding USS_Port_Scan instruction. For example, do not add USS_Port_Scan to the main program or USS_Read_Param to a cyclic interrupt OB. You may encounter unexpected errors if the execution of USS_Port_Scan is interrupted by another instruction. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 170 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Calculating time for communication with the drive Communication with the drive takes place asynchronously to the cycle of the CPU. The CPU usually runs through several cycles before communication with a drive is complete. To ensure that the watchdog set for the drive is not triggered, the send frames must be sent to the drive within the watchdog time. You must allow for the number of any retries which may be needed to complete the transaction if communication errors occur. By default, up to 2 retries are made for each transaction with the USS protocol. The maximum time interval between two send frames is calculated as follows: N * (5 * cycle time + frame runtime + timeout of the receive frame max.) * (number of transmission attempts) N Number of drives in this network Factor 5 5 cycles are typically needed for sending and receiving frames. Cycle time Max. cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB in which the USS_Port_Scan instruction is called. Frame runtime Frame time = (number of characters per frame) * (11 Bit per character) / (data transmission rate in Bit/s) Number of transmission attempts Number of retries + 1 Timeout of the receive RCVTIME (if no response is received from the drive) frame Timeout of the receive RCVTIME + MSGTIME (if an incomplete answer is received shortly frame max. before the expiration of RCVTIME and monitoring of MSGTIME has expired or if a response is still being processed at the expiration of RCVTIME, the timeout is extended by the MSGTIME) The following times apply for "Received frame timeout" (ms): Bit/s 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 Receive _Conditions.END.RCVTIME 25 29 33 56 72 100 100 100 Receive _Conditions.END.MSGTIME 25 29 33 56 72 124 240 460 Timeout of the receive frame max. = (Receive_Conditions.END.RCVTIME (0.072 s) + Receive_Conditions.END.MSGTIME (0.072 s)) Example: 5 drives Data transmission rate = 9600 bps 28 characters per frame Cycle time = 0.020 s Number of retries = 2 Time interval = 5 * (5 * 0.02 s + 1 * 28 * 11 / 9600 s + 0.072 s + 0.072 s) * 3 = 3 s The time monitoring of the drive must be set to about 3 seconds in this case. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 171 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.3 USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31: Communication by means of a USS network Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Note Using the USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction It is only possible to use the USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction on an S7-1500 CPU. Description The USS_Port_Scan instruction processes the communication by means of a USS network for max. 16 drives. The USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction processes the communication by means of a USS network for max. 31 drives. STEP 7 automatically creates the instance DB when you add the instruction. Parameters Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 PORT IN Port Standard Description 0 Specifies the communication module which is used for the communication: S7300/400/ WinAC Word * For S7-1500/S7-1200: "HW identifier" from the device configuration. The symbolic port name is assigned in the "System constants" tab of the PLC tag table and can be applied from there. * For S7-300/S7-400: "Input address" from the device configuration. In the S7-300/400/WinAC systems the PORT parameter is assigned the input address assigned in HWCN. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 172 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameter Declaration Data type S71200/1500 BAUD USS_DB IN INOUT DInt S7300/400/ WinAC USS_BASE Standard Description 9600 Data transmission rate for USS communication The following are valid: - COM_RST INOUT --- Bool FALSE ERROR OUT Bool FALSE STATUS OUT Word 0 * 1200 bps * 2400 bps * 4800 bps * 9600 bps * 19200 bps * 38400 bps * 57600 bps * 115200 bps The USS_DB parameter must be connected to the (static) USS_DB parameter of the instance DB which is generated and initialized when you add a USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction to your program. Initialization of the USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. Note: The parameter is only available for S7-300/400 instructions. If TRUE, this output indicates that an error has occurred and that the STATUS output is valid. You may need to check the value of the static tag USS_DB. w_USSExtendedError in the instance DB of the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction. Error code (see Error messages (Page 188)). There is only one USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction per PtP communication port in the program and each call of this instruction controls a transmission to or from all drives in this network. All USS functions assigned to one USS network and one PtP communication port must use the same instance DB. Your program must execute the USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction often enough to prevent a timeout in the drive (see Requirements for using the USS protocol (Page 169) "Calculating time for communication with the drive"). The USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction is usually called from a cyclic interrupt OB to prevent drive timeouts and to make the last USS data updates available for calls of USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 . CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 173 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 data block tags The table below shows the public static tags in the instance DB of USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 that you can use in your program. Table 5- 35 Static tags in the instance DB Tag MODE LINE_PRE Data type USInt USInt Standard Description 4 Operating mode Valid operating modes are: 2 * 0 = Full duplex (RS232) * 1 = Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point) * 2 = Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint master; CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * 3 = Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave; CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * 4 = Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode 1) Receive line initial state Valid initial states are: * 0 = "No" initial state 1) * 1 = signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection): Break detection is possible with this initial state. Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-topoint connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". 2 = signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V: This default setting corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). No break detection is possible with this initial state. Activate diagnostics interrupt: * BRK_DET USInt 0 * RETRIES_MAX SInt/Byte 2 EN_DIAG _ALARM Bool 0 EN_SUPPLY _VOLT 1) * Bool 0 0 - not activated * 1 - activated Number of retries when communication errors occur. You can use this parameter to set the number of send retries for a request frame if the response frame is not received within the set time. Activate diagnostics interrupt: 0 - not activated * 1 - activated Enable diagnostics for missing supply voltage L+ * 0 - not activated * 1 - activated Required setting for the use of PROFIBUS cables with CM 1241 for RS485 Version 2.5 is functionally identical to version 2.4 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 174 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Instruction versions USS_Port_Scan: Version 2.5 is functionally identical to version 2.4 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. USS_Port_Scan_31: Version 1.2 is functionally identical to version 1.1 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 175 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.4 USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31: Preparing and displaying data for the drive Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Note Using the USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction It is only possible to use the USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction on an S7-1500 CPU. Description The USS_Drive_Control instruction prepares send data for max. 16 drives and evaluates the response data of the drives. The USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction prepares send data for max. 31 drives and evaluates the response data of the drives. You need to use a separate instance of the instruction for each drive, and all USS functions assigned to one USS network and one PtP communication port must use the same instance DB. You must enter the DB name when you add the first USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction. You then refer to this DB that was created when the first instruction was added. STEP 7 automatically creates the DB when you add the instruction. Parameters Parameters Declaration Data type RUN IN Bool OFF2 IN Bool FALSE OFF3 IN Bool FALSE F_ACK IN Bool FALSE S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC Standard Description FALSE Start bit of the drive: If this parameter is TRUE, this input allows you to operate the drive with the preset speed. If RUN changes to FALSE during operation of the drive, the motor coasts to a standstill. This behavior differs from disconnection of the power supply (OFF2) and braking of the motor (OFF3). "Coast to standstill" bit: If this parameter is FALSE, this bit causes the drive to coast to a standstill without braking. Fast stop bit: If this parameter is FALSE, this bit causes a fast stop by braking the drive. Error acknowledgment bit: This bit resets the error bit of a drive. The bit is set after clearing the error and the drive detects this way that the previous error no longer has to be reported. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 176 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameters Declaration Data type DIR IN Bool DRIVE IN USInt Byte 1 PZD_LEN IN USInt Byte 2 SPEED _SP IN Real 0.0 CTRL3 IN Word 0 CTRL4 IN Word 0 CTRL5 IN Word 0 CTRL6 IN Word 0 CTRL7 IN Word 0 CTRL8 IN Word 0 S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC Bool Standard Description FALSE Direction control of the drive: This bit is set if the drive is to run forward (if SPEED_SP is positive; see table "Interaction of SPEED_SP and DIR parameters"). Address of the drive: This input is the address of the USS drive. The valid range is between drive 1 and drive 16. Word length: This is the number of PZD data words. Valid values are 2, 4, 6 or 8 words. Speed setpoint: This is the speed of the drive as a percentage of the configured frequency. A positive value means that the drive runs forward (if DIR is true). The valid range is 200.00 to -200.00. Control word 3: Value that is written to a user-defined parameter of the drive. You have to configure it in the drive (optional parameter). Control word 4: Value that is written to a user-defined parameter of the drive. You have to configure it in the drive (optional parameter). Control word 5: Value that is written to a user-defined parameter of the drive. You have to configure it in the drive (optional parameter). Control word 6: Value that is written to a user-defined parameter of the drive. You have to configure it in the drive (optional parameter). Control word 7: Value that is written to a user-defined parameter of the drive. You have to configure it in the drive (optional parameter). Control word 8: Value that is written to a user-defined parameter of the drive. You have to configure it in the drive (optional parameter). Initialization of the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction The instruction is initialized with TRUE. The instruction then resets COM_RST to FALSE. Note: The parameter is only available for S7-300/400 instructions. New data available: If this parameter is TRUE, the bit signals that data of a new communication request is available at the output. Error occurred: If TRUE, this indicates that an error has occurred and that the STATUS output is valid. All other outputs are set to zero in the event of an error. Communication errors are only signaled at the ERROR and STATUS outputs of the USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction. Error code (see Error messages (Page 188)). Operation enabled: This bit signals if the drive is running. Drive direction: This bit signals if the drive is running forward. COM_RST IN/OUT --- FALSE NDR OUT Bool FALSE ERROR OUT Bool FALSE STATUS RUN_EN D_DIR OUT OUT OUT Word Bool Bool 0 FALSE FALSE * FALSE - forward * TRUE - backward CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 177 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameters Declaration INHIBIT OUT Data type S71200/1500 Bool S7300/400/ WinAC Standard Description FALSE Drive blocked: This bit signals the status of the block bit for the drive. * FAULT OUT Bool FALSE SPEED OUT Real 0.0 STATUS1 OUT Word 0 STATUS3 OUT Word 0 STATUS4 OUT Word 0 STATUS5 OUT Word 0 STATUS6 OUT Word 0 STATUS7 OUT Word 0 STATUS8 OUT Word 0 FALSE - not blocked * TRUE - blocked Drive error: This bit signals that an error occurred in the drive. You must remedy the fault and set the F_ACK bit to clear this bit. Actual value drive speed (scaled value of STATUS 2 of the drive): This is the speed of the drive as a percentage of the configured speed. STATUS 1 of the drive This value includes fixed status bits of a drive. STATUS 3 of the drive This value includes a user-definable status word of the drive. STATUS 4 of the drive This value includes a user-definable status word of the drive. STATUS 5 of the drive This value includes a user-definable status word of the drive. STATUS 6 of the drive This value includes a user-definable status word of the drive. STATUS 7 of the drive This value includes a user-definable status word of the drive. STATUS 8 of the drive This value includes a user-definable status word of the drive. When the initial execution of USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 takes place, the drive specified by the USS address (DRIVE parameter) is initialized in the instance DB. After initialization, subsequent USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instructions can start communication with the drive from this drive number. If you change the drive number, you must first place the CPU in STOP and then back in RUN to initialize the instance DB. The input parameters are configured in the USS send buffer and any outputs are read from a "previous" valid response buffer. USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 only configures the data to be sent and evaluates data received in a previous request. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 178 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions You can control the drive's direction of rotation by using the D_IR input (Bool) or the sign (positive or negative) at the SPEED_SP input (Real). The table below explains how these inputs work together to determine the direction of rotation of the drive, provided the motor rotates forward. Table 5- 36 Interaction of SPEED_SP and DIR parameters SPEED_SP DIR Direction of rotation of the drive Value > 0 0 Backward Value > 0 1 Forward Value < 0 0 Forward Value < 0 1 Backward USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 data block tags The table below shows the public static tags in the instance DB of USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 that you can use in your program. Table 5- 37 Static tags in the instance DB Tag Data type Standard Description USS_DB. W _USSExtendedError Word 16#0 USS Drive Extended Error Code - drive-specific value The meaning of the error message depends on which instruction reported an error first (ERROR = TRUE). The following cases are distinguished: * USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31: You can find the meaning of the error code in the description of the drive. * USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31: You can find the meaning of the error code in the description of the drive. * USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31: Number of the drive affected by the error message. Instruction versions USS_Drive_Control: Version 2.0 is functionally identical to version 1.2 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. USS_Drive_Control_31: Version 2.0 is functionally identical to version 1.0 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 179 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.5 USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31: Read data from drive Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Note Using the USS_Read_Param_31 instruction It is only possible to use the USS_Read_Param_31 instruction on an S7-1500 CPU. Description The USS_Read_Param instruction reads a parameter from one of max. 16 drives. The USS_Read_Param_31 instruction reads a parameter from one of max. 31 drives. All USS functions assigned to one USS network and one PtP communication port must use the instance data block of the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction. USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31 must be called from a cycle OB of the main program. Parameters Parameters Declaration REQ IN DRIVE IN PARAM IN INDEX IN USS_DB INOUT Data type Standard Description - A positive edge at REQ creates a new read request. - Address of the drive: DRIVE is the address of the USS drive. The valid range is between drive 1 and drive 16. UInt - Parameter number: PARAM specifies the drive parameter to write. The range for this parameter is between 0 and 2047. With some drives, the most significant byte of the INDEX parameter can be used to access parameter values greater than 2047. Additional information on access to an extended range is available in your drive manual. UInt - Parameter index: INDEX specifies the drive parameter index to which to write. It is a 16-bit value in which the least significant bit is the actual index value with a range of (0 to 255). The drive can also use the most significant byte, which is drive-specific. Additional information is available in your drive manual. USS_BASE - The USS_DB parameter must be connected to the (static) USS_DB parameter of the instance DB which is generated and initialized when you add a USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction to your program. S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC Bool USInt Byte CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 180 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Parameters Declaration DONE1 OUT ERROR OUT Data type Standard Description Bool FALSE If this parameter is TRUE, the previously requested value of the read parameter is available at the VALUE output. This bit is set when the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction recognizes the read response of the drive. This bit is reset the next time USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31 is called. Bool FALSE ERROR = TRUE: An error has occurred and the STATUS output is valid. All other outputs are set to zero in the event of an error. Communication errors are only signaled at the ERROR and STATUS outputs of the USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction. S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC You may need to check the value of the static tag USS_DB. w_USSExtendedError in the instance DB of the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction. 1 STATUS OUT VALUE OUT Word Variant Any (Word, Int, UInt, DWord, DInt, UDInt, Real) (Word, Int, UInt, DWord, DInt, UDInt, Real) 0 Error code (see Error messages (Page 188)). - This is the value of the parameter that was read and is only valid if the DONE bit is true. The DONE bit indicates that valid data was read out of the referenced motor drive and transmitted to the CPU. It does not indicate that the instruction is cabable of immediately read an additional parameter. An empty read request must be sent to the motor drive and acknowledged by the instruction before the parameter channel is freed up for use by the respective drive. The immediate call of USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31 or USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31 for the specific motor drive results in error 16#818A. Instruction versions USS_Read_Param: Version 1.5 is functionally identical to version 1.4 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. USS_Read_Param_31: Version 1.1 is functionally identical to version 1.0 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 181 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.6 USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31: Change data in drive Note Use with CM1241 The use of this instruction with a CM1241 is only possible from firmware version V2.1 of the module. Note Using the USS_Write_Param_31 instruction It is only possible to use the USS_Write_Param_31 instruction on an S7-1500 CPU. Note For EEPROM write instructions (EEPROM in a USS drive): Keep the number of EEPROM write operations to a minimum in order to maximize the EEPROM service life. Description The USS_Write_Param instruction changes a parameter in one of max. 16 drives. The USS_Write_Param_31 instruction changes a parameter in one of max. 31 drives. All USS functions assigned to one USS network and one PtP communication port must use the instance data block of the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31. USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31 must be called from the cycle OB of a main program. Parameters Table 5- 38 Data types for the parameters Parameters Declaration Data type REQ DRIVE IN IN Bool USInt PARAM IN UInt - INDEX IN UInt - S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC Byte Standard Description - - A positive edge at REQ creates a new write request. Address of the drive: DRIVE is the address of the USS drive. The valid range is between drive 1 and drive 16. Parameter number: PARAM specifies the drive parameter to write. The range for this parameter is between 0 and 2047. With some drives, the most significant byte of the INDEX parameter can be used to access parameter values greater than 2047. Additional information on access to an extended range is available in your drive manual. Parameter index: INDEX specifies the drive parameter index to which to write. It is a 16-bit value in which the least significant bit is the actual index value with a range of (0 to 255). The drive can also use the most significant byte, which is drive-specific. Additional information is available in your drive manual. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 182 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 1 Parameters Declaration Data type EEPROM IN Bool VALUE IN USS_DB INOUT Variant (Word, Int, UInt, DWord, DInt, UDInt, Real) USS_BASE DONE1 OUT Bool FALSE ERROR OUT Bool FALSE STATUS OUT Word 0 S71200/1500 S7300/400/ WinAC Standard Description - Save in EEPROM of the drive: If TRUE, the transaction of a parameter for writing to the drive is saved in the EEPROM of the drive. If FALSE, the written value is saved only temporarily and is lost the next time you switch on the drive. Value of the parameter in which you want to write. It must be valid with a positive edge of REQ. Any - (Word, Int, UInt, DWord, DInt, UDInt, Real) - The USS_DB parameter must be connected to the (static) USS_DB parameter of the instance DB which is generated and initialized when you add a USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction to your program. If TRUE, the VALUE input is written to the drive. This bit is set when the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction recognizes the write response of the drive. This bit is reset the next time USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31 is called. If TRUE, an error has occurred and the STATUS output is valid. All other outputs are set to zero in the event of an error. Communication errors are only signaled at the ERROR and STATUS outputs of the USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31 instruction. You may need to check the value of the static tag USS_DB. w_USSExtendedError in the instance DB of the USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31 instruction. Error code (see Error messages (Page 188)). The DONE bit indicates that valid data was read out of the referenced motor drive and transmitted to the CPU. It does not indicate that the USS library is able to read out an additional parameter immediately. An empty write request must be sent to the motor drive and acknowledged by the instruction before the parameter channel is freed up for use by the respective drive. The immediate call of USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31 or USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31 FC for the specific motor drive results in error 0x818A. Instruction versions USS_Write_Param: Version 1.6 is functionally identical to version 1.5 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. USS_Write_Param_31: Version 1.1 is functionally identical to version 1.0 and its version number was only incremented due to internal measures. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 183 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.7 General information on drive setup Requirements for the drive setup You need to configure the use of 4 PIV words (ParameterIDValue) for the drives. The drives can be configured for 2, 4, 6 or 8 PZD words (Process data area). The number of PZD words in the drive must correspond to the PZD_LEN input of the USS_Drive_Control instruction of the drive. Make sure that the data transmission rate of all drives corresponds to the BAUD input of the USS_Port_Scan instruction. Make sure that the drive is set up for USS communication. Make sure that it is specified in the drive that the frequency setpoint is provided by the USS interface. Make sure that the drive address is specified (areas: 1-16). This address must correspond to the DRIVE input at the USS_Drive_Control block of the drive. Make sure that the RS485 network is terminated correctly. Connection and setup of SINAMICS V20 drive An application example for operation of a SINAMICS V20 at an S7-1200 is available on the Internet. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63696870) Connecting the SINAMICS V20 drive Connection example of a SIEMENS G120(C) drive to a USS network. Connection examples for other drives are available in the manual of the respective drive. The connection of a SINAMICS G120(C) drive to the USS network takes place via plug-in connection. The connection is short-circuit proof and isolated. 1 0 V reference potential 2 RS485N, receiving and sending (-) 3 RS485N, receiving and sending (+) 4 Cable shield 5 Not used Figure 5-3 USS connection CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 184 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions NOTICE Different reference voltages If you connect devices that do not have the same reference voltage, you may create unwanted currents in the connection cable. These unwanted currents may cause communication errors or damages in the devices. Make sure that all devices you connect with a communication cable either have the same reference conductor in the circuit or are electrically disconnected to prevent the occurrence of unwanted currents. Make sure that the shield is connected to the ground or pin 1 of the bus connector on the drive. Make sure that wiring terminal 2 (GND) of the G120(C) is connected to the ground. If the RS485 master (e.g., S7-1200 CPU with CM1241 communication module) is connected by means of a PROFIBUS connector, wire the bus cables as follows: Figure 5-4 Connection of communication module If the RS485 master is a terminating station in the network or a point-to-point connection, you must use terminals A1 and B1 (not A2 and B2) of the PROFIBUS connector, as these terminals provide termination settings (for example, with the DP plug connector 6ES7972-0BB52-0XA0). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 185 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions If the G120(C) is configured as terminating station in the network, you must set the switch for the bus terminating resistor to "ON". Figure 5-5 Connection of terminating stations Setup of a G120(C) drive Before you connect a drive to the S7-1500 or ET 200SP, make sure that the drive has the following system parameters. Step 1 Instruction Operating Instructions Perform a basic commissioning of the drive with the Operator Panel BOP-2. G120 1) G120C 2) Chapter 4.4.3 Chapter 6.4.1 Chapter 6.2.2.1 Chapter 8.4.2.1 Chapter 4.4.2 Chapter 6.4.2 The converter offers different defaults (macros) for its inputs and outputs and the fieldbus interface. In the ninth step of the basic commissioning (MAC PAR p15), select macro 21 for USS communication. This determines the default for the following parameters: * Data transmission rate (p2020): 38400 bps * Number of PZD (p2022): 2 * Number of PIV (p2023): variable Note: You can also conduct basic commissioning with the STARTER commissioning software or with SINAMICS Startdrive. 2 Specify the USS address of the converter with the address switch on the control unit of the G120 or on the G120(C). * Valid address range: 1 ... 30 Note: Yon can also set the USS address with the parameter p2021 or with STARTER or SINAMICS Startdrive. With the following steps you are accessing the parameters directly with the BOP-2 by entering their numbers and modifying their values. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 186 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Step 3 4 Instruction Operating Instructions Adapt the following communication-related converter parameters of your application: * Data transmission rate (p2020), of 38400 bps (Make sure that setting is identical with the BAUD parameter of the USS_Port_Scan communication instruction.) * Number of PZD (p2022), if 2 (Make sure that the setting is identical with the PZD_LEN parameter of the USS_Drive_Control communication instruction.) * Number of PIV (p2023) = 4 (Change the value set to "variable" (127) with macro 21 by default to "4" (required by instructions USS_Read_Param and USS_Write_Param.) * Fieldbus SS monitoring time [ms] (p2040) G120 1) G120C 2) Chapter 6.2.2.2 Chapter 8.4.2.1 Specify the source for the speed setpoint. * n_set Eval (p1000[0]) = 6 (The speed setpoint is provided by the USS bus.) 5 Set the reference value for speed and frequency. * n_reference f_reference (p2000) = (6,00 min-1 to 210000,00 min-1) (all relative speeds or frequencies refer to this reference value. The reference value corresponds to 100% or 4000hex (word) or 4000 0000hex (double word). The following applies: freference_value (in Hz) = nreference_value (in ((min-1) / 60) x number of pole pairs)) 6 Transfer the parameters to the non-volatile memory. * Save par (p0971) = 1 1) G120 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/62089662) 2) G120(C) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/61462568) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 187 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions 5.4.3.8 Error messages Overview of error messages - PtP The error messages are provided at the STATUS output of an instruction and can be evaluated there or processed in the user program. Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - RECEIVE status and error codes 16#0094 frame end identified based on the "Receipt of fixed/maximum frame length" - 16#0095 frame end identified based on "Message timeout" - 16#0096 frame end identified based on expiration of the "Char- acter delay time" 16#0097 The frame was aborted because the maximum response time was reached. - 16#0098 frame end identified based on the fulfillment of the "Read message length from message" conditions - 16#0099 frame end identified based on the receipt of the "End sequence" - SEND status and error codes 16#7000 Block idle - 16#7001 Initial call for a new frame: Data transmission initiated - 16#7002 Interim call: Data transmission running - 16#8085 Invalid length Select a suitable frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#8088 The specified length exceeds the range set in the receive buffer. Change the range in the receive buffer or select a frame length which corresponds to the range set in the receive buffer. Note: If the data type STRING has been specified at the BUFFER parameter, this error code also appears The following are valid (depending on the module): if the current string is shorter than the length specified 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) at the LENGTH parameter. 16#8090 Configuration error: Odd number of bytes for WString Select an even number of bytes. RECEIVE status and error codes 16#7002 Interim call: Data transmission running - 16#8088 The number of characters received exceeds the number specified at the BUFFER parameter. Select a suitable frame length. Configuration error: Odd number of bytes for WString Select an even number of bytes. 16#8090 The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 188 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error message codes of the special functions 16#818F Incorrect parameter number setting (with USS only) Select a suitable parameter number (PARAM). The following numbers are valid: 0-2047 16#8190 Incorrect setting of the CRC calculation Select a suitable value for the CRC calculation. The following are valid: deactivated or activated. Check whether the module addressed supports CRC calculation. 16#8191 Incorrect setting of the diagnostic error interrupt Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic error interrupt". The following are valid: Diagnostic error interrupt deactivated or diagnostic error interrupt activated. Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. 16#8193 The module does not support supply voltage diagnos- Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic interrupt". tics L+. The following are permitted: Diagnostic interrupt deactivated or diagnostic interrupt activated. Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. Error message codes of the "Port configuration" 16#81A0 The module does not support this protocol. Select a valid protocol for the module (PROTOCOL). 16#81A1 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module (BAUD). 16#81A2 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity" (PARITY). The following are valid: 16#81A3 The module does not support this number of data bits. * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) Select a suitable value for "Number of data bits" (DATABITS). The following are valid: 16#81A4 * 7 (2) * 8 (1) The module does not support this number of stop bits. Select a suitable value for "Number of stop bits" (STOPBITS). The following are valid: 16#81A5 The module does not support this type of data flow control. * 1 (1) * 2 (2) Select a valid data flow control for the module (FLOWCTRL). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 189 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81A7 Invalid value for XON or XOFF Select suitable values for XON (XONCHAR) and XOFF (XOFFCHAR). Valid range of values: 0...255 16#81AA 16#81AB 16#81AC 16#81AF Invalid operating mode Invalid receive line initial state Invalid value for "Break detection" The module does not support this protocol. Valid operating modes are: * Full duplex (RS232) (0) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-topoint) (1) / (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint master) (2)/ (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave) (3) * Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode. (4) Valid initial states are: * "No" default setting (0) * Signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection) (1): Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". * Signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V (2): This default setting corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). Select a suitable value for "Break detection". The following are valid: * Break detection deactivated (0) * Break detection activated (1). Select a valid protocol for the module. Error codes of the "Send configuration" 16#81B5 More than two end delimiters or end sequence > 5 characters Select suitable values for "End delimiter" and "End sequence". The following are valid: * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) or 2 (2) end delimiters or 16#81B6 Send configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) up to 5 (5) characters for the end sequence. Make sure that no send configuration is transmitted if the 3964(R) protocol is set. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 190 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the "Receive configuration" 16#81C0 Invalid start condition Select a suitable start condition. The following are valid: * Send break before frame start * Send Idle Line. 16#81C1 Invalid end condition or no end condition selected Select a suitable end condition (see Receiving data with Freeport (Page 41)). 16#81C3 Invalid value for "Maximum message length" Select a suitable value for "Maximum message length" (MAXLEN). Valid range of values (depending on the module): 11024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#81C4 Invalid value for "Offset of the length specification in the message" Select a suitable value for "Offset of the length specification in the message". Valid range of values (depending on the module): 11024/2048/4096 (Byte) 16#81C5 Invalid value for "Size of length field" Select a suitable value for "Size of length field" (LENGTHSIZE). Valid range of values in bytes: * 1 (1) * 2 (2) * 4 (4) 16#81C6 Invalid value for "Number of characters not counted in Select a suitable value for "Number of characters not length specification" counted in length specification" (LENGTHM). 16#81C7 The total of "Offset in the message + size of length field + number of characters not counted" is greater than the maximum frame length Valid range of values: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Offset in message", "Size of length field" and "Number of characters not counted". Valid range of values: 16#81C8 Invalid value for "Response timeout" * Offset in the message (depending on the module): 0-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) * Size of length field: 1, 2, or 4 (bytes) * Number of characters not counted: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Response timeout". Valid range of values: 1-65535 (ms) 16#81C9 Invalid value for "Character delay time" Select a suitable value for "Character delay time". 16#81CB frame end sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. 16#81CC frame start sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (bit times) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 191 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81CD Invalid value for "Prevent overwriting" Select a suitable value for "Prevent overwriting". The following are valid: 16#81CE Invalid value for "Clear receive buffer on startup" * Prevent overwriting is deactivated (0) or * Prevent overwriting is activated (1) Select a suitable value for "Clear receive buffer on startup". The following are valid: * Clear receive buffer at startup is deactivated (0) * Clear receive buffer at startup is activated (1) SEND status and error codes 16#81D0 Receiving send request during runtime of a send command Make sure that you do not receive an additional send request during runtime of a send command. 16#81D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or change the parameters, if necessary. 16#81D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send job canceled due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ON for the entire duration of transmission. 16#81D3 Send buffer overflow / send frame too long Select a shorter frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1 to 1024/2048/4096 (bytes) 16#81D5 Transmission canceled due to parameter changes, detected wire break, or CPU in STOP Check the parameter assignment, wire break, and CPU status. 16#81D6 Transmission canceled because end identifier was not received Check the parameter assignment of the end characters and the frame of the communication partner. 16#81D7 Communication error between the user program and module Check the communication (e.g., matching the sequence number). 16#81D8 Transmission attempt rejected because module is not configured Configure the module. 16#81DF The module has reset the interface to the FB for one of the following reasons: -- * Module was restarted * Module parameters were reassigned * CPU STOP Error codes of the receive configuration 16#81E0 Frame aborted: Send buffer overflow / send frame too Increase the call rate for the receive function in the long user program or configure communication with data flow control. 16#81E1 Frame aborted: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number are configured for both devices. 16#81E2 Frame aborted: Character frame error Check the settings for start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 16#81E3 Frame aborted: Character overflow error Firmware error: Please contact Customer Support. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 192 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#81E4 Frame aborted: The total length of "Offset in the message + size of the length field + number of characters not counted" is greater than the receive buffer Select a suitable value for offset in message, size of the length field, and number of characters not counted. 16#81E5 Frame aborted: Break Receive line to partner is interrupted. 16#81E6 Maximum number of "Buffered received frames" exceeded In the user program call the instruction more often or configure a communication with data flow control or increase the number of buffered frames. 16#81E7 Synchronization error module and Receive_P2P Make sure that different instances of the Receive_P2P do not access the same module. 16#81E8 Frame aborted: The character delay time has expired before the message end criterion was detected Partner device faulty or too slow. Check this, if required, using an interface tester that is interconnected in the transmission line. 16#81E9 Modbus CRC error (only communication modules which support Modbus) Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#81EA Modbus frame too short (only communication modules which support Modbus) Minimum length of Modbus frame not met. Check the communication partner. 16#81EB Frame aborted: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. Reconnect or switch on partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Check the parameters for end of frame detection. Error codes V24 accompanying signals 16#81F0 The module does not support V24 accompanying signals You have tried to set accompanying signals for a module that does not support V24 accompanying signals. Make sure that this is an RS232 module or that RS232 mode (ET 200SP) is set. 16#81F1 No operation of the V24 accompanying signals The V24 accompanying signals cannot be operated manually if hardware data flow control is active. 16#81F2 The DSR signal cannot be set because the module has the type DTE. Check the configured type of the module. 16#81F3 16#81F4 The DTR signal cannot be set because the module has the type DCE. Block header error (e.g. incorrect block type or incorrect block length) The module type must be DCE (data communication equipment). Check the configured type of the module. The module type must be DTE (data terminal equipment). Check the instance DB and the block header. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 193 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the receive configuration 16#8201 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to an invalid data type Enter a pointer to one of the following data types: DB, BOOL, BYTE, CHAR, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, REAL, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, TIME, S5TIME, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING 16#8225 Receive_Conditionspoints to an optimized memory area greater than 1 kB Enter a pointer to an area with a maximum length of: or Receive_Conditions points to an optimized memory area and the receive length is greater than the area addressed by Receive_Conditions. 16#8229 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to BOOL with a number of bits not equal to n * 8 * Optimized memory area: 1 KB * Non-optimized memory area: 4 KB Note: If the pointer points to an optimized memory area, do not send more than 1 KB. If you are using a pointer to BOOL, the number of bits must be a multiple of 8. Error codes, general 16#8280 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Negative acknowledgment when writing module You can find more detailed information on error causes in theRDREC.STATUS static parameters and in the description of the SFB RDREC. * Check the input at the PORT parameter * Set the COM_RST parameter before the 1st call. Check the input at the PORT parameter You can find more detailed information on error causes in the WRREC.STATUS static parameters and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8282 Module not available Check the input at the PORT parameter and ensure that the module can be reached. Error codes of the receive configuration 16#82C1 Invalid value for "Buffered received frames". Select a suitable value for "Buffered received frames". 16#82C2 Receive configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected Make sure that no receive configuration is sent if the 3964(R) protocol is set. 16#8301 1) Receive_Conditions is a pointer to an invalid data type Select a valid data type. 16#8322 Range length error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8324 Range error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8328 Setting error when reading a parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter Valid range of values: 1-255 The following are valid: DB, BOOL, BYTE, CHAR, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, REAL, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, TIME, S5TIME, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING SEND status and error codes 16#8328 1) BUFFER is a pointer to BOOL with a number of bits not equal to n * 8 If you are using a pointer to BOOL, the number of bits must be a multiple of 8. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 194 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the receive configuration 16#8332 Invalid data block at the Receive_Conditions parameter Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#833A The designation of the data block at the Receive_Conditions parameter refers to a data block which is not loaded. Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8351 Invalid data type Check the input at the Receive_Conditions parameter 16#8352 1) Receive_Conditions does not point to a data block Check the pointer to Receive_Conditions 16#8353 1) Receive_Conditions does not point to a structure of the typeReceive_Conditions Check the pointer to Receive_Conditions Error codes 3964(R) protocol 16#8380 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Character delay time". Select a suitable value for "Character delay time" (CharacterDelayTime). Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8381 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout" (AcknDelayTime). Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8382 16#8383 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Priority". Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Block check" Select a suitable value for "Priority" (Priority). The following are valid: * High (1) * Low (0) Select a suitable value for "Block check" (BCC). The following are valid: * With block check (1) * Without block check (0) 16#8384 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Connection attempts". Select a suitable value for "Connection attempts" (BuildupAttempts). 16#8385 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Transmission attempts". Select a suitable value for "Transmission attempts" (RepetitionAttempts). 16#8386 Runtime error: Number of connection attempts exceeded Check the interface cable and the transmission parameters. Valid range of values: 1-255 Valid range of values: 1-255 Also check whether the receive function is configured correctly at the partner device. 16#8387 Runtime error: Number of transmission attempts exceeded Check the interface cable, the transmission parameters and the configuration of the communication partner. 16#8388 Runtime error: Error at the "Block check character" Check whether the connection is seriously disrupted; in this case you may also occasionally see error codes. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. The internally calculated value of the block check character does not correspond to the block check character received by the partner at the connection end. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 195 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#8389 Runtime error: Invalid character received while waiting for free receive buffer The send request of the communication partner (STX, 02H) is only answered with DLE when the receive buffer is empty. No additional character may be received before (except STX again). Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 16#838A Runtime error: Logical error during receiving. After DLE was received, a further random character (other than DLE or ETX) was received. 16#838B Runtime error: Character delay time exceeded Check if partner DLE in frame header and in data string is always in duplicate or the connection is released with DLE ETX. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. Partner device too slow or faulty. Verify by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line, if necessary. 16#838C Runtime error: Wait time for free receive buffer has started In the user program call the instruction more often or configure a communication with data flow control. 16#838D Runtime error: frame repetition does not start within 4 s after NAK Check the communication partner. A received frame that is possibly corrupted must be repeated by the partner within 4 seconds. 16#838E Runtime error: In idle mode, one or several characters (other than NAK or STX) were received. Check for proper function of the partner device, possibly using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 16#838F Runtime error: Initialization conflict - Both partners have set high priority Set the "Low" priority at one of the partners 16#8391 Parameter assignment error: 3964 configuration data rejected because Freeport is set If the Freeport protocol is set, make sure that no 3964 parameter assignment data is sent. 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 196 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Overview of error messages - Modbus Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - Configuration error of the interface - Modbus_Comm_Load 16#8181 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module at the BAUD parameter. 16#8182 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity" at the PARITY parameter. The following are valid: * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) 16#8183 The module does not support this type of data flow control. Select a valid data flow control for the module at the FLOW_CTRL parameter. 16#8184 Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout" at the RESP_TO parameter. Valid range of values: 1 to 65535 (ms) 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the Send_Config.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_Config.RDREC.STATUS static parameters or RDREC.STATUS and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the Send_Config.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_Config.WRREC.STATUS static parameters or WRREC.STATUS and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8282 Module not available Check the input at the PORT parameter and ensure that the module can be reached. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 197 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Configuration error - Modbus_Slave 16#8186 Invalid slave address Select a suitable slave address at the MB_ADDR parameter. The following are valid: 1-247 at standard address area; 1-65535 at extended address area (0 is reserved for Broadcast) 16#8187 Invalid value at MB_HOLD_REG parameter Select a suitable value for the hold register at the MB_HOLD_REG parameter. 16#8188 Invalid operating mode or broadcast (MB_ADDR = 0) and MODE parameter 1 Select the value 1 for MODE in Broadcast mode or select a different operating mode. 16#818C The pointer to a MB_HOLD_REG area must be a data Select a suitable value for the pointer to the block or a bit memory address area. MB_HOLD_REG area. 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.WRREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 16#8452 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8453 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8454 1) The area addressed by MB_HOLD_REG is longer than the DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8455 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a write-protected DB Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8456 1) Error during instruction execution. The cause of the error is shown in the STATUS parameter. Determine the value of the SFCSTATUS parameter. Check what this means in the description for SFC51, STATUS parameter. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 198 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Configuration error - Modbus_Master 16#8180 Invalid value for MB_DB parameter The value configured for MB_DB (instance data DB) at the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction is not valid. Check the interconnection of the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction and its error messages. 16#8186 Invalid station address Select a suitable station address at the MB_ADDR parameter. The following are valid: 1-247 at standard address area; 1-65535 at extended address area (0 is reserved for Broadcast) 16#8188 Invalid operating mode or broadcast (MB_ADDR = 0) and MODE parameter 1 Select the value 1 for MODE in Broadcast mode or select a different operating mode. 16#8189 Invalid data address Select a suitable value for the data address at the DATA_ADDR parameter. See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818A Invalid length Select a suitable data length at the DATA_LEN parameter. See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818B Invalid value for DATA_PTR Select a suitable value for the data pointer at the DATA_PTR parameter (M or DB address). See description Modbus_Master (Page 125) in the Info system 16#818C Interconnection error of the DATA_PTR parameter 16#818D The area addressed by DATA_PTR is longer than the Check the DATA_PTR pointer DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the interconnection of the instruction. 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Send_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.WRREC.STATUS or Receive_Reset and in the description of the SFB WRREC. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 199 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Communication errors - Modbus_Master and Modbus_Slave 16#80D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or change the parameters, if necessary. 16#80D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send job canceled due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ON for the entire duration of transmission. 16#80E0 Frame aborted: Send buffer overflow / send frame too In the user program call the instruction more often or long configure a communication with data flow control. 16#80E1 Frame aborted: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number are configured for both devices. 16#80E2 Frame aborted: Character frame error Check the settings for start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 16#80E3 Frame aborted: Character overflow error Check the number of data in the frame of the communication partner. 16#80E4 Frame aborted: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1 to 1024/2048/4096 (bytes) Communication error - Modbus_Master 16#80C8 The slave does not respond within the set time Check the data transmission rate, parity and wiring of the slave. 16#80C9 The slave does not respond within the time set by Blocked_Proc_Timeout. Check the setting for Blocked_Proc_Timeout. The interface is busy with an ongoing request. Repeat the command later. Make sure that there are no commands still running before you start a new one. 16#8200 Check if the module has been configured with the Modbus_Comm_Load instruction. The module may possibly need to be reconfigured using Modbus_Comm_Load after a pull/plug or after voltage recovery. Protocol error - Modbus_Slave (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8380 CRC error Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#8381 The function code is not supported or is not supported Check the communication partner and make sure for broadcast. that a valid function code is sent. 16#8382 Invalid length information in the request frame Select a suitable data length at the DATA_LEN parameter. 16#8383 Invalid data address in the request frame Select a suitable value for the data address at the DATA_ADDR parameter. 16#8384 Invalid data value error in the request frame Check the data value in the request frame of the Modbus master 16#8385 The diagnostic value is not supported by the Modbus slave (function code 08) The Modbus slave only supports the diagnostic values 16#0000 and 16#000A. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 200 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy Protocol error - Modbus_Master (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8380 CRC error Checksum error of the Modbus frame. Check the communication partner. 16#8381 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: The function code is not supported. Check the communication partner and make sure that a valid function code is sent. 16#8382 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: Invalid length Select a suitable data length. 16#8383 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the followSelect a suitable value for the data address at the ing error message: Invalid data address in the request DATA_ADDR parameter. frame 16#8384 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: Data value error Check the request frame to the Modbus slave. 16#8385 Response frame from Modbus Slave with the following error message: The diagnostic value is not supported by the Modbus slave The Modbus slave only supports the diagnostic values 16#0000 and 16#000A. 16#8386 The returned function code does not match the requested function code. Check the response frame and the addressing of the slave. 16#8387 A slave that was not requested answers Check the response frame of the slave. Check the address settings of the slave. 16#8388 Error in the response of the slave to a write request. Check the response frame of the slave. 16#8828 1) DATA_PTR points to a bit address that is not equal to n*8 Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8852 1) DATA_PTR is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8853 1) DATA_PTR is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the DATA_PTR pointer 16#8855 DATA_PTR points to a write-protected DB Check the DATA_PTR pointer Error during call of SFC51 Call the Modbus_Master instruction again 1) 16#8856 1) Error - Modbus_Slave (only communication modules that support Modbus) 16#8428 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a bit address that is not equal to n * 8 Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8452 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer to a DB or a bit memory area Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8453 1) MB_HOLD_REG is not a pointer of type BOOL or WORD Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8454 1) The area addressed by MB_HOLD_REG is longer than the DB, or the area addressed is too small for the number of data bytes to be read or written. Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8455 1) MB_HOLD_REG points to a write-protected DB Check the MB_HOLD_REG pointer 16#8456 1) Error during call of SFC51 Call the Modbus_Slave instruction again 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 201 Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Overview of error messages - USS Error code Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - 16#8180 Length error in response of drive Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8181 Data type error Select a suitable data type. The following are valid: * Real * Word * Double word 16#8182 Data type error: "Double word" or "Real" may not be returned for the "Word" request. Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8183 Data type error: "Word" may not be returned for the "Double word" or "Real" request. Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8184 Checksum error in response of drive Check the drive and the communication connection. 16#8185 Addressing error Valid drive address range: 1 to 16 16#8186 Setpoint error Valid setpoint range: -200% to +200% 16#8187 Incorrect drive number returned Check the response frame of the drive. 16#8188 Invalid PZD length Permitted PZD lengths: 2, 4, 6, 8 words 16#8189 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module. 16#818A A different request for this drive is currently active. Repeat the parameter read or write command later. 16#818B The drive does not respond. Check the drive. 16#818C The drive responds with an error message to a parameter request. Check the response frame of the drive. Check the parameter request. Check if the instructions USS_Read_Param, USS_Write_Param or USS_Port_Scan have reported an error. If they have, check the value of the static tag USS_DB. w_USSExtendedError of the USS_Drive_Control instruction. 16#818D 16#818E The drive responds with an access error message to a parameter request. Check the response frame of the drive. The drive was not initialized. Check the user program and make sure that the USS_Drive_Control instruction is called for this drive. Check the parameter request. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 202 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Programming - communication using instructions 5.4 Instructions Error code Description Remedy 16#8280 Negative acknowledgment when reading module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Port_Config.RDREC.STATUS, Send_Config.RDREC.STATUS , Receive_Config.RDREC.STATUS , Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB RDREC. 16#8281 Negative acknowledgment when writing module Check the input at the PORT parameter. You can find more detailed information on error causes in the static parameters Port_Config.WRREC.STATUS, Send_Config.WRREC.STATUS , Receive_Config.WRREC.STATUS , Send_P2P.RDREC.STATUS or Receive_P2P.RDREC.STATUS, and in the description of the SFB WRREC. 1) Only with instructions for S7-300/400 CPUs CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 203 6 Startup and Diagnostics 6.1 Startup characteristics Operating mode transitions After the communication module starts up, all data between the CPU and the communication module is exchanged by means of instructions. CPU STOP During a running data transmission communication module - CPU, both a send and a receive job is aborted. CPU RUN Send and receive operation is ensured in the RUN state of the CPU. With a corresponding configuration in the properties dialog of the communication module, you can automatically clear the receive buffer on the communication module during CPU startup. From the view of the communication module, there are no further operating states/operating state transitions. 6.2 Diagnostic functions Introduction The diagnostic functions of the communication module allow errors that have occurred to be located quickly. The following diagnostic options are available to you: Diagnostics by means of the display elements of the communication module The indicators provide information on the operating mode or the possible error states of the communication module. The indicators provide an initial overview of any internal or external errors and interface-specific errors. For more information refer to the device manual of the corresponding communication module. Diagnostics via the STATUS output of the instructions Instructions have a STATUS output for error diagnostics; it provides information about communication errors between the communication module and the CPU. You can evaluate the STATUS parameter in the user program (it is active for exactly one cycle). Diagnostic error interrupt The communication module can trigger a diagnostic error interrupt on the CPU assigned to it. The communication module makes diagnostic information available. The analysis of this information is made via the user program or by reading the CPU diagnostics buffer. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 204 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Startup and Diagnostics 6.3 Diagnostic interrupts 6.3 Diagnostic interrupts The diagnostics are displayed as plain text in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) in the online and diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. The following diagnostics can be signaled: Parameter assignment error (10H) Wire break (109H) CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 205 Service & Support A.1 A Service & Support Unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle For machine manufacturers, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry. To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant - from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization. Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drive technology from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants. You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees - even across continents - ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 206 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Service & Support A.1 Service & Support Online Support The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service & Support at any time and from any location in the world. You can find Online Support at the following address on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Technical Consulting Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis, definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the creation of the automation solution. Technical Support Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems. You can find Technical Support at the following address on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). Training Extend your competitive edge - through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer. You can find the training courses at the following address on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain). Engineering Support Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project. Field Service Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance - to ensure that your machines and plants are always available. Spare parts In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains. Repairs Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to reduce both to a minimum - with our worldwide repair facilities. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 207 Service & Support A.1 Service & Support Optimization During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing productivity or reducing costs. To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services. Modernization You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization - with comprehensive services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning. Service programs Our service programs are select service packages for an automation and drives system or product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems. The services of a service program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately. Examples of service programs: Service contracts Plant IT Security Services Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence SIMATIC Remote Support Services Benefits at a glance: Reduced downtimes for increased productivity Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks Comprehensive service from a single source, fewer interfaces and greater expertise Contact At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training, service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products from Industry Automation and Drive Technologies. You can find your personal contact in our contacts database on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner). CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 208 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Glossary Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one CPU, various input and output modules, and operating and monitoring devices. Bit times "Bit times" are always specified as a number of bits. The "time" set with bits depends on the selected data transmission rate that is taken into consideration automatically. Example: The telegram end is to be detected after a gap of two characters. The set data transmission rate is 9600 bit/s. The set character frame is 10 bits. 10 x 2 = 20 bit times This corresponds to a time of: 20 x 1/9600 0.0021 s Communication module Communication modules are used for point-to-point connections and bus links. Configuring Configuring refers to the configuration of separate modules of an automation system in the configuration table. CPU Central Processing Unit = Central module of the automation system that consists of the control and computing units, memory, system program, and interfaces to the I/O modules. CTS Clear to send. The communication partner is ready to receive data. Cycle time The cycle time is the time that the CPU requires to process the user program once. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 209 Glossary Cyclic program processing In cyclic program processing the user program runs in program loop, or cycle, that is constantly repeated. DCD Data carrier detect. The communication partner signals that it recognizes incoming data. Default setting The default setting is a reasonable basic setting that can be used whenever no other value is specified. Diagnostic events Diagnostics events are, for example, module errors or system errors in the CPU that may be caused by a program error. Diagnostic functions The diagnostic functions cover the entire system diagnostics and include the recognition, interpretation and reporting of errors within the automation system. Diagnostics buffer Memory area in which detailed information on all diagnostics events is entered based on the order of their occurrence. DSR Data set ready. The communication partner is ready. DTR Data terminal ready. The communication module is ready. Hardware Hardware is the entire physical and technical equipment of a automation system. Module parameters Module parameters are values with which the behavior of the module can be set. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 210 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Glossary Online/Offline When you are online there is a data connection between the automation system and programming device, when you are offline there is no data connection between them. Parameter assignment Parameter assignment refers to the setting of a module's behavior. Parameters Parameters are values that can be allocated. There are two different types of parameters: block parameters and module parameters. Point-to-point communication In point-to-point communication the communication processor forms the interface between a programmable logic controller and a communication partner. Procedure Procedure refers to the process of a data transmission according to a specific protocol. Protocol All communication partners involved in data transmission must follow fixed rules for handling and implementing the data traffic. Such rules are called protocols. Receive line initial state The initial state of the receive line for RS422 and RS485 mode: enables break detection (wire break) ensures a defined level on the receive line while it is not sending. RI Ring indicator. Incoming call for connecting a modem. RTS Request to send. The communication module is ready to send. Software Software refers to the entirety of all programs that are used on a computing system. The operating system and user programs belong to this. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 211 Glossary User program The user program contains all instructions and declarations for processing the signals used for controlling a system or a process. In SIMATIC S7 the user program is structured and divided into small units, the blocks. USS The USS(R) protocol (universal serial interface protocol) defines an access method based on the master-slave principle for communication by means of a serial bus. The point-to-point connection is included as a subset in this protocol. XON/XOFF Software data flow control with XON/XOFF. You can configure the characters for XON and XOFF (any ASCII character). The user data may not contain these characters. CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 212 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Index 3 D 3964(R) Receiving data, 51 Sending data, 49 3964(R) procedure, 48 Control characters, 48 Priority, 48 3964R procedure Block check character, 49 Data flow control, 15, 24, 32 Hardware, 33 Software, 32 Data transmission rates, 14 Data transmission, trigger, 87 DCD, 24 Diagnostic functions, 204 Diagnostics, 204 DLE, 48 DSR, 24 DTR, 24 A Accompanying signals, 15 ASCII protocol, 39 Asynchronous data transmission, 19 Automatic operation of accompanying signals, 35 B BCC, 48 Bidirectional data traffic, 19 Block check character, 49 Broadcast, 54 BUFFER parameter, Send_P2P, 90 C Character delay time, 42 Character delay time CDT, 55 Code transparency, 45 Communication Query architecture, 72 Communication interfaces Programming, 70 Communication module (CM) Data reception, 91 Programming, 70 Connecting cables, 24, 27, 30 CPU RUN, 204 CPU STOP, 204 CRC, 55 CTS, 24 E End sequence, 42 ETX, 48 F Fixed frame length, 42 Frame configuration Instructions, 70 frame structure, 54 Freeport, 64, 64 Code transparency, 45 End criteria, 42 Message end, 40 Message start, 40 Receive buffer, 46 Start criteria, 41 Freeport protocol, 39 Full-duplex operation, 19 G Get_Features, 18, 65 Global library Overview of the USS protocol, 167 H Half-duplex operation, 19 Handshaking, 32 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 213 Index Hardware data flow control, 33 Hardware RTS always ON, 34 Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR, 34 Hardware RTS always switched, 35 I Idle line, 41 Instructions P3964_Config (protocol configuration), 85 Port_Config (port configuration), 75 Receive_Config (receive configuration), 80 Receive_P2P (receive point-to-point data), 91 Receive_Reset (reset receiver), 93 Send_Config (send configuration), 78 Send_P2P (send point-to-point data), 87 Signal_Get (get RS232 signals), 94 Signal_Get (set RS232 signals), 96 USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31, 176 USS_Port_Scan, 172 USS_Port_Scan_31, 172 USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31, 180 USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31, 182 Interface X27 (RS 485), 30 X27 (RS422), 27 Interface configuration Instructions, 70 Interfaces, 14 L LENGTH parameter, Send_P2P, 90 Library for the USS protocol General information on drive setup, 184 Overview, 167 Requirements for use, 169 USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31, 176 USS_Port_Scan, 172 USS_Port_Scan_31, 172 USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31, 180 USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31, 182 Line break, 41 M Main entry, 65 Maximum number of characters, 42 Message length from message, 42 Message timeout, 42 Modbus End of frame, 55 Exception code, 55 Modbus_Comm_Load, 120 Modbus_Slave, 125, 133 RS232 signals, 35 Modbus communication, 53 Modbus instructions, 66 Modbus_Comm_Load, 18, 66, 120 Modbus_Master, 18, 66 Modbus_Slave, 18, 66, 125, 133 N NAK, 48 O Operating mode transitions, 204 Order numbers, 13 P P3964_Config, 17 P3964_Config (protocol configuration), 85 Parameter configuration LENGH and BUFFER for Send_P2P, 90 Point-to-point connection, 16 Point-to-point programming, 70 Port_Config, 17, 65 Port_Config (port configuration), 75 Programming Modbus, 66 PtP, 63 PtP instructions, 70 USS, 68 Protocols of the communication modules, 15 PtP communication Programming, 70 PtP error classes, 74 PtP instructions, 64 PtP instructions return values, 73 Q Query architecture, 72 Query architecture master, 72 Query architecture slave, 72 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections 214 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB Index R Receive buffer, 46 Receive buffer size, 14 Receive line initial state, 26 Receive_Config, 17, 65 Receive_Config (receive configuration), 80 Receive_P2P, 17, 64 Receive_P2P (receive point-to-point data), 91 Receive_Reset, 17, 65 Receive_Reset, 17, 65 Receive_Reset (reset receiver), 93 Receiving data, 64 Response timeout, 42 Return values PtP instructions, 73 Return values receive runtime, 91 RI, 24 RS232 accompanying signals Automatic use, 35 RS232 mode, 23 RS232 signals, 23 RS422 mode, 26 RS422 signals, 27, 29 RS485 mode, 29 RTS, 24 S Send_Config, 17, 65 Send_Config (send configuration), 78 Send_P2P, 17, 64 Send_P2P (send point-to-point data) LENGH and BUFFER parameters, 90 Send_P2P (send point-to-point data), 87 Sending data, 64 Serial data transmission, 19 Set_Features, 18, 65 Shared PtP parameter errors, 74 Signal_Get, 17, 65 Signal_Get (get RS232 signals), 94 Signal_Get (set RS232 signals), 96 Signal_Set, 18, 65 Software data flow control, 32 Start character, 41 Start sequences, 41 STX, 48 with 3964(R), 21 with Freeport, 21 U Unidirectional/bidirectional data traffic, 24 USS communication, 60 USS instructions, 68 USS master Overview of functions, 62 USS protocol, 60 USS protocol: Data field, USS protocol:Data encryption, 61 USS protocol:Data transmission procedure, 61 USS protocol:frame structure, 61 USS protocol General structure of the data block:Parameter area (PKW), 62 General structure of the data block:Process data area (PZD), 62 USS_Drive_Control, 18, 69, 168 USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31, 176 USS_Port_Scan, 18, 68, 168, 172 USS_Port_Scan_31, 172 USS_Read_Param, 18, 69, 168 USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31, 180 USS_Write_Param, 18, 69, 168 USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31, 182 X X27 (RS 485) interface, 30 X27 (RS422) interface, 27 XON/XOFF, 32 T Transmission security, 20 for Modbus and USS, 22 CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E37509394-AB 215 CM PtP operation with PROFINET ___________________ Preface controller 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500 / ET 200MP / ET 200SP CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual 2 ___________________ Overview 3 ___________________ Basic information Basic communication 4 ___________________ mechanisms Data transmission with 5 ___________________ Freeport Data transmission with 6 ___________________ 3964(R) 7 ___________________ Configuration data records 8 ___________________ Error status 9 ___________________ Sending data 10 ___________________ Receiving data 11 ___________________ Clear receive buffer 12 ___________________ RS232 signals 13 ___________________ Error messages 01/2013 A5E03908199-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03908199-01 01/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation addresses users who want to use the point-to-point communication modules independently of the SIMATIC S7. It offers you important information with regard to the configuration and commissioning of the point-to-point communication modules for S7-1500 (ET 200MP) and ET 200SP. Requirements To use PtP communication modules in a system independently of the SIMATIC S7, the CPU must support communication by means of data records and come equipped with a PROFINET IO controller. For more information on this topic, refer to the Distributed I/O System ET 200SP and Distributed I/O System ET 200MP system manuals. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows-based computers Proficiency with STEP 7 GSDML file Engineering must be provided with information regarding functionality and parameters of the communication modules for the higher-level application. The properties of the PtP communication modules are defined in a GSDML (Generic Station Description Markup Language) file, an XML-based language that is defined based on the GSDML scheme (ISO 15745: GSD for PROFIBUS and GSDML for PROFINET IEC 61804: EDDL IEC 62453: FDT/DTM). The Engineering System must provide a suitable interpreter that makes the GSDML data available to the system. The name of a GSDML file for the communication modules can have the following syntax, for example: GSDML-V2.3-Siemens-ET200SP-20110824.xml The GSDML file contains: Device and identification data Parameter assignment data Diagnostics data CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 3 Preface In order to enable parameter assignment of the communication modules, the GSDML file must be installed/imported in the Engineering System. Validity of the documentation This documentation is valid for the following point-to-point communication modules CM PtP RS232 BA (6ES7540-1AD00-0AA0) communication module CM PtP RS422/485 BA (6ES7540-1AB00-0AA0) communication module CM PtP RS232 HF (6ES7541-1AD00-0AB0) communication module CM PtP RS422/485 HF (6ES7541-1AB00-0AB0) communication module CM PtP (6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0) communication module Conventions Please also observe notes labeled as follows: Note The notes contain important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on part of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Recycling and disposal The products can be recycled due to their low pollutant content. For environmentally compliant recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company certified for the disposal of electronic waste. Additional assistance Information about the Technical support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/supportrequest) available can be found in the appendix to this documentation. The portfolio of technical documentation for SIMATIC products and systems is available on the SIMATIC Portal (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available in the Catalog (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 4 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Preface Note on IT security Siemens offers IT security mechanisms for its automation and drive product portfolio in order to support the safe operation of the plant/machine. We recommend that you inform yourself regularly on the IT security developments regarding your products. You can find information on this on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). You can register for a product-specific newsletter here. For the safe operation of a plant/machine, however, it is also necessary to integrate the automation components into an overall IT security concept for the entire plant/machine, which corresponds to the state-of-the-art IT technology. You can find information on this on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Products used from other manufacturers should also be taken into account here. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 5 Preface CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 6 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide................................................................................................................................. 9 2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 11 3 Basic information ..................................................................................................................................... 13 4 3.1 Serial transmission of a character ...............................................................................................13 3.2 Transmission security ..................................................................................................................15 Basic communication mechanisms .......................................................................................................... 17 4.1 5 6 7 Data records and user data interface ..........................................................................................20 Data transmission with Freeport .............................................................................................................. 21 5.1 Sending data with Freeport..........................................................................................................22 5.2 Receiving data with Freeport .......................................................................................................24 5.3 Code transparency.......................................................................................................................29 5.4 Receive buffer ..............................................................................................................................29 5.5 RS232 mode ................................................................................................................................30 5.6 RS422 mode ................................................................................................................................31 5.7 RS485 mode ................................................................................................................................32 5.8 Handshaking ................................................................................................................................33 Data transmission with 3964(R)............................................................................................................... 37 6.1 Data transmission with 3964(R) protocol.....................................................................................37 6.2 Control characters........................................................................................................................37 6.3 Block checksum ...........................................................................................................................38 6.4 Sending data with 3964(R) ..........................................................................................................39 6.5 Receiving data with 3964(R)........................................................................................................40 Configuration data records....................................................................................................................... 41 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 Freeport communication ..............................................................................................................41 Port configuration record - data record 57 ...................................................................................41 Send configuration record - data record 59 .................................................................................44 Receive configuration record - data record 60.............................................................................46 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 3964 communication....................................................................................................................49 Port configuration record - data record 57 ...................................................................................49 3964 protocol configuration - data record 61 ...............................................................................49 7.3 Activate special function ..............................................................................................................51 CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 7 Table of contents 8 Error status .............................................................................................................................................. 53 8.1 9 10 11 Sending data ........................................................................................................................................... 55 9.1 Send data - data record 48 ......................................................................................................... 55 9.2 Querying send acknowledgment - input user data ..................................................................... 57 9.3 Example ...................................................................................................................................... 58 Receiving data ......................................................................................................................................... 59 10.1 Data received - data record 49/50 .............................................................................................. 59 10.2 Query: New receive frame - input user data ............................................................................... 61 10.3 Example ...................................................................................................................................... 62 Clear receive buffer ................................................................................................................................. 63 11.1 12 13 Read error status - data record 55.............................................................................................. 53 Clear receive buffer - data record 54 .......................................................................................... 63 RS232 signals.......................................................................................................................................... 65 12.1 Set RS232 secondary signals - data record 53 .......................................................................... 65 12.2 Read RS232 secondary signals - input user data ...................................................................... 66 Error messages ....................................................................................................................................... 67 Glossary .................................................................................................................................................. 75 Index........................................................................................................................................................ 79 CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 8 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 1 Documentation guide Introduction This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the S7-300/400, ET 200MP/SP systems consists of the relevant operating instructions, manuals and product information. Overview of documentation on the topic of point-to-point communication The table below includes additional documentation which amends this description. Subject Documentation Important contents System System manual ET 200MP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59193214) * Application planning * Installing * Connecting System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/58649293) * Addressing * Commissioning * Maintenance Function manual Communication (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59192925) * Basics of serial communication * Data transmission functions * Diagnostic functions Device manual CM PtP RS232 BA communication module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59057152) * Product overview * Connecting * Assigning parameters Device manual CM PtP RS232 HF communication module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59057160) * Programming * Diagnostics Communication Device manual CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en59057390) Device manual CM PtP RS422/485 HF communication module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/59061372) Device manual CM PtP communication module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59061378) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 9 Documentation guide Subject Documentation Important contents System diagnostics Function manual System diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59192926) For S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP: * Diagnostic evaluation Hardware/software Function manual EMC/EMI compatible installation of control systems (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59193566) * Basics * Electromagnetic compatibility * Lightning protection Setup SIMATIC Manuals The latest manuals of SIMATIC products are available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) and can be downloaded free of charge. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 10 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 2 Overview Overview of components and order numbers Tabular overview of communication modules Communication module Order number CM PtP RS232 BA 6ES7 540-1AD00-0AA0 CM PtP RS422/485 BA 6ES7 540-1AB00-0AA0 CM PtP RS232 HF 6ES7 541-1AD00-0AB0 CM PtP RS422/485 HF 6ES7 541-1AB00-0AB0 CM PtP (ET 200SP) 6ES7 137-6AA00-0BA0 Overview of components and interfaces Tabular overview of communication modules and their functions. Communication module Interface Protocols CM PtP RS232 BA RS232 - CM PtP RS422/485 BA RS422 - RS485 - - CM PtP RS232 HF RS232 - CM PtP RS422/485 HF RS422 - RS485 - - RS232 RS422 RS485 - Freeport CM PtP (ET 200SP) D-sub 3964(R) 9-pin 15-pin ET 200SP Base Unit with 18 terminals *) *) ET 200SP Base Unit instead of sub D; same for all; pin assignment depending on physical transmission properties CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 11 Overview Overview of components and data transmission rates Communication module Data transmission rate in bps 300 600 1200 2400 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 CM PtP RS232 BA 4800 - - - 115200 - CM PtP RS422/485 BA - - - - CM PtP RS232 HF CM PtP RS422/485 HF CM PtP (ET 200SP) Overview of components and receive buffer size Module Receive buffer size KB Max. frame length KB Bufferable frames CM PtP RS232 BA 2 1 255 CM PtP RS422/485 BA 2 1 255 CM PtP RS232 HF 8 4 255 CM PtP RS422/485 HF 8 4 255 CM PtP (ET 200SP) 4 2 255 Secondary signals and data flow control Software data flow control with XON/XOFF The Freeport protocol supports data flow control with XON/XOFF via the RS232 and RS422 interfaces. Hardware data flow control with RTS/CTS The Freeport protocol supports data flow control with RTS/CTS via the RS232 interface. Automatic operation of secondary signals The Freeport protocol supports operation of the RS232 secondary signals by means of the RS232 interface. (Only available if hardware data flow control is not activated.) Application options for the communication modules You may set up a communication connection with different partners, depending on the communication modules used: Freeport: Transmission of ASCII character strings without specified protocol format 3964(R): Communication between programmable logic controllers (master/master communication) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 12 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Basic information 3.1 3 Serial transmission of a character Introduction Different networking options are available for the exchange of data between two or more communication partners. The PtP connection between two communication partners is the simplest means of information exchange. Point-to-point connection In point-to-point connection, the communication processor forms the interface between a programmable logic controller and a communication partner. Data is sent in serial mode via PtP connection with the communication module. Serial data transmission During serial data transmission, the individual bits of a character of information to be transferred are sent successively in a defined sequence. Bidirectional data traffic - operating mode In the context of bidirectional data traffic, we distinguish between two operating modes for the communication module: Half duplex mode The data is transferred between one or several communication partners in both directions alternately. Half duplex mode means that data is either sent or received at a given point in time. Full duplex mode The data is exchanged simultaneously between one or several communication partners, i.e. it is possible to send and receive data simultaneously at a given point in time. Asynchronous data transmission Serial data transmission occurs asynchronously at the communication module. The so-called time base synchronism (fixed time base for transmission of a fixed character string) is only upheld during transmission of a character. Each character to be sent is preceded by a synchronization pulse, which is also known as start bit. The length of the start bit transmission determines the clock cycle. The end of character transmission is formed by one or two stop bits. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 13 Basic information 3.1 Serial transmission of a character Handshakes In addition to the start and stop bits, both communication partners need further handshake procedures for serial data transmission. These include: Data transmission rate Character and acknowledgment delay time Parity Number of data bits (7 or 8 bits/characters) Number of stop bits (1 or 2) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 14 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Basic information 3.2 Transmission security 3.2 Transmission security Transmission security plays an important role in the transmission of data and in the selection of the transmission procedure. Generally speaking, the more layers of the reference model are applied, the higher the transmission security. Classification of existing protocols The figure below illustrates how the protocols of the communication module fit into the reference model. 7UDQVSRUWOD\HU /D\HU /D\HU 7KHWUDQVSRUWOD\HULVWKHOLQNEHWZHHQWKH WUDQVSRUWDQGDSSOLFDWLRQRULHQWHGOD\HUV 7KHGDWDSDFNHWVDUHDVVLJQHGWRDQ DSSOLFDWLRQDWWKLVOD\HU 1HWZRUNOD\HU 1RWDYDLODEOHEHFDXVHWKLVLVDSXUH SRLQWWRSRLQWFRQQHFWLRQ /LQNOD\HU 7UDQVPLVVLRQRIWKHGDWDE\WHVZLWK 5 6WDUWDQGHQGGHOLPLWHUV DUHDGGHGLQWKHHYHQWRIHUURUV WUDQVPLVVLRQPD\EHUHSHDWHG 5 /D\HU /D\HU Figure 3-1 6SHFLI\LQJWKHSK\VLFDO WUDQVPLVVLRQRIWKHGDWDE\WHV )UHHSRUW 3K\VLFDOOD\HU Classification of the existing protocols of the communication module in the reference model CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 15 Basic information 3.2 Transmission security Transmission security with Freeport Data security when using Freeport: Despite the efficiency of data transmission with the Freeport protocol, it is not possible to ensure secure data transmission with Freeport because no data security measures other than the use of a parity bit (can also be disabled, depending on the character frame setting) are applied. A certain degree of data security can be achieved through parameter assignment of the frame start and frame end conditions. The parity bit ensures that the inversion of a bit in a character to be sent can be recognized. If two or more bits of a character are inverted, this error can no longer be detected. To increase transmission security, you can, for example, implement a checksum, a frame length specification, or configurable end conditions. These measures must be implemented by the user. A further increase in data security can be achieved by means of acknowledgment message frames in response to send or receive message frames. This is the case with high-grade protocols for data communication (ISO 7-layer reference model). Transmission security with 3964(R) Two different procedures for data transmission can be used, either with or without a block check character: Data transmission without block check character: 3964 Transmission security is achieved by means of a specified frame structure, frame breakdown, and frame repetitions. Data transmission with block check character: 3964R The high degree of transmission security is achieved by means of a specified frame structure and breakdown, frame repetitions, as well as inclusion of a block check character (BCC). The hamming distance in 3964R mode is 3. The hamming distance represents a measure for data transmission security. In this manual, the term 3964(R) is used when descriptions and notes refer to both data transmission modes. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 16 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Basic communication mechanisms 4 Reading/writing data records Note Reading/writing data records For information about the functions for reading/writing data records, refer to the documentation of your controller. The "Write data record" function can be used to configure the devices by means of configuration data records. The "Write data record" function also transmits the send data to the devices. Accordingly, "Read data record" can be used to read diagnostics data and receive data from the devices. For operation, you need to configure the communication modules for the relevant application. The following configuration data records can be used for this purpose: - Freeport communication (Page 41) - 3964 communication (Page 49) Use the following data records to send and receive data: - Sending data (Page 55) - Receiving data (Page 59) The cyclic user data shows you whether the module has sent or received new data. - Querying send acknowledgment - input user data (Page 57) - Query: New receive frame - input user data (Page 61) In RS232 mode, you can derive the current state of the secondary signals from the cyclic user data of the module, or control the RS232 secondary signals by means of the user program (provided hardware data flow control is not activated). - RS232 signals (Page 65) Data records can also be used to send additional control and verification commands. - Activate special function (Page 51) Additional information Chapter Data records and user data interface (Page 20) provides an overview of all configuration data records. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 17 Basic communication mechanisms Send - flow chart Users can transmit data based on the sequence outlined below (refer to Sending data (Page 55) for details). Management data and send data is transmitted to the communication module by means of a special data record. The communication module provides the acknowledgment in the input user data. &DOFXODWH6HTXHQFHQXPEHUIRU 6(1'DQGHQWHUUHVXOWLQWKH VHQGDUHD (QWHUIUDPHHQGLGHQWLILHULQWKH VHQGDUHD DGGLWLRQDOGDWDSHQGLQJ ODVWGDWDUHFRUGLIQRRWKHUGDWD H[LVWV 6HQGGDWDUHFRUG )XUWKHUGDWD DYDLODEOH" 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Block type: 0039H - PORT_CFG 0 1 Block length: 0018H 2 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 9 Protocol: 0000H - Freeport protocol 0001H - 3964 protocol 0002H to FFFFH - Reserved CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 41 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication Port configuration Italic = not supported Data transmission rate: 10 0000H - Reserved 0007H - 19.2 kbps 11 0001H - 300 bps 0008H - 38.4 kbps 0002H - 600 bps 0009H - 57.6 kbps 0003H - 1.2 kbps 000AH - 76.8 kbps 0004H - 2.4 kbps 000BH - 115.2 kbps 0005H - 4.8 kbps 000CH to FFFFH - Reserved 0006H - 9.6 kbps Parity: 12 0000H - Reserved 13 0001H - None 0002H - Even 0003H - Odd 0004H - Mark (set parity bit to 1) 0005H - Space (set parity bit to 0) 0006H - Any (the parity is not checked during receiving. The parity is always set to "0" during sending.) 0007H to FFFFH - Reserved Data bits: 14 0000H - Reserved 15 0001H - 8 data bits per character 0002H - 7 data bits per character 0003H to FFFFH - Reserved Stop bits: 16 0000H - Reserved 17 0001H - 1 stop bit 0002H - 2 stop bits 0003H to FFFFH - Reserved 18 19 Data flow control: RS232 settings: RS485 settings: RS422 settings: 0000H - Reserved 0000H - Reserved 0000H - Reserved 0001H - None 0001H - None 0001H - None 0002H - XON/XOFF 0002H to FFFFH - Reserved 0002H - XON/XOFF 0003H - Hardware RTS always ON, DSR required 0003H to FFFFH - Reserved 0004H - Hardware RTS always switched, DSR required 0005H - Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR 0006H to FFFFH - Reserved CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 42 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication Port configuration Italic = not supported 20 XON: 00H to FFH - XON character 21 XOFF: 00H to FFH - XOFF character 22 Wait for XON after XOFF in ms: (0000H to FFFFH) 23 24 Operating mode: 00H - RS232 01H - RS422 full duplex four-wire mode (point-to-point) 02H - RS422 full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint master) (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) 03H - Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave) (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) 04H - Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode 05H to FFH - Reserved 25 Receive line default: 00H - "No" default 01H - Signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection): Break detection is possible with this default setting. Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS 422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". 02H - Signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V: This default corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). No break detection is possible with this default setting. 03H to FFH - Reserved 26 Break detection: 00H - Break detection deactivated 01H - Break detection activated 02H to FFH - Reserved 27 Reserved: 00H CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 43 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication 7.1.2 Send configuration record - data record 59 Note Parameter assignment error If the communication module detects a parameter assignment error when writing the "Send Configuration Record - data record 59", the data record is rejected with error status 0x80E1. The corresponding cause of error can be read by means of data record "Read Error Status data record 55" (error codes of the send configuration). Send configuration Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 Block type 003BH - SEND_CFG 1 2 Block length: 001CH 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 RTS ON delay in 1 ms: (0000H - FFFFH) 9 (not available for RS422/485 modules) 10 RTS OFF delay in 1 ms: (0000H - FFFFH) 11 (not available for RS422/485 modules) 12 Break duration in bit times: (0000H to FFFFH) 13 14 Idle Line duration in bit times: (0000H to FFFFH) 15 Settings: 16 Reserved: 0000H 17 USR_END 18 STRING[2,0,xx,yy] - No end delimiter 19 STRING[2,1,xx,yy] - One end delimiter 20 STRING[2,2,xx,yy] - Two end delimiters 21 Note: The first character (2; byte 18) contains the maximum string length, the second character (0, 1, 2, byte 19) the actual string length, and xx (byte 20) and yy (byte 21) contain the characters. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 44 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication Send configuration Italic = not supported APP_END 22 STRING[5,0,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee] - No appended characters (default) 23 STRING[5,1,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee] - One appended character 24 STRING[5,2,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee] - Two appended characters 25 STRING[5,3,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee] - Three appended characters 26 STRING[5,4,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee] - Four appended characters 27 STRING[5,5,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee] - Five appended characters 28 Note: The first character (5; byte 22) contains the maximum string length, the second character (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; byte 23) the actual string length, and aa to ee (bytes 24-28) contain the characters. 29 Reserved: 00H 30 Reserved: 00H 31 Reserved: 00H CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 45 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication 7.1.3 Receive configuration record - data record 60 Note Parameter assignment error If the communication module detects a parameter assignment error when writing the "Receive Configuration Record - data record 60", the data record is rejected with error status 0x80E1. The corresponding cause of error can be read by means of data record "Read Error Status data record 55" (error codes of the receive configuration). Receive configuration Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Block type: 003CH - RCV_CFG 0 1 Block length: 0040H 2 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 9 Start conditions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Seq. #4 Seq. #3 Seq. #2 Seq. #1 Idle Line Break Used char. Start char. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated Idle Line duration in bit times: 0000H to FFFFH 10 11 12 Start characters: 00H to FFH 13 Frame start sequence #1 character check 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Char #5 Ac Char #4 Ac Char #3 Ac Char #2 Ac Char #1 Ac 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 14 Character #1: 00H to FFH 15 Character #2: 00H to FFH 16 Character #3: 00H to FFH 17 Character #4: 00H to FFH 18 Character #5: 00H to FFH CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 46 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication Receive configuration Italic = not supported 19 Frame start sequence #2 character check 0 0 0 Char #5 Ac Char #4 Ac Char #3 Ac Char #2 Ac Char #1 Ac Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 20 Character #1: 00H to FFH 21 Character #2: 00H to FFH 22 Character #3: 00H to FFH 23 Character #4: 00H to FFH 24 Character #5: 00H to FFH Frame start sequence #3 character check 25 0 0 0 Char #5 Ac Char #4 Ac Char #3 Ac Char #2 Ac Char #1 Ac Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 26 Character #1: 00H to FFH 27 Character #2: 00H to FFH 28 Character #3: 00H to FFH 29 Character #4: 00H to FFH 30 Character #5: 00H to FFH Frame start sequence #4 character check 31 0 0 0 Char #5 Ac Char #4 Ac Char #3 Ac Char #2 Ac Char #1 Ac Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 32 Character #1: 00H to FFH 33 Character #2: 00H to FFH 34 Character #3: 00H to FFH 35 Character #4: 00H to FFH 36 Character #5: 00H to FFH 37 must always be 00H End conditions: 38 39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 Fixed length Seq. #1 Read length Max length CDT Mess. TO Resp. TO Reserved Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. Rcv. Active. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated 1- activated CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 47 Configuration data records 7.1 Freeport communication Receive configuration Italic = not supported Fixed frame length: 0001H to 0xxxH* 40 41 Maximum frame length: 0001H to 0xxxH* 42 43 Offset of the length field in the message: 0000H to 0xxx* 44 45 46 Size of the length field: 01H, 02H, 04H - all other values are invalid 47 Number of characters not counted in length specification: 00H to FFH 48 49 50 Response timeout in 1ms: 0000H to FFFFH 51 Message timeout in 1 ms: 0000H to FFFFH 52 53 54 Character delay time in bit times: 0000H to FFFFH 55 56 End sequence #1 character check 0 0 0 Char #5 Ac Char #4 Ac Char #3 Ac Char #2 Ac Char #1 Ac Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 0 - inactive. 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 1 - activated 57 Character #1: 00H to FFH 58 Character #2: 00H to FFH 59 Character #3: 00H to FFH 60 Character #4: 00H to FFH 61 Character #5: 00H to FFH Buffered receive frames: 62 00H - Reserved 01H to FEH - 1 to 254 FFH - 255 63 Prevent overwriting: 00H - Deactivated (on receive buffer overflow, a new message overwrites the oldest message) 01H - Activated (if the receive buffer is full, the new message is discarded) 02H to FFH - Reserved 64 Clear receive buffer at startup: 00H - Deactivated 01H - Activated 02H to FFH - Reserved 65 Reserved: 00H 66 Reserved: 00H 67 Reserved: 00H * the buffer size depends on the communication module used CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 48 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Configuration data records 7.2 3964 communication 7.2 3964 communication The following two configuration data records must be transferred to the communication module for 3964 communication: 7.2.1 Port configuration record - data record 57 Note The "Port configuration record" is described in chapter Port configuration record - data record 57 (Page 41). 7.2.2 3964 protocol configuration - data record 61 Note Parameter assignment error If the communication module detects a parameter assignment error when writing the "3964 Protocol Configuration - data record 61", the data record is rejected with error status 0x80E1. The corresponding cause of error can be read by means of data record "Read Error Status data record 55" (error codes of the 3964 protocol). 3964 protocol configuration Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Block type: 003DH - P3964 0 1 2 Block length: 000CH 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 3964(R) - With block check: 00H - Deactivated 01H - Activated 02H to FFH - Reserved CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 49 Configuration data records 7.2 3964 communication 3964 protocol configuration Italic = not supported 9 3964(R) priority: 00H - low priority 01H - high priority 02H to FFH - Reserved 3964(R) character delay time: 10 0000H to 0013H - Reserved 11 0014H to FFFFH - 20 to 65535 ms Default: 00DCH - 220 ms 3964(R) acknowledgment delay time: 12 0000H to 0013H - Reserved 13 0014H to FFFFH - 20 to 65535 ms Default: 07D0H - 2000 ms 14 3964(R) connection attempts: 00H - Reserved 01H to FFH - 1 to 255 connection attempts Default: 06H - 6 connection attempts 15 3964(R) transmission attempts: 00H - Reserved 01H to FFH - 1 to 255 connection attempts Default: 06H - 6 transmission attempts CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 50 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Configuration data records 7.3 Activate special function 7.3 Activate special function The following data record can be used to activate diagnostic interrupts (write) and check whether diagnostic interrupts are activated (read). Note Parameter assignment error If the communication module detects a parameter assignment error when writing the "Activate special function - data record 58", the data record is rejected with error status 0x80E1. The corresponding cause of error can be read by means of data record "Read Error Status data record 55" (error codes of the special functions). PtP SET_FTRS (write record 003AH) Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Block type: 003AH - SET_FTRS 0 1 Block length: 0008H 2 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 Reserved: 0000H 9 Diagnostic interrupt 00H - Deactivated 01H - Activated 02H to FFH - Reserved 10 Reserved: 00H 11 Reserved: 00H CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 51 Configuration data records 7.3 Activate special function CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 52 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 8 Error status The following data record contains the acknowledgment of the communication module to the writing a configuration data record. 8.1 Read error status - data record 55 PtP RD_ESTAT (read record 0037H) Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 Block type: 0037H - RD_ESTAT 1 Block length: 0010H 2 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 Error codes of the special functions * 9 Error codes of the port configuration * 10 11 Error codes of the send configuration * 12 13 Error codes of the receive configuration * 14 15 Error codes of the RS32 secondary signals * 16 17 Error codes of the 3964 protocol * 18 19 * A list of all error codes is available in chapter Error messages (Page 67). CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 53 Error status 8.1 Read error status - data record 55 CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 54 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 9 Sending data 9.1 Send data - data record 48 The following data record is used to write send data to the communication module: SEND_PTP record (write record 0030H) Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 Sequence number for SEND (0 to 255) 1 Frame end identifier (0 or 1) 2 Data to transmit byte 0 : : : : Sequence number for SEND The "Sequence number for SEND" parameter identifies a new send frame, or a new data record of a frame. The "SEND acknowledgment from module" (refer to chapter "Querying send acknowledgment - input user data (Page 57)") must be read as first "Sequence number for SEND" and incremented by the count of one. For the first data record, the "Sequence number for SEND" therefore starts with 1 after a STOP/RUN transition of the CPU and is then incremented by one for each data record with new content. The value "0" may not be used as "Sequence number for SEND". as it serves to detect the start of the module. The value is reset to 1 again after 255 has been reached. Frame end identifier The "Frame end identifier" parameter serves to identify the last data record belonging to a frame. The value 0 means that at least one more data record follows for the current frame. The value 1 means that this data record is the last one for the current frame. Data to transmit byte 0 The data must be stored in the data record as of "Data to transmit byte 0". The size and therefore the number of data records for transmitting a frame is defined by the transmission medium, for example, 240 bytes with PROFIBUS. If the length of the data to transmit is not a multiple of the data record length, the length of the last data record corresponds to the length of the remaining data to transmit. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 55 Sending data 9.1 Send data - data record 48 Send acknowledgment from module The module writes the "Sequence number" received in the data record as send acknowledgment to the user data. See "SEND acknowledgment from module", chapter "Querying send acknowledgment - input user data (Page 57)". For the last data record belonging to a frame,the acknowledgment is not written until the module has sent the frame. This means that the "SEND acknowledgment from module" must be evaluated along with the "SEND status" after the last data record was written. Startup characteristics At startup, the module writes a zero value to "SEND acknowledgment from module" (see chapter "Querying send acknowledgment - input user data (Page 57)" A busy job must be aborted if "SEND acknowledgment from module" equals zero. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 56 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Sending data 9.2 Querying send acknowledgment - input user data 9.2 Querying send acknowledgment - input user data The communication module enters the send acknowledgment in the user data that has the following structure: Input process image structure Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 SGN_STAT Reserved = 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 0 - no status Ring_Status DCD_Status CTS_Status RTS_Status DSR_Status DTR_Status 1 - Status valid 1 SEND acknowledgment from module 2 SEND status * 3 4 Sequence number for RCV 5 Reserved: 00H 6 Reserved: 00H 7 Reserved: 00H * A list of all status and error codes is available in chapter Error messages (Page 67) You can read status information as well as error numbers (value unequal to 0) from "SEND Status". If "SEND acknowledgment from module" equals the number transferred in the last data record ("Sequence number for SEND") and the "SEND Status" equals 0, the frame or data record was transmitted without errors. It is necessary to wait for this communication module feedback, which means "SEND Status" is equal to an error code, or "SEND acknowledgment from module" equals "Sequence number for SEND" and "SEND Status" equals zero, before a new frame is transmitted. Reaction of the module to an unexpected sequence number for SEND The module rejects a data record with an unexpected sequence number for SEND when writing the data record and returns error message 0x80B8. The code 0x81D7 is then stored in "SEND status or error code" in the user data. In this case, active communication must be canceled and transmission must be repeated with the first data record. Set the sequence number for SEND as described in chapter Send data - data record 48 (Page 55). CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 57 Sending data 9.3 Example 9.3 Example A frame with a length of 500 bytes is to be transmitted. The data record has a length of 240 bytes. First data record, length of 240 bytes: "Sequence number for SEND" = 1 "Frame end identifier" = 0 238 bytes user data Second data record, length of 240 bytes: "Sequence number for SEND" = 2 "Frame end identifier" = 0 238 bytes user data Third data record, length of 26 bytes "Sequence number for SEND" = 3 "Frame end identifier" = 1 24 bytes user data Wait for feedback from the communication module; see Querying send acknowledgment input user data (Page 57). Afterwards, a frame with a length of 100 bytes is to be transmitted. First = last data record, length of 102 bytes: "Sequence number for SEND" = 4 "Frame end identifier" = 1 100 bytes user data Wait for feedback from the communication module; see Querying send acknowledgment input user data (Page 57). CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 58 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 10 Receiving data 10.1 Data received - data record 49/50 A new value at "Sequence number for RCV" (Query: New receive frame - input user data (Page 61)) indicates a new frame is ready for reading in the communication module. The following data records are used to read receive data from the communication module: RCV_PTP record (read record 0031H/0032H) Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 Sequence number for this data record (1 to 255) 1 Frame end identifier (0 or 1) 2 RCV status * 3 4 Receive data byte 0 : : : : * A list of all status and error codes is available in chapter Error messages (Page 67) Change of the data record number when receiving data After startup of the communication module, reading of the frame content must start at data record number 16#0031, while the data record numbers change between 16#0032 and 16#0031 in all subsequent read operations. Sequence number of this data record For the first data record of a frame, the "Sequence number of this data record" is equal to the "Sequence number for RCV" in the user data that indicated the new frame. This value is incremented by the count of one for each data record read subsequently. An overflow to 2 is triggered at 255. The values 0 and 1 have a special significance (see below). Frame end identifier The "Frame end identifier" is equal to 1 for the last data record that has to be read for this frame, while it is 0 for all other data records. The size of the last data record that belongs to a frame is determined by the frame length and limited accordingly by the communication module. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 59 Receiving data 10.1 Data received - data record 49/50 RCV status "RCV Status" displays the result of the last data reception. 0x009x: Frame received without error 0x8xxx: Frame received with error See chapter Error messages (Page 67). Resetting communication after power on of the communication module "Sequence number for RCV" is equal to 0 A "Sequence number for RCV" with value 0 in the input user data indicates that the communication module has performed a restart after power on and that no frame has been received yet. "Sequence number for RCV" is equal to 1 A "Sequence number for RCV" with value 1 in the input user data indicates that this is the first frame after power on of the communication module. A busy job must be aborted in both cases. In the second case, reading of the frame content must start at data record number 16#0031. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 60 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Receiving data 10.2 Query: New receive frame - input user data 10.2 Query: New receive frame - input user data Sequence number for RCV A new received frame is indicated by a "Sequence number for RCV" in byte 4 of the user data that has the following structure. Input process image structure Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 SGN_STAT Reserved = 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 0 - no status Ring_Status DCD_Status CTS_Status RTS_Status DSR_Status DTR_Status 1 - Status valid 1 Sequence number from module 2 SEND status * 3 4 Sequence number for RCV 5 Reserved: 00H 6 Reserved: 00H 7 Reserved: 00H * A list of all status and error codes is available in chapter Error messages (Page 67) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 61 Receiving data 10.3 Example 10.3 Example A frame with a length of 500 bytes was received. The data record has a length of 240 bytes In the user data, the frame is indicated by "Sequence number for RCV" = 1. Read data record 16#0031 that contains: "Sequence number of this record" = 1 "Frame end identifier" = 0 "RCV status or error code return value" = 0x009x 1) It contains 236 bytes of user data. Read the second data record 16#0032 that contains: "Sequence number of this data record" = 2 "Frame end identifier" = 0 "RCV status or error code" = 0x009x 1) It contains 236 bytes of user data. Read the third data record 16#0031 that contains: "Sequence number of this data record" = 3 "Frame end identifier" = 1 "RCV status or error code" = 0x009x 1) It contains 28 bytes of user data. The communication module has limited the data record length to 32 bytes. This completes reading of the first frame from the CM. A frame with a length of 100 bytes was received subsequently. The sequence number for RCV changes from 1 to 4 in the user data. Read the data record 16#0032 that contains: "Sequence number of this data record" = 4 "Frame end identifier" = 1 "RCV status or error code" = 0x009x 1) The data record contains 100 bytes of user data and the communication module has limited the data record length to 104 bytes. 1) 0x009x Frame received without error 0x8xxx Frame received with error (see error codes in chapter Query: New receive frame - input user data (Page 61)) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 62 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 11 Clear receive buffer 11.1 Clear receive buffer - data record 54 The receive buffer of the communication module is cleared by writing the following data record with "RST_RCV_BUF" = TRUE. PtP RCV_RST(write record 0036H) Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 RST_RCV_ BUF Byte Block type: 0036H - RCV_RST 0 1 Block length: 0008H 2 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 9 Reserved: 00H 10 Reserved: 00H 11 Reserved: 00H Note: RST_RCV_BUF = 0; no changes are made to the receive buffer. RST_RCV_BUF = 1; the receive buffer is cleared. The communication module does not acknowledge the reset of its receive buffer. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 63 Clear receive buffer 11.1 Clear receive buffer - data record 54 CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 64 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 12 RS232 signals 12.1 Set RS232 secondary signals - data record 53 The RS232 secondary signals of the communication module are manipulated by writing to the following data record, provided the communication module supports this action in the current mode. Note Parameter assignment error If the communication module detects a parameter assignment error when writing the "Set RS232 secondary signals - data record 53", the data record is rejected with error status 0x80E1. The corresponding cause of error can be read by means of data record "Read Error Status data record 55" (error codes of the RS232 secondary signals). PtP SGN_SET(write record 0035H) Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Block type: 0035H - SGN_SET 0 1 Block length: 0008H 2 3 4 Block version high byte: 01H 5 Block version low byte: 00H 6 Reserved: 0000H 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 Reserved: 00H 11 Reserved: 00H Set_DTR_St Set_RTS_St ate ate DTR_State RTS_State Note: Set_xxx_State = 0, the status of the specified control bit is not changed. Set_xxx_State = 1, the status of the specified control bit must be set to the value that was specified by xxx_State. For information on reading the acknowledgment to the writing of this data record, refer to chapter "Error status (Page 53) ". CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 65 RS232 signals 12.2 Read RS232 secondary signals - input user data 12.2 Read RS232 secondary signals - input user data The RS232 secondary signals of the communication module can be read from the user data. Input process image structure Italic = not supported Bit-> 7 6 5 SGN_STAT Reserved = 0 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 0 - no status Ring_Status DCD_Status CTS_Status RTS_Status DSR_Status DTR_Status 1 - Status valid 1 Sequence number for SEND (acknowledgment from module) 2 SEND status or error code * 3 4 Sequence number for RCV 5 Reserved: 00H 6 Reserved: 00H 7 Reserved: 00H * A list of all error codes is available in chapter Error messages (Page 67) SGN_STAT = 0 indicates that no RS232 secondary signals are available in the current operating mode of the communication module. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 66 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 13 Error messages Overview of error messages Error code Description Remedy 0x0000 No error - RECEIVE status and error codes 0x0094 Frame end identified based on the "Receipt of fixed/maximum frame length" - 0x0095 Frame end identified based on "Message timeout" - 0x0096 Frame end identified based on expiration of the "Character delay time" - 0x0097 No response frame was received within the parameterized maximum response time. - 0x0098 Frame end identified based on the fulfillment of the "Read message length from message" conditions - 0x0099 Frame end identified based on the receipt of the "End sequence" - SEND status and error codes 0x7000 Block idle - 0x7001 Initial call for a new frame: Data record transmission initiated - 0x7002 Interim call: Data record transmission in process - 0x8085 Invalid length specification Select a suitable frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) 0x8088 The specified length exceeds the range set in the receive buffer Change the range in the receive buffer or select a frame length which corresponds to the range set in the receive buffer. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) Error codes of the special functions 0x8190 Incorrect setting of the CRC calculation Select a suitable value for CRC calculation. The following are valid: deactivated or activated. Check whether the module addressed supports CRC calculation. 0x8191 Incorrect setting of the diagnostic interrupt Select a suitable value for "Diagnostic interrupt". The following are valid: Diagnostic interrupt deactivated (0) or diagnostic interrupt activated (1). Check whether the module addressed supports the generation of diagnostic interrupts. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 67 Error messages Error code Description Remedy Error codes of the "Port configuration" 0x81A0 The module does not support this protocol. Select a valid protocol for the module. 0x81A1 The module does not support this data transmission rate. Select a valid data transmission rate for the module. 0x81A2 The module does not support this parity setting. Select a suitable value for "Parity". The following are valid: 0x81A3 0x81A4 The module does not support this number of data bits. * None (1) * Even (2) * Odd (3) * Mark (4) * Space (5) * Any (6) Select a suitable value for "Number of data bits". The following are valid: * 7 (2) * 8 (1) The module does not support this number of stop bits. Select a suitable value for "Number of stop bits". The following are valid: * 1 (1) * 2 (2) 0x81A5 The module does not support this type of data flow control. Select a valid data flow control for the module. 0x81A7 Invalid value for XON or XOFF Select suitable values for XON and XOFF. 0x81A8 Error in frame header Check the data/values in the frame header. 0x81AA Invalid operating mode Valid operating modes are: Valid range of values: 0 - FF. * Full duplex (RS232) (0) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-topoint) (1) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint master) (2) / (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave) (3) / (CM PtP (ET 200SP)) * Half duplex (RS485) two-wire mode (4) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 68 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Error messages Error code Description Remedy 0x81AB Invalid default setting of the receive line Valid default settings are: 0x81AC Invalid value for "Break detection" * "No" default setting (0) * Signal R(A)=5 V, signal R(B)=0 V (break detection) (1): Can only be selected with: "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (point-to-point connection)" and "Full duplex (RS422) four-wire mode (multipoint slave)". * Signal R(A)=0 V, signal R(B)=5 V (2): This default corresponds to the idle state (no active send operation). No break detection is possible with this default setting. Select a suitable value for "Break detection". The following are valid: 0x81AF The module does not support this protocol. * "0" (break detection deactivated) * "1" (break detection activated) Select a valid protocol for the module. Error codes of the "Send configuration" 0x81B5 More than two end delimiters or end sequence > 5 characters Select suitable values for "End delimiter" and "End sequence". The following are valid: * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) or 2 (2) end delimiters or 0x81B6 Send configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected * deactivated (0), * 1 (1) up to 5 (5) characters for the end sequence. Verify that no send configuration is transmitted if the 3964R) protocol is set. Error codes of the "Receive configuration" 0x81C0 Invalid start condition Select a suitable start condition. The following are valid: * Send break before frame start * Send Idle Line. 0x81C1 Invalid end condition or no end condition selected Select a suitable end condition. 0x81C3 Invalid value for "Maximum message length" Select a suitable value for "Maximum message length". Valid range of values (module-dependent): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) 0x81C4 Invalid value for "Offset of the length specification in the message" Select a suitable value for "Offset of the length specification in the message". Valid range of values (module-dependent): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 69 Error messages Error code Description Remedy 0x81C5 Invalid value for "Size of length field" Select a suitable value for "Size of length field". Valid range of values in bytes: * 1 (1) * 2 (2) * 4 (4) 0x81C6 Invalid value for "Number of characters not counted in Select a suitable value for "Number of characters not length specification" counted in length specification". 0x81C7 The total of "Offset in the message + size of the length field + number of character not counted" is greater than the maximum frame length Valid range of values: 0 to 255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Offset in message", "Size of the length field" and "Number of characters not counted". Valid range of values: 0x81C8 Invalid value for "Response timeout" * Offset in the message (module-dependent): 0-1022/2046/4094 (Byte) * Size of the length field: 1, 2, or 4 (bytes) * Number of characters not counted: 0-255 (bytes) Select a suitable value for "Response timeout". Valid range of values: 1-65535 (ms) 0x81C9 Invalid value for "Character delay time" Select a suitable value for "Character delay time". Valid range of values: 1-65535 (bit times) 0x81CB Frame end sequence is activated, but no character is activated for the check Activate one or several characters for the check. 0x81CC Frame start sequence is activated, but no character is Activate one or several characters for the check. activated for the check 0x81CD Invalid value for "Prevent overwriting" Select a suitable value for "Prevent overwriting". The following are valid: 0x81CE Invalid value for "Clear receive buffer at startup" * Prevent overwriting is deactivated (0) or * Prevent overwriting is activated (1) Select a suitable value for "Clear receive buffer at startup". The following are valid: * Clear receive buffer at startup is deactivated (0) * Clear receive buffer at startup is activated (1) CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 70 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Error messages Error code Description Remedy SEND status and error codes 0x81D0 Receiving send requests during runtime of a send job Make sure that you do not receive send requests during runtime of a send job. 0x81D1 The waiting time for XON or CTS = ON has expired. The communication partner has a fault, is too slow or is offline. Check the communication partner or, if necessary, change the parameter assignment. 0x81D2 "Hardware RTS always ON": Send command aborted due to change from DSR = ON to OFF Check the communication partner. Make sure that DSR is ONfor the entire duration of transmission. 0x81D3 Send buffer overflow / send frame too long Select a shorter frame length. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) 0x81D5 Transmission aborted due to parameter changes, detected wire break, or because CPU in STOP Check the parameter assignment, for wire break, and the CPU status. 0x81D6 Transmission canceled because end identifier was not received Check the parameter assignment of the end delimiters and the frame of the communication partner. 0x81D7 Communication error between the user program and module Check communication (e.g. consistency of the sequence number). 0x81D8 Transmission attempt rejected because module is not configured Configure the module. Error codes of the receive configuration 0x81E0 Frame canceled: Send buffer overflow / send frame too long Increase the call rate for the receive function in the user program, or parameterize communication with data flow control. 0x81E1 Frame canceled: Parity error Check the connection line of the communication partners, or verify that both devices are configured for the same data transmission rate, parity and stop bit number. 0x81E2 Frame canceled: Character frame error Check the settings for the start bit, data bits, parity bit, data transmission rate, and stop bit(s). 0x81E3 Frame canceled: Character overflow error Firmware error: Contact Customer Support. 0x81E4 Frame canceled: The total length of "Offset in the message + size of the length field + number of character not counted" is greater than the receive buffer Select a suitable value for Offset in message, Size of the length field, and Number of characters not counted. 0x81E5 Frame canceled: Break Receive line to partner is interrupted. Reconnect or switch on partner. 0x81E6 Maximum number of "Buffered receive frames" exceeded In the user program, increase the call rate of the instruction, or parameterize communication with data flow control, or increase the number of buffered frames. 0x81E8 Frame canceled: The character delay time has expired before the message and criterion was detected Partner device faulty or too slow. Check this, if required, using an interface tester that is interconnected in the transmission line. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 71 Error messages Error code Description Remedy 0x81EB Frame canceled: Maximum frame length reached Select a shorter frame length at the communication partner. The following are valid (depending on the module): 1-1024/2048/4096 (Byte) Check the parameters of the frame end detection. Error codes of RS232 secondary signals 0x81F0 The module does not support RS232 secondary signals You have made an attempt to set up secondary signals on a module that does not support RS232 secondary signals. Verify that this is an RS232 module or that RS232 mode (ET 200SP) is set. 0x81F1 No operation of RS232 secondary signals RS232 secondary signals cannot be manipulated manually as long as hardware data flow is active. Error codes of the receive configuration 0x82C1 Invalid value for "Buffered receive frames". 0x82C2 Receive configuration rejected because the 3964(R) protocol was selected Select a suitable value for "Buffered receive frames". Valid range of values: 1-255 Verify that no receive configuration is transmitted if the 3964(R) protocol is set. 3964(R) protocol error codes 0x8380 0x8381 0x8382 0x8383 0x8384 0x8385 0x8386 Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Character delay time". Select a suitable value for "Character delay time". Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Response timeout". Select a suitable value for "Response timeout". Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Priority". Select a suitable value for "Priority". Valid range of values: 1-65535 (ms) Valid range of values: 1-65535 (ms) The following are valid: Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Block check" * High (1) * Low (0) Select a suitable value for "Block check". The following are valid: * with block check (1) * without block check (0) Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Connection attempts". Select a suitable value for "Connection attempts". Parameter assignment error: Invalid value for "Transmission attempts". Select a suitable value for "Transmission attempts". Runtime error: Number of connection attempts exceeded Check the interface cable and the transmission parameters. Valid range of values: 1-255 Valid range of values: 1-255 Also check whether the receive function is configured correctly at the partner device. 0x8387 Runtime error: Number of transmission attempts exceeded Check the interface cable, the transmission parameters and the configuration of the communication partner. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 72 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Error messages Error code Description Remedy 0x8388 Runtime error: Error at the "Block check character" Check whether the connection is seriously disrupted; in this case you may also occasionally see error codes. Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. The internally calculated value of the block check character does not correspond to the block check character received by the partner at the connection end. 0x8389 Runtime error: Invalid character received while waiting for free receive buffer The send request of the communication partner (STX, 02H) is not answered with DLE until the receive buffer has been cleared. No additional character may be received before it has been cleared (except STX again). Check for proper function at the partner device, possibly by using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 0x838A Runtime error: Logical error during receiving. Another character (other than DLE, ETX) was received after receipt of DLE. 0x838B Runtime error: Character delay time exceeded Check whether the partner DLE in the frame header and in the data string is always in duplicate or the connection is released with DLE ETX. Check for proper function of the partner device, possibly using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. Partner device too slow or faulty. Check for proper function of the partner device, possibly using an interface test device that is switched into the transmission line. 0x838C Runtime error: Wait time for free receive buffer has started Increase the call rate of the instruction in the user program, or parameterize communication with data flow control. 0x838D Runtime error: Frame repetition does not start within 4 s after NAK Check the communication partner. A received frame that is possibly corrupted must be repeated by the partner within 4 seconds. 0x838E Runtime error: One or several characters (except NAK and STX) were received in idle mode. Verify the proper function of the partner device, for example, by means an interface tester that is interconnected in the transmission line. 0x838F Runtime error: Initialization conflict - Both partners have set high priority Set the "Low" priority at one of the partners 0x8390 Parameter assignment error: Error in frame header Check the data/values in the frame header. 0x8391 Parameter assignment error: 3964 Parameter data record rejected because Freeport is set Verify that no 3964 parameter data is transmitted if the Freeport protocol is set. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 73 Error messages CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 74 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Glossary Address The address indicates the physical storage space and enables direct access to the operand that is stored under this address. Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one CPU, various I/O modules, and operator control and monitoring devices. Communication module Communication modules are used for point-to-point connections and bus links. Configuration The term configuration refers to the summary of individual modules of an automation system in the configuration table. CPU Central Processing Unit = Central module of the automation system that consists of the control and computing units, memory, system program, and interfaces to the I/O modules. CPU operating system The CPU operating system organizes all the functions and sequences of the CPU that are not linked to a special control task. Cycle time The cycle time denotes the time a CPU requires to execute one user program cycle. Cyclic program processing In cyclic program processing, the term cycle denotes execution of the user program in a continuous repetitive program loop. Default setting The default is a useful basic setting that is used whenever no other value is specified. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 75 Glossary Diagnostic functions The diagnostic functions cover the entire system diagnostics and the detection, evaluation and reporting of errors in the automation system. Diagnostics buffer Memory area in which detailed information on all diagnostics events is entered based on the order of their occurrence. Diagnostics events Diagnostics events are, for example, module errors or system errors in the CPU that may be caused by a program error. Hardware The term hardware denotes the entire physical and technical equipment of an automation system. Interrupt The term interrupt designates the interruption of program execution in the processor of an automation system which is triggered by an external alarm. Module parameters Module parameters are values that are used to determine the behavior of the module. We distinguish between static and dynamic module parameters. Online/Offline In online mode, there is a data connection between the automation system and programming device, while there is no data connection in offline mode. Parameter assignment The term parameter assignment denotes actions that define the response of a module or block. Parameters Parameters represent values that can be used to define the behavior of a module or software. We distinguish between module parameters and block parameters. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 76 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Glossary Point-to-point connection In a point-to-point connection the communication module interfaces a programmable logic controller and a communication partner. Protocol The communication partners participating in data transmission must conform to fixed rules for the handling and execution of data traffic. These rules are called protocols. Rack The rack is a mounting rail with slots that can be used to mount modules. Software The term software refers to all programs that are used on a computing system. These include the operating system and user programs. User program The user program contains all instructions and declarations for processing the signals used for controlling a system or a process. In SIMATIC S7, the user program is structured and divided into small units, namely the blocks. Work memory Work memory is CPU RAM (Random Access Memory) that is accessed by the processor when processing the user program. CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 77 Glossary CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 78 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 Index 3 3964 protocol configuration - data record 61, 49 3964(R) Receiving data, 40 Sending data, 39 3964(R) protocol, 37 Control characters, 37 Priority, 37 3964R procedure Block check character, 38 Data record 61, 49 Data transmission rates, 12 DCD, 30 DLE, 37 DSR, 30 DTR, 30 E ETX, 37 F Freeport Code transparency, 29 A End criteria, 25 Message end, 22 Application options for the communication modules, 12 Message start, 22 Asynchronous data transmission, 13 Receive buffer, 29 Automatic operation of secondary signals, 35 Receiving data, 24 RS232 secondary signals, 30 Sending data, 22 B Start criteria, 24 BCC, 37 Full duplex mode, 13 Bidirectional data traffic, 13 Block check character, 38 H Clear receive buffer - data record 54, 63 Code transparency, 29 Configuration data records, 20 CTS, 30 Half duplex mode, 13 Handshaking, 33 Hardware data flow control, 34 Hardware RTS always ON, 34 Hardware RTS always ON, ignore DTR/DSR, 34 Hardware RTS always switched, 35 D I Data flow control, 12, 33 Data record 48, 55 Data record 49/50, 59 Data record 53, 65 Data record 54, 63 Data record 55, 53 Data record 57, 41 Data record 58, 51 Data record 59, 44 Data record 60, 46 Interfaces, 11 C N NAK, 37 O Order numbers, 11 CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 79 Index P X Point-to-point connection, 13 Port Configuration Record, 41 XON/XOFF, 33 Q Query:New receive frame - input user data, 61 Querying send acknowledgment - input user data, 57 R Read error status - data record 55, 53 Read RS232 secondary signals - input user data, 66 Receive buffer, 29 Receive buffer size, 12 Receive configuration record - data record 60, 46 Receiving Flow chart, 19 RI, 30 RS232 mode, 30 RS232 secondary signals, 30 Automatic use, 35 RS422 mode, 31 RS485 mode, 32 RTS, 30 S Secondary signals, 12 Send configuration record - data record 59, 44 Send point-to-point - data record 48, 55 Sending Flow chart, 18 Serial data transmission, 13 Set RS232 secondary signals - data record 53, 65 Software data flow control, 33 STX, 37 T Transmission security, 15 with 3964(R), 16 with Freeport, 16 U Unidirectional/bidirectional data traffic, 30 CM PtP operation with PROFINET controller 80 Programming and Operating Manual, 01/2013, A5E03908199-01 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Guide SIMATIC 2 ___________________ System overview Integration into the 3 ___________________ automation system IO-Link system Function Manual 12/2017 A5E31637677-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E31637677-AB 01/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This function manual provides a general overview of the IO-Link communication system. It shows the interaction of the various components of an IO-Link system and will help you improve your general understanding of IO-Link. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Proficiency with STEP 7 Scope of the documentation This documentation is the basic documentation for IO-Link systems at Siemens. The product documentation is based on this documentation. Conventions In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)". Please also observe notes marked as follows: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Additional support Information about Technical Support is available in section Siemens Industry Online Support (Page 4). The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems can be found on the Internet. Information about the online catalog and online order system is available in section Industry Mall (Page 5). IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 3 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). IO-Link system 4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Preface Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 5 Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 2 System overview ..................................................................................................................................... 8 3 2.1 Advantages of IO-Link ............................................................................................................. 9 2.2 Overview of IO-Link system ................................................................................................... 10 2.3 IO-Link interface ..................................................................................................................... 12 2.4 IO-Link protocol ...................................................................................................................... 14 2.5 Device profiles........................................................................................................................ 16 2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT ......................................................................... 17 2.7 Differences between IO-Link specifications V1.0 and V1.1 ................................................... 19 Integration into the automation system .................................................................................................. 20 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 Configuration of the IO-Link system....................................................................................... 20 Configuration with S7-PCT .................................................................................................... 22 Configuration without S7-PCT ............................................................................................... 25 Overview of configuration options .......................................................................................... 27 3.2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device .................................................. 29 3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation .......................................... 30 3.4 Replacing a master or device during operation ..................................................................... 32 Index .................................................................................................................................................... 33 IO-Link system 6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 1 Guide Documentation Various IO-Link products are available from Siemens. Each of these products has a separate documentation. The IO-Link products are embedded in systems, e.g. ET 200SP. The documentation for the system consists of the respective system manual, function manuals and manuals. In addition, the STEP 7 online help and the Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT online help assist you in configuring and programming your automation system with IO-Link. IO-Link components from Siemens Siemens offers a wide range of products and support for IO-Link: Master Device, I/O modules Device, industrial switchgear Device, RFID systems (RFID = radio-frequency identification) Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/32469496) IO-Link library (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82981502) with the blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE" Overview of the topic IO-Link (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109737170) Additional information on the products can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/io-link). Additional documentation for IO-Link You can find a free download of the latest documentation on the IO-Link products on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15818/man). IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 7 2 System overview Introduction A continuous communication down to the lowest field level ensures enhanced use of the functions and performance capability of sensors and actuators. Enhanced use of sensors and actuators allows you to operate your machines and plants more productively. No data other than the actual process value can be exchanged via the standard interfaces (digital, analog) used at the sensor/actuator level. Sensors and actuators with integrated intelligence are now used for increasingly complex functions and require a communication interface tailored to these requirements. Definition IO-Link is an innovative, point-to-point communication interface for the sensor/actuator area that is specified in IEC 61131-9. IO-Link consists of the following system components: IO-Link master IO-Link device Unshielded 3-wire or 5-wire standard cable Engineering tool for configuring and assigning parameters of IO-Link IO-Link system 8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB System overview 2.1 Advantages of IO-Link 2.1 Advantages of IO-Link The IO-Link system offers significant advantages as digital interface when connecting sensors/actuators: Open standard in accordance with IEC 61131-9 - Devices can be integrated in the same way in all conventional fieldbus systems and automation systems Tool supported parameter setting and central data management - Fast configuration and commissioning - Simple creation of current plant documentation even for sensors/actuators Single, uniform wiring and far fewer different interfaces at the sensors/actors - Standardized, uniform interface for sensors and actuators independent of their complexity (switching, measuring, multi-channel, binary, mixed signals, etc.) - Reduction in the variety of types and inventory - Fast commissioning - Any combination of IO-Link devices and sensors/actuators without IO-Link at IO-Link master Continuous communication between sensors/actuators and the CPU - Access to all process data, diagnostic data and device information - Access to device-specific data, such as energy data - Remote diagnostics can be performed Continuous diagnostic information down to sensor/actuator level - Reduction in troubleshooting effort - Minimizing risk of failure - Preventive maintenance and optimization of service and maintenance planning Dynamic change of sensor/actuators parameters by the controller or the operator at the HMI - Reduction in downtimes during product change - Increased variability of the machine Automatic reassignment of parameters when devices are replaced during operation - Minimization of downtimes - Device replacement by untrained personnel without additional aids - Avoidance of incorrect settings Integrated device identification - Identification of the installed devices - Ensure quality of result in production and manufacturing when replacing the device IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 9 System overview 2.2 Overview of IO-Link system 2.2 Overview of IO-Link system Components An IO-Link system consists of the following components: IO-Link master IO-Link device, for example: - Sensors/actuators - RFID readers - I/O modules - Valves Unshielded 3-wire or 5-wire standard cables Engineering tool for configuring and assigning parameters of IO-Link Example plant with IO-Link The figure below shows an example of plant architecture with IO-Link. Figure 2-1 Plant architecture with IO-Link IO-Link system 10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB System overview 2.2 Overview of IO-Link system The IO-Link master establishes the connection between the IO-Link devices and the automation system. If the IO-Link master is a component of the I/O system, it is installed either in the control cabinet or directly in the field as remote I/O in degree of protection IP65/67. The IO-Link master communicates by means of various fieldbuses or productspecific backplane buses. An IO-Link master can have multiple IO-Link ports (channels). An IO-Link device can be connected (point-to-point communication) to each port. Engineering The IO-Link system is engineered parallel to the overall automation system and can be embedded in it and intermeshed with it. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 11 System overview 2.3 IO-Link interface 2.3 IO-Link interface Introduction The IO-Link is a serial, bidirectional point-to-point connection for signal transmission and power distribution under any network, fieldbus or backplane bus. Connection system in IP65/67 M12 connectors and other connectors are defined for the connection system in IP65/67; sensors have a 4-pin connector, actuators a 5-pin connector. IO-Link masters are always equipped with a 5-pin M12 socket. The pin assignment according to IEC 60974-5-2 is specified as follows: Pin 1: 24 V Pin 3: 0 V Pin 4: Switching and communication cable (C/Q) In addition to IO Link communication, these three pins also implement the power supply of the device. Detailed information about the power supply can be found in the documentation of the utilized IO-Link master. Figure 2-2 Pin assignment IO-Link device IO-Link system 12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB System overview 2.3 IO-Link interface Port types in IP65/67 Two types of ports are distinguished in the specifications for IO-Link masters: Port Class A (Type A) With this type, the functions of pins 2 and 5 are not assigned. The manufacturer defines this function. Generally, an additional digital channel is assigned to pin 2. Figure 2-3 Pin assignment Port Class A Port Class B (Type B) This type offers an additional supply voltage and is suitable for the connection of devices that have an increased power requirement. In this case an additional (galvanically isolated) supply voltage is made available by pins 2 and 5. A 5-wire standard cable is required to use this additional supply voltage. Figure 2-4 Pin assignment Port Class B Connecting cables The devices are connected to the master with unshielded 3-wire or 5-wire standard cables with a maximum length of 20 m. Standard cables can be used to wire the sensors. No shielding or compliance with specific regulations is necessary for the installation of the cables. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 13 System overview 2.4 IO-Link protocol 2.4 IO-Link protocol Operating modes The IO-Link port of the master can be operated in the following modes: IO-Link: The port is located in the IO-Link communication. DI: The port behaves like a digital input. DQ: The port behaves like a digital output. Disabled: The port is disabled. Transmission rate In the IO-Link specification V1.1, three data transmission rates (baud rates) are specified for the IO-Link operating mode: COM 1 = 4.8 kBaud COM 2 = 38.4 kBaud COM 3 = 230.4 kBaud (optional according to Specification V1.0) The IO-Link device only supports one of the defined data transmission rates. The IO-Link master to Specification V1.1 supports all data transmission rates and adjusts automatically to the data transmission rated supported by the device. Response time of the IO-Link system The response time of the IO-Link system provides information about the frequency and speed of the data transmission between device and master. The response time depends on various factors. A value for the minimum cycle time of the device is stored in the device description file IODD of the device (Page 17). This value indicates in which time intervals the master may address the device. The value has a big influence on the response time. The master also has an internal processing time that is factored into the calculation of the response time. Devices with different minimum cycle time can be configured on a master. The response time for these devices differs accordingly. In other words, the response time for various devices connected to a master can vary greatly. When you configure the master you can specify a fixed cycle time in addition to the devicespecific minimum cycle time stored in the IODD. The master then addresses the device according to this specification. The typical response time for a device thus results from the effective cycle time of the device and the typical internal processing time of the master. IO-Link system 14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB System overview 2.4 IO-Link protocol Transmission performance IO-Link is a very robust communication system. This communication system operates with a 24V level. If transmissions fail, the frame is repeated two more times. The IO-Link master only detects a break in communication after the failure of the second repeat attempt and reports this to the higher-level CPU. Data types Four data types are available: Process data Cyclic data PQI Cyclic data Device data Acyclic data Events Acyclic data Process data The process data of the devices is transferred cyclically in a data frame with the process data size being determined by the device. Process data from 0 to 32 bytes is possible per device (input and output, respectively). Port Qualifier Information (PQI) Each port has a Port Qualifier Information (PQI). This PQI provides information on the device status of the port and IO-Link (value status). The PQI is transmitted cyclically with the process data. The PQI is disabled by default. Device data Device data can be parameters, identification data or diagnostic information. The data is exchanged cyclically and at the request of the IO-Link master. Device data can be written to the device and also read from the device. Events When an event occurs, the device signals to the master that an event is present. The master then reads the event. Events can be error messages (for example, short-circuit) and warning/maintenance data (for example, dirt, overheating). Error messages are transferred from the device to the CPU or the HMI by the IO-Link master. The IO-Link master can also transfer events and states. Such events are, for example, wire break, break in communication or overload. Device parameters or events are transmitted independently of the cyclic transmission of process data. The transmissions do not influence or impair each other. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 15 System overview 2.5 Device profiles Startup of the IO system If the port of the master is set to IO-Link mode, the IO-Link master attempts to communicate with the connected IO-Link device. For this purpose the IO-Link master sends a defined signal and waits for the reply of the IO-Link device. The IO-Link master first attempts a communication with the highest defined data transmission rate. If this transmission attempt fails the IO-Link master attempts a communication with the lowest data transmission rate. The device always supports only one defined data transmission rate. If the master receives a reply, communication starts. First they exchange communication parameters. If necessary the parameters stored in the system are transferred to the device. Then the cyclic data exchange of process data and value status starts. 2.5 Device profiles Introduction Device profiles are defined for IO-Link to standardize access of the CPU user program to the devices. Data structure, data contents and basic functionality are defined in the device profiles. A standard user view and an identical program access is thus achieved for a number of different devices that have the same device profile. IO-Link profiles The device profile "Smart Sensor Profile" is currently defined for IO-Link. This profile is especially suited for measurement sensors. In other words, measured values are transmitted in addition to switching points. In addition, the switchgear (for example, contactors) support the LVSG (Low Voltage Switchgear) profile defined in IEC 61915-2. IO-Link system 16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB System overview 2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT 2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT Device description IODD An electronic device description, the IODD file (IO Device Description) is available for each device. The IODD provides a wealth of information for system integration: Communication properties Device parameters with value range and default value Identification, process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the identical manner by the IO-Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer. Two different IODD versions are available for devices that support both V1.0 and V1.1 functionality. IODDfinder The IODDfinder is a cross-vendor, central IO-Link database. This database provides you with the latest IODDs of the device manufacturers and offers an information and download platform. The IODDfinder is available on the Internet (https://ioddfinder.io-link.com). IO-Link configuration tool Configuration tools are required to configure the entire IO-Link system. The IO-Link configuration tools of the master manufacturers are able to read IODDs. The main tasks of the IO-Link configuration tool include: Assigning the devices to the ports of the master Address assignment of ports within the address area of the master Assigning parameters for the IO-Link device Diagnostics can also be carried out on the connected devices. This means the IO-Link configuration tool supports the transparent representation of the IO-Link system down to field level. Siemens provides S7-PCT for engineering of the IO-Link system. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 17 System overview 2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT S7-PCT with IODD of a device The following figure shows a section from S7-PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein. Figure 2-5 S7-PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein IO-Link system 18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB System overview 2.7 Differences between IO-Link specifications V1.0 and V1.1 2.7 Differences between IO-Link specifications V1.0 and V1.1 Specification The technical definition of the IO-Link system is described in a specification of the IO-Link consortium. The first step was the creation of specification version 1.0. The further development and added functions of the IO-Link system led to version 1.1. The main enhancements of version 1.1 are: Data backup for device replacement during operation (Backup&Restore) Data transmission rate 230.4 kBaud is mandatory for the IO-Link master Combination of IO-Link devices Note the following when combining IO-Link devices: Only IO-Link devices that comply with V1.0 can be operated on the IO-Link master to V1.0. IO-Link devices that comply with V1.0 and V1.1 can be operated on the IO-Link master to V1.1. Data backup and a data transmission rate of 230.4 kBaud of the IO-Link master after V1.1 can only be used when these functions are also supported by the IO-Link device. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 19 3 Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system Introduction An IO-Link system is configured in several steps. In the first step, the master is integrated in the automation system and configured. In the second step, the IO-Link devices are configured. Integration in the automation system When using a SIMATIC S7 CPU, use the engineering tool STEP 7, V5.x or STEP 7 (TIA Portal) for configuration. The IO-Link system is represented by the IO-Link master in the configuration of the automation system or the fieldbus and integrated with STEP 7 or a GSD file. The IO-Link master itself can be a field bus node (e.g. ET 200eco PN IO-Link master) or a part of the modular IO system that is connected to the field bus (e.g. ET 200SP IO-Link master). In both cases, the number of ports, the address range and the module properties are described in STEP 7 or in the GSD file. Example configuration in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) The figure below shows a PROFINET configuration with integrated PROFINET devices ET 200SP and ET 200ecoPN with IO-Link masters. Figure 3-1 Configuration of a PROFINET network with lower-level IO-Link masters IO-Link system 20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system In the device view of the PROFINET device, you can: Parameterize the ports Specify the input and output address ranges of IO-Link for exchange of cyclic data (process values). Figure 3-2 Device view with setting of the IO-Link address range In addition, you can set in the module properties of the IO-Link master how the IO-Link system is to be configured and parameterized. In doing so, you can select whether or not you also want to work with the S7-PCT configuration tool. Note IO data length To ensure smooth operation, select an IO data length during configuration of the IO-Link master that corresponds at least to the IO data length of all connected IO-Link devices. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 21 Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system 3.1.1 Configuration with S7-PCT Introduction The following sections describe how you configure your IO-Link master with the S7-Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT). You need S7-PCT to display the system architecture completely and transparently all the way to the IO-Link device and to configure and parameterize the IO-Link system in detail. With S7-PCT you can easily configure the IO-Link devices with the help of the IODD (IO-Link Device Description) supplied by the device manufacturer. In the S7-PCT online view you can display the diagnostics states and process values of the IO-Link devices in detail. Configuration with S7-PCT When you have selected the option "Configuration with S7-PCT", you are also making the settings of the IO-Link master ports with S7-PCT. These settings include: Specification of the address range for each port Behavior when replacing an IO-Link device Setting the identification data for checking the connected IO-Link device type Start S7-PCT from HW Config in STEP 7. S7-PCT shows you all Siemens IO-Link masters you have configured in your automation system. After selecting an IO-Link master, you can assign its IO-Link ports to the desired IO-Link devices. To do so, select the corresponding IO-Link devices (or their IODDs) from the device catalog and drag them to the port of the IO-Link master. IO-Link system 22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system Example configuration in S7-PCT The following figure shows the configuration of an IO-Link master in S7-PCT. This S7-PCT view shows you a wide variety of information: Higher-level field bus and overview or structure of the lower-level IO-Link master Detailed information on the selected IO-Link master Current configuration of the IO-Link ports of the selected IO-Link master Detailed information on the selected IO-Link device Device catalog with the IODDS of the IO-Link devices from different manufacturers Figure 3-3 Configuration of an IO-Link master in S7-PCT Address range of the ports In addition to the assignment of the IO-Link devices to the IO-Link master ports, the default address ranges of the ports can be changed. The IO-Link master transfers the process values that it receives from the IO-Link device in these address ranges and makes the process values available to the higher-level automation system. To set the address range, select the "Addresses" tab. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 23 Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system Setting device parameters Specific parameter settings are required to adjust the device to the respective application task. The possible parameters and set values are contained in the IODD of each device. You set the device parameters directly in S7-PCT. After selecting the corresponding device in the project tree (left tree), set the device parameters in the "Parameters" tab. The figure below shows you an example of the parameter assignment of an IO-Link device: Figure 3-4 Setting the parameter values of the IO-Link device Starting from the displayed defaults, you can edit and save the values in the defined value range. The configuration of the IO-Link system and the parameters of the devices are available to the IO-Link system and the entire automation project. You have the option of saving and printing the configuration and the parameters. IO-Link system 24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system 3.1.2 Configuration without S7-PCT Introduction The following sections describe how you configure your IO-Link master without the S7-Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT). Your options for configuration of the IO-Link system without S7-PCT are limited. You can configure the port of the IO-Link master using STEP 7 or the GSD file, but you cannot set any parameters of the lower-level IO-Link devices. Configuration without S7-PCT You can activate the following parameters in STEP 7 or the GSD file during port configuration: Port Qualifier Information (PQI): provides information on the status, such as process data of the IO-Link port; is transmitted with the input data of the IO-Link device. Operating mode - IO-Link Autostart: The IO-Link master accepts each connected IO-Link device and starts it automatically. - IO-Link Manual: The IO-Link master only accepts IO-Link devices that match the Vendor ID and Device ID set below. The connected IO-Link device is not started automatically. - DI: The port is operating as a standard digital input. - DQ: The port is operating as a standard digital output. - Disabled: The port is disabled. Input Data Length: Process data length of the input data Output Data Length: Process data length of the output data Vendor ID ID number of the device manufacturer. You can find the Vendor ID on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852). IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 25 Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system Device ID ID number of the device. You can find the Device ID on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852). Inspection level for data backup: - Identical type (V1.0) without Backup&Restore - Type-compatible (V1.1) without Backup&Restore - Type-compatible (V1.1) with Backup&Restore - Type-compatible (V1.1) with Restore The figure below shows you an example of the settings of a port configuration in STEP 7 or with GSD file: Figure 3-5 Settings of the port configuration in STEP 7 or with GSD file IO-Link system 26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system 3.1.3 Overview of configuration options Introduction The tables below show the configuration options offered by the SIMATIC IO-Link master with or without S7-PCT and which FW versions of the IO-Link master support the individual configurations. Comparison of the configuration options The following table provides an overview of the available options for configuration with and without S7-PCT: Requirement Configuration with S7-PCT Configuration without S7-PCT IO-Link Autostart IO-Link Manual Use of the IO-Link device description IODD Yes No No Setting the length of input and output data (per port) Automatic Manual Manual Assignment of the Vendor ID and Device ID Automatic - Manual (see FAQ (https://support.industry.siem ens.com/cs/ww/en/view/1097 48852)) Programmable - Programmable Adjustable IO-Link cycle time Yes No No Adjustable IO-Link device parameters Yes No No Display of the IO-Link process data structure Yes No No Monitoring of IO-Link process data Yes No No Display of IO-Link device diagnostics messages Yes No No Behavior during IO-Link device replacement IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 27 Integration into the automation system 3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system Configuration options of the SIMATIC IO-Link masters The following table provides an overview of the configuration options supported by the individual IO-Link masters: Device designation Article number As of FW version Configuration... ...with S7-PCT ...without S7-PCT V1.0.0 x - V2.2.0 x x V1.0.0 x - V1.1.0 x x ET 200SP Communications module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0 ET 200AL Communications module CM 4xIOLink 4xM12 6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0 ET 200ecoPN IO-Link master 4 IO-L + 8 DI + 4 DO DC 24V/1,3A 8xM12 6ES7148-6JA00-0AB0 V6.1.0 x - IO-Link master 4 IO-L 4xM12 6ES7148-6JD00-0AB0 V1.0.0 x x (Autostart only) 6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0 V1.0.0 x - 6ES7138-4GA50-0AB0 V1.0.0 x - 6ES7278-4BD32-0XB0 V1.0.0 x - ET 200pro Electronic module EM 4 IO-LINK HF ET 200S Electronic module 4SI IO-Link S7-1200 SM1278 4xIO-LINK MASTER IO-Link system 28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Integration into the automation system 3.2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device 3.2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device Cyclic data exchange To exchange cyclic process data between an IO-Link device and a CPU, the IO-Link data is assigned by the IO-Link master to the previously set address ranges. The user program of the CPU accesses and processes the process values by using these addresses. The cyclic data from the CPU to the IO-Link device (for example, IO-Link actuator) takes place in reverse order. Acyclic data exchange Acyclic data, such as device parameters or events, is exchanged by means of a fixed index and subindex area. The CPU accesses the data using system mechanisms (for example, for online functions such as reading the status). You can use the index and subindex area to access specific device information (for example, to re-assign parameters of the device or master during operation). Function blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE" The programming of the CPU user program is another task in addition to the configuration and parameterization of the IO-Link system and its integration into the overall automation system. For acyclic data exchange, you can use the function blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE" for controllers of the S7-300, S7-400, S7-1200 and S7-1500 product lines. The function block "IO_LINK_MASTER" reads all relevant functions and accesses to the IO-Link master, the function block "IO_LINK_DEVICE" reads all accesses to the IO-Link devices. You can use the function block "IO_LINK_MASTER" to restore all parameters saved in the IO-Link master. A typical application is the replacement of the IO-Link master. Note Function blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE" The function blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE" replace the functions of the previously available block "IOL_CALL". Reference The IO-Link block library with a description of the integration is available on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82981502). You can find an application example of using the block library with HMI devices on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/90529409). IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 29 Integration into the automation system 3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation 3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation Changing device parameters You can adjust the device parameters during operation. The changed parameters will become effective on the device in the process and are retentively saved in the device. The parameters can be adapted during operation with: the engineering tool used (e.g. during plant commissioning) the CPU user program (program-controlled) HMI (through plant operator during batch change, process optimization) Locally through operation on the device (local operating unit on the device) Saving device parameters (backup) You can also save the parameters set in the device during commissioning or changed during operation of the plant in the IO-Link master. This data backup takes place depending on the set behavior of the IO-Link master ports. You can set the following data backup levels: None No data backup in the IO-Link master. Backup&Restore Every time the device parameters are changed, the changed data is automatically saved in the IO-Link master (see section "Triggering a backup"). Restore No automatic data backup in the IO-Link master. Figure 3-6 Overview of data backup level in S7-PCT Note IO-Link Specification V1.0 IO-Link master and devices to IO-Link specification V1.0 do not offer this function; a data backup cannot be set (Data backup: None). Note that the behavior of the IO-Link master and the IO-Link devices during device replacement depends directly on the set data backup level. You can find additional information on this dependency in the section Replacing a master or device during operation (Page 32). IO-Link system 30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Integration into the automation system 3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation Triggering a backup Requirements You have set the correct data backup level. The IO-Link master and the IO-Link devices you are using support this function (IO-Link Specification V1.1). Procedure There are several ways to trigger a backup: In the engineering tool: After you have downloaded the engineering settings to the device, the IO-Link device immediately triggers a backup. In the CPU user program: IO-Link device parameters can be changed successively by the user program. A backup is only triggered by a system command. The system command must be triggered by the user program after the parameter changes. You can implement the parameter changes and the system command for triggering the backup with function blocks of the CPU. Using the HMI: You proceed as with triggering by the user program. The plant operator then triggers the necessary system command on the HMI device. Locally by operating the IO-Link device: After confirming the input on the IO-Link device, the IO-Link device initiates the backup. IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 31 Integration into the automation system 3.4 Replacing a master or device during operation 3.4 Replacing a master or device during operation Replacing a device Replacing a device during operation is a scenario that occurs again and again and has to be completed without longer plant downtimes. Replace a device quickly and avoid incorrect settings. Devices can also be replaced by operators without special knowledge and aids. When you use the backup function of the master, the master automatically supplies the saved parameters to the new device during device replacement. You have the following setting options for device replacement: Backup&Restore You have set the master port to Backup&Restore. The new device behaves as the replaced device because the master has saved the last parameter change with the backup function. Restore You have set the master port to Restore. The new device applies the parameter settings that were saved in the master at the time of the last backup. If you have made parameter changes since the last backup, these are not saved in the master and are not available to the new device. The behavior of the new device can deviate from the behavior of the replaced device. This may be useful if you want to make short-term plant optimizations but do not want to save them in the plant backup. Note Field calibration of sensors When you are using sensors that must be adapted to specific rated conditions on site (field calibration), you must repeat this calibration after replacing the device. The backup does not include the data of the field calibration. After repeating the field calibration, the new device works just like the replaced device. Replacing a master Replacing a master during operation is a rather rare scenario. Here, too, longer plant downtimes are to be avoided. Replace a device quickly and avoid incorrect settings. Devices can also be replaced by operators without special knowledge and aids. You can save the configuration and parameter data of the master and the devices connected to the master in the CPU and download this information to the new master after the replacement. When using an S7-CPU, you can use function blocks for this purpose. You can find additional information on function blocks in the section Data access of the automation system and the HMI device (Page 29). IO-Link system 32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB Index Interface, 12 Protocol, 14 Response time, 14 Specification, 19 B Backup, 30 Backup&Restore, 30 O C Operating modes, 14 Configuration, 22 without S7-PCT, 25 Connecting cables, 13 Connection system in IP65/67, 12 P D Data exchange Acyclic, 29 Cyclic, 29 Data types, 15 Device data, 15 Device parameters, 24 Changing, 30 Save, 30 Device profiles, 16 Port Address range, 23 Port types in IP65/67, 13 Process data, 15 R Restore, 30 S S7-PCT Example configuration, 23 Startup of the IO system, 16 E Events, 15 F Function block IO_LINK_DEVICE, 29 IO_LINK_MASTER, 29 T Transmission performance, 15 Transmission rate, 14 W with S7-PCT, 22 I IODD Device description, 17 IO-Link Advantages, 9 Combination, 19 Components, 7 Configuration tool, 17 Definition, 8 IO-Link system Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 33 Analog value processing ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro, ET 200eco PN Analog value processing Function Manual What you should know about 2 ___________________ analog technology Representation of analog 3 ___________________ values 4 ___________________ Connecting transducers 5 ___________________ Thermocouples 6 ___________________ Wiring loads/actuators 7 ___________________ Supported functions 8 ___________________ High-speed analog modules 06/2014 A5E03461439-AC Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03461439-AC 07/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation covers general topics applicable to all products. In addition to introductory information about analog value processing, this manual covers the following topics: Wiring transducers to analog inputs Wiring actuators/loads to analog outputs Compensating for reference junction temperatures Calibrating analog modules Diagnostics options of an analog module High-speed analog modules Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of analog value processing (analog technology) Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about how to use STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Scope of the documentation This manual is considered the basic documentation for all analog input and analog output modules of the S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro and ET 200eco PN product series. Changes compared to previous version Changes / enhancements described in this manual, compared to the previous version (version 12/2013): Extension of the scope of validity to the distributed I/O system ET 200AL Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 3 Preface Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions of the configuration and programming software. This documentation includes images of the products it describes. The products supplied may differ slightly from these images. Please observe notes labeled as follows: Note Notes contain important information on a point in the documentation of particular importance. Additional support Additional information on SIMATIC products is available on the Internet. The associated documentation is also available on the Internet. The portfolio of technical documentation for SIMATIC products and systems can be accessed on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Analog value processing 4 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7 2 What you should know about analog technology ..................................................................................... 9 3 2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 9 2.2 Precision/resolution ......................................................................................................................13 2.3 Scaling analog values ..................................................................................................................17 2.4 Unscaling analog values ..............................................................................................................19 2.5 Linearity errors .............................................................................................................................21 2.6 Repeat accuracy ..........................................................................................................................22 2.7 Operational and basic error limits ................................................................................................23 2.8 Temperature error ........................................................................................................................26 2.9 Interference frequency suppression.............................................................................................27 2.10 Common mode interference (UCM) .............................................................................................29 2.11 Series mode interference (USM) .................................................................................................31 2.12 Interference voltage suppression .................................................................................................32 2.13 Crosstalk between channels ........................................................................................................34 2.14 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................36 2.15 Value status .................................................................................................................................46 2.16 Conversion time of an analog module .........................................................................................49 2.17 Cycle time of an analog module...................................................................................................51 2.18 Settling and response times of analog output modules ...............................................................52 2.19 Smoothing ....................................................................................................................................54 2.20 Burden with 2-wire transducers ...................................................................................................57 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 60 3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................60 3.2 Representation of input ranges ....................................................................................................62 3.3 Representation of output ranges..................................................................................................63 Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 5 Table of contents 4 5 6 7 Connecting transducers ........................................................................................................................ 65 4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 65 4.2 Wiring analog inputs with MANA connection .............................................................................. 67 4.3 Wiring analog inputs without MANA connection ......................................................................... 69 4.4 Wiring voltage transducers.......................................................................................................... 71 4.5 Wiring current transducers .......................................................................................................... 72 4.6 Wiring thermal resistors and resistors ......................................................................................... 74 4.7 Wiring thermocouples ................................................................................................................. 76 Thermocouples ..................................................................................................................................... 77 5.1 Selecting thermocouples ............................................................................................................. 77 5.2 Structure and operating principle of thermocouples ................................................................... 79 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 Compensation for the reference junction temperature ............................................................... 81 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 81 Compensation with internal reference junction ........................................................................... 84 Compensation with reference channel of the module ................................................................. 86 Compensation, reference channel of Group 0 ............................................................................ 88 Compensation with fixed reference temperature ........................................................................ 91 Compensation by means of dynamic reference temperature ..................................................... 94 "None" or external compensation................................................................................................ 98 Compensation type RTD (0) ..................................................................................................... 100 Wiring loads/actuators..........................................................................................................................103 6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 103 6.2 Wiring loads/actuators ............................................................................................................... 104 Supported functions .............................................................................................................................106 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 8 Calibrating analog modules....................................................................................................... 106 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 106 Calibrating analog modules....................................................................................................... 107 Canceling a calibration .............................................................................................................. 111 Resetting analog modules to factory settings ........................................................................... 112 High-speed analog modules .................................................................................................................113 8.1 Basics ........................................................................................................................................ 113 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules ...................................................................................................... 119 Index ...................................................................................................................................................125 Analog value processing 6 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 1 Documentation guide Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro and ET 200eco PN systems consists of the respective system manuals, function manuals and product manuals. Overview of additional documents related to analog value processing The following table lists further references that supplement this description of analog value processing. Table 1- 1 References for analog value processing Topic Documentation Most important contents System description System manual S7-1500 Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59191792) * Application planning * Installation * Connecting System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/58649293) * Commissioning System Manual ET 200MP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59193214) System manual Distributed I/O System ET 200AL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/89254965) Operating instructions ET 200pro Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/21210852) Operating instructions ET 200eco PN Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/29999018) Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 7 Documentation guide Topic Documentation Most important contents Configuring interference-free controllers Function manual Configuring Interference-Free Controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59193566) * Basics * Electromagnetic compatibility * Lightning protection Product manual of the respective analog module * Connecting Analog module * Parameters * Technical specifications * Parameter data record * Tables of analog values SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Analog value processing 8 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.1 2 Overview Introduction This chapter is intended to familiarize you with the essential parameters of analog input modules and analog output modules based on the fundamentals of analog technology. The descriptions and examples provided on the following pages serve as a reference to the manuals for the respective analog module and are intended to facilitate the handling of these manuals. Analog and binary signals Binary signals can assume only 2 signal states: signal state 1 (voltage present) and signal state 0 (no voltage present). In control engineering, it is frequently necessary to read, process and output analog signals in addition to binary signals. In contrast to binary signals, analog signals take on any number of values within a specific range. Possible analog variables include: Temperature Pressure Speed Fill level pH value Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 9 What you should know about analog technology 2.1 Overview Transducers Controllers are only capable of processing analog values in the form of bit patterns. For this purpose, transducers which can be connected to the analog module measure physical variables such as pressure or temperature. The analog input module reads this analog value in the form of current, voltage or resistance. To enable the CPU to process the current or voltage measured, an integrated analog-to-digital converter in the analog input module converts the value into a 16-bit integer value. Depending on the type of measurement, you can use the following transducers: Voltage transducers Current transducers - 2-wire transducers - 4-wire transducers Resistance transducers - 4-wire connection - 3-wire connection - 2-wire connection Thermocouples Additional information on wiring various types of transducers to analog inputs can be found in Wiring transducers (Page 65). Example Speed is acquired using a transducer which converts the speed range of 0 to 1500 rpm to a voltage range of 1 to 5 V. At a measured speed of 865 rpm, the transducer outputs a value of 3.3 V. The resulting voltage value is calculated as follows: The graph below illustrates voltage acquisition: Figure 2-1 Speed measurement Analog value processing 10 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.1 Overview Analog-to-digital conversion A CPU processes information exclusively in digital format. The analog value is therefore converted into a bit pattern. Conversion is done using an integrated ADC (analog-to-digital converter) in the analog input module. For the CPU, this conversion always returns a 16-bit word for SIMATIC products. The ADC used digitalizes the analog signal and approximates its value with a stepped curve. Resolution and conversion speed are the most important ADC parameters. Analog value Digital value Figure 2-2 Approximation of an analog graph with low- and high-resolution stepped curves Digital-to-analog conversion Once the CPU has processed the digital signal, an integrated DAC (digital-to-analog converter) in the analog output module converts the output signal to an analog current or voltage value. The resulting value of the output signal corresponds to the output value used to control the analog actuators. Such actuators include, for example, small servo drives or proportional valves. You will find more information on wiring actuators in Wiring loads/actuators (Page 103). Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 11 What you should know about analog technology 2.1 Overview Important parameters of analog modules Alongside the type and range of measurement, the precision, resolution and conversion time are the main points to consider when selecting an analog module. For some applications such as systems which cover a large area, common mode or channel isolation are also important. The parameters listed here are examined in more detail in the following pages. Processing analog signals The following figure demonstrates analog signal processing in a PLC. Figure 2-3 Analog value processing Analog value processing 12 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.2 Precision/resolution 2.2 Precision/resolution The resolution of an analog module depends on the converter and its external circuitry. An approximation of the analog signal to be acquired/output is returned by a stepped curve. The resolution determines the number of increments of the analog value along this stepped curve. A higher module resolution reduces the length of increments and adds precision to the digitization of the analog signal. Approximation of an analog value The figures below show the approximation of an analog value by means of a stepped curve. A low resolution only returns a rough approximation of the actual curve (left figure), while the approximation is more precise at higher resolutions (right figure). Analog value Digital value Figure 2-4 Approximation of an analog curve with a stepped curve Visualization of the measuring range at a resolution of 13 bits and 16 bits The unipolar measured value from a module having a resolution of 13 bits (= 12 bits + S) is segmented into a total of 212 = 4096 increments. The smallest increment in a measuring range of 0 to10 V is 10 V/4096, equal to 2.4 mV. A module with16-bit (= 15 bits + S) resolution thus provides an increment of 0.3 mV. If the resolution increases by one bit, the number of increments doubles and the width of an increment halves. If the resolution increases from 13 bits to 16 bits, the number of increments increases eightfold from 4096 to 32768. With a resolution of 13 bits, the smallest value that can be displayed is therefore 2.4 mV. By contrast, this value is approximately 0.3 mV at a resolution of 16 bits. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 13 What you should know about analog technology 2.2 Precision/resolution Measuring ranges For the display of the measuring range, SIMATIC S7 distinguishes between the rated range, the overrange and underrange, and the overflow or underflow. This distinction allows you to recognize whether the measured value is actually in the measuring range determined in the technical specifications. The overflow and underflow ranges are reserved for error detection. At a resolution of 16 bits the theoretically possible 32768 increments are distributed across a voltage range of 11.852 V, which means that only 27648 increments are actually available for the resolution of a measuring range of 10 V. The minimum value which can be represented is therefore 0.3617 mV (see table). Table 2- 1 Example of resolution for the 0 to 10 V measuring range of a SIMATIC S7 module Value (increments) Voltage measuring range Decimal 0 to 10 V Range 32767 11.852 V Overflow 11.759 V Overrange 27648 10.0 V Rated range 20736 7.5 V 1 361.7 V 0 0V 32512 32511 27649 not relevant for this example Underrange as negative values are not possible Underflow The digitized visualization of the input ranges, separated into bipolar and unipolar input ranges, is shown in the section Visualization of the input ranges (Page 62). The digitized visualization of the output ranges, separated into bipolar and unipolar output ranges, is shown in the section Visualization of the output ranges (Page 63). You will find a summary of all measuring ranges which you can use with your analog module in the corresponding device manual. Analog value processing 14 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.2 Precision/resolution Over and underrange It may happen for control processes with high signal jumps that the settling curve of the signal briefly leaves the rated range until it reaches the setpoint. The over and underrange ensures that no error is reported while the signal is not in the rated range. If the signal exceeds the over or underrange, however, and reaches the overflow or underflow range, the error state "Overflow" or "Underflow" is diagnosed. This means the over or underrange correspond to a tolerance range between the rated range and the overflow or underflow. Additional information on the settling time is available in the section Settling and response times of analog output modules (Page 52). The figure below shows the rated range, the overrange and overflow of a unipolar measuring range. The signal leaves the rated range briefly during the settling phase. Analog output signal tE Settling time of the signal to the setpoint t1 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the signal t2 Signal has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached Analog module precision The precision of an analog module is specified as a percentage value or absolute value, for example, in K or C. This characterizes the total error of measured value acquisition. The basic error limit at 25 C, as well as the operational limit, are specified in accordance with international standard IEC 61131, which also forms the basis for European Standard EN 61131. For more information on the operational/basic error limits, refer to the Operational and basic error limits (Page 23) section. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 15 What you should know about analog technology 2.2 Precision/resolution Relation between resolution and precision A certain resolution must be given to reach a specific precision (operational error). Example Measuring error as a result of digitization at a resolution of 8 bits and 14 bits An analog module has a measuring range of 0 V to 10 V. A resolution of 8 bits represents a total of 256 values. This is equivalent to a minimum possible voltage step of 39 mV or 0.4% of the measuring range end value. A resolution of 14 bits represents a total of 16384 values. This is equivalent to a minimum possible voltage step of 0.61 mV or 0.006% of the measuring range end value. The percentages derived in this way also represent the theoretical best-case values for the operational limit. With a resolution of 8 bits and a measuring range of 0 to 10 V, it is therefore impossible to achieve a precision of more than 0.4 %. In practical life, this value would be clearly worse, depending on the implemented circuitry. Calculating the maximum measuring error The maximum measuring error of a 0 to 10 V analog module with an operational limit of 0.5 % across the entire temperature range is calculated as follows: 10 V x 0.5/100 = 50 mV This means the maximum measuring error is approximately 50 mV. This also means that each analog voltage input is subject to a distortion of 50 mV across the entire input range. A voltage of 3.5 V that is to be measured can therefore be visualized by any value between 3.45 V and 3.55 V. For more information on the operational/basic error limits, refer to the Operational and basic error limits (Page 23) section. Analog value processing 16 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.3 Scaling analog values 2.3 Scaling analog values Scaling It is often necessary to calculate the actual process value rather than increments (e.g., 10 V = 27648 increments) for further processing of digitalized analog values. The conversion of a value range (e.g., -27648 to +27648 increments) to the original physical quantity (e.g., 0 to 500 liters) is referred to as scaling. Scaling blocks STEP 7 offers the suitable program block for scaling of analog values. The SCALE block is included in the STEP 7 scope of delivery and permits input of a high and low limit (e.g., 0 to 500 liters). Example In the example below the fill level of a tank with a capacity of 500 liters is to be measured. The transducer used measures a voltage of -10 V with an empty tank and a voltage of +10 V with a full tank. The analog module converts the voltage range from -10 V to +10 V into the value range -27648 to +27648 and converts this range into the original quantity of 0 to 500 liters with the SCALE program block. Figure 2-5 Scaling in the SCALE program block The analog value at input IN is read directly by the module or is transferred by a data interface in INT format. The input LO_LIM is used to determine the low limit (0 liters) and HI_LIM to determine the high limit (500 liters) of the physical quantity. The output OUT outputs the scaled value (physical quantity) as floating-point number (LO_LIM <= OUT <= HI_LIM). You can assign parameters via the input BIPOLAR to specify if only positive or only negative values are to be converted. If the parameter receives an operand with the state '0', there is a unipolar scaling. An operand with the state '1' results in a bipolar scaling. The output RET_VAL outputs an error code in case of an error (e.g., overflow) and the value '0' in case of an error-free execution. Additional information on the SCALE block can be found in the STEP 7 online help. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 17 What you should know about analog technology 2.3 Scaling analog values Unipolar and bipolar measuring ranges The measurement of the fill level in our example took place within a bipolar measuring range. In addition to the positive voltage the transducer also provides negative voltage. Because the tank volume is mapped to the range from -27648 to +27648 increments, the measurement of the fill level takes place with twice the resolution () as in the unipolar measuring range. Note Transducers The prerequisite for a measurement within a bipolar measuring range is that the used transducer supports bipolar measuring ranges. Figure 2-6 Bipolar measuring range The measurement of the fill level in the bipolar measuring range takes place with twice the resolution () as in the unipolar measuring range. Figure 2-7 Unipolar measuring range Analog value processing 18 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.4 Unscaling analog values 2.4 Unscaling analog values Unscaling The output of scaled analog values often requires conversion of the analog value calculated by the user program into the value range of the analog output module. This conversion is referred to as unscaling. Unscaling blocks STEP 7 offers the suitable program block for unscaling of analog values. The UNSCALE block is included in the STEP 7 scope of delivery and permits the input of a high and low limit that defines the range of the program value. Example An analog value from 0.0 to 100.0% calculated by the user program is to be converted with the UNSCALE block to the value range -27648 to +27648. When the unscaled value is output to an analog output module, this module addresses an analog actuator (e.g., modulating valve). The actuator is to be addressed at a program value of 0% with the minimum value (-10 V or -20 mA) and at 100% with the maximum value (+10 V or +20 mA). Figure 2-8 Unscaling in the UNSCALE program block The value calculated by the program must be transferred in the REAL format (IN). You use the input LO_LIM to determine the low limit (0.0%), and HI_LIM to determine the high limit (100.0%) within which the program value moves. The unscaled value is output in INT format at the OUT output. You can assign parameters via the input BIPOLAR to specify if only positive or only negative values are to be converted. If the parameter receives an operand with the state '0', there is a unipolar scaling. An operand with the state '1' results in a bipolar scaling. The output RET_VAL outputs an error code in case of an error and the value '0' in case of an error-free execution. Additional information on the UNSCALE block can be found in the STEP 7 online help. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 19 What you should know about analog technology 2.4 Unscaling analog values Unipolar and bipolar measuring ranges The figure below shows the scaling for an actuator that is to be addressed at a program value of 0% with the minimum value 0 (0 V or 0 mA) and at 100% (+27648) with the maximum value (10 V or 20 mA). Figure 2-9 Unipolar measuring range The figure below shows the scaling for an actuator that is to be addressed at a program value of 0% (-27648) with the minimum value 0 (-10 V or -20 mA) and at 100% (+27648) with the maximum value (+10 V or +20 mA). Figure 2-10 Bipolar measuring range Analog value processing 20 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.5 Linearity errors 2.5 Linearity errors Definition Linearity denotes the deviation of the actual A/D or D/A conversion from the ideal lines within a specified measuring range. The linearity error therefore represents the deviation of the real transmission function from the ideal straight line. The error is given in the technical data as a percentage of the rated range of the analog module. The figure below shows the linearity error of an ADC, magnified for better visibility. Figure 2-11 Linearity errors Example An error of 1 mV is returned at an input range of 10 V and a linearity error of 0.01%. The error is calculated as follows: 10 V * 0.01 % = 1 mV The linearity error information given in the technical specifications is taken into account in the operational limit. You will find a detailed description of the operational limit in Operational and basic error limits (Page 23). Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 21 What you should know about analog technology 2.6 Repeat accuracy 2.6 Repeat accuracy Definition The repeat accuracy is the maximum deviation in measured/output value for the same input signal or output value after another value has been created or output. Other parameters, e.g. the Temperature parameter, remain unchanged. The repeat accuracy refers to the rated range of the module and applies in a steady temperature state. Measured value variance The repeat accuracy provides information on the variance of individual measurements. The smaller the variance, the greater the repeat accuracy. The repeat accuracy is therefore one of the most important properties of measuring devices. In the technical data, the repeat accuracy is given as a percentage of the input or output range at 25C in the steady state. Example The specified repeat accuracy for an analog input module as a percentage of the measuring range end value is 0.02 %. This corresponds to a repeat accuracy of 2 mV for any value within the measuring range of 10 V. If you change the measured value from 10 V to -10 V, for example, and then measure with 10 V again, the measured value deviation may not exceed 2 mV. Good repeat accuracy Poor repeat accuracy Figure 2-12 Repeat accuracy of measured values output Analog value processing 22 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.7 Operational and basic error limits 2.7 Operational and basic error limits Introduction The following section shows you how to determine the operational or basic error limits and thus the measurement error or output error with the help of the technical specification. The worst-case configuration ensures that the module will not exceed the specified value within the valid operational range. The precision of analog input or output modules is only part of the precision of the entire measurement section. A measurement section usually consists of transducer, transmitter, transmission line as well as input / output module. Operational limit The operational limit is the entire measurement or output error rate of the analog module in the rated range in temperature-settled state within the approved temperature range. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 23 What you should know about analog technology 2.7 Operational and basic error limits Basic error limit The basic error limit is the entire measurement or output error rate in the rated range at an ambient temperature of 25 C and temperature-settled state. The basic error limit of the module is more or less a theoretical value, because a constant ambient temperature of 25 C is rarely maintained in plants. For this reason, the operational limit always takes priority in terms of the practical selection and assessment of a module. Note The operational limit and basic error limit percentages listed in the technical specifications always relate to the maximum possible I/O value (the measuring range end value) in the rated range of the module. The following image shows an example of operational and basic error limits in comparison with the ideal curve. Figure 2-13 Operational and basic error limits Analog value processing 24 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.7 Operational and basic error limits Example of output error calculation An analog output module is used for voltage output in a range of 0 to 10 V. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30 C, which means that the operational limit applies. Technical specifications of the module: Operational limit for the voltage output: 0.1 % The result is an output error of approximately 10 mV (0.1 % of 10 V) across the rated range of the module. For example, the output value may range from 2.49 V to 2.51 V at an actual voltage of 2.50 V. Note Bipolar measuring ranges The calculation also applies to bipolar measuring ranges. An error of 10 mV is also returned at an input range of 10 V and a linearity error of 0.1%. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 25 What you should know about analog technology 2.8 Temperature error 2.8 Temperature error Introduction Analog modules are exposed to operational conditions that have an impact on their precision and on the measurement results they return. Temperature errors develop, for example, if the operating temperature of the module deviates from the ambient temperature of 25 C. These temperature errors within the approved temperature range are taken into account in the operational limit. Definition The temperature error identifies the maximum drift of measuring/output values caused by fluctuation of the ambient temperature at the analog module. The maximum drift can occur at any ambient temperature. The temperature error is specified depending on the module used in percent per degree Celsius and/or percent per Kelvin, e.g. 0.005%/K, and relates to the measuring range end value of the analog module. Operational limits of compensation The temperature error of the reference junction temperature compensation function only occurs with thermocouple measurements. The temperature error of compensation is added to the actual temperature error if "Internal reference junction" operating mode is selected. The temperature error of compensation is defined in the technical specifications as a percentage of the physical rated range of the analog module or as an absolute value in C. Note Calculating the error in thermocouple measurements Add the error of a thermocouple measurement to the error of the compensation measurement to determine the total error of a thermocouple measurement. These errors are defined in the respective manual. Example In this example, the total error of the temperature measurement is determined with the help of a type K thermocouple. The type K thermocouple takes measurements at a temperature range from -270 C to +1372 C. The technical specifications state an operational limit of >-200 C 2.4 K for the type K thermocouple. The temperature error of compensation amounts to 6 C. The total temperature error is measured as follows at a temperature of >-200 C: Operational error (2.4 K) + temperature error of compensation (6 C) = 8.4 C. Analog value processing 26 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.9 Interference frequency suppression 2.9 Interference frequency suppression Definition The interference frequency suppression function is applied to analog input modules to suppress the noise caused by the frequency of the AC voltage supply used. The frequency of the AC voltage supply is likely to have a negative effect particularly on the values returned by measurements in the low voltage range and on thermocouples. Parameter assignment The line frequency at which the system is operated can be set by means of module parameters, for example, in STEP 7. Figure 2-14 Interference frequency suppression The conversion time changes depending on the set interference frequency suppression. The data sheets of the respective module define this dependency. Please note the following when selecting interference frequency suppression: The higher the frequency setting, the shorter the conversion time. Note Line frequency Always select the interference frequency based on the line frequency used. Mismatch errors must be expected if a frequency that deviates from this line frequency is set, for example, to reduce the conversion time. In this case, the specified technical data and, in particular, precision are possibly outside the specified range. Smoothing By smoothing analog values, you achieve an additional improvement for the suppression of interference frequencies. For more information on the smoothing of analog values, refer to the section Smoothing (Page 54). Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 27 What you should know about analog technology 2.9 Interference frequency suppression Line frequencies used The line frequency is the frequency used in an electricity network for AC supply. It is measured in hertz and indicates the number of oscillations per second in a periodic signal. A line frequency of 50 Hz, for example, means 50 oscillations per second. Europe, Australia and most countries in Asia and Africa use a line frequency of 50 Hz. North and Central America and most countries in South America have electricity networks with a line frequency of 60 Hz. Frequencies of 400 Hz are most commonly used in on-board networks for airplanes, in the aerospace sector and for military applications. One reason for this is that engines with a line frequency of 400 Hz can usually be made smaller and lighter. As, however, it is not economic to transport such high frequencies over large distances, 400 Hz applications are usually subject to significant spatial limits. A frequency of 16 2/3 Hz is used for the traction power supply in Germany, Austria and Switzerland. Some modules of the SIMATIC S7 product range also support the interference frequency suppression of this line frequency. The configurable interference frequency suppression in these cases is 16.6 Hz. Analog value processing 28 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.10 Common mode interference (UCM) 2.10 Common mode interference (UCM) Definition Common mode interference denotes interference voltages and currents in the lines connecting electrical devices and system components. They affect both the positive and negative line with the same phase angle and amplitude. The interference signal needs an additional current path to affect the utility signal. This current path is usually provided by common reference potential, e.g. earth or ground connection, of the utility signal and interference source. Common mode interference in analog modules Common mode interference occurs in analog input and output modules if their reference potential is different from the reference potential of the connected sensor or actuator. Common mode interference is most likely to occur when analog modules are operated with grounded sensors. The size of the overall system means that voltage differences may develop between machine components with grounded sensors and the analog module reference. These voltage differences affect both the positive and negative signal path equally, which is why they are termed common mode interference. In operation with non-grounded sensors, the occurrence of common mode interference is not as obvious as in grounded operation. Nevertheless, capacitive or inductive coupling can also create voltage differences in such cases which have the effect of common mode interference. Depending on the conditions in grounded and non-grounded operation, common mode voltage can occur as direct or as alternating voltage. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 29 What you should know about analog technology 2.10 Common mode interference (UCM) Example The following figure of an analog module with two inputs (Ch1/Ch2) shows the coupled interference voltages at the inputs (UCM1/UCM2) as well as an interference voltage coupled between these inputs (UCM3). Common mode rejection indicates the extent to which these interference signals can be suppressed. It is calculated using the following equation: CMR [dB] = 20 * log (UCM / Ua) Figure 2-15 Common mode voltage coupled between two inputs If there is common-mode voltage (UCM), the equation is solved for Ua to calculate the measuring error (Ua): Note The common mode rejection (CMR) is detailed in "Common mode interference" in the technical data of the device manual for your analog module. Analog value processing 30 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.11 Series mode interference (USM) 2.11 Series mode interference (USM) Definition Series mode interference is interference voltages and currents affecting the connection lines in opposite directions. They have opposite polarity in the positive and negative directions. Series mode interference currents cause a voltage drop at the input impedance that has the effect of an interference voltage. Causes Series mode interference is caused by capacitive or inductive coupling. Inductive coupling generates a magnetic flow that is radiated between adjacent current-carrying conductors. This induces an interference voltage in the conductor. Galvanic coupling is given where different circuits influence each other due to common conductor sections, e.g. common ground connection. The diagram below shows series mode interference as a voltage source (USM) connected in series to the actual measuring signal (UM). The index "SM" stands for "Series Mode". Series Mode rejection indicates the extent to which these interference signals are suppressed. It is calculated using the following equation: SMR [dB] = 20 * log (USM / Ua) Figure 2-16 Capacitive or inductive interference coupling to the signal cable The voltage (Ua) measurement error is calculated by solving the equation for Ua. The following equation shows the calculation of current (Ia) measuring errors using a current input. Note The series mode rejection (SMR) is detailed in "Series mode interference" in the technical data of the device manual for your analog module. The level of input resistance (Rein) is also specified in the technical data. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 31 What you should know about analog technology 2.12 Interference voltage suppression 2.12 Interference voltage suppression Definition Interference voltage suppression gives the factor by which the interference signal is suppressed in measurement value acquisition. Higher values reduce the effect of interference on the measurement signal. The technical data differentiates between "Common mode interference" and "Series mode interference". Interference voltage suppression is specified in decibels. Example The diagram below shows the measuring error for interference voltages in volts and interference voltage suppression of 0 to 120 dB. Figure 2-17 Interference voltage suppression With an interference voltage suppression of 40 dB and an interference voltage of 1 V, the measured value is only distorted by 0.01 V. Note Interference-free design Disturbance variables can be substantially reduced by means of appropriate grounding and shielding to increase interference immunity of the configuration. You will find a detailed description of how to avoid interference in the Configuring interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual. Analog value processing 32 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.12 Interference voltage suppression Common mode rejection The table below sets out the possible common mode rejection specifications in the technical data of an analog input module: Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency), n = 1, 2, ... Common mode interference > 100 dB Common mode voltage, max. 10 V If the interference frequency is configured as 50 Hz, the specified interference voltage suppression for common mode interference will only apply for the frequencies 50 Hz 1 %, 100 Hz 1 %, 150 Hz 1 %, etc. Immunity is lower for all other frequencies. Interferences caused by the line voltage distort the measured utility signal in the ratio of 100,000 : 1. An interference voltage amplitude of 1 V, for example, will affect the utility signal by 10 V. The Common Mode voltage (UCM) defines the maximum permitted deviation of the potential between two channels and between one channel and analog ground. The interference voltage suppression defined in the technical specifications must not be exceeded. If the maximum common mode voltage specified, for example, 10 V, is exceeded, the analog signal is processed incorrectly. Depending on the module used, this error may be diagnosed and an error message output. The maximum common mode voltage may be exceeded as a result of varying input or overly long lines. Series mode rejection The table below sets out the possible series mode rejection specifications in the technical data of an analog module: Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency), n = 1, 2, ... Series mode interference > 60 dB If the interference frequency is configured as 50 Hz, the specified interference voltage suppression for series mode interference will only apply for the frequencies 50 Hz 1 %, 100 Hz 1 %, 150 Hz 1 %, etc. Immunity is lower for all other frequencies. Overall, interference caused by the line voltage distorts the utility signal measured by 1000 : 1. For example, an interference voltage amplitude of 1 V will affect the utility signal by 1 mV. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 33 What you should know about analog technology 2.13 Crosstalk between channels 2.13 Crosstalk between channels Origin of the term The term crosstalk/XT was originally used in the field of telecommunication to denote unwanted coupling of voice signals between two cable conductors of different subscribers. Definition Crosstalk between signal channels denotes the interactive influence between two independent channels as a result of leakage currents and capacitive or inductive coupling. Crosstalk between the channels changes the signal by the value of the amplitude of the crosstalk signal. Causes Technically, it is not feasible to totally isolate the module channels from environmental conditions. This means that it is always possible for leakage currents or disturbance coupling having an interactive effect. Figure 2-18 Crosstalk between two channels The diagram shows the effects of crosstalk for the user with two channels (Ch1/Ch2) of an analog module. The crosstalk value is the factor by which the utility signal at a second channel Ua2 is affected by the signal at the first channel Ue1. The measuring error (Ua1) can be calculated using the following equation: Analog value processing 34 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.13 Crosstalk between channels Example of crosstalk attenuation The "crosstalk between inputs" value in the technical specifications is defined as a value of >-100 dB at a measuring range of -10 V to +10 V on channel 1 of an eight-channel analog input module. The voltage at the input has an amplitude of 10 V. What is the error caused by crosstalk at channel 0 (measuring range 10 V) and channel 2 (measuring range 80 mV)? 100 dB are equal to a factor of 100,000. The measured values at channels 0 and 2 to 7 are therefore affected by 10 V / 100,000 = 100 V. This distortion is added to or subtracted from the pending measuring signal and its effect depends on the selected measuring range. Channel 0: 100 V / 10 V = 0.001 % Channel 2: 100 V / 80 mV = 0.125 % A voltage of 10 V set at channel 1 distorts the measured value at channel 0 by 0.001% and the measured value at channel 2 by 0.125%. The measuring error resulting from crosstalk in this example is therefore 0.001 % or 0.125 %. The basic error limit already includes the error generated as a result of crosstalk between the channels. Calculating measuring error You calculate the measurement error at channel 1 in this example based on a change in the measurement voltage of 10 V at channel 2. The crosstalk (XT [dB]) value is defined in the technical specifications in the manual of the analog module that you are using. A change in the measurement voltage of 10 V at channel 2 causes a measurement deviation of 0.001 V at channel 1. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 35 What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics 2.14 Diagnostics Diagnostics for analog modules SIMATIC analog modules can diagnose errors. A number of different types of diagnostics are available for analog modules in STEP 7. Please note that the parameter assignment options vary depending on the analog module and product family used. More detailed information on the types of diagnostics can be found in the device manual for your analog input or analog output module. Proceed as follows to select the diagnostics types of the analog module used: 1. Open STEP 7. 2. Select the analog module in the Device view. 3. Select the "Properties" tab. 4. Select the inputs or the required channel of the analog module in the Inspector window. Table 2- 2 Overview of diagnosable errors Type of diagnostics Analog input module Analog output module Wire break No supply voltage L+ Overflow Underflow Common mode error - Short-circuit Overload - Reference junction - Diagnostics of the analog module are carried out while the system is in operation, on the basis of the current output variables such as current or voltage. If the output current or output voltage is no longer sufficient, the module will not be able to run reliable diagnostics. The limits within which diagnostics are possible are specified in the technical data for each module. The module reports the diagnosed state to the CPU using a diagnostics error interrupt. If several diagnostics are pending at the same time, the diagnostics with the highest priority is reported to the CPU first. Diagnostics are output on LED displays on the affected module, on the CPU display, on the Web server or on an HMI device. The configurable diagnostics types depend on the respective selected measuring type or output type. The following tables shows the relationship between the diagnostics types, measuring types or output types of an analog input module or analog output module. Analog value processing 36 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Diagnostics Analog input modules Table 2- 3 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Voltage" No supply voltage L+ Wire break (1 to 5 V) Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - ET 200MP - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200AL - - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - * * - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Table 2- 4 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Current (4-wire transducer)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break (4 to 20 mA) Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - ET 200MP - - ET 200SP - - ** ET 200AL - - - ** ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - * * - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" ** Diagnostics for encoder supply only Table 2- 5 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Current (2-wire transducer)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break (4 to 20 mA) Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - ET 200MP - - ET 200SP - - - ** ET 200AL - - - ** ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - * * - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" ** Diagnostics for encoder supply only Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 37 What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Table 2- 6 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Resistor (4-wire connection)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - - ET 200MP - - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200eco PN - - - - ET 200pro - * * - - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Table 2- 7 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Resistor (3-wire connection)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - - ET 200MP - - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200AL - - - - - ET 200eco PN - - - - ET 200pro - * * - - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Table 2- 8 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Resistor (2-wire connection)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - - - - ET 200MP - - - - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200AL - - - - - ET 200eco PN - - - - ET 200pro - * * - - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Analog value processing 38 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Table 2- 9 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Thermal resistor (4-wire connection)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - - ET 200MP - - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - * * - - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Table 2- 10 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Thermal resistor (3-wire connection)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - - ET 200MP - - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200AL - - - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - * * - - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Table 2- 11 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Thermal resistor (2-wire connection)" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - - - - - - ET 200MP - - - - - - ET 200SP - - - ET 200AL - - - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - * * - - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 39 What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Table 2- 12 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Thermocouple" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short-circuit S7-1500 - ET 200MP - ET 200SP - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - - * * - - * For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow" Diagnostics for analog output modules Table 2- 13 Diagnostics types of an analog output module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Voltage" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Short-circuit Overload S7-1500 - - ET 200MP - - ET 200SP - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - - - - - Table 2- 14 Diagnostics types of an analog output module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Current" No supply voltage L+ Wire break Overflow Underflow Short-circuit Overload S7-1500 - - ET 200MP - - ET 200SP - - ET 200eco PN - - - ET 200pro - - - - - Note Measuring ranges Note that the diagnostics types that can be parameterized depend on the selected measurement/output type as well as on the respective measuring range. Note Minimum output values Certain errors such as wire break and short circuit cannot be diagnosed below a given current or voltage value. Diagnostics are only possible again once the output returns to above this minimum value. Analog value processing 40 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics No supply voltage L+ You can diagnose a missing or low supply voltage L+ at the analog module by activating the "No supply voltage L+" checkbox. If the supply voltage is missing or too low, the status and error display on the analog module will provide the relevant information. The entry in the diagnostics buffer also makes this information available to the CPU. If there is no supply voltage, no other types of diagnostics available are possible either. Wire break The term wire break denotes a failure state that is triggered by the interruption of a usually closed electrical circuit. Wire break in analog input modules The "Wire break" diagnostics function facilitates the detection of errors during system operation. In STEP 7 you define the module properties by setting various parameters. Depending on the module used, you may, for example, be able to set a current limit parameter at which a wire break is to be reported. Figure 2-19 Configuring the wire break current limit for an analog input module in STEP 7 Usually, the live zero technique is deployed to detect wire breaks. The start of the measuring range for the standard live zero signal of 4 to 20 mA is assigned the 4 mA signal value. A wire break between the input and sensor can therefore be detected based on the missing current flow. Instead of a current signal, you may also use a voltage signal from 1 to 5 V to detect a wire break. The "Wire break" diagnostics function can therefore only be configured for a range of 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V. For "Resistor", "Thermal resistor" and "Thermocouple" measurements, a current is impressed into the line. If a wire break occurs, the flow of current is interrupted and the analog module therefore detects the wire break. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 41 What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Wire break in analog output modules The analog signal output is used for wire break detection. Reliable wire break diagnostics is not possible if the voltage is too low. In this case, the diagnostics function is deactivated without triggering a change of the diagnostics status. The current limit up to which the module will diagnose wire break can be found in the technical data for the module. Overflow/underflow The resolution of the measuring range of an analog input module distinguishes between the rated range, the overrange or underrange, and the overflow or underflow. The following table assign the number of increments into which the measured signal is divided to the various voltage measuring ranges. Table 2- 15 Voltage measuring range 10 V of an analog input module Value (increments) Voltage measuring range Range Decimal 10 V 32767 > 11.759 V Overflow 32511 11.759 V Overrange 27648 10.0 V Rated range 0 0V -27648 -10 V 27649 -27649 Underrange -32512 -11.759 V -32768 < -11.759 V Underflow As of a decimal value of 32512, the value acquired is beyond the overrange and is no longer valid. If this is the case, the error status "Overflow" is diagnosed. The overrange is a tolerance range before overflow is reached. As of a decimal value of -32513, the value acquired is below the configured measuring range and is no longer valid. If this is the case, the error status "Underflow" is diagnosed. The underrange is the equivalent of the overrange, but for negative values. An "Overflow" or "Underflow" diagnostics may be caused, for example, by a wire break, an incorrect measuring range or incorrect wiring. Note Accuracy The accuracy specified in the technical data of the relevant module is only guaranteed within the rated range. Analog value processing 42 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Common mode error Activating the "Common mode" checkbox diagnoses a violation of the maximum potential difference UCM. A violation of the permitted potential difference UCM has occurred, for example, between the reference point of the measuring inputs and the analog ground MANA . Possible causes: Wiring error Environments with EMC disturbance Incorrectly grounded transducers Long line lengths Sensor not connected 2-wire transducer connected to MANA Note With 4-wire transducers, a current meter connected in series will result in too great a drop in voltage. Potential differences UCM beyond the valid limits may lead to measurement errors and malfunctions. If you want to ensure that the maximum value is not exceeded, interconnect the measuring inputs and analog ground MANA with an equipotential bonding cable. More detailed information can be found in Wiring transducers. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 43 What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Short-circuit Activating the "Short circuit" checkbox activates short-circuit diagnostics for an analog channel. The diagnostics function is triggered by channel overload. Possible causes: Wiring error (e.g. short circuit between conductors at the connections or in the cable) Use of faulty or incorrect actuators (e.g. internal short circuit or low input resistance as a result of actuator failure) The analog signal output is used for short circuit detection. If the voltage is too low, reliable short-circuit diagnostics are not possible. In this case, the diagnostics function is deactivated without triggering a change of the diagnostics status. The voltage limit up to which the module will diagnose a short circuit can be found in the technical data for the module. SIMATIC modules have a special protective circuit to prevent short circuit. The short circuit current is limited internally in the module. The level of short circuit current is specified in the technical data of your analog module. Note Overload Please note that overload exposes the modules are exposed to a greater thermal load. This can affect the output channels. You should therefore avoid continuously running analog output modules in overload. Reference junction This type of diagnostics can only be selected for analog input modules for "Thermocouple" measuring. Selecting the "Reference junction" check box diagnoses an error on the reference channel for compensating the reference junction temperature. The temperature at the reference junction of a thermocouple is measured at the reference channel of the module using an external thermal resistor (RTD). If an error occurs, for example as a result of a wire break, the temperature measured at the reference junction of the thermocouple will no longer be compensated. The reference temperature may then be outside the valid range. Additional information on connecting thermocouples and thermal resistors and on how they operate can be found in Thermocouples and Wiring transducers. Analog value processing 44 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.14 Diagnostics Overload Activating the "Overload" checkbox activates the diagnostics of the thermal monitoring of the output level. The "Overload" diagnostics is triggered when the maximum temperature is exceeded at the output and is detected channel by channel. The maximum temperature may be exceeded for the following reasons: Ambient temperature is too high Output is being operated outside the specification Note Overload Please note that overload exposes the modules to a high thermal load. This can affect the output channels. You should therefore avoid continuously running analog output modules in overload. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 45 What you should know about analog technology 2.15 Value status 2.15 Value status Value status In case of a faulty analog value, the analog module outputs the error values 0x7FFF (error value for overflow and all other error states) or 0x8000 (error value for underflow) for the affected channel. The user program is now able to detect and evaluate a channel error. The user also has the option to evaluate the system diagnostics event-driven by means of diagnostics alarms. In addition to the error values 0x7FFF or 0x8000 and the configured diagnostic types, analog input and output modules provide diagnostics information by means of the Process image input (PII). It is referred to as Value status and transferred synchronously with the user data. The value status (Quality Information = QI) provides a statement regarding the validity of the input signal. A distinction is made between the quality level "Good" (signal valid = 1) and "Bad" (signal invalid = 0). Note For analog input modules, the use of the value status is an alternative to the evaluation of the channels by the error values 0x7FFF or 0x8000. Compared to the error values, the binary evaluation of the value status (0 or 1) in the user program is simpler and more clearly arranged. For analog output modules, the value status informs you as to whether the written value can be output by the respective channel. Using the value status you can respond to this information without having to evaluate the diagnostics of the module in the first place. Analog value processing 46 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.15 Value status Example Enabling the value status of an analog input module To enable the value status of an analog input module, follow these steps: Select the required analog module in STEP 7. Select "AI configuration" in the "Properties" tab of the analog module. Click the "Value status" button. Figure 2-20 Enabling the value status in STEP 7 Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 47 What you should know about analog technology 2.15 Value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space of the respective module when you enable the value status. Each bit in this byte is assigned to a channel and provides information on, for example, whether the output value specified by the user program is actually queued at the module terminal (0= value is invalid; 1= value is valid). Error occurrence If a wire break occurs at an analog input module, for example, the current signal state is entered in the process image and the value status of the signal is set to "invalid". To trigger an indicator light in case of an error, for example, evaluate the value status in the user program. Diagnostics alarms and value status If you configure analog modules in a third-party product with the help of a GSD file and the diagnostics alarms are not evaluated event-driven, it is best to use the value status. Note The Value status represents a group diagnostics which only gives the user a Good or Bad information. The Value status is not suitable for a more specific identification of the cause of the error (e.g., wire break, short circuit in the encoder cable or load voltage failure). Analog value processing 48 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.16 Conversion time of an analog module 2.16 Conversion time of an analog module Basic conversion time and conversion time of an analog input channel The basic conversion time is the minimum time required by one single channel to convert analog values. The actual conversion time comprises both the basic conversion time and, depending on the analog input module used: Processing time for measuring resistance Processing time for wire break monitoring Processing time for overflow/underflow monitoring Processing time for checking common mode errors Example This example shows channel 6 of an analog input module for resistance measurement in the range of 6000 , a configured integration time of 20 ms, and activated wire break monitoring. The conversion time of the channel is derived from the total of the following measurement variables: Measurement variable Time in ms Basic conversion time 27 Processing time for RTD/resistance (6000 ) 4 Processing time for wire break monitoring in the RTD/resistance and thermocouple areas 9 Conversion time of the channel 40 Conversion time of the analog output channels The conversion time of an output channel starts with the transfer of the digital value from the internal memory of the module and ends with the digital-to-analog conversion. The conversion time does not include the settling time for the analog signal at the module terminal. Detailed information on the settling time can be found in Settling and response times of analog output modules (Page 52). Note Relationship between diagnostics and conversion time While some diagnostics run parallel to the conversion and do not extend the conversion time, other diagnostics types can lead to an extension of the conversion time, as demonstrated in the example above. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 49 What you should know about analog technology 2.16 Conversion time of an analog module Conversion time for high-speed analog modules High-Speed analog modules (HS modules) are designed for faster processing of signals. HS modules offer fewer diagnostics and measurement types than standard modules (ST modules). You can find more information on HS modules in the section High-Speed analog modules (Page 113). Analog value processing 50 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.17 Cycle time of an analog module 2.17 Cycle time of an analog module Definition The cycle time of an analog module represents the time that the module needs to process all channels used. The cycle time depends on the form of measured value acquisition used, e.g. multiplex or parallel measured value acquisition. Sequential measured value processing This procedure processes the analog channels in the module one after another (sequentially). For analog inputs, the values are connected to a converter, for example using a multiplexer, and sequentially converted. The cycle time of the analog module is derived from the total conversion time of all activated analog channels of the module. STEP 7 provides the option of deactivating unused analog channels. to reduce the cycle time. The figure below gives an overview of the factors that determine the cycle time of an nchannel analog module. Figure 2-21 Cycle time of an analog module with multiplex conversion Parallel measured value acquisition This procedure processes the analog channels of a module at the same time (in parallel) rather than one after another. In parallel measured value processing, the cycle time of the module is usually constant and does not depend on the number of channels used. The goal of parallel measured value acquisition as it is applied by high-speed analog modules, for example, is a shorter cycle time. You can find more information on HS modules in the section High-Speed analog modules (Page 113). Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 51 What you should know about analog technology 2.18 Settling and response times of analog output modules 2.18 Settling and response times of analog output modules Settling and response times provide information on the delay of the output of a specified analog output variable and its availability to the process. Response time The response time for a new output value is defined as the time between the input of a digital output value to the internal memory of the module and the value to be output at the analog output being reached (with a residual error of 1 %). The response time (tA) is the sum of application time (tX), conversion time (tW) and settling time (tE): tA = tX + tW + tE Settling and response times of analog output modules tA Response time tX Application time tZ Module cycle time tW Conversion time tE Settling time t1 New digital output value is available in the internal memory of the module t2 Module activates the digital output value and starts conversion t3 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal t4 Signal has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) Figure 2-22 Settling and response time of an output channel Analog value processing 52 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.18 Settling and response times of analog output modules Application time The CPU/IM (interface module) writes new output values to the internal memory of the analog output module. The time required for this is not determined by the CPU/IM. These output values are converted asynchronously to their entry in buffer memory. The worst-case application time (tX) may be equal to the cycle time (tZ). This situation develops if the CPU writes a new value to the internal memory of the module immediately after the transfer of the value for conversion. This new value will not be processed until the next conversion. The figure below shows acyclic access of the analog output module to output values from the internal memory in non-isochronous mode. You can find more information on isochronous mode in the paragraph on isochronous mode of the section High-Speed analog modules (Page 113). tX Application time t1 New digital output value is available in the internal memory of the module t2 Module activates the digital output value and starts conversion t3 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal Figure 2-23 Application of the output values Conversion time The conversion time of an output channel starts with the transfer of the digital value from the internal memory of the module (t2) and ends with the digital-to-analog conversion (t3). Settling time The settling time starts when the analog signal is output to the module (t3) terminals and ends when the output value (t4) is reached. The output value is reached as soon as the output signal has settled at its final value, taking into account a residual error of 1%. The settling time depends on the type of output for the module, and on the connected load. The load for the analog output consists of connecting line and connected actuator. When the output is "Current", the settling time increases with high ohmic resistance. Inductive loads cause subsequent fluctuation in the output value. When the output is "Voltage", the capacitive load causes subsequent fluctuation. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 53 What you should know about analog technology 2.19 Smoothing 2.19 Smoothing Using the smoothing functions Most analog input modules allow you to configure smoothing for the measuring signal in STEP 7. Smoothing analog values reduces the effect of interference signals. Smoothing is useful with slow changes in measured values, for example in temperature measurements. Smoothing principle The measured values are smoothed by means of filtering. The module forms mean values from a specified number of converted (digitalized) analog values. Smoothing should not be confused with the integration of measured values over a defined period of time. It is therefore not possible to smooth measured signals to filter out a specific interference frequency. However, this smoothing returns more "stable" data values because it suppresses peaks which overlay the measured signal. 4 (none, weak, medium, strong) or more levels of smoothing can be configured by the user depending on the module used. The level determines the number of analog values from which the mean value is generated. The greater the smoothing factor, the better the filtering. Figure 2-24 Selecting the smoothing level in STEP 7 Smoothing method A smoothing algorithm is applied to a configurable number of measured values (e.g. 4, 8, 32) in line with the moving average. Each new measured value is factored in, and the oldest measured value then ignored. This mechanism suppresses interference peaks which overlay the measured signal. Utility signal jumps only become evident in the data after some time (see examples below). The modules of the various product ranges use different smoothing algorithms. Smoothing is either linear or exponential. The differences are apparent particularly with strong smoothing and lead to a faster or slower rate of rise depending on the product used. For information on whether or not a specific module supports customization of the smoothing function, please refer to the manual of the analog input module. Analog value processing 54 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.19 Smoothing Example 1: Linear smoothing The diagram below shows the number of module cycles (k) it takes for each smoothing level setting for the smoothed analog value to reach approximately 100 % after a step response. This specification is valid for all signal changes at the analog input. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak smoothing (k = 4) Medium smoothing (k = 16) Strong smoothing (k = 32) Figure 2-25 Linear smoothing with four smoothing levels Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 55 What you should know about analog technology 2.19 Smoothing Example 2: Exponential smoothing The diagram below shows the step response of the smoothing factor for different numbers of module cycles. No smoothing (k = 1) Weak smoothing (k = 4) Medium smoothing (k = 16) Strong smoothing (k = 32) Figure 2-26 Exponential smoothing with four smoothing levels Analog value processing 56 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.20 Burden with 2-wire transducers 2.20 Burden with 2-wire transducers 2-wire transducers 2-wire transducers are current transducers which convert the process variable into a current signal of between 4 and 20 mA. Two connection lines supply the transducer with an output current of at least 4 mA. Additional information on connecting 2-wire transducers to analog input modules can be found in the section Wiring current transducers (Page 72). Burden The burden indicates how great the external resistance in a current loop may be. If the external resistance is greater than the specified burden, the 2-wire transducer supply voltage is too low. The burden consists of the resistance of the transducer and all other resistances connected to the current loop. The maximum admissible burden of the transducer, e.g. 820 , is specified in the technical data of the analog module. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 57 What you should know about analog technology 2.20 Burden with 2-wire transducers Example 1: Connecting a transducer to the electrical circuit In accordance with the technical data of the 2-wire transducer used, it requires a supply voltage (Umin) of at least 8.5 V. Using Ohm's Law, you can calculate the resistance of the transducer used (R2DMU) for a current of 20 mA. With a supply voltage of at least 8.5 V, the transducer has a resistance of 425 . The resistance is less than 820 . You can therefore connect the transducer to the analog input module (AI) without exceeding the maximum burden. 2-wire transducers UV Terminal for feed voltage at the channel I+ Terminal for current input Umin Voltage drop at 2-wire transducer Figure 2-27 Connecting a transducer to the electrical circuit Analog value processing 58 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC What you should know about analog technology 2.20 Burden with 2-wire transducers Example 2: Connecting a transducer and other devices If multiple measuring devices are connected in series, the sum of all connected resistances may not exceed the value of the maximum burden. If you have connected a 2-wire transducer to a supply voltage of 8.5 V, you will need to allow for the resistance of the measuring device connected . Maximum transducer burden: 820 Transducer resistance upon a voltage drop of 8.5 V: 425 Maximum resistance of additional devices connected: 395 The resistance of the measuring instrument may therefore not exceed 395 . 2-wire transducers UV Terminal for feed voltage at the channel I+ Terminal for current input Umin Voltage drop at 2-wire transducer Digital multimeter Zener diode RMess Resistance at measuring instrument UMess Voltage drop at the measuring instrument Figure 2-28 Connecting a transducer and other devices to the circuit Calculating admissible voltage drop The maximum additional resistance in the current loop may not exceed 395 at a maximum current of 20 mA. You can calculate the voltage drop at the connected measuring instrument (UMess) as follows using Ohm's Law: UMess = RMess * I = 395 * 0.020 A = 7.9 V The voltage drop at the measuring instrument should therefore not exceed 7.9 V. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 59 3 Representation of analog values 3.1 Overview Conversion of analog values The CPU only processes analog values in digitalized format. Analog input modules convert the analog signal into a digital value for further processing by the CPU. Analog output modules convert the digital output value from the CPU into an analog signal. Analog value representation at 16-bit resolution The digitized analog value is the same for all I/O values at the same rated range. The analog values are represented as fixed point numbers in twos complement. This leads to the following conditions: Table 3- 1 Representation of analog values Resolution Analog value Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Significance of the bits Sign The sign (S) of the analog value is always set in bit 15: "0" + "1" - Resolution less than 16 bits The analog value is left-aligned in the memory of analog modules with a resolution of less than 16 bits. The unused least significant digits are padded with "0" values. This reduces the number of measured values that can be represented. Modules occupy a range of values of between+32767 and -32768 regardless of the resolution. The scaling between two successive values depends on the resolution of the module. Analog value processing 60 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Representation of analog values 3.1 Overview Example The following example shows how the least significant digits are padded with "0" values: The module with 16-bit resolution is capable of incrementing the values in steps of one unit (20 = 1). The module with 13-bit resolution is capable of incrementing the values in steps of 8 units (23 = 8). Table 3- 2 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and 13-bit analog value Resolution Analog value Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16-bit S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 0 0 0 13-bit S = sign Note For information on the resolution supported by each analog module, please refer to the technical data for the relevant module. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 61 Representation of analog values 3.2 Representation of input ranges 3.2 Representation of input ranges The tables below set out the digitalized representation of the input ranges by bipolar and unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits. Please see the device manuals for each analog input module for assignment of the values to the specific measured values in each measuring range. Table 3- 3 Dec. value Bipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 3- 4 Dec. value Rated range Under range Underflow Unipolar input ranges Measured value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated range Under range Underflow Analog value processing 62 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Representation of analog values 3.3 Representation of output ranges 3.3 Representation of output ranges The tables below set out the digitalized representation of the output ranges by bipolar and unipolar range. The resolution is 16 bits. Please see the device manuals for each analog output module for assignment of the values to the specific output values in each measuring range. Table 3- 5 Dec. value Bipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value* 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated range Under range Minimum output value** * When values > 32511 are specified, the output value is limited to 117.589 % or 0 % (0.0 V / 0.0 mA), depending on the module used. ** When values < -32512 are specified, the output value is limited to -117.593 % or 0 % (0.0 V / 0.0 mA), depending on the module used. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 63 Representation of analog values 3.3 Representation of output ranges Table 3- 6 Dec. value Unipolar output ranges Output value in % Data word Range 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output value* 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated range Minimum output value** * When values > 32511 are specified, the output value is limited to 117.589 % or 0 % (0.0 V / 0.0 mA), depending on the module used. ** When values < 0 are specified, the output value is limited to 0% (0.0 V / 0.0 mA). Analog value processing 64 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Connecting transducers 4.1 4 Overview Introduction This chapter describes the basic procedure for wiring transducers to analog inputs. Information on specific wiring options is available in the manual of each module. For more information, e.g. on cable routing and shielding or potential equalization, etc., refer to the function manual for Configuring interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566). Transducers that can be wired to analog inputs You can wire the following transducers to the analog input modules, depending on the type of measurement: Voltage transducers Current transducers - 2-wire transducers - 4-wire transducers Resistance transducers - 4-wire connection - 3-wire connection - 2-wire connection Thermocouples Isolated transducers and non-isolated transducers Transducers are available in various models: Isolated transducers are not connected locally to the ground potential. Floating operation is possible. Non-isolated transducers are connected locally to the ground potential. Non-isolated transducer connections are connected to the conductive enclosure. Note: All non-isolated transducers must have a galvanic connection to each other and be locally connected to the ground potential. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 65 Connecting transducers 4.1 Overview Abbreviations used in the figures Key to the abbreviations in the figures below: AI Analog input module M Ground connection L+ Supply voltage connection Mn+/Mn- Measuring input, channel n ICn+/ICn- Current output to thermal resistor (RTD) channel n Un+/Un- Voltage input channel n In+/In- Current input channel n COMP+/COMP- Compensation input IComp+/IComp- Current output for compensation UV Feed voltage at channel (the connection can be used for 2-wire transducer (2DMU) or with ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro for 2/4-wire transducer). UCM Potential difference between the reference points of the measuring inputs / the analog ground MANA UISO Potential difference between the reference points of the measuring inputs and the central ground MANA Reference point of the analog ground Lines for analog signals Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire the analog signals. This improves immunity. Analog value processing 66 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Connecting transducers 4.2 Wiring analog inputs with MANA connection 4.2 Wiring analog inputs with MANA connection The reference potentials of the measuring inputs and the central ground are electrically isolated in analog input modules with MANA connection. Limited potential difference UISO (insulation voltage) Always verify that the admissible potential difference UISO between the reference point of the analog ground MANA and the central ground is not exceeded. Potential difference UISO may be caused by: Maximum line lengths exceeded. If you want to ensure that the permitted value UISO is not exceeded, install an equipotential bonding cable between the terminal MANA and the central grounding point. Limited potential difference UCM (common mode) Always verify that the admissible potential difference UCM between the reference point of the measuring inputs and the analog groundMANA is not exceeded. Potential differences UCM may be caused by: Environments with EMC disturbance Use of grounded transducers Use of long cable lengths Measuring errors / malfunctions can occur if the admissible potential difference UCM is exceeded. Some modules can detect an invalid potential difference UCM and report this error with an entry in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. If you want to ensure that the maximum value UCM is not exceeded, interconnect the reference points of the measuring inputs and the analog ground MANA with an equipotential bonding cable. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 67 Connecting transducers 4.2 Wiring analog inputs with MANA connection Equipotential bonding cable Grounding bus cable Central ground Figure 4-1 Example: Reference potential for analog input modules with MANA connection Analog value processing 68 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Connecting transducers 4.3 Wiring analog inputs without MANA connection 4.3 Wiring analog inputs without MANA connection The reference potentials of the measuring inputs and the central ground are electrically isolated from each other in analog input modules without an MANA connection. Limited potential difference UISO (insulation voltage) Always verify that the maximum potential difference UISO between the reference points of the measuring inputs and central ground is not exceeded. Potential difference UISO may be caused by: Maximum line lengths exceeded. If you want to ensure that the permitted value UISO is not exceeded, install an equipotential bonding cable between the reference points of the measuring inputs and the central grounding point. Limited potential difference UCM (common mode) Always ensure that the permitted potential difference UCM between the reference points of the measuring inputs is not exceeded. Potential differences UCM may be caused by: Environments with EMC disturbance Use of grounded transducers Use of long cable lengths Measuring errors / malfunctions can occur if the admissible potential difference UCM is exceeded. Some modules can detect an invalid potential difference UCM and report this error with an entry in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. If you want to ensure that the permitted value UCM is not exceeded, install equipotential bonding cables between the reference points of the measuring inputs or, with the ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro, between the reference points of the measuring inputs and ground. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 69 Connecting transducers 4.3 Wiring analog inputs without MANA connection Equipotential bonding cable (not for 2-wire and resistance transducers) Grounding bus cable Central ground Figure 4-2 Example: Reference potential for analog input modules without MANA connection Analog value processing 70 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Connecting transducers 4.4 Wiring voltage transducers 4.4 Wiring voltage transducers The figure below shows how to connect voltage transducers. If you want to ensure that the permitted value UCM is not exceeded, install equipotential bonding cables to connect the reference points of the measuring inputs to the analog ground MANA, or with ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro the reference points of the measuring inputs to the ground. Equipotential bonding cable (only relevant to modules with MANA connection) Figure 4-3 Example: Wiring voltage transducers to an analog input module Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 71 Connecting transducers 4.5 Wiring current transducers 4.5 Wiring current transducers Current transducers are available as 2-wire transducers and 4-wire transducers. Below are a number of ways to supply current transducers with voltage. Wiring 2-wire transducers with power supply from the module The 2-wire transducer converts the process variable into a current. The 2-wire transducer is wired to the short circuit-proof supply voltage at the terminals of the analog input module. The transducer is therefore frequently also called a "passive transducer". Its simple wiring means that the 2-wire transducer is frequently used in industrial environments. If you use this type of connection, you will need to set the "Current (2-wire transducer)" measurement type in STEP 7. Note 2-wire transducers must be electrically isolated. 2-wire transducers (2WT) Equipotential bonding cable (only relevant to modules with MANA connection) Figure 4-4 Example: Wiring 2-wire transducers to an analog input module Analog value processing 72 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Connecting transducers 4.5 Wiring current transducers Wiring 2-wire transducers to an analog input for 4-wire transducers The figure below shows an alternative to the above connection: supplying the 2-wire transducer from supply line L+ of the module. If you use this type of connection, you will need to set the "Current (4-wire transducer)" measurement type in STEP 7. In this type of connection, galvanic isolation between the supply voltage L+ and the analog circuit will be removed. 2-wire transducers (2WT) Equipotential bonding cable (only relevant to modules with MANA connection) Figure 4-5 Example: Wiring 2-wire transducers to an analog input for 4-wire transducers Wiring and connecting 4-wire transducers 4-wire transducers provide terminals for connecting a separate supply voltage. They are powered with an external supply and are frequently called "active transducers". If you use this type of connection, you will need to set the "Current (4-wire transducer)" measurement type in STEP 7. 4-wire transducers (4WT) Equipotential bonding cable (only relevant to modules with MANA connection) Figure 4-6 Example: Wiring 4-wire transducers to an analog input module Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 73 Connecting transducers 4.6 Wiring thermal resistors and resistors 4.6 Wiring thermal resistors and resistors The module provides a constant current at terminals IC+ and IC- for resistance measurements. The constant current is fed to the resistance to be measured where it is measured as voltage drop. It is important to wire the connected constant current cables directly to the thermal resistor/resistor. Measurements with 4-wire or 3-wire connection compensate for line resistance and therefore achieve greater accuracy compared to measurements with 2-wire connection. Measurements with two-wire connection always acquire line resistance in addition to the actual resistance; you must therefore allow for a significant loss of precision in the measuring results. The figures below give some connection examples. 4-wire connection of a thermal resistor The voltage at the thermal resistor is acquired using high-impedance measurement via the M0+ and M0- terminals. Make sure the wiring is correctly poled (IC0+ and M0+, and IC0- and M0- at the thermal resistor). Always wire the IC0+ and M0+ lines, and the IC0- and M0- lines directly to the thermal resistor. Figure 4-7 Example: 4-wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module Analog value processing 74 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Connecting transducers 4.6 Wiring thermal resistors and resistors 3-wire connection of a thermal resistor Depending on the module, for a 3-wire connection to modules with 4 terminals (per channel), you may need to insert a bridge between M0- and IC0- (see figure below) or between M0+ and IC0+. Always wire the IC0+ and M0+ lines directly to the thermal resistor. Use cable with wires with identical cross-section. For ET 200AL, ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro, no bridge is required as all necessary connections are implemented internally. Figure 4-8 Example: 3-wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module 2-wire connection of a thermal resistor When installing a 2-wire device on modules with 4 terminals (per channel), you will need to insert bridges at the module between M0+ and IC0+ and between M0- and IC0- as shown in the figure below. The line resistance is measured, but not compensated. As a result of physical limitations, this measurement type is less accurate than measurement with 3-wire or 4-wire connections. The wiring for this type of measurement is, however, simple as the bridges required can be wired in the plug, saving line. For ET 200AL, ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro, no bridge is required as all necessary connections are implemented internally. Figure 4-9 Example: 2-wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 75 Connecting transducers 4.7 Wiring thermocouples 4.7 Wiring thermocouples Introduction Thermocouples are generally supplied ready-to-use. Protective casing prevents the thermocouples from being destroyed by mechanical force, for example. Compensating lines The compensating lines belonging to the respective thermocouples are identified by a special color code, because only the compensating line that is made of the material matching the thermocouple may be used. The standardized compensating lines are specified in DIN EN 60584. Observe the maximum temperatures in the manufacturer's specifications. Thermocouple connection options There are various different ways to wire thermocouples to an analog input module: Directly . Using compensating lines . With a compensating line to the reference junction, connected with a supply line, e.g. copper . Thermocouple without compensating line Thermocouple with compensating line Thermocouple with compensating line and supply line Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) External reference junction Copper supply cable, for example Figure 4-10 Example: Wiring thermocouples to an analog input module Further information Further information, such as the selection of thermocouples and how they operate, can be found in the section Thermocouples (Page 77). Analog value processing 76 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.1 5 Selecting thermocouples Introduction Thermocouples are electrical devices for precise temperature measurement. They consist of two different metals connected at one point. Temperature affecting this point generates a voltage difference from which the temperature can be calculated. Thermocouples can measure a wide range of temperatures and come in extremely robust models. They are therefore frequently used in industrial applications. Below are some of the criteria to consider when selecting the right thermocouple: Temperature range Atmospheric conditions Price Grounded thermocouples In grounded thermocouples, a conductive thermocouple wire is attached to the inside of the sensor housing. This results in good heat transfer from the sensor housing to the thermocouple measuring tip. Non-grounded thermocouples In non-grounded thermocouples, the thermocouple is not connected to the sensor housing. The response time following temperature changes is longer than with grounded thermocouples. The measuring point is galvanically isolated. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 77 Thermocouples 5.1 Selecting thermocouples Type and temperature range The different thermocouple types are derived from different material compositions. Note Due to physical conditions, thermocouples are extremely inaccurate outside the specified temperature range. Only use thermocouple in the temperature range specified by the manufacturer. The following table lists the types and material compositions, as well as the temperature measuring range of different thermocouples: Type Material composition Temperature range B PtRh-PtRh 250 to 1820 C C W-Re 0 to 2315 C E NiCr-CuNi -270 to 1000 C J Fe-CuNi -210 to 1200 C K NiCr-Ni -270 to 1372 C L Fe-CuNi -200 to 900 C N NiCrSi-NiSi -270 to 1300 C R PtRh-Pt (Pt 13%) - 50 to 1769 C S PtRh-Pt (Pt 10%) -50 to 1769 C T Cu-CuNi -270 to 400 C U Cu-CuNi -200 to 600 C TXK/XKL NiCr-CuCr -200 to 800 C Analog value processing 78 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.2 Structure and operating principle of thermocouples 5.2 Structure and operating principle of thermocouples Thermocouple structure A thermocouple consists of a pair of thermal sensors and the respective installation and wiring elements. Two wires made of different metals/alloys are welded together at their ends (hot end). The welding point forms the so-called measuring point, while the free ends of the thermocouple form the reference junction. The free ends are interconnected with the evaluation device (e.g. analog input module) via insulated wires or cables. The different thermocouple types, e.g. K/J/N, are derived from different material composition; the same measuring principle is applied to all thermocouples, independent on their type. Thermal voltage acquisition point Copper supply cable, for example Reference junction Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Connection point Thermocouple with positive and negative thermal elements Measurement point Figure 5-1 Thermocouple Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 79 Thermocouples 5.2 Structure and operating principle of thermocouples Operating principle of thermocouples Temperature differences between the measuring point and the free ends of the pair of thermal sensors (connection point) generate a thermal voltage at the reference junction. The value of the thermal voltage is determined by the temperature difference between the measuring point and the free ends, as well as by the material composition of the pair of thermal sensors. Thermocouples always acquire a differential temperature, which means that the temperature at their free ends (reference junction) must be known to determine the temperature at the measuring point. The thermocouple can be extended with compensating lines from the connection point. This allows the reference junction to be located at a specific point, for example, where the temperature can be kept constant or the temperature sensor is easy to install. The compensating lines and thermocouple wires are made of the same material. Copper cables are used to connect the reference junction to the module. Note Always observe the polarity, as incorrect wiring will result in unacceptable measuring errors. Analog value processing 80 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.1 Overview Introduction You have several options for measuring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain a correct temperature value as a function of the temperature difference between the reference junction and the measuring point. You have various compensation options to suit requirements at the location of the reference junction. The compensation options supported by the analog module used are specified in the manual of the respective module. Options of compensating for the reference junction temperature Table 5- 1 Compensation options: Explanation and use case Compensation options Explanation Use case / special feature Internal reference junction Function principle * With this type of compensation, the temperature of the reference junction is measured using an integrated sensor in the analog module. For the connection, use compensating lines that match the thermocouple material. * If the reference junction temperature and the module temperature are identical in your system, you may also use lines made from a different material. * Advantages: Procedure Connect the thermocouple to the I/O module directly, or with compensating lines; see chapter Compensation with internal reference junction (Page 84). - Inexpensive - No external reference junction required - No additional wiring required Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 81 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Compensation options Explanation Use case / special feature Reference channel of the module Properties * With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is determined using an external thermal resistor (RTD). They acquire the temperature directly at the reference junction. * The measured temperatures of all channels that you have configured for this compensation type will be corrected automatically by the temperature value of the reference junction. * Advantages: Procedure Connect the thermocouple to the supply lines directly at the reference junction, or indirectly using compensating lines. Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module. Wire the thermal resistor (RTD) to the reference channel of the module. The thermal resistor (RTD) must be positioned in the area of the reference junction; see chapter Compensation with reference channel of the module (Page 86). Reference channel of group 0 - Properties * With the "TC" (thermocouple...) setting, the channel acts as receiver for the reference junction * temperature of group 0. The associated transmitter of group 0 is set up to for the RTD channel. Procedure Connect the thermocouple to the supply lines directly at the reference junction, or indirectly using compensating lines. Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module. More precise compared to compensation with internal reference junction; however, you need to install and wire an additional thermal resistor. They acquire the temperature directly at the reference junction. The measured temperatures of all channels that you have configured for this compensation type will be corrected automatically by the temperature value of the reference junction (transmitter). Wire the thermal resistor (RTD) to the configured reference channel for group 0 of the module. The thermal resistor (RTD) must be positioned in the area of the reference junction; see chapter Compensation, reference channel of Group 0 (Page 88). Fixed reference temperature Properties With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is stored in the module as fixed value. Procedure Connect the thermocouple to the supply lines directly at the reference junction, or indirectly using compensating lines. Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module. * You keep the reference junction temperature constant and know the temperature value. * To ensure high precision, you must ensure that the temperature remains constant (this can be complicated, depending on the application). Depending on the module, you can enter a fixed reference junction temperature in the configuration data (e.g. 20 C), or use the fixed reference junction temperature of the module (0 C); see chapter Compensation with fixed reference temperature (Page 91). Analog value processing 82 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Compensation options Explanation Use case / special feature Dynamic reference temperature Properties * You are using multiple modules at the reference junction and can therefore compensate for all channels using a common temperature value. * You only need a thermal resistor (RTD) or a thermocouple to measure the temperature value. * The temperature of the reference junction for this type of compensation is specified as 0 C. This can be achieved by using a compensating box. A separate compensating box is required for each thermocouple. With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is determined using a module. Transfer this temperature value to other modules in the user program by means of a data record. Procedure Wire the thermal resistor (RTD) for the reference junction to any channel. The reference junction temperature is transferred with a function block by means of data records from the CPU or IM to the module, see section Compensation by means of dynamic reference temperature (Page 94). No/external compensation Properties With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is measured outside the analog input module. You can, for example, connect a compensating box to the thermocouple for this purpose. Procedure Connect the compensating box with the * connection module of the analog input module with copper cables, see section "None" or external compensation (Page 98). RTD (0) Properties * This compensation is based on a measurement of the resistance value of a Pt1000 at the clamping unit of a compensation connector or of an external * resistance value Pt1000. Procedure Additional information about the connection options with and without compensation connector is available in the section Type of compensation RTD (0) (Page 100). Thermocouples of type B do not require a compensating box. The reference junction temperature is determined with resistance value of the Pt1000. All channels of the analog input module that you select for this type of compensation receive the same reference junction temperature. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 83 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.2 Compensation with internal reference junction Function principle The reference junction for compensation via internal reference junction is at the terminals of the analog input module. Wire the thermocouples or compensating lines directly to the module inputs. The internal temperature sensor acquires the module temperature and returns a compensating voltage. Note that compensation via internal reference junction will not always reach the precision of external compensation! Procedure Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel. 3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area. 5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type". 6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Internal reference junction". Figure 5-2 Internal reference junction Analog value processing 84 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Wiring thermocouples Wire the thermocouples directly or indirectly via compensating lines to the module inputs. Thermocouple without compensating line Thermocouple with compensating line Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Internal reference junction Figure 5-3 Example: Wiring thermocouples for compensation via internal reference junction Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 85 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.3 Compensation with reference channel of the module Function principle With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is determined using an external thermal resistor (RTD). Certain modules provide an internal reference channel. Procedure Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel. 3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area. 5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type". 6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Reference channel of the module"". Figure 5-4 Reference channel of the module Analog value processing 86 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Wiring thermocouples and thermal resistors Connect the thermocouple to the supply lines directly at the reference junction, or indirectly using compensating lines. Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module. You may use cables made of any material to wire the thermal resistor to the module terminals. Thermocouple Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Copper supply cable, for example Thermal resistor (RTD) Reference junction Figure 5-5 Example: Wiring thermocouples/thermal resistors for compensation by means of reference channel of the module Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 87 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.4 Compensation, reference channel of Group 0 Function principle For this compensation, a module channel with a connected thermal resistor (RTD) acts as "Reference temperature transmitter". Other channels (reference temperature receivers) with connected thermocouples can be compensated using this reference temperature. The measured temperatures of all channels (receivers) that you have configured for this compensation type will be compensated automatically by the temperature value of the reference junction (transmitter). The reference junction temperature is determined by means of an external thermal resistor (RTD). Procedure Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel. 3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the area "Inputs/measurement". 5. For the channel of the relevant module, specify as transmitter: As "Measurement type" select, for example, "Thermal resistor (4-wire connection)". As "Reference junction", select the value "Reference channel of group 0". Figure 5-6 Transmitter: Reference channel of group 0 Analog value processing 88 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 6. For the channels you specify as receivers: Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type". As "Reference junction", select the value "Reference channel of group 0". Figure 5-7 Receivers: Reference channel of group 0 Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 89 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Connecting thermocouples and thermal resistors The example below shows: An analog module with thermal resistor as reference temperature transmitter and Two analog modules with thermocouple as reference temperature receivers. Connect the thermocouples to the supply lines at the reference junction, either directly or with compensating lines. Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module. You may use cables made of any material to wire the thermal resistor to the module terminals. Thermocouple Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Copper supply cable, for example Thermal resistor (RTD) Reference junction Figure 5-8 Example: Connecting thermocouples/thermal resistors for group 0 compensation Analog value processing 90 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.5 Compensation with fixed reference temperature Function principle With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is stored in the module as fixed value. Procedure Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. Select the required analog module in the Device view. 3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area. 5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type". 6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Fixed reference temperature". 7. Specify the temperature of the reference junction in the "Fixed reference temperature" area, for example, 20 C. Figure 5-9 Fixed reference temperature Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 91 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Temperature condition with "Fixed reference temperature" setting The figure below shows the connection options for thermocouples provided the temperature of the module is kept at a fixed reference temperature (20 C), for example by installing it in an air-conditioned switch cabinet. The reference junction is in the module. Thermocouple without compensating line Thermocouple via compensating line Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Figure 5-10 Example 1: Connecting a thermocouple to an analog module for compensation with "fixed reference temperature" Analog value processing 92 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature The figure below shows the connection options for thermocouples provided the temperature of the reference junction (outside the module) is kept at a fixed reference temperature (20 C). Thermocouple with compensating line and supply line Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Reference junction Copper supply cable, for example Figure 5-11 Example 2: Connecting a thermocouple to an analog module for compensation with "fixed reference temperature" Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 93 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.6 Compensation by means of dynamic reference temperature Function principle This compensation type allows you to handle the reference junction temperature for temperature compensation in the user program. You can derive the temperature value from any other module of the station. The reference junction temperature is transferred via data records using the instruction WRREC (SFB 53). The structure of the data records is detailed in the device manual for each module. Requirement STEP 7 project with the following contents: User program with WRREC (SFB 53) instruction for transferring the data records with reference temperature Analog module for acquisition of the process temperature using thermocouple (TC) Analog module for measuring the process temperature using thermal resistor (RTD) Analog value processing 94 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Analog module for acquisition of the process temperature using thermocouple (TC) Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel. 3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area. 5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type". 6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Dynamic reference temperature". Figure 5-12 Dynamic reference temperature Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 95 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Analog module for measuring the process temperature using thermal resistor (RTD) Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel. 3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area. 5. Select the "Thermal resistor (4-wire connection)" value as "Measurement type". Figure 5-13 Settings for thermal resistor (RTD) type of measurement Analog value processing 96 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Connecting thermocouples and thermal resistors Connect the thermocouples, for example, to the module inputs using supply lines for temperature compensation with dynamic reference temperature. In this case, the temperature is acquired at the reference junction by means of a thermal resistor (RTD). This reference junction temperature determined in this way is transferred to the analog module with thermocouple via data records with the WRREC instruction. Thermocouple Compensating line (same material as thermocouple) Copper supply cable, for example Thermal resistor (RTD) Reference junction Figure 5-14 Example: Connecting thermocouples/thermal resistors for compensation by means of dynamic reference temperature Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 97 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.7 "None" or external compensation Function principle The reference junction temperature of the thermocouples is measured outside the analog input module, e.g., by means of a compensating box on the thermocouple. The temperature of the reference junction for this type of compensation is specified as 0 C. The compensating box includes a bridge circuit that is calibrated for a specific reference junction temperature (compensation temperature). The connectors for the ends of the compensating line of the thermocouple form the reference junction. If the actual comparison temperature deviates from the compensation temperature, the temperature-dependent bridge resistor changes. A positive or negative compensation voltage is generated and added to the thermal voltage. Note Thermocouples of type B do not require a compensating box. Procedure Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. Select the required analog module in the Device view. 3. Select the "Inputs" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module and the respective channel. 4. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type" in the "Measuring" area. 5. As "Reference junction", select the value "None" or "External compensation" depending on the used module. Figure 5-15 No reference junction Analog value processing 98 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Connection of the compensating box The compensating box is looped into the supply lines of an individual thermocouple. The compensating box must be supplied isolated. The power supply unit must have a sufficient noise filter, e.g., by means of a grounded shielding winding. Each channel can use its own thermocouple type supported by the analog module regardless of the other channels. A separate compensating box is required for each channel. Connection example "None" or external compensation Connect the compensating box with the connection module of the analog input module using copper cables. Copper cables Thermocouple Compensating box (per channel), for example; thermocouple type B does not require a compensating box Figure 5-16 Connection example "No" compensation as reference junction Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 99 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature 5.3.8 Compensation type RTD (0) Function principle The reference junction temperature is determined by means of the resistance value of a Pt 1000 at the clamping unit of the M12 compensation connector. The resistance measurement is only permitted at the X1 circular socket (channel 0). All of the module's channels with this type of compensation receive the same reference junction temperature. Procedure Configuration steps: 1. Open the project in STEP 7. 2. Select the required analog module in the Device view. 3. Select the "Inputs" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module. 4. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type" in the "Measuring" area. 5. As "Reference junction", select the value "RTD (0)". Figure 5-17 Compensation type RTD (0) Analog value processing 100 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature Connection example Connection with M12 compensation connector Connect the thermocouple to the M12 compensation connector directly or with compensating lines. Install the M12 compensation connector to the X1 circular socket (channel 0) of the CM IO 4 x M12 at the 4 AI TC High Feature. Connection without M12 compensation connector To measure the referent junction temperature, connect an external Pt1000 (with = 003851) to terminals 1 and 3 using copper cables. The thermal resistor Pt1000 must be positioned in the area of the reference junction. Connect the thermocouples to terminals 2 and 4 from the reference junction with copper cables. Connecting additional thermocouples You can connect additional thermocouples to the circular sockets X2 to X4 on the CM IO 4 x M12 of the 4 AI TC High Feature. The temperature of reference junction collected by measuring the resistance value at the X1 circular socket applies to all channels of the module that you have selected for this type of compensation. The figure below shows a connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction with M12 compensation connector and integrated thermal resistor Pt1000: Direct connection of the thermocouple or with compensating lines Thermocouple M12 compensation connector (terminals 1 and 3 with internal Pt1000) only at X1 circular socket. The comparison value of the M12 compensation connector at circular socket X1 also applies to thermocouples at X2, X3 and X4. Figure 5-18 Connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction in the M12 compensation connector Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 101 Thermocouples 5.3 Compensation for the reference junction temperature The figure below shows a connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction with external thermal resistor Pt1000: M12 connector only at X1 circular socket Thermocouple External Pt1000 ( = 0.003851) in the area of the reference junction with copper cables at terminals 1 and 3. The comparison value of the external Pt1000 at circular socket X1 also applies to thermocouples at X2, X3 and X4. Figure 5-19 Connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction with external Pt1000 Analog value processing 102 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Wiring loads/actuators 6.1 6 Overview Introduction This chapter describes the basic procedure for wiring loads/actuators to analog outputs. Information on specific wiring options is available in the manual of each module. For detailed information on cable routing and shielding, potential equalization, etc. please refer to the function manual Configuring interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566). Abbreviations used in the figures Key to the abbreviations in the figures below: AQ Analog output module M Ground connection L+ Supply voltage connection Sn+/Sn- Sense line channel n QVn+/QVn- Voltage output channel n QIn+/QIn- Current output channel n MANA Reference point of the analog ground UISO Insulation voltage Lines for analog signals Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire the analog signals. This improves immunity. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 103 Wiring loads/actuators 6.2 Wiring loads/actuators 6.2 Wiring loads/actuators Reference potential for analog output modules with MANA connection Analog output modules have no galvanic connection between the reference point of the analog ground MANA and the central ground. Always verify that the admissible potential difference UISO between the reference point of the analog ground MANA and the central ground is not exceeded. Potential difference UISO may be caused by: Maximum line lengths exceeded. If you want to ensure the maximum value UISO is not exceeded, wire terminal MANA and the central ground with an equipotential bonding cable. Load on the voltage output Equipotential bonding cable Grounding bus cable Central ground Figure 6-1 Example: Reference potential for an analog output module with MANA connection Analog value processing 104 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Wiring loads/actuators 6.2 Wiring loads/actuators Reference potential for analog output modules without MANA connection Analog output modules have no galvanic connection between the reference potential of the analog output circuits and central ground. Always verify that the maximum potential difference UISO between the reference points of the analog output circuits and the central ground is not exceeded. Potential difference UISO may be caused by: Maximum line lengths exceeded. If you want to ensure the maximum value UISO is not exceeded, interconnect each analog output circuit with the central ground using an equipotential bonding cable. Load on the voltage output Equipotential bonding cable Grounding bus cable Central ground Figure 6-2 Example: Reference potential for an analog output module without MANA connection Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 105 7 Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules 7.1.1 Overview Calibration A calibration checks the process values measured by the analog input module and the process values output by the analog output module, determines the deviation from the actual values and compensates for any measurement and output errors. Calibrating analog modules The SIMATIC analog modules were calibrated before being shipped and have excellent long-term stability; calibration is therefore not required during runtime. But certain regulations and directives, for example from the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), require regular calibration for all components in a measuring circuit. These components include analog input and output modules. A calibration makes sense especially for plants in which sensors detect and process relatively small voltages or currents. The calibration compensates for influences on the measuring result by cables and/or temperature. The calibration collects the new values and saves them retentively on the module. But the calibration values determined prior to delivery at the plant are not lost. You can return to these original calibration values at any time. Note The calibration saves the calibration values of each channel for the specific measuring range retentively on the module, which means the values apply to the same measuring range in which the user calibration took place. If you reconfigure a channel with effective user calibration values to another type of measuring mode, the calibration values saved at the plant for this channel and for this measuring range will become effective. But the user calibration values are not deleted. They are not overwritten until there is a new user calibration of the channel. If you set the original measuring range for this channel once again without new user calibration, the previously determined user calibration values will become effective. Analog value processing 106 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules The respective manual will include information whether or not your analog module supports the "Calibration" functionality. Scope of functions The "Calibration" group offers the following functions: Specifying the current calibration of all channels Calibrating a channel Canceling a running calibration Resetting the calibration of a channel to the factory settings 7.1.2 Calibrating analog modules Manual calibration The following requirements must be met to start manual calibration: An online connection exists between STEP 7, the respective CPU and the analog module to be calibrated. You have opened the "Online & Diagnostics" view for the selected analog module from the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the "Functions > Calibration" area. The configuration reflects the actual structure of the station. No calibration process is busy on the module (if you want to launch calibration). A 24 V load voltage must be present at each module for the calibration. The last step was successfully completed (if you want to continue or conclude calibration). Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 107 Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules Procedure The basic mask for calibration opens once you start the "Calibration" function. The module reads the following general information data and calibration values after each new selection of a channel: Calibration: Indicates whether or not the currently effective calibration values are factory calibration values or user calibration values. Measurement type: Information about the selected measurement type Measuring range: Currently configured measuring range of the selected channel Gain: Currently effective gain correction of the analog-digital converter Offset: Currently effective offset correction of the analog-digital converter Figure 7-1 Calibration table To start the calibration, follow these steps: 1. Select the line associated with the channel to be calibrated in the overview table. 2. Click the "Start manual calibration" button. 3. Now go through the steps in the "Manual calibration" section. 4. Follow the instructions in the "Command" field. 5. Click ""Next". Analog value processing 108 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules The required calibration values of the selected channel according to the measuring range configured for this channel are specified once again during the user calibration. Note The calibration can take place in RUN mode as well as STOP mode of the CPU. If the CPU is in RUN, the calibration value that was last collected prior to the start of the calibration is supplied for the duration of the calibration. The module channel to be calibrated cannot process any new process values during the user calibration. All analog input values of the module are set to 0x7FFF ("Invalid analog value") until the end of the calibration. When the value status is enabled, the value status of the signal is set to "invalid" for the duration of the calibration. You must provide a voltage and/or temperature during a user calibration. To do so, use the corresponding external wiring and an external voltage/temperature transducer. The field "Command" includes numbers of pins to which you can connect the calibration stimulus. The first pin number identifies the positive connector, the second pin number the negative connector. The accuracy of the calibration depends on the accuracy of the provided voltage/temperature. Note To ensure that the module retains the specified measuring accuracy after the user calibration, the provided voltage/temperature must be twice as accurate as specified for the module. Inaccurate voltages or temperature result in a faulty calibration. The figure below shows an example of channel calibration with "Voltage" measurement, measuring range "+/- 10 V". Figure 7-2 Manual calibration Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 109 Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules Command: The field "Command" indicates which actions the user has to execute during the current calibration step. Here you execute the specified actions and confirm them with the "Next" button. The module now executes all actions required for the current calibration step. If the calibration step was error-free, the next calibration step takes place. The instructions in the "Command" field are to be performed additively. For example, after you have applied the voltage/ground to the terminals 3/4, these connections must remain in place during the execution of the next calibration step. Status: Depending on the set type of measurement, several calibration steps are required for calibration of a channel. The field "Status" indicates whether or not the last calibration step included errors. If an error occurs during processing of a calibration step, the error is displayed here and calibration of the channel is aborted. All calibration values recorded up to this point are deleted. The calibration values that were in effect prior to the start of the user calibration are effective once again. Note Calibrators If the "Wire break" diagnostics is activated for analog input modules, a test current is applied to the line for the measuring types "Resistance", "Thermistor" and "Thermocouple". This applied test current can result in inaccurate measured values in some calibrators. The wire break monitoring is therefore automatically disabled in some analog modules during the calibration. To avoid the risk of inaccurate measured values, we recommend you disable the "Wire break" diagnostics during the calibration of analog input modules. Result Calibration sets new settings for the channel. Error occurrence If an error occurs during the calibration, the module cancels the calibration. All calibration values recorded up to this point are lost. The channel to be calibrated will then have the same settings as before the start of calibration. Analog value processing 110 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules 7.1.3 Canceling a calibration Requirement You have opened the "Online & Diagnostics" view for the selected analog module from the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the "Functions > Calibration" area. The associated CPU is online. A calibration is currently running on the analog module. Procedure Click the "Cancel" button to cancel an ongoing calibration. Result The active calibration is canceled. The channel to be calibrated will then have the same settings as before the start of calibration. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 111 Supported functions 7.1 Calibrating analog modules 7.1.4 Resetting analog modules to factory settings Requirement You have opened the "Online & Diagnostics" view for the selected analog module from the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the "Functions > Calibration" area. The associated CPU is online. Procedure Proceed as follows to reset the channel of an analog module to factory settings: 1. In the overview table, select the line of the channel to be calibrated. 2. Click the "Set to factory settings" button. Result The factory settings of the channel are restored. Note When you reset the current channel to the factory settings, the original calibration values that were saved in the delivery state of the module become effective once again. Any existing user calibration values of this channel are lost. You cannot restore these user calibration values. Analog value processing 112 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC High-speed analog modules 8.1 8 Basics High-Speed analog modules (HS) are available for users with high demands regarding performance and speed. The main characteristics of these HS analog modules compared to Standard analog modules (ST) is their shorter cycle times. To achieve this goal, the input and output modules are equipped with components with extremely short throughput and conversion times. In addition, the entire architecture of the modules is designed for faster signal processing. HS analog modules convert the output of measured values and output values at the same time. Each channel within the module has its own A/D or D/A converter. This means the cycle time is basically the conversion time and independent of the number of activated channels. This is true for analog input modules as well as analog output modules. This means HS modules can be used in fast isochronous mode. Apart from isochronous mode, the HS analog modules also provide benefits in nonisochronous (free-running) mode. Due to the fast processing of the process signals, HS analog modules are able to detect changes in the process values more quickly and to respond to these events with the appropriate program blocks (for example, hardware interrupt or cyclic interrupt organization blocks). Additional information on the various organizational blocks can be found in the STEP 7 online help. Isochronous mode Isochronous mode refers to synchronous coupling: Of signal acquisition and output via the distributed I/O Of signal transmission via PROFIBUS or PROFINET Of program processing with the constant bus cycle time of PROFIBUS or PROFINET. The result is a system that acquires its input signals in constant time intervals, processes them and outputs the output signals. Isochronous mode guarantees reproducible and defined process reaction times as well as equidistant and synchronous signal processing with distributed I/O. The bus system and the I/O modules work synchronously with configured isochronous mode. The transmitted input and output data are linked to an "isochronous task" in the CPU. As a result, the data of a cycle are always consistent. All data of a process image belong together logically and in time. Jitter in the user program caused by the acquisition of outdated values is therefore almost impossible. Even fast processes can be perfectly controlled by the exact timing reproducibility of all processes. Isochronous mode thus contributes to high control quality and hence to greater manufacturing precision. While possible fluctuations of the process reaction times are drastically reduced. The time-assured processing can be utilized to improve machine cycle times. Shorter cycle times increase the processing speed and help to lower production costs. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 113 High-speed analog modules 8.1 Basics Send clocks When you configure isochronous mode, the input and output data is synchronized within a send clock (cycle). The data of the input modules is acquired in cycle n and simultaneously transferred to the IM. The data is available in cycle n+1 in the CPU and can be processed. The CPU copies the data to the IM in the next cycle n+2. The output modules then output the data simultaneously in the same send clock. The acquisition - processing - output therefore takes place in three cycles. You can find more information on the configuration of isochronous mode in the STEP 7 online help. Measured values of the input modules are acquired and copied to the IM Measured values are processed and output values determined Output values are copied to the IM and output by output modules Figure 8-1 3-cycle model Oversampling The use of the oversampling function in analog input or analog output modules requires an isochronous configuration. With analog input modules, the set send clock is divided into time-equidistant sub-cycles. The send clocks can be subdivided into 2 to 16 sub-cycles. Each sub-cycle reads in a measured value. The read-in measured values of a data cycle are copied to the IM in the next send clock and are then available to the processing CPU one send clock later. With analog output modules, the set send clock is also divided into time-equidistant subcycles. The send clocks can be subdivided into 2 to 16 sub-cycles. Each sub-cycle returns an output value. The output values are copied to the IM by the CPU within the same send clock and are written to the process one send clock later. The read-in and output values are transmitted in the user data of the analog module. This way, the address space of the module is extended from 2 bytes of user data per channel to 16 x 2 bytes of user data per channel. If you subdivide the send clock into less than 16 subcycles, the unused addresses are assigned the error value 0x7FFF during input. For output, the values of the unused addresses are ignored. Analog value processing 114 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC High-speed analog modules 8.1 Basics Because the sub-cycles have to be within a send clock, oversampling needs an additional send clock to copy the data to the IM, unlike the 3-cycle model of isochronous mode. The result is a 5-cycle model. Send clock is divided into sub-cycles which record the measured value Measured values are copied to the IM Measured values are processed and output values determined Output values are copied by the CPU to the IM Output values are written to the process Figure 8-2 5-cycle model Due to the configured modules, the send clock of an IO device has a minimum possible update time, which means the time interval within which an IO device/IO controller of the PROFINET IO system is supplied with new data. Modules with oversampling functionality, however, offer the option of further reducing the update time for their channels without having to shorten the send clock for the entire S7 station at the same time. The subdivision of the send clock into time-equidistant sub-cycles therefore enables an even faster signal processing speed. Example In practice, the use of oversampling makes sense when the isochronous system works with only one specific specific send clock (for example, 1 ms) due to the modules used and when faster sampling of the process values is required. By using oversampling and a subdivision of the send clock into 4 sub-cycles, for example, you can sample the process values in intervals of 250 s. Configuring oversampling Enable the option "Isochronous mode" in the IO device used and set the corresponding parameters ("Send clock", etc.). You define the number of sub-cycles in the relevant distributed analog module with the "Sampling rate" parameter for analog input modules and the "Output rate" parameter for analog output modules. If, for example, you configure a "Sampling rate" of 4 "Values/cycle" for a "Send clock" of 1 ms, the send clock is subdivided into 4 sub-cycles and the process values are sampled in intervals of 250 s. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 115 High-speed analog modules 8.1 Basics Cycle time of an analog input module If you have configured the system property "Isochronous mode" for HS modules, all analog input modules are synchronized to a shared time within the send clock (cycle) . The cycle time is made up of the following time intervals: tZ = t1 + t2 + t3 + t4 Synchronization time for all analog input modules in isochronous mode and simultaneously time of the converted input signal at the terminal in this cycle Digitalized input signal is transferred to the backplane bus tZ Cycle time t1 Time between cycle start and synchronization t2 Hardware-related runtime up to the analog-digital converter t3 Processing time of digitalized input data in the module t4 Transfer time of the backplane bus tW Conversion time of the module Figure 8-3 Cycle time of the analog input module Analog value processing 116 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC High-speed analog modules 8.1 Basics Cycle time of an analog output module The synchronization time for analog output modules refers to the output of the digital-analog converter . Because the impedance of the connected actuator including connection cable is unknown in output modules but has a significant impact on the signal run time, the settling time cannot be added as a fixed value. The respective manuals of the output modules specify the typical load settling times as reference point. But in practice, a measurement with an oscilloscope is required for a precise measurement of the settling time. The settling time may exceed the actual end of the cycle due to very short cycle times and very high capacitive loads. The cycle time is made up of the following time intervals: tZ = t1 + t2 + t3 Output data is available in digital form in the module tZ Cycle time t1 Transfer time of the backplane bus t2 Processing time of data in the module until output at digital-analog converter t3 Settling time of hardware until setpoint of output value tW Conversion time of the module Synchronization time for all analog output modules in isochronous mode and simultaneously output time of data in the digital-analog converter Figure 8-4 Cycle time of the analog output module Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 117 High-speed analog modules 8.1 Basics Typical applications In principle, isochronous mode is worthwhile whenever measured values must be acquired synchronously, movements must be coordinated, and process reactions must be defined and executed at the same time. There are thus numerous areas in which isochronous mode can be used. Typical applications include, for example, the acquisition of binary signals for quality assurance at specific times and positions. But hydraulic applications with position and pressure control can benefit as well from the equidistant and isochronous data transmission. The following example shows the use of isochronous mode within the production process of camshafts. Precise measurements must be made at several measuring points for quality assurance. Measured values Camshaft Figure 8-5 Measuring of camshafts By using the system property "isochronous mode" and the associated simultaneous measured value acquisition, measurement can be performed continuously. The time required for measurement is reduced. Resultant workflow: Continuous machining of the camshaft During the continuous turning, measure the positions and cam excursion synchronously Process the next cam shaft All camshaft positions and the corresponding measured values are measured synchronously within a single rotation of the camshaft. This increases machine output and maintains or enhances precision of the measurement. Analog value processing 118 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC High-speed analog modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules This section gives you an overview of other important distinctions between standard and high-speed analog modules. The specified numerical values are examples of selected modules. Keep in mind that the information can vary from module to module. The exact information of specific used analog module is available in the corresponding manual. Conversion method Instantaneous value conversion Instantaneous value conversion if often used to convert analog signal into digital information in HS modules. In this type of conversion a very short sample is taken from the measured signal and converted into digital data. This digital information therefore represents an instantaneous value of the measured signal. Instantaneous value conversion is used to acquire fast changes of process values, such as in the area of motion control. The quickly changing physical quantities in this case must be acquired and processed quickly in cooperation with suitable transducers. Input areas are primarily voltage, current and resistance, the latter especially for position potentiometers. Because the measured signal is converted within a short time, there is a risk of incorrect measurements in case of faulty signals. The analog inputs working with the instantaneous value conversion method cannot detect if the sampled signal value is the target signal or an overlaying disturbing pulse. They always convert the "instantaneously" detected value. This means the pending measurement task should be carefully examined with regard to time constraints. Integrating conversion ST modules usually work according to the integrating conversion principle. The integrating conversion involves the sampling of a measured signal across a specified time period (integration time). Although this method is slower than instantaneous value conversion, it returns a conversion with higher immunity to interference. When you select the time interval for the conversion so that it corresponds to one or several periods of the surrounding network frequency, the omnipresent interference that is possibly also overlaying the signal is basically suppressed. SIMATIC modules give you the option to set the network frequency at which the plant is operated by means of parameter assignment. The resolution and conversion times may change depending on the interference frequency suppression that is set. The technical specifications of the respective module define these dependencies. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 119 High-speed analog modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules Analog inputs with integrating methods can be used universally. Even though the cabling must also be carefully designed with these analog inputs, the requirements are much less than those for analog inputs with instantaneous value conversion due to their slower signal acquisition that is basically immune to interference. Figure 8-6 While an interference directly influences the value that is supplied to the application with instantaneous value encryption, its influence is negligible for the integrating method. Analog value processing 120 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC High-speed analog modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules Electromagnetic compatibility The entire architecture of HS modules is designed for fast processing of the signals. An interference-free design is therefore critical when using HS modules. The following rules apply to the wiring of HS modules with sensors and actuators: Keep the cables as short as possible Use shielded and twisted pair cables Low-impedance connection of the cable shield at the respective shield supports Short cable loop between shield support and terminal connection Note Interference-free design Make sure that you pay close attention to the notes listed in the function manual Configuring interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) when using HS modules. Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 121 High-speed analog modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules Effect of load on the settling time The settling times to the setpoint achieved with analog output modules depend on the applied load, among other things. To take advantage of the faster conversion times, only small loads (e.g., max. 47 nF) are permitted in HS modules as specified in the technical specifications. The type of load has an effect on the form of settling to the setpoint when using output modules. Capacitive loads reduce the rise time due to the charging process and can cause the output signal to overshoot. Inductive loads result in a delayed current increase due to remagnetization and therefore also a shorter rise time. The figure below shows the output signal with no/small , medium and high capacitive load. Reference curve of a signal with no/small load capacity tE Settling time t1 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal t2 t3 t4 Signal with a load capacity of 47 nF Signal with a load capacity of 100 nF Signal has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) Signal has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) Signal has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) Figure 8-7 Effect of different loads on the settling time Analog value processing 122 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC High-speed analog modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules Effect of the cable length on the settling time Long cables between signal source and module are a target for interferences. You should therefore keep the cables as short as possible especially for HS modules. Cables have a capacitive and inductive component and therefore have an effect on the settling behavior of the signal. The example below shows the jump of the output voltage of an HS output module with small, medium and long cable length. The overshoot of the input signal increases with the length of the cable and therefore the time until it reaches the setpoint. tE Settling time t1 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal t2 The signal running through a cable with short length has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) t3 The signal running through a 20 m cable has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) t4 The signal running through a 200 m cable has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %) Figure 8-8 Effect of different cable lengths on the settling time Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 123 High-speed analog modules 8.2 ST modules vs HS modules Effect of the value jump on the settling time The figure below shows the effect of the height of the value jump between different output values on the settling time for analog output modules. The dotted line indicates the time when the signal has reached the setpoint. The higher the value jump, the later the signal reaches the setpoint. Figure 8-9 Settling time of five different analog signals with different value jumps Analog value processing 124 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Index A Abbreviations, 66, 103 Accuracy, 15 Actuators, 11, 103, 104 Additional support, 4 Analog input modules, 60, 65 Analog output modules, 60, 104 Analog value conversion, 60 Application time, 53 digital-to-analog, 21 Conversion analog-to-digital, 11 Digital-to-analog, 11 Conversion time, 27, 49, 53 coupling capacitive, 34 galvanic, 31 inductive, 31, 34 CPU, 11, 60, 67, 69 Crosstalk, 34 Crosstalk attenuation, 35 Current, 10 B Basic conversion time, 49 Basic error limit, 15, 24 Basic knowledge Required, 3 Bipolar measuring range, 25 Blocks SCALE, 17 UNSCALE, 19 Burden, 57 C Calibration, 106 Canceling, 111 Channels Calibrating, 108 Resetting to factory settings, 112 Common mode, 67, 69 Common mode rejection, 30, 33 Common mode voltage, 67 compensation Reference channel of group 0, 88 Compensation none/external, 98 Compensation with Dynamic reference temperature, 94 fixed reference temperature, 91 internal reference junction, 84 RDT (0), 100 Reference channel of the module, 86 conversion analog-to-digital, 21, 51 D Digital multimeter, 59 Direct voltage, 69 Documentation additional, 7 Drift, 26 Dynamic reference temperature Overview, 83 E EMC, 32 Error Linearity errors, 21 Output error, 25 Temperature error, 26 ET 200AL, 7 ET 200eco PN, 7 ET 200MP, 7 ET 200pro, 7 ET 200SP, 7 External compensation Overview, 83 F Factory settings Resetting channels to, 112 Fixed reference temperature Overview, 82 Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 125 Index G O Ground connection, 31 GSD file, 48 Online catalog, 4 Operating principle of thermocouples, 80 Operational limit, 15, 23 H High-speed analog modules Isochronous mode, 113 I Input impedance, 31 Insulation voltage, 67, 69 Interference frequency suppression, 27 Interference voltage, 31 Internal reference junction, 84 Overview, 81 Isochronous mode Oversampling, 114 L Line frequency 16 2/3 Hz, 28 400 Hz, 28 50 Hz, 28 60 Hz, 28 Linearity, 21 lines for analog signals, 66 Lines for analog signals, 103 Load, 53 Loads, 103, 104 M Material composition of thermocouples, 78 Measurement point, 79 Measuring ranges Overflow, 42 Overrange, 42 Rated range, 42 Underflow, 42 Underrange, 42 P Pressure, 9 PROFIBUS, 113 PROFINET, 113 Q Quality Information (QI), 46 R Reference channel of group 0 Overview, 82 Reference channel of the module Overview, 82 Reference junction, 79 Reference junction temperature, 81 Reference potential, 69, 104 Repeat accuracy, 22 Representation of analog values, 60 Binary representation, input ranges, 62, 63 Binary representation, output ranges, 63 Resistance, 10 Resistance thermometers see Thermal resistor, 74 Resistance transducers 4-wire connection, 74 Resolution, 13, 60 Response time, 52 RTD (0) Overview, 83 S S7-1500, 7 Scaling, 17 Scope of the documentation, 3 Sensors, Series mode rejection, 31, 33 Settling time, 53 Setup of thermocouples, 79 Analog value processing 126 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC Index Sign (S), 60 Signals Analog, 9 Binary, 9 Processing, 12 Smoothing exponential, 56 Linear, 55 Speed, 9 Standards EN 61131, 15 FDA, 106 Step 7, 4 Step response, 55 T Temperature, 9 Temperature measuring range of thermocouples, 78 Thermal resistor 2-wire connection, 75 3-wire connection, 75 Connecting, 74 Thermocouples Wiring, 76 TIA Portal, 4 Transducers, 72 2-wire, 57, 72 4-wire, 73 Connecting, 65 Current transducers, 10, 57, 72 Resistance transducers, 10 Thermal resistor, 74 Thermocouples, 10, 27, 76, 79 Voltage transducers, 10, 71 Wiring, 72 Types of diagnostics, 36 Common mode error, 43 No supply voltage, 41 Overflow/underflow, 42 Overload, 45 Reference channel error, 43 Reference junction, 44 Short-circuit, 44 Wire break, 41 V Value status, 46 Variables Analog, 9 physical, 10 variance measured value, 22 Voltage, 10 Voltage drop, 59 Voltage measuring ranges Overflow, 14 Overrange, 14 Rated range, 14 Underflow, 14 Underrange, 14 Voltage range, 27 W Wire break, 41 Z Zener diode, 59 U Unscaling, 19 Analog value processing Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461439-AC 127 Designing interference-free controllers ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC Basic information on 2 ___________________ electromagnetic compatibility Interference-free cable 3 ___________________ routing S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, 4 ___________________ Cable shielding ET 200AL Designing interference-free controllers 5 ___________________ Equipotential bonding Function Manual Special measures for 6 ___________________ interference-free operation Lightning protection and 7 ___________________ overvoltage protection 06/2014 A5E03461486-AB Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03461486-AB 07/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2013 - 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation will support you in installing and commissioning programmable controllers. Correct configuration is essential for fault-free operation of programmable controllers. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge of VDE (German Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies) and EC regulations Knowledge of the rules for installing controllers and switchgear Conventions You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below: Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Scope of the documentation This documentation is valid for all products of the product series SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL. The product series SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP are approved for IP20 degree of protection, i.e. the modules of these product series must be installed in a control cabinet. The SIMATIC ET 200AL product series is approved for IP65/IP67 degree of protection, i.e. the modules need not be installed in a control cabinet. Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 3 Preface Changes compared to previous version Changes / enhancements described in this manual, compared to the previous version (version 01/2013): Extension of the scope of validity to the distributed I/O system ET 200AL Supplement to the section Connection of the cable shielding for ET 200AL Components for lightning protection potential equalization amended Additional support Additional information on SIMATIC products is available on the Internet. The associated documentation is also available on the Internet. The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and automation systems can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-techdoku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). Designing interference-free controllers 4 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6 2 Basic information on electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................. 7 3 4 2.1 Overview of possible interference .................................................................................................. 7 2.2 Coupling mechanisms .................................................................................................................... 8 Interference-free cable routing ................................................................................................................ 9 3.1 Classifying cables into cable categories ........................................................................................ 9 3.2 Cable routing inside cabinets in buildings ....................................................................................11 3.3 Cable routing outside cabinets and inside buildings ....................................................................11 3.4 Cable routing outside buildings ....................................................................................................12 3.5 Underground cable routing ..........................................................................................................13 3.6 Bending radii and tensile strength of cables ................................................................................14 Cable shielding ..................................................................................................................................... 15 4.1 Connecting the cable shielding for S7-1500 and ET 200MP .......................................................17 4.2 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200SP .............................................................................19 4.3 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200AL..............................................................................20 4.4 Connecting the cable shield for bus cables .................................................................................21 4.5 Connecting the cable shield for other components......................................................................22 5 Equipotential bonding............................................................................................................................ 23 6 Special measures for interference-free operation .................................................................................. 25 7 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection ..................................................................................... 26 7.1 What is lightning and overvoltage protection? .............................................................................26 7.2 Lightning protection zone concept ...............................................................................................27 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones ...........................29 Index..................................................................................................................................................... 37 Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 5 1 Documentation guide Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers diverse topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the S7-1500, ET 200SP, ET 200MP and ET 200AL systems consists of the respective system manuals, function manuals and product manuals. The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you when configuring and programming your automation system. Overview of documentation on the subject of designing interference-free controllers The following table lists additional documentation which supplements this description of designing interference-free controllers. Table 1- 1 Documentation on the subject of designing interference-free controllers Topic Documentation Most important contents System description System manual S7-1500 Automation System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59191792) * Application planning * Installation * Wiring System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/58649293) * Commissioning System Manual ET 200MP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/59193214) System manual Distributed I/O System ET 200AL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi ew/en/89254965) SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Designing interference-free controllers 6 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Basic information on electromagnetic compatibility 2.1 2 Overview of possible interference Introduction SIMATIC products and their components have been developed for use in industrial environment and meet the legal EMC requirements (EMC - Electromagnetic Compatibility). However, you still need to conduct an EMC assessment before installing your controller in order to identify possible sources of interference and to include these in your considerations. Electromagnetic compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility describes the ability of an electrical device to function properly in its particular electromagnetic environment. Neither the environment itself nor the electrical device are influenced in an unacceptable manner. Possible interference Electromagnetic interference can influence an automation system in various ways. The most significant interferences and their causes are as follows: Electromagnetic fields having a direct influence on the system Interference coupling caused by bus signals (for example, PROFINET) Interference influencing the system via the process wiring Interference which reaches the system via the power supply and/or protective ground The figure below shows the likely paths of electromagnetic interference. Figure 2-1 Electromagnetic interference Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 7 Basic information on electromagnetic compatibility 2.2 Coupling mechanisms 2.2 Coupling mechanisms Depending on the emitting medium and the distance between the source of interference and the device, interference can reach the automation system via four different coupling mechanisms. The following table shows possible causes and typical sources of interference for the various coupling mechanisms: Table 2- 1 Coupling mechanisms Coupling mechanism Cause Typical sources of interference Galvanic coupling Two electric circuits share the same cable * Clocked devices (influence on the network due to converters and thirdparty power supply units) * Starting motors * Potential differences on component enclosures with shared power supply * Interference coupling due to parallel routing of signal cables * Static discharge of the operator * Transformers, motors, electrical welding equipment * Power supply cables routed in parallel * Cables whose currents are switched * High-frequency signal cables * Unwired coils * Neighboring transmitters (for example, walkie-talkies) * Spark gaps (spark plugs, collectors of electrical motors, welding devices) Capacitive coupling Inductive coupling Radiation coupling Potential difference between conductors Mutual influencing of current-carrying conductor loops. The magnetic fields caused by the current flow induce interference voltages. Effect of an electromagnetic wave on a cable configuration. This wave induces currents and voltages. Designing interference-free controllers 8 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Interference-free cable routing 3 This chapter describes the EMC-compatible classification of cables and cable routing for bus, data, signal and supply lines. 3.1 Classifying cables into cable categories Classify the cables into cable categories according to their sensitivity to interference coupling and interference emission. The further away from one another cables of different cable categories are installed, the lower the mutual influence by capacitive and inductive coupling. The following table shows the cable categories into which you can classify your cables accordingly. Table 3- 1 Category A Category B Category C Cable categories * Signal lines to I/O modules * Bus and data lines (for example, PROFIBUS, PROFINET) * Lines to HMI devices * Supply lines for extra-low voltages (< 24V DC or < 60V AC) * Supply lines with safe electrical isolation (SELV) * Supply voltages < 400 V * Supply voltages > 400 V Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 9 Interference-free cable routing 3.1 Classifying cables into cable categories The following table shows the minimum clearance you must maintain when installing cables. Table 3- 2 Combination of cable categories Category A Category A * In common bundles or cable channels Category B * Category C In separate bundles or cable channels (no minimum clearance necessary) Category B * In separate bundles or cable channels (no minimum clearance necessary) Category C * Inside cabinets in separate bundles or cable channels * Outside cabinets, but inside buildings, on separate cable racks with at least 10 cm clearance * * Inside cabinets in separate bundles or cable channels * Outside cabinets, but inside buildings, on separate cable racks with at least 10 cm clearance * In common bundles or cable channels In common bundles or cable channels If you install different cable categories in the same cable channel, use metallic cable channels with metallic partition. The following figure show a schematic view of a cable channel with partition. Metallic cable channel Metallic partition Figure 3-1 Cable channel with partition Designing interference-free controllers 10 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Interference-free cable routing 3.2 Cable routing inside cabinets in buildings 3.2 Cable routing inside cabinets in buildings Rule Observe the following rules for proper cable routing inside of control cabinets: If a crossing of cables is unavoidable, then cross the cables at an angle of 90, if possible, in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible. Do not route cables coming into the cabinet from outside parallel to the shield supports. 3.3 Cable routing outside cabinets and inside buildings Rule Observe the following rules for proper cable routing outside control cabinets and inside buildings: Read the information in section Assigning cables to cable categories (Page 9). If you route the cables in metallic cable channels, you can rearrange the cable channels next to each other. Connect metallically conductive cable racks to the potential equalization of the building. If a crossing of cables is unavoidable, then cross the cables at an angle of 90, if possible, in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible. Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 11 Interference-free cable routing 3.4 Cable routing outside buildings 3.4 Cable routing outside buildings If possible, lay the cables outside buildings on metallic cable holders. Connect the cable holder joints galvanically to each other and ground the cable holders. Rule Observe the following rules when laying cables outside of buildings: Use metallic auxiliary terminal boxes to connect cables coming from outside at the junction to cables inside the building. Ground these boxes. If a crossing of cables is unavoidable, then cross the cables at an angle of 90, if possible, in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible. Integrate bus cables installed outside of buildings into your lightning and overvoltage concept. Lightning protection When you lay cables for SIMATIC devices outside of buildings, you have to take internal and external lightning protection measures. Reference For additional information about lightning protection, refer to chapter Lightning protection and overvoltage protection (Page 26). Designing interference-free controllers 12 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Interference-free cable routing 3.5 Underground cable routing 3.5 Underground cable routing Rule Observe the following rules for underground cable routing: Lay the cable at least 60 cm below the ground surface. Install equipotential bonding approximately 20 cm above the cable. You can use a zincplated ground strip, for example. The ground strips also serve as protection against lightning strikes. Protect the cable against mechanical damage by, for example, using a plastic pipe and/or a cable warning tape in the ground, approximately 40 cm above the cable. Separate the various cable categories in the ground using cable channels, for example. The following figure shows the arrangement of cable warning tape, equipotential bonding and a cable. Figure 3-2 Arrangement underground Lightning protection When you lay cables for SIMATIC devices outside of buildings, you have to take internal and external lightning protection measures. Reference For additional information about lightning protection, refer to chapter Lightning protection and overvoltage protection (Page 26). Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 13 Interference-free cable routing 3.6 Bending radii and tensile strength of cables 3.6 Bending radii and tensile strength of cables Tensile strain A high strain on the cables due to tensile forces leads to conductor material flow. The tensile forces thus cause a change in the structure of the material and lower the conductor crosssection. This decrease of the conductor cross-section leads, in turn, to a heating of the conductor and premature wear of the conductor insulation. Use the supplied cable ties to relieve the terminal points on the plugs for the I/O modules of the product series SIMATIC S7-1500 and SIMATIC ET 200MP. Bending radius If you select too small bending radii when laying cables, this will cause the materials to stretch and compress and changes the mechanical structure of the cables. The electrical properties are impaired as a result. Pay particular attention to the bending radii of fiber-optic cables. If the bending radii are too small, the optical properties of the fiber-optic cable are adversely affected. Reliable transmission is no longer guaranteed. Designing interference-free controllers 14 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Cable shielding 4 Shielding is a measure to attenuate (dampen) magnetic, electrical or electromagnetic interference fields. Interference currents on cable shields are diverted from the shield connection to ground. To avoid interference as a result of these currents, it is imperative to provide a low-impedance connection to the protective conductor. Rules Ideally, you should use cables equipped with a protective braided shield. The shield's contacting must be more than 80% at the contact point. Avoid tensile and compression strain on cables with a foil shield. This type of strain can damage the foil shield very slightly at the fastening point. The result is a reduced shielding effect. Shield connection with grounding at both ends Always connect the cable shields to the ground at both ends. Low and high frequency interference can be reduced only by connecting both ends of the shield to the ground. Note Laying an additional equipotential bonding cable Whenever potential differences develop between the grounding points, an equalizing current flows on a shielding that is connected at both ends. In this case, lay an additional equipotential bonding cable. You can find more information on this topic in the chapter Equipotential bonding (Page 23). Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 15 Cable shielding Shield connection with capacitive grounding at one end If you do not have the option of installing equipotential bonding (in plants covering a large area, for example), connect capacitive grounding to one end of your shield. In this case, only high-frequency interference will be reduced. The following figure shows the capacitive grounding of a cable shield. The values indicated in the figure are indicative and will differ from system to system. The capacity diverts the high-frequency interference. This capacity provides high-impedance protection for the power frequency (50 or 60 Hz), thus preventing equalizing currents via the shield. A parallel switched high-impedance resistance prevents the capacity from loading a direct current. Figure 4-1 Capacitive grounding of the shield Designing interference-free controllers 16 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Cable shielding 4.1 Connecting the cable shielding for S7-1500 and ET 200MP 4.1 Connecting the cable shielding for S7-1500 and ET 200MP A special shield design has been developed for the automation system S7-1500 and the distributed I/O system ET 200MP for the shield connection of the signal lines. The connection element for the cable shield consists of a shield clamp and a shield terminal. If the front connector is located in the module, the interference currents which occur are diverted by the connection element to the ground via the module and mounting rail. The shield clamp is a pluggable mount for the analog and technology modules. The shield clamp allows the low-impedance application of cable shields with minimum installation times. The following figure shows a front connector with mounted shield clamp and associated shield terminal. Shield clamp Stripped cable shield Shield terminal Figure 4-2 Shield clamp and shield terminal on front connector The shield clamp is inserted from below onto the front connector until the shield clamp latches audibly. The shield terminal is fastened to the shield clamp. Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 17 Cable shielding 4.1 Connecting the cable shielding for S7-1500 and ET 200MP Additional information For additional information on installing the shield clamp and shield terminal, refer to the "Connecting front connectors" chapter in the S7-1500 automation system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) or ET 200MP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193214) system manuals. Designing interference-free controllers 18 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Cable shielding 4.2 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200SP 4.2 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200SP A special shield design has been developed for the shield connection of the signal lines of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The connection element for the cable shield consists of a shield terminal. If the front connector is located in the module, the interference currents that occur are diverted by the connection element via BaseUnit and mounting rail to the ground. The shield terminal is plugged into a mount of the BaseUnit. The shield terminal allows the low-impedance application of cable shields with minimum installation times. There is no need for the otherwise standard connection of the cable shield at the cabinet entry. The following figure shows a BaseUnit with shield terminal and shield support. BaseUnit of ET 200SP Shield terminal Shield support with flat plug for terminal sockets Figure 4-3 BaseUnit with shield terminal Additional information For more information on mounting the shield terminal, refer to the "Connecting cable shields" chapter of the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 19 Cable shielding 4.3 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200AL 4.3 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200AL Each module of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system features a functional ground connection. Use only shielded cables for connection of analog signals, PROFINET and PROFIBUS signals and for the ET-Connection. If you have screwed the plug in correctly, the interference currents that occur are diverted to the metal parts and functional ground. If you attach an ET 200AL module to a conductive, grounded base, the lower mounting bolt establishes a conductive connection to the earth potential. If you attach an ET 200AL module to a non-conductive base, connect the lower mounting bolt to the ground wire at the same time. The following figure shows how to connect the functional ground via a ground wire, using the IM 157-1 PN interface module as an example. Figure 4-4 Connect functional ground via a ground wire Additional information You can find more information on installing ET 200AL modules in the Installing Modules section of the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200AL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965). Designing interference-free controllers 20 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Cable shielding 4.4 Connecting the cable shield for bus cables 4.4 Connecting the cable shield for bus cables In the S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP systems, the cable shields of PROFIBUS and PROFINET cables are connected to the existing bus connection elements. Cable shield and shield support are thus galvanically connected to each other. If the connector is plugged into the module, the coupled interferences are diverted via the module carrier to the ground. There is no need for the otherwise standard connection of the shield at the cabinet entry. The following figure shows examples of the shield connection for various bus connection elements. BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 for ET 200SP PROFIBUSconnector, 9-pin D-Sub PROFINETconnector RJ45 Shield support of respective connector Figure 4-5 Shield connection for bus connection elements Reference For more information on installing the connectors, refer to the "Connecting PROFINET IO BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 to the interface module" chapter of the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and to the supplied product information. Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 21 Cable shielding 4.5 Connecting the cable shield for other components 4.5 Connecting the cable shield for other components The following procedures for connecting the shield to devices that do not have any special shield terminals have proven themselves in practice. Rule Note the following points when handling the shield: Always use metal clamps to mount the protective braided shields of the cables. The clamps must cover a large area of the shield and provide appropriate contact force. Attach the shield to a shielding bus directly after the point where the cable enters the cabinet. If you route the shield further to the module, do not connect the shield again in front of the module, as this would create ground loops. The following figure shows standard types of shield fastening. Figure 4-6 Cable shielding Designing interference-free controllers 22 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Equipotential bonding 5 Definition according to DIN VDE 0100 Equipotential bonding is an electrical connection which brings the bodies of electrical equipment and external conductive parts to the same, or nearly the same, potential. Equipotential bonding is divided into: Main equipotential bonding Additional local equipotential bonding Both versions of equipotential bonding are of great importance not only for protection against electric shock, but also for EMC. Main equipotential bonding Main equipotential bonding is required by DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 as a protective measure and is mandatory, regardless of other measures for protection against direct and indirect contact. Additional local equipotential bonding Additional local equipotential bonding is required if: Unfavorable grounding conditions exist between plant parts due to different conductivity of the soil (for example, sandy or stony ground) Cables bridge a large distance Electrical energy is fed in from various power supplies (for example, in the case of multiple substations) Considerable electrical power is used (for example, welding robots, large drives) Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 23 Equipotential bonding Measures In such cases, an additional equipotential bonding cable between the individual potentials can solve the problem. The equipotential bonding cable must also be able to divert large currents and carry lightning stroke current. The following equipotential bonding systems have proven themselves in practice: 16 mm2 for copper equipotential bonding cables up to 200 m long 25 mm2 for copper equipotential bonding cables over 200 m long To prevent ground loops, equipotential bonding cables are installed in parallel and, whenever possible, near to the signal/bus cable. This allows the area between the two cables to be kept as small as possible. The following figure shows a schematic view of the installation of an equipotential bonding cable. Figure 5-1 Installation of equipotential bonding cables Rule Note the following issues regarding equipotential bonding: The lower the impedance of an equipotential bonding cable, the more effective is equipotential bonding. The impedance of the additionally installed equipotential bonding cable should not exceed 10% of the shield impedance. Connect the equipotential bonding cables to a large area of the grounding system. Protect the connection points against corrosion. Avoid ground loops. Install the equipotential bonding cables in such a way as to minimize the areas enclosed between the equipotential bonding cables and signal lines. Designing interference-free controllers 24 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Special measures for interference-free operation 6 Connecting inductances to quenching elements Ideally, the inductances (for example, contactor or relay coils) controlled by SIMATIC do not require any wiring to external quenching elements. The required quenching elements are already integrated into the modules. If the SIMATIC output circuit can also be switched off by built-in contacts (such as relay contacts for EMERGENCY OFF), the module's integrated quenching elements are no longer effective. In this case, the inductances must be wired to quenching elements. Wire inductances to freewheeling diodes, varistors or RC elements, for example. Table 6- 1 Wiring inductances Wiring DC-operated inductances Wiring AC-operated inductances Programming devices Provide a socket in each cabinet for the supply of the programming devices. The sockets are supplied from the distribution board to which the protective conductor for the cabinet is also connected. Observe the following points during the installation of the socket in the control cabinet: Include the grounding of the socket in your consideration of the equipotential bonding. The common star point of the two ground potentials (cabinet and socket) must be close to the two end points. An equipotential bonding cable is not permitted as communication cable between programming device and controller. Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 25 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.1 7 What is lightning and overvoltage protection? Introduction The term "Lightning and overvoltage protection" covers both the concept and system for the protection of structural systems (such as buildings or electrical equipment). This concept also includes the protection of people and animals. Overvoltages are most frequently caused by lightning strikes. Lightning protection system The lightning protection system is the complete system used to reduce physical damage to a structural system as a result of direct lightning strikes and overvoltages. The lightning protection system is divided into external and internal lightning protection. External lightning protection External lightning protection is part of the lightning protection system and comprises an interception device, an arrester and a grounding system. In the event of a lightning strike, the external lightning protection serves to divert the lightning current safely to the ground. This measure most frequently prevents fire damage. Internal lightning protection Internal lightning protection is part of the lightning protection system and comprises lightning protection equipotential bonding and/or electrical isolation with respect to the external lightning protection. In the event of a lightning strike, the internal lightning protection reduces the damage caused by overvoltages resulting from the lightning. Even at larger distances of up to 1.5 km, lightning strikes can sometimes still cause damage. You obtain effective lightning protection by expanding the external lightning protection into an overall protection system. This system includes equipotential bonding and surge protection devices. Designing interference-free controllers 26 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.2 Lightning protection zone concept 7.2 Lightning protection zone concept Introduction Each building requires a coordinated protection zone concept. The grading of the protection is of key importance for this. Sufficient protection can only be guaranteed if this grading requirement is satisfied. The lightning protection zone concept described in the standards IEC 62305-4 and DIN EN 62305-4 is used for this purpose. The lightning protection zone concept groups devices and areas that have the same risk potential and can be wired to arresters of the same type. Use overvoltage protection devices at the transitions of the lightning protection zones based on the requirements. Install the overvoltage protection devices at an appropriate location such as the main or sub-distribution board. Principle of the lightning protection zone concept The principle behind the lightning protection zone concept is the division of the areas to be protected from overvoltages, for example buildings, into lightning protection zones based on EMC considerations. Schematic diagram of the lightning protection zone concept The following is a schematic diagram of the lightning protection zone concept in a physical structure. Figure 7-1 Division of a structural system into lightning protection zones Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 27 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.2 Lightning protection zone concept Division of lightning protection zones The various lightning protection zones (LPZ - Lightning Protection Zone) are limited spatially as follows and not necessarily by physical boundaries, such as walls or floors. The following table explains the division into various lightning protection zones. Table 7- 1 External and internal lightning protection zones Lightning protection zones External lightning protection zones: LPZ 0A LPZ 0B * Risk from direct lightning strikes * Risk from the full electromagnetic field of the lightning * Protected against direct lightning strike * Risk from the full electromagnetic field of the lightning Internal lightning protection zones: LPZ 1 LPZ 2 LPZ 3 * Protected against direct lightning strike * Attenuated electromagnetic field of the lightning * Protected against direct lightning strike * Reduced leakage currents and electromagnetic fields compared to LPZ 1 * Protected terminal devices * Protected against direct lightning strike * Protected area inside the terminal device * Local equipotential bonding Effects of the lightning strike Direct lightning strikes occur in the lightning protection zone LPZ 0A. Effects of the lightning strike are high-energy lightning currents and strong electromagnetic fields. These effects are reduced from one lightning protection zone to the next through suitable lightning current or overvoltage arrester/shielding measures. Frequent damage caused by lightning strikes includes: Injury to people and animals, which may in worst cases lead to death Damage to buildings Fire caused by strong heat development of a lightning strike Overvoltages Electromagnetic fields of the lightning channel can be reduced with appropriate shielding measures. Overvoltages due to inductions can be reduced to a safe level starting in lightning protection zone LPZ 0B with overvoltage arresters. Designing interference-free controllers 28 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Introduction This chapter provides you with information on the rules for transitions between lightning protection zones. Measures must be taken to reduce the surge current load and the magnetic fields at the transitions between the lightning protection zones. Each zone-penetrating metallic/electrical system is incorporated into the equipotential bonding at the zone transition. The metallic systems include channels, structural parts, and pipes (for water, gas, and heat, for example). Electrical systems include power and IT cables and wires (for example, power cables and bus cables). Transitions between lightning protection zones Overvoltage protection must be provided at the transitions between lightning protection zones (LPZ - Lightning Protection Zone) in accordance with DIN EN 62305. The protection levels are defined at the transitions and implemented by means of overvoltage protection devices (SPD - Surge Protective Device). SPD Type 1 - Coarse protection for the transition from LPZ 0 to LPZ 1 SPD Type 2 - Medium protection for the transition from LPZ 1 to LPZ 2 SPD Type 3 - Fine protection for the transition from LPZ 2 to LPZ 3 The following figure illustrates the lightning protection zones and the type classes from the supply line to the consumer. Figure 7-2 Lightning protection zone transitions Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 29 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Rule for transition from lightning protection zone 0A to 1 Lightning protection equipotential bonding is required at the transition from lightning protection zone 0A to 1. The following applies to the transition at the interface of lightning protection zone 0A to 1: Use of lightning arresters prevents introduction of partial lightning currents into structural systems Creation of local equipotential bonding at the transition of lightning protection zones, with incorporation of metallic supply systems (for example, pipes, air ducts, cable channels or cable ducts) Components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 0A to 1 The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 0A to 1. Table 7- 2 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 0A to 1 Seq. no. Cables for ... 1 Connection at the 0A interface to 1 with: S7-1500/ET 200MP/ET 200SP/ET 200AL Article number Three-phase TN-C system DEHNventil(R) DV M TNC 255 951 300 DEHNventil(R) DV M TNC 255 FM * 951 305 * Three-phase TN-S system DEHNventil(R) DV M TNS 255 951 400 DEHNventil(R) DV M TNS 255 FM * 951 405 * 3 Three-phase TT system DEHNventil(R) DV M TT 255 951 310 DEHNventil(R) DV M TT 255 FM * 951 315 * 4 AC TN-S system DEHNventil(R) DV M TN 255 951 200 DEHNventil(R) DV M TN 255 FM * 951 205 * 5 AC TT system DEHNventil(R) DV M TT 2P 255 951 110 DEHNventil(R) DV M TT 2P 255 FM * 951 115 * Supply UN = 24 V DC BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML2 B 180 (IL = 1.2 A) (2-wire) 920 211 Supply UN = 24 V DC DEHNbloc(R) M, DB M 1 150 961 110 DEHNbloc(R) M, DB M 1 150 FM * (2 pieces required) 961 115 * Bus cable MPI RS 485, RS 232 (V.24) BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML2 B 180 (2-wire) 920 211 Inputs/outputs of digital modules UN = 24 V DC BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML4 B 180 (IL = 1.2 A) (4-wire) 920 310 Inputs/outputs of digital modules UN = 230 V AC DEHNbloc(R) M, DB M 1 255 961 120 DEHNbloc(R) M, DB M 1 255 * (2 pieces required) 961 125 * 2 6 7 8 9 10 Designing interference-free controllers 30 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Seq. no. Cables for ... 11 Inputs/outputs of analog modules (e.g., 4-20 mA, 1-10 V) Connection at the 0A interface to 1 with: S7-1500/ET 200MP/ET 200SP/ET 200AL Article number BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module (IL = 1.2 A) (4-wire) 920 310 * Version with remote indication contact Components of the series BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT can be remotely monitored with the appropriate accessories. Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.dehn.de) Components can be ordered directly from: DEHN+SOHNE GMBH+CO.KG. Hans-Dehn-Strae 1 D-92318 Neumarkt Rule for the transition from lightning protection zone 0B to 1, 1 to 2, or 2 to 3 The transition from lightning protection zone 0B to 1, 1 to 2, or 2 to 3 prevents strong electromagnetic coupling and serves as overvoltage protection. The following applies to the transition at the interface from lightning protection zone 0B to 1, 1 to 2, or 2 to 3: Use of power cables with surge current-carrying cable shields or twisted-pair IT cables Laying cables and lines - In continuous, surge current-carrying metal pipes that are grounded at both ends - In reinforced concrete channels capable of carrying surge current with grounding at both ends - On closed metal cable racks that are grounded at the beginning and end Use of fiber-optic cables without a metal shield if such a transmission is intended Creation of local equipotential bonding at the transition of lightning protection zones, with incorporation of metallic supply systems (for example, pipes, air ducts, cable channels or cable ducts) Additional measures If the actions listed above cannot be implemented, protection by means of overvoltage arresters must be provided. The following sections contain tables with overvoltage arresters that are very suitable for protecting the plant. Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 31 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 0B to 1 and 1 to 2 The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 0B to 1 and 1 to 2. Table 7- 3 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 0B to 1 and 1 to 2 Seq. no. Cables for ... 1 Connection at the 0B interface to 1 with: S7-1500/ET 200MP/ET 200SP/ET 200AL Article number Three-phase TN-C system DEHNguard(R) DG M TNC 275 952 300 DEHNguard(R) DG M TNC 275 FM * 952 305 * 2 Three-phase TN-S system DEHNguard(R) DG M TNS 275 952 400 DEHNguard(R) DG M TNS 275 FM * 952 405 * 3 Three-phase TT system DEHNguard(R) DG M TT 275 952 310 DEHNguard(R) DG M TT 275 FM * 952 315 * AC TN-S system DEHNguard(R) DG M TN 275 952 200 DEHNguard(R) DG M TN 275 FM * 952 205 * 5 AC TT system DEHNguard(R) DG M TT 2P 275 952 110 DEHNguard(R) DG M TT 2P 275 FM * 952 115 * 6 Supply UN = 24 V DC BLITZDUCTOR(R) VT, BVT AVD 24 918422 7 Bus cable MPI/DP RS 485 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML2 BD HFS 5 920 271 Bus cable RS 232 (V.24) BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML2 BE S 12 920 222 9 Industrial Ethernet DEHNpatch(R) DPA M CLE RJ45B 48 929 121 10 Inputs of digital modules UN = 24 V DC DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK E 60 (IL = 0.5 A) 919 990 11 Outputs of digital modules UN = 24 V DC DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK D 5 24 (IL = 10.0 A) 919 986 12 Inputs/outputs of digital modules UN = 230 V AC DEHNguard(R) DG S 275 952 070 DEHNguard(R) DG S 275 FM * 952 090 * 4 8 13 Inputs/outputs of analog modules (e.g., 4-20 mA, 1-10 V) N-PE arrester in the TT system DEHNgap(R) C S, DGP C S 952 030 DEHNgap(R) C S, DGP C S FM * 952 035 * DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK E 60 (IL = 0.5 A) 919 990 Designing interference-free controllers 32 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Seq. no. Cables for ... 14 Inputs/outputs of the fail-safe modules (24 V DC) Connection at the 0B interface to 1 with: S7-1500/ET 200MP/ET 200SP/ET 200AL Article number DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK D 5 24 919 986 * Version with remote indication contact Components of the series BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT can be remotely monitored with the appropriate accessories. Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.dehn.de) Components can be ordered directly from: DEHN+SOHNE GMBH+CO.KG. Hans-Dehn-Strae 1 D-92318 Neumarkt Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 33 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 that you can use for S7-1500/ET 200MP and ET 200SP. Table 7- 4 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 (for S7-1500/ET 200MP and ET 200SP) Seq. no. Cables for ... 1 Three-phase TN-S, TT system Connection at the interface 2 to 3 with: S7-1500/ET 200MP Article number ET 200SP Article number DEHNrail(R) DR M 4P 255 953 400 DEHNguard(R) DG M TNS 275 952 400 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNguard(R) DG M TT 275 952 310 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD NPE 952 050 DEHNguard(R) DG M TN 275 952 200 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNguard(R) DG M TT 2P 275 952 110 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD NPE 952 050 DEHNrail(R) DR M 4P 255 FM * (IL = 25.0 A) 2 AC TN-S, TT system DEHNrail(R) DR M 2P 255 DEHNrail(R) DR M 2P 255 FM * (IL = 25.0 A) 953 405 * 953 200 953 205 * 3 Supply UN = 24 V DC BLITZDUCTOR(R) VT, BVT AVD 24 918 422 BLITZDUCTOR(R) VT, BVT AVD 24 (R) VT 918 422 4 Bus cable MPI/DP RS 485 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 --- --- BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML2 BD HFS 5 920 271 --- --- BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS 920 300 --- --- BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, module BXT ML2 BE S 12 920 222 --- --- 5 Bus cable RS 232 (V.24) 6 Industrial Ethernet DEHNpatch(R) DPA M CLE RJ45B 48 929 121 --- --- 7 Inputs of digital modules UN = 24 V DC DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK E60 (IL = 0.5 A) 919 990 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, BXT ML4 BD 24 (IL < 1 A) 920 344 Designing interference-free controllers 34 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones Seq. no. 8 9 Cables for ... Connection at the interface 2 to 3 with: S7-1500/ET 200MP Outputs of digital modules UN = 24 V DC Inputs/outputs of digital modules UN = 230 V AC DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK D 5 24 (IL = 10.0 A) DEHNguard(R) DG S 275 DEHNguard(R) DG S 275 FM * Article number 919 986 952 070 952 090 * ET 200SP Article number BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS (IL < 1 A) 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, BXT ML4 BD 24 (IL < 1 A) 920 344 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS (IL < 1 A) 920 300 DEHNconnect(R) SD2, DCO SD2 E 48 (IL < 10 A) 917 989 DEHNguard(R) DG S 275 952 070 DEHNguard(R) DG MOD 275 952 010 --- --- N-PE arrester in the TT system 10 11 DEHNgap(R) C S, DGP C S 952 030 --- --- DEHNgap(R) C S, DGP C S FM * 952 035 * --- --- Inputs/outputs of analog modules (e.g., 4-20 mA, 1-10 V) DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK E 60 (IL = 0.5 A) 919 990 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, BXT ML4 BD 24 (IL < 1 A) 920 344 BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT, base section BXT BAS (IL < 1 A) 920 300 Inputs/outputs of the fail-safe modules (24 V DC) --- DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK D 5 24 919 986 DEHNconnect(R) RK, DCO RK E 60 919 990 --- * Version with remote indication contact Components of the series BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT can be remotely monitored with the appropriate accessories. Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.dehn.de) Components can be ordered directly from: DEHN+SOHNE GMBH+CO.KG. Hans-Dehn-Strae 1 D-92318 Neumarkt Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 35 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 that you can use for ET 200AL. Table 7- 5 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 (for ET 200AL) Seq. no. Cables for ... 1 Supply UN = 24 V DC Connection at the interface 2 to 3 with: ET 200AL Article number BLITZDUCTOR(R) VT, BVT AVD 24 (R) VT 918 422 Components of the series BLITZDUCTOR(R) XT can be remotely monitored with the appropriate accessories. Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.dehn.de) Components can be ordered directly from: DEHN+SOHNE GMBH+CO.KG. Hans-Dehn-Strae 1 D-92318 Neumarkt Designing interference-free controllers 36 Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB Index B Bending radius, 14 C Cable shielding, 15 E Electromagnetic compatibility, 7 Electromagnetic interference, 7 EMC, 7 I Interference-free operation, 25 L Lightning protection Equipotential bonding, 30 External, 26 Internal, 26 Overvoltage protection, 30, 31 Lightning protection zone concept, 27 Lightning protection zones, 29 Definition, 28 O Overvoltage, 28 Overvoltage protection Components, 30, 32, 34 T Tensile strain, 14 Designing interference-free controllers Function Manual, 06/2014, A5E03461486-AB 37 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual 2 ___________________ Introduction 3 ___________________ Technology objects 4 ___________________ Using versions 5 ___________________ Configuring 6 ___________________ Programming 7 ___________________ Downloading to CPU 8 ___________________ Commissioning 9 ___________________ Diagnostics ___________________ 10 Instructions ___________________ A Appendix TIA Portal V15 12/2017 A5E03879256-AE Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E03879256-AE 11/2017 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012 - 2017. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation provides important information that you need to configure and commission the integrated Motion Control functionality of the S7-1500 Automation systems. Required basic knowledge In order to understand this documentation, the following knowledge is required: General knowledge in the field of automation General knowledge in the field of drive engineering and motion control Validity of the documentation This documentation is valid for the S7-1500 product range. Conventions For the path settings in the project navigation it is presumed that the "Technology objects" object is opened in the CPU subtree. The "Technology object" placeholder represents the name of the technology object. Example: "Technology object > Configuration > Basic parameters". The placeholder represents the name set in tags for the respective technology object. Example: .Actor.Type This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The pictures may differ in minor details from the devices supplied. You should also observe the notes that are marked as follows: Note A note contains important information about the product described in the documentation, about the handling of the product, and about sections in this documentation demanding your particular attention. Further support The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the online ordering system is available on the Internet (http://mall.industry.siemens.com). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 5 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................... 16 2 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 20 3 2.1 Interplay of the various documents ........................................................................................ 20 2.2 Integrated Motion Control functionality .................................................................................. 21 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control .................................................................. 22 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 27 Functions - Axes .................................................................................................................... 27 Functions - Other technology objects .................................................................................... 28 2.5 Guidelines on use of motion control....................................................................................... 29 Technology objects .................................................................................................................................. 30 3.1 Configuration limits ................................................................................................................ 30 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.5.1 3.2.5.2 3.2.5.3 3.2.5.4 3.2.5.5 3.2.5.6 3.2.5.7 3.2.5.8 3.2.5.9 3.2.6 3.2.6.1 3.2.6.2 3.2.7 3.2.7.1 3.2.7.2 3.2.7.3 3.2.7.4 3.2.8 3.2.8.1 3.2.8.2 3.2.8.3 3.2.8.4 3.2.8.5 Basics - Axes ......................................................................................................................... 31 Axis types ............................................................................................................................... 31 Units of measure .................................................................................................................... 32 Modulo setting ........................................................................................................................ 33 Long-term accuracy ............................................................................................................... 33 Drive and encoder connection ............................................................................................... 34 Brief description ..................................................................................................................... 34 PROFIdrive telegrams ........................................................................................................... 36 Actual values .......................................................................................................................... 39 Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device ....................................... 42 Safety functions in the drive ................................................................................................... 44 Axis in simulation ................................................................................................................... 49 Virtual axis.............................................................................................................................. 50 Data connection drive/encoder via data block ....................................................................... 50 Tags ....................................................................................................................................... 52 Mechanics .............................................................................................................................. 53 Brief description ..................................................................................................................... 53 Tags ....................................................................................................................................... 54 Traversing range limitation..................................................................................................... 55 Brief description ..................................................................................................................... 55 Hardware limit switches ......................................................................................................... 55 Software limit switch .............................................................................................................. 57 Tags ....................................................................................................................................... 58 Motion control and limits for dynamics ................................................................................... 59 Brief description ..................................................................................................................... 59 Velocity profile ........................................................................................................................ 60 Emergency stop deceleration ................................................................................................ 62 Dynamic limits in synchronous operation .............................................................................. 62 Torque limits........................................................................................................................... 63 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Table of contents 3.2.8.6 3.2.9 3.2.9.1 3.2.9.2 3.2.9.3 3.2.9.4 3.2.9.5 3.2.9.6 3.2.9.7 3.2.9.8 3.2.9.9 3.2.9.10 3.2.9.11 3.2.9.12 3.2.9.13 3.2.9.14 3.2.10 3.2.10.1 3.2.10.2 3.2.10.3 3.2.10.4 3.2.10.5 3.2.11 3.2.11.1 3.2.11.2 3.2.11.3 3.2.12 3.2.12.1 3.2.12.2 3.2.12.3 3.2.12.4 Tags ........................................................................................................................................68 Homing ....................................................................................................................................69 Brief description ......................................................................................................................69 Terms ......................................................................................................................................71 Homing mode..........................................................................................................................72 Active homing with homing cam and zero mark .....................................................................73 Active homing with zero mark .................................................................................................76 Active homing with digital input...............................................................................................78 Passive homing with homing cam and zero mark ..................................................................80 Passive homing with zero mark ..............................................................................................81 Passive homing with digital input ............................................................................................83 Direction reversal at the hardware limit switch (reversing cam) .............................................84 Direct homing ..........................................................................................................................85 Absolute value adjustment......................................................................................................85 Resetting the "Homed" status .................................................................................................86 Tags ........................................................................................................................................87 Position monitoring functions ..................................................................................................88 Brief description ......................................................................................................................88 Positioning monitoring.............................................................................................................88 Following error monitoring ......................................................................................................90 Standstill signal .......................................................................................................................90 Tags ........................................................................................................................................91 Closed-loop control .................................................................................................................92 Brief description ......................................................................................................................92 Control structure .....................................................................................................................93 Tags ........................................................................................................................................94 Process response ...................................................................................................................95 Organization Blocks for Motion Control ..................................................................................95 Process image partition "OB Servo PIP" ................................................................................97 Operational Sequence and Timeouts .....................................................................................98 Operating modes ..................................................................................................................100 3.3 Speed-controlled axis technology object ..............................................................................103 3.4 Positioning axis technology object ........................................................................................104 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.3.1 3.5.3.2 3.5.4 3.5.5 Synchronous axis technology object ....................................................................................105 Short description for synchronous axis .................................................................................105 Synchronous operation phases ............................................................................................106 Leading value coupling .........................................................................................................107 Short description for leading value coupling .........................................................................107 Setpoint coupling ..................................................................................................................107 Gearing with MC_GearIn ......................................................................................................107 Tags for synchronous operation ...........................................................................................109 3.6 Technology object external encoder .....................................................................................110 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.2.1 3.7.2.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 3.7.5 Technology object measuring input ......................................................................................111 Brief description ....................................................................................................................112 Measuring .............................................................................................................................116 One-time measurement ........................................................................................................116 Cyclic measuring...................................................................................................................117 Measuring with measuring range..........................................................................................121 Time-related boundary conditions ........................................................................................122 Tags ......................................................................................................................................124 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 7 Table of contents 4 5 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7 Technology object output cam ............................................................................................. 126 Brief description ................................................................................................................... 126 Distance output cam ............................................................................................................ 130 Time-based output cam ....................................................................................................... 132 Activation direction of cam ................................................................................................... 133 Hysteresis ............................................................................................................................ 136 Compensation of actuator switching times .......................................................................... 138 Tags ..................................................................................................................................... 139 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.9.4 3.9.5 3.9.6 3.9.7 Cam track technology object................................................................................................ 141 Brief description ................................................................................................................... 141 Effective direction ................................................................................................................. 147 Changing the cam track data during operation .................................................................... 149 Activation behavior ............................................................................................................... 150 Hysteresis ............................................................................................................................ 153 Time offset of cam switching points ..................................................................................... 153 Tags ..................................................................................................................................... 153 Using versions ....................................................................................................................................... 155 4.1 Overview of versions ............................................................................................................ 155 4.2 Version V4.0......................................................................................................................... 159 4.3 Version V3.0......................................................................................................................... 161 4.4 Version V2.0......................................................................................................................... 163 4.5 Version V1.0......................................................................................................................... 164 4.6 Changing a technology version............................................................................................ 164 4.7 Replacing devices ................................................................................................................ 165 Configuring ............................................................................................................................................ 166 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration .................................................. 166 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 166 Add and configure PROFINET IO drives ............................................................................. 167 Add and configure PROFIBUS DP drives ............................................................................ 170 Adding and configuring drives with analog connections ...................................................... 172 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 Configuration basics ............................................................................................................ 175 Add technology object.......................................................................................................... 175 Copy technology object........................................................................................................ 176 Delete technology object...................................................................................................... 177 Working with the configuration editor ................................................................................... 178 Compare values ................................................................................................................... 179 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.3 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 5.3.3.4 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object ....................................................... 180 Configuration - Basic Parameters ........................................................................................ 180 Hardware interface ............................................................................................................... 181 Configuration - Drive ............................................................................................................ 181 Configuration - Data exchange with the drive ...................................................................... 183 Extended Parameters .......................................................................................................... 185 Configuration - Mechanics ................................................................................................... 185 Configuration - Dynamic Defaults ........................................................................................ 185 Configuration - Emergency stop .......................................................................................... 187 Limits .................................................................................................................................... 188 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Table of contents 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.2.4 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.4.1 5.4.4.2 5.4.4.3 5.4.4.4 5.4.4.5 5.4.4.6 5.4.4.7 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object..................................191 Configuration - Basic Parameters .........................................................................................191 Hardware interface................................................................................................................192 Configuration - Drive .............................................................................................................192 Configuration - Encoder ........................................................................................................194 Configuration - Data exchange with the drive .......................................................................196 Configuration - Data exchange with encoder .......................................................................198 Configuration - leading value interconnections (synchronous axis only)..............................201 Extended Parameters ...........................................................................................................202 Configuration - Mechanics ....................................................................................................202 Configuration - Dynamic Defaults .........................................................................................207 Configuration - Emergency stop ...........................................................................................209 Limits .....................................................................................................................................210 Homing ..................................................................................................................................216 Position monitoring functions ................................................................................................226 Configuration - Control loop ..................................................................................................228 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.3 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.2 Configuring the technology object external encoder ............................................................230 Configuration - Basic Parameters .........................................................................................230 Hardware interface................................................................................................................231 Configuration - Encoder ........................................................................................................231 Configuration - Data exchange .............................................................................................232 Extended Parameters ...........................................................................................................238 Configuration - Mechanics ....................................................................................................238 Homing ..................................................................................................................................240 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 Configuring the technology object measuring input..............................................................244 Configuration - Basic Parameters .........................................................................................244 Configuration - Hardware interface .......................................................................................245 Configuration - Extended parameters ...................................................................................246 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.3.1 5.7.3.2 Configuring the cam technology object.................................................................................247 Configuration - Basic Parameters .........................................................................................247 Configuration - Hardware interface .......................................................................................248 Extended parameters............................................................................................................249 Configuration - Activation time ..............................................................................................249 Configuration - Hysteresis ....................................................................................................249 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.3.1 5.8.3.2 Configuring the cam track technology object ........................................................................250 Configuration - Basic Parameters .........................................................................................250 Configuration - Hardware interface .......................................................................................251 Extended parameters............................................................................................................252 Track data .............................................................................................................................252 Configuration - Output cam data...........................................................................................254 5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.9.5 5.9.6 5.9.7 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control.............................................................255 Overview ...............................................................................................................................255 TM Count 1x24V / TM Count 2x24V .....................................................................................256 TM PosInput 1 / TM PosInput 2 ............................................................................................258 TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V / TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V .............................................................260 TM Pulse 2x24V....................................................................................................................261 TM PTO 4 .............................................................................................................................262 CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN ..................................................................................264 5.10 Connect drive/encoder via data block...................................................................................269 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 9 Table of contents 5.11 5.11.1 5.11.2 5.11.2.1 5.11.2.2 5.11.2.3 5.11.3 5.11.4 5.11.4.1 5.11.4.2 5.11.4.3 5.11.4.4 5.11.4.5 5.11.4.6 5.11.4.7 5.11.4.8 5.11.4.9 6 Parameter view .................................................................................................................... 271 Introduction to the parameter view....................................................................................... 271 Structure of the parameter view ........................................................................................... 272 Toolbar ................................................................................................................................. 272 Navigation ............................................................................................................................ 273 Parameter table.................................................................................................................... 273 Opening the parameter view ................................................................................................ 275 Working with the parameter view ......................................................................................... 275 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 275 Filtering the parameter table ................................................................................................ 276 Sorting the parameter table ................................................................................................. 277 Transferring parameter data to other editors ....................................................................... 277 Indicating errors ................................................................................................................... 278 Editing start values in the project ......................................................................................... 278 Monitoring values online in the parameter view................................................................... 280 Modifying values .................................................................................................................. 281 Comparing values ................................................................................................................ 282 Programming ......................................................................................................................................... 284 6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 284 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 Technology data block ......................................................................................................... 284 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 284 Evaluating the technology data block .................................................................................. 285 Evaluate StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord .......................................................... 288 Change restart-relevant data ............................................................................................... 289 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 Motion Control instructions .................................................................................................. 290 Motion Control instruction parameters ................................................................................. 290 Add Motion Control instructions ........................................................................................... 294 Parameter transfer for function blocks ................................................................................. 296 Non position-controlled operation ........................................................................................ 298 6.4 Starting Motion Control jobs................................................................................................. 300 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 Tracking active jobs ............................................................................................................. 302 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 302 Motion Control instructions with "Done" parameter ............................................................. 302 Motion Control instructions without "Done" parameter ........................................................ 306 Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog" .......................................................................... 310 6.6 Ending Motion Control jobs .................................................................................................. 313 6.7 Restart of technology objects............................................................................................... 314 7 Downloading to CPU ............................................................................................................................. 315 8 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................... 316 8.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 316 8.2 Commissioning guidelines ................................................................................................... 316 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 Axis control panel ................................................................................................................. 319 Function and structure of the axis control panel .................................................................. 319 Using the axis control panel ................................................................................................. 324 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Table of contents 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 9 10 Optimization ..........................................................................................................................325 Function and structure of the optimization ............................................................................325 Optimize position controller ..................................................................................................329 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 332 9.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................332 9.2 Diagnostic concept................................................................................................................332 9.3 Technology alarms................................................................................................................333 9.4 Errors in Motion Control instructions.....................................................................................337 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 Speed-controlled axis technology object ..............................................................................338 Status and error bits..............................................................................................................338 Motion status.........................................................................................................................341 PROFIdrive telegram ............................................................................................................342 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 9.6.4 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object ...........................................................343 Status and error bits..............................................................................................................343 Motion status.........................................................................................................................347 PROFIdrive telegram ............................................................................................................349 Additional displays for the technology CPU ..........................................................................350 9.7 9.7.1 9.7.2 9.7.3 Technology object external encoder .....................................................................................351 Status and error bits..............................................................................................................351 Motion status.........................................................................................................................353 PROFIdrive frame .................................................................................................................353 9.8 9.8.1 Technology object measuring input ......................................................................................354 Status and error bits..............................................................................................................354 9.9 9.9.1 Technology object output cam ..............................................................................................356 Status and error bits..............................................................................................................356 9.10 9.10.1 9.10.2 Cam track technology object ................................................................................................358 Status and error bits..............................................................................................................358 Cam track status ...................................................................................................................360 Instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 361 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 MC_Power V4 .......................................................................................................................361 MC_Power: Enable, disable technology object V4 ...............................................................361 MC_Power: Function chart V4 ..............................................................................................366 10.2 10.2.1 MC_Reset V4 ........................................................................................................................367 MC_Reset: Acknowledge alarms, restart technology object V4 ...........................................367 10.3 10.3.1 MC_Home V4........................................................................................................................369 MC_Home: Home technology object, set home position V4 ................................................369 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 MC_Halt V4 ...........................................................................................................................374 MC_Halt: Pause axis V4 .......................................................................................................374 MC_Halt: Function chart V4 ..................................................................................................377 10.5 10.5.1 10.5.2 MC_MoveAbsolute V4 ..........................................................................................................378 MC_MoveAbsolute: Position axis absolutely V4...................................................................378 MC_MoveAbsolute: Function chart V4 .................................................................................381 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 11 Table of contents 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 MC_MoveRelative V4 .......................................................................................................... 382 MC_MoveRelative: Position axis relatively V4 ..................................................................... 382 MC_MoveRelative: Function chart V4 ................................................................................. 385 10.7 10.7.1 10.7.2 MC_MoveVelocity V4 ........................................................................................................... 386 MC_MoveVelocity: Move axis at velocity/speed setpoint V4 ............................................... 386 MC_MoveVelocity: Function chart V4 .................................................................................. 390 10.8 10.8.1 10.8.2 MC_MoveJog V4 .................................................................................................................. 391 MC_MoveJog: Move axis in jog mode V4 ............................................................................ 391 MC_MoveJog: Function chart V4 ......................................................................................... 394 10.9 10.9.1 10.9.2 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4 ................................................................................................ 395 MC_MoveSuperimposed: Position axes overlapping V4 ..................................................... 395 MC_MoveSuperimposed: Function chart V4 ....................................................................... 398 10.10 10.10.1 10.10.1.1 10.10.1.2 10.10.2 10.10.2.1 10.10.2.2 10.10.3 10.10.3.1 10.10.4 10.10.4.1 10.10.4.2 10.10.5 10.10.5.1 10.10.5.2 Measuring input, output cam, cam track .............................................................................. 399 MC_MeasuringInput V4 ....................................................................................................... 399 MC_MeasuringInput: Start measuring once V4 ................................................................... 399 MC_MeasuringInput: Function chart V4 .............................................................................. 401 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic V4 .............................................................................................. 402 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Start cyclic measuring V4 ........................................................ 402 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Function chart V4 ..................................................................... 404 MC_AbortMeasuringInput V4 ............................................................................................... 406 MC_AbortMeasuringInput: Abort active measuring V4 ........................................................ 406 MC_OutputCam V4 .............................................................................................................. 407 MC_OutputCam: Activate/deactivate cam V4...................................................................... 407 MC_OutputCam: Function chart V4 ..................................................................................... 409 MC_CamTrack V4 ................................................................................................................ 410 MC_CamTrack: Activate/deactivate cam track V4............................................................... 410 MC_CamTrack: Function chart V4 ....................................................................................... 412 10.11 10.11.1 10.11.1.1 10.11.1.2 Synchronous motion ............................................................................................................ 413 MC_GearIn V4 ..................................................................................................................... 413 MC_GearIn: Start gear synchronization V4 ......................................................................... 413 MC_GearIn: Function chart V4 ............................................................................................ 416 10.12 10.12.1 10.12.1.1 10.12.1.2 10.12.2 10.12.2.1 10.12.2.2 10.12.3 10.12.3.1 10.12.3.2 Torque data .......................................................................................................................... 417 MC_TorqueLimiting V4 ........................................................................................................ 417 MC_TorqueLimiting: Activate and deactivate force/torque limit / fixed stop detection V4 ... 417 MC_TorqueLimiting: Function chart V4 ............................................................................... 420 MC_TorqueAdditive V4 ........................................................................................................ 422 MC_TorqueAdditive: Specify additive torque V4 ................................................................. 422 MC_TorqueAdditive: Function chart V4 ............................................................................... 424 MC_TorqueRange V4 .......................................................................................................... 425 MC_TorqueRange: Set high and low torque limits V4 ......................................................... 425 MC_TorqueRange: Function chart V4 ................................................................................. 427 10.13 10.13.1 10.13.2 10.13.3 Override response of Motion Control jobs V4 ...................................................................... 428 Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs ................................................................. 428 Override response V4: Synchronous operation jobs ........................................................... 429 Override response V4: Measuring input jobs....................................................................... 430 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Table of contents A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 431 A.1 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 A.1.5 A.1.6 A.1.7 A.1.8 A.1.9 A.1.10 A.1.11 A.1.12 A.1.13 A.1.14 A.1.15 A.1.16 A.1.17 A.1.18 A.1.19 A.1.20 Tags of the speed axis technology object ............................................................................431 Legend ..................................................................................................................................431 Actual values and setpoints (speed axis) .............................................................................431 Variable simulation (speed axis) ...........................................................................................432 VirtualAxis tag (speed axis) ..................................................................................................432 Actor tags (speed axis) .........................................................................................................433 Torque Limiting tag (speed axis) ..........................................................................................434 LoadGear tags (speed axis) .................................................................................................435 Units tags (speed axis) .........................................................................................................435 DynamicLimits tags (speed axis) ..........................................................................................436 DynamicDefaults tags (speed axis) ......................................................................................436 Override tags (speed axis) ....................................................................................................437 StatusDrive tags (speed axis) ...............................................................................................437 StatusTorqueData tags (speed axis) ....................................................................................438 StatusMotionIn tags (speed axis) .........................................................................................438 StatusWord tag (speed axis) ................................................................................................439 ErrorWord tag (speed axis) ...................................................................................................441 ErrorDetail tags (speed axis) ................................................................................................442 WarningWord tag (speed axis) .............................................................................................443 ControlPanel tags (speed axis).............................................................................................444 InternalToTrace tags (speed axis) ........................................................................................445 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.2.3 A.2.4 A.2.5 A.2.6 A.2.7 A.2.8 A.2.9 A.2.10 A.2.11 A.2.12 A.2.13 A.2.14 A.2.15 A.2.16 A.2.17 A.2.18 A.2.19 A.2.20 A.2.21 A.2.22 A.2.23 A.2.24 A.2.25 A.2.26 A.2.27 A.2.28 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object ........................................445 Legend ..................................................................................................................................445 Actual values and setpoints (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .........................................446 Simulation tag (positioning axis / synchronous axis) ............................................................446 VirtualAxis tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ..............................................................447 Actor tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis).....................................................................447 TorqueLimiting tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .......................................................449 Clamping tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis)................................................................449 Sensor[n] tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis)..............................................................450 Extrapolation tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ..........................................................452 LoadGear tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .............................................................453 Properties tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis).............................................................453 Units tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .......................................................................454 Mechanics tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ............................................................455 Modulo tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .................................................................456 DynamicLimits tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis)......................................................456 DynamicDefaults tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ..................................................457 PositionLimits_SW tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ...............................................457 PositionLimits_HW tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ...............................................458 Homing tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis).................................................................459 Override tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ...............................................................460 PositionControl tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis).....................................................461 DynamicAxisModel tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ..............................................462 FollowingError tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ......................................................463 PositionMonitoring tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ...............................................464 StandstillSignal tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ....................................................465 StatusPositioning tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .................................................465 StatusDrive tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ..........................................................466 StatusServo tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .........................................................466 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 13 Table of contents A.2.29 A.2.30 A.2.31 A.2.32 A.2.33 A.2.34 A.2.35 A.2.36 A.2.37 A.2.38 A.2.39 A.2.40 StatusSensor[n] tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .................................................. 467 StatusExtrapolation tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis)............................................... 468 StatusSynchronizedMotion tags (synchronous axis) ........................................................... 469 StatusKinematicsMotion tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ....................................... 470 StatusTorqueData tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ............................................... 471 StatusMotionIn tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) .................................................... 471 StatusWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ........................................................... 472 ErrorWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ............................................................. 475 ErrorDetail tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ........................................................... 476 WarningWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ........................................................ 477 ControlPanel tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ....................................................... 478 InternalToTrace tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) ................................................... 478 A.3 A.3.1 A.3.2 A.3.3 A.3.4 A.3.5 A.3.6 A.3.7 A.3.8 A.3.9 A.3.10 A.3.11 A.3.12 A.3.13 A.3.14 A.3.15 A.3.16 A.3.17 Tags of the technology object external encoder .................................................................. 479 Legend ................................................................................................................................. 479 Actual values and setpoints (external encoder) ................................................................... 479 Sensor tags (external encoder)............................................................................................ 480 Extrapolation tag (external encoder) .................................................................................... 482 LoadGear tags (external encoder) ....................................................................................... 483 Properties tags (external encoder)....................................................................................... 483 Units tag (external encoder)................................................................................................. 484 Mechanics tags (external encoder) ...................................................................................... 485 Modulo tags (external encoder) ........................................................................................... 485 Homing tags (external encoder)........................................................................................... 485 StatusSensor tags (external encoder) ................................................................................. 486 StatusExtrapolation tag (external encoder) ......................................................................... 487 StatusWord tag (external encoder) ...................................................................................... 488 ErrorWord tag (external encoder) ........................................................................................ 489 ErrorDetail tags (external encoder) ...................................................................................... 490 WarningWord tag (external encoder) ................................................................................... 491 InternalToTrace tags (external encoder) ............................................................................. 492 A.4 A.4.1 A.4.2 A.4.3 A.4.4 A.4.5 A.4.6 A.4.7 A.4.8 A.4.9 A.4.10 Tags of the measuring input technology object ................................................................... 492 Legend ................................................................................................................................. 492 Display data (measuring input) ............................................................................................ 493 Parameter tags (measuring input) ....................................................................................... 493 Interface tags (measuring input) .......................................................................................... 494 Units tags (measuring input) ................................................................................................ 494 MeasuredValues tags (measuring input) ............................................................................. 495 StatusWord tag (measuring input) ....................................................................................... 496 ErrorWord tag (measuring input) ......................................................................................... 497 ErrorDetail tags (measuring input) ....................................................................................... 498 WarningWord tag (measuring input) .................................................................................... 499 A.5 A.5.1 A.5.2 A.5.3 A.5.4 A.5.5 A.5.6 A.5.7 A.5.8 A.5.9 Tags of the cam technology object ...................................................................................... 500 Legend ................................................................................................................................. 500 Display data (cam) ............................................................................................................... 500 Parameter tags (cam) .......................................................................................................... 501 Interface tags (cam) ............................................................................................................. 501 Units tags (cam) ................................................................................................................... 502 StatusWord tag (output cam) ............................................................................................... 503 ErrorWord tag (output cam) ................................................................................................. 504 ErrorDetail tags (cam) .......................................................................................................... 505 WarningWord tag (output cam) ............................................................................................ 505 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Table of contents A.6 A.6.1 A.6.2 A.6.3 A.6.4 A.6.5 A.6.6 A.6.7 A.6.8 A.6.9 Tags of the cam track technology object ..............................................................................506 Legend ..................................................................................................................................506 Display data (cam track) .......................................................................................................507 Parameter tags (cam track) ..................................................................................................508 Interface tags (cam track) .....................................................................................................509 Units tags (cam track) ...........................................................................................................509 StatusWord tag (cam track) ..................................................................................................510 ErrorWord tag (cam track) ....................................................................................................511 ErrorDetail tags (cam track) ..................................................................................................512 WarningWord tag (cam track) ...............................................................................................512 A.7 A.7.1 A.7.2 A.7.3 A.7.4 A.7.5 A.7.6 A.7.7 A.7.8 Technology alarms................................................................................................................513 Overview ...............................................................................................................................513 Technology alarms 101-113 .................................................................................................517 Technology alarms 201-204 .................................................................................................524 Technology alarms 304-343 .................................................................................................525 Technology alarms 401-431 .................................................................................................528 Technology alarms 501-552 .................................................................................................531 Technology alarms 601-618 .................................................................................................537 Technology alarms 700-758 .................................................................................................538 A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions ................................................................................542 A.9 A.9.1 A.9.1.1 A.9.1.2 A.9.1.3 A.9.1.4 A.9.2 A.9.2.1 A.9.2.2 A.9.2.3 A.9.2.4 MC_Power function chart ......................................................................................................547 Drive connection via PROFIdrive..........................................................................................547 StopMode 0, 2.......................................................................................................................547 StopMode 1...........................................................................................................................548 Alarm reactions with braking ramp via the technology object ..............................................549 Alarm response "Remove enable" ........................................................................................550 Analog drive connection .......................................................................................................551 StopMode 0, 2.......................................................................................................................551 StopMode 1...........................................................................................................................552 Alarm reactions with braking ramp via the technology object ..............................................553 Alarm response "Remove enable" ........................................................................................554 A.10 A.10.1 A.10.2 SINAMICS drives ..................................................................................................................555 Compatibility list ....................................................................................................................555 Homing SINAMICS drives with external zero marks ............................................................555 A.11 Data types .............................................................................................................................555 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 556 Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 560 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 15 1 Documentation guide The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. Basic information The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742691). Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information. You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Documentation guide Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384). SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for which controller families. You can find the comparison list on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375). "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 17 Documentation guide Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of the TIA Portal. General function overview: Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network. Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices Downloading service data from a CPU Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU Performing a CPU memory reset Resetting devices to factory settings Downloading a firmware update to a device You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Documentation guide PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 19 2 Introduction 2.1 Interplay of the various documents For a better overview, the documentation of the Motion Control functions is divided into the following documents: Using S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109749263) Using S7-1500T Kinematics Functions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109749264) "Using S7-1500 Motion Control" describes the Motion Control functions for the following technology objects: Speed axis Positioning axis Synchronous axis External encoder Measuring input Output cam Cam track Cam (S7-1500T) "Using S7-1500T Kinematics Functions" describes the Motion Control functions for the kinematics technology object. This document assumes that the Motion Control functions described in "Using S7-1500 Motion Control functions" are known. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Introduction 2.2 Integrated Motion Control functionality 2.2 Integrated Motion Control functionality S7-1500 Motion Control supports controlled positioning and moving of axes and is an integral part of every CPU S7-1500 as well as every CPU S7-1500SP. The S7-1500T Technology CPUs provide enhanced functions. The Motion Control functionality supports the following technology objects: Speed axis Positioning axis Synchronous axis External encoder Measuring input Output cam Cam track Cam (S7-1500T) Kinematics (S7-1500T) Drives with PROFIdrive capability and drives with analog setpoint interface and stepper motors are controlled by means of standardized Motion Control instructions according to PLCopen. The axis control panel and comprehensive online and diagnostic functions support easy commissioning and optimization of drives. S7-1500 Motion Control is fully integrated into the system diagnostics of the S7-1500 CPU. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 21 Introduction 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control Overview You create a project, configure technology objects, and download the configuration to the CPU with the TIA Portal. The Motion Control functionality is processed in the CPU. You control the technology objects with the Motion Control instructions in your user program. The TIA Portal provides additional functions for commissioning, optimization (Page 316) and diagnostics (Page 332). The following figure provides a schematic representation of the user interfaces and the integration of Motion Control into the S7-1500 CPU. The concepts are then briefly explained: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Introduction 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control TIA Portal The TIA Portal supports you in the planning and commissioning of Motion Control functionality: Integrating and configuring hardware Creating and configuring technology objects Creating the user program Downloading to CPU Commissioning of axes Optimization of drives Diagnostics You use the TIA Portal to configure the hardware, the technology objects as well as your user program. You download the program you created to the CPU. You test your user program and diagnose the hardware with the online and diagnostic functions of the TIA Portal. Technology objects Technology objects represent real objects (e.g. a drive) in the controller. You call the functions of the technology objects by means of Motion Control instructions in your user program. The technology objects provide open- and closed-loop control of the movement of the real objects, and report status information (e.g. the current position). The configuration of the technology objects represents the properties of the real object. The configuration data is stored in a technology data block. The following technology objects are available for Motion Control: Speed axis technology object The speed axis technology object ("TO_SpeedAxis") is used to specify the speed for a drive. You program the motion of the axis with motion control instructions. Positioning axis technology object The positioning axis technology object ("TO_PositioningAxis") is used to position a drive with closed-loop position control. You issue positioning jobs to the axis with Motion Control instructions in your user program. Synchronous axis technology object The synchronous axis technology object ("TO_SynchronousAxis") includes all functions of the positioning axis technology object. The axis can also be interconnected with a leading value so that the axis follows the position change of a leading axis in synchronous operation. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 23 Introduction 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control External encoder technology object The external encoder technology object ("TO_ExternalEncoder") detects a position and makes it available to the controller. The detected position can be evaluated in the user program. Measuring input technology object The measuring input technology object ("TO_MeasuringInput") detects actual positions quickly, accurately and event triggered. Output cam technology object The output cam technology object ("TO_OutputCam") generates switching signals depending on the position of an axis or external encoder. You can evaluate the switching signals in the user program or feed them to digital outputs. Cam track technology object The cam track technology object ("TO_CamTrack") generates a switching signal sequence depending on the position of an axis or external encoder. In this process, up to 32 individual cams are superimposed and the switching signals are output as a track. You can evaluate the switching signals in the user program or feed them to digital outputs. Cam technology object (S7-1500T) The cam technology object ("TO_Cam") defines a function f(x) by means of interpolation points and/or segments. Missing function ranges are interpolated. Kinematic technology object (S7-1500T) The Kinematic technology object ("TO_Kinematics") is used to interconnect positioning axes to a kinematic. When you configure the kinematics technology object, you interconnect the axes in accordance with the configured kinematics type. Technology data block The properties of real objects are configured by means of the technology objects and saved in a technology data block (Page 284). The technology data block contains all configuration data, setpoint and actual values, and status information of the technology object. The TIA Portal automatically creates the technology data block when the technology object is created. You access the data of the technology data block (read/write access) with your user program. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Introduction 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control Motion Control instructions With the Motion Control instructions you perform the desired functionality in the technology objects. The Motion Control instructions are available in the TIA Portal under "Instructions > Technology > Motion Control". The Motion Control instructions conform to PLCopen (version 2.0). User program The Motion Control instructions and the technology data block represent the programming interfaces for the technology objects. You use Motion Control instructions to transfer Motion Control jobs for the technology objects in your user program. You track the status of running jobs via the output parameters of the Motion Control instructions. You access status information of the technology object and change specific configuration parameters during runtime using the technology data block. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 25 Introduction 2.3 Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control Drives and encoders Drives ensure the motion of the axis. They are integrated in the hardware configuration. When you execute a Motion Control job in your user program, the technology object takes over the control of the drive and the reading in of values of encoders. Drives and encoders with PROFIdrive capability are connected by means of PROFIdrive telegrams. The following connections are possible: PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Technology module (TM) Drives with analog setpoint interfaces are connected using an analog output (AQ) and an optional enable signal. Analog inputs and outputs are made available by means of corresponding I/O modules. A drive is also called an actuator, and an encoder is also called a sensor. The figure below shows an example configuration in which all components are connected to the CPU by means of PROFINET IO: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Introduction 2.4 Functions 2.4 Functions 2.4.1 Functions - Axes You execute the functions of the speed axis, positioning axis and synchronous axis technology objects using Motion Control instructions in your user program or using the TIA Portal (under "Technology object > Commissioning"). The following table shows the functions that are supported by technology objects: Function Technology object Speed axis (Page 103) Positioning axis (Page 104) Synchronous axis (Page 105) Motion Control instructions (user program) "MC_Power (Page 361)" X X X - X X X X X X X X - X X - X X - X X - - X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Enable, disable technology objects "MC_Home (Page 369)" Home technology objects, set home position "MC_MoveJog (Page 391)" Move axes in Jog mode "MC_MoveVelocity (Page 386)" Move axes at predefined velocity "MC_MoveRelative (Page 382)" Relative positioning of axes "MC_MoveAbsolute (Page 378)" Absolute positioning of axes "MC_MoveSuperimposed (Page 395)" Positioning axes overlapping "MC_GearIn (Page 413)" Start gearing "MC_Halt (Page 374)" Halt axes "MC_TorqueLimiting (Page 417)" Limit torque using torque reduction "MC_Reset (Page 367)" Acknowledge alarms, restart technology objects "MC_TorqueAdditive (Page 422)" Specify additive torque and activate/ deactivate "MC_TorqueRange (Page 425)" Specify high and low torque limits S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 27 Introduction 2.4 Functions Function Technology object Speed axis (Page 103) Positioning axis (Page 104) Synchronous axis (Page 105) X X X - X X TIA Portal "Axis control panel (Page 319)" Move and home axes using the TIA Portal "Optimization (Page 325)" Optimization of closed loop position control 2.4.2 Functions - Other technology objects You execute the functions of the other technology objects by means of Motion Control instructions in your user program. The following table shows the Motion Control instructions that are supported by the technology objects: Motion Control instruction Technology object External encoder (Page 110) Measuring input (Page 111) Output cam (Page 126) Cam track (Page 141) Motion Control instructions (user program) "MC_Power (Page 361)" X - - - X - - - - X - - - X - - - X - - - - X - - - - X X X X X Enable, disable technology objects "MC_Home (Page 369)" Home technology objects, set home position "MC_MeasuringInput (Page 399)" Start measuring job once "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic (Page 402)" Start cyclic measuring job "MC_AbortMeasuringInput (Page 406)" End measuring job "MC_OutputCam (Page 407)" Activate/deactivate output cam "MC_CamTrack (Page 410)" Activate/deactivate cam track "MC_Reset (Page 367)" Acknowledge alarms, restart technology objects S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Introduction 2.5 Guidelines on use of motion control 2.5 Guidelines on use of motion control The guidelines described here present the basic procedure for using Motion Control with the CPU S7-1500. These guidelines serve as recommendations. Requirements A project with a CPU S7-1500 has been created. Procedure Proceed as follows to use Motion Control with the CPU S7-1500: 1. Add technology object (Page 175) 2. Working with the configuration editor (Page 178) 3. Programming (Page 284) 4. Downloading to CPU (Page 315) 5. Functional test in the Commissioning window (Page 316) 6. Diagnostics (Page 332) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 29 3 Technology objects 3.1 Configuration limits Motion Control resources Each CPU offers a defined set of Motion Control resources. For information on the available Motion Control resources, refer to the technical specifications of the utilized CPU. Each technology object uses Motion Control resources: Technology object Motion Control resources used Speed axis 40 Positioning axis 80 Synchronous axis 160 External encoder 80 Measuring input 40 Output cam 20 Cam track 160 You can find an overview of the Motion Control resources of a CPU in the TIA Portal under "Tools > Resources". Extended Motion Control Resources (S7-1500T) The cam and kinematics technology objects use "Extended Motion Control resources". For information on the maximum number of cams and kinematics that can be used in addition to the Motion Control resources, refer to the technical specifications of the relevant CPU. Technology object Extended Motion Control resources used Cam 2 Kinematics 30 Application cycle As the number of technology objects used increases, the computing time needed by CPU to process the technology objects increases. The Motion Control application cycle (Page 95) can be adapted according to the number of technology objects used. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.1 Axis types Axes can be configured with different axis types: Positioning and synchronous axes can be configured as rotary or linear axis. Speed axes are always rotary axes. Depending on the execution of the mechanics, an axis is implemented as a linear axis or rotary axis: Linear axis For linear axes, the position of the axis is specified as a linear measure, e.g. millimeters (mm). Rotary axis For rotary axes, the position of the axis is specified as an angular measure, e.g. degrees (). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 31 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.2 Units of measure The supported units of measure for speed (revolutions per time unit) are 1/s, 1/min and 1/h. The table below shows the supported units of measure for position and velocity: Position Velocity nm, m, mm, m, km mm/s, mm/min, mm/h, m/s, m/min, m/h, km/min, km/h in, ft, mi in/s, in/min, ft/s, ft/min, mi/h , rad /s, /min, rad/s, rad/min The acceleration is set accordingly as the position/s unit of measure. The jerk is set accordingly as the position/s unit of measure. The table below shows the supported units of measure for force and torque: Force Torque N, kN Nm, kNm lbf, ozf, pdl lbf in, lbf ft, ozf in, ozf ft, pdl in, pdl ft The unit of measure for time is permanently specified for the following technology objects: Technology object Time Speed axis, positioning/synchronous axis, external encoder s Output cam, cam track, measuring input ms Note When setting or changing the units of measure, take into consideration the effect on the display of parameter values and the user program: * Display of parameter values in the technology data block * Assignment of parameters in the user program * Input and display of the position and velocity in the TIA Portal * Setpoint settings by leading axes in synchronous operation All information and displays correspond to the selected unit of measure. The set units are displayed in the tag structure of the technology object .Units. The tag structure is described in the Appendix (Page 431) under the tags of the respective technology object. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.3 Modulo setting For the positioning axis, synchronous axis and external encoder technology objects, the "Modulo" setting can be activated. When an axis moves in only one direction, the position value continually increases. To limit the position value to a recurring reference system, you can activate the "Modulo" setting. When the "Modulo" setting is activated, the position value of the technology object is mapped onto a recurring modulo range. The modulo range is defined by the start value and the length. For example, to limit the position value of a rotary axis to a full rotation, the modulo range can be defined with start value = 0 and length = 360. As a result, the position value is mapped onto the modulo range 0 to 359.999. 3.2.4 Long-term accuracy Long-term accuracy means that the technological position from the accumulated encoder increments can be exactly determined (without a rounding error) and are thus always accurate. The long-term accuracy ensures the following: The axis position indicated by the control always corresponds to the real position. This means that the axis position can be exactly represented from the accumulated encoder increments. The calculated position in the controller does not deviate from the real position. Deviations occur without long-term accuracy, for example, due to rounding errors or conversions with finite accuracy. Non-modulo axes are stable over the long term until the numerical traversing range limit is reached. Modulo axes are accordingly stable at least as long as they do not exceed the numerical traversing range of 9.0E12 mm at 1000 increments per unit. You can use the following equation to estimate the time after which the traversing range is exceeded. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 33 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Example of the maximum traversing time Maximum position = 9.0E12 mm with a resolution of 1000 Ink / mm Velocity = 20.0 m/min = 2.0E4 mm/min The traversing time restarts when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: You have homed the axis with "MC_Home". You have changed the velocity of the axis A change in the velocity has the consequence that the traversing time changes accordingly. Avoiding exceeding the traversing range To prevent exceeding the traversing range, do the following before the maximum traversing time expires: Incremental encoder: Home the incremental encoder again. Absolute encoder: Perform an absolute encoder calibration with the default of the currently known position. 3.2.5 Drive and encoder connection 3.2.5.1 Brief description A drive is assigned to the "Speed axis" technology object. A drive and one to four encoders (only with S7-1500T) are assigned to the "Positioning axis" and "Synchronous axis" technology objects. An encoder is assigned to the "External encoder" technology object. The setpoint for the drive is specified either with PROFIdrive telegrams or using an analog output. The following connection options are available for an encoder: Encoder connected to drive Encoder to technology module PROFIdrive encoder connected directly to PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO The actual encoder value is transmitted exclusively via PROFIdrive telegrams. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 34 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes PROFIdrive PROFIdrive is the standardized drive technology profile for connecting drives and encoders via PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. Drives that support the PROFIdrive profile are connected according to the PROFIdrive standard. The current PROFIdrive specification is available at: http://www.profibus.com (http://www.profibus.com) Communication between the controller and drive/encoder is performed using various PROFIdrive telegrams. Each of the telegrams has a standardized structure. You can select the appropriate telegram according to the application. Control words and status words as well as setpoints and actual values are transmitted in the PROFIdrive telegrams. The PROFIdrive profile likewise supports the "Dynamic Servo Control" (DSC) control concept. DSC uses rapid closed loop position control in the drive. This can be used to solve highly dynamic Motion Control tasks. Analog drive connection Drives with analog setpoint interfaces are connected using an analog output and an optional enable signal. The speed setpoint is specified via an analog output signal (e.g. from -10 V to +10 V) from the PLC. Stepper motors Drives with a stepper motor interface are connected using telegram 3 and with the help of PTO (Pulse Train Output) pulse generators. For functional support of stepper motor operation, quantization of the control deviation can be set. Through the specification of a quantization, a range around the target position is defined in which no correction of the actual position is to be made. This prevents a possible oscillation of the stepper motor around the target position. Two types of quantization can be set: Quantization of the control deviation corresponding to the encoder resolution (.PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Mode = 1) This prevents oscillation of the stopped motor between two increment values, for example. This mode is especially helpful when using multiple encoders. With this setting, the quantization is adapted appropriately at an encoder switchover. This mode is helpful for stepper motors with encoders in which the resolution of the encoder is lower than the step size of the stepper motor. Direct specification of a value for quantization of the control deviation. (.PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Mode = 2, value setting in .PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Value) This mode is helpful for stepper motors with encoders in which the resolution of the encoder is greater than the step size of the stepper motor. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 35 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.5.2 PROFIdrive telegrams PROFIdrive telegrams are used to transfer setpoints and actual values, control and status words and other parameters between the controller and drive/encoder. When a PROFIdrive telegram is used for connection, the drives and encoders are handled and switched on in accordance with the PROFIdrive profile. The following table shows the possible PROFIdrive telegrams for various technology objects. Technology object Possible PROFIdrive telegrams Speed axis * 1, 2 * 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106 (actual encoder value is not evaluated) Positioning axis/synchronous axis Setpoint and actual encoder value in one drive telegram 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106 Setpoint and actual encoder value separately Setpoint in drive telegram 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106 Actual value from telegram 81, 83 External encoder Measuring 81, 83 input 1) 391, 392, 393 1) When using SINAMICS drives (measuring using SINAMICS measuring input) Telegram types The following table shows the supported PROFIdrive telegram types for the assignment of drives and encoders: Telegram Brief description Standard telegrams 11) 2 3 4 * Control word STW1, status word ZSW1 * Speed setpoint 16 bit (NSET), actual speed value 16 bit (NACT) * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) * Actual encoder value 2 (G2_XIST1, G2_XIST2) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 36 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Telegram Brief description 5 * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) (motor encoder) * Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)2) 6 * - Speed precontrol value - Position difference (XERR) - Kpc - Velocity precontrol of the closed loop position control Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) (motor encoder) * Actual encoder value 2 (G2_XIST1, G2_XIST2) * Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)2) - Speed precontrol value - Position difference (XERR) - Kpc - Velocity precontrol of the closed loop position control Siemens telegrams (with torque limiting) 102 103 105 * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) * Torque limiting * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) * Actual encoder value 2 (G2_XIST1, G2_XIST2) * Torque limiting * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) (motor encoder) * Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)2) * - Speed precontrol value - Position difference (XERR) - Kpc - Velocity precontrol of the closed loop position control Torque limiting S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 37 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Telegram Brief description 106 * Control words STW1 and STW2, status words ZSW1 and ZSW2 * Speed setpoint 32 bit (NSET), actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) (motor encoder) * Actual encoder value 2 (G2_XIST1, G2_XIST2) * Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)2) * - Speed precontrol value - Position difference (XERR) - Kpc - Velocity precontrol of the closed loop position control Torque limiting SIEMENS additional telegrams (torque data) 7503) * Additive setpoint torque * High and low torque limits * Torque actual values SIEMENS telegrams (measuring input) 4) 391 392 393 * Control word CU_STW1, status word CU_ZSW1 * Measuring input control word (MT_STW), measuring input status word (MT_ZSW) * Measuring input time stamp of negative (MT1...2_ZS_F) or positive edges (MT1...2_ZS_S) * Digital output 16 bit, digital input 16 bit * Control word CU_STW1, status word CU_ZSW1 * Measuring input control word (MT_STW), measuring input status word (MT_ZSW) * Measuring input time stamp of negative (MT1...6_ZS_F) or positive edges (MT1...6_ZS_S) * Digital output 16 bit, digital input 16 bit * Control word CU_STW1, status word CU_ZSW1 * Measuring input control word (MT_STW), measuring input status word (MT_ZSW) * Measuring input time stamp of negative (MT1...8_ZS_F) or positive edges (MT1...8_ZS_S) * Digital output 16 bit, digital input 16 bit * Analog input 16 bit S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 38 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Telegram Brief description Standard telegrams - encoder 81 83 * Control word STW2_ENC, status word ZSW2_ENC * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) * Control word STW2_ENC, status word ZSW2_ENC * Actual speed value 32 bit (NACT) * Actual encoder value 1 (G1_XIST1, G1_XIST2) 1) Isochronous mode is not possible. 2) For use of Dynamic Servo Control (DSC), the motor encoder (first encoder in the telegram) of the drive must be used as the first encoder for the technology object. 3) Can also be used for the telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106 4) When using SINAMICS drives (measuring using SINAMICS measuring input) See also Data connection drive/encoder via data block (Page 50) 3.2.5.3 Actual values Brief description For position-controlled motion and positioning, the controller must know the actual position value. The actual position value is provided by a PROFIdrive telegram. The actual values are represented as incremental or absolute values in the PROFIdrive telegram. The actual values are normalized in the controller to the technological unit taking into account the configuration of the mechanics. The reference to a physical position of the axis or external encoder is established by homing. The controller supports the following types of actual values (encoder types): Incremental actual value Absolute actual value with the setting absolute (measuring range > traversing range of the axis) Absolute actual value with the setting absolute (measuring range < traversing range of the axis) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 39 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Actual value calculation for virtual axis or axis in simulation The actual value of a virtual axis or an axis in simulation is formed from the setpoint taking time delays into account. You calculate the time delay from actual value to the setpoint (Tt) as follows: With precontrol: Tt = Tipo + Tservo + Tvtc + TaddPtc Without precontrol, without DSC: Tt = Tipo + 1/Kv + TaddPtc Without precontrol, with DSC1: Tt = Tipo + Tservo + 1/Kv + TaddPtc 1 Only applies to axis in simulation. Tt Time delay from the actual value to the setpoint Tipo CPU time of MC-Interpolator [OB92] Tservo CPU time of MC-Servo [OB91] Tvtc Speed control loop substitute time (Tvtc off .DynamicAxisModel.VelocityTimeConstant) TaddPtc Additive position control loop equivalent time (TaddPtc from .DynamicAxisModel.AdditionalPositionTimeConstant) kV Gain factor (Kv off .PositionControl.Kv) See also Virtual axis (Page 50) Axis in simulation (Page 49) Incremental actual value The actual value in the PROFIdrive telegram is based on an incremental value. After POWER ON, position zero is displayed. A transition of the CPU to RUN mode starts the actual value update. The actual value is then also updated in CPU STOP mode. The relationship between the technology object and the mechanical position must be reestablished by means of homing. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 40 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Absolute actual value The actual value in the PROFIdrive telegram is based on an absolute value. After POWER ON, position zero is displayed. The first transition of the CPU to RUN mode starts the actual value update. The actual value is then also updated in CPU STOP mode. The supplied absolute value is assigned to the associated mechanical axis position by means of the absolute encoder adjustment. The absolute encoder adjustment must be performed once. The absolute value offset is retentively saved beyond the switching on/off of the controller. Differentiation of absolute values: The measuring range of the encoder is larger than the traversing range of the axis: Absolute value with setting absolute The measuring range of the encoder is smaller than the traversing range of the axis: Absolute value with setting cyclic absolute Absolute actual value with setting absolute (measuring range > traversing range) The axis position results directly from the current actual encoder value. The traversing range must be within an encoder measuring range. This means that the zero passage of the encoder must not be located in the traversing range. When the controller is switched on, the axis position is determined from the absolute actual encoder value. Absolute actual value with setting cyclic absolute (measuring range < traversing range) The encoder supplies an absolute value within its measuring range. The controller includes the traversed measuring ranges and thus determines the correct axis position beyond the measuring range. When the controller is switched off, the traversed measuring ranges are saved in the retentive memory area of the controller. At the next power-on, the saved traversed measuring ranges are taken into account in the calculation of the actual position value. NOTICE Movements of the axis while the controller is switched off can skew the actual value If the axis or the encoder is moved by more than half of the encoder measuring range while the controller is switched off, then the actual value in the controller is no longer in accord with the mechanical axis position. See also Absolute value adjustment (Page 85) Tags The tags named in the Homing (Page 87) section are relevant for adapting actual values. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 41 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.5.4 Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device Identical reference values for the drive and encoder connections must be set in the controller and in the drive and encoder for the operation. The speed setpoint NSET and the actual speed value NACT are transferred in the PROFIdrive telegram as a percentage of the reference speed. The reference value for the speed must be set identically in the controller and in the drive. The resolution of the actual value in the PROFIdrive telegram must likewise be set identically in the controller and in the drive and encoder modules Automatic transfer of parameters The drive and encoder parameters can be automatically applied in the CPU for the following drives and encoders. SINAMICS drives (see compatibility list (Page 555)) PROFIdrive encoder as of product version A16 The corresponding parameters are transferred after the (re-)initialization of the technology object or (re)start of the drive and the CPU. Changes in the drive configuration are transferred after restart of the drive or technology object. Successful transfer of the parameters can be checked in the controller in the value of the tags of the technology objects .StatusDrive.AdaptionState = 2 and .StatusSensor[n].AdaptionState = 2. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 42 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Parameters The controller settings are made in the TIA Portal under "Technology object > Configuration > Hardware interface > Data exchange with the drive/encoder". The drive and encoder settings are made in the configuration or the respective hardware. The following table compares the settings in the TIA Portal, in the controller and the corresponding drive/encoder parameters: Setting in the TIA Portal Controller tag in the technology data block Drive parameter Automatic transfer Drive Telegram number Telegram input address .Actor.Interface.AddressIn Telegram number P922 - Telegram output address .Actor.Interface.AddressOut Reference speed in [1/min] .Actor.DriveParameter.ReferenceSpeed (SINAMICS drives: P2000) X Maximum speed of motor in [1/min] .Actor.DriveParameter.MaxSpeed (SINAMICS drives: P1082) X Reference torque in [NM] .Actor.DriveParameter.ReferenceTorque (SINAMICS drives: P2003) X Telegram .Sensor[n].Interface.AddressIn P922 - Encoder type .Sensor[n].Type P979[5] Encoder 1 - 0: incremental 1: absolute 2: cyclic absolute P979[15] Encoder 2 .Sensor[n].System P979[1] Bit0 Encoder 1 Encoder .Sensor[n].Interface.Addressout Measuring system 0: linear 1: rotary Resolution (linear encoder) .Sensor[n].Parameter.Resolution The grid spacing is specified on the nameplate of the encoder as a separation distance of the marks on the linear measuring system. X P979[11] Bit0 Encoder 2 P979[2] Encoder 1 X P979[12] Encoder 2 Increments per revolution (rotary encoder) .Sensor[n].Parameter.StepsPerRevolution Number of bits for fine resolution XIST1 (cyclic actual encoder value, linear or rotary encoder) .Sensor[n].Parameter.FineResolutionXist1 Number of bits for fine resolution XIST2 (absolute encoder value, linear or rotary encoder) .Sensor[n].Parameter.FineResolutionXist2 Differentiable encoder revolutions (rotary absolute encoder) .Sensor[n].Parameter.Determinable Revolutions P979[2] Encoder 1 X P979[12] Encoder 2 P979[3] Encoder 1 X P979[13] Encoder 2 P979[4] Encoder 1 X P979[14] Encoder 2 P979[5] Encoder 1 X P979[15] Encoder 2 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 43 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.5.5 Safety functions in the drive Safety functions ("Safety Integrated Basic Functions") in the SINAMICS drive are safetyoriented, internal drive functions with the goal of shutting down the respective drive safely. In addition, additional safety functions are available to monitor definable limits ("Safety Integrated Extended Functions"). The goal of these safety functions is to monitor that the respective limit is maintained, to signal the violation or to subsequently shut down the drive safely. To prevent the monitoring function from being triggered, it is necessary to switch the axis to the monitored operating mode with the user program or to keep it in this mode. The cooperation of the safety functions in the drive and the SIMATIC S7-1500 and S7-1500T are necessary to ensure fault-free plant operation. The technology objects speed axis, positioning axis and synchronous axis support the "Safety Integrated Basic Functions" of the drive. The technology object detects that the Basic Safety function is triggered and displays a corresponding warning (technology alarm 550 alarm response: Track setpoints) or alarm (technology alarm 421 - alarm response: Remove enable). No additional response must take place in the user program, especially for technology alarm 550, at the "Enable" input of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power" in the sense of a "shutdown". Shutdown of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power" by the user after technology alarm 421 is possible but not necessary. After acknowledgment and release of the drive by the actual safety function, the technology alarm can also be acknowledged at the respective technology object with the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset". The technology object is then enabled automatically, if "MC_Power.Enable" is still "TRUE". The "Safety Integrated Extended Functions" are not supported by the technology object independently. To prevent the extended safety functions from being triggered and thus preventing a disruption in plant operation, we recommend that you evaluate the status of the safety functions. This evaluation can take place in the user program by using or evaluating the status information of the "Safety Info Channels" (SIC). With the help of the corresponding Motion Control instruction, the axis can now stay within the monitored limit or reach it before a deviation is detected. If a safety function is applied to a following axis in active synchronous operation, one of the following two responses is required: End synchronous operation Adjust velocity of the leading axis accordingly Four status words are available in the SIC: S_ZSW1B S_ZSW2B S_ZSW3B S_V_LIMIT_B Two predefined PROFIdrive telegrams are available for transmission: Tel. 700 (contains the status words S_ZSW1B & S_V_LIMIT_B) Tel. 701 (contains all four status words and two additional control words) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 44 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Additional information Additional information on the safety functions in SINAMICS drives and on the SIC is available in the SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual. https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/99668646 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/99668646) The tables below provide an overview of the four SIC status words and the required response for each to prevent faults in plant operation. S_ZSW1B S_ZSW1B Bit Assignment 0 STO (active) 1 SS1 (active) Meaning Recommended response of the respective axis in the user program 1 Safe Torque Off active MC_Power can remain enabled (waiting). 0 Not active None 1 Safe Stop 1 active Drive brakes autonomously and goes into STO. 0 Not active 1 Safe Stop 2 active MC_Power remains enabled until STO. 2 SS2 (active) None Drive brakes autonomously and goes into SOS. MC_Power remains enabled. 3 SOS (active) 0 Not active None 1 Safe Operating Stop active MC_Power remains enabled. The drive must not move (monitoring takes place in the drive) 4 SLS (active) 0 Not active None 1 Safety-Limited Speed active MC_Power remains enabled. Not active None Safe Operating Stop selected MC_Power remains enabled. 0 Deselected None 1 Safety-Limited Speed selected Drop below velocity limit within the time specified by SLS. 0 Deselected None 1 Group alarm that a safety function was selected or became active Additional evaluation of the status words required to determine the triggering safety function. 0 5 6 7 SOS (selected) 1 SLS (selected) Internal event Velocity must be less than active velocity limit (see "Active SLS stage" or S_V_LIMIT_B). Braking with MC_Halt within the time permitted by SOS. For example, by specifying an override or a new dynamic limit (restriction with synchronous motion). The bit indicates that a safety function is active. (See also "Safety alarm") 0 8 Reserved No event - None - S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 45 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes S_ZSW1B Bit Assignment 9 Active SLS level 10 Meaning Recommended response of the respective axis in the user program SLS velocity limit Additional information on SLS (bit 6) - shows active velocity limit for SLS in levels (1... 4). This limit can be evaluated in the program to limit the current velocity of the axis as needed. Display bit 0 SLS velocity limit Display bit 1 11 Reserved - - 12 SDI positive 1 Safe Direction positive selected Reaching standstill or the positive velocity of the actual value of the axis (when SDI negative = 0) within the time specified by SDI. 0 Deselected None monitoring for positive direction. Safe Direction negative selected Reaching standstill or the negative velocity of the actual value of the axis (when SDI positive = 0) within the time specified by SDI. 13 SDI negative 1 0 Deselected None monitoring for negative direction. 14 ESR retraction 1 Extended stop and retraction required (not a Safety function) To be considered individually. You can find additional information in the SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual. https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/99668646 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/99668646) 15 Safety alarm 0 Not requested None 1 Effective If necessary, evaluate bit as group alarm to see whether a Safety alarm is pending in the alarm buffer. 0 Not effective None S_V_LIMIT_B S_V_LIMIT_B Bit Meaning Explanation SLS Speed limit Additional information on SLS (S_ZSW1B bit 6) (32-bit resolution with sign) Shows the selected / active velocity limit for SLS. If necessary, the velocity limit can be evaluated in the program to limit the current velocity of the axis as needed. Assignment 0 ... Velocity 31 setpoint limit S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 46 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes S_ZSW2B S_ZSW2B Meaning Recommended response of the respective axis 0 ... Reserved 3 - - 4 1 SLP area 2 selected Safe position in the area 2. Do not change the position using the user program any longer. 0 SLP area 1 selected Safe position in the area 1. Do not change the position using the user program any longer. Bit Assignment SLP selected position area 5, 6 Reserved - 7 SLP selected and user approval set 1 8 SDI positive Safety-Limited Position selected and user approval is set Status message (if required in the user program) 0 SLP not selected or user approval missing Application-dependent evaluation 1 Safe Direction positive selected Reaching standstill or the positive velocity of the actual value of the axis within the time specified by SDI. 0 Deselected None monitoring for positive direction 1 Safe Direction negative selected Reaching standstill or the negative velocity of the actual value of the axis within the time specified by SDI. Application-dependent evaluation (means that the SLP is selected and the safe position was confirmed by the user - see "Safe homing") (when SDI negative = 0) 9 SDI negative (when SDI positive = 0) 0 10, 11 Reserved - 12 Test stop active 1 13 14, 15 Deselected None monitoring for negative direction - Test stop active Status message (if required in the user program) Application-dependent evaluation 0 Not active None Test stop required 1 Test stop required Perform test stop 0 Not required None Reserved - - S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 47 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes S_ZSW3B S_ZSW3B Bit Assignment 0 Brake test 1 2 Setpoint value specification drive / external Active brake Meaning Recommended response of the respective axis 1 Brake test selected MC_Power remains enabled. Do not start travel motion with user program. 0 Deselected None - brake test is inactive (normal plant operation) 1 Specification for drive The speed setpoint is specified by the SBT function. 0 External specification (control) Application-dependent evaluation 1 Test brake 2 active The "normal" speed setpoint is in effect. Application-dependent evaluation - setpoint value specification through user program required Status message (if required in the user program) Application-dependent evaluation 0 Test brake 1 active Status message (if required in the user program) 1 Test active Status message (if required in the user program) 0 Inactive None 1 Test required Status message (if required in the user program) Application-dependent evaluation 3 4 Brake test active Brake test result Application-dependent evaluation Application-dependent evaluation 0 With error(s) Status message (if required in the user program) Application-dependent evaluation, test must usually be successful to guarantee safety of the brake. 5 Brake test complete 1 Run test Status message (if required in the user program) Application-dependent evaluation 0 Incomplete Status message (if required in the user program) 1 Closing the brake Closing external brake (when controlled by user program) 0 Opening the brake 1 Negative sign Status of the load sign if required in the user program 0 Positive sign Application-dependent evaluation Application-dependent evaluation, usually test is repeated 6 External brake request Application-dependent evaluation Opening external brake (when controlled by user program) Application-dependent evaluation 7 Current load sign 8 ... Reserved 13 - 14 Acceptance test SLP(SE) selected 1 Acceptance test SLP(SE) Status message (if required in the user program) selected Application-dependent evaluation 0 Deselected None Acceptance test 1 Acceptance test mode selected Status message (if required in the user program) mode selected 0 Deselected None 15 - Application-dependent evaluation S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 48 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.5.6 Axis in simulation S7-1500 Motion Control offers the option to move real axes in simulation mode. Speed, positioning and synchronous axes can thus be simulated without a connected drive and encoder in the CPU. When the simulation mode is activated, the drive and encoder connection does not need to be configured in the axis configuration, for example, if the drive configuration is not yet available at this time. The "Simulation" configuration can be changed during runtime of the user program (.Simulation.Mode). A valid drive and encoder connection is required when exiting the simulation. To use a technology object in simulation mode or with SIMATIC S7 PLCSIM, you need to use encoder 1 for closed loop position control of the axis. Applications For example, an axis is simulated for programming the machine application and assigned to the configured hardware later for commissioning. During commissioning, for example, not all hardware components are available. No axis motions should take place during commissioning. Characteristics in simulation mode An axis in simulation does not output setpoints to the drive and does not read any actual values of the encoder. The actual values (Page 39) are formed with a time delay from the setpoints. Hardware limit switches and home position switches have no effect. The technology objects measuring input (with signal detection via TM_Timer_DIDQ or SINAMICS measurement sensing input), output cam and cam track can also be used for axes in simulation. The following table shows the Motion Control instructions with adapted behavior in simulation mode: Motion Control instruction Characteristics in simulation mode MC_Power The axis is enabled immediately without waiting for feedback from the drive. MC_Home Homing jobs are executed immediately without simulated axis motion. MC_TorqueLimit The specified torque is not output to the drive. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 49 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.5.7 Virtual axis S7-1500 Motion Control offers the possibility to configure an axis as a virtual axis. A virtual axis has motion control, but, in contrast to real axes, no drive and encoder connection. The setpoints are only processed within the controller and no real drive is controlled. Application: A virtual axis, for example, is often used as a virtual leading axis in order to generate the setpoints for several real following axes in synchronous operation. The "Virtual axis" configuration can only be changed by a new download to the CPU (in STOP mode) (.VirtualAxis.Mode). The behavior of a virtual axis is identical to the behavior of an axis in simulation (Page 49). 3.2.5.8 Data connection drive/encoder via data block The data connection of PROFIdrive drives and encoders occurs either directly via the PROFIdrive telegram or via a data block. Use the system-generated tags of the PROFIdrive telegrams if you want to evaluate the telegram contents. Use the connection via data block if you want to influence or evaluate telegram contents in the user program for process-specific reasons. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 50 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Principle of data connection via data block Generally, at the start of closed loop position control of the axis (by MC-Servo [OB91]), the input area of the drive or encoder telegram is read. At the end of closed loop position control, the output area of the drive or encoder telegram is written. To influence or evaluate telegram contents for process-specific reasons, a data interface via a data block must be connected in between before and after the closed loop position control. The input area of the telegram can be edited using the MC-PreServo [OB67] organization block. The MC-PreServo is called before the MC-Servo. The input area of the telegram can be edited using the MC-PostServo [OB95] organization block. The MC-PostServo is called after the MC-Servo. The data block must be created by the user and contain a data structure of data type "PD_TELx" for the data connection. Here, "x" stands for the telegram number of the drive or encoder configured in the device configuration. The organization blocks MC-PreServo and MC-PostServo can be programmed by the user and must be added with the command "Add new block". The connection to the I/O via telegram must be programmed in this organization block. When you use DSC you have to edit the signs of life in the telegrams in MC-PreServo and MC-PostServo yourself according to the PROFIdrive standard. See also PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) Organization Blocks for Motion Control (Page 95) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 51 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.5.9 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for the drives and encoder connections: Drive telegram .Actor.Interface.AddressIn Input address for the PROFIdrive telegram .Actor.Interface.AddressOut Output address for the PROFIdrive telegram or the analog setpoint .Actor.DriveParameter.Reference Speed Reference value (100%) for the speed setpoint (NSET) of the drive .Actor.DriveParameter.MaxSpeed Maximum value for the speed setpoint of the drive (NSET) .Actor.DriveParameter.Reference Torque Reference torque for the torque transferred as a percentage Encoder telegram .Sensor[n].Interface.AddressIn Input address for the PROFIdrive telegram .Sensor[n].Interface.AddressOut Output address for the PROFIdrive telegram .Sensor[n].System Encoder system linear or rotary .Sensor[n].Type Encoder type, incremental, absolute or cyclic absolute .Sensor[n].Parameter.Resolution Resolution for linear encoder The grid spacing corresponds to the distance between two marks. .Sensor[n].Parameter.StepsPer Revolution Steps per revolution for rotary encoder .Sensor[n].Parameter.Determinable Number of differentiable encoder revolutions for a multiRevolutions turn absolute encoder Fine resolution .Sensor[n].Parameter.Fine ResolutionXist1 Number of bits for fine resolution XIST1 (cyclic actual encoder value) .Sensor[n].Parameter.Fine ResolutionXist2 Number of bits for fine resolution XIST2 (absolute value of encoder) Simulation mode .Simulation.Mode Simulation mode 0: No simulation, normal operation 1: Simulation mode S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 52 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.6 Mechanics 3.2.6.1 Brief description For the display and processing of the technology object's position, the decisive factor is whether the position is represented as a unit of length (linear axis) or a unit of angle (rotary axis). Examples of units of length: mm, m, km Examples of units of angle: , rad For the determination of the physical position from an actual encoder value, the system must know the various properties and configurations of the mechanics. Positioning axis/synchronous axis The following configuration options for mechanics are supported: Load gear Leadscrew pitch (linear axes only) Encoder mounting type: - Motor side (before the load gear) - Load side (after the load gear and as applicable the leadscrew) - External (e.g. odometer) Inversion of drive direction Inversion of encoder direction External encoder The following configuration options for mechanics are supported: Measuring gear (for rotary encoders) Leadscrew pitch (only with linear system of units and rotary encoders) Inversion of encoder direction Speed axis The following configuration options for mechanics are supported: Load gear Inversion of drive direction S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 53 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.6.2 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for the setting of the mechanics: Type of motion .Properties.MotionType Indication of linear or rotary motion 0: Linear motion 1: Rotary motion Load gear .LoadGear.Numerator Load gear numerator .LoadGear.Denominator Load gear denominator Leadscrew pitch .Mechanics.LeadScrew Leadscrew pitch Encoder mounting type .Sensor[n].MountingMode Encoder mounting type .Sensor[n].Parameter.Distance PerRevolution Load distance per encoder revolution with an externally mounted encoder Inversion .Actor.InverseDirection Setpoint inversion .Actor.Efficiency Efficiency of leadscrew pitch .Sensor[n].InverseDirection Actual value inversion Modulo .Modulo.Enable Enable modulo .Modulo.Length Modulo length .Modulo.StartValue Modulo start value S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 54 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.7 Traversing range limitation 3.2.7.1 Brief description Hardware and software limit switches limit the permissible traversing range and operating range of the positioning axis/synchronous axis. Before use, they must be enabled in the configuration or in the user program. The following figure shows the relationship between the operating range, maximum traversing range and limit switches: 3.2.7.2 Mechanical endstop Hardware limit switches Software limit switches Maximum traversing range Operating range Hardware limit switches Hardware limit switches are limit position switches that limit the maximum permissible traversing range of the axis. Select the positions of the hardware limit switches so that there is adequate braking distance for the axis when needed. The axis should come to a standstill before a mechanical endstop. Approaching the hardware limit switches In the monitoring of range limitation, no distinction is made as to whether the switches are reached or crossed. If a hardware limit switch is reached, technology alarm 531 is output, and the technology object is disabled (alarm response: remove enable). Exception If the hardware limit switches are used as reversing cams or reference cams during homing, then the monitoring of the hardware limit switches has no effect. When hardware limit switches are used as reversing cams, the axis is braked with the deceleration configured in the dynamic defaults. This must be taken into account when planning the distance of the hardware limit switch to the mechanical endstop. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 55 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Retracting The position of the axis when the hardware limit switch is detected is stored internally on the CPU. The status of the reached hardware limit switch is reset only after the hardware limit switch is left and the axis is once again in the maximum traversing range. To retract the axis after it reaches the hardware limit switch and to reset the status of the hardware limit switch, follow the steps below: 1. To enable motion in the retraction direction, acknowledge the technology alarm. 2. Traverse the axis in the retraction direction until the hardware limit switch is left. The axis must then be within the maximum traversing range. If you move the axis opposite the retraction direction before the hardware limit switch is left, the monitoring will be triggered again. The following chart shows the behavior of the status word when the hardware limit switch is reached and when the axis is retracted: .StatusWord.X17 (HWLimitMinActive) 0: Negative hardware limit switch not reached 1: Negative hardware limit switch reached or overtraveled .StatusWord.X18 (HWLimitMaxActive) 0: Positive hardware limit switch not reached 1: Positive hardware limit switch reached or overtraveled The position of the axis when the positive hardware limit switch is detected is saved internally in the CPU. To reset the status of the hardware limit switch, the axis position must fall short of this position. The position of the axis when the negative hardware limit switch is detected is saved internally in the CPU. To reset the status of the hardware limit switch, the axis position must go past this position. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 56 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.7.3 Software limit switch The operating range of the axis is limited with software limit switches. Relative to the traversing range, always position the software limit switches within the hardware limit switches. Since the positions of the software limit switches can be flexibly configured, the operating range of the axis can be individually adapted in accordance with the current velocity profile. Software limit switches are only in effect when there is a valid actual value after homing the technology object. The monitoring of the software limit switches is relative to the setpoint. Modulo enabled With modulo enabled, the modulo position is monitored. The software limit switches are configured and activated in the axis configuration. The software limit switches can be activated or deactivated in the user program using the .PositionLimits_SW.Active tag, If the positions of both software limit switches are outside the modulo range, the monitoring has no effect. No check is made to determine whether the positions of the software limit switches are within the modulo range. Approaching the software limit switches The axis continually checks the position of the software limit switch during motion and brakes to exactly this position, if necessary. If the software limit switches are reached, then technology alarm 533 is output, and the axis is stopped with the maximum dynamic values (alarm response: Stop with maximum dynamic values). The technology object remains enabled. Overrun of the software limit switches If a software limit switch is crossed, technology alarm 534 is output, and the technology object is disabled (alarm response: remove enable). Retracting To retract the axis after violation of the software limit switch, follow the steps below: 1. Acknowledge the technology alarm. 2. Move the axis in the retraction direction until the software limit switch is left. If you move the axis opposite the retraction direction before the software limit switch is left, the monitoring with be triggered again. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 57 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.7.4 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for software limit switches: Status indicators .StatusWord.X15 (SWLimitMinActive) Negative software limit switch is active .StatusWord.X16 (SWLimitMaxActive) Positive software limit switch is active .ErrorWord.X8 (SWLimit) An alarm is pending, that a software limit switch was violated Control bits .PositionLimits_SW.Active Enables / disables the monitoring of the software limit switches Position values .PositionLimits_SW.MinPosition Position of the negative software limit switch .PositionLimits_SW.MaxPosition Position of the positive software limit switch The following technology object tags are relevant for hardware limit switches: Status indicators .StatusWord.X17 (HWLimitMinActive) Negative hardware limit switch is active .StatusWord.X18 (HWLimitMaxActive) Positive hardware limit switch is active .ErrorWord.X9 (HWLimit) An alarm is pending; a hardware limit switch was violated Control bits .PositionLimits_HW.Active Enables / disables the monitoring of the hardware limit switches Parameters .PositionLimits_HW.MinSwitchLevel Level selection for activation of the low hardware limit switch: FALSE: At low level, the signal is active TRUE: At high level, the signal is active .PositionLimits_HW.MinSwitchAddress Byte number of the I/O address of the hardware limit switch for the low or minimum position .PositionLimits_HW.MaxSwitchLevel Level selection for activation of the high hardware limit switch: FALSE: At low level, the signal is active TRUE: At high level, the signal is active .PositionLimits_HW.MaxSwitchAddress Byte number of the I/O address of the hardware limit switch for the high or maximum position S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 58 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.8 Motion control and limits for dynamics 3.2.8.1 Brief description Motion control of the axis occurs by means of velocity profiles (Page 60). The velocity profiles are calculated in accordance with the specifications for dynamics. A velocity profile defines the behavior of the axis during approach, braking and changes in velocity. During positioning a velocity profile is calculated, that moves the axis to the target point. Maximum values for velocity, acceleration and jerk result from the properties of the drive and the mechanics. These maximum values can be configured in the limits for dynamics. The limits for dynamics are in effect as limits for every motion generated by means of the technology object. The dynamic limits have no effect on a following axis in synchronous operation. The configurable emergency stop deceleration (Page 62) is triggered by the Motion Control instruction MC_Power or by a technology alarm. The jerk limit reduces the mechanical load during an acceleration ramp or deceleration ramp. A "smoothed" velocity profile results. See also Dynamic limits in synchronous operation (Page 62) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 59 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.8.2 Velocity profile Velocity profiles with or without jerk limitation are supported for motion control of the axis. The dynamic values for the motion are specified in the Motion Control job. Alternatively, the values of the dynamic defaults (Page 207) can be used. The defaults and the limits for velocity, acceleration, deceleration and jerk are set in the configuration. To influence velocity, a velocity override can override the current traversing velocity. Velocity profile without jerk limitation The following figure shows velocity, acceleration and jerk: Acceleration Deceleration S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 60 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Velocity profile with jerk limitation The following figure shows velocity, acceleration and jerk: Acceleration Deceleration A velocity profile with jerk limitation is employed for a continuous acceleration and deceleration sequence. The jerk can be specified. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 61 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.8.3 Emergency stop deceleration When stopping with the emergency stop ramp, the axis is braked to a standstill without a jerk limit, using the configured emergency stop deceleration. In the following cases the configured emergency stop deceleration is in effect: For an emergency stop ramp that has been enabled via the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power" with parameter "StopMode" = 0. For a technology alarm with the local alarm response "Stop with emergency stop ramp". This emergency stop deceleration can be set greater than the maximum deceleration. If the emergency stop deceleration is set lower than this, it may occur that the axis does not stop until after the limit switch in the case of "Stop at software limit switch" and the occurrence of a technology alarm with the local alarm response "Stop with emergency stop ramp". 3.2.8.4 Dynamic limits in synchronous operation Dynamic limits in synchronous operation with MC_GearIn Leading axis The dynamic limits configured for the technology object are always in effect for the leading axis. Following axis If a synchronous axis is operated as a following axis in synchronous operation with MC_GearIn, the following dynamic limits apply depending on the phase of the synchronous operation. Synchronization During the synchronizing phase, dynamic limits configured for the technology object apply to the following axis. Synchronous motion When the synchronous axis is moving synchronously to the leading axis as a following axis, the dynamics of the following axis is limited only to the maximum speed of the drive (.Actor.DriveParameter.MaxSpeed). The dynamics of the following axis results from the synchronous operation function. If the dynamic limits configured for the following axis are exceeded, this will be indicated in the technology object tag StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord. If the following axis cannot follow the leading value, this results in a following error, which is monitored by the following error monitoring. Synchronous operation override As soon as synchronous operation has been overridden, the dynamic limits configured for the technology object apply to the following axis again. With the start of the overriding job, the active dynamics is transitioned (smoothed) to the configured dynamic limits and the specifications for the Motion Control instruction. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 62 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes See also StatusSynchronizedMotion tags (synchronous axis) (Page 469) Override response V4: Synchronous operation jobs (Page 429) 3.2.8.5 Torque limits Force/torque limiting Adjustable force/torque limiting is available for the speed axis, positioning axis and synchronous axis technology objects. The force/torque limiting can be activated and deactivated before and during a motion job. To use force/torque limiting, the drive and the PROFIdrive telegram must support torque reduction. A telegram 10x can be used. The limit value can be configured as a default value during configuration of the axis or it can be defined in the user program using Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting". The user specifies the limiting values in the configured unit of measure for force or torque. The units of measure are defined in the "Basic parameters" configuration window. The following configuration options are available for force/torque limiting. "Linear" axis type - Torque limiting is active on motor side - Force limiting is active on the load side "Rotary" axis type - Torque limiting is active on load side or motor side The force/torque limit defined by the user in accordance with the specification in the PROFIdrive telegrams 10x are transferred internally to the drive as a percentage torque reduction. The reference torque set in the "Data exchange with the drive" configuration dialog must match the reference torque set for the drive. Linear axis type Load-side force limitation you have defined is converted by the technology into torque reduction. If the limiting relates to the load side, the gear and leadscrew parameters defined in the "Mechanics" configuration dialog are taken into consideration. If the gear and leadscrew efficiency is crucial, you can set them in the .Actor.Efficiency tag. Rotary axis type: The torque is reduced on the load side with the rotary axis type. The gear parameters defined in the "Mechanics" configuration window are taken into consideration. If the efficiency of the gear is crucial, you can set them in the .Actor.Efficiency tag. The defined limiting values act as an absolute value and thus in the same way for positive and negative forces/torques. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 63 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Positioning and following error monitoring with active force/torque limiting As a result of force/torque limiting, a larger setpoint-actual value difference can build up for position-controlled axes, which may cause unwanted activation of the positioning and following error monitoring. Therefore, in the "Torque limiting" configuration window, the positioning and following error monitoring of the axis can be set as deactivated by default when force/torque limiting is active. If necessary, the positioning and following error monitoring can also be kept active even when force/torque limiting is active. Typical behavior of a positioning or synchronous axis with active force/torque limiting With active force/torque limiting, a larger setpoint-actual value difference can build up than during motion without force/torque limiting. Given a constant setpoint, the axis makes repeated attempts to reduce the following error. When the limiting values are increased or limiting is deactivated during active closed loop position control, the axis can accelerate briefly to reduce the following error. If the axis is switched to non-position-controlled operation, e.g. using "MC_MoveVelocity" with "PositionControlled" = FALSE, the following error is no longer in effect. Stopping an axis with active force/torque limiting When stopping an axis in position-controlled mode with "MC_Halt", the position setpoint and the velocity setpoint are used as basis. Torque limiting still remains active and any accumulated following error is reduced. The axis is at a standstill when the actual velocity "0.0" is reached and the minimum dwell time in the standstill window has expired. The axis remains enabled. When stopping an axis with "MC_Power" and an emergency stop ramp, the actual position value and the actual velocity are used as a basis. The axis is braked with the configured emergency stop deceleration without any jerk limit and brought to a standstill. The axis is then disabled when at a standstill. When the limitation is deactivated the drive attempts to compensate for the resulting following error with maximum dynamic values. To avoid this reaction, use "MC_MoveVelocity" with deactivated closed loop position control. See also MC_TorqueLimiting: Activate and deactivate force/torque limit / fixed stop detection V4 (Page 417) Fixed stop detection (Page 65) Configuration - Torque limits (Page 190) Configuration - Torque limits (Page 214) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 64 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Fixed stop detection With the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting", you activate and monitor a fixed stop detection. Together with a position-controlled motion job, a "Travel to fixed stop" can be realized. The operation is also referred to as clamping. "Travel to fixed stop" can be used, for example, to move quills against the workpiece with a specified torque. The fixed stop detection is configured in the configuration window "Extended parameters" > "Limits" > "Fixed stop detection". The fixed stop detection is only possible in position-controlled operation of the axis. If the drive and telegram support force/torque limiting, this is active during travel to fixed stop and for clamping. Detection of the fixed stop using following error If the drive is stopped by a mechanical fixed stop during a motion job, the following error is increased. When the following error configured in the configuration window "Extended parameters" > "Limits" > "Fixed stop detection" is exceeded, this is regarded as the fixed stop having been reached. When following error monitoring is activated, the configured following error must be greater than the following error for fixed stop detection. Clamping at the mechanical endstop When the fixed stop is reached, the active position-controlled motion job is aborted with CommandAborted. The setpoint is no longer changed and the following error remains constant. The closed loop position control remains active and the monitoring of the configured "Positioning tolerance" is activated The drive is in "Clamping" state. If the drive and frame support force/torque limiting, this continues to be active with active fixed stop detection. During clamping, the clamping force or clamping torque can be changed. The value in input parameter "Limit" of the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting" can be changed for this. Monitoring of the clamping If the actual position changes by a value greater than the configured "Positioning tolerance" during active clamping, this is regarded as the breaking away or turning back of the fixed stop. An alarm is triggered; the axis is disabled and the drive is stopped according to its configuration. If the position setpoint is within the configured "Positioning tolerance", the breaking away or turning back of the fixed stop cannot be detected. The configured position tolerance must be less than the configured following error for detection of clamping. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 65 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Retracting Retracting from the fixed stop is only possible with a position-controlled motion job in the opposite direction to the fixed stop. The "Travel to fixed stop" or "Clamping" function is ended when the "Positioning tolerance" is left in the retraction direction. See also Force/torque limiting (Page 63) Configuration - Fixed stop detection (Page 215) MC_TorqueLimiting: Activate and deactivate force/torque limit / fixed stop detection V4 (Page 417) Additive setpoint torque The Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueAdditive" allows you to apply additional torque in the drive. The additive setpoint torque is used for example in torque feedforward control or the specification of the tensile torque for winding applications. The following requirements must be fulfilled to set the additive torque setpoint: SINAMICS drive (see compatibility list (Page 555)) SIEMENS supplementary telegram 750 for transmitting the torque data to the drive The additional torque can be either positive or negative. The value specified in the instruction is a technological value, not a percentage. Set the unit of measure for the torque at the axis (default value: Nm). See also MC_TorqueAdditive: Specify additive torque V4 (Page 422) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 66 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Permissible torque range The Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueRange" allows you to set torque limits for the drive. The motion control instruction is used, for example, for winding applications in order to prevent the tearing of the material. The following requirements must be fulfilled to set the torque data: SINAMICS drive (see compatibility list (Page 555)) SIEMENS supplementary telegram 750 for transmitting the torque data to the drive The value specified in the instruction is a technological value, not a percentage. Set the unit of measure for the torque at the axis (default value: Nm). If you invert the setpoints at the technology object of the axis, the values for the high and low torque limit are output inverted and reversed. If the torque limitation is activated by specifying the high and low torque limit, the following monitorings and limits are deactivated: Following error monitoring Time limits for positioning monitoring Time limits for standstill monitoring Monitoring remains in effect if you have selected the option "Leave position-related monitoring enabled" under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Limits > Torque limiting". See also MC_TorqueRange: Set high and low torque limits V4 (Page 425) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 67 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.8.6 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for motion control: Status .StatusWord Status indicator for an active motion .Position Position setpoint .Velocity Velocity setpoint / speed setpoint .ActualPosition Actual position .ActualVelocity Actual velocity .ActualSpeed Actual speed of the motor (only with PROFIdrive drive type) .Acceleration Setpoint acceleration .ActualAcceleration Actual acceleration .StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord.X0 (MaxVelocityExceeded) Set to value TRUE when the maximum velocity configured for the following axis is exceeded during synchronous operation. .StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord.X1 (MaxAccelerationExceeded) Set to value TRUE when the maximum acceleration configured for the following axis is exceeded during synchronous operation. .StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord.X2 (MaxDecelerationExceeded) Set to value TRUE when the maximum deceleration configured for the following axis is exceeded during synchronous operation. .StatusMotionIn.FunctionState Status of the MotionIn function 0: No function activated 1: MotionInVelocity activated 2: MotionInPosition activated Override .Override.Velocity Velocity or speed override Dynamic limit values .DynamicLimits.MaxVelocity Dynamic limitation for maximum speed (mechanical) .DynamicLimits.Velocity Dynamic limitation for maximum speed (programmable) .DynamicLimits.MaxAcceleration Dynamic limitation for maximum acceleration .DynamicLimits.MaxDeceleration Dynamic limitation for maximum deceleration .DynamicLimits.MaxJerk Dynamic limitation for maximum jerk Defaults for the dynamics .DynamicDefaults.Velocity Default velocity .DynamicDefaults.Acceleration Default acceleration .DynamicDefaults.Deceleration Default deceleration .DynamicDefaults.Jerk Default jerk .DynamicDefaults.EmergencyDeceleration Emergency stop deceleration S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 68 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Torque limiting .TorqueLimiting.LimitDefaults.Torque Limiting torque .TorqueLimiting.LimitDefaults.Force Limiting force .TorqueLimiting.LimitBase Torque limiting motor or drive side 0: Motor side 1: Load side .TorqueLimiting.PositionBasedMonitorings Disable/enable positioning and following error monitoring 0: Deactivate 1: Keep active .StatusTorqueData.CommandAdditiveTorqueActive Additive torque setpoint function 0: Deactivated 1: Activated .StatusTorqueData.CommandTorqueRangeActive Torque limits function 0: Deactivated 1: Activated .StatusTorqueData.ActualTorque Actual torque of the axis Fixed stop detection .Clamping.FollowingErrorDeviation Value of the following error starting from which the fixed stop is detected .Clamping.PositionTolerance Position tolerance for the clamping monitoring 3.2.9 Homing 3.2.9.1 Brief description With homing, you create the relationship between the position in the technology object and the mechanical position. The actual position value in the technology object is assigned to a homing mark at the same time. This homing mark represents a known mechanical position. With incremental actual values this process is called homing; with absolute actual values it is called absolute encoder adjustment. Homing is a requirement for display of the correct position for the technology object and for absolute positioning. Homing is activated with the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 69 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Homing status The technology object tag .StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone) indicates whether the axis or external encoder technology object is homed. Type of homing Homing can occur by means of an independent homing motion (active homing), the detection of a homing mark during a motion initiated on the user side (passive homing) or a direct position assignment. A distinction is made between the following types of homing: Active homing Active homing initiates a homing movement and performs the necessary homing mark approach. When the homing mark is detected, the actual position is set to the value specified in MC_Home. It is possible to specify a home position offset. Retraction to the home position offset occurs automatically during the home position approach. When active homing starts, current traversing movements are aborted. Passive homing The homing job does not perform its own homing motion. When the homing mark is detected during a motion initiated on the user side, the actual position is set to the value specified in "MC_Home". Passive homing is also called homing on the fly. Direct homing With the homing job, the actual position is set directly to the value specified in "MC_Home" or is offset by this value. Absolute encoder adjustment The absolute encoder adjustment compares the existing absolute actual value with the value specified in "MC_Home". Homing mode Depending on the type of homing mark and homing mark search, a distinction is made among the following homing modes (Page 72): Homing with homing cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram Homing with zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram Homing with digital input S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 70 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.2 Terms Homing mark A homing mark is an input signal, on whose occurrence a known mechanical position can be assigned to the actual values. A homing mark can be: A zero mark The zero mark of an incremental encoder or an external zero mark is used as a homing mark. The zero mark is detected at the drive module or encoder module and transmitted in the PROFIdrive frame. Perform the setting and evaluation as an encoder zero mark or external zero mark at the drive module and encoder module. An edge at the digital input The negative or positive edge at a digital input is used as a homing mark. Reference cam If there are several zero marks in the traversing range, the reference cam is used to select a specific zero mark before or after the reference cam. Homing mark position This is the position assigned to the homing mark. The homing mark position corresponds to the home position minus the home position offset. Home position At the end of the active homing motion, the axis arrives at the home position. Home position offset The difference between the home position and the homing mark position is the home position offset. A home position offset only has an effect with active homing. The offset is traversed after the synchronization of the axis using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". For axes with modulo setting, the home position offset is always traversed with the direction setting for the shortest path. Direction reversal at the hardware limit switch (reversing cam) Hardware limit switches can be used as reversing cams in active homing. If the homing mark was not detected or was approached from the wrong side, the motion continues in the opposite direction after the reversing cam. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 71 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.3 Homing mode Various homing modes are available for the positioning axis/synchronous axis and external encoder technology objects with incremental encoders. The homing mode is set in the configuration. Homing with homing cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram The system checks for when the reference cam is reached. After the reference cam has been reached and left again in the assigned homing direction, zero mark detection is enabled via the PROFIdrive telegram. When the zero mark is reached in the pre-selected direction, then the actual position of the technology object is set to the homing mark position. Homing with zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram The system enables zero mark detection, as soon as the actual value of the technology object moves in the assigned homing direction. When the zero mark is reached in the specified homing direction, the actual position of the technology object is set to the homing mark position. Homing with digital input The system checks the state of the digital input, as soon as the actual value of the axis or encoder moves in the assigned homing direction. When the homing mark is reached (setting of the digital input) in the specified homing direction, the actual position of the technology object is set to the homing mark position. Note The digital inputs must be placed into the process image partition "PIP OB Servo". The filter time of the digital inputs must be set smaller than the duration of the input signal at the reference point switch. See also Homing SINAMICS drives with external zero marks (Page 555) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 72 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.4 Active homing with homing cam and zero mark The following examples show homing motions in the positive and negative directions. Example of homing in the positive direction The approach to the homing mark and the home position occurs in the positive direction. The following figure shows the homing motion with the following settings: Active homing with homing cam and zero mark Approach in the positive direction Homing in the positive direction Positive home position offset S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 73 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Example of homing in the negative direction The approach to the homing mark occurs in the negative direction by means of a direction reversal during the homing process. The approach to home position causes another direction reversal and occurs in the positive direction. The following figure shows the homing motion with the following settings: Active homing with homing cam and zero mark Approach in the positive direction Homing in the negative direction Positive home position offset S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 74 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Motion sequence The motion occurs in the following sequence: 1. Start of active homing via the "MC_Home" Motion Control instruction 2. Approach to reference cam 3. Detection of the reference cam in the homing direction and travel with homing velocity 4. Departure from the reference cam and travel to the homing mark With the departure from the reference cam, the detection of the homing mark is enabled. 5. Detection of the homing mark When the homing mark is detected, the position of the technology object is set depending on the configured mode: - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 3 Position = value in parameter "Position" minus .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 5 Position = value in the tag .Homing.HomePosition minus .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). 6. Approach to the home position - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 3 The axis moves to the position that is specified in the "Position" parameter. - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 5 The axis moves to the position that is specified in the .Homing.HomePosition tag. Note If the velocity cannot be reduced to the reference velocity between detection of the reference cam and the zero mark, homing is performed at the velocity present when the zero mark is crossed. See also Homing SINAMICS drives with external zero marks (Page 555) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 75 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.5 Active homing with zero mark The following figure shows an example of the homing motion with the following settings: Active homing with zero mark Homing in the positive direction Positive home position offset Motion sequence The motion occurs in the following sequence: 1. Start of active homing via the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" 2. Move to the homing mark in the homing direction with the homing velocity 3. Detection of the homing mark When the homing mark is detected, the position of the axis or encoder is set depending on the configured mode: - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 3 Position = value in parameter "Position" minus .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset - Parameter "Mode" to "MC_Home" = 5 Position = value in the tag .Homing.HomePosition minus .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 76 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). 4. Move to homing point - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 3 The axis moves to the position that is specified in the "Position" parameter. - Parameter "Mode" to "MC_Home" = 5 The axis moves to the position that is specified in the .Homing.HomePosition tag. See also Homing SINAMICS drives with external zero marks (Page 555) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 77 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.6 Active homing with digital input The following figure shows an example of the homing motion with the following settings: Active homing with digital input Approach in the positive direction Homing mark on the positive side of the digital input Positive home position offset Motion sequence The motion occurs in the following sequence: 1. Start of active homing via the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" 2. Detection of the positive edge at the digital input, while moving with homing velocity 3. Approach to the homing mark S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 78 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 4. Detection of the homing mark In the example, the negative edge of the switch at the digital input represents the homing mark. When the homing mark is detected, the position of the axis or encoder is set depending on the configured mode: - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 3 Position = value in parameter "Position" minus .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 5 Position = value in the tag .Homing.HomePosition minus .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). 5. Move to homing point - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 3 The axis moves to the position that is specified in the "Position" parameter. - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 5 The axis moves to the position that is specified in the .Homing.HomePosition tag. Note If the velocity on the span from the detection of the positive edge to the negative edge cannot be reduced to the homing velocity, then homing occurs at the velocity that exists when the homing mark is traversed. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 79 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.7 Passive homing with homing cam and zero mark The following figure shows an example of the homing motion with the following settings: Passive homing with homing cam and zero mark Homing in the positive direction Motion sequence The motion occurs in the following sequence: 1. Activation of passive homing using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". 2. Motion due to a Motion Control job from the application The detection of the reference cam and homing mark is enabled when the actual position value of the axis or encoder moves in the assigned homing direction. 3. Detection of the reference cam 4. Departure from the reference cam The departure from the reference cam enables the detection of the homing mark. 5. Detection of the homing mark When the homing mark is detected, the position of the axis or encoder is set depending on the configured mode: - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 2, 8 Position = value in parameter "Position" - Parameter "Mode" in "MC_Home" = 10 Position = value in tag .Homing.HomePosition S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 80 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S71500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). Note If the motion direction changes after departure from the reference cam and before detection of the homing mark, the reference cam must be detected again. The Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" remains enabled. 3.2.9.8 Passive homing with zero mark The following figure shows an example of the homing motion with the following settings: Passive homing with zero mark Homing in the positive direction S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 81 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Motion sequence The motion occurs in the following sequence: 1. Enablement of passive homing via the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". 2. Motion due to a Motion Control job from the application The detection of the homing mark is enabled when the actual position value of the axis or encoder moves in the assigned homing direction. 3. Detection of the homing mark When the homing mark is detected, the position of the axis or encoder is set depending on the configured mode: - Parameter "Mode" to "MC_Home" = 2, 8 Position = value in parameter "Position" - Parameter "Mode" to "MC_Home" = 10 Position = value in tag .Homing.HomePosition Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 82 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.9 Passive homing with digital input The following figure shows an example of the homing motion with the following settings: Passive homing with digital input Homing in the positive direction Homing mark on the positive side of the digital input S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 83 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Motion sequence The motion occurs in the following sequence: 1. Enablement of passive homing via the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". 2. Motion due to a Motion Control job from the application The detection of the homing mark at the digital input is enabled when the actual position value of the axis or encoder moves in the assigned homing direction. 3. Detection of the homing mark In the example, the falling edge of the switch at the digital input represents the homing mark. When the homing mark is detected, the position of the axis or encoder is set depending on the configured mode: - Parameter "Mode" to "MC_Home" = 2, 8 Position = value in parameter "Position" - Parameter "Mode" to "MC_Home" = 10 Position = value in tag .Homing.HomePosition Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). 3.2.9.10 Direction reversal at the hardware limit switch (reversing cam) During active homing, the hardware limit switch can optionally be used as a reversing cam. If the homing mark is not detected or the motion was not in the homing direction, the motion continues in the opposite direction with the approach velocity after the reversing cam. When the hardware limit switch is reached, the default settings for dynamics take effect. Deceleration with the emergency stop deceleration does not occur. NOTICE Avoid moving to a mechanical endstop Ensure by one of the following measures, that in a direction reversal the machine does not move to a mechanical endstop. * Keep the approach velocity low. * Increase the configured acceleration / deceleration. * Increase the distance between the hardware limit switch and the mechanical endstop. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 84 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.11 Direct homing Depending on the configured mode, the position of the positioning axis/synchronous axis or external encoder technology objects can be absolutely or relatively set with "MC_Home". Set actual position absolutely Proceed as follows to set the position absolutely: 1. In the "MC_Home" Motion Control instruction, enter the absolute position in the "Position" parameter. 2. Call the "MC_Home" Motion Control instruction with the "Mode" = 0 parameter. The position is set to the value specified in the "Position" parameter. Set actual position relatively Proceed as follows to set the position relatively: 1. In the "MC_Home" Motion Control instruction, enter the relative position in the "Position" parameter. 2. Call the "MC_Home" Motion Control instruction with the "Mode" = 1 parameter. The position is set to the current position plus the value specified in the "Position" parameter. 3.2.9.12 Absolute value adjustment In absolute value adjustment, Motion Control determines an absolute value offset, that is retentively stored on the CPU. Depending on the configured mode, the position of the axis or the encoder is absolutely or relatively set in the "MC_Home" Motion Control instruction. Parameter "Mode" = 7 (absolute specification of position) Position = value in parameter "Position" Parameter "Mode" = 6 (relative specification of position) Position = current position + value in parameter "Position" S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 85 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.13 Resetting the "Homed" status Incremental encoder In the following cases, the "Homed" status is reset, and the technology object must be rehomed. Error in sensor system/encoder failure Initiation of active homing with the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" with "Mode" = 3, 5 (after successful completion of the homing process, the status "Homed" is set again.) Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). Initiation of passive homing with the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" with "Mode" = 2, 8, 10 (after successful completion of the homing process, the status "Homed" is set again.) Replacement of the CPU Replacement of the SIMATIC Memory Card POWER OFF Memory reset Modification of the encoder configuration Restart of the technology object Restoration of the CPU factory settings Transfer of a different project into the controller Absolute encoder In the following cases, the "Homed" status is reset, and the technology object must be rehomed. Replacement of the CPU Modification of the encoder configuration Restoration of the CPU factory settings Transfer of a different project into the controller When you use a new absolute value encoder you need to home the absolute encoder once again. Resetting the memory of the CPU or upgrading a project does not require another absolute value adjustment. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 86 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.9.14 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for homing: Status indicators StatusWord.X11 (HomingCommand) Homing job running StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone) Technology object is homed ErrorWord.X10 (HomingFault) Error occurred during homing Approach to reference cam .Homing.ApproachDirection Start direction or approach direction for the approach to the reference cam .Homing.ApproachVelocity Velocity for the approach to the reference cam Approach to the homing mark .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.Direction Homing direction .Homing.ReferencingVelocity Velocity for the approach to the homing mark Move to homing point .Homing.ApproachVelocity Velocity for the move to homing point Positions .Homing.AutoReversal Reversal at the hardware limit switches .Homing.HomePosition Home position .StatusSensor[n].AbsEncoderOffset Calculated offset after the absolute encoder adjustment Parameters for active homing .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.Mode Homing mode .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.SideInput Side of the digital input .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.Direction Homing direction or approach direction .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.DigitalInputAddress Address of digital input .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.HomePositionOffset Offset of the homing mark from the home position Parameters for passive homing .Sensor[n].PassiveHoming.Mode Homing mode .Sensor[n].PassiveHoming.SideInput Side of the digital input .Sensor[n].PassiveHoming.Direction Homing direction or approach direction .Sensor[n].PassiveHoming.DigitalInputAddress Address of digital input Note Evaluation of the bits in StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord Read the information provided in section Evaluate StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 87 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.10 Position monitoring functions 3.2.10.1 Brief description The following functions are available in the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object for monitoring positioning and motion: Positioning monitoring (Page 88) The actual position value must reach a positioning window within a specified time, and remain in this positioning window for a minimum dwell time. Following error monitoring (Page 90) The following error is monitored based on a velocity-dependent following error limit. The permissible maximum following error depends on the velocity setpoint. If monitored conditions are violated, then technology alarms are output. The technology object responds in accordance with the alarm response. 3.2.10.2 Positioning monitoring Positioning monitoring monitors the behavior of the actual position at the end of the setpoint calculation. As soon as the velocity setpoint reaches the value zero, the actual position value must be located in the positioning window within a tolerance time. The actual value must not exit the positioning window during the minimum dwell time. If the actual position is reached at the end of a positioning motion within the tolerance time and remains in the positioning window for the minimum dwell time, then .StatusWord.X6 (Done) is set in the technology data block. After expiration of the minimum dwell time, the "Done" parameter of the corresponding Motion Control instruction is also set. This completes a motion job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 88 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes The following figure shows the chronological sequence and the positioning window: Positioning monitoring does not make any distinction between how the setpoint interpolation was completed. The end of setpoint interpolation can for example be reached as follows: by reaching of the target position on the part of the setpoint by position controlled stopping during the motion by the Motion Control instruction "MC_Halt" Violation of positioning monitoring In the following cases, technology alarm 541 is output by the positioning monitoring, and the technology object is disabled (alarm reaction: remove enable). The actual value does not reach the positioning window during the tolerance time. The actual value exits the positioning window during the minimum dwell time. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 89 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.10.3 Following error monitoring The following error in the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object is monitored based on a velocity-dependent following error limit. The permissible following error depends on the velocity setpoint. A constant permissible following error can be specified for velocities lower than an adjustable velocity low limit. Above this low velocity limit, the permissible following error increases in proportion to the velocity setpoint. The configurable maximum permissible following error is the maximum velocity limit. Calculation of the following error The following error is the difference between the position setpoint and the actual position value. The transmission times of the setpoint to the drive, and of the actual position value to the controller, are taken into account in the calculation of the following error, i.e. subtracted out. Warning limit A warning limit can be specified for the following error. The warning limit is input as a percentage value and operates relative to the current permissible following error. If the warning limit of the following error is reached, then technology alarm 522 is output. This is a warning and contains no alarm response. Violation of the permissible following error If the permissible following error is exceeded, then technology alarm 521 is output, and the technology object is disabled (alarm response: remove enable). When force/torque limiting is activated, the monitoring of the permissible following error can be deactivated. 3.2.10.4 Standstill signal When the actual velocity reaches the standstill window and remains there for the minimum dwell time, the standstill of the axis is indicated. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 90 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.10.5 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for position monitoring and for the standstill: Status indicators .StatusWord.X7 (Standstill) Set to the value TRUE when the actual velocity reaches the standstill window and does not exit it within the minimum dwell time. The standstill signal is only present for the positioning axis/synchronous axis. .StatusWord.X6 (Done) Positioning axis/synchronous axis Set to the TRUE, when the actual velocity value reaches the positioning window within the tolerance time and remains in the window for the minimum dwell time. Speed axis Set to TRUE, when the motion is complete and the speed setpoint is therefore equal to zero. .ErrorWord.X12 (PositioningFault) A positioning error has occurred. Positions and times .PositioningMonitoring.ToleranceTime Maximum permissible time until positioning window is reached The time is started with the end of the setpoint interpolation. .PositioningMonitoring.MinDwellTime Minimum dwell time in the positioning window .PositioningMonitoring.Window Positioning window Standstill signal .StandstillSignal.VelocityThreshold Velocity threshold for the standstill signal .StandstillSignal.MinDwellTime Minimum dwell time below the velocity threshold The following technology object tags are relevant for following error monitoring: Status indicators .StatusPositioning.FollowingError Current following error .ErrorWord.X11 (FollowingErrorFault) Status indication, that the following error is too large .WarningWord.X11 (FollowingErrorWarning) Status indication, that the following error warning limit has been reached Control bits .FollowingError.EnableMonitoring Enabling / disabling following error monitoring Limit values .FollowingError.MinVelocity Lower velocity setpoint for the characteristic curve of the maximum following error .FollowingError.MinValue Permissible following error below the .FollowingError.MinVelocity .FollowingError.MaxValue Maximum permissible following error at maximum axis velocity .FollowingError.WarningLevel Warning limit as a percentage value relative to the maximum permissible following error (velocitydependent in accordance with the characteristic curve) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 91 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.11 Closed-loop control 3.2.11.1 Brief description The position controller of the positioning axis / synchronizing axis is a proportional controller with velocity precontrol. Velocity precontrol The velocity precontrol can be used to minimize the velocity-based following error during position control. As a result, faster positioning is achieved, if needed, because the position controller only has to compensate disturbances. When using the velocity precontrol, the velocity setpoint is additionally added to the output of the position controller. You can weight this additional setpoint by a factor. Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) In drives that support Dynamic Servo Control (DSC), you can optionally use the closed-loop position controller in the drive. If you use telegrams that support DSC, DSC is automatically activated. The position controller in the drive is usually implemented with a rapid speedcontrol cycle. This improves the control performance for digitally coupled drives. The following requirements must be met to use DSC: The motor encoder (first encoder in the telegram) of the drive is used as the first encoder for the technology object. One of the following PROFIdrive telegrams is used for the drive: - Standard telegram 5 or 6 - SIEMENS telegram 105 or 106 See also PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 92 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.11.2 Control structure The following figure shows the effective closed loop control structure without DSC: Interpolator with motion control Communication between controller and drive Internal consideration of the signal propagation times and the speed-control loop substitute time The following figure shows the effective closed loop control structure with DSC: Interpolator with motion control Internal consideration of speed control loop substitute time Communication between controller and drive See also Configuration - Control loop (Page 228) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 93 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.11.3 Tags The following technology object tags are relevant for the closed-loop control: Parameters .PositionControl.Kv Proportional gain of the closed loop position control .PositionControl.Kpc Velocity precontrol of the positioning system (in %) .PositionControl.EnableDSC Enable DSC .DynamicAxisModel.VelocityTime Constant Speed control loop substitute time [s] .PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Mode Type of quantification Configuration of a quantization when a drive with stepper motor interface is connected 0: No quantification 1: Quantization corresponding to encoder resolution 2: Quantization to a direct value (value input in .PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Value) (configuration is performed using the parameter view (data structure)) .PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Value Value of quantification Configuration of a value for quantization to a direct value (.PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantization.Mode = 2) The quantization value is specified in the position unit of the axis. (configuration is performed using the parameter view (data structure)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 94 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.12 Process response 3.2.12.1 Organization Blocks for Motion Control Description When you create a technology object, organization blocks are automatically created for processing the technology objects. The Motion Control functionality of the technology objects creates its own execution level, and is called according to the Motion Control application cycle. The following blocks are created: MC-Servo [OB91] Calculation of the position controller MC-Interpolator [OB92] Evaluation of the Motion Control instructions, generation of setpoints and monitoring functionality The organization blocks are protected (know-how protection). The program code cannot be viewed or changed. The frequency relationship of the two organization blocks to one another is always 1:1. MC-Servo [OB91] is always executed before MC-Interpolator [OB92]. You can set the application cycle and the priority of the organization blocks according to your requirements for control quality and system load. MC-PreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95] In addition, you can create the organization blocks MC-PreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95]. The organization blocks MC-PreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95] can be programmed. They are called in the configured application cycle. This means you can use the organization blocks MC-PreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95] for consistent data processing or time-critical events, such as starting of motions or homing functions for the process that may have to run synchronously with the application cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 95 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Application cycle You can set the application cycle in which the MC-Servo [OB91] is called in the properties of the organization block in "General > Cycle Time": Synchronous to the bus MC-Servo [OB91] is called synchronously with or at a reduced ratio to a bus system. You set the send clock in the properties of the selected bus system. In the "Distributed I/O" drop-down list, you can select the following bus systems: - Isochronous PROFIBUS DP - Isochronous PROFINET IO You cannot call the MC-Servo [OB91] synchronously with a bus system that is connected to the CPU via a communications processor/communications module (CP/CM). Cyclic The MC-Servo [OB91] is called cyclically with the specified application cycle. The selected application cycle must be long enough to be able to process the technology objects in one cycle. If the processing time of the technology objects is longer than the application cycle, overflows (Page 98) will occur. In order to achieve optimal control quality, the calculations of the organization blocks MC-PreServo [OB67], MC-Servo [OB91] and MC-PostServo [OB95] must be performed within a send cycle. You can check the runtime of MC-Servo [OB91] and MC-Interpolator [OB92] with the expanded instruction "RT_INFO". The current application cycle (information in s) of the organization blocks MCPreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95] can be read using the start information. Reduction ratio (CPU V1.5 and higher) You can reduce the application cycle of the MC-Servo [OB91] relative to the send clock of an isochronous PROFINET IO system. You can set an integer multiple of the send clock as the factor. Values up to 14 times the send clock (maximum 32 ms) are possible for the application cycle. If you call an isochronous mode interrupt OB and the MC-Servo [OB91] synchronously with the same PROFINET IO system, you must set the same application cycle for both organization blocks. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 96 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Priority You can configure the priority of the organization blocks as needed in their properties under "General > Properties > Priority": MC-Servo [OB91] Priority 17 to 26 (default value 26) MC-Interpolator [OB92] Priority 16 to 25 (default value 24) The priority of MC-Servo [OB91] must be at least one higher than the priority of MC-Interpolator [OB92]. The priority of the organization blocks MC-PreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95] correspond to the priority of the MC-Servo [OB91]. MC-PreServo [OB67] is called immediately before MC-Servo [OB91]. MC-PostServo [OB95] is called immediately after MC-Servo [OB91]. See also Data connection drive/encoder via data block (Page 50) 3.2.12.2 Process image partition "OB Servo PIP" The process image partition "OB Servo PIP" is made available in isochronous mode for Motion Control when MC-Servo [OB91] is called. All drives and encoders used by Motion Control are assigned to this process image partition. Because the organization blocks MC-PreServo [OB67] and MC-PostServo [OB95] are called automatically by the MC-Servo [OB91], the process image partition is also available automatically. If you use a MC-PreServo [OB67], the data are read in when the MC-PreServo [OB67] starts. If you use a MC-PostServo [OB95], the data are output after the MC-PostServo [OB95]. Additionally, you should assign all I/O modules used by Motion Control to this process image partition (e.g. hardware limit switches). The assignment results in chronologically synchronous processing with the technology object. The input process image partition is also updated in STOP mode. Process image partition in the user program As of CPU version V1.5, you can access the process image partition "OB Servo PIP" in your user program. This makes it possible to evaluate the process image partition using the trace function. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 97 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes 3.2.12.3 Operational Sequence and Timeouts When processing the Motion Control functionality, the organization blocks MC-Servo [OB91] and MC-Interpolator [OB92] are called and processed in each application cycle. The remaining cycle time is available for the processing of your user program. For error-free program execution, keep to the following rules: In each application cycle, MC-Servo [OB91] must be started and executed completely. In each application cycle, the relevant MC-Interpolator [OB92] must at least be started. The following figure shows an example of the error-free operational sequence for the processing of organization block OB1: "TPA OB Servo" input "TPA OB Servo" output First OB1 cycle Second OB1 cycle S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 98 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Overflows Overflows can occur if the configured application cycle is not adhered to, for example because additional technology objects or programs are added in the MC-PreServo [OB67] or MC-PostServo [OB95]. The application cycle must be adapted in this case to prevent overflows. A message is generated in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU in the case of an overflow of MC-Servo [OB91] in the send clock. The controller no longer runs isochronously. The CPU switches to STOP mode in the case of an overflow of MC-Servo [OB91] in the application cycle. The following figure shows the behavior in the case of overflow of MC-Servo [OB91] in the application cycle and in the send clock with a reduction ratio of 2: "TPA OB Servo" input * Including MC-PreServo [OB67] and/or MC-PostServo [OB95], when in use "TPA OB Servo" output The execution of an MC-Interpolator [OB92] may only be interrupted by an MC-Servo [OB91] call. If more interruptions occur, the CPU switches to STOP mode. The following figure shows the operational sequence when an MC-Interpolator [OB92] is interrupted over two time slices: * Including MC-PreServo [OB67] and/or MC-PostServo [OB95], when in use The CPU tolerates a maximum of three consecutive overflows of MC-Interpolator [OB92]. If more overflows occur, the CPU switches to STOP mode. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 99 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes The following figure shows the operational sequence if there are four consecutive individual overflows of MC-Interpolator [OB92]: * Including MC-PreServo [OB67] and/or MC-PostServo [OB95], when in use 3.2.12.4 Operating modes This section examines the behavior of the Motion Control in the respective operating modes and in the transitions between operating modes. A general description of the operating modes can be found in the S7-1500 System Manual Operating modes and transitions The CPU has the following operating modes: STOP STARTUP RUN HOLD The following figure shows the operating modes and the operating mode transitions: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 100 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes Operating mode transitions The following table shows the behavior of the Motion Control in the transitions between the operating modes: No. Operating mode transition Behavior POWER ON STOP The CPU performs a restart of the technology objects. The technology objects are reinitialized with the values from the load memory. STOP STARTUP Not relevant for Motion Control. STARTUP RUN The process outputs are enabled. RUN STOP When the CPU changes from RUN mode to STOP mode, all technology objects are disabled in accordance with the alarm response "remove enable". Active Motion Control jobs are aborted. If restart-relevant data has been changed for technology objects in RUN, the CPU performs a restart of the corresponding technology objects. STARTUP HOLD Breakpoint in the start-up routine reached. HOLD STARTUP Not possible when using technology objects RUN HOLD Breakpoint reached HOLD RUN Not possible when using technology objects HOLD STOP By operation of switch/display or by setting to STOP from programming device. STOP mode In STOP mode the user program is not processed and all process outputs are disabled. Thus no Motion Control jobs are executed. The technology data blocks are updated. STARTUP mode Before the CPU starts processing of the cyclical user program, the startup OBs are processed one time. In STARTUP mode, the process outputs are disabled. Motion Control jobs are rejected. The technology data blocks are updated. RUN mode The user program is processed in RUN mode. In RUN mode, the programmed Motion Control jobs are cyclically called and processed. The technology data blocks are updated. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 101 Technology objects 3.2 Basics - Axes HOLD operating state Working with breakpoints is not supported when technology objects are used. An overflow of the MC-Servo occurs in each case. This leads to an immediate switch to STOP mode. In HOLD operating state, events are not initiated and the user program is not executed. All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings. Outputs supply a configured substitute value or keep the last value output and bring the controlled process to a safe operating state. When you reach a breakpoint, the CPU executes an implicit restart of the technology object. Homing the technology once again. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 102 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.3 Speed-controlled axis technology object 3.3 Speed-controlled axis technology object The speed axis technology object calculates speed setpoints, taking into account the dynamic settings, and outputs them to the drive. All motions of the speed axis take place as speed-controlled motions. An existing load gear is taken into account on the system side. You can find an overview of the functions of the speed axis technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. A drive is assigned to each speed axis by means of a PROFIdrive telegram or an analog setpoint interface. The speed is specified in revolutions per unit of time. The following figure shows the basic principle of operation of the speed axis technology object: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 103 Technology objects 3.4 Positioning axis technology object 3.4 Positioning axis technology object The positioning axis technology object calculates position setpoints, taking into account the encoderc settings, and outputs corresponding speed setpoints to the drive. In positioncontrolled mode, all movements of the positioning axis take place as position-controlled movements. For absolute positioning, the physical position must be known to the positioning axis technology object. You can find an overview of the functions of the positioning axis technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. Each positioning axis is assigned a drive by means of a PROFIdrive telegram or an analog setpoint interface as well as an encoder by means of a PROFIdrive telegram. The relationship between the encoder values and a defined position is established by the parameter assignment of the mechanical properties and encoder settings and by a homing operation. The technology object can also perform movements without a position relationship, and relative position movements, even without being in a homed status. A positioning axis can be configured as a linear axis or rotary axis (Page 31), depending on the design of the mechanics. The figure below shows the basic principle of operation of the positioning axis technology object: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 104 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.5 Synchronous axis technology object 3.5 Synchronous axis technology object 3.5.1 Short description for synchronous axis The synchronous axis technology object includes all functions of the positioning axis technology object. A synchronous axis can also follow the motions of a leading axis. The synchronous operation relationship between the leading and following axes is specified by a synchronous operation function. You can find an overview of the functions of the synchronous axis technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. The figure below shows the basic principle of operation of the synchronous axis technology object: See also Axis types (Page 31) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 105 Technology objects 3.5 Synchronous axis technology object 3.5.2 Synchronous operation phases By means of synchronous operation, a following axis can be linked to a leading axis and move synchronously with it. The synchronous operation proceeds in the following phases: Pending synchronous operation (S7-1500T) The following axis waits for the start conditions of the synchronizing motion. Synchronization The following axis is synchronized to the leading value. Synchronous motion The following axis follows the position of the leading axis according to the synchronous operation function. Synchronous operation override An active synchronous operation is overridden by motion jobs (e.g. MC_Halt) issued to the following axis. During these phases the dynamic limits apply as described in section Dynamic limits in synchronous operation (Page 62). Avoid homing the leading axis during an active synchronous operation. Homing the leading axis during synchronous operation corresponds to a setpoint step change on the following axis. The following axis compensates for the step change according to the synchronous operation function and limited only to the maximum speed of the drive. Note The leading values and following values are coupled without conversion into the relevant configured user unit. If, for example, a linear leading axis moves by 10 mm, a rotary following axis moves by 10 with at a gear ratio of 1:1. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 106 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.5 Synchronous axis technology object 3.5.3 Leading value coupling 3.5.3.1 Short description for leading value coupling The leading value for synchronous operation is provided by a leading axis. The leading value is specified and coupled in the user program with the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction for synchronous operation. The leading value is switched when you call the Motion Control instruction again specifying a different leading axis. The following rules apply to the leading value coupling: A leading axis can output the leading value to several following axes. The synchronous axis can be interconnected with different leading values. All interconnections required during operation must be set up during configuration of the technology object. Only one leading value at a time is coupled and evaluated. 3.5.3.2 Setpoint coupling With setpoint coupling, the position setpoint of the leading axis is used as the leading value for synchronous operation. The position setpoint of the following technology objects can be interconnected as the leading value for synchronous operation: Positioning axis Synchronous axis 3.5.4 Gearing with MC_GearIn During gearing the position of the following axis results from the position of the leading axis multiplied by the gear ratio. You specify the gear ratio as a ratio of two integers. The result is a linear synchronous operation function. Synchronous operation with MC_GearIn begins after synchronization when the following axis has reached the velocity and acceleration of the leading axis, taking into account the gear ratio. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 107 Technology objects 3.5 Synchronous axis technology object Synchronization Synchronization begins with the start of an "MC_GearIn (Page 413)" job. When a synchronous axis is synchronizing to a leading value, this is indicated in the technology object tag .StatusWord.X21 (Synchronizing). Active motion jobs are overridden. The dynamic values (acceleration, delay, jerk) of the following axis for the synchronization are specified at "MC_GearIn". The synchronization duration and distance are dependent on the following parameters: Start time of the "MC_GearIn" job Dynamics of the following axis at the start time Dynamic value settings for "MC_GearIn" Dynamics of the leading axis If the following axis has reached the velocity and the acceleration of the leading axis, taking into account the gear ratio, the following axis is synchronized. The following axis travels synchronously with the leading axis. Synchronous motion When a synchronous axis is synchronized to a leading value, the "Synchronous" status is indicated by parameter "MC_GearIn.InGear" = TRUE as well as in the technology object tag .StatusWord.X22 (Synchronous). The following axis follows the dynamics of the leading axis according to the gear ratio. The response characteristic during gearing is expressed by a linear relationship between the leading value and following value. Gear ratio Slope of line/transmission ratio Gear ratio = MC_GearIn.RatioNumerator/MC_GearIn.RatioDenominator Synchronization Position starting from which the leading and following axes move synchronously Position is dependent on the above-named parameters (see Synchronization). The following value is calculated according to the following function: Position of following axis (following value) = Position of following axis + gear ratio x (Position of leading axis - Position of leading axis) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 108 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.5 Synchronous axis technology object Direction The numerator of the gear ratio is specified as positive or negative. This yields the following behavior: Positive gear ratio: The leading and following axes move in the same direction. Negative gear ratio: The following axis moves in the opposite direction of the leading axis. See also MC_GearIn: Start gear synchronization V4 (Page 413) Tags for synchronous operation (Page 109) MC_MoveSuperimposed: Position axes overlapping V4 (Page 395) Dynamic limits in synchronous operation (Page 62) 3.5.5 Tags for synchronous operation The following technology object tags are relevant for synchronous operation: Status indicators .StatusSynchronizedMotion.ActualMaster When a synchronous operation job is started, the number of the technology data block of the currently used leading axis is displayed. .StatusSynchronizedMotion.PhaseShift Current absolute leading value shift .StatusWord.X21 (Synchronizing) Set to value TRUE when the synchronous axis synchronizes to a leading value. .StatusWord.X22 (Synchronous) Set to value TRUE when the synchronous axis is synchronized and moves synchronously to the leading axis, .ErrorWord.X14 (SynchronousError) Error during synchronous operation "ActualMaster" = 0 when synchronous operation is inactive The leading axis specified in the Motion Control instruction was not configured as a possible leading axis. .StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord.X0 (MaxVelocityExceeded) Set to value TRUE when the maximum velocity configured for the following axis is exceeded during synchronous operation. .StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord.X1 (MaxAccelerationExceeded) Set to value TRUE when the maximum acceleration configured for the following axis is exceeded during synchronous operation. .StatusSynchronizedMotion.StatusWord.X2 (MaxDecelerationExceeded) Set to value TRUE when the maximum deceleration configured for the following axis is exceeded during synchronous operation. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 109 Technology objects 3.6 Technology object external encoder 3.6 Technology object external encoder The external encoder technology object detects a position, and makes it available to the controller. The actual position detected by the external encoder can be used for the following functions, for example: Measured value acquisition by a measuring input Position-dependent generation of switching signals and switching signal sequences by output cam and cam track with actual value reference. As a leading value of a synchronous axis (S7-1500T) You can find an overview of the functions of the external encoder technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. The relationship between the encoder values and a defined position is established by the parameter assignment of the mechanical properties and encoder settings and by a homing operation. The following figure shows the basic principle of operation of the external encoder technology object: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 110 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.6 Technology object external encoder Specification of the position occurs according to the selected system of units: Linear system of units The position is specified as a linear measure, e.g. millimeters. Rotary system of units The position is specified as an angular measure, e.g. degrees. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 111 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input 3.7 Technology object measuring input 3.7.1 Brief description The measuring input technology object acquires the actual position of an axis or external encoder at a signal change at the measuring input. You can find an overview of the functions of the measuring input technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. The figure below shows the basic principle of operation of the measuring input technology object: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 112 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Measurement types Two types of measurement can be performed: One-time measurement (Page 116) Up to two measured values are acquired with edge accuracy with one measuring job. A one-time measuring job is started with "MC_MeasuringInput". Cyclic measuring (Page 117) With cyclic measuring, up to two measured values are acquired with edge accuracy in each position control cycle. A cyclic measuring job is started with "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic". The measurements are continued cyclically until they are ended per command. The edges to be detected are selected when starting the measurement using Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" or "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic". Assignment The measuring input technology object must always be assigned to another technology object whose position will be evaluated by the measuring input. The measuring input technology object can be assigned to the following technology objects: Synchronous axis Positioning axis External encoder Exactly one axis or one external encoder can be assigned to a measuring input technology object. An axis or external encoder can be assigned multiple measuring input technology objects. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 113 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Measured value determination The position can be detected using support from the hardware in one of the following ways: Measuring using TM Timer DIDQ (time-based) Measuring with SINAMICS measuring input (time-based) Measurements via a measuring input are only possible for SINAMICS drives as of (see compatibility list (Page 555)). Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) A measuring job is activated using Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" or "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic". With time-based measuring ("TIME_BASED"), a signal change of the external trigger signal for the measurement is detected via a corresponding module such as TM Timer DIDQ or SINAMICS Drive. The time stamp is transferred to the controller and the associated actual position is determined in the technology object. With direct position detection ("PROFIDRIVE"), the measurement input is connected to the drive device and the measurement is implemented in the drive. The drive or encoder module directly supplies the acquired position value to the technology object via the PROFIdrive telegram. The resulting measured value is indicated at the respective output of the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" or "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic". Cyclic measuring is only possible when measuring using TM Timer DIDQ. One-time measuring is always possible. Measuring using TM Timer DIDQ requires isochronous mode. For measuring using a PROFIdrive telegram, only one measuring input at a time can be active on an actual value or encoder in the PROFIdrive telegram. A maximum of two measuring inputs via PROFIdrive can be configured on an actual value or encoder in the PROFIdrive telegram Refer to Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device (Page 42). The measuring input technology object cannot be used with SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM. The measuring input technology object and the measuring input jobs used in the user program can be loaded into SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM, but have no function. Measured values are not shown. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 114 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Correction time The time of the measurement can be corrected by setting a correction time (.Parameter.CorrectionTime) for the measuring input technology object. Corrections may be required for the following examples: Times for mechanical displacement of the measuring input Times for the generation of the measured signal before the input at the measurement module Filter times at the input or filter times for the measurement inputs on the SINAMICS drive unit The correction time is calculated by the measuring input technology object for time-based measured value acquisition ("TIME_BASED") and for direct position detection ("PROFIDRIVE"). Also note the time delay when measuring on a virtual axis. See section Brief description (Page 39). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 115 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input 3.7.2 Measuring 3.7.2.1 One-time measurement With one-time measurement, up to two edges can be detected with one measuring job. The associated actual positions are signaled back in the function block and in the technology DB and can be further processed in the user program. Measuring job A measuring job is started using the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput". The .Status tag in the technology data block changes to "WAITING_FOR_TRIGGER". The technology object activates the measurement when the selected edge is detected. The measurement occurs at the measurement input in the form of up to two system times. Based on the times, the associated position is determined and output, taking into consideration a correction time, if present. With direct position detection, the detected position value is supplied directly from the drive or encoder module to the technology object via the PROFIdrive telegram. The measurement is then finished. An additional measurement must be restarted using Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput". Table 3- 1 Mode and display of the results of measurement results when using one-time measurement Configured "Mode" parameter in Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" Measure positive edge only Output of Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" MeasuredValue1 MeasuredValue2 Actual position at the time of the edge - Measure the next two edges Actual position at the time of the first edge Actual position at the time of the second edge Measure the next two edges starting with the positive edge Actual position at the time of the positive edge Actual position at the time of the negative edge Measure the next two edges starting with the negative edge Actual position at the time of the negative edge Actual position at the time of the positive edge Measure negative edge only The last detected values are set in the technology data block. If a new job is initiated with the function block, the outputs of the function block are initialized. The technology data block is not initialized. After detecting the first valid measuring cycle, the values in the technology data block and function block are consistent with one another. The finished measuring command is indicated in the function block in "MC_MeasuringInput.DONE" = TRUE or in the technology data block in .Status = "TRIGGER_OCCURRED". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 116 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Time requirements for measurement jobs via "MC_MeasuringInput" The hardware-related restrictions to measurement via the PROFIdrive telegram or measuring via the SINAMICS measurement sensing input, there are time requirements for the period until the measuring event can be recorded. When measuring once via "MC_MeasuringInput" with mode 3 (measurement at both edges, beginning with the rising edge) or mode 4 (measurement at both edges, beginning with the falling edge), a minimum interval of several servo cycles is therefore required between the first edge to be measured and the previous edge, in order for the first edge to be measured can be recorded. You can find information on the temporal boundary conditions in the section Time-related boundary conditions (Page 122). See also Time-related boundary conditions (Page 122) MC_MeasuringInput: Start measuring once V4 (Page 399) 3.7.2.2 Cyclic measuring With cyclic measuring, up to two measuring events can be acquired by the system in each position control cycle of the technology object and the associated measuring positions can be displayed. The measurements are continued cyclically until they are ended per command. The determined measured values are displayed and can be read by the user program. Cyclic measuring requires the measured value to be determined using the following type of hardware support: "Measuring using Timer DIDQ". Measuring edges at which a measured value could not be determined are indicated in a lost edge counter in the technology DB as well as in function block "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic". Measuring job A cyclic measuring job is started with Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic", and the measuring job is issued to the corresponding technology module. Depending on the functionality of the technology module, up to two measuring events and thus measuring times can be captured with edge reference in each position control cycle and then forwarded to the technology object. The technology object determines the measuring positions for the measuring times taking into consideration any specified correction times. The technology data block tag ".Status" changes from "INACTIVE" to "WAITING_FOR_TRIGGER" and remains in this status as long as additional events are awaited. The mode set in the Motion Control instruction specifies the edges for which the measured values are to be acquired. At most, the following edges can be detected in each position control cycle: Two positive edges when detecting positive edges Two negative edges when detecting negative edges One positive edge and one negative edge when detecting positive and negative edges S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 117 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Measured values and counters With a positive edge at the input MC_MeasuringInputCyclic.Execute, outputs MeasuredValue1Counter and MeasuredValue2Counter are reset to "0". As a result, new events can be tracked immediately and new measured value entries can be detected. All measuring event occurrences of the measuring job are incremented by "1" in the corresponding event counters .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue1Counter and .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue2Counter of the technology data block. The acquired measured values are continuously captured in the technology data block irrespective of individual jobs and the values are only reset to "0" at power-up or restart of the technology object. After a completed measurement, the measured values are output in the function block. The counters of the function block are set to "0" at a new measuring job. The measured value output in the technology data block always indicates the last acquired measured value. Lost edge counter (LEC) If more than two edges to be detected occur within one position control cycle, a measured value cannot be evaluated for the other edges to be detected. The number of lost edges is recorded in the LEC. The lost edges that are recorded in the LEC depend on the mode set in the Motion Control instruction. For example, if only positive edges are to be measured, the LEC records only the non-measured positive edges. A maximum of seven lost edges can be counted and displayed in the LEC. The number of lost edges is indicated in the function block and in the technology data block in: LostEdgeCounter1 Lost cleared edges from the position control cycle in which MeasuredValue1 was acquired. The displayed value in LostEdgeCounter1 is updated when counter MeasuredValueCounter1 is incremented. LostEdgeCounter2 Lost cleared edges from the position control cycle in which MeasuredValue2 was acquired. The displayed value in LostEdgeCounter2 is updated when counter MeasuredValueCounter2 is incremented. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 118 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Display of measurement results when using cyclic measuring Edges selected in the command Detect positive edges only "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic.Mode" = 0 Detect negative edges only "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic.Mode" = 1 Detect positive and negative edges "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic.Mode" = 2 Display per position control cycle MeasuredValue1 MeasuredValue2 Actual position at the time of the first positive edge Actual position at the time of the second positive edge Actual position at the time of the first negative edge Actual position at the time of the second negative edge Actual position at the time of the first positive edge in the position control cycle Actual position at the time of the first negative edge in the position control cycle LostEdgeCounter1 LostEdgeCounter2 Number of positive or negative edges in excess of two in the position control cycle of acquisition of MeasuredValue1 and MeasuredValue2. The following applies here: * If a MeasuredValue1 and a MeasuredValue2 are acquired, the number of acquired and lost edges indicated in LostEdgeCounter1 and LostEdgeCounter2 are the same. * If only one MeasuredValue1 is acquired, the LostEdgeCounter1 is reset to "0". The value in LostEdgeCounter2 remains changed. Number of edges in excess of two in the position control cycle of acquisition of MeasuredValue1 and MeasuredValue2. The following applies here: * If a MeasuredValue1 and a MeasuredValue2 are acquired, the number of acquired and lost edges indicated in LostEdgeCounter1 and LostEdgeCounter2 are the same. * If only one MeasuredValue1 is acquired, the LostEdgeCounter1 is reset to "0". The value in LostEdgeCounter2 remains changed. * If only one MeasuredValue2 is acquired, the LostEdgeCounter2 is reset to "0". The value in LostEdgeCounter1 remains changed. The following figures show examples of divergence of MeasuredValue1Counter and MeasuredValue2Counter as a result of lost edges. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 119 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Example of measurement at positive edges (Mode = 0) Example of measurement at negative edges (Mode = 1) Example of measurement at positive and negative edges (Mode = 2) See also MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Start cyclic measuring V4 (Page 402) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 120 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input 3.7.3 Measuring with measuring range A measuring job can be activated directly or restricted to a defined measuring range. Figure 3-1 Example of measuring with measuring range in Mode = 0 (measurement of next positive edge) Only measured values within the measuring range are displayed for the technology object. If no measuring edge within the measuring range is detected during a one-time measurement, the measuring job is canceled and an alarm is triggered. Cyclic measuring remains active even if no measuring edge within the measuring range was detected. For axes without modulo function, it is immaterial in which order the start and end positions are specified. If the start position is greater than the end position, the two values are interchanged in the application. If the start position for an axis with modulo function is greater than the end position, the measuring range is extended from the start position past the modulo transition of the axis to the end position. The measuring range positions are specified in Motion Control instruction MC_MeasuringInput or MC_MeasuringInputCyclic. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 121 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Activation time for the measuring range The measuring function must be active at the measurement input when the start of the measuring range is reached. To compensate for the communication time for activation in the TM Timer DIDQ or drive, for example, the activation of the measurement in the technology object begins earlier then the measuring range start by the amount of the activation time. The activation time for measuring with measuring range is divided up as follows: The activation time allocation defined and active on the system side is indicated in the .Parameter.MeasuringRangeActivationTime tag. An additional activation time can also be set by the user with the .Parameter.MeasuringRangeAdditionalActivationTime tag. 3.7.4 Time-related boundary conditions Depending on the hardware configuration and selection of edges to be detected, different system-inherent requirements apply to the time allowed after calling the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" or "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic" until a measurement occurs and the results are displayed. The following times must be distinguished here: Time until the measuring event can be captured Time until the measurement result is displayed or the measurement is finished. The times calculated taking into account the current settings are indicated in configuration window "Extended parameters" of a measuring input. Measuring using TM Timer DIDQ / Measuring using SINAMICS measuring input Measurement using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) Definition of tags: Measurement using TM Timer DIDQ/Measurement using SINAMICS measuring input Time from output of an MC_MeasuringInput job until measuring event detection becomes effective: - MeasuringRangeActivationTime: 2 x Tservo Time after measuring event until measured value is available in the controller: - One-time measurement: 2 x Tservo + TSend - Cyclic measuring: Tservo + TSend Activation time for a measurement with measuring range: - MeasuringRangeActivationTime + MeasuringRangeAdditionalActivationTime S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 122 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input Measurement using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) MeasuringRangeActivationTime: 4 x Tservo Time from output of an MC_MeasuringInput job until measuring event detection becomes effective: - Measuring a positive/negative edge or two edges: MeasuringRangeActivationTime + 2 x Tservo - Measuring two dedicated edges: MeasuringRangeActivationTime + 3 x Tservo Time after measuring event until measured value is available in the controller: - Measuring an edge: 7 x Tservo - Measuring two edges: 13 x Tservo Activation time for a measurement with measuring range: - Measuring a positive/negative edge or two edges: MeasuringRangeActivationTime + MeasuringRangeAdditionalActivationTime + 2 x Tservo - Measuring two dedicated edges: MeasuringRangeActivationTime + MeasuringRangeAdditionalActivationTime + 3 x Tservo Definition of tags Tservo = Call interval of the technology object in the servo cycle clock [ms] TSend = Send clock [ms] MeasuringRangeActivationTime = See section Measuring with measuring range (Page 121) To prevent asynchronous processing from overwriting a measured value that was just determined, a new one-time measuring job cannot be started until the active measurement has concluded. The sum of the activation time and the time until display or conclusion must be taken into account for this. With cyclic measuring, evaluation or temporary storage of the measurement results in the synchronous MC-PostServo [OB95] is recommended from the user perspective. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 123 Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input 3.7.5 Tags Status display .Status Measuring input function status 0: Measurement is not active ("INACTIVE") 1: The measuring input is waiting for a measuring event ("WAITING_FOR_TRIGGER") 2: The measuring input has acquired one or more measured values ("TRIGGER_OCCURRED"). 3: Error during the measurement ("MEASURING_ERROR") .InputState Measuring input input status Parameters .Parameter.MeasuringInputType Measuring input type .Parameter.PROFIdriveProbeNumber Number of the measuring input to be used for a measurement using PROFIdrive telegram .Parameter.MeasuringRangeActivationTime System-defined activation time allocation [ms] .Parameter.MeasuringRangeAdditionalActivationTime Additional user-defined activation time allocation [ms] .Parameter.CorrectionTime User-defined correction time for the measurement result [ms] Interface .Interface.Address I/O address for the digital measuring input Units .Units.LengthUnit Unit of the length data .Units.TimeUnit Unit of the time data MeasuredValues .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue1 First measured value .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue2 Second measured value (when measuring two or more edges in one position control cycle) .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue1Counter Count value for the first measured value .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue2Counter Count value for the second measured value .MeasuredValues.LostEdgeCounter1 Lost edges in the cycle clock of the first measured value acquisition .MeasuredValues.LostEdgeCounter2 Lost edges in the cycle clock of the second measured value acquisition (zero in the case of one-time measurement) (zero in the case of one-time measurement) StatusWord .StatusWord.X0 (Control) The technology object is in operation. .StatusWord.X1 (Error) An error occurred at the technology object. .StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive) The technology object is being reinitialized. The tags of the technology data block are not updated with active restart. .StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged) Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. .StatusWord.X5 (CommunicationOk) The measuring input is synchronized with the measuring module and can be used. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 124 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.7 Technology object measuring input ErrorWord .ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault) A system-internal error has occurred. .ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault) Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. .ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault) Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use. .ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted) Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. .ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError) Error accessing a logical address. ErrorDetail .ErrorDetail.Number Alarm number .ErrorDetail.Reaction Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 6: End measuring input processing S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 125 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8.1 Brief description The output cam technology object generates switching signals depending on the position of an axis or external encoder. The switching states can be evaluated in the user program and fed to digital outputs. You can find an overview of the functions of the output cam technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. The figure below shows the basic operating principle of the output cam technology object: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 126 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Output cam types The following output cam types can be used: Distance output cam (Page 130) Distance output cams switch on between the start position and end position. Outside this range, the distance output cam is switched off. Time-based output cam (Page 132) Time-based output cams switch on for a defined time period when the start position is reached. Assignment The output cam technology object must always be assigned to another technology object whose position will be evaluated. The output cam technology object can be assigned to the following technology objects: Synchronous axis Positioning axis External encoder Exactly one axis or one external encoder can be assigned to an output cam. Multiple output cams can be assigned to one axis or external encoder. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 127 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Output cam calculation and output cam output The output cam technology object calculates the exact switching time, thereby ensuring exact adherence to the switching positions. The switching time is calculated two position control cycles before the output. The following output options are available for the digital cam output: TM Timer DIDQ Digital output with high degree of accuracy and reproducibility in the microsecond range on ET 200MP TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V and ET 200SP TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V timebased IO modules Output by TM Timer DIDQ requires isochronous mode. Isochronous mode is only possible with PROFINET interface modules. Digital output module Digital output with switching accuracy depending on the output cycle of the I/O used When output is deactivated, the output cam status is not output at the hardware output. The output cam status can be used internally in the user program by evaluating the relevant ".CamOutput" tag. Inverted output In the case of the inverted output, the range in which the cam output is switched on and the range in which it is switched off are swapped. The inverted output is set in Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" and is active when the instruction is enabled. The inverted output can be used for both distance output cams and time-based output cams. Output of multiple output cams to one output The output of multiple output cams to one output is performed with either an AND or OR logic operation of the output cam signals to the output. Display of the switching state The switching state of the output cam is displayed in the associated technology DB in ".CamOutput". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 128 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Position reference The switching points of the output cams can be referenced to the following positions, depending on the interconnected technology object. Actual position of a synchronous axis/positioning axis Position setpoint of a synchronous axis/positioning axis Position of an external encoder Homing the interconnected technology object A change to the position of an axis or external encoder using Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is regarded as a sudden position change. Distance output cams are either skipped or correspondingly output. Time-based output cams are skipped. A time-based output cam is switched on only when the start position is crossed and remains switched on for the on-load factor. Switched time-based output cams are not canceled by a homing operation. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 129 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8.2 Distance output cam Switch-on range The switch-on range of distance output cams is basically defined by the start position and end position. Start position smaller than end position When the start position is less than the end position, the switch-on range begins with the start position and ends with the end position. Start position greater than end position When the start position is greater than the end position, there are two switch-on ranges as follows: Switch-on range beginning with the start position and ending with the positive range end (e.g. positive software limit switch, end of modulo range) Switch-on range beginning with the negative range end (e.g. negative software limit switch, start of modulo range) and ending with the end position S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 130 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Mapping to an axis with modulo function With active modulo function of the interconnected technology object, the start and end positions of the output cam are automatically mapped to values within the modulo range. Example Modulo range = 0 to 50 Output cam start position = 80 Output cam end position = 220 The distance output cam switches on at 30 and switches off again at 20. Switching characteristics After activation, a distance output cam switches on in the following cases: The position of the interconnected technology object reaches the start or end position in the activation direction configured in Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam". The position of the interconnected technology object is moved into the switch-on range of the output cam (e.g. during homing) in the activation direction configured in Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam". If both activation directions are enabled in Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam", the output cam switches on even when the interconnected technology object is at a standstill. The output cam is switched on permanently using Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" with "Mode" = 3. An active distance output cam switches off in the following cases: The position is outside the switch-on range of the output cam. The position value is moved outside the switch-on range of the output cam. Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" is set to "Enable" = FALSE. The motion direction of the interconnected technology object is reversed and no longer agrees with the enabled activation direction. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 131 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8.3 Time-based output cam A time-based output cam switches on at the start position and remains set for the on-load factor. Mapping to an axis with modulo function In the case of active modulo function of the interconnected technology object, the start position of the output cam is automatically mapped to the value within the modulo range. Example Modulo range = 0 to 50 Output cam start positions: - Output cam 1 = 20 - Output cam 2 = 30 - Output cam 3 = 80 The time-based output cam 1 switches on at 20, the time-based output cams 2 and 3 switch on at 30. All three output cams remain active the set on-load factor in each case. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 132 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Switching characteristics A time-based output cam switches on in the following cases: The start position has been reached and the motion direction of the interconnected technology object corresponds to the effective direction enabled by the instruction. Note * If the start position is reached again while an output cam is switched on, the on-load factor is not re-triggered. * If due to the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home", the position value of the interconnected technology object is placed directly on or behind the start position of the output cam during the motion, the output cam does not switch on. A time-based output cam switches off in the following cases: The configured on-load factor has expired. Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" is set to "Enable" = FALSE. 3.8.4 Activation direction of cam An output cam can be switched depending on the motion direction of the interconnected technology object. It is possible to output an output cam with positive or negative motion direction only or even independent of direction. The effective direction is set in "MC_OutputCam.Direction". The following examples show the behavior of the output cam as a function of the effective direction setting. Example of "positive" effective direction ("Direction" = 1) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 133 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Distance output cam The output cam switches on when the switch-on range is reached in the positive direction. At a direction reversal , the output cam switches off. If the position value is moved into the switch-on range of the output cam, the cam switches on when there is positive motion direction of the interconnected technology object. The output cam remains switched off when the interconnected technology object is at a standstill. Time-based output cam The output cam switches on when the start position is reached in the positive direction. At a direction reversal, the output cam remains switched on for the specified on-load factor . If during the homing motion, the position value of the interconnected technology object is directly on or behind the start position of the output cam, the output cam does not switch on. Example of "negative" effective direction ("Direction" = 2) Distance output cam The output cam switches on when the switch-on range is reached in the negative direction. At a direction reversal , the output cam switches off. If the position value is moved into the switch-on range of the output cam, the output cam switches on when there is negative motion direction of the interconnected technology object. The output cam remains switched off when the interconnected technology object is at a standstill. Time-based output cam The output cam switches on when the start position is reached in the negative direction. At a direction reversal, the output cam remains switched on for the specified on-load factor . If during the homing motion, the position value of the interconnected technology object is directly on or behind the start position of the output cam, the output cam does not switch on. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 134 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam Example of "both directions" effective direction ("Direction" = 3) Distance output cam The output cam switches on when the position of the interconnected technology object is within the switch-on range. If the position value of the interconnected technology object is moved into the switch-on range of the output cam, the cam switches on even when the interconnected technology object is at a standstill. Time-based output cam The output cam switches on when the start position is reached. At a direction reversal, the output cam remains switched on for the specified on-load factor . If during the homing motion, the position value of the interconnected technology object is directly on or behind the start position of the output cam, the output cam does not switch on. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 135 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8.5 Hysteresis Possible variations in the actual position/position setpoint can result in unwanted switch-on and switch-off of cams. Minimal changes of the actual value of an axis at standstill can result in switch-on or switchoff of an actual value output cam with specified positive or negative effective direction. Even minimal changes of the setpoints of a switched-off axis in follow-up mode can result in switch-on or switch-off of an actual value output cam with specified positive or negative effective direction. Such unwanted switching states can be prevented by configuring a hysteresis (> 0.0). The configuration of a hysteresis value (> 0.0) is recommended in particular with reference to the actual position. The hysteresis is a position tolerance within which the position values may vary without changing the switching state of the output cam. Changes of direction detected within the hysteresis are ignored. The hysteresis is set for the technology object in .Parameter.Hysteresis. Behavior The hysteresis is activated at a direction reversal. The following applies within the hysteresis: - The switching state of distance output cams is not changed. - The motion direction is not determined again. - If the start position of a time-based output cam is within the hysteresis, the time-based output cam is switched on when leaving the hysteresis with the corresponding effective direction. - The on-load factor of time-based output cams remains unchanged. After the hysteresis range is exited, distance output cams are set according to the output cam settings. Actual position Effective position Hysteresis range S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 136 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam The following examples show the effects of the hysteresis on the switching behavior of output cams with positive activation direction. Direction reversal without hysteresis effect The start position of the time-based output cam is located within the hysteresis. The time-based output cam is switched on when leaving the hysteresis with the corresponding effective direction. Hysteresis in effect The switch-on position of the distance output cam is influenced according to the direction reversal and hysteresis. Switch-on duration Hysteresis range The maximum size of the hysteresis range in the system is as follows: for an axis with modulo function, one quarter of the modulo range; for an axis without modulo function, one quarter of the operating range. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 137 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8.6 Compensation of actuator switching times Switching times of the output and the connected actuator (e.g. valve) can be compensated for using the activation time or deactivation time of the output cam technology object. The activation time is specified as the lead time for the switch-on edge, and the deactivation time as the lead time for the switch-off edge. The activation time is set in the technology object .OnCompensation. The deactivation time is set in the technology object .OffCompensation. Note * The following must be met for the times: On-load factor > deactivation time - activation time (The on-load factor for distance output cams is determined by the switching positions and the current velocity) * If the output cam has been switched taking the lead times into consideration, this action has taken place from the system perspective and will not be restarted in response to any subsequent variation in the actual speed. * System-dependent runtimes are automatically taken into consideration when output by TM Timer DIDQ is used. When the output with a digital output module is used, system-dependent runtimes are not taken into consideration and must be set as correction times in the activation time or deactivation time. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 138 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam 3.8.7 Tags Status display .CamOutput The output cam is switched. Parameters .Parameter.OutputCamType Output cam type 0: Distance output cam 1: Time-based output cam .Parameter.PositionType Position reference 0: Position setpoint 1: Actual position .ParameterOnCompensation Activation time (lead time for the switch-on edge) .Parameter.OffCompensation Deactivation time (lead time for the switch-off edge) .Parameter.Hysteresis Hysteresis value Interface .Interface.EnableOutput Activation of the output cam output FALSE: No output TRUE: Output .Interface.Address I/O address of the output cam .Interface.LogicOperation Logical operation of the output cam signals at the output 0: OR operation 1: AND operation Units .Units.LengthUnit Unit of the length data .Units.TimeUnit Unit of the time data StatusWord .StatusWord.X0 (Control) The technology object is in operation. .StatusWord.X1 (Error) An error occurred at the technology object. .StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive) The technology object is being reinitialized. The tags of the technology data block are not updated with active restart. .StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged) Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. .StatusWord.X4 (OutputInverted) The output cam output is inverted. .StatusWord.X5 (CommunicationOk) The cam is synchronized with the output module and available for use. ErrorWord .ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault) A system-internal error has occurred. .ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault) Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. .ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault) Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use. .ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted) Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. .ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError) Error accessing a logical address. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 139 Technology objects 3.8 Technology object output cam ErrorDetail .ErrorDetail.Number Alarm number You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology Alarms (Page 513) appendix. .ErrorDetail.Reaction Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 6: Output cam processing is complete. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology Alarms (Page 513) appendix. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 140 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object 3.9 Cam track technology object 3.9.1 Brief description The cam track technology object generates a switching signal sequence dependent on the position of an axis or external encoder. A cam track can consist of up to 32 individual output cams and be output to one output. The switching states can be evaluated in the user program or fed to digital outputs. You can find an overview of the functions of the cam track technology object in the Functions (Page 27) section. The figure below shows the basic principle of operation of the cam track technology object: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 141 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Definition of cam track A cam track consists of up to 32 individual output cams that are specified within an adjustable track length. Start position End position Cam track length Figure 3-2 Cam track with distance output cam The output cam positions are defined relative to the cam track. The start of the cam track is always 0.0. The output cam positions on the cam track are thus always positive. When the cam track is processed, the output cams with start position within the track length are taken into consideration. If the end of a cam track is crossed, connected output cams behave as follows within the cam track: Time-based output cams remain switched on for the set on-load factor. Distance output cams whose end position lie outside the cam track are switched off when the cam track is left. Cams whose start and end positions lie outside the cam track length are ignored. They become active only if the cam track length is increased so that at least the respective start position of an output cam is within the new track length. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 142 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Mapping of the cam track to the position of an axis or external encoder. The start of the cam track is placed at the specified reference position of the interconnected technology object. Thus, the switching positions result from the cam track positions mapped onto the interconnected technology object starting from the reference position. The cam track is continued in both directions of the interconnected technology object. The setting for the reference position can be either positive or negative. Example Axis range = -1000 mm to +1000 mm Desired switching points of the output cam with reference to axis position: - Start position = -200 mm - End position = -100 mm Cam track length = 2000 mm Definition of output cam on the track: - Start position = 800 mm - End position = 900 mm Figure 3-3 Cam track with output cam output at negative axis position S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 143 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Processing of a cam track The processing of a cam track occurs cyclically. Figure 3-4 Cyclic mapping of a cam track The cam track is mapped onto the position of the interconnected technology object starting from the reference position and is continued cyclically in both directions. Track length and mapping to an axis with modulo function When a cam track is mapped onto an axis with modulo function, a reference position specified outside the modulo range is mapped within the modulo range. The track length can be less than or greater than the modulo length of the axis. In order for the cam track to be mapped without offset in the modulo range and to prevent unwanted overrides, an integer ratio of modulo length to track length, and vice versa, is required. Example Mapping without offset Example Mapping with offset Axis with modulo length 360 Cam track with track length 120 Axis with modulo length 360 Cam track with track length 160 Ratio = 360 / 120 = 3 Ratio = 360 / 160 = 2.25 The cam track is output 3 times on a modulo length. The cam track is output 2.25 times on the first modulo length and continued correspondingly in the other modulo lengths. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 144 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object During cyclic processing of the cam track, the continued reference position of the current cam track is displayed in the .MatchPosition tag. The continued reference position is independent of direction and always the position of the left boundary of the cam track. The unique detection and output of the position is only possible when the assigned technology object is in motion. The distance to the current reference position of the current cam track (.MatchPosition) is displayed in the .TrackPosition tag. Output cam types The following output cam types are used: Distance output cam Time-based output cam The output cams of the cam track can be set as distance output cams or time-based output cams, whereby only one of the two output cam types can be used in one cam track. Assignment The cam track technology object must always be assigned to another technology object whose position is evaluated. The cam track technology object can be assigned to the following technology objects: Synchronous axis Positioning axis External encoder Exactly one axis or one external encoder can be assigned to a cam track. Multiple cam tracks can be assigned to one axis or external encoder. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 145 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Position reference The switching points of the output cams of a cam track can be referenced to the following positions, depending on the interconnected technology object. Actual position of a synchronous axis/positioning axis Position setpoint of a synchronous axis/positioning axis Position of an external encoder Homing the interconnected technology object A change to the position of an axis or external encoder using Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is regarded as a sudden position change. An enabled cam track is referenced to the changed position and processed further from there. For axes with modulo function, homing also has an effect on the current position of the cam track (.TrackPosition). The position is formed again as quickly as possible due to the offset. Distance output cams are either skipped or correspondingly output. Time-based output cams are skipped. A time-based output cam is switched on only when the start position is crossed and remains switched on for the on-load factor. Switched time-based output cams are not canceled by a homing operation. We recommend locking the cam track before or during homing. Output of a cam track The following output options are available for the digital cam track output: TM Timer DIDQ Digital output with high degree of accuracy and reproducibility in the microsecond range on ET 200MP TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V and ET 200SP TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V timebased IO modules Output by TM Timer DIDQ requires isochronous mode. Isochronous mode is only possible with PROFINET interface modules. Digital output module Digital output with switching accuracy depending on the output cycle of the I/O used A maximum of two edges (by TM Timer DIDQ, positive and negative) or one edge (via digital output module, positive or negative) can be output per position control cycle clock. If multiple switch-on edges or switch-off edges are transmitted in one position control cycle clock, the last written values in each case are valid. Masking of individual output cams of a cam track In order for output cams to processed, they must be configured as valid in the technology data block with ".Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32].Existent" = TRUE. In addition, output cams of a cam track configured as valid can be masked in the user program using bit masking (".Parameter.CamMasking"). In the default setting, all valid output cams are enabled (".Parameter.CamMasking" = 0xFFFFFFFF). The cam track itself is activated/deactivated using the Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 146 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object 3.9.2 Effective direction The cam track is always active for both directions of the position of the interconnected technology object. Output of a cam track with distance output cam Distance output cams are switched when the switch-on range is overtraveled. Figure 3-5 Executing a cam track with distance output cams dependent on the motion direction of the axis With positive motion direction, the output cams of the cam track are output in the order Output Cam N1, Output Cam N2, Output Cam N3 In the case of negative motion direction, the output cams of the cam track are output in the order Output Cam N3, Output Cam N2, Output Cam N1 The distance output cams switch on at and switch off at S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 147 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Output of a cam track with time-based output cam The time-based output cams are switched when the start position is crossed. Figure 3-6 Executing a cam track with time-based output cams dependent on the motion direction of the axis With positive motion direction, the output cams of the cam track are output in the order Output Cam N1, Output Cam N2, Output Cam N3 In the case of negative motion direction, the output cams of the cam track are output in the order Output Cam N3, Output Cam N2, Output Cam N1 The time-based output cams switch on at and remain switched on for the set switchon duration S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 148 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object 3.9.3 Changing the cam track data during operation The data of a cam track and the parameters of the associated Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" can be changed while track processing is enabled. The active Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" is not aborted. The modified parameters, however, only take effect at the next call of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack". The following parameters can be changed during operation and are in effect after another call of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack". Cam track data in technology data block - Reference position (.Parameter.ReferencePosition) - Track length (.Parameter.CamTrackLength) - Bit masking of individual output cams (.Parameter.CamMasking) - Activation time (.Parameter.OnCompensation) - Deactivation time (.Parameter.OffCompensation) - Hysteresis value (.Parameter.Hysteresis) - Output cam data (.Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32]) Parameters in the function block - Enable (MC_CamTrack.Enable) - Mode (MC_CamTrack.Mode) - Inverted output (MC_CamTrack.InvertOutput) Note the different activation behavior (Page 150) when changing the cam track data. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 149 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object 3.9.4 Activation behavior A cam track is activated by the call of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" with "Enable" = TRUE. A distinction must be made here between: A first-time activation of the cam track The call after a change of the cam track data during active cam track processing The difference relates to how the cam track data is applied. Depending on the set mode ("MC_CamTrack.Mode"), the configuration (cam track data, data in the function block) is applied at different times. First-time switch-on of a cam track The call of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" with "Enable" = TRUE activates the cam track immediately (.Status changes to 1) and configured cam track data takes effect immediately. This behavior is the same when "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 0 and "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 1. Change of cam track data of an already activated cam track(.Status = 1) - With the call of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" with "Enable" = TRUE and "Mode" = 0, the modified cam track data takes effect immediately. Previously activated distance output cams are aborted if their track signals are not still set due to the changed cam track data. Previously activated time-based output cams are always aborted. - With the call of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" with "Enable" = TRUE and "Mode" = 1, the cam track continues to be output with the prior configuration up to the cam track end. Modified cam track data takes effect at the end of the current track cycle. If you change a cam track with "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 1 during runtime of the user program, keep in mind the lead time of the cam track as reserve for the first output cam. Define the first output cam position in the cam track only after the following position: Position of first output cam > velocity of axis x lead time of the cam track (.Parameter.OnCompensation) Also keep in mind the internal system time for output cam calculation, even if you set the lead time 0.0. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 150 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Changing cam track data when modulo length is not a multiple of the track length For the switching times to be set correctly, we recommend the following procedure for changes: Enter changes as soon as possible after start of a new cam track Enter a new reference position (.Parameter.ReferencePosition) for the changed cam track. The new reference position is composed as follows depending on the direction: - Positive effective direction: Current reference position (.MatchPosition) + cam track length (.Parameter.CamTrackLength) - Negative effective direction: Current reference position (.MatchPosition) - cam track length (.Parameter.CamTrackLength) Output the changes of the cam track when calling the Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" and "Mode" = 1. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 151 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object Example The following figure shows an example of the differences in the activation behavior. A1 A The cam track is activated the first time with "MC_CamTrack.Enable" = TRUE and the output cams are output immediately with set "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 0. B After cam track data were changed (), the cam track is activated by calling Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" with "Enable" = TRUE and the modified data takes effect immediately () with set "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 0. A2 A The cam track is activated the first time with "MC_CamTrack.Enable" = TRUE and the output cams are output immediately with set "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 1. B After cam track data were changed (), the cam track is activated by calling Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" with "Enable" = TRUE and the modified data takes effect at the end of the current track cycle () with set "MC_CamTrack.Mode" = 1. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 152 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object 3.9.5 Hysteresis The hysteresis is set in the cam track technology object. The behavior and effect of the hysteresis setting corresponds to the hysteresis (Page 136) for the cam technology object. 3.9.6 Time offset of cam switching points Switching times of the output and the connected actuator (e.g. valve) can be compensated for using the activation time or deactivation time of the cam track technology object. The time offset of cam switching points corresponds to the activation time or deactivation time (Page 138) for the cam technology object. 3.9.7 Tags Status display .Status 0: Inactive 1: Active 2: Active and waiting for next track .TrackOutput A cam of cam track is switched. .SingleCamState Switched on output cam (bit-masked) .TrackPosition Display of the current position within the cam track The distance to the current reference position of the current cam track (.MatchPosition) is displayed. .MatchPosition Reference position of the current cam track During cyclic processing of the cam track, the continued reference position of the current cam track is displayed. The unique detection and output of the position is only possible when the assigned technology object is in motion. Parameters .Parameter.CamTrackType Output cam type 0: Distance output cam 1: Time-based output cam .Parameter.PositionType Position reference 0: Position setpoint 1: Actual position .Parameter.ReferencePosition Reference position .Parameter.CamTrackLength Track length .Parameter.CamMasking Bit masking of individual output cams .Parameter.OnCompensation Activation time (lead time for the switch-on edge) .Parameter.OffCompensation Deactivation time (lead time for the switch-off edge) .Parameter.Hysteresis Hysteresis value .Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32].OnPosition Start position (distance and time-based output cams) .Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32].OffPosition End position (distance output cam) .Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32].Duration Switch-on duration (time-based output cam) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 153 Technology objects 3.9 Cam track technology object .Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32].Existent Validity of an output cam FALSE: Output cam not used TRUE: Output cam is used Interface .Interface.EnableOutput Output cam output at the bit specified under "Address" FALSE: No output TRUE: Output .Interface.Address I/O address for digital cam output Units .Units.LengthUnit Unit of the length data .Units.TimeUnit Unit of the time data StatusWord .StatusWord.X0 (Control) The technology object is in operation. .StatusWord.X1 (Error) An error occurred at the technology object. .StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive) The technology object is being reinitialized. The tags of the technology data block are not updated with active restart. .StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged) Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. .StatusWord.X4 (OutputInverted) The output cam output is inverted. .StatusWord.X5 (CommunicationOk) The cam track is synchronized with the output module and available for use. .StatusWord.X6 (CamDataChanged) The data of individual output cams has been changed but not yet taken effect with Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack". ErrorWord .ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault) A system-internal error has occurred. .ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault) Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. .ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault) Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use. .ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNot Accepted) Command cannot be executed. .ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError) A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Error accessing a logical address. ErrorDetail .ErrorDetail.Number Alarm number .ErrorDetail.Reaction Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 5: Cam track processing Is complete. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 154 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Using versions 4.1 4 Overview of versions For S7-1500 Motion Control, a distinction is made between the version of the technology, the technology objects and the Motion Control instructions. The overview shown below includes S7-1500 and S7-1500T. Only one technology version can be operated on a CPU. When changing to a CPU V1.6, you must change the technology version accordingly. Card replacement from a CPU < V1.6 to a CPU V1.6 is supported. In the TIA Portal, you can use a CPU 1.6 only to work on projects with a correspondingly higher technology version. There are two ways of changing the technology version: Changing the version of the Motion Control instructions You change the version of the Motion Control instructions in the "Instructions" task card in the folder "Technology > Motion Control > S7-1500 Motion Control". If the Motion Control instruction version used does not correspond to the compatibility list, the relevant Motion Control instructions are highlighted in red in the program editor. Adding a technology object with an alternative version If a technology object with an alternative version is added in the "Add new object" dialog, the technology version is changed to the alternative version. The technology objects and Motion Control instructions are only converted to the selected version of the technology during compilation. The version of a technology object or a Motion Control instruction is indicated in the properties of the technology object, "General > Information" tab, "Version" field. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 155 Using versions 4.1 Overview of versions Compatibility list The table below shows the compatibility of the technology version with the CPU version: CPU Technology Technology object V2.5 V4.0 Speed Axis V4.0 Positioning Axis V4.0 External Encoder V4.0 Synchronous Axis V4.0 Measuring input V4.0 Cam V4.0 Cam track V4.0 Cam V4.0 (S7-1500T) Kinematics V4.0 (S7-1500T) V2.0, V2.1 V3.0 Speed Axis V3.0 Positioning axis V3.0 External encoder V3.0 Synchronous axis V3.0 Measuring input V3.0 Output cam V3.0 Cam track V3.0 Cam V3.0 (S7-1500T) V1.6, V1.7, V1.8 V2.0 Speed Axis V2.0 Positioning axis V2.0 External encoder V2.0 Synchronous axis V2.0 V1.0, V1.1, V1.51 V1.0 Speed Axis V1.0 Positioning axis V1.0 External encoder V1.0 1) Card replacement from a CPU < V1.6 to a CPU V1.6 is supported. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 156 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Using versions 4.1 Overview of versions Parameter "Mode" of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. The table below shows a comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology V1.0 and V2.0: MC_Home.HomingMode V1.0 Parameter value MC_Home.Mode V2.0 Direct homing (absolute) 0 Direct homing (absolute) Direct homing (relative) 1 Direct homing (relative) Passive homing 2 Passive homing (without reset) Passive homing (with configured home position) 3 Active homing Active homing 4 Reserved Active homing (with configured home position) 5 Active homing (with configured home position) Absolute encoder adjustment (relative) 6 Absolute encoder adjustment (relative) Absolute encoder adjustment (absolute) 7 Absolute encoder adjustment (absolute) Passive homing (without reset) 8 Passive homing Abort passive homing 9 Abort passive homing - 10 Passive homing (with configured home position) You can find additional information about the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter in the description of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" (Page 369). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 157 Using versions 4.1 Overview of versions Tags of the technology object Starting from technology version V3.0, all input and output addresses are specified using data type VREF. This results in the following changes to the tags of the technical object: Tag of technology object Changes starting from V3.0 .Actor.Interface.AddressIn Data type: VREF .Actor.Interface.AddressOut Data type: VREF .Sensor[n].Interface.AddressIn Data type: VREF .Sensor[n].Interface.AddressOut Data type: VREF .Actor.Interface.EnableDriveOutputAddress Data type: VREF .Actor.Interface.EnableDriveOutputBitNumber Tag eliminated .Actor.Interface.DriveReadyInputAddress Data type: VREF .Actor.Interface.DriveReadyInputBitNumber Tag eliminated .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.DigitalInputAddress Data type: VREF .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming.DigitalInputBitNumber Tag eliminated .Sensor[n].PassiveHoming.DigitalInputAddress Data type: VREF .Sensor[n].PassiveHoming.DigitalInputBitNumber Tag eliminated .PositionLimits_HW.MinInputAddress Data type: VREF .PositionLimits_HW.MinInputBitNumber Tag eliminated .PositionLimits_HW.MaxInputAddress Data type: VREF .PositionLimits_HW.MaxInputBitNumber Tag eliminated S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 158 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Using versions 4.2 Version V4.0 4.2 Version V4.0 Innovations Technology Version V4.0 contains the following new features: Exchange of torque data with the drive in the technological units of the technology object. - Additive setpoint torque - Current actual torque - Permissible torque range Extension of the data structure of the positioning axis and synchronous axis for using technology object kinematics Use of optimized data blocks (drive/encoder connection) Additional innovations for S7-1500T: Technology Version V4.0 contains the following additional features: Kinematic technology object (S7-1500T) Motion specification via MotionIn instructions (S7-1500T) Direct synchronous setting with MC_CamIn V4.0 (S7-1500T) Motion Control instructions Technology Version V4.0 contains the following Motion Control instructions: MC_Power V4.0 MC_Reset V4.0 MC_Home V4.0 MC_Halt V4.0 MC_MoveAbsolute V4.0 MC_MoveRelative V4.0 MC_MoveVelocity V4.0 MC_MoveJog V4.0 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4.0 MC_SetSensor V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_TorqueLimit V4.0 MC_MeasuringInput V4.0 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic V4.0 MC_AbortMeasuringInput V4.0 MC_OutputCam V4.0 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 159 Using versions 4.2 Version V4.0 MC_CamTrack V4.0 MC_GearIn V4.0 MC_GearInPos V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_PhasingAbsolute V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_PhasingRelative V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_CamIn V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SynchronizedMotionSimulation V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_InterpolateCam V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_GetCamFollowingValue V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_GetCamLeadingValue V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_MotionInVelocity V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_MotionInPosition V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_TorqueAdditive V4.0 MC_TorqueRange V4.0 MC_GroupInterrupt V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_GroupContinue V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_GroupStop V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_MoveLinearAbsolute V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_MoveLinearRelative V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_MoveCircularAbsolute V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_MoveCircularRelative V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_DefineWorkspaceZone V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_DefineKinematicsZone V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SetWorkspaceZoneActive V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SetWorkspaceZoneInactive V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SetKinematicsZoneActive V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SetKinematicsZoneInactive V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_DefineTool V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SetTool V4.0 (S7-1500T) MC_SetOcsFrame V4.0 (S7-1500T) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 160 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Using versions 4.3 Version V3.0 Version-based UDT names The following table shows the version-based UDT names for the control words and status words of the SIEMENS telegrams 10x: UDT name Motion Control" folder. 4. Save and compile the project. The version of the technology objects and Motion Control instructions is changed to the appropriate higher technology version during compilation of the project. Pay attention to any error information that is displayed during compilation. Deal with the causes of the errors indicated. 5. Check the configuration of the technology objects. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 164 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Using versions 4.7 Replacing devices Resetting the "Mode" parameter of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" When the technology version is changed from V1.0 to V2.0, the "MC_Home.HomingMode" parameter (V1.0) is renamed to "MC_Home.Mode" ( V2.0). The assignment of the parameter values is changed as well. To reset the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter (V2.0), follow these steps: 1. To change the technology version, follow the instructions given above. When compiling the project, the "MC_Home.HomingMode"parameter (V1.0) is renamed to "MC_Home.Mode" ( V2.0): - The assignment of the parameter values is changed. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in section Version overview (Page 155). You can find additional information about the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter in the description of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" (Page 369). - The value configured at the "MC_Home.HomingMode" parameter (V1.0) is lost. As a note on renaming, the following text is entered as the parameter value in the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter ( V2.0). "The interface has changed. You can find additional information in the description of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". - There is a message in the "Info > Compile" tab in the Inspector window stating that the operand has the wrong data type. 2. Change the value of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter ( V2.0) in your user program according to the new assignment. 3. Save and compile the project. 4.7 Replacing devices You can replace an S7-1500 with an S7-1500T and vice versa. The behavior with respect to functions and the existing configuration is different depending on what is being replaced. S7-1500 S7-1500T The functions of the S7-1500 are expanded to include additional parameters for the extended functions of the S7-1500T. The additional parameters are preassigned with default values and must be configured appropriately. S7-1500T S7-1500 - Extended functions are only supported by an S7-1500T and are no longer available after a replacement with S7-1500. - Unsupported function blocks are marked. - Unsupported technology objects are displayed in an error message after compilation and must be deleted. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 165 5 Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration 5.1.1 Introduction Adding and configuring a drive is described in the following section with the example of a SINAMICS S120 drive. If you use a SINAMICS V90 PN or a SINAMICS drive with Startdrive, you can find additional information in the following documentation. Using SINAMICS V90 PN You need the Hardware Support Package (HSP) V90 two add and configure a SINAMICS V90 PN drive in the TIA Portal. Information on configuring a SINAMICS V90 PN drive with SIMATIC S7-1500 in the TIA Portal is available in the Getting Started "SIMATIC/SINAMICS First Steps SINAMICS V90 PN on S7-1500 Motion Control": https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109739497 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109739497) Using Startdrive If you use a SINAMICS drive with Startdrive, you can find additional information in the hardware catalog in the "Drives & Starter" folder. For additional information on connecting via Startdrive, refer to: "Getting Started SINAMICS S120 in the Startdrive V14 SP1": https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109747452 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747452) Application example "Positioning an S120 (Startdrive) with SIMATIC S7-1500 (TO)": https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109743270 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743270) Drives compatibility list In the appendix (Page 555) you can find an overview of drives that can be interconnected with an S7-1500 CPU. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 166 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration 5.1.2 Add and configure PROFINET IO drives Adding and configuring a PROFINET IO drive is described below with the example of a SINAMICS S120 drive. Adding and configuring other PROFINET IO drives may differ from the description in certain respects. When you use a S7-1500C CPU you can use the inputs/outputs of the CPU as interface to the drive. Requirements The SIMATIC S7-1500 device is created in the project. The desired drive can be selected in the hardware catalog. If the drive is not available in the hardware catalog, it must be installed in the "Options" menu as a device description file (GSD). Adding a drive and telegram in the device configuration 1. Open the device configuration and change to the network view. 2. In the hardware catalog, open the folder "Additional field devices > PROFINET IO > Drives > Siemens AG > SINAMICS". 3. Select the desired drive with the desired version, then drag it to the network view. 4. Assign the drive to the PROFINET interface of the PLC. 5. Open the drive in the device view. 6. Drag a Drive Object (DO) and a telegram from the hardware catalog and drop it onto a slot of the device overview of the drive. 7. Make sure that the order of the telegrams in the device configuration and in the drive parameter assignment are identical. Depending on the version of the SINAMICS S120 drive, select "DO with telegram X", or "DO Servo" and a "Telegram X" for the telegram. For more information on suitable telegrams, refer to the section PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36). Repeat step 6, if you want to add another drive and another standard telegram. Activating isochronous mode of the drive in the device configuration PROFINET drives can always be operated in isochronous mode or clock synchronized mode. Isochronous mode, however, increases the quality of the closed loop position control of the drive and is therefore recommended for drives such as SINAMICS S120. To control the drive in isochronous mode, follow these steps: 1. Open the device view of the drive. 2. In the properties window, select the tab "PROFINET interface [X1] > Advanced options > Isochronous mode". 3. Select the "Isochronous mode" check box in this tab. The entry for the telegram also has to be selected for isochronous mode in the detailed view. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 167 Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration Interconnecting the port of the PLC with the port of the drive 1. Open the topology view in the device configuration. 2. Interconnect the port of the drive as in the real configuration with the port of the PLC. At the same time, note the rules for topology configuration. Configuring the PLC as the sync master and setting isochronous mode 1. Select the device view of the PLC. 2. In the Properties window, select the tab "PROFINET interface [X1] > Advanced options > Real-time settings > Synchronization". 3. Select "Sync master" from the "Synchronization role" drop-down list. 4. Click the "Domain settings" button. 5. Open the "Domain Management > Sync Domains" tab and set the desired "Send clock" (isochronous clock). Select drive in the configuration of the technology object 1. Add a new technology object axis, or open the configuration of an existing axis. 2. Open the configuration "Hardware interface > Drive". 3. Select from the "PROFIdrive" entry in the "Drive type" drop-down list. 4. Select the Drive Object of the PROFINET drive from the "Drive" list. For information on how to add a technology object, refer to the section Add technology object (Page 175). Result The technology object is connected to the drive and the "MC Servo" organization block can be checked / configured. The telegram of the configured drive is assigned to the "PIP OB Servo" process image. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 168 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration Checking/configuring the properties of the "MC-Servo" 1. Open the "Program blocks" folder in the project navigator. 2. Select the "MC-Servo" organization block. 3. Select the "Properties" command in the shortcut menu. 4. Select the "Cycle time" entry in the area navigation. 5. The option "Synchronous to the bus" must be selected in the dialog box. 6. A "PROFINET IO_System" must be selected in the "Distributed I/O" drop-down list. 7. The application cycle of "MC-Servo" must correspond to the send clock of the bus or be reduced by an integral factor relative to the send clock of the bus. Result The PROFINET IO drive is configured in such a way that it can be controlled in isochronous mode in the PROFINET IO network. The properties of the SINAMICS drive must be configured according to the configuration of the axis with the STARTER software or SINAMICS Startdrive. Checking isochronous mode on the drive If the configuration sequence described above is not adhered to during configuration of the axis, and drive-specific error occurs when the project is compiled, the setting for isochronous mode on the drive must be checked. 1. Open the device view of the drive. 2. Select standard telegram in the device overview. 3. Select the properties dialog "General > I/O Addresses". 4. The following settings apply for the input and output addresses: - "Isochronous mode" is enabled. - "MC-Servo" must be selected for the "Organization block". - "PIP OB Servo" must be select the "Process image". See also PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) Add technology object (Page 175) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 169 Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration 5.1.3 Add and configure PROFIBUS DP drives Adding and configuring a PROFIBUS drive is described below with the example of a SINAMICS S120 drive. Adding and configuring other PROFIBUS drives may differ from the description in certain respects. When you use a S7-1500C CPU you can use the inputs/outputs of the CPU as interface to the drive. Requirements The SIMATIC S7-1500 device is created in the project. The desired drive can be selected in the hardware catalog. If the drive is not available in the hardware catalog, you must install the drive in the "Options" menu as a device description file (GSD). Adding a drive and telegram in the device configuration 1. Open the device configuration and change to the network view. 2. In the hardware catalog, open the folder "Additional Field Devices > PROFIBUS DP > Drives > Siemens AG > SINAMICS". 3. Select the folder of the desired drive with the desired version, then drag the drive object to the network view. 4. Assign the drive to the PROFIBUS interface of the PLC. 5. Open the drive in the device view. 6. Drag-and-drop a telegram from the hardware catalog onto a slot in the device overview of the drive. For more information on suitable telegrams, refer to the section PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36). If you want to add another drive and another telegram to the device overview, use the "Axis disconnector" in the hardware catalog. Activating isochronous mode of the drive in the device configuration PROFIBUS drives can be operated in cyclic mode or isochronous mode. Isochronous mode, however, increases the quality of the position control of the drive. If you want to control the drive in isochronous mode, follow these steps: 1. Open the device view of the drive. 2. In the properties dialog, select the tab "General > Isochronous Mode". 3. Select the "Synchronize DP slave to constant DP bus cycle time" check box . S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 170 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration Setting isochronous mode 1. Select the network view. 2. Select the DP master system. 3. In the properties dialog, select the tab "General > Constant bus cycle time". 4. Select the desired "Constant DP bus cycle times". Select drive in the configuration of the technology object 1. Add a new technology object axis, or open the configuration of an existing axis. 2. Open the configuration "Hardware interface > Drive". 3. Select from the "PROFIdrive" entry in the "Drive type" drop-down list. 4. Select the telegram of the PROFIBUS drive from the "Drive" list. For information on how to add a technology object, refer to the section Add technology object (Page 175). Result The technology object is connected to the drive and the "MC-Servo" organization block can be checked / configured. The telegram of the configured drive is assigned to the "PIP OB Servo" process image. Checking/configuring the properties of the "MC-Servo" 1. Open the "Program blocks" folder in the project navigator. 2. Select the "MC-Servo" organization block. 3. Select the "Properties" command in the shortcut menu. The "MC-Servo" dialog opens. 4. Select the "Synchronous to the bus" option under "General > Cycle time". 5. In the "Distributed I/O" drop-down list, select a "PROFIBUS DP-System". The application cycle of "MC-Servo" must correspond to the send clock of the bus or be reduced by an integral factor relative to the send clock of the bus. You can select a drive connected to the CPU via a communications processor/communications module (CP/CM) in the configuration of the technology object. You cannot select the DP master system of the CP/CM as the source clock for MC-Servo [OB91]. Result The PROFIBUS DP drive is configured in such a way that it can be controlled in isochronous mode in the PROFIBUS network. The properties of the SINAMICS drive must be configured according to the configuration of the axis with the STARTER software or SINAMICS Startdrive. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 171 Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration Checking isochronous mode on the drive If the configuration sequence described above is not adhered to during configuration of the axis, and drive-specific error occurs when the project is compiled, isochronous mode can be checked on the drive. 1. Open the device view of the drive. 2. Select the entry of the telegram in the device overview. 3. Select the properties dialog "General > I/O Addresses". 4. The following settings apply for the input and output addresses: - "MC-Servo" must be selected for the "Organization block". - "PIP OB Servo" must be select the "Process image". See also PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) Add technology object (Page 175) 5.1.4 Adding and configuring drives with analog connections A description is provided below of how to add and configure a drive with an analog drive connection and an encoder. The connection is made for example as a positioning axis with an incremental encoder and using a technology module in the rack of the PLC. When you use a S7-1500C CPU you can use the inputs/outputs of the CPU as interface to the drive. Requirements The SIMATIC S7-1500 device is created in the project. Adding and configuring an analog output module in the device configuration 1. Open the device configuration of the PLC. 2. Select an analog output module from the hardware catalog and drag the module to the rack of the PLC. 3. Select the analog output module in the device view. 4. Open the "General" tab in the properties dialog and select there "Name of the Analog Output Module > I/O Addresses". 5. Enter the desired start address. 6. In the properties dialog, select the tab "General > IO Tags". 7. Enter the tag name for the desired analog output. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 172 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration Adding and configuring a technology module 1. Switch to the device view of the PLC. 2. In the hardware catalog, open the folder "TM > Count > TM Count 2X24V". 3. Drag the counter module to a free slot in the rack. (When inserted in the rack of the PLC, the technology module cannot be operated in isochronous mode.) 4. Select the technology module in the device view. 5. In the properties dialog, open the "General" tab and select there "Count 2x24V > Basic Parameters > Channel X > Operating Mode" of the channel to be used. 6. Select "Position input for Motion Control" option for "Selection of the operating mode for the channel". 7. Under "Module parameters", adapt the parameters of the incremental encoder (steps per revolution = increments per revolution). 8. Under "Reaction to CPU STOP", select the item "Continue working". Selecting the drive and encoder in the configuration of the technology object 1. Add a new positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object, or open the configuration of an existing positioning axis/synchronous axis. 2. Open the configuration "Hardware interface > Drive". 3. Select "Analog drive connection" from the "Drive type" drop-down list. 4. Select the previously defined tag name of the analog output from the "Output" list. 5. Open the configuration "Hardware interface > Encoder". 6. Under "Select encoder connection" select "Encoder on technology module (TM)". 7. Select the channel of the incremental encoder from the "Technology module" list under "local modules". 8. Open the configuration "Hardware interface > Data exchange with encoder > Fine resolution" and enter the "0" value for "bits in the incr. actual value". For information on how to add a technology object, refer to the section Add technology object (Page 175) Result The analog drive connection and the encoder connection are configured. The analog addresses and the addresses of the TM module are assigned to the process image "PIP OB Servo". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 173 Configuring 5.1 Adding and configuring drives in the device configuration Checking the encoder connection / drive connection The encoder data are applied to the position control cycle clock. If in doubt, check the following settings: 1. Switch to the device view of the PLC. 2. Select the module technology. 3. Open the properties dialog "Basic Parameters > I/O Addresses". 4. The following settings apply for the input and output addresses: - "MC-Servo" must be selected for the "Organization block". - "PIP OB Servo" must be select the "Process image". 5. Select the analog module. 6. Open the properties dialog "Name of the Analog Module > I/O Addresses". 7. The settings from Step 4 apply for the input and output addresses See also Add technology object (Page 175) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 174 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.2 Configuration basics 5.2 Configuration basics 5.2.1 Add technology object The following describes how to add a technology object in the project tree. Requirement A project with a CPU S7-1500 has been created. For the output cam, cam track, measuring input technology objects: A speed axis, positioning axis, synchronous axis or external encoder technology object is created in the project. Procedure To add a technology object, follow these steps: 1. Open the CPU's folder in the project navigator. 2. Open the "Technology Objects" folder. 3. Double-click "Add new object". The "Add new object" dialog opens. 4. Select the required technology object. You can infer the function of the technology object from the displayed description. 5. If you add output cams, cam tracks, measuring inputs to a technology object, select the higher-level technology object in the "Axis or external encoder that is to be assigned". 6. In the "Name" input field, adapt the name to your requirements. 7. To change the suggested data block number, select the "Manual" option. 8. To add your own information about the technology object, click "Additional information". 9. To open the configuration after adding the technology object, select the "Add new and open" check box. 10.To add the technology object, click "OK". Result The new technology object was created and created in the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. If the "MC-Servo" and "MC-Interpolator" organizational units were not yet available, they were added. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 175 Configuring 5.2 Configuration basics 5.2.2 Copy technology object You can copy a technology object in the following ways: Copying a technology object within a CPU Copying a technology object from a CPU S7-1500 to a CPU S7-1500T Additional parameters for the extended functions are pre-defined with default values and must be configured accordingly. Copying a technology object from a CPU S7-1500T to a CPU S7-1500 Additional parameters, which are not supported by the CPU S7-1500, are reset to the default values. When you copy a technology object that has lower-level technology objects such as output cams, cam tracks or measuring inputs, the lower-level technology object are also copied. The following describes how to copy a technology object within a CPU. The procedure also applies accordingly to the other copying methods mentioned. Requirement A project with a CPU S7-1500 has been created. You have created an technology object in the project. Procedure To copy a technology object, follow these steps: 1. Open the CPU's folder in the project navigator. 2. Open the "Technology Objects" folder. 3. If necessary, open the higher-level technology object. 4. Select the technology object to be copied. 5. Select "Copy" in the shortcut menu. 6. Select the "Technology objects" folder or the higher-level technology object. 7. Select "Paste" in the shortcut menu. Result The selected technology object, including lower-level technology objects, has been copied and created in the "Technology objects" folder of the project tree. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 176 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.2 Configuration basics 5.2.3 Delete technology object You can delete technology objects in the project tree. When you delete a technology object that has lower-level technology objects such as output cams, cam tracks or measuring inputs, the lower-level technology object are also deleted. Requirement A project with a CPU S7-1500 has been created. You have created an technology object in the project. Procedure To delete a technology object, follow these steps: 1. Open the CPU's folder in the project navigator. 2. Open the "Technology Objects" folder. 3. Select the technology object to be deleted. 4. Select the "Delete" command in the shortcut menu. The "Confirm delete" dialog is opened. 5. To delete the technology object, click "Yes". Result The selected technology object has been deleted. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 177 Configuring 5.2 Configuration basics 5.2.4 Working with the configuration editor You configure the properties of a technology object in the configuration window. To open the configuration window of the technology object in the project view, follow these steps: 1. Open the device "Technology objects" group in the project navigator. 2. Select the technology object and double-click on "Configuration". The configuration is divided into categories which depend on the object type, for example: Basic parameters, hardware interface, extended parameters. Configuration editor icons Icons in the area navigation of the configuration show additional details about the status of the configuration: The configuration contains default values and is complete. The configuration contains only default values. With these default values you can use the technology object without additional changes. The configuration contains user-defined or automatically adapted values and is complete. All input fields of the configuration contain valid values and at least one preset value has changed. The configuration is incomplete or incorrect. At least one input field or drop-down list contains an invalid value. The corresponding field or the drop-down list is displayed on a red background. Click the field shows you the roll-out error message that indicates the cause of error. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 178 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.2 Configuration basics 5.2.5 Compare values If an online connection to the CPU is available, the "Monitor all" function configuration of the technology object. appears in the The "Monitor all" function provides the following options: Comparison of configured start values of the project with the start values in the CPU and the actual values Direct editing of actual values and the start values of the project Immediate detection and display of input errors with suggested corrections Backup of actual values in the project Transfer of start values of the project to the CPU as actual values Note Differences between online and offline values By adding or deleting technology objects that have a connection to other technology objects, such as cams, cam tracks, measuring inputs or synchronized axes, differences can occur when online and offline values are compared. These differences can be eliminated by recompiling the project and then uploading it to the CPU. Icons and operator controls If there is an online connection to the CPU, the actual values are displayed at the parameters. In addition to the actual values of the parameters, the following symbols appear: Symbol Description Start value in CPU matches the configured start value in project Start value in CPU does not match the configured start value in project Software error in lower-level component: The online and offline versions differ in at least one lower-level software component. The comparison of the Start value in CPU with the configured start value in project cannot be performed. Comparison of the online and offline values is not advisable. Use this button to show the start value of the CPU and the start value of the project for the respective parameter. You can change the start value of the CPU directly and then download it to the CPU. For directly editable parameters, the actual value can also be changed and the change will be transferred directly to the CPU. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 179 Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object 5.3.1 Configuration - Basic Parameters Configure the basic properties of the technology object in the "Basic Parameters" configuration window. Name Define the name of the speed axis in this field. The technology object is listed under this name in the project tree. You can use the variables of the speed axis in the user program under this name. Axis type If you want to use the axis in the CPU exclusively as a virtual leading axis for synchronization, for example, select the "Virtual axis" check box. The configuration of a drive and encoder connection is not relevant. Speed unit of measure Select the desired unit of measure for speed in the drop-down list. Simulation If you want to move a real axis in the simulation mode, select the "Activate simulation" check box. In simulation mode, speed, positioning and synchronous axes can be simulated in the CPU without connected drives and encoders. Simulation mode is possible as of Technology Version V3.0 even without a configured drive and encoder connection. For simulation mode without hardware connected to the CPU, you can influence the startup time of the CPU via the "Configuration time for central and distributed I/Os" parameter. You can find the parameter in the CPU properties in the "Startup" area navigation. See also Units of measure (Page 32) Axis in simulation (Page 49) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 180 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object 5.3.2 Hardware interface 5.3.2.1 Configuration - Drive In the "Drive" configuration window, configure which drive type and which drive you want to use. Drive type In the drop-down list, select whether you want to deploy a PROFIdrive drive or a drive with an analog drive connection. PROFIdrive drives are connected to the controller by means of a digital communication system (PROFINET or PROFIBUS). The communication is performed via PROFIdrive telegrams. Drives with an analog drive connection receive the speed setpoint via an analog output signal (e.g. from -10 V to +10 V) from the PLC. Drive type: PROFIdrive Data connection In the drop-down list, select whether the data connection is to be made directly with the drive device or via an editable data block in the user program. Drive/data block In the "Drive" field, select an already configured PROFIdrive drive/slot. If a PROFIdrive drive was selected, it can be configured using the "Device configuration" button. Switch to the device configuration, and add a PROFIdrive drive in the network view, in the event that no PROFIdrive drive can be selected. If "Data block" was selected for the data connection, a previously created data block containing a variable structure of data type "PD_TELx" must be selected here ("x" stands for the telegram number used). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 181 Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object Drive type: Analog drive connection Analog output In the "Output" field, select the PLC tag of the analog output over which the drive is to be controlled. In order to be able to select an output, an analog output module must have been added in the device configuration, and the PLC tag name for the analog output must be defined. Activating enable output In the "Enable output" field, select the PLC tag of the digital output to enable the drive. With the enable output, the speed controller in the drive is enabled, or disabled. In order to be able to select an enable output, a digital output module must have been added in the device configuration, and the PLC tag name for the digital output must be defined. Note If you do not use an enable output, the drive cannot be immediately disabled on the part of the system due to error reactions or monitoring functions. A controlled stop of the drive is not guaranteed. Enable ready input In the "Ready input" field, select the PLC tag of the digital input with which the drive is to report its operational readiness to the technology object. The power module is switched on and the analog speed setpoint input is enabled. In order to be able to select a ready input, a digital input module must have been added in the device configuration, and the PLC tag name for the digital input must be defined. Note The enable output and the ready input can be separately enabled. The following boundary conditions apply to the activated ready input: * The axis is only enabled (MC_Power Status = TRUE) when a signal is present at the ready input. * If the signal at the ready input goes away for an enabled axis, the axis is disabled with the alarm reaction "Remove enable". * If the axis is disabled with the instruction MC_Power (Enable = FALSE), the axis is disabled even when a signal is present at the ready input. See also Configuration - Data exchange with the drive (Page 183) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) Drive and encoder connection (Page 34) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 182 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object 5.3.2.2 Configuration - Data exchange with the drive You configure the data transmission to the drive in this configuration window. Drive type: PROFIdrive Drive telegram The telegram to the drive that is set in the device configuration is preselected in the dropdown list. Automatic data exchange for drive values (offline) Select the check box if you want to transfer the offline values of the drive "Reference speed", "Maximum speed" and "Reference torque" to the configuration of the technology object in the project. Automatic data exchange for drive values (online) Select the check box if you want to transfer the effective values "Reference speed", "Maximum speed" and "Reference torque" online in the drive to the CPU during runtime. The drive parameters are transferred from the bus after the (re-)initialization of the technology object or the (re)start of the drive or the CPU. Alternatively, you must synchronize the following parameters manually: Reference speed Configure the reference speed of the drive in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications in this field. The specification of the drive speed is a percentage of the reference speed in the range -200% to +200%. Maximum speed Configure the maximum speed of the drive in this field. Reference torque Configure the reference torque of the drive corresponding to its configuration in this field. The reference torque is needed for force/torque reduction, which is supported with telegram 10x. Supplementary data Select the "Torque data" check box if you want to configure the data connection of the torque data. If you have selected a drive with which the additional telegram 750 has been configured, the "Torque data" check box is preselected. Data connection In the drop-down list, define whether the data connection should be made via additional telegrams or data blocks: If you select the entry "Additional telegram" in the "Data connection" drop-down list, you can edit the "Additional telegram" drop-down list. If you select the "Data block" entry in the "Data connection" drop-down list, you can select the previously created data block which contains a tag structure of the "PD_TELx" data type ("x" stands for the additional telegram number that is used). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 183 Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object Data block / additional telegram Select an additional telegram configured in the "Additional telegram" field. Select the "Show all modules" check box if you want to display all submodules of the connected drive. You can also find self-defined additional telegrams with this function. In the "Data block" field, select the data block which you want to use to integrate the torque data. Note Automatic transfer of drive parameters is only possible with SINAMICS drives as of V4.x. For this, "Drive" must be selected for the data connection in configuration window "Hardware interface > Drive". Drive type: Analog drive connection Reference speed The reference speed of the drive is the speed at which the drive rotates when there is an output of 100% at the analog output. The reference speed must be configured for the drive and transferred in the configuration of the technology object. The analog value that is output at 100% depends on the type of the analog output. For example, for an analog output with +/- 10 V, the value 10 V is output at 100%. Analog outputs can be overdriven by about 17%. This means that an analog output can be operated in the range from -117% to 117%, insofar as the drive permits this. See also Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device (Page 42) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) Drive and encoder connection (Page 34) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 184 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object 5.3.3 Extended Parameters 5.3.3.1 Configuration - Mechanics Configure the connection of the load to the drive in the "Mechanics" configuration window. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. Load gear Number of motor revolutions / number of load revolutions The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Specify here an integral number of motor revolutions and the resulting number of load revolutions. See also Mechanics (Page 53) 5.3.3.2 Configuration - Dynamic Defaults In the "Dynamic default values" configuration window, configure the default values for speed, acceleration, deceleration jerk of the axis. The default values have an effect, when values < 0 are specified in Motion Control instructions for the "Velocity", "Acceleration", "Deceleration" or "Jerk" parameters. The default values can be applied separately for each of the parameters just listed. Speed In this field, define the default value for the speed of the axis. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 185 Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object Acceleration / Deceleration - Ramp-up time / Ramp-down time Set the desired default value for acceleration in the "Ramp-up time" or "Acceleration" fields. The desired deceleration can be set in the "Ramp-down time" or "Deceleration" fields. The following equations show the relationship between the ramp-up time and acceleration and the ramp-down time and deceleration: Note A change in the velocity influences the acceleration and deceleration values of the axis. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are retained. Smoothing time / jerk You can enter the jerk limit parameters in the "Smoothing time" box, or alternatively in the "Jerk" box: Set the desired jerk for the acceleration and deceleration ramp in the "Jerk" field. The value 0 means that jerk limiting is deactivated. Set the desired smoothing time for the acceleration ramp in the "Smoothing time" field. Note The jerk value is identical for the acceleration and deceleration ramp. The smoothing time in effect for the deceleration ramp results from the following relationships: * Acceleration > Deceleration A shorter smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration < Deceleration A longer smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration = Deceleration The smoothing times of the acceleration and deceleration ramp are equal. If an error occurs, the axis decelerates with the configured emergency stop deceleration. A configured jerk limit is not taken into account for this. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 186 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object The following equations show the relationship between the smoothing times and the jerk: Motion jobs started in the user program are performed with the selected jerk. See also Velocity profile (Page 60) 5.3.3.3 Configuration - Emergency stop In the "Emergency stop" configuration window, you can configure the emergency stop deceleration of the axis. In the event of an error, and when disabling the axis, the axis is brought to a standstill with this deceleration using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power" (input parameter StopMode = 0). Emergency stop deceleration / Emergency stop ramp-down time Configure the deceleration value for emergency stop in the "Emergency stop deceleration" field or the "Emergency stop ramp-down time" field. The relationship between emergency stop ramp-down time and emergency stop deceleration can be seen in the following equation: The configuration of the emergency stop deceleration is related to the configured maximum speed of the axis. If the maximum speed of the axis changes, then the value of the emergency stop deceleration also changes (the emergency stop ramp-down time remains unchanged). See also Emergency stop deceleration (Page 62) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 187 Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object 5.3.3.4 Limits Configuration - Dynamic limits In the "Dynamic limits" configuration window, configure the maximum values for speed, acceleration, deceleration and jerk of the axis. Maximum speed In this field, define the maximum permitted speed of the axis. Maximum acceleration/maximum deceleration - ramp-up time/ramp-down time Set the desired acceleration in the "Ramp-up time" or "Acceleration" fields. The desired deceleration can be set in the "Ramp-down time" or "Deceleration" fields. The following equations show the relationship between the ramp-up time and acceleration and the ramp-down time and deceleration: Note Change of maximum speed A change in the maximum speed influences the acceleration and deceleration values of the axis. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are retained. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 188 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object Smoothing time / jerk You can enter the jerk limit parameters in the "Smoothing time" box, or alternatively in the "Jerk" box: Set the desired jerk for the acceleration ramp and the deceleration ramp in the "Maximum jerk" box. The value 0 means that the jerk is not limited. Set the desired smoothing time for the acceleration ramp in the "Smoothing time" field. Note Various acceleration and deceleration values The configured smoothing time displayed in the configuration, applies only to the acceleration ramp. If the values of the acceleration and deceleration differ, the smoothing time of the deceleration ramp is calculated and used according to the jerk of the acceleration ramp. The smoothing time of the deceleration is adapted as follows: * Acceleration > Deceleration A shorter smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration < Deceleration A longer smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration = Deceleration The smoothing times of the acceleration and deceleration ramp are equal. If an error occurs, the axis decelerates with the configured emergency stop deceleration (Page 60) (alarm reaction "Stop with maximum dynamic values"). A configured jerk limit is not taken into account for this. The following equations show the relationship between the smoothing times and the jerk: Motion jobs started in the user program are performed with the selected jerk. See also Emergency stop deceleration (Page 62) Dynamic limits in synchronous operation (Page 62) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 189 Configuring 5.3 Configuring the Speed-Control Axis technology object Configuration - Torque limits Configure the torque limiting of the drive in the "Torque limits" configuration window. The configuration is now available if a drive that supports force/torque limiting is selected and a telegram 10x is used. Effective In the drop-down list, select whether the limit value is to be in effect "on load side" or "on motor side". Torque limiting Enter a default value for the torque limit in the specified unit of measure in this field. The default value is in effect when the torque limiting is specified using Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting", input parameter "Limit" < 0. If the gear efficiency is critical, this can be set in the .Actor.Efficiency tag. See also Force/torque limiting (Page 63) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 190 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.1 Configuration - Basic Parameters Configure the basic properties of the technology object in the "Basic Parameters" configuration window. Name Define the name of the positioning axis/synchronous axis in this field. The technology object is listed under this name in the project tree. The variables of the technology object can be used in the user program under this name. Axis type If you want to use the axis in the CPU exclusively as a virtual leading axis for synchronization, for example, select the "Virtual axis" check box. The configuration of a drive and encoder connection is not relevant. In this selection, configure whether the axis should perform linear or rotary motions. Units of measure In the drop-down list, select the desired units of measure for the position, velocity, torque and force of the axis. Modulo Select the "Enable modulo" check box if you want to use a recurring system of units for the axis (e.g. 0 to 360 for an axis of the "rotary" axis type). Modulo start value In this field, define the position at which the modulo range should begin (e.g. 0 for an axis of the "rotary" axis type). Modulo length In this field, define the length of the modulo range (e.g. 360 for an axis of the "rotary" axis type). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 191 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Simulation If you want to move a real axis in the simulation mode, select the "Activate simulation" check box. In simulation mode, speed, positioning and synchronous axes can be simulated in the CPU without connected drives and encoders. Simulation mode is possible as of Technology Version V3.0 even without a configured drive and encoder connection. For simulation mode without hardware connected to the CPU, you can influence the startup time of the CPU via the "Configuration time for central and distributed I/Os" parameter. You can find the parameter in the CPU properties in the "Startup" area navigation. See also Axis in simulation (Page 49) Units of measure (Page 32) Modulo setting (Page 33) Mechanics (Page 53) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) 5.4.2 Hardware interface 5.4.2.1 Configuration - Drive In the "Drive" configuration window, configure which drive type and which drive you want to use. Drive type In the drop-down list, select whether you want to deploy a PROFIdrive drive or a drive with an analog drive connection. PROFIdrive drives are connected to the controller by means of a digital communication system (PROFINET or PROFIBUS). The communication is performed via PROFIdrive telegrams. Drives with an analog drive connection receive the speed setpoint via an analog output signal (e.g. from -10 V to +10 V) from the PLC. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 192 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Drive type: PROFIdrive Data connection In the drop-down list, select whether the data connection is to be made directly with the drive device or via an editable data block in the user program. Drive/data block In the "Drive" field, select an already configured PROFIdrive drive/slot. If you have selected a PROFIdrive drive, you can configure the PROFIdrive drive using the "Device configuration" button. If no PROFIdrive drive is available for selection, switch to the device configuration, and add a PROFIdrive drive in the network view. If you have selected "Data block" under the data connection, select a previously created data block which contains a variable structure of the data type "PD_TELx" ("x" stands for the telegram number to be used). Drive type: Analog drive connection Analog output In the "Analog output" field, select the PLC tag of the analog output via which the drive is to be controlled. In order to be able to select an output, you first need to add an analog output module in the device configuration and define the PLC tag name for the analog output. Activating enable output Select the "Activate enable output" check box if the drive supports an enable. Select the PLC tag of the digital output for the drive enable in the corresponding field. With the enable output, the speed controller in the drive is enabled, or disabled. In order to be able to select an enable output, a digital output module must be added in the device configuration and the PLC tag name must be defined for the digital output. Note If you do not use an enable output, the drive cannot be immediately disabled on the part of the system due to error reactions or monitoring functions. A controlled stop of the drive is not guaranteed. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 193 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Enable ready input Select the "Enable ready input" check box if the drive can signal its readiness. Select the PLC tag of the digital input via which the drive is to signal its operational readiness to the technology object in the corresponding field. The power module is switched on and the analog speed setpoint input is enabled. In order to be able to select a ready input, you first need to add a digital input module in the device configuration and define the PLC tag name for the digital input. Note The enable output and the ready input can be separately enabled. The following boundary conditions apply to the activated ready input: * The axis is only enabled ( MC_Power Status = TRUE) when a signal is present at the ready input. * If a signal is not present at the ready input on an enabled axis, the axis is disabled with an error. * If the axis is disabled with the instruction MC_Power (Enable = FALSE), the axis is disabled even when a signal is present at the ready input. See also Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) Data connection drive/encoder via data block (Page 50) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) 5.4.2.2 Configuration - Encoder For closed loop position control, positioning axes/synchronous axes require an actual position value in the form of an encoder position. The encoder position is transmitted to the controller by means of a PROFIdrive telegram. Configure the encoder and encoder type in the "Encoder" configuration window. Data connection In the drop-down list, select whether the data connection should be established directly with the encoder or via a data block that can be edited in the user program. The selection is only possible for encoders that are connected via PROFIdrive and support parameter P979. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 194 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Encoder / data block Select a previously configured encoder in this configuration field. The following encoders can be selected: Connection to the drive (not with analog drive connection) The encoder is configured via the configuration of the PROFIdrive drive. The drive evaluates the encoder signals and sends them to the controller in the PROFIdrive telegram. Encoder on technology module (TM) Select a previously configured technology module and the channel to be used. Only technology modules set to the "Position input for Motion Control" mode are displayed for selection. If no technology module is available for selection, change to the device configuration and add a technology module. If you have selected a technology module, you can access the configuration of the technology module using the "Device configuration" button. You can operate the technology module centrally on an S7-1500 CPU or decentrally on a distributed I/O. Isochronous mode is not possible with central operation in the CPU. You can identify the technology modules suitable for position detection for Motion Control in the documentation for the technology module and the catalog data. PROFIdrive encoder on PROFINET/PROFIBUS (PROFIdrive) In the "PROFIdrive encoder" field, select a configured encoder on PROFINET/PROFIBUS. If an encoder was selected, it can be configured using the "Device configuration" button. Switch to the device configuration in the network view, and add an encoder, in the event that no encoder can be selected. If "Data block" was selected for the data connection, a previously created data block containing a variable structure of data type "PD_TELx" must be selected here ("x" stands for the telegram number used). Encoder type Select the encoder type of the encoder in the drop-down list. The following encoder types are available: Incremental Absolute Cyclic absolute See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Data connection drive/encoder via data block (Page 50) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 195 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.2.3 Configuration - Data exchange with the drive Configure the data exchange with the drive in the "Data exchange with the drive" configuration window. The configuration differs according to the selected drive type: Drive type: PROFIdrive Drive telegram The telegram to the drive that is set in the device configuration is preselected in the dropdown list. Automatic data exchange for drive values (offline) Select the check box if you want to transfer the offline values of the drive "Reference speed", "Maximum speed" and "Reference torque" to the configuration of the technology object in the project. Automatic data exchange for drive values (online) Select the check box if you want to transfer the effective values "Reference speed", "Maximum speed" and "Reference torque" online in the drive to the CPU during runtime. The drive parameters are transferred from the bus after the (re-)initialization of the technology object or the (re)start of the drive or the CPU. Alternatively, you must synchronize the following parameters manually: Reference speed Configure the reference speed of the drive in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications in this field. The specification of the drive speed is a percentage of the reference speed in the range -200% to +200%. Maximum speed Configure the maximum speed of the drive in this field. Reference torque Configure the reference torque of the drive corresponding to its configuration in this field. The reference torque is needed for force/torque reduction, which is supported with telegram 10x. Supplementary data Select the "Torque data" check box if you want to configure the data connection of the torque data. If you have selected a drive with which the supplemental telegram 750 has been configured, the "Torque data" check box is preselected. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 196 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Data connection In the drop-down list, define whether the data connection should be made via supplemental telegrams or data blocks: If you select the entry "Supplemental telegram" in the "Data connection" drop-down list, you can edit the "Supplemental telegram" drop-down list. If you select the "Data block" entry in the "Data connection" drop-down list, you can select the previously created data block which contains a tag structure of the "PD_TELx" data type ("x" stands for the additional telegram number that is used). Data block / supplemental telegram Select an supplemental telegram configured in the "Supplemental telegram" field. Select the "Show all modules" check box if you want to display all submodules of the connected drive. You can also find self-defined supplemental telegrams with this function. In the "Data block" field, select the data block which you want to use to integrate the torque data. Note Automatic transfer of drive parameters is only possible with SINAMICS drives as of V4.x. To do this, set the "Drive" data connection in the configuration window "Hardware interface > Drive". Drive type: Analog drive connection Reference speed The reference speed of the drive is the speed at which the drive rotates when there is an output of 100% at the analog output. The reference speed must be configured for the drive and transferred in the configuration of the technology object. The analog value that is output at 100% depends on the type of the analog output. For example, for an analog output with +/- 10 V, the value 10 V is output at 100%. Analog outputs can be overdriven by about 17%. This means that an analog output can be operated in the range from -117% to 117%, insofar as the drive permits this. Maximum speed Specify the maximum speed of the drive in this field. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device (Page 42) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 197 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.2.4 Configuration - Data exchange with encoder Configure detailed encoder parameters and the data exchange with the encoder in the "Data exchange with encoder" configuration window. The display and selection of the configuration parameters described here is dependent on the following parameters: Configuration window "Basic parameters": Drive type (linear/rotary) Configuration window "Hardware interface > Encoder": Encoder type (incremental/absolute/cyclic absolute) Configuration window - "Extended parameters > Mechanics": Encoder mounting type Encoder telegram The telegram to the encoder that is set in the device configuration is preselected in the dropdown list. Automatic data exchange for encoder values (offline) Select the check box if you want to transfer the offline values of the encoder to the configuration of the technology object in the project. Note Automatic transfer of encoder parameters is only possible with PROFIdrive encoders as of product version A16. For this, "Hardware interface > Encoder" must be selected as the "Encoder" data connection in the configuration window. Automatic data exchange for encoder values (online) Select the check box if you want to transfer the effective values online in the encoder to the CPU during runtime. The encoder parameters are transferred from the bus after the (re)initialization of the technology object and (re)start of the encoder or the CPU. Note Automatic transfer of encoder parameters is only possible with PROFIdrive encoders as of product version A16. For this, "Hardware interface > Encoder" must be selected as the "Encoder" data connection in the configuration window. Alternatively, you must manually calibrate the following parameters, depending on encoder type. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 198 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Encoder type Depending on the selected encoder type, configure the following parameters: Encoder type Rotary incremental Increments per revolution Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Encoder type Rotary absolute Increments per revolution Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Number of revolutions Configure the number of revolutions that the absolute encoder can detect in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Rotary cyclic absolute Increments per revolution Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Number of revolutions Configure the number of revolutions that the absolute encoder can detect in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Linear incremental Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 199 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Encoder type Linear absolute Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Linear cyclic absolute Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device (Page 42) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Configuration - Data exchange (Page 232) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 200 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.3 Configuration - leading value interconnections (synchronous axis only) You can interconnect a synchronous axis with multiple leading value-capable technology objects. Leading value-capable technology objects are: Positioning axes Synchronous axes External encoders (only with S7-1500T CPU) You can select only one leading value during runtime of your user program. All interconnection required during operation must be set up during configuration of the technology object. Possible leading values In the "Possible leading values" column of the "Leading value interconnections" list, add all leading value-capable technology objects that you need during operation as a leading value for the synchronous axis. You can interconnect the axes added in the list with the synchronous axis as a leading value with the corresponding Motion Control instruction. All configured leading value interconnections for the technology object are displayed in the cross-reference list of the technology object. Coupling type In the "Type of coupling" column, configure whether the leading value is to be coupled via setpoint or actual value. "Actual value" is available only for the S7-1500T CPU. See also Leading value coupling (Page 107) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 201 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.4 Extended Parameters 5.4.4.1 Configuration - Mechanics Configuration - Mechanics In the "Mechanics" configuration window, configure the mounting type of the encoder, and the adaptation of the actual encoder value to the mechanical conditions. Settings for (S7-1500T) In the drop-down list, select the encoder for which the following configurations are to apply. Encoder mounting type In the drop-down list, select how the encoder is mounted to the mechanics. The configuration differs depending on the axis type and the encoder mounting type selected in the "Basic parameters" configuration window. Axis type: Linear Linear - On motor shaft (Page 203) Linear - On load side (Page 203) Linear - External Measuring System (Page 204) Axis type: Rotary Rotary - On motor shaft (Page 205) Rotary - On load side (Page 205) Rotary - External Measuring System (Page 206) Invert encoder direction Select this check box if you must invert the direction of rotation of the encoder. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 202 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Axis type: Linear Linear - On motor shaft The encoder is connected to the motor shaft in a mechanically fixed manner. Motor and encoder form a unit. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. Load gear The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Number of motor revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of motor revolutions. Number of load revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of load revolutions. Position parameters Leadscrew pitch In this configuration field, configure the distance by which the load is moved when the leadscrew makes one revolution. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Linear - On load side The encoder is mechanically connected to the load side of the gear. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 203 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Load gear The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Number of motor revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of motor revolutions. Number of load revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of load revolutions. Position parameters Leadscrew pitch In this configuration field, configure the distance by which the load is moved when the leadscrew makes one revolution. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Linear - External Measuring System An external measuring system provides the position values of the linear load motion. Distance per encoder revolution In this configuration field, configure the linear load travel per encoder revolution. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. Load gear The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Number of motor revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of motor revolutions. Number of load revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of load revolutions. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 204 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Position parameters Leadscrew pitch In this configuration field, configure the distance by which the load is moved when the leadscrew makes one revolution. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Axis type: Rotary Rotary - On motor shaft The encoder is connected to the motor shaft in a mechanically fixed manner. Motor and encoder form a unit. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. Load gear The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Number of motor revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of motor revolutions. Number of load revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of load revolutions. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Rotary - On load side The encoder is mechanically connected to the load side of the gear. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 205 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Load gear The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Number of motor revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of motor revolutions. Number of load revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of load revolutions. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Rotary - External Measuring System An external measuring system provides the position values of the rotary load motion. Distance per encoder revolution In this configuration field, configure the linear load travel per encoder revolution. Invert drive direction Select the check box if the direction of rotation of the drive is to be inverted. Load gear The gear ratio of the load gear is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Number of motor revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of motor revolutions. Number of load revolutions In this configuration field, configure the integer number of load revolutions. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 206 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.4.2 Configuration - Dynamic Defaults In the "Dynamic default values" configuration window, configure the default values for velocity, acceleration, deceleration and jerk of the axis. The default values take effect, when values < 0 are specified in Motion Control instructions for the "Velocity", "Acceleration", "Deceleration" or "Jerk" parameters. The default values can be applied separately for each of the parameters just listed. The default values for acceleration and deceleration also act on the traversing motions of active homing. Velocity In this field, define the default value for the velocity of the axis. Acceleration / Deceleration - Ramp-up time / Ramp-down time Configure the desired default value for acceleration in the "Ramp-up time" or "Acceleration" fields. The desired deceleration can be set in the "Ramp-down time" or "Deceleration" fields. The following equations show the relationship between the ramp-up time and acceleration and the ramp-down time and deceleration: Note A change in the velocity influences the acceleration and deceleration values of the axis. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are retained. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 207 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Smoothing time / jerk You can enter the jerk limit parameters in the "Smoothing time" box, or alternatively in the "Jerk" box: Set the desired jerk for the acceleration and deceleration ramp in the "Jerk" field. The value 0 means that jerk limiting is deactivated. Set the desired smoothing time for the acceleration ramp in the "Smoothing time" field. Note The jerk value is identical for the acceleration and deceleration ramp. The smoothing time in effect for the deceleration ramp results from the following relationships: * Acceleration > Deceleration A shorter smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration < Deceleration A longer smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration = Deceleration The smoothing times of the acceleration and deceleration ramp are equal. If an error occurs, the axis decelerates with the configured emergency stop deceleration. A configured jerk limit is not taken into account for this. The following equations show the relationship between the smoothing times and the jerk: Motion jobs started in the user program are performed with the selected jerk. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Velocity profile (Page 60) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 208 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.4.3 Configuration - Emergency stop In the "Emergency stop" configuration window, you can configure the emergency stop deceleration of the axis. In the event of an error, and when disabling the axis, the axis is brought to a standstill with this deceleration using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power" (input parameter StopMode = 0). Emergency stop deceleration / Emergency stop ramp-down time Configure the deceleration value for emergency stop in the "Emergency stop deceleration" field or the "Emergency stop ramp-down time" field. The relationship between emergency stop ramp-down time and emergency stop deceleration can be seen in the following equation: The configuration of the emergency stop deceleration is related to the configured maximum velocity of the axis. If the maximum velocity of the axis changes, then the value of the emergency stop deceleration also changes (the emergency stop ramp-down time remains unchanged). See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Emergency stop deceleration (Page 62) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 209 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.4.4 Limits Configuration - Position limits Configure the hardware and software limit switches of the axis in the "Position limits" configuration window. Enable HW limit switches The check box activates the function of the negative and positive hardware limit switches. The negative hardware limit switch is located on the side in the negative direction of travel, and the positive hardware limit switch on the side in the positive direction of travel. If a hardware limit switch is reached, technology alarm 531 is output, and the technology object is disabled (alarm response: remove enable). Exception: If a hardware limit switch is crossed during an active home position approach with activated direction reversal at the hardware limit switch, the axis stops with the configured maximum deceleration and continues the home position approach in the opposite direction. Note Only use hardware limit switches that remain permanently switched after the approach. This switching state may only be canceled after the return into the permitted traversing range. The digital inputs of the hardware limit switches are evaluated by default in cyclic data exchange. In the settings for the input module under "I/O addresses", select the entry "MC-Servo" for "Organization block" and the entry "TPA OB Servo" for "Process image" if the hardware limit switches are to be evaluated in the position control cycle clock of the drive. Negative / positive HW limit switch input In these fields, select the PLC tag of the digital input for the negative and positive HW limit switches. In order to be able to select an input, a digital input module must have been added in the device configuration, and the PLC tag name for the digital input must be defined. CAUTION During installation of hardware limit switches, attention must be paid to the filter times of the digital inputs. Based on the time for one position control cycle clock and the filter time of the digital inputs, the resulting delay times must be taken into account. The filter time is configurable in individual digital input modules in the device configuration. The digital inputs are set to a filter time of 6.4 ms by default. If these are used as hardware limit switches, undesired decelerations may occur. If this occurs, reduce the filter time for the relevant digital inputs. The filter time can be set under "Input filter" in the device configuration of the digital inputs. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 210 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Negative / positive HW limit switch level selection In the drop-down list, select the triggering signal level ("Low level" / "High level") of the hardware limit switch. With "Low level", the input signal is FALSE after the axis has reached or crossed the hardware limit switch. With "High level", the input signal is TRUE after the axis has reached or crossed the hardware limit switch. Enable software limit switch This check box activates the high and low software limit switches. When software switches are activated, an active motion comes to a stop at the position of the software limit switch. The technological object signals an error. After acknowledgment of the error, the axis can again be moved in the direction of its operating range. Note Activated software limit switches act only on a homed axis. Position of negative / positive SW limit switch Configure the operating range of the axis with the positions of the negative and positive software limit switches. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Configuration - Dynamic limits In the "Dynamic limits" configuration window, configure the maximum values for velocity, acceleration, deceleration and jerk of the axis. Maximum velocity In this field, define the maximum permitted velocity of the axis. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 211 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Maximum acceleration / maximum deceleration - ramp-up time / ramp-down time Set the desired acceleration in the "Ramp-up time" or "Acceleration" fields. The desired deceleration can be set in the "Ramp-down time" or "Deceleration" fields. The following equations show the relationship between the ramp-up time and acceleration and the ramp-down time and deceleration: Note A change in the maximum velocity influences the acceleration and deceleration values of the axis. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are retained. The "maximum deceleration" for active homing with change of direction at the hardware limit switch must be set sufficiently large, to brake the axis before reaching the mechanical endstop. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 212 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Smoothing time / jerk You can enter the jerk limit parameters in the "Smoothing time" box, or alternatively in the "Jerk" box: Set the desired jerk for the acceleration and deceleration ramp in the "Jerk" field. The value 0 means that the jerk is not limited. Set the desired smoothing time for the acceleration ramp in the "Smoothing time" field. Note The configured smoothing time displayed in the configuration, applies only to the acceleration ramp. If the values of the acceleration and deceleration differ, the smoothing time of the deceleration ramp is calculated and used according to the jerk of the acceleration ramp. The smoothing time of the deceleration is adapted as follows: * Acceleration > Deceleration A shorter smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration < Deceleration A longer smoothing time is used for the deceleration ramp compared with the acceleration ramp. * Acceleration = Deceleration The smoothing times of the acceleration and deceleration ramp are equal. If an error occurs, the axis decelerates with the configured emergency stop deceleration. A configured jerk limit is not taken into account for this. The following equations show the relationship between the smoothing times and the jerk: Motion jobs started in the user program are performed with the selected jerk. See also Velocity profile (Page 60) Dynamic limits in synchronous operation (Page 62) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 213 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Configuration - Torque limits Configure the force/torque limiting of the drive in the "Torque limiting" configuration window. The configuration is now available if a drive that supports force/torque limiting is selected and a telegram 10x is used. Telegram 101 cannot be used. Effective In the drop-down list, select whether the limit value is to be in effect "on load side" or "on motor side". Torque limits Enter a default value for the torque limiting in the specified unit of measurement in this field. The default value is in effect when the torque limiting is specified using Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting", input parameter "Limit" < 0. Torque limiting applies to the following axis configurations: Axis type is "Rotary" and limit value is in effect "On load side" or "On motor side" Axis type is "Linear" and limit value is in effect "On motor side" Force limit Enter a default value for the force limit in the specified unit of measure in this field. The default value is in effect when the force limit is specified using Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting", input parameter "Limit" < 0. The force limit applies to the following axis configuration: Axis type is "Linear" and limit value is in effect "On load side" If the gear and leadscrew efficiency is crucial, this can be set in the .Actor.Efficiency tag. Disable/enable position-based monitoring As a result of the force/torque limiting on the drive, a larger following error may occur or the axis standstill may not be detected reliably in positioning monitoring. Deactivate "Position-related monitoring" in order to deactivate monitoring of the following error and the positioning monitoring during force/torque limiting. Interconnection in the SINAMICS drive The following interconnection is required in the SINAMICS drive: P1522 must be interconnected to a fixed value of + 100%, P1523 to a fixed value of -100% (e.g. through interconnection to fixed value parameter P2902[i]). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 214 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object See also Force/torque limiting (Page 63) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Configuration - Fixed stop detection Configure the fixed stop detection in the configuration window. A "Travel to fixed stop" can be realized by activating fixed stop detection using the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting" and a position-controlled motion job. The operation is also referred to as clamping. Positioning tolerance In this configuration field, configure the positioning tolerance that is regarded as a breaking away or turning back of the fixed stop when exceeded. To detect the breaking away or turning back of the fixed stop, the position setpoint must be located outside the positioning tolerance. The configured position tolerance must be less than the configured following error. Following error If the drive is stopped by a mechanical fixed stop during a motion job, the following error is increased. The accumulating following error serves as a criterion for fixed stop detection. In the "Following error" configuration field, configure the value of the following error starting from which the fixed stop detection is to take effect. The configured following error must be greater than the configured position tolerance. Note If the following error monitoring was activated in the position monitoring configuration, the "Maximum following error" configured there must be greater than the "Following error" of the fixed stop detection. See also Fixed stop detection (Page 65) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 215 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 5.4.4.5 Homing Homing means matching the position value of a technology object to the real, physical location of the drive. Absolute target positions of the axis can only be approached with a homed axis. In S7-1500 Motion Control, the axis is homed with the Motion Control instruction, "MC_Home". A distinction is made between the following operating modes of the Motion Control instruction: Operating modes of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" Active homing (incremental encoder) With active homing, the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" performs the configured home position approach. Active traversing motions are aborted. When the homing mark is detected, the position of the axis is set according to the configuration. Passive homing (incremental encoder) With passive homing, the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" instruction does not carry out any homing motion. The traversing motion required for this must be implemented by the user with other Motion Control instructions. Active traversing motions are not aborted upon start of passive homing. When the homing mark is detected, the axis is set according to the configuration. Direct homing absolute (incremental encoder or absolute encoder) The axis position is set without taking into consideration the home position switch. Active traversing motions are not aborted. The value of input parameter "Position" of Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is set immediately as the actual position of the axis. Direct homing (relative) (incremental encoder or absolute encoder) The axis position is set without taking into consideration the home position switch. Active traversing motions are not aborted. The following statement applies to the axis position after homing: New axis position = Current axis position + Value of parameter "Position" of instruction "MC_Home". See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 216 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Active homing Configuration - Active homing In the "Active Homing" configuration window, configure the parameters for active homing. "Active homing" is performed using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home " Mode = 3 and 5. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" (S7-1500 CPU) The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). Settings for In the drop-down list, select the encoder for which the homing settings are to apply (only for S7-1500T). Select the homing mode Select from among the following homing modes: Reference cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 218) Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 219) Homing mark via digital input (Page 220) See also Homing (Page 69) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 217 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Reference cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram Enable direction reversal at the hardware limit switch Select this check box to use the hardware limit switch as a reversing cam for the home position approach. After the axis has reached the hardware limit switch during active homing, it is ramped down at the configured maximum deceleration rate and the direction is then reversed. The reference cam is then searched for in the reverse direction. If this function is not enabled and the axis reaches the hardware limit switch during active homing, then the drive is disabled and braked with the ramp configured in the drive. Approach direction Select the approach direction for the reference cam search. "Positive" is the approach direction in the direction of positive position values; "negative" in the direction of negative position values. Homing direction Select the direction in which the zero mark should be approached for homing. Approach velocity In this field, specify the velocity at which the reference cam is searched for during the homing procedure. Any configured home position offset is traversed at the same velocity. Homing velocity In this field, specify the velocity at which the axis approaches the zero mark for homing. For zero mark detection, the reference cam must be exited. Home position offset In the case of a differing zero mark position and home position, enter the corresponding home position offset in this field. The axis approaches the home position at approach velocity. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect, when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 5. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 218 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram Enable direction reversal at the hardware limit switch Select this check box to use the hardware limit switch as a reversing cam for the home position approach. After the axis has reached the hardware limit switch during active homing, it is ramped down at the configured maximum deceleration rate and the direction is then reversed. The zero mark is then sought in the reverse direction. If this function is not enabled and the axis reaches the hardware limit switch during active homing, then the drive is disabled and braked with the ramp configured in the drive. Homing direction Select the direction in which the next zero mark should be approached for homing. "Positive" is the homing direction in the direction of positive position values; "negative" in the direction of negative position values. Approach velocity In the "Zero mark via PROFIdrive frame" homing mode, the approach velocity for traversing the home position offset is used. Homing velocity In this field, specify the velocity at which the axis approaches the zero mark for homing. Home position offset In the case of a differing zero mark position and home position, enter the corresponding home position offset in this field. The axis approaches the home position at approach velocity. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect, when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 5. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 219 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Homing mark via digital input When a digital input is used as a homing mark, the accuracy of the homing process is not as high as for hardware-supported homing using zero marks. You can improve the accuracy by using a low homing velocity. Pay attention to the setting of short filter times for the digital input as well. Digital input homing mark/cam In this configuration field, select the PLC tag of the digital input that is to act as a homing mark (reference cam). Also select the level at which the homing mark is to be detected. In order to be able to select an input, a digital input module must have been added in the device configuration, and the PLC tag name for the digital input must be defined. Enable direction reversal at the hardware limit switch Select this check box to use the hardware limit switch as a reversing cam for the home position approach. After the axis has reached the hardware limit switch during active homing, it is ramped down at the configured maximum deceleration rate and then reversed. The homing mark is then sensed in reverse direction. If this function is not enabled and the axis reaches the hardware limit switch during active homing, then the drive is disabled and braked with the ramp configured in the drive. Approach direction Select the approach direction for the homing mark search. "Positive" is the approach direction in the direction of positive position values; "negative" in the direction of negative position values. Homing direction Select the direction in which the homing mark for homing is to be approached. Homing mark Select the switch position of the "digital input" that is to be used as the homing mark. When a "digital input" is crossed, two switching edges that are spatially separated from one another are generated. The selection of the positive or negative side ensures that the homing mark is always evaluated at the same mechanical position. The positive side is the switch position with a greater position value; the negative side is the switch position with the lesser position value. The selection of the side is independent of the approach direction, and independent of whether it causes a rising or falling edge. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 220 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Approach velocity In this field, specify the velocity at which the axis searches for the "digital input" during the home position approach. Any configured home position offset is traversed at the same velocity. Homing velocity In this field, specify the velocity at which the axis approaches the home position for homing. Home position offset If the homing mark position is different from the home position, enter the corresponding home position offset in this field. The axis approaches the home position at approach velocity. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect, when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 5. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 221 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Passive homing Configuration - Passive homing Configure the parameters for passive homing in the "Passive Homing" (homing on the fly) configuration window. Passive homing is performed using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" Mode = 2, 8 and 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" (S7-1500 CPU) The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). Settings for In the drop-down list, select the encoder for which the homing settings are to apply (only for S7-1500T). Select the homing mode Select from among the following homing modes: Zero mark via PROFIdrive frame (Page 223) Zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram and reference cam (Page 224) Homing mark via digital input (Page 225) See also Homing (Page 69) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 222 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Zero mark via PROFIdrive frame Homing direction Select the direction in which the next zero mark should be approached for homing. The following options are available: Positive Axis moves in the direction of higher position values. Negative Axis moves in the direction of lower position values. Current The currently effective approach direction is used for homing. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 223 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram and reference cam Homing direction Select the direction in which the zero mark should be approached for homing. The next zero mark after leaving the reference cam is used. The following options are available: Positive Axis moves in the direction of higher position values. Negative Axis moves in the direction of lower position values. Current The currently effective approach direction is used for homing. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 224 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Homing mark via digital input Digital input homing mark/cam In this dialog field, select a digital input that is to act as a homing mark (reference cam). Also select the level at which the homing mark is to be detected. Homing direction Select the direction in which the homing mark for homing is to be approached. The following options are available: Positive Axis moves in the direction of higher position values. Negative Axis moves in the direction of lower position values. Current The currently effective approach direction is used for homing. Homing mark Select which switch position of the "digital input" is to be used as the homing mark. When a "digital input" is crossed, two switching edges that are spatially separated from one another are generated. The selection of the positive or negative side ensures that the homing mark is always evaluated at the same mechanical position. The positive side is the switch position with a greater position value; the negative side is the switch position with the lesser position value. The selection of the side is independent of the approach direction, and independent of whether it causes a rising or falling edge. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 225 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Homing (Page 69) 5.4.4.6 Position monitoring functions Configuration - Positioning monitoring In the "Positioning monitoring" configuration window, configure the criteria for monitoring the target position. Positioning window: Configure the size of the positioning window in this field. If the axis is located within this window, the position is considered to be "reached". Tolerance time In this field, configure the tolerance time within which the position value must reach the positioning window. Minimum dwell time in positioning window: Configure the minimum dwell time in this field. The current position value must be located in the positioning window for at least the "minimum dwell time". If one of the criteria is violated, then the axis is stopped and a positioning alarm is displayed. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Position monitoring functions (Page 88) Configuration - Following error In the "Following Error" configuration window, configure the permissible deviation of the actual position of the axis from the position setpoint. The following error can be dynamically adapted to the current velocity of the axis. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 226 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Enable following error monitoring Select this check box, if you want to enable following error monitoring. When following error monitoring is enabled, the axis will be stopped in the error range (orange); in the warning range an alarm will be displayed. When following error monitoring is disabled, the configured limits have no effect. Maximum following error: Configure the following error that is permissible at maximum velocity in this field. Warning level: Configure a percentage of the current following error limit, above which a following error warning should be output in this field. Example: The current maximum following error is 100 mm; the warning level is configured at 90%. If the current following error exceeds a value of 90 mm, then a following error warning will be output. Following error: In this field, configure the permissible following error for low velocities (without dynamic adjustment of the following error). Start of dynamic adjustment: Configure the velocity starting from which the following error is to be dynamically adjusted in this field. Starting from this velocity, the following error up to the maximum velocity will be adjusted to the maximum following error. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) Position monitoring functions (Page 88) Configuration - Standstill signal In the "Standstill signal" configuration window, configure the criteria for standstill detection. Standstill window: Configure the size of the standstill window in this field. For standstill to be indicated, the velocity of the axis must be within this window. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 227 Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Minimum dwell time in standstill window: Configure the minimum dwell time in the standstill window in this field. The velocity of the axis must also be in the standstill window for the specified duration. If both criteria are met, then the standstill of the axis is indicated. See also Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Standstill signal (Page 90) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) 5.4.4.7 Configuration - Control loop In the "Control loop" configuration window, configure the precontrol and the gain Kv of the position control loop. The Kv factor affects the following parameters: Positioning accuracy and stop control Uniformity of motion Positioning time The better the mechanical conditions of the axis are (high stiffness), the higher the Kv factor can be configured. This reduces the following error, and a higher dynamic response is achieved. For basic information, refer to the section Closed-loop control (Page 92). Precontrol Configure the percentage velocity precontrol in this field. Speed control loop substitute time Configure the speed control loop substitute time in this field (Tvtc). When speed precontrol is activated, the setpoint is delayed by the speed control loop substitute time before the control deviation is established. This prevents an overshoot or a leading of the actual value compared with the position setpoint. The speed control loop substitute time is a simplified substitute model of the dynamic behavior of the speed control loop. The speed control loop substitute time is included in the balancing filter. Gain (Kv factor) In the input field, enter the gain Kv of the position control loop. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 228 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.4 Configuring the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) For position-controlled axes (positioning axes/synchronous axes), the closed loop position control can occur either in the CPU or in the drive, provided the drive supports Dynamic Servo Control (DSC). Select your preferred control process: Position control in the drive (DSC enabled) With the Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) function, the position controller is executed in the drive in the cycle clock of the speed control loop. This enables you to set a much larger position controller gain factor Kv. This increases the dynamics for setpoint sequence and disturbance variable correction for highly dynamic drives. Position control in the PLC Note Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) is only possible with one of the following PROFIdrive telegrams: * Standard telegram 5 or 6 * SIEMENS telegram 105 or 106 See also Closed-loop control (Page 92) Control structure (Page 93) Function and structure of the optimization (Page 325) Positioning axis technology object (Page 104) Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 229 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder 5.5.1 Configuration - Basic Parameters Configure the basic properties of the technology object in the "Basic Parameters" configuration window. Name Define the name of the external encoder in this field. The technology object is listed under this name in the project tree. The tags of the external encoder can be used in the user program under this name. External encoder type In this selection, configure whether the external encoder records linear or rotary motions. Units of measure In the drop-down list, select the desired units of measure for the position and velocity of the external encoder. Modulo Select the check box "Enable modulo", if you want to use a recurring measuring system for the external encoder (e.g. 0-360 for an external encoder of the "rotary" type). Modulo start value In this field, define the position at which the modulo range should begin (e.g. 0 for an external encoder of the "rotary" type). Modulo length In this field, define the length of the modulo range (e.g. 360 for an external encoder of the "rotary" type). See also Units of measure (Page 32) Modulo setting (Page 33) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 230 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder 5.5.2 Hardware interface 5.5.2.1 Configuration - Encoder The external encoder records the position of an externally controlled drive. The encoder required for this purpose communicates the encoder position to the controller by means of a PROFIdrive telegram. Configure the encoder and encoder type in the "Encoder" configuration window. Data connection In the drop-down list, select whether the data connection should be established directly with the encoder or via a data block that can be edited in the user program. The selection is only possible for encoders that are connected via PROFIdrive and support parameter P979. Encoder / Data block Select the encoder you have configured in the device configuration in this area. The following encoders can be used: Encoder on technology module (TM) In the "Encoder" configuration field, select a previously configured technology module and the channel to be used. Only technology modules set to the "Position input for Motion Control" mode are displayed for selection. You can operate the technology module centrally on an S7-1500 PLC or decentrally on a distributed I/O. Isochronous mode is not possible with central operation in the CPU. You can identify the technology modules suitable for position detection for Motion Control in the documentation for the technology module and the catalog data. Encoder via PROFINET/PROFIBUS (PROFIdrive) In the " Encoder" configuration field, select a configured encoder on the PROFINET/PROFIBUS. If "Data block" was selected for the data connection, a previously created data block containing a variable structure of data type "PD_TELx" must be selected here ("x" stands for the telegram number used). Encoder type Select the encoder type in this configuration field. The following encoder types are available for selection: Incremental encoder Absolute encoder Absolute encoder cyclic absolute S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 231 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder See also Technology object external encoder (Page 110) Data connection drive/encoder via data block (Page 50) Connect drive/encoder via data block (Page 269) 5.5.2.2 Configuration - Data exchange Configuration - Data exchange Configure detailed encoder parameters and the data exchange with the encoder in the "Data exchange with encoder" configuration window. The configuration varies according to the encoder connection: Encoder to technology module (Page 232) Encoder to PROFINET/PROFIBUS (Page 235) See also Technology object external encoder (Page 110) Encoder to technology module Data exchange with encoder In this area, you can configure the encoder telegram and the criteria for how the encoder data are to be evaluated. The specifications must match those in the device configuration. Encoder telegram In the drop-down list for the technology module, select the telegram that you have configured in the technology module. Automatic data exchange for encoder values (offline) Select the check box if you want to transfer the offline values of the encoder to the configuration of the technology object in the project. Note Automatic transfer of encoder parameters is only possible with PROFIdrive encoders as of product version A16. For this, "Hardware interface > Encoder" must be selected as the "Encoder" data connection in the configuration window. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 232 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Automatic data exchange for encoder values (online) Select the check box if you want to transfer the effective values online in the encoder to the CPU during runtime. The encoder parameters are transferred from the bus after the (re-)initialization of the technology object and (re)start of the encoder or the CPU. Note Automatic transfer of encoder parameters is only possible with PROFIdrive encoders as of product version A16. For this, "Hardware interface > Encoder" must be selected as the "Encoder" data connection in the configuration window. Alternatively, you must calibrate the following parameters manually: Encoder type Configure how the encoder data are to be evaluated in this area. The specifications must match those in the device configuration. Encoder type Rotary incremental Increments per revolution: Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Encoder type Rotary absolute Increments per revolution: Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Number of revolutions: Configure the number of revolutions that the absolute encoder can detect in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Rotary cyclic absolute Increments per revolution: Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Number of revolutions: Configure the number of revolutions that the absolute encoder can detect in this field. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 233 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Encoder type Rotary cyclic absolute Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Linear incremental Distance between two increments: Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Encoder type Linear absolute Distance between two increments: Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Linear cyclic absolute Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. See also Configuration - Data exchange (Page 232) Encoder to PROFINET/PROFIBUS (Page 235) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 234 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Encoder to PROFINET/PROFIBUS Data exchange with encoder In this area, you can configure the encoder telegram and the criteria for how the encoder data are to be evaluated. The specifications must match those in the device configuration. Encoder telegram The telegram to the encoder that is set in the device configuration is preselected in the dropdown list. Automatic data exchange for encoder values (offline) Select the check box if you want to transfer the offline values of the encoder to the configuration of the technology object in the project. Note Automatic transfer of encoder parameters is only possible with PROFIdrive encoders as of product version A16. For this, "Hardware interface > Encoder" must be selected as the "Encoder" data connection in the configuration window. Automatic data exchange for encoder values (online) Select the check box if you want to transfer the effective values online in the encoder to the CPU during runtime. The encoder parameters are transferred from the bus after the (re-)initialization of the technology object and (re)start of the encoder or the CPU. Note Automatic transfer of encoder parameters is only possible with PROFIdrive encoders as of product version A16. For this, "Hardware interface > Encoder" must be selected as the "Encoder" data connection in the configuration window. Alternatively, you must calibrate the following parameters manually: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 235 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Encoder type Depending on the selected encoder type, configure the following parameters: Encoder type Rotary incremental Increments per revolution Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Encoder type Rotary absolute Increments per revolution Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Number of revolutions Configure the number of revolutions that the absolute encoder can detect in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Rotary cyclic absolute Increments per revolution Configure the number of increments that the encoder resolves per revolution in this field. Number of revolutions Configure the number of revolutions that the absolute encoder can detect in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Linear incremental Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 236 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Encoder type Linear absolute Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. Encoder type Linear cyclic absolute Distance between two increments Configure the distance between two increments of the encoder in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) Configure the number of bits for fine resolution within the incremental actual value (Gx_XIST1) in this field. Bits for fine resolution in the absolute actual value Configure the number of bits for fine resolution (Gx_XIST2) within the absolute actual value (Gx_XIST2) in this field. See also Configuration - Data exchange (Page 232) Encoder to technology module (Page 232) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 237 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder 5.5.3 Extended Parameters 5.5.3.1 Configuration - Mechanics Configuration - Mechanics Configure the encoder parameters for the position of the externally controlled drive in the "Mechanics" configuration window. The configuration varies according to the type of encoder: Linear (Page 238) Rotary (Page 239) See also Technology object external encoder (Page 110) Mechanics (Page 53) Linear Invert encoder direction Select this check box if you would like to invert the actual value of the encoder. Load gear Number of motor revolutions / number of load revolutions The gear ratio of the measuring gearbox is specified as the ratio between motor revolutions and load revolutions. Specify here an integer number of motor revolutions and the resulting number of load revolutions. Select the same values for the number of motor revolutions and load revolutions, if no load gear is present. Position parameters Leadscrew pitch In this configuration field, configure the distance by which the load is moved when the leadscrew makes one revolution. See also Configuration - Mechanics (Page 238) Rotary (Page 239) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) Mechanics (Page 53) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 238 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Rotary Invert encoder direction Select this check box if you would like to invert the actual value of the encoder. Load gear Number of motor revolutions / number of load revolutions The gear ratio of the measuring gearbox is specified as the ratio between encoder revolutions and load revolutions. Specify here an integral number of load revolutions and the resulting number of encoder revolutions. Select the same values for the number of motor revolutions and load revolutions, if no load gear is present. See also Configuration - Mechanics (Page 238) Linear (Page 238) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) Mechanics (Page 53) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 239 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder 5.5.3.2 Homing Configuration - Homing Configure the parameters for homing the external encoder in the "Homing" configuration window. Homing is performed using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" Mode = 2, 8 and 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). Select the homing mode Select from among the following homing modes: Reference cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 241) Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 242) Homing mark via digital input (Page 243) See also Technology object external encoder (Page 110) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 240 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Reference cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram Homing direction Select the direction in which the zero mark should be approached for homing. The next zero mark after leaving the reference cam is used. The following options are available: Positive Axis moves in the direction of higher position values. Negative Axis moves in the direction of lower position values. Current The currently effective approach direction is used for homing. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). See also Configuration - Homing (Page 240) Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 242) Homing mark via digital input (Page 243) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 241 Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram Homing direction Select the direction in which the next zero mark should be approached for homing. The following options are available: Positive Axis moves in the direction of higher position values. Negative Axis moves in the direction of lower position values. Current The currently effective approach direction is used for homing. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). See also Configuration - Homing (Page 240) Reference cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 241) Homing mark via digital input (Page 243) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 242 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.5 Configuring the technology object external encoder Homing mark via digital input Digital input homing mark In this configuration field, select a digital input that is to act as a homing mark (reference cam). Also select the level at which the homing mark is to be detected. Homing direction Select the direction in which the homing mark for homing is to be approached. The following options are available: Positive Axis moves in the direction of higher position values. Negative Axis moves in the direction of lower position values. Current The currently effective approach direction is used for homing. Homing mark Select which switch position of the "digital input" is to be used as the homing mark. When a "digital input" is crossed, two switching edges that are spatially separated from one another are generated. The selection of the positive or negative side ensures that the homing mark is always evaluated at the same mechanical position. The positive side is the switch position with a greater position value; the negative side is the switch position with the lesser position value. The selection of the side is independent of the approach direction, and independent of whether it causes a rising or falling edge. Home position In this field, configure the absolute coordinate of the home position. The home position configured here is in effect when the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" is executed with Mode = 10. Note Parameter "MC_Home.Mode" The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in the section Version overview (Page 155). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 243 Configuring 5.6 Configuring the technology object measuring input See also Configuration - Homing (Page 240) Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 242) Reference cam and zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram (Page 241) Technology object external encoder (Page 110) 5.6 Configuring the technology object measuring input 5.6.1 Configuration - Basic Parameters Configure the basic properties of the technology object in the "Basic Parameters" configuration window. Name Define the name of the measuring input in this field. The technology object is listed under this name in the project tree. The tags of the measuring input can be used in the user program under this name. Assigned axis or external encoder The axis or external encoder assigned to the measuring input is displayed. You can use the link to directly access the configuration of the basic parameters of the higher-level technology object. Unit of measure The indicated unit of measure for the position of the measuring input corresponds to the unit of measure of the higher-level technology object. See also Units of measure (Page 32) Technology object measuring input (Page 111) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 244 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.6 Configuring the technology object measuring input 5.6.2 Configuration - Hardware interface Measuring input type Select the measuring input type. Measuring using TM Timer DIDQ Measurement via SINAMICS measuring input Measurement using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) Measurement using TM Timer DIDQ Select a measurement input for a measurement using a Timer DI. The selection box shows all channels that are configured correctly. Measurement via SINAMICS measuring input Select a measuring input for a measurement via SINAMICS measurement sensing input. The selection box shows all compatible telegram types. You are shown all terminals that can potentially be used as measuring inputs. For the assignment, note that the inputs of must be assigned to the measuring inputs (P680) in the telegram without gaps and in ascending order. With P728.8 to P728.15, you configure all DI/DOs used as a measurement input on the control unit. Use P680 of the control unit to specify the terminals for the global measuring inputs. Measurement using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) For a measurement via PROFIdrive telegram, select the number of the measuring input in the telegram in the "Number of the measuring input" drop-down list. The input field is preset with the value "1". Two communication channels are available for the transmission of measured values in the PROFIdrive telegram. These communication channels are assigned to one measurement input/digital input each in the drive. Use the PROFIdrive parameters to configure the digital input on the drive that is to be used for the configured communication channel. Measurement input for the first communication channel (.Parameter.PROFIdriveProbeNumber = 1) If you use two encoders, you must select the associated DI in the SINAMICS for each encoder. Various results are the transferred to the technology object depending on the selected encoder. The sensors are configured using the parameters P488[0] and P488[1]. Measurement input for the second communication channel (.Parameter.PROFIdriveProbeNumber = 2) If you use two encoders, you must select the associated DI in the SINAMICS for each encoder. Various results are the transferred to the technology object depending on the selected encoder. The sensors are configured using the parameters P489[0] and P489[1]. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 245 Configuring 5.6 Configuring the technology object measuring input Correction time for the measuring signal Specify a correction time if possible delay times in the measurement signal are to be compensated. See also Automatic transfer of drive and encoder parameters in the device (Page 42) Technology object measuring input (Page 111) Configuring technology modules for Motion Control (Page 255) 5.6.3 Configuration - Extended parameters Adjustment for activation time of the measuring range To adjust the activation time defined on the system side, enter an additional activation time here. The configuration window also displays the following times calculated on the system side: Time after the measuring job request until the measuring event can be recoreded Time after the measuring event until the measurement result is displayed (for measuring of one or two edges) See also Measuring with measuring range (Page 121) Time-related boundary conditions (Page 122) Technology object measuring input (Page 111) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 246 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.7 Configuring the cam technology object 5.7 Configuring the cam technology object 5.7.1 Configuration - Basic Parameters Configure the basic properties of the technology object in the "Basic Parameters" configuration window. Name Define the name of the output cam in this field. The technology object is listed under this name in the project tree. The tags of the output cam can be used in the user program under this name. Assigned axis or external encoder The axis or external encoder assigned to the output cam is displayed. You can use the link to directly access the configuration of the basic parameters of the higher-level technology object. Output cam type Select based on the desired switching behavior of an output cam type: Distance output cam (position-dependent switch-on/switch-off) Time-based output cam (position-dependent switch-on and position-independent or timedependent switch-off) Output cam reference Configure in this selection whether the switching points of the output cam are to reference the actual position or the position setpoint. Unit of measure The indicated unit of measure for the position of the output cam corresponds to the unit of measure of the higher-level technology object. When a time-based output cam is selected as the output cam type, the unit of measure for the switch-on duration and other times is also indicated. For output cams, this is always ms. See also Units of measure (Page 32) Technology object output cam (Page 126) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 247 Configuring 5.7 Configuring the cam technology object 5.7.2 Configuration - Hardware interface Output cam output Select whether the generated switching signals are to be output at the digital output. Activate output Select one of the following two output options for the output cam output: - Output by TM Timer DIDQ For output by TM Timer DIDQ, select a previously configured technology module and the channel to be used in the "Output" field. If no technology module is available for selection, change to the device configuration and add a technology module. - Output by digital output module For output by a digital output module, select this in the "Cam output" field. Only the digital outputs with previously defined PLC tags are displayed for selection. Select the logical operation of the output cam signal at the output. The logic operation relates to the last signal to be output after the set inversion, if any. All output cams that use the selected output are shown graphically. Output deactivated When the output is deactivated, the output cam is evaluated only in the software. See also Technology object output cam (Page 126) Configuring technology modules for Motion Control (Page 255) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 248 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.7 Configuring the cam technology object 5.7.3 Extended parameters 5.7.3.1 Configuration - Activation time The specified output cam type is indicated in the upper area of the "Activation time" configuration window. Activation time and deactivation time For a time shift of the switch-on and switch-off times of an output cam, enter an activation time and a deactivation time. See also Compensation of actuator switching times (Page 138) Technology object output cam (Page 126) 5.7.3.2 Configuration - Hysteresis To prevent unwanted changes in the switching state of the output cam of a cam track, enter a hysteresis value. When using an output cam with reference to actual position, always enter a hysteresis value (> 0.0). See also Hysteresis (Page 136) Technology object output cam (Page 126) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 249 Configuring 5.8 Configuring the cam track technology object 5.8 Configuring the cam track technology object 5.8.1 Configuration - Basic Parameters Configure the basic properties of the technology object in the "Basic Parameters" configuration window. Name Define the name of the cam track in this field. The technology object is listed under this name in the project tree. The tags of the cam track can be used in the user program under this name. Assigned axis or external encoder The axis or external encoder assigned to the cam track is displayed. You can use the link to directly access the configuration of the basic parameters of the higher-level technology object. Output cam type Select based on the desired switching behavior of an output cam type for the cam track: Distance output cam (position-dependent switch-on/switch-off) Time-based output cam (position-dependent switch-on and position-independent or timedependent switch-off) Output cam reference In this selection, configure whether the switching points of the cam track are to reference the actual position or the position setpoint. Unit of measure The indicated unit of measure for the position of the cam track corresponds to the unit of measure of the higher-level technology object. When a time-based output cam is selected as the output cam type, the unit of measure for the switch-on duration and other times is also indicated. For output cams, this is always ms. See also Units of measure (Page 32) Cam track technology object (Page 141) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 250 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.8 Configuring the cam track technology object 5.8.2 Configuration - Hardware interface Output cam track Select whether the generated switching signals are to be output at the digital output. Activate output Select one of the following two output options for the output track: - Output by TM Timer DIDQ For output by TM Timer DIDQ, select a previously configured technology module and the channel to be used in the "Output" field. If no technology module is available for selection, change to the device configuration and add a technology module. - Output by digital output module For output by a digital output module, select this in the "Cam output" field. Only the digital outputs with previously defined PLC tags are displayed for selection. Output deactivated When the output is deactivated, the cam track is evaluated only in the software. See also Cam track technology object (Page 141) Configuring technology modules for Motion Control (Page 255) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 251 Configuring 5.8 Configuring the cam track technology object 5.8.3 Extended parameters 5.8.3.1 Track data Configuration - Activation time The specified output cam type is displayed. Activation time and deactivation time Enter the activation time and the deactivation time. For a time shift of the switch-on and switch-off times of the output cam of a cam track, enter an activation time and a deactivation time. See also Time offset of cam switching points (Page 153) Cam track technology object (Page 141) Configuration - Hysteresis To prevent unwanted changes in the switching state of the output cam of a cam track, enter a hysteresis value. When using an output cam with reference to actual position, always enter a hysteresis value (> 0.0). See also Hysteresis (Page 153) Cam track technology object (Page 141) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 252 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.8 Configuring the cam track technology object Configuration - Track dimensions Track length Enter the corresponding track length. Also take into account the output cam data of the individual output cams when defining the track length. Output cams, the start position of which lies outside the cam track length are not included. They become active only if the cam track length is increased so that at least the respective start position of an output cam is within the new track length. Axis reference position Enter the position of an axis or external encoder starting from which the output of the cam track is to occur. The start of the cam track is placed at the entered position. You can enter a negative or positive value for the reference position. Modulo length of the axis When an axis with modulo function is used, the modulo length of the axis is displayed. See also Cam track technology object (Page 141) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 253 Configuring 5.8 Configuring the cam track technology object 5.8.3.2 Configuration - Output cam data The specified output cam type is displayed. Enter the properties for the output cams of the cam track that are to be output. You can set up to 32 individual output cams on a cam track. Also take into account any previously defined track length when defining the output cam data. Output cams, the start position of which lies outside the cam track length are not included. They become active only if the cam track length is increased so that at least the respective start position of an output cam is within the new track length. The input options described below are displayed in the Output cam data configuration window according to the configured output cam type. Valid Only output cams set as "valid" are output and have a status display. Start position - The start position may not be greater than the end position for distance output cams. - If the start position is equal to the end position, the distance output cam does not switch. - The switching ranges of individual output cams are permitted to overlap. End position - The "End position" column is only displayed when distance output cam is set for the output cam type. - The end position must not be less than the start position. Switch-on duration The "Switch-on duration" column is only displayed when time-based output cam is set for the cam type. See also Cam track technology object (Page 141) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 254 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.1 Overview Use of technology modules with Motion Control You can use technology modules as well as compact CPUs with Motion Control. To use the technology functions for Motion Control, the parameters of the device configuration of the technology module or the compact CPU and the parameters of the configuration of the technology object must be configured accordingly. Which parameters are relevant for the function is described below. You can set additional parameters that are not listed here. The description of the parameters is found in the documentation of the respective technology module. The following technology modules support Motion Control functionalities: S7-1500/ET 200MP ET 200 SP TM Count 2x24V (Page 256) TM Count 1x24V (Page 256) TM PosInput 2 (Page 258) TM PosInput 1 (Page 258) TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V (Page 260) * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (Page 260) * - TM Pulse 2x24V (Page 261) TM PTO 4 (Page 262) - CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN (Page 264) - * ET 200MP and ET 200SP: Isochronous mode required Isochronous mode Technology modules can be used centrally or distributed in the system. However, isochronous mode is supported only in distributed operation with suitable PROFINET interface modules. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 255 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.2 TM Count 1x24V / TM Count 2x24V For use with Motion Control, the following parameters must be configured: Configuration Technology module Technology object TM Count 1x24V / TM Count 2x24V TM Count 1x24V / TM Count 2x24V > Channel 0/1 > Operating mode Axis External encoder - - TM Count 1x24V / TM Count 2x24V > Channel 0/1 > Module parameters Hardware interface > Encoder Hardware interface > Encoder - Select "Encoder" data connection and the channel configured for Motion Control on the technology module as encoder Select "Encoder" data connection and the channel configured for Motion Control on the technology module as encoder Signal type Select encoder type corresponding to configuration for technology module Select encoder type corresponding to configuration for technology module Select "Position detection for Motion Control technology object" mode * Incremental encoder - Signal evaluation * Single * Double * * * * Incremental Hardware interface > Data exchange with encoder Hardware interface > Data exchange Telegram "DP_TEL83_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Telegram "DP_TEL83_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Disable "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Disable "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Select rotary or linear measuring system type Select rotary or linear measuring system type Select fine resolution corresponding to configuration for technology module Select fine resolution corresponding to configuration for technology module * 0 = Single * 0 = Single Quadruple * 1 = Double * 1 = Double * 2 = Quadruple * 2 = Quadruple Rotary type: * Rotary type: * Rotary type: Enter increments per revolution * Incremental Enter increments per revolution corresponding to configuration at technology module (1:1) Linear type: Configuration not relevant * Linear type: Enter distance between increments Enter increments per revolution corresponding to configuration at technology module (1:1) * Linear type: Enter distance between increments S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 256 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Configuration Technology module Technology object TM Count 1x24V / TM Count 2x24V - * Axis Hardware interface > Data exchange with the drive Rotary type: External encoder - Enter reference speed Enter reference speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) * Linear type: Configuration not relevant - Homing Homing Select the homing signal for homing mark 0: Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". - - * Signal N of the incremental encoder * DI0 TM Count 2x24V > I/O addresses The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the channel in the encoder configuration at the technology object. Process image: PIP OB servo S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 257 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.3 TM PosInput 1 / TM PosInput 2 For use with Motion Control, the following parameters must be configured: Configuration Technology module Technology object TM PosInput 1 / TM PosInput 2 TM PosInput 1/2 > Channel 0/1 > Operating mode Axis External encoder - - Hardware interface > Encoder Hardware interface > Encoder - Select "Encoder" data connection and the channel activated and configured as encoder on the technology module Select "Encoder" data connection and the channel activated and configured as encoder on the technology module Signal type Select encoder type corresponding to configuration for technology module Select encoder type corresponding to configuration for technology module Select "Position detection for Motion Control technology object" mode TM PosInput 1/2 > Channel 0/1 > Module parameters You set the parameters for the encoder signals of the channel under "Module parameters" in the "Position input for Motion Control" mode. The parameters must be set depending on the encoder used. The configuration of the encoder is required for use with an SSI absolute encoder. Information on the configuration is available in the documentation for the respective technology module. * Incremental encoder * Absolute encoder - Signal evaluation * Single * Double * Quadruple * Incremental * Incremental * Absolute / cyclic absolute * Absolute / cyclic absolute Hardware interface > Data exchange with encoder Hardware interface > Data exchange Telegram "DP_TEL83_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Telegram "DP_TEL83_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Disable "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Disable "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Select rotary or linear measuring system type Select rotary or linear measuring system type Select fine resolution corresponding to configuration for technology module Select fine resolution corresponding to configuration for technology module * * Incremental encoder: * Incremental encoder: - 0 = Single - 0 = Single - 1 = Double - 1 = Double - 2 = Quadruple - 2 = Quadruple Absolute encoder: - 0 = Single * Absolute encoder: - 0 = Single S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 258 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Configuration Technology module Technology object TM PosInput 1 / TM PosInput 2 * Rotary type: Axis * Enter increments per revolution * * Enter increments per revolution corresponding to configuration at technology module (1:1) Linear type: Configuration not relevant Rotary type: External encoder * Linear type: Enter increments per revolution corresponding to configuration at technology module (1:1) * Enter distance between increments - * Hardware interface > Data exchange with the drive Rotary type: Rotary type: Linear type: Enter distance between increments - Enter reference speed Enter reference speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) * Linear type: Configuration not relevant - Homing Homing Select the homing signal for homing mark 0: Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". - - * Signal N of the incremental encoder * DI0 TM PosInput 1/2 > I/O addresses The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the channel in the encoder configuration at the technology object. "-" No configuration for technology module/technology object is required for these parameters S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 259 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.4 TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V / TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V You can operate the TM Timer DIDQ technology module centrally on an S7-1500 CPU or decentrally on a distributed I/O. For use with a measuring input, output cam or cam track, the technology module must be used decentrally and with isochronous mode. For use with Motion Control, the following parameters must be configured: Use with output cam / cam track technology object Configuration Technology module Technology object TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V / TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V Basic parameters Output cam / Cam track - Select desired number of outputs under channel configuration (ET 200MP TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V only) Channel parameters Hardware interface > Output cam output / Output cam track - Activate output Select output by TM Timer DIDQ Select "Timer DQ" mode for the respective output Select output cam output I/O addresses - Select "Isochronous mode" The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are updated automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the channel in the encoder configuration at the technology object. "-" No configuration for technology module/technology object is required for these parameters Use with technology object measuring input Configuration Technology module Technology object TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V / TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V Basic parameters Measuring input - Select desired number of inputs under channel configuration Channel parameters Hardware interface > Measuring input Configuration of DI group: Use inputs individually - Select "Timer DI" mode for the respective input Select measuring using TM Timer DIDQ - Select measuring input Select application-dependent input delay - I/O addresses Select "Isochronous mode" The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are updated automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the channel in the input configuration at the technology object. "-" No configuration for technology module/technology object is required for these parameters S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 260 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.5 TM Pulse 2x24V For use with Motion Control, the parameters described below must each be configured: Drive connection using PWM (pulse width modulation) Configuration TM Pulse 2x24V Technology object Axis TM Pulse 2x24V > Channel configuration - Select if you want to use 1 or 2 channels. TM Pulse 2x24V > Channel > Operating mode Select "Pulse width modulation PWM" or "PWM with DC motor" operating mode TM Pulse 2x24V > Channel > Parameters Hardware interface > Drive Select "S7 analog output" output format Select analog drive connection For the selection of the analog output, create a PLC tag of the "Int" type with corresponding address. The offset for the PLC tag to the start address is 2. To activate the output of the PWM signal, set the following two bits of the control interface of the PWM channel in the user program: * SW_ENABLE (= Bit 0 in Byte 9) * TM_CTRL_DQ (= Bit 1 in Byte 9) The offset for byte 9 to the start address of the PWM channel is 9. TM Pulse 2x24V > Channel > I/O addresses - Select the organization block "MC-Servo" for the input and output addresses. The "TPA OB Servo" process image is selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the organization block. "-" No configuration for technology object is required for these parameters S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 261 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.6 TM PTO 4 For use with Motion Control, the following parameters must be configured. Configuration Technology module Technology object TM PTO 4 TM PTO 4 > Channel configuration Axis - Configure the number of channels (1 to 4) you want to use. TM PTO 4 > Channel 0...3 > Operating mode Select signal type: * PTO (pulse (P) and direction (D)) * PTO (count up (A) and count down (B)) * PTO (A, B phase-shifted) * PTO (A, B phase-shifted - quadruple) Select signal interface: * RS422, symmetrical / TTL (5V), asymmetrical * 24V asymmetric Configure the interpulse pause for direction reversal. - Hardware interface > Drive Select drive type "PROFIdrive" and "Drive" data connection. Select the pulse output configured at the technology module as drive. Hardware interface > Encoder The encoder of the actuator telegram (simulated encoder) is automatically selected. Alternatively, an existing encoder interface can be selected. TM PTO 4 > Channel 0...3 > Diagnostic interrupts - When the "Enable diagnostic interrupts" check box is selected, diagnostic interrupts are activated if: * No supply voltage * Errors occur at digital outputs The detected error is displayed for the respective channel with feedback bit Fault_Present and Sensor_Error. TM PTO 4 > Channel 0...3 > Axis parameters Data exchange with the drive - Telegram "DP_TEL3_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the drive. Deselect "Automatic transfer of drive parameter values" Enter reference speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) Enter reference speed of the drive Enter maximum speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) Enter maximum speed of the drive. If the maximum speed is exceeded, technology alarm 102 is triggered and displayed. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 262 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Configuration Technology module Technology object TM PTO 4 - Axis Data exchange with encoder Telegram "DP_TEL3_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Disable "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Select rotary measuring system type. Enter increments per revolution Enter increments per revolution corresponding to configuration at technology module (1:1) Configure fine resolution Configure fine resolution corresponding to configuration for technology module. * 0 = Single * 2 = Quadruple Configure stop behavior * Quick stop time * Ramp stop time * 0 = Single * 2 = Quadruple - TM PTO 4 > Channel 0...3 > Hardware inputs/outputs - If you want to use a hardware output to enable the drive, select the "Use drive enable" check box. Next select one of the two hardware outputs DQ0 or DIQ2. No setting required at the technology object. The output is automatically controlled by the MC_Power. Homing Activate the hardware input (DI0) for the reference cam. Select the edge of the hardware input for triggering the reference cam function. When using a measuring input, select the "Use DI1 check box as measuring input". Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". "Measuring input > Configuration > Hardware interface" technology object Select the measuring input type "Measurement using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder)". Select the measuring input "1" under hardware connection. Select the "Use "drive ready"" check box. In the ""Drive ready" input", select the hardware input that is to be used to display whether the drive is ready. No setting required at the technology object. When the input is used, MC_Power waits until the input signal is present before it sets the drive enable. Configuring input delay - TM PTO 4 > Channel 0...3 > Sign-of-life error Configure tolerated number of sign-of-life errors TM PTO 4 > I/O addresses The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the PTO channel for the technology object. "-" No configuration required for these parameters at the technology module/technology object S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 263 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control 5.9.7 CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN For use with Motion Control, the parameters described below must be configured. Drive connection via PTO (Pulse Train Output) Configuration CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Technology object Axis Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > General - To activate a channel for PTO mode, select one of the following operating modes: * PTO (pulse (A) and direction (B)) * PTO (count up (A), count down (B)) * PTO (A,B phase shifted) * PTO (A,B phase shifted, quadruple) - Hardware interface > Drive Select drive type "PROFIdrive" and "Drive" data connection. Select the pulse generator of the CPU configured for PTO mode as drive. Hardware interface > Encoder The encoder of the actuator telegram (simulated encoder) is automatically selected. Alternatively, an existing encoder interface can be selected. Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > Axis parameters Hardware interface > Data exchange with the drive - Telegram "DP_TEL3_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the drive. Deselect "Automatic transfer of drive parameter values" Enter reference speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) Enter reference speed of the drive Enter reference speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) Enter maximum speed of the drive. - Hardware interface > Data exchange with encoder If the maximum speed is exceeded, technology alarm 102 is triggered and displayed. Telegram "DP_TEL3_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Disable "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Select rotary measuring system type. Enter increments per revolution Enter increments per revolution corresponding to configuration for CPU (1:1) The fine resolution has the fixed value "0 bit" (= single) and cannot be changed. Enter the fine resolution corresponding to the configuration for CPU Bits in incr. actual value (G1_XIST1): 0 (= single) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 264 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Configuration CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Technology object Axis Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > Hardware inputs/outputs Homing Select the hardware input for the reference switch Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram" for drive connection via PTO. In addition, configure the input delay for the selected hardware input. You configure the input delay in the device configuration at the corresponding DI channel (DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel > Input parameters > Input delay). Select the edge of the hardware input for triggering the reference cam function. When using a measuring input, select the hardware input of the measuring input. The following table includes the configuration description. - Select the hardware input that is used to display whether the drive is ready. In addition, configure the input delay for the selected hardware input. You configure the input delay in the device configuration at the corresponding DI channel (DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel > Input parameters > Input delay). With selected "PTO (PTO (pulse (A) and direction (B))" mode, the hardware output for the PTO signal A ("Pulse output (A)") is automatically selected through the device configuration and cannot be changed. For PTO signal B ("Direction output (B)") select one of the hardware outputs offered in the selection box. The hardware outputs for the PTO signals are selected through the device configuration for the following operating modes and cannot be changed: * PTO (count up (A), count down (B)) * PTO (A,B phase shifted) * PTO (A,B phase shifted, quadruple) Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > I/O addresses The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the PTO channel for the technology object. "-" No configuration for CPU/technology object is required for these parameters S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 265 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Additional configuration for use with the technology object measuring input Configuration Technology module Technology object CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Measuring input Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > Hardware inputs/outputs Hardware interface > Measuring input Select the hardware input of the measuring input. Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) In addition, configure the input delay for the selected hardware input. You configure the input delay in the device configuration at the corresponding DI channel (DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel > Input parameters > Input delay). In the "Number of the measuring input" selection box, select "1" (measuring input 1). Drive connection using PWM (pulse width modulation) Note that only travel in the positive direction is possible with a drive connection using the integrated PWM function of the compact CPU. Configuration CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Technology object Speed axis Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > General - Select "Pulse width modulation PWM" mode Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > Hardware inputs/outputs Select the hardware output to be used for pulse output. Select whether the set hardware output is to work as a fast push-pull switch or as P switch. Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > Parameters Hardware interface > Drive Select "S7 analog output" output format Select analog drive connection For the selection of the analog output, create a PLC tag of the "Int" type with corresponding address. The offset for the PLC tag of the control interface of the PWM channel is 2. To activate the output of the PWM signal, set the following two bits of the control interface of the PWM channel in the user program: * SW_ENABLE (= Bit 0 in Byte 9) * TM_CTRL_DQ (= Bit 1 in Byte 9) The offset for byte 9 to the start address of the PWM channel is 9. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 266 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Configuration CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Technology object Speed axis Select minimum pulse width of 0 s - Select required period duration (e.g. 100 s) Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO1...4/PWM1...4 > I/O addresses Select the organization block "MC-Servo" for the input and output addresses. The "TPA OB Servo" process image is selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the organization block. "-" No configuration for technology object is required for these parameters Encoder connection via HSC (High-speed counter) Configuration CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Technology object Axis High-speed counter (HSC) > HSC 1...6 - > General > Enable External encoder - Enable high-speed counter High-speed counter (HSC) > HSC 1...6 > Basic parameters > Operating mode Select "Position input for Motion Control" mode High-speed counter (HSC) > HSC 1...6 Hardware interface > Encoder > Basic parameters > Module parameters Hardware interface > Encoder - Select "Encoder" data connection and the high-speed counter activated and configured as encoder on the CPU Select "Encoder" data connection and the high-speed counter activated and configured as encoder on the CPU Signal type Select encoder type according to the device configuration of the CPU Select encoder type according to the device configuration of the CPU * Incremental encoder - * Incremental * Incremental Hardware interface > Data exchange with encoder Hardware interface > Data exchange Telegram "DP_TEL83_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Telegram "DP_TEL83_STANDARD" is automatically selected after the selection of the encoder. Deselect "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Deselect "Automatic transfer of encoder parameter values" Select rotary measuring system type. Select rotary measuring system type. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 267 Configuring 5.9 Configuring technology modules for Motion Control Configuration CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Technology object Axis Signal evaluation * Single * Double * Quadruple Set fine resolution according to the configured signal evaluation set for the high-speed counter (HSC) External encoder Set fine resolution according to the configured signal evaluation set for the high-speed counter (HSC) * 0 = Single * 0 = Single * 1 = Double * 1 = Double * 2 = Quadruple * 2 = Quadruple Enter increments per revolution Enter increments per revolution corresponding to device configuration for CPU (1:1) Enter increments per revolution corresponding to device configuration for CPU (1:1) - Hardware interface > Data exchange with the drive - Enter reference speed corresponding to configuration for technology object (1:1) Enter reference speed - Homing Homing Select the homing signal for homing mark 0: Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". Use the homing mode "Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram". * Signal N of the incremental encoder * DI0 (can be set with the hardware inputs/outputs) In addition, configure the input delay for the selected hardware input. You configure the input delay in the device configuration at the corresponding DI channel (DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel > Input parameters > Input delay). High-speed counter (HSC) > HSC 1...6 - > I/O addresses - The organization block ("MC-Servo") and the process image ("TPA OB Servo") are selected automatically for the input and output addresses by selecting the HSC channel for the technology object. "-" No configuration for CPU/technology object is required for these parameters S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 268 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.10 Connect drive/encoder via data block Additional configuration for use with the technology object measuring input Configuration Technology module Technology object CPU 1511C-1 PN / CPU 1512C-1 PN Measuring input High-speed counter (HSC) > HSC 1...6 > Hardware inputs/outputs Hardware interface > Measuring input Select the hardware input of the measuring input. Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external encoder) In addition, configure the input delay for the selected hardware input. You configure the input delay in the device configuration at the corresponding DI channel (DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel > Input parameters > Input delay). 5.10 In the "Number of the measuring input" selection box, select "1" (measuring input 1). Connect drive/encoder via data block Creating the data block for data connection 1. Create a new data block of type "Global DB". 2. Select the data block in the project tree and select "Properties" from the shortcut menu. 3. Disable the following attributes under Attributes and accept the change with "OK": - "Only store in load memory" - "Data block write-protected in the device" - "Optimized block access" for technology version < V4.0 4. Open the data block in the block editor. 5. Insert a tag structure of type "PD_TELx" textually in the block editor. This tag structure contains the "Input" tag structure for the input area of the telegram and the "Output" tag structure for the output area of the telegram. Note "Input" and "Output" relate to the view of the closed loop position control. For example, the input area contains the actual values of the drive and the output area contains the setpoints for the drive. The data block may contain the data structures of multiple axes and encoders and other contents. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 269 Configuring 5.10 Connect drive/encoder via data block Configuring data connection via a data block 1. Open the configuration window "Hardware interface > Drive" or "Hardware interface > Encoder". 2. In the Data block drop-down list, select "Data block". 3. In the "Data block" field, select the previously created data block. Open this data block and select the tag name defined for the drive and encoder. Programming MC-PreServo and MC-PostServo 1. Assign the previously defined PLC tag of the input range of the data block to MC-PreServo . 2. Assign the previously defined PLC tag of the output range of the data block to MC-PostServo. NOTICE Machine damage Improper manipulation of drive and encoder telegrams may result in unwanted drive motions. Check your user program for consistency in the drive and encoder connection. An application example for the use of MC-PreServo and MC-PostServo is available at: https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109741575 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109741575) See also PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) Data connection drive/encoder via data block (Page 50) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 270 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.1 Introduction to the parameter view The Parameter view provides you with a general overview of all relevant parameters of a technology object. You obtain an overview of the parameter settings and can easily change them in offline and online mode. Navigation (Page 273) Toolbar (Page 272) Parameter table (Page 273) "Parameter view" tab Function scope The following functions are available for analyzing the parameters of the technology objects and for enabling targeted monitoring and modification. Display functions: Display of parameter values in offline and online mode Display of status information of the parameters Display of value deviations and option for direct correction Display of configuration errors Display of value changes as a result of parameter dependencies Display of all memory values of a parameter: Start value PLC, Start value in project, Monitor value Display of the parameter comparison of the memory values of a parameter S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 271 Configuring 5.11 Parameter view Operator control functions: Navigation for quickly changing between the parameters and parameter structures. Text filter for faster searches for particular parameters. Sorting function for customizing the order of parameters and parameter groups to requirements. Memory function for backing up structural settings of the Parameter view. Monitoring and modifying of parameter values online. Function for saving a snapshot of parameter values of the CPU in order to capture momentary situations and to respond to them. Function for applying a snapshot of parameter values as start values. Download of modified start values to the CPU. Comparison functions for comparing parameter values with one another. 5.11.2 Structure of the parameter view 5.11.2.1 Toolbar The following functions can be selected in the toolbar of the parameter view. Symbol Function Explanation Monitor all Starts monitoring of the visible tags in the active table. Select navigation structure Toggle between function-based navigation and the view of the data structure of the technology data block. Couples the function view and parameter view for the objects selected in the navigation Enables the targeted toggling between the parameter view and function-based view. Collapse/expand all nodes and objects Collapses or expands all nodes and objects of the navigation or the data structure in the currently active view. Collapse/expand the nodes below the marked nodes Collapses or expands the marked nodes and objects of the navigation or the data structure in the currently active view. Text filter... After entry of a character string: Display of all parameters containing the entered string in one of the currently visible columns. Selection of compare values Selection of parameter values that are to be compared with one another in online mode (Start value in project, Start value PLC) Only in online mode. Save window settings Saves your display settings for the Parameter view (e.g. selected navigation structure, activated table columns, etc.) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 272 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.2.2 Navigation Within the "Parameter view" tab, the following alternative navigation structures can be selected. Navigation Explanation Functional navigation In the functional navigation, the structure of the parameters is based on the structure in the configuration window ("Function view" tab), commissioning window and diagnostics window. Data structure In the "Data structure" navigation, the structure of the parameters is based on the structure of the technology data block. You can use the "Select navigation structure" drop-down list to toggle the navigation structure. 5.11.2.3 Parameter table The table below shows the meaning of the individual columns of the parameter table. You can show or hide the columns as required. Column "Offline" = X: Column is visible in offline mode. Column "Online" = X: Column is visible in online mode (online connection to the CPU). Column Explanation Name in function view Name of the parameter in the function view. Name in DB Name of the parameter in the technology data block. Offline Online X X X X X X The display field is empty for parameters that are not configured via the technology object. If the parameter is part of a structure or UDT, the prefix "../" is added. The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the technology data block. Full name in DB Complete path of the parameter in the instance DB. The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the technology data block. Status of configuration Display of the completeness of the configuration using status symbols. Compare result Result of the "Compare values" function. X X This column is displayed when there is an online connection. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 273 Configuring 5.11 Parameter view Column Explanation Start value in project Configured start value in project. Offline Online X X X X Error indication if entered values have a syntax or process-related error. Default value Value that is pre-assigned to the parameter. The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the technology data block. Start value PLC Start value in the CPU. X This column is displayed when there is an online connection. Monitor value Current value in the CPU. Modify value Value that is to be used to change the monitor value. X This column is displayed when there is an online connection. X This column is displayed when there is an online connection. Minimum value Minimum process-related value of the parameter. X X X X If the minimum value is dependent on other parameters, it is defined: Maximum value * Offline: by the start value in the project. * Online: by the monitor values. Maximum process-related value of the parameter. If the maximum value is dependent on other parameters, it is defined: * Offline: by the start value in the project. * Online: by the monitor values. Setpoint Designates the parameter as a setpoint. These parameters can be initialized online. X X Data type Data type of the parameter. X X X X Accessible from HMI Indicates whether the HMI can access this parameter during runtime. X X Visible in HMI Indicates whether the parameter is visible in the selection list of the HMI by default. X X Comment Brief description of the parameter. X X The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the technology data block. Retain Designates the value as a retentive value. The values of retentive parameters are retained even after the voltage supply is switched off. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 274 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.3 Opening the parameter view Requirement The technology object was added in the project navigator. Procedure 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click the "Configuration" object. 4. Select the "Parameter view" tab in the top right corner. Result The Parameter view opens. Each displayed parameter is represented by one row in the parameter table. The displayable parameter properties (table columns) vary depending on whether you are working with the Parameter view in offline or online mode. In addition, you can selectively display and hide individual table columns. 5.11.4 Working with the parameter view 5.11.4.1 Overview The following table provides an overview of the functions of the Parameter view in online and offline mode described in the following. Column "Offline" = X: This function is possible in offline mode. Column "Online" = X: This function is possible in online mode. Function/action Offline Online Filtering the parameter table (Page 276) X X Sorting the parameter table (Page 277) X X Transferring parameter data to other editors (Page 277) X X Indicating errors (Page 278) X X Editing start values in the project (Page 278) X X Monitoring values online in the parameter view (Page 280) X Modifying values (Page 281) X Comparing values (Page 282) X S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 275 Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.4.2 Filtering the parameter table You can filter the parameters in the parameter table in the following ways: With the text filter With the subgroups of the navigation Both filter methods can be used simultaneously. With the text filter You can filter according to texts that are visible in the parameter table. This means that it can only be filtered by text in displayed parameter lines and displayed columns. 1. Enter the desired character string for filtering in the "Text filter..." input box. The parameter table displays only the parameters containing the character string. The text filtering is reset. When another parameter group is selected in the navigation. When navigation is changed from data navigation to functional navigation, or vice versa. With the subgroups of the navigation 1. Click the desired parameter group in the navigation, e.g., "Static". The parameter table only shows the static parameters. You can select further subgroups for some groups of the navigation. 2. Click "All parameters" in the navigation if all parameters are to be shown again. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 276 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.4.3 Sorting the parameter table The values of the parameters are arranged in rows. The parameter table can be sorted by any displayed column. In columns containing numerical values, sorting is based on the magnitude of the numerical value. In text columns, sorting is alphabetical. Sort column-by-column 1. Position the cursor in the header cell of the desired column. The background of this cell turns blue. 2. Click the column header. Result The entire parameter table is sorted by the selected column. A triangle with tip facing up appears in the column header. Clicking the column header again changes the sorting as follows: Symbol "": Parameter table is sorted in ascending order. Symbol "": Parameter table is sorted in descending order. No symbol: The sorting is removed again. The parameter table assumes the default display. The "../" prefix in the "Name in DB" column is ignored when sorting. 5.11.4.4 Transferring parameter data to other editors You can paste parameters of the parameter view in the following editors: Program editor Watch table Signal table for Trace The following options are available for pasting: Drag-and-drop / Copy/Paste via shortcut menu S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 277 Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.4.5 Indicating errors Error display Parameter assignment errors that result in compilation errors (e.g. limit violation) are indicated in the Parameter view. Every time a value is entered in the Parameter view, a check is made for process-related and syntax errors and displayed with the following indicators: Red error symbol in the "Status of configuration" (offline mode) or "Compare result" (online mode, depending on the selected comparison type) columns Table field with red background If you click the bad field, a roll-out error message appears with information of the permissible value range or the required syntax (format) Compilation error From the error message of the compiler, you can directly open the Parameter view (functional navigation) containing the parameter causing the error in situations where the parameter is not displayed in the configuration window. 5.11.4.6 Editing start values in the project With the Parameter view, you can edit the start values in the project in offline mode and online mode. You make value changes in the "Start value in project" column of the parameter table. In the "Status of configuration" column of the parameter table, the progress of the configuration is indicated by the familiar status symbols from the configuration window of the technology object. Boundary conditions If other parameters depend on the parameter whose start value was changed, the start value of the dependent parameters are also adapted. If a parameter of a technology object is not editable, it is also not editable in the parameter view. The ability to edit a parameter can also depend on the values of other parameters. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 278 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view Defining new start values To define start values for parameters in the Parameter view, follow these steps: 1. Open the Parameter view of the technology object. 2. Enter the desired start values in the "Start value in project" column. The value must match the data type of the parameter and must not exceed the value range of the parameter. The limits of the value range can be seen in the "Maximum value" and "Minimum value" columns. The "Status of configuration" column indicates the progress of the configuration with colored symbols. Following adaptation of the start values and downloading of the technology object to the CPU, the parameters take the defined value at startup if they are not declared as retentive ("Retain" column). Error display When a start value is input, a check is made for process-related and syntax errors and the result is indicated. Bad start values are indicated by: Red error symbol in the "Status of configuration" (offline mode) or "Compare result" (online mode, depending on the selected comparison type) columns and/or Red background in the "Start value in project" field If you click on the bad field, a roll-out error message appears with information of the permissible value range or the necessary syntax (format) Correcting bad start values 1. Correct bad start values using information from the roll-out error message. Red error symbol, red field background, and roll-out error message are no longer displayed. The project cannot be successfully compiled unless the start values are error-free. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 279 Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.4.7 Monitoring values online in the parameter view You can monitor the values currently taken by the parameters of the technology object in the CPU (monitor values) directly in the Parameter view. Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The Parameter view of the technology object is open. Procedure As soon as the Parameter view is online, the following columns are additionally displayed: Compare result Start value PLC Monitor value Modify value Selection for transmission The "Monitor value" column shows the current parameter values on the CPU. Display All columns that are only available online have an orange background: Values in light-orange cells can be changed. Values in cells with a dark orange background cannot be changed. See also Parameter table (Page 273) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 280 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view 5.11.4.8 Modifying values With the Parameter view, you can modify values of the technology object in the CPU. You can assign values to the parameter once (Modify value) and modify them immediately. The modify request is executed as quickly as possible without reference to any particular point in the user program. DANGER Danger when modifying: Changing the parameter values while the plant is operating may result in severe damage to property and personal injury in the event of malfunctions or program errors. Make sure that dangerous states cannot occur before you use the "Modify" function. Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The Parameter view of the technology object is open. The parameter can be modified (associated field in the "Modify value" column has a lightorange background). Procedure To modify parameters immediately, follow these steps: Enter the desired modify values in the "Modify values" column of the parameter table. The selected parameters are modified once and immediately with the specified values and can be monitored in the "Monitor values" column. The check boxes for modifying in the "Selection for transmission" column are automatically cleared after the modify request is complete. Error display When a start value is input, a check is made immediately for process-related and syntax errors and the result is indicated. Bad start values are indicated by: Red background in the "Modify value" field and If you click the bad field, a roll-out error message appears with information of the permissible value range or the necessary syntax (format) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 281 Configuring 5.11 Parameter view Bad modify values Modify values with process-related errors can be transmitted. Modify values with syntax errors cannot be transmitted. 5.11.4.9 Comparing values You can use comparison functions to compare the following memory values of a parameter: Start value in project Start value PLC Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The Parameter view of the technology object is open. Procedure To compare the start values on the various target systems, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Selection of compare values" icon . A selection list containing the comparison options opens: - Start value in project - Start value PLC (default setting) 2. Select the desired comparison option. The selected comparison option is executed as follows: - A scales symbol appears in the header cells of the two columns selected for comparison. - Symbols are used in the "Compare result" column to indicate the result of the comparison of the selected columns. Symbol in "Compare result" column Symbol Meaning The compare values are equal and error-free. The compare values are not equal and error-free. At least one of the two compare values has a process-related or syntax error. The comparison cannot be performed. At least one of the two compare values is not available (e.g., snapshot). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 282 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Configuring 5.11 Parameter view Symbol in the navigation The symbols are shown in the same way in the navigation if the compare result applies to at least one of the parameters below the displayed navigation structure. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 283 6 Programming 6.1 Introduction The "Programming" section contains general information on supplying and evaluating the Motion Control instructions and on technology data blocks. You can find an overview of the Motion Control instructions in the Functions (Page 27) section. You can use Motion Control instructions in the user program to assign jobs to the technology object. You define the job using the input parameters of the Motion Control instructions. The current job status is indicated in the output parameters. The technology data block is available to you as an additional interface to the technology object. 6.2 Technology data block 6.2.1 Introduction The properties of real objects (e.g. drives) are configured by means of the technology objects and saved in a technology data block. The technology data block contains all configuration data, setpoint and actual values, and status information of the technology object. The TIA Portal automatically creates the technology data block when the technology object is created. You access the data of the technology data block (read/write access) with your user program. A listing and description of the tags can be found in the Appendix (Page 431). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 284 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.2 Technology data block 6.2.2 Evaluating the technology data block Access to data in the technology data block occurs in accordance with the access to standard data blocks. Only tags with elementary data types can be accessed in the technology data block. It is not possible to access tags with composite data types (such as STRUCT, ARRAY). Reading values from the technology data block In your user program you can read actual values (e.g. current position) and status information, or detect error messages in the technology object. When you program a query in your user program (e.g. current velocity), the value is directly read from the technology object. Reading values from the technology data block takes longer than for other data blocks. If you use these tags several times in a single cycle of your user program, it is recommended to copy the tag values to local tags, and use the local tags in your program. Writing values to the technology data block The configuration of the technology object in the TIA Portal is used to write the corresponding data to the technology data block. After they have been loaded into the CPU, these data are stored in the CPU on the SIMATIC Memory Card (load memory). In the following cases, it may be necessary for the user program to write values to the technology data block: Adaptation of the configuration of the technology object (e.g. dynamic limits, software limit switches) Use of overrides Adaptation of position control (e.g. "Kv" parameter) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 285 Programming 6.2 Technology data block Changes to values in the technology data block by the user program can take effect at various points in time. The relevant property of the individual tags can be found in their descriptions in the Appendix (Page 431): Effectiveness of changes Description Direct (DIR) You write changes using direct assignments. The changes are applied only at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. The changes are retained until the next POWER OFF of the CPU or restart of the technology object. LREAL (e.g. .Override. Velocity) DINT/BOOL (e.g. .Position Limits_SW.Active) The technology object performs a range check on the written value, and immediately starts using the new value. If range limits are violated when writing, the technology object automatically corrects the values. If the value is below the range, then the value is set to the low limit of the range; if the range is exceeded, then the value is set to the high limit of the range. Changes are only permitted in the defined value range. Value changes outside the value range are not applied. If you enter invalid values, the programming error OB (OB 121) is started. When Motion Control instruction is called (CAL) You write changes using direct assignments. The changes are applied at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruc(e.g. .Sensor[n].ActiveHoming. tion in the user program. The changes are retained until the next POWER OFF of the CPU or restart of the HomePositionOffset) technology object. Restart (RES) (e.g. .Homing.AutoReversal) Since restart-relevant tags have dependencies on other tags, value changes cannot be applied at any arbitrary time. The changes are only used after reinitialization (restart) of the technology object. During a restart the technology object is reinitialized with the data in load memory. You therefore write changes to the start value in the load memory with the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to data block in load memory). You trigger the restart in your user program using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset" with parameter "Restart" = TRUE. Additional information regarding the restart can be found in the Restarting technology objects (Page 314) section. Read only (RON) The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. (e.g. .Position) Note Save changes with "WRIT_DBL" Changes to tags immediately in effect are lost on POWER OFF of the CPU, or restart of the technology object. If changes in the technology data block should also be retained after POWER OFF of the CPU, or restart of the technology object, you must write the changes to the start value in the load memory with the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 286 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.2 Technology data block Note Using the "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL" data block functions The "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL" data block functions may only be used on individual tags in conjunction with the tags of the technology object. The "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL" data block functions must not be applied to data structures of the technology object. Isochronous evaluation of data If you want to process data of the technology data block in isochronous mode from a Motion Control application cycle, there is the option of evaluating this data in the MC-PreServo [OB67]/MC-PostServo [OB95] as of technology version V3.0. See also Organization Blocks for Motion Control (Page 95) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 287 Programming 6.2 Technology data block 6.2.3 Evaluate StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord To be able to symbolically use individual status and error information from the "StatusWord", "ErrorWord" and "WarningWord" data double words, you can evaluate them as described below. For consistent evaluation, you should avoid using bit addressing to access these data double words in the technology data block. Access to an individual bit in the technology data block only lasts as long as the access to the entire data word. When required, copy the required data double word to a tag of a data structure and query the individual bits of the tag. The allocation of the individual bits in the data double words can be found in the Appendix (Page 431) in the description of the tags of the corresponding technology object. Requirements The technology object has been created. Procedure To evaluate the individual bits in the data word "StatusWord", follow these steps: 1. Crate a global data structure. Name the data structure, e.g. as "Status". 2. Create a double word (DWORD) in the data structure "Status". Name the double word, e.g. as "Temp". 3. Create 32 Boolean tags in the "Status" data structure. You can obtain a clearer overview by giving the individual Boolean tags identical names as the bits in the technology DB (e.g. name the fifth Boolean tag "HomingDone"). 4. Copy the tag .StatusWord as needed from the technology data block to the double word "Temp" in your data structure. 5. Copy the individual bits of double word "Temp" to the corresponding Boolean tags with bit accesses. 6. Use the Boolean tags to query the status bits. Evaluate the data words "ErrorWord" and "WarningWord" as specified in steps 1 to 6. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 288 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.2 Technology data block Example The following example shows how you can read out and save the fifth bit "HomingDone" of the data word "StatusWord": SCL Explanation #Status.Temp := "TO".StatusWord; //Copy status word #Status.HomingDone := #Status.Temp.%X5; //Copy individual bits per bit access STL Explanation L "TO".StatusWord //Copy status word T #Status.Temp U #Status.Temp.%X5 //Copy individual bits per bit access = #Status.HomingDone 6.2.4 Change restart-relevant data In order to change restart-relevant data in the technology data block, write to the starting values of the tags in load memory using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL". In order for the changes to be applied, a restart of the technology object must be performed. Whether changes to the value of a tag are relevant for the restart can be found in the description of the tags in the Appendix (Page 445). Requirement The technology object has been created. Procedure To change restart-relevant data, proceed as follows: 1. Create a data block and fill it with the restart-relevant values, that you want to change in the technology data block. In doing so, the data types must match the tags to be changed. 2. Write the values from your data block to the starting values of the tags of the technology data block in load memory, using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL". If restart-relevant data were changed, this will be indicated in the .StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged) tag of the technology object. 3. Perform a restart of the technology object using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset" with parameter "Restart" = TRUE. After the restart of the technology object, the new value is transferred into the technology data block in work memory, and is effective. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 289 Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions 6.3 Motion Control instructions 6.3.1 Motion Control instruction parameters Description The individual Motion Control instructions are described in detail in the section MC_Power V4 (Page 361). When creating your user program, take the following explanations of the Motion Control instruction parameters into account. Reference to the technology object The technology object is specified for the Motion Control instruction as follows: Parameter "Axis" The "Axis" input parameter of a Motion Control instruction contains a reference to the technology object that is to execute the corresponding job. The corresponding technology object is also referenced in the following parameters: - Parameter "Master" - Parameter "Slave" - Parameter "Cam" - Parameter "MeasuringInput" - Parameter "OutputCam" - Parameter "CamTrack" As of technology version V3.0, the reference to the technology object can also be specified with the data type DB_ANY. Job start and transfer of input parameters of a Motion Control instruction For the start of jobs and the transfer of modified parameter values, a distinction is made between the following Motion Control instructions: Motion Control instructions with "Execute" parameter With a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter, the job is started and the existing values for the input parameters are transferred. Subsequently changed parameter values are not transferred until the next job start. Resetting the "Execute" parameter does not end the job, but it does affect the display duration of the job status. As long as "Execute" is set to TRUE, the output parameters will be updated. If "Execute" is reset before the completion of a job, the parameters "Done", "Error" and "CommandAborted" are correspondingly set for only one call cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 290 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions Motion Control instructions with "Enable" parameter The job is started by setting the "Enable" parameter. As long as "Enable" = TRUE, the job remains active and changed parameter values will be transferred each time the instruction is called in the user program. The job is ended by resetting the "Enable" parameter. The input parameters "JogForward" and "JogBackward" of the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog" correspond in their behavior to the "Enable" parameter. Job status The following output parameters indicate the status of the job execution: Motion Control instructions with "Done" parameter The normal completion of a job is indicated with parameter "Done" = TRUE. Motion Control instructions without "Done" parameter The achievement of the job objective is indicated by other parameters (e.g. "Status", "InVelocity"). For more information, refer to the section Tracking running jobs (Page 302). Parameter "Busy" As long as a job is being processed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. If a job was ended or aborted, "Busy" shows the value FALSE. Parameter "CommandAborted" If a job was aborted by another job, the CommandAborted parameter shows the value "TRUE". Parameter "Error" If a Motion Control instruction error occurs, the "Error" parameter shows the value TRUE. The ErrorID parameter indicates the cause of the error. As long as the "Execute" or "Enable" parameter is set to TRUE, the output parameters will be updated. Otherwise the parameters "Done", "Error" and CommandAborted" are correspondingly set for only one cycle. Abort of running jobs An active Motion Control job is aborted by the start of a new Motion Control job. In the process, the current dynamic setpoints (acceleration, deceleration, jerk, velocity) are set to the values of the overriding job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 291 Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions Example of parameter behavior The behavior of the parameters of Motion Control instructions is shown in the following chart using the example of two "MC_MoveAbsolute" jobs. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 292 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions Using "Exe_1", an "MC_MoveAbsolute" job (A1) with target position 1000.0 is initiated. "Busy_1" is set to TRUE. The axis is accelerated to the specified velocity and moved to the target position (see TO_1.Velocity and TO_1.Position). Before the target position is reached, the job is overridden at time by another "MC_MoveAbsolute" job (A2). The abort is signaled via "Abort_1", and "Busy_1" is set to FALSE. The axis is braked to the velocity specified in A2 and moved to the new target position 1500.0. When the axis reaches the target position, this is signaled via "Done_2". Non position-controlled operation The position control of the axis can be deactivated with the following parameters: MC_Power.StartMode = 0 MC_MoveVelocity.PositionControlled = FALSE MC_MoveJog.PositionControlled = FALSE For more information, refer to the section " Non position-controlled operation (Page 298). See also Instructions (Page 361) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 293 Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions 6.3.2 Add Motion Control instructions You add Motion Control instructions to a program block in the same way as other instructions. You control all available functions of the technology object using the Motion Control instructions. Requirements The technology object was created. Procedure To add Motion Control instructions in your user program, proceed as follows: 1. Double click your program block in the project tree (the program block must be called in the cyclical program). The program block is opened in the programming editor, and the available instructions are displayed. 2. In the "Instructions" task card, open the "Technology > Motion Control" folder. 3. Using drag-and-drop, move the Motion Control instruction, e.g. "MC_Power", to the desired segment of the program block. The "Call options" dialog opens. 4. In the dialog, specify a name and a number for the instance data block of the Motion Control instruction. 5. Click "OK". The Motion Control instruction "MC_Power" is inserted into the network. The instance data block is automatically created under "Program Blocks > System Blocks > Program Resources". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 294 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions 6. Input parameters without a default value (e.g. "Axis"), must be assigned. Select the technology object in the project tree and move it onto <...> in the "Axis" parameter using drag-and-drop. Once the technology object is specified in the "Axis" parameter, the following buttons are available to you: To open the configuration of the technology object, click on the toolbox icon. To open the diagnostics of the technology object, click on the stethoscope icon. 7. Add additional Motion Control instructions in accordance with steps 3 through 6. See also Tracking active jobs (Page 302) Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object (Page 445) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 295 Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions 6.3.3 Parameter transfer for function blocks If you want to reuse a function block with Motion Control instructions for different technology objects, create an input parameter of the data type of the respective technology object in the block interface of the calling function block. You assign the data type in the block interface with a direct input. The parameter is then transferred as reference to the technology object to the "Axis" parameter of the Motion Control instructions. The data types of technology objects correspond to the structure of the associated technology data block. By specifying the data type, you can address the tags of the technology object in the function block (.). The data types for the reference to the technology objects are available in the appendix (Page 555). Example 1 The following table shows the declaration of the tags used: Tag Declaration Data type Description axis Input TO_PositioningAxis Reference to the technology object on Input BOOL Signal to enable the axis actPosition Output LReal Query of the actual position from the technology data block MC_POWER Multiinctance of the Motion Control instruction MC_Power instMC_POWER Static The following SCL program shows how to implement this task: SCL Explanation #instMC_POWER(Axis := #axis, Enable := #on); //Call of the Motion Control instruction MC_Power with enable of the axis #actPosition := #axis.ActualPosition; //Query of the actual position from the technology data block S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 296 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions Example 2 The data type "DB_Any" provides a further option for the transfer of specific data types of the technology object. Unlike the data types of the technology object in the program, "DB_Any" can be assigned during runtime. This example shows how you can program variable switching of up to four cams at "MC_CamIn". To do this, tags of the data type "DB_Any" are first created as input parameter of the block. The cam to be used is assigned by an additional input parameter. The following table shows the declaration of the tags used: Tag Declaration Data type Description cam1 Input DB_ANY Cam 1 cam2 Input DB_ANY Cam 2 cam3 Input DB_ANY Cam 3 cam4 Input DB_ANY Cam 4 camToUse Input Int Selection of cam 1 to 4 instMC_CAMIN Static MC_CAMIN Multi-instance of the MC_CamIn tempCamSel Temp DB_ANY Current cam The example below shows the basic procedure: SCL Explanation //Selection of the desired cam 1..4 //Using an input tag of data type Int CASE #camToUse OF 1: #tempCamSel := #cam1; //Instruction for scenario 1 2: #tempCamSel := #cam2; //Instruction for scenario 2 3: #tempCamSel := #cam3; //Instruction for scenario 3 4: #tempCamSel := #cam4; //Instruction for scenario 4 ELSE //Instruction for Int 0 or > 4 #tempCamSel := #cam1; //Corresponds to default cam 1 END_CASE; //Calling of the MC_CamIn with variable transfer of the cam technology object using the temporary tag "tempCamSel" #instMC_CAMIN(Master := "PositioningAxis_1", //Direct assignment of the technology object of the leading axis Slave := "SynchronousAxis_1", //Direct assignment of the technology object of the following axis Cam := #tempCamSel); //Indirect assignment of the cam technology object S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 297 Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions Additional information You can find more program examples using the data type "DB_Any" in the following FAQ: https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109750880 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109750880) 6.3.4 Non position-controlled operation The closed loop position control of an axis can be switched off/switched with the following Motion Control instructions: MC_Power MC_MoveVelocity MC_MoveJog The non-position-controlled operation is displayed with .StatusWord.X28 (NonPositionControlled) = TRUE. MC_Power The axis is enabled without closed loop position control with "MC_Power" and the parameter "StartMode" = 0. The closed loop position control remain switched off until a different Motion Control instruction changes the status of the closed loop position control. MC_MoveVelocity and MC_MoveJog A "MC_MoveVelocity" or "MC_MoveJog" job with "PositionControlled" = FALSE forces nonposition-controlled operation. A "MC_MoveVelocity" or "MC_MoveJog" job with "PositionControlled" = TRUE forces position-controlled operation. The selected mode remains in effect after the job is completed. Influence of additional Motion Control instructions Starting the following Motion Control instructions forces position-controlled operation of the axis: MC_Home with "Mode" = 3, 5 MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveSuperimposed MC_GearIn MC_GearInPos (S7-1500T) MC_CamIn (S7-1500T) The closed loop position control remains active after completing the corresponding jobs. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 298 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.3 Motion Control instructions The Motion Control instruction MC_Halt is executed in position-controlled and non-positioncontrolled operation. The status of the closed loop position control is not changed by "MC_Halt". A torque limiting activated with "MC_TorqueLimiting" is in effect even with non-positioncontrolled operation. Synchronous operation with setpoint coupling A following axis is set into position-controlled operation with the start of a synchronous operation job. If the leading axis is in non-position-controlled operation at the start of the synchronous operation, the synchronous operation job remains waiting. Synchronization is started only after position control has been activated and the start position of the synchronization has been reached. Note If the leading axis is set to the non-position-controlled mode during active synchronization, your setpoint is then set to zero. A setpoint step change is obtained as a result of coupling the setpoint of following axis. The setpoint step change is compensated according to the constant function. The only limiting factor is the maximum speed of the drive. Synchronous operation with actual value coupling (S7-1500T) A following axis is set into position-controlled operation with the start of a synchronous operation job. If the leading axis is in non-position-controlled operation at the start of the synchronous operation and the actual values are valid, synchronization is started. If the leading axis is set to the non-position-controlled mode during active synchronization, the synchronization remains active. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 299 Programming 6.4 Starting Motion Control jobs 6.4 Starting Motion Control jobs Description Motion Control jobs are started by setting the "Execute" or "Enable" parameter of the Motion Control instruction. The call of the Motion Control instructions for a technology object should occur in an execution level. When executing Motion Control jobs, you should also take note of the status of the technology object. Starting Motion Control jobs should be performed in the following steps: 1. Query the status of the technology object. 2. Initiate new job for the technology object. 3. Check job status. These steps are explained using the example of a job for absolute positioning. 1. Query the status of the technology object Make sure that the technology object is in the appropriate status to perform the desired job: Has the technology object been released? To execute motion jobs, the technology object must be enabled. Enabling is performed using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power". The "MC_Power.Status" parameter (.StatusWord.X0 (Enable)) must show the value TRUE. Is a technology alarm pending? To perform motion commands, no technology alarms or alarm responses may be pending. The tags of the technology objects .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction must show the value zero. After resolving the error, acknowledge any pending alarms using the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset". A list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions can be found in the appendix, Technology alarms (Page 513). Has the technology object been homed? In order to perform a job for absolute positioning, the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object must be homed. The referencing occurs via the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". The ".StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone) " tag of the technology object must show the value TRUE . 2. Initiate new command for the technology object In the "Position" parameter of the "MC_MoveAbsolute" instruction, specify the position to which the axis should be moved. Start the job with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 300 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.4 Starting Motion Control jobs 3. Check command status Parameter "Done" of the Motion Control instruction indicates successful completion of a job (target reached, in this case). If an error is detected, the "Error" parameter of the Motion Control instruction is set to TRUE, and the job is rejected. You can program an error handling routine for the Motion Control job. For this purpose, evaluate the error indicated in the "Error" parameter. The cause of the error is indicated in the ErrorID parameter. After resolving the cause of the error, restart the job. Output of the "Error" = TRUE and "ErrorID" = 16#8001 status information during job processing indicates that a technology alarm was triggered. You can find a list of the ErrorIDs in the Error detection (Page 542) appendix. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits, error bits, and warning bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 301 Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs 6.5 Tracking active jobs 6.5.1 Introduction The current status of the job processing is made available via the output parameters of the Motion Control instruction. These parameters are updated with each call of the Motion Control instruction. When tracking jobs, a distinction is made between three groups: Motion Control instructions with "Done" parameter (Page 302) Motion Control instructions without "Done" parameter (Page 306) Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog" (Page 310) 6.5.2 Motion Control instructions with "Done" parameter Description Jobs of Motion Control instructions with the "Done" parameter are started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. If the job was completed without errors or interruption by another job (e.g. "MC_MoveAbsolute": Target position reached), the "Done" parameter shows the value TRUE. The following Motion Control instructions have a "Done" parameter: MC_Home MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveSuperimposed MC_Halt MC_Reset MC_MeasuringInput MC_AbortMeasuringInput S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 302 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs The behavior of the parameters is shown below by way of example for various situations: Complete execution of the job If the Motion Control job has been completely executed all the way to the end, this is indicated with parameter "Done" = TRUE. The signal state of the "Execute" parameter influences the display duration for the "Done" parameter: You set "Execute" after completion of the job to FALSE. You set "Execute" during processing of the job to FALSE. The job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. Depending on the programming, "Execute" can be reset to the value FALSE during the job or the value TRUE can be retained until after completion of the job. While the job is being executed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. At the completion of the job (for example, with Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveAbsolute": Target position reached), the "Busy" parameter changes to FALSE and the "Done" parameter to TRUE. As long as the "Execute" parameter retains the value TRUE after completion of the job, the "Done" parameter also retains the value TRUE. If the "Execute" parameter was already set to FALSE before completion of the job, the "Done" parameter shows the value TRUE for only one execution cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 303 Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs Job abort If the Motion Control job is aborted during processing by another job, this is indicated in the "CommandAborted" parameter with the value TRUE. The signal state of the "Execute" parameter influences the display duration for the "CommandAborted" parameter: You set "Execute" after the job is aborted to FALSE. You set "Execute" before the job is aborted to FALSE. The job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. Depending on the programming, "Execute" can be reset to the value FALSE during the job or the value TRUE can be retained until after completion of the job. While the job is being executed, the parameter "Busy" shows the value TRUE. During job execution, the job is aborted by another Motion Control job. When the job is aborted, the "Busy" parameter changes to "FALSE" and "CommandAborted" changes to TRUE. As long as the "Execute" parameter retains the value TRUE after completion of the job, the "CommandAborted" parameter also retains the value TRUE. If the "Execute" parameter was already set to FALSE before the job is aborted, the "CommandAborted" parameter shows the value TRUE for only one execution cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 304 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs Error during job execution If an error occurs during execution of the Motion Control job, this is indicated with parameter "Error" = TRUE. The signal state of the "Execute" parameter influences the display duration for the "Error" parameter: You set "Execute" after the occurrence of the error to FALSE. You set "Execute" before the occurrence of the error to FALSE. The job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. Depending on the programming, "Execute" can be reset to the value FALSE during the job or the value TRUE can be retained until after completion of the job. While the job is being executed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. An error occurs during the execution of the job. When the error occurs, the "Busy" parameter changes to FALSE and the "Error" parameter to TRUE. As long as the "Execute" parameter retains the value TRUE after the occurrence of the error, the "Error" parameter also retains the value TRUE. If the "Execute" parameter was already set to FALSE before the occurrence of the error, the "Error" parameter shows the value TRUE for only one execution cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 305 Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs 6.5.3 Motion Control instructions without "Done" parameter Description Motion Control instructions without the "Done" parameter use a special parameter to indicate that the command objective (e.g. "InVelocity", "InGear") has been achieved. The target state or motion is stopped until the job is aborted or an error occurs. The following Motion Control instructions have a special parameter for indicating the job status: MC_Power ("Status" parameter) MC_MoveVelocity ("InVeloctity" parameter) MC_GearIn ("InGear" parameter) MC_MoveJog ("InVelocity" parameter) The special behavior of "MC_MoveJog" is described in the section Motion Control instruction MC_MoveJog (Page 310). MC_TorqueLimiting ("InClamping" and "InLimitation") parameters The following Motion Control instructions have no special parameter for indicating the job status: Feedback is provided via the following tags: MC_MeasuringInputCyclic The execution of a measuring job is indicated with parameter "Busy" = TRUE. Completed measuring events are indicated in the corresponding event counters .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue1Counter and .MeasuredValues.MeasuredValue2Counter of the technology data block. MC_OutputCam The execution of a job is indicated with parameter "Busy" = TRUE. The CamOutput tag in the associated technology data block indicates the switching state of the output cam. MC_CamTrack The execution of a job is indicated with parameter "Busy" = TRUE. The TrackOutput tag in the associated technology data block indicates the switching state of the output cam. The behavior of the parameter is shown for various situations using the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveVelocity" as an example: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 306 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs Example "MC_MoveVelocity" An "MC_MoveVelocity" job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. The job objective is fulfilled when the assigned velocity is reached and the axis travels at constant velocity. When the assigned velocity is reached and maintained, this is indicated in the "InVelocity" parameter with the value TRUE. The motion of the axis can, for example, be stopped with an "MC_Halt" job. The assigned velocity is reached and maintained The achievement of the assigned velocity is indicated with parameter "InVelocity" = TRUE. The "Execute" parameter has no effect on the display duration for the "InVelocity" parameter. The job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. Depending on the programming, "Execute" can be reset to the value FALSE before or after the assigned velocity has been reached. While the job is being executed, the parameter "Busy" shows the value TRUE. When the assigned velocity is reached, the "InVelocity" parameter changes to TRUE. The "Busy" and "InVelocity" parameters retain the value TRUE until another Motion Control job overrides the "MC_MoveVelocity" job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 307 Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs The job is aborted before the assigned velocity is reached If the Motion Control job is aborted by another job before the assigned velocity is reached, this is indicated with parameter "CommandAborted" = TRUE. The signal state of the "Execute" parameter influences the display duration for the "CommandAborted" parameter. You set "Execute" after the job is aborted to FALSE. You set "Execute" before the job is aborted to FALSE. The job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. Depending on the programming, "Execute" can be reset to the value FALSE during the job or the value TRUE can be retained until after the job is aborted. While the job is being executed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. During job execution, the job is aborted by another Motion Control job. When the job is aborted, the "Busy" parameter changes to "FALSE" and "CommandAborted" changes to TRUE. As long as the "Execute" parameter retains the value TRUE after completion of the job, the "CommandAborted" parameter also retains the value TRUE. If the "Execute" parameter was already set to FALSE before the job is aborted, the "CommandAborted" parameter shows the value TRUE for only one execution cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 308 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs An error has occurred prior to reaching the assigned velocity If an error occurs during execution of the Motion Control job before the assigned velocity has been reached, this is indicated with parameter "Error" = TRUE. The signal state of the "Execute" parameter influences the display duration for the "Error" parameter. You set "Execute" after the occurrence of the error to FALSE. You set "Execute" before the occurrence of the error to FALSE. The job is started with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. Depending on the programming, "Execute" can be reset to the value FALSE during the job or the value TRUE can be retained until after the error has occurred. While the job is being executed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. An error occurs during the execution of the job. When the error occurs, the "Busy" parameter changes to FALSE, and the "Error" parameter to TRUE. As long as the "Execute" parameter retains the value TRUE after completion of the job, the "Error" parameter also retains the value TRUE. If the "Execute" parameter was already set to FALSE before the job is aborted, the "Error" parameter shows the value TRUE for only one execution cycle. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 309 Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs 6.5.4 Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog" Description An "MC_MoveJog" job is started by setting the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter. The job objective is fulfilled when the assigned velocity is reached and the axis travels at constant velocity. When the assigned velocity is reached and maintained, this is indicated in the "InVelocity" parameter with the value TRUE. The job is complete when the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter has been set to the value FALSE and the axis has come to a standstill. The behavior of the parameters is presented below for various example situations: The assigned velocity is reached and maintained If the Motion Control job has been performed up to the point of reaching the assigned velocity, then this is indicated in the "InVelocity" parameter with the value TRUE. Jog mode is controlled by the "JogForward" parameter. Jog mode is controlled by the "JogBackward" parameter. The job is started by setting the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter. While the job is being executed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. When the assigned velocity is reached, the "InVelocity" parameter changes to TRUE. When the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter is reset, the motion of the axis ends. The axis decelerates. The "InVelocity" parameter changes to FALSE. If the axis has come to a standstill, then the Motion Control job is complete and the "Busy" parameter changes to FALSE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 310 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs The job is aborted during execution If the Motion Control job is aborted during processing by another job, this is indicated in the "CommandAborted" parameter with the value TRUE. The behavior of the "CommandAborted" parameter is independent of reaching the assigned velocity. Jog mode is controlled by the "JogForward" parameter. Jog mode is controlled by the "JogBackward" parameter. The job is started by setting the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter. While the job is processing, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. During job execution, the job is aborted by another Motion Control job. When the job is aborted, the "Busy" parameter changes to "FALSE" and "CommandAborted" changes to TRUE. When the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter is reset, the "CommandAborted" parameter likewise changes to FALSE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 311 Programming 6.5 Tracking active jobs An error occurs during the execution of the job If an error occurs during execution of the Motion Control job, this is indicated in the "Error" parameter with the value TRUE. The behavior of the "Error" parameter is independent of reaching the assigned velocity. Jog mode is controlled by the "JogForward" parameter. Jog mode is controlled by the "JogBackward" parameter. The job is started by setting the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" parameter. While the job is being executed, the "Busy" parameter shows the value TRUE. An error occurs during the execution of the job. When the error occurs, the "Busy" parameter changes to "FALSE", and "Error" changes to TRUE. When the "JogForward" or "JogBackward" is reset to the value FALSE, the "Error" parameter likewise changes to FALSE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 312 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Programming 6.6 Ending Motion Control jobs 6.6 Ending Motion Control jobs When a job is ended, a distinction is made between error-free completion of the job and a motion abort. Completion of job The completion of a Motion Control job is indicated as described in the Tracking running jobs (Page 302) section. Job termination The termination and substitution behavior are described in the section Override response of Motion Control jobs V4 (Page 428). Special pending jobs can be cancelled with "MC_Power". Motion abort If a motion must be aborted, you can perform the following measures: Execute "MC_Halt (Page 374)" To abort a motion and stop the axis, you can use the "MC_Halt" instruction. Deactivate "MC_Power (Page 361)" In an emergency, you can stop the axis via an emergency stop ramp. To do so, set the "Enable" parameter of the "MC_Power" instruction to FALSE. The axis is decelerated according to the selected "StopMode" and all jobs for the technology object are aborted. Measuring job abort With the Motion Control instruction "MC_AbortMeasuringInput", an active one-time or cyclic measuring job is aborted. Cancellation of an active output cam/cam track "MC_OutputCam (Page 407)" An active output cam is disabled when the "Enable" parameter of Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" is set to FALSE. "MC_CamTrack (Page 410)" An active cam track is disabled when the "Enable" parameter of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" is set to FALSE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 313 Programming 6.7 Restart of technology objects 6.7 Restart of technology objects Description After the CPU is switched on, or after technology objects are downloaded into the CPU, the system automatically initializes the technology objects with the start values from the technology data blocks. If restart-relevant changes are detected during a reload into the CPU, a restart of the technology object is automatically performed. If restart-relevant data have been changed in RUN mode by the user program, then the technology object must be reinitialized by the user in order for the changes to be used. At a RUN STOP transition, the CPU automatically performs a restart of technology objects with restart-relevant changes. If changes in the technology data block should also be retained after the restart of the technology object, then you must write the changes to the start value in load memory using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL". Restart required A necessary TO restart is indicated at "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits > Axis status or Encoder status > Online start value changed", as well as in the tag of technology object .StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged). Restarting a technology object A restart of the technology object is triggered by the user by means of the "MC_Reset" Motion Control instruction, with parameter "Restart" = TRUE. During a restart, all configuration data of the technology object are loaded from load memory into work memory. In the process, the actual values in the technology data block are overwritten. Note the following during a restart of the technology object: A restart resets the "Referenced" status of a technology object with incremental actual values (.StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone). While a restart is being performed, the technology object cannot perform any jobs. An active restart will be indicated under "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits > Axis status or Encoder status > Restart active", and in the .StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive) tag of the technology object. Motion Control jobs are rejected during a restart with the "Error" = TRUE and "ErrorID" = 16#800D parameters (job not executable, because a restart is active). While a restart is being executed, you cannot access the technology data block. See also Change restart-relevant data (Page 289) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 314 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Downloading to CPU 7 Description When downloading to the CPU S7-1500, it is always verified that the project files are consistent online and offline after the download. The data of the technology objects are saved in technology data blocks. The conditions for downloading blocks thus apply when loading new or modified technology objects. Load in RUN mode When loading in the CPU's RUN mode, it is checked whether a load without restart of the technology objects is possible. If restart-relevant configuration values were changed, then a restart of the technology object is automatically performed after the load into the CPU. Loading a technology object is only possible if the technology object is disabled. You cannot download the following changes to the CPU in RUN mode: Changes to the MC-Servo clock speeds Changes to the hardware interface of the technology object in "Technology object > Configuration > Hardware interface" S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 315 8 Commissioning 8.1 Introduction The following guidelines describe the steps that you should note when commissioning the Motion Control-specific components of your equipment. The commissioning of other components of your automation system depends on the particular equipment configuration. Commissioning (not Motion Control) is described in the Automation System S7-1500 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) system manual. 8.2 Commissioning guidelines These guidelines serve as recommendations for commissioning equipment with Motion Control. The procedure is described using the example of a positioning axis technology object. Requirement The configuration of the following components is complete: - CPU - BUS communication - Drives - Technology objects The user program has been created. The wiring of the CPU and of the associated I/O is complete. The commissioning and optimization of the drive is complete. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 316 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.2 Commissioning guidelines Procedure Proceed as follows to commission the Motion Control-specific components of your equipment: Step Action to be performed Supported by TIA Portal Turn on CPU Turn on the power supply and the CPU. - "Disable" position controller Set the gain (Kv factor) of the position control loop to zero. "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Control loop" Activate precontrol Set the precontrol to 100 %. "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Control loop" Load project into the CPU Bring the CPU to the STOP mode. * Download your project to the CPU (load hardware and software). "Toolbar > Stop CPU" * "Toolbar > Download to device" Create online connection to the CPU Select the "Receive messages" check box under "Online & Diagnostics > Online Access". * Device configuration * "Online & Diagnostics > Online Access" * PLC programming * Motion Control instructions (This setting avoids unwanted drive movements that may be caused by incorrect parameterization of the position control loop.) Configure the interface of the TIA Portal, and create an online connection with the CPU. Disable Motion Control specific user program In order to avoid conflicts with the axis control panel, lock the enabling of technology objects in your user program (MC_Power.Enable = FALSE). Evaluating pending messages Evaluate the message display in the inspector window. Resolve the causes of pending technology alarms. Acknowledge the technology alarms (Page 333). "Inspector window > Diagnostics > Message display" Check hardware limit switches Click the hardware limit switches. Check for correct message display (technology alarm 531). Acknowledge the technology alarm. "Inspector window > Diagnostics > Message display" Check the connection Bring the CPU into the RUN mode. and configuration of the Open the Axis control panel (Page 319) and take over control. drive (setpoint) Perform the following steps: * Enable the technology object. The drive must turn itself on, and where applicable release the brake. The position is held. * Move the axis in jog mode at low velocity in the positive direction. The drive must move. The actual position value must increase (positive direction). * Disable the technology object. The drive must turn itself off, and where applicable apply the brake. "Technology object > Commissioning > Axis control panel" S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 317 Commissioning 8.2 Commissioning guidelines Step Action to be performed Supported by TIA Portal Check the connection Check the scaling of the actual values (rotation direction, disand configuration of the tance evaluation, and resolution of the encoder) encoder (actual value) The change in the actual mechanical position must match the change in the actual values. Checking the reference Traverse the axis in jog mode at low velocity in the positive speed direction. The displayed current velocity must match the velocity setpoint. If the displayed current velocity deviates significantly from the velocity setpoint, adjust the reference speed. Optimize position controller Use the Optimization (Page 325) commissioning function to optimize the gain (Kv) of the position control loop. * "Technology object > Diagnostics > PROFIdrive frame" * "Technology object > Commissioning > Axis control panel" * "Technology object > Hardware interface > Data exchange" * "Technology object > Commissioning > Axis control panel" "Technology object > Commissioning > Optimization" For this purpose, adapt following error limits as needed. Transfer the gain Kv to the project. Enter the gain Kv that you determined by means of the optimization function in your configuration data. Load your project into the CPU. "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Control loop" Enable Motion Control specific user program Unlock the enabling technology objects lock in your user program (MC_Power.Enable = TRUE). * PLC programming * Motion Control instructions Check the functioning of the user program Check the programmed functions of your user program. * Watch and force tables * Online and diagnostic functions End of commissioning for a positioning axis technology object To commission additional technology objects, perform the corresponding steps again. See above. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 318 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.3 Axis control panel 8.3 Axis control panel 8.3.1 Function and structure of the axis control panel You traverse individual axes with the axis control panel. A user program is not necessary for the operation of the axis control panel. With the axis control panel, you assume master control for a technology object and control the motions of the axis. WARNING Uncontrolled axis motions During operation with the axis control panel, the axis can execute uncontrolled motions (e.g. due to erroneous configuration of the drive or the technology object). Furthermore, any synchronized following axis is moved as well when moving a leading axis with the axis control panel. Therefore, perform the following protective measures before operation with the axis control panel: * Ensure that the EMERGENCY OFF switch is within the reach of the operator. * * * * Enable the hardware limit switches. Enable the software limit switches. Ensure that following error monitoring is enabled. Make sure that no following axis is coupled to the axis to be moved. The axis control panel of the speed axis, positioning axis and synchronous axis can be found in the project tree under "Technology object > Commissioning". The axis control panel is divided into the following areas: Master control Axis Operating mode Modify Axis status Actual values S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 319 Commissioning 8.3 Axis control panel Elements of the axis control panel The following table lists the elements of the axis control panel: Area Master control Element Description In the "Master control" area, you assume master control of the technology object or return it to your user program. "Activate" button With the "Activate" button, you set up an online connection to the CPU and take over master control for the selected technology object. * To take over master control, the technology object must be disabled in the user program. * Any synchronized following axis is moved as well when moving a leading axis with the axis control panel. * If the online connection to the CPU is lost during operation with the axis control panel, then after the sign of life monitoring has elapsed, the axis will be stopped with maximum deceleration. In this case, an error message is displayed ("ErrorID" = 16#8013) and the master control is passed back to the user program. * If the axis control panel is covered by a dialog, such as "Save as", during its operation with the axis control panel, the axis is stopped with maximum deceleration and the master control is returned to the user program. If the "Stop" button is covered during operation with the axis control panel, for example by scrolling or by another window, the master control is retained but the axis is stopped with maximum deceleration. If you change to another window within the TIA Portal, to the project tree for example, during operation with the axis control panel, the master control and motion of the axis is maintained, provided that the axis control panel is embedded in the TIA Portal. If the axis control panel is replaced by the TIA Portal and you change to another window within the TIA Portal, to the project tree for example, the master control is retained but the axis is stopped with maximum deceleration. If you change to another window outside the TIA Portal during operation with the axis control panel, the master control is retained but the axis is stopped with maximum deceleration. * When you click the "Activate" button, a warning message is displayed. In the warning, you can adapt the sign-of-life monitoring (100 to 60000 ms). If the master control of the axis control panel is lost repeatedly without a direct error message, the online connection to the CPU may be impaired because the communication load is too high. In this case, the message "Error during commissioning" is entered in the message display log. Sign-of-life failure between controller and TIA Portal" is displayed. To eliminate this error, adapt the sign-of-life monitoring in the warning. * Until master control is returned, the user program has no influence on the functions of the technology object. Motion Control jobs from the user program to the technology object are rejected with error ("ErrorID" = 16#8012: Axis control panel enabled). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 320 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.3 Axis control panel Area Element Description When master control is taken over, the configuration of the technology object is adopted. Changes to the configuration of the technology object do not take effect until leading control has been returned. Therefore, make any necessary changes before master control is assumed again. If master control has been taken over for the technology object, the axis control panel is blocked for access by another instance of the TIA Portal (Team Engineering as of CPU V1.5). * "Deactivate" button Axis With the "Deactivate" button, you return master control to your user program. In the "Axis" area, you can enable or disable the technology object. "Enable" button With the "Enable" button, you enable the selected technology object "Disable" button With the "Disable" button, you disable the selected technology object Operating mode Select the required mode in the "Operating mode" drop-down list. Modify The "Control" area displays the parameters for traversing with the axis control panel according to the selected operating mode. Position Position to which the axis is homed. Distance Distance the axis is traversed. Target position Position to which the axis is traversed. ("Homing" and "Set home position" modes only) ("Relative positioning" mode only) ("Absolute positioning" mode only) Velocity/ Velocity or speed at which the axis is traversed. Velocity setpoint Default: 10% of the default value (Velocity/speed setpoint, "Jog" and "Positioning" modes only) Acceleration Acceleration with which the axis is traversed. Deceleration Deceleration with which the axis is traversed. Default: 10% of the default value Default: 10% of the default value Jerk Jerk with which the axis is traversed. Default: 100% of default value "Start" button With the "Start" button, you start a job according to the selected operating mode. "Forward" button With the "Forward" button, you start a motion in the positive direction according to the selected operating mode. "Backward" button "Stop" button With the "Backward" button, you start a motion in the negative direction according to the selected operating mode. With the "Stop" button, you cancel a job or stop the axis. If the "Stop" button is covered during operation with the axis control panel, for example by scrolling or by another window, the master control is retained but the axis is stopped with maximum deceleration. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 321 Commissioning 8.3 Axis control panel Area Element Axis status Description The "Axis status" area displays the status of the axis and the status of the drive. Drive ready Drive is ready to execute setpoints. Error An error occurred at the technology object. Enabled The technology object has been enabled. The axis can be moved with motion jobs. Homed The technology object is homed. More The "More" link takes you to the window "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits". Active errors The error that occurred most recently is displayed in the "Active errors" text field. "Confirm" button With the "Confirm" button, you acknowledge pending errors. Alarm display Actual values You can access the alarm display in the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. The "Current values" area shows the actual values of the axis. Position Actual position of the axis Velocity Actual velocity of the axis Note No transfer of the parameters The configured parameter values are discarded when master control is returned. Transfer the values as needed into your configuration. If you have changed configuration values during operation with the axis control panel, these changes have no effect on the operation of the axis control panel. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 322 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.3 Axis control panel Operating mode The following table shows the operating modes of the axis control panel: Operating mode Description Homing This function corresponds to active homing. The parameters for homing (Page 69) must be configured. Homing is not possible with an absolute encoder. The technology object is not referenced when this mode is used with an absolute encoder. Set home position This function corresponds to direct homing (absolute). With the "Start" button, you set the actual position to the value specified in "Position" and the "Homed" status is set. Jog Motion commands occur by means of jogging. With the "Forward" or "Backward" button you start motion in the positive or negative direction. The motion runs for as long as you hold down the left mouse button. Velocity specification/speed setpoint The axis is moved at the specified velocity or speed until you stop the movement. Positioning relative The positioning is executed as a controlled, relative traversing motion according to the defaults assigned under "Controller". Positioning absolute The positioning is executed as a controlled, absolute traversing motion according to the defaults assigned under "Controller". The motion commands are performed according to the setpoints assigned under "Controller". If you have enabled the "Modulo" setting of the technology object, the buttons "Forward" and "Backward" are shown in the "Controller" area. The axis is positioned within the modulo range. Position settings outside the modular range are recalculated to the modulo range. If you have not enabled the "Modulo" setting of the technology object, only the "Start" button is shown in the "Controller" area. You can directly approach the entered position. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 323 Commissioning 8.3 Axis control panel 8.3.2 Using the axis control panel You traverse individual axes with the axis control panel. You assume master control of a technology object and control the motions of the axis. Requirement The project has been created and downloaded to the CPU. The CPU must be in the RUN mode. The technology object is disabled by your user program ("MC_Power.Enable" = FALSE). The axis control panel for the technology object is not used by another instance of the TIA Portal (Team Engineering as of CPU V1.5). Procedure Proceed as follows to enable control the axis using the axis control panel: 1. To assume master control of the technology object and to set up an online connection to the CPU, click "Activate" in the "Master control" area. A warning message is displayed. 2. If necessary, adapt the sign-of-life monitoring and click "OK". 3. To enable the technology object, click the "Enable" button in the "Axis" area. 4. In the drop-down list in the "Operation mode" area, select the desired function of the axis control panel. 5. In the "Control" area, specify the parameter values for your job. 6. Depending on the mode selected, click the "Start", "Forward" or "Backward" button to start the job. 7. Click the "Stop" button to stop the job. 8. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for additional jobs. 9. To disable the technology object, click the "Disable" button in the "Axis" area. 10.To return master control to your user program, click the "Deactivate" button in the "Master control" area. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 324 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.4 Optimization 8.4 Optimization 8.4.1 Function and structure of the optimization Description The "Optimization" function supports you in determining the optimal precontrol and gain (Kv factor) for the closed loop position control of the axis. The axis velocity profile is recorded by means of the Trace function for this purpose for the duration of a configurable positioning movement. You can then evaluate the recording, and adjust the precontrol and gain accordingly. WARNING Uncontrolled axis motions During operation with the optimization, the axis can execute uncontrolled motions (for example, due to erroneous configuration of the drive or the technology object). In addition, when a leading axis is moved, any synchronized following axis is also moved. Therefore, perform the following protective measures before operation with the optimization: * Ensure that the EMERGENCY OFF switch is within the reach of the operator. * * * * Enable the hardware limit switches. Enable the software limit switches. Ensure that following error monitoring is enabled. Make sure that no following axis is coupled to the axis to be moved. The "Optimization" function for the positioning axis and synchronous axis technology objects can be found in the project tree under "Technology object > Commissioning". The "Tuning" dialog is divided into the following areas: Master control Axis Measurement configuration Optimize position controller Run measurement Trace S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 325 Commissioning 8.4 Optimization The following table lists the elements of optimization: Area Element Master control Description In the "Master control" area, you take over master control of the technology object, or return it to your user program. "Activate" button With the "Activate" button, you set up an online connection to the CPU and take over master control for the selected technology object. * To take over master control, the technology object must be disabled in the user program. * Any synchronized following axis is moved as well when moving a leading axis with the axis control panel. * If the online connection to the CPU is lost during operation with the axis control panel, then after the sign of life monitoring has elapsed, the axis will be stopped with maximum deceleration. In this case, an error message is displayed ("ErrorID" = 16#8013) and the master control is passed back to the user program. * When you click the "Activate" button, a warning message is displayed. You can adapt the sign-of-life monitoring here (100 to 60000 ms). If the master control of the axis control panel is lost repeatedly without a direct error message, the online connection to the CPU may be impaired because the communication load is too high. In this case, the message "Error during commissioning" is entered in the message display log. Sign-of-life failure between controller and TIA Portal" is displayed. To eliminate this error, adapt the sign-of-life monitoring in the warning. "Deactivate" button Axis * Until master control is returned, the user program has no influence on the functions of the technology object. Motion Control jobs from the user program to the technology object are rejected with error ("ErrorID" = 16#8012: Axis control panel enabled). * When master control is taken over, the configuration of the technology object is adopted. Changes to the configuration of the technology object do not take effect until master control has been returned. For this reason, make any necessary changes before master control is taken over. * If master control has been taken over for the technology object, the axis control panel is blocked for access by another installation of the TIA Portal (Team Engineering as of CPU V1.5). With the "Deactivate" button, you return master control to your user program. In the "Axis" area, enable or disable the technology object. "Enable" button With the "Enable" button, you enable the selected technology object "Disable" button With the "Disable" button, you disable the selected technology object S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 326 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.4 Optimization Area Measurement configuration Element Description In the "Measurement configuration" area, you configure the settings for a test step. Distance Travel distance for a test step Measurement duration Time for a test step "Customize The "Dynamics adapt" check box allows you to adapt the acceleration, deceleration dynamics" check and maximum velocity. box As long as the "Commissioning" working area is open, the previously set values are displayed when the check box is selected again. Acceleration Presetting of the acceleration for a test step Deceleration Default setting for delaying a test step Maximum velocity Presetting of the maximum velocity for a test step Optimize position controller In the "Optimize position controller" area, you make the settings for optimization of the controller characteristics. You open a list of values using the symbol next to the field. The list of values contains the following values of the respective parameter: * Online actual value * Online start value * Project start value Enter the new value in the text field for the actual value. The new value is applied by clicking the "Forward" or "Backward" button in the "Run measurement" area. Precontrol Current percentage velocity precontrol of the position controller Speed control loop substitute time Current speed control loop substitute time Gain Run measurement With velocity precontrol, a simplified speed control loop model can be generated using the speed control loop substitute time. This prevents overmodulation by the position controller of the manipulated variable for velocity during the acceleration and deceleration phases. To accomplish this, the position setpoint of the position controller is delayed by the amount of the speed control loop substitute time in relation to the velocity precontrol. Current gain of the position controller (Kv) In the "Run measurement" area, you perform the test steps. "Forward" button With the "Forward" button, you start a test step for optimization in the positive direction. "Backward" button With the "Backward" button, you start a test step for optimization in the negative direction. "Stop" button You stop a test step with the "Stop" button. The axis decelerates with the configured maximum deceleration. If another window is superimposed on the "Stop" button, the axis stops. Trace The Trace function is displayed in the lower area of the "Tuning" dialog. With each test step, a Trace recording of the required parameters is automatically started and displayed after completion of the test step. After master control has been returned, the Trace recording is deleted. You can find a full description of the trace function in the section on using the trace and logic analyzer function. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 327 Commissioning 8.4 Optimization Note No automatic transfer of the parameters to the technology object The configured parameter values are discarded after master control is returned. Transfer the values as needed into your configuration. You can apply the values for the gain, precontrol and speed control loop substitute time in your configuration using the "Project start value" value. See also Closed-loop control (Page 92) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 328 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.4 Optimization 8.4.2 Optimize position controller Requirements The CPU must be in the RUN mode. The project has been created and downloaded to the CPU. The technology object is disabled by your user program (MC_Power.Enable = FALSE). The axis control panel for the technology object is not used by another installation of the TIA Portal (Team Engineering as of CPU V1.5). Optimizing position control gain (Kv) Proceed as follows to optimize the gain (Kv): 1. In the "Master control" area, click the "Activate" button to activate master control for the technology object, and to establish an online connection to the CPU. A warning message is displayed. 2. If necessary, adapt the sign-of-life monitoring and confirm with "OK". 3. In the "Axis" area, click the "Enable" button to enable the technology object. 4. If necessary, configure values for the distance, duration, and dynamics of a test step in the "Measurement configuration" area. 5. If necessary, configure values for the precontrol and speed control loop substitute time of a test step in the "Configure position controller" area. 6. Enter a start value for the gain. Start with a low value. 7. Click the "Forward" or "Start" button to start a test step for the optimization. For the specified duration, a setpoint is output according to the specified distance. The axis moves by the specified distance. A trace recording of the motion (setpoint and actual values) is created automatically. You can find a full description of the trace function in the section on using the trace and logic analyzer function. Note Adapt following error limits If error messages from following error monitoring are repeatedly displayed during optimization, temporarily adapt the following error limits. 8. Evaluate the curve of the trace recording. Adapt the gain incrementally. Click the "Forward" or "Backward" button after each value you enter. This applies the value and start a new movement and trace recording each time. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 329 Commissioning 8.4 Optimization When adjusting the gain, pay attention to the following properties of the curve: The curve shows a brief compensation time. The curve does not show any motion reversal of the actual position. When approaching the position setpoint, no overshoot occurs. The curve shows a stable overall behavior (oscillation-free curve). The following trace recording shows a curve with a long settling time: The following trace recording shows a curve with overshoot when approaching the setpoint: S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 330 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Commissioning 8.4 Optimization The following trace recording shows a curve in which the gain is optimal and the overall response is steady: Transferring the parameter values of the position controller to the project To transfer the determined parameter values of the position controller to your project, follow these steps: 1. Click the icon next to the field of the respective parameter. A list of values is displayed. 2. Enter the measured value in the "Project start value" field of the value list. 3. In the "Axis" area, click the "Disable" button to disable the technology object. 4. In the "Master control" area, click the "Deactivate" button to return master control to your user program. 5. Load your project into the CPU. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 331 Diagnostics 9.1 9 Introduction The Diagnostics section is limited to describing the diagnostic concept for Motion Control and describing the Diagnostics view of the individual technology objects in the TIA Portal. For more information about system diagnostics with the S7-1500 CPU, refer to the "Diagnostics" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual. 9.2 Diagnostic concept The diagnostic concept encompasses alarms and associated messages, as well as error messages in the Motion Control instructions. The TIA Portal also supports you with consistency checks during configuration of the technology objects, and during the creation of your user program. All alarms in runtime (from the CPU, technology, hardware etc.) are displayed in the Inspector window of the TIA Portal. Diagnostic information that relates to technology objects (technology alarms, status information) are additionally displayed in the Diagnostics window of the respective technology object. During motion control, if an error occurs at a technology object (e.g. approaching a hardware limit switch), then a technology alarm (Page 333) is triggered, and a corresponding message is displayed in the TIA Portal as well as on HMI devices. In your user program, technology alarms are generally signaled via error bits in the technology data block. The number of the technology alarm with the highest priority is also displayed. In order to simplify error evaluation, the "Error" and "ErrorID" parameters of the Motion Control instructions also indicate that a technology alarm is pending. Program errors (Page 337) can occur during parameter assignment or during the processing sequence of the Motion Control instructions (e.g. invalid parameter specification when calling the instruction, initiation of a job without enable via MC_Power). Motion Control instruction errors are indicated at the call of instructions using the "Error" and "ErrorID" parameters. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 332 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.3 Technology alarms 9.3 Technology alarms Description If an error occurs at a technology object (e.g. approaching a hardware limit switch), a technology alarm is triggered and indicated. The impact of a technology alarm on the technology object is specified by the alarm reaction. Alarm classes Technology alarms are divided into three classes: Acknowledgeable warning The processing of Motion Control job is continued. The current motion of the axis can be influenced, e.g. by limiting the current dynamic values to the configured limit values. Alarm requiring acknowledgment Motion jobs are aborted in accordance with the alarm reaction. You must acknowledge the alarms in order to continue execution of new jobs after eliminating the cause of the error. Fatal error Motion jobs are aborted in accordance with the alarm reaction. To be able to use the technology object again after eliminating the cause of the error, you must restart the technology object (Page 314). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 333 Diagnostics 9.3 Technology alarms Display of technology alarms A technology alarm is displayed in the following locations: TIA Portal - "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" Display of pending technology alarms for each technology object. - "Technology object > Commissioning > Axis control panel" Display of the last pending technology alarm for each technology object. - "Inspector window > Diagnostics > Message display" Select the "Receive messages" check box under "Online & Diagnostics > Online Access" in order to display technology alarms via the message display. With an online connection to the CPU, the pending technology alarms for all technology objects are displayed. Additionally, the archive view is available to you. The message display can also be activated and displayed on a connected HMI. - "CPU > Online & diagnostics" Display of the technology alarms that have been entered in the diagnostic buffer. User program - Tags .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction Indication of the number and the reaction of the technology alarm with the highest priority. - Tag .StatusWord A pending technology alarm is indicated with bit 1 ("Error"). - Tag .ErrorWord Indication of alarms and fatal errors. - Tag .WarningWord Indication of warnings. - Parameter "Error" and "ErrorID" In a Motion Control instruction, the parameters "Error" = TRUE and "ErrorID" = 16#8001 indicate that a technology alarm is pending. Display of the CPU In order to show technology alarms on the CPU display, make the following setting when loading to the CPU: In the "Load preview" dialog, select the action "Consistent download" for the "Text libraries" entry. Alarm reaction A technology alarm always contains an alarm reaction, which describes the impact on the technology object. The alarm reaction is specified by the system. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 334 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.3 Technology alarms The following table shows possible alarm reactions: Alarm reaction Description Axes (speed axis, positioning axis, synchronous axis) No reaction (warnings only) .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 0 Stop with current dynamic values .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 1 Stop with maximum dynamic values .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 2 Stop with emergency stop ramp .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 3 Remove enable .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 4 Track setpoints .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 5 The processing of Motion Control job is continued. The current motion of the axis can be influenced, e.g. by limiting the current dynamic values to the configured limit values. Active motion commands are aborted. The axis is braked with the dynamic values that present in the Motion Control instruction and brought to a standstill. Active motion commands are aborted. The axis is braked with the dynamic values configured under "Technology object > Extended parameters > Dynamic limits", and brought to a standstill. The configured maximum jerk is hereby taken into account. Active motion commands are aborted. The axis is braked with the emergency stop deceleration configured under "Technology object > Extended parameters > Emergency stop ramp", without any jerk limit, and brought to a standstill. Active motion commands are aborted. The setpoint zero is output and the enable is removed. The axis is braked to a standstill according to the configuration in the drive. Active motion commands are aborted. The setpoint zero is output and the enable is removed. The actual values supplied by the drive are automatically tracked as setpoints. Other technology objects (output cam, cam track, measuring input, cam, external encoder) No reaction (warnings only) .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 0 The processing of Motion Control job is continued. The current motion of the axis can be influenced, e.g. by limiting the current dynamic values to the configured limit values. Terminate processing of the technology Processing of the technology object is terminated. All running Motion Control jobs object: are aborted. * Output cam .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 6 * Cam track .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 7 * Measuring input .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 8 * Cam * External encoder .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 9 .ErrorDetail.Reaction = 10 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 335 Diagnostics 9.3 Technology alarms Acknowledging technology alarms You can acknowledge technology alarms as follows: TIA Portal - "Technology object > Commissioning > Axis control panel" Click "Confirm" to acknowledge all alarms and warnings pending for the selected technology object. - "Inspector window > Diagnostics > Message display" You can acknowledge the alarms and warnings for all technology objects either individually, or all at once. HMI At an HMI with enabled message display, you can acknowledge the alarms and warnings for all technology objects either individually, or all at once. User program Acknowledge pending technology alarms for a technology object with the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset". Additional information You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 336 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.4 Errors in Motion Control instructions 9.4 Errors in Motion Control instructions Description Errors in Motion Control instructions (e.g. invalid parameter value setting) are indicated by the "Error" and "ErrorID" output parameters. Under the following conditions, "Error" = TRUE and "ErrorID" = 16#8xxx are indicated for the Motion Control instruction: Illegal status of the technology object, which prevents the execution of the job. Invalid parameter assignment of the Motion Control instruction, which prevents the execution of the job. As a result of the alarm reaction for a technology object error. Error display If there is a Motion Control instruction error, the "Error" parameter shows the value TRUE. The cause of the error is given in the "ErrorID" parameter. Jobs to the technology object are rejected when "Error" = TRUE. Running jobs are not influenced by rejected jobs. If "Error" = TRUE and "ErrorID" = 16#8001 is indicated during job execution, a technology alarm has occurred. In this case, evaluate the indication of the technology alarm. If "Error" = TRUE is displayed during execution of a "MC_MoveJog" job, the axis is braked and brought to a standstill. In this case, the deceleration configured for the "MC_MoveJog" instruction takes effect. Acknowledge error Acknowledging errors in Motion Control instructions is not required. Restart a job after resolving the error. Additional information You can find a list of the ErrorIDs in the Error detection (Page 542) appendix. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 337 Diagnostics 9.5 Speed-controlled axis technology object 9.5 Speed-controlled axis technology object 9.5.1 Status and error bits Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. The associated technology object tag is given in parentheses. Axis status The following table shows the possible axis status values: Status Description Simulation active The axis is simulated in the CPU. Setpoints are not output to the drive. Enabled The technology object has been enabled. The axis can be moved with motion jobs. (.StatusWord.X0 (Enable)) Error An error occurred at the technology object. Detailed information about the error is available in the "Error" area, and in the .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction tags of the technology object. Restart active The technology object is being reinitialized. Axis control panel enabled The axis control panel is active. The axis control panel has master control over the technology object. The axis cannot be controlled from the user program. (.StatusWord.X1 (Error)) (.StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive)) (.StatusWord.X4 (ControlPanelActive)) Drive ready Drive is ready to execute setpoints. Restart required Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. (.StatusDrive.InOperation) (.StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 338 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.5 Speed-controlled axis technology object Motion status The following table shows the possible axis motion status values: Status Description Done (no job running) No motion job is running for the technology object. (.StatusWord.X6 (Done)) Jog The axis is being moved with a job for jog mode of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog" or from the axis control panel. (.StatusWord.X9 (JogCommand)) Speed setpoint The axis is traversed with a job with speed setpoint of the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveVelocity" or using the axis control panel. (.StatusWord.X10 (VelocityCommand)) Constant speed The axis is moved with constant speed or is stationary. (.StatusWord.X12 (ConstantVelocity)) Accelerating Axis is being accelerated. (.StatusWord.X13 (Accelerating)) Decelerating The axis is being decelerated. (.StatusWord.X14 (Decelerating)) Torque limiting enabled The configured threshold for the force/torque affects the axis. (.StatusWord.X27 (InLimitation)) Warnings The following table shows the possible warnings: Warning Description Configuration One or several configuration parameters are adapted internally at a given time. (.WarningWord.X1 (ConfigWarning)) Job rejected A job cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. (.WarningWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) Dynamic limitation The dynamic values are limited to the dynamic limits. (.WarningWord.X6 (DynamicError)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 339 Diagnostics 9.5 Speed-controlled axis technology object Error The following table shows the possible errors: Error Description System A system-internal error has occurred. (.ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault)) Configuration A configuration error has occurred. One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. (.ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault)) User program An error occurred in the user program with a Motion Control instruction or its use. (.ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault)) Drive An error occurred in the drive. (.ErrorWord.X4 (DriveFault)) Data exchange Communication with a connected device is faulty. (.ErrorWord.X7 (CommunicationFault)) I/O An error occurred accessing a logical address. (.ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError)) Job rejected A job cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met (e.g. technology object not homed). (.ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) Dynamic limitation The dynamic values are limited to the dynamic limits. (.ErrorWord.X6 (DynamicError)) Alarm display For additional information and to acknowledge the error, go to the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also StatusWord tag (speed axis) (Page 439) ErrorWord tag (speed axis) (Page 441) WarningWord tag (speed axis) (Page 443) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 340 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.5 Speed-controlled axis technology object 9.5.2 Motion status Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Motion status" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the motion status of the axis. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. "Setpoints" area The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Description Speed setpoint Speed setpoint of the axis (.Velocity) Speed override Speed setpoint correction as percentage The speed setpoint specified in motion control instructions or set by the axis control panel are superimposed with an override signal and corrected as a percentage. Valid speed correction values range from 0.0 % to 200.0 %. (.Override.Velocity) "Current values" area The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Description Actual speed Actual speed of the axis (.ActualSpeed) "Dynamic limits" area This area displays the limit values for the dynamic parameters. The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Speed Description Configured maximum speed (.DynamicLimits.MaxVelocity) Acceleration Configured maximum acceleration (.DynamicLimits.MaxAcceleration) Deceleration Configured maximum deceleration (.DynamicLimits.MaxDeceleration) Jerk Configured maximum jerk (.DynamicLimits.MaxJerk) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 341 Diagnostics 9.5 Speed-controlled axis technology object 9.5.3 PROFIdrive telegram Description The "Technology object > Diagnostics > PROFIdrive telegram" diagnostics function is used in the TIA Portal to monitor the PROFIdrive telegram that the drive returns to the controller. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. "Drive" area This area displays the following parameters contained in the PROFIdrive telegram from the drive to the controller: Status words "ZSW1" and "ZSW2" The speed setpoint (NSET) that was output to the drive The actual speed that was signaled from the drive (NACT) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 342 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 9.6.1 Status and error bits Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. The associated technology object tag is given in parentheses. Axis status The following table shows the possible axis status values: Status Description Simulation active The axis is simulated in the CPU. Setpoints are not output to the drive. (.StatusWord.X25 (AxisSimulation)) Enabled The technology object has been enabled. You can move the axis with motion jobs. (.StatusWord.X0 (Enable)) Position-controlled mode The axis is in position-controlled mode. (Inversion of .StatusWord.X28 (NonPositionControlled)) Homed The technology object is homed. The relationship between the position in the technology object and the mechanical position was successfully created. (.StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone)) Error An error occurred at the technology object. Detailed information about the error is available in the "Error" area, and in the .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction tags of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X1 (Error)) Restart active The technology object is being reinitialized. (.StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive)) Axis control panel enabled The axis control panel is active. The axis control panel has master control over the technology object. You cannot control the axis from the user program. (.StatusWord.X4 (ControlPanelActive)) Drive ready Drive is ready to execute setpoints. (.StatusDrive.InOperation) Encoder values valid The actual encoder values are valid. (.StatusSensor[n].State) Active encoder Current encoder on the axis (.OperativeSensor) Restart required Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 343 Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Status limit switch The following table shows the possibilities for enabling the software and hardware limit switches: Status Description Negative SW limit switch approached. The negative software limit switch was reached. Positive SW limit switch approached. The positive software limit switch was reached. Negative HW limit switch approached. The negative hardware limit switch has been approached or overtraveled. Positive HW limit switch approached. The positive hardware limit switch has been approached or overtraveled. (.StatusWord.X15 (SWLimitMinActive)) (.StatusWord.X16 (SWLimitMaxActive)) (.StatusWord.X17 (HWLimitMinActive)) (.StatusWord.X18 (HWLimitMaxActive)) Motion status The following table shows the possible axis motion status values: Status Done (no job running) Description No job active at technology object. (.StatusWord.X6 (Done)) Homing job The technology object executes a homing job of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home" or from the axis control panel. Jog The axis is being moved with a command for jog mode of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog". Velocity specification The axis is traversed with a job with velocity specification of the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveVelocity" or from the axis control panel. (.StatusWord.X11 (HomingCommand)) (.StatusWord.X9 (JogCommand)) (.StatusWord.X10 (VelocityCommand)) Positioning job The axis is traversed with a positioning job of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveAbsolute" or "MC_MoveRelative" or from the axis control panel. (.StatusWord.X8 (PositioningCommand)) Constant velocity The axis is moved with constant velocity or is stationary. Standstill The axis is in standstill. Accelerating Axis is being accelerated. Decelerating The axis is being decelerated. (.StatusWord.X12 (ConstantVelocity)) (.StatusWord.X7 (StandStill)) (.StatusWord.X13 (Accelerating)) (.StatusWord.X14 (Decelerating)) Torque limiting enabled The configured threshold for the force/torque affects the axis. (.StatusWord.X27 (InLimitation)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 344 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Status Description Synchronization Synchronous axis only The axis is synchronized to the leading value of a leading axis. (.StatusWord.X21 (Synchronizing)) Synchronous operation Synchronous axis only The axis is synchronized and moves synchronously to the leading axis. (.StatusWord.X22 (Synchronous)) Warnings The following table shows the possible warnings: Warning Configuration Description One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally at a certain time. (.WarningWord.X1 (ConfigWarning)) Job rejected Job cannot be executed. You cannot execute a Motion Control instruction because necessary requirements are not fulfilled. (.WarningWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) Dynamic limitation The dynamic values are limited to the dynamic limits. (.WarningWord.X6 (DynamicError)) Synchronization Synchronous axis only An error occurred during synchronization. The leading axis specified for the corresponding Motion Control instruction was not configured as a possible leading axis. (.WarningWord.X14 (SynchronousError)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 345 Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Error The following table shows the possible errors: Error Description System A system-internal error has occurred. (.ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault)) Configuration A configuration error has occurred. One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. (.ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault)) User program An error occurred in the user program with a Motion Control instruction or its use. (.ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault)) Drive An error occurred in the drive. (.ErrorWord.X4 (DriveFault)) Encoder An error occurred in the encoder system. (.ErrorWord.X5 (SensorFault)) Data exchange Communication with a connected device is faulty. (.ErrorWord.X7 (CommunicationFault)) I/O An error occurred accessing a logical address. (.ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError)) Job rejected A job cannot be executed. You cannot execute a Motion Control instruction because necessary requirements are not fulfilled (for example, technology object not homed). (.ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) Homing An error occurred during a homing process. (.ErrorWord.X10 HomingFault)) Positioning The positioning axis was not positioned correctly at the end of a positioning motion. (.ErrorWord.X12 (PositioningFault)) Dynamic limitation The dynamic values are limited to the dynamic limits. (.ErrorWord.X6 (DynamicError)) Following error The maximum permitted following error has been exceeded. (.ErrorWord.X11 (FollowingErrorFault)) SW limit switch A software limit switch has been reached. (.ErrorWord.X8 (SwLimit)) HW limit switch A hardware limit switch has been reached or overtraveled. (.ErrorWord.X9 (HWLimit)) Adaptation An error occurred during data adaption. Synchronization Synchronous axis only (.ErrorWord.X15 (AdaptionError)) An error occurred during synchronization. The leading axis specified for the corresponding Motion Control instruction was not configured as a possible leading axis. (.ErrorWord.X14 (SynchronousError)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 346 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Alarm display For additional information and to acknowledge the error, go to the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also StatusWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) (Page 472) ErrorWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) (Page 475) WarningWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) (Page 477) Additional displays for the technology CPU (Page 350) 9.6.2 Motion status Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Motion status" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the motion status of the axis. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. "Setpoints" area The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Description Target position Current target position of an active positioning job The target position value is only valid during execution of a positioning job. (.StatusPositioning.TargetPosition) Position setpoint Setpoint position of the axis (.Position) Velocity setpoint Velocity setpoint of the axis (.Velocity) Velocity override Percentage correction of the velocity specification The velocity setpoint specified in Motion Control instructions or set by the axis control panel is superimposed with an override signal and corrected as a percentage. Valid velocity correction values range from 0.0 % to 200.0 %. (.Override.Velocity) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 347 Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object "Current values" area The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Description Operative encoder Operative encoder of the axis Actual position Actual position of the axis If the technology object is not homed, then the value is displayed relative to the position that existed when the technology object was enabled. (.ActualPosition) Actual velocity Actual velocity of the axis (.ActualVelocity) Following error Following error of the axis (.StatusPositioning.FollowingError) "Dynamic limits" area This area displays the limit values for the dynamic parameters. The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Description Velocity Configured maximum velocity (.DynamicLimits.MaxVelocity) Acceleration Configured maximum acceleration (.DynamicLimits.MaxAcceleration) Deceleration Configured maximum deceleration (.DynamicLimits.MaxDeceleration) Jerk Configured maximum jerk (.DynamicLimits.Jerk) See also Additional displays for the technology CPU (Page 350) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 348 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 9.6.3 PROFIdrive telegram Description The "Technology object > Diagnostics > PROFIdrive telegram" diagnostics function is used in the TIA Portal to monitor the PROFIdrive telegrams returned by the drive and encoder. The display of the Diagnostics function is available in online operation. "Drive" area This area displays the following parameters contained in the PROFIdrive telegram from the drive to the controller: Status words "ZSW1" and "ZSW2" The speed setpoint (NSET) that was output to the drive The actual speed that was signaled from the drive (NACT) "Encoder" area This area displays the following parameters contained in the PROFIdrive telegram from the encoder to the controller: Status word "Gx_ZSW" The actual position value "Gx_XIST1" (cyclic actual encoder value) The actual position value "Gx_XIST2" (absolute encoder value) See also Additional displays for the technology CPU (Page 350) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 349 Diagnostics 9.6 Positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object 9.6.4 Additional displays for the technology CPU The diagnostic functions contain expanded/additional displays for the S7-1500T technology CPU. Status and error bits The following table shows the expanded/additional displays of the status and error bits (Page 343): Axis status Encoder values valid The actual encoder values (encoder 1, encoder 2, encoder 3 or encoder 4) are valid. (.StatusSensor[n].State) Active encoder The encoder in effect operationally is encoder 1, encoder 2, encoder 3 or encoder 4. (.OperativeSensor) Motion status The following table shows the expanded/additional displays for the status of the motion (Page 347): Current values Description Operative encoder Operative encoder of the axis PROFIdrive telegram The "Encoder 1" to "Encoder 4" areas display the following parameters from the PROFIdrive telegram (Page 349) of the corresponding encoder to the controller: Status word "Gx_ZSW" The actual position value "Gx_XIST1" (cyclic actual encoder value) The actual position value "Gx_XIST2" (absolute encoder value) See also Status and error bits (Page 343) Motion status (Page 347) PROFIdrive telegram (Page 349) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 350 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.7 Technology object external encoder 9.7 Technology object external encoder 9.7.1 Status and error bits Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. The associated technology object tag is given in parentheses. Encoder status The following table shows the possible external encoder status values: Status Description Encoder enabled The technology object has been enabled. (.StatusWord.X0 (Enable)) Homed The technology object is homed. The relationship between the position in the technology object and the mechanical position was successfully created. (.StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone)) Error An error occurred at the technology object. Detailed information about the error is available in the "Error" area, and in the .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction tags of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X1 (Error)) Restart active The technology object is being reinitialized. (.StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive)) Encoder values valid The actual encoder values are valid. (.StatusSensor[n].State) Restart required Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged)) Motion status The following table shows the possible states of the job execution: Status Description Done (no job running) No Motion Control job is running for the technology object. (Enable by "MC_Power" job excepted) (.StatusWord.X6 (Done)) Homing job The technology object executes a homing job of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". (.StatusWord.X11 (HomingCommand)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 351 Diagnostics 9.7 Technology object external encoder Error The following table shows the possible errors: Error Description System A system-internal error has occurred. (.ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault)) Configuration A configuration error has occurred. One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. (.ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault)) User program An error occurred in the user program with a Motion Control instruction or its use. (.ErrorWord.X2 UserFault)) Encoder An error occurred in the encoder system. (.ErrorWord.X5 (SensorFault)) Data exchange Missing or faulty communication. (.ErrorWord.X7 (CommunicationFault)) Adaptation An error occurred during data adaption. (.ErrorWord.X15 (AdaptionError)) Alarm display For additional information and to acknowledge the error, go to the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also StatusWord tag (external encoder) (Page 488) ErrorWord tag (external encoder) (Page 489) WarningWord tag (external encoder) (Page 491) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 352 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.7 Technology object external encoder 9.7.2 Motion status Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Motion status" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the actual encoder values. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. "Current values" area The following table shows the meaning of the status data: Status Description Actual position Actual position of the axis If the technology object is not homed, then the value is displayed relative to the position that existed when the technology object was enabled. (.ActualPosition) Actual velocity Actual velocity of the axis (.ActualVelocity) 9.7.3 PROFIdrive frame Description The "Technology object > Diagnostics > PROFIdrive interface" diagnostic function is used in the TIA Portal to monitor the PROFIdrive frame of the encoder. The display of the diagnostics function is available in the online mode TO. "Encoder" area This area displays the following parameters contained in the PROFIdrive frame that the encoder returns to the controller: Status word "G1_ZSW" The actual position value "G1_XIST1" (cyclic actual encoder value) The actual position value "G1_XIST2" (absolute value of the encoder) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 353 Diagnostics 9.8 Technology object measuring input 9.8 Technology object measuring input 9.8.1 Status and error bits Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. The associated technology object tag is given in parentheses. Measuring input status The following table shows the possible states of the measuring input: Status Description Active The technology object is in operation. (.StatusWord.X0 (Control)) Waiting for measuring event The measuring input is waiting for a measuring event. The technology data block tag ".Status" has the value "1" ("WAITING_FOR_TRIGGER"). Measured value present The measuring input has acquired one or more measured values. The technology data block tag ".Status" has the value "2" ("TRIGGER_OCCURRED"). Error An error occurred at the technology object. Detailed information about the error is available in the "Error" area, and in the .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction tags of the technology object. Restart active The technology object is being reinitialized. The tags of the technology data block are not updated with active restart. Measuring input ready The measuring input is synchronized with the measuring module and can be used. Restart required Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X1 (Error)) (.StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive)) (.StatusWord.X5 (CommunicationOK)) (.StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 354 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.8 Technology object measuring input Error The following table shows the possible errors: Error Description System A system-internal error has occurred. (.ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault)) Configuration A configuration error has occurred. One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. (.ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault)) User program An error occurred in the user program with a Motion Control instruction or its use. (.ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault)) Job rejected A job cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because the necessary conditions are not met (e.g. axis assigned to the measuring input is not homed). (.ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) I/O An error occurred accessing a logical address. (.ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError)) Alarm display For additional information and to acknowledge the error, go to the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also StatusWord tag (measuring input) (Page 496) ErrorWord tag (measuring input) (Page 497) WarningWord tag (measuring input) (Page 499) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 355 Diagnostics 9.9 Technology object output cam 9.9 Technology object output cam 9.9.1 Status and error bits Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. The associated technology object tag is given in parentheses. Output cam status The following table shows the possible states of the output cam: Status Description Active The technology object is in operation. (.StatusWord.X0 (Control)) Switched The output cam is switched. (.CamOutput) Inverted output cam output The output cam output is inverted. Error An error occurred at the technology object. Detailed information about the error is available in the "Error" area, and in the .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction tags of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X4 (OutputInverted)) (.StatusWord.X1 (Error)) Restart active The technology object is being reinitialized. The tags of the technology data block are not updated with active restart. (.StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive)) Output cam output ready The cam is synchronized with the output module and available for use. (.StatusWord.X5 (CommunicationOk)) Restart required Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 356 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.9 Technology object output cam Error The following table shows the possible errors: Error Description System A system-internal error has occurred. (.ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault)) Configuration A configuration error has occurred. One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. (.ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault)) User program An error occurred in the user program with a Motion Control instruction or its use. (.ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault)) Job rejected A job cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because the necessary conditions are not met (e.g. axis assigned to the output cam is not homed). (.ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) I/O An error occurred accessing a logical address. (.ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError)) Alarm display For additional information and to acknowledge the error, go to the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also StatusWord tag (output cam) (Page 503) ErrorWord tag (output cam) (Page 504) WarningWord tag (output cam) (Page 505) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 357 Diagnostics 9.10 Cam track technology object 9.10 Cam track technology object 9.10.1 Status and error bits Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits" diagnostic function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status and error messages for the technology object. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables. The associated technology object tag is given in parentheses. Cam track status The following table shows the possible states of the cam track: Status Description Active The technology object is in operation. (.StatusWord.X0 (Control)) Switched A cam of cam track is switched. (.TrackOutput) Inverted output cam output The output cam output is inverted. Error An error occurred at the technology object. Detailed information about the error is available in the "Error" area, and in the .ErrorDetail.Number and .ErrorDetail.Reaction tags of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X4 (OutputInverted)) (.StatusWord.X1 (Error)) Restart active The technology object is being reinitialized. The tags of the technology data block are not updated with active restart. (.StatusWord.X2 (RestartActive)) Cam track output ready The cam track is synchronized with the output module and available for use. (.StatusWord.X5 (CommunicationOk)) Restart required Data relevant for the restart has been changed. The changes are applied only after a restart of the technology object. (.StatusWord.X3 (OnlineStartValuesChanged)) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 358 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Diagnostics 9.10 Cam track technology object Error The following table shows the possible errors: Error Description System A system-internal error has occurred. (.ErrorWord.X0 (SystemFault)) Configuration A configuration error has occurred. One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. The technology object was incorrectly configured, or editable configuration data were incorrectly modified during runtime of the user program. (.ErrorWord.X1 (ConfigFault)) User program An error occurred in the user program with a Motion Control instruction or its use. (.ErrorWord.X2 (UserFault)) Job rejected A job cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because the necessary conditions are not met (e.g. axis assigned to the cam track is not homed). (.ErrorWord.X3 (CommandNotAccepted)) I/O An error occurred accessing a logical address. (.ErrorWord.X13 (PeripheralError)) Alarm display For additional information and to acknowledge the error, go to the Inspector window by clicking on the "Alarm display" link. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also StatusWord tag (cam track) (Page 510) ErrorWord tag (cam track) (Page 511) WarningWord tag (cam track) (Page 512) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 359 Diagnostics 9.10 Cam track technology object 9.10.2 Cam track status Description You use the "Technology object > Diagnostics > Cam track status" diagnostics function in the TIA Portal to monitor the status of the cam track. The Diagnostics function is available in online operation. "Validity and masking of the output cams" area The individual cams of a cam track are shown in this area along with the status for the following properties: Status Description Valid Validity of the individual cams of the cam track (.Parameter.Cam[1 ... 32].Existent) Masked Bit masking of the individual cams of the cam track (.Parameter.CamMasking) Effective Switched on output cam (bit-masked) (.SingleCamState) "Positions" area The following status values are displayed in this area: Status Current position in the cam track Description Position during cam track processing within a cam track cycle The distance to the current reference position of the current cam track (.MatchPosition) is displayed. (.TrackPosition) Current cam track start Reference position of the current cam track During cyclic processing of the cam track, the continued reference position of the current cam track is displayed. The unique detection and output of the position is only possible when the assigned technology object is in motion. (.MatchPosition) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 360 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.1 MC_Power V4 10.1.1 MC_Power: Enable, disable technology object V4 10 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power", a technology object is enabled or disabled. Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis Speed axis External encoder Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. Cyclic BUS communication is established between controller and encoder (.StatusSensor[n].CommunicationOK = TRUE). Cyclic BUS communication is established between controller and drive (.StatusDrive.CommunicationOK = TRUE). Override response An "MC_Power" job cannot be aborted by any other Motion Control job. An "MC_Power" job with parameter "Enable"TRUE enables a technology object but does not thereby abort any other Motion Control instructions. Disabling the technology object (parameter "Enable" = FALSE) aborts all Motion Control jobs on the corresponding technology object in accordance with the selected "StopMode". This process cannot be canceled by the user. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 361 Instructions 10.1 MC_Power V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_Power": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_Axis - Technology object Enable INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The technology object is enabled. FALSE The technology object is disabled. All current jobs at the technology object are aborted in accordance with the configured "StopMode". StartMode INPUT DINT 1 0 Enable positioning axis/synchronous axis not positioncontrolled 1 Enable positioning axis/synchronous axis positioncontrolled The parameter initially takes effect when the positioning axis is enabled (Enable changes from FALSE to TRUE) and when the axis is enabled after acknowledgment of an interrupt that caused the axis to be disabled. This parameter is ignored when a speed axis or an external encoder is used. StopMode INPUT INT 0 Not applicable to the technology object external encoder If you disable a technology object with a negative edge at parameter "Enable", the axis decelerates in accordance with the selected "StopMode". 0 Emergency stop When the technology object is disabled, the axis brakes to a standstill without jerk limit, using the emergency stop deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Emergency stop ramp". The enable is then canceled. (.DynamicDefaults.EmergencyDeceleration) 1 Immediate stop When a technology object is disabled, the setpoint zero is output, and the enable is canceled. The axis is braked to a standstill according to the configuration in the drive. 2 Stop with maximum dynamic values When the technology object is disabled, the axis is braked to a standstill using the maximum deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic limits". The configured maximum jerk is hereby taken into account. The enable is then canceled. (.DynamicLimits.MaxDeceleration; .DynamicLimits.MaxJerk) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 362 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.1 MC_Power V4 Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Status BOOL FALSE Technology object enable status OUTPUT FALSE TRUE Disabled * A positioning axis, synchronous axis or speed axis does not accept any motion control jobs. * Speed control and positioning control are not active. * The actual values of the technology object are not checked for validity. Enabled * An enabled positioning axis, synchronous axis or speed axis accepts Motion Control jobs. * Speed control and positioning control are active. * The actual values of the technology object are valid. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred in Motion Control instruction MC_Power. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Enabling technology objects To enable a technology object, set the "Enable" parameter to TRUE. The following two cases are differentiated: Enable at a standstill Enable in motion of axis Enable at a standstill Depending on the "StartMode" parameter, the position is held (StartMode = 1) or the velocity setpoint zero is output (StartMode = 0). When the "Status" parameter shows the value TRUE, the technology object is enabled. Enable in motion of axis If StartMode = 1, the position at the time of the setting of the enable input is effective as set position for the position controller. The axis is braked to a standstill and adjusted to the set position depending on the maximum deceleration configured under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic limits". If monitoring operation or dynamic limits are hereby exceeded, this leads to corresponding alarm reactions. If StartMode = 0, the axis is braked as much as possible by the specification of the velocity setpoint zero. Monitoring operations and dynamic limits are not active in this case. When the "Status" parameter shows the value TRUE, the technology object is enabled. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 363 Instructions 10.1 MC_Power V4 Note Automatic enable after acknowledgment of a technology alarm If the technology object is disabled due to a technology alarm, the technology object will be enabled again automatically after the cause has been eliminated and the alarm has been acknowledged. This requires the "Enable" parameter to have retained the value TRUE during this process. Disabling technology objects To disable a technology object, set the "Enable" parameter to FALSE. If an axis is in motion, it is braked to a standstill according to the selected "StopMode". When the "Busy" and "Status" parameters show the value FALSE, the disabling of the technology object is complete. Drive connection by means of PROFIdrive When a drive is connected using PROFIdrive, the setpoint, enable and drive status are transmitted via the PROFIdrive telegram. Enable technology object and activate drive With parameter "Enable" = TRUE, the technology object is enabled. The drive is enabled according to the PROFIdrive standard. When the .StatusDrive.InOperation tag shows the value TRUE, the drive is ready to execute setpoints. The "Status" parameter is set to the value TRUE. Disable technology object and deactivate drive With "Enable" = FALSE parameter, the "Status" parameter is set to the value FALSE, and the axis is braked according to the selected "StopMode". The drive is disabled according to the PROFIdrive standard. Analog drive connection The setpoint is output via an analog output. Optionally, you can configure an enabling signal via digital output (.Actor.Interface.EnableDriveOutput), and a readiness signal via digital input (.Actor.Interface.DriveReadyInput). Enable technology object and activate drive With parameter "Enable" = TRUE, the enable output ("Enable drive output") is set. When the drive returns the readiness signal via the ready input ("Drive ready input"), the "Status" parameter and the technology object's .StatusDrive.InOperation tag are set to TRUE, and the setpoint is switched to the analog output. Disable technology object and deactivate drive With parameter "Enable" = FALSE, the "Status" parameter is set to the value FALSE, and the axis is braked according to the selected "StopMode". When the setpoint zero is reached, the enable output is set to FALSE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 364 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.1 MC_Power V4 Additional information Additional information on enabling and disabling technology objects and drives can be found in the appendix, MC_Power Function Charts (Page 547). See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 365 Instructions 10.1 MC_Power V4 10.1.2 MC_Power: Function chart V4 Function chart: Enabling a technology object and example of alarm response A technology object is enabled with "Enable_1= TRUE". The successful enable can be read from "Status_1" at time . The axis will then move with an "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A2). The velocity profile of the axis can be read from "TO_1.Velocity". At time an error occurs in the technology object, which results in the disabling of the technology object (alarm response: remove enable). The axis is braked to a standstill according to the configuration in the drive. When the technology object is disabled, "Status_1" is reset. Since the axis was not disabled using "Enable_1" = FALSE, the selected "StopMode" does not apply. The cause of the error is corrected and the alarm is acknowledged at time . Since "Enable_1" is still set, the technology object is enabled again. The successful enable can be read from "Status_1". Finally, the technology object is disabled with "Enable_1" = FALSE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 366 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.2 MC_Reset V4 10.2 MC_Reset V4 10.2.1 MC_Reset: Acknowledge alarms, restart technology object V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset", you acknowledge all technology alarms that can be acknowledged in the user program. Acknowledgment also resets the "Error" and "Warning" bits in the technology data block. With the Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset" with "Restart" = TRUE, you start reinitialization (restart) of technology objects. Upon restart of the technology object, the new configuration data are applied in the technology data block. Applies to All technology objects Requirement Positioning/synchronous axis, speed axis and external encoder technology objects: For a restart, the technology object must be disabled. ("MC_Power.Status" = FALSE and "MC_Power.Busy" = FALSE) Override response Parameter "Restart" = FALSE: Processing of the "MC_Reset" instruction with parameter "Restart" = FALSE cannot be aborted by any other Motion Control job. The MC_Reset job does not abort any active motion control jobs. Parameter "Restart" = TRUE: Processing of the "MC_Reset" instruction with parameter "Restart" = TRUE cannot be aborted by any other Motion Control job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 367 Instructions 10.2 MC_Reset V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_Reset": Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_Object - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Start job with a positive edge Restart INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE "Restart" Reinitialization of the technology object and acknowledgment of pending technology alarms. The technology object is reinitialized with the configured start values. FALSE Acknowledgment of queued technology alarms. Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Error has been acknowledged. Restart has been executed. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred during execution of the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Acknowledging technology alarms To acknowledge technology alarms, follow these steps: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Set the parameter "Restart" = FALSE. 3. Start the acknowledgment of the error with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". When the "Done" parameter shows the value TRUE, the error has been acknowledged. Note Acknowledge with "Restart" = FALSE If only the technology alarms are to be acknowledged, set "Restart"FALSE. The technology object cannot be used during a restart. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 368 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.3 MC_Home V4 Restarting a technology object To restart a technology object, follow these steps: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Set the parameter "Restart" = TRUE. 3. Perform the restart with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". When the "Done" parameter shows the value TRUE, the restart of the technology object is complete. Additional information regarding the restart can be found in the section "Restarting technology objects (Page 314)". See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) 10.3 MC_Home V4 10.3.1 MC_Home: Home technology object, set home position V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home", you create the relationship between the position in the technology object and the mechanical position. The actual position value in the technology object is assigned to a homing mark at the same time. This homing mark represents a known mechanical position. Homing is performed according to the mode selected with the "Mode" parameter and the configuration under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Homing". The "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for S7-1200 Motion Control and S7-1500 Motion Control has been standardized within the framework of technology version V2.0. This results in a new assignment of the parameter values for the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter. A comparison of the "MC_Home.Mode" parameter for technology versions V1.0 and V2.0 is available in section "Version overview (Page 155)". The preset values under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic default values" are used for the dynamic values Acceleration, Deceleration and Jerk. Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis External encoder S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 369 Instructions 10.3 MC_Home V4 The following table shows which modes are possible with each of the technology objects: Operating mode Positioning axis/ synchronous axis with incremental encoder Positioning axis/ synchronous axis with absolute encoder External incremental encoder External absolute encoder X - - - X - X - X X X X X X X X - X - X Active homing ("Mode" = 3, 5) Passive homing ("Mode" = 2, 8, 10) Set actual position ("Mode" = 0) Relative shift of the actual position ("Mode" = 1) Absolute encoder adjustment ("Mode" = 6, 7) Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. "Mode" = 2, 3, 5, 8, 10 The technology object is enabled. "Mode" = 0, 1, 6, 7, 8 The actual encoder values are valid (.StatusSensor[n].State = 2). "Mode" = 6, 7 The axis is in position-controlled mode. Override response The override response for "MC_Home" jobs is described in section "Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428)". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 370 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.3 MC_Home V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_Home": Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_Axis - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Start job with a positive edge Position INPUT LREAL 0.0 The specified value is used according to the selected "Mode". Mode INPUT INT 0 Operating mode 0 Direct homing (absolute) The current position of the technology object is set to the value of parameter "Position". 1 Direct homing (relative) The current position of the technology object is shifted by the value of parameter "Position". 2 Passive homing (without reset) Functions like "Mode" 8, with the difference that the "homed" status is not reset when the function is enabled. 3 Active homing The TO positioning axis/synchronous axis performs a homing movement according to the configuration. After the completion of the motion, the axis is positioned at the value of the "Position" parameter. 4 Reserved 5 Active homing ("Position" parameter has no effect) The TO positioning axis/synchronous axis performs a homing movement according to the configuration. After completion of the motion, the axis is positioned at the home position configured under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Homing > Active homing". (.Homing.HomePosition) 6 Absolute encoder adjustment (relative) The current position is shifted by the value of parameter "Position". The calculated absolute value offset is stored retentively in the CPU. (.StatusSensor[n].AbsEncoderOffset) 7 Absolute encoder adjustment (absolute) The current position is set to the value of parameter "Position". The calculated absolute value offset is stored retentively in the CPU. (.StatusSensor[n].AbsEncoderOffset) 8 Passive homing When the homing mark is detected, the actual value is set to the value of the "Position" parameter. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 371 Instructions 10.3 MC_Home V4 Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description 9 Abort passive homing An active job for passive homing is aborted. 10 Passive homing ("Position" parameter has no effect) When the homing mark is detected, the actual value is set to the home position configured under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Homing > Passive homing". (.Homing.HomePosition) ReferenceMarkPosition OUTPUT LREAL 0.0 Display of the position at which the technology object was homed (valid when "Done" = TRUE) Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is completed. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. Command Aborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred during execution of the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Resetting the "Homed" status The "Homed" status of a technology object is reset under the following conditions (.StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone)): Technology objects with incremental actual values: - Starting an "MC_Home" job with "Mode" = 3, 5, 8, 10 (After successful completion of the homing operation, the "Homed" status is reset.) - Error in the encoder system, or encoder failure - Restart of the technology object - After POWER OFF -> POWER ON of the CPU - Memory reset - Modification of the encoder configuration Technology objects with absolute actual values: - Error in sensor system/encoder failure - Replacement of the CPU - Modification of the encoder configuration - Restoration of the CPU factory settings - Transfer of a different project into the controller S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 372 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.3 MC_Home V4 Homing a technology object with "Mode" = 1..8, 10 To home a technology object, follow these steps: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Specify the desired homing function in the "Mode" parameter. 3. Initialize the necessary parameters with values, and start the homing operation with a positive edge at the "Execute" parameter. When the "Done" parameter shows the value TRUE, the "MC_Home" job has been completed according to the selected "Mode". The "Homed" status of the technology object is indicated under "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits > Motion status > Homed" (.StatusWord.X5 (HomingDone)). Abort of a passive homing with "Mode" = 9 With "Mode" = 9, the technology object is not homed. When an active "MC_Home" job for passive homing ("Mode" = 2, 8, 10) is overridden by another "MC_Home" job with "Mode" = 9, the running job is aborted with parameter "CommandAborted" = TRUE. The overriding job with "Mode" = 9 signals successful execution with parameter "Done" = TRUE. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the section "Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288)". See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Homing (Page 69) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 373 Instructions 10.4 MC_Halt V4 10.4 MC_Halt V4 10.4.1 MC_Halt: Pause axis V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_Halt", you brake an axis until it comes to a standstill. You define the dynamic behavior of the braking operation with parameters "Jerk" and "Deceleration". Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis Speed axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. Override response The override response for "MC_Halt" jobs is described in section "Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428)". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 374 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.4 MC_Halt V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_Halt": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_SpeedAxis - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration Start job with a positive edge > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. FALSE The current acceleration at the start of the job is reduced using the configured jerk. Afterwards, the deceleration builds up TRUE The acceleration is set to 0.0 at the start of the job, and the deceleration immediately builds up. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) AbortAcceleration INPUT BOOL FALSE Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Zero velocity reached Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred during execution of the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 375 Instructions 10.4 MC_Halt V4 Braking an axis with "MC_Halt" Proceed as follows to decelerate an axis to a standstill: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Supply the parameters "Deceleration", "Jerk" and "AbortAcceleration" with the desired values. 3. Start the "MC_Halt" job with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". The current motion state is indicated in "Busy", "Done" and "Error". The standstill of the axis is indicated under "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits > Motion status > Standstill" (.StatusWord.X7 (Standstill)). Braking an axis with active force/torque limit With active force/torque limiting the permitted torque may not be sufficient to move the calculated braking ramp. The "MC_Halt" command does not signal "Done" = TRUE. To brake an axis with active force/torque limiting, use the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveVelocity" with "MC_MoveVelocity.Velocity" = 0.0 and "MC_MoveVelocity.PositionControlled" = FALSE. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) MC_MoveVelocity: Move axis at velocity/speed setpoint V4 (Page 386) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 376 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.4 MC_Halt V4 10.4.2 MC_Halt: Function chart V4 Function chart: Stopping an axis and the overriding job characteristics S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 377 Instructions 10.5 MC_MoveAbsolute V4 Section An axis is moved with an "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A1). At time , the "MC_MoveVelocity" job is overridden by an "MC_Halt" job (A2). The job abort is signaled via "Abort_1". With "AbortAcc_2" = FALSE, the current acceleration is reduced with the specified jerk. Afterward, the deceleration builds up and the axis is braked to a standstill. The completion of the "MC_Halt" job is reported via "Done_2". Section The axis is moved with an "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A1). At time , the "MC_MoveVelocity" job is overridden by an "MC_Halt" job (A2). The job abort is signaled via "Abort_1". With "AbortAcc_2" = TRUE, the current acceleration is set to zero immediately and the deceleration builds up. The axis is braked to a standstill. The completion of the "MC_Halt" job is reported via "Done_2". 10.5 MC_MoveAbsolute V4 10.5.1 MC_MoveAbsolute: Position axis absolutely V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveAbsolute", you can move an axis to an absolute position. You define the dynamic behavior of the motion with parameters "Velocity", "Jerk", "Acceleration" and "Deceleration". Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. The technology object is homed. Override response The override response for "MC_MoveAbsolute" jobs is described in section "Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428)". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 378 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.5 MC_MoveAbsolute V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveAbsolute": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_PositioningAxis - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Position INPUT LREAL 0.0 Absolute target position Velocity INPUT LREAL -1.0 Velocity setpoint for the positioning > 0.0 Start job with a positive edge The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The velocity configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Velocity) Acceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Acceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The acceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Acceleration) Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) Direction INPUT INT 1 Motion direction of the axis Is only evaluated with "modulo" enabled. "Technology object > Configuration > Basic parameters > Enable modulo Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE 1 Positive direction 2 Negative direction 3 Shortest distance TRUE Target position reached. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 379 Instructions 10.5 MC_MoveAbsolute V4 Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred during execution of the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Moving an axis to an absolute position Proceed as follows to move an axis to an absolute position: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Specify the desired target position in the "Position" parameter. 3. Start the "MC_MoveAbsolute" job with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". The current motion state is indicated in "Busy", "Done" and "Error". See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 380 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.5 MC_MoveAbsolute V4 10.5.2 MC_MoveAbsolute: Function chart V4 Function chart: Absolute positioning of an axis, and the response to an overriding job S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 381 Instructions 10.6 MC_MoveRelative V4 Section Section An axis is moved to absolute position 1000.0 with an "MC_MoveAbsolute" job (A1). When the axis reaches the target position, this is signaled at time via "Done_1". At this time , another "MC_MoveAbsolute" job (A2) with target position 1500.0 is started. When the axis reaches the target position 1500.0, this is signaled via "Done_2". Since "Exe_2" was previously reset, "Done_2" is applied only to one cycle. An active "MC_MoveAbsolute" job (A1) is overridden at time by another "MC_MoveAbsolute" job (A2). The abort is signaled via "Abort_1". The axis is braked to the changed velocity and moved to the new target position 1500.0. When the new target position is reached, this is signaled via "Done_2". 10.6 MC_MoveRelative V4 10.6.1 MC_MoveRelative: Position axis relatively V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveRelative", you move an axis relative to its position when execution of the job began. You define the dynamic behavior of the motion with parameters "Velocity", "Jerk", "Acceleration" and "Deceleration". Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. Override response The override response for "MC_MoveRelative" jobs is described in section "Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428)". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 382 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.6 MC_MoveRelative V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveRelative": Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_PositioningAxis - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Distance INPUT LREAL 0.0 Distance for the positioning process (negative or positive) Velocity INPUT LREAL -1.0 Velocity setpoint for the positioning Start job with a positive edge > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The velocity configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Velocity) Acceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Acceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The acceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Acceleration) Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Target position reached Busy OUTPUT BOOL CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 383 Instructions 10.6 MC_MoveRelative V4 Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" An error occurred during execution of the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. Moving an axis relative to the starting position Proceed as follows to move an axis relative to the starting position: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Specify distance to be moved in the "Distance" parameter. 3. Start the "MC_MoveRelative" job with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". The current motion state is indicated in "Busy", "Done" and "Error". See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 384 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.6 MC_MoveRelative V4 10.6.2 MC_MoveRelative: Function chart V4 Function chart: Relative positioning of an axis, and the overriding job characteristics S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 385 Instructions 10.7 MC_MoveVelocity V4 Section The axis is moved by an "MC_MoveRelative" job (A1) by the distance ("Distance") 1000.0 (the starting position here is 0.0). When the axis reaches the target position, this is signaled at time via "Done_1". At this time , another "MC_MoveRelative" job (A2) with distance 500.0 is started. When the new target position is reached, this is signaled via "Done_2". Since "Exe_2" was previously reset, "Done_2" is applied only to one cycle. Section An active "MC_MoveRelative" job (A1) is overridden by another "MC_MoveRelative" job (A2). The abort is signaled at time via "Abort_1". The axis is then moved at the new velocity by the distance ("Distance") 500.0. When the new target position is reached, this is signaled via "Done_2". 10.7 MC_MoveVelocity V4 10.7.1 MC_MoveVelocity: Move axis at velocity/speed setpoint V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveVelocity", you move an axis at constant velocity/speed. You define the dynamic behavior of the motion with parameters"Velocity", "Jerk", "Acceleration" and "Deceleration". Positioning axis/synchronous axis: A velocity is specified in the "Velocity" parameter. Speed axis: A speed is specified in the "Velocity" parameter. Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis Speed axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. Override response The override response for "MC_MoveVelocity" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 386 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.7 MC_MoveVelocity V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveVelocity": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_SpeedAxis - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Velocity INPUT LREAL 100.0 Start job with a positive edge Velocity setpoint / speed setpoint for the motion ("Velocity" = 0.0 is permitted) Acceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Acceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The acceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Acceleration) Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used. = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) Direction INPUT INT 0 Direction of rotation of the axis 0 The sign of the velocity specified at the "Velocity" parameter defines the direction of rotation. 1 Positive direction of rotation Value of "Velocity" is used. 2 Negative direction of rotation Value of "Velocity" is used. Current INPUT BOOL FALSE Maintain current velocity FALSE Deactivated The values of parameters "Velocity" and "Direction" are taken into account. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 387 Instructions 10.7 MC_MoveVelocity V4 Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description TRUE activated The values at the parameters "Velocity" and "Direction" are not taken into account. The current velocity and direction at function start are retained. When the axis resumes motion at the velocity that was current at function start, the "InVelocity" parameter returns the value TRUE. Position Controlled INPUT BOOL TRUE FALSE Non position-controlled operation TRUE Position-controlled mode The parameter applies as long as the "MC_MoveVelocity" job is being executed. After this, the setting of the following job applies. This parameter is ignored when a speed axis is used. InVelocity OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The velocity setpoint / speed setpoint was reached and will be maintained. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. Command Aborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred during execution of the job. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Behavior with velocity setpoint / speed setpoint zero ("Velocity" = 0.0) An "MC_MoveVelocity" job with "Velocity" = 0.0 stops the axis with the configured deceleration. When the velocity setpoint / speed setpoint zero is reached, the parameter "InVelocity" will indicate the value TRUE. Under "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits > Motion status", "constant velocity" and "standstill" will be displayed (.StatusWord.X12 (ConstantVelocity); .StatusWord.X7 (Standstill)). The parameters "InVelocity" and "Busy" show the value TRUE until the "MC_MoveVelocity" job is overridden by another Motion Control job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 388 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.7 MC_MoveVelocity V4 Moving an axis with constant velocity / speed Proceed as follows to move an axis with constant velocity / speed: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. At the parameter "Velocity", specify the velocity / speed, with which the axis should be moved. 3. Start the "MC_MoveVelocity" job with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". The current motion state is indicated in "Busy", "InVelocity" and "Error". If the "InVelocity" parameter shows the value TRUE, then the velocity setpoint / speed setpoint was reached. The axis continues moving at this constant velocity. The parameters "InVelocity" and "Busy" show the value TRUE until the "MC_MoveVelocity" job is overridden by another Motion Control job. Note Response to a change in the override If the velocity / speed is influenced during constant motion by a change in the override (.Override.Velocity), the "InVelocity" parameter is reset during the acceleration or deceleration. When the newly calculated velocity / speed is reached ("Velocity" x "Override" %), then "InVelocity" is reset. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the section "Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288)". See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 389 Instructions 10.7 MC_MoveVelocity V4 10.7.2 MC_MoveVelocity: Function chart V4 Function chart: Moving an axis with velocity specification, and the response to an overriding job An "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A1) initiated via "Exe_1" accelerates the axis and signals at time via "InVel_1" that the velocity setpoint 50.0 has been reached. At time , the job is overridden by another "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A2). The abort is signaled via "Abort_1". When the new velocity setpoint 15.0 is reached, this is signaled via "InVel_2". The axis then continues moving at the constant velocity 15.0. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 390 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.8 MC_MoveJog V4 The running "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A2) is overridden by another "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A1). The abort is signaled via "Abort_2". The axis is accelerated to the new velocity setpoint 50.0. Before the velocity setpoint is reached, the current "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A1) is overridden at time by another "MC_MoveVelocity" job A2). The abort is signaled via "Abort_1". When the new velocity setpoint 15.0 is reached, this is signaled via "InVel_2". The axis then continues moving at the constant velocity 15.0. 10.8 MC_MoveJog V4 10.8.1 MC_MoveJog: Move axis in jog mode V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog", you move an axis in jog mode. You define the dynamic behavior of the motion with parameters "Velocity", "Jerk", "Acceleration" and "Deceleration". Positioning axis/synchronous axis: A velocity is specified in the "Velocity" parameter. Speed axis: A speed is specified in the "Velocity" parameter. Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis Speed axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. Override response The override response for "MC_MoveJog" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 391 Instructions 10.8 MC_MoveJog V4 Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveJog": Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_SpeedAxis - Technology object JogForward INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE As long as the parameter is TRUE, the axis moves in the positive direction at the velocity specified in parameter "Velocity". JogBackward INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE As long as the parameter is TRUE, the axis moves in the negative direction at the velocity specified in parameter "Velocity". Velocity INPUT LREAL 100.0 Velocity setpoint / speed setpoint for the motion > 0.0 The specified value is used. < 0.0 The absolute value of the specified value is used. ("Velocity" = 0.0 is permitted) Acceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Acceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The acceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Acceleration) Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used. = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) PositionControlled INPUT BOOL TRUE FALSE Non position-controlled operation TRUE Position-controlled mode The parameter applies as long as the "MC_MoveJog" job is being executed. After this, the setting of the following job applies. This parameter is ignored when a speed axis is used. InVelocity OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The velocity setpoint / speed setpoint was reached and will be maintained. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 392 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.8 MC_MoveJog V4 Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred during execution of the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Behavior with zero setpoint velocity/speed ("Velocity" = 0.0) An "MC_MoveJog" job with "Velocity" = 0.0 stops the axis with the configured deceleration. When the velocity setpoint / speed setpoint zero is reached, the parameter "InVelocity" will indicate the value TRUE. Under "Technology object > Diagnostics > Status and error bits > Motion status", "constant velocity" and "standstill" will be displayed (.StatusWord.X12 (ConstantVelocity); .StatusWord.X7 (Standstill)). Moving an axis in jog mode Proceed as follows to move an axis in jog mode: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Move the axis in the positive direction with "JogForward", or in the negative direction with "JogBackward". The current motion state is indicated in "Busy", "InVelocity" and "Error". If both "JogForward" and "JogBackward" are set to TRUE, the axis is braked at the last valid deceleration. The error 16#8007 (incorrect direction specification) is output. Note Response to a change in the override If the velocity/speed is influenced during constant motion by a change in the override (.Override.Velocity), the "InVelocity" parameter is reset during the acceleration or deceleration. When the newly calculated velocity is reached ("Velocity" x "Override" %), then "InVelocity" is set again. Additional information An option for the evaluation of the individual status bits can be found in the section "Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord" (Page 288). See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 393 Instructions 10.8 MC_MoveJog V4 10.8.2 MC_MoveJog: Function chart V4 Function chart: Moving an axis in jog mode The axis is moved in the negative direction in jog mode via "Jog_B". When the velocity setpoint -50.0 is reached, this is signaled via "InVel" = TRUE. After "Jog_B" is reset, the axis is braked and brought to a standstill. Then the axis is moved in the positive direction via "Jog_F". When the velocity setpoint 50.0 is reached, this is signaled via "InVel" = TRUE. At time , if "Jog_F" is set, the velocity setpoint is changed to 100.0 by means of "Vel_Input". Alternatively, you can also change the velocity setpoint using the velocity override. "InVel" is reset. Axis is being accelerated. When the new velocity setpoint 100.0 is reached, this is signaled via "InVel" = TRUE. If "Jog_F" is set, "Jog_B" is likewise set at time . If both "Jog_F" and "Jog_B" are set, then the axis is braked with the last applicable deceleration. An error is indicated via "Error", and the "ErrorID" of the error 16#8007 (incorrect direction specification) is output. This error is resolved by resetting the two inputs "Jog_F" and "Jog_B". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 394 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.9 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4 During the braking ramp, "Jog_F" is set at time . The axis is accelerated to the last configured velocity. When the velocity setpoint 100.0 is reached, this is signaled via "InVel" = TRUE. 10.9 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4 10.9.1 MC_MoveSuperimposed: Position axes overlapping V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveSuperimposed", you start a relative positioning motion that is superimposed on a active basic motion. You define the dynamic behavior of the motion with parameters "VelocityDiff", "Jerk", "Acceleration" and "Deceleration" . The dynamic values are added to the values of the basic motion. The duration of the basic motion is not extended by a superimposed motion. The dynamics of the total axis motion is the sum of the dynamic values of the basic motion and the superimposed motion. The behavior of the total motion depends on the type of basic motion: The basic motion is a single-axis motion: - The maximum dynamics of the superimposed motion is the difference between the current dynamic values of the basic motion and the dynamic limits. - The entire motion is limited to the configured dynamic limits. The basic motion is a synchronous motion: - The maximum dynamics of the superimposed motion is the difference between the current dynamic values of the basic motion and the dynamic limits. - The synchronous motion of the following axis is not limited to the dynamic limits of the following axis. - An "MC_MoveSuperimposed" job on a leading axis in synchronous operation affects the leading axis and the following axis. - An "MC_MoveSuperimposed" job on a following axis in synchronous operation only affects the following axis. It is always the dynamics of the total motion that is displayed in the technology data block and in the TIA Portal. Applies to Synchronous axis Positioning axis S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 395 Instructions 10.9 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4 Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. Override response The override response for "MC_MoveSuperimposed" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveSuperimposed": Parameters Declaration Data type Axis INPUT TO_PositioningAxis - Default value Description Axis technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Distance INPUT LREAL 0.0 Additional distance for the overlapping positioning process (negative or positive) VelocityDiff INPUT LREAL -1.0 Maximum velocity deviation compared to the active motion > 0.0 Start job with a positive edge The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The velocity configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Velocity) Acceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Acceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The acceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Acceleration) Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 396 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.9 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4 Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Superimposed positioning complete Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 0 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Starting superimposed positioning motion To start a superimposed positioning motion with Motion Control instruction "MC_MoveSuperimposed", follow these steps: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Specify the additional distance to be moved in the "Distance" parameter. 3. Start the "MC_MoveSuperimposed" job with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". The current motion state is indicated in "Busy", "Done" and "Error". See also Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs (Page 428) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 397 Instructions 10.9 MC_MoveSuperimposed V4 10.9.2 MC_MoveSuperimposed: Function chart V4 Function chart: Positioning axes overlapping S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 398 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track Section Using "Exe_1", an "MC_MoveRelative" job with a distance of 50.0 is initiated. At time , using "Exe_2", an MC_MoveSuperimposed job with a distance of 50.0 is initiated. The axis is moved with the added dynamic values of both jobs by the distance 50 + 50 = 100.0. When the axis reaches the target position, this is signaled via "Done_2". Section Using "Exe_1", an "MC_MoveRelative" job with a distance of 50.0 is initiated. At time , using "Exe_2", a MC_MoveSuperimposed job with a distance of -50.0 is initiated. The axis reverses and is moved with the added dynamic values of both jobs by the distance 50.0 - 50.0 = 0.0. When the axis reaches the target position, this is signaled via "Done_2". 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track 10.10.1 MC_MeasuringInput V4 10.10.1.1 MC_MeasuringInput: Start measuring once V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput", a one-time measuring is started. With the one-time measuring, one or two edges can be detected with one measuring job. The position of the respective technology object axis or external encoder is assigned to the measuring event. The measurement result is indicated in the function block and in the technology data block and can be further processed in the user program. This completes the measuring job. Another measuring job must be started again using "MC_MeasuringInput.Execute" = TRUE. Applies to Measuring input Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The encoder of the axis must have "valid" status (StatusSensor[1..4].State = valid). Otherwise, the measuring job is rejected in the function block with an error indication. Measuring using PROFIdrive is not possible during active or passive homing. Override response The override response for "MC_MeasuringInput" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Measuring input jobs (Page 430). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 399 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description MeasuringInput INPUT TO_Measuring Input - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Mode INPUT DINT 0 Type of measurement 0 Measurement of next positive edge 1 Measurement of next negative edge 2 Measurement of next two edges 3 Measurement of two edges, beginning with the positive edge 4 MeasuringRange INPUT BOOL FALSE Start job with a positive edge * Rising edge = "MeasuredValue1" (measured value 1) * Falling edge = "MeasuredValue2" (measured value 2) Measurement of two edges, beginning with the negative edge * Falling edge = "MeasuredValue1" * Rising edge = "MeasuredValue2" Acquisition of measured values Observe the time-related boundary conditions (Page 122). FALSE Always acquire measured values TRUE StartPosition INPUT LREAL 0.0 Acquire measured values only within the measuring range Start position of the measuring range For an axis or external encoder with active modulo function, position data outside the modulo range is mirrored in the modulo range. EndPosition INPUT LREAL 0.0 End position of the measuring range For an axis or external encoder with active modulo function, position data outside the modulo range is mirrored in the modulo range. Done OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The block has been completely processed. Measured values are valid. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The measuring job has been aborted. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" MeasuredValue1 OUTPUT LREAL 0.0 First measured value MeasuredValue2 OUTPUT LREAL 0.0 Second measured value (for measurement of two edges) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 400 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track See also Time-related boundary conditions (Page 122) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) One-time measurement (Page 116) Override response V4: Measuring input jobs (Page 430) 10.10.1.2 MC_MeasuringInput: Function chart V4 Function chart: Start measuring job once A "MC_MeasuringInput" job with "Mode" = 0 initiated using "Execute" performs a measurement of the next positive edge. A successfully completed measurement is signaled with "Done" = TRUE. The determined measured value (in example: 50) is output using "MeasuredValue1". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 401 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track 10.10.2 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic V4 10.10.2.1 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Start cyclic measuring V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic", a cyclic measuring is started. With cyclic measuring, up to two measuring events are detected by the system and the associated measuring positions displayed. The measurements are continued cyclically until they are ended per command. Applies to Measuring input Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. Cyclic measuring is only possible when measuring using TM Timer DIDQ. The operationally active encoder of the axis must have "valid" status (StatusSensor[1..4].State = valid). Otherwise, the measuring job is rejected in the function block with an error indication. Override response The override response for "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Measuring input jobs (Page 430). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 402 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic": Parameters Declaration Data type MeasuringInput INPUT TO_Measuring Input Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Mode INPUT DINT 0 Type of measurement MeasuringRange INPUT BOOL Default value Description FALSE Start job with a positive edge 0 Measurement of positive edges 1 Measurement of negative edges 2 Measurement of both edges Acquisition of measured values Observe the time-related boundary conditions (Page 122). FALSE Always acquire measured values TRUE StartPosition INPUT LREAL 0.0 Acquire measured values only within the measuring range Start position of the measuring range For an axis or external encoder with active modulo function, position data outside the modulo range is mirrored in the modulo range. EndPosition INPUT LREAL 0.0 End position of the measuring range For an axis or external encoder with active modulo function, position data outside the modulo range is mirrored in the modulo range. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The measuring job has been aborted. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" MeasuredValue1 OUTPUT LREAL First measured value MeasuredValue2 OUTPUT LREAL Second measured value (when measuring multiple edges in one position control cycle) MeasuredValue1Counter OUTPUT UDINT MeasuredValue2Counter OUTPUT UDINT 0 Count value for the second measured value LostEdgeCounter1 OUTPUT UDINT 0 Count value for the lost edges in the cycle clock of the first measured value acquisition LostEdgeCounter2 OUTPUT UDINT 0 Count value for the lost edges in the cycle clock of the second measured value acquisition 0 Count value for the first measured value S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 403 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track See also Time-related boundary conditions (Page 122) Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Cyclic measuring (Page 117) Override response V4: Measuring input jobs (Page 430) 10.10.2.2 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Function chart V4 Function chart: Start cyclic measuring job S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 404 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track A "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic" command initiated using "Execute" (signal and start point not shown) (e.g. call in MC-PreServo [OB67]) with "Mode" = 0 and without specified measuring range "MeasuringRange" = FALSE performs a measurement of the positive edges. By calling the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInputCyclic" in MC-PreServo [OB67] or MC-PreServo [OB67], the measuring command as well as the measurement itself is called in the same application cycle. The actual position determined at the time of the first positive edge in the position control cycle is output using "MeasuredValue1", and count tag "MeasuredValue1Counter" is incremented by "1". The actual position determined at the time of the second positive edge in the position control cycle is output using "MeasuredValue2", and count tag "MeasuredValue2Counter" is incremented by "1". If additional positive edges occur in the same position control cycle , these are recorded in LostEdgeCounter1 and LostEdgeCounter2. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 405 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track 10.10.3 MC_AbortMeasuringInput V4 10.10.3.1 MC_AbortMeasuringInput: Abort active measuring V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_AbortMeasuringInput", an active one-time or cyclic measuring job is aborted. Applies to Measuring input Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. Override response The override response for "MC_AbortMeasuringInput" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Measuring input jobs (Page 430). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_AbortMeasuringInput": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description MeasuringInput INPUT TO_MeasuringInput - Technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Done OUTPUT BOOL 0 The function block has been processed. The measuring job has been deactivated. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job has been aborted. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Start job with a positive edge See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Override response V4: Measuring input jobs (Page 430) Technology object measuring input (Page 111) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 406 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track 10.10.4 MC_OutputCam V4 10.10.4.1 MC_OutputCam: Activate/deactivate cam V4 Description You use Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" to activate the specified cam. Depending on the cam type, the following input parameters are in effect: Distance output cam - "OnPosition" - "OffPosition" Time-based output cam - "OnPosition" - "Duration" You define the operating mode and the effective direction of the cam with parameters "Mode" and "Direction". When "MC_OutputCam.Enable" = TRUE, the input parameters are always read and take effect at the next position control cycle. When a technological alarm occurs, the cam is processed again after error acknowledgment. Applies to Output cam Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The higher-level technology object must have a valid position. Setpoint output cams are not output for an axis in non-position-controlled operation. A setpoint output cam with the setting "MC_OutputCam.OnPosition" = 0 switches at position setpoint = 0. Override response The "MC_OutputCam" is canceled by: Disabling of the cam with "MC_OutputCam.Enable" = FALSE Only one instance of the "MC_OutputCam" function block can be active on an output cam in the user program. A second instance of the "MC_OutputCam" function block on a currently active output cam is rejected with an error. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 407 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description OutputCam INPUT TO_OutputCam - Technology object Enable INPUT BOOL FALSE FALSE Cam is disabled OnPosition INPUT LREAL 0.0 Start position of the cam [unit of measurement of the interconnected technology object] TRUE Cam is being processed For an axis or external encoder with active modulo function, position data outside the modulo range is mirrored in the modulo range. OffPosition INPUT LREAL 0.0 End position of the distance output cam [unit of measurement of the interconnected technology object] For an axis or external encoder with active modulo function, position data outside the modulo range is mirrored in the modulo range. Duration INPUT LREAL 0.0 Switch-on duration of the time-based output cam [unit of measurement: ms] The value for the switch-on duration of a time-based output cam must be greater than 0.0. Mode INPUT DINT 1 Operating mode 1 Standard Cam functionality (output not inverted) 2 Cam functionality with inverted output 3 Cam always ON (while "Enable" = TRUE) Direction INPUT DINT 1 Activation direction of the cam 1 Positive direction 2 Negative direction 3 Both directions CamOutput OUTPUT BOOL - Status display based on last call of Motion Control instruction "MC_OutputCam" Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Processing of the cam is active. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Technology object output cam (Page 126) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 408 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track 10.10.4.2 MC_OutputCam: Function chart V4 Function chart: Activate the specified cam type A1 Distance output cam A2 Time-based output cam A cam is activated with "Enable" = TRUE. The cam is output corresponding to the parameters. The processing of the cam is indicated with "Busy" = TRUE. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 409 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track When activation direction "Direction" = 1 (positive) is set, the cam behaves as follows, regardless of the cam type setting: The distance output cam switches on at "OnPosition" and switches off again at "OffPosition" . At a direction reversal the cam is switched off . The time-based output cam switches on at "OnPosition" and switches off again after expiration of the specified time "Duration" . A switched on time-based output cam remains active for the specified switch-on duration "Duration", even if overtravel of the start position occurs again in the reverse direction. The switching state of the cam is output using "CamOutput". With "Enable" = FALSE, the specified cam type is deactivated. "Busy" = FALSE shows that the cam is not being processed. 10.10.5 MC_CamTrack V4 10.10.5.1 MC_CamTrack: Activate/deactivate cam track V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack", the processing of a cam track is enabled. Applies to Cam track Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The higher-level technology object must have a valid position. Setpoint output cams are not output for an axis in non-position-controlled operation. Override response The "MC_CamTrack" is aborted by the disabling of the cam track with "MC_CamTrack.Enable" = FALSE. Only one instance of the "MC_CamTrack" function block can be active on a cam track in the user program. A second instance of the "MC_CamTrack" function block on a currently active cam track is rejected with an error. The cam track is recalculated at a change of the parameters of the Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack" or in the technology data block. The cam track is processed in accordance with all parameter settings. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 410 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_CamTrack": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description CamTrack INPUT TO_CamTrack - Technology object Enable INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Mode INPUT INT 1 Cam track is processed FALSE Cam track is disabled 0 When "Enable" = TRUE: Cam track processing is activated immediately Cam track data takes effect immediately Previously activated distance output cams are aborted if their track signal is not still set due to the changed cam track data. Previously activated time-based output cams are always aborted. When "Enable" = FALSE: Cam track processing is stopped immediately, distance output/time-based output cams are aborted immediately. 1 When "Enable" = TRUE: Cam track processing is activated immediately/with the next track cycle: * When a cam track is activated for the first time, the cam track processing begins immediately. * If the cam track processing is already active, the current cam track is output up to the end of the track cycle. The new cam track data then takes effect. When "Enable" = FALSE: Cam track processing is ended at the end of the cam track 2 When "Enable" = TRUE: Cam track output is switched on immediately and remains switched on When "Enable" = FALSE: Cam track output is switched off immediately InvertOutput INPUT BOOL FALSE Inverted output TRUE Track output is output inverted FALSE Track output is output not inverted TrackOutput OUTPUT BOOL - Indicates the switching state of the cam track. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Processing of the cam track is active. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 411 Instructions 10.10 Measuring input, output cam, cam track See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Cam track technology object (Page 141) 10.10.5.2 MC_CamTrack: Function chart V4 Function chart: Activate cam track Axis reference position Cam configured as invalid Start of cyclically continued cam track A cam track is activated with "Enable" = TRUE. The cam track is output in accordance with the parameters set in the technology data block. Tag Value Description CamTrackType 0 Specified cam type for the cam track is distance output cam ReferencePosition 20.0 Specified axis reference position for the cam track CamTrackLength 100.0 Specified length of the cam track CamTrack[1].Existent TRUE The first distance output cam of the cam track is specified as valid CamTrack[1].OnPosition 10.0 Start position for the first cam of the cam track CamTrack[1].OffPosition 20.0 End position for the first cam of the cam track CamTrack[2].Existent FALSE The second distance output cam of the cam track is specified as invalid CamTrack[2].OnPosition 30.0 Start position for the second cam of the cam track CamTrack[2].OffPosition 50.0 End position for the second cam of the cam track CamTrack[3].Existent TRUE The third distance output cam of the cam track is specified as valid CamTrack[3].OnPosition 60.0 Start position for the third cam of the cam track CamTrack[3].OffPosition 90.0 End position for the third cam of the cam track Parameter. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 412 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.11 Synchronous motion 10.11 Synchronous motion 10.11.1 MC_GearIn V4 10.11.1.1 MC_GearIn: Start gear synchronization V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_GearIn", you start a gearing (Page 107) operation between a leading axis and a following axis. You define the dynamic behavior of the following axis for synchronization with parameters "Jerk", "Acceleration" and "Deceleration". The synchronization duration and distance are dependent on the following parameters: Start time of the "MC_GearIn" job Dynamics of the following axis at the start time Dynamic settings for synchronization Dynamics of the leading axis You specify the gear ratio as the relationship between two integers (numerator/denominator) with the parameters "RatioNumerator" and "RatioDenominator". The numerator of the gear ratio is specified as positive or negative. This yields the following behavior: Positive gear ratio: The leading and following axes move in the same direction. Negative gear ratio: The following axis moves in the opposite direction of the leading axis. You can start synchronous operation when the leading axis is at a standstill or when it is in motion. Applies to Synchronous axis S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 413 Instructions 10.11 Synchronous motion Requirement The technology objects of the leading axis and the following axis have been configured correctly. The leading axis is a positioning axis, synchronous axis, or external encoder. The following axis is a synchronous axis. The leading axis is specified as possible leading axis in the configuration of the following axis in "Technology object > Configuration > Leading value interconnections". The following axis is enabled. Override response The override response for "MC_GearIn" jobs is described in section Override response V4: Synchronous operation jobs (Page 429). Disabling the following axis with "MC_Power.Enable" = FALSE aborts the synchronous operation in every status. Disabling the leading axis with "MC_Power", in contrast, does not abort synchronous operation. The following axis follows the leading axis even during the braking ramp and after the leading axis is enabled again. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_GearIn": Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Master INPUT TO_Axis - Leading axis technology object Slave INPUT TO_SynchronousAxis - Following axis technology object Execute INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Start job with a positive edge RatioNumerator INPUT DINT 1 Gear ratio numerator Permitted integer values: -2147483648 to 2147483648 (value 0 not permitted) RatioDenominator INPUT DINT 1 Gear ratio denominator Permitted integer values: 1 to 2147483648 Acceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Acceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The acceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Acceleration) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 414 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.11 Synchronous motion Parameters Declaration Data type Default value Description Deceleration INPUT LREAL -1.0 Deceleration > 0.0 The specified value is used. = 0.0 Not permitted < 0.0 The deceleration configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Deceleration) Jerk INPUT LREAL -1.0 Jerk > 0.0 Constant-acceleration velocity profile; the specified jerk is used = 0.0 Trapezoid velocity profile < 0.0 The jerk configured in "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Dynamic defaults" is used. (.DynamicDefaults.Jerk) InGear OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Synchronous operation reached The following axis is synchronized and moves synchronously to the leading axis. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. CommandAborted OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job was aborted by another job during execution. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 0 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Starting synchronous operation To start synchronous operation with the Motion Control instruction "MC_GearIn", follow these steps: 1. Check the requirements indicated above. 2. Specify the leading axis, the following axis and the gear ratio at the corresponding parameters. 3. Start the "MC_GearIn" job with a positive edge at parameter "Execute". The following axis is synchronized to the leading value of the leading axis. If the "InGear" parameter shows the value TRUE, the following axis is synchronized and moves synchronously to the leading axis. The parameters "InGear" and "Busy" show the value TRUE until the "MC_GearIn" job is overridden by another Motion Control job. See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Override response V4: Synchronous operation jobs (Page 429) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 415 Instructions 10.11 Synchronous motion 10.11.1.2 MC_GearIn: Function chart V4 Function chart: Synchronizing and switching the leading value Using "Exe_1", an "MC_GearIn" job (A1) is initiated. The following axis (TO_Slave) is synchronized to the leading axis (TO_Master_1). "InGear_1" signals at time that the following axis is synchronized and moves synchronously to the leading axis. At time , synchronous operation is overridden by another "MC_GearIn" job (A2). The abort is signaled via "Abort_1". The following axis is synchronized to the new leading axis (TO_Master_2). "InGear_2" signals at time that the following axis is synchronized and moves synchronously to the leading axis. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 416 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.12 Torque data 10.12 Torque data 10.12.1 MC_TorqueLimiting V4 10.12.1.1 MC_TorqueLimiting: Activate and deactivate force/torque limit / fixed stop detection V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting", you activate and assign parameters for force/torque limiting and fixed stop detection. Together with a positioncontrolled motion job, a "Travel to fixed stop" can be realized with the fixed stop detection. In the axis configuration, you can configure whether the force/torque limiting is to relate to the drive side or the load side. The functions of the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting" can be activated and deactivated before and during a motion job. Force/torque limiting applies to Speed axis Positioning axis Synchronous axis Requirements for force/torque limiting The technology object and the reference torque of the drive have been configured correctly. No enable-preventing errors are pending for the technology object (the technology object does not have to be enabled). The drive must support force/torque reduction. Only PROFIdrive drives with SIEMENS telegram 10x support force/torque limiting. Interconnection in the SINAMICS drive: - P1522 to a fixed value of 100% - P1523 to a fixed value of -100% (e.g. through interconnection to fixed value parameter P2902[i]). Fixed stop detection applies to Positioning axis Synchronous axis S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 417 Instructions 10.12 Torque data Requirement for fixed stop detection The fixed stop detection can only be applied to position-controlled axes. For fixed stop detection, the axis must be enabled as position-controlled axis; motion commands must be executed as position-controlled motion commands. The technology object has been configured correctly. When a drive and telegram that support force/torque limiting is used, the reference torque of the drive must be correctly configured for the technology object. No enable-preventing errors are pending for the technology object (the technology object does not have to be enabled). Override response An "MC_TorqueLimiting" job cannot be aborted by any other Motion Control job. A new "MC_TorqueLimiting" job does not abort any active Motion Control jobs. If the high and low torque limiting is active via the "MC_TorqueRange" job, the "MC_TorqueLimiting" job is rejected with an error message and vice versa. The functions do not override one another. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 418 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.12 Torque data Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueLimiting": Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_SpeedAxis - Technology object Enable INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Limit INPUT LREAL -1.0 Value of force/torque limiting (in the configured unit of measurement) Activate function corresponding to input parameter Mode If drive and telegram do not support force/torque limiting, the specified value is irrelevant. 0 Use the value specified in the parameter ("0" value is permissible) <0 Use the value configured in the "Torque limiting" configuration window. Tag Torque Limit: .TorqueLimiting.LimitDefaults.Torque Tag Force Limit: .TorqueLimiting.LimitDefaults.Force Mode INPUT DINT 0 0 Force/torque limiting 1 Fixed stop detection If drive and telegram support force/torque limiting, this is applied. InClamping OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Mode = 1: The drive is kept at the fixed stop (clamping), the axis position is within the positioning tolerance. InLimitation OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Mode = 0 and 1: Drive is operating at the force/torque limit. Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE Job is running. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" Changes to input parameters "Limit" and "Mode" are also transferred at the cyclic call of the Motion Control instruction when "Enable = TRUE". See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) Fixed stop detection (Page 65) Force/torque limiting (Page 63) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 419 Instructions 10.12 Torque data 10.12.1.2 MC_TorqueLimiting: Function chart V4 Function chart: Stopping an axis when the torque limit is reached At time , an "MC_Halt" job (A2) is executed on an axis with active torque limiting "MC_TorqueLimiting" (A1). Torque limiting is still active "MC_TorqueLimiting.Enable" = TRUE and any accumulated following error is retained and will be reduced with the time. When the actual velocity is "0.0" and the minimum dwell time in the standstill window has elapsed, the tag "MC_Halt.Done" shows = TRUE. When position monitoring is activated, reaching of the target position is also monitored. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 420 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.12 Torque data Function chart: Torque limiting with fixed stop detection (mode = 1) Positioning tolerance S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 421 Instructions 10.12 Torque data At time , a "MC_TorqueLimiting" job (A1) is initiated via "En_1". An "MC_MoveVelocity" job (A2) is executed on the axis with active torque limiting. The torque limiting is still active "MC_TorqueLimiting.Enable" = TRUE. When the following error limit is reached, the "MC_MoveVelocity" job is aborted with "Abort" = TRUE. The drive is kept at the fixed stop (clamping). The actual position of the axis is within the positioning tolerance. An "MC_MoveVelocity" job is once again called via the two tags "Execute" = TRUE and "Direction_2" = TRUE and the axis moves with constant velocity in the opposite direction. The clamping is hereby reduced when the positioning tolerance is exited. At time , the torque limiting is cancelled. 10.12.2 MC_TorqueAdditive V4 10.12.2.1 MC_TorqueAdditive: Specify additive torque V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueAdditive", you specify an additive torque for the drive to which the technology object is assigned. The torque data are transferred via the telegram 750. With the "Value" parameter, you specify the additive setpoint torque. The specification of the additive torque setpoint is overriding. An additional torque may be positive or negative. If you invert the setpoint for the technology object, the value for the additive torque is also inverted and transferred inverted to the drive. Applies to Positioning axis Speed axis Synchronous axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The technology object is enabled. The drive is connected via PROFIdrive telegram. Telegram 750 is configured. Telegram 750 is available for SINAMICS drives V4.9 and higher. Override response An "MC_TorqueAdditive" job is not aborted by any other Motion Control job. A new "MC_TorqueAdditive" job does not abort any active Motion Control jobs. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 422 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.12 Torque data Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueAdditive": Parameter Declaration Axis INPUT TO_SpeedAxis - Technology object Enable INPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The specified setpoint is used as long as the parameter is set to TRUE. FALSE The additive torque transferred to the drive is zero. Value INPUT Data type LREAL Default value 0.0 Description Additive setpoint torque Permissible values: -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job is being processed. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) Additive setpoint torque (Page 66) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 423 Instructions 10.12 Torque data 10.12.2.2 MC_TorqueAdditive: Function chart V4 Function chart: Activate/deactivate additive setpoint torque Section With "Enable_1 = TRUE", an additive setpoint torque "Value_1" is specified for the drive assigned to the technology object. This setting is transferred to the drive parameter "p1511 - Supplementary torque 1" using telegram 750. Section With "Enable_1 = TRUE", an additive setpoint torque "Value_1" is specified for the drive assigned to the technology object. This setting is transferred to the drive parameter "p1511 - Supplementary torque 1" using tele- gram 750. The additive setpoint torque is first built up. At time , "Enable_1" is already set to FALSE, before the additive setpoint torque is reduced again. The reduction of the torque setpoint is transmitted directly to the drive. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 424 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.12 Torque data 10.12.3 MC_TorqueRange V4 10.12.3.1 MC_TorqueRange: Set high and low torque limits V4 Description With the Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueRange", you can specify an upper and lower torque limit to the drive assigned to the technology object. The torque data are transferred via the telegram 750. With the "UpperLimit" parameter you specify the upper torque limit and with "LowerLimit" the lower torque limit. The specification of the torque limits has smoothing effect on the movements. If you invert the setpoints for the technology object, the values for the high and low torque limit are also inverted and transferred inverted to the drive. If the high and low torque limits are active, the following monitors and limits are disabled by default: Following error monitoring Time limitations for positioning and standstill monitoring Monitoring remains in effect if you have selected the option "Leave position-related monitoring enabled" under "Technology object > Configuration > Extended parameters > Limits > Torque limit". Applies to Positioning axis Speed axis Synchronous axis Requirement The technology object has been configured correctly. The drive is connected via PROFIdrive telegram. Telegram 750 is configured. Telegram 750 is available for SINAMICS drives V4.9 and higher. Override response An "MC_TorqueRange" job is not aborted by any other Motion Control job. A new "MC_TorqueRange" job does not abort any active Motion Control jobs. If the torque limiting is active via the "MC_TorqueLimiting" job, the "MC_TorqueRange" job is rejected with an error message and vice versa. The functions do not override one another. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 425 Instructions 10.12 Torque data Parameters The following table shows the parameters of Motion Control instruction "MC_TorqueRange": Parameter Declaration Data type Default value Description Axis INPUT TO_SpeedAxis - Technology object Enable INPUT BOOL TRUE The specified values are used as long as the TRUE parameter is set. FALSE No values for the high and low torque limit are transferred to the drive. UpperLimit INPUT LREAL FALSE 1.0 E12 Upper torque limit (in the configured unit) Permitted range of values: -1.0 E12 to 1.0 E12 The value of the parameter "UpperLimit" must not be greater than the value of the parameter "LowerLimit". LowerLimit INPUT LREAL -1.0 E12 Lower torque limit (in the configured unit) Permitted range of values: -1.0 E12 to 1.0 E12 The value of the parameter "LowerLimit" must not be less than the value of the parameter "UpperLimit". Busy OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE The job is being processed. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE TRUE An error occurred while processing the job. The job is rejected. The cause of the error can be found in the "ErrorID" parameter. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 16#0000 Error ID (Page 542) for parameter "ErrorID" See also Error ID for Motion Control instructions (Page 542) PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) Permissible torque range (Page 67) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 426 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.12 Torque data 10.12.3.2 MC_TorqueRange: Function chart V4 Function chart: Set high and low torque limits With "Enable_1 = TRUE" an upper torque limit "UpperLimit_1" and a lower torque limit "LowerLimit_1" are specified to the drive assigned to the technology object. These settings are transferred directly to the drive parameters "p1522 - Torque limit upper" and "p1523 Torque limit lower" using telegram 750. If "Enable_1" is reset to FALSE, the upper and lower torque limits are no longer active. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 427 Instructions 10.13 Override response of Motion Control jobs V4 10.13 Override response of Motion Control jobs V4 10.13.1 Override response V4: Homing and motion jobs The following table shows how a new Motion Control job affects active homing and motion jobs: Active job New job MC_Home MC_Home MC_Halt "Mode" = 2, 8, 10 ("Mode" = 3, 5) MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveSuperimposed MC_MotionIn Velocity MC_MotionIn Position MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveVelocity MC_MoveJog MC_Home A A A A A A - - - - - A A A A "Mode" = 3, 5 MC_Home "Mode" = 9 MC_Halt MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveVelocity MC_MoveJog MC_MotionInVelocity MC_MotionInPosition MC_MoveSuperimposed - - - A - MC_GearIn - A A A - MC_GearInPos pending1) - - - - - - A A A - MC_CamIn pending1) - - - - - MC_CamIn active2) - A A A - MC_GearInPos active2) A The running job is aborted with "CommandAborted" = TRUE. - No effect. Running job continues to be executed. 1) "Busy" = TRUE, "StartSync" = FALSE, "InSync" = FALSE 2) "Busy" = TRUE, "StartSync" or "InSync" = TRUE S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 428 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Instructions 10.13 Override response of Motion Control jobs V4 10.13.2 Override response V4: Synchronous operation jobs The following table shows how a new Motion Control job affects the motion of the axis on active synchronous operation jobs: Active job MC_GearIn New job MC_GearInPos pending1) MC_GearInPos active2) MC_PhasingAbsolute MC_CamIn pending1) MC_CamIn active2) MC_PhasingRelative MC_Home A - - - - - MC_Halt A - A A - A MC_MoveAbsolute A - A A - A A A A - A A MC_MoveSuperimposed - - - - - - MC_GearIn A A A A A A MC_GearInPos pending1) - A - - A - A A A A A A - - - A - - MC_CamIn pending1) - A - - A - MC_CamIn active2) A A A A A A "Mode" = 3, 5 MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveVelocity MC_MoveJog MC_MotionInVelocity MC_MotionInPosition MC_GearInPos active2) MC_PhasingAbsolute MC_PhasingRelative A The running job is aborted with "CommandAborted" = TRUE. - No effect. Running job continues to be executed. 1) A pending synchronous operation ("Busy" = TRUE, "StartSync" = FALSE, "InSync" = FALSE) does not cancel active commands. A pending synchronous operation job can only be overridden by a further synchronous operation job on the same following axis. Cancellation is possible with "MC_Power". 2) The status "Busy" = TRUE, "StartSync" or "InSync" = TRUE corresponds to active synchronous operation. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 429 Instructions 10.13 Override response of Motion Control jobs V4 10.13.3 Override response V4: Measuring input jobs The following table shows which new Motion Control jobs will override active measuring input jobs: Active job MC_MeasuringInput MC_MeasuringInputCyclic A A - - A A New job MC_Home "Mode" = 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10 MC_Home "Mode" = 0, 1, 6, 7 MC_MeasuringInput MC_MeasuringInputCyclic MC_AbortMeasuringInput A The running job is aborted with "CommandAborted" = TRUE. - No effect. Running job continues to be executed. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 430 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE A Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.1 Legend Tag Name of the tag Data type Data type of the tag Values Value range of the tag - minimum value to maximum value If no specific value is shown, the value range limits of the relevant data type apply or the information under "Description". W Effectiveness of changes in the technology data block DIR Direct: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. CAL At call of Motion Control instruction: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction in the user program. Description RES Restart: Changes to the start value in the load memory are made using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to DB in load memory). Changes will not take effect until after restart of the technology object. RON Read only: The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. Description of the tag Access to the tags is with ".". The placeholder represents the name of the technology object. A.1.2 Actual values and setpoints (speed axis) The following tags indicate the setpoint and actual values of the technology object. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Values W Description Velocity LREAL - RON Velocity setpoint / speed setpoint ActualSpeed LREAL - RON Actual speed of the motor (with analog setpoint = 0.0) Acceleration LREAL - RON Setpoint acceleration S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 431 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.3 Variable simulation (speed axis) The tag structure .Simulation. contains the configuration of the simulation mode. In simulation mode, you can simulate axes without a real drive in the CPU. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Simulation. Mode Values W Description - RES1) Simulation mode STRUCT UDINT 0: No simulation, normal operation 1: Simulation mode 1) Technology version V2.0: RON A.1.4 VirtualAxis tag (speed axis) The tag structure .VirtualAxis. contains the configuration of the simulation mode. In simulation mode, you can simulate axes without a real drive in the CPU. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type VirtualAxis. Mode Values W Description - RON Virtual axis STRUCT UDINT 0: No virtual axis 1: Axis is always and exclusively operated as virtual axis S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 432 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.5 Actor tags (speed axis) The tag structure .Actor. contains the controller-side configuration of the drive. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Actor. Values W Description - RON Drive connection STRUCT Type DINT 0: Analog output 1: PROFIdrive telegram InverseDirection BOOL - RES Inversion of the setpoint FALSE: no TRUE: Yes DataAdaption DINT - RES Automatic transfer of the drive values reference speed, maximum speed and reference torque in the device 0: No automatic transfer, manual configuration of values 1: Automatic transfer of values configured in the drive to the configuration of the technology object Efficiency LREAL Interface. STRUCT 0.0 to 1.0 RES Efficiency of gear AddressIn VREF 0 to 65535 RON Input address for the PROFIdrive telegram AddressOut VREF 0 to 65535 RON Output address for the PROFIdrive telegram or the analog setpoint EnableDriveOutput BOOL - RES "Enable output" for analog drives FALSE: disabled TRUE: Activated EnableDriveOutput Address VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address for the "Enable output" for analog setpoint DriveReadyInput BOOL - RES "Ready input" for analog drives The analog drive signals its readiness to receive speed setpoints. FALSE: disabled TRUE: Activated DriveReadyInput Address VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address for the "Enable input" for analog setpoint EnableTorqueData BOOL - RES Torque data FALSE: Deactivated TRUE: Activated TorqueDataAddressIn VREF 0 to 65535 RON Input Address of the Telegram 750 TorqueDataAddress Out 0 to 65535 RON Output address of the telegram 750 VREF DriveParameter. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 433 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object Tag ReferenceSpeed Data type Values W Description LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Reference value (100%) for the speed setpoint (N-set) of the drive The speed setpoint is transferred in the PROFIdrive telegram as a normalized value from -200% to 200% of the "ReferenceSpeed". For setpoint specification via an analog output, the analog output can be operated in the range from 117% to 117%, provided the drive permits this. MaxSpeed LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Maximum value for the speed setpoint of the drive (N-set) (PROFIdrive: MaxSpeed 2 x ReferenceSpeed Analog setpoint: MaxSpeed 1.17 x ReferenceSpeed) ReferenceTorque A.1.6 LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Reference torque of drive (p2003). Valid for standard motor setting. Torque Limiting tag (speed axis) The tag structure .TorqueLimiting. contains the configuration of the torque limiting. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type TorqueLimiting. STRUCT LimitBase DINT Values W Description - RES Torque limiting 0: Motor side 1: Load side PositionBased Monitorings DINT - RES Positioning and following error monitoring 0: Monitoring deactivated 1: Monitoring activated LimitDefaults. STRUCT Torque LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Limiting torque Force LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Limiting force S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 434 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.7 LoadGear tags (speed axis) The tag structure .LoadGear. contains the configuration of the load gear. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type LoadGear. STRUCT Value range W Description Numerator UDINT 1 to 4294967295 RES Load gear numerator Denominator UDINT 1 to 4294967295 RES Load gear denominator A.1.8 Units tags (speed axis) The tag structure .Units. shows the set technological units. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Units. STRUCT VelocityUnit UDINT Values W Description - RON Unit for velocity TimeUnit UDINT - RON TorqueUnit UDINT - RON 1082 1/s 1083 1/min 1528 1/h Unit for time 1054 ForceUnit UDINT - RON s Unit for torque 1126 Nm 1128 kNm 1529 lbf in (pound-force-inch) 1530 lbf ft 1531 ozf in (ounce-force-inch) 1532 ozf ft 1533 pdl in (poundal-inch) 1534 pdl ft Unit for force 1120 N 1122 kN 1094 lbf (pound-force) 1093 ozf (ounce-force) 1535 pdl (poundals) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 435 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.9 DynamicLimits tags (speed axis) The tag structure .DynamicLimits. contains the configuration of the dynamic limits. During Motion Control, no dynamic values greater than the dynamic limits are permitted. If you have specified greater values in a Motion Control instruction, then motion is performed using the dynamic limits, and a warning is indicated (alarm 501 to 503 - Dynamic values were limited). Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type DynamicLimits. Values W Description STRUCT MaxVelocity LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Maximum permissible velocity of the axis MaxAcceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Maximum permissible acceleration of the axis MaxDeceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Maximum permissible deceleration of the axis MaxJerk LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Maximum permissible jerk on the axis A.1.10 DynamicDefaults tags (speed axis) The tag structure .DynamicDefaults. contains the configuration of the dynamic defaults. These settings will be used when you specify a dynamic value less than 0.0 in a Motion Control instruction (exceptions: MC_MoveJog.Velocity, MC_MoveVelocity.Velocity). Changes to the default dynamic values will be applied at the next positive edge at the "Execute" parameter of a Motion Control instruction. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type DynamicDefaults. STRUCT Values W Description Velocity LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default velocity Acceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default acceleration Deceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default deceleration Jerk LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default jerk EmergencyDeceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Emergency stop deceleration S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 436 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.11 Override tags (speed axis) The tag structure .Override. contains the configuration for the override parameters. The override parameters are used to apply a correction percentage to default values. An override change takes effect immediately, and is performed with the dynamic settings in effect in the Motion Control instruction. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Override. Values W Description 0.0 to 200.0% DIR Velocity or speed override STRUCT Velocity LREAL Percentage correction of the velocity/speed A.1.12 StatusDrive tags (speed axis) The tag structure .StatusDrive. indicates the status of the drive. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type StatusDrive. InOperation Values W Description - RON Operational status of the drive STRUCT BOOL FALSE: Drive not ready. Setpoints will not be executed. TRUE: Drive ready. Setpoints can be executed. CommunicationOK BOOL - RON Cyclic BUS communication between controller and drive FALSE: Not established TRUE: Established Error BOOL - RON FALSE: No drive error TRUE: Drive error AdaptionState DINT - RON Status of automatic data transfer of drive parameters 0: "NOT_ADAPTED" (Data not transferred) 1: "IN_ADAPTION" (Data transfer in progress) 2: "ADAPTED" (Data transfer complete) 3: "NOT_APPLICABLE" (Data transfer not selected, not possible) 4: "ADAPTION_ERROR" (Error during data transfer) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 437 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.13 StatusTorqueData tags (speed axis) The tag structure .StatusTorqueData. indicates the status of the torque. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type StatusTorqueData. Value range W Description - RON Additive torque setpoint function STRUCT CommandAdditive TorqueActive DINT 0: Deactivated 1: Activated CommandTorqueRange DINT Active - RON Torque range above high and low limit of the torque function 0: Deactivated 1: Activated ActualTorque A.1.14 LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Actual torque of the axis in the technological unit of the TO for torque StatusMotionIn tags (speed axis) The tag structure .StatusMotionIn. indicates the motion status. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type StatusMotionIn. STRUCT FunctionState DINT Value range W Description - RON 0: No MotionIn function active 1: MotionInVelocity active 2: MotionInPosition active S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 438 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.15 StatusWord tag (speed axis) The .StatusWord tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 0 "Enable") can be found in the section Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288). Tag Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Values W Description StatusWord DWORD - RON Status data of the technology object Bit 0 - - - "Enable" Enable status 0: Technology object disabled 1: Technology object enabled Bit 1 - - - "Error" 0: No error present 1: Error present Bit 2 - - - "RestartActive" 0: No "Restart" active 1: "Restart" active. The technology object is being reinitialized. Bit 3 - - - "OnlineStartValuesChanged" 0: "Restart" tags unchanged 1: Change to "Restart" tags. For the changes to be applied, the technology object must be reinitialized. Bit 4 - - - "ControlPanelActive" Axis control panel 0: Deactivated 1: Activated Bit 5 - - - Reserved Bit 6 - - - "Done" 0: Motion job is running, or Axis control panel enabled 1: No motion job is running and axis control panel disabled Bit 7 - - - Reserved Bit 8 - - - Reserved Bit 9 - - - "JogCommand" 0: No "MC_MoveJog" job running 1: "MC_MoveJog" job running Bit 10 - - - "VelocityCommand" 0: No "MC_MoveVelocity" job running 1: "MC_MoveVelocity" job running Bit 11 - - - Reserved Bit 12 - - - "ConstantVelocity" 0: Axis is accelerating or decelerating. 1: Velocity setpoint reached. The axis is traversing at this constant velocity or is at a standstill. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 439 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 13 - - "Accelerating" - 0: No acceleration process active 1: Acceleration process active Bit 14 - - - "Decelerating" 0: No deceleration process active 1: Deceleration process active Bit 15... Bit 24 - - - Reserved Bit 25 - - - "AxisSimulation" 0: No simulation 1: Simulation is active Bit 26 - - - "TorqueLimitingCommand" 0: No "MC_TorqueLimiting" job is running 1: "MC_TorqueLimiting" job is running Bit 27 - - - "InLimitation" 0: Drive is not operating at the torque limit 1: Drive is operating at the torque limit Bit 28... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 440 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.16 ErrorWord tag (speed axis) The .ErrorWord tag indicates technology object errors (technology alarms). Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 3 "CommandNotAccepted") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Values W ErrorWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemFault" System error Bit 1 - - - "ConfigFault" Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserFault" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4 - - - "DriveFault" Error in drive Bit 5 - - - Reserved Bit 6 - - - "DynamicError" Bit 7 - - - Specified dynamic values are limited to permissible values. "CommunicationFault" Communication error Missing or faulty communication. Bit 8 - - - Reserved Bit 9 - - - Reserved Bit 10 - - - Reserved Bit 11 - - - Reserved Bit 12 - - - Reserved Bit 13 - - - "PeripheralError" Bit 14 - - - Bit 15 - - - Error accessing a logical address Reserved "AdaptionError" Error during data transfer Bit 16... - - - Reserved Bit 31 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 441 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.17 ErrorDetail tags (speed axis) The tag structure .ErrorDetail. contains the alarm number and the effective local alarm reaction for the technology alarm that is currently pending for the technology object. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type ErrorDetail. STRUCT Values W Description Number UDINT - RON Alarm number Reaction DINT 0 to 5 RON Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 1: Stop with current dynamic values 2: Stop with maximum dynamic values 3: Stop with emergency stop ramp 4: Remove enable 5: Track setpoints S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 442 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.18 WarningWord tag (speed axis) The .WarningWord tag indicates pending warnings for the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 13 "PeripheralWarning") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type Values W WarningWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemWarning" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigWarning" Configuration error One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserWarning" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4 - - - "DriveWarning" Error in drive Bit 5 - - - Reserved Bit 6 - - - "DynamicWarning" Specified dynamic values are limited to permissible values. Bit 7 "CommunicationWarning" Communication error Missing or faulty communication. Bit 8... Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 "PeripheralWarning" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 "AdaptionWarning" Error in automatic data transfer Bit 16... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 443 Appendix A.1 Tags of the speed axis technology object A.1.19 ControlPanel tags (speed axis) The tag structure .ControlPanel. contains no user-relevant data. This tag structure is internally used. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type ControlPanel. Values W Description STRUCT Input. STRUCT TimeOut LREAL 100 to 60000 DIR EsLifeSign UDINT - DIR Command. ARRAY [1..2] OF STRUCT ReqCounter UDINT - DIR - Type UDINT - DIR - Position LREAL - DIR - Velocity LREAL - DIR - Acceleration LREAL - DIR - Deceleration LREAL - DIR - Jerk LREAL - DIR - Param LREAL - DIR - - RON Output. STRUCT RTLifeSign UDINT Command. ARRAY [1..2] OF STRUCT AckCounter UDINT - RON - Error BOOL - RON - ErrorID UDINT - RON - Done BOOL - RON - Aborted BOOL - RON - S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 444 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.1.20 InternalToTrace tags (speed axis) The tag structure .InternalToTrace. contains no user-relevant data. This tag structure is internally used. Tags Legend (Page 431) Tag Data type InternalToTrace. ARRAY [1..4] OF STRUCT Values W Description Id DINT - DIR - Value LREAL - DIR - A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.1 Legend Tag Name of the tag Data type Data type of the tag Values Value range of the tag - minimum value to maximum value (L - linear specification R - rotary specification) If no specific value is shown, the value range limits of the relevant data type apply or the information under "Description". W Effectiveness of changes in the technology data block DIR Direct: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. CAL At call of Motion Control instruction: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction in the user program. Description RES Restart: Changes to the start value in the load memory are made using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to DB in load memory). Changes will not take effect until after restart of the technology object. RON Read only: The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. Description of the tag Access to the tags is with ".". The placeholder represents the name of the technology object. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 445 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.2 Actual values and setpoints (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The following tags indicate the setpoint and actual values of the technology object. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Values W Description Position LREAL - RON Position setpoint Velocity LREAL - RON Velocity setpoint / speed setpoint ActualPosition LREAL - RON Actual position ActualVelocity LREAL - RON Actual velocity ActualSpeed LREAL - RON Actual speed of the motor (with analog setpoint = 0.0) Acceleration LREAL - RON Setpoint acceleration ActualAcceleration LREAL - RON Actual acceleration OperativeSensor UDINT 1 to 4 RON Operative encoder A.2.3 Simulation tag (positioning axis / synchronous axis) The tag structure .Simulation. contains the configuration of the simulation mode. In simulation mode, you can simulate axes without a real drive in the CPU. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Simulation. Mode Values W Description - RES1) Simulation mode STRUCT UDINT 0: No simulation, normal operation 1: Simulation mode 1) Technology version V2.0: RON S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 446 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.4 VirtualAxis tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .VirtualAxis. contains the configuration of the simulation mode. In simulation mode, you can simulate axes without a real drive in the CPU. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type VirtualAxis. Values W Description - RON Virtual axis STRUCT Mode UDINT 0: No virtual axis 1: Axis is always and exclusively operated as virtual axis A.2.5 Actor tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Actor. contains the controller-side configuration of the drive. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Actor. STRUCT Type DINT Values W Description - RON Drive connection 0: Analog output 1: PROFIdrive telegram InverseDirection BOOL - RES Inversion of the setpoint FALSE: no TRUE: Yes DataAdaption DINT - RES Automatic transfer of the drive values reference speed, maximum speed and reference torque 0: No automatic transfer, manual configuration of values 1: Automatic transfer of values configured in the drive to the configuration of the technology object Efficiency LREAL Interface. STRUCT 0.0 to 1.0 RES Efficiency of mechanics (gear and leadscrew) AddressIn VREF 0 to 65535 RON Input address for the PROFIdrive telegram AddressOut VREF 0 to 65535 RON Output address for the PROFIdrive telegram or the analog setpoint S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 447 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag EnableDriveOutput Data type Values W Description BOOL - RES "Enable output" for analog drives FALSE: disabled TRUE: Activated EnableDriveOutput Address VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address for the "Enable output" for analog setpoint DriveReadyInput BOOL - RES "Ready input" for analog drives The analog drive signals its readiness to receive speed setpoints. FALSE: disabled TRUE: Activated DriveReadyInput Address VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address for the "Enable input" for analog setpoint EnableTorqueData BOOL - RES Torque data FALSE: Deactivated TRUE: Activated TorqueDataAddressIn VREF 0 to 65535 RON Input address of the supplemental telegram TorqueDataAddress Out VREF 0 to 65535 RON Output address of the supplemental telegram LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Reference value (100%) for the speed setpoint (N-set) of the drive DriveParameter. ReferenceSpeed The speed setpoint is transferred in the PROFIdrive telegram as a normalized value from -200% to 200% of the "ReferenceSpeed". For setpoint specification via an analog output, the analog output can be operated in the range from -117% to 117%, provided the drive permits this. MaxSpeed LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Maximum value for the speed setpoint of the drive (N-set) (PROFIdrive: MaxSpeed 2 x ReferenceSpeed Analog setpoint: MaxSpeed 1.17 x ReferenceSpeed) ReferenceTorque LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Reference value (100%) for the drive torque See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 448 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.6 TorqueLimiting tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .TorqueLimiting. contains the configuration of the torque limiting. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type TorqueLimiting. Values W Description - RES Torque limiting STRUCT LimitBase DINT 0: Motor side 1: Load side PositionBased Monitorings DINT LimitDefaults. STRUCT - RES Positioning and following error monitoring 0: Monitoring deactivated 1: Monitoring activated Torque LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Limiting torque Force LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Limiting force A.2.7 Clamping tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Clamping. contains the configuration of the fixed stop detection. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Clamping. Values W Description STRUCT FollowingErrorDeviation LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Value of the following error starting from which the fixed stop is detected. PositionTolerance LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Position tolerance for clamping monitoring S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 449 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.8 Sensor[n] tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Sensor[n]. contains the controller-end configuration for the encoder, and the configuration for active and passive homing. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Sensor[n]. ARRAY [1..4] OF STRUCT Values W Description Existent BOOL - RON Displaying created encoders Type DINT - RON Encoder type 0: "INCREMENTAL" (incremental) 1: "ABSOLUTE" (absolute) 2: "CYCLIC_ABSOLUTE" (cyclic absolute) InverseDirection BOOL - RES Inversion of the actual value FALSE: no TRUE: Yes System DINT - RES Encoder system 0: "LINEAR" (linear encoder) 1: "ROTATORY" (rotary encoder) MountingMode DINT - RES Mounting type of encoder 0: On motor shaft 1: On load side 2: External measuring system DataAdaption DINT - RES Automatic transfer of the drive values reference speed, maximum speed and reference torque in the device 0: No automatic transfer, manual configuration of values 1: Automatic transfer of values configured in the drive to the configuration of the technology object Interface. AddressIn VREF 0 to 65535 RON Input address for the PROFIdrive telegram AddressOut VREF 0 to 65535 RON Output address for the PROFIdrive telegram Number UDINT 1 to 2 RON Number of the encoder in the telegram Resolution LREAL 1.0E-12 to 1.0E12 RES Resolution of a linear encoder (offset between two encoder pulses) StepsPerRevolution UDINT 1 to 8388608 RES Increments per rotary encoder revolution FineResolutionXist1 UDINT 0 to 31 RES Number of bits for fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (cyclic actual encoder value) FineResolutionXist2 UDINT 0 to 31 RES Number of bits for fine resolution Gx_XIST2 (absolute value of encoder) Parameter. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 450 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag Determinable Revolutions Data type Values W Description UDINT 0 to 8388608 RES Number of differentiable encoder revolutions for a multi-turn absolute encoder (For a single-turn absolute encoder = 1; for an incremental encoder = 0) DistancePer Revolution ActiveHoming. LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Load distance per revolution of an externally mounted encoder STRUCT Mode DINT - RES Homing mode 0: Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram 1: Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram and reference cam 2: Use homing mark via digital input SideInput BOOL - CAL Side of the digital input for active homing: FALSE: Negative side TRUE: Positive side Direction DINT - CAL Homing direction / homing mark approach direction 0: Positive homing direction 1: Negative homing direction DigitalInputAddress VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address of digital input HomePositionOffset LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 CAL Home position offset SwitchLevel BOOL - RES Signal level that is present at the digital input when homing mark is approached FALSE: Low level TRUE: High level PassiveHoming. Mode STRUCT DINT - RES Homing mode 0: Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram 1: Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram and reference cam 2: Use homing mark via digital input SideInput BOOL - CAL Side of digital input during passive homing: FALSE: Negative side TRUE: Positive side Direction DINT - CAL Homing direction / homing mark approach direction 0: Positive homing direction 1: Negative homing direction 2: Current homing direction DigitalInputAddress VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address of digital input SwitchLevel BOOL - RES Signal level that is present at the digital input when homing mark is approached FALSE: Low level TRUE: High level See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 451 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.9 Extrapolation tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Extrapolation. contains the configuration of the actual value extrapolation. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Extrapolation. LeadingAxisDependent Time Values W Description - RON Extrapolation time component (caused by leading axis) STRUCT LREAL Results from the following times: FollowingAxis DependentTime LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR * Time of actual value acquisition for the leading axis * Ipo cycle * Time of actual position filter of leading axis (T1 + T2) Extrapolation time component (caused by following axis) Results from the following times: * * PositionFilter. For a following axis with set velocity precontrol: - Communication cycle - Ipo cycle - Speed control loop substitute time for the following axis - Output time of the setpoint for the following axis For a following axis without velocity precontrol: - Communication cycle - Ipo cycle - Position control loop equivalent time (1/Kv from .PositionControl.Kv) - Output time of the setpoint for the following axis STRUCT T1 LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Position filter time constant T1 T2 LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Position filter time constant T2 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Velocity filter time constant T1 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Tolerance band width for velocity 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Hysteresis value VelocityFilter. T1 VelocityTolerance. Range Hysteresis. Value STRUCT LREAL STRUCT LREAL STRUCT LREAL S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 452 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.10 LoadGear tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .LoadGear. contains the configuration for the load gear. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type LoadGear. Value range W Description STRUCT Numerator UDINT 1 to 4294967295 RES Load gear counter Denominator UDINT 1 to 4294967295 RES Load gear denominator A.2.11 Properties tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Properties. contains the configuration of the type of axis or motion. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Properties. STRUCT MotionType DINT Value range W Description - RON Indication of axis or motion type: 0: Linear axis or motion 1: Rotary axis or motion S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 453 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.12 Units tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Units. shows the set technological units. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Units. LengthUnit VelocityUnit Values W Description - RON Unit for position STRUCT UDINT UDINT - RON TimeUnit UDINT - RON TorqueUnit UDINT - RON 1010 m 1013 mm 1011 km 1014 m 1015 nm 1019 in 1018 ft 1021 mi 1004 rad 1005 Unit for velocity 1521 /s 1522 /min 1086 rad/s 1523 rad/min 1062 mm/s 1061 m/s 1524 mm/min 1525 m/min 1526 mm/h 1063 m/h 1527 km/min 1064 km/h 1066 in/s 1069 in/min 1067 ft/s 1070 ft/min 1075 mi/h Unit for time 1054 s Unit for torque 1126 Nm 1128 kNm S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 454 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag Data type Values W Description 1529 ForceUnit A.2.13 UDINT - RON lbf in (pound-force-inch) 1530 lbf ft 1531 ozf in (ounce-force-inch) 1532 ozf ft 1533 pdl in (poundal-inch) 1534 pdl ft Unit for force 1120 N 1122 kN 1094 lbf (pound-force) 1093 ozf (ounce-force) 1535 pdl (poundals) Mechanics tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Mechanics. contains the configuration of the mechanics. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Mechanics. STRUCT LeadScrew LREAL Value range W Description 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Leadscrew pitch S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 455 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.14 Modulo tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Modulo. contains the configuration of the modulo function. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Modulo. Values W Description - RES FALSE: Modulo conversion disabled TRUE: Modulo conversion enabled STRUCT Enable BOOL When modulo conversion is enabled, a check is made for modulo length > 0.0 Length LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 RES Modulo length StartValue LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RES Modulo start value See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.15 DynamicLimits tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .DynamicLimits. contains the configuration of the dynamic limits. During Motion Control, no dynamic values greater than the dynamic limits are permitted. If you have specified greater values in a Motion Control instruction, then motion is performed using the dynamic limits, and a warning is indicated (alarm 501 to 503 - Dynamic values were limited). Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type DynamicLimits. Values W Description STRUCT MaxVelocity LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Maximum permissible velocity of the axis Velocity LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Current maximum velocity of the axis MaxAcceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Maximum permissible acceleration of the axis MaxDeceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Maximum permissible deceleration of the axis MaxJerk LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Maximum permissible jerk on the axis See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 456 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.16 DynamicDefaults tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .DynamicDefaults. contains the configuration of the dynamic defaults. These settings will be used when you specify a dynamic value less than 0.0 in a Motion Control instruction (exceptions: MC_MoveJog.Velocity, MC_MoveVelocity.Velocity). Changes to the default dynamic values will be applied at the next positive edge at the "Execute" parameter of a Motion Control instruction. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type DynamicDefaults. Velocity Values W Description 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default velocity STRUCT LREAL Acceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default acceleration Deceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default deceleration Jerk LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Default jerk EmergencyDeceleration LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Emergency stop deceleration See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.17 PositionLimits_SW tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .PositionLimits_SW. contains the configuration for position monitoring with software limit switches. Software limit switches are used to limit the operating range of a positioning axis. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type PositionLimits_SW. STRUCT Values W Description Active BOOL - DIR FALSE: Monitoring disabled TRUE: Monitoring enabled MinPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 DIR Position of negative software limit switches MaxPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 DIR Position of positive software limit switches ("MaxPosition" > "MinPosition") See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 457 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.18 PositionLimits_HW tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .PositionLimits_HW. contains the configuration of position monitoring with hardware limit switches. Hardware limit switches are used to limit the traversing range of a positioning axis. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type PositionLimits_HW. Values W Description - RES FALSE: Monitoring disabled TRUE: Monitoring enabled STRUCT Active BOOL With "Active", both (negative and positive) hardware limit switches are activated or deactivated. MinSwitchLevel BOOL - RES Level selection for activation of the negative hardware limit switch: FALSE: Low level (Low active) TRUE: High level (High active) MinSwitchAddress VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address for the negative hardware limit switch MaxSwitchLevel BOOL - RES Level selection for enabling of the positive hardware limit switch: FALSE: Low level (Low active) TRUE: High level (High active) MaxSwitchAddress VREF 0 to 65535 RON Address for the positive hardware limit switch See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 458 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.19 Homing tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Homing. contains the configuration for homing the TO. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Homing. Values W Description STRUCT AutoReversal BOOL - RES Reversal at the hardware limit switches FALSE: no TRUE: Yes ApproachDirection BOOL - CAL Direction of approach to the homing position switch FALSE: positive direction TRUE: Negative direction ApproachVelocity ReferencingVelocity HomePosition LREAL LREAL LREAL L: 0.0 to 10000.0 mm/s R: 0.0 to 360000.0/s CAL L: 0.0 to 1000.0 mm/s R: 0.0 to 36000.0/s CAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 CAL Approach velocity Velocity during active homing at which the reference cam and home position are approached. Homing velocity Velocity during active homing at which the home position is approached. Home position See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 459 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.20 Override tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .Override. contains the configuration for the override parameters. The override parameters are used to apply a correction percentage to default values. An override change takes effect immediately, and is performed with the dynamic settings in effect in the Motion Control instruction. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Override. Velocity Values W Description 0.0 to 200.0% DIR Velocity or speed override STRUCT LREAL Percentage correction of the velocity/speed See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 460 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.21 PositionControl tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .PositionControl. contains the settings of closed loop position control. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type PositionControl. STRUCT Values W Description Kv LREAL 0.0 to 2147480.0 DIR Proportional gain of the closed loop position control ("Kv" > 0.0) Kpc LREAL 0.0 to 150.0% DIR Velocity precontrol of the position control Recommended setting: * Isochronous drive connection via PROFIdrive: 100.0% * Non-isochronous drive connection via PROFIdrive: 0.0 to 100.0% * Analog drive connection: 0.0 to 100.0% EnableDSC BOOL - RES Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) FALSE: DSC disabled TRUE: DSC enabled DSC is only possible with one of the following PROFIdrive telegrams: * Standard telegram 5 or 6 * SIEMENS telegram 105 or 106 SmoothingTimeByChangeDifference LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E+12 DIR Manipulated variable ramp at step change of control deviation due to encoder switchover. InitialOperativeSensor UDINT - RES Active encoder after initialization of the axis. (encoder number 1 to 4) This encoder is used after startup of the CPU and after a restart of the technology object (Page 314). At an operating mode transition from STOP RUN of the CPU (without restart of the technology object), the encoder that was also active before the STOP is still being used. ControlDifference Quantization. STRUCT S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 461 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag Mode Data type Values W Description DINT - RES Type of quantification Configuration of a quantization when a drive with stepper motor interface is connected 0: No quantification 1: Quantization corresponding to encoder resolution 2: Quantization to a direct value (configuration is performed using the parameter view (data structure)) Value LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E+12 RES Value of quantification Configuration of a value for quantization to a direct value (.PositionControl.ControlDifferenceQuantizatio n.Mode = 2) (configuration is performed using the parameter view (data structure)) See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.22 DynamicAxisModel tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .DynamicAxisModel. contains the settings of the balancing filter. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type DynamicAxisModel. STRUCT Values W Description VelocityTimeConstant LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Speed control loop substitute time [s] AdditionalPositionTimeConstant LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Additive position control loop substitute time [s] S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 462 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.23 FollowingError tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .FollowingError. contains the configuration for following error monitoring. If the permissible following error is exceeded, then technology alarm 521 is output, and the technology object is disabled (alarm reaction: remove enable). When the warning level is reached, a warning is output (technology alarm 522). Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type FollowingError. Values W Description STRUCT EnableMonitoring BOOL - RES FALSE: Following error monitoring disabled TRUE: Following error monitoring enabled MinValue LREAL L: 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Permissible following error at velocities below the value of "MinVelocity". DIR Maximum permissible following error, which may be reached at the maximum velocity. R: 0.001 to 1.0E12 MaxValue LREAL L: 0.0 to 1.0E12 R: 0.002 to 1.0E12 MinVelocity LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR "MinValue" is permissible below this velocity and is held constant. WarningLevel LREAL 0.0 to 100.0 DIR Warning level: Percentage value relative to the valid maximum following error. See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 463 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.24 PositionMonitoring tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .PositioningMonitoring. contains the configuration for position monitoring at the end of a positioning motion. If the actual position value at the end of a positioning motion is reached within the tolerance time and remains in the positioning window for the minimum dwell time, then .StatusWord.X5 (Done) is set in the technology data block. This completes a Motion Control job. If the tolerance time is exceeded, then technology alarm 541 "Positioning monitoring" with supplemental value 1: Display "Target range not reached". If the minimum dwell time is not met, then technology alarm 541 "Positioning monitoring" with supplemental value 2: Display "Exit target range again". Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type PositioningMonitoring. STRUCT ToleranceTime LREAL Values W Description 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Tolerance time Maximum permitted duration from reaching velocity setpoint zero, until entrance into the positioning window. MinDwellTime LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Minimum dwell time in the positioning window: Window LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Positioning window See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 464 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.25 StandstillSignal tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StandstillSignal. contains the configuration for the standstill signal. If the actual velocity value is below the velocity threshold, and does not exceed it during the minimum dwell time, then the standstill signal .StatusWord.X7 (Standstill) is set. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StandstillSignal. STRUCT VelocityThreshold LREAL Values W Description Configuration for the standstill signal 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Velocity threshold If velocity is below this threshold, then the minimum dwell time begins. MinDwellTime LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Minimum dwell time See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.26 StatusPositioning tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusPositioning. indicates the status of a positioning motion. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusPositioning. Values W Description STRUCT Distance LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Distance to the target position TargetPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Target position FollowingError LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Current following error SetpointExecutionTime LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Setpoint execution time of the axis (Results from TIpo, Tvtc or 1/kv, TSend and TO of the axis) See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 465 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.27 StatusDrive tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusDrive. indicates the status of the drive. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusDrive. Values W Description - RON Operational status of the drive STRUCT InOperation BOOL FALSE: Drive not ready. Setpoints will not be executed. TRUE: Drive ready. Setpoints can be executed. CommunicationOK BOOL - RON Cyclic BUS communication between controller and drive FALSE: Not established TRUE: Established Error BOOL - RON FALSE: No drive error TRUE: Drive error AdaptionState DINT - RON Status of automatic data transfer of drive parameters 0: "NOT_ADAPTED" (Data not transferred) 1: "IN_ADAPTION" (Data transfer in progress) 2: "ADAPTED" (Data transfer complete) 3: "NOT_APPLICABLE" (Data transfer not selected, not possible) 4: "ADAPTION_ERROR" (Error during data transfer) See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.28 StatusServo tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusServo. indicates the status for the balancing filter. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusServo. STRUCT Values W Description BalancedPosition LREAL - RON Position after the balancing filter. ControlDifference LREAL - RON Control error S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 466 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.29 StatusSensor[n] tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusSensor[n]. indicates the status of the measuring system. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusSensor[n]. ARRAY [1..4] OF STRUCT Values W Description State DINT - RON Status of actual encoder value 0: "NOT_VALID" (not valid) 1: "WAITING_FOR_VALID" (waiting for valid status) 2: "VALID" (valid) CommunicationOK BOOL - RON Cyclic BUS communication between controller and encoder FALSE: Not established TRUE: Established Error BOOL - RON FALSE: No error in the measuring system TRUE: Error in the measuring system. AbsEncoderOffset LREAL - RON Home point offset to the value of an absolute value encoder. The value will be retentively stored in the CPU. Control BOOL - RON FALSE: Encoder is not active TRUE: Encoder is active Position LREAL - RON Encoder position Velocity LREAL - RON Encoder velocity AdaptionState DINT - RON Status of automatic data transfer of encoder parameters 0: "NOT_ADAPTED" (Data not transferred) 1: "IN_ADAPTION" (Data transfer in progress) 2: "ADAPTED" (Data transfer complete) 3: "NOT_APPLICABLE" (Data transfer not selected, not possible) 4: "ADAPTION_ERROR" (Error during data transfer) See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 467 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.30 StatusExtrapolation tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusExtrapolation. indicates the status of the actual value extrapolation. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Extrapolation. Values W Description STRUCT FilteredPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Position after position filter FilteredVelocity LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Velocity according to tolerance band ExtrapolatedPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Extrapolated position ExtrapolatedVelocity LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Extrapolated velocity S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 468 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.31 StatusSynchronizedMotion tags (synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusSynchronizedMotion. indicates the status of the synchronous operation. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusSynchronizedMotion. FunctionState Value range W Description - RON Indication of which synchronous operation function is active STRUCT DINT 0: No synchronous operation active 1: Gearing (MC_GearIn) 2: Gearing with specified synchronous positions (MC_GearInPos) 3: Camming (MC_CamIn) PhaseShift LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Current absolute leading value shift ActualMaster DB_ANY 0 to 65535 RON At the start of a "MC_GearIn" job, the number of the technology data block of the currently used leading axis is displayed. "ActualMaster" = 0 when synchronous operation is inactive ActualCam DB_ANY 0 to 65535 RON Cam that is currently being used for camming MasterOffset LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Current shift of the leading value range of the cam MasterScaling LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Current scaling of the leading value range of the cam SlaveOffset LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Current shift of the following value range of the cam SlaveScaling LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Current scaling of the following value range of the cam StatusWord. STRUCT Bit 0 MaxVelocityExceeded BOOL - RON Configured maximum velocity is exceeded during synchronous operation. Bit 1 MaxAccelerationExceeded BOOL - RON Configured maximum acceleration is exceeded during synchronous operation. Bit 2 MaxDecelerationExceeded BOOL - RON Configured maximum deceleration is exceeded during synchronous operation. Bit 3 InSimulation BOOL - RON FALSE: Synchronous operation not simulated BOOL - RON TRUE: Synchronous operation is being simulated Bit 4... Bit 31 Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 469 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object See also Synchronous axis technology object (Page 105) A.2.32 StatusKinematicsMotion tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The .StatusKinematicsMotion tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 2 "MaxDecelerationExceeded") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Values StatusKinematicsMotion DWORD - RON Status data of the technology object Bit 0 - - - W Description "MaxVelocityExceeded" 0: The TO Kinematics has a lower velocity setpoint calculated than the one configured on the axis 1: The TO Kinematics has a higher velocity setpoint calculated than the one configured on the axis. Bit 1 - - - "MaxAccelerationExceeded" 0: The TO Kinematics has a lower acceleration setpoint calculated as maxAcceleration of the axis. 1: The TO Kinematics has a higher acceleration setpoint calculated as maxAcceleration of the axis. Bit 2 - - - "MaxDecelerationExceeded" 0: The TO Kinematics has a lower delay setpoint calculated as maxDeceleration of the axis. 1: The TO Kinematics has a higher delay setpoint calculated as maxDeceleration of the axis. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 470 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.33 StatusTorqueData tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusTorqueData. indicates the status of the torque data. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusTorqueData. Value range W Description - RON Additive torque setpoint active function STRUCT CommandAdditive TorqueActive DINT 0: No 1: Yes CommandTorqueRange DINT Active - ActualTorque -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Torque limits B +, B- active function 0: No 1: Yes A.2.34 LREAL RON Actual torque of the axis StatusMotionIn tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .StatusMotionIn. indicates the status of the MotionIn function. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type StatusMotionIn. STRUCT FunctionState DINT Value range W Description - RON 0: No MotionIn function active 1: MotionInVelocity active 2: MotionInPosition active S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 471 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.35 StatusWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The .StatusWord tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 5 "HomingDone") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Values W Description StatusWord DWORD - RON Status information of the technology object Bit 0 - - - "Enable" Enable status 0: The technology object is disabled. 1: The technology object is enabled. Bit 1 - - - "Error" 0: No error present. 1: An error is present. Bit 2 - - - "RestartActive" 0: No "Restart" is active. 1: A "Restart" is active. The technology object is being reinitialized. Bit 3 - - - "OnlineStartValuesChanged" 0: The "Restart" tags are unchanged. 1: The "Restart" tags were changed. For the changes to be applied, the technology object must be reinitialized. Bit 4 - - - "ControlPanelActive" 0: The axis control panel is disabled. 1: The axis control panel is active. Bit 5 - - - "HomingDone" Homing status 0: The technology object is not homed. 1: The technology object is homed. Bit 6 - - - "Done" 0: A motion job is in progress or the axis control panel is activated. 1: No motion job is in progress and the axis control panel is deactivated. Bit 7 - - - "Standstill" Standstill signal 0: The axis is in motion. 1: The axis is at a standstill. Bit 8 - - - "PositioningCommand" 0: No positioning job is in progress. 1: A positioning job is running ("MC_MoveRelative", "MC_MoveAbsolute"). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 472 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 9 - - - "JogCommand" 0: No "MC_MoveJog" job is running. 1: An "MC_MoveJog" job is running Bit 10 - - - "VelocityCommand" 0: No "MC_MoveVelocity" job is running. 1: An "MC_MoveVelocity" job is running Bit 11 - - - "HomingCommand" 0: No "MC_Home" job in progress. 1: An "MC_Home" job is being processed. Bit 12 - - - "ConstantVelocity" 0: The axis is accelerated or decelerated. 1: The setpoint velocity is reached. The axis is traversing at this constant velocity or is at a standstill. Bit 13 - - - "Accelerating" 0: No acceleration job is in progress. 1: An acceleration operation is active. Bit 14 - - - "Decelerating" 0: No deceleration process is running. 1: A deceleration operation is active. Bit 15 - - - "SWLimitMinActive" 0: No negative software limit switch was reached. 1: A negative software limit switch was reached or exceeded. Bit 16 - - - "SWLimitMaxActive" 0: No positive software limit switch was reached. 1: A positive software limit switch was reached or exceeded. Bit 17 - - - "HWLimitMinActive" 0: No negative hardware limit switch was reached. 1: A negative hardware limit switch was reached or exceeded. Bit 18 - - - "HWLimitMaxActive" 0: No positive hardware limit switch was reached. 1: A positive hardware limit switch was reached or exceeded. Bit 19 - - - Reserved Bit 20 - - - Reserved Bit 21 - - - Positioning axis technology object: Reserved Synchronous axis technology object: "Synchronizing" 0: The axis does not synchronize to a leading value. 1: The axis synchronizes to a leading value. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 473 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 22 - - - Positioning axis technology object: Reserved Synchronous axis technology object: "Synchronous" 0: The axis moves asynchronous to a leading value. 1: The axis moves synchronously to a leading value. Bit 23 - - - "SuperimposedMotionCommand" 0: No overlaid movement is active. 1: No overlaid movement is running. Bit 24 - - - Positioning axis technology object: Reserved Synchronous axis technology object: "PhasingCommand" 0: No Motion Control instruction for leading value shift is running. 1: A Motion Control instruction for leading value shift is active. Bit 25 - - - "AxisSimulation" 0: The simulation is not running. 1: The simulation is active. Bit 26 - - - "TorqueLimitingCommand" 0: No "MC_TorqueLimiting" job is running. 1: An "MC_TorqueLimiting" job is running Bit 27 - - - "InLimitation" 0: The drive does not operate at the torque limit. 1: The drive is operating at the torque limit. Bit 28 - - - "NonPositionControlled" 0: The axis is in position-controlled mode. 1: The axis is not in position-controlled mode. Bit 29 - - - "KinematicsMotionCommand" 0: The axis is not used for a kinematics job. 1: The axis is used for a kinematics job. Bit 30 - - - "InClamping" 0: The axis is not clamped at a fixed stop. 1: The axis is clamped at a fixed stop. Bit 31 - - - "MotionInCommand" 0: No MotionIn function is active. 1: The "MotionInVelocity" job is running. 2: The "MotionInPosition" job is running See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 474 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.36 ErrorWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The .ErrorWord tag indicates technology object errors (technology alarms). Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 3 "CommandNotAccepted") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 445) Tag Values W ErrorWord DWORD Data type - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemFault" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigFault" Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. Bit 2 - - - "UserFault" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use Bit 3 - - - "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4 - - - "DriveFault" Error in drive Bit 5 - - - "SensorFault" Error in encoder system Bit 6 - - - "DynamicError" Bit 7 - - - "CommunicationFault" Specified dynamic values are limited to permissible values. Communication error Missing or faulty communication. Bit 8 - - - "SWLimit" Software limit switch reached or overtraveled. Bit 9 - - - "HWLimit" Hardware limit switch reached or overtraveled. Bit 10 - - - "HomingError" Error during homing operation The homing cannot be completed. Bit 11 - - - "FollowingErrorFault" Following error limits exceeded Bit 12 - - - "PositioningFault" Positioning error Bit 13 - - - "PeripheralError" Error accessing a logical address S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 475 Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 14 - - - Positioning axis technology object: Reserved Synchronous axis technology object: "SynchronousError" Error during synchronous operation The leading axis specified for the Motion Control instruction "MC_GearIn" was not configured as a possible leading axis. Bit 15 - - - "AdaptionError" Error in automatic data transfer Bit 16... - - - Reserved Bit 31 See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.37 ErrorDetail tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .ErrorDetail. contains the alarm number and the effective local alarm reaction for the technology alarm that is currently pending for the technology object. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. Tags Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type ErrorDetail. Values W Description STRUCT Number UDINT - RON Alarm number Reaction DINT 0 to 5 RON Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 1: Stop with current dynamic values 2: Stop with maximum dynamic values 3: Stop with emergency stop ramp 4: Remove enable 5: Track setpoints See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) Technology alarms (Page 333) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 476 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.2 Tags of the positioning axis/synchronous axis technology object A.2.38 WarningWord tag (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The .WarningWord tag indicates pending warnings for the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 13 "PeripheralWarning") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 445) Tag Data type Values W WarningWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemWarning" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigWarning" Configuration error One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally. Bit 2 - - - "UserWarning" Bit 3 - - - "CommandNotAccepted" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4 - - - "DriveWarning" Error in drive Bit 5 - - - "SensorWarning" Error in encoder system Bit 6 - - - "DynamicError" Specified dynamic values are limited to permissible values. Bit 7 - - - "CommunicationWarning" Communication error Missing or faulty communication. Bit 8 - - - "SWLimitMin" Bit 9 - - - "SWLimitMax" Bit 10 - - - "HomingWarning" Error during homing operation The homing cannot be completed. Bit 11 - - - "FollowingErrorWarning" Warning limit of following error monitoring reached/exceeded Bit 12 - - - "PositioningWarning" Positioning error Bit 13 - - - "PeripheralWarning" Error accessing a logical address S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 477 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 14 - - - Positioning axis technology object: Reserved Synchronous axis technology object: "SynchronousWarning" Error during synchronous operation The leading axis specified for the Motion Control instruction "MC_GearIn" was not configured as a possible leading axis. Bit 15 - - - "AdaptionWarning" Error in automatic data transfer Bit 16... Bit 31 - - - Reserved See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.39 ControlPanel tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .ControlPanel. contains no user-relevant data. This tag structure is internally used. See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) A.2.40 InternalToTrace tags (positioning axis/synchronous axis) The tag structure .InternalToTrace. contains no user-relevant data. This tag structure is internally used. See also Evaluating the technology data block (Page 285) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 478 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.1 Legend Tag Name of the tag Data type Data type of the tag Values Value range of the tag - minimum value to maximum value If no specific value is shown, the value range limits of the relevant data type apply or the information under "Description". W Effectiveness of changes in the technology data block DIR CAL Direct: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. At call of Motion Control instruction: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction in the user program. Description RES Restart: Changes to the start value in the load memory are made using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to DB in load memory). Changes will not take effect until after restart of the technology object. RON Read only: The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. Description of the tag Access to the tags is with ".". The placeholder represents the name of the technology object. A.3.2 Actual values and setpoints (external encoder) The following tags indicate the setpoint and actual values of the technology object. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Values W Description ActualPosition LREAL - RON Actual position ActualVelocity LREAL - RON Actual velocity ActualAcceleration LREAL - RON Actual acceleration S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 479 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.3 Sensor tags (external encoder) The tag structure .Sensor. contains the controller-end configuration for the encoder, and the configuration for active and passive homing. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Sensor. Values W Description - RES Encoder type STRUCT Type DINT 0: "INCREMENTAL" (incremental) 1: "ABSOLUTE" (absolute) 2: "CYCLIC_ABSOLUTE" (cyclic absolute) InverseDirection BOOL - RES Inversion of the actual value FALSE: no TRUE: Yes System DINT - RES Encoder system 0: "LINEAR" (linear encoder) 1: "ROTATORY" (rotary encoder) MountingMode DINT - RES Mounting type of encoder 0: On motor shaft 1: On load side 2: External measuring system DataAdaption DINT - RES Automatic transfer of the drive values reference speed, maximum speed and reference torque in the device 0: No automatic transfer, manual configuration of values 1: Automatic transfer of values configured in the drive to the configuration of the technology object Interface. AddressIn VREF 0 to 65535 RON Input address for the PROFIdrive telegram AddressOut VREF 0 to 65535 RON Output address for the PROFIdrive telegram Number UDINT 1 to 2 RON Number of the encoder in the telegram Resolution LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RES Resolution of a linear encoder (offset between two encoder pulses) StepsPerRevolution UDINT 1 to 8388608 RES Increments per rotary encoder revolution FineResolutionXist1 UDINT 0 to 31 RES Number of bits for fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (cyclic actual encoder value) FineResolutionXist2 UDINT 0 to 31 RES Number of bits for fine resolution Gx_XIST2 (absolute value of encoder) Determinable Revolutions UDINT 0 to 8388608 RES Number of differentiable encoder revolutions for a multi-turn absolute encoder Parameter. (For a single-turn absolute encoder = 1; for an incremental encoder = 0) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 480 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder Tag DistancePer Revolution PassiveHoming. Mode Data type Values W Description LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Load distance per revolution of an externally mounted encoder - RES Homing mode STRUCT DINT 0: Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram 1: Use zero mark via PROFIdrive telegram and reference cam 2: Use homing mark via digital input SideInput BOOL - CAL Side of digital input during passive homing: FALSE: Negative side TRUE: Positive side Direction DINT - CAL Homing direction / homing mark approach direction 0: Positive homing direction 1: Negative homing direction 2: Current homing direction DigitalInputAddress VREF 0 to 65535 RES Address of the digital input SwitchLevel BOOL - RON Signal level that is present at the digital input when homing mark is approached FALSE: Low level TRUE: High level S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 481 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.4 Extrapolation tag (external encoder) The tag structure .Extrapolation. contains the configuration of the actual value extrapolation. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Extrapolation. LeadingAxisDependent Time Values W Description - RON Extrapolation time component (caused by leading axis) STRUCT LREAL Results from the following times: FollowingAxis DependentTime LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR * Time of actual value acquisition for the leading axis * Ipo cycle * Time of actual position filter of leading axis (T1 + T2) Extrapolation time component (caused by following axis) Results from the following times: * * PositionFilter. For a following axis with set velocity precontrol: - Communication cycle - Ipo cycle - Speed control loop substitute time for the following axis - Output time of the setpoint for the following axis For a following axis without velocity precontrol: - Communication cycle - Ipo cycle - Position control loop equivalent time (1/Kv from .PositionControl.Kv) - Output time of the setpoint for the following axis STRUCT T1 LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Position filter time constant T1 T2 LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Position filter time constant T2 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Velocity filter time constant T1 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Tolerance band width for velocity 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Hysteresis value VelocityFilter. T1 VelocityTolerance. Range Hysteresis. Value STRUCT LREAL STRUCT LREAL STRUCT LREAL S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 482 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.5 LoadGear tags (external encoder) The tag structure .LoadGear. contains the configuration for the load gear. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type LoadGear. Value range W Description STRUCT Numerator UDINT 1 to 4294967295 RES Load gear counter Denominator UDINT 1 to 4294967295 RES Load gear denominator A.3.6 Properties tags (external encoder) The tag structure .Properties. contains the configuration of the type of axis or motion. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Value range W Description DINT - RON Indication of axis or motion type: 0: Linear axis or motion 1: Rotary axis or motion Properties. MotionType S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 483 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.7 Units tag (external encoder) The tag structure .Units. shows the set technological units. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Units. LengthUnit VelocityUnit TimeUnit Values W Description - RON Unit for position STRUCT UDINT UDINT UDINT - - RON RON 1010 m 1013 mm 1011 km 1014 m 1015 nm 1019 in 1018 ft 1021 mi 1004 rad 1005 Unit for velocity 1521 /s 1522 /min 1086 rad/s 1523 rad/min 1062 mm/s 1061 m/s 1524 mm/min 1525 m/min 1526 mm/h 1063 m/h 1527 km/min 1064 km/h 1066 in/s 1069 in/min 1067 ft/s 1070 ft/min 1075 mi/h Unit for time 1054 s S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 484 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.8 Mechanics tags (external encoder) The tag structure .Mechanics. contains the configuration of the mechanics. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Value range W Description LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Leadscrew pitch Mechanics. LeadScrew A.3.9 Modulo tags (external encoder) The tag structure .Modulo. contains the configuration of the modulo function. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Modulo. STRUCT Enable BOOL Values W - RES Description FALSE: Modulo conversion disabled TRUE: Modulo conversion enabled When modulo conversion is enabled, a check is made for modulo length > 0.0 Length LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 RES Modulo length StartValue LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RES Modulo start value A.3.10 Homing tags (external encoder) The tag structure .Homing. contains the configuration for homing the TO. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Homing. HomePosition Values W Description -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 CAL Home position STRUCT LREAL S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 485 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.11 StatusSensor tags (external encoder) The tag structure .StatusSensor. indicates the status of the measuring system. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type StatusSensor. Values W Description STRUCT State DINT - RON Status of actual encoder value 0: "NOT_VALID" (not valid) 1: "WAITING_FOR_VALID" (waiting for valid status) 2: "VALID" (valid) CommunicationOK BOOL - RON Cyclic BUS communication between controller and encoder FALSE: Not established TRUE: Established Error BOOL - RON FALSE: No error in the measuring system TRUE: Error in the measuring system. AbsEncoderOffset LREAL - RON Home point offset to the value of an absolute value encoder. The value will be retentively stored in the CPU. Control BOOL - RON FALSE: Encoder is not active Position LREAL - RON Encoder position Velocity LREAL - RON Encoder velocity AdaptionState DINT - RON Status of automatic data transfer of encoder parameters TRUE: Encoder is active 0: "NOT_ADAPTED" (Data not transferred) 1: "IN_ADAPTION" (Data transfer in progress) 2: "ADAPTED" (Data transfer complete) 3: "NOT_APPLICABLE" (Data transfer not selected, not possible) 4: "ADAPTION_ERROR" (Error during data transfer) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 486 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.12 StatusExtrapolation tag (external encoder) The tag structure .StatusExtrapolation. indicates the status of the actual value extrapolation. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Extrapolation. Values W Description STRUCT FilteredPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Position after position filter FilteredVelocity LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Velocity according to tolerance band ExtrapolatedPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Extrapolated position ExtrapolatedVelocity LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Extrapolated velocity S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 487 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.13 StatusWord tag (external encoder) The .StatusWord tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 5 "HomingDone") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Values W Description Status Word DWORD - RON Status data of the technology object Bit 0 - - - "Enable" Enable status 0: Technology object disabled 1: Technology object enabled Bit 1 - - - "Error" 0: No error present 1: Error present Bit 2 - - - "RestartActive" 0: No "Restart" active 1: "Restart" active. The technology object is being reinitialized. Bit 3 - - - "OnlineStartValuesChanged" 0: "Restart" tags unchanged 1: Change to "Restart" tags. For the changes to be applied, the technology object must be reinitialized. Bit 4 - - - Reserved Bit 5 - - - "HomingDone" Homing status 0: Technology object not homed 1: Technology object homed Bit 6 - - - "Done" 0: Motion job is running, or Axis control panel enabled 1: No motion job is running and axis control panel disabled Bit 7 - Bit 8 - Bit 9 - Bit 10 - Bit 11 - - - Reserved - Reserved - - Reserved - - Reserved - - "HomingCommand" 0: No "MC_Home" job is running 1: "MC_Home" job is running Bit 12... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 488 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.14 ErrorWord tag (external encoder) The .ErrorWord tag indicates technology object errors (technology alarms). Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 3 "CommandNotAccepted") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Values W ErrorWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemFault" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigFault" Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserFault" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4 - - - Reserved Bit 5 - - - "SensorFault" Bit 6 - - - Reserved Bit 7 - - - "CommunicationFault" Error in encoder system Communication error Missing or faulty communication. Bit 8 - - - Reserved Bit 9 - - - Reserved Bit 10 - - - "HomingError" Error during homing operation The homing cannot be completed. Bit 11 - - - Reserved Bit 12 - - - Reserved Bit 13 - - - "PeripheralError" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... - - - Reserved Bit 31 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 489 Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.15 ErrorDetail tags (external encoder) The tag structure .ErrorDetail. contains the alarm number and the effective local alarm reaction for the technology alarm that is currently pending for the technology object. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type ErrorDetail. STRUCT Values W Description Number UDINT - RON Alarm number Reaction DINT 0, 10 RON Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 10: Remove enable For the technology object external encoder, only alarm reactions 0 and 4 are possible. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 490 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.3 Tags of the technology object external encoder A.3.16 WarningWord tag (external encoder) The .WarningWord tag indicates pending warnings for the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 13 "PeripheralWarning") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type Values W Warning DWORD Word - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemWarning" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigWarning" Configuration error One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally. Bit 2 - - - "UserWarning" Bit 3 - - - "CommandNotAccepted" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4 - - - Reserved Bit 5 - - - "SensorWarning" Bit 6 - - - Reserved Bit 7 - - - "CommunicationWarning" Error in encoder system Communication error Missing or faulty communication. Bit 8 - - - Reserved Bit 9 - - - Reserved Bit 10 - - - "HomingWarning" Error during homing operation The homing cannot be completed. Bit 11 - - - Reserved Bit 12 - - - Reserved Bit 13 - - - "PeripheralWarning" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 491 Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.3.17 InternalToTrace tags (external encoder) The tag structure .InternalToTrace. contains no application-relevant data. This tag structure is internally used. Tags Legend (Page 479) Tag Data type InternalToTrace. ARRAY [1..4] OF STRUCT Values W Description Id DINT - DIR - Value LREAL - RON - A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.1 Legend Tag Name of the tag Data type Data type of the tag Values Value range of the tag - minimum value to maximum value If no specific value is shown, the value range limits of the relevant data type apply or the information under "Description". W Effectiveness of changes in the technology data block DIR Direct: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. CAL At call of Motion Control instruction: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction in the user program. Description RES Restart: Changes to the start value in the load memory are made using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to DB in load memory). Changes will not take effect until after restart of the technology object. RON Read only: The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. Description of the tag Access to the tags is with ".". The placeholder represents the name of the technology object. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 492 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.2 Display data (measuring input) The .Status and .InputState tags show the status of the measuring input function and the input of the measuring input. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Values W Description Status DINT - RON Measuring input function status 0: "INACTIVE" (measurement is not active) 1: "WAITING_FOR_TRIGGER" (measuring input is waiting for measuring event) 2: "TRIGGER_OCCURRED" (one or more measured values have been acquired) 3: "MEASURING_ERROR" (error during the measurement) InputState BOOL - RON Measuring input input status FALSE: Input of measuring input not active TRUE: Input of measuring input active A.4.3 Parameter tags (measuring input) The tag structure .Parameter. contains the configuration of the basic parameters of the measuring input technology object. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Parameter. STRUCT MeasuringInputType DINT Values W Description - RON Measuring input type 0: "TIME_BASED" (measurement using time stamp) 1: "PROFIDRIVE" (measuring event using PROFIdrive telegram) PROFIdriveProbe Number UDINT 1, 2 RES Number of the measuring input to be used for a measurement using PROFIdrive telegram MeasuringRangeActivation Time LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RON System share for activation time of measuring range MeasuringRangeAdditional ActivationTime LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Additional activation time when using measuring range limits [ms] CorrectionTime LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 RES Correction time for the measurement result [ms] S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 493 Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.4 Interface tags (measuring input) The tag structure .Interface. contains the configuration of the input properties for the technology object measuring input. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Interface. Address A.4.5 Values W Description - RON I/O address for the digital measuring input STRUCT VREF Units tags (measuring input) The tag structure .Units. shows the set technological units. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Units. STRUCT LengthUnit TimeUnit UDINT UDINT Values W Description - RON Unit for position - RON 1010 m 1013 mm 1011 km 1014 m 1015 nm 1019 in 1018 ft 1021 mi 1004 rad 1005 Unit for time 1056 ms S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 494 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.6 MeasuredValues tags (measuring input) The tag structure .MeasuredValues. displays the measurement results. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag MeasuredValues. Data type Values W Description STRUCT MeasuredValue1 LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON First measured value MeasuredValue2 LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Second measured value MeasuredValue1Counter UDINT 0 to 2147483647 RON Count value for the first measured value MeasuredValue2Counter UDINT 0 to 2147483647 RON Count value for the second measured value LostEdgeCounter1 UDINT 0 to 7 RON LEC for measured value 1 (zero in the case of one-time measurement) LostEdgeCounter2 UDINT 0 to 7 RON LEC for measured value 2 (zero in the case of one-time measurement) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 495 Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.7 StatusWord tag (measuring input) The .StatusWord tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 2 "RestartActive") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Values W Description Status DWORD - RON Status information of the technology object - - - "Control" Word Bit 0 0: Technology object not in operation 1: Technology object in operation Bit 1 - - - "Error" 0: No error present 1: Error present Bit 2 - - - "RestartActive" 0: No "Restart" active 1: "Restart" active. The technology object is being reinitialized. Bit 3 - - - "OnlineStartValuesChanged" 0: "Restart" tags unchanged 1: Change to "Restart" tags. For the changes to be applied, the technology object must be reinitialized. Bit 4 - - - Reserved Bit 5 - - - "CommunicationOK" Communication between measuring input and measuring module 0: Not established 1: Established Bit 6... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 496 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.8 ErrorWord tag (measuring input) The .ErrorWord tag indicates technology object errors (technology alarms). Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 3 "CommandNotAccepted") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Values W ErrorWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemFault" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigFault" Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserFault" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4... Bit 12 - - - Bit 13 - - - Reserved "PeripheralError" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 497 Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.9 ErrorDetail tags (measuring input) The tag structure .ErrorDetail. contains the alarm number and the effective local alarm reaction for the technology alarm that is currently pending for the technology object. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. Tags Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type ErrorDetail. STRUCT Values W Description Number UDINT - RON Alarm number Reaction DINT 0, 8 RON Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 8: End measuring input processing S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 498 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.4 Tags of the measuring input technology object A.4.10 WarningWord tag (measuring input) The .WarningWord tag indicates pending warnings for the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 1 "ConfigWarning") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Values W Warning Word DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemWarning" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigWarning" Configuration error One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserWarning" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4... Bit 12 - - - Bit 13 Reserved "PeripheralWarning" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 499 Appendix A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5.1 Legend Tag Name of the tag Data type Data type of the tag Values Value range of the tag - minimum value to maximum value If no specific value is shown, the value range limits of the relevant data type apply or the information under "Description". W Effectiveness of changes in the technology data block DIR Direct: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. CAL At call of Motion Control instruction: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction in the user program. Description RES Restart: Changes to the start value in the load memory are made using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to DB in load memory). Changes will not take effect until after restart of the technology object. RON Read only: The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. Description of the tag Access to the tags is with ".". The placeholder represents the name of the technology object. A.5.2 Display data (cam) The .CamOutput tag indicates the switching state of the cam. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Values W Description CamOutput BOOL - RON Switching state of output cam FALSE: not interconnected TRUE: Switched S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 500 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5.3 Parameter tags (cam) The tag structure .Parameter. contains the configuration of the basic parameters of the output cam technology object. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Parameter. Values W Description - RES Output cam type STRUCT OutputCamType DINT 0: Distance output cam 1: Time-based output cam PositionType DINT - RES Position reference 0: Position setpoint 1: Actual position OnCompensation LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Activation time Lead time for the switch-on edge OffCompensation LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Deactivation time Lead time for the switch-off edge Hysteresis LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Hysteresis value For output cams with reference to actual position, always enter a hysteresis value (> 0.0). A.5.4 Interface tags (cam) The tag structure .Interface. contains the configuration of the output properties for the output cam technology object. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Interface. STRUCT EnableOutput BOOL Values W Description - RES Activation of the output cam output FALSE: Output is deactivated TRUE: Output is activated Address VREF - RON I/O address of the output cam LogicOperation DINT - RON Logical operation of the output cam signals at the output 0: OR operation 1: AND operation S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 501 Appendix A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5.5 Units tags (cam) The tag structure .Units. shows the set technological units. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Units. LengthUnit TimeUnit Values W Description - RON Unit for position STRUCT UDINT UDINT - RON 1010 m 1013 mm 1011 km 1014 m 1015 nm 1019 in 1018 ft 1021 mi 1004 rad 1005 Unit for time 1056 ms S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 502 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5.6 StatusWord tag (output cam) The .StatusWord tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 2 "RestartActive") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Values W Description Status DWORD - RON Status information of the technology object - - - "Control" Word Bit 0 0: Technology object not in operation 1: Technology object in operation Bit 1 - - - "Error" 0: No error present 1: Error present Bit 2 - - - "RestartActive" 0: No "Restart" active 1: "Restart" active. The technology object is being reinitialized. Bit 3 - - - "OnlineStartValuesChanged" 0: "Restart" tags unchanged 1: Change to "Restart" tags. For the changes to be applied, the technology object must be reinitialized. Bit 4 - - - "OutputInverted" 0: Output cam output not inverted 1: Output cam output inverted Bit 5 - - - "CommunicationOK" Communication between output cam and output module 0: Not established 1: Established Bit 6... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 503 Appendix A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5.7 ErrorWord tag (output cam) The .ErrorWord tag indicates technology object errors (technology alarms). Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 3 "CommandNotAccepted") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Values W ErrorWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemFault" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigFault" Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. Bit 2 - - - "UserFault" Bit 3 - - - "CommandNotAccepted" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4... Bit 12 - - - Reserved Bit 13 - - - "PeripheralError" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 504 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.5 Tags of the cam technology object A.5.8 ErrorDetail tags (cam) The tag structure .ErrorDetail. contains the alarm number and the effective local alarm reaction for the technology alarm that is currently pending for the technology object. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. Tags Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type ErrorDetail. STRUCT Values W Description Number UDINT - RON Alarm number Reaction DINT 0, 6 RON Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 6: Output cam processing is complete. A.5.9 WarningWord tag (output cam) The .WarningWord tag indicates pending warnings for the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 1 "ConfigWarning") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 500) Tag Data type Values W Warning Word DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemWarning" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigWarning" Configuration error One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserWarning" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 505 Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 4... Bit 12 - - - Reserved Bit 13 "PeripheralWarning" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - Reserved A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.1 Legend Tag Name of the tag Data type Data type of the tag Values Value range of the tag - minimum value to maximum value If no specific value is shown, the value range limits of the relevant data type apply or the information under "Description". W Effectiveness of changes in the technology data block DIR Direct: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91]. CAL At call of Motion Control instruction: Values are changed directly and take effect at the start of the next MC-Servo [OB91] after the call of the corresponding Motion Control instruction in the user program. Description RES Restart: Changes to the start value in the load memory are made using the extended instruction "WRIT_DBL" (write to DB in load memory). Changes will not take effect until after restart of the technology object. RON Read only: The tag cannot and must not be changed during runtime of the user program. Description of the tag Access to the tags is with ".". The placeholder represents the name of the technology object. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 506 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.2 Display data (cam track) The following tags indicate the status of the cam track: Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type Values W Status DINT - RON Description 0: "INACTIVE" (inactive) 1: "ACTIVE" (active) 2: "ACTIVE_WAITING_FOR_NEXT_CYCLE" (active and waiting for next track) TrackOutput BOOL - RON FALSE: Cam track is not output. TRUE: Cam track is output. SingleCamState DWORD 16#0 to 16#FFFF_FFFF RON Switched on output cam (bit-masked) 0: Output cam is not switched on 1: Output cam is switched on TrackPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Display of the current position within the cam track MatchPosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 RON Reference position of the current cam track During cyclic processing of the cam track, the continued reference position of the current cam track is displayed. The unique detection and output of the position is only possible when the assigned technology object is in motion. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 507 Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.3 Parameter tags (cam track) The tag structure .Parameter. contains the configuration of the basic parameters of the cam track technology object. Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type Parameter. CamTrackType Values W Description - RES Output cam type STRUCT DINT 0: Distance output cam 1: Time-based output cam PositionType DINT - RES Position reference 0: Position setpoint 1: Actual position ReferencePosition LREAL -1.0E12 to 1.0E12 DIR Reference position CamTrackLength LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 DIR Track length CamMasking DWORD 16#0 to 16#FFFF_FFFF DIR Bit masking of individual output cams OnCompensation LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Activation time Lead time for the switch-on edge OffCompensation LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Deactivation time Lead time for the switch-off edge Hysteresis LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 DIR Hysteresis value For output cams with reference to actual position, always enter a hysteresis value (> 0.0). Cam[1 ... 32]. STRUCT OnPosition LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL Start position (distance and time-based output cams) Offposition LREAL 0.0 to 1.0E12 CAL End position (distance output cam) Duration LREAL 0.001 to 1.0E12 CAL Switch-on duration (time-based output cam) Existent BOOL - CAL FALSE: Output cam not used TRUE: Output cam is used S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 508 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.4 Interface tags (cam track) The tag structure .Interface. contains the configuration of the output properties for the cam track technology object. Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type Interface. Values W Description - RES Output cam output at the bit specified under ".Interface.Address" STRUCT EnableOutput BOOL FALSE: No output TRUE: Output Address A.6.5 VREF - RON I/O address for digital cam output Units tags (cam track) The tag structure .Units. shows the set technological units. Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type Units. LengthUnit TimeUnit Values W Description - RON Unit for position STRUCT UDINT UDINT - RON 1010 m 1013 mm 1011 km 1014 m 1015 nm 1019 in 1018 ft 1021 mi 1004 rad 1005 Unit for time 1056 ms S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 509 Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.6 StatusWord tag (cam track) The .StatusWord tag contains the status information of the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 2 "RestartActive") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type Values W Description Status DWORD - RON Status information of the technology object - - - "Control" Word Bit 0 0: Technology object not in operation 1: Technology object in operation Bit 1 - - - "Error" 0: No error present 1: Error present Bit 2 - - - "RestartActive" 0: No "Restart" active 1: "Restart" active. The technology object is being reinitialized. Bit 3 - - - "OnlineStartValuesChanged" 0: "Restart" tags unchanged 1: Change to "Restart" tags. For the changes to be applied, the technology object must be reinitialized. Bit 4 - - - "OutputInverted" 0: Output cam output not inverted 1: Output cam output inverted Bit 5 - - - "CommunicationOK" Communication between cam track and output module 0: Not established 1: Established Bit 6... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 510 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.7 ErrorWord tag (cam track) The .ErrorWord tag indicates technology object errors (technology alarms). Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 3 "CommandNotAccepted") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type Values W ErrorWord DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - Description "SystemFault" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigFault" Configuration error One or more configuration parameters are inconsistent or invalid. Bit 2 - - - Bit 3 - - - "UserFault" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use "CommandNotAccepted" Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. Bit 4... Bit 12 - - - Bit 13 - - - Reserved "PeripheralError" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - Reserved S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 511 Appendix A.6 Tags of the cam track technology object A.6.8 ErrorDetail tags (cam track) The tag structure .ErrorDetail. contains the alarm number and the effective local alarm reaction for the technology alarm that is currently pending for the technology object. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. Tags Legend (Page 506) Tag Data type ErrorDetail. STRUCT Values W Description Number UDINT - RON Alarm number Reaction DINT 0, 7 RON Effective alarm reaction 0: No reaction 7: Cam track processing Is complete. A.6.9 WarningWord tag (cam track) The .WarningWord tag indicates pending warnings for the technology object. Information on the evaluation of the individual bits (e.g. bit 1 "ConfigWarning") can be found in the Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord (Page 288) section. Tag Legend (Page 492) Tag Data type Values Warning Word DWORD - RON Bit 0 - - - W Description "SystemWarning" A system-internal error has occurred. Bit 1 - - - "ConfigWarning" Configuration error One or several configuration parameters are adjusted internally. Bit 2 - - - "UserWarning" Bit 3 - - - "CommandNotAccepted" Error in user program at a Motion Control instruction or its use Command cannot be executed. A Motion Control instruction cannot be executed because necessary requirements have not been met. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 512 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Tag Data type Values W Description Bit 4... Bit 12 - - - Reserved Bit 13 "PeripheralWarning" Error accessing a logical address Bit 14... Bit 31 - - - A.7 Technology alarms A.7.1 Overview Reserved The following table shows an overview of the technology alarms and the corresponding alarm reactions. When a technology alarm occurs, evaluate the entire indicated alarm text, in order to find the precise cause. Legend No. Number of the technology alarm (corresponds to .ErrorDetail.Number) Reaction Effective alarm reaction (corresponds to .ErrorDetail.Reaction) Error bit Bit that is set in .ErrorWord when the technology alarm occurs A description of the bits can be found in the appendix (Page 475). Warning bit Bit that is set in .WarningWord when the technology alarm occurs A description of the bits can be found in the appendix (Page 477). Restart To acknowledge the technology alarm, the technology object must be reinitialized (Restart). Diagnostic buffer The alarm is entered in the diagnostics buffer. Alarm text Displayed alarm test (limited) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 513 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms List of the technology alarms No. Reaction Error bit Warning bit Restart Diagnostic buffer X1 - X X 102 Remove enable X15 - X X Drive configuration adaptation error. 103 Remove enable X15 - X X Encoder configuration adaptation error. 104 Stop with maximum dynamic values X1 - - - SW limit switch specification error. 105 Remove enable X1 - X X Drive configuration error. 106 Remove enable X1 - - X Drive connection configuration error. 107 Remove enable X1 - X X Encoder configuration error. 108 Remove enable X1 - - X Encoder connection configuration error. 109 Remove enable 101 Remove enable Alarm text Configuration error. X1 - X - Configuration error. 110 No reaction - X1 - - Configuration is adjusted internally. 111 No reaction - X15 - X TO and drive configuration inconsistent. 112 No reaction - X15 - X TO and encoder configuration inconsistent. 113 Remove enable X2 - X - Isochronous mode not possible. 201 Remove enable X0 - X X Internal error. 202 No reaction X0 - X - Internal configuration error. 203 Remove enable X0 - X - Internal error. 204 Remove enable X0 - - - Commissioning error. 304 Stop with emergency stop ramp X2 - - - Velocity limit is zero. 305 Stop with emergency stop ramp X2 - - - * Acceleration limit is zero. * Deceleration limit is zero. 306 Stop with emergency stop ramp X2 - - - Jerk limit is zero. 307 Stop with maximum dynamic values X2 - - X * Negative numerical value range of the position reached. * Positive numerical value range of the position reached. * Negative numerical value range of the position exceeded. * Positive numerical value range of the position exceeded. 308 Remove enable 321 Stop with emergency stop ramp 322 No reaction X2 - - X X3 - - - Axis not homed. - X3 - - Restart not executed. 323 Remove enable X3 - - - MC_Home could not be performed. 341 Stop with maximum dynamic values X10 - - - Error in homing data. 342 Stop with emergency stop ramp X10 - - - Reference cam/encoder zero mark not found. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 514 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms No. Reaction Error bit Warning bit Restart Diagnostic buffer 343 Remove enable X1 - - - 401 Remove enable X13 - - X Error accessing logical address. 411 Remove enable X5 - - X Faulty encoder at the logical address. 412 Remove enable X5 - - - Permitted actual value range exceeded. 421 Remove enable X4 - - X Faulty drive at the logical address. 431 Remove enable X7 - - X Faulty communication with device at logical address. Programmed velocity is limited. 501 No reaction - X6 - - 502 No reaction - X6 - - Alarm text Homing function not supported by device. * Programmed acceleration is being limited. * Programmed deceleration is being limited. 503 No reaction - X6 - - Programmed jerk is limited. 504 No reaction - X6 - - Speed setpoint monitoring active. 511 No reaction - X6 - - Dynamic limits are violated by the kinematics motion. X11 - - - Following error. - X11 - - Warning following error tolerance. X9 - - - * Positive HW limit switch approached. * Negative HW limit switch approached. * Illegal free travel direction of active hardware limit switch. * HW limit switch polarity reversed, free travel not possible. * Both hardware limit switches active, retraction not possible. * Negative SW limit switch approached. * Positive SW limit switch approached. * Negative SW limit switch is crossed. * Positive SW limit switch is crossed. 521 Remove enable 522 No reaction 531 Remove enable 533 Stop with maximum dynamic values X8 534 Remove enable X8 - - - 541 Remove enable X12 - - - Position monitoring error. 542 Remove enable X2 - - - Clamping monitoring error: Axis leaving clamping tolerance window. 550 Track setpoints X4 - - - Drive-autonomous motion is being executed. 551 No reaction X2 X6 - - Maximum velocity cannot be reached with drive/axis parameters. 552 Remove enable X15 - - - Adaptation error of encoder during power-up. 601 Stop with maximum dynamic values X14 - - - Leading axis is not assigned or defective. 603 Remove enable X14 - - - Leading axis is not in position-controlled mode. 608 Stop with maximum dynamic values X14 - - - Error during synchronization. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 515 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms No. Reaction Error bit Warning bit Restart Diagnostic buffer Alarm text 611 Remove enable X2 - - - The cam specified in the MC_CamIn.Cam parameter has not been configured or is not available or is not interpolated. 612 Remove enable X2 - - - Specified cam has not been interpolated. 700 Remove enable X2 - - - Output cam limiting error. 701 Remove enable X13 - - - I/O output error. 702 Remove enable X2 - - - Position value valid. 703 Remove enable X2 - - - Cam track data faulty. 704 Remove enable X2 - - - Output cam data faulty. 750 Remove enable X2 - - - Measuring job not possible during homing of assigned axis. 752 Remove enable X2 - - - Validity range of measuring job not recognized. 753 Remove enable X2 - - - Only one measuring input can access an encoder at a time. 754 Remove enable X2 - - - Measuring input configuration in external device is not correct. 755 Remove enable X13 - - - Measuring job not possible. 758 No reaction X2 - - - A measuring edge was not evaluated. See also Technology alarms (Page 333) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 516 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms A.7.2 Technology alarms 101-113 Technology alarm 101 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Configuration error. Value in not allowed. Adjust the specified value. Faulty load gear factors. Adjust the load gear factors in .LoadGear.Numerator and/or .LoadGear.Denominator . At least one encoder required. Sensor[].existent Configure at least one encoder. Sensor[1] must be configured for DSC. Configure Sensor[1] Values in Sensor.Parameter.FineResolutionXist1 and P979 are not identical. Set the identical fine resolution on the technology as on the drive. Controller parameter incorrect. Adjust the .PositionController.Kv value. PROFIBUS parameter assignment is inconsistent; sum Ti and Adjust the send clock in the hardware configuration. To greater than send clock. Drive or drive telegram type or encoder not suitable for DSC. Check whether the drive can be operated with DSC and adjust the drive telegram if required. TimeOut parameter outside of limits. Set the monitoring time of the axis control panel to a valid value. Simulation.Mode parameter outside of limits. Set the parameter to a valid value. Telegram in Actor.Interface.AddressIn and AddressOut are not identical. Set the identical drive telegram type for sending and receiving direction. Illegal combination for referencing data incremental. encoder. Check the active and passive homing settings. Telegram in Sensor.Interface.AddressIn and AddressOut are not identical. Set the identical encoder telegram type for sending and receiving direction. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 517 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 102 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Drive configuration adaptation error. Drive is not assigned to a SINAMICS device. The drive adaptation is only available for SINAMICS drives. Drive is not interconnected directly to I/O area. During configuration of the axis, the log addresses were set to a data block or bit memory, for example. The adaptation is only possible when the encoder has been directly interconnected to an I/O area. Adaptation canceled due to insufficient resources. Check whether your device supports acyclic data communication according to PROFIdrive. Parameter does not exist, value unreadable or invalid. Maximum speed Maximum torque/force (P1520) Maximum torque/force (P1521) Torque resolution Rated speed Rated torque Motor type Technology alarm 103 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Encoder configuration adaptation error. Encoder is not assigned to a SINAMICS device. The encoder adaptation is only available for SINAMICS devices and external Siemens encoders. Encoder is not interconnected directly to I/O area. During configuration of the axis, the log addresses were set to a data block or bit memory address area, for example. The adaptation is only possible when the encoder has been directly interconnected to an I/O area. Adaptation canceled due to insufficient resources. Check whether your device supports acyclic data communication according to PROFIdrive. Parameter does not exist, value unreadable or invalid. Encoder system Encoder resolution Encoder fine resolution Gx_XIST1 Encoder fine resolution Gx_XIST2 Encoder revolutions S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 518 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 104 Alarm reaction: Stop with maximum dynamic values Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy SW limit switch specification error. Neg. SW limit switch greater than pos. SW limit switch. Change the position of the software limit switches. Technology alarm 105 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Drive configuration error. HW Configuration. * Connect a suitable device. The TO needs a smaller servo cycle clock. * Check the device (I/Os). * Check the topology of the project. * Compare the device configuration and the configuration of the technology object. * Contact customer service. * Check the project for consistency and download it to the controller again. * Contact customer service. Error in internal communication. Address for drive data does not exist in project. Check the project for consistency and download it to the controller again. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 519 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 106 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Drive connection configuration error. System has no communication with drive. Drive not initialized during ramp-up. Internal system error. * Check the project for consistency and download it to the controller again. * Contact customer service. * Ensure that the communication between the controller and drive is established. To do this, evaluate .StatusDrive.CommunicationOK before enabling the axis. * To enable a technology object, the drive initialization must be complete. Trigger the job again later. Technology alarm 107 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Encoder configuration error. HW Configuration * Connect a suitable device. The TO needs a smaller servo cycle clock. * Check the device (I/Os). * Check the topology of the project. * Compare the device configuration and the configuration of the technology object. * Contact customer service. * Check the project for consistency and download it to the controller again. * Contact customer service. Error internal communication. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 520 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 108 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Encoder connection configuration error. System without communication to encoder. Encoder not initialized during ramp-up. Encoder data address missing in project. Internal system error. * Check the project for consistency and download it to the controller again. * Contact customer service. * Ensure that the communication between the controller and encoder is established. To do this, evaluate .StatusSensor[1..4].CommunicationOK before enabling the axis and also check if the status of the encoder actual value is .StatusSensor[1..4].State = VALID (2). * To enable a technology object, the encoder initialization must be complete. Trigger the job again later. Check the project for consistency and download it to the controller again. Technology alarm 109 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Configuration error. Neg. HW limit switch. * Connect a suitable device. Pos. HW limit switch * Reference cam "Active homing". Check the device (I/Os). * Reference cam "Passive homing". Check the topology of the project. * Compare the device configuration and the configuration of the technology object. * Contact customer service. Enable bit for the analog drive interface. DriveReady bit of the analog drive interface. Measurement sensing input is faulty. Output cam output faulty. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 521 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 110 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Configuration is adjusted internally. Actor.DriveParameter.MaxSpeed is limited. PositioningMonitoring.ToleranceTime is limited. * Correct the reference value in the drive and in the configuration of the technology object to .Actor.MaxSpeed /2. * With analog drive connection, correct the reference value in the drive and in the configuration of the technology object to .Actor.MaxSpeed /1.17. * The value can be set in the drive, for example, in p2000 = p1082. Change the configuration data. DynamicDefaults.EmergencyDeceleration is limited. DriveParameter.ReferenceTorque is too low. Technology alarm 111 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy TO and drive configuration inconsistent. Different telegram. Match the telegram configuration for the technology object with the telegram configuration in the drive. (P922 in drive) Incompatible torque resolution. Adjust the high torque resolution for the drive. Master application cycle and servo cycle clock not the same. Servo cycle clock and drive cycle clock not equal. Adjust the cycle of the master application in the device configuration for the PROFIBUS slave. Linear motor configured. Set round-frame motor (P300) in the drive. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 522 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 112 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy TO and encoder configuration inconsistent. Different telegram type. Match the telegram configuration for the technology object with the telegram configuration in the drive. (P922 in drive) Encoder is not an absolute encoder. Configure the encoder for the technology object as an incremental encoder. Master application cycle and servo cycle clock not the same. Adjust the cycle of the master application in the device configuration for the PROFIBUS slave. Servo cycle clock and drive cycle clock not equal. Technology alarm 113 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Remedy Isochronous mode not possible. * The configured output for the cam or cam track technology object or the input for the technology object measuring input cannot be used in isochronous mode. Configure the I/O in the device configuration as isochronous I/O. * Make sure that the organization block MC_Servo [OB91] is called synchronously with the bus system. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 523 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms A.7.3 Technology alarms 201-204 Technology alarm 201 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Solution Internal error. Contact customer service. Technology alarm 202 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Required Alarm text Solution Internal configuration error. Contact customer service. Technology alarm 203 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Required Alarm text Solution Internal error. Contact customer service. Technology alarm 204 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Commissioning error. Connection to the TIA Portal interrupted. Check the connection properties. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 524 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms A.7.4 Technology alarms 304-343 Technology alarm 304 Alarm reaction: Stop with emergency stop ramp Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Velocity limit is zero. Enter a non-zero value for the maximum velocity (DynamicLimits.MaxVelocity) in the dynamic limits. Technology alarm 305 Alarm reaction: Stop with emergency stop ramp Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Acceleration/deceleration limit is zero. Acceleration Enter a non-zero value for the maximum acceleration (DynamicLimits.MaxAcceleration) in the dynamic limits. Deceleration Enter a non-zero value for the maximum deceleration (DynamicLimits.MaxDeceleration) in the dynamic limits. Technology alarm 306 Alarm reaction: Stop with emergency stop ramp Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Jerk limit is zero. Enter a non-zero value for the maximum jerk (DynamicLimits.MaxJerk) in the dynamic limits. Technology alarm 307 Alarm reaction: Stop with maximum dynamic values Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Negative/positive numerical value range of the position reached. Negative Enable the "Modulo" setting for the technology object. Positive S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 525 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 308 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Negative/positive numerical value range of the position exceeded. Negative Enable the "Modulo" setting for the technology object. Positive Technology alarm 321 Alarm reaction: Stop with emergency stop ramp Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Axis not homed. To perform an absolute positioning motion, you must home the technology object. Technology alarm 322 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Restart not executed. The technology object is not ready for restart. Download the project again. The condition for restart of the technology object is not satisfied. Disable the technology object. Technology alarm 323 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy MC_Home could not be performed. * Enable the "Modulo" setting for the technology object. * Adjust the position value for use of the Motion Control instruction "MC_Home". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 526 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 341 Alarm reaction: Stop with maximum dynamic values Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Error in homing data. Approach velocity is zero. Check the configuration for homing (Homing.ApproachVelocity). Homing velocity is zero. Check the configuration for homing (Homing.ReferencingVelocity). Technology alarm 342 Alarm reaction: Stop with emergency stop ramp Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Reference cam/encoder zero mark not found. The reference cam configured for homing was not found in the traversing range of the axis. Technology alarm 343 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Homing function not supported by device. Configure a reference switch input for the pulse generator output used in the properties of the C-CPU. ("Pulse generators (PTO/PWM) > PTO[n]/PWN[n] > Hardware inputs/outputs") When homing across a zero mark, the CPU transfers the reference switch input as zero mark. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 527 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms A.7.5 Technology alarms 401-431 Technology alarm 401 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Error accessing logical address. Invalid address. * Connect a suitable device. Input address is invalid. * Output address is invalid. Check the device (I/Os). * Check the topology of the project. * Compare the device configuration and the configuration of the technology object. * Contact customer service. Technology alarm 411 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Faulty encoder at the logical address. Alarm message from encoder. HW error encoder. Check the function, connections and I/Os of the encoder. Encoder dirty. Read error encoder absolute value. Compare the encoder type in the drive or encoder parameter P979 with the configuration data of the technology object. Zero mark monitoring encoder. Encoder signals error in zero mark monitoring (fault code 0x0002 in Gx_XIST2, see PROFIdrive profile). Encoder in Parking state. * Search for the cause of the error in the connected drive or encoder. * Check whether the alarm was possibly triggered by a commissioning action involving the drive or encoder. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 528 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 412 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Permitted actual value range exceeded. Positive. Home the axis/encoder in a valid actual value range. Negative. Modulo length. Adjust the modulo length to the utilized encoder. Technology alarm 421 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Faulty encoder at the logical address. Alarm message from drive. * Check the functions and connections of the drive. No drive control required. * Enable and acknowledge safety function in the drive. Drive has shut down. Drive enable not possible. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 529 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 431 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Faulty communication with device at logical address. Drive failed. Check the function, connections and I/Os of the drive . Signs of life of drive faulty. * Check the function, connections and I/Os of the drive . * Compare the clock parameters in the device configuration (PROFIBUS line, slave OM for drive or encoder) and the execution system. Tmapc and servo must be set to the same cycle time. (Incorrect parameter assignment is indicated by reason 0x0080.) * If you call the application cycle of the MC-Servo [OB91] reduced to the send clock of a PROFINET IO system and the technology alarm 431 (Signs of life of drive faulty) is repeatedly shown, increase the update time of the send clock. Encoder failed. Check the function, connections and I/Os of the encoder. Signs of life of encoder faulty. * Check the function, connections and I/Os of the encoder. * Compare the clock parameters in the device configuration (PROFIBUS line, slave OM for drive or encoder) and the execution system. Tmapc and servo must be set to the same cycle time. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 530 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms A.7.6 Technology alarms 501-552 Technology alarm 501 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Programmed velocity is limited. * Check the value for the velocity of the Motion Control instruction. * Check the configuration of the dynamic limits. Technology alarm 502 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Programmed acceleration/deceleration is being limited. Acceleration Deceleration * Check the value for the acceleration of the Motion Control instruction. * Check the configuration of the dynamic limits. * Check the value for the deceleration of the Motion Control instruction. * Check the configuration of the dynamic limits. Technology alarm 503 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Programmed jerk is limited. * Check the value for the jerk of the Motion Control instruction. * Check the configuration of the dynamic limits. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 531 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 504 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Speed setpoint monitoring active. * Check the mechanical configuration. * Check the encoder connection. * Check the configuration of the speed setpoint interface. * Check the configuration of the control loop. * Check the value for the maximum velocity DynamicLimits.MaxVelocity. Technology alarm 511 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Dynamic limits are violated by the kinematics motion. Velocity Reduce the velocity of the kinematics motion. Acceleration Reduce the acceleration of the kinematics motion. Deceleration Reduce the deceleration of the kinematics motion. Technology alarm 521 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Following error. Solution * Check the configuration of the control loop. * Check the direction signal of the encoder. * Check the configuration of the following error monitoring. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 532 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 522 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Warning following error tolerance. * Check the configuration of the control loop. * Check the direction signal of the encoder. * Check the configuration of the following error monitoring. Technology alarm 531 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Pos. HW limit switch reached. Solution Acknowledge the alarm. After the acknowledgment, motions in the negative direction are allowed. Neg. HW limit switch reached. Acknowledge the alarm. After the acknowledgment, motions in the positive direction are allowed. Illegal free travel direction of active hardware limit switch. The programmed direction of movement is disabled due to the active hardware limit switch. Retract the axis in the opposite direction. HW limit switch polarity reversed, free travel not possible. * Check the mechanical configuration of the hardware limit switch. * Check the limit switches. * The error can be acknowledged by switching the controller off and on or using "MC_Reset" with "Restart" = TRUE. Both hardware limit switches active, retraction not possible. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 533 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 533 Alarm reaction: Stop with maximum dynamic values Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Negative/positive SW limit switch approached. Negative The software limit switch was reached from an active motion. Move the axis away from the software limit switch in the positive direction. Positive The software limit switch was reached from an active motion. Move the axis away from the software limit switch in the negative direction. Technology alarm 534 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Negative/positive SW limit switch is crossed. Negative The SW limit switch was crossed. Acknowledge the alarm. After the acknowledgment, motions in the positive direction are allowed. Positive The SW limit switch was crossed. Acknowledge the alarm. After the acknowledgment, motions in the negative direction are allowed. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 534 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 541 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Position monitoring error. Target range not reached. Exit target range again. The target range was not reached within the tolerance time. * Check the configuration of the position monitoring. * Check the configuration of the control loop. The target range was exited within the minimum dwell time. * Check the configuration of the position monitoring. * Check the configuration of the control loop. Technology alarm 542 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Clamping monitoring error: Axis leaving clamping tolerance window. The axis has executed a motion greater than the permissible tolerance at the fixed stop. Check whether the fixed stop has broken away. Technology alarm 550 Alarm reaction: Track setpoints Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Drive-autonomous motion is being executed. The drive is performing a motion that was not specified by the technology object. Check whether there is an active safety function in the drive. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 535 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 551 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Maximum velocity cannot be reached with drive/axis parameters. The configured maximum velocity cannot be reached with the configured mechanics of the axis. Check the configuration of the mechanics and the set reference speed. Technology alarm 552 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Adaptation error of encoder during power-up. Encoder is not assigned to a SINAMICS device. * The operationally active encoder could not be adapted. However, there are other encoders that can be used. Use the encoder switch (MC_SetSensor). * The encoder set as the operationally active encoder could not be adapted. * Specify a different sensor for the initialization of the technology object. Encoder is not interconnected directly to I/O area. During configuration of the axis, the log addresses were set to a data block area or bit memory area. The adaptation is only possible when the encoder has been directly interconnected to an I/O area. Adaptation canceled due to insufficient resources. Check whether your device supports acyclic data communication according to PROFIdrive. Parameter does not exist, value unreadable or invalid. Encoder system Encoder resolution Encoder fine resolution Encoder revolutions S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 536 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms A.7.7 Technology alarms 601-618 Technology alarm 601 Alarm reaction: Stop with maximum dynamic values Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Leading axis is not assigned or defective. Configure the possible leading value axes for the following axis under Configuration > Leading value interconnections. Technology alarm 603 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Leading axis is not in position-controlled mode. The following axis must be operated in positioncontrolled mode for synchronous operation functionality. Technology alarm 608 Alarm reaction: Stop with maximum dynamic values Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Error during synchronization. Prevent a reversing leading value motion during the synchronization operation. Technology alarm 611 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution The cam specified in the MC_CamIn.Cam parameter has not been configured or is not available. Configure and interpolate the cam. Restart the job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 537 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 612 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Solution Specified cam has not been interpolated. Interpolate the cam used for camming with the Motion Control instruction "MC_InterpolateCam". A.7.8 Technology alarms 700-758 Technology alarm 700 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Output cam limiting error. Cam position: OnPosition The position for the OnPosition could not be calculated. Invalid positions (e.g. OnPosition > OffPosition) were calculated due to lead times. The output cam cannot be switched due to the axis dynamics and compensation times. Cam position: OffPosition The position for the OffPosition could not be calculated. Invalid positions (e.g. OffPosition < OnPosition) were calculated due to lead times. The output cam cannot be switched due to the axis dynamics and compensation times. Technology alarm 701 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy I/O output error. The digital output for the output cam or cam track technology object cannot be addressed. Download the device configuration again. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 538 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 702 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Position value valid. * A Motion Control job "MC_Reset" is being executed on the axis. Wait until the "Restart" of the technology object is complete. * The encoder values are invalid due to an encoder error. Check the encoder and adjust the configuration if necessary. Technology alarm 703 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Output cam data faulty. Output cam: Output cam number Check the configuration of the relevant output cam in the cam track and adjust the values if necessary. Examples of a correct configuration: * .Parameter.Cam[].OnPosition < .Parameter.Cam[].OffPosition * .Parameter.Cam[].Duration > .Parameter.OffCompensation .Parameter.OnCompensation Technology alarm 704 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Output cam data faulty. Check the configuration of the output cam and adjust the values if necessary. Examples of a correct configuration: * MC_OutputCam.OnPosition < MC_OutputCam.OffPosition * MC_OutputCam.Duration > .Parameter.OffCompensation .Parameter.OnCompensation S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 539 Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 750 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Measuring job not possible during homing of assigned axis. Do not use the motion instructions "MC_Home" and "MC_MeasuringInput" simultaneously. Technology alarm 752 Alarm reaction: No reaction Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Validity range of measuring job not recognized. The measuring range specified in Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" was not recognized. Adjust the measuring range. Technology alarm 753 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Only one measuring input can access an encoder at a time. Use only one Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasurinInput" for an encoder. Technology alarm 754 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Measuring input configuration in external device is not correct. Check the configuration of the measuring inputs on the external device. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 540 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.7 Technology alarms Technology alarm 755 Alarm reaction: Remove enable Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy Measuring job not possible. Device has reported an error. The measurement was aborted with error. Check the measuring input functionality in the utilized device Cyclic measuring is not possible with telegram 39x. * Use the Motion Control instruction "MC_MeasuringInput" for starting a one-time measurement. * Cyclic measuring is only possible when measuring using TM Timer DIDQ. Change the configuration of the measuring input type to "TM Timer DIDQ". Technology alarm 758 Alarm reaction: None Restart: Not required Alarm text Remedy A measuring edge was not evaluated. An edge was already detected at the input of the measuring input even though the module was not yet ready. The measured value is provided at the next edge. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 541 Appendix A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions Errors in Motion Control instructions are signaled using the parameters "Error" and "ErrorID". Under the following conditions, "Error" = TRUE and "ErrorID" = 16#8xxx are indicated for the Motion Control instruction: Illegal status of the technology object, which prevents the execution of the job. Illegal parameter assignment of the Motion Control instruction, which prevents the execution of the job. As a result of the alarm reaction for a technology object error. The following tables list all "ErrorIDs" that can be indicated for Motion Control instructions. Besides the cause of the error, remedies for eliminating the error are also listed: 16#0000 - 16#800F ErrorID Description Remedy 16#0000 No error - 16#8001 A technology alarm (technology object error) In the technology data block, an error message is output at occurred while processing the Motion the "ErrorDetail.Number" tag. Control instruction. You can find a list of the technology alarms and alarm reactions in the Technology alarms (Page 513) appendix. 16#8002 Illegal specification of the technology object * Check the specification of the technology object for the "Axis", "Master", "SlaveOutputCamCamTrackMeasuringInput" or "Cam" parameter. * You can use a kinematics technology object only for the "AxesGroup" parameter. * For MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Specify a valid measuring input type for parameter "MeasuringInputType". 16#8003 Illegal velocity specification Specify a permissible value for the velocity for parameter "Velocity". 16#8004 Illegal acceleration specification Specify a permissible value for the acceleration for parameter "Acceleration". 16#8005 Illegal deceleration specification Specify a permissible value for the deceleration for parameter "Deceleration". 16#8006 Illegal jerk specification Specify a permissible value for the jerk for parameter "Jerk". 16#8007 Illegal direction specification Specify a permissible value for the rotation direction for parameter "Direction" or "SyncDirection". Invalid entry Reset both the "JogForward" parameter and the "JogBackward" parameter. Both the "JogForward" and "JogBackward" parameters are set to TRUE at the same time. The axis is braked at the last valid deceleration. 16#8008 Invalid distance specification Set a valid distance value at parameter "Distance". 16#8009 Invalid position specification Set a valid position value at parameter "Position". 16#800A Illegal operating mode Specify a permissible operating mode for parameter "Mode". S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 542 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions ErrorID Description Remedy 16#800B Illegal stop mode specifications Specify a permissible value for the stop mode at the "StopMode" parameter. 16#800C Only one instance of the instruction per technology object is allowed. The instruction is called at multiple points in the user program with identical value for parameter "Axis", "Master", "Slave" or "Cam". Ensure that only one instruction with the value for parameter "Axis", "Master", "Slave" or "Cam" is called. 16#800D The job is not permitted in the current state. "Restart" is executed. While a "Restart" is being performed, the technology object cannot perform any jobs. Wait until the "Restart" of the technology object is complete. 16#800E If the technology object is enabled, a "Restart" is not possible. Before a "Restart", deactivate the technology object with "MC_Power.Enable"FALSE. 16#800F The job cannot be executed because the technology object is locked. Enable the technology object with "MC_Power.Enable" = TRUE. Restart the job. 16#8010 - 16#802F ErrorID Description Remedy 16#8010 Invalid homing mode for incremental encoder Absolute value adjustment is not possible with an incremental encoder ("Mode" = 6, 7). Start a homing process for an incremental encoder using parameter "Mode" = 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10. 16#8011 Invalid homing mode for absolute encoder Passive and active homing ("Mode" = 2, 3, 5, 8, 10) are not possible for an absolute value encoder. Start a homing process for an absolute encoder using parameter "Mode" = 0, 1, 6, 7. 16#8012 The job cannot be executed because the axis control panel is active. Return master control to your user program. Restart the job. 16#8013 The online connection between the CPU and the TIA Portal is down. Check the online connection to the CPU. 16#8014 No internal job memory available. The maximum possible number of Motion Control job has been reached. Reduce the number of jobs to be executed (parameter "Execute" = FALSE). 16#8015 Error acknowledgment with "MC_Reset" is Check the configuration of the technology object. not possible. Error in the configuration of the technology object. 16#8016 The actual values are not valid. To execute a "MC_Home" or positioning job, the actual values must be valid. Check the status of the actual values. The technology object tag ".StatusSensor[n].State" must show the value 2 (valid). 16#8017 Illegal value for gear ratio numerator Specify a permissible value for the gear ratio numerator for parameter "RatioNumerator". Permitted integer values: -2147483648 to 2147483648 (value 0 not permitted) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 543 Appendix A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions ErrorID Description Remedy 16#8018 Illegal value for gear ratio denominator Specify a permissible value for the gear ratio denominator for parameter "RatioDenominator". Permitted integer values: 1 to 2147483648 16#8019 Job cannot be executed. The specified following axis is the original leading value for the synchronous operation chain. Recursive interconnections are not possible. A leading axis cannot be interconnected as a following axis to its own leading value. Specify a permissible following axis for parameter "Slave". 16#8021 Illegal value for shift of the leading value range Specify a permissible value for the shift of the leading value range for parameter "MasterOffset". 16#8022 Illegal value for shift of the following value range Specify a permissible value for the shift of the leading value range for parameter "SlaveOffset". 16#8023 Illegal value for scaling of the leading value range Specify a permissible value for the scaling of the leading value range for parameter "MasterScaling". 16#8024 Illegal value for scaling of the following value Specify a permissible value for the scaling of the following range value range for parameter "SlaveScaling". 16#8026 Illegal value for leading value distance Specify a permissible value for the leading value distance for parameter "MasterStartDistance". 16#8027 Illegal value for use of cam Specify a permissible value for cyclic/acyclic use of the cam for parameter "ApplicationMode". 16#8030 - 16#807F ErrorID Description Remedy 16#8034 Illegal value for synchronous position of the leading axis Specify a permissible value for the synchronous position of the leading axis for parameter "MasterSyncPosition". 16#8035 Illegal value for synchronous position of the following axis Specify a permissible value for the synchronous position of the following axis for parameter "SlaveSyncPosition". 16#8036 Illegal value for type of synchronization Specify a permissible value for the type of synchronization for parameter "SyncProfileReference". 16#8040 Illegal value for start position of output cam Specify a permissible value for the start position of the output cam for parameter "OnPosition". 16#8041 Illegal value for end position of distance output cam Specify a permissible value for the end position of the distance output cam for parameter "OffPosition". 16#8042 Illegal value for switch-on duration of timebased output cam Specify a permissible value for the switch-on duration of the time-based output cam for parameter "Duration". 16#8043 Illegal value for force/torque limiting Specify a value within the permissible range at the "Limit" parameter. Permitted integer values: -2147483648 to 2147483648 16#8044 The axis is not configured for torque reduction. Select drive telegram 102, 103, 105 or 106 16#8045 The job cannot be executed because a job for traveling to fixed stop is active. Switchover to non-position-controlled mode is not possible during active travel to fixed stop. 16#8046 The "MC_TorqueLimiting" job cannot be deactivated in the "InClamping" state. Retract the axis and deactivate "MC_TorqueLimiting". 16#8047 The motion results in a fixed stop. Only motions away from the fixed stop are permitted. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 544 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions ErrorID Description Remedy 16#804A Illegal value for additive torque setpoint Specify a permissible value for the additive torque setpoint at the "Value" parameter. 16#804B Illegal value for torque high limit Specify a permissible value for the high limit of the torque at the "UpperLimit" parameter. 16#804C Illegal value for torque low limit Specify a permissible value for the low limit of the torque at the "LowerLimit" parameter. 16#804D The value of the high limit of the torque is less than or equal to the value of the low limit of the torque. Adapt the values of the "UpperLimit" and "LowerLimit" parameters so that the high limit of the torque is greater than the value of the low limit of the torque. 16#804E The job cannot be executed because the "MC_TorqueLimiting" job is active. Stop the force / torque limit or fixed stop detection. Restart the "MC_TorqueRange" job. The job cannot be executed because a "MC_TorqueRange" job is active. Exit the setting of the high and low torque limits. Restart the "MC_TorqueLimiting" job. 16#804F The axis is not configured for additional torque values. Use supplemental telegram 750. 16#8050 Illegal encoder number Specify a permissible number of the new encoder (1 to 4) for parameter "MC_SetSensor.Sensor". 16#8051 Illegal number of the reference encoder Specify a permissible number of the reference encoder for parameter "MC_SetSensor.ReferenceSensor". 16#8062 Illegal approach value Specify a permissible approach value for the searched for leading value for parameter "ApproachLeadingValue". 16#8063 A valid mapping to the definition range Specify a permissible following value for parameter (leading values) does not exist for the speci- "FollowingValue". fied following value. 16#8064 A valid mapping to the range of the function (following values) does not exist for the specified leading value. Specify a permissible leading value for parameter "LeadingValue". 16#8070 Illegal value for leading value shift Specify a permissible value for the leading value shift for parameter "PhaseShift". 16#8071 The job cannot be executed because the axis is not in position-controlled mode. Activate position-controlled mode. 16#8074 The job cannot be executed because the "MC_Home" job is active. During active or passive homing, an encoder switchover is rejected. 16#8075 The job cannot be executed because no synchronization operation is active on the axis. Switch on the synchronous operation function. Restart the job. 16#8076 The job cannot be executed because synchronization is being simulated at the specified axis. End the simulation of the synchronous operation. Restart the job. Wait until the "MC_Home" job is complete. Restart the job. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 545 Appendix A.8 Error ID for Motion Control instructions 16#80A0 - 16#8FFF ErrorID Description Remedy 16#80A1 The order cannot be executed because a synchronous operation job is active. A "MC_Home" job on a following axis is not executed when a "MC_CamIn" or "MC_GearInPos" job is active. Exit the synchronous operation job. Restart the job. 16#80A2 The measuring range is invalid with the configured modulo axis settings. Check and adjust the measuring input and adjust the measuring range positions, if necessary. 16#80A3 The measuring input job via PROFIdrive telegram could not be started because a homing job is active. Simultaneous execution of a homing job and a measuring input job via PROFIdrive telegram is not possible. Wait until the homing job has ended. Restart the measuring job via PROFIdrive telegram. 16#80A5 Illegal value for start position of measuring range Specify a permissible value for the start position of the measuring range for parameter "MC_MeasuringInput.StartPosition" or MC_MeasuringInputCyclic.StartPosition. 16#80A6 Illegal value for end position of measuring range Specify a permissible value for the end position of the measuring range for parameter "MC_MeasuringInput.EndPosition" or MC_MeasuringInputCyclic.EndPosition. 16#80A7 A measurement is performed when measuring with the measuring range, but the calculated position is outside the specified measuring range. The measured value is discarded. Check and adjust the measuring input and adjust the measuring range positions, if necessary. 16#80A8 The job cannot be executed because camming is active on the axis. The Motion Control instructions "MC_PhasingRelative" and "MC_PhasingAbsolute" can only be applied to active gearing with "MC_GearIn" or "MC_GearInPos" ("MC_GearIn.InGear" = TRUE or "MC_GearInPos.InSync" = TRUE). 16#80A9 The job cannot be executed because the following axis is synchronized ("MC_GearInPos.StartSync" = TRUE) or a kinematics motion is active. The Motion Control instructions "MC_PhasingRelative" and "MC_PhasingAbsolute" can only be applied to active gearing with "MC_GearIn" or "MC_GearInPos" ("MC_GearIn.InGear" = TRUE or "MC_GearInPos.InSync" = TRUE). 16#80AA The cam contains no points or segments and cannot be interpolated. Fill the cam with points/segments. Restart the job. 16#80AB The cam is currently being used and cannot be interpolated. End the current use of the cam. Restart the job. 16#80AC The cam contains incorrect points or segments and cannot be interpolated. Fill the cam with permissible points/segments. Restart the job. (for example, the cam contains only one point.) 16#80AD The specified synchronous position is outside the definition range of the cam. Specify a permissible synchronous position for parameter "MasterSyncPosition". Restart the job. 16#80AE The job cannot be executed because a kinematic motion is active. End the current kinematic motion. Restart the job. 16#8FFF Unspecified error Contact your local Siemens representative or support center. You can find your contact at Industry Automation and Drive Technologies at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner) See also Errors in Motion Control instructions (Page 337) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 546 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.1 Drive connection via PROFIdrive A.9.1.1 StopMode 0, 2 Function chart: Enabling a technology object and disabling with "StopMode" = 0, 2 * "StopMode" = 0 The axis is braked with the configured emergency stop deceleration. * "StopMode" = 2 The axis decelerates with the configured maximum deceleration. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 547 Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.1.2 StopMode 1 Function chart: Enabling a technology object and disabling with "StopMode" = 1 The deceleration ramp depends on the configuration in the drive. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 548 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.1.3 Alarm reactions with braking ramp via the technology object Function chart: Enabling a technology object and occurrence of a technology alarm with braking ramp via the technology object The axis is braked based on the alarm reaction: * Stop with current dynamic values (.ErrorDetail.Reaction = 1) The axis is braked with the deceleration in the Motion Control instruction. * Stop with maximum dynamic values (.ErrorDetail.Reaction = 2) * Stop with emergency stop ramp (.ErrorDetail.Reaction = 3) The axis decelerates with the configured maximum deceleration. The axis is braked with the configured emergency stop deceleration. The technology alarm is acknowledged. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 549 Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.1.4 Alarm response "Remove enable" Function chart: Enabling a technology object and occurrence of a technology alarm with alarm reaction "Remove enable" The deceleration ramp depends on the configuration in the drive. The technology alarm is acknowledged at time . S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 550 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.2 Analog drive connection A.9.2.1 StopMode 0, 2 Function chart: Enabling a technology object and disabling with "StopMode" = 0, 2 * "StopMode" = 0 The axis is braked with the configured emergency stop deceleration. * "StopMode" = 2 The axis decelerates with the configured maximum deceleration. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 551 Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.2.2 StopMode 1 Function chart: Enabling a technology object and disabling with "StopMode" = 1 The deceleration ramp depends on the configuration in the drive. The behavior of the ready signal of the drive "DI DriveReadyInput" is manufacturerspecific. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 552 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.2.3 Alarm reactions with braking ramp via the technology object Function chart: Enabling a technology object and occurrence of a technology alarm with braking ramp via the technology object The axis is braked based on the alarm reaction: * Stop with current dynamic values (.ErrorDetail.Reaction = 1) The axis is braked with the deceleration in the Motion Control instruction. * Stop with maximum dynamic values (.ErrorDetail.Reaction = 2) The axis decelerates with the configured maximum deceleration. * Stop with emergency stop ramp (.ErrorDetail.Reaction = 3) The axis is braked with the configured emergency stop deceleration. The behavior of the ready signal of the drive "DI DriveReadyInput" is manufacturer-specific. The technology alarm is acknowledged at time . S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 553 Appendix A.9 MC_Power function chart A.9.2.4 Alarm response "Remove enable" Function chart: Enabling a technology object and occurrence of a technology alarm with alarm reaction "Remove enable" The deceleration ramp depends on the configuration in the drive. The behavior of the ready signal of the drive "DI DriveReadyInput" is manufacturer-specific. The technology alarm is acknowledged at time . S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 554 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Appendix A.10 SINAMICS drives A.10 SINAMICS drives A.10.1 Compatibility list An overview of drives that can be interconnected with an S7-1500 CPU is available at: https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109750431 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109750431) A.10.2 Homing SINAMICS drives with external zero marks For SINAMICS drives with external zero marks, synchronization during homing must always occur on the left side of the external zero mark's signal. That is to say, with a positive direction of travel synchronization is done on a positive edge, and with a negative direction of travel synchronization is done on a negative edge. By inverting the signal, synchronization can also be done on the right sight of the signal of the external zero mark. The inversion can be configured in the drive using SINAMICS parameter P490. Homing to an encoder zero mark or an external zero mark is configured in SINAMICS parameter P495. A.11 Data types Data type for use with technology as of V4.0 The table below contains the data types for reference to the respective technology object: Data type TO_SpeedAxis Structure Speed axis TO_PositioningAxis Positioning axis TO_SynchronousAxis Synchronous axis TO_Encoder External encoder TO_OutputCam Output cam TO_CamTrack Cam track TO_MeasuringInput Measuring input TO_Cam Cam (S7-1500T) TO_Kinematics Kinematics (S7-1500T) PD_TELx Telegram no. "x" PD_STW1_611Umode Control word 1 (STW1) PD_STW2_611Umode Control word 2 (STW2) PD_ZSW1_611Umode Status word 1 (ZSW1) PD_ZSW2_611Umode Status word 2 (ZSW2) See also PROFIdrive telegrams (Page 36) S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 555 Glossary Absolute synchronous operation Function corresponds to the Motion Control instruction MC_GearInPos or MC_CamIn. Absolute value encoder Position encoder which outputs the position in the form of a digital numerical value. This numerical value is unique within the entire measuring range of the absolute value encoder. Axis control panel The axis control panel allows you to move the axis in manual mode, optimize the axis settings, and test the operation of the axis in your system. Axis type The axis type differs depending on the unit of measurement according to which the axis is positioned. Depending on the execution of the mechanics, an axis is implemented as a linear axis or rotary axis: For linear axes, the position of the axis is specified as a linear measure, e.g. millimeters (mm). For rotary axes, the position of the axis is specified as an angular measure, e.g. degrees (). Communication processor (CP) Module for expanded communications tasks covering special applications, for example in the area of security. Communications module (CM) Module for communications tasks which is used as an interface expansion of the CPU (for example PROFIBUS) or provides additional communications options (e.g. PtP) in an automation system. Drive The combination of motor (electric or hydraulic), actuator (converter, valve), control system, measuring system and supply (infeed, accumulator). S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 556 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Glossary Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) In drives that support DSC, you can optionally use the position controller in the drive. The position controller in the drive is usually implemented with a rapid speed-control cycle. This improves the control performance for digitally coupled drives. Following error The following error is the difference between the position setpoint and the actual position value. The transmission times of the setpoint to the drive, and of the actual position value to the controller, are taken into account in the calculation of the following error. GSD file As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET or PROFIBUS device that are necessary for its configuration. Hardware limit switch Mechanical limit position switch that limits the maximum permissible traversing range of the axis. Homing With homing, you create the relationship between the position in the technology object and the mechanical position of the axis. The position value in the technology object is assigned to a homing mark at the same time. This homing mark represents a known mechanical position. Incremental encoder Position encoder which outputs the position change incrementally in the form of a digital numerical value. Kv factor Gain factor of the position controller Master value Input value for synchronous operation Motion Control instruction Use the Motion Control instructions to start Motion Control jobs at technology objects in your user program and thus execute the desired functionality at the technology objects. You track the status of running jobs with the output parameters of the Motion Control instructions. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 557 Glossary Override Percentage correction of the velocity/speed Processing cycle clock The processing of a technology object in the servo cycle clock. PROFIdrive PROFIdrive is a profile specified by the PNO (PROFIBUS user organization) for PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO for speed- and position-controlled drives. PROFIdrive frame Frame for communication according to PROFIdrive. Proximity switch Position switch which is activated with the moving part without mechanical contact. Relative gearing Function corresponds to the Motion Control instruction MC_GearIn. Restart The technology object is reinitialized with the current configuration parameters. Safe Stop 1 (SS1) The Safe Stop 1 (SS1) safety function brings a drive to standstill quickly and safely via an internal rapid stop ramp. Safe Torque Off (STO) is activated after standstill. STO ensures that no more torque generating energy acts on a drive. This prevents unintended startup of the drive. You can use the SS1 safety function when a fast stop of the drive with a subsequent transition to STO is required. SS1 is used, for example, to quickly stop high inertia loads or to brake drives quickly and safely at high speeds Safe Stop 2 (SS2) The Safe Stop 2 (SS2) safety function brings a drive to standstill quickly and safely via an internal rapid stop ramp. After standstill is reached, the standstill position is monitored on the drive side. The drive can deliver full torque to maintain the standstill. SS2, for example, is used for processing machines and machine tools. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 558 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Glossary Safe Torque Off (STO) The Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function is the most commonly used and most basic driveinternal safety function. STO ensures that no more torque generating energy acts on a drive. This prevents unintended startup of the drive. The pulses of the drive are eliminated. The drive is reliably torque-free. This state is monitored internally in the drive. You can use STO when the drive comes to a standstill in a sufficiently short time on its own due to the load torque or due to friction. Other areas of use are where "coasting" of the drive has no relevance for safety. Software limit switch A programmable position which limits the traversing range of an axis. Synchronization The phase of the following axis to reach synchronous movement. Synchronous operation Defined synchronous movement after synchronization of a following axis to a leading axis. Technology alarm If an error occurs at a technology object (e.g. approaching a hardware limit switch), a technology alarm is triggered and indicated. The impact of a technology alarm on the technology object is specified by the alarm reaction (e.g. remove enable). The alarm reaction is specified by the system. Technology data block The technology data block represents the technology object and contains all configuration data, setpoint and actual values, and status information of the technology object. Technology module (TM) Module for technological tasks, e.g. counting, measuring and positioning. Zero mark Position reference for the movement of rotary and linear incremental encoders. The zero mark of an incremental encoder is used as a homing mark, for example. S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 559 Index A Absolute actual value, 39, 41 Absolute encoder adjustment, 70 Absolute value adjustment, 85 Active homing, 70, 73, 76, 78, 217 Actuator, 26 Additive setpoint torque, 66 Axis control panel, 319, 324 Axis type, 31 ErrorID Basics, 332, 337 List of ErrorIDs, 542 Errors in Motion Control instructions, 332, 337, 542 External encoder Adding, 175 Basics, 24, 110 Configuration, 230 Deleting, 177 Diagnostics, 351, 353, 353 Functions, 28 Moving, 176 Tags, 479 C Cam track Basics, 141 Configuration, 250 Diagnostics, 358, 360 Functions, 28 Tags, 506 Closed loop position control, 92, 93, 94, 228 Closed-loop control, 92, 93, 94, 228 Compatibility list, 555 D DB_ANY, 296 Diagnostics S7-1500 Motion Control, 332, 333, 337 Direct homing, 70, 85 Direction reversal at the hardware limit switch, 71, 84, 218 Drive Compatibility list, 555 Drives compatibility list, 166 DSC (Dynamic Servo Control), 92, 93, 94, 228 Dynamic default values, 60, 207 Dynamic Servo Control (DSC), 92, 93, 94, 228 E Emergency stop deceleration, 62, 209 Encoder mounting type, 53, 54, 202 Error ID, 337, 542 F Following error monitoring, 88, 90, 91, 226 G Gear ratio, 107 Gearing, 107 H Hardware limit switches, 55, 55, 210 Hardware limit switches, 55, 55, 210 Home position, 71 Homing mark, 71 I Incremental actual value, 39, 40 Interpolator OB, 95, 98 J Jerk limit, 60, 207, 211 L Leading value coupling, 107 Leadscrew pitch, 53, 54, 202 Limit switches, 55, 55, 57, 210 Limits for dynamics, 59, 211 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 560 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Index Linear axis, 31 Load gear, 53, 54, 202 M Master control, 319 MC_AbortMeasuringInput, 406 MC_CamTrack, 410, 412 MC_GearIn, 413, 416 MC_Halt, 374, 377 MC_Home, 369 MC_MeasuringInput, 399, 401 MC_MeasuringInputCyclic, 402, 404 MC_MoveAbsolute, 378, 381 MC_MoveJog, 391, 394 MC_MoveRelative, 382, 385 MC_MoveSuperimposed, 395, 398 MC_MoveVelocity, 386, 390 MC_OutputCam, 407, 409 MC_Power, 361, 366 MC_Reset, 367 MC_TorqueAdditive, 66, 422, 424 MC_TorqueLimiting, 417, 420 MC_TorqueRange, 67, 425, 427 MC-Interpolator OB, 95, 98 MC-Servo OB, 95, 98 Measuring input Basics, 112 Configuration, 244 Diagnostics, 354 Functions, 28 Tags, 492 Modulo, 33, 191 O Optimize position controller, 325, 329 Output cam Basics, 126 Configuration, 247 Diagnostics, 356 Functions, 28 Tags, 500 P Passive homing, 70, 80, 81, 83, 222 Position limits, 55, 55, 57, 58, 210 Positioning axis Adding, 175 Basics, 23, 104 Configuration, 191 Deleting, 177 Diagnostics, 343, 347, 349 Functions, 27 Moving, 176 Tags, 445 Positioning monitoring, 88, 88, 91, 226 Process image partition "OB Servo PIP", 97 PROFIdrive, 35, 42 Proximity switch, 71 R Ramp-down time, 207, 211 Ramp-up time, 207, 211 Reduction ratio, 95 Reinitialization of technology objects, 314 Restart of technology objects, 314 Reversing cam, 71, 84, 218 Rotary axis, 31 S S7-1500 Motion Control Actual value, 39, 40, 41 Axis type, 31 Closed-loop control, 92, 93, 94, 228 Commissioning, 316, 316, 319, 324, 325, 329 Configuration, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 191 Configuration limits, 30 Diagnostics, 332, 333, 337 Downloading to CPU, 315 Drive and encoder connection, 26, 34, 36, 42, 52, 166, 167, 170, 172, 192, 194, 194 Dynamic defaults, 62 Dynamic settings, 59, 60, 68, 207, 211 Guidelines for operation, 29 Homing, 69, 71, 72, 73, 80, 84, 85, 85, 86, 87, 216, 217, 222 How it works, 22 Introduction, 21, 22 Mechanics, 53, 54, 202 Modulo, 33, 191 Motion Control instruction, 25, 27, 28, 290, 294 Motion Control Instruction, 300 Position limits, 55, 55, 57, 58, 210 Position monitoring, 88, 88, 90, 91, 226, 226, 227 Process response, 95, 97, 98, 100 PROFIdrive, 35, 42 Programming, 284, 285, 290, 300, 314 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 561 Index Synchronous operation, 107, 107, 109, 201 Technology alarms, 332, 333, 513 Technology data block, 24, 284, 285, 288, 289 Technology object, 23, 27, 28, 28, 103, 104, 105, 110, 112, 126, 141, 175, 176, 177, 191, 314 Telegram, 36, 42, 52 Unit of measure, 32 Versions, 155, 164 S7-1500 Motion Control actual value, 39, 40, 41 S7-1500 Motion Control commissioning, 316, 316, 319, 324, 325, 329 S7-1500 Motion Control drive connection, 26, 34, 36, 42, 52, 166, 167, 170, 172, 192 S7-1500 Motion Control encoder connection, 26, 34, 36, 42, 52, 166, 167, 170, 172, 194 S7-1500 Motion Control homing Absolute encoder adjustment, 70 Absolute value adjustment, 85 active, 76, 78 Active, 70, 73, 217 Basics, 69 Configuration, 216 direct, 85 Direct, 70 Home position, 71 Homing mark, 71 Homing mode, 70, 72 on the fly, 81, 83 On the fly, 70, 80, 222 passive, 81, 83 Passive, 70, 80, 222 Proximity switch, 71 Reversing cam, 71, 84, 218 Zero mark, 71 S7-1500 Motion Control instruction, 25 Ending a Motion Control job, 313 Errors in Motion Control instructions, 332, 337, 542 Inserting, 294 Overview, 27, 28 Parameters, 290 Starting Motion Control job, 300 Tracking Motion Control job, 302 S7-1500 Motion Control mechanics, 53, 54, 202 S7-1500 Motion Control operating mode, 100 S7-1500 Motion Control optimization, 325, 329 S7-1500 Motion Control telegram, 36, 42, 52 Sensor, 26 Servo OB, 95, 98 SINAMICS V90 PN, 166 Software limit switches, 55, 57, 210 Speed axis Adding, 175 Basics, 23, 103 Configuration, 180 Deleting, 177 Diagnostics, 338, 341, 342 Functions, 27 Moving, 176 Tags, 431 Startdrive, 166 Synchronous axis Adding, 175 Basics, 23, 105 Deleting, 177 Diagnostics, 343, 347, 349 Functions, 27 Moving, 176 Tags, 445 Synchronous operation, 107, 107, 201 T Tags of the cam technology object, 500 Tags of the cam track technology object, 506 Tags of the measuring input technology object, 492 Tags of the positioning axis technology object, 445 Tags of the speed axis technology object, 431 Tags of the synchronous axis technology object, 445 Tags of the technology object external encoder, 479 Technology alarms Basics, 332, 333 List of the technology alarms, 513 Technology data block Analyzing, 285 Basics, 24, 284 Change restart-relevant data, 289 Evaluating StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord, 288 Tags of the cam technology object, 500 Tags of the cam track technology object, 506 Tags of the measuring input technology object, 492 Tags of the positioning axis technology object, 445 Tags of the speed axis technology object, 431 Tags of the synchronous axis technology object, 445 Tags of the technology object external encoder, 479 Technology object Cam track, 28, 141, 250, 358, 360 Data types, 296 External encoder, 24, 28, 110, 175, 176, 177, 230, 351, 353, 353 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 562 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE Index Measuring input, 28, 112, 244, 354 Output cam, 28, 126, 247, 356 Positioning axis, 23, 27, 104, 175, 176, 177, 191, 343, 347, 349 Speed axis, 23, 27, 103, 175, 176, 177, 180, 338, 341, 342 Synchronous axis, 23, 27, 105, 175, 176, 177, 191, 343, 347, 349 Torque limits, 67 Torque setpoint, 66 Traversing range limitation, 55, 55, 57, 58, 210 U Unit of measure, 32 V Velocity precontrol, 92 Velocity profile, 60 Z Zero mark, 71 S7-1500 Motion Control V4.0 in TIA Portal V15 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03879256-AE 563 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1200, S7-1500 PID control Function Manual 2 ___________________ Principles for control Configuring a software 3 ___________________ controller 4 ___________________ Using PID_Compact 5 ___________________ Using PID_3Step 6 ___________________ Using PID_Temp 7 ___________________ Using PID basic functions 8 ___________________ Auxiliary functions 9 ___________________ Instructions A ___________________ Service & Support 10/2018 A5E35300227-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E35300227-AD 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation will support you in configuring and programming control tasks with the S7-1200 and S7-1500 automation systems. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Experience of working with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Validity of the documentation This documentation applies to the use of SW controllers on the CPUs of automation systems S7-1200 and S7-1500 together with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Additional SW controllers that are not covered in this documentation are available for the use of S7-300 and S7-400 with STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Section Overview of software controller (Page 39) gives a complete overview of all SW controllers in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and their possible applications. Conventions Please observe notes marked as follows: Note The notes contain important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on part of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Additional assistance Information on the offers of our Technical Support are available in the appendix Service & Support (Page 566). The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and automation systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 3 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................... 12 2 Principles for control ................................................................................................................................ 17 3 2.1 Controlled system and actuators ........................................................................................... 17 2.2 Controlled systems ................................................................................................................ 19 2.3 Characteristic values of the control section ........................................................................... 21 2.4 Pulse controller ...................................................................................................................... 24 2.5 Response to setpoint changes and disturbances .................................................................. 28 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures ............................................................. 30 2.7 Selection of the controller structure for specified controlled systems .................................... 37 2.8 PID parameter settings .......................................................................................................... 38 Configuring a software controller ............................................................................................................. 39 3.1 Overview of software controller.............................................................................................. 39 3.2 Steps for the configuration of a software controller ............................................................... 41 3.3 Add technology objects .......................................................................................................... 41 3.4 Configure technology objects................................................................................................. 42 3.5 Call instruction in the user program ....................................................................................... 43 3.6 Downloading technology objects to device ............................................................................ 44 3.7 Commissioning software controller ........................................................................................ 45 3.8 Save optimized PID parameter in the project ........................................................................ 45 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 Comparing values .................................................................................................................. 46 Comparison display and boundary conditions ....................................................................... 46 Comparing values .................................................................................................................. 47 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.2.1 3.10.2.2 3.10.2.3 3.10.3 3.10.4 Parameter view ...................................................................................................................... 49 Introduction to the parameter view......................................................................................... 49 Structure of the parameter view ............................................................................................. 51 Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 51 Navigation .............................................................................................................................. 51 Parameter table...................................................................................................................... 52 Opening the parameter view .................................................................................................. 54 Default setting of the parameter view .................................................................................... 55 PID control 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Table of contents 4 3.10.5 3.10.5.1 3.10.5.2 3.10.5.3 3.10.5.4 3.10.5.5 3.10.5.6 3.10.5.7 3.10.5.8 3.10.5.9 3.10.5.10 3.10.5.11 3.10.5.12 3.10.5.13 3.10.5.14 Working with the parameter view............................................................................................58 Overview .................................................................................................................................58 Filtering the parameter table ...................................................................................................58 Sorting the parameter table ....................................................................................................59 Transferring parameter data to other editors ..........................................................................59 Indicating errors ......................................................................................................................60 Editing start values in the project ............................................................................................60 Status of configuration (offline) ...............................................................................................62 Monitoring values online in the parameter view .....................................................................63 Change display format of value ..............................................................................................64 Create snapshot of monitor values .........................................................................................65 Modifying values .....................................................................................................................66 Comparing values ...................................................................................................................68 Applying values from the online program as start values .......................................................70 Initializing setpoints in the online program ..............................................................................71 3.11 Display instance DB of a technology object. ..........................................................................72 Using PID_Compact ................................................................................................................................ 73 4.1 Technology object PID_Compact ...........................................................................................73 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.3 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.4 PID_Compact V2 ....................................................................................................................74 Configuring PID_Compact V2 .................................................................................................74 Basic settings V2 ....................................................................................................................74 Process value settings V2 ......................................................................................................78 Advanced settings V2 .............................................................................................................79 Commissioning PID_Compact V2...........................................................................................88 Pretuning V2 ...........................................................................................................................88 Fine tuning V2 .........................................................................................................................90 "Manual" mode V1 ..................................................................................................................92 Override control with PID_Compact V2 ..................................................................................93 Simulating PID_Compact V2 with PLCSIM ............................................................................97 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.1.1 4.3.1.2 4.3.1.3 4.3.2 4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2 4.3.2.3 4.3.2.4 4.3.3 PID_Compact V1 ....................................................................................................................98 Configuring PID_Compact V1 .................................................................................................98 Basic settings V1 ....................................................................................................................98 Process value settings V1 ....................................................................................................102 Advanced settings V1 ...........................................................................................................103 Commissioning PID_Compact V1.........................................................................................111 Commissioning V1 ................................................................................................................111 Pretuning V1 .........................................................................................................................112 Fine tuning V1 .......................................................................................................................114 "Manual" mode V1 ................................................................................................................116 Simulating PID_Compact V1 with PLCSIM ..........................................................................117 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 5 Table of contents 5 6 Using PID_3Step ................................................................................................................................... 118 5.1 Technology object PID_3Step.............................................................................................. 118 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.1.1 5.2.1.2 5.2.1.3 5.2.1.4 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.2.3 5.2.2.4 5.2.3 PID_3Step V2....................................................................................................................... 119 Configuring PID_3Step V2 ................................................................................................... 119 Basic settings V2.................................................................................................................. 119 Process value settings V2.................................................................................................... 124 Final controlling element settings V2 ................................................................................... 125 Advanced settings V2 .......................................................................................................... 129 Commissioning PID_3Step V2 ............................................................................................. 133 Pretuning V2 ........................................................................................................................ 133 Fine tuning V2 ...................................................................................................................... 135 Commissioning with manual PID parameters V2 ................................................................ 137 Measuring the motor transition time V2 ............................................................................... 138 Simulating PID_3Step V2 with PLCSIM ............................................................................... 141 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.1.1 5.3.1.2 5.3.1.3 5.3.1.4 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.2.3 5.3.2.4 5.3.2.5 5.3.3 PID_3Step V1....................................................................................................................... 142 Configuring PID_3Step V1 ................................................................................................... 142 Basic settings V1.................................................................................................................. 142 Process value settings V1.................................................................................................... 147 V1 final controlling element setting ...................................................................................... 148 Advanced settings V1 .......................................................................................................... 151 Commissioning PID_3Step V1 ............................................................................................. 154 Commissioning V1 ............................................................................................................... 154 Pretuning V1 ........................................................................................................................ 155 Fine tuning V1 ...................................................................................................................... 156 Commissioning with manual PID parameters V1 ................................................................ 157 Measuring the motor transition time V1 ............................................................................... 158 Simulating PID_3Step V1 with PLCSIM ............................................................................... 160 Using PID_Temp.................................................................................................................................... 161 6.1 Technology object PID_Temp .............................................................................................. 161 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.4 6.2.1.5 6.2.1.6 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 Configuring PID_Temp ......................................................................................................... 162 Basic settings ....................................................................................................................... 162 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 162 Controller type ...................................................................................................................... 163 Setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 163 Process value....................................................................................................................... 164 Heating and cooling output value......................................................................................... 164 Cascade ............................................................................................................................... 166 Process value settings ......................................................................................................... 167 Process value limits ............................................................................................................. 167 Process value scaling .......................................................................................................... 167 Output settings ..................................................................................................................... 168 Basic settings of output ........................................................................................................ 168 Output value limits and scaling ............................................................................................ 171 Advanced settings ................................................................................................................ 174 Process value monitoring..................................................................................................... 174 PWM limits ........................................................................................................................... 175 PID parameters .................................................................................................................... 177 PID control 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Table of contents 7 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 Commissioning PID_Temp ...................................................................................................185 Commissioning .....................................................................................................................185 Pretuning ...............................................................................................................................186 Fine tuning ............................................................................................................................189 "Manual" mode......................................................................................................................193 Substitute setpoint ................................................................................................................194 Cascade commissioning .......................................................................................................194 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 Cascade control with PID_Temp ..........................................................................................195 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................195 Program creation ..................................................................................................................197 Configuration.........................................................................................................................199 Commissioning .....................................................................................................................201 Substitute setpoint ................................................................................................................202 Operating modes and fault response....................................................................................202 6.5 Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp ..................................................................................203 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp ...........................................................................................206 6.7 Simulating PID_Temp with PLCSIM .....................................................................................211 Using PID basic functions ...................................................................................................................... 212 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 CONT_C ...............................................................................................................................212 Technology object CONT_C .................................................................................................212 Configure controller difference CONT_C ..............................................................................213 Configure the controller algorithm CONT_C .........................................................................214 Configure the output value CONT_C ....................................................................................215 Programming a pulse controller ............................................................................................216 Commissioning CONT_C ......................................................................................................217 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 CONT_S ................................................................................................................................218 Technology object CONT_S .................................................................................................218 Configure controller difference CONT_S ..............................................................................219 Configuring control algorithm CONT_S ................................................................................220 Configure manipulated value CONT_S.................................................................................220 Commissioning CONT_S ......................................................................................................221 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2.1 7.3.2.2 7.3.2.3 7.3.2.4 7.3.3 7.3.3.1 7.3.3.2 7.3.3.3 7.3.3.4 TCONT_CP ...........................................................................................................................222 Technology object TCONT_CP ............................................................................................222 Configure TCONT_CP ..........................................................................................................223 Controller difference..............................................................................................................223 Controlling algorithm .............................................................................................................224 Manipulated value continual controller .................................................................................225 Manipulated value pulse controller .......................................................................................226 Commissioning TCONT_CP .................................................................................................229 Optimization of TCONT_CP ..................................................................................................229 Requirements for an optimization .........................................................................................232 Possibilities for optimization ..................................................................................................234 Tuning result .........................................................................................................................237 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 7 Table of contents 8 9 7.3.3.5 7.3.3.6 7.3.3.7 7.3.3.8 7.3.3.9 7.3.3.10 7.3.3.11 Parallel tuning of controller channels ................................................................................... 238 Fault descriptions and corrective measures ........................................................................ 239 Performing pretuning ........................................................................................................... 242 Performing fine tuning .......................................................................................................... 242 Cancelling pretuning or fine tuning ...................................................................................... 243 Manual fine-tuning in control mode ...................................................................................... 243 Performing fine tuning manually .......................................................................................... 245 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 TCONT_S............................................................................................................................. 246 Technology object TCONT_S .............................................................................................. 246 Configure controller difference TCONT_S ........................................................................... 247 Configure controller algorithm TCONT_S ............................................................................ 248 Configure manipulated value TCONT_S ............................................................................. 248 Commissioning TCONT_S ................................................................................................... 249 Auxiliary functions .................................................................................................................................. 250 8.1 Polyline................................................................................................................................. 250 8.2 SplitRange............................................................................................................................ 250 8.3 RampFunction ...................................................................................................................... 251 Instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 252 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.4.1 9.1.4.2 9.1.4.3 9.1.4.4 9.1.4.5 9.1.4.6 9.1.4.7 9.1.4.8 9.1.4.9 9.1.4.10 9.1.4.11 9.1.4.12 9.1.4.13 9.1.5 9.1.5.1 9.1.5.2 9.1.5.3 9.1.5.4 9.1.5.5 9.1.5.6 9.1.5.7 9.1.5.8 9.1.5.9 9.1.5.10 PID_Compact ....................................................................................................................... 252 New features of PID_Compact............................................................................................. 252 Compatibility with CPU and FW ........................................................................................... 256 CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_Compact V2.x .................................. 257 PID_Compact V2.................................................................................................................. 258 Description of PID_Compact V2 .......................................................................................... 258 Mode of operation of PID_Compact V2 ............................................................................... 261 Input parameters of PID_Compact V2 ................................................................................. 264 Output parameters of PID_Compact V2 .............................................................................. 266 In/out parameters of PID_Compact V2 ................................................................................ 267 Static tags of PID_Compact V2............................................................................................ 268 Changing the PID_Compact V2 interface ............................................................................ 276 Parameters State and Mode V2........................................................................................... 278 Parameter ErrorBits V2 ........................................................................................................ 282 Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 ............................................................................................. 284 Tag Warning V2 ................................................................................................................... 286 IntegralResetMode V2 tag ................................................................................................... 287 Sample program for PID_Compact ...................................................................................... 289 PID_Compact V1.................................................................................................................. 297 Description of PID_Compact V1 .......................................................................................... 297 Input parameters of PID_Compact V1 ................................................................................. 301 Output parameters of PID_Compact V1 .............................................................................. 302 Static tags of PID_Compact V1............................................................................................ 303 Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 ............................................................................... 308 Parameter Error V1 .............................................................................................................. 312 Parameter Reset V1 ............................................................................................................ 313 Tag sd_warning V1 .............................................................................................................. 315 Tag i_Event_SUT V1 ............................................................................................................ 315 Tag i_Event_TIR V1 ............................................................................................................. 316 PID control 8 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Table of contents 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.4.1 9.2.4.2 9.2.4.3 9.2.4.4 9.2.4.5 9.2.4.6 9.2.4.7 9.2.4.8 9.2.4.9 9.2.4.10 9.2.4.11 9.2.5 9.2.5.1 9.2.5.2 9.2.5.3 9.2.5.4 9.2.5.5 9.2.5.6 9.2.5.7 9.2.5.8 9.2.5.9 9.2.5.10 9.2.5.11 9.2.5.12 PID_3Step .............................................................................................................................317 New features of PID_3Step ..................................................................................................317 Compatibility with CPU and FW............................................................................................319 CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_3Step V2.x ........................................320 PID_3Step V2 .......................................................................................................................321 Description of PID_3Step V2 ................................................................................................321 Mode of operation of PID_3Step V2 .....................................................................................326 Changing the PID_3Step V2 interface ..................................................................................330 Input parameters of PID_3Step V2 .......................................................................................331 Output parameters of PID_3Step V2 ....................................................................................333 In/out parameters of PID-3Step V2.......................................................................................335 Static tags of PID_3Step V2 .................................................................................................336 Parameters State and Mode V2 ...........................................................................................346 Parameter ErrorBits V2 .........................................................................................................351 Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 ..............................................................................................354 Tag Warning V2 ....................................................................................................................356 PID_3Step V1 .......................................................................................................................357 Description PID_3Step V1 ....................................................................................................357 Operating principle PID_3Step V1 ........................................................................................362 PID_3Step V1 input parameters ...........................................................................................365 PID_3Step V1 output parameters .........................................................................................367 PID_3Step V1 static tags ......................................................................................................369 Parameter State and Retain.Mode V1 ..................................................................................378 Parameter ErrorBits V1 .........................................................................................................385 Parameter Reset V1 .............................................................................................................387 Tag ActivateRecoverMode V1 ..............................................................................................388 Tag Warning V1 ....................................................................................................................390 Tag SUT.State V1 .................................................................................................................391 Tag TIR.State V1 ..................................................................................................................391 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.4.1 9.3.4.2 9.3.4.3 9.3.4.4 9.3.4.5 9.3.4.6 9.3.4.7 9.3.4.8 9.3.4.9 9.3.4.10 9.3.4.11 9.3.4.12 PID_Temp .............................................................................................................................392 New features of PID_Temp ...................................................................................................392 Compatibility with CPU and FW............................................................................................392 CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_Temp V1 ...........................................393 PID_Temp .............................................................................................................................394 Description of PID_Temp ......................................................................................................394 Mode of operation of PID_Temp ...........................................................................................399 Input parameters of PID_Temp.............................................................................................405 Output parameters of PID_Temp ..........................................................................................407 In/out parameters of PID_Temp V2 ......................................................................................409 PID_Temp static tags ............................................................................................................411 PID_Temp state and mode parameters ................................................................................446 PID_Temp ErrorBits parameter ............................................................................................455 PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode tag...................................................................................458 PID_Temp Warning tag ........................................................................................................460 PwmPeriode tag....................................................................................................................461 IntegralResetMode tag .........................................................................................................464 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 9 Table of contents 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.1.1 9.4.1.2 9.4.1.3 9.4.1.4 9.4.1.5 9.4.2 9.4.2.1 9.4.2.2 9.4.2.3 9.4.2.4 9.4.2.5 9.4.3 9.4.3.1 9.4.3.2 9.4.3.3 9.4.3.4 9.4.3.5 9.4.3.6 9.4.3.7 9.4.4 9.4.4.1 9.4.4.2 9.4.4.3 9.4.4.4 9.4.4.5 9.4.4.6 9.4.4.7 9.4.4.8 9.4.4.9 9.4.4.10 9.4.5 9.4.5.1 9.4.5.2 9.4.5.3 9.4.5.4 9.4.5.5 9.4.5.6 9.4.5.7 9.4.6 9.4.6.1 9.4.6.2 9.4.6.3 PID basic functions .............................................................................................................. 466 CONT_C............................................................................................................................... 466 Description CONT_C ........................................................................................................... 466 How CONT_C works ............................................................................................................ 467 CONT_C block diagram ....................................................................................................... 469 Input parameter CONT_C .................................................................................................... 470 Output parameters CONT_C ............................................................................................... 472 CONT_S ............................................................................................................................... 473 Description CONT_S ............................................................................................................ 473 Mode of operation CONT_S................................................................................................. 474 Block diagram CONT_S ....................................................................................................... 475 Input parameters CONT_S .................................................................................................. 476 Output parameters CONT_S................................................................................................ 477 PULSEGEN.......................................................................................................................... 478 Description PULSEGEN ...................................................................................................... 478 Mode of operation PULSEGEN ........................................................................................... 479 Mode of operation PULSEGEN ........................................................................................... 482 Three-step control ................................................................................................................ 483 Two-step control................................................................................................................... 486 Input parameters PULSEGEN ............................................................................................. 487 Output parameter PULSEGEN ............................................................................................ 488 TCONT_CP .......................................................................................................................... 489 Description TCONT_CP ....................................................................................................... 489 Mode of operation TCONT_CP ............................................................................................ 490 Operating principle of the pulse generator........................................................................... 499 Block diagram TCONT_CP .................................................................................................. 502 Input parameters TCONT_CP.............................................................................................. 504 Output parameters TCONT_CP ........................................................................................... 505 In/out parameters TCONT_CP............................................................................................. 506 Static variables TCONT_CP ................................................................................................ 507 Parameter STATUS_H ......................................................................................................... 512 Parameters STATUS_D ....................................................................................................... 513 TCONT_S............................................................................................................................. 514 Description TCONT_S ......................................................................................................... 514 Mode of operation TCONT_S .............................................................................................. 515 Block diagram TCONT_S..................................................................................................... 519 Input paramters TCONT_S .................................................................................................. 520 Output parameters TCONT_S ............................................................................................. 521 In/out parameters TCONT_S ............................................................................................... 521 Static variables TCONT_S ................................................................................................... 522 Integrated system functions ................................................................................................. 523 CONT_C_SF ........................................................................................................................ 523 CONT_S_SF ........................................................................................................................ 523 PULSEGEN_SF ................................................................................................................... 524 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 Polyline................................................................................................................................. 525 Compatibility with CPU and FW ........................................................................................... 525 Description Polyline ............................................................................................................. 525 Operating principle Polyline ................................................................................................. 529 Input parameters of Polyline ................................................................................................ 533 Output parameters of Polyline ............................................................................................. 533 Static tags of Polyline ........................................................................................................... 534 ErrorBits parameter .............................................................................................................. 536 PID control 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Table of contents A 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 9.6.4 9.6.5 9.6.6 SplitRange ............................................................................................................................541 Compatibility with CPU and FW............................................................................................541 SplitRange description ..........................................................................................................541 SplitRange input parameters ................................................................................................544 SplitRange output parameters ..............................................................................................544 SplitRange static tags ...........................................................................................................545 ErrorBits parameter...............................................................................................................546 9.7 9.7.1 9.7.2 9.7.3 9.7.4 9.7.5 9.7.6 9.7.7 RampFunction.......................................................................................................................549 Compatibility with CPU and FW............................................................................................549 RampFunction description ....................................................................................................549 RampFunction mode of operation ........................................................................................554 RampFunction input parameters ..........................................................................................558 RampFunction output parameters ........................................................................................558 RampFunction static tags .....................................................................................................559 ErrorBits parameter...............................................................................................................561 Service & Support .................................................................................................................................. 566 Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 569 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 11 Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. PID control 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 13 Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). PID control 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 15 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). PID control 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.1 2 Controlled system and actuators Controlled system Room temperature control by means of a heating system is a simple example of a controlled system. A sensor measures the room temperature and transfers the value to a controller. The controller compares the current room temperature with a setpoint and calculates an output value (manipulated variable) for heating control. A properly set PID controller reaches this setpoint as quickly as possible and then holds it a constant value. After a change in the output value, the process value often changes only with a time delay. The controller has to compensate for this response. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 17 Principles for control 2.1 Controlled system and actuators Actuators The actuator is an element of the controlled system and is influenced by the controller. Its function modifies mass and energy flows. The table below provides an overview of actuator applications. Application Actuator Liquid and gaseous mass flow Valve, shutter, gate valve Solid mass flow, e.g., bulk material Articulated baffle, conveyor, vibrator channel Flow of electrical power Switching contact, contactor, relay, thyristor Variable resistor, variable transformer, transistor Actuators are distinguished as follows: Proportional actuators with constant actuating signal These elements set degrees of opening, angular positions or positions in proportion to the output value. The output value has an analog effect on the process within the control range. Actuators in this group include spring-loaded pneumatic drives, as well as motorized drives with position feedback for which a position control system is formed. An continuous controller, such as PID_Compact, generates the output value. Proportional actuators with pulse-width modulated signal These actuators are used to generate the output of pulses with a length proportional to the output value within the sampling time intervals. The actuator - e.g. a heating resistor or cooling apparatus - is switched on in isochronous mode for durations that differ depending on the output value. The actuating signal can assume unipolar "On" or "Off" states, or represent bipolar states such as "open/close", "forward/backward", "accelerate/brake". The output value is generated by a two-step controller such as PID_Compact with pulsewidth modulation. Actuators with integral action and three-step actuating signal Actuators are frequently operated by motors with an on period that is proportional to the actuator travel of the choke element. This includes elements such as valves, shutters, and gate valves. In spite of their different design, all of these actuators follow the effect of an integral action at the input of the controlled system. A step controller, such as PID_3Step. generates the output value. PID control 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.2 Controlled systems 2.2 Controlled systems The properties of a controlled system can hardly be influenced as these are determined by the technical requirements of the process and machinery. Acceptable control results can only be achieved by selecting a suitable controller type for the specific controlled system and adapting the controller to the time response of the controlled system. Therefore, it is is indispensable for the configuration of the proportional, integral and derivative actions of the controller to have precise knowledge of the type and parameters of the controlled system. Controlled system types Controlled systems are classified based on their time response to step changes of the output value. We distinguish between the following controlled systems: Self-regulating controlled systems - Proportional-action controlled systems - PT1 controlled systems - PT2 controlled systems Non-self-regulating controlled systems Controlled systems with and without dead time Self-regulating controlled systems Proportional-action controlled systems In proportional-action controlled systems, the process value follows the output value almost immediately. The ratio between the process value and output value is defined by the proportional Gain of the controlled system. Examples: Gate valve in a piping system Voltage dividers Step-down function in hydraulic systems PT1 controlled systems In a PT1 controlled system, the process value initially changes in proportion to the change of the output value. The rate of change of the process value is reduced as a function of the time until the end value is reached, i.e., it is delayed. Examples: Spring damping system Charge of RC elements Water container that is heated with steam. The time constants are often identical for heating and cooling processes, or for charging and discharge characteristics. With different time constants, controlling is clearly more complex. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 19 Principles for control 2.2 Controlled systems PT2 controlled systems In a PT2 controlled system, the process value does not immediately follow a step change of the output value, i.e., it increases in proportion to the positive rate of rise and then approaches the setpoint at a decreasing rate of rise. The controlled system shows a proportional response characteristic with second order delay element. Examples: Pressure control Flow rate control Temperature control Non-self-regulating controlled systems Non-self-regulating controlled systems have an integral response. The process value approaches an infinite maximum value. Example: Liquid flow into a container Controlled systems with dead time A dead time always represents the runtime or transport time that has to expire before a change to the system input can be measured at the system output. In controlled systems with dead time, the process value change is delayed by the amount of the dead time. Example: Conveyor PID control 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.3 Characteristic values of the control section 2.3 Characteristic values of the control section Determining the time response from the step response Time response of the controlled system can be determined based on the time characteristic of process value x following a step change of output value y. Most controlled systems are self-regulating controlled systems. The time response can be determined by approximation using the variables Delay time Tu, Recovery time Tg and Maximum value Xmax. The variables are determined by applying tangents to the maximum value and the inflection point of the step response. In many situations, it is not possible to record the response characteristic up to the maximum value because the process value cannot exceed specific values. In this case, the rate of rise vmax is used to identify the controlled system (vmax = x/t). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 21 Principles for control 2.3 Characteristic values of the control section The controllability of the controlled system can be estimated based on the ratio Tu/Tg, or Tu x vmax/Xmax . Rule: Process type Tu / Tg Suitability of the controlled system for controlling I < 0.1 can be controlled well II 0.1 to 0.3 can still be controlled III > 0.3 difficult to control Influence of the dead time on the controllability of a controlled system A controlled system with dead time and recovery reacts as follows to a jump of the output value. Tt Dead time Tu Delay time Tg Recovery time y Output value x Process value The controllability of a self-regulating controlled system with dead time is determined by the ratio of Tt to Tg. Tt must be small compared to Tg. Rule: Tt/Tg 1 PID control 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.3 Characteristic values of the control section Response rate of controlled systems Controlled systems can be judged on the basis of the following values: Tu < 0.5 min, Tg < 5 min = fast controlled system Tu > 0.5 min, Tg > 5 min = slow controlled system Parameters of certain controlled systems Physical quantity Temperature Controlled system Small electrically heated furnace Large electrically heated annealing furnace Large gas-heated annealing furnace Distillation tower 0.5 to 1 min 5 to 15 min Up to 60 K/min. 1 to 5 min 10 to 20 min Up to 20 K/min. 0.2 to 5 min 3 to 60 min 1 to 30 K/min 1 to 7 min 40 to 60 min 0.1 to 0.5 C/s 0.5 to 0.7 min 10 to 20 min Not specified 12 to 15 min 200 to 300 min Not specified 30 s to 2.5 min 1 to 4 min 2C/s 0.5 to 3 min 3 to 30 min 5 to 20 K/min 1 to 6 min 5 to 60 min Extruders Packaging machines 0.5 to 4 min 3 to 40 min 2 to 35 K/min 1 to 5 min 10 to 60 min 1 C/min 0 to 5 s 0.2 to 10 s Not relevant Pipeline with liquid None None Gas pipeline None 0.1 s Not relevant Drum boiler with gas or oil firing None 150 s Not relevant Room heating Pipeline with gas Drum boiler with impact grinding mills 1 to 2 min 2 to 5 min Not relevant 0.6 to 1 min Not specified 0.1 to 0.3 cm/s Small electric drive None 0.2 to 10 s Not relevant Large electric drive None 5 to 40 s Not relevant Steam turbine None Not specified 50 min-1 Small generators None 1 to 5 s Not relevant Large generators None 5 to 10 s Not relevant Vessel level Drum boiler Speed Voltage Rate of rise vmax High-pressure autoclaves Injection molding machines Pressure Recovery time Tg Autoclaves (2.5 m3) Steam superheater Flow rate Delay time Tu PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 23 Principles for control 2.4 Pulse controller 2.4 Pulse controller Two-step controllers without feedback Two-step controllers have the state "ON" and "OFF" as the switching function. This corresponds to 100% or 0% output. This behavior generates a sustained oscillation of process value x around setpoint w. The amplitude and duration of the oscillation increase in proportion to the ratio between the delay time Tu and recovery time Tg of the controlled system. These controllers are used mainly for simple temperature control systems (such as electrically directly heated furnaces) or as limit-value signaling units. The following diagram shows the characteristic of a two-step controller ON Yh Control range w Setpoint OFF PID control 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.4 Pulse controller The following diagram shows the control function of a two-step controller Response characteristic without controller Tu Delay time Tg Recovery time XSd Switching difference Response characteristic with two-step controller PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 25 Principles for control 2.4 Pulse controller Two-step controllers with feedback The behavior of two-step controllers in the case of controlled systems with larger delay times, such as furnaces where the functional space is separated from the heating, can be improved by the use of electronic feedback. The feedback is used to increase the switching frequency of the controller, which reduces the amplitude of the process value. In addition, the control-action results can be improved substantially in dynamic operation. The limit for the switching frequency is set by the output level. It should not exceed 1 to 5 switches per minute at mechanical actuators, such as relays and contactors. In the case of voltage and current outputs with downstream thyristor or Triac controllers high switching frequencies can be selected that exceed the limit frequency of the controlled system by far. Since the switching pulses can no longer be determined at the output of the controlled system, results comparable with those of continuous controllers are obtained. The output value is generated by pulse-width modulation of the output value of a continuous controller. Two-step controllers with feedback are used for temperature control in furnaces, at processing machines in the plastics, textile, paper, rubber and foodstuff industries as well as for heating and cooling devices. PID control 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.4 Pulse controller Three-step controllers Three-step controllers are used for heating / cooling. These controllers have two switching points as their output. The control-action results are optimized through electronic feedback structures. Fields of applications for such controllers are heating, low-temperature, climatic chambers and tool heating units for plastic-processing machines. The following diagram shows the characteristic of a three-step controller y Output value, e.g. y11 = 100% heating y12 = 0% heating y21 = 0% cooling y22 = 100% cooling x Physical quantity of the process value, e.g., temperature in C w Setpoint xSh Distance between Switching Point 1 and Switching Point 2 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 27 Principles for control 2.5 Response to setpoint changes and disturbances 2.5 Response to setpoint changes and disturbances Response to setpoint changes The process value should follow a setpoint change as quickly as possible. The response to setpoint changes is improved by minimizing fluctuation of the process value and the time required to reach the new setpoint. x Process value w Setpoint Response to disturbances The setpoint is influenced by disturbance variables. The controller has to eliminate the resulting control deviations in the shortest time possible. The response to disturbances is improved by minimizing fluctuation of the process value and the time required to reach the new setpoint. x Process value w Setpoint Influencing a disturbance variable PID control 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.5 Response to setpoint changes and disturbances Disturbance variables are corrected by a controller with integral action. A persistent disturbance variable does not reduce control quality because the control deviation is relatively constant. Dynamic disturbance variables have a more significant impact on control quality because of control deviation fluctuation. The control deviation is eliminated again only by means of the slow acting integral action. A measurable disturbance variable can be included in the controlled system. This inclusion would significantly accelerated the response of the controller. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 29 Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Control behavior of controllers A precise adaptation of the controller to the time response of the controlled system is decisive for the controller's precise settling to the setpoint and optimum response to disturbance variables. The feedback circuit can have a proportional action (P), proportional-derivative action (PD), proportional-integral action (PI), or proportional-integral-derivative action (PID). If step functions are to be triggered by control deviations, the step responses of the controllers differ depending on their type. Step response of a proportional action controller Control deviation Output value of a continuous controller Output value of a pulse controller PID control 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Equation for proportional action controller Output value and control deviation are directly proportional, meaning: Output value = proportional gain x control deviation y = GAIN x x Step response of a PD-action controller Control deviation TM_LAG Delay of the Derivative action Output value of a continuous controller Output value of a pulse controller PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 31 Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Equation for PD-action controller The following applies for the step response of the PD-action controller in the time range: t = time interval since the step of the control deviation The derivative action generates a output value as a function of the rate of change of the process value. A derivative action by itself is not suitable for controlling because the output value only follows a step of the process value. As long as the process value remains constant, the output value will no longer change. The response to disturbances of the derivative action is improved in combination with a proportional action. Disturbances are not corrected completely. The good dynamic response is advantageous. A well attenuated, non-oscillating response is achieved during approach and setpoint change. A controller with derivative action is not appropriate if a controlled system has pulsing measured quantities, for example, in the case of pressure or flow control systems. PID control 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Step response of a PI-action controller Control deviation Output value of a continuous controller Output value of a pulse controller An integral action in the controller adds the control deviation as a function of the time. This means that the controller corrects the system until the control deviation is eliminated. A sustained control deviation is generated at controllers with proportional action only. This effect can be eliminated by means of an integral action in the controller. In practical experience, a combination of the proportional, integral and derivative actions is ideal, depending on the requirements placed on the control response. The time response of the individual components can be described by the controller parameters proportional gain GAIN, integral action time TI (integral action), and derivative action time TD (derivative action). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 33 Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Equation for PI-action controller The following applies for the step response of the PI-action controller in the time range: t = time interval since the step of the control deviation PID control 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Step response of a PID controller Control deviation TM_LAG Delay of the Derivative action Ti Integral action time Output value of a continuous controller Output value of a pulse controller PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 35 Principles for control 2.6 Control Response at Different Feedback Structures Equation for PID controller The following applies for the step response of the PID controller in the time range: t = time interval since the step of the control deviation Response of a controlled system with different controller structures Most of the controller systems occurring in process engineering can be controlled by means of a controller with PI-action response. In the case of slow controlled system with a large dead time, for example temperature control systems, the control result can be improved by means of a controller with PID action. No controller w Setpoint x Process value PID controller PD-action controller Controllers with PI and PID action have the advantage that the process value does not have any deviation from the setpoint value after settling. The process value oscillates over the setpoint during approach. PID control 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Principles for control 2.7 Selection of the controller structure for specified controlled systems 2.7 Selection of the controller structure for specified controlled systems Selection of the Suitable Controller Structures To achieve optimum control results, select a controller structure that is suitable for the controlled system and that you can adapt to the controlled system within specific limits. The table below provides an overview of suitable combinations of a controller structure and controlled system. Controlled system Controller structure P PD PI PID With dead time only Unsuitable Unsuitable Suitable Unsuitable PT1 with dead time Unsuitable Unsuitable Well suited Well suited PT2 with dead time Unsuitable Suited conditionally Well suited Well suited Higher order Unsuitable Unsuitable Suited conditionally Well suited Not self-regulating Well suited Well suited Well suited Well suited The table below provides an overview of suitable combinations of a controller structure and physical quantity. Physical quantity Controller structure P PD Sustained control deviation PI PID No sustained control deviation Temperature For low perforWell suited mance requirements and proportional action controlled systems with Tu/Tg < 0,1 The most suitable controller structures for high performance requirements (except for specially adapted special controllers) Pressure Suitable, if the delay time is inconsiderable Unsuitable The most suitable controller structures for high performance requirements (except for specially adapted special controllers) Flow rate Unsuitable, because required GAIN range is usually too large Unsuitable Suitable, but inte- Hardly required gral action controller alone often better PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 37 Principles for control 2.8 PID parameter settings 2.8 PID parameter settings Rule of Thumb for the Parameter Setting Controller structure Setting P GAIN vmax x Tu [ C ] PI GAIN 1.2 x vmax x Tu [ C ] PD GAIN 0.83 x vmax x Tu [ C ] TI 4 x Tu [ min ] TD 0.25 x vmax x Tu [ min ] TM_LAG 0.5 x TD[ min ] PID GAIN 0.83 x vmax x Tu [ C ] TI 2 x Tu [ min ] TD 0.4 x Tu [ min ] TM_LAG 0.5 x TD[ min ] PD/PID GAIN 0.4 x vmax x Tu [ C ] TI 2 x Tu [ min ] TD 0.4 x Tu [ min ] TM_LAG 0.5 x TD[ min ] Instead of vmax = x / t , you can use Xmax / Tg. In the case of controllers with PID structure the setting of the integral action time and differential-action time is usually coupled with each other. The ratio TI / TD lies between 4 and 5 and is optimal for most controlled systems. Non-observance of the differential-action time TD is uncritical at PD controllers. In the case of PI and PID controllers, control oscillations occur if the integral action time TI has been select by more than half too small. An integral action time that is too large slows down the settling times of disturbances. One cannot expect that the control loops operate "optimally" after the first parameter settings. Experience shows that adjusting is always necessary, when a system exists that is "difficult to control" with Tu / Tg > 0.3. PID control 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 3 Configuring a software controller 3.1 Overview of software controller For the configuration of a software controller, you need an instruction with the control algorithm and a technology object. The technology object for a software controller corresponds with the instance DB of the instruction. The configuration of the controller is saved in the technology object. In contrast to the instance DBs of other instructions, technology objects are not stored for the program resources, but rather under CPU > Technology objects. Technology objects and instructions CPU Library Instruction Technology object Description S7-1200 Compact PID PID_Compact V1.x PID_Compact V1.x Universal PID controller with integrated tuning S7-1200 PID_3Step V1.x PID_3Step V1.x PID controller with integrated tuning for valves S7-1500 S7-1200 V4.x PID_Compact V2.x PID_Compact V2.x Universal PID controller with integrated tuning S7-1500 PID_3Step V2.x PID_3Step V2.x PID controller with integrated tuning for valves PID_Temp V1.x PID_Temp V1.x Universal PID temperature controller with integrated tuning S7-1200 V4.x S7-1500 V1.7 S7-1200 V4.1 S7-1500/300/400 CONT_C CONT_C Continuous controller CONT_S CONT_S Step controller for actuators with integrating behavior S7-1500/300/400 PULSEGEN - Pulse generator for actuators with proportional behavior S7-1500/300/400 TCONT_CP TCONT_CP Continuous temperature controller with pulse generator S7-1500/300/400 TCONT_S TCONT_S Temperature controller for actuators with integrating behavior S7-1500/300/400 PID basic functions PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 39 Configuring a software controller 3.1 Overview of software controller CPU Library Instruction Technology object Description S7-300/400 PID Self Tuner TUN_EC TUN_EC Optimization of a continuous controller TUN_ES TUN_ES Optimization of a step controller PID_CP PID_CP Continuous controller with pulse generator PID_ES PID_ES Step controller for actuators with integrating behavior LP_SCHED - Distribute controller calls A_DEAD_B - Filter interfering signal from control deviation CRP_IN - Scale analog input signal CRP_OUT - Scale analog output signal S7-300/400 S7-300/400 S7-300/400 S7-300/400 S7-300/400 S7-300/400 S7-300/400 S7-300/400 Standard PID Control (PID Professional optional package) Modular PID Control (PID Professional optional package) DEAD_T - Delay output of input signal S7-300/400 DEADBAND - Suppress small fluctuations to the process value S7-300/400 DIF - Differentiate input signals over time S7-300/400 ERR_MON S7-300/400 INTEG - Integrate input signals over time S7-300/400 LAG1ST - First-order delay element S7-300/400 LAG2ND - Second-order delay element S7-300/400 LIMALARM - Report limit values S7-300/400 LIMITER - Limiting the manipulated variable S7-300/400 LMNGEN_C - Determine manipulated variable for continuous controller S7-300/400 LMNGEN_S - Determine manipulated variable for step controller Monitor control deviation S7-300/400 NONLIN - Linearize encoder signal S7-300/400 NORM - Scale process value physically S7-300/400 OVERRIDE - Switch manipulated variable from 2 PID controllers to 1 actuator S7-300/400 PARA_CTL - Switch parameter sets S7-300/400 PID - PID algorithm S7-300/400 PUSLEGEN_M - Generate pulse for proportional actuators S7-300/400 RMP_SOAK - Specify setpoint according to ramp / soak S7-300/400 ROC_LIM - Limit rate of change S7-300/400 SCALE_M - Scale process value S7-300/400 SP_GEN - Specify setpoint manually S7-300/400 SPLT_RAN - Split manipulated variable range S7-300/400 SWITCH - Switch analog values S7-300/400 LP_SCHED_M - Distribute controller calls PID control 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.2 Steps for the configuration of a software controller 3.2 Steps for the configuration of a software controller All SW-controllers are configured according to the same scheme: 3.3 Step Description 1 Add technology object (Page 41) 2 Configure technology object (Page 42) 3 Call instruction in the user program (Page 43) 4 Download technology object to device (Page 44) 5 Commission software controller (Page 45) 6 Save optimized PID parameters in the project (Page 45) 7 Comparing values (Page 47) 8 Display instances of a technology object (Page 72) Add technology objects Add technology object in the project navigator When a technology object is added, an instance DB is created for the instruction of this technology object. The configuration of the technology object is stored in this instance DB. Requirement A project with a CPU has been created. Procedure To add a technology object, proceed as follows: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Technology objects" folder. 3. Double-click "Add new object". The "Add new object" dialog box opens. 4. Click on the "PID" button. All available PID-controllers for this CPU are displayed. 5. Select the instruction for the technology object, for example, PID_Compact. 6. Enter an individual name for the technology object in the "Name" input field. 7. Select the "Manual" option if you want to change the suggested data block number of the instance DB. 8. Click "Further information" if you want to add own information to the technology object. 9. Confirm with "OK". PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 41 Configuring a software controller 3.4 Configure technology objects Result The new technology object has been created and stored in the project tree in the "Technology objects" folder. The technology object is used if the instruction for this technology object is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. Note You can select the "Add new and open" check box at the bottom of the dialog box. This opens the configuration of the technology object after adding has been completed. 3.4 Configure technology objects The properties of a technology object on a S7-1200 CPU can be configured in two ways. In the Inspector window of the programming editor In the configuration editor The properties of a technology object on a S7-300/400 CPU can only be configured in the configuration editor. Inspector window of the programming editor In the Inspector window of the programming editor you can only configure the parameters required for operation. The offline values of the parameters are also shown in online mode. You can only change the online values in the commissioning window. To open the Inspector window of the technology object, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Program blocks" folder in the project tree. 2. Double click the block (cyclic interrupt OB) in which you open the instruction of the SWcontroller. The block is opened in the work area. 3. Click on the instruction of the SW-controller. 4. In the Inspector window, select the "Properties" and "Configuration" tabs consecutively. Configuration window For each technology object, there is a specific configuration window in which you can configure all properties. To open the configuration window of the technology object, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click the "Configuration" object. PID control 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.5 Call instruction in the user program Symbols Icons in the area navigation of the configuration and in the Inspector window show additional details about the completeness of the configuration: The configuration contains default values and is complete. The configuration exclusively contains default values. With these default values the use of the technology object is possible without further changes. The configuration contains user-defined or automatically adjusted values and is complete All input fields of the configuration contain valid values and at least one default setting was changed. The configuration is incomplete or faulty At least one input field or a collapsible list contains no or one invalid value. The corresponding field or the drop-down list box has a red background. When clicked, the roll-out error message indicates the cause of the error. The properties of a technology object are described in detail in the section for the technology object. 3.5 Call instruction in the user program The instruction of the software controller must be called in a cyclic interrupt OB. The sampling time of the software controller is determined by the interval between the calls in the cyclic interrupt OB. Requirement The cyclic interrupt OB is created and the cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB is correctly configured. Procedure Proceed as follows to call the instruction in the user program: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Program blocks" folder. 3. Double-click the cyclic interrupt OB. The block is opened in the work area. 4. Open the "Technology" group in the "Instructions" window and the "PID Control" folder. The folder contains all instructions for software controllers that can be configured on the CPU. 5. Select the instruction and drag it to your cyclic interrupt OB. The "Call options" dialog box opens. 6. Select a technology object or type the name for a new technology object from the "Name" list. Result If the technology object does not exist yet, it is added. The instruction is added in the cyclic interrupt OB. The technology object is assigned to this call of the instruction. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 43 Configuring a software controller 3.6 Downloading technology objects to device 3.6 Downloading technology objects to device A new or modified configuration of the technology object must be downloaded to the CPU for the online mode. The following characteristics apply when downloading retentive data: Software (changes only) - S7-1200, S7-1500: Retentive data is retained. - S7-300/400: Retentive data is updated immediately. CPU does not change to Stop. Download PLC program to device and reset - S7-1200, S7-1500: Retentive data is updated at the next change from Stop to RUN. The PLC program can only be downloaded completely. - S7-300/400: Retentive data is updated at the next change from Stop to RUN. Downloading retentive data to an S7-1200 or S7-1500 CPU Note The download and reset of the PLC program during ongoing system operation can result in serious damages or injuries in the case of malfunctions or program errors. Make sure that dangerous states cannot occur before you download and reset the PLC program. Proceed as follows to download the retentive data: 1. Select the entry of the CPU in the project tree. 2. Select the command "Download and reset PLC program" from the "Online" menu. - If you have not established an online connection yet, the "Extended download" dialog opens. In this case, set all required parameters for the connection and click "Download". - If the online connection has been defined, the project data is compiled, if necessary, and the dialog "Load preview" opens. This dialog displays messages and recommends actions necessary for download. 3. Check the messages. As soon as download is possible, the "Download" button becomes active. 4. Click on "Download". The complete PLC program is downloaded and the "Load results" dialog opens. This dialog displays the status and the actions after the download. 5. If the modules are to restart immediately after the download, select the check box "Start all". 6. Close the dialog "Download results" with "Finish". PID control 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.7 Commissioning software controller Result The complete PLC program is downloaded to the device. Blocks that only exist online in the device are deleted. By downloading all affected blocks and by deleting any blocks in the device that are not required, you avoid inconsistencies between the blocks in the user program. The messages under "Info > General" in the Inspector window indicate whether the download was successful. 3.7 Commissioning software controller Procedure To open the "Commissioning" work area of the technology object, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click the "Commissioning" object. The commissioning functions are specific for each controller and are described there. 3.8 Save optimized PID parameter in the project The software controller is optimized in the CPU. Through this, the values in the instance-DB on the CPU no longer agree with those in the project. To update the PID parameter in the project with the optimized PID parameters, proceed as follows: Requirement An online connection to the CPU is established and the CPU is in "RUN" mode. The functions of the commissioning window have been enabled by means of the "Start" button. Procedure 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Technology objects" folder. 3. Open a technology object. 4. Double click on "Commissioning". 5. Click on the icon "Upload PID parameters". 6. Save the project. Result The currently active PID parameters are stored in the project data. When reloading the project data in the CPU, the optimized parameters are used. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 45 Configuring a software controller 3.9 Comparing values 3.9 Comparing values 3.9.1 Comparison display and boundary conditions The "Compare values" function provides the following options: Comparison of configured start values of the project with the start values in the CPU and the actual values Direct editing of actual values and the start values of the project Immediate detection and display of input errors with suggested corrections Backup of actual values in the project Transfer of start values of the project to the CPU as actual values Icons and operator controls The following icons and operator controls are available: Icon Function Start value PLC matches the configured Start value project Start value PLC does not match the configured Start value project The comparison of the Start value PLC with the configured Start value project cannot be performed At least one of the two comparison values has a process-related or syntax error. Transfers actual values to the offline project Transfers updated start values in the project to the CPU (initialize setting values) Opens the "Compare values" dialog Boundary conditions The "Compare values" function is available for S7-1200 and S7-1500 without limitations. The following limitation applies to S7-300 and S7-400: In monitoring mode, an S7-300/S7-400 cannot transfer the start values to the CPU. These values cannot be displayed online with "Compare values". The actual values of the technology object are displayed and can be changed directly. PID control 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.9 Comparing values 3.9.2 Comparing values The procedure is shown in the following using "PID Parameters" as an example. Requirements A project with a software controller is configured. The project is downloaded to the CPU. The configuration dialog is open in the project navigator. Procedure 1. Open the desired software controller in the project navigation. 2. Double-click the "Configuration" object. 3. Navigate within the configuration window to the "PID Parameters" dialog. 4. Click the icon to activate monitoring mode. The icons and operator controls (Page 46) of the "Compare values" function are shown behind the parameters. 5. Click the desired parameter in the input box and change the parameter values manually by entering them directly. - If the background of the input box is gray, this value is a read-only value and cannot be changed. - To change the values in the "PID Parameters" dialog, enable manual entry by selecting the "Enable manual entry" check box beforehand. 6. Click the icon to open the dialog for the start values. This dialog indicates two values of the parameter: - Start value in CPU: The start value in the CPU is shown in the top part. - Start value in the project: The configured start value in the project is shown in the bottom part. 7. Enter the desired value in the input box for the project. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 47 Configuring a software controller 3.9 Comparing values Error detection The input of incorrect values is detected. Corrections are suggested in this case. If you enter a value with incorrect syntax, a rollout containing the corresponding error message opens below the parameter. The incorrect value is not applied. If you enter a value that is incorrect for the process, a dialog opens containing the error message and a suggested correction: Click "No" to accept this suggested correction and correct your input. Click "OK" to apply the incorrect value. NOTICE Malfunctions of the controller Values incorrect for the process can result in controller malfunctions. Backing up actual values Click the project. icon to transfer the actual controller values to the start values of your configured Transferring project values to the CPU Click the icon to transfer the configured values of your project to the CPU. CAUTION Prevent personal injury and property damage! Downloading and resetting of the user program while the plant is operating may result in significant property damage and severe personal injuries in the event of malfunctions or program errors. Make sure that dangerous states cannot occur before you download and reset the user program. PID control 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.1 Introduction to the parameter view The Parameter view provides you with a general overview of all relevant parameters of a technology object. You obtain an overview of the parameter settings and can easily change them in offline and online mode. "Parameter view" tab Toolbar (Page 51) Navigation (Page 51) Parameter table (Page 52) Function scope The following functions are available for analyzing the parameters of the technology objects and for enabling targeted monitoring and modification. Display functions: Display of parameter values in offline and online mode Display of status information of the parameters Display of value deviations and option for direct correction Display of configuration errors Display of value changes as a result of parameter dependencies PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 49 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Display of all memory values of a parameter: Start value PLC, Start value project, Monitor value Display of the parameter comparison of the memory values of a parameter Operator control functions: Navigation for quickly changing between the parameters and parameter structures. Text filter for faster searches for particular parameters. Sorting function for customizing the order of parameters and parameter groups to requirements. Memory function for backing up structural settings of the Parameter view. Monitoring and modifying of parameter values online. Change display format of value. Function for saving a snapshot of parameter values of the CPU in order to capture momentary situations and to respond to them. Function for applying a snapshot of parameter values as start values. Download of modified start values to the CPU. Comparison functions for comparing parameter values with one another. Validity The Parameter view described here is available for the following technology objects: PID_Compact PID_3Step PID_Temp CONT_C (S7-1500 only) CONT_S (S7-1500 only) TCONT_CP (S7-1500 only) TCONT_S (S7-1500 only) TO_Axis_PTO (S7-1200 Motion Control) TO_Positioning_Axis (S7-1200 Motion Control) TO_CommandTable_PTO (S7-1200 Motion Control) TO_CommandTable (S7-1200 Motion Control) PID control 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.2 Structure of the parameter view 3.10.2.1 Toolbar The following functions can be selected in the toolbar of the parameter view. Icon Function Monitor all Explanation Starts the monitoring of visible parameters in the active Parameter view (online mode). Applies the current monitor values to the "Snapshot" column and updates the start values in the project. Only in online mode for PID_Compact, PID_3Step and PID_Temp. Create snapshot of monitor values and accept setpoints of this snapshot as start values Initialize setpoints Transfers the start values updated in the project to the CPU. Only in online mode for PID_Compact, PID_3Step and PID_Temp. Create snapshot of Applies the current monitor values to the "Snapshot" column. monitor values Only in online mode. Modify all selected paThis command is executed once and as quickly as possible without rameters immediately reference to any particular point in the user program. and once Only in online mode. Select navigation struc- Toggles between functional navigation and data navigation. ture Text filter... After entry of a character string: Display of all parameters containing the specified string in one of the currently visible columns. Selection of compare Selection of parameter values that are to be compared with one values another in online mode (Start value project, Start value PLC, Snapshot) Only in online mode. Save window settings Saves your display settings for the Parameter view (e.g., selected navigation structure, activated table columns, etc.) 3.10.2.2 Navigation Within the "Parameter view" tab, the following alternative navigation structures can be selected. Navigation Functional navigation Explanation In the functional navigation, the structure of the parameters is based on the structure in the configuration dialog ("Functional view" tab), commissioning dialog, and diagnostics dialog. The last group "Other parameters" contains all other parameters of the technology object. Data navigation In the data navigation, the structure of the parameters is based on the structure in the instance DB / technology DB. The last group "Other parameters" contains the parameters that are not contained in the instance DB / technology DB. You can use the "Select navigation structure" drop-down list to toggle the navigation structure. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 51 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.2.3 Parameter table The table below shows the meaning of the individual columns of the parameter table. You can show or hide the columns as required. Column "Offline" = X: Column is visible in offline mode. Column "Online" = X: Column is visible in online mode (online connection to the CPU). Column Explanation Offline Online Name in functional view Name of the parameter in the functional view. X X X X X X Full name in DB The display field is empty for parameters that are not configured via the technology object. Complete path of the parameter in the instance DB / technology DB. The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the instance DB / technology DB. Name in DB Name of the parameter in the instance DB / technology DB. If the parameter is part of a structure or UDT, the prefix ". ./" is added. The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the instance DB / technology DB. Status of configuration Display of the completeness of the configuration using status symbols. Compare result Result of the "Compare values" function. X see Status of configuration (offline) (Page 62) X This column is shown if there is an online connection and the "Monitor all" button Start value project is selected. Configured start value in the project. X X X X X X Error indication if entered values have a syntax or process-related error. Default value Value that is pre-assigned to the parameter. The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the instance DB / technology DB. Snapshot Snapshot of the current values in the CPU (monitor values). Error indication if values have a process-related error. Start value PLC Start value in the CPU. X This column is shown if there is an online connection and the "Monitor all" button is selected. Error indication if values have a process-related error. Monitor value X Current value in the CPU. This column is shown if there is an online connection and the "Monitor all" button is selected. Error indication if values have a process-related error. Modify value Value that is to be used to change the monitor valuet. X This column is shown if there is an online connection and the "Monitor all" button is selected. Error indication if entered values have a syntax or process-related error. PID control 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Column Explanation Selection for transmission Selection of the Modify values that are to be transmitted using the "Modify all selected parameters immediately and once" button. Offline Online X This column is displayed together with the "Modify value" column. Minimum value Minimum process-related value of the parameter. X X X X If the minimum value is dependent on other parameters, it is defined: Maximum value * Offline: By the Start value project. * Online: By the Monitor values. Maximum process-related value of the parameter. If the maximum value is dependent on other parameters, it is defined: * Offline: By the Start value project. * Online: By the Monitor values. Setpoint Designates the parameter as a setpoint. These parameters can be initialized online. X X Data type Data type of the parameter. X X X X Accessible from HMI Indicates whether the HMI can access this parameter during runtime. X X Visible in HMI Indicates whether the parameter is visible in the selection list of the HMI by default. X X Comment Brief description of the parameter. X X The display field is empty for parameters that are not contained in the instance DB / technology DB. Retain Designates the value as a retentive value. The values of retentive parameters are retained even after the voltage supply is switched off. See also Comparing values (Page 46) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 53 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.3 Opening the parameter view Requirement The technology object has been added in the project tree, i.e., the associated instance DB / technology DB of the instruction has been created. Procedure 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click the "Configuration" object. 4. Select the "Parameter view" tab in the top right corner. Result The Parameter view opens. Each displayed parameter is represented by one row in the parameter table. The displayable parameter properties (table columns) vary depending on whether you are working with the Parameter view in offline or online mode. In addition, you can selectively display and hide individual table columns. See also Default setting of the parameter view (Page 55) PID control 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.4 Default setting of the parameter view Default settings To enable you to work efficiently with the Parameter view, you can customize the parameter display and save your settings. The following customizations are possible and can be saved: Show and hide columns Change column width Change order of the columns Toggle navigation Select parameter group in the navigation Selection of compare values Show and hide columns To show or hide columns in the parameter table, follow these steps: 1. Position the cursor in the header of the parameter table. 2. Select the "Show/Hide" command in the shortcut menu. The selection of available columns is displayed. 3. To show a column, select the check box for the column. 4. To hide a column, clear the check box for the column. or 1. Position the cursor in the header of the parameter table. 2. Select the "Show all columns" command in the shortcut menu if all columns of the offline or online mode are to be displayed. Some columns can only be displayed in online mode: see Parameter table (Page 52). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 55 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Change column width To customize the width of a column so that all texts in the rows can be read, follow these steps: 1. Position the cursor in the header of the parameter table to the right of the column to be customized until the shape of the cursor changes to a cross. 2. Then double-click this location. or 1. Open the shortcut menu on the header of the parameter table. 2. Click - "Optimize column width" or - "Optimize width of all columns". If the column width setting is too narrow, the complete content of individual fields are shown if you hover the cursor briefly over the relevant field. Change order of the columns The columns of the parameter table can be arranged in any way. To change the order of the columns, follow these steps: 1. Click on the column header and use a drag-and-drop operation to move it to the desired location. When you release the mouse button, the column is anchored to the new position. Toggle navigation To toggle the display form of the parameters, follow these steps: 1. Select the desired navigation in the "Select navigation structure" drop-down list. - Data navigation - Functional navigation See also Navigation (Page 51). Select parameter group in the navigation Within the selected navigation, you choose between the "All parameters" display or the display of a subordinate parameter group of your choice. 1. Click the desired parameter group in the navigation. The parameter table only displays the parameters of the parameter group. PID control 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Selection of compare values (online) To set the compare values for the "Compare values" function, follow these steps: 1. Select the desired compare values in the "Selection of compare values" drop-down list. - Start value project / Start value PLC - Start value project / Snapshot - Start value PLC / Snapshot The "Start value project / Start value PLC" option is set by default. Saving the default setting of the Parameter view To save the above customizations of the Parameter view, follow these steps: 1. Customize the Parameter view according to your requirements. 2. Click the "Save window settings" button at the top right of the Parameter view. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 57 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5 Working with the parameter view 3.10.5.1 Overview The following table provides an overview of the functions of the Parameter view in online and offline mode described in the following. Column "Offline" = X: This function is possible in offline mode. Column "Online" = X: This function is possible in online mode. 3.10.5.2 Function/action Filtering the parameter table (Page 58) Sorting the parameter table (Page 59) Transferring parameter data to other editors (Page 59) Indicating errors (Page 60) Editing start values in the project (Page 60) Status of configuration (offline) (Page 62) Monitoring values online in the parameter view (Page 63) Create snapshot of monitor values (Page 65) Modifying values (Page 66) Comparing values (Page 68) Applying values from the online program as start values (Page 70) Initializing setpoints in the online program (Page 71) Offline X X X X X X Filtering the parameter table Online X X X X X X X X X X X You can filter the parameters in the parameter table in the following ways: With the text filter With the subgroups of the navigation Both filter methods can be used simultaneously. With the text filter Texts that are visible in the parameter table can be filtered. This means only texts in displayed parameter rows and columns can be filtered. 1. Enter the desired character string for filtering in the "Text filter..." input box. The parameter table displays only the parameters containing the character string. The text filtering is reset. When another parameter group is selected in the navigation. When navigation is changed from data navigation to functional navigation, or vice versa. With the subgroups of the navigation 1. Click the desired parameter group in the navigation, e.g., "Static". The parameter table only shows the static parameters. You can select further subgroups for some groups of the navigation. 2. Click "All parameters" in the navigation if all parameters are to be shown again. PID control 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.3 Sorting the parameter table The values of the parameters are arranged in rows. The parameter table can be sorted by any displayed column. In columns containing numerical values, sorting is based on the magnitude of the numerical value. In text columns, sorting is alphabetical. Sorting by column 1. Position the cursor in the header cell of the desired column. The background of this cell turns blue. 2. Click the column header. Result The entire parameter table is sorted by the selected column. A triangle with tip facing up appears in the column header. Clicking the column header again changes the sorting as follows: Symbol "": Parameter table is sorted in ascending order. Symbol "": Parameter table is sorted in descending order. No symbol: The sorting is removed again. The parameter table assumes the default display. The "../" prefix in the "Name in DB" column is ignored when sorting. 3.10.5.4 Transferring parameter data to other editors After selecting an entire parameter row of the parameter table, you can use the following: Drag-and-drop / Copy/Paste via shortcut menu Transfer parameters to the following editors of the TIA Portal: Program editor Watch table Signal table for trace function The parameter is inserted with its full name: See information in "Full name in DB" column. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 59 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.5 Indicating errors Error indication Parameter assignment errors that result in compilation errors (e.g. limit violation) are indicated in the Parameter view. Every time a value is input in the Parameter view, a check is made for process-related and syntax errors and the result is indicated. Bad values are indicated by: Red error symbol in the "Status of configuration" (offline mode) or "Compare result" (online mode, depending on the selected comparison type) columns and/or Table field with red background If you click the bad field, a roll-out error message appears with information of the permissible value range or the required syntax (format) Compilation error From the error message of the compiler, you can directly open the Parameter view (functional navigation) containing the parameter causing the error in situations where the parameter is not displayed in the configuration dialog. 3.10.5.6 Editing start values in the project With the Parameter view, you can edit the start values in the project in offline mode and online mode. You make value changes in the "Start value project" column of the parameter table. In the "Status of configuration" column of the parameter table, the progress of the configuration is indicated by the familiar status symbols from the configuration dialog of the technology object. Boundary conditions If other parameters depend on the parameter whose start value was changed, the start value of the dependent parameters are also adapted. If a parameter of a technology object is not editable, it is also not editable in the parameter view. The ability to edit a parameter can also depend on the values of other parameters. PID control 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Defining new start values To define start values for parameters in the Parameter view, follow these steps: 1. Open the Parameter view of the technology object. 2. Enter the desired start values in the "Start value project" column. The value must match the data type of the parameter and must not exceed the value range of the parameter. The limits of the value range can be seen in the "Maximum value" and "Minimum value" columns. The "Status of configuration" column indicates the progress of the configuration with colored symbols. See also Status of configuration (offline) (Page 62) Following adaptation of the start values and downloading of the technology object to the CPU, the parameters take the defined value at startup if they are not declared as retentive ("Retain" column). Error indication When a start value is input, a check is made for process-related and syntax errors and the result is indicated. Bad start values are indicated by: Red error symbol in the "Status of configuration" (offline mode) or "Compare result" (online mode, depending on the selected comparison type) columns and/or Red background in the "Start value project" field If you click on the bad field, a roll-out error message appears with information of the permissible value range or the necessary syntax (format) Correcting bad start values 1. Correct bad start values using information from the roll-out error message. Red error symbol, red field background, and roll-out error message are no longer displayed. The project cannot be successfully compiled unless the start values are error-free. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 61 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.7 Status of configuration (offline) The status of the configuration is indicated by icons: In the "Status of configuration" column in the parameter table In the navigation structure of the functional navigation and data navigation Symbol in "Status of configuration" column Symbol Meaning The start value of the parameter corresponds to the default value and is valid. A start value has not yet been defined by the user. The start value of the parameter contains a value defined by the user or an automatically adjusted value. The start value is different than the default value. The start value is error-free and valid. The start value of the parameter is invalid (syntax or process-related error). The input box has a red background. When clicked, the roll-out error message indicates the cause of the error. Only for S7-1200 Motion Control: The start value of the parameter is valid but contains warnings. The input box has a yellow background. The parameter is not relevant in the current configuration. Symbol in the navigation The symbols in the navigation indicate the progress of the configuration in the same way as in the configuration dialog of the technology object. See also Configure technology objects (Page 42) PID control 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.8 Monitoring values online in the parameter view You can monitor the values currently taken by the parameters of the technology object in the CPU (monitor values) directly in the Parameter view. Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The program execution is active (CPU in "RUN"). The Parameter view of the technology object is open. Procedure 1. Start the monitoring by clicking . As soon as the Parameter view is online, the following columns are additionally displayed: - Compare result - Start value PLC - Monitor value - Modify value - Selection for transmission The "Monitor value" column shows the current parameter values on the CPU. Meaning of the additional columns: see Parameter table (Page 52) 2. Stop the monitoring by clicking again. Display All columns that are only available online have an orange background: Values in light-orange cells can be changed. Values in cells with a dark orange background cannot be changed. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 63 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.9 Change display format of value The display format of the value can be selected via the shortcut menu of a table row in the Parameter view of the technology object. The display format of the following values can be changed both in online mode and in offline mode: Start value project Start value PLC Maximum value Minimum value Snapshot Monitor value Default value Modify value The set display format applies to all values of the table row. The following display formats of the value can be changed: Default Hex Octal Bin Dec (+/-) DEC Depending on the parameter selected in the parameter view, only the supported display formats can be selected. Requirements The Parameter view of the technology object is open. Procedure To change the display format of the value, proceed as follows: 1. Select one or more table rows in which you want to change the display format. 2. Select the "Display format" command in the shortcut menu. 3. Select the desired display format. Note To change the display format of a certain data type in multiple table rows, sort the Parameter view by this data type. Then select the first and last table row with this data type while keeping the key pressed and change the display format for the selected table rows. PID control 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.10 Create snapshot of monitor values You can back up the current values of the technology object on the CPU (monitor values) and display them in the Parameter view. Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The program execution is active (CPU in "RUN"). The Parameter view of the technology object is open. The "Monitor all" button is selected. Procedure To show the current parameter values, follow these steps: 1. In the Parameter view, click the "Create snapshot of monitor values" icon . Result The current monitor values are transferred once to the "Snapshot" column of the parameter table. You can analyze the values "frozen" in this way while the monitor values continue to be updated in the "Monitor values" column. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 65 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.11 Modifying values With the Parameter view, you can modify values of the technology object in the CPU. You can assign values to the parameter once (Modify value) and modify them immediately. The modify request is executed as quickly as possible without reference to any particular point in the user program. DANGER Danger when modifying: Changing the parameter values while the plant is operating may result in severe damage to property and personal injury in the event of malfunctions or program errors. Make sure that dangerous states cannot occur before you use the "Modify" function. Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The program execution is active (CPU in "RUN"). The Parameter view of the technology object is open. The "Monitor all" button is selected. The parameter can be modified (associated field in the "Modify value" column has a lightorange background). Procedure To modify parameters immediately, follow these steps: 1. Enter the desired modify values in the "Modify values" column of the parameter table. 2. Check whether the check box for modifying is selected in the "Select for transmission" column. The modify values and associated check boxes of dependent parameters are automatically adapted at the same time. 3. Click the "Modify all selected parameters immediately and once" icon . The selected parameters are modified once and immediately with the specified values and can be monitored in the "Modify values" column. The check boxes for modifying in the "Selection for transmission" column are automatically cleared after the modify request is complete. PID control 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Error indication When a start value is input, a check is made immediately for process-related and syntax errors and the result is indicated. Bad start values are indicated by: Red background in the "Modify value" field and If you click the bad field, a roll-out error message appears with information of the permissible value range or the necessary syntax (format) Bad modify values Modify values with process-related errors can be transmitted. Modify values with syntax errors cannot be transmitted. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 67 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.12 Comparing values You can use comparison functions to compare the following memory values of a parameter: Start value project Start value PLC Snapshot Requirements There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The program execution is active (CPU in "RUN"). The Parameter view of the technology object is open. The "Monitor all" button is selected. Procedure To compare the start values on the various target systems, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Selection of compare values" icon . A selection list containing the comparison options opens: - Start value project - Start value PLC (default setting) - Start value project - Snapshot - Start value PLC - Snapshot 2. Select the desired comparison option. The selected comparison option is executed as follows: - A scales symbol appears in the header cells of the two columns selected for comparison. - Symbols are used in the "Compare result" column to indicate the result of the comparison of the selected columns. PID control 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view Symbol in "Compare result" column Symbol Meaning The compare values are equal and error-free. The compare values are not equal and error-free. At least one of the two compare values has a process-related or syntax error. The comparison cannot be performed. At least one of the two comparison values is not available (e.g. snapshot). Comparison of the value is inappropriate since it is not relevant in one of the configurations. Symbol in the navigation The symbols are shown in the same way in the navigation if the comparison result applies to at least one of the parameters below the displayed navigation structure. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 69 Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.13 Applying values from the online program as start values In order to apply optimized values from the CPU to the project as start values, you create a snapshot of the monitor values. Values of the snapshot marked as a "Setpoint" are then applied to the project as start values. Requirements The technology object is of type "PID_Compact" or "PID_3Step". There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The program execution is active (CPU in "RUN"). The Parameter view of the technology object is open. The "Monitor all" button is selected. Procedure To apply optimized values from the CPU, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Create snapshot of monitor values and accept setpoints of this snapshot as start values" icon . Result The current monitor values are applied to the "Snapshot" column and their setpoints are copied to the "Start value project" column as new start values. Note Applying values of individual parameters You can also apply the values of individual parameters that are not marked as a setpoint from the "Snapshot" column to the "Start values project" column. To do so, copy the values and insert them into the "Start value project" column using the "Copy" and "Paste" commands in the shortcut menu. PID control 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Configuring a software controller 3.10 Parameter view 3.10.5.14 Initializing setpoints in the online program You can initialize all parameters that are marked as a "Setpoint" in the Parameter view with new values in the CPU in one step. In so doing, the start values are downloaded from the project to the CPU. The CPU remains in "RUN" mode. To avoid data loss on the CPU during a cold restart or warm restart, you must also download the technology object to the CPU. DANGER Danger when changing parameter values Changing the parameter values while the plant is operating may result in severe damage to property and personal injury in the event of malfunctions or program errors. Make sure that dangerous states cannot occur before you reinitialize the setpoints. Requirements The technology object is of type "PID_Compact" or "PID_3Step". There is an online connection. The technology object is downloaded to the CPU. The program execution is active (CPU in "RUN"). The Parameter view of the technology object is open. The "Monitor all" button is selected. The parameters marked as a "Setpoint" have a "Start value project" that is free of process-related and syntax errors Procedure To initialize all setpoints, follow these steps: 1. Enter the desired values in the "Start value project" column. Ensure that the start values are free of process-related and syntax errors. 2. Click the "Initialize setpoints" icon . Result The setpoints in the CPU are initialized with the start values from the project. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 71 Configuring a software controller 3.11 Display instance DB of a technology object. 3.11 Display instance DB of a technology object. An instance DB, in which the parameter and static variables are saved, is created for each technology object. Procedure To display the instance DB of a technology object, proceed as follows: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Technology objects" folder. 3. Highlight a technology object. 4. Select the command "Open DB editor" in the shortcut menu. PID control 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.1 4 Technology object PID_Compact The technology object PID_Compact provides a continuous PID controller with integrated optimization. You can alternatively configure a pulse controller. Both manual and automatic mode are possible. PID-Compact continuously acquires the measured process value within a control loop and compares it with the required setpoint. From the resulting control deviation, the instruction PID_Compact calculates an output value by which the process value is adapted as quickly and stable as possible to the setpoint. The output value for the PID controller consists of three actions: Proportional action The proportional action of the output value increases in proportion to the control deviation. I action The integral action of the output value increases until the control deviation has been balanced. D action The derivative action increases with the rate of change of control deviation. The process value is corrected to the setpoint as quickly as possible. The derivative action will be reduced again if the rate of change of control deviation drops. The instruction PID_Compact calculates the proportional, integral and derivative parameters for your controlled system during pretuning. Fine tuning can be used to tune the parameters further. You do not need to manually determine the parameters. Additional information Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Configuring PID_Compact V2 (Page 74) Configuring PID_Compact V1 (Page 98) FAQ For more information, see the following FAQs in the Siemens Industry Online Support: Entry ID 79047707 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/79047707) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 73 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.1 Configuring PID_Compact V2 4.2.1.1 Basic settings V2 Introduction V2 Configure the following properties of the "PID_Compact" technology object under "Basic settings" in the Inspector window or in the configuration window: Physical quantity Control logic Start-up behavior after reset Setpoint (only in the Inspector window) Process value (only in the Inspector window) Output value (only in the Inspector window) Setpoint, process value and output value You can only configure the setpoint, process value and output value in the Inspector window of the programming editor. Select the source for each value: Instance DB The value saved in the instance DB is used. Value must be updated in the instance DB by the user program. There should be no value at the instruction. Change via HMI possible. Instruction The value connected to the instruction is used. The value is written to the instance DB each time the instruction is called. No change via HMI possible. PID control 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Control mode V2 Physical quantity Select the physical quantity and unit of measurement for setpoint, process value, and disturbance variable in the "Controller type" group. Setpoint, process value, and disturbance variable is displayed in this unit of measurement. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. PID_Compact does not work with negative proportional gain. Select the check box "Invert control logic" to reduce the process value with a higher output value. Examples Opening the drain valve will reduce the level of a container's contents. Increasing cooling will reduce the temperature. Startup characteristics 1. To switch to "Inactive" mode after CPU restart, clear the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box. To switch to the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter after CPU restart, select the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box. 2. In the "Set Mode to" drop-down list, select the mode that is to be enabled after a complete download to the device. After a complete download to the device, PID_Compact starts in the selected operating mode. With each additional restart, PID_Compact starts in the mode that was last saved in Mode. Example You have selected the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box and the entry "Pretuning" in the "Set Mode to" list. After a complete download to the device, PID_Compact starts in the "Pretuning" mode. If pretuning is still active, PID_Compact starts in "Pretuning" mode again after restart of the CPU. If pretuning was successfully completed and automatic mode is active, PID_Compact starts in "Automatic mode" after restart of the CPU. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 75 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Setpoint V2 Procedure Proceed as follows to define a fixed setpoint: 1. Select "Instance DB". 2. Enter a setpoint, e.g. 80 C. 3. Delete any entry in the instruction. Proceed as follows to define a variable setpoint: 1. Select "Instruction". 2. Enter the name of the REAL variable in which the setpoint is saved. Program-controlled assignment of various values to the REAL variable is possible, for example for the time controlled change of the setpoint. Process value V2 PID_Compact will scale the value of the analog input to the physical quantity if you use the analog input value directly. You will need to write a program for processing if you wish first to process the analog input value. The process value is, for example, not directly proportional to the value at the analog input. The processed process value must be in floating point format. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog input value without processing: 1. Select the entry "Input_PER" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input. Proceed as follows to use the processed process value in floating point format: 1. Select the entry "Input" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the name of the variable in which the processed process value is saved. PID control 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Output value V2 PID_Compact offers three output values. Your actuator will determine which output value you use. Output_PER The actuator is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10V, 4...20mA. Output The output value needs to be processed by the user program, for example because of nonlinear actuator response. Output_PWM The actuator is controlled via a digital output. Pulse width modulation creates minimum ON and minimum OFF times. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog output value: 1. Select the entry "Output_PER (analog)" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the analog output. Proceed as follows to process the output value using the user program: 1. Select the entry "Output" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instance DB". The calculated output value is saved in the instance data block. 3. For the preparation of the output value, use the output parameter Output. 4. Transfer the processed output value to the actuator via a digital or analog CPU output. Proceed as follows to use the digital output value: 1. Select the entry "Output_PWM" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the digital output. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 77 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.1.2 Process value settings V2 Process value scaling V2 If you have configured the use of Input_PER in the basic setting, you must convert the value of the analog input to the physical quantity of the process value. The current configuration is displayed in the Input_PER display. Input_PER will be scaled using a low and high value pair if the process value is directly proportional to the value of the analog input. Procedure To scale the process value, follow these steps: 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Scaled low process value" and "Low" input fields. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "Scaled high process value" and "High" input boxes. Default settings for the value pairs are stored in the hardware configuration. To use the value pairs from the hardware configuration, follow these steps: 1. Select the PID_Compact instruction in the programming editor. 2. Interconnect Input_PER with an analog input in the basic settings. 3. Click the "Automatic setting" button in the process value settings. The existing values will be overwritten with the values from the hardware configuration. Process value limits V2 You must specify an appropriate absolute high limit and low limit for the process value as limit values for your controlled system. As soon as the process value violates these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0001h). Tuning is canceled when the process value limits are violated. You can configure how PID_Compact reacts to an error in automatic mode in the output value settings. PID control 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.1.3 Advanced settings V2 Process value monitoring V2 Configure a warning high and low limit for the process value in the "Process value monitoring" configuration window. If one of the warning limits is exceeded or undershot during operation, a warning will be displayed at the PID_Compact instruction: At the InputWarning_H output parameter if the warning high limit has been exceeded At the InputWarning_L output parameter if the warning low limit has been undershot The warning limits must be within the process value high and low limits. The process value high and low limits will be used if you do not enter values. Example Process value high limit = 98 C; warning high limit = 90 C Warning low limit = 10 C; process value low limit = 0 C PID_Compact will respond as follows: Process value InputWarning_H InputWarning_L ErrorBits Operating mode > 98 C TRUE FALSE 0001h Inactive or Substitute output value with error monitoring 98 C and > 90 C TRUE FALSE 0000h Automatic mode 90 C and 10 C FALSE FALSE 0000h Automatic mode < 10 C and 0 C FALSE TRUE 0000h Automatic mode < 0 C FALSE TRUE 0001h Inactive or Substitute output value with error monitoring In the output value settings, you can specify the reaction of PID_Compact when the process value high limit or low limit is violated. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 79 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 PWM limits V2 The value at the output parameter Output is transformed into a pulse sequence that is output at output parameter Output_PWM by means of a pulse width modulation. Output is calculated in the PID algorithm sampling time, Output_PWM is output in the PID_Compact sampling time. The PID algorithm sampling time is determined during pretuning or fine tuning. If manually setting the PID parameters, you will also need to configure the PID algorithm sampling time. The PID_Compact sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The pulse duration is proportional to the value at Output and is always an integer multiple of the PID_Compact sampling time. PID_Compact sampling time PID algorithm sampling time Pulse duration Break time The "Minimum ON time" and the "Minimum OFF time" are rounded to an integer multiple of the PID_Compact sampling time. A pulse or a break is never shorter than the minimum ON or OFF time. The inaccuracies this causes are added up and compensated in the next cycle. PID control 80 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Example PID_Compact sampling time = 100 ms PID algorithm sampling time = 1000 ms Minimum ON time = 200 ms Output is a constant 15%. The smallest pulse that PID_Compact can output is 20%. In the first cycle, no pulse is output. In the second cycle, the pulse not output in the first cycle is added to the pulse of the second cycle. PID_Compact sampling time PID algorithm sampling time Minimum ON time In order to minimize operation frequency and conserve the actuator, extend the minimum ON and OFF times. If you are using "Output" or "Output_PER", you must configure the value 0.0 for the minimum ON and OFF times. Note The minimum ON and OFF times only affect the output parameter Output_PWM and are not used for any pulse generators integrated in the CPU. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 81 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Output value V2 Output value limits In the "Output value limits" configuration window, configure the absolute limits of your output value in percent. Absolute output value limits are not violated in neither manual mode nor automatic mode. If an output value outside the limits is specified in manual mode, the effective value is limited in the CPU to the configured limits. The output value limits must match the control logic. The valid output value limit values depend on the Output used. Output -100.0 to 100.0% Output_PER -100.0 to 100.0% Output_PWM 0.0 to 100.0% Reaction to error NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If you output "Current value while error pending " or "Substitute output value while error pending" in the event of an error, PID_Compact remains in automatic mode. This may cause a violation of the process value limits and damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. PID_Compact is preset so that the controller stays active in most cases in the event of an error. If errors occur frequently in controller mode, this default reaction has a negative effect on the control response. In this case, check the Errorbits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. PID_Compact generates a programmable output value in response to an error: Zero (inactive) PID_Compact outputs 0.0 as output value for all errors and switches to "Inactive" mode. The controller is only reactivated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. PID control 82 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Current value while error is pending If the following errors occur in automatic mode, PID_Compact returns to automatic mode as soon as the errors are no longer pending. If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_Compact stays in automatic mode: - 0001h: The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. - 0800h: Sampling time error - 40000h: Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. If one or more of the following errors occur in automatic mode, PID_Compact switches to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode and outputs the last valid output value: - 0002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. - 0200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. - 0400h: Calculation of output value failed. - 1000h: Invalid value at Setpoint parameter. If an error occurs in manual mode, PID_Compact continues using the manual value as the output value. If the manual value is invalid, the substitute output value is used. If the manual value and substitute output value are invalid, the output value low limit is used. If the following error occurs during a pretuning or fine tuning, PID_Compact remains in active mode: - 0020h: Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. When any other error occurs, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the mode from which tuning was started. As soon as no errors are pending, PID_Compact returns to automatic mode. Substitute output value while error is pending PID_Compact outputs the substitute output value. If the following error occurs, PID_Compact stays in "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode and outputs the output value low limit: - 20000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. For all other errors, PID_Compact reacts as described for "Current value while error is pending". See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 83 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 PID parameters V2 The PID parameters are displayed in the "PID Parameters" configuration window. The PID parameters will be adapted to your controlled system during controller tuning. You do not need to enter the PID parameters manually. Note The currently active PID parameters are located for PID_Compact V1 in the sRet structure and for PID_Compact V2 in the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Change the currently active PID parameters only in "Inactive" mode online to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. If you want to change the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" or "Manual mode" online, change the PID parameters as follows: * PID_Compact V1: Change the PID parameters in the sBackUp structure and apply these changes with sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp = TRUE to the sRet structure. * PID_Compact V2: Change the PID parameters in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and apply these changes with LoadBackUp = TRUE to the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Online changes to the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" can result in jumps at the output value. The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation: y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integral action time a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) TD Derivative action time c Derivative action weighting PID control 84 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 The diagram below illustrates the integration of the parameters into the PID algorithm: All PID parameters are retentive. If you enter the PID parameters manually, you must completely download PID_Compact. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Proportional gain The value specifies the proportional gain of the controller. PID_Compact does not work with a negative proportional gain. Control logic is inverted under Basic settings > Controller type. Integral action time The integral action time determines the time behavior of the integral action. The integral action is deactivated with integral action time = 0.0. When the integral action time is changed from a different value to 0.0 online in "Automatic mode", the previous integral action is deleted and the output value jumps. Derivative action time The derivative action time determines the time behavior of the derivative action. Derivative action is deactivated with derivative action time = 0.0. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 85 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. Proportional action weighting The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. Derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. PID algorithm sampling time The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time. All other functions of PID_Compact are executed at every call. If you use Output_PWM, the accuracy of the output signal is determined by the ratio of the PID algorithm sampling time to the cycle time of the OB. The PID algorithm sampling time corresponds to the time period of the pulse width modulation. The cycle time should be at least 10 times the PID algorithm sampling time. PID control 86 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Rule for tuning Select whether PI or PID parameters are to be calculated in the "Controller structure" dropdown list. PID Calculates PID parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. PI Calculates PI parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. User-defined The drop-down list displays "User-defined" if you have configured different controller structures for pretuning and fine tuning via a user program. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 87 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.2 Commissioning PID_Compact V2 4.2.2.1 Pretuning V2 The pretuning determines the process response to a jump change of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The PID parameters are calculated from the maximum rate of rise and dead time of the controlled system. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. This is most likely the case in operating modes "Inactive" and "manual mode". The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. Requirement The "PID_Compact" instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE PID_Compact is in one of the following modes: "Inactive", "Manual mode", or "Automatic mode". The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value monitoring" configuration). The difference between setpoint and process value is greater than 30% of the difference between process value high limit and process value low limit. The distance between the setpoint and the process value is > 50% of the setpoint. Procedure To perform pretuning, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_Compact > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Select the entry "Pretuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 3. Click the "Start" icon. - - - - An online connection will be established. Value recording is started. Pretuning is started. The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon when the progress bar has reached 100% and it can be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. PID control 88 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Result If pretuning was performed without an error message, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_Compact switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact responds with the configured reaction to errors. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 89 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.2.2 Fine tuning V2 Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are tuned for the operating point from the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. All PID parameters are recalculated from the results. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_Compact automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. Requirement The PID_Compact instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. The control loop has stabilized at the operating point. The operating point is reached when the process value corresponds to the setpoint. No disturbances are expected. PID_Compact is in one of the following operating modes: Inactive, automatic mode, or manual mode. Process depends on initial situation Fine tuning can be started from the following operating modes: "Inactive", "automatic mode", or "manual mode". Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started from: Automatic mode Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_Compact controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. Inactive or manual mode If the requirements for pretuning are met, pretuning is started. The determined PID parameters will be used for control until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact responds with the configured reaction to errors. An attempt is made to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value if the process value for pretuning is already too near the setpoint. This can produce increased overshoot. PID control 90 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Procedure To perform fine tuning, follow these steps: 1. Select the entry "Fine tuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 2. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - The process of fine tuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon in the "Tuning mode" group when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed that tuning is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result If no errors occurred during fine tuning, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_Compact switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If errors occurred during "fine tuning", PID_Compact responds with the configured response to errors. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 91 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.2.3 "Manual" mode V1 The following section describes how you can use the "manual mode" operating mode in the commissioning window of the "PID_Compact" technology object. Manual mode is also possible when an error is pending. Requirement The "PID_Compact" instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. An online connection to the CPU has been established and the CPU is in the "RUN" mode. Procedure Use "Manual mode" in the commissioning window if you want to test the controlled system by specifying a manual value. To define a manual value, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Start" icon. 2. Select the "Manual mode" check box in the "Online status of controller" area. PID_Compact operates in manual mode. The most recent current output value remains in effect. 3. Enter the manual value in the "Output" field as a % value. 4. Click the icon. Result The manual value is written to the CPU and immediately goes into effect. Clear the "Manual mode" check box if the output value is to be specified again by the PID controller. The switchover to automatic mode is bumpless. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278) PID control 92 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.3 Override control with PID_Compact V2 Override control In case of override control, two or more controllers share one actuator. Only one controller has access to the actuator at any time and influences the process. A logic operation decides which controller has access to the actuator. This decision is often made based on a comparison of the output values of all controllers, for example, in case of a maximum selection, the controller with the largest output value gets access to the actuator. The selection based on the output value requires that all controllers operate in automatic mode. The controllers that do not have an effect on the actuator are updated. This is necessary to prevent windup effects and their negative impacts on the control response and the switchover between the controllers. PID_Compact supports override controls as of version 2.3 by offering a simple process for updating the controllers that are not active: By using the OverwriteInitialOutputValue and PIDCtrl.PIDInit tags, you can preassign the integral action of the controller in automatic mode as though the PID algorithm had calculated Output = OverwriteInititalOutputValue for the output value in the last cycle. To do this, OverwriteInitialOutputValue is interconnected with the output value of the controller that currently has access to the actuator. By setting the bit PIDCtrl.PIDInit, you trigger the pre-assignment of the integral action as well as the restart of the controller cycle and the PWM period. The subsequent calculation of the output value in the current cycle takes place based on the pre-assigned (and synchronized for all controllers) integral action as well as the proportional action and integral action from the current control deviation. The derivative action is not active during the call with PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE and therefore does not contribute to the output value. This procedure ensures that the calculation of the current output value and thus the decision on which controller is to have access to the actuator is only based on the current process state and the PI parameters. Windup effects for controllers that are not active and thus incorrect decisions of the switchover logic are prevented. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 93 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 Requirements PIDCtrl.PIDInit is only effective if the integral action is activated (Retain.CtrlParams.Ti tag > 0.0). You must assign PIDCtrl.PIDInit and OverwriteInitialOutputValue in your user program yourself (see example below). PID_Compact does not automatically change these tags. PIDCtrl.PIDInit is only effective when PID_Compact is in automatic mode (parameter State = 3) If possible, select the sampling time of the PID algorithm (Retain.CtrlParams.Cycle tag) in such a way that it is identical for all controllers, and call all controllers in the same cyclic interrupt OB. In this way, you ensure that the switchover does not take place within a controller cycle or a PWM period. Note Constant adaptation of the output value limits Instead of the active updating of the controllers without access to the actuator described here, this is implemented alternatively by constant adaptation of the output value limits in other controller systems. This is not possible with PID_Compact, because a change of the output value limits is not supported in automatic mode. Example: Control of a gas pipeline PID_Compact is used for control of a gas pipeline. The main goal is to control the flow rate Input1. The controller PID_Compact_1 is used for this purpose. In addition, the pressure Input2 (measured in flow direction in front of the valve) is to be kept below the high limit with the limiting controller PID_Compact_2. Flow rate and pressure are controlled by a single solenoid valve. The output value of the controller corresponds to the valve opening: The valve is opened when the output value increases. This means the flow rate increases (normal control logic) while the pressure drops (inverted control logic). The valve is controlled with the output value of PID_Compact in I/O format (parameter Output_PER) by writing the program tag ActuatorInput. PID control 94 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 The setpoint for the flow rate is specified at the parameter PID_Compact_1.Setpoint. The pressure high limit is specified as setpoint at the parameter PID_Compact_2.Setpoint. Both controllers must share one valve as shared actuator. The logic that decides which controller gets access to the actuator is implemented by a maximum selection of the output value (in Real format, parameter Output) in this case. Because the output value corresponds to the opening of the valve, the controller that requires the larger valve opening gets the control. Note Activate inversion of the control logic Because a decrease of the actual value (pressure) is to be achieved with the pressure regulator PID_Compact_2 when the output value increases (valve opening), the inversion of the control logic must be activated: PID_Compact_2.Config.InvertControl = TRUE. In normal operation of the plant, the actual value of the flow rate corresponds to the setpoint. The flow controller PID_Compact_1 has settled on a stationary output value PID_Compact_1.Output. The actual value of the pressure in normal operation is significantly below the high limit that is specified as setpoint for PID_Compact_2. The pressure regulator therefore wants to close the valve even further to increase the pressure, which means it will calculate an output value PID_Compact_2.Output that is smaller than the output value of the flow controller PID_Compact_1.Output. The maximum selection of the switchover logic therefore gives the flow controller PID_Compact_1 continued access to the actuator. In addition, it is ensured that PID_Compact_2 is updated by means of the assignments PID_Compact_2.OverwriteInitialOutputValue = PID_Compact_1.Output and PID_Compact_2.PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 95 Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 If the pressure now approaches the high limit or exceeds it, for example due to a fault, the pressure regulator PID_Compact_2 calculates a higher output value to open the valve even further and thus reduce the pressure. If PID_Compact_2.Output is greater than PID_Compact_1.Output, the pressure regulator PID_Compact_2 receives access to the actuator through the maximum selection and opens it. It is ensured that PID_Compact_1 is updated by means of the assignments PID_Compact_1.OverwriteInitialOutputValue = PID_Compact_2.Output and PID_Compact_1.PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE. The pressure is reduced while the flow rate increases and can no longer be kept at the setpoint. Once the fault has been remedied, the pressure will continue to drop and the opening of the valve is reduced by the pressure regulator. If the flow controller calculates a larger opening as output value, the plant returns to normal operation so that the flow controller PID_Compact_1 once again has access to the actuator. This example can be implemented with the following SCL program code: "PID Compact 1"(Input := "Input1"); "PID Compact 2"(Input := "Input2"); IF "PID Compact 1".Output >= "PID Compact 2".Output THEN "ActuatorInput" := "PID_Compact_1".Output_PER; "PID_Compact_1".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := FALSE; "PID_Compact_2".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := TRUE; "PID_Compact_2".OverwriteInitialOutputValue := "PID_Compact_1".Output; ELSE "ActuatorInput" := "PID_Compact_2".Output_PER; "PID_Compact_1".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := TRUE; "PID_Compact_2".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := FALSE; "PID_Compact_1".OverwriteInitialOutputValue := "PID_Compact_2".Output; END IF; PID control 96 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.2 PID_Compact V2 4.2.4 Simulating PID_Compact V2 with PLCSIM Note Simulation with PLCSIM The simulation of PID_Compact V2.x with PLCSIM for CPU S7-1200 is not supported. PID_Compact V2.x can only be simulated for CPU S7-1500 with PLCSIM. For the simulation with PLCSIM, the time behavior of the simulated PLC is not exactly identical to that of a "real" PLC. The actual cycle clock of a cyclic interrupt OB can have larger fluctuations with a simulated PLC than with "real" PLCs. In the standard configuration, PID_Compact determines the time between calls automatically and monitors them for fluctuations. For the simulation of PID_Compact with PLCSIM, for example, a sampling time error (ErrorBits = DW#16#00000800) can therefore be detected. This results in ongoing tuning being aborted. The response in automatic mode depends on the value of the ActivateRecoverMode tag. To prevent this from happening, you should configure PID_Compact for simulation with PLCSIM as follows: * CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE * CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE * CycleTime.Value: Assign the cycle clock of the calling cyclic interrupt OB in seconds to this tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 97 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.1 Configuring PID_Compact V1 4.3.1.1 Basic settings V1 Introduction V1 Configure the following properties of the "PID_Compact" technology object under "Basic settings" in the Inspector window or in the configuration window: Physical quantity Control logic Start-up behavior after reset Setpoint (only in the Inspector window) Process value (only in the Inspector window) Output value (only in the Inspector window) Setpoint, process value and output value You can only configure the setpoint, process value and output value in the Inspector window of the programming editor. Select the source for each value: Instance DB The value saved in the instance DB is used. Value must be updated in the instance DB by the user program. There should be no value at the instruction. Change via HMI possible. Instruction The value connected to the instruction is used. The value is written to the instance DB each time the instruction is called. No change via HMI possible. PID control 98 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Control mode V1 Physical quantity Select the unit of measurement and physical quantity for the setpoint and process value in the "Controller type" group. The setpoint and process value will be displayed in this unit. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. PID_Compact does not work with negative proportional gain. Select the check box "Invert control logic" to reduce the process value with a higher output value. Examples Opening the drain valve will reduce the level of a container's contents. Increasing cooling will reduce the temperature. Start-up behavior after reset To change straight to the last active mode after restarting the CPU, select the "Enable last mode after CPU restart" check box. PID_Compact will remain in "Inactive" mode if the check box is cleared. Setpoint V1 Procedure Proceed as follows to define a fixed setpoint: 1. Select "Instance DB". 2. Enter a setpoint, e.g. 80 C. 3. Delete any entry in the instruction. Proceed as follows to define a variable setpoint: 1. Select "Instruction". 2. Enter the name of the REAL variable in which the setpoint is saved. Program-controlled assignment of various values to the REAL variable is possible, for example for the time controlled change of the setpoint. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 99 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Process value V1 PID_Compact will scale the value of the analog input to the physical quantity if you use the analog input value directly. You will need to write a program for processing if you wish first to process the analog input value. The process value is, for example, not directly proportional to the value at the analog input. The processed process value must be in floating point format. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog input value without processing: 1. Select the entry "Input_PER" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input. Proceed as follows to use the processed process value in floating point format: 1. Select the entry "Input" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the name of the variable in which the processed process value is saved. Output value V1 PID_Compact offers three output values. Your actuator will determine which output value you use. Output_PER The actuator is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10V, 4...20mA. Output The output value needs to be processed by the user program, for example because of nonlinear actuator response. Output_PWM The actuator is controlled via a digital output. Pulse width modulation creates minimum ON and minimum OFF times. PID control 100 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog output value: 1. Select the entry "Output_PER (analog)" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the analog output. Proceed as follows to process the output value using the user program: 1. Select the entry "Output" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instance DB". The calculated output value is saved in the instance data block. 3. For the preparation of the output value, use the output parameter Output. 4. Transfer the processed output value to the actuator via a digital or analog CPU output. Proceed as follows to use the digital output value: 1. Select the entry "Output_PWM" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the digital output. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 101 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.1.2 Process value settings V1 Configure the scaling of your process value and specify the process value absolute limits In the "Process value settings" configuration window. Scaling the process value If you have configured the use of Input_PER in the basic settings, you will need to convert the value of the analog input into the physical quantity of the process value. The current configuration will be displayed in the Input_PER display. Input_PER will be scaled using a low and high value pair if the process value is directly proportional to the value of the analog input. 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Scaled low process value" and "Low" input fields. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "Scaled high process value" and "High" input boxes. Default settings for the value pairs are saved in the hardware configuration. Proceed as follows to use the value pairs from the hardware configuration: 1. Select the instruction PID_Compact in the programming editor. 2. Connect Input_PER with an analog input in the basic settings. 3. Click on the "Automatic setting" button in the process value settings. The existing values will be overwritten with the values from the hardware configuration. Monitoring process value Specify the absolute high and low limit of the process value. As soon as these limits are violated during operation, the controller switches off and the output value is set to 0%. You must enter reasonable limits for your controlled system. Reasonable limits are important during optimization to obtain optimal PID parameters. The default for the "High limit process value" is 120 %. At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the standard range (overrange). An error is no longer reported for a violation of the "High limit process value". Only a wire-break and a short-circuit are recognized and the PID_Compact switches to "Inactive" mode. WARNING If you set very high process value limits (for example -3.4*1038...+3.4*1038), process value monitoring will be disabled. Your system may then be damaged if an error occurs. See also Process value monitoring V1 (Page 103) PWM limits V1 (Page 104) Output value limits V1 (Page 106) PID parameters V1 (Page 107) PID control 102 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.1.3 Advanced settings V1 Process value monitoring V1 Configure a warning high and low limit for the process value in the "Process value monitoring" configuration window. If one of the warning limits is exceeded or undershot during operation, a warning will be displayed at the PID_Compact instruction: At the InputWarning_H output parameter if the warning high limit has been exceeded At the InputWarning_L output parameter if the warning low limit has been undershot The warning limits must be within the process value high and low limits. The process value high and low limits will be used if you do not enter values. Example Process value high limit = 98 C; warning high limit = 90 C Warning low limit = 10 C; process value low limit = 0 C PID_Compact will respond as follows: Process value InputWarning_H InputWarning_L Operating mode > 98 C TRUE FALSE Inactive 98 C and > 90 C TRUE FALSE Automatic mode 90 C and 10 C FALSE FALSE Automatic mode < 10 C and 0 C FALSE TRUE Automatic mode < 0 C FALSE TRUE Inactive See also Process value settings V1 (Page 102) PWM limits V1 (Page 104) Output value limits V1 (Page 106) PID parameters V1 (Page 107) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 103 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 PWM limits V1 The value at the output parameter Output is transformed into a pulse sequence that is output at output parameter Output_PWM by means of a pulse width modulation. Output is calculated in the PID algorithm sampling time, Output_PWM is output in the PID_Compact sampling time. The PID algorithm sampling time is determined during pretuning or fine tuning. If manually setting the PID parameters, you will also need to configure the PID algorithm sampling time. The PID_Compact sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The pulse duration is proportional to the value at Output and is always an integer multiple of the PID_Compact sampling time. PID_Compact sampling time PID algorithm sampling time Pulse duration Break time The "Minimum ON time" and the "Minimum OFF time" are rounded to an integer multiple of the PID_Compact sampling time. A pulse or a break is never shorter than the minimum ON or OFF time. The inaccuracies this causes are added up and compensated in the next cycle. PID control 104 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Example PID_Compact sampling time = 100 ms PID algorithm sampling time = 1000 ms Minimum ON time = 200 ms Output is a constant 15%. The smallest pulse that PID_Compact can output is 20%. In the first cycle, no pulse is output. In the second cycle, the pulse not output in the first cycle is added to the pulse of the second cycle. PID_Compact sampling time PID algorithm sampling time Minimum ON time In order to minimize operation frequency and conserve the actuator, extend the minimum ON and OFF times. If you are using "Output" or "Output_PER", you must configure the value 0.0 for the minimum ON and OFF times. Note The minimum ON and OFF times only affect the output parameter Output_PWM and are not used for any pulse generators integrated in the CPU. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 105 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 See also Process value settings V1 (Page 102) Process value monitoring V1 (Page 103) Output value limits V1 (Page 106) PID parameters V1 (Page 107) Output value limits V1 In the "Output value limits" configuration window, configure the absolute limits of your output value in percent. Absolute output value limits are not violated in neither manual mode nor in automatic mode. If a output value outside the limits is specified in manual mode, the effective value is limited in the CPU to the configured limits. The valid output value limit values depend on the Output used. Output -100.0 to 100.0 Output_PER -100.0 to 100.0 Output_PWM 0.0 to 100.0 PID_Compact sets the output value to 0.0 if an error occurs. 0.0 must therefore always be within the output value limits. You will need to add an offset to Output and Output_PER in the user program if you want an output value low limit of greater than 0.0. See also Process value settings V1 (Page 102) Process value monitoring V1 (Page 103) PWM limits V1 (Page 104) PID parameters V1 (Page 107) PID control 106 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 PID parameters V1 The PID parameters are displayed in the "PID Parameters" configuration window. The PID parameters will be adapted to your controlled system during controller tuning. You do not need to enter the PID parameters manually. Note The currently active PID parameters are located for PID_Compact V1 in the sRet structure and for PID_Compact V2 in the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Change the currently active PID parameters only in "Inactive" mode online to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. If you want to change the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" or "Manual mode" online, change the PID parameters as follows: * PID_Compact V1: Change the PID parameters in the sBackUp structure and apply these changes with sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp = TRUE to the sRet structure. * PID_Compact V2: Change the PID parameters in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and apply these changes with LoadBackUp = TRUE to the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Online changes to the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" can result in jumps at the output value. The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation: y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integral action time a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) TD Derivative action time c Derivative action weighting PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 107 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 The diagram below illustrates the integration of the parameters into the PID algorithm: All PID parameters are retentive. If you enter the PID parameters manually, you must completely download PID_Compact. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Proportional gain The value specifies the proportional gain of the controller. PID_Compact does not work with a negative proportional gain. Control logic is inverted under Basic settings > Controller type. Integral action time The integral action time determines the time behavior of the integral action. The integral action is deactivated with integral action time = 0.0. When the integral action time is changed from a different value to 0.0 online in "Automatic mode", the previous integral action is deleted and the output value jumps. Derivative action time The derivative action time determines the time behavior of the derivative action. Derivative action is deactivated with derivative action time = 0.0. PID control 108 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. Proportional action weighting The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. Derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. PID algorithm sampling time The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time. All other functions of PID_Compact are executed at every call. If you use Output_PWM, the accuracy of the output signal is determined by the ratio of the PID algorithm sampling time to the cycle time of the OB. The PID algorithm sampling time corresponds to the time period of the pulse width modulation. The cycle time should be at least 10 times the PID algorithm sampling time. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 109 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Rule for tuning Select whether PI or PID parameters are to be calculated in the "Controller structure" dropdown list. PID Calculates PID parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. PI Calculates PI parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. User-defined The drop-down list displays "User-defined" if you have configured different controller structures for pretuning and fine tuning via a user program. PID control 110 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.2 Commissioning PID_Compact V1 4.3.2.1 Commissioning V1 The commissioning window helps you commission the PID controller. You can monitor the values for the setpoint, process value and output value along the time axis in the trend view. The following functions are supported in the commissioning window: Controller pretuning Controller fine tuning Use fine tuning for fine adjustments to the PID parameters. Monitoring the current closed-loop control in the trend view Testing the controlled system by specifying a manual output value All functions require an online connection to the CPU to have been established. Basic handling Select the desired sampling time in the "Sampling time" drop-down list. All values in the commissioning window are updated in the selected update time. Click the "Start" icon in the measuring group if you want to use the commissioning functions. Value recording is started. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are entered in the trend view. Operation of the commissioning window is enabled. Click the "Stop" icon if you want to end the commissioning functions. The values recorded in the trend view can continue to be analyzed. Closing the commissioning window will terminate recording in the trend view and delete the recorded values. See also Pretuning V1 (Page 112) Fine tuning V1 (Page 114) "Manual" mode V1 (Page 116) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 111 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.2.2 Pretuning V1 The pretuning determines the process response to a jump change of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The tuned PID parameters are calculated as a function of the maximum slope and dead time of the controlled system. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. Requirement The "PID_Compact" instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE PID_Compact is in "inactive" or "manual" mode. The setpoint may not be changed during controller tuning. PID_Compact will otherwise be deactivated. The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value monitoring" configuration). The difference between setpoint and process value is greater than 30% of the difference between process value high limit and process value low limit. The distance between the setpoint and the process value is > 50% of the setpoint. Procedure To perform pretuning, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_Compact > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Select the entry "Pretuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 3. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - Pretuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. PID control 112 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Result If pretuning was performed without an error message, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_Compact switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact will change to "Inactive" mode. See also Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 (Page 308) Commissioning V1 (Page 111) Fine tuning V1 (Page 114) "Manual" mode V1 (Page 116) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 113 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.2.3 Fine tuning V1 Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are optimized for the operating point from the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. All PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of the findings. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance behavior than PID parameters from pretuning. PID_Compact automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. Requirement The PID_Compact instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value monitoring" configuration). The control loop has stabilized at the operating point. The operating point is reached when the process value corresponds to the setpoint. No disturbances are expected. The setpoint may not be changed during controller tuning. PID_Compact is in inactive mode, automatic mode or manual mode. Process depends on initial situation Fine tuning can be started in "inactive", "automatic" or "manual" mode. Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started in: Automatic mode Start fine tuning in automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters using controller tuning. PID_Comact will regulate using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. Inactive or manual mode If the requirements for pretuning are met, pretuning is started. The PID parameters established will be used for adjustment until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact will change to "Inactive" mode. An attempt is made to reach the setpoint with a minimum or maximum output value if the process value for pretuning is already too near the setpoint. This can produce increased overshoot. PID control 114 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 Procedure Proceed as follows to carry out "fine tuning": 1. Select the entry "Fine tuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 2. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - The process of fine tuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon in the "Tuning mode" group when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result The PID parameters will have been optimized if fine tuning has been executed without errors. PID_Compact changes to automatic mode and uses the optimized parameters. The optimized PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If errors occurred during "fine tuning", PID_Compact will change to "inactive" mode. See also Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 (Page 308) Commissioning V1 (Page 111) Pretuning V1 (Page 112) "Manual" mode V1 (Page 116) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 115 Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.2.4 "Manual" mode V1 The following section describes how you can use the "Manual" operating mode in the commissioning window of the "PID Compact" technology object. Requirement The "PID_Compact" instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. An online connection to the CPU has been established and the CPU is in the "RUN" mode. The functions of the commissioning window have been enabled via the "Start" icon. Procedure Use "Manual mode" in the commissioning window if you want to test the process by specifying a manual value. To define a manual value, proceed as follows: 1. Select the check box "Manual mode" in the "Online status of the controller" area. PID_Compact operates in manual mode. The most recent current output value remains in effect. 2. Enter the manual value in the "Output" field as a % value. 3. Click the control icon . Result The manual value is written to the CPU and immediately goes into effect. Note PID_Compact continues to monitor the process value. If the process value limits are exceeded, PID_Compact is deactivated. Clear the "Manual mode" check box if the output value is to be specified again by the PID controller. The change to automatic mode is bumpless. See also Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 (Page 308) Commissioning V1 (Page 111) Pretuning V1 (Page 112) Fine tuning V1 (Page 114) PID control 116 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Compact 4.3 PID_Compact V1 4.3.3 Simulating PID_Compact V1 with PLCSIM Note Simulation with PLCSIM For the simulation with PLCSIM, the time behavior of the simulated PLC is not exactly identical to that of a "real" PLC. The actual cycle clock of a cyclic interrupt OB can have larger fluctuations with a simulated PLC than with "real" PLCs. In the standard configuration, PID_Compact determines the time between calls automatically and monitors them for fluctuations. For a simulation of PID_Compact with PLCSIM, for example, a sampling time error (ErrorBits = DW#16#00000800) can therefore be detected. PID_Compact switches to "Inactive" mode (State = 0) in this case. To prevent this from happening, you should configure PID_Compact for simulation with PLCSIM as follows: * sb_EnCyclEstimation = FALSE * sb_EnCyclMonitoring = FALSE * sPid_Calc.r_Cycle: Assign the cycle clock of the calling cyclic interrupt OB in seconds to this tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 117 5 Using PID_3Step 5.1 Technology object PID_3Step The technology object PID_3Step provides a PID controller with tuning for valves or actuators with integral response. You can configure the following controllers: Three-point step controller with position feedback Three-point step controller without position feedback Valve controller with analog output value PID_3Step continuously acquires the measured process value within a control loop and compares it with the setpoint. From the resulting control deviation, PID_3Step calculates an output value through which the process value reaches the setpoint as quickly and steadily as possible. The output value for the PID controller consists of three actions: Proportional action The proportional action of the output value increases in proportion to the control deviation. I action The integral action of the output value increases until the control deviation has been balanced. D action The derivative action increases with the rate of change of control deviation. The process value is corrected to the setpoint as quickly as possible. The derivative action will be reduced again if the rate of change of control deviation drops. The instruction PID_3Step calculates the proportional, integral and derivative parameters for your controlled system during pretuning. Fine tuning can be used to tune the parameters further. You do not need to manually determine the parameters. Additional information Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Configuring PID_3Step V2 (Page 119) Configuring PID_3Step V1 (Page 142) Principle For more information, see the following FAQs in the Siemens Industry Online Support: Entry ID 68011827 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/68011827) PID control 118 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.1 Configuring PID_3Step V2 5.2.1.1 Basic settings V2 Introduction V2 Configure the following properties of the "PID_3Step" technology object under "Basic settings" in the Inspector window or in the configuration window: Physical quantity Control logic Start-up behavior after reset Setpoint (only in the Inspector window) Process value (only in the Inspector window) Output value (only in the Inspector window) Position feedback (only in the Inspector window) Setpoint, process value, output value and position feedback You can only configure the setpoint, process value, output value and position feedback in the Inspector window of the programming editor. Select the source for each value: Instance DB The value saved in the instance DB is used. Value must be updated in the instance DB by the user program. There should be no value at the instruction. Change via HMI possible. Instruction The value connected to the instruction is used. The value is written to the instance DB each time the instruction is called. No change via HMI possible. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 119 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Control mode V2 Physical quantity Select the physical quantity and unit of measurement for setpoint, process value, and disturbance variable in the "Controller type" group. Setpoint, process value, and disturbance variable is displayed in this unit of measurement. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. PID_3Step does not work with negative proportional gain. Select the check box "Invert control logic" to reduce the process value with a higher output value. Examples Opening the drain valve will reduce the level of a container's contents. Increasing cooling will reduce the temperature. Startup characteristics 1. To switch to "Inactive" mode after CPU restart, clear the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box. To switch to the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter after CPU restart, select the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box. 2. In the "Set Mode to" drop-down list, select the mode that is to be enabled after a complete download to the device. After a complete download to the device, PID_3Step starts in the selected operating mode. With each additional restart, PID_3Step starts in the mode that was last saved in Mode. Example You have selected the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box and the entry "Pretuning" in the "Set Mode to" list. After a complete download to the device, PID_3Step starts in the "Pretuning" mode. If pretuning is still active, PID_3Step starts in "Pretuning" mode again after restart of the CPU. If pretuning was successfully completed and automatic mode is active, PID_3Step starts in "Automatic mode" after restart of the CPU. PID control 120 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Setpoint V2 Procedure Proceed as follows to define a fixed setpoint: 1. Select "Instance DB". 2. Enter a setpoint, e.g. 80 C. 3. Delete any entry in the instruction. Proceed as follows to define a variable setpoint: 1. Select "Instruction". 2. Enter the name of the REAL variable in which the setpoint is saved. Program-controlled assignment of various values to the REAL variable is possible, for example for the time controlled change of the setpoint. Process value V2 PID_3Step will scale the value of the analog input to the physical quantity if you use the analog input value directly. You will need to write a program for processing if you wish first to process the analog input value. The process value is, for example, not directly proportional to the value at the analog input. The processed process value must be in floating point format. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog input value without processing: 1. Select the entry "Input_PER" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input. Proceed as follows to use the processed process value in floating point format: 1. Select the entry "Input" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the name of the variable in which the processed process value is saved. Position feedback V2 Position feedback configuration depends upon the actuator used. Actuator without position feedback Actuator with digital endstop signals Actuator with analog position feedback Actuator with analog position feedback and endstop signals PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 121 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Actuator without position feedback Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator without position feedback: 1. Select the entry "No Feedback" in the drop-down list "Feedback". Actuator with digital endstop signals Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator with endstop signals: 1. Select the entry "No Feedback" in the drop-down list "Feedback". 2. Activate the "Actuator endstop signals" check box. 3. Select "Instruction" as source for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. 4. Enter the addresses of the digital inputs for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. Actuator with analog position feedback Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator with analog position feedback: 1. Select the entry "Feedback" or "Feedback_PER" in the drop-down list "Feedback". - Use the analog input value for Feedback_PER. Configure Feedback_PER scaling in the actuator settings. - Process the analog input value for Feedback using your user program. 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input or the variable of your user program. Actuator with analog position feedback and endstop signals Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator with analog position feedback and endstop signals: 1. Select the entry "Feedback" or "Feedback_PER" in the drop-down list "Feedback". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input or the variable of your user program. 4. Activate the "Actuator endstop signals" check box. 5. Select "Instruction" as source for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. 6. Enter the addresses of the digital inputs for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. PID control 122 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Output value V2 PID_3Step offers an analog output value (Output_PER) and digital output values (Output_UP, Output_DN). Your actuator will determine which output value you use. Output_PER The actuator has a relevant motor transition time and is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10 V or 4...20 mA. The value at Output_PER corresponds to the target position of the valve, e.g. Output_PER = 13824, when the valve is to be opened by 50%. For auto-tuning and anti windup behavior, for example, PID_3Step takes into consideration that the analog output value has a delayed effect on the process due to the motor transition time. If no relevant motor transition time is in effect in your process (e.g. with solenoid valves), so that the output value has a direct and full effect on the process, use PID_Compact instead. Output_UP, Output_DN The actuator has a relevant motor transition time and is controlled by two digital outputs. Output_UP moves the valve in the open state direction. Output_DN moves the valve in the closed state direction. The motor transition time is taken into consideration in the calculation of the analog output value as well as in the calculation of the digital output values. It is mainly required for correct operation during auto-tuning and the anti-windup behavior. You should therefore configure the motor transition time under "Actuator settings" with the value that the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog output value: 1. Select the entry "Output (analog)" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the analog output. Proceed as follows to use the digital output value: 1. Select the entry "Output (digital)" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction" for Output_UP and Output_DN. 3. Enter the addresses of the digital outputs. Proceed as follows to process the output value using the user program: 1. Select the entry corresponding to the actuator in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the name of the tag you are using to process the output value. 4. Transfer the processed output value to the actuator by means of an analog or digital CPU output. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 123 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.1.2 Process value settings V2 Process value scaling V2 If you have configured the use of Input_PER in the basic setting, you must convert the value of the analog input to the physical quantity of the process value. The current configuration is displayed in the Input_PER display. Input_PER will be scaled using a low and high value pair if the process value is directly proportional to the value of the analog input. Procedure To scale the process value, follow these steps: 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Scaled low process value" and "Low" text boxs. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "Scaled high process value" and "High" input boxes. Default settings for the value pairs are stored in the hardware configuration. To use the value pairs from the hardware configuration, follow these steps: 1. Select the PID_3Step instruction in the programming editor. 2. Interconnect Input_PER with an analog input in the basic settings. 3. Click the "Automatic setting" button in the process value settings. The existing values will be overwritten with the values from the hardware configuration. Process value limits V2 You must specify an appropriate absolute high limit and low limit for the process value as limit values for your controlled system. As soon as the process value violates these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0001h). Tuning is canceled when the process value limits are violated. You can specify how PID_3Step responds to errors in automatic mode in the actuator settings. PID control 124 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.1.3 Final controlling element settings V2 Final controlling element V2 Actuator-specific times Configure the motor transition time and the minimum ON and OFF times to prevent damage to the actuator. You can find the specifications in the actuator data sheet. The motor transition time is the time in seconds the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. You can measure the motor transition time during commissioning. The motor transition time is taken into consideration in the calculation of the analog output value as well as in the calculation of the digital output values. It is mainly required for correct operation during auto-tuning and the anti-windup behavior. If no relevant motor transition time is in effect in your process (e.g. with solenoid valves), so that the output value has a direct and full effect on the process, use PID_Compact instead. The motor transition time is retentive. If you enter the motor transition time manually, you must completely download PID_3Step. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) If you are using "Output_UP" or "Output_DN", you can reduce the switching frequency with the minimum on and minimum OFF time. The on or off times calculated are totaled in automatic mode and only become effective when the sum is greater than or equal to the minimum on or OFF time. Manual_UP = TRUE or Manual_DN = TRUE in manual mode operates the actuator for at least the minimum ON or OFF time. If you have selected the analog output value Output_PER, the minimum ON time and the minimum OFF time are not evaluated and cannot be changed. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 125 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Reaction to error PID_3Step is preset so that the controller stays active in most cases in the event of an error. If errors occur frequently in controller mode, this default reaction has a negative effect on the control response. In this case, check the Errorbits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If you output "Current value while error pending" or "Substitute output value while error pending" in the event of an error, PID_3Step remains in automatic mode even if the process value limits are violated. This may damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. PID_3Step generates a programmable output value in the case of an error: Current value PID_3Step is switched off and no longer modifies the actuator position. Current value for error while error is pending The controller functions of PID_3Step are switched off and the position of the actuator is no longer changed. If the following errors occur in automatic mode, PID_3Step returns to automatic mode as soon as the errors are no longer pending. - 0002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. - 0200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. - 0400h: Calculation of output value failed. - 1000h: Invalid value at Setpoint parameter. - 2000h: Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. - 4000h: Invalid value at Feedback parameter. - 8000h: Error during digital position feedback. - 20000h: Invalid value at SavePosition tag. PID control 126 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_3Step stays in automatic mode: - 0001h: The Input parameter is outside the process value limits. - 0800h: Sampling time error - 40000h: Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. PID_3Step remains in manual mode if an error occurs in manual mode. If an error occurs during tuning or transition time measurement, PID_3Step switches to the mode in which tuning or transition time measurement was started. Only in the event of the following error is tuning not aborted: - 0020h: Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. Substitute output value PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value and then switches off. Substitute output value while error is pending PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value. When the substitute output value is reached, PID_3Step reacts as it does with "Current value for while error is pending". Enter the substitute output value in "%". Only substitute output values 0% and 100% can be approached precisely in the case of actuators without analog position feedback. A substitute output value not equal to 0% or 100% is approached via an internally simulated position feedback. This procedure does not, however, allow the exact approach of substitute output value. All substitute output values can be approached precisely with actuators with analog position feedback. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 127 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Scaling V2 position feedback Scaling position feedback If you have configured the use of Feedback_PER in the basic settings, you will need to convert the value of the analog input into %. The current configuration will be displayed in the "Feedback" display. Feedback_PER is scaled using a low and high value pair. 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Low endstop" and "Low" input boxes. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "High endstop" and "High" input boxes. "Low endstop" must be less than "High endstop"; "Low" must be less than "High". The valid values for "High endstop" and "Low endstop" depend upon: No Feedback, Feedback, Feedback_PER Output (analog), Output (digital) Output Feedback Low endstop High endstop Output (digital) No Feedback Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) Output (digital) Feedback -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output (digital) Feedback_PER -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output (analog) No Feedback Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) Output (analog) Feedback -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output (analog) Feedback_PER -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output value limits V2 Limiting the output value You can exceed or undershoot the output value limits during the transition time measurement and with mode = 10. The output value is limited to these values in all other modes. Enter the absolute output value limits in the "Output value high limit" and "Output value low limit" input boxes. The output value limits must be within "Low endstop" and "High endstop". If no Feedback is available and Output (digital) is set, you cannot limit the output value. Output_UP and Output_DN are then reset upon Actuator_H = TRUE or Actuator_L = TRUE. If no endstop signals are available, Output_UP and Output_DN are reset after a travel time of 150% of the motor actuating time. The default value of 150% can be adjusted using the tagConfig.VirtualActuatorLimit. As of PID_3Step Version 2.3 the monitoring and limiting of the travel time can be deactivated with Config.VirtualActuatorLimit = 0.0. PID control 128 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.1.4 Advanced settings V2 Actual value monitoring V2 Configure a warning high and low limit for the process value in the "Process value monitoring" configuration window. If one of the warning limits is exceeded or undershot during operation, a warning will be displayed at the PID_3Step instruction: At the InputWarning_H output parameter if the warning high limit has been exceeded At the InputWarning_L output parameter if the warning low limit has been undershot The warning limits must be within the process value high and low limits. The process value high and low limits will be used if you do not enter values. Example Process value high limit = 98 C; warning high limit = 90 C Warning low limit = 10 C; process value low limit = 0 C PID_3Step will respond as follows: Process value InputWarning_H InputWarning_L ErrorBits Operating mode > 98 C TRUE FALSE 0001h As configured 98 C and > 90 C TRUE FALSE 0000h Automatic mode 90 C and 10 C FALSE FALSE 0000h Automatic mode < 10 C and 0 C FALSE TRUE 0000h Automatic mode < 0 C FALSE TRUE 0001h As configured In the actuator settings, you can configure the response of PID_3Step when the process value high limit or low limit is violated. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 129 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 PID parameters V2 The PID parameters are displayed in the "PID Parameters" configuration window. The PID parameters will be adapted to your controlled system during controller tuning. You do not need to enter the PID parameters manually. Note The currently active PID parameters are located in the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Change the currently active PID parameters only in "Inactive" mode online to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. If you want to change the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" or "Manual mode" online, change the PID parameters in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and apply these changes to the Retain.CtrlParams structure as follows: * PID_3Step V1: Apply the changes with Config.LoadBackUp = TRUE * PID_3Step V2: Apply the changes with LoadBackUp = TRUE Online changes to the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" can result in jumps at the output value. The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation: y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integration time a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) TD Derivative action time c Derivative action weighting PID control 130 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 The diagram below illustrates the integration of the parameters into the PID algorithm: All PID parameters are retentive. If you enter the PID parameters manually, you must completely download PID_3Step. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Proportional gain The value specifies the proportional gain of the controller. PID_3Step does not work with a negative proportional gain. Control logic is inverted under Basic settings > Controller type. Integration time The integration time determines the time behavior of the integral action. The integral action is deactivated with integration time = 0.0. When the integral action time is changed from a different value to 0.0 online in "Automatic mode", the previous integral action is deleted and the output value jumps. Derivative action time The derivative action time determines the time behavior of the derivative action. Derivative action is deactivated with derivative action time = 0.0. Derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 131 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Proportional action weighting The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. Derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. PID algorithm sampling time The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the PID_3Step sampling time. All other functions of PID_3Step are executed at every call. Dead band width The deadband suppresses the noise component in the steady controller state. The dead band width specifies the size of the dead band. The dead band is off if the dead band width is 0.0. If values not equal to 1.0 are configured for the proportional action weighting or the derivative action weighting, setpoint changes even within the dead zone affect the output value. Process value changes within the dead zone do not affect the output value, regardless of the weighting. PID control 132 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.2 Commissioning PID_3Step V2 5.2.2.1 Pretuning V2 The pretuning determines the process response to a pulse of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The tuned PID parameters are calculated as a function of the maximum slope and dead time of the controlled system. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. This is most likely the case in operating modes "Inactive" and "manual mode". The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. The setpoint is frozen during pretuning. Requirement The PID_3Step instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE The motor transition time has been configured or measured. PID_3Step is in one of the following modes: "Inactive", "Manual mode", or "Automatic mode". The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value settings" configuration). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 133 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Procedure To perform pretuning, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_3Step > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Select the entry "Pretuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list in the working area "Tuning". 3. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - Pretuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result If pretuning was performed without an error message, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_3Step switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If pretuning is not possible, PID_3Step responds with the configured reaction to errors. PID control 134 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.2.2 Fine tuning V2 Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are tuned for the operating point from the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. All PID parameters are recalculated from the results. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_3Step automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. The setpoint is frozen during fine tuning. Requirement The PID_3Step instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE The motor transition time has been configured or measured. The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value settings" configuration). The control loop has stabilized at the operating point. The operating point is reached when the process value corresponds to the setpoint. No disturbances are expected. PID_3Step is in inactive mode, automatic mode or manual mode. Process depends on initial situation Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started from: Automatic mode Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_3Step controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. Inactive or manual mode Pretuning is always started first. The determined PID parameters will be used for control until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 135 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Procedure To perform fine tuning, follow these steps: 1. Select the entry "Fine tuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 2. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - The process of fine tuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon in the "Tuning mode" group when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result If no errors occurred during fine tuning, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_3Step switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If errors occurred during fine tuning, PID_3Step responds with the configured response to errors. PID control 136 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.2.3 Commissioning with manual PID parameters V2 Requirement The PID_3Step instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE The motor transition time has been configured or measured. PID_3Step is in "inactive" mode. The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value settings" configuration). Procedure Proceed as follows to commission PID_3Step with manual PID parameters: 1. Double-click on "PID_3Step > Configuration" in the project tree. 2. Click on "Advanced settings > PID Parameters" in the configuration window. 3. Select the check box "Enable direct input". 4. Enter the PID parameters. 5. Double-click the "PID_3Step > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 6. Establish an online connection to the CPU. 7. Load the PID parameters to the CPU. 8. Click the "Start PID_3Step" icon. Result PID_3Step changes to automatic mode and controls using the current PID parameters. See also PID parameters V2 (Page 130) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 137 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.2.4 Measuring the motor transition time V2 Introduction PID_3Step requires the motor transition time to be as accurate as possible for good controller results. The data in the actuator documentation contains average values for this type of actuator. The value for the specific actuator used may differ. You can measure the motor transition time during commissioning if you are using actuators with position feedback or endstop signals. The output value limits are not taken into consideration during the motor transition time measurement. The actuator can travel to the high or the low endstop. The motor transition time cannot be measured if neither position feedback nor endstop signals are available. Actuators with analog position feedback Proceed as follows to measure motor transition time with position feedback: Requirement Feedback or Feedback_PER has been selected in the basic settings and the signal has been connected. An online connection to the CPU has been established. 1. Select the "Use position feedback" check box. 2. Enter the position to which the actuator is to be moved in the "Target position" input field. The current position feedback (starting position) will be displayed. The difference between "Target position" and "Position feedback" must be at least 50% of the valid output value range. 3. Click the "Start" icon. PID control 138 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Result The actuator is moved from the starting position to the target position. Time measurement starts immediately and ends when the actuator reaches the target position. The motor transition time is calculated according to the following equation: Motor transition time = (output value high limit - output value low limit) x Measuring time / AMOUNT (target position - starting position). The progress and status of transition time measurement are displayed. The transition time measured is saved in the instance data block on the CPU and displayed in the "Measured transition time" field. When the transition time measurement is ended and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode from which the transition time measurement was started. If the transition time measurement is ended and ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, PID_3Step changes to "Inactive" mode. Note Click on the icon "Upload measured transition time" to load the motor transition time measured to the project. Actuators with endstop signals Proceed as follows to measure the transition time of actuators with endstop signals: Requirement The "Endstop signals" check box in the basic settings has been selected and Actuator_H and Actuator_L are connected. An online connection to the CPU has been established. Proceed as follows to measure motor transition time with endstop signals: 1. Select the "Use actuator endstop signals" check box. 2. Select the direction in which the actuator is to be moved. - Open - Close - Open The actuator is moved first to the high endstop, then to the low endstop and then back to the high endstop. - Close - Open - Close The actuator is moved first to the low endstop, then to the high endstop and then back to the low endstop. 3. Click the "Start" icon. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 139 Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 Result The actuator is moved in the selected direction. Time measurement will start once the actuator has reached the first endstop and will end when the actuator reaches this endstop for the second time. The motor transition time is equal to the time measured divided by two. The progress and status of transition time measurement are displayed. The transition time measured is saved in the instance data block on the CPU and displayed in the "Measured transition time" field. When the transition time measurement is ended and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode from which the transition time measurement was started. If the transition time measurement is ended and ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, PID_3Step changes to "Inactive" mode. Cancelling transition time measurement PID_3Step switches to "Inactive" mode if you cancel transition time measurement by pressing the Stop button. PID control 140 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.2 PID_3Step V2 5.2.3 Simulating PID_3Step V2 with PLCSIM Note Simulation with PLCSIM The simulation of PID_3Step V2.x with PLCSIM for CPU S7-1200 is not supported. PID_3Step V2.x can only be simulated for CPU S7-1500 with PLCSIM. For the simulation with PLCSIM, the time behavior of the simulated PLC is not exactly identical to that of a "real" PLC. The actual cycle clock of a cyclic interrupt OB can have larger fluctuations with a simulated PLC than with "real" PLCs. In the standard configuration, PID_3Step determines the time between calls automatically and monitors them for fluctuations. For a simulation of PID_3Step with PLCSIM, for example, a sampling time error ((ErrorBits = DW#16#00000800) can therefore be detected. This results in ongoing tuning being aborted. The response in automatic mode depends on the value of the ActivateRecoverMode tag. To prevent this from happening, you should configure PID_3Step for simulation with PLCSIM as follows: * CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE * CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE * CycleTime.Value: Assign the cycle clock of the calling cyclic interrupt OB in seconds to this tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 141 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.1 Configuring PID_3Step V1 5.3.1.1 Basic settings V1 Introduction V1 Configure the following properties of the "PID_3Step" technology object under "Basic settings" in the Inspector window or in the configuration window: Physical quantity Control logic Start-up behavior after reset Setpoint (only in the Inspector window) Process value (only in the Inspector window) Output value (only in the Inspector window) Position feedback (only in the Inspector window) Setpoint, process value, output value and position feedback You can only configure the setpoint, process value, output value and position feedback in the Inspector window of the programming editor. Select the source for each value: Instance DB The value saved in the instance DB is used. Value must be updated in the instance DB by the user program. There should be no value at the instruction. Change via HMI possible. Instruction The value connected to the instruction is used. The value is written to the instance DB each time the instruction is called. No change via HMI possible. PID control 142 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Control mode V1 Physical quantity Select the unit of measurement and physical quantity for the setpoint and process value in the "Controller type" group. The setpoint and process value will be displayed in this unit. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. PID_3Step does not work with negative proportional gain. Select the check box "Invert control logic" to reduce the process value with a higher output value. Examples Opening the drain valve will reduce the level of a container's contents. Increasing cooling will reduce the temperature. Start-up behavior after reset To change straight to the last active mode after restarting the CPU, select the "Enable last mode after CPU restart" check box. PID_3Step will remain in "Inactive" mode if the check box is cleared. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 143 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Setpoint V1 Procedure Proceed as follows to define a fixed setpoint: 1. Select "Instance DB". 2. Enter a setpoint, e.g. 80 C. 3. Delete any entry in the instruction. Proceed as follows to define a variable setpoint: 1. Select "Instruction". 2. Enter the name of the REAL variable in which the setpoint is saved. Program-controlled assignment of various values to the REAL variable is possible, for example for the time controlled change of the setpoint. Process value V1 PID_3Step will scale the value of the analog input to the physical quantity if you use the analog input value directly. You will need to write a program for processing if you wish first to process the analog input value. The process value is, for example, not directly proportional to the value at the analog input. The processed process value must be in floating point format. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog input value without processing: 1. Select the entry "Input_PER" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input. Proceed as follows to use the processed process value in floating point format: 1. Select the entry "Input" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the name of the variable in which the processed process value is saved. PID control 144 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Position feedback V1 Position feedback configuration depends upon the actuator used. Actuator without position feedback Actuator with digital endstop signals Actuator with analog position feedback Actuator with analog position feedback and endstop signals Actuator without position feedback Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator without position feedback: 1. Select the entry "No Feedback" in the drop-down list "Feedback". Actuator with digital endstop signals Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator with endstop signals: 1. Select the entry "No Feedback" in the drop-down list "Feedback". 2. Activate the "Actuator endstop signals" check box. 3. Select "Instruction" as source for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. 4. Enter the addresses of the digital inputs for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. Actuator with analog position feedback Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator with analog position feedback: 1. Select the entry "Feedback" or "Feedback_PER" in the drop-down list "Feedback". - Use the analog input value for Feedback_PER. Configure Feedback_PER scaling in the actuator settings. - Process the analog input value for Feedback using your user program. 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input or the variable of your user program. Actuator with analog position feedback and endstop signals Proceed as follows to configure PID_3Step for an actuator with analog position feedback and endstop signals: 1. Select the entry "Feedback" or "Feedback_PER" in the drop-down list "Feedback". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input or the variable of your user program. 4. Activate the "Actuator endstop signals" check box. 5. Select "Instruction" as source for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. 6. Enter the addresses of the digital inputs for Actuator_H and Actuator_L. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 145 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Output value V1 PID_3Step offers an analog output value (Output_PER) and digital output values (Output_UP, Output_DN). Your actuator will determine which output value you use. Output_PER The actuator has a relevant motor transition time and is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10 V or 4...20 mA. The value at Output_PER corresponds to the target position of the valve, e.g. Output_PER = 13824, when the valve is to be opened by 50%. For auto-tuning and anti windup behavior, for example, PID_3Step takes into consideration that the analog output value has a delayed effect on the process due to the motor transition time. If no relevant motor transition time is in effect in your process (e.g. with solenoid valves), so that the output value has a direct and full effect on the process, use PID_Compact instead. Output_UP, Output_DN The actuator has a relevant motor transition time and is controlled by two digital outputs. Output_UP moves the valve in the open state direction. Output_DN moves the valve in the closed state direction. The motor transition time is taken into consideration in the calculation of the analog output value as well as in the calculation of the digital output values. It is mainly required for correct operation during auto-tuning and the anti-windup behavior. You should therefore configure the motor transition time under "Actuator settings" with the value that the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog output value: 1. Select the entry "Output (analog)" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the analog output. Proceed as follows to use the digital output value: 1. Select the entry "Output (digital)" in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction" for Output_UP and Output_DN. 3. Enter the addresses of the digital outputs. Proceed as follows to process the output value using the user program: 1. Select the entry corresponding to the actuator in the drop-down list "Output". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the name of the tag you are using to process the output value. 4. Transfer the processed output value to the actuator by means of an analog or digital CPU output. PID control 146 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.1.2 Process value settings V1 Configure the scaling of your process value and specify the process value absolute limits In the "Process value settings" configuration window. Scaling the process value If you have configured the use of Input_PER in the basic settings, you will need to convert the value of the analog input into the physical quantity of the process value. The current configuration will be displayed in the Input_PER display. Input_PER will be scaled using a low and high value pair if the process value is directly proportional to the value of the analog input. 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Scaled low process value" and "Low" input fields. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "Scaled high process value" and "High" input boxes. Default settings for the value pairs are saved in the hardware configuration. Proceed as follows to use the value pairs from the hardware configuration: 1. Select the instruction PID_3Step in the programming editor. 2. Connect Input_PER to an analog input in the basic settings. 3. Click on the "Automatic setting" button in the process value settings. The existing values will be overwritten with the values from the hardware configuration. Monitoring process value Specify the absolute high and low limit of the process value. You must enter reasonable limits for your controlled system. Reasonable limits are important during optimization to obtain optimal PID parameters. The default for the "High limit process value" is 120 %. At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the standard range (overrange). This setting ensures that an error is no longer signaled due to a violation of the "Process value high limit". Only a wire-break and a short-circuit are recognized and PID_3Step reacts according to the configured reaction to error. NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If you set very high process value limits (for example -3.4*1038...+3.4*1038), process value monitoring will be disabled. Your system may then be damaged if an error occurs. You need to configure useful process value limits for your controlled system. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 147 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.1.3 V1 final controlling element setting Actuator-specific times Configure the motor transition time and the minimum ON and OFF times to prevent damage to the actuator. You can find the specifications in the actuator data sheet. The motor transition time is the time in seconds the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. The maximum time that the actuator is moved in one direction is 110% of the motor transition time. You can measure the motor transition time during commissioning. The motor transition time is taken into consideration in the calculation of the analog output value as well as in the calculation of the digital output values. It is mainly required for correct operation during auto-tuning and the anti-windup behavior. If no relevant motor transition time is in effect in your process (e.g. with solenoid valves), so that the output value has a direct and full effect on the process, use PID_Compact instead. If you are using "Output_UP" or "Output_DN", you can reduce the switching frequency with the minimum on and minimum OFF time. The on or off times calculated are totaled in automatic mode and only become effective when the sum is greater than or equal to the minimum on or OFF time. A rising edge at Manual_UP or Manual_DN in manual mode will operate the actuator for at least the minimum on or OFF time. If you have selected the analog output value Output_PER, the minimum ON time and the minimum OFF time are not evaluated and cannot be changed. PID control 148 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Reaction to error PID_3Step is preset so that the controller stays active in most cases in the event of an error. If errors occur frequently in controller mode, this default reaction has a negative effect on the control response. In this case, check the Errorbits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. PID_3Step generates a programmable output value in response to an error: Current value PID_3Step is switched off and no longer modifies the actuator position. Current value for error while error is pending The controller functions of PID_3Step are switched off and the position of the actuator is no longer changed. If the following errors occur in automatic mode, PID_3Step returns to automatic mode as soon as the errors are no longer pending. - 0002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. - 0200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. - 0800h: Sampling time error - 1000h: Invalid value at Setpoint parameter. - 2000h: Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. - 4000h: Invalid value at Feedback parameter. - 8000h: Error during digital position feedback. If one of these error occurs in manual mode, PID_3Step remains in manual mode. If an error occurs during the tuning or transition time measurement, PID_3Step is switched off. Substitute output value PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value and then switches off. Substitute output value while error is pending PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value. When the substitute output value is reached, PID_3Step reacts as it does with "Current value for while error is pending". Enter the substitute output value in "%". Only substitute output values 0% and 100% can be approached precisely in the case of actuators without analog position feedback. The actuator is moved in one direction at 110% of the motor transition time to ensure the high or low endstop is reached. There endstop signals take priority. A substitute output value not equal to 0% or 100% is approached via an internally simulated position feedback. This procedure does not, however, allow the exact approach of substitute output value. All substitute output values can be approached precisely with actuators with analog position feedback. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 149 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Scaling position feedback If you have configured the use of Feedback_PER in the basic settings, you will need to convert the value of the analog input into %. The current configuration will be displayed in the "Feedback" display. Feedback_PER is scaled using a low and high value pair. 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Low endstop" and "Low" input boxes. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "High endstop" and "High" input boxes. "Low endstop" must be less than "High endstop"; "Low" must be less than "High". The valid values for "High endstop" and "Low endstop" depend upon: No Feedback, Feedback, Feedback_PER Output (analog), Output (digital) Output Feedback Low endstop High endstop Output (digital) No Feedback Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) Output (digital) Feedback -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output (digital) Feedback_PER -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output (analog) No Feedback Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) Output (analog) Feedback -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Output (analog) Feedback_PER -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% Limiting the output value You can only exceed or undershoot the output value limits during the transition time measurement. The output value is limited to these values in all other modes. Enter the absolute output value limits in the "Output value high limit" and "Output value low limit" input boxes. The output value limits must be within "Low endstop" and "High endstop". If no Feedback is available and Output (digital) is set, you cannot limit the output value. The digital outputs are reset with Actuator_H = TRUE or Actuator_L = TRUE, or after a travel time amounting to 110% of the motor transition time. PID control 150 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.1.4 Advanced settings V1 Actual value monitoring V1 Configure a warning high and low limit for the process value in the "Process value monitoring" configuration window. If one of the warning limits is exceeded or undershot during operation, a warning will be displayed at the PID_3Step instruction: At the InputWarning_H output parameter if the warning high limit has been exceeded At the InputWarning_L output parameter if the warning low limit has been undershot The warning limits must be within the process value high and low limits. The process value high and low limits will be used if you do not enter values. Example Process value high limit = 98 C; warning high limit = 90 C Warning low limit = 10 C; process value low limit = 0 C PID_3Step will respond as follows: Process value InputWarning_H InputWarning_L Operating mode > 98 C TRUE FALSE Inactive 98 C and > 90 C TRUE FALSE Automatic mode 90 C and 10 C FALSE FALSE Automatic mode < 10 C and 0 C FALSE TRUE Automatic mode < 0 C FALSE TRUE Inactive PID parameters V1 The PID parameters are displayed in the "PID Parameters" configuration window. The PID parameters will be adapted to your controlled system during controller tuning. You do not need to enter the PID parameters manually. Note The currently active PID parameters are located in the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Change the currently active PID parameters only in "Inactive" mode online to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. If you want to change the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" or "Manual mode" online, change the PID parameters in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and apply these changes to the Retain.CtrlParams structure as follows: * PID_3Step V1: Apply the changes with Config.LoadBackUp = TRUE * PID_3Step V2: Apply the changes with LoadBackUp = TRUE Online changes to the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" can result in jumps at the output value. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 151 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation: y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integration time a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) TD Derivative action time c Derivative action weighting The diagram below illustrates the integration of the parameters into the PID algorithm: All PID parameters are retentive. If you enter the PID parameters manually, you must completely download PID_3Step. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Proportional gain The value specifies the proportional gain of the controller. PID_3Step does not work with a negative proportional gain. Control logic is inverted under Basic settings > Controller type. Integration time The integration time determines the time behavior of the integral action. The integral action is deactivated with integration time = 0.0. When the integral action time is changed from a different value to 0.0 online in "Automatic mode", the previous integral action is deleted and the output value jumps. PID control 152 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Derivative action time The derivative action time determines the time behavior of the derivative action. Derivative action is deactivated with derivative action time = 0.0. Derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. Proportional action weighting The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. Derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. PID algorithm sampling time The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the PID_3Step sampling time. All other functions of PID_3Step are executed at every call. Dead band width The deadband suppresses the noise component in the steady controller state. The dead band width specifies the size of the dead band. The dead band is off if the dead band width is 0.0. If values not equal to 1.0 are configured for the proportional action weighting or the derivative action weighting, setpoint changes even within the dead zone affect the output value. Process value changes within the dead zone do not affect the output value, regardless of the weighting. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 153 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.2 Commissioning PID_3Step V1 5.3.2.1 Commissioning V1 You can monitor the setpoint, process value and output value over time in the "Tuning" working area. The following commissioning functions are supported in the curve plotter: Controller pretuning Controller fine tuning Monitoring the current closed-loop control in the trend view All functions require an online connection to the CPU to have been established. Basic handling Select the desired sampling time in the "Sampling time" drop-down list. All values in the tuning working area are updated in the selected update time. Click the "Start" icon in the measuring group if you want to use the commissioning functions. Value recording is started. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are entered in the trend view. Operation of the commissioning window is enabled. Click the "Stop" icon if you want to end the commissioning functions. The values recorded in the trend view can continue to be analyzed. Closing the commissioning window will terminate recording in the trend view and delete the recorded values. PID control 154 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.2.2 Pretuning V1 The pretuning determines the process response to a pulse of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The tuned PID parameters are calculated as a function of the maximum slope and dead time of the controlled system. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. The setpoint is frozen during pretuning. Requirement The PID_3Step instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE PID_3Step is in "inactive" or "manual" mode. The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value settings" configuration). Procedure To perform pretuning, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_3Step > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Select the entry "Pretuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list in the working area "Tuning". 3. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - Pretuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result If pretuning was performed without an error message, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_3Step switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If pretuning is not possible, PID_3Step changes to "Inactive" mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 155 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.2.3 Fine tuning V1 Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are optimized for the operating point from the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. All PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of the findings. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance behavior than PID parameters from pretuning. PID_3Step automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. The setpoint is frozen during fine tuning. Requirement The PID_3Step instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE The motor transition time has been configured or measured. The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value settings" configuration). The control loop has stabilized at the operating point. The operating point is reached when the process value corresponds to the setpoint. No disturbances are expected. PID_3Step is in inactive mode, automatic mode or manual mode. Process depends on initial situation Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started in: Automatic mode Start fine tuning in automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters using controller tuning. PID_3Step will regulate using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. Inactive or manual mode Pretuning is always started first. The PID parameters established will be used for adjustment until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. PID control 156 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Procedure Proceed as follows to carry out "fine tuning": 1. Select the entry "Fine tuning" in the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 2. Click the "Start" icon. - An online connection will be established. - Value recording is started. - The process of fine tuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon in the "Tuning mode" group when the progress bar has reached 100% and it is to be assumed the controller tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result The PID parameters will have been optimized if fine tuning has been executed without errors. PID_3Step changes to automatic mode and uses the optimized parameters. The optimized PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If errors occurred during fine tuning, PID_3Step will change to "inactive" mode. 5.3.2.4 Commissioning with manual PID parameters V1 Procedure Proceed as follows to commission PID_3Step with manual PID parameters: 1. Double-click on "PID_3Step > Configuration" in the project tree. 2. Click on "Advanced settings > PID Parameters" in the configuration window. 3. Select the check box "Enable direct input". 4. Enter the PID parameters. 5. Double-click on "PID_3Step > Commissioning" in the project tree. 6. Establish an online connection to the CPU. 7. Load the PID parameters to the CPU. 8. Click on the "Activate controller" icon. Result PID_3Step changes to automatic mode and controls using the current PID parameters. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 157 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.2.5 Measuring the motor transition time V1 Introduction PID_3Step requires the motor transition time to be as accurate as possible for good controller results. The data in the actuator documentation contains average values for this type of actuator. The value for the specific actuator used may differ. You can measure the motor transition time during commissioning if you are using actuators with position feedback or endstop signals. The output value limits are not taken into consideration during the motor transition time measurement. The actuator can travel to the high or the low endstop. The motor transition time cannot be measured if neither position feedback nor endstop signals are available. Actuators with analog position feedback Proceed as follows to measure motor transition time with position feedback: Requirement Feedback or Feedback_PER has been selected in the basic settings and the signal has been connected. An online connection to the CPU has been established. 1. Select the "Use position feedback" check box. 2. Enter the position to which the actuator is to be moved in the "Target position" input field. The current position feedback (starting position) will be displayed. The difference between "Target position" and "Position feedback" must be at least 50% of the valid output value range. 3. Click the "Start transition time measurement" icon. Result The actuator is moved from the starting position to the target position. Time measurement starts immediately and ends when the actuator reaches the target position. The motor transition time is calculated according to the following equation: Motor transition time = (output value high limit - output value low limit) x Measuring time / AMOUNT (target position - starting position). The progress and status of transition time measurement are displayed. The transition time measured is saved in the instance data block on the CPU and displayed in the "Measured transition time" field. PID_3Step will change to "Inactive" mode once transition time measurement is complete. Note Click on the icon "Upload measured transition time" to load the motor transition time measured to the project. PID control 158 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 Actuators with endstop signals Proceed as follows to measure the transition time of actuators with endstop signals: Requirement The "Endstop signals" check box in the basic settings has been selected and Actuator_H and Actuator_L are connected. An online connection to the CPU has been established. Proceed as follows to measure motor transition time with endstop signals: 1. Select the "Use actuator endstop signals" check box. 2. Select the direction in which the actuator is to be moved. - Open - Close - Open The actuator is moved first to the high endstop, then to the low endstop and then back to the high endstop. - Close - Open - Close The actuator is moved first to the low endstop, then to the high endstop and then back to the low endstop. 3. Click the "Start transition time measurement" icon. Result The actuator is moved in the selected direction. Time measurement will start once the actuator has reached the first endstop and will end when the actuator reaches this endstop for the second time. The motor transition time is equal to the time measured divided by two. The progress and status of transition time measurement are displayed. The transition time measured is saved in the instance data block on the CPU and displayed in the "Measured transition time" field. PID_3Step will change to "Inactive" mode once transition time measurement is complete. Cancelling transition time measurement PID_3Step will change to "Inactive" mode immediately if you cancel transition time measurement. The actuator will stop being moved. You can reactive PID-3Step in the curve plotter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 159 Using PID_3Step 5.3 PID_3Step V1 5.3.3 Simulating PID_3Step V1 with PLCSIM Note Simulation with PLCSIM For the simulation with PLCSIM, the time behavior of the simulated PLC is not exactly identical to that of a "real" PLC. The actual cycle clock of a cyclic interrupt OB can have larger fluctuations with a simulated PLC than with "real" PLCs. In the standard configuration, PID_3Step determines the time between calls automatically and monitors them for fluctuations. For a simulation of PID_3Step with PLCSIM, for example, a sampling time error (ErrorBits = DW#16#00000800) can therefore be detected. This results in ongoing tuning being aborted. The response in automatic mode depends on the value of the ActivateRecoverMode tag. To prevent this from happening, you should configure PID_3Step for simulation with PLCSIM as follows: * CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE * CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE * CycleTime.Value: Assign the cycle clock of the calling cyclic interrupt OB in seconds to this tag. PID control 160 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.1 6 Technology object PID_Temp The PID_Temp technology object provides a continuous PID controller with integrated tuning. PID_Temp is especially designed for temperature control and is suited for heating or heating/cooling applications. Two outputs are available for this purpose, one each for heating and cooling. PID_Temp can also be used for other control tasks. PID_Temp is cascadable and can be used in manual or automatic mode. PID_Temp continuously acquires the measured process value within a control loop and compares it with the set setpoint. From the resulting control deviations, the instruction PID_Temp calculates the output value for heating and/or cooling which is used to adjust the process value to the setpoint. The output values for the PID controller consist of three actions: Proportional action The proportional action of the output value increases in proportion to the control deviation. Integral action The integral action of the output value increases until the control deviation has been balanced. Derivative action The derivative action increases with the rate of change of control deviation. The process value is corrected to the setpoint as quickly as possible. The derivative action will be reduced again if the rate of change of control deviation drops. The instruction PID_Temp calculates the proportional, integral and derivative parameters for your controlled system during "pretuning". "Fine tuning" can be used to tune the parameters further. You do not need to manually determine the parameters. Either a fixed cooling factor or two PID parameter sets can be used for heating-and-cooling applications. Additional information Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Configuring PID_Temp (Page 162) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 161 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.1 Basic settings 6.2.1.1 Introduction Configure the following properties of the "PID_Temp" technology object under "Basic settings" in the Inspector window or in the configuration window: Physical quantity Start-up behavior after reset Source and input of the setpoint (only in the Inspector window) Selection of the process value Source and input of the process value (only in the Inspector window) Selection of the heating output value Source and input of the heating output value (only in the Inspector window) Activation and selection of the cooling output value Source and input of the cooling output value (only in the Inspector window) Activation of PID_Temp as master or slave of a cascade Number of slaves Selection of the master (only in the Inspector window) Setpoint, process value, heating output value and cooling output value You can select the source and enter values or tags for the setpoint, process value, heating output value and cooling output value in the Inspector window of the programming editor. Select the source for each value: Instance DB: The value saved in the instance DB is used. The value must be updated by the user program in the instance DB. There should be no value at the instruction. Can be changed using HMI. Instruction: The value connected to the instruction is used. The value is written to the instance DB each time the instruction is called. Cannot be changed using HMI. PID control 162 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.1.2 Controller type Physical quantity Select the unit of measurement and physical quantity for the setpoint and the process value in the "Controller type" group. The setpoint and the process value are displayed in this unit. Startup characteristics 1. To switch to "Inactive"mode after CPU restart, clear the "Activate Mode after CPU restart"check box. To switch to the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter after CPU restart, select the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box. 2. In the "Set Mode to" drop-down list, select the mode that is to be enabled after a complete download to the device. After a complete "Download to device", PID_Temp starts in the selected operating mode. With each additional restart, PID_Temp starts in the mode that was last saved in Mode. When selecting pretuning or fine tuning, you also have to set or reset the Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableTuning tags in order to choose between tuning for heating and tuning for cooling. Example: You have selected the "Activate Mode after CPU restart" check box and the "Pretuning" entry in the "Set Mode to" list. After a complete "Download to device", PID_Temp starts in the "Pretuning" mode. If pretuning is still active, PID_Temp starts in "Pretuning" mode again after restart of the CPU (heating/cooling depends on the tags Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableCooling). If pretuning was successfully completed and automatic mode is active, PID_Temp starts in "Automatic mode" after restart of the CPU. 6.2.1.3 Setpoint Procedure Proceed as follows to define a fixed setpoint: 1. Select "Instance DB". 2. Enter a setpoint, e.g. 80 C. 3. Delete any entry in the instruction. Proceed as follows to define a variable setpoint: 1. Select "Instruction". 2. Enter the name of the REAL tag in which the setpoint is saved. Program-controlled assignment of various values to the REAL tag is possible, for example for the time-controlled change of the setpoint. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 163 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.1.4 Process value PID_Temp will scale the value of the analog input to the physical quantity if you use the analog input value directly. You will need to write a program for processing if you wish first to process the analog input value. The process value is, for example, not directly proportional to the value at the analog input. The processed process value must be in floating point format. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog input value without processing: 1. Select the entry "Input_PER" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the address of the analog input. Proceed as follows to use the processed process value in floating point format: 1. Select the entry "Input" in the drop-down list "Input". 2. Select "Instruction" as source. 3. Enter the name of the variable in which the processed process value is saved. 6.2.1.5 Heating and cooling output value The PID_Temp instruction provides a PID controller with integrated tuning for temperature processes. PID_Temp is suitable for heating or heating-and-cooling applications. PID_Temp provides the following output values. Your actuator will determine which output value you use. OutputHeat Heating output value (floating-point format): The output value for heating needs to be processed by the user program, for example, because of non-linear actuator response. OutputHeat_PER Analog heating output value: The actuator for heating is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10 V, 4...20 mA. OutputHeat_PWM Pulse-width modulated heating output value: The actuator for heating is controlled via a digital output. Pulse width modulation creates variable ON and OFF times. OutputCool Cooling output value (floating-point format): The output value for cooling needs to be processed by the user program, for example because of non-linear actuator response. OutputCool_PER Analog cooling output value: The actuator for cooling is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10 V, 4...20 mA. OutputCool_PWM Pulse-width modulated cooling output value: The actuator for cooling is controlled via a digital output. Pulse width modulation creates variable ON and OFF times. PID control 164 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp The cooling output is only available if it was activated via the "Activate cooling" check box. If the check box is cleared, the output value of the PID algorithm (PidOutputSum) is scaled and output at the outputs for heating. If the check box is selected, positive output values of the PID algorithm (PidOutputSum) are scaled and output at the outputs for heating. Negative output values of the PID algorithm are scaled and output at the outputs for cooling. You can choose between two methods for output value calculation at the output settings. Note Note: * The OutputHeat_PWM, OutputHeat_PER, OutputCool_PWM, OutputCool_PER outputs are only calculated if you select these correspondingly from the drop-down list. * The OutputHeat output is always calculated. * The OutputCool output is calculated if the check box for cooling is selected. * The "Activate cooling" check box is only available if the controller is not configured as a master in a cascade. Procedure Proceed as follows to use the analog output value: 1. Select the entry "OutputHeat_PER" or "OutputCool_PER" in the drop-down list "OutputHeat" or "OutputCool". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the analog output. Proceed as follows to use the pulse-width modulated output value: 1. Select the entry "OutputHeat_PWM" or "OutputCool_PWM" in the drop-down list "OutputHeat" or "OutputCool". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the address of the digital output. Proceed as follows to process the output value using the user program: 1. Select the entry "OutputHeat" or "OutputCool" in the drop-down list "OutputHeat" or "OutpuCool". 2. Select "Instruction". 3. Enter the name of the variable you are using to process the output value. 4. Transfer the processed output value to the actuator by means of an analog or digital CPU output. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 165 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.1.6 Cascade If a PID_Temp instance receives its setpoint from a higher-level master controller and outputs its output value in turn to a subordinate slave controller, this PID_Temp instance is both a master controller and a slave controller simultaneously. Both configurations listed below then have to be carried out for such a PID_Temp instance. This is the case, for example, for the middle PID_Temp instance in a cascade control system with three concatenated measured variables and three PID_Temp instances. Configuring a controller as master in a cascade A master controller defines the setpoint of a slave controller with its output. In order to use PID_Temp as master in a cascade, you have to deactivate the cooling in the basic settings. In order to configure this PID_Temp instance as a master controller in a cascade, activate the "Controller is master" check box. The selection of the output value for heating is set automatically to OutputHeat. OutputHeat_PWM and OutputHeat_PER cannot be used at a master in a cascade. Subsequently specify the number of directly subordinate slave controllers that receive their setpoint from this master controller. If no own scaling function is used when assigning the OutputHeat parameter of the master to the Setpoint parameter of the slave, it may be necessary to adapt the output value limits and the output scaling of the master to the setpoint/process value range of the slave. This can be done in the output settings of the master in the "OutputHeat / OutputCool" section. Configuring a controller as a slave in a cascade A slave controller receives its setpoint (Setpoint parameter) from the output of its master controller (OutputHeat parameter). In order to configure this PID_Temp instance as a slave controller in a cascade, activate the "Controller is slave" check box in the basic settings. Subsequently select the PID_Temp instance that is to be used as the master controller for this slave controller in the Inspector window of the programming editor. The Master and Setpoint parameters of the slave controller are interconnected with the selected master controller through this selection (the existing interconnections at these parameters are overwritten). This interconnection allows the exchange of information and the setpoint specification between master and slave. If required, the interconnection can be changed subsequently at the Setpoint parameter of the slave controller in order, for example, to insert an additional filter. The interconnection at the parameter Master may not be changed subsequently. The "Controller is master" check box has to be selected and the number of slaves has to be configured correctly at the selected master controller. The master controller has to be called before the slave controller in the same cyclic interrupt OB. Additional information Additional information about program creation, configuration and commissioning when PID_Temp is used in cascade control systems is available under Cascade control with PID_Temp (Page 195). PID control 166 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.2 Process value settings 6.2.2.1 Process value limits You must specify an appropriate absolute high limit and low limit for the process value as limit values for your controlled system. As soon as the process value violates these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0001h). Tuning is canceled when the process value limits are violated. You can specify how PID_Temp responds to errors in automatic mode in the output settings. 6.2.2.2 Process value scaling If you have configured the use of Input_PER in the basic settings, you will need to convert the value of the analog input into the physical quantity of the process value. The current configuration is displayed in the Input_PER display. Input_PER is scaled using a low and high value pair if the process value is directly proportional to the value of the analog input. Procedure To scale the process value, follow these steps: 1. Enter the low pair of values in the "Scaled low process value" and "Low" input fields. 2. Enter the high pair of values in the "Scaled high process value" and "High" input fields. Default settings for the value pairs are saved in the hardware configuration. Proceed as follows to use the value pairs from the hardware configuration: 1. Select the instruction PID_Temp in the programming editor. 2. Interconnect Input_PER with an analog input in the basic settings. 3. Click on the "Automatic setting" button in the process value settings. The existing values are overwritten with the values from the hardware configuration. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 167 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.3 Output settings 6.2.3.1 Basic settings of output Method for heating and cooling If cooling is activated in the basic settings, two methods are available for calculating the PID output value: PID parameter switching (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE): The output value calculation for cooling takes place by means of a separate PID parameter set. Based on the calculated output value and the control deviation, the PID algorithm decides whether the PID parameter for heating or cooling is used. This method is suitable if the heating and cooling actuators have different time responses and different gains. Pretuning and fine tuning for cooling are only available if this method is selected. Cooling factor (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE): Output value calculation for cooling is effected with the PID parameters for heating under consideration of the configurable cooling factor Config.CoolFactor. This method is suitable if the heating and cooling actuators have a similar time response but different gains. If this method is selected, pretuning and fine tuning for cooling as well as the PID parameter set for cooling are not available. You can only execute the tuning for heating. Cooling factor If the cooling factor is selected as the method for heating/cooling, this factor is used in the calculation of the output value for cooling. This allows different gains of heating and cooling actuators to be taken into account. The cooling factor is not set automatically or adjusted during tuning. You have to configure the correct cooling factor manually by using the ratio "Heating actuator gain/Cooling actuator gain". Example: Cooling factor = 2.0 means that the heating actuator gain is twice as high as the cooling actuator gain. The cooling factor is only effective and can only be changed if "Cooling factor" is selected as the method for heating/cooling. PID control 168 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp Reaction to error NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If you output "Current value while error is pending " or "Substitute output value while error is pending" in the event of an error, PID_Temp remains in automatic mode or in manual mode. This may cause a violation of the process value limits and damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. PID_Temp is preset so that the controller stays active in most cases in the event of an error. If errors occur frequently in controller mode, this default reaction has a negative effect on the control response. In this case, check the ErrorBits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. PID_Temp generates a programmable output value in response to an error: Zero (inactive) At all errors, PID_Temp switches to the "Inactive" operating mode and outputs the following: - 0.0 as PID output value (PidOutputSum) - 0.0 as output value for heating (OutputHeat) and output value for cooling (OutputCool) - 0 as analog output value for heating (OutputHeat_PER) and analog output value for cooling (OutputCool_PER) - FALSE as PWM output value for heating (OutputHeat_PWM) and PWM output value for cooling (OutputCool_PWM) This is independent of the configured output value limits and the scaling. The controller is only reactivated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. Current value while error is pending The error response depends on the error occurring and the operating mode. If one or more of the following errors occur in automatic mode, PID_Temp stays in automatic mode: - 0000001h: The Input parameter is outside the process value limits. - 0000800h: Sampling time error - 0040000h: Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. - 8000000h: Error during the calculation of the PID parameters. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 169 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp If one or more of the following errors occur in automatic mode, PID_Temp switches to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode and outputs the last valid PID output value (PidOutputSum): - 0000002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. - 0000200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. - 0000400h: Calculation of output value failed. - 0001000h: Invalid value at Setpoint or SubstituteSetpoint parameter. The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from the PID output value are produced by the configured output scaling. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. If an error occurs during manual mode, PID_Temp remains in manual mode and continues to use the manual value as the PID output value. If the manual value is invalid, the configured substitute output value is used. If the manual value and substitute output value are invalid, the low limit of the PID output value for heating (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) is used. If the following error occurs during pretuning or fine tuning, PID_Temp remains in active mode: - 0000020h: Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. When any other error occurs, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the mode from which tuning was started. Substitute output value while error is pending PID_Temp behaves as described at "Current value while error is pending", but outputs the configured substitute output value (SubstituteOutput) as a PID output value (PidOutputSum) in "Substitute output value with error monitoring" operating mode. The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from the PID output value are produced by the configured output scaling. In the case of controllers with activated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), enter: - A positive substitute output value to output the value at the outputs for heating. - A negative substitute output value to output the value at the outputs for cooling. If the following error occurs, PID_Temp stays in "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode and outputs the low limit of the PID output value for heating (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit): - 0020000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. PID control 170 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.3.2 Output value limits and scaling Depending on the operating mode, the PID output value (PidOutputSum) is calculated automatically by the PID algorithm or by the manual value (ManualValue) or the configured substitute output value (SubstituteOutput). The PID output value is limited depending on the configuration: If the cooling is deactivated in the basic settings (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE), the value is limited to the high limit of the PID output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit) and the low limit of the PID output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit). You can configure both limits at the horizontal axis of the scaling characteristic line in the "OutputHeat / OutputCool" section. These are displayed in the "OutputHeat_PWM / OutputCool_PWM" and "OutputHeat_PER / OutputCool_PER" sections, but cannot be changed. If the cooling is activated in the basic settings (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the value is limited to the high limit of the PID output value (Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit) and the low limit of the PID output value (cooling) (Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit). You can configure both limits at the horizontal axis of the scaling characteristic line in the "OutputHeat / OutputCool" section. These are displayed in the "OutputHeat_PWM / OutputCool_PWM" and "OutputHeat_PER / OutputCool_PER" sections, but cannot be changed. The low limit of the PID output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) and the high limit of the PID output value (cooling) (Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit) cannot be changed and have to be assigned the value 0.0. The PID output value is scaled and output at the outputs for heating and cooling. Scaling can be specified separately for each output and is specified across 2 value pairs each, consisting of a limit value of the PID output value and a scaling value: Output Value pair Parameter OutputHeat Value pair 1 PID output value high limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Scaled high output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.UpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value low limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Scaled low output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.LowerScaling OutputHeat_PWM Value pair 1 PID output value high limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Scaled high PWM output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PwmUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value low limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Scaled low PWM output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PwmLowerScaling PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 171 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp Output Value pair Parameter OutputHeat_PER Value pair 1 PID output value high limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Scaled high analog output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PerUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value low limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Scaled low analog output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PerLowerScaling OutputCool Value pair 1 PID output value low limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Scaled high output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.UpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value high limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Scaled low output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.LowerScaling OutputCool_PWM Value pair 1 PID output value low limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Scaled high PWM output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PwmUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value high limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Scaled low PWM output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PwmLowerScaling OutputCool_PER Value pair 1 PID output value low limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Scaled high analog output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PerUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value high limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Scaled low analog output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PerLowerScaling The low limit of PID output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) has to have the value 0.0, if the cooling is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). The high limit of PID output value (cooling) (Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit) must always have the value 0.0. PID control 172 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp Example: Output scaling when the OutputHeat output is used (cooling deactivated. The low limit of PID output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) may be unequal to 0.0): Example: Output scaling when the OutputHeat_PWM and OutputCool_PER outputs are used (cooling activated. The low limit of PID output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) must be 0.0): With the exception of the "Inactive" operating mode, the value at an output always lies between its scaled high output value and the scaled low output value, for example for OutputHeat always between the scaled high output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.UpperScaling) and the scaled low output value (heating) (Config.Output.Heat.LowerScaling). If you want to limit the value at the associated output, you therefore have to adapt these scaling values as well. You can configure the scaling values of an output at the vertical axes of the scaling characteristic line. Each output has two separate scaling values. These can only be changed for OutputHeat_PWM, OutputCool_PWM, OutputHeat_PER and OutputCool_PER if the corresponding output is selected in the basic settings. The cooling has to be activated additionally in the basic settings at all the outputs for cooling. The trend view in the commissioning dialog box only records the values of OutputHeat and OutputCool, irrespective of the selected output in the basic settings. Therefore, if necessary, adapt the scaling values for OutputHeat or OutputCool if you use OutputHeat_PWM or OutputHeat_PER or OutputCool_PWM or OutputCool_PER and want to use the trend view in the commissioning dialog. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 173 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.4 Advanced settings 6.2.4.1 Process value monitoring Configure a warning high and low limit for the process value in the "Process value monitoring" configuration window. If one of the warning limits is exceeded or undershot during operation, a warning is displayed at the PID_Temp instruction: At the InputWarning_H output parameter if the warning high limit has been exceeded At the InputWarning_L output parameter if the warning low limit has been undershot The warning limits must be within the process value high and low limits. The process value high and low limits are used if you do not enter values. Example Process value high limit = 98 C; warning high limit = 90 C Warning low limit = 10 C; process value low limit = 0 C PID_Temp will respond as follows: Process value InputWarning_H InputWarning_L ErrorBits > 98 C TRUE FALSE 0001h 98 C and > 90 C TRUE FALSE 0000h 90 C and 10 C FALSE FALSE 0000h < 10 C and 0 C FALSE TRUE 0000h < 0 C FALSE TRUE 0001h You can configure the response of PID_Temp when the process value high limit or low limit is violated in the output settings. PID control 174 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp 6.2.4.2 PWM limits The PID output value PidOutputSum is scaled and transformed via a pulse width modulation into a pulse train that is output at the output parameter OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM. The "Sampling time of PID algorithm" represents the time between two calculations of the PID output value. The sampling time is used as time period of the pulse width modulation. During heating, the PID output value is always calculated in the "Sampling time of PID algorithm for heating". Calculation of the PID output value during cooling depends on the type of cooling selected in "Basic settings Output": If the cooling factor is used, the "Sampling time of PID algorithm for heating" applies. If the PID parameter switching is used, the "Sampling time of PID algorithm for cooling" applies. OutputHeat_PWM and OutputCool_PWM are output in the sampling time PID_Temp (corresponds to the cycle time of the calling OB). The PID algorithm sampling time for heating or cooling is determined during pretuning or fine tuning. If you set the PID parameters manually, you will also need to configure the PID algorithm sampling time for heating or cooling. The PID_Temp sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The pulse duration is proportional to the PID output value and is always an integer multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time. Example for OutputHeat_PWM PID_Temp sampling time PID algorithm sampling time for heating Pulse duration Break time PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 175 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp The "Minimum ON time" and the "Minimum OFF time" can be set separately for heating and cooling, rounded to an integer multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time. A pulse or a break is never shorter than the minimum ON or OFF time. The inaccuracies this causes are added up and compensated in the next cycle. Example for OutputHeat_PWM PID_Temp sampling time = 100 ms PID algorithm sampling time = 1000 ms Minimum ON time = 200 ms The PID output value PidOutputSum amounts to 15% constantly. The smallest pulse that PID_Temp can output corresponds to 20%. In the first cycle, no pulse is output. In the second cycle, the pulse not output in the first cycle is added to the pulse of the second cycle. PID_Temp sampling time PID algorithm sampling time for heating Minimum ON time In order to minimize operation frequency and conserve the actuator, extend the minimum ON and OFF times. If you have selected OutputHeat/OutputCool or OutputHeat_PER/OutputCool_PER as the output in the basic settings, the minimum ON time and the minimum OFF time are not evaluated and cannot be changed. PID control 176 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp If the "Sampling time of PID algorithm" (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle or Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle) and thus the period duration of the pulse width modulation is very high when OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM is used, you can specify a deviating shorter period duration at the parameters Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode or Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode in order to improve smoothness of the process value (see also AUTOHOTSPOT). Note The minimum ON and OFF times only affect the output parameters OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM and are not used for any pulse generators integrated in the CPU. 6.2.4.3 PID parameters The PID parameters are displayed in the "PID Parameters" configuration window. If cooling is activated in the basic settings and PID parameter switching is selected as the method for heating/cooling in the output settings, two parameter sets are available: One for heating and one for cooling. In this case, the PID algorithm decides on the basis of the calculated output value and the control deviation whether the PID parameters for heating or cooling are used. If cooling is deactivated or the cooling factor is selected as the method for heating/cooling, the parameter set for heating is always used. During tuning, the PID parameters are adapted to the controlled system with the exception of the dead zone width that has to be configured manually. Note The currently active PID parameters are located in the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Change the currently active PID parameters only in "Inactive" mode online to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. If you want to change the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" or "Manual mode" online, change the PID parameters in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and apply these changes with LoadBackUp = TRUE to the Retain.CtrlParams structure. Online changes to the PID parameters in "Automatic mode" can result in jumps at the output value. PID_Temp is a PIDT1 controller with anti-windup and weighting of the proportional and derivative actions. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 177 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation (control zone and dead zone deactivated): Symbol Description Associated parameters of the PID_Temp instruction y Output value of the PID algorithm - Kp Proportional gain Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Gain Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Gain CoolFactor s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.PWeighting Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.PWeighting w Setpoint CurrentSetpoint x Process value ScaledInput TI Integral action time Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Ti TD Derivative action time a Coefficient for derivative-action delay Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.TdFiltRatio (Derivative delay T1 = a x TD) Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.TdFiltRatio Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Ti Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Td Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Td c Derivative action weighting Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.DWeighting Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.DWeighting DeadZone Dead zone width Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.DeadZone Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.DeadZone ControlZone Control zone width Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.ControlZone Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.ControlZone PID control 178 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp The diagram below illustrates the integration of the parameters into the PID algorithm: All PID parameters are retentive. If you enter the PID parameters manually, you must completely download PID_Temp (Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44)). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 179 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp PID_Temp block diagram The following block diagram shows how the PID algorithm is integrated in the PID_Temp. PID control 180 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp Proportional gain The value specifies the proportional gain of the controller. PID_Temp does not operate with a negative proportional gain and only supports the normal control direction, meaning that an increase in the process value is achieved by an increase in the PID output value (PidOutputSum). Integral action time The integral action time determines the time behavior of the integral action. The integral action is deactivated with integral action time = 0.0. When the integral action time is changed from a different value to 0.0 online in "Automatic mode", the previous integral action is deleted and the output value jumps. Derivative action time The derivative action time determines the time behavior of the derivative action. Derivative action is deactivated with derivative action time = 0.0. Derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. Proportional action weighting The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. Derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 181 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp PID algorithm sampling time The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of "PID algorithm" represents the time between two calculations of the PID output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time (cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB). All other functions of PID_Temp are executed at every call. If you use OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM, the sampling time of the PID algorithm is used as the period duration of the pulse width modulation. The accuracy of the output signal is determined by the ratio of the PID algorithm sampling time to the cycle time of the OB. The cycle time should be no more than a tenth of the PID algorithm sampling time. The sampling time of the PID algorithm that is used as the period duration of the pulse width modulation at OutputCool_PWM depends on the method for heating/cooling selected in "Basic settings Output": If the cooling factor is used, the "sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating" also applies to OutputCool_PWM. If PID parameter switching is used, the "sampling time PID algorithm for cooling" applies as the period duration for OutputCool_PWM. If the sampling time of the PID algorithm and thus the period duration of the pulse width modulation is very high when OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM is used, you can specify a deviating shorter period duration at the parameters Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode or Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode in order to improve smoothness of the process value. Dead zone width If the process value is affected by noise, the noise can also have an effect on the output value. The output value may fluctuate considerably when controller gain is high and the derivative action is activated. If the process value lies within the dead zone around the setpoint, the control deviation is suppressed so that the PID algorithm does not react and unnecessary fluctuations of the output value are reduced. The dead zone width for heating or cooling is not set automatically during tuning. You have to correctly configure the dead zone width manually. The dead zone is deactivated by setting the dead zone width = 0.0. When the dead zone is switched on, the result can be a permanent control deviation (deviation between setpoint and process value). This can have a negative effect on fine tuning. If cooling is activated in the basic settings and PID parameter switching is selected as the method for heating/cooling in the output settings, the dead zone lies between "Setpoint dead zone width (heating)" and "Setpoint + dead zone width (cooling)". If cooling is deactivated in the basic settings or the cooling factor is used, the dead zone lies symmetrically between "Setpoint - dead zone width (heating)" and "Setpoint + dead zone width (heating)". PID control 182 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp If values not equal to 1.0 are configured for the proportional action weighting or the derivative action weighting, setpoint changes even within the dead zone affect the output value. Process value changes within the dead zone do not affect the output value, regardless of the weighting. Dead zone with deactivated cooling or cooling factor (left) or activated cooling and PID parameter switching (right). The x / horizontal axis displays the control deviation = setpoint process value. The y / vertical axis shows the output signal of the dead zone that is passed to the PID algorithm. Control zone width If the process value exits the control zone around the setpoint, the minimum or maximum output value is output. This means that the process value reaches the setpoint faster. If the process value lies within the control zone around the setpoint, the output value is calculated by the PID algorithm. The control zone width for heating or cooling is only set automatically during the pretuning, if "PID (temperature)" is selected as the controller structure for cooling or heating. The control zone is deactivated by setting the control zone width = 3.402822e+38. If cooling is deactivated in the basic settings or the cooling factor is used, the control zone lies symmetrically between "Setpoint - control zone width (heating)" and "Setpoint + control zone width (heating)". If cooling is activated in the basic settings and PID parameter switching is selected as the method for heating/cooling in the output settings, the control zone lies between "Setpoint control zone width (heating)" and "Setpoint + control zone width (cooling)". PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 183 Using PID_Temp 6.2 Configuring PID_Temp Control zone with deactivated cooling or cooling factor. Control zone with activated cooling and PID parameter switching. Rule for tuning Select whether PI or PID parameters are to be calculated in the "Controller structure" dropdown list. You can specify the rules for tuning for heating and for tuning for cooling separately. PID (temperature) Calculates PID parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. Pretuning is designed for temperature processes and results in a slower and rather asymptotic control response with lower overshoot than with the "PID" option. Fine tuning is identical to the "PID" option. The control zone width is determined automatically during pretuning only if this option is selected. PID Calculates PID parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. PI Calculates PI parameters during pretuning and fine tuning. User-defined The drop-down list displays "User-defined" if you have configured different controller structures for pretuning and fine tuning via a user program or the parameter view. PID control 184 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 6.3.1 Commissioning The commissioning window helps you commission the PID controller. You can monitor the values for the setpoint, process value and the output values for heating and cooling along the time axis in the trend view. The following functions are supported in the commissioning window: Controller pretuning Controller fine tuning Use fine tuning for fine adjustments to the PID parameters. Monitoring the current closed-loop control in the trend view Testing the controlled system by specifying a manual PID output value and a substitute setpoint Saving the actual values of the PID parameters to an offline project. All functions require an online connection to the CPU. The online connection to the CPU is established, if it does not exist already, and operation of the commissioning window is enabled by means of the "Monitor all" or "Start" buttons of the trend view. Operation of the trend view Select the desired sampling time in the "Sampling time" drop-down list. All the values of the trend view are updated in the selected sampling time. Click the "Start" icon in the Measurement group if you want to use the trend view. Value recording is started. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output values for heating and cooling are entered in the trend view. Click the "Stop" icon if you want to end the trend view. The values recorded in the trend view can continue to be analyzed. Closing the commissioning window will terminate recording in the trend view and delete the recorded values. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 185 Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 6.3.2 Pretuning The pretuning determines the process response to a jump change of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The tuned PID parameters are calculated as a function of the maximum slope and dead time of the controlled system. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. This is most likely the case in operating modes "Inactive" or "Manual mode". The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. PID_Temp offers different pretuning types depending on the configuration: Pretuning heating A jump is output at the output value heating, the PID parameters for heating are calculated and then the setpoint is used as the control variable in automatic mode. Pretuning heating and cooling A jump is output at the output value heating. As soon as the process value is close to the setpoint, a jump change is output at the output value cooling. The PID parameters for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat structure) and cooling (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool structure) are calculated and then the setpoint is used as the control variable in automatic mode. Pretuning cooling A jump is output at the output value cooling. The PID parameters for cooling are calculated and then the setpoint is used as the control variable in automatic mode. If you want to tune the PID parameters for heating and cooling, you can expect a better control response with "Pretuning heating" followed by "Pretuning cooling" rather than with "Pretuning heating and cooling". However, carrying out pretuning in two steps takes more time. General requirements The PID_Temp instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE PID_Temp is in one of the following modes: "Inactive", "Manual mode", or "Automatic mode". The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see Process value monitoring (Page 174) configuration). PID control 186 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp Requirements for pretuning heating The difference between setpoint and process value is greater than 30% of the difference between process value high limit and process value low limit. The distance between the setpoint and the process value is greater than 50% of the setpoint. The setpoint is greater than the process value. Requirements for pretuning heating and cooling The cooling output in the "Basic settings" is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). The PID parameter switching in the "Basic settings of output value" is activated (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). The difference between setpoint and process value is greater than 30% of the difference between process value high limit and process value low limit. The distance between the setpoint and the process value is greater than 50% of the setpoint. The setpoint is greater than the process value. Requirements for pretuning cooling The cooling output in the "Basic settings" is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). The PID parameter switching in the "Basic settings of output value" is activated (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). "Pretuning heating" or "Pretuning heating and cooling" has been carried out successfully (PIDSelfTune.SUT.ProcParHeatOk = TRUE). The same setpoint should be used for all tunings. The difference between setpoint and process value is smaller than 5% of the difference between process value high limit and process value low limit. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 187 Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp Procedure To perform pretuning, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_Temp > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Activate the "Monitor all" button or start the trend view. An online connection will be established. 3. Select the desired pretuning entry from the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. 4. Click the "Start" icon. - Pretuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon when the progress bar ("Progress" tag) has not changed for a long period and it is to be assumed that the tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. Result If pretuning was performed without an error message, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_Temp switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Temp responds with the configured reaction to errors. PID control 188 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 6.3.3 Fine tuning Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are tuned for the operating point from the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. The PID parameters are recalculated from the results. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_Temp automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The PID parameters are backed up before being recalculated. PID_Temp offers different fine tuning types depending on the configuration: Fine tuning heating: PID_Temp generates an oscillation of the process value with periodic changes at the output value heating and calculates the PID parameters for heating. Fine tuning cooling: PID_Temp generates an oscillation of the process value with periodic changes at the output value cooling and calculates the PID parameters for cooling. Temporary tuning offset for heating/cooling controllers If PID_Temp is used as a heating/cooling controller (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint has to fulfill the following requirements so that process value oscillation can be generated and fine tuning can be carried out successfully: Positive PID output value for fine tuning heating Negative PID output value for fine tuning cooling If this condition is not fulfilled, you can specify a temporary offset for fine tuning that is output at the opposing output. Offset for cooling output (PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetCool) with fine tuning heating. Before starting tuning, enter a negative tuning offset cooling that is smaller than the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint in the stationary state. Offset for heating output (PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetHeat) at fine tuning cooling Before starting tuning, enter a positive tuning offset heating that is greater than the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint in the stationary state. The defined offset is balanced by the PID algorithm so that the process value remains at the setpoint. The height of the offset allows the PID output value to be adapted correspondingly so that it fulfills the requirement mentioned above. To avoid larger overshoots of the process value when defining the offset, it can also be increased in several steps. If PID_Temp exits the fine tuning mode, the tuning offset is reset. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 189 Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp Example: Specification of an offset for fine tuning cooling Without offset - Setpoint = Process value (ScaledInput) = 80 C - PID output value (PidOutputSum) = 30.0 - Output value heating (OutputHeat) = 30.0 - Output value cooling (OutputCool) = 0.0 Oscillation of the process value around the setpoint cannot be generated with the cooling output alone. Fine tuning would fail here. With offset for heating output (PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetHeat) = 80.0 - Setpoint = Process value (ScaledInput) = 80 C - PID output value (PidOutputSum) = -50.0 - Output value heating (OutputHeat) = 80.0 - Output value cooling (OutputCool) = -50.0 Thanks to the specification of an offset for the heating output, the cooling output can now generate oscillation of the process value around the setpoint. Fine tuning can now be carried out successfully. General requirements The PID_Temp instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. ManualEnable = FALSE Reset = FALSE The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits (see "Process value settings" configuration). The control loop has stabilized at the operating point. The operating point is reached when the process value corresponds to the setpoint. When the dead zone is switched on, the result can be a permanent control deviation (deviation between setpoint and actual value). This can have a negative effect on fine tuning. No disturbances are expected. PID_Temp is in inactive mode, automatic mode or manual mode. Requirements for fine tuning heating Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE Cool.EnableTuning = FALSE If PID_Temp is configured as a heating-and-cooling controller (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the heating output has to be active at the operating point where tuning is to be carried out. PidOutputSum > 0.0 (see tuning offset) PID control 190 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp Requirements for fine tuning cooling Heat.EnableTuning = FALSE Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE The cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). The PID parameter switching is activated (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). The cooling output has to be active at the operating point where tuning is to be carried out. PidOutputSum < 0.0 (see tuning offset) Process depends on initial situation Fine tuning can be started from the following operating modes: "Inactive", "automatic mode", or "manual mode". Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started from: Automatic mode with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = FALSE (default) Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_Temp controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. Inactive, manual mode or automatic mode with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = TRUE An attempt is made to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value (two-point control): - With minimum or maximum output value heating at fine tuning heating. - With minimum or maximum output value cooling for fine tuning cooling. This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning starts when the setpoint is reached. If the setpoint cannot be reached, PID_Temp does not automatically abort tuning. Procedure To perform fine tuning, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_Temp > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Activate the "Monitor all" button or start the trend view. An online connection will be established. 3. Select the desired fine tuning entry from the "Tuning mode" drop-down list. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 191 Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 4. If required (see tuning offset), specify a tuning offset and wait until the stationary state is reached again. 5. Click the "Start" icon. - The process of fine tuning is started. - The "Status" field displays the current steps and any errors that may have occurred. The progress bar indicates the progress of the current step. Note Click the "Stop" icon in the "Tuning mode" group if the progress bar ("Progress" tag) has not changed for a long period and it is to be assumed that the tuning function is blocked. Check the configuration of the technology object and, if necessary, restart controller tuning. In the following phases in particular, tuning is not aborted automatically if the setpoint cannot be reached. * "Attempting to reach setpoint for heating with two-point control." * "Attempting to reach setpoint for cooling with two-point control." Result If fine tuning was performed without errors, the PID parameters have been tuned. PID_Temp switches to automatic mode and uses the tuned parameters. The tuned PID parameters will be retained during power OFF and a restart of the CPU. If errors occurred during fine tuning, PID_Temp responds with the configured response to errors. PID control 192 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 6.3.4 "Manual" mode The following section describes how you can use "Manual mode" in the commissioning window of the "PID_Temp" technology object. Manual mode is also possible when an error is pending. Requirement The "PID_Temp" instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. An online connection to the CPU has been established. The CPU is in "RUN" mode. Procedure If you want to test the controlled system by specifying a manual value, use "Manual mode" in the commissioning window. To define a manual value, follow these steps: 1. Double-click the "PID_Temp > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Activate the "Monitor all" button or start the trend view. An online connection will be established. 3. Select the "Manual mode" check box in the "Online status of controller" area. PID_Temp operates in manual mode. The most recent current output value remains in effect. 4. Enter the manual value in the editable field as a % value. If cooling is activated in the basic settings, enter the manual value as follows: - Enter a positive manual value to output the value at the outputs for heating. - Enter a negative manual value to output the value at the outputs for cooling. 5. Click the icon. Result The manual value is written to the CPU and immediately goes into effect. Clear the "Manual mode" check box if the output value is to be specified again by the PID controller. The switchover to automatic mode is bumpless. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 193 Using PID_Temp 6.3 Commissioning PID_Temp 6.3.5 Substitute setpoint The following section describes how you can use the substitute setpoint in the commissioning window of the "PID_Temp" technology object. Requirement The "PID_Temp" instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. An online connection to the CPU has been established. The CPU is in "RUN" mode. Procedure If you want to use a different value as the setpoint than that specified at the "Setpoint" parameter (for example to tune a slave in a cascade), use the substitute setpoint in the commissioning window. Proceed as follows to specify a substitute setpoint: 1. Double-click the "PID_Temp > Commissioning" entry in the project tree. 2. Activate the "Monitor all" button or start the trend view. An online connection will be established. 3. Select the "Subst.Setpoint" check box in the "Online status of controller" section. The substitute setpoint (SubstituteSetpoint tag) is initialized with the most recently updated setpoint and now used. 4. Enter the substitute setpoint in the editable field. 5. Click the icon. Result The substitute setpoint is written to the CPU and immediately goes into effect. Clear the "Subst.Setpoint" check box if the value at the "Setpoint" parameter is to be used again as setpoint. The switchover is not bumpless. 6.3.6 Cascade commissioning Information about cascade commissioning with PID_Temp is available under Commissioning (Page 201). PID control 194 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp 6.4.1 Introduction In cascade control, several control loops are nested within each other. In the process, slaves receive their setpoint (Setpoint) from the output value (OutputHeat) of the respective higherlevel master. A prerequisite for establishing a cascade control system is that the controlled system can be divided into subsystems, each with its own measured variable. Setpoint specification for the controlled variable is carried out at the outmost master. The output value of the innermost slave is applied to the actuator and thus acts on the controlled system. The following major advantages result from the use of a cascade control system in comparison with a single-loop control system: Thanks to the additional subordinate control loops, disturbances which occur there are corrected quickly. Their influence on the controlled variable is reduced considerably. The disturbance behavior is thus improved. The subordinate control loops act in linearizing form. The negative effects of such nonlinearities on the controlled variable are thus moderated. PID_Temp offers the following functionality especially for use in cascade control systems: Specification of a substitute setpoint Exchange of status information between master and slave (for example, current operating mode) Different Anti-Wind-Up modes (response of the master to limitation of its slave) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 195 Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp Example The following block diagram shows a cascade control system with PID_Temp using the simplified example of a chocolate melting unit: The PID_Temp_1 master compares the process value of the chocolate temperature (TempChocolate) with the setpoint specification by the user at the Setpoint parameter. Its output value OutputHeat forms the setpoint of the slave PID_Temp_2. PID_Temp_2 attempts to regulate the process value of the water-bath temperature (TempWater) to this setpoint. The output value of PID_Temp_2 acts directly on the actuator of the controlled system (heating of the water bath) and thus influences the water-bath temperature. The water-bath temperature in turn has an effect on the chocolate temperature. FAQ For more information, see the following FAQs in the Siemens Industry Online Support: Entry ID 103526819 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103526819) See also Program creation (Page 197) PID control 196 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp 6.4.2 Program creation Observe the following points during program creation: Number of PID_Temp instances The number of different PID_Temp instances called up in a cyclic interrupt OB has to agree with the number of concatenated measured variables in the process. There are two concatenated measured variables in the example: TempChocolate and TempWater. Therefore two PID_Temp instances are required. Call sequence A master has to be called before its slaves in the same cyclic interrupt OB. The outermost master at which the user setpoint is specified is called first. The slave whose setpoint is specified by the outermost master is called next, etc. The innermost slave that acts on the actuator of the process with its output value is called last. In the example, PID_Temp_1 is called before PID_Temp_2. Interconnection of the measured variables The outermost master is interconnected with the outermost measured variable that is to be regulated to the user setpoint. The innermost slave is interconnected with the innermost measured variable that is influenced directly by the actuator. Interconnection of the measured variables with PID_Temp is carried out with the parameters Input or Input_PER. In the example, the outermost measured variable TempChocolate is interconnected with PID_Temp_1 and the innermost measured variable TempWater with PID_Temp_2. Interconnection of the output value of the master to the setpoint of the slave The output value (OutputHeat) of a master has to be assigned to the setpoint (Setpoint) of its slave. This interconnection can be carried out in the programming editor or automatically in the Inspector window of the slave in the basic settings via the selection of the master. If required, you can insert your own filter or scaling functions, for example in order to adapt the output value range of the master to the setpoint/process value range of the slave. In the example, OutputHeat of PID_Temp_1 is assigned to Setpoint of PID_Temp_2. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 197 Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp Interconnection of the interface for information exchange between master and slave The "Slave" parameter of a master has to be assigned to the "Master" parameter of all its directly subordinate slaves (which receive their setpoint from this master). The assignment should be carried out via the interface of the slave in order to allow the interconnection of a master with multiple slaves and the display of the interconnection in the Inspector window of the slave in the basic settings. This interconnection can be carried out in the programming editor or automatically in the Inspector window of the slave in the basic settings via the selection of the master. The Anti-Wind-Up functionality and the evaluation of the slave operating modes at the master can only function correctly if this interconnection is carried out. In the example, the "Slave" parameter of PID_Temp_1 is assigned to the "Master" parameter of PID_Temp_2. Program code of the example using SCL (without assignment of the output value of the slave to the actuator): "PID_Temp_1"(Input:="TempChocolate"); "PID_Temp_2"(Input:="TempWater", Master := "PID_Temp_1".Slave, Setpoint := "PID_Temp_1".OutputHeat); See also PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode tag (Page 458) PID control 198 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp 6.4.3 Configuration You can carry out the configuration via your user program, the configuration editor or the Inspector window of the PID_Temp call. When using PID_Temp in a cascade control system, ensure the correct configuration of the settings specified below. If a PID_Temp instance receives its setpoint from a superior master controller and outputs its output value in turn to a subordinate slave controller, this PID_Temp instance is both a master controller and a slave controller simultaneously. Both configurations listed below have to be carried out for such a PID_Temp instance. This is the case, for example, for the middle PID_Temp instance in a cascade control system with three concatenated measured variables and three PID_Temp instances. Configuration of a master Setting in the configuration editor or Inspector window DB parameter Explanation Basic settings Cascade: Config.Cascade.IsMaster = TRUE Activates this controller as a master in a cascade Config.Cascade.CountSlaves Number of directly subordinate slaves that receive their setpoint directly from this master Config.Output.Heat.Select = 0 The master only uses the output parameter OutputHeat. Activate "Controller is master" check box Basic settings Cascade: Number of slaves Basic settings Input/output parameters: Selection of the output value (heating) = OutputHeat Basic settings Input/output parameters: OutputHeat_PWM and OutputHeat_PER are deactivated. Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE The cooling has to be deactivated at a master. Clear "Activate cooling" check box PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 199 Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp Setting in the configuration editor or Inspector window DB parameter Explanation Output settings Output limits and scaling OutputHeat / OutputCool: Config.Output.Heat .PidLowerLimit, PID output value low limit (heating), PID output value high limit (heating), Scaled low output value (heating), Scaled high output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat .PidUpperLimit, If no own scaling function is used when assigning OutputHeat of the master to Setpoint of the slave, it may be necessary to adapt the output value limits and the output scaling of the master to the setpoint/process value range of the slave. Config.Output.Heat .LowerScaling, Config.Output.Heat .UpperScaling This tag is not available in the Inspector Config.Cascade window or in the functional view of the .AntiWindUpMode configuration editor. You can change it via the parameter view of the configuration editor. The Anti-Wind-Up mode determines how the integral action of this master is treated if directly subordinate slaves reach their output value limits. Options are: * AntiWindUpMode = 0: The AntiWindUp functionality is deactivated. The master does not react to the limitation of its slaves. * AntiWindUpMode = 1 (default): The integral action of the master is reduced in the relationship "Slaves in limitation/Number of slaves". This reduces the effects of the limitation on the control behavior. * AntiWindUpMode = 2: The integral action of the master is held as soon as a slave is in limitation. Configuration of a slave Setting in the configuration editor or Inspector window DB parameter Explanation Basic settings Cascade: Config.Cascade.IsSlave = TRUE Activates this controller as a slave in a cascade Select the "Controller is slave" check box PID control 200 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp 6.4.4 Commissioning After compiling and loading of the program, you can start commissioning of the cascade control system. Begin with the innermost slave at commissioning (implementation of tuning or change to automatic mode with existing PID parameters) and continue outwards until the outermost master has been reached. In the above example, commissioning starts with PID_Temp_2 and is continued with PID_Temp_1. Tuning the slave Tuning of PID_Temp requires a constant setpoint. Therefore, activate the substitute setpoint of a slave (SubstituteSetpoint and SubstituteSetpointOn tags) to tune the slave or set the associated master to manual mode with a corresponding manual value. This ensures that the setpoint of the slave remains constant during tuning. Tuning the master In order for a master to influence the process or to carry out tuning, all the downstream slaves have to be in automatic mode and their substitute setpoint has to be deactivated. A master evaluates these conditions through the interface for information exchange between master and slave (Master parameter and Slave parameter) and displays the current state at the AllSlaveAutomaticState and NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint tags. Corresponding status messages are output in the commissioning editor. Status message in the commissioning editor of the master DB parameter of the master One or more slaves are not in automat- AllSlaveAutomaticState = ic mode. FALSE, NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint = TRUE One or more slaves have activated the substitute setpoint. AllSlaveAutomaticState = TRUE, NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint = FALSE One or more slaves are not in automat- AllSlaveAutomaticState = ic mode and have activated the substi- FALSE, tute setpoint. NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint = FALSE Correction First, carry out commissioning of all downstream slaves. Ensure that the following conditions are fulfilled before carrying out tuning or activating manual mode or automatic mode of the master: * All downstream slaves are in automatic mode (state = 3). * All downstream slaves have deactivated the substitute setpoint (SubstituteSetpointOn = FALSE). If pretuning or fine tuning is started for a master, PID_Temp aborts tuning in the following cases and displays an error with ErrorBits = DW#16#0200000: One or more slaves are not in automatic mode (AllSlaveAutomaticState = FALSE) One or more slaves have activated the substitute setpoint (NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint = FALSE). The subsequent operating mode changeover depends on ActivateRecoverMode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 201 Using PID_Temp 6.4 Cascade control with PID_Temp 6.4.5 Substitute setpoint In order to specify a setpoint, PID_Temp offers a substitute setpoint at the SubstituteSetpoint tag in addition to the Setpoint parameter. This can be activated by setting SubstituteSetpointOn = TRUE or by selecting the corresponding check box in the commissioning editor. The substitute setpoint allows you to specify the setpoint temporarily directly at the slave, for example during commissioning or tuning. In this case, the interconnection of the output value of the master with the setpoint of the slave that is required for normal operation of the cascade control system does not have to be changed in the program In order for a master to influence the process or to carry out tuning, the substitute setpoint has to be deactivated at all downstream slaves. You can monitor the currently effective setpoint as it is used by the PID algorithm for calculation at the CurrentSetpoint tag. 6.4.6 Operating modes and fault response The master or slave of a PID_Temp instance does not change the operating mode of this PID_Temp instance. If a fault occurs at one of its slaves, the master remains in its current operating mode. If a fault occurs at its master, the slave remains in its current operating mode. However, further operation of the slave then depends on the fault and the configured fault response of the master since the output value of the master is used as the setpoint of the slave: If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE is configured at the master. and the fault does not prevent the calculation of OutputHeat, the fault does not have any effect on the slave. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE is configured at the master and the fault prevents the calculation of OutputHeat, the master outputs the last output value or the configured substitute output value SubstituteOutput, depending on SetSubstituteOutput. This is then used by the slave as the setpoint. PID_Temp is preconfigured so that the substitute output value 0.0 is output in this case (ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE, SubstituteOutput = 0.0). Configure a suitable substitute output value for your application or activate the use of the last valid PID output value (SetSubstituteOutput = FALSE). If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE is configured at the master, the master changes to the "Inactive" mode when a fault occurs and outputs OutputHeat = 0.0. The slave then uses 0.0 as the setpoint. The fault response is located in the output settings in the configuration editor. PID control 202 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.5 Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp 6.5 Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp Introduction In a multi-zone control system, several sections, so-called zones, of a plant are controlled simultaneously to different temperatures. A multi-zone control system is characterized by the mutual influence of the temperature zones through thermal coupling, i.e. the process value of one zone can influence the process value of a different zone through thermal coupling. The strength that this influence has depends on the structure of the plant and the selected operating points of the zones. Example: Extrusion plant as it is used, for example, in plastics processing. The substance mixture that passes through the extruder has to be controlled to different temperatures for optimal processing. For example, different temperatures can be required at the filling point of the extruder than at the outlet nozzle. The individual temperature zones mutually influence each other through thermal coupling. When PID_Temp is used in multi-zone control systems, each temperature zone is controlled by a separate PID_Temp instance. Observe the following explanations if you want to use the PID_Temp in a multi-zone control system. Separate pretuning for heating and cooling Initial commissioning of a plant as a rule begins with the carrying out of pretuning in order to carry out initial setting of the PID parameters and control to the operating point. The pretuning for multi-zone control systems is often carried out simultaneously for all zones. PID_Temp offers the possibility of carrying out pretuning for heating and cooling in one step (Mode = 1, Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE, Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE) for controllers with activated cooling and PID parameter switching as the method for heating/cooling (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE, Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). However, it is advisable not to use this tuning for simultaneous pretuning of several PID_Temp instances in a multi-zone control system. Instead, first carry out the pretuning for heating (Mode = 1, Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE, Cool.EnableTuning = FALSE) and the pretuning for cooling (Mode = 1, Heat.EnableTuning = FALSE, Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE) separately. Pretuning for cooling should not be started until all zones have completed pretuning for heating and have reached their operating points. This reduces mutual influencing through thermal coupling between the zones during tuning. Adapting the delay time If PID_Temp is used in a multi-zone control system with strong thermal couplings between the zones, you should ensure that the adaption of the delay time is deactivated for pretuning with PIDSelfTune.SUT.AdaptDelayTime = 0. Otherwise, the determination of the delay time can be incorrect if the cooling of a zone is prevented by the thermal influence of other zones during the adapting of the delay time (heating is deactivated in this phase). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 203 Using PID_Temp 6.5 Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp Temporary deactivation of cooling PID_Temp offers the possibility of deactivating cooling temporarily in automatic mode for controllers with active cooling (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) by setting DisableCooling = TRUE. This ensures that this controller does not cool in automatic mode during commissioning while the controllers of other zones have not yet completed tuning of heating. The tuning could otherwise be influenced negatively by the thermal coupling between the zones. Procedure You can proceed as follows during the commissioning of multi-zone control systems with relevant thermal couplings: 1. Set DisableCooling = TRUE for all controllers with activated cooling. 2. Set PIDSelfTune.SUT.AdaptDelayTime = 0 for all controllers. 3. Specify the desired setpoints (Setpoint parameter) and start pretuning for heating (Mode = 1, Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE, Cool.EnableTuning = FALSE) simultaneously for all controllers. 4. Wait until all the controllers have completed pretuning for heating. 5. Set DisableCooling = FALSE for all controllers with activated cooling. 6. Wait until the process values of all the zones are steady and close to the respective setpoint. If the setpoint cannot be reached permanently for a zone, the heating or cooling actuator is too weak. 7. Start pretuning for cooling (Mode = 1, Heat.EnableTuning = FALSE, Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE) for all controllers with activated cooling. Note Limit violation of the process value If the cooling is deactivated in automatic mode with DisableCooling = TRUE, this can cause the process value to exceed the setpoint and the process value limits while DisableCooling = TRUE. Observe the process values and intervene, if appropriate, if you use DisableCooling. Note Multi-zone control systems For multi-zone control systems, the thermal couplings between the zones can result in increased overshoots, permanent or temporary violation of limits and permanent or temporary control deviations during commissioning or operation. Observe the process values and be ready to intervene. Depending on the system, it can be necessary to deviate from the procedure described above. PID control 204 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.5 Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp Synchronization of several fine tuning processes If fine tuning is started from automatic mode with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = FALSE, PID_Temp tries to reach the setpoint with PID controlling and the current PID parameters. The actual tuning does not start until the setpoint is reached. The time required to reach the setpoint can be different for the individual zones of a multi-zone control system. If you want to carry out fine tuning for several zones simultaneously, PID_Temp offers the possibility to synchronize these by waiting with the further tuning steps after the setpoint has been reached. Procedure This ensures that all the controllers have reached their setpoint when the actual tuning steps start. This reduces mutual influencing through thermal coupling between the zones during tuning. Proceed as follows for controllers for whose zones you want to carry out fine tuning simultaneously: 1. Set PIDSelfTune.TIR.WaitForControlIn = TRUE for all controllers. These controllers have to be in automatic mode with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = FALSE. 2. Specify the desired setpoints (Setpoint parameters) and start fine tuning for all controllers. 3. Wait until PIDSelfTune.TIR.ControlInReady = TRUE at all controllers. 4. Set PIDSelfTune.TIR.FinishControlIn = TRUE for all controllers. All controllers then start the actual tuning simultaneously. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 205 Using PID_Temp 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp Override control In case of override control, two or more controllers share one actuator. Only one controller has access to the actuator at any time and influences the process. A logic operation decides which controller has access to the actuator. This decision is often made based on a comparison of the output values of all controllers, for example, in case of a maximum selection, the controller with the largest output value gets access to the actuator. The selection based on the output value requires that all controllers operate in automatic mode. The controllers that do not have an effect on the actuator are updated. This is necessary to prevent windup effects and their negative impacts on the control response and the switchover between the controllers. PID_Temp supports override controls as of version 1.1 by offering a simple process for updating the controllers that are not active: By using the tags OverwriteInitialOutputValue and PIDCtrl.PIDInit, you can pre-assign the integral action of the controller in automatic mode as though the PID algorithm had calculated PidOutputSum = OverwriteInititalOutputValue for the PID output value in the last cycle. To do this, OverwriteInitialOutputValue is interconnected with the PID output value of the controller that currently has access to the actuator. By setting the bit PIDCtrl.PIDInit, you trigger the preassignment of the integral action as well as the restart of the controller cycle and the PWM period. The subsequent calculation of the PID output value in the current cycle takes place based on the pre-assigned (and synchronized for all controllers) integral action as well as the proportional action and integral action from the current control deviation. The derivative action is not active during the call with PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE and therefore does not contribute to the output value. This procedure ensures that the calculation of the current PID output value and thus the decision on which controller is to have access to the actuator is only based on the current process state and the PI parameters. Windup effects for controllers that are not active and thus incorrect decisions of the switchover logic are prevented. PID control 206 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp Requirement PIDCtrl.PIDInit is only effective if the integral action is activated (tags Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Ti and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Ti > 0.0). You must assign PIDCtrl.PIDInit and OverwriteInitialOutputValue in your user program yourself (see example below). PID_Temp does not automatically change these tags. PIDCtrl.PIDInit is only effective when PID_Temp is in automatic mode (parameter State = 3). If possible, select the sampling time of the PID algorithm ( Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle tags) so that it is identical for all controllers, and call all controllers in the same cyclic interrupt OB. In this way, you ensure that the switchover does not take place within a controller cycle or a PWM period. Note Constant adaptation of the output value limits Instead of the active updating of the controllers without access to the actuator described here, this is implemented alternatively by constant adaptation of the output value limits in other controller systems. This is not possible with PID_Temp, because a change of the output value limits is not supported in automatic mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 207 Using PID_Temp 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp Example: Control of a large boiler PID_Temp is used for control of a large boiler. The main goal is to control the temperature Input1. The controller PID_Temp_1 is used for this purpose. In addition, the temperature Input2 is to be kept below a high limit at an additional measuring point with the limiting controller PID_Temp_2. Both temperatures are influenced by only one heater. The output value of the controller corresponds to the heating power. PID control 208 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp The heater is controlled with the pulse-width modulated output value of PID_Temp (parameter OutputHeat_PWM) by writing the program tag ActuatorInput. The setpoint for the temperature Input1 is specified at the parameter PID_Temp_1.Setpoint. The temperature high limit for the additional measuring point is specified as setpoint at the parameter PID_Temp_2.Setpoint. Both controllers must share one heater as shared actuator. The logic that decides which controller gets access to the actuator is implemented by a minimum selection of the PID output value (in Real format, parameter PidOutputSum) in this case. Because the PID output value corresponds to the heating power, the controller that requires lower heating power gets the control. In normal operation of the plant, the process value of the main controlled variable corresponds to the setpoint. The main controller PID_Temp_1 has settled on a stationary PID output value PID_Temp_1.PidOutputSum. The process value of the limiting controller Input2 in normal operation is significantly below the high limit that is specified as setpoint for fur PID_Temp_2. The limiting controller therefore wants to increase the heating power to increase its process value, which means it will calculate a PID output value PID_Temp_2.PidOutputSum that is greater than the main controller PID_Temp_1.PidOutputSum. The minimum selection of the switchover logic therefore gives the main controller PID_Temp_1 continued access to the actuator. In addition, it is ensured that PID_Temp_2 is updated by means of the assignments PID_Temp_2.OverwriteInitialOutputValue = PID_Temp_1.PidOutputSum and PID_Temp_2.PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE. If Input2 now approaches the high limit or exceeds it, for example due to a fault, the limiting controller PID_Temp_2 calculates a smaller PID output value to restrict the heating power and thus reduce Input2. If PID_Temp_2.PidOutputSum is smaller than PID_Temp_1.PidOutputSum, the limiting controller PID_Temp_2 receives access to the actuator through the minimum selection and reduces the heating power. It is ensured that PID_Temp_1 is updated by means of the assignments PID_Temp_1.OverwriteInitialOutputValue = PID_Temp_2.PidOutputSum and PID_Temp_1.PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 209 Using PID_Temp 6.6 Override control with PID_Temp The temperature at the additional measuring point Input2 drops. The temperature of the main controlled variable Input1 drops as well and cannot be held at the setpoint any longer. Once the fault has been remedied, the Input2 will continue to drop and the heating power is further increased by the limiting controller. As soon as the main controller has calculated a lower heating power as output value, the plant returns to normal operation so that the main controller PID_Temp_1 once again has access to the actuator. This example can be implemented with the following SCL program code: "PID Temp 1"(Input := "Input1"); "PID Temp 2"(Input := "Input2"); IF "PID Temp 1".PidOutputSum <= "PID Temp 2".PidOutputSum THEN "ActuatorInput" := "PID_Temp_1".OutputHeat_PWM; "PID_Temp_1".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := FALSE; "PID_Temp_2".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := TRUE; "PID_Temp_2".OverwriteInitialOutputValue := "PID_Temp_1".PidOutputSum; ELSE "ActuatorInput" := "PID_Temp_2".OutputHeat_PWM; "PID_Temp_1".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := TRUE; "PID_Temp_2".PIDCtrl.PIDInit := FALSE; "PID_Temp_1".OverwriteInitialOutputValue := "PID_Temp_2".PidOutputSum; END IF; PID control 210 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID_Temp 6.7 Simulating PID_Temp with PLCSIM 6.7 Simulating PID_Temp with PLCSIM Note Simulation with PLCSIM The simulation of PID_Temp with PLCSIM for CPU S7-1200 is not supported. PID_TEMP can be simulated only for CPU S7-1500 with PLCSIM. For the simulation with PLCSIM, the time behavior of the simulated PLC is not exactly identical to that of a "real" PLC. The actual cycle clock of a cyclic interrupt OB can have larger fluctuations with a simulated PLC than with "real" PLCs. In the standard configuration, PID_Temp determines the time between calls automatically and monitors them for fluctuations. For the simulation of PID_Temp with PLCSIM, for example, a sampling time error (ErrorBits = DW#16#00000800) can therefore be detected. This results in ongoing tuning being aborted. The response in automatic mode depends on the value of the ActivateRecoverMode tag. To prevent this from happening, you should configure PID_Temp for simulation with PLCSIM as follows: * CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE * CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE * CycleTime.Value: Assign the cycle clock of the calling cyclic interrupt OB in seconds to this tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 211 Using PID basic functions 7.1 CONT_C 7.1.1 Technology object CONT_C 7 The technology object CONT_C provides a continual PID-controller for automatic and manual mode. It corresponds to the instance data block of the instruction CONT_C. You can configure a pulse controller using the PULSEGEN instruction. The proportional, integral (INT) and differential components (DIF) are switched parallel to each other and can be turned on and off individually. With this, P-, I, PI-, PD- and PIDcontroller can be set. S7-1500 All parameters and tags of the technology object are retentive and can only be changed during download to the device if you completely download CONT_C. See also Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) CONT_C (Page 466) PID control 212 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.1 CONT_C 7.1.2 Configure controller difference CONT_C Use process value periphery To use the process value in the periphery format at the PV_PER input parameter, follow these steps: 1. Select the "Enable I/O" check box. 2. If the process value is available as a physical size, enter the factor and offset for the scaling in percent. The process value is then determined according to the following formula: PV = PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFF Use internal process values To use the process value in the floating-point format at the PV_IN input parameter, follow these steps: 1. Clear the "Enable I/O" check box. Control deviation Set a dead zone range under the following requirement: The process value signal is noisy. The controller gain is high. The derivative action is activated. The noise component of the process value causes strong deviations of the output value in this case. The dead zone suppresses the noise component in the steady controller state. The dead zone range specifies the size of the dead zone. With a dead zone range of 0.0, the dead zone is turned off. See also How CONT_C works (Page 467) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 213 Using PID basic functions 7.1 CONT_C 7.1.3 Configure the controller algorithm CONT_C General To determine which components of the control algorithm are activated, proceed as follows: 1. Select an entry from the "Controller structure" list. You can only specify required parameters for the selected controller structure. Proportional action 1. If the controller structure contains a proportional action, enter the "proportional gain". Integral action 1. If the controller structure contains an integral action, enter the integral action time. 2. To give the integral action an initialization value, select the check box "Initialize integral action" and enter the initialization value. 3. In order to permanently set the integral action to this initialization value, select the "Integral action hold" check box. Derivative action 1. If the controller structure contains a derivative action, enter the derivative action time, the derivative action weighting and the delay time. See also How CONT_C works (Page 467) PID control 214 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.1 CONT_C 7.1.4 Configure the output value CONT_C General You can set CONT_C in the manual or automatic mode. 1. To set a manual manipulated value, activate the option "Activate manual mode" option check box. You can specify a manual manipulated value on the input parameter MAN. Manipulated value limits The manipulated value is limited at the top and bottom so that it can only accept valid values. You cannot turn off the limitation. Exceeding the limits is displayed through the output parameters QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM. 1. Enter a value for the high and low manipulated value limits. If the manipulated value is a physical size, the units for the high and low manipulated value limits must match. Scaling The manipulated value can be scaled for output as a floating point and periphery value through a factor and an offset according to the following formula. Scaled manipulated value = manipulated value x factor + offset Default is a factor of 1.0 and an offset of 0.0. 1. Enter a value for the factor and offset. See also How CONT_C works (Page 467) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 215 Using PID basic functions 7.1 CONT_C 7.1.5 Programming a pulse controller With the continuous controller CONT_C and the pulse shaper PULSEGEN, you can implement a fixed setpoint controller with a switching output for proportional actuators. The following figure shows the signal flow of the control loop. The continuous controller CONT_C forms the output value LMN that is converted by the pulse shaper PULSEGEN into pulse/break signals QPOS_P or QNEG_P. See also PULSEGEN (Page 478) PID control 216 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.1 CONT_C 7.1.6 Commissioning CONT_C Requirements The instruction and the technology object are loaded on the CPU. Procedure In order to manually determine the optimal PID parameter, proceed as follows: 1. Click the "Start" icon. If there is no online connection, this will be established. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are recorded. 2. Enter new PID parameters in the "P", "I", "D" and "Delay time" fields. 3. Click on the icon "Send parameter to CPU" in the "Tuning" group. 4. Select the "Change setpoint" check box in the "Current values" group. 5. Enter a new setpoint and click in the "Current Values" group on the icon . 6. Clear the "Manual mode" check box. The controller works with the new PID parameters and controls the new setpoint. 7. Check the quality of the PID parameter to check the curve points. 8. Repeat steps 2 to 6 until you are satisfied with the controller results. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 217 Using PID basic functions 7.2 CONT_S 7.2 CONT_S 7.2.1 Technology object CONT_S The technology object CONT_S provides a step controller for actuators with integrating behavior and is used to control technical temperature processes with binary output value output signals. The technology object corresponds to the instance data block of the CONT_S instruction. The operating principle is based on the PI control algorithm of the sampling controller. The step controller operates without a position feedback signal. Both manual and automatic mode are possible. S7-1500 All parameters and tags of the technology object are retentive and can only be changed during download to the device if you completely download CONT_S. See also Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) CONT_S (Page 473) PID control 218 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.2 CONT_S 7.2.2 Configure controller difference CONT_S Use process value periphery To use the process value in the periphery format at the PV_PER input parameter, follow these steps: 1. Select the "Enable I/O" check box. 2. If the process value is available as a physical quantity, enter the factor and offset for the scaling in percent. The process value is then determined according to the following formula: PV = PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFF Use internal process values To use the process value in the floating-point format at the PV_IN input parameter, follow these steps: 1. Clear the "Enable I/O" check box. Control deviation Set a deadband range under the following requirement: The process value signal is noisy. The controller gain is high. The derivative action is activated. The noise component of the process value causes strong deviations of the manipulated variable in this case. The deadband suppresses the noise component in the steady controller state. The deadband range specifies the size of the deadband. With a deadband range of 0.0, the deadband is turned off. See also Mode of operation CONT_S (Page 474) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 219 Using PID basic functions 7.2 CONT_S 7.2.3 Configuring control algorithm CONT_S PID algorithm 1. Enter the "proportional amplification" for the P-component. 2. Enter the integration time for the time behavior of the I-component. With an integration time of 0.0, the I-component is switched off. See also Mode of operation CONT_S (Page 474) 7.2.4 Configure manipulated value CONT_S General You can set CONT_S in the manual or automatic mode. 1. To set a manual manipulated value, activate the "Activate manual mode" option check box. Enter a manual manipulated value for the input parameters LMNUP and LMNDN. Pulse generator 1. Enter the minimum impulse duration and minimum pause duration. The values must be greater than or equal to the cycle time for the input parameter CYCLE. The frequency of operation is reduced through this. 2. Enter the motor setting time. The value must be greater than or equal to the cycle time of the input parameter CYCLE. See also Mode of operation CONT_S (Page 474) PID control 220 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.2 CONT_S 7.2.5 Commissioning CONT_S Requirements The instruction and the technology object have been loaded to the CPU. Procedure To manually determine the optimal PID parameters, proceed as follows: 1. Click the "Start" icon. If there is no online connection, this will be established. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are recorded. 2. In the fields "P" and "I", enter a new proportional value and a new integration time. 3. Click on the icon "Send parameter to CPU" in the "Tuning" group. 4. Select the "Change setpoint" check box in the "Current values" group. 5. Enter a new setpoint and click in the "Current Values" group on the icon . 6. Clear the "Manual mode" check box. The controller works with the new parameters and controls the new setpoint. 7. Check the quality of the PID parameter to check the curve points. 8. Repeat steps 2 to 6 until you are satisfied with the controller results. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 221 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.1 Technology object TCONT_CP The technology object TCONT_CP provides a continual temperature controller with pulse generator. It corresponds to the instance data block of the instruction TCONT_CP. The operation is based on the PID control algorithm of the sampling controller. Both manual and automatic mode are possible. The instruction TCONT_CP calculates the proportional, integral and derivative parameters for your controlled system during pretuning. "Fine tuning" can be used to tune the parameters further. You can also enter the PID parameters manually. S7-1500 All parameters and tags of the technology object are retentive and can only be changed during download to the device if you completely download TCONT_CP. See also Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) TCONT_CP (Page 489) PID control 222 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.2 Configure TCONT_CP 7.3.2.1 Controller difference Use process value periphery To use the input parameter PV_PER, proceed as follows: 1. Select the entry "Periphery" from the "Source" list. 2. Select the "sensor type". Depending on the sensor type, the process value is scaled according to different formulas. - Standard Thermoelements; PT100/NI100 PV = 0.1 x PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFFS - Cooling; PT100/NI100 PV = 0.01 x PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFFS - Current/voltage PV = 100/27648 x PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFFS 3. Enter the factor and offset for the scaling of the process value periphery. Use internal process values To use the input parameter PV_IN, proceed as follows: 1. Select the entry "Internal" from the "Source" list. Control deviation Set a deadband range under the following requirement: The process value signal is noisy. The controller gain is high. The derivative action is activated. The noise component of the process value causes strong deviations of the manipulated variable in this case. The deadband suppresses the noise component in the steady controller state. The deadband range specifies the size of the deadband. With a deadband range of 0.0, the deadband is turned off. See also Mode of operation TCONT_CP (Page 490) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 223 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.2.2 Controlling algorithm General 1. Enter the "Sampling time PID algorithm". A controller sampling time should not exceed 10 % of the determined integratl action time of the controller (TI). 2. If the controller structure contains a proportional action, enter the "proportional gain". A negative proportional gain inverts the rule meaning. Proportional action For changes of the setpoint, it may lead to overshooting of the proportional action. Through the weighting of the proportional action, you can select how strongly the proportional action should react when setpoint changes are made. The weakening of the proportional action is reached through a compensation of the integral action. 1. To weaken the proportional action for setpoint changes, enter a "Proportional action weighting". - 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective - 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective Integral action With a limitation of the manipulated value, the integral action is stopped. With a control deviation that moves the integral action in the direction of an internal setting range, the integral action is released again. 1. If the controller structure contains an integral action, enter the "integral action time". With an integral action time of 0.0, the integral action is switched off. 2. To give the integral action an initialization value, select the "Initialize integral action" check box and enter the "Initialization value". Upon restart or COM_RST = TRUE, the integral action is set to this value. Derivative action 1. If the controller structure contains a derivative action, enter the derivative action time (TD) and the coefficients DT1 (D_F). With switched derivative action, the following equation should be maintained: TD = 0.5 x CYCLEx D_F. The delay time is calculated from this according to the formula: delay time = TD/D_F Set PD-controller with operating point 1. Enter the integral action time 0.0. 2. Activate the "Initialize integral action" check box. 3. Enter the operating point as the initialization value. PID control 224 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Set P-controller with operating point 1. Set a PD-controller with an operating point. 2. Enter the derivative action time 0.0. The derivative action is disabled. Control zone The control zone limits the value range of the control deviation. If the control deviation is outside of this value range, the manipulated value limits are used. With an occurrence in the control zone, the derivative action leads to a very quick reduction of the manipulated variable. Thus, the control zone only makes sense for switched on derivative actions. Without control zone, only the reducing proportional action would reduce the manipulated value. The control zone leads to a quick oscillation without over/under shooting if the emitted minimum or maximum manipulated values are removed from the manipulated value required for the new operating point. 1. Activate the "Activate" check box in the "control zone" group. 2. Enter a setpoint value in the "Width" input field from which the process value may deviate above or below. See also Mode of operation TCONT_CP (Page 490) 7.3.2.3 Manipulated value continual controller Manipulated value limits The manipulated value is limited at the top and bottom so that it can only accept valid values. You cannot turn off the limitation. Exceeding the limits is displayed through the output parameters QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM. 1. Enter a value for the high and low manipulated value limits. Scaling The manipulated value can be scaled for output as a floating point and periphery value through a factor and an offset according to the following formula. Scaled manipulated value = manipulated value x factor + offset Default is a factor of 1.0 and an offset of 0.0. 1. Enter a value for the factor and offset. Pulse generator The pulse generator must be turned on for a continual controller. 1. Disable the "Activate" option check box in the "Pulse generator" group. See also Mode of operation TCONT_CP (Page 490) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 225 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.2.4 Manipulated value pulse controller Pulse generator The analog manipulated value (LmnN) can be emitted through pulse-duration modulation on the output parameter QPULSE as an impulse sequence. To use the pulse generator, proceed as follows: 1. Activate the "Activate" option check box in the "pulse generator" group. 2. Enter the "sampling time pulse generator", the "minimum impulse/break duration" and the "period duration". The following graphics clarify the connection between the "sampling pulse generator" (CYCLE_P), the "minimum impulse/break duration" (P_B_TM) and the "period duration" (PER_TM): PID control 226 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Sampling time pulse generator The sampling time pulse generator must agree with the time tact of the cyclic interrupt OB being called. The duration of the created impulse is always a whole number factor of this value. For an adequately precise manipulated value resolution, the following relationship should apply: CYCLE_P PER_TM/50 Minimum impulse/break duration Through the minimum impulse/break duration, short on or off times on the actuator are avoided. An impulse smaller than P_B_TM is suppressed. Recommended are values P_B_TM 0.1 x PER_TM. Period duration The period duration should not exceed 20% of the determined integration time of the controller (TI): PER_TM TI/5 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 227 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Example for the effect of the parameter CYCLE_P, CYCLE and PER_TM: Period duration PER_TM = 10 s Sampling time PID-algorithm CYCLE = 1 s Sampling time pulse generator CYCLE_P = 100 ms. Every second, a new manipulated value, every 100 ms the comparison of the manipulated value occurs with the previously emitted impulse length and break length. If an impulse is emitted, there are 2 possibilities: - The calculated manipulated value is larger than the previous impulse length/PER_TM. Then the impulse is extended. - The calculated manipulated value is less than or equal to the previous impulse length/PER_TM. Then no impulse signal will be emitted. If no impulse is emitted, there are also 2 possibilities: - The value (100 % - calculated manipulated value) is greater than the previous break length / PER_TM. Then the break is extended. - The value (100 % - calculated manipulated value) is less than or equal to the previous break length / PER_TM. Then an impulse signal will be emitted. See also Mode of operation TCONT_CP (Page 490) Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) PID control 228 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3 Commissioning TCONT_CP 7.3.3.1 Optimization of TCONT_CP Application possibilities The controller optimization for heating or cooling processes from process type I is applicable. But you can use the block for processes with higher levels like process type II or III. The PI/PID parameters are automatically determined and set. The controller draft is designed for an optimal disruption behavior The "precise" parameters resulting from this lead to overshooting of 10% to 40% of the jump height for setpoint jump heights. Phases of controller optimization For the controller optimization, individual phases are run through, which you can read on the parameter PHASE . PHASE = 0 No tuning is running. TCONT_CP works in automatic or manual mode. During PHASE = 0, you can make sure that the controlled system fulfills the requirements for an optimization. At the end of the optimization, TCONT_CP changes back into PHASE = 0. PHASE = 1 TCONT_CP is prepared for optimization. PHASE = 1 may only be started if the requirements for an optimization are fulfilled. During PHASE = 1, the following values are determined: Process value noise NOISE_PV Initial slope PVDT0 Average of the manipulated variable Sampling time PID algorithm CYCLE Sampling time pulse generator CYCLE_P PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 229 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP PHASE = 2 In phase 2, the process value attempts to detect the point of inflection with a constant manipulated variable. This method prevents the point of inflection from being found too early as a result of process variable noise. With the pulse controller, the process variable is averaged over N pulse cycles and then made available to the controller stage. There is a further averaging of the process variable in the controller stage: Initially, this averaging is inactive; in other words, averaging always takes place over 1 cycle. As long as the noise exceeds a certain level, the number of cycles is doubled. The period and amplitude of the noise are calculated. The search for the point of inflection is canceled and phase 2 is exited only when the gradient is always smaller than the maximum rise during the estimated period. TU and T_P_INF are, however, calculated at the actual point of inflection. Tuning, however, is only ended when the following two conditions are met: 1. The process value is more than 2*NOISE_PV away from the point of inflection. 2. The process value has exceeded the point of inflection by 20%. Note When exciting the process using a setpoint step change, tuning is ended at the latest when the process value exceeds 75% of the setpoint step change (SP_INT-PV0) (see below). PHASE = 3, 4, 5 The phases 3, 4 and 5 last 1 cycle each. In Phase 3, the valid PI/PID parameters are saved before the optimization and the process parameter is calculated. In Phase 4, the new PI/PID parameters are calculated. In Phase 5, the new manipulated variable is calculated and the controlled system is given. PHASE = 7 The process type is inspected in Phase 7, because TCONT_CP always changes to automatic mode after optimization. The automatic mode starts with LMN = LMN0 + 0.75*TUN_DLMN as a manipulated variable. The testing of the process type occurs in the automatic mode with the recently recalculated controller parameters and ends at the latest 0.35*TA (equilibrium time) after the point of inflection. If the process order deviates strongly from the estimated value, the controller parameters are newly calculated and STATUS_D is counted up by 1, otherwise, the controller parameters remain unchanged. Then the optimization mode is complete and TCONT_CP is back in PHASE = 0. At the STATUS_H parameter, you can identify whether the tuning was successfully completed. PID control 230 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Premature cancellation of the optimization In Phase 1, 2 or 3, you can cancel the optimization by resetting TUN_ON = FALSE without calculating new parameters. The controller starts in the automatic mode with LMN = LMN0 + TUN_DLMN. If the controller was in manual mode before the tuning, the old manual manipulated variable is output. If the tuning is canceled in Phase 4, 5 or 7 with TUN_ON = FALSE, the determined controlled parameters are contained until then. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 231 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.2 Requirements for an optimization Transient response The process must have a stable, asymptotic transient response with time lag. The process value must settle to steady state after a step change of the manipulated variable. This therefore excludes processes that already show an oscillating response without control, as well as processes with no recovery (integrator in the control system). WARNING This may result in death, severe injury or considerable property damage. During an tuning, the parameter MAN_ON is ineffective. Through this, the output value or process value may take on undesired - even extreme - values. The output value is defined through the tuning. To cancel the tuning, you first have to set TUN_ON = FALSE. This makes MAN_ON effective again. Guaranteeing a stationary initial state (phase 0) With lower-frequency oscillations of the process value, for example, due to incorrect controller parameters, the controller must be put in manual mode before the tuning is started and wait for the oscillation to stop. Alternatively, you could switch to a "soft" set PI controller (small loop gain large integration time). Now you have to wait until the stationary state is reached, this means, until the process value and output value have a steady state. It is also permissible to have an asymptotic transient oscillation or slow drifting of the process value (stationary state, see the following image). The output value must be constant or fluctuate by a constant average. Note Avoid changing the manipulated variable shortly before starting the tuning. A change of the manipulated variable can occur in an unintended manner through the establishment of the test conditions (for example, closing an oven door)! If this does happen, you have to at least wait until the process value has an asymptotic transient oscillation in a stationary state again. Better controller parameters can be reached if you wait until the transient effect has completely subsided. PID control 232 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP In the following image, the transient oscillation is illustrated in the stationary state: Linearity and operating range The process response must be linear across the operating range. Non-linear response occurs, for example, when an aggregation state changes. Tuning must take place in a linear part of the operating range. This means, during tuning and normal control operation non-linear effects within the operating range must be insignificant. It is, however possible to retune the process when the operating point changes, providing tuning is repeated in the close vicinity of the new operating point and non-linearity does not occur during tuning. If a specific static non-linearity (e.g., valve characteristics) is known, it is always advisable to compensate this with a polyline to linearize the process response. Disturbance in temperature processes Disturbances such as the transfer of heat to neighboring zones must not affect the overall temperature process too much. For example, when optimizing the zones of an extruder, all zones must be heated simultaneously. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 233 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.3 Possibilities for optimization The following possibilities for tuning exist: Pretuning Fine tuning Manual fine-tuning in control mode Pretuning During this tuning, the working point is approached from the cold state through a setpoint jump. With TUN_ON = TRUE, you can establish the tuning readiness. The controller switches from PHASE = 0 to PHASE = 1. The tuning manipulated variable (LMN0 + TUN_DLMN) is activated by a setpoint change (transition phase 1 -> 2). The setpoint is not effective until the inflection point has been reached (automatic mode is not enabled until this point is reached). The user is responsible for defining the output excitation delta (TUN_DLMN) according to the permitted process value change. The sign of TUN_DLMN must be set depending on the intended process value change (take into account the direction in which the control is operating). The setpoint step change and TUN_DLMN must be suitably matched. If the value of TUN_DLMN is too high, there is a risk that the point of inflection will not be found before 75% of the setpoint step change is reached. TUN_DLMN must nonetheless be high enough to ensure that the process value reaches at least 22 % of the setpoint step change. Otherwise, the process will remain in tuning mode (phase 2). PID control 234 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Remedy: Reduce the setpoint value during the inflection point search. Note If processes are extremely sluggish, it is advisable during tuning to specify a target setpoint that is somewhat lower than the desired operating point and to monitor the status bits and PV closely (risk of overshooting). Tuning only in the linear range: The signals of certain processes (e.g., zinc or magnesium smelters) will pass a non-linear area at the approach of the operating range (change in the state of aggregation). By selecting a suitable setpoint step change, tuning can be limited to the linear range. When the process value has passed 75% of the setpoint step change (SP_INT-PV0), tuning is ended. At the same time, TUN_DLMN should be reduced to the extent that the point of inflection is guaranteed to be found before 75% of the setpoint step change is reached. Fine tuning During this tuning, the process with a constant setpoint is activated through a output value jump. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 235 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP The tuning manipulated variable (LMN0 + TUN_DLMN) is activated by setting the start bit TUN_ST (transition from phase 1 -> 2). When you modify the setpoint value, the new value will not take effect until the point of inflection has been reached (automatic mode will not be enabled until this point has been reached). The user is responsible for defining the output excitation delta (TUN_DLMN) according to the permitted process value change. The sign of TUN_DLMN must be set depending on the intended process value change (take into account the direction in which the control is operating). NOTICE Safety off at 75% is not available when you excite the process via TUN_ST. Tuning is ended when the point of inflection is reached. However, in noisy processes the point of inflection may be significantly exceeded. Manual fine-tuning in control mode The following measures can be employed to achieve an overshoot-free setpoint response: Adapting the control zone Optimize command action Attenuation of control parameters Modifying control parameters PID control 236 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.4 Tuning result The left cipher of STATUS_H displays the tuning status STATUS_H Result 0 Default, i.e., new controller parameters have not (yet) been found. 10000 Suitable control parameters found. 2xxxx Control parameters have been found via estimated values; check the control response or check the STATUS_H diagnostic message and repeat controller tuning. 3xxxx An operator error has occurred; check the STATUS_H diagnostic message and repeat controller tuning. The CYCLE and CYCLE_P sampling times were already checked in phase 1. The following controller parameters are updated on TCONT_CP: P (proportional GAIN) I (integration time TI) D (derivative time TD) Weighting of the proportional action PFAC_SP Coefficient DT1 (D_F) Control zone on/off CONZ_ON Control zone width CON_ZONE The control zone is only activated if the process type is suitable (process type I and II) and a PID controller is used (CONZ_ON = TRUE). Depending on PID_ON, control is implemented either with a PI or a PID controller. The old controller parameters are saved and can be retrieved with UNDO_PAR. A PI parameter record and a PID parameter record are saved additionally in the PI_CON and PID_CON structures. Using LOAD_PID and making a suitable setting for PID_ON, it is also possible to switch later between the tuned PI or PID parameters. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 237 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.5 Parallel tuning of controller channels Adjacent zones (strong heat coupling) If two or more controllers are controlling the temperature, on a plate, for example (in other words, there are two heaters and two measured process values with strong heat coupling), proceed as follows: 1. OR the two outputs QTUN_RUN. 2. Interconnect each TUN_KEEP input with the output of the OR element. 3. Start both controllers by specifying a setpoint step change at the same time or by setting TUN_ST at the same time. The following schematic illustrates the parallel tuning of controller channels. Advantage: Both controllers output LMN0 + TUN_DLMN until both controllers have left phase 2. This prevents the controller that completes tuning first from falsifying the tuning result of the other controller due to the change in its manipulated variable. NOTICE Reaching 75% of the setpoint step change causes an exiting of phase 2 and resetting of output QTUN_RUN. However, automatic mode does not start until TUN_KEEP is also 0. Adjacent zones (weak heat coupling) In general terms, tuning should be carried out to reflect the way in which the controller will operate subsequently. If zones are operated together during production such that the temperature differences between the zones remain the same, the temperature of the adjacent zones ought to be increased accordingly during tuning. Differences in temperature at the beginning of the tuning are irrelevant since they will be compensated by the initial heating (-> initial rise = 0). PID control 238 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.6 Fault descriptions and corrective measures Compensating operator errors Operator error STATUS and action Comment TUN_ON and setpoint step change or TUN_ST are set simultaneously Transition to phase 1; however, tuning is not started. The setpoint change is canceled. This prevents the controller from settling to the new setpoint value and from leaving the stationary operating point unnecessarily. Effective TUN_DLMN < 5% (end of phase 1) * SP_INT = SPold or * TUN_ST = FALSE STATUS_H = 30002 * Transition to phase 0 * TUN_ON = FALSE * SP = SPold Tuning is canceled. The setpoint change is canceled. This prevents the controller from settling to the new setpoint value and from leaving the stationary operating point unnecessarily. Point of inflection not reached (only if excited by setpoint step change) At the latest, tuning is ended when the process value has passed 75% of the setpoint step change (SP_INT-PV0). This is signaled by "inflection point not reached" in STATUS_H (2xx2x). The currently valid setpoint always applies. By reducing the setpoint, it is possible to achieve an earlier end of the tuning function. In typical temperature processes, cancelation of tuning at 75% of the setpoint step change is normally adequate to prevent overshoot. However, caution is advised, particularly in processes with a greater delay (TU/TA > 0.1, process type III). If manipulated variable excitation is too strong compared to the setpoint step change, the process value can overshoot heavily (up to a factor of 3). In higher-order processes, if the point of inflection is still a long way off after reaching 75% of the setpoint step change, there will be significant overshoot. In addition, the controller parameters are too stringent. In this case, you should reduce the controller parameters or repeat the attempt. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 239 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP The following schematic illustrates the overshoot of the process variable when the excitation is too strong (process type III): In typical temperature processes, cancelation shortly before reaching the point of inflection is not critical in terms of the controller parameters. If you repeat the attempt, reduce TUN_DLMN or increase the setpoint step change. Principle: The value of the manipulated variable used for tuning must be suitable for the setpoint step change. Error estimating the delay time or order The delay time (STATUS_H = 2x1xx or 2x3xx) or order (STATUS_H = 21xxx or 22xxx) were not acquired correctly. Operation continues with an estimate that can lead to non-optimum controller parameters. Repeat the tuning procedure and ensure that disturbances do not occur at the process value. Note The special case of a PT1-only process is also indicated by STATUS_H = 2x1xx (TU <= 3*CYCLE). In this case, it is not necessary to repeat the attempt. Reduce the controller parameters if the control oscillates. PID control 240 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Quality of measuring signals (measurement noise, low-frequency interference) The results of tuning can be distorted by measurement noise or by low-frequency interference. Note the following: If you encounter measurement noise, set the sampling frequency higher rather than lower. During one noise period, the process value should be sampled at least twice. In pulse mode, integrated mean value filtering can be helpful. This assumes, however, that the process variable PV is transferred to the instruction in the fast pulse cycle. The degree of noise should not exceed 5% of the useful signal change. High-frequency interference cannot be filtered out by TCONT_CP. This should be filtered earlier in the measuring sensor to prevent the aliasing effect. The following schematic illustrates the aliasing effect when the sampling time is too long: With low-frequency interference, it is relatively easy to ensure an adequately high sampling rate. However, the TCONT_CP must then generate a uniform measuring signal by having a large interval in the mean value filtering. Mean value filtering must extend over at least two noise periods. Internally in the block, this soon results in higher sampling times such that the accuracy of the tuning is adversely affected. Adequate accuracy is guaranteed with at least 40 noise periods up to the point of inflection. Possible remedy when repeating the attempt: Increase TUN_DLMN. Overshoot Overshoot can occur in the following situations: Situation Cause End of tuning * Excitation by a too high manipulated value change compared with the setpoint step change (see above). * PI controller activated by PID_ON = FALSE. Remedy * Increase the setpoint step change or reduce the manipulated value step change. * If the process permits a PID controller, start tuning with PID_ON = TRUE. Tuning in phase 7 Initially, less aggressive controller parameters were determined (process type III); these can lead to an overshoot in phase 7. - Control mode PI controller with PFAC_SP = 1.0 for process type I. If the process permits a PID controller, start tuning with PID_ON = TRUE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 241 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.7 Performing pretuning Requirements The instruction and the technology object are loaded on the CPU. Procedure To manually determine the optimum PID parameters for initial commissioning, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Start" icon. If there is no online connection, this will be established. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are recorded. 2. Select "Pretuning" from the "Mode" drop-down list. TCONT_CP is ready for tuning. 3. In the "Output value jump" field, specify how much the output value should be increased. 4. Enter a setpoint in the "Setpoint" field. The output value jump only takes effect when another setpoint is entered. 5. Click the "Start tuning" icon. The pretuning starts. The status of the tuning is displayed. 7.3.3.8 Performing fine tuning Requirements The instruction and the technology object are loaded on the CPU. Procedure To determine the optimal PID parameters at the operating point, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Start" icon. If there is no online connection, this will be established. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are recorded. 2. Select "Fine tuning" from the "Mode" drop-down list. TCONT_CP is ready for tuning. 3. In the "Output value jump" field, specify how much the output value should be increased. 4. Click the "Start tuning" icon. Fine tuning starts. The status of the tuning is displayed. PID control 242 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.9 Cancelling pretuning or fine tuning To cancel pretuning or fine tuning, click on the icon, "Stop tuning". If the PID parameters have not yet been calculated and stored, TCONT_CP starts in automatic mode LMN = LMN0 + TUN_DLMN. If the controller was in manual mode before the tuning, the old manual manipulated variable is output. If the calculated PID parameters have already been saved, TCONT_CP starts in automatic mode and works with the previously determined PID parameters. 7.3.3.10 Manual fine-tuning in control mode The following measures can be employed to achieve an overshoot-free setpoint response: Adapting the control zone During tuning, "TCONT_CP" determines a control zone CON_ZONE and activated if the process type is suitable (process type I and II) and a PID controller is used (CONZ_ON = TRUE). In control mode, you can modify the control zone or switch it off completely (with CONZ_ON = FALSE). Note Activating the control zone with higher-order processes (process type III) does not normally provide any benefit since the control zone is then larger than the control range that can be achieved with a 100% manipulated variable. There is also no advantage in activating the control zone for PI controllers. Before you switch on the control zone manually, make sure that the control zone is not too narrow. If the control zone is set too narrow, oscillations occur in the manipulated variable and the process value. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 243 Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP Continuous attenuation of the control response with PFAC_SP The control response can be attenuated with the PFAC_SP parameter. This parameter specifies the percentage of proportional component that is effective for setpoint step changes. Regardless of the process type, PFAC_SP is set to a default value of 0.8 by the tuning function; you can later modify this value if required. To limit overshoot during setpoint step changes (with otherwise correct controller parameters) to approximately 2%, the following values are adequate for PFAC_SP: Process type I Process type II Process type III Typical temperature process Intermediate range Higher-order temperature process PI 0.8 0.82 0.8 PID 0.6 0.75 0.96 Adjust the default factor (0.8) in the following situations, in particular: Process type I with PID (0.8 0.6): Setpoint step changes within the control zone still lead to approximately 18% overshoot with PFAC_SP = 0.8. Process type III with PID (0.8 0.96): Setpoint step changes with PFAC_SP = 0.8 are attenuated too strongly. This leads to a significantly slower response time. Attenuation of control parameters When a closed-loop control circuit oscillates or if overshoot occurs after setpoint step changes, you can reduce the controller GAIN (e.g., to 80% of the original value) and increase integral time TI (e.g., to 150% of the original value). If the analog output value of the continuous controller is converted to binary actuating signals by a pulse shaper, quantization noise may cause minor permanent oscillation. You can eliminate this by increasing the controller deadband DEADB_W. Modifying control parameters Proceed as follows to modify control parameters: 1. Save the current parameters with SAVE_PAR. 2. Modify the parameters. 3. Test the control response. If the new parameter settings are worse than the old ones, retrieve the old parameters with UNDO_PAR. PID control 244 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.3 TCONT_CP 7.3.3.11 Performing fine tuning manually Requirements The instruction and the technology object have been loaded to the CPU. Procedure To manually determine the optimal PID parameters, proceed as follows: 1. Click the "Start" icon. If there is no online connection, this will be established. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are recorded. 2. Select "Manual" from the "Mode" drop-down list. 3. Enter the new PID parameters. 4. Click on the icon "Send parameter to CPU" in the "Tuning" group. 5. Select the "Change setpoint" check box in the "Current values" group. 6. Enter a new setpoint and click in the "Current Values" group on the icon . 7. Clear the "Manual mode" check box. The controller works with the new PID parameters and controls the new setpoint. 8. Check the quality of the PID parameter to check the curve points. 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until you are satisfied with the controller results. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 245 Using PID basic functions 7.4 TCONT_S 7.4 TCONT_S 7.4.1 Technology object TCONT_S The technology object TCONT_S provides a step controller for actuators with integrating behavior and is used to control technical temperature processes with binary output value output signals. The technology object corresponds to the instance data block of the TCONT_S instruction. The operating principle is based on the PI control algorithm of the sampling controller. The step controller operates without a position feedback signal. Both manual and automatic mode are possible. S7-1500 All parameters and tags of the technology object are retentive and can only be changed during download to the device if you completely download TCONT_S. See also Overview of software controller (Page 39) Add technology objects (Page 41) Configure technology objects (Page 42) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) TCONT_S (Page 514) PID control 246 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.4 TCONT_S 7.4.2 Configure controller difference TCONT_S Use process value periphery To use the input parameter PV_PER, proceed as follows: 1. Select the entry "Periphery" from the "Source" list. 2. Select the "sensor type". Depending on the sensor type, the process value is scaled according to different formulas. - Standard Thermoelements; PT100/NI100 PV = 0.1 x PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFFS - Cooling; PT100/NI100 PV = 0.01 x PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFFS - Current/voltage PV = 100/27648 x PV_PER x PV_FAC + PV_OFFS 3. Enter the factor and offset for the scaling of the process value periphery. Use internal process values To use the input parameter PV_IN, proceed as follows: 1. Select the entry "Internal" from the "Source" list. Control deviation Set a dead zone range under the following requirement: The process value signal is noisy. The controller gain is high. The derivative action is activated. The noise component of the process value causes strong deviations of the output value in this case. The dead zone suppresses the noise component in the steady controller state. The dead zone range specifies the size of the dead zone. With a dead zone range of 0.0, the dead zone is turned off. See also Mode of operation TCONT_S (Page 515) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 247 Using PID basic functions 7.4 TCONT_S 7.4.3 Configure controller algorithm TCONT_S General 1. Enter the "Sampling time PID algorithm". A controller sampling time should not exceed 10 % of the determined integral action time of the controller (TI). 2. If the controller structure contains a proportional action, enter the "proportional gain". A negative proportional gain inverts the rule meaning. Proportional action For changes of the setpoint, it may lead to overshooting of the proportional action. Through the weighting of the proportional action, you can select how strongly the proportional action should react when setpoint changes are made. The weakening of the proportional action is reached through a compensation of the integral action. 1. To weaken the proportional action for setpoint changes, enter a "Proportional action weighting". - 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective - 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective Integral action 1. If the controller structure contains an integral action, enter the "integral action time". With an integral action time of 0.0, the integral action is switched off. See also Mode of operation TCONT_S (Page 515) 7.4.4 Configure manipulated value TCONT_S Pulse generator 1. Enter the minimum impulse duration and minimum pause duration. The values must be greater than or equal to the cycle time for the input parameter CYCLE. The frequency of operation is reduced through this. 2. Enter the motor setting time. The value must be greater than or equal to the cycle time of the input parameter CYCLE. See also Mode of operation TCONT_S (Page 515) PID control 248 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Using PID basic functions 7.4 TCONT_S 7.4.5 Commissioning TCONT_S Requirements The instruction and the technology object have been loaded to the CPU. Procedure To manually determine the optimal PID parameters, proceed as follows: 1. Click the "Start" icon. If there is no online connection, this will be established. The current values for the setpoint, process value and output value are recorded. 2. Enter new PID parameters in the "P", "I" and weighting proportional action fields. 3. Click on the icon "Send parameter to CPU" in the "Tuning" group. 4. Select the "Change setpoint" check box in the "Current values" group. 5. Enter a new setpoint and click in the "Current Values" group on the icon . 6. Clear the "Manual mode" check box. The controller works with the new parameters and controls the new setpoint. 7. Check the quality of the PID parameter to check the curve points. 8. Repeat steps 2 to 6 until you are satisfied with the controller results. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 249 Auxiliary functions 8.1 8 Polyline Polyline The Polyline instruction provides a function with the characteristic curve of the polyline whose points can be used, for example, to linearize the behavior of non-linear sensors. The Polyline instruction can be used with an S7-1500 CPU Firmware 2.0 and higher and an S7-1200 CPU Firmware 4.2 and higher. Additional information Description Polyline (Page 525) Operating principle Polyline (Page 529) Input parameters of Polyline (Page 533) Output parameters of Polyline (Page 533) Static tags of Polyline (Page 534) ErrorBits parameter (Page 536) 8.2 SplitRange SplitRange The SplitRange instruction splits the output value range of the PID controller into multiple subranges. These subranges enable control of a process that is influenced by multiple actuators. The SplitRange instruction can be used with an S7-1500 CPU Firmware 2.0 and higher and an S7-1200 CPU Firmware 4.2 and higher. Additional information SplitRange description (Page 541) SplitRange input parameters (Page 544) SplitRange static tags (Page 545) SplitRange output parameters (Page 544) ErrorBits parameter (Page 546) PID control 250 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Auxiliary functions 8.3 RampFunction 8.3 RampFunction RampFunction The RampFunction instruction limits the slew rate of a signal. A signal jump at the input is output as ramp function of the output value, to achieve a smoother response, for example, without influencing the disturbance reaction. The RampFunction instruction can be used with an S7-1500 CPU Firmware 2.0 and higher and an S7-1200 CPU Firmware 4.2 and higher. Additional information RampFunction description (Page 549) RampFunction mode of operation (Page 554) RampFunction input parameters (Page 558) RampFunction output parameters (Page 558) RampFunction static tags (Page 559) ErrorBits parameter (Page 561) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 251 9 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.1 New features of PID_Compact PID_Compact V2.4 Initialization of the integral action PID_Compact now initializes the integral action if you use OverwriteInitialOutputValue together with inverted control logic. If you have been using OverwriteInitialOutputValue together with inverted control logic up to now, please note that the sign of the output value changes with PID_Compact V2.4. PID_Compact V2.3 Response of the output value when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" The new option IntegralResetMode = 4 was added and defined as default. With IntegralResetMode = 4, the integral action is automatically pre-assigned when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" so that a control deviation results in a jump of the output value with identical sign. Initialization of the integral action in automatic mode The integral action can be initialized in automatic mode with the tags OverwriteInitialOutputValue and PIDCtrl.PIDInit. This simplifies the use of PID_Compact for override controls. PID_Compact V2.2 Use with S7-1200 As of PID_Compact V2.2, the instruction with V2 functionality can also be used on S71200 with firmware version 4.0 or higher. PID control 252 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact PID_Compact V2.0 Reaction to error The reaction to error has been completely overhauled. PID_Compact now reacts in a more fault-tolerant manner in the default setting. This reaction is set when copying PID_Compact V1.X from an S7-1200 CPU to an S7-1500 CPU. NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If you use the default setting, PID_Compact remains in automatic mode when the process value limits are exceeded. This may damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error = FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. Use ErrorAck to acknowledge the errors and warnings without restarting the controller or clearing the integral action. Switching operating modes no longer clears errors that are no longer pending. You can configure the reaction to error with SetSubstituteOutput and ActivateRecoverMode. Substitute output value You can configure a substitute output value that is to be output if an error occurs. Switching the operating mode You specify the operating mode at the Mode in/out parameter and use a rising edge at ModeActivate to start the operating mode. The sRet.i_Mode tag has been omitted. Multi-instance capability You can call up PID_Compact as multi-instance DB. No technology object is created in this case and no parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for PID_Compact directly in the multi-instance DB and commission it via a watch table. Startup characteristics The operating mode specified at the Mode parameter is also started on a falling edge at Reset and during a CPU cold restart, if RunModeByStartup = TRUE. ENO characteristics ENO is set depending on the operating mode. If State = 0, then ENO = FALSE. If State 0, then ENO = TRUE. Setpoint value specification during tuning You configure the permitted fluctuation of the setpoint during tuning at the CancelTuningLevel tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 253 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Value range for output value limits The value 0.0 no longer has to fall within the output value limits. Pre-assigning the integral action Using the tags IntegralResetMode and OverwriteInitialOutputValue, you can determine the pre-assignment of the integral action when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode". Switching a disturbance variable on You can switch a disturbance variable on at the Disturbance parameter. Default value of PID parameters The following default settings have been changed: - Proportional action weighting (PWeighting) from 0.0 to 1.0 - Derivative action weighting (DWeighting) from 0.0 to 1.0 - Coefficient for derivative delay (TdFiltRatio) from 0.0 to 0.2 Renaming tags The static tags have been given new names that are compatible with PID_3Step. PID_Compact V1.2 Manual mode on CPU startup If ManualEnable = TRUE when the CPU starts, PID_Compact starts in manual mode. A rising edge at ManualEnable is not necessary. Pretuning If the CPU is switched off during pretuning, pretuning starts again when the CPU is switched back on. PID_Compact V1.1 Manual mode on CPU startup When the CPU starts up, PID_Compact only switches to manual mode with a rising edge at ManualEnable. Without rising edge, PID_Compact starts in the last operating mode in which ManualEnable was FALSE. Reaction to reset A rising edge at Reset resets the errors and warnings and clears the integral action. A falling edge at Reset triggers a switchover to the most recently active operating mode. Default of process value high limit The default value of r_Pv_Hlm has been changed to 120.0. PID control 254 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Monitoring the sampling time - An error is no longer output when the current sampling time is 1.5 x current mean value or when the current sampling time is 0.5 x current mean value. The sampling time may deviate much more in automatic mode. - PID_Compact is compatible with FW, V2.0 or higher. Access to tags The following tags can now be used in the user program. - i_Event_SUT - i_Event_TIR - r_Ctrl_Ioutv Troubleshooting PID_Compact now outputs the correct pulses when the shortest ON time is not equal to the shortest OFF time. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 255 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.2 Compatibility with CPU and FW The following table shows which version of PID_Compact can be used on which CPU. CPU FW PID_Compact S7-1200 V4.2 or higher V2.3 V2.2 V1.2 V4.0 to V4.1 V2.2 V1.2 V3.x V1.2 V2.x V1.2 V1.1 V1.1 S7-1500 V1.x V1.0 as of V2.5 V2.4 V2.3 V2.2 V2.1 V2.0 V2.0 and V2.1 V2.3 V2.2 V2.1 V2.0 V1.5 to V1.8 V2.2 V2.1 V2.0 V1.1 V2.1 V2.0 V1.0 V2.0 PID control 256 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.3 CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_Compact V2.x CPU processing time Typical CPU processing times of the PID_Compact technology object as of Version V2.0, depending on CPU type. CPU Typ. CPU processing time PID_Compact V2.x CPU 1211C V4.0 300 s CPU 1215C V4.0 300 s CPU 1217C V4.0 300 s CPU 1505S V1.0 45 s CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 85 s CPU 1511-1 PN V1.5 85 s CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 85 s CPU 1516-3 PN/DP V1.5 50 s CPU 1518-4 PN/DP V1.5 4 s Memory requirement Memory requirement of an instance DB of the PID_Compact technology object as of Version V2.0. Memory requirement Memory requirement of the instance DB of PID_Compact V2.x Load memory requirement Approx. 12000 bytes Total work memory requirement 788 bytes Retentive work memory requirement 44 bytes PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 257 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4 PID_Compact V2 9.1.4.1 Description of PID_Compact V2 Description The PID_Compact instruction provides a PID controller with integrated tuning for actuators with proportional action. The following operating modes are possible: Inactive Pretuning Fine tuning Automatic mode Manual mode Substitute output value with error monitoring For a more detailed description of the operating modes, see the State parameter. PID algorithm PID_Compact is a PIDT1 controller with anti-windup and weighting of the proportional and derivative actions. The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation: Symbol Description y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integral action time TD Derivative action time a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) c Derivative action weighting PID control 258 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Block diagram of PID_Compact Block diagram of PIDT1 with anti-windup PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 259 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Call PID_Compact is called in the constant time scale of a cycle interrupt OB. If you call PID_Compact as a multi-instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for PID_Compact directly in the multi-instance DB and commission it via a watch table. Download to device The actual values of retentive variables are only updated when you download PID_Compact completely. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Startup When the CPU starts up, PID_Compact starts in the operating mode that is saved in the Mode in/out parameter. To switch to "Inactive" operating mode during startup, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. Reaction to error In automatic mode and during commissioning, the reaction to error depends on the SetSubstituteOutput and ActivateRecoverMode variables. In manual mode, the reaction is independent of SetSubstituteOutput and ActivateRecoverMode. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the reaction additionally depends on the error that occurred. SetSubstituteOutput ActivateRecoverMode Configuration editor > output value > Set Output to Reaction Not relevant FALSE Zero (inactive) Switch to "Inactive" mode (State = 0) FALSE TRUE Current output value while error is pending Switch to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode (State = 5) The value 0.0 0 is transferred to the actuator. The current output value is transferred to the actuator while the error is pending. TRUE TRUE Substitute output value while error is pending Switch to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode (State = 5) The value at SubstituteOutput is transferred to the actuator while the error is pending. In manual mode, PID_Compact uses ManualValue as output value, unless ManualValue is invalid. If ManualValue is invalid, SubstituteOutput is used. If ManualValue and SubstituteOutput are invalid, Config.OutputLowerLimit is used. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error = FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. ErrorBits is reset by a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 260 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.2 Mode of operation of PID_Compact V2 Monitoring process value limits You specify the high limit and low limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperLimit and Config.InputLowerLimit tags. If the process value is outside these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0001h). You specify a high and low warning limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperWarning and Config.InputLowerWarning tags. If the process value is outside these warning limits, a warning occurs (Warning = 0040h), and the InputWarning_H or InputWarning_L output parameter changes to TRUE. Limiting the setpoint You specify a high limit and low limit of the setpoint in the Config.SetpointUpperLimit and Config.SetpointLowerLimit tags. PID_Compact automatically limits the setpoint to the process value limits. You can limit the setpoint to a smaller range. PID_Compact checks whether this range falls within the process value limits. If the setpoint is outside these limits, the high or low limit is used as the setpoint, and output parameter SetpointLimit_H or SetpointLimit_L is set to TRUE. The setpoint is limited in all operating modes. Limiting the output value You specify a high limit and low limit of the output value in the Config.OutputUpperLimit and Config.OutputLowerLimit tags. Output, ManualValue and SubstituteOutput are limited to these values. The output value limits must match the control logic. The valid output value limit values depend on the Output used. Output -100.0 to 100.0% Output_PER -100.0 to 100.0% Output_PWM 0.0 to 100.0% Rule: OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit Note Use with two or more actuators PID_Compact is not suitable for use with two or more actuators (for example, in heating/cooling applications), because different actuators need different PID parameters to achieve a good control response. Use PID_Temp for applications with two actuators acting in opposite directions. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 261 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Substitute output value In the event of an error, PID_Compact can output a substitute output value that you define at the SubstituteOutput tag. The substitute output value must be within the output value limits. Monitoring signal validity The values of the following parameters are monitored for validity when used: Setpoint Input Input_PER Disturbance ManualValue SubstituteOutput Output Output_PER Output_PWM Monitoring of the sampling time PID_Compact Ideally, the sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The PID_Compact instruction measures the time interval between two calls. This is the current sampling time. On every switchover of operating mode and during the initial startup, the mean value is formed from the first 10 sampling times. Too great a difference between the current sampling time and this mean value triggers an error (Error = 0800h). The error occurs during tuning if: New mean value >= 1.1 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.9 x old mean value The error occurs in automatic mode if: New mean value >= 1.5 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.5 x old mean value If you deactivate the sampling time monitoring (CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE), you can also call PID_Compact in OB1. You must then accept a lower control quality due to the deviating sampling time. PID control 262 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Sampling time of the PID algorithm The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time. All other functions of PID_Compact are executed at every call. If you use Output_PWM, the accuracy of the output signal is determined by the ratio of the PID algorithm sampling time to the cycle time of the OB. The cycle time should be at least 10 times the PID algorithm sampling time. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. For cooling and discharge control systems, it may be necessary to invert the control logic. PID_Compact does not work with negative proportional gain. If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. The control logic is also taken into account during pretuning and fine tuning. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 263 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.3 Table 9- 1 Input parameters of PID_Compact V2 Input parameters of PID_Compact V2 Parameter Data type Default Description Setpoint REAL 0.0 Setpoint of the PID controller in automatic mode Input REAL 0.0 A tag of the user program is used as source for the process value. If you are using parameter Input, then Config.InputPerOn = FALSE must be set. Input_PER INT 0 An analog input is used as the source of the process value. If you are using parameter Input_PER, then Config.InputPerOn = TRUE must be set. Disturbance REAL 0.0 Disturbance variable or precontrol value ManualEnable BOOL FALSE * A FALSE -> TRUE edge activates "manual mode", while State = 4, Mode remains unchanged. As long as ManualEnable = TRUE, you cannot change the operating mode via a rising edge at ModeActivate or use the commissioning dialog. A TRUE -> FALSE edge activates the operating mode that is specified by Mode. We recommend that you change the operating mode using ModeActivate only. * ManualValue REAL 0.0 Manual value This value is used as the output value in manual mode. Values from Config.OutputLowerLimit to Config .OutputUpperLimit are permitted. ErrorAck BOOL FALSE * FALSE -> TRUE edge ErrorBits and Warning are reset. PID control 264 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Parameter Data type Default Description Reset BOOL FALSE Restarts the controller. * * * ModeActivate BOOL FALSE * FALSE -> TRUE edge - Switch to "Inactive" mode - ErrorBits and Warnings are reset. As long as Reset = TRUE, - PID_Compact remains in "Inactive" mode (State = 0). - You cannot change the operating mode with Mode and ModeActivate or ManualEnable. - You cannot use the commissioning dialog. TRUE -> FALSE edge - If ManualEnable = FALSE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in Mode. - If Mode = 3, the integral action is treated as configured with the tag IntegralResetMode. FALSE -> TRUE edge PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 265 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.4 Table 9- 2 Output parameters of PID_Compact V2 Output parameters of PID_Compact V2 Parameter Data type Default Description ScaledInput REAL 0.0 Scaled process value The "Output", "Output_PER", and "Output_PWM" outputs can be used concurrently. Output REAL 0.0 Output value in REAL format Output_PER INT 0 Analog output value Output_PWM BOOL FALSE Pulse-width-modulated output value The output value is formed by by variable On and Off times. SetpointLimit_H BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_H = TRUE, the absolute setpoint high limit is reached (Setpoint Config.SetpointUpperLimit). The setpoint is limited to Config.SetpointUpperLimit . SetpointLimit_L BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_L = TRUE, the absolute setpoint low limit has been reached (Setpoint Config.SetpointLowerLimit). InputWarning_H BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_H = TRUE, the process value has reached or exceeded the warning high limit. InputWarning_L BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_L = TRUE, the process value has reached or fallen below the warning low limit. State INT 0 The State parameter (Page 278) shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You can change the operating mode using the input parameter Mode and a rising edge at ModeActivate. The setpoint is limited to Config.SetpointLowerLimit . * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: Pretuning * State = 2: Fine tuning * State = 3: Automatic mode * State = 4: Manual mode * State = 5: Substitute output value with error monitoring Error BOOL FALSE If Error = TRUE, at least one error message is pending in this cycle. ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The ErrorBits parameter (Page 282) shows which error messages are pending. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset upon a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 266 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.5 Table 9- 3 In/out parameters of PID_Compact V2 In/out parameters of PID_Compact V2 Parameter Data type Default Description Mode INT 4 At Mode, specify the operating mode to which PID_Compact is to switch. Options are: * Mode = 0: Inactive * Mode = 1: Pretuning * Mode = 2: Fine tuning * Mode = 3: Automatic mode * Mode = 4: Manual mode The operating mode is activated by: * Rising edge at ModeActivate * Falling edge at Reset * Falling edge at ManualEnable Cold restart of CPU if RunModeByStartup = TRUE Mode is retentive. * A detailed description of the operating modes can be found in Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278). See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 278) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 267 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.6 Static tags of PID_Compact V2 Note Change the tags identified with (1) only in "Inactive" mode to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. Tag Data type Default Description IntegralResetMode INT Up to V2.2: 1, The IntegralResetMode V2 tag (Page 287) determines how the integral actionPIDCtrl.IntegralSum is pre-assigned when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode". This setting only works for one cycle. V2.3 or higher: 4 Options are: OverwriteInitialOutputValue RunModeByStartup REAL BOOL 0.0 TRUE * IntegralResetMode = 0: Smooth * IntegralResetMode = 1: Delete * IntegralResetMode = 2: Hold * IntegralResetMode = 3: Pre-assign * IntegralResetMode = 4: Like setpoint change (only for PID_Compact with version 2.3) If one of the following conditions is met, the integral action PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is pre-assigned automatically as if Output = OverwriteInitialOutputValue in the previous cycle: * IntegralResetMode = 3 when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode". * TRUE -> FALSE edge at parameter Reset and parameter Mode = 3 * PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE in "Automatic mode" (available as of PID_Compact version 2.3) Activate operating mode at Mode parameter after CPU restart If RunModeByStartup = TRUE, PID_Compact starts in the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter after CPU startup. If RunModeByStartup = FALSE, PID_Compact remains in "Inactive" mode after CPU startup. LoadBackUp BOOL FALSE If LoadBackUp = TRUE, the last set of PID parameters is reloaded. The set was saved prior to the last tuning. LoadBackUp is automatically set back to FALSE. PhysicalUnit INT 0 Unit of measurement of the process value and setpoint, e.g., C, or F. PhysicalQuantity INT 0 Physical quantity of the process value and setpoint, e.g., temperature. ActivateRecoverMode BOOL TRUE The Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 (Page 284) determines the reaction to error. PID control 268 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description Warning DWORD 0 Tag Warning V2 (Page 286) shows the warnings since Reset = TRUE or ErrorAck =TRUE. Warning is retentive. Progress REAL 0.0 Progress of tuning as a percentage (0.0 - 100.0) CurrentSetpoint REAL 0.0 CurrentSetpoint always displays the current setpoint. This value is frozen during tuning. CancelTuningLevel REAL 10.0 Permissible fluctuation of setpoint during tuning. Tuning is not canceled until: SubstituteOutput REAL 0.0 * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel Substitute output value When the following conditions are met, the substitute output value is used: SetSubstituteOutput BOOL TRUE * An error has occurred in automatic mode. * SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE If SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the substitute output value configured is output as long as an error is pending. If SetSubstituteOutput = FALSE and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the actuator remains at the current output value as long as an error is pending. If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, SetSubstituteOutput is not effective. If SubstituteOutput is invalid (ErrorBits = 20000h), the substitute output value cannot be output. Config.InputPerOn(1) BOOL TRUE If InputPerOn = TRUE, the Input_PER parameter is used. If InputPerOn = FALSE, the Input parameter is used. Config.InvertControl(1) BOOL FALSE Invert control logic If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. Config.InputUpperLimit(1) REAL 120.0 High limit of the process value Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the standard range (overrange). This pre-assignment ensures that an error is no longer signaled due to a violation of the "Process value high limit". Only a wire-break and a short-circuit are recognized and PID_Compact reacts according to the configured reaction to error. InputUpperLimit > InputLowerLimit PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 269 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description Config.InputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of the process value Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. InputLowerLimit < InputUpperLimit Config.InputUpperWarning(1) REAL 3.402822e+38 Warning high limit of the process value If you set InputUpperWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is used as the warning high limit. If you configure InputUpperWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning high limit. InputUpperWarning > InputLowerWarning InputUpperWarning InputUpperLimit Config.InputLowerWarning(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Warning low limit of the process value If you set InputLowerWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value low limit is used as the warning low limit. If you configure InputLowerWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning low limit. InputLowerWarning < InputUpperWarning InputLowerWarning InputLowerLimit Config.OutputUpperLimit(1) REAL 100.0 High limit of output value For details, see OutputLowerLimit OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit Config.OutputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of output value For Output and Output_PER, the range of values from -100.0 to +100.0, including zero, is valid. At 100.0, Output_PER = -27648; at +100.0, Output_PER = 27648. For Output_PWM, the value range 0.0 to +100.0 applies. The output value limits must match the control logic. OutputLowerLimit < OutputUpperLimit Config.SetpointUpperLimit(1) REAL 3.402822e+38 High limit of setpoint If you configure SetpointUpperLimit outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute high limit is used as the setpoint high limit. If you configure SetpointUpperLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. Config.SetpointLowerLimit(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Low limit of the setpoint If you set SetpointLowerLimit outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute low limit is used as the setpoint low limit. If you set SetpointLowerLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. PID control 270 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description Config.MinimumOnTime(1) REAL 0.0 The minimum ON time of the pulse width modulation in seconds is rounded to MinimumOnTime = nxCycleTime.Value Config.MinimumOffTime(1) REAL 0.0 The minimum OFF time of the pulse width modulation in seconds is rounded to MinimumOffTime = nxCycleTime.Value Config.InputScaling.UpperPointIn(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaling Input_PER high Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. Config.InputScaling.LowerPointIn(1) REAL 0.0 Scaling Input_PER low Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. Config.InputScaling .UpperPointOut(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high process value Config.InputScaling .LowerPointOut(1) REAL CycleTime.StartEstimation BOOL TRUE If CycleTime.StartEstimation = TRUE, the automatic determination of the cycle time is started. CycleTime.StartEstimation = FALSE once measurement is complete. CycleTime.EnEstimation BOOL TRUE If CycleTime.EnEstimation = TRUE, the PID_Compact sampling time is calculated. Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. 0.0 Scaled low process value Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. If CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE, the PID_Compact sampling time is not calculated and you need to correct the configuration of CycleTime.Value manually. CycleTime.EnMonitoring BOOL TRUE If CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE, the PID_Compact sampling time is not monitored. If it is not possible to execute PID_Compact within the sampling time, no error (ErrorBits=0800h) is output and PID_Compact does not switch to "Inactive" mode. CycleTime.Value(1) REAL 0.1 PID_Compact sampling time in seconds CycleTime.Value is determined automatically and is usually equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. CtrlParamsBackUp.Gain REAL 1.0 Saved proportional gain You can reload values from the CtrlParamsBackUp structure with LoadBackUp = TRUE. CtrlParamsBackUp.Ti REAL 20.0 Saved integral action time [s] CtrlParamsBackUp.Td REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action time [s] CtrlParamsBackUp.TdFiltRatio REAL 0.2 Saved derivative delay coefficient CtrlParamsBackUp.PWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved proportional action weighting factor PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 271 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description CtrlParamsBackUp.DWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved derivative action weighting factor CtrlParamsBackUp.Cycle REAL 1.0 Saved sampling time of PID algorithm PIDSelfTune.SUT.CalculateParams BOOL FALSE The properties of the controlled system are saved during tuning. If SUT.CalculateParams = TRUE, the parameters for pretuning are recalculated according to these properties. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method without having to repeat controller tuning. SUT.CalculateParams is set to FALSE after the calculation. PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRule PIDSelfTune.SUT.State PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn INT INT BOOL 0 0 FALSE Methods used to calculate parameters during pretuning: * SUT.TuneRule = 0: PID according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick * SUT.TuneRule = 1: PI according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick The SUT.State tag indicates the current phase of pretuning: * State = 0: Initialize pretuning * State = 100: Calculate the standard deviation * State = 200: Find the point of inflection * State = 9900: Pretuning successful * State = 1: Pretuning not successful With the RunIn tag, you can specify that fine tuning can also be performed without pretuning. * RunIn = FALSE Pretuning is started when fine tuning is started from inactive or manual mode. If the requirements for pretuning are not met, PID_Compact reacts as if RunIn = TRUE. If fine tuning is started from automatic mode, the system uses the existing PID parameters to control to the setpoint. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact switches to the mode from which tuning was started. * RunIn = TRUE The pretuning is skipped. PID_Compact tries to reach the setpoint with minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning then starts automatically. RunIn is set to FALSE after fine tuning. PID control 272 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR.CalculateParams BOOL FALSE The properties of the controlled system are saved during tuning. If TIR.CalculateParams = TRUE, the parameters for fine tuning are recalculated according to these properties. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method without having to repeat controller tuning. TIR.CalculateParams is set to FALSE after the calculation. PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRule PIDSelfTune.TIR.State INT INT 0 0 Methods used to calculate parameters during fine tuning: * TIR.TuneRule = 0: PID automatic * TIR.TuneRule = 1: PID fast * TIR.TuneRule = 2: PID slow * TIR.TuneRule = 3: Ziegler-Nichols PID * TIR.TuneRule = 4: Ziegler-Nichols PI * TIR.TuneRule = 5: Ziegler-Nichols P The TIR.State tag indicates the current phase of fine tuning: * State = -100 Fine tuning is not possible. Pretuning will be performed first. * State = 0: Initialize fine tuning * State = 200: Calculate the standard deviation * State = 300: Attempt to reach setpoint * State = 400: Attempt to reach setpoint with existing PID parameters (if pretuning was successful) * State = 500: Determine oscillation and calculate parameters * State = 9900: Fine tuning successful * State = 1: Fine tuning not successful PIDCtrl.IntegralSum(1) REAL 0.0 Current integral action PIDCtrl.PIDInit BOOL FALSE PIDCtrl.PIDInit is available as of PID_Compact version 2.3. If PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE in "Automatic mode", the integral action PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is pre-assigned automatically as if Output = OverwriteInitialOutputValue in the previous cycle. This can be used for a Override control with PID_Compact V2 (Page 93). Retain.CtrlParams.Gain(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional gain To invert the control logic, use the Config.InvertControl tag. Negative values at Gain also invert the control logic. We recommend you use only InvertControl to set the control logic. The control logic is also inverted if InvertControl = TRUE and Gain < 0.0. Gain is retentive. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 273 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.Ti(1) REAL 20.0 * CtrlParams.Ti > 0.0: Active integral action time * CtrlParams.Ti = 0.0: Integral action is deactivated Ti is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Td(1) REAL 0.0 * CtrlParams.Td > 0.0: Active derivative action time CtrlParams.Td = 0.0: Derivative action is deactivated Td is retentive. * Retain.CtrlParams.TdFiltRatio(1) REAL 0.2 Active derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient * 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. * 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. TdFiltRatio is retentive. * Retain.CtrlParams.PWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional action weighting The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * PWeighting is retentive. PID control 274 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.DWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * DWeighting is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Cycle(1) REAL 1.0 Active sampling time of the PID algorithm CtrlParams.Cycle is calculated during tuning and rounded to an integer multiple of CycleTime .Value.CtrlParams.Cycle is used as time period of the pulse width modulation. Cycle is retentive. See also Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 (Page 284) Tag Warning V2 (Page 286) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 275 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.7 Changing the PID_Compact V2 interface The following table shows what has changed in the PID_Compact instruction interface. PID_Compact V1 PID_Compact V2 Change Input_PER Input_PER Data type from Word to Int Disturbance New ErrorAck New ModeActivate New Output_PER Output_PER Data type from Word to Int Error ErrorBits Renamed Error New Mode New RunModeByStartup Function sb_RunModeByStartup IntegralResetMode OverwriteInitialOutputValue New SetSubstituteOutput New CancelTuningLevel New SubstituteOutput New The following table shows which variables have been renamed. PID_Compact V1.x PID_Compact V2 sb_GetCycleTime CycleTime.StartEstimation sb_EnCyclEstimation CycleTime.EnEstimation sb_EnCyclMonitoring CycleTime.EnMonitoring sb_RunModeByStartup RunModeByStartup si_Unit PhysicalUnit si_Type PhysicalQuantity sd_Warning Warning sBackUp.r_Gain CtrlParamsBackUp.Gain sBackUp.r_Ti CtrlParamsBackUp.Ti sBackUp.r_Td CtrlParamsBackUp.Td sBackUp.r_A CtrlParamsBackUp.TdFiltRatio sBackUp.r_B CtrlParamsBackUp.PWeighting sBackUp.r_C CtrlParamsBackUp.DWeighting sBackUp.r_Cycle CtrlParamsBackUp.Cycle sPid_Calc.r_Cycle CycleTime.Value sPid_Calc.b_RunIn PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn sPid_Calc.b_CalcParamSUT PIDSelfTune.SUT.CalculateParams sPid_Calc.b_CalcParamTIR PIDSelfTune.TIR.CalculateParams sPid_Calc.i_CtrlTypeSUT PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRule sPid_Calc.i_CtrlTypeTIR PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRule sPid_Calc.r_Progress Progress PID control 276 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact PID_Compact V1.x PID_Compact V2 sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Hlm Config.SetpointUpperLimit sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Llm Config.SetpointLowerLimit sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_IN_1 Config.InputScaling.LowerPointIn sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_IN_2 Config.InputScaling.UpperPointIn sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_OUT_1 Config.InputScaling.LowerPointOut sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_OUT_2 Config.InputScaling.UpperPointOut sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Hlm Config.OutputUpperLimit sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Llm Config.OutputLowerLimit sPid_Cmpt.b_Input_PER_On Config.InputPerOn sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp LoadBackUp sPid_Cmpt.b_InvCtrl Config.InvertControl sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Pwm_PPTm Config.MinimumOnTime sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Pwm_PBTm Config.MinimumOffTime sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Hlm Config.InputUpperLimit sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Llm Config.InputLowerLimit sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_HWrn Config.InputUpperWarning sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_LWrn Config.InputLowerWarning sParamCalc.i_Event_SUT PIDSelfTune.SUT.State sParamCalc.i_Event_TIR PIDSelfTune.TIR.State sRet.i_Mode sRet.i_Mode has been omitted. The operating mode is changed using Mode and ModeActivate. sRet.r_Ctrl_Gain Retain.CtrlParams.Gain sRet.r_Ctrl_Ti Retain.CtrlParams.Ti sRet.r_Ctrl_Td Retain.CtrlParams.Td sRet.r_Ctrl_A Retain.CtrlParams.TdFiltRatio sRet.r_Ctrl_B Retain.CtrlParams.PWeighting sRet.r_Ctrl_C Retain.CtrlParams.DWeighting sRet.r_Ctrl_Cycle Retain.CtrlParams.Cycle PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 277 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.8 Parameters State and Mode V2 Correlation of the parameters The State parameter shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You cannot change the State parameter. With a rising edge at ModeActivate, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode saved in the Mode in-out parameter. When the CPU is switched on or switches from Stop to RUN mode, PID_Compact starts in the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. To leave PID_Compact in "Inactive" mode, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. Meaning of values State / Mode Description of operating mode 0 Inactive In "Inactive" operating mode, the output value 0.0 is always output, regardless of Config.OutputUpperLimit and Config.OutputLowerLimit. Pulse width modulation is off. 1 Pretuning The pretuning determines the process response to a jump change of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The PID parameters are calculated from the maximum rate of rise and dead time of the controlled system. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. Pretuning requirements: * Inactive (State = 0), manual mode (State = 4), or automatic mode (State = 3) * ManualEnable = FALSE * Reset = FALSE * The process value must not be too close to the setpoint. |Setpoint - Input| > 0.3 * | Config.InputUpperLimit - Config.InputLowerLimit| and |Setpoint - Input| > 0.5 * |Setpoint| * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Tuning is canceled when: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel Before the PID parameters are recalculated, they are backed up and can be reactivated with LoadBackUp. The controller switches to automatic mode following successful pretuning. If pretuning is unsuccessful, the switchover of the operating mode is dependent on ActivateRecoverMode. The phase of pretuning is indicated with PIDSelfTune.SUT.State. PID control 278 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact State / Mode Description of operating mode 2 Fine tuning Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are recalculated based on the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_Compact automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Tuning is canceled when: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel Before the PID parameters are recalculated, they are backed up and can be reactivated with LoadBackUp. Requirements for fine tuning: * No disturbances are expected. * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. * ManualEnable = FALSE * Reset = FALSE * Automatic (State = 3), inactive (State = 0) or manual (State = 4) mode Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started from: * Automatic mode (State = 3) Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_Compact controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. * Inactive (State = 0) or manual mode (State = 4) If the requirements for pretuning are met, pretuning is started. The determined PID parameters will be used for control until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. If the process value for pretuning is already too near the setpoint or PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = TRUE, an attempt is made to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Only then will fine tuning start. The controller switches to automatic mode following successful fine tuning. If fine tuning is unsuccessful, the switchover of the operating mode is dependent on ActivateRecoverMode. The "Fine tuning" phase is indicated with PIDSelfTune.TIR.State. 3 Automatic mode In automatic mode, PID_Compact corrects the controlled system in accordance with the parameters specified. The controller switches to automatic mode if one the following requirements is fulfilled: * Pretuning successfully completed * Fine tuning successfully completed * Changing of the Mode in-out parameter to the value 3 and a rising edge at ModeActivate. The switchover from automatic mode to manual mode is only bumpless if carried out in the commissioning editor. The ActivateRecoverMode tag is taken into consideration in automatic mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 279 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact State / Mode Description of operating mode 4 Manual mode In manual mode, you specify a manual output value in the ManualValue parameter. You can also activate this operating mode using ManualEnable = TRUE. We recommend that you change the operating mode using Mode and ModeActivate only. The switchover from manual mode to automatic mode is bumpless. Manual mode is also possible when an error is pending. 5 Substitute output value with error monitoring The control algorithm is deactivated. The SetSubstituteOutput tag determines which output value is output in this operating mode. * SetSubstituteOutput = FALSE: Last valid output value * SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE: Substitute output value You cannot activate this operating mode using Mode = 5. In the event of an error, it is activated instead of "Inactive" operating mode if all the following conditions are met: * Automatic mode (Mode = 3) * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE * One or more errors have occurred in which ActivateRecoverMode is effective. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. PID control 280 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact ENO characteristics If State = 0, then ENO = FALSE. If State 0, then ENO = TRUE. Automatic switchover of operating mode during commissioning Automatic mode is activated following successful pretuning or fine tuning. The following table shows how Mode and State change during successful pretuning. Cycle no. Mode State Action 0 4 4 Set Mode = 1 1 1 4 Set ModeActivate = TRUE 1 4 1 Value of State is saved in Mode parameter Pretuning is started n 4 1 Pretuning successfully completed n 3 3 Automatic mode is started PID_Compact automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following table shows how Mode and State change during pretuning with errors. Cycle no. Mode State Action 0 4 4 Set Mode = 1 1 1 4 Set ModeActivate = TRUE 1 4 1 Value of State is saved in Mode parameter Pretuning is started n 4 1 Pretuning canceled n 4 4 Manual mode is started If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter is activated. At the start of pretuning or fine tuning, PID_Compact has saved the value of State in the Mode in/out parameter. PID_Compact therefore switches to the operating mode from which tuning was started. If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, the system switches to "Inactive" operating mode. See also Output parameters of PID_Compact V2 (Page 266) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 281 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.9 Parameter ErrorBits V2 If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the ErrorBits are displayed with binary addition. The display of ErrorBits = 0003h, for example, indicates that the errors 0001h and 0002h are pending simultaneously. In manual mode, PID_Compact uses ManualValue as output value. The exception is Errorbits = 10000h. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000 There is no error. 0001 The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * Input > Config.InputUpperLimit or * Input < Config.InputLowerLimit If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact remains in automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0002 Invalid value at "Input_PER" parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0004 Error during fine tuning. Oscillation of the process value could not be maintained. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0008 Error at start of pretuning. The process value is too close to the setpoint. Start fine tuning. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0010 The setpoint was changed during tuning. You can set the permitted fluctuation of the setpoint at the CancelTuningLevel tag. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0020 Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact remains in fine tuning mode. 0080 Error during pretuning. The output value limits are not configured correctly or the actual value does not react as expected. Check whether the limits of the output value are configured correctly and match the control logic. Also make sure that the actual value does not oscillate strongly before starting pretuning. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0100 Error during fine tuning resulted in invalid parameters. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control 282 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0200 Invalid value at "Input" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0400 Calculation of output value failed. Check the PID parameters. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0800 Sampling time error: PID_Compact is not called within the sampling time of the cyclic interrupt OB. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact remains in automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. If this error occurred during simulation with PLCSIM, see the notes under Simulating PID_Compact V2 with PLCSIM (Page 97). 1000 Invalid value at "Setpoint" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 10000 Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. Value has an invalid number format. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before an error occurred, PID_Compact uses SubstituteOutput as the output value. As soon as you specify a valid value in ManualValue, PID_Compact uses it as the output value. 20000 Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. Value has an invalid number format. PID_Compact uses the output value low limit as the output value. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. 40000 Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, Disturbance is set to zero. PID_Compact remains in automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Compact switches to the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter. If Disturbance in the current phase has no effect on the output value, tuning is not be canceled. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 283 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.10 Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 The ActivateRecoverMode tag determines the reaction to error. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error = FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. Automatic mode NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Compact remains in automatic mode even if there is an error and the process limit values are exceeded. This may damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE PID_Compact automatically switches to "Inactive" mode in the event of an error. The controller is only activated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. TRUE If errors occur frequently in automatic mode, this setting has a negative effect on the control response, because PID_Compact switches between the calculated output value and the substitute output value at each error. In this case, check the ErrorBits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_Compact stays in automatic mode: * 0001h: The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * 0800h: Sampling time error * 40000h: Invalid value at parameter Disturbance. If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_Compact switches to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode: * 0002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. * 0200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. * 0400h: Calculation of output value failed. * 1000h: Invalid value at Setpoint parameter. If the following error occurs, PID_Compact switches to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode and moves the actuator to Config.OutputLowerLimit: * 20000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. Value has an invalid number format. This characteristics are independent of SetSubstituteOutput. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_Compact switches back to automatic mode. PID control 284 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Pretuning and fine tuning ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE PID_Compact automatically switches to "Inactive" mode in the event of an error. The controller is only activated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. TRUE If the following error occurs, PID_Compact remains in the active mode: * 0020h: Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. The following errors are ignored: * 10000h: Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. * 20000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. When any other error occurs, PID_Compact cancels the tuning and switches to the mode from which tuning was started. Manual mode ActivateRecoverMode is not effective in manual mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 285 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.11 Tag Warning V2 If several warnings are pending simultaneously, the values of the Warning tag are displayed with binary addition. The display of warning 0003h, for example, indicates that the warnings 0001h and 0002h are pending simultaneously. Warning Description (DW#16#....) 0000 No warning pending. 0001 The point of inflection was not found during pretuning. 0004 The setpoint was limited to the configured limits. 0008 Not all the necessary controlled system properties were defined for the selected method of calculation. Instead, the PID parameters were calculated using the TIR.TuneRule = 3 method. 0010 The operating mode could not be changed because Reset = TRUE or ManualEnable = TRUE. 0020 The cycle time of the calling OB limits the sampling time of the PID algorithm. Improve results by using shorter OB cycle times. 0040 The process value exceeded one of its warning limits. 0080 Invalid value at Mode. The operating mode is not switched. 0100 The manual value was limited to the limits of the controller output. 0200 The specified rule for tuning is not supported. No PID parameters are calculated. 1000 The substitute output value cannot be reached because it is outside the output value limits. The following warnings are deleted as soon as the cause is eliminated: 0001h 0004h 0008h 0040h 0100h All other warnings are cleared with a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 286 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.12 IntegralResetMode V2 tag The IntegralResetMode tag determines how the integral action PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is preassigned: When switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" With edge TRUE -> FALSE at parameter Reset and parameter Mode = 3 This setting only works for one cycle and is only effective if the integral action is activated (Retain.CtrlParams.Ti > 0.0 tag). IntegralResetMode Description 0 Smooth The value of PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is pre-assigned so that the switchover is bumpless, which means "Automatic mode" starts with the output value = 0.0 (parameter Output) and there is no jump of the output value regardless of the control deviation (setpoint - actual value). 1 Delete We recommend setting the weighting of the proportional action (Retain.CtrlParams.PWeighting) to 1.0 if this option is used. The value of PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is deleted. Any control deviation will cause a jump change of the output value. The direction of the output value jump depends on the configured weighting of the proportional action (Retain.CtrlParams.PWeighting tag) and the control deviation: * Proportional action weighting = 1.0: Output value jump and control deviation have identical signs. Example: If the actual value value is smaller than the setpoint (positive control deviation), the output value jumps to a positive value. * Proportional action weighting < 1.0: For large control deviations, the output value jump and control deviation have identical signs. Example: If the actual value is much smaller than the setpoint (positive control deviation), the output value jumps to a positive value. For small control deviations, the output value jump and control deviation have different signs. Example: If the actual value value is just below the setpoint (positive control deviation), the output value jumps to a negative value. This is usually not desirable, because it results in a temporary increase in the control deviation. The smaller the configured weighting of the proportional action, the greater the control deviation must be to receive an output value jump with identical sign. We recommend setting the weighting of the proportional action (Retain.CtrlParams.PWeighting) to 1.0 when this option is used. Otherwise, you may experience the undesirable behavior described for small control deviations. Alternatively, you can also use IntegralResetMode = 4. This option guarantees identical signs of the output value jump and control deviation independent of the configured weighting of the proportional action and the control deviation. 2 Hold The value of PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is not changed. You can define a new value using the user program. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 287 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact IntegralResetMode Description 3 Pre-assign The value of PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is automatically pre-assigned as if Output = OverwriteInitialOutputValue in the last cycle. 4 Like setpoint change (only for PID_Compact with version 2.3) The value of PIDCtrl.IntegralSum is automatically pre-assigned so that a similar output value jump results as for a PI controller in automatic mode in case of a setpoint change from the current actual value to the current setpoint. Any control deviation will cause a jump of the output value. Output value jump and control deviation have identical signs. Example: If the actual value value is smaller than the setpoint (positive control deviation), the output value jumps to a positive value. This is independent of the configured weighting of the proportional action and the control deviation. If IntegralResetMode is assigned a value outside the valid value range, PID_Compact behaves as with the pre-assignment of IntegralResetMode: PID_Compact up to V2.2: IntegralResetMode = 1 PID_Compact V2.3 and higher: IntegralResetMode = 4 All statements made above regarding the sign of the output value jump are based on a normal control logic (Config.InvertControl = FALSE tag). With an inverted control logic (Config.InvertControl = TRUE), the output value jump will have a reverse sign. PID control 288 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.4.13 Sample program for PID_Compact In the following example, you are controlling temperature values with the technology object of the instruction "PID_Compact". The temperature values are simulated based on a block which simulates a delay element of the third order (PT3 element). The PID parameters of the technology object can be set automatically via the pretuning. Data storage Create seven tags in a global data block for storage of the interconnection data. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 289 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Interconnection of the parameters You call the following interconnections in a cyclic interrupt OB. Network 1: You interconnect the parameters of the instruction "PID_Compact" as follows. Network 2: You interconnect the parameters of the block simulating the temperature values "SLI_PROC_C" as follows. PID control 290 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Technology object You configure the technology object with the properties of the instruction "PID_Compact" or by using the path Technology object > Configuration. The controller type and the input/output parameters are important for the example. With the controller type, you make a preselection for the unit of the value to the controlled. In this example, "Temperature" with the unit "C" is used as controller type. The parameters of the "PID_Compact" are already interconnected with global tags. Therefore, the information on use of the parameters Input and Output is sufficient. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 291 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Procedure for starting the control After the download to the CPU the PID_Compact is in manual mode with manual value 0.0. To start the control, follow these steps: 1. Open the Commissioning of the technology object "SLI_Tech_PID_Compact". 2. Click the "Start" button in the "Measurement" area. Measurement starts and PID_Compact can be activated. 3. Pretuning is selected. Click the "Start" button in the "Tuning mode" area. A pretuning is performed. The PID parameters are automatically adjusted to the process. After the completion of the pretuning PID_Compact switches to automatic mode. Note Alternative to start PID_Compact Alternatively, you can switch PID_Compact to automatic mode in the "Online status of controller" area with the "Stop PID_Compact" / "Start PID_Compact" without pretuning. In this case the controller uses default values for the PID parameters and shows a worse controller behavior for the application case. PID control 292 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Procedure for stopping control To stop and exit PID_Compact and the program, follow these steps: 1. Click the "Stop PID_Compact" button in the technology object "SLI_Tech_PID_Compact" in the "Online status of controller" area. The instruction "PID_Compact" exits the control and outputs the value "0.0" as manipulated variable. 2. Click the "Stop" button in the "Measurement" area. 3. To set the process value immediately to the value "0.0", follow these steps: In the block "SLI_OB_PID_Compact", set the "resetAll" tag to the value "TRUE", and then to the value "FALSE". PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 293 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact "PID_Compact" instruction The setpoint for the temperature that is to be controlled is specified at the parameter Setpoint ("setpoint"). The control is started when the instruction "PID_Compact" was started with the technology object. The instruction "PID_Compact" outputs a manipulated variable at the output parameter Output ("outputValue"). The process value of the temperature is transferred to the instruction "PID_Compact" with the input parameter Input ("inputValue"). The instruction "PID_Compact" adjusts the manipulated variable ("outputValue") depending on the history of the difference between setpoint ("setpoint") and process value ("inputValue") . The process is repeated so that the process value ("inputValue") approaches the setpoint ("setpoint") through the manipulated variable ("outputValue"). The current operating mode of the instruction "PID_Compact" is displayed at the output parameter State ("state"). After pretuning (the value of "state" is "1"), the PID_Compact switches to automatic mode (the value is "3"). The output parameter Error ("error") currently shows that no error is pending. The output parameter ErrorBits ("errorBits") provides information on the error type in case of error. If an error occurs, this can be acknowledged in the technology object, in the optimization status area with the "ErrorAck" button. PID control 294 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact "SLI_PROC_C" block The "SLI_PROC_C" block simulates the process value ("inputValue") of the rising temperature of a plant. The block "SLI_PROC_C" contains the manipulated variable of the controller ("outputValue) and simulates the temperature behavior of the process. This temperature is fed as process value ("inputValue") into the controller. A change in the values of the "resetAll" tag (of the comRst parameter) has the following effects: Parameter comRst ("resetAll") The instruction "PID_Compact" is running The instruction "PID_Compact" was stopped comRst ("resetAll") The "SLI_PROC_C" block outputs a remains set to the value new process value ("inputValue") "FALSE" based on a manipulated variable ("outputValue"). The "SLI_PROC_C" block does not receive a manipulated variable > "0.0", but it still outputs a new process value > "0.0". comRst ("resetAll"): Change from "FALSE" to the value "TRUE" The output process value ("inputValue") / the temperature of the "SLI_PROC_C" block is reset to "0.0". Both manipulated variable ("outputValue") and output process value ("inputValue") are reset to "0.0". comRst ("resetAll"): Temperature control starts again. Change from "TRUE" to the value "FALSE" The output process value / the temperature ("inputValue") remains "0.0". PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 295 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Program code You can find additional information about the program code for the above-named example under the keyword "Sample Library for Instructions". PID control 296 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5 PID_Compact V1 9.1.5.1 Description of PID_Compact V1 Description The PID_Compact instruction provides a PID controller with integrated tuning for automatic and manual mode. Call PID_Compact is called in the constant interval of the cycle time of the calling OB (preferably in a cyclic interrupt OB). Download to device The actual values of retentive tags are only updated when you download PID_Compact completely. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Startup At the startup of the CPU, PID_Compact starts in the operating mode that was last active. To retain PID_ Compact in "Inactive" mode, set sb_RunModeByStartup = FALSE. Monitoring of the sampling time PID_Compact Ideally, the sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The PID_Compact instruction measures the time interval between two calls. This is the current sampling time. On every switchover of operating mode and during the initial startup, the mean value is formed from the first 10 sampling times. If the current sampling time deviates too much from this mean value, Error = 0800 hex occurs and PID_Compact switches to "Inactive" mode. PID_Compact, Version 1.1 or higher is set to "Inactive" mode during controller tuning under the following conditions: New mean value >= 1.1 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.9 x old mean value In automatic mode, PID_Compact, Version 1.1 or higher, is set to "Inactive" mode under the following conditions: New mean value >= 1.5 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.5 x old mean value PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 297 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact During controller tuning and in automatic mode, PID_Compact 1.0 is set to "Inactive" operating mode under the following conditions: New mean value >= 1.1 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.9 x old mean value Current sampling time >= 1.5 x current mean value Current sampling time <= 0.5 x current mean value Sampling time of the PID algorithm The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time. All other functions of PID_Compact are executed at every call. PID algorithm PID_Compact is a PIDT1 controller with anti-windup and weighting of the proportional and derivative actions. The following equation is used to calculate the output value. Symbol Description y Output value Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integral action time a Derivative delay coefficient (T1 = a x TD) Derivative action time c Derivative action weighting PID control 298 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Block diagram of PID_Compact Block diagram of PIDT1 with anti-windup PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 299 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Reaction to error If errors occur, they are output in parameter Error, and PID_Compact changes to "Inactive" mode. Reset the errors using the Reset parameter. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. For cooling and discharge control systems, it may be necessary to invert the control logic. PID_Compact does not work with negative proportional gain. If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. The control logic is also taken into account during pretuning and fine tuning. See also Control mode V1 (Page 99) PID control 300 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.2 Table 9- 4 Input parameters of PID_Compact V1 Input parameters of PID_Compact V1 Parameter Data type Default Description Setpoint REAL 0.0 Setpoint of the PID controller in automatic mode Input REAL 0.0 A variable of the user program is used as source for the process value. If you are using parameter Input, then sPid_Cmpt.b_Input_PER_On = FALSE must be set. Input_PER WORD W#16#0 Analog input as the source of the process value If you are using parameter Input_PER, then sPid_Cmpt.b_Input_PER_On = TRUE must be set. ManualEnable BOOL FALSE * A FALSE -> TRUE edge selects "Manual mode", while State = 4, sRet.i_Mode remains unchanged. A TRUE -> FALSE edge selects the most recently active operating mode, State =sRet.i_Mode A change of sRet.i_Mode will not take effect during ManualEnable = TRUE. The change of sRet.i_Mode will only be considered upon a TRUE -> FALSE edge at ManualEnable . * PID_Compact V1.2 und PID_Compact V1.0 If at start of the CPU ManualEnable = TRUE, PID_Compact starts in manual mode. A rising edge (FALSE > TRUE) at ManualEnable is not necessary. PID_Compact V1.1 At the start of the CPU, PID_Compact only switches to manual mode with a rising edge (FALSE->TRUE) at ManualEnable . Without rising edge, PID_Compact starts in the last operating mode in which ManualEnable was FALSE. ManualValue REAL 0.0 Manual value This value is used as the output value in manual mode. Reset BOOL FALSE The Reset parameter (Page 313) restarts the controller. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 301 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.3 Table 9- 5 Output parameters of PID_Compact V1 Output parameters of PID_Compact V1 Parameter Data type Default Description ScaledInput REAL 0.0 Output of the scaled process value Outputs "Output", "Output_PER", and "Output_PWM" can be used concurrently. Output REAL 0.0 Output value in REAL format Output_PER WORD W#16#0 Analog output value Output_PWM BOOL FALSE Pulse-width-modulated output value The output value is formed by minimum On and Off times. SetpointLimit_H BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_H = TRUE, the setpoint absolute high limit is reached. The setpoint in the CPU is limited to the configured setpoint absolute high limit. The configured process value absolute high limit is the default for the setpoint high limit. If you set sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Hlm to a value within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. SetpointLimit_L BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_L = TRUE, the setpoint absolute low limit has been reached. In the CPU, the setpoint is limited to the configured setpoint absolute low limit. The configured process value absolute low limit is the default setting for the setpoint low limit. If you set sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Llm to a value within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. InputWarning_H BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_H = TRUE, the process value has reached or exceeded the warning high limit. InputWarning_L BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_L = TRUE, the process value has reached or fallen below the warning low limit. State INT 0 The State parameter (Page 308) shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. To change the operating mode, use variable sRet.i_Mode. Error DWORD W#16#0 * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: pretuning * State = 2: fine tuning * State = 3: Automatic mode * State = 4: Manual mode The Error parameter (Page 312) indicates the error messages. Error = 0000: No error pending. PID control 302 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.4 Static tags of PID_Compact V1 Note You must not change tags that are not listed. These are used for internal purposes only. Change the tags identified with (1) only in "Inactive" mode to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. "Inactive" mode is forced by setting the "sRet.i_Mode" tag to "0". Table 9- 6 Static tags of PID_Compact V1 Tag Data type Default Description sb_GetCycleTime BOOL TRUE If sb_GetCycleTime = TRUE, the automatic determination of the cycle time is started. CycleTime.StartEstimation = FALSE once measurement is complete. sb_EnCyclEstimation BOOL TRUE If sb_EnCyclEstimation = TRUE, the PID_Compact sampling time is not monitored. sb_EnCyclMonitoring BOOL TRUE If sb_EnCyclMonitoring = FALSE, the PID_Compact sampling time is not monitored. If it is not possible to execute PID_Compact within the sampling time, an 0800 error is not output and PID_Compact does not change to "Inactive" mode. sb_RunModeByStartup BOOL TRUE Activate Mode after CPU restart If sb_RunModeByStartup = FALSE, the controller will remain inactive after a CPU startup. After a CPU startup and if sb_RunModeByStartup = TRUE, the controller will return to the most recently active operating mode. si_Unit INT 0 Unit of measurement of the process value and setpoint, e.g., C, or F. si_Type INT 0 Physical quantity of the process value and setpoint, e.g., temperature. sd_Warning DWORD DW#16#0 Variable sd_warning (Page 315) displays the warnings generated since the reset, or since the last change of the operating mode. sBackUp.r_Gain REAL 1.0 Saved proportional gain You can reload values from the sBackUp structure with sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp = TRUE. sBackUp.r_Ti REAL 20.0 Saved integral action time [s] sBackUp.r_Td REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action time [s] sBackUp.r_A REAL 0.0 Saved derivative delay coefficient sBackUp.r_B REAL 0.0 Saved proportional action weighting factor sBackUp.r_C REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action weighting factor sBackUp.r_Cycle REAL 1.0 Saved sampling time of PID algorithm PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 303 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description sPid_Calc.r_Cycle(1) REAL 0.1 Sampling time of the PID_Compact instruction r_Cycle is determined automatically and is usually equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. sPid_Calc.b_RunIn BOOL FALSE * b_RunIn = FALSE Pretuning is started when fine tuning is started from inactive or manual mode. If the requirements for pretuning are not met, PID_Compact reacts as if b_RunIn = TRUE. If fine tuning is started from automatic mode, the system uses the existing PID parameters to control to the setpoint. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact switches to "Inactive" mode. * b_RunIn = TRUE The pretuning is skipped. PID_3Compact tries to reach the setpoint with minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning then starts automatically. b_RunIn is set to FALSE after fine tuning. sPid_Calc.b_CalcParamSUT BOOL FALSE The parameters for pretuning will be recalculated if b_CalcParamSUT = TRUE. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method without having to repeat controller tuning. b_CalcParamSUT is set to FALSE after the calculation. sPid_Calc.b_CalcParamTIR BOOL FALSE The parameters for fine tuning will be recalculated if b_CalcParamTIR = TRUE. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method without having to repeat controller tuning. b_CalcParamTIR will be set to FALSE after calculation. sPid_Calc.i_CtrlTypeSUT INT 0 Methods used to calculate parameters during pretuning: * i_CtrlTypeSUT = 0: PID according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick * i_CtrlTypeSUT = 1: PI according to Chien, Hrones and Reswick PID control 304 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description sPid_Calc.i_CtrlTypeTIR INT 0 Methods used to calculate parameters during fine tuning: * i_CtrlTypeTIR = 0: PID automatic * i_CtrlTypeTIR = 1: PID fast * i_CtrlTypeTIR = 2: PID slow * i_CtrlTypeTIR = 3: Ziegler-Nichols PID * i_CtrlTypeTIR = 4: Ziegler-Nichols PI * i_CtrlTypeTIR = 5: Ziegler-Nichols P sPid_Calc.r_Progress REAL 0.0 Progress of tuning as a percentage (0.0 - 100.0) sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Hlm(1) REAL +3.402822e+38 High limit of setpoint If you configure sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Hlm outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute high limit is used as the setpoint high limit. If you set sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Hlm within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Llm(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Low limit of the setpoint If you set sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Llm outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute low limit is used as the setpoint low limit. If you set sPid_Cmpt.r_Sp_Llm within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_IN_1(1) REAL 0.0 Scaling Input_PER low Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs r_Pv_Norm_OUT_1, r_Pv_Norm_IN_1 and r_Pv_Norm_OUT_2, r_Pv_Norm_IN_2 from the sPid_Cmpt structure. sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_IN_2(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaling Input_PER high Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs r_Pv_Norm_OUT_1, r_Pv_Norm_IN_1 and r_Pv_Norm_OUT_2, r_Pv_Norm_IN_2 from the sPid_Cmpt structure. sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_OUT_1(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low process value Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs r_Pv_Norm_OUT_1, r_Pv_Norm_IN_1 and r_Pv_Norm_OUT_2, r_Pv_Norm_IN_2 from the sPid_Cmpt structure. sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Norm_OUT_2(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high process value Input_PER is converted to percent based on the two value pairs r_Pv_Norm_OUT_1, r_Pv_Norm_IN_1 and r_Pv_Norm_OUT_2, r_Pv_Norm_IN_2 from the sPid_Cmpt structure. sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Hlm(1) REAL 100.0 Output value high limit for output parameter "Output" sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Llm(1) REAL 0.0 Low output value limit for output parameter "Output" PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 305 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description sPid_Cmpt.b_Input_PER_On(1) BOOL TRUE If b_Input_PER_On = TRUE, then parameter Input_PER is used. If b_Input_PER_On = FALSE, then parameter Input is used. sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp BOOL FALSE Activate the back-up parameter set. If an optimization has failed, you can reactivate the previous PID parameters by setting this bit. sPid_Cmpt.b_InvCtrl(1) BOOL FALSE Invert control logic With b_InvCtrl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Pwm_PPTm(1) REAL 0.0 The minimum ON time of the pulse width modulation in seconds is rounded to r_Lmn_Pwm_PPTm = r_Cycle or r_Lmn_Pwm_PPTm = n*r_Cycle sPid_Cmpt.r_Lmn_Pwm_PBTm(1) REAL 0.0 The minimum OFF time of the pulse width modulation in seconds is rounded to r_Lmn_Pwm_PBTm = r_Cycle or r_Lmn_Pwm_PBTm = n*r_Cycle sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Hlm(1) REAL 120.0 High limit of the process value At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the standard range (overrange). An error is no longer reported for a violation of the "Process value high limit". Only a wire-break and a short-circuit are recognized and the PID_Compact switches to "Inactive" mode. r_Pv_Hlm > r_Pv_Llm sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Llm(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of the process value r_Pv_Llm < r_Pv_Hlm sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_HWrn(1) REAL +3.402822e+38 Warning high limit of the process value If you set r_Pv_HWrn outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute high limit is used as the warning high limit. If you configure r_Pv_HWrn within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning high limit. r_Pv_HWrn > r_Pv_LWrn r_Pv_HWrn r_Pv_Hlm sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_LWrn(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Warning low limit of the process value If you set r_Pv_LWrn outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute low limit is used as the warning low limit. If you configure r_Pv_LWrn within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning low limit. r_Pv_LWrn < r_Pv_HWrn r_Pv_LWrn r_Pv_LWrn sPidCalc.i_Ctrl_IOutv(1) REAL 0.0 Current integral action sParamCalc.i_Event_SUT INT 0 Variable i_Event_SUT (Page 315) indicates the current phase of "pretuning": PID control 306 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Tag Data type Default Description sParamCalc.i_Event_TIR INT 0 Variable i_Event_TIR (Page 316) indicates the current phase of "fine tuning": sRet.i_Mode INT 0 The operating mode is changed edge-triggered. The following operating mode is enabled on a change to * i_Mode = 0: "Inactive" mode (controller stop) * i_Mode = 1: "Pretuning" mode * i_Mode = 2: "Fine tuning" mode * i_Mode = 3: "Automatic" mode * i_Mode = 4: "Manual" mode i_Mode is retentive. sRet.r_Ctrl_Gain(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional gain Gain is retentive. sRet.r_Ctrl_Ti(1) REAL 20.0 * r_Ctrl_Ti > 0.0: Active integral action time * r_Ctrl_Ti = 0.0: Integral action is deactivated r_Ctrl_Ti is retentive. sRet.r_Ctrl_Td(1) REAL 0.0 * r_Ctrl_Td > 0.0: Active derivative action time r_Ctrl_Td = 0.0: Derivative action is deactivated r_Ctrl_Td is retentive. * sRet.r_Ctrl_A(1) REAL 0.0 Active derivative delay coefficient r_Ctrl_A is retentive. sRet.r_Ctrl_B(1) REAL 0.0 Active proportional action weighting r_Ctrl_B is retentive. sRet.r_Ctrl_C(1) REAL 0.0 Active derivative action weighting sRet.r_Ctrl_Cycle(1) REAL 1.0 Active sampling time of the PID algorithm r_Ctrl_C is retentive. r_Ctrl_Cycle is calculated during tuning and rounded to an integer multiple of r_Cycle. r_Ctrl_Cycle is used as time period of the pulse width modulation. r_Ctrl_Cycle is retentive. See also Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 307 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.5 Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 Correlation of the parameters The State parameter indicates the current operating mode of the PID controller. You cannot modify the State parameter. You need to modify the sRet.i_Mode tag to change the operating mode. This also applies when the value for the new operating mode is already in sRet.i_Mode. First set sRet.i_Mode = 0 and then sRet.i_Mode = 3. Provided the current operating mode of the controller supports this change, State is set to the value of sRet.i_Mode. When PID_Compact automatically switches the operating mode, the following applies: State != sRet.i_Mode. Examples: Successful pretuning State = 3 and sRet.i_Mode = 1 Error State = 0 and sRet.i_Mode remains at the same value, e.g sRet.i_Mode = 3 ManualEnalbe = TRUE State = 4 and sRet.i_Mode remain at the previous value, for example, sRet.i_Mode = 3 Note You wish to repeat successful fine tuning without exiting automatic mode with i_Mode = 0. Setting sRet.i_Mode to an invalid value such as 9999 for one cycle has no effect on State. Set Mode = 2 in the next cycle. You can generate a change to sRet.i_Mode without first switching to "inactive" mode. PID control 308 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Meaning of values State / sRet.i_Mode Description of the operating mode 0 Inactive The controller is switched off. The controller was in "inactive" mode before pretuning was performed. The PID controller will change to "inactive" mode when running if an error occurs or if the "Deactivate controller" icon is clicked in the commissioning window. 1 Pretuning The pretuning determines the process response to a jump of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The optimized PID parameters are calculated as a function of the maximum rate of rise and dead time of the controlled system. Pretuning requirements: * The controller is in inactive mode or manual mode * ManualEnable = FALSE * The process value must not be too close to the setpoint. |Setpoint - Input| > 0.3 * |sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Hlm - sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Llm| and |Setpoint - Input| > 0.5 * |Setpoint| * The setpoint may not be changed during pretuning. The higher the stability of the process value, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and increase precision of the result. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. PID parameters are backed up before they are recalculated and can be reactivated with sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp. There is a change to automatic mode following successful pretuning and to "inactive" mode following unsuccessful pretuning. The phase of pretuning is indicated with Tag i_Event_SUT V1 (Page 315). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 309 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact State / sRet.i_Mode Description of the operating mode 2 Fine tuning Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are optimized based on the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. The differences between the process response during pretuning and fine tuning are analyzed. All PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of the findings. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance behavior than PID parameters from pretuning. PID_Compact automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. PID parameters are backed up before they are recalculated and can be reactivated with sPid_Cmpt.b_LoadBackUp. Requirements for fine tuning: * No disturbances are expected. * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. * The setpoint may not be changed during fine tuning. * ManualEnable = FALSE * Automatic (State = 3), inactive (State = 0) or manual (State = 4) mode Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started in: * Automatic mode (State = 3) Start fine tuning in automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters using controller tuning. PID_Comact will regulate using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. * Inactive (State = 0) or manual (State = 4) mode If the requirements for pretuning are met, pretuning is started. The PID parameters established will be used for adjustment until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_Compact will change to "Inactive" mode. An attempt is made to reach the setpoint with a minimum or maximum output value if the process value for pretuning is already too near the setpoint or sPid_Calc.b_RunIn = TRUE. This can produce increased overshoot. The controller will change to "automatic mode" after successfully completed "fine tuning" and to "inactive" mode if "fine tuning" has not been successfully completed. The "Fine tuning" phase is indicated with Tag i_Event_TIR V1 (Page 316). PID control 310 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact State / sRet.i_Mode Description of the operating mode 3 Automatic mode In automatic mode, PID_Compact corrects the controlled system in accordance with the parameters specified. The controller changes to automatic mode if one the following conditions is fulfilled: * Pretuning successfully completed * Fine tuning successfully completed * Change of variable sRet.i_Mode to the value 3. After CPU startup or change from Stop to RUN mode, PID_Compact will start in the most recently active operating mode. To retain PID_Compact in "Inactive" mode, set sb_RunModeByStartup = FALSE. 4 Manual mode In manual mode, you specify a manual output value in the ManualValue parameter. This operating mode is enabled if sRet.i_Mode = 4, or at the rising edge on ManualEnable. If ManualEnable changes to TRUE, only State will change. sRet.i_Mode will retain its current value. PID_Compact will return to the previous operating mode upon a falling edge at ManualEnable. The change to automatic mode is bumpless. See also Output parameters of PID_Compact V1 (Page 302) Pretuning V1 (Page 112) Fine tuning V1 (Page 114) "Manual" mode V1 (Page 116) Tag i_Event_SUT V1 (Page 315) Tag i_Event_TIR V1 (Page 316) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 311 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.6 Parameter Error V1 If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the error codes are displayed with binary addition. The display of error code 0003, for example, indicates that the errors 0001 and 0002 are pending simultaneously. Error (DW#16#...) Description 0000 There is no error. 0001 The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * Input > sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Hlm or * Input < sPid_Cmpt.r_Pv_Llm You cannot move the actuator again until you eliminate the error. 0002 Invalid value at "Input_PER" parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. 0004 Error during fine tuning. Oscillation of the process value could not be maintained. 0008 Error at start of pretuning. The process value is too close to the setpoint. Start fine tuning. 0010 The setpoint was changed during tuning. 0020 Pretuning is not permitted in automatic mode or during fine tuning. 0080 Error during pretuning. The output value limits are not configured correctly or the actual value does not react as expected. Check whether the limits of the output value are configured correctly and match the control logic. Also make sure that the actual value does not oscillate strongly before starting pretuning. 0100 Error during tuning resulted in invalid parameters. 0200 Invalid value at "Input" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. 0400 Calculation of output value failed. Check the PID parameters. 0800 Sampling time error: PID_Compact is not called within the sampling time of the cyclic interrupt OB. If this error occurred during simulation with PLCSIM, see the notes under Simulating PID_Compact V1 with PLCSIM (Page 117). 1000 Invalid value at "Setpoint" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. See also Output parameters of PID_Compact V1 (Page 302) PID control 312 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.7 Parameter Reset V1 The response to Reset = TRUE depends on the version of the PID_Compact instruction. Reset response PID_Compact V.1.1 or higher A rising edge at Reset triggers a change to "Inactive" mode; errors and warnings are reset and the integral action is deleted. A falling edge at Reset triggers a change to the most recently active operating mode. If automatic mode was active before, the integral action is pre-assigned in such a way that the switchover is bumpless. Activation Error Reset PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 313 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact Reset response PID_Compact V.1.0 A rising edge at Reset triggers a change to "Inactive" mode; errors and warnings are reset and the integral action is deleted. The controller is not reactivated until the next edge at i_Mode. Activation Error Reset PID control 314 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.8 Tag sd_warning V1 If several warnings are pending, the values of variable sd_warning are displayed by means of binary addition. The display of warning 0003, for example, indicates that the warnings 0001 and 0002 are also pending. sd_warning Description (DW#16#....) 0000 No warning pending. 0001 The point of inflection was not found during pretuning. 0002 Oscillation increased during fine tuning. 0004 The setpoint was outside the set limits. 0008 Not all the necessary controlled system properties were defined for the selected method of calculation. The PID parameters were instead calculated using the "i_CtrlTypeTIR = 3" method. 0010 The operating mode could not be changed because ManualEnable = TRUE. 0020 The cycle time of the calling OB limits the sampling time of the PID algorithm. Improve results by using shorter OB cycle times. 0040 The process value exceeded one of its warning limits. The following warnings are deleted as soon as the cause is dealt with: 0004 0020 0040 All other warnings are cleared with a rising edge at Reset. 9.1.5.9 Tag i_Event_SUT V1 i_Event_SUT Name 0 SUT_INIT Description Initialize pretuning 100 SUT_STDABW Calculate the standard deviation 200 SUT_GET_POI Find the point of inflection 9900 SUT_IO 1 SUT_NIO Pretuning successful Pretuning not successful See also Static tags of PID_Compact V1 (Page 303) Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 (Page 308) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 315 Instructions 9.1 PID_Compact 9.1.5.10 Tag i_Event_TIR V1 i_Event_TIR Name -100 TIR_FIRST_SUT 0 TIR_INIT Description Fine tuning is not possible. Pretuning will be executed first. Initialize fine tuning 200 TIR_STDABW Calculate the standard deviation 300 TIR_RUN_IN Attempt to reach the setpoint 400 TIR_CTRLN Attempt to reach the setpoint with the existing PID parameters (if pretuning has been successful) 500 TIR_OSZIL 9900 TIR_IO 1 TIR_NIO Determine oscillation and calculate parameters Fine tuning successful Fine tuning not successful See also Static tags of PID_Compact V1 (Page 303) Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1 (Page 308) PID control 316 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.1 New features of PID_3Step PID_3Step V2.3 As of PID_3Step Version 2.3 the monitoring and limiting of the travel time can be deactivated with Config.VirtualActuatorLimit = 0.0. PID_3Step V2.2 Use with S7-1200 As of PID_3Step V2.2, the instruction with V2 functionality can also be used on S7-1200 with firmware version 4.0 or higher. PID_3Step V2.0 Reaction to error The reaction to ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE has been completely overhauled. PID_3Step reacts in a more fault tolerant manner in the default setting. NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If you use the default setting, PID_3Step remains in automatic mode even if the process value limits are exceeded. This may damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. You use the ErrorAck input parameter to acknowledge the errors and warnings without restarting the controller or clearing the integral action. Switching operating modes does not acknowledge errors that are no longer pending. Switching the operating mode You specify the operating mode at the Mode in/out parameter and use a positive edge at ModeActivate to start the operating mode. The Retain.Mode tag has been omitted. The transition time measurement can no longer be started with GetTransitTime.Start, but only with Mode = 6 and a positive edge at ModeActivate. Multi-instance capability You can call up PID_3Step as multi-instance DB. No technology object is created in this case and no parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for PID_3Step directly in the multi-instance DB and commission it via a watch table. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 317 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Startup characteristics The operating mode specified at the Mode parameter is also started on a negative edge at Reset and during a CPU cold restart, if RunModeByStartup = TRUE. ENO characteristics ENO is set depending on the operating mode. If State = 0, then ENO = FALSE. If State 0, then ENO = TRUE. Manual mode The Manual_UP and Manual_DN input parameters no longer function as edge-triggered parameters. Edge-triggered manual mode continues to be possible using the ManualUpInternal and ManualDnInternal tags. In "Manual mode without endstop signals" (Mode = 10), the endstop signals Actuator_H and Actuator_L are ignored even though they are activated. Default value of PID parameters The following default settings have been changed: - Proportional action weighting (PWeighting) from 0.0 to 1.0 - Derivative action weighting (DWeighting) from 0.0 to 1.0 - Coefficient for derivative delay (TdFiltRatio) from 0.0 to 0.2 Limiting of motor transition time You configure the maximum percentage of the motor transition time that the actuator will travel in one direction in the Config.VirtualActuatorLimit tag. Setpoint value specification during tuning You configure the permitted fluctuation of the setpoint during tuning at the CancelTuningLevel tag. Switching a disturbance variable on You can switch a disturbance variable on at the Disturbance parameter. Troubleshooting If the endstop signals are not activated (ActuatorEndStopOn = FALSE), ScaledFeedback is determined without Actuator_H or Actuator_L. PID_3Step V1.1 Manual mode on CPU startup If ManualEnable = TRUE when the CPU starts, PID_3Step starts in manual mode. A positive edge at ManualEnable is not necessary. Reaction to error The ActivateRecoverMode tag is no longer effective in manual mode. Troubleshooting The Progress tag is reset following successful tuning or transition time measurement. PID control 318 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.2 Compatibility with CPU and FW The following table shows which version of PID_3Step can be used on which CPU. CPU FW PID_3Step S7-1200 V4.2 or higher V2.3 V2.2 V1.1 V4.0 to V4.1 V2.2 V1.1 V3.x V1.1 V1.0 V2.x V1.1 V1.0 S7-1500 V1.x - V2.0 or higher V2.3 V2.2 V2.1 V2.0 V1.5 to V1.8 V2.2 V2.1 V2.0 V1.1 V2.1 V2.0 V1.0 V2.0 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 319 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.3 CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_3Step V2.x CPU processing time Typical CPU processing times of the PID_3Step technology object as of Version V2.0, depending on CPU type. CPU Typ. CPU processing time PID_3Step V2.x CPU 1211C V4.0 410 s CPU 1215C V4.0 410 s CPU 1217C V4.0 410 s CPU 1505S V1.0 50 s CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 120 s CPU 1511-1 PN V1.5 120 s CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 120 s CPU 1516-3 PN/DP V1.5 65 s CPU 1518-4 PN/DP V1.5 5 s Memory requirement Memory requirement of an instance DB of the PID_3Step technology object as of Version V2.0. Memory requirement Memory requirement of the instance DB of PID_3Step V2.x Load memory requirement Approx. 15000 bytes Total work memory requirement 1040 bytes Retentive work memory requirement 60 bytes PID control 320 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4 PID_3Step V2 9.2.4.1 Description of PID_3Step V2 Description You use the PID_3Step instruction to configure a PID controller with self tuning for valves or actuators with integrating behavior. The following operating modes are possible: Inactive Pretuning Fine tuning Automatic mode Manual mode Approach substitute output value Transition time measurement Error monitoring Approach substitute output value with error monitoring Manual mode without endstop signals For a more detailed description of the operating modes, see the State parameter. PID algorithm PID_3Step is a PIDT1 controller with anti-windup and weighting of the proportional and derivative actions. The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation: y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integral action time TD Derivative action time a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) c Derivative action weighting PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 321 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Block diagram without position feedback PID control 322 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Block diagram with position feedback PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 323 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Block diagram of PIDT1 with anti-windup Call PID_3Step is called in the constant time scale of a cycle interrupt OB. If you call PID_3Step as a multi-instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for PID_3Step directly in the multi-instance DB and commission it via a watch table. Download to device The actual values of retentive tags are only updated when you download PID_3Step completely. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Startup When the CPU starts up, PID_3Step starts in the operating mode that is saved in the Mode in/out parameter. To leave PID_3Step in "Inactive" mode, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. PID control 324 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Reaction to error In automatic mode and during commissioning, the reaction to error depends on the ErrorBehaviour and ActivateRecoverMode tags. In manual mode, the reaction is independent of ErrorBehaviour and ActivateRecoverMode. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the reaction additionally depends on the error that occurred. ErrorBehaviour ActivateRecoverMode Configuration editor > actuator setting > Set Output to Reaction FALSE FALSE Current output value Switch to "Inactive" mode (State = 0) The actuator remains in the current position. FALSE TRUE Current output value while error is pending Switch to "Error monitoring" mode (State = 7) The actuator remains in the current position while the error is pending. TRUE FALSE Substitute output value Switch to "Approach substitute output value" mode (State = 5) The actuator moves to the configured substitute output value. Switch to "Inactive" mode (State = 0) The actuator remains in the current position. TRUE TRUE Substitute output value while error is pending Switch to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" mode (State = 8) The actuator moves to the configured substitute output value. Switch to "Error monitoring" mode (State = 7) In manual mode, PID_3Step uses ManualValue as output value, unless the following errors occur: 2000h: Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. 4000h: Invalid value at Feedback parameter. 8000h: Error during digital position feedback. You can only change the position of the actuator with Manual_UP and Manual_DN, not with ManualValue. The Error parameter indicates whether an error has occurred in this cycle. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. ErrorBits is reset by a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 346) Parameter ErrorBits V2 (Page 351) Configuring PID_3Step V2 (Page 119) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 325 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.2 Mode of operation of PID_3Step V2 Monitoring process value limits You specify the high limit and low limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperLimit and Config.InputLowerLimit tags. If the process value is outside these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0001h). You specify a high and low warning limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperWarning and Config.InputLowerWarning tags. If the process value is outside these warning limits, a warning occurs (Warning = 0040h), and the InputWarning_H or InputWarning_L output parameter changes to TRUE. Limiting the setpoint You specify a high limit and low limit of the setpoint in the Config.SetpointUpperLimit and Config.SetpointLowerLimit tags. PID_3Step automatically limits the setpoint to the process value limits. You can limit the setpoint to a smaller range. PID_3Step checks whether this range falls within the process value limits. If the setpoint is outside these limits, the high or low limit is used as the setpoint, and output parameter SetpointLimit_H or SetpointLimit_L is set to TRUE. The setpoint is limited in all operating modes. Limiting the output value You specify a high limit and low limit of the output value in the Config.OutputUpperLimit and Config.OutputLowerLimit tags. The output value limits must be within "Low endstop" and "High endstop". High endstop: Config.FeedbackScaling.UpperPointOut Low endstop: Config.FeedbackScaling.LowerPointOut Rule: UpperPointOut OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit LowerPointOut The valid values for "High endstop" and "Low endstop" depend upon: FeedbackOn FeedbackPerOn OutputPerOn OutputPerOn FeedbackOn FeedbackPerOn LowerPointOut UpperPointOut FALSE FALSE FALSE Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) FALSE TRUE FALSE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% FALSE TRUE TRUE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% TRUE FALSE FALSE Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) TRUE TRUE FALSE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% TRUE TRUE TRUE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% PID control 326 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step If OutputPerOn = FALSE and FeedbackOn = FALSE, you cannot limit the output value. Output_UP and Output_DN are then reset upon Actuator_H = TRUE or Actuator_L = TRUE. If endstop signals are also not present, Output_UP and Output_DN are reset after a travel time of Config.VirtualActuatorLimit x Retain.TransitTime/100. As of PID_3Step Version 2.3 the monitoring and limiting of the travel time can be deactivated with Config.VirtualActuatorLimit = 0.0. The output value is 27648 at 100% and -27648 at -100%. PID_3Step must be able to completely close the valve. Note Use with two or more actuators PID_3 Step is not suitable for use with two or more actuators (for example, in heating/cooling applications), because different actuators need different PID parameters to achieve a good control response. Substitute output value If an error has occurred, PID_3Step can output a substitute output value and move the actuator to a safe position that is specified in the SavePosition tag. The substitute output value must be within the output value limits. Monitoring signal validity The values of the following parameters are monitored for validity when used: Setpoint Input Input_PER Input_PER Feedback Feedback_PER Disturbance ManualValue SavePosition Output_PER PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 327 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Monitoring the PID_3Step sampling time Ideally, the sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The PID_3Step instruction measures the time interval between two calls. This is the current sampling time. On every switchover of operating mode and during the initial startup, the mean value is formed from the first 10 sampling times. Too great a difference between the current sampling time and this mean value triggers an error (ErrorBits = 0800h). The error occurs during tuning if: New mean value >= 1.1 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.9 x old mean value The error occurs in automatic mode if: New mean value >= 1.5 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.5 x old mean value If you deactivate the sampling time monitoring (CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE), you can also call PID_3Step in OB1. You must then accept a lower control quality due to the deviating sampling time. Sampling time of the PID algorithm The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time. All other functions of PID_3Step are executed at every call. Measuring the motor transition time The motor transition time is the time in seconds the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. The actuator is moved in one direction for a maximum time of Config.VirtualActuatorLimit x Retain.TransitTime/100. PID_3Step requires the motor transition time to be as accurate as possible for good controller results. The data in the actuator documentation contains average values for this type of actuator. The value for the specific actuator used may differ. You can measure the motor transition time during commissioning. The output value limits are not taken into consideration during the motor transition time measurement. The actuator can travel to the high or the low endstop. The motor transition time is taken into consideration in the calculation of the analog output value as well as in the calculation of the digital output values. It is mainly required for correct operation during auto-tuning and the anti-windup behavior. You should therefore configure the motor transition time with the value that the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. If no relevant motor transition time is in effect in your process (e.g. with solenoid valves), so that the output value has a direct and full effect on the process, use PID_Compact instead. PID control 328 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. For cooling and discharge control systems, it may be necessary to invert the control logic. PID_3Step does not work with negative proportional gain. If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. The control logic is also taken into account during pretuning and fine tuning. See also Configuring PID_3Step V1 (Page 142) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 329 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.3 Changing the PID_3Step V2 interface The following table shows what has changed in the PID_3Step instruction interface. PID_3Step V1 PID_3Step V2 Change Input_PER Input_PER Data type from Word to Int Feedback_PER Feedback_PER Data type from Word to Int Disturbance New Manual_UP Manual_UP Function Manual_DN Manual_DN Function ErrorAck New ModeActivate New Output_PER Data type from Word to Int ManualUPInternal New ManualDNInternal New CancelTuningLevel New VirtualActuatorLImit New Config.Loadbackup Loadbackup Renamed Config.TransitTime Retain.TransitTime Renamed and retentivity added Output_PER GetTransitTime.Start Replaced by Mode and ModeActivate SUT.CalculateSUTPara ms SUT.CalculateParams Renamed SUT.TuneRuleSUT SUT.TuneRule Renamed TIR.CalculateTIRParams TIR.CalculateParams Renamed TIR.TuneRuleTIR TIR.TuneRule Renamed Retain.Mode Mode Function Declaration of static for in-out parameters PID control 330 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.4 Table 9- 7 Input parameters of PID_3Step V2 Input parameters of PID_3Step V2 Parameter Data type Default Description Setpoint REAL 0.0 Setpoint of the PID controller in automatic mode Input REAL 0.0 A tag of the user program is used as source for the process value. If you are using parameter Input, then Config.InputPerOn = FALSE must be set. Input_PER INT 0 An analog input is used as the source of the process value. If you are using parameter Input_PER, then Config.InputPerOn = TRUE must be set. Actuator_H BOOL FALSE Digital position feedback of the valve for the high endstop If Actuator_H = TRUE, the valve is at the high endstop and is no longer moved towards this direction. Actuator_L BOOL FALSE Digital position feedback of the valve for the low endstop If Actuator_L = TRUE, the valve is at the low endstop and is no longer moved towards this direction. Feedback REAL 0.0 Position feedback of the valve If you are using parameter Feedback, then Config.FeedbackPerOn = FALSE must be set. Feedback_PER INT 0 Analog position feedback of a valve If you are using parameter Feedback_PER, then Config.FeedbackPerOn = TRUE must be set. Feedback_PER is scaled based on the tags: * Config.FeedbackScaling.LowerPointIn * Config.FeedbackScaling.UpperPointIn * Config.FeedbackScaling.LowerPointOut * Config.FeedbackScaling.UpperPointOut Disturbance REAL 0.0 Disturbance variable or precontrol value ManualEnable BOOL FALSE * A FALSE -> TRUE edge activates "manual mode", while State = 4, Mode remains unchanged. As long as ManualEnable = TRUE, you cannot change the operating mode via a rising edge at ModeActivate or use the commissioning dialog. A TRUE -> FALSE edge activates the operating mode that is specified by Mode. We recommend that you change the operating mode using ModeActivate only. * ManualValue REAL 0.0 In manual mode, the absolute position of the valve is specified. ManualValue is only evaluated if you are using Output_PER, or if position feedback is available. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 331 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Parameter Data type Default Description Manual_UP BOOL FALSE * Manual_UP = TRUE The valve is opened even if you are using Output_PER or a position feedback. The valve is no longer moved if the high endstop has been reached. See also Config.VirtualActuatorLimit * Manual_UP = FALSE If you are using Output_PER or a position feedback, the valve is moved to ManualValue. Otherwise, the valve is no longer moved. If Manual_UP and Manual_DN are set to TRUE simultaneously, the valve is not moved. Manual_DN BOOL FALSE * Manual_DN = TRUE The valve is closed even if you are using Output_PER or a position feedback. The valve is no longer moved if the low endstop has been reached. See also Config.VirtualActuatorLimit * Manual_DN = FALSE If you are using Output_PER or a position feedback, the valve is moved to ManualValue. Otherwise, the valve is no longer moved. ErrorAck BOOL FALSE * FALSE -> TRUE edge ErrorBits and Warning are reset. Reset BOOL FALSE Restarts the controller. * * * ModeActivate BOOL FALSE * FALSE -> TRUE edge - Switch to "Inactive" mode - ErrorBits and Warnings are reset. As long as Reset = TRUE, - PID_3Step remains in "Inactive" mode (State = 0). - You cannot change the operating mode with Mode and ModeActivate or ManualEnable. - You cannot use the commissioning dialog. TRUE -> FALSE edge - If ManualEnable = FALSE, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in Mode. - If Mode = 3, the integral action is treated as configured with the tag IntegralResetMode. FALSE -> TRUE edge PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control 332 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.5 Table 9- 8 Output parameters of PID_3Step V2 Output parameters of PID_3Step V2 Parameter Data type Default Description ScaledInput REAL 0.0 Scaled process value ScaledFeedback REAL 0.0 Scaled position feedback For an actuator without position feedback, the position of the actuator indicated by ScaledFeedback is very imprecise. ScaledFeedback may only be used for rough estimation of the current position in this case. Output_UP BOOL FALSE Digital output value for opening the valve If Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE, the Output_UP parameter is used. Output_DN BOOL FALSE Digital output value for closing the valve If Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE, the Output_DN parameter is used. Output_PER INT 0 Analog output value If Config.OutputPerOn = TRUE, Output_PER is used. Use Output_PER if you are using a valve as actuator which is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10 V or 4...20 mA. The value at Output_PER corresponds to the target position of the valve, e.g. Output_PER = 13824, when the valve is to be opened by 50%. SetpointLimit_H BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_H = TRUE, the absolute setpoint high limit is reached (Setpoint Config.SetpointUpperLimit). SetpointLimit_L BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_L = TRUE, the absolute setpoint low limit has been reached (Setpoint Config.SetpointLowerLimit). The setpoint is limited to Config.SetpointUpperLimit . The setpoint is limited to Config.SetpointLowerLimit . InputWarning_H BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_H = TRUE, the process value has reached or exceeded the warning high limit. InputWarning_L BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_L = TRUE, the process value has reached or fallen below the warning low limit. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 333 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Parameter Data type Default Description State INT 0 The State parameter (Page 346) shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You can change the operating mode using the input parameter Mode and a rising edge at ModeActivate. * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: Pretuning * State = 2: Fine tuning * State = 3: Automatic mode * State = 4: Manual mode * State = 5: Approach substitute output value * State = 6: Transition time measurement * State = 7: Error monitoring * State = 8: Approach substitute output value with error monitoring * State = 10: Manual mode without endstop signals Error BOOL FALSE If Error = TRUE, at least one error message is pending in this cycle. ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The ErrorBits parameter (Page 351) shows which error messages are pending. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset upon a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 346) Parameter ErrorBits V2 (Page 351) PID control 334 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.6 Table 9- 9 In/out parameters of PID-3Step V2 In/out parameters of PID-3Step V2 Parameter Data type Default Description Mode INT 4 At the Mode parameter, you specify the operating mode to which PID_3Step is to switch. Options are: * Mode = 0: Inactive * Mode = 1: Pretuning * Mode = 2: Fine tuning * Mode = 3: Automatic mode * Mode = 4: Manual mode * Mode = 6: Transition time measurement * Mode = 10: Manual mode without endstop signals The operating mode is activated by: * Rising edge at ModeActivate * Falling edge at Reset * Falling edge at ManualEnable * Cold restart of CPU if RunModeByStartup = TRUE Mode is retentive. A detailed description of the operating modes can be found in Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 346). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 335 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.7 Static tags of PID_3Step V2 Note Change the tags identified with (1) only in "Inactive" mode to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. Tag Data type Default Description ManualUpInternal BOOL FALSE In manual mode, each rising edge opens the valve by 5% of the total control range or for the duration of the minimum motor transition time. ManualUpInternal is only evaluated if you are not using Output_PER or a position feedback. This tag is used in the commissioning dialog. ManualDnInternal BOOL FALSE In manual mode, every rising edge closes the valve by 5% of the total control range or for the duration of the minimum motor transition time. ManualDnInternal is only evaluated if you are not using Output_PER or position feedback. This tag is used in the commissioning dialog. ActivateRecoverMode BOOL TRUE The ActivateRecoverMode V2 (Page 354) tag determines the reaction to error. RunModeByStartup BOOL TRUE Activate operating mode at Mode parameter after CPU restart If RunModeByStartup = TRUE, PID_3Step starts in the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter after CPU startup. If RunModeByStartup = FALSE, PID_3Step remains in "Inactive" mode after CPU startup. LoadBackUp BOOL FALSE If LoadBackUp = TRUE, the last set of PID parameters is reloaded. The set was saved prior to the last tuning. LoadBackUp is automatically set back to FALSE. PhysicalUnit INT 0 Unit of measurement of the process value and setpoint, e.g., C, or F. PhysicalQuantity INT 0 Physical quantity of the process value and setpoint, e.g., temperature ErrorBehaviour BOOL FALSE If ErrorBehaviour = FALSE and an error has occurred, the valve stays at its current position and the controller switches directly to "Inactive" or "Error monitoring" mode. If ErrorBehaviour = TRUE and an error occurs, the actuator moves to the substitute output value and only then switches to "Inactive" or "Error monitoring" mode. If the following errors occur, you can no longer move the valve to a configured substitute output value. * 2000h: Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. * 4000h: Invalid value at Feedback parameter. * 8000h: Error during digital position feedback. * 20000h: Invalid value at SavePosition tag. PID control 336 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Warning DWORD The Warning tag (Page 346) shows the warnings since Reset = TRUE or ErrorAck =TRUE. Warning is retentive. DW#16#0 Cyclic warnings (for example, process value warning) are shown until the cause of the warning is removed. They are automatically deleted once their cause has gone. Non-cyclic warnings (for example, point of inflection not found) remain and are deleted like errors. SavePosition REAL 0.0 Substitute output value If ErrorBehaviour = TRUE, the actuator is moved to a position that is safe for the plant when an error occurs. As soon as the substitute output value has been reached, PID_3Step switches the operating mode according to ActivateRecoverMode. CurrentSetpoint REAL 0.0 Currently active setpoint. This value is frozen at the start of tuning. CancelTuningLevel REAL 10.0 Permissible fluctuation of setpoint during tuning. Tuning is not canceled until: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel Progress REAL 0.0 Progress of tuning as a percentage (0.0 - 100.0) Config.InputPerOn(1) BOOL TRUE If InputPerOn = TRUE, the Input_PER parameter is used. If InputPerOn = FALSE, the Input parameter is used. Config.OutputPerOn(1) BOOL FALSE If OutputPerOn = TRUE, the Output_PER parameter is used. If OutputPerOn = FALSE, the Ouput_UP and Output_DN parameters are used. Config.InvertControl(1) BOOL FALSE Invert control logic If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. Config.FeedbackOn(1) BOOL FALSE If FeedbackOn = FALSE, a position feedback is simulated. Position feedback is generally activated when FeedbackOn = TRUE. Config.FeedbackPerOn(1) BOOL FALSE FeedbackPerOn is only effective when FeedbackOn = TRUE. If FeedbackPerOn = TRUE, the analog input is used for the position feedback (Feedback_PER parameter). If FeedbackPerOn = FALSE, the Feedback parameter is used for the position feedback. Config.ActuatorEndStopOn(1) BOOL FALSE If ActuatorEndStopOn = TRUE, the digital position feedback Actuator_L and Actuator_H are taken into consideration. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 337 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Config.InputUpperLimit(1) REAL High limit of the process value 120.0 Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the standard range (overrange). An error is no longer signaled due to a violation of the "Process value high limit". Only a wire-break and a short-circuit are recognized and PID_3Step reacts according to the configured reaction to error. InputUpperLimit > InputLowerLimit Config.InputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of the process value InputLowerLimit < InputUpperLimit Config.InputUpperWarning(1) REAL +3.402822e+38 Warning high limit of the process value If you set InputUpperWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is used as the warning high limit. If you configure InputUpperWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning high limit. InputUpperWarning > InputLowerWarning InputUpperWarning InputUpperLimit Config.InputLowerWarning(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Warning low limit of the process value If you set InputLowerWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value low limit is used as the warning low limit. If you configure InputLowerWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning low limit. InputLowerWarning < InputUpperWarning InputLowerWarning InputLowerLimit Config.OutputUpperLimit(1) REAL 100.0 High limit of output value The following value range is permitted: UpperPointOut OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit For more details, see OutputLowerLimit. Config.OutputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of output value The following value range is permitted: OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit LowerPointOut When using Output_PER, an output value limit of -100% corresponds to the value Output_PER = -27648; 100% correspond to the value Output_PER = 27648. If OutputPerOn = FALSE and FeedbackOn = FALSE, OutputLowerLimit and OutputUpperLimit are not evaluated. Output_UP and Output_DN are then reset at Actuator_H = TRUE or Actuator_L = TRUE (if ActuatorEndStopOn = TRUE) or after a travel time of Config.VirtualActuatorLimit * Retain.TransitTime/100 (if ActuatorEndStopOn = FALSE). PID control 338 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Config.SetpointUpperLimit(1) REAL High limit of setpoint +3.402822e+38 If you set SetpointUpperLimit outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is preassigned as the setpoint high limit. If you configure SetpointUpperLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. Config.SetpointLowerLimit(1) REAL - 3.402822e+38 Low limit of the setpoint If you set SetpointLowerLimit outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value low limit is preassigned as the setpoint low limit. If you set SetpointLowerLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. Config.MinimumOnTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum ON time Minimum time in seconds for which the servo drive must be switched on. Config.MinimumOnTime is only effective if Output_UP and Output_DN are used (Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE). Config.MinimumOffTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum OFF time Minimum time in seconds for which the servo drive must be switched off. Config.MinimumOffTime is only effective if Output_UP and Output_DN are used (Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE). Config.VirtualActuatorLimit(1) REAL 150.0 If all the following conditions have been satisfied, the actuator is moved in one direction for the maximum period of VirtualActuatorLimit x Retain.TransitTime/100 and the warning 2000h is output: * Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE * Config.ActuatorEndStopOn = FALSE * Config.FeedbackOn = FALSE If Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE and Config.ActuatorEndStopOn = TRUE or Config.FeedbackOn = TRUE, only the warning 2000h is output. If Config.OutputPerOn = TRUE, VirtualActuatorLimit is not taken into consideration. As of PID_3Step Version 2.3 the monitoring and limiting of the travel time can be deactivated with Config.VirtualActuatorLimit = 0.0. Config.InputScaling .UpperPointIn(1) REAL Config.InputScaling .LowerPointIn(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaling Input_PER high Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 0.0 Scaling Input_PER low Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 339 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Config.InputScaling .UpperPointOut(1) REAL Scaled high process value Config.InputScaling .LowerPointOut(1) REAL Config.FeedbackScaling .UpperPointIn(1) REAL Config.FeedbackScaling .LowerPointIn(1) REAL Config.FeedbackScaling .UpperPointOut(1) REAL 100.0 Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 0.0 Scaled low process value Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 27648.0 Scaling Feedback_PER high Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. 0.0 Scaling Feedback_PER low Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. 100.0 High endstop Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * FeedbackOn = FALSE: UpperPointOut = 100.0 * FeedbackOn = TRUE: UpperPointOut = 100.0 or 0.0 UpperPointOut LowerPointOut Config.FeedbackScaling .LowerPointOut(1) REAL 0.0 Low endstop Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * FeedbackOn = FALSE: LowerPointOut = 0.0 * FeedbackOn = TRUE: LowerPointOut = 0.0 or -100.0 LowerPointOut UpperPointOut GetTransitTime.InvertDirection BOOL FALSE If InvertDirection = FALSE, the valve is fully opened, closed, and then reopened in order to determine the valve transition time. If InvertDirection = TRUE, the valve is fully closed, opened, and then closed again. PID control 340 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description GetTransitTime .SelectFeedback BOOL If SelectFeedback = TRUE, then Feedback_PER, or Feedback is taken into consideration in the transition time measurement. FALSE If SelectFeedback = FALSE, then Actuator_H and Actuator_L are taken into consideration in the transition time measurement. GetTransitTime.State GetTransitTime.NewOutput INT REAL 0 0.0 Current phase of the transition time measurement * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: Open valve completely * State = 2: Close valve completely * State = 3: Move valve to target position (NewOutput) * State = 4: Transition time measurement successfully completed * State = 5: Transition time measurement canceled Target position for transition time measurement with position feedback The target position must be between "High endstop" and "Low endstop". The difference between NewOutput and ScaledFeedback must be at least 50% of the permissible control range. CycleTime.StartEstimation BOOL TRUE If StartEstimation = TRUE, the measurement of the PID_3Step sampling time is started. CycleTime.StartEstimation = FALSE once measurement is complete. CycleTime.EnEstimation BOOL TRUE If EnEstimation = TRUE, the PID_3Step sampling time is calculated. If CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE, the PID_3Step sampling time is not calculated and you need to correct the configuration of CycleTime.Value manually. CycleTime.EnMonitoring BOOL TRUE If EnMonitoring = TRUE, the PID_3Step sampling time is monitored. If it is not possible to execute PID_3Step within the sampling time, the error 0800h is output and the operating mode is switched. ActivateRecoverMode and ErrorBehaviour determine which operating mode is switched to. If EnMonitoring = FALSE, the PID_3Step sampling time is not monitored, the error 0800h is not output, and the operating mode is not switched. CycleTime.Value(1) REAL 0.1 PID_3Step sampling time in seconds CycleTime.Value is determined automatically and is usually equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. CtrlParamsBackUp.SetByUser BOOL FALSE Saved value of Retain.CtrlParams.SetByUser You can reload values from the CtrlParamsBackUp structure with LoadBackUp = TRUE. CtrlParamsBackUp.Gain REAL 1.0 Saved proportional gain CtrlParamsBackUp.Ti REAL 20.0 Saved integration time in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp.Td REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action time in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp.TdFiltRatio REAL 0.2 Saved derivative delay coefficient PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 341 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description CtrlParamsBackUp .PWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved proportional action weighting CtrlParamsBackUp .DWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved derivative action weighting CtrlParamsBackUp.Cycle REAL 1.0 Saved sampling time of PID algorithm in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp .InputDeadBand REAL 0.0 Saved dead band width of the control deviation PIDSelfTune.SUT .CalculateParams BOOL FALSE The properties of the controlled system are saved during tuning. If CalculateParams = TRUE, the PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of these properties. The PID parameters are calculated using the method set in TuneRule. CalculateParams is set to FALSE following calculation. PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRule INT 1 Methods used to calculate parameters during pretuning: PIDSelfTune.SUT.State INT 0 * SUT.TuneRule = 0: PID fast I * SUT.TuneRule = 1: PID slow I * SUT.TuneRule = 2: Chien, Hrones and Reswick PID * SUT.TuneRule = 3: Chien, Hrones, Reswick PI * SUT.TuneRule = 4: PID fast II * SUT.TuneRule = 5: PID slow II The SUT.State tag indicates the current phase of pretuning: * State = 0: Initialize pretuning * State = 50: Determine start position without position feedback * State = 100: Calculate the standard deviation * State = 200: Find the point of inflection * State = 300: Determine the rise time * State = 9900: Pretuning successful * State = 1: Pretuning not successful PID control 342 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn BOOL With the RunIn tag, you can specify that fine tuning can also be performed without pretuning. FALSE * RunIn = FALSE Pretuning is started when fine tuning is started from inactive or manual mode. If fine tuning is started from automatic mode, the system uses the existing PID parameters to control to the setpoint. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_3Step switches to the mode from which tuning was started. * RunIn = TRUE The pretuning is skipped. PID_3Step attempts to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Only then will fine tuning start. RunIn is set to FALSE after fine tuning. PIDSelfTune.TIR .CalculateParams BOOL FALSE The properties of the controlled system are saved during tuning. If CalculateParams = TRUE, the PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of these properties. The PID parameters are calculated using the method set in TuneRule. CalculateParams is set to FALSE following calculation. PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRule INT 0 Methods used to calculate parameters during fine tuning: * PIDSelfTune.TIR.State INT 0 TIR.TuneRule = 0: PID automatic * TIR.TuneRule = 1: PID fast * TIR.TuneRule = 2: PID slow * TIR.TuneRule = 3: Ziegler-Nichols PID * TIR.TuneRule = 4: Ziegler-Nichols PI * TIR.TuneRule = 5: Ziegler-Nichols P The TIR.State tag indicates the current phase of fine tuning: * State = -100 Fine tuning is not possible. Pretuning will be performed first. * State = 0: Initialize fine tuning * State = 200: Calculate the standard deviation * State = 300: Attempt to reach the setpoint with the maximum or minimum output value * State = 400: Attempt to reach the setpoint with existing PID parameters (if pretuning was successful) * State = 500: Determine oscillation and calculate parameters * State = 9900: Fine tuning successful * State = 1: Fine tuning not successful PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 343 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Retain.TransitTime(1) REAL Motor transition time in seconds 30.0 Time in seconds the actuating drive requires to move the valve from the closed to the opened state. TransitTime is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams .SetByUser(1) BOOL FALSE If SetByUser = FALSE, the PID parameters are determined automatically and PID_3Step operates with a dead zone at the output value. The dead band width is calculated during tuning on the basis of the standard deviation of the output value and saved in Retain.CtrlParams.OutputDeadBand. If SetByUser = TRUE, the PID parameters are entered manually and PID_3 Step operates without a dead zone at the output value. Retain.CtrlParams.OutputDeadBand = 0.0 SetByUser is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Gain(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional gain To invert the control logic, use the Config.InvertControl tag. Negative values at Gain also invert the control logic. We recommend you use only InvertControl to set the control logic. The control logic is also inverted if InvertControl = TRUE and Gain < 0.0. Gain is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Ti(1) REAL 20.0 * Ti > 0.0: Active integration time in seconds * Ti = 0.0: Integral action is deactivated Ti is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Td(1) REAL 0.0 * Td > 0.0: Active derivative action time in seconds * Td = 0.0: Derivative action is deactivated Td is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams .TdFiltRatio(1) REAL 0.2 Active derivative delay coefficient The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient * 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. * 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. TdFiltRatio is retentive. * PID control 344 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams .PWeighting(1) REAL Active proportional action weighting 1.0 The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * PWeighting is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams .DWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active derivative action weighting The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * DWeighting is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Cycle(1) REAL 1.0 Active sampling time of PID algorithm in seconds, rounded to an integer multiple of the cycle time of the calling OB. Cycle is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams .InputDeadBand(1) REAL 0.0 Dead band width of the control deviation InputDeadBand is retentive. See also Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 346) Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 (Page 354) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 345 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.8 Parameters State and Mode V2 Correlation of the parameters The State parameter shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You cannot change the State parameter. With a rising edge at ModeActivate, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode saved in the Mode in-out parameter. When the CPU is switched on or switches from Stop to RUN mode, PID_3Step starts in the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. To leave PID_3Step in "Inactive" mode, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. Meaning of values State Description of operating mode 0 Inactive The controller is switched off and no longer changes the valve position. 1 Pretuning The pretuning determines the process response to a pulse of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The PID parameters are calculated from the maximum rate of rise and dead time of the controlled system. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. Pretuning requirements: * The motor transition time has been configured or measured. * Inactive (State = 0), manual mode (State = 4), or automatic mode (State = 3) * ManualEnable = FALSE * Reset = FALSE * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher as compared to the noise. This is most likely the case in operating modes "Inactive" and "manual mode". The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Tuning is canceled when: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel Before the PID parameters are recalculated, they are backed up and can be reactivated with LoadBackUp. The controller switches to automatic mode following successful pretuning. If pretuning is unsuccessful, the switchover of operating mode is dependent on ActivateRecoverMode and ErrorBehaviour. The pretuning phase is indicated with the SUT.State tag. PID control 346 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step State Description of operating mode 2 Fine tuning Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are recalculated based on the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_3Step automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Tuning is canceled when: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel The PID parameters are backed up before fine tuning. They can be reactivated with LoadBackUp. Requirements for fine tuning: * The motor transition time has been configured or measured. * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. * ManualEnable = FALSE * Reset = FALSE * Automatic (State = 3), inactive (State = 0) or manual (State = 4) mode Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started from: * Automatic mode (State = 3) Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_3Step controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. * Inactive (State = 0) or manual mode (State = 4) If the requirements for pretuning are met, pretuning is started. The determined PID parameters will be used for control until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. If PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = TRUE, pretuning is skipped and an attempt is made to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning then starts automatically. The controller switches to automatic mode following successful fine tuning. If fine tuning is unsuccessful, the switchover of operating mode is dependent on ActivateRecoverMode and ErrorBehaviour. The fine tuning phase is indicated with the TIR.State tag. 3 Automatic mode In automatic mode, PID_3Step controls the controlled system in accordance with the parameters specified. The controller switches to automatic mode if one the following requirements is fulfilled: * Pretuning successfully completed * Fine tuning successfully completed * Changing of the Mode in-out parameter to the value 3 and a rising edge at ModeActivate. The switchover from automatic mode to manual mode is only bumpless if carried out in the commissioning editor. The ActivateRecoverMode tag is taken into consideration in automatic mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 347 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step State Description of operating mode 4 Manual mode In manual mode, you specify manual output values in the Manual_UP and Manual_DN parameters or ManualValue parameter. Whether or not the actuator can be moved to the output value in the event of an error is described in the ErrorBits parameter. You can also activate this operating mode using ManualEnable = TRUE. We recommend that you change the operating mode using Mode and ModeActivate only. The switchover from manual mode to automatic mode is bumpless. Manual mode is also possible when an error is pending. 5 Approach substitute output value This operating mode is activated in the event of an error, if Errorbehaviour = TRUE and ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE.. PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value and then switches to "Inactive" mode. 6 Transition time measurement The time that the motor needs to completely open the valve from the closed condition is determined. This operating mode is activated when Mode = 6 and ModeActivate = TRUE is set. If endstop signals are used to measure the transition time, the valve will be opened completely from its current position, closed completely, and opened completely again. If GetTransitTime.InvertDirection = TRUE, this behavior is inverted. If position feedback is used to measure the transition time, the actuator will be moved from its current position to a target position. The output value limits are not taken into consideration during the transition time measurement. The actuator can travel to the high or the low endstop. 7 Error monitoring The control algorithm is switched off and no longer changes the valve position. This operating mode is activated instead of "Inactive" mode in the event of an error. All the following conditions must be met: * Automatic mode (Mode = 3) * Errorbehaviour = FALSE * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE * One or more errors have occurred in which ActivateRecoverMode (Page 354) is effective. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 8 Approach substitute output value with error monitoring This operating mode is activated instead of "approach substitute output value" mode when an error occurs. PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value and then switches to "error monitoring" mode. All the following conditions must be met: * Automatic mode (Mode = 3) * Errorbehaviour = TRUE * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE * One or more errors have occurred in which ActivateRecoverMode (Page 354) is effective. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 10 Manual mode without endstop signals The endstop signals are not taken into consideration, even though Config.ActuatorEndStopOn = TRUE. The output value limits are not taken into consideration. Otherwise, PID_3Step behaves the same as in manual mode. PID control 348 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step ENO characteristics If State = 0, then ENO = FALSE. If State 0, then ENO = TRUE. Automatic switchover of operating mode during commissioning Automatic mode is activated following successful pretuning or fine tuning. The following table shows how Mode and State change during successful pretuning. Cycle no. Mode State Action 0 4 4 Set Mode = 1 1 1 4 Set ModeActivate = TRUE 1 4 1 Value of State is saved in Mode parameter Pretuning is started n 4 1 Pretuning successfully completed n 3 3 Automatic mode is started PID_3Step automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following table shows how Mode and State change during pretuning with errors. Cycle no. Mode State Action 0 4 4 Set Mode = 1 1 1 4 Set ModeActivate = TRUE 1 4 1 Value of State is saved in Mode parameter Pretuning is started n 4 1 Pretuning canceled n 4 4 Manual mode is started If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter is activated. At the start of transition time measurement, pretuning, or fine tuning, PID_3Step saved the value of State in the Mode in/out parameter. PID_3Step therefore switches to the operating mode from which transition time measurement or tuning was started. If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, "Inactive" or "Approach substitute output value" mode is activated. Automatic switchover of operating mode after transition time measurement If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter is activated after successful transition time measurement. If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, the system switches to "Inactive" operating mode after successful transition time measurement. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 349 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Automatic switchover of operating mode in automatic mode PID_3Step automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following diagram illustrates the influence of ErrorBehaviour and ActivateRecoverMode on this switchover of operating mode. Automatic switchover of operating mode in the event of an error Automatic switchover of operating mode once the current operation has been completed. Automatic switchover of operating mode when error is no longer pending. See also Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 (Page 354) Parameter ErrorBits V2 (Page 351) PID control 350 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.9 Parameter ErrorBits V2 If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the ErrorBits are displayed with binary addition. The display of ErrorBits = 0003h, for example, indicates that the errors 0001h and 0002h are pending simultaneously. If there is a position feedback, PID_3Step uses ManualValue as output value in manual mode. The exception is Errorbits = 10000h. ErrorBits Description (DW#16#...) 0000 There is no error. 0001 The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * Input > Config.InputUpperLimit or * Input < Config.InputLowerLimit If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step remains in automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0002 Invalid value at "Input_PER" parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0004 Error during fine tuning. Oscillation of the process value could not be maintained. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_3Step cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0010 The setpoint was changed during tuning. You can set the permitted fluctuation of the setpoint at the CancelTuningLevel tag. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_3Step cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0020 Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_3Step remains in fine tuning mode. 0080 Error during pretuning. The output value limits are not configured correctly or the actual value does not react as expected. Check whether the limits of the output value are configured correctly and match the control logic. Also make sure that the actual value does not oscillate strongly before starting pretuning. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_3Step cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0100 Error during fine tuning resulted in invalid parameters. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_3Step cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 351 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step ErrorBits Description (DW#16#...) 0200 Invalid value at "Input" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0400 Calculation of output value failed. Check the PID parameters. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0800 Sampling time error: PID_3Step is not called within the sampling time of the cyclic interrupt OB. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step remains in automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. If this error occurred during simulation with PLCSIM, see the notes under Simulating PID_3Step V2 with PLCSIM (Page 141). 1000 Invalid value at "Setpoint" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 2000 Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. In manual mode, you can change the position of the actuator only with Manual_UP and Manual_DN, and not with ManualValue. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 4000 Invalid value at Feedback parameter. Value has an invalid number format. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. In manual mode, you can change the position of the actuator only with Manual_UP and Manual_DN, and not with ManualValue. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control 352 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step ErrorBits Description (DW#16#...) 8000 Error during digital position feedback. Actuator_H = TRUE and Actuator_L = TRUE. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. Manual mode is not possible in this state. In order to move the actuator from this state, you must deactivate the "Actuator endstop" (Config.ActuatorEndStopOn = FALSE) or switch to manual mode without endstop signals (Mode = 10). If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning, fine tuning, or transition time measurement mode and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE were active before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 10000 Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. Value has an invalid number format. The actuator cannot be moved to the manual value and remains in its current position. Specify a valid value in ManualValue or move the actuator in manual mode with Manual_UP and Manual_DN. 20000 Invalid value at SavePosition tag. Value has an invalid number format. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. 40000 Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, Disturbance is set to zero. PID_3Step remains in automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_3Step switches to the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter. If Disturbance in the current phase has no effect on the output value, tuning is not be canceled. The error has no effect during transition time measurement. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 353 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.10 Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2 The ActivateRecoverMode tag determines the reaction to error. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error = FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_3Step remains in automatic mode even if the process limit values are exceeded. This may damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. Automatic mode ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE In the event of an error, PID_3Step switches to "Inactive" or "Approach substitute output value" mode. The controller is only activated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. TRUE If errors occur frequently in automatic mode, this setting has a negative effect on the control response, because PID_3Step switches between the calculated output value and the substitute output value at each error. In this case, check the ErrorBits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_3Step stays in automatic mode: * 0001h: The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * 0800h: Sampling time error * 40000h: Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode: * 0002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. * 0200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. * 0400h: Calculation of output value failed. * 1000h: Invalid value at Setpoint parameter. If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_3Step can no longer move the actuator: * 2000h: Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. * 4000h: Invalid value at Feedback parameter. * 8000h: Error during digital position feedback. * 20000h: Invalid value at SavePosition tag. Value has an invalid number format. The characteristics are independent of ErrorBehaviour. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. PID control 354 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Pretuning, fine tuning, and transition time measurement ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE In the event of an error, PID_3Step switches to "Inactive" or "Approach substitute output value" mode. The controller is only activated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. The controller changes to "Inactive" mode after successful transition time measurement. TRUE If the following error occurs, PID_3Step remains in the active mode: * 0020h: Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. The following errors are ignored: * 10000h: Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. * 20000h: Invalid value at SavePosition tag. When any other error occurs, PID_3Step cancels the tuning and switches to the mode from which tuning was started. Manual mode ActivateRecoverMode is not effective in manual mode. See also Static tags of PID_3Step V2 (Page 336) Parameters State and Mode V2 (Page 346) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 355 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.4.11 Tag Warning V2 If several warnings are pending simultaneously, their values are displayed with binary addition. The display of warning 0005h, for example, indicates that the warnings 0001h and 0004h are pending simultaneously. Warning Description (DW#16#...) 0000 No warning pending. 0001 The point of inflection was not found during pretuning. 0004 The setpoint was limited to the configured limits. 0008 Not all the necessary controlled system properties were defined for the selected method of calculation. Instead, the PID parameters were calculated using the TIR.TuneRule = 3 method. 0010 The operating mode could not be changed because Reset = TRUE or ManualEnable = TRUE. 0020 The cycle time of the calling OB limits the sampling time of the PID algorithm. Improve results by using shorter OB cycle times. 0040 The process value exceeded one of its warning limits. 0080 Invalid value at Mode. The operating mode is not switched. 0100 The manual value was limited to the limits of the controller output. 0200 The specified rule for tuning is not supported. No PID parameters are calculated. 0400 The transition time cannot be measured because the actuator settings do not match the selected measuring method. 0800 The difference between the current position and the new output value is too small for transition time measurement. This can produce incorrect results. The difference between the current output value and new output value must be at least 50% of the entire control range. 1000 The substitute output value cannot be reached because it is outside the output value limits. 2000 The actuator was moved in one direction for longer than Config.VirtualActuatorLimit x Retain .TransitTime. Check whether the actuator has reached an endstop signal. The following warnings are deleted as soon as the cause is eliminated: 0001h 0004h 0008h 0040h 0100h 2000h All other warnings are cleared with a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 356 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5 PID_3Step V1 9.2.5.1 Description PID_3Step V1 Description You use the PID_3Step instruction to configure a PID controller with self tuning for valves or actuators with integrating behavior. The following operating modes are possible: Inactive Pretuning Fine tuning Automatic mode Manual mode Approach substitute output value Transition time measurement Approach substitute output value with error monitoring Error monitoring For a more detailed description of the operating modes, see the State parameter. PID algorithm PID_3Step is a PIDT1 controller with anti-windup and weighting of the proportional and derivative actions. The following equation is used to calculate the output value. y Output value of the PID algorithm Kp Proportional gain s Laplace operator b Proportional action weighting w Setpoint x Process value TI Integral action time a Derivative delay coefficient (T1 = a x TD) TD Derivative action time c Derivative action weighting PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 357 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Block diagram without position feedback PID control 358 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Block diagram with position feedback PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 359 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Block diagram of PIDT1 with anti-windup Call PID_3Step is called in a constant time interval of the cycle time of the calling OB (preferably in a cyclic interrupt OB). Download to device The actual values of retentive tags are only updated when you download PID_3Step completely. Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) Startup At the startup of the CPU, PID_3Step starts in the operating mode that was last active. To leave PID_3Step in "Inactive" mode, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. PID control 360 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Reaction to error If errors occur, these are output in the Error parameter. You configure the reaction of PID_3Step using the ErrorBehaviour and ActivateRecoverMode tags. ErrorBehaviour ActivateRecoverMode Actuator setting configuration Reaction Set Output to 0 FALSE Current output value Switch to "Inactive" mode (Mode = 0) 0 TRUE Current output value while error is pending Switch to "Error monitoring" mode (Mode = 7) 1 FALSE Substitute output value Switch to "Approach substitute output value" mode (Mode = 5) 1 TRUE Substitute output value while error is pending Switch to "Inactive" mode (Mode = 0) Switch to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" mode (Mode = 8) Switch to "Error monitoring" mode (Mode = 7) The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. See also Parameter State and Retain.Mode V1 (Page 378) Parameter ErrorBits V1 (Page 385) Configuring PID_3Step V1 (Page 142) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 361 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.2 Operating principle PID_3Step V1 Monitoring process value limits You specify the high limit and low limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperLimit and Config.InputLowerLimit tags. If the process value is outside these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0001hex). You specify a high and low warning limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperWarning and Config.InputLowerWarning tags. If the process value is outside these warning limits, a warning occurs (Warnings = 0040hex), and the InputWarning_H or InputWarning_L output parameter changes to TRUE. Limiting the setpoint You specify a high limit and low limit of the setpoint in the Config.SetpointUpperLimit and Config.SetpointLowerLimit tags. PID_3Step automatically limits the setpoint to the process value limits. You can limit the setpoint to a smaller range. PID_3Step checks whether this range falls within the process value limits. If the setpoint is outside these limits, the high or low limit is used as the setpoint, and output parameter SetpointLimit_H or SetpointLimit_L is set to TRUE. The setpoint is limited in all operating modes. Limiting the output value You specify a high limit and low limit of the output value in the Config.OutputUpperLimit and Config.OutputLowerLimit tags. The output value limits must be within "Low endstop" and "High endstop". High endstop: Config.FeedbackScaling.UpperPointOut Low endstop: Config.FeedbackScaling.LowerPointOut Rule: UpperPointOut OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit LowerPointOut The valid values for "High endstop" and "Low endstop" depend upon: FeedbackOn FeedbackPerOn OutputPerOn OutputPerOn FeedbackOn FeedbackPerOn LowerPointOut UpperPointOut FALSE FALSE FALSE Cannot be set (0.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) FALSE TRUE FALSE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% FALSE TRUE TRUE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% TRUE FALSE FALSE Cannot be set (100.0%) Cannot be set (100.0%) TRUE TRUE FALSE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% TRUE TRUE TRUE -100.0% or 0.0% 0.0% or +100.0% PID control 362 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step If OutputPerOn = FALSE and FeedbackOn = FALSE, you cannot limit the output value. The digital outputs are reset with Actuator_H = TRUE or Actuator_L = TRUE, or after a travel time amounting to 110% of the motor transition time. The output value is 27648 at 100% and -27648 at -100%. PID_3Step must be able to completely close the valve. Therefore, zero must be included in the output value limits. Note Use with two or more actuators PID_3 Step is not suitable for use with two or more actuators (for example, in heating/cooling applications), because different actuators need different PID parameters to achieve a good control response. Substitute output value If an error has occurred, PID_3Step can output a substitute output value and move the actuator to a safe position that is specified in the SavePosition tag. The substitute output value must be within the output value limits. Monitoring signal validity The values of the following parameters are monitored for validity: Setpoint Input Input_PER Feedback Feedback_PER Output Monitoring the PID_3Step sampling time Ideally, the sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. The PID_3Step instruction measures the time interval between two calls. This is the current sampling time. On every switchover of operating mode and during the initial startup, the mean value is formed from the first 10 sampling times. Too great a difference between the current sampling time and this mean value triggers an error (ErrorBits = 0800 hex). PID_3Step is set to "Inactive" mode during tuning under the following conditions: New mean value >= 1.1 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.9 x old mean value In automatic mode, PID_3Step is set to "Inactive" mode under the following conditions: New mean value >= 1.5 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.5 x old mean value PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 363 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Sampling time of the PID algorithm The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time. All other functions of PID_3Step are executed at every call. Measuring the motor transition time The motor transition time is the time in seconds the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. The maximum time that the actuator is moved in one direction is 110% of the motor transition time. PID_3Step requires the motor transition time to be as accurate as possible for good controller results. The data in the actuator documentation contains average values for this type of actuator. The value for the specific actuator used may differ. You can measure the motor transition time during commissioning. The output value limits are not taken into consideration during the motor transition time measurement. The actuator can travel to the high or the low endstop. The motor transition time is taken into consideration in the calculation of the analog output value as well as in the calculation of the digital output values. It is mainly required for correct operation during auto-tuning and the anti-windup behavior. You should therefore configure the motor transition time with the value that the motor requires to move the actuator from the closed to the opened state. If no relevant motor transition time is in effect in your process (e.g. with solenoid valves), so that the output value has a direct and full effect on the process, use PID_Compact instead. Control logic An increase of the output value is generally intended to cause an increase in the process value. This is referred to as a normal control logic. For cooling and discharge control systems, it may be necessary to invert the control logic. PID_3Step does not work with negative proportional gain. If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. The control logic is also taken into account during pretuning and fine tuning. See also Configuring PID_3Step V1 (Page 142) PID control 364 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.3 Table 9- 10 PID_3Step V1 input parameters PID_3Step V1 input parameters Parameters Data type Default Description Setpoint REAL 0.0 Setpoint of the PID controller in automatic mode Input REAL 0.0 A tag of the user program is used as source for the process value. If you are using parameter Input, then Config.InputPerOn = FALSE must be set. Input_PER WORD W#16#0 An analog input is used as the source of the process value. If you are using parameter Input_PER, then Config.InputPerOn = TRUE must be set. Actuator_H BOOL FALSE Digital position feedback of the valve for the high endstop If Actuator_H = TRUE, the valve is at the high endstop and is no longer moved towards this direction. Actuator_L BOOL FALSE Digital position feedback of the valve for the low endstop If Actuator_L = TRUE, the valve is at the low endstop and is no longer moved towards this direction. Feedback REAL 0.0 Position feedback of the valve If you are using parameter Feedback, then Config.FeedbackPerOn = FALSE must be set. Feedback_PER WORD W#16#0 Analog position feedback of a valve If you are using parameter Feedback_PER, then Config.FeedbackPerOn = TRUE must be set. Feedback_PER is scaled based on the tags: ManualEnable BOOL FALSE * Config.FeedbackScaling.LowerPointIn * Config.FeedbackScaling.UpperPointIn * Config.FeedbackScaling.LowerPointOut * Config.FeedbackScaling.UpperPointOut * A FALSE -> TRUE edge selects "Manual mode", while State = 4, Retain.Mode remains unchanged. A TRUE -> FALSE edge selects the most recently active operating mode A change of Retain.Mode will not take effect during ManualEnable = TRUE. The change of Retain.Mode will only be considered upon a TRUE -> FALSE edge at ManualEnable . * PID_3Step V1.1If ManualEnable = TRUE when the CPU starts, PID_3Step starts in manual mode. A rising edge (FALSE > TRUE) at ManualEnable is not necessary. PID_3Step V1.0 At the start of the CPU, PID_3Step only switches to manual mode with a rising edge (FALSE->TRUE) at ManualEnable . Without rising edge, PID_3Step starts in the last operating mode in which ManualEnable was FALSE. ManualValue REAL 0.0 In manual mode, you specify the absolute position of the valve. ManualValue will only be evaluated if you are using OutputPer, or if position feedback is available. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 365 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Parameters Data type Default Description Manual_UP BOOL FALSE In manual mode, every rising edge opens the valve by 5% of the total control range, or for the duration of the minimum motor transition time. Manual_UP is evaluated only if you are not using Output_PER and there is no position feedback available. Manual_DN BOOL FALSE In manual mode, every rising edge closes the valve by 5% of the total control range, or for the duration of the minimum motor transition time. Manual_DN is evaluated only if you are not using Output_PER and there is no position feedback available. Reset BOOL FALSE Restarts the controller. * FALSE -> TRUE edge - Switch to "Inactive" mode - ErrorBits and Warning are reset - Intermediate controller values are reset (PID parameters are retained) * TRUE -> FALSE edge - Change in most recent active mode - If automatic mode was active before, switchover to automatic mode is bumpless. PID control 366 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.4 Table 9- 11 PID_3Step V1 output parameters PID_3Step V1 output parameters Parameter Data type Default Description ScaledInput REAL 0.0 Scaled process value ScaledFeedback REAL 0.0 Scaled position feedback For an actuator without position feedback, the position of the actuator indicated by ScaledFeedback is very imprecise. ScaledFeedback may only be used for rough estimation of the current position in this case. Output_UP BOOL FALSE Digital output value for opening the valve If Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE, the Output_UP parameter is used. Output_DN BOOL FALSE Digital output value for closing the valve If Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE, the Output_DN parameter is used. Output_PER WORD W#16#0 Analog output value If Config.OutputPerOn = TRUE, Output_PER is used. Use Output_PER if you are using a valve as actuator which is triggered via an analog output and controlled with a continuous signal, e.g. 0...10 V or 4...20 mA. The value at Output_PER corresponds to the target position of the valve, e.g. Output_PER = 13824, when the valve is to be opened by 50%. SetpointLimit_H BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_H = TRUE, the absolute setpoint high limit is reached. In the CPU, the setpoint is limited to the configured absolute setpoint high limit. The configured absolute process value high limit is the default for the setpoint high limit. If you configure Config.SetpointUpperLimit to a value within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. SetpointLimit_L BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_L = TRUE, the absolute setpoint low limit has been reached. In the CPU, the setpoint is limited to the configured absolute setpoint low limit. The configured absolute process value low limit is the default setting for the setpoint low limit. If you configure Config.SetpointLowerLimit to a value within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. InputWarning_H BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_H = TRUE, the process value has reached or exceeded the warning high limit. InputWarning_L BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_L = TRUE, the process value has reached or fallen below the warning low limit. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 367 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Parameter Data type Default Description State INT 0 The State parameter (Page 378) shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You change the operating mode with the Retain.Mode tag. * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: Pretuning * State = 2: Fine tuning * State = 3: Automatic mode * State = 4: Manual mode * State = 5: Approach substitute output value * State = 6: Transition time measurement * State = 7: Error monitoring * State = 8: Approach substitute output value with error monitoring Error BOOL FALSE If Error = TRUE, at least one error message is pending. ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The ErrorBits parameter (Page 385) indicates the error messages. See also Parameter State and Retain.Mode V1 (Page 378) Parameter ErrorBits V1 (Page 385) PID control 368 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.5 PID_3Step V1 static tags Note You must not change tags that are not listed. These are used for internal purposes only. Change the tags identified with (1) only in "Inactive" mode to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. "Inactive" mode is forced by setting the "Retain.Mode" tag to "0". Table 9- 12 PID_3Step V1 static tags Tag Data type Default Description ActivateRecoverMode BOOL TRUE The ActivateRecoverMode tag (Page 388) determines the reaction to error. RunModeByStartup BOOL TRUE Activate Mode after CPU restart If RunModeByStartup = TRUE, the controller returns to the last active operating mode after a CPU restart. If RunModeByStartup = FALSE, the controller remains inactive after a CPU restart. PhysicalUnit INT 0 Unit of measurement of the process value and setpoint, e.g., C, or F. PhysicalQuantity INT 0 Physical quantity of the process value and setpoint, e.g., temperature. ErrorBehaviour INT 0 If ErrorBehaviour = 0 and an error has occurred, the valve stays at its current position and the controller switches directly to "Inactive" or "Error monitoring" mode. If ErrorBehaviour = 1 and an error occurs, the actuator moves to the substitute output value and only then switches to "Inactive" or "Error monitoring" mode. If the following errors occur, you can no longer move the valve to a configured substitute output value. Warning DWORD DW#16#0 * 2000h: Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. * 4000h: Invalid value at Feedback parameter. * 8000h: Error during digital position feedback. The Warning tag (Page 378) displays the warnings generated since a Reset or since the last operating mode switchover. Cyclic warnings (for example, process value warning) are shown until the cause of the warning is removed. They are automatically deleted once their cause has gone. Noncyclic warnings (for example, point of inflection not found) remain and are deleted like errors. SavePosition REAL 0.0 Substitute output value If ErrorBehaviour = 1 and an error occurs, the actuator moves to a safe position for the plant and only then switches to "Inactive" mode. CurrentSetpoint REAL 0.0 Currently active setpoint. This value is frozen at the start of tuning. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 369 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Progress REAL 0.0 Progress of tuning as a percentage (0.0 - 100.0) Config.InputPerOn(1) BOOL TRUE If InputPerOn = TRUE, the Input_PER parameter is used. If InputPerOn = FALSE, the Input parameter is used. Config.OutputPerOn(1) BOOL FALSE If OutputPerOn = TRUE, the Output_PER parameter is used. If OutputPerOn = FALSE, the Ouput_UP and Output_DN parameters are used. Config.LoadBackUp BOOL FALSE If LoadBackUp = TRUE, the last set of PID parameters is reloaded. The set was saved prior to the last tuning. LoadBackUp is automatically set back to FALSE. Config.InvertControl(1) BOOL FALSE Invert control logic If InvertControl = TRUE, an increasing control deviation causes a reduction in the output value. Config.FeedbackOn(1) BOOL FALSE If FeedbackOn = FALSE, a position feedback is simulated. Position feedback is generally activated when FeedbackOn = TRUE. Config.FeedbackPerOn(1) BOOL FALSE FeedbackPerOn is only effective when FeedbackOn = TRUE. If FeedbackPerOn = TRUE, the analog input is used for the position feedback (Feedback_PER parameter). If FeedbackPerOn = FALSE, the Feedback parameter is used for the position feedback. Config.ActuatorEndStopOn(1) BOOL FALSE If ActuatorEndStopOn = TRUE, the digital position feedback Actuator_L and Actuator_H are taken into consideration. Config.InputUpperLimit(1) REAL 120.0 High limit of the process value At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the standard range (overrange). An error is no longer signaled due to a violation of the "Process value high limit". Only a wire-break and a short-circuit are recognized and PID_3Step reacts according to the configured reaction to error. InputUpperLimit > InputLowerLimit Config.InputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of the process value Config.InputUpperWarning(1) REAL +3.402822e+38 Warning high limit of the process value InputLowerLimit < InputUpperLimit If you set InputUpperWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is used as the warning high limit. If you configure InputUpperWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning high limit. InputUpperWarning > InputLowerWarning InputUpperWarning InputUpperLimit PID control 370 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Config.InputLowerWarning(1) REAL Warning low limit of the process value -3.402822e+38 If you set InputLowerWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value low limit is used as the warning low limit. If you configure InputLowerWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning low limit. InputLowerWarning < InputUpperWarning InputLowerWarning InputLowerLimit Config.OutputUpperLimit(1) REAL 100.0 High limit of output value The following value range is permitted: UpperPointOut OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit For more details, see OutputLowerLimit. Config.OutputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of output value The following value range is permitted: OutputUpperLimit > OutputLowerLimit LowerPointOut When using Output_PER, an output value limit of -100% corresponds to the value Output_PER = -27648; 100% correspond to the value Output_PER = 27648. If OutputPerOn = FALSE and FeedbackOn = FALSE, OutputLowerLimit and OutputUpperLimit are not evaluated. Output_UP and Output_DN are then reset at Actuator_H = TRUE or Actuator_L = TRUE (if ActuatorEndStopOn = TRUE) or after a travel time of 110% * Config.TransitTime (if ActuatorEndStopOn = FALSE). Config.SetpointUpperLimit(1) REAL +3.402822e+38 High limit of setpoint If you set SetpointUpperLimit outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is preassigned as the setpoint high limit. If you configure SetpointUpperLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. Config.SetpointLowerLimit(1) REAL - 3.402822e+38 Low limit of the setpoint If you set SetpointLowerLimit outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value low limit is preassigned as the setpoint low limit. If you set SetpointLowerLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. Config.MinimumOnTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum ON time Minimum time in seconds for which the servo drive must be switched on. Config.MinimumOnTime is only effective if Output_UP and Output_DN are used (Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE). Config.MinimumOffTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum OFF time Minimum time in seconds for which the servo drive must be switched off. Config.MinimumOffTime is only effective if Output_UP and Output_DN are used (Config.OutputPerOn = FALSE). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 371 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Config.TransitTime(1) REAL Motor transition time 30.0 Time in seconds the actuating drive requires to move the valve from the closed to the opened state. Config.InputScaling .UpperPointIn(1) REAL Config.InputScaling .LowerPointIn(1) REAL Config.InputScaling .UpperPointOut(1) REAL Config.InputScaling .LowerPointOut(1) REAL Config.FeedbackScaling .UpperPointIn(1) REAL Config.FeedbackScaling .LowerPointIn(1) REAL Config.FeedbackScaling .UpperPointOut(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaling Input_PER high Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 0.0 Scaling Input_PER low Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 100.0 Scaled high process value Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 0.0 Scaled low process value Input_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the InputScaling structure. 27648.0 Scaling Feedback_PER high Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. 0.0 Scaling Feedback_PER low Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. 100.0 High endstop Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * FeedbackOn = FALSE: UpperPointOut = 100.0 * FeedbackOn = TRUE: UpperPointOut = 100.0 or 0.0 UpperPointOut LowerPointOut PID control 372 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Config.FeedbackScaling .LowerPointOut(1) REAL Low endstop 0.0 Feedback_PER is converted to a percentage based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn of the FeedbackScaling structure. The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * FeedbackOn = FALSE: * FeedbackOn = TRUE: LowerPointOut = 0.0 LowerPointOut = 0.0 or -100.0 LowerPointOut UpperPointOut GetTransitTime.InvertDirection BOOL FALSE If InvertDirection = FALSE, the valve is fully opened, closed, and then reopened in order to determine the valve transition time. If InvertDirection = TRUE, the valve is fully closed, opened, and then closed again. GetTransitTime .SelectFeedback BOOL FALSE If SelectFeedback = TRUE, then Feedback_PER, or Feedback is taken into consideration in the transition time measurement. If SelectFeedback = FALSE, then Actuator_H and Actuator_L are taken into consideration in the transition time measurement. GetTransitTime.Start BOOL FALSE If Start = TRUE, the transition time measurement is started. GetTransitTime.State INT 0 Current phase of the transition time measurement GetTransitTime.NewOutput REAL 0.0 * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: Open valve completely * State = 2: Close valve completely * State = 3: Move valve to target position (NewOutput) * State = 4: Transition time measurement successfully completed * State = 5: Transition time measurement canceled Target position for transition time measurement with position feedback The target position must be between "High endstop" and "Low endstop". The difference between NewOutput and ScaledFeedback must be at least 50% of the permissible control range. CycleTime.StartEstimation BOOL TRUE If StartEstimation = TRUE, the measurement of the PID_3Step sampling time is started. CycleTime.StartEstimation = FALSE once measurement is complete. CycleTime.EnEstimation BOOL TRUE If EnEstimation = TRUE, the PID_3Step sampling time is calculated. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 373 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description CycleTime.EnMonitoring BOOL If EnMonitoring = TRUE, the PID_3Step sampling time is monitored. If it is not possible to execute PID_3Step within the sampling time, the error 0800h is output and the operating mode is switched. ActivateRecoverMode and ErrorBehaviour determine which operating mode is switched to. TRUE If EnMonitoring = FALSE, the PID_3Step sampling time is not monitored, the error 0800h is not output, and the operating mode is not switched. CycleTime.Value(1) REAL 0.1 PID_3Step sampling time in seconds CycleTime.Value is determined automatically and is usually equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. CtrlParamsBackUp.SetByUser BOOL FALSE Saved value of Retain.CtrlParams.SetByUser. You can reload values from the CtrlParamsBackUp structure with Config.LoadBackUp = TRUE. CtrlParamsBackUp.Gain REAL 1.0 Saved proportional gain CtrlParamsBackUp.Ti REAL 20.0 Saved integral action time CtrlParamsBackUp.Td REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action time CtrlParamsBackUp.TdFiltRatio REAL 0.0 Saved derivative delay coefficient CtrlParamsBackUp.PWeighting REAL 0.0 Saved proportional action weighting CtrlParamsBackUp .DWeighting REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action weighting CtrlParamsBackUp.Cycle REAL 1.0 Saved sampling time of PID algorithm CtrlParamsBackUp .InputDeadBand REAL 0.0 Saved dead zone width of the control deviation PIDSelfTune.SUT .CalculateSUTParams BOOL FALSE The properties of the controlled system are saved during tuning. If CalculateSUTParams = TRUE, the PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of these properties. The PID parameters are calculated using the method set in TuneRuleSUT. CalculateSUTParams is set to FALSE following calculation. PIDSelfTune.SUT .TuneRuleSUT INT 1 Methods used to calculate parameters during pretuning: PIDSelfTune.SUT.State INT 0 * TuneRuleSUT = 0: PID fast I * TuneRuleSUT = 1: PID slow I * TuneRuleSUT = 2: Chien, Hrones and Reswick PID * TuneRuleSUT = 3: Chien, Hrones, Reswick PI * TuneRuleSUT = 4: PID fast II * TuneRuleSUT = 5: PID slow II The SUT.State tag indicates the current phase of pretuning: PID control 374 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn BOOL * FALSE RunIn = FALSE Pretuning is started when fine tuning is started from inactive or manual mode. If fine tuning is started from automatic mode, the system uses the existing PID parameters to control to the setpoint. Only then will fine tuning start. If pretuning is not possible, PID_3Step switches to "Inactive" mode. * RunIn = TRUE The pretuning is skipped. PID_3Step attempts to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Only then will fine tuning start. RunIn is set to FALSE after fine tuning. PIDSelfTune.TIR .CalculateTIRParams BOOL FALSE The properties of the controlled system are saved during tuning. If CalculateTIRParams = TRUE, the PID parameters are recalculated on the basis of these properties. The PID parameters are calculated using the method set in TuneRuleTIR. CalculateTIRParams is set to FALSE following calculation. PIDSelfTune.TIR .TuneRuleTIR INT 0 Methods used to calculate parameters during fine tuning: PIDSelfTune.TIR.State INT 0 * TuneRuleTIR = 0: PID automatic * TuneRuleTIR = 1: PID fast * TuneRuleTIR = 2: PID slow * TuneRuleTIR = 3: Ziegler-Nichols PID * TuneRuleTIR = 4: Ziegler-Nichols PI * TuneRuleTIR = 5: Ziegler-Nichols P The TIR.State tag indicates the current phase of "fine tuning": PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 375 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Tag Data type Default Description Retain.Mode INT A change to the value of Retain.Mode initiates a switch to another operating mode. 0 The following operating mode is enabled upon a change of Mode to: * Mode = 0: Inactive * Mode = 1: Pretuning * Mode = 2: Fine tuning * Mode = 3: Automatic mode * Mode = 4: Manual mode * Mode = 5: Approach substitute output value * Mode = 6: Transition time measurement * Mode = 7: Error monitoring Mode = 8: Approach substitute output value with error monitoring Mode is retentive. * Retain.CtrlParams .SetByUser(1) BOOL FALSE If SetByUser = FALSE, the PID parameters are determined automatically and PID_3Step operates with a dead zone at the output value. The dead zone width is calculated during tuning on the basis of the standard deviation of the output value and saved in Retain.CtrlParams.OutputDeadBand. If SetByUser = TRUE, the PID parameters are entered manually and PID_3 Step operates without a dead zone at the output value. Retain.CtrlParams.OutputDeadBand = 0.0 SetByUser is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Gain(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional gain Gain is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Ti(1) REAL 20.0 * Ti > 0.0: Active integral action time * Ti = 0.0: Integral action is deactivated Ti is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Td(1) REAL 0.0 * Td > 0.0: Active derivative action time * Td = 0.0: Derivative action is deactivated Td is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams .TdFiltRatio(1) REAL 0.0 Active derivative delay coefficient Retain.CtrlParams .PWeighting(1) REAL Retain.CtrlParams .DWeighting(1) REAL 0.0 Active derivative action weighting Retain.CtrlParams .Cycle(1) REAL 1.0 Active sampling time of PID algorithm in seconds, rounded to an integer multiple of the cycle time of the calling OB. TdFiltRatio is retentive. 0.0 Active proportional action weighting PWeighting is retentive. DWeighting is retentive. Cycle is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams .InputDeadBand(1) REAL 0.0 Dead zone width of the control deviation InputDeadBand is retentive. PID control 376 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step See also Parameter State and Retain.Mode V1 (Page 378) Tag ActivateRecoverMode V1 (Page 388) Downloading technology objects to device (Page 44) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 377 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.6 Parameter State and Retain.Mode V1 Correlation of the parameters The State parameter shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You cannot change the State parameter. To switch from one operating mode to another, you must change the Retain.Mode tag. This also applies when the value for the new operating mode is already in Retain.Mode. For example, set Retain.Mode = 0 first and then Retain.Mode = 3. Provided the current operating mode of the controller permits this switchover, State will be set to the value of Retain.Mode. When PID_3Step automatically switches from one operating mode to another, the following applies: State != Retain.Mode. Examples: After successful pretuning State = 3 and Retain.Mode = 1 In the event of an error State = 0 and Retain.Mode remain at the previous value, for example, Retain.Mode = 3 ManualEnalbe = TRUE State = 4 and Retain.Mode remain at the previous value, e.g., Retain.Mode = 3 Note You want, for example, to repeat successful fine tuning without exiting automatic mode with Mode = 0. Setting Retain.Mode to an invalid value such as 9999 for one cycle has no effect on State. Set Mode = 2 in the next cycle. In this way, you can generate a change to Retain.Mode without first switching to "Inactive" mode. PID control 378 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Meaning of values State / Retain.Mode Description 0 Inactive 1 Pretuning The controller is switched off and no longer changes the valve position. The pretuning determines the process response to a pulse of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The optimized PID parameters are calculated as a function of the maximum rate of rise and dead time of the controlled system. Pretuning requirements: * State = 0 or State = 4 * ManualEnable = FALSE * The motor transition time has been configured or measured. * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher as compared to the noise. Before the PID parameters are recalculated, they are backed up and can be reactivated with Config.LoadBackUp. The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. The controller switches to automatic mode following successful pretuning and to "Inactive" mode following unsuccessful pretuning. The pretuning phase is indicated with the SUT.State tag. 2 Fine tuning Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are tuned based on the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. The differences between the process response during pretuning and fine tuning are analyzed. All PID parameters are recalculated from the results. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. PID_3Step automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. The PID parameters are backed up before fine tuning. They can be reactivated with Config.LoadBackUp. The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Requirements for fine tuning: * The motor transition time has been configured or measured. * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. * ManualEnable = FALSE * Automatic (State = 3), inactive (State = 0) or manual (State = 4) mode PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 379 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step State / Retain.Mode Description 2 Fine tuning proceeds as follows when started from: * Automatic mode (State = 3) Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_3Step controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. * Inactive (State = 0) or manual mode (State = 4) Pretuning is always started first. The determined PID parameters will be used for control until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. If PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = TRUE, pretuning is skipped and an attempt is made to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value. This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning then starts automatically. The controller switches to automatic mode following successful fine tuning. If fine tuning was not successful, the controller switches to "Inactive" mode. The fine tuning phase is indicated with the TIR.State tag. 3 Automatic mode In automatic mode, PID_3Step controls the controlled system in accordance with the parameters specified. The controller switches to automatic mode if one the following requirements is fulfilled: * Pretuning successfully completed * Fine tuning successfully completed * Changing the Retain.Mode tag to the value 3. When the CPU is switched on or switches from Stop to RUN mode, PID_3Step starts in the most recently active operating mode. To leave PID_3Step in "Inactive" mode, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. The ActivateRecoverMode tag is taken into consideration in automatic mode. 4 Manual mode In manual mode, you specify manual output values in the Manual_UP and Manual_DN parameters or ManualValue parameter. Whether or not the actuator can be moved to the output value in the event of an error is described in the ErrorBits parameter. This operating mode is enabled if Retain.Mode = 4, or on a rising edge at ManualEnable. If ManualEnable changes to TRUE, only State changes. Retain.Mode retains its current value. On a falling edge at ManualEnable, PID_3Step returns to the previous operating mode. The switchover to automatic mode is bumpless. PID_3Step V1.1 Manual mode is always possible in the event of an error. PID_3Step V1.0 Manual mode is dependent on the ActivateRecoverMode tag in the event of an error. 5 Approach substitute output value This operating mode is activated in the event of an error or when Reset = TRUE if Errorbehaviour = 1 and ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE.. PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value and then switches to "Inactive" mode. PID control 380 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step State / Retain.Mode Description 6 Transition time measurement The time that the motor needs to completely open the valve from the closed condition is determined. This operating mode is activated when GetTransitTime.Start = TRUE is set. If endstop signals are used to measure the transition time, the valve will be opened completely from its current position, closed completely, and opened completely again. If GetTransitTime.InvertDirection = TRUE, this behavior is inverted. If position feedback is used to measure the transition time, the actuator will be moved from its current position to a target position. The output value limits are not taken into consideration during the transition time measurement. The actuator can travel to the high or the low endstop. 7 Error monitoring The control algorithm is switched off and no longer changes the valve position. This operating mode is activated instead of "Inactive" mode in the event of an error. All the following conditions must be met: * Mode = 3 (automatic mode) * Errorbehaviour = 0 * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE * One or more errors have occurred in which ActivateRecoverMode (Page 388) is effective. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 8 Approach substitute output value with error monitoring This operating mode is activated instead of "Approach substitute output value" mode in the event of an error. PID_3Step moves the actuator to the substitute output value and then switches to "Error monitoring" mode. All the following conditions must be met: * Mode = 3 (automatic mode) * Errorbehaviour = 1 * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE * One or more errors have occurred in which ActivateRecoverMode (Page 388) is effective. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 381 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Automatic switchover of operating mode during commissioning PID_3Step automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following diagram illustrates the influence of ErrorBehaviour on the switchover of operating mode from transition time measurement, pretuning, and fine tuning modes. Automatic switchover of operating mode in the event of an error Automatic switchover of operating mode once the current operation has been completed. PID control 382 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Automatic switchover of operating mode in automatic mode (PID_3Step V1.1) PID_3Step automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following diagram illustrates the influence of ErrorBehaviour and ActivateRecoverMode on this switchover of operating mode. Automatic switchover of operating mode in the event of an error Automatic switchover of operating mode once the current operation has been completed. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 383 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Automatic switchover of operating mode in automatic and manual modes (PID_3Step V1.0) PID_3Step automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following diagram illustrates the influence of ErrorBehaviour and ActivateRecoverMode on this switchover of operating mode. Automatic switchover of operating mode in the event of an error Automatic switchover of operating mode once the current operation has been completed. Automatic switchover of operating mode when error is no longer pending. See also Tag ActivateRecoverMode V1 (Page 388) Parameter ErrorBits V1 (Page 385) PID control 384 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.7 Parameter ErrorBits V1 If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the error codes are displayed with binary addition. The display of error code 0003, for example, indicates that the errors 0001 and 0002 are pending simultaneously. ErrorBits Description (DW#16#...) 0000 There is no error. 0001 The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * Input > Config.InputUpperLimit or * Input < Config.InputLowerLimit If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE and ErrorBehaviour = 1, the actuator moves to the substitute output value. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE and ErrorBehaviour = 0, the actuator stops in its current position. If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, the actuator stops in its current position. PID_3Step V1.1 You can move the actuator in manual mode. PID_3Step V1.0 Manual mode is not possible in this state. You cannot move the actuator again until you eliminate the error. 0002 Invalid value at "Input_PER" parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 0004 Error during fine tuning. Oscillation of the process value could not be maintained. 0020 Pretuning is not permitted in automatic mode or during fine tuning. 0080 Error during pretuning. The output value limits are not configured correctly or the actual value does not react as expected. Check whether the limits of the output value are configured correctly and match the control logic. Also make sure that the actual value does not oscillate strongly before starting pretuning. 0100 Error during fine tuning resulted in invalid parameters. 0200 Invalid value at "Input" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 0400 Calculation of output value failed. Check the PID parameters. 0800 Sampling time error: PID_3Step is not called within the sampling time of the cyclic interrupt OB. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. If this error occurred during simulation with PLCSIM, see the notes under Simulating PID_3Step V1 with PLCSIM (Page 160). 1000 Invalid value at "Setpoint" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 385 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step ErrorBits Description (DW#16#...) 2000 Invalid value at Feedback_PER parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. Manual mode is not possible in this state. You must deactivate position feedback (Config. FeedbackOn = FALSE) to move the actuator from this state. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 4000 Invalid value at Feedback parameter. Value has an invalid number format. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. Manual mode is not possible in this state. You must deactivate position feedback (Config. FeedbackOn = FALSE) to move the actuator from this state. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. 8000 Error during digital position feedback. Actuator_H = TRUE and Actuator_L = TRUE. The actuator cannot be moved to the substitute output value and remains in its current position. Manual mode is not possible in this state. In order to move the actuator from this state, you must deactivate the "Actuator endstop" (Config.ActuatorEndStopOn = FALSE). If automatic mode was active before the error occurred, ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, and the error is no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. PID control 386 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.8 Parameter Reset V1 A rising edge at Reset triggers a change to "Inactive" mode, and errors and warnings are reset. A falling edge at Reset triggers a change to the most recently active operating mode. If automatic mode was active before, switchover to automatic mode is bumpless. Activation Error Reset PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 387 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.9 Tag ActivateRecoverMode V1 The effect of the ActivateRecoverMode variable depends on the version of the PID_3Step. Behavior in version 1.1 The ActivateRecoverMode variable determines the behavior in the event of an error in automatic mode. ActivateRecoverMode is not effective during pretuning, fine tuning and transition time measurement. ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE In the event of an error, PID_3Step switches to "Inactive" or "Approach substitute output value" operating mode. The controller is activated by a reset or a change in Retain.Mode. TRUE If errors occur frequently in automatic mode, this setting has a negative effect on the control response. In this case, check the ErrorBits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. If one or more errors occur, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode: * 0002h: Invalid value at parameter Input_PER. * 0200h: Invalid value at parameter Input. * 0800h: Sampling time error * 1000h: Invalid value at parameter Setpoint. * 2000h: Invalid value at parameter Feedback_PER. * 4000h: Invalid value at parameter Feedback. * 8000h: Error in digital position feedback. With errors 2000h, 4000h and 8000h, PID_3Step cannot approach the configured substitute output value. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. PID control 388 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step Behavior in version 1.0 The ActivateRecoverMode variable determines the behavior in the event of an error in automatic and manual mode. ActivateRecoverMode is not effective during pretuning, fine tuning and transition time measurement. ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE In the event of an error, PID_3Step switches to "Inactive" or "Approach substitute output value" operating mode. The controller is activated by a reset or a change in Retain.Mode. TRUE Errors in automatic mode If errors occur frequently in automatic mode, this setting has a negative effect on the control response. In this case, check the ErrorBits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. If one or more errors occur, PID_3Step switches to "Approach substitute output value with error monitoring" or "Error monitoring" mode: * 0002h: Invalid value at parameter Input_PER. * 0200h: Invalid value at parameter Input. * 0800h: Sampling time error * 1000h: Invalid value at parameter Setpoint. * 2000h: Invalid value at parameter Feedback_PER. * 4000h: Invalid value at parameter Feedback. * 8000h: Error in digital position feedback. With errors 2000h, 4000h and 8000h, PID_3Step cannot approach the configured substitute output value. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_3Step switches back to automatic mode. Errors in manual mode If one or more of the following errors occur, PID_3Step stays in manual mode: * 0002h: Invalid value at parameter Input_PER. * 0200h: Invalid value at parameter Input. * 0800h: Sampling time error * 1000h: Invalid value at parameter Setpoint. * 2000h: Invalid value at parameter Feedback_PER. * 4000h: Invalid value at parameter Feedback. * 8000h: Error in digital position feedback. With errors 2000h, 4000h and 8000h, you cannot move the valve to a suitable position. See also PID_3Step V1 static tags (Page 369) Parameter State and Retain.Mode V1 (Page 378) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 389 Instructions 9.2 PID_3Step 9.2.5.10 Tag Warning V1 If several warnings are pending simultaneously, their values are displayed with binary addition. The display of warning 0003, for example, indicates that the warnings 0001 and 0002 are pending simultaneously. Warning Description (DW#16#...) 0000 No warning pending. 0001 The point of inflection was not found during pretuning. 0002 Oscillation increased during fine tuning. 0004 The setpoint was limited to the configured limits. 0008 Not all the necessary controlled system properties were defined for the selected method of calculation. The PID parameters were instead calculated using the TuneRuleTIR = 3 method. 0010 The operating mode could not be changed because ManualEnable = TRUE. 0020 The cycle time of the calling OB limits the sampling time of the PID algorithm. Improve results by using shorter OB cycle times. 0040 The process value exceeded one of its warning limits. 0080 Invalid value at Retain.Mode. The operating mode is not switched. 0100 The manual value was limited to the limits of the controller output. 0200 The rule used for tuning produces an incorrect result, or is not supported. 0400 Method selected for transition time measurement not suitable for actuator. The transition time cannot be measured because the actuator settings do not match the selected measuring method. 0800 The difference between the current position and the new output value is too small for transition time measurement. This can produce incorrect results. The difference between the current output value and new output value must be at least 50% of the entire control range. 1000 The substitute output value cannot be reached because it is outside the output value limits. The following warnings are deleted as soon as the cause is eliminated: 0004 0020 0040 0100 All other warnings are cleared with a rising edge at Reset. PID control 390 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.2.5.11 Tag SUT.State V1 SUT.State Name 0 SUT_INIT 50 SUT_TPDN 100 SUT_STDABW Description Initialize pretuning Determine start position without position feedback Calculate the standard deviation 200 SUT_GET_POI Find the point of inflection 300 SUT_GET_RISETM Determine the rise time 9900 SUT_IO 1 SUT_NIO 9.2.5.12 Pretuning successful Pretuning not successful Tag TIR.State V1 TIR.State Name -100 TIR_FIRST_SUT 0 TIR_INIT Description Fine tuning is not possible. Pretuning will be executed first. Initialize fine tuning 200 TIR_STDABW Calculate the standard deviation 300 TIR_RUN_IN Attempt to reach the setpoint with the maximum or minimum output value 400 TIR_CTRLN Attempt to reach the setpoint with the existing PID parameters (if pretuning has been successful) 500 TIR_OSZIL 9900 TIR_IO 1 TIR_NIO Determine oscillation and calculate parameters Fine tuning successful Fine tuning not successful PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 391 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.1 New features of PID_Temp PID_Temp V1.1 Response of the output value on switchover from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" The new option IntegralResetMode = 4 was added and defined as default. With IntegralResetMode = 4, the integral action is automatically pre-assigned when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" so that a control deviation results in a jump of the PID output value with identical sign. Initialization of the integral action in automatic mode The integral action can be initialized in automatic mode with the tags OverwriteInitialOutputValue and PIDCtrl.PIDInit. This simplifies the use of PID_Temp for override controls. 9.3.2 Compatibility with CPU and FW The following table shows which version of PID_Temp can be used on which CPU. CPU FW S7-1200 V4.2 or higher PID_Temp V1.1 V1.0 S7-1500 V4.1 V1.0 V2.0 or higher V1.1 V1.0 V1.7 to V1.8 V1.0 PID control 392 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.3 CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_Temp V1 CPU processing time Typical CPU processing times of the PID_Temp technology object as of Version 1.0, depending on CPU type. CPU Typ. CPU processing time PID_Temp V1 CPU 1211C V4.1 580 s CPU 1215C V4.1 580 s CPU 1217C V4.1 580 s CPU 1505S V1.0 50 s CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.7 130 s CPU 1511-1 PN V1.7 130 s CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.7 130 s CPU 1516-3 PN/DP V1.7 75 s CPU 1518-4 PN/DP V1.7 6 s Memory requirement Memory requirement of an instance DB of the PID_Temp technology object as of Version V1.0. Memory requirement of the instance DB of PID_Temp V1 Load memory requirement Approx. 17000 bytes Total work memory requirement 1280 bytes Retentive work memory requirement 100 bytes PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 393 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4 PID_Temp 9.3.4.1 Description of PID_Temp Description The PID_Temp instruction provides a PID controller with integrated tuning for temperature processes. PID_Temp can be used for pure heating or heating/cooling applications. The following operating modes are possible: Inactive Pretuning Fine tuning Automatic mode Manual mode Substitute output value with error monitoring For a more detailed description of the operating modes, see the State parameter. PID algorithm PID_Temp is a PIDT1 controller with anti-windup and weighting of the proportional and derivative actions. The PID algorithm operates according to the following equation (control zone and dead zone deactivated): The table below shows the meaning of the icons used in the equation and in the subsequent figures. Icon Description Associated parameters of the PID_Temp instruction y Output value of the PID algorithm - Kp Proportional gain Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Gain Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Gain CoolFactor s Laplace operator - b Proportional action weighting Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.PWeighting Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.PWeighting w Setpoint CurrentSetpoint x Process value ScaledInput TI Integral action time Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Ti Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Ti PID control 394 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Icon Description Associated parameters of the PID_Temp instruction TD Derivative action time Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Td a Derivative delay coefficient (derivative delay T1 = a x TD) Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.TdFiltRatio c Derivative action weighting Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.DWeighting DeadZone Dead zone width Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.DeadZone Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Td Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.TdFiltRatio Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.DWeighting Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.DeadZone ControlZone Control zone width Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.ControlZone Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.ControlZone PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 395 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp PID_Temp block diagram PID control 396 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Block diagram of PIDT1 with anti-windup Call PID_Temp is called in the constant time scale of a cyclic interrupt OB. If you call PID_Temp as a multi-instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for PID_Temp directly in the multi-instance DB and commission it via a watch table. Download to device The process values of retentive tags are only updated when you download PID_Temp completely. Download technology object to device (Page 44) Startup When the CPU starts up, PID_Temp starts in the operating mode that is saved in the Mode in/out parameter. To switch to "Inactive" operating mode during startup, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 397 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Reaction to error The behavior in the case of an error is determined by the tags SetSubstituteOutput and ActivateRecoverMode. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the behavior also depends on the error that occurred. SetSubstituteOutput ActivateRecoverMode Configuration editor > Basic settings of output > Set PidOutputSum to Reaction Not relevant FALSE Zero (inactive) Switch to "Inactive" (State = 0) mode The output value of the PID algorithm and all outputs for heating and cooling are set to 0. The scaling of the outputs for heating and cooling is not active. FALSE TRUE Current value for error while error is Switch to "Substitute output value with error monipending toring" mode (State = 5) The current output value is transferred to the actuator while the error is pending. TRUE TRUE Substitute output value while error is pending Switch to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode (State = 5) The value at SubstituteOutput is transferred to the actuator while the error is pending. In manual mode, PID_Temp uses ManualValue as output value, unless ManualValue is invalid. If ManualValue is invalid, SubstituteOutput is used. If ManualValue and SubstituteOutput are invalid, Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit is used. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error = FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. ErrorBits is reset by a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 398 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.2 Mode of operation of PID_Temp Monitoring process value limits You specify the high limit and low limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperLimit and Config.InputLowerLimit tags. If the process value is outside these limits, an error occurs (ErrorBits = 0000001h). You specify a high and low warning limit of the process value in the Config.InputUpperWarning and Config.InputLowerWarning tags. If the process value is outside these warning limits, a warning occurs (Warning = 0000040h), and the InputWarning_H or InputWarning_L output parameter changes to TRUE. Limiting the setpoint You specify a high limit and low limit of the setpoint in the Config.SetpointUpperLimit and Config.SetpointLowerLimit tags. PID_Temp automatically limits the setpoint to the process value limits. You can limit the setpoint to a smaller area. PID_Temp checks whether this area is within the process value limits. If the setpoint is outside these limits, the high or low limit is used as the setpoint, and output parameter SetpointLimit_H or SetpointLimit_L is set to TRUE. The setpoint is limited in all operating modes. Substitute setpoint You can specify a substitute setpoint at the SubstituteSetpoint tag and activate it with SubstituteSetpointOn = TRUE. In this way, you can temporarily specify the setpoint directly, for example for a slave controller in a cascade, without having to change the user program. The limits set for the setpoint also apply to the substitute setpoint. Heating and cooling With the default setting, PID_Temp only uses the outputs for heating (OutputHeat, OutputHeat_PWM, OutputHeat_PER). The output value of the PID algorithm (PidOutputSum) is scaled and output at the outputs for heating. You specify with Config.Output.Heat.Select if OutputHeat_PWM or OutputHeat_PER is calculated. OutputHeat is always calculated. With Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE, you can also activate the outputs for cooling (OutputCool, OutputCool_PWM, OutputCool_PER). Positive output values of the PID algorithm (PidOutputSum) are scaled and output at the outputs for heating. Negative output values of the PID algorithm are scaled and output at the outputs for cooling. You specify with Config.Output.Cool.Select if OutputCool_PWM or OutputCool_PER is calculated. OutputCool is always calculated. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 399 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Two methods are available to calculate the PID output value with activated cooling: Cooling factor (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE): The output value calculation for cooling takes place with the PID parameters for heating, taking into consideration the configurable cooling factor Config.CoolFactor. This method is suitable if the heating and cooling actuators have a similar time response but different gains. If this method is selected, pretuning and fine tuning for cooling as well as the PID parameter set for cooling are not available. You can only execute the tuning for heating. PID parameter switching (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE): The output value calculation for cooling takes place by means of a separate PID parameter set. Based on the calculated output value and the control deviation, the PID algorithm decides whether the PID parameter for heating or cooling is used. This method is suitable if the heating and cooling actuator have different time responses and different gains. Pretuning and fine tuning for cooling are only available if this method is selected. Output value limits and scaling Depending on the operating mode, the PID output value (PidOutputSum) is calculated automatically by the PID algorithm or defined by the manual value (ManualValue) or the configured substitute output value (SubstituteOutput). The PID output value is limited according to the configuration: If cooling is deactivated (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE), Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit is the high limit and Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit the low limit. If cooling is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit is the high limit and Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit the low limit. The PID output value is scaled and output at the outputs for heating and cooling. Scaling can be defined separately for each output and is specified in the structures Config.Output.Heat or Config.Output.Cool with 2 value pairs each: Output Value pair Parameter OutputHeat Value pair 1 PID output value high limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Scaled high output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.UpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value low limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Scaled low output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.LowerScaling OutputHeat_PWM Value pair 1 PID output value high limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Scaled high PWM output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PwmUpperScaling PID control 400 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Output Value pair Parameter Value pair 2 PID output value low limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Scaled low PWM output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PwmLowerScaling OutputHeat_PER Value pair 1 PID output value high limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Scaled high analog output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PerUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value low limit (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Scaled low analog output value (heating) Config.Output.Heat.PerLowerScaling OutputCool Value pair 1 PID output value low limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Scaled high output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.UpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value high limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Scaled low output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.LowerScaling OutputCool_PWM Value pair 1 PID output value low limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Scaled high PWM output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PwmUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value high limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Scaled low PWM output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PwmLowerScaling OutputCool_PER Value pair 1 PID output value low limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Scaled high analog output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PerUpperScaling Value pair 2 PID output value high limit (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Scaled low analog output value (cooling) Config.Output.Cool.PerLowerScaling If cooling is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit must have the value 0.0. Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit must always have the value 0.0. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 401 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Example: Output scaling when using output OutputHeat (cooling deactivated; Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit may be unequal to 0.0): Example: Output scaling when using output OutputHeat_PWM and OutputCool_PER (cooling activated; Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit must be 0.0): With the exception of the "Inactive" operating mode, the value at an output is always located between its scaled high output value and scaled low output value, for example, for OutputHeat always between Config.Output.Heat.UpperScaling and Config.Output.Heat.LowerScaling. If you want to limit the value at the associated output, you therefore have to adapt these scaling values as well. PID control 402 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Cascading PID_Temp supports you when you use cascade control (see: Program creation (Page 197)). Substitute output value In the event of an error, PID_Temp can output a substitute output value that you define at the SubstituteOutput tag. The substitute output value must be within the limits for the PID output value. The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from the substitute output value are the result of the configured output scaling. Monitoring signal validity The values of the following parameters are monitored for validity when used: Setpoint SubstituteSetpoint Input Input_PER Disturbance ManualValue SubstituteOutput PID parameters in the structures Retain.CtrlParams.Heat and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool. Monitoring the sampling time PID_Temp Ideally, the sampling time is equivalent to the cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB. The PID_Temp instruction measures the time interval between two calls. This is the current sampling time. On every switchover of operating mode and during the initial startup, the mean value is formed from the first 10 sampling times. Too great a difference between the current sampling time and this mean value triggers an error (Error = 0000800h). The error occurs during tuning if: New mean value >= 1.1 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.9 x old mean value The error occurs in automatic mode if: New mean value >= 1.5 x old mean value New mean value <= 0.5 x old mean value If you deactivate the sampling time monitoring (CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE), you can also call PID_Temp in OB1. You must then accept a lower control quality due to the deviating sampling time. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 403 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Sampling time of the PID algorithm The controlled system needs a certain amount of time to respond to changes in the output value. It is therefore not advisable to calculate the output value in every cycle. The sampling time of the PID algorithm represents the time between two calculations of the output value. It is calculated during tuning and rounded to a multiple of the cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB (sampling time PID_Temp). All other functions of the PID_Temp are executed at every call. If cooling and PID parameter switching are activated, PID_Temp uses a separate sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating and cooling. In all other configurations, only the sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating is used. If you use OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM, the sampling time of the PID algorithm is used as time period of the pulse width modulation. The accuracy of the output signal is determined by the ratio of the PID algorithm sampling time to the cycle time of the OB. The cycle time should be no more than a tenth of the PID algorithm sampling time. If the PID algorithm sampling time and thus the time period of the pulse width modulation is very high when you use OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM, you can define a deviating shorter period duration at the Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode or Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode parameters to improve the smoothness of the process value. Control logic PID_Temp can be used for heating or heating/cooling applications and always works with normal control logic. An increase of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) is intended to increase the process value. The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from the PID output value are the result of the configured output scaling. An inverted control logic or negative proportional gain are not supported. If you only need an output value for your application in which an increase is to reduce the process value (for example, discharge control), you can use PID_Compact with inverted control logic. PID control 404 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.3 Input parameters of PID_Temp Parameter Data type Default Description Setpoint REAL 0.0 Setpoint of the PID controller in automatic mode Valid range of values: Config.SetpointUpperLimit Setpoint Config.SetpointLowerLimit Config.InputUpperLimit Setpoint Config.InputLowerLimit Input REAL 0.0 A tag of the user program is used as source for the process value. If you are using the Input parameter, Config.InputPerOn = FALSE must be set. Input_PER INT 0 An analog input is used as the source of the process value. If you are using the Input_PER parameter, Config.InputPerOn = TRUE must be set. Disturbance REAL 0.0 Disturbance variable or precontrol value ManualEnable BOOL FALSE * A FALSE -> TRUE edge activates "Manual mode", whileState = 4, Mode remains unchanged. As long as ManualEnable = TRUE, you cannot change the operating mode via a rising edge at ModeActivate or use the commissioning dialog. A TRUE -> FALSE edge activates the operating mode that is specified by Mode. We recommend that you change the operating mode using Mode and ModeActivate only. * ManualValue REAL 0.0 Manual value This value is used in manual mode as PID output value (PidOutputSum). The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from this manual value are the result of the configured output scaling (structures Config.Output.Heat and Config.Output.Cool). For controllers with activated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), define: * a positive manual value to output the value at the outputs for heating * a negative manual value to output the value at the outputs for cooling The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * Cooling output deactivated (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE): Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit ManualValue Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit * Cooling output activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE): Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit ManualValue Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit ErrorAck BOOL FALSE * FALSE -> TRUE edge ErrorBits and Warning are reset. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 405 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Parameter Data type Default Description Reset BOOL FALSE Restarts the controller. * * * ModeActivate BOOL FALSE * FALSE -> TRUE edge - Switch to "Inactive" mode - ErrorBits and Warning are reset. As long as Reset = TRUE, - PID_Temp remains in "Inactive" mode (State = 0). - you cannot change the operating mode with Mode and ModeActivate or ManualEnable - You cannot use the commissioning dialog. TRUE -> FALSE edge - If ManualEnable = FALSE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in Mode. - If Mode = 3 (automatic mode), the integral action is treated as configured with the tag IntegralResetMode. FALSE -> TRUE edge PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved at the Mode input. PID control 406 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.4 Output parameters of PID_Temp Parameter Data type Default Description ScaledInput REAL 0.0 Scaled process value OutputHeat REAL 0.0 Output value (heating) in REAL format The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is scaled with the two value pairs Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Config.Output.Heat.UpperScaling and Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Config.Output.Heat.LowerScaling and output in REAL format at OutputHeat. OutputHeat is always calculated. OutputCool REAL 0.0 Output value (cooling) in REAL format The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is scaled with the two value pairs Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Config.Output.Cool.LowerScaling and Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Config.Output.Cool.UpperScaling and output in REAL format at OutputCool. OutputCool is only calculated if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). OutputHeat _PER INT 0 Analog output value (heating) The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is scaled with the two value pairs Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Config.Output.Heat.PerUpperScaling and Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Config.Output.Heat.PerLowerScaling and output as analog value at OutputHeat_PER. OutputHeat_PER is only calculated if Config.Output.Heat.Select = 2. OutputCool _PER INT 0 Analog output value (cooling) The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is scaled with the two value pairs Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Config.Output.Cool.PerLowerScaling and Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Config.Output.Cool.PerUpperScaling and output as analog value at OutputCool_PER. OutputCool_PER is only calculated if the cooling output is activated (Config .ActivateCooling = TRUE) and Config.Output.Cool.Select = 2. OutputHeat _PWM BOOL FALSE Pulse-width modulated output value (heating) The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is scaled with the two value pairs Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit, Config.Output.Heat.PwmUpperScaling and Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit, Config.Output.Heat .PwmLowerScaling and output as pulse-width modulated value (variable switch on and switch off times) at OutputHeat_PWM. OutputHeat_PWM is only calculated if Config.Output.Heat.Select = 1. OutputCool _PWM BOOL FALSE Pulse-width modulated output value (cooling) The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is scaled with the two value pairs Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit, Config.Output.Cool.PwmLowerScaling and Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit, Config.Output.Cool .PwmUpperScaling and output as pulse-width modulated value (variable switch on and switch off times) at OutputCool_PWM. OutputCool_PWM is only calculated if the cooling output is activated (Config .ActivateCooling = TRUE) and Config.Output.Cool.Select = 1. SetpointLimit _H BOOL FALSE If SetpointLimit_H = TRUE, the absolute setpoint high limit is reached (Setpoint Config.SetpointUpperLimit) or Setpoint Config.InputUpperLimit. The setpoint high limit is the minimum of Config.SetpointUpperLimit and Config.InputUpperLimit. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 407 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Parameter Data type Default SetpointLimit_L BOOL FALSE Description If SetpointLimit_L = TRUE, the absolute setpoint low limit is reached (Setpoint Config.SetpointLowerLimit) or Setpoint Config.InputLowerLimit. The setpoint low limit is the maximum of Config.SetpointLowerLimit and Config.InputLowerLimit. InputWarning _H BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_H = TRUE, the process value has reached or exceeded the warning high limit (ScaledInput Config.InputUpperWarning). InputWarning _L BOOL FALSE If InputWarning_L = TRUE, the process value has reached or fallen below the warning low limit (ScaledInput Config.InputLowerWarning). State INT 0 The PID_Temp state and mode parameters (Page 446) shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You can change the operating mode using the input parameter Mode and a rising edge at ModeActivate. For pretuning and fine tuning, you specify with Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableTuning whether tuning takes place for heating or cooling. * State = 0: Inactive * State = 1: Pretuning * State = 2: Fine tuning * State = 3: Automatic mode * State = 4: Manual mode * State = 5: Substitute output value with error monitoring Error BOOL FALSE If Error = TRUE, at least one error message is pending in this cycle. ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The PID_Temp ErrorBits parameter (Page 455) shows the pending error messages. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset with a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 408 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.5 In/out parameters of PID_Temp V2 Parameter Data type Default Description Mode INT 4 At Mode, specify the operating mode to which PID_Temp is to switch. Options are: * Mode = 0: Inactive * Mode = 1: Pretuning * Mode = 2: Fine tuning * Mode = 3: Automatic mode * Mode = 4: Manual mode The operating mode is activated by: * Rising edge at ModeActivate * Falling edge at Reset * Falling edge at ManualEnable * Cold restart of CPU if RunModeByStartup = TRUE For pretuning and fine tuning, you specify with Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableTuning whether tuning takes place for heating or cooling. Mode is retentive. A detailed description of the operating modes can be found in State and Mode parameters (Page 446). Master DWORD DW#16#0 Interface for cascade control If this PID_Temp instance is used as slave controller in a cascade (Config.Cascade.IsSlave = TRUE), assign the Master parameter at the instruction call with the Slave parameter of the master controller. Example: Call of a slave controller "PID_Temp_2" with master controller "PID_Temp_1" in SCL: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- "PID_Temp_2"(Master := "PID_Temp_1".Slave, Setpoint := "PID_Temp_1".OutputHeat); ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- You use this interface to exchange slave controller information about operating mode, limit and substitute setpoint with your master controller. Keep in mind that the call of the master controller has to take place before the call of the slave controller in the same cyclic interrupt OB. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 409 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Parameter Data type Default Description Master DWORD DW#16#0 Assignment: * Bits 0 to 15: Unassigned * Bits 16 to 23 - Limit counter: A slave controller whose output value is limited increments this counter. Depending on the configured number of slaves (Config.Cascade.CountSlaves) and of the anti-windup mode (Config.Cascade.AntiWindUpMode), the master controller reacts accordingly. * Bit 24 - Automatic mode of the slave controllers: TRUE, if all slave controllers are in automatic mode * Bit 25 - Substitute setpoint of the slave controllers: TRUE, if a slave controller has activated the substitute setpoint (SubstituteSetpointOn = TRUE) Slave DWORD DW#16#0 Interface for cascade control You use this interface to exchange slave controller information about operating mode, limit and substitute setpoint with your master controller. See description of Master parameter See also PID_Temp state and mode parameters (Page 446) Program creation (Page 197) Cascade control with PID_Temp (Page 195) PID control 410 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.6 PID_Temp static tags Note Change the tags identified with (1) only in "Inactive" mode to prevent malfunction of the PID controller. Tag Data type Default Description IntegralResetMode Int V1.0: 1, The IntegralResetMode tag (Page 464) determines how the integral action PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is pre-assigned when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode". V1.1 or higher: 4 This setting only works for one cycle. OverwriteInitialOutputValue RunModeByStartup LoadBackUp REAL BOOL BOOL 0.0 TRUE FALSE * IntegralResetMode = 0: Smooth * IntegralResetMode = 1: Delete * IntegralResetMode = 2: Hold * IntegralResetMode = 3: Pre-assign * IntegralResetMode = 4: Like setpoint change (only for PID_Temp with version 1.1) If one of the following conditions is met, the integral action PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is pre-assigned automatically as if PIDOutputSum = OverwriteInitialOutputValue in the previous cycle: * IntegralResetMode = 3 when switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" * TRUE -> FALSE edge at parameter Reset and parameter Mode = 3 * PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE in "Automatic mode" (available as of PID_Temp version 1.1) Activate operating mode at Mode parameter after CPU restart * If RunModeByStartup = TRUE, PID_Temp starts in the operating mode saved in the Mode parameter after CPU startup. * If RunModeByStartup = FALSE, PID_Temp remains in "Inactive" mode after CPU startup. If LoadBackUp = TRUE, the last set of PID parameters is reloaded from the CtrlParamsBackUp structure. The set was saved prior to the last tuning. LoadBackUp is automatically set back to FALSE. The acceptance is bumpless. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 411 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description SetSubstituteOutput BOOL TRUE Selection of the output value while an error is pending (State = 5): PhysicalUnit INT 0 * If SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the configured substitute output value SubstituteOutput is output as PID output value as long as an error is pending. * If SetSubstituteOutput = FALSE and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the actuator remains at the current PID output value as long as an error is pending. * If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, SetSubstituteOutput is not effective. * If SubstituteOutput is invalid (ErrorBits = 0020000h), the substitute output value cannot be output. In this case, the low limit of the PID output value for heating (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) is used as PID output value. Unit of measurement of the process value and setpoint, e.g., C, or F. This parameter is used for display in the editors and does not influence the control algorithm. PhysicalQuantity INT 0 Physical quantity of the process value and setpoint, e.g., temperature. This parameter is used for display in the editors and does not influence the control algorithm. ActivateRecoverMode BOOL TRUE The ActivateRecoverMode tag determines the reaction to error. Warning DWORD 0 The Warning tag shows the warnings since Reset = TRUE or ErrorAck =TRUE. Warning is retentive. Progress REAL 0.0 Progress of current tuning phase as a percentage (0.0 100.0) CurrentSetpoint REAL 0.0 CurrentSetpoint always displays the currently effective setpoint. This value is frozen during tuning. CancelTuningLevel REAL 10.0 Permissible fluctuation of setpoint during tuning. Tuning is not canceled until: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel PID control 412 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description SubstituteOutput REAL 0.0 The substitute output value is used as PID output value as long as the following conditions are met: * One or more errors are pending in automatic mode for which ActivateRecoverMode is in effect * SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from the substitute output value are the result of the configured output scaling (structures Config.Output.Heat and Config.Output.Cool). For controllers with activated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), define: * a positive substitute output value to output the value at the outputs for heating a negative substitute output value to output the value at the outputs for cooling The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * * Cooling output deactivated (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE): Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit SubstituteOutput Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit * Cooling output activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE): Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit SubstituteOutput Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit PidOutputSum REAL 0.0 PID output value PidOutputSum displays the output value of the PID algorithm. Depending on the operating mode, it is either calculated automatically or defined by the manual value or the configured substitute output value. The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from the PID output value are the result of the configured output scaling (structures Config.Output.Heat and Config.Output.Cool). The PidOutputSum is limited as defined in the configuration. * Cooling output deactivated (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE): Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit PidOutputSum Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit * Cooling output activated (ConfigActivateCooling = TRUE): Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit PidOutputSum Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 413 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PidOutputOffsetHeat REAL 0.0 Offset of the PID output value heating PidOutputOffsetHeat is added to the value that results from PidOutputSum for the heating branch. Enter a positive value for PidOutputOffsetHeat to receive a positive offset at the outputs for heating. The resulting values at the outputs for heating are the result of the configured output scaling (Config.Output.Heat structure). This offset can be used for actuators which need a fixed minimum value, for example, fans with minimum speed. PidOutputOffsetCool REAL 0.0 Offset of the PID output value cooling PidOutputOffsetCool is added to the value that results from PidOutputSum for the cooling branch. Enter a negative value for PidOutputOffsetCool to receive a positive offset at the outputs for cooling. The resulting values at the outputs for cooling are the result of the configured output scaling ( Config.Output.Cool structure). This offset can be used for actuators which need a fixed minimum value, for example, fans with minimum speed. SubstituteSetpointOn BOOL FALSE Activates the substitute setpoint as controller setpoint. * FALSE = the Setpoint parameter is used. TRUE = the SubstituteSetpoint parameter is used as setpoint SubstituteSetpointOn can be used to specify the setpoint of a slave controller in a cascade directly without having to change the user program. * SubstituteSetpoint REAL 0.0 Substitute setpoint If SubstituteSetpointOn = TRUE, the SubstituteSetpoint parameter is used as setpoint. Valid range of values: Config.SetpointUpperLimit SubstituteSetpoint Config.SetpointLowerLimit, Config.InputUpperLimit SubstituteSetpoint Config.InputLowerLimit DisableCooling BOOL FALSE DisableCooling = TRUE deactivates the cooling branch for heating/cooling controllers (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) in Automatic mode by setting PidOutputSum to 0.0 as low limit. PidOutputOffsetCool and the output scaling for the cooling outputs remain active. DisableCooling can be used for tuning of multi-zone applications to temporarily deactivate the cooling branch as long as all controllers have not completed their tuning yet. This parameter is set/reset by the user manually and is not automatically reset by the PID_Temp instruction. PID control 414 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description AllSlaveAutomaticState BOOL FALSE If this PID_Temp instance is used as master controller in a cascade (Config.Cascade.IsMaster = TRUE), AllSlaveAutomaticState = TRUE indicates that all slave controllers are in automatic mode. Tuning, manual mode or automatic mode of the master controller can only be executed accurately if all slave controllers are in automatic mode. AllSlaveAutomaticState is only determined if you interconnect the master controller and slave controller with the Master and Slave parameters. For details, see the Master parameter. NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint BOOL FALSE If this PID_Temp instance is used as master controller in a cascade (Config.Cascade.IsMaster = TRUE), NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint = TRUE indicates that no slave controller has activated its substitute setpoint. Tuning, manual mode or automatic mode of the master controller can only be executed accurately if no slave controller has activated its substitute setpoint. NoSlaveSubstituteSetpoint is only determined if you interconnect the master controller and slave controller with the Master and Slave parameters. For details, see the Master parameter. Heat.EnableTuning BOOL TRUE Enabling of tuning for heating Heat.EnableTuning must be set for the following tunings (at the same time or prior to the start with Mode and ModeActivate): * Pretuning heating * Pretuning heating and cooling * Fine tuning heating This parameter is not automatically reset by the PID_Temp instruction. Cool.EnableTuning BOOL FALSE Enabling of tuning for cooling Cool.EnableTuning must be set for the following tunings (simultaneously with or prior to the start with Mode and ModeActivate): * Pretuning cooling * Pretuning heating and cooling * Fine tuning cooling Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated ("Config.ActivateCooling" = TRUE and "Config.AdvancedCooling" = TRUE). This parameter is not automatically reset by the PID_Temp instruction. Config.InputPerOn(1) BOOL TRUE If InputPerOn = TRUE, the Input_PER parameter is used for detecting the process value. If InputPerOn = FALSE, the Input parameter is used. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 415 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.InputUpperLimit(1) REAL 120.0 High limit of the process value Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. If the limit is exceeded, an error is output and the reaction is determined by ActivateRecoverMode. At the I/O input, the process value can be a maximum of 18% higher than the nominal range (overrange). This means the limit cannot be exceeded when you use an I/O input with the pre-setting for high limit and process value scaling. When pretuning is started, the difference between high and low limit of the process value is checked to determine whether the distance between setpoint and process value meets the necessary requirements. InputUpperLimit > InputLowerLimit Config.InputLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of the process value Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. If the limit is undershot, an error is output and the reaction is determined by ActivateRecoverMode. InputLowerLimit < InputUpperLimit Config.InputUpperWarning(1) REAL 3.402822e+38 Warning high limit of the process value Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. If the limit is exceeded, a warning is output at the Warning parameter. * If you set InputUpperWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is used as the warning high limit. If you configure InputUpperWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning high limit. InputUpperWarning > InputLowerWarning * Config.InputLowerWarning(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Warning low limit of the process value Input and Input_PER are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. If the limit is undershot, a warning is output at the Warning parameter. * If you set InputLowerWarning outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value low limit is used as the warning low limit. If you configure InputLowerWarning within the process value limits, this value is used as the warning low limit. InputLowerWarning < InputUpperWarning * PID control 416 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.SetpointUpperLimit(1) REAL 3.402822e+38 High limit of setpoint Setpoint and SubstituteSetpoint are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. If the limit is exceeded, a warning is output at the Warning parameter. * If you configure SetpointUpperLimit outside the process value limits, the configured absolute process value high limit is used as the setpoint high limit. If you configure SetpointUpperLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint high limit. SetpointUpperLimit > SetpointLowerLimit * Config.SetpointLowerLimit(1) REAL -3.402822e+38 Low limit of the setpoint Setpoint and SubstituteSetpoint are monitored to ensure adherence to this limit. If the limit is undershot, a warning is output at the Warning parameter. * If you set SetpointLowerLimit outside the process value limits, the configured process value absolute low limit is used as the setpoint low limit. If you configure SetpointLowerLimit within the process value limits, this value is used as the setpoint low limit. SetpointLowerLimit < SetpointUpperLimit * Config.ActivateCooling(1) BOOL FALSE Activate cooling output * Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE * Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE Only the outputs for heating are used. The outputs for heating and cooling are used. If you are using the cooling output, the controller must not be configured as master controller (Config.Cascade.IsMaster must be FALSE) . PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 417 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.AdvancedCooling(1) BOOL TRUE Method for heating/cooling * Cooling factor (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE) The output value calculation for cooling takes place with the PID parameters for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat structure) taking into consideration the configurable cooling factor Config.CoolFactor. This method is suitable if the heating and cooling actuators have a similar time response but different gains. Pretuning and fine tuning for cooling are not available when you select this method. You can only execute the tuning for heating. * PID parameter switching (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE) The output value calculation for cooling takes place by means of a separate PID parameter set (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool structure). This method is suitable if the heating and cooling actuator have different time responses and different gains. Pretuning and fine tuning for cooling are only available when you select this method (Mode = 1 or 2, Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE). Config.AdvancedCooling is only calculated if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). Config.CoolFactor(1) REAL 1.0 Cooling factor If Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE, Config.CoolFactor is considered as factor in the calculation of the output value for cooling. This allows different gains of heating and cooling actuators to be taken into account. Config.CoolFactor is not set automatically or adjusted during tuning. You must correctly configure Config.CoolFactor manually with the ratio "heating actuator gain/cooling actuator gain". Example: Config.CoolFactor = 2.0 means that the gain of the heating actuator is twice as high as the gain of the cooling actuator. Config.CoolFactor is only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) and cooling factor is selected as method for heating/cooling (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE). Config.CoolFactor > 0.0 PID control 418 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.InputScaling .UpperPointIn(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaling Input_PER high Input_PER is scaled based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. Only effective if Input_PER is used for process value detection (Config.InputPerOn = TRUE). UpperPointIn > LowerPointIn Config.InputScaling .LowerPointIn(1) REAL 0.0 Scaling Input_PER low Input_PER is scaled based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. Only effective if Input_PER is used for process value detection (Config.InputPerOn = TRUE). LowerPointIn < UpperPointIn Config.InputScaling .UpperPointOut(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high process value Input_PER is scaled based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. Only effective if Input_PER is used for process value detection (Config.InputPerOn = TRUE). UpperPointOut > LowerPointOut Config.InputScaling .LowerPointOut(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low process value Input_PER is scaled based on the two value pairs UpperPointOut, UpperPointIn and LowerPointOut, LowerPointIn. Only effective if Input_PER is used for process value detection (Config.InputPerOn = TRUE). LowerPointOut < UpperPointOut Config.Output.Heat.Select(1) INT 1 Selecting the output value for heating Config.Output.Heat.Select specifies which outputs are used for heating: * Heat.Select = 0 - OutputHeat is used * Heat.Select = 1 - OutputHeat and OutputHeat_PWM are used Heat.Select = 2 -OutputHeat and OutputHeat_PER are used Outputs that are not used are not calculated and remain at their default value. * PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 419 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Heat .PwmPeriode(1) REAL 0.0 Period duration of the pulse width modulation (PWM) for heating (OutputHeat_PWM output) in seconds: * Heat.PwmPeriode = 0.0 The sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle) is used as period duration of the PWM. * Heat.PwmPeriode > 0.0 The value is rounded off to an integer multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time (CycleTime.Value) and used as period duration of the PWM. This setting can be used to improve the smoothing of the process value with a long sampling time of the PID algorithm. The value must meet the following conditions: Config.Output.Heat .PidUpperLimit(1) REAL 100.0 - Heat.PwmPeriode Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle, - Heat.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Heat.MinimumOnTime - Heat.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Heat.MinimumOffTime High limit of the PID output value for heating The PID output value (PidOutputSum) is limited to the high limit. Heat.PidUpperLimit forms a value pair together with the following parameters for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the outputs for heating: * Heat.UpperScaling for OutputHeat * Heat.PwmUpperScaling for OutputHeat_PWM * Heat.PerUpperScaling for OutputHeat_PER If you want to limit the value at the associated output, you must also adjust these scaling values. Heat.PidUpperLimit > Heat.PidLowerLimit PID control 420 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Heat .PidLowerLimit(1) REAL 0.0 Low limit of the PID output value for heating For controllers with deactivated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE), the PID output value (PidOutputSum) is limited to this low limit. For controllers with activated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the value must be 0.0. Heat.PidLowerLimit forms a value pair together with the following parameters for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the outputs for heating: * Heat.LowerScaling for OutputHeat * Heat.PwmLowerScaling for OutputHeat_PWM * Heat.PerLowerScaling for OutputHeat_PER If you want to limit the value at the associated output, you must also adjust these scaling values. The permitted value range is determined by the configuration. * Cooling output deactivated (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE): Heat.PidLowerLimit < Heat.PidUpperLimit * Cooling output activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE): Heat.PidLowerLimit = 0.0 Config.Output.Heat .UpperScaling(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high output value for heating Heat.UpperScaling and Heat.PidUpperLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the output value for heating (OutputHeat). The OutputHeat value is always located between Heat.UpperScaling and Heat.LowerScaling. Heat.UpperScaling Heat.LowerScaling Config.Output.Heat .LowerScaling(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low output value for heating Heat.LowerScaling and Heat.PidLowerLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the output value for heating (OutputHeat). The OutputHeat value is always located between Heat.UpperScaling and Heat.LowerScaling. Heat.UpperScaling Heat.LowerScaling PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 421 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Heat .PwmUpperScaling(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high PWM output value for heating Heat.PwmUpperScaling and Heat.PidUpperLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the pulse-width modulated output value for heating (OutputHeat_PWM). The OutputHeat_PWM value is always located between Heat.PwmUpperScaling and Heat.PWMLowerScaling. Heat.PwmUpperScaling is only effective if OutputHeat_PWM is selected as output for heating (Heat.Select = 1) 100.0 Heat.PwmUpperScaling 0.0 Heat.PwmUpperScaling Heat.PwmLowerScaling Config.Output.Heat .PwmLowerScaling(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low PWM output value for heating Heat.PwmLowerScaling and Heat.PidLowerLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the pulse-width modulated output value for heating (OutputHeat_PWM). The OutputHeat_PWM value is always located between Heat.PwmUpperScaling and Heat.PwmLowerScaling. Heat.PwmLowerScaling is only effective if OutputHeat_PWM is selected as output for heating (Heat.Select = 1) 100.0 Heat.PwmLowerScaling 0.0 Heat.PwmUpperScaling Heat.PwmLowerScaling Config.Output.Heat .PerUpperScaling(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaled high analog output value for heating Heat.PerUpperScaling and Heat.PidUpperLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the analog output value for heating (OutputHeat_PER). The OutputHeat_PER value is always located between Heat.PerUpperScaling and Heat.PerLowerScaling. Heat.PerUpperScaling is only effective if OutputHeat_PER is selected as output for heating (Heat.Select = 2) 32511.0 Heat.PerUpperScaling -32512.0 Heat.PerUpperScaling Heat.PerLowerScaling Config.Output.Heat .PerLowerScaling(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low analog output value for heating Heat.PerLowerScaling and Heat.PidLowerLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the analog output value for heating (OutputHeat_PER). The OutputHeat_PER value is always located between Heat.PerUpperScaling and Heat.PerLowerScaling. Heat.PerLowerScaling is only effective if OutputHeat_PER is selected as output for heating (Heat.Select = 2) 32511.0 Heat.PerLowerScaling -32512.0 Heat.PerUpperScaling Heat.PerLowerScaling PID control 422 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Heat .MinimumOnTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum on time of the pulse width modulation for heating (OutputHeat_PWM output) A PWM pulse is never shorter than this value. The value is rounded off to: Heat.MinimumOnTime = n x CycleTime.Value Heat.MinimumOnTime is only effective if the output for heating OutputHeat_PWM is selected (Heat.Select = 1)". 100000.0 Heat.MinimumOnTime 0.0 Config.Output.Heat .MinimumOffTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum off time of the pulse width modulation for heating (OutputHeat_PWM output) A PWM pause is never shorter than this value. The value is rounded off to: Heat.MinimumOffTime = n x CycleTime.Value Heat.MinimumOffTime is only effective if the output for heating OutputHeat_PWM is selected (Heat.Select = 1)". 100000.0 Heat.MinimumOffTime 0.0 Config.Output.Cool.Select(1) INT 1 Selecting the output value for cooling Config.Output.Cool.Select specifies which outputs are used for cooling: * Cool.Select = 0 - OutputCool is used * Cool.Select = 1 -OutputCool and OutputCool_PWM are used Cool.Select = 2 - OutputCool and OutputCool_PER are used Outputs that are not used are not calculated and remain at their default value. * Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 423 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Cool .PwmPeriode(1) REAL 0.0 Period duration of the pulse width modulation for cooling (OutputCool_PWM output) in seconds: * Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE: sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle) is used as period duration of the PWM. * Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE: The sampling time of the PID algorithm for cooling (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle) is used as period duration of the PWM. * Cool.PwmPeriode > 0.0: The value is rounded off to an integer multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time (CycleTime.Value) and used as period duration of the PWM. This setting can be used to improve the smoothing of the process value with a long sampling time of the PID algorithm. The value must meet the following conditions: - Cool.PwmPeriode Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle or Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle - Cool.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Cool.MinimumOnTime - Cool.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Cool.MinimumOffTime Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). Config.Output.Cool .PidUpperLimit(1) REAL 0.0 High limit of the PID output value for cooling The value must be 0.0. Cool.PidUpperLimit forms a value pair together with the following parameters for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the outputs for cooling: * Cool.LowerScaling for OutputCool * Cool.PwmLowerScaling for OutputCool_PWM * Cool.PerLowerScaling for OutputCool_PER If you want to limit the value at the associated output, you must also adjust these scaling values. Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). Cool.PidUpperLimit = 0.0 PID control 424 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Cool .PidLowerLimit(1) REAL -100.0 Low limit of the PID output value for cooling For controllers with activated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the PID output value (PidOutputSum) is limited to this low limit. Cool.PidLowerLimit forms a value pair together with the following parameters for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the outputs for cooling: * Cool.UpperScaling for OutputCool * Cool.PwmUpperScaling for OutputCool_PWM * Cool.PerUpperScaling for OutputCool_PER If you want to limit the value at the associated output, you must also adjust these scaling values. Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). Cool.PidLowerLimit < Cool.PidUpperLimit Config.Output.Cool .UpperScaling(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high output value for cooling Cool.UpperScaling and Cool.PidLowerLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the output value for cooling (OutputCool). The OutputCool value is always located between Cool.UpperScaling and Cool.LowerScaling. Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). Cool.UpperScaling Cool.LowerScaling Config.Output.Cool .LowerScaling(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low output value for cooling Cool.LowerScaling and Cool.PidUpperLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the output value for cooling (OutputCool). The OutputCool value is always located between Cool.UpperScaling and Cool.LowerScaling. Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). Cool.UpperScaling Cool.LowerScaling Config.Output.Cool .PwmUpperScaling(1) REAL 100.0 Scaled high PWM output value for cooling Cool.PwmUpperScaling and Cool.PidLowerLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the pulse-width modulated output value for cooling (OutputCool_PWM). The OutputCool_PWM value is always located between Cool.PwmUpperScaling and Cool.PwmLowerScaling. Cool.PwmUpperScaling is only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) and OutputCool_PWM is selected as output for cooling (Cool.Select = 1). 100.0 Cool.PwmUpperScaling 0.0 Cool.PwmUpperScaling Cool.PwmLowerScaling PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 425 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Cool .PwmLowerScaling(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low PWM output value for cooling Cool.PwmLowerScaling and Cool.PidUpperLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the pulse-width modulated output value for cooling (OutputCool_PWM). The OutputCool_PWM value is always located between Cool.PwmUpperScaling and CoolPwm.LowerScaling. Cool.PwmLowerScaling is only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) and OutputCool_PWM is selected as output for cooling (Cool.Select = 1). 100.0 Cool.PwmLowerScaling 0.0 Cool.PwmUpperScaling Cool.PwmLowerScaling Config.Output.Cool .PerUpperScaling(1) REAL 27648.0 Scaled high analog output value for cooling Cool.PerUpperScaling and Cool.PidLowerLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the analog output value for cooling (OutputCool_PER). The OutputCool_PER value is always located between Cool.PerUpperScaling and Cool.PerLowerScaling. Cool.PerUpperScaling is only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) and OutputCool_PER is selected as output for cooling (Cool.Select = 2). 32511.0 Cool.PerUpperScaling -32512.0 Cool.PerUpperScaling Cool.PerLowerScaling Config.Output.Cool .PerLowerScaling(1) REAL 0.0 Scaled low analog output value for cooling Cool.PerLowerScaling and Cool.PidUpperLimit form a value pair for scaling of the PID output value (PidOutputSum) to the analog output value for cooling (OutputCool_PER). The OutputCool_PER value is always located between Cool.PerUpperScaling and Cool.PerLowerScaling. Cool.PerLowerScaling is only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) and OutputCool_PER is selected as output for cooling (Cool.Select = 2). 32511.0 Cool.PerLowerScaling -32512.0 Cool.PerUpperScaling Cool.PerLowerScaling Config.Output.Cool .MinimumOnTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum on time of the pulse width modulation for cooling (OutputCool_PWM output) A PWM pulse is never shorter than this value. The value is rounded off to: Cool.MinimumOnTime = n x CycleTime.Value Cool.MinimumOnTime is only effective if the output for cooling OutputCool_PWM is selected (Cool.Select = 1). Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). 100000.0 Cool.MinimumOnTime 0.0 PID control 426 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Output.Cool .MinimumOffTime(1) REAL 0.0 Minimum off time of the pulse width modulation for cooling (OutputCool_PWM output) A PWM pause is never shorter than this value. The value is rounded off to: Cool.MinimumOffTime = n x CycleTime.Value Cool.MinimumOffTime is only effective if the output for cooling OutputCool_PWM is selected (Cool.Select = 1). Only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). 100000.0 Cool.MinimumOffTime 0.0 If you are using PID_Temp in a cascade, the master controller and slave controller exchange information via the Master and Slave parameters. You need to make the interconnection. For details, see the Master parameter. Config.Cascade.IsMaster(1) BOOL FALSE The controller is master in a cascade and provides the slave setpoint. Set IsMaster = TRUE if you are using this PID_Temp instance as master controller in a cascade. A master controller defines the setpoint of a slave controller with its output. A PID_Temp instance can be master controller and slave controller at the same time. If the controller is used as master controller, the cooling output must be deactivated (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE). Config.Cascade.IsSlave(1) BOOL FALSE The controller is slave in a cascade and receives its setpoint from the master. Set IsSlave = TRUE if you are using this PID_Temp instance as slave controller in a cascade. A slave controller receives its setpoint (Setpoint parameter) from the output of its master controller (OutputHeat parameter). A PID_Temp instance can be master controller and slave controller at the same time. Config.Cascade .AntiWindUpMode(1) INT 1 Anti-windup behavior in the cascade Options are: * Anti-windup = 0 The AntiWindUp functionality is deactivated. The master controller does not respond to the limit of its slave controllers. * Anti-windup = 1 The integral action of the master controller is reduced in the ratio "Slaves in limit" to "Number of slaves" ("CountSlaves" parameter). This reduces the effects of the limitation on the control behavior. * Anti-windup = 2 The integral action of the master controller is held as soon as a slave controller is in the limit. Only effective if the controller is configured as master controller (Config.Cascade.IsMaster = TRUE). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 427 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Config.Cascade.CountSlaves(1) INT 1 Number of subordinate slaves Here you enter the number of directly subordinate slave controllers which receive their setpoint from this master controller. Only effective if the controller is configured as master controller (Config.Cascade.IsMaster = TRUE). 255 CountSlaves 1 CycleTime.StartEstimation BOOL TRUE If CycleTime.EnEstimation = TRUE, CycleTime.StartEstimation = TRUE starts automatic determination of the PID_Temp sampling time (cycle time of the calling OB). CycleTime.StartEstimation = FALSE is set once measurement is complete. CycleTime.EnEstimation BOOL TRUE If CycleTime.EnEstimation = TRUE, the PID_Temp sampling time is determined automatically. If CycleTime.EnEstimation = FALSE, the sampling time PID_Temp is not determined automatically and must be configured correctly manually with CycleTime.Value. CycleTime.EnMonitoring BOOL TRUE If CycleTime.EnMonitoring = FALSE, the PID_Temp sampling time is not monitored. If PID_Temp cannot be executed within the sampling time, no error (ErrorBits=0000800h) is output and PID_Temp does not respond as configured with ActivateRecoverMode. CycleTime.Value(1) REAL 0.1 PID_Temp sampling time (cycle time of the calling OB) in seconds CycleTime.Value is determined automatically and is usually equivalent to the cycle time of the calling OB. You can reload values from the CtrlParamsBackUp structure with LoadBackUp = TRUE. CtrlParamsBackUp.SetByUser BOOL FALSE Saved value of Retain.CtrlParams.SetByUser CtrlParamsBackUp.Heat.Gain REAL 1.0 Saved proportional gain for heating CtrlParamsBackUp.Heat.Ti REAL 20.0 Saved integral action time for heating in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp.Heat.Td REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action time for heating in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp .Heat.TdFiltRatio REAL 0.2 Saved derivative delay coefficient for heating CtrlParamsBackUp .Heat.PWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved weighting of the proportional action for heating CtrlParamsBackUp .Heat.DWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved weighting of the derivative action for heating CtrlParamsBackUp.Heat.Cycle REAL 1.0 Saved sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp .Heat.ControlZone REAL 3.402822e+38 Saved control zone width for heating CtrlParamsBackUp.Heat.DeadZone REAL 0.0 Saved dead zone width for heating CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.Gain REAL 1.0 Saved proportional gain for cooling CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.Ti REAL 20.0 Saved integral action time for cooling in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.Td REAL 0.0 Saved derivative action time for cooling in seconds PID control 428 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.TdFiltRatio REAL 0.2 Saved derivative delay coefficient for cooling CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.PWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved proportional action weighting factor for cooling CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.DWeighting REAL 1.0 Saved derivative action weighting factor for cooling CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool.Cycle REAL 1.0 Saved sampling time of the PID algorithm for cooling in seconds CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool .ControlZone REAL 3.402822e+38 Saved control zone width for cooling CtrlParamsBackUp.Cool .DeadZone REAL 0.0 Saved dead zone width for cooling PIDSelfTune.SUT .CalculateParamsHeat BOOL FALSE The properties of the heating branch of the controlled system are saved during pretuning for heating. If SUT.CalculateParamsHeat = TRUE, the PID parameters for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat structure) are recalculated on the basis of these properties. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method (PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRuleHeat parameter) without having to repeat the tuning. SUT.CalculateParamsHeat is set to FALSE after the calculation. Only possible if the pretuning was successful (SUT.ProcParHeatOk = TRUE). PIDSelfTune.SUT .CalculateParamsCool BOOL FALSE The properties of the cooling branch of the controlled system are saved during tuning for cooling. If SUT.CalculateParamsCool = TRUE, the PID parameters for cooling (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool structure) are recalculated on the basis of these properties. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method (PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRuleCool parameter) without having to repeat the tuning. SUT.CalculateParamsCool is set to FALSE after the calculation. Only possible if the pretuning was successful (SUT.ProcParCoolOk = TRUE). Only effective if Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 429 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.SUT .TuneRuleHeat INT 2 Method for PID parameter calculation with pretuning for heating Options are: * SUT.TuneRuleHeat = 0: PID according to CHR * SUT.TuneRuleHeat = 1: PI according to CHR SUT.TuneRuleHeat = 2: PID for temperature processes according to CHR (results in a slower and rather asymptomatic control response with lower overshoot than SUT.TuneRuleHeat = 0) (CHR = Chien, Hrones and Reswick) * Only with SUT.TuneRuleHeat = 2 is the control zone Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.ControlZone automatically set during pretuning for heating. PIDSelfTune.SUT .TuneRuleCool INT 2 Method for PID parameter calculation with pretuning for cooling Options are: * SUT.TuneRuleCool = 0: PID according to CHR * SUT.TuneRuleCool = 1: PI according to CHR SUT.TuneRuleCool = 2: PID for temperature processes according to CHR (results in a slower and rather asymptomatic control response with lower overshoot than SUT.TuneRuleCool = 0) (CHR = Chien, Hrones and Reswick) * Only with SUT.TuneRuleCool = 2 is the control zone Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.ControlZone automatically set during pretuning for cooling. SUT.TuneRuleCool is only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE, Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). PID control 430 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.SUT.State INT 0 The SUT.State tag indicates the current phase of pretuning: PIDSelfTune.SUT .ProcParHeatOk BOOL FALSE * State = 0: Initialize pretuning * State = 100: Calculate standard deviation for heating * State = 200: Calculate standard deviation for cooling * State = 300: Determine point of inflection for heating * State = 400: Determine point of inflection for cooling * State = 500: Set heating to setpoint after reaching point of inflection * State = 600: Set cooling to setpoint after reaching point of inflection * State = 700: Compare efficiency of the heating actuator and cooling actuator * State = 800: Heating and cooling activated * State = 900: Cooling activated * State = 1000: Determine delay time after switching off heating * State = 9900: Pretuning successful * State = 1: Pretuning not successful TRUE: The calculation of the process parameters for pretuning heating was successful. This tag is set during tuning. It must be TRUE for calculation of the PID parameters for heating. PIDSelfTune.SUT .ProcParCoolOk BOOL FALSE TRUE: The calculation of the process parameters for pretuning cooling was successful. This tag is set during tuning. It must be TRUE for calculation of the PID parameters for cooling. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 431 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.SUT .AdaptDelayTime INT 0 The AdaptDelayTime tag determines the adaptation of the delay time for heating at the operating point (for "Pretuning heating" and "Pretuning heating and cooling"). Options are: * SUT.AdaptDelayTime = 0: No adaptation of delay time. The SUT.State = 1000 phase is skipped. This option results in a shorter tuning time than with SUT.AdaptDelayTime = 1. * SUT.AdaptDelayTime = 1: Adaptation of the delay time to the setpoint in SUT.State = 1000 phase by switching off heating temporarily. This option results in a longer tuning time than withSUT.AdaptDelayTime = 0. It can improve the control response if the process behavior depends significantly on the operating point (non-linearity). This option should not be used for multi-zone applications with strong thermal connections. PID control 432 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type PIDSelfTune.SUT.CoolingMode INT Default Description 0 The CoolingMode tag determines the manipulated variable output to determine the cooling parameters (for pretuning heating and cooling). Options are: * SUT.CoolingMode = 0: Switch off heating and switch on cooling after reaching the setpoint. The SUT.State = 700 phase is skipped. Phase SUT.State = 500 is followed by phase SUT.State = 900. This option can improve the control response if the gain of the cooling actuator is low compared to the gain of the heating actuator. It results in a shorter tuning time than with SUT.CoolingMode = 1 or 2. * SUT.CoolingMode = 1: Switch on cooling in addition to heating after reaching the setpoint. The SUT.State = 700 phase is skipped. Phase SUT.State = 500 is followed by phase SUT.State = 800. This option can improve the control response if the gain of the cooling actuator is high compared to the gain of the heating actuator. * SUT.CoolingMode = 2: After heating up to the setpoint, a decision is automatically made in phase SUT.State = 700 as to whether heating is switched off. Phase SUT.State = 500 is followed by phase SUT.State = 700 and then SUT.State = 800 or SUT.State = 900. This option requires more time than options 0 and 1. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 433 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn BOOL FALSE Use the RunIn tag to specify the sequence of fine tuning during start from automatic mode. * RunIn = FALSE If fine tuning is started from automatic mode, the system uses the existing PID parameters to control to the setpoint (TIR.State = 500 or 600). Only then will fine tuning start. * RunIn = TRUE PID_Temp tries to reach the setpoint with minimum or maximum output value (TIR.State = 300 or 400). This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning then starts automatically. RunIn is set to FALSE after fine tuning. During start of fine tuning from Inactive or Manual mode, PID_Temp reacts as described under RunIn = TRUE. PIDSelfTune.TIR .CalculateParamsHeat BOOL FALSE The properties of the heating branch of the controlled system are saved during fine tuning for heating. If TIR.CalculateParamsHeat= TRUE, the PID parameters for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat structure) are recalculated on the basis of these properties. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method (PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRuleHeat parameter) without having to repeat the tuning. TIR.CalculateParamsHeat is set to FALSE after the calculation. Only possible if fine tuning heating was successful beforehand (TIR.ProcParHeatOk = TRUE). PIDSelfTune.TIR .CalculateParamsCool BOOL FALSE The properties of the cooling branch of the controlled system are saved during fine tuning for cooling. If TIR.CalculateParamsCool= TRUE, the PID parameters for cooling (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool structure) are recalculated on the basis of these properties. This enables you to change the parameter calculation method (PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRuleCool parameter) without having to repeat the tuning. TIR.CalculateParamsCool is set to FALSE after the calculation. Only possible if fine tuning cooling was successful beforehand (TIR.ProcParCoolOk = TRUE). Only effective if Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE PID control 434 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR .TuneRuleHeat INT 0 Method for parameter calculation during fine tuning for heating Options are: * TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 0: PID automatic * TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 1: PID fast (faster control response with higher amplitudes of the output value than with TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 2) * TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 2: PID slow (slower control response with lower amplitudes of the output value than with TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 1) * TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 3: ZN PID * TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 4: ZN PI * TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 5: ZN P (ZN=Ziegler-Nichols) To be able to repeat the calculation of the PID parameters for heating with TIR.CalculateParamsHeat and TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 0, 1 or 2, the previous fine tuning also has to have been executed with TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 0, 1 or 2. If this is not the case, TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 3 is used. The recalculation of the PID parameters for heating with TIR.CalculateParamsHeat and TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 3, 4 or 5 is always possible. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 435 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR .TuneRuleCool INT 0 Method for parameter calculation during fine tuning for cooling Options are: * TIR.TuneRuleCool = 0: PID automatic * TIR.TuneRuleCool = 1: PID fast (faster control response with higher amplitudes of the output value than with TIR.TuneRuleCool = 2) * TIR.TuneRuleCool = 2: PID slow (slower control response with lower amplitudes of the output value than with TIR.TuneRuleCool = 1) * TIR.TuneRuleCool = 3: ZN PID * TIR.TuneRuleCool = 4: ZN PI * TIR.TuneRuleCool = 5: ZN P (ZN=Ziegler-Nichols) To be able to repeat the calculation of the PID parameters for cooling with TIR.CalculateParamsCool and TIR.TuneRuleCool = 0, 1 or 2, the previous fine tuning also has to have been executed with TIR.TuneRuleCool = 0, 1 or 2. If this is not the case, TIR.TuneRuleCool = 3 is used. The recalculation of the PID parameters for cooling with TIR.CalculateParamsCool and TIR.TuneRuleCool = 3, 4 or 5 is always possible. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (ConfigActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). PID control 436 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR.State INT 0 The TIR.State tag indicates the current phase of "fine tuning": PIDSelfTune.TIR .ProcParHeatOk BOOL FALSE * State = 0: Initialize fine tuning * State = 100: Calculate standard deviation for heating * State = 200: Calculate standard deviation for cooling * State = 300: Attempting to reach setpoint for heating with two-step control using heating * State = 400: Attempting to reach setpoint for cooling with two-step control using cooling * State = 500: Attempting to reach setpoint for heating with PID control * State = 600: Attempting to reach setpoint for cooling with PID control * State = 700: Calculate standard deviation for heating * State = 800: Calculate standard deviation for cooling * State = 900: Determine oscillation and calculate parameters for heating * State = 1000: Determine oscillation and calculate parameters for cooling * State = 9900: Fine tuning successful * State = 1: Fine tuning not successful TRUE: The calculation of the process parameters for fine tuning heating was successful. This tag is set during tuning. It must be met for calculation of the PID parameters for heating. PIDSelfTune.TIR .ProcParCoolOk BOOL FALSE TRUE: The calculation of the process parameters for fine tuning cooling was successful. This tag is set during tuning. It must be met for calculation of the PID parameters for cooling. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 437 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR .OutputOffsetHeat REAL 0.0 Tuning offset heating of the PID output value TIR.OutputOffsetHeat is added to the value that results from PidOutputSum for the heating branch. To receive a positive offset at the outputs for heating, define a positive value for TIR.OutputOffsetHeat. The resulting values at the outputs for heating are the result of the configured output scaling (Struktur Config.Output.Heat). This tuning offset can be used in controllers with activated cooling output and PID parameter switching (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE, Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE) for fine tuning cooling. If the outputs for cooling are not active at the setpoint that is to be tuned (PidOutputSum > 0.0), fine tuning cooling is not possible. In this case, define a positive tuning offset heating which is greater than the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint in the steady state before you start tuning. This step increases the values at the outputs for heating and activates the outputs for cooling (PidOutputSum < 0.0). Fine tuning cooling is now possible. When fine tuning is complete, TIR.OutputOffsetHeat is reset to 0.0. Major changes at TIR.OutputOffsetHeat in one step can result in temporary overshoots. Config.Output.Heat.PidUpperLimit PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetHeat Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit PID control 438 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDSelfTune.TIR .OutputOffsetCool REAL 0.0 Tuning offset cooling of the PID output value TIR.OutputOffsetCool is added to the value that results from PidOutputSum for the cooling branch. To receive a positive offset at the outputs for cooling, define a negative value for TIR.OutputOffsetCool. The resulting values at the outputs for cooling are the result of the configured output scaling (Struktur Config.Output.Coool). This tuning offset can be used in controllers with activated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE) for fine tuning heating. If the outputs for heating are not active at the setpoint that is to be tuned (PidOutputSum < 0.0), fine tuning heating is not possible. In this case, define a negative tuning offset cooling which is less than the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint in the steady state before you start tuning. This step increases the values at the outputs for cooling and activates the outputs for heating (PidOutputSum > 0.0). Fine tuning heating is now possible. When fine tuning is complete, TIR.OutputOffsetCool is reset to 0.0. Major changes at TIR.OutputOffsetCool in one step can result in temporary overshoots. Config.Output.Cool.PidUpperLimit PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetCool Config.Output.Cool.PidLowerLimit PIDSelfTune.TIR .WaitForControlIn BOOL FALSE Waiting with fine tuning after reaching the setpoint If TIR.WaitForControlIn = TRUE, fine tuning waits in between reaching the setpoint (TIR.State = 500 or 600) and calculation of the standard deviation (TIR.State = 700 or 800) until a FALSE -> TRUE edge is given at TIR.FinishControlIn. TIR.WaitForControlIn can be used for simultaneous fine tuning of several controllers in multi-zone applications to synchronize tuning of the individual zones. It ensures that all zones have reached their setpoints before the actual tuning starts. The influence of thermal connections between the zones on tuning can be reduced in this way. TIR.WaitForControlIn is only effective if fine tuning is started from automatic mode with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = FALSE. PIDSelfTune.TIR .ControlInReady BOOL FALSE If TIR.WaitForControlIn = TRUE, PID_Temp sets TIR.ControlInReady = TRUE as soon as the setpoint has been reached and waits with additional tuning steps until a FALSE -> TRUE edge is given at TIR.FinishControlIn. PIDSelfTune.TIR .FinishControlIn BOOL FALSE If TIR.ControlInReady = TRUE, a FALSE -> TRUE edge at TIR.FinishControlIn stops the wait and fine tuning resumes. PIDCtrl.IOutputOld(1) REAL 0.0 Integral action in last cycle PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 439 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description PIDCtrl.PIDInit BOOL FALSE PIDCtrl.PIDInit is available as of PID_Temp version 1.1. If PIDCtrl.PIDInit = TRUE in "Automatic mode", the integral action PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is pre-assigned automatically as if PidOutputSum = OverwriteInitialOutputValue in the previous cycle. This can be used for a Override control with PID_Temp (Page 206). Retain.CtrlParams.SetByUser(1) BOOL FALSE If the PID parameters are entered manually in the configuration editor, SetByUser = TRUE. This parameter is used for display in the editors and does not influence the control algorithm. SetByUser is retentive. Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Gain(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional gain for heating Heat.Gain is retentive. Heat.Gain 0.0 Retain..CtrlParams.Heat.Ti(1) REAL 20.0 Active integral action time for heating in seconds The integral action for heating is switched off with Heat.CtrlParams.Ti = 0.0. Heat.Ti is retentive. 100000.0 Heat.Ti 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Td(1) REAL 0.0 Active derivative action time for heating in seconds The derivative action for heating is switched off with Heat.CtrlParams.Td = 0.0. Heat.Td is retentive. 100000.0 Heat.Td 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Heat .TdFiltRatio(1) REAL 0.2 Active derivative delay coefficient for heating The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient * 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. * 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. Heat.TdFiltRatio is retentive. * Heat.TdFiltRatio 0.0 PID control 440 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.Heat .PWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active weighting of the proportional action for heating The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * Heat.PWeighting is retentive. 1.0 Heat.PWeighting 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Heat .DWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active weighting of the derivative action for heating The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * Heat.DWeighting is retentive. 1.0 Heat.DWeighting 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle(1) REAL 1.0 Active sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating in seconds CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle is calculated during tuning and rounded to an integer multiple of CycleTime.Value. If Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode = 0.0, Heat.Cycle is used as period duration of the pulse width modulation for heating. If Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE, Heat.Cycle is used as period duration of the pulse width modulation for cooling. Heat.Cycle is retentive. 100000.0 Heat.Cycle > 0.0 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 441 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.Heat .ControlZone(1) REAL 3.402822e+38 Active control zone width for heating The control zone for heating is switched off with Heat.ControlZone = 3.402822e+38. Heat.ControlZone is only set automatically during pretuning heating or pretuning heating and cooling if PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRuleHeat = 2 is selected as method of the parameter calculation. For controllers with deactivated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE) or controllers with activated cooling output and cooling factor (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE), the control zone is symmetrically located between Setpoint - Heat.ControlZone and Setpoint + Heat.ControlZone. For controllers with activated cooling output and PID parameter switching (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE, Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE), the control zone is located between Setpoint - Heat.ControlZone and Setpoint + Cool.ControlZone. Heat.ControlZone is retentive. Heat.ControlZone > 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Heat .DeadZone(1) REAL 0.0 Active dead zone width for heating (see PID parameters (Page 177)) The dead zone for heating is switched off with Heat.DeadZone = 0.0. Heat.DeadZone is not set automatically or adjusted during tuning. You must correctly configure Heat.DeadZone manually. When the dead zone is switched on, the result can be a permanent control deviation (deviation between setpoint and process value). This can have a negative effect on fine tuning. For controllers with deactivated cooling output (Config.ActivateCooling = FALSE) or controllers with activated cooling output and cooling factor (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE), the dead zone is symmetrically located between Setpoint - Heat.DeadZone and Setpoint + Heat.DeadZone. For controllers with activated cooling output and PID parameter switching (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE, Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE), the dead zone is located between Setpoint - Heat.DeadZone and Setpoint + Cool.DeadZone. Heat.DeadZone is retentive. Heat.DeadZone 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Gain(1) REAL 1.0 Active proportional gain for cooling Cool.Gain is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). Cool.Gain 0.0 PID control 442 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Ti(1) REAL 20.0 Active integral action time for cooling in seconds The integral action for cooling is switched off with Cool.CtrlParams.Ti = 0.0. Cool.Ti is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). 100000.0 Cool.Ti 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Td(1) REAL 0.0 Active derivative action time for cooling in seconds The derivative action for cooling is switched off with Cool.CtrlParams.Td = 0.0. Cool.Td is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). 100000.0 Cool.Td 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Cool .TdFiltRatio(1) REAL 0.2 Active derivative delay coefficient for cooling The derivative delay coefficient delays the effect of the derivative action. Derivative delay = derivative action time x derivative delay coefficient * 0.0: Derivative action is effective for one cycle only and therefore almost not effective. * 0.5: This value has proved useful in practice for controlled systems with one dominant time constant. > 1.0: The greater the coefficient, the longer the effect of the derivative action is delayed. Cool.TdFiltRatio is retentive. * Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). Cool.TdFiltRatio 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Cool .PWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active weighting of the proportional action for cooling The proportional action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective 0.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is not effective The proportional action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * Cool.PWeighting is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). 1.0 Cool.PWeighting 0.0 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 443 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.Cool .DWeighting(1) REAL 1.0 Active weighting of the derivative action for cooling The derivative action may weaken with changes to the setpoint. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are applicable. * 1.0: Derivative action is fully effective upon setpoint change 0.0: Derivative action is not effective upon setpoint change The derivative action is always fully effective when the process value is changed. * Cool.DWeighting is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). 1.0 Cool.DWeighting 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle(1) REAL 1.0 Active sampling time of the PID algorithm for cooling in seconds CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle is calculated during tuning and rounded off to an integer multiple of CycleTime.. If Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE, Cool.Cycle is used as period duration of the pulse width modulation for cooling. If Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE, Heat.Cycle is used as period duration of the pulse width modulation for cooling. Cool.Cycle is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). 100000.0 Cool.Cycle > 0.0 PID control 444 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Tag Data type Default Description Retain.CtrlParams.Cool .ControlZone(1) REAL 3.402822e+38 Active control zone width for cooling The control zone for cooling is switched off with Cool.ControlZone = 3.402822e+38. Cool.ControlZone is only set automatically during pretuning cooling or pretuning heating and cooling if PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRuleCool = 2 is selected as method of the parameter calculation. Cool.ControlZone is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). Cool.ControlZone > 0.0 Retain.CtrlParams.Cool .DeadZone(1) REAL 0.0 Active dead zone width for cooling (see PID parameters (Page 177)) The dead zone for cooling is switched off with Cool.DeadZone = 0.0. Cool.DeadZone is not set automatically or adjusted during tuning. You must correctly configure Cool.DeadZone manually. When the dead zone is switched on, the result can be a permanent control deviation (deviation between setpoint and process value). This can have a negative effect on fine tuning. Cool.DeadZone is retentive. Only effective if the cooling output and PID parameter switching are activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE and Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). Cool.DeadZone 0.0 See also PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode tag (Page 458) PID_Temp Warning tag (Page 460) Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp (Page 203) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 445 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.7 PID_Temp state and mode parameters Correlation of the parameters The State parameter shows the current operating mode of the PID controller. You cannot change the State parameter. With a rising edge at ModeActivate, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode saved in the Mode in-out parameter. Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableTuning specify for pretuning and fine tuning, if tuning takes place for heating or cooling. If the CPU is switched on or switches from Stop to RUN mode, PID_Temp starts in the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. To leave PID_Temp in "Inactive" mode, set RunModeByStartup = FALSE. PID control 446 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Meaning of values State / Mode Description of operating mode 0 Inactive The following output values are output in "Inactive" mode: * 0.0 as PID output value (PidOutputSum) * 0.0 as output value for heating (OutputHeat) and output value for cooling (OutputCool) * 0 as analog output value for heating (OutputHeat_PER) and analog output value for cooling (OutputCool_PER) FALSE as PWM output value for heating (OutputHeat_PWM) and PWM output value for cooling (OutputCool_PWM) This does not depend on the configured output value limits and scaling in the structures Config.Output.Heat and Config.Output.Cool. * 1 Pretuning The pretuning determines the process response to a jump change of the output value and searches for the point of inflection. The PID parameters are calculated from the maximum rate of rise and dead time of the controlled system. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_Temp offers different pretuning types depending on the configuration: * Pretuning heating: A jump change is output at the output value heating, the PID parameters for heating are calculated (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat structure), and control to the setpoint then takes place in automatic mode. If the process behavior strongly depends on the operating point, an adaptation of the delay time can be activated at the setpoint with PIDSelfTune.SUT.AdaptDelayTime. * Pretuning heating and cooling: A jump is output at the output value heating. As soon as the process value is close to the setpoint, a jump change is output at the output value cooling. The PID parameters for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat structure) and cooling (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool structure) are calculated. Then, control to the setpoint takes place in automatic mode. If the process behavior strongly depends on the operating point, an adaptation of the delay time can be activated at the setpoint with PIDSelfTune.SUT.AdaptDelayTime. Depending on the effect of the cooling actuator compared to the heating actuator, the quality of tuning can be influenced by whether or not the heating and cooling outputs are operated simultaneously during tuning. You can specify this with PIDSelfTune.SUT.CoolingMode. * Pretuning cooling: A jump change is output at the output value cooling and the PID parameters for cooling are calculated (Struktur Retain.CtrlParams.Cool). Then, control to the setpoint takes place in automatic mode. If you want to tune the PID parameters for heating and cooling, you can expect a better control response with "Pretuning heating" followed by "Pretuning cooling" rather than with "Pretuning heating and cooling". However, carrying out pretuning in two steps takes more time. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 447 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp State / Mode Description of operating mode 1 General requirements for pretuning: * The PID_Temp instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. * Inactive (State = 0), manual mode (State = 4), or automatic mode (State = 3) * ManualEnable = FALSE * Reset = FALSE * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. Requirements for pretuning heating: * Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE * Cool.EnableTuning = FALSE * The process value must not be too close to the setpoint. |Setpoint - Input| > 0.3 * |Config.InputUpperLimit - Config.InputLowerLimit| and |Setpoint - Input| > 0.5 * |Setpoint| * The setpoint is greater than the process value. Setpoint > Input Requirements for pretuning heating and cooling: * Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE* * Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE * The cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). * The PID parameter switching is activated (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). * The process value must not be too close to the setpoint. |Setpoint - Input| > 0.3 * |Config.InputUpperLimit - Config.InputLowerLimit| and |Setpoint - Input| > 0.5 * |Setpoint| * The setpoint is greater than the process value. Setpoint > Input Requirements for pretuning cooling: * Heat.EnableTuning = FALSE* * Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE* * The cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). * The PID parameter switching is activated (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE). * A "pretuning heating" or "pretuning heating and cooling" has been successful (PIDSelfTune.SUT.ProcParHeatOk = TRUE), if possible at the same setpoint. * The process value must be close to the setpoint. |Setpoint - Input| < 0.05 * |Config.InputUpperLimit - Config.InputLowerLimit| The more stable the process value is, the easier it is to calculate the PID parameters and the more precise the result will be. Noise on the process value can be tolerated as long as the rate of rise of the process value is significantly higher compared to the noise. This is most likely the case in operating modes "Inactive" or "Manual mode". PID control 448 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp State / Mode Description of operating mode 1 The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Tuning is canceled when: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel The method for calculation of the PID parameters can be specified separately for heating and cooling with PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRuleHeat and PIDSelfTune.SUT.TuneRuleCool. Before the PID parameters are recalculated, they are backed up in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and can be reactivated with LoadBackUp. After successful pretuning, the switch is made to automatic mode. After unsuccessful pretuning, the switch to the mode is determined by ActivateRecoverMode. The phase of pretuning is indicated with PIDSelfTune.SUT.State. 2 Fine tuning Fine tuning generates a constant, limited oscillation of the process value. The PID parameters are tuned for the operating point from the amplitude and frequency of this oscillation. PID parameters from fine tuning usually have better master control and disturbance characteristics than PID parameters from pretuning. You obtain the best PID parameters when you perform pretuning and fine tuning. PID_Temp automatically attempts to generate an oscillation greater than the noise of the process value. Fine tuning is only minimally influenced by the stability of the process value. PID_Temp offers different fine tuning types depending on the configuration: * Fine tuning heating: PID_Temp generates an oscillation of the process value with periodic changes at the output value heating and calculates the PID parameters for heating (Struktur Retain.CtrlParams.Heat). * Fine tuning cooling: PID_Temp generates an oscillation of the process value with periodic changes at the output value cooling and calculates the PID parameters for cooling (Struktur Retain.CtrlParams.Cool). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 449 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp State / Mode Description of operating mode 2 Temporary tuning offset for heating/cooling controllers If PID_Temp is used as heating/cooling controller (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint must meet the following requirements for a process value oscillation to be generated and fine tuning to be successful: * Positive PID output value for fine tuning heating * Negative PID output value for fine tuning cooling If this requirement is not met, you can define a temporary offset for fine tuning which is output at the output with the opposite effect: * Offset for cooling output (PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetCool) with fine tuning heating. Define a negative tuning offset cooling which is less than the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint in the steady state before you start tuning. * Offset for heating output (PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetHeat) with fine tuning cooling. Define a positive tuning offset heating which is greater than the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint in the steady state before you start tuning. The defined offset is balanced by the PID algorithm so that the process value remains at the setpoint. The height of the offset allows the PID output value to be adapted correspondingly so that it fulfills the requirement mentioned above. To avoid larger overshoots of the process value when defining the offset, it can also be increased in several steps. If PID_Temp exits the fine tuning mode, the tuning offset is reset. Example for definition of an offset for fine tuning cooling: * Without offset: - Setpoint = Process value (ScaledInput) = 80C - PID output value (PidOutputSum) = 30.0 - Output value heating (OutputHeat) = 30.0 - Output value cooling (OutputCool) = 0.0 Oscillation of the process value around the setpoint cannot be generated with the cooling output alone. Fine tuning would fail here. * With definition of an offset for heating output (PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetHeat) = 80.0 - Setpoint = process value (ScaledInput) = 80C - PID output value (PidOutputSum) = -50.0 - Output value heating (OutputHeat) = 80.0 - Output value cooling (OutputCool) = -50.0 By defining an offset for the heating output, the cooling output can now create an oscillation of the process value around the setpoint. Fine tuning can now be carried out successfully. PID control 450 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp State / Mode Description of operating mode 2 General requirements for fine tuning: * The PID_Temp instruction is called in a cyclic interrupt OB. * No disturbances are expected. * The setpoint and the process value lie within the configured limits. * The control loop has stabilized at the operating point. The operating point is reached when the process value corresponds to the setpoint. When the dead zone is switched on, the result can be a permanent control deviation (deviation between setpoint and actual value). This can have a negative effect on fine tuning. * ManualEnable = FALSE * Reset = FALSE * Automatic (State = 3), inactive (State = 0) or manual (State = 4) mode Requirements for fine tuning heating: * Heat.EnableTuning = TRUE * Cool.EnableTuning = FALSE * If PID_Temp is configured as heating/cooling controller (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), the heating output must be active at the operating point at which tuning is to take place (PidOutputSum > 0.0 (see tuning offset)). Requirements for fine tuning cooling: * Heat.EnableTuning = FALSE * Cool.EnableTuning = TRUE * The cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE). * The PID parameter switching is activated (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE) * The cooling output must be active at the operating point at which tuning is to take place (PidOutputSum < 0.0 (see tuning offset)). PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 451 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp State / Mode Description of operating mode 2 The course of fine tuning is determined by the mode from which it is started: * Automatic mode (State = 3) with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = FALSE (default) Start fine tuning from automatic mode if you wish to improve the existing PID parameters through tuning. PID_Temp controls the system using the existing PID parameters until the control loop has stabilized and the requirements for fine tuning have been met. Only then will fine tuning start. * Inactive (State = 0), manual mode (State = 4), or automatic mode (State = 3) with PIDSelfTune.TIR.RunIn = TRUE Attempts are made to reach the setpoint with the minimum or maximum output value: - with minimum or maximum output value heating for fine tuning heating - With minimum or maximum output value cooling for fine tuning cooling. This can produce increased overshoot. Fine tuning starts when the setpoint is reached. If the setpoint cannot be reached, PID_Temp does not automatically abort tuning. The setpoint is frozen in the CurrentSetpoint tag. Tuning is canceled when: * Setpoint > CurrentSetpoint + CancelTuningLevel or * Setpoint < CurrentSetpoint - CancelTuningLevel The method for calculation of the PID parameters can be specified separately for heating and cooling with PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRuleHeat and PIDSelfTune.TIR.TuneRuleCool. Before the PID parameters are recalculated, they are backed up in the CtrlParamsBackUp structure and can be reactivated with LoadBackUp. The controller changes to automatic mode after successful fine tuning. After unsuccessful fine tuning, the switch to the mode is determined by ActivateRecoverMode. The "Fine tuning" phase is indicated with PIDSelfTune.TIR.State. 3 Automatic mode In automatic mode, PID_Temp corrects the controlled system in accordance with the parameters specified. The controller switches to automatic mode if one the following requirements is met: * Pretuning successfully completed * Fine tuning successfully completed * Changing of the Mode in-out parameter to the value 3 and a rising edge at ModeActivate. The switchover from automatic mode to manual mode is only bumpless if carried out in the commissioning editor. The ActivateRecoverMode tag is taken into consideration in automatic mode. PID control 452 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp State / Mode Description of operating mode 4 Manual mode In manual mode, you specify a manual PID output value in the ManualValue parameter. The values at the outputs for heating and cooling resulting from this manual value are the result of the configured output scaling. You can also activate this operating mode using ManualEnable = TRUE. We recommend that you change the operating mode using Mode and ModeActivate only. The switchover from manual mode to automatic mode is bumpless. The ActivateRecoverMode tag is taken into consideration in manual mode. 5 Substitute output value with error monitoring The control algorithm is deactivated. The SetSubstituteOutput tag determines which PID output value (PidOutputSum) is output in this operating mode. * SetSubstituteOutput = FALSE: Last valid PID output value * SetSubstituteOutput = TRUE: Substitute output value (SubstituteOutput) You cannot activate this operating mode using Mode = 5. In the event of an error, it is activated instead of "Inactive" operating mode if all the following conditions are met: * Automatic mode (State = 3) * ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE * One or more errors have occurred in which ActivateRecoverMode is effective. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. ENO characteristics If State = 0, then ENO = FALSE. If State 0, then ENO = TRUE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 453 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Automatic switchover of operating mode during commissioning Automatic mode is activated following successful pretuning or fine tuning. The following table shows how Mode and State change during successful pretuning. Cycle no. Mode State Action 0 4 4 Set Mode = 1 1 1 4 Set ModeActivate = TRUE 1 4 1 Value of State is saved in Mode parameter Pretuning is started n 4 1 Pretuning successfully completed n 3 3 Automatic mode is started PID_Temp automatically switches the operating mode in the event of an error. The following table shows how Mode and State change during pretuning with errors. Cycle no. Mode State Action 0 4 4 Set Mode = 1 1 1 4 Set ModeActivate = TRUE 1 4 1 Value of State is saved in Mode parameter n 4 1 Pretuning canceled n 4 4 Manual mode is started Pretuning is started If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter is activated. When you start pretuning or fine tuning, PID_Temp has saved the value of State in the Mode in-out parameter. This means PID_Temp switches to the mode from which tuning was started. If ActivateRecoverMode = FALSE, the system switches to "Inactive" operating mode. See also Output parameters of PID_Temp (Page 407) In/out parameters of PID_Temp V2 (Page 409) PID control 454 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.8 PID_Temp ErrorBits parameter If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the ErrorBits are displayed with binary addition. The display of ErrorBits = 0000003h, for example, indicates that the errors 0000001h and 0000002h are pending simultaneously. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000000 There is no error. 0000001 The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * Input > Config.InputUpperLimit or * Input < Config.InputLowerLimit If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in automatic mode. If manual mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000002 Invalid value at "Input_PER" parameter. Check whether an error is pending at the analog input. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. If manual mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000004 Error during fine tuning. Oscillation of the process value could not be maintained. If PID_Temp is used as heating-cooling controller (Config.ActivateCooling = TRUE), to be able to generate actual value oscillation, the PID output value (PidOutputSum) at the setpoint must be * positive for fine tuning heating * negative for fine tuning cooling If this requirement is not met, use the tuning offsets ( PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetCool and PIDSelfTune.TIR.OutputOffsetHeat tags), see Fine tuning (Page 189). If ActivateRecoverMode was = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000008 Error at start of pretuning. The process value is too close to the setpoint or greater than the setpoint. Start fine tuning. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000010 The setpoint was changed during tuning. You can set the permitted fluctuation of the setpoint at the CancelTuningLevel tag. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000020 Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. 0000040 Error during pretuning. Cooling could not reduce the process value. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp remains in fine tuning mode. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 455 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000100 Error during fine tuning resulted in invalid parameters. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000200 Invalid value at "Input" parameter: Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. If manual mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000400 Calculation of output value failed. Check the PID parameters. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0000800 Sampling time error: PID_Temp is not called within the sampling time of the cyclic interrupt OB. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in automatic mode. If manual mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. If this error occurred during simulation with PLCSIM, see the notes under Simulating PID_Temp with PLCSIM (Page 211). 0001000 Invalid value at "Setpoint" parameter or "SubstituteSetpoint": Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp outputs the configured substitute output value. As soon as the error is no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. If manual mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0010000 Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. Value has an invalid number format. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp remains in manual mode and uses SubstituteOutput as PID output value. As soon as you specify a valid value in ManualValue, PID_Temp uses it as the PID output value. 0020000 Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. Value has an invalid number format. PID_Temp remains in the "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode or manual mode and uses the low limit of the PID output value for heating (Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit) as PID output value. As soon as you specify a valid value in SubstituteOutput, PID_Temp uses it as the PID output value. PID control 456 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0040000 Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. Value has an invalid number format. If automatic mode was active and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, Disturbance is set to zero. PID_Temp remains in automatic mode. If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. If Disturbance in the current phase has no effect on the output value, tuning is not be canceled. 0200000 Error in master in the cascade: Slaves are not in automatic mode or have activated substitute setpoint and prevent tuning of the master. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0400000 Pretuning heating is not permitted while cooling is active. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 0800000 The process value must be close to the setpoint to start pretuning cooling. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 1000000 Error at start of tuning: Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableTuning are not set or do not match the configuration. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 2000000 Pretuning cooling requires successful pretuning heating. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 4000000 Error at start of fine tuning: Heat.EnableTuning and Cool.EnableTuning must not be set simultaneously. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE before the error occurred, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. 8000000 Error during calculation of the PID parameters resulted in invalid parameters. The invalid parameters are discarded and the original PID parameters are retained unchanged. We can distinguish between the following cases: * If automatic mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in automatic mode. * If manual mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. * If pretuning or fine tuning mode was active before the error occurred and ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp switches to the operating mode that is saved in the Mode parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 457 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.9 PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode tag The ActivateRecoverMode tag determines the reaction to error. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error = FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. Automatic mode and manual mode NOTICE Your system may be damaged. If ActivateRecoverMode = TRUE, PID_Temp remains in automatic mode or in manual mode even if there is an error and the process limit values are exceeded. This may damage your system. It is essential to configure how your controlled system reacts in the event of an error to protect your system from damage. ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE PID_Temp switches to "Inactive" mode in the event of an error. The controller is only activated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. TRUE Automatic mode If errors occur frequently in automatic mode, this setting has a negative effect on the control response, because PID_Temp switches between the calculated PID output value and the substitute output value at each error. In this case, check the ErrorBits parameter and eliminate the cause of the error. If one or several of the following errors occur and automatic mode was active before the error occurred, PID_Temp remains in automatic mode: * 0000001h: The "Input" parameter is outside the process value limits. * 0000800h: Sampling time error * 0040000h: Invalid value at Disturbance parameter. * 8000000h: Error during calculation of the PID parameters If one or several of the following errors occur and automatic mode was active before the error occurred, PID_Temp switches to "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode: * 0000002h: Invalid value at Input_PER parameter. * 0000200h: Invalid value at Input parameter. * 0000400h: Calculation of output value failed. * 0001000h: Invalid value at Setpoint parameter or SubstituteSetpoint. As soon as the errors are no longer pending, PID_Temp switches back to automatic mode. If the following error occurs in "Substitute output value with error monitoring" mode, PID_Temp sets the PID output value to Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit as long as this error is pending: * 0020000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. Value has an invalid number format. This behavior is independent of SetSubstituteOutput. PID control 458 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode Description TRUE Manual mode If one or several errors occur and manual mode was active before the error occurred, PID_Temp remains in manual mode. If the following error occurs in manual mode, as long as this error is pending, PID_Temp sets the PID output value to SubstituteOutput: * 0010000h: Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. Value has an invalid number format. If the error 0010000h is pending in manual mode and the following error occurs, PID_Temp sets the PID output value to Config.Output.Heat.PidLowerLimit as long as this error is pending: * 0020000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. Value has an invalid number format. This behavior is independent of SetSubstituteOutput. Pretuning and fine tuning ActivateRecoverMode Description FALSE PID_Temp switches to "Inactive" mode in the event of an error. The controller is only activated by a falling edge at Reset or a rising edge at ModeActivate. TRUE If the following error occurs, PID_Temp remains in the active mode: * 0000020h: Pretuning is not permitted during fine tuning. The following errors are ignored: * 0010000h: Invalid value at ManualValue parameter. * 0020000h: Invalid value at SubstituteOutput tag. When any other error occurs, PID_Temp cancels the tuning and switches to the mode from which tuning was started. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 459 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.10 PID_Temp Warning tag If several warnings are pending simultaneously, the values of the Warning tag are displayed with binary addition. If the warning 0000003h is displayed, for example, the warnings 0000001h and 0000002h are pending simultaneously. Warning Description (DW#16#....) 0000000 No warning pending. 0000001 The point of inflection was not found during pretuning. 0000004 The setpoint was limited to the configured limits. 0000008 Not all the necessary controlled system properties were defined for the selected method of calculation. Instead, the PID parameters were calculated using the method TIR.TuneRuleHeat = 3 or TIR.TuneRuleCool = 3. 0000010 The operating mode could not be changed because Reset = TRUE or ManualEnable = TRUE. 0000020 The cycle time of the calling OB limits the sampling time of the PID algorithm. Improve results by using shorter OB cycle times. 0000040 The process value exceeded one of its warning limits. 0000080 Invalid value at Mode. The operating mode is not switched. 0000100 The manual value was limited to the limits of the PID output value. 0000200 The specified rule for tuning is not supported. No PID parameters are calculated. 0001000 The substitute output value cannot be reached because it is outside the output value limits. 0004000 The specified selection of the output value for heating and/or cooling is not supported. Only the output OutputHeat or OutputCool is used. 0008000 Invalid value at PIDSelfTune.SUT.AdaptDelayTime. The default value 0 is used. 0010000 Invalid value at PIDSelfTune.SUT.CoolingMode. The default value 0 is used. 0020000 The activation of cooling (Config.ActivateCooling tag) is not supported by the controller that is used as master (Config.Cascade.IsMaster tag). PID_Temp works as heating controller. Set the Config.ActivateCooling tag to FALSE. 0040000 Invalid value at Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Gain, Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Gain oder Config.CoolFactor. PID_Temp supports only positive values for proportional gain (heating and cooling) and cooling factor. Automatic mode remains active with PID output value 0.0. The integral component is stopped. The following warnings are deleted as soon as the cause has been remedied or you repeat the action with valid parameters: 0000001h 0000004h 0000008h 0000040h 0000100h All other warnings are cleared with a rising edge at Reset or ErrorAck. PID control 460 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.11 PwmPeriode tag If the PID algorithm sampling time (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle or Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle) and thus the time period of the pulse width modulation is very high when you use OutputHeat_PWM or OutputCool_PWM, you can define a deviating shorter time period at the Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode or Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode parameters to improve the smoothness of the process value. Time period of the pulse width modulation at OutputHeat_PWM Time period of the PWM at output OutputHeat_PWM depending on Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode: Heat.PwmPeriode = 0.0 (default) The sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle) is used as time period of the PWM. Heat.PwmPeriode > 0.0 The value is rounded off to an integer multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time (CycleTime.Value) and used as time period of the PWM. The value must meet the following conditions: - Heat.PwmPeriode Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle - Heat.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Heat.MinimumOnTime - Heat.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Heat.MinimumOffTime Time period of the pulse width modulation at OutputCool_PWM Time period of the PWM at output OutputCool_PWM depending on Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode and the method for heating/cooling: Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and cooling factor (Config.AdvancedCooling = FALSE): The sampling time of the PID algorithm for heating (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle) is used as time period of the PWM. Cool.PwmPeriode = 0.0 and PID parameter switching (Config.AdvancedCooling = TRUE): The sampling time of the PID algorithm for cooling (Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle) is used as time period of the PWM. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 461 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Cool.PwmPeriode > 0.0: The value is rounded off to an integer multiple of the PID_Temp sampling time (CycleTime.Value) and used as time period of the PWM. The value must meet the following conditions: - Cool.PwmPeriode Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Cycle or Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle - Cool.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Cool.MinimumOnTime - Cool.PwmPeriode > Config.Output.Cool.MinimumOffTime Config.Output.Cool.PwmPeriode is only effective if the cooling output is activated (Config.ActivateCooling =TRUE). When you use PwmPeriode, the accuracy of the PWM output signal is determined by the relationship of PwmPeriode to the PID_Temp sampling time (cycle time of the OB). PwmPeriode should be at least 10 times the PID_Temp sampling time. If the sampling time of the PID algorithm is not an integer multiple of PwmPeriode, each last period of the PWM within the sampling time of the PID algorithm is extended accordingly. PID control 462 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp Example for OutputHeat_PWM PID_Temp sampling time = 100.0 ms (cycle time of the calling cyclic interrupt OB, CycleTime.Value tag) PID algorithm sampling time = 2000.0 ms (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Cycle tag) Time period of the PWM for heating = 600.0 ms (Config.Output.Heat.PwmPeriode tag) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 463 Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp 9.3.4.12 IntegralResetMode tag The IntegralResetMode tag determines how the integral action PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is preassigned: When switching from "Inactive" operating mode to "Automatic mode" With edge TRUE -> FALSE at parameter Reset and parameter Mode = 3 This setting only works for one cycle and is only effective if the integral action is activated (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.Ti and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.Ti > 0.0 tags). IntegralResetMode Description 0 Smooth The value of PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is pre-assigned so that the switchover is bumpless, which means "Automatic mode" starts with the output value = 0.0 (parameter PidOutputSum) and there is no jump of the output value regardless of the control deviation (setpoint - process value). 1 Delete We recommend setting the weighting of the proportional action (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.PWeighting and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.PWeighting tags) to 1.0 if this option is used. The value of PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is deleted. Any control deviation will cause a jump of the PID output value. The direction of the output value jump depends on the active weighting of the proportional action (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.PWeighting and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.PWeighting tags) and the control deviation: * Active proportional action weighting = 1.0: Output value jump and control deviation have identical signs. Example: If the process value value is smaller than the setpoint (positive control deviation), the PID output value jumps to a positive value. * Active proportional action weighting < 1.0: For large control deviations, the PID output value jump and control deviation have identical signs. Example: If the process value is much smaller than the setpoint (positive control deviation), the PID output value jumps to a positive value. For small control deviations, the PID output value jump and control deviation have different signs. Example: If the process value is just below the setpoint (positive control deviation), the PID output value jumps to a negative value. This is usually not desirable, because it results in a temporary increase in the control deviation. The smaller the configured weighting of the proportional action, the greater the control deviation must be to receive a PID output value jump with identical sign. We recommend setting the weighting of the proportional action (Retain.CtrlParams.Heat.PWeighting and Retain.CtrlParams.Cool.PWeighting tags) to 1.0 when this option is used. Otherwise, you may experience the undesirable behavior described for small control deviations. Alternatively, you can also use IntegralResetMode = 4. This option guarantees identical signs of the PID output value jump and control deviation independent of the configured weighting of the proportional action and the control deviation. PID control 464 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.3 PID_Temp IntegralResetMode Description 2 Hold 3 Pre-assign The value of PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is not changed. You can define a new value using the user program. The value of PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is automatically pre-assigned as if PidOutputSum = OverwriteInitialOutputValue in the last cycle. 4 Like setpoint change (only for PID_Temp with version 1.1) The value of PIDCtrl.IOutputOld is automatically pre-assigned so that a similar PID output value jump results as for a PI controller in automatic mode in case of a setpoint change from the current process value to the current setpoint. Any control deviation will cause a jump of the PID output value. The PID output value jump and control deviation have identical signs. Example: If the process value value is smaller than the setpoint (positive control deviation), the PID output value jumps to a positive value. This is independent of the configured weighting of the proportional action and the control deviation. If IntegralResetMode is assigned a value outside the valid value range, PID_Temp behaves as with the pre-assignment of IntegralResetMode: PID_Temp up to V1.0: IntegralResetMode = 1 PID_Temp as of V1.1: IntegralResetMode = 4 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 465 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.1 CONT_C 9.4.1.1 Description CONT_C The CONT_C instruction is used on SIMATIC S7 automation systems to control technical processes with continuous input and output variables. You can assign parameters to enable or disable sub-functions of the PID controller and adapt it to the process. In addition to the functions in the setpoint and process value branches, the instruction implements a complete PID controller with continuous output value output and the option of manually influencing the value of the output value. Application You can use the controller as a PID fixed setpoint controller, or in multi-loop control systems, also as a cascade, blending or ratio controller. The functions of the controller are based on the PID control algorithm of the sampling controller with an analog signal, if necessary extended by including a pulse shaper stage to generate pulse-width modulated output signals for two or three step controllers with proportional actuators. Call The CONT_C instruction has an initialization routine that is run through when input parameter COM_RST = TRUE is set. During initialization, the integral action is set to the initialization value I_ITVAL. All the signal outputs are set to zero. COM_RST = FALSE has to be set after the initialization routine has been completed. The calculation of the values in the control blocks is only correct if the block is called at regular intervals. You should therefore call the control blocks in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB 30 to OB 38). Enter the sampling time in the CYCLE parameter. If you call the instruction CONT_C as a multiple instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for CONT_C directly in the multiple instance DB and commission it via a watch table. Error information The error message word RET_VAL is not evaluated by the block. PID control 466 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.1.2 How CONT_C works Setpoint branch The setpoint is entered in floating-point format at the SP_INT input. Process value branch The process value can be input in I/O or floating-point format. The function CRP_IN converts the I/O value PV_PER to a floating-point format -100 to +100 % in accordance with the following rule: Output of CRP_IN = PV_PER * 100 / 27648 The PV_NORM function scales the output of CRP_IN according to the following rule: Output of PV_NORM = (output of CRP_IN) *PV_FAC + PV_OFF PV_FAC has a default of 1 and PV_OFF a default of 0. Forming the error signal The difference between the setpoint and process value is the error signal. To suppress a minor sustained oscillation due to manipulated variable quantization (e.g. with a pulse width modulation with PULSEGEN), the error signal is applied to a dead band (DEADBAND). With DEADB_W = 0, the dead band is switched off. PID Algorithm The PID algorithm operates as a position algorithm. The proportional, integral (INT), and differential (DIF) actions are connected in parallel and can be activated or deactivated individually. This allows P, PI, PD, and PID controllers to be configured. Pure I controllers are also possible. Manual value processing It is possible to switch over between manual and automatic mode. In manual mode, the manipulated variable is corrected to a manually selected value. The integral action (INT) is set internally to LMN - LMN_P - DISV and the derivative action (DIF) is set to 0 and synchronized internally. Changeover to automatic mode is therefore bumpless. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 467 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Manipulated value processing You can use the LMNLIMIT function to limit the manipulated value to selected values. Alarm bits indicate when a limit is exceeded by the input variable. The LMN_NORM function normalizes the output of LMNLIMIT according to the following rule: LMN = (output of LMNLIMIT) * LMN_FAC + LMN_OFF LMN_FAC has a default of 1 and LMN_OFF a default of 0. The manipulated value is also available in I/O format. The CRP_OUT function converts the LMN floating-point value to a I/O value according to the following rule: LMN_PER = LMN * 27648 / 100 Feedforward control A disturbance variable can be added at the DISV input. PID control 468 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.1.3 CONT_C block diagram PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 469 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.1.4 Table 9- 13 Input parameter CONT_C Input parameter CONT_C Parameters Data type Default Description COM_RST BOOL FALSE The instruction has an initialization routine that is processed when the "Restart" input is set. MAN_ON BOOL TRUE If the input "Enable manual mode" is set then the control loop is interrupted. A manual value is set as the manipulated value. PVPER_ON BOOL FALSE If the process value is to be read in from the I/Os, the PV_PER input must be interconnected with the I/Os and the "Enable process value I/Os" input must be set. P_SEL BOOL TRUE The PID actions can be switched on and off individually in the PID algorithm. Paction is on when the "Enable P-action" input is set. I_SEL BOOL TRUE The PID actions can be switched on and off individually in the PID algorithm. I action is on when the input "I-action on" is set. INT_HOLD BOOL FALSE The output of the integral action can be frozen. For this the input "I-action hold" must be set. I_ITL_ON BOOL FALSE The output of the integral action can be set at the I_ITLVAL input. For this the input "Set I-action" must be set. D_SEL BOOL FALSE The PID actions can be switched on and off individually in the PID algorithm. Daction is on when the input "Enable D-action" is set. CYCLE TIME T#1s The time between block calls must be constant. The "Sampling time" input specifies the time between block calls. CYCLE >= 1ms SP_INT REAL 0.0 The input "Internal setpoint" is used to specify a setpoint. Permissible are values from -100 to 100 % or a physical variable 1). PV_IN REAL 0.0 At the "Process value input" you can assign parameters to a commissioning value or you can interconnect an external process value in floating-point format. Permissible are values from -100 to 100 % or a physical variable 1). PV_PER WORD W#16#0000 The process value in I/O format is interconnected with the controller at the "Process value I/0" input. MAN REAL 0.0 The "Manual value" input is used to set a manual value using the operator interface functions. Permissible are values from -100 to 100 % or a physical variable 2). GAIN REAL 2.0 TI TIME T#20s The "Proportional gain" input specifies controller amplification. The "Integration time" input determines the time response of the integral action. TI >= CYCLE TD TIME T#10s The "Derivative action time" input determines the time response of the derivative action. TD >= CYCLE TM_LAG TIME T#2s Time lag of the D-action The algorithm of the D-action contains a delay for which parameters can be assigned at the input "Time lag of the D-action". TM_LAG >= CYCLE/2 PID control 470 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Parameters Data type Default Description DEADB_W REAL 0.0 A dead band is applied to the system deviation. The "Dead band width" input determines the size of the dead band. DEADB_W >= 0.0 (%) or a physical variable 1) LMN_HLM REAL 100.0 The manipulated value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The "High limit of manipulated value" input specifies the high limit. Permissible are real values starting at LMN_LLM (%) or a physical variable 2). LMN_LLM REAL 0.0 The manipulated value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The "Low limit of manipulated value" input specifies the low limit. Permissible are real values up to LMN_HLM (%) or a physical variable 2). PV_FAC REAL 1.0 The "Process value factor" input is multiplied by the process value. The input is used to scale the process value range. PV_OFF REAL 0.0 The input "Process value offset" is added to the process value. The input is used to scale the process value range. LMN_FAC REAL 1.0 The "Manipulated value factor" input is multiplied with the manipulated value. The input is used to scale the manipulated value range. LMN_OFF REAL 0.0 The input "Manipulated value offset" is added to the process value. The input is used to scale the manipulated value range. I_ITLVAL REAL 0.0 The output of the integral action can be set at the I_ITL_ON input. The initialization value is applied to the input "Initialization value of the I-action." Permissible are values of -100.0 to 100.0 (%) or a physical variable 2). DISV REAL 0.0 For feedforward control, the disturbance variable is interconnected to the "Disturbance variable" input. Permissible are values of -100.0 to 100.0 (%) or a physical variable 2). 1) Parameters in the setpoint and process value branches with the same unit 2) Parameters in the manipulated value branch with the same unit PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 471 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.1.5 Table 9- 14 Output parameters CONT_C Output parameters CONT_C Parameter Data type Default Description LMN REAL 0.0 The effective "Manipulated value" is output in floating point format at the "Manipulated value" output. LMN_PER WORD W#16#0000 The manipulated value in I/O format is interconnected on the input "Manipulated value I/O" with the controller. QLMN_HLM BOOL FALSE The manipulated value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The output "High limit of manipulated value reached" indicates that the high limit has been reached. QLMN_LLM BOOL FALSE The manipulated value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The output "Low limit of manipulated value reached" indicates that the low limit has been reached. LMN_P REAL 0.0 The "P-action" output contains the proportional action of the manipulated variable. LMN_I REAL 0.0 The "I-action" output contains the integral action of the manipulated variable. LMN_D REAL 0.0 The "D-action" output contains the derivative action of the manipulated variable. PV REAL 0.0 The effective process value is output at the "Process value" output. ER REAL 0.0 The effective system deviation is output at the "Error signal" output. PID control 472 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.2 CONT_S 9.4.2.1 Description CONT_S The CONT_S instruction is used on SIMATIC S7 automation systems to control technical processes with binary output value output signals for actuators with integrating behavior. During parameter assignment, you can activate or deactivate sub-functions of the PI step controller to adapt the controller to the controlled system. In addition to the functions in the process value branch, the instruction implements a complete proportional-plus-integralaction controller with binary output value output and the option of manually influencing the value of the output value. The step controller operates without a position feedback signal. Application You can use the controller as a PI fixed setpoint controller or in secondary control loops in cascade, blending or ratio controllers, however you cannot use it as the primary controller. The functions of the controller are based on the PI control algorithm of the sampling controller supplemented by the functions for generating the binary output signal from the analog actuating signal. Call The CONT_S instruction has an initialization routine that is run through when input parameter COM_RST = TRUE is set. All the signal outputs are set to zero. COM_RST = FALSE has to be set after the initialization routine has been completed. The calculation of the values in the control blocks is only correct if the block is called at regular intervals. You should therefore call the control blocks in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB 30 to OB 38). Enter the sampling time in the CYCLE parameter. If you call the instruction CONT_S as a multiple instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for CONT_S directly in the multiple instance DB and commission it via a watch table. Error information The error message word RET_VAL is not evaluated by the block. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 473 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.2.2 Mode of operation CONT_S Setpoint branch The setpoint is entered in floating-point format at the SP_INT input. Process value branch The process value can be input in I/O or floating-point format. The function CRP_IN converts the I/O value PV_PER to a floating-point format -100 to +100 % in accordance with the following rule: Output of CRP_IN = PV_PER * 100 / 27648 The PV_NORM function normalizes the output of CRP_IN according to the following rule: Output of PV_NORM = (output of CRP_IN) * PV_FAC + PV_OFF PV_FAC has a default of 1 and PV_OFF a default of 0. Forming the error signal The difference between the setpoint and process value is the error signal. To suppress a small constant oscillation due to the manipulated variable quantization (for example, due to a limited resolution of the manipulated value by the control valve), a dead band is applied to the error signal (DEADBAND). With DEADB_W = 0, the dead band is switched off. PI step algorithm The instruction operates without position feedback. The I-action of the PI algorithm and the assumed position feedback signal are calculated in one integral action (INT) and compared with the remaining P-action as a feedback value. The difference is applied to a three-step element (THREE_ST) and a pulse shaper (PULSEOUT) that generates the pulses for the control valve. The switching frequency of the controller can be reduced by adapting the response threshold of the three-step element. Feedforward control A disturbance variable can be added at the DISV input. PID control 474 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.2.3 Block diagram CONT_S PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 475 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.2.4 Table 9- 15 Input parameters CONT_S Input parameters CONT_S Parameters Data type Default Description COM_RST BOOL FALSE The block has an initialization routine that is processed when the "Restart" input is set. LMNR_HS BOOL FALSE The signal "Control valve at high endstop" is interconnected at the input "High endstop signal of position feedback". LMNR_HS=TRUE means: The control valve is at high endstop. LMNR_LS BOOL FALSE The signal "Control valve at low endstop" is interconnected on the input "Low endstop signal of position feedback". LMNR_LS=TRUE means The control valve is at low endstop. LMNS_ON BOOL FALSE Manipulated value signal processing is switched to manual mode at the "Enable manual mode of manipulated signal". LMNUP BOOL FALSE The output signal QLMNUP is operated in manual mode of the manipulated value signals at the input "Manipulated value signal up". LMNDN BOOL FALSE The output signal QLMNDN is operated in manual mode of the manipulated value signals at the input "Manipulated value signal down" PVPER_ON BOOL FALSE If the process value is to be read from the I/O then the input PV_PER must be interconnected with the I/O and the input "Enable process value I/O" must be set. CYCLE TIME T#1s The time between block calls must be constant. The "Sampling time" input specifies the time between block calls. CYCLE >= 1ms SP_INT REAL 0.0 The input "Internal setpoint" is used to specify a setpoint. Permissible are values from -100 to 100 % or a physical variable 1). PV_IN REAL 0.0 At the "Process value input" you can assign parameters to a commissioning value or you can interconnect an external process value in floating-point format. Permissible are values from -100 to 100 % or a physical variable 1). PV_PER WORD W#16#0000 The process value in I/O format is interconnected with the controller at the "Process value I/O" input. GAIN REAL 2.0 TI TIME T#20s The "Proportional gain" input specifies controller amplification. The "Integration time" input determines the time response of the integral action. TI >= CYCLE DEADB_W REAL 1.0 A dead band is applied to the system deviation. The "Dead band width" input determines the size of the dead band. Permissible are values from 0 to 100 % or a physical variable 1). PV_FAC REAL 1.0 The "Process value factor" input is multiplied by the process value. The input is used to scale the process value range. PV_OFF REAL 0.0 The input "Process value offset" is added to the process value. The input is used to scale the process value range. PULSE_TM TIME T#3s You can assign a minimum pulse time at the parameter "Minimum pulse time". PULSE_TM >= CYCLE BREAK_TM TIME T#3s You can assign a minimum break time at the parameter "Minimum break time". BREAK_TM >= CYCLE PID control 476 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Parameters Data type Default Description MTR_TM TIME T#30s The time required by the actuator to move from limit stop to limit stop is entered at the "Motor actuating time" parameter. MTR_TM >= CYCLE DISV REAL 0.0 For feedforward control, the disturbance variable is interconnected to the "Disturbance variable" input. Permissible are values from -100 to 100 % or a physical variable 2). 9.4.2.5 Table 9- 16 1) Parameters in setpoint and process value branches with identical unit 2) Parameters in the manipulated value branch with same unit Output parameters CONT_S Output parameters CONT_S Parameters Data type Default Description QLMNUP BOOL FALSE If the output "Manipulated value signal up" is set then the control valve should be open. QLMNDN BOOL FALSE If the output "Manipulated value signal down" is set then the control valve should be closed. PV REAL 0.0 The effective process value is output at the "Process value" output. ER REAL 0.0 The effective system deviation is output at the "Error signal" output. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 477 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3 PULSEGEN 9.4.3.1 Description PULSEGEN The instruction PULSEGEN serves as the structure of a PID controller with impulse output for proportional actuators. PULSEGEN transforms the input value INV (= LMN of the PID controller) through modulation of the impulse width in an impulse sequence with a constant period duration, which corresponds with the cycle time with which the input value is updated. Application You can use the PULSEGEN instruction to configure two- or three-step PID controllers with pulse width modulation. The function is normally used in conjunction with the continuous controller CONT_C. Call The PULSEGEN instruction has an initialization routine that is run through when input parameter COM_RST = TRUE is set. All the signal outputs are set to zero. COM_RST = FALSE has to be set after the initialization routine has been completed. The calculation of the values in the control blocks is only correct if the block is called at regular intervals. You should therefore call the control blocks in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB 30 to OB 38). Enter the sampling time in the CYCLE parameter. Responses in the event of an error The error message word RET_VAL is not evaluated by the block. PID control 478 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3.2 Mode of operation PULSEGEN Impulse width modulation The duration of a pulse per period duration is proportional to the input variable. The cycle assigned via PER_TM is not identical to the processing cycle of the PULSEGEN instruction. Rather, a PER_TM cycle is made up of several processing cycles of the PULSEGEN instruction, whereby the number of PULSEGEN calls per PER_TM cycle determines the accuracy of the pulse width. An input variable of 30% and 10 PULSEGEN calls per PER_TM mean the following: "One" at the QPOS_P output for the first three calls of PULSEGEN (30% of 10 calls) "Zero" at the QPOS_P output for seven further calls of PULSEGEN (70% of 10 calls) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 479 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Block diagram Accuracy of the manipulated value With a "Sampling ratio" of 1:10 (CONT_C calls to PULSEGEN calls) the accuracy of the manipulated value in this example is restricted to 10%, in other words, set input values INV can only be simulated by a pulse duration at the QPOS_P output in steps of 10 %. The accuracy is increased as the number of PULSEGEN calls per CONT_C call is increased. If PULSEGEN is called, for example, 100 times more often than CONT_C, a resolution of 1 % of the manipulated value range is achieved. Note The reduction ratio of the call frequency must be programmed by the user. PID control 480 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Automatic synchronization It is possible to automatically synchronize the pulse output with the instruction that updates the input variable INV (e.g. CONT_C). This ensures that a change in the input variable is output as quickly as possible as a pulse. The pulse shaper evaluates the input value INV at intervals corresponding to the period duration PER_TM and converts the value into a pulse signal of corresponding length. Since, however, INV is usually calculated in a slower cyclic interrupt class, the pulse shaper should start the conversion of the discrete value into a pulse signal as soon as possible after the updating of INV. To allow this, the block can synchronize the start of the period using the following procedure: If INV changes and if the block call is not in the first or last two call cycles of a period, a synchronization is performed. The pulse duration is recalculated and in the next cycle is output with a new period. The automatic synchronization is switched off, if SYN_ON = FALSE. Note The start of a new period and subsequent synchronization usually leads to a certain imprecision when the old value of INV (i.e. of LMN) is mapped to the pulse signal. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 481 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3.3 Mode of operation PULSEGEN Modes Depending on the parameters assigned to the pulse shaper, PID controllers with a three-step output or with a bipolar or unipolar two-step output can be configured. The following table illustrates the setting of the switch combinations for the possible modes. Mode MAN_ON STEP3_ON ST2BI_ON Three-step control FALSE TRUE Any Two-step control with bi-polar FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE Any Any Manipulating range (-100 % to 100 %) Two-step control with unipolar Manipulating range (0 % to 100 %) Manual mode Manual mode in two/three-step control In the manual mode (MAN_ON = TRUE), the binary outputs of the three-step or two-step controller can be set using the signals POS_P_ON and NEG_P_ON regardless of INV. Control POS_P_ON NEG_P_ON QPOS_P QNEG_P Three-step control FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE Any FALSE TRUE TRUE Any TRUE FALSE Two-step control PID control 482 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3.4 Three-step control Three-step control In "Three-step control" mode, it is possible to generate three statuses of the actuating signal. For this, the status values of the binary output signals QPOS_P and QNEG_P are assigned to the respective operating statuses of the actuator. The table shows the example of a temperature control: Output signals Heat Off Cool QPOS_P TRUE FALSE FALSE QNEG_P FALSE FALSE TRUE The pulse duration is calculated from the input variable via a characteristic curve. The form of the characteristic curve is defined by the minimum pulse duration or minimum interval and the ratio factor. The normal value for the ratio factor is 1. The "doglegs" in the curves are caused by the minimum pulse duration or minimum interval. Minimum pulse duration or minimum interval A correctly assigned minimum pulse duration or minimum interval P_B_TM can prevent short on/off times, which reduce the working life of switching elements and actuators. Small absolute values of input variable LMN that would otherwise generate a pulse duration shorter than P_B_TM are suppressed. Large input values that would generate a pulse duration longer than PER_TM - P_B_TM are set to 100% or -100%. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 483 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions The duration of positive or negative pulses is calculated by multiplying the input variable (in %) by the period duration: Pulse duration = INV / 100 * PER_TM The following figure shows a symmetrical characteristic curve of the three-step controller (ratio factor = 1). PID control 484 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Asymmetrical three-step control Using the ratio factor RATIOFAC, the ratio of the duration of positive to negative pulses can be changed. In a thermal process, for example, this would allow different system time constants for heating and cooling. Ratio factor < 1 The pulse duration at the negative pulse output, calculated by multiplying the input variable by the period duration, is multiplied by the ratio factor. Positive pulse duration = INV /100 * PER_TM Negative pulse duration = INV / 100 * PER_TM * RATIOFAC The following figure shows the asymmetrical characteristic curve of the three-step controller (ratio factor = 0.5): Ratio factor > 1 The pulse duration at the positive pulse output, calculated by multiplying the input variable by the period duration, is divided by the ratio factor. Positive pulse duration = INV / 100 * PER_TM / RATIOFAC Negative pulse duration = INV / 100 * PER_TM PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 485 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3.5 Two-step control In two-step control, only the positive pulse output QPOS_P of PULSEGEN is connected to the on/off actuator. Depending on the manipulated value range used, the two-step controller has a bipolar or a unipolar manipulated value range. Two-step control with bipolar manipulated variable range (-100% to 100%) Two-step control with unipolar manipulated variable range (0% to 100%) The negated output signal is available at QNEG_P if the connection of the two-step controller in the control loop requires a logically inverted binary signal for the actuating pulses. Pulse Actuator On Actuator Off QPOS_P TRUE FALSE QNEG_P FALSE TRUE PID control 486 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3.6 Input parameters PULSEGEN The values of the input parameters are not limited in the block. There is no parameter check. Table 9- 17 Input parameters PULSEGEN Parameters Data type Default Description INV REAL 0.0 At the input parameter "Input variable" an analog manipulated variable is connected. Values from -100 to 100 % are permitted. PER_TM TIME T#1s At the parameter "Period duration" the constant period duration of the pulse width modulation is entered. This corresponds to the sampling time of the controller. The ratio between the sampling time of the pulse shaper and the sampling time of the controller determines the accuracy of the pulse width modulation. PER_TM >=20*CYCLE P_B_TM TIME T#50 ms You can assign a minimum pulse/break time at the parameter "Minimum pulse/break time". P_B_TM >= CYCLE RATIOFAC REAL 1.0 Using the "Ratio factor" input parameter the ratio of the duration of positive to negative pulses can be changed. In a thermal process, this would, for example, allow different time constants for heating and cooling to be compensated (for example, in a process with electrical heating and water cooling). STEP3_ON BOOL TRUE At the input parameter "Enable three-step control" the appropriate mode is activated. In three-step control both output signals are active. ST2BI_ON BOOL FALSE At the input parameter "Enable two-step control for bipolar manipulated value range" you can select from the modes "Two-step control for bipolar manipulated value range" and "Two-step control for unipolar manipulated value range". STEP3_ON = FALSE is required. MAN_ON BOOL FALSE Setting the input parameter "Enable manual mode" allows the output signals to be set manually. POS_P_ON BOOL FALSE For manual mode three-step control, the output signal QPOS_P can be operated on the input parameter "Positive pulse on". In manual mode with two-step control, QNEG_P is always set inversely to QPOS_P. NEG_P_ON BOOL FALSE For manual mode three-step control, the output signal QNEG_P can be operated on the input parameter "Negative pulse on". In manual mode with two-step control, QNEG_P is always set inversely to QPOS_P. SYN_ON BOOL TRUE By setting the input parameter "Enable synchronization", it is possible to synchronize the pulse output automatically with the block that updates the input variable INV. This ensures that a change in the input variable is output as quickly as possible as a pulse. COM_RST BOOL FALSE The block has an initialization routine that is processed when the input "Restart" is set. CYCLE TIME T#10ms The time between block calls must be constant. The "Sampling time" input specifies the time between block calls. Values from 0.1 to 10.0 are permitted. CYCLE >= 1ms PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 487 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.3.7 Table 9- 18 Output parameter PULSEGEN Output parameter PULSEGEN Parameters Data type Default Description QPOS_P BOOL FALSE The output parameter "Output signal positive pulse" is set if a pulse will be output. In three-step control, this is always the positive pulse. In two-step control, the QNEG_P is always set inversely to QPOS_P. QNEG_P BOOL FALSE The output parameter "Output signal negative pulse" is set if a pulse will be output. In three-step control, this is always the negative pulse. In two-step control, QNEG_P is always set inversely to QPOS_P. PID control 488 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4 TCONT_CP 9.4.4.1 Description TCONT_CP The instruction TCONT_CP is used to control temperature processes with continuous or pulsed control signals. The controller functionality is based on the PID control algorithm with additional functions for temperature processes. To improve the control response with temperature processes, the block includes a control zone and reduction of the proportional component if there is a setpoint step change. The instruction can set the PI/PID parameters itself using the controller optimization function. Application The controller controls one actuator; in other words, with one controller you can either heat or cool but not both. If you use the block for cooling, GAIN must be assigned a negative value. This inversion of the controller means that if the temperature rises, for example, the manipulated variable LMN and with it the cooling action is increased. Call The instruction TCONT_CP must be called equidistant. To achieve this, use a cyclic interrupt priority class (for example, OB35 for an S7-300). The TCONT_CP instruction has an initialization routine that is run through when input parameter COM_RST = TRUE is set. During initialization, the integral action is set to the initialization value I_ITVAL. All the signal outputs are set to zero. Following execution of the initialization routine, the block sets COM_RST back to FALSE. If you require initialization when the CPU restarts, call the block in OB100 with COM_RST = TRUE. If you call the instruction TCONT_CP as a multiple instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for TCONT_CP directly in the multiple instance DB and commission it via a watch table. See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 489 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.2 Mode of operation TCONT_CP Setpoint branch The setpoint is entered at input SP_INT in floating-point format as a physical value or percentage. The setpoint and process value used to form the control deviation must have the same unit. Process value options (PVPER_ON) Depending on PVPER_ON, the process value can be read in, in the I/O or floating-point format. PVPER_ON Process Value Input TRUE The process value is read in via the analog I/Os (PIW xxx) at input PV_PER. FALSE The process value is acquired in floating-point format at input PV_IN. Process value format conversion CRP_IN (PER_MODE) The CRP_IN function converts the I/O value PV_PER to floating-point format depending on the PER_MODE switch according to the following rules: PER_MODE Output of CRP_IN Analog Input Type Unit 0 PV_PER * 0.1 Thermoelements; PT100/NI100; standard C;F 1 PV_PER * 0.01 PT100/NI100; climate; C;F 2 PV_PER * 100/27648 Voltage/current % Process value scaling PV_NORM (PF_FAC, PV_OFFS) The PV_NORM function calculates the output of CRP_IN according to the following rule: "Output of PV_NORM" = "Output of CRP_IN)" * PV_FAC + PV_OFFS It can be used for the following purposes: Process value adjustment with PV_FAC as process value factor and PV_OFFS as process value offset. Scaling of temperature to percentage You want to enter the setpoint as a percentage and must now convert the measured temperature value to a percentage. Scaling of percentage to temperature You want to enter the setpoint in the physical temperature unit and must now convert the measured voltage/current value to a temperature. PID control 490 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Calculation of the parameters: PV_FAC = range of PV_NORM/range of CRP_IN; PV_OFFS = LL (PV_NORM) - PV_FAC * LL(CRP_IN); where LL: Low limit The scaling is switched off with the default values (PV_FAC = 1.0 and PV_OFFS = 0.0). The effective process value is output at the PV output. Note With pulse control, the process value must be transferred to the block in the fast pulse call (reason: mean value filtering). Otherwise, the control quality can deteriorate. Example of Process Value Scaling If you want to enter the setpoint as a percentage, and you have a temperature range of -20 to 85 C applied to , CRP_IN you must normalize the temperature range as a percentage. The diagram below shows an example of adapting the temperature range -20 to 85 C to an internal scale of 0 to 100 %: Forming the control deviation The difference between the setpoint and process value is the control deviation before the dead band. The setpoint and process value must exist in the same unit. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 491 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Dead band (DEADB_W) To suppress a minor sustained oscillation due to the manipulated variable quantization (for example, in pulse width modulation with PULSEGEN) a dead band is applied to the (DEADBAND) control deviation. With DEADB_W = 0.0, the dead band is disabled. The effective control deviation is indicated by the ER parameter. PID Algorithm The following figure shows the block diagram of the PID algorithm. Parameter configuration interface Instruction call interface PID control 492 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions PID Algorithm (GAIN, TI, TD, D_F) The PID algorithm operates as a position algorithm. The proportional, integral (INT), and derivative (DIF) actions are connected in parallel and can be activated or deactivated individually. This allows P, PI, PD, and PID controllers to be configured. Controller tuning supports PI and PID controllers. Controller inversion is implemented using a negative GAIN (cooling controller). If you set TI and TD to 0.0, you obtain a pure P controller at the operating point. The step response in the time range is: Where: LMN_Sum(t) the manipulated variable in the controller's automatic mode ER (0) is the step height of the normalized control deviation GAIN is the controller gain TI is the integration time TD is the derivative action time D_F is the derivative factor PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 493 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Integral action (TI, I_ITL_ON, I_ITLVAL) In manual mode, it is corrected as follows: LMN_I = LMN - LMN_P - DISV. If the output value is limited, the integral action is halted. If the control deviation moves the integral action back in the direction of the output range, the integral action is enabled again. The integral action is also modified by the following measures: The integral action of the controller is deactivated by TI = 0.0 Weakening of the proportional action when setpoint changes occur Control zone The output value limits can be modified online Weakening of the proportional action when setpoint changes occur (PFAC_SP) To prevent overshoot, you can weaken the proportional action using the parameter "Proportional factor for setpoint changes" (PFAC_SP). Using PFAC_SP, you can select continuously between 0.0 and 1.0 to decide the effect of the proportional action when the setpoint changes: PFAC_SP = 1.0: Proportional action has full effect if the setpoint changes PFAC_SP = 0.0: Proportional action has no effect if the setpoint changes The weakening of the proportional action is achieved by compensating the integral action. Derivative action (TD, D_F) The derivative action of the controller is deactivated by TD = 0.0 If the derivative action is active, the following relationship should apply: TD = 0.5 * CYCLE * D_F Parameter Settings of a P or PD Controller with Operating Point In the user interface, deactivate the integral action (TI = 0.0) and possibly also the derivative action (TD = 0.0). Then make the following parameter settings: I_ITL_ON = TRUE I_ITLVAL = operating point; Feedforward control (DISV) A disturbance variable can be added at the DISV input. PID control 494 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Calculating the output value The diagram below is the block diagram of the output value calculation: Parameter configuration interface Instruction call interface Parameter configuration interface, call interface PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 495 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Control zone (CONZ_ON, CON_ZONE) If CONZ_ON = TRUE, the controller operates with a control zone. This means that the controller operates according to the following algorithm: If process value PV exceeds the setpoint SP_INT by more than CON_ZONE, the value LMN_LLM is output as the manipulated variable. If the process value PV falls below setpoint SP_INT by more than CON_ZONE, LMN_HLM is output. If the process value PV is within the control zone (CON_ZONE), the output value takes its value from the PID algorithm LMN_Sum. Note Changing the manipulated variable from LMN_LLM or LMN_HLM to LMN_Sum occurs under compliance of a hysteresis of 20% of the control zone. Note Before enabling the control zone manually, make sure that the control zone band is not too narrow. If the control zone band is too small, oscillations will occur in the manipulated variable and process value. Advantage of the Control Zone When the process value enters the control zone, the D-action causes an extremely fast reduction of the manipulated variable. This means that the control zone is only useful when the D-action is activated. Without a control zone, only the reducing P-action would essentially reduce the manipulated variable. The control zone leads to faster settling without overshoot or undershoot if the output minimum or maximum manipulated variable is a long way from the manipulated variable required for the new operating point. PID control 496 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Manual value processing (MAN_ON, MAN) You can change over between manual and automatic mode. In manual mode, the manipulated variable is corrected to a manually selected value. The integral action (INT) is set internally to LMN - LMN_P - DISV and the derivative action (DIF) is set to 0 and synchronized internally. Changeover to automatic mode is therefore bumpless. Note The MAN_ON parameter has no effect during tuning. Output value limit LMNLIMIT (LMN_HLM, LMN_LLM) The LMNLIMIT function is used to limit the output value to the limits LMN_HLM and LMN_LLM. If these limits are reached, this is indicated by the message bits QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM. If the output value is limited, the integral action is halted. If the control deviation moves the integral action back in the direction of the output range, the integral action is enabled again. Changing the Manipulated Value Limits Online If the range of the output value is reduced and the new unlimited value of the output value is outside the limits, the integral action and therefore the output value shifts. The output value is reduced by the same amount as the output value limit changed. If the output value was unlimited prior to the change, it is set exactly to the new limit (described here for the high output value limit). Scaling of output value LMN_NORM (LMN_FAC, LMN_OFFS) The LMN_NORM function normalizes the output value according to the following rule: LMN = LmnN * LMN_FAC + LMN_OFFS It can be used for the following purposes: Output value scaling with LMN_FAC as output value factor and LMN_OFFS as output value offset. The output value is also available in I/O format. The CRP_OUT function converts the LMN floating-point value to an I/O value according to the following rule: LMN_PER = LMN * 27648/100 The scaling is switched off with the default values (LMN_FAC = 1.0 and LMN_OFFS = 0.0). The effective output value is sent to output LMN. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 497 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Save controller parameters SAVE_PAR If you classify the current controller parameters as utilizable, you can save these before a manual change in structure parameters provided specifically for this in the instance DB of the instruction TCONT_CP. If you optimize the controller, the saved parameters are overwritten by the values that were valid prior to tuning. PFAC_SP, GAIN, TI, TD, D_F, CONZ_ON and CONZONE are written to the structure PAR_SAVE. Reloading Saved Controller Parameters UNDO_PAR The last controller parameter settings you saved can be activated for the controller again using this function (in manual mode only). Change between PI and PID parameters LOAD_PID (PID_ON) Following tuning, the PI and PID parameters are stored in the PI_CON and PID_CON structures. Depending on PID_ON, you can use LOAD_PID in manual mode to write the PI or PID parameters to the effective controller parameters. PID parameters PID_ON = TRUE PI parameters PID_ON = FALSE * GAIN = PID_CON.GAIN * GAIN = PI_CON.GAIN * TI = PID_CON.TI * TI = PI_CON.TI * TD = PID_CON.TD Note The controller parameters are only written back to the controller with UNDO_PAR or LOAD_PID, if the controller gain is not equal to 0: With LOAD_PID, the parameters are only copied if the corresponding GAIN <> 0 is (either the PI or PID parameters). This strategy takes into account the situation that no tuning has yet been made or that PID parameters are missing. If PID_ON = TRUE and PID.GAIN = FALSE, PID_ON is set to FALSE and the PI parameter is copied. * D_F, PFAC_SP are preset by the the tuning. These can then be modified by the user. LOAD_PID does not change these parameters. * With LOAD_PID, the control zone is always recalculated (CON_ZONE = 250/GAIN), even if CONZ_ON = FALSE. See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control 498 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.3 Operating principle of the pulse generator The function PULSEGEN transforms the analog manipulated value LmnN through pulse width module into an impulse sequence with the period duration PER_TM. PULSEGEN is switched on with PULSE_ON = TRUE and is processed in the cycle CYCLE_P. A manipulated value of LmnN = 30% and 10 PULSEGEN calls per PER_TM therefore means: TRUE at output QPULSE for the first three PULSEGEN calls (30% of 10 calls) FALSE at output QPULSE for seven further PULSEGEN calls (70% of 10 calls) The duration of a pulse per pulse repetition period is proportional to the manipulated variable and is calculated as follows: Pulse duration = PER_TM * LmnN /100 By suppressing the minimum pulse or break time, the characteristic curve of the conversion develops "knees" in the start and end regions. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 499 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions The following diagram illustrates two-step control with a unipolar manipulated variable range (0% to 100%): Minimum pulse or minimum break time (P_B_TM) Short on or off times hinder the lifespan of actuators and fine controlling units. These can be avoided by setting a minimum pulse duration or minimum break time P_B_TM. Small absolute values at the input variable LmnN that could otherwise generate a pulse duration shorter than P_B_TM are suppressed. Large input values that would generate a pulse duration greater than PER_TM - P_B_TM are set to 100%. This reduces the dynamics of pulse generation. Set values of P_B_TM 0,1 * PER_TM are recommended for the minimum pulse duration and the minimum break duration. The "knees" in the curves in the diagram above are caused by the minimum pulse or minimum break times. The following schematic illustrates the switching response of the pulse output: PID control 500 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Accuracy of pulse generation The smaller the pulse generator CYCLE_P is compared to the period duration PER_TM, the more precise the pulse width modulation is. To achieve sufficiently accurate control, the following relationship should apply: CYCLE_P PER_TM/50 The manipulated value is transformed with a resolution of 2 % into an impulse. Note When calling the controller in the pulse shaper cycle, you must note the following: Calling the controller in the pulse shaper cycle will cause the process value to be averaged. As a result, at output PV, different values may be at input PV_IN and PV_PER. If you want to track the setpoint value, you must save the process value at input parameter PV_IN at the call times for complete controller processing (QC_ACT = TRUE). For pulse shaper calls occurring between these times, you must supply the input parameters PV_IN and SP_INT with the saved process value. See also Description TCONT_CP (Page 489) Mode of operation TCONT_CP (Page 490) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) Input parameters TCONT_CP (Page 504) Output parameters TCONT_CP (Page 505) In/out parameters TCONT_CP (Page 506) Static variables TCONT_CP (Page 507) Parameter STATUS_H (Page 512) Parameters STATUS_D (Page 513) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 501 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.4 Block diagram TCONT_CP PID control 502 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions See also Description TCONT_CP (Page 489) Mode of operation TCONT_CP (Page 490) Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Input parameters TCONT_CP (Page 504) Output parameters TCONT_CP (Page 505) In/out parameters TCONT_CP (Page 506) Static variables TCONT_CP (Page 507) Parameter STATUS_H (Page 512) Parameters STATUS_D (Page 513) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 503 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.5 Table 9- 19 Input parameters TCONT_CP Input parameters TCONT_CP Parameters Address Data type Default Description PV_IN 0.0 REAL 0.0 At the "Process value input" you can assign parameters to a commissioning value or you can interconnect an external process value in floating-point format. The valid values depend on the sensors used. PV_PER 4.0 INT 0 The process value in I/O format is interconnected with the controller at the "Process value I/O" input. DISV 6.0 REAL 0.0 For feedforward control, the disturbance variable is interconnected to the "Disturbance variable" input. INT_HPOS 10.0 BOOL FALSE The output of the integral action can be held in the positive direction. For this, the input INT_HPOS must be set to TRUE. In a cascade control, INT_HPOS of the primary controller is connected to QLMN_HLM of the secondary controller. INT_HNEG 10.1 BOOL FALSE The output of the integral action can be held in the negative direction. For this, the input INT_HNEG must be set to TRUE. In a cascade control, INT_HNEG of the primary controller is connected to QLMN_LLM of the secondary controller. SELECT 12.0 INT 0 If the pulse shaper is on, there are several ways of calling the PID algorithm and pulse shaper: * SELECT = 0: The controller is called in a fast cyclic interrupt priority class and the PID algorithm and pulse shaper are processed. * SELECT = 1: The controller is called in OB1 and only the PID algorithm is processed. * SELECT = 2: The controller is called in a fast cyclic interrupt priority class and only the pulse shaper is processed. * SELECT = 3: The controller is called a slow cyclic interrupt priority class and only the PID algorithm is processed. See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control 504 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.6 Table 9- 20 Output parameters TCONT_CP Output parameters TCONT_CP Parameter Address Data type Default Description PV 14.0 REAL 0.0 The effective process value is output at the "Process value" output. LMN 18.0 REAL 0.0 The effective "Manipulated value" is output in floating point format at the "Manipulated value" output. LMN_PER 22.0 INT 0 The manipulated value in I/O format is interconnected with the controller on the output "Manipulated value I/O". QPULSE 24.0 BOOL FALSE The manipulated value is pulse-width-modulated at the QPULSE output. QLMN_HLM 24.1 BOOL FALSE The manipulated value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The output QLMN_HLM signals that the high limit has been reached. QLMN_LLM 24.2 BOOL FALSE The manipulated value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The output QLMN_LLM signals that the low limit has been reached. QC_ACT 24.3 BOOL TRUE The valid values depend on the sensors used. This parameter indicates whether continuous control component will be processed the next time the block is called (relevant only when SELECT has the value 0 or 1). See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) Parameter STATUS_H (Page 512) Parameters STATUS_D (Page 513) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 505 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.7 Table 9- 21 In/out parameters TCONT_CP In/out parameters TCONT_CP Parameters Address Data type Default Description CYCLE 26.0 REAL 0.1 s CYCLE_P 30.0 REAL 0.02 s Sets the sampling time for the PID algorithm. In phase 1, the tuner calculates the sampling time and enters it in CYCLE. CYCLE > 0.001 s At this input, you set the sampling time for the pulse shaper action. In phase 1, the TCONT_CP instruction calculates the sampling time and enters it in CYCLE_P. CYCLE_P > 0.001 s SP_INT 34.0 REAL 0.0 The input "Internal setpoint" is used to specify a setpoint. The valid values depend on the sensors used. MAN 38.0 REAL 0.0 The "Manual value" input is used to set a manual value. In automatic mode, it tracks the manipulated value. COM_RST 42.0 BOOL FALSE The block has an initialization routine that is processed when the COM_RST input is set. MAN_ON 42.1 BOOL TRUE If the input "Enable manual mode" is set then the control loop is interrupted. The manual value MAN is set as manipulated value. See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control 506 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.8 Table 9- 22 Static variables TCONT_CP Static variables TCONT_CP Parameters Address Data type Default Description DEADB_W 44.0 REAL 0.0 A deadband is applied to the control deviation. The "Deadband width" input determines the size of the deadband. I_ITLVAL 48.0 REAL 0.0 The output of the integrator can be set at the I_ITL_ON input. The initialization value is applied to the "Initialization value of the I-action" input. During a restart COM_RST = TRUE, the I-action is set to the initialization value. The valid values depend on the sensors used. Values from -100 to 100 % are permitted. LMN_HLM 52.0 REAL 100.0 The output value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The "Manipulated value high limit" input specifies the high limit. LMN_LLM 56.0 REAL 0.0 The output value is always restricted to a high limit and low limit. The "Manipulated value low limit" input specifies the low limit. PV_FAC 60.0 REAL 1.0 The "Process value factor" input is multiplied by the "Process value I/O". The input is used to scale the process value range. PV_OFFS 64.0 REAL 0.0 The "Process value offset" input is added to the "Process value I/O". The input is used to scale the process value range. LMN_FAC 68.0 REAL 1.0 The "Output value factor" input is multiplied with the output value. The input is used to scale the output value range. LMN_OFFS 72.0 REAL 0.0 The "Output value offset" input is added to the output value. The input is used to scale the output value range. PER_TM 76.0 REAL 1.0 s The period duration of the pulse width modulation is entered at the PER_TM parameter. The relationship of the period duration to the sampling time of the pulse shaper determines the accuracy of the pulse width modulation. LMN_HLM > LMN_LLM LMN_LLM < LMN_HLM PER_TM CYCLE P_B_TM 80.0 REAL 0.02 s You can assign a minimum pulse or break time at the parameter "Minimum pulse/break time". P_B_TM is internally limited to > CYCLE_P. TUN_DLMN 84.0 REAL 20.0 Process excitation for controller tuning results from a output value step change at TUN_DLMN. Values from -100 to 100 % are permitted. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 507 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Parameters Address PER_MODE 88.0 Data type Default Description INT 0 You can use this switch to enter the type of I/O module. The process value at input PV_PER is then scaled as follows at the PV output. * PER_MODE = 0: Thermoelements; PT100/NI100; standard PV_PER * 0.1 Unit: C, F * PER_MODE = 1: PT100/NI100; climate PV_PER * 0.01 Unit: C, F * PER_MODE = 2: Current/voltage PV_PER * 100/27648 Unit: % PVPER_ON 90.0 BOOL FALSE If the process value is to be read in from the I/Os, the PV_PER input must be interconnected with the I/Os and the "Enable process value I/Os" input must be set. I_ITL_ON 90.1 BOOL FALSE The output of the integrator can be set at the I_ITLVAL input. The "Set Iaction" input must be set for this. PULSE_ON 90.2 BOOL FALSE If PULSE_ON = TRUE is set, the pulse shaper is activated. TUN_KEEP 90.3 BOOL FALSE The mode changes to automatic only when TUN_KEEP changes to FALSE. ER 92.0 REAL 0.0 The effective control deviation is output at the "Control deviation" output. LMN_P 96.0 REAL 0.0 The "P-action" output contains the proportional action of the manipulated tag. LMN_I 100.0 REAL 0.0 The "integral action" output contains the integral action of the manipulated tag. LMN_D 104.0 REAL 0.0 The "D-action" output contains the derivative action of the manipulated tag. PHASE 108.0 INT 0 The current phase of controller tuning is indicated at the PHASE output. The valid values depend on the sensors used. * PHASE = 0: No tuning mode; automatic or manual mode * PHASE = 1: Ready to start tuning; check parameters, wait for excitation, measure the sampling times * PHASE = 2: Actual tuning: Searching for point of inflection with constant output value. Entering the sampling time in instance DB. * PHASE = 3: Calculating process parameters. Saving valid controller parameters prior to tuning. * PHASE = 4: Controller design * PHASE = 5: Following up the controller to the new manipulated tag * PHASE = 7: Validating the process type STATUS_H 110.0 INT 0 STATUS_H indicates the diagnostic value via the search for the point of inflection during the heating process. STATUS_D 112.0 INT 0 STATUS_D indicates the diagnostic value via the controller design during the heating process. PID control 508 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Parameters Data type Default Description QTUN_RUN 114.0 Address BOOL 0 The tuning manipulated tag has been applied, tuning has started and is still in phase 2 (searching for point of inflection). PI_CON STRUCT 116.0 PI controller parameters GAIN +0.0 REAL 0.0 TI +4.0 REAL 0.0 s PI controller gain %/phys. unit PID_CON 124.0 STRUCT PI integration time [s] PID controller parameters GAIN +0.0 REAL 0.0 PID controller gain TI +4.0 REAL 0.0s PID integration time [s] +8.0 REAL 0.0s PID derivative action time [s] TD PAR_SAVE PFAC_SP 136.0 +0.0 STRUCT REAL The PID parameters are saved in this structure. 1.0 Proportional factor for setpoint changes Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are permitted. GAIN +4.0 REAL 0.0 Controller gain %/phys. unit TI +8.0 REAL 40.0 s Integration time [s] TD +12.0 REAL 10.0 s Derivative action time (s) D_F +16.0 REAL 5.0 Derivative factor CON_ZONE +20.0 REAL 100.0 Control zone band Values from 5.0 to 10.0 are permitted. If the control deviation is greater than the control zone band, the high output value limit is output as output value. If the control deviation is less than the negative control zone band, the low output value limit is output as the output value. CON_ZONE 0.0 CONZ_ON PFAC_SP +24.0 162.0 BOOL FALSE Enable control zone REAL 1.0 PFAC_SP specifies the effective P-action when there is a setpoint change. This is set between 0 and 1. * 1: P-action has full effect if the setpoint changes. * 0: P-action has no effect if the setpoint changes. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are permitted. GAIN 166.0 REAL 2.0 The "Proportional gain" input specifies controller amplification. The direction of control can be reversed by giving GAIN a negative sign. %/phys. unit TI 170.0 REAL 40.0 s The "Integration time" (integral-action time) input defines the integrator's time response. TD 174.0 REAL 10.0 s The "Derivative-action time" (rate time) input decides the time response of the differentiator. D_F 178.0 REAL 5.0 The derivative factor decides the lag of the D-action. D_F = derivative-action time/"Lag of the D-action" Values from 5.0 to 10.0 are permitted. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 509 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Parameters Address CON_ZONE 182.0 Data type Default Description REAL 100.0 If the control deviation is greater than the control zone band, the high output value limit is output as output value. If the control deviation is less than the negative control zone band, the low output value limit is output as the output value. The valid values depend on the sensors used. CONZ_ON 186.0 BOOL FALSE You can use CONZ_ON =TRUE to enable the control zone. TUN_ON 186.1 BOOL FALSE If TUN_ON=TRUE, the output value is averaged until the output value excitation TUN_DLMN is enabled either by a setpoint step-change or by TUN_ST=TRUE. TUN_ST 186.2 BOOL FALSE If the setpoint is to remain constant during controller tuning at the operating point, a output value step-change by the amount of TUN_DLMN is activated by TUN_ST=1. UNDO_PAR 186.3 BOOL FALSE Loads the controller parametersPFAC_SP, GAIN, TI, TD, D_FCONZ_ON and CON_ZONE from the data structure PAR_SAVE (only in manual mode). SAVE_PAR 186.4 BOOL FALSE Saves the controller parameters PFAC_SP, GAIN, TI, TD, D_F, CONZ_ON and CON_ZONE in the data structure PAR_SAVE. LOAD_PID 186.5 BOOL FALSE Loads the controller parametersGAIN, TI,TD depending on PID_ON from the data structure PI_CON or PID_CON (only in manual mode) PID_ON 186.6 BOOL TRUE At the PID_ON input, you can specify whether or not the tuned controller will operate as a PI or PID controller. * PID controller: PID_ON = TRUE * PI controller: PID_ON = FALSE With certain process types it is nevertheless possible that only a PI controller will be designed despite PID_ON = TRUE. GAIN_P 188.0 REAL 0.0 Identified process gain. In the case of process type I, GAIN_P tends to be estimated too low. TU 192.0 REAL 0.0 Identified time lag of the process. TA 196.0 REAL 0.0 Identified recovery time of the process. In the case of process type I, TA tends to be estimated too low. KIG 200.0 REAL 0.0 Maximum process value rise at manipulated tag excitation from 0 to 100 % [1/s] TU 3*CYCLE GAIN_P = 0.01 * KIG * TA N_PTN 204.0 REAL 0.0 The parameter specifies the order of the process. "Non-integer values" are also possible. TM_LAG_P 208.0 REAL 0.0 Time constants of a PTN model (practical values only for N_PTN >= 2). T_P_INF 212.0 REAL 0.0 Time from process excitation until the point of inflection. P_INF 216.0 REAL 0.0 Process value change from process excitation until the point of inflection. Values from 1.01 to 10.0 are permitted. The valid values depend on the sensors used. LMN0 220.0 REAL 0.0 Output value at the start of tuning Detected in phase 1 (mean value). Values from 0 to 100 % are permitted. PV0 224.0 REAL 0.0 Process value at the start of tuning PID control 510 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Parameters Address Data type Default Description PVDT0 228.0 REAL 0.0 Process value slew rate at start of tuning [1/s] PVDT 232.0 REAL 0.0 Current process value slew rate [1/s] PVDT_MAX 236.0 REAL 0.0 Sign adapted. Sign adapted. Max. change in the process value per second [1/s] Maximum derivative of the process value at the point of inflection (sign adapted, always > 0); is used to calculate TU and KIG. NOI_PVDT 240.0 REAL 0.0 Noise action in PVDT_MAX in % The higher the noise action, the less accurate (less aggressive) the control parameters. NOISE_PV 244.0 REAL 0.0 Absolute noise in process value Difference between maximum and minimum process value in phase 1. FIL_CYC 248.0 INT 1 Number of cycles of the mean value filter The process value is determined through FIL_CYC cycles. FIL_CYC is increased from 1 to a max. of 1024 if needed. POI_CMAX 250.0 INT 2 Maximum number of cycles after point of inflection This time is used to find another (i.e. better) inflection point for measuring noise. The tuning is completed only after this time. POI_CYCL 252.0 INT 0 Number of cycles after inflection point See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 511 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.9 Parameter STATUS_H STATUS_H Description Remedy 0 Default, or no/no new controller parameters 10000 Tuning completed + suitable controller parameters found 2xxxx Tuning completed + controller parameters uncertain 2xx2x Point of inflection not reached (only if excited via setpoint step-change) If the controller oscillates, weaken the controller parameters, or repeat the test with a smaller manipulated value difference TUN_DLMN. 2x1xx Estimation error (TU < 3*CYCLE) Reduce CYCLE and repeat attempt. Special case for PT1-only process: Do not repeat test, if necessary reduce controller parameters. 2x3xx Estimation error TU too high Repeat test under better conditions. 21xxx Estimation error N_PTN < 1 Repeat test under better conditions. 22xxx Estimation error N_PTN > 10 Repeat test under better conditions. 3xxxx Tuning canceled in phase 1 owing to faulty parameter assignment: 30002 Effective manipulated value differen- Correct manipulated value differential tial < 5% TUN_DLMN. 30005 The sampling times CYCLE and CYCLE_P differ by more than 5% of the measured values. Compare CYCLE and CYCLE_P with the cycle time of the cyclic interrupt priority class and note any loop scheduler. Check CPU load. An excessively loaded CPU can result in prolonged sampling times that are inconsistent with CYCLE or CYCLE_P. Note If you cancel tuning in phase 1 or 2, STATUS_H = 0 is set. However, STATUS_D still displays the status of the last controller calculation. The higher the value of STATUS_D, the higher the order of the control process, the greater the TU/TA ratio and the gentler the controller parameters will be. See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control 512 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.4.10 Parameters STATUS_D STATUS_D Description 0 No controller parameters were calculated. 110 N_PTN <= 1.5 Process type I fast 121 N_PTN > 1.5 Process type I 200 N_PTN > 1.9 Process type II (transition range) 310 N_PTN >= 2.1 Process type III fast 320 N_PTN > 2.6 Process type III 111, 122, 201, 311, 321 Parameters have been corrected from phase 7. Note The higher the value of STATUS_D, the higher the order of the control process, the greater the TU/TA ratio and the gentler the controller parameters will be. See also Operating principle of the pulse generator (Page 499) Block diagram TCONT_CP (Page 502) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 513 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.5 TCONT_S 9.4.5.1 Description TCONT_S The TCONT_S instruction is used on SIMATIC S7 automation systems to control technical temperature processes with binary manipulated value output signals for actuators with integrating behavior. The functionality is based on the PI control algorithm of the sampling controller. The step controller operates without a position feedback signal. Application You can also use the controller in a cascade control as a secondary position controller. You specify the actuator position via the setpoint input SP_INT. In this case, you must set the process value input and the parameter TI (integration time) to zero. An application might be, for example, temperature control with heating power control using pulse-break activation and cooling control using a butterfly valve. To close the valve completely, the manipulated variable (ER*GAIN) should be negative. Call The instruction TCONT_S must be called equidistant. To achieve this, use a cyclic interrupt priority class (for example, OB35 for an S7-300). The sampling time is specified at the CYCLE parameter. If you call the instruction TCONT_S as a multiple instance DB, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You must assign parameters for TCONT_S directly in the multiple instance DB and commission it via a watch table. CYCLE sampling time The CYCLE sampling time match the time difference between two calls (cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB taking into account the reduction ratios). The controller sampling time should not exceed 10% of the calculated integration time of the controller (TI). Generally, you must set the sampling time to a much lower value to achieve the required accuracy of the step controller. Required accuracy G MTR_TM CYCLE = MTR_TM*G Comment 0.5 % 0.05 s The sampling time is determined by the required accuracy of the step controller. 10 s Start-up The TCONT_S instruction has an initialization routine that is run through when input parameter COM_RST = TRUE is set. Following execution of the initialization routine, the block sets COM_RST back to FALSE. All outputs are set to their initial values. If you require initialization when the CPU restarts, call the block in OB100 with COM_RST = TRUE. See also Block diagram TCONT_S (Page 519) PID control 514 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.5.2 Mode of operation TCONT_S Setpoint branch The setpoint is entered at input SP_INT in floating-point format as a physical value or percentage. The setpoint and process value used to form the control deviation must have the same unit. Process value options (PVPER_ON) Depending on PVPER_ON, the process value can be read in, in the I/O or floating-point format. PVPER_ON Process Value Input TRUE The process value is read in via the analog I/Os (PIW xxx) at input PV_PER. FALSE The process value is acquired in floating-point format at input PV_IN. Process value format conversion CRP_IN (PER_MODE) The CRP_IN function converts the I/O value PV_PER to floating-point format depending on the PER_MODE switch according to the following rules: PER_MODE Output of CRP_IN Analog Input Type Unit 0 PV_PER * 0.1 Thermoelements; PT100/NI100; standard C;F 1 PV_PER * 0.01 PT100/NI100; climate; C;F 2 PV_PER * 100/27648 Voltage/current % Process value scaling PV_NORM (PF_FAC, PV_OFFS) The PV_NORM function calculates the output of CRP_IN according to the following rule: "Output of PV_NORM" = "Output of CRP_IN)" * PV_FAC + PV_OFFS It can be used for the following purposes: Process value adjustment with PV_FAC as process value factor and PV_OFFS as process value offset. Normalization of temperature to percentage You want to enter the setpoint as a percentage and must now convert the measured temperature value to a percentage. Normalization of percentage to temperature You want to enter the setpoint in the physical temperature unit and must now convert the measured voltage/current value to a temperature. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 515 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Calculation of the parameters: PV_FAC = range of PV_NORM/range of CRP_IN; PV_OFFS = LL (PV_NORM) - PV_FAC * LL(CRP_IN); where LL: low limit The normalization is switched off with the default values (PV_FAC = 1.0 and PV_OFFS = 0.0). The effective process value is output at the PV output. Example of Process Value Normalization If you want to enter the setpoint as a percentage, and you have a temperature range of -20 to 85 C applied to , CRP_IN you must normalize the temperature range as a percentage. The following diagram shows an example of adapting the temperature range -20 to 85 C to an internal scale of 0 to 100 %: Forming the control deviation The difference between the setpoint and process value is the control deviation before the dead band. The setpoint and process value must exist in the same unit. PID control 516 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Dead band (DEADB_W) To suppress a minor sustained oscillation due to the manipulated variable quantization (for example, in pulse width modulation with PULSEGEN) a dead band is applied to the (DEADBAND) control deviation. With DEADB_W = 0.0, the dead band is switched off. PI step controller algorithm The instruction TCONT_S operates without position feedback. The I-action of the PI algorithm and the assumed position feedback signal are calculated in an integrator (INT) and compared as a feedback value with the remaining P-action. The difference is applied to a three-step element (THREE_ST) and a pulse shaper (PULSEOUT) that generates the pulses for the control valve. Adapting the response threshold of the three-step element reduces the switching frequency of the controller. Weakening of the P-action when setpoint changes occur To prevent overshoot, you can weaken the P-action using the "Proportional factor for setpoint changes" parameter (PFAC_SP). Using PFAC_SP, you can now select continuously between 0.0 and 1.0 to decide the effect of the P-action when the setpoint changes: PFAC_SP = 1.0: Proportional action for setpoint change is fully effective PFAC_SP = 0.0: Proportional action has no effect in the setpoint change As in the case of the continuous controller, a value of PFAC_SP < 1.0 can reduce the overshoot if the motor run time MTR_TM is small compared with the recovery time TA and the ratio is TU/TA < 0.2. If MTR_TM reaches 20% of TA, only a slight improvement can still be achieved. Feedforward control A disturbance variable can be added at the DISV input. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 517 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions Manual value processing (LMNS_ON, LMNUP, LMNDN) With LMNS_ON, you can change between manual and automatic mode. In manual mode, the actuator is halted and the integral action (INT) is set to 0 internally. Using LMNUP and LMNDN, the actuator can be adjusted to OPEN and CLOSED. Switching over to automatic mode therefore involves a bump. As a result of the GAIN, the existing control deviation leads to a step change in the internal manipulated variable. The integral component of the actuator, however, results in a ramp-shaped excitation of the process. See also Block diagram TCONT_S (Page 519) PID control 518 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.5.3 Block diagram TCONT_S Parameter configuration interface Instruction call interface Parameter configuration interface, call interface See also Description TCONT_S (Page 514) Mode of operation TCONT_S (Page 515) Input paramters TCONT_S (Page 520) Output parameters TCONT_S (Page 521) In/out parameters TCONT_S (Page 521) Static variables TCONT_S (Page 522) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 519 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.5.4 Input paramters TCONT_S Table 9- 23 Input paramters TCONT_S Parameters Address Data type Default Description CYCLE 0.0 REAL 0.1 s At this input, you enter the sampling time for the controller. SP_INT 4.0 REAL 0.0 The input "Internal setpoint" is used to specify a setpoint. CYCLE 0.001 The valid values depend on the sensors used. PV_IN 8.0 REAL 0.0 At the "Process variable input" you can assign parameters to a commissioning value or you can interconnect an external process value in floating-point format. PV_PER 12.0 INT 0 The process value in I/O format is interconnected with the controller at the "Process value I/O" input. DISV 14.0 REAL 0.0 For feedforward control, the disturbance variable is interconnected to the "Disturbance variable" input. LMNR_HS 18.0 BOOL FALSE The signal "Control valve at high endstop" is interconnected on the input "High endstop signal of position feedback". The valid values depend on the sensors used. * LMNR_LS 18.1 BOOL FALSE LMNR_HS=TRUE: The control valve is at high endstop. The signal "Control valve at low endstop" is interconnected on the input "Low endstop signal of position feedback". * LMNR_LS=TRUE: The control valve is at low endstop. LMNS _ON 18.2 BOOL TRUE Manipulated value signal processing is switched to manual mode at the "Enable manual mode of manipulated signal". LMNUP 18.3 BOOL FALSE In manual mode of manipulated signals, the output parameter QLMNUP is operated at the input parameter "Manipulated signal up". LMNDN 18.4 BOOL FALSE In manual mode of the manipulated signals, the output parameter QLMNDN is operated at the input parameter "Manipulated signal down". See also Block diagram TCONT_S (Page 519) PID control 520 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.5.5 Output parameters TCONT_S Table 9- 24 Output parameters TCONT_S Parameters Address Data type Default Description QLMNUP 20.0 BOOL FALSE If the output "Manipulated value signal up" is set then the control valve should be open. QLMNDN 20.1 BOOL FALSE If the output "Manipulated value signal down" is set then the control valve should be closed. PV 22.0 REAL 0.0 The effective process value is output at the "Process value" output. ER 26.0 REAL 0.0 The effective system deviation is output at the "Error signal" output. See also Block diagram TCONT_S (Page 519) 9.4.5.6 In/out parameters TCONT_S Table 9- 25 In/out parameters TCONT_S Parameters Address Data type Default Description COM _RST 30.0 BOOL FALSE The block has an initialization routine that is processed when the COM_RST input is set. See also Block diagram TCONT_S (Page 519) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 521 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.5.7 Table 9- 26 Parameters Static variables TCONT_S Static variables TCONT_S Data type REAL Default Description PV_FAC Address 32.0 1.0 The "Process value factor" input is multiplied by the process value. The input is used to scale the process value range. PV_OFFS 36.0 REAL 0.0 The input "Process value offset" is added to the process value. The input is used to scale the process value range. The valid values depend on the sensors used. DEADB_W 40.0 REAL 0.0 A deadband is applied to the control deviation. The "Deadband width" input determines the size of the deadband. DEADB_W 0.0 PFAC_SP 44.4 REAL 1.0 PFAC_SP specifies the effective P-action when there is a setpoint change. * 1: P-action has full effect if the setpoint changes. * 0: P-action has no effect if the setpoint changes. Values from 0.0 to 1.0 are permitted. GAIN 48.0 REAL 2.0 The "Proportional gain" input specifies controller amplification. The direction of control can be reversed by giving GAIN a negative sign. %/phys. unit TI 52.0 REAL 40.0 s The "Integration time" (integral-action time) input defines the integrator's time response. MTR_TM 56.0 REAL 30 s The runtime from endstop to endstop of the control valve is entered at the "Motor actuating time" parameter. MTR_TM CYCLE PULSE_TM 60.0 REAL 0.0 s A minimum pulse time can be configured at the "Minimum pulse time" parameter. BREAK_TM 64.0 REAL 0.0 s You can assign a minimum break time at the parameter "Minimum break time". INT 0 You can use this switch to enter the type of I/O module. The process value at input PV_PER is then scaled as follows at the PV output. PER_MODE 68.0 * PER_MODE = 0: Thermoelements; PT100/NI100; standard PV_PER * 0.1 Unit: C, F * PER_MODE = 1: PT100/NI100; climate PV_PER * 0.01 Unit: C, F * PER_MODE = 2: Current/voltage PV_PER * 100/27648 PVPER_ON 70.0 BOOL FALSE Unit: % If the process value is to be read in from the I/Os, the PV_PER input must be interconnected with the I/Os and the "Enable process value I/Os" input must be set. See also Block diagram TCONT_S (Page 519) PID control 522 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.6 Integrated system functions 9.4.6.1 CONT_C_SF CONT_C_SF The instruction CONT_C_SF is integrated in the S7-300 compact CPUs. The instruction must not be transmitted to the S7-300 CPU during loading. The scope of function corresponds with the instruction CONT_C. See also Description CONT_C (Page 466) How CONT_C works (Page 467) CONT_C block diagram (Page 469) Input parameter CONT_C (Page 470) Output parameters CONT_C (Page 472) 9.4.6.2 CONT_S_SF CONT_S_SF The instruction CONT_S_SF is integrated in the S7-300 compact CPUs. The instruction must not be transmitted to the S7-300 CPU during loading. The scope of function corresponds with the instruction CONT_S. See also Description CONT_S (Page 473) Mode of operation CONT_S (Page 474) Block diagram CONT_S (Page 475) Input parameters CONT_S (Page 476) Output parameters CONT_S (Page 477) PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 523 Instructions 9.4 PID basic functions 9.4.6.3 PULSEGEN_SF PULSEGEN_SF The instruction PULSEGEN_SF is integrated in the S7-300 compact CPUs. The instruction must not be transmitted to the S7-300 CPU during loading. The scope of function corresponds with the instruction PULSEGEN. See also Description PULSEGEN (Page 478) Mode of operation PULSEGEN (Page 479) Mode of operation PULSEGEN (Page 482) Three-step control (Page 483) Two-step control (Page 486) Input parameters PULSEGEN (Page 487) Output parameter PULSEGEN (Page 488) PID control 524 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline 9.5 Polyline 9.5.1 Compatibility with CPU and FW The following table shows which version of Polyline can be used on which CPU: 9.5.2 CPU FW Polyline S7-1200 V4.2 or higher V1.0 S7-1500 V2.0 or higher V1.0 Description Polyline Description The Polyline instruction maps input value Input onto output value Output using a characteristic curve. The characteristic curve is defined as a polyline with maximum 50 points. Linear interpolation is performed between the points. You can fit the polyline to the desired characteristic curve using the number and configuration of the points. The Polyline instruction can be used, for example, to linearize non-linear characteristics of sensor or actuators. Interpolation calculation Polyline calculates the output value at the Output parameter for the input value at the Input parameter that lies between point values xi and xi+1 with a linear interpolation. The linear interpolation is calculated according to the following formula: With parameter Reset = TRUE, an alternative output value can also be specified using the SubstituteOutput parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 525 Instructions 9.5 Polyline Polyline data The value pairs for the polyline are contained in the Static area of the instruction. Note * The minimum number of value pairs to be configured is 2. * The maximum number of value pairs to be configured is 50. * For a valid configuration, the x values must be specified in ascending order. To allow the polyline data to be changed without the changes taking effect immediately, the value pairs of the polyline are duplicated and contained in the following structures: UserData The polyline data in this structure can be edited. Make use of this structure to specify or change the polyline data. Changes in this structure do not affect the interpolation calculation until the check and duplication of the data to the WorkingData structure is initiated. This happens by setting Validate = TRUE or automatically during the first processing of Polyline after the change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN. The preassignment of values in this structure does not represent a valid configuration. To use the values for the interpolation calculation, change the tags to valid values. WorkingData The polyline data in this structure cannot be edited. This data is used for the interpolation calculation. Do not manually change the data in this structure. Both structures have the same data type and thus the same content: NumberOfUsedPoints Number of points used for the interpolation calculation. Point The array with 50 elements contains value pairs of points Point[i].x and Point[i].y with index "i" from 1 to 50. PID control 526 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline The following figure shows a polyline with four points. Call Polyline is called as a single-instance DB in an OB. In an FB, Polyline can be called as both a single-instance DB and a multi-instance DB and as a parameter-instance DB. When the instruction is called, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You assign the Polyline parameters directly in the instance DB and commission Polyline using a watch table of the user program in the CPU or HMI. Startup The tags in the UserData and WorkingData structures are not retentive. These tags are initialized with the start values after each change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN. If you change the actual values in the UserData structure in online mode and these values are to be retained after the change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN, back up these values in the start values of the data block. At the first call of the Polyline instruction after the change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN, the data in the UserData structure is automatically checked for validity. If the check is successful, the data is transferred to the WorkingData structure. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 527 Instructions 9.5 Polyline Reaction to error The Polyline instruction detects different errors that may occur during interpolation calculation. The result of the interpolation calculation can be output at the output despite a pending error. If an error prevents correct calculation of the interpolation result, a substitute output value is output at the output. You specify the substitute output value that is output if an error occurs that prevents correct calculation of the interpolation result as follows at the ErrorMode tag: If the ErrorMode tag is set to 0, Polyline outputs the input value at the Input parameter. If the ErrorMode tag is set to 1, Polyline outputs the substitute output value. You assign the substitute output value at the SubstituteOutput parameter. If the ErrorMode tag is set to 2, Polyline outputs the last valid output value at the Output parameter. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error is set to FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset only by a positive edge at the Reset or ErrorAck parameter. PID control 528 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline 9.5.3 Operating principle Polyline Polyline data To change the polyline, you edit the values in the UserData structure. The values are then checked for validity and transferred to the WorkingData structure. Only in the WorkingData structure are the values used for the interpolation calculation. The values are checked and transferred when You set the Validate parameter to TRUE while the Reset parameter is set to FALSE. Polyline is called for the first time after the change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN while the Reset parameter is set to FALSE. If Polyline has already been called, for example in OB100, another automatic check of the values is not performed at the subsequent calls. If the polyline data in the UserData structure is invalid, the previous polyline data in the WorkingData structure remains unchanged and a corresponding error message is output. If the check was performed for the first time, no valid values are available in the WorkingData structure and a corresponding error message is output. In this case, the Output parameter is specified with the substitute output value that you configure with the ErrorMode tag. The check and transfer of the values from the UserData structure requires more CPU processing time than the interpolation calculation. In time-critical applications, the first execution of Polyline can be in startup OB 100. In this way, the time-consuming one-time check and transfer of the polyline data can be completed before the cyclic application program sections. Validity of the polyline data When the values in the UserData structure are checked, they must meet the following conditions so that a valid polyline is available for the interpolation calculation: 2 UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 50 UserData.Point[j].x < UserData.Point[j+1].x with index j = 1..(UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints - 1) -3.402823e+38 UserData.Point[i].x 3.402823e+38 with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints -3.402823e+38 UserData.Point[i].y 3.402823e+38 with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints UserData.Point[i].x and UserData.Point[i].y are valid REAL values ( NaN) with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints If one or more conditions are not met during the check, the values in the UserData structure are not transferred to the WorkingData structure. A corresponding error message is output at the ErrorBits (Page 536) parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 529 Instructions 9.5 Polyline The preassignment of values in the UserData structure does not represent a valid configuration. Change the tags to valid values so that the tags can be used for the interpolation calculation. Note If more than the maximum number of 50 points are needed for your application, use two or more instances of Polyline. PID control 530 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline Calculating the output value If the input value at the Input parameter is below the first x-value or above the last x-value of the utilized points, configure the preassignment of the Output parameter with the following settings at the OutOfRangeMode tag: OutOfRangeMode = 0 The output value is extrapolated with the slope of the first or last two points. If the OutOfRangeMode tag lies outside the permissible value range of 0 to 1, the default preassignment 0 becomes effective. OutOfRangeMode = 1 The output value is limited to the y-value of the first or last point. The Output parameter has a permissible value range of a REAL data type of -3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38. The output value at the Output parameter is checked for validity each time the Polyline instruction is executed. If the interpolation calculation yields an invalid REAL value, the output value is replaced with the setting at the ErrorMode tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 531 Instructions 9.5 Polyline Enable behavior EN/ENO If one of the following conditions is met, enable output ENO is set to FALSE. Enable input EN is set to TRUE and the Output parameter is specified by a substitute output value in case of error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000. Enable input EN is set to FALSE. If enable input EN is set to TRUE and the Output parameter can be determined as follows, enable output ENO is set to TRUE: With valid interpolation calculation when Reset = FALSE. or With valid SubstituteOutput parameter when Reset = TRUE. Currently utilized points The NextXIndex index outputs the index of the next higher x-value for the current input value. You can use this to determine the points that are being used for the current interpolation calculation. WorkingData.Point[NextXIndex-1].x < Input WorkingData.Point[NextXIndex].x Example: If the value of the Input parameter is between WorkingData.Point[3].x and WorkingData.Point[4].x, the NextXIndex tag has the value 4. If the value of the Input parameter is less than WorkingData.Point[1].x, the NextXIndex tag has the value 1. If the value of the Input parameter is greater than WorkingData.Point[WorkingData.NumberOfUsedPoints].x and is thus greater than the last x-value of the polyline, the NextXIndex tag has the value of the WorkingData.NumberOfUsedPoints + 1 tag. Consequently, maximum permissible value of the NextXIndex tag is 51. PID control 532 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline 9.5.4 Input parameters of Polyline Parameter Data type Default Description Input REAL 0.0 Input value SubstituteOutput REAL 0.0 SubstituteOutput is used as the substitute output value when * Reset = TRUE or * An error with error message ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 prevents correct calculation of the interpolation result, and the configured value of ErrorMode is 1 . Validate BOOL FALSE If Validate is set to TRUE, the polyline data in UserData is checked for validity and transferred to WorkingData. ErrorAck BOOL FALSE Deletes the error messages * Edge FALSE -> TRUE ErrorBits is reset Reset BOOL FALSE Performs a restart of the instruction * Edge FALSE -> TRUE ErrorBits is reset. 9.5.5 * As long as Reset is set to TRUE, the substitute output value SubstituteOutput is output at the output. * As long as Reset is set to FALSE, the interpolation calculation is performed. Output parameters of Polyline Parameter Data type Default Description Output REAL 0.0 Output value Error BOOL FALSE When Error is set to TRUE, at least one error is currently pending. ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The ErrorBits parameter (Page 536) shows which error messages are pending. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset at a positive edge at Reset or ErrorAck . PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 533 Instructions 9.5 Polyline 9.5.6 Static tags of Polyline Tag Data type Default Description UserData AuxFct _PointTable - Input are for polyline data The polyline data in the UserData structure can be edited. Changes in this structure do not affect the interpolation calculation until the check and duplication of the data to the WorkingData structure is initiated. UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints INT 0 Number of points used for the interpolation calculation Permissible value range: 2 to 50 UserData.Point Array[1..50] of AuxFct_Point - Points for the interpolation calculation UserData.Point[i] AuxFct_Point - Point for the interpolation calculation UserData.Point[i].x REAL 0.0 x-value of the point The array with 50 elements of data type AuxFct_Point contains the value pairs of the points. An element with index "i" from the "Point" array. Permissible value range: Point[i].x < Point[i+1].x UserData.Point[i].y REAL 0.0 y-value of the point WorkingData AuxFct _PointTable - Display area of the currently active polyline data INT 0 WorkingData.NumberOfUsedPoints The polyline data in the WorkingData structure cannot be edited. It is used for the interpolation calculation. Number of points used for the interpolation calculation Permissible value range: 2 to 50 WorkingData.Point Array[1..50] of AuxFct_Point - Points for the interpolation calculation WorkingData.Point[i] AuxFct_Point - Point for the interpolation calculation WorkingData.Point[i].x REAL 0.0 x-value of the point WorkingData.Point[i].y REAL 0.0 y-value of the point ErrorMode INT 0 Selection of the substitute output value following an error The array with 50 elements of type AuxFct_Point contains the value pairs of the points. An element with index "i" from the "Point" array. Permissible value range: Point[i].x < Point[i+1].x * 0 = Input * 1 = SubstituteOutput * 2 = Last valid output value Permissible value range: 0 to 2 PID control 534 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline Tag Data type Default Description OutOfRangeMode INT 0 Selection of the output value if the input value lies outside the defined x-values * 0 = Maintain slope * 1 = y-value of the first/last point Permissible value range: 0 to 1 NextXIndex INT 2 Index of the next x-value Used for monitoring the index of the points that are being used for the current interpolation calculation. The following condition applies: WorkingData.Point[NextXIndex-1].x < Input WorkingData.Point[NextXIndex].x Do not change this value manually. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 535 Instructions 9.5 Polyline 9.5.7 ErrorBits parameter If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the ErrorBits are displayed with binary addition. The display of ErrorBits = 16#0000_0003, for example, indicates that the errors 16#0000_0001 and 16#0000_0002 are pending simultaneously. For Polyline the errors output at the ErrorBits parameter are divided into two categories: Errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 Errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 Errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 If one or more errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 are pending, enable output ENO is not changed. The output value can be determined as follows despite this error: Interpolation calculation when Reset = FALSE. or Output of SubstituteOutput when Reset = TRUE. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000_0000 No error is pending. 0000_0001 The Output parameter was limited to -3.402823e+38 or +3.402823e+38. If the interpolation value is output at the output (Reset = FALSE and ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000), check the following tags used in the interpolation calculation: * Input * WorkingData.Point[i].x * WorkingData.Point[i].y If a substitute output value is output at the Output parameter when Reset = FALSE and ErrorBits 16#0001_0000, check the Input or SubstituteOutput parameter, depending on the value set at the ErrorMode tag. If Reset = TRUE, check the SubstituteOutput parameter. If the Output parameter is no longer limited, the error that is stored at the Error parameter is cleared. PID control 536 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000_0002 One or more tags in the UserData structure have invalid values but valid polyline data is available in the WorkingData structure. The polyline data in the UserData structure was checked because the Validate parameter is set to TRUE while the Reset parameter is simultaneously set to FALSE. The polyline data in the UserData structure is not transferred to the WorkingData structure so that the changes made in the UserData structure will not become effective. The FB Polyline continues the interpolation calculation with the unchanged values in the WorkingData structure. Ensure that the following conditions are met when the Validate parameter is set to TRUE: 1. 2 UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 50 2. UserData.Point[j].x < UserData.Point[j+1].x with index j = 1..(UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints - 1) 3. -3.402823e+38 UserData.Point[i].x 3.402823e+38 with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 4. -3.402823e+38 UserData.Point[i].y 3.402823e+38 with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 5. UserData.Point[i].x and UserData.Point[i].y are valid REAL values ( NaN) with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints The error bit at the Error parameter is deleted when * The Validate parameter is set to FALSE. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE or * The Validate parameter is set to TRUE while the Reset parameter is set to FALSE and the five conditions for UserData named above are met. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 537 Instructions 9.5 Polyline Errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 If one or more errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 are pending, the output value cannot be determined as expected. The substitute output value is output instead. Enable output ENO is set to FALSE. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0001_0000 The SubstituteOutput or Input parameter that is being used as the output value has no valid REAL value. The output is set to 0.0. Possible error scenarios: * The Reset parameter is set to FALSE and an error with ErrorBits 16#0002_0000 is pending that prevents the interpolation calculation, and - the Input parameter has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 0. - the SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 1. * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE while the SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The SubstituteOutput or Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value. or * The SubstituteOutput or Input parameter is no longer being used as the output value. If the SubstituteOutput or Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value, FB Polyline uses the SubstituteOutput or Input parameter again as the output value. 0002_0000 The Input parameter has no valid REAL value, while the interpolation calculation is to be performed (Reset = FALSE). The Output parameter is assigned the substitute output value that you configure at the ErrorMode tag. Note that the output value is set to 0.0 when tag ErrorMode = 0 is set because the value at the Input parameter is not being used as a substitute output value in this case. The NextXIndex tag is not updated as long as the Input parameter has an invalid REAL value The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. If the Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value and the Reset parameter is set to FALSE, FB Polyline outputs the interpolation value again at the output. PID control 538 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.5 Polyline ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0004_0000 The interpolation calculation yields an invalid REAL value for the Output parameter. Check the REAL values in the WorkingData structure for validity. The Output parameter is assigned the substitute output value that you configure at the ErrorMode tag. If you want to change the polyline data, first edit the UserData structure and then set parameter Validate = TRUE. Do not manually change the data in WorkingData structure. The NextXIndex tag can have an invalid value as long as this error is pending. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The interpolation calculation yields valid values for the Output parameter again. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. If the interpolation calculation yields valid REAL values again and parameter Reset = FALSE is set, FB Polyline outputs the interpolation value again at the output. 0008_0000 One or more tags in the UserData structure have invalid values while no valid polyline data is available in the WorkingData structure. The polyline data in the UserData structure were checked because * The Validate parameter is set to TRUE while the Reset parameter is set to FALSE. or When Polyline is executed for the first time after the change of operating state of the CPU from RUN to STOP , the Reset parameter is set to FALSE . The polyline data in the UserData structure is not transferred to the WorkingData structure so that the values in the UserData structure will not become effective. FB Polyline does not output the interpolation value at the Output parameter because no valid polyline data is contained in the WorkingData structure. The Output parameter is assigned the substitute output value that is configure at the ErrorMode tag. * Ensure that the following conditions are met when the Validate parameter is set to TRUE or when the Reset parameter is set to FALSE while Polyline is being executed for the first time after the change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN : 1. 2 UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 50 2. UserData.Point[j].x < UserData.Point[j+1].x with index j = 1..(UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints - 1) 3. -3.402823e+38 UserData.Point[i].x 3.402823e+38 with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 4. -3.402823e+38 UserData.Point[i].y 3.402823e+38 with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints 5. UserData.Point[i].x and UserData.Point[i].y are valid REAL values ( NaN) with index i = 1..UserData.NumberOfUsedPoints PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 539 Instructions 9.5 Polyline ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0008_0000 Note that all tags in the UserData and WorkingData structures are not retentive. These tags are initialized with the start values after each change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The Validate parameter is set to TRUE while the Reset parameter is set to FALSE and the five conditions for UserData named above are met. or * When Polyline is executed for the first time after the change of operating state of the CPU from STOP to RUN, the Reset parameter is set to FALSE and the five conditions for UserData named above are met. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. If the five conditions for UserData named above are met and the following conditions are met, FB Polyline outputs the interpolation value at the output again. * The Validate parameter is set to TRUE while the Reset parameter is set to FALSE. or * When Polyline is executed for the first time after the change of operating state of the CPU from RUN to STOP, the Reset parameter is set to FALSE. PID control 540 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.6 SplitRange 9.6 SplitRange 9.6.1 Compatibility with CPU and FW The following table shows which version of SplitRange can be used on which CPU: 9.6.2 CPU FW SplitRange S7-1200 V4.2 or higher V1.0 S7-1500 V2.0 or higher V1.0 SplitRange description Description The SplitRange instruction converts the input value into an output value. The input value is located in the value range that is limited by Points.x1 and Points.x2. The output value is located in the value range that is limited by Points.y1 and Points.y2. The following figure shows the relevant characteristic of an example configuration of the SplitRange instruction: Use SplitRange when you need to control a process that is influenced by multiple actuators. SplitRange splits the output value range of the PID controller into multiple subranges. Assign a subrange to each actuator. The user program calls the block once per subrange. The input value of each SplitRange instance is connected to the output value of the PID controller. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 541 Instructions 9.6 SplitRange The figure below shows an example of a control loop with two SplitRange instances and two actuators: Validity of the SplitRange data The value pairs in the Points structure define the input and output value range of SplitRange. The two value pairs are located in the static area of the block SplitRange. SplitRange checks whether the following conditions are met for each call so that valid values are available for the calculation of the output value: Points.x1 < Points.x2 Points.x1, Points.y1, Points.x2 and Points.y2 are within the permitted value range from 3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38 Points.x1, Points.y1, Points.x2 and Points.y2 are valid REAL values ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) If one or more of these conditions are not met, correct calculation of the output value is not possible. A corresponding error message is output at the ErrorBits parameter. The preassignment of the x and y values with 0.0 does not represent a valid configuration. Change the tags to valid values so that the tags can be used for the calculation of the output value. Enable behavior EN/ENO If one of the following conditions is met, enable output ENO is set to FALSE. Enable input EN is set to TRUE and the Output parameter is specified by a substitute output value in case of error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000. Enable input EN is set to FALSE. If enable input EN is set to TRUE and the Output parameter can be determined as follows, enable output ENO is set to TRUE: With the valid calculation of the output value with Reset = FALSE. or With valid SubstituteOutput parameter when Reset = TRUE. PID control 542 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.6 SplitRange Call SplitRange is called as a single-instance DB in an OB. In an FB, SplitRange can be called as both a single-instance DB and a multi-instance DB and as a parameter-instance DB. When the instruction is called, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You assign the SplitRange parameters directly in the instance DB and commission SplitRange using a watch table of the user program in the CPU or HMI. Startup The tags in the static area of SplitRange are not retentive. These tags are initialized with the start values after each operating state transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN. If you change the actual values in the Points structure in online mode and these values are to be retained after the operating state transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN, back up these values in the start values of the data block. Reaction to error The SplitRange instruction detects different errors that may occur during calculation of the output value. The result of the calculation can be output at the output despite a pending error. If an error prevents correct calculation of the output value, a substitute output value is output at the output. You specify the substitute output value that is output if an error occurs that prevents correct calculation of the output value as follows at the ErrorMode tag: If the ErrorMode tag is set to 0, SplitRange outputs the input value at the Input parameter. If the ErrorMode tag is set to 1, SplitRange outputs the substitute output value. You assign the substitute output value at the SubstituteOutput parameter. If the ErrorMode tag is set to 2, SplitRange outputs the last valid output value at the Output parameter. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error is set to FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset only by a positive edge at the Reset or ErrorAck parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 543 Instructions 9.6 SplitRange 9.6.3 SplitRange input parameters Parameter Data type Default Description Input REAL 0.0 Input value SubstituteOutput REAL 0.0 SubstituteOutput is used as the substitute output value when * Reset = TRUE or * ErrorAck BOOL FALSE An error with error message ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 prevents correct calculation of the output value, and the configured value of ErrorMode is 1. Deletes the error messages * Edge FALSE -> TRUE ErrorBits is reset Reset BOOL FALSE Performs a restart of the instruction * Edge FALSE -> TRUE * As long as Reset is set to TRUE, the substitute output value SubstituteOutput is output at the output. * As long as Reset is set to FALSE, the calculation of the output value is performed. ErrorBits is reset. 9.6.4 Parameter SplitRange output parameters Data type Default Description Output REAL 0.0 Output value ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The ErrorBits parameter (Page 546) shows which error messages are pending. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset at a positive edge at Reset or ErrorAck . Error BOOL FALSE When Error is set to TRUE, at least one error is currently pending. PID control 544 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.6 SplitRange 9.6.5 SplitRange static tags Tag Data type Points AuxFct_SplitRan ge_Points Default Points data Points.x1 REAL x-value of point 1 0.0 Description Permissible value range: Points.x1 < Points.x2 Points.y1 REAL 0.0 y-value of point 1 Points.x2 REAL 0.0 x-value of point 2 Permissible value range: Points.x1 < Points.x2 Points.y2 REAL 0.0 y-value of point 2 ErrorMode INT 0 Selection of the substitute output value following an error * 0 = Input * 1 = SubstituteOutput * 2 = Last valid output value Permissible value range: 0 to 2 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 545 Instructions 9.6 SplitRange 9.6.6 ErrorBits parameter If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the ErrorBits are displayed with binary addition. The display of ErrorBits = 16#0000_0003, for example, indicates that the errors 16#0000_0001 and 16#0000_0002 are pending simultaneously. For SplitRange, the errors output at the ErrorBits parameter are divided into two categories: Errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 Errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 Errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 If one or more errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 are pending, enable output ENO is not changed. The output value can be determined as follows despite this error: Calculation of output value based on the input value and the value pairs in the Points structure when Reset = FALSE. Or Output of SubstituteOutput when Reset = TRUE. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000_0000 No error is pending. 0000_0001 The Output parameter was limited to -3.402823e+38 or +3.402823e+38. If a substitute output value is output at the Output parameter when Reset = FALSE and ErrorBits 16#0001_0000, check the Input or SubstituteOutput parameter, depending on the value set at the ErrorMode tag. If Reset = TRUE, check the SubstituteOutput parameter. If the Output parameter is no longer limited, the error that is stored at the Error parameter is cleared. PID control 546 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.6 SplitRange Errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 If one or more errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 are pending, the output value cannot be determined as expected. The substitute output value is output instead. Enable output ENO is set to FALSE. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0001_0000 The SubstituteOutput or Input parameter that is being used as the output value has no valid REAL value. The output is set to 0.0. Possible error scenarios: * The Reset parameter is set to FALSE and an error with ErrorBits 16#0002_0000 is pending that prevents the calculation of the output value, and - the Input parameter has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 0. - the SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 1. * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE while the SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The SubstituteOutput or Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value. or * The SubstituteOutput or Input parameter is no longer being used as the output value. When the SubstituteOutput or Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value, FB SplitRange uses the SubstituteOutput or Input parameter again as the output value. 0002_0000 The Input parameter has no valid REAL value while the calculation of the output value is being performed (Reset = FALSE). The Output parameter is assigned the substitute output value that you configure at the ErrorMode tag. Note that the output value is set to 0.0 when tag ErrorMode = 0 is set because the value at the Input parameter is not being used as a substitute output value in this case. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. When the Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value and the Reset parameter is set to FALSE, FB SplitRange outputs the calculated output value again at the output. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 547 Instructions 9.6 SplitRange ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0004_0000 One or more tags in the Points structure have invalid values. Or the calculation of the output value yields an invalid REAL value for the Output parameter. The Output parameter is assigned the substitute output value that you configure at the ErrorMode tag. Ensure that the following conditions are met: 1. Points.x1 < Points.x2 2. Points.x1, Points.y1, Points.x2 and Points.y2 are within the permitted value range from 3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38 3. Points.x1, Points.y1, Points.x2 and Points.y2 are valid REAL values ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) Note that all tags in the Points structure are not retentive. These tags are initialized with the start values after each operating state transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The three conditions listed above are met for the values in the Points structure. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. When the three conditions listed above are met for the values in the Points structure and the Reset = FALSE parameter is set, FB SplitRange outputs the calculated output value again at the output. PID control 548 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction 9.7 RampFunction 9.7.1 Compatibility with CPU and FW The following table shows which version of RampFunction can be used on which CPU: 9.7.2 CPU FW RampFunction S7-1200 V4.2 or higher V1.0 S7-1500 V2.0 or higher V1.0 RampFunction description Description The RampFunction instruction limits the slew rate of a signal. RampFunction outputs a signal jump at the input as ramp function of the output value. Use the RampFunction to prevent signal jumps, for example, in the following cases: Between setpoint source and setpoint input of the controller to achieve a smoother response without influencing the disturbance reaction. Between the controller output and the actuator input to preserve the actuator, for example, a motor with gears or the process. The following limits can be set for the slew rate: Increasing slew rate in positive value range Decreasing slew rate in positive value range Increasing slew rate in negative value range Decreasing slew rate in negative value range In addition, the RampFunction instruction limits the output value to the high and low limit. When the slew rate limit or the low or high limit are reached, RampFunction sets the associated output bit to TRUE. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 549 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Function chart The following figure shows the RampFunction instruction and a function chart as an example: PID control 550 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Call RampFunction is called as a single-instance DB in an OB. In an FB, RampFunction can be called as both a single-instance DB and a multi-instance DB and as a parameter-instance DB. When the instruction is called, no technology object is created. No parameter assignment interface or commissioning interface is available. You assign the RampFunction parameters directly in the instance DB and commission RampFunction using a watch table of the user program in the CPU or HMI. Startup The tags in the static area of RampFunction are not retentive. These tags are initialized with the start values after each operating state transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN. If you change the actual values of the limits in online mode and these values are to be retained after the operating state transition of the CPU, back up these values in the start values of the data block. You specify the initialization value for the Output parameter at the StartMode tag. The initialization value is output at the Output parameter during the first call of RampFunction after the operating state transition of the CPU. For subsequent calls, RampFunction calculates the output value, starting from this initialization value, based on the input value and the slew rate limits. The following table shows the dependency between the StartMode tag and the Output parameter. The values in the Output column are output at the Output parameter after the operating state transition of the CPU. StartMode Output 0 Value of the Input parameter 1 Value of the SubstituteOutput parameter 2 Remains unchanged. Output parameter is retentive. Example PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 551 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction StartMode Output 3 0.0 4 Value of the LowerLimit tag 5 Value of the UpperLimit tag Example The following applies in addition for all values of the StartMode tag: When the values of the UpperLimit and LowerLimit tags are valid, the initialization value is limited to the value range of these tags. Only then is the initialization value output at the Output parameter. If the initialization value is invalid, the substitute output value is output at the Output parameter at the first call of the instruction after an operating state transition of the CPU. You configure the substitute output value at the ErrorMode tag. The substitute output value is limited by the value range of the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit. For subsequent calls, the instruction calculates the output value starting from this substitute output value. The StartMode tag is only effective when the Reset = FALSE parameter is set at the first call of the instruction. If the Reset = TRUE parameter is set, the value of the SubstituteOutput parameter is output at the Output parameter. PID control 552 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Reaction to error The RampFunction instruction detects different errors that may occur during calculation of the output value. The result of this calculation can be output at the output despite a pending error. If an error prevents correct calculation of the output value, a substitute output value is output at the output. You specify the substitute output value that is output if an error occurs that prevents correct calculation of the output value at the ErrorMode tag. The following table shows the dependency between the ErrorMode tag and the substitute output value that is output by the RampFunction at the Output parameter: ErrorMode Output 0 Value of the Input parameter 1 Value of the SubstituteOutput parameter 2 The last valid output value at the Output parameter 3 0.0 4 Value of the LowerLimit tag 5 Value of the UpperLimit tag The following applies in addition for all values of the ErrorMode tag: If the substitute output value is not a valid REAL value, 0.0 is output as output value. When the values of the UpperLimit and LowerLimit tags are valid, the substitute output value is limited to the value range of these tags. Only then is the substitute output value output at the Output parameter. If an error is pending that prevents correct calculation of the output value, RampFunction changes at the Output parameter from the calculated output value to the substitute output value. A jump of the output value can occur, depending on the value of the ErrorMode tag. The Error parameter indicates if an error is pending. When the error is no longer pending, Error is set to FALSE. The ErrorBits parameter shows which errors have occurred. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset only by a positive edge at the Reset or ErrorAck parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 553 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction 9.7.3 RampFunction mode of operation Limiting the slew rate You can configure four limits for the slew rate of the input signal. The following factors determine which limit is currently in effect: Sign of the output value at the Output parameter Direction in which the amount of the output value changes at the Output parameter The following table shows the effective tags for the slew rate limit depending on the Output parameter: Output Effective tag Output 0 and |Output| rising PositiveRisingSlewRate Output 0 and |Output| falling PositiveFallingSlewRate Output < 0 and |Output| rising NegativeRisingSlewRate Output < 0 and |Output| falling NegativeFallingSlewRate The amount of the slew rate limits defines the maximum change of the output value per second. Example: The following scenario applies for the example: PositiveRisingSlewRate = 10.0 Call time of RampFunction = 0.1 s Input > Output 0.0 Result: The output value Output increases by 1.0 per call (10.0 per second) until the value at the Input parameter has been reached. To disable the slew rate limit for one or more areas, set the corresponding tag to the value 3.402823e+38. When the output value Output is currently limited by a slew rate limit, RampFunction sets the associated output bit to TRUE: PositiveRisingSlewRate_Active PositiveFallingSlewRate_Active NegativeRisingSlewRate_Active NegativeFallingSlewRate_Active When the Reset parameter is set to TRUE, the slew rate limits are not in effect. This means jumps at the SubstituteOutput parameter result in jumps at the Output parameter. PID control 554 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction RampFunction checks whether the following conditions for the tags PositiveRisingSlewRate, PositiveFallingSlewRate, NegativeRisingSlewRate and NegativeFallingSlewRate are met for each call: Values are within the permitted value range greater than 0.0 up to 3.402823e+38 Values are valid REAL values ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) If one or more conditions are not met, the substitute output value is output at the Output parameter. A corresponding error message is output at the ErrorBits parameter. Limiting the output value The output value Output is always limited to the value range of the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit as long as these tags have valid values. When the output value Output is currently limited by this value range, RampFunction sets the associated output bit to TRUE: UpperLimit_Active LowerLimit_Active The limit of the output value has a higher priority than the limit of the slew rate. Changes of the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit therefore result in jumps of the output value Output, if this is required to observe the limits of the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit. The limiting of the slew rate is not taken into account in this case. Example: If the UpperLimit is reduced from 100.0 to 80.0 while the values of the parameters Input and Output are 90.0, the output value Output jumps to 80.0. The output value Output jumps to 80.0 regardless whether or not it violates the configured limit for the slew rate. RampFunction checks whether the following conditions are met for each call: LowerLimit < UpperLimit LowerLimit and UpperLimit are within the permitted value range from -3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38 LowerLimit and UpperLimit are valid REAL values ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) If one or more conditions are not met, the substitute output value is output at the Output parameter. A corresponding error message is output at the ErrorBits parameter. In addition, RampFunction checks for each call whether the output value Output has the permitted value range of a REAL data type from -3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38. If the calculation of the output value yields an invalid REAL value, the substitute output value is output at the Output parameter. You configure the substitute output value at the ErrorMode tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 555 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Enable behavior EN/ENO If one of the following conditions is met, enable output ENO is set to FALSE. Enable input EN is set to TRUE and the Output parameter is specified by a substitute output value in case of error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000. Enable input EN is set to FALSE. If enable input EN is set to TRUE and the Output parameter can be determined as follows, enable output ENO is set to TRUE: With the signal limiting the slew rate at Reset = FALSE. or With valid SubstituteOutput parameter when Reset = TRUE. Measuring the cycle time automatically To calculate the slew rate of the output value RampFunction needs the time that has expired since the last call of RampFunction. The cycle time by default is measured automatically and output as of the second call at the CycleTime.Value tag. RampFunction measures the cycle time for each call of the instruction and can therefore be used in non-equidistant call cycles, e.g. in OB1. If measurement of the cycle time has an invalid result, RampFunction calculates the current output value with the last valid cycle time. In addition, RampFunction outputs an error message at the ErrorBits parameter. When you disable automatic measurement of the cycle time by setting the tag CycleTime.EnableMeasurement = FALSE, you must enter the cycle time manually at the CycleTime.Value tag. RampFunction checks the CycleTime.Value tag for validity at each call. Automatic measurement of the cycle time with breakpoints When breakpoints are active between two calls of RampFunction, automatic measurement of the cycle time results in the actual time that has expired between two calls. When one breakpoint is active, the CPU is in HOLD operating state. Note The active breakpoints extend the time period between two calls of RampFunction. The longer the time period between two calls, the greater the maximum permitted change of the output value at the Output parameter. Example: The following scenario applies for the example: PositiveRisingSlewRate = 10.0 Call time of RampFunction = 0.1 s Input > Output 0.0 PID control 556 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Result without breakpoints: The output value Output increases by 1.0 per call until the value at the Input parameter has been reached. Result with an active breakpoint of ten seconds: With the next call, the output value Output increases by 100.0. If you do not need the calculation of the output value based on the actual time with active breakpoints, follow these steps: Disable automatic measurement of the cycle times by setting the tag CycleTime.EnableMeasurement = FALSE. Enter the cycle time manually at the CycleTime.Value tag. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 557 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction 9.7.4 RampFunction input parameters Parameter Data type Default Description Input REAL 0.0 Input value SubstituteOutput REAL 0.0 SubstituteOutput is used as the substitute output value when * Reset = TRUE or * ErrorAck BOOL FALSE An error with error message ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 prevents correct calculation of the output value, and the configured value of ErrorMode is 1. Deletes the error messages * Edge FALSE -> TRUE ErrorBits is reset Reset BOOL FALSE Performs a restart of the instruction * Edge FALSE -> TRUE * As long as Reset is set to TRUE, the substitute output value SubstituteOutput is output at the output. * As long as Reset is set to FALSE, the calculation of the output value is performed. ErrorBits is reset. 9.7.5 RampFunction output parameters Parameter Data type Default Description Output REAL 0.0 Output value PositiveRisingSlewRate_Active BOOL FALSE When PositiveRisingSlewRate_Active = TRUE, the output value is currently limited by PositiveRisingSlewRate . PositiveFallingSlewRate_Active BOOL FALSE When PositiveFallingSlewRate_Active = TRUE, the output value is currently limited by PositiveFallingSlewRate. NegativeRisingSlewRate_Active BOOL FALSE When NegativeRisingSlewRate_Active = TRUE, the output value is currently limited by NegativeRisingSlewRate. NegativeFallingSlewRate_Active BOOL FALSE When NegativeFallingSlewRate_Active = TRUE, the output value is currently limited by NegativeFallingSlewRate. UpperLimit_Active BOOL FALSE When UpperLimit_Active = TRUE, the output value is currently limited by UpperLimit. LowerLimit_Active BOOL FALSE When LowerLimit_Active = TRUE, the output value is currently limited by LowerLimit. ErrorBits DWORD DW#16#0 The ErrorBits parameter (Page 561) shows which error messages are pending. ErrorBits is retentive and is reset at a positive edge at Reset or ErrorAck . Error BOOL FALSE When Error = TRUE, at least one error is currently pending. PID control 558 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction 9.7.6 RampFunction static tags Tag Data type Default Description PositiveRisingSlewRate REAL 10.0 Limit for slew rate of the output value per second in positive range with rising amount With PositiveRisingSlewRate = 3.402823e+38, this slew rate limit is disabled. Permissible value range: > 0.0 PositiveFallingSlewRate REAL 10.0 Limit for slew rate of the output value per second in positive range with falling amount With PositiveFallingSlewRate = 3.402823e+38, this slew rate limit is disabled. Permissible value range: > 0.0 NegativeRisingSlewRate REAL 10.0 Limit for slew rate of the output value per second in negative range with rising amount With NegativeRisingSlewRate = 3.402823e+38, this slew rate limit is disabled. Permissible value range: > 0.0 NegativeFallingSlewRate REAL 10.0 Limit for slew rate of the output value per second in negative range with falling amount With NegativeFallingSlewRate = 3.402823e+38, this slew rate limit is disabled. Permissible value range: > 0.0 UpperLimit REAL 100.0 High limit of output value Permissible value range: > LowerLimit LowerLimit REAL 0.0 Low limit of output value Permissible value range: < UpperLimit ErrorMode INT 2 Selection of the substitute output value following an error * 0 = Input * 1 = SubstituteOutput * 2 = Last valid output value * 3 = 0.0 * 4 = LowerLimit * 5 = UpperLimit Permissible value range: 0 to 5 StartMode INT 2 Selecting the output value for the first call of the instruction * 0 = Input * 1 = SubstituteOutput * 2 = Last output value * 3 = 0.0 * 4 = LowerLimit * 5 = UpperLimit Permissible value range: 0 to 5 CycleTime AuxFct _CycleTime - Cycle time data PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 559 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Tag Data type Default Description CycleTime.Value REAL 0.1 Time interval between two calls of the instruction in seconds CycleTime .EnableMeasurement BOOL TRUE Enable automatic measurement of the cycle time Permissible value range: > 0.0 PID control 560 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction 9.7.7 ErrorBits parameter If several errors are pending simultaneously, the values of the ErrorBits are displayed with binary addition. The display of ErrorBits = 16#0000_0003, for example, indicates that the errors 16#0000_0001 and 16#0000_0002 are pending simultaneously. The RampFunction instruction divides errors that are output at the ErrorBits parameter in two categories: Errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 Errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 Errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 If one or more errors with error messages ErrorBits < 16#0001_0000 are pending, enable output ENO is not changed. The output value can be determined as follows despite this error: Calculation of output value based on the input value and the limits for the slew rate when Reset = FALSE. or Output of SubstituteOutput when Reset = TRUE. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0000_0000 No error is pending. 0000_0002 The measurement of the cycle time yields in an invalid value while the output value is being calculated (Reset = FALSE). If a valid value of the cycle time has already been measured, RampFunction calculates the output value based on the last value of the CycleTime.Value tag. If no valid value of the cycle time was previously measured, RampFunction still outputs the output value at the Output parameter that is configured with the StartMode tag. The error bit at the Error parameter is deleted when * The measurement of the cycle time yields a valid value or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 561 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction Errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 If one or more errors with error messages ErrorBits 16#0001_0000 are pending, the output value cannot be calculated as expected. The substitute output value is output instead. Enable output ENO is set to FALSE. The output value limit remains active as long as the tags LowerLimit and UpperLimit have valid values. The slew rate limit is no longer active. Jumps at the output value can occur in one of the following scenarios: When the error is detected, RampFunction switches from the calculated output value to the replacement output value. Whether a jump occurs depends on the value of the tag ErrorMode. The substitute output value is changed while it is active. ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0001_0000 The SubstituteOutput or a different tag that is being used as output value has no valid REAL value. The output value at the Output parameter is therefore set to 0.0 and limited by the tags LowerLimit and UpperLimit. Possible error scenarios: * The Reset parameter is set to FALSE and an error with ErrorBits 16#0002_0000 is pending that prevents the calculation of the output value, and - the Input parameter has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 0. - the SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 1. - the LowerLimit tag has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode= 4. - the UpperLimit tag has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode= 5. * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE while the SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The SubstituteOutput, Input, LowerLimit or UpperLimit parameter is changed to a valid REAL value. or The SubstituteOutput, Input, LowerLimit or UpperLimit parameter is no longer being used as the output value. When the SubstituteOutput, Input, LowerLimit or UpperLimit parameter is changed to a valid REAL value, RampFunction outputs the value of this parameter again as the output value. * 0002_0000 The Input parameter has no valid REAL value while the calculation of the output value is being performed (Reset = FALSE). The substitute output value is output at the Output parameter that is configured at the ErrorMode tag and is limited by the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit. Note that the output value is set to 0.0 when tag ErrorMode = 0 is set because the value at the Input parameter is not being used as a substitute output value in this case. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. When the Input parameter is changed to a valid REAL value and the Reset parameter is set to FALSE, RampFunction outputs the calculated output value again at the Output parameter. PID control 562 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0004_0000 The calculation of the output value yields an invalid REAL value at the Output parameter. The substitute output value is output at the Output parameter that is configured at the ErrorMode tag and is limited by the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The calculation of the output value outputs valid values at the Output parameter again. or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. When the calculation of the output value yields valid REAL values again and the Reset parameter is set to FALSE, RampFunction outputs the calculated output value again at the Output parameter. 0008_0000 The LowerLimit or UpperLimit tag has an invalid value. The following value is output at the Output parameter, depending on the Reset parameter: * Reset = FALSE The substitute output value that is configured with the ErrorMode tag is output at the Output parameter. * Reset = TRUE The value of the SubstituteOutput parameter is output at the Output parameter. In both cases, the Ouput parameter is limited to the value range of the REAL data type from 3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38. Ensure that the following conditions are met: 1. LowerLimit < UpperLimit 2. LowerLimit and UpperLimit are within the permitted value range from -3.402823e+38 to 3.402823e+38 3. LowerLimit and UpperLimit are valid REAL values ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) Note that the output value is set to 0.0 at the Output parameter when Reset = FALSE and * the LowerLimit tag has no valid REAL value, the tag ErrorMode = 4 or * the UpperLimit tag has no valid REAL value, then tag ErrorMode = 5. In this case, the values of the tags LowerLimit and UpperLimit are not output as substitute output values at the Output parameter because they are invalid. When the three conditions listed above for the LowerLimit and UpperLimit tags are met, the following applies: * The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared. * Enable output ENO is set to TRUE again. * RampFunction outputs the output value at the Output parameter again with - Reset = FALSE, by calculating and limiting the output value. - Reset = TRUE due to the limited value at the SubstituteOutput. parameter. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 563 Instructions 9.7 RampFunction ErrorBits (DW#16#...) Description 0010_0000 At least one of the following parameters has invalid values while the calculation of the output value is being performed (Reset = FALSE): 1. PositiveRisingSlewRate 2. PositiveFallingSlewRate 3. NegativeRisingSlewRate 4. NegativeFallingSlewRate The substitute output value is output at the Output parameter that is configured at the ErrorMode tag and is limited by the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit. Ensure that the following conditions are met for all four parameters listed above: * The values are within the permitted value range greater than 0.0 up to 3.402823e+38 * The values are valid REAL values ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * The conditions listed above are met for the four parameters or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. When the conditions listed above are met for the four parameters and Reset is set to FALSE, RampFunction outputs the calculated output value at the Output parameter again. 0020_0000 The tag (configured with StartMode) for the initialization of the Output parameter at the first call of the instruction does not have a valid REAL value. The substitute output value is output with the first call of the instruction at the Output parameter that is configured at the ErrorMode tag and is limited by the tags LowerLimit and UpperLimit. For subsequent calls, RampFunction calculates the output value starting from this substitute output value. This error occurs at the first call of the instruction after the operating state transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN when Reset = FALSE and * The SubstituteOutput parameter has no valid REAL value with StartMode= 1. * The Output parameter has no valid REAL value with StartMode = 2. The following applies for the subsequent calls: 0040_0000 * The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again. * RampFunction outputs the calculated output value at the Output parameter again. The CycleTime.Value tag has an invalid value, while the calculation of the output value is being performed (Reset = FALSE). The substitute output value is output at the Output parameter that is configured at the ErrorMode tag and is limited by the tags UpperLimit and LowerLimit. Ensure that the following conditions are met: * 0.0 < CycleTime.Value < 3.402823e+38 * CycleTime.Value is a valid REAL value ( NaN e.g. 16#7FFF_FFFF) To automatically calculate the value of the CycleTime.Value tag, set the CycleTime.EnableMeasurement tag to TRUE. The error bit at the Error parameter is cleared and enable output ENO is set to TRUE again, when * the conditions listed above are met for the CycleTime.Value tag or * The Reset parameter is set to TRUE. When the conditions listed above are met for the CycleTime.Value tag and Reset is set to FALSE, RampFunction outputs the calculated output value at the Output parameter again. PID control 564 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Instructions 9.7 RampFunction PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 565 A Service & Support Unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle For machine manufacturers, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry. To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant - from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization. Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drive technology from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants. You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees - even across continents - ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas. Online Support The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service & Support at any time and from any location in the world. You can find Online Support at the following address on the Internet. PID control 566 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Service & Support Technical Consulting Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis, definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the creation of the automation solution. Technical Support Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems. You can find Technical Support at the following address on the Internet. Training Extend your competitive edge - through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer. You can find the training courses at the following address on the Internet. Engineering Support Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project. Field Service Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance - to ensure that your machines and plants are always available. Spare parts In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains. Repairs Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to reduce both to a minimum - with our worldwide repair facilities. Optimization During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing productivity or reducing costs. To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services. PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 567 Service & Support Modernization You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization - with comprehensive services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning. Service programs Our service programs are select service packages for an automation and drives system or product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems. The services of a service program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately. Examples of service programs: Service contracts Plant IT Security Services Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence SIMATIC Remote Support Services Benefits at a glance: Reduced downtimes for increased productivity Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks Comprehensive service from a single source, fewer interfaces and greater expertise Contact At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training, service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products from Industry Automation and Drive Technologies. You can find your personal contact in our contacts database on the Internet. PID control 568 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD Index C CONT_C Block diagram, 469 Input parameters, 470 Mode of operation, 467 Output parameters, 472 CONT_S Block diagram, 475 Input parameters, 476 Instruction, 473 Mode of operation, 474 Output parameters, 477 P PID_3Step In/out parameters, 335 Input parameters, 331, 365 Instruction, 321, 357 Output parameters, 333, 367 Static tags, 369 PID_Compact In/out parameters, 267 Input parameters, 264, 301 Instruction, 297 Output parameters, 266, 302 Static tags, 303 PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode tag, 458 Cascade, 409 Cascading, 195 ErrorBits parameter, 455 In/out parameters, 409 Input parameters, 405 Mode, 409 Multi-zone applications, 203 Operating principle, 399 Output parameters, 407 PID_Temp state and mode parameters, 446 PwmPeriode, 461 Tag Warning, 460 PULSEGEN Input parameters, 487 Output parameters, 488 PULSEGEN Instruction, 478 Mode of operation, 479 S Software controller Configuring, 39 Symbol For value comparison, 46 T TCONT_CP In/out parameters, 506 Input parameters, 504 Instruction, 489 Mode of operation, 490 Output parameters, 505 Static tags, 507 TCONT_S In/out parameters, 521 Input parameters, 520 Instruction, 514 Operating principle, 515 Output parameters, 521 Static tags, 522 Technology objects CONT_C, 212 CONT_S, 218 PID_3Step, 118 PID_Compact, 73 PID_Temp, 161 TCONT_CP, 222 TCONT_S, 246 V Values Comparing, 46 PID control Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E35300227-AD 569 ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2 ___________ Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3 ___________ Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4 ___________ 5 ___________________ Using the module ___________________ A Service & Support 10/2018 A5E32009889-AH Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E32009889-AH 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation supports you in configuring and programming modules for counting and measurement tasks of the S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP, as well as in position feedback and position input. Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation: General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows-based computers Proficiency with STEP 7 Validity of the documentation This documentation applies to the use of the following modules: S7-1500 modules - TM Count 2x24V (as of firmware version V1.3) - TM PosInput 2 (as of firmware version V1.3) - TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V - CPU 1511C-1 PN - CPU 1512C-1 PN - DI 32x24VDC HF (as of firmware version V2.1.0) - DI 16x24VDC HF (as of firmware version V2.1.0) ET 200SP modules - TM Count 1x24V (as of firmware version V1.3) - TM PosInput 1 (as of firmware version V1.3) - TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V - DI 8x24VDC HS ET 200AL modules - DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 TM Count, TM PosInput and compact CPU are suitable for complex counting and measuring tasks and for position detection. TM Timer DIDQ and digital modules are suitable for simple counting tasks. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 3 Preface Conventions Please observe notes marked as follows: Note The notes contain important information on the product described in the documentation, on the handling of the product or on part of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Additional assistance You can find information about the technical support offerings in the appendix Service & Support (Page 234). The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and automation systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). Counting, measurement and position detection 4 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide ................................................................................................................................. 9 2 The basics of counting, measurement and position input ........................................................................ 14 2.1 Overview of modules and properties ......................................................................................14 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) .......................................................................................................................................18 Convention ..............................................................................................................................18 Overview of applications .........................................................................................................18 Recording of count signals .....................................................................................................24 Counting with incremental or pulse encoder ..........................................................................24 Position input with SSI absolute encoder ...............................................................................26 Behavior at the counting limits ................................................................................................28 Gate control with incremental or pulse encoder .....................................................................30 Software gate ..........................................................................................................................30 Hardware gate ........................................................................................................................30 Internal gate ............................................................................................................................32 Counter behavior at gate start ................................................................................................33 Capture (Latch) .......................................................................................................................34 Capture with incremental or pulse encoder ............................................................................34 Capture with SSI absolute encoder ........................................................................................37 Synchronization ......................................................................................................................39 Synchronization by digital input ..............................................................................................42 Synchronization at signal N ....................................................................................................44 Comparison values .................................................................................................................47 Comparison values and outputs .............................................................................................47 Switching at comparison values with counter value as reference ..........................................48 Switching at comparison values with position value (SSI absolute value) as reference ........52 Switching at comparison values with measured value as reference ......................................56 Measured value determination ...............................................................................................58 Overview of measuring functions............................................................................................58 Measured value determination with incremental or pulse encoder ........................................59 Measured value determination with SSI absolute encoder ....................................................63 Hysteresis ...............................................................................................................................66 Hysteresis with incremental or pulse encoder ........................................................................66 Hysteresis with SSI absolute encoder ....................................................................................68 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................70 Position detection for Motion Control ......................................................................................70 Encoder signals ......................................................................................................................71 24 V and TTL count signals ....................................................................................................71 RS422 count signals ...............................................................................................................73 SSI signals ..............................................................................................................................75 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 2.2.5.3 2.2.5.4 2.2.6 2.2.6.1 2.2.6.2 2.2.7 2.2.7.1 2.2.7.2 2.2.8 2.2.8.1 2.2.8.2 2.2.8.3 2.2.8.4 2.2.9 2.2.9.1 2.2.9.2 2.2.9.3 2.2.10 2.2.10.1 2.2.10.2 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.13.1 2.2.13.2 2.2.13.3 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 5 Table of contents 3 2.2.14 2.2.14.1 2.2.14.2 2.2.14.3 2.2.14.4 2.2.15 Signal evaluation of incremental signals ................................................................................ 76 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 76 Single evaluation .................................................................................................................... 76 Double evaluation .................................................................................................................. 77 Quadruple evaluation ............................................................................................................. 78 Clock synchronization (TM Count and TM PosInput) ............................................................ 79 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) ..................................................................................... 81 Overview of applications ........................................................................................................ 81 Counting with incremental encoder........................................................................................ 82 Counting with pulse encoder.................................................................................................. 83 24 V count signals .................................................................................................................. 84 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 85 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.4.1 2.4.4.2 2.4.4.3 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 Basics of counting (digital modules) ...................................................................................... 86 Overview of applications ........................................................................................................ 86 Counting with pulse encoders ................................................................................................ 87 Behavior at the counting limits ............................................................................................... 88 Gate control............................................................................................................................ 90 Software gate ......................................................................................................................... 90 Hardware gate........................................................................................................................ 90 Internal gate ........................................................................................................................... 91 Comparison values ................................................................................................................ 92 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 95 24 V count signals .................................................................................................................. 95 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 96 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object .................................................................................. 97 3.1 Convention ............................................................................................................................. 97 3.2 High_Speed_Counter technology object ................................................................................ 97 3.3 Overview of the configuration steps ....................................................................................... 98 3.4 Add technology object............................................................................................................ 99 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.4.1 3.5.4.2 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter ................................................................................. 101 Working with the configuration dialog .................................................................................. 101 Basic parameters ................................................................................................................. 103 Counter inputs (High_Speed_Counter) ................................................................................ 104 Counter behavior ................................................................................................................. 109 Counting limits and start value ............................................................................................. 109 Counter behavior at limits and gate start ............................................................................. 109 Behavior of a DI (High_Speed_Counter) ............................................................................. 111 Behavior of a DQ (High_Speed_Counter) ............................................................................ 116 Specify measured value (High_Speed_Counter) ................................................................. 121 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.6.7 Programming the High_Speed_Counter .............................................................................. 123 High_Speed_Counter instruction ......................................................................................... 123 Call instruction in the user program ..................................................................................... 124 Description High_Speed_Counter ........................................................................................ 125 High_Speed_Counter input parameters ............................................................................... 131 High_Speed_Counter output parameters ............................................................................ 132 Error codes of parameter ErrorID ........................................................................................ 134 High_Speed_Counter static variables .................................................................................. 136 Counting, measurement and position detection 6 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Table of contents 4 5 3.7 3.7.1 Commissioning the High_Speed_Counter ............................................................................138 Commissioning the technology object ..................................................................................138 3.8 3.8.1 High_Speed_Counter diagnostics.........................................................................................140 Monitoring counter values, measured values, DIs and DQs ................................................140 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object ............................................................................. 142 4.1 Technology object SSI_Absolute_Encoder ...........................................................................142 4.2 Overview of the configuration steps......................................................................................143 4.3 Add technology object ..........................................................................................................144 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder......................................................................................146 Working with the configuration dialog ...................................................................................146 Basic parameters ..................................................................................................................147 SSI absolute encoder............................................................................................................148 Behavior of a DI (SSI_Absolute_Encoder) ............................................................................151 Behavior of a DQ (SSI_Absolute_Encoder) ..........................................................................153 Specify measured value (SSI_Absolute_Encoder) ...............................................................157 Examples of the frame format...............................................................................................159 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.7 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder ............................................................................162 Instruction SSI_Absolute_Encoder .......................................................................................162 Call instruction in the user program ......................................................................................163 Description SSI_Absolute_Encoder ......................................................................................164 Input parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder ..............................................................................167 Output parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder ............................................................................168 Error codes of parameter ErrorID .........................................................................................170 Static tags SSI_Absolute_Encoder .......................................................................................171 4.6 4.6.1 Commissioning SSI_Absolute_Encoder ...............................................................................172 Commissioning the technology object ..................................................................................172 4.7 4.7.1 SSI_Absolute_Encoder diagnostics ......................................................................................173 Monitoring counter values, measured values, DIs and DQs ................................................173 Using the module ................................................................................................................................... 175 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.2 5.1.2.3 5.1.2.4 5.1.2.5 5.1.2.6 5.1.2.7 5.1.2.8 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.1.4 5.1.4.1 5.1.4.2 Using the technology module ...............................................................................................175 Convention ............................................................................................................................175 Configuring a module ............................................................................................................175 Adding a technology module for hardware configuration (TM Count and TM PosInput) .....175 Adding a technology module to hardware configuration (Compact CPU) ............................176 Open hardware configuration ...............................................................................................177 Parameter assignment options .............................................................................................177 Basic parameters ..................................................................................................................179 Additional parameters for Compact CPU..............................................................................188 Manual operation (incremental or pulse encoder) ................................................................190 Manual operation (SSI absolute encoder) ............................................................................207 Online & diagnostics module ................................................................................................218 Displaying and evaluating diagnostics ..................................................................................218 Control and feedback interface (TM Count, TM PosInput) ...................................................219 Assignment of the control interface ......................................................................................219 Assignment of the feedback interface...................................................................................222 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 7 Table of contents 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.1.1 5.2.1.2 5.2.1.3 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 A Using the digital module....................................................................................................... 227 Configuring and assigning parameters to the module ......................................................... 227 Adding a module to the hardware configuration .................................................................. 227 Open hardware configuration............................................................................................... 227 Counting operating mode..................................................................................................... 228 Online & diagnostics module ............................................................................................... 233 Displaying and evaluating diagnostics ................................................................................. 233 Service & Support .................................................................................................................................. 234 Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 237 Counting, measurement and position detection 8 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Documentation guide 1 The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas. This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require. Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming. Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 9 Documentation guide General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manualoverview/Pages/Default.aspx). Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets. You will find the product information on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384) ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942) ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) "mySupport" With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support. In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time. You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual. You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later. You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation). Counting, measurement and position detection 10 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Documentation guide "mySupport" - CAx data In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system. You configure your own download package with a few clicks. In doing so you can select: Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates Product master data You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet (http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline). Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products. You will find the application examples on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054). TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool. With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool). Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 11 Documentation guide SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on different SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation, independently of the TIA Portal. The SIMATIC automation tool provides a variety of functions: Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a CPU Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out CPU error information Reading of CPU diagnostic buffer Reset to factory settings Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components. The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant. You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624). Counting, measurement and position detection 12 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety. The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7 projects Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation of resources You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan). Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 13 2 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.1 Overview of modules and properties Modules for the S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems The table below summarizes the performance features of the modules for counting, measuring and position input for the S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. Property S7-1500 / ET 200MP Technology module TM Count 2x24V TM PosInput 2 TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V Digital input module Compact CPU DI 32x24VDC HF CPU 1511C-1 PN DI 16x24VDC HF CPU 1512C-1 PN Number of counters 2 2 41 2 6 Use of counters can be activated/deactivated -- -- X X X Maximum signal frequency 200 kHz 1 MHz 50 kHz 1 kHz 100 kHz Maximum count frequency for incremental encoders with quadruple evaluation (Page 76) 800 kHz 4 MHz 200 kHz -- 400 kHz Maximum counting range 32 bits (Page 24) 32 bits (Page 24) 32 bits (Page 82) 32 bits (Page 87) 32 bits (Page 24) Maximum position value range (Page 26) -- 32 bits -- -- -- 24 V incremental encoder connection X (Page 71) -- X (Page 84) -- X (Page 71) 24 V pulse encoder connection X (Page 71) -- X (Page 84) X (Page 95) X (Page 71) RS422/TTL incremental and pulse encoder (Page 73) connection -- X -- -- -- SSI absolute encoder (Page 75) connection -- X -- -- -- Position input for Motion Control (Page 70) X X -- -- X Counting, measurement and position detection 14 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.1 Overview of modules and properties Property S7-1500 / ET 200MP Technology module TM Count 2x24V Compact CPU TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V DI 32x24VDC HF CPU 1511C-1 PN DI 16x24VDC HF CPU 1512C-1 PN 5 V encoder supply -- X -- -- -- 24 V encoder supply X X X -- X Number of additional digital inputs per counter 3 2 -- -- 2 Number of physical digital outputs per counter 2 2 -- -- 1 Number of logical digital outputs per counter 2 2 -- 1 2 Software gate X (Page 30) X (Page 30) -- X (Page 90) X (Page 30) Hardware gate X (Page 30) X (Page 30) -- -- X (Page 30) Capture function (Latch) (Page 34) X X -- -- X Synchronization (Page 39) X X -- -- X Comparison functions X (Page 47) X (Page 47) -- X (Page 92) X (Page 47) Hysteresis (Page 66) X X -- -- X Frequency, velocity and period duration measurement (Page 58) X X -- -- X Isochronous mode support X (Page 79) X (Page 79) X (Page 85) X (Page 96) -- Support for diagnostic interrupts for sensor signals X (Page 70) X (Page 70) -- -- X (Page 70) Hardware interrupt support X (Page 70) X (Page 70) -- X (Page 95) X (Page 70) X X -- X X Configurable filter for count signals and digital inputs 1 TM PosInput 2 Digital input module The number of available counters is dependent on the channel configuration. In order to use four counters, you must choose the use of eight inputs in the channel configuration. If you choose the use of three inputs, you can use one counter. Other channel configurations do not allow any counter use. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 15 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.1 Overview of modules and properties Modules for the ET 200SP system The following table provides an overview of the performance features of the modules for counting, measuring and position input for the ET 200SP system. Property ET 200SP Technology module Digital input module TM Count 1x24V TM PosInput 1 TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V DI 8x24VDC HS Number of counters 1 1 31 4 Use of counters can be activated/deactivated -- -- X X Maximum signal frequency 200 kHz 1 MHz 50 kHz 10 kHz Maximum count frequency for incremental encoders with quadruple evaluation (Page 76) 800 kHz 4 MHz 200 kHz -- 32 bits (Page 24) 32 bits (Page 24) 32 bits (Page 82) 32 bits (Page 87) -- 32 bits -- -- 24 V incremental encoder connection X (Page 71) -- X (Page 84) -- 24 V pulse encoder connection X (Page 71) -- X (Page 84) X (Page 95) RS422/TTL incremental and pulse encoder (Page 73) connection -- X -- -- SSI absolute encoder (Page 75) connection -- X -- -- Position input for Motion Control (Page 70) X X -- -- 24 V encoder supply X X X X Number of additional digital inputs per counter 3 2 -- 1 Number of physical digital outputs per counter 2 2 -- -- Number of logical digital outputs per counter 2 2 -- 1 Software gate X (Page 30) X (Page 30) -- X (Page 90) Hardware gate X (Page 30) X (Page 30) -- X (Page 90) Capture function (Latch) (Page 34) X X -- -- Synchronization (Page 39) X X -- -- Comparison functions X (Page 47) X (Page 47) -- X (Page 92) Hysteresis (Page 66) X X -- -- Frequency, velocity and period duration measurement (Page 58) X X -- -- X (Page 79) X (Page 79) X (Page 85) X (Page 96) Maximum counting range Maximum position value range (Page 26) Isochronous mode support Counting, measurement and position detection 16 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.1 Overview of modules and properties Property ET 200SP Technology module 1 Digital input module TM Count 1x24V TM PosInput 1 TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V DI 8x24VDC HS Support for diagnostic interrupts for sensor signals X (Page 70) X (Page 70) -- -- Hardware interrupt support X (Page 70) X (Page 70) -- -- Configurable filter for count signals and digital inputs X X -- X One counter for incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) and two counters for pulse encoder Modules for the ET 200AL system The following table provides an overview of the performance features of the modules for counting, measuring and position input for the ET 200AL system. Property ET 200AL Digital input/digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 Number of counters 4 Use of counters can be activated/deactivated X Maximum signal frequency 2 kHz Maximum counting range 32 bits 24 V incremental encoder connection -- 24 V pulse encoder connection X 24 V encoder supply X Number of additional digital inputs per counter 2 Number of physical digital outputs per counter 1 Number of logical digital outputs per counter 1 Software gate X Hardware gate X Capture function (Latch) -- Synchronization -- Comparison functions X Frequency, velocity and period duration measurement -- Isochronous mode support -- Support for diagnostic interrupts for sensor signals X Hardware interrupt support X Configurable filter digital inputs X Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 17 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.1 Convention Technology module: We use the term "technology module" in this documentation both for the technology modules TM Count and TM PosInput and the technology component of the compact CPUs. 2.2.2 Overview of applications Introduction The technology module is configured and assigned parameters using the configuration software. The operation and control of the technology module functions is effected either via the technology object or through the application program via the control and feedback interface. Counting, measurement and position detection 18 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) System environment for TM Count and TM PosInput The technology modules can be used in the following system environments: Application scenarios Components required Central operation with an S7-1500 CPU or 151xSP CPU * * S7-1500 automation system or ET 200SP CPU Technology module Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): For incremental / pulse encoders: Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object * * Device configuration with hardware configuration (Page 175) Parameter setting with High_Speed_Counter (Page 97) or SSI_Absolute_Encoder (Page 142) technology object STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Position input for "Motion Control" technology object * Device configuration with hardware configuration (Page 175) * Parameter setting with axis and measuring input technology object (Page 183) STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Manual operation (without technology object) * Device configuration and parameter setting (Page 175) with hardware configuration High_Speed_Counter instruction for the technology object For SSI absolute encoder: SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction for the technology object Instructions for "Motion Control" technology object Direct access to control and feedback interface of the technology module in the I/O data Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 19 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Application scenarios Components required Distributed operation with a S7-1500 CPU * S7-1500 automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * Technology module Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): For incremental / pulse encoders: Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object * * Device configuration with hardware configuration (Page 175) Parameter setting with High_Speed_Counter (Page 97) or SSI_Absolute_Encoder (Page 142) technology object STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Position input for "Motion Control" technology object * Device configuration with hardware configuration (Page 175) * Parameter setting with axis and measuring input technology object (Page 183) STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Manual operation (without technology object) * Device configuration and parameter setting (Page 175) with hardware configuration High_Speed_Counter instruction for the technology object For SSI absolute encoder: SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction for the technology object Instructions for "Motion Control" technology object Direct access to control and feedback interface (Page 219) of the technology module in the IO data Counting, measurement and position detection 20 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Application scenarios Components required Distributed operation with an S7-1200 CPU * S7-1200 automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * Technology module * S7-300/400 automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * Technology module Distributed operation with a S7-300/400 CPU Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Direct access to control and feedback interface (Page 219) of the technology module in the IO data Device configuration and parameter setting (Page 175) with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting (Page 175) with hardware configuration Direct access to control and feedback interface (Page 219) of the technology module in the IO data STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with HSP (up to firmware version V1.2) or GSD file Distributed operation in a third-party system * Third-party automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * Technology module Direct access to control and feedback interface (Page 219) of the technology Device configuration and parameter settings with GSD module in the IO data file Third-party configuration software: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 21 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) System environment for a Compact CPU The Compact CPUs can be used in the following system environments: Application scenarios Components required Central operation with a S7-1500 Compact CPU * * S7-1500 automation system Compact CPU Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): High_Speed_Counter instruction for the technology object Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object * Device configuration with hardware configuration (Page 175) * Parameter setting with High_Speed_Counter (Page 97) technology object STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Position input for "Motion Control" technology object * Device configuration with hardware configuration (Page 175) * Parameter setting with axis and measuring input technology object (Page 183) STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Manual operation (without technology object) * Device configuration and parameter setting (Page 175) with hardware configuration Instructions for "Motion Control" technology object Direct access to control and feedback interface of the technology module in the I/O data Parameter assignment options In an S7-1500 system, you have two options for parameter assignment and control of technology module functions: Configuration using the technology object and control using the associated instruction Access to the control and feedback interface of the technology module takes place through the technology object. Parameter setting via hardware configuration The control and feedback interface of the technology module is accessed using direct access to the I/O data. Counting, measurement and position detection 22 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Configuration via technology object For central and distributed use, we recommend the convenient, graphics-assisted configuration using a technology object. A detailed description of this configuration can be found in section High_Speed_Counter technology object (Page 97) or SSI_Absolute_Encodertechnology object (Page 142). You specify the "Operation with technology object "Counting and measuring"" in the device configuration of the technology module: see section Operating mode (Page 181). You can assign the technology module and counting channel in the basic parameters of the technology object: see section Basic parameters (Page 103). Parameter setting via hardware configuration You specify the "Manual operation (without technology object)" in the device configuration of the technology module: see section Operating mode (Page 181). Additional support for parameter setting via hardware configuration is available in the context-sensitive help for the parameters in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the following sections: Assignment of the control interface (Page 219) Assignment of the feedback interface (Page 222) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 23 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.3 Recording of count signals 2.2.3.1 Counting with incremental or pulse encoder Counting refers to the recording and adding up of events. The counters of the technology modules capture and evaluate pulse and incremental signals. The count direction can be specified using encoder or pulse signals or through the user program. You can control counting processes using the digital inputs of the technology module. You can switch the digital outputs exactly at defined counter values, regardless of the user program. You can configure the response of the counters using the functionalities described below. Counter limits The counter limits define the counter value range used. The counter limits are configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program. The highest counter limit that can be set is 2147483647 (231-1). The lowest counter limit that can be set is -2147483648 (-231). You can configure the response of the counter at the counter limits: Continue or stop counting upon violation of a counter limit (automatic gate stop) Set counter value to start value or to opposite counter limit upon violation of a counter limit Start value You can configure a start value within the counter limits. The start value can be modified during runtime by the user program. The technology module can, as configured, set the current counter value to the start value upon synchronization, upon Capture function activation, upon violation of a counter limit or when the gate is opened. Gate control Opening and closing the hardware gate and software gate defines the period of time during which the counting signals are captured. The hardware gate is controlled externally via a digital input of the technology module. The software gate is controlled via the user program. The hardware gate can be enabled through parameter assignment. The software gate (bit in the control interface of the cyclic I/O data) cannot be disabled. Counting, measurement and position detection 24 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Capture (Latch) You can configure an external reference signal edge that triggers the saving of the current counter value or position value as a Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Both edges of a digital input Rising edge of the N signal at the encoder input When using a digital input, you can specify whether counting is to continue from the current counter value or from the start value after the Capture function. When using the rising edge of the N signal at the encoder input, counting is to continue from the current counter value after the Capture function. The use of a digital input and the use of the N signal are not mutually exclusive for the Capture function. The parameter "Frequency of the Capture function" determines if the function is executed for each configured edge or only once after each enable. Measuring input If you use the position input for Motion Control (Page 70), you can use the "Measuring input" technology object to execute a measuring input function with a hardware digital input. Synchronization You can configure an external reference signal edge to load the counter with the specified start value. The following external signals can load the counter with the start value: Rising or falling edge of a digital input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input depending on the level of the assigned digital input The parameter "Frequency of synchronization" determines whether the function is executed for each configured edge or only once after each enable. Hysteresis You can specify hysteresis for the comparison values, within which a digital output is prevented from switching again. An encoder can come to a standstill at a specific position, and slight movements may make the counter value fluctuate around this position. If a comparison value or a counting limit lies within this fluctuation range, the corresponding digital output will be switched on and off with corresponding frequency if hysteresis is not used. The hysteresis prevents these unwanted switching operations. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 25 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.3.2 Position input with SSI absolute encoder Description You can use the TM PosInput technology modules with an SSI absolute encoder for position detection. The technology module reads the position value via a synchronous serial interface from the SSI absolute encoder and makes it available to the controller. You can switch the digital outputs of the technology module exactly at defined position values, regardless of the user program. Position input with an SSI absolute encoder does not involve gate control. Due to system constraints, synchronization is not possible with an SSI absolute encoder. Gray- and dual-code Gray-code and dual-code SSI absolute encoders are supported. Capture (Latch) You can configure one or both edges of a digital input that triggers a saving of the current position value as Capture value. The parameter "Frequency of the Capture function" determines if the function is executed for each configured edge or only once after each enable. Measuring input If you use the position input for Motion Control (Page 70), you can use the "Measuring input" technology object to execute a measuring input function with a hardware digital input. Hysteresis You can specify hysteresis for the comparison values, within which a digital output is prevented from switching again. An encoder can come to a standstill at a specific position, and slight movements may make the position value fluctuate around this position. If a comparison value or a limit lies within this fluctuation range, the corresponding digital output is switched on and off with corresponding frequency if hysteresis is not used. The hysteresis prevents these unwanted switching operations. Counting, measurement and position detection 26 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Range for position value You can specify a frame length of 10 bits to 40 bits for the SSI absolute encoder. The configurable bit numbers of the LSB and the MSB of the position value in the frame define the value range. The technology module can read a position value with a maximum length of 32 bits and communicate it to the controller. If you use an encoder with a position value length of up to 31 bits, the position value is handled unsigned as a positive value and can assume values between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, the MSB of the position value corresponds to the sign and the position value can assume values between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use a 32 bit position value for the comparison function, the position value is interpreted as DINT. Complete SSI frame Instead of having a measured variable returned, you can choose to have the least significant 32 bits of the current unprocessed SSI frame returned. This provides you with encoderspecific additional bits, such as error bits, in addition to the position value. If the SSI frame is shorter than 32 bits, the complete SSI frame is returned right-aligned and the top unused bits are returned with "0" in the feedback interface. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 27 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.4 Behavior at the counting limits Violation of a counting limit The high counting limit is violated when the current counter value is equal to the high counting limit and another upward count pulse is received. The counter low limit is violated when the current counter value is equal to the counter low limit and another downward count pulse is received. The appropriate status bit is set in the feedback interface in the event of limit violation: Counting limit violated Status bit High counting limit EVENT_OFLW is set Low counting limit EVENT_UFLW is set You can reset the status bits with RES_EVENT . You can configure whether or not and from which counter value counting is to continue following counting limit violation. Note The high counting limit and the start value define the value range of the counter: Value range of the counter = (high limit - start value) + 1 Examples The figure below shows an example for terminating the counting process (automatic gate stop) after an overflow and setting the counter to the start value: Counting, measurement and position detection 28 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows an example for continuing the counting process after an overflow and setting the counter to the start value: The figure below shows an example for terminating counting after an overflow and setting the counter to the opposite counting limit: The figure below shows an example for continuing the counting process after an overflow and setting the counter to the opposite counting limit: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 29 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.5 Gate control with incremental or pulse encoder Many applications require counting processes to be started or stopped in accordance with other events. In such cases, counting is started and stopped using the gate function. The technology modules have two gates for each channel. These define the resulting internal gate: Software gate Hardware gate 2.2.5.1 Software gate The software gate of the channel is opened and closed with the control bit (Page 219) SW_GATE. The status of the software gate is indicated by the feedback bit (Page 222) STS_SW_GATE . 2.2.5.2 Hardware gate The hardware gate is optional. You open and close the hardware gate by means of signals at the configured digital inputs of the channel. Note The configured input filters delay the control signal of the digital input. The status of a DIm digital input is indicated by the respective feedback bit (Page 222) STS_DIm . Level-triggered opening and closing of the hardware gate with a digital input The figure below shows an example of level-triggered opening and closing with a digital input. The digital input is configured to be active with high level: As long as the digital input is active, the hardware gate is open and the count pulses are counted. The hardware gate is closed when the digital input becomes inactive. The counter value stays constant and ignores any further count pulses. Counting, measurement and position detection 30 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Edge-triggered opening and closing of the hardware gate with two digital inputs The figure below shows an example of opening and closing with two digital inputs. The two digital inputs are configured so that the rising edge is evaluated: The hardware gate is opened with the configured edge at the digital input that is configured for opening. The hardware gate is closed with the configured edge at the digital input that is configured for closing. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 31 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.5.3 Internal gate Internal gate The internal gate is open if the software gate is open and the hardware gate is open or has not been configured. The status of the internal gate is indicated by the feedback bit (Page 222) STS_GATE. If the internal gate is open, counting is started. If the internal gate is closed, all other count pulses are ignored and counting is stopped. If you want to control a counting process with the hardware gate only, the software gate must be open. If you do not configure a hardware gate, the hardware gate is considered to be always open. In this case, you open and close the internal gate with the software gate only. Hardware gate Software gate Internal gate Open/not configured open open Open/not configured closed closed closed open closed closed closed closed When you configure the counter behavior, you can specify whether the counting process is to start from the start value or from the current counter value when the internal gate is opened. The internal gate can also be automatically closed upon violation of a counting limit. The software or hardware gate must then be closed and reopened to continue counting. Counting, measurement and position detection 32 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.5.4 Counter behavior at gate start You have the following configuration options for counter behavior upon gate start: Setting counter to start value Continuing with the current counter value Setting counter to start value Counter behavior is as follows for this configuration: Each counting process starts with the start value when the internal gate is opened. The figure below shows an example for continuing the counting process after counter is set to the start value: Continuing with the current counter value Counter behavior is as follows for this configuration: Each counting process starts from the current counter value after the internal gate is reopened. The figure below shows an example for continuing the counting process with the current counter value: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 33 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.6 Capture (Latch) 2.2.6.1 Capture with incremental or pulse encoder Description The "Capture" function is used to save the current counter value with an external reference signal. You can configure the Capture function for the following reference signals: Rising or falling edge at a digital input Rising and falling edge at a digital input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input Function principle The Capture value is always the exact counter value at the time of the respective edge (delayed by the configured input filter time). The Capture function is effective regardless of the status of the internal gate. The unchanged counter value is saved when the gate is closed. The figure below shows an example of the Capture function with the following configuration: Start value = 0 Capture event upon rising edge at configured digital input Set counter to start value at gate start Continue counting after Capture event Counting, measurement and position detection 34 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows another example of the Capture function with the following configuration: Start value = 0 Capture event upon rising edge at configured digital input Set counter to start value at gate start Reset counter value to start value after Capture event and continue counting. The control bit (Page 219) EN_CAPTURE is used to enable the Capture function. The feedback bit (Page 222) EVENT_CAP indicates that a counter value has been saved as a Capture in the feedback interface. If you reset EN_CAPTURE, EVENT_CAP is also reset. The status of a digital input is indicated by the respective feedback bit (Page 222) STS_DIm . The figure below shows an example of the EN_CAPTURE and EVENT_CAP bits with use of the one-time Capture function by the rising edge at a digital input: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 35 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows an example of the EN_CAPTURE and EVENT_CAP bits with use of the periodic Capture function by the rising edge at a digital input: Note The configured input filters delay the control signal of the corresponding digital input. The Capture function has no effect on the feedback bit STS_CNT and the LEDs UP and DN. Hardware interrupt You can configure a hardware interrupt for the Capture function. If the hardware interrupts are triggered more quickly by the system than they can be acknowledged, hardware interrupts are lost and the "Hardware interrupt" diagnostics interrupt is signaled. Counting, measurement and position detection 36 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.6.2 Capture with SSI absolute encoder Description The "Capture" function is used to save the current position value using an external reference signal. You can configure the Capture function for the following reference signals: Rising or falling edge at a digital input Rising and falling edge at a digital input Function principle At the time of each edge, the position value of the last valid SSI frame is stored in the Capture value. The figure below shows an example of the Capture event by a rising edge at the configured digital input: The control bit (Page 219) EN_CAPTURE is used to enable the Capture function. The feedback bit (Page 222) EVENT_CAP indicates that a position value has been saved as Capture value in the feedback interface. If you reset EN_CAPTURE, EVENT_CAP is also reset. The status of a digital input is indicated by the respective feedback bit (Page 222) STS_DIm . The figure below shows an example of the EN_CAPTURE and EVENT_CAP bits with use of the one-time Capture function by the rising edge at a digital input: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 37 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows an example of the EN_CAPTURE and EVENT_CAP bits with use of the periodic Capture function by the rising edge at a digital input: Note The configured input filters delay the control signal of the corresponding digital input. Hardware interrupt You can configure a hardware interrupt for the Capture function. If the hardware interrupts are triggered more quickly by the system than they can be acknowledged, hardware interrupts are lost and the "Hardware interrupt" diagnostics interrupt is signaled. Counting, measurement and position detection 38 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.7 Synchronization Description You use the "Synchronization" function to set the counter to the pre-defined start value with an external reference signal. You can configure synchronization for the following reference signals: Rising or falling edges at a digital input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input Rising edge of signal N at the encoder input defined by the level of a digital input Function principle Synchronization always takes place exactly at the time of the reference signal. Synchronization is effective regardless of the status of the internal gate. You use the control bit (Page 219) EN_SYNC_UP to enable synchronization for counting in an upwards direction. Use the control bit (Page 219) EN_SYNC_DN to enable synchronization for counting down. The feedback bit (Page 222) EVENT_SYNC indicates that synchronization has been performed. Resetting EN_SYNC_UP or EN_SYNC_DN also resets EVENT_SYNC. Note The configured input filters delay the control signal of the corresponding digital input. Synchronization has no effect on the feedback bit (Page 222) STS_CNT and the LEDs UP and DN. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 39 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Single synchronization The figure below shows an example of the EN_SYNC_UP, EN_SYNC_DNand EVENT_SYNC bits with single synchronization by an edge at a digital input for count pulses in an upwards direction: After synchronization is enabled for counting in an upwards direction, the counter is synchronized at the first rising edge at the configured digital input. The counter can only be synchronized again once the control bit (Page 219) EN_SYNC_UP has been reset and set again. Counting, measurement and position detection 40 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Periodic synchronization The figure below shows an example of the EN_SYNC_UP, EN_SYNC_DN and EVENT_SYNC bits with periodic synchronization by an edge at a digital input for count pulses in an upwards direction: As long as synchronization for counting in an upwards direction is enabled, the counter is synchronized at each rising edge at the configured digital input. Hardware interrupt You can configure a hardware interrupt for the synchronization. If the hardware interrupts are triggered more quickly by the system than they can be acknowledged, hardware interrupts are lost and the "Hardware interrupt" diagnostics interrupt is signaled. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 41 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.7.1 Synchronization by digital input You can trigger synchronization by edges at a digital input. Single synchronization The figure below shows an example for single synchronization by an edge at a digital input: After synchronization is enabled for counting in an upwards direction, the counter is synchronized at the first rising edge at the configured digital input. Until the control bit (Page 219) EN_SYNC_UP has been reset and set again, any additional rising edge at the digital output is ignored. The counter can then be synchronized again. Counting, measurement and position detection 42 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Periodic synchronization The figure below shows an example for periodic synchronization by an edge at a digital input: As long as synchronization for counting in an upwards direction is enabled, the counter is synchronized at each rising edge at the configured digital input. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 43 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.7.2 Synchronization at signal N You can trigger synchronization at signal N at the encoder input either directly or depending on the status of a digital input. Single synchronization The figure below shows an example of single synchronization at signal N (not dependent on a digital input): After synchronization is enabled for counting in an upwards direction, the counter is synchronized at the first signal N. After resetting and setting the control bit (Page 219) EN_SYNC_UP once again, the counter can be synchronized again. Counting, measurement and position detection 44 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Periodic synchronization The figure below shows an example for periodic synchronization at signal N: As long as synchronization for counting in an upwards direction is enabled, the counter is synchronized at each signal N. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 45 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Enable by a digital input The figure below shows an example for periodic synchronization at signal N depending on the status of a digital input: As long as synchronization for counting up is enabled and the corresponding digital input is active, the counter is synchronized at each signal N. If one of the conditions is not met, the counter is not synchronized at the signal N. Counting, measurement and position detection 46 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.8 Comparison values 2.2.8.1 Comparison values and outputs Description You can specify two comparison values to control both digital outputs of the channel independently of the user program: Comparison value 0 for digital output DQ0 Comparison value 1 for digital output DQ1 Depending on the operating mode and the encoder used, define two position, counter or measured values as comparison value. The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program. Note DQ0 of a counter of a Compact CPU With a Compact CPU, the respective digital output DQ0 is available via the feedback interface, but not as a physical output. Switching digital outputs from the user program The control bits (Page 219) TM_CTRL_DQ0 and TM_CTRL_DQ1 are used to control use of the digital outputs. If TM_CTRL_DQm is set to 0, you can control the relevant digital output from the user program with the control bit SET_DQm regardless of the configured technological function. If TM_CTRL_DQm is set to 1, the technological function of the controller of the respective digital output is enabled. The status of a digital output is indicated by the respective STS_DQm feedback bit. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 47 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.8.2 Switching at comparison values with counter value as reference The comparison values are compared with the current counter value. If the counter value meets the assigned comparison condition and the technological function of the associated digital output is enabled, the digital output is set. If you assign "Between comparison value 0 and 1" for digital output DQ1, both comparison values affect DQ1. You can make switching for a digital output dependent on one of the following comparison events: Setting between comparison value and high counting limit The digital output is set to 1 if: Comparison value <= counter value <= high counting limit The comparison event is independent of the count direction. Setting between comparison value and low limit The digital output is set to 1 if: Low counting limit <= counter value <= comparison value The comparison event is independent of the count direction. Counting, measurement and position detection 48 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Setting between comparison value 0 and comparison value 1 The comparison event can be configured for the digital output DQ1 if "Use by user program" has been configured for the digital output DQ0. Comparison value 1 must be greater than Comparison value 0. DQ1 is set to 1 if: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting in an upwards direction: Setting at comparison value for one pulse duration The respective digital output is set to 1 for a specified period of time when the following conditions are fulfilled: Counter value = comparison value Current count direction = configured count direction for the comparison event The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting in an upwards direction: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 49 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting in a downward direction: To repeat the comparison event, the counter value must change and then correspond to the respective comparison value again. If the pulse duration has been defined as "0" and the counter value is equal to the comparison value, the digital output is set to 1 until the next count pulse: Note This comparison event switches the relevant digital output if a count pulse reaches the comparison value. The digital output does not switch when the counter value is set, by synchronization for example. Counting, measurement and position detection 50 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Setting by the user program up to comparison value You can set the respective digital output to 1 (edge) by setting the control bit (Page 219) SET_DQm. The respective digital output is set to 0 by any of the following events: Match of the counter value and the comparison value in the configured direction of the comparison event Reset of the corresponding SET_DQm control bit. The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting in an upwards direction: You can disable the digital output before the counter value reaches the comparison value by setting the control bit SET_DQm to 0. Note If the comparison value is reached in the configured count direction, the feedback bit EVENT_CMPm is set independently of the state of the control bit SET_DQm. The comparison event switches a digital output when a count pulse reaches the respective comparison value. The digital output does not switch when the counter value is set, by synchronization for example. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 51 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.8.3 Switching at comparison values with position value (SSI absolute value) as reference The comparison values are compared with the current position value. If the position value meets the assigned comparison condition and the technological function of the associated digital output is enabled, the digital output is set. If you assign "Between comparison value 0 and 1" for digital output DQ1, both comparison values affect DQ1. If you use a 32 bit position value for the comparison function, the position value is interpreted as DINT. You can make switching for a digital output dependent on one of the following comparison events: Setting between comparison value and high limit The high limit corresponds to the maximum position value. The digital output is set to 1 if: Comparison value <= position value <= maximum position value The comparison event is independent of the direction of the position value change. The maximum position value depends on the resolution of the SSI absolute encoder. Counting, measurement and position detection 52 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Setting between comparison value and low limit The low limit corresponds to the position value "0". The digital output is set to 1 if: 0 <= position value <= comparison value The comparison event is independent of the direction of the position value change. Setting between comparison value 0 and comparison value 1 The comparison event can be configured for the digital output DQ1 if "Use by user program" has been configured for the digital output DQ0. Comparison value 1 must be greater than Comparison value 0. DQ1 is set to 1 if: Comparison value 0 <= position value <= comparison value 1 The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting up: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 53 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Setting at comparison value for one pulse duration The respective digital output is set to 1 for a specified period of time when the following conditions are fulfilled: Matching of the position value and comparison value or crossing of the comparison value Current direction of the position value change = assigned direction for the comparison event The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting up: The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting down: To repeat the comparison event, the position value must change and then correspond to or cross the respective comparison value again. Counting, measurement and position detection 54 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Setting by the user program up to comparison value You can set each digital output to 1 (edge) by setting the control bit (Page 219) SET_DQm. The respective digital output is set to 0 by any of the following events: Matching of the position value and the comparison value or crossing of the comparison value in the configured direction of the comparison event Resetting of the SET_DQm control bit. The figure below shows an example of the comparison event when counting up: You can disable the digital output before the position value corresponds to or exceeds the comparison value by setting the control bit SET_DQm to 0. Note If the comparison value is reached or exceeded in the assigned direction, feedback bit EVENT_CMPm is set independently of the status of control bit SET_DQm. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 55 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.8.4 Switching at comparison values with measured value as reference The comparison values are compared with the current measured value. If the measured value meets the configured comparison condition and the technological function of the corresponding digital output is enabled, the digital output is set. If you configure "Between comparison value 0 and 1" or "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" for digital output DQ1, both comparison values affect DQ1. You can make switching for a digital output dependent on one of the following comparison events: Setting above the comparison value The digital output is set to 1 if: Measured value >= comparison value Setting below the comparison value The digital output is set to 1 if: Measured value <= comparison value Counting, measurement and position detection 56 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Setting between comparison value 0 and comparison value 1 The comparison event can be configured for the digital output DQ1 if "Use by user program" has been configured for the digital output DQ0. Comparison value 1 must be greater than Comparison value 0. DQ1 is set to 1 if: Comparison value 0 <= measured value <= comparison value 1 Not setting between comparison value 0 and comparison value 1 The comparison event can be configured for the digital output DQ1 if "Use by user program" has been configured for the digital output DQ0. Comparison value 1 must be greater than Comparison value 0. DQ1 is set to 1 if: Comparison value 1 <= measured value <= comparison value 0 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 57 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.9 Measured value determination 2.2.9.1 Overview of measuring functions The following highly accurate measuring functions are available (accuracy up to 100 ppm): Measurement type (Page 59) Description Frequency measurement The mean frequency is calculated at set measuring intervals on the basis of the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes and returned in Hertz as floating point number. Period measurement The mean period duration is calculated at set measuring intervals on the basis of the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes and returned in seconds as floating point number. Velocity measurement The mean velocity is calculated at set measuring intervals on the basis of the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes and other parameters, and returned in the configured unit of measurement. Measured values and counter values are available concurrently in the feedback interface. Update time You can configure the interval at which the technology module updates the measured values cyclically as the update time. Setting longer update time intervals allows uneven measured variables to be smoothed and increases measuring accuracy. Gate control for incremental and pulse encoders Opening and closing the internal gate defines the period of time during which the count pulses are captured. The update time is asynchronous to the opening of the gate, which means that the update time is not started when the gate is opened. After the internal gate is closed, the last measured value captured is still returned. Counting, measurement and position detection 58 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.9.2 Measured value determination with incremental or pulse encoder Measuring range (TM Count and TM PosInput) The measuring functions have the following measuring limits: Measurement type Low measuring range limit High measuring range limit Frequency measurement 0.04 Hz 800 kHz* / 4 MHz** Period measurement 1.25 s* / 0.25 s** 25 s Velocity measurement Depending on the configured number of "increments per unit" and the "time base for velocity measurement" * Applies to 24 V incremental encoders and "quadruple" signal evaluation. ** Applies to RS422 incremental encoders and "quadruple" signal evaluation. All measured values are returned as signed values. The sign indicates whether the counter value increased or decreased during the relevant time period. Measuring range (Compact CPU) The measuring functions have the following measuring range limits: Measurement type Low measuring range limit High measuring range limit Frequency measurement 0.04 Hz 400 kHz* Period measurement 2.5 s* 25 s Velocity measurement Depends on the configured number of "Increments per unit" and the "Time base for velocity measurement" * Applies to 24 V incremental encoders and "quadruple" signal evaluation. All measured values are returned as signed values. The sign indicates whether the counter value increased or decreased during the relevant time period. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 59 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Measuring principle The technology module assigns a time value to each count pulse. The measuring interval is defined as the time between each last count pulse before and during the previous update time. The measuring interval and the number of pulses in the measuring interval are evaluated to calculate measured variables. If there is no count pulse within an update time, the measuring interval is dynamically adjusted. In this case, a pulse is assumed at the end of the update time and the measuring interval is calculated as the time between that point and the last pulse which occurred. The number of pulses is then 1. The feedback bit STS_M_INTERVAL indicates whether a count pulse occurred in the previous measuring interval. This allows for a differentiation between an assumed and an actual count pulse. The following figures show the principle of measurement and the dynamic adjustment of the measuring interval: Counting, measurement and position detection 60 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Frequency measurement A value "0" is returned until the first measured value is available. The measurement process begins with the first pulse detected once the internal gate has been opened. The first measured value can be calculated after the second pulse at the earliest. The measured value is updated in the feedback interface (Page 222) upon completion of each update time. If the internal gate is closed, measuring stops and the measured value is no longer updated. The figures below shows an example of frequency measurement with an update time of 1 s: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 61 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Period measurement The reciprocal of the frequency is output as the measured value for period measurement. A value "25 s" is returned until the first measured value is available. Velocity measurement The normalized frequency is output as the measured value in velocity measurement. You can configure the scaling using the time basis and the number of increments that your encoder delivers per unit. Example: Your encoder delivers 4000 increments per meter. The velocity is to be measured in meters per minute. In this case, you need to configure 4000 Increments per unit and a time basis of one minute. Counting, measurement and position detection 62 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.9.3 Measured value determination with SSI absolute encoder Measuring range SSI absolute encoder The measuring functions have the following measuring limits: Measurement type Low measuring range limit High measuring range limit Frequency measurement 0,04 Hz 4 MHz Period measurement 0,25 s 25 s Velocity measurement Depending on the configured number of "increments per unit" and the "time base for velocity measurement" All measured values are returned as signed values. The sign indicates whether the position value increased or decreased during the relevant time period. Measuring principle The technology module assigns a time value to each SSI frame. The measuring interval is defined as the time between the last SSI frame with a change of position value before and during the previous update time. The measuring interval and the total change in position value in the measuring interval are evaluated to calculate a measured variable. The total change in position value in a measuring interval corresponds to the number of encoder increments in the same measuring interval. If there is no change in position value within an update time, the measuring interval is dynamically adjusted. In this case, a change in position value is assumed at the end of the update time and the measuring interval is calculated as the time between that point and the last SSI frame with a change in position value. The change in position value is then 1. The feedback bit STS_M_INTERVAL indicates whether a change in position value occurred in the previous measuring interval. This allows for a differentiation between an assumed and an actual change in position value. If the technology module cannot calculate measured values because the measuring range limit has been violated, the feedback bit STS_M_INTERVAL is not set. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 63 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Frequency measurement The value "0.0" is reported in the time up to the first available measured value. The measuring process begins with the first detected change in position value. The first measured value can be calculated after the second detected change in position value at the earliest. The measured value is updated in the feedback interface (Page 222) upon completion of each update time. The figures below shows an example of frequency measurement with an update time of 1 s: Period measurement The reciprocal of the frequency is output as the measured value for period measurement. A value "25 s" is returned until the first measured value is available. Counting, measurement and position detection 64 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Velocity measurement The normalized frequency is output as the measured value in velocity measurement. You can configure the scaling using the time basis and the number of increments that your encoder delivers per unit. Example: Your SSI absolute encoder operates with a resolution of 12 bits per revolution and performs 4096 increments per revolution. The velocity should be measured in revolutions per minute. In this case, you need to configure 4096 Increments per unit and a time basis of one minute. Note Excessive encoder speed can provide wrong direction of rotation. If an SSI absolute encoder rotates so quickly that more than half of the value range is covered within one module cycle1, the velocity and direction of rotation can not be determined correctly anymore. This can result in an incorrect function at: * DQ functions * Feedback bits EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_ZERO, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1 and STS_DIR 1 Non isochronous mode: 500 s; isochronous mode: PROFINET cycle time Note If you are using an SSI absolute encoder whose value range does not correspond to the power of 2, the calculated speed measured value may be incorrect at the moment of the overflow. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 65 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.10 Hysteresis 2.2.10.1 Hysteresis with incremental or pulse encoder Description Hysteresis allows you to specify a range around the comparison values within which the digital outputs are not to be switched again until the counter value has gone outside this range. Slight movements by the encoder can result in the counter value fluctuating around a certain value. If a comparison value or a counting limit lies within this fluctuation range, the corresponding digital output is switched on and off with corresponding frequency if hysteresis is not used. Hysteresis prevents this unwanted switching, and configured hardware interrupts when a comparison event occurs. The hysteresis becomes active when the respective comparison value is reached by a count pulse. If the counter value is set to the start value during an active hysteresis, the hysteresis becomes inactive. Regardless of the hysteresis value, the hysteresis range ends at the low/high counting limits. Function principle The figure below shows an example for the hysteresis with the following configuration: Setting of a digital output between comparison value and high counting limit Comparison value = 5 Hysteresis = 0 or 2 (gray background) Hysteresis is enabled when the counter value 5 is reached. When the hysteresis is active, the comparison result remains unchanged. Hysteresis is disabled when the counter value 2 or 8 is reached. Counting, measurement and position detection 66 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows an example for the hysteresis with the following configuration: Setting at comparison value for one pulse duration Comparison value = 5 Comparison in both count directions Hysteresis = 0 or 2 (gray background) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 67 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.10.2 Hysteresis with SSI absolute encoder Description Hysteresis allows you to specify a range around the comparison values within which the digital outputs are not to be switched again until the position value has gone outside this range. Slight movements by the encoder can result in the position value fluctuating around a certain value. If a comparison value, the minimum or maximum position value, lies within the fluctuation range, the associated digital output is switched on and off if a hysteresis is not used. Hysteresis prevents this unwanted switching, and configured hardware interrupts when a compare event occurs. Regardless of the hysteresis value, the hysteresis range ends at the respective minimum or maximum position value. Function principle The figure below shows an example for the hysteresis with the following parameter assignment: Setting of a digital output between comparison value and high limit Comparison value = 10 Hysteresis = 0 or 2 (gray background) Hysteresis is enabled when the position value 10 is reached. When the hysteresis is active, the comparison result remains unchanged. Hysteresis is disabled when the position values 7 or 13 are reached. Counting, measurement and position detection 68 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The figure below shows an example for the hysteresis with the following parameter assignment: Setting at comparison value for one pulse duration Comparison value = 10 Comparison in both directions of position value changes Hysteresis = 0 or 2 (gray background) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 69 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.11 Interrupts Hardware interrupt The technology module can trigger a hardware interrupt in the CPU if, for example, a comparison event occurs; in the event of overflow or underflow; in the event of a zero crossing of the counter and/or of a change in count direction (direction reversal). You can specify which events are to trigger a hardware interrupt during operation. Diagnostic interrupt The technology module can trigger diagnostic interrupts in the event of errors. You enable the diagnostic interrupts for certain errors in the device configuration. Refer to the device manual for the technology module to learn about the events that can trigger a diagnostic interrupt during operation. 2.2.12 Position detection for Motion Control Description You can use the technology module for example with an incremental encoder for the following axis technology objects of S7-1500 Motion Control for position detection : TO_PositioningAxis TO_SynchronousAxis TO_ExternalEncoder When using an incremental or pulse encoder, the position detection is based on the counting function of the technology module. With an SSI absolute encoder, the absolute value is read in via a synchronous, serial interface and prepared according to the parameter assignment and made available for S7-1500 Motion Control. The range of functions of the technology module has the following limitations in this case: Counter behavior not configurable No functions for digital inputs available apart from measuring input function No comparison functions for digital outputs available No hardware interrupts available In the device configuration of the technology module in STEP 7 (TIA Portal), select the "Position input for technology object "Motion Control"" operating mode and use the corresponding technology object in the program. This reduces the configuration options to the parameters that are essential. For TM Count or TM PosInput, the mode automatically applies to all channels of the technology module. For a Compact CPU, the mode automatically applies to the respective channel. In this operating mode you can use the (TO_MeasuringInput) measuring input technology object to execute a measuring input function with a hardware digital input. To do this select the measuring input type "Measuring via PROFIdrive telegram" in the measuring input technology object and the value "1" as the number of the measuring input. You can find information about further configuring in the help for the axis technology objects and the measuring input technology object of S7-1500 Motion Control. Counting, measurement and position detection 70 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.13 Encoder signals 2.2.13.1 24 V and TTL count signals 24 V and TTL incremental encoder count signals The 24 V incremental encoder returns the 24 V signals A, B, and N to the technology module. The A and B signals are phase-shifted by 90. You can also connect incremental encoders without an N signal. A 24 V incremental encoder uses the A and B signals for counting. If configured accordingly, the N signal is used for setting the counter to the start value or for saving the current counter value to the Capture value. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of an 24 V incremental encoder: The technology module detects the count direction by evaluating the sequence of edges of the A and B signals. You can specify an inversion of the count direction. 24 V and TTL pulse encoder count signals without/with direction signal The encoder, for example an initiator (BERO) or a light barrier, returns only a count signal that is connected to terminal A of the counter. In addition, you can connect a signal for direction detection to terminal B of the counter. In case of a high level the direction signal is counted backwards. If your encoder does not return a corresponding signal, you can specify the count direction with the user program using the control interface. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of a 24 V pulse encoder with direction signal and the resulting count pulses: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 71 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 24 V and TTL pulse encoder count signals with Up/Down count signal The Up count signal is connected to terminal A. The Down count signal is connected to terminal B. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of a pulse encoder with Up/Down count signal and the resulting count pulses: Sourcing output/sinking output for 24 V counter signals (TM Count) You can connect the following encoders/sensors to the counter inputs: Sourcing output: The A, B, and N inputs are wired to 24VDC . Sinking output: The A, B, and N inputs are wired to ground M . Push-pull (sourcing and sinking output): The A, B, and N inputs are wired alternately to 24VDC and ground M . Sourcing output for 24 V counter signals (Compact CPU) You can connect the sourcing output and push-pull encoders or sensors to the counter inputs. Monitoring of the encoder signals (TM Count and TM PosInput) The signals of push-pull 24 V encoders are monitored for wire breaks by the technology module. TTL signals are monitored by the technology module for faulty supply voltages. If you enable the diagnostic interrupt in the device configuration, the technology module triggers a diagnostic interrupt in the event of encoder signal errors. Counting, measurement and position detection 72 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.13.2 RS422 count signals RS422 incremental encoder count signals The RS422 incremental encoder sends the following differential signals to the technology module: +A and -A +B and -B +N and -N The signal information for RS422 signals is encoded in the differential voltage between A and -A, B and -B, and +N and -N. The A and B signals are phase-shifted by 90. You can also connect incremental encoders without an N signal. RS422 incremental encoders use the A and B signals for counting. If configured accordingly, the N signal is used for setting the counter to the start value or for saving the current counter value as the Capture value. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of an RS422 incremental encoder: The technology module detects the count direction by evaluating the sequence of edges of the A and B signals. You can specify an inversion of the count direction. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 73 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Count signals of RS422 pulse encoders without/with direction signal The encoder, for example a light barrier, only returns a count signal that is connected to terminal A. You can also connect a signal for direction detection to terminal B. In case of a high level the direction signal is counted backwards. If your encoder does not return a corresponding signal, you can specify the count direction with the user program using the control interface. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of a RS422 pulse encoder with direction signal and the resulting count pulses: Count signals of RS422 pulse encoders with Up/Down count signal The Up count signal is connected to the A terminals. The Down count signal is connected to the B terminals. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of an RS422 pulse encoder with Up/Down count signal and the resulting count pulses: Monitoring of encoder signals RS422 signals are monitored by the technology module for wire breaks, short-circuits, and incorrect supply voltage. If you enable the diagnostic interrupt in the device configuration, the technology module triggers a diagnostic interrupt in the event of encoder signal errors. Counting, measurement and position detection 74 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.13.3 SSI signals Signals from SSI absolute encoders The SSI absolute encoder and the technology module communicate by means of the SSI data signals +D and -D and the SSI clock signals +C and -C. SSI uses the RS422 signal standard. The signal information is coded in the respective differential voltage between +C and -C as well as +D and -D. Monitoring of the encoder signals and the SSI frames The signals of an SSI absolute encoder are monitored for wire breaks, short-circuits and incorrect supply voltage. The technology module also monitors the SSI frames for errors. If you enable the diagnostic interrupts in the device configuration, the technology module triggers a diagnostic interrupt in the event of encoder signal or SSI frame errors. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 75 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.14 Signal evaluation of incremental signals 2.2.14.1 Overview The technology module counter counts the edges of encoder signals A and B. For incremental encoders with phase-shifted signals A and B, you can select either single or multiple evaluation to improve the resolution. You can configure the following signal evaluations: Single evaluation (Page 76) Double evaluation (Page 77) Quadruple evaluation (Page 78) Note The phase offset between the edges of signals A and B is evaluated. If no phase shift is identifiable, an encoder error (invalid transition of A/B signals) is reported via the ENC_ERROR feedback bit. 2.2.14.2 Single evaluation Single evaluation evaluates the rising and falling edge at signal A when signal B has a low level. Count pulses in an upwards direction are generated with a rising edge at signal A during a low level at signal B. Count pulses in a downwards direction are generated with a falling edge at signal A during a low level of signal B. The following figure shows an example for single evaluation of 24 V and TTL count signals: Counting, measurement and position detection 76 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) The following figure shows an example for single evaluation of RS422 count signals: 2.2.14.3 Double evaluation With double evaluation, the rising and falling edges of signal A are evaluated. The edge direction of signal A and the level at signal B determines whether count pulses are generated in an upward or downward direction. The following figure shows an example for double evaluation of 24 V and TTL count signals: The following figure shows an example for double evaluation of RS422 count signals: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 77 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.14.4 Quadruple evaluation With quadruple evaluation, the rising and falling edges of signals A and B are evaluated. The edge direction of one signal and the level of the other signal determines whether count pulses are generated in an upward or downward direction. The figure below shows an example for quadruple evaluation of 24 V and TTL count signals: The figure below shows an example for quadruple evaluation of RS422 count signals: Counting, measurement and position detection 78 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) 2.2.15 Clock synchronization (TM Count and TM PosInput) The technology module supports the system function "Isochronous mode". This system function enables position, count and measured values to be recorded in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input and output data and the processing in the module are synchronized with each other. The output signals switch immediately if the relevant comparison condition is met. A change in the state of a digital input immediately affects the planned reaction of the technology module and changes the status bit of the digital input in the feedback interface. In the case of operation with a "Counting and measurement" technology object use an OB of the type "Synchronous Cycle" (for example OB61). In the assigned OB the instruction High_Speed_Counter or SSI_Absolute_Encoder is called. For position detection of a "Motion Control" technology object use the OB of the type "MCServo". When using the technology objects cam and cam track, isochronous mode is required. When using the measuring input technology object in connection with the hardware digital input DI1, no isochronous mode is required. In case of manual operation use an OB of the "Synchronous Cycle" type (for example OB61). In the assigned OB the input and output data is processed. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the technology module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the internal technology module cycle. At the moment when the input data (Ti) are read, the position and counter value and, if appropriate, the measured value as well as status bits are detected and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. The update time for the measured value is synchronized in a suitable relationship to the system cycle and, if required, adapted in length. If you configure "0", the measured value is updated once per system cycle. Isochronous mode parameter In isochronous mode, the following parameters can have an effect on the isochronous parameters of the Sync domain. Filter frequency Frame length1 Transmission rate1 Monoflop time1 Parity1 1 Only when using an SSI absolute encoder Because the isochronous parameters are not checked in RUN, overflows can occur when you change one or more of the named parameters in RUN: You prevent overflows by already selecting the option with the greatest time demand during the offline parameter assignment. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 79 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.2 Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU) Additional information For a detailed description of the isochronous mode refer to: The isochronous mode function manual available as a download from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401). The PROFINET with STEP 7 function manual as a download from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Counting, measurement and position detection 80 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.3 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) 2.3 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) 2.3.1 Overview of applications Introduction You configure the TM Timer DIDQ and assign its parameters with the configuration software. The module's functions are controlled and monitored via the user program with the control and feedback interface. System environment The respective module can be used in the following system environments with its counter functions: Applications Components required Central operation with an S7-1500 CPU or 151xSP CPU * Distributed operation with a S7-1500 CPU Distributed operation with a S7-300/400 CPU S7-1500 automation system or ET 200SP CPU * TM Timer DIDQ * S7-1500 Automation System * ET 200 Distributed I/O System * TM Timer DIDQ * S7-300/400 automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * TM Timer DIDQ Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Direct access to feedback interface of the technology module in the I/O data Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration (only ET 200SP) Note A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the TM Timer DIDQ. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 81 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.3 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) 2.3.2 Counting with incremental encoder You can use a few channels of a TM Timer DIDQ for simple counting tasks with an incremental encoder. Counting refers to the recording and adding up of events. The channels configured as counters each acquire the two incremental signals and evaluate these accordingly. Count direction The technology module can count up and down with an incremental encoder. You can invert the counting direction to adapt it to the process. Counting limits The counting limits define the counter value range used. The minimum counter value is -2147483648 (-231). The maximum counter value is 2147483647 (231-1). The respective counter counts continuously. At an overflow, the counter jumps to the other counting limit in each case and continues counting. The counter value cannot be influenced by the user program. Parameter assignment For use of a counter for an incremental encoder, two digital inputs each of a channel group are combined. For this purpose, you choose the configuration "Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted)" in the channel parameters for the respective group. Note Counters of the TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V The number of available counters of the TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V is dependent on the channel configuration. In order to use 4 counters, you must choose the use of 8 inputs in the channel configuration. If you choose the use of 3 inputs, you can use 1 counter. Other channel configurations do not allow any counter use. Counter value feedback The current counter value is indicated in the feedback interface in the TEC_IN value (DIm). DIm corresponds to the first of the two grouped digital inputs in each case. For the second digital input, "0" is returned in the value TEC_IN (DIm+1). Counting, measurement and position detection 82 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.3 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) 2.3.3 Counting with pulse encoder You can use a few channels of a TM Timer DIDQ for simple counting tasks with a pulse encoder. Counting refers to the recording and adding up of events. The channels configured as counters each acquire one pulse signal and evaluate this accordingly. Count direction The technology module can count up and down with a pulse encoder. Counting limits The counting limits define the counter value range used. The minimum counter value is -2147483648 (-231). The maximum counter value is 2147483647 (231-1). The respective counter counts continuously. At an overflow, the counter jumps to the other counting limit in each case and continues counting. The counter value cannot be influenced by the user program. Parameter assignment For use of a counter for a pulse encoder, you choose the configuration "Use inputs individually" or "Use input/output individually" in the channel parameters for the respective group. You can configure the first digital input of a group as a counter. Note Counters of the TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V The number of available counters of the TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V is dependent on the channel configuration. In order to use 4 counters, you must choose the use of 8 inputs in the channel configuration. If you choose the use of 3 inputs, you can use 1 counter. Other channel configurations do not allow any counter use. Counter value feedback The current counter value is indicated in the feedback interface in the TEC_IN value (DIm). DIm corresponds to the respective digital input. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 83 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.3 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) 2.3.4 24 V count signals Count signals of 24 V incremental encoders The 24 V incremental encoder returns the 24 V signals A and B to the technology module. The A and B signals are phase-shifted by 90. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of an 24 V incremental encoder: The technology module detects the count direction by evaluating the sequence of edges of the A and B signals. You can specify an inversion of the count direction. Signal evaluation The two phase-shifted signals of an incremental encoder are evaluated four times. With quadruple evaluation, the positive and negative edges of signal A and signal B are evaluated. Whether count pulses are generated in an upward or downward direction depends on the edge direction of the one signal and the level of the other signal in the meantime. The figure below shows an example of the quadruple evaluation of 24 V count signals: Count signals of 24 V pulse encoders An encoder, for example, a proximity switch (BERO) or a light barrier, returns only one count signal that is connected to the digital input of a counter. You can count the positive or the negative edges of the signal. Counting, measurement and position detection 84 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.3 Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ) 2.3.5 Isochronous mode The TM Timer DIDQ supports the system function "Isochronous mode". This system function enables counter values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input and output data and the processing in the module are synchronized with each other. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the module's internal cycle. The counter value and status bits are detected at time Ti and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Additional information You will find detailed description of the isochronous mode: In the Isochronous mode function manual as a download from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) . In the PROFINET with STEP 7 function manual as a download from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 85 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.1 Overview of applications Introduction You configure the digital module and assign its parameters using the configuration software. The module's functions are controlled and monitored via the user program with the control and feedback interface. System environment The respective module can be used in the following system environments: Applications Components required Central operation with a S7-1500 CPU or ET 200SP CPU * Distributed operation with a S7-1500 CPU Distributed operation with a S7-300/400 CPU Distributed operation in a third-party system S7-1500 automation system or ET 200SP CPU * Digital module * S7-1500 Automation System * ET 200 Distributed I/O System * Digital module * S7-300/400 automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * Digital module * Third-party automation system * ET 200 distributed I/O system * Digital module Configuration software In the user program STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Direct access to the control and feedback interface of the digital module in the I/O data Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal): Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration STEP 7: Device configuration and parameter setting with hardware configuration (ET 200SP) or GSD file (ET 200MP) Third-party configuration software: Device configuration and parameter settings with GSD file Note A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the digital module. Counting, measurement and position detection 86 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.2 Counting with pulse encoders Counting refers to the detection and summation of events. The modules' counters record and evaluate pulse signals. The counting direction can be specified using encoder or pulse signals or through the configuration. You can use feedback bits to switch the digital outputs of digital output modules at defined counter values. You can configure the characteristics of the counters using the functionalities described below. Counter limits The counter limits define the counter value range used. The counter limits are configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program. See the module's device manual for the maximum and minimum configurable counter limits. You can configure whether the counting processes are terminated or continue when a counter limit is violated (automatic gate stop). Start value You can configure a start value within the counter limits. The start value can be modified during runtime with the user program. Gate control Opening and closing the hardware gate and software gate defines the period of time during which the counting signals are recordd. The hardware gate is controlled externally via a digital input of the digital module. The hardware gate can be enabled through parameter assignment. The software gate is controlled via the user program. A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the digital module. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 87 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.3 Behavior at the counting limits Violation of a counting limit The high counting limit is violated when the current counter value is equal to the high counting limit and another upward count pulse is received. The counter low limit is violated when the current counter value is equal to the counter low limit and another downward count pulse is received. For digital modules of ET 200SP and ET 200AL, the corresponding event bit is set in the feedback interface when the limit is exceeded. You can reset an event bit with the respective control bit: Counting limit violated Event bit Reset bit High counting limit EVENT_OFLW RES_EVENT_OFLW Low counting limit EVENT_UFLW RES_EVENT_UFLW Note A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the digital module. You can configure whether or not you want to continue counting to another counter limit after a counting limit violation. Note The high counting limit and the start value define the value range of the counter: Value range of the counter = (high limit - start value) + 1 Counting, measurement and position detection 88 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) Examples The figure below shows an example for terminating counting after overflow and setting the counter to the opposite counting limit: The figure below shows an example for continuing the counting process after an overflow and setting the counter to the opposite counting limit: Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 89 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.4 Gate control Many applications require counting processes to be started or stopped in accordance with other events. In such cases, counting is started and stopped using the gate function. The digital modules have two gates for each counting channel. These define the resulting internal gate: Software gate Hardware gate Note The hardware gate is not available for all digital modules. 2.4.4.1 Software gate The software gate of the channel is opened and closed with the SW_GATEcontrol bit. Note A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the digital module. 2.4.4.2 Hardware gate The hardware gate is optional. You open and close the hardware gate using signals at the corresponding digital input. Note A configurable input delay delays the control signal of the digital input. The status of a DIm digital input is indicated by the respective STS_DIm feedback bit. A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the digital module. Opening and closing the hardware gate The figure below shows an example of opening and closing with a digital input: As long as the digital input is set, the hardware gate is open and the count pulses are counted. The hardware gate is closed when the digital input is reset. The counter value stays constant and ignores any further count pulses. Counting, measurement and position detection 90 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.4.3 Internal gate Internal gate The internal gate is open if the software gate is open and the hardware gate is open or has not been configured. The status of the internal gate is indicated by the STS_GATE feedback bit. A description of the control and feedback interface is available in the device manual for the digital module. If the internal gate is open, counting is started. If the internal gate is closed, all other count pulses are ignored and counting is stopped. If you want to control a counting process with the hardware gate only, the software gate must be open. If you do not configure a hardware gate, the hardware gate is considered to be always open. In this case, you open and close the internal gate with the software gate only. Hardware gate Software gate Internal gate Open/not configured open open Open/not configured closed closed closed open closed closed closed closed The internal gate can also be automatically closed upon violation of a counting limit. The software or hardware gate must then be closed and reopened to continue counting. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 91 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.5 Comparison values Depending on the module, you can define up to two comparison values that control a feedback bit for the channel, independent of the user program. When there are two comparison values, comparison value 1 must be greater than comparison value 0. The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program. The comparison values are compared with the current counter value. If the counter value meets the configured comparison condition, the respective STS_DQ feedback bit is set. You can use the respective feedback bit in order to switch a digital output module's digital output. You can make setting the respective STS_DQ feedback bit dependent on one of the following comparison events. See the device manual for the digital module to find out which comparison events can be configured. Setting between comparison value and high counter limit The respective STS_DQ feedback bit is set to 1 when: Comparison value <= counter value <= high counter limit Counting, measurement and position detection 92 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) Setting between comparison value and low counter limit The respective STS_DQ feedback bit is set to 1 when: Low counter limit <= counter value <= comparison value Setting between comparison value 0 and comparison value 1 The respective STS_DQ feedback bit is set to 1 when: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 93 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) Not setting between comparison value 0 and comparison value 1 The respective STS_DQ feedback bit is set to 1 when: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 Counting, measurement and position detection 94 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.6 Interrupts Hardware interrupt The modules can trigger a hardware interrupt in the CPU for certain events during operation. Process interrupts are enabled via the parameter assignment. Refer to the device manual for the module for information about the events that can trigger a hardware interrupt during operation. Note Hardware interrupts for counting are not available at all the modules. 2.4.7 24 V count signals 24 V pulse encoder count signals An encoder, for example an initiator (BERO) or a light barrier, returns a count signal that is connected to the terminal of a counter. For some modules you change the count direction via the parameter assignment of the DI function. The figure below shows an example of the time profile of the signals of a 24 V pulse encoder with direction signal and the resulting count pulses: Note A signal for direction detection is not connectable for all digital modules. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 95 The basics of counting, measurement and position input 2.4 Basics of counting (digital modules) 2.4.8 Isochronous mode The digital module supports the system function "Isochronous mode". This system function enables counter values to be acquired in a defined system cycle. In isochronous mode, the cycle of the user program, the transmission of the input and output data and the processing in the module are synchronized with each other. Data processing The data that was transmitted to the module in the current bus cycle via the control interface takes effect when it is processed in the module's internal cycle. The counter value and status bits are detected at time Ti and made available in the feedback interface for retrieval in the current bus cycle. Additional information You will find detailed description of the isochronous mode: In the Isochronous mode function manual as a download from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755401) . In the PROFINET with STEP 7 function manual as a download from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Counting, measurement and position detection 96 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.1 3 Convention Technology module: We use the term "technology module" in this documentation both for the technology modules TM Count and TM PosInput and the technology component of the compact CPUs. 3.2 High_Speed_Counter technology object STEP 7 (TIA Portal) supports you in the configuration, commissioning and diagnostics of counting and measuring functions for the following technology modules with the "Technology objects" function: You configure the High_Speed_Counter technology object in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with the settings for the counting and measuring functions. The corresponding High_Speed_Counter instruction is programmed in the user program. This instruction supplies the control and feedback interface of the technology module. The High_Speed_Counter technology object corresponds to the instance DB of the High_Speed_Counter instruction. The configuration of the counting and measuring functions is saved in the technology object. The technology object is located in the folder "PLC > Technology objects". The High_Speed_Counter technology object can be used for technology modules of both the S7-1500 and ET 200SP systems. Operating mode In order to assign the technology module parameters using the technology object, you specify the operating mode (Page 181) "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object" in the hardware configuration of the technology module. This selection is already preset. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 97 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.3 Overview of the configuration steps 3.3 Overview of the configuration steps Introduction The overview below shows the basic procedure for configuring the counting and measuring functions of the technology module with the High_Speed_Counter technology object. Requirement (TM Count and TM PosInput) Before you can use the High_Speed_Counter technology object, a project with an S7-1500 CPU or an ET 200SP CPU must be created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) . Requirement (Compact CPU) Before you can use the High_Speed_Counter technology object, a project with a Compact CPU S7-1500 must be created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Procedure Proceed in the recommended sequence outlined below: Step Description 1 Configure a technology module (Page 175) 2 Add technology object (Page 99) 3 Configure a technology object according to your application (Page 101) 4 Call instruction in the user program (Page 124) 5 Load to CPU 6 Commissioning the technology object (Page 138) 7 Diagnostics of the technology object (Page 140) Counting, measurement and position detection 98 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.4 Add technology object 3.4 Add technology object Adding a technology object in the project navigation When a technology object is added, an instance DB is created for the instruction of this technology object. The configuration of the technology object is stored in this instance DB. Requirement (TM Count and TM PosInput) A project with a CPU S7-1500 has been created. Requirement (Compact CPU) A project with a Compact CPU S7-1500 has been created. Procedure To add a technology object, proceed as follows: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Technology objects" folder. 3. Double-click on "Add new object". The "Add new object" dialog opens. 4. Select the "Counting and measurement" technology. 5. Select the "High_Speed_Counter" object. 6. Enter an individual name for the technology object in the "Name" text box. 7. Click "Additional information" if you want to add your own information to the technology object. 8. Confirm with "OK". Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 99 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.4 Add technology object Result The new technology object has now been created and stored in the project tree in the "Technology objects" folder. Object Description Configuration (Page 101) In the configuration dialog: * Assignment of technology module and channel Technology object parameter settings for counting and measurement functions When you change the configuration of the technology object, you must download the technology object and the hardware configuration to the CPU. * Commissioning (Page 138) Commissioning and function test of the technology object: Simulating parameters of the High_Speed_Counter instruction and monitoring the effects Diagnostics (Page 140) Monitoring the counting and measuring functions Counting, measurement and position detection 100 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.1 Working with the configuration dialog You configure the properties of the technology object in the configuration window. Proceed as follows to open the configuration window of the technology object: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click on the "Configuration" object. The configuration is divided into the following categories: Basic parameters The basic parameters include the selection of the technology module and the number of the counting channel for which the technology object is configured. Extended parameters The extended parameters include the parameters for adapting the counting and measuring functions and for setting the characteristics of the digital inputs and digital outputs. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 101 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Configuration window icons Icons in the area navigation of the configuration show additional details about the status of the configuration: The configuration contains default values and is complete. The configuration contains only default values. With these default values, you can use the technology object without additional changes. The configuration contains values set by the user or automatically adapted values and is complete All text boxes of the configuration contain valid values and at least one default value was changed. The configuration is incomplete or incorrect At least one text box or drop-down list contains an invalid value. The corresponding field or the drop-down list is displayed on a red background. Click the roll-out error message to indicate the cause of error. Counting, measurement and position detection 102 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.2 Basic parameters You can establish the connection between the High_Speed_Counter technology object and the technology module under "Basic parameters". Module (TM Count and TM PosInput) You select the technology module in a subsequent dialog box. All technology modules (central or distributed) that are configured for use with a "Counting and measurement" technology object under the S7-1500 CPU or ET 200SP CPU are available for selection. After selecting the technology module, you can open the device configuration associated with the technology module by clicking the"Device configuration" button. The technology module parameter settings required for the use of the technology object are made in the "Extended parameters" of the technology object. Module (Compact CPU) You can select a high-speed counter for the Compact CPU in a subsequent dialog. You can choose any of the high-speed counters which are enabled and configured for use with a technology object from "Counting and measuring". After selecting the high-speed counter, you can open the device configuration associated with the Compact CPU by clicking the"Device configuration" button. The parameter settings of the high-speed counter required for the use of the technology object are made in the "Extended parameters" of the technology object. Channel For a technology module with several counting channels, you can also select the number of the counting channel for which the High_Speed_Counter technology object is to be valid. Note A channel can be assigned to only one technology object. A channel that is already assigned to a technology object can no longer be selected. Synchronization of the parameter values If, after assignment of the channel to the technology object, there is an inconsistency between the parameter values in the property dialog and in the technology object, a button with a corresponding inquiry appears. When you click the button, the parameter values in the property dialog are overwritten by the parameter values in the property dialog within STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The current parameter values of the technology object are displayed in the property dialog. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 103 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.3 Counter inputs (High_Speed_Counter) Signal type You can choose from the following signal types (Page 71): Symbol Signal type Meaning Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) An incremental encoder with phase-shifted A * and B signals is connected. * Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Pulse (A) and direction (B) Pulse (A) Count up (A), count down (B) Additional option-specific parameters An incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals A and B and a zero signal N is connected. A pulse encoder (signal A) with direction signal (signal B) is connected. Invert direction * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard * Signal evaluation * Invert direction * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard * Reaction to signal N * Frequency of synchronization * Frequency of the Capture function * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard A pulse encoder (signal A) without direction * signal is connected. You can specify the * count direction by means of the control interface (Page 219). Signals for counting up (signal A) and down (signal B) are connected. Signal evaluation Filter frequency Sensor type or Interface standard * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard Invert direction You can invert the counting direction to adapt it to the process. The inverting of the direction is configurable and active for the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Counting, measurement and position detection 104 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Signal evaluation By configuring signal evaluation (Page 76), you can specify which edges of the signals are counted. You can select from the following options: Symbol Signal evaluation Meaning Single (Page 76) (default) The edges of signal A are evaluated during a low level of signal B. Double (Page 77) Each edge of signal A is evaluated. Quadruple (Page 78) Each edge of signals A and B is evaluated. The parameter can be assigned with the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Filter frequency By configuring the filter frequency, you suppress interferences at the counting inputs A, B and N. The selected filter frequency is based on a pulse/break ratio of between around 40:60 and around 60:40. This results in a specific minimum pulse/break time. Signal changes with a duration shorter than the minimum pulse/break time are suppressed. You can select from the following filter frequencies: Filter frequency Minimum pulse/break time 100 Hz 4.0ms 200 Hz 2.0 ms 500 Hz 800 s 1 kHz 400 s 2 kHz 200 s 5 kHz 80 s 10 kHz 40 s 20 kHz 20 s 50 kHz 8.0 s 100 kHz (preset for Compact CPU) 4.0 s Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 105 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Filter frequency Minimum pulse/break time 200 kHz** (preset for TM Count) 2.0 s 500 kHz* 0.8 s 1 MHz* (default at TM PosInput) 0.4 s * Only available with TM PosInput ** * Only available with TM Count and TM PosInput Sensor type (TM Count) By configuring the sensor type, you specify how the counter inputs are switched for the TM Count. You can select from the following options: Sensor type Meaning Sourcing output (default) The encoder/sensor switches the inputs A, B and N to 24VDC. Sinking output The encoder/sensor switches the inputs A, B and N to M. Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) The encoder/sensor alternately switches the inputs A, B and N to M and 24VDC. "Push-pull" is usually selected when incremental encoders are used. If using 2-wire sensors, such as light barriers or proximity switches, you need to select the corresponding wiring "sourcing output" or "sinking output". The data sheet of the encoder includes information on whether your incremental encoder is a push-pull encoder. Note If you use a push-pull encoder and the sensor type "Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output)" is configured, you can monitor the encoder signals for wire break. Sensor type (Compact CPU) The "Sourcing output" sensor type is set for the Compact CPU and cannot be changed. The encoder or sensor switches the inputs A, B and N to 24V DC. You can operate both sourcing output encoders as well as push-pull encoders on the Compact CPU. You can find additional information on the sensor type in the data sheet for the encoder. Counting, measurement and position detection 106 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Interface Standard (TM PosInput) You use this parameter to specify whether the encoder outputs symmetric (RS422) or asymmetric (TTL) signals for the TM PosInput. You can select from the following options: Interface standard Meaning RS422, symmetrical (default) The encoder outputs symmetric signals according to the RS422 standard (Page 73). TTL (5 V), asymmetrical The encoder outputs asymmetric 5 V signals according to the TTL standard (Page 71). Note The RS422 standard provides greater interference immunity than the TTL standard. If your incremental or pulse encoder supports the RS422 standard and the TTL standard, we recommend using the RS422 standard. Reaction to signal N You use this parameter to specify which reaction is triggered to signal N. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning No reaction to signal N (default) The counter is not affected by signal N. Synchronization at signal N (Page 44) The counter is set to the start value at signal N. Capture at signal N (Page 34) The counter value is stored in the Capture value at signal N. The use of a digital input and the use of the N signal are not mutually exclusive for the Capture function. If you select the function "Enable synchronization at signal N" for a digital input, the synchronization depends on the level at the digital input. The technology object displays the Capture value at the output parameter CapturedValue. Note You can only select the reaction to signal N if you have selected the "Incremental encoder (A, B, N)" signal type. Note If "Synchronization at signal N" is selected, you can select the function "Enable synchronization at signal N" for a digital input (Page 111). Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 107 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Note For High_Speed_Counter as of V3.0, the following applies: You can choose "Capture at signal N" only in operating mode "Use count value as reference": Frequency of synchronization This parameter is used to define the frequency of the following events: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once (default) The counter is only set at the first signal N or the first configured edge of the digital input. Periodic The counter is set at each signal N or each configured edge of the digital input. Frequency of the Capture function This parameter is used to define the frequency of Capture events for the following functions: Capture at Signal N Capture as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The first configured edge at the respective digital input or first rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Periodic (default) Each configured edge at the respective digital input or each rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Note This parameter is available for High_Speed_Counter as of V3.2. Counting, measurement and position detection 108 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.4 Counter behavior 3.5.4.1 Counting limits and start value High counting limit You limit the counting range by setting the high counting limit. You can enter a value up to 2147483647 (231-1). You must enter a value that lies above the low counting limit. The default setting is "2147483647". Low counting limit You limit the counting range by setting the low counting limit. You can enter a value up to 2147483648 (-231). You must enter a value below the high counting limit. The default setting is "-2147483648". Start value By configuring the start value, you specify the value at which counting is to start and where it is to continue in the case of defined events. You must enter a value between the counting limits or equal to the counting limits. The default setting is "0". Additional information For more information, see Behavior at the counting limits (Page 28) and Counter behavior at gate start (Page 33). 3.5.4.2 Counter behavior at limits and gate start Reaction to violation of a counting limit You can configure the following characteristics for violation of a counting limit (Page 28): Reaction Meaning Stop counting If a counting limit is violated, counting is stopped and the internal gate is closed. To restart counting, you must also close and reopen the software/hardware gate. Continue counting (default) Counting continues either with the start value or at the opposite counting limit, depending on the additional parameter assignment. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 109 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Reset when counting limit is violated You can reset the counter to the following values when a counting limit is violated: Reset the value Meaning To start value The counter value is set to the start value. To opposite counting limit (default) The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. Reaction to gate start You can set the following Reaction to gate start (Page 33): Reaction Meaning Set to start value When the gate is opened, the counter value is set to the start value. Continue with current value (default) When the gate is opened, counting is continued with the last counter value. Counting, measurement and position detection 110 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.5 Behavior of a DI (High_Speed_Counter) Setting function of the DI By configuring a digital input, you specify which functions the digital input triggers at switching. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital input Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Gate start/stop (level-triggered) The level at the respective digital input opens and closes the hardware gate (Page 30). * Input delay * Select level Gate start (edge-triggered) Gate stop (edge-triggered) Synchronization (Page 39) The configured edge at the respective digital input opens the hardware gate (Page 30). The configured edge at the respective digital input closes the hardware gate (Page 30). The configured edge at the respective digital input sets the counter to the start value. The technology object indicates whether a synchronization has occurred at the output parameter SyncStatus. Enable synchronization at signal N The active level at the respective digital input enables synchronization of the counter at signal N (Page 44). Capture The configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current counter value (Page 34) as a Capture value. The use of a digital input and the use of the N signal are not mutually exclusive for the Capture function. Digital input without function * Input delay * Edge selection * Input delay * Edge selection * Input delay * Edge selection * Frequency of synchronization * Input delay * Select level * Input delay * Edge selection * Frequency of the Capture function The technology object displays the Capture value at the output parameter CapturedValue. * Behavior of counter value after Capture No technological function is assigned to the respective digital input. * Input delay You can read the signal state of the digital input via the respective static variable of the technology object: * UserStatusFlags.StatusDI0 * UserStatusFlags.StatusDI1 * UserStatusFlags.StatusDI2 Note With the exception of "Digital input without function", each function can only be used once for each counter, and if used for one digital input is not available to the others. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 111 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Note For High_Speed_Counter as of V3.0, the following applies: You can choose the "Capture" function only in operating mode "Use count value as reference". Input delay (TM Count and TM PosInput) You use this parameter to suppress signal interference at the digital inputs. Changes to the signal are only detected if they remain stable for longer than the configured input delay time. You can select from the following input delays: None 0.05 ms 0.1 ms (default) 0.4 ms 0.8 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms 12.8 ms 20 ms Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Note You configure the input delay under "Behavior of DI0" for all digital inputs together. The input delay is also displayed under "Behavior of DI1" and for TM Count also under "Behavior of DI2". Counting, measurement and position detection 112 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Input delay (Compact CPU) You use this parameter to suppress interference at the digital inputs of the DIn signals. Changes to the signal are only detected if they remain stable for longer than the configured input delay time. You can configure the input delay for a digital input of a Compact CPU in the Inspector window of the device configuration under "Properties > DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel n". You can select from the following input delays: None 0.05 ms 0.1 ms 0.4 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms (default) 12.8 ms 20 ms Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Select level You use this parameter to specify the level at which the digital input is active. You can select from the following options: Level Meaning Active with high level (default) The respective digital input is active when it is set. Active with low level The respective digital input is active when it is not set. The parameter can be set for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) Enable synchronization at signal N Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 113 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Edge selection You can use this parameter to specify the edge of the digital input at which the configured function is triggered. The following options may be available depending on the function selected: At rising edge (default) At falling edge At rising and falling edge The parameter can be set for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start (edge-triggered) Gate stop (edge-triggered) Synchronization Capture Note At rising and falling edge" can only be configured for the "Capture" function. Frequency of synchronization This parameter is used to define the frequency of the following events: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as a function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once (default) The counter is only set at the first signal N or the first configured edge of the digital input. Periodic The counter is set at each signal N or each configured edge of the digital input. Counting, measurement and position detection 114 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Frequency of the Capture function This parameter is used to define the frequency of Capture events for the following functions: Capture at Signal N Capture as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The first configured edge at the respective digital input or first rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Periodic (default) Each configured edge at the respective digital input or each rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Note This parameter is available for High_Speed_Counter as of V3.2. Behavior of counter value after Capture You can configure the following characteristics for the counter after a capture event (Page 34): Reaction Meaning Continue counting (default) After saving the current counter value as Capture value, counting is continued unchanged. Set to start value and continue counting After saving the current counter value as Capture value, counting is continued with the start value. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 115 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.6 Behavior of a DQ (High_Speed_Counter) Operating mode (High_Speed_Counter V3.0 or higher) The operating mode determines which value comparison functions work. Operating mode Meaning Use count value as reference (default) The comparison functions and hardware interrupts for compare events work with the counter value. This functionality corresponds to the functionality of the High_Speed_Counter in versions before V3.0. Use measured value as reference The comparison functions and hardware interrupts for compare events work with the measured value. Note You configure the operating mode under "Behavior of DQ0" for both digital outputs together. The operating mode is also displayed under "Behavior of DQ1". Set output With the parameter assignment of a digital output, you specify the condition upon which the digital output switches. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital output (Page 48) Meaning in operating mode "Use count value as reference" Additional option-specific parameters Between comparison value and high limit (default) The respective digital output is active if: Comparison value <= counter value <= high counting limit Between comparison value and low limit The respective digital output is active if: Low counting limit <= counter value <= comparison value Between comparison value 0 and 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 The respective digital output is active once for the configured time and count direction when the counter value reaches the comparison value. * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Pulse duration * Hysteresis (in increments) Counting, measurement and position detection 116 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Function of a digital output (Page 48) Meaning in operating mode "Use count value as reference" After set command from CPU until comparison value Additional option-specific parameters When a set command is sent from the CPU, the * respective digital output is active until the counter * value is equal to the comparison value. * * Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). Comparison value 0 Comparison value 1 Count direction Hysteresis (in increments) -- Note DQ0 of a counter of a Compact CPU With a Compact CPU, the respective digital output DQ0 is available via the feedback interface, but not as a physical output. Note You can only select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" function for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Note The "At comparison value for a pulse duration" and "After set command from CPU until comparison value" functions only switch the digital output in question if a count pulse reaches the comparison value. When the counter value is set, e.g. by synchronization, the digital output does not switch. Function of a digital output (Page 56) in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" Meaning Measured value >= comparison value (default) The respective digital output is active if the meas- * ured value is greater than or equal to the compari* son value. Measured value <= comparison value The respective digital output is active if the measured value is less than or equal to the comparison value. Between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= measured value <= comparison value 1 Not between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 1 <= measured value <= comparison value 0 Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). Additional option-specific parameters Comparison value 0 Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 -- Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 117 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Note You can select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" functions only for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Comparison value 0(TM Count and TM PosInput) Operating mode "Use count value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 48), you specify the counter value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is greater than or equal to the low counting limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Operating mode "Use measured value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The minimum value is -7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "0.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Comparison value 0(Compact CPU) Operating mode "Use count value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the Comparison value (Page 48), you specify the counter value at which the STS_DQ0 bit is set in the feedback interface of the selected comparison event. The digital output DQ0 is not available as a physical output in a Compact CPU. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is greater than or equal to the low counting limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Operating mode "Use measured value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the Comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the STS_DQ0 bit is set in the feedback interface of the selected comparison event. The digital output DQ0 is not available as a physical output in a Compact CPU. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The minimum value is -7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "0.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Counting, measurement and position detection 118 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Comparison value 1 Operating mode "Use count value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 48), you specify the counter value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is smaller than or equal to the high counting limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "10". Operating mode "Use measured value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The maximum value is 7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "10.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Count direction You use this parameter to specify the count direction for which the selected function is valid. You can select from the following options: Count direction Meaning In both directions (default) The comparison and switching of the respective digital output take place regardless of the count direction. Up The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts up. Down The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts down. The parameter can be configured for the following functions: At comparison value for a pulse duration After set command from CPU until comparison value Pulse duration By configuring the pulse duration for the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration", you specify the number of milliseconds for which the respective digital output is active. If you enter "0" and the counter value corresponds to the comparison value, the digital output remains active until the next count pulse. You can enter a value between 0.0 and 6553.5. The default setting is "500.0", which is equivalent to a pulse duration of 0.5 s. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 119 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Hysteresis (in increments) By configuring the hysteresis (Page 66), you can define a range around the comparison values. For the functions "Between comparison value and upper counter limit" and "Between comparison value and lower counter limit" the hysteresis also applies at the counter limits. Within the hysteresis range, the digital outputs cannot switch again until the counter value is outside the range. Choose a small enough hysteresis. When the hysteresis range, starting from the configured comparison value, spans the entire counter value range, proper functioning of the comparison values cannot be guaranteed. If a comparison value lies so close to the counter limit that the hysteresis range would extend beyond this counter limit, the hysteresis range ends at it. If you enter "0", the hysteresis is turned off. You can enter a value between 0and 255. The default setting is "0". Note The following applies for High_Speed_Counter as of V3.0: You configure the hysteresis under "Behavior of DQ0" for both digital outputs together. The hysteresis is also displayed under "Behavior of DQ1". The hysteresis is only available in operating mode "Use count value as reference". Counting, measurement and position detection 120 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter 3.5.7 Specify measured value (High_Speed_Counter) Measured variable This parameter is used to specify the measured variable (Page 59) to be provided by the technology module. The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. You can select from the following options: Measured variable Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Frequency (default) The measured variable shows the number of increments per second. The value is a floating point number (REAL). The unit is Hz. * Update time * Update time The measured variable is a velocity. * Examples of a velocity measurement can be found in the explanation of the "Increments per unit" parameter. Update time * Time base for velocity measurement * Increments per unit The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. Period The measured variable is the average period between two increments. The value is an integer (DINT). The unit is s. The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. Velocity The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. Update time By configuring the update time (Page 59) in milliseconds, you can specify the time interval between two measured value updates. The update time and the signal type effect the accuracy of the measurement. In the case of update times of at least 100 ms, the effect of the signal type is negligible. In the case of update times of less than 100 ms, you achieve maximum measurement accuracy using the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) with Signal evaluation "Single" Incremental encoder (A, B, N) with Signal evaluation "Single" Pulse (A) and direction (B) Pulse (A) In the case of other signal types, measurement accuracy depends on the encoder and cable used. If you enter "0", the measured value is updated once per module-internal cycle. Up to three decimal places can be entered. A value from 0.0 to 25000.0 is permissible. The default setting is "10.0". Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 121 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.5 Configuring the High_Speed_Counter Time base for velocity measurement This parameter defines the time base on which the velocity is to be returned. You can select from the following options: 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms 1s 60 s The default setting is "60 s". Increments per unit You can use this parameter to define the number of count pulses per relevant unit that the incremental or absolute encoder supplies for the velocity measurement. The number of count pulses depends on the configured signal evaluation. You can enter a value between 1 and 65535. Example 1: You encoder delivers 4000 count pulses for travel over one meter. The velocity is to be measured in meters per second. "Double" is configured as signal evaluation. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 8000 Time base for velocity measurement: 1 s Example 2: Your encoder delivers 4096 count pulses per revolution. The velocity is to be measured in revolutions per minute. "Single" is configured as the signal evaluation. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 4096 Time base for velocity measurement: 60 s Counting, measurement and position detection 122 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.1 High_Speed_Counter instruction High_Speed_Counter The High_Speed_Counter instruction is part of the High_Speed_Counter technology object. It supplies the control and feedback interface of the technology module. The High_Speed_Counter instruction thereby forms the software interface between the user program and the technology module. It must be called cyclically from the user program in order to synchronize the input and output data. The High_Speed_Counter instruction can be used for the technology modules of both S71500 and ET 200SP. The modules can be used centrally and decentrally. The instruction applies in each case to the channel of the technology module that was assigned to the associated technology object. Additional information Description High_Speed_Counter (Page 125) High_Speed_Counter input parameters (Page 131) High_Speed_Counter output parameters (Page 132) Error codes of parameter ErrorID (Page 134) High_Speed_Counter static variables (Page 136) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 123 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.2 Call instruction in the user program The High_Speed_Counter instruction can be called once for each counter in the cycle or, alternatively, in a time-controlled program. The call is not permitted in an event-controlled interrupt program. Procedure Proceed as follows to call the instruction in the user program: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Program blocks" folder. 3. Double-click the OB for cyclic program execution. The block is opened in the work area. 4. In the "Instructions" window, open the "Technology" group and the "Counting and measurement" folder. The folder contains the instruction. 5. Select the instruction and drag it to your OB. The "Call options" dialog opens. 6. Select a technology object from the "Name" list or enter the name for a new technology object. 7. Confirm with "OK". Result If the technology object does not exist yet, it is added. The instruction is added in the OB. The technology object is assigned to this call of the instruction. Note If you click one of the buttons "Configuration", "Commissioning" or "Diagnostics" in the user interface of the instruction, the respective editor opens. Counting, measurement and position detection 124 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.3 Description High_Speed_Counter Description The High_Speed_Counter instruction is used to control the technology module counting and measuring functions via the user program. Call The instruction High_Speed_Counter must be called once per counter, either cyclically or in a time-controlled program. The call is not permitted in an event-controlled interrupt program. Operating principle Counter value: The counter value is available at the output parameter CountValue. The counter value is updated at every call of the High_Speed_Counter instruction. Measured value: The technology module updates the measured value asynchronously to the instruction call based on the configured update time. The measured value last determined by the technology module is updated at the output parameter MeasuredValue each time the instruction is called. The measured value and the counter value are available in parallel in the feedback interface. Capture: The output parameter CaptureStatus = TRUE indicates a valid Capture value at the output parameter CapturedValue. A Capture value is captured under the following conditions: - A digital input has the parameter assignment "Capture" - CaptureEnable = TRUE - Edge at digital input with the Capture function The output parameter CaptureStatus is reset by a negative edge at the input parameter CaptureEnable. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 125 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Synchronization: The output parameter SyncStatus = TRUE indicates that a synchronization has occurred. The counter value is synchronized under the following conditions: - A digital input has the parameter assignment "Synchronization" or the incremental encoder has the parameter assignment "Synchronization at signal N" - SyncEnable = TRUE - The static tag SyncUpDirection (or SyncDownDirection) = TRUE - Edge at the digital input with the synchronization function or positive edge of the signal N at the encoder input The output parameter SyncStatus is reset by a negative edge at - the input parameter SyncEnable or - the static tag SyncDownDirection or - the static tag SyncUpDirection Parameter changes via the user program Proceed as follows to modify parameters using the user program: 1. Check based on the respective Set tag to determine whether the technology object is ready for the parameter change (Set tag = FALSE) or whether a change job is still running (Set tag = TRUE). The following Set tags in UserCmdFlags are available for this in the static tags of the technology object instance DB: - SetReferenceValue0 - SetReferenceValue1 - SetUpperLimit - SetLowerLimit - SetCountValue - SetStartValue - SetNewDirection 2. If the technology object is ready for the parameter change, modify the relevant static tag. The following static tags of the technology object instance DB are available for this: - NewReferenceValue0 / NewReferenceValue0_M (for SetReferenceValue0) - NewReferenceValue1 / NewReferenceValue1_M (for SetReferenceValue1) - NewUpperLimit - NewLowerLimit - NewCountValue - NewStartValue - NewDirection Counting, measurement and position detection 126 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3. Set the relevant Set tag for execution of the change command. 4. Use the output parameter Error to check whether an error has occurred. If no errors have occurred and the Set tag has been automatically reset by the technology object, the parameter change was successful. Note Changed counting limit If the new high counting limit is less than the current counter value, the counter value is set to the low counting limit or the start value according on the parameter assignment. If the new low counting limit is greater than the current counter value, the counter value is set to the high counting limit or the start value according to the parameter assignment. Operating mode (High_Speed_Counter V3.0 or higher) Configure the operating mode in the technology object under "Behavior of DQ0". The operating mode is indicated by the output parameter CompareMeasuredValue: State Description FALSE Operating mode "Use count value as reference" The comparison functions work with the counter value. The following static variables are specifically used in this operating mode: * NewReferenceValue0 * NewReferenceValue1 * CurReferenceValue0 * CurReferenceValue1 The four specific static variables of operating mode "Use measured value as reference" are ignored. TRUE Operating mode "Use measured value as reference": The comparison functions work with the measured value. The following static variables are specifically used in this operating mode: * NewReferenceValue0_M * NewReferenceValue1_M * CurReferenceValue0_M * CurReferenceValue1_M The four specific static variables of operating mode "Use count value as reference" are ignored. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 127 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Acknowledgment of events You acknowledge signaled events using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck . EventAck must stay set until the technology object has reset the status bits of the following events of the count channel: CompResult0 CompResult1 ZeroStatus PosOverflow NegOverflow Status of the digital inputs (TM Count and TM PosInput) You can obtain the status of the digital inputs with the static tags StatusDI0, StatusDI1 or StatusDI2. Status of the digital inputs (Compact CPU) You can obtain the status of the digital inputs with the static tags StatusDI0 and StatusDI1. When a digital input of the Compact CPU is not used for a counter, you can use it via the user program. Use of digital outputs by the user program (TM Count and TM PosInput) You can set the digital outputs with the High_Speed_Counter instruction, If the "Use by user program" setting is configured for "Set output". If the "After set command from CPU until comparison value" setting is configured for "Set output". if you set the corresponding static tag ManualCtrlDQm (temporary overwrite). The static tags SetDQ0 and SetDQ1 only have an effect in these cases. In the first and third case, DQm follows the value of SetDQm. In the second case, DQm is set with a positive edge of SetDQm. DQm is reset when the counter value corresponds to the comparison value or at a negative edge of SetDQm. Counting, measurement and position detection 128 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Use digital outputs by user program (Compact CPU) You can set the DQ1 digital output with the High_Speed_Counter instruction. If the "Use by user program" setting is configured for "Set output". If the "After set command from CPU until comparison value" setting is configured for "Set output". if you set the corresponding static tag ManualCtrlDQ1 (temporary overwrite). The static tag SetDQ1 only has an effect in these cases. In the first and third case, DQ1 follows the value of SetDQ1. In the second case, DQ1 is set and reset with a positive edge of SetDQ1 when the counter value corresponds to the comparison value or at a negative edge of SetDQ1. Note Before you can set a physical digital output of the Compact CPU with the High_Speed_Counter instruction, you have to assign the DQ1 signal to the desired digital output. You can set the DQ0 signal using the High_Speed_Counter instruction with the static tag StatusDQ0. If the "Use by user program" setting is configured for "Set output". If the "After set command from CPU until comparison value" setting is configured for "Set output". If you set the static tag ManualCtrlDQ0 (temporary overwrite). The static tag SetDQ0 only has an effect in these cases. In the first and third case, DQ0 follows the value of SetDQ0. In the second case, StatusDQ0 is set and reset with an edge (positive or negative) by SetDQ0 and is reset when the counter value corresponds to the comparison value. Note The digital output DQ0 is not available as a physical output. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 129 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Reaction to error If an error has occurred during the call of the instruction or in the technology module, the output parameter Error is set. More detailed error information can be read at the output parameter ErrorID. Eliminate the cause of the error and acknowledge the error message by setting the input parameter ErrorAck. When no more errors are pending, the technology object resets the output parameter Error . No new error is signaled until you acknowledge the previous error. Changing the count direction The count direction can only be changed by the user program if "Pulse (A)" is configured as the signal type. In all other cases, the count direction is determined by the input signals of the technology module. The count direction is controlled by the static tag NewDirection: +1: Upward count direction -1: Downward count direction To execute the change command, you need to set the static tag SetNewDirection = TRUE. Counting, measurement and position detection 130 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.4 High_Speed_Counter input parameters Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description SwGate INPUT BOOL FALSE Control software gate: * Positive edge: Software gate opens * Negative edge: Software gate closes Together with the hardware gate, the SwGate enables the internal gate. CaptureEnable INPUT BOOL FALSE Enable Capture function After the enable, a Capture event occurs at the next configured edge at the relevant digital input. A negative edge at CaptureEnable resets the output parameter CaptureStatus. A negative edge at CaptureEnable resets the enable even if no Capture event has occurred. Irrespective of CaptureEnable the last value is retained at the output parameter CapturedValue until the next Capture event. SyncEnable INPUT BOOL FALSE Enable synchronization The direction enabled for synchronization is indicated in the static tags SyncUpDirection and SyncDownDirection. A negative edge at SyncEnable resets the output parameter SyncStatus . ErrorAck INPUT BOOL FALSE High_Speed_Counter up to V3.0: A positive edge acknowledges the status reported. High_Speed_Counter as of V3.1: A high level acknowledges the error status reported. EventAck SetCountValue INPUT INOUT BOOL BOOL FALSE FALSE A positive edge resets the following output parameters: * CompResult0 * CompResult1 * ZeroStatus * PosOverflow * NegOverflow A positive edge starts the transfer of the new counter value in the static tag NewCountValue to the technology module. The counter value takes effect immediately after the transfer. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 131 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.5 High_Speed_Counter output parameters Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description StatusHW OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit technology module: The module is configured and ready for operation. The module data is valid. StatusGate OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Internal gate is released if parameter is set StatusUp OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: The last count pulse incremented the counter and took place no more than 0.5 s ago StatusDown OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: The last count pulse decremented the counter and took place no more than 0.5 s ago CompResult0 OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Compare event for DQ0 occurred (status change) based on the selected comparison condition. If the counter value is set to the start value in operating mode "Use count value as reference", CompResult0 is not set. The positive edge of the input parameter EventAck is used to reset CompResult0 . CompResult1 OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Compare event for DQ1 occurred (status change) based on the selected comparison condition. If the counter value is set to the start value in operating mode "Use count value as reference", CompResult1 is not set. The positive edge of the input parameter EventAck is used to reset CompResult1 . SyncStatus OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Synchronization event occurred If the input parameter SyncEnable is set, the configured edge sets the status bit SyncStatus at the respective digital input . SyncStatus is reset by a negative edge at CaptureStatus OUTPUT BOOL FALSE * SyncEnable (input parameter) or * SyncUpDirection (static tag) or * SyncDownDirection (static tag) Status bit: Capture event occurred, the output parameter CapturedValue has a valid Capture value If the input parameter CaptureEnable is set, the configured edge sets the status bit CaptureStatus. at the respective digital input. You reset CaptureStatus using the negative edge of the input parameter CaptureEnable . ZeroStatus OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: CountValue has reached the value "0" irrespective of the count direction You reset ZeroStatus using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck. PosOverflow OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: CountValue has violated high counting limit in the positive direction You reset PosOverflow using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck. NegOverflow OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: CountValue has violated low counting limit in the negative direction You reset NegOverflow using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck. Counting, measurement and position detection 132 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE An error has occurred. Refer to the output parameter ErrorID for the cause of the error. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 0 The ErrorID (Page 134) parameter displays the number of the error message. CountValue OUTPUT DINT 0 Current counter value CapturedValue OUTPUT DINT 0 The last acquired Capture value The value is retained until the next Capture event, irrespective of the input parameter CaptureEnable. ErrorID = 0000H: There is no error. If a new Capture event has occurred, CaptureStatus is set and is reset by you using the negative edge of the input parameter CaptureEnable . MeasuredValue OUTPUT REAL 0.0 Current measured value for frequency, period duration or velocity (depending on configuration) CompareMeasuredValue1 OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: FALSE: Operating mode "Use count value as reference"; comparison functions work with counter value TRUE: Operating mode "Use measured value as reference"; comparison functions work with measured value 1 Available for High_Speed_Counter version V3.0 or higher Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 133 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.6 Error code Error codes of parameter ErrorID Description (W#16#...) 0000 No error Error messages from technology module 80A1 POWER_ERROR from feedback interface: Incorrect supply voltage L+ 80A2 ENC_ERROR from feedback interface: Incorrect encoder signal 80A3 LD_ERROR from feedback interface: Error when loading via control interface Error messages of the instruction High_Speed_Counter 80B1 Invalid count direction 80B4 For operating mode "Use count value as reference", the following applies: New low counting limit does not meet the following conditions: * Low counting limit < high counting limit * Low counting limit <= comparison value/start value For operating mode "Use measured value as reference", the following applies: New low counting limit does not meet the following conditions: 80B5 * Low counting limit < high counting limit * Low counting limit <= start value For operating mode "Use count value as reference", the following applies: New high counting limit does not meet the following conditions: * Low counting limit < high counting limit * High counting limit >= comparison value/start value For operating mode "Use measured value as reference", the following applies: New high counting limit does not meet the following conditions: 80B6 * Low counting limit < high counting limit * High counting limit >= start value New start value does not meet the following condition: * 80B7 New counter value does not meet the following condition: * 80B8 Low counting limit <= start value <= high counting limit Low counting limit <= counter value <= high counting limit For operating mode "Use count value as reference", the following applies: New comparison value 0 does not meet the following conditions: * Low counting limit <= comparison value 0 <= high counting limit * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 For operating mode "Use measured value as reference", the following applies: New comparison value 0 does not meet the following conditions: * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 Counting, measurement and position detection 134 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Error code Description (W#16#...) 80B9 For operating mode "Use count value as reference", the following applies: New comparison value 1 does not meet the following conditions: * Low counting limit <= comparison value 1 <= high counting limit * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 For operating mode "Use measured value as reference", the following applies: New comparison value 1 does not meet the following conditions: * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 80C0 Instruction High_Speed_Counter was called multiple times with the same instance (DB) 80C1 Communication with technology module failed (read data records): Error information of internal instruction RDREC saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C2 Communication with technology module failed (write data records): Error information of internal instruction WRREC saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C3 Access to input data (feedback interface) failed: Error information of internal instruction GETIO_PART saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C4 Access to output data (control interface) failed: Error information of internal instruction SETIO_PART saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C5 Reading of the current start information of the OB failed: Error information of internal instruction RD_SINFO saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C6 Failed to get I/O addresses of the technology module: Error information of internal instruction RD_ADDR saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C7 Module not inserted or no supply voltage L+ Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 135 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter 3.6.7 High_Speed_Counter static variables Tag Data type Default Access Description NewCountValue DINT L#0 Write New counter value NewReferenceValue0 DINT L#0 Write New comparison value 0 in the operating mode "Use count value as reference" NewReferenceValue1 DINT L#10 Write New comparison value 1 in the operating mode "Use count value as reference" NewReferenceValue0_M1 REAL L#0.0 Write New comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" NewReferenceValue1_M1 REAL L#10.0 Write New comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" NewUpperLimit DINT L#2147483647 Write New high counting limit NewLowerLimit DINT L#-2147483648 Write New low counting limit NewStartValue DINT L#0 Write New start value NewDirection INT 0 Write New count direction: +1: Upward count direction -1: Downward count direction CurReferenceValue0 DINT L#0 Read Current comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use count value as reference" CurReferenceValue1 DINT L#10 Read Current comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use count value as reference" CurReferenceValue0_M1 REAL L#0.0 Read Current comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" CurReferenceValue1_M1 REAL L#10.0 Read Current comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" CurUpperLimit DINT L#2147483647 Read Current high counting limit CurLowerLimit DINT L#-2147483648 Read Current low counting limit CurStartValue DINT L#0 Read Current start value AdditionalErrorID DWORD W#16#0000 Read Error information of an internal instruction, e.g.,RDREC Counting, measurement and position detection 136 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.6 Programming the High_Speed_Counter Tag Data type Default UserCmdFlags STRUCT - Access Description SetNewDirection BOOL SetUpperLimit BOOL FALSE Write Set new count direction FALSE Write Set high counting limit SetLowerLimit BOOL FALSE Write Set low counting limit SetReferenceValue0 BOOL FALSE Write Set comparison value 0 SetReferenceValue1 BOOL FALSE Write Set comparison value 1 SetStartValue BOOL FALSE Write Set start value SyncDownDirection BOOL TRUE Write Enable synchronization in downward count direction SyncUpDirection BOOL TRUE Write Enable synchronization in upward count direction SetDQ0 BOOL FALSE Write Set digital output DQ0 SetDQ1 BOOL FALSE Write Set digital output DQ1 ManualCtrlDQ0 BOOL FALSE Write Enable setting of digital output DQ0: TRUE: * SetDQ0 sets DQ0 * Control bit TM_CTRL_DQ0 = FALSE FALSE: ManualCtrlDQ1 BOOL FALSE Write * Setting not enabled * Control bit TM_CTRL_DQ0 = TRUE Enable setting of digital output DQ1: TRUE: * SetDQ1 sets DQ1 * Control bit TM_CTRL_DQ1 = FALSE FALSE: UserStatusFlags 1 * Setting not enabled * Control bit TM_CTRL_DQ1 = TRUE STRUCT - StatusDI0 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital input DI0 StatusDI1 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital input DI1 StatusDI2 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital input DI2 StatusDQ0 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital output DQ0 StatusDQ1 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital output DQ1 Available for High_Speed_Counter version V3.0 or higher Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 137 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.7 Commissioning the High_Speed_Counter 3.7 Commissioning the High_Speed_Counter 3.7.1 Commissioning the technology object A graphic display of the block in the commissioning editor helps you with commissioning and the function test for the technology object. You can change specific parameters of the High_Speed_Counter instruction in CPU/IM online mode and monitor their effects. Requirements There is an online connection between STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU. The CPU is in RUN. The corresponding High_Speed_Counter instruction is called cyclically from the user program. The parameters of the technology object are not overwritten by the user program. Procedure To open the commissioning editor of a technology object and to simulate a parameter value change, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the High_Speed_Counter technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click on the "Commissioning" object. The functions for commissioning the High_Speed_Counter technology object are displayed. 4. In the commissioning dialog, click on the "Monitor all" button. The parameters (online values) of the High_Speed_Counter technology object are loaded and displayed. 5. If the parameter you want to change has a text box, enter the new value there. 6. Select the check box of the parameter. The new parameter value becomes effective and the effects of the change are simulated. Counting, measurement and position detection 138 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.7 Commissioning the High_Speed_Counter Online mode In online mode, you can modify the following parameters to test the technology object function: New counter value (NewCountValue) New high counting limit (NewUpperLimit) New low counting limit (NewLowerLimit) New comparison value 0 (NewReferenceValue0 or NewReferenceValue0_M) New comparison value 1 (NewReferenceValue1 or NewReferenceValue1_M) New start value (NewStartValue) Start and stop counter (SwGate) Enable Capture (CaptureEnable) Enable synchronization (SyncEnable) Acknowledgment of signaled error states (ErrorAck) Resetting the status flag (EventAck) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 139 Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.8 High_Speed_Counter diagnostics 3.8 High_Speed_Counter diagnostics 3.8.1 Monitoring counter values, measured values, DIs and DQs You use the diagnostic functions to monitor the counting and measuring functions. Requirements There is an online connection between STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU. The CPU is in RUN. Procedure To open the display editor for the diagnostic functions, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the High_Speed_Counter technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click on the "Diagnostics" object. 4. Click the "Monitor all" button. Counting, measurement and position detection 140 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object 3.8 High_Speed_Counter diagnostics Display The following values are read by the technology object from the feedback interface and displayed: Event display/diagnostics information Signal states of the digital inputs and digital outputs Counter value Capture value Measured value Additional information on status displays is available in the context-sensitive help for each event in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). When the CPU is in STOP, the status display is not updated. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 141 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.1 4 Technology object SSI_Absolute_Encoder STEP 7 (TIA Portal) supports you in the configuration, commissioning and diagnostics of counting and measuring functions for the TM PosInput technology module with the "Technology objects" function in combination with the SSI absolute encoders: In STEP 7 (TIA Portal) you configure the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object by entering the encoder parameters. The corresponding SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction is programmed in the user program. This instruction supplies the control and feedback interface of the technology module. The SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object corresponds to the instance DB of the SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction. The configuration of the position input and measuring functions is saved in the technology object. The technology object is located in the folder "PLC > Technology objects". The SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object can be used for the TM PosInput of both the S7-1500 and ET 200SP systems alike. Operating mode In order to assign the technology module parameters using a TM PosInput, you specify the operating mode (Page 181) "Operation with technology objects for "counting and measurement"" in the hardware configuration of the TM PosInput. This selection is already preset. Counting, measurement and position detection 142 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.2 Overview of the configuration steps 4.2 Overview of the configuration steps Introduction The overview below shows the basic procedure for configuring the position input and measuring functions of the technology module with the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object. Requirement Before you can use the technology object, a project with an S7-1500 CPU or an ET 200SP CPU must be created in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). Procedure Proceed in the recommended sequence outlined below: Step Description 1 Configure a technology module (Page 175) 2 Add technology object (Page 144) 3 Configure a technology object according to your application (Page 146) 4 Call instruction in the user program (Page 163) 5 Load to CPU 6 Commissioning the technology object (Page 172) 7 Diagnostics of the technology object (Page 173) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 143 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.3 Add technology object 4.3 Add technology object Adding a technology object in the project navigation When a technology object is added, an instance DB is created for the instruction of this technology object. The configuration of the technology object is stored in this instance DB. Requirement A project with a CPU S7-1500 has been created. Procedure To add a technology object, proceed as follows: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Technology objects" folder. 3. Double-click on "Add new object". The "Add new object" dialog opens. 4. Select the "Counting and measurement" technology. 5. Select the "SSI_Absolute_Encoder" object. 6. Enter an individual name for the technology object in the "Name" text box. 7. Click "Additional information" if you want to add your own information to the technology object. 8. Confirm with "OK". Counting, measurement and position detection 144 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.3 Add technology object Result The new technology object has now been created and stored in the project tree in the "Technology objects" folder. Object Description Configuration (Page 146) In the configuration dialog: * Assignment of technology module and channel Technology object parameter settings for position input and measurement functions When you change the configuration of the technology object, you must download the technology object and the hardware configuration to the CPU. * Commissioning (Page 172) Commissioning and function test of the technology object: Simulating parameters of the SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction and monitoring the effects Diagnostics (Page 173) Monitoring of the position input and measurement functions Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 145 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.1 Working with the configuration dialog You configure the properties of the technology object in the configuration window. Proceed as follows to open the configuration window of the technology object: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click on the "Configuration" object. The configuration is divided into the following categories: Basic parameters The basic parameters include the selection of the technology module and the number of the channel for which the technology object is configured. Extended parameters The extended parameters include the parameters for adapting the position input and measuring functions and for setting the characteristics of the digital inputs and digital outputs. Configuration window icons Icons in the area navigation of the configuration show additional details about the status of the configuration: The configuration contains default values and is complete. The configuration contains only default values. With these default values, you can use the technology object without additional changes. The configuration contains values set by the user or automatically adapted values and is complete All text boxes of the configuration contain valid values and at least one default value was changed. The configuration is incomplete or incorrect At least one text box or drop-down list contains an invalid value. The corresponding field or the drop-down list is displayed on a red background. Click the roll-out error message to indicate the cause of error. Counting, measurement and position detection 146 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.2 Basic parameters Under "Basic parameters", you can establish the connection between the technology object and the TM PosInput technology module. Module You select the technology module in a subsequent dialog box. All TM PosInput technology modules (central or distributed) that are configured for use with a "Counting and measurement" technology object under the S7-1500 CPU or ET 200SP CPU are available for selection. After selecting the technology module, you can open the device configuration associated with the technology module by clicking the"Device configuration" button. The technology module parameter settings required for the use of the technology object are made in the "Extended parameters" of the technology object. Channel For a technology module with several channels, you select the number of the channel for which the technology object is valid. Note A channel can be assigned to only one technology object. A channel that is already assigned to a technology object can no longer be selected. Synchronization of the parameter values If, after assignment of the channel to the technology object, there is an inconsistency between the parameter values in the property dialog of the TM PosInput module and in the technology object, a button with a corresponding inquiry appears. When you click the button, the parameter values in the property dialog of the assigned module are overwritten by the parameter values of the technology object within STEP 7 (TIA Portal). The current parameter values of the technology object are displayed in the property dialog of the module (readonly). Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 147 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.3 SSI absolute encoder Frame length With the parameter assignment of the frame length, you specify the number of bits of an SSI frame of the SSI absolute encoder (Page 26) used. You can find the frame length of your SSI absolute encoder in the data sheet of the encoder. Special bits are also included in the frame length. A parity bit does not count in the frame length. A frame length of between 10 bits and 40 bits is permitted. The default setting is "13 Bit". You can find two examples of the SSI frame format at Examples of the frame format (Page 159). Code type You use the parameter assignment of the code type to specify whether the encoder supplies Dual code or Gray code. You can select from the following options: Code type Meaning Gray (default) The gray-coded position value returned by the SSI absolute encoder is converted to dual code. Dual The value returned by the SSI absolute encoder is not converted. Transmission rate With the parameter assignment of the transmission rate, you specify the data transmission rate between the technology module and the SSI absolute encoder. You can select from the following options: 125 kHz (preset) 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 1.5 MHz 2 MHz The maximum transmission rate depends on the cable length and the technical specifications of the SSI absolute encoder. For additional information, refer to the product manual of the TM PosInput and the encoder description. Counting, measurement and position detection 148 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Monoflop time With the parameter assignment of the monoflop time, you specify the idle time between two SSI frames. The configured monoflop time must be at least equal to the monoflop time of the SSI absolute encoder used. You can find this value in the technical specifications of the SSI absolute encoder. You can select from the following options: Automatically (default) 16 s 32 s 48 s 64 s Note If you select the "Automatic" option, the monoflop time automatically adapts to the encoder used. In isochronous mode, the "Automatic" option corresponds to a monoflop time of 64 s. If the monoflop time of the employed SSI absolute value encoder is less than 64 s, you can select the value of the encoder to achieve faster isochronous times. Parity With the parameter assignment of the parity, you specify whether the SSI absolute encoder transfers a parity bit. If, for example, a 25-bit encoder with parity is assigned, the technology module reads 26 bits. A parity error is indicated by the technology object at the ErrorID output parameter with the value 80A2. Bit number LSB of the position value This parameter is used to specify the bit number of the LSB (least significant bit) of the position value in the frame of the SSI absolute encoder. In this way you limit the range in the frame that supplies the position value. The value must be less than the bit number of the MSB of the position value. The difference between the bit numbers of the MSB and the LSB of the position value must be less than 32. The default setting is "0". Note If you have selected the Code type "Gray", only the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value is converted to binary code. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 149 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Bit number MSB of the position value This parameter is used to specify the bit number of the MSB (most significant bit) of the position value in the frame of the SSI absolute encoder. In this way you limit the range in the frame that supplies the position value. The value must be less than the frame length and higher than the bit number of the LSB of the position value. The difference between the bit numbers of the MSB and the LSB of the position value must be less than 32. The default setting is "12". Note If you have selected the Code type "Gray", only the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value is converted to binary code. Invert direction You can use this parameter to invert the values supplied by the SSIabsolute encoder. This allows you to adapt the detected direction of the encoder to the motor's direction of rotation. Note This parameter acts only on the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value in the frame. SSI frame You can also set the following parameters in the graphic with drag-and-drop: Frame length Bit number LSB of the position value Bit number MSB of the position value Complete SSI frame If "Complete SSI frame" has been selected as the measured variable, the module returns the least significant 32 bits of the unprocessed current SSI frame as the measured value. The graphic shows the corresponding meaning of a supplied bit. The following abbreviations are used: V Value: Position value as gray or dual code S Special: Special bit P Parity: Parity bit When you have configured a parity bit, the module returns the least significant 31 bits of the SSI frame and the parity bit. Counting, measurement and position detection 150 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.4 Behavior of a DI (SSI_Absolute_Encoder) Setting function of the DI By configuring a digital input, you specify which functions the digital input triggers at switching. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital input Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Capture (Page 37) The configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current position value as a Capture value. The technology object displays the Capture value at the output parameter CapturedValue. * Input delay * Edge selection * Frequency of the Capture function * Input delay The function can only be used for one of the two digital inputs. Digital input without function No technological function is assigned to the respective digital input. You can read the signal state of the digital input via the respective static variable (Page 171) of the technology object: * UserStatusFlags.StatusDI0 * UserStatusFlags.StatusDI1 Note You can choose the "Capture" function only in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference". Input delay By configuring the input delay, you suppress interferences at the digital inputs. Signals with a pulse duration below the configured input delay are suppressed. You can select from the following input delays: None 0.05 ms 0.1 ms (default) 0.4 ms 0.8 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms 12.8 ms 20 ms Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 151 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Note You configure the input delay under "Behavior of DI0" for all digital inputs together. The input delay is also displayed under "Behavior of DI1". Edge selection You can use this parameter to specify the edge of the digital input at which the configured function is triggered for the "Capture" function. You can select from the following options: At rising edge (default) At falling edge At rising and falling edge Frequency of the Capture function This parameter is used to define the frequency of Capture events (Page 37): You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The first configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current counter value as Capture value. Periodic (default) Each configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Note This parameter is available for SSI_Absolute_Encoder as of V3.0. Counting, measurement and position detection 152 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.5 Behavior of a DQ (SSI_Absolute_Encoder) Operating mode With the operating mode, you specify the reference value with which the comparison functions work. Operating mode Meaning Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference (default) The comparison functions and hardware interrupts for compare events work with the position value. Use measured value as reference The comparison functions and hardware interrupts for compare events work with the measured value. Note You configure the operating mode under "Behavior of DQ0" for both digital outputs together. The operating mode is also displayed under "Behavior of DQ1". Set output With the parameter assignment of a digital output, you specify the condition upon which the digital output switches. You can select from the following options depending on the operating mode: Function of a digital output (Page 52) in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Between comparison value and high limit (default) The respective digital output is active if: Comparison value <= position value <= maximum position value * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) Between comparison value and low limit The respective digital output is active if: Minimum position value <= Position value <= Comparison value * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction Between comparison value 0 and 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= position value <= comparison value 1 The respective digital output is active once for the assigned time and direction of the position value change when the position value is equal to the comparison value or has fallen below or exceeded it. * Pulse duration * Hysteresis (in increments) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 153 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Function of a digital output (Page 52) in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" Meaning Additional option-specific parameters After set command from CPU until When a set command is sent from the CPU, the comparison value respective digital output is active for the assigned direction of the position value change until the position value is equal to the comparison value or has fallen below or exceeded it. Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Hysteresis (in increments) -- Note You can only select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" function for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Function of a digital output (Page 56) in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Measured value >= comparison value (default) The respective digital output is active if the measured value is greater than or equal to the comparison value. * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 Measured value <= comparison value The respective digital output is active if the measured value is less than or equal to the comparison value. * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 Between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= measured value <= comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 Not between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 1 <= measured value <= comparison value 0 Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 -- Note You can select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" functions only for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Counting, measurement and position detection 154 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Comparison value 0 Operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 52), you specify the position value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of up to 31 bits, you must enter a positive integer (DINT) with a value between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, you must enter a signed integer (DINT) with a value between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Operating mode "Use measured value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The minimum value is -7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "0.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Comparison value 1 Operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 52), you specify the position value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of up to 31 bits, you must enter a positive integer (DINT) with a value between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, you must enter a signed integer (DINT) with a value between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "10". Operating mode "Use measured value as reference" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The maximum value is 7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "10.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 155 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Count direction You use this parameter to specify the direction of position value change for which the selected function is valid. You can select from the following options: Direction of position value change Meaning In both directions (default) The comparison and switching of the respective digital output is carried out regardless of whether the position value increases of decreases. Up The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the position value increases. Down The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the position value decreases. The parameter can be configured for the following functions: At comparison value for a pulse duration After set command from CPU until comparison value Pulse duration By configuring the pulse duration for the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration", you specify the number of milliseconds for which the respective digital output is active. A value from 0.1 to 6553.5 ms is permissible. The default setting is "500.0", which is equivalent to a pulse duration of 0.5 s. Hysteresis (in increments) By configuring the hysteresis (Page 68), you can define a range around the comparison values. For the functions "Between comparison value and upper counter limit" and "Between comparison value and lower counter limit" the hysteresis also applies at the counter limits. Within the hysteresis range, the digital outputs cannot switch again until the position value has left this range once. Choose a small enough hysteresis. When the hysteresis range, starting from the configured comparison value, spans the entire position value range, proper functioning of the comparison values cannot be guaranteed. If a comparison value lies so close to the counter limit that the hysteresis range would extend beyond this counter limit, the hysteresis range ends there. If you enter "0", the hysteresis is turned off. You can enter a value between 0and 255. The default setting is "0". Note You configure the hysteresis under "Behavior of DQ0" for both digital outputs together. The hysteresis is also displayed under "Behavior of DQ1". Note The hysteresis is only available in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference". Counting, measurement and position detection 156 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.6 Specify measured value (SSI_Absolute_Encoder) Measured variable With this parameter you specify whether the technology module is to provide a certain measured variable (Page 63) or the complete SSI frame. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Frequency (default) The measured variable shows the number of increments per * second, where each increment corresponds to one position value change. The value is a floating point number (REAL). The unit is Hz. Update time The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. Period The measured variable is the average period between two increments of the position value. The value is an integer (DINT). The unit is s. * Update time The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. Velocity Complete SSI frame The measured variable is a velocity. * Examples of a velocity measurement can be found in the explanation of the "Increments per unit" parameter. Update time * The technology object displays the measured value at the output parameter MeasuredValue. Time base for velocity measurement * Increments per unit Instead of a measured variable, the first 32 bits of the SSI frame -- are returned (bit 0 to bit 31). In so doing, special bits that do not belong to the position information are also supplied. A configured inversion of the direction is ignored. The technology object displays the value at the output parameter CompleteSSIFrame. You can find examples under Examples of the frame format (Page 159). This option is only available in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference". Note If the increment per revolution is required for calculation of the measured values, it is automatically calculated from the parameterized telegram length as the power of 2, e.g. 8192 increments per revolution with a telegram length of 13 bit. If you are using an SSI absolute encoder whose increment per revolution does not correspond to the power of 2, the calculated measured value may be incorrect for a short time. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 157 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Update time By configuring the update time (Page 63) in milliseconds, you can specify the time interval between two measured value updates. Unsteady measured variables can be smoothed through longer update times If you enter "0", the measured value is updated once per module-internal cycle. Up to three decimal places can be entered. A value from 0.0 to 25000.0 is permissible. The default setting is "10.0". Time base for velocity measurement This parameter defines the time base on which the velocity is to be returned. You can select from the following options: 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms 1s 60 s The default setting is "60 s". Increments per unit With this parameter you define the number of increments per relevant unit that the SSI absolute encoder supplies for the velocity measurement. You can enter a value between 1 and 65535. Example 1: Your absolute encoder operates with a resolution of 12 bits per revolution and performs 4096 increments per revolution. The velocity should be measured in revolutions per minute. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 4096 Time base for velocity measurement: 60 s Example 2: You encoder delivers 10000 increments for travel over one meter. The velocity is to be measured in meters per second. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 10000 Time base for velocity measurement: 1 s Counting, measurement and position detection 158 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.4.7 Examples of the frame format Example 1 In this example the SSI absolute encoder has the following specification: The encoder has a resolution of 13 bits per revolution and a value range of 12 bits of revolutions. The SSI frame has a length of 25 bits. The MSB of the position value is bit 24. The LSB of the position value is bit 0. The position value is Gray coded. A parity bit is not available. The frame has the following format: MG Multiturn bit as Gray code SG Singleturn bit as Gray code Complete SSI frame If you configure "Complete SSI frame", the technology module returns the unprocessed SSI frame in the return interface right-justified: MG Multiturn bit as Gray code SG Singleturn bit as Gray code Position value feedback value The position value supplied in Gray code is converted into binary code by the technology module and returned right-justified in the feedback interface: MD Multiturn bit as binary code SD Singleturn bit as binary code Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 159 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Example 2 In this example the SSI absolute encoder has the following specification: The encoder has a resolution of 17 bits per revolution and a value range of 11 bits of revolutions. The SSI frame has a length of34 bits. The MSB of the position value is bit 33. The LSB of the position value is bit 6. The position value is Gray coded. The SSI frame has six special bits. A parity bit is available. A parity bit does not count in the frame length. The frame has the following format: MG Multiturn bit as Gray code SG Singleturn bit as Gray code Sn Special bit n P Parity bit Complete SSI frame If you configure "Complete SSI frame", the technology module returns the least significant 32 bits of the SSI frame as an unprocessed bit string. The technology module returns the bit following the LSB as parity bit. In this example, the technology module therefore returns only the least significant 31 bits of the SSI frame. With the complete SSI frame, you can evaluate the additional special bits in your application. The returned bit string is structured as follows: MG Multiturn bit as Gray code SG Singleturn bit as Gray code Sn Special bit n P Parity bit Counting, measurement and position detection 160 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.4 Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder Position value The position value supplied in Gray code is converted into binary code by the technology module and returned right-justified in the feedback interface: The special bits are ignored in this case. The parity bit is evaluated but is not returned with the position value: MD Multiturn bit as binary code SD Singleturn bit as binary code Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 161 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.1 Instruction SSI_Absolute_Encoder SSI_Absolute_Encoder The SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction is part of the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object. It supplies the control and feedback interface of the TM PosInput technology module. The SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction thereby forms the software interface between the user program and the technology module. It must be called cyclically from the user program in order to synchronize the input and output data. The SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction can be used for the TM PosInput of both the S7-1500 and ET 200SP systems alike. The TM PosInput modules can be used centrally and decentrally. The instruction applies in each case to the channel of the technology module that was assigned to the associated technology object. Additional information Description SSI_Absolute_Encoder (Page 164) Input parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder (Page 167) Output parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder (Page 168) Error codes of parameter ErrorID (Page 170) Static tags SSI_Absolute_Encoder (Page 171) Counting, measurement and position detection 162 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.2 Call instruction in the user program The SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction can be called once per channel, either cyclically or in a time-controlled program. The call is not permitted in an event-controlled interrupt program. Procedure Proceed as follows to call the instruction in the user program: 1. Open the CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Open the "Program blocks" folder. 3. Double-click the OB for cyclic program execution. The block is opened in the work area. 4. In the "Instructions" window, open the "Technology" group and the "Counting and measurement" folder. The folder contains the instruction. 5. Select the instruction and drag it to your OB. The "Call options" dialog opens. 6. Select a technology object from the "Name" list or enter the name for a new technology object. 7. Confirm with "OK". Result If the technology object does not exist yet, it is added. The instruction is added in the OB. The technology object is assigned to this call of the instruction. Note If you click one of the buttons "Configuration", "Commissioning" or "Diagnostics" in the user interface of the instruction, the respective editor opens. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 163 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.3 Description SSI_Absolute_Encoder Description The SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction is used to control the position input and measuring functions of the technology module TM PosInput via the user program. Call The instruction must be called once per channel, either cyclically or in a time-controlled program. The call is not permitted in an event-controlled interrupt program. Operating principle Position value: The position value is available at the output parameter PositionValue. The position value is updated every time the instruction is called. Measured value: The technology module updates the measured value asynchronously to the instruction call based on the configured update time. The measured value last determined by the technology module is updated at the output parameter MeasuredValue each time the instruction is called. Measured value and position value are available in parallel as output parameters. Instead of a measured value, the complete SSI frame can be returned at the output parameter CompleteSSIFrame. Either MeasuredValue or CompleteSSIFrame is valid, depending on the parameter assignment. Capture: The output parameter CaptureStatus = TRUE indicates a valid Capture value at the output parameter CapturedValue. A Capture value is captured under the following conditions: - A digital input has the parameter assignment "Capture" - CaptureEnable = TRUE - Edge at digital input with the Capture function The output parameter CaptureStatus is reset by a negative edge at the input parameter CaptureEnable. Counting, measurement and position detection 164 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder Parameter changes via the user program Proceed as follows to modify parameters using the user program: 1. Check the relevant Set tag to establish whether the technology object is ready for the parameter change (Set tag = FALSE) or whether a change job is still running (Set tag = TRUE). The following Set tags in UserCmdFlags are available for this in the static tags of the technology object instance DB: - SetReferenceValue0 - SetReferenceValue1 2. If the technology object is ready for the parameter change, modify the relevant static tag. The following static tags of the technology object instance DB are available for this: - NewReferenceValue0 / NewReferenceValue0_M (for SetReferenceValue0) - NewReferenceValue1 / NewReferenceValue1_M (for SetReferenceValue1) 3. Set the relevant Set tag for execution of the change job. 4. Use the output parameter Error to check whether an error has occurred. If no errors have occurred and the Set tag has been automatically reset by the technology object, the parameter change was successful. Operating mode Configure the operating mode in the technology object under "Behavior of DQ0". The operating mode is indicated by the output parameters CompareMeasuredValue: State Description FALSE Operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference": The comparison functions work with the position value. The following static variables are specifically used in this operating mode: * NewReferenceValue0 * NewReferenceValue1 * CurReferenceValue0 * CurReferenceValue1 The four specific static variables of operating mode "Use measured value as reference" are ignored. TRUE Operating mode "Use measured value as reference": The comparison functions work with the measured value. The following static variables are specifically used in this operating mode: * NewReferenceValue0_M * NewReferenceValue1_M * CurReferenceValue0_M * CurReferenceValue1_M The four specific static tags of operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" are ignored. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 165 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder Acknowledgment of events You acknowledge signaled events using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck . EventAck must stay set until the technology object has reset the status bits of the following events of the count channel: CompResult0 CompResult1 ZeroStatus PosOverflow NegOverflow Status of the digital inputs You obtain the status of the digital inputs via the static tags StatusDI0 and StatusDI1. Using digital outputs with user program In the following cases you can set the digital outputs via the instruction: Case Description The setting "Use by user program" is configured for "Set output". The respective digital output DQM follows the value of SetDQm. The setting "After set command from CPU until The respective digital output DQm is set with a negcomp. value" is configured for "Set output". ative edge of SetDQm. DQm is reset when the position value corresponds to the comparison value or at a negative edge of SetDQm. Set the respective static variable ManualCtrlDQm (temporary overwrite). The respective digital output DQM follows the value of SetDQm. Reaction to error If an error has occurred during the call of the instruction or in the technology module, the output parameter Error is set. More detailed error information can be read at the output parameter ErrorID (Page 170). Eliminate the cause of the error and acknowledge the error message by setting the input parameter ErrorAck. When no more errors are pending, the technology object resets the output parameter Error . No new error is signaled until you acknowledge the previous error. Counting, measurement and position detection 166 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.4 Input parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description CaptureEnable INPUT BOOL FALSE Enable Capture function After the enable, a Capture event occurs at the next configured edge at the relevant digital input. A negative edge at CaptureEnable resets the output parameter CaptureStatus. A negative edge at CaptureEnable resets the enable even if no Capture event has occurred. Irrespective of CaptureEnable the last value is retained at the output parameter CapturedValue until the next Capture event. ErrorAck INPUT BOOL FALSE SSI_Absolute_Encoder V1.0: A positive edge acknowledges the error status reported. SSI_Absolute_Encoder as of V2.0: A high level acknowledges the error status reported. EventAck INPUT BOOL FALSE A positive edge resets the following output parameters: * CompResult0 * CompResult1 * ZeroStatus * PosOverflow * NegOverflow Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 167 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.5 Output parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description StatusHW OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit technology module: The module is configured and ready for operation. The module data is valid. StatusUp OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Last position value has changed in the positive direction and took place no more than 0.5 s ago. StatusDown OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Last position value has changed in the negative direction and took place no more than 0.5 s ago. CompResult0 OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Comparison event for DQ0 (change of state) occurs as a result of the selected comparison condition. The positive edge of the input parameter EventAck is used to reset CompResult0 . CompResult1 OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Comparison event for DQ1 (change of state) occurs as a result of the selected comparison condition. The positive edge of the input parameter EventAck is used to reset CompResult1 . CaptureStatus OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: Capture event occurred, the output parameter CapturedValue has a valid Capture value If the input parameter CaptureEnable is set, the configured edge sets the status bit CaptureStatus. at the respective digital input. You reset CaptureStatus using the negative edge of the input parameter CaptureEnable . CapturedValue OUTPUT DINT 0 The last acquired Capture value The value is retained until the next Capture event, irrespective of the input parameter CaptureEnable. If a new Capture event has occurred, CaptureStatus is set and is reset by you using the negative edge of the input parameter CaptureEnable . ZeroStatus OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: PositionValue has reached or exceeded the value "0" irrespective of the count direction. You reset ZeroStatus using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck. PosOverflow OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: PositionValue has exceeded the high limit of the position value range of the encoder in the positive direction. You reset PosOverflow using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck. NegOverflow OUTPUT BOOL FALSE Status bit: PositionValue has exceeded the low limit of the position value range of the encoder in the negative direction. You reset NegOverflow using the positive edge of the input parameter EventAck. Error OUTPUT BOOL FALSE An error has occurred. Refer to the output parameter ErrorID for the cause of the error. ErrorID OUTPUT WORD 0 The ErrorID (Page 170) parameter displays the number of the error message. ErrorID = 0000H: There is no error. PositionValue OUTPUT DINT 0 Current position value Counting, measurement and position detection 168 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description MeasuredValue OUTPUT REAL 0.0 Current measured value for frequency, period duration or velocity (depending on configuration) Either MeasuredValue or CompleteSSIFrame is valid, depending on the parameter assignment in the technology object under "Measured value". CompleteSSIFrame OUTPUT CompareMeasuredValue OUTPUT DWORD 0 Last received complete SSI frame (least significant 32 bits) Either MeasuredValue or CompleteSSIFrame is valid, depending on the parameter assignment in the technology object under "Measured value". BOOL FALSE Status bit: FALSE: Operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference"; position value is used as reference TRUE: Operating mode "Use measured value as reference"; measured value is used as reference Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 169 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.6 Error code Error codes of parameter ErrorID Description (W#16#...) 0000 No error Error messages from technology module 80A1 POWER_ERROR from feedback interface: Incorrect supply voltage L+ 80A2 ENC_ERROR from feedback interface: Incorrect encoder signal 80A3 LD_ERROR from feedback interface: Error when loading via control interface Error messages of the instruction SSI_Absolute_Encoder 80B8 80B9 New comparison value 0 does not meet the following conditions: * Low counting limit <= comparison value 0 <= high counting limit * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 New comparison value 1 does not meet the following conditions: * Low counting limit <= comparison value 1 <= high counting limit * Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1 80C0 Instruction was called multiple times with the same instance (DB) 80C1 Communication with technology module failed (read data records): Error information of internal instruction RDREC saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C2 Communication with technology module failed (write data records): Error information of internal instruction WRREC saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C5 Reading of the current start information of the OB failed: Error information of internal instruction RD_SINFO saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C6 Failed to get I/O addresses of the technology module: Error information of internal instruction RD_ADDR saved in static tag AdditionalErrorID 80C7 Module not inserted or no supply voltage L+ Counting, measurement and position detection 170 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.5 Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.5.7 Static tags SSI_Absolute_Encoder Tag Data type Default Access Description NewReferenceValue0 DINT L#0 Write New comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" NewReferenceValue1 DINT L#10 Write New comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" NewReferenceValue0_M REAL L#0.0 Write New comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" NewReferenceValue1_M REAL L#10.0 Write New comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" CurReferenceValue0 DINT L#0 Read Current comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" CurReferenceValue1 DINT L#10 Read Current comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference" CurReferenceValue0_M REAL L#0.0 Read Current comparison value 0 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" CurReferenceValue1_M REAL L#10.0 Read Current comparison value 1 in operating mode "Use measured value as reference" AdditionalErrorID DWORD W#16#0000 Read Error information of an internal instruction, e.g.,RDREC UserCmdFlags SetReferenceValue0 STRUCT - BOOL FALSE Write Set comparison value 0 SetReferenceValue1 BOOL FALSE Write Set comparison value 1 SetDQ0 BOOL FALSE Write Set digital output DQ0 SetDQ1 BOOL FALSE Write Set digital output DQ1 ManualCtrlDQ0 BOOL FALSE Write Enable setting of digital output DQ0. TRUE: SetDQ0 sets DQ01 FALSE: Setting not enabled ManualCtrlDQ1 BOOL FALSE Write Enable setting of digital output DQ1: TRUE: SetDQ1 sets DQ11 FALSE: Setting not enabled UserStatusFlags 1 STRUCT - StatusDI0 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital input DI0 StatusDI1 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital input DI1 StatusDQ0 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital output DQ0 StatusDQ1 BOOL FALSE Read Current status of digital output DQ1 The instruction sets the TM_CTRL_DQm bit to FALSE. in the control interface of the module. The static tag SetDQm acts on the control bit SET_DQm. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 171 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.6 Commissioning SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.6 Commissioning SSI_Absolute_Encoder 4.6.1 Commissioning the technology object A graphic display of the block in the commissioning editor helps you with commissioning and the function test for the technology object. You can change specific parameters of the SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction in CPU/IM online mode and monitor their effects. Requirements There is an online connection between STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU. The CPU is in RUN. The corresponding SSI_Absolute_Encoder instruction is called cyclically from the user program. The parameters of the technology object are not overwritten by the user program. Procedure To open the commissioning editor of a technology object and to simulate a parameter value change, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click on the "Commissioning" object. The functions for commissioning the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object are displayed. 4. In the commissioning dialog, click on the "Monitor all" button. The parameters (online values) of the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object are loaded and displayed. 5. If the parameter you want to change has a text box, enter the new value there. 6. Select the check box of the parameter. The new parameter value becomes effective and the effects of the change are simulated. Online mode In online mode, you can modify the following parameters to test the technology object function: New comparison value 0 (NewReferenceValue0 or NewReferenceValue0_M) New comparison value 1 (NewReferenceValue1 or NewReferenceValue1_M) Enable Capture (CaptureEnable) Acknowledgment of signaled error states (ErrorAck) Resetting the status flag (EventAck) Counting, measurement and position detection 172 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.7 SSI_Absolute_Encoder diagnostics 4.7 SSI_Absolute_Encoder diagnostics 4.7.1 Monitoring counter values, measured values, DIs and DQs The diagnostic functions are used to monitor the position input and measuring functions. Requirements There is an online connection between STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and the CPU. The CPU is in RUN. Procedure To open the display editor for the diagnostic functions, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Technology objects" folder in the project tree. 2. Open the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object in the project tree. 3. Double-click on the "Diagnostics" object. 4. Click the "Monitor all" button. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 173 Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object 4.7 SSI_Absolute_Encoder diagnostics Display The following values are read by the technology object from the feedback interface and displayed: Event display/diagnostics information Signal states of the digital inputs and digital outputs Position value Capture value Measured value Additional information on status displays is available in the context-sensitive help for each event in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). When the CPU is in STOP, the status display is not updated. Counting, measurement and position detection 174 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.1 Convention 5 Technology module: We use the term "technology module" in this documentation both for the technology modules TM Count and TM PosInput and the technology component of the compact CPUs. 5.1.2 Configuring a module 5.1.2.1 Adding a technology module for hardware configuration (TM Count and TM PosInput) Requirement The project has been created. The CPU S7-1500 has been created. At decentralized operation a distributed I/O ET 200 is created. Procedure To add a technology module to the hardware configuration, proceed as follows: 1. Open the device configuration of the CPU or IM. 2. Select a module rack. 3. Select the technology module from the module catalog: "Technology module > Counting or Position input > Technology module > Article number" 4. Drag the technology module to the required slot in the module rack. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 175 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.2.2 Adding a technology module to hardware configuration (Compact CPU) Requirement The project has been created. Procedure To add a Compact CPU to the project tree, follow these steps: 1. Double-click "Add new device". The "Add new object" dialog opens. 2. Select Controller". 3. Select the Compact CPU: "SIMATIC S7-1500 > CPU > Compact CPU > Article number" 4. Confirm with "OK". Result The new Compact CPU is displayed with the following objects in the project tree. Doubleclick to open the required editor. Object Description Device configuration (Page 179) In the Inspector window (per channel): Online & Diagnostics (Page 218) * Activation of the counter (Page 188) * Assign signals to inputs and outputs (Page 189) * Setting the reaction to CPU STOP (Page 179) * Enable diagnostic interrupts (Page 181) * Setting the operating mode (Page 181) * Enable hardware interrupts (Page 186) * Setting the module addresses * Hardware diagnostics * Obtain information about the Compact CPU * Run firmware update Counting, measurement and position detection 176 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.2.3 Open hardware configuration Opening To open the hardware configuration, follow these steps: 1. Open the device configuration of the CPU or IM. 2. Select the device view. 3. Click on the module. 5.1.2.4 Parameter assignment options Counting, measuring and position input with SSI absolute encoder For the counting and measuring function as well as the position input with an SSI absolute encoder, you have the following alternatives for parameter assignment and control of the technology module: Configuration of a technology object and control using the related instruction: When using an incremental or pulse encoder, we recommend the simple configuration with graphic support using thee High_Speed_Counter technology object. A detailed description of this configuration can be found in section Technology Object High_Speed_Counter (Page 97). When using an SSI absolute value encoder, we recommend the simple configuration with graphic support using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object. A detailed description of this configuration can be found in section Technology Object High_Speed_Counter (Page 142). For configuration of a technology object, select the operating mode (Page 181) "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object". Parameter setting via hardware configuration and control via the control and feedback interface of the technology module: Select the operating mode (Page 181) "Manual operation (without technology object)" for this. A description of the control and feedback interface for TM Count and TM PosInput is available in the following sections: Assignment of the control interface (Page 219) Assignment of the feedback interface (Page 222) Parameter settings via GSD file and control via the control and feedback interface of the technology module. A description of the control and feedback interface for TM Count and TM PosInput is available in the following sections: Assignment of the control interface (Page 219) Assignment of the feedback interface (Page 222) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 177 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Position input for Motion Control Alternatively, you have the option of using the technology module for position input for Motion Control. Select the operating mode (Page 181) "Position input for "Motion Control" technology object" and assign the parameters of the encoder using the module parameters (Page 183) in the device configuration of the technology module. You perform the rest of the configuration of this application using an axis technology object of S7-1500 Motion Control . Counting, measurement and position detection 178 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.2.5 Basic parameters Reaction to CPU STOP Reaction to CPU STOP You set the response of the technology module for each channel to CPU STOP in the basic parameters of the device configuration. Option Meaning Continue operation The technology module remains fully functional. Incoming count pulses are processed or the actual position is read. The digital outputs continue to switch according to the parameter assignment. Output substitute value The technology module outputs the configured substitute values at the digital outputs until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Keep last value The technology module outputs the values at the digital outputs that were valid when the transition to STOP took place until the next CPU STOP-RUN transition. If a digital output with the function "In case of comparison value for a pulse duration" is set at CPU stop, the digital output is reset after expiry of pulse duration. The technology module is returned to its startup state after a STOP-RUN transition: The counter value is set to the Start value (with incremental encoders or pulse encoders) and the digital outputs switch according to the parameter assignment. Substitute value for DQ0 (TM Count und TM PosInput) This parameter lets you specify which value the technology module is to output to the digital output DQ0 in the event of a CPU STOP under "Output substitute value". Note In operating mode "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object", you assign this parameter using the technology object. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 179 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Substitute value for DQ0 (Compact CPU) You can use this parameter to specify the value to be output for a STOP of the Compact CPU in the feedback interface for DQ0 in the context of the "Substitute value for DQ0" behavior. Note In operating mode "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object", you assign this parameter using the technology object. Substitute value for DQ1 This parameter lets you specify which value the technology module is to output to the digital output DQ1 in the event of a CPU STOP under "Output substitute value". Note In operating mode "Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object", you assign this parameter using the technology object. Diagnostic interrupts (TM Count and TM PosInput) The technology module can trigger additional diagnostic interrupts when you enable the diagnostic interrupts in the basic parameters. These diagnostic interrupts are processed in an interrupt OB. Detailed information on the error event is available in the error organization block with the instruction "RALRM" (read alarm supplementary information) and in the Diagnostics function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926), section "System diagnostics by means of the user program". Enable diagnostic interrupt on wire break You use this parameter to specify whether a diagnostic interrupt is to be triggered in the event of wire breaks of the utilized signals for the following encoders: Push-pull 24 V encoder (Page 71) RS422 encoder (Page 73) (additionally monitored for short-circuits and incorrect supply voltage) SSI absolute encoder (Page 75) (additionally monitored for short-circuits and incorrect supply voltage) Note If you use an encoder with a different sensor type or interface standard, wire break cannot be detected. Counting, measurement and position detection 180 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Enable additional diagnostic interrupts You use this parameter to specify whether diagnostic interrupts are to be triggered for additional errors. See the device manual for the technology module to find out which errors during operation can trigger a diagnostic interrupt. Diagnostics interrupts (Compact CPU) Enable diagnostic interrupts A Compact CPU can trigger diagnostic interrupts for certain faults if you have enabled diagnostic interrupts. These diagnostic interrupts are processed in an interrupt OB. You use this parameter to determine if the Compact CPU should trigger diagnostic interrupts when a given error occurs. See the device manual for the Compact CPU to find out which errors can trigger a diagnostic interrupt during operation. The diagnostic interrupts are not enabled in the default setting. Operating mode Selection of the operating mode for the channel This setting defines how the channel counting and measuring functions are to be configured and controlled. Operating mode Description Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object A technology object is used for the parameter assignment of the channel. The related instruction for the technology object in the user program provides the access to the control and feedback interfaces of the technology module. You specify the assignment between the technology module/channel and technology object in the basic parameters of the technology object. Position input for "Motion Control" technology object The technology module is used for position input for a higher-level Motion Control controller. This operating mode affects all channels of the technology module for TM Count and TM PosInput. Setting the operating mode only affects the given channel of the Compact CPU. Parameter assignment is implemented via the Device configuration of the technology module. Parameter assignment of the encoder signals is implemented by means of the Module parameters (Page 183). Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 181 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Operating mode Description Manual operation (without technology object) Parameter assignment of the channel is effected via the hardware configuration of the technology module: * Manual operation (incremental or pulse encoder) (Page 190) * Manual operation (SSI absolute encoder) (Page 207) You have direct access to the control and feedback interface of the channel through the user program. Fast Mode The technology module is used for very fast detection of the count or position value. No control interface is available. The parameter setting (hardware configuration) of the module is used for the parameter assignment of the channel. You have direct access to the feedback interface of the channel through the user program. This operating mode is not supported by every technology module. Note GSD file When using a GSD file you determine the operating mode via the selection of the module name in the hardware catalog. You can select manual operation or Fast Mode in the process. Selection of the operating mode for the channel You use this parameter in "Manual operation" to specify the main task for which the channel of the technology module is used. This defines the setting options under "Parameters" (hardware configuration). Operating mode Description Counting (Page 24) / Position input (Page 26) The main function of the channel is counting or position input. The comparison functions and hardware interrupts work with the counter value or position value. The measured values are available concurrently. Measuring (Page 58) The main function of the channel is counting. The comparison functions (Page 56) and hardware interrupts for compare events work with the measured value. The counter value is available concurrently. Note GSD file When using a GSD file you determine the operating type via the selection of the module name in the hardware catalog. Counting, measurement and position detection 182 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Module parameters (position input for Motion Control) In operating mode "Position input for "Motion Control" technology object", the parameters for the encoder signals of the channel are assigned under "Module parameters". The parameters depend on the encoder used. Note You cannot use this operating mode with a GSD file. Module parameters for incremental encoders and pulse encoders If you use an incremental or pulse encoder, you need to configure the following parameters for the encoder signals of the channel. Signal type Invert direction Signal evaluation Filter frequency Sensor type (for TM Count) Interface standard (for TM PosInput) Signal selection for reference mark 0 Measuring input Increments per revolution Steps per revolution Reference speed You can find a description of the first six parameters in section Counter inputs (Page 190). Module parameters for SSI absolute encoders If you use an TM PosInput with an SSI absolute encoder, you need to configure the following parameters for the encoder signals of the channel. Signal type Invert direction Frame length Code type Transmission rate Monoflop time Parity Bit number LSB of the position value Bit number MSB of the position value Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 183 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Measuring input Steps per revolution Number of revolutions Reference speed You can find additional information on the first new parameters in section Counter inputs (Page 207). Signal selection for reference mark 0 You can use this parameter to specify the external reference signal upon which a new reference mark is saved for the encoder position. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning None1 No external reference signal is used. DI0 (preset for TM Count and TM PosInput) The current counter value is saved as the new encoder position reference mark upon a positive edge at digital input DI0. Signal N of incremental encoder (default for Compact CPU2) The current counter value is saved as the new encoder position reference mark upon a positive edge of the signal N of incremental encoder. 1 Only available with Compact CPU 2 Exceptions: "DI0" is the default for HSC 3 and HSC 6 on the 1511C as well as on the 1512C in compatibility mode Measuring input (TM Count and TM PosInput) The parameter specifies that the hardware digital input DI1 serves as a measuring input. For rising, falling or both edges of the DI1, the current counter value or position value is saved as the current encoder position. The value of the parameter cannot be changed. Measuring input (compact CPU) This parameter is used to define the hardware input which is used as the external measuring input for saving the encoder position. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning None (default) No external measuring input is used. DI1 The hardware digital input DI1 serves as the measuring input. For rising, falling or both edges of the DI1, the current counter value is saved as current encoder position. Counting, measurement and position detection 184 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Increments per revolution With this parameter you specify the line count of the incremental and pulse encoder. The line count can be found in the data sheet for the encoder. Steps per revolution (incremental and pulse encoder) The parameter specifies the number of count pulses per encode rotation. The number of count pulses depends on the increment per rotation and the parameterized signal evaluation. Example: Your incremental or pulse encoder delivers 2048 increments per revolution. Depending on the signal evaluation the following value is displayed: Signal evaluation Steps per revolution Single 2048 Double 4096 Quadruple 8192 Steps per revolution (SSI absolute encoder) With this parameter you define the number of increments the SSI absolute encoder supplies per revolution. Number of revolutions The parameter specifies how many rotations the value range of the SSI absolute encoder encompasses. The value is calculated from the parameterized values for the bit numbers LSB and MSB of the position value as well as the steps per revolution. Reference speed The encoder transmits the process value of the speed as a percentage of the reference speed. This parameter defines the speed in rpm which is to be correspond to the value 100 % . The reference speed must be identical to the setting in the controller. You can enter a value between 6.00 and 210000.00. The default setting is "3000.00". Further configuring You can perform the further configuration by using an axis or measuring input technology object of S7-1500 Motion Control . See the S7-1500 Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59381279) and S7-1500T Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481326) function manuals for further details on configuring and commissioning position input and the measuring input technology object. See also Position detection for Motion Control (Page 70) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 185 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Hardware interrupts You can set for each channel the events which are to trigger a hardware interrupt during operation when assigning the basic parameters of the technology module. In an S7-1500 system, you enter a matching event name for each enabled hardware interrupt and assign a corresponding hardware interrupt OB to each hardware interrupt. If a hardware interrupt is triggered, the corresponding OB is started to evaluate the hardware interrupt data. Note In the following cases you can only release only one hardware interrupt per module. * Distributed operation with an S7-300/400 CPU * Use of a GSD file A hardware interrupt is triggered if the condition for changing the respective status bit or event bit in the feedback interface is fulfilled. Lost hardware interrupt If the hardware interrupts are triggered more quickly by the system than they can be acknowledged, hardware interrupts are lost and the "Hardware interrupt" diagnostics interrupt is signaled. Hardware interrupts that can be activated Hardware interrupt Description Incremen- SSI absotal or pulse lute enencoder coder Available in operating mode Position input for "Motion Control" technology object Event Type number Yes No No No Hardware interrupt when current counter value or position value is saved as Capture value 1000B Synchroniza- Yes tion of the counter by an external signal No Yes No No Hardware interrupt upon synchronization of the counter by signal N or DI edge 1001B Gate start Yes No Yes No No Hardware interrupt when internal gate opens 0001B Gate stop Yes No Yes No No Hardware interrupt when internal gate closes 0010B No Based on counter value No No Hardware interrupt when counter value exceeds high counting limit 0011B New Capture value available Available in counting mode using Available in measuring mode using Incremen- SSI absotal or pulse lute enencoder coder Yes Overflow (high Based on counting limit counter violated) value Counting, measurement and position detection 186 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Hardware interrupt Available in counting mode using Available in measuring mode using Available in operating mode Position input for "Motion Control" technology object Description Event Type number Incremen- SSI absotal or pulse lute enencoder coder Incremen- SSI absotal or pulse lute enencoder coder Underflow (low counting limit violated) Based on counter value No Based on counter value No No Hardware interrupt when counter value falls below low counting limit 0100B Change of direction1 Based on counter value Based on position value Based on counter value Based on position value No Hardware interrupt when counter value or position value changes direction 1010B Zero crossing Based on counter value Based on position value Based on counter value Based on position value No Hardware interrupt with zero crossing of counter value or position value 0111B Comparison event for DQ0 occurred Based on counter value Based on position value Based on measured value Based on measured value No Hardware interrupt when a comparison event for DQ0 occurs as a result of the selected comparison condition. 0101B No hardware interrupt when the change of the counter value for an incremental or pulse encoder was not caused by a count pulse Comparison event for DQ1 occurred Based on counter value Based on position value Based on measured value Based on measured value No Hardware interrupt when a comparison event for DQ1 occurs as a result of the selected comparison condition. 0110B No hardware interrupt when the change of the counter value for an incremental or pulse encoder was not caused by a count pulse 1 The STS_DIR feedback bit has a default of "0". A hardware interrupt is not triggered when the first change to the counter value or position value immediately after the technology module is switched on is in the down direction. Default setting No hardware interrupts are enabled in the default setting. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 187 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.2.6 Additional parameters for Compact CPU Introduction When using a Compact CPU, the following parameters are additionally available for the signals of the high-speed counter. Compatibility 1511C (high-speed counters of Compact CPU 1512C-1 PN) Front connector assignment same as CPU 1511C You can use this parameter to specify if the pin assignment for the front connector of the CPU 1511C-1 PN is to be used for the high-speed counter of the CPU 1512C-1 PN: Option Meaning Disabled (default) CPU 1512C-1 PN uses the pin assignment of the onboard front connector. 1512C-1 PN supports the use of the connections of both front connectors of the digital onboard I/Os for the high-speed counter. The assignment of hardware inputs and outputs for the HSC channels is described in the CPU 1512C-1 PN manual. Enabled CPU 1512C-1 PN uses the pin assignment of the front connector of the CPU 1511C-1 PN. 1511C-1 PN supports the use of the connections of the first front connector of the digital onboard I/Os for the high-speed counter. The assignment of hardware inputs and outputs for the HSC channels is described in the CPU 1511C-1 PN manual. General Activate this high-speed counter You can use this parameter to specify whether the respective high speed counter is to be used: Option Meaning Disabled (default) The high-speed counter is not used. The counter uses no connections of the onboard front connector and can not trigger interrupts. Writing to its control interface is ignored and its feedback interface returns zero values. Enabled The high-speed counter is used. The assignment of HSC addresses to the connections of the onboard front connector is described in the device manual of the Compact CPU. Counting, measurement and position detection 188 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Hardware inputs/outputs Clock generator input (A) / Pulse input (A) / Clock generator forward (A) This parameter specifies which input is used for the encoder signal A for the respective counter. The value cannot be changed. Clock generator input (B) / Pulse input (B) / Clock generator forward (B) If you use an encoder with multiple signals for the respective counter, this parameter specifies which input is used for the encoder signal B. The value cannot be changed. Reset input (N) If you use an incremental encoder for the respective counter, this parameter specifies which input is used for the reset input (encoder signal N). The value cannot be changed. HSC DI0 / HSC DI1 This parameter determines which digital input of the Compact CPU is to be used as the DIm of the counter. Note You can configure the input delay for a digital input in the Inspector window of the device configuration under "Properties > DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel n". HSC DQ0 You can read the status of the DQ0 via the feedback interface. You cannot assign DQ0 to a physical digital output of the Compact CPU. HSC DQ1 This parameter determines which digital output of the Compact CPU is to be used as DQ1. You can select an output with an output delay of 5 s or 500 s. You can find an overview of the output delay for all digital outputs in the device manual of the Compact CPU. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 189 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.2.7 Manual operation (incremental or pulse encoder) Counter inputs Signal type You can choose from the following signal types (Page 71): Signal type Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Incremental encoder An incremental encoder with phase- * (A, B phase-shifted) shifted A and B signals is connected. * Incremental encoder An incremental encoder with phase(A, B, N) shifted signals A and B and a zero signal N is connected. Pulse (A) and direction (B) A pulse encoder (signal A) with direction signal (signal B) is connected. Pulse (A) A pulse encoder (signal A) without direction signal is connected. You can specify the count direction by means of the control interface (Page 219). Count up (A), count down (B) Signals for counting up (signal A) and down (signal B) are connected. Invert direction Signal evaluation * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard * Invert direction * Signal evaluation * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard * Reaction to signal N * Frequency of synchronization * Frequency of the Capture function * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard * Filter frequency * Sensor type or Interface standard Invert direction You can invert the counting direction to adapt it to the process. The inverting of the direction is configurable and active for the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Counting, measurement and position detection 190 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Signal evaluation By configuring signal evaluation (Page 76), you can specify which edges of the signals are counted. You can select from the following options: Signal evaluation Meaning Single (default) The edges of signal A are evaluated during a low level of signal B. Double Each edge of signal A is evaluated. Quadruple Each edge of signals A and B is evaluated. The parameter can be assigned with the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) Incremental encoder (A, B, N) Filter frequency By configuring the filter frequency, you suppress interferences at the counting inputs A, B and N. The selected filter frequency is based on a pulse/break ratio of between around 40:60 and around 60:40. This results in a specific minimum pulse/break time. Signal changes with a duration shorter than the minimum pulse/break time are suppressed. You can select from the following filter frequencies: Filter frequency Minimum pulse/break time 100 Hz 4.0ms 200 Hz 2.0 ms 500 Hz 800 s 1 kHz 400 s 2 kHz 200 s 5 kHz 80 s 10 kHz 40 s 20 kHz 20 s 50 kHz 8.0 s 100 kHz (preset for Compact CPU) 4.0 s 200 kHz** (preset for TM Count) 2.0 s 500 kHz* 0.8 s 1 MHz* (default at TM PosInput) 0.4 s * Only available with TM PosInput ** * Only available with TM Count and TM PosInput Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 191 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Sensor type (TM Count) By configuring the sensor type, you specify how the counter inputs are switched for the TM Count. You can select from the following options: Sensor type Sourcing output (default) Sinking output Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output) Meaning The encoder/sensor switches the inputs A, B and N to 24VDC. The encoder/sensor switches the inputs A, B and N to M. The encoder/sensor alternately switches the inputs A, B and N to M and 24VDC. "Push-pull" is usually selected when incremental encoders are used. If using 2-wire sensors, such as light barriers or proximity switches, you need to select the corresponding wiring "sourcing output" or "sinking output". The data sheet of the encoder includes information on whether your incremental encoder is a push-pull encoder. Note If you use a push-pull encoder and the sensor type "Push-pull (sinking and sourcing output)" is configured, you can monitor the encoder signals for wire break. Sensor type (compact CPU) The "Sourcing output" sensor type is set for the Compact CPU and cannot be changed. The encoder or sensor switches the inputs A, B and N to 24V DC. You can operate both sourcing output encoders as well as push-pull encoders on the Compact CPU. You can find additional information on the sensor type in the data sheet for the encoder. Interface standard (TM PosInput) You use this parameter to specify whether the encoder outputs symmetric (RS422) or asymmetric (TTL) signals for the TM PosInput. You can select from the following options: Interface standard RS422, symmetrical (default) TTL (5 V), asymmetrical Meaning The encoder outputs symmetric signals according to the RS422 standard (Page 73). The encoder outputs asymmetric 5 V signals according to the TTL standard (Page 71). Note The RS422 standard provides greater interference immunity than the TTL standard. If your incremental or pulse encoder supports the RS422 standard and the TTL standard, we recommend using the RS422 standard. Counting, measurement and position detection 192 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Reaction to signal N You use this parameter to specify which reaction is triggered to signal N. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning No reaction to signal N (default) The counter is not affected by signal N. Synchronization at signal N (Page 44) The counter is set to the start value at signal N. Capture at signal N (Page 34) The counter value is stored in the Capture value at signal N. The use of a digital input and the use of the N signal are not mutually exclusive for the Capture function. If you select the function "Enable synchronization at signal N" for a digital input, the synchronization depends on the level at the digital input. The technology object displays the Capture value at the output parameter CapturedValue. Note You can only select the reaction to signal N if you have selected the "Incremental encoder (A, B, N)" signal type. Note If "Synchronization at signal N" is selected, you can select the function "Enable synchronization at signal N" for a digital input (Page 196). Note For High_Speed_Counter as of V3.0, the following applies: You can choose "Capture at signal N" only in operating mode "Use count value as reference": Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 193 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Frequency of synchronization This parameter is used to define the frequency of the following events: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once (default) The counter is only set at the first signal N or the first configured edge of the digital input. Periodic The counter is set at each signal N or each configured edge of the digital input. Frequency of the Capture function This parameter is used to define the frequency of Capture events for the following functions: Capture at Signal N Capture as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The first configured edge at the respective digital input or first rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Periodic (default) Each configured edge at the respective digital input or each rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Counting limits and start value High counting limit You limit the counting range by setting the high counting limit. You can enter a value up to 2147483647 (231-1). You must enter a value that lies above the low counting limit. The default setting is "2147483647". Low counting limit You limit the counting range by setting the low counting limit. You can enter a value up to 2147483648 (-231). You must enter a value below the high counting limit. The default setting is "-2147483648". Counting, measurement and position detection 194 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Start value By configuring the start value, you specify the value at which counting is to start and where it is to continue in the case of defined events. You must enter a value between the counting limits or equal to the counting limits. The default setting is "0". Additional information For more information, see Behavior at the counting limits (Page 28) and Counter behavior at gate start (Page 33). Counter behavior at limits and gate start Reaction to violation of a counting limit You can configure the following characteristics for violation of a counting limit (Page 28): Reaction Meaning Stop counting If a counting limit is violated, counting is stopped and the internal gate is closed. To restart counting, you must also close and reopen the software/hardware gate. Continue counting (default) Counting continues either with the start value or at the opposite counting limit, depending on the additional parameter assignment. Reset when counting limit is violated You can reset the counter to the following values when a counting limit is violated: Reset the value Meaning To start value The counter value is set to the start value. To opposite counting limit (default) The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. Reaction to gate start You can set the following Reaction to gate start (Page 33): Reaction Meaning Set to start value When the gate is opened, the counter value is set to the start value. Continue with current value (default) When the gate is opened, counting is continued with the last counter value. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 195 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Behavior of a DI Setting function of the DI By configuring a digital input, you specify which functions the digital input triggers at switching. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital input Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Gate start/stop (level-triggered) The level at the respective digital input opens and closes the hardware gate (Page 30). * Input delay * Select level * Input delay * Edge selection Gate start (edge-triggered) Gate stop (edge-triggered) Synchronization (Page 39) The configured edge at the respective digital input opens the hardware gate (Page 30). The configured edge at the respective digital input closes the hardware gate (Page 30). The configured edge at the respective digital input sets the counter to the start value. The EVENT_SYNC feedback bit indicates whether a synchronization has occurred. Enable synchronization at signal The active level at the respective digital input enaN bles synchronization of the counter at signal N (Page 44). Capture Input delay Edge selection * Input delay * Edge selection * Frequency of synchronization * Input delay * Select level * Input delay * Edge selection * Frequency of the Capture function The CAPTURED_VALUE value in the feedback interface indicates the Capture value. * Behavior of counter value after Capture No technological function is assigned to the respective digital input. * Input delay The configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current counter value (Page 34) as a Capture value. The use of a digital input and the use of the N signal are not mutually exclusive for the Capture function. Digital input without function * * You can read the signal state of the digital input via the respective feedback bit: * STS_DI0 * STS_DI1 * STS_DI2 Note With the exception of "Digital input without function", each function can only be used once for each counter, and if used for one digital input is not available to the others. Counting, measurement and position detection 196 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Input delay (TM Count and TM PosInput) You use this parameter to suppress signal interference at the digital inputs. Changes to the signal are only detected if they remain stable for longer than the configured input delay time. You can select from the following input delays: None 0.05 ms 0.1 ms (default) 0.4 ms 0.8 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms 12.8 ms 20 ms Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Note You configure the input delay under "Behavior of DI0" for all digital inputs together. The input delay is also displayed under "Behavior of DI1" and for TM Count also under "Behavior of DI2". Input delay (compact CPU) You use this parameter to suppress interference at the digital inputs of the DIn signals. Changes to the signal are only detected if they remain stable for longer than the configured input delay time. You can configure the input delay for a digital input of a Compact CPU in the Inspector window of the device configuration under "Properties > DI 16/DQ 16 > Inputs > Channel n". You can select from the following input delays: None 0.05 ms 0.1 ms 0.4 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms (default) Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 197 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 12.8 ms 20 ms Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Select level You use this parameter to specify the level at which the digital input is active. You can select from the following options: Level Meaning Active with high level (default) The respective digital input is active when it is set. Active with low level The respective digital input is active when it is not set. The parameter can be set for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start/stop (level-triggered) Enable synchronization at signal N Edge selection You can use this parameter to specify the edge of the digital input at which the configured function is triggered. The following options may be available depending on the function selected: At rising edge (default) At falling edge At rising and falling edge The parameter can be set for the following functions of a digital input: Gate start (edge-triggered) Gate stop (edge-triggered) Synchronization Capture Note At rising and falling edge" can only be configured for the "Capture" function. Counting, measurement and position detection 198 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Frequency of synchronization This parameter is used to define the frequency of the following events: Synchronization at signal N Synchronization as a function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once (default) The counter is only set at the first signal N or the first configured edge of the digital input. Periodic The counter is set at each signal N or each configured edge of the digital input. Frequency of the Capture function This parameter is used to define the frequency of Capture events for the following functions: Capture at Signal N Capture as function of a digital input You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The first configured edge at the respective digital input or first rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Periodic (default) Each configured edge at the respective digital input or each rising edge of the N signal saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Behavior of counter value after Capture You can configure the following characteristics for the counter after a capture event (Page 34): Reaction Meaning Continue counting (default) After saving the current counter value as Capture value, counting is continued unchanged. Set to start value and continue counting After saving the current counter value as Capture value, counting is continued with the start value. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 199 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Behavior of a DQ Set output With the parameter assignment of a digital output, you specify the condition upon which the digital output switches. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital output (Page 48) Meaning in the operating mode "Counting" Additional option-specific parameters Between comparison value and high limit (default) The respective digital output is active if: Comparison value <= counter value <= high counting limit * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) Between comparison value and low limit The respective digital output is active if: Low counting limit <= counter value <= comparison value Between comparison value 0 and 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration After set command from CPU until comparison value The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= counter value <= comparison value 1 The respective digital output is active once for the configured time and count direction when the counter value reaches the comparison value. * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Pulse duration * Hysteresis (in increments) When a set command is sent from the CPU, the * respective digital output is active until the counter * value is equal to the comparison value. * * Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). Comparison value 0 Comparison value 1 Count direction Hysteresis (in increments) -- Note DQ0 of a counter of a Compact CPU With a Compact CPU, the respective digital output DQ0 is available via the feedback interface, but not as a physical output. Note You can only select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" function for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Counting, measurement and position detection 200 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Note The "At comparison value for a pulse duration" and "After set command from CPU until comparison value" functions only switch the digital output in question if a count pulse reaches the comparison value. When the counter value is set, e.g. by synchronization, the digital output does not switch. Function of a digital output (Page 56) in the operating mode "Measuring" Meaning Measured value >= comparison value (default) The respective digital output is active if the meas- * ured value is greater than or equal to the compari* son value. Measured value <= comparison value The respective digital output is active if the measured value is less than or equal to the comparison value. Between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= measured value <= comparison value 1 Not between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 1 <= measured value <= comparison value 0 Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). Additional option-specific parameters Comparison value 0 Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 -- Note You can select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" functions only for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 201 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Comparison value 0 (TM Count and TM PosInput) Operating mode "Counting": With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 48), you specify the counter value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is greater than or equal to the low counting limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Operating mode "Measurement": With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The minimum value is -7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "0.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Comparison value 0 (compact CPU) Operating mode "Counting": With the parameter assignment of the Comparison value (Page 48), you specify the counter value at which the STS_DQ0 bit is set in the feedback interface of the selected comparison event. The digital output DQ0 is not available as a physical output in a Compact CPU. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is greater than or equal to the low counting limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Operating mode "Measurement": With the parameter assignment of the Comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the STS_DQ0 bit is set in the feedback interface of the selected comparison event. The digital output DQ0 is not available as a physical output in a Compact CPU. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The minimum value is -7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "0.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Counting, measurement and position detection 202 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Comparison value 1 Operating mode "Counting": With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 48), you specify the counter value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter an integer (DINT) that is smaller than or equal to the high counting limit. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "10". Operating mode "Measurement": With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The maximum value is 7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "10.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Count direction You use this parameter to specify the count direction for which the selected function is valid. You can select from the following options: Count direction Meaning In both directions (default) The comparison and switching of the respective digital output take place regardless of the count direction. Up The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts up. Down The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the counter counts down. The parameter can be configured for the following functions: Between Comparison value 0 and 1 (Operating mode "Counting") At comparison value for a pulse duration After set command from CPU until comparison value Pulse duration By configuring the pulse duration for the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration", you specify the number of milliseconds for which the respective digital output is active. If you enter "0" and the counter value corresponds to the comparison value, the digital output remains active until the next count pulse. You can enter a value between 0.0 and 6553.5. The default setting is "500.0", which is equivalent to a pulse duration of 0.5 s. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 203 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Hysteresis (in increments) By configuring the hysteresis (Page 66), you can define a range around the comparison values. For the functions "Between comparison value and upper counter limit" and "Between comparison value and lower counter limit" the hysteresis also applies at the counter limits. Within the hysteresis range, the digital outputs cannot switch again until the counter value is outside the range. Choose a small enough hysteresis. When the hysteresis range, starting from the configured comparison value, spans the entire counter value range, proper functioning of the comparison values cannot be guaranteed. If a comparison value lies so close to the counter limit that the hysteresis range would extend beyond this counter limit, the hysteresis range ends there. If you enter "0", the hysteresis is turned off. You can enter a value between 0and 255. The default setting is "0". Note The hysteresis is only available in operating mode "Counting". Specifying the measured value Measured variable This parameter is used to specify the measured variable (Page 59) to be provided by the technology module. The MEASURED_VALUE value in the feedback interface indicates the measured value. You can select from the following options: Measured variable Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Frequency (default) The measured variable shows the number of increments per second. The value is a floating point number (REAL). The unit is Hz. * Update time Period The measured variable is the average period between two increments. The value is an integer (DINT). The unit is s. * Update time Velocity The measured variable is a velocity. * Examples of a velocity measurement can be found in the explanation of the "Increments per unit" parameter. Update time * Time base for velocity measurement * Increments per unit Counting, measurement and position detection 204 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Update time By configuring the update time (Page 59) in milliseconds, you can specify the time interval between two measured value updates. The update time and the signal type (Page 190) effect the accuracy of the measurement. In the case of update times of at least 100 ms, the effect of the signal type is negligible. In the case of update times of less than 100 ms, you achieve maximum measurement accuracy using the following signal types: Incremental encoder (A, B phase-shifted) with Signal evaluation "Single" Incremental encoder (A, B, N) with Signal evaluation "Single" Pulse (A) and direction (B) Pulse (A) In the case of other signal types, measurement accuracy depends on the encoder and cable used. If you enter "0", the measured value is updated once per module-internal cycle. Up to three decimal places can be entered. A value from 0.0 to 25000.0 is permissible. The default setting is "10.0". Time base for velocity measurement This parameter defines the time base on which the velocity is to be returned. You can select from the following options: 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms 1s 60 s The default setting is "60 s". Increments per unit You can use this parameter to define the number of count pulses per relevant unit that the incremental or absolute encoder supplies for the velocity measurement. The number of count pulses depends on the configured signal evaluation. You can enter a value between 1 and 65535. Example 1: You encoder delivers 4000 count pulses for travel over one meter. The velocity is to be measured in meters per second. "Double" is configured as signal evaluation. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 8000 Time base for velocity measurement: 1 s Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 205 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Example 2: Your encoder delivers 4096 count pulses per revolution. The velocity is to be measured in revolutions per minute. "Single" is configured as the signal evaluation. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 4096 Time base for velocity measurement: 60 s Counting, measurement and position detection 206 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.2.8 Manual operation (SSI absolute encoder) Counter inputs Signal type If an SSI absolute encoder with the data signal (Signal ID) and cycle signal (Signal C) is connected, select the signal type (Page 75) "Absolute encoder (SSI)". Invert direction You can use this parameter to invert the values supplied by the SSI absolute encoder. This allows you to adapt the detected direction of the encoder to the motor's direction of rotation. Note This parameter acts only on the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value in the frame. Frame length With the parameter assignment of the frame length, you specify the number of bits of an SSI frame of the SSI absolute encoder (Page 26) used. You can find the frame length of your SSI absolute encoder in the data sheet of the encoder. Special bits are also included in the frame length. A parity bit does not count in the frame length. A frame length of between 10 bits and 40 bits is permitted. The default setting is "13 Bit". You can find two examples of the SSI frame format at Examples of the frame format (Page 159). Code type You use the parameter assignment of the code type to specify whether the encoder supplies Dual code or Gray code. You can select from the following options: Code type Meaning Gray (default) The gray-coded position value returned by the SSI absolute encoder is converted to dual code. Dual The value returned by the SSI absolute encoder is not converted. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 207 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Transmission rate With the parameter assignment of the transmission rate, you specify the data transmission rate between the technology module and the SSI absolute encoder. You can select from the following options: 125 kHz (preset) 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 1.5 MHz 2 MHz The maximum transmission rate depends on the cable length and the technical specifications of the SSI absolute encoder. For additional information, refer to the product manual of the TM PosInput and the encoder description. Monoflop time With the parameter assignment of the monoflop time, you specify the idle time between two SSI frames. The configured monoflop time must be at least equal to the monoflop time of the SSI absolute encoder used. You can find this value in the technical specifications of the SSI absolute encoder. You can select from the following options: Automatically (default) 16 s 32 s 48 s 64 s Note If you select the "Automatic" option, the monoflop time automatically adapts to the encoder used. In isochronous mode, the "Automatic" option corresponds to a monoflop time of 64 s. If the monoflop time of the employed SSI absolute value encoder is less than 64 s, you can select the value of the encoder to achieve faster isochronous times. Counting, measurement and position detection 208 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Parity With the parameter assignment of the parity, you specify whether the SSI absolute encoder transfers a parity bit. If, for example, a 25-bit encoder with parity is assigned, the technology module reads 26 bits. A parity error is reported in the feedback interface by means of the ENC_ERROR bit. Bit number LSB of the position value This parameter is used to specify the bit number of the LSB (least significant bit) of the position value in the frame of the SSI absolute encoder. In this way you limit the range in the frame that supplies the position value. The value must be less than the bit number of the MSB of the position value. The difference between the bit numbers of the MSB and the LSB of the position value must be less than 32. The default setting is "0". Note If you have selected the Code type "Gray", only the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value is converted to binary code. Bit number MSB of the position value This parameter is used to specify the bit number of the MSB (most significant bit) of the position value in the frame of the SSI absolute encoder. In this way you limit the range in the frame that supplies the position value. The value must be less than the frame length and higher than the bit number of the LSB of the position value. The difference between the bit numbers of the MSB and the LSB of the position value must be less than 32. The default setting is "12". Note If you have selected the Code type "Gray", only the range from the LSB to the MSB of the position value is converted to binary code. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 209 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Behavior of a DI Setting function of the DI By configuring a digital input, you specify which functions the digital input triggers at switching. You can select from the following options: Function of a digital input Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Capture The configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current position value as a Capture value. * Input delay * Edge selection * Frequency of the Capture function * Input delay The CAPTURED_VALUE feedback bit indicates the capture value. The function can only be used for one of the two digital inputs. Digital input without function No technological function is assigned to the respective digital input. You can read the signal state of the digital input via the respective feedback bit: * STS_DI0 * STS_DI1 Note You can choose the "Capture" function only in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference". Input delay By configuring the input delay, you suppress interferences at the digital inputs. Signals with a pulse duration below the configured input delay are suppressed. You can select from the following input delays: None 0.05 ms 0.1 ms (default) 0.4 ms 0.8 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms 12.8 ms 20 ms Counting, measurement and position detection 210 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Note If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Note You configure the input delay under "Behavior of DI0" for all digital inputs together. The input delay is also displayed under "Behavior of DI1". Edge selection You can use this parameter to specify the edge of the digital input at which the configured function is triggered for the "Capture" function. You can select from the following options: At rising edge (default) At falling edge At rising and falling edge Frequency of the Capture function This parameter is used to define the frequency of Capture events: You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Once The first configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current counter value as Capture value. Periodic (default) Each configured edge at the respective digital input saves the current counter value as a Capture value. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 211 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Behavior of a DQ Set output With the parameter assignment of a digital output, you specify the condition upon which the digital output switches. You can select from the following options depending on the operating mode: Function of a digital output (Page 52) in the operating mode "Position input" Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Between comparison value and high limit (default) The respective digital output is active if: Comparison value <= position value <= maximum position value * Between comparison value and low limit The respective digital output is active if: Minimum position value <= Position value <= Comparison value Between comparison value 0 and 1 At comparison value for a pulse duration The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= position value <= comparison value 1 The respective digital output is active once for the assigned time and direction of the position value change when the position value is equal to the comparison value or has fallen below or exceeded it. After set command from CPU until When a set command is sent from the CPU, the comparison value respective digital output is active for the assigned direction of the position value change until the position value is equal to the comparison value or has fallen below or exceeded it. Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Pulse duration * Hysteresis (in increments) * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Count direction * Hysteresis (in increments) -- Note You can only select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" function for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Counting, measurement and position detection 212 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Function of a digital output (Page 56) in the operating mode "Measuring" Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Measured value >= comparison value (default) The respective digital output is active if the measured value is greater than or equal to the comparison value. * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 Measured value <= comparison value The respective digital output is active if the measured value is less than or equal to the comparison value. Between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 0 <= measured value <= comparison value 1 Not between comparison value 0 and 1 The digital output DQ1 is active if: Comparison value 1 <= measured value <= comparison value 0 Use by user program The respective digital output can be switched by the CPU via the control interface (Page 47). * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 * Comparison value 0 * Comparison value 1 -- Note You can select the "Between comparison value 0 and 1" and "Not between comparison value 0 and 1" functions only for digital output DQ1 and only if you have selected the "Use by user program" function for digital output DQ0. Comparison value 0 Operating mode "Position input": With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 52), you specify the position value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of up to 31 bits, you must enter a positive integer (DINT) with a value between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, you must enter a signed integer (DINT) with a value between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Operating mode "Measurement": With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ0 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The minimum value is -7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "0.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 213 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Comparison value 1 Operating mode "Position input" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 52), you specify the position value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of up to 31 bits, you must enter a positive integer (DINT) with a value between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, you must enter a signed integer (DINT) with a value between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The default setting is "10". Operating mode "Measurement" With the parameter assignment of the comparison value (Page 56), you specify the measured value at which the digital output DQ1 switches as a result of the selected comparison event. You must enter a floating point number (REAL). If you use the DQ function "Between comparison value 0 and 1", the comparison value 0 has to be smaller than comparison value 1. The maximum value is 7.922816 x 1028. The default setting is "10.0". The unit of the comparison value depends on the measured variable. Count direction You use this parameter to specify the direction of position value change for which the selected function is valid. You can select from the following options: Direction of position value change Meaning In both directions (default) The comparison and switching of the respective digital output is carried out regardless of whether the position value increases of decreases. Up The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the position value increases. Down The comparison and switching of the respective digital output only takes place when the position value decreases. The parameter can be configured for the following functions: Between Comparison value 0 and 1 (operating mode "Position input") At comparison value for a pulse duration After set command from CPU until comparison value Counting, measurement and position detection 214 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Pulse duration By configuring the pulse duration for the function "At comparison value for a pulse duration", you specify the number of milliseconds for which the respective digital output is active. A value from 0.1 to 6553.5 ms is permissible. The default setting is "500.0", which is equivalent to a pulse duration of 0.5 s. Hysteresis (in increments) By configuring the hysteresis (Page 68), you can define a range around the comparison values. For the functions "Between comparison value and upper counter limit" and "Between comparison value and lower counter limit" the hysteresis also applies at the counter limits. Within the hysteresis range, the digital outputs cannot switch again until the position value has left this range once. Choose a small enough hysteresis. When the hysteresis range, starting from the configured comparison value, spans the entire position value range, proper functioning of the comparison values cannot be guaranteed. If a comparison value lies so close to the counter limit that the hysteresis range would extend beyond this counter limit, the hysteresis range ends there. If you enter "0", the hysteresis is turned off. You can enter a value between 0and 255. The default setting is "0". Note The hysteresis is only available in "Position input" operating mode. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 215 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Specifying the measured value Measured variable With this parameter you specify whether the technology module is to provide a certain measured variable (Page 59) or the complete SSI frame. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Additional option-specific parameters Frequency (default) The measured variable shows the number of increments per second, where each increment corresponds to one position value change. The value is a floating point number (REAL). The unit is Hz. * Update time * Update time The measured variable is a velocity. * Examples of a velocity measurement can be found in the explanation of the "Increments per unit" parameter. Update time * The MEASURED_VALUE value in the feedback interface indicates the measured value. Time base for velocity measurement * Increments per unit The MEASURED_VALUE value in the feedback interface indicates the measured value. Period The measured variable is the average period between two increments of the position value. The value is an integer (DINT). The unit is s. The MEASURED_VALUE value in the feedback interface indicates the measured value. Velocity Complete SSI frame Instead of a measured variable, the first 32 bits of the SSI frame are returned (bit 0 to bit 31). In so doing, special bits that do not belong to the position information are also supplied. A configured inversion of the direction is ignored. -- The MEASURED_VALUE value in the feedback interface indicates the 32 bits. You can find examples under Examples of the frame format (Page 159). This option is only available in operating mode "Use position value (SSI absolute value) as reference". Note If the increment per revolution is required for calculation of the measured values, it is automatically calculated from the parameterized telegram length as the power of 2, e.g. 8192 increments per revolution with a telegram length of 13 bit. If you are using an SSI absolute encoder whose increment per revolution does not correspond to the power of 2, the calculated measured value may be incorrect for a short time. Counting, measurement and position detection 216 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Update time By configuring the update time (Page 59) in milliseconds, you can specify the time interval between two measured value updates. Unsteady measured variables can be smoothed through longer update times If you enter "0", the measured value is updated once per module-internal cycle. Up to three decimal places can be entered. A value from 0.0 to 25000.0 is permissible. The default setting is "10.0". Time base for velocity measurement This parameter defines the time base on which the velocity is to be returned. You can select from the following options: 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms 1s 60 s The default setting is "60 s". Increments per unit With this parameter you define the number of increments per relevant unit that the SSI absolute encoder supplies for the velocity measurement. You can enter a value between 1 and 65535. Example 1: Your absolute encoder operates with a resolution of 12 bits per revolution and performs 4096 increments per revolution. The velocity should be measured in revolutions per minute. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 4096 Time base for velocity measurement: 60 s Example 2: You encoder delivers 10000 increments for travel over one meter. The velocity is to be measured in meters per second. In this case, you need to assign the following parameters: Increments per unit: 10000 Time base for velocity measurement: 1 s Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 217 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.3 Online & diagnostics module 5.1.3.1 Displaying and evaluating diagnostics The online and diagnostics view enables hardware diagnostics. You can also Obtain information on the technology module (e.g., Firmware version and serial number) Execute a firmware update if required Procedure (TM Count and TM PosInput) To open the display editor for the diagnostic functions, follow these steps: 1. Open the device configuration of the CPU or IM. 2. Select the device view. 3. Right-click the module and select "Online & Diagnostics". 1. Select the required display in the diagnostics navigation. Procedure (Compact CPU) To open the display editor for the diagnostic functions, follow these steps: 1. Open the Compact CPU folder in the project tree. 2. Double-click on the "Online & diagnostics" object. 3. Select the required display in the diagnostics navigation. Additional information Additional information on the diagnostic alarms and possible remedies can be found in the technology module device manual. Note Position input for Motion Control In operating mode "Position input for "Motion Control" technology object", channel diagnostics is not available for the technology module. Counting, measurement and position detection 218 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.4 Control and feedback interface (TM Count, TM PosInput) Information on using the control and feedback interface can be found under Overview of application options (Page 18). Note The following description does not apply for the operating modes "Fast Mode" and "Position input for technology object "Motion Control"". You can find a description of the feedback interface in the respective device manual for those technology modules that support the "Fast Mode" operating mode. 5.1.4.1 Assignment of the control interface The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the technology module. Control interface per channel The following table shows control interface assignment: Byte offset to start address Channel 0/1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 ... 3 12 ... 15 DINT or REAL: Load value (significance of the value is specified in LD_SLOT_0) 4 ... 7 16 ... 19 DINT or REAL: Load value (significance of the value is specified in LD_SLOT_1) 8 20 9 21 EN_ CAPTURE 10 22 SET_DIR 11 23 Bit 0 SLOT_0: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH SLOT_1: Value range: -2147483648 to 2147483647D or 80000000 to 7FFFFFFFH LD_SLOT_1 EN_ SYNC_DN EN_ SYNC_UP LD_SLOT_0 SET_DQ1 SET_DQ0 Reserved TM_ CTRL_DQ1 TM_ CTRL_DQ0 SW_GATE RES _EVENT RES _ERROR Reserved Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 219 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Notes Control bit/value Notes EN_CAPTURE Use this bit to enable the Capture function. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_CAP in the feedback interface. EN_SYNC_DN Use this bit to enable the synchronization of the counter when counting in downward direction with an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_SYNC in the feedback interface. EN_SYNC_UP Use this bit to enable the synchronization of the counter when counting in upward direction with an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Resetting this bit resets a set EVENT_SYNC in the feedback interface. LD_SLOT_m With this load request you specify the meaning of the value in SLOT_m: * 0000 means: No action, idle * 0001 means: Load count value (with incremental or pulse encoder) * 0010 not permitted * 0011 means: Load start value (with incremental or pulse encoder) * 0100 means: Load Comparison value 0 * 0101 means: Load comparison value 1 * 0110 means: Load low counting limit (with incremental or pulse encoder) * 0111 means: Load high counting limit (with incremental or pulse encoder) * 1000 to 1111 not permitted The technology module executes the respective action as soon as LD_SLOT_m changes. If values are loaded simultaneously via LD_SLOT_0 and LD_SLOT_1, the first value is applied internally from SLOT_0 and then the value from SLOT_1 is applied. This may lead to unexpected intermediate states. RES_EVENT Use this bit to trigger the reset of the saved events in the EVENT_ZERO, EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1 feedback bits. Reserved Reserved bits must be set to 0. RES_ERROR Use this bit to trigger the reset of the saved error states LD_ERROR and ENC_ERROR . SET_DIR Use this bit to specify the count direction for signal type "Pulse (A)". SET_DQ0 * 0 means: Up * 1 means: Down Use this bit to set digital output DQ0 when TM_CTRL_DQ0 is set to 0. In the case of the function "After set command from CPU until comparison value",SET_DQ0 is effective regardless of TM_CTRL_DQ0 as long as the counter value is not equal to the comparison value. SET_DQ1 Use this bit to set digital output DQ1 when TM_CTRL_DQ1 is set to 0. In the case of the function "After set command from CPU until comparison value",SET_DQ1 is effective regardless of TM_CTRL_DQ1 as long as the counter value is not equal to the comparison value. Counting, measurement and position detection 220 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Control bit/value Notes SW_GATE Use this bit to open and close the software gate when using an incremental encoder or pulse encoder. Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. The technology module only counts when the internal gate is open. * 0 means: Software gate closed * 1 means: Software gate open The control of the hardware gate takes place externally via the digital inputs of the technology module. The hardware gate can be activated through parameter assignment. The software gate cannot be deactivated. TM_CTRL_DQ0 TM_CTRL_DQ1 Use this bit to enable the technological function of digital output DQ0. * 0 means: SET_DQ0 defines the state of DQ0 * 1 means: assigned function defines the state of DQ0 Use this bit to enable the technological function of digital output DQ1. * 0 means: SET_DQ1 defines the state of DQ1 * 1 means: assigned function defines the state of DQ1 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 221 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module 5.1.4.2 Assignment of the feedback interface The user program receives current values and status information from the technology module via the feedback interface. Feedback interface per channel The following table shows the assignment of the feedback interface: Byte offset to start address Channel 0/1 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 LD_ERROR ENC_ ERROR POWER_ ERROR 0 ... 3 16 ... 19 COUNT_VALUE: 4 ... 7 20 ... 23 DINT: The last acquired Capture value 8 ... 11 24 ... 27 REAL: Current measured value or DWORD: Full SSI frame 12 28 13 29 14 30 STS_DI21 15 31 STS_M_ INTERVAL DINT: Current counter value or position value CAPTURED_VALUE: MEASURED_VALUE: Reserved Reserved STS_SW_ GATE STS_ READY LD_STS_ SLOT_1 LD_STS_ SLOT_0 RES_EVEN T_ACK Reserved STS_DI1 STS_DI0 STS_DQ1 STS_DQ0 STS_GATE STS_CNT STS_DIR EVENT_ CAP EVENT_ SYNC EVENT_ CMP1 EVENT_ CMP0 EVENT_ OFLW EVENT_ UFLW EVENT_ ZERO For TM PosInput applies: Reserved Note Validity of the position value The position value of an SSI absolute encoder is valid if STS_READY is set to 1 and ENC_ERROR is set to 0. In the module startup STS_READY is set to 0. Counting, measurement and position detection 222 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Notes Feedback bit/value Notes CAPTURED_VALUE This DINT value indicates the last detected Capture value. The following external signals can trigger the Capture function: * Rising or falling edge of a digital input * Both edges of a digital input The parameter "Frequency of the Capture function" determines if the function is executed for each configured edge or only once after each enable. COUNT_VALUE This DINT value shows the current counter value or position value. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of up to 31 bits, the position value is treated unsigned as a positive value and can assume values between 0 and 2(MSB-LSB+1)-1. If you use an SSI absolute encoder with a position value length of 32 bits, the MSB of the position value corresponds to the sign and the position value can assume values between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If you use a 32 bit position value for the comparison function, the position value is interpreted as DINT. ENC_ERROR This bit indicates that one of the following errors has occurred at the encoder signals (retentive) for the respective technology module: TM Count: * Wire break of digital input A, B, or N (with push-pull encoder) * Invalid transition of A/B signals (with incremental encoder) TM PosInput: * Invalid transition of A/B signals (with incremental encoder) * RS422/TTL error * SSI encoder error or SSI frame error (with SSI absolute encoder) If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts, the respective diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the event of encoder signal errors. For information on the meaning of the diagnostic interrupts, refer to the manual for the respective technology module. The bit is reset once you have acknowledged the error with RES_ERROR . EVENT_CAP This bit indicates that a Capture event has occurred and a counter value has been saved in CAPTURED_VALUE . You reset the status by resetting EN_CAPTURE . EVENT_CMP0 This bit indicates the saved status that a comparison event (status change) has occurred for the digital output DQ0 based on the selected comparison condition. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. If the counter value is set to the start value in counting mode, EVENT_CMP0 is not set. EVENT_CMP1 This bit indicates the saved status that a comparison event (status change) has occurred for the digital output DQ1 based on the selected comparison condition. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. If the counter value is set to the start value in counting mode, EVENT_CMP1 is not set. EVENT_OFLW This bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a counter value overflow. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_SYNC This bit indicates the saved status for which the counter was loaded with the start value by an external reference signal (synchronization) when using an incremental or pulse encoder. You reset the state by resetting EN_SYNC_UP or EN_SYNC_DN . EVENT_UFLW This bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a counter value underflow. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. EVENT_ZERO This bit indicates the saved status with which the counter value or position value experienced a zero crossing. You reset the status by acknowledgment with RES_EVENT. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 223 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Feedback bit/value Notes LD_ERROR This bit indicates that an error occurred (latching) during loading via the control interface. The loaded values were not applied. When using an incremental or pulse encoder, one of the following conditions is not fulfilled: * Low counting limit <= counter value <= high counting limit * Low counting limit <= start value <= high counting limit * Low counting limit <= comparison value 0/1 <= high counting limit When using an SSI absolute encoder, one of the following conditions is not fulfilled: * 0 <= position value <= maximum position value * 0 <= comparison value 0/1 <= maximum position value The bit is reset once you have acknowledged the error with RES_ERROR . LD_STS_SLOT_0 This bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that the load request for Slot 0 (LD_SLOT_0) has been detected and executed. LD_STS_SLOT_1 This bit indicates by a status change (toggling) that the load request for Slot 1 (LD_SLOT_1) has been detected and executed. MEASURED_VALUE This value shows the current measurement value with the REAL data type or the complete SSI frame with the DWORD data type: * Frequency: The mean frequency is calculated at set measuring intervals on the basis of the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes and returned in Hertz as floating point number. * Period duration: The mean period duration is calculated at set measuring intervals on the basis of the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes and returned in seconds as floating point number. * Velocity: The mean velocity is calculated at set measuring intervals on the basis of the time profile of the count pulses or position value changes and other parameters, and returned in the configured unit of measurement. Complete SSI frame: Instead of a measured variable, the least significant 32 bits of the unprocessed current SSI frame are returned. This provides you with encoder-specific additional bits, such as error bits, in addition to the position value. If the SSI frame is shorter than 32 bits, the complete SSI frame is returned right-aligned and the top unused bits are returned with "0" in the feedback interface. The measured values are returned as signed values. The sign indicates whether the counter value or position value increased or decreased during the relevant time period. * The update time is asynchronous to the opening of the internal gate, which means that the update time is not started when the gate is opened. After the internal gate is closed, the last measured value captured is still returned. POWER_ERROR For an S7-1500 technology module, this bit indicates that the supply voltage L+ is not available or too low or that the front plug is not plugged in. For an ET 200SP technology module, this bit indicates that the supply voltage L+ is too low. If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupts, the respective diagnostic interrupt is triggered in the event of errors in the supply voltage. For details on the diagnostic interrupts and the corrective measures they require, refer to the device manual for the respective technology module. If the supply voltage L+ is available at a sufficient level once again, POWER_ERROR is automatically set to 0. RES_EVENT_ACK This bit indicates that the reset of event bit EVENT_SYNC, EVENT_CMP0, EVENT_CMP1, EVENT_OFLW, EVENT_UFLW, EVENT_ZERO is active. Reserved Reserve bits are set to 0. Counting, measurement and position detection 224 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Feedback bit/value Notes STS_CNT This bit indicates that at least one count pulse or a position value change has occurred in the last ca. 0.5 s. STS_DI0 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI0. STS_DI1 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI1. STS_DI2 This bit indicates the status of digital input DI2 of the TM Count . STS_DIR This bit indicates the count direction of the last count pulse or the direction of the last position value change. 0 means: Down 1 means: Up STS_DQ0 This bit indicates the status of digital output DQ0. STS_DQ1 This bit indicates the status of digital output DQ1. STS_GATE This bit indicates the status of the internal gate when using an incremental or pulse encoder. 0 means: Gate closed 1 means: Gate open Information for TM PosInput: In order for the counting logic including the gate control to function correctly, the startup of the technology module must complete correctly at least once with a connected incremental or pulse encoder (STS_READY at 1). If a connected encoder is not ready yet during startup, the function of the STS_GATE feedback bit is delayed until the encoder for the technology module is available. If the technology module starts up without a connected encoder, the startup does not complete correctly and STS_READY as well as STS_GATE remain at 0. As soon as an encoder is then connected, the startup completes and the STS_GATE functions correctly. An encoder error after a completed startup has no influence on STS_GATE. STS_M_INTERVAL This bit indicates that at least one count pulse or a position value change was detected in the previous measurement interval. STS_READY This bit indicates that the technology module supplies valid user data. The technology module has been started up and configured. STS_SW_GATE This bit indicates the status of the software gate. 0 means: Gate closed 1 means: Gate open Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 225 Using the module 5.1 Using the technology module Complete acknowledgment principle Saving bits are acknowledged according to the complete acknowledgment principle. The figure below shows an example of the sequence of the complete acknowledgment principle in the event of an overflow: The EVENT_OFLW feedback bit is set as a saving event upon overflow. You set the RES_EVENT control bit to trigger EVENT_OFLW reset. The RES_EVENT_ACK feedback bit is set when reset of EVENT_OFLW is detected. You then rest the control bit RES_EVENT . The RES_EVENT_ACK feedback bit is reset. Counting, measurement and position detection 226 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module 5.2 Using the digital module 5.2.1 Configuring and assigning parameters to the module 5.2.1.1 Adding a module to the hardware configuration Requirements The project has been created. The CPU has been created. The ET 200 distributed I/O has been created. Procedure 1. Open the device configuration of the CPU or IM. 2. Select a module rack. 3. Select the digital input module from the module catalog: "DI > Digital input module > Article number" or "DIQ > Digital input module /Digital output module > Article number" 4. Drag the module to the required slot in the module rack. 5.2.1.2 Open hardware configuration Opening To open the hardware configuration, follow these steps: 1. Open the device configuration of the CPU or IM. 2. Select the device view. 3. Click on the module. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 227 Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module 5.2.1.3 Counting operating mode In counting operating mode or in the counter configuration you can set the following parameters for each channel. Note Some of the parameters and options are not available for all digital modules. See the module's device manual for the associated parameters and options. Channel enabled You use this parameter to specify whether the respective channel is enabled or disabled. Each channel is enabled by default. Input delay By configuring the input delay, you suppress signal errors at the digital inputs. Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time. Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is an input delay of 0.05 ms configured for at least one channel. In isochronous mode, the feedback interface is updated at the time Ti (time for reading the input data). You can select from the following options: 0.05 ms 0.1 ms 0.4 ms 0.8 ms 1.6 ms 3.2 ms (default) 12.8 ms 20 ms Note If you select the "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded cables for connection of the digital inputs. Counting, measurement and position detection 228 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module Reaction to violation of a counting limit The following behavior can be configured for Violation of the counter high limit in the upward direction or the counter low limit in the downward direction (Page 88): Reaction Meaning Stop counting (default at ET200SP and ET200AL) After a counting limit is violated, the internal gate is closed (automatic gate stop). As a result, the counting process is stopped and the module ignores any further counting signals. The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. To restart counting, you must close and reopen the software/hardware gate. Continue counting (default at S7-1500) After a counting limit is violated, the counter value is set to the opposite counting limit and counting continues. Edge selection This parameter is used to specify which edge the respective counter counts: Edge selection Meaning At rising edge (default) The respective counter counts all rising edges at the digital input. At falling edge The respective counter counts all falling edges at the digital input. At rising and falling edge The respective counter counts all edges at the digital input. Count direction Use this parameter to specify the counting direction of the respective counter. You can select from the following options: Up Down Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 229 Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module Set output Use this parameter to specify the Function (Page 92) that controls the STS_DQ feedback bit. You can use the STS_DQ reset bit in order to control a digital output module's digital output. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Off (DQ = 0) Regardless of the counter value, STS_DQ is permanently not set. Off (DQ = 1) Regardless of the counter value, STS_DQ is permanently set. Between comparison value 0 and 1 STS_DQ is set if the counter value between comparison values 0 and 1. Not between comparison value 0 and 1 STS_DQ is set if the counter value is outside the range between comparison values 0 and 1. Between comparison value and counter high limit STS_DQ is set if the counter value is between the comparison value and the counter high limit. Between comparison value and counter low limit STS_DQ is set if the counter value is between the comparison value and the counter low limit. Setting function of the DI Use this parameter to specify which function the respective digital input DIn+4 triggers. You can select from the following options: Option Meaning Digital input without function No function is assigned to the respective digital input DIn+4. The signal status of DIn+4 can be read by the CPU using the feedback interface. Gate start/stop Setting the respective digital input DIn+4 opens the hardware gate (Page 90) for DIn. Resetting the respective digital input DIn+4 closes the hardware gate for DIn. Count direction The respective DIn+4 digital input determines the counting direction at DIn, in order to adjust it to the process. If DIn+4 is not set, DIn counts up. If DIn+4 is set, DIn counts down. Note If "Count direction" is selected and the counting direction in the process changes, the counting edge is automatically adjusted (opposite edges). Counting, measurement and position detection 230 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module High counting limit You limit the counting range by setting the counter high limit. The maximum value for the counter high limit depends on the module: High counting limit DI 8x24VDC HS, DI 32x24VDC HF, DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 DI 16x24VDC HF Maximum value 2147483647 (231-1) 4294967295 (232-1) Default 2147483647 4294967295 You must enter a value that lies above the counter low limit. Counter low limit You limit the counting range by setting the counter low limit. The minimum value for the counter low limit depends on the module: Counter low limit DI 8x24VDC HS, DI 32x24VDC HF, DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 DI 16x24VDC HF Minimum value -2147483648 (-231) 0 (not configurable) Default 0 0 You must enter a value below the counter high limit. Start value By configuring the start value, you specify the value at which counting is to start. You must enter a value between the counting limits or equal to the counting limits. The default setting is "0". Comparison value By configuring a comparison value (Page 92), you specify the counter value that controls the STS_DQ reset bit based on the comparison function that was selected under "Set output". You have to enter a value that is greater than or equal to the low counting limit as well as smaller than or equal to the high counting limit. The default setting depends on the module: Comparison value Default DI 8x24VDC HS, DI 32x24VDC HF, DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 DI 16x24VDC HF 10 1 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 231 Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module Comparison value 0 By configuring a comparison value (Page 92), you specify the counter value that controls the STS_DQ reset bit based on the comparison function that was selected under "Set output". You must enter a value which is greater than or equal to the counter low limit and less than comparison value 1. The default setting is "0". Comparison value 1 By configuring the second comparison value (Page 92), you specify the additional counter value that controls the STS_DQ reset bit based on the comparison function that was selected under "Set output". You must enter a value which is greater than comparison value 0 and less than or equal to the counter high limit. The default setting is "10". Hardware interrupt: Comparison event for DQ occurred With this parameter, you specify for S7-1500 and ET200AL whether a process alarm is given off when a comparison event occurs based on the comparison function that was selected under "Set output". The hardware interrupt is not enabled in the default setting. Counting, measurement and position detection 232 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Using the module 5.2 Using the digital module 5.2.2 Online & diagnostics module 5.2.2.1 Displaying and evaluating diagnostics The online and diagnostics view enables hardware diagnostics. You can also Obtain information on the module (e.g., Firmware version and serial number) Execute a firmware update if required Procedure To open the display editor for the diagnostic functions, follow these steps: 1. Open the device configuration of the CPU or IM. 2. Select the device view. 3. Right-click on the module and select "Online & Diagnostics". 4. Select the required display in the diagnostics navigation. Additional information Additional information on the diagnostic alarms and possible remedies can be found in the module's device manual. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 233 Service & Support A Unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle For machine manufacturers, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry. To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant - from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization. Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drive technology from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants. You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees - even across continents - ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas. Counting, measurement and position detection 234 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Service & Support Online Support The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service & Support at any time and from any location in the world. You can find Online Support at the following address on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Technical Consulting Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis, definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the creation of the automation solution. Technical Support Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems. You can find Technical Support at the following address on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). Training Extend your competitive edge - through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer. You can find the training courses at the following address on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain). Engineering Support Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project. Field Service Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance - to ensure that your machines and plants are always available. Spare parts In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains. Repairs Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to reduce both to a minimum - with our worldwide repair facilities. Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 235 Service & Support Optimization During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing productivity or reducing costs. To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services. Modernization You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization - with comprehensive services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning. Service programs Our service programs are select service packages for an automation and drives system or product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems. The services of a service program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately. Examples of service programs: Service contracts Plant IT Security Services Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence SIMATIC Remote Support Services Benefits at a glance: Reduced downtimes for increased productivity Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks Comprehensive service from a single source, fewer interfaces and greater expertise Contact At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training, service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products from Industry Automation and Drive Technologies. You can find your personal contact in our contacts database on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner). Counting, measurement and position detection 236 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Index A Absolute encoder, 26 B Basic parameters High_Speed_Counter, 103 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 147 Technology module, 179 C Call High_Speed_Counter, 125 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 164 Capture, 25, 26, 34, 37, 111, 151, 196, 210 Commissioning High_Speed_Counter, 138 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 172 Compact CPU Performance features, 14, 16 Compact CPU S7-1500, (Technology module) Comparison value, 47, 116, 153, 200, 212 Counting, 116, 200 Digital input module, 92 Position input, 153, 212 Control interface, 219 Counter limits, 24, 28, 87, 88, 231 Counting Comparison value, 116, 200 Counting functions, 24, 82, 83, 87 Counting limits, 82, 83, 109, 194 CPU-STOP, 179 D Diagnostic interrupt, 70 Enable, 181, 181 Diagnostics High_Speed_Counter, 140 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 173 Technology module, 218, 233 Digital input Functions, 111, 151, 196, 210 Digital input module Applications, 86 Hardware configuration, 227 Performance features, 14, 16 Digital input/digital output module Performance features, 17 Digital output Comparison value, 47, 116, 153, 200, 212 Functions, 116, 153, 200, 212 E Enable Diagnostic interrupt, 70 Hardware interrupt, 70, 95 Error response High_Speed_Counter, 130 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 166 ErrorID, 135, 170 F Feedback interface, 222 Filter frequency, 105, 191 Frequency measurement, 58 G Gate control, 24, 30, 58, 87, 90, 111, 196 H Hardware gate, 24, 30, 87, 90, 111, 196 Hardware interrupt, 70, 95 Enable, 187 lost, 186 High_Speed_Counter, 97, 125 Basic parameters, 103 Call, 125 Commissioning, 138 Configuring, 101 Description, 125 Diagnostics, 140 Error response, 130 Input parameters, 131 Operating principle, 125 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 237 Index Output parameters, 133 Programming, 124 Static tags, 137 Hysteresis, 25, 26, 66, 68, 120, 156, 204, 215 I Input parameters High_Speed_Counter, 131 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 167 Isochronous mode, 79, 85, 96 L Latch, (Capture) M Measuring functions, 58 Measuring interval, 60, 63 Measuring range, 59, 59, 63 O Operating mode, 181 High_Speed_Counter, 116 Operating principle High_Speed_Counter, 125 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 164 Output parameters High_Speed_Counter, 133 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 169 P Parameter ErrorID, 135, 170 Parameter assignment Compact CPU, 22 Technology module, 22, 177 Period measurement, 58 Position input Comparison value, 153, 212 With Motion Control, 70 with SSI absolute encoder, 26, 26 R Reaction to CPU STOP, 179 S Sensor type, 105, 191 Signal evaluation, 105, 191 Signal N, 105, 191 Signal type, 104, 190, 207 Sinking output, 105, 191 Software gate, 24, 30, 87, 90 Sourcing output, 105, 191 SSI absolute encoder, 148, 207 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 142, 164 Basic parameters, 147 Call, 164 Commissioning, 172 Configuring, 146 Description, 164 Diagnostics, 173 Error response, 166 Input parameters, 167 Operating principle, 164 Output parameters, 169 Programming, 163 Static tags, 171 Start value, 24, 87, 109, 195, 231 Static tags High_Speed_Counter, 137 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 171 SW_GATE, 30, 90 Synchronization, 25, 39, 111, 196 at signal N, 44, 111, 196 by digital input, 42 T Technology module Application scenarios, 18 Applications, 81 Basic parameters, 179 Control interface, 219 Feedback interface, 222 Hardware configuration, 175 Online & Diagnostics, 218, 233 Parameter assignment, 177 Performance features, 14, 16 Project tree, 176 Technology object High_Speed_Counter, 97 SSI_Absolute_Encoder, 142 U Update time, 58 Counting, measurement and position detection 238 Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH Index V Velocity measurement, 58 W Wire break, 180 Counting, measurement and position detection Function Manual, 10/2018, A5E32009889-AH 239 High-precision input/output with Time- ___________________ Preface based IO 1 ___________________ Documentation guide SIMATIC High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual 08/2014 A5E33454822-AB 2 ___________________ Time-based IO basics Configuring and parameter 3 ___________________ assignment 4 ___________________ Programming 5 ___________________ Service & Support Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E33454822-AB 08/2014 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the documentation This function manual will support you when you use "Time-based IO" technology with the S7-1500, ET 200MP, and ET 200SP systems. The documentation deals with the following topics: Using "Time-based IO" technology Functions of the "Time-based IO" technology Hardware and software requirements for "Time-based IO" Configuring the "Time-based IO" function with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Diagnostics of the "Time-based IO" function Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the Function manual: General knowledge of automation engineering Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Proficiency with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Scope of the documentation The following documentation is valid for all components of the S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP systems that support the "Time-based IO" technology. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 3 Preface Conventions The following terms are used as synonyms in this documentation: TIA Portal: This term is used as synonym for the "STEP 7" configuration and programming software (TIA Portal)". TIO module: This term is used as synonym for I/O modules of the type: - IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link - ET 200MP TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V - ET 200SP TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V TIO_Time: This term is used as synonym for the shared time basis (relative time) of the TIO modules. Jitter: This is a general term that includes various time influences affecting accuracy. This means that: - for input data: Deviation of the measured time from the actual event. - for output data: Deviation of the actual switching time from the specified time. This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The pictures may differ slightly from the devices supplied. You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below: Note The notes contain important information on the product, handling the product or on part of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid. Additional support You will find information about the technical support available in the appendix. The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet (http://mall.automation.siemens.com). High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 4 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com). High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 5 Preface High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 6 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Table of contents Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Time-based IO basics ........................................................................................................................... 13 3 4 5 2.1 Using Time-based IO ...................................................................................................................13 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 Time behavior of Time-based IO .................................................................................................14 Time behavior of standard technology .........................................................................................14 Time-based IO properties ............................................................................................................15 2.3 System environment ....................................................................................................................17 2.4 Hardware requirements ...............................................................................................................18 2.5 Configuration software requirements ...........................................................................................19 2.6 Technical implementation ............................................................................................................20 Configuring and parameter assignment ................................................................................................. 25 3.1 Requirements ...............................................................................................................................25 3.2 Settings for Time-based IO ..........................................................................................................26 3.3 Configure IO-Link and activate Time-based IO ...........................................................................27 Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 29 4.1 Overview of instructions ...............................................................................................................29 4.2 Programming of Time-based IO...................................................................................................30 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 Time-based IO .............................................................................................................................34 TIO_SYNC: Synchronizing TIO modules .....................................................................................34 TIO_IOLink_IN: Read process input signals with time stamps ....................................................38 TIO_DI: Reading in edges at digital input and associated time stamps ......................................42 TIO_IOLink_OUT: Output time-controlled process output signals ...............................................47 TIO_DQ: Output edges time-controlled at the digital output ........................................................52 UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" ...............................................................................................................57 Service & Support ................................................................................................................................. 59 5.1 Service & Support ........................................................................................................................59 Index..................................................................................................................................................... 63 High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 7 Table of contents High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 8 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 1 Documentation guide Introduction The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers a range of topics concerning your automation system. The complete documentation for the S7-1500, ET 200MP, and ET 200SP systems consists of the respective system manuals, function manuals, and manuals for the specific device. In addition, the TIA Portal (online help) information system supports you in configuring and programming your automation system. Documentation for Time-based IO The following table lists further documentation that you will need when using Time-based IO. Table 1- 1 Documentation for Time-based IO Topic Documentation System description System manual S7-1500 Automation System * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/59191792) * System Manual ET 200MP Distributed I/O * System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/59193214) Most important contents Application planning Installation Wiring Commissioning Maintenance System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/58649293) PROFINET with TIA Portal CPU IM PROFINET with STEP 7 function manual * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/49948856) * PROFINET basics PROFINET functions PROFINET IO Engineering * Diagnostics with PROFINET IO * Isochronous mode Manuals * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/67295862/133300) * Manual IM 155-6 PN ST (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/59768173) * IM 155-6 PN HF manual * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/73184046) Block diagram Wiring Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages Technical specifications Dimension drawings High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 9 Documentation guide Topic Documentation Most important contents Manual IM 155-5 PN ST (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/59193106) Manual IM 155-5 PN HF (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/89261636) TM Manual Technology Module * TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/95153313) * Manual Technology Module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/95153951) IO-Link SIMATIC IO-Link System function manual * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/65949252) Communication module IO-Link master CM * 4xIO-Link manual * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/67328527) SIMATIC S7-PCT online help Interrupts and diagnostic alarms Parameter data set Technical specifications Dimension drawing Overview Configuration Block diagram Wiring Parameter assignment/addressing * Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages * Technical specifications Configuration with SIMATIC S7-PCT in the SIMATIC IO-Link * Port Configuration System function manual * Tool (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ view/en/65949252) IO-Link sensors/actuators Wiring Description Configuration -- SICK product information -- (http://www.sick.com/group/EN/home/product s/technologies/smart_sensor_solutions/Page s/product_track_and_trace.aspx) Product documentation of halstrup-walcher (http://www.halstrupwalcher.de/en/produkte/positioniertechnik/ind ex.php) System diagnostics Diagnostics function manual * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/59192926) Isochronous mode PROFINET with STEP 7 * (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/ * view/en/49948856) function manual * Overview Hardware/software diagnostic evaluation Benefits Use Parameter settings High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 10 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Documentation guide SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Software download for IO-Link The Port Configuration Tool (SIMATIC S7-PCT) is available on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/32469496). You will find software downloads for the IO-Link Device with time stamp function on the Internet: SICK (http://www.sick.com/group/EN/home/products/technologies/smart_sensor_solutions/Pag es/product_track_and_trace.aspx) halstrup-walcher (http://www.halstrup-walcher.de/en/downloads/index.php) High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 11 Documentation guide High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 12 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Time-based IO basics 2.1 2 Using Time-based IO Many processes in a plant require a relatively precise reproducibility as far as time is concerned. The reproducibility can be optimized to a limited extent by shorter CPU cycle times. The use of high-precision input/output with Time-based IO provides a more accurate reproducibility than the one that can be achieved by optimizing the CPU cycle time. An additional advantage of Time-based IO is the independence from the minimum time scale of the application cycle. Below is a selection of typical areas of application that can benefit from this technology. Defined response times An output signal that responds with a precise delay time that is independent of the application cycle can be output by adding a specified time to the time stamp of an edge at the digital input. Length measurement The length of a product passing by can be determined by the difference between two input time stamps and an associated travel speed. Cam controller The ongoing movement can be extrapolated from a synchronous position information (for example, from a counter module or an axis). Based on this result, the time of a switching position (cam position) is calculated and transferred to the TIO module (output). This way the switch event takes place at the required position. Dosing By specifying a switch-on and a switch-off edge to a time-controlled digital output, a valve can be opened for a specific time and the amount of liquid can be dosed accordingly. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 13 Time-based IO basics 2.2 Time behavior of Time-based IO 2.2 Time behavior of Time-based IO 2.2.1 Time behavior of standard technology The time behavior of the inputs/outputs depends on the following factors for standard technology: CPU program (program structure) Bus cycle times (fieldbus, backplane bus) Cycle time of the I/O modules Internal cycle time of sensors/actuators A deterministic statement as to when an input event (e.g., sensor signal) has taken place when the output event has an effect on the input event (e.g., output switches) will become inaccurate due to the time factors listed above. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 14 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Time-based IO basics 2.2 Time behavior of Time-based IO 2.2.2 Time-based IO properties Time-controlled I/O functionality Time-based IO stands for time-based processing of I/O signals. All input signals are referred to one time (TIO_Time). The input signals receive the time stamp t1. After signal processing, the output event can also be linked with the TIO_Time and output at the required time. Output takes place at time t2. Here an example for Time-based IO: Independence and focus of Time-based IO The shared time basis (TIO_Time) of all components involved is the basis for Time-based IO. By using TIO_Time, the accuracy of the output with Time-based IO does not depend on: CPU program (program structure) Bus cycle times (fieldbus, backplane bus) Cycle time of the I/O modules Internal cycle time of the IO-Link sensors/actuators The focus of Time-based IO is not on the I/O response time but on the predictability (determinism) of I/O signals. With Time-based IO, it is possible to respond to an input signal with an output signal within a defined time. Keep in mind the system-dependent minimum response time when using Time-based IO. Time-based IO stands for: I/O functionalities executed with high precision I/O processes with time stamp High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 15 Time-based IO basics 2.2 Time behavior of Time-based IO Accuracy Accuracy is crucial for the performance capability of Time-based IO. Accuracy is a property of TIO module IO-Link sensor/ actuator and indicates the deviation with which the required response is achieved. For Time-based IO, the accuracy and reproducibility of the response is in the millisecond range. Response time In addition to a very high accuracy, a minimum response time to an input event can result depending on the configuration. The response time is the time between the input event and the required output event. For the minimum response time: at least 3 * application cycle (TAPP) High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 16 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Time-based IO basics 2.3 System environment 2.3 System environment Introduction Possible system configurations with PROFINET for the use of Time-based IO are shown below. Use with TIA Portal High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 17 Time-based IO basics 2.4 Hardware requirements 2.4 Hardware requirements Introduction The properties of the hardware components required for Time-based IO are listed below. You will also find specific modules as an example. Requirements Component Properties CPU * Isochronous mode/ PROFINET IO IRT: provides defines response time and highprecision plant behavior. * CPU 1511-1 PN ET 200 interface module * Supports isochronous mode * ET 200SP with IM 155-6 PN HF (as of firmware V2.1) * ET 200MP with IM 155-5 PN HF * ET 200SP: CM 4xIO-Link (as of firmware V2.0) TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V * ET 200MP: TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V * SICK WTB12-C * halstrup-walcher PSE, PSS, PSW I/O module IO-Link Device for CM 4xIO-Link * * TIO module supports IO-Link time stamp function Examples High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 18 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Time-based IO basics 2.5 Configuration software requirements 2.5 Configuration software requirements Introduction Below please find a list of the software versions which support the "Time-based IO" function. Requirements Configuration software Requirements STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 * PROFINET IO IRT * S7-1500 automation system * For CM 4xIO-Link: IO-Link technology * ET 200SP and ET 200MP distributed I/O systems * CM 4xIO-Link * TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V (as of V13 Update 3) * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (as of V13 Update 3) * CM 4xIO-Link S7-PCT as of V3.2 -- Supported hardware components Additional information TIA Portal online help S7-PCT online help TIO instructions The TIO instructions are specific function blocks for use of Time-based IO. The following TIO instructions (Page 29) are available: TIO_SYNC TIO_IOLink_IN TIO_IOLink_OUT TIO_DI TIO_DQ As of V13 Update 3, the TIO instructions are available as integrated instructions in TIA Portal. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 19 Time-based IO basics 2.6 Technical implementation 2.6 Technical implementation Introduction The information below will help you better understand the core aspects of Time-based IO and find out which SIMATIC functions are used to implement the described aspects. Synchronization of involved modules in PROFINET (shared time basis) The Time-based IO technology uses isochronous mode for all involved PROFINET stations. Isochronous communication is made possible with PROFINET IRT (Isochronous Real-Time) and isochronous mode of the PROFINET stations. Additional information on isochronous mode is available in the PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) and Isochronous Mode (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) manuals. Several TIO modules can be synchronized to a shared time basis by using the isochronous PROFINET. The basis of the shared time basis for the TIO modules is the relative time TIO_Time. TIO_Time The TIO_Time is the central time basis to which all time stamps refer. TIO_Time has the following properties: Shared time basis for all TIO modules which are synchronized with the TIO instruction TIO_SYNC. The time starts counting again with each CPU startup. TIO_Time has the data type LTime (e.g., LT#14s830ms652us315ns). All valid time stamps refer to TIO_Time: - Input time stamps of the TIO modules are converted to TIO_Time in TIO instructions TIO_IOLink_IN and TIO_DI. - Output time stamps are converted to output time stamps of the TIO modules in TIO instructions TIO_IOLink_OUT and TIO_DQ. TIO instructions in the "Synchronous Cycle" OB The TIO instructions must be called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. You can find additional information in the chapter Programming (Page 29). High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 20 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Time-based IO basics 2.6 Technical implementation Modes for updating the process image In isochronous mode, you can influence the order of the update of the process image partition of the input and output data. In doing so, you can select the following program execution models: IPO model (application cycle factor = 1) OIP model (application cycle factor >= 1) The abbreviations I, P, O stand for the following processes: I = Input, P= Processing, O = Output. Additional information on the application cycle factor is available in the PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) Manual. IPO model (application cycle factor = 1) The user program is started after the delay time. Start by updating the corresponding process image partition of the inputs in the user program by calling the SYNC_PI system instruction. Processing is started next (for example, calculation of the time stamps). The corresponding process image partition of the outputs is updated at the end of the user program in the CPU by SYNC_PO. Properties of the IPO model: Supports shorter response times The application cycle may not be greater than the send clock. This gives the application less time than with the OIP model. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 21 Time-based IO basics 2.6 Technical implementation OIP model (application cycle factor >= 1) The user program is started after the delay time. In PIP_Mode 0, the TIO_SYNC instruction updates the process image. In the other modes, you start by updating the corresponding process image partition of the outputs in the user program by calling the SYNC_PO system instruction. As a result, the output data that was calculated in the previous network cycle will become active during the next network cycle (TO). Next the corresponding process image partition of the inputs is updated in the CPU by SYNC_PI. Processing starts after the data is transmitted (for example, calculation of the time stamps). Properties of the OIP model: The response time is longer than with the IPO model. It is one application cycle longer than permitted by the send clock. This gives the application more time than with the IPO model. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 22 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Time-based IO basics 2.6 Technical implementation Influence of accuracy To estimate the accuracy you need the accuracy of TIO module Sensor/ actuator Consult the data sheets of the respective module regarding the accuracy value. You have to add the individual jitters of the TIO modules and the sensors/actuators. You can neglect any other influencing factors. See also Programming of Time-based IO (Page 30) High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 23 Time-based IO basics 2.6 Technical implementation High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 24 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Configuring and parameter assignment 3.1 3 Requirements Introduction You need additional software components to use Time-based IO. You must also have created the standard configuration for your project. Below you will learn more about the standard configuration for Time-based IO. Requirements In the TIA Portal: The project has been created. The CPU has been created and the parameters are assigned. ET 200 distributed I/O and modules have been created and the parameters are assigned. The connection has been created and the parameters are assigned via PROFINET. A "Synchronous Cycle" OB has been created. In addition for IO-Link: S7-PCT is installed on the programming device/PC. IODD for IO-Link device (with time stamp function) are installed. See also System environment (Page 17) Configuration software requirements (Page 19) High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 25 Configuring and parameter assignment 3.2 Settings for Time-based IO 3.2 Settings for Time-based IO Below you will find an overview of which settings have to be made for which components of Time-based IO. Table 3- 1 Overview of settings for Time-based IO Component Can be set where (*) Properties to be set Additional information PROFINET subnet Properties of the PROFINET subnet > sync domain Create sync domain or edit properties of sync domain * PROFINET with STEP 7 function manual (http://support.automation.sie mens.com/WW/view/en/4994 8856) * Online help in the TIA Portal information system * PROFINET with STEP 7 function manual (http://support.automation.sie mens.com/WW/view/en/4994 8856) * Manual Technology Module TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V (http://support.automation.sie mens.com/WW/view/en/9515 3313) * Manual Technology Module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (http://support.automation.sie mens.com/WW/view/en/9515 3951) * Online help in the TIA Portal information system * For example, set send clock (e.g., 2 ms) Specify devices of the sync domain: ET 200 station (with TIO module) TIO module * Specify CPU as sync master. * Specify ET 200 interface module as sync slave with RT class "IRT". Properties of the PROFINET interface > isochronous communication Assignment of the TIO modules to the isochronous PROFINET subnet Properties of the TIO module > isochronous mode Activate isochronous mode Properties of the TIO module > I/O addresses A "Synchronous Cycle" OB has been assigned or created Properties of the TIO module > I/O addresses Assignment of I/O addresses to the process image partition (e.g., PIP1) Properties of the TM Timer DIDQ Parameter assignment for use of Timer DI and Timer DQ > Basic parameters/Channel parameters "Synchronous Cycle" OB Properties of the "Synchronous Cycle" OB > Isochronous mode IO-Link Device SIMATIC S7-PCT (sensor/ actuator) Adjust application cycle, if necessary Activate port of the IO-Link Device for Time-based IO See chapter Configure IO-Link and activate Time-based IO (Page 27) * Does not describe the exact location but the topic in the configuration software. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 26 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Configuring and parameter assignment 3.3 Configure IO-Link and activate Time-based IO Setting for Time-based IO If you have no special response time requirements, the following setting is suitable as a starting point: Send clock: 2 ms Application cycle: 4 ms Assignment to the process image partition: PIP1 PIP_Mode: 0 (OIP model) See also Programming of Time-based IO (Page 30) 3.3 Configure IO-Link and activate Time-based IO Introduction For Time-based IO, the ports of the IO-Link Master must be set to the required operating mode and suitable sensors/actuators must be connected to the ports. Requirements S7-PCT is installed on the programming device/PC. IODD for IO-Link Device (with time stamp function) are installed. You can find additional information on installation in the online help for S7-PCT. The project is open in network view in the TIA Portal. The hardware catalog is open. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 27 Configuring and parameter assignment 3.3 Configure IO-Link and activate Time-based IO Procedure 1. Right-click the IO-Link Master in the TIA Portal and select "Start Device Tool". The Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT) opens. 2. Select the connected IO-Link Device (sensors/actuators with time stamp function) from the device catalog for the ports of the IO-Link Master in S7-PCT. Use drag-and-drop to insert the IO-Link Device to the matching Port of the IO-Link Master. 3. Adapt the settings of the ports to match their respective task in the application. Possible port settings: - IO-Link Time based IN: The input signals of the sensor are given a time stamp. - IO-Link Time based OUT: The signal is output at the specified time. 4. Save the settings. 5. Download the Port configuration to the IO-Link Master. 6. Close S7-PCT. Result The IO-Link Master is configured with the connected sensor and actuator information. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 28 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 4 Programming 4.1 Overview of instructions Introduction Time-based IO is used with special instructions (TIO instructions). The TIO_SYNC TIO instruction is responsible for synchronizing all involved TIO modules and creates a unique time basis (TIO_Time) to which all actions are referenced. Depending on the type of TIO module, additional instructions undertake the reading in of process input signals with associated time stamps and/or the time-controlled output of process output signals. Note The TIO instructions use the time stamp functions of the TIO modules. For the other functions of the respective TIO module, no use of instructions is necessary. TIO instructions Instruction Can be used with TIO module Short description TIO_SYNC (Page 34) * CM 4xIO-Link * TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V TIO_IOLink_IN (Page 38) * CM 4xIO-Link Reads the input signals with time stamp from the IO-Link Device (sensor) TIO_DI (Page 42) * TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Detects the edges at the digital input (Timer DI) and supplies the associated time stamp * CM 4xIO-Link Outputs time-controlled output signals at the IO-Link Device TIO_DQ (Page 52) * TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V * TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Outputs time-controlled edges at the digital output (Timer DQ) TIO_IOLink_OUT (Page 47) Synchronizes the TIO modules and provides the time basis for Time-based IO High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 29 Programming 4.2 Programming of Time-based IO 4.2 Programming of Time-based IO Introduction For use of Time-based IO, the TIO instructions must be called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. The application can also run in another OB. In this way, you can shorten the runtime of the "Synchronous Cycle" OB. You need the following TIO instructions according to the required task: TIO module TIO instructions CM 4xIO-Link * Per sensor, one TIO_IOLink_IN for read-in * Per actuator, one TIO_IOLink_OUT for output * Per digital input, one TIO_DI for read-in * Per digital output, one TIO_DQ for output TM Timer DIDQ One TIO_SYNC (for up to eight TIO modules) This section below describes the programming of the CPU for Time-based IO. Requirements Hardware configuration in the TIA Portal: The TIO modules are assigned to an isochronous network. The TIO modules are assigned to a shared process image partition. The process image partition is assigned to a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. Additional information on configuration of Time-based IO is available in the section Settings for Time-based IO (Page 26). Procedure 1. Create a TIO_SYNC TIO instruction in the "Synchronous Cycle" OB. 2. Connect all TIO modules to be synchronized at the TIO_SYNC TIO instruction using parameters HWID_1 to HWID_8. The HWID is located in HWCN under the module properties. 3. Configure the send clock at the TIO_SYNC TIO instruction. The send clock is listed in the properties of the ET 200 station. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 30 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.2 Programming of Time-based IO 4. Set the data update mode at the TIO_SYNC instruction at the PIP_Mode input parameter. The description of the modes is available in the chapter Technical implementation (Page 20). The parameter assignment of the TIO_SYNC TIO instruction is complete. 5. For the following instructions, note the call sequence depending on the selected value for PIP_Mode: 6. Add the TIO instructions for data read-in/output required for your application in the "Synchronous Cycle" OB. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 31 Programming 4.2 Programming of Time-based IO 7. Connect the TIO_SYNC_Data input to the output of the same name at TIO_SYNC at each TIO instruction for read-in and output. 8. Assign the input parameters TO (see properties of the ET 200 station), HWID (see module properties in HWCN), and Port/Channel" for the TIO instructions for data read-in/output. Programming for the Time-based IO functionality is complete. 9. Connect the Time-based IO functionality with your application. 10.Compile and download the entire project to the CPU. Result You have completed programming the use of Time-based IO. Example Below you see an application example with a TIO_IOLink_IN and a TIO_IOLink_OUT. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 32 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.2 Programming of Time-based IO High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 33 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO 4.3 Time-based IO 4.3.1 TIO_SYNC: Synchronizing TIO modules Description You can use Time-based IO with the TIO_SYNC instruction. TIO_SYNC synchronizes TIO modules to a shared time basis TIO_Time. You can synchronize up to 8 TIO modules with TIO_SYNC. All TIO modules must be assigned to the same process image partition (PIP). If you select "0" for the input parameter PIP_Mode, you assign the number of the process image partition at the PIP_PART input parameter. Startup characteristics At the startup of the CPU, the TIO_SYNC instruction receives and checks the input parameters once and initializes the TIO_Time. If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message. Operating principle In normal operation, the instruction ensures synchronization of all TIO modules configured at the HWID input. The calculated TIO_Time for the instructions of the TIO modules is provided at the TIO_SYNC_Data output. Reaction to error The Error output indicates whether the instruction parameters are assigned correctly and whether an error has occurred. If the instruction was not processed successfully, the reasons for the errors are displayed at the Status output. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 34 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Parameter The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_SYNC instruction. Parameter Declaration HWID_1 ... HWID_8* Input SendClock* Input Data type Default Description HW_IO -1 Hardware identifier for TIO module from HWCN LTime LT#0ns Send clock of the sync domain. S7-1500 Apply the send clock from the PROFINET configuration. PIP_Mode* PIP_PART* Input Input USInt USInt 0 1 Mode for the data update**: * 0: OIP model with internal update of the process image by SYNC_PO and SYNC_PI. * 1: OIP model without internal update of the process image * 2: IPO model without internal update of the process image Only relevant if PIP_Mode = 0 Number of the process image partition which is to be updated isochronously. TIO_SYNC_ Data Output "TIO_SYNC_ Data" Calculated system time for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules and internal data used for synchronization. See UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" (Page 57). Status Output DWord 16#0 Status of the instruction: see description of Status parameter Error Output Bool False If True, this output indicates that an error has occurred. For detailed information see Status parameter. Error is reset as soon as the error is remedied. * Checked once at startup of the CPU ** The IPO model (PIP_Mode = 2) provides the shortest response times, but it also places the highest demands on system performance. Processing of all TIO instructions and other program sections must be completed within one send clock. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 35 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Status parameter Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output. The double word is divided as follows: Segment of the error code Meaning z0yywwww Error of a system function: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes. wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The error information is available in the help for the system function. z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy. The error can occur: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) Table with error codes Error code Meaning Remedy 00000000 No error. -- 1001xxxx An error has occurred with system function RD_SINFO. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_SINFO. * Read the description of the RD_SINFO in the TIA Portal information system. * Make sure that TIO_SYNC is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. * Correct the value of the cycle time. * Make sure that TIO_SYNC is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. (DW#16#...) 10020000 The read cycle time of the isochronous OB is LT#0ms or has as negative value and is therefore invalid. The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. 10030000 The TIO_SYNC instruction is not called in an isochronous Make sure that TIO_SYNC is called in a OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an "Synchronous Cycle" OB. isochronous OB. Possible cause: The TIO_SYNC instruction was called in an "MC-Servo" or "MC-Interpolator" OB. 10040000 The assigned value at the PIP_Mode input parameter is outside the valid range of 0 to 2. Correct the value at the PIP_Mode input parameter. 10050000 The assigned send clock is outside the permitted range of Correct the value of the send clock. 0 < SendClock <= 4 ms and is therefore invalid. 0006xxxx An error has occurred during execution of the SYNC_PI system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from SYNC_PI. 0007xxxx An error has occurred during execution of the SYNC_PO Read the description of the SYNC_PO in the system function. The low word xxxx displays the error TIA Portal information system. information of the RET_VAL return value from SYNC_PO. Read the description of the SYNC_PI in the TIA Portal information system. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 36 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Error code Meaning Remedy Isochronous mode missing. Time-based IO cannot be used. Check the values of input parameters HWID_1 to HWID_8. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. (DW#16#...) 10080000 Possible cause: Internal error during address calculation 10090000 TIO module HWID_1: Error during reading of HWID_1. Check the value of the respective input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module in each case from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. 100A0000 TIO module HWID_2: Error during reading of HWID_2. 100B0000 TIO module HWID_3: Error during reading of HWID_3. 100C0000 TIO module HWID_4: Error during reading of HWID_4. 100D0000 TIO module HWID_5: Error during reading of HWID_5. 100E0000 TIO module HWID_6: Error during reading of HWID_6. 100F0000 TIO module HWID_7: Error during reading of HWID_7. 10100000 TIO module HWID_8: Error during reading of HWID_8. 10110000 The configured process image partition at input parameter PIP_PART is not within the valid range of 1 to 31. Correct the value at the PIP_PART input parameter. x0FF0000 General internal error. -- High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 37 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO 4.3.2 TIO_IOLink_IN: Read process input signals with time stamps Description You can use the Time-based IO with the TIO_IOLink_IN instruction. TIO_IOLink_IN detects an event at the IO-Link Device and returns the process value including the associated time stamp. The IO-Link Device must be equipped with the time stamp function and the Port must be in "IO-Link, Time based IN" mode. Startup characteristics During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_IOLink_IN applies the input parameters once and checks the following: Checking HWID Checking whether the Port number is in the range (1 to 4) Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC? Checking To for a positive value Checking the setting to type IO-Link Checking Port mode regarding configuration for IO-Link Time based IN Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB Checking PortQualifier If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message. Operating principle In normal operation, the instruction detects the process data (SA_Data) of an IO-Link Device and the associated time stamp (time = TIO_Time) of the last valid change. Each valid change of the SA_Data with a correctly functioning port is accompanied by a valid time stamp. You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC instruction. This ensures a shared time basis. Reaction to error The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the errors are displayed at the Status output. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 38 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Parameter The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_IOLink_IN instruction. Parameter Declaration HWID* Input Port* TIO_SYNC_ Data* Data type Default Description HW_IO 0 Hardware identifier for TIO module from HWCN Input USInt 0 Port number (1 to 4) of the connected IO-Link Device Input "TIO_SYNC_ Data" S7-1500 System time provided for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules by the TIO_SYNC instruction. See UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" (Page 57). Connect this input parameter with the "TIO_SYNC_Data" output parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction. TO* Input LTime LT#0ns To: Time for output of isochronous output data. Apply To from the ET 200 station (properties of the PROFINET interface). SA_Bit0 Output Bool False Display of a process data change (bit 0 of SA_Data). SA_Bit0 is event-oriented. As long as no valid time stamp has been acquired (EventCount = 0), the process data are invalid. SA_Bit1 Output Bool False Display of a process data change (bit 1 of SA_Data). SA_Bit1 is event-oriented. As long as no valid time stamp has been acquired (EventCount = 0), the process data are invalid. SA_Data Output DWord 16#0 Process data SA_Data (Sensor Application Data) TimeStamp Output LTime LT#0ns Time stamp: Time when a change of the process signal SAData took place at the IO-Link Device. EventCount Output UInt 0 Counter: Is incremented with each new, valid time stamp. The counter is reset with each CPU startup. Status Output DWord 16#0 Status of the instruction: see description of Status parameter Error Output Bool False If True, this output indicates that an error has occurred. For detailed information see Status parameter. Error is reset as soon as the error is remedied. * Checked once at startup of the CPU High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 39 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Status parameter Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output. The double word is divided as follows: Segment of the error code Meaning z0yywwww Error of a system function: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes. wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The system function is available in the help for the system function. z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy. The error can occur: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) Table with error codes Error code Meaning Remedy 00000000 No error. -- 10010000 The assigned number at the Port input parameter is outside the valid range of 1 to 4. Correct the value at the Port input parameter. 10020000 The TIO_IOLink_IN instruction is not called in an isochronous OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. Make sure that TIO_IOLink_IN is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input parameter. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. x0040000 The data in TIO_SYNC_Data is invalid/incorrect. Check the TIO_SYNC instruction and the interconnection of its TIO_SYNC_Data output. 1005xxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_SINFO * system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_SINFO. * Read the description of the RD_SINFO in the TIA Portal information system. Unable to find IO-Link Device. * Possible cause: The module configured using the hardware identifier is not * an IO-Link Master for Time-based IO. Make sure that the configured module is an IO-Link Master for Time-based IO. (DW#16#...) 10060000 Make sure that TIO_IOLink_IN is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 40 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Error code Meaning Remedy 10070000 An internal error occurred during the address calculation. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. 00080000 TIO module is not synchronized using the TIO_SYNC instruction. Check the instruction TIO_SYNC. 10090000 The read cycle time of the isochronous OB is outside the permitted range of 0 < TAPP <= 16 ms and is therefore invalid. * Correct the cycle time. * Make sure that TIO_IOLink_IN is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. (DW#16#...) The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. 100A0000 The assigned time at the TO input parameter is outside the permitted range of 0 < To <= 4 ms. Correct the value at the TO input parameter. 100Bxxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_ADDR Read the description of the RD_ADDR in the system function. The low word xxxx displays the error TIA Portal information system. information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_ADDR. 000C0000 The converted time stamp is invalid. 000D0000 The value status PortQualifier of the IO-Link indicates that Check the connected sensor and its the process data is invalid. configuration. 100E0000 The configured port mode of the IO-Link is incorrect. Check the configuration of the connected sensor with S7-PCT. x0FF0000 General internal error. -- Check the connected sensor and the interaction between IO-Link Master and sensor (e.g., configuration). High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 41 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO 4.3.3 TIO_DI: Reading in edges at digital input and associated time stamps Description You can use the Time-based IO with the TIO_DI instruction. TIO_DI continuously detects the edges at a digital input of a TM Timer DIDQ and returns the associated time stamps. Startup characteristics During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_DI applies the input parameters once and checks the following: Checking HWID Checking to see if the number of the digital input (Channel) is in the permitted range (depending on addressed module and channel configuration) Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC? Checking To for validity (0 ms to 4 ms) Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. The input parameter EdgeSel can be changed during normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message. Operating principle In normal operation, the instruction detects the edges at a digital input and the associated time stamps (time = TIO_Time) of the last valid, defined edge pair. Use the input parameter EdgeSel to determine the edges for which time stamps are detected. You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC instruction. This ensures a shared time basis. Reaction to error The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the errors are displayed at the Status output. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 42 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Parameter The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_DI instruction. Parameter Declaration HWID* Input Channel* TIO_SYNC_ Data* Data type Default Description HW_IO 0 Hardware identifier for TIO module from HWCN Input UInt 0 Number (0 ... m) of the digital input of the connected TM Timer DIDQ Input "TIO_SYNC_ Data" S7-1500 System time provided for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules by the TIO_SYNC instruction. See UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" (Page 57). Connect this input parameter with the "TIO_SYNC_Data" output parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction. EdgeSel Input UInt 3 Specify the edges for which time stamps are detected: 0D: Reserved 1D: Only at positive edges 2D: Only at negative edges 3D: Positive and negative edges (order depending on occurrence) 4D: First positive, then negative edge 5D: First negative, then positive edge 6 bis 255D: Reserved TO* Input LTime LT#0ns To: Time for output of isochronous output data. Apply To from the ET 200 station (properties of the PROFINET interface). DI Output Bool False Status of digital input. If an inversion of the digital input is configured, this parameter is inverted as well. TimeStamp RE Output LTime LT#0ns Time stamp: Time at which a positive edge was detected. Exception: EdgeSel = 2D: Time at which a negative edge was detected. TimeStampF Output E LTime LT#0ns Time stamp: Time at which a negative edge was detected. EventCount RE Output UInt 0 Counter: Is incremented with each new, valid time stamp at a positive edge. The counter is reset with each CPU startup. EventCount FE Output UInt 0 Counter: Is incremented with each new, valid time stamp at a negative edge. The counter is reset with each CPU startup. LEC Output UInt 0 Counter: Number of edges for which no time stamp could be saved. The module can count a maximum of seven edges per application cycle. The counter is reset with each new application cycle. Exception: EdgeSel = 1D: Time at which a positive edge was detected. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 43 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Parameter Declaration Status Output Error Output Data type Default Description DWord 16#0 Status of the instruction: see description of Status parameter Bool False If True, this output indicates that an error has occurred. For detailed information see Status parameter. S7-1500 Error is reset as soon as the error is remedied. * Checked once at startup of the CPU Status parameter Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output. The double word is divided as follows: Segment of the error code Meaning z0yywwww Error of a system function: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes. wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The system function is available in the help for the system function. z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy. The error can occur: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 44 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Table with error codes Error code Meaning Remedy 00000000 No error. -- 10010000 The assigned number of the digital input at the Channel input parameter is outside the permitted range (depending on addressed module and channel configuration). Correct the value at the Channel input parameter. 10020000 The TIO_DI instruction is not called in an isochronous Make sure that TIO_DI is called in a OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an "Synchronous Cycle" OB. isochronous OB. 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input parameter. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. x0040000 The data in TIO_SYNC_Data is invalid/incorrect. Check the TIO_SYNC instruction and the interconnection of its TIO_SYNC_Data output. 1005xxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_SINFO * system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from * RD_SINFO. Read the description of the RD_SINFO in the TIA Portal information system. Unable to find TM Timer DIDQ. * Possible cause: The module configured using the hardware identifier is not a TM Timer DIDQ. Make sure that the configured module is a TM Timer DIDQ. * Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. (DW#16#...) 10060000 Make sure that TIO_DI is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. 10070000 An internal error occurred during the address calculation. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. 00080000 TIO module is not synchronized using the TIO_SYNC instruction. Check the instruction TIO_SYNC. 10090000 The read cycle time of the isochronous OB is outside the permitted range of 0 < TAPP <= 16 ms and is therefore invalid. * Correct the cycle time. * Make sure that TIO_DI is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. 100A0000 The assigned time at the TO input parameter is outside the permitted range of 0 < To <= 4 ms. Correct the value at the TO input parameter. 100Bxxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_ADDR system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_ADDR. Read the description of the RD_ADDR in the TIA Portal information system. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 45 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Error code Meaning Remedy The converted time stamp is invalid. Check the PROFINET communication with the TIO module. (DW#16#...) 000C0000 Possible cause: Communication error 000D0000 The Quality Information of the digital input indicates that an error has occurred at the digital input. Check the wiring of the digital input. 000E0000 The assigned number at the Channel input parameter is not a digital input configured as Timer DI. * Check the channel configuration (only for TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V). * Check the operating mode of the digital input. 000F0000 The assigned value at the EdgeSel input parameter is outside the valid range of 1 to 5. Correct the value at the EdgeSel input parameter. 10100000 The send clock is outside the permitted range of 0 < SendClock <= 4 ms and is therefore invalid. Correct the send clock. The error code can also indicate that x0FF0000 * The data in TIO_SYNC_Data is invalid or does not exist. * The TIO_DI instruction is not called in an isochronous OB. General internal error. -- High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 46 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO 4.3.4 TIO_IOLink_OUT: Output time-controlled process output signals Description You can use Time-based IO with the TIO_IOLink_OUT instruction. TIO_IOLink_OUT lets you activate the output data of an IO-Link Device at a specified time. The IO-Link Device must be equipped with the time stamp function and the Port must be in "IO-Link, Time based OUT" mode. Startup characteristics During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_IOLink_OUT applies the input parameters once and checks the following: Checking HWID Checking whether the Port number is in the range (1 to 4) Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC? Checking To for a positive value Checking the setting to type IO-Link Checking Port mode regarding configuration for IO-Link Time based OUT Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB Checking PortQualifier If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. The input parameters REQ , Out_Mode, TimeStamp and AA_Data can be changed during normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 47 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Operating principle In normal operation, the instruction sends the process data (AA_Data) to an IO-Link Device. The output data AA_Data are activated at the time defined at the input parameter TimeStamp. You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC instruction. This ensures a shared time basis. You start an output job with a positive edge at the "REQ" parameter. You can only start a new job when there is no error pending and no job is active. When starting the output job, the AA_Data (bit 0, 1) are activated on the IO-Link Device at a time defined by TimeStamp. The job is done when the last application cycle is executed before the output time is reached (Done). Status and Error are constantly being updated during the job runtime. Note Once the job has been started with a positive edge, you can adapt the output time with the input of a new TimeStamp without having to restart the job. Constraint: If the adapted time stamp is less than 16 ms before the output time (TimeStamp - TIO_Time < 16), the last valid time stamp is used. If you specify the value 0 as TimeStamp, the output is written directly with the data specified at the input AA_Data. This gives you the option to implement a direct control from the TIO module without time stamp in manual mode. You can use the direct control to interrupt an ongoing job. Reaction to error The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the errors are displayed at the Status output. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 48 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Parameter The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_IOLink_OUT instruction. Parameter Declaration REQ Input HWID* TO* Data type Default Description Bool False Starts the job at a positive edge. Input HW_IO 0 Hardware identifier for TIO module from HWCN. Input LTime LT#0ns To: Time for output of isochronous output data. S7-1500 Apply To from the ET 200 station (properties of the PROFINET interface). Port* Input USInt TIO_SYNC_ Data* Input "TIO_SYNC_ Data" 0 Port number (1 to 4) of the specified IO-Link Device System time provided for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules by the TIO_SYNC instruction. See UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" (Page 57). Connect this input parameter with the "TIO_SYNC_Data" output parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction. TimeStamp Input LTime LT#0ns AA_Data Input Word 16#0 Time stamp: Time when the process data (AAE1, AAE2) are to be output. Process output data: Date to be output (Word). Includes AAE1 and AAE2 on bit 0, 1. Busy Output Bool False Busy = True: The job is not complete yet. Done Output Bool False Done = True is displayed for one cycle: The job is signaled as "done, no errors". Error Output Bool False If True, this output indicates that an error has occurred. In this case, BUSY and DONE are set to False. For detailed information see Status parameter. Error is reset as soon as the error is remedied. Status Output DWord 16#0 Status of the instruction: see description of Status parameter * Checked once at startup of the CPU High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 49 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Status parameter Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output. The double word is divided as follows: Segment of the error code Meaning z0yywwww Error of a system function: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes. wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The error information is available in the help for the system function. z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy. The error can occur: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) Table with error codes Error code Meaning Remedy 00000000 No error. -- 10010000 The assigned number at the Port input parameter is outside the valid range of 1 to 4. Correct the value at the Port input parameter. 10020000 The TIO_IOLink_OUT instruction is not called in an isochronous OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. Make sure that TIO_IOLink_OUT is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input parameter. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. x0040000 The data in TIO_SYNC_Data is invalid/incorrect. Check the TIO_SYNC instruction and the interconnection of its TIO_SYNC_Data output. 1005xxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_SINFO * system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_SINFO. * Read the description of the RD_SINFO in the TIA Portal information system. Unable to find IO-Link Device. Make sure that the configured module is an IO-Link Master for Time-based IO. (DW#16#...) 10060000 * Possible cause: The module configured using the hardware identifier is not * an IO-Link Master for Time-based IO. Make sure that TIO_IOLink_OUT is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 50 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Error code Meaning Remedy 10070000 An internal error occurred during the address calculation. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. 00080000 TIO module is not synchronized using the TIO_SYNC instruction. Check the instruction TIO_SYNC. 10090000 The read cycle time of the isochronous OB is outside the permitted range of 0 < TAPP <= 16 ms and is therefore invalid. * Correct the cycle time. * Make sure that TIO_IOLink_OUT is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. (DW#16#...) The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. 100A0000 The assigned time at the TO input parameter is outside the permitted range of 0 < To <= 4 ms. Correct the value at the TO input parameter. 100Bxxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_ADDR system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_ADDR. Read the description of the RD_ADDR in the TIA Portal information system. 000C0000 The time stamp at the TimeStamp input parameter is invalid. Check the TimeStamp input parameter. 000D0000 The value status PortQualifier of the IO-Link indicates that Check the connected sensor and its the process data is invalid. configuration. 100E0000 The configured port mode of the IO-Link is incorrect. Check the configuration of the connected sensor with S7-PCT. 100F0000 The read cycle time of the "Synchronous Cycle" OB is too long. TAPP > 16 ms. Configure a smaller multiple of the send clock as the cycle time. x0FF0000 General internal error. -- High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 51 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO 4.3.5 TIO_DQ: Output edges time-controlled at the digital output Description You can use Time-based IO with the TIO_DQ instruction. TIO_DQ switches the digital output of a TM Timer DIDQ at a specified time. Startup characteristics During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_DQ applies the input parameters once and checks the following: Checking HWID Checking to see if the number of the digital input (Channel) is in the permitted range (depending on addressed module and channel configuration) Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC? Checking To for validity (0 ms to 4 ms) Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. The input parameters REQ , Out_Mode, TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE can be changed during normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message. Operating principle The instruction outputs edges time-controlled at a digital output during normal operation. At the time defined at the TimeStampRE input parameter, a positive edge is output at the digital output. At the time defined at the TimeStampFE input parameter, a negative edge is output at the digital output. Use the input parameter Out_Mode to determine if only one edge or both edges are output. You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC instruction. This ensures a shared time basis. You start an output job with a positive edge at the "REQ" parameter. You can only start a new job when there is no error pending and no job is active. When the output job is started, the digital output is switched at the times defined with TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE. If the digital output is already set at time TimeStampRE, the output job is not transferred to the module for the positive edge. If the digital output is not set at time TimeStampFE, the output job is not transferred to the module for the negative edge. This means the digital output is not switched in both cases. The job is done when the last application cycle is executed before the second output time is reached (DONE). Status and Error are constantly being updated during the job runtime. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 52 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO The figure below shows an example for the reaction of the bits DONE and BUSY at the start of an output job under the following conditions: Out_Mode = 2 The two time stamps are not adapted between the start of the job and the output. TAPP Application cycle R1, R2 Specified times of a positive DQ edge F1, F2 Specified times of a negative DQ edge Note Once the job has been started with a positive edge, you can adapt the output times with the input of TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE without having to restart the job. Constraint: If an adapted time stamp is less than two application cycles away from the output time (TimeStampRE - TIO_Time < 2*TAPP or TimeStampFE - TIO_Time < 2*TAPP), the last valid time stamp is used. If you specify the value "0" as TimeStampRE or TimeStampFE, you can output the respective edge directly at the digital output with the input parameter Out_Mode = 3. This gives you the option to implement a direct control from the TIO module without time stamp in manual mode. You can use the direct control to interrupt an ongoing job. Changes to the input parameters are not applied until the TIO_DQ instruction detects a startup of the CPU. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 53 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Reaction to error The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the errors are displayed at the Status output. Parameter The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_DQ instruction. Parameter Declaration Data type Default Description S7-1500 REQ Input Bool False Starts the job at a positive edge. HWID* Input HW_IO 0 Hardware identifier for TIO module from HWCN. Channel* Input UInt 0 Number (0 ... m) of the digital output of the connected TM Timer DIDQ TIO_SYNC_ Data* Input "TIO_SYNC_ Data" System time provided for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules by the TIO_SYNC instruction. See UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" (Page 57). Connect this input parameter with the "TIO_SYNC_Data" output parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction. Out_Mode Input UInt 2 Specify the output mode for the edges at the digital output: 0D: Output only positive edge (TimeStampRE). 1D: Output only negative edge (TimeStampFE). 2D: Both edges are output (TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE). 3D: Each edge is output directly when TimeStampRE = 0 or TimeStampFE = 0. If both time stamps have the value "0" or if no time stamp has the value "0", no edge is output. 4 bis 255D: Reserved TO* Input LTime LT#0ns To: Time for output of isochronous output data. Apply To from the ET 200 station (properties of the PROFINET interface). TimeStamp RE Input LTime LT#0ns Time stamp: Time when a positive edge is to be output. TimeStampF Input E LTime LT#0ns Time stamp: Time when a negative edge is to be output. StatusDQ Bool False Actual status of the digital output. Output If an inversion of the digital output is configured, StatusDQ is inverted as well. BUSY Output Bool False BUSY = True: The job is not complete yet. DONE Output Bool False DONE = True is displayed for one cycle: The job is signaled as "done, no errors". Status Output DWord 16#0 Status of the instruction: see description of Status parameter Error Output Bool False If True, this output indicates that an error has occurred. In this case, BUSY and DONE are set to False. For detailed information see Status parameter. Error is reset as soon as the error is remedied. * Checked once at startup of the CPU High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 54 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Status parameter Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output. The double word is divided as follows: Segment of the error code Meaning z0yywwww Error of a system function: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes. wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The error information is available in the help for the system function. z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy. The error can occur: * during startup (z = 0) * during normal operation (z = 1) Table with error codes Error code Meaning Remedy 00000000 No error. -- 10010000 The assigned number of the digital output at the Channel Correct the value at the Channel input input parameter is outside the permitted range (depending parameter. on addressed module and channel configuration). 10020000 The TIO_DQ instruction is not called in an isochronous OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. Make sure that TIO_DQ is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input parameter. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. x0040000 The data in TIO_SYNC_Data is invalid/incorrect. Check the TIO_SYNC instruction and the interconnection of its TIO_SYNC_Data output. 1005xxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_SINFO * system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_SINFO. * Read the description of the RD_SINFO in the TIA Portal information system. Unable to find TM Timer DIDQ. Make sure that the configured module is a TM Timer DIDQ. (DW#16#...) 10060000 * Possible cause: The module configured using the hardware identifier is not * a TM Timer DIDQ. Make sure that TIO_SYNC is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 55 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Error code Meaning Remedy 10070000 An internal error occurred during the address calculation. Check the value at the HWID input parameter. Specify the hardware identifier of the TIO module from its module properties in HWCN. An internal system constant of data type Hw_SubModule is available for the symbolic addressing. x0080000 TIO module is not synchronized using the TIO_SYNC instruction. Check the instruction TIO_SYNC. (DW#16#...) The error code can also indicate that: 10090000 * A job was already present before the first run of the instruction. * The assigned number at the Channel input parameter is not a digital output. The read cycle time of the isochronous OB is LT#0ms or has as negative value and is therefore invalid. Correct the value. * Correct the cycle time. * Make sure that TIO_DQ is called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB. The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB. 100A0000 The assigned time at the TO input parameter is outside the permitted range of 0 < To <= 4 ms. Correct the value at the TO input parameter. 100Bxxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_ADDR system function. The low word xxxx displays the error information of the RET_VAL return value from RD_ADDR. Read the description of the RD_ADDR in the TIA Portal information system. 000C0000 One or both time stamps at the TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE input parameters are invalid. The error is only signaled for the duration of one application cycle. Check the TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE input parameters. 000D0000 The Quality Information of the digital output indicates that an error has occurred at the digital output. * Check the parameter assignment of the digital output. * Check the wiring of the digital output for short-circuit, overload, and overtemperature. * Check the channel configuration (only for TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V). * Check the operating mode of the digital output. 000E0000 The assigned number at the Channel input parameter is not a digital output. 100F0000 The read cycle time of the "Synchronous Cycle" OB is too long. TAPP > 16 ms. Configure a smaller multiple of the send clock as the cycle time. 10100000 The send clock is outside the permitted range of 0 < SEND_CLOCK <= 4 ms and is therefore invalid. Correct the send clock. The error code can also indicate that * The data in TIO_SYNC_Data is invalid or does not exist. * The TIO_DQ instruction is not called in an isochronous OB. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 56 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Programming 4.3 Time-based IO Error code Meaning Remedy 00110000 The assigned value at the Out_Mode input parameter is outside the valid range of 0 to 3. Correct the value at the Out_Mode input parameter. x0FF0000 General internal error. -- (DW#16#...) 4.3.6 UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" Description The data type UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" contains the central structure and data for synchronization of the modules and passing of the TIO_Time. Parameter Parameter Data type Description S7-1500 TIO_TIME_BASE LTime Internal use TIO_TIME LTime Shared time basis (relative time) of the TIO modules. PIP_MODE USInt Mode for data update (is forwarded by the PIP_Mode input parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction) APP_CYC LTime Application cycle of the "Synchronous Cycle" OB SEND_CLOCK LTime Send clock of sync domain (is forwarded by the SendClock input parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction) TBase LTime Internal use ERROR Bool Internal use High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 57 Programming 4.3 Time-based IO High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 58 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Service & Support 5.1 5 Service & Support The unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle For machine constructors, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry. To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant - from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization. Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drive technology from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants. You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees - even across continents - ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 59 Service & Support 5.1 Service & Support Online Support The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service & Support at any time and from any location in the world. You can find Online Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Technical Consulting Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis, definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the creation of the automation solution. Technical Support Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems. You can find Technical Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). Training Extend your competitive edge - through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer. You can find the training courses we offer on the Internet at the following address: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain). Engineering Support Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project. Field Service Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance - to ensure that your machines and plants are always available. Spare parts In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains. Repairs Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to reduce both to a minimum - with our worldwide repair facilities. High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 60 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Service & Support 5.1 Service & Support Optimization During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing productivity or reducing costs. To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services. Modernization You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization - with comprehensive services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning. Service programs Our service programs are selected service packages for an automation and drives system or product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems. The services of a Service Program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately. Examples of service programs: Service contracts Plant IT Security Services Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence SIMATIC Remote Support Services Advantages at a glance: Reduced downtimes for increased productivity Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks Comprehensive service from a single source, fewer interfaces and greater expertise Contact At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training, service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products supplied by Industry Automation and Drive Technologies. You can find your personal contact in our contacts database at: Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner). High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 61 Service & Support 5.1 Service & Support High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 62 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB Index TM Timer DIDQ, 18 A Accuracy, 16 Calculating TIO_Time, 23 Application cycle, 21, 30, 57 Application examples Time-based IO, 13 C Call sequence, 30 Cam controller, CM 4xIO-Link, Configuration, Standard configuration, 25 Configuration software, 19 Conventions Jitter, 4 TIA Portal, 4 TIO module, 4 TIO_Time, 4 CPU cycle time, 13 Cycle time, 14 D Data update, Default setting, 27 Delay time, 21 Determinism, Digital input TIO_DI, 42 Digital output TIO_DQ, 52 Documentation, 9 Dosing, H Hardware requirements, 18 I IODD, IO-Link, 18, 19, 34, 38, 47 Setting ports, 28 IO-Link Device, 19, 25, 26, 27 IPO model Understanding IPO, 21 Isochronous communication, 20 J Jitter, 4, 23 L Length measurement, M Modes, Selecting the model of program editing, 21 O OIP model Understanding OIP, 22 E Error codes TIO_DI, 44 TIO_DQ, 55 TIO_IOLink_IN, 40 TIO_IOLink_OUT, 50 TIO_SYNC, 36 ET 200, 18, 26 High-precision input/output with Time-based IO Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB 63 Index P PIP_Mode, 57 Setting PIP_Mode, 30 Port Configuration Tool, 11, 19, 25, 27 Ports Configuring ports, 27 Predictability, 15 Process data AA_Data, 47 SA_Data, 38 Process image partition PIP, 30 PIP1, 26 PROFINET, 19, 25, 26 Using PROFINET IRT, 20 Programming, 30 Programming example, 32 R Reproducibility, 13 Response time, 16 Defined response times, Minimum response time, 16 Understanding SIMATIC functions, 20 Using the default setting, 27 Using Time-based IO, 32 TIO instructions, 19 Listing TIO instructions, 29 TM Timer DIDQ, 19 TIO module, 4, 19, 26 TIO_DI, 42 TIO_DQ, 52 TIO_IOLink_IN, 38 TIO_IOLink_OUT, 47 TIO_SYNC, 34 Synchronized TIO modules, 20 TIO_Time, 4, 15, 29 TIO_DI, 42 TIO_DQ, 52 TIO_IOLink_IN, 38 TIO_SYNC, 34 UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data", 57 Understanding TIO_Time, 20 U UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data", 57 User program, S S7-PCT, 11 Scope, 3 Send clock, 57 Service & Support, 4 SIMATIC functions, 20 Software download Port Configuration Tool, 11 STEP 7, 19 SYNC_PI, 21 SYNC_PO, 21 Synchronous Cycle, 30 Understanding TIO instructions, 20 System environment, 17 T TAPP, TIA Portal, 4 Time behavior Standard technology, 14 Time-based IO, 15 Time-based IO Setting Time-based IO, 26 High-precision input/output with Time-based IO 64 Function Manual, 08/2014, A5E33454822-AB SIEMENS SIMATIC Industrial Software SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming P.rogramming ana oerating manual siemens.com ___________________ Important notes 1 ___________________ Product Overview SIMATIC Industrial Software SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual 2 ___________________ Configuring 3 ___________________ Safety Administration Editor ___________________ 4 Access protection ___________________ 5 Programming ___________________ 6 F-I/O access Implementation of user ___________________ 7 acknowledgment 8 ___________ Data exchange between standard user program and safety program Safety-related ___________________ 9 communication 10 ___________ Compiling and commissioning a safety program ___________________ 11 System acceptance ___________________ 12 Operation and Maintenance Overview of instructions for the safety program 13 Monitoring and response ___________________ A times 10/2018 A5E02714440-AH ___________________ B Checklist Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E02714440-AH 09/2018 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2011 - 2018. All rights reserved Important notes Purpose of this documentation The information in this documentation enables you to configure (Page 43) and program (Page 111) SIMATIC Safety fail-safe systems. In addition, you will obtain information on acceptance (Page 361) of a SIMATIC Safety F-system. Note The Programming and Operating Manual "SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming" in its latest version (possibly including product information for the manual) is the relevant source of all information on functional safety regarding configuring and programming. This also applies in the event of discrepancies between this manual and other documentation on functional safety regarding configuring and programming You must heed all warnings in the Programming and Operating manual "SIMATIC Safety Configuring and Programming". Basic knowledge requirements General basic knowledge of automation engineering is needed to understand this documentation. Basic knowledge of the following is also necessary: Fail-safe automation systems Automation systems S7-300/400/1200/1500/1500 Software Controller/WinAC RTX F Distributed I/O systems on PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO Totally Integrated Automation Portal, including: - Hardware configuration with the hardware and network editor - Programming in the LAD and FBD programming languages using the program editor. - Communication between CPUs SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 3 Important notes Scope of this documentation This documentation is valid for the optional packages STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 and STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1. The optional packages STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 and STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 are used for configuration and programming of the fail-safe SIMATIC Safety system. In this context, integration of the fail-safe I/O listed below in SIMATIC Safety is also addressed: S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules ET 200SP fail-safe modules ET 200S fail-safe modules ET 200eco fail-safe I/O modules ET 200eco PN fail-safe I/O modules ET 200pro fail-safe modules ET 200iSP fail-safe modules S7-300 fail-safe signal modules S7-1200 fail-safe modules Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices Approvals The SIMATIC Safety F-system is certified for use in safety mode up to: Safety integrity level SIL3 in accordance with IEC 61508:2010 Performance Level (PL) e and category 4 in accordance with ISO 13849-1:2015 or EN ISO 13849-1:2015 Incorporation in the information landscape Depending on your application, you will need the following supplementary documentation when working with STEP 7 Safety. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 4 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Important notes This documentation includes references to the supplementary documentation where appropriate. Documentation Brief description of relevant content For the SIMATIC Safety F-system Depending on which F-CPU you are using, you will need the following documentation: * For the F-CPUs S7-1200/1500, a Product Information (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109478599) describes all deviations from the respective standard CPUs. * Each F-CPU S7-300/400 that can be used has its own product information. The product information describes the deviations from the respective standard CPUs. * The Device manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67295862/133300) describe the S7-1500 CPUs. * The "S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/13008499) operating instructions describe the installation and wiring of S7-300 systems. * The "CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12996906) device manual describes the CPUs 315-2 DP and PN/DP, the CPU 317-2 DP and PN/DP, and the CPU 319-3 PN/DP. * The "S7-400 Automation System, Installation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1117849) installation manual describes the installation and wiring of S7-400 systems. * The "S7-400 Automation System, CPU Data" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23904550) reference manual describes the CPUs 414-3 PN/DP, the CPU 416-2, and the CPU 416-3 PN/DP. * The "ET 200S Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12714722) manual describes the IM 151-7 CPU. * The "ET 200S, Interface Module IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/47409312) manual describes the IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU. * The "ET 200S, Interface Module IM 154-8 CPU" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/24363739/0/en) man ual describes the IM 154-8 CPU. * The Manual "Windows Automation Center RTX WinAC RTX (F) 2010 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/43715176)" describes the WinAC RTX 2010 and the WinAC RTX F 2010. * The "S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP, CPU 1507S (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109249299)" manual describes the SIMATIC S7-1500 Software Controller 1505SP and CPU 1507S. "S7-1200 Functional Safety manual Describes the F-CPUs S7-1200 and the fail-safe modules S7-1200 (including (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W installation, wiring, and technical specifications) W/view/en/104547552)" system manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 5 Important notes Documentation Brief description of relevant content "S7-1500/ET200MP system manual Describes the hardware of the S7-1500 systems and the S7-1500/ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W fail-safe modules (including installation, wiring, and technical specifications) W/view/en/59191792)" system manual and the product manuals (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/w w/en/ps/14141/man) for the corresponding S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules "ET 200SP distributed I/O system Describes the hardware of the ET 200SP fail-safe modules (including installa(http://support.automation.siemens.com/W tion, wiring, and technical specifications) W/view/en/58649293)" system manual and the product manuals (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/w w/en/ps/14059/man) for the corresponding ET 200SP fail-safe modules "ET 200eco Distributed I/O Station FailDescribes the hardware of the ET 200eco fail-safe I/O module (including insafe I/O Block stallation, wiring, and technical specifications) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W W/view/en/19033850)" manual Manual "ET 200eco PN F-DI 8 x 24 VDC, Describes the hardware of the ET 200eco PN fail-safe I/O module (including 4xM12 / F-DQ 3 x 24 VDC/2.0A PM, installation, wiring, and technical specifications) 3xM12 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/w w/en/)" "Distributed I/O System ET 200S, FailDescribes the hardware of the ET 200S fail-safe modules (including installaSafe Modules tion, wiring, and technical specifications) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W W/view/en/27235629)" operating instructions "S7-300 Automation System, ET 200M Describes the hardware of the S7-300 fail-safe signal modules (including Distributed I/O System, Fail-safe Signal installation, wiring, and technical specifications) Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W W/view/en/19026151)" manual "Distributed I/O system ET 200pro, failDescribes the hardware of the ET 200pro fail-safe modules (including installasafe I/O modules tion, wiring, and technical specifications) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W W/view/en/22098524)" operating instructions "ET 200iSP distributed I/O device - FailDescribes the hardware of the ET 200iSP fail-safe modules (including installasafe modules tion, wiring, and technical specifications) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W W/view/en/47357221)" operating instructions Help on STEP 7 * Describes the operation of the standard tools in STEP 7 * Contains information regarding configuration and parameter assignment of hardware * Contains a description of the FBD and LAD programming languages The complete SIMATIC S7 documentation is available on DVD. You can find more information on the Internet (http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrialautomation-systems-simatic/en/manual-overview/manual-collection/Pages/Default.aspx). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 6 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Important notes Guide This documentation describes how to work with the optional packages STEP 7 Safety. It includes instructions and reference sections (description of the instructions for the safety program). The following topics are addressed: Configuration of SIMATIC Safety Access protection for SIMATIC Safety Programming of the safety program (safety-related user program) Safety-related communication Instructions for the safety program Support for the system acceptance Operation and maintenance of SIMATIC Safety Monitoring and response times Conventions In this documentation, the terms "safety engineering" and "fail-safe engineering" are used synonymously. The same applies to the terms "fail-safe" and "F-". When "STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1", "STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1" appears in italics, it refers to the optional package for the "SIMATIC Safety" F-system. "STEP 7 Safety V15.1" stands for the optional package "STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1" and the optional package "STEP 7 Safety Basic V15". "(S7-300)" indicates that the section only applies to S7-300 F-CPUs. S7-300 F-CPUs also includes the F-CPUs ET 200S and ET 200pro (IM F-CPUs). "(S7-400)" indicates that the section only applies to S7-400 as well as WinAC RTX F. "(S7-1200)" indicates that the section only applies to S7-1200 F-CPUs. "(S7-1500)" indicates that the section only applies to S7-1500 F-CPUs. S7-1500 F-CPUs also includes ET 200SP F-CPUs, the CPU 1516pro F-2 PN and the S7-1500 F Software Controller. The scopes can be combined. The term "Safety program" refers to the fail-safe portion of the user program and is used instead of "fail-safe user program," "F-program," etc. For purposes of contrast, the nonsafety-related part of the user program is referred to as the "standard user program". All fail-safe modules and instructions are highlighted in yellow to distinguish them from the modules and instructions of the standard user programs on the software interface (e.g., in the project tree). Similarly, the fail-safe parameters of F-CPUs and F-I/O are highlighted in yellow in the hardware configuration. Each warning is marked with a unique number at the end of the text. This enables you to easily reference other documents, for example, to obtain an overview of the safety requirements for the system. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 7 Important notes Additional support If you have further questions about the use of products presented in this manual, contact your local Siemens representative. You can find information on whom to contact on the Web (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner). A guide to the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available on the Web (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). You can find the online catalog and online ordering system on the Web (www.siemens.com/industrymall). Training center We offer courses to help you get started with the S7 automation system. Contact your regional training center or the central training center in Nuremberg (90327), Federal Republic of Germany. You can find more information on the Internet (http://www.sitrain.com). Technical Support To contact Technical Support for all Industry Automation products, use the Support Request Web form (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). You can find additional information about our Technical Support on the Web (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 8 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Important notes Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system Note The operators of systems with safety-related characteristics must adhere to operational safety requirements. The supplier is also obliged to comply with special product monitoring measures. Siemens informs system operators in the form of personal notifications about product developments and properties which may be or become important issues in terms of operational safety. You should subscribe to the corresponding notifications in order to obtain the latest information and to allow you to make any necessary modifications to your system. Log in in the Industry Online Support. Follow the links below and click on "Email on update" on the right-hand side in each case: * SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13751&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13828&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13716&lc=en-WW) * SIMATIC S7-1200/SIMATIC S7-1200F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13683&lc=en-WW) * Software Controller (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=13911&lc=en-WW) * Distributed I/O (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=14029&lc=enWW) * STEP 7 (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?pnid=14340&lc=en-WW) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 9 Important notes Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement - and continuously maintain - a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place. For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here: Product support All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications, FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals. Application examples Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks - as well as function blocks, performance information and videos. Services Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and training offers. Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology. mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries, and configurable documents. This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 10 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Important notes Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP). Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 11 Table of contents Important notes ....................................................................................................................................... 3 1 2 Product Overview.................................................................................................................................. 23 1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................23 1.2 Hardware and Software Components .....................................................................................25 1.3 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package .....................................30 1.4 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package ..............................31 1.5 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety PowerPack ...................................................................32 1.6 Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced ..........32 1.7 Migrating PLC programs to a n F-CPU S7-1500 ....................................................................36 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1...........................................................................37 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety V15 to V15.1 ...........................................................37 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety V14 SP1 to V15.1 ...................................................37 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1 to V15.1 ...................................................38 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety prior to V13 SP1 .....................................................39 1.9 First steps ...............................................................................................................................42 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 43 2.1 Overview of Configuration ......................................................................................................43 2.2 Particularities for configuring the F-System ............................................................................46 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU.............................................................................................................48 2.4 Configuring F-I/O ....................................................................................................................53 2.5 2.5.1 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os ..................................................................58 Example ..................................................................................................................................59 2.6 Configuring shared device ......................................................................................................63 2.7 Configuring isochronous mode (S7-1500) ..............................................................................63 2.8 Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment ..........................................................65 2.9 Configurations supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system ..................................................66 2.10 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 ..............................................68 2.11 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 ..............................................70 2.12 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4 Setting the F-destination address for F-I/O with DIP switches ...............................................72 Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety .....................................72 Identifying F-modules..............................................................................................................73 Assign PROFIsafe address ....................................................................................................75 Assign PROFIsafe address to an F-module ...........................................................................75 Changing the PROFIsafe address ..........................................................................................76 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13 Table of contents 2.14 3 4 5 Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices .................................................................................................................. 77 Safety Administration Editor .................................................................................................................. 81 3.1 Opening the Safety Administration Editor .............................................................................. 83 3.2 "General" area........................................................................................................................ 83 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 "F-runtime group" area ........................................................................................................... 86 "F-runtime group" area ........................................................................................................... 86 Pre-/postprocessing (S7-1200, S7-1500) .............................................................................. 87 3.4 "F-blocks" area ....................................................................................................................... 88 3.5 "F-compliant PLC data types" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) ....................................................... 89 3.6 "Web server F-Admins" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) ................................................................. 90 3.7 "Settings" area ....................................................................................................................... 90 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) ............................................................................ 96 Access protection.................................................................................................................................101 4.1 Overview of access protection ............................................................................................. 101 4.2 Access protection for the safety program ............................................................................ 103 4.3 Access protection for the F-CPU ......................................................................................... 106 4.4 Access protection through organizational measures ........................................................... 109 Programming .......................................................................................................................................111 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.5.1 5.1.5.2 5.1.6 5.1.7 Overview of Programming ................................................................................................... 111 Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) ................................................ 111 Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) ............................................ 114 Fail-Safe Blocks ................................................................................................................... 117 Restrictions in the programming languages FBD/LAD ........................................................ 119 F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) (S7-1200, S7-1500) ..................................................... 126 Grouping PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O in structures (S7-1200, S7-1500) ........ 127 Example of structured PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O (S7-1200, S7-1500) ........ 128 Editing PLC tags with external editors ................................................................................. 131 Using Multiuser engineering ................................................................................................ 131 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 Defining F-Runtime Groups ................................................................................................. 132 Rules for F-Runtime Groups of the Safety Program ............................................................ 132 Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-300, S7-400) ............................................. 134 Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) ......................................... 137 F-runtime group communication (S7-300, S7-400) ............................................................. 141 F-runtime group communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) ......................................................... 145 F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400) ............................................................................................ 148 F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500) .......................................................... 148 Deleting an F-runtime group ................................................................................................ 150 Changing the F-runtime group (S7-300, S7-400) ................................................................ 150 Changing the F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) ............................................................ 151 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 14 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Table of contents 6 7 8 9 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD ............................................................................................151 Creating F-blocks ..................................................................................................................151 Know-how protection ............................................................................................................153 Reuse of F-blocks .................................................................................................................154 5.4 Programming startup protection ...........................................................................................155 F-I/O access ....................................................................................................................................... 157 6.1 Addressing F-I/O ...................................................................................................................157 6.2 Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) .........................................................................................159 6.3 Process Data or Fail-Safe Values .........................................................................................162 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.1.1 6.4.1.2 6.4.1.3 6.4.1.4 6.4.1.5 6.4.1.6 6.4.1.7 6.4.1.8 6.4.1.9 6.4.2 F-I/O DB ................................................................................................................................165 Tags of the F-I/O DB .............................................................................................................166 PASS_ON .............................................................................................................................167 ACK_NEC .............................................................................................................................168 ACK_REI ...............................................................................................................................168 IPAR_EN ...............................................................................................................................169 DISABLE ...............................................................................................................................170 QBAD/PASS_OUT/DISABLED/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status .........................171 ACK_REQ .............................................................................................................................172 IPAR_OK ...............................................................................................................................172 DIAG .....................................................................................................................................172 Accessing tags of the F-I/O DB ............................................................................................174 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O ..................................................................................175 After startup of F-system.......................................................................................................175 After communication errors ...................................................................................................178 After F-I/O or channel faults ..................................................................................................180 Group passivation .................................................................................................................184 Implementation of user acknowledgment............................................................................................. 187 7.1 Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller ..........................................................................................................187 7.2 Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device .................................................................................................................................192 Data exchange between standard user program and safety program .................................................. 195 8.1 Data Transfer from the Safety Program to the Standard User Program ..............................196 8.2 Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program ..........................................197 Safety-related communication ............................................................................................................. 201 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.2.1 9.1.2.2 9.1.2.3 9.1.2.4 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) ........................................201 Overview of communication ..................................................................................................201 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication.....................................................204 Configure safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication ....................................204 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ..........208 Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication ......................................209 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication - Limits for data transfer .............213 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 15 Table of contents 9.1.3 9.1.3.1 9.1.3.2 9.1.3.3 9.1.3.4 9.1.4 9.1.4.1 9.1.4.2 9.1.4.3 9.1.4.4 9.1.5 9.1.5.1 9.1.5.2 9.1.10.4 9.1.10.5 Safety-related master-master communication ..................................................................... 213 Configure safety-related master-master communication ..................................................... 213 Safety-related master-master communication via SENDDP and RCVDP........................... 218 Program safety-related master-master communication ....................................................... 218 Safety-related master-master communication:Limits for data transfer ................................ 223 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication ........................................................... 223 Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device .................. 223 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ................ 226 Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication ..................................... 227 Safety-related IO-Controller-IO-Device communication - Limits for data transfer ............... 229 Safety-related master-I-slave communication ..................................................................... 229 Configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication .................................................. 229 Safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ................................................................................................................................. 232 Program the safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication ..................... 233 Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication ..................................................................................................................... 235 Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication ...................................................................... 236 Configure safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication ...................................................... 236 Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ........................... 240 Programming safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication ................................................ 240 Limits for data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication ............................. 240 Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication ..................................................................... 241 Configuring Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication ................................................. 241 Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication - F-I/O Access ............................................ 246 Limits for data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication ............................. 246 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication ............................................................. 247 Safety-related communication via S7 connections .............................................................. 248 Configuring safety-related communication via S7 connections ........................................... 248 Communication via SENDS7, RCVS7, and F-Communication DB ..................................... 250 Programming safety-related communication via S7 connections ........................................ 251 Safety-related communication via S7 connections - Limits of data transfer ........................ 255 Safety-related communication with other S7 F-systems ..................................................... 255 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 255 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication) .................................................................................................... 256 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication) .................................................................................................................... 257 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via S7 connections .......................................... 258 Communication with S7 F/FH Systems via S7 connections ................................................ 260 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) ... 262 Flexible F-Link ...................................................................................................................... 262 Example of a safety-related communication between two F-CPUs ..................................... 266 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.2.1 9.3.2.2 9.3.2.3 9.3.2.4 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) ................................... 270 Overview of communication ................................................................................................. 270 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication .................................................... 272 Configure safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication.................................... 272 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ......... 276 Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication ..................................... 277 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication - Limits for data transfer ............ 281 9.1.5.3 9.1.5.4 9.1.6 9.1.6.1 9.1.6.2 9.1.6.3 9.1.6.4 9.1.7 9.1.7.1 9.1.7.2 9.1.7.3 9.1.8 9.1.9 9.1.9.1 9.1.9.2 9.1.9.3 9.1.9.4 9.1.10 9.1.10.1 9.1.10.2 9.1.10.3 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 16 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Table of contents 9.3.3 9.3.3.1 9.3.3.2 9.3.3.3 9.3.3.4 9.3.4 9.3.4.1 9.3.4.2 9.3.4.3 9.3.4.4 9.3.5 9.3.5.1 9.3.5.2 9.3.5.3 9.3.5.4 9.3.6 9.3.6.1 9.3.7 9.3.7.1 9.3.7.2 9.3.7.3 9.4 10 Safety-related master-master communication ......................................................................281 Configure safety-related master-master communication ......................................................281 Safety-related master-master communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ...........................285 Program safety-related master-master communication........................................................286 Safety-related master-master communication:Limits for data transfer .................................290 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication ............................................................290 Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device ...................290 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication via SENDDP and RCVDP .................293 Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication ......................................294 Safety-related IO-Controller-IO-Device communication - Limits for data transfer ................296 Safety-related master-I-slave communication ......................................................................297 Configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication ...................................................297 Safety-related master-I-slave communication via SENDDP and RCVDP ............................299 Programming safety-related master-I-slave communication ................................................300 Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave communication ..............................303 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication ..............................................................304 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication ..............................................................304 Safety-related communication to S7 F-System S7 Distributed Safety .................................304 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................304 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication) .....................................................................................................305 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication) .....................................................................................................................306 9.4.1 Configuring and programming communication between S7-300/400 and S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs .................................................................................................................................307 Overview of communication ..................................................................................................307 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.1.1 9.5.1.2 Configuring and programming communication in several projects .......................................308 Safety-oriented IO Controller I device communication in several projects ...........................308 Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device ...................308 Programming safety-related IO Controller I-device communication .....................................309 Compiling and commissioning a safety program .................................................................................. 311 10.1 Compiling the safety program ...............................................................................................311 10.2 Safety program work memory requirements (S7-300, S7-400) ............................................312 10.3 10.3.1 10.3.1.1 Downloading project data .....................................................................................................313 Downloading project data to an F-CPU ................................................................................313 Downloading project data to an S7-300/400 F-CPU with memory card inserted (SIMATIC Micro memory card or flash card) ........................................................................317 Downloading project data to an S7-400 F-CPU without flash card inserted ........................317 Downloading project data to a WinAC RTX F ......................................................................318 Downloading individual F-blocks to an S7-300/400 F-CPU..................................................318 Downloading project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU without program card inserted ................319 Downloading project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU with program card inserted......................320 Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F-CPU .................................................................321 Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F Software Controller ..........................................322 Downloading project data to a memory card and inserting a memory card .........................323 Inserting a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or flash card into an S7-300/400 F-CPU ............324 Inserting a transfer card into an S7-1200 F-CPU .................................................................325 10.3.1.2 10.3.1.3 10.3.1.4 10.3.1.5 10.3.1.6 10.3.1.7 10.3.1.8 10.3.2 10.3.2.1 10.3.2.2 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 17 Table of contents 10.3.3 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.8.1 10.3.8.2 Downloading project data of an S7-1200 F-CPU from the internal load memory to an empty SIMATIC Memory Card ............................................................................................. 327 Updating project data on an S7-1200 F-CPU using a transfer card .................................... 328 Restoring a backup of the safety program to an S7-300/1200/1500 F-CPU ....................... 328 Special features when creating and importing images of an S7-1500 F Software Controller.............................................................................................................................. 329 Loading project data from an F-CPU to a programming device / PC .................................. 331 Loading PC station via the configuration file ........................................................................ 332 Creating a configuration file ................................................................................................. 333 Importing the configuration file ............................................................................................. 333 10.4 Program identification .......................................................................................................... 337 10.5 Comparing Safety Programs................................................................................................ 339 10.6 Printing project data ............................................................................................................. 341 10.7 10.7.1 10.7.2 10.7.3 10.7.4 10.7.5 10.7.6 10.7.7 Testing the safety program .................................................................................................. 343 Overview of Testing the Safety Program ............................................................................. 343 Disabling safety mode .......................................................................................................... 344 Testing the safety program .................................................................................................. 347 Testing the safety program with S7-PLCSIM ....................................................................... 350 Changing the safety program in RUN mode (S7-300, S7-400) ........................................... 355 Changing the standard user program in RUN mode (S7-1200, S7-1500) .......................... 357 Deleting the safety program ................................................................................................. 357 10.8 F-change history .................................................................................................................. 359 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 11 12 System acceptance..............................................................................................................................361 11.1 Overview of System Acceptance ......................................................................................... 361 11.2 Correctness of the safety program including hardware configuration (including testing) .... 363 11.3 Completeness of the safety summary ................................................................................. 364 11.4 Compliance of the system library elements used in the safety program with Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certificate ........................................................................................ 365 11.5 Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program with their safety documentation. .......................................................................................................... 366 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration ........................................... 368 11.7 Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration .................................. 374 11.8 Identity of online and offline program ................................................................................... 375 11.9 Other characteristics ............................................................................................................ 376 11.10 Acceptance of Changes ....................................................................................................... 378 Operation and Maintenance .................................................................................................................383 12.1 Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program ..................................................................... 383 12.2 Replacing Software and Hardware Components................................................................. 386 12.3 Guide to diagnostics (S7-300, S7-400) ................................................................................ 389 12.4 Guide to diagnostics (S7-1500) ........................................................................................... 390 12.5 Guide to diagnostics (S7-1200) ........................................................................................... 390 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 18 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Table of contents 13 Overview of instructions for the safety program .................................................................................. 363 13.1 13.1.1 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 13.1.1.3 13.1.1.4 13.1.2 13.1.2.1 13.1.2.2 13.1.2.3 13.1.2.4 13.1.2.5 General .................................................................................................................................392 LAD .......................................................................................................................................392 New network (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ....................................................................................392 Empty box (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .......................................................................................393 Open branch (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)....................................................................................393 Close branching (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..............................................................................395 FBD .......................................................................................................................................396 New network (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ....................................................................................396 Empty box (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .......................................................................................396 Open branch (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)....................................................................................397 Insert binary input (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ............................................................................398 Invert RLO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .......................................................................................399 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.1.1 13.2.1.2 13.2.1.3 13.2.1.4 13.2.1.5 13.2.1.6 13.2.1.7 13.2.1.8 13.2.1.9 13.2.1.10 13.2.1.11 13.2.1.12 13.2.2 13.2.2.1 13.2.2.2 13.2.2.3 13.2.2.4 13.2.2.5 13.2.2.6 13.2.2.7 13.2.2.8 13.2.2.9 13.2.2.10 13.2.2.11 13.2.2.12 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 Bit logic operations ................................................................................................................400 LAD .......................................................................................................................................400 ---| |---: NO contact (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..........................................................................400 ---| / |---: NC contact (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................401 --|NOT|--: Invert RLO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .......................................................................402 ---( )---: Assignment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .........................................................................402 ---( R )---: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ....................................................................403 ---( S )---: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................404 SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ......................................................................406 RS: Reset/set flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .....................................................................407 --|P|--: Scan operand for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................409 --|N|--: Scan operand for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...............................410 P_TRIG: Scan RLO for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...................................412 N_TRIG: Scan RLO for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................413 FBD .......................................................................................................................................414 AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................414 OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)...........................................................................416 X: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................................417 =: Assignment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................................................................419 R: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...............................................................................420 S: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)....................................................................................421 SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ......................................................................422 RS: Reset/set flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .....................................................................423 P: Scan operand for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .......................................425 N: Scan operand for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ......................................426 P_TRIG: Scan RLO for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...................................427 N_TRIG: Scan RLO for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................429 Safety functions ....................................................................................................................430 ESTOP1: Emergency STOP/OFF up to stop category 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ................430 TWO_HAND: Two-hand monitoring (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7400) .......................................................................................................................................436 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 19 Table of contents 13.3.3 13.3.4 13.3.5 13.3.6 13.3.7 13.3.8 13.3.9 TWO_H_EN: Two-hand monitoring with enable (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)............................. 439 MUTING: Muting (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400)............................... 445 MUT_P: Parallel muting (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................................................. 456 EV1oo2DI: 1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................. 468 FDBACK: Feedback monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..................................................... 475 SFDOOR: Safety door monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................................. 481 ACK_GL: Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O in an F-runtime group (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ................................................................................................................................... 487 13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 Timer operations .................................................................................................................. 489 TP: Generate pulse (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................ 489 TON: Generate on-delay (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ................................................................ 494 TOF: Generate off-delay (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ................................................................ 499 13.5 13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 Counter operations .............................................................................................................. 504 CTU: Count up (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ............................................................................... 504 CTD: Count down (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................... 506 CTUD: Count up and down (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ............................................................ 508 13.6 13.6.1 13.6.2 13.6.3 13.6.4 13.6.5 13.6.6 Comparator operations ........................................................................................................ 511 CMP ==: Equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ............................................................................... 511 CMP <>: Not equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ......................................................................... 512 CMP >=: Greater or equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .............................................................. 514 CMP <=: Less or equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ................................................................... 515 CMP >: Greater than (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...................................................................... 517 CMP <: Less than (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................... 518 13.7 13.7.1 13.7.2 13.7.3 13.7.4 13.7.5 13.7.6 Math functions ...................................................................................................................... 520 ADD: Add (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)........................................................................................ 520 SUB: Subtract (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ................................................................................. 523 MUL: Multiply (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .................................................................................. 526 DIV: Divide (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)...................................................................................... 529 NEG: Create twos complement (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...................................................... 533 ABS: Form absolute value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1200, S7-1500) ............................. 536 13.8 13.8.1 13.8.2 13.8.3 13.8.4 13.8.5 Move operations................................................................................................................... 538 MOVE: Move value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ........................................................................ 538 RD_ARRAY_I: Read value from INT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1500) ................ 539 RD_ARRAY_DI: Read value from DINT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1500) ........... 542 WR_FDB: Write value indirectly to an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) ...... 544 RD_FDB: Read value indirectly from an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7300, S7-400) ........................................................................................................................ 546 13.9 13.9.1 13.9.2 Conversion operations ......................................................................................................... 548 CONVERT: Convert value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1).............................................................. 548 BO_W: Convert 16 data elements of data type BOOL to a data element of data type WORD (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ............................................................................................ 550 W_BO: Convert a data element of data type WORD to 16 data elements of data type BOOL (STEP 7 Safety V15.1).............................................................................................. 552 SCALE: Scale values (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) .................................................... 555 13.9.3 13.9.4 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 20 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Table of contents 13.10 13.10.1 13.10.2 13.10.3 13.10.4 13.10.5 Program control operations ..................................................................................................558 JMP: Jump if RLO = 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) .....................................................................558 JMPN: Jump if RLO = 0 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..................................................................560 LABEL: Jump label (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..........................................................................562 RET: Return (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ....................................................................................564 OPN: Open global data block (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) ............565 13.11 13.11.1 13.11.2 13.11.3 Word logic operations ...........................................................................................................567 AND: AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...............................................................567 OR: OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...................................................................568 XOR: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ...........................................570 13.12 13.12.1 13.12.2 Shift and rotate ......................................................................................................................571 SHR: Shift right (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)................................................................................571 SHL: Shift left (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..................................................................................574 13.13 13.13.1 Operating ..............................................................................................................................577 ACK_OP: Fail-safe acknowledgment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) ..............................................577 13.14 13.14.1 13.14.1.1 13.14.1.2 Additional instructions ...........................................................................................................585 LAD .......................................................................................................................................585 ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400).............585 ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7400) .......................................................................................................................................586 FBD .......................................................................................................................................587 OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) ........................587 13.14.2 13.14.2.1 13.15 13.15.1 13.15.1.1 13.15.2 13.15.2.1 A B Communication .....................................................................................................................588 PROFIBUS/PROFINET ........................................................................................................588 SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1)..........................................................................................................588 S7 communication ................................................................................................................599 SENDS7 and RCVS7: Communication via S7 connections (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) .......................................................................................................599 Monitoring and response times ........................................................................................................... 607 A.1 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 Configuring monitoring times ................................................................................................608 Minimum monitoring time for the F-runtime group cycle time...............................................610 Minimum monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-CPU and F-I/O .....610 Minimum monitoring time of safety-related CPU-CPU communication ................................612 Monitoring Time for Safety-Related Communication between F-Runtime Groups ..............612 A.2 Response Times of Safety Functions ...................................................................................613 Checklist ............................................................................................................................................. 617 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 623 Index................................................................................................................................................... 637 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 21 Product Overview 1.1 1 Overview SIMATIC Safety fail-safe system The SIMATIC Safety fail-safe system is available to implement safety concepts in the area of machine and personnel protection (for example, for emergency STOP devices for machining and processing equipment) and in the process industry (for example, for implementation of protection functions for safety devices of instrumentation and controls and of burners). WARNING The SIMATIC Safety F-system is used to control processes and to force the system into a safe state after shutdown. SIMATIC Safety can only be used for controlling processes in which an immediate shutdown does not pose a danger to persons or the environment. When realizing safety applications including the creation of the safety-relevant project data you have to take into consideration the standards, directives and guidelines relevant for your application. In particular include standards in which the software creation process is described (for example IEC 61508-3 or ISO 13849-1). (S062) Achievable safety requirements SIMATIC Safety F-systems can satisfy the following safety requirements: Safety integrity level SIL3 in accordance with IEC 61508:2010 Performance Level (PL) e and category 4 in accordance with ISO 13849-1:2015 or EN ISO 13849-1:2015 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 23 Product Overview 1.1 Overview Principles of safety functions in SIMATIC Safety Functional safety is implemented principally through safety functions in the software. Safety functions are executed by the SIMATIC Safety system in order to bring the system to a safe state or maintain it in a safe state in case of a dangerous event. Safety functions are contained mainly in the following components: In the safety-related user program (safety program) in the F-CPU In the fail-safe inputs and outputs (F-I/O) The F-I/O ensure the safe processing of field information (sensors: e.g. emergency STOP pushbutton, light barriers; actuators, e.g. for motor control). They have all of the required hardware and software components for safe processing, in accordance with the required Safety Integrity Level. The user only has to program the user safety function. The safety function for the process can be provided through a user safety function or a fault reaction function. In the event of an error, if the F-system can no longer execute its actual user safety function, it executes the fault reaction function; for example, the associated outputs are shut down, and the F-CPU switches to STOP mode, if necessary. Example of user safety function and fault reaction function In the event of overpressure, the F-system will open a valve (user safety function). In the event of a hazardous fault in the F-CPU, all outputs are deactivated (fault reaction function), whereby the valve is opened, and the other actuators also attain a safe state. For a nonfaulty F-system, only the valve would be opened. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 24 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.2 Hardware and Software Components 1.2 Hardware and Software Components Hardware and software components of SIMATIC Safety The following figure provides an overview of the hardware and software components required to configure and operate a SIMATIC Safety F-system. Hardware components for PROFIBUS DP You can use the following fail-safe components in SIMATIC Safety F-systems on PROFIBUS DP: F-CPUs with DP interface, such as CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP Fail-safe inputs and outputs (F-I/O), such as: - S7-300 fail-safe signal modules in ET 200M - S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules - ET 200SP fail-safe modules - ET 200S fail-safe modules - ET 200pro fail-safe modules - ET 200iSP fail-safe modules - Fail-safe I/O modules ET 200eco (S7-300, S7-400) - Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves (light grid, laser scanner, etc.) You have the option to expand the configuration with standard I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 25 Product Overview 1.2 Hardware and Software Components The following CPs/CMs can be used in a SIMATIC Safety F-system on PROFIBUS DP for connection to distributed F-I/O: CP 443-5 Extended CM 1243-5 CM 1542-5 CP 1542-5 SP CM DP Hardware components for PROFINET IO You can use the following fail-safe components in SIMATIC Safety F-systems on PROFINET IO: F-CPUs with PN interface, e.g., CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC Fail-safe inputs and outputs (F-I/O), such as: - S7-300 fail-safe signal modules in ET 200M - S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules - ET 200SP fail-safe modules - ET 200S fail-safe modules - ET 200pro fail-safe modules - ET 200eco PN fail-safe I/O modules - Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices (light grid, laser scanner, etc.) You have the option to expand the configuration with standard I/O. The following CPs/CMs can be used in a SIMATIC Safety F-system on PROFINET IO for connection to distributed F-I/O: CP 443-1 CP 443-1 Advanced-IT CM 1542-1 CP 1545-1 Hardware components for central configuration You can use the following fail-safe components in SIMATIC Safety F-systems centrally on an F-CPU: S7-300 fail-safe signal modules S7-1200 fail-safe modules S7-1500 fail-safe modules ET 200SP fail-safe modules ET 200S fail-safe modules ET 200pro fail-safe modules (can also be used with CPU 1516proF-2) You have the option to expand the configuration with standard I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 26 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.2 Hardware and Software Components Required software components You require the following software components: SIMATIC STEP 7 Basic V15.1 with the STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package or SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1 with the STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package or SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1 with the STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package STEP 7 Safety optional packages This documentation describes the optional packages STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 and STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1. The STEP 7 Safety optional packages are the configuration and programming software for the SIMATIC Safety F-system. With STEP 7 Safety, you receive the following: Support for configuring the F-I/O in the hardware and network editor of the TIA Portal Support for creating the safety program using LAD and FBD and integrating error detection functions into the safety program Instructions for programming your safety program in LAD and FBD, which you are familiar with from the standard user programs Instructions for programming your safety program in LAD and FBD with special safety functions Moreover, STEP 7 Safety offers functions for comparing safety programs and for assisting you with the system acceptance. WARNING The configuration of F-CPUs and F-I/Os as well as the programming of F-blocks must be carried out in the TIA Portal as described in this documentation. You must observe all aspects described in the section System acceptance (Page 361) to ensure secure operation with the system SIMATIC SAFETY. Any other procedures are not permitted. (S056) Additional optional packages In addition to the STEP 7 Safety optional packages, you can use additional optional packages with F-I/O and F-CPUs and use instructions for programming your safety program with special safety functions within the SIMATIC Safety F-system. For example, SINUMERIK or Failsafe HMI Mobile Panels. The installation, parameter assignment and programming as well as what is important to note during system acceptance, is described in the documentation for the specific optional packages. Please also read the notes in Configurations supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system (Page 66). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 27 Product Overview 1.2 Hardware and Software Components TIA Portal Cloud Connector WARNING Use of the TIA Portal Cloud Connector is only intended for engineering work with the TIA Portal. This means online access in productive operation (e.g. SCADA) is not permitted. This is particularly true for safety programs. (S068) Openness Openness as part of STEP 7 Safety is supported with the functions listed below. Requirement for this is that no password is created for the safety-related project data to prevent the use of Openness in productive operation. As part of STEP 7 Safety the following is supported: Inserting / removing F-CPUs and F-I/Os Copying / deleting F-CPUs and F-I/Os from templates Compiling software (incl. safety program) Reading / configuring fail-safe parameters of the F-CPU Reading / configuring fail-safe parameters of F-I/O devices Reading / configuring fail-safe modules of ET 200SP Reading, declaring or deleting fail-safe variables in the PLC variable table Updating projects to the latest type versions of F-blocks Consistent station upload Export and import of F-blocks and F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) Comparison of hardware and software The following are not supported. Downloading to device Compiling hardware Note If access protection is set up for the safety program, actions that require access authorization cannot be executed. WARNING When using Openness while handling safety-related project data their integrity must be ensured (for example in the context of saving or transferring of applications for "Source Code Management"). In case of a connection of external tools, observe the requirements for offline support tools according to IEC 61508-3. A violation of the integrity of the safetyrelated project data can not be determined during the import with STEP 7 Safety. A final verification of the correctness of the safety-related project data has to be carried out as described in the section System acceptance (Page 361). (S070) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 28 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.2 Hardware and Software Components Virtual environments WARNING Use of virtual environments in the engineering system Note that a HYPERVISOR or a client software of a HYPERVISOR is not permitted to perform any function that reproduces recorded message frame sequences with correct time behavior in the network with accessible systems. Make sure that this condition is met, for example, when using the following functions: * Reset of captured statuses (snapshots) of the virtual machines (VMs) * Suspending and resuming the virtual machines * Replay of recorded sequences in the virtual machines * Moving VMs between hosts in productive operation (e.g. Fault Tolerance (FT)) * Digital twins of VMs in the virtual environment If in doubt, disable these functions in the settings (HYPERVISOR administration console). (S067) Safety program You can create a safety program using the program editor. You can program fail-safe FBs and FCs in the FBD or LAD programming languages using the instructions from the optional package and create fail-safe DBs. Safety checks are automatically performed and additional fail-safe blocks for error detection and fault reaction are inserted when the safety program is compiled. This ensures that failures and errors are detected and appropriate reactions are triggered to maintain the Fsystem in the safe state or bring it to a safe state. In addition to the safety program, a standard user program can be run on the F-CPU. A standard program can coexist with a safety program in an F-CPU because the safety-related data of the safety program are protected from being affected unintentionally by data of the standard user program. Data can be exchanged between the safety program and the standard user program in the F-CPU by means of bit memory or data of a standard DB or by accessing the process image input and output. See also Data Transfer from the Safety Program to the Standard User Program (Page 196) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 29 Product Overview 1.3 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package 1.3 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package Software requirements for STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 At a minimum, one of the following software packages must be installed on the programming device or PC: SIMATIC STEP 7 Basic V15.1 SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1 Reviewing the Readme file The readme file contains important up-to-date information about the software (for example, Windows versions supported). You can display the readme file in the setup program or open it later in the SIMATIC STEP 7 information system. Installing STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 1. Start the programming device or PC on which the "SIMATIC STEP 7 Basic V15.1" or "SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1" software package has been installed, and make sure that SIMATIC STEP 7 Basic V15.1 or SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1 is closed. 2. Insert the optional package product DVD. 3. Initiate the SETUP.EXE program on the DVD. 4. Follow the instructions of the Setup program, bearing in mind the information in the readme file. Displaying integrated Help The help on STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 is completely integrated into the information system of SIMATIC STEP 7 Basic V15.1 or SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1. You have the following two options to open the integrated help: In the "Help" menu, select the "Show help" command or press to show the appropriate help for the context. Click on the link within a tool tip cascade to go directly to a place with more information within the help. Uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 To uninstall STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1, proceed as described in the STEP 7 Help under "Uninstall". Post-uninstall procedures After uninstalling the STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package, you can still open projects with F-CPUs whose F-capability is enabled but you can no longer edit the safety program. F-I/O is no longer supported. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 30 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.4 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package 1.4 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package Software requirements for STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 At a minimum, the following software package must be installed on the programming device or PC: SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15 .1 Reviewing the Readme file The readme file contains important up-to-date information about the software (for example, Windows versions supported). You can display the readme file in the setup program or open it later in the SIMATIC STEP 7 information system. Installing STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 1. Start the programming device or PC on which the "SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1" software package has been installed, and make sure that SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1 is closed. 2. Insert the optional package product DVD. 3. Initiate the SETUP.EXE program on the DVD. 4. Follow the instructions of the Setup program, bearing in mind the information in the readme file. Displaying integrated Help The help on STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 is completely integrated into the information system of SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1. You have the following two options to open the integrated help: In the "Help" menu, select the "Show help" command or press to show the appropriate help for the context. Click on the link within a tool tip cascade to go directly to a place with more information within the help. Uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 To uninstall STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1, proceed as described in the STEP 7 Help under "Uninstall". Post-uninstall procedures After uninstalling the STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package, you can still open projects with F-CPUs whose F-capability is enabled but you can no longer edit the safety program. F-I/O is no longer supported. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 31 Product Overview 1.5 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety PowerPack 1.5 Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety PowerPack After the installation of the STEP 7 Safety PowerPack the functional scope of STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 is available to you. Software requirements for STEP 7 Safety PowerPack At a minimum, the following software package must be installed on the programming device or PC: SIMATIC STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1 Installing STEP 7 Safety PowerPack 1. Start the Automation License Manager on the programming device/PC on which the "SIMATIC STEP 7 Professional V15.1" software package is installed. 2. Install the license included in the STEP 7 Safety PowerPack as described in the Automation License Manager help. Uninstalling STEP 7 Safety PowerPack To uninstall the license included in the STEP 7 Safety PowerPack, proceed as described in the Automation License Manager help. 1.6 Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced Introduction In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you can continue to use projects with safety programs that you created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5. Requirement STEP 7 Safety Advanced, S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5, and the F-Configuration Pack used to create the project must all be installed on the computer you are using for migration. The F-Configuration Pack V5.4 SP5 to V5.5 SP13is supported. To that end, the projects must have been compiled in S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 and with the F-Configuration Pack. Prior to migration Delete all F-blocks not required by the safety program in your S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 project prior to migration. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 32 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.6 Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced Procedure as in STEP 7 Professional Proceed just as you would for standard projects to migrate projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced. Once the migration is complete, you should verify using the collective F-signature whether the project was migrated unchanged. Note If you use the safety program to migrate F-blocks with know-how protection, remove the know-how protection prior to migration. You can assign the F-blocks know-how protection again once the migration is completed. This migration approach is described in the "Migration" section of the STEP 7 Professional Help. Special considerations about STEP 7 Safety Advanced are described below. Note We recommend that you enable the "Include hardware configuration" option in the "Migrating project" window. Older hardware versions Older versions of F-hardware may not be supported by STEP 7 Safety Advanced . If you have used and configured versions of F-CPUs and F-I/O in S7 Distributed Safety projects that are not approved for STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you will need to upgrade this hardware to the new version in S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 and the corresponding FConfiguration Pack. Once the upgrade is completed, migration to STEP 7 Safety Advanced is feasible. A Product Information with a list of approved hardware is available on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/109481784): Particularities for safety-related CPU-CPU communication via S7 connections You can find information about the special considerations for migrated projects with safetyrelated CPU-CPU communication via S7 connections in Safety-related communication via S7 connections (Page 248). Please also note Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via S7 connections (Page 258). Particularities for ESTOP1 or FDBACK instructions Information on the special considerations when using the ESTOP1 and FDBACK instructions can be found in the "Instruction versions" section in ESTOP1: Emergency STOP/OFF up to stop category 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 430) and FDBACK: Feedback monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 475). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 33 Product Overview 1.6 Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced Post-migration procedures Once migration is complete, you have a complete project with a safety program which has retained the program structure of S7 Distributed Safety and the collective F-signature. Fblocks from the S7 Distributed Safety F-library (V1) are converted into instructions that are provided by STEP 7 Safety Advanced. The migrated project therefore does not need to be re-accepted; it can be loaded as is to the F-CPU as long as it has not been modified or compiled since migration. Note Safety summary You cannot create a safety summary in STEP 7 Safety Advanced for a migrated project. The printout of the project created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 and the corresponding acceptance documents are still valid, because the collective F-signature has been retained. Compiling of the migrated hardware configuration If you receive an error message after migration and subsequent compilation of the hardware configuration stating that the F-source address does not match the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU, change the "Central F-source address" parameter. The F-source addresses of all F-I/Os assigned to the F-CPU are reassigned in the process. If after migration of an SM 326; DI 24 x DC 24V (6ES7 326-1BK01-0AB0 and 6ES7 3261BK02-0AB0) and subsequent compilation of the hardware configuration, the error message "F_IParam_ID_1: Value outside the permitted range" is displayed, delete the F-SM and reinsert it. In both cases, subsequent compilation of the safety program is required. Compiling the migrated safety programs As a result of compilation of the migrated project with STEP 7 Safety Advanced, the existing program structure (with F-CALL) is converted to the new program structure of STEP 7 Safety Advanced (with main safety block). This changes the F-collective signature and the safety program has to be validated or acceptance may have to be carried out again. (S7-300, S7-400) You must call up the main safety block according to the F-CALL from an arbitrary block of the standard user program. We recommend a call from an OB 3x. Note During the first-time compiling of the migrated safety program the call of the F-CALL is replaced automatically by a call of the main safety block, if the calling block of the F-CALL was created using the programming language LAD, FBD or STL. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 34 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.6 Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced Note Changing the Safety system version Before compiling with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, you must change the safety system version to a version which is not equal to 1.0 in the "Settings" area of the Safety Administration Editor. We recommend that you use the highest available version. Note Using the latest version of instructions If you want to expand the migrated safety program, we recommend that you update to the latest version of the instructions used before compiling with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time. Read the information on instruction versions for each instruction. Note Note that compiling the migrated safety program extends the runtime of the F-runtime group(s) and increases the memory requirements of the safety program (see also Excel file for calculating response time (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). See also Application example "Migration of a safety program to TIA Portal" (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109475826) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 35 Product Overview 1.7 Migrating PLC programs to a n F-CPU S7-1500 1.7 Migrating PLC programs to a n F-CPU S7-1500 To migrate an F-CPU S7-300/400 onto an F-CPU S7-1500, proceed as with the migration of a standard CPU S7-300/400 onto a CPU S7-1500. Points to note after migration: Non-automatable actions - Creating an F-runtime group and assigning it to the main safety block. - The hardware configuration including the I/O of the initial F-CPU is not automatically transferred to an S7-1500 F-CPU. Implement the hardware configuration of the new CPU manually after migration. Please also read the sections "Specify F-destination address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1" and "Specify F-destination address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2" in chapter "Configuring an F-CPU (Page 48)". Otherwise, this can lead to a reassignment of the F-destination addresses in the configuration. - When using F-I/Os with PROFIsafe Protocol Version = Expanded Protocol (XP) (for example S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules) keep in mind that you need one byte more in the address area of S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs than in S7-300/400 F-CPUs. - Replacement of the OV instruction by the connection of the ENO output for Math functions (Page 520). - Replacement of the RD_FDB instruction by the instructions RD_ARRAY_I (Page 539) and RD_ARRAY_DI (Page 542). - Replacement of the F-runtime group communication through Communication via Flexible F-Link (Page 145). Instructions not supported: - MUTING - TWO_HAND - WR_FDB - OPN - SENDS7 - RCVS7 Data types not supported - DWORD Changes to safety program programming - F_GLOBDB.VKE0/1 replaced by FALSE/TRUE (Page 119). - Readable values from the F_GLOBDB replaced by the F-runtime group information DB. Additional information is available under F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 148) and F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 148). - Replacement of the QBAD_I_xx or QBAD_O_xx tag by the value status. Additional information is available under Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 159) and F-I/O DB (Page 165). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 36 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.8 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1 New naming convention when naming the F-I/O DBs Modified behavior of QBAD and PASS_OUT (Page 171) tags for F-I/O with "RIOforFA safety" profile. Compile the safety program and eliminate any compilation errors displayed. Note A new acceptance must be carried out following F-CPU migration. See also Programming (Page 111) 1.8 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1 1.8.1 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety V15 to V15.1 If you want to continue to work with a project from STEP 7 Safety V15, you must first upgrade the project to STEP 7 Safety V15.1. Perform the upgrade following the usual procedure for STEP 7. After upgrading to V15.1, you have to compile your safety program. 1.8.2 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety V14 SP1 to V15.1 If you want to continue to work with a project from STEP 7 Safety V14 SP1, you must first upgrade the project to STEP 7 Safety V15.1. Perform the upgrade following the usual procedure for STEP 7. After upgrading to V15.1, you have to compile your safety program. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 37 Product Overview 1.8 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1 1.8.3 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1 to V15.1 If you want to continue to work with a project from STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1, you must first upgrade the project to STEP 7 Safety V15.1. Perform the upgrade following the usual procedure for STEP 7. After upgrading to V15.1, you have to compile your safety program. (S7-300/400): After compilation, the safety program is consistent and the collective Fsignature of the upgraded safety program corresponds to the collective F-signature of the safety program from V13 SP1. Acceptance of changes is not required (S7-1200/1500): After compiling, your safety program is consistent and the collective Fsignature of the upgraded safety program has changed for system reasons. The new collective F-signature of the safety program with STEP 7 Safety V15.1 replaces the former collective F-signature of the safety program with STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1. You can find an overview of all system-related changes under "Common data/Protocols/FConvert Log+CPU name+time stamp". One of the system-related changes is that STEP 7 Safety V15.1 automatically replaces versions of instructions no longer supported with new, functionally identical versions. The overview contains a comparison of the previous signatures with STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1 to the new signatures with STEP 7 Safety V15.1 and displays the automatically changed instruction versions. Print out the overview and store this printout with your acceptance documents or your machine documentation. Change acceptance is not required, since the "Collective F-signature with STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1" contained in the overview matches the collective F-signature in your current acceptance documents. Keep in mind that existing change histories are not upgraded. All previous entries are deleted after the upgrade. If necessary, print out the change log before you upgrade. Special features for user acknowledgment and reintegration of F-I/O after F-I/O or channel faults and PASS_ON = 1 (S7-1200, S7-1500) The following applies to F-I/Os: S7-300 fail-safe signal modules ET 200SP fail-safe modules ET 200S fail-safe modules ET 200pro fail-safe modules ET 200iSP fail-safe modules Keep in mind the changed behavior for user acknowledgment and reintegration when configuring "Behavior after channel fault" = "Passivation of the channel" and tag ACK_NEC (F-I/O DB) = 1. The behavior was adapted to the behavior when configuring "Behavior after channel fault" = "Passivate the entire module": SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 38 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.8 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1 As of STEP 7 Safety V14 or higher, user acknowledgment of a corrected F-I/O or channel fault is possible even when the tag PASS_ON (F-I/O DB) = 1. A reintegration (provision of process values) takes place as soon as the tag PASS_ON = 0. Until STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1, user acknowledgment of a corrected F-I/O or channel fault was not possible as long as the tag PASS_ON (F-I/O DB) = 1. A user acknowledgment was only possible once the tag PASS_ON = 0. The reintegration (provision of process values) took place immediately after the user acknowledgment. Special features when using instruction profiles If you want to use an instruction profile in your project from STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1, delete the instruction profile before you upgrade to STEP 7 Safety V15.1. Before deleting, make a note of your settings. After upgrading create a new instruction profile, if required, and enter the noted settings there, if applicable. Please note that some instruction versions are no longer supported under STEP 7 Safety V15.1. You will find additional information about the supported instruction versions in the description of the respective instruction. 1.8.4 Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety prior to V13 SP1 If you want to upgrade from a project prior to STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1 to STEP 7 Safety V15.1, you must upgrade the project as in Standard to STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1 via an intermediate step. The safety program signature does not change after upgrading the safety program to STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1. Acceptance of changes is therefore not required. Perform the upgrade following the usual procedure for STEP 7 Professional. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 39 Product Overview 1.8 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1 When upgrading a project that was created with STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11 . please note the following information: Note Adjustments are required before you can continue working on a project upgraded from STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11: There was a product warning for STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11 regarding setting the parameters "Discrepancy behavior" and "Reintegration after discrepancy error" for the failsafe digital input and output modules 4F-DI/3F-DO DC24V/2A (6ES7138-4FC01-0AB0, 6ES7138-4FC00-0AB0). These parameters could be displayed incorrectly in certain combinations. Based on the handling instructions in this product warning, you used a conversion table to set the affected parameters so that they were displayed incorrectly in the safety summary and hardware configuration in order for them to have the correct effect in the F-module. You also corrected the safety summary by hand to document the actual behavior of F-modules. To reverse these changes, follow these steps: 1. Compile the upgraded project with STEP 7 Safety Advanced V13 SP1. An error message is displayed for each F-module in STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11 the parameters of which you have corrected: "The CRC (F_Par_CRC) of the module (xxx) does not match the calculated value (yyy)." 2. Adapt the parameter assignment of each F-module for which this error message is displayed to match your handwritten corrections in the safety summary. 3. Do this for each F-CPU and then compile the safety program. 4. If the collective F-signature following compiling corresponds to the collective F-signature on the safety summary, you have made all the necessary corrections. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 40 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Product Overview 1.8 Upgrading projects to STEP 7 Safety V15.1 Use of CPs F-I/Os operated downstream from a CP443-5 Extended, CP443-1 or CP 443-1 Advanced-IT were not automatically assigned a unique F-destination address. As soon as you compile the hardware in a project with such F-I/Os in STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1, you are notified for the affected F-I/Os. You have to assign new, unique F-destination addresses for the reported F-I/Os. Additional information is available under PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 (Page 68), PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70) and Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices (Page 77). This changes the collective F-signature of the safety program. Because the F-SW collective signature is unchanged, it is documented that the safety program has remained unchanged. The changed F-HW collective signature indicates that the safety-related hardware configuration has changed. You can now verify that solely the changed F-destination addresses have caused this change: The F-parameter signature (without address) for each changed F-I/O remains the same. Only the affected F-I/O DBs are listed in the comparison editor of the safety program with the filter set to "Compare only F-blocks relevant for certification". Changed names of F-I/O DBs Prior to STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1 it was possible to change the name of an F-I/O DB. This change results in a changed collective F-signature during upgrading. If a changed collective F-signature is unwanted during upgrading, follow these steps: 1. Under STEP 7 Safety V13, rename the changed names of the F-I/O DBs back to the original names. 2. Compile the safety program. The collective F-signature does not change as a result. 3. Print a comparison printout (Page 339). Use the comparison printout to ensure that you have only changed the names of the F-FI/O DBs. 4. Upgrading the safety program to STEP 7 Safety V13 SP1. After upgrading, the safety program has the F-collective signature from step 2. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 41 Product Overview 1.9 First steps 1.9 First steps Getting Started in SIMATIC Safety Three Getting Started documents are available to help you begin using SIMATIC Safety. The Getting Started documentation is an instruction manual that provides a step-by-step description of how to create a project with SIMATIC Safety. It gives you the opportunity to quickly become familiar with the scope of features of SIMATIC Safety. Contents The Getting Started documentation describes the creation of a single, continuous project that is extended with each section. Based on the configuration, you program a fail-safe shutdown, make changes to the programming, and accept the system. In addition to the step-by-step instructions, the Getting Started documentation also gives you background information for every new topic, which explains the functions used in more detail and how they interrelate. Target audience The Getting Started documentation is intended for beginners but is also suitable for users who are switching from S7 Distributed Safety. Download Three Getting Started documents are available as PDF files for free download in the Industry Online Support: STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11 with S7-300/400 F-CPUs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49972838) STEP 7 Safety Basic V13 SP1 with S7-1200 F-CPUs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/34612486/133300) (part of the manual "S7-1200 Functional Safety manual") STEP 7 Safety Advanced V13 with S7-1500 F-CPUs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/101177693) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 42 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 2 Configuring 2.1 Overview of Configuration Introduction You basically configure a SIMATIC Safety F-system in the same way as a standard S7-300, S7-400, S7-1200, S7-1500 or ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200S, ET 200iSP, ET 200eco, ET 200eco PN or ET 200pro automation system in STEP 7. This section presents only the essential differences compared to standard configuration you encounter when configuring a SIMATIC Safety F-system. This documentation distinguishes between two groups of F-I/O: F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 F-I/Os which ensure the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address solely with the F-destination address, for example, ET 200S F-modules. The PROFIsafe address is usually assigned by DIP switches. F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 2 F-I/Os which can ensure the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address with a combination of F-source address and F-destination address, for example, S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules. The PROFIsafe address is usually assigned with STEP 7 Safety. Which F-components can you configure with the STEP 7 Safety optional package? The table below shows you which F-CPUs you can configure with STEP 7 Safety Basic and which with STEP 7 Safety Advanced: F-CPUs STEP 7 Safety Basic STEP 7 Safety Advanced S7-300 -- x S7-400 -- x S7-1200 x x S7-1500 -- x WinAC RTX F -- x S7-1500 F Software Controller -- x SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 43 Configuring 2.1 Overview of Configuration The table below shows you which F-I/Os you can configure with STEP 7 Safety Basic and which with STEP 7 Safety Advanced as well as which PROFIsafe address type they support: F-I/O S7-300 F-SMs STEP 7 Safety Basic STEP 7 Safety Advanced PROFIsafe address type x** x** 1 ET 200S F-modules x x 1 ET 200pro F-modules x x 1 ET 200iSP F-modules x x 1 ET 200eco DP F-I/Os -- With S7-300/400 F-CPUs (only PROFIsafe V1 mode) 1 ET 200eco PN F-I/Os x x 2 S7-1200 F-modules x x 2 ET 200SP F-modules x x 2 S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules x x 2 fail-safe GSD based DP slaves x x * fail-safe GSD based I/O devices x x * (centrally on S7-1200 F-CPUs) * Consult the respective documentation to determine the PROFIsafe address type of a GSD based DP slave/GSD based I/O device. If in doubt, assume that the PROFIsafe address is type 1. *** F-SMs that only support PROFIsafe V1 mode can only be used on F-CPUs S7-300/400. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 44 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.1 Overview of Configuration Example: Configured F-system in STEP 7 Professional The following figure presents a configured F-system. You choose the fail-safe components in the "Hardware catalog" task card as you would do with standard components and place them in the work area of the network or device view. F-components are shown in yellow. Additional information For detailed information on F-I/O, refer to the manuals for the relevant F-I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 45 Configuring 2.2 Particularities for configuring the F-System Which safety-related communication options can you configure? You need to use the hardware and network editor to configure the following safety-related communication options (see Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 201) or Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 270)): Communication with Flexible F-Link (Page 262) Safety-related master-master communication Safety-related master-master communication for S7 Distributed Safety Safety-related master-I-slave communication Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Safety-related I-slave-slave communication Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication for S7 Distributed Safety Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication Safety-related communication via S7 connections Safety-related communication via S7 connections for S7 Distributed Safety or S7 F Systems 2.2 Particularities for configuring the F-System Configuring is the same as for standard components You configure a SIMATIC Safety F-system in the same way as a standard S7 system. This means that you configure and assign parameters for the hardware in the hardware and network editor as a centralized system (F-CPU and F-IO if required e.g. CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP and F-modules S7-1500/ET 200MP) and/or as a distributed system (F-CPU, F-SMs in ET 200M, F-modules ET 200MP, F-modules ET 200SP, ET 200S, ET 200pro, ET 200iSP, ET 200eco, ET 200eco PN, fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe fail-safe GSD based I/O devices). Special F-parameters For the F-functionality there are special F-parameters that you can review and set in the "Properties" of the fail-safe components (F-CPU and F-I/O). F-parameters are marked in yellow. F-parameters are explained in "Configuring an F-CPU (Page 48)" and "Configuring F-I/O (Page 53)". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 46 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.2 Particularities for configuring the F-System Compiling the hardware configuration You must compile the hardware configuration of the SIMATIC Safety F-system (shortcut menu "Compile > Hardware configuration"). A configured F-CPU with enabled F-capability is the only prerequisite for programming the safety program. Note Inconsistencies are possible when configuring the hardware and can also be saved. A full consistency check of the hardware configuration and possible connection data is performed only during compilation. Therefore, perform "Edit > Compile" regularly. Changing safety-related parameters Note If you change a safety-related parameter (marked in yellow) for an F-I/O or an F-CPU, you must then compile the modified hardware configuration and the Compiling the safety program (Page 311) (shortcut menu "Compile > Hardware and software (only changes)") and download. This also applies for changes to the F-I/O which are not used in the safety program. F-I/O in standard operation is not affected by this. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 47 Configuring 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU Introduction You configure the F-CPU basically in the same way as a standard automation system. F-CPUs are always configurable in STEP 7, regardless of whether or not the STEP 7 Safety optional package is installed. Without an installed optional package, however, the F-CPU can only be used as a standard CPU. If the STEP 7 Safety optional package is installed, you can enable or disable the F-capability for the F-CPU. If you want to use the F-I/O in safety mode or in safety-related communication, the F-capability of the F-CPU must be enabled. F-capability is enabled by default after the STEP 7 Safety optional package is installed. Enabling/disabling F-capability If you want to modify the F-capability setting, proceed as follows: 1. Select the F-CPU in the device or network view, and select the "Properties" tab in the inspector window. 2. Select "Fail-safe" in the area navigation. 3. Use the appropriate button to enable/disable the F-capability. 4. If you want to disable F-capability, confirm the "Disable F-activation" dialog with "Yes". Disabling F-capability for an existing safety program If you want to disable the F-capability for an F-CPU because you intend to use the F-CPU as a standard CPU although a safety program is installed, you must note the following: You need the password for the safety program, if assigned. The Safety Administration Editor (Page 81) is deleted from the project tree. The F-OBs are deleted. (S7-1200, S7-1500) All F-blocks are deleted. From now on you cannot use F-I/O in safety mode with this F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 48 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU Configuring the F-parameters of the F-CPU In the "Properties" tab of the F-CPU, you can change or apply the default settings for the following parameters: The F-destination address range - Low limit for F-destination addresses - High limit for F-destination addresses The default F-monitoring time for central or distributed F-I/O at the F-CPU Note A change of the F-monitoring time for central or distributed F-I/O at the F-CPU results in modifications to the safety program when it is recompiled. A new acceptance may therefore be required. Specify F-destination address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 With the parameters "Low limit for F-destination addresses" and "High limit for F-destination addresses" you specify a range for this F-CPU in which the F-destination address of newly inserted F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 (Page 68) is assigned automatically. An Fdestination address that is not within the F-destination address range yet, is also reassigned when you reassign a DP slave/IO device with the F-CPU or switch on the F-activation of the F-CPU or change the logical address of this F-module. The F-destination address is assigned in ascending order starting at the "Low limit for Fdestination addresses". When no free F-destination address is available in the F-destination address range, the next available free F-destination address outside the F-destination address range is assigned and a warning is output during compilation. The maximum possible F-destination address for ET 200S, ET 200eco, ET 200pro, ET 200iSP F-modules and S7-300 F-SMs is 1022. The F-destination addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 must be unique networkwide and CPU-wide. By selecting different F-destination address ranges for different F-CPUs, you can define different ranges for the automatic assignment of the F-destination address. This is useful when you are operating multiple F-CPUs in one network. Subsequent manual address changes are possible. (see also Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65)) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 49 Configuring 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU Example: You have configured the F-destination address range as follows: Low limit for F-destination addresses = 100 High limit for F-destination addresses = 199 When inserting the first F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1, the F-destination address 100 is assigned. When inserting an additional F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1, the F-destination address 101 is assigned. Note The parameters "Low limit for F-destination addresses" and "High limit for F-destination addresses" have no effect on the following F-I/Os: * SM 326; DI 8 x NAMUR (as of article number 6ES7326-1RF00-0AB0) * SM 326; DO 10 x DC 24V/2A (article number 6ES7326-2BF01-0AB0) * SM 336; AI 6 x 13 bit (article number 6ES7336-1HE00-0AB0) Specify F-destination address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 The F-destination address of F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70) is assigned automatically for each F-CPU in descending order starting with 65534. The low limit is the value configured with the parameter "Low limit for F-destination addresses" (for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1) + 1. When the value configured with the "High limit for F-destination addresses" parameter is reached, a warning is output during compilation. (See also Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65)) Specify F-source address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 You specify the F-source address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70) assigned to this F-CPU with the "Central F-source address" parameter. The F-source address must be unique throughout the network. (see also Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65)) Note A change to the "Central F-source address" parameter results in modifications to the safety program when it is recompiled. A new acceptance may therefore be required because the Fsource addresses of all F-I/Os of address type 2 are changed centrally by this step. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 50 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU "Default F-monitoring time" parameter Configure the "Default F-monitoring time" for monitoring the communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O. You can adjust the F-monitoring time via the following parameters: "Default F-monitoring time for central F-I/O" "Default F-monitoring time for F-I/O of this interface" The default F-monitoring time for the central F-I/O acts on the F-I/O that is arranged centrally, i.e. near the F-CPU. You set this parameter in the properties of the F-CPU (select F-CPU, then select "Properties > Fail-safe > F-parameters"). The default F-monitoring time for the F-I/O of this interface acts on the F-I/O that is assigned to this interface of the F-CPU (PROFIBUS or PROFINET). You change this parameter in the properties of the relevant interface (selection of the interface in the "Device view" tab, then "F-parameters"). The various settings available allow you to flexibly adapt the F-monitoring time to the conditions of your F-system, for example to take account of different bus cycles. You can also change the F-monitoring time individually for each F-I/O in the F-I/O properties (see Configuring F-I/O (Page 53) or Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices (Page 77)). Note A change of the F-monitoring time for central or distributed F-I/O at the F-CPU results in modifications to the safety program when it is recompiled. A new acceptance may therefore be required. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) You can find additional information in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 51 Configuring 2.3 Configuring an F-CPU Automatic generation of the safety program The safety program of an F-CPU consists of one or two F-runtime groups that contain the F-blocks (see also Defining F-Runtime Groups (Page 132)). When the F-CPU (with activated F-capability) is inserted into the work area of the device view or network view, a safety program with an F-runtime group is generated automatically. You can define in STEP 7 Safety that no F-runtime group is generated while inserting the F-CPU (with activated F-capability). Proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Options > Settings" menu command. 2. Select the "STEP 7 Safety" area. 3. If it is not already disabled, disable automatic generation of an F-runtime group by deselecting the "Generate default fail-safe program" option. This change has no influence on any existing safety programs; it only defines whether an F-runtime group is automatically generated for each one of the subsequently inserted F-CPUs. Configuring the protection level of the F-CPU WARNING (S7-300, S7-400) In safety mode, access with the CPU password must not be authorized during changes to the standard user program as this would also allow changes to the safety program. To rule out this possibility, you must configure the protection level "Write protection for fail-safe blocks" and configure a password for the F-CPU. If only one person is authorized to change the standard user program and the safety program, the protection level "Write protection" or "Read/write protection" should be configured so that other persons have only limited access or no access at all to the entire user program (standard and safety programs).(S001) WARNING (S7-1200, S7-1500) In safety mode, the safety program must be password-protected. For this purpose, configure at least the protection level "Full access (no protection)" and assign a password under "Full access incl. fail-safe (no protection)". This protection level only allows full access to the standard user program, not to F-blocks. If you select a higher protection level, for example to protect the standard user program, you must assign an additional password for "Full access (no protection)". Assign different passwords for the individual protection levels. (S041) You configure the protection level following the same procedure as for standard CPUs. For information on the password for the F-CPU, refer to Access protection (Page 101). Pay special attention to the warnings in Access protection for the F-CPU (Page 106). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 52 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.4 Configuring F-I/O 2.4 Configuring F-I/O Introduction You configure the S7-1500/ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200S, ET 200eco (S7-300, S7-400), ET 200eco PN, ET 200pro and ET 200iSP F-modules, the S7-300 F-SMs and the S7-1200 F-modules as usual in STEP 7: After you have inserted the F-I/O in the work area of the device or network view, you access the configuration dialogs by selecting the relevant F-I/O and the "Properties" tab. Note Changes to the parameter assignment result in modifications to the safety program when it is recompiled. A new acceptance may therefore be required. The use of ET 200SP F-modules is possible with IM155-6PN ST as of Firmware V1.1, IM 155-6 PN HF and IM 155-6 DP HF. The distributed use of S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules is possible with IM 155-5 PN ST as of firmware V3.0, IM 155-5 PN HF as of firmware V2.0 and IM 155-5 DP ST as of firmware V3.0. The central use of S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules is possible with S7-1500 F-CPUs as of firmware V1.7, distributed use as of firmware V1.5. (S7-1200) We recommend you limit the total number of F-I/Os that are used centrally or distributed in an S7-1200 F-CPU to 12. Depending on the volume of project data, the maximum number of F-I/Os can be smaller. WARNING When you make changes in which the assignment of input/output addresses and wiring can change, then you must perform a wiring test. Examples for such changes are: * Adding F-I/O * Changing the start address of F-I/O * Changing the slot position of F-I/O * Changing - the rack - the slave/device address - the PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO subnet - the IP address - the device name (S071) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 53 Configuring 2.4 Configuring F-I/O Channel-granular passivation after channel faults You can configure how the F-I/O will respond to channel faults, such as a short-circuit, overload, discrepancy error, or wire break, provided the F-I/O supports this parameter (e.g. for ET 200S or ET 200pro F-modules). You configure this response in the properties for the relevant F-I/O ("Behavior after channel fault" parameter). This parameter is used to specify whether the entire F-I/O or just the faulty channel(s) are passivated in the event of channel faults. Note (S7-300, S7-400) Note that channel-granular passivation increases the runtime of the Fruntime group(s) compared to passivation of the entire F-I/O (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). "Channel failure acknowledge" parameter (S7-1200, S7-1500) In the case of F-I/Os that support the "Channel failure acknowledge" channel parameter (for example S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules and S7-1200 F-modules), this replaces the ACK_NEC tag of the F-IO data block. If an F-I/O fault is detected by the F-I/O, passivation of all channels of the relevant F-I/O occurs. If channel faults are detected, the relevant channels are passivated if "Passivate channel" is configured. If "Passivate the entire module" is configured, all channels of the relevant F-I/O are passivated. Once the F-I/O fault or channel fault has been eliminated, reintegration of the relevant F-I/O occurs in line with the "Channel failure acknowledge" parameter. Automatically Manually Adjustable (when channel-granular passivation is configured.) WARNING The parameter assignment "Channel failure acknowledge = Automatic" is only allowed if automatic reintegration is permitted for the relevant process from a safety standpoint.(S045) Note The default assignment for the "Channel failure acknowledge" parameter when the F-module is created is "Manually". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 54 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.4 Configuring F-I/O Organization block/Process image (S7-1200, S7-1500) If you use F-I/O in standard mode, you can select the organization block/process image as you do for standard I/O. If you use F-I/O in safety mode, no selection is possible. The process image is updated at the beginning or end of the F-OB (see section Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 114)). Contrary to F-I/O operated in non-isochronous mode, you need to selected a process image partition, such as PIP 1 for F-I/O that is operated in isochronous mode (see "Configuring isochronous mode (S7-1500) (Page 63)"). Changing the name and number of the F-I/O DB The name and number of the F-I/O DB (Page 165) are assigned automatically when the F-I/O is configured. The name of the F-I/O DB by default contains the start address and the name of the F-I/O. You can disable adding the prefix of the start address. The naming scheme depends on the setting in Safety Administration Editor. You can find information on the assignment of number ranges and disabling the prefix of the start address in Safety Administration Editor, "Settings" area (Page 90). Change the number of the F-I/O DB: Change the number in the properties of the F-I/O. Change the name of the F-I/O DB: The name of the F-I/O DB is derived by the system from the name of the F-I/O depending on the type of F-I/O. For F-I/O with an F-module with a single F-submodule, the module name is used. For F-I/O with multiple F-submodules, the submodule name is used. You change the name of the F-I/O DB indirectly by changing the name of the F-I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 55 Configuring 2.4 Configuring F-I/O Customizing the F-monitoring time for F-I/O You can customize the F-monitoring time in the properties of the F-I/O under "F-parameters". This may be necessary to prevent a timeout being triggered when no error occurs and the FI/O requires a longer F-monitoring time or assignment with a default F-monitoring time is not possible. For this purpose, activate the corresponding check box and assign an F-monitoring time. Note A change of the F-monitoring time for central or distributed F-I/O at the F-CPU results in modifications to the safety program when it is recompiled. A new acceptance may therefore be required. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) You can find additional information in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). Group diagnostics for fail-safe S7-300 signal modules By disabling a channel of the fail-safe signal module in the module properties, you also disable the group diagnostics for this channel. Exception for S7-300/400 F-CPUs: For the following S7-300 fail-safe signal modules SM 326; DI 8 x NAMUR (as of article number 6ES7326-1RF00-0AB0) SM 326; DO 10 x DC 24V/2A (article number 6ES7326-2BF01-0AB0) and SM 336; AI 6 x 13Bit (article number 6ES7336-1HE00-0AB0) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 56 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.4 Configuring F-I/O the "Group diagnostics" parameter enables and disables the monitoring of channel-specific diagnostic messages of F-SMs (such as wire break and short-circuit) to the F-CPU. You should disable group diagnostics for unused input or output channels. WARNING (S7-300, S7-400) For the following S7-300 fail-safe signal modules (F-SMs) with activated safety mode, "Group diagnostics" must be enabled for all connected channels: * SM 326; DI 8 x NAMUR (as of article number 6ES7326-1RF00-0AB0) * SM 326; DO 10 x DC 24V/2A (article number 6ES7326-2BF01-0AB0) * SM 336; AI 6 x 13 Bit (article number 6ES7336-1HE00-0AB0) Check to verify that you have only disabled group diagnostics for these F-SMs for input and output channels that are actually unused. (S003) Diagnostic interrupts can be enabled optionally. Additional information For detailed description of the parameters, refer to the help on the properties of the respective F-I/O and in the respective manual for the F-I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 57 Configuring 2.5 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os 2.5 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os For configuration control (option handling) with F-I/Os proceed as with the standard I/O devices. Detailed information can be obtained by searching for "Configuration control (option handling)" in the help of STEP 7. The following section describes what you have to observe additionally for F-I/Os. Requirement The requirements that are specified under "Configuration control (option handling)" in the help of STEP 7 are fulfilled. The requirements that are specified under "Configuration control (option handling)" in the help of STEP 7 are fulfilled. Handle the F-I/O as standard I/O. V2.1. is set as a safety system version. The F-I/Os for which you use the configuration control (option handling) are located - Distributed at an F-CPU S7-300/400/1200/1500 - Centrally at an F-CPU S7-1500 The PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os are set or assigned. Note The assignment of the PROFIsafe addresses (Page 72) is only possible if the maximum configuration actually exists. Procedure (F-CPU S7-1200/1500) Deactivate the F-I/Os not existing in the respective variant (option) by setting the DISABLE (Page 170) variable in the associated F-I/O DB (Page 165) to "1". This prevents the flashing of the error LED of the F-CPU and diagnostic entries of the safety program that reference these F-I/Os. With the DISABLED (Page 171) variable of the associated F-IO data block, you can evaluate whether an F-module is deactivated. (F-CPU S7-300/400) In order to prevent the flashing of the error LEDs of the F-CPUs you do have to observe anything further. You cannot suppress diagnostics entries. WARNING If configuration control is used, your actual configuration deviates from the configured maximum configuration. You identify F-I/Os that do not exist in the current variant (station option) via control record as "not available". If an F-I/O marked as "not available" is possibly nevertheless in the real structure, it has to be ensured that substitute values (0) are provided for these F-I/Os in the safety program or output at the outputs. This is achieved by setting the DISABLE variable (S7-1200/1500) or respectively PASS_ON variable (S7-300/400) in the associated F-I/O DB to "1". (S077) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 58 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.5 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os 2.5.1 Example Introduction The following example shows how you to Select/detect a station option Disable F-I/Os that are not present in a station option (S7-1200/1500) Provide your safety program for various station options Safe selection/detection of the station option You carry out a safe selection/detection of a station option with inputs of an F-I/O wired fixed to M/L+. For example, you can select up to 4 station options with 2 inputs of an F-I/O. Option OptionSelection_Bit_0 OptionSelection_Bit_1 Q 0 0 B 0 1 C 1 0 D 1 1 Note when detecting the station option that substitute values (0) are used for the inputs of the F-I/O in certain situations, e.g. during startup of the F-system or when F-I/O channel errors occur. In these situations, the present station option cannot be detected. You should therefore also evaluate the value status of inputs and only apply the station option one-time after startup of the F-system. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 59 Configuring 2.5 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os For one-time recognition of the station option, define a static local datum, for example, OptionSelectionRuns with default value "TRUE". Correspondingly for options C and D. As soon as a station option is detected, reset the static local datum for one-time detection of the station option: Note When you make the selection/detection of a station option only in the standard user program, only the "Station option" is available to you as a standard datum that is not secured. Make sure that no dangerous states arise from this. Read the section "Data exchange between standard user program and safety program (Page 195)". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 60 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.5 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os Disabling F-I/Os that are not present in a station option If one or more F-I/Os are not present in a station option, you can prevent the blinking of the error LED of the F-CPU by disabling these F-I/Os. In addition, diagnostic messages of the safety program that refer to these F-I/Os are suppressed. Note As long as the detection of the station option (during startup of the F-system) is not yet complete (OptionSelectionRuns = TRUE), you should disable all "optional" F-I/O devices. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 61 Configuring 2.5 Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os Providing the safety program for various station options In the following example, the EMERGENCY STOP signals of different plant units or machines are combined into a collective EMERGENCY STOP signal. Machines I and III and the corresponding F-I/O with the EMERGENCY STOP signal for machines I and III are not present with station option A. Machine II and the corresponding F-I/O with the EMERGENCY STOP signal for machine II is not present with station option B. The substitute values (0) are therefore used in the safety program for the EMERGENCY STOP signals from the respective unavailable machines. In order to prevent the collective EMERGENCY STOP from being triggered because machines / EMERGENCY STOP signals are not present with certain station options, you can suppress the evaluation of the EMERGENCY STOP signal for unavailable machines by taking into account the present station option. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 62 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.6 Configuring shared device 2.6 Configuring shared device To configure shared devices follow the procedure as in the standard. The configuration is described in the STEP 7 help under "Configuring shared devices". F-destination addresses Please also read the chapter "Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65)" for assigning the F-destination address. See also Assign PROFIsafe address to an F-module (Page 75) 2.7 Configuring isochronous mode (S7-1500) To configure isochronous mode for F-I/Os that support this mode, e.g. "Profisafe Telgr 902" submodule of the SINAMICS S120 CU310-2 PN V5.1 drive, proceed as in the standard. The configuration is described in the STEP 7 help under "Configuring isochronous mode". Note the following: Contrary to F-I/O operated in non-isochronous mode, you need to selected a process image partition, such as PIP 1 for F-I/O that is operated in isochronous mode. This process image partition must contain only F-I/O operated in isochronous mode and no standard I/O. The assigned isochronous mode interrupt OB must first be generated as F-OB by specifying a F-runtime group (see Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 137)). It is not possible to add an F-OB with event class "Synchronous Cycle" directly during the configuration of the isochronous mode. Requirement F-CPUs S7-1500 as of firmware version 2.0, with IRT support. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 63 Configuring 2.7 Configuring isochronous mode (S7-1500) Connection of F-I/O operated in isochronous mode to the isochronous mode interrupt OB You access F-I/O operated in isochronous mode in the same way as you do standard I/O operated in isochronous mode, via the select process image partition. Contrary to standard I/O that is operated in isochronous mode, the process image partition is updated by the F-system at the beginning or end of the F-OB (see Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 114)). No calling of the instructions SYNC_PI and SYNC_PO is required in the F-OB. Note With isochronously operated F-I/O, it is not ensured (fail-safe) that all input data of the F-I/Os assigned to the process image partition are consistently available at the beginning of the main safety block or all output data is transferred consistently to the F-I/Os, in other words, logically and temporally together. The consistency is only ensured within an F-I/O. The consistency of all isochronous F-I/Os of the process image partition usually depends on the number of isochronous F-I/Os and the scope of the safety program in the isochronous mode interrupt OB. If there are corresponding consistency requirements, you must check the consistency of the input and output data yourself. You can do this, for example, by additionally transferring and evaluating time stamps in the input and output data of the isochronous F-I/Os. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 64 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.8 Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment 2.8 Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment Before inserting the F-I/O, specify an address range for each F-CPU for the F-destination addresses of the F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 (Page 68) that does not overlap with the address range of any other F-CPU network-wide or CPU-wide (system-wide). You define the range for F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 with the parameters "Low limit for F-destination addresses" and "High limit for F-destination addresses" (see also section Configuring an F-CPU (Page 48)). The F-destination addresses of F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70) must not overlap with any address range of the F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1. The ranges of the F-destination addresses of the F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 may overlap if the F-source addresses are different. This is the case for supported configurations (Page 66) if the "Central F-source address" parameter has been set differently for each F-CPU. Assign relatively low F-destination addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 and relatively high F-destination addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2. Figure 2-1 Address assignment for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address types 1 and 2 The safety summary (Page 364) lists the following information for each F-CPU: "Central F-source address" parameter (F-source address for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2) Actually used range of the F-destination addresses of the assigned F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 Actually used range of the F-destination addresses of the assigned F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 Any F-I/O configured using I-slave-slave communication is taken into consideration in the safety summary as part of the F-destination address range of the I-slave. Any F-I/O configured in a shared device is taken is specified in the safety summary as part of the F-destination address range of the F-CPU to which this F-I/O is assigned. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 65 Configuring 2.9 Configurations supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system 2.9 Configurations supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system Supported configurations F-I/Os (see Overview of Configuration (Page 43)) are supported in the following configurations: central configuration (also I-slave): The F-I/O is in the same rack as the associated F-CPU. The F-I/O is located in a subrack of the rack of the associated F-CPU. distributed configuration (at integrated DP-/PN interface of the CPU or at CP/CM): PROFIBUS (also after IE/PB link) - The F-I/O is located on a DP Slave. - The F-I/O is located on a DP Slave and is addressed via I-slave-slave communication. The assigned DP master (of the assigned IO controller of the IE/PB link) can be a standard CPU or an F-CPU. PROFINET IO - The F-I/O is located on an IO Device. - The F-I/O is located in a shared device. For F-I/O not listed in "Overview of Configuration (Page 43)", please check the relevant documentation to see whether it is supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system. If in doubt, treat these F-I/Os as part of a configuration that is not supported. Checks performed by the SIMATIC Safety F-system For supported configuration, the F-system checks: Whether the PROFIsafe operating mode parameter (F_Par_Version) is set to V2 mode in the PROFINET IO environment**. Whether the F-destination addresses have been assigned uniquely CPU-wide. You yourself must ensure the network-wide uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address. Whether the F-source address for the F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 corresponds to the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 66 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.10 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 WARNING Please note the following with configurations that are not included in supported configurations: * Make sure that the F-I/O of this configuration appears in the safety summary and that an F-I/O DB has been created for it. Otherwise, you cannot use the F-I/O in this configuration. (Contact Customer Support.) * For F-I/Os in the PROFINET IO environment**, you must check the PROFIsafe operating mode parameter (F_Par_Version) against the safety summary to make sure that it is correct. V2 mode must be set in the PROFINET IO environment. F-I/O which only support V1 mode may not be used in the PROFINET IO environment. * You must ensure that PROFIsafe address assignment is unique CPU-wide* and network-wide***: - Check the correctness of the PROFIsafe addresses with the help of the safety summary. - Use the safety summary to check that the F-source address corresponds to the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2. - For F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 or if you cannot set the F-source address in accordance with the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU, you will have to ensure the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address solely by assigning a unique F-destination address. You must check the uniqueness of the F-destination address individually for each F-I/O based on the safety summary in a configuration that is not supported. (see Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration (Page 368)) (S050) * "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. ** The F-I/O is located in the "PROFINET IO environment" if at least part of safety-related communication with the F-CPU takes place via PROFINET IO. If the F-I/O is connected via I-slave-slave communication, also keep in mind the communication line to the DP master/IO controller. *** A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 67 Configuring 2.10 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 2.10 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 F-destination address The uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address is ensured solely with the F-destination address. The F-source address is not displayed and has no effect on whether or not the PROFIsafe address is unique. Therefore, the F-destination address must be unique network-wide and CPU-wide (see the following rules for address assignment). To prevent incorrect parameter assignment, an F-destination address which is unique CPUwide is automatically assigned during placement of the F-I/O in the work area of the device or network view as long as you only configure supported configurations (Page 66). To ensure a network-wide unique F-destination address assignment when multiple DP master systems and PROFINET IO systems are operated on one network, you must set the "Low limit for F-destination addresses" and "High limit for F-destination addresses" in the properties of the F-CPU in SIMATIC Safety F-systems appropriately, before placing the F-I/O (see section "Recommendations for address assignment") so that the F-destination address ranges do not overlap. When you change the F-destination address of an F-I/O, the CPU-wide uniqueness of the F-destination address is checked automatically for supported configurations. You yourself must ensure the network-wide uniqueness of the F-destination address. For ET 200S, ET 200eco (PROFIBUS), ET 200pro, ET 200iSP F-modules and S7-300 F-SMs: You must set the F-destination address at the F-I/O with the DIP switch before you install the F-I/O. You can assign up to 1022 different F-destination addresses. Note (S7-300, S7-400) For the following fail-safe S7-300 signal modules, the F-destination address is the start address of the F-SM divided by 8: * SM 326; DI 8 x NAMUR (as of article number 6ES7326-1RF00-0AB0) * SM 326; DO 10 x DC 24V/2A (article number 6ES7326-2BF01-0AB0) * SM 336; AI 6 x 13 Bit (article number 6ES7336-1HE00-0AB0) You can show the columns "F-source address" and "F-destination address" in the device view of the device overview. The addresses displayed in these columns are for information purposes only. You have to check the F-destination addresses in the safety summary when you accept the system. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 68 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.10 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 Rules for address assignment WARNING F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 are uniquely addressed by their F-destination address (e.g. with the switch setting on the address switch). The F-destination address (and therefore also the switch setting on the address switch) of the F-I/O must be unique network-wide* and CPU-wide** (system-wide) for the entire F-I/O. The F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 must also be considered. (S051) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the FCPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. Please also note Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65). See also Completeness of the safety summary (Page 364) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 69 Configuring 2.11 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 2.11 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 F-source address and F-destination address The uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address is ensured by the combination of F-source address and F-destination address. The PROFIsafe address must be unique network-wide and CPU-wide. This is the case if the following two conditions are met: The F-source address ("Central F-source address" parameter) of the F-CPU is unique network-wide. Keep this in mind for changes. The F-destination address of the F-module is unique CPU-wide. You define the F-source address using the "Central F-source address" parameter in the FCPU. Provided you only configure supported configurations (Page 66), this parameter is automatically applied as the F-source address and a CPU-wide unique F-destination address is assigned (usually in descending order starting with 65534). When you change the F-destination address, the CPU-wide uniqueness of the F-destination address is checked automatically for supported configurations. You must assign the F-source address and F-destination address to the F-I/O before you commission the F-I/O. You can find additional information in Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety (Page 72). You can show the columns "F-source address" and "F-destination address" in the device view of the device overview. The addresses displayed in these columns are for information purposes only. You have to check the F-source and F-destination addresses in the safety summary when you accept the system. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 70 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.11 PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 Rules for address assignment WARNING FI/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 is uniquely addressed using a combination of F-source address ("Central F-source address" parameter of the assigned F-CPU) and F-destination address. The combination of F-source address and F-destination address for each F-I/O must be unique network-wide* and CPU-wide** (system-wide). In addition, the F-destination address may not be occupied by F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1. To ensure that addresses are unique across F-CPUs for supported configurations (Page 66), you need to ensure that the "Central F-source address" parameter of all F-CPUs is unique network-wide*. This is achieved through different settings for the "Central Fsource address" parameter of the F-CPUs. (S052) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the FCPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. Please also note Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65). See also Completeness of the safety summary (Page 364) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 71 Configuring 2.12 Setting the F-destination address for F-I/O with DIP switches 2.12 Setting the F-destination address for F-I/O with DIP switches Information on how to set the F-destination address for F-I/O with DIP switches is available in the documentation of the respective F-I/O. 2.13 Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety Introduction Fail-safe ET 200SP modules, fail-safe S7-1500/ET 200MP modules, fail-safe ET 200eco PN I/O modules and fail-safe S7-1200 modules do not have a DIP switch with which you set the unique F-destination address for each module. Instead, you assign the PROFIsafe address (Page 66) consisting of F-source address and F-destination address directly from STEP 7 Safety for fail-safe ET 200SP modules, fail-safe ET 200eco PN I/O modules and fail-safe S71500/ET 200MP modules. The PROFIsafe addresses for S7-1200 F-modules are automatically assigned during download of the hardware configuration. In the following cases it is necessary to reassign the addresses of the fail-safe ET 200SP, fail-safe ET 200eco PN I/O modules and fail-safe S7-1500/ET 200MP modules: Later placement of a fail-safe module during initial commissioning (not for ET 200eco PN) Intentional modification of the F-destination address Modification of the "Central F-source address" parameter for the associated F-CPU (changes the F-source address). Replacement of the coding element Commissioning of a mass-produced machine In the following cases it is not necessary to reassign the addresses of the fail-safe ET 200SP and fail-safe S7-1500/ET 200MP modules: Power On/Off Replacement of an F-module (repair) without PG/PC Replacement of the BaseUnit (transferring the coding element with assigned F-source address and F-destination address to the new BaseUnit) Replacement of a BaseUnit without coding element Changes in the design in case a new BaseUnit is inserted in front of a fail-safe module Repair/replacement of the interface module Reassignment is not required for fail-safe ET 200eco PN I/O modules in the following cases: Power On/Off Replacement of the compact device (transferring the coding element with assigned Fsource address and F-destination address to the new compact device) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 72 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.13 Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety Basic procedure Note Assigning the PROFIsafe address for S7-1200 fail-safe modules The procedure described below for identifying and assigning the PROFIsafe addresses is not required for S7-1200 fail-safe modules. Note that an S7-1200 F-CPU must not include an additional unconfigured F-module. 1. Configure the F-destination address (Page 70) and F-source address (Page 70) in the hardware configuration in STEP 7 Safety. 2. Identify the ET 200SP, S7-1500/ET 200MP or the ET 200eco PN fail-safe I/O modules to which you want to assign the configured PROFIsafe addresses. 3. Assign the PROFIsafe address to the F-modules. 2.13.1 Identifying F-modules Requirement The following requirements must be met: The F-CPU and fail-safe modules are configured. The hardware configuration has been downloaded. When using an ET 200SP Open Controller, the hardware configuration of the ET 200SP Open Controller and of the fail-safe software controller must be downloaded. The F-CPU and fail-safe modules can be reached online. WARNING Make sure that the latest hardware configuration has been downloaded to the F-CPU before identification. Clicking "Identification" confirms the fail-safe correctness of the PROFIsafe addresses for the fail-safe modules. Therefore, proceed carefully when confirming the F-modules by LED flashing or the serial number of the F-CPU with central fail-safe modules or the serial number of the interface module with fail-safe modules. An assignment of the PROFIsafe addresses with the serial number of the interface module is only permitted when the assignment is made for all F-I/Os of a station. When selecting individual F-I/Os, the flashing of each individual F-I/O must be checked and confirmed. (S046) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 73 Configuring 2.13 Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety Procedure Proceed as follows to identify the F-modules: 1. Establish an online connection to the F-CPU with which the fail-safe modules are operated. 2. In the network view, select the F-CPU with fail-safe modules or the interface module with the fail-safe modules to which you want to assign the PROFIsafe address. 3. Select "Assign PROFIsafe address" from the shortcut menu. 4. Under "Assign PROFIsafe address by", select the method to be used for identifying the Fmodules. - "Identification by LED flashing" This is the default setting. The DIAG and STATUS LEDs of the F-modules to be identified flash upon identification. - "Identification by serial number" If you cannot see the fail-safe modules directly, you can identify the fail-safe modules by the serial number of the F-CPU or interface module. Note The displayed serial number may be amended with a year number compared to the serial number printed on the interface module. The serial numbers are nevertheless identical. Note Determining the serial number of an ET 200SP Open Controller When you use the ET 200SP F-modules centrally on an ET 200SP Open Controller and identify them by the serial number, then read the serial number in the display of the fail-safe S7-1500 software controller in the menu "Overview > CPU". 5. In the "Assign" column, select all the F-modules to which you want to assign the PROFIsafe address. If you select the F-CPU or the interface module in the "Assign" column, all F-modules of the station are selected. 6. Click the "Identification" button. Check whether the DIAG and STATUS LEDs for the Fmodules whose PROFIsafe address you want to assign are flashing green. If you identify using the serial number, compare the displayed serial number to the serial number of the F-CPU with central fail-safe modules or the interface module with fail-safe modules. 7. If you have configured more S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules than exist online, a dialog is displayed. Enter the number of S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules actually existing in this dialog and confirm the dialog. If you have configured fewer S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules than exist online, the online-offline difference is shown and the assignment of the PROFIsafe address is not possible. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 74 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.13 Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety 2.13.2 Assign PROFIsafe address Requirement The F-modules have been successfully identified. Procedure To assign a PROFIsafe address, proceed as follows: 1. In the "Confirm" column, select all the fail-safe modules to which you want to assign the F-source address and F-destination address. 2. Use the "Assign PROFIsafe address" button to assign the PROFIsafe address to the failsafe modules. You may have to enter the password of the F-CPU. You must acknowledge the "Acknowledge assignment" dialog within 60 seconds to assign the PROFIsafe address. 2.13.3 Assign PROFIsafe address to an F-module Introduction In the "Assign PROFIsafe address" dialog only the F-modules which are assigned to an FCPU of this project are offered, as the PROFIsafe address of an F-module in a shared device can only be assigned from a project in which the F-CPU to which the F-modules are assigned is located. Requirement Requirement for assignment of the PROFIsafe address is that you have downloaded the hardware configuration completely to the F-CPU. When you have assigned the F-modules in a shared device to multiple F-CPUs, you must first download the hardware configuration of all F-CPUs involved before you assign the PROFIsafe addresses. Note the following for the assignment: If the corresponding interface module is not assigned to the corresponding CPU, the programming device and shared device must be located in the same subnet. Otherwise, follow the procedure as described in the sections Identifying F-modules (Page 73) and Assign PROFIsafe address (Page 75). See also Configuring shared device (Page 63) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 75 Configuring 2.13 Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety 2.13.4 Changing the PROFIsafe address Changing the PROFIsafe address Note Keep in mind that after changing the PROFIsafe address of an F-I/O you must also conduct an acceptance (Page 368) including check of your change (Page 378) per safety summary (Page 341). 1. You change the PROFIsafe address (F-destination address, F-source address) in the hardware configuration. 2. Compile the hardware configuration. 3. Download the hardware configuration to the F-CPU. 4. Select "Assign PROFIsafe address" from the shortcut menu. 5. Proceed as described under Identifying F-modules (Page 73) and Assign PROFIsafe address (Page 75). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 76 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.14 Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices 2.14 Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices Requirement In order to use fail-safe GSD based DP slaves for SIMATIC Safety, these GSD based slaves must be operated on PROFIBUS DP and support the PROFIsafe bus profile. When used in an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU, they must support the PROFIsafe bus profile in V2 mode. Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves used in hybrid configurations on PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO downstream from a IE/PB link must support the PROFIsafe bus profile in V2 mode. In order to use fail-safe GSD based I/O devices for SIMATIC Safety, the GSD based devices must be operated on PROFINET IO and support the PROFIsafe bus profile in V2 mode. Configuration with GSD files As is the case in a standard system, the basis for configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/IO devices is the device specification in the GSD file (device master file). A GSD file contains all of the properties of a GSD based DP slave or GSD based I/O device. For fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices, certain parts are protected by a CRC. The GSD files are supplied by the device manufacturers. Protection of the data structure of the device in GSD files The only GSD files supported are those that satisfy the requirements for protection defined as of PROFIsafe Specification V2.0 using a CRC stored in this file ("desired value" for F_IO_StructureDescCRC). The data structure described in the GSD file is checked when the F-I/O is added to the hardware configuration and when the hardware configuration is compiled. When an error is detected, you should clarify whether the GSD file provided by the device manufacturer contains the desired value for F_IO_StructureDescCRC. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 77 Configuring 2.14 Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices Assignment and setting of the PROFIsafe address WARNING Check the documentation for your fail-safe GSD based DP slaves / GSD based I/O devices to find out the valid PROFIsafe address type. If you do not find the necessary information, assume PROFIsafe address type 1. Proceed as described under PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 (Page 68) or PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70). Set the F-source address for fail-safe DP standard slaves / fail-safe I/O standard devices according to the manufacturer's specifications. If the F-source address needs to correspond to the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU (PROFIsafe address type 2), you will find the latter in the "Properties" tab of the F-CPU. In this case, also check in the safety summary that the value of the F-CPU for the "Central F-source address" parameter matches the value of the F-source address of the fail-safe GSD based DP slave / fail-safe GSD based I/O device. (S053) Configuration procedure with GSD files You import the GSD files to your project (see Help on STEP 7 "GSD files"). 1. Select the fail-safe GSD based DP slave / GSD based I/O device in the "Hardware catalog" task card and connect it to the relevant subnet in the network view. 2. Select the fail-safe GSD based DP slave/GSD based I/O device and insert the necessary F-modules, if this does not occur automatically. 3. Select the relevant F-module and open the "Properties" tab in the inspector window. For fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices (contrary to other F-I/O), the "Manual assignment of the F-monitoring time" parameter is enabled. The result is that the value specified in the GSD file for the F-monitoring time is used as default value when the slaves/devices are plugged. You can change both values (time and type of assignment) later manually. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 78 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Configuring 2.14 Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices F-parameter "F_CRC_Seed" and "F_Passivation" for fail-safe GSD based I/O devices The F-parameters "F_CRC_Seed" and "F_Passivation" influence the behavior of a fail-safe GSD based I/O device. The combination of the F-parameters cannot be set but is specified by selecting a corresponding F-module. Up to three F-module variants can be used, depending on the S7-300/400 or S7-1200/1500 F-CPU used. F-module variant F_CRC_Seed F_Passivation Behavior of the fail-safe GSD based I/O device Can be used with F-CPU 1 Parameter does not exist Parameter does not exist The GSD based I/O device works with the Basic Protocol (BP) from PROFIsafe. S7300/400/1200/1500* The "RIOforFA-Safety" profile is not supported. 2 CRC-Seed24/32 Device/module The GSD based I/O device works with the Expanded Protocol (XP) from PROFIsafe. S7-1200/1500 The "RIOforFA-Safety" profile is not supported. 3 CRC-Seed24/32 Channel The GSD based I/O device works with the Expanded Protocol (XP) from PROFIsafe. S7-1200/1500 The "RIOforFA-Safety" profile is supported. * Only use the F-module variant 1 with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs if neither F-module variant 2 nor 3 exists. Additional information You can find the description of the parameters in the Help on fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and GSD based I/O devices. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 79 Safety Administration Editor 3 Overview The Safety Administration Editor supports you as follows: Displaying of status of the safety program Displaying of collective F-signature (S7-1200, S7-1500) F-SW collective signature (S7-1200, S7-1500) F-HW collective signature Displaying of status of safety mode Creating and organizing of F-runtime groups Displaying information on the F-blocks Displaying information about F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) Information for users with F-Admin permission Specifying/changing access protection Set/modify settings for the safety program, e.g. Enable F-change history (S7-1200, S7-1500) Create/display/delete F-communications via flexible F-Link SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 81 Safety Administration Editor The Safety Administration Editor is divided into the following areas: General Under "General", the status of the safety mode, the safety program, the F-collective signature and for F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 the F-SW collective signature and the F-HW collective signature are displayed. Additional information on the "General" area can be obtained in ""General" area (Page 83)". F-runtime group You define the blocks and properties of an F-runtime under "F-runtime group". You can find information on F-runtime groups at ""F-runtime group" area (Page 86)". F-blocks Under "F-blocks", you can find information on the F-blocks used in your safety program and their properties . Additional information on the "F-blocks" area can be obtained in ""F-blocks" area (Page 88)". F-compliant PLC data types Under "F-compliant PLC data types", you obtain information on the created F-compliant PLC data types (UDT). There you also obtain information whether or not an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) is used in the safety program. Additional information on "F-compliant PLC data types" can be found in ""F-compliant PLC data types" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 89)". Access protection Under "Access protection", you can set up, change, or revoke the password for the safety program. Access protection is mandatory for productive operation. Additional information on access protection can be found in "Access protection for the safety program (Page 103)". Web server F-Admins Under "Web server F-admins", you obtain information on users with the F-Admin attribute for the Web server of the F-CPU. Additional information on the "Web server F-Admins" area can be obtained in ""Web server F-Admins" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 90)". Settings Under "Settings", you set the parameters for the safety program. Information on the settings for your safety program can be found in ""Settings" area (Page 90)". Flexible F-Link In the "Flexible F-Link" area, you receive information about the configured F-communications via Flexible F-Links in tabular form. You can obtain information at ""Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 96)". See also Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 114) Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 111) Defining F-Runtime Groups (Page 132) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 82 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.1 Opening the Safety Administration Editor 3.1 Opening the Safety Administration Editor Requirement The Safety Administration Editor is visible as an element in the project tree, if you have configured a CPU as an F-CPU in the project, which means the "F-capability activated" option must be selected (in the properties of the F-CPU). Procedure To open the Safety Administration Editor, follow these steps: 1. Open the folder for your F-CPU in the project tree. 2. Double-click on "Safety administration" or right-click and select the corresponding shortcut menu for the Safety Administration Editor. Result The Safety Administration Editor for your F-CPU opens in the work area. 3.2 "General" area "Safety mode status" The "Safety mode status" shows the current status of safety mode. The prerequisite is an existing online connection to the selected F-CPU. The following statuses are possible: "Safety mode is activated" "The safety mode is not activated" "F-CPU is in STOP" "No active F-CPU available" "F-runtime group was not called" "The safety program is not called" "(No online connection)" "Disable safety mode" For existing online connection and active safety mode operation, you have the option of using the "Disable safety mode" button to disable safety mode for the selected F-CPU. Safety mode can be deactivated only for the entire safety program and not for individual Fruntime groups. Requirement: "Safety mode can be disabled" is selected in the "Settings" area. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 83 Safety Administration Editor 3.2 "General" area Proceed as follows: 1. Click the "Disable safety mode" button. 2. Enter the password for the safety program in the dialog window and confirm with "OK". 3. A corresponding dialog will display the collective F-signature. 4. Using the displayed collective F-signature, verify that you have selected the desired FCPU. 5. If you have selected the correct F-CPU, confirm the dialog with "Yes". Result: Safety mode for the F-CPU is disabled. "Safety program status" "Safety program status" displays the current status of your online and offline program. The following statuses are possible: Consistent (with information if no password has been assigned.) Inconsistent Modified If no connection to the online program could been established, the message "(no online connection) " will be shown. "F-signatures" For a non-existing online connection Under "F-signatures" multiple signatures are displayed. Each signature is formed from different parts of the fail-safe project data. F-collective signature: This signature changes with each change of the fail-safe project data. It contains the signatures described below. F-SW collective signature (S7-1200/1500): This signature changes with each change of the safety program. F-HW collective signature (S7-1200/1500): This signature changes with each change of the fail-safe HW configuration. F-communication address signature (S7-1200/1500): This signature changes with each change of the name or the F-communication UUID of communication connections with flexible F-link. The time of the last compilation process is displayed for the F-collective signature in the "Time stamp" column. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 84 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.2 "General" area For an existing online connection For an existing online connection, the following is displayed under the "Program signature": The status of safety program Status Meaning The online and offline collective F-signatures match, and a password was assigned for the online and offline safety programs. The online and offline collective F-signatures do not match or no password was assigned for one of the safety programs. -- The safety program status could not be determined. The online and offline collective F-signatures When the collective F-signatures match: Information on whether the F-block versions are consistent online and offline. Status Version comparison Statement Not relevant The online and offline collective F-signatures do not match one another. The online and offline collective F-signatures match, but the online versions of F-blocks differ from the offline versions. The online and offline F-collective signatures match, identical versions of F-blocks are being used online and offline. Not relevant -- The safety system versions could not be determined. You can find additional information on the consistency of the online safety program at under Identity of online and offline program (Page 375). See also Disabling safety mode (Page 344) Program identification (Page 337) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 85 Safety Administration Editor 3.3 "F-runtime group" area 3.3 "F-runtime group" area 3.3.1 "F-runtime group" area A safety program consists of one or two F-runtime groups. General information on F-runtime groups can be found in "Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 111)" and "Program structure of the safety program (S71200, S7-1500) (Page 114)". You can find information on creating F-runtime groups at Defining F-Runtime Groups (Page 132) (S7-1200, S7-1500) "Creating a global F-I/O status block" You can create a standard block (FB) with the name "RTGx_GLOB_FIO_STATUS", which evaluates whether substitute values are output instead of process values for at least one FI/O or at least one channel of an F-I/O of an F-runtime group x. The result of the evaluation is available at the "QSTATUS" output. The F-O that you have disabled with the DISABLE variable in the F-I/O DB are then ignored. The "RIOforFA_VALUE_STATUS" output corresponds to the "QSTATUS" output, but only takes F-I/Os into account with the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. To generate this standard FB, you use the "Create global F-I/O status block" button. You can only create the standard FB when your safety program has been compiled. You can call the standard FB anywhere in your standard user program. Note When adding or deleting an F-I/O, you have to generate "RTGx_GLOB_FIO_STATUS" again. See also Process Data or Fail-Safe Values (Page 162) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 86 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.3 "F-runtime group" area 3.3.2 Pre-/postprocessing (S7-1200, S7-1500) With preprocessing and postprocessing you have the option of calling standard blocks (FCs) directly before or after an F-runtime group, for example for data transfer with fail-safe communication via Flexible F-Link (Page 262). Requirement Only standard-FCs usable. Only temporary local data and constants are permitted in the block interface of a standard-FC. Procedure 1. Create the standard-FCs for the preprocessing and the postprocessing. 2. Assign the standard-FCs in the Safety Administration Editor under "Pre-/postprocessing of the F-runtime group". Note When you delete an assigned FC or overwrite it by copying, its selection as a preprocessing / post-processing block is automatically reset. Effect on the safety program The runtime of the F-runtime group is extended by the runtime of the standard FCs for pre-/postprocessing (influence on TRTG_CURR and TRTG_LONG in the F-runtime group information DB). Because the preprocessing / postprocessing does not change the functionality of the safety program, the F-collective signature remains unchanged after compilation. Load behavior The calls of the selected standard FCs are placed during compiling or after the call of the main safety block in the F-OB. This means that the STOP operating state is required during a subsequent download. Changes in the contents at the selected standard FCs can take place in RUN. Exceptions are changes of the block name and block numbers which also include the compilation of the safety program. When a preprocessing/postprocessing block is uploaded individually by the F-CPU, it does not automatically connect to the F-runtime group in the Safety Administration Editor. If consistent loading of the F-CPU is performed instead, the settings for preprocessing and postprocessing are updated according to the online CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 87 Safety Administration Editor 3.4 "F-blocks" area 3.4 "F-blocks" area Overview The "F-Blocks" area helps you in the following tasks: Displaying the F-blocks used in your safety programs. Displaying the F-blocks used in the F-runtime groups. Displaying additional information about the F-blocks. A description of the F-blocks is available in "Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD (Page 151)". Displayed information The following information is displayed for F-blocks in offline mode: Has the F-block been compiled and used? Function of F-block in the safety program Block signature Time stamp of the last change The following information is displayed for F-blocks in online mode: Status (whether block has the same time stamp online and offline) Function of F-block in the safety program Block signature of the block offline Block signature of the block online The F-blocks are hierarchically displayed as in the "Program blocks" folder. The description of the symbols in the "Status" column can be found in "Comparing Safety Programs (Page 339)". Note During the offline-online comparison, the comparison statuses may occasionally differ between the comparison editor and status display in the Safety Administration Editor. The decisive status is the result of the comparison in the comparison editor, since this is the only comparison that takes into account the contents of the F-blocks. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 88 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.5 "F-compliant PLC data types" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) Filter function Using the filter function, you can select whether you want to view all F-blocks of a certain Fruntime group or the entire safety program. Select "All F-blocks " from the drop-down list to view all F-blocks. Select an F-runtime group from the drop-down list to see all F-blocks of this F-runtime group. 3.5 "F-compliant PLC data types" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) Overview Under "F-compliant PLC Data Types" you obtain information on the F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) you have defined. You can delete F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) from the shortcut menu. A description of F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) is available in "F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 126)". Displayed information The following information is displayed for F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) in offline mode: Is the F-compliant PLC data type used in the safety program? Time stamp of the last change. The following information is displayed for F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) in online mode: Status (whether the F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) have the same time stamp online and offline) The F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) are displayed hierarchically as in the folder "PLC Data Types". Double-click the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) to open it for editing. The description of the symbols in the "Status" column can be found in "Comparing Safety Programs (Page 339)". Note During offline-online comparison, the comparison statuses between the comparison editor and status display in the Safety Administration Editor can be different under certain circumstances. The comparison result in the comparison editor is decisive, since this is the only comparison that takes into account the contents of the F-compliant PLC data types (UDT). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 89 Safety Administration Editor 3.6 "Web server F-Admins" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) 3.6 "Web server F-Admins" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) You require the "F-admin" right in order to carry out restoration of a backup (Page 328) via the Web server of your F-CPU. You assign the "F-admin" right in the hardware configuration of the F-CPU under the user management of the Web server. In this section, you obtain information on which users have the "F-admin" right online or offline for F-CPUs that support this right. You can see from this whether a change to the "F-admin" right is active on the F-CPU. In order to make a change to the "F-admin" right effective, you have to load the configuration to the F-CPU. See also Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration (Page 368) 3.7 "Settings" area "Number ranges of the generated F-system blocks" The number ranges assigned here are used by the F-System for new, automatically generated F-blocks. At this point, you can select whether the number ranges are managed by the F-system or if a fixed range specified by you is used. "F-system managed" The number ranges are managed automatically by the F-system, depending on the F-CPU used. The F-system selects an available number range. The start and end ranges of the number ranges are displayed. "Fixed range" You can select the start and end ranges of the number ranges from the available range. The available range depends on the F-CPU used. An invalid number range selection is indicated by an error message. The only check performed during configuration is whether the configured low limit is less than or equal to the high limit and within the available range of the F-CPU. The check as to whether the configured range is sufficient is first made during compiling. You need to ensure a sufficiently large range. Where the available range is insufficient, a compiling error occurs. Not all blocks are generated and the safety program is not executable. Changes will become valid only during the next compilation. The automatically created Fblocks may be moved into the new area during compilation. The F-I/O DBs are an exception. They always retain their original number that you may change in the properties of the F-I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 90 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.7 "Settings" area "Safety system version" This parameter is used to specify the safety system version (including version of the F-system blocks and automatically generated F-blocks, see Overview of Programming (Page 111)). A number of versions are available: Version3 S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.6 -- x x These versions have identical functions. 2.0 x x1 x2 Depending on the set version, the result may be different runtimes of the F-runtime group(s) (see Excel file for response time calculation on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100 )). 2.1 -- x1 x2 Additionally supports the variables "DISABLE" and "DISABLED" in the F-I/O DB 2.2 -- x1 x2 Supports the safety-related CPU-CPU communication and F-runtime group communication with Flexible F-Link. 1 supported for Firmware version V4.2 or higher 2 supported for Firmware version V2.0 or higher 3 After the migration of projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5, version 1.0 is set automatically in order to identify migrated projects which have not yet been compiled with STEP 7 Safety Advanced. Usually, you do not need to make any settings for this parameters. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. "Local data used in safety program" (S7-300, S7-400) You use this parameter to specify the amount of temporary local data (in bytes) that is available for the call hierarchy below the main safety block. The setting applies to each F-runtime group of a safety program. Additional information on F-runtime groups can be found in "Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 114)" and "Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 111)". The minimum possible amount is determined by the local data requirement of the F-blocks generated automatically when the safety program is compiled. For this reason, you must provide at least 440 bytes. However, the local data requirement for the automatically added F-blocks may be higher depending on the local data requirement of the F-blocks you created with FBD or LAD. Therefore, provide as much local data as possible. If there is not enough local data available for the automatically added F-blocks (440 bytes or more), the safety program will be compiled nevertheless. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 91 Safety Administration Editor 3.7 "Settings" area Data in automatically added F-DBs are then used instead of local data. However, this increases the runtime of the F-runtime group(s). You will receive a notice when the automatically added F-blocks require more local data than configured. WARNING The calculated maximum runtime of the F-runtime group using the Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) is no longer correct in this case because the calculation assumes sufficient availability of Flocal data. In this case, use the value you configured for the maximum cycle time of the F-runtime group (F-monitoring time) as the maximum runtime of the F-runtime group when calculating the maximum response times in the event of an error and for any runtimes of the standard system using the above-mentioned Excel file. (S004) The maximum possible amount depends on: Local data requirement of the main safety block and the higher-level standard user program. For this reason, you should call the main safety blocks directly in OBs (cyclic interrupt OBs, whenever possible), and additional local data should not be declared in these cyclic interrupt OBs. Maximum volume of local data of the utilized F-CPU (see Technical Specifications in the product information for the utilized F-CPU). For S7-400 F-CPUs, you can configure the local data for each priority class. Therefore, assign the largest possible local data volume for the priority classes in which the safety program (the main safety blocks) is called (e.g., OB 35). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 92 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.7 "Settings" area Maximum possible amount of local data as a function of local data requirement of main safety block and higher-level standard user program (S7-300, S7-400): Case 1: Main safety block called directly from OBs Set the "Local data used in safety program" parameter to the maximum amount of local data of the utilized F-CPU minus the local data requirement of the main safety block (if the main safety block has 2 F-runtime groups, use the largest local data requirement) and minus the local data requirement of the calling OBx (if there are 2 F-runtime groups, use the OB with the largest local data requirement). Note: If you have not declared any temporary local data in the main safety blocks and calling OBx, the local data requirement of the main safety blocks is 6 bytes and the local data requirement of the calling OBx is 26 bytes. You can derive the local data requirement of the main safety blocks and calling OBx from the program structure. Select the utilized F-CPU in the project tree and then "Tools > Call structure". The table gives the local data requirement in the path or for the individual blocks (see also the help on STEP 7). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 93 Safety Administration Editor 3.7 "Settings" area Case 2: Main safety block not called directly from OBs Set the "Local data settings" parameter to the value calculated for Case 1, minus the local data requirement of standard user program A (if standard user program A has 2 F-runtime groups, use the largest local data requirement). Note: You can derive the local data requirement of the standard user program A from the program structure. Select the utilized F-CPU in the project tree and then "Tools > Call structure". The table gives the local data requirement in the path or for the individual blocks (see also the help on STEP 7). "Advanced settings" "Safety mode can be disabled" If you deselect the "Safety mode can be disabled" option, you can prevent the disabling of safety mode for a safety program. When you change the setting for this option, you need to recompile the safety program and download it to the F-CPU for the change to become effective. This changes the F-collective signature and the F-SW collective signature of your safety program. We recommend that you disable this option before you start production and before acceptance of the safety program to prevent an unintentional disabling of the safety mode. "Enable F-change history" Enable the logging of changes to the safety program by using the "Enable F-change history" option. For more information, refer to the section "F-change history (Page 359)". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 94 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.7 "Settings" area "Enable consistent upload from the F-CPU" (S7-1500) This option allows you to load the loaded project data (including safety-related project data) consistently from the F-CPU. The option can only be activated if the F-CPU and the firmware of the F-CPU supports the loading of the project data (including safety-related project data). F-CPUs S7-1500 as of firmware V2.1 are supported. S7-1500 F Software Controllers are not supported. At every change to this option you have to load the project data to the F-CPU. Note that the activation of this option extends the loading of the safety-related project data into the F-CPU. "Activate variable F-communication- IDs" (S7-1200, S7-1500) If you activate this option, you can supply the DP_DP_ID input of the SENDP or RCVSP instructions with the variable values from a global F-DB. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected**; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply constant values*** to the inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS a network includes all the nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all the nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and, if applicable, RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, no connection is established at the DP_DP_ID input for a F-communication ID "0". *** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, the DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with variable values from a global F-DB. In this case as well you have to check during the acceptance of the safety program that the uniqueness is ensured at every moment, by checking the algorithm for the creation of the variable value accordingly. If you cannot ensure a unique F-communication ID during startup of the safety program, because it is only specified after startup of the safety program, you must ensure that the value at the DP_DP_ID input is "0" during this phase. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 95 Safety Administration Editor 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) "System-generated objects" (S7-1200, S7-1500) "Creates driver I-DBs without prefix" When you select this option, the I-DBs of the F-I/O DBs are created without prefix. Naming scheme: Default: F{logical address(5-digit)}_{module_name} With activated option: {module_name} Uniqueness: The driver I-DB names assigned by the system must not be used for other blocks any longer. A compilation error is output in case of identical block names. If the option is selected, all module names must be unique in their first 124 characters. This is the maximum length of a block name. All additional characters of the module name are cut off. "Debug" The "Debug" button is provided for service and support purposes. 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) In the "Flexible F-Link" area, you create new F-communications, obtain information on existing F-communications and delete F-communications. Requirement S7-1500 F-CPUs as of firmware V2.0 S7-1200 F-CPUs as of firmware V4.2 Safety system version as of V2.2 Information on created F-communications In the "Flexible F-Link" area, you receive information on configured F-communications in tabular form: CPU-wide unique name of F-communication F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) for send/receive data Direction of F-communication: Transmitting/receiving F-monitoring time of F-communication F-Communication UUID Tag for send data Tag for receive data SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 96 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) Creating F-communication 1. In an empty row of the table click "" 2. Assign a name to the communication connection. 3. Select an F-compliant PLC data type (UUID) for the communication connection. If you have not yet created an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) for the communication connection or wish to create a new one, create a new F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) (Page 126) with any structure. Note that the size can be a up to 100 bytes. 4. Select the direction of the communication connection ("Send" or "Receive"). 5. Select the F-monitoring time of the communication connection (Page 608). The UUID of the F-communication is displayed via Flexible F-Link in the "F communication UUID" column. The F-communication UUID ensures sufficient uniqueness of the safetyrelated communication ID even across network limits. The "Tag for send data" column shows you the newly created tag for send data of the F-communication DB. The "Tag for receive data" column shows you the newly created tag for receive data of the F-communication DB. You can find the newly created F-communication DB for this F-communication under "Program blocks\System blocks\STEP 7 Safety\F-communication DBs". Deleting F-communication 1. Select the entire row and confirm "Delete" in the shortcut menu. You can also delete multiple F-communications at the same time. Copying F-communication 1. Select the entire row and confirm "Copy" in the shortcut menu. You can also copy multiple F-communications at the same time. 2. With the "Paste" menu command, you can paste the copied F-communications into the table as often as needed. The UUID for the respective F-communication is retained during copying. If necessary, re-generate the UUID. Generating a new F-communication-UUID 1. Select the entire row and confirm "Generate UUID" in the shortcut menu. You can also generate multiple UUIDs at the same time. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 97 Safety Administration Editor 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) Interface of the F-communication DB for sending The following table shows you the interface of the F-communication DB for the communication connection with the direction "Send": Section Name Data type Initial value Description Input SEND_DATA F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) As in the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT). User data to be sent: ACK_RCV_ARRAY Array[0..n] of Byte Each element with 16#0 Array with the received raw data. ERROR BOOL False Signals currently pending communication errors or communication errors not acknowledged yet at the receiver (not in the initial start). ACTIVATE_FV BOOL True Communication passivated, in the initial start (for example receiver not started), or HOST sends ACTIVATE_FV. DEVICE sends status bit: FV_ACTVATED, but no 0-values. Output 1=Communication error 1=The communication uses failsafe values DIAG Byte 16#0 Error bits (Timeout or CRC error currently still pending, or communication after error not depassivated yet) Bit 3: Acknowledgement request active at the receiver Bit 4: Timeout detected Bit 6: CRC error detected SEND_ARRAY Array[0..n] of Byte Each element with 16#0 Array with the received raw data ACK_RCV_LENGTH UInt 0 Length information to ACK_RCV_ARRAY in bytes SEND_LENGTH UInt 0 Length information to SEND_ARRAY in bytes InOut -- -- -- -- Static -- -- -- -- SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 98 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety Administration Editor 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) Interface of the F-communication DB for receiving The following table shows you the interface of the F-communication DB for the communication connection with the direction "Receive": Section Name Data type Initial value Description Input PASS_ON BOOL False This way you can passivate the output data (output of the passivation values) ACK_REI BOOL False Reintegration (in case of reintegration request) by means of positive edge 1=Enable passivation 1=Acknowledgment for reintegration Output RCV_ARRAY Array[0..n] of Byte Each element with 16#0 Array with the received raw data RCV_DATA F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) As in the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT). Output data (PASS_VALUES or data received). ERROR BOOL False Signals currently pending communication errors or communication errors not acknowledged yet (not in the initial start). 1=Communication error PASS_OUT BOOL True At PASS_OUT=1 the PASS_VALUES are output Could be: ERROR, PASS_ON, in the initial start (e.g. sender not started), or ACK_REQ is pending (error not acknowledged) ACK_REQ BOOL False Reintegration requirement (communication stable again after error, substitute values are still output) 1=Acknowledgment request for reintegration SENDMODE BOOL False MOD_MODE is active or communication with PLCSIM Advanced on the sending F-CPU 1=F-CPU with a sender in the deactivated safety operation or on a simulated CPU SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 99 Safety Administration Editor 3.8 "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) Section Name Data type Initial value Description DIAG Byte 16#0 Error bits (Timeout or CRC error) Bit 0: Timeout detected by the sender Bit 1: Communication error currently pending in the sender Bit 2: CRC error detected by the sender Bit 4: Timeout detected by the receiver Bit 6: CRC error detected by the receiver ACK_SEND_ARRAY Array[0..n] of Byte Each element with 16#0 Array with the raw data to be sent. RCV_LENGTH UInt 0 Length information of RCV_ARRAY in bytes ACK_SEND_LENGTH UInt 0 Length information of ACK_SEND_ARRAY in bytes InOut -- -- -- -- Static PASS_VALUES F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) Same as the Fcompliant PLC data type (UDT) or in the I/O DB Passivation or substitute values See also Flexible F-Link (Page 262) F-runtime group communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 145) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 100 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Access protection 4 Access protection is necessary for productive operation Access protection to the SIMATIC Safety F-system is mandatory for productive operation. No access protection is initially necessary for test purposes, commissioning, etc. This means you can execute all offline and online actions without access protection, i.e., without password prompt. WARNING Access to the SIMATIC Safety F-system without access protection is intended for test purposes, commissioning, etc., when the system is not in productive operation. You must guarantee the safety of the system through other organizational measures, for example, restricted access to certain areas. Before you transition into productive operation, you must have set up and activated access protection. (S005) 4.1 Overview of access protection Introduction You can protect access to the SIMATIC Safety F-system by two password prompts: one for the safety program and another for the F-CPU. Password for the safety program The password for the safety program is available in two forms: The offline password is part of the safety program in the offline project on the programming device or PC. The online password is part of the safety program in the F-CPU. Password for the F-CPU The access protection is set at the F-CPU level. This password is also used to identify the F-CPU and must therefore be unique network-wide. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 101 Access protection 4.1 Overview of access protection Overview of password assignment and prompt The following table provides an overview of the access permissions for the F-CPU and the safety program. The sections below show you how to assign the passwords and how to set up, change, and cancel access permissions for the F-CPU and the safety program. Assignment Password for F-CPU Password for safety program In the hardware and network editor, during configuration of the F-CPU, inspector window, in "Settings" tab under "Protection", corresponding safety level, e.g., "Write protection for fail-safe blocks" (S7-300, S7-400). In the Safety Administration Editor under "Access Protection". Select at least the access level "Full access (no protection)" for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs and assign a password for "Full access incl. fail-safe (no protection)". If you select a higher protection level, for example to protect the standard user program, you must assign an additional password for "Full access (no protection)". Prompt If you do not have access permission for the safety program (Page 103): For example * * * If you have assigned a password and this has not yet been entered since the project was opened, or you do not have access permission for the safety program (Page 103): When uploading the complete safety program to Offline password the F-CPU e.g.: (S7-300, S7-400) when uploading the hardware * When the password is changed configuration to the F-CPU (S7-1200, S7-1500) when uploading a hardware * When modifying the safety program configuration to the F-CPU that contains safetyrelated changes * When PROFIsafe address is assigned * When F-blocks that are used in the safety program are downloaded and deleted * When disabling safety mode * When restoring a backup of the F-CPU. * When changing and deleting F-runtime groups * When changing safety-related parameters of F-I/O Online password e.g., when disabling safety mode (the password must always be entered, even if access permission for the safety program is still valid) Exception with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: If neither the safety program nor the F-CPU password is changed by the restore process, you are not prompted for the F-CPU password. Safety program recompilation is required after changes to standard DBs to which the safety program has read or write access (Page 195). These standard DBs are not governed by the safety program access protection. Please note that you also require the online password to download the safety-relevant changes to the hardware configuration. This is also true for changes to F-I/O not used in the safety program. You have to also recompile and download the safety program for the download to be consistent. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 102 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Access protection 4.2 Access protection for the safety program 4.2 Access protection for the safety program Setting up access protection for the safety program To set up access protection for the safety program, assign a password for the safety program. Proceed as follows: 1. Open the folder for your F-CPU in the project tree. 2. Select "Safety Administration" and select "Go to access protection" in the shortcut menu. Alternatively, double-click on "Safety Administration". The Safety Administration Editor of the F-CPU will open. Select "Access protection" in the area navigation. 3. Under "Offline safety program protection", click "Setup" and enter the password (max. 30 characters) for the safety program in the following dialog in the "New password" and "Confirm password" fields. 4. Confirm the assigned password with "OK". You have set up access protection for the safety program and have gained access permission for the safety program. Note You cannot define the online password separately; the offline password assigned during the next download is applied. After a change to the offline password, the online and offline passwords may differ until the next time the offline safety program is downloaded to the F-CPU. During loading from the device the offline password is replaced by the online password or deleted. Note Use different passwords for the F-CPU and the safety program to optimize access protection. WARNING If access protection is not used to limit access to the programming device or PC to only those persons who are authorized to modify the safety program, the following organizational measures must be taken to ensure the effectiveness of the password protection for the F-CPU at the programming device or PC: * Only authorized personnel may have access to the password. * Authorized personnel must explicitly cancel the access permission for the F-CPU before leaving the programming device or PC by closing STEP 7 or via the "Online > Delete access rights" menu. If this is not strictly implemented, a screen saver equipped with a password accessible only to authorized personnel must also be used. (S006) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 103 Access protection 4.2 Access protection for the safety program Changing the password for the safety program You may change the safety program password as long as you have the necessary access permissions. It takes place likewise in the "Access protection" area (via "Change" button) and is carried out as usual under Windows through entry of the old and double entry of the new password. Deleting access protection for the safety program To delete access protection for the safety program, delete the password for the safety program. Proceed as follows: 1. Open the folder for your F-CPU in the project tree. 2. Select "Safety Administration" and select "Go to access protection" in the shortcut menu. Alternatively, double-click on "Safety Administration". The Safety Administration Editor of the F-CPU will open. 3. Select "Access protection" in the area navigation. 4. Click the "Change" button. 5. Under "Old password", enter the password for the safety program. 6. Click "Revoke" and then on "OK". Gaining access permission through login to the safety program Log in to the safety program as follows: 1. Open the folder for your F-CPU in the project tree. 2. Select "Safety Administration" and select "Go to access protection" in the shortcut menu. Alternatively, double-click on "Safety Administration". The Safety Administration Editor of the F-CPU will open. 3. Select "Access protection" in the area navigation. 4. Enter the password for the safety program in the "Password" input field. 5. Select the "Login" button. Validity of access permission for a safety program If access permission for a safety program was obtained through the entry of the password, this remains until the project is closed. If STEP 7 is closed, any project that is still open is automatically closed and any access permission granted is canceled. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 104 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Access protection 4.2 Access protection for the safety program Canceling access permission through logoff The access permission for the safety program can be canceled as follows: By clicking the "Log off" button in the "Access protection" area in the "Safety Administration Editor". In the shortcut menu for the Safety Administration Editor shortcut menu (access by rightclicking). By using the lock symbol in the line of the Safety Administration Editor. The user will then be prompted to enter the password for the safety program again the next time an action requiring a password is performed. A Stop-Run transition is required to "revoke" access permission for control. Access permission for the safety program is canceled automatically, if the project or STEP 7 has been closed. Displaying the validity of access permission The validity of the access permission is displayed in the project tree as follows: The access permission is valid, if the lock symbol in the line of the Safety Administration Editor is shown unlocked. The access permission is not available, if the lock symbol shows a closed lock. If no lock symbol is shown, no password was assigned. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 105 Access protection 4.3 Access protection for the F-CPU 4.3 Access protection for the F-CPU Setting up access protection for the F-CPU To set up access protection for the F-CPU, assign a password for the F-CPU in the F-CPU configuration. You arrive there directly, if you click the link "Go to the "Protection" area of the F-CPU" in the "Access protection" area in the Safety Administration Editor. Proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Configuring access levels". WARNING (S7-300, S7-400) In safety mode, access with the CPU password must not be authorized during changes to the standard user program as this would also allow changes to the safety program. To rule out this possibility, you must configure the protection level "Write protection for fail-safe blocks" and configure a password for the F-CPU. If only one person is authorized to change the standard user program and the safety program, the protection level "Write protection" or "Read/write protection" should be configured so that other persons have only limited access or no access at all to the entire user program (standard and safety programs).(S001) WARNING (S7-1200, S7-1500) In safety mode, the safety program must be password-protected. For this purpose, configure at least the protection level "Full access (no protection)" and assign a password under "Full access incl. fail-safe (no protection)". This protection level only allows full access to the standard user program, not to F-blocks. If you select a higher protection level, for example to protect the standard user program, you must assign an additional password for "Full access (no protection)". Assign different passwords for the individual protection levels. (S041) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 106 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Access protection 4.3 Access protection for the F-CPU You enable access protection by downloading (Page 313) the hardware configuration to the F-CPU. WARNING If multiple F-CPUs can be reached over a network (e.g. Industrial Ethernet) by one programming device or PC, you must take the following actions to ensure that the project data is downloaded to the correct F-CPU: Use passwords specific to each F-CPU, such as a uniform password for the F-CPUs with attached Ethernet address for each. Note the following: * A point-to-point connection must be used to activate the access protection of an F-CPU when the hardware configuration is loaded for the first time (similar to assigning an MPI address to an F-CPU for the first time). * Before downloading the safety program to an F-CPU, you must first revoke an existing access permission for any other F-CPU. * The last download of the safety program prior to switching to productive operation must be made with enabled access protection. (S021) WARNING When using tools for the automation or operation (of TIA Portal or Web server) which allow access protection for the F-CPU to be bypassed (e.g. saving or automatic entry of a CPU password for the protection level "Full access incl. fail-safe (no protection)" or Web server password), the safety relevant project data may not be protected against unintentional changes anymore. (S078) Changing the password for the F-CPU For the new password to become valid after a password change for the F-CPU, you must download the changed configuration into the F-CPU. If necessary, you must enter the "old" password for the F-CPU for this load operation. The F-CPU must be in STOP mode. Deleting access protection for the F-CPU To delete access protection for the F-CPU, delete the password for the F-CPU. To do this, proceed as in the standard. Obtaining access permission for the F-CPU You obtain access permission for the F-CPU - depending on the configured protection level by entering the password for the F-CPU prior to performing an action requiring a password. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 107 Access protection 4.3 Access protection for the F-CPU Obtaining access permission for the F-CPU Access permission for the F-CPU remains valid until the project is closed in STEP 7 or access permission is canceled. Canceling access permission for the F-CPU You cancel the access permission with the menu command "Online > Delete access rights" auf. WARNING If access protection is not used to limit access to the programming device or PC to only those persons who are authorized to modify the safety program, the following organizational measures must be taken to ensure the effectiveness of the access protection for the F-CPU at the programming device or PC: * Only authorized personnel may have access to the password. * Authorized personnel must explicitly cancel the access permission for the F-CPU before leaving the programming device or PC by closing STEP 7 or via the "Online > Delete access rights" menu. If this is not strictly implemented, a screen saver equipped with a password accessible only to authorized personnel must also be used. (S006) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 108 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Access protection 4.4 Access protection through organizational measures 4.4 Access protection through organizational measures To prevent that a safety program is swapped without authorization by exchanging removable media (e.g. flash card, SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or hard disk with WinAC RTX F), you must observe the following warning: WARNING You must limit access to the F-CPU to persons who are entitled for plugging removable media through access protection. (S079) To prevent that a WinAC RTX F or an S7-1500 F Software Controller is accidentally uninstalled or installed, you must observe the following warning: WARNING You must limit access to a WinAC RTX F or an S7-1500 F Software Controller through access protection to persons who are authorized to uninstall and install or repair a WinAC RTX F or an S7-1500 F Software Controller (e.g. by using Windows administrator rights (ADMIN)). (S075) The "Delete Configuration" function is only offered in the panel of the PC station with an S7-1500 F Software Controller when no access protection is set up on the F-CPU. We therefore recommend that you do not set up F-access protection until after commissioning. To prevent unauthorized restoration of the safety program, formatting of the F-CPU and deleting program folders using the display of an S7-1500 F-CPU, you must observe the following warning: WARNING The display password may only be given to persons who are authorized to restore safety programs, format the F-CPU and delete program folders. If a password is not set up for the display, you must protect the display through organizational measures against unauthorized operation. For example by setting up access protection for specific rooms. (S063) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 109 Access protection 4.4 Access protection through organizational measures To prevent unauthorized restoration of the safety program with the Web server in an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU, you must observe the following warning: WARNING The "F-admin" authorization for Web server without password protection (user "Everybody" or "Anyone") is only intended for test purposes, maintenance, etc. This means only when the system is not in productive operation. In this case you must ensure the safety of the system through other organizational measures. For example by setting up access protection for specific rooms. Before you transition into productive operation, you must remove the "F-admin" right for the user "Everybody". Only authorized personnel may have access to the password of the Web server user with the "F-admin" right. After downloading the hardware configuration, check whether only permitted users of the Web server have the "F-admin" right on the F-CPU. To do so, use the online view of the Safety Administration Editor (see also Safety Administration Editor (Page 81)). Saving the login file and the password of the Web server in the browser is only permitted when use by unauthorized persons is prevented through other organizational measures (e.g. access protection to the PG/PC). (S064) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 110 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 5 Overview of Programming Introduction A safety program consists of F-blocks that you create using the FBD or LAD programming language and F-blocks that are automatically added. Fault detection and reaction measures are automatically added to the safety program you create, and additional safety-related tests are performed. Moreover, you have the option to incorporate special ready-made safety functions in the form of instructions into your safety program. An overview of the following is given below: The structure of the safety program The fail-safe blocks Differences in the programming of the safety program with FBD/LAD compared to programming of standard user programs 5.1.1 Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) Representation of program structure For structuring purposes, a safety program consists of one or two F-runtime groups. Each F-runtime group contains: F-blocks that you create using FBD or LAD or that are inserted from the project library or global libraries F-blocks that are added automatically (F-system blocks, automatically generated F-blocks, and F-I/O DBs) Below is a schematic diagram of a safety program or an F-runtime group for an S7-300/400 F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 111 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Main safety block The main safety block is the first F-block of the safety program that you program yourself. During compiling, it is supplemented by additional invisible calls of F-system blocks. You must assign the main safety block to an F-runtime group (Page 132). The main safety block in an S7-300/400 F-CPU is called from any block in the standard user program. We recommend a call from an OB 3x. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 112 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming F-runtime groups To improve handling, a safety program consists of one or two "F-runtime groups". An Fruntime group is a logical construct of several related F-blocks that is formed internally by the F-system. An F-runtime group consists of the following: A main safety block (an F-FB/F-FC that you assign to the calling OB (FB/FC) as needed) Any additional F-FBs or F-FCs that you program using FBD or LAD and call from the main safety block One or more F-DBs, as needed F-I/O DBs F-blocks from the project library or global libraries F-system blocks F-SBs Automatically generated F-blocks Structuring the safety program in two F-runtime groups You can divide your safety program into two F-runtime groups. By having parts of the safety program (one F-runtime group) run in a faster priority class, you achieve faster safety circuits with shorter response times. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 113 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming 5.1.2 Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) Representation of program structure For structuring purposes, a safety program consists of one or two F-runtime groups. Each F-runtime group contains: F-blocks that you create using FBD or LAD or that are inserted from the project library or global libraries F-blocks that are added automatically (F-system blocks F-SBs, automatically generated F-blocks, F-runtime DB, and F-I/O DBs) Below is a schematic diagram of a safety program or an F-runtime group for an S71200/1500 F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 114 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Main safety block The main safety block is the first F-block of the safety program that you program yourself. You must assign the main safety block to an F-runtime group (Page 132). The main safety block in an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU is called by the F-OB assigned to the F-runtime group. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 115 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming F-runtime groups To improve handling, a safety program consists of one or two "F-runtime groups". An Fruntime group is a logical construct of several related F-blocks that is formed internally by the F-system. An F-runtime group consists of the following: An F-OB which calls the main safety block A main safety block (an F-FB/F-FC that you assign to the F-OB) Any additional F-FBs or F-FCs that you program using FBD or LAD and call from the main safety block One or more F-DBs, as needed F-I/O DBs F-runtime group information DB F-blocks from the project library or global libraries F-system blocks F-SBs Automatically generated F-blocks A preprocessing and/or postprocessing block, as needed (see Pre-/postprocessing (S71200, S7-1500) (Page 87)) Pre-/postprocessing of an F-runtime group You have the option of calling blocks of the standard application groups (FCs) directly before or after an F-runtime group, for example for data transfer of fail-safe communication via Flexible F-Link. (see Pre-/postprocessing (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 87)) Structuring the safety program in two F-runtime groups You can divide your safety program into two F-runtime groups. By having parts of the safety program (one F-runtime group) run in a faster priority class, you achieve faster safety circuits with shorter response times. See also F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 148) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 116 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming 5.1.3 Fail-Safe Blocks F-blocks of an F-runtime group The following table shows the F-blocks that you use in an F-runtime group: F-block Function Main safety block The first step in programming of the safety program is the main safety block. S7-300/400 F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs X X X X The main safety block in S7-300/400 F-CPUs is an F-FC or F-FB (with instance DB), which is called by a standard block (recommendation: OB 35) from the standard user program. The main safety block in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs is an F-FC or F-FB (with instance DB), which is called by the F-OB. F-FB/F-FC Both in the main safety block as well as additional F-FBs and F-FCs, you can perform the following: * Program the safety program with the instructions available for Fblocks in FBD or LAD * Call other created F-FBs/F-FCs for structuring the safety program * Insert F-blocks from the project library or global libraries F-DB Optional fail-safe data blocks that can be read- and write-accessed within the entire safety program. X X F-I/O DB An F-I/O DB is automatically generated for each F-I/O when it is configured. You can or you must access the tags of the F-I/O DB in conjunction with F-I/O accesses. X X F-shared DB The F-shared DB is a fail-safe data block that contains all of the shared data of the safety program and additional information needed by the F-system. X -- F-runtime group information DB An F-runtime group information DB is created when you create an Fruntime group. -- X The F-runtime group information DB provides information on the Fruntime group and on the safety program as a whole. Note You are not permitted to insert F-system blocks from the "System blocks" folder in a main safety block/F-FB/F-FC. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 117 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Instructions for the safety program In the "Instructions" task card, you can find instructions for the F-CPU used and which you can to use program the safety program. You can find instructions that you know from the standard user program, such as bit logic operations, mathematical functions, functions for program control, and word logic operations. Moreover, there are instructions with safety functions, e.g., for two-hand monitoring, discrepancy analysis, muting, emergency STOP/emergency OFF, safety door monitoring, feedback monitoring and instructions for safety-related communication between F-CPUs. Additional information For a detailed description of the instructions for the safety program, refer to Overview of instructions (Page 391). Using instruction versions As with the instructions for the standard user program, there may also be different versions of the instructions for the safety program. Additional information on instruction versions can be found in the help on STEP 7 in "Basics for instruction versions". Further information on the differences of the individual versions of the instructions for the safety program can be found in the relevant chapter of the instructions. Note Note the following: * If you change the version of an instruction used in the safety program in the task card "Instructions" to a version which does not have identical functions, the functioning of your safety program may change after recompiling the safety program. In addition to the signature of the F-block that uses the instruction, the F-collective signature and the F-SW collective signature of your safety program also change. You may have to perform an acceptance test (Page 378). * (S7-300/400) If you use a know-how protected F-block in your safety program which uses an instruction which is not the same version as that set in the task card "Instructions", when the program is compiled without entering the password for the know-how protected F-block, it is adjusted to the version set in the task card "Instructions", providing the interfaces of the instruction versions are identical. If the instruction versions do not have identical functions, the functioning of the know-how protected F-block may change and always its signature. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 118 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming 5.1.4 Restrictions in the programming languages FBD/LAD LAD and FBD programming languages The user program in the F-CPU typically consists of a standard user program and a safety program. The standard user program is created using standard programming languages such as SCL, STL, LAD, or FBD. For the safety program, LAD or FBD may be used with certain restrictions in the instructions and the applicable data types and operand areas. Please also note the restrictions for the individual instructions. Supported instructions The instructions available depend on the F-CPU used. You can find the supported instructions in the description of the instructions (starting from (Page 391)). Note Enable input EN and enable output ENO cannot be connected. Exception: (S7-1200, S7-1500) With the following instructions you can program overflow detection by connecting the enable output ENO: * ADD: Add (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 520) * SUB: Subtract (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 523) * MUL: Multiply (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 526) * DIV: Divide (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 529) * NEG: Create twos complement (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 533) * ABS: Form absolute value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 536) * CONVERT: Convert value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 548) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 119 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Supported data types and parameter types Only the following data types are supported: BOOL INT WORD DINT DWORD (S7-300, S7-400) TIME ARRAY, ARRAY[*] when using the instructions RD_ARRAY_I: Read value from INT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1500) (Page 539) and RD_ARRAY_DI: Read value from DINT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1500) (Page 542). Restrictions: - ARRAY only in F-global DBs - ARRAY limits: 0 up to max. 10000 - ARRAY[*] only as in-out parameter (InOut) in F-FCs and F-FBs - ARRAY of UDT - ARRAY of Bool - ARRAY of Word - ARRAY of Time F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) (S7-1200, S7-1500) Note If the result of an instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program, or select a matching data type or use the ENO output. Note the description of the individual instructions. Non-permitted data and parameter types The following types are not permitted: All types not listed in the section "Supported data types and parameters types" (e.g. BYTE, REAL) Complex data types (for example, STRING, ARRAY (S7-300, S7-400, S7-1200), STRUCT, PLC data type (UDT) (S7-300, S7-400)) Parameter types (e.g. BLOCK_FB, BLOCK_DB, ANY) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 120 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Supported operand areas The system memory of an F-CPU is divided into the same operand areas as the system memory of a standard CPU. You can access the operand areas listed in the table below from within the safety program. Table 5- 1 Supported operand areas Operand area Description Process image of the inputs * Of F-I/O Only read-only access to input channels of F-I/O is possible. Transfer to IN_OUT parameters of an F-FB or F-FC is therefore not valid either. The process image of the inputs of F-I/O is updated prior to the start of the main safety block. * Of standard I/O Input channels of standard I/O can only be accessed read-only. Transfer to IN_OUT parameters of an F-FB or F-FC is therefore not valid either. In addition, a process-specific validity check is required. See the STEP 7 help for the update times of the process image of the inputs of standard I/O. Process image of the outputs * Of F-I/O Only write-only access to output channels of F-I/O is possible. Transfer to IN_OUT parameters of an F-FB or F-FC is therefore not valid either. In the safety program, the values for the outputs of the F-I/O are calculated and stored in the process image of the outputs. The process image of the outputs for F-I/O is updated after the end of the main safety block. * Of standard I/O Output channels of standard I/O are write-only channels. Transfer to IN_OUT parameters of an F-FB or F-FC is therefore not valid either. In the safety program, the values for the outputs of the standard I/O are also calculated and stored in the process image of the outputs, if needed. See the STEP 7 help for the update times of the process image of the outputs of standard I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 121 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Operand area Description Bit memory This area is used for data exchange with the standard user program. In addition, read access requires a process-specific validity check. A particular element of the bit memory can be either read- or writeaccessed in the safety program. Transfer to IN_OUT parameters of an F-FB or F-FC is therefore not valid either. Note that it is only permitted to use bit memory for connecting the standard user program and the safety program; it must not be used as a buffer for F-data. Data blocks * F-DB Data blocks store information for the program. They can either be defined as global data blocks such that all F-FBs, F-FCs, or main safety blocks can access them or assigned to a particular F-FB or main safety block (instance DB). A tag of a shared DB can only be accessed from one F-runtime group, and an instance DB only from the F-runtime group in which the corresponding F-FB/instruction is called. * DB This area is used for data exchange with the standard user program. In addition, read access requires a process-specific validity check. For a tag of a DB, either read access or write access is possible in the safety program. Transfer to IN_OUT parameters of an F-FB or F-FC is therefore not valid either. Please note that the tags of a DB can only be used for transferring data between the standard user program and the safety program; DBs must not be used as a buffer for F-data. Temporary local data This memory area holds the temporary tags of a block (or F-block) while the (F-) block is being executed. The local data stack also provides memory for transferring block parameters and for saving intermediate results. File type conversion Just as with the standard user program, there are two possibilities for file type conversion in the safety program. Implicit conversion The implicit conversion is executed as in the standard user program with the following restrictions: The bit length of the source data type has to match the bit length of the destination data type. Explicit conversion You use an explicit conversion instruction (Page 548) before the actual instruction is executed. Slice access Slice access is not possible in the safety program. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 122 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Non-permitted operand areas Access via units other than those listed in the table above is not permitted. The same applies to access to operand areas not listed, in particular: Data blocks that were automatically added Exception: Certain tags in the F-I/O DB (Page 165) and in the F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 148) or F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 148) I/O area: Inputs I/O area: Outputs Boolean constants "0" or "FALSE" and "1" or "TRUE" (S7-300, S7-400) The Boolean constants "0" or "FALSE" and "1" or "TRUE" are available for S7-300/400 F-CPUs as "Tags" "RLO0" and "RLO1" in the F-global DB. You access them through a fully qualified DB access ("F_GLOBDB".RLO0 or "F_GLOBDB".RLO1). Boolean constants "0" or "FALSE" and "1" or "TRUE" (S7-1200, S7-1500) The Boolean constants "0" or "FALSE" and "1" or "TRUE" are available for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs to assign parameters during block calls. You can also create "1" or "TRUE" in a tag with the help of the "Assignment (Page 402)" instruction. To do so, do not interconnect the box input of the "Assignment" instruction in FBD. In LAD, you interconnect the input directly with the supply rail. You obtain a tag with "0" or "FALSE" by subsequent inversion with the instruction "Invert RLO (Page 399)". Example FBD: Example LAD: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 123 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Operand area of temporary local data: Particularities Note Note when using the operand area of temporary local data that the first access of a local data element in a main safety block/F-FB/F-FC must always be a write access. This initializes the local data element. Make sure that a temporary local data element is initialized prior to the first JMP, JMPN, or RET instruction. The "local data bit" should be initialized with the Assign ("=") (FBD) or ("--( )") (LAD) instruction. Assign the local data bit a signal state of "0" or "1" as a Boolean constant. Local data bits cannot be initialized with the Flip Flop (SR, RS), Set Output (S) or Reset Output (R) instructions. The F-CPU can go to STOP if this is not observed. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. "Fully qualified DB access" Access to tags of a data block in an F-FB/F-FC is "fully qualified DB access". This also applies to initial access to tags of a data block after a jump label. For S7-300/400 F-CPUs, only initial access needs to be "fully qualified DB access". Alternatively, you can use the instruction "OPN". Example of "fully qualified DB access": Assign a name for the F-DB, e.g. "F_Data_1". Use the names assigned in the declaration of the F-DB instead of the absolute addresses. Figure 5-1 Example with fully-qualified access SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 124 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Example of "non-fully qualified DB access" (S7-300, S7-400): Figure 5-2 Example without fully-qualified access Access to instance DBs You can also access instance DBs of F-FBs with fully qualified access, e.g., for transfer of block parameters. It is not possible to access static local data in single/multi-instances of other F-FBs. Note that accessing instance DBs of F-FBs that are not called in the safety program can cause the F-CPU to go to STOP mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 125 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming 5.1.5 F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) (S7-1200, S7-1500) Introduction You declare and use F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) as you would standard PLC data types (UDT). You can use F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) in the safety program as well as in the standard user program. Differences to standard PLC data types (UDT) are described in this chapter. Information on the use and declaration of standard PLC data types (UDT) is available in the STEP 7 help under "Declaring PLC data types". Declaring F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) You declare F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) as you would PLC data types (UDT). In F-compliant PLC data types (UDT), you can use all data types (Page 119) that you can also use in safety programs. Exception: ARRAY. Nesting of F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) within F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) is not supported. Proceed as follows for declaration: 1. Click on "Add new PLC data type" in the "PLC Data Types" folder in the project tree. 2. To create an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT), enable the option "Create F-compliant PLC data type" in the "Add new PLC data type" dialog. 3. Proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Programming structure of PLC data types". You specify default values for F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) during the declaration. Using F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) You use F-compliant PLC data types as you would standard PLC data types (UDT). Changes to F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) You need the password for the safety program to change F-compliant PLC data types (UDT). Regardless if you are using the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) in an F-block, in a standard block or not at all. See also "F-compliant PLC data types" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 89) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 126 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming 5.1.5.1 Grouping PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O in structures (S7-1200, S7-1500) You group PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O in structures (structured PLC tag) as you would for inputs and outputs of standard I/O. Use F-compliant PLC data types (UDT). Rules When creating structured PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O, you must also observe the following rules in addition to the rules in the standard: You must not group inputs/outputs of standard I/O and F-I/O at the same time in a structured PLC tag. You may only group inputs/outputs of actually existing channels (channel value and value status) in a structured PLC tag. See also Addressing F-I/O (Page 157) You may only group inputs/outputs of channels (channel value and value status) that are enabled in the hardware configuration in a structured PLC tag. See also Addressing F-I/O (Page 157) You may only group inputs of channels (channel value and value status) that provide the result of the "1oo2 sensor evaluation" with set "1oo2 sensor evaluation". See also Addressing F-I/O (Page 157) In a structured PLC tag for an F-I/O with outputs, you must either group all outputs of this F-I/O or an output range with multiples of 16 bits. The F-CPU can go to STOP mode if this is disregarded. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. A structured PLC tag that groups outputs of an F-I/O must not overlap with other PLC tags. The F-CPU can go to STOP mode if this is disregarded. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. Note To observe these rules, you must declare the F-compliant PLC data type that is used for the structured PLC tag accordingly. You can find the addresses allocated to a structured PLC tag in the "IO tags" tab of an F-I/O configuration. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 127 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming 5.1.5.2 Example of structured PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O (S7-1200, S7-1500) Introduction This example uses the F-module 4 F-DI/3 F-DO DC24V/2A with 1oo2 evaluation to demonstrate how you use structured PLC tags for access to F-I/O. Channel structure of the 4 F-DI/3 F-DO DC24V/2A F-module The table below sets out the channel structure and address assignment of the F-module 4 F-DI/3 F-DO DC24V/2A with 1oo2 evaluation. You may only access existing and enabled channels (addresses I15.0 to I15.3 and I16.0 to I16.3). These channels provide the result of 1oo2 evaluation generated internally in the F-module. Table 5- 2 Channel structure and addresses of the channel values of inputs with 1oo2 evaluation Channel Address DI channel 0 channel value I15.0 DI channel 1 channel value I15.1 DI channel 2 channel value I15.2 DI channel 3 channel value I15.3 -- I15.4 -- I15.5 -- I15.6 -- I15.7 Table 5- 3 Channel structure and addresses of the value status of the inputs with 1oo2 evaluation Channel Address DI channel 0 value status I16.0 DI channel 1 value status I16.1 DI channel 2 value status I16.2 DI channel 3 value status I16.3 -- I16.4 -- I16.5 -- I16.6 -- I16.7 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 128 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Table 5- 4 Channel structure and addresses of the value status of outputs Channel Address DO channel 0 value status I17.0 DO channel 1 value status I17.1 DO channel 2 value status I17.2 DO channel 3 value status I17.3 Table 5- 5 Channel structure and addresses of the channel values of outputs Channel Address DO channel 0 channel value Q15.0 DO channel 1 channel value Q15.1 DO channel 2 channel value Q15.2 DO channel 3 channel value Q15.3 Creating F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) Create two F-compliant PLC data types (UDT), for example, for access to all channels. The figure below shows an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) for access to the channel values and value status of the inputs with 1oo2 evaluation: The figure below shows the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) for access to the channel values and value status of the outputs: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 129 Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Using F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) As demonstrated in the figure below, you can use the two F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) that you have created in an F-FC (e.g. "Motor"): Creating structured PLC tag for the F-module 4 F-DI/3 F-DO DC24V/2A Create structured PLC tags for the F-module 4 F-DI/3 F-DO DC24V/2A: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 130 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.1 Overview of Programming Accessing the F-FC Transfer the structured PLC tags you have created when you call the F-FC (e.g. "Motor"): See also Addressing F-I/O (Page 157) Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 159) 5.1.6 Editing PLC tags with external editors To edit PLC tags with external editors follow the procedure as in the standard. Additional information can be found in the STEP 7 help in "Editing PLC tags with external editors". Note the following: Note After importing a tag table which contains tags used in the safety program, the collective F-signature of the safety program is reset. To form the collective F-signature again you have to recompile the project data. For this, with access protection set up for the safety program, you need a valid access authorization for the safety program. If you would like to edit PLC tags with external editors, we therefore recommend that you store PLC tags to be used in the safety program in a separate tag table. 5.1.7 Using Multiuser engineering If you want to use Multiuser engineering, proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Using Multiuser engineering". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 131 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5.2.1 Rules for F-Runtime Groups of the Safety Program Rules Note the following: The channels (channel values and value status) of an F-I/O can only be accessed from a single F-runtime group. Tags of the F-I/O DB of an F-I/O can only be accessed from one F-runtime group and only from that F-runtime group from which the channels or value status of this F-I/O are also accessed (if access is made). F-FBs can be used in more than one F-runtime group but they must be called with different instance DBs. Instance DBs of F-FB can only be accessed from the F-runtime group in which the associated F-FB is called. A tag of a global F-DB (except the F-global DB) can only be accessed from one F-runtime group (however, a global F-DB can be used in more than one F-runtime group). (S7-300, S7-400) A DB for F-runtime group communication can be read and write accessed by the F-runtime group to which it was assigned as "DB for runtime group communication", but only read-accessed by the "receiver" F-runtime group. (S7-300, S7-400) An F-communication DB can only be accessed from one F-runtime group. (S7-1200, S7-1500) You must not call the main safety block yourself. It is automatically called by the assigned F-OB. Note F-OBs are protected by F-system know-how. The OB start information of F-OBs therefore cannot be evaluated. (S7-1200, S7-1500). The F-OB should be created with the highest priority of all OBs. Note The cycle time of the F-OB can be prolonged by, among other things, communication load, the processing of higher-priority interrupts, as well as by test and commissioning functions. (S7-300, S7-400) The main safety block may only be called once from a standard block. Multiple calls can cause the F-CPU to go to STOP mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 132 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups (S7-300, S7-400) For optimal use of temporary local data, you must call the F-runtime group (the main safety block) directly in an OB (cyclic interrupt OB, if possible); you should not declare any additional temporary local data in this cyclic interrupt OB. (S7-300, S7-400) Within a cyclic interrupt OB, the F-runtime group should be executed before the standard user program; i.e. it should be called at the very beginning of the OB, so that the F-runtime group is always called at fixed time intervals, regardless of how long it takes to process the standard user program. For this reason, the cyclic interrupt OB should also not be interrupted by higher priority interrupts. The process image of the inputs and outputs of standard I/O, bit memory, and tags of DBs in the standard user program may be accessed either as read-only or read/write from more than one F-runtime group. (see also Data exchange between standard user program and safety program (Page 195)) F-FCs can generally be called in more than one F-runtime group. Note You can improve performance by writing sections of the program that are not required for the safety function in the standard user program. When determining which elements to include in the standard user program and which to include in the safety program, you should keep in mind that the standard user program can be modified and downloaded to the F-CPU more easily. In general, changes in the standard user program do not require an acceptance. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 133 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5.2.2 Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-300, S7-400) Requirements You have inserted an S7-300/400 F-CPU in your project. In the "Properties" tab of the F-CPU, the "F-capability activated" check box is selected (default setting). F-runtime group created by default STEP 7 Safety inserts F-blocks for an F-runtime group in the project tree by default after an F-CPU has been added. When you open the "Program blocks" folder, you see the (F-)blocks of the F-runtime group (CYC_INT5 [OB 35], Main_Safety [FB 1], and Main_Safety_DB [DB1]) in the project tree. The following section describes how you modify the settings / parameters of the F-runtime group created by default or add and additional F-runtime group. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 134 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups Procedure for defining an F-runtime group Proceed as follows to define an F-runtime group: 1. Open the Safety Administration Editor by double-clicking in the project tree. 2. Select "F-runtime group" in the area navigation. Result: The work area for defining an F-runtime group with the (default) settings for Fruntime group 1 opens. 3. Specify the block in which the main safety block is to be called. Cyclic interrupt OB 35 is suggested here by default. The advantage of using cyclic interrupt OBs is that they interrupt the cyclic program execution in OB 1 of the standard user program at fixed time intervals; that is, the safety program is called and executed at fixed time intervals in a cyclic interrupt OB. In this input field, you can select only those blocks that were created in the LAD, FBD, or STL programming language. If you select a block here, the call is inserted automatically into the selected block and, if necessary, removed from a previously selected block. If you want to call the main safety block in a block that was created in another programming language, you must program this call itself. The input field is then not editable (grayed out), and you can change the call only in the calling block and not the Safety Administration Editor. 4. Assign the desired main safety block to the F-runtime group. If the main safety block is an FB, you must also assign an instance DB. Main_Safety [FB1] and Main_Safety_DB [DB1] are suggested by default. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 135 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5. The F-CPU monitors the F-cycle time of the F-runtime group. For "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group", enter the maximum permitted time between two calls of the F-runtime group. WARNING The F-runtime group call interval is monitored for the maximum value; i.e. monitoring is performed to determine whether the call is executed often enough, but not whether it is executed too often or, for example, isochronous. Fail-safe timers must therefore be implemented using the TP, TON, or TOF instructions (Page 489) from the "Instructions" task card and not using counters (OB calls). (S007) WARNING The response time of their safety function depends, among other things, on the cycle time of the F-OB, the runtime of the F-runtime group and, when distributed F-I/O is used, the parameter assignment of PROFINET/PROFIBUS. Therefore, the configuration/parameter assignment of the standard system influences the response time of its safety function. Examples: * The increase in priority of a standard OB compared to an F-OB can extend the runtime of the F-runtime group due to the interruption by higher-priority interrupts. * The change of the send clock cycle of PROFINET changes the cycle time of an F-OB with event class "Synchronous cycle". Note that the configuration / parameter assignment of the standard system is not subject to access protection for the safety program and does not lead to a modification of the collective F-signature. If you do not take organizational measures to prevent changes in the configuration / parameter assignment of the standard system with influence on the response time, you must always set the monitoring times for the calculation of the maximum response time of a safety function (see Configuring monitoring times (Page 608)). The monitoring times are protected against change with the access protection of the safety program and are recorded by the F-collective signature as well as the F-SW collective signature. When calculating with Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) you need to consider the value that is specified for "Any standard system runtimes" as value for the maximum response time. (S085) 6. If one F-runtime group is to provide tags for evaluation to another F-runtime group of the safety program, assign a DB for F-runtime group communication. Select an F-DB for "DB for F-runtime group communication". (See also F-runtime group communication (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 141)) 7. If you want to create a second F-runtime group, click the "Add new F-runtime group" button. 8. Assign an F-FB or F-FC as the main safety block to a calling block. This F-FB or F-FC is automatically generated in the project tree, if not already present. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 136 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 9. If the main safety block is an F-FB, assign an instance DB to the main safety block. The instance DB is generated automatically in the project tree. 10.Follow steps 3 to 5 above to complete generation of the second F-runtime group. 5.2.3 Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) Requirements You have inserted an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU in your project. In the "Properties" tab of the F-CPU, the "F-capability activated" check box is selected (default setting). F-runtime group created by default STEP 7 Safety inserts F-blocks for an F-runtime group in the project tree by default after an F-CPU has been added. When you open the "Program blocks", you see the (F-)blocks of the F-runtime group (FOB_RTG1 [OB123], Main_Safety_RTG1 [FB1] and Main_Safety_RTG1_DB [DB1]) in the project tree. The following section describes how you modify the settings / parameters of the F-runtime group created by default or add and additional F-runtime group. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 137 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups Procedure for defining an F-runtime group Proceed as follows to define an F-runtime group: 1. Open the Safety Administration Editor by double-clicking in the project tree. 2. Select "F-runtime group" in the area navigation. Result: The work area for defining an F-runtime group with the (default) settings for F-runtime group 1 opens. 3. Assign a name for the F-OB under "F-OB". 4. Specify the event class of the F-OB when you create a new F-runtime group. For an F-OB you can select between the event classes "Program cycle", "Cyclic interrupt" or "Synchronous cycle". In the case of the F-runtime group created by default, the F-OB has the event class "Cyclic interrupt". To change the event class of the F-OB of an already created F-runtime group, you need to delete and F-runtime group and create a new one. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 138 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups Note We recommend creating the F-OB with the event class "Cyclic interrupt" as "cyclic interrupt OB". The safety program will then be called and run at fixed time intervals. F-OBs with the event class "Synchronous cycle" are only recommended in conjunction with F-I/O devices that support isochronous mode, for example submodule "Profisafe Telgr 902" of drive SINAMICS S120 CU310-2 PN V5.1. F-OBs with the event class "Program cycle" are not recommended, as these have the lowest priority "1" (see below). Note Note the maximum permissible number of OBs (incl. F-OBs) with event class "Synchronous cycle" (see technical specifications in the product manuals of the S7-1500 CPUs). 5. If required, you can manually change the number of the F-OB proposed by the system. To do so, note the number ranges valid for the relevant event class. 6. Assign cycle time, phase shift and priority parameters for F-OBs with event class "Cyclic interrupt". Assign the priority parameter for F-OBs with event class "Synchronous cycle". - Select a cycle time which is less than the "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group" and less than the "Cycle time warning limit of F-runtime group". - Select a phase shift which is less than the cycle time. - If possible, select a priority that is higher than the priority of all other OBs. Note Through a high priority of the F-OB you ensure that the runtime of the safety program and the response time of your safety functions (Page 608) are influenced as little as possibly by the standard user program. Note For F-OBs with event class "Synchronous cycle" you need to also assign parameters for application cycle (ms) and possibly delay time (ms) after defining the F-runtime group and the connection of the isochronous F-I/O to the isochronous mode interrupt OB. You can find these parameters in the "Properties" dialog box of the isochronous mode interrupt OB in the "Isochronous mode" group. Proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Configuring isochronous mode interrupt OBs". 7. Assign the calling main safety block to the F-OB. If the main safety block is an FB, you must also assign an instance DB. Main_Safety_RTG1 [FB1] and Main_Safety_RTG1_DB [DB1] are suggested by default. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 139 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 8. The F-CPU monitors the F-cycle time of the F-runtime group. Two parameters are available: - If the "Cycle time warning limit of F-runtime group" is exceeded, an entry is written to the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. This parameter can, for example, be used to determine whether the cycle time exceeds a required value without the F-CPU switching to STOP mode. - If the "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group" is exceeded, the F-CPU will go to STOP. For "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group", select the maximum permitted time between two calls of this F-runtime group (maximum of 20000000 s). WARNING The F-runtime group call interval is monitored for the maximum value; i.e. monitoring is performed to determine whether the call is executed often enough, but not whether it is executed too often or, for example, isochronous. Fail-safe timers must therefore be implemented using the TP, TON, or TOF instructions (Page 489) from the "Instructions" task card and not using counters (OB calls). (S007) WARNING The response time of their safety function depends, among other things, on the cycle time of the F-OB, the runtime of the F-runtime group and, when distributed F-I/O is used, the parameter assignment of PROFINET/PROFIBUS. Therefore, the configuration/parameter assignment of the standard system influences the response time of its safety function. Examples: * The increase in priority of a standard OB compared to an F-OB can extend the runtime of the F-runtime group due to the interruption by higher-priority interrupts. * The change of the send clock cycle of PROFINET changes the cycle time of an FOB with event class "Synchronous cycle". Note that the configuration / parameter assignment of the standard system is not subject to access protection for the safety program and does not lead to a modification of the collective F-signature. If you do not take organizational measures to prevent changes in the configuration / parameter assignment of the standard system with influence on the response time, you must always set the monitoring times for the calculation of the maximum response time of a safety function (see Configuring monitoring times (Page 608)). The monitoring times are protected against change with the access protection of the safety program and are recorded by the F-collective signature as well as the F-SW collective signature. When calculating with Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) you need to consider the value that is specified for "Any standard system runtimes" as value for the maximum response time. (S085) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 140 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups The "Cycle time warning limit of F-runtime group" must be configured as less than or equal to the "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group". 9. Assign a name for the F-runtime group information DB (Page 148) under "F-runtime group DB". 10.If required, you can select blocks of the standard program (FCs) with regard to preprocessing or postprocessing of an F-runtime group (see Pre-/postprocessing (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 87)) 11.If you want to create a second F-runtime group, click the "Add new F-runtime group" button. Follow steps 3 to 10 above. 5.2.4 F-runtime group communication (S7-300, S7-400) Safety-related communication between F-runtime groups Safety-related communication can take place between the two F-runtime groups of a safety program. This means fail-safe tags can be provided by one F-runtime group in an F-DB and read in another F-runtime group. Note A DB for F-runtime group communication can be read and write accessed by the F-runtime group to which it was assigned as "DB for runtime group communication", while it can only be read-accessed by the "receiver" F-runtime group. Tip: You can improve performance by structuring your safety program in such a way that as few tags as possible are exchanged between the F-runtime groups. Procedure for defining a DB for F-runtime group communication You define the DB for F-runtime group communication in the work area "F-runtime groups". Proceed as follows: 1. Click "F-runtime groups" in "Safety Administration Editor". 2. Select an existing F-DB in the "DB for F-runtime group communication" field or assign a new one. 3. Assign a name to the F-DB. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 141 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups Up-to-dateness of tags read from another F-runtime group Note Tags read are up-to-date as at the time of the last completed processing cycle of the F-runtime group providing the tags prior to start-up of the F-runtime group reading the tags. If the tags supplied undergo multiple changes during runtime of the F-runtime group supplying the tags, the F-runtime group reading the tags only receives the last change (see figure below). Assignment of fail-safe values After F-system start-up, fail-safe values are supplied to the F-runtime group which has read access to tags in the DB for F-runtime group communication of another F-runtime group (for example, F-runtime group 2). These are the values you specified as initial values in the DB for F-runtime group communication of F-runtime group 1. F-runtime group 2 reads the fail-safe values the first time it is called. The second time the F-runtime group 2 is called, it reads the latest tags if F-runtime group 1 has been processed completely between the two calls of F-runtime group 2. If F-runtime group 1 has not been processed completely, F-runtime group 2 continues to read the fail-safe values until F-runtime group 1 is completely processed. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 142 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups The behavior is illustrated in the two figures below. Reading tags from F-runtime group 1, which has a longer OB cycle and lower priority than F-runtime group 2 Startup of F-system Cycle time of the (F-)OB in which the F-runtime group is called. Runtime of the F-runtime group ... Tag of F-runtime group 1, written to DB for F-runtime group communication of Fruntime group 1 ...Tag of F-runtime group 2, read in DB for F-runtime group communication of F-runtime group 1 Initial value in the DB for F-runtime group communication SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 143 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups Reading tags from F-runtime group 1, which has a shorter OB cycle and higher priority than F-runtime group 2 Startup of F-system Cycle time of the (F-)OB in which the F-runtime group is called. Runtime of the F-runtime group ... Tag of F-runtime group 1, written to DB for F-runtime group communication of Fruntime group 1 ... Tag of F-runtime group 2, read in DB for F-runtime group communication of F-runtime group 1 Initial value in the DB for F-runtime group communication F-runtime group supplying tags is not processed Note If the F-runtime group whose DB for F-runtime group communication is to supply the tags is not processed (the main safety block of the F-runtime group is not called), the F-CPU goes to STOP mode. One of the following diagnostics events is then entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU: * Error in safety program: cycle time exceeded * Number of the relevant main safety block (of F-runtime group that is not processed) * Current cycle time in ms: "0" SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 144 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5.2.5 F-runtime group communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Introduction With the help of Flexible F-Link you realize a F-runtime group communication. With Flexible F-Link a coded F-array is made available for the send data of the F-runtime group. The coded F-array is transferred to the other F-runtime group with standard instructions such as UNMOVE_BLK. Requirement S7-1500 F-CPUs as of firmware V2.0 S7-1200 F-CPUs as of firmware V4.2 Safety system version as of V2.2 F-runtime group communication If you want to send a data fail-safe from one F-runtime group to another F-runtime group, follow these steps: 1. Create an F-compliant PLC data type (UUID) for the F-runtime group communication. The size is up to 100 bytes. 2. Create two F-communications for an F-runtime group communication in the Safety Administration Editor in the "Flexible F-Link" area. One F-communication each for the send and receive side. 3. Configure the same F-monitoring time and F-communication UUID for each F-runtime group communication relationship. Information on calculating the F-monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). For example: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 145 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 4. On the send side (e.g. RTG1) supply the data of the transmission DBs with the data to be sent. For example: 5. Read the receiving data from the receiving DB on the receive side (e.g. RTG2). For example: 6. Call the instruction "UMOVE_BLK" in the F-runtime group for the send data (e.g. RTG1) in the FC for post processing (Page 87). 7. Interconnect the "UMOVE_BLK" instruction for the data to be sent as follows: "Send" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) of the F-runtime group that sends the data. "Receive" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) of the F-runtime group that receives the data. 8. Call the instruction "UMOVE_BLK" in the F-runtime group for acknowledgment (e.g. RTG2) in the FC for post processing (Page 96). 9. Interconnect the "UMOVE_BLK" instruction for the acknowledgment connection as follows: "Receive" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) of the F-runtime group that sends the acknowledgment telegram. "Send" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) of the F-runtime group that receives the acknowledgment telegram. 10.Compile the user program. 11.Download the user program to the F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 146 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups WARNING During the acceptance use the safety summary to verify that the offsets of the elements of the F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) match for the sending and receiving data within the safety message frame. For this purpose all members and addresses are listed in the safety summary per UDT. Also keep in mind that the size can be a up to 100 bytes. (S088) WARNING When a new Flexible F-Link communication is created in the Safety Administration Editor, the F-communication UUID for the communication is explicitly provided by the system. By copying communications in Safety Administration Editor within the parameterization table or when copying into another F-CPU, the F-communication UUIDs are not generated new and are therefore not unique anymore. If the copy is used to configure a new communication relationship, you yourself need to ensure the uniqueness. To do this select the affected UUIDs and regenerate via the "Generate UUID" shortcut menu. The uniqueness must be ensured in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. (S087) WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Up-to-dateness of tags read from another F-runtime group The same statements as those in the section "F-runtime group communication (S7-300, S7400) (Page 141)" apply (except for the storage locations written or read or initial values). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 147 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5.2.6 F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400) Function The F-shared DB is a fail-safe data block that contains all of the shared data of the safety program and additional information needed by the F-system. The F-shared DB is automatically inserted when the hardware configuration is compiled. Using its name F_GLOBDB, you can evaluate certain data elements of the safety program in the standard user program. Reading an F-shared DB in the standard user program You can read out the following information in the F-shared DB in the standard user program or on an operator control and monitoring system: Operating mode: safety mode or disabled safety mode ("MODE" tag) Error information "Error occurred when executing safety program" ("ERROR" tag) Collective F-signature ("F_PROG_SIG" tag) Compilation date of the safety program ("F_PROG_DAT" tag, DATE_AND_TIME data type) You use fully qualified access to access these tags (e.g. ""F_GLOBDB".MODE"). 5.2.7 F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500) Introduction The F-runtime group information DB provides key information on the corresponding F-runtime group and on the safety program as a whole. The F-runtime group information DB is generated automatically when an F-runtime group is created. A symbol, for example, "RTG1SysInfo", is assigned for the F-runtime group information DB. You can change the name in the Safety Administration Editor. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 148 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups Information in the F-runtime group information DB The F-runtime group information DB provides the following information: Name Data type For processing in the safety program For processing in the standard user program MODE Description BOOL x x 1 = Disabled safety mode MODE BOOL -- x 1 = Disabled safety mode TCYC_CURR DINT -- x Current cycle time of the F-runtime group, in ms TCYC_LONG DINT -- x Longest cycle time of the F-runtime group, in ms TRTG_CURR DINT -- x Current runtime of the F-runtime group, in ms TRTG_LONG DINT -- x Longest runtime of the F-runtime group, in ms T1RTG_CURR DINT -- x Not supported by STEP 7 Safety V15.1. T1RTG_LONG DINT -- x Not supported by STEP 7 Safety V15.1. F_PROG_SIG DWORD -- x Collective F-signature of the safety program F_PROG_DAT DTL -- x Compilation date of the safety program F_RTG_SIG DWORD -- x F-runtime groups signature F_RTG_DAT DTL -- x Compilation date of the F-runtime group VERS_S7SAF DWORD -- x Version identifier for STEP 7 Safety F_SYSINFO You access the content of the F-runtime group information DB with fully qualified addressing. Either collectively with the F_SYSINFO PLC data type (UDT), for example, "RTG1SysInfo.F_SYSINFO", provided by the F-system or individual information, for example, "RTG1SysInfo.F_SYSINFO.MODE". See also Program identification (Page 337) "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 96) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 149 Programming 5.2 Defining F-Runtime Groups 5.2.8 Deleting an F-runtime group Deleting an F-runtime group To delete an F-runtime group, proceed as follows: 1. In the area navigation of the Safety Administration Editor, click on the F-runtime group to be deleted. 2. Select the "Delete F-runtime group" button in the work area. 3. Confirm the dialog with "Yes". 4. Compile the safety program (Page 311) (menu command "Edit > Compile") to put your changes into effect. The assignment of the F-blocks to an F-runtime group (to the calling block of the main safety block) is deleted. However, the F-blocks continue to exist. Note If you want to delete your safety program, delete all F-blocks outside the System blocks folder in the project tree. F-blocks that do not allow deletion are deleted by recompiling the safety program or deactivating F-capability for the F-CPU (see Configuring an F-CPU (Page 48)). 5.2.9 Changing the F-runtime group (S7-300, S7-400) Changing an F-runtime group You can make the following changes for each F-runtime group in your safety program in the corresponding "F-runtime group" work area: Specify another block as the calling block of the main safety block. Specify another F-FB or F-FC as main safety block. Enter a different or new I-DB for the main safety block. Change the value for the maximum cycle time of the F-runtime group Specify another DB as a data block for F-runtime group communication. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 150 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.3 Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD 5.2.10 Changing the F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) Changing an F-runtime group You can make the following changes for each F-runtime group in your safety program in the corresponding "F-runtime group" work area: Change the name, number, cycle time, phase shift and priority of the F-OB. Specify another F-FB or F-FC as main safety block. Enter a different or new I-DB for the main safety block. Change the value for the maximum cycle time and the cycle time warning limit of the F-runtime group. Assign another name for the F-runtime group information DB. Specify an FC for the preprocessing and postprocessing. 5.3 Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD 5.3.1 Creating F-blocks Introduction In order to create F-FBs, F-FCs, and F-DBs for the safety program, you should follow the same basic procedure as for standard blocks. In the following, only the deviations from the procedure for standard blocks are presented. Creating F-FBs, F-FCs, and F-DBs You create F-blocks in the same way as for standard blocks. Proceed as follows: 1. Double-click on "Add new block" under "Program blocks" in the project tree. 2. In the dialog that appears, specify the type, name, and language and select the "Create F-block" check box. (If you do not select the check box, a standard block is created.) 3. After the dialog is confirmed, the F-block is opened in the Program editor. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 151 Programming 5.3 Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD Note the following Note the following important instructions: Note You may not declare block parameters in the block interface of the main safety block because they cannot be supplied. Note You can edit start values in instance DBs. The function "Apply actual values" is not supported. Note You may not access static local data in single instances or multi-instances of other F-FBs. Note You must always initialize outputs of F-FCs. The F-CPU can go to STOP mode if the information above is not observed. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. Note If you wish to assign an address from the data area (data block) to a formal parameter of an F-FC as an actual parameter, you have to use fully qualified DB access. (S7-300, S7-400) Note Access to the inputs in an F-FB/F-FC is read-only, while access to the outputs is write-only. Use an in/out if you wish to have both read and write access. Note For greater clarity, assign meaningful names to the F-blocks you have created. Copying/pasting F-blocks You can copy F-FBs, F-FCs, and F-DBs in exactly the same was as blocks of the standard user program. (S7-1200, S7-1500) You may not copy an F-OB. Exception: You cannot copy blocks from the folder "Program blocks > System blocks". See also Changing the F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 151) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 152 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.3 Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD 5.3.2 Know-how protection For know-how protection of F-blocks, proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Protecting blocks". Requirements Note the following with regard to know-how protection of F-blocks: An F-block to which you wish to assign know-how protection must be called in the safety program. Before you can set up the know-how protection for an F-block, the safety program must be consistent. For this purpose, compile (Page 311) the safety program. Note No source code is output for know-how protected F-blocks in the safety summary. Therefore, create the safety summary (for example to carry out a code review or accept the F-block) before you set up the know-how protection. Note If you want to edit the program code and/or the block interface of a know-how protected Fblock, we recommend that you do not open the F-block by entering a password, but rather remove the know-how protection completely and set it up again after compiling. Note (S7-1200, S7-1500) When a know-how protected F-block or F-blocks called by it are renamed, the signature of the know-how protected F-block is not changed until the password is entered when opening or removing the know-how protection. Note When know-how protected F-blocks are used, warnings and error messages whose cause can lie in the know-how protected F-blocks can be displayed during compilation of the safety program. The warnings and error messages contain corresponding information. Example: In a know-how protected F-block, you perform read access to a tag of the standard user program to which write access is taking place in a different (know-how protected) F-block. For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs, you can obtain additional information from the safety summary in the section "Know-how protected F-blocks in the safety program". See also Reuse of F-blocks (Page 154) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 153 Programming 5.3 Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD 5.3.3 Reuse of F-blocks Introduction You can reuse F-blocks that you have already tested and, if applicable, approved, in other safety programs - without having to test and approve them again. You can protect the content of the F-block by setting up the know-how protection. Like standard blocks, you can store F-blocks as master copies or types in global libraries or in the project library. Additional information can be found in the STEP 7 help under "Using libraries". Creating safety documentation for the F-block to be reused Create safety documentation with the following information for F-blocks that you want to reuse. S7-300/400 F-CPUs Signature and initial value signature of the know-how protected F-block Versions of all the used versioned LAD/FBD instructions Signatures and initial value signatures of all called F-blocks S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs Signature of the know-how protected F-block Safety system version when setting up the know-how protection Versions of all the used versioned LAD/FBD instructions Signatures of all called F-blocks The safety documentation should also contain a description of the functionality of the Fblock, in particular if it is know-how protected. The required information is obtained by creating a safety summary of the safety program in which you originally created, tested and approved the F-block to be reused. This safety summary can also serve directly as the safety documentation for the F-block to be reused. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 154 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Programming 5.4 Programming startup protection Checks when using the F-block to be reused When reusing the F-block, ensure the following: The signature and initial value signature (S7-300/400) of the F-block are unchanged. (SIMATIC S7-1200, S7-1500) The documented safety system version is set. The documented (or functionally identical) versions of the versioned LAD/FBD instructions are set. You can find information about the instruction versions in the description of the instructions. The called F-blocks with the documented signatures and initial value signatures (S7-300/400) are used. If the version conflicts cannot be eliminated due to other dependencies, please contact the author of the know-how protected block in order to obtain a compatible approved version. See also Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program with their safety documentation. (Page 366) 5.4 Programming startup protection Introduction WARNING STOP, for example, via programming device/PC, mode switch, communication function or "STP" instruction Initiating STOP, for example by means of programming device/PC operation, mode switch, communication function or "STP" instruction as well as maintaining the STOP state are not safety-oriented. This STOP state can be easily (and unintentionally) be revoked, for example, by programming device/PC operation. When an F-CPU is switched from STOP to RUN mode, the standard user program starts up in the usual way. When the safety program is started up, all F-DBs are initialized with the values from the load memory - as is the case with a cold restart. This means that saved error information is lost. The F-system automatically reintegrates the F-I/O. If your process does not allow such a startup, you must program a restart/startup protection in the safety program: The output of process data must be blocked until manually enabled. This enable must not occur until it is safe to output process data and faults have been corrected. (S031) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 155 Programming 5.4 Programming startup protection Example of restart/startup prevention In order to implement a restart/startup prevention, it must be possible to detect a startup. To detect a startup, you declare a tag of data type BOOL with initial value "TRUE" in an F-DB. Block the output of process data when this tag has the value "1," for example, by passivating F-I/O using the PASS_ON tag in the F-I/O DB. To manually enable the output of process data, you reset this tag by means of a user acknowledgment. See also Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller (Page 187) Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or Idevice (Page 192) F-I/O DB (Page 165) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 156 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.1 6 Addressing F-I/O Overview Below you will find a description of how to address the F-I/O in the safety program and which rules must be observed in the process. Addressing via the process image As with standard I/O, you access F-I/O (e.g., S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules) via the process image (PII and PIQ). Direct reading (with I/O identification ":P") of inputs or writing of outputs is not possible in the safety program. Updating the process image The process image of the inputs of F-I/O is updated at the start of the F-runtime group. The process image of the outputs of F-I/O is updated at the end of the F-runtime group (see Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 111) or Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 114)). For additional information on updating the process image, refer to the note in Data Transfer from the Safety Program to the Standard User Program (Page 196). The communication required between the F-CPU (process image) and the F-I/O to update the process image uses a special safety protocol in accordance with PROFIsafe. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 157 F-I/O access 6.1 Addressing F-I/O Rules You may only address a channel (channel value and value status) of an F-I/O in one F-runtime group. The first programmed addressing defines the assignment for the Fruntime group. You may only address a channel (channel value and value status) of an F-I/O with a unit that matches the data type of the channel. Example: To access input channels of data type BOOL, you must use the "input (bit)" (I x.y) unit. Access to the 16 consecutive input channels of the data type BOOL via the unit "input word" (IW x) is not possible. Address only inputs and outputs that reference an actually existing channel (channel value and value status) (e.g. for an F-DO 10xDC24V with start address 10 only the outputs Q10.0 to Q11.1 for the channel values and the inputs I10.0 to I11.1 for the value status). Keep in mind that due to the special safety protocol, the F-I/O occupies a larger area of the process image than is required for the existing and enabled channels on the F-I/O (channel values and value status). To find the area of the process image where the channels (channel values and value status) are stored (channel structure), refer to the relevant manuals for the F-I/O. Channels can be disabled for certain F-I/O (such as ET 200SP fail-safe modules or S71500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules). Address only channels (channel value and value status) that are enabled in the hardware configuration. When you address channels that are disabled in the hardware configuration, a warning may be output when compiling the safety program. For certain F-I/O (such as ET 200SP fail-safe modules or S7-1500/ET 200MP fail-safe modules), a "1oo2 (2v2) sensor evaluation" can be specified. Two channels are grouped into one channel pair in this case, and the result of the "1oo2 sensor evaluation" is usually provided under the address of the channel with the lower channel number (see relevant manuals of the F-I/O). Address only this channel (channel value and value status) of the channel pair. When you address a different channel, a warning may be output when compiling the safety program. WARNING If you use an additional component between the F-CPU (S7-300/400) and the F-I/O that copies the safety message frame in accordance with PROFIsafe between the F-CPU (S7300/400) and F-I/O per user program, you must test all safety functions affected by the copy function whenever you change the user-programmed copy function. (S049) See also Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication - F-I/O Access (Page 246) Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 159) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 158 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.2 Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) 6.2 Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) Properties The value status is additional binary information for the channel value of an F-I/O. The value status is entered in the process image input (PII). The value status is supported by S7-1500/ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200eco PN, ET 200S, ET 200iSP, ET 200pro, S7-1200 fail-safe modules or S7-300 F-SMs, fail-safe I/O standard devices as well as fail-safe DP standard slaves that support the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. Information about the value status can be found in the documentation of the respective FI/O. We recommend you amend the name of the channel value with "_VS" for the value status, for example, "TagIn_1_VS". The value status provides information on the validity of the corresponding channel value: 1: A valid process value is output for the channel. 0: A fail-safe value is output for the channel. The channel value and value status of an F-I/O can only be accessed from the same Fruntime group. Location of value status bits in the PII for F-I/O with digital inputs The value status bits come straight after the channel values in the PII. Table 6- 1 Example: Address assignment in PII for F-I/O with 16 digital input channels Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-I/O: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x+0 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 x+1 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10 DI9 DI8 x+2 Value status DI7 Value status DI6 Value status DI5 Value status DI4 Value status DI3 Value status DI2 Value status DI1 Value status DI0 x+3 Value Value Value Value Value Value status DI15 status DI14 status DI13 status DI12 status DI11 status DI10 Value status DI9 Value status DI8 x = Module start address The location of the channel values in the PII can be found in the device manual for the F-I/O. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 159 F-I/O access 6.2 Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) Location of value status bits in the PII for F-I/O with digital outputs The value status bits in the PII are mapped with the same structure as the channel values in the PIQ. Table 6- 2 Example: Address assignment in PIQ for F-I/O with 4 digital output channels Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-I/O: x+0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 2 1 0 x = Module start address Table 6- 3 Example: Address assignment in PII for F-I/O with 4 digital output channels Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-I/O: x+0 7 6 5 4 -- -- -- -- 3 Value Value Value Value status DQ3 status DQ2 status DQ1 status DQ0 x = Module start address The location of the channel values in the PIQ can be found in the device manual for the FI/O. Location of value status bits in the PII for F-I/O with digital outputs and digital inputs The value status bits come directly after the channel values in the PII in the following order: Value status bits for the digital inputs Value status bits for the digital outputs Table 6- 4 Example: Address assignment in PIQ for F-I/O with 2 digital input channels and 1 digital output channel Byte in the F-CPU x+0 Assigned bit in the F-CPU per F-I/O: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- DQ0 x = Module start address SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 160 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.2 Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) Table 6- 5 Example: Address assignment in PII for F-I/O with 2 digital input channels and 1 digital output channel Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-I/O: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x+0 -- -- -- -- -- -- DI1 DI0 x+1 -- -- -- -- -- -- Value status DI1 Value status DI0 x+2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Value status DQ0 x = Module start address The location of the channel values in the PII and PIQ can be found in the device manual for the F-I/O. Location of value status bits in the PII for F-I/O with analog inputs The value status bits come directly after the channel values in the PII. Table 6- 6 Example: Address assignment in PII for F-I/O with 6 analog input channels (data type INT) Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bytes/bits in the F-CPU per F-I/O: 7 6 5 x+0 4 3 2 1 0 Value status AI2 Value status AI1 Value status AI0 Channel value AI0 ... ... x + 10 Channel value AI5 x + 12 -- -- Value status AI5 Value status AI4 Value status AI3 x = Module start address The location of the channel values in the PII can be found in the device manual for the F-I/O. Location of value status bits in the PII for F-I/O with analog outputs The value status bits are mapped in the PII. Table 6- 7 Example: Address assignment in PIQ for F-I/O with 6 analog output channels (data type INT) Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bytes in the F-CPU per F-I/O: 7 6 5 4 3 x+0 Channel value AO0 ... ... x + 10 Channel value AO5 2 1 0 x = Module start address SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 161 F-I/O access 6.3 Process Data or Fail-Safe Values Table 6- 8 Example: Address assignment in PII for F-I/O with 6 analog output channels (data type INT) Byte in the F-CPU Assigned bits in F-CPU per F-I/O: x+0 7 6 -- -- 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value Value Value Value Value Value status AO5 status AO4 status AO3 status AO2 status AO1 status AO0 x = Module start address The location of the channel values in the PIQ can be found in the device manual for the FI/O. 6.3 Process Data or Fail-Safe Values When are fail-safe values used? The safety function requires that fail-safe values (0) be used instead of process data for passivation of the entire F-I/O or individual channels of an F-I/O in the following cases. This applies both to digital channels (data type BOOL) as well as for analog channels (data type INT or DINT): When the F-system starts up When errors occur during safety-related communication (communication errors) between the F-CPU and F-I/O using the safety protocol in accordance with PROFIsafe When F-I/O faults and channel faults occur (such as wire break, short circuit, and discrepancy errors) As long as you enable passivation of the F-I/O with PASS_ON = 1 in the F-I/O DB (see below) As long as you disable the F-I/O with DISABLE = 1 in the F-I/O DB (see below) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 162 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.3 Process Data or Fail-Safe Values Fail-safe value output for F-I/O/channels of an F-I/O When passivation occurs for an F-I/O with inputs, the F-system provides the safety program with fail-safe values (0) in the PII instead of the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs of the F-I/O. The overflow or underflow of a channel of the SM 336; AI 6 x 13Bit or SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART is recognized by the F-system as an F-I/O/channel fault. The fail-safe value 0 is provided in place of 7FFFH (for overflow) or 8000H (for underflow) in the PII for the safety program. If you want to process fail-safe values other than "0" in the safety program for an F-I/O with inputs for analog channels of data type INT or DINT, you can assign individual fail-safe values for QBAD = 1 and value status = 0 or QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx = 1 (instructions JMP/JMPN, LABEL and MOVE). For details about the characteristics go to QBAD/PASS_OUT/DISABLED/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status (Page 171). WARNING For an F-I/O with digital input channels (data type BOOL), the value provided in the PII must always be processed in the safety program, regardless of the value status or QBAD/QBAD_I_xx. (S009) When passivation occurs in an F-I/O with outputs, the F-system outputs fail-safe values (0) at the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program in the PIQ. State of associated PAA/PIQ F-I/O with "RIOforFA-Safety" by ... profile with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs Startup of F-system F-I/O without "RIOforFASafety" profile with S71200/1500 F-CPUs F-I/O with S7-300/400 F-CPUs The F-system overwrites the PII/PIQ with fail-safe values (0). Communication errors F-I/O faults Channel faults in configuration of passivation for complete F-I/O Channel faults during configuration of channel-granular passivation The F-system overwrites the PII with fail-safe values (0). In the PII the values formed in the safety program are retained. The F-system overwrites the PII/PIQ with fail-safe values (0). For the affected channels: The F-system overwrites the PII/PIQ with fail-safe values (0). As long as passivation of the The F-system overwrites the PII/PIQ with fail-safe values (0). F-I/O is activated in the F-I/O DB with PASS_ON = 1 As long as the F-I/O is deactivated in the F-I/O DB with DISABLE = 1 The F-system overwrites the PII/PIQ with fail-safe values (0). - SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 163 F-I/O access 6.3 Process Data or Fail-Safe Values Reintegration of F-I/O/channels of an F-I/O The switchover from fail-safe values (0) to process data (reintegration of an F-I/O) takes place automatically or following user acknowledgment in the F-I/O DB. The reintegration method depends on the following: The reason for passivation of the F-I/O or channels of the F-I/O At F-I/Os without the "Channel failure acknowledge" channel parameter on the value of the ACK_NEC variable of the associated F-IO data blocks (Page 165). At F-I/Os with the "Channel failure acknowledge" channel parameter (for example Fmodules S7-1500 / ET 200 MP / F-modules SIMATIC S7-1200) on the value of the channel parameter. For fail-safe GSD based DP slaves / GSD based I/O devices with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile, consult the respective documentation. Note Note that for channel faults in the F-I/O, channel-granular passivation takes place if configured accordingly in the hardware and network editor. For the concerned channels, failsafe values (0) are output. Reintegration after channel faults reintegrates all channels whose faults were eliminated; faulty channels remain passivated. See also Configuring F-I/O (Page 53) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 164 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB 6.4 F-I/O DB Introduction An F-I/O DB is automatically generated for each F-I/O (in safety mode) when the F-I/O is configured in the hardware and network editor. The F-I/O DB contains tags that you can evaluate or can/must write to in the safety program. It is not permitted to change the initial values of the tags directly in the F-I/O DB. When an F-I/O is deleted, the associated F-I/O DB is also deleted. Access to an F-I/O DB You access tags of the F-I/O DB for the following reasons: For reintegration of F-I/O after communication errors, F-I/O faults, or channel faults If you want to passivate the F-I/O depending on particular states of your safety program (for example, group passivation) If you want to deactivate the F-I/O (for example, configuration control) For changing parameters for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices If you want to evaluate whether fail-safe values or process data are output SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 165 F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB 6.4.1 Tags of the F-I/O DB The following table presents the variables of an F-I/O DB: Tags that you can or must write Tags that you can evaluate Tag Data type Function Initial value PASS_ON BOOL 1=enable passivation 0 ACK_NEC BOOL 1=acknowledgment for reintegration required in the event of F-I/O or channel faults 1 ACK_REI BOOL 1=acknowledgment for reintegration 0 IPAR_EN BOOL Tag for parameter reassignment of fail-safe 0 GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices or, in the case of SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART, for enabling HART communication DISABLE* BOOL 1=Deactivate F-I/O 0 PASS_OUT BOOL Passivation output 1 QBAD BOOL 1=Fail-safe values are output 1 ACK_REQ BOOL 1=Acknowledgment request for reintegration 0 IPAR_OK BOOL Tag for parameter reassignment of fail-safe 0 GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices or, in the case of SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART, for enabling HART communication DIAG BYTE Non-fail safe service information 0 DISABLED* BOOL 1=F-I/O is deactivated 0 QBAD_I_xx BOOL 1=fail-safe values are output to input channel xx (S7-300/400) 1 1=fail-safe values are output to output channel xx (S7-300/400) 1 QBAD_O_xx BOOL * As of Safety-System Version 2.1 for S7-1200/1500 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 166 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB Differences in evaluation in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs and S7-300/400 The following table describes the differences in the evaluation of tags of the F-I/O DB and the value status depending on the F-I/O and F-CPU used. Tag in the F-I/O DB or value status ACK_NEC QBAD3 6.4.1.1 F-I/O with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile with S71200/1500 F-CPU F-I/O without profile "RIOforFA-Safety" with S71200/1500 F-CPU F-I/O with S7-300/400 FCPU --2 x x x x x PASS_OUT3 x x x QBAD_I_xx1 -- -- x QBAD_O_xx1 -- -- x Wertstatus1 x x -- 1 QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx display the validity of the channel value channel-granular and thus correspond to the inverted value status with S7-1200/1500. Value status or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx are not available with fail-safe DP GSD based slaves or fail-safe GSD based I/O devices without the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. 2 In the case of F-I/Os that support the "Channel failure acknowledge" channel parameter (for example S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules or S7-1200 F-modules), this replaces the ACK_NEC variable of the F-IO data block. 3 For details about the characteristics, see "QBAD/PASS_OUT/DISABLED/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status" PASS_ON The PASS_ON tag allows you to enable passivation of an F-I/O, for example, depending on particular states in your safety program. Using the PASS_ON tag in the F-I/O DB, you can passivate F-I/O; channel-granular passivation is not possible. As long as PASS_ON = 1, passivation of the associated F-I/O occurs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 167 F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB 6.4.1.2 ACK_NEC If an F-I/O fault is detected by the F-I/O, passivation of the relevant F-I/O occurs. If channel faults are detected and channel granular passivation is configured, the relevant channels are passivated. If passivation of the entire F-I/O is configured, all channels of the relevant F-I/O are passivated. Once the F-I/O fault or channel fault has been eliminated, reintegration of the relevant F-I/O occurs, depending on ACK_NEC: With ACK_NEC = 0, you can assign an automatic reintegration. With ACK_NEC = 1, you can assign a reintegration by user acknowledgment. WARNING The parameter assignment of the ACK_NEC = 0 tag is only allowed if automatic reintegration is permitted for the relevant process from a safety standpoint. (S010) Note The initial value for ACK_NEC is 1 after creation of the F-I/O DB. If you do not require automatic reintegration, you do not have to write ACK_NEC. See also After F-I/O or channel faults (Page 180) 6.4.1.3 ACK_REI When the F-system detects a communication error or an F-I/O fault for an F-I/O, the relevant F-I/O is passivated. If channel faults are detected and channel granular passivation is configured, the relevant channels are passivated. If passivation of the entire F-I/O is configured, all channels of the relevant F-I/O are passivated. Reintegration of the F-I/O/channels of the F-I/O after the fault has been eliminated requires a user acknowledgment with a positive edge at variable ACK_REI of the F-I/O DB: After every communication error After F-I/O or channel faults only with parameter assignment "Channel failure acknowledgement = manual" or ACK_NEC = 1 Reintegration after channel faults reintegrates all channels whose faults were eliminated. Acknowledgment is not possible until tag ACK_REQ = 1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 168 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB In your safety program, you must provide a user acknowledgment by means of the ACK_REI tag for each F-I/O. WARNING For the user acknowledgement, you must interconnect the ACK_REI tag of the F--I/O DB with a signal generated by an operator input. An interconnection with an automatically generated signal is not permitted. (S011) Note Alternatively, you can use the "ACK_GL" instruction to carry out reintegration of the F-I/O following communication errors or F-I/O/channel faults (ACK_GL: Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O in an F-runtime group (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 487)). 6.4.1.4 IPAR_EN The IPAR_EN tag corresponds to the iPar_EN_C tag in the PROFIsafe bus profile as of PROFIsafe Specification V1.20 and higher. Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices To find out when this tag must be set or reset when parameters of fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices are reassigned, consult the PROFIsafe Specification V1.20 or higher or the documentation for the fail-safe GSD based DP slave/GSD based I/O device. Note that IPAR_EN = 1 does not trigger passivation of the relevant F-I/O. If passivation is to occur when IPAR_EN = 1, you must also set tag PASS_ON = 1. HART communication with SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART If you set the IPAR_EN tag to "1" while parameter "HART_Tor" = "switchable" is assigned, the HART communication for the SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART is enabled. Setting this tag to "0" disables the HART communication. The F-SM acknowledges the enabled or disabled HART communication with tag IPAR_OK = 1 or 0. Enable HART communication only when your system is in a status, in which any reassignment of parameters for an associated HART device can be done without any risk. If you want to evaluate the "HART communication enabled" status in your safety program, e.g., for the purpose of programming interlocks, you must build up the information as shown in the following example. This is necessary to ensure that the information is properly available even if communication errors occur while the HART communication is enabled with IPAR_EN = 1. Only change the status of the IPAR_EN tag during this evaluation if there is no passivation due to a communication error or F-I/O or channel fault. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 169 F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB Example of enabling HART communication Additional information on HART communication with SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART can be found in the Automation System S7-300, ET 200M Distributed I/O System manual, Fail-Safe Signal Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19026151) manual and in the help on the F-module. 6.4.1.5 DISABLE The DISABLE variable allows you to deactivate an F-I/O. As long as DISABLI = 1, the associated F-I/Os are passivated. Diagnostics entries of the safety program may no longer be entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU for this F-I/O (for example, due to communication error). Existing diagnostics entries are marked as outgoing. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 170 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB 6.4.1.6 QBAD/PASS_OUT/DISABLED/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status The following table set outs differences in the reaction of the channel values and QBAD, PASS_OUT, DISABLED, QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx variables and of the value status depending on the F-I/O and F-CPU used. Fail-safe value output after... F-I/O with "RIOforFASafety" profile with S71200/1500 F-CPU F-I/O without profile F-I/O with S7-300/400 F-CPU "RIOforFA-Safety" with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs Startup of F-system QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 Communication errors DISABLED unchanged For all channels: For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) F-I/O faults Channel faults in configuration of passivation for complete F-I/O Channel faults during configuration of channel-granular passivation Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0* QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* QBAD, PASS_OUT and DISABLED unchanged QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 For the affected channels: DISABLED unchanged Channel value = fail-safe value (0) For the affected channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0 Channel value = fail-safe value (0) For the affected channels: QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* Value status = 0* As long as passivation of the F-I/O is activated in the F-I/O DB with PASS_ON = 1 QBAD = 1, PASS_OUT and DISABLED unchanged For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0* QBAD = 1, PASS_OUT unchanged For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* As long as the F-I/O is deactivated in the F-I/O DB with DISABLE = 1 QBAD, PASS_OUT and DISABLED = 1 - For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0* * Value status or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx are not available for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices without the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 171 F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB 6.4.1.7 ACK_REQ When the F-system detects a communication error or an F-I/O fault or channel fault for an F-I/O, the relevant F-I/O or individual channels of the F-I/O are passivated. ACK_REQ = 1 signals that user acknowledgment is required for reintegration of the relevant F-I/O or channels of the F-I/O. The F-system sets ACK_REQ = 1 as soon as the fault has been eliminated and user acknowledgment is possible. For channel-granular passivation, the F-system sets ACK_REQ = 1 as soon as the channel fault is corrected. User acknowledgment is possible for this fault. Once acknowledgment has occurred, the F-system resets ACK_REQ to 0. Note For F-I/O with outputs, acknowledgment after F-I/O or channel faults may only be possible some minutes after the fault has been eliminated, until the necessary test signal is applied (see F-I/O manuals). 6.4.1.8 IPAR_OK The IPAR_OK tag corresponds to the iPar_OK_S tag in the PROFIsafe bus profile, PROFIsafe Specification V1.20 and higher. Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices To find out how to evaluate this tag when parameters of fail-safe GSD based DP slaves or GSD based I/O devices are reassigned, consult the PROFIsafe Specification V1.20 or higher or the documentation for the fail-safe GSD based DP slave/GSD based I/O device. For HART communication with SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART see Chapter IPAR_EN (Page 169). 6.4.1.9 DIAG The DIAG tag provides non-fail-safe information (1 byte) about errors or faults that have occurred for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits are saved until you perform an acknowledgment with the ACK_REI tag or until automatic reintegration takes place. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 172 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Timeout detected by F-I/O The PROFIBUS/PROFINET connection between F-CPU and F-I/O is faulty. * Check the PROFIBUS/PROFINET connection and ensure that there are no external sources of interference. * Check the parameter assignment of the F-I/O. If necessary, set a higher value for the monitoring time. Recompile the hardware configuration, and download it to the F-CPU. Recompile the safety program. * Check the diagnostics buffer of the F-I/O. * Turn the power of the F-I/O off and back on. The value of the F-monitoring time for the F-I/O is set too low. The F-I/O are receiving invalid parameter assignment data or Internal F-I/O fault Replace F-I/O or Internal F-CPU fault Replace F-CPU Bit 1 F-I/O fault or channel fault detected by F-I/O1 See F-I/O manuals See F-I/O manuals Bit 2 CRC error or sequence number error detected by FI/O See description for bit 0 See description for bit 0 Bit 3 Reserved -- -- Bit 4 Timeout detected by Fsystem See description for bit 0 See description for bit 0 Bit 5 Sequence number error detected by F-system2 See description for bit 0 See description for bit 0 Bit 6 CRC-error detected by Fsystem See description for bit 0 See description for bit 0 Bit 7 Addressing error3 -- Contact Service & Support 1 Not for F-I/O that support the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. 2 For S7-300/400 F-CPUs only 3 For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs only SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 173 F-I/O access 6.4 F-I/O DB 6.4.2 Accessing tags of the F-I/O DB Name of the F-I/O DB An F-I/O DB is automatically generated for each F-I/O when the F-I/O is configured in the hardware and network editor and a name is generated at the same time. The name is formed by combining the fixed prefix "F", the start address of the F-I/O, and the names entered in the properties for the F-I/O in the hardware and network editor (example: F00004_F-DI24xDC24V_1). Changing the name and number of the F-I/O DB The name and number of the F-I/O DB are assigned automatically when the F-I/O are configured. The naming scheme depends on the setting in the Safety Administration Editor ("Specifies driver I-DBs without prefix (Page 90)"). You change the number in the "Properties" tab of the associated F-I/O. You change the name by renaming the F-I/O. Rule for accessing tags of the F-I/O DB Tags of the F-I/O DB of an F-I/O can only be accessed from the F-runtime group from which the channels of this F-I/O are accessed (if access is made). "Fully qualified DB access" You can access the tags of the F-I/O DB via a "fully qualified DB access" (that is, by specifying the name of the F-I/O DB and by specifying the name of the tag). Example of evaluating the QBAD tag See also F-I/O DB (Page 165) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 174 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Overview In the following you can find information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O. Signal sequence charts The signal sequences presented below represent typical signal sequences for the indicated behavior. Actual signal sequences and, in particular, the relative position of the status change of individual signals can deviate from the given signal sequences within the scope of known "fuzzy" cyclic program execution factors, depending on the following: The F-I/O used The F-CPU used The cycle time of the (F-)OB in which the associated F-runtime group is called The target rotation time of the PROFIBUS DP or the update time of the PROFINET IO Note The signal sequences shown refer to the status of signals in the user's safety program. 6.5.1 After startup of F-system Behavior after a startup Fail-safe value output after startup of the F-system F-I/O with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile with S7-1200/1500 F-CPU Passivation of the entire FI/O occurs during startup. QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 For all channels: For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0* F-I/O without profile "RIOforFA-Safety" with S7-1200/1500 F-CPU Every F-I/O with S7-300/400 F-CPU QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* * Value status or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx are not available for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices without the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 175 F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of the F-I/O, i.e. the provision of process values in the PII or the output of process values provided in the PIQ at the fail-safe outputs, takes place automatically, regardless of the setting at the ACK_NEC tag or the configuration "Channel failure acknowledge", no sooner than the second cycle of the F-runtime group after startup of the F-system. You can find additional information on pending F-communication, F-I/O or channel errors during startup of the F-system in the sections After communication errors (Page 178) and After F-I/O or channel faults (Page 180). For fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile, consult the respective documentation for the fail-safe GSD based DP slave/GSD based I/O device. Depending on the F-I/O you are using and the cycle time of the F-runtime group and PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO, several cycles of the F-runtime group can elapse before reintegration occurs. If communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O takes longer to establish than the Fmonitoring time set in the properties for the F-I/O, automatic reintegration does not take place. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 176 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Signal sequence for passivation and reintegration of F-I/O after F-system startup Example for an F-I/O with inputs: Startup of F-system/passivation Automatic reintegration (e.g. third cycle) WARNING When an F-CPU is switched from STOP to RUN mode, the standard user program starts up in the usual way. When the safety program is started up, all F-DBs are initialized with the values from the load memory - as is the case with a cold restart. This means that saved error information is lost. The F-system automatically reintegrates the F-I/O, as described above. An operating error or an internal error can also trigger a startup of the safety program with the values from the load memory. If your process does not allow such a startup, you must program a restart/startup protection in the safety program: The output of process data must be blocked until manually enabled. This enable must not occur until it is safe to output process data and faults have been corrected. (S008) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 177 F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O 6.5.2 After communication errors Behavior after communication errors Fail-safe value output after communication errors F-I/O with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile with S7-1200/1500 FCPU F-I/O without profile If a communication error between the F-CPU and the F-I/O is detected, all channels of the entire F-I/O are passivated. QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 For all channels: For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Channel value = fail-safe value (0) "RIOforFA-Safety" with S7-1200/1500 F-CPU Value status = 0* Every F-I/O with S7-300/400 F-CPU QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* * Value status or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx are not available for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices without the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. Reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of the relevant F-I/O, that is, provision of process data in the PII or output of process data provided in the PIQ at the failsafe outputs, takes place only when the following occurs: All communication errors have been eliminated and the F-system has set tag ACK_REQ = 1 A user acknowledgment with a positive edge has occurred: - At the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB (Page 168) or - At the ACK_REI_GLOB input of the "ACK_GL" instruction (ACK_GL: Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O in an F-runtime group (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 487)) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 178 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Signal sequence for passivation and reintegration of F-I/O after communication errors Example for an F-I/O with inputs: Communication error/passivation All communication errors have been eliminated Reintegration See also Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller (Page 187) Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or Idevice (Page 192) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 179 F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O 6.5.3 After F-I/O or channel faults Behavior after F-I/O faults Fail-safe value output after F-I/O faults F-I/O with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile with S7-1200/1500 FCPU F-I/O without profile If an F-I/O fault is detected by the F-system, passivation of all channels of the entire F-I/O occurs. QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 For all channels: For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Channel value = fail-safe value (0) "RIOforFA-Safety" with S71200/1500 F-CPU Value status = 0* Every F-I/O with S7-300/400 F-CPU QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* * Value status or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx are not available for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices without the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. Behavior after channel fault Fail-safe value output after channel faults F-I/O with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile with S7-1200/1500 FCPU F-I/O without profile When passivation for complete F-I/O is configured: QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 If a channel fault is detected by the F-system, passivation of all channels of the entire F-I/O occurs. For all channels: For all channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Channel value = fail-safe value (0) "RIOforFA-Safety" with S71200/1500 F-CPU Every F-I/O with S7-300/400 F-CPU QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 Value status = 0* QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* With configuration of channel-granular passivation: QBAD and PASS_OUT unchanged QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 QBAD and PASS_OUT = 1 If a channel fault is detected by the F-system, passivation of all the affected channels of the entire F-I/O occurs. For the affected channels: For the affected channels: For the affected channels: Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0* QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx = 1* Channel value = fail-safe value (0) Value status = 0 * Value status or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx are not available for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices without the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 180 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of the relevant F-I/O or the relevant channels of the F-I/O, that is, provision of process data in the PII or output of process data provided in the PIQ at the failsafe outputs, takes place only when the following occurs: All F-I/O or channel faults have been eliminated. If you have configured channel-granular passivation for the F-I/O, the relevant channels are reintegrated once the fault is corrected; any faulty channels remain passivated. Reintegration is performed depending on your setting for the ACK_NEC tag or the "Channel failure acknowledge" parameter (configuration of the S7-1500/ET 200MP F-module and S7-1200 F-module) With ACK_NEC = 0 or the configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = automatic", automatic reintegration is performed as soon as the F-system detects that the fault has been corrected. For F-I/O with inputs, reintegration takes place right away. For F-I/O with outputs or F-I/O with inputs and outputs, depending on the F-I/O you are using, reintegration can take several minutes, first after the necessary test signals have been applied, which are used by the F-I/O to determine that the fault has been eliminated. With ACK_NEC = 1 or the configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = manual", reintegration is performed only as a result of user acknowledgment with a positive edge at the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB or at the ACK_REI_GLOB input of the "ACK_GL" instruction. Acknowledgment can be made as soon as the F-system detects that the fault has been eliminated and tag ACK_REQ = 1 has been set. For fail-safe GSD based I/O devices with "RIOforFA-Safety" profile, consult the respective documentation for the fail-safe GSD based I/O device . WARNING Following a power failure of the F-I/O lasting less than the assigned F-monitoring time for the F-I/O, automatic reintegration can occur regardless of your setting for the ACK_NEC tag, as described for the case when ACK_NEC = 0 or configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = automatic". If automatic reintegration is not permitted for the relevant process in this case, you must program startup protection by evaluating tags QBAD or QBAD_I_xx and QBAD_O_xx or value status or PASS_OUT. In the event of a power failure of the F-I/O lasting longer than the specified F-monitoring time for the F-I/O, the F-system detects a communication error. (S012) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 181 F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Signal sequence for passivation and reintegration of F-I/O after F-I/O faults or channel faults when ACK_NEC = 0 or configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = automatic" (for passivation of entire F-I/O after channel faults) Example for an F-I/O with inputs: F-I/O or channel faults Passivation F-I/O or channel faults corrected Automatic reintegration Signal sequence for passivation and reintegration of F-I/O after F-I/O faults or channel faults when ACK_NEC = 1 or configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = manual" (for passivation of entire F-I/O after channel faults) For the signal sequence for passivation and reintegration of F-I/O after F-I/O or channel faults when ACK_NEC = 1 or configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = manual" (initial value), see After communication errors (Page 178). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 182 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Signal sequence for passivation and reintegration of F-I/O after channel faults when ACK_NEC = 1 or configuration "Channel failure acknowledge = manual" (for channel-granular passivation) Example for an F-I/O with inputs: Channel fault for channel 0/passivation of channel 0 Channel fault for channel 1/passivation of channel 1 Channel fault eliminated for channel 0 Reintegration of channel 0 Channel fault eliminated for channel 1 Reintegration of channel 1 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 183 F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O 6.5.4 Group passivation Programming a group passivation If you want to enable passivation of additional F-I/O when an F-I/O or a channel of an F-I/O is passivated by the F-system, you can use the PASS_OUT/PASS_ON tags to perform group passivation of the associated F-I/O. Group passivation by means of PASS_OUT/PASS_ON can, for example, be used to force simultaneous reintegration of all F-I/O after startup of the F-system. For group passivation, you must OR all PASS_OUT tags of the F-I/O in the group and assign the result to all PASS_ON tags of the F-I/O in the group. During use of fail-safe values (0) due to group passivation by means of PASS_ON = 1, the QBAD tag of the F-I/O of this group = 1. Note Note the different behavior of PASS_OUT for F-I/O with/without "RIOforFA-Safety" profile (see table in section QBAD/PASS_OUT/DISABLED/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status (Page 171)). Example of group passivation SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 184 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-I/O access 6.5 Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of F-I/O Reintegration of F-I/O passivated by group passivation occurs automatically, if a reintegration (automatic or through user acknowledgment) occurs for the F-I/O that triggered the group passivation (PASS_OUT = 0). Signal sequence for group passivation following communication error Example for two F-I/O with inputs: Communication error in F-I/O A Passivation of F-I/O A Passivation of F-I/O B Communication error in F-I/O A corrected and acknowledged Reintegration F-I/O A and B SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 185 Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.1 7 Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller Options for user acknowledgment Depending on the result of the risk analysis, you have the following options for implementing a user acknowledgment: An acknowledgment key that you connect to an F-I/O with inputs An acknowledgment key that you connect to an standard I/O with inputs An HMI system User acknowledgment by means of acknowledgment key Note When you implement user acknowledgment by means of acknowledgment key, and a communication error, an F-I/O fault, or a channel fault occurs in the F-I/O to which the acknowledgment key is connected, then it will not be possible to acknowledge the reintegration of this F-I/O. This "blocking" can only be removed by a STOP-to-RUN transition of the F-CPU. Consequently, it is recommended that you also provide for an acknowledgment by means of an HMI system, in order to acknowledge reintegration of an F-I/O to which an acknowledgment key is connected. A user acknowledgment may be issued using an acknowledgment key connected to a standard I/O with inputs if this risk analysis allows this. User acknowledgment by means of an HMI system For implementation of a user acknowledgment by means of an HMI system, the ACK_OP: Fail-safe acknowledgment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 577) instruction is required. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 187 Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.1 Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller Procedure for programming user acknowledgment by means of an HMI system (S7-300, S7-400) 1. Select the "ACK_OP" instruction in the "Instructions" task card and place it in your safety program. The acknowledgment signal for evaluating user acknowledgments is provided at output OUT of ACK_OP. 2. On your HMI system, set up a field for manual entry of an "acknowledgment value" of "6" (1st step in acknowledgment) and an "acknowledgment value" of "9" (2nd step in acknowledgment). or Assign function key 1 to transfer an "acknowledgment value" of "6" (1st step in acknowledgment) once, and function key 2 to transfer an "acknowledgment value" of "9" (2nd step in acknowledgment) once. You need to assign the in/out IN (in the data area of the ACK_OP instruction) to the field or the function keys. 3. Optional: In your HMI system, evaluate output Q in the instance DB of ACK_OP to show the time frame within which the 2nd step in acknowledgment must occur or to indicate that the 1st step in acknowledgment has already occurred. If you want to perform a user acknowledgment exclusively from a programming device or PC using the watch table (monitor/modify tag) without having to disable safety mode, then you must transfer an operand (memory word or DBW of a DB of the standard user program) at in/out IN when calling ACK_OP. You can then transfer "acknowledgment values" "6" and "9" on the programming device or PC by modifying the memory word or DBW of a DB once. The memory word or DBW of a DB must not be written by the program. Note If you connect the in/out IN to a memory word or DBW of a DB, you have use a separate memory word or DBW of a DB of the standard user program for each instance of the ACK_OP instruction at the in/out IN. WARNING The two acknowledgment steps must not be triggered by one single operation, for example by automatically storing them along with the time conditions in a program and using a function key to trigger them. Having two separate acknowledgment steps also prevents erroneous triggering of an acknowledgment by your non-fail-safe HMI system. (S013) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 188 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.1 Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the WARNING If you have HMI systems and F-CPUs that are interconnected and use the ACK_OP instruction for fail-safe acknowledgment, you need to ensure that the intended F-CPU will be addressed before you perform the two acknowledgment steps. * To do this, store a network-wide* unique name for the F-CPU in a DB of your standard user program in each F-CPU. * In your HMI system, set up a field from which you can read out the F-CPU name from the DB online before executing the two acknowledgment steps. * Optional: in your HMI system, set up a field to permanently store the F-CPU name. Then, you can determine whether the intended F-CPU is being addressed by simply comparing the FCPU name read out online with the permanently stored name. (S014) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. Note The configuration of your operator control and monitoring system does not have any effect on the collective F-signature. Procedure for programming user acknowledgment by means of an HMI system (S7-1200, S7-1500) 1. Select the "ACK_OP" instruction in the "Instructions" task card and place it in your safety program. The acknowledgment signal for evaluating user acknowledgments is provided at output OUT of ACK_OP. 2. Assign the ACK_ID input an identifier between 9 and 30000 for the acknowledgment. 3. Assign the in/out IN a memory word or DBW of a DB of the standard user program. Note You need to provide the in/out parameter IN with a separate memory word or DBW of a DB of the standard user program for each instance of the ACK_OP instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 189 Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.1 Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller 4. On your HMI system, set up a field for manual entry of an "acknowledgment value" of "6" (1st step in acknowledgment) and the "Identifier" configured at the ACK_ID input (2nd step in acknowledgment). or Allocate a function key 1 for a one-time transfer of the "acknowledgment value" of "6" (1st step in acknowledgment) and a function key 2 for a one-time transfer of the "Identifier" set at the ACK_ID input (2nd step in acknowledgment). You need to assign memory word or the DBW of the DB of the standard user program assigned to the in/out IN to the field or the function keys. 5. Optional: In your HMI system, evaluate output Q in the instance DB of ACK_OP to show the time frame within which the 2nd step in acknowledgment must occur or to indicate that the 1st step in acknowledgment has already occurred. WARNING The two acknowledgment steps must not be triggered by one single operation, for example by automatically storing them along with the time conditions in a program and using a function key to trigger them. Having two separate acknowledgment steps also prevents erroneous triggering of an acknowledgment by your non-fail-safe HMI system. (S013) WARNING If you have HMI systems and F-CPUs that are interconnected and use the ACK_OP instruction for fail-safe acknowledgment, you need to ensure that the intended F-CPU will be addressed before you perform the two acknowledgment steps. Alternative 1: * The value for each identifier of the acknowledgment (ACK_ID input; data type: INT) can be freely selected in the range from 9 to 30000, but must be unique network-wide* for all instances of the ACK_OP instruction. You must supply the ACK_ID input with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct read or write access in the associated instance DB is not permitted in the safety program! Alternative 2: * To do this, store a network-wide* unique name for the F-CPU in a DB of your standard user program in each F-CPU. * In your HMI system, set up a field from which you can read out the F-CPU name from the DB online before executing the two acknowledgment steps. * Optional: in your HMI system, set up a field to permanently store the F-CPU name. Then, you can determine whether the intended F-CPU is being addressed by simply comparing the F-CPU name read out online with the permanently stored designation. (S047) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 190 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.1 Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. Note The supply of the IN input/output of the ACK_OP instruction as well as the configuration of your operator control and monitoring system do not have any effect on the F-collective signature, the F-SW collective signature or the signature of the block that calls the ACK_OP instruction. Changes to the supply of the IN input/output or to the configuration of your operator control and monitoring system therefore do not result in a changed F-collective signature/F-SW collective signature/signature of the calling block. Example of procedure for programming a user acknowledgment for reintegrating an F-I/O 1. Optional: set the ACK_NEC tag in the respective F-I/O DB (Page 168) to "0" if automatic reintegration (without user acknowledgment) is to take place after an F-I/O fault or a channel fault. WARNING The parameter assignment of the ACK_NEC = 0 tag is only allowed if automatic reintegration is permitted for the relevant process from a safety standpoint. (S010) 2. Optional: Evaluate the QBAD or QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx (S7-300/400) tags or value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) or DIAG in the respective F-I/O DB to trigger an indicator light in the event of an error, and/or generate error messages on the HMI system in your standard user program by evaluating the above tags or the value status. These messages can be evaluated before performing the acknowledgment operation. Alternatively, you can evaluate the diagnostic buffer of the F-CPU. 3. Optional: Evaluate the ACK_REQ tag in the respective F-I/O DB, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system, to query or to indicate whether user acknowledgment is required. 4. Assign the input of the acknowledgment key or the OUT output of the ACK_OP instruction to the ACK_REI tag in the respective F-I/O DB or the ACK_REI_GLOB input of the ACK_GL instruction (see above). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 191 Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.2 Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device 7.2 Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device Options for user acknowledgment You can implement a user acknowledgment by means of: An HMI system that you can use to access the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device An acknowledgment key that you connect to an F-I/O with inputs that is assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device An acknowledgment key that you connect to an F-I/O with inputs that is assigned to the F-CPU of the DP master/IO controller These three options are illustrated in the figure below. 1. User acknowledgment by means of an HMI system with which you can access the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-device The ACK_OP: Fail-safe acknowledgment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 577) instruction is required to implement user acknowledgment with an HMI system that you can use to access the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-device. Programming procedure Follow the procedure described in "Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller (Page 187)" under "Programming procedure ...". From your HMI system, you can then directly access the instance DB of ACK_OP in the I-slave/I-Device. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 192 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.2 Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the 2. User acknowledgment by means of an acknowledgment key at an F-I/O with inputs that are assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-device Note In the event of a communication error, F-I/O fault, or channel fault in the F-I/O to which the acknowledgment key is connected, an acknowledgment for reintegration of this F-I/O is no longer possible. This "blocking" can only be removed by a STOP-to-RUN transition of the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device. Consequently, it is recommended that you also provide for an acknowledgment by means of an HMI system that you can use to access the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device, in order to acknowledge reintegration of an F-I/O to which an acknowledgment key is connected (see 1). 3. User acknowledgment by means of an acknowledgment key at an F-I/O with inputs that are assigned to the F-CPU of the DP master/IO controller If you want to use the acknowledgment key that is assigned to the F-CPU at the DP master/IO controller to perform user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of an I-slave/I-device as well, you must transmit the acknowledgment signal from the safety program in the F-CPU of the DP master/IO controller to the safety program in the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-device using safety-related master-I-slave/IO controller-I-device communication. Programming procedure 1. Place the SENDDP (Page 588) instruction in the safety program in the F-CPU of the DP master/IO controller. 2. Place the RCVDP (Page 588) instruction in the safety program in the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device. 3. Supply an input SD_BO_xx of SENDDP with the input of the acknowledgment key. 4. The acknowledgment signal for evaluating user acknowledgments is now available at the corresponding RD_BO_xx output of RCVDP. The acknowledgment signal can now be read in the program sections in which further processing is to take place with fully qualified access directly in the associated instance DB (for example, "RCVDP_DB".RD_BO_02). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 193 Implementation of user acknowledgment 7.2 Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device 5. Supply the corresponding input SUBBO_xx of RCVDP with FALSE (fail-safe value 0) to ensure that user acknowledgment is not accidentally triggered before communication is established for the first time after startup of the sending and receiving F-systems, or in the event of a safety-related communication error. Note If a communication error, an F-I/O error, or a channel fault occurs at the F-I/O to which the acknowledgment key is connected, then an acknowledgment for reintegration of this F-I/O will no longer be possible. This "blocking" can only be removed by a STOP-to-RUN transition of the F-CPU of the DP master/IO controller. Consequently, it is recommended that you also provide for an acknowledgment by means of an HMI system that you can use to access the F-CPU of the DP master/IO controller, in order to acknowledge reintegration of the F-I/O to which an acknowledgment key is connected. If a safety-related master-I-slave/IO controller-I-Device communication error occurs, the acknowledgment signal cannot be transmitted, and an acknowledgment for reintegration of safety-related communication is no longer possible. This "blocking" can only be removed by a STOP-to-RUN transition of the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device. Consequently, it is recommended that you also provide for an acknowledgment by means of an HMI system that you can use to access the F-CPU of the I-slave/I-Device, in order to acknowledge reintegration of the safety-related communication for transmission of the acknowledgment signal (see 1). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 194 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 8 Data exchange between standard user program and safety program You have the option of transferring data between the safety program and the standard user program. Tags can be transferred using DBs, F-DBs and bit memory: From the standard user program From the safety program Read access Write access Permitted Permitted Tag from F-DB Permitted Not permitted Bit memory Permitted Permitted Tag from DB Read access Write access A tag from the DB can be read-accessed or write-accessed Permitted Permitted Bit memory can be read-accessed or writeaccessed You can also access the process image of the standard I/O and F-I/O: From the standard user program From the safety program Read access Write access Read access Write access Process image of standard I/O PII Permitted Permitted Permitted Not permitted PIQ Permitted Permitted Not permitted Permitted Process image of F-I/O PII Permitted Not permitted Permitted Not permitted PIQ Permitted Not permitted Not permitted Permitted Decoupling of the safety program from the standard program For data exchange between standard user program and safety program, we recommend that you define special data blocks (transfer data blocks) in which the data to be exchanged is stored. This action allows you to decouple the blocks of the standard and the safety program. The changes in the standard program do not affect the safety program (and vice versa) provided these data blocks are not modified. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 195 Data exchange between standard user program and safety program 8.1 Data Transfer from the Safety Program to the Standard User Program 8.1 Data Transfer from the Safety Program to the Standard User Program Data transfer from the safety program to the standard user program The standard user program can read all data of the safety program, for example using symbolic (fully qualified) accesses to the following: The instance DBs of the F-FBs ("Name of instance DB".Signal_x) F-DBs (for example "Name of F_DB".Signal_1) The process image input and output of F-I/O (for example "Emergency_Stop_Button_1" (I 5.0)) Note For S7-300/400 F-CPUs The process image input of F-I/O is updated not only at the start of the main safety block, but also by the standard operating system. To find the standard operating system update times, refer to the Help on STEP 7 under "Process image input and output". For F-CPUs that support process image partitions, also bear in mind the update times when process image partitions are used. For this reason, when the process image input of F-I/O is accessed in the standard user program, it is possible to obtain different values than in the safety program. The differing values can occur due to: * Different update times * Use of fail-safe values in the safety program To obtain the same values in the standard user program as in the safety program, you must not access the process image input in the standard program until after execution of an F-runtime group. In this case, you can also evaluate the QBAD or QBAD_I_xx tag in the associated F-I/O DB in the standard user program, in order to find out whether the process image input is receiving fail-safe values (0) or process data. When using process image partitions, also make sure that the process image is not updated by the standard operating system or by the UPDAT_PI instruction between execution of an F-runtime group and evaluation of the process image input in the standard user program. Note For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The process image input of F-I/O is updated prior to processing the main safety block. You can also write safety program data directly to the standard user program (see also the table of supported operand areas in: Restrictions in the programming languages FBD/LAD (Page 119)): SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 196 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Data exchange between standard user program and safety program 8.2 Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program Data block/bit memory In order to write safety program data directly to the standard user program (e.g., DIAG output of the SENDDP instruction), you can write to data blocks of the standard user program from the safety program. However, a written tag must not be read in the safety program itself. You can also write to bit memory in the safety program. However, written bit memory must not be read in the safety program itself. Process image output You can write to the process image output (PIQ) of standard I/O in the safety program, for example for display purposes. The PIQ must not be read in the safety program. 8.2 Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program Data transfer from standard user program to safety program As a basic principle, only fail-safe data or fail-safe signals from F-I/O and other safety programs (in other F-CPUs) can be processed in the safety program, as standard tags are unsafe. If you have to process tags from the standard user program in the safety program, however, you can evaluate either bit memory from the standard user program, tags from a standard DB, or the process image input (PII) of standard I/O in the safety program (see table of supported operand areas in: Restrictions in the programming languages FBD/LAD (Page 119)). Note that structural changes to standard data blocks which are used in the safety program lead to inconsistencies of the safety program and possibly to the password being requested. In this case the collective F-signature is the same as the original again after compilation. To prevent this effect, use "interprocess communication blocks" between the standard user program and the safety program. WARNING Because these tags are not generated safely, you must carry out additional process-specific validity checks in the safety program to ensure that no dangerous states can arise. If bit memory, a tag of a standard DB, or an input of standard I/O is used in both F-runtime groups, you must perform the validity check separately in each F-runtime group. (S015) To facilitate checks, all PLC tags from the standard user program that are evaluated in the safety program are included in the safety summary (Page 341). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 197 Data exchange between standard user program and safety program 8.2 Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program Bit memory In order to process tags of the standard user program in the safety program, you can also read bit memory in the safety program. However, read bit memory must not be written in the safety program itself. Data block In order to process tags of the standard user program in the safety program, you can read tags from data blocks of the standard user program in the safety program. However, a read tag must not be written in the safety program itself. Process image of the inputs You can read the process image input (PII) of standard I/O in the safety program. The PII must not be written in the safety program. Examples: Programming validity checks Use Comparison (Page 511) instructions to check whether tags from the standard user program exceed or fall below permitted high and low limits. You can then influence your safety function with the result of the comparison. Use the ---( S )---: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 404), ---( R )---: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 403) or SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 406) instructions, for example, with tags from the standard user program to allow a motor to be switched off, but not switched on. For switch-on sequences, use the AND logic operation instruction, for example, to logically combine tags from the standard user program with switch-on conditions that you derive from fail-safe tags. If you want to process tags from the standard user program in the safety program, please bear in mind that there is not a sufficiently simple method of checking validity for all tags. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 198 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Data exchange between standard user program and safety program 8.2 Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program Reading tags from the standard user program that can change during the runtime of an F-runtime group If you want to read tags from the standard user program (bit memory, tags of a standard DB, or PII of standard I/O) in the safety program, and these tags can be changed - either by the standard user program or an operator control and monitoring system - during runtime of the F-runtime group in which they are read (for example because your standard user program is being processed by a higher-priority cyclic interrupt), you must use bit memory or tags of a standard DB for this purpose. (S7-1200/1500) You must create the standard OB with the same priority as the F-OB. The standard OB must be called phase-shifted to the F-OB and describe the variables in this. We recommend that you select the phase shift so that the standard OB is executed immediately before the F-OB. (S7-300/400) You must write the bit memory or tags of a standard DB with the tags from the standard user program immediately before calling the F-runtime group. You are then permitted to access only this bit memory or these tags of a standard DB in the safety program. Also note that clock memory that you defined when configuring your F-CPU in the "Properties" tab can change during runtime of the F-runtime group, since clock memory runs asynchronously to the F-CPU cycle. Note The F-CPU can go to STOP if this is not observed. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 199 9 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.1 Overview of communication Introduction This section gives an overview of the safety-related communication options in SIMATIC Safety F-systems. Options for safety-related communication Safety-related communication On subnet Additional hardware required I-slave-slave communication PROFIBUS DP -- IO controller-IO controller communication PROFINET IO PN/PN coupler Master-master communication PROFIBUS DP DP/DP coupler IO controller-I-device communication PROFINET IO -- Master-I-slave communication PROFIBUS DP -- I-slave-I-slave communication PROFIBUS DP -- IO controller-I-slave communication PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP IE/PB link Safety-related communication via S7 connections Industrial Ethernet -- IO controller-IO controller communication for S7 Distributed Safety PROFINET IO PN/PN coupler Master-master communication for S7 Distributed Safety PROFIBUS DP DP/DP coupler Safety-related communication to S7 Distributed Safety or S7 F Systems via S7 connections Industrial Ethernet -- Safety-related CPU-CPU communication: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 201 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Overview of safety-related communication via PROFIBUS DP The figure below presents an overview of the 4 options for safety-related communication via PROFIBUS DP in SIMATIC Safety F-systems with S7-300/400 F-CPUs. Safety-related master-master communication Safety-related master-I-slave communication Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Safety-related I-slave-slave communication Overview of safety-related communication via PROFINET IO The figure below presents an overview of the four options for safety-related communication via PROFINET IO in SIMATIC Safety F-systems with S7-300/400 F-CPUs. If an IE/PB-link is used, safety-related communication is possible between assigned I-slaves. Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication integrating an IO controller SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 202 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Safety-related CPU-CPU communication via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO In safety-related CPU-CPU communication, a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type INT or BOOL is transmitted fail-safe between the safety programs in F-CPUs of DP masters/I-slaves or IO controllers/I-devices. The data are transferred using the SENDDP instruction for sending and the RCVDP instruction for receiving. The data are stored in configured transfer areas of the devices. Each transfer area consists of one input and one output address area. Safety-related I-slave-slave communication via PROFIBUS DP Safety-related I-slave-slave communication with F-I/O is possible in a DP slave that supports safety-related I-slave-slave communication, for example with all ET 200SP F-modules with IM 155-6 DP HF, firmware version > V3.1, with all ET 200S F-modules with IM 151-1 HF, with all fail-safe S7-300 signal modules with IM 153-2, as of article number 6ES7153-2BA01-0XB0, firmware version > V4.0.0. Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an I-slave and FI/O of a DP slave takes place using direct data exchange, as in the standard program. The process image is used to access the channels of the F-I/O in the safety program of the FCPU of the I-slave. Safety-related CPU-CPU communication via Industrial Ethernet Safety-related CPU-CPU communication via Industrial Ethernet is possible using S7 connections, both from and to the following: S7-300 F-CPUs via the integrated PROFINET interface S7-400 F-CPUs via the integrated PROFINET interface or a CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 Advanced-IT In safety-related communication via S7 connections, a specified amount of fail-safe data of data type BOOL, INT, WORD, DINT, DWORD, or TIME is transferred fail-safe between the safety programs of the F-CPUs linked by the S7 connection. The data transfer makes use of the SENDS7 instruction for sending and the RCVS7 instruction for receiving. Data are exchanged using one F-DB ("F-communication DB") each at the sender and receiver ends. Safety-related CPU-CPU communication to S7 Distributed Safety or F-systems Safety-related communication is possible from F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety to F-CPUs in S7 Distributed Safety or S7 F-systems. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 203 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.2 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication 9.1.2.1 Configure safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Introduction Safety-related communication between safety programs of the F-CPUs of IO controllers takes place over a PN/PN coupler that you set up between the F-CPUs. For 416F-2 DP CPUs without an integrated PROFINET interface, use a CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 Advanced-IT. Note Deactivate the "Data validity display DIA" parameter in the properties for the PN/PN coupler in the hardware and network editor. This is the default setting. Otherwise, safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication is not possible. Configuring transfer areas You must configure one transfer area for output data and one transfer area for input data in the hardware and network editor for each safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs in the PN/PN coupler. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). One transfer area for output data and one transfer area for input data must be configured in the PN/PN coupler for each of the two communication connections. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 204 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Rules for defining transfer areas The transfer area for output data and the transfer area for input data for the data to be sent must begin with the same start address. A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for output data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for input data. The transfer area for input data and the transfer area for output data for the data to be received must begin with the same start address. A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for input data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for output data. Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Switch to the network view of the hardware and network editor. 3. Select a PN/PN Coupler X1 and a PN/PN Coupler X2 from "Other field devices\PROFINET IO\Gateway\Siemens AG\PN/PN Coupler" in the "Hardware catalog" task card and insert them into the network view of the hardware and network editor. 4. Connect the PN interface of the F-CPU 1 with the PN interface of the PN/PN Coupler X1 and the PN interface of the F-CPU 2 with the PN interface of PN/PN Coupler X2. 5. Switch to the device view of PN/PN Coupler X1 for bidirectional communication connections i.e. where each F-CPU is both to send and to receive data. Select the following modules from "IN/OUT" in the "Hardware catalog" task card (with filter activated), and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "IN/OUT 6 bytes / 12 bytes" module and - One "IN/OUT 12 bytes / 6 bytes" module SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 205 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 6. In the properties of the modules, assign the addresses outside the process image as follows: For the "IN/OUT 6 bytes / 12 bytes" module for sending data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 518 - Output addresses: Start address 518 For the "IN/OUT 12 bytes / 6 bytes" module for receiving data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 530 - Output addresses: Start address 530 Note Make sure that you assign identical start addresses for the address areas of the output and input data. Tip: Make a note of the start addresses of the transfer areas. You need these to program the SENDDP and RCVDP blocks (LADDR input). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 206 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 7. Select the following modules from "IN/OUT" in the device view of PN/PN coupler X2 and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "IN/OUT 12 bytes / 6 bytes" module and - One "IN/OUT 6 bytes / 12 bytes" module 8. In the properties of the modules, assign the addresses outside the process image as follows: For the "IN/OUT 12 bytes / 6 bytes" module for receiving data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 516 - Output addresses: Start address 516 For the "IN/OUT 6 bytes / 12 bytes" module for sending data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 528 - Output addresses: Start address 528 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 207 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.2.2 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the IO controllers uses the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type INT or BOOL. You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 208 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.2.3 Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Requirement for programming The transfer areas for input and output data for the PN/PN coupler must be configured. Programming procedure You program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication as follows: 1. In the safety program from which data are to be sent, call the SENDDP instruction (Page 588) for sending at the end of the main safety block. 2. In the safety program in which data are to be received, call the RCVDP instruction (Page 588) for receiving at the start of the main safety block. 3. Assign the start addresses of the output and input data transfer areas of the PN/PN coupler configured in the hardware and network editor to the respective LADDR inputs. You must carry out this assignment for every communication connection for each of the F-CPUs involved. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 209 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 4. Assign the value for the respective F-communication ID to the DP_DP_ID inputs. This establishes the communication relationship between the SENDDP instruction in one F-CPU and the RCVDP instruction in the other F-CPU: The associated instructions receive the same value for DP_DP_ID. The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs at the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for 5 safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication relationships. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 210 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). 5. Supply the SD_BO_xx and SD_I_xx inputs of SENDDP with the send signals. To cut down on intermediate signals when transferring block parameters, you can write the value directly to the instance DB of SENDDP using fully qualified access (for example, "Name SENDDP_1".SD_BO_02) before calling SENDDP. 6. Supply the RD_BO_xx and RD_I_xx outputs of RCVDP with the signals that you want to process further in other program sections or use fully qualified access to read the received signals directly in the associated instance DB in the program sections to be processed further (e.g., "Name RCVDP_1".RD_BO_02). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 211 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 7. Supply the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx inputs of RCVDP with the fail-safe values that are to be output by RCVDP in place of the process data until communication is established for the first time after startup of the sending and receiving F-systems or in the event of an error in safety-related communication. - Specification of constant fail-safe values: For data of data type INT, you can enter constant fail-safe values directly as constants in the SUBI_xx input (initial value = "0"). If you want to specify a constant fail-safe value "TRUE" for data of the data type BOOL, provide the tag "F_GOBDB".VKE1 for the SUBBO_xx input (initial value = "FALSE"). - Specification of dynamic fail-safe values: If you want to specify dynamic fail-safe values, define a tag that you change dynamically through your safety program in an F-DB and specify this tag (fully qualified) in the SUBI_xx or SUBBO_xx input. WARNING Note that your safety program for dynamically changing the tag for a dynamic failsafe value can only be processed after the call of the RCVDP, because prior to the RCVDP call, there must not be any network and no more than one other RCVDP instruction in the main safety block. You must therefore assign appropriate start values for these tags to be output by RCVDP in the first cycle after a startup of the F-system. (S017) 8. Configure the TIMEOUT inputs of the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions with the required monitoring time. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 9. Optional: Evaluate the ACK_REQ output of the RCVDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether user acknowledgment is required. 10.Supply the ACK_REI input of the RCVDP instruction with the acknowledgment signal for reintegration. 11.Optional: Evaluate the SUBS_ON output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction in order to query whether the RCVDP instruction is outputting the fail-safe values assigned in the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx inputs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 212 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 12.Optional: Evaluate the ERROR output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether a communication error has occurred. 13.Optional: Evaluate the SENDMODE output of the RCVDP instruction in order to query whether the F-CPU with the associated SENDDP instruction is in disabled safety mode (Page 344). 9.1.2.4 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication - Limits for data transfer Note If the data quantities to be transmitted exceed the capacity of the SENDDP / RCVDP correlated instructions, a second (or third) SENDDP / RCVDP call can be used. This requires configuration of an additional connection via the PN/PN coupler. Whether or not this is possible with one single PN/PN coupler depends on the capacity restrictions of the PN/PN coupler. 9.1.3 Safety-related master-master communication 9.1.3.1 Configure safety-related master-master communication Introduction Safety-related communication between safety programs of the F-CPUs of DP masters takes place via a DP/DP coupler. Note Switch the data validity indicator "DIA" on the DIP switch of the DP/DP coupler to "OFF". Otherwise, safety-related CPU-CPU communication is not possible. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 213 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Configuring transfer areas You must configure one transfer area for output data and one transfer area for input data in the hardware and network editor for each safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs in the DP/DP coupler. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). One transfer area for output data and one transfer area for input data must be configured in the DP/DP coupler for each of the two communication connections. Rules for defining transfer areas The transfer area for input data and the transfer area for output data for the data to be sent must begin with the same start address. A total of 6 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for input data; 12 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for output data. The transfer area for input data and the transfer area for output data for the data to be received must begin with the same start address. A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for input data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for output data. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 214 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related master-master communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Switch to the network view of the hardware and network editor. 3. Select a DP/DP coupler from "Other field devices\PROFIBUS DP\Gateways\Siemens AG\DP/DP Coupler" in the "Hardware catalog" task card and insert it into the network view of the hardware and network editor. 4. Insert a second DP/DP coupler. 5. Connect a DP interface of F-CPU 1 to the DP interface of a DP/DP coupler and a DP interface of F-CPU 2 to the DP interface of the other DP/DP coupler. 6. A free PROFIBUS address is assigned automatically in the properties of the DP/DPcoupler in the device view. You must set this address on the DP/DP coupler of PLC 1, either using the DIP switch on the device or in the configuration of the DP/DP coupler (see DP/DP Coupler (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1179382) manual). 7. Switch to the device view of the DP/DP coupler for PLC1 for bidirectional communication connections i.e. where each F-CPU is both to send and to receive data. Select the following modules from the "Hardware catalog" task card (with filter activated), and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "6 bytes I/12 bytes Q consistent" module, and - One "12 bytes I/6 bytes Q consistent" module SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 215 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 8. In the properties of the modules, assign the addresses outside the process image as follows: For "6 bytes I/12 bytes Q consistent" module for sending data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 530 - Output addresses: Start address 530 For "12 bytes I/6 bytes Q consistent" module for receiving data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 542 - Output addresses: Start address 542 Note Make sure that you assign identical start addresses for the address areas of the output and input data. Tip: Make a note of the start addresses of the transfer areas. You need these to program the SENDDP and RCVDP blocks (LADDR input). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 216 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9. Select the following modules from the "Hardware catalog" task card (with filter activated) in the device view of DP/DP coupler PLC2, and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "12 bytes I/6 bytes Q consistent" module, and - One "6 bytes I/12 bytes Q consistent" module 10.In the properties of the modules, assign the addresses outside the process image as follows: For "12 bytes I/6 bytes Q consistent" module for receiving data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 548 - Output addresses: Start address 548 For "6 bytes I/12 bytes Q consistent" module for sending data for example: - Input addresses: Start address 560 - Output addresses: Start address 560 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 217 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.3.2 Safety-related master-master communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the DP master uses the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type INT or BOOL. You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). 9.1.3.3 Program safety-related master-master communication Requirement for programming The transfer areas for input and output data for the DP/DP coupler must be configured. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 218 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Programming procedure You program safety-related master-master communication as follows: 1. In the safety program from which data are to be sent, call the SENDDP instruction (Page 588) for sending at the end of the main safety block. 2. In the safety program in which data are to be received, call the RCVDP instruction (Page 588) for receiving at the start of the main safety block. 3. Assign the start addresses of the transfer areas for output and input data of the DP/DP coupler configured in the hardware and network editor to the respective LADDR inputs. You must carry out this assignment for every communication connection for each of the F-CPUs involved. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 219 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 4. Assign the value for the respective F-communication ID to the DP_DP_ID inputs. This establishes the communication relationship between the SENDDP instruction in one F-CPU and the RCVDP instruction in the other F-CPU: The associated instructions receive the same value for DP_DP_ID. The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs at the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for 5 safety-related master-master communications relationships. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 220 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). 5. Supply the SD_BO_xx and SD_I_xx inputs of SENDDP with the send signals. To cut down on intermediate signals when transferring block parameters, you can write the value directly to the instance DB of SENDDP using fully qualified access (for example, "Name SENDDP_1".SD_BO_02) before calling SENDDP. 6. Supply the RD_BO_xx and RD_I_xx outputs of RCVDP with the signals that you want to process further in other program sections or use fully qualified access to read the received signals directly in the associated instance DB in the program sections to be processed further (e.g. "Name RCVDP_1".RD_BO_02). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 221 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 7. Supply the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx inputs of RCVDP with the fail-safe values that are to be output by RCVDP in place of the process data until communication is established for the first time after startup of the sending and receiving F-systems or in the event of an error in safety-related communication. - Specification of constant fail-safe values: For data of data type INT, you can enter constant fail-safe values directly as constants in the SUBI_xx input (initial value = "0"). If you want to specify a constant fail-safe value for data of the data type BOOL, provide the tag "F_GLOBDB".VKE1 for the SUBBO_xx input (initial value = "FALSE"). - Specification of dynamic fail-safe values: If you want to specify dynamic fail-safe values, define a tag that you change dynamically through your safety program in an F-DB and specify this tag (fully qualified) in the SUBI_xx or SUBBO_xx input. WARNING Note that your safety program for dynamically changing the tag for a dynamic failsafe value can only be processed after the call of the RCVDP, because prior to the RCVDP call, there must not be any network and no more than one other RCVDP instruction in the main safety block. You must therefore assign appropriate start values for these tags to be output by RCVDP in the first cycle after a startup of the F-system. (S017) 8. Configure the TIMEOUT inputs of the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions with the required monitoring time. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 9. Optional: Evaluate the ACK_REQ output of the RCVDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether user acknowledgment is required. 10.Supply the ACK_REI input of the RCVDP instruction with the acknowledgment signal for reintegration. 11.Optional: Evaluate the SUBS_ON output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction in order to query whether the RCVDP instruction is outputting the fail-safe values assigned in the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx inputs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 222 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 12.Optional: Evaluate the ERROR output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether a communication error has occurred. 13.Optional: Evaluate the SENDMODE output of the RCVDP instruction in order to query whether the F-CPU with the associated SENDDP instruction is in disabled safety mode (Page 344). 9.1.3.4 Safety-related master-master communication:Limits for data transfer Note If the data quantities to be transmitted exceed the capacity of the SENDDP / RCVDP correlated instructions, a second (or third) SENDDP / RCVDP call can be used. This requires configuration of an additional connection via the DP/DP coupler. Whether or not this is possible with one single DP/DP coupler depends on the capacity restrictions of the DP/DP coupler. 9.1.4 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication 9.1.4.1 Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an IO controller and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-devices takes place via IO controller-I-device connections (F-CD) in PROFINET IO, in the same way as in standard systems. You do not need any additional hardware for IO controller-I-device communication. The F-CPU to be used as an I-device must support the "IO-device" operating mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 223 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Configuring transfer areas For every safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs, you must configure transfer areas in the hardware and network editor. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). The transfer area is assigned a label when it is created to identify it as the communication relationship. For example, "F-CD_PLC_2 PLC_1_1" for the first F-CD connection between IO controller F-CPU 1 and I-device F-CPU 2. You assign the start addresses of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions in the safety programs. Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related IO controller-I-device communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Enable the "IO Device" mode for F-CPU 2 in the properties of its PN interface and assign this PN interface to a PN interface of F-CPU 1. 3. Select the PROFINET interface of F-CPU 2. Under "Transfer areas", you create an F-CD connection (type "F-CD") for sending to the IO controller (). The F-CD connection is shown in yellow in the table and the address areas in the I-device and IO controller assigned outside of the process image are displayed. In addition, an acknowledgment connection is created automatically for each F-CD connection. (see "Transfer area details"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 224 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 4. Create an additional F-CD connection for receiving from the IO controller. 5. In the transfer area you just created, click the arrow in order to change the transfer direction to receiving from IO controller (). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 225 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.4.2 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the IO controller and an I-device makes use of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type INT or BOOL. You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 226 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.4.3 Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication Requirement for programming The transfer areas must be configured. Programming procedure The procedure for programming safety-related IO controller-I-device communication is the same as that for programming safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (see Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (Page 209)). The assignment of the start addresses of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP/RCVDP instructions can be obtained from the following table. Instruction Start address LADDR From row From column SENDDP in the IO controller Address in the IO controller RCVDP in the IO controller Address in the IO controller SENDDP in the I-device Address in the IO device RCVDP in the I-device Address in the IO device The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs for the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for 4 safety-related IO controller-I-device communication relationships. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 227 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 228 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.4.4 Safety-related IO-Controller-IO-Device communication - Limits for data transfer Limits for data transfer If the amount of data to be transferred is greater than the capacity of related SENDDP/RCVDP instructions, you can use additional SENDDP/RCVDP instructions. Configure additional transfer areas for this purpose. Remember the maximum limit of 1440 bytes of input data or 1440 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-device and a IO controller. The following table shows the amount of output and input data assigned in safety-related communication connections: Safety-related communication Communication connection IO controllerI-Device Sending: Assigned input and output data In the IO controller In the I-device Output data Input data Output data Input data 6 bytes 12 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes I-Device 1 to IO controller Receiving: I-Device 1 from IO controller Consider all additional configured safety-related and standard communication connections (transfer areas of type F-CD and CD) for the maximum limit of 1440 bytes of input data or 1440 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-device and an IO controller. In addition, data are assigned for internal purposes such that the maximum limit may be reached sooner. When the limit is exceeded, a corresponding error message is displayed. 9.1.5 Safety-related master-I-slave communication 9.1.5.1 Configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of a DP master and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-slaves takes place over master-Islave connections (F-MS), as in standard systems. You do not need a DP/DP coupler for master-I-slave communication. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 229 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Configuring transfer areas For every safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs, you must configure transfer areas in the hardware and network editor. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). The transfer area is assigned a label when it is created to identify it as the communication relationship. For example, "F-MS_PLC_2-PLC_1_1" for the first F-MS connection between DP master F-CPU 1 and I-slave F-CPU 2. You assign the start addresses of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions in the safety programs. Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Activate the "DP slave" mode (I-slave) for F-CPU 2 in the properties of its DP interface and assign this DP interface to a DP interface of F-CPU 1. 3. Select the PROFIBUS interface of F-CPU 2. Under "Transfer areas", you create an F-MS connection (type "F-MS") for sending to the DP master (). The F-MS connection is shown in yellow in the table and the transfer areas in the I-slave and DP master assigned outside of the process image are displayed. In addition, an acknowledgment connection is created automatically for each F-MS connection. (see "Transfer area details"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 230 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 4. Create an additional F-MS connection for receiving from the DP master. 5. In the transfer area you just created, click the arrow in order to change the transfer direction to receiving from DP master (). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 231 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.5.2 Safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the DP master and an I-slave or between the F-CPUs of multiple I-slaves makes use of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type INT or BOOL. You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 232 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.5.3 Program the safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication Requirements The transfer areas must be configured. Programming procedure The procedure for programming safety-related master-I-slave communication or I-slave-Islave communication is the same as that for programming safety-related master-master communication (see Program safety-related master-master communication (Page 218)). The assignment of the start addresses of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP/RCVDP instructions can be obtained from the following table. Instruction Start address LADDR From row From column SENDDP in the DP master Master address RCVDP in the DP master Master address SENDDP in the I-slave Slave address RCVDP in the I-slave Slave address SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 233 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs at the inputs of SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for four safety-related master-I-slave and two I-slave-I-slave communications relationships. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 234 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 9.1.5.4 Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication Limits for data transfer If the amount of data to be transferred is greater than the capacity of related SENDDP/RCVDP instructions, you can use additional SENDDP/RCVDP instructions. Configure additional transfer areas for this purpose. Note the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-slave and a DP master. The following table shows the amount of output and input data assigned in safety-related communication connections: Safety-related communication Communication connection Master-I-slave Sending: Assigned input and output data DP master I-slave 1 I-slave 2 Output data Input data Output data Input data Output data Input data 6 bytes 12 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes -- -- 12 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes -- -- -- 18 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes -- 18 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes I-slave 1 to DP master Receiving: I-slave 1 from DP master I-slave-I-slave Sending: I-slave 1 to Islave 2 Receiving: I-slave 1 from Islave 2 Consider all additional configured safety-related and standard communication connections (transfer areas of type F-MS-, F-DX-, F-DX-Mod., MS-, DX- and DX-Mod) for the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-device and a DP master F-MS, F-DX, F-DX-Mod., MS, DX). If the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data is exceeded, you will receive a corresponding error message. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 235 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.6 Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication 9.1.6.1 Configure safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPUs of I-slaves takes place using direct data exchange (F-DX) - same as in standard programs. You do not need any additional hardware for I-slave-I-slave communication. I-slave-I-slave communication is also possible: If the assigned DP master is a standard CPU that supports direct data exchange when instead of a DP master, an IO controller is networked with the I-slaves via an IE/PB link Configuring transfer areas For every safety-related communication connection between two I-slaves, you must configure transfer areas in the hardware and network editor. In the figure below, both of the I-slaves are to be able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). The transfer area is assigned a label when it is created to identify it as the communication relationship. For example, "F-DX_PLC_2-PLC_1_1" for the first F-DX connection between FCPU 1 and F-CPU 2. You assign the start addresses of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions in the safety programs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 236 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert three F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card in the project. 2. Activate "DP slaves" mode (I-slave) for F-CPU 2 and F-CPU 3 in the properties of their DP interfaces and assign these DP interfaces to a DP interface of F-CPU 1. 3. Select the DP interface of F-CPU 3 in the network view. 4. Select the "I/O communication" tab. 5. Use a drag-and-drop operation in the network view to move F-CPU 2 to the "Partner 2" column on the "I/O-communication" tab. This creates a line with "Direct data exchange" mode for sending to the I-slave (F-CPU 2) (). 6. Click in the newly created line (). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 237 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 7. In "Transfer areas" ("Direct data exchange" table), create an F-DX connection (type "F-DX") for sending to the I-slave (F-CPU 2) (). The F-DX connection is shown in yellow in the table and the transfer areas in the I-slaves assigned outside of the process image (PLC_2 and PLC_3) are displayed. In addition, a line with "Direct data exchange" mode for receiving from the I-slave (F-CPU 2) () is created automatically in the "I/O communication" tab, and an acknowledgment connection (, transfer area x_Ack) is created automatically in the associated "Direct data exchange" table. One transfer area (type F-MS) for the master CPU (disabled in display) is created for in the "I-slave communication table" of each I-slave. This completes the configuration for sending to F-CPU 2. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 238 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 8. In the "I/O communication" tab, select the automatically created line with "Direct data exchange" mode for receiving from the I-slave (F-CPU 3) (). 9. In "Transfer areas" ("Direct data exchange" table), create another F-DX connection for receiving from the I-slave (F-CPU 3). In this case, as well, an acknowledgment connection (, transfer area x_Ack) is created automatically in the "Direct data exchange table" and two transfer areas (type F-MS) for the master CPU (disabled in display) are created in the "I-slave communication" table of both I-slaves. This completes the configuration for receiving from F-CPU 2. Changing disabled local address areas of the transfer areas In order to change the disabled local address area of "Transfer area x", you must change the address area of the corresponding acknowledgment connection "Transfer area x_Ack". 1. In "I/O communication", select the line with the arrow pointing in the same direction as the arrow of "Transfer area x" in the "Direct data exchange" table. 2. Then select the line with "Transfer area x_Ack" in the "Direct data exchange" table. 3. Change the address area there. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 239 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.6.2 Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Reference The description of the communication via SENDDP and RCVDP for safety-related I-slave-Islave communication can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). 9.1.6.3 Programming safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Reference The description of the programming of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication can be found in Program the safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication (Page 233). The assignment of the start addresses of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP/RCVDP instructions can be obtained from the following table. Instruction Start address LADDR From row SENDDP in the 1st I-slave From column Address in the <1st I-slave> (in example column "Address in PLC_2") RCVDP in the 1st I-slave Address in the <1st I-slave> (in example column "Address in PLC_2") SENDDP in the 2nd I-slave Address in the <2nd I-slave> (in example column "Address in PLC_3") RCVDP in the 2nd I-slave Address in the <2nd I-slave> (in example column "Address in PLC_3") 9.1.6.4 Limits for data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Limits for data transfer The description of the limits for the data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication can be found in Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave or Islave-I-slave communication (Page 235). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 240 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.7 Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication 9.1.7.1 Configuring Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an I-slave and FI/O in a DP slave takes place using direct data exchange (F-DX-Mod), same as in standard programs. You do not need any additional hardware for I-slave-slave communication. I-slave-slave communication is also possible: when the assigned DP master is a standard CPU, if the standard CPU supports direct data exchange when instead of a DP master, an IO controller is networked with the I-slaves via an IE/PB link An F-I/O DB is automatically generated for each F-I/O when it is configured in the hardware and network editor; this is required for the F-I/O access via safety-related I-slaveslave communication. The F-I/O DB is initially created in the safety program of the DP master, provided it is an F-CPU with F-activation. Only with the setup of the F-DX-Mod connection is the F-I/O DB created in the safety program of the I-slave and deleted in the safety program of the DP master. The process image input is used to access the channels of the F-I/O in the safety program of the F-CPU of the I-slave (see description in Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication F-I/O Access (Page 246)). Restrictions Note Safety-related I-slave-slave communication with F-I/O is possible in a DP slave that supports safety-related I-slave-slave communication, for example with all ET 200SP F-modules with IM 155-6 DP HF, firmware version > V3.1, with all ET 200S F-modules with IM 151-1 HF, with all fail-safe S7-300 signal modules with IM 153-2, as of article number 6ES7153-2BA01-0XB0, firmware version > V4.0.0. Note With safety-related I-slave-slave communication, make sure that the CPU of the DP master is powered up before the F-CPU of the I-slave. Otherwise, depending on the F-monitoring time specified for the F-I/O, the F-system can detect an error in safety-related communication (communication error) between the F-CPU and the F-I/O assigned to the I-slave. This means that the F-I/O are not reintegrated automatically after F-system startup. They are instead only reintegrated after a user acknowledgment with a positive edge in the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB (see also After communication errors (Page 178) and After startup of F-system (Page 175)). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 241 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Configuring transfer areas For every safety-related communication connection between an I-slave and slave, you must configure transfer areas in the hardware and network editor. The transfer area is assigned a label when it is created to identify it as the communication relationship. For example, "F-DX-Mod_PLC_2-PLC_1_1" for the first F-DX-Mod connection between F-CPU 1 and F-CPU 2. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 242 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Configuration procedure using the example of an ET 200S with F-modules in the slave The procedure for configuring safety-related I-slave-slave communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Insert a suitable DP slave, e.g. IM 151-1 HF, article no. 6ES7151-1BA0... from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the network view of the hardware and network editor. 3. Insert a power module, a 4/8 F-DI module and a 4 F-DQ module in the device view of the ET 200S. 4. Activate "DP slave" mode (I-slave) for F-CPU 2 in the properties of its DP interface and assign this to F-CPU 1. 5. Assign the DP interface of the IM 151-1 HF to the DP master (F-CPU 1). 6. Select the DP interface of F-CPU 2 (I-slave) in the network view. 7. Select the "I/O communication" tab. 8. Use a drag-and-drop operation in the network view to move the ET 200S to the "Partner 2" column in the "I/O-communication" tab. 9. Click in the newly created line (). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 243 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 10.In "Transfer areas", create an F-DX-Mod connection (type "F-DX-Mod"). The F-DX-Mod connection is marked in yellow in the table. The addresses for the "partner module" 4/8 F-DI in the I-Slave (PLC_2) are displayed. You can change the addresses directly in the table, if required. This completes the configuration for the 4/8 F-DI module. 11.In "Transfer areas", create another F-DX-Mod connection. 12.Change the partner module to the 4 F-DO module, either directly in the "Transfer areas" table or in the details of transfer area 2, if the 4 F-DO module was not already selected. This completes the configuration for the 4 F-DO module. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 244 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) In the "I-slave communication table" of the I-slave, a transfer area (type F-MS) for the master CPU (disabled in display) is created for each F-DX-Mod connection: Change in configuration of I-slave-slave communication WARNING If you have reconfigured I-slave-slave communication for an F-I/O or have deleted an existing I-slave-slave communication, you must compile the hardware configuration of the DP master as well as the hardware configuration of the I-slave and download them to the DP master and I-slave, respectively. The collective F-signature in the F-CPU of the I-slave and the collective F-signature in the F-CPU of the DP master (if a safety program exists there, too) are set to "0". You must then recompile the safety program(s). (S019) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 245 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.7.2 Safety-Related I-Slave-Slave Communication - F-I/O Access Access via the process image In safety-related I-slave-slave communication, you use the process image (PII or PIQ) to access the F-I/O in the safety program of the F-CPU of the I-slave. This is the same as F-I/O access to F-I/O that are directly assigned to an I-slave or DP master. In the I-slave you access the F-I/O with the addresses that were assigned for the F-DX-Mod connection in "Transfer areas" ("Direct data exchange" table). In this case, ignore the displayed operand area. Access F-I/O with inputs using the PII and F-I/O with outputs using PIQ. Information on I/O access can be found in F-I/O access (Page 157). 9.1.7.3 Limits for data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Limits for data transfer Note the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-slave and a DP master. An example of the amount of output data and input data that are assigned for safety-related communication is shown in the table below for an ET 200S 4/8 F-DI and an ET 200S 4 F-DO: Safety-related communication I-slave-slave Communication connection Assigned input and output data* Between I-slave and DP master Output Data in the I-slave Input data in the Islave I-slave-slave communication with 4/8 F-DI 4 bytes 6 bytes I-slave-slave communication with 4 F-DO 5 bytes 5 bytes * Example for 4/8 F-DI and 4 F-DO of ET 200S Consider all additional configured safety-related and standard communication connections (F-MS, F-DX, F-DX-Mod., MS and DX connections) for the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-slave and a DP master. If the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data is exceeded, you will receive a corresponding error message. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 246 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.8 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an IO-controller and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-slaves takes place over master -I-slave connections (F-MS), as in standard systems. IE/PB link For the safety-related IO-controller-I-slave communication, the IE/PB link is mandatory. Each of the two F-CPUs is linked to the IE/PB link by means of its PROFIBUS DP or PROFINETinterface. Note If you are using an IE/PB link, you must take this into account when configuring the F-specific monitoring times and when calculating the maximum response time of your F-system (see also Monitoring and response times (Page 607)). Note that the Excel file for calculating response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) for S7-300/400 F-CPUs does not support all conceivable configurations. Reference The information on safety-related master-I-slave communication in Safety-related master-Islave communication (Page 229) also applies. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 247 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.9 Safety-related communication via S7 connections 9.1.9.1 Configuring safety-related communication via S7 connections Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety programs of F-CPUs via S7 connections takes place by means of established S7 connections that you create in the network view of the hardware and network editor - same as in standard programs. Restrictions Note In SIMATIC Safety, S7 connections are generally permitted only via Industrial Ethernet. Safety-related communication via S7 connections is possible from and to the following CPUs: * S7-300 F-CPUs via the integrated PROFINET interface * S7-400 F-CPUs via the integrated PROFINET interface or a CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 Advanced-IT SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 248 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Creating S7 connections For each connection between two F-CPUs, you must create an S7 connection in the network view of the hardware and network editor. For every end-point of a connection, a local and a partner ID is automatically assigned from the perspective of the end-point (the F-CPU). If necessary, you can change both IDs in the "Connections" tab. You assign the local ID to the "ID" input of the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions in the safety programs. Procedure for configuring S7 connections You configure the S7 connections for safety-related CPU-to-CPU communication in the same way as in STEP 7 Professional (see Help on STEP 7 Professional "S7 connections"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 249 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.9.2 Communication via SENDS7, RCVS7, and F-Communication DB Communication via the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions You use the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions for fail-safe sending and receiving of data via S7 connections. These instructions can be used to transmit a specified amount of fail-safe data of data types BOOL, INT, WORD, DINT, DWORD, and TIME in a fail-safe manner. The fail-safe data are stored in F-DBs (F-communication DBs) that you have created. You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVS7 instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDS7 instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are sent only after calling the SENDS7 instruction at the end of the relevant F-runtime group execution. A detailed description of the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions is found in SENDS7 and RCVS7: Communication via S7 connections (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 599). F-communication DB For each connection, send data are stored in an F-DB (F-communication DBx) and receive data are stored in an F-DB (F-communication DBy). You can assign the F-communication DB numbers in the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 250 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.9.3 Programming safety-related communication via S7 connections Introduction The programming of safety-related CPU-CPU communication via S7 connections is described below. You must set up the following in the safety programs of the relevant F-CPUs: Create F-DBs (F-Communication-DBs) in which send/receive data for communication are stored. Call and assign parameters for instructions for communication from the "Instructions" Task Card in the safety program. Requirement for programming The S7 connections between the relevant F-CPUs must be configured in the network view in the "Connections" tab of the hardware and network editor. Creating and Editing an F-Communication DB F-communication DBs are F-DBs that you create and edit in the same way as other F-DBs in the project tree. You can assign the F-communication DB numbers in the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions. Note The length and structure of the F-communication DB on the receiver side must match the length and structure of the associated F-communication DB on the sender side. If the F-communication DBs do not match, the F-CPU can go to STOP mode. A diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. For this reason, we recommend that you use the following procedure: 1. Create an F-communication DB in the project tree in or below the "Program blocks" folder of the F-CPU at the sender end. 2. Specify the appropriate structure of the F-communication DB, taking into account the data to be transferred. 3. Copy this F-communication DB to the project tree in or below the "Program blocks" folder of the F-CPU at the receiver end, and change the name, if necessary. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 251 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Other requirements for F-communication DBs F-communication DBs must also conform to the following properties: They are not permitted to be instance DBs. Their length is not permitted to exceed 100 bytes. In F-communication DBs, only the following data types may be declared: BOOL, INT, WORD, DINT, DWORD, and TIME. The data types must be arranged block-wise and in the following order: BOOL, data types with bit length of 16 bits (INT, WORD), and data types with bit length of 32 bits (DINT, DWORD, and TIME). Within the data blocks with lengths of 16 bits and 32 bits, the data types can be arranged in any order. No more than 128 data elements of data type BOOL are permitted to be declared. The amount of data of data type BOOL must always be an integer multiple of 16 (word limit). Reserve data must be added, if necessary. If these criteria are not fulfilled, STEP 7 Safety Advanced outputs an error message during compilation. Assignment of fail-safe values Fail-safe values are made available at the receiver end: While the connection between the communication partners is being established the first time after startup of the F-systems Whenever a communication error occurs The values you specified as initial values in the F-communication DB at the receiver end are made available as initial values. Programming procedure You program safety-related communication via S7 connections as follows: 1. Supply the tags in the F-communication DB at the sender end with send signals using fully qualified access (e.g., "Name of F-communication DB".tag name). 2. Read the tags in the F-communication DB at the receiver end (receive signals) that you want to process further in other sections of the program using fully qualified access (e.g., "Name of F-communication DB".tag name). 3. In the safety program from which data are to be sent, call the SENDS7 instruction for sending at the end of the main safety block. 4. In the safety program in which data are to be received, call the instruction RCVS7 for receiving at the start of the main safety block. 5. Assign F-communication DB numbers to the SEND_DB input of SENDS7 and the RCV_DB input of RCVS7. 6. Assign the local ID of the S7 connection (data type: WORD) from the perspective of the F-CPU that was configured in the "Connections" tab of the network view to the ID input of SENDS7. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 252 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 7. Assign the local ID of the S7 connection (data type: WORD) that was configured in the "Connections" tab of the network view to the ID input of RCVS7. 8. Assign an odd number (data type: DWORD) to the R_ID inputs of SENDS7 and RCVS7. This serves to specify that a SENDS7 instruction belongs to an RCVS7 instruction. The associated instructions receive the same value for R_ID. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input R_ID; data type: DWORD) can be freely selected; however, it must be odd for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide. The value R_ID + 1 is internally assigned and must not be used. You must supply inputs ID and R_ID with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct read or write access to the associated instance DB is not permitted in the safety program. (S020) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). 9. Assign the TIMEOUT inputs of the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions with the required monitoring time. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 253 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 10.To reduce the bus load, you can temporarily shut down communication between the FCPUs at input EN_SEND of the SENDS7 instruction. To do so, supply input EN_SEND (initial value = "TRUE") with 0. In this case, send data are no longer sent to the Fcommunication DB of the associated RCVS7 instruction and the receiver RCVS7 provides fail-safe values for this period (initial values in its F-communication DB). If communication was already established between the partners, a communication error is detected. 11.Optional: Evaluate the ACK_REQ output of RCVS7, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether user acknowledgment is required. 12.Supply the ACK_REI input of RCVS7 with the signal for the acknowledgment for reintegration. 13.Optional: evaluate the SUBS_ON output of RCVS7 or SENDS7 in order to query whether the RCVS7 instruction is outputting the fail-safe values you specified as initial values in the F-communication DB. 14.Optional: Evaluate the ERROR output of RCVS7 or SENDS7, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether a communication error has occurred. 15.Optional: evaluate the SENDMODE output of RCVS7 in order to query whether the FCPU with the associated SENDS7 instruction is in disabled safety mode (Page 344). Particularities for migrated projects If you have migrated a project from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced in which safety-related communication via S7 connections is programmed, you must note the following: Do not delete migrated instance DBs for the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks". Otherwise, communication errors may occur in the relevant communication connections. A migrated instance DB for the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions has been deleted if, after compiling the safety program, the "User-defined ID" in the newly generated is not identical to "FRCVS7CL" or "FSNDS7CL". You can find the "User-defined ID" of a block in its properties in the "Information" area. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 254 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.9.4 Safety-related communication via S7 connections - Limits of data transfer Note If the amount of data to be transmitted exceeds the permitted length for the F-communication DB (100 bytes), you can create another F-communication DB that you transfer to additional SENDS7/RCVS7 instructions with modified R_ID. Note that USEND and URCV instructions are called internally at each SENDS7 or RCVS7 call and use connection resources in the F-CPU. This affects the maximum number of communication connections available (see manuals for F-CPUs). Additional information on the data transfer limits for S7 connections of individual F-CPUs is available on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38549114). 9.1.10 Safety-related communication with other S7 F-systems 9.1.10.1 Introduction Safety-related communication from F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety to F-CPUs in S7 Distributed Safety F-systems is possible via a PN/PN coupler or DP/DP coupler that you use between the two F-CPUs as IO controller-IO controller communication, master-master communication or communication via established S7 connections. Safety-related communication from F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety to F-CPUs in S7 F/FH Systems F-systems is possible via established S7 connections. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 255 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.10.2 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication) Communication functions between SENDDP/RCVDP instructions at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end and F-application blocks F_SENDDP/F_RCVDP at the S7 Distributed Safety end: Procedure at the S7 Distributed Safety end At the S7 Distributed Safety end, proceed as described in "Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication" in the S7 Distributed Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875) manual. Procedure at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end At the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end, proceed as described in Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (Page 204). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 256 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.10.3 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication) Communication functions between SENDDP/RCVDP instructions at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end and F-application blocks F_SENDDP/F_RCVDP at the S7 Distributed Safety end: Procedure at the S7 Distributed Safety end At the S7 Distributed Safety end, proceed as described in "Safety-related master-master communication" in the S7 Distributed Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875) manual. Procedure at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end At the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end, proceed as described in Safety-related master-master communication (Page 213). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 257 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.10.4 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via S7 connections Communication functions between SENDS7/RCVS7 instructions at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end and F_SENDS7/F_RCVS7 F-application blocks at the S7 Distributed Safety end: Procedure at the S7 Distributed Safety end At the S7 Distributed Safety end, proceed as described in section "Safety-related communication via S7 communications" in the S7 Distributed Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875) manual. Because safety-related communication via S7 connections is not possible with unspecified partners in S7 Distributed Safety, you must first create a "virtual" SIMATIC station in S7 Distributed Safety in which you configure an F-CPU as a proxy for the F-CPU in STEP 7 Safety Advanced with its IP address. You then insert an S7 connection to this F-CPU in the connection table. Both the local connection and partner connection resources (hex) are thereby fixed. You must then set these in the associated, unspecified S7 connection that you created in STEP 7 Professional. In addition, for all communication connections to this F-CPU, you must transfer the Fcommunication ID that you assigned in the R_ID input of the associated calls of the F_SENDS7 and F_RCVS7 F-application blocks additionally to the CRC_IMP tag in the instance DB of F_SENDS7 and F_RCVS7, respectively, in the standard user program immediately before calling the F-CALL. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 258 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) Program example: Procedure at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end At the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end, proceed as described in Safety-related communication via S7 connections (Page 248). For the F-CPU in S7 Distributed Safety, you must create and specify an unspecified S7 connection. You can find information on this in the STEP 7 help, under "Creating an unspecified connection" or "Specifying and unspecified connection". For these you must set the local and partner connection resources (hex) that are fixed as a result of the associated S7 connection that you have created in S7 Distributed Safety. If the local connection resource (hex) is already occupied by an existing connection, you must change the connection resource (hex) for it. If the instance DBs of the SENDS7 and RCVS7, instructions that you want to use for communication with S7 Distributed Safety were migrated from S7 Distributed Safety, you must delete them in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder, under "Program blocks > System blocks" (contrary to the information in Programming safety-related communication via S7 connections (Page 251), section "Particularities for migrated projects"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 259 Safety-related communication 9.1 Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) 9.1.10.5 Communication with S7 F/FH Systems via S7 connections Communication functions between SENDS7/RCVS7 instructions at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end and F_SDS_BO/F_RDS_BO F-blocks at the S7 F Systems end. A maximum of 32 data elements of data type BOOL can be exchanged. Procedure at the S7 F Systems end At the S7 F-systems end, proceed as described in section "Safety-related communication between F-CPUs" in the S7 F/FH Systems - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16537972) manual. Because safety-related communication via S7 connections is not possible with unspecified partners in S7 F/FH Systems, you must first create a "virtual" SIMATIC station in S7 F/FH Systems in which you configure an F-CPU as a proxy for the F-CPU in STEP 7 Safety Advanced with its IP address. You then insert an S7 connection to this F-CPU in the connection table. Both the local connection and partner connection resources (hex) are thereby fixed. You must then set these in the associated, unspecified S7 connection that you created in STEP 7 Safety Advanced. In addition, you must insert a function in your S7 program (in the area reserved in CFC for other applications), in which, for all communication connections for this F-CPU, you transfer the F-communication ID that you assigned in the R_ID input of the associated calls of the F_SDS_BO and F_RDS_BO F-blocks additionally to the CRC_IMP tag in the instance DB of the F_SDS_BO and F_RDS_BO, respectively. You obtain the number of the instance DB from the object properties of the block in CFC. Assign descriptive names for these instance DBs. If you perform a compress operation in CFC, you must check whether the numbers of these instance DBs have changed. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 260 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) Program example: You must then import the function in CFC as block type and insert your standard user program in a chart. In the run sequence, make sure that the associated standard runtime group is processed before the F-runtime group. Procedure at the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end At the STEP 7 Safety Advanced end, proceed as described in "Safety-related communication via S7 connections" (Page 248). Particularity: In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, you must create the F-communication DB with exactly 32 data elements of data type BOOL. For the F-CPU in S7 F/FH Systems, you must create and specify an unspecified S7 connection. You can find information on this in the STEP 7 help under "Creating an unspecified connection" or "Specifying and unspecified connection". For these you must set the local and partner connection resources (hex) that are fixed as a result of the associated S7 connection that you have created in S7 F Systems. If the local connection resource (hex) is already occupied by an existing connection, you must change the connection resource (hex) for it. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 261 Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.2.1 Flexible F-Link Introduction As of STEP 7 Safety V15.1 a new fail-safe CPU-CPU communication "Flexible F-Link" is available for the F-CPUs S7-1200 and S7-1500. This means fail-safe data can be easily exchanged as fail-safe arrays with standard communication mechanisms between F-CPUs. Flexible F-Link offers a series of advantages for exchanging fail-safe data: Collection of fail-safe data to be transmitted in F-compliant PLC data types (UDTs) Up to 100 bytes of fail-safe data per UDT Support of fail-safe data types Easy parameter assignment and automatic generation of fail-safe communication DBs Transmission of fail-safe data with standard communication blocks also across network limits F-runtime group communication (Page 96) for F-CPUs 1200/1500 System-integrated and globally sufficiently unique F-communication UUID Separate F-communication address signature for easy detection of changes to the Fcommunication UUID Requirement S7-1500 F-CPUs as of firmware V2.0 S7-1200 F-CPUs as of firmware V4.2 As of safety system version V2.2 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 262 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) Principles of communication via Flexible F-Link Proceed as follows on the send side: 1. Create an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) for the data to be sent. The size is up to 100 bytes. 2. Create an F-communication with direction "Sending" in the Safety Administration Editor. A new F-communication DB is created for the F-communication under "Program blocks\system blocks\STEP 7 Safety\F-communication DBs". 3. Set the F-monitoring time (Page 613) for the F-communication. 4. In the safety program, interconnect the tag for the send data (SEND_DATA) at the F-communication DB (Page 96) of the F-communication. 5. To transmit the coded, fail-safe arrays, create suitable communication blocks for sending and receiving (acknowledgment) in the standard program. For processing the process values in the correct chronological order, you can make use of the F-OB Pre-/postprocessing (Page 87). Note when using standard communication blocks that the fail-safe arrays are available consistently at the time of evaluation and that the F-monitoring time (Page 613) is observed. - Use a standard instruction for consistent transfer of SEND_ARRAY (for example TSEND_C, TSEND or USEND). - Use a standard instruction for consistent receiving of ACK_RCV_ARRAY (for example TRCV_C, TRCV or URCV). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 263 Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) Proceed as follows on the receive side: 1. Create an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) with the same structure as on the send side. To do so, copy the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) from the send side or use the project library or global library. 2. Create an F-communication with the direction "Receiving" in the Safety Administration Editor. A new F-communication DB is created for the F-communication under "Program blocks\system blocks\STEP 7 Safety\F-communication DBs" 3. Copy the F-communication UUID of the F-communication from the send side. 4. Set the same F-monitoring time as for the send side. 5. In the safety program, interconnect the tags for the receive data (RCV_DATA) at the Fcommunication DB (Page 96). 6. To transmit the coded, fail-safe arrays, create suitable communication blocks for sending and receiving (acknowledgment) in the standard program. For processing the process values in the correct chronological order, you can make use of the F-OB Pre-/postprocessing (Page 96). Note when using standard communication blocks that the fail-safe arrays are available consistently at the time of evaluation and that the F-monitoring time (Page 613) is observed. - Use a standard instruction for consistent receiving of RCV_ARRAY (for example TRCV_C, TSEND or USEND). - Use a standard instruction for consistent transfer of ACK_SEND_ARRAY (for example TSEND_C, TRCV or URCV). 7. In the safety program, interconnect the tags for the receive data (RCV_DATA) at the Fcommunication DB (Page 96) of the F-communication. WARNING During the acceptance use the safety summary to verify that the offsets of the elements of the F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) match for the sending and receiving data within the safety message frame. For this purpose all members and addresses are listed in the safety summary per UDT. Also keep in mind that the size can be a up to 100 bytes. (S088) WARNING When a new Flexible F-Link communication is created in the Safety Administration Editor, the F-communication UUID for the communication is explicitly provided by the system. By copying communications in Safety Administration Editor within the parameterization table or when copying into another F-CPU, the F-communication UUIDs are not generated new and are therefore not unique anymore. If the copy is used to configure a new communication relationship, you yourself need to ensure the uniqueness. To do this select the affected UUIDs and regenerate via the "Generate UUID" shortcut menu. The uniqueness must be ensured in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. (S087) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 264 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) WARNING You must take the following into account for safety-related CPU-CPU communication with the communication type Flexible F-Link: If the F-CPU that sends the data is on a simulated F-CPU with S7 PLCSIM, you can no longer assume that the data sent by this F-CPU are generated safely. You must then implement organizational measures such as operation monitoring and manual safety shutdown to ensure safety in those portions of the system that are affected by the sent data. Alternatively, you must output fail-safe substitute values instead of the received data in the F-CPU that receives the data by evaluating SENDMODE*. * SENDMODE is available to you as a tag in the F-communication DB. (S086) See also Example of a safety-related communication between two F-CPUs (Page 266) F-runtime group communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 145) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 265 Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.2.2 Example of a safety-related communication between two F-CPUs Safety-related communication between two F-CPUs If you want to send a data fail-safe from one F-CPU to another F-CPU, follow these steps on the send side (e.g. F-CPU1): 1. Create an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) for the data to be sent for F-CPU1. The size is up to 100 bytes. 2. Create an F-communication with the direction "sending" in the Safety Administration Editor in the "Flexible F-Link" range. 3. Configure the F-monitoring time and the F-communication UUID. Information on calculating the F-monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). For example: 4. On the send side supply the data of the transmission DBs with the data to be sent. For example: 5. Call a "Connection setup" FB in OB1 of the F-CPU1 and program the connection setup in this function block. 6. Interconnect a "TCON" instruction twice to set up the communication connection as follows: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 266 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) 7. Call the "TSEND" instruction for the data to be sent in the FC for the post processing (Page 87) of the F-CPU1. 8. Interconnect a "TSEND" instruction for the data to be sent as follows: "Sending" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) that sends the data to the F-CPU1. 9. Call the "TRCV" instruction for the acknowledgment in the FC for the pre-processing (Page 87) of the F-CPU1. 10.Interconnect a "TRCV" instruction for the acknowledgment connection as follows: "Sending" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) that sends the data to the F-CPU1. 11.Compile the user program. 12.Download the user program to the F-CPU1. Proceed as follows on the receive side (for example F-CPU2): 1. For F-CPU2 create an F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) with the same structure as F-CPU1 for the data to be received. The size is up to 100 bytes. To do so, copy the F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) from the send side or use the project library or global library. 2. Create an F-communication with the direction "receiving" in the Safety Administration Editor in the "Flexible F-Link" range. 3. Configure the same F-monitoring time and F-communication UUID as for F-CPU1. For example: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 267 Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) 4. Read the receiving data from the receiving DB on the receive side. For example: 5. Call a "Connection setup" FB in OB1 of the F-CPU2 and program the connection setup in this function block. 6. Interconnect a "TCON" instruction twice to set up the communication connection as follows: 7. Call the "TRCV" instruction for the data to be received in the FC for the pre-processing (Page 87) of the F-CPU2. 8. Interconnect a "TRCV" instruction for the data to be received as follows: "Receiving" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) that sends the data to the F-CPU2. 9. Call the "TSEND" instruction for the acknowledgment in the FC for the post processing (Page 87) of the F-CPU2. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 268 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.2 Configuring and programming communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500) 10.Interconnect a "TSEND" instruction for the acknowledgment connection as follows: "Receiving" is the F-communication DB (Page 96) that sends the acknowledgment telegram to the F-CPU2. 11.Compile the user program. 12.Download the user program to the F-CPU2. WARNING During the acceptance use the safety summary to verify that the offsets of the elements of the F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) match for the sending and receiving data within the safety message frame. For this purpose all members and addresses are listed in the safety summary per UDT. Also keep in mind that the size can be a up to 100 bytes. (S088) WARNING When a new Flexible F-Link communication is created in the Safety Administration Editor, the F-communication UUID for the communication is explicitly provided by the system. By copying communications in Safety Administration Editor within the parameterization table or when copying into another F-CPU, the F-communication UUIDs are not generated new and are therefore not unique anymore. If the copy is used to configure a new communication relationship, you yourself need to ensure the uniqueness. To do this select the affected UUIDs and regenerate via the "Generate UUID" shortcut menu. The uniqueness must be ensured in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. (S087) WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) See also FAQ: "How do you program the TCON communication instruction to set up a connection for Open User Communication between two S7-1500 CPUs?" (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58875807) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 269 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.1 Overview of communication Introduction This section gives an overview of the safety-related communication options in SIMATIC Safety F-systems. Options for safety-related communication Safety-related communication On subnet Additional hardware required IO controller-IO controller communication PROFINET IO PN/PN coupler Master-master communication PROFIBUS DP DP/DP coupler IO controller-I-device communication PROFINET IO -- Master-I-slave communication PROFIBUS DP -- IO controller-I-slave communication PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP IE/PB link IO controller-IO controller communication for S7 PROFINET IO PN/PN coupler Safety-related CPU-CPU communication: Distributed Safety Master-master communication for S7 Distributed PROFIBUS DP Safety DP/DP coupler Note Safety-related communication with S7-1200 F-CPUs is only permitted as of firmware version V4.1.2. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 270 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Overview of safety-related communication via PROFIBUS DP The figure below provides an overview of the options for safety-related communication via PROFIBUS DP in SIMATIC Safety F-systems with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. Safety-related master-master communication Safety-related master-I-slave communication Overview of safety-related communication via PROFINET IO The figure below provides an overview of the options for safety-related communication via PROFINET IO in SIMATIC Safety F-systems with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 271 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Safety-related CPU-CPU communication via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO In safety-related CPU-CPU communication, a fixed amount of data of the data type BOOL or INT (DINT as alternative) is transmitted fail-safe between the safety programs in F-CPUs of DP masters/I-slaves or IO controllers/I-devices. The data are transferred using the SENDDP instruction for sending and the RCVDP instruction for receiving. The data are stored in configured transfer areas of the devices. The hardware identifier (HW identifier) defines the transfer areas configured. Safety-related CPU-CPU communication for S7 Distributed Safety Safety-related communication is possible from F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety to F-CPUs in S7 Distributed Safety. 9.3.2 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication 9.3.2.1 Configure safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Introduction Safety-related communication between safety programs of the F-CPUs of IO controllers takes place over a PN/PN coupler that you set up between the F-CPUs. Note Deactivate the "Data validity display DIA" parameter in the properties for the PN/PN coupler in the hardware and network editor. This is the default setting. Otherwise, safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication is not possible. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 272 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Configuring transfer areas You must configure one transfer area for output data and one transfer area for input data in the hardware and network editor for each safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs in the PN/PN coupler. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). Rules for defining transfer areas Data to be sent: A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for output data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for input data. Data to be received: A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for input data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for output data. Note PN/PN Coupler article number 6ES7158-3AD10-0XA0 When configuring the transfer areas for the output and input data, proceed as described in the "SIMATIC bus links PN/PN coupler (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/44319532)" manual, section "Configuring the PN/PN Coupler with STEP 7 TIA Portal". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 273 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Switch to the network view of the hardware and network editor. 3. Select a PN/PN Coupler X1 and a PN/PN Coupler X2 from "Other field devices\PROFINET IO\Gateway\Siemens AG\PN/PN Coupler" in the "Hardware catalog" task card and insert them into the network view of the hardware and network editor. 4. Connect the PN interface of the F-CPU 1 with the PN interface of the PN/PN Coupler X1 and the PN interface of the F-CPU 2 with the PN interface of PN/PN Coupler X2. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 274 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 5. Switch to the device view of PN/PN Coupler X1 for bidirectional communication connections i.e. where each F-CPU is both to send and to receive data. Select the following modules from "IN/OUT" in the "Hardware catalog" task card (with filter activated), and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "IN/OUT 6 bytes / 12 bytes" module and - One "IN/OUT 12 bytes / 6 bytes" module Note The transfer areas are assigned on the basis of the hardware identifier which is automatically assigned to the modules and devices. You need the HW identifier to program the SENDDP and RCVDP blocks (LADDR input). A system constant is created in the corresponding F-CPU for each hardware identifier of the transfer area. You can assign these system constants symbolically to the SENDDP and RCVDP blocks. 6. Select the following modules from "IN/OUT" in the device view of PN/PN coupler X2 and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "IN/OUT 12 bytes / 6 bytes" module and - One "IN/OUT 6 bytes / 12 bytes" module SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 275 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.2.2 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the IO controllers uses the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type BOOL or INT (DINT as alternative). You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. You can also call up the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions in separate F-FBs/F-FCs which you have to call at the start or end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 276 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.2.3 Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Requirement for programming The transfer areas for input and output data for the PN/PN coupler must be configured. Programming procedure You program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication as follows: 1. In the safety program from which data are to be sent, call the SENDDP instruction (Page 588) for sending at the end of the main safety block. 2. In the safety program in which data are to be received, call the RCVDP instruction (Page 588) for receiving at the start of the main safety block. 3. Assign the respective LADDR inputs HW identifiers (system constants in the default tag table) for the transfer areas for output and input data of the PN/PN coupler that are configured in the hardware and network editor. You must carry out this assignment for every communication connection for each of the F-CPUs involved. 4. Assign the value for the respective F-communication ID to the DP_DP_ID inputs. This establishes the communication relationship between the SENDDP instruction in one FCPU and the RCVDP instruction in the other F-CPU: The associated instructions receive the same value for DP_DP_ID. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 277 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs at the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for 5 safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication relationships. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected**; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply constant values*** to the inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 278 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, no connection is established at the DP_DP_ID input for a F-communication ID "0". *** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, the DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with variable values from a global F-DB. In this case as well you have to check during the acceptance of the safety program that the uniqueness is ensured at every moment, by checking the algorithm for the creation of the variable value accordingly. If you cannot ensure a unique F-communication ID during startup of the safety program, because it is only specified after startup of the safety program, you must make sure that the value at the DP_DP_ID input is "0" during this phase. 5. Supply the SD_BO_xx and SD_I_xx inputs (SD_DI_00 as alternative) of SENDDP with the send signals. To cut down on intermediate signals when transferring block parameters, you can write the value directly to the instance DB of SENDDP using fully qualified access (for example, "Name SENDDP_1".SD_BO_02) before calling SENDDP. 6. Supply the RD_BO_xx and RD_I_xx outputs (RD_DI_00 as alternative) of RCVDP with the signals that you want to process further in other program sections or use fully qualified access to read the received signals directly in the associated instance DB in the program sections to be processed further (e.g., "Name RCVDP_1".RD_BO_02). 7. If you want to send the data at the SD_DI_00 input instead of the data at the SD_I_00 and SD_I_01 inputs, supply the DINTMODE input (initial value = "FALSE") of SENDDP with TRUE. 8. Supply the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 inputs of RCVDP with the fail-safe values that are to be output by RCVDP in place of the process data until communication is established for the first time after startup of the sending and receiving F-systems or in the event of an error in safety-related communication. - Specification of constant fail-safe values: For data of data type INT/DINT, you can enter constant fail-safe values directly as constants in the SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 input (initial value = "0"). If you want to specify a constant fail-safe value "TRUE" for data of the data type BOOL, set TRUE for the SUBBO_xx input (initial value = "FALSE"). - Specification of dynamic fail-safe values: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 279 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) If you want to specify dynamic fail-safe values, define a tag that you change dynamically through your safety program in an F-DB and specify this tag (fully qualified) in the SUBBO_xx or SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 input. WARNING Note that your safety program for dynamically changing the tag for a dynamic failsafe value can only be processed after the call of the RCVDP, because prior to the RCVDP call, there must not be any network and no more than one other RCVDP instruction in the main safety block. You must therefore assign appropriate start values for these tags to be output by RCVDP in the first cycle after a startup of the F-system. (S017) 9. Configure the TIMEOUT inputs of the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions with the required monitoring time. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 10.Optional: Evaluate the ACK_REQ output of the RCVDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether user acknowledgment is required. 11.Supply the ACK_REI input of the RCVDP instruction with the acknowledgment signal for reintegration. 12.Optional: Evaluate the SUBS_ON output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction in order to query whether the RCVDP instruction is outputting the fail-safe values assigned in the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 inputs. 13.Optional: Evaluate the ERROR output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether a communication error has occurred. 14.Optional: Evaluate the SENDMODE output of the RCVDP instruction in order to query whether the F-CPU with the associated SENDDP instruction is in disabled safety mode (Page 344). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 280 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.2.4 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication - Limits for data transfer Note If the data quantities to be transmitted exceed the capacity of the SENDDP / RCVDP correlated instructions, a second (or third) SENDDP / RCVDP call can be used. This requires configuration of an additional connection via the PN/PN coupler. Whether or not this is possible with one single PN/PN coupler depends on the capacity restrictions of the PN/PN coupler. 9.3.3 Safety-related master-master communication 9.3.3.1 Configure safety-related master-master communication Introduction Safety-related communication between safety programs of the F-CPUs of DP masters takes place via a DP/DP coupler. Note Switch the data validity indicator "DIA" on the DIP switch of the DP/DP coupler to "OFF". Otherwise, safety-related CPU-CPU communication is not possible. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 281 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Configuring transfer areas You must configure one transfer area for output data and one transfer area for input data in the hardware and network editor for each safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs in the DP/DP coupler. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). Rules for defining transfer areas Data to be sent: A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for output data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for input data. Data to be received: A total of 12 bytes (consistent) is required for the transfer area for input data; 6 bytes (consistent) are required for the transfer area for output data. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 282 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related master-master communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Switch to the network view of the hardware and network editor. 3. Select a DP/DP coupler from "Other field devices\PROFIBUS DP\Gateways\Siemens AG\DP/DP Coupler" in the "Hardware catalog" task card and insert it into the network view of the hardware and network editor. 4. Insert a second DP/DP coupler. 5. Connect a DP interface of F-CPU 1 to the DP interface of a DP/DP coupler and a DP interface of F-CPU 2 to the DP interface of the other DP/DP coupler. 6. A free PROFIBUS address is assigned automatically in the properties of the DP/DPcoupler in the device view. You must set this address on the DP/DP coupler, either via the DIP switch on the device or in the configuration of the DP/DP coupler (see DP/DP Coupler (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1179382) manual). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 283 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 7. Switch to the device view of the DP/DP coupler PLC1 for bidirectional communication connections i.e. where each F-CPU should both send and receive data. Select the following modules from the "Hardware catalog" task card (with filter activated), and insert them in the "Device overview" tab of the DP/DP coupler: - One "6 bytes I/12 bytes Q consistent" module, and - One "12 bytes I/6 bytes Q consistent" module Note The transfer areas are assigned on the basis of the hardware identifier which is automatically assigned to the modules and devices. You need the HW identifier to program the SENDDP and RCVDP blocks (LADDR input). A system constant is created in the corresponding F-CPU for each hardware identifier of the transfer area. You can assign these system constants symbolically to the SENDDP and RCVDP blocks. 8. Select the following modules from the "Hardware catalog" task card (with filter activated) in the device view of DP/DP coupler PLC2, and insert them in the "Device overview" tab: - One "12 bytes I/6 bytes Q consistent" module, and - One "6 bytes I/12 bytes Q consistent" module SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 284 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.3.2 Safety-related master-master communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the DP master uses the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type BOOL or INT (DINT as alternative). You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. You can also call up the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions in separate F-FBs/F-FCs which you have to call up at the start or the end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 285 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.3.3 Program safety-related master-master communication Requirement for programming The address areas for input and output data for the DP/DP coupler must be configured. Programming procedure You program safety-related master-master communication as follows: 1. In the safety program from which data are to be sent, call the SENDDP instruction (Page 588) for sending at the end of the main safety block or a separate F-FC/F-FB. 2. In the safety program in which data are to be received, call the RCVDP instruction (Page 588) for receiving at the start of the main safety block or a separate F-FC/F-FB. 3. Assign the HW identifiers for the output and input data of the DP/DP coupler configured in the hardware and network editor (constant in the tag table) to the respective LADDR inputs. You must carry out this assignment for every communication connection for each of the F-CPUs involved. 4. Assign the value for the respective F-communication ID to the DP_DP_ID inputs. This establishes the communication relationship between the SENDDP instruction in one F-CPU and the RCVDP instruction in the other F-CPU: The associated instructions receive the same value for DP_DP_ID. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 286 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs at the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for 5 safety-related master-master communications relationships. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected**; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply constant values*** to the inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 287 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, no connection is established at the DP_DP_ID input for a F-communication ID "0". *** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, the DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with variable values from a global F-DB. In this case as well you have to check during the acceptance of the safety program that the uniqueness is ensured at every moment, by checking the algorithm for the creation of the variable value accordingly. If you cannot ensure a unique F-communication ID during startup of the safety program, because it is only specified after startup of the safety program, you must make sure that the value at the DP_DP_ID input is "0" during this phase. 5. Supply the SD_BO_xx and SD_I_xx inputs (SD_DI_00 as alternative) of SENDDP with the send signals. To cut down on intermediate signals when transferring block parameters, you can write the value directly to the instance DB of SENDDP using fully qualified access (for example, "Name SENDDP_1".SD_BO_02) before calling SENDDP. 6. Supply the RD_BO_xx and RD_I_xx outputs (RD_DI_00 as alternative) of RCVDP with the signals that you want to process further in other program sections or use fully qualified access to read the received signals directly in the associated instance DB in the program sections to be processed further (e.g., "Name RCVDP_1".RD_BO_02). 7. If you want to send the data at the SD_DI_00 input instead of the data at the SD_I_00 and SD_I_01 inputs, supply the DINTMODE input (initial value = "FALSE") of SENDDP with TRUE. 8. Supply the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 inputs of RCVDP with the fail-safe values that are to be output by RCVDP in place of the process data until communication is established for the first time after startup of the sending and receiving F-systems or in the event of an error in safety-related communication. - Specification of constant fail-safe values: For data of data type INT/DINT, you can enter constant fail-safe values directly as constants in the SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 input (initial value = "0"). If you want to specify a constant fail-safe value "TRUE" for data of the data type BOOL, set TRUE for the SUBBO_xx input (initial value = "FALSE"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 288 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) - Specification of dynamic fail-safe values: If you want to specify dynamic fail-safe values, define a tag that you change dynamically through your safety program in an F-DB and specify this tag (fully qualified) in the SUBBO_xx or SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 input. WARNING Note that your safety program for dynamically changing the tag for a dynamic failsafe value can only be processed after the call of the RCVDP, because prior to the RCVDP call, there must not be any network and no more than one other RCVDP instruction in the main safety block. You must therefore assign appropriate start values for these tags to be output by RCVDP in the first cycle after a startup of the F-system. (S017) 9. Configure the TIMEOUT inputs of the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions with the required monitoring time. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 10.Optional: Evaluate the ACK_REQ output of the RCVDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether user acknowledgment is required. 11.Supply the ACK_REI input of the RCVDP instruction with the acknowledgment signal for reintegration. 12.Optional: Evaluate the SUBS_ON output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction in order to query whether the RCVDP instruction is outputting the fail-safe values assigned in the SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 inputs. 13.Optional: Evaluate the ERROR output of the RCVDP or SENDDP instruction, for example, in the standard user program or on the HMI system in order to query or to indicate whether a communication error has occurred. 14.Optional: Evaluate the SENDMODE output of the RCVDP instruction in order to query whether the F-CPU with the associated SENDDP instruction is in disabled safety mode (Page 344). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 289 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.3.4 Safety-related master-master communication:Limits for data transfer Note If the data quantities to be transmitted exceed the capacity of the SENDDP / RCVDP correlated instructions, a second (or third) SENDDP / RCVDP call can be used. This requires configuration of an additional connection via the DP/DP coupler. Whether or not this is possible with one single DP/DP coupler depends on the capacity restrictions of the DP/DP coupler. 9.3.4 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication 9.3.4.1 Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an IO controller and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-devices takes place via IO controller-I-device connections (F-CD) in PROFINET IO, in the same way as in standard systems. You do not need any additional hardware for IO controller-I-device communication. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 290 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Configuring transfer areas For every safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs, you must configure transfer areas in the hardware and network editor. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). The transfer area is assigned a label when it is created to identify it as the communication relationship. For example, "F-CD_PLC_2 PLC_1_1" for the first F-CD connection between IO controller F-CPU 1 and I-device F-CPU 2. When you create a transfer area, a system constant with the name of the transfer area is created in the F-CPU of the IO controller and in the F-CPU of the I-device. The system constant contains the hardware identifier of the transfer area for the corresponding F-CPU. You assign the hardware identifier (system constant from the default tag table) of the transfer areas symbolically to the LADDR input of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions in the safety programs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 291 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related IO controller-I-device communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. Enable the "IO Device" mode for F-CPU 2 in the properties of its PN interface and assign this PN interface to a PN interface of F-CPU 1. 3. Select the PROFINET interface of F-CPU 2. Under "Transfer areas", you create an F-CD connection (type "F-CD") for receiving from the IO controller (). The F-CD connection is shown in yellow in the table and the address areas in the I-device and IO controller assigned are displayed. In addition, an acknowledgment connection is created automatically for each F-CD connection. (see "Transfer area details"). 4. Create an additional F-CD connection for sending to the IO controller. 5. In the transfer area you just created, click on the arrow to change the transfer direction to sending to the IO controller (). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 292 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.4.2 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the IO controller and an I-device makes use of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of data of the data type BOOL or INT (DINT as alternative). You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. You can also call up the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions in separate F-FBs/F-FCs which you have to call at the start or end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 293 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.4.3 Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication Requirement for programming The transfer areas must be configured. Programming procedure The procedure for programming safety-related IO controller-I-device communication is the same as that for programming safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (see Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (Page 277)). The assignment of the HW identifiers (system constants in the standard tag table) of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP/RCVDP instructions can be obtained from the following table: Instruction HW identifier SENDDP in the IO controller Hardware identifier of the transfer area in the IO controller RCVDP in the IO controller Hardware identifier of the transfer area in the IO controller SENDDP in the I-device Hardware identifier of the transfer area in the I-device RCVDP in the I-device Hardware identifier of the transfer area in the I-device SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 294 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs for the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for 4 safety-related IO controller-I-device communication relationships. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected**; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply constant values*** to the inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, no connection is established at the DP_DP_ID input for a F-communication ID "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 295 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) *** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, the DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with variable values from a global F-DB. In this case as well you have to check during the acceptance of the safety program that the uniqueness is ensured at every moment, by checking the algorithm for the creation of the variable value accordingly. If you cannot ensure a unique F-communication ID during startup of the safety program, because it is only specified after startup of the safety program, you must make sure that the value at the DP_DP_ID input is "0" during this phase. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). 9.3.4.4 Safety-related IO-Controller-IO-Device communication - Limits for data transfer Limits for data transfer If the amount of data to be transferred is greater than the capacity of related SENDDP/RCVDP instructions, you can use additional SENDDP/RCVDP instructions. Configure additional transfer areas for this purpose. Remember the maximum limit of 1440 bytes of input data or 1440 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-device and a IO controller. The following table shows the amount of output and input data assigned in safety-related communication connections: Safety-related communication Communication connection IO controllerI-Device Sending: Assigned input and output data In the IO controller In the I-device Output data Input data Output data Input data 6 bytes 12 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes I-Device 1 to IO controller Receiving: I-Device 1 from IO controller Consider all additional configured safety-related and standard communication connections (transfer areas of type F-CD and CD) for the maximum limit of 1440 bytes of input data or 1440 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-device and an IO controller. In addition, data are assigned for internal purposes such that the maximum limit may be reached sooner. When the limit is exceeded, a corresponding error message is displayed. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 296 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.5 Safety-related master-I-slave communication 9.3.5.1 Configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of a DP master and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-slaves takes place over master-Islave connections (F-MS), as in standard systems. You do not need a DP/DP coupler for master-I-slave communication. Configuring transfer areas For every safety-related communication connection between two F-CPUs, you must configure transfer areas in the hardware and network editor. The figure below shows how both of the F-CPUs are able to send and receive data (bidirectional communication). The transfer area is assigned a label when it is created to identify it as the communication relationship. For example, "F-MS_PLC_2-PLC_1_1" for the first F-MS connection between DP master F-CPU 1 and I-slave F-CPU 2. When you create a transfer area, a system constant with the name of the transfer area is created in the F-CPU of the DP master and in the F-CPU of the I-slave. The system constant contains the hardware identifier of the transfer area for the corresponding F-CPU. You assign the hardware identifier (system constant from the default tag table) of the transfer areas symbolically to the LADDR input of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions in the safety programs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 297 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) Procedure for configuration The procedure for configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication is identical to that in the standard system. Proceed as follows: 1. Insert two F-CPUS from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project. 2. If the F-CPU which is to be operated as DP master (F-CPU 1) does not have an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface, insert an PROFIBUS-CM, for example. 3. From the device view of the F-CPUs which are to be operated as I-slaves (F-CPU 2), insert a suitable CM DP module or CP DP module. 4. If necessary, enable "DP-slave" (I-slave) mode in the properties for the CM/CP DP module. 5. Assign the DP interface of the CM/CP to a DP interface of F-CPU 1. 6. Select the PROFIBUS interface of F-CPU 2 or of the CM. Under "Transfer areas", you create an F-MS connection (type "F-MS") for sending to the DP master (). The F-MS connection is shown in yellow in the table and the assigned transfer areas in the I-slave and DP master are displayed. In addition, an acknowledgment connection is created automatically for each F-MS connection. (see "Transfer area details"). 7. Create an additional F-MS connection for receiving from the DP master. 8. In the transfer area you just created, click the arrow in order to change the transfer direction to receiving from DP master (). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 298 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.5.2 Safety-related master-I-slave communication via SENDDP and RCVDP Communication via SENDDP and RCVDP instructions Safety-related communication between the F-CPUs of the DP master and an I-slave makes use of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for sending and receiving, respectively. These can be used to perform a fail-safe transfer of a fixed amount of fail-safe data of the data type BOOL or INT (DINT as alternative). You can find these instructions in the "Instructions" task card under "Communication". The RCVDP instruction must be called at the start of the main safety block. The SENDDP instruction must be called at the end of the main safety block. You can also call the RCVDP and SENDDP instructions in separate F-FBs/F-FCs which you have to call up at the beginning or end of the main safety block. Note that the send signals are not sent until after the SENDDP instruction call at the end of execution of the relevant F-runtime group. A detailed description of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions can be found in SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 588). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 299 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.5.3 Programming safety-related master-I-slave communication Requirements The transfer areas must be configured. Programming procedure The procedure for programming safety-related master-I-slave communication is the same as that for programming safety-related master-master communication (see Safety-related master-master communication (Page 281)). The assignment of the HW identifiers of the transfer areas to the LADDR input of the SENDDP/RCVDP instructions can be obtained from the following table. Instruction HW identifier SENDDP in the DP master Hardware identifier of the respective transfer area in the DP master RCVDP in the DP master Hardware identifier of the respective transfer area in the DP master SENDDP in the I-slave Hardware identifier of the transfer area in the I-slave RCVDP in the I-slave Hardware identifier of the transfer area in the I-slave SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 300 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) The figure below contains an example of how to specify the F-communication IDs at the inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for four safety-related master-I-slave communication relationships. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected**; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply constant values*** to the inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 301 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, no connection is established at the DP_DP_ID input for a F-communication ID "0". *** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, the DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with variable values from a global F-DB. In this case as well you have to check during the acceptance of the safety program that the uniqueness is ensured at every moment, by checking the algorithm for the creation of the variable value accordingly. If you cannot ensure a unique F-communication ID during startup of the safety program, because it is only specified after startup of the safety program, you must make sure that the value at the DP_DP_ID input is "0" during this phase. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned monitoring time. (S018) Information on calculating the monitoring times can be found in Monitoring and response times (Page 607). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 302 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.5.4 Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave communication Limits for data transfer If the amount of data to be transferred is greater than the capacity of related SENDDP/RCVDP instructions, you can use additional SENDDP/RCVDP instructions. Configure additional transfer areas for this purpose. Note the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-slave and a DP master. The following table shows the amount of output and input data assigned in safety-related communication connections: Safety-related communication Master-I-slave Communication connection Sending: Assigned input and output data DP master I-slave Output data Input data Output data Input data 6 bytes 12 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 12 bytes I-slave 1 to DP master Receiving: I-slave 1 from DP master Consider all additional configured safety-related and standard communication connections (transfer areas of type F-MS-, F-DX-, F-DX-Mod., MS-, DX- and DX-Mod) for the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data for transfer between an I-device and a DP master F-MS and MS). If the maximum limit of 244 bytes of input data or 244 bytes of output data is exceeded, you will receive a corresponding error message. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 303 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.6 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication 9.3.6.1 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an IO-controller and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-slaves takes place over master-Islave connections (F-MS), as in standard systems. IE/PB link For the safety-related IO-controller-I-slave communication, the IE/PB link is mandatory. Each of the two F-CPUs is linked to the IE/PB link by means of its PROFIBUS DP or PROFINETinterface. Note If you are using an IE/PB link, you must take this into account when configuring the F-specific monitoring times and when calculating the maximum response time of your F-system (see also Monitoring and response times (Page 607)). Note that the Excel file for calculating response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) for S7-300/400 F-CPUs does not support all conceivable configurations. Reference The information on safety-related master-I-slave communication in Safety-related master-Islave communication (Page 297) also applies. 9.3.7 Safety-related communication to S7 F-System S7 Distributed Safety 9.3.7.1 Introduction Safety-related communication from F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety to F-CPUs in S7 Distributed Safety F-systems is possible, via a PN/PN coupler or DP/DP coupler that you use between the two F-CPUs, as IO controller-IO controller communication or master-master communication. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 304 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.7.2 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication) Communication functions between SENDDP/RCVDP instructions at the STEP 7 Safety end and F-application blocks F_SENDDP/F_RCVDP at the S7 Distributed Safety end: Procedure at the S7 Distributed Safety end At the S7 Distributed Safety end, proceed as described in "Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication" in the S7 Distributed Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875) manual. Procedure at the STEP 7 Safety end At the STEP 7 Safety end, proceed as described in Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (Page 272). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 305 Safety-related communication 9.3 Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) 9.3.7.3 Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication) Communication functions between SENDDP/RCVDP instructions at the STEP 7 Safety end and F-application blocks F_SENDDP/F_RCVDP at the S7 Distributed Safety end: Procedure at the S7 Distributed Safety end At the S7 Distributed Safety end, proceed as described in "Safety-related master-master communication" in the S7 Distributed Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22099875) manual. Procedure at the STEP 7 Safety end At the STEP 7 Safety end, proceed as described in Safety-related master-master communication (Page 281). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 306 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.4 Configuring and programming communication between S7-300/400 and S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs 9.4 Configuring and programming communication between S7-300/400 and S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs 9.4.1 Overview of communication Introduction This section provides an overview of the options for safety-related communication between S7-300/400 and S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety F-systems. Options for safety-related communication Safety-related communication On subnet Additional hardware required PROFIBUS DP DP/DP coupler Master-I-slave communication PROFIBUS DP -- IO controller-IO controller communication PROFINET IO PN/PN coupler IO controller-I-device communication PROFINET IO -- IO controller-I-slave communication PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP IE/PB link Safety-related CPU-CPU communication: Master-master communication Basic procedure for configuring and programming Configure and program safety-related communication between S7-300/400 F-CPUs and S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs as described in Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 201) and Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 270) for your application. To program an S7-300/400 F-CPU, use the start addresses of the transfer areas. To program an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU, use the HW identifiers of the transfer areas. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 307 Safety-related communication 9.5 Configuring and programming communication in several projects 9.5 Configuring and programming communication in several projects 9.5.1 Safety-oriented IO Controller I device communication in several projects 9.5.1.1 Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device Introduction Safety-related communication between the safety program of the F-CPU of an IO controller and the safety program(s) of the F-CPU(s) of one or more I-devices takes place via IO controller-I-device connections (F-CD) in PROFINET IO, in the same way as in standard systems. The following section describes particular aspects when the IO Controller and the I-device are located in different projects. Requirement The IO Controller is an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU that supports the IO Controller functionality. The I-device is an S7-300/400/1200/1500 F-CPU that supports the I-device functionality. The project in which the I-device is located, must have been created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4, STEP 7 Safety V13 or later. Configuring 1. Configure the safety-related communication in the project with the I-device as described under "Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device (Page 223)" (S7-300/S7-400) or "Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device (Page 290)" (S7-1200/S7-1500) respectively. In this case the FCPU 1 (IO Controller) is only a placeholder for the F-CPU in the project of the IO Controller. Note When creating with STEP 7 Safety < V14 SP1 avoid a subsequent change from the transfer areas from CD to F-CD. When creating with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 create the application transfer areas of the address type "Output" and "Input" directly after each other. 2. Export the I-device as a GSD file. Proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Configuring an I-device". 3. Import the GSD file in the project with the IO Controller. Proceed as described in the STEP 7 help under "Installing a GSD file". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 308 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Safety-related communication 9.5 Configuring and programming communication in several projects 4. Insert the I-device from the "Hardware catalog" task card into the project with the IO Controller. 5. Assign the F-CPU of the IO Controller to the I-device. 9.5.1.2 Programming safety-related IO Controller I-device communication Programming procedure To program the safety-related communication between the IO controller and I-device for an F-CPU S7-300/400, analogously follow the procedure described under "Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication via SENDDP and RCVDP (Page 226)" and "Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication (Page 227)". To program an S7-300/400 F-CPU, use the start addresses of the transfer areas. To program the safety-related communication between the IO controller and I-device for an F-CPU S7-1200/1500, analogously follow the procedure described under "Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication via SENDDP and RCVDP (Page 293)" and "Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication (Page 294)". To program an S71200/1500 F-CPU, use the HW identifiers of the transfer areas. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 309 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.1 10 Compiling the safety program To compile a safety program, follow the same basic procedure as for compiling a standard user program. You can start at various points to accomplish this in STEP 7. The basics for compiling user programs can be found in the Help on STEP 7. Note Please note that following a safety-related change to the hardware configuration that not only this, but also the safety program has to be recompiled and downloaded. This also applies for changes to the F-I/O which are not used in the safety program. Note The safety program is not compiled consistently with the menu command "Edit > Compile" or the "Compile" icon under the following conditions: * When you select a user-created folder in the project tree. * When you select one or more (F-)blocks in the "Program blocks" folder in the project tree. Use this procedure to test if modified F-blocks can be compiled. Note The following applies for S7-300/400 F-CPUs: If you want to compile a know-how-protected F-block after a change, you must remove the know-how protection for this F-block before compiling. Reporting compiling errors You can recognize whether or not the compilation was successful based on the message in the inspector window under "Info > Compile", error messages and warnings are output. For information on the procedure you must follow to eliminate compiling errors, see "Eliminating compiling errors" in the Help on STEP 7. See also Safety Administration Editor (Page 81) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 311 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.2 Safety program work memory requirements (S7-300, S7-400) 10.2 Safety program work memory requirements (S7-300, S7-400) Estimation You can estimate the work memory requirement for the safety program as follows: Work memory required for the safety program 32 KB for F-system blocks + 4.4 KB for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups + 4.5 x work memory requirement for all F-FB/F-FCs/main safety blocks + 4.5 x work memory requirement of all utilized instructions, which are shown in the "Instructions" task card with the block icon. (except SENDDP, RCVDP, SENDS7, and RCVS7) + Work memory requirement of the utilized SENDDP and RCVDP instructions (4.3 KB each) + Work memory requirement of the utilized SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions (8.5 KB each) Work memory required for data 5 x work memory requirement for all F-DBs (including F-communication DB, but excluding DB for F-runtime group communication) and I-DBs for main safety block/F-FB + 24 x work memory requirement for all DBs for F-runtime group communication + 2.3 x work memory requirement for all I-DBs of instructions (except SENDDP, RCVDP, SENDS7 and RCVS7) + Work memory requirement of all I-DBs of instructions SENDDP (0.2 KB), RCVDP (0.3 KB), SENDS7 (0.6 KB), and RCVS7 (1.0 KB) + 0.7 KB per F-FC + 0.7 KB per F-I/O (for F-I/O DBs, etc.) + 4.5 KB Block size of automatically generated F-blocks Do not utilize the entire maximum size of an F-block, because the automatically generated F-blocks are larger and as a result, the maximum possible size may be exceeded in the F-CPU. If the block size is exceeded, this triggers a corresponding error message with information on which F-blocks are too large. These must be divided up, if necessary. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 312 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.1 Downloading project data to an F-CPU Introduction Once you have successfully compiled your safety program, you can download it to the F-CPU. To download a safety program, you follow essentially the same approach as for downloading a standard user program, via different starting points in STEP 7. In the "Load preview" dialog, enter data (e.g. password for the F-CPU) and set the requirements for downloading (e.g. that the F-CPU is switched to STOP mode before downloading). The "Load results" dialog shows the results after downloading. We will show you the options for downloading the safety program later. For basic information on downloading, refer to the Help on STEP 7. Rules for downloading the safety program to an F-CPU WARNING If multiple F-CPUs can be reached over a network (e.g. Industrial Ethernet) by one programming device or PC, you must take the following actions to ensure that the project data is downloaded to the correct F-CPU: Use passwords specific to each F-CPU, such as a uniform password for the F-CPUs with attached Ethernet address for each. Note the following: * A point-to-point connection must be used to activate the access protection of an F-CPU when the hardware configuration is loaded for the first time (similar to assigning an MPI address to an F-CPU for the first time). * Before downloading the safety program to an F-CPU, you must first revoke an existing access permission for any other F-CPU. * The last download of the safety program prior to switching to productive operation must be made with enabled access protection. (S021) Note You can perform the downloading of a consistent safety program only in STOP mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 313 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data Note If STEP 7 Safety detects an inconsistent safety program during startup of the F-CPU, the F-CPU cannot be started, provided the F-CPU supports this detection function (see product information for the particular S7-300/400 F-CPU). This is always supported with S71200/1500 F-CPUs). A corresponding diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. If the F-CPU does not support this detection function, the F-CPU can go to STOP mode if an inconsistent safety program is executed in activated safety mode. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. When downloading the safety program, ensure that the "Consistent download" action is set for the "Safety program" selection in the "Load preview" dialog. Inconsistent downloading is only possible in disabled safety mode. Password prompt before downloading to an F-CPU If you have assigned a protection level for the F-CPU (Page 106) (in the properties of the F-CPU in the "Protection" tab), the corresponding password is prompted in "Load preview" dialog. Without entry of password, only actions that are allowed without password are possible. As soon as the conditions for downloading are met, the "Load" button becomes active. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 314 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data "Load preview" dialog For an F-CPU, the "Load preview" dialog also contains the section "Safety program". Make the following selection: In order to download a consistent safety program, select the "Consistent download" action under target "Safety program". (S7-300, S7-400) To download individual F-blocks selectively (Page 318), select the "Download selection" action under the target "Safety program", and then select the required F-blocks. If necessary, you will be prompted to disable safety mode under "Disable safety mode". This setting is only suitable for the online test of individual Fblocks. (S7-300, S7-400) In order to download the safety program only, select the "Consistent download" action under target "Safety program" and the "Download selection" action under target" Standard software", and then select only the standard blocks that call the main safety block. (S7-300, S7-400) To download no safety program, for example, because you do not know the password of the F-CPU, select the "No action" action under target "Safety program". For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs, only the "Consistent download" value is possible as an action in the "Load preview" dialog. It is not possible to select separate loading of standard program or safety program. The complete user program is automatically consistently downloaded as soon as changes have been made in both the standard program and in the safety program. Refer also to the section entitled Data exchange between standard user program and safety program (Page 195). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 315 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data "Load results" Dialog After downloading into the F-CPU, the dialog "Load results" is opened. This dialog shows you the status and the necessary actions after downloading. Verify that the "Downloading of safety program completed without errors." message appears in the "Load results" dialog. If not, repeat the download operation. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 316 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.1.1 Downloading project data to an S7-300/400 F-CPU with memory card inserted (SIMATIC Micro memory card or flash card) When you download project data to an S7-300/400 F-CPU with memory card inserted (SIMATIC Micro memory card for S7-300 or flash card for S7-400), you must observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not carried out in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the F-CPU with a programming device/PC to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Download the safety program to the F-CPU. * Perform a program identification (i.e. check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline). * Perform a memory reset of the F-CPU using the mode switch or via the programming device/PC. Once the work memory has been deleted, the safety program is again transferred from the load memory (memory card, SIMATIC Micro memory card for S7300 F-CPUs,flash card for S7-400 F-CPUs) to the work memory. (S022) 10.3.1.2 Downloading project data to an S7-400 F-CPU without flash card inserted When you download project data to an S7-400 F-CPU without flash card inserted, you must observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not carried out in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the F-CPU with a programming device/PC to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Perform a memory reset of the F-CPU using the mode switch or via the programming device/PC. * Download the configuration and the safety program to the F-CPU. * Perform a program identification (i.e. check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline). (S023) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 317 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.1.3 Downloading project data to a WinAC RTX F When you download project data to a WinAC RTX F, you must observe the following warning: WARNING You must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the WinAC RTX F with a programming device/PC to ensure that the WinAC RTX F does not contain an "old" safety program: 1. Perform a memory reset of the WinAC RTX F (see Windows Automation Center RTX WinAC RTX (F) 2010 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/43715176) manual). 2. Download the project data (Page 313) to the WinAC RTX F. If the function test of the safety program does not take place in the destination WinAC RTX F, you must also follow points 3. and 4: 3. Perform a program identification. This means you check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline. 4. Perform the F-system startup. Between the online program identification and the startup of the F-system, the WinAC RTX F must not be closed (for example, as a result of POWER OFF/POWER ON or booting). (S024) 10.3.1.4 Downloading individual F-blocks to an S7-300/400 F-CPU Download F-blocks in disabled safety mode. You can download F-blocks and standard blocks simultaneously to the F-CPU via the project tree. However, as soon as F-blocks are to be downloaded, a check is carried out to determine whether or not the F-CPU is in STOP mode or disabled safety mode. If not, you have the option of switching to disabled safety mode or placing the F-CPU in STOP mode. If you want to download individual F-blocks to the F-CPU, for example, to test changes, make sure that you have not selected the folder "Program blocks" or the F-CPU in the project tree but only the blocks you want to download. Only then will you be prompted in the "Load preview" dialog to disable safety mode once you have changed the option from "Consistent download" to "Download selection" and have changed the option "Stop modules" to "No action". If you fail to observe this prompt, the blocks are downloaded without deactivation of the safety mode which will STOP the F-CPU. You can also deactivate the safety mode explicitly in the Safety Administration Editor before you start the download. Be aware that the consistency of the safety program in the F-CPU cannot be guaranteed when individual F-blocks are downloaded. For a consistent safety program, always download the entire safety program to the F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 318 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data Rules for downloading individual F-blocks The following rules apply to downloading of individual F-blocks: Downloading is only possible in disabled safety mode or when the F-CPU is in STOP mode. F-blocks can only be downloaded to an F-CPU to which a safety program has already been downloaded. Only an offline safety program is permitted to be used as a source program. Consequently, you have to download the entire safety program when initially downloading the safety program and after changing the password for the safety program. Note If you are downloading F-blocks only, the blocks in which the main safety blocks are called (e.g., cyclic interrupt OB 35) are not downloaded. To do so, select the "Selection" option under "Standard software" in the preview dialog, and select the necessary blocks. Note Downloading of individual F-blocks is only suitable for testing F-blocks. Prior to the transition to productive mode, you must download the safety program consistently to the F-CPU. 10.3.1.5 Downloading project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU without program card inserted When you download project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU without program card inserted, you must observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not carried out in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the F-CPU with a programming device/PC to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Download the safety program to the F-CPU. * Perform a program identification (i.e. check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline). (S042) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 319 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.1.6 Downloading project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU with program card inserted When you download project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU with program card inserted, you must observe the following warning: WARNING You must observe the following procedure to ensure that there is no "old" safety program in the internal load memory of the F-CPU when you insert a program card into an S7-1200 F-CPU: 1. Check to see whether the STOP/RUN LED (orange) and the maintenance LED flash during startup for 3 seconds on an F-CPU without memory card. If this is the case, the internal load memory of the F-CPU has already been deleted (for example, when the F-CPU has already been operated with a program card as external load memory) and you can skip step 3. 2. Insert the program card into the F-CPU. If the F-CPU is in RUN, it will change to STOP. The maintenance LED on the F-CPU is flashing to indicate that the program card is being evaluated or that the internal load memory must be deleted. 3. Use one of the following methods to delete the internal load memory: - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. After restart and deletion of the internal load memory, the STOP/RUN LED (orange) and the maintenance LED must be flashing. The internal load memory of the F-CPU has been deleted in this case and does no longer store an "old" safety program. 4. Use one of the following methods to evaluate the program card: - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. The F-CPU restarts and evaluates the program card. The F-CPU then enters the startup mode (RUN or STOP) that has been set up for the F-CPU. (S061) For an S7-1200 F-CPU without inserted SIMATIC Memory Card and deleted internal load memory, the status LEDs have the status described in the table below. Description STOP/RUN Orange/Green ERROR Red MAINT Orange Internal load memory deleted and SIMATIC Memory Card not inserted. Flashing (orange) Off Flashing (for 3 seconds during startup) (for 3 seconds during startup) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 320 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data WARNING If you use a programming device/PC to download F-blocks to an S7-1200 F-CPU with inserted program card (external load memory), you must ensure that the transfer takes place to the external load memory. This can be accomplished by the following measures: * Check to see if the program card is inserted correctly. * Insert a program card whose memory size is different than the size of the internal load memory. Check in the project tree under "Online & Diagnostics > Diagnostics > Memory" if the memory size displayed for the load memory matches the memory size of the program card. (S058) WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not carried out in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the F-CPU with a programming device/PC to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Download the safety program to the F-CPU. * Perform a program identification (i.e. check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline). (S042) 10.3.1.7 Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F-CPU When you download project data to an S7-1500 F-CPU, you must observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not carried out in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the F-CPU with a programming device/PC to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Download the safety program to the F-CPU. * Perform a program identification (i.e. check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline). (S042) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 321 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.1.8 Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F Software Controller When you download project data to an S7-1500 F Software Controller, you must observe the following warnings: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not carried out in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when downloading the safety program to the F-CPU with a programming device/PC to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Download the safety program to the F-CPU. * Perform a program identification (i.e. check whether the collective F-signatures match online and offline). (S042) WARNING For security reasons, the password of an S7-1500 F Software Controller is also stored in a separate memory in addition to the load memory. Unlike the load memory, this separate memory is not deleted. This means the previous passwords are once again active after deleting the S7-1500 F Software Controller followed by a run-up. For this reason, note the following: * The S7-1500 F Software Controller is deleted in case of the following download scenarios of the PC station: - Downloading a PC station with revised interface assignment. - Downloading a PC station with revised storage location for retentive data. * We recommend that you do not set up F-access protection until after commissioning. If you still have to change the interface assignment of the PC station or the storage location for retentive data, you do not have to enter the F-password during the subsequent mandatory download of the S7-1500 F Software Controller. * We recommend that you remove the F-access protection from an S7-1500 F Software Controller that is no longer in use. If you forget the F-password when you want to operate the S7-1500 F Software Controller later, you can remove it by uninstalling/installing or loading a new image. (S076) See also Downloading project data to an F-CPU (Page 313) Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109249299) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 322 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.2 Downloading project data to a memory card and inserting a memory card Proceed as you would with standard blocks to download project data from an F-CPU to a memory card (flash card for S7-400, SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for S7-300 or SIMATIC Memory Card for S7-1200/1500). You must also observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the project data is not performed in the destination F-CPU, you must ensure that the correct project data are on the memory card after downloading the project data to the memory card. Follow these steps: 1. Make sure that you are using an empty memory card. 2. Download the project data to the memory card. 3. If necessary, clearly label the memory card (e.g. with the collective F-signature). The procedure outlined must be ensured through organizational measures. (S043) When inserting a memory card (flash card for S7-400, SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for S7-300 or SIMATIC Memory Card for S7-1200/1500) with project data from an F-CPU, you observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not performed in the destination F-CPU, you must ensure through online program identification or other suitable measures (e.g. by checking the labeling of the memory card) that the memory card inserted has the correct safety program. (S025) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 323 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.2.1 Inserting a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or flash card into an S7-300/400 F-CPU When you insert a memory card (flash card for S7-400 or SIMATIC Micro memory card for S7-300) into an S7-300/400 F-CPU , you must observe the following warning: WARNING If the function test of the safety program is not performed in the destination F-CPU, you must adhere to the following procedure when inserting the memory card to ensure that the F-CPU does not contain an "old" safety program: * Switch off the power to the F-CPU. For F-CPUs with battery backup (e.g. CPU 416F-2), remove any battery. (To ensure that the F-CPU is de-energized, wait for the buffer time of the power supply you are using or, if this is not known, remove the F-CPU.) * Remove the memory card with the old safety program from the F-CPU. * Insert the memory card with the new safety program into the F-CPU. * Switch on the F-CPU again. For F-CPUs with battery backup (e.g. CPU 416F-2), reinsert the battery, if one was removed. (S026) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 324 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.2.2 Inserting a transfer card into an S7-1200 F-CPU When you insert a transfer card into an S7-1200 F-CPU, you must observe the following warning: WARNING You must observe the following procedure to ensure that there is no "old" safety program in the internal load memory when you copy the project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU using a transfer card: 1. Check to see whether the STOP/RUN LED (orange) and the maintenance LED flash during startup for 3 seconds on an F-CPU without memory card. If this is the case, the internal load memory of the F-CPU has already been deleted and you can skip step 3. 2. Insert the transfer card into the F-CPU. If the F-CPU is in RUN, it will change to STOP. The maintenance LED on the F-CPU is flashing to indicate that the transfer card is being evaluated or that the internal load memory must be deleted. 3. Use one of the following methods to delete the internal load memory: - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. After restart and deletion of the internal load memory, the STOP/RUN LED (orange) and the maintenance LED must be flashing. The internal load memory of the F-CPU has been deleted in this case and does no longer store an "old" safety program. 4. Use one of the following methods to evaluate the transfer card (transfer from the transfer card to the internal load memory): - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. After restart and evaluation of the SIMATIC Memory Card, the F-CPU copies the project data to the internal load memory of the F-CPU. Once the copy process is complete, the maintenance LED on the F-CPU is flashing to indicate that you can remove the transfer card. 5. Remove the transfer card from the F-CPU. 6. Use one of the following methods to evaluate the internal load memory: - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. The F-CPU then enters the startup mode (RUN or STOP) that has been set up for the F-CPU. (S059) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 325 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data For an S7-1200 F-CPU without inserted SIMATIC Memory Card and deleted internal load memory, the status LEDs have the status described in the table below. Description STOP/RUN Orange/Green ERROR Red MAINT Orange Internal load memory deleted and SIMATIC Memory Card not inserted. Flashing (orange) Off Flashing (for 3 seconds during startup) (for 3 seconds during startup) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 326 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.3 Downloading project data of an S7-1200 F-CPU from the internal load memory to an empty SIMATIC Memory Card When you download project data from the internal load memory of an S7-1200 F-CPU to an empty SIMATIC Memory Card, you must observe the following warning: WARNING To ensure that the safety program is downloaded from the internal load memory of the FCPU to the SIMATIC Memory Card when plugging an empty SIMATIC Memory Card into an S7-1200 F-CPU and that the internal load memory of the F-CPU is deleted afterward, you must observe the following procedure: 1. Make sure that you are using an empty SIMATIC Memory Card, for example, by checking in the Windows Explorer that the "SIMATIC.S7S" folder and the "S7_JOB.S7S" file are deleted. 2. Insert the empty SIMATIC Memory Card into the F-CPU. If the F-CPU is in RUN, it will change to STOP. The maintenance LED on the F-CPU is flashing to indicate that the program can be copied from the internal load memory to the SIMATIC Memory Card and that the internal load memory is deleted afterward. 3. Use one of these methods to trigger copying from the internal load memory to the SIMATIC Memory Card and subsequent deletion of the internal load memory: - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. After restart and copying of the program from the internal load memory to the SIMATIC Memory Card and subsequent deletion of the internal load memory, the STOP/RUN LED (orange) and the maintenance LED must be flashing. The internal load memory of the F-CPU has been deleted in this case and does no longer store the safety program. The SIMATIC Memory Card is now a program card. 4. Use one of the following methods to evaluate the program card: - Turn the F-CPU off and back on. - Switch the F-CPU from STOP to RUN. - Execute the "Memory reset" (MRES) function. The F-CPU restarts and evaluates the program card. The F-CPU then enters the startup mode (RUN or STOP) that has been set up for the F-CPU. (S057) Note Also observe the setting "Disable copying from internal load memory to external load memory" in the hardware configuration of your F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 327 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.4 Updating project data on an S7-1200 F-CPU using a transfer card When you want to update the project data on an S7-1200 F-CPU using a transfer card, you must observe the following warning: WARNING If you run an update of the safety program on an S7-1200 F-CPU with the help of a transfer card, you must ensure that the transfer to the internal load memory took place correctly by means of a subsequent program identification. (S060) 10.3.5 Restoring a backup of the safety program to an S7-300/1200/1500 F-CPU You have the option of backing up an F-CPU in the same way as a standard CPU and then restoring it. You can find information on backing up a CPU in the help on STEP 7 under "Creating a backup of an S7-CPU". Note the following warnings when restoring the software and hardware configuration of an F-CPU: WARNING Once you have restored a backup of an F-CPU, you must perform a program identification. (S055) Note We recommend that you use the collective F-signature that is included in the name of the backup file for program identification. You must not change the collective F-signature in the name in this case. WARNING (S7-1200/1500) If multiple F-CPUs with Web server can be reached by a programming device or PC, you must take additional actions to ensure that the safety program is downloaded to the correct F-CPU by restoring it. Use CPU-specific passwords for the "F-Admin" right on the Web server. For example, select a uniform password with attached IP address (e.g. Password_192.168.0.8) for each F-CPU. (S065) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 328 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.6 Special features when creating and importing images of an S7-1500 F Software Controller Creating an image WARNING You must comply with the following points when creating an image with a safety program: * You must limit access to an S7-1500 F Software Controller through access protection to persons who are authorized to create images. * Before creating the image, you must use program identification to ensure that the correct safety program is installed on the S7-1500 F Software Controller. * Images with safety programs must be created on an empty data carrier (deleted or formatted) or an existing image must be explicitly deleted. * After creating the image, remove the data carrier containing the image. * Clearly label the data storage medium (e.g. with the collective F-signature). (S073) NOTICE If the safety program in the image and the old safety program on the S7-1500 F Software Controller are not identical, the imported safety program would not start. In this case, you must download the safety program to the F-CPU once again. For example, with the TIA Portal. Therefore, you should always keep your image backups up-to-date. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 329 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data Import image WARNING You must comply with the following points when importing an image with a safety program: * You must limit access to an S7-1500 F Software Controller through access protection to persons who are authorized to import images. * When importing an image via LAN, remote access or comparable accesses, you have to ensure access protection (e.g. via Windows administrator permission (ADMIN)). Note, however, that only authorized persons are set up as users. * To ensure that the images are written to the correct S7-1500 F software controller, when importing an image via LAN you must ensure that only one S7-1500 F software controller can be accessed. For example, by removing the physical connections and routing options to other S7-1500 F software controllers. * You must ensure that the correct safety program is on the image, for example, through unique identification of the data storage medium. * After importing the image, remove the image and copies thereof. * After importing the image, you must use program identification to ensure, for example with the Panel, that the correct safety program is installed on the S7-1500 F software controller.(S074) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 330 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.7 Loading project data from an F-CPU to a programming device / PC Loading the user program (including safety program) to a programming device / PC (S7-300, S7-400) To upload a user program (including safety program) to a programming device / PC, proceed as with a standard program, "Online > Upload from device (software)" or "Online > Upload device as new station (hardware and software)" You can only upload the hardware configuration if F-capability is not enabled for the F-CPU. You can only upload F-I/Os if these are operated in standard mode. Note In principle, it is possible to upload a safety program from the F-CPU to a programming device or PC. Note, however, that any symbols used in the safety program are deleted and cannot be recreated, since no symbol information is saved in the F-CPU. Symbols are available only if you are using an offline project. A safety program uploaded from the F-CPU to a programming device / PC may not be loaded again into the F-CPU. Loading the project data (including safety-related project data) into a programming device / PC (S7-1500) The "Upload from device (software)" or "Upload device as new station (hardware and software)" function is only possible for S7-1500 F-CPUs if the "Enable consistent upload from the F-CPU" option is activated for the F-CPU in the Safety Administration Editor and the project data are loaded to the F-CPU afterwards. To load the project data (including safety-related project data) to a programming device or PC, proceed as for standard blocks. If multiple F-CPUs can be reached over a network (e.g. Industrial Ethernet) by the programming device / PC, you have to ensure that the project data are downloaded from the correct F-CPU. For example with "Online & diagnostics" > "Online accesses " > "Flash LED". After successful loading from the device you can continue working as with a project that was created offline. WARNING If you want to carry out an acceptance with the project data upload to the programming device / PC or want to carry out changes to the safety-related project data and the F-CPU is in STOP mode, you have set to programming device / PC to RUN before uploading. This way, you can ensure that the safety program is executable. If the F-CPU remains in STOP, you are not allowed to perform acceptance or changes with the safety-related project data. (S080) You can load individual F-blocks into a programming device / PC irrespective of the "Enable consistent upload from the F-CPU" option. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 331 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data You cannot upload individual know-how protected F-blocks to a programming device / PC. Note The offline password is replaced or deleted by the online password of the safety program. See also "Settings" area (Page 90) 10.3.8 Loading PC station via the configuration file You have the option to save the system configuration of the PC system in a configuration file, transport it and load it to a target system. The entire configuration of your PC station is saved in a configuration file with the ending *.psc from the TIA Portal. Saving and loading of the configuration file is supported as of: STEP 7 Safety V15 S7-1500 F Software Controller V2.5 Example You can find a detailed example on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109759142). Identification parameters The identification parameters include: File name Information in the project and the station that was stored from the TIA Portal in the PSC file in the metadata. For example: - Project version - Plant designation - Station comment Save the identification parameters in a file, if necessary, that you store on the target system. For evaluating and testing these identification parameters via script, you must store this information directly in the script or save the identification parameters in a separate file, if necessary, that you store on the target system. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 332 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data 10.3.8.1 Creating a configuration file 1. In the TIA Portal create a new configuration file with "Project > Memory Card file > New > PC system configuration file (.psc)". The configuration file is created in the project tree under "Card Reader/USB memory". 2. Use the collective F-signature to check in the SAE that you have selected the correct project/station. 3. Use your mouse to drag the selected PC station to the configuration file. This loads the PC station to the configuration file. WARNING Instead of online program identification, you can use a unique name for the configuration file *.psc (PC Station Configuration) to ensure that the correct security program is located in the configuration file. In addition, you have to observe the following when creating a configuration file: On creation of a configuration file with the security program, an existing file may not be used. You have to create a new file. You should also remove configuration files with a faulty security program from data storage. You must limit access to the configuration file (*.psc) through access protection to persons who are authorized to import and modify the configuration file. (S081) 10.3.8.2 Importing the configuration file You have the following options for importing the configuration file: Via the PC Station Panel menu (import configuration file) By means of a script Import via the PC Station Panel menu Requirement If you want to start the import of the configuration file via the menu in the PC Station Panel of an S7-150xS(P) F, the executing user must be in the Windows user group "Failsafe Operators". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 333 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data Procedure WARNING If the import operation was successful, you will receive a positive feedback. If you do not receive a positive message, you must assume that the import operation was not successful and that the old security program is still present. When importing a configuration file of a PC station via the menu of the panel with a security program, you must observe the following: * Use the unique name of the configuration file to check that you have selected the required configuration file. * To ensure that the import is performed on the correct S7-1500 F software controller, when importing a configuration file via LAN you must ensure that you address the correct S7-1500 F software controller. To do this, perform one of the following actions: - Remove the physical connections and routing options to other S7-1500 F software controllers. - Use unique computer names and unique user logins or use other identification options. (S084) Import by means of a script WARNING You must check in the script based on the specified identification parameters whether the import of the configuration file is permitted for the respective target system (e.g. by evaluating the F-CPU name, project name or using the plant designation). In addition, checking the respective instance of the target system, which means a diversified check of your addressing and/or checking the version of the configuration file, for example, only higher versions or the exclusion of specific versions (black list), can also be necessary or useful. You must store this information on the target system beforehand. Example of checking the respective version for reliability: * The script evaluates the information about the version and only allows configuration files of a higher version, for example. As a machine manufacturer, you must ensure that the script is protected against unauthorized manipulation (change to contents or name). If as a machine manufacturer you only make available the configuration files, you have to ensure that an incorrect configuration file is not imported during import through technical measures (extended checks in the script) and training of the machine operators. (S082) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 334 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data The script checks for: Matching machine ID Version ID greater than current one. If so, the new version is written to the txt file. Instance number The figure below contains a systematic overview of checking the configuration file in the script with the help of an identification parameter stored in a separate file (shown in violet in the figure below): SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 335 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.3 Downloading project data WARNING You determine the successful import of a security program via the script by evaluating the corresponding return value (0x51A3). If the corresponding return value is not returned by the script command PCSystem_Control, the import has failed and the old safety program may still be present. To ensure that the return value is not from the previous import, you need to reset the return value to 0x3FF ("PCSystem_Control /ImportConfig" without entering a data name) before the import and then check that the return value has been reset to 0x3FF (Enter "PCSystem_Control /GetStatus /ImportConfig" and then enter "echo %errorlevel%". This instruction must deliver the return value 0x3FF.) If the import operation is triggered by a server, feedback about the positive return value must be given. For traceability we recommend that you document the import operation in a log file. If the the configuration file is imported manually via the Windows command line (via script command), you need to do one of the following: * Reset the return value to 0x3FF and check it before the import (see above). - Carry out the import. - Evaluate return value (enter "PCSystem_Control /GetStatus /ImportConfig" and then enter "echo %errorlevel%". This instruction must deliver the return value 0x51A3). * Carry out the import. - Manual program identification performed, e.g. via the panel of the F-CPU. (S083) Note The positive return value when importing a configuration file via script is "0x51A3" for an S71500 F software controller, in contrast to the S7-1500 software controller, in which case it is "0x0000". When the file is imported via script, the authorization should be moved to the script. This means that the executing user does not need a higher authorization as the script which was made available by the machine manufacturer contains the necessary authorizations (user group "Failsafe Operators"). The rights are assigned via script by assignment of the Windows service to the corresponding user group. This initial installation must be performed beforehand by the Windows administrator on every computer with S7-150xS(P) F. The Windows service can be called by the executing user and the Windows service executes the script. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 336 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.4 Program identification 10.4 Program identification You use the program identification to determine that the correct safety program was downloaded to the F-CPU To do so, you compare the collective F-signatures of the safety program and the assignment of the "F-admin" rights online with the expected value. The expected value can be, for example, the collective F-signature of the safety program offline from the Safety Administration Editor or from the safety summary. Check the assignment of the "F-admin" right in the Safety Administration Editor. Use organizational measures to ensure that the safety program is not downloaded by any other TIA Portal (on a separate programming device or PC) while you perform the program identification. With the Safety Administration Editor For a program identification using the Safety Administration Editor, follow these steps: 1. Open the Safety Administration Editor of the F-CPU you want to check. 2. Connect online with the F-CPU you want to check. 3. Compare the collective F-signature displayed online with the expected value in the "General" section. 4. Check whether the offline and online program are consistent (Page 375). 5. Check whether the green symbol is displayed in the column "status" and "Version comparison". 6. Check in the "Web server F-admins" section whether only authorized users have the "Fadmin" right offline and online. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 337 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.4 Program identification With HMI For a program identification using the HMI, follow these steps: 1. Read the collective F-signature of the safety program from the F_PROG_SIG tag of the F-global DB (Page 148) (S7-300, S7-400) or the tag F_SYSINFO.F_PROG_SIG of the F-runtime group information DB (Page 148) (S7-1200, S7-1500). 2. Compare the value of the F_PROG_SIG tag with the expected value. With the display of an S7-1500 F-CPU For a program identification using the display of an F-CPU, follow these steps: 1. In the display menu, go to "Overview > Fail-safe". 2. Compare the displayed collective F-signature with the expected value. With the Web server of an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU For a program identification using the Web server of an S7-1200/1500 F-CPU, follow these steps: 1. Read the collective F-signature on the homepage of the Web server. 2. Compare the displayed collective F-signature with the expected value. See also Safety Administration Editor (Page 81) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 338 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.5 Comparing Safety Programs 10.5 Comparing Safety Programs Compare safety programs as in standard You can use the comparison editor in STEP 7 for offline-online or offline-offline comparison of safety programs. The procedure is the same as for standard user programs. The contents of F-blocks are also compared for the comparison of safety programs. As a result, an offlineoffline comparison can also be used for an acceptance of changes (Page 378). You enable this comparison by selecting the "Safety" comparison criterion and disabling all other comparison criteria. Comparison result for safety programs The representation of the comparison result corresponds to the representation of STEP 7. If you click the "Program blocks" folder on the left of the comparison editor, you can see the collective F-signature of the safety program displayed under "Comparison result". You also receive information about whether the safety program is consistent. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 339 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.5 Comparing Safety Programs If you click on an F-block, you can see the respective signatures and interface signatures in addition to the standard information. Note If you interrupt the connection to the F-CPU during the online/offline comparison, the comparison result will be incorrect. Comparison filter options You can use filters in the comparison editor to limit the comparison result to the following block groups: Compare only F-blocks Compare only F-blocks relevant for certification Compare only standard blocks You also have the STEP 7 filter options "Show only objects with differences" and "Show identical and different objects". For comparison of safety programs, F-blocks in the "System blocks" folder are also relevant. Comparison criteria Make sure that under only the comparison criterion "Safety" is enabled. Classification of displayed changes Regardless of whether you carried out an offline/online or offline/offline-comparison, the following changes could account for the indicated changes to the automatically generated Fblocks: Change in the maximum cycle time of F-runtime group and warn cycle time of F-runtime group Change in F-parameters of the F-CPU changed safety system version or change to the hardware configuration (S7-1200/1500: Displayed as change of the "F_SystemInfo_DB" block). (S7-300/400) Change in the F-runtime group communication, for example, change in the number of a DB for F-runtime group communication Change in main safety block, F-FB, F-FC, F-DB Change of the hardware configuration for the F-I/O addressed in the safety program It is possible that a block is displayed as changed, but no changes are displayed in the detailed comparison of the block content. This is not a display problem but means that changes of addresses in the tag table, for example, have an effect on this block. Test this block in case of doubt. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 340 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.6 Printing project data Printing result of comparison The comparison result can be printed via "Project > Print" in the menu bar or the print button in the toolbar. Select "Print objects/area" "All" and "Properties" "All". Make sure that all pages were printed completely. Incomplete printouts (e.g. due to low on toner) must not be used for the acceptance of changes. 10.6 Printing project data Printing You can print all important project data (hardware configuration of the F-CPU and F-I/O, safety program). You obtain a "safety summary" that, alongside the documentation, serves as a basis for testing the correctness of the individual components of the system. Correctness is a prerequisite for system acceptance. The collective F-signature specifications in the footer of the printout ensure that the printout is explicitly associated with a safety program. Safety summary The safety summary provides documentation of the safety-related project data which supports you during acceptance of the system. Procedure for creating a safety summary To create a safety summary, follow these steps: 1. In the project tree, select the Safety Administration Editor of the F-CPU whose safety summary you want to create. 2. Select "Print" in the shortcut menu or "Project > Print" in the menu bar or the print button in the toolbar. In the displayed dialog, you can make layout settings for the printout and specify the scope of the printout (all/subset), among other things. 3. Under "Document information", select one of the ISO formats, e.g. "DocuInfo_ISO_A4_Portait". 4. Select the "All" option, if the F-blocks and F-compliant PLC data types are to be shown in the printout. This is necessary, for example, to document the program code for the acceptance(see Acceptance of system (Page 361)). Select the "Compact" option to exclude the source code from the printout. 5. Click the "Print" button. As a result, you receive the safety summary for the F-CPU. Make sure that all pages were printed completely. Incomplete printouts (e.g. due to low on toner) must not be used for the acceptance of changes. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 341 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.6 Printing project data Contents of the summary in overview The topics that are considered in the summary are summarized in the following: General information on program identification, signatures, software versions, access protection, settings of the safety program (from the "Settings" work area of the Safety Administration Editor), for example safety system version. System library elements used in safety program (from the "Instructions" task card) along with their versions Information about the F-runtime groups (e.g. cycle time warning limit of the F-runtime group, maximum cycle time of the F-runtime group) List of the F-blocks within the "Program blocks" folder (e.g. name, function, associated F-runtime group, signature) (S7-1200, S7-1500) List of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program (e.g., name, signature, used safety system version, used versioned instructions or called F-blocks). (S7-1200, S7-1500) List of F-compliant PLC data types (UDT), if these exist in the safety program. Data from the standard user program that are evaluated in the safety program Block parameters of the safety-related CPU-CPU communication (S7-300, S7-400) Absolute addresses and names of the F-shared DB tags that can be accessed from the standard user program Information on hardware (used F-I/O, CPU version, addresses) Information on the printout (print date, number of pages) Content of the footer of the printouts On the basis of the footer of the printout, you can find out: Whether the printed safety-related project data is consistent and whether all pages of the printout belong to the same safety program and the same version (the same F-collective signature in the footer of every page means that the printout belongs to the safety program with this F-collective signature). The footer is added to the source code of the F-blocks only if the "All" option was selected for the safety summary. If F-blocks are printed by other means, the footer is omitted, and you can no longer easily identify whether the block printout belongs to the current safety program version. Printing a migrated project You can only print a safety summary for a project migrated from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 if the project was compiled with STEP 7 Safety Advanced and the new program structure for safety programs (main safety block) has therefore been applied. Otherwise, the printout is not possible and you will receive a corresponding error message. We recommend that you print out your project in S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 before the migration. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 342 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program 10.7.1 Overview of Testing the Safety Program Complete function test or test of changes After creating a safety program, you must carry out a complete function test in accordance with your automation task. For changes made to a safety program that has already undergone a complete function test, only the changes and that there is no effect on the parts of the safety program that were not changed need be tested. Monitoring Read-only test functions (such as monitoring tags of the safety program) are available for safety programs as in the standard. Modifying Read and write test functions (such as controlling tags of the safety program) are only available to a limited extent for safety programs and only in disabled safety mode. Simulation via S7-PLCSIM You can test the safety program using S7-PLCSIM. You use S7-PLCSIM in the same way as for standard user programs. You start the simulation with S7-PLCSIM using menu item "Online > Simulation > Start". Rules for testing Forcing of F-I/O inputs and F-I/O outputs is not possible. Controlling F-I/O outputs in connection with the function "Enabling F-I/O outputs" is not possible. Setting breakpoints in the standard user program will cause errors in the safety program (see also Testing the safety program (Page 347)). Changes in the configuration of F-I/O or safety-related CPU-CPU communication can only be tested after the hardware configuration has been saved and downloaded, and after the safety program has been compiled and downloaded to the F-CPU. See also Disabling safety mode (Page 344) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 343 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program 10.7.2 Disabling safety mode Introduction The safety program generally runs in the F-CPU in safety mode. This means that all fault control measures are activated. The safety program cannot be modified during operation (in RUN mode) in safety mode. You must disable safety mode of the safety program to, for example, modify tags in the safety program in RUN mode. Safety mode remains disabled until the F-CPU is next switched from STOP to RUN mode. Rules for disabling safety mode WARNING Because changes to the safety program can be made in RUN mode when safety mode is deactivated, you must take the following into account: * Disabling safety mode is intended for test purposes, commissioning, etc. Whenever safety mode is disabled, the safety of the system must be ensured by other organizational measures, such as monitored operation, manual safety shutdown, and access restrictions to certain areas. * Disabling of safety mode must be displayed. Use the MODE tag in the F-global DB ("F_GLOBDB".MODE) for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or in the F-runtime group information DB (e.g. RTG1SysInfo.F_SYSINFO.MODE) for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs, which you can evaluate to read the operating mode (1 = Disabled safety mode). This means not only is the disabled safety mode displayed on the programming device or PC in the dialog box for disabling safety mode, but it can also be indicated by means of an indicator light controlled by the standard user program or a message to an HMI system generated by evaluating the above-mentioned "Disabled safety mode" variable in the F-shared DB. * It must be possible to verify that safety mode has been disabled. A log is required, if possible by recording and, if applicable. archiving alarms to the operator control and monitoring system or, if need be, through organizational measures. In addition, it is recommended that disabling of safety mode be indicated on the HMI system. * Safety mode is disabled F-CPU-wide. You must, however, take the following into account for safety-related CPU-CPU communication: If the F-CPU that sends the data is in disabled safety mode, you can no longer assume that the data sent by this F-CPU are generated safely. You must then ensure safety in those units that are affected by the sent data through organizational measures or output safe substitute values in the F-CPU that receives the data by evaluating SENDMODE* instead of the received data. * SENDMODE is available to you as output of the RCVDP or RCVS7 instructions or in case of communication via Flexible F-Link as a tag in the F-communication DB. (S027) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 344 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Procedure for disabling safety mode To disable safety mode, follow these steps: 1. Open the Safety Administration Editor of the corresponding F-CPU. 2. Open the work area "General (Page 83)" in the area navigation. 3. Check to see whether the safety mode status is displayed as activated. If so, continue with the next step; if not, stop the process, because safety mode is already disabled or cannot be disabled. 4. Click the "Disable safety mode" button. 5. Enter the password for the online safety program. If you enter the correct password, another prompt will appear, which also contains the collective F-signature in the F-CPU. Check to see whether this is the collective Fsignature you expected. If there is a match, acknowledge the dialog. 6. Enter the password for the F-CPU. After correctly entering the password for the F-CPU, safety mode is disabled. If the password is not valid, safety mode is not deactivated and remains active. (S7-300, S7-400) When individual F-blocks are downloaded, the condition "Disable safety mode" is listed automatically in the "Load preview" dialog. For this reason, it is not necessary to explicitly disable safety mode before every F-block download. Note If the collective F-signature or the passwords do not agree for the safety program online and offline, this means: * The offline safety program was modified after the last downloading, or * An incorrect F-CPU was addressed. Check the latter based on the online collective F-signature. Enabling safety mode Note To enable safety mode, the F-CPU must be switched from STOP to RUN mode. Switching the F-CPU from STOP to RUN mode always enables safety mode, even if the safety program has been modified or is not consistent. The MODE tag in the F-shared DB for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or F-runtime group information DB is set to "0" for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. If you have changed your safety program, but have not recompiled and downloaded it, the F-CPU can revert to STOP mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 345 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Evaluating safety mode/disabled safety mode If you wish to evaluate safety mode/disabled safety mode in the safety program, you can evaluate the "MODE" tag in the F-shared DB for S7-300/400 F-CPUs or F-runtime group information DB for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs (1 = Disabled safety mode). You use fully qualified access to access this tag (e.g. "F_GLOBDB".MODE or RTG1SysInfo.MODE). You can use this evaluation, for example, to passivate F-I/O when the safety program is in disabled safety mode. To do so, assign the "MODE" tag in the F-shared DB or F-runtime group information DB to all "PASS_ON" tags in the F-I/O DBs of the F-I/O that you wish to passivate. WARNING When the safety program is in disabled safety mode, the "MODE" tag in the F-shared DB or F-runtime group information DB is also evaluated in disabled safety mode. Even if the F-I/O are passivated in disabled safety mode as a result of evaluation of the "MODE" tag, system safety must be ensured in disabled safety mode through other organizational measures, such as operation monitoring and manual safety shutdown. (S028) See also F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 148) F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 148) Communication (Page 588) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 346 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program 10.7.3 Testing the safety program Introduction Tags of he safety program can be monitored at any time. Controlling tags of the safety program is only possible in deactivated safety mode as some fault control measures of the safety program have to be disabled for this. You can control the following tags of the safety program: Inputs and outputs of the F-I/O (channel values and value status (S7-1200, S7-1500)) Tags in F-global DB (except DB for F-runtime group communication) Tags in instance DBs of F-FBs Tags in F-I/O DBs (for permitted tags see F-I/O DB (Page 165)) Note A modify function controlled by the F-system is only possible if the STEP 7 Safety optional package is installed. Modification of tags by means of an HMI system as well as modification without an installed STEP 7 Safety optional package can cause the F-CPU to go into STOP. Procedure for monitoring tags of the safety program Monitor the required tags of the safety program from an open watch table or from the program editor (program status). 1. Proceed as in the standard. Additional information can be found in the STEP 7 help in "Testing user programs". Procedure for controlling tags of the safety program Control the required tags of the safety program from an open watch table: 1. For modifying, deactivate the safety mode (Page 344) in the automatically shown dialog. 2. Terminate existing modify requests after testing is complete before activating safety mode. Values in F-DBs can only be modified online in the F-CPU. If the value is also to be changed offline, you must do this by editing the start value offline and compiling the safety program. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 347 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Proceed as follows to control tags of F-I/O: 1. Create a separate row for each channel value and value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) to be modified. The control value must correspond to the channel value or value status. 2. Set "start of scan cycle" or "end of scan cycle" and "permanent" or "once". Regardless of the trigger point setting, requests to modify inputs (PII) of F-I/O always become effective before the main safety block is executed and requests to modify outputs (PIQ) always become effective after execution of the main safety block. 3. (S7-300, S7-400) Create an additional watch table if you want to control more than 5 inputs/outputs. Note F-I/O can only be modified in RUN mode of the F-CPU. You cannot modify a configured F-I/O from which neither a channel value or a value status (S7-1200, S7-1500), nor any tag from the associated F-I/O DB has been used in the safety program. In your safety program, you should therefore always use at least one tag from the associated F-I/O DB or at least one channel value or value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) of the F-I/O to be modified. For inputs (PII), modify requests take priority over fail-safe value output, while for outputs (PIQ), fail-safe value output takes priority over modify requests. For outputs (channels) that are not activated in the properties for the F-I/O, modify requests affect the PIQ only, and not the F-I/O. Note The following applies for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs: To avoid invalid combinations of channel value and status value: * The value status is set by the F-system automatically to 1 when setting a channel value to a value <> fail-safe value 0 * The fail-safe value 0 is automatically output when setting the value status to 0 for the associated channel value WARNING You need to specifically reset constant modify requests in the watch table in disabled safety mode. Please note that constant modify requests that are not correctly reset can remain active in the background even after a STOP/RUN transition on the F-CPU. Because the F-CPU is in safety mode again after a STOP/RUN transition, the constant modify requests are no longer effective and are not shown in the watch table. The requests become active again as soon as you disable safety mode again. With a memory reset of the F-CPU, you can make sure that no constant modify requests are active in the background on the F-CPU. (S029) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 348 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Wiring test using watch table You can carry out a wiring test for an input by changing an input signal and verifying whether or not the new value arrives in the PII. You can carry out a wiring test for an output by changing the output with the Modify function and verifying whether the required actuator responds. For the wiring test, note that a safety program must be running on the F-CPU, in which at least one channel value or value status (S7-1200, S7-1500) of the F-I/O to be monitored or modified or one tag from the associated F-I/O DB has been used. For F-I/O that can also be operated as standard I/O (e.g., S7-300 fail-safe signal modules), you can also carry out the wiring test for outputs using the Modify function in STOP mode by operating the F-I/O as standard I/O rather than in safety mode. Additional rules for testing (S7-300/400/1500) Setting breakpoints in the standard user program will cause the following errors in the safety program: F-cycle time monitoring has expired Error during communication with the F-I/O (S7-1500) Fail-safe modules switch to safe mode after the configured F-monitoring time has expired. Error during safety-related CPU-CPU communication Internal CPU faults If you nevertheless want to use breakpoints for testing, you must first disable safety mode. This will result in the following errors: Error during communication with the F-I/O Error during safety-related CPU-CPU communication Difference between S7-1500 F-CPUs and S7-300/400 F-CPUs: If a breakpoint is activated and reached, the F-CPU goes directly to STOP after HOLD. If you want to switch to RUN again after HOLD to test your standard user program further, you can simulate this with S7-PLCSIM. No access protection is initially necessary for test purposes, commissioning, etc. This means you can execute all offline and online actions without access protection, that is, without password prompt. See also Changing the safety program in RUN mode (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 355) Downloading project data to an F-CPU (Page 313) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 349 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program 10.7.4 Testing the safety program with S7-PLCSIM You can test your safety program together with your standard program on a simulated CPU with S7-PLCSIM and without the need for hardware. Also observe warning S030 in the section "Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program (Page 383)". You use S7-PLCSIM for SIMATIC Safety F-systems as you would for S7 standard systems. Note the following special features: Safety mode/disabled safety mode We recommend that you test your safety program in safety mode to detect whether the F-CPU goes into STOP as early as in the test phase of your safety program in S7-PLCSIM as a result of, for example, that the results of instructions were outside the permitted range for the data type. The following simulations can be run in S7-PLCSIM, just as on an actual F-CPU, in disabled safety mode only. Modifying tags in F-DBs and F-I/O DBs. The F-CPU can go to STOP mode in S7-PLCSIM if this is disregarded. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. (S7-1200, S7-1500) To prevent unintentional modification of tags in F-DBs and F-I/O DBs in safety mode, we recommend that you do not select the "Activate/deactivate modification of non-inputs" button in S7-PLCSIM During the simulation with S7-PLCSIM , monitoring of the maximum cycle time of the F-runtime group and the cycle time warning limit of the F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500) are disabled. Input simulation of F-I/O Modification of inputs (channel values) in S7-PLCSIM: You modify inputs (channel values) of F-I/O as you would inputs (channel values) of standard I/O in S7-PLCSIM. Modification of inputs (value status) in S7-PLCSIM: (S7-1200, S7-1500) By modifying inputs (value status) of F-I/O you can simulate the incoming and outgoing F-I/O/channel faults. Keep in mind the following notes/restrictions: To realistically simulate the behavior of the F-I/O, you must note the connection between channel value and value status on the real F-I/O. The combination value status = 0 and channel value <> fail-safe value (0) is invalid and can result in the simulation deviating from the behavior of the real F-CPU. During the transition from "STOP" to "RUN" of the CPU in S7-PLCSIM, all F-I/O inputs (value status) are initialized with 1. This means you can start with the modification of inputs (channel values) without simulation of the inputs (value status). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 350 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program The modification of inputs (value status) in S7-PLCSIM does not have an effect on the tags QBAD and PASS_OUT in the F-I/O DB. Note that with real F-I/O QBAD and PASS_OUT can be 1 as soon as the value status is 0 for at least one channel of the F-I/O. (see tags of the F-I/O DB: PASS_OUT/QBAD/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status (Page 171)). For F-I/O configured with "Behavior after channel fault" = "Passivation of the complete F-I/O", use the tag PASS_ON in the F-I/O DB for simulation of the passivation of the complete F-I/O for F-I/O / channel faults. If you only passivate individual inputs (channel value including value status) for the simulation, the behavior of the simulation will deviate from the real F-CPU. You can also use the PASS_ON tag in the F-I/O DB for F-I/O without value status to simulate the passivation of the entire F-I/O in case of F-I/O or channel faults. You must modify the inputs (channel values) to 7FFFH (for overflow) or 8000H (for underflow) to simulate an F-I/O/channel fault of the SM 336; AI 6 x 13Bit or the SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4...20 mA HART with configuration "Behavior after channel fault" = "Passivate channel". For F-I/O which does not support the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile, you must run a user acknowledgment with a positive edge at the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB as with a real F-I/O for reintegration after the value status has changed from 0 to 1 or when the channel value has changed from 7FFFH/8000H to unequal 7FFFH/8000H (see above) when ACK_NEC = 1 of the F-I/O DB. Reintegration takes place automatically in all other cases possibly deviating from the real F-I/O. Update times Keep in mind that the status of the inputs (channel values or value status (S7-1200/1500)) that you are monitoring in the SIM table in S7-PLCSIM is only identical to the status being processed in the safety program if there is no passivation of the associated F-I/O. With passivation of the F-I/O, the safety program operates with fail-safe values (channel value and value status (S7-1200/1500) =0). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 351 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Instructions for communication between F-CPUs The following applies for SENDDP/RCVDP (S7-300/400) instructions and SENDDP/RCVDP instructions with Version < 3.0 (S7-1200/1500): You cannot simulate communication between F-CPUs with the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions in S7-PLCSIM. You can, however, use the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions together with S7-PLCSIM. During simulation in S7-PLCSIM, the RCVDP instruction outputs the fail-safe values pending at its inputs SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx ((S7-1200/1500) or alternatively SUBDI_00). The SENDDP and RCVDP instructions signal this with 1 at output SUBS_ON. For SENDDP/RCVDP instructions with Version >= 3.0 the following applies: During the simulation with S7-PLCSIM it is possible to simulate the received data and the information "Deactivated Safety Mode" (RCVDP) or respectively the information "Substitute value output" (SENDDP) in the corresponding transfer area for inputs. Note the following notes: The simulated values do not become active until you set the SIMULATION bit for the first time in the respective simulation control word (see the following table) after the F-system has started up. Before setting the SIMULATION bit, the RCVDP instruction outputs the fail-safe values that are pending at its inputs SUBBO_xx and SUBI_yy ((S7-1200/1500) or alternatively SUBDI_00). The setting of the SEND_MODE bit in the simulation control word causes a setting of the SENDMORE output for the RCVDP instruction. The setting of the STATUS_SUBS bit in the simulation control word causes a setting of the SUBS_ON output for the SENDDP instruction. Reserved bits in the simulation control word always have to be 0. During a STOP/RUN transition from S7-PLCSIM the most recently simulated values in the transfer area for inputs are kept. The start address(es) of the configured transfer area for the input and output data can be found in the respective configuration (see also "Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 270)"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 352 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Table 10- 1 Structure of the relevant transfer area for inputs of the simulation control word (instruction RCVDP) Byte Meaning 0 RD_BO_15 ... RD_BO_08 Comment 1 RD_BO_07 ... RD_BO_00 2 RD_I_00 Word RD_I_00, MSB1) first RD_I_01 Word RD_I_01, MSB1) first DINTMODE=0: 3 4 5 Alternative DINTMODE=1: 2 RD_DI_00 High Word from RD_DI_00, MSB1) first 3 4 Low Word from RD_DI_00 XOR 0x8000, MSB1) first 5 6 Simulation control word (High Byte) Bit 0...6: Reserved 7 Simulation control word (Low Byte) Bit 7: SIMULATION: Activating RCVDP simulation Bit 0: SEND_MODE: Set output SENDMODE Bit 1...7: Reserved 8 ... 11 1) Reserved MSB: most significant bit Table 10- 2 Structure of the relevant transfer area for inputs of the simulation control word (instruction SENDDP) Byte Meaning Comment 0 Simulation control word (High Byte) Bit 0: STATUS_SUBS: Set output SUBS_ON Bit 1...6: Reserved Bit 7: SIMULATION: Activating SENDDP simulation 1 Simulation control word (Low Byte) 2...5 Reserved Bit 0...7: Reserved SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 353 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program WARNING You must take the following into account for safety-related CPU-CPU communication with the communication type Flexible F-Link: If the F-CPU that sends the data is on a simulated F-CPU with S7-PLCSIM, you can no longer assume that the data sent by this F-CPU are generated safely. You must then implement organizational measures such as operation monitoring and manual safety shutdown to ensure safety in those portions of the system that are affected by the sent data. Alternatively, you must output fail-safe substitute values instead of the received data in the F-CPU that receives the data by evaluating SENDMODE*. * SENDMODE is available to you as a tag in the F-communication DB. (S086) (S7-300, S7-400) You cannot simulate communication between F-CPUs with the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions in S7-PLCSIM. You can, however, use the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions together with S7-PLCSIM. During simulation in S7-PLCSIM, the RCVS7 instruction outputs the initial values specified in the communication DB as fail-safe values. The SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions signal this with 1 at output SUBS_ON. Inconsistent safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) If the CPU goes into STOP in S7-PLCSIM with the diagnostic entry "Safety program: inconsistent", the F-CPU is not initialized correctly in S7-PLCSIM yet. Perform a memory reset of the F-CPU in S7-PLCSIM and download the program once again to the CPU in S7-PLCSIM. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 354 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program 10.7.5 Changing the safety program in RUN mode (S7-300, S7-400) Introduction Changes to the safety program during operation (in RUN mode) can only be made in disabled safety mode (Page 344). You make changes to F-blocks offline in the program editor in the same way as for a standard program. F-blocks cannot be changed online. Note If you do not want to make changes to the safety program during operation, see Creating F-blocks in FBD/LAD (Page 151). Procedure for changing the safety program in RUN mode To change the safety program, follow these steps: 1. Change the main safety block or F-FB and its associated instance DB, F-FC, or F-DB in the Program editor. 2. Download the changed F-block(s) to the F-CPU (for procedure, see Downloading project data to an F-CPU (Page 313)). The entire program is then automatically compiled. 3. If safety mode is active, the "Load preview" dialog will prompt you to deactivate it and to enter the password for the safety program. Note When downloading in disabled safety mode, you can only download the fail-safe blocks created by you (main safety blocks, F-FB, F-FC, or F-DB), F-application blocks, or standard blocks and their associated instance DBs. If you download automatically added F-blocks (F-SBs or automatically generated F-blocks and associated instance DBs, F-shared DB), the F-CPU can go to STOP mode or safety mode can be activated. Therefore, always select individual blocks only when downloading in disabled safety mode. Sequence for downloading changes Changes in the safety program in RUN mode when safety mode is disabled can, for example, cause the status of an actuator to change as a result of program changes. After changes, start by downloading the safety program and then the function of the standard user program monitored by the safety program. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 355 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Restrictions on safety-related CPU-CPU communication During operation (in RUN mode), you cannot establish new safety-related CPU-CPU communication by means of new SENDDP/RCVDP or SENDS7/RCVS7 instructions. To establish new safety-related CPU-CPU communication you must always download the relevant safety program consistently to the F-CPU while in STOP mode after inserting a new SENDDP, SENDS7, RCVDP, or RCVS7 instruction. Restrictions on F-runtime group communication You cannot make any changes to the safety-related communication between F-runtime groups in RUN mode. This means that you cannot assign, delete, or change any DBs for Fruntime group communication of an F-runtime group. Following changes in the F-runtime group communication, you must always download the safety program consistently to the F-CPU while in STOP mode. Restrictions on F-I/O access If during operation (in RUN mode), you insert an F-I/O access to an F-I/O of which no single channel value or tag from the associated F-I/O DB has yet been used in the safety program, the F-I/O access only becomes effective when the safety program is downloaded consistently to the F-CPU. Changing the standard user program You can download changes in the standard user program when the F-CPU is in RUN mode, regardless of whether safety mode is enabled or disabled. WARNING (S7-300, S7-400) In safety mode, access with the CPU password must not be authorized during changes to the standard user program as this would also allow changes to the safety program. To rule out this possibility, you must configure the protection level "Write protection for fail-safe blocks" and configure a password for the F-CPU. If only one person is authorized to change the standard user program and the safety program, the protection level "Write protection" or "Read/write protection" should be configured so that other persons have only limited access or no access at all to the entire user program (standard and safety programs).(S001) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 356 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Procedure for applying changes to the safety program If you download individual F-blocks to the F-CPU during operation (in RUN mode), the F-system blocks (F-SBs) and the automatically generated F-blocks are neither updated nor downloaded, resulting in an inconsistent safety program in the F-CPU. Use the following procedure to apply changes to the safety program: 1. Download the safety program consistently to the F-CPU, and activate safety mode by switching the F-CPU from STOP to RUN mode (for procedure, see Downloading project data to an F-CPU (Page 313)). 2. Follow the steps described in Acceptance of Changes (Page 378). 10.7.6 Changing the standard user program in RUN mode (S7-1200, S7-1500) Changing the standard user program You can download changes in the standard user program when the F-CPU is in RUN mode, regardless of whether safety mode is enabled or disabled. 10.7.7 Deleting the safety program Deleting individual F-blocks To delete an F-block, follow the same procedure as in STEP 7. Deleting an F-runtime group See Deleting an F-runtime group (Page 150) (S7-300, S7-400) Remove all calls that you have used to call the safety program (Main_Safety). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 357 Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.7 Testing the safety program Deleting the entire safety program for S7-300/400 F-CPUs with inserted memory card (SIMATIC Micro memory card or flash card) To delete an entire safety program, proceed as follows: 1. Delete all F-blocks (shown with yellow symbol) in the project tree. 2. Remove all calls that you have used to call the safety program (Main_Safety). 3. Select the F-CPU in the hardware and network editor and clear the "F-capability activated" option in the properties of the F-CPU. 4. Compile the project data of the F-CPU The offline project no longer contains a safety program. 5. To delete a safety program on the Memory Card (SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or Flash Card), insert the Memory Card (SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or Flash Card) in the programming device or PC or in a SIMATIC USB prommer. 6. Select the menu command "Project > Card Reader/USB memory > Show Card Reader/USB memory" in the menu bar. 7. Open the "SIMATIC Card Reader" folder and delete the Memory Card. 8. Insert the Memory Card into the F-CPU. You can then download the offline standard user program to the F-CPU. Deleting the entire safety program for S7-400 F-CPUs without inserted flash card To delete an entire safety program, proceed as follows: 1. Delete all F-blocks (shown with yellow symbol) in the project tree. 2. Remove all calls that you have used to call the safety program (Main_Safety). 3. Select the F-CPU in the hardware and network editor and clear the "F-capability activated" option in the properties of the F-CPU. 4. Compile the project data of the F-CPU The offline project no longer contains a safety program. 5. Perform a memory reset on the F-CPU (in the "Online tools" task card of the F-CPU). You can then download the offline standard user program to the F-CPU. Delete the entire safety program for SIMATIC S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs To delete an entire safety program, proceed as follows: 1. Delete all F-blocks (shown with yellow symbol) in the project tree. 2. Select the F-CPU in the hardware and network editor and clear the "F-capability activated" option in the properties of the F-CPU. 3. Compile the project data of the F-CPU The offline project no longer contains a safety program. You can then download the offline standard user program to the F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 358 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Compiling and commissioning a safety program 10.8 F-change history 10.8 F-change history Enable the logging of changes to the safety program by using the option "Enable F-change history" in the Safety Administration Editor. The F-change history behaves like the standard change history. An F-change history is created for each F-CPU in the project navigation under "Common data/logs". The following is logged in the F-change history: Collective F-signature User name Compile time stamp Download of the safety program with time stamp Compiled F-blocks with signature and time stamp The F-change history can contain a maximum of 5000 entries per F-CPU. When the 5000 entries are exceeded, a new F-change history is created using the naming scheme "Fchange history YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss". After a project upgrade, the "Go to" function is not supported anymore for the F-change history of the project for the entries which were created before STEP 7 Safety V15.1. NOTICE The connection between the F-CPU and the associated F-change history is made through the name of the F-change history. Therefore, do not rename the F-CPU and the F-change history. If you rename the F-CPU or the F-change history, a new F-change history with the current name of the F-CPU is started. Note You may not use the F-change history to recognize changes in the safety program/in the configuration of the F-I/Os during the acceptance of changes. To accept changes, proceed as described under Acceptance of Changes (Page 378). Note We recommend activating the F-change history before changing over to productive operation. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 359 System acceptance 11.1 11 Overview of System Acceptance Introduction During a system acceptance test, all the standards and guidelines (for example PROFINET Installation Guidelines) relevant to the specific application must be complied with. This also applies to systems that are not "subject to acceptance". For the acceptance, you must consider the requirements in the Certification Report (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200). As a general rule, the acceptance of an F-System is performed by an independent expert. The independence required of the expert must be defined in the safety plan and depends on the required PL/SIL. Observe all warnings in this manual. WARNING The configuration of F-CPUs and F-I/Os as well as the programming of F-blocks must be carried out as described in this documentation. You must observe all aspects described in the section System acceptance (Page 361) to ensure secure operation with the system SIMATIC SAFETY. Any other procedures are not permitted. (S056) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 361 System acceptance 11.1 Overview of System Acceptance Proof of the correct implementation of the safety-related project data In order for a system acceptance to be granted, you must recognize and document the correctness of the individual components. For documentation of the component properties, you must create a safety summary. The following characteristics must be covered: Correctness of the safety program including hardware configuration (including testing) (Page 363) Completeness of the safety summary (Page 364) Compliance of the system library elements used in the safety program with Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certificate (Page 365) Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program with their safety documentation. (Page 366) Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration (Page 368) Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374) Identity of online and offline program (Page 375) Other characteristics (Page 376) such as software version, use of data from the standard user program After the acceptance, you should archive all relevant documents and also the project data so as to make the accepted project available as a reference for a subsequent acceptance. Safety summary The safety summary (Page 341) is the project documentation required for acceptance of the system. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 362 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.2 Correctness of the safety program including hardware configuration (including testing) 11.2 Correctness of the safety program including hardware configuration (including testing) The correctness of software cannot only be ensure through tests and verifications during commissioning, but rather already requires the observance of a wide variety of measures during creation. Also see warning S062 on this in chapter "Overview (Page 23)". Verification/function test Already during the creation, you will test (Page 343) your safety program and the associated hardware configuration. You must carry out tests with regard to the specification of your safety functions and document them before you seek acceptance for the system. To allow you to perform a code review of your safety program and document the accepted program code, the source code of all F-blocks is printed as a part of the safety summary (Page 341), provided you have selected the "All" property for the printout. If you want to carry out a function test after loading, you have to carry out program identification after loading. Additional information is available in "Downloading project data (Page 313)". The correct function of the safety program must be guaranteed by complying with all steps from the "Overview of System Acceptance (Page 361)" chapter before it may be used productively. When using configuration control (option handling), you must ensure correct operation of the safety program for all possible station options by performing appropriate functional tests. You should archive the test reports along with the safety summary and the acceptance documents. Times, for example monitoring times (Page 607) and delay times, can only be verified to a limited extent with functional tests (Page 313). You should check these times selectively to determine whether they are dimensioned correctly, for example, on the basis of the safety summary. Some of these times are itemized specially in the safety summary, for example, the F-monitoring time (for communication between F-CPU and F-I/O) and the monitoring time of the safety-related CPU-CPU communication (TIMEOUT input). For the monitoring times derived under normative conditions, the Excel file for response time calculation is available on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100). These have to be considered together with the practically determined conditions of the application. Note that these monitoring times have an impact on the response times of your safety functions. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 363 System acceptance 11.3 Completeness of the safety summary Consistency of the safety program Check in the "General information" section of the safety summary to determine whether the safety program was recognized as "consistent". This is the case for S7-300/400 F-CPUs only if the following signatures are also identical: Collective F-signature ("General information" section, "Collective F-signature") "Signature of F-blocks with F-attribute" ("General information" section, "Current compilation") Consistency of the safety program is required for the acceptance. If the signatures are not identical, you have the possibility to establish the consistency through recompiling of the safety program and new creation of the safety summary. 11.3 Completeness of the safety summary Introduction If your safety program status including hardware configuration is ready for acceptance, you must carry out and document additional checks on the basis of the safety summary to prove that the safety summary is complete and is part of the safety program to be accepted. Procedure for creation of safety summary To generate the safety summary, follow the procedure described in Printing project data (Page 341). In so doing, use the "All" property in order to include the source code of your F-blocks in the printout. Checking the safety summary for completeness If you want to use an existing summary, whose completeness is not exactly known, you must check to determine whether the same collective F-signature is contained in the footer on all pages of the printout. This allows you to prove that all printed sheets belong to the same project. In section "Supplementary information", you can find the number of pages in the safety summary, among other things. With this, you can prove that all pages of the safety summary are printed. Incomplete printouts (for example due to low on toner) must not be used for an acceptance. If you created the safety summary with the "All" option, the source code of all F-blocks will also be printed. The printout of this source code also contains the footer to enable you to easily assign the source code to a particular safety summary. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 364 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.4 Compliance of the system library elements used in the safety program with Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certific Association with the safety program In the "General information" section of the safety summary, check whether the collective Fsignature corresponds to the collective F-signature of the safety program to be accepted in the work area of the Safety Administration Editor under "General". If they are not the same, then the summary and safety program do not match. 11.4 Compliance of the system library elements used in the safety program with Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certificate Introduction The STEP 7 Safety optional package contains LAD/FBD instructions for programming of your safety program as well as F-system blocks that have been created and tested by SIEMENS and certified by TUV for creating an executable safety program. In the process, the F-system blocks used are automatically defined by the F-system based on the set safety system version (see section "Settings" area (Page 90)). To allow you to check whether the used versioned LAD/FBD instructions and F-system blocks correspond to Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certificate and to the versions you intend to use, these are listed in the safety summary. Procedure To check, download the current Annex 1 of the report for the TUV certificate "SIMATIC Safety" from the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200). Proceed as follows for the check: WARNING * (S7-1200, S7-1500) The versions of the versioned LAD/FBD instructions listed in the safety summary in the section "System library elements used in safety program" must correspond to the versions in Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV Certificate. * (S7-300, S7-400) The versions, signatures and initial value signatures of the versioned LAD/FBD instructions and F-system blocks listed in the safety summary in the section "System library elements used in safety program" must correspond to the versions, signatures and initial value signatures in Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV Certificate. * The versions of the versioned LAD/FBD instructions listed in the safety summary must meet the safety requirements of your application. Keep in mind possible differences in functionality of different versions specified in the section for the respective instruction. * The safety system version listed in the safety summary under "Safety program settings" must match the versions in Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV Certificate. (S054) In case of discrepancies, recheck whether you have the correct versions. (S7-300 / 400) Differences may also arise when there are F-blocks / instructions in your safety program that are not used. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 365 System acceptance 11.5 Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program with their safety documentation. 11.5 Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program with their safety documentation. If you use know-how protected F-blocks for the programming of your safety program (e.g. from libraries), the source code for these is not printed in the safety summary. Therefore, the author of the know-how protected F-block must already carry out acceptance of the F-block and provide the following information: S7-300/400 F-CPUs Signature and initial value signature of the know-how protected F-block Versions of all the used versioned LAD/FBD instructions Signatures and initial value signatures of all called F-blocks During a system acceptance test, you have to carry out the following checks using the safety summary: The signature and initial value signature of each know-how protected F-block listed in the safety summary in the section "F-blocks in the safety program" must agree with the signature and initial value signature documented by the author. The versions of the versioned LAD/FBD instructions listed in the safety summary in the section "System library elements used in safety program" must correspond to the versions of each know-how protected F-block documented by the author or must be functionally identical with these. The signatures and initial value signatures of the F-blocks called in each know-how protected F-block listed in the safety summary in the section "F-blocks in the safety program" must correspond to the signatures and initial value signatures (of the called Fblocks) documented by the author. In case of differences, set the documented (or functionally identical) versions and use the Fblocks with the documented signatures and initial value signatures. If the version conflicts cannot be eliminated due to other dependencies, please contact the author of the know-how protected block in order to obtain a compatible approved version. S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs Signature of the know-how protected F-block Safety system version when setting up the know-how protection Versions of all the used versioned LAD/FBD instructions Signatures of all called F-blocks SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 366 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.5 Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the safety program with their safety documentation. During a system acceptance test, you have to carry out the following checks using the safety summary: The signature of each know-how protected F-block listed in the safety summary in the section "Know-how protected F-blocks in the safety program" must agree with the signature documented by the author. The safety system version of each know-how protected F-block listed in the safety summary under "Know-how protected F-blocks in the safety program" must match the versions in Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV Certificate. The versions of the versioned LAD/FBD instructions of each know-how protected F-block listed in the safety summary in the section "Know-how protected F-blocks in the safety program" must correspond to the versions documented by the author or must be functionally identical with these. The signatures of the F-blocks called in each know-how protected F-block listed in the safety summary in the section "Know-how protected F-blocks in the safety program" must correspond to the signatures (of the called F-blocks) documented by the author. In case of differences, set the documented (or functionally identical) versions and use the Fblocks with the documented signatures. If the version conflicts cannot be eliminated due to other dependencies, please contact the author of the know-how protected block in order to obtain a compatible approved version. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 367 System acceptance 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration Introduction The hardware configuration is an essential component of the project to be accepted. With the configuration of the hardware, you have set properties that can influence the safety of signals. You must document these settings with the safety summary to prove that you fulfill the safety requirements for your application. The section "Hardware configuration of F-I/O" is available in the safety summary for this. This section consists of several tables: A table with information about the F-CPU and the ranges of F-destination addresses used and of the Central F-source address of the F-CPU. An overview table with the F-I/O used. A table for each F-I/O with information about the F-I/O and all parameters of the F-I/O with the configured values. Check whether only authorized users have the "F-admin" right in the Safety Administration Editor or in the standard printout of the project data. Note Note that you will find F-I/O that you address via safety-related I-slave-slave communication in the safety summary of the I-slave F-CPU and not in the F-CPU of the assigned DP master. The safety summary of the F-CPU of the DP master includes a note for this F-I/O in the overview table indicating that the F-I/O is not assigned to this F-CPU. Note When using shared devices: Note that you will find F-I/O that you address in a shared device in the safety summary of the F-CPU of the IO controller to which it is assigned. The safety summary of the F-CPUs of the other IO controllers between which the shared device is divided, includes a note in the overview table for this F-I/O that it is not assigned to this F-CPU. Procedure for checking that the hardware configuration is complete Ensure that all configured F-I/O are included in the safety summary. Also make sure that there is no F-I/O that you have not configured as belonging to this F-CPU. Note If configuration control (option handling) is used, the safety summary must contain all the FI/O devices of the maximum configuration. The following checks are to be carried out for al the F-I/Os of the maximum configuration. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 368 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration Procedure for checking the correctness of the hardware configuration using the safety summary To check the hardware configuration for correctness, proceed as follows: 1. Check in the "F-hardware configuration" section to verify the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe addresses. Please see sections PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 (Page 68) or PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70), Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices (Page 77) and Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment (Page 65). - Check if the "Central F-source address" parameter of the individual F-CPUs differs network-wide. F-CPUs to which solely F-IOs of the PROFIsafe address type 1 are assigned do not have to be considered during the check. - For F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 check whether the F-destination addresses comply with the following warning: WARNING F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 are uniquely addressed by their F-destination address (e.g. with the switch setting on the address switch). The F-destination address (and therefore also the switch setting on the address switch) of the F-I/O must be unique network-wide* and CPU-wide** (system-wide) for the entire F-I/O. The F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 must also be considered. (S051) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. - For F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 2 check whether the F-destination addresses comply with the following warning: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 369 System acceptance 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration WARNING FI/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 is uniquely addressed using a combination of Fsource address ("Central F-source address" parameter of the assigned F-CPU) and F-destination address. The combination of F-source address and F-destination address for each F-I/O must be unique network-wide* and CPU-wide** (system-wide). In addition, the Fdestination address may not be occupied by F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1. To ensure that addresses are unique across F-CPUs for supported configurations (Page 66), you need to ensure that the "Central F-source address" parameter of all F-CPUs is unique network-wide*. This is achieved through different settings for the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPUs. (S052) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. - fail-safe GSD based DP slaves / GSD based I/O devices check whether the PROFIsafe addresses comply with the following warning: WARNING Check the documentation for your fail-safe GSD based DP slaves / GSD based I/O devices to find out the valid PROFIsafe address type. If you do not find the necessary information, assume PROFIsafe address type 1. Proceed as described under PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 (Page 68) or PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2 (Page 70). Set the F-source address according to the manufacturer specifications for fail-safe DP standard slaves / fail-safe IO standard devices. If the F-source address needs to correspond to the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU (PROFIsafe address type 2), you will find the latter in the "Properties" tab of the F-CPU. In this case, also check in the safety summary that the value of the F-CPU for the "Central F-source address" parameter matches the value of the F-source address of the failsafe GSD based DP slave / fail-safe GSD based I/O device. (S053) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 370 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration 2. Check the safety-related parameters (including F-monitoring time or F_WD_Time) of all configured F-I/O. You can find these parameters in the "Hardware configuration of F-I/O" section in the detailed tables for the F-I/O. The table consists of two parts: - The left part contains the parameters which refer to the F-I/O itself ("Module data"). - The right part contains the parameters of the individual channels ("Channel parameters") These parameters must be set as prescribed by the safety requirements of your application. When using fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices, note the relevant documents for the possible additional safety-related (technical) parameters. Note F-I/O that are to be assigned the same safety-related parameters (except for PROFIsafe addresses) can be copied during configuration. Except for the PROFIsafe addresses, you no longer have to check the safety-related parameters individually. It is sufficient to compare the "Signature of F-parameters (without addresses)" in the "Hardware configuration of the F-I/O" section in the overview table. This also applies to fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices without i-parameters. For GSD based DP slaves / GSD based I/O devices with i-parameters, it may be that "F-parameter signature (w/o addresses)" does not match, even though all safety-related parameters, except for the PROFIsafe addresses, do match. In this case, you need to compare all safety-related parameters. Exception: For F-I/Os that do not support the "RIOforFA-Safety" profile, you also need to compare the "Behavior after channel fault" parameter, if any, for "F-parameter signature (w/o addresses)". 3. Check whether the article numbers of the F-I/O in the safety summary correspond to the article numbers of the actual F-I/O in the system. If the article numbers are different, the existing F-I/O must be spare-part-compatible to the F-I/O listed in the safety summary. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 371 System acceptance 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration 4. For non-supported configuration, please see Configurations supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system (Page 66). WARNING Please note the following with configurations that are not included in supported configurations: * Make sure that the F-I/O of this configuration appears in the safety summary and that an F-I/O DB has been created for it. Otherwise, you cannot use the F-I/O in this configuration. (Contact Customer Support.) * For F-I/Os in the PROFINET IO environment**, you must check the PROFIsafe operating mode parameter (F_Par_Version) against the safety summary to make sure that it is correct. V2 mode must be set in the PROFINET IO environment. F-I/O which only support V1 mode may not be used in the PROFINET IO environment. * You must ensure that PROFIsafe address assignment is unique CPU-wide* and network-wide***: - Check the correctness of the PROFIsafe addresses with the help of the safety summary. - Use the safety summary to check that the F-source address corresponds to the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2. - For F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1 or if you cannot set the F-source address in accordance with the "Central F-source address" parameter of the F-CPU, you will have to ensure the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address solely by assigning a unique F-destination address. You must check the uniqueness of the F-destination address individually for each FI/O based on the safety summary in a configuration that is not supported. (S050) * "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. ** The F-I/O is located in the "PROFINET IO environment" if at least part of safety-related communication with the F-CPU takes place via PROFINET IO. If the F-I/O is connected via I-slave-slave communication, also keep in mind the communication line to the DP master/IO controller. *** A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 372 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.6 Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration 5. Check that only authorized persons have the "F-admin" right. WARNING The "F-admin" authorization for Web server without password protection (user "Everybody" or "Everyone") is only intended for test purposes, maintenance, etc. This means only when the system is not in productive operation. In this case, you must ensure the safety of the system through other organizational measures, for example through protected access to certain areas. Before you transition into productive operation, you must remove the "F-admin" right for the user "Everyone". Only authorized personnel may have access to the password of the Web server user with the "F-admin" right. After downloading the hardware configuration, check whether only permitted users of the Web server have the "F-admin" right on the F-CPU. To do so, use the online view of the Safety Administration Editor (see also Safety Administration Editor (Page 81)). Saving the login file and the password of the Web server in the browser is only permitted when use by unauthorized persons is prevented through other organizational measures (e.g. access protection to the PG/PC). (S064) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 373 System acceptance 11.7 Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration 11.7 Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration Introduction Safety-related communication is based on the mechanisms of the standard communication of STEP 7. To ensure that errors which standard communication does not discover are detected, safetyrelated communication connections between F-CPUs are secured. Further parameters are required for this, which you have to document and check on acceptance. For this purpose, the "Block parameters for safety-related CPU-CPU-communication" and "Overview of communication via Flexible F-Link" sections are available in the safety summary. The section "Block parameters for safety-related CPU-CPU-communication" contains up to two tables (for communication via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO and for communication via S7 connections). The section "Overview of communication via Flexible F-Link" contains a table with an overview of the connection configurations and a "Communication via Flexible F-Link for UDT" table for each used F-compliant PLC data type (UDT). Procedure for testing for correctness of the communication via Flexible F-Link To check the communication via Flexible F-Link for correctness, follow these steps: Check your connection parameter assignment in the table "Overview of communications via Flexible F-Link". If you have copied communication relationships, ensure the uniqueness of the UUID. Check the table(s) "Overview of communications via Flexible F-Link" for each F-communication relationship to ensure that the offsets of the elements of the Fcompliant PLC data types (UDT) match regarding send and receive data within the safety message frame. Procedure for testing for correctness of the communication configuration To check the communication configuration for correctness, proceed as follows: In the "Safety-related CPU-CPU communication via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO" table, check to determine whether you have assigned a unique DP_DP_ID input networkwide* for all safety-related communication connections (e.g., master-master, masterI-slave and IO controller-IO controller communication). In the "Safety-related CPU-CPU communication via S7 connections" table, check to determine whether you have assigned a unique R_ID input network-wide* for all safetyrelated communication via S7 connections. * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 374 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.8 Identity of online and offline program 11.8 Identity of online and offline program Once you have checked all properties of the offline safety program you must ensure that the safety program is identical on the F-CPU on which it is supposed to be run. 1. Connect online with the F-CPU. If multiple F-CPUs can be reached over a network (e.g. Industrial Ethernet) by the programming device / PC, you have to ensure that you are connected with the correct F-CPU. For example with "Online & diagnostics" > "Online accesses " > "Flash LED". 2. Open the Safety Administration Editor. 3. Check whether the online and offline F-collective signatures match the F-collective signatures from the safety summary. 4. In the "General" area, check the information for - F-collective signature online - F-collective signature offline - Information on whether safety programs are consistent online and offline. - Version check view Use the output information to check which situation you are dealing with and, if necessary, execute the recommended measure: collective Fsignatures online/offline Consistency Statement Measure online to offline not relevant The safety programs are different. * Ensure that you are connected with the desired F-CPU. * Download the safety program to the F-CPU. The safety programs are identi- The safety program must be cal but different versions of Fdownloaded to the F-CPU blocks are used. for the latest versions to become effective. The safety programs are identi- None cal. Keep in mind that only a change comparison will provide reliable information as to whether the safety programs are identical. The display of signatures is used for quick identification of changes. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 375 System acceptance 11.9 Other characteristics 11.9 Other characteristics Introduction In addition, you must check a few more characteristics that are also relevant for the acceptance of the project. Validity check for data transfer from the standard program to the safety program Check to determine whether a validity check was programmed for all data transferred from the standard user program to the safety program. For this purpose, the "Data from the standard user program" section lists all tags of the standard user program that you are reading in the safety program. Tags of the safety program that you are writing in the safety program are not listed here because a plausibility check is not required for them. For more information, refer to the S015 warning in section "Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program (Page 197)". Checking the program version Check whether the version of STEP 7 Safety used to create the summary (in the footer of the printout) is as least as high as the version used to compile the safety program. The latter version can be found in the "General information" section of the safety summary under "Used Versions". Both versions must be listed in Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certificate. Ability to disable safety mode Make sure that safety mode cannot be disabled. For information about this, refer to section "General information" under "Safety program settings". This setting ensures that the safety mode of the safety program cannot be disabled inadvertently. For more information, refer to the S027 warning in section "Disabling safety mode (Page 344)". Access protection Check in the "General information" section under "Access protection" to determine whether the setting for access protection is permitted. Note the following warning. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 376 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.9 Other characteristics Otherwise, the project must not be accepted, because the safety program in the F-CPU is not protected against unauthorized accesses. WARNING (S7-300, S7-400) In safety mode, access with the CPU password must not be authorized during changes to the standard user program as this would also allow changes to the safety program. To rule out this possibility, you must configure the protection level "Write protection for fail-safe blocks" and configure a password for the F-CPU. If only one person is authorized to change the standard user program and the safety program, the protection level "Write protection" or "Read/write protection" should be configured so that other persons have only limited access or no access at all to the entire user program (standard and safety programs).(S001) WARNING (S7-1200, S7-1500) In safety mode, the safety program must be password-protected. For this purpose, configure at least the protection level "Full access (no protection)" and assign a password under "Full access incl. fail-safe (no protection)". This protection level only allows full access to the standard user program, not to F-blocks. If you select a higher protection level, for example to protect the standard user program, you must assign an additional password for "Full access (no protection)". Assign different passwords for the individual protection levels. (S041) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 377 System acceptance 11.10 Acceptance of Changes 11.10 Acceptance of Changes Introduction In general, you can adopt the same approach for the acceptance of changes as the initial acceptance (see Overview of System Acceptance (Page 361)). You must check the complete safety program including the safety-related HW configuration for changes. WARNING In the case of acceptance of changes, you must check whether the intended changes were made correctly and completely. You must also check whether unintentional changes may have been made at another location (for example, I/O or instructions that were added).(S072) To avoid the acceptance of the entire system in case of negligible changes, STEP 7 Safety helps you to identify those parts of your safety program that have changed. For an acceptance of changes, it is sufficient to check the following: Checking the changed or newly added F-blocks. Checking the changed or newly added instructions and F-system blocks. Checking the safety-related parameters of the changed or newly added F-I/O. Checking the structure of the safety-related HW configuration (e.g. slot positions or start addresses of the F-I/Os). Checking the changed communication connection with Flexible F-Link. You then perform a function test of the F-blocks/F-I/Os affected by the changes. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 378 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.10 Acceptance of Changes Check that the changes have no impact on the unchanged parts of safety-related project data, in particular for deleted F-blocks or deleted F-I/O. Note Acceptance of changes is not possible after CPU migration. WARNING When you make changes in which the assignment of input/output addresses and wiring can change, then you must perform a wiring test (Page 347). Examples for such changes are: * Adding F-I/O * Changing the start address of F-I/O * Changing the slot position of F-I/O * Changing - the rack - the slave/device address - the PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO subnet - the IP address - the device name (S071) Detection of changes in the safety-related project data You need two TIA projects to identify relevant changes: Reference project: Contains the initially accepted project data. They are the starting point for the upcoming comparison. Project to be accepted: Contains the current safety-related project data. It is the result of the reference project and the changes made in it. To detect changes you have to compare the safety-related project data from the reference project with the data of the project to be accepted. The F-collective signature is a quick first step to determine whether relevant changes have been made. If the signature has changed, relevant changes are present in the safety-related project data. You can now use the F-SW collective signature, the F-HW collective signature and the Fcommunication address signature to narrow down whether these changes are contained in the safety program (F-SW collective signature changed) and/or in the safety-related project data (F-HW collective signature) and/or in the communication data (with Flexible F-Link, Fcommunication address signature). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 379 System acceptance 11.10 Acceptance of Changes Detection of changes in the safety program A quick possibility to detect changes in the safety program is the comparison of the F-SW collective signature of the safety-related project data in the reference project with the F-SW collective signature in the safety-related project data in the project to be accepted. If they differ from each other, this means that there are changes in the safety program which need to be validated and, if necessary, accepted. To localize changes in the safety program, perform an offline-offline comparison between the changed safety program and the accepted safety program (see Comparing Safety Programs (Page 339)). Use filter setting "Compare only F-blocks relevant for certification". This limits the output of the comparison to exactly those F-blocks that must be considered for the acceptance of changes. WARNING Make sure that the comparison criterion "Safety" is enabled so that the criteria relevant for an acceptance of changes are taken into consideration in the comparison. (S069) By disabling the remaining comparison criteria, you can deselect those differences that are irrelevant for the acceptance of changes (e.g. time stamp). The status of the comparison helps you to identify which F-blocks were changed. Detection of changes in the safety-related hardware configuration A quick possibility to detect changes in the safety-related hardware configuration is the comparison of the F-HW collective signature of the safety-related project data in the reference project with the F-HW collective signature of the safety-related project data in the project to be accepted. If they differ from each other, this means that there are changes in the safety-related hardware configuration which need to be validated and, if necessary, accepted. If the F-HW collective signature has changed and all F-I/O devices are unchanged, this indicates that safety-related parameters of the F-CPU have changed, or that the structure of the safety-related hardware configuration has changed, for example, slot positions. There are two possible ways for localizing safety-related changes in the safety-related hardware configuration: Comparison in the comparison editor Comparison based on two safety summaries SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 380 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH System acceptance 11.10 Acceptance of Changes Comparison in the comparison editor If you have access to the reference project, you can also detect the changes in the safetyrelated hardware configuration through an offline-offline comparison of the changed F-CPU with the accepted F-CPU (see Comparing Safety Programs (Page 339)). Both projects must be consistent and compiled. 1. Navigate in the comparison result to the "System blocks > STEP 7 Safety > F-I/O DBs" folder. All data blocks listed in this folder are F-I/O-DBs and are each assigned to an F-I/O. - If the F-I/O-DBs in the comparison result are identical, this means that the safetyrelated configuration of the assigned F-I/O was also not changed. Standardparameters may have changed. - If the F-I/O-DBs in the comparison result are not identical, this means that the safetyrelated configuration of the assigned F-I/O was also changed. - If the F-I/O DBs in the comparison result are marked as "not existing", associated F-I/O devices may have been deleted or added or the name or start addresses of the F-I/O devices have been changed. In this case you can find the assignment of an F-I/O DB to a specific F-I/O in the safety summary under "Hardware configuration of F-I/O". 2. If you have found changed F-I/O, you can check the changed parameters in the safety summary as described below. Comparison based on two safety summaries Carry out a comparison based on two safety summaries as follows: 1. In the section "Hardware configuration of the F-I/O" compare the start addresses (I/O addresses), the parameter "Behavior after channel fault" and the slot of the F-I/O. 2. In the overview table of the utilized F-I/O in the "Hardware configuration of F-I/O" section, compare the parameter CRCs of the F-I/O with those in the safety summary of the accepted F-CPU. - If the "Parameter signature (without addresses)" is different for an F-I/O, this indicates the existence of a safety-related change of safety-related parameters of the F-I/O. In addition, the PROFIsafe addresses may also be changed. In this case, in the "F-I/O hardware configuration" section check the safety-related parameters of the F-I/O and verify the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe addresses. - If the "Parameter signature (w/o addresses) is identical, it is possible that only the PROFIsafe addresses were changed. In this case it is sufficient to verify the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe addresses. Check as described in section "Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration (Page 368)". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 381 System acceptance 11.10 Acceptance of Changes Detecting changes in the communication with Flexible F-Link A quick possibility to detect changes in the configuration of the communication with Flexible F-Link, the comparison of the F-communication address signature of the safety-related project data in the reference project with the F-communication address signature of the safety-related project data in the project to be accepted. If they differ from each other, this means that there are changes in the configuration of the communication with Flexible F-Link, which need to be validated and, if necessary, accepted. To localize changes in the configuration of the communication with Flexible F-Link, compare the table "Overview of communications via Flexible F-Link" of the reference project in the respective safety summary with the one of the project to be accepted. See also Accessing tags of the F-I/O DB (Page 174) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 382 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Operation and Maintenance 12.1 12 Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program Introduction Pay attention to the following important notes on safety mode of the safety program. Use of simulation devices/simulation programs WARNING Use of simulation devices/simulation programs in plants If you operate simulation devices or simulation programs that generate safety message frames, for example, based on PROFIsafe, and make them available to the SIMATIC Safety F-system via the bus system (such as PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO), you must ensure the safety of the F-system using organizational measures, such as operational monitoring and manual safety shutdown. Note, for example, that a protocol analyzer is not permitted to perform any function that reproduces recorded message frame sequences with correct time behavior. S7-PLCSIM version < 15.1 or S7-PLCSIM Advanced version < 2.0 SP1 and safety system version < 2.2 If you use the S7-PLCSIM (Page 343) to simulate safety programs, the measures mentioned above are not necessary because S7-PLCSIM cannot establish an online connection to a real component. S7-PLCSIM version 15.1 or S7-PLCSIM Advanced version 2.0 SP1 or safety system version 2.2 You must ensure the safety of the F-system with organizational measures, for example, through operation monitoring and manual safety shutdown. In addition, the loading of a safety program with Safety System version 2.2 and higher onto an S7-PLCSIM is only permissible as of S7-PLCSIM V15.1 or S7-PLCSIM Advanced V2.0 SP1. (S030) Note For an S7-PLCSIM before V15.1 or S7-PLCSIM Advanced before V2.0 SP1 and a Safety System version 2.2 and higher, the safety program changes to STOP and a corresponding diagnostics event is issued. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 383 Operation and Maintenance 12.1 Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program Switching F-CPU to STOP mode WARNING STOP via programming device/PC, mode switch, communication function or "STP" instruction Initiating STOP by means of programming device/PC operation, mode switch, communication function or "STP" instruction as well as maintaining the STOP state is not safety-oriented. This STOP state can be easily (and unintentionally) be revoked by programming device/PC operation. When an F-CPU is switched from STOP to RUN mode, the standard user program starts up in the usual way. When the safety program is started up, all F-DBs are initialized with the values from the load memory - as is the case with a cold restart. This means that saved error information is lost. The F-system automatically reintegrates the F-I/O. If your process does not allow such a startup, you must program a restart/startup protection in the safety program: The output of process data must be blocked until manually enabled. This enable must not occur until it is safe to output process data and faults have been corrected (see Programming startup protection (Page 155)). (S031) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 384 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Operation and Maintenance 12.1 Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program CRC error in safety-related communication Note CRC error in safety-related communication If you observe that an F-CPU requests manual acknowledgement of a CRC error more than once within the space of 100 hours, and this occurs repeatedly, check whether the PROFINET or PROFIBUS installation guidelines have been followed. There is a CRC error if: * The ACK_REQ tag of the F-I/O DB is set and the DIAG tag of the F-I/O DB (bit 2 or bit 6) indicates CRC errors or * A CRC error is entered in the diagnostic buffer of the F-CPU In this case, the failure probability values (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109481784) (PFDavg/PFH) for safetyrelated communication no longer apply. Information on installation guidelines for PROFINET and PROFIBUS can be found in: * PROFIBUS Installation Guidelines (www.profibus.com/PBInstallationGuide) * PROFIBUS Interconnection Technology (http://www.profibus.com/nc/downloads/downloads/profibus-interconnectiontechnology/display/) * PROFINET Installation Guidelines (www.profibus.com/PNInstallationGuide) * PROFINET Cabling and Interconnection Technology (http://www.profibus.com/nc/downloads/downloads/profinet-cabling-and-interconnectiontechnology/display/) * PROFIsafe Environment Requirements (www.profibus.com/PROFIsafeRequirements) When your review indicates that the configuration guidelines for PROFIBUS and PROFINET have been met, contact Customer Support. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 385 Operation and Maintenance 12.2 Replacing Software and Hardware Components 12.2 Replacing Software and Hardware Components Replacement of software components When replacing software components on your programming device or PC, e.g. with a new version of STEP 7, you must adhere to the information regarding upward and downward compatibility in the documentation and readme files for these products (e.g. STEP 7 Safety). When replacing STEP 7 Safety, check whether the version of STEP 7 Safety is listed in Annex 1 of the Report for the TUV certificate. Replacement of hardware components Hardware components for SIMATIC Safety (F-CPU, F-I/O, batteries, etc.) are replaced in the same way as in standard automation systems. Replacement of S7-1500 F software Controllers WARNING After replacing a CPU module (e.g. new PC with data storage medium of old PC) or replacement of the data storage medium (e.g. data storage medium with safety program 1 is replaced with data storage medium with safety program 2), you must use the Panel to check if the correct collective F-signature is displayed or whether a program identification is carried out. (S066) Removing and inserting F-I/O during operation If removing and inserting is possible for standard I/O during operation, it is also possible for the respective F-I/O. However, be aware that replacing an F-I/O module during operation can cause a communication error in the F-CPU. You must acknowledge the communication error in your safety program in the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB (Page 165) or, alternatively, by using the "ACK_GL (Page 487)" instruction. Without an acknowledgment, the F-I/O will remain passivated. CPU firmware update Check of the CPU operating system for F-approval: When using a new CPU operating system (firmware update), you must check to see if the CPU operating system you are using is approved for use in an F-system. The minimum CPU operating system versions with guaranteed F-capability are specified in the appendix of the Certificate. This information and any notes on the new CPU operating system must be taken into account. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 386 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Operation and Maintenance 12.2 Replacing Software and Hardware Components Firmware update for interface module When using a new operating system for an interface module, e.g. IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE ET 200S (firmware update), you must observe the following: If you have selected the "Activate firmware after update" option for the firmware update (see Help on STEP 7, "Online & Diagnostics"), the IM will be automatically reset following a successful download operation and will then run on the new operating system. Note that the firmware update for interface modules during operation generates a communication error in the F-CPU. You must acknowledge the communication error in your safety program in the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB (Page 165) or, alternatively, by using the "ACK_GL (Page 487)" instruction. Without an acknowledgment, the F-I/O will remain passivated. Preventive maintenance (proof test) Proof test for complex electronic components generally means replacement with new, unused components. PFDavg and PFH values for S7-300/400 F-CPUs and F-I/O You will find a list of the failure probability values (PFD avg, PFH values) for components that can be used in SIMATIC Safety on the Internet. PFDavg and PFH values for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs Below are the probability of failure values (PFDavg, PFH values) for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs with a service life of 20 years and an MTTR of 100 hours: Operation in low demand mode Operation in high demand or continuous mode low demand mode high demand/continuous mode According to IEC 61508:2010: According to IEC 61508:2010: PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 2E-05 < 1E-09 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 387 Operation and Maintenance 12.2 Replacing Software and Hardware Components PFDavg and PFH values for safety-related communication Below you will find the failure probability values (PFDavg, PFH values) for safety-related communication: Operation in low demand mode Operation in high demand or continuous mode low demand mode high demand/continuous mode According to IEC 61508:2010: According to IEC 61508:2010: PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on demand PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1] < 1E-05* < 1E-09* * Note on S7-300/400 F-CPUs: The PFH value is valid under the assumption that a maximum of 100 F-I/Os are involved in a safety function. If you use more than 100 F-I/Os, you have to also add 4E-12 per F-I/O for the safety function. The PFDavg value is valid for a service life of 20 years and under the assumption, that a maximum of 25 F-I/Os are involved in a safety function. If more than 25 F-I/OS are used, you need to add 3.5E-7 per F-I/O for this safety function. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 388 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Operation and Maintenance 12.3 Guide to diagnostics (S7-300, S7-400) 12.3 Guide to diagnostics (S7-300, S7-400) Introduction Here you find a compilation of diagnostic capabilities that can be evaluated for your system when an error occurs. Most of the diagnostic capabilities are the same as those in standard automation systems. The sequence of steps represents a recommendation. Steps for evaluating diagnostic capabilities The following table shows the steps you take to evaluate diagnostic capabilities. Step Procedure Reference 1 Manuals for F-CPU and F-I/O Evaluate LEDs on the hardware (F-CPU, F-I/O): * BUSF LED on the F-CPU: Flashes when a communication error occurs on PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO; On if a programming error occurs when OB 85 and OB 121 are programmed (e.g. instance DB is not loaded) 2 * STOP LED on the F-CPU: illuminates when the F-CPU is in STOP mode * Fault LEDs on the F-I/O: e.g. SF-LED (group error LED) on if any fault occurs in the individual F-I/O Evaluate diagnostic buffer of the modules: Help on STEP 7 and You read the diagnostic buffer of a module (F-CPU, F-I/O, CP) in its online and diagnostic manuals for the F-CPU and view in the "Diagnostic buffer" group under the "Online & Diagnostics" folder. F-I/O 3 Evaluate stacks of the F-CPU: Help on STEP 7 when the F-CPU is in STOP mode, read the following successively: * Block stack: Check whether STOP mode of the F-CPU was triggered by an F-block of the safety program * Interruption stack * Local data stack SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 389 Operation and Maintenance 12.4 Guide to diagnostics (S7-1500) Step Procedure Reference 4 F-I/O access (Page 157) Evaluate diagnostic tag of the F-I/O DB using testing and commissioning functions, by means of an operator control and monitoring system, or in the standard user program: Evaluate the DIAG tag in the F-I/O DB 5 Evaluate diagnostic outputs of the instance DBs of instructions using testing and commissioning functions, using an operator control and monitoring system, or in the standard user program: * Evaluate the following for MUTING, EV1oo2DI, TWO_H_EN, MUT_P, ESTOP1, FDBACK, SFDOOR in the assigned instance DB: - * * Instructions Output DIAG Evaluate the following for SENDDP or RCVDP in the assigned instance DB: - Output RET_DPRD/RET_DPWR - Output DIAG Evaluate the following for SENDS7 or RCVS7 in the assigned instance DB: - Output STAT_RCV - Output STAT_SND - Output DIAG Tip on RET_DPRD/RET_DPWR The diagnostic information of the RET_DPRD/RET_DPWR outputs of the SENDDP or RCVDP instructions corresponds to the diagnostic information of the RETVAL return value of the "DPRD_DAT" and "DPWR_DAT" instructions. You can find the description in the help on STEP 7 for the "DPRD_DAT" and "DPWR_DAT" instructions. Tip: STAT_RCV and STAT_SND The diagnostic information of the STAT_RCV output of the SENDS7 or RCVS7 instructions corresponds to the diagnostic information of the STATUS output of the "URCV" instruction. The diagnostic information of the STAT_SND output of the SENDS7 or RCVS7 instructions corresponds to the diagnostic information of the STATUS output of the "USEND" instruction. You can find the description in the help on STEP 7 for the instruction "UCRV" or "USEND" . 12.4 Guide to diagnostics (S7-1500) Detailed information on diagnostics for an S7-1500 F-CPU can be found in the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual. 12.5 Guide to diagnostics (S7-1200) Detailed information on diagnostics for an S7-1200 F-CPU can be found in the S7-1200 Functional Safety manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/104547552). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 390 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Overview of instructions for the safety program 13 Overview of instructions for the safety program When programming an F-block, you can find all instructions available for programming an F-block in LAD or FBD with the configured F-CPU in the "Instructions" task card. In addition to the instructions that are familiar to you from programming a standard block, there are also special safety functions, e.g., for two-hand monitoring, discrepancy analysis, muting, emergency STOP/emergency OFF, safety door monitoring, and feedback monitoring and instructions for safety-related CPU-CPU communication. Note the following Note Enable input EN and enable output ENO cannot be connected. Exception: (S7-1200, S7-1500) With the following instructions you can program overflow detection by connecting the enable output ENO: * ADD: Add (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 520) * SUB: Subtract (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 523) * MUL: Multiply (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 526) * DIV: Divide (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 529) * NEG: Create twos complement (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 533) * ABS: Form absolute value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 536) * CONVERT: Convert value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 548) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 391 13.1 General 13.1 General 13.1.1 LAD 13.1.1.1 New network (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Requirement An F-block is open. Procedure To insert a new network, follow these steps: 1. Select the network after which you want to insert a new network. 2. Select the "Insert network" command in the shortcut menu. Note If you insert an element into the last empty network of the F-block in an LAD program, a new empty network is automatically inserted below it. Result A new empty network is inserted into the F-block. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 392 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.1 General 13.1.1.2 Empty box (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Requirement A network is available. Procedure To insert an LAD instruction into a network using an empty box, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Instructions" task card. 2. Navigate to "Basic instructions > General > Empty box". 3. Use a drag-and-drop operation to move the "Empty box" element to the desired place in the network. 4. Hover the cursor over the yellow triangle in the top right corner of the empty box. A drop-down list is displayed. 5. Select the required instruction from the drop-down list. If the instruction acts as a function block (FB) within the system, the "Call options" dialog opens. In this dialog, you can create an instance data block for the function block, either as a single instance or, if necessary, multi-instance, in which data of the inserted instruction are stored. Once it is created, the new instance data block can be found in the "Program resources" folder in the project tree under "Program blocks > System blocks". If you have selected "multi-instance", you can find it in the block interface in the "Static" section. Result The empty box is changed to the appropriate instruction. Placeholders are inserted for the parameters. 13.1.1.3 Open branch (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description Use branches to program parallel connections with the Ladder Logic (LAD) programming language. Branches are inserted into the main current path. You can insert several contacts into the branch, thereby creating a parallel connection from series connections. You can program complex ladder diagrams in this way. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 393 13.1 General Requirement A network is available. The network contains elements. Procedure To insert a new branch in a network, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Instructions" task card. 2. Navigate to "Basic instructions > General > Open branch". 3. Use a drag-and-drop operation to move the element to the desired place in the network. 4. If you want to connect the new branch directly to the power rail, drag the element to the power rail. Example The following figure provides an example of how to use branches: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 394 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.1 General 13.1.1.4 Close branching (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description Branches must be closed again at suitable places. If necessary, branches will be arranged so that they do not cross each other. Requirement A branch is available. Procedure To close an open branch, follow these steps: 1. Select the open branch. 2. Press and hold down the left mouse button. A dashed line will appear as soon as the cursor is moved. 3. Drag the dashed line to a suitable place on the network. Permissible connections are indicated by green lines. 4. Release the left mouse button. Example The figure below provides an example of how to use branches: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 395 13.1 General 13.1.2 FBD 13.1.2.1 New network (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Requirement An F-block is open. Procedure To insert a new network, follow these steps: 1. Select the network after which you want to insert a new network. 2. Select the "Insert network" command in the shortcut menu. Note If you insert an element into the last empty network of the F-block in an FBD program, a new empty network is automatically inserted below it. Result A new empty network is inserted into the F-block. 13.1.2.2 Empty box (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Requirement A network is available. Procedure To insert FBD elements into a network using an empty box, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Instructions" task card. 2. Navigate to "Basic instructions > General > Empty box". 3. Use a drag-and-drop operation to move the "Empty box" element to the desired place in the network. 4. Hover the cursor over the yellow triangle in the top right corner of the empty box. A drop-down list is displayed. 5. Select the desired FBD element from the drop-down list. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 396 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.1 General If the instruction acts as a function block (FB) within the system, the "Call options" dialog opens. In this dialog, you can create an instance data block for the function block, either as a single instance or, if necessary, multi-instance, in which data of the inserted instruction are stored. Once it is created, the new instance data block can be found in the "Program resources" folder in the project tree under "Program blocks > System blocks". If you have selected "multi-instance", you can find it in the block interface in the "Static" section. Result The empty box is changed to the appropriate instruction. Placeholders are inserted for the parameters. 13.1.2.3 Open branch (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You use branches, which you insert between the boxes, to program parallel connections with the Function Block Diagram (FBD) programming language You can insert additional boxes in the branch, thereby programming complex function block diagrams. Requirement A network is available. Procedure To insert a new branch in a network, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Instructions" task card. 2. Navigate in the pane to "Basic instructions > General > Branch". 3. Use a drag-and-drop operation to move the element to the desired place to a connecting line between two boxes. Example The following figure provides an example of how to use branches: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 397 13.1 General 13.1.2.4 Insert binary input (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description Use the "Insert binary input" instruction to expand the box of one of the following instructions by a binary input: "AND logic operation" "OR logic operation" "EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation" You can query the signal state of several operands by expanding the instruction box. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL The operand indicates the bit whose signal state will be queried. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The box of instruction "AND logic operation" has been expanded by an additional binary input at which the signal state of operand "TagIn_3" is queried. Output "TagOut" is set when the signal state of operands "TagIn_1", "TagIn_2", and "TagIn_3" is "1". See also AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 414) OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 416) X: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 417) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 398 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.1 General 13.1.2.5 Invert RLO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Invert RLO" instruction to invert the result of logic operation (RLO). Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: The "TagIn_1" and/or "TagIn_2" input has the signal state "0". The "TagIn_3" or "TagIn_4" input has the signal state "0" or the "TagIn_5" input has the signal state "1". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 399 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.1 LAD 13.2.1.1 ---| |---: NO contact (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description The activation of the normally open contact depends on the signal state of the associated operand. If the operand has signal state "1," the normally open contact is closed. Power flows from the left power rail through the normally open contact into the right power rail and the signal state at the output of the instruction is set to "1". If the operand has signal state "0," the normally open contact is not activated. The power flow to the right power rail is interrupted and the signal state at the output of the instruction is reset to "0". Two or more normally open contacts are linked bit-by-bit by AND when connected in series. With a series connection, power flows when all contacts are closed. The normally open contacts are linked by OR when connected in parallel. With a parallel connection, power flows when one of the contacts is closed. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL Operand whose signal state is queried. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is set when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state at operand "TagIn_3" is "1". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 400 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.1.2 ---| / |---: NC contact (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description The activation of the normally closed contact depends on the signal state of the associated operand. If the operand has signal state "1", the normally closed contact is opened and the signal state at the output of the instruction is reset to "0". If the operand has signal state "0", the normally closed contact is not activated and the signal state at the output of the instruction is set to "1". Two or more normally closed contacts are linked bit-by-bit by AND when connected in series. With a series connection, power flows when all contacts are closed. The normally closed contacts are linked by OR when connected in parallel. With a parallel connection, power flows when one of the contacts is closed. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL Operand whose signal state is queried. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is set when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state at operand "TagIn_3" is "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 401 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.1.3 --|NOT|--: Invert RLO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Invert RLO" instruction to invert the signal state of the result of logic operation (RLO). When the signal state is "1" at the input of the instruction, the output of the instruction has the signal state "0". When the signal state is "0" at the input of the instruction, the output has the signal state "1". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is reset when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1". Operands "TagIn_2" and "TagIn_3" have signal state "1". 13.2.1.4 ---( )---: Assignment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Assignment" instruction to set the bit of a specified operand. When the result of logic operation (RLO) at the input of the coil is "1," the specified operand is set to signal state "1". When the signal state is "0" at the input of the coil, the bit of the specified operand is reset to "0". The instruction does not influence the RLO. The RLO at the input of the coil is sent immediately to the output. The "Assignment" instruction can be placed at any position in the network. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Output BOOL Operand to which the RLO is assigned. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 402 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is set when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state at operand "TagIn_3" is "0". 13.2.1.5 ---( R )---: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Reset output" instruction to reset the signal state of a specified operand to "0". If power flows to the coil (RLO is "1"), the specified operand is set to "0". If the result of logic operation at the input of the coil is "0" (no signal flow to the coil), the signal state of the specified operand remains unchanged. The instruction does not influence the RLO. The RLO at the input of the coil is sent directly to the output of the coil. Note If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the operands of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Note You cannot use the "process image of the inputs", "process image of the outputs" from standard I/O and "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Output BOOL Operand that is reset when RLO = "1". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 403 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is reset when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state of operand "TagIn_3" is "0". 13.2.1.6 ---( S )---: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Set output" instruction to set the signal state of a specified operand to "1". If power flows to the coil (RLO is "1"), the specified operand is set to "1". If the result of logic operation at the input of the coil is "0" (no signal flow to the coil), the signal state of the specified operand remains unchanged. The instruction does not influence the RLO. The RLO at the input of the coil is sent directly to the output of the coil. Note The instruction is not executed if it is applied to an output of an F-I/O that is passivated (e.g., during startup of the F-system). Therefore, it is preferable to access outputs of the F-I/O using only the "Assignment" instruction. An F-I/O output is passivated if QBAD or QBAD_O_xx = 1 or value status = 0 is set in the corresponding F-I/O DB. Note If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the operands of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Note You cannot use the "process image of the inputs", "process image of the outputs" from standard I/O and "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 404 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Output BOOL Operand that is set when RLO = "1". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is set when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state of operand "TagIn_3" is "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 405 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.1.7 SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Set/reset flip-flop" instruction to set or reset the bit of the specified operand based on the signal state of inputs S and R1. If the signal state at input S is "1" and the signal state at input R1 is "0", the specified operand is set to "1". If the signal state at input S is "0" and the signal state at input R1 is "1", the specified operand is reset to "0". Input R1 takes priority over input S. If the signal state is "1" at the two inputs S and R1, the signal state of the specified operand is reset to "0". The instruction is not executed if the signal state at the two inputs S and R1 is "0". The signal state of the operand then remains unchanged. The current signal state of the operand is transferred to output Q and can be queried there. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the operand of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the operands of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description S Input BOOL Enable set R1 Input BOOL Enable reset Output BOOL Operand that is set or reset. Q Output BOOL Signal state of the operand SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 406 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operands ""F_DB_1".TagSR" and "TagOut" are set when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1". Operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "0". Operands ""F_DB_1".TagSR" and "TagOut" are reset when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "0" and operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "1". Both operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". 13.2.1.8 RS: Reset/set flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Reset/set flip-flop" instruction to reset or set the bit of the specified operand based on the signal state of inputs R and S1. When the signal state is "1" at input R and "0" at input S1, the specified operand is reset to "0". When the signal state is "0" at input R and "1" at input S1, the specified operand is set to "1". Input S1 takes priority over input R. If the signal state is "1" at the two inputs R and S1, the signal state of the specified operand is set to "1". The instruction is not executed if the signal state at the two inputs R and S1 is "0". The signal state of the operand then remains unchanged. The current signal state of the operand is transferred to output Q and can be queried there. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the operand of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 407 13.2 Bit logic operations Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the operands of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description R Input BOOL Enable reset S1 Input BOOL Enable set Output BOOL Operand that is reset or set. Q Output BOOL Signal state of the operand Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operands ""F_DB_1".TagRS" and "TagOut" are reset when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1". Operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "0". Operands ""F_DB_1".TagRS" and "TagOut" are set when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "0" and operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "1". Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 408 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.1.9 --|P|--: Scan operand for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan operand for positive signal edge" instruction to determine if there is a change from "0" to "1" in the signal state of a specified operand (). The instruction compares the current signal state of with the signal state of the previous query saved in . If the instruction detects a change in the result of logic operation from "0" to "1", there is a positive, rising edge. If a rising edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Enter the operand to be queried () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the edge memory bit () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL Signal to be queried InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the signal state of the previous query is saved. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 409 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: There is a rising edge at input "TagIn_1". The signal state of the previous query is saved at edge memory bit ""F_DB_1".Tag_M". The signal state of operand "TagIn_2" is "1". 13.2.1.10 --|N|--: Scan operand for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan operand for negative signal edge" instruction to determine if there is a change form "1" to "0" in the signal state of a specified operand. The instruction compares the current signal state of with the signal state of the previous query saved in . If the instruction detects a change in the result of logic operation from "1" to "0", there is a negative, falling edge. If a falling edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Enter the operand to be queried () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the edge memory bit () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 410 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL Signal to be queried InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the signal state of the previous query is saved. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: There is a falling edge at operand "TagIn_1". The signal state of the previous query is saved at edge memory bit ""F_DB_1".Tag_M". The signal state of operand "TagIn_2" is "1". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 411 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.1.11 P_TRIG: Scan RLO for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan RLO for positive signal edge" instruction to query a change in the signal state of the result of logic operation from "0" to "1". The instruction compares the current signal state of the result of logic operation (RLO) with the signal state of the previous query, which is saved in the edge bit memory (). If the instruction detects a change in the RLO from "0" to "1", there is a positive, rising edge. If a rising edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CLK Input BOOL Current RLO InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the RLO of the previous query is saved. Q Output BOOL Result of edge evaluation SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 412 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The RLO from the previous bit logic operation is saved in edge memory bit ""F_DB_1".Tag_M". If a change in the RLO signal state from "0" to "1" is detected, the program jumps to jump label CAS1. 13.2.1.12 N_TRIG: Scan RLO for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan RLO for negative signal edge" instruction to query a change in the signal state of the result of logic operation from "1" to "0". The instruction compares the current signal state of the result of logic operation with the signal state from the previous query, which is saved in the edge memory bit (). If the instruction detects a change in the RLO from "1" to "0", there is a negative, falling edge. If a falling edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 413 13.2 Bit logic operations Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CLK Input BOOL Current RLO InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the RLO of the previous query is saved. Q Output BOOL Result of edge evaluation Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The RLO of the previous bit logic operation is saved in edge bit memory ""F_DB_1".Tag_M". If a change in the RLO signal state from "1" to "0" is detected, the program jumps to jump label CAS1. 13.2.2 FBD 13.2.2.1 AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "AND logic operation" instruction to query the signal states of two or more specified operands and evaluate them according to the AND truth table. If the signal state of all the operands is "1", then the conditions are fulfilled and the instruction returns the result "1". If the signal state of one of the operands is "0", then the conditions are not fulfilled and the instruction generates the result "0". If the "AND logic operation" instruction is the first instruction in a logic string, it saves the result of its signal state query in the RLO bit. Each "AND logic operation" instruction that is not the first instruction in the logic string logically combines the result of its signal state query with the value saved in the RLO bit. This logical combination is performed according to the AND truth table. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 414 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL The operand indicates the bit whose signal state will be queried. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the signal state of operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" is "1". AND truth table The following table shows the results when linking two operands by an AND logic operation: Signal state of the first operand Signal state of the second operand Result of logic operation 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 See also Insert binary input (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 398) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 415 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.2 OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "OR logic operation" instruction to get the signal states of two or more specified operands and evaluate them according to the OR truth table. If the signal state of at least one of the operands is "1", then the conditions are fulfilled and the instruction returns the result "1". If the signal state of all of the operands is "0", then the conditions are not fulfilled and the instruction generates the result "0". If the "OR logic operation" instruction is the first instruction in a logic string, it saves the result of its signal state query in the RLO bit. Each "OR logic operation" instruction that is not the first instruction in the logic string, logically combines the result of its signal state query with the value saved in the RLO bit. This logical combination is performed according to the OR truth table. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL The operand indicates the bit whose signal state will be queried. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the signal state of operand "TagIn_1" or "TagIn_2" is "1". OR truth table The following table shows the results when linking two operands by an OR logic operation: Signal state of the first operand Signal state of the second operand Result of logic operation 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 See also Insert binary input (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 398) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 416 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.3 X: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation" instruction to get the result of a signal state query according to the the EXCLUSIVE OR truth table. With an "EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation" instruction, the signal state is "1" when the signal state of one of the two specified operands is "1". When more than two operands are queried, the overall result of logic operation is "1" if an odd-numbered quantity of queried operands returns the result "1". Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL The operand indicates the bit whose signal state will be queried. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the signal state of one of the two operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" is "1". When both operands have signal state "1" or "0" then output "TagOut" is reset. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 417 13.2 Bit logic operations EXCLUSIVE OR truth table The following table shows the results when two operands are linked by an EXCLUSIVE OR: Signal state of the first operand Signal state of the second operand Result of logic operation 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 The following table shows the results when three operands are linked by an EXCLUSIVE OR: Signal state of the first operand Signal state of the second operand Signal state of the third operand Result of logic operation 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 See also Insert binary input (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 398) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 418 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.4 =: Assignment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Assignment" instruction to set the bit of a specified operand. If the result of logic operation (RLO) at the box input has signal state "1" or the box input for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs is not connected, the specified operand is set to signal state "1". If the signal state at the box input is "0", the bit of the specified operand is reset to "0". The instruction does not influence the RLO. The RLO at the box input is assigned directly to the operand located above the Assign box. The "Assignment" instruction can be placed at any position in the logic operation sequence. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Output BOOL Operand to which the RLO is assigned. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" at the output of the "Assignment" instruction is set when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Inputs "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state at input "TagIn_3" is "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 419 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.5 R: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Reset output" instruction to reset the signal state of a specified operand to "0". If the box input has signal state "1" or the box input for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs is not connected, the specified operand is reset to "0". If there is a result of logic operation of "0" at the box input, the signal state of the specified operand remains unchanged. The instruction does not influence the RLO. The RLO at the box input is transferred directly to the box output. Note If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the operands of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Note You cannot use the "process image of the inputs", "process image of the outputs" from standard I/O and "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Output BOOL Operand that is reset with RLO = "1". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operand "TagOut" is reset when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state of operand "TagIn_3" is "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 420 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.6 S: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Set output" instruction to set the signal state of a specified operand to "1". If the box input has signal state "1" or the box input for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs is not connected, the specified operand is set to "1". If there is a result of logic operation of "0" at the box input, the signal state of the specified operand remains unchanged. The instruction does not influence the RLO. The RLO at the box input is transferred directly to the box output. Note The instruction is not executed if it is applied to an output of an F-I/O that is passivated (e.g., during startup of the F-system). Therefore, it is preferable to access outputs of the F-I/O using only the "Assignment" instruction. An F-I/O output is passivated if QBAD or QBAD_O_xx = 1 or value status = 0 is set in the corresponding F-I/O DB. Note If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the operands of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Note You cannot use the "process image of the inputs", "process image of the outputs" from standard I/O and "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Output BOOL Operand that is set when RLO = "1". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 421 13.2 Bit logic operations Operand "TagOut" is set when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". The signal state of operand "TagIn_3" is "0". 13.2.2.7 SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Set/reset flip-flop" instruction to set or reset the bit of the specified operand based on the signal state of inputs S and R1. If the signal state at input S is "1" and the signal state at input R1 is "0", the specified operand is set to "1". If the signal state at input S is "0" and the signal state at input R1 is "1", the specified operand is reset to "0". Input R1 takes priority over input S. If the signal state is "1" at the two inputs S and R1, the signal state of the specified operand is reset to "0". The instruction is not executed if the signal state at the two inputs S and R1 is "0". The signal state of the operand then remains unchanged. The current signal state of the operand is transferred to output Q and can be queried there. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the operand of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge bit memory of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description S Input BOOL Enable set R1 Input BOOL Enable reset Output BOOL Operand that is set or reset. Q Output BOOL Signal state of the operand SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 422 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operands ""F_DB_1".TagSR" and "TagOut" are set when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1". Operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "0". Operands ""F_DB_1".TagSR" and "TagOut" are reset when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "0" and operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "1". Both operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". 13.2.2.8 RS: Reset/set flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Reset/set flip-flop" instruction to reset or set the bit of the specified operand based on the signal state of inputs R and S1. When the signal state is "1" at input R and "0" at input S1, the specified operand is reset to "0". When the signal state is "0" at input R and "1" at input S1, the specified operand is set to "1". Input S1 takes priority over input R. If the signal state is "1" at the two inputs R and S1, the signal state of the specified operand is set to "1". The instruction is not executed if the signal state at the two inputs R and S1 is "0". The signal state of the operand then remains unchanged. The current signal state of the operand is transferred to output Q and can be queried there. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the operand of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the operands of the instruction. If the operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge bit memory of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 423 13.2 Bit logic operations Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description R Input BOOL Enable reset S1 Input BOOL Enable set Output BOOL Operand that is reset or set. Q Output BOOL Signal state of the operand Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Operands ""F_DB_1".TagRS" and "TagOut" are reset when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1". Operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "0". Operands ""F_DB_1".TagRS" and "TagOut" are set when the following conditions are fulfilled: Operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "0" and operand "TagIn_2" has signal state "1". Operands "TagIn_1" and "TagIn_2" have signal state "1". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 424 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.9 P: Scan operand for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan operand for positive signal edge" instruction to determine if there is a change from "0" to "1" in the signal state of a specified operand (). The instruction compares the current signal state of with the signal state of the previous query saved in . If the instruction detects a change in the result of logic operation from "0" to "1", there is a positive, rising edge. If a rising edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Enter the operand to be queried () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the edge memory bit () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL Signal to be queried InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the signal state of the previous query is saved. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 425 13.2 Bit logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: There is a rising edge at input "TagIn_1". The signal state of operand "TagIn_2" is "1". 13.2.2.10 N: Scan operand for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan operand for negative signal edge" instruction to determine if there is a change form "1" to "0" in the signal state of a specified operand. The instruction compares the current signal state of with the signal state of the previous query saved in . If the instruction detects a change in the result of logic operation from "1" to "0", there is a negative, falling edge. If a falling edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Enter the operand to be queried () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the edge memory bit () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 426 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BOOL Signal to be queried InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the signal state of the previous query is saved. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: There is a falling edge at input "TagIn_1". The signal state of operand "TagIn_2" is "1". 13.2.2.11 P_TRIG: Scan RLO for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan RLO for positive signal edge" instruction to query a change in the signal state of the result of logic operation from "0" to "1". The instruction compares the current signal state of the result of logic operation with the signal state from the previous query, which is saved in the edge memory bit (). If the instruction detects a change in the RLO from "0" to "1", there is a positive, rising edge. If a rising edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 427 13.2 Bit logic operations Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CLK Input BOOL Current RLO InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the RLO of the previous query is saved. Q Output BOOL Result of edge evaluation Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The RLO from the previous bit logic operation is saved in edge memory bit ""F_DB_1".Tag_M". If a change in the RLO signal state from "0" to "1" is detected, the program jumps to jump label CAS1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 428 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.2 Bit logic operations 13.2.2.12 N_TRIG: Scan RLO for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Scan RLO for negative signal edge" instruction to query a change in the signal state of the result of logic operation from "1" to "0". The instruction compares the current signal state of the result of logic operation with the signal state from the previous query, which is saved in the edge memory bit (). If the instruction detects a change in the RLO from "1" to "0", there is a negative, falling edge. If a falling edge is detected, the output of the instruction has signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at the output of the instruction is "0". Note The address of the edge memory bit must not be used more than once in the program, otherwise the edge memory bit would be overwritten. This would influence edge evaluation and the result would no longer be unequivocal. Note If you want to use a formal parameter of an F-FC for the edge memory bit of the instruction, it must be declared as an input/output parameter. Note You cannot use the "process image", "standard DB" and "bit memory" operand areas for the edge memory bit of the instruction. If operand area "local data (temp)" is used for the edge memory bit of the instruction, the local data bit used must be initialized beforehand. Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CLK Input BOOL Current RLO InOut BOOL Edge memory bit in which the RLO of the previous query is saved. Q Output BOOL Result of edge evaluation SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 429 13.3 Safety functions Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The RLO of the previous bit logic operation is saved in edge bit memory ""F_DB_1".Tag_M". If a change in the RLO signal state from "1" to "0" is detected, the program jumps to jump label CAS1. 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.1 ESTOP1: Emergency STOP/OFF up to stop category 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction implements an emergency STOP/emergency OFF shutdown with acknowledgment for Stop Categories 0 and 1. Enable signal Q is reset to 0, as soon as input E_STOP takes a signal state of 0 (Stop category 0). Enable signal Q_DELAY is reset to 0 after the time delay set at input TIME_DEL (Stop Category 1). Enable signal Q is reset to 1 not before input E_STOP takes a signal state of 1 and an acknowledgment occurs. The acknowledgment for the enable takes place according to the parameter assignment at input ACK_NEC: If ACK_NEC = 0, the acknowledgment is automatic. If ACK_NEC = 1, you must use a rising edge at input ACK for acknowledging the enable. Output ACK_REQ is used to signal that a user acknowledgment is required at input ACK for the acknowledgment. The instruction sets output ACK_REQ to 1, as soon as input E_STOP = 1. Following an acknowledgment, the instruction resets ACK_REQ to 0. Every call of the "Emergency STOP/Emergency OFF up to Stop Category 1" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., ESTOP1_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., ESTOP1_Instance_1) for the "Emergency STOP/Emergency OFF up to Stop Category 1" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 430 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING The ACK_NEC tag must not be assigned a value of 0 unless an automatic restart of the affected process is otherwise excluded. (S033) WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) Note: In case of two channels according to category 3,4 of ISO 13849-1:2015 or EN ISO 13849-1:2015, the discrepancy monitoring of the two NC contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF must already take place in the F-I/O. The F-I/O has to be configured accordingly (sensor evaluation: two-channel, equivalent), and the result of the evaluation interconnected with the E_STOP input. In order to keep the discrepancy time from influencing the response time, you must assign "Supply value 0" for the behavior of discrepancy during configuration. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description E_STOP Input BOOL EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF ACK_NEC Input BOOL 1=Acknowledgment necessary ACK Input BOOL 1=Acknowledgment TIME_DEL Input TIME Time delay Q Output BOOL 1=Enable Q_DELAY Output BOOL Enable is OFF delayed ACK_REQ Output BOOL 1=Acknowledgment necessary DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 431 13.3 Safety functions Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- Version 1.0 requires that the F_TOF block with the number FB 186 is available in the project tree in the "Program blocks/System blocks/STEP 7 Safety" folder. When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. You will then avoid number conflicts. 1.1 x -- --- 1.2 x -- o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x o o 1.5 x x x 1.6 x x x These versions are functionally identical to version V1.0, but do not require the F_TOF block to have a particular number. The reaction of the delay time TIME_DEL for F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 was adapted to the reaction of F-CPUs S7-300/400: If the input ESTOP (0 -> 1 (including acknowledgment) -> 0) is changed while the delay time is running, the delay time is restarted. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Startup characteristics After an F-system startup, when ACK_NEC = 1, you must acknowledge the instruction using a rising edge at input ACK. Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits 4 and 5 are saved until you acknowledge at the ACK input. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 432 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Incorrect TIM_DEL setting Time delay setting < 0 Set time delay > 0 Bit 1 Reserved -- -- Bit 2 Reserved -- -- Bit 3 Reserved -- -- Bit 4 Acknowledgment not possible because emergency STOP/emergency OFF is still active Emergency STOP/Emergency OFF pushbutton is locked Release Emergency STOP/Emergency OFF pushbutton F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O of emergency STOP/emergency OFF pushbutton For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Emergency STOP/Emergency OFF pushbutton is defective Check emergency STOP/emergency OFF pushbutton Wiring fault Check wiring of the emergency STOP/emergency OFF pushbutton Bit 5 If enable is missing: input ACK Acknowledgment button has a permanent signal state defective of 1 Wiring fault Check acknowledgment button Check wiring of acknowledgment button Bit 6 Acknowledgment required (= state of ACK_REQ) -- -- Bit 7 State of output Q -- -- SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 433 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 434 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 435 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.2 TWO_HAND: Two-hand monitoring (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description This instruction implements two-hand monitoring. Note This instruction is only available for S7-300 and S7-400 F-CPUs. For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs, you use the instruction "Two-hand monitoring with enable". The application "Two-hand monitoring with enable" replaces the instruction "Two-hand monitoring" with compatible functions. If pushbuttons IN1 and IN2 are activated within the permitted discrepancy time DISCTIME 500 ms (IN1/IN2 = 1) (synchronous activation), output signal Q is set to 1. If the time difference between activation of pushbutton IN1 and pushbutton IN2 is greater than DISCTIME, then the pushbuttons must be released and reactivated. Q is reset to 0 as soon as one of the pushbuttons is released (IN1/IN2 = 0). Enable signal Q can be reset to 1 only if the other pushbutton has been released, and if both pushbuttons are then reactivated within the discrepancy time. Enable signal Q can never be set to 1 if the discrepancy time is set to values less than 0 or greater than 500 ms. Every call of the "Two-hand monitoring" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., TWO_HAND_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., TWO_HAND_Instance_1) for the "Two-hand monitoring" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). The instruction supports the requirements in accordance with EN 574:1996 + A1:2008. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 436 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Note: Only one signal per pushbutton can be evaluated in the instruction. Discrepancy monitoring of the NC and NO contacts of pushbuttons IN1 and IN2 is performed directly during suitable configuration (sensor evaluation: 1oo2 evaluation, non-equivalent) directly through the F-I/O with inputs. The normally open contact must be wired in such a way that it supplies the useful signal (see manual for the F-I/O you are using). In order to keep the discrepancy time from influencing the response time, you must assign "Supply value 0" for the behavior of discrepancy during configuration. If a discrepancy is detected, a fail-safe value of 0 is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) for the pushbutton and QBAD or QBAD_I_xx = 1 is set in the relevant F-I/O DB. (See also F-I/O access (Page 157)) WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input BOOL Pushbutton 1 IN2 Input BOOL Pushbutton 2 DISCTIME Input TIME Discrepancy time (0 to 500 ms) Q Output BOOL 1=Enable SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 437 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 438 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.3 TWO_H_EN: Two-hand monitoring with enable (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction implements two-hand monitoring with enable. If pushbuttons IN1 and IN2 are activated within the permitted discrepancy time DISCTIME 500 ms (IN1/IN2 = 1) (synchronous activation), output signal Q is set to 1 when existing ENABLE = 1. If the time difference between activation of pushbutton IN1 and pushbutton IN2 is greater than DISCTIME, then the pushbuttons must be released and reactivated. Q is reset to 0 as soon as one of the pushbuttons is released (IN1/IN 2 = 0) or ENABLE = 0. Enable signal Q can be reset to 1 only if the other pushbutton has been released, and if both pushbuttons are then reactivated within the discrepancy time when existing ENABLE = 1. Every call of the "Two-hand monitoring with enable" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., TWO_H_EN_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., TWO_H_EN_Instance_1) for the "Two-hand monitoring with enable" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). The instruction supports the requirements in accordance with EN 574:1996 + A1:2008. Note: Only one signal per pushbutton can be evaluated in the instruction. Discrepancy monitoring of the NC and NO contacts of pushbuttons IN1 and IN2 is performed directly during suitable configuration (sensor evaluation: 1oo2 evaluation, non-equivalent) directly through the F-I/O with inputs. The normally open contact must be wired in such a way that it supplies the useful signal (see manual for the F-I/O you are using). In order to keep the discrepancy time from influencing the response time, during the configuration of discrepancy behavior, you must configure "Supply value 0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 439 13.3 Safety functions If a discrepancy is detected, a fail-safe value of 0 is entered in the process image of the inputs (PII) for the pushbutton and QBAD or QBAD_I_xx = 1 or respectively value status = 0 is set in the relevant F-I/O DB. WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input BOOL Pushbutton 1 IN2 Input BOOL Pushbutton 2 ENABLE Input BOOL Enable input DISCTIME Input TIME Discrepancy time (0 to 500 ms) Q Output BOOL 1=Enable DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 440 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. -- If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits 0 to 5 are saved until the cause of the error has been eliminated. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 441 13.3 Safety functions Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Incorrect discrepancy time DISCTIME setting Discrepancy time setting is <0 or > 500 ms Set discrepancy time in range of 0 to 500 ms Bit 1 Discrepancy time elapsed Discrepancy time setting is too low If necessary, set a higher discrepancy time Pushbuttons were not activated within the discrepancy time Release pushbuttons and activate them within the discrepancy time Wiring fault Check wiring of pushbuttons Pushbuttons defective Check pushbuttons Pushbuttons are wired to different For a solution, see the section F-I/O, and F-I/O fault, channel "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in fault, or communication error, or DIAG (Page 172) passivation by means of PASS_ON on an F-I/O Bit 2 Reserved -- -- Bit 3 Reserved -- -- Bit 4 Incorrect activation sequence One pushbutton was not released Release pushbuttons and activate them within the discrepancy time Pushbuttons defective Check pushbuttons Bit 5 ENABLE does not exist ENABLE = 0 Set ENABLE = 1, release pushbutton and activate it within the discrepancy time Bit 6 Reserved -- -- Bit 7 State of output Q -- -- SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 442 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 443 13.3 Safety functions Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 444 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.4 MUTING: Muting (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description This instruction performs parallel muting with two or four muting sensors. Note This instruction is only available for S7-300 and S7-400 F-CPUs. For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs, you use the instruction "Parallel muting (Page 456)". The instruction "Parallel muting" replaces the instruction "Muting" with compatible functions. Muting is a defined suppression of the protective function of light curtains. Light curtain muting can be used to introduce goods or objects into the danger area monitored by the light curtain without causing the machine to stop. To utilize the muting function, at least two independently wired muting sensors must be present. The use of two or four muting sensors and correct integration into the production sequence must ensure that no persons enter the danger area while the light curtain is muted. Every call of the "Muting" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., MUTING_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., MUTING_Instance_1) for the "Muting" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 445 13.3 Safety functions Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description MS_11 Input BOOL Muting sensor 1 of sensor pair 1 MS_12 Input BOOL Muting sensor 2 of sensor pair 1 MS_21 Input BOOL Muting sensor 1 of sensor pair 2 MS_22 Input BOOL Muting sensor 2 of sensor pair 2 STOP Input BOOL 1=Conveyor system stopped FREE Input BOOL 1=Light curtain uninterrupted QBAD_MUT Input BOOL QBAD signal of the F-I/O or QBAD_O_xx signal of the muting lamp channel DISCTIM1 Input TIME Discrepancy time of sensor pair 1 (0 to 3 s) DISCTIM2 Input TIME Discrepancy time of sensor pair 2 (0 to 3 s) TIME_MAX Input TIME Maximum muting time (0 to 10 min) ACK Input BOOL Acknowledgment of restart inhibit Q Output BOOL 1= Enable, not off MUTING Output BOOL Display of muting is active ACK_REQ Output BOOL Acknowledgment necessary FAULT Output BOOL Group error DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information Schematic sequence of error-free muting procedure with 4 muting sensors (MS_11, MS_12, MS_21, MS_22) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 446 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions If both muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 are activated by the product within DISCTIM1 (apply signal state = 1), the instruction starts the MUTING function. Enable signal Q remains 1, even when input FREE = 0 (light curtain interrupted by product). The MUTING output for setting the muting lamp switches to 1. Note The muting lamp can be monitored using the QBAD_MUT input. To do this, you must wire the muting lamp to an output with wire break monitoring of an F-I/O and supply the QBAD_MUT input with the QBAD signal of the associated F-I/O or the QBAD_O_xx signal of the associated channel. If QBAD_MUT = 1, muting is terminated by the instruction. If monitoring of the muting lamp is not necessary, you do not have to supply input QBAD_MUT. F-I/O that can promptly detect a wire break after activation of the muting operation must be used (see manual for specific F-I/O). As long as both muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 continue to be activated, the MUTING function of the instruction causes Q to remain 1 and MUTING to remain 1 (so that the product can pass through the light curtain without causing the machine to stop). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 447 13.3 Safety functions The two muting sensors MS_21 and MS_22 must be activated (within DISCTIM2) before muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 are switched to inactive (apply signal state 0). In this way, the instruction retains the MUTING function. (Q = 1, MUTING = 1). Only if one of the two muting sensors MS_21 and MS_22 is switched to inactive (product enables sensors) is the MUTING function terminated (Q = 1, MUTING = 0). The maximum activation time for the MUTING function is the time set at input TIME_MAX. Note The MUTING function is also started if the product passes the light curtain in the reverse direction and the muting sensors are thus activated by the product in reverse order. Timing diagrams for error-free muting procedure with 4 muting sensors SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 448 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Schematic sequence of muting procedure with reflection light barriers If reflection light barriers are used as muting sensors, they are generally arranged diagonally. In general, this arrangement of reflection light barriers as muting sensors requires only two light barriers, and only MS_11 and MS_12 are interconnected. The sequence is similar to that of the muting procedure with 4 muting sensors. Step 3 is omitted. In step 4, replace MS_21 and MS_22 with MS_11 and MS_12, respectively. Restart inhibit upon interruption of light curtain (if MUTING is not active), when errors occur, and during F-system startup Enable signal Q cannot be set to 1 or becomes 0, if: Light curtain is interrupted (e.g., by a person or material transport) while the MUTING function is not active The muting lamp monitoring function responds at input QBAD_MUT Sensor pair 1 (MS_11 and MS_12) or sensor pair 2 (MS_21 and MS_22) is not activated or deactivated during discrepancy time DISCTIM1 or DISCTIM2, respectively The MUTING function is active longer than the maximum muting time TIME_MAX Discrepancy times DISCTIM1 and DISCTIM2 have been set to values < 0 or > 3 s Maximum muting time TIME_MAX has been set to a value< 0 or > 10 min In the identified cases, output FAULT (group error) is set to 1 (restart inhibit). If the MUTING function is started, it will be terminated and the Muting output becomes 0. WARNING When a valid combination of muting sensors is immediately detected at startup of the F-system (for example, because the muting sensors are interconnected to inputs of a standard I/O that immediately provide process values during the F-system startup), the MUTING function is immediately started and the MUTING output and enable signal Q are set to 1. The FAULT output (group error) is not set to 1 (no restart inhibit!). (S035) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 449 13.3 Safety functions Acknowledgment of restart inhibit Enable signal Q becomes 1 again, when: The light curtain is no longer interrupted If present, errors are eliminated (see output DIAG) and A user acknowledgment with positive edge occurs at input ACK (see also Implementation of user acknowledgment (Page 187)). The FAULT output is set to 0. Output ACK_REQ = 1 signals that user acknowledgment at input ACK is required to eliminate the restart inhibit. The instruction sets ACK-REQ = 1 as soon as the light curtain is no longer interrupted or errors have been eliminated. Once acknowledgment has occurred, the instruction resets ACK_REQ to 0. Note Following discrepancy errors and once the maximum muting time has been exceeded, ACK_REQ is immediately set to 1. As soon as a user acknowledgment has taken place at input ACK, discrepancy times DISCTIM1 and DISCTIM2 and maximum muting time TIME_MAX are reset. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 450 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Timing diagrams for discrepancy errors at sensor pair 1 or interruption of the light curtain (if MUTING is not active) Sensor pair 1 (MS_11 and MS_12) is not activated within discrepancy time DISCTIM1. The light curtain is interrupted even though the MUTING function is not active. Acknowledgment SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 451 13.3 Safety functions Behavior with stopped conveyor equipment If, while the conveyor equipment has stopped, the monitoring for one of the following reasons is to be deactivated: To comply with discrepancy time DISCTIM1 or DISCTIM2 To comply with maximum muting time TIME_MAX you must supply input STOP with a "1" signal for as long as the conveyor equipment is stopped. As soon as the conveyor equipment is running again (STOP = 0), discrepancy times DISCTIM1 and DISCTIM2 and maximum muting time TIME_MAX are reset. WARNING When STOP = 1, the discrepancy monitoring is shut down. During this time, if inputs MSx1/MSx2 of a sensor pair both take a signal state of 1 due to an undetected error, e.g., because both muting sensors fail to 1, the error is not detected and the MUTING function can be started unintentionally. (S036) Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits are saved until acknowledgment at input ACK. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 452 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Discrepancy error or incorrect discrepancy time DISCTIM 1 setting for sensor pair 1 Malfunction in production sequence Malfunction in production sequence eliminated Sensor defective Check sensors Wiring fault Check wiring of sensors Sensors are wired to different FI/O, and F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON on an F-I/O For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Discrepancy time setting is too low If necessary, set a higher discrepancy time Discrepancy time setting is < 0 s or Set discrepancy time in range between >3s 0 s and 3 s Bit 1 Discrepancy error or incorrect discrepancy time DISCTIM 2 setting for sensor pair 2 Bit 2 Maximum muting time exceeded or Malfunction in production sequence incorrect muting time TIME_MAX setting Maximum muting time setting is too low Bit 3 Light curtain interrupted and muting not active Same as Bit 0 Same as Bit 0 Malfunction in production sequence eliminated If necessary, set a higher maximum muting time Muting time setting is < 0 s or > 10 min Set muting time in range from 0 s to 10 min Light curtain is defective Check light curtain Wiring fault Check wiring of light curtain (FREE input) F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O of light curtain (FREE input) For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) See other DIAG bits Bit 4 Muting lamp is defective or cannot be set Muting lamp is defective Replace muting lamp Wiring fault Check wiring of muting lamp F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O of muting lamp For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Bit 5 Reserved -- -- Bit 6 Reserved -- -- Bit 7 Reserved -- -- SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 453 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 454 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 455 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.5 MUT_P: Parallel muting (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction performs parallel muting with two or four muting sensors. Muting is a defined suppression of the protective function of light curtains. Light curtain muting can be used to introduce goods or objects into the danger area monitored by the light curtain without causing the machine to stop. To utilize the muting function, at least two independently wired muting sensors must be present. The use of two or four muting sensors and correct integration into the production sequence must ensure that no persons enter the danger area while the light curtain is muted. Every call of the "Parallel muting" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., MUT_P_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., MUT_P_Instance_1) for the "Parallel muting" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multiinstance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 456 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description MS_11 Input BOOL Muting sensor 11 MS_12 Input BOOL Muting sensor 12 MS_21 Input BOOL Muting sensor 21 MS_22 Input BOOL Muting sensor 22 STOP Input BOOL 1=Conveyor system stopped FREE Input BOOL 1=Light curtain uninterrupted ENABLE Input BOOL 1=Enable MUTING QBAD_MUT Input BOOL QBAD signal of the F-I/O or QBAD_O_xx signal / inverted value status of the muting lamp channel ACK Input BOOL Acknowledgment of restart inhibit DISCTIM1 Input TIME Discrepancy time of sensor pair 1 (0 to 3 s) DISCTIM2 Input TIME Discrepancy time of sensor pair 2 (0 to 3 s) TIME_MAX Input TIME Maximum muting time (0 to 10 min) Q Output BOOL 1= Enable, not off MUTING Output BOOL Display of muting is active ACK_REQ Output BOOL Acknowledgment necessary FAULT Output BOOL Group error DIAG Output WORD Non-fail safe service information Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x* -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x* -- -- These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. 1.2 x* -- o 1.3 x* o o The output DIAG can now be correctly interconnected with the operand of data type WORD. 1.4 x x x o This version is no longer supported. * S7-300/400: When a restart inhibit (output FAULT = 1) and ENABLE = 1 is present, output ACK_REQ is set to 1 even if not at least one muting sensor is activated. Use the DIAG bits 5 and 6 for additional information. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 457 13.3 Safety functions When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Schematic sequence of error-free muting procedure with 4 muting sensors (MS_11, MS_12, MS_21, MS_22) If muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 are both activated by the product within DISCTIM1 (apply signal state = 1) and MUTING is enabled by setting the ENABLE input to 1, the instruction starts the MUTING function. Enable signal Q remains 1, even when input FREE = 0 (light curtain interrupted by product). The MUTING output for setting the muting lamp switches to 1. Note The muting lamp can be monitored using the QBAD_MUT input. To do this, you must wire the muting lamp to an output with wire break monitoring of an F-I/O and supply the QBAD_MUT input with the QBAD signal of the associated F-I/O or the QBAD_O_xx signal / with inverted value statues of the associated channel. If QBAD_MUT = 1, muting is terminated by the instruction. If monitoring of the muting lamp is not necessary, you do not have to supply input QBAD_MUT. F-I/O that can promptly detect a wire break after activation of the muting operation must be used (see manual for specific F-I/O). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 458 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions As long as both muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 continue to be activated, the MUTING function of the instruction causes Q to remain 1 and MUTING to remain 1 (so that the product can pass through the light curtain without causing the machine to stop). Each of the two muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 may be switched to inactive (t < DISCTIM1) for a short time (apply signal state 0). Muting sensors MS_21 and MS_22 must both be activated (within DISCTIM2) before muting sensors MS_11 and MS_12 are switched to inactive (apply signal state 0). In this way, the instruction retains the MUTING function. (Q = 1, MUTING = 1). Only if muting sensors MS_21 and MS_22 are both switched to inactive (product enables sensors) is the MUTING function terminated (Q = 1, MUTING = 0). The maximum activation time for the MUTING function is the time set at input TIME_MAX. Note The MUTING function is also started if the product passes the light curtain in the reverse direction and the muting sensors are thus activated by the product in reverse order. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 459 13.3 Safety functions Timing diagrams for error-free muting procedure with 4 muting sensors Schematic sequence of muting procedure with reflection light barriers If reflection light barriers are used as muting sensors, they are generally arranged diagonally. In general, this arrangement of reflection light barriers as muting sensors requires only two light barriers, and only MS_11 and MS_12 are interconnected. The sequence is similar to that of the muting procedure with 4 muting sensors. Step 3 is omitted. In step 4, replace MS_21 and MS_22 with MS_11 and MS_12, respectively. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 460 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Restart inhibit upon interruption of light curtain (MUTING is not active), as well as when errors occur and during F-system startup Enable signal Q cannot be set to 1 or becomes 0, if: Light curtain is interrupted (e.g., by a person or material transport) while the MUTING function is not active Light curtain is (being) interrupted and the muting lamp monitoring at input QBAD_MUT is set to 1 Light curtain is (being) interrupted and the MUTING function is not enabled by setting input ENABLE to 1 Sensor pair 1 (MS_11 and MS_12) or sensor pair 2 (MS_21 and MS_22) is not activated or deactivated during discrepancy time DISCTIM1 or DISCTIM2, respectively The MUTING function is active longer than the maximum muting time TIME_MAX Discrepancy times DISCTIM1 and DISCTIM2 have been set to values < 0 or > 3 s Maximum muting time TIME_MAX has been set to a value< 0 or > 10 min The F-system starts up (regardless of whether or not the light curtain is interrupted, because the F-I/O is passivated after F-system startup and, thus, the FREE input is initially supplied with 0) In the identified cases, output FAULT (group error) is set to 1 (restart inhibit). If the MUTING function is started, it will be terminated and the Muting output becomes 0. User acknowledgment of restart inhibit (no muting sensor is activated or ENABLE = 0) Enable signal Q becomes 1 again, when: The light curtain is no longer interrupted If present, errors are eliminated (see output DIAG) and A user acknowledgment with positive edge occurs at input ACK (see also Implementation of user acknowledgment (Page 187)). The FAULT output is set to 0. Output ACK_REQ = 1 (and DIAG bit 6) signals that user acknowledgment at input ACK is required to eliminate the restart inhibit. The instruction sets ACK_REQ = 1 as soon as the light curtain is no longer interrupted or the errors have been eliminated. Once acknowledgment has occurred, the instruction resets ACK_REQ to 0. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 461 13.3 Safety functions User Acknowledgment of restart inhibit (at least one muting sensor is activated and ENABLE = 1) Enable signal Q becomes 1 again, when: If present, errors are eliminated (see output DIAG) FREE occurs until a valid combination of muting sensors is detected The FAULT output is set to 0. The MUTING function is restarted, if necessary, and the MUTING output becomes 1 if a valid combination of muting sensors is detected. When ENABLE = 1, output ACK_REQ = 1 (and DIAG bit 5) signals that FREE is necessary for error elimination and for removal of the restart inhibit.*After successful FREE, ACK_REQ is reset to 0 by the instruction. Note Once the maximum muting time is exceeded, TIME_MAX is reset as soon as the MUTING function is restarted. FREE function If an error cannot be corrected immediately, the FREE function can be used to free the muting range. Enable signal Q and output MUTING =1 temporarily. The FREE function can be used if: ENABLE = 1 At least one muting sensor is activated A user acknowledgment with rising edge at input ACK occurs twice within 4 s, and the second user acknowledgment at input ACK remains at a signal state of 1 (acknowledgment button remains activated) WARNING When using the FREE function, the action must be observed. A dangerous situation must be able to be interrupted at any time by releasing the acknowledgment button. The acknowledgment button must be mounted in such a way the entire danger area can be observed. (S037) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 462 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Timing diagrams for discrepancy errors at sensor pair 1 or interruption of the light curtain (MUTING is not active) Sensor pair 1 (MS_11 and MS_22) is not activated within discrepancy time DISCTIM1. The light curtain is interrupted even though there is no enable (ENABLE=0) FREE function Acknowledgment Behavior with stopped conveyor equipment If, while the conveyor equipment has stopped, the monitoring for one of the following reasons is to be deactivated: To comply with discrepancy time DISCTIM1 or DISCTIM2 To comply with maximum muting time TIME_MAX You must supply input STOP with a "1" signal for as long as the conveyor equipment is stopped. As soon as the conveyor equipment is running again (STOP = 0), discrepancy times DISCTIM1 and DISCTIM2 and maximum muting time TIME_MAX are reset. WARNING When STOP = 1 or ENABLE = 0, discrepancy monitoring is shut down. During this time, if inputs MSx1/MSx2 of a sensor pair both take a signal state of 1 due to an undetected error, e.g., because both muting sensors fail to 1, the fault is not detected and the MUTING function can be started unintentionally (when ENABLE =1). (S038) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 463 13.3 Safety functions Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits 0 to 6 are saved until acknowledgment at input ACK. Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Discrepancy error or incorrect discrepancy time DISCTIM 1 setting for sensor pair 1 Malfunction in production sequence Malfunction in production sequence eliminated Sensor defective Check sensors Wiring fault Check wiring of sensors Sensors are wired to different F-I/O, and FI/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON on an F-I/O For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Discrepancy time setting is too low If necessary, set a higher discrepancy time Discrepancy time setting is < 0 s or > 3 s Set discrepancy time in range between 0 s and 3 s Bit 1 Discrepancy error or incorrect discrepancy time DISCTIM 2 setting for sensor pair 2 Same as Bit 0 Same as Bit 0 Bit 2 Maximum muting time exceeded or incorrect muting time TIME_MAX setting Malfunction in production sequence Malfunction in production sequence eliminated Maximum muting time setting is too low If necessary, set a higher maximum muting time Muting time setting is < 0 s or > 10 min Set muting time in range from 0 s to 10 min ENABLE = 0 Set ENABLE = 1 Light curtain is defective Check light curtain Wiring fault Check wiring of light curtain (FREE input) F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O of light curtain For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Bit 3 Light curtain interrupted and muting not active (FREE input) Startup of F-system For FREE, see DIAG Bit 5 See other DIAG bits Bit 4 Muting lamp is defective or cannot be set Muting lamp is defective Replace muting lamp Wiring fault Check wiring of muting lamp F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O of muting lamp For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 464 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 5 FREE is necessary See other DIAG bits Two rising edges at ACK within 4 s, and activate acknowledgment button until ACK_REQ = 0 Bit 6 Acknowledgment necessary -- -- Bit 7 State of output Q -- -- Bit 8 State of output MUTING -- -- Bit 9 FREE active -- -- Bit 10 Reserved -- -- Reserved -- -- ... Bit 15 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 465 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 466 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 467 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.6 EV1oo2DI: 1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction implements a 1oo2 evaluation of two single-channel sensors combined with a discrepancy analysis. Output Q is set to 1, if the signal states of inputs IN1 and IN2 both equal 1 and no discrepancy error DISC_FLT is stored. if the signal state of one or both inputs is 0, output Q is set to 0. As soon as the signal states of inputs IN1 and IN2 are different, the discrepancy time DISCTIME is started. If the signal states of the two inputs are still different once the discrepancy time expires, a discrepancy error is detected and DISC_FLT is set to 1 (restart inhibit). If the discrepancy between inputs IN1 and IN2 is no longer detected, the discrepancy error is acknowledged according to the parameter assignment of ACK_NEC: If ACK_NEC = 0, the acknowledgment is automatic. If ACK_NEC = 1, you must use a rising edge at input ACK to acknowledge the discrepancy error. The output ACK_REQ = 1 signals that a user acknowledgment at input ACK is necessary to acknowledge the discrepancy error (cancel the restart inhibit). The instruction sets ACK_REQ = 1 as soon as discrepancy is no longer detected. After acknowledgment or if, prior to acknowledgment, there is once again a discrepancy between inputs IN1 and IN2, the instruction resets ACK_REQ to 0. Output Q can never be set to 1 if the discrepancy time setting is < 0 or > 60 s. In this case, output DISC_FLT is also set to 1 (restart inhibit). The call interval of the safety program (e.g., OB 35) must be less than the discrepancy time setting. Every call of the "1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., EV1oo2DI_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., EV1oo2DI_Instance_1) for the "1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING The ACK_NEC tag must not be assigned a value of 0 unless an automatic restart of the affected process is otherwise excluded. (S033) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 468 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input BOOL Sensor 1 IN2 Input BOOL Sensor 2 DISCTIME Input TIME Discrepancy time (0 to 60 s) ACK_NEC Input BOOL 1 = acknowledgment necessary for discrepancy error ACK Input BOOL Acknowledgment of discrepancy error Q Output BOOL Output ACK_REQ Output BOOL 1 = acknowledgment required DISC_FLT Output BOOL 1 = discrepancy error DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 469 13.3 Safety functions Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Activating inputs IN1 and IN2 Inputs IN1 and IN2 must both be activated in such a way that their safe state is 0. Example with QBAD or QBAD_I_xx signal For non-equivalent signals you need to OR the input (IN1 and IN2) with which you assign the encoder signal to the safe state 1, with the QBAD signal of the associated F-I/O or the QBAD_I_xx signal of the associated channel (with S7-300/400 F-CPUs) and negate the result. Signal state 0 is then at input IN1 or IN2 when fail-safe values are output. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 470 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Example with value status For nonequivalent signals, you have to negate the input (IN1 or IN2) with which you have assigned the encoder signal to a safe state of 1 and AND it with the value status of the associated channel. Signal state 0 is then at input IN1 or IN2 when fail-safe values are output. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 471 13.3 Safety functions Timing diagrams EV1oo2DI If ACK_NEC = 1: Startup characteristics Note If the sensors at inputs IN1 and IN2 are assigned to different F-I/O, it is possible that the fail-safe values are output for different lengths of time following startup of the F-system due to different startup characteristics of the F-I/O. If the signal states of inputs IN1 and IN2 remain different after the discrepancy time DISCTIME has expired, a discrepancy error is detected after the F-system starts up. If ACK_NEC = 1 you must acknowledge the discrepancy error with a rising edge at input ACK. Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits are saved until acknowledgment at input ACK. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 472 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Discrepancy error or incorrect discrepancy time setting (= status of DISC_FLT) Sensor defective Check sensors Wiring fault Check wiring of sensors Sensors are wired to different F-I/O, For a solution, see the section and F-I/O fault, channel fault, or "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in communication error, or passivation DIAG (Page 172) by means of PASS_ON on an F-I/O Discrepancy time setting is too low If necessary, set a higher discrepancy time Discrepancy time setting is < 0 s or > 60 s Set discrepancy time in range between 0 s and 60 s Bit 1 For discrepancy errors: last signal state change was at input IN1 -- -- Bit 2 For discrepancy errors: last signal state change was at input IN2 -- -- Bit 3 Reserved -- -- Bit 4 Reserved -- -- Bit 5 For discrepancy errors: input ACK has a permanent signal state of 1 Acknowledgment button defective Replace acknowledgment button Wiring fault Check wiring of acknowledgment button Bit 6 Acknowledgment necessary -- -- Bit 7 State of output Q -- -- SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 473 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 474 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.7 FDBACK: Feedback monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction implements feedback monitoring. The signal state of output Q is checked to see whether it corresponds to the inverse signal state of the feedback input FEEDBACK. Output Q is set to 1 as soon as input ON = 1. Requirement for this is that the feedback input FEEDBACK = 1 and no feedback error is saved. Output Q is reset to 0, as soon as input ON = 0 or if a feedback error is detected. A feedback error ERROR = 1 is detected if the inverse signal state of the feedback input FEEDBACK (to input Q) does not follow the signal state of output Q within the maximum tolerable feedback time. The feedback error is saved. If a discrepancy is detected between the feedback input FEEDBACK and the output Q after a feedback error, the feedback error is acknowledged in accordance with the parameter assignment of ACK_NEC: If ACK_NEC = 0, the acknowledgment is automatic. If ACK_NEC = 1, you must acknowledge the feedback error with a rising edge at input ACK. The ACK_REQ = 1 output then signals that a user acknowledgment is necessary at input ACK to acknowledge the feedback error. Following an acknowledgment, the instruction resets ACK_REQ to 0. To avoid a feedback errors from being detected and acknowledgment from being required when the F-I/O controlled by the Q output are passivated, you need to supply input QBAD_FIO with the QBAD signal of the associated F-I/O or the QBAD_O_xx signal / inverted value status of the associated channel. Every call of the "Feedback monitoring" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., FDBACK_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., FDBACK_Instance_1) for the "Feedback monitoring" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 475 13.3 Safety functions Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING The ACK_NEC tag must not be assigned a value of 0 unless an automatic restart of the affected process is otherwise excluded. (S033) WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision (S034). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ON Input BOOL 1= Enable output FEEDBACK Input BOOL Feedback input QBAD_FIO Input BOOL QBAD signal of the F-I/O or QBAD_O_xx signal / inverted value status of the Q output ACK_NEC Input BOOL 1=Acknowledgment necessary ACK Input BOOL Acknowledgment FDB_TIME Input TIME Feedback time Q Output BOOL Output ERROR Output BOOL Feedback error ACK_REQ Output BOOL Acknowledgment request DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 476 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- Version 1.0 requires that the F_TOF block with the number FB 186 is available in the project tree in the "Program blocks/System blocks/STEP 7 Safety" folder. When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. You will then avoid number conflicts. 1.1 x -- -- 1.2 x -- o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x o o 1.5 x x x These versions are functionally identical to version V1.0, but do not require the F_TOF block to have a particular number. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Interconnection example Sent to the FEEDBACK input of the instruction from output Q of the instruction SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 477 13.3 Safety functions Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits 0, 2, and 5 are saved until acknowledgment at input ACK. Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Feedback error or incorrect feedback time setting (= state of ERROR) Feedback time setting < 0 Set feedback time > 0 Feedback time setting is too low If necessary, set a higher feedback time Wiring fault Check wiring of actuator and feedback contact Actuator or feedback contact is defective Check actuator and feedback contact I/O fault or channel fault of feedback input Check I/O Bit 1 Passivation of F-I/O/channel controlled by output Q (= state of QBAD_FIO) F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Bit 2 After feedback error: feedback input has permanent signal state of 0 F-I/O fault or channel fault of feedback input Check I/O Feedback contact is defective Check feedback contact F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O of feedback input For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) Bit 3 Reserved -- -- Bit 4 Reserved -- -- Bit 5 For feedback error: input ACK Acknowledgment button defective has a permanent signal state of 1 Wiring fault Check acknowledgment button Bit 6 Acknowledgment required (= state of ACK_REQ) -- -- Bit 7 State of output Q -- -- Check wiring of acknowledgment button SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 478 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 479 13.3 Safety functions Example The following example shows how the instruction for S7-300/400 F-CPUs works: The following example shows how the instruction for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 480 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.8 SFDOOR: Safety door monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction implements safety door monitoring. Enable signal Q is reset to 0 as soon as one of the inputs IN1 or IN2 take a signal state of 0 (safety door is opened). The enable signal can be reset to 1, only if: Inputs IN1 and IN2 both take a signal state of 0 prior to opening the door (safety door has been completely opened) Inputs IN1 and IN2 then both take a signal state of 1 (safety door is closed) An acknowledgment occurs The acknowledgment for the enable takes place according to the parameter assignment at input ACK_NEC: If ACK_NEC = 0, the acknowledgment is automatic. If ACK_NEC = 1, you must use a rising edge at input ACK for acknowledging the enable. Output ACK_REQ = 1 is used to signal that a user acknowledgment is required at input ACK for the acknowledgment. The instruction sets ACK_REQ = 1 as soon as the door is closed. Following an acknowledgment, the instruction resets ACK_REQ to 0. In order for the instruction to recognize whether inputs IN1 and IN2 are 0 merely due to passivation of the associated F-I/O, you need to supply inputs QBAD_IN1 or QBAD_IN2 with the QBAD signal of the associated F-I/O or QBAD_I_xx signal / inverted value status of the associated channel. Among other things, this will prevent you from having to open the safety door completely prior to an acknowledgment in the event the F-I/O are passivated. Every call of the "Safety door monitoring" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., SFDOOR_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., SFDOOR_Instance_1) for the "Safety door monitoring" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 481 13.3 Safety functions Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING The ACK_NEC tag must not be assigned a value of 0 unless an automatic restart of the affected process is otherwise excluded. (S033) Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input BOOL Input 1 IN2 Input BOOL Input 2 QBAD_IN1 Input BOOL QBAD signal of the F-I/O or QBAD_O_xx signal / inverted value status of the channel of input IN1 QBAD_IN2 Input BOOL QBAD signal of the F-I/O or QBAD_O_xx signal / inverted value status of the channel of input IN2 OPEN_NEC Input BOOL 1= Open necessary at startup ACK_NEC Input BOOL 1=Acknowledgment necessary ACK Input BOOL Acknowledgment Q Output BOOL 1= Enable, safety door closed ACK_REQ Output BOOL Acknowledgment request DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 482 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Interconnection example You must interconnect the NC contact of position switch 1 of the safety door at input IN1 and the NO contact of position switch 2 at input IN2. Position switch 1 must be mounted in such a way that it is positively operated when the safety door is open. Position switch 2 must be mounted in such a way that it is operated when the safety door is closed. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 483 13.3 Safety functions Startup characteristics After an F-system startup, enable signal Q is reset to 0. The acknowledgment for the enable takes place according to the parameter assignment at inputs OPEN_NEC and ACK_NEC: When OPEN_NEC = 0, an automatic acknowledgment occurs independently of ACK_NEC, as soon as the two inputs IN1 and IN2 take signal state 1 for the first time following reintegration of the associated F-I/O (safety door is closed). When OPEN_NEC = 1 or if at least one of the IN1 and IN2 inputs still has a signal state of 0 after reintegration of the associated F-I/O, an automatic acknowledgment occurs according to ACK_NEC or you have to use a rising edge at input ACK for the enable. Prior to acknowledgment, inputs IN1 and IN2 both have to take a signal state of 0 (safety door has been completely opened) followed by a signal state of 1 (safety door is closed). WARNING The OPEN_NEC tag must not be assigned a value of 0 unless an automatic restart of the affected process is otherwise excluded. (S039) Output DIAG The DIAG output provides non-fail-safe information on errors for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Reserved -- -- Bit 1 Signal state 0 is missing at both IN1 and IN2 inputs Safety door was not completely Open safety door completely opened when OPEN_NEC = 1 after F-system startup Bit 2 Bit 3 Signal state 1 is missing at both IN1 and IN2 inputs QBAD_IN1 and/or QBAD_IN2 = 1 Open safety door was not completely opened Open safety door completely Wiring fault Check wiring of position switch Position switch is defective Check position switch Position switch is incorrectly adjusted Adjust position switch properly Safety door was not closed Close safety door Wiring fault Check wiring of position switch Position switch is defective Check position switch Position switch is incorrectly adjusted Adjust position switch properly F-I/O fault, channel fault, or communication error, or passivation by means of PASS_ON of F-I/O or channel of IN1 and/or IN2 For a solution, see the section "Structure of DIAG", bits 0 to 6 in DIAG (Page 172) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 484 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 4 Reserved -- -- Bit 5 If enable is missing: input ACK has a permanent signal state of 1 Acknowledgment button defective Check acknowledgment button Wiring fault Check wiring of acknowledgment button Bit 6 Acknowledgment required (= state of ACK_REQ) -- -- Bit 7 State of output Q -- -- Example The following example shows how the instruction for S7-300/400 F-CPUs works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 485 13.3 Safety functions The following example shows how the instruction for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 486 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.3 Safety functions 13.3.9 ACK_GL: Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O in an F-runtime group (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction creates an acknowledgment for the simultaneous reintegration of all F-I/O or channels of the F-I/O of an F-runtime group after communication errors, F-I/O errors, or channel faults. A user acknowledgment (Page 187) with a positive edge at input ACK_GLOB is required for reintegration. The acknowledgment occurs analogously to the user acknowledgment via the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB (Page 168), but it acts simultaneously on all F-I/O of the F-runtime group in which the instruction is called. If you use the instruction ACK_GL, you do not have to provide a user acknowledgment for each F-I/O of the F-runtime group via the ACK_REI tag of the F-I/O DB. Every call of the "Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O of a runtime group" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., ACK_GL_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., ACK_GL_Instance_1) for the "Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O of a runtime group" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Note An acknowledgment via the ACK_GL instruction is only possible if the tag ACK_REI of the FI/O DB = 0. Accordingly, an acknowledgment via the tag ACK_REI of the F-I/O DB is only possible if the input ACK_GLOB of the instruction = 0. The instruction is only allowed to be called once per F-runtime group. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ACK_GLOB Input BOOL 1=acknowledgment for reintegration SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 487 13.3 Safety functions Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 488 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations 13.4 Timer operations 13.4.1 TP: Generate pulse (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Generate pulse" instruction to set output Q for a programmed period. The instruction is started if the result of logic operation (RLO) changes from "0" to "1" (positive edge) at input IN. The programmed period PT starts running when the instruction starts. Output Q is set for period PT, regardless of the subsequent sequence of the input signal. Also the detection of a new positive signal edge does not influence the signal state at output Q as long as period PT runs. You can query the current time value at the output ET. The time value begins at T#0s and ends when the value of period PT is reached. If period PT is reached and the signal state at input IN is "0", output ET is reset. Every call of the "Generate pulse" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., F_IEC_Timer_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., F_IEC_Timer_Instance_1) for the "Generate pulse" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction"). * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 489 13.4 Timer operations The operating system resets the instances of the "Generate pulse" instruction on a startup of the F-system. Note The functionality of this instruction differs from the corresponding standard TP instruction in the following points: * If the instruction is called while the time is running with PT = 0 ms, the outputs Q and ET are reset. * If the instruction is called with PT < 0 ms, the outputs Q and ET are reset. To restart the pulse, a new rising signal edge at input IN is required once PT is greater than 0 again. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input BOOL Start input PT Input TIME Duration of pulse; must be positive. Q Output BOOL Pulse output ET Output TIME Current time value Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 490 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations Pulse diagram The following figure shows the pulse diagram of the instruction "Generate pulse": SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 491 13.4 Timer operations Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 492 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: If the signal state of operand "TagIn_1" changes from "0" to "1", the "Generate pulse" instruction is started and the period assigned at input PT (100 ms) runs, regardless of the further course of operand "TagIn_1". Operand "TagOut" at output Q has signal state "1" as long as the period is running. Operand ""F_DB_1".Tag_ET" contains the current time value. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 493 13.4 Timer operations 13.4.2 TON: Generate on-delay (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You use the "Generate on-delay" instruction to delay the setting of output Q by the assigned period PT. The instruction is started if the result of logic operation (RLO) changes from "0" to "1" (positive edge) at input IN. The programmed period PT starts running when the instruction starts. When period PT has expired, output Q is set to signal state "1". Output Q remains set as long as the start input is set to "1". When the signal state at the start input changes from "1" to "0", output Q is reset. The time function is restarted when a new positive signal edge is detected at the start input. You can query the current time value at the output ET. The time value begins at T#0s and ends when the value of period PT is reached. Output ET is reset, as soon as the signal state at input IN changes to "0". Every call of the "Generate on-delay" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., F_IEC_Timer_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., F_IEC_Timer_Instance_1) for the "Generate on-delay" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 494 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations The operating system resets the instances of the "Generate on-delay" instruction on a startup of the F-system. Note The functionality of this instruction differs from the corresponding standard TON instruction in the following points: * If the instruction is called while the time is running with PT = 0 ms, the output ET is reset. * If the instruction is called with PT < 0 ms, the outputs Q and ET are reset. To restart the on-delay, a new rising signal edge at input IN is required once PT is greater than 0 again. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input BOOL Start input PT Input TIME Duration of on-delay; must be positive. Q Output BOOL Output that is set after expiration of time PT. ET Output TIME Current time value Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 495 13.4 Timer operations Pulse diagram The following figure shows the pulse diagram of the instruction "Generate on-delay": SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 496 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 497 13.4 Timer operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When the signal state of operand "TagIn_1" changes from "0" to "1", the "Generate on-delay" instruction is started and the period assigned at input PT (1 s) runs. Operand "TagOut" at output Q feeds signal state "1" when the period has elapsed and remains set as long as operand "TagIn_1" still feeds signal state "1". Operand ""F_DB_1".Tag_ET" contains the current time value. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 498 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations 13.4.3 TOF: Generate off-delay (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You use the "Generate off-delay" instruction to delay the resetting of output Q by the assigned period PT. Output Q is set if the result of logic operation (RLO) changes from "0" to "1" (positive edge) at input IN. When the signal state at input IN changes back to "0", the programmed period PT starts. Output Q remains set as long as period PT runs. After period PT expires, output Q is reset. If the signal state at input IN changes to "1" before period PT has expired, then the time is reset. The signal state at output Q remains at "1". You can query the current time value at the output ET. The time value begins at T#0s and ends when the value of period PT is reached. After time PT has elapsed, output ET remains at its current value until input IN changes back to "1". If input IN changes to "1" before time PT has expired, the output ET is reset to value T#0. Every call of the "Generate off-delay" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is in inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., F_IEC_Timer_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., F_IEC_Timer_Instance_1) for the "Generate off-delay" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 499 13.4 Timer operations The operating system resets the instances of the "Generate off-delay" instruction on a startup of the F-system. Note The functionality of this instruction differs from the corresponding standard TOF instruction in the following points: * If the instruction is called while the time is running with PT = 0 ms, the outputs Q and ET are reset. * If the instruction is called with PT < 0 ms, the outputs Q and ET are reset. To restart the off-delay, another falling signal edge at input IN is required once PT is greater than 0 again. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input BOOL Start input PT Input TIME Duration of off delay; must be positive. Q Output BOOL Output that is reset after expiration of time PT. ET Output TIME Current time value Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 500 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations Pulse diagram The following figure shows the pulse diagram of the instruction "Generate off-delay": SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 501 13.4 Timer operations Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 502 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.4 Timer operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: If the signal state of operand "TagIn_1" changes from "0" to "1", the signal state of operand"TagOut" at output Q is set to "1". If the signal state of operand "TagIn_1" changes back to "0", the period assigned at input PT (200 ms) runs. The "TagOut" operand at output Q is set back to "0" when the period expires. Operand ""F_DB_1".Tag_ET" contains the current time value. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 503 13.5 Counter operations 13.5 Counter operations 13.5.1 CTU: Count up (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Count up" instruction to increment the value at output CV. When the signal state at the CU input changes from "0" to "1" (positive signal edge), the instruction is executed and the current count at the CV output increases by one. The count value is increased on each detection of a positive signal edge until it reaches the high limit of the data type specified at the CV output. When the high limit is reached, the signal state at the CU input no longer affects the instruction. The counter status can be queried at output Q. The signal state at output Q is determined by parameter PV. When the current count value is greater than or equal to the value of parameter PV, output Q is set to signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at output Q is "0". The value at output CV is reset to zero when the signal state at input R changes to "1". As long as signal state "1" exists at input R, the signal state at input CU has no effect on the instruction. Every call of the "Count up" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., F_IEC_Counter_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., F_IEC_Counter_Instance_1) for the "Count up" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. The operating system resets the instances of the "Count up" instruction on a startup of the F-system. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CU Input BOOL Counter input R Input BOOL Reset input PV Input INT Value for which output Q is set Q Output BOOL Counter status CV Output INT Current count value SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 504 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.5 Counter operations Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When the signal state of the "CU" input changes from "0" to "1", the "Count up" instruction is executed and the current count of the "CV" output increases by one. The count value is increased on every additional positive signal edge until the high limit of the specified data type (32767) is reached. The value at the PV parameter is applied as the limit for determining the "TagOut" operands at the Q output. Output "Q" returns the signal state "1" as long as the current count is greater than or equal to the value of operand "PV". In all other cases, the "Q" output has the signal state "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 505 13.5 Counter operations 13.5.2 CTD: Count down (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Count down" instruction to decrement the value at output CV. When the signal state at input CD changes from "0" to "1" (positive signal edge), the instruction is executed and the current count value at output CV is decreased by one. The count value is decreased on each detection of a positive signal edge until it reaches the low limit of the specified data type. When the low limit is reached, the signal state at input CD no longer affects the instruction. The counter status can be queried at output Q. When the current count value is less than or equal to zero, output Q is set to signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at output Q is "0". The value at output CV is set to the value of parameter "PV" when the signal state at input LD changes to "1". As long as signal state "1" exists at input LD, the signal state at input CD has no effect on the instruction. Every call of the "Count down" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., F_IEC_Counter_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., F_IEC_Counter_Instance_1) for the "Count down" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. The operating system resets the instances of the "Count down" instruction on a startup of the F-system. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CD Input BOOL Counter input LD Input BOOL Load input PV Input INT Value at the output CV when LD = 1 is set Q Output BOOL Counter status CV Output INT Current count value SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 506 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.5 Counter operations Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When the signal state of the "CD" input changes from "0" to "1", the "Count down" instruction is executed and the current count at "CV" output decreases by one. The count value is decreased on each additional positive signal edge until the low limit of the specified data type (-32768) is reached. Output "Q" returns the signal state "1" as long as the current count is less than or equal to zero. In all other cases, output "Q" has signal state "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 507 13.5 Counter operations 13.5.3 CTUD: Count up and down (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Count up and down" instruction to increment and decrement the count value at output CV. If the signal state at the CU input changes from "0" to "1" (positive signal edge), the current count at the CV output increases by one. If the signal state at input CD changes from "0" to "1" (positive signal edge), the count value at output CV is decreased by one. If a positive signal edge is present at inputs CU and CD in one program cycle, the current count value at output CV remains unchanged. The count value can be increased until it reaches the high limit of the data type specified at output CV. When the high limit is reached, the count value is no longer incremented on a positive signal edge. When the low limit of the specified data type is reached, the count value is no longer decreased. When the signal state at input LD changes to "1", the count value at output CV is set to the value of parameter PV. As long as signal state "1" exists at input LD, the signal state at inputs CU and CD has no effect on the instruction. The count value is set to zero, when the signal state at input R changes to "1". As long as signal state "1" exists at input R, the signal state at inputs CU, CD, and LD has no effect on the "Count up and down" instruction. The status of the up counter can be queried at output QU. When the current count value is greater than or equal to the value of parameter PV, output QU delivers signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at output QU is "0". The status of the down counter can be queried at output QD. When the current count value is lesser than or equal to zero, output QD delivers signal state "1". In all other cases, the signal state at output QD is "0". Every call of the "Count up and down" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., F_IEC_Counter_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., F_IEC_Counter_Instance_1) for the "Count up and down" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. The operating system resets the instances of the "Count up and down" instruction when the F-system is started up. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description CU Input BOOL Count up input CD Input BOOL Count down input R Input BOOL Reset input LD Input BOOL Load input SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 508 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.5 Counter operations Parameter Declaration Data type Description PV Input INT Value set at the output QU/ at which the output CV is set at LD = 1. QU Output BOOL Status of up counter QD Output BOOL Status of down counter CV Output INT Current count value Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 509 13.5 Counter operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When the signal state at the "CU" input or at the "CD" input changes from "0" to "1" (positive signal edge), the "Count up and down" instruction is executed. When a positive signal edge is present at the "CU" input, the current count of the "CV" output increases by one. When a positive signal edge is present at the "CD" input, the current count at the "CV" output decreases by one. The count value is increased on each positive signal edge at the CU input until it reaches the high limit of 32767. The count value is decreased on each positive signal edge at the CD input until it reaches the low limit of -32768. Output "QU" returns the signal state "1" as long as the current count is greater than or equal to the value at the "PV" input. In all other cases, output "QU" has signal state "0". Output "QD" returns the signal state "1" as long as the current count is less than or equal to zero. In all other cases, output "QD" has signal state "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 510 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.6 Comparator operations 13.6 Comparator operations 13.6.1 CMP ==: Equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Equal" instruction to determine if the first comparison value (IN1 or ) is equal to the second comparison value (IN2 or ). If the condition of the comparison is satisfied, the instruction returns result of logic operation (RLO) "1". If the condition of the comparison is not satisfied, the instruction returns RLO "0". For LAD: The RLO of the instruction is linked to the RLO of the entire current path as follows: By AND, when the comparison instruction is connected in series. By OR, when the comparison instruction is connected in parallel. Enter the first comparison value () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the second comparison value () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description FBD: IN1 Input INT, DINT, TIME, WORD, (S7300/400) DWORD First value to compare Input INT, DINT, TIME, WORD, (S7300/400) DWORD Second value to compare LAD: FBD: IN2 LAD: You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 511 13.6 Comparator operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: "Tag_In1" has signal state "1". The condition of the comparison instruction is fulfilled ("Tag_Value1" = "Tag_Value2"). 13.6.2 CMP <>: Not equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Not equal" instruction to determine if the first comparison value (IN1 or ) is not equal to the second comparison value (IN2 or ). If the condition of the comparison is satisfied, the instruction returns result of logic operation (RLO) "1". If the condition of the comparison is not satisfied, the instruction returns RLO "0". For LAD: The RLO of the instruction is linked to the RLO of the entire current path as follows: By AND, when the comparison instruction is connected in series. By OR, when the comparison instruction is connected in parallel. Enter the first comparison value () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the second comparison value () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 512 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.6 Comparator operations Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description FBD: IN1 Input INT, DINT, TIME, WORD, (S7300/400) DWORD First value to compare Input INT, DINT, TIME, WORD, (S7300/400) DWORD Second value to compare LAD: FBD: IN2 LAD: You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: "Tag_In1" has signal state "1". The condition of the comparison instruction is fulfilled ("Tag_Value1" <> "Tag_Value2"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 513 13.6 Comparator operations 13.6.3 CMP >=: Greater or equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Greater or equal" instruction to determine if the first comparison value (IN1 or ) is greater than or equal to the second comparison value (IN2 or ). Both comparison values must be of the same data type. If the condition of the comparison is satisfied, the instruction returns result of logic operation (RLO) "1". If the condition of the comparison is not satisfied, the instruction returns RLO "0". For LAD: The RLO of the instruction is linked to the RLO of the entire current path as follows: By AND, when the comparison instruction is connected in series. By OR, when the comparison instruction is connected in parallel. Enter the first comparison value () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the second comparison value () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description FBD: IN1 Input INT, DINT, TIME First value to compare Input INT, DINT, TIME Second value to compare LAD: FBD: IN2 LAD: You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 514 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.6 Comparator operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: "Tag_In1" has signal state "1". The condition of the comparison instruction is fulfilled ("Tag_Value1" >= "Tag_Value2"). 13.6.4 CMP <=: Less or equal (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Less or equal" instruction to determine if the first comparison value (IN1 or ) is less than or equal to the second comparison value (IN2 or ). Both comparison values must be of the same data type. If the condition of the comparison is satisfied, the instruction returns result of logic operation (RLO) "1". If the condition of the comparison is not satisfied, the instruction returns RLO "0". For LAD: The RLO of the instruction is linked to the RLO of the entire current path as follows: By AND, when the comparison instruction is connected in series. By OR, when the comparison instruction is connected in parallel. Enter the first comparison value () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the second comparison value () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 515 13.6 Comparator operations Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description FBD: IN1 Input INT, DINT, TIME First value to compare Input INT, DINT, TIME Second value to compare LAD: FBD: IN2 LAD: You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: "Tag_In1" has signal state "1". The condition of the comparison instruction is fulfilled ("Tag_Value1" <= "Tag_Value2"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 516 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.6 Comparator operations 13.6.5 CMP >: Greater than (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Greater than" instruction to determine if the first comparison value (IN1 or ) is greater than the second comparison value (IN2 or ). Both comparison values must be of the same data type. If the condition of the comparison is satisfied, the instruction returns result of logic operation (RLO) "1". If the condition of the comparison is not satisfied, the instruction returns RLO "0". For LAD: The RLO of the instruction is linked to the RLO of the entire current path as follows: By AND, when the comparison instruction is connected in series. By OR, when the comparison instruction is connected in parallel. Enter the first comparison value () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the second comparison value () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description FBD: IN1 Input INT, DINT, TIME First value to compare Input INT, DINT, TIME Second value to compare LAD: FBD: IN2 LAD: You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 517 13.6 Comparator operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: "Tag_In1" has signal state "1". The condition of the comparison instruction is fulfilled ("Tag_Value1" > "Tag_Value2"). 13.6.6 CMP <: Less than (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Less than" instruction to determine if the first comparison value (IN1 or ) is less than the second comparison value (IN2 or ). Both comparison values must be of the same data type. If the condition of the comparison is satisfied, the instruction returns result of logic operation (RLO) "1". If the condition of the comparison is not satisfied, the instruction returns RLO "0". For LAD: The RLO of the instruction is linked to the RLO of the entire current path as follows: By AND, when the comparison instruction is connected in series. By OR, when the comparison instruction is connected in parallel. Enter the first comparison value () in the operand placeholder above the instruction. Enter the second comparison value () in the operand placeholder below the instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 518 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.6 Comparator operations Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description FBD: IN1 Input INT, DINT, TIME First value to compare Input INT, DINT, TIME Second value to compare LAD: FBD: IN2 LAD: You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: Output "TagOut" is set when the following conditions are fulfilled: "Tag_In1" has signal state "1". The condition of the comparison instruction is fulfilled ("Tag_Value1" < "Tag_Value2"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 519 13.7 Math functions 13.7 Math functions 13.7.1 ADD: Add (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Add" instruction to add the value at input IN1 and the value at input IN2 and query the sum at the OUT output (OUT = IN1 + IN2). Enable input "EN" or (S7-300, S7-400) of the "ENO" enable output cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". Note When the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program! (S7-1200, S7-1500) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by connecting the ENO enable output, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the enable output ENO returns the signal state "0". * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. (S7-300, S7-400) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by inserting a "Get status bit OV" instruction in the next network, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The network with the "Get status bit OV" instruction must not contain any jump labels. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * A warning is issued if you do not insert a "Get status bit OV" instruction. * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 520 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL (S7-1200, S7-1500) Enable output IN1 Input INT, DINT First addend IN2 Input INT, DINT Second addend OUT Output INT, DINT Total You select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example for S7-300/400 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Add" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 521 13.7 Math functions The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand is added to value of the "Tag_Value2" operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. If needed, you can also store the signal status of the ENO enable output in an (F-)DB, and centrally evaluate whether overflows have occurred for all or one group of instructions with overflow detection. When an overflow occurs during execution of the "Add" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. Example for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Add" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "#Tag_Value1" operand is added to value of the "#Tag_Value2" operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Add" instruction, the ENO enable output has the signal state "1" and the "#TagOut" operand is set. If needed, you can also store the signal status of the ENO enable output in an (F-)DB, and centrally evaluate whether overflows have occurred for all or one group of instructions with overflow detection. See also ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 585) ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 586) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 522 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions 13.7.2 SUB: Subtract (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Subtract" instruction to subtract the value at input IN2 from the value at input IN1 and query the difference at the OUT output (OUT = IN1 - IN2). Enable input "EN" or (S7-300, S7-400) of the "ENO" enable output cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". Note When the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program! (S7-1200, S7-1500) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by connecting the ENO enable output, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the enable output ENO returns the signal state "0". * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. (S7-300, S7-400) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by inserting a "Get status bit OV" instruction in the next network, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The network with the "Get status bit OV" instruction must not contain any jump labels. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * A warning is issued if you do not insert a "Get status bit OV" instruction. * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL (S7-1200, S7-1500) Enable output IN1 Input INT, DINT Minuend SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 523 13.7 Math functions Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN2 Input INT, DINT Subtrahend OUT Output INT, DINT Difference You select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example for S7-300/400 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Subtract" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "Tag_Value2" operand is subtracted from the value of the "Tag_Value1" operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When an overflow occurs during execution of the "Subtract" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 524 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions Example for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Subtract" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "#Tag_Value2" operand is subtracted from the value of the "#Tag_Value1" operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Subtract" instruction, the ENO enable output has the signal state "1" and the "#TagOut" operand is set. See also ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 585) ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 586) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 525 13.7 Math functions 13.7.3 MUL: Multiply (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Multiply" instruction to multiply the value at input IN1 by the value at input IN2 and query the product at output OUT (OUT = IN1 x IN2). Enable input "EN" or (S7-300, S7-400) of the "ENO" enable output cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". Note When the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program! (S7-1200, S7-1500) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by connecting the ENO enable output, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the enable output ENO returns the signal state "0". * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. (S7-300, S7-400) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by inserting a "Get status bit OV" instruction in the next network, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The network with the "Get status bit OV" instruction must not contain any jump labels. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * A warning is issued if you do not insert a "Get status bit OV" instruction. * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 526 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL (S7-1200, S7-1500) Enable output IN1 Input INT, DINT Multiplier IN2 Input INT, DINT Multiplicand OUT Output INT, DINT Product You select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example for S7-300/400 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Multiply" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 527 13.7 Math functions The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand is multiplied by the value of the "Tag_Value2" operand. The result of the multiplication is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When an overflow occurs during execution of the "Multiply" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. Example for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Multiply" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "#Tag_Value1" operand is multiplied by the value of the "#Tag_Value2" operand. The result of the multiplication is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Multiply" instruction, the ENO enable output has the signal state "1" and the "#TagOut" operand is set. See also ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 585) ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 586) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 528 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions 13.7.4 DIV: Divide (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Divide" instruction to divide the value at input IN1 by the value at input IN2 and query the quotient at the OUT output (OUT = IN1 / IN2). Enable input "EN" or (S7-300, S7-400) of the "ENO" enable output cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". Note When the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program! (S7-1200, S7-1500) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by connecting the ENO enable output, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the enable output ENO returns the signal state "0". * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. (S7-300, S7-400) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by inserting a "Get status bit OV" instruction in the next network, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The network with the "Get status bit OV" instruction must not contain any jump labels. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * A warning is issued if you do not insert a "Get status bit OV" instruction. * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 529 13.7 Math functions Note S7-300/400, S7-1200/1500 (enable output ENO connected): If the divisor (input IN2) of a DIV instruction = 0, the quotient of the division (result of division at output OUT) = 0. The result reacts like the corresponding instruction in a standard block. The F-CPU does not go to STOP mode. S7-1200/1500 (enable output ENO not connected): If the divisor (input IN2) of a DIV instruction = 0, the F-CPU goes to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. We recommend that you rule out a divisor (input IN2) = 0 when creating the program. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL (S7-1200, S7-1500) Enable output IN1 Input INT, DINT Dividend IN2 Input INT, DINT Divisor OUT Output INT, DINT Quotient You select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 530 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions Example for S7-300/400 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Divide" instruction is always execute regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand is divided by the value of the "Tag_Value2" operand. The result of the division is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When an overflow occurs during execution of the "Divide" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 531 13.7 Math functions Example for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Divide" instruction is always execute regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "#Tag_Value1" operand is divided by the value of the "#Tag_Value2" operand. The result of the division is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Divide" instruction, the ENO enable output has the signal state "1" and the "#TagOut" operand is set. See also ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 585) ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 586) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 532 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions 13.7.5 NEG: Create twos complement (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Create twos complement" instruction to change the sign of the value at input IN input and query the result at output OUT. If there is a positive value at input IN, for example, the negative equivalent of this value is sent to output OUT. Enable input "EN" or (S7-300, S7-400) of the "ENO" enable output cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". Note When the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program! (S7-1200, S7-1500) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by connecting the ENO enable output, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the enable output ENO returns the signal state "0". * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. (S7-300, S7-400) You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by inserting a "Get status bit OV" instruction in the next network, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The network with the "Get status bit OV" instruction must not contain any jump labels. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * A warning is issued if you do not insert a "Get status bit OV" instruction. * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 533 13.7 Math functions Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL (S7-1200, S7-1500) Enable output IN Input INT, DINT Input value OUT Output INT, DINT Twos complement of the input value You select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example for S7-300/400 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Create two's complement" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The sign of the "TagIn_Value" operand is changed and the result is stored in the ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value" operand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 534 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions When an overflow occurs during execution of the "Create two's complement" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. Example for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Create two's complement" instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The sign of the "#TagIn_Value" operand is changed and the result is stored in the ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Create two's complement" instruction, the ENO enable output has the signal state "1" and the "TagOut" operand is set. See also ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 585) ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 586) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 535 13.7 Math functions 13.7.6 ABS: Form absolute value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1200, S7-1500) Description You use the "Form absolute value" instruction to calculate the absolute amount of the value which is specified at the input "IN". The result of the instruction is output at the OUT output and can be queried there. Enable input "EN" or (S7-300, S7-400) of the "ENO" enable output cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". Note When the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the F-CPU may switch to STOP. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. You must therefore ensure that the permitted range for the data type is observed when creating the program! You can avoid a STOP of the F-CPU by connecting the ENO enable output, thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the result of the instruction is located outside the permitted range for this data type, the enable output ENO returns the signal state "0". * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. * The execution time of the instruction is extended (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). * Work memory requirement of safety program is increased. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL (S7-1200, S7-1500) Enable output IN Input INT, DINT Input value OUT Output INT, DINT Absolute value of the input value You select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 536 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.7 Math functions Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The instruction "Form absolute value"is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The absolute amount of the value at the "TagIn_Value" operand is calculated and the result is stored in the ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Form absolute value" instruction, the enable output ENO has the signal state "1" and the "#TagOut" operand is set. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 537 13.8 Move operations 13.8 Move operations 13.8.1 MOVE: Move value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Move value" instruction to transfer the content of the operand at input IN to the operand at output OUT1. Only operands with identical operand width and identical data structure can be specified for input IN and output OUT1. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). (S7-1200, S7-1500) In the basic state, the instruction box contains an output (OUT1). The number of outputs can be expanded. The inserted outputs are numbered in ascending order on the box. During execution, the content of the operand at the IN input is transferred to all available outputs. The instruction box cannot be expanded if operands with F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) are transferred. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input INT, DINT, WORD, (S7-300/400) DWORD, TIME, F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) Source value OUT1 Output INT, DINT, WORD, (S7-300/400) DWORD, TIME, F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) Destination address SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 538 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.8 Move operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The instruction copies the content of operand "TagIn_Value" to operand ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value". 13.8.2 RD_ARRAY_I: Read value from INT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1500) Description You use the "Read value from INT F-array" instruction to read an element from the array at the ARRAY input, which refers to the index at the INDEX input, and write its value at the OUT output. If an error occurs while accessing the array during runtime, this is displayed at the output ERROR. The array must be created in an F-global DB and can contain only one dimension. The elements of the ARRAY must be data type INT. The following applies for the array limits in contrast: The low limit must be 0. The high limit can be 10000 maximum. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at the "EN" enable input). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 539 13.8 Move operations Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ARRAY Input VARIANT Array from which is read INDEX Input DINT Element in the array which is read. The specification may be a constant or a tag. OUT Output INT Value which is read and output. ERROR Output BOOL Error information The parameter ERROR is set if an error occurs during the processing of the instruction. ARRAY parameter In addition to the direct connection with an array within a fail-safe global DB, this input can also be interconnected with an INOUT of data type ARRAY[*] of INT. This enables the decoupling of data and program logic in order, for example, to create a library function without any connection existing to a dedicated data block. ERROR parameter The table below shows the meaning of the value of the ERROR parameter: Value Description FALSE No error TRUE Value at the INDEX parameter is outside the limit value of the ARRAY. Instruction versions One version is available for this instruction: 1 Version S7300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 1.0 -- -- x1 Function supported as of firmware version V2.0 When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 540 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.8 Move operations Reaction to errors If the value at the INDEX input is outside the array limits, the output ERROR = 1 is set, and the array value of the element with index = 0 is output at OUT output, regardless of the value passed at the INDEX input. Therefore, set the value of the element with index = 0 as a fail-safe substitute value. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The following table shows how the instruction works using specific operand values: Parameter Operand Value ARRAY "Global_DB".Array The "Global_DB".Array operand is an ARRAY of data type Array[0..10] of INT INDEX #Tag_Index 2 OUT #TagOut_Value Value of the element at the location array[2] ERROR #TagError_Value False The instruction "Read value from INT F-array" is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The content of the 2nd element of the operand "Global_DB.Array" is output at the "#TagOut_Value" output. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 541 13.8 Move operations 13.8.3 RD_ARRAY_DI: Read value from DINT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-1500) Description You use the "Read value from DINT F-array" instruction to read an element from the array at the ARRAY input, which refers to the index at the INDEX input, and write its value at the OUT output. If an error occurs while accessing the array during runtime, this is displayed at the output ERROR. The array must be created in an F-global DB and can contain only one dimension. The elements of the array must be of the DINT data type. The following applies for the array limits in contrast: The low limit must be 0. The high limit can be 10000 maximum. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at the "EN" enable input). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ARRAY Input VARIANT Array from which is read INDEX Input DINT Element in the array which is read. The specification may be a constant or a tag. OUT Output DINT Value which is read and output. ERROR Output BOOL Error information The parameter ERROR is set if an error occurs during the processing of the instruction. ARRAY parameter In addition to the direct connection with an array within a fail-safe global DB, this input can also be interconnected with an INOUT of data type ARRAY[*] of DINT. This enables the decoupling of data and program logic in order, for example, to create a library function without any connection existing to a dedicated data block. ERROR parameter The table below shows the meaning of the value of the ERROR parameter: Value Description FALSE No error TRUE Value at the INDEX parameter is outside the limit value of the ARRAY. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 542 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.8 Move operations Instruction versions One version is available for this instruction: 1 Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 1.0 -- -- x1 Function supported as of firmware version V2.0 When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Reaction to errors If the value at the INDEX input is outside the array limits, the output ERROR = 1 is set, and the array value of the element with index = 0 is output at OUT output, regardless of the value passed at the INDEX input. Therefore, set the value of the element with index = 0 as a fail-safe substitute value. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The following table shows how the instruction works using specific operand values: Parameter Operand Value ARRAY "Global_DB".Array The operand "Global_DB".Array is an ARRAY of data type Array[0..10] of DINT INDEX #Tag_Index 2 OUT #TagOut_Value Value of the element at the location array[2] ERROR #TagError_Value False SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 543 13.8 Move operations The instruction "Read value from DINT F-array" is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The content of the 2nd element of the operand "Global_DB.Array" is output at the "#TagOut_Value" output. 13.8.4 WR_FDB: Write value indirectly to an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description This instruction writes the value specified in input IN to the tag addressed by INI_ADDR and OFFSET in an F-DB. The address of the tags addressed using INI_ADDR and OFFSET must be within the address range defined by addresses INI_ADDR and END_ADDR. If the F-CPU has gone to STOP mode with diagnostics event ID 75E2, check to determine if this condition is satisfied. The start address of the area in an F-DB to which the value at input IN is to be written is transferred using input INI_ADDR. The associated offset in this area is transferred using input OFFSET. The addresses transferred in input INI_ADDR or END_ADDR must point to a tag of the selected data type in an F-DB. Only tags of the selected data type are permitted between the INI_ADDR and END_ADDR addresses. The INI_ADDR address must be smaller than the END_ADDR address. As shown in the following example, the INI_ADDR and END_ADDR addresses must be transferred fully-qualified as "DBx".DBWy or in the corresponding symbolic representation. Transfers in other forms are not permitted. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input INT, DINT Value to be written to the F-DB INI_ADDR Input POINTER Start address of the area in an F-DB END_ADDR Input POINTER End address of the area in an F-DB OFFSET Input INT Offset You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 544 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.8 Move operations Examples of parameter assignment of INI_ADDR, END_ADDR, and OFFS Name Static VAR_BOOL10 Data type Initial value Comment BOOL false VAR_BOOL11 BOOL false VAR_BOOL12 BOOL false VAR_BOOL13 BOOL false VAR_TIME10 TIME T#0MS VAR_TIME11 TIME T#0MS VAR INT10 VAR_INT11 INT INT 0 0 VAR_INT12 INT 0 VAR INT13 VAR_INT14 INT INT 0 0 <- OFFSET = 3 VAR INT15 VAR_BOOL20 INT BOOL 0 false <- END ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR INT15 VAR_BOOL21 BOOL false VAR_BOOL22 BOOL false VAR_BOOL23 BOOL false VAR INT20 VAR_INT21 INT INT 0 0 VAR_INT22 INT 0 VAR INT23 VAR INT30 VAR INT31 VAR_INT32 INT INT INT INT 0 0 0 0 VAR_INT33 INT 0 VAR INT34 VAR_TIME20 INT TIME 0 T#0MS <- END ADDR = "F-DB".VAR INT34 VAR DINT10 VAR_DINT11 DINT DINT 0 0 <- INI ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR DINT10 VAR DINT12 VAR DINT13 DINT DINT 0 0 <- OFFSET = 2 <- END ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR DINT13 <- INI ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR INT10 Example 1 <- INI ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR INT20 Example 2 <- END ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR INT23 <- INI ADDR = "F-DB 1".VAR INT30 <- OFFSET = 1 Example 3 Example 4 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 545 13.8 Move operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: 13.8.5 RD_FDB: Read value indirectly from an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description This instruction reads the tag addressed via INI_ADDR and OFFSET in an F-DB and provides it at output OUT. The address of the tags addressed using INI_ADDR and OFFSET must be within the address range defined by addresses INI_ADDR and END_ADDR. If the F-CPU has gone to STOP mode with diagnostics event ID 75E2, check to determine if this condition is satisfied. The start address of the area in an F-DB from which the tag is to be read is transferred using input INI_ADDR. The associated offset in this area is transferred using input OFFSET. The addresses transferred in input INI_ADDR or END_ADDR must point to a tag of the selected data type in an F-DB. Only tags of the selected data type are permitted between the INI_ADDR and END_ADDR addresses. The INI_ADDR address must be smaller than the END_ADDR address. The INI_ADDR and END_ADDR addresses must be transferred fully-qualified as "DBx".DBWy or in the corresponding symbolic representation. Transfers in other forms are not permitted. Examples of parameter assignment of INI_ADDR, END_ADDR, and OFFSET are contained in WR_FDB: Write value indirectly to an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 544). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 546 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.8 Move operations Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description INI_ADDR Input POINTER Start address of the area in an F-DB END_ADDR Input POINTER End address of the area in an F-DB OFFSET Input INT Offset OUT Output INT, DINT Value to be read from the F-DB You can select the data type of the instruction in the "" drop-down list in the instruction box. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 547 13.9 Conversion operations 13.9 Conversion operations 13.9.1 CONVERT: Convert value (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description The "Convert value" instruction reads the content of parameter IN and converts it according to the data types selected in the instruction box. The converted value is output at the OUT output . Enable input "EN" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at the "EN" enable input). The connection of the "ENO" enable output is only possible and required when converting from the "DINT" to the "INT" data type. Note When converting from "DINT" to the "INT" data type, you need to connect the ENO enable output and thereby programming overflow detection. Note the following: * If the value at the input is outside the INT range, ENO returns 0. * The result of the instruction reacts like the analogous instruction in a standard block. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ENO Output BOOL Enable output IN Input INT, DINT Value to be converted. OUT Output INT, DINT Result of the conversion You can select the data types of the instruction in the "" drop-down lists of the instruction box. The supported conversions are from "INT to DINT" and "DINT to INT". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 548 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.9 Conversion operations Example The following example shows how the "Convert value "DINT to INT"" instruction for S71200/1500 F-CPUs works: The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input EN. The value of the "TagIn_Value" operand is converted to an integer (16-bit) and the result is stored in the ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value" operand. When no overflow occurs during execution of the "Convert value "DINT to INT"" instruction, the ENO enable output has the signal state "1" and the "TagOut" operand is set. You can also store the signal status of the ENO enable output in an (F-)DB, and centrally evaluate whether overflows have occurred for all or one group of instructions with overflow detection. See also s7cotia.xls (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 549 13.9 Conversion operations 13.9.2 BO_W: Convert 16 data elements of data type BOOL to a data element of data type WORD (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction converts the 16 values of data type BOOL at inputs IN0 to IN15 to a value of data type WORD, which is made available at output OUT. The conversion takes place as follows: The i-th bit of the WORD value is set to 0 (or 1), if the value at input INi = 0 (or 1). Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN0 Input BOOL Bit 0 of WORD value IN1 Input BOOL ... Bit 1 of WORD value ... IN15 Input BOOL Bit 15 of WORD value OUT Output WORD WORD value consisting of IN0 to IN15 Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 o -- o 1.2 x -- o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x 2.0 x x1 x2 These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. 1 supported for Firmware version V4.2 or higher 2 supported for Firmware version V2.0 or higher When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 550 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.9 Conversion operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 551 13.9 Conversion operations The following table shows how the instruction works using specific operand values: Parameter Operand IN0 TagValue_0 FALSE Value IN1 TagValue_1 FALSE ... ... IN13 TagValue_13 FALSE IN14 TagValue_14 TRUE IN15 TagValue_15 TRUE OUT "F_DB_1".Result W#16#C000 The values of operands "TagValue_0" to "TagValue_15" are combined into a value of the data type WORD and assigned to operand ""F_DB_1".TagResult". 13.9.3 W_BO: Convert a data element of data type WORD to 16 data elements of data type BOOL (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description This instruction converts the value of data type WORD at input IN to 16 values of data type BOOL, which are provided at outputs OUT0 to OUT15. The conversion takes place as follows: Output OUTi is set to 0 (or 1), if the i-th bit of the WORD value is 0 (or 1). Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input WORD WORD value OUT0 Output BOOL Bit 0 of WORD value OUT1 Output BOOL Bit 1 of WORD value Output BOOL ... OUT15 ... Bit 15 of WORD value SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 552 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.9 Conversion operations Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 o -- o 1.2 x -- o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x 2.0 x x1 x2 These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. 1 supported for Firmware version V4.2 or higher 2 supported for Firmware version V2.0 or higher When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 553 13.9 Conversion operations The following table shows how the instruction works using specific operand values: Parameter Operand Value IN "F_DB_1".TagValue W#16#C000 OUT0 TagOUT_0 FALSE OUT1 TagOUT_1 FALSE ... ... OUT13 TagOUT_13 FALSE OUT14 TagOUT_14 TRUE OUT15 TagOUT_15 TRUE The value of operand ""F_DB_1".TagValue" of data type WORD is converted to the 16 values "TagOUT_0" to "TagOUT_15" of data type BOOL. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 554 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.9 Conversion operations 13.9.4 SCALE: Scale values (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) Description This instruction scales the value at input IN in physical units between the low limit value at input LO_LIM and the high limit value at input HI_LIM. It is assumed that the value at input IN is between 0 and 27648. The scaling result is provided at output OUT. The instruction uses the following equation: OUT = [ IN x (HI_LIM - LO_LIM) ] / 27648 + LO_LIM As long as the value at input IN is greater than 27648, output OUT is linked to HI_LIM and OUT_HI is set to 1. As long as the value at input IN is less than 0, output OUT is linked to LO_LIM and OUT_LO is set to 1. For inverse scaling, you must assign LO_LIM > HI_LIM. With inverse scaling, the output value at output OUT decreases while the input value at input IN increases. Every call of the "Scale values" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. In addition, when the instruction is inserted in the program, the "Call options" dialog is automatically opened, where you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., SCALE_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., SCALE_Instance_1) for the "Scale values" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameter The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input INT Input value to be scaled in physical units HI_LIM Input INT High limit value of value range of OUT LO_LIM Input INT Low limit value of value range of OUT OUT Output INT Result of scaling OUT_HI Output BOOL 1 = Input value > 27648: OUT = HI_LIM OUT_LO Output BOOL 1 = Input value < 0: OUT = LO_LIM SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 555 13.9 Conversion operations Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x x x These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Behavior in the event of overflow or underflow of analog values and fail-safe value output Note If inputs from the PII of an SM 336; AI 6 x 13Bit or SM 336; F-AI 6 x 0/4 ... 20 mA HART are used as input values, note that the F-system detects an overflow or underflow of a channel of this F-SM as an F-I/O fault or channel fault. The fail-safe value 0 is provided in place of 7FFFH (for overflow) or 8000H (for underflow) in the PII for the safety program. If other fail-safe values should be output in this case, you need to evaluate the QBAD signal of the associated F-I/O or QBAD_I_xx signal / value status of the corresponding channel. If the value in the PII of the F-SM is within the overrange or underrange, but is > 27648 or < 0, you can likewise branch to the output of an individual fail-safe value by evaluating outputs OUT_HI and OUT_LO, respectively. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 556 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.9 Conversion operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When operand "TagIn_Value" = 20000, the result for ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value" is 361. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 557 13.10 Program control operations 13.10 Program control operations 13.10.1 JMP: Jump if RLO = 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Jump if RLO = 1" instruction to interrupt the linear execution of the program and resume it in another network. The destination network must be identified by a jump label (Page 562) (LABEL). The description of the jump label is specified in the placeholder above the instruction. The specified jump label must be in the same block in which the instruction is executed. The name you specify can only occur once in the block. If the result of logic operation (RLO) at the input of the instruction is "1" or the input is not connected, the jump to the network identified by the jump label is executed. The jump direction can be towards higher or lower network numbers. If the result of logic operation (RLO) at the input of the instruction is "0", the program continues executing in the next network. Note (S7-1200, S7-1500) If the jump destination (jump label) for an instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" is above the associated instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" (backwards jump), you cannot insert any other instructions for program control (JMP, JMPN, RET, jump label) between them. Exception: You can insert an instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" between them if you also insert the associated jump destination in between as well as below the associated instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" (forward jump). Non-compliance can lead to compilation errors or to the F-CPU going to STOP. Note You are not permitted to insert any SENDDP or SENDS7 instructions between an instruction JMP or JMPN and the associated jump destination (jump label). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 558 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.10 Program control operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1", the "Jump if RLO = 1" instruction is executed. The linear execution of the program is interrupted and continues in Network 3, which is identified by the jump label CAS1. When input "TagIn_3" has signal state "1", output "TagOut_3" is reset. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 559 13.10 Program control operations 13.10.2 JMPN: Jump if RLO = 0 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Jump if RLO = 0" instruction to interrupt the linear execution of the program and resume it in another network, when the result of logic operation at the input of the instruction is "0". The destination network must be identified by a jump label (Page 562) (LABEL). The description of the jump label is specified in the placeholder above the instruction. The specified jump label must be in the same block in which the instruction is executed. The name you specify can only occur once in the block. If the result of logic operation (RLO) at the input of the instruction is "0", the jump to the network identified by the jump label is executed. The jump direction can be towards higher or lower network numbers. If the result of logic operation (RLO) at the input of the instruction is "1", the program continues executing in the next network. Note (S7-1200, S7-1500) If the jump destination (jump label) for an instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" is above the associated instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" (backwards jump), you cannot insert any other instructions for program control (JMP, JMPN, RET, jump label) between them. Exception: You can insert an instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" between them if you also insert the associated jump destination in between as well as below the associated instruction "JMP" or "JMPN" (forward jump). Non-compliance can lead to compilation errors or to the F-CPU going to STOP. Note You are not permitted to insert any SENDDP or SENDS7 instructions between an instruction JMP or JMPN and the associated jump destination (jump label). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 560 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.10 Program control operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "0", the "Jump if RLO = 0" instruction is executed. The linear execution of the program is interrupted and continues in Network 3, which is identified by the jump label CAS1. When input "TagIn_3" has signal state "1", output "TagOut_3" is reset. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 561 13.10 Program control operations 13.10.3 LABEL: Jump label (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use a jump label to specify a destination network, in which the program execution should resume after a jump. The jump label and the instruction in which the jump label is specified must be located in the same block. The name of a jump label can only be assigned once in a block. Only one jump label can be placed in a network. To each jump label can be jumped from several locations. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 562 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.10 Program control operations When operand "TagIn_1" has signal state "1", the "Jump if RLO = 1" instruction is executed. The linear execution of the program is interrupted and continues in Network 3, which is identified by the jump label CAS1. When input "TagIn_3" has signal state "1", output "TagOut_3" is reset. See also JMP: Jump if RLO = 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 558) JMPN: Jump if RLO = 0 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 560) RET: Return (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 564) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 563 13.10 Program control operations 13.10.4 RET: Return (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "Return" instruction to stop the processing of a block. If the result of logic operation (RLO) at the input of the "Return" instruction is "1" or the box input of the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs is not connected in FBD, program execution is terminated in the currently called block and continued in the calling block (for example, in the main safety block) after the call function. If the RLO at the input of the "Return" instruction is "0", the instruction is not executed. Program execution continues in the next network of the called block. Influencing the status of the call function (ENO) is irrelevant, because the enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. Note (S7-300, S7-400) You may not program a RET instruction in the main safety block. Example The following example shows how the instruction works: When the "TagIn" operand delivers signal state "1", the "Return" instruction is executed. Program execution is terminated in the called block and continues in the calling block. See also JMP: Jump if RLO = 1 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 558) JMPN: Jump if RLO = 0 (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 560) LABEL: Jump label (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) (Page 562) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 564 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.10 Program control operations 13.10.5 OPN: Open global data block (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description You can use the "Open global data block" instruction to open a data block. The number of the data block is transferred to the DB register. Subsequent DB commands access the relevant blocks depending on the register contents. Note Note when using the "Open global data block" instruction that the content of the DB register can be changed after calls of F-FB/F-FC and "fully qualified DB accesses", such that there is no guarantee that the last data block you opened with "Open global data block" is still open. You should therefore use the following method for addressing data to avoid errors when accessing data of the DB register: * Use symbolic addressing. * Use only fully qualified DB accesses. If you still want to use the "Open global data block" operation, you must ensure that the DB register is restored by repeating the "Open global data block" instruction following calls of FFB/F-FC and "fully qualified DB accesses." Otherwise, a malfunction could result. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description Input BLOCK_DB Data block that is opened "Fully qualified DB access" The initial access to data of a data block in an F-FB/F-FC must always be a "fully qualified DB access," or it must be preceded by the "Open global data block" instruction. This also applies to the initial access to data of a data block after a jump label. An example of "fully qualified DB access" and "non-fully qualified DB access" is provided in Restrictions in the programming languages FBD/LAD (Page 119). Access to instance DBs You can also access instance DBs of F-FBs with fully qualified access, e.g., for transfer of block parameters. It is not possible to access static local data in single/multi-instances of other F-FBs. Note that accessing instance DBs of F-FBs that are not called in the safety program can cause the F-CPU to go to STOP mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 565 13.10 Program control operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Motor_DB" data block is called in network 1. The number of the data block is transferred to the DB register. The "DBX0.0" operand is queried in network 2. The signal state of the "DBX0.0" operand is assigned to the "Tag_Output" operand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 566 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.11 Word logic operations 13.11 Word logic operations 13.11.1 AND: AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "AND logic operation" instruction to combine the value at input IN1 to the value at input IN2 bit-by-bit by AND logic and query the result at output OUT. When the instruction is executed, bit 0 of the value at input IN1 and bit 0 of the value at input IN2 are ANDed. The result is stored in bit 0 of output OUT. The same logic operation is executed for all other bits of the specified values. The result bit has signal state "1" only when both of the bits in the logic operation also have signal state "1". If one of the two bits of the logic operation has signal state "0", the corresponding result bit is reset. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input WORD First value of logic operation IN2 Input WORD Second value of logic operation OUT Output WORD Result of the instruction SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 567 13.11 Word logic operations Example The following example shows how the instruction works: IN1 "Tag_Value1" = 01010101 01010101 IN2 "Tag_Value2" = 00000000 00001111 OUT "F_DB_1"."Tag_Result" = 00000000 00000101 The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand and the value of the "Tag_Value2" operand are ANDed. The result is mapped bit-by-bit and output in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. 13.11.2 OR: OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "OR logic operation" instruction to connect the value at input IN1 input to the value at input IN2 bit-by-bit by OR logic and query the result at output OR. When the instruction is executed, bit 0 of the value at input IN1 and bit 0 of the value at input IN2 are ORed. The result is stored in bit 0 of output OUT. The same logic operation is executed for all bits of the specified tags. The result bit has signal state "1" when at least one of the two bits in the logic operation has signal state "1". If both of the bits of the logic operation have signal state "0", the corresponding result bit is reset. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 568 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.11 Word logic operations Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input WORD First value of logic operation IN2 Input WORD Second value of logic operation OUT Output WORD Result of the instruction Example The following example shows how the instruction works: IN1 "Tag_Value1" = 01010101 01010101 IN2 "Tag_Value2" = 00000000 00001111 OUT "F_DB_1"."Tag_Result" = 01010101 01011111 The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand and the value of the "Tag_Value2" operand are ORed. The result is mapped bit-by-bit and output in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 569 13.11 Word logic operations 13.11.3 XOR: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description You can use the "EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation" instruction to combine the value at input IN1 and the value at input IN2 bit-by-bit by EXCLUSIVE OR logic and query the result at output OUT. When the instruction is executed, bit 0 of the value at input IN1 input and bit 0 of the value at input IN2 are logically combined by EXCLUSIVE OR. The result is stored in bit 0 of output OUT. The same logic operation is executed for all other bits of the specified value. The result bit has signal state "1" when one of the two bits in the logic operation has signal state "1". If both of the bits of the logic operation have signal state "1" or "0", the corresponding result bit is reset. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN1 Input WORD First value of logic operation IN2 Input WORD Second value of logic operation OUT Output WORD Result of the instruction SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 570 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.12 Shift and rotate Example The following example shows how the instruction works: IN1 "Tag_Value1" = 01010101 01010101 IN2 "Tag_Value2" = 00000000 00001111 OUT "F_DB_1"."Tag_Result" = 01010101 01011010 The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand and the value of the "Tag_Value2" operand are logically combined by EXCLUSIVE OR. The result is mapped bit-by-bit and output in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. 13.12 Shift and rotate 13.12.1 SHR: Shift right (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description Use the "Shift right" instruction to shift the content of the operand at input IN bit-by-bit to the right and query the result at output OUT. Use input N to specify the number of bit positions by which the specified value is to be moved. If the value at input N is "0", the value at input IN is copied to the operand at output OUT. If the value at input N is greater than the number of available bit positions, the operand value at input IN is shifted to the right by the available number of bit positions. The bit locations that are freed up in the left area of the operand during the shift operation are filled with zeros. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 571 13.12 Shift and rotate The following figure shows how the content of an operand of data type WORD is moved by 6 bit positions to the right: Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Note S7-300/400: Only the low-byte is evaluated from input N. S7-1200/1500: If the value at input N < 0, the output OUT is set to 0. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input WORD Value that is shifted N Input INT Number of bit positions by which the value is shifted OUT Output WORD Result of the instruction SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 572 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.12 Shift and rotate Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 o -- o 1.2 x -- o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x 2.0 x x1 x2 These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. 1 supported for Firmware version V4.2 or higher 2 supported for Firmware version V2.0 or higher When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". Example The following example shows how the instruction works: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 573 13.12 Shift and rotate The following table shows how the instruction works using specific operand values: Parameter Operand IN "F_DB_1".TagIn_Value Value 0011 1111 1010 1111 N Tag_Number 3 OUT "F_DB_1".TagOut_Value 0000 0111 1111 0101 The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The content of the operand ""F_DB_1".TagIn_Value" is moved three bit positions to the right. The result is output at output ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value". 13.12.2 SHL: Shift left (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description Use the "Shift left" instruction to shift the content of the operand at input IN bit-by-bit to the left and query the result at output OUT. Use input N to specify the number of bit positions by which the specified value is to be moved. If the value at input N is "0", the value at input IN is copied to the operand at output OUT. If the value at input N is greater than the number of available bit positions, the operand value at input IN is shifted to the left by the available number of bit positions. The bit positions that are freed up in the right area of the operand during the shift operation are filled with zeros. The following figure shows how the content of an operand of data type WORD is moved by 6 bit positions to the left: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 574 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.12 Shift and rotate Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Note S7-300/400: Only the low-byte is evaluated from input N. S7-1200/1500: If the value at input N < 0, the output OUT is set to 0. Parameters The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN Input WORD Value that is shifted N Input INT Number of bit positions by which the value is shifted OUT Output WORD Result of the instruction Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 o -- o 1.2 x -- o 1.3 x o o 1.4 x x x x x1 x2 2.0 These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. o This version is no longer supported. 1 supported for Firmware version V4.2 or higher 2 supported for Firmware version V2.0 or higher When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 575 13.12 Shift and rotate Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The following table shows how the instruction works using specific operand values: Parameter Operand Value IN "F_DB_1".TagIn_Value 0011 1111 1010 1111 N Tag_Number 4 OUT "F_DB_1".TagOut_Value 1111 1010 1111 0000 The instruction is always executed regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN". The content of the operand ""F_DB_1".TagIn_Value" is moved four bit positions to the left. The result is output at output ""F_DB_1".TagOut_Value". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 576 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.13 Operating 13.13 Operating 13.13.1 ACK_OP: Fail-safe acknowledgment (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Description (S7-300, S7-400) This instruction enables fail-safe acknowledgment from an HMI system. It allows, for example, reintegration of F-I/O to be controlled from the HMI system. Acknowledgment takes place in two steps: Input/output parameter IN changes to a value of 6 for exactly one cycle. Input/output parameter IN changes to a value of 9 within a minute for exactly one cycle Once the in/out parameter IN has changed to a value of 6, the instruction evaluates whether this parameter has changed to a value of 9 after 1 second, at the earliest, or one minute, at the latest. Output OUT (output for acknowledgment) is then set to 1 for one cycle. If an invalid value is input or if in/out parameter IN has not changed to the value 9 within one minute or the change occurred before one second has elapsed, then in/out parameter IN is reset to 0, and both steps listed above must be repeated. During the time in which in/out parameter IN must change from 6 to the value 9, output Q is set to 1. Otherwise, Q has a value of 0. Every call of the "Fail-safe acknowledgment" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., ACK_OP_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., ACK_OP_Instance_1) for the "Fail-safe acknowledgment" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Note A separate data area must be used for each call of ACK_OP. Each call can be processed only once in an F-runtime group cycle. The F-CPU can go to STOP if this is not observed. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 577 13.13 Operating Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING The two acknowledgment steps must not be triggered by one single operation, for example by automatically storing them along with the time conditions in a program and using a function key to trigger them. Having two separate acknowledgment steps also prevents erroneous triggering of an acknowledgment by your non-fail-safe HMI system. (S013) WARNING If you have HMI systems and F-CPUs that are interconnected and use the ACK_OP instruction for fail-safe acknowledgment, you need to ensure that the intended F-CPU will be addressed before you perform the two acknowledgment steps. * To do this, store a network-wide* unique name for the F-CPU in a DB of your standard user program in each F-CPU. * In your HMI system, set up a field from which you can read out the F-CPU name from the DB online before executing the two acknowledgment steps. * Optional: in your HMI system, set up a field to permanently store the F-CPU name. Then, you can determine whether the intended F-CPU is being addressed by simply comparing the FCPU name read out online with the permanently stored name.(S014) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. Note You can read out output Q by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, evaluate it in your standard user program. You can provide the in/out parameter IN with a separate memory word or DBW of a DB of the standard user program supply for each instance of the ACK_OP instruction. Note The configuration of your operator control and monitoring system does not have any effect on the collective F-signature. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 578 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.13 Operating WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) Description (S7-1200, S7-1500) This instruction enables fail-safe acknowledgment from an HMI system. It allows, for example, reintegration of F-I/O to be controlled from the HMI system. Acknowledgment takes place in two steps: Input/output parameter IN changes to a value of 6 for exactly one cycle. Input/output parameter IN changes to the value at the ACK_ID input within a minute for exactly one cycle Once the in/out parameter IN has changed to a value of 6, the instruction evaluates whether this parameter has changed to a value at the ACK_ID input after 1 second, at the earliest, or one minute, at the latest. Output OUT (output for acknowledgment) is then set to 1 for one cycle. If an invalid value is input or if in/out parameter IN has not changed to the value at the ACK_ID input within one minute or the change occurred before one second has elapsed, then in/out parameter IN is reset to 0, and both steps listed above must be repeated. During the time in which in/out parameter IN must change from 6 to the value at the ACK_ID input, output Q is set to 1. Otherwise, Q has a value of 0. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 579 13.13 Operating Every call of the "Fail-safe acknowledgment" instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., ACK_OP_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., ACK_OP_Instance_1) for the "Fail-safe acknowledgment" instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Note A separate data area must be used for each call of ACK_OP. Each call can be processed only once in an F-runtime group cycle. The F-CPU can go to STOP if this is not observed. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). WARNING The two acknowledgment steps must not be triggered by one single operation, for example by automatically storing them along with the time conditions in a program and using a function key to trigger them. Having two separate acknowledgment steps also prevents erroneous triggering of an acknowledgment by your non-fail-safe HMI system. (S013) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 580 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.13 Operating WARNING If you have HMI systems and F-CPUs that are interconnected and use the ACK_OP instruction for fail-safe acknowledgment, you need to ensure that the intended F-CPU will be addressed before you perform the two acknowledgment steps. Alternative 1: * The value for each identifier of the acknowledgment (ACK_ID input; data type: INT) can be freely selected in the range from 9 to 30000, but must be unique network-wide* for all instances of the ACK_OP instruction. You must supply the ACK_ID input with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct read or write access in the associated instance DB is not permitted in the safety program! Alternative 2: * To do this, store a network-wide* unique name for the F-CPU in a DB of your standard user program in each F-CPU. * In your HMI system, set up a field from which you can read out the F-CPU name from the DB online before executing the two acknowledgment steps. * Optional: in your HMI system, set up a field to permanently store the F-CPU name. Then, you can determine whether the intended F-CPU is being addressed by simply comparing the F-CPU name read out online with the permanently stored designation. (S047) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. Note You can read out output Q by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, evaluate it in your standard user program. You need to provide the in/out parameter IN with a separate memory word or DBW of a DB of the standard user program for each instance of the ACK_OP instruction. Note The supply of the IN input/output of the ACK_OP instruction as well as the configuration of your operator control and monitoring system do not have any effect on the F-collective signature, the F-SW collective signature or the signature of the block that calls the ACK_OP instruction. Changes to the supply of the IN input/output or to the configuration of your operator control and monitoring system therefore do not result in a changed F-collective signature/F-SW collective signature/signature of the calling block. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 581 13.13 Operating WARNING When using an instruction with time processing, take the following timing imprecision sources into account when determining your response times: * Known timing imprecision (based on standard systems) resulting from cyclic processing * Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction (see figure in section "Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction") * Tolerance of internal time monitoring in the F-CPU - For time values up to 200 ms, a maximum of 4 ms - For time values greater than or equal to 200 ms, a maximum of 2% of the (assigned) time value You must choose the interval between two call times of an instruction with time processing in such a way that the required response times are achieved, taking into account the possible timing imprecision. (S034) Parameters (S7-300, S7-400) The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description IN InOut INT Input variable from HMI system OUT Output BOOL Output for acknowledgment Q Output BOOL Time status Parameters (S7-1200, S7-1500) The following table shows the parameters of the instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ACK_ID Input INT Identifier of the acknowledgment (9 to 30000) IN InOut INT Input variable from HMI system OUT Output BOOL Output for acknowledgment Q Output BOOL Time status SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 582 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.13 Operating Instruction versions A number of versions are available for this instruction: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 x -- o 1.2 x o o 1.3 x x x These versions are identical in function to version V1.0 for S7-300/400 F-CPUs. The input ACK_ID must also be taken into consideration for S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. o This version is no longer supported. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 583 13.13 Operating Timing imprecision resulting from the update time of the time base used in the instruction: For the first call in cycle n+1, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is earlier than that in cycle n by the amount of 1, e.g. because parts of the safety program of the F-runtime group before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+1 are skipped. For the time update, the instruction takes account of time TBase_1 instead of the time T1 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. The instruction is called a second time in cycle n+1. This does not involve another time update (by 2). For the call in cycle n+2, the call time of the instruction relative to the start of the F-runtime group is later than that in cycle n by the amount of 3, e.g. because the F-runtime group was interrupted by a higher priority interrupt before the call time of the instruction in cycle n+2. The instruction took into account time TBase_1 + TBase_2 instead of the time T3 that has actually elapsed in cycle n since the call. This would also be the case if no call occurred in cycle n+1. Example An example how the instruction is used is available under Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller (Page 187). See also Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device (Page 192) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 584 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.14 Additional instructions 13.14 Additional instructions 13.14.1 LAD 13.14.1.1 ---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description You can use the "Get status bit OV" instruction to detect whether a number range overflow occurred in the last arithmetic instruction processed. The "Get status bit OV" instruction functions like a normally open contact. If the query is fulfilled, the instruction has signal state "1". If the query is not fulfilled, the instruction has signal state "0". The "Get status bit OV" evaluation must be inserted in the network that follows the instruction that influences the OV. This network must not contain any jump labels. Note The execution time of the OV-affecting instruction is extended when the "Get status bit OV " instruction is used (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Add" instruction is always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input EN). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 585 13.14 Additional instructions The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand is added to value of the Tag_Value2 operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. If an overflow occurs during execution of the "Add" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. 13.14.1.2 ---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7400) Description You can use the "Get negated status bit OV" instruction to detect whether a number range overflow occurred in the last arithmetic instruction processed. This instruction is only available in LAD. The "Get negated status bit OV" instruction functions like a normally closed contact. If the query is satisfied, the instruction has signal state "0". If the query is not satisfied, the instruction has signal state "1". The "Get negated status bit OV" evaluation must be inserted in the network following the instruction that influences the OV. This network must not contain any jump labels. Note The execution time of the OV-affecting instruction is extended when the "Get negated status bit OV " instruction is used (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The "Add" instruction is always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input EN). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 586 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.14 Additional instructions The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand is added to value of the Tag_Value2 operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. If an overflow does not occur during execution of the "Add" instruction, the status bit OV is reset to "0". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. 13.14.2 FBD 13.14.2.1 OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Description You can use the "Get status bit OV" instruction to detect whether a number range overflow occurred in the last arithmetic instruction processed. The "Get status bit OV" evaluation must be inserted in the network that follows the instruction that influences the OV. This network must not contain any jump labels. If the query is fulfilled, the instruction has signal state "1". If the query is not fulfilled, the instruction has signal state "0". You can program a query of status bit OV for "0" with the "Invert RLO" instruction. Note The execution time of the OV-affecting instruction is extended when the "Get status bit OV " instruction is used (see also Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100)). Example The following example shows how the instruction works: The value of the "Tag_Value1" operand is added to value of the Tag_Value2 operand. The result of the addition is stored in the ""F_DB_1".Tag_Result" operand. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 587 13.15 Communication If an overflow occurs during execution of the "Add" instruction, the status bit OV is set to "1". In network 2, following the query of the status bit OV, the "Set output" (S) instruction is executed and the "TagOut" operand is set. 13.15 Communication 13.15.1 PROFIBUS/PROFINET 13.15.1.1 SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V15.1) Introduction You use the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for fail-safe sending and receiving of data using: Safety-related master-master communication Safety-related master-master communication for S7 Distributed Safety Safety-related master-I-slave communication Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication for S7 Distributed Safety Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 588 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication Description The SENDDP instruction sends 16 data elements of data type BOOL and 2 data elements of data type INT or one data element of the data type DINT (S7-1200, S7-1500) in a fail-safe manner to another F-CPU via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO. The data can be received there by the related RCVDP instruction. Every call of this instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g. RCVDP_DB_1) for these instructions. Once it is created, the new data block can be found in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder in the project tree under "Program blocks > System blocks". For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). With the SENDDP instruction, the data to be sent (for example, outputs of other Fblocks/instructions) are available at input SD_BO_xx or SD_I_xx or SD_DI_00 as alternative. With the RCVDP instruction, the data received are available at outputs RD_BO_xx and RD_I_xx or RD_DI_00 as alternative for additional processing by other F-blocks/instructions. (S7-1200, S7-1500) At the DINTMODE input of the SENDDP instruction you specify if the data at the inputs SD_I_00 and SD_I_01 or the data at the input SD_DI_00 is sent. The operating mode of the F-CPU with the SENDDP instruction is provided at output SENDMODE. If the F-CPU with the SENDDP instruction is in disabled safety mode, output SENDMODE = 1. Communication between F-CPUs takes place in the background by means of a special safety protocol. You must define the communication relationship between a SENDDP instruction in one F-CPU and a RCVDP instruction in the other F-CPU by specifying an Fcommunication ID at the DP_DP_ID inputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions. Associated SENDDP and RCVDP instructions are assigned the same value for DP_DP_ID. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input DP_DP_ID; data type: INT) can be freely selected**; however, it must be unique for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide at all times. The uniqueness must be checked in the safety summary during acceptance of the safety program. You can find additional information in Correctness and completeness of the communication configuration (Page 374). You must supply constant values*** to the inputs DP_DP_ID and LADDR when calling the instruction. Direct write accesses in the associated instance DB to DP_DP_ID and LADDR are not permitted in the safety program! (S016) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). ** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, no connection is established at the DP_DP_ID input for a F-communication ID "0". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 589 13.15 Communication *** S7-1200/1500: As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, the DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with variable values from a global F-DB. In this case as well you have to check during the acceptance of the safety program that the uniqueness is ensured at every moment, by checking the algorithm for the creation of the variable value accordingly. If you cannot ensure a unique F-communication ID during startup of the safety program, because it is only specified after startup of the safety program, you must make sure that the value at the DP_DP_ID input is "0" during this phase. Note Within a safety program, you must assign a different start address (S7-300/400) or HW identifier (S7-1200/1500) for every call of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions at input LADDR. A separate instance DB must be used for each call of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions. You must not declare and call these instructions as multi-instances. (S7-300/400) The inputs of the RCVDP and RCVS7 instructions may not have preceding logic operations (for example "AND logic operation"). The inputs of the RCVDP instruction cannot be initialized using fully qualified DB accesses with outputs of a RCVDP or RCVS7 instruction called in an upstream network. (S7-1200/1500) The RD_D_00 output must not be evaluated for DINTMODE = 0; the RD_I_xx outputs of the RCVDP instruction must not be evaluated for DINTMODE = 1. (S7-1200/1500) The outputs of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions must not be supplied with tags from the standard user program. Exception: RET_DPRD, RET_DPWR and DIAG outputs. Fully qualified access to DP_DP_ID and LADDR is not possible in the safety program. You cannot use an actual parameter for an output of an RCVDP instruction, if it is already being used for an input of the same or another RCVDP or RCVS7 instruction. The F-CPU can go to STOP if this is not observed. The cause of the diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. Note You are not permitted to insert any SENDDP/RCVDP instructions between a JMP or JMPN instruction and the associated jump destination (jump label). You cannot insert a RET instruction prior to a SENDDP instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 590 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication SENDDP parameter The following table shows the parameters of the SENDDP instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type SD_BO_00 Input BOOL ... Description Send data BOOL 00 ... SD_BO_15 Input BOOL Send data BOOL 15 SD_I_00 Input INT Send data INT 00 SD_I_01 Input INT Send data INT 01 SD_DI_00 Input DINT (S7-1200, S7-1500) (hidden) Send data DINT 00 DINTMODE Input DINT (S7-1200, S7-1500) (hidden) 0=SD_I_00 u. SD_I_01 are sent 1=SD_DI_00 is sent DP_DP_ID Input INT F-communication ID between SENDDP and RCVDP TIMEOUT Input TIME Monitoring time in ms for safety-related communication (see also Monitoring and response times (Page 607)) LADDR Input INT (S7-300, S7-400) The start address (S7-300, S7-400) or HW identifier (S7-1200, S7-1500) of the address area/transfer area: HW_SUBMOD * ULE (S7-1200, S7-1500) * ERROR Output BOOL Of DP/DP coupler for safety-related master-master communication For safety-related master-I-slave communication * For safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication * Of PN/PN coupler for safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication * For safety-related IO controller-I-device communication * For safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication 1=Communication error SUBS_ON Output BOOL 1=RCVDP outputs fail-safe values RET_DPRD Output WORD Non-fail-safe error code RET_VAL of the DPRD_DAT instruction (for a description of error codes, refer to the help for the DPRD_DAT instruction ("Extended instructions > Distributed I/O > Other")). RET_DPWR Output WORD Non-fail-safe error code RET_VAL of the DPWR_DAT instruction (for a description of error codes, refer to the help for the DPWR_DAT instruction ("Extended instructions > Distributed I/O > Other")). DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 591 13.15 Communication RCVDP parameter: The following table shows the parameters of the RCVDP instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description ACK_REI Input BOOL 1=Acknowledgment for reintegration of send data following communication error SUBBO_00 Input BOOL Fail-safe value for receive data BOOL 00 SUBBO_15 Input BOOL Fail-safe value for receive data BOOL 15 SUBI_00 Input INT Fail-safe value for receive data INT 00 SUBI_01 Input INT Fail-safe value for receive data INT 01 SUBDI_00 Input DINT (S7-1200, S7-1500) ... ... (hidden) Fail-safe value for receive data DINT 00 DP_DP_ID Input INT F-communication ID between SENDDP and RCVDP TIMEOUT Input TIME Monitoring time in ms for safety-related communication (see also Monitoring and response times (Page 607)) LADDR Input INT (S7-300, S7-400) The start address (S7-300, S7-400) or HW identifier (S7-1200, S7-1500) of the address area/transfer area: HW_SUBMOD * ULE (S7-1200, S7-1500) * Of DP/DP coupler for safety-related master-master communication For safety-related master-I-slave communication * For safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication * Of PN/PN coupler for safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication * For safety-related IO controller-I-device communication * For safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication ERROR Output BOOL 1=Communication error SUBS_ON Output BOOL 1=Fail-safe values are output ACK_REQ Output BOOL 1=Acknowledgment for reintegration of send data required SENDMODE Output BOOL 1=F-CPU with SENDDP instruction in disabled safety mode RD_BO_00 Output BOOL Receive data BOOL 00 ... ... RD_BO_15 Output BOOL Receive data BOOL 15 RD_I_00 Output INT Receive data INT 00 RD_I_01 Output INT Receive data INT 01 RD_DI_00 Output DINT (S7-1200, S7-1500) (hidden) Receive data DINT 00 RET_DPRD Output WORD Non-fail-safe error code RET_VAL of the DPRD_DAT instruction (for a description of error codes, refer to the help for the DPRD_DAT instruction ("Extended instructions > Distributed I/O > Other")). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 592 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication Parameter Declaration Data type Description RET_DPWR Output WORD Non-fail-safe error code RET_VAL of the DPWR_DAT instruction (for a description of error codes, refer to the help for the DPWR_DAT instruction ("Extended instructions > Distributed I/O > Other")). DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information Instruction versions A number of versions are available for these instructions: Version S7-300/400 S7-1200 S7-1500 Function 1.0 x -- -- When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.0 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.1 o -- o These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. 1.2 x -- o 1.4 x -- x 1.3 x -- o S7-300/400: These versions have identical functions to version V1.0. 1.5 x x x 2.0 x x1 x2 S7-1200/1500: Instead of 2 data of data type INT, one data of data type DINT can be sent/received as alternative. Otherwise identical function as version V1.0. 3.0 x x1 x2 S7-300/400: This version has identical functions to version V2.0. S7-1200/1500: * The DP_DP_ID input can also be supplied with tags of a global FDB. In case of DP_DP_ID = 0 no connection is established. * Supports the data status byte of the PN/PN coupler as of V4.0 Supports the simulation of the communication in S7-PLCISM operation Otherwise functionally identical to version V2.0 * o This version is no longer supported. 1 supported for Firmware version V4.2 or higher 2 supported for Firmware version V2.0 or higher When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety, the latest available version for the FCPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 593 13.15 Communication Placement You need to insert the RCVDP instruction either at the start of the main safety block or (with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs) in an F-FB/F-FC called directly at the start of the main safety block. No other instructions can be located before in the main safety block and no other instructions can be located before or afterwards in the F-FB/F-FC. You need to insert the SENDDP instruction either at the end of the main safety block or (with S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs) in an F-FB/F-FC called directly at the end of the main safety block. No other instructions can be located afterwards in the main safety block and no other instructions can be located before or afterwards in the F-FB/F-FC. Startup characteristics After the sending and receiving F-systems are started up, communication must be established between the connection partners for the fist time (SENDDP and RCVDP instructions). During this time, the receiver (RCVDP instruction) outputs the fail-safe values present at its inputs SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00. The SENDDP and RCVDP instructions signal this with 1 at output SUBS_ON. The SENDMODE output has default setting "0" and is not updated as long as output SUBS_ON = 1. As of version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions, communication is only established when DP_DP_ID <> 0. Behavior in the event of communication errors If a communication error occurs, for example, due to a signature error (CRC) or when monitoring time TIMEOUT expires or for F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 as of V3.0 due to a change of the DP_DP_ID to 0 after establishment of communication, the outputs ERROR and SUBS_ON = 1 are set. The receiver (RCVDP instruction) then outputs the fail-safe values assigned at its inputs SUBBO_xx and SUBI_xx or alternatively SUBDI_00 inputs. Output SENDMODE is not updated while output SUBS_ON = 1. The send data of the SENDDP instruction present at inputs SD_BO_xx and SD_I_xx, SD_DI_00 as alternative, are only output again when communication errors are no longer detected (ACK_REQ = 1) and you acknowledge (Page 187) the RCVDP instruction with a positive edge at input ACK_REI. Communication errors also occur if the values of the DP_DP_IDs between associated SENDDP and RCVDP are temporarily different on a change of the values of variable DP_DP_IDs after communication establishment. WARNING For the user acknowledgment, you must interconnect input ACK_REI with a signal generated by the operator input. An interconnection with an automatically generated signal is not permitted.* (S040) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 594 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication * If variable F-communication IDs are used, the communication partner of the SENDDP or RCVDP instructions can be changed during running operation. The resultant communication errors may only be acknowledged with an automatically generated signal at the ACK_REI input under the following conditions: The F-program reliably forms a signal "Communication partner change is in progress" with the RCVDP instruction on the basis of the process state. The signal "Communication partner change is in progress" is only formed if there is no communication error. While the signal "Communication partner change is in progress" is active, no evaluation of the received process values is carried out at the RCVDP instruction. The automatic acknowledgement is only carried out if the "Communication partner change is in progress" signal is available. From a safety standpoint automatic reintegration is permitted for the relevant process. Note that output ERROR (1=communication error) for a communication error will not be set unless communication between the connection partners (SENDDP and RCVDP instructions) has been previously established. If communication cannot be established after startup of the sending and receiving F-Systems, check the configuration of the safety-related CPU-CPU communication, the parameter assignment of the SENDDP and the RCVDP instructions, and the bus connection. You also obtain information on possible error causes by evaluating outputs DIAG, RET_DPRD and RETDP_WR. In general, always evaluate RET_DPRD and RETDP_WR, since it is possible that only one of the two outputs will contain error information. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 595 13.15 Communication Timing diagrams SENDDP/RCVDP Output DIAG In addition, non-fail-safe information about the type of communication errors that occurred is provided at output DIAG of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits are saved until you acknowledge the errors at input ACK_REI of the RCVDP instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 596 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication Structure of DIAG of the SENDDP/RCVDP instruction Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Reserved -- -- Bit 1 Reserved -- -- Bit 2 Reserved -- -- Bit 3 Invalid DP_DP_ID The DP_DP_ID is 0. Check the DP_DP_ID of SENDDP or RCVDP. Bit 4 Timeout of SENDDP/RCVDP detected The standard program overwrites transfer areas of SENDDP and RCVDP. Check the standard program for writing accesses into the transfer areas of SENDDP and RCVDP. Please also take indirect accesses into account. DP_DP_ID of SENDDP and RCVDP Check the DP_DP_ID of SENDDP and different. RCVDP. For variable F-communication IDs the values are changed at the DP_DP_ID input. When the DP_DP_ID of SENDDP and RCVD is consistent again, perform an acknowledgment at the ACK_REI input. Interference in bus connection to partner F-CPU. Check the bus connection and ensure that there are no external sources of interference. Monitoring time setting for F-CPU and partner F-CPU is too low. Check the parameterized monitoring time TIMEOUT at SENDDP and RCVDP of both CPUs. Set a higher value if necessary. Recompile the safety program. Configuration of the DP/DP coupler or PN/PN coupler is invalid. Check the configuration of the DP/DP coupler or of the PN/PN coupler. Data validity indicator "DIA" of the DP/DP coupler is "ON". Set the data validity indicator "DIA" at the DIL switch of the DP/DP coupler to "OFF". Parameter "Data validity indicator DIA" of the PN/PN coupler is activated. Deactivate the "Data validity display DIA" parameter in the properties for the PN/PN coupler. Parameter "Activate data status" of the PN/PN coupler (as of V4.0) is activated. Deactivate the "Activate data status" parameter in the properties for the PN/PN coupler (as of V4.0) or S7-1200/1500: Use Version V3.0 of the SENDDP and RCVDP instructions. Internal fault of DP/DP coupler or PN/PN coupler Replace the DP/DP coupler or PN/PN coupler CP in STOP mode, or internal fault in CP Switch the CP to RUN. Check the diagnostics buffer of the CP. If necessary, replace the CP. F-CPU/partner F-CPU in STOP mode, or internal fault in FCPU/partner F-CPU Bit 5 Sequence number error of See description for bit 4 SENDDP/RCVDP detected Switch the F-CPUs to RUN. Check the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPUs. If necessary, replace the F-CPUs. See description for bit 4 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 597 13.15 Communication Bit no. Assignment Possible error causes Remedies Bit 6 CRC-error of SENDDP/RCVDP detected See description for bit 4 See description for bit 4 Reserved -- Bit 7 DP_DP_ID of SENDDP and RCVDP Check DP_DP_ID of SENDDP and RCVDP different -- See also Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication) (Page 256) Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication) (Page 257) Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 201) Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication (Page 204) Safety-related master-master communication (Page 213) Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication (Page 223) Safety-related master-I-slave communication (Page 229) Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication (Page 247) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 598 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication 13.15.2 S7 communication 13.15.2.1 SENDS7 and RCVS7: Communication via S7 connections (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1) (S7-300, S7-400) Introduction You use the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions for fail-safe sending and receiving of data using S7 connections. Note In STEP 7 Safety Advanced, S7 connections are generally permitted over Industrial Ethernet only. Safety-related communication via S7 connections is possible from and to F-CPUs with PROFINET interface or S7-400 F-CPUs with PROFINET-capable CPs. See also Safetyrelated communication via S7 connections (Page 248). Description The SENDS7 instruction sends the send data contained in an F-communication DB to the F-communication DB of the associated RCVS7 instruction of another F-CPU in a fail-safe manner using an S7 connection. Every call of this instruction must be assigned a data area in which the instruction data are stored. The "Call options" dialog is automatically opened when the instruction is inserted in the program for this reason. There you can create a data block (single instance) (e.g., SENDS7_DB_1) or a multi-instance (e.g., SENDS7_Instance_1) for this instruction. Once it is created, you can find the new data block in the project tree in the "STEP 7 Safety" folder under "Program blocks > System blocks" or the multi-instance as a local tag in the "Static" section of the block interface. For more information, refer to the help on STEP 7. Enable input "EN" and enable output "ENO" cannot be connected. The instruction is therefore always executed (regardless of the signal state at enable input "EN"). Information on the F-communication DB is contained in "Programming safety-related communication via S7 connections (Page 251)". An F-communication DB is an F-DB for safety-related CPU-CPU communication with special properties. You must specify the numbers of the F-communication DBs at inputs SEND_DB and RCV_DB of instructions SENDS7 and RCVS7. The operating mode of the F-CPU with the SENDS7 instruction is provided at output SENDMODE of the RCVS7 instruction. If the F-CPU with the SENDS7 instruction is in disabled safety mode, then output SENDMODE = 1. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 599 13.15 Communication To reduce the bus load, you can temporarily shut down communication between the F-CPUs at input EN_SEND of the SENDS7 instruction. To do so, supply input EN_SEND with "0" (default = "1"). In this case, send data are no longer sent to the F-communication DB of the associated RCVS7 instruction, and the receiver provides fail-safe values for this period of time (initial values in its F-communication DB). If communication was already established between the partners, a communication error is detected. You must specify the local ID - from the perspective of the F-CPU - of the S7 connection (from the connection table in the network view) at input ID of the SENDS7 instruction (see also Configuring (Page 43)). Communication between F-CPUs takes place in the background by means of a special safety protocol. You must define a communication relationship between an SENDS7 instruction in one F-CPU and a communication relationship between an RCVS7 instruction and the other F-CPU by assigning an odd number at input R_ID (of the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions). Associated SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions receive the same value for R_ID. WARNING The value for the respective F-communication ID (input R_ID; data type: DWORD) can be freely selected; however, it must be odd for all safety-related communication connections network-wide* and CPU-wide. The value R_ID + 1 is internally assigned and must not be used. You must supply inputs ID and R_ID with constant values when calling the instruction. Direct read or write access to the associated instance DB is not permitted in the safety program. (S020) * A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/3 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). Note A separate instance DB must be used for each call of the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions within a safety program. You must not declare and call these instructions as multi-instances. The inputs of the RCVS7 instruction cannot be initialized with outputs (using fully qualified DB accesses) of a RCVS7 or RCVDP instruction called in an upstream network. You cannot use an actual parameter for an output of an RCVS7 instruction, if it is already being used for an input of the same or another RCVS7 or RCVDP instruction. The F-CPU can go to STOP if this is not observed. A diagnostics event is entered in the diagnostics buffer of the F-CPU. Note You must not program any SENDS7/RCVS7 instruction between a JMP or JMPN instruction and the associated destination network of the JMP or JMPN instruction. You cannot program a RET instruction prior to a SENDS7 instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 600 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication SENDS7 parameter The following table shows the parameters of the SENDS7 instruction: Parameter Declaration Data type Description SEND_DB Input BLOCK_DB Number of F-communication DB TIMEOUT Input TIME Monitoring time in ms for safety-related communication (see also Monitoring and response times (Page 607)) EN_SEND Input BOOL 1= Send enable ID Input WORD Local ID of the S7 connection R_ID Input DWORD Network-wide unique value for a F-communication ID between a SENDS7 instruction and a RCVS7 instruction ERROR Output BOOL 1=Communication error SUBS_ON Output BOOL 1=Receiving block outputs fail-safe values STAT_RCV Output WORD Non-fail-safe status parameter STATUS of the URCV instruction (You can find a description of error codes in the help for the URCV instruction ("Communication > S7 Communication")) STAT_SND Output WORD Non-fail-safe status parameter STATUS of the USEND instruction (You can find a description of error codes in the help for the USEND instruction ("Communication > S7 Communication")) DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 601 13.15 Communication RCVS7 parameter The following table shows the parameters of the RCVS7 instruction. Parameter Declaration Data type Description ACK_REI Input BOOL Acknowledgment for reintegration of send data after communication error RCV_DB Input BLOCK_DB Number of F-communication DB TIMEOUT Input TIME Monitoring time in ms for safety-related communication (see also Monitoring and response times (Page 607)) ID Input WORD Local ID of the S7 connection R_ID Input DWORD Network-wide unique value for a F-communication ID between a SENDS7 instruction and a RCVS7 instruction ERROR Output BOOL 1=Communication error SUBS_ON Output BOOL 1=Fail-safe values are output ACK_REQ Output BOOL 1=Acknowledgment for reintegration of send data required SENDMODE Output BOOL 1=F-CPU with the SENDS7 instruction in disabled safety mode STAT_RCV Output WORD Non-fail-safe status parameter STATUS of the URCV instruction (You can find a description of error codes in the help for the URCV instruction ("Communication > S7 Communication")) STAT_SND Output WORD Non-fail-safe status parameter STATUS of the USEND instruction (You can find a description of error codes in the help for the USEND instruction ("Communication > S7 Communication")) DIAG Output BYTE Non-fail safe service information Instruction versions A number of versions are available for these instructions: Version S7-300/400 S7-1500 1.0 x -- 1.1 x -- Function This version has identical functions to version V1.0. It also supports later versions of internally called instructions. When projects that were created with S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 are migrated, version 1.1 of the instruction is used automatically. If you want to compile a migrated safety program with STEP 7 Safety Advanced for the first time, we recommend that you first update to the latest available version of the instruction. 1.2 x -- This version has identical functions to version V1.0/1.1. It also supports later versions of internally called instructions. When a new F-CPU is created with STEP 7 Safety Advanced, the latest available version for the F-CPU created is automatically preset. For more information on the use of instruction versions, refer to the help on STEP 7 under "Using instruction versions". SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 602 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication Placement You must insert the RCVS7 instruction at the start of the main safety block. No other instructions may be located before it in the main safety block. You must insert the the SENDS7 instruction at the end of the main safety block. No other instructions may be located after it in the main safety block. Startup characteristics After the sending and receiving F-systems are started up, communication must be established between the connection partners for the fist time (SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions). The receiver (RCVS7 instruction) provides fail-safe values for this time period (initial values in its F-communication DB). The SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions signal this with 1 at output SUBS_ON. The SENDMODE output (RCVS7 instruction) has default setting "0" and is not updated as long as output SUBS_ON = 1. Behavior in the event of communication errors If a communication error occurs, for example, due to a signature error (CRC) or when monitoring time TIMEOUT expires, outputs ERROR and SUBS_ON = 1 are set. The receiver (RCVS7 instruction) then provides fail-safe values (initial values in its F-communication DB). Output SENDMODE is not updated while output SUBS_ON = 1. The send data present in the F-communication DB (SENDS7 instruction) are not output before the communication error is no longer detected (ACK_REQ = 1) and you acknowledge (Page 187) with a positive edge at input ACK_REI of the RCVS7 instruction. WARNING For the user acknowledgment, you must interconnect input ACK_REI with a signal generated by the operator input. An interconnection with an automatically generated signal is not permitted. (S040) Note that output ERROR (1=communication error) will be set for the first time on a communication error if communication has already been established between the connection partners (SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions). If communication cannot be established after startup of the sending and receiving F-Systems, check the configuration of the safety-related CPU-CPU communication, the parameter assignment of the SENDS7 and the RCVS7 instructions, and the bus connection. You can also receive information on possible error causes by evaluating the STAT_RCV and STAT_SND outputs. In general, always evaluate STAT_RCV and STAT_SND, since it is possible that only one of the two outputs will contain error information. If one of the DIAG bits is set at output DIAG, also check whether the length and structure of the associated F-communication DB on both the sending and receiving ends match. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 603 13.15 Communication Timing diagrams SENDS7 and RCVS7 Output DIAG Non-fail-safe information on the type of communication errors that have occurred is made available at output DIAG for service purposes. You can read out this information by means of operator control and monitoring systems or, if applicable, you can evaluate it in your standard user program. DIAG bits are saved until you acknowledge them at input ACK_REI of the associated RCVS7 instruction. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 604 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 13.15 Communication Structure of DIAG Bit no. Assignment of SENDS7 and RCVS7 Possible error causes Remedies Bit 0 Reserved -- -- Bit 1 Reserved -- -- Bit 2 Reserved -- -- Bit 3 Reserved -- -- Bit 4 Timeout detected by SENDS7 and RCVS7 Fault in bus connection to partner F-CPU Check bus connection and ensure that no external fault sources are present. Monitoring time setting for F-CPU and partner F-CPU is too low Check assigned monitoring time TIMEOUT for SENDS7 and RCVS7 of both F-CPUs. If possible, set a higher value. Recompile safety program CPs in STOP mode, or internal fault * in CPs * F-CPU/partner F-CPU in STOP mode, or internal fault in FCPU/partner F-CPU Switch CPs to RUN mode Check diagnostic buffer of CPs * Replace CPs, if necessary * Switch F-CPUs to RUN mode * Check diagnostic buffer of F-CPUs * Replace F-CPUs, if necessary Communication was shut down with Enable communication again at the EN_SEND = 0. associated SENDS7 with EN_SEND = 1 S7 connection has changed, the IP address of the CP has changed, for example Recompile the safety programs and download them to the F-CPUs Bit 5 Sequence number error detected by SENDS7 and RCVS7 See description for bit 4 See description for bit 4 Bit 6 CRC-error detected by SENDS7 and RCVS7 See description for bit 4 See description for bit 4 Bit 7 RCVS7: Configuration of the safety-related CPU-CPU communication is incorrect, parameter assignment of the SENDS7 and RCVS7 instructions is incorrect Check configuration of the safetyrelated CPU-CPU communication, the parameter assignment of the SENDS7 and the RCVS7 instructions is incorrect See also description for Bit 4 See also description for Bit 4 -- -- Communication cannot be established SENDS7: Reserved SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 605 Monitoring and response times A Introduction In the following, you will learn: Which F-specific monitoring times you must configure Which rules must be followed when specifying monitoring times Where you enter the F-specific monitoring times Which rules must be followed with regard to the maximum response time of a safety function Support for calculations An Excel file is available on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) to assist you in calculating approximately the runtimes of the F-runtime groups, the minimum F-specific monitoring times, and the maximum response times of your F-System. Additional information The monitoring and response times for the standard part are calculated in SIMATIC Safety in exactly the same way as for standard S7-300, S7-400, S7-1200 and S7-1500 automation systems and are not addressed here. For a description of this calculation, refer to the hardware manuals for the CPUs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 607 Monitoring and response times A.1 Configuring monitoring times A.1 Configuring monitoring times Monitoring times to be configured You must configure the following monitoring times: Monitoring... Setting... Parameters See F-cycle time or cycle time warning in Safety Administration Maximum cycle time * limit of the F-runtime groups that Editor: of the F-runtime contain the safety program group * Dialog for definition of an F-runtime group * Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 134) of the safety-related communica- In the hardware and tion between F-CPU and F-I/O via network editor: PROFIsafe (PROFIsafe monitor* Centrally when coning time) figuring the F-CPU; properties of the FCPU; or * of the safety-related CPU-CPU communication * (S7-1200, S7-1500) Communication with Flexible F-Link * F_WD_TIME Configuring an F-CPU (Page 48) * Configuring F-I/O (Page 53) * Peculiarities when configuring failsafe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices (Page 77) TIMEOUT * Communication (Page 588) F-monitoring time of F-communication * "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 96) * F-runtime group communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 145) * Configuring and programming communication with Flexible FLink (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 262) SENDDP; RCVDP; SENDS7; RCVS7 in Safety Administration Editor: * F-monitoring time when configuring the F-I/O; properties of the F-I/O At the TIMEOUT input of the instructions: Procedure for defining an F-runtime group (S7-1200, S71500) (Page 137) "Flexible F-Link" area (S7-300, S7-400) You do not have to configure the monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 608 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Monitoring and response times A.1 Configuring monitoring times Rules for configuring monitoring times When configuring monitoring times, you must take into account the availability as well as the safety of the F-system as follows: Availability: To ensure that the time monitoring is not triggered when there is no error, the monitoring times selected must be sufficiently long. Safety: To ensure that the process safety time is not exceeded for the process, the monitoring times selected must be sufficiently short. WARNING It can only be ensured (from a fail-safe standpoint) that a signal state to be transferred will be acquired at the sender end and transferred to the receiver if the signal level is pending for at least as long as the assigned F-monitoring time. (S018) General procedure for configuring monitoring times Use the following procedure for configuring monitoring times: 1. Configure the standard system. Refer to the applicable hardware manuals and Help on STEP 7 for the necessary information. 2. Configure the specific monitoring times of the F-System with respect to availability. You use the Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) to calculate the approximate minimum monitoring time. 3. Use the Excel file for response time calculation to calculate the maximum response time and then verify that the process safety time of the process is not exceeded. If necessary, you must reduce the specific monitoring times of the F-System. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 609 Monitoring and response times A.1 Configuring monitoring times A.1.1 Minimum monitoring time for the F-runtime group cycle time Parameter "Maximum cycle time of the F-runtime group" You configure the monitoring time for the F-runtime group cycle time in the Safety Administration Editor in the work area for definition of the F-runtime group (Page 132). To prevent F-runtime group cycle time monitoring from being triggered when there are no pending faults and causing the F-CPU to go to STOP, you must set the maximum cycle time of the F-runtime group high enough. Use the Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) to determine the minimum monitoring time for the F-runtime group cycle time. Note also the comments in the Excel file. For S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs, you can also use the "Cycle time warning limit of F-runtime group (Page 137)", "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group (Page 137)" and the tags TCYC_CURR (Page 148) and TCYC_LONG (Page 148) for dimensioning. A.1.2 Minimum monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-CPU and F-I/O Parameter "F-monitoring time" You have two options for configuring the monitoring time of safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O: Centrally in the hardware and network editor during parameter assignment of the F-CPU (Page 48); in the properties of the F-CPU, or During parameter assignment of the F-I/O (Page 53) in the hardware and network editor; in the properties of the F-I/O "F-monitoring time" = PROFIsafe monitoring time TPSTO The specified PROFIsafe monitoring time TPSTO must be high enough to prevent tripping the F-cycle time monitoring when no faults are present. Use the Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) available for SIMATIC Safety to calculate the minimum monitoring time for safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O. Note also the comments in the Excel file. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 610 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Monitoring and response times A.1 Configuring monitoring times Check to determine whether configured PROFIsafe monitoring time is too short Note During commissioning of the F-system, you can perform a check while safety mode is active to determine whether the configured PROFIsafe monitoring time is too short. This check of the PROFIsafe monitoring time is useful if you want to ensure that the configured monitoring time exceeds the minimum monitoring time by a sufficient amount. In this way, you can avoid the possible occurrence of sporadic monitoring time errors. Procedure: 1. Insert an F-I/O (one that will not be needed later for system operation). 2. Assign a shorter monitoring time for this F-I/O than for the F-I/O of the system. 3. If the additional F-I/O fails and the "Monitoring time for safety message frame exceeded" diagnostic is signaled, you have fallen below the minimum possible PROFIsafe monitoring time. 4. Increase the monitoring time for the added F-I/O just to the point where it no longer fails. This monitoring time corresponds approximately to the minimum possible monitoring time. Conditions: The F-I/O to be inserted additionally and the F-I/O whose PROFIsafe monitoring time is to be checked must have the following properties in common: * They must be inserted in the same rack * They must be nodes in the same subnet Tip: It may be useful to leave the additional F-I/O in place for systems that will be modified or expanded during operation after commissioning. This F-I/O will then provide an early warning in the event of changes in the time behavior, enabling you to avoid a process shutdown triggered by the F-I/O in the process. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 611 Monitoring and response times A.2 Response Times of Safety Functions A.1.3 Minimum monitoring time of safety-related CPU-CPU communication Input TIMEOUT at SENDDP and RCVDP or SENDS7 and RCVS7/F-monitoring time for communication via Flexible F-Link The time monitoring is performed in the SENDDP and RCVDP (Page 588) or SENDS7 and RCVS7 (Page 599) instructions of the communication partner. You must assign the time monitoring with identical monitoring time for both instructions at the TIMEOUT input. You must specify a monitoring time TIMEOUT that is large enough so that monitoring is not initiated when no faults are present. For communication via Flexible F-Link you specify the F-monitoring time for the Fcommunication when creating an F-communication (Page 96). Use the Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) that is available for SIMATIC Safety to determine the minimum value for TIMEOUT or the F-monitoring time. Note also the comments in the Excel file. A.1.4 Monitoring Time for Safety-Related Communication between F-Runtime Groups Monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups (S7-300, S7-400) The monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups is determined automatically from the values for the "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group" (work area for Definition of the F-runtime group (Page 132) in the Safety Administration Editor). Monitoring time = (maximum cycle time of the 1st F-runtime group) + (maximum cycle time of the 2nd F-runtime group) Monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups (S7-1200, S7-1500) You can calculate the monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups from the values for the "Maximum cycle time of F-runtime group" (area for Definition of the F-runtime group (Page 132) in the Safety Administration Editor), if you place the default user program for the F-runtime group communication into pre-/postprocessing (Page 87). Monitoring time = (Maximum cycle time of the 1st F-runtime group) + (Maximum cycle time of the 2nd F-runtime group). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 612 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Monitoring and response times A.2 Response Times of Safety Functions A.2 Response Times of Safety Functions Definition of response time The response time is the time from detection of an input signal until the linked output signal changes. Fluctuation range The actual response time lies between a minimum response time and maximum response time. You must always take the maximum response time into account in your system configuration. Rules for maximum response time of a safety function The maximum response time of a safety function must be shorter than the process safety time of the process. Definition for process safety time of a process The process safety time of a process is the time interval between the occurrence of an error, within which the process can be left on its own without causing injury to operating personnel or damage to the environment, and the point in time the response is completed. The controlling F-system can perform any control during the process safety time, this includes incorrectly or not at all. The process safety time of a process depends on the process type and must be determined on a case-by-case basis. Procedure for response time calculation The Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) is available for calculating the maximum response time of a safety function. Use the Excel file to calculate the approximate maximum response time of the safety function and then check that the process safety time of the process is not exceeded. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 613 Monitoring and response times A.2 Response Times of Safety Functions If necessary, you must reduce the specific monitoring times of the F-system (see Minimum monitoring time for safety-related communication between F-CPU and F-I/O (Page 610)). WARNING You may only use the Excel file for response time calculation or for timeout calculation when using Flexible F-Link communication, if you have observed the following regulations with regard to the standard instructions for consistent transfer of data: CPU-CPU communication (Page 262) You must call the standard instruction for consistent sending of data and acknowledgments in the postprocessing (Page 87) and the standard instruction for consistent receiving of data and acknowledgments in the preprocessing (Page 87). F-runtime group communication (Page 145) You have to call up the standard instruction UMOVE_BLK for transferring the data to be sent in the postprocessing of the sending F-runtime group. You have to call the standard instruction UMOVE_BLK for transferring the acknowledgment to be sent in the postprocessing of the receiving F-runtime group. (S089) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 614 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Monitoring and response times A.2 Response Times of Safety Functions WARNING The response time of their safety function depends, among other things, on the cycle time of the F-OB, the runtime of the F-runtime group and, when distributed F-I/O is used, the parameter assignment of PROFINET/PROFIBUS. Therefore, the configuration/parameter assignment of the standard system influences the response time of its safety function. Examples: * The increase in priority of a standard OB compared to an F-OB can extend the cycle time of the F-OB or the runtime of the F-runtime group due to the higher-priority processing of the standard OB. Please note that during creation of technology objects, OBs with very high priority may be created automatically. * The change of the send clock cycle of PROFINET changes the cycle time of an F-OB with event class "Synchronous cycle". Note that the configuration / parameter assignment of the standard system is not subject to access protection for the safety program and does not lead to a modification of the collective F-signature. If you do not take organizational measures to prevent changes in the configuration / parameter assignment of the standard system with influence on the response time, you must always set the monitoring times for the calculation of the maximum response time of a safety function (see Configuring monitoring times (Page 608)). The monitoring times are protected against change with the access protection of the safety program and are recorded by the F-collective signature as well as the F-SW collective signature. When calculating with Excel file for response time calculation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100) you need to consider the value that is specified for "Any standard system runtimes" as value for the maximum response time. (S085) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 615 B Checklist Life cycle of fail-safe automation systems The following table contains a checklist summarizing all activities in the life cycle of a fail-safe SIMATIC Safety system, including requirements and rules that must be observed for each activity. Checklist Legend: Stand-alone section references refer to this documentation. "F-SMs Manual" refers to the Automation System S7-300, ET 200M Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Signal Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19026151) manual. "F-Modules Manual" refers to the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27235629) manual. "ET 200eco Manual" refers to the ET 200eco Distributed I/O Station, Fail-Safe I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19033850) manual. "ET 200eco PN Manual" refers to the ET 200eco PN F-DI 8 x 24 VDC, 4xM12 / F-DQ 3 x 24 VDC/2.0A PM, 3xM12. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/search?search=6ES7146-6FF000AB0&type=Manual&lc=en-US) manual. "ET 200pro Manual" refers to the ET 200pro Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe I/O Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22098524) manual. "ET 200iSP Manual" refers to the ET 200iSP Distributed I/O Device, Fail-Safe Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/47357221) manual. "ET 200SP Manual" refers to the ET 200SP System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) manual "ET 200MP Manual" refers to the S7-1500/ET 200MP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) manual "ET 200SP Modules Manual" refers to the device manuals for F-Modules of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14059/man) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 617 Checklist Phase Note the following Reference Requirement: "Safety requirements specification" available for the intended application Process-dependent -- Specification of system architecture Process-dependent -- Assignment of functions and subfunctions to system components Process-dependent under Product Overview (Page 23) Selection of sensors and actuators Requirements for actuators F-SMs Manual, section 6.5; F-Modules Manual, section 4.5; ET 200eco Manual, section 5.5 ET 200eco PN Manual, section 5.2; ET 200pro Manual, section 4.4 ET 200S Manual, section 4.5 ET 200SP manual, section 5.2.2 ET 200MP manual, section 5.2.2 Specification of required safety properties for individual components IEC 61508:2010 -- Installing the optional package Requirements for installation under Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package (Page 30) orInstalling/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package (Page 31) Selection of S7 components Descriptions of configuration under Product Overview (Page 23); Check Planning Configuration F-SMs Manual, section 3; F-Modules Manual, section 3; ET 200eco Manual, section 3 ET 200eco PN Manual, section 4; ET 200pro Manual, section 2 ET 200iSP Manual, section 3 ET 200SP Modules Manual, section 3 ET 200MP Modules Manual, section 3 Configuration of hardware * * under Configuring (Page 43); Description of F-systems Verification of utilized hardware components based on Annex 1 of Report in the Certificate Annex 1 of Report on the Certificate SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 618 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Checklist Phase Note the following Configuration of F-CPU * Protection level, "Write protection for F-blocks" (S7-300, S7-400) * Protection level, at least "Full access" (S7-1200, S7-1500) * Password Configuration of F-I/O * F-capability enabled * Definition/setting of F-specific parameters * Cycle time for the F-runtime group in which the safety program is to be executed, defined in accordance with the requirements and safety regulations same as with standard system * Settings for safety mode * Setting of passivation type * Configuring monitoring times * Defining sensor evaluation * Defining diagnostic behavior * Special F-parameters * Assigning names * Unique PROFIsafe address * Follow warnings and notes on programming Reference Check under Configuring an F-CPU (Page 48); Standard S7-300; Standard S7-400; S7-1200 standard; S7-1500 standard; under Monitoring and response times (Page 607) under Configuring F-I/O (Page 53) orPeculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices (Page 77) under Monitoring and response times (Page 607); F-SMs Manual, sections 3, 9, 10; F-Modules Manual, sections 2.4, 7; ET 200eco Manual, sections 3, 8; ET 200eco PN Manual, section 6; ET 200pro Manual, Sections 2.4, 8; ET 200iSP Manual, Sections 2.4, 7, 8 ET 200SP Modules Manual, section 4 ET 200MP Modules Manual, section 4 Programming Defining program design and structure under Overview of Programming (Page 111), Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 111), Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 114); Programming startup protection (Page 155); SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 619 Checklist Phase Note the following Creating the F-runtime groups * Creating/inserting the Fblocks Reference Assignment of F-FB or F-FC as main safety block to the calling block (S7-300, S7-400) or F-OB (S7-1200, S7-1500) * Setting maximum cycle time for the F-runtime group in accordance with requirements (dependent on process and safety regulations) * Creating DB for F-runtime group communication * (S7-300, S7-400) Call of main safety blocks directly in OBs (e.g. OB 35), FBs, or FCs * (S7-1200, S7-1500) Call of the main safety block from the F-OB * Generating, editing, and saving F-FBs, F-FCs, and F-DBs in accordance with the requirements of the program structure * Description: Check under Defining F-Runtime Groups (Page 132) under Monitoring and response times (Page 607) under Creating F-blocks in FBD / LAD (Page 151) under Addressing F-I/O (Page 157) under Implementation of user acknowledgment (Page 187) under Reuse of F-blocks (Page 154) - F-I/O access - Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O - Inserting F-blocks from global libraries - Safety-related CPU-CPU communication - Communication with the standard user program under Configuring and programming communication (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 201) and Configuring and programming communication (S7-1200, S7-1500) (Page 270) under Data exchange between standard user program and safety program (Page 195) Compiling the safety program -- under Compiling the safety program (Page 311) Implementing safety program call (S7-300, S7-400) Check whether the main safety block is called directly in OBs (e.g., OB 35), FBs, or FCs. under Defining F-Runtime Groups (Page 132) Description of under Overview of Configuration (Page 43); Particularities for configuring the F-System (Page 46); Installation Hardware configuration * Installation * Wiring F-SMs Manual, sections 5, 6; F-Modules Manual, sections 3, 4; ET 200eco Manual, sections 3, 4; ET 200eco PN Manual, sections 4, 5; ET 200pro Manual, Sections 2, 3; ET 200iSP Manual, sections 3 and 4; ET 200SP Manual, sections 4 and 5 ET 200MP Manual, sections 4 and 5 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 620 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Checklist Phase Note the following Reference Description of commissioning - same as in standard Standard S7-300; Check Commissioning, Testing Switching on S7-400 standard; S7-1200 standard; S7-1500 standard; Standard-S7-1500 Software Controller; WinAC RTX F Downloading safety program and standard user program Testing the safety program Changing the safety program Testing the safety-related parameters Description * Downloading * Program identification * Comparing safety programs * Description of disabling of safety mode * Procedures for changing safety program data Description * Disabling safety mode * Changing the safety program Description of configuration under Downloading project data to an FCPU (Page 313) under Comparing Safety Programs (Page 339) under Downloading project data (Page 313); Testing the safety program (Page 347); Disabling safety mode (Page 344) under Changing the safety program in RUN mode (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 355); Disabling safety mode (Page 344); Deleting the safety program (Page 357); under Printing project data (Page 341); F-SMs Manual, sections 4, 9, 10; F-Modules Manual, sections 2.4, 7; ET 200eco Manual, sections 3, 8; ET 200eco Manual, section 6; ET 200pro Manual, Sections 2.4, 8; ET 200iSP Manual, Sections 2.4, 7, 8 ET 200SP Modules Manual, section 4 ET 200MP Modules Manual, section 4 System acceptance Acceptance * Description and notes on acceptance * Printouts under System acceptance (Page 361) Operation, maintenance General operation Notes on operation under Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program (Page 383) Access protection -- under Access protection (Page 101) Diagnostics Responses to faults and events under Guide to diagnostics (S7-300, S7-400) (Page 389); Guide to diagnostics (S7-1200) (Page 390); Guide to diagnostics (S7-1500) (Page 390); SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 621 Checklist Phase Note the following Reference Replacement of software and hardware components Description under Replacing Software and Hardware Components (Page 386); Addressing F-I/O (Page 157); * Module replacement * Update of operating systems of F-CPU - same as in standard Check Help on STEP 7 * Update of SW components Notes Uninstallation, disassembly * Operating system update of IMs * Notes for uninstalling software components * Notes for disassembling modules under Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Advanced V15.1 optional package (Page 31); Installing/uninstalling STEP 7 Safety Basic V15.1 optional package (Page 30); Replacing Software and Hardware Components (Page 386); SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 622 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary Access protection Fail-safe systems must be protected against dangerous, unauthorized access. Access protection for F-systems is implemented by assigning two passwords (one for the F-CPU, and one for the safety program). Automatically generated F-blocks F-blocks that are automatically generated and, if necessary, called when the safety program is compiled, in order to generate an executable safety program from the safety program programmed by the user. Category Category in accordance with ISO 13849-1:2015 or EN ISO 13849-1:2015 With SIMATIC Safety, use in safety mode up to category 4 is possible. Channel fault Channel-specific fault, such as a wire break or short circuit. CPU-wide In the context of F-I/Os, "CPU-wide" means all F-I/Os assigned to an F-CPU: Central F-I/O of this F-CPU as well as F-I/Os for which the F-CPU is DP master/IO controller and assigned F-I/O in a shared device. An F-I/O that is addressed using I-slave-slave communication is assigned to the F-CPU of the I-slave and not to the F-CPU of the DP master / IO controller. In the context of safety-related CPU-CPU communication, "CPU-wide" encompasses all the safety-related communication connections that are configured in an F-CPU. CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC signature CRC signature The validity of the process data in the safety message frame, the correctness of the assigned address relationships, and the safety-related parameters are validated by means of a CRC signature contained in the safety message frame. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 623 Glossary DB for F-runtime group communication -> F-DB for safety-related communication between F-runtime groups of a safety program. Depassivation Reintegration Disabled safety mode Temporary deactivation of safety mode for test purposes, commissioning, etc. The following actions are possible only in disabled safety mode: Downloading changes of the safety program to the -> F-CPU during ongoing operation (in RUN mode) Test functions such as "Modify" or other write access to data of the safety program (with limitations) Whenever safety mode is deactivated, the safety of the system must be ensured by other organizational measures, such as operation monitoring and manual safety shutdown. Discrepancy analysis Discrepancy analysis for equivalence or non-equivalence is used for fail-safe inputs to detect errors caused by the time characteristic of two signals with the same functionality. The discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same level). On expiration of an assignable period ( discrepancy time), a check is made to determine whether the difference in levels (for non-equivalence testing, the same level) has disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, there is a discrepancy error. The discrepancy analysis is performed between the two input signals of the 1oo2 evaluation of the sensors ( sensor evaluation) in the fail-safe input. Discrepancy time Assignable time for the discrepancy analysis. If the discrepancy time is set too high, the fault detection time and fault reaction time are prolonged unnecessarily. If the discrepancy time is set too low, availability is decreased unnecessarily because a discrepancy error is detected when, in reality, no error exists. DP/DP coupler Device for coupling two PROFIBUS DP subnets required for master-master communication between safety programs in different F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety and S7 Distributed Safety. Expert The acceptance of a system, i.e., the safety-related acceptance test of the system, is usually carried out by an independent expert (for example, from TUV). SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 624 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves are standard slaves that are operated on PROFIBUS with the DP protocol. They must operate in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2010 (Fieldbus profiles) and the PROFIsafe bus profile. A GSD file is used for their configuration. Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices are standard devices that are operated on PROFINET with the I/O protocol. They must operate in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2010 (Fieldbus profiles) and the PROFIsafe bus profile in V2-MODE. A GSD file is used for their configuration. Fail-safe I/O modules ET 200eco modules and ET 200eco PN modules that can be used for safety-related operation ( safety mode). These modules are equipped with integrated safety functions. They operate in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2010 (Fieldbus profiles) and the PROFIsafe bus profile. Fail-safe modules Fail-safe modules ET 200SP, ET 200S, ET 200pro, ET 200iSP that can be used in the ET 200SP, ET 200S, ET 200pro or ET 200iSP distributed I/O systems. Fail-safe modules S7-1500/ET 200MP, which can be used centrally in an S7-1500 or in a distributed I/O ET 200MP system. Fail-safe module S7-1200 which can be used centrally in an S7-1200 system. These modules are equipped with integrated safety functions ( Safety mode) for fail-safe operation ( Fail-safe operation). They operate in accordance with the PROFIsafe bus profile. Fail-safe systems Fail-safe systems (F-systems) are systems that remain in a safe state or immediately switch to another safe state as soon as particular failures occur. Fault reaction function User safety function Fault reaction time The maximum fault reaction time for an F-system specifies the time between the occurrence of any error and a safe reaction at all affected fail-safe outputs. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 625 Glossary F-blocks The following fail-safe blocks are designated as F-blocks: those created by the user in LAD or FBD those created by the user as F-DBs those selected by the user from a global library those added automatically in the safety program ( F-SBs, automatically generated F-blocks, F-shared DB, F-I/O DBs; instance DBs of F-FBs) All F-blocks are shown in yellow in the project tree. F-CALL "F-call blocks" for the safety program in S7 Distributed Safety. F-collective signature The F-collective signature uniquely identifies a particular state of safety-related project data. It is important for the program identification as well as the on-site acceptance of the safety program, for example by experts. F-communication address signature The F-communication address signature is formed from the names and the F-communication UUIDs of communication connections with Flexible F-Link that are used in the safety program. F-communication DBs Fail-safe data blocks for the safety-related CPU-CPU communication via S7 connections Communication with Flexible F-Link F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) An F-compliant PLC data type (UDT) is a PLC data type (UDT) in which you can use all data types that can be used in safety programs. F-CPU An F-CPU is a central processing unit with fail-safe capability that is approved for use in SIMATIC Safety and in which a safety program can run in addition to the standard user program. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 626 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary F-DBs Optional fail-safe data blocks that can be read-/write-accessed from anywhere within the safety program (exception: DBs for F-runtime group communication). F-destination address PROFIsafe address F-FBs Fail-safe function blocks (with instance DBs), in which the user programs the safety program in FBD or LAD. F-FCs Fail-safe FCs, in which the user programs the safety program in FBD or LAD. F-HW collective signature The F-HW collective signature uniquely identifies a particular state of safety-related hardware configuration. The F-HW collective signature is important to document the change/non-change of the safety-related hardware configuration, for example in the context of an acceptance of changes. F-I/O Collective name for fail-safe inputs and outputs available in SIMATIC S7 for integration in SIMATIC Safety, among others. The following are available: ET 200eco fail-safe I/O module ET 200eco PN fail-safe I/O module S7-300 fail-safe signal modules Fail-safe modules for S7-1200 Fail-safe modules for ET 200MP Fail-safe modules for ET 200SP Fail-safe modules for ET 200S Fail-safe modules for ET 200pro Fail-safe modules for ET 200iSP Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 627 Glossary F-I/O DB Fail-safe data block for F-CPUs to an F-I/O in STEP 7 Safety. An F-I/O DB is automatically created for each F-I/O when the F-I/O is configured in the hardware and network editor. The F-I/O DB contains tags that the user can or must evaluate or write in the safety program as follows: For reintegration of the F-I/O after communication errors For reintegration of F-I/O after F-I/O or channel faults If the F-I/O must be passivated as a result of particular states of the safety program (for example, group passivation) For reassignment of parameters for fail-safe GSD based DP slaves/GSD based I/O devices or enabling HART communication for the F-I/O with the corresponding functionality In order to evaluate whether fail-safe values or process data are output F-I/O faults Module-related F-I/O fault, such as a communication error or parameter assignment error F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 1 F-I/Os which ensure the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address solely with the F-destination address, for example, ET 200S F-modules. The PROFIsafe address is usually assigned by DIP switches. F-I/Os of PROFIsafe address type 2 F-I/Os which can ensure the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address with a combination of Fsource address and F-destination address, for example, S7-1500/ET 200MP F-modules. The PROFIsafe address is usually assigned with STEP 7 Safety. F-modules Fail-safe modules F-OB The F-OB calls the main safety block of an F-runtime group in S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs. F-runtime group The safety program consists of one or two F-runtime groups. An F-runtime group is a logical construct of several associated F-blocks. It is generated internally by the F-system. An F-runtime group consists of the following F-blocks: Main safety block, F-OB (S7-1200, S7-1500), if applicable F-FBs/ F-FCs, if applicable F-DBs, F-I/O DBs, F-blocks of global libraries, instance DBs, F-SBs, and automatically generated F-blocks. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 628 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary F-runtime group information DB The F-runtime group information DB provides key information on the corresponding Fruntime group and on the safety program as a whole. F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400) Fail-safe data block that contains all of the shared data of the safety program and additional information needed by the F-system. The F-shared DB is automatically inserted and expanded when the hardware configuration is compiled. Using its name F_GLOBDB, the user can evaluate certain data of the safety program. F-SMs S7-300 fail-safe signal modules F-source address PROFIsafe address F-SW collective signature The F-SW collective signature uniquely identifies a particular state of the safety program. The F-SW collective signature is important to document the change/non-change of the safety program, for example in the context of an acceptance of changes. F-system blocks Fail-safe system blocks that are automatically inserted and called when the safety program is compiled in order to generate an executable safety program from the user's safety program. F-systems Fail-safe systems Hardware configuration The hardware configuration encompasses the configuration of the standard parameters of the CPUs and standard I/Os as well as the configuration of the safety-related parameters of the F-CPUs and the I/Os. I-device The functionality of the "I-device" (intelligent I/O-device) of a CPU allows data exchange with an I/O-controller and thus, its use as an intelligent preprocessor of sub-processes, for example. In this case, the I-device is connected as an I/O-device to a "parent" I/O-controller. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 629 Glossary IE/PB link Device for coupling PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP-systems required, among other things, for IO-controller-I-slave communication between -> safety programs in different F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety. i-parameter Individual parameters of fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices I-slave The functionality of the "I-slave" (intelligent DP slave) of a CPU allows data exchange with a DP master and, thus, its use as an intelligent preprocessor of sub-processes, for example. In this case, the I-slave is connected as a DP slave to a "parent" DP master. Main safety block "Introductory F-block" for fail-safe programming of the safety program in STEP 7 Safety. The main safety block is an F-FB or F-FC that the user assigns to the calling F-OB (S71200, S7-1500) or block (OB, FC, FB) (S7-300, S7-400) of an F-runtime group. The main safety block contains the safety program and any calls of other F-FBs/F-FCs for program structuring. Network-wide A network consists of one or more subnets. "Network-wide" means beyond the boundaries of the subnet. In PROFIBUS, a network includes all nodes accessible via PROFIBUS DP. In PROFINET IO, a network includes all nodes accessible via RT_Class_1/2/32 (Ethernet/WLAN/Bluetooth, Layer 2) and if applicable RT_Class_UDP (IP, Layer 3). Passivation When passivation occurs in an F-I/O with inputs, the F-system provides the safety program with fail-safe values (0) instead of the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs in the PII. When passivation occurs in an F-I/O with outputs, the F-system transfers fail-safe values (0) to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values in the PIQ provided by the safety program. PL Performance Level (PL) in accordance with ISO 13849-1:2015 or EN ISO 13849-1:2015 With SIMATIC Safety, use up to Performance Level (PL) e is possible in safety mode. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 630 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary PN/PN coupler Device for coupling two PROFINET IO systems required for IO controller-IO controller communication between safety programs in different F-CPUs in SIMATIC Safety and S7 Distributed Safety. PROFIsafe Safety-related bus profile of PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO for communication between the safety program and the F-I/O in an F-system. See IEC 61784-3-3:2010 or PROFIsafe - Profile for Safety Technology on PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO; Order No: 3.192 (V2.6.1). PROFIsafe address The PROFIsafe address (code name according to IEC 61784-3-3:2010) is used for protection of standard addressing mechanisms, such as IP addresses. The PROFIsafe address consists of an F-source address and an F-destination address. Each F-I/O therefore has two address parts, an F-source address and an F-destination address. The F-source address is automatically assigned and is displayed for fail-safe GDS based DP slaves/fail-safe GSD based I/O devices and F-modules ET 200SP, F-modules ET 200MP, ET 200eco PN and F-modules S7-1200. The F-source address for F-modules ET 200S, ET 200eco, ET 200pro, ET 200iSP and F-SMs S7-300 is always 1. For F-modules ET 200SP/ET 200MP, the F-source address corresponds to the "Central F-source address" parameter of the assigned F-CPU. You need to configure the F-destination address in the hardware and network editor. You assign the F-destination address for the ET 200S, ET 200eco, ET 200pro, ET 200iSP and FSMs S7-300 F-modules with a switch. For F-modules ET 200SP and F-modules ET 200MP, ET 200eco PN assign the PROFIsafe address in the hardware and network editor. For S71200 F-modules, the F-destination address is automatically assigned by the F-system. Program signature collective F-signature Project data The project data includes the hardware configuration and the user program. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 631 Glossary Reintegration The switchover from fail-safe values (0) to process data (reintegration of an F-I/O) takes place automatically or following user acknowledgment in the F-I/O DB. The reintegration method depends on the following: The reason for passivation of the F-I/O/channels of the F-I/O The parameter assignment in the F-I/O DB or in the configuration itself (for example, ET 200MP fail-safe modules on an S7-1500 F-CPU and S7-1200 fail-safe modules on an S7-1200 F-CPU) Following reintegration for an F-I/O module with inputs, the process data pending at the inputs in the PII are provided again for the safety program. For an F-I/O with outputs, the Fsystem again transfers the output values provided in the PIQ in the safety program to the fail-safe outputs. RIOforFA Safety Remote IO for Factory Automation with PROFIsafe; profile for F-I/O S7-300 fail-safe signal modules Fail-safe signal modules of the S7-300 module series that can be used for safety-related operation ( Safety mode) as centralized modules in an S7-300 or as distributed modules in the ET 200M distributed I/O system. The fail-safe signal modules are equipped with integrated safety functions. They operate in accordance with the PROFIsafe bus profile. S7-PLCSIM The S7-PLCSIM application enables you to execute and test your program on a simulated automation system on your programming device or PC. Because the simulation takes place completely in your programming device or PC, you do not need any hardware (CPU, I/O). Safe state The basic principle of the safety concept in fail-safe systems is the existence of a safe state for all process variables. For digital F-I/O that conform to IEC 61508:2010, this is always the value "0". Safety Administration Editor The Safety Administration Editor provides support for the main tasks of your safety program. Safety function Mechanism integrated in the F-CPU and F-I/O that allows them to be used in -> fail-safe systems. According to IEC 61508:2010, a function that is implemented by a safety device in order to maintain the system in the safe state or bring the system to a safe state in the event of a specific fault. (fault reaction function -> user safety function) SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 632 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary Safety message frame In safety mode, data are transferred in a safety message frame between the F-CPU and F-I/O, or between the F-CPUs in safety-related CPU-CPU communication. Safety mode 1. Operating mode of F-I/O in which safety-related communication can take place using safety message frames. 2. Operating mode of the safety program. In safety mode of the safety program, all safety mechanisms for error detection and fault reaction are enabled. In safety mode, the safety program cannot be modified during operation. Safety mode can be disabled by the user ( disabled safety mode). Safety program Safety-related user program Safety protocol Safety message frame Safety summary The safety summary provides documentation of the safety-related project data which supports you during acceptance of the system. Safety-related communication Safety-related communication is used to exchange fail-safe data. Safety-related hardware configuration The safety-related hardware configuration includes the configuration of the safety-related parameters of the F-CPU as well as the configuration of the F-I/O devices. Safety-related project data The safety-related project data includes the safety-related hardware configuration as well as the safety program. Sensor evaluation There are two types of sensor evaluation: 1oo1 evaluation - sensor signal is read once 1oo2 evaluation - sensor signal is read twice by the same F-I/O and compared internally SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 633 Glossary Shared device The "Shared Device" functionality enables distribution of the submodules of an IO-device between different IO-controllers. Signature collective F-signatures SIL Safety integrity level SIL in accordance with IEC 61508:2010. The higher the Safety Integrity Level, the more rigid the measures for prevention of systematic faults and for management of systematic faults and random hardware failures. With SIMATIC Safety, up to Safety Integrity Level SIL3 is possible in safety mode. Standard communication Communication used to exchange non-safety-related data Standard mode Operating mode of F-I/O in which safety-related communication between the F-CPU and the F-I/O by means of safety message frames is not possible; only standard communication is possible in this operating mode. Standard user program Non-safety-related user program Startup of F-system With an F-CPU, the standard user program starts up in the normal way. When the safety program is started up, all F-DBs are initialized with the values from the load memory - as is the case with a cold restart. This means that saved error information is lost. The F-system performs an automation reintegration of the F-I/O. User program The user program comprises the standard user program and the safety program. User safety function The safety function for the process can be provided through a user safety function or a fault reaction function. The user only has to program the user safety function. In the event of an error, if the F-system can no longer execute its actual user safety function, it executes the fault reaction function: for example, the associated outputs are disabled, and the FCPU switches to STOP mode, if necessary. SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 634 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Glossary Value status The value status is additional binary information for a channel value. The value status is entered in the process image input and provides information on the validity of the channel value. 1: A valid process data is output for the channel value. 0: A fail-safe value is output for the channel value. Versioned instruction Instruction for which a version is displayed in the "Version" column of the "Instructions" task card: SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 635 Index = =, 419 A ABS, 536 Acceptance, 76 of safety-related changes, 378 of system, 361 Acceptance of safety-related changes, 378 Access To tags of F-I/O DB, 174 Access permission Canceling, 108 Setting up for the safety program, 103 Setup for F-CPU, 107 Validity, 103, 108 Access protection, 101, 101 ACK_GL, 487 ACK_NEC, 168 ACK_OP, 577 ACK_REI, 168 ACK_REQ, 172 Acknowledgment Channel fault, 54 Fail-safe, 577 Add, 520 ADD, 520 Address assignment Rules, 69, 71 AND, 414, 567, 567 Approvals, 4 Assignment, 402, 419 B Behavior After communication errors, 178 After F-I/O or channel faults, 180 After startup, 175 Bit logic operation AND, 414 Assignment, 402, 419 EXCLUSIVE OR, 417 Insert binary input, 398 Invert RLO, 399, 402 Normally closed contact, 401 Normally open contact, 400 OR, 416 Reset output, 403, 420 Reset/set flip-flop, 407, 423 Scan operand for negative signal edge, 410, 426 Scan operand for positive signal edge, 409, 425 Scan RLO for negative signal edge, 413, 429 Scan RLO for positive signal edge, 412, 427 Set output, 404, 421 Set/reset flip-flop, 406, 422 Bit memory, 196 Block size of automatically generated F-blocks, 312 BO_W, 550 Breakpoints, 349 C Category, 23 Central F-source address, 50 Change Acceptance, 378 Detecting, 378 of the safety program in RUN mode, 355 Changing Data of the safety program, 347 Channel fault, 54, 180 Acknowledgment, 54 Checking the program version, 376 Checklist, 617 Checks through the F-system, 66 CMP <, 518 CMP <=, 515 CMP <>, 512 CMP ==, 511 CMP >, 517 CMP >=, 514 Code review of the safety program, 363 Collective F-signature, 344 Communication Monitoring time, 610, 612 Standard user program and safety program, 196, 197 Communication error, 178, 588 SENDDP/RCVDP, 588 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 637 Index Comparator operations Equal, 511 Greater or equal, 514 Greater than, 517 Less or equal, 515 Less than, 518 Not equal, 512 Comparing Safety programs, 339 Compiling errors Alarms, 311 Completeness Checking the safety summary, 364 Configuration control, 58 Configuring Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves, 77 Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices, 77 F-CPU, 48 F-I/O, 53 of F-components, 46 Overview, 43 Shared device, 63 Special features, 46 constants Boolean, 123 FALSE, 123 TRUE, 123 Conversion operations Convert BOOL to WORD, 550 Convert value, 548 Convert WORD to BOOL, 552 Scale values, 555 Convert Data, 550, 552 Value, 548 CONVERT, 548 Convert data, 550, 552 Conveyor equipment, stopped, 445 Correctness Hardware configuration, 368 Safety-related CPU-CPU communication, 374 Count Down, 506 Up, 504 Up and down, 508 Count down, 506 Count up, 504 Count up and down, 508 CPU-CPU communication, 43 Options for safety-related, 43 Overview of safety-related, 201, 270, 307 Create twos complement, 533 CTD, 506 CTU, 504 CTUD, 508 Cycle time F-runtime group, 135, 138 Maximum, 608 Monitoring time for, 610 D Data block, 196 Data exchange between standard user program and safety program, 195 Data transfer From safety program to standard user program, 196 From standard user program to safety program, 197 Data types For safety program, 120 DB access, fully qualified, 124, 174 DB access, non-fully qualified, 125 Deleting F-blocks, 357 DIAG ESTOP1: Emergency STOP up to Stop Category 1, EV1oo2DI: 1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis, FDBACK: Feedback monitoring, F-I/O DB, 172 MUT_P: Parallel muting, MUTING: Muting, RCVS7, 599 SENDDP/RCVDP, 588 SENDS7, 599 SFDOOR: Safety door monitoring, TWO_H_EN: Two-hand monitoring with enable, Diagnostic parameters, 389 Diagnostic tag, 389 Diagnostics Fail-safe system, 389 Guide, 390, 390 DISABLE, 170 Disabling F-capability, 48 Safety mode, 344 Discrepancy error, 445 DIV, 529 Divide, 529 Downloading Hardware configuration, 313 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 638 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Index Safety program, 313 Standard user program, 313 Downloading Standard user program, 313 DP/DP coupler, 213, 281 E Empty box Inserting a LAD element, 393 Inserting an FBD element, 396 EN, 119 Enabling F-capability, 48 Safety mode, 345 Enabling/disabling F-capability, 48 ENO, 119 ESTOP1, 430 EV1oo2DI, 468 EXCLUSIVE OR, 417, 570 Executing a system acceptance, 361 F F_CRC_Seed, 79 F_IO_StructureDescCRC, 77, 79 F_Passivation, 79 Fail-safe acknowledgment, 577, 582 Fail-safe GSD based DP slaves Configuring, 77 Fail-safe GSD based I/O devices Configuring, 77 Fail-safe system, (See SIMATIC Safety) Fail-safe value, 142, 162 F-array read, 539, 542 Fault reaction function, 9, 24 FBD element Inserting, 396 F-block Copying, 152 Deleting, 357 F-change history, 359 F-channel faults, fail-safe value output, 163 F-Communication UUID, 96 F-compliant PLC data type (UDT), 126 F-components, 43 F-CPU, (See F-CPU), 43, 107 Configuring, 48 Going to STOP mode, 383 migrating, 36 Setting up access permission, 107 F-cycle time, monitoring time, 610 F-DB, 117 Creating, 151 for F-runtime group communication, 141 F-shared DB, 148 FDBACK, 475 F-destination address, 68, 70 F-destination address range, 49 F-FB, 117, 151 F-FC, 117, 151 F-I/O, 43 addressing, 157 Configuring, 53 Reintegration, 164, 175, 178, 180 Removing and inserting during operation, 386 F-I/O access, 157 During operation, 355 Restrictions in RUN mode, 356 Via the process image, 157, 246 F-I/O DB, 117, 166 Access to, 165, 174 Name, 55, 174 Number, 55, 174 Structure of DIAG, 172 F-I/O faults, fail-safe value output, 163 F-I/O or channel faults, 180 File type conversion, 122 Firmware update, 386 First steps, 42 Flexible F-Link, 96, 145, 262 Example, 266 F-monitoring time, 612 Flip-flop Reset/set, 407, 423 Set/reset, 406, 422 F-monitoring time, 51, 56, 608 F-communication, 96 F-OB, 55, 117, 137 Move, 152 Form absolute value, 536 F-parameters, 46 F-runtime group, 111, 114, 117 Changing, 150, 151 Default setting, 134, 137 Defining, 135, 138 Deleting, 150 Maximum cycle time, 135, 138, 612 Rules, 132 Safety-related communication, 141 F-runtime group communication, 135, 138, 141, 145 Monitoring time, 612 Restrictions in RUN mode, 355 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 639 Index F-runtime group information DB, 148 F-runtime groups signature, 148 F-shared DB, 148, 196, 344 F-source address, 50, 70 F-system Checks, 66 Monitoring time, 607 Response time, 607 Fully qualified DB access, 124, 174 Function test of the safety program, 343, 363 G Getting Started, 42 Global data block Open, 565 Group diagnostics for fail-safe signal modules, 56 Group passivation, 184 GSD files Configuration, 77 H Hardware components, 25 Hardware configuration, 47 Checking for correctness, 368 Downloading, 313 Help Open, 30, 31 HW identifier, 588 I IE/PB link, 247, 304 Image Creating, 329 running, 329 Implementation of user acknowledgment, 192 Importing of images, 329 Insert binary input, 398 Installation STEP 7 Safety, 30, 31, 32 Instance DB, 125, 152 Instructions for the safety program, 118 Get status bit OV, 587 Testing for acceptance, 365 IPAR_EN, 169 IPAR_OK, 172 J JMP, 558 JMPN, 560 Jump If RLO = 0, 560 If RLO = 1, 558 Jump label, 562 L LABEL, 562 LAD element Inserting, 393 Life cycle of fail-safe automation systems, 617 Light curtain, 445 Local data, 124 M Main safety block, 117, 152 Math functions Add, 520 Create twos complement, 533 Divide, 529 Form absolute value, 536 Multiply, 526 Subtract, 523 Maximum cycle time, 608, 612 Memory reset, 347 Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety, 32 Migration F-CPU, 36 from S7 Distributed Safety, 32, 251 Printout, 342 Modifying, 343 Safety program, 347, 347 Monitoring, 343 Safety program, 347, 347 Two-hand monitoring, 436, 439 Monitoring time, 607, 608 Communication between F-CPU and F-I/O, 610 Communication between F-CPUs, 612 Communication between I-salve and slave, 610 F-cycle time, 610 Move Move value, 538 Read F-array, 539, 542 Write value indirectly to an F-DB, 544 MOVE, 538 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 640 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Index Move operations Read value indirectly from an F-DB, 546 MUL, 526 Multiply, 526 MUT_P, 456 MUTING, 445 Structure of DIAG, 445 Muting operation With 4 muting sensors, 445 With reflection light barriers, 445 N N, 410, 426 N_TRIG, 413, 429 NEG, 533 Network Inserting, 392, 396 Normally closed contact, 401 Normally open contact, 400 NOT, 402 O Off delay, 499 Offline password, 103 Offline-online comparison of safety programs, 339 On delay, 494 Online password, 103 Operand Scan for negative signal edge, 410, 426 Scan for positive signal edge, 409, 425 Operand area For safety program, 121 Operating principle RCVDP, 588 RCVS7, 599 SENDDP, 588 SENDS7, 599 Operating system update, 386 Operational safety of the system, 9 OPN, 565 Option handling, 58 OR, 416, 568, 568 Output Reset, 403, 420 Set, 404, 421 OV, 585, 586, 587 P P, 409, 425 P_TRIG, 412, 427 Parameter types, 120 Parameters, 456 Safety-related, 47 PASS_ON, 167 PASS_OUT, 171 Passivation Channel-granular, 54 F-I/O, 175 Output of fail-safe values, 163 Passivation of F-I/O, 175 After communication errors, 178 After F-I/O or channel faults, 180 After startup, 175 Group passivation, 184 Password, 101, 345 F-CPU, 107 Offline, 103 Safety program, 103 Performance level, 23 PLC data type F-compliant, 126 PLCSIM, 343, 347 PN/PN coupler, 204, 272 Printing Project data, 341 Process image, 55, 157, 196 Process safety time, 613 Productive operation, 101 PROFIBUS DP, 25 PROFINET IO, 25 PROFIsafe address assign, 73, 75 Assigning, 72, 78 Changing, 76 Recommendations, 65 PROFIsafe address type, 43 PROFIsafe address type 1, 49 PROFIsafe address type 2, 50 PROFIsafe destination address, 49 Program control operations Jump if RLO = 0, 560 Jump if RLO = 1, 558 Jump label, 562 Open global data block, 565 Return, 564 Programming Group passivation, 184 Overview, 111 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 641 Index Startup protection, 155 Validity checks, 197 Programming an F-communication DB, 251 Project data Printing, 341 Projects upgrading, 37, 37, 38, 39 Proof test, 386 Protection level of the F-CPU, 52 Pulse Generate, 489 Q QBAD, 171, 174, 175 QBAD_I_xx, 171 QBAD_O_xx, 171 R R, 403, 420 RCVDP, 208, 209, 218, 218, 226, 227, 232, 233, 276, 277, 285, 286, 293, 294, 299, 300, 344, 588 Behavior in the event of communication errors, 588 Receiving data, 588 Structure of DIAG, 588 Timing diagrams, 588 RCVS7, 250, 251, 344, 599 RD_ARRAY_DI, 539, 542 RD_FDB, 546 Readme file, 30, 31 Recommendations PROFIsafe address, 65 Reflection light barriers, 445 Reintegration of F-I/O, 164, 168, 175 After communication errors, 178 After F-I/O or channel faults, 180 After startup of F-system, 175 Programming a user acknowledgment, 187, 192 with group passivation, 184 Replacing Software components, 386 Response time of F-system, 607, 613 Restart inhibit MUT_P, 456 MUTING, 445 On interruption of the light curtain, 445, 456 Restart protection, 155 RET, 564 Return, 564 RLO Invert, 399, 402 Scan for negative signal edge, 413, 429 Scan for positive signal edge, 412, 427 RS, 407, 423 Rules Address assignment, 69, 71 for testing, 347 RUN, 355 RUN mode, 355 S S, 404, 421 S7 connection Safety-related communication, 248 S7-PLCSIM, 343, 347 testing with, 350 Safety Administration Editor, 81 Safety function, 24 Calculation of response time, 613 Example, 24 Safety functions ACK_GL: Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O in an F-runtime group, ESTOP1: Emergency STOP up to Stop Category 1, EV1oo2DI: 1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis, FDBACK: Feedback monitoring, MUT_P: Parallel muting, MUTING: Muting, SFDOOR: Safety door monitoring, TWO_H_EN: Two-hand monitoring with enable, TWO_HAND: Two-hand monitoring, Safety integrity level, 23 Safety mode Disabling, 344 Enabling, 345 Safety program, 25 Automatic generation, 52 Code review, 363 Comparing, 339 Data types, 120 Deleting, 150 Downloading, 313 Function test, 343 Instructions, 118 Modifying, 343, 347, 347 Monitoring, 343, 347, 347 Online consistency, 375 Output of fail-safe values, 163 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 642 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH Index Password, 103 Structuring, 111, 114 Testing, 347 Work memory requirement, 312 Safety requirements, 9, 23 Safety summary, 76, 341, 362 Safety-related communication between F-runtime groups, 141 Safety-related communication via S7 connections Configuring, 248 Data transfer limits, 255 Safety-related CPU-CPU communication, 43, 201, 270, 307, 599 Checking for correctness, 374 F-communication DB, 251 Options, 43 RCVDP, 588 Restrictions in RUN mode, 355 SENDDP, 588 Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication Configuring, 223, 290, 308 Data transfer limits, 229, 296 Programming, 227, 294 Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication Configuring, 204, 272 Data transfer limits, 213, 281 Programming, 209, 277 Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication, 247, 304 Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication Configuring, 236 Data transfer limits, 235 Programming, 233 Safety-related I-slave-slave communication Configuring, 241 Data transfer limits, 246 Safety-related master-I-slave communication Configuring, 229, 297 Data transfer limits, 235, 303 Programming, 233, 300 Safety-related master-master communication Configuring, 213, 281 Data transfer limits, 223, 290 Programming, 218, 286 Safety-related parameters, 47 Scale Values, 555 SCALE, 555 SENDDP, 208, 209, 218, 218, 226, 227, 232, 233, 276, 277, 285, 286, 293, 294, 299, 300, 344, 588 Behavior in the event of communication errors, 588 Sending data, 588 Structure of DIAG, 588 Timing diagrams, 588 Sending and receiving data via S7 connections, 599 SENDS7, 250, 251, 344, 599 SFDOOR, 481 Shared device Configuring, 63 Shift and rotate Shift left, 574 Shift right, 571 Shift left, 574 Shift right, 571 SHL, 574 SHR, 571 Signature, 39 SIL, 23 SIMATIC Safety, 3, 23 Configuring and programming software, 25 Hardware and software components, 25 Principles of safety functions, 24 Product overview, 23 Safety program, 25 STEP 7 Safety optional package, 25 Simulation, 343 Simulation devices in the F-system, 383 Slice access, 122 Software components, 25, 386 Software requirements, 30, 31, 32 SR, 406, 422 Startup, 155, 175 Startup characteristics MUT_P, 456 RCVDP, 588 RCVS7, 599 SENDDP, 588 SENDS7, 599 Startup protection, 155 Status bit OV Get, 585, 587 Get negated, 586 STEP 7 Safety, 25 Additional support, 3 Basic knowledge, required, 3 Documentation, 4 Information landscape, 4 Service & Support, 3 Writing conventions, 7 STOP, 383 STP, 383 Structure of the safety program, 111, 114 SUB, 523 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH 643 Index Subtract, 523 Supported configurations, 66 T Tag F-I/O DB, 166 Monitoring/modifying, 347 Testing of safety program, 347 TIMEOUT, 608, 612 Timer operations Generate off-delay, 499 Generate on-delay, 494 Generate pulse, 489 Timing diagrams, 445, 456, 588 RCVDP, 588 SENDDP, 588 TOF, 499 TON, 494 TP, 489 Training center, 3 Transfer area, 272 Truth table AND, 415 EXCLUSIVE OR, 418 OR, 416 TUV certificate, 365 TWO_H_EN, 439 TWO_HAND, 436 Scale, 555 Write indirectly to an F-DB, 544 Value status, 159, 171 W W_BO, 552 Watch table, 349 Wiring test, 347 Word logic operations AND, 567 EXCLUSIVE OR, 570 OR, 568 Work memory requirement of safety program, 312 WR_FDB, 544 X X, 417 XOR, 570 U Uninstalling STEP 7 Safety, 30, 31, 32 Upgrading Projects, 37, 37, 38, 39 User acknowledgment, 187, 192, 445 Example, 191 HMI system, 188, 189 User safety function, 3, 24 V V2-MODE, 77 Validity check, 197 Data transfer from standard program to safety program, 376 Value Convert, 548 Move, 538 Read indirectly from an F-DB, 546 SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming 644 Programming and Operating Manual, 10/2018, A5E02714440-AH

Name	Operation

Remote Wind Turbine Monitor: Turbine #:="Data_block_1".TurbineNumber:

DataLog JavaScript Test

UserFiles JavaScript Test